Skip to main content

Full text of "The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"

See other formats


9^  nsslLY 


«? 


im 


THE    PALI    TEXT    SOCIETY'S 
PALI-ENGLISH   DICTIONARY 


EDITED  BY 


T.  W.  RHYS  DAVIDS  F.B.A.  D.Sc.  Ph.D.  LL.D.  D.Litt 
and  WILLIAM  STEDE  Ph.D. 


Part  I  (A) 


PUBLISHED  BY 

THE  PALI  TEXT  SOCIETY 

LONDON 


First  published  -  -  -  1921 
Reprinted  -  -  -  -  1949 
Reprinted        .     -     -     -     1952 


THE  PALI  TEXT  SOCIETY'S 
PALI-ENGLISH  DICTIONARY 


THE    PALI    TEXT    SOCIETY'S 
PALI-ENGLISH    DICTIONARY 


EDITED    BY 


T.    W.    RHYS    DAVIDS,    F.B.A.,   D.Sc,   Ph.D.,   LL.D.,   D.Litt. 
and  WILLIAM   STEDE,  Ph.D. 


PUBLISHED  BY 

THE  PALI  TEXT  SOCIETY 

LONDON 


Printed  in  Great  Britain  by 
Billing  and  Sons  Ltd.,  Guildford  and  Esher 


URL 

PK 
09 


Pl5p 


FOREWORD. 


It  is  somewhat  hard  to  realize,  seeing  how  important  and  valuable  the  work  has 
been,  that  when  Robert  Caesar  Childers  published,  in  1872,  the  first  volume  of  his 
Pali  Dictionary,  he  only  had  at  his  command  a  few  pages  of  the  canonical  Pali  books. 
Since  then,  owing  mainly  to  the  persistent  labours  of  the  Pali  Text  Society,  practically 
the  whole  of  these  books,  amounting  to  between  ten  and  twelve  thousand  pages,  have 
been  made  available  to  scholars.  These  books  had  no  authors.  They  are  anthologies 
which  gradually  grew  up  in  the  community.  Their  composition,  as  to  the  Vinaya  and 
the  four  Nikayas  (with  the  possible  exception  of  the  supplements)  was  complete  within 
about  a  century  of  the  Buddha's  death ;  and  the  rest  belong  to  the  following  century. 
When  scholars  have  leisure  to  collect  and  study  the  data  to  be  found  in  this  pre- 
Sanskrit  literature,  it  will  necessarily  throw  as  much  light  on  the  history  of  ideas  and 
language  as  the  study  of  such  names  and  places  as  are  mentioned  in  it  (quite  inci- 
dentally) has  already  thrown  upon  the  political  divisions,  social  customs,  and  economic 
conditions  of  ancient  India. 

'Some  of  these  latter  facts  I  have  endeavoured  to  collect  in  my  'Buddhist  India'; 
ancjLpCThaps  the  most  salient  discovery  is  the  quite  unexpected  conclusion  that,  for 
about  two  centuries  (both  before  the  Buddha's  birth  and  after  his  death),  the  para- 
mount power  in  India  was  Kosala  —  a  kingdom  stretching  from  Nepal  on  the  North 
to  the  Ganges  on  the  South,  and  from  the  Ganges  on  the  West  to  the  territories 
of  the  Vajjian  confederacy  on  the  East.  In  this,  the  most  powerful  kingdom  in  India; 
there  had  naturally  arisen  a  standard  vernacular  differing  from  the  local  forms  of  speech 
just  as  standard  English  differs  from  the  local  (usually  county)  dialects.  The  Pali  of  the 
canonical  books  is  based  on  that  standard  Kosala  vernacular  as  spoken  in  the  6^^  and 
^">  centuries  B.  C.  It  cannot  be  called  the  'literary'  form  of  that  vernacular,  for  it  was 
not  written  at  all  till  long  afterwards.  That  vernacular  was  the  mother  tongue  of  the 
Buddha.  He  was  born  in  what  is  now  Nepal,  but  was  then  a  district  under  the  suzer- 
ainty of  Kosala  and  in  one  of  the  earliest  Pali  documents  he  is  represented  as  calling 
himself  a  Kosalan. 

When,  about  a  thousand  years  afterwards,  some  pandits  in  Ceylon  began  to  write 
in  Pali,  they  wrote  in  a  style  strikingly  different  from  that  of  the  old  texts.  Part  of 
that  difference  is  no  doubt  due  simply  to  a  greater  power  of  fluent  expression  unham- 
pered by  the  necessity  of  constantly  considering  that  the  words  composed  had  to  be 
learnt  by  heart.  When  the  Sinhalese  used  Pali,  they  were  so  familiar  with  the  method 
of  writing  on  palmleaves  that  the  question  of  memorizing  simply  did  not  arise.  It 
cam*  up  again  later.  But  none  of  the  works  belonging  to  this  period  were  intended 
to  be  learnt.  They  were  intended  to  be  read. 


770206 


On  the  other  hand  they  were  for  the  most  part  reproductions  of  older  material 
that  had,  till  then,  been  preserved  in  Sinhalese.  Though  the  Sinhalese  pandits  were 
writing  in  Pali,  to  them,  of  course,  a  dead  language,  they  probably  did  their  thinking 
in  their  own  mother  tongue.  Now  they  had  had  then,  for  many  generations,  so  close 
and  intimate  an  intercourse  with  their  Dravidian  neighbours  that  Dravidian  habits  of 
speech  had  crept  into  Sinhalese.  It  was  inevitable  that  some  of  the  peculiarities  of 
their  own  tongue,  and  especially  these  Dravidanisms,  should  have  influenced  their  style 
when  they  wrote  in  Pali.  It  will  be  for  future  scholars  to  ascertain  exactly  how  far 
this  influence  can  be  traced  in  the  idioms  and  in  the  order  of  the  arrangement  of  the 
matter  of  these  Ceylon  Pali  books  of  the  fifth  and  sixth  centuries  A.  D. 

There  is  no  evidence  that  the  Sinhalese  at  that  time  knew  Sanskrit.  Some  centuries 
afterwards  a  few  of  them  learnt  the  elements  of  classical  Sanskrit  and  very  proud 
they  were  of  it.  They  introduced  the  Sanskrit  forms  of  Sinhalese  words  when  writing 
'high'  Sinhalese.  And  the  authors  of  such  works  as  the  Dathavagsa,  the  Saddhammo- 
payana,  and  the  Mahabodhivaijsa,  make  use  of  Pali  words  derived  from  Sanskrit  — 
that  is,  they  turned  into  Pali  form  certain  Sanskrit  words  they  found  either  in  the 
Amara-kosa,  or  in  the  course  of  their  very  limited  reading,  and  used  them  as  Pali. 
It  would  be  very  desirable  to  have  a  list  of  such  Pali  words  thus  derived  from  Sanskrit. 
It  would  not  be  a  long  one. 

Here  we  come  once  more  to  the  question  of  memory.  From  the  iiih  cent, 
onwards  it  became  a  sort  of  fashion  to  write  manuals  in  verse,  or  in  prose  and  verse, 
on  such  subjects  as  it  was  deemed  expedient  for  novices  to  know.  Just  as  the  first 
book  written  in  Pali  in  Ceylon  was  a  chain  of  memoriter  verses  strung  together  by 
very  indifferent  Pali  verses,  so  at  the  end  we  have  these  scarcely  intelligible  memo- 
riter verses  meant  to  be  learned  by  heart  by  the  pupils. 

According  to  the  traditions  handed  down  among  the  Sinhalese,  Pali,  that  is,  the 
language  used  in  the  texts,  could  also  be  called  Magadhi.  What  exactly  did  they 
mean  by  that?  They  could  not  be  referring  to  the  Magadhi  of  the  Prakrit  grammarians, 
for  the  latter  wrote  some  centuries  afterwards.  Could  they  have  meant  the  dialect 
spoken  in  Magadha  at  the  date  when  they  used  the  phrase,  say,  the  sixth  century  A.  D.  ? 
That  could  only  be  if  they  had  any  exact  knowledge  of  the  different  vernaculars  of 
North  India  at  the  time.  For  that  there  is  no  evidence,  and  it  is  in  itself  very 
improbable.  What  they  did  mean  is  probably  simply  the  language  used  by  Asoka, 
the  king  of  Magadha.  For  their  traditions  also  .stated  that  the  texts  had  been  brought 
to  them  officially  by  Asoka's  son  Mahinda;  and  not  in  writing,  but  in  the  memory 
of  Mahinda  and  his  companions.  Now  we  know  something  of  the  language  of  Asoka. 
We  have  his  edicts  engraved  in  diff'erent  parts  of  India,  diff'ering  slightly  in  com- 
pliance with  local  varieties  of  speech.  Disregarding  these  local  differences,  what  is 
left  may  be  considered  the  language  of  head-quarters  where  these  edicts  were  cer- 
tainly drafted.  This  'Magadhi'  contains  none  of  the  peculiar  characteristics  we  associate 
with  the  Magadhi  dialect.  It  is  in  fact  a  younger  form  of  that  standard  Kosalan 
lingua  franca  mentioned  above. 

Now  it  is  very  suggestive  that  we  hear  nothing  of  how  the  king  of  Magadha 
became  also  king  of  Kosala.  Had  this  happened  quietly,  by  succession,  the  event 
would  have  scarcely  altered  the  relation  of  the  languages  of  the  two  kingdoms.  That 
of  the  older  and  larger  would  still  have  retained  its  supremacy.  So  when  the  Scottish 
dynasty  succeeded  to  the  English  throne,  the  two  languages  remained  distinct,  but 
English  became  more  and  more  the  standard. 


VII 

However  this  may  be,  it  has  become  of  essential  importance  to  have  a  Dictionary 
of  a  language  the  history  of  whose  literature  is  bound  up  with  so  many  delicate  and 
interesting  problems.  The  Pali  Text  Society,  after  long  continued  exertion  and  many 
cruel  rebuffs  and  disappointments  is  now  at  last  in  a  position  to  offer  to  scholars  the 
first  instalment  of  such  a  dictionary. 

The  merits  and  demerits  of  the  work  will  be  sufficiently  plain  even  from  the 
first  fasciculus.  But  one  or  two  remarks  are  necessary  to  make  the  position  of  my 
colleague  and  myself  clear. 

We  have  given  throughout  the  Sanskrit  roots  corresponding  to  the  Pali  roots, 
and  have  omitted  the  latter.  It  may  be  objected  that  this  is  a  strange  method  to 
use  in  a  Pali  dictionary,  especially  as  the  vernacular  on  which  PaU  is  based  had 
never  passed  through  the  stage  of  Sanskrit.  That  may  be  so;  and  it  may  not  be 
possible,  historically,  that  any  Pali  word  in  the  canon  could  have  been  actually  derived 
from  the  corresponding  Sanskrit  word.  Nevertheless  the  Sanskrit  form,  though  arisen 
quite  independently,  may  throw  light  upon  the  Pali  form ;  and  as  Pali  roots  have  not 
yet  been  adequately  studied  in  Europe,  the  plan  adopted  will  probably,  at  least  for 
the  present,  be  more  useful. 

This  work  is  essentially  preliminary.  There  is  a  large  number  of  words  of  which 
we  do  not  know  the  derivation.  There  is  a  still  larger  number  of  which  the  derivation 
does  not  give  the  meaning,  but  rather  the  reverse.  It  is  so  in  every  living  language. 
Who  could  guess,  from  the  derivation,  the  complicated  meaning  of  such  words  as 
'conscience',  'emotion',  'disposition'?  The  derivation  would  be  as  likely  to  mislead  as 
to  guide.  We  have  made  much  progress.  No  one  needs  now  to  use  the  one  English 
word  'desire'  as  a  translation  of  sixteen  distinct  Pali  words,  no  one  of  which  means 
precisely  desire.  Yet  this  was  done  in  Vol.  X  of  the  Sacred  Books  of  the  East  by 
Max  Muller  and  FausbOll  ').  The  same  argument  applies  to  as  many  concrete 
words  as  abstract  ones.  Here  again  we  claim  to  have  made  much  advance.  But  in 
either  case,  to  wait  for  perfection  would  postpone  the  much  needed  dictionary  to 
the  Greek  kalends.  It  has  therefore  been  decided  to  proceed  as  rapidly  as  possible 
with  the  completion  of  this  first  edition,  and  to  reserve  the  proceeds  of  the  sale  for 
the  eventual  issue  of  a  second  edition  which  shall  come  nearer  to  our  ideals  of  what 
a  Pali  Dictionary  should  be. 

We  have  to  thank  Mrs.  StEDE  for  valuable  help  in  copying  out  material  noted 
in  my  interleaved  copy  of  Childers,  and  in  collating  indexes  published  by  the  Society; 
Mrs.  Rhys  Davids  for  revising  certain  articles  on  the  technical  terms  of  psychology 
and  philosophy;  and  the  following  scholars  for  kindly  placing  at  our  disposal  the 
material  they  had  collected  for  the  now  abandoned  scheme  of  an  international  Pali 
Dictionary: 

Prof.  Sten  Konow.  Words  beginning  with  5  or  H.  (Published  in  J  P  T  S.  1909 
and  1907,  revised  by  Prof.  Dr.  D.  Andersen). 

Dr.  Mabel  H.  Bode.  B,  Bh  and  M. 

Prof.  Duroiselle.  K. 

Dr.  W.  H.  D.  Rouse.  C—N. 

In  this  connection  I  should  wish  to  refer  to  the  work  of  Dr.  EdMOND  Hardy. 
When  he  died  he  left  a  great  deal  of  material-;  some  of  which  has  reached  us  in 
time  to  be  made  available.  He  was  giving  his  whole  time,  and  all  his  enthusiasm  to 


1)  See  Mrs.  Rhys  Davids  in  J  R  A  S.^  1898,  p.  58. 


VlII 

the  work,  and  had  he  lived  the  dictionary  would  probably  have  been  finished  before 
the  war.  His  loss  was  really  the  beginning  of  the  end  of  the  international  undertaking. 
Anybody  familiar  with  this  sort  of  work  will  know  what  care  and  patience,  what 
scholarly  knowledge  and  judgment  are  involved  in  the  collection  of  such  material,  in 
the  sorting,  the  sifting  and  final  arrangement  of  it,  in  the  adding  of  cross  references, 
in  the  consideration  of  etymological  puzzles,  in  the  comparison  and  correction  of 
various  or  faulty  readings,  and  in  the  verification  of  references  given  by  others,  or 
found  in  the  indexes.  For  all  this  work  the  users  of  the  Dictionary  will  have  to 
thank  my  colleague.  Dr.  William  Stede.  It  may  be  interesting  to  notice  here  that 
the  total  number  of  references  to  appear  in  this  first  edition  of  the  new  dictionary  is 
estimated  to  be  between  one  hundred  and  fifty  and  one  hundred  and  sixty  thousand. 
The  Bavarian  Academy  has  awarded  to  Dr.  Stede  a  personal  grant  of  3100  marks 
for  his  work  on  this  Dictionary. 

Chipstead,  Surrey.  July,   1921.  T.  W.  RHYS  DAVIDS. 


List  of  Donors  to  the  Pali  Dictionary  Fund 
down  to  1  July,  1921. 


His  Majesty  the  late  King  of  Siam 

AnonymQus 

Mrs.  Ludwig  Mond 

Royal  Asiatic  Society   (ten  donations)     .... 
Victoria  University  of  Manchester  (four  donations) 

British  Academy  (five  donations) 

Gilbert  H.  Richardson,  Esq.  (three  donations).     . 

Lord  Chalmers,  K.C.B 

Mrs.  Plimmer 

F.  L.  Woodward,  Esq.  (two  donations)  .... 

Captain  Meysey  Thompson 

Mr.  Kojiro  Matsukata 

Professor  Charles  R.  Lanman 

Professor  James  H.  Woods 

per  Professor  C.  R.  Lanman: 

Mr.  Charles  D.  Burrage 

Mr.  Albert  W.  Ellis 

Mr.  Charles  T.  Grinnell 

Dr.  William  S.  Bigelow 

Mrs.  Isabella  S.  Gardner 

Professor  James  R.  Jewett 


£ 
500 
507 
300 
105 

63 
50 

15 

10 

10 

2 

I 

500 

21 

10 


12 
6 


d. 

O 

I  I 

O 

o 
o 
o 
o 
o 
o 
o 
o 
o 
o 
o 


5000) 
25  00) 
1000) 
100  00)      25 

5000)  12 

25  00)         6     6  1 1 
£2160    6     5 


1 1 

5 
10 

7 
13 


At  the  present  prices  of  printing  and  paper  the  whole  Dictionary 
is  estimated  to. cost  about  M.  3500.  At  least  M  1000  more  is  there- 
fore now  urgently  needed. 


A. 

List  of  the  Chiefs  Books  consulted   for  Vocabulary 

(with    Abbreviations). 

1.  PALI  BOOKS. 


la  Canonical. 


Anguttara-Nikaya   5  vols.  P  T  S.  1885 — 

1900  (A). 
Buddha- Varisa  P  T  S.   1882  (Bu). 
Cariya-Pitaka  P  T  S.  1882  (Cp.)- 
Dhammapada  P  T  S.   1914  (Dh). 
Dhamma-Sangani  P  T  S.   1885  (Dhs). 
Digha-Nikaya  3  vols.  P  T  8.  (D). 
Iti-vuttaka  P  T  S.   1890  (It.). 
Katha-Vatthu    2    vols.    P  T  S.    1894,    95 

(Kvu). 
Khuddaka-Patha  P  T  S.   1915  (Kh). 
Majjhima-Nikaya    3    vols.    P  T  S.   1887 — 

1902  (M). 
Niddesa    I    Maha°    2    vols.    P  T  S.    1916, 

17  (Nd'). 


Niddesa  II  Culla°  P  T  S.   1918  (Nd^). 
Patisambhidamagga   2  vols.  P  T  S.    1905, 

1907  (Ps). 
Peta-Vatthu  P  T  S.   1889  (Pv). 
Puggala-PaMatti  P  T  S.   1883  (Pug). 
Sarjyutta-Nikaya    5    vols.    P  T  S.    1884— 

1898  (S). 
Sutta-Nipata  P  T  S.    1913  (Sir). 
Thera-therlgatha    PTS.    1883    (Th   i)   & 

(Th  2). 
Udana  PTS.  1885  (Ud). 
Vibhanga  PTS.   1904  (Vbh). 
Vimana-Vatthu  PTS.   1886  (Vv). 
Vinaya-Pitaka    5    vols.    London    1879 — 

83  (Vin). 


lb  Post-Canonical. 


AtthasalinI,  PTS.  1897  (DhsA). 
Buddhadatta's    Manuals,     PTS.     191 5 

(Bdhd). 
Dathavaijsa,  J  P  T  S.   1884  (Davs). 
Dhammapada  Commentary,  4  vols.  PTS. 

1906 — 14  (DhA). 
Dipavagsa,  London   1879  (Dpvs). 
Jataka,  6  vols.  London   1877 — 96  (J). 
Khuddaka-Patha    Commentary,    PTS. 

19 1 5  (KhA). 
Mahavagsa,  PTS.   1908  (Mhvs). 


Maha-Bodhi-Var)sa,    PTS.    1891  (Mhbv). 
Milindapaiiha,  London   1880  (Miln). 
Netti-Pakarana,  PTS.   1902  (Nett). 
Panca-gati-dlpana,  J  P  T  S.  1884  (Pgdp). 
Peta-Vatthu    Commentary,    PTS.    1894 

(PvA). 
Puggala-Paniiatti    Commentary,    J  P  T  S. 

1914  (Pug  A). 
Saddhammopayana,  J  PTS.  1887  (Sdhp). 
Sumangala-Vilasini,    vol.    I,    PTS.    1886 

(DA  I). 


XI 


Sutta-Nipata  Commentary,  2  vols.  P  T  S. 

1916 — 17  (SnA). 
Therlgatha    Commentary,    P  T  S.    1891 

(ThA). 


Vimana-Vatthu  Commentary,  PTS.  1901 

(VvA). 
Visuddhi-Magga,    2    vols.    PTS.    1920— 

21    (Vism). 


Note.  The  system  adopted  in  quotations  of  passages  from  Pali  text  is  tliat  proposed  in  J  P  T  S.  I909i 
pp.  385 — 87,  with  this  modification  that  Peta-v.-itthu  (Pv)  is  quoted  by  canto  and  verse,  and  Culla-Niddesa  (Nd') 
by  number  of  word  in   "Explanatory   Matter". 

2.  BUDDHIST  SANSKRIT. 

Avadana-sataka,  ed.  J.  S.  Speyer  (Bibl.  Buddhica  III),  2  vols.,  St.  Petersbourg 
1906.  (Av.  1). 

Divyavadana,  ed.  Cowell  &  Neiil,  Cambridge   1886.  (Divy). 
Jataka-mala,  ed.  H.  Kern  (Haward  Or.  Ser.  I),  Boston    1891.  (Jtm). 
Lalita-vistara,  ed.  S.  Lefmann,  I.  Halle   1902.  (Lai.  V.). 
Maha-vastu,  ed.  £.  Senart,  3  vols.,  Paris  1882 — 1897. 
6iksa-samuccaya.  Ed.  C.  Bendall.  St.  Petersburg,   1902  [Siks]. 

3.  TRANSLATIONS. 

Buddh.  Manual  of  Psychological  Ethics  (trsl.  of  the  Dhamma-sangani)  by  Mrs. 
Rhys  Davids  (R.  As.  Soc.  Trsl.  Fund  XII),  London   1900.  [Dhs  trsl.). 

Compendium  of  Philosophy  (trsl.  of  the  Abhidhamm'  attha-sangaha)  by  S.  Z. 
Aung  and  Mrs.  Rhys  Davids,  PTS.  Trsl.   1910.  {Cpd.). 

Dialogues  of  the  Buddha,  trr.l.  by  T.  W.  and  C.  A.  F.  Rhys  Davids,  London  I. 
1899;  II.   1910;  III.   1921.  (Dial.). 

Expositor  (trsl.  of  the  Attha-salinI),  by  Maung  Tin,  PTS.  Trsl.   1920,  21. 

Kathavatthu  trsl.  ("Points  of  Controversy),  by  Aung  and  Mrs.  Rhys  Davids,  PTS. 
Trsl.   191 5.  [Kvu  irsl.). 

Kindred  Sayings  (Saqyutta  Nikaya  I),  by  Mrs.  Rhys  Davids,  PTS.  Trsl.  1917.  [K S.). 

Mahavagsa  trsl.  by  W.  Geiger,  PTS.  Trsl.   1912. 

Manual  of  a  Mystic  (Yogavacara),  trs.  by  F.  L.  Woodward,  PTS.  Trsl.  1916.  [Mystic). 

Neumann,  K.  E.,  Lieder  der  Monche  und  Nonnen,  Berlin  1899. 

Psalms  of  the  Brethren  (trsl.  Mrs.  Rhys  Davids),  PTS.  Trsl.   1913. 
„      ,    Sisters       (  ,         „  ,  ,     ).       ,  ,       I909- 

Questions  of  Milinda  (trsl.  T.  W.  Rhys  Davids),  S  B  E.  vols.  35,  36. 

Vinaya  Texts  (trsl.  Rhys  Davids  &  Oldenberg),    „  ,   „        ,      13,  17,  20. 

4.  GRAMMATICAL  &  OTHER  LITERATURE; 
PERIODICALS,  ETC. 

Abhidhanappadipika,  ed.  W.  Subhati,  Colombo'   1883.  (Abhp.). 
Andersen,  D.,  A  Pali  Reader,  2  pts;  Copenhagen   1901,   1907. 
Aufrecht,  Th.,  Halayudha's  Abhidhana-ratna-mala,  London   1861. 
Brugmann,   K.,   Kurze  vergleichende  Grammatik  der  indogerm.  Sprachen,  Strass- 
burg  1902. 

Childers,  R.  C,  A  Dictionary  of  the  Pali  Language,  London  1874. 


XII 

Geigef,  W.,  Pali  Literatur  und  Sprache,  Strassburg   1916.  (Geiger,  P.  Gr.). 
Grassmann,  W.,  Worterbuch  zum  Rig  Veda,  Leipzig  1873. 
Journal  of  the  American  Oriental  Society  (y  A  0  i>\). 

,        Asiatique,  Paris  {J.  As.) 

,       of  the  Pali  Text  Society  {J  P  T  S.). 

„        „     ,     Royal  Asiatic  Society,  London  {J^  R  A  S.). 
Kaccayana-ppakarana,  ed.  &  trsl.  Senart  (J.  As.   1871)  (Kacc). 
Kern,  H.,  Toevoegselen  op  't  Woordenboek  van  Childers;  2  pts  (Verhandelingen 
Kon.  Ak.  van  Wetenschappen  te  Amsterdam  N.  R.  XVI,  5),  Amsterdam  19 16.  (Toev.). 
Kuhn's  Zeitschrift  fiir  vergleichende  Sprachforschung  {K  Z.). 

Mahavyutpatti,  ed.  Mironow  (Bibl.  Buddhica  XIII)  St.  Petersbourg  1910,  i  r.  (Mvyut). 
Miifler,  Ed.,  Simplified  Grammar  of  the  Pali  Language,  London   1884. 
Trenckner,  V.,  Notes  on  the  Milindapanho,  in  J  P  T  S.   1908,   102  sq. 
Uhlenbeck,    H.,    Kurzgefasstes    Etym.   Worterbuch  d.  Altindischen  Sprache,  Am- 
sterdam  1898. 

Walde,  A.,  Lateinisches  Etymologisches  Worterbuch,  Heidelberg^  19 10. 
Zeitschrift  der  Deutschen  Morgenlandischen  Gesellschaft,  Leipzig  1847  sq.  [ZDMS.). 


B.  LIST  OF  ABBREVIATIONS. 


1.  Titles  of  Books  (the 

A  Anguttara \a 

Abhp        Abhidhanappadipika.     .     .  4 

Ap  Apadana \a 

Av.  S.      Avadana-sataka    ....  2 

Bdhd         Buddhadatta i 

Brethren:  see  Psalms 3 

Bu  Buddha-varjsa \a 

Cp  Cariya-pitaka la 

Cpd  Compendium 3 

D  Digha la 

Davs  Datha-vaqsa lb 

Dh  Dhammapada la 

Dhs  Dhammasangani  .     .     .     .  la 

Dhs  trsl.  Atthasalini 3 

Dial.  Dialogues 3 

Divy  Divyavadana 2 

Dpvs         Dipavagsa ib 

Halayudha:  see  Aufrecht    ....  4 


no.  refers   to 

I    ks 

I      Kvu 
KZ 
Lai.  V. 
M 

Mhbv 
Mhvs 
Miln 
M  Vastu 
Mvyut 


It 

J 

JAOS. 
J  As. 
J  PTS. 

JRAS. 
Jtra 
Kacc 
Kh 


Itivuttaka la 


Jataka     , 

Journal  Amer.  Or.  Soc.     , 

,         Asiatique.     .     .     , 

„        Pali  Text  Soc. 

„         Royal  Asiatic  Soc 

Jatakamala 2 

Kaccayana 4 

KhuddakapStha    .     .     .     .     la 


lb 

4 

4 

4 

4 


section  of  A). 

Kindred  Sayings . 
Kathavatthu  .  . 
Kuhn's  Zeitschrift 
Lalita  Vistara .  . 
Majjhima  .  .  . 
Mahabodhi-vagsa . 
Mahavaqsa  .  .  . 
Milinda-panha .  . 
Maha-vastu .  .  . 
Mahavyutpatti.     . 


Mystic:  see  Manual    .     .     . 

Nd'  Mahaniddesa    .     . 

Nd'^  Cullaniddesa     .     . 

Nett  Netti-pakarana.     . 

Pgdp  Paiicagati-dipana  . 

Ps  Patisambhida-magga 

Pug  Puggala-pafifiatti  . 

Pv  Petavatthu  .     .     . 

S  Sagyutta.     .     .     . 

S  B  E  Sacred  Books  of  the 

Sdhp  Saddhammopayana 

6iks  ^iksasamuccaya 

Sisters:  see  Psalms     . 

Sn  Sutta-nipata 

Th   I  Theragatha. 

Th  2  Therlgatha  . 

Toev.  Toevoegselen 


East 


3 
la 

4 

2 

la 

lb 

lb 

lb 

2 

4 

3 

la 

la 

lb 

lb 

la 

la 

la 

la 

3 

lb 

2 

3 

la 

la 

la 

4 


XllI 


Ud  Udana la 

Vbh  Vibhanga la 

Vin  Vinaya i« 

Vism  Visuddhi-magga    .     .     .     .  i6 


Vv  Vimanavatthu 

ZDMG.  Zeitschrift  der  Deutschen 
Morgenlandischen  Gesell- 
schaft 


id 


2.  General  &  grammatical  terms. 


A  in  comb"  with  a  Title- 
letter  (e.g.  DhA)  =  Com- 
mentary (on  Dh). 

abl.  ablative 

abs.  absolute(ly) 

abstr.  abstract 

ace.  accusative 

act  active 

add.  addition 

adj.  adjective 

adv.  adverb 

Ags.  Anglo-Saxon 

aor.  aorist 

appl.  applied 

art.  article 

attr.  attribute 

Av.  Avesta 

BB        Burmese  MSS 

bef.        before 

BSk.      Buddhist  Sanskrit 

C  (&  Cy)  Commentary  (when 
cited  in  explo  of  a  Text 
passage). 

caus.      causative 

cert.       certain 

coll.       collective 

combd,  comb"  combined, 
combination 

comp.  comparative,  comp- 
arison,   composition 

cons,      consonant 

corr.      correct(ed) 

correl.  correlation,  correla- 
tive 

cp.         compare 

cpd.       compound 

dat.        dative 

den.       denominative 


der. 

derived,  derivation 

imper. 

imperative 

des. 

desiderative 

impers. 

impersonal 

dial. 

dialect(ical) 

impf. 

imperfect 

diff. 

different 

Ind. 

Index 

dist. 

distinct,  disting 

uished 

ind. 
indecl. 

indicative 
indeclinable 

E. 

English 

indef. 

indefinite 

e.g. 

for  instance 

inf. 

infinitive 

end. 

enclitic 

instr. 

instrumental 

ep. 

epithet 

interr. 

interrogative 

esp. 

especially 

intrs. 

intransitive 

etym. 

etymology 

iter. 

iterative 

exc. 

except 

excl. 

exclamation, 

exclu- 

Lat. 

Latin 

sive 

I.e. 

loco  citato 

expl. 

explanation. 

ex- 

lit. 

literal(ly),  literary 

plained 

Lit. 
loc. 

Lithuanian 
locative 

f. 

feminine 

fig- 

figurative(ly) 

m. 

masculine 

foil. 

following 

med. 

medium  (middle) 

form. 

formation 

fr. 

from 

N. 

Name 

freq. 

frequently,  Frequen- 

n. 

noun,  note 

tative 

nom. 

nominative 

fut. 

future 

Np. 
Npl. 

Name  of  person 
„        „    place 

Gall, 
een. 

Gallic 
genitive 

nt. 
num. 

neuter 
numeral 

ger.  gerund 

Ger.  German 

Goth.  Gothic 

Gr.  Greek 

gram,  grammar,  °atical 

grd.  gerundive 

ibid.  at  the  same  peissage 

id.  the  same 

id.  p.  identical  passage 

i.  e.  that  is 

i.  g.  in  general 


Obulg.  Old-bulgarian 

Ohg.  Old-high-german 
Oicel.         „  -icelandic 
Oir.  ,  -irish 

onom.  onomatopoetic 

opp.  opposed,  opposite 

ord.  ordinal,  ordinary 

orig.  original(ly) 


P. 

part. 


Pali 
particle 


XIV 


pass 

passive 

pt. 

part 

S.  V. 

Sub  voce (under  the 

perf. 

perfect 

PTS. 

Pali  Text  Society 

word  mentioned) 

pers. 

personal 

syn. 

synonym(ous) 

pi. 

plural 

q.v. 

quod  vide 

pop. 

popular 

(which  see) 

T. 

Text 

poss. 

possessive 

trans. 

transitive 

pot. 

potential 

ref. 

reference,  referred 

trsl. 

translated,  transla- 

pp. 

past  participle 

refl. 

reflexive 

tion 

ppr. 

present     , 

rel. 

relation,  relative 

1. 1. 

technical  term 

prec. 

preceding 

t.  t.  g. 

in 

pred. 

predicative 

sep. 

separate(ly) 

grammar 

pref. 

prefix 

sg- 

singular 

prep. 

preposition 

Sk. 

Sanskrit 

V. 

verse 

pres. 

present 

sq. 

and  following 

var. 

variant,  various 

pret. 

preterite 

SS. 

Singhalese  MSS. 

var.  lect.  various  reading 

Prk. 

Prakrit 

ster. 

stereotype 

voc. 

vocative 

prob. 

probably 

sufif. 

suflfix 

pron. 

pronoun 

sup. 

superlative 

Wtb. 

Worterbuch 

3.  Typographical. 

*(s)quel  indicates  a  (reconstructed  or  conjectured)  Indogermanic  root. 

*Sk   means,   that   the   Sanskrit    word    is   constructed    after   the    Pali    word;    or  as  Sk. 

form  is  only  found  in  lexicographical  lists. 
k:   the   cap    over   a  vowel  indicates  that  the  a  is  the  result  of  a  syncope  a  +  a  (e.g. 

khuddanukhudda),    whereas   a   represents  the  proper  a,  either  pure  or  contracted 

with  a  preceding  a  (khinasava  =  khina  +  asava). 
°  represents   the   head-word  either  as  first  (° — )  or  second  ( — °)  part  of  a  compound; 

sometimes  also  an  easily  supplemented  part  of  a  word. 
>    indicates    an    etymological    relation    or    line    of  development    between   the   words 

mentioned. 
™  and  ss;  means  "at  similar"  or  "at  identical,  parallel  passages". 

The  meaning  of  all  other  abbreviations  may  easily  be  inferred  from  the  context. 


Akkula 


A-'  the  prep,  a  shorteoed  before  double  cons.,  as  akko- 
satl  (a  +  krus),  akkhaU  (a  +  khya),  abbahati  (a  +  bfh). 
—  Best  to  be  classed  here  is  the  a-  we  call  expletive.  It 
represents  a  reduction  of  a-  (mostly  before  liquids  and 
nasals  and  with  single  consonant  instead  of  double).  Thus 
anantaka  (for  a-nantaka  =  nantaka)  Vv.8o^;  amajjapa 
(for  a-majjapa  =  majjapa)  J  vi.328;  amapaya  (for  a- 
mapaya  ^  mapaya)  J  vi.518;  apassato  (=  passantassa) 
J  VL552. 

A-'  (an-  before  vowels)  [Vedic  a-,  an-;  Idg.  'n,  gradation 
form  to  'ne  (see  na^);  Gr.  i,  «i>-;  Lat.  *en-,  in-;  Goth., 
Ohg.  &  Ags.  un-;  Oir.  an-,  in-]  neg.  part,  prefixed  to  (i) 
nouns  and  adjectives;  (2)  verbal  forms,  used  like  (1), 
whether  part.^  g"'-i  i'''^-  or  '"/■;  (3)  finite  verbal  forms. 
In  comp°.  with  words  having  originally  two  initial  cons, 
the  latter  reappear  in  their  assimilated  form  (e.  g.  appatic- 
chavin).  In  meaning  it  equals  na-,  nir-  and  vl-.  Often 
we  find  it  opp.  to  sa-.  Verbal  negatives  which  occur  in 
specific  verb,  function  will  be  enumd.  separately,  while 
examples  of  neg.  form,  of  (l)  &  (2)  are  given  under  their 
positive  form  unless  the  neg.  involves  a  distinctly  new 
concept,  or  if  its  form  is  likely  to  lead  to  confusion  or 
misunderstanding.  —  Concerning  the  combining  &  contrast- 
ing (orig.  neg.)  -a-  (a)  in  redupl.  formations  like  bhav- 
S-bbava  see  a^. 

A-'  [Vedic  a-;  Idg.  *e  (loc.  of  pron.  stem,  cp.  ayaq ; 
orig.  a  deictic  adv.  with  specific  reference  to  the  past,  cp. 
Sk  sma);  Gr.  <-;  also  in  Gr.  ixu,  Lat.  equidem,  enim] 
the  augment  (sign  of  action  in  the  past),  prefixed  to  the 
root  in  pret.^  aor.  &  cond.  tenses;  often  omitted  in  ordi- 
nary prose.  See  forms  under  each  verb;  cp.  also  ajja. 
Identical  with  this  a-  is  the  a-  which  functions  as  base 
of  some  pron.  forms  like  ato,  attha,  asu  etc.  (q.  v.). 

A-*  the  sound  a  (a-kara)  J  vi,328,  552;  VvA  279, 
307,  3»'- 

Aljsa'  [Vedic  aqsa;  cp.  Gr.  iS^c$,  Lat.  umerus,  Goth  ams, 
Arm.  us]  (a)  the  shoulder  AV  II. no;  Sn  609.  aqse  ka- 
roti  to  put  on  the  shoulder,  to  shoulder  J  1.9.  (b.)  a  part 
(lit.  side)  (cp.  °asa  in  kot{h3sa  and  expln  of  ansa  as 
kot^Ssa  at  DA  1.312,  also  v.  1.  mett3sa  for  mettaijsa 
at  It  22).  —  atit'ai]se  in  former  times,  formerly  D  11.224; 
Th  2,  314.  mettagsa  sharing  friendship  (with)  A  iv.151  = 
It  22  =  J  IV.71  (in  which  connection  Miln  402  reads 
ahii)sa).  —  Disjunctive  ekena  aijsena . . .  ekena  ai)sena 
on  the  one  hand  (side)  ...  on  the  other,  parlly  .  . .  partly 
A  1.6 1.  From  this:  ekai]sa  (adj.)  on  the  one  hand  (only), 
i.  e.  incomplete  (opp.  ubhayaijsa)  or  (as  not  admitting 
of  a  counterpart)  definite,  certain,  without  doubt  (opp. 
dyidba):  see  ekai]sa.  —  paccansena  according  to  each 
one's  share  A  111.38.  putaijsena  with  a  knapsack  for 
provisions  D  1.117;  A  It  183;  cp.  DA  1.288,  with  v.  1. 
pufosena  at  both  passages. 

-kQta  "shoulder  prominence",  the  shoulder  Vin  111.127; 
DhA  111.214;  IV.136;  VvA  121.  —  vattaka  a  shoulder 
strap  (mostly  comb<l  with  kayabandhana;  vv.  II.  °vaddhaka, 
°bandhaka)  Vin  1.204  (T.  ''bandhaka);  11.114  (ddh);  iv.170 
(ddh);  Vv  33W  (T.  "bandhana,  C.  v.  1.  "valtaka);  DhA 
111.452- 

AQSa^  [see  next]  point,  comer,  edge;  freg.  in  comb" 
wiih  numerals,  e.  g.  catur°  four-cornered,  chaj",  atth°, 
8olas°  etc.  (q.  V.)  all  at  Dhs  617  (cp.  DhsA  317).  In 
connection  with  a  Vimana:  ayat°  with  wide  or  protruding 
capitals  (of  its  pillars)  Vv  84";  as  part  of  a  carriage- 
pole  Vv  642  (=  kubbara-phale  patitthita  hetthima-ai)s5 
VvA  26s). 

Aqsl  (f.)  [cp.  Vedic  asri,  a^ra,  a^ani ;  Gr.  'itifoi;  pointed, 
^pi(,  also  Vifif  sharp:  Lat.  acer  sharp.  Further  connections 
in  Walde  Lat.  Wtb.  under  acer]  a  comer,  edge  (=  atjsa') 
Vv  78'^  (=  aQsa-bbaga  VvA  303). 


Al)8U  [cp.  Sk.  ansu  (Halayudha)  a  ray  of  light]  a  thread 
Vin  111.224.     -malin,  sun  Sasv  i. 

Akata  (adj.)  [a  -f-  kata]  not  made,  not  artificial,  natural ; 
"yusa  natural  juice  Via  1.206. 

Akamplyatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  akampiya,  grd.  of  a  -|-  kampati] 
the   conditio^   of  not  being  shaken,  stableness  Miln  354. 

Akalu  (cp.  agalu)  an  ointment  J  iv.440  (akalun  candanan 
ca,  v.  1.  BB  aggalun;  C.  expl»  as  kalSkalun  ca  ratta- 
candanan  ca,  thus  implying  a  blacking  or  dark  oint- 
ment); VI. 144  (°candana-vilitta ;  v.  1.  BB  aggalu");  Miln 
338  (°tagara-tilisaka-lohita-candana). 

Akaca  (^dj.)  [a  -f-  kaca]  pure,  flawless,  clear  D  11.244;  Sn 
476;  J  V.203. 

Akacln  (adj.)  =  akaca  Vv  60'.  Kern  (Toevoegselen  s.  v.) 
proposes  reading  akkacin  (=  Sk.  arka-arcin  shining  as 
the  sun),  but  VvA  253  expls  by  niddosa,  and  there  is 
no  V.  1.  to  warrant  a  misreading. 

Akasiya  (adj.  -n.)  [a  -f-  kisikaP]  "not  from  the  kasf-coun- 
lry"(?):  official  name  of  ccrlain  tax-gatherers  in  the  king's 
service  J  vi.212  (akasiya-sankbata  raja-piu'isa  C). 

AklCCakara  (adj.)  [a  -f-  kicca  +  kara]  I.  not  doing  one's 
duty,  doing  what  ought  not  to  be  done  A  11.67  >  Dh  292 ; 
Miln  66:  DA  I.296.  —  2.  ineffective  (of  medicine)  Miln  151. 

Aklriya  (adj.)  [a  -f-  kiriya]  not  practical,  unwise,  foolish 
J  111.530  (°rupa  =  akattabba-rDpa  C);  Miln  250. 

AkilaSU  (adj.)  [a  4-  kilasu]  not  lazy,  diligent,  active,  untiring 

5  1.47;  V.162;  J  1.109;  Miln  382. 

Akissava  at  S  1.149  is  probably  faulty  reading  for  akincana. 

Akutobhaya  (adj.)  see  ku°. 

Akuppa  (adj.)  [a  -f-  kuppa,  grd.  of  kup,  cp.  BSk.  akopya 
M  Vastu  111.200]  not  to  be  shaken,  immovable;  sure,  stead- 
fast, safe  Vin  Ml  (akuppa  me  ceto-virautti)  =  S  11.239; 
Vin  11.69;  IV.214;  D  III. 273;  M  1.205,  298;  S  11.171; 
A  111.119,  198;  Miln  361. 

Akuppata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  last]  "state  of  not  being  shaken", 
surety,  safely;  Ep.  of  Nibbana  Th   i,  364. 

Akka  [cp.  Sk.  arka]  N.  of  a  plant:  Calotropis  Gigantea, 
swallow-wort  M  1.429  ("assa  jiya  bowstrings  made  from 
that    plant). 

-nala   a   kind  of  dress  material  Vin  1.306  (vv.  II.  agga" 

6  akkha").  -va(a  a  kind  of  gate  to  a  plantation,  a  movable 
fence  made  of  the  akka  plant  Vin  11.164  (<^P-  akkha-vata). 

Akkanta  [pp.  of  akkamati]  stepped  upon,  mounted  on  A 
1.8;  J  1.7 1 ;  Miln  152;  DhA  1.200. 

Akkandatl  [a  -|-  kandati,  krandj  to  lament,  wail,  cry 
S  IV. 206. 

Akkamana  (nt.)  [cp.  BSk.  akrama^ia  Itm  31W]  going  near, 
approaching,  stepping  upon,  walking  to  J  1.62. 

Akkamati  [a  -|-  kamati,  kram]  to  tread  upon,  to  approach, 
attack  J  1.7,  279;  ThA  9;  —  to  rise  Vin  ill.  38.  —  ger. 
akkamma  Cp.  111.71.  —  pp.  akkanta  (q.  v.). 

Akkuttha  (adj.  n.)  [pp.  of  akkosati]  I.  (adj.)  being  reviled, 
scolded ,  railed  at  Sn  366  (=:  dasahi  akkosavatthuhi 
abhisalto  SnA  364);  J  VI.187.  —  2.  (nt.)  reviling,  scold- 
ing, swearing  at;  in  comb"  akku^fba-vandita  Sn  702 
(=  akkosa-vandana  SnA  492)  Th  2,  388  (expl"  ThA 
256  as  above). 

Akkula  (adj.)  \=  akula]  confused,  perplexed,  agitated, 
frightened  Ud  5  (akkulopakkula  and  akkulapakkulika). 
See  akula. 

1—2 


Akkosa 


Akkhana 


Akkosa  [a  +  kniS  =  krunc,  see  kmica  &  kofica' ;  to  sound 
loot  kr,  see  note  on  gala]  shouting  at,  abuse,  insult,  re- 
proach, reviling  Sn  623;  Miln  8(-f-  paribhasa);  SnA  492; 
ThA  256;  PvA  243;  UhA  11.61. 

-vatthu  always  as  dasa  a°-vatthnni  10  bases  of  abuse, 
10  expressions  of  cursing  J  1.191;  SnA  364,  467;  DhA 
i.2iz;  1V.2. 

AkkOSaka  (adj.)  [from  l.isl]  one  who  abuses,  scolds  or  re- 
viles, -f  paribhasaka  A  11.58;  111.252;  iv.156;  v. 317; 
PvA  251. 

AkkOSatl  [to  krUS  see  akkosa]  to  scold,  swear  at,  abuse, 
revile  J  1.191;  11.416;  111.27;  l^hA  1211;  11.44.  Oflen 
eomb'l  with  paribhasati,  e.g.  Vin  11.296;  DhA  IV.2; 
PvA  10.  —  aor.  akkocchi  Dh  3 ;  J  111.212  (=  akkosi 
nh.\  1.43.  Der.  wrongly  fr.  krudh  by  Kacc.  VI. 4: 7; 
cp.  Franke,  Einh.  Pali-gramm.  37,  and  Geiger  P.  Gr.  § 
164).  -pp.  akkuttha  (q.  v.). 

Akkha'  [Vedic  aksa;  Av.  asa;  Gr.  Him  a/-'*?*  chariot 
with  o/ie  axle);  Lat.  axis;  Ohg.  etc.  ahsa,  E.  axle,  to 
root  of  Lat.  ago,  Sk.  aj]  the  axle  of  a  wheel  D  11.96; 
S  V.6;  A  1.112;  J  1.109,  '92;  V.155  (akkhassa  phala- 
kar)  yatha;  C:  suvannaphalakarj  viya,  i.e.  shiny,  like 
the  polished  surface  of  an  axle);  Miln  27  (+ isa  +  cak- 
ka),  277  (atibbarena  sakatassa  akkho  bhijjati:  the  axle 
of  the  cart  breaks  when  the  load  is  too  heavy);  PvA  277. 
-akkhan  abbhanjati  to  lubricate  the  axle  S  11.177;  M''" 

367- 

-chinna  one  whose  axle  is  broken;  with  broken  axle 
S  1.57;  Miln  67.  -bhagga  with  a  broken  axle  J  v.433. 
-bhanjana  the  breaking  of  the  axle  DhA  1.375  ;  PvA  277. 

Akkha^  [Vedic  aksa,  prob.  to  aksi  &  Lat.  ocuUis,  "that 
which  has  eyes"  i.  e.  a  die;  cp.  also  Lat.  alea  game  at 
dice  (fi-.*  asclea?)]  a  die  D  1.6  (but  expl<l  at  DA  1.86  as 
ball-game:  gulakila);  S  1.149  =  A  v.171  :=  Sn  659  (ap- 
pamatto  ayai]  kali  yo  akkhesu  dhanaparajayo);  J 
1.379  (kut°  a  false  player,  sharper,  cheat)  anakkha  one 
who  is  not  a  gambler  J  v. 1 16  (C. :  ajutakara).  Cp.  also 
accha'. 

-dassa  (cp.  Sk.  aksadarsaka)  one  who  looks  at  (i.  e. 
examines)  the  dice,  an  umpire,  a  judge  Vin  111.47;  Miln 
114,  327,  343  (dhamma-nagare).  -dhutta  one  who  has 
the  vice  of  gambling  D  11.348;  111.183;  M  111.170;  Sn 
106  (+  itthidhutta  &  suriidhulta).  -vata  fence  round  an 
arena   for  wrestling  J  IV.81.  (?  read  akka-). 

Akkha^  (^d].)  ( — °)  [to  akkhi]  havhig  eyes,  with  eyes  PvA 
39  (Bli  rattakkha  with  eyes  red  from  weeping,  glosson 
assumukha).    Prob.   akkhana   is  connected  wiih  akkha. 

Akkhaka  [akkha'  +  ka]  the  collar-bone  Vin  IV.213  (adhak- 
khakag);  Y.216. 

Akkhana  [a  -\-  khana,  BSk.  aksana  AvS  1.291  =  332]  wrong 
time,  bad  luck,  misadventure,  misfortune.  There  are  9 
enuind  at  I)  111.263;  the  usual  set  consists  of  8;  thus  D 
111.287;  VvA  193;  Sdhp  4  sq.  See  also  khana. 

-vedhin  (adj.  n.)  a  skilled  archer,  one  who  shoots  on 
the  moment,  i.  e.  without  losing  time,  expl<l  as  one  who 
shoots  without  missing  (the  target)  or  as  quickly  as  light- 
ning (akkhana  =  vijju).  In  var.  combns. ;  mostly  as 
durepatin  a.  A  1.284  (+  mahato  kayassa  padaleta); 
11.170  sq.  (id.),  202;  IV.423,  425;  J  11.91  (explJ  as  either 
"aviradhita  -vedhl"  or  "akkhanarj  vuccati  vijju":  one 
who  takes  and  shoots  his  arrows  as  fast  as  lightuing), 
111.322;  IV. 494  (C.  expl"s  aviraddha-vedhin  vijju-alokena 
vijjhana  -samattha  p.  497).  In  othei-  comb"  at  J  1.58 
(akkhanavedhin  +  valavedhin);  v.  129  (the  4  kinds  of 
archers:  a.,  valavedhin,  saddavedhin  &  3aravedhin). 

In  BSk.  we  find  aksunnavedha  (a  Sanskrilised  Pali  form, 
cp.  Mathura  ksuna  =  Sk.  ksana)  at  Divy  58,  100,  442 
(always   with  darevedha),  where  MSS.  however  read  ak- 


suna°;    also    at    Lai.    Vist.    178.    See    Divy    Index,  where 
trsl"    is   given    as    "an    act    of   throwing    the   spear  so  as 
to    graze    the    mark"    (Schiefner  gives   "Streifschuss").  — 
A^o/e.    The    explanations    are    not    satisfactory.  We  should 
expect  either  an  etym.  bearing  on  the  meaning  "hitting 
the  centre  of  the  target"   (i.  e.  its  "eye")  (cp.  E.  bull's 
eye),  in  which  case  a  direct  relation  to  akkha  =  akkhi 
eye  would  not  seem  improbable  (cp.  formation  ikkhana) 
or    an    etym.   like    "hitting    without    mishap",  in  which 
case  the  expieision  would  be  derived  directly   from  ak- 
khana   (see    prec.)    with    the    omission  of  the  neg.  an-; 
akkhana  in  the  meaning  of  "lightning"  (J   11.91   C.)  is 
not  supported  by  literary  evidence. 

Akkhata  (adj.)  [pp.  of  a  +  kfan,  cp.  parikkhatai]  unhurt, 
without  fault  Mhvs  19,  56  (C.  niddosa).  —  ace.  akkha- 
tar)  (adv.)  in  safety,  unhurt.  Only  in  one  phrase  Vv  84'- 
(paccagamug  Pataliputtar)  akkhatarj)  &  Pv  iv.ii'  (nes- 
sami  tar)  Pataliputtag  akkhatai));  see  VvA  351  & 
PvA  272. 

Akkhaya  (adj.)  [a  -|-  khaya,  k§l]  not  decaying,  in  akkhaya- 
patibhana,  of  unfailing  skill  in  exposition  Miln  3,  21. 

Akkhara  (adj.)  [Vedic  aksara]  constant,  durable,  lasting  D 
111.86.  As  tt.  for  one  of  4  branches  of  Vedic  learning 
(D  1.88)  it  is  Phonetics  which  probably  inculded  Gram- 
mar, and  is  expld  by  sikkha  (DA  1.247  =  SnA  477)  — 
pi.  nt.  akkharani  sounds,  tones,  words,  citt'akkhara  of 
a  discourse  (suttanta)  having  variety  &  beauty  of  words 
or  sounds  (opposed  to  beauty  of  thought)  A  1.72  =  111.107 
=  S  11.267.  Akkharani  are  the  sauce,  flavour  (vyanjana) 
of  poetry  S  1.38.  To  know  the  context  of  the  a°  the 
words  of  the  texts,  is  characteristic  of  an  Arahant  Dh 
352  (C.  is  ambiguous  DhA  iv.70).  Later:  akkharat)  a 
syllable  or  sound  PvA  280  (called  sadda  in  next  line); 
akkharani  an  inscription  J  11.90;  IV.7  (likhitani  writ- 
ten), 489;  vi,390,  407.  In  Grammar:  a  letter  Kacc.  J. 
-cintaka  a  grammarian  or  versifier  KhA  17;  SnA  16, 
23,  321.  cp.  466;  PvA  120.  -pabheda  in  phrase  sakkha- 
rappabheda  phonology  &  etymology  D  1.88  (akkha- 
rappabhedo  ti  sikkha  ca  niruiti  ca  SnA  447  =  DA  i.247) 
=:  A  111.223  =  Sn  p.  105.  -pinda  "word-ball",  i.e.  se- 
quence of  words  or  sounds  DhA  iv.70  (=  akkharSnan 
sannipato  Uh  352). 

AkkharikS  (f.)  a  game  (recognising  syllables  written  in  the 

air  or  on  one's  back).  D  1.7;  Vin  11.10;  111.180.  So  expld  at 
DA  1.86.  It  may  be  translated  "letter  game";  but  all 
Indian  letters  of  that  date  were  syllables. 

Akkhata  (adj.)  [pp.  of  akkhSti]  announced,  proclaimed, 
j  told,  shown  A  1. 34  (dur");  11195;  iv.285,  322;  v.265, 
1        283;  Sn   172,  276,  595,  718. 

I    Akkhatar  one  who  relates,  a  speaker,  preacher  story-teller 
I        S  l.ll,   191;   111.66;   Sn   167. 

j  Akkhati  [a  +  khya,  l<ig.  *seq";  cp.  Sk.  akhyati,  Lat. 
inquam,  Gr.  hvsTU,  Goth,  saihvan,  Ger.  sehen  etc.  See 
also  akkhi  &  cakkhu]  to  declare,  announce,  tell  Sn  87, 
172;  imper.  akkbahi  Sn  988,  1085;  aor.  akkhasi  Sn 
251,  504,  1131  (=:  acikkhi  etc.  Nd^  465);  fut.  akkhissati 
Pv  IV.  1^1:  cond.  akkhissar)  Sn  997;  J  vi.523.  —  Pass, 
akkbayati  to  be  proclaimed,  in  phrase  aggar]  a.  to  be 
deemed  chief  or  superior,  to  be  first,  to  excel  Miln  118, 
182  (al.so  in  BSk.  agram  akhyayate  M  Vastu  111.390);  ger. 
akkheyya  to  be  pronounced  S  1.1 1  ;  It  53.  —  pp.  akkhata 
(q.  v.).  —  Intensive  or  Frequentative  is  acikkbati. 

Akkhana  (nt.)  [Sk.  akhyana]  telling  stories,  recitation ;  tale, 
j        legend  D  1.6  (=  DA  1.84:  Bharata-Ramayanadi);  111.183  ; 

M  1.503;  III. 167;  Sdhp.  237.  —  preaching,  teaching  Nd' 
I        91   (dhamm°).  The  5il>  Veda  J  v. 450.  (vedam  akkhana- 

pancatnan;  C:  Itihasapancamar)  vedacatukkar)).  —  The 

spelling  akhyana  also  occurs  (q.  v.). 


Akkhayika 


Agariya 


Akkhayika  (adj.)  relating,  narra'.ing  J  III. 535  ;  lokakkhayika 
katha  talk  about  oature-lore  I)  1.8;  Miln  316. 


Akkhayin  (adj.)  telling,  relating,  announcing  S  11.35; 
J   III. 105. 


tii.y; 


Akkhi  (nt.)  [to  *okS,  an  enlarged  form  of  *0<J",  cp.  Sk. 
Iksate,  ksana,  pralika,  anika;  Gr.  otrirt,  i!r\i  (Ki/xAibi|'), 
h^sxX^Lic,,  wfda-uToy;  Lat.  ociilus,  Ags.  eowan  (=  E  eye  & 
wind-ow);  Goth.  augo.  See  also  cakkhu  &  cp.  akklia^  & 
ikkhanika]  the  eye.  M  1.383  (ubbhatehi  akkhklhi);  Sn 
197,  608;  J  1.223,  279;  V.77;  VI. 336;  I'v  ii.g-"  (akkhini 
paggharanti:  shed  tears,  cp.  rv.\  123);  Vv.\  65  Ciai 
bhamanti,  my  eyes  swim)  cp.  akkhini  me  dhiiniaynnti 
DhA  1.475;  I^liA  11.26;  III.  196  ('ini  ummiletva  opening 
the  eyes);  Sdhp  1O3,  380.  —  In  comb"  with  sa-  as 
sacchi  &  sakkbi  (q.  v.).  As  adj.  ( — ")  akkha-^  (q-v.)- 
-anjana  eye  ointment,  coUyrium  UhA  111.354.  -kUpa  the 
socket  of  the  eye  J  iv.407.  -ganda  eye-protuberance,  i.  e. 
eye-brow  (?)  J  vi.504  (for  panuikha  T.).  -gutha  secretion 
from  the  eye  Pv.\  198.  -guthaka  id.  Sn  197  (=  dvihi 
akkhicchiddehi  apanila-ttaca-mar^sasadiso  a^-guthako  SnA 
248).  -chidda  the  eye-hole  SnA  248.  -dala  the  eye-lid 
DA  1. 194;  ThA  259;  DhsA  378.  -pata  "fall  of  the  eye"', 
i.  e.  a  look,  in  mand°  of  soft  looks  (adj.)  PvA  57.  -pura 
an  eye-full,  in  akkhipuraij  assuq  (assu?)  an  eye  full  of 
tears  J.  vi.191.  -mala  dirt  from  the  eye  Pv  iii  5'  (=: 
"gutha  C.)i  -roga  eye  disease  DhA  1.9. 

Akkhika'  ( — °)  (adj.)  having  eyes,  with  eyes  Th  1.960 
(anjan"  with  eyes  anointed);  DhA  iv.98  (addh°  with 
half  an  eye,  i.e.  stealthily);  Sdhp  286  (tamb°  red-eyed), 
-an"  having  no  eyes  DhA  l.li. 

Akkhika-  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  aksa]  the  mesh  of  a  net  J  1.208. 
-baraka  one  who  takes  up  a  mesh  (?)  M  1.383  (corresp. 
with  andabaraka). 

Akkhitta'  see  khitta. 

Akkhitta-  (adj.)  [BSk  aksipta  Divy  363,  pp.  ofa-fk§ip] 
hit,  struck,  thrown  J  111. 255  (=  akaddhita  C.). 

Akkhin  (adj.)  =  akkhika  J  111.190  (mand°  softeycd);  Vv 
32'  (tamb°  red-eyed);  DhA  l.ll. 

Akkhobbha  (adj.)  [a  +  ksubh,  see  khobha]  not  to  be 
shaken,  imperturbable  Miln   21. 

Akkhobhana  (adj)  =  akkhobbha  J  v.322  (=  khobhetun 
na  sakkha  C.). 

AkkhObinl  (f.)  [:=  akkhobhinl]  one  of  the  highest  numerals 
(I   followed  by  42  ciphers,  Childers)  J   v.319;  vi.395. 

Akhatl(}aphulla  see  khanda. 

Akhata  (adj.)  not  dug:  see  khata. 

Akhetta  barren-soil :  see  khetta.  —  In  cpd.  °nnu  the  neg. 
belongs  to  the  whole :  not  knowing  a  good  field  (for 
alms)  J  IV.371. 

Agati  see  gati.  -""gamana  practising  a  wrong  course  of 
life,  evil  practice,  wrong  doing  D  ill. 228  (4:  chanda^ 
dosa°  moha°  bhaya");  A  11.18  sq.,  J  iv.402;  v.98,  510; 
PvA   161. 

Agada  [Vedic  agada;  a  -|-  gada]  medicine,  drug,  counter- 
poison  J  180  ("harltaka);  Miln  121,  302,  319,  334; 
DA  1.67;  DhA  i.2i5;'PvA   198  (=  osadhag). 

Agaru  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  aguru,  a  -f-  garu]  (a)  not  heavy,  not 
troublesome,  only  in  phrase:  sace  te  agaru  "if  it  does 
not  inconvenience  you,  if  you  doini  mind"  (cp.  BSk.  yadi 
te  aguru.  Av.  S  1.94,  229;  11.90)  Vin.  1.25;  IV.17,  D 
1.51;  DhA  J.39.  —  (b)  disrespectful,  irreverent  (against  = 
gen.)  D  1.89;  Sn  p.   51. 


AgalU  [cp.  Sk.  aguru,  which  is  believed  to  appear  in  Hebr. 
ahalim  (aloe),  also  in  Gr.  i\6<i  &  a>  iAAojjov]  fragrant 
aloe  wood,  Agallochum  Vv  53'  (aggalu  =  VvA  237  aga- 
lugandha);  Vv.\  158  (-4- candana).  Cp.  also  Av.  §1.24, 
and  akalu. 

Agara  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  agaia,  probably  with  the  a-  of  com- 
munion; Gr.  iyii'pu  to  collect,  iyofi  market.  Cp.  in 
meaning  &  etyni.  gaha'].  —  I.  house  or  hut,  usually  im- 
plying the  comforts  of  living  at  home  as  opp.  to  anagara 
homelessness  or  the  state  of  a  homeless  wanderer  (men- 
dicant). See  anagariya.  —  Thus  freq.  in  two  phrases 
contrasting  the  state  of  a  householder  (or  layman,  cp. 
gihin).  with  th.it  of  a  religious  wanderer  (pabbajita), 
viz.  (a.)  kesamassurj  oharetva  kasayani  vatthani  ac- 
chadetva  agarasma  anagariyai]  pabbajati  "to  shave  off 
hair  &  beard,  put  on  the  yellow  robes,  and  wander  forth 
out  of  the  home  into  the  homeless  state"  D  1,60  etc.; 
cp,  Nd-  172".  See  also  S  1.185  (agarasma  anagariyar] 
nikkhanta);  M  11.55  (agarar)  ajjbavasata) ;  Sn  274,  805 
("n  avasati),  and  with  pabbajita  D  1.89,  115,  202,  230; 
I'v  11.13I'.  —  (b.)  of  a  "laja  cakkavattin"  compared  with 
a  "sambuddha":  sace  agararj  avasati  vijeyya  pathavirj 
imar)  adandena  asatthena  .  .  .  sace  ca  so  pabbajati 
agara  anagariyai)  vivatacchado  sambuddho  araha  bha- 
vissati  "he  will  become  the  greatest  king  when  he  stays 
at  home,  but  the  greatest  saint  when  he  takes  up  the 
homeless  life",  the  prophesy  made  for  the  infant  Gotama 
D  11.16;  Sn  1002,  1003.  —  Further  passages  for  agara 
e.g.  Vin  1. 15;  D  1. 102  (BB.  has  v.  1.  agyagara,  but 
DA  i.270  expl.  as  danagara);  A  1.156,  281;  11.52  sq.; 
Dh  14,  140;  J  1. 51,  56;  111.392;  Dpvs.  1.36.  —  2.  ana- 
gara (adj.)  houseless,  homeless ;  a  mendicant  (opp.  gahattha) 
Sn  628  =r  Dh  404;  Sn  639,  640  (4- paribbaje);  Pv  11.2' 
(=  anavasa  PvA  80).  —  (nt.)  the  homeless  state  (=  ana- 
gariya) Sn  376.  See  also  agga'-.  —  3.  "agara:  Owing 
to  freq.  occurrence  of  agara  at  the  end  of  cpds.  of 
which  the  first  word  ends  in  a,  we  have  a  dozen  quite 
familiar  words  ending  apparently  in  agara.  This  form 
has  been  considered  therefore  as  a  proper  doublet  of 
agara.  This  however  is  wrong.  The  long  a  is  simply  a 
contraction  of  the  short  a  at  the  end  of  the  first  part 
of  the  cpd.  with  the  short  a  at  the  beginning  of  agara. 
Of  the  cpds.  the  most  common  are:  — agantuk"  recep- 
tion hall  for  strangers  or  guests  S  iv.219;  v. 21.  — itth° 
ladys  bower  S  1.58,  89.  —  kut"  a  house  with  a  peaked 
roof,  or  with  gables  S  11.103.  263;  III. 156;  1V.186;  v.43 ; 
A  1230;  iii.io,  364;  IV.231  ;  V.21.  -kotth"  storehouse, 
granary  D  1. 1 34  (cp.  DA  1.295);  ^  1.89.  -tin"  a  house 
covered  with  grass  S  iv.185;  A  l.ioi.  -bhus°  threshing 
shed,  barn  A  1.241.  -santh"  a  council  hall  D  1.91 ;  11. 147; 
S  IV. 182;  V.453;  A  11.207;  1V.I79  sq.  -sunn°  an  unin- 
habited shed;  solitude  S  v. 89,  157,  310  sq.,  329  sq.; 
A  1.241  (v.  I.  for  bhusagara);  111.353;  iv.139,  392,  437; 
V.88,  109,  323  sq. 

A{^aka  (nt.)  [fr.  agara]  a  small  house,  a  cottage  M  1.450; 
j  V1.8I. 

Agarika  (adj.)  i.  having  a  house,  in  eka°,  dva"  etc.  D 
1. 166  =  A  1  295  =  11.206.  —  2.  a  householder,  Uiyman 
Vin  1. 17.  f.  agarika  a  housewife  Vin  1.272.  See  also 
agarika. 

Agarin  (adj.)  [fr.  agara]  one  who  h.-is  or  inhabits  a  house, 
a  householder  Sn  376,  Th  1.1009;  J  111.234.  —  f.  aga- 
rini  a  housewife  Vv  52'  (=  gehassamini  VvA  225); 
Pv  111.4^  (id.  PvA   194). 

Agariya  =  agarika,  a  layman  M  1.504  ("bhiila).  —  Usually 
in  neg.  anagariya  (f)  the  homeless  state  (=  anagarat)) 
as  opp.  to  agara  (q.  v.)  in  formula  agarasma  anagari- 
yar) pabbajita  (gone  ont  from  the  house  into  the  home- 
less state)  Vin  1. 15:  M  1.16;  11.55,  7$^  A  1.49;  D  III. 30 
sq.,  145  sq.;   Sn  274,  1003;  Pv  11. 13'";  DA  1.112. 


Agga 


Aggi 


Agga'  (adj.  n.)  [Vedic  agra;  cp.  Av.  agro  first;  Lilh. 
agrs  early]  I.  (adj;)  (a.)  of  time:  the  first,  foremost  Dpvs 
IV. 1 3  (sangahai)  first  collection).  See  cpds.  —  (b.)  of 
space:  the  highest,  topmost,  J  1.52  (°sakha).  —  (c.)  of 
quality :  illustrious,  excellent,  the  best,  highest,  chief  Vin 
IV.232  (agga-m-agga)  most  exellent,  D  11.4:  S  1. 29  (a. 
sattassa  Sambuddha);  A  11.17  :=  Pv  iv.3*'  (lokassa  Buddho 
aggo  [A:  aggaq]  pavuccati);  It  88,  89;  Sn  875  (suddhi); 
PvA  5.  Often  combd.  with  settba  (best),  e.g.  D  11. 15; 
S  111.83,  264.  —  2.  (nt.)  top,  point,  (a.)  lit.:  the  top  or 
tip  (nearly  always  — °);  as  ar°  point  of  an  awl  Sn  625, 
631  ;  Dh  401 ;  kus°  tip  of  a  blade  of  grass  Dh  70;  Sdhp 
349;  tin"  id  PvA  241;  dum°  top  of  a  tree  J  n.155; 
dhaj°  of  a  banner  S  1.219;  pabbat"  of  a  mountain  Sdhp 
352;  sakh"  of  a  branch  PvA  157;  etc.  ■ —  (b.)  yfg-.  the 
best  part,  the  ideal,  excellence,  prominence,  first  place, 
often  to  be  trsl.  as  adj.  the  highest,  best  of  all  etc.  S  11.29 
(aggena  aggassa  patti  hoti:  only  the  best  attain  to  the 
highest);  Mhvs  7,  26.  Usually  as  — ";  e.g.  dum°  the 
best  of  trees,  an  excellent  tree  Vv  35*'  (cp.  VvA  161); 
dhan°  plenty  D  111.164;  madhur°  S  1.41,  161,  237  ;  bhav^ 
the  best  existence  S  111.83  j  rup°  extraordinary  beauty 
J  1. 291;  labh°  highest  gain  J  in. 127;  sambodhi-y-agga 
highest  wisdom  Sn  693  (:=  sabbafinuta-nanan  SnA  489 ; 
the  best  part  or  quality  of  anything,  in  enum"  of  the  five 
"excellencies"  of  first-fruits  (panca  aggani,  after  which  the 
N.  Paiicaggadayaka),  viz.  khettaggan  ras"  kotth"  kumbhi° 
bhojan°  SnA  270.  sukh°  perfect  bliss  Sdhp  243.  Thus 
freq.  in  phrase  aggag  akkhayati  to  deserve  or  receive 
the    highest    praise,    to    be    the    most    excellent    D    1. 124; 

5  111.156,  264;  A  11.17  (Tathagato);  It  87  (id.);  Nd^  517 
D  (appamado);  Miln  183.  —  3.  Cases  as  adv.:  aggena 
(instr. )  in  the  beginning,  beginning  from,  from  (as  prep.), 
by  (id.)  Vin  II.  167.  (aggena  ganhati  to  take  from,  to 
subtract,  to  find  the  difference;  Kern  Toev.  s.  v.  unneces- 
sarily changes  aggena  into  agghena),  257  (yadaggena  at 
the  moment  when  or  from,  foil,  by  tad  eva  "then";  cp. 
agge),  294  (bhikkh°  from  alms);  Vbh  423  (vass"  by  the 
number  of  years),  aggato  (abl.)  in  the  beginning  Sn  217 
(-|-  mnjjhato,  sesato).  aggato  kata  taken  by  its  worth, 
valued,  esteemed  Th  2,  386,  394.  agge  (loc  )  1.  at  the 
top  A  11.201  (opp.  mule  at  the  root);  J  IV.156  (id.);  Sn 
233  (phusit°  with  flowers  at  the  top :  supupphitaggasakhii 
KhA  192);  J  11.153  (ukkh");  III. 126  (kup°).  —  2  (as 
prep.)  from.  After,  since,  usually  in  phrases  yad°  (foil, 
by  tad°)  from  what  time,  since  what  date  D  1.152;  11.206; 

6  ajja-t-agge  from  this  day,  after  to  day  D  1.85;  M  1.528; 
A  V.300;  Sn  p.  25  (cp.  BSk.  adyagrena  Av.  3.11.13); 
at  the  end:  bhattagge  after  a  meal  Vin  11.212.' 

-anguli  the  main  finger,  i.  e.  index  finger  J  ¥[.404. 
asana  main  seat  DA  1.267.  -upatthaka  chief  personal 
attendant  D  11.6.  -karika  first  tasie,  sample  Vin  111.80. 
-kulika  of  an  esteemed  clan  Pv  111.5'  (^  setth°  PvA 
199).  -nna  recognized  as  primitive  primeval,  D  111.225 
(porana -f-),  A  11.27  sq.;  IV. 246,  Kvu  341.  -danta  one 
who  is  most  excellently  self-restrained  (of  the  Buddha) 
Th  1.354.  -dana  a  splendid  gift  Vin  111.39.  -dvara  main 
door  J  I.I  14.  -nakha  tip  of  the  nail  Vin  iv.221.  -nagara 
the  first  or  most  splendid  of  cities  Vin  1.229.  -nikkhitta 
highly  praised  or  famed  Miln  343.  -nikkhittaka  an 
original  depositary  of  the  Faith  Dpvs  IV. 5.  -pakatimant 
of  the  highest  character  J  v.351  (=  aggasabhava).  -patta 
having  attained  perfection  D  iii.48sq.  -pasada  the  highest 
grace  A  11.34;  It  87.  -pinda  the  best  oblation  or  alms 
1.141;  M  128;  JI.204.  -pindika  receiving  the  best  obla- 
tions J  VI.  1 40.  -puggala  the  best  of  men  (of  the  Buddha) 
Sn  684;  DhA  11.39;  Sdhp.  92,  558.  -purohita  chief  or 
prime  minister  J  vi.391.  -phala  the  highest  or  supreme 
fruit  (i.e.  Arahantship)  J  1.14S;  Pv  iv.188;  PvA  230. 
-bija  having  eggs  from  above  (opp.  mula°),  i.  e.  propa- 
gated by  slips  or  cuttings  D  1.5;  DA  1. 81.  -magga  (adj.) 
having  reached  the  top  of  the  path,  i.  e.  Arahantship 
ThA  20.  -mahesi  the  king's  chief  wife,  queen-consort 
J  1.262;  111.187,  393;  v.88;  DhA  1.199;  PvA  76.  -raja 
the  chief  king  J  vi.391 ;  Miln  27.  -vara  most  meritorious. 


best  Dpvs  vi.68.  -Tada  the  original  doctrine  (=  thera- 
vada)  Dpvs  IV.13.  -vadin  one  who  proclaims  the  highest 
good  (of  the  Buddha)  Th  i,   1142. 

Agga'  (nt.)  (only  — °)  [a  contracted  form  of  agara]  a 
(small)  house,  housing,  accomodation;  shelter,  hut;  hall. 
dan°  a  house  of  donation,  i.  e.  a  public  or  private  house 
where  alms  are  given  J  111.470;  iv.379,  403;  vi.487; 
PvA  121;  Miln  2.  salak°  a  hut  where  food  is  distributed 
to  the  bhikkhus  b;    tickets,  a  food  office  J  1.123,  VvA  75. 

AggatS  (f.)  [abstr.  of  agga]  pre-eminence,  prominence, 
superiority  Kvu  556  ("ij  gata);  Dpvs  IV.I  (gunaggataq 
gala).  —  (adj.)  mahaggata  of  great  value  or  superiority 
D  1.80;  III. 224. 

Aggatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  of  agga  =  Sk.  agratvan]  the  state  or 
condition  of  being  the  first,  pre-eminence  PvA  9,  89. 

Aggavant  (adj.)  occupying  the  first  place,  of  great  eminence 
A  1.70,  243. 

AggatU  see  agalu. 

Aggaja  &  Aggala  (f.)  (also  occasionally  with  1.)  [cp.  Sk. 
argala  &  argala  to  *areg  to  protect,  ward  off,  secure  etc., 
as  in  Ags.  reced  house;  *aleg  in  Sk.  raksati  to  prctect, 
Gr.  aAi|«  id.,  Ags.  ealh  temple.  Cp.  also  *areq  in  Gr. 
ixpxEu  z=  Lat.  arceo,  Orcus,  Ohg  rigil  bolt.]  a  contrivance 
to  fasten  anything  for  security  or  obstruction:  I.  a  bolt  or 
cross-bar  Vin  1.290;  D  i.8g  (°r)  akoteti  to  knock  upon 
the  cross-bar  a  =  kavata  DA  1.252);  A  iv.359  (id.); 
S.  IV.290;  A  i.ioi  =  I37:=iv.23i.  (phusit°  with  fastened 
bolts,  securely  shut  Th  1.385  (id.);  Vin  iv.47;  J.  v.293 
(°r)  uppTleti  to  lift  up  the  cross-bar.  —  2.  a  strip  of  cloth 
for  strengthening  a  dress  etc.,  a  gusset  Vin  1.290  (-f-  tunna), 
392  (Bdhgh  on  MV  VIII.21,  l);  J  1.8  (-}- tunna)  vi.71 
(°r)  datva);  Vin  iv.121. 

-dana  putting  in  a  gusset  J  1.8.  -phalaka  the  post  or 
board ,  in  which  the  cross-bar  is  fixed  (cp.  "vatti)  M 
111.95.  -vatti  ^  °phalaka  Vin  11.120,  148.  -suci  ijolting 
pin  M  1.126. 

Aggi  [Vedic  agni  =  Lat.  ignis.  Besides  the  contracted  form 
aggi  we  find  the  diaeretic  forms  gini  (q.  v.)  and  aggini 
(see  below)]  fire.  —  i:  fire,  flames,  sparks;  conflagration, 
Vin  11.120  (fire  in  bathroom);  M  1.487  (anaharo  nibbuto 
f.  gone  out  for  lack  of  fuel);  S  iv.185,  399  (sa-upadano 
jalati  provided  with  fuel  blazes);  Sn  62;  Dh  70  (:^  asani- 
aggi  DhA  111.71);  J  1.216  (sparks),  294  (pyre);  11. 102; 
111.55;  I  v.  1 39;  VvA  20  (aggimhi  tSpanai)  +  "dake  tema- 
naq).  —  The  var.  phases  of  lighting  and  extinguishing 
the  fire  are  given  at  A  lv.45:  aggiq  ujjaleti  (kindle,  make 
b.urn),  ajjhupekkhati  (look  after,  keep  up),  nibbapeti 
(extinguish,  put  out),  nikkhipati  (put  down,  lay).  Other 
phrases  are  e.g.  aggiq  jaleti  (kindle)  J  11.44;  ganhati 
(make  or  take)  J  1.494  (cp.  below  b);  deti  (set  light  to) 
J  1.294;  nibbapeti  (put  out)  It  93;  Sdhp  552.  aggi  nib- 
bayati  the  f.  goes  out  S  "85;  M  1.487;  J  1. 212  (udake 
through  Vater);  Miln  304.  aggi  nibbuto  the  f.  is  exting- 
uished (cp.  '^nibbana)  J  1.6 1;  Miln  304.  aggina  dahati  to 
burn  by  means  of  fire,  to  set  fire  to  A  1.136,  199; 
PvA  20.  udar"  the  fi.e  supposed  to  regulate  digestion 
PvA  33;  cp.  Dial.  11.208,  note  2;  kapp'utthan"  the 
universal  conflagration  J  III.  185;  dav"  a  wood  or  jungle 
fire  J  1. 212;  nar  the  burning  of  a  reed  J  vi.ioo;  padip" 
fire  of  a  lamp  Miln  47.  2.  the  sacrificial  fire:  In  one  or 
two  of  the  passages  in  the  older  texts  this  use  of  Aggi 
is  ambiguous.  It  may  possibly  be  intended  to  denote  the 
personal  Agni,  the  fire-god.  But  the  commentators  do 
not  think  so,  and  the  Jataka  commentary,  when  it  means 
Agni,  has  the  phrase  Aggi  Bbagava  the  Lord  Agni, 
e.  g.  at  J  1.285,  494)  11-44.  The  ancient  ceremony  of 
kindling  a  holy  fire  on  the  day  the  child  is  born  and 
keeping  it  up  throughout  his  life,  is  also  referred  to  by 
that  commentary  e.  g.  J  1.285  \  "■43-  Aggit)  paricarati 
(cp.    "paricSriya)  to  serve  the  sacred  fire  Vin  1.31   (jajilS 


Aggi 


5 


Aghavin 


aggI  paricaritukama);  A  V.263,  266;  Th  2,  143  (^  aggi- 
huttan  paric"  ThA  136);  Dh  107;  J  1.494;  DhA  II.232. 
aggii)  juhati  (cp.  '^homa,  "^hutta)  to  sacrifice  (in)to  the 
fire  A  11.207 )  often  combd-  with  aggihuttan  paricarati, 
e.g.  S  1. 166;  Sn  p.  79.  aggiq  namati  &  santappeti  to 
worship  the  fire  A  v. 235.  aggissa  (gen.)  parieariko  J  YI.207 
(cp.  below  °paricarika) ;  aggissa  adhanai)  A  IV. 41.  —  3. 
(ethical,  always  — ")  the  fire  of  burning,  consuming,  feverish 
sensations.  Freq.  in  standard  set  of  3  fires,  viz.  rag°,  dos°, 
moh",  or  the  fires  of  lust,  anger  and  bewilderment.  The 
number  three  may  possibly  have  been  chosen  with  refer- 
ence to  the  three  sacrificial  fires  of  Vedic  ritual.  At  S 
IV.19;  A  IV.41  sq.  there  are  7  fires,  the  4  last  of  which 
are  ahuneyy",  gahapat°,  dakkhineyy",  katth".  But  this 
trinity  of  cardinal  sins  lies  at  the  basis  of  Buddhist  ethics, 
&  the  fire  simile  was  more  probably  suggested  by  the 
number.  D  lti.217;  It  92,  Vbh  368.  In  late  books  are 
found  others:  ind"  the  fire  of  the  senses  PvA  56;  dukkh° 
the  glow  of  suffering  ib.  60;  bhavadukkli°  of  the  misery 
of  becomings  Sdhp.  552;  vippatisar"  burning  remorse 
TvA  60;  SOk°  burning  grief  ib.  41. 

Note.  The  form  aggini  occurs  only  at  Sn  668  &  670  in 
the    meaning    of    "pyre",    and    in    comb°-   with    sama 
"like",  viz.  aggini-samaq  jalitai)  668  (=  samantato  jali- 
taq  aggii)  Sn  A  480);  aggini-samasu  67o(=aggisamasu 
Sn   A  481).  The  form  aggini  in  phrase  niccagginl  can 
either  be  referred  to  gini  (q.  v.)  or  has  to  be  taken  as 
nom.   of   aggini    (in    adj.    function   with  i  metri  causa; 
otherwise    as  adj.  agginiij),  meaning  looking  constantly 
after  the  fire,  i.  e.  careful,  observant,  alert. 
-agara  (agyagar-i)  a  heated  room  or  hut  with  a  fire  Vin 
1.24;    IV. 109;    D    i.ioi,    102    (as    V.  1.    BB  for  agara);  M 
1. 501;    A    V.234,   250.   -khandha  a  great  mass  of  fire,  a 
huge    fire,    fire-brand    S    11.85;    A    iv.    128;   Th    z,   351 
(°samakama);   J    iv.139;    VI. 330;    Ps    1.125;  Dpvs  vi.37 ; 
Miln  304.  -gata  having  become  (like)  fire  Miln  302.  -ja 
firc-bom   J    v.404    (C;    text    aggijata).    -ttha    fire-place   J 
V.155.  -tthaiia  fire-place  Vin  ir.120  (jantSghare,  in  bath- 
room),   -daddha    consumed    by    fire    Dh    136;    Pv    1.7*. 
-daha   (inaha°)  a  holocaust  A  1. 178.  -nikasin  like  fire  J 
111.320   (suriya).   -nibbana    the  extinction  of  fire  J  1.212. 
-pajjota    fire-light    A    11. 140   (one    of  the   4   lights,   viz. 
canda°,    suriya°,   a°,   panna").   -paricarana   (-tthana)   the 
place  where  the  (sacrificial)  fire  is  attended  to  UhA  1. 1 99. 
-paricariya  fire-worship  DhA  11.232;  Sn  A  291  (pari")  456. 
-paricarika  one  who  worship  the  fire  A  v.263  (brahmana). 
-sala   a   heated   hall    or  refectory  Vin  1.25,  49  =  11.210; 
I.139;    II.154.    -sikha    the   crest  of  the  fire,  the  flame,  in 
simile   °ufama.,   like    a    flaming    fire    Sn    703 ;  Dh  308  = 
It    43,    90   (ayogula).    -butta  (nt.)  the  sacrificial  fire  (see 
above  2),  Vin   1.33,  36  =  J   1.83 ;    Vin  1.246  =   Sn   568 
("mukha-yaiina) ;    S    I  166;    Dh    392;    Sn    249,    p.    79;   J 
IV. 211;    VI. 525;    ThA    136   (=  aggi);    DhA    iv.151    ("n 
brahmano   namati).    -huttaka   (nt.)   fire-offering   J    vi.522 
(=  aggi-jahana  C).    -hotta  =  °hutta  SnA  456  (v.  1.  BB 
"hntta).  -homa  fire-oblation  (or  perhaps  sacrificing  to  Agni) 
D  1.9  (=  aggi-juhana  DA  1.93). 

Agglka  (adj.)  [aggi  -\-  ka]  one  who  worships  the  fire  Vin 
1. 71   (jatilaka);    D  11.339  sq.  (ja'.''a))  S  I.166  (brahmana). 

Aggha  [see  agghati]  i.  price,  value,  worth,  Miln  244; 
Mhvs  26,  22;  30,  76;  VvA  77.  — mahaggha  (adj.)  of 
great  value  J  IV.138;  v.414;  vi.209;  P"  u.l''.  See  also 
maharaha.  appaggha  (adj.)  of  little  value  J.  iv.139;  v.414. 
—  anaggba  (nt.)  pricelessness,  J  v.484;  cattati  anagghSni 
the  four  priceless  things,  viz.  setacchatta,  nisidanapallanka, 
adharaka,  pSda])ithika  DhA  III. 120,  186.  (adj.)  priceless, 
invaluable  j  v.414;  Mhvs  26,  25;  DhA  iv.216.  — agghena 
(inslr.)  for  the  price  of  Vin  II.52,  cp.  Bdhgh  on  p.  31 1, 
312.  —  2.  an  oblation  made  to  a  guest  D  11.240;  J 
iv.39^  =  476. 

-karaka  a  valuator  J  1.124.  -pada  valuableness  J  v.473 
Clakkbanai]  nama  mantai]). 

Agghaka  (adj.)r=:aggha;  worth,  having  the  value  of  ( — ") 
Mhvs  30,  77.  aa°  priceless  Mhvs  30,  72. 


Agghati  (intr.)  [Sk.  arghati,  argh  =  arh  (see  arhati),  cp. 
Gr.  aAifi)  reward,  aA<^»ai  to  deserve]  to  be  worth,  to  have 
the  value  of  (ace),  to  deserve  J  1.112  (satasahassai) ;  ad- 
dhamasakar)) ;  vi.174,  3^7  (padarajaq);  DhA  111.35  (manin 
nSgghama);  Mhvs  32,  28.  Freq.  in  stook  phrase  kalai] 
nagghati  (nagghanti)  solas!;]  not  to  be  worth  the  i6'h  part 
of  (cp.  kala)  Vin  n  156;  S  1.233;  Uh  7°;  ^v  20'  (= 
nanubhoti  Vv.\  104),  43';  J  v.284.  —  Caus.  aggbapeti 
to  value,  to  appraise,  to  have  a  price  put  on  (ace.)  J 
1. 124;  IV. 137,  278;  Miln  192;  Mhvs  27,  23.  Cp.  aggha- 
panaka  &  agghapaniya. 

Agghanaka  (adj.)  (— °)  [fr.  *agghana,  abstr.  to  agghati] 
having  the  value  of,  equal  to,  worth  Vin  IV. 226;  J  1.61 
(satasahass°) ,  112;  DA  1.80  (kahapan°);  DhA  111.120 
(cuddasakoti°) ;  Mhvs  26,  22;  34,  87.  —  f.  "ika  J  1.178 
(satasahass"). 

Agghanlya  (adj.)  [in  function  &  form  grd.  of  agghati]  pri- 
celess, invaluable,  beyond  the  reach  of  money  Miln  192. 

Agghapanaka  [fr.  agghapanatoagghapeti,  Caus.  of  agghati] 
a  valuator,  appraiser  J   1.124,  '25;  v.276  C^ika). 

Agghapaniya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  agghapeti,  see  agghati]  that 
which  is  to  be  valued,  in  °kamma  the  business  of  a 
valuator  J   iv.137. 

Agghika  (nt.)  ( — ")  [=:  agghiya]  an  oblation,  decoration 
or  salutation  in  the  form  of  garlands,  flowers  etc.,  there- 
fore meaning  "string,  garland"  (cp.  Sinhalese  aga  "festoon 
work")  Mhvs  19,  38  (pupph'')  34,  73  (ratan")  34,  76 
(dhaj°);  Davs  1.39  (pupphamay°) ;  v.51  (kusum°). 

Agghiya  (adj.  -n.)  [grd.  form  from  agghati]  i.  (adj.)  valu- 
able, precious,  worth  J  VI.265  (mani);  DhA  11.41  (ratan' 
of  jewel's  worth);  Mhvs  30,  92.  —  2.  (nt.)  a  respectful 
oblation  J  v.324  =  VI.516;   Dpvs  vi.65  ;  VI1.4. 

Agha'  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  agha,  of  uncertain  etym.]  evil,  grief, 
pain,  suffering,  misfortune  S  I  22 ;  M  1.500  (roga  ganda 
salla  agha);  A  11. 128  (id.);  J  v.ioo;  Th  2,  491;  Sdhp 
51.  —  adj.  painful,  bringing  pain  J  vi.507  (agha-m-miga 
=:  aghakara  m.  C).  -bhuta  a  source  of  pain  S  111.189 
(-(-  agha  &  salla). 

Agha-  (m.  nt.)  [the  etym.  suggested  by  Morris  JPTS 
1889,  200  (with  ref.  to  M  1.500,  which  belongs  under 
agha')  is  untenable  (to  Sk.  kha,  as  a-kha  =  agha,  cp. 
Jain  Prk.  khaha).  Neither  does  the  pop.  etym.  of  Bdhgh. 
offer  any  clue  (=  a  -j-  gha  from  ghatl  that  which  does 
not  strike  or  aghattaniya  is  not  strikeable  DhsA  326, 
cp.  Dhs.  trsl.  194  &  J  IV.154  aghe  thita  =  appatighe 
akase  thita  the  air  which  does  not  offer  any  resistance). 
On  the  other  hand  the  primary  meaning  is  darkness^  as 
seen  from  the  phrase  lokantarika  agba  asagvuta  an- 
dbakara  D  11.12;  S  v.454,  and  BSk.  agbasaqvrta  M 
Vastu  11.240,  adj.  dark  M  Vastu  1.41;  11.162;  Lai  Vist 
552]  the  sky,  orig.  the  dark  sky,  dark  space,  the  abyss 
of  space  D  11.12;  S  v.45  ;  Vv  i6'  (aghasi  gama,  loc.  ^ 
vehasai)  gama  VvA  78);  J  |V.I54;  Dhs  638  (-j- aghagata) ; 
Vbh    84  (id.). 

-gata  going  through  or  being  in  the  sky  or  atmosphere 
Dhs  638,  722;  Vbh  84.  -gamin  moving  through  the 
atmosphere  or  space  i.  e.  a  planet  S  1.67  =  Miln  242 
(adicco  settho  aghagaminai)). 

Aghata  at  Th  i,  321  may  be  read  as  agha-gata  or  (prefer- 
ably) with  v.  1.  as  aggha-gatai),  or  (with  Neumann)  as 
agghai)  agghalanai).  See  also  Mrs.  Kb.  D,  Psalms  of  the 
Krtthren.^  p.   191. 

Agghammiga  [to  agha'  ?]  a  sort  of  wild  animal  J  Vi.247 
(=  aghavaha  miga)  507  (=  aghakara).  Cp.  BSk.  agha- 
rika  Divy  475. 

Aghavin  (adj.)  [to  agha']  suffering  pain,  being  in  misery 
Sn  694  (=  dukkhita  SnA  489). 


Anka 


Angana 


Anka'  =  anga,  sign,  mark,  brand  Miln  79;  °karana 
branding  J   IV. 366,  375.   See  also  anketi. 

Anka^  [Vedic  anka  hook,  bent  etc.,  anc,  cp.  ankura  & 
ankusa.  Gr.  xyxm  elbow,  xyxvfx  =^  anchor;  Lat.  uncus 
nail;  Ohg.  angul  =  E.  angle]  (a.)  a  hook  J  v.322  = 
VI.2:8  (v.  1.  BB  anga).  —  (b.)  the  lap  (i.  e.  the  bent 
position)  or  the  hollow  above  the  hips  where  infants  are 
carried  by  Hindos  mothers  or  nurses  (ankena  vahati)  Vin 
11.114;  D  11.19  (anke  pariharati  to  hold  on  one's  lap  or 
carry  on  one's  hips),  20  (nisidapeti  seat  on  one's  lap); 
M  11.97  (ankena  vahitva);  Th  i,  299;  J  1.262  (anke 
nisinna);  11.127,  236;  vi.513;  DhA  1. 170  (ankena  vahitva) 
PvA  17  (nisidapeti). 

Ankita  [pp.  of  anketi]  marked,  branded  J  1. 231  (cakkan- 
kita  Salthu  pada):  11. 185  ("kannaka  with  perforated  ears). 

Ankura  [cp.  Sk.  ankura,  to  anka  a  bend  =  a  tendril  etc.] 
a  shoot,  a  sprout  (lit.  or  fig.)  J  11.105;  VI.331  (Buddh  °a 
nascent  Buddha),  486;  Dhs  617  ("vanna);  Miln  50,  25 1 
269;   Sdhp  273;  Mhvs   15,  43. 

Ankusa  [Vedic  ankusa;  to  anC,  see  anka']  a  hook,  a  pole 
with  a  hook,  used  (l)  for  plucking  fruit  off  trees,  a  crook 
J  1.9  Cpacchi  hook  &  basket);  v.89  =  vi.520  (pacchi- 
khanitti''),  529  (=  phalanai)  ganhanatthai)  ankusaq).  — 
(2)  to  drive  an  elephant,  a  goad  (cp  patoda  &  tutta) 
Vin  11.196  (+kasa);  J  vi.489;  Th.\  173  (ovadan  anku- 
saq  katva,  fig.  guide);  Sdhp  147  (dand°).  —  (3)  N.  of  a 
certain  method  of  inference  in  Logic  (naya),  consisting 
in  inferring  certain  mental  states  of  a  general  character 
from  respective  traits  where  they  are  to  be  found  Nett 
2,  4,  127;  Nett  A  20S;  — acc°  beyond  the  reach  of  the 
goad    D    11.266    (naga).   See  also  ankusaka. 

-gayha  (the  art)  how  to  grasp  and  handle  an  eleph.- 
driver's  hook  M  11.94  (sippa).  -gaha  an  eleph. -driver  Dh 
826. 

Ankusaka  [see  anka-,  cp.  ankusa]    I.  a  crook  for  plucking 
fruit    J    111.22.    —   2.    an    eleph.-driver's    hook   J    111.431. 
-yattha  a  crooked  stick,  alpenstock,  staff  (of  an  ascetic) 
J  11.68  (+  pacchi). 

Anketi  [Denom.  fr.  anka']  to  mark  out,  brand  J  1.451 
lakkhanena);  11.399.  —  PP-  ankita,  q.  v. 

Ankola  [dial,  for  ankura]  a  species  of  tree  Alangium 
Hexapetalum  J  vi.535.  Cp.  next. 

Ankolaka  =  ankola  J  1V.440;  V.420. 

Anga  (nt.)  [Vedic  anga,  anC  cp.  Lat.  angulus  =  angle, 
corner  etc.,  ungulus  finger-ring  =  Sk.  angullya.  See  also 
anka,  anguttha  &  angula]  (1)  (lit.)  a  constituent  part  of 
the  body,  a  limb,  member;  also  of  objects :  part,  member 
(see  cpd.  "sambhara);  utfam^anga  the  reproductive  organ 
J  v.ig7;  also  as  "head"  at  ThA  209.  Usually  in  cpds. 
(see  below,  esp.  "paccanga),  as  sabbanga-kalyani  perfect 
in  all  limbs  Pv  111.3^  (=  sobhana-sabbanga-paccangi  PvA 
189)  and  in  redupln.  anga-m-angani  limb  by  limb,  with 
all  limbs  (see  also  below  anga -)- paccanga)  Vin  111.119; 
Vv  38^  ("ehi  naccamana);  Pv  Ii.i2i»,  '■'',  '8  (sunakho  te 
khadati).  —  (2)  (fig.)  a  constituent  part  of  a  whole  or 
system  or  collection,  e.  g.  uposath°  the  vows  of  the  fast 
J  15°)  bhavanga  the  constituents  or  the  condition  of 
becoming  (see  bhava  &  cp.  Cjx/.  265  sq.);  bojjbanga 
(q.  v.).  Esp.  with  numerals :  cattari  angani  4  constituents 
A  11.79  (^'2.  sila,  samadhi,  paiiiia.  vimutli  and  rupa,  ve- 
dana,  sanna,  bhava),  atthangika  (q.  v.)  raagga  the  Path 
with  its  eight  constituents  or  the  eightfold  Path  (KhA 
85 :  atth'  angani  assa  ti)  navanga  Buddha-sasana  see 
nava.  —  (3)  a  constituent  part  as  characteristic,  promi- 
nent or  distinguishing,  a  mark,  attribute,  sign,  quality 
D  I.I  13  sq.,  117  (imina  p'  angena  by  this  quality,  or: 
in    this    respect,  cp.  below  4;  DA  1.281   expls  tena  kara- 


nena).  In  a  special  sense  striking  (abnormal)  sign  or  mark 
on  the  body  D  1.9,  from  which  a  prophesy  is  made 
(:  hattha-padadisu  yena  kenaci  evarupena  angena  saman- 
nagato  dighayu  .  .  holi  ti  . .  angasatthan  =  chiromantics 
DA  1.92).  Thus  in  comb"-  with  samannagata  &  sam- 
panna  always  meaning  endowed  with  "good",  superior, 
remarkable  "qualities",  e.  g.  J  1.3  (sabbanga-sampanna 
nagarar)  a  city  possessing  all  marks  of  perfection) ;  11.207.  — 
In  enum"-  with  var.  numerals:  tlhi  angehi  s.  A  1.1155 
catlari  sotapannassa  a-  D  111.227  =  A  iv.405sq.;  paiic- 
anga-vippahino  ( i.  e.  giving  up  the  5  hindrances,  see 
nivarana)  and  paiicanga-samannagato  (i.  e.  endowed  with 
the  5  good  qualities,  viz.  the  sila-kkhandha,  see  kkhandha 
II. Ad)  S  1.99  =  .\  1.161;  V.15,  29.  Similarly  the  5  attri- 
butes of  a  brahmin  (viz.  sujata  of  pure  birth,  .ijjhayaka 
a  student  of  the  Vedas,  abhiriipa  handsome,  silava  of  good 
conduct,  pandita  clever)  D  1.119,  '^o.  Eight  qualities  of 
a  king  D  1.137.  Ten  qualities  of  an  Arahant  (cp.  dasa' 
B  2)  S  111.83;  Kh  iv.io  =  KhA  88;  cp.  M  1.446  (dasah' 
angehi  samannagato  rarino  assajaniyo).  —  (4)  (modally) 
part,  share,  interest,  concern  ;  ajjbattikai]  angaij  my  own 
part  or  interest  in  the  outside  world)  A  1.16  sq.  =  S 
v.ioi  sq. ;  It  9.  rafiiio  angai)  an  asset  or  profit  for  the 
king  M  1.446.  Thus  adv.  tadanga  (see  also  ta°  i.a)  as  a 
matter  of  fact,  in  this  respect,  for  sure,  certainly  and 
tadangena  by  these  means,  through  this,  therefore  M 
1.492;  A  IV.411;  Sdhp  455,  456;  imina  p^  angena  for  that 
reason  M  11.168.  —  In  comp"-  with  verbs  angi°  (angi°) : 
angigata  having  limbs  or  ports,  divided  D.\  1. 313;  cp. 
samangi  (-bhuta). 

-jata  "the  distinguishing  member",  i.  e.  sign  of  male 
or  female  (see  above  3);  membrum  virile  and  muliebre 
Vin  1.191  (of  cows);  111.20,  37,  205;  J  11-359;  Miln  124. 
-paccanga  one  limb  or  the  other,  limbs  great  and  small 
M  1.81;  J  vi-20,  used  (a)  collectively,  the  condition  of 
perfect  limbs,  or  adj.  with  perfect  limbs,  having  all  limbs 
Pv  II.I2'2  (:=  paripunna-sabbanga-paccangavati  PvA  158); 
SnA  383;  DhA  1.390;  ThA  288;  Sdhp  83  fig.  rathassa 
angapaccangan  M  1.395;  sabbanga-paccangani  all  limbs 
Miln  148.  —  (b)  dish'ibiitively  (cp.  similar  redupl.  forma- 
tions like  chiddavachidda,  setthanu-setthi,  khandakhanda, 
cunnavicunna)  limb  after  limb,  one  limb  after  the  other 
(like  angamangani  above  1),  piecemeal  M  1. 133  (°e  da- 
ssyya),  366;  J  1.20;  IV. 324  (cbinditva).  -paccangata  the 
condition  or  state  of  perfect  limbs,  i.  e.  a  perfect  body 
VvA  134  (suvisuddh°).  -paccangin  having  all  limbs 
(perfect)  D  1.34  (sabbanga-peccangi);  PvA  189.  -raga 
painting  or  rouging  the  body  Vin  11.107  (+  mukha"). 
-latthi  spront,  offshoot  ThA  226.  -vata  gout  Vin  1.205. 
-vijja  the  art  of  prognosticating  from  marks  on  the  body, 
chiromantics,  palmistry  etc.  (cp.  above  3)  D  1.9  (see  expl. 
at  DA  1.93);  J  1290  (°aya  cheka  clever  in  fortune-tel- 
ling) ;  °annbhava  the  power  of  knowing  the  art  of  signs 
on  the  body  J  11.200;  v.284;  °pathaka  one  who  in  versed 
in  palmistry  etc.  J  11.21,  250;  v-458.  -vekalla  bodily 
deformity  DhA  11.26.  -sattha  the  science  of  prognostic- 
ating from  certain  bodily  marks  DA  1.92.  -sambbara 
the  combination  of  parts  Miln  28  ^  S  1.135;  Miln  41. 
-hetuka  a  species  of  wild  birds,  living  in  forests  J  vi.538. 

Angara'  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  angana  &  °na;  to  anga?]  an  open 
space,  a  clearing,  Vin  11. 218;  J  1. 109  (=  manussanan 
saiicaran.vtthane  anavate  bhumibhage  C);  11.243,  29°! 
357;  Davs  1.27.  — cetiy°  an  open  space  before  a  Chaitya 
Miln  366,  DA  I.191,  197;  VvA  254.  raj°  the  empty 
space  before  the  king's  palace,  the  royal  square  J  1. 124, 
152;  11.2;  DhA  11.45. 

-tthana  a  clearing  (in  a  wood  or  park)  J  1.249,  421. 
-pariyanta  the  end  or  border  of  a  clearing  J  11.200. 

Angara'  [prob.  to  anj,  thus  a  variant  of  aiijana,  q.  v.] ; 
a  speck  or  freckle  (on  the  face)  A  v.92,  94  sq.  (+  raja). 
Usually  in  neg.  anangana  (adj.)  free  frjm  fleck  or  blemish, 
clear,  (of  the  mind)  (opp.  sangana  Sn  279);  D  1.76; 
M  1.24  sq.;   100  (-j-raja);  A  11.211;  Sn  517  (+  vigata- 


Angana 


Accaya 


raja  =  angananan  abhavix  malanan  ca  vigama  .  .  .  SnA 
427),  622  =  Dh  125  (^  nikkilesa  DhA  111.34);  Dh  236, 
351;  Pug  60;  Nett  87. 

Angada  [cp.  Sk.  angnda ;  prob.  anga  -f-  da  that  which  is 
given  to  the  limbs]  a  bracelet  J  v. 9,  410  (citt°,  adj.  with 
manifold  bracelets). 

Angadlll  (adj.)  [to  angada]  wearing  a  bracelet  J  v. 9. 

Angara  (m.  nt.)  [Vedic  angara]  charcoal,  burniog  coal, 
embers  A  111.97,  3^0,  407;  J  1.73;  111.54,  55;  v.488; 
Sd  668;  Sdhp  32.  kul°  the  charcoal  of  the  family,  a 
squanderer   S    IV. 324    (see    under    kula). 

-kataba  a  pot  for  holding  burning  coal,  a  charcoal 
pan  D.\  1. 261.  -kapalla  an  earthenware  pan  for  ashes 
UhA  1.260;  Dhs  A  333;  VvA  142. -kammakara  a  charcoal 
burner  J  VI. 209.  -kasu  a  charcoal  pit  M  1.74,  365;  Th  2, 
491;  J  1.233;  Sn  396;  ThA  288;  DhA  1442;  Sdhp  208. 
-pacctai  a  basket  for  ashes  DhA  iv.tgi.  -pabbata  the 
mountain  of  live  embers,  the  glowing  mount  (in  Niraya) 
A  1. 141;  Miln  303;  Pv.\  221  Caropana);  Sdhp  208. 
-mar]sa  roast  meat  Mhvs  10,  16.  -masi  ashes  DhA 
III. 309.  -rasi  a  heap  of  burning  coal  J  in. 55. 

Angaraka  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  angaraka]  like  charcoal,  of  red 
colour,  N.  of  the  planet   Mars  DA  1.95;  cp.  J   1.73. 

Angarika  a  charcoal-burner  J  VI. 206  (==  angara-kamma- 
kara  p.  209). 

Angarin  (adj.)  [to  angara]  (burning)  like  coal,  of  bright- 
red  colour,  crimson  Th  I,  527  =  J  1. 87  (duma  trees  in 
full   bloom). 

Angika  ( — °)  (adJO  [fr-  anga]  consisting  of  parts,  —  fold) 
only  in  comp"-  with  num.  like  auh°,  duv°  (see  dve), 
catur°,  panc°  etc.,  q.  v. 

Angln  (adj.)  limbed,  having  limbs  or  parts,  —  fold,  see 
catur°  &  pace"  (under  anga-paccangin).  —  f.  angini  having 
spronts   or   shoots   (of  a  tree)  Th  2,  297  (=  ThA  226). 

Anguttha  [cp.  Sk.  angustha,  see  etym.  under  anga]  i.  the 
thumb  Vin  HI. 34;  Miln  123;  PvA  198.  —  2.  the  great 
toe  J  n.92;  Mhvs  35,  43. 

-pada  thumb-mark  A  IV.I27  =  S  111.154.  -sineha  love 
drawn  from  the  thumb,  i.  e.  extraordinary  love  Pv  111.5^, 
cp.  PvA  198. 

Angutthaka  =  anguttha  J  IV. 378;  V.281;  pad°  the  great 
toe  S  V.270. 

Angula  [Vedic  angula,  lit.  "limblct"  see  anga  for  etym.] 
I.  a  finger  or  toe  M  1.395  (vank'  angulan  karoti  to  bend 
the  fingers,  v.  1.  angulin);  A  111.6  (id.);  J  v  70  (gon° 
adj.  with  ox  toes,  expld-  by  C.  as  with  toes  like  an  ox's 
tail ;  vv.  11.  "anguttha  and  °anguli).  —  2.  a  finger  as 
measure,  i.  e.  a  finger-breadth,  an  inch  Vin  11.294,  3°^ 
(dvangula  2  inches  wide);  Mhvs  19,  11  (atjh");  DhA 
III. 1 27   (ek°). 

-atthi  (?  cp.  aoga-latthi)  fingers  (or  toes)  and  bones 
DA  1.93.  -anguli  fingers  and  toes  DhA  111.214.  -antarika 
the  interstices  between  the  fingers  Vin  111.39;  Miln  180; 
Dh.\   111.214. 

Angulika  (m.)  [=  anguli]  a  finger  J  111.13  (paiic°);  v.204 
(vatt''  =  pavaj'  ankurasadisa  valtanguli  p.  207).  See  also 

paficangulika. 

Angull  &  Anguti  (thus  always  in  cpds.)  (f.)  [Vedic  anguli 
&L  °i;  see  anga]  a  finger  A  IV. 127;  Sn  610;  J  111.416; 
IV.474;  V.215  (vatt°  with  rounded  fingers);  Miln  395; 
DhA  11.59;    IV. 210;    SnA  229. 

-patodaka  nudging  with  the  fingers  Vin  111.84  =  iv.l  10; 
D  1.91  =  A  IV. 343.  -pada  finger-mark  A  IV.127  =  S 
111.154.  -potba  snapping  or  cracking  the  fingers  J  v.67. 
•muddika  a  signet  ring  Vin  11.106:  J  iv.498;  v.439,  467. 
-sanghattana"  =  potha  DA  1.256. 


Anguteyyaka  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  anguUyaka  thr.t  which  belongs 
to  the  finger,  Mhg.  vingerlin  ^  f'Dgj  ^*  bracelet,  Fr. 
bras;  thimble  thumb  etc.]  an  ornament  for  the  finger,  a 
finger-ring  J  11.444  (=  nikkha). 

Acankama  (avj.)  [a  +  cankama]  not  fit  for  walking,  not 
level  or  even  Th  i,  1 174  (magga). 

Acittaka  (adj.)  [a  -f  citta^  +  l^a]  I.  without  thought  or 
intention  unconscious,  unintentional  DhA  11.42.  —  2. 
without  heart  or  feeling,  instr.  aeittakena  (adv.)  heart- 
lesely  J  iv.58  (C.  for  acetasa). 

Acittlkata  (adj.)  [a  -f  citta'^  -f  kata;  cp.  ciltikara]  not 
well  thought  of  Miln  229. 

Acira  see  cira  &  cp.  nacira. 

Acela  (adj.  -n.)  [a  -f-  ceia]  one  who  is  not  clothed,  esp.  1. 1. 
for  an  anti-Buddhist  naked  ascetic  D  1.161,  165;  111.6, 
12,  17  sq.;  S  1.78;  J  v.75. 

Acelaka  =  acela  D  1.166;  III  40;  A  1.295;  11.206;  111.384 
("savaka);  J  111.246;  vi.229;  Pug  55;  DhA  111.489. 

ACC-  I.  a  -f-  c°,  e.  g.  accuta  ^  a  -)-  cuta,  —  2.  Assimilation 
group  of  (a)  ati  -|-  vowel;  (b)  c  -f  cons.  e.  g.  aeci  =  arci. 

ACCaga  [ati  -\-  aga]  "y^  sg.  pret.  of  ati-gacchati  (q.  v.  for 
similar  forms)  he  overcame,  should  or  could  overcome 
Sn  1040  (expld.  wrongly  as  pp.  =  atikUanta  at  Nd^  10 
and  as  alita  at  DhA  iv.454);  Dh  414. 

Accankusa  (adj.)  [ati  -f-  ankusa]  beyond  the  reach  of  thp 
goad  D  11.266  (naga). 

Accatari  see  atitarati. 

ACCati  [Vedic  arcati,  fC,  orig.  meaning  to  be  clear  &  to 
sing  i.  e.  to  sound  clear,  cp.  arci]  to  praise,  honour,  cele- 
brate Davs  v. 66  (accayittha,  pret.)  —  pp   accita,  q.  v. 

Accanta  (adj.  —  &  adv.  ° — )  [ati  -f  anta,  lit.  "up  to  the 
end"]  I.  uninterrupted,  continuous,  perpetual  J  I.223; 
Miln  413;  Vv.A.  71;  PvA  73,  125,  266;  Sdhp  288.  — 
2.  final,  absolute,  complete;  adv.  thoroughly  S  1. 130  ("q 
halaputta'  mhi);  111.13  =  A  '-291  sq. ;  v. 326  sq.  (°nittha, 
■^yogakkhemin);  Kvu  586  (°niyamala  final  assurance;  cp. 
Kvu  trsl.  340).  —  3.  (° — )  exceedingly  extremely,  very 
much  A  1.145  ("sukhumala,  extremely  delicate),  Miln  26 
(id.);  Sn  794  (°suddhi  z=  paramattha-accantasuddhi  SnA 
528);  Th  1,  692  (°ruci);  Dh  162  (°dussilya  =  ekanta" 
DhA  111.153). 

Accaya  [from  acceti,  ati  -f-  i,  going  ou  or  beyond ;  cp.  Sk. 
atyaya]  (i)  (temporal)  lapse,  passing;  passing  away, 
end,  death.  Usually  as  instr.  accayena  after  the  lapse 
01,  at  the  end  or  death  of  after  Vin  1.25;  D  11.127  (■'a'- 
liyS  a),  154  (mam°  when  I  shall  be  dead);  M  1.438 
(temas°  after  3  months);  S  1.69;  Snp.  102  (catunnaq 
niasanaq),  p.  1 10  (rattiyS);  J  1.253  (ekaha-dvih°),  291 
(katipah°  after  a  few  days);  PvA  47  (katipSh"),  82  (da- 
samas°),  145  (vassasatanoij).  —  (2)  (modal)  passing  or 
getting  over,  overcoming,  conquering,  only  in  phrase 
dur-accaya  difficult  to  overcome,  of  kamapanka  Sn  945 
(:=  dur-atikkamanlya  SnA  568),  of  sanga  Sn  948:  tanhS 
Dh  336;  sola  It  95.  —  (3)  (fig.)  going  beyond  (the  norm), 
transgression,  offence  Vin  1. 133  (thull°  a  grave  offence), 
167  (id.);  11.110,170;  esp.  ia  foil,  phrases:  accayo  mai) 
accagauia  a  fault  has  overcome  me,  i.  e.  has  been  com- 
mitted by  me  (in  confession  formula)  D  1  85  (=  abhi- 
bhavitvS  pavatto  has  overwhelmed  me  D.\  I.236);  A1.54; 
M  1.438  (id.);  accayar)  accayato  passati  to  recognise  a 
breach  of  the  regulation  as  such  Vin  1.315;  A  1.103; 
11.146  sq.;  '"ij  desetl  to  confess  the  transgression  S  1.239; 
"r)  accayato  pafiga^haM  to  accept  (the  confession  of)  the 
fault,  i.  e.  to  pardon  the  transgression ,  in  confession- 
formula   at   D   1.85  =  (Vio  11.192 ;  M  1.438  etc.).   In  the 


Accaya 


Acchati 


same  sense  accaya-pa^iggahana  pardon,  absolution  J  v.380 ; 
accayena  desanaij  patiganhati  J  I..379;  accayai]  kha- 
mati  to  forgive  Miln  420. 

Accasara  (adj.)  [a  form.  fr.  aor.  accasari  (ati  4-  Sf).  influ- 
enced in  meaning  by  analogy  of  ati  -f-  a  +  sara  (sinf)- 
Not  with  Morris  (J.  P.  T.  S.  1889,  200)  a  corruption  of 
accaya  +  sara  (Sfllf))  thus  meaning  "mindful  of  a  fault"] 
I.  going  beyond  the  limits  (of  proper  behaviour),  too 
self-sure,  overbearing,  arrogant,  proud  S  1.239  (v.  1.  acca- 
yasara  caused  by  prolepsis  of  foil,  accaya);  J  iv.6  (+ 
atisara);  DhA  iv.230  (=  expecting  too  much).  —  2.  going 
beyond  the  limits  (of  understanding),  beyond  grasp,  trans- 
cendental (of  panha  a  question)  M  1.304;  S  V.218  (v.  1. 
SS  for  bB  reading  ajjhapara).  Cp.  accasSrin. 

Accasara  (f-)  [abstr.  to  accasara]  overbeariog^  pride,  self- 
surity  Vbh  358  (-f  maya).  Note.  In  id.  p.  at  Pug  23 
we  read  acchadana  instead  of  accasara. 

Accasari  [fr.  ati  4-  Sf]  aor  3.  sg.  of  atisarati  to  go  beyond 
the  limit,  to  go  astray  J  v.70. 

Accasarin  (adj.)  =  accasara  1.,  aspiring  too  high  Sn  8  sq. 
(yo  naccasarl,  opp.  to  na  paccasarl;  axpl^-  at  SnA  21  by 
yo  nStidhavi,  opp.  na  ohiyyi). 

Accahasi  [fr.  ati  -|-  hf]  aor  3  sg.  of  atiharati  to  bring  over, 
to  bring,  to  take  J  111.484  (=  ativiya  abari  C). 

ACCftbhikkbaoa  (° — )  [ati  4-  abhikkhana]  too  often  J  V.233 
("saqsagga;  C.  expl^-  ativiya  abhinha). 

Accaraddha  (adj.  adv.)  [ati  -|-  Sraddha]  exerting  oneself, 
very  or  too  much,  with  great  exertion  Vin  1.182;  Th  i, 
638;  SnA  21. 

Accayata  (adj.)  [ati  -f  ayaU]  too  long  A  111.375. 

ACCaylka  (adj.)  [fr.  accaya]  out  of  time,  viz.  I  irregular, 
extraordiiiary  J  Vl.549,  553.  —  2.  urgent,  pressing  M 
1.149  (karaniyan  business)  11.112;  J  1.338;  v.17  °r)  (nt.) 
hurry  DhA  1. 18.  See  also  acceka. 

Accasaona  (adj.)  [ati  4-  Ssanoa}  very  near,  too  near  PvA 
42  (na  a.  n'&tidura  neither  too  near  nor  too  far,  at  an 
easy  distance). 

Acc&hita  (adj.)  [ati  4-  ahita]  /ery  cruel,  very  unfriendly, 
terrible  J   :v.46  =  v.146  (=  ati  ahita  C.)  =  vi.306  (id.). 

Accavadati  [ati  4-  avadati;  or  is  it  =  ajjhSvadati  =  adhi  4- 
avadati?]  to  speak  more  or  better,  to  surpass  in  talk  or 
speech;  to  talk  somebody  down,  to  persuade,  entice  Vin 
1V.224,  263 ;  S  11.204  sq- ;  J  V.433  (v.  1.  BB  ajjharali),  434 
(v.  1.  BB  aghScarati  for  ajjhacarati  =  ajjhavadati?). 

Accl  &  (in  verse)  acci  (f)  [Vedic  arci  m.  &  arcis  nt.  &  f. 
to  fc,  cp.  accati]  a  ray  of  light,  a  beam,  flame  S  iv.290 
(spelt  acchi),  399;  A  IV.103;  V.9;  Sn  1074  (vuccati  jala- 
sikha  Nds  11);  J  V.213;  Miln  40;  ThA  154  (dip'); 
Sdbp  250 

Acclka  (f.)  [fr.  acci]  a  flame  M  1.74;  S  11.99. 

Acclta  [pp.  of  accati]  honoured,  praised,  esteemed  J  VI.  180. 

Accimant  (adj.)  [fr.  acci,  cp.  Vedic  arcimant  &  arcismaat] 
flaming,  glowing,  fiery;  brilliant  Th  1,527;  J  v.266;  vi.248; 
Vv  38*. 

Accl-bandha  (adj.)  [=accibaddha?]  at  Vin  1.287  's  expl<i- 
by  Bdhgh  as  caturassa-kedara-baddha  ("divided  into  short 
pieces"  Vin  Texts  11.207),  i.  e-  with  squares  of  irrigated 
fields.  The  vv.  II.  are  acca°  and  acchi°,  and  we  should 
prefer  the  conjecture  acchi-baddha  "in  the  shape  of 
cubes  or  dice",  i.  e.  with  square  fields. 


AcCUggaCChatl  [aii  -|-  uggacchati]  to  rise  out  (of),  ger. 
accuggamma  D  II.38  ;  A  V.152  (in  simile  of  lotus). 

Accuggata  (adj.)  [ati  4-  uggata]  I.  very  high  or  lofiy  Miln 
346  (giri);  VvA  197;  DhA  11.65.  —  2-  '°°  '"'g''.  '•  s- 
too  shrill  or  loud  J  VI.133  (sadda),  516  (fig.  =  alikuddha 
very  angry  C). 

Accu^a  (adj.)  [ati  4-  unha]  very  hot,  too  hot  Sn  966 ; 
Nd'  487;  DhA  11.85,  87  (v.l.  for  abbhunha).  See  also 
ati-unha. 

Accuta  (adj.)  [a  4-  cuta]  immoveable ;  everlasting,  eternal ; 
nt.  °i]  Ep.  of  Nibbana  (see  also  cuta)  A  iv.295,  327 ; 
Sn  204,  1086  (=nicca  etc.  Nd-  12);  Dh  225  (=:  sassata 
DhA  in.321);  Sdhp  47. 

Accupattliapetl  at  J  v.  124  is  to  be  read  with  v.l.  as  apaccu- 
patthapeti  (does  not  indulge  in  or  care  for). 

Aaccupati  at  J  iv.250  read  accuppati,  aor.  3rd  sg.  of 
accuppatati  to  fall  in  between  (lit.  on  to),  to  interfere 
(with  two  people  quarelling).  C.  expK  atigantva  uppati. 
There  is  no  need  for  Kern's  corn  acchupati  (Toev.  s.  v.). 

AcCUSSanna  (adj.)  [ati  4-  ussanna]  too  full,  too  thick  Vin 
11.151. 

Acceka  =  accayika,  special;  °civara  a  special  robe  Vin 
111.261 ;  cp.  Vin  Texts  1.29'. 

Accetl  [ati  4-  eti  fr.  I]  i.  to  pass  (of  time),  to  go  by,  to 
elapse  Th  i,  145  (accayanti  ahoratta).  —  2.  to  overcome, 
to  get  over  Miln  36  (dukkhaij).  —  Caus.  accetl  to  make 
go  on  (loc),  to  put  on  J  VI.  17  (sulasmiij;  C.  avuneti), 
but  at  '.his  passage  prob.  to  be  read  appeti  (q.  v.). 

AcCOgaIha  (adj.)  [ati  -j-  ogalha]  too  abundant,  too  plentiful 
(of  riches),  lit.  plunged  into  A  iv.282,  287,  323  sq. 

Accodaka  (nt.)  [ati  4-  udaka]  too  much  water  (opp.  ano- 
daka  no  water)  DhA  1.52. 

Accodara  (nt.)  [ati  -f-  udara]  too  much  eating,  greediness, 
lit.  too  much  of  a  belly  J  iv.279  (C.  ati-udara). 

Accha'  (adj )  [cp.  Sk.  accha,  dial.,  to  fc  (see  accati),  thus 
"shining";  cp.  Sk.  rksa  bald,  bare  and  Vedic  rkvan  bright. 
Monier-Williams  however  takes  it  as  a  -|-  cha  fr.  chad> 
thus  "not  covered,  not  shaded"]  clear,  transparent  Vin 
1.206  (°ka5jika);  D  1.76  (mani  =  tanucchavi  DA  1.221), 
80  (udakapatta),  84  (udaka-rahada) ;  M  i.ioo;  S  11.281 
(°patta);  ill. 105  (id.);  A  1.9;  J  li.ioo  (udaka);  Vv  79>« 
(vari);  DA  1.113  (yagu). 

-odaka   having   clear  water,  with  clear  water  (of  lotus 
ponds)  Vv  4411;  8i5;  f  °odika  Vv  4l»  =  6o'. 

Accha'  [Vedic  rksa  =  Gr.  Stpxro;,  Lat.  ursus,  Cymr.  arth] 
a  bear  Vin  1.200;  A  lli.ioi;  J  v.197,  406,  416;  Miln  23, 
149.  At  j  Vl.507  accha  figures  as  N.  of  an  animal,  but 
is  in  expl"-  taken  in  the  sense  of  accha*  (accha  nama 
aghammiga  C).  Note,  Another  peculiar  form  of  accha 
is  P.  ikka  (q.  v.). 

Accha'  =  akkha'  (a  die)  see  acci-bandha. 

Accha*  (adj.)  [Ved.  rksaj  hurtful,  painful,  bad  DhA  lv.163 
("ruja). 

Acchaka  =  accha>,  a  bear  J  v.71. 

Acchati  [Vedic  asyati  &  Sste,  as;  cp.  Gr.  ^ina,i\  I.  to  sit, 
to  sit  still  Vin  1.289;  A  11.15;  It  120  (in  set  carat!  titjhati 
a.  aayatl,  where  o'berwise  nisinna  stands  for  acchati); 
Vv  74'  (=  nisidati  VvA  298);  PvA  4.  —  2.  to  stay, 
remain,  to  leave  alone  Th  i,  936;  J  iv.306.  —  3.  to  be, 
behave,  live  Vin  11.195;  D  1.102;  S  1.212;  Vv  ii'^;  Pv 
IU.3'  (=  nisidati  vasati  PvA  188);  Miln  88;  DhA  1.424. 
In   this  sense  often  pleonastic  for  finite  verb,  thus  aggii] 


Acchati 


Aja 


karitva  a.  (=  aggii)  karoti)  D  1.102;  aggii)  paricaranto  a. 
(=  aggii]  paricarati)  DA  1.270;  tantar)  pasarento  a.  (= 
tantaq  pasoreti)  DhA  1.424.  —  Pot.  acche  It  no;  aor. 
acchi  Vin  iv.308;  DhA  1.424. 

Acchanna  (adj.)  [pp.  of  acchadeli]  covered  with,  clothed 
in,  fig.  steeped  in  (c.  loe.)  J  III.323  (lohite  a.  =  aimugga  C). 
At  D  1.91  naccbaana  is  for  na  chanoa  (see  channa'^)= 
not  fair,  not  suitable  or  proper  (patirOpa). 

ACChambhln  (adj.)  [a  +  chambhin]  not  frightened,  undis- 
mayed, fearless  Sn  42  (reading  achambhin;  Nd^  13  expK 
abhiru  anulrasi  etc.);  J  vi.322  (=  nikkampa  C).  See 
chambhin. 

ACChara'  (f.)  [etym.  uncertain,  but  certainly  dialectical; 
Trenckner  connects  it  with  acchurita  (Notes  76);  Childers 
compares  Sk.  aksara  (see  akkhara);  there  may  be  a  con- 
nection with  akkhana  in  akkhana-vedhin  (cp.  BSk.  acchata 
Divy  555),  or  possibly  a  relation  to  a  +  tSBTi  thus 
meaning  "stealthily",  although  the  primary  meaning  is 
"snapping,  a  quick  sound"]  the  snapping  of  the  fingers, 
the  bringing  together  of  the  finger-tips:  I.  (lit.)  accbaran 
pabarati  to  snap  the  fingers  J  11.447;  HM91 ;  iv.124,  126; 
V.314;  VI.366;  DhA  1.38,  424.  —  As  measure:  as  much 
as  one  may  hold  with  the  finger-tips,  a  pinch  J  v.385 ; 
DhA  11.273  Cgahanamattai)) ;  cp.  ekacchara-matta  DhA 
11.274.  —  2.  (fig.)  a  finger's  snap,  i.  e.  a  short  moment, 
in  ek^accbara-kkbane  in  one  moment  Miln  102,  and  in 
def.  of   acchariya    (q.  v  )    at    D.\    1.43;  VvA  329. 

-sangbata  the  snapping  of  the  fingers  as  signifying  a 
short  duration  of  time,  a  moment,  "matla  momentary, 
only  for  one  moment  (cp.  BSk.  acchatasanghata  Divy 
142)  A  i.io,  34,  38;  IV.396;  Th  i,  405;  2,  67  (expld. 
at  ThA  76  as  ghatikSmatlam  pi  khanai)  angulipothana- 
mattam  pi  kalai)).  -sadda  the  sound  of  the  snapping  of 
a  finger  J  in. 127. 

Acchara'  (f.)  [V'edic  apsaras  ^  apa,  water  +  sarati,  orig- 
water  nymph]  a  celestial  nymph  M  1.253  (p'-  accharayo) 
11.64;  Th  2,  374  (=  devacchara  ThA  252);  J  v.152  sq- 
(Alambusa  a.)  Vv  5^  (=  devakafina  VvA  37);  Vv  172) 
18"  etc.;  DhA  111.8,  19;  PvA  46  (dev°);  Miln  169; 
Sdhp  298. 

Acchat^ka  (nt.  or  f.  ?)  [fr.  acchara']  in  °r)  vadeti  to  make 
heavenly  music  (lit.  the  sounds  of  an  acchara  or  heavenly 
nymph)  A  IV.265. 

Acchariya  (adj.-nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  ascarya  since  Upanishads  of 
uncertain  etym.  —  The  conventional  etym.  of  Pali  gram- 
marians connects  it  with  acchara'  (which  is  prob.  correct 
&  thus  reduces  Sk.  ascarya  to  a  Sanskritisation  of  accha- 
riya) viz.  Dhamraapala:  anabhinha-ppavattitaya  acchara- 
paharana  yoggaij  that  which  happens  without  a  moment's 
notice,  at  the  snap  of  a  finger;  i.e.  causally  unconnected 
(cp.  Goth,  silda-leiks  in  similar  meaning)  VvA  329;  and 
Buddhaghosa:  acchara-yoggan  ti  acchariyaq  accharaq  paha- 
ritur)  yuttan  ti  attho  DA  1.43]  wonderful,  surprising, 
strange,  marvellous  D  11.155;  M  1.79;  111.118,  125,  144 
(aii°);  S  IV.371;  A  1.181;  Miln  28,  253;  DhA  111.171; 
PvA  121;  VvA  71  (an°).  As  nt.  often  in  exclamations: 
how  wonderful!  what  a  marvel!  J  1.223,  279;  iv.138; 
VI.94  (a.  vata  bho);  DhA  IV.51  (aho  a.);  VvA  103  (aho 
ti  acchariyatlhena  nipato).  Thus  freq.  combd-  with  ab- 
bhutai)  =  how  wonderful  &  strange,  marvellous,  beyond 
comprehension,  e.  g.  D  1.2,  60,  206,  210;  II. 8;  and  in 
phrase  acchariya  abbbuta  dhamma  strange  &  wonderful 
things,  i.e.  wonderful  signs,  portents  marvels,  M  III. 118, 
125;  A  1V.198;  Miln  8;  also  as  adj.  in  phrase  accbariya- 
abbhuta-(citta-JJata  with  their  hearts  full  of  wonder  and 
surprise  DhA  iv.52;  PvA  6,  50.  —  See  also  acchera  & 
accheraka. 

Acchidana  (nt.)  [fr.  acchsdeti]  covering,  clothing  Th  I, 
698;  Miln  279.  —  fig.  protection,  sheltering  J  1.307. 


AcchadanS  (f.)  [=  prec]  covering,  hiding,  concealment 
Pug  19,  23.  —  Nott.  In  id.  p.  at  Vbh  358  we  read 
accasara  for  acchadana.  Is  the  latter  merely  a  gloss? 

Acchadetl  [a  -f  chadeti<,  Caus.  of  chad,  cp.  BSk.  accha- 
dayati  jivitena  to  keep  alive  Av.  6,  1. 300;  Divy  136, 
137]  to  cover,  to  clothe,  to  put  on  D  1.63  =:  It  75;  J 
1.254;  111.189;  IV.318;  Pug  57;  Pv  i.io'  (ger.  acchada- 
yitvana);  DA  1.181  (=:  paridahitva);  PvA  49,  50.  —  fig. 
to  envelop,  to  fill  J  vi.581  (abbhar)  rajo  acchadesi  dust 
filled  the  air).  —  pp.  accbanna  (q.  v.). 

Acchi  at  S  IV.290  is  faulty  spelling  for  acci  (q.  v.). 

Acchijja  (v.  1.  accheja)  destroying  (?)  S  1. 127.  Is  the  reading 
warranted?  Cp.  acchecchi. 

Acchidda  see  chidda. 

Acchlndati  [a  -f-  chindati,  lit.  to  break  for  oneself]  to  remove 
forcibly,  to  take  away,  rob,  plunder  Vin  IV.247  (sayaij 
a.  to  appropriate);  J  11.422;  HI. 1 79;  iv.343;  Miln  20; 
Sdhp  122.  —  ger.  accbinditva  J  11.422;  DhA  1.349; 
PvA  241  (sayar));  &  accbetva  M  1.434.  Caus.  11.  accbin- 
dapeti  to  induce  a  person  to  theft  Vin  iv.224,  247. 

ACChinna  (adj.)  [a  -|-  chinna,  pp.  of  acchindati]  removed, 
taken  away,  stolen,  robbed  Vin  IV.278,  303;  J  11.78; 
IV.45;  V.212. 

Acchiva  [*Sk.  ^ksiba  and  akslba]  a  certain  species  of  tree 
(Hypanthera  Moringa)  J  vi.535. 

Acchupeti  [a  -f-  chupeti,  Caus.  of  chupati]  to  procure  or 
provide  a  hold,  to  insert,  to  put  on  or  in  Vin  1.290 
(aggalag)  n.l  12. 

Acchecchi  [Sk.  acchaitsit]  3"'d  sg.  aor.  of  chindati  "he  has 
cut  out  or  broken,  has  destroyed"  (see  also  chindati  3), 
in  comb",  with  tanbar)  M  1.122;  S  1.12,  23,  127  (so  read 
for  acchejja);  IV.105,  207.  It  47 ;  A  III. 246,  445;  DhA 
IV.70  (gloss  acchindi,  for  acchidda  pret.  of  Dh  351).  The 
v.  1.  at  all  passages  is  accbejji,  which  is  to  be  accounted 
for  on  graphological  grounds,  ch  &  j  being  substituted 
in  MSS.  Kern  (Toevoegselen  s.  v.)  mistakes  the  form  & 
tries  to  explain  acchejji  as  adj.  =  ali-ejin  (eja),  acchecchi  = 
ati-icchin  (iccha).  The  syntactical  construction  however 
clearly  points  to  an  aor. 

Acchejja  =  a  4-  chejja  not  to  be  destroyed,  indestructible, 
see  chindati. 

Acchedana  (nt.)  [abstr.  to  acchindati]  robbing,  plundering 
J  VI.544. 

Acchera  (adj.)  :=  acchariya  wonderful,  marvellous  S  1.181; 
Vv  84"  (comp.  accheratara) ;  Pv  III.5' (°rupa  =  acchariya- 
sabhava  PvA  197);  Sdhp  244,  398. 

Accheraka  (adj.)  =  acchera  (acchariya)  J  1.279;  Bu  1.9 
(patihiraq). 

Aja  [Vcdic  aja  fr.  aj  (I.at.  ago  to  drive),  cp.  ajina]  a  he- 
goat,  a  ram  D  1.6,  127;  A  11.207;  J  '•241;  in.278  sq. ; 
V.241 ;  Pug  56;  PvA  80. 

-elaka  [Sk.  ajaidaka]  goats  &  sheep  D  1.5, 141;  A  11.42 
sq.,  209;  J  1.166;  vi.iio;  Pug  58.  As  pi.  ">a  S  1.76;  It 
36;  J  IV. 363.  -pada  goat-footed  M  1.134.  -pala  goatherd, 
in  °nigrodharukkha  (Npl.)  "goatherds'  Nigrodha-tree"  Vin 
1.2  sq.  Dpvs  1.29  (cp.  M  Vastu  111.302).  -palika  a  woman 
goatherd  Vin  III. 38.  -lakkbana  "goat-sign",  i.  e.  prophe- 
sying from  signs  on  a  goat  etc.  D  1.9  (expld-  DA  1.94  as 
"evarupanaq  ajanaq  mansaq  khaditabbni)  evarupSnai)  na 
khaditabban  ti").  -la;idika  (pi.)  goats'  dung,  in  phrase 
najimatta  a.  a  cup  full  of  goats'  dung  (which  is  put  down 
a  bad  minister's  throat  as  punishment)  J  1.419;  DhA 
11.70;  PvA  282.  -vata  "goats'  habit",  a  practice  of  certain 
ascetics  (to  live  after  the  fashion  of  goats)  J  IV.318. 


Ajaka 


lo 


Ajjhatta 


Ajaka  a  goat,  pi.  goats  Vin  11.154.  —  f.  ajika  J  111.278 
&  ajiya  J  v.z^i. 

Ajagara  [aja  +  gara  =  gala  fr.  *gel  to  devour,  thus  "goat- 
eater']  a  large  snake  (rock-snake?).  Boa  Constrictor  J 
VI.507;  Miln  23,  303,  364,  406;  DhA  III. 60.  Also  as 
ajakara  at  J  111.484  (cp.  Trenckner,  Notes  p.  64). 

Ajacca  (adj.)  [a-f-jacca]  of  low  birth  J  111.19;   VI. 100. 

Ajajjara   see  jajjara. 

Ajaddhuka  &  Ajaddhumara  see  jaddhu. 

Ajamoja  [Sk.  ajamoda,  cp.  Sk.  ajaji]  cummin-seed  VvA  186. 

Aja  (f.)  a  she-goat  J  111.125;  'v.251. 

Ajanana  (° — )  (nt.)  [a  -f-  janana]  not  knowing,  ignorance 
(of)  J  V.199  (°bhava);  VI.177  (°kala). 

Ajina  (nt.)  [Vedic  ajina,  to  aja,  orig.  goats'  skin]  the  hide 
of  the  black  antelope,  worn  as  a  garment  by  ascetics  D 
1.167;  Sn  1027;  J  1.12,  53;  IV.387;  V.407.  kharajina  a 
rough  skin  (as  garment)  M  1.343;  S  IV.118;  A  11.207; 
Sn  249  (=  kharani  a°-cammani  SnA  291).  dantajina  ? 
ivory  (q.  v.). 

-khipa  a  cloak  made  of  a  network  of  strips  of  a  black 
antelope's  hide  D  1.167;  S  1.117;  .\  1.240,  295;  11.206; 
Vin  1.306;  111.34;  J  VI. 569.  -paveni  a  cloth  of  the  size  of 
a  couch  made  from  pieces  of  ant.  skin  sewn  together 
Vin  1. 192;  D  1.7  (=  ajina-cammehi  maScappamSnena  sib- 
bitva  kata  paveni  DA  1.87);  A  1.181.  -sati  a  garment 
of  skins  (=  ajina-camma-sati  DhA  IV.156)  Dh  394=:} 
1.481  =:  III. 85. 

Ajlnl  aor  3rd    sg.  jayati,  q.  v. 

Ajiya  =  ajika  (see  ajaka). 

Ajlra  (nt.).  [Vedic  ajira  to  aj,  cp.  Gr.  ayp^c,  Lat.  ager, 
Goth,  akrs  ^  Ger.  Acker,  =  E.  acre]  a  court,  a  yard 
Mhvs  35,  3. 

Ajiraka  (nt.)  [a-l-jlraka]  indigestion  J  1.404;  11.181,  291; 
111.213,  225. 

Ajeyya"  &  Ajjeyya  (adj.)  [a  -f  jeyya,  grd.  of  jayati,  q.  v.]  — 

(a)  not  to  be  taken  by  force  Kh  vm.8  (cp.  KhA  223).  — 

(b)  not  to  be  overpowered,   invincible  Sn  288;   J   v. 509. 

Ajeyya'^  (adj.)  [a  -f- jeyya,  grd.  of  jiyati,  q.  v.]  not  decaying, 
not  growing  old,  permanent  J  vi.323. 

Ajja  &  Ajja  (adv.)  [Vedic  adya  &  adya,  a  -f-  dya,  a°  being 
base  of  demonstr.  pron.  (see  a'')  and  dyi.  an  old  loc.  of 
dyaus  (see  diva),  thus  "on  this  d.iy"]  to-day,  now  Sn  75, 
153,  158,  970,  998;  Dh  326;  J  1.279;  "'■425  (read 
bahutai)  ajja;  not  with  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  as  "food");  Pv 
l.tl'  (=  idani  PvA  59);  PvA  6,  23;  Mhvs  15,  64.  — 
Freq.  in  phrase  ajjatagge  (=:  ajjato  +  agge(r)  or  ajja-t- 
agge,  see  agga')  from  this  day  onward,  henceforth  Vin 
1.18;    D    1.85;    DA  1.235. 

-kalai)  (adv.)  this  morning  J  VI.  1 80;  -divasa  the  present 
day  Mhvs  32,  23. 

Ajjatana  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  adyatana]  referring  to  the  day,  to 
day's,  present,  modern  (opp.  porana)  Th  i,  552;  Dh  227; 
J  11.409.  —  dat.  ajjhatanaya  for  to  day  Vin  1.17;  PvA 
171   &  passim. 

Ajjata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  ajja]  the  present  lime,  in  ajjataS  ca 
this  very  day  S  1.83  (v.  1.  ajjeva). 


Ajjati  [Vedic  arjati,  fj,  a  variant  of  arh,  see  arahati]  to 
get,  procure,  obtain  J   111.263  (?).  pp.  ajjita  (q.v.). 

Ajjava  (adj.-n.)  [cp.  Sk.  Srjava,  to  fju,  see  uju]  straight, 
upright  (usually  combd-  with  maddava  gentle,  soft)  D 
III. 213;  A  1.94;  11.113;  III. 248;  Sn  250  (+  maddava), 
292  (id.);  J  111.274;  Dhs  1339;  Vbh  359  (an°);  SnA 
292  (=:  ujubhava),  317  (id.). 

Ajjavata  (f.)  [fr.  prec]  straight  forwardness,  rectitude,  up- 
rightness Dhs   1339.  (+  ajimhala  &  avankata). 

Ajjita  [pp.  of  ajjati]  obtained  Sdhp  98. 

Ajjuka  [*Sk.  arjaka]  N.  of  a  plant,  Ocimum  Gratissimum 
Vin  IV.35;  DA  1.81  (all  MSS.  have  ajjaka). 

AjjukaoOS  [*Sk.  arjakarna]  N.  of  a  tree  Pentaptera  To- 
mentosa  J   vi.535  (nn). 

Ajjunho  (adv.)  [haplology  fr.  ajja-junho;  see  junhs]  this 
moonlight  night  Vin  1.25 ;  iv.80. 

I  Ajjuna  [Vedic  arjuna,  to  raj;  cp.  Gr.  apy6(  white,  iipyufOf 
silver,  Lat.  argenium]  the  tree  Pentaptera  Arjuna  J  VI.535 ; 
DhA  1.105  ("rukkha). 

Ajjh-  Assimilation  group  of  adhi  -j-  vowel. 

Ajjhaga  [adhi  -p  aga]  3rd  sg.  pret.  of  adhigaccbati  (q.  v. 
for  similar  forms)  he  came  to,  got  to,  found,  obtained, 
experienced  S  1. 12  (vimanai));  Sn  225  (expld-  at  KhA 
180  by  vindi  patilabhi),  956  (ratiri;  expH-  at  Ndi  457 
by  adhigacchi);  It  69  (jatimaranaq);  Dh  154  (tanhanai) 
khayaij);  Vv  32'  (visesan  attained  distinction ;  expld-  at 
VvA  135  by  adhigata);  50^1  (amataq  santir);  expld-  VvA 
215  by   V.  1.  SS  adhigaiichi,  T.  adhigaccbati). 

Ajjhatta  (adj.  -n.)  [cp.  Sk.  adhyatma,  cp.  atta],  that  which 
is  personal,  subjective,  arises  from  within  (in  contrast  to 
anything  outside,  objective  or  impersonal);  as  adv.  &  ° — 
interior,  personal,  inwardly  (opp.  babiddba  babira  etc. 
outward,  outwardly);  Cp.  ajjhattika  &  see  Dhs.  trsl.  272.  — 
D  1.37  (subjective,  inward,  of  the  peace  of  the  2"<i  jhana), 
70  ^  A  11.210;  v. 206  (inward  happiness,  a.  sukkhag  = 
niyakajjhattai]  altano  santaoc  ti  attho  DA  1. 183  cp.  DhsA 
'691  338,  361);  S  1.70,  169;  1127  (kathaq  kathi  hoti  is 
in  inward  doubt),  40  (sukhar)  dukkhaq);  111.180  (id.); 
IV. I  sg.  (ayatanani),  139,  196;  v.74  (tbitaQ  cittai)  ajjhat- 
tar)  susanthitaq  suvimuttaq  a  mind  firm,  inwardly  well 
planted,  quite  set  free),  no,  143,  263,  297,  390;  A  1.40 
(rupas.iii5i),  272  (kamacchanda  etc.);  11.158.  (sukhaduk- 
khai)),  211;  111.86  (cetosamatha),  92  (vupasantacitta);  IV.32 
(sankhiltai)),  57  (itthindriyar)),  299  (cittaq),  305  (riipa- 
safiui),  360  (cetosamatha),  437  (vupasantacitta);  v  79  sq., 
335  ^'1-  C^ati);  It  39  (cetosamatha  inivard  peace),  80,  82, 
94;  J  1045  (chatajjhaita  with  hungry  insides);  v.338  (id.); 
Ps  1.76  (cakkhu  etc.);  Dhs  161  (^  attano  jataq  DhsA 
169),  204,  1044;  Pug  59;  Vbh  I  sq.  (khandha),  228 
(sati),  327  (paiifia),  342  (arllpasarim).  —  adv.  °r)  inwardly, 
personally  (in  contrast-pair  ajjbattai]  va  bahiddha  va ;  see 
also  cpd.  "bahiddha)  A  1.284;  11.171;  iv.305 ;  v.6i ;  Sn 
917  (=  upajjhayassa  va  acariyassa  va  te  guna  assu  ti 
Ndi^  350). 

-arammana  a  subjective  object  of  thought  Dhs  1047. 
-cintin  thought  occupied  with  internal  things  Sn  174,  388. 
-babiddba  inside  &  outside,  personal-external,  mutual, 
interacting  S  11.252  sq.;  II1.47  ;  IV. 382;  Nd'  15;  Dhs  1049 
etc.  (see  also  bahiddha).  -rata  with  inward  joy  D  11.107  = 
S  V.263  =  Dh  362  =  Ud  64  (-f  samahita);  Th  I,  981  ; 
A  IV.312;  DhA  IV. 90  (=  gocar'  ajjhatta-sankhataya  kam- 
matthana-bhavanaya  rata),  -rupa  one's  own  or  inner  form 
Vin  111.113  (opp.  bahiddha-rQpa  &  ajjh''-bah°  r.).  -saii- 
nojana  an  inner  fetter,  iuward  bond  A  1.63  sq.;  Pug  22; 
Vbh  361.  -santi  inner  peace  Sn  837  (=  ajjhattanaq  raga- 
dinai)  santibhava  SnA  545;  cp.  Nd'  185).  -samuttbana 
originating  from  within  J  1.207  ("f  hiri;  opp.  bahiddha"). 


Ajjhattika 


II 


Ajjhupekkhati 


Ajjhattika  (adj.)  [ajjhatta  +  ika],  personal,  inward  (cp. 
Dhs  Irs!.  207  &  Nd'  346:  ajjhattikai]  vuccali  cittai)); 
opp.  bahira  outward  (q.  v.).  See  also  ayatana.  —  M  i.6^; 
S  1.73  Ca  rakkha  na  bahira);  IV.7  sq.  (ayatanani);  V.IOI 
(anga);  A  1.16  (anga);  11.164  (dhatuyo);  111.400  (ayata- 
nani); V.52  (id.);  It  114  (id.),  9  (anga);  Kli  iv.  (=  KhA 
82);  J  IV. 402  (bahira-vatthui)  ayacitva  ajjhattikassa  oamai] 
ganbati);  Dhs  673,  751;  Vbh  13,  67,  82  sq.,  1 19,  131, 
392  sq. 

Ajjhapara  S  v. 218:  substitute  v.  I.  accasara  (q.  v.). 

Ajjhappatta  (&  Ajjhapatta)   [adhi  +  a  +  *prapta]   1. 

having  reached,  approached,  coming  near  to  J  11.450; 
VI. 566  (p;  C.  attano  santikarg  patta).  —  2.  having  fallen 
upon,  attacked  J  11.59;  V.198  (p;  C.  sampatta)  —  3. 
attained,  found,  got  Sn  1134  (=  adhigacchi  Nd^);  J  111.296 
(p.  C.  sampatta);  v. 158  (ajjhapatta;  C.  sampatta). 

Ajjhabhavl  3"'  sg.  nor.  of  adhibhavati  to  conquer,  over- 
power, overcome  S  1.240  (prohib.  ma  vo  kodho  ajjha- 
bhavi);  J   11.336.   Cp.  ajjhabhu   &  ajjhobhavati. 

Ajjhabhasi  y^  sg.  aor.  of  adhibhaseti  to  address  S  iv.117 
(gathahi);  Kh  v.  =  Sn  p.  46  (gathaya);  PvA   56,  90. 

Ajjhabhu  (3'"*  sg.  aor.  of  adhibhavati  (q.  v.)  to  overcome, 
conquer  It  76  (dujjayaij  a.  he  conquered  him  who  is  hard 
to  conquer;  v.  1.  ajjhabhi  for  ajjhabhavi).   Cp.  ajjhabhavi. 

Ajjhayana  (m.)  [adhi  -f  \]  study  (learning  by  heart)  of 
the   Vedas   Miln   225.  See  also  ajjhena. 

Ajjhavodahl  3''''  sg.  aor.  of  ajjhodahati  [Sk.  adhyavadhati] 
to  put  down  J  v. 365  (=  odahi,  thapesi  C).  Kern,  Toev. 
s.  V.   proposes  reading  ajjhavadahi  (=  Sk.   avadhat). 

Ajjhagare  (adv.)  [adhi  -f-  agare,  loc.  of  agara]  at  home,  in 
one's  own  house  A   I.l32^1t   109;   A   11.70. 

Ajjhacarati  [adhi  (or  ati?)  -|-  a  -f-  car]  I.  to  conduct  one- 
self according  to  Vin  11.301;  M  1.523;  Miln  266.  —  2.  to 
flirt  with  (perhaps  to  embrace)  J  IV.231  (aniiam-aiiiiai)). 
pp.  ajjbacinna.  See  also  accSvadati  &  aticar.iti. 

Ajjhacara  [to  adhi  (ati?)  +  a  -t-  car]  l.  minor  conduct 
(conduct  of  a  bhikkhu  as  to  those  minor  rules  not  in- 
cluded in  the  ParSjika's  or  Saijghadisesa's)  Vin  1.63  (see 
note  in  Vm.  Texls^  1.184.  —  z-  flirtation  Vin  111.128 
(in  the  Old  Cy  as  expl"  of  avabhasati).  —  3.  sexual  inter- 
course J  1.396;  v.327  (°cara  v.  1.  for  ajjhavara);  Miln 
127  (an°). 

AjjhSclO^a  [pp.  of  ajjhacarati]  habitually  done  Vin  11.80 
sq.,  301. 

AjjhajlVa  [adhi  (ati  ?)  -f-  a  -f  jlv]  too  rigorous  or  strenuous 
a  livelihood  M  11.245  (+  adhipatimokkha). 

Ajjhapajjati  [adhi  +  a  -f  pad]  to  commit  an  offence,  to 
incur,  to  become  guilty  of  (ace.)  Vin  IV. 237.  pp.  ajjha- 
panna  (q.  v.). 

Ajjhapatti  (f.)  [abstr.  to  ajjhapajjati]  incurring  guilt  Dhs 
299  (an°). 

Ajjhapana'  (nt.)  [fr.  Caus.  11.  of  ajjheti]  teaching  of  the 
sacred   writ,  instruction  Miln  225. 

Ajjhapana'^  (nt.)  [a  +  jhapana  fr.  k§a]  burning,  conflag- 
ration J   VI.311. 

Ajjhapanna  [pp.  of  adhi  -f-  apajjati]  become  guilty  of  offence 
D  1.245;  '"-43;  S  11.270;  A  IV. 277,  280;  V.178,  181. 
an°  guiltless,  innocent  Vin  1. 1 03;  D  111.46;  S  11. 194,  269; 
A  V.181;  Miln  401.  For  all  passages  except  A  iv.277, 
280,  cp.  ajjhopanoa. 


AjjhapHita  [adhi  -F  a  -f  pilita]  harassed,  overpowered,  tor- 
mented PvA   180  (khuppipasaya  by  hunger  &  thirst). 

Ajjhabhava  [cp.  Sk.  adhyabhava]  eccessive  power,  predo- 
minance J   11.357. 

Ajjhabhavati  [adhi  +  a  -f  bhu,  in  meaning  of  abhi  -f  bhu] 
to  predominate  J   11.357. 

Ajjhayaka  [cp.  Sk.  adhyayaka,  cp.  ajjhayana]  (a  brahmin) 
engaged  in  learning  the  Veda  (mantajjhayaka  J  vi.209; 
SnA  192),  a  scholar  of  the  brahmanic  texts,  a  studious, 
learned  person  D  1.88,  120;  III. 94;  A  1.163;  ■"•223;  Sn 
140  ("'kula:  thus  for  ajjhayakula  Fsb.);  Th  I,  1171  ;  J  1.3; 
VI.201,  498;   DA  1.247. 

Ajjhaniha  (&  °riiha)  (adj.)  [to  adhi  +  a  -f  ruh]  growing 
up    over,    overwhelming   A  111.63  sq.  =:  S  v.96;  J   III. 399. 

Ajjharu|ha  (adj.)  [pp.  of  adhi  4-  a  -f  ruh]  grown  up  or 
high  over  J  111.399. 

Ajjharuhat!  [adhi  -f  arohati  cp.  atyarohati]  to  rise  into  the 
air,  to  climb  over,  spread  over  S  1.221  ^  Nett  173  (=: 
ajjhottharati  SA;  cp.  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  Kindred  Sayings  1.285). 

Ajjhavadati  see  accavadati. 

Ajjhavara  [fr.  adhi -|- a -[- var]  surrounding;  waiting  on, 
service,  retinue  J  v.322,  324,  326,  327  (expld  at  all  pas- 
sages by  parisa).  Should  we  read  ajjhacara?  Cp.  ajjhacara. 

Ajjhavasatar  [n.  ag.  to  ajjhavasati]  one  who  inhabits  D 
1.63  (agarat]). 

Ajjhavasati  [adhi  +  a  -f-  vas]  to  inhabit  (agarai)  a  house; 
i.  e.  to  be  settled  or  live  the  settled  life  of  a  householder) 
D  11.16;  M  1.353;  Vin  IV.224;  J  1.50;  Pug  57;  Miln 
348.  —  pp.  ajjhavuttha  (q.  v.). 

AjjhaVUttha  [cp.  Sk.  adhyusita;  pp.  of  ajjhavasati]  inhabited, 
occupied  (of  a  house)  Vin  11.210;  J  1.145;  "-333;  PvA 
24  (°ghara);  fig.  occupied  by  SnA   566  (=  anosita). 


Ajjhasaya  [fr.  adhi  -f  a 

on,  BSk.  however  adhy 
wish,  disposition,  bent 
tising);  J  1.88,  90; 
PvA  88,  116,  133  (adj. 
Sdhp  219,  518.  Kreq.  in 
to  his  wish,  as  he  wan 

Ajjhasayata  (f.)  [abstr. 
127  (ular"  great  desire 


-f  sri,    orig.    hanging  on,  leaning 

asaya  Divy  586]  intention,  desire, 

D    11.224    (adj.:    intent  on,  prac- 

11.352;    V.382;    DhsA    314,    334; 

dan°  intent  on  giving  alms),  168; 
phrase  ajjhasayanurupa  according 
ted  PvA  61,  106,   12S. 

to  ajjhasaya]  desire,  longing  PvA 
for  c.  loc). 


Ajjhaslta  [pp.  of  adhi  -f  a  -I-  srf]  intent  on,  bent  on  Miln 
361   (jhan°).  Cp.  ajjhosita  &  nissita. 

Ajjhittha  [pp.  of  ajjhesati]  requested,  asked,  invited  Vin 
1.I13  (an°  unbidden);  D  11.289  (Buddhaghosa  and  text 
read  ajjhitta);  Sn  p.  218  (=  ajjhesita  Nd^  16);  J  vi.292 
(=anatta  C);  DhA  IV.IOO  (v.  I.  abhijjhiltha).  See  also  an". 

Ajjhupagacchati  [adhi  -f  upa  -f  gam]  to  come  to,  to  reach, 
obtain ;  to  consent  to,  agree,  submit  Th  2,  474  (=  sam- 
paticchati  ThA  285);  J  11.403 ;  Miln  300;  pp.  ajjhupa- 
gata  (q.  v.). 

Ajjhupagata  [pp.  of  ajjhupagacchati]  come  to,  obtained, 
reached  A  v.87,  cp.   210;  y.187  sq. 

Ajjhupagamana  (nt.)  [adhi  -f  upa  -f  gam]  consent,  agree- 
ment, justification   Vin  11.97,   104. 

Ajjhupaharati  [adhi -|- upa  +  hf;  cp.  upaharati]  to  take 
(food)  to  oneself  J  11.293  (a"""-  ajjhupahari  =  ajjhohari  C). 

Ajjhupekkhati  [adhi  -\-  upa  +  ik$;  cp.  BSk.  adhyupek- 
sati]    1.    to   look   on    A    1.257;    M'ln  275.  —  2.  to  look 


Ajjhupekkhati 


12 


Ajjhoharana 


on  intently  or  with  care,  to  oversee,  to  take  care  of  A 
IV.45  (katth'aggi,  has  to  be  looked  after);  PvA  149  (sisaq 
colag  va).  —  3.  to  look  on  indifferently  to  be  indifferent. 
to  neglect  Vin  11.78  =  111.162,  cp.  J  1.147;  M  1.155; 
11.223;  A  111.194,  435;  J  V.229;  DhA  IV.125. 

Ajjhupekkhana  (nt.)  &  °a  (f.)  [abstr.  from  ajjhupekkhati] 
care,  diligence,  attention  Ps  1. 16;  n.119;  Vbh  230  sq.; 
DhA  IV. 3. 

Ajjhupekkhltar  [n.  ag.  to  ajjhupekkhati]  one  who  looks 
on  (carefully),  one  who  takes  care  or  controls,  an  over- 
seer, caretaker  S  v. 69  (sadhukai)),  324  (id.),  331  sq. ; 
Vbh   227. 

Ajjhupetl  [cp.  Sk.  abhyupeti ;  adhi  -j-  upa  +  I]  to  go  to 
meet,  to  receive  J  IV.440. 

Ajjhetj  [Sk.  gdhyayati,  Denom.  fr.  adhyaya]  to  be  anxious 
about,  to  fret,  worry  Sn  948  (socati+);  expld  at  Nd' 
433  i>y  nijjhayati,  at  SnA  568  by  abhijjhati  (gloss  BB 
gijjhati). 

Ajjhena  (nt.)  [Sk.  adhyayana,  see  also  ajjhayana]  study 
(esp.  of  the  Vedas)  M  Ill.i;  J  H.327  (as  v.  1.  to  be  pre- 
ferred to  ajjhesana);  111.114  (=japa);  v.io  (pi.  =  vede); 
VI.201  =207;  Vbh  353;  SnA  314  (mant'). 

-kujja   (°kuta   v.  1.?)   a  hypocrite,  a  pharisee  Sn  242; 
cp.  SnA  286. 

Ajjhesatl  (adhi  -4-  i§;  cp.  BSk.  adhyesate  Divy  160]  to 
request,  ask,  bid  DhA  IV. 18;  aor.  ajjhesi  Vin  11.200;  pp. 
ajjhittha  &  ajjbesita  (q.  v.),  with  which  cp.  pariyittha 
&  °esita. 

Ajjhesana  (f-)  [see  ajjhesatl]  request,  entreaty  Vin  1.6  =r' 
D  11.38  =  3  I.I 38;  J  11.327  (better  v.  1.  ajjhena). 

Ajjhesita  [pp.  of  ajjhesatl;  cp.  ajjhittha]  requested,  asked, 
bidden  Nd-  16  (=  ajjhittha). 

Ajjhokasa  [adhi  -j-  okasa]  the  open  air,  only  in  loc.  ajjho- 
kase  in  the  open  Vin  1.15;  S  1.212;  DhA  iv.ioo. 

Ajjhoga|ha  [pp.  of  ajjhogahati]  plunged  into,  immersed; 
having  entered  M  1.457  ;  S  I.20I ;  Miln  348. 

Ajjhogahati  (&  "gaheti)  [Sk.  *abhyavagahate;  adhi  (= 
abhi)  -)-  ava  -|-  gah]  to  plunge  into,  to  enter,  to  go  into 
D  I.IOI  (vanaq),  222  (samuddar));  M  I.359,  536;  Airi.75, 
368;  IV.356;  V.133;  Vin  III. 18;  J  1.7;  Nd'  152  (oga- 
hati-f-);  Miln  87  (samuddar));  300  (vanaq).  —  pp.  ajjho- 
galha  (q.  v.).  Cp.  pariyogahati. 

Ajjhothapeti  [adhi  -)-  ava  -|-  thapeti,  Caus.  of  sthS]  to  bring 
to  PvA   148  (gamaq),  where  we  should  read  "tthapeti. 

Ajjhotthata  [pp.  of  ajjhottharati]  spread  over;  covered, 
filled;  overcome,  crushed,  overpowered  J  1.363  (ajjhottata^, 
410;  V.91  (=  adhipanna);  DhA  1.278;  PvA  55;  Davs  v.5. 

Ajjhottharati  [adhi  +  ava  -f-  str]  to  cover  over,  spread 
out,  spread  over,  cover;  to  submerge,  flood  Vin  l.lli; 
J  1,61,  72,  73;  Miln  296,  336;  Dh  1.264;  1*355.  °ttha- 
riyati  to  be  overrun  with  (instr.),  tp  be  smothered,  to 
be  flooded  A  111.92  ^=  Pug  67 ;  aor.  ajjhotthari  VvA  48 
(gamapadeso :  was  flooded),  pp.  ajjhotthata  (q.  v.). 

Ajjhopanna  (?)  only  found  in  one  stock  phrase,  viz.  gathita 
(q.  v.)  muccbita  ajjhopanna  with  ref.  to  selfishness,  greed, 
bonds  of  craving.  The  reading  ajjhopanna  is  the  lectio 
difficilior,  but  the  accredited  reading  ajjhosana  seems  to 
be  clearer  and  to  harmonize  better  with  the  cognate 
ajjhosita  &  ajjhosana  (n.)  in  the  same  context.  The  con- 
fusion between  the  two  is  old-standing  and  hard  to  be 
accounted  for.  Trenckner  under  v.  I.  to  M  1. 162  on  p.  543 
gives  ajjhopanna  as  BB  (=  adhi-opanna).  The  MSS.  of 
Nd'  clearly  show  ajjhopanna  as  inferior  reading,  which 
may   well   be   attributable   to    the   very  frequent  SS  sub- 


stitution of  p  for  s  (see  Nd^  Introd.  XIX.).  Besides  this 
mixture  of  vv.  11.  with  s  and  p  there  is  another  confusion 
between  the  vv.  II.  ajjbapanna  and  ajjhopanna  which 
adds  to  the  complication  of  the  case.  However  since  the 
evidence  of  a  better  reading  between  these  two  prepond- 
erates for  ajjhopanna  we  may  consider  the  o  as  established, 
and,  with  a  little  more  clearness  to  be  desired,  may  in 
the  end  decide  for  ajjhosana  (q.  v.),  which  in  this  case 
would  have  been  liable  to  change  through  analogy  with 
ajjhapanoa,  from  which  it  took  the  a  and  p.  Cp.  also 
ajjhosita.  The  foil,  is  a  synopsis  of  readings  as  preferred 
or  confused  by  the  Ed.  of  the  var.  texts.  —  I.  ajjho- 
panna as  T.  reading:  M  1.162,  173,  369;  A  1. 74;  11.28; 
111.68,  242;  Md  75,  76;  DA  1.59;  as  v.  1.:  D  1.245.  — 
2.  ajjhosana  as  v.  1. :  A  1.74  (C.  expls-  ajjhosaya  gilitva 
thita);  Nd^  under  nissita  &  passim;  Ud  75,  76  (ajjho- 
sanna);  DA  1.59  (id.).  —  3.  ajjbapanna  as  T.  reading: 
D  1.245;  "l.43i  46;  S.  11.194,  270:  IV.332  (ajjbapanna); 
A  V.178,  181;  N'd2  under  nissita;  Miln  401;  as  V.  1.: 
M  1.162;  A  111.242;  Ud  75,  76. 

Ajjhobhavatl  [adhi  -|-  ava  -f  bhu,  Sk.  abhi°]  to  overcome, 
overpower,  destroy  J  11.80  (aor.  ajjhobhavi  :=  adhibhavi  C). 

Ajjhomaddatl  [adhi  -\-  ava  -f  mfd]  to  crush  down  A  iv.191, 
193- 

AjjhOmUCChita  [pp.  adhi  +  ara  -f  murch,  cp.  adhimuccita] 
stiffened  out  (in  a  swoon),  lying  in  a  faint  (?)  A  III. 57  sq. 
(v.  1.  ajjhomuncita  or  °muccita  better:  sarire  attached  to 
her  body,  clinging  to  her  b.). 

Ajjholambatl  [adhi  -f  ava  +  lamb]  lo  hang  or  hold  on 
to  (ace),  to  cling  to  S  111137;  M  111.164  =  Nett  179, 
cp.  Sdhp  284  &  296. 

Ajjhosa  =  ajjhosaya,  in  verse  only  as  ajjhosa  titthati  to 
cleave  or  cling  to  S  iv.73;  Th  1,  98,  794. 

Ajjhosatl  [adhi  -f-  ava  -f-  sayati,  s8,  to  bind,  pp.  sita  :  see 
ajjhosita]  to  be  bound  to,  to  be  attached,  bent  on;  to 
desire,  cleave  to,  indulge  in.  Fut.  ajjbosissati  (does  it 
belong  here?)  M  1.328  (c.  ace.  pathavir),  better  as  ajjhe- 
satl). grd.  ajjhositabha  M  1.109  (+  abhinanditabba,  v.  1. 
"etabba);  DhsA  5  (id.);  ger.  ajjhosaya  (q.  v.)  pp.  ajjho- 
sita (q.  v.). 

Ajjhosana  (nt.)  cleaving  to  (earthly  joys),  attachment,  D 
11.58  sq.;  111.289;  M  1.498  (+ abhinandana);  S  111.187; 
A  1.66;  II. 1 1  (ditthi°,  ksma°  -j-  tanha).  In  comb"-  with 
(iccha)  and  muccha  at  Nd*  under  chanda  &  nissita  and 
tanha  (see  also  ajjhopanna),  and  at  Dlis  1059  of  labhx, 
(the  expl"-  at  DhsA  363,  370,  from  as  to  eat,  is  popular 
etym.)  Nett  23  sq.  (of  tanha). 

Ajjhosaya  [ger.  of  ajjhosati,  cp.  BSk.  adhyavasaya  tisthati 
Uivy  37,  534]  being  lied  to,  hanging  on,  attached  to, 
only  in  phrase  a.  titthati  (-j-  abhinandati,  same  in  Divy) 
M  1.266;  S.  iv.36  sq.;  60,  71  sq.;  Miln  6g.  See  also 
ajjhosa. 

Ajjhosita  [cp.  Sk.  adhyavasita,  from  adhi  -|-  ava  -f  sfi;  but 
sita  is  liable  to  confusion  with  sita  =3  Sk.  srita,  also  through 
likeness  of  meaning  with  esita;  see  ajjhasita  &  ajjhesita] 
hanging  on,  cleaving  to,  being  bent  on,  (c.  loc.)  S  11.94 
(-)- mamSyita);  A  11.25  (dittha  suta  mufa +);  Nd*  75, 
106,  163  =  Nd-  under  nissita:  Th  2,  470  (asare  =:  tan- 
havasena  abhinivittha  ThA  284);  Pv  iv.8*(mayhai)  ghare  ^ 
tanhabhinivisena  abhinivittha  PvA  267 ;  v.  1.  BB  ajjhesita, 
SS  ajjhasita).  -an°  S  iv.213;  v.319;  Nd'  411;  Miln  74 
(pabbajita). 

Ajjhohata  [pp-  of  ajjhoharati]  having  swallowed  Sdhp  610 
(balisaq  maccho  viya:  like  a  fish  the  fishhook). 

Ajjhoharana  (nt.)  =  ajjhohara   I.   A  v.324;   J  vi.213. 


Ajjhoharaniya 


13 


AfSfla 


Ajjhoharaniya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  ajjhoharati]  something  fit  to 
eat,  eatable,  for  eating  J  vi.258;  DhA  1.284. 

Ajjhoharati  [Sk.  abhyavaharati ;  adhi  (=  abhi)  -f-  ava  +  hfj 
to  swallow,  eat,  take  as  food  M  1.245;  J  1460;  ".293; 
vi.205,213;  Miln366;  PvA  283  (aor.)-pp.  ajjboba^a  (q.v.). 

Ajjhohara  [Sk.  abhyavahSra]  1.  taking  food,  swallowing, 
eating  &  drinking  Vin  IV.233;  Miln  176,  366.  —  2.  N. 
of  a  fabulous  fish  (swallower";  cp.  timingala)  J  v.462. 

Ancati  J  1.417,  read  anchati  (see  next). 

Aiichat]  [in  meaning  ^  akaddhati,  which  latter  is  also  the 
Sk.  gloss  (akarsayati)  to  the  Jain  Prk.  arjchavei  =:  anchati : 
see  Morris,  J.  P.  T.  S.  1893,  60]  to  pull,  drag,  pull  along, 
to  turn  on  a  lathe  D  11. 291  (bhamakaro  dighai]  a.,  where 
K  has  note:  anjanlo  ti  pi  acchanto  ti  pi  patho)  ^  M  1.56 
(vv.  11.  p.  532  acch°  &  ajij");  Th  I,  750  (ancami  T.,  v.l. 
annami).  Anchati  should  also  be  read  at  J  I  417  for  uda- 
kai)  a&canti  (in  expl"-  of  udancani  pulling  the  water  up 
from  a  well,  q.  v.),  where  it  corresponds  to  udakai] 
akkaddbati  in  the  same  sentence. 

Anja  (adv.)  [orig.  imper.  of  anjati' ;  cp.  Sk.  anjasS  (instr.) 
quickly,  Goth,  anaks  suddenly,  lit.  with  a  pull  or  jerk] 
pull  on!  go  on!  gee  up!  J  1.192. 

Aiijatl'  [=  Sk.  rnjali,  rjyati  to  stretch,  pull  along,  draw 
out,  erect ;  cp.  Sk.  rju  straight,  cans,  irajyati ;  Gr.  ipiyu ; 
Lat.  rego,  rectus  ^  erect.  See  also  P.  uju,  anchati,  ajjita, 
Snaiija-anejja].  See  anja,  anjaya,  anjali,  anjasa. 

Anjati'^  &  Aiijeti  [=  Sk.  anjayati,  Cans,  of  anakti  to  smear 
etc.;  cp.  Sk.  anji  ointment,  ajya  butter;  Lat.  unguo  to 
anoint,  unguentum  ointment;  Ohg.  ancho  =  Ger.  Anke 
butter]  to  smear,  anoint,  paint  S  11. 281;  J  iv.2i9  (akkhini 
anjetva,  v.l.  BB  ancitva).  Caus.  11.  anjapetl  DhA  1.21. — 
pp.  aSjita  (q.  v.). 

Aiijana  (nt.)  [from  anjati'^]  ointment ,  esp.  a  collyrium 
for  the  eyes,  made  of  antimony,  adj.  anointed,  smeary; 
glossy,  black  (cp.  kanha  11.  and  kala'  note).  —  I.  Vin 
1.203  (''"S  kinds  viz.  kal",  ras°,  sot°,  geruka,  kapalla); 
D  1.7,  12;  DA  1.98  (khgr°);  284;  DhA  111.354  (akkhi° 
eye-salve).  —  2.  glossy,  jet-black  J  1. 194;  11.369;  v.416. 
The  reading  anjana  at  A  iv.468  is  wrong,  it  should  be 
corrected  into  thanamajjanamattag.  See  also  pacc°.  In 
meaning  collyrium  box  at  Th  2,  413  (=  afijana-nali  ThA 
267);  DhA  11.25. 

-akkbiba  with  anointed  eyes  Th  I,  960.  -upapisana 
perfume  to  mix  with  ointment  Vin  1.203;  Il-li2.  -cunna 
aromatic  powder  DhsA  13.  -nali  an  ointment  tube,  col- 
lyrium box  ThA  267.  -rukkba  N.  of  a  tree  ("black" 
tree)  J  1.33 1.  -vanna  of  the  colour  of  collyrium,  i.e. 
shiny,  glossy,  dark,  black  D  n.i8  (lomani);  J  1.138  (kesa), 
194;  11.369;  PvA   258  (vana). 

Anjani  (f.)  [fr.  afijana]  a  box  for  ointment,  a  collyrium  pot 
Vin  1.203,  204;  II. 135;  IV.  168}  M  11.65  =  Th  'i  773- 

Anjanisalaka  (f.)  a  stick  to  put  the  ointment  on  with  Vin 
1.203;  "135;  J  I1I-419- 

Anjaya  (adj.)  [from  anjati']  straight  J  111.12  (vv.  11.  ajjava 
&  and  ajjava  better?)  expH  by  C.  as  ujuka,  akutila.  See 
also  ajjava.  Should  we  assume  misreading  for  anjasa  !> 

Anjali  [cp.  Sk.  aiijali,  fr.  anjali i]  extending,  stretching  forth, 
gesture  of  lifting  up  the  hands  as  a  token  of  reverence 
(cp.  E.  to  "tender"  one's  respect),  putting  the  ten  fingers 
together  and  raising  them  to  the  head  (VvA  7 :  dasa- 
nakha-samodhana-samujjalar)  arijaliq  paggayha).  Only  in 
stock  phrases  (a.)  anjalir)  panameti  to  bend  forth  the 
outstretched  hands  Vin  11. 188;  D  1.118;  Sn352;  Sn  p.  79. 
(b.)  °t)  pagganhati  to  perform  the  a.  salutation  J  1.54; 
DhA  IV.212;  VvA  7,  312  (sirasmir)  on  one's  head); 
PvA  93.  (c.)  °ij  karoti  id.  PvA  178;  cp.  katanjali  (adj.) 


with  raised  hands  Sn   1023;  J  I.I 7;  PvA  50,  and  anja- 
likata  id.  Pv  11.1220.  Cp.  panjali 

-kamma  respectful  salutation,  as  above  A  1.123;  11.180; 
IV.130;  Vv  788,  83";  DhA  1.32.  -karaniya  (adj.)  that 
is  worthy  of  being  thus  honoured  D  lli-S;  A  11.34;  111.36; 
IV.13  sq.;  It  88. 

Atijalika  (f )  [^  anjali]  the  raising  of  the  hands  as  a  sign 
of  respectful  salutation  Vv  l»  (expH  at  VvA  24  as  dasa- 
nakha-samodhSna  samujjalai)  anjalii}  sirasi  pagganhantl 
guna-visitthanai)  apacayanai)  akSsii)). 

Anjasa  [Sk.  anjasa  (?).  Cp.  arjava  =^  P.  ajjava,  see  anjati' 
&  anjaya]  straight,  straightforward  (of  a  road)  D  I.235 ; 
J  1.5;  Th  2,  99;  Vv  5oa>  (cp.  VvA  215);  VvA  84  (= 
akutila);  Mhvs  25,  5;  Miln  217;  Sdhp  328,  595.  Cp. 
panjasa. 

ASjlta  [Sk.  ankta  &  anjayita,  pp.  of  anjeti]  smeared,  anointed 
J  1.77  (su-anjitani  akkhini);  iv.421  (anjit'akkha). 

Aiina  (pron.)  [Vedic  anya,  with  compar.  suff.  ya;  Goth. 
an|)ar;  Ohg.  andar;  formation  with  n  analagous  to  those 
with  1  in  Gr.  itAAo?  (aAJo^),  Lat.  alius  (cp.  alter),  Goth, 
aljis  Ags.  elles  =  E.  else.  From  demonstr.  base  *eno,  see 
na'  and  cp.  a']  another  etc.  —  A.  By  itself:  I.  other, 
not  the  same,  different,  another,  somebody  else  (opp. 
oneself)  Vin  ill. 144  (annena,  scil.  maggena,  gaccbati  to 
take  a  different  route);  Sn  459,  789,  904;  Dh  158  (opp. 
altanaq),  165;  J  1.151  (opp.  attano);  11.333  (anfiar)  vya- 
karoti  give  a  diff.  answer).  —  2.  another  one,  a  second; 
nt.  else,  further  Sn  1052  (=  uttarii]  nt.  Nd*  17);  else 
J  1.294.  aniiai)  kinci  (indef)  anything  else  J  1.151.  yo 
an5o  every  other,  whoever  else  J  1.256.  —  3.  anne  (pi.) 
(the)  others,  the  rest  Sn  189,  663,  911;  Dh  43,  252, 
355  j  J  I  254.  —  B.  del. in  correlation :  i .  copulative,  anna .  . 
anna  the  one  ..  the  other  (.  .  the  third  etc.);  this,  that 
&  the  other;  some  ..  some  Vin  1.15;  Miln  40;  etc.  — 
2.  reciprocative  anno  annar),  annamanSar),  aniionnai)  one 
another,  each  other,  mutually,  reciprocally  (in  ordinary 
construction  &  declension  of  a  noun  or  adj.  in  sg. ;  cp. 
Gr.  aAA^Awv,  aAAi)Aoi/«  in  //.).  (a.)  anno  anSai]  Dh  165. 
(b.)  annamanna  (cp.  BSk.  auyamanya  M  Vastu  11.436), 
as  pron. :  n'alai)  anuamannassa  sukb3ya  va  dukkhaya  vl 
D  1.56  :=  S  111.211.  n'afinamannassa  dukkhaij  iccheyya  do 
not  wish  evil  to  each  other  Sn  148.  dandehi  anuamaSnai) 
upakkamanti  (approach  each  other)  M  1.86  =  Nd*  199. 
°i)  agaravo  viharati  A  111.247.  dve  jana  °q  ghatayiqsu 
(slew  each  other)  J  1.254.  aiinamanBaq  hasanti  J  V.Hi; 
"q  musale  banlva  J  v.267.  °q  dandabhigatena  PvA  58; 
or  adj. :  aiinamaniiaq  veraq  bandhiqsu  (established  mutual 
enmity)  J  11.353;  °0  piyasaqvasaq  vasiqsu  J  II. 153;  anna- 
mannaq  accayaq  desetvS  (their  mutual  mistake)  DhA  I.57; 
or  adv.  dve  pi  aiinamanBaq  patibaddha  citta  ahesuq  (in 
love  with  each  other)  J  III. 1 88;  or  °^:  annamanna-pac- 
caya  mutually  dependent,  interrelated  Ps  U  49,  58.  — 
(c.)  annonna  ("— )  J  v.251  ("nissila);  Davs  v.45  ("bhinna). 
—  3.  disjunctive  aiina  .  .  anna  one  .  .  the  other,  this 
one  .  .  .  that  one,  different,  different  from  aniiaq  jivaq  . . 
aiiBaq  sariraq  one  is  the  soul  . .  the  other  is  the  body, 
i.  e.  the  soul  is  different  from  the  body  D  1.157;  M  1.430; 
A  V.193;  anfia  va  saiiiia  bhavissati  aQiio  atla  D  1.187. 
Thus  also  in  phrase  annena  aiinai)  opposite,  the  con- 
trary, differently,  contradictory  (lit.  other  from  that  which 
is  other)  Vin  11.85  (paticarati  make  counter-charges);  D 
'■57  (vyakasi  gave  the  opposite  or  contradictory  reply); 
Miln  171  (aiiiiaq  kayiramanaq  aniiena  sambharati).  — 
ananna  (i)  not  another,  i.e.  the  same,  self-same,  identical 
M  1.256  (=  ayaq).  —  (2)  not  another,  i.  e.  alone,  by 
oneself,  oneself  only  Sn  65  ("posin;  opp.  paraq)  =  Nd  4, 
cp.  Nd*  36.  —  (3)  not  another,  i.  e.  no  more,  only,  alone 
Sn  p.  106  (dve  va  gatiyo  bhavanti  anaSiiS:  and  no  other 
or  no  more,  only  two).  See  also  under  cpds. 

-adisa  different  J  vi.212,  °ta  difference  PvA  243. 
-kbantlka   acquiescing   in   diff.    views,   following  another 


Anna 


U 


AtanI 


faith  (see  khanlika)  D  1.187;  M  1487.  -titthiya  an  ad- 
herent of  another  sect,  a  non-Buddhist.;  D  111.115;  M 
1.494,  512;  P  "-2',  32  sq.,  119;  111.116  sq.;  iv.51,  228; 
V.6,  27  sq.;  A  1.65,  240;  11.176;  iv.35  sq.;  Vin  1.60; 
J  1.93;  11.415-  -ditthika  having  diff.  views  (combd-  with 
aiina-khantika)  D  1.187;  M  1.487.  -neyya  (an'^)  not  to 
be  guided  by  somebody  else,  i.  e.  independent  in  one's 
views,  having  attained  the  right  knowledge  by  oneself 
(opp.  para°)  Sn  55,  213,  364.  -mano  (an")  (adj.)  not 
setting  one's  heart  upon  others  Vv  li*  (see  VvA  58). 
-vada  holding  other  views,  an°  (adj.)  Dpvs  iv.24.  -va- 
daka  one  who  gives  a  diff.  account  of  things,  one  who 
distorts  a  matter,  a  prevaricator  Vin  lv.36.  -vihita  being 
occupied  with  something  else,  distracted,  absent-minded 
Vin  IV.269;  DhA  111.352,  381;  "ta  distraction,  absent- 
mindedness  DhA  1.181.  -sarana  (an°)  not  betaking  one- 
self to  others  for  refuge,  i.  e.  of  independent,  sure  know- 
ledge S  111.42  =:  V.154.  -sita  dependent  or  relying  on 
others  Sn  825. 

Annatama  (pron.  adj.)  [afiiia -f- superl.  suff.  tama;  see  also 
aiifiatara]  one  out  of  many,  the  one  or  the  other  of,  a 
certain,  any  Mhvs  38,   14. 

Aiifiatara  (pron.  adj.)  [Sk.  anyatara,  anna  -f-  compar.  suff. 
tara,  cp.  Lat.  alter,  Goth,  anjiar  etc.]  one  of  a  certain 
number,  a  certain,  somebody,  some;  often  used  (like  eka) 
as  indef.  article  "a".  Very  frequent,  e.g.  Sn  35,  210;  It 
103;  Dh  137,  157;  J  1.221,  253;  11.132  etc.  devannatara 
a  certain  god,  i.  e.  any  kind  of  god  S  IV.180  =:  A  iv.46l. 

Anfiattha  (adv.)  [from  aiina  =  aSnatra,  adv.  of  place,  cp. 
kattha,  ettha]  somewhere  or  anywhere  else,  elsewhere 
(either  place  where  or  whereto)  J  1.291;  11.154;  DhsA 
163;  DhA  1.212;  111.351;   PvA  45;  Mhvs  4,  37;  22,  14.' 

Annatra  (adv.)  [anya  -\-  tra,  see  also  aniiattha]  elsewhere, 
somewhere  else  J  v.252;  Pv  iv.iOJ.  In  comp"-  also  = 
aiiiia°,  e.  g.  aSnatra-yoga  (adj.)  following  another  discipline 
D  1. 187;  M  1.487.  —  As  prep.  c.  abl.  (and  instr.)  but, 
besides,  except,  e.g.  a.  imina  tapo-pakkamena  D  1.168; 
kii)  karaniyar)  a.  dhammacariyaya  S  i.ioi;  ko  nu  aiiiiatra- 
m-ariyehi  who  else  but  the  Nobles  Sn  886  (=  thapetva 
saniia-raattena  SnA  555).  -kit)  annatra  what  but,  i.  e. 
what  else  is  the  cause  but,  or:  this  is  due  to;  but  for 
D  1.90  (vusitava-mani  k.  a.  avusitatta);  S  1.29  (k.  k.  a. 
adassana  except  from  blindness);  Sn   206  (id.). 

Anfiathatta  (nt.)  [aiiiiatha  -f-  tta]  I.  change,  alteration  S 
111.37;  IV.40;  A  1.153;  111.66;  Kvu  227  (=  jara  C,  cp. 
JCvu  trsl.  55  n.  2);  Miln  209.  —  2.  difference  J  1.147; 
It  II.  —  3.  erroneous  supposition,  mistake  Via' 11.2;  S 
III.91 ;  IV.329.  —  4.  fickleness,  change  of  mind,  doubt, 
wavering,  M  1.448,  457  (-f  don\anassa);  J  1.33  (cittaq); 
PvA  195  (cittassa). 

Afiiiatha  (adv.)  [aiiiia  -|-  tha]  in  a  different  manner,  other- 
wise, differently  S  1.24;  Sn  588,  757;  DhsA  163;  Pv.\ 
125,  133.  anannatha  without  mistake  Vv  44 '8;  anan- 
natha  (nt.)  certainty,  truth  Ps  11.104  (=  tatha). 

-bhava  (i)  a  different  existence  A  11.10;  It  9  =  94; 
Sq  729i  74°)  752;  (2)  a  slate  of  difference;  i.e.  change, 
alteration,  unstableness  D  1.36;  S  11.274;  '"-S,  16,  42; 
Vbh  379.  -bhavia  based  on  difference  S  111.225  sq.; 
rv.23  sq.,  66  sq.;  an°  free  from  difference  Vin  1.36. 

Aiinadatthu  (adv.)  [lit.  aiinad  atlhu  let  there  be  anything 
else,  i.e.  be  it  what  it  will,  there  is  nothing  else,  all, 
everything,  surely]  part,  of  affirmation  =  surely,  all-round, 
absolutely  (ekaqsa-vacane  nipato  DA  l.iil)  only,  at  any 
rate  D  1.91  ;  11.284;  Sn  828  (na  h^  annadatth'  atthi  pa- 
saqsa-labha,  expld- SnA  541  as  na  hi  ettha  pasaijsa-labhato 
afirio  attho  atthi,  cp.  also  Nd'  l68);  Miln  133;  VvA  58; 
PvA  97,   114. 

-dasa  sure-seeing,  seeing  everything,  all  pervading  D 
1. 18;  HI.135,  185;  A  11.24;  111.202;  IV.89,  105;  It  15. 


Anfiada  (adv.)  [anna  -(-  da,  cp.  kada,  tada,  yada]  at  another 
lime,  else,  once  S  IV. 285  ;  J  v.12;  Dh.\   IV.125. 

Anna  (f)  [Sk.  ajiia,  ^  5  +  jfia,  cp.  ajanati]  knowledge, 
recognition,  perfect  knowledge,  philosophic  insight,  know- 
ledge par  excellence,  viz.  Arahantship,  saving  knowledge, 
gnosis  (cp.  on  term  Cotiipend.  176  n.  3  and  Psalms  of 
Brethren  introd.  xxxiii.)  M  1.445  j  S  1.4  (sammad°),  24 
(annaya  nibbuta);  11.221;  v. 69,  129  (ditth'eva  dhamme), 
I33i  237;  A  111.82,  143,  192;  V.108;  It  39  sq.,  53,  104; 
Dh  75,  96;  Kh  vii.ii;  Miln  334.  —  annai)  vyakaroti 
to  manifest  ones  Arahantship  (by  a  discourse  or  by  mere 
exclamation)  Vin  1.183;  S  11.51  sq.,  120;  IV.139;  v.222 ; 
J   1.140;  11.333.   See  also  arahatta. 

-atthika  desirous  of  higher  knowledge  Pv  iv.i'*.  -ara- 
dbana  the  attainment  of  full  insight  M  1.479.  -indriya 
the  faculty  of  perfect  knowledge  or  of  knowledge  made 
perfect  D  111.219;  S  v.204;  I'  53;  P"g  2;  Dhs  362, 
505i  552;  Nett  15,  54,  60.  -citta  the  thought  of  gnosis, 
the  intention  of  gaining  Arahantship  S  11.267;  A  111.437. 
-pativedha  comprehension  of  insight  Vin  11.238.  -vimok- 
kha  deliverance  by  the  highest  insight  Sn  1105,  1107 
(Nd2  19:   vuccati  arahatta-viinokkho). 

Annana  (nt.)  [a  -j-  nana]  ignorance ;   see  nana  3  e. 

Aiinanaka  (nt.)  [Demin.  of  aiinana]   ignorance  Vin  IV.144. 

Annanin(adj.)  [a  +  nanin]  ignorant,  not  knowing  DhA  III.  106. 

Aniiata'  [pp.  of  ajanati,  q.  v.]  known,  recognised  Sn  699. 
an°  what  is  not  known,  in  phrase  anaiinata-niiassamf  t' 
indriya  the  faculty  of  him  (who  belives):  "I  shall  know 
what  is  not  known  (yet)"  D  ni.219;  S  v.204;  ''  53) 
Pug  2;  Dhs  296  (cp.  Dhs  trsl.  86);  Nett  15,  54,  60,  191. 
-manin  one  who  prides  himself  in  having  perfect  know- 
ledge, one  who  imagines  to  be  in  possession  of  right 
insight  A  111.175   sq.;  Th   I,  953. 

Aiinata^  [a  -j-  tiata]  unknown,  see  iiata. 

Aniiatatca'  [a  -j-  iialaka,  cp.  Sk.  ajfiati]  he  who  is  not  a 
kinsman  DhA  1.222. 

Afinataka^  (a<5j)  [Demin.  of  aniiata']  unknown,  unrecog- 
nisable, only  in  phrase  "yesena  in  unknown  form,  in 
disguise  J   1.14;   111.116;  v. 102. 

Aniiatar  [n.  ag.  to  ajanati]  one  who  knows,  a  knower  of 
D  11.286;  M  1. 169;  S  i.loS  (dhammassa);  Kvu  561. 

Aniiatavin  (adj.  -n.)  [from  ajanati]  one  who  has  complete 
insight   DhsA   291. 

-indriya  ("tav'  indr.)  the  faculty  of  one  whose  know- 
ledge is  made  perfect  Dhs  555  (cp.  Dhs  trsl.  150)  and 
same  loci  as  under  antiindriya  (see  aiina). 

Aiinatukaina  (adj.)  [a  +  jiiatui)  -f  kama]  desirous  of  gaining 
right  knowledge  A  in. 192.  See  ajanati. 

Afinaya  [ger.  of  ajanati,  q.  v.  for  detail]  recognising,  knowing, 
in  the  conviction  of  S  1.24;  A  111.41;   Dh  275,  411. 

Annionna  see  aniia  B  2   c. 

Anhamana  [Sk.  asnana,  ppr.  med.  of  asnati,  aS  to  eat] 
eating,  taking  food;  enjoying:  only  SS  at  Sn  240;  all 
MSS  at  239  have  asamana.  SnA  284  expls-  by  aharayamana. 

Atata  [BSk.  atata  (e.  g.  Divy  67),  prob.  to  at  roam  about. 
On  this  notion  cp.  description  of  roaming  about  in  Niraya 
at  Nd'  405  bottom]  N.  of  a  certain  purgatory  or  Niraya 
A   V.I 73  =  Sn  p.   126. 

Atanaka  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  atana,  to  at]  roaming  about,  wild 
J  V.105  (°gavi). 

Atani  (f.)  a  support  a  stand  inserted  under  the  leg  of  a 
bedstead  Vin  IV.168;  Sam.   Pas.  on  Pac.  14  (quoted  Min. 


Atanl 


IS 


Attha 


Pat.  86  and  Vin  iv.357);  DhA  1.234;  J  >i-387,  425,  484 
supports  of  a  seat.  Morris^  J.  P.  T.  S.  1884,  6g  compares 
Marathi  adani  a  three-ltgged  stand.  See  also  Vin  Texts  11.53. 

Atala  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  atta  &  att.llaka  stronghold]  solid,  firm, 
strong,  only  in  phrase  ataliyo  upahana  strong  sandals  M 
II. 155  (vv.  11.  pataliye  &  agaliyo)  =  S  1.226  (vv.  11.  ata- 
liyo &  ataliko).  At  the  latter  passage  Bdhgh.  expl^.  ganan- 
gan-iipahana,  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  {A'indrett  Sayings  1.291)  trsls. 
"buskined  shoes". 

Atavi  (f.)  [Sk.  atavi:  Non-Aryan,  prob.  Dravidian]  I.  forest, 
woods  J  1.306;  II. 117;  III. 220;  DhA  1. 13;  PvA  277.  — 
2.  inhabitant  of  the  forest,  man  of  the  woods,  wild  tribe 
J  VI. 55  (=  atavicora  C). 

-rakkhika  guardian  of  the  forest  J  11.335.  -sankhepa 
at  A  1.178  =  111.66  is  prob.  faulty  reading  for  v.  1.  "san- 
kopa  "inroad  of  savage  tribes". 

A^a'  [cp.  see  attaka]  a  platform  to  be  used  as  a  watch- 
tower  Vin  1. 140;   DA  1.209. 

Atta^  [cp-  Sk.  artha,  see  also  attha  5  b]  lawsuit,  case,  cause 
Vin  IV.224;  J  11.2,  75;  IV.129  (°q  vinicchinati  to  judge  a 
cause),  150  (°i)  tfreti  to  see  a  suit  through);  vi.336. 

Atta'  [Sk.  arta,  pp.  of  ardati,  fd  to  dissolve,  afflict  etc. ; 
cp.  Sk.  ardra  (=  P.  adda  and  alia);  Gr.  Hfiu  to  moisten, 
'ifix  dirt.  See  also  attiyati  &  attita]  distressed,  tormented, 
afflicted;  molested,  plagued,  hurt  -Sn  694  (-f-  vyasanagata ; 
Sn.A  489  atura);  Th  2,  439  (=  attita  ThA  270),  441 
(=pi!ita  ThA  271);  J  iv.293  (=  atii'ra  C);  Vv  So"  (= 
attita  upadduta  VvA  3H).  Often  — °:  inatta  oppressed 
by  debt  M  1.463;  Miln  32;  chat^  tormented  by  hunger 
Vv.\  76;  vedan"  afflicted  by  pain  Vin  11.61 ;  ill. 100;  J 
1.293;  stlcik"  (read  for  sucikattha)  pained  by  stitch  Pv  111.2'. 
-ssara  cry  of  distress  Vin  111.105;  S  11.255;  J  '-265; 
11. 1 17;  Miln  357;  PvA  285. 

Attaka  [Demin.  of  atta']  a  platform  to  be  used  as  a  watch- 
house  on  piles,  or  in  a  tree  Vin  1.173;  ii-4i6;  111.322, 
372;  DA  1.209. 

Attana  at  Vin  II.  106  is  obscure,  should  it  not  rather  be 
read  with  Bdhgh  as  atthana?  (cp.  Bdhgh  on  p.  315). 

Attala  [from  atta]  a  watch-tower,  a  room  at  the  top  of  a 
house,  or  above  a  gate  (kotthaka)  Th  I,  863;  J  III. 1 60; 
V.373;  Miln  I,  330;  DhA  111.488. 

Attalaka  [Sk.  attalaka]  =  atiala;  J  11.94,  220,  224;  VI. 390, 
433;  Miln  67,"8i. 

Attita  (&  occasionally  addita,  e.g.  Pv  11. 6-;  Th  2,  77,  89; 
Th  I,  406)  [Sk.  ardita,  pp.  of  ardayati,  Caus.  of  ardati, 
see  atta']  pained,  distressed,  grieved,  terrified  Th  I,  157; 
J  11.436;  IV.85  (v.  1.  addhita);  v. 84;  VvA  311;  ThA  270; 
Mhvs  I,  25;  6,  21 ;  Dpvsi.66;  1123;  XIII.9;  Sdhp  205. — 
See  remarks  of  Morris  J.  P.  T.  S.   1886,   104,  &  1887.  47. 

Attiyati  &  Attiyati  [Denom.  fr.  atta',  q.  v.]  to  be  in  trouble 
or  anxiety,  to  be  worried,  to  be  incommodated,  usually 
combd.  with  harayati,  e.  g.  D  1.213  (+  jigucchati);  S 
1. 131;  M  1.423;  Pv  i.io2  (=  atta  dukkhitS  PvA  48), 
freq.  in  ppr.  attiyamana  harayamana  (-f  jigucchamana) 
Vin  11.292;  J  1.66,  292;  It  43;  Ndi  566;  Ps  1. 159.  — 
Spelling  sometimes  addiyami,  e.g.  Th  I,  140.  —  pp.  attita 
&  addita. 

Attiyana  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  ardana,  to  attiyati]  fright,  terror, 
amazement  DhA  11. 179. 

Attha'  [Vedic  astau,  old  dual,  Idg.  •octou,  pointing  to  a 
system  of  counting  by  tetrads  (see  also  nava);  Av.  aSta, 
Gr.  ixTu,  Lat.  octo,  Goth,  ahtau  =:  Ohg.  ahto,  Ger.  acht, 
E.  eight]  num.  card.,  eight,  decl.  like  pi.  of  adj.  in-a. 
A.  The  number  in  objective  significance,  based  on  natural 
phenomena:    see    cpds.    "angula,    "nakha,    °pada,    °pada. 


B.  The  number  in  subjective  significance.  —  (l)  As  mark  of 
respectability  and  honour,  based  on  the  idea  of  the  double 
square:  (a)  in  meaning  "a  couple"  attha  matakukkute  attha 
jiva-k.  gahetva  (with  8  dead  &  8  live  cocks;  eight  instead  of 
2  because  gift  intended  for  a  king)  DhA  1.213.  sanghassa  a 
salakabhattai]  dapesi  VvA  75  =  DhA  III. 104.  a.  pinda- 
patani  adadaij  Vv  348.  a.  vattha-yugani  (a  double  pair  as 
offering)  PvA  232,  a  thera  PvA  32.  —  The  highest  res- 
pectability is  expressed  by  8X8  =  64,  and  in  this  sense 
is  freq.  applied  to  gifts.,  where  the  giver  gives  a  higher 
potency  of  a  pair  (2').  Thus  a  "royal"  gift  goes  under 
the  name  of  sabb-atthakai)  danar)  (8  elephants,  8  horses, 
8  slaves  etc.)  where  each  of  8  constituents  is  presented 
in  8  exemplars  DhA  11.45,  4^,  71-  In  the  same  sense 
atth^  attha  kahapana  (as  gift)  Dh.A  11. 41;  atth-atthaka 
dibbakanfia  Vv  67'  (=  catusatthi  VvA  290);  atthatthaka 
Dpvs  VI. 56.  Quite  conspicuous  is  the  meaning  of  a 
"couple"  in  the  phrase  satt-attha  7  or  8  =  a  couple, 
e.g.  sattattha  divasa,  a  week  or  so  J  1.86;  J  II.IOI  ;  VvA 
264  (saqvacchaia  years).  —  (b.)  used  as  definite  measure 
of  quantity  &  distance,  where  it  also  implies  the  respect- 
ability of  the  gift,  8  being  the  lowest  unit  of  items  that 
may  be  given  decently.  Thus  freq.  as  attha  kahapana 
J  1.483;  iv.138;  VvA  76;  Miln  291.  —  In  distances:  a. 
karisS  DhA  11.80;  iv.217;  PvA  258;  a.  usabha  J  iv.142. — 
(c.)  in  comb"-  with  100  and  1000  it  assumes  the  meaning 
of  "a  great  many",  hundreds,  thousands.  Thus  attha  satar) 
800,  Sn  227.  As  denotation  of  wealt  (cp.  below  under 
18  and  80):  a-°sata-sahassa-vibhava  DhA  IV.7.  But  attha- 
sata  at  S  iv.232  means  108  (3  X  3^),  probably  also  at 
J  V.377.  —  attha  sahassar)  8000  J  v.39  (naga).  The  same 
meaning  applies  to  80  as  well  as  to  its  use  as  unit  in 
comb"-  with  any  other  decimal  (18,  28,  38  etc.):  (a)  80 
(asTti)  a  great  many.  Here  belong  the  80  smaller  signs 
of  a  Mahapurisa  (see  anuvyaiijana),  besides  the  32  main 
signs  (see  dvattirjsa)  Vv.\  213  etc.  Freq.  as  measure  of 
riches^  e.g.  80  waggon  loads  Pv  II. 7';  asTti-kotivibhava 
DhA  III.  129;  PvA  196;  aslti  hatlh'  ubbedho  rasi  (of  gold) 
VvA  66,  etc.  See  further  references  under  asiti.  —  (|3)  The 
foil,  are  examples  of  8  with  other  decimals:  18  attha- 
dasa  (only  M  111.239:  manopavicaia)  &  at^harasa  (this 
the  later  form)  VvA  213  (avenika-buddhadhamma :  Bha- 
gavant's  qualities);  as  measure  J  vi.432  (18  hands  high, 
of  a  fence) ;  of  a  great  mass  or  multitue :  attharasa  kotiyo 
or  °koti,  18  kotis  J  1.92  ^of  gold),  227;  iv.378  ("dhana, 
riches);  DhA  11.43  (of  People);  Miln  20  (id.);  a.  akkho- 
hini-sankhasena  J  VI  395.  a.  vatthu  Vin  11.204.  —  28 
atthavTsati  nakkhattani  Nd'  382;  patisallanaguna  Miln 
140.  —  38  atthatiQSa  Miln  359  (rajaparisa).  — 48  attha- 
cattarisar)  vassani  Sn  289.  —  68  atthasatthi  Th  i,  1217 
°sita  savitakka,  where  id.  p.  at  S  1. 187  however  reads 
alha  satthi-tasita  vitakka);  J  1.64  (turiya-satasahassani)  — 
98  atthanavuti  (cp.  98  the  age  of  Eli,  i  Sam.  iv.15) 
Sn  311  (roga,  a  higher  set  than  the  original  3  diseases, 
rp.  navuti).  —  (2)  As  number  of  sitmnietry  or  of  an 
intrinsic,  harmonious,  symmetrical  set,  attha  denotes,  like 
dasa  (q.  v.)  a  comprehensive  unity.  See  esp.  the  cpds. 
for  this  application.  "at)sa  and  ^angika.  Closely  related 
to  nos.  2  and  4  attha  is  in  the  geometrical  progression 
of  2.  4.  8.  16.  32.  where  each  subsequent  number  shows 
a  higher  symmetry  or  involves  a  greater  importance  (cp. 
8X8  under  i  a)  —  J  v. 409  (a.  mangalena  samannSgata, 
of  Indra's  chariot:  with  the  8  lucky  signs);  VvA  193 
(atthahi  akkhanehi  vajjitai)  manussabhavag :  the  8  unlucky 
signs).  In  progression:  J  IV.3  (attha  petiyo,  following 
after  4,  then  foil,  by  8,  16,  32);  PvA  75  (a.  kapparukkhS 
at  each  point  of  the  compass,  32  in  all).  Further:  8  expres- 
sions of  bad  language  DhA  IV. 3. 

-agsa  with  eight  edges,  octagonal,  octahedral,  implying 
perfect  or  divine  symmetry  (see  above  B  2),  of  a  diamond 
D  1.76  =:  M  III. 121  (mani  veluriyo  a.);  Miln  282  (mani- 
ratanai)  subhai)  jatimantar)  a.)  of  the  pillars  of  a  heavenly 
palace  (Vimana)  J  vi.127  =  173  =  Vv  78'  (a.  sukatfE 
thambha);  Vv  84"  (ayataqsa  =  ayata  hutva  attha-solasa- 
dvattiqsadi-aqsavanto    VvA    339).    Of  a  ball  of  siring  Pv 


Attha 


i6 


Addha 


IV.3M  (gulaparimandala ,  cp.  PvA  254).  Of  geometrical 
figures  in  general  Dhs  617.  -anga  (of)  eight  parts,  eight- 
fold, consisting  of  eight  ingredients  or  constituents  (see 
also  next  and  above  B  2  on  significance  of  attha  in  this 
connection),  in  comp".  with  °ufela  characterised  by  the 
eight  parts  (i.  e.  the  observance  of  the  first  eight  of  the 
commandments  or  vows,  see  sila  &  cp.  anga  2),  ot  uposatha, 
the  fast-day  A  1.2 15;  Sn  402  (Sn  A  378  expls.  ekam  pi 
divasar)  apariccajanto  atthangupetai]  uposathai]  upavassa)^ 
cp.  atthanguposathin  (adj.)  Mhvs  36,  84.  In  BSk.  always 
in  phrase  astanga-samanvagata  upavasa,  e.  g.  Divy  398 ; 
Sp.  Av.  6  1.338,  399;  also  vrata  Av.  §1.170.  In  the  same 
sense  atthangupeta  patibariyapakkha  (q.  v.)  Sn  402,  where 
Vv  15'  has  °susamSgata  (expH-  at  VvA  72  by  panatipala 
veramanl-adihi  atthah'  angehi  samannagata).  ° samannagala 
endowed  with  the  eight  qualities  (see  anga  3),  of  rajs,  a 
king  D  1. 137  sq.,  of  brahmassara,  the  supreme  or  most 
excellent  voice  (of  the  Buddha)  D  11.211;  J  1.95;  VvA 
217.  Also  in  Buddh.  Sk.  astangopeta  svara  of  the  voice 
of  the  Buddha,  e.g.  Sp.  Av.  6  1. 149.  -angika  having 
eight  constituents,  being  made  up  of  eight  (intrinsic)  parts, 
embracing  eight  items  (see  above  B  2) ;  of  the  uposatha 
(as  in  prec.  atthang^  uposatha)  Sn  401 ;  of  the  "Eight- 
fold Noble  Path"  (ariyo  a.  maggo).  (Also  in  BSk.  as 
astangika  marga,  e.  g.  Lai.  Vist.  540,  cp.  astangamarga- 
desika  of  the  Buddha,  Divy  124,  265);  D  1. 1 56,  157, 
165;  M  1. 118;  It  18;  Sn  1130  (magga  uttama);  Dh  191. 
273;  Th  2,  158,  171;  Kh  IV.;  Vin  i.io;  Nd^  485;  DA 
1.313;  DhA  111.402.  -angula  eight  finger-breadths  thick, 
eight  inches  thick,  i.  e.  very  thick,  of  double  thickness 
J  II. 9 1  (in  contrast  to  caturangula) ;  Mhvs  29,  II  (with 
sattangula).  -addha  (v.  1.  addhattha)  half  of  eight,  i.  e. 
four  (°pada)  J  VI. 354,  see  also  addha'.  -nakba  having 
eight  nails  or  claws  J  VI.354  (:  ekekasmiq  pade  dvinnai) . 
dvinnag  khuranai]  vasena  C.).  -nava  eight  or  nine  DhA 
III.  179.  -pada  I.  a  chequered  board  for  gambling  or 
playing  drafts  etc.,  lit.  having  eight  squares,  i.  e.  on  each 
side  (DA  1.85 :  ekekaya  pantiya  attha  attha  padani  assa 
ti),  cp.  dasapada  D  1.6.  —  2.  eightfold,  folded  or  plaited 
in  eight,  cross-plaited  (of  hair)  Th  I,  772  (atthapada-kata 
kesa);  J  11.5  ("tthapana  =  cross-plaiting),  -padaka  a  small 
square  (|),  i.e.  a  patch  Vin  1.297 ;  11. 1 50.  -pada  an 
octopod,  a  kind  of  (fabulous)  spider  (or  deer?)  J  v.377; 
VI. 538 ;  cp.  Sk.  astapada  =  sarabha  a  fabulous  eight-leg- 
ged animal,  -mangala  having  eight  auspicious  signs  J 
V.409  (expl<i'  here  to  mean  a  horse  with  white  hair  on 
the  face,  tail,  mane,  and  breast,  and  above  each  of  the 
four  hoofs).  -Tanka  with  eight  facets,  lit.  eight-crooked, 
i.  e.  polished  on  eight  sides,  of  a  jewel  J  vi.388.  -vidba 
eightfold  Dhs  219. 

Attha^  see  attha. 

Atthaka  (adj.)  [Sk.  astaka]  —  I.  eightfold  Vin  1.196  =  Ud 
59  (°^aggikani);  VvA  75  =  DhA  111.104  (^bhatta).  —  2. 
°a  (f.)  the  eight  day  of  the  lunar  month  (cp.  atthami),  in 
phrase  rattisu  antar^at^bakasu  in  the  nights  between  the 
eighths,  i.  e.  the  %^^  day  before  and  after  the  full  moon 
Vin  1. 31,  288  (see  Vin  Texst  1.130");  M  1.79;  A  1.136; 
Miln  396;  J  1.390.  —  3.  °q  (nt.)  an  octad  Vv  672  (atth° 
eight  octads  =  64);  VvA  289,  290.  On  sabbatthaka  see 
attha  B  I   a.  See  also  antara. 

Atthama  (num.  ord.)  [Sk.  astama,  see  attha']  the  eighth 
Sn  107,  230  (cp.  KhA  187),  437.  —  f.  °i  the  eighth 
day  of  the  lunar  half  month  (cp.  atthakS)  A  1. 1 44;  Sn 
402;  Vv  16'  (in  all  three  pass,  as  pakkhassa  catuddasi 
pancadasi  ca  atthami);  A  1.142;  Sn  570  (ito  atthami, 
scil.  divase,  loc). 

Atthatnaka  =  atthama  the  eighth.  —  i.  lit.  Miln  291  (att° 
self-eighth).  —  2.  as  tt.  the  eighth  of  eight  persons  who 
strive  after  the  highest  perfection,  reckoned  from  the  first 
or  Arahant.  Hence  the  eighth  is  he  who  stands  on  the 
lowest  step  of  the  Path  and  is  called  a  sotapanna  (q.  v.) 


Kvu  243 — 251  (cp.  Kvti  irsl.  146  sq.);  Nett  19,  49,  50; 
Ps  II. 193  (-)- sotapanna). 

Afthana  (nt.)  [a  4- tt^^"^]  stand,  post;  name  of  the  rub- 
bing-post which,  well  cut  &  with  incised  rows  of  squares, 
was  let  into  the  ground  of  a  bathing-place,  serving  as  a 
rubber  to  people  bathing  Vin  11.105,  '°^  (read  atthane 
with  BB;  cp.  Vin  11.315). 

Atthi"'  [=  attha  (attha)  in  comp"-  with  kaf  &  bhu,  as 
freq.  in  Sk.  and  P.  with  i  for  a,  like  citti-kata  (for  citta°), 
angi-bhuta  (for  anga°);  cp.  the  freq.  comb"-  (with  similar 
meaning)  manasi-kata  (besides  manasa-k.),  also  upadhi- 
karoti  and  others.  This  comb"-  is  restricted  to  the  pp  and 
der.  ("kata  &  °katva).  Other  explns-  by  Morris  J.  P.  T.  S. 
1886,  107;  Windisch,  M.  &  B.  100],  in  comb"-  with 
katva:  to  make  something  one's  attha,  i.  e.  object,  to 
find  out  the  essence  or  profitableness  or  value  of  anything, 
to  recognise  the  nature  of,  to  realise,  understand,  know. 
Nearly  always  in  stock  phrase  a^thikatva  manasikatva 
D  11.204;  M  1-325,  445;  S  1. 112  sq.  =  189,  220;  v.76; 
A  II. 116;  111.163;  J  1.189;  V.151  (:  attano  atthikabhavai] 
katva  atthiko  hutv3  sakkaccai]  suneyya  C.) ;  Ud  80  (:  adhi- 
kicca,  ayai)  no  atlho  adhigantabbo  evaq  sallakkhetva  taya 
desanaya  atthika  hutva  C);  Sdhp  220  (°katvana). 

AttW  (nt.)  [.Sk.  asthi  =  At.  asti,  Gr.  'iinm,  'ixrrfiotot,  ar- 
Tpa^aAo?;  Lat.  os  (*oss);  also  Gr.  '6^0(  branch  Goth,  asts]  — 
I.  a  bone  A  1.50:  iv.  129;  Sn  194  (°naharu  bones  & 
tendons);  Dh  149, 150;  J  1.70;  111.26, 184;  vi.448(°vedhin); 
DhA  III. 109  (300  bones  of  the  human  body,  as  also  at 
Susruta  111.5);  KhA  49;  PvA  68  (°camma-naharu),  215 
(gosls");  Sdhp  46,  103.  —  2.  the  stone  of  a  fruit  J  11.104. 
-kankala  [Sk.  °kankala]  a  skeleton  M  1.364;  cp.  °san- 
khalika.  -kadall  a  special  kind  of  the  plantain  tree  (Musa 
Sapientum)  J  v.406.  -kalyana  beauty  of  bones  DhA  I-387. 
-camma  bones  and  skin  J  11.339;  DhA  111.43;  ^''^  68 
-taca  id.  J  n.295.  -maya  made  of  bone  Vin  11. 11 5. 
-minja  marrow  A  iv.129;  DhA  1.181 ;  111.361 ;  KhA  52. 
-yaka  (T.  atthiyaka)  bones  &  liver  S  1.206.  -sankhalika 
[B.  Sk.  °sakala  Sp.  Av.  §  1.274  sq.,  see  also  atthika"]  a 
chain  of  bones,  i.e.  a  skeleton  DhA  111.479;  PvA  152. 
-sanghata  conjunction  of  bones,  i.e.  skeleton  Vism  21; 
DhA  11.28;  PvA  206.  -aancaya  a  heap  of  bones  It  17  = 
Bdhd  87.  -sanna  the  idea  of  bones  (cp.  atthika°)  Th  i, 
18.  -san^ana  a  skeleton  Sdhp  loi. 

Atthika'  (nt.)  [fr.  atthi]  I.  =  atthi  I  a  bone  M  ni.92;  J 
1.265,  428;  VI.404;  PvA  41.  —  2  =  atthi  2  kernel,  stone 
DhA  11.53  ('al°);  Mhvs   15,  42. 

-sankhalika  a  chain  of  bones,  a  skeleton  A  111.324 
see  also  under  katatthika.  -sanna  the  idea  of  a  skeleton 
S  V.129  sq.;   A  11.17;  Dhs   264. 

Atthika'  at  PvA  180  (sucik°)  to  be  read  a^tita  (q.  v.)  for 
attika. 

Ahttlta'  see  thita. 

Atthlta'^  [S  -f-  thita]  undertaken,  arrived  at,  looked  after, 
considered  J  11.247  (=  adhitthita  C). 

Atthita^  see  atthika. 

Atthllla  at  Vin  11.266  is  expld-  by  Bdhgh  on  p.  327  by 
gojanghattika,  perhaps  more  likely  =  Sk.  asthlla  a  round 
pebble  or  stone. 

A()<]ha'  (&  addha)  [etym.  uncertain,  Sk.  ardha]  one  half, 
half;  usually  in  comp"-  (see  below),  like  diyaddha  i^ 
(°sata  150)  PvA  155  (see  as  to  meaning  S/^i/f, /'^/u  Valihu 
p.  107).  Note,  addha  is  never  used  by  itself,  for  "half' 
in  absolute  position  upaddha  (q.  v.)  is  always  used. 

-akkhika  with  furtive  glance  ("half  an  eye")  DhA  iv.98. 
-attha  half  of  eight,  i.  e.  four  (cp.  atthaddha)  S  11.222 
(°ratana);  J  VI. 354  (°pada  quadruped;  v.  1.  for  atthaddha). 
-a}baka  \  an  a^haka  (measure)  DhA  iu.367.  -u^4h3  [<=?• 


A^dha 


'7 


Ati 


Maharastrl  form  cauttha  =  Sk.  caturtha]  three  and  a  half 
J  1.82;  IV.180;  V.417,  420;  DhA  1.87;  Mhvs  12,  53. 
-ocitaka  half  plucked  off  J  1.120.  -karisa  (-matta)  half 
a  k.  in  extent  VvA  64  (cp.  attha-karlsa).  -kabapaija  ^ 
kahSpana  A  V.S3.  -kasika  (or  °ya)  worth  half  a  thousand 
kasiyas  (i.  e.  of  Benares  monetary  standard)  Vin  1.281 
(kambala,  a  woollen  garment  of  that  value;  cp.  Vin  Texts 
11.19s);  H150  (bimbohanani,  pillows;  so  read  for  addha- 
kSyikSni  in  T.);  J  v.447  (a°-kasiganika  for  a-°kssiya°  a 
courtezan  who  charges  that  price,  in  phrase  a°-k°-ganika 
viya  na  bahuonar)  piys  manapa).  -kumbha  a  half  (-filled) 
pitcher  Sn  721.  -kusi  (tt.  of  tailoring)  a  short  intermediate 
cross-seam  Vin  1.287.  -kosa  half  a  room,  a  small  room 
J  VI. 81  (=  a°  kosantara  C).  -gavuta  half  a  league  J  vi  55. 
-cula  (°vaha  vihi)  ^  a  measure  (of  rice)  Miln  102,  per- 
haps misread  for  addhalha  (alha  =  alhaka,  cp.  A  111.52), 
a  half  alha  of  rice,  -tiya  the  third  (unit)  less  half,  i.  e. 
two  and  a  half  VvA  66  (masa);  J  1.49,  206,  255  (°sata 
250).  Cp.  next,  -teyya  =  "tiya  2J  Vin  iv.117;  J  11.129 
(°sata);  DA  1.173  (^- •■  KB  for  °tiya);  DhA  1.95  (°sata), 
279;  PvA  20  ("sahassa).  -telasa  [cp.  BSk.  ardhatrayodasa] 
twelve  and  a  half  Vin  I  243,  247 ;  D  11.6  (°bhikkhu- 
satani,  cp.  tayo  Bib);  DhA  111.369.  -dandaka  a  short 
stick  M  1.87  =  A  1.47;  11.122  =  Nd-  604  ^  Miln  197. 
-duka  see  °ruka.  -nalika  (-matta)  half  a  nali-measure  full 
J  VI. 366.  -pallanka  half  a  divan  Vin  11.280.  -bhaga  half 
a  share,  one  half  Vv  13'  (=:  upaddhabhaga  VvA  61); 
Pv  i.ii'.  -mandala  semi-circle,  semi  circular  sewing  Vin 
1.287.  -mana  half  a  mana  measure  J  1.468  (m.  =  atthan- 
nai)  nSlinai)  namai)  C).  -masa  half  a  month,  a  half  month, 
a  fortnight  Vin  III. 254  (unak°);  A  v.85  ;  J  III. 218;  VvA 
66.  Freq.  in  ace.  as  adv.  for  a  fortnight,  e.  g.  Vin  IV.117; 
VvA  67;  PvA  55.  -masaka  half  a  bean  (as  weight  or 
measure  of  value,  see  masaka)  J  1.1 11.  -masika  half- 
monthly  Pug  55.  -mundaka  shaven  over  half  the  head 
(sign  of  loss  of  freedom)  Mhvs  6,  42.  -yoga  a  certain 
kind  of  house  (usually  with  pasada)  Vin  1.58  =  96,  107, 
'39i  239,  284;  II. 146.  Ace.  to  Vin  T.  1.174  ""  Kol<l 
coloured  Bengal  house"  (Bdhgh),  an  interpretation  which 
is  not  correct :  we  have  to  read  supanna  vankageha  "like 
a  Carul.a  bird's  crooked  wiug",  i.  e.  where  the  roof  is 
bent  on  one  side,  -yojana  half  a  yojana  (in  distance)  J 
V.410;  DA  1.35  (in  expl"-  of  addhana-magga);  DhA  1.147  ; 
11.74.  -ratta  midnight  A  111.407  (°ar)  adv.  at  m.);  Vv  81'" 
(°rattayaij  adv.  =  addharattiyaq  VvA  315);  J  1. 164  (sa- 
maye);  IV.159  (id.),  -rattl  :=  "ratta  VvA  255,  315  (=r 
majjhimayama-samaya) ;  PvA  155.  -ruka  (v.  1.  °duka)  a 
certain  fashion  of  wearing  the  hair  Vin  11.134;  Bdhgh 
expl"-  on  p.  319:  adhadukan  ti  udare  lomaraji-thapanar) 
"leaving  a  stripe  of  hair  on  the  stomach",  -vivata  (dvara) 
half  open  J   v. 293. 

A(J(jha^  ('"^JO  [Sl<.  adhya  fr.  rddha  pp.  of  fdh,  rdhnote  & 
rdhyate  (see  ijjhati)  to  thrive  cp.  Gr.  aASofiai  thrive,  Lat. 
alo  to  nourish.  Cp.  also  Vedic  ida  refreshment  &  P.  iddhi 
power.  See  also  ajhiya]  rich,  opulent,  wealthy,  well-to-do ; 
usually  in  comb"- with  mahaddbana  &  mababhoga  of  great 
wealth  &  resources  (foil,  by  pahuta-jataruparajata  pahuta 
vittupakarana  etc.).  Thus  at  D  1.1 15,  134,  137;  III.163; 
Pug  52;  DhA  1.3;  VvA  322;  PvA  3,  78  etc.  In  other 
combn-  Vv  31*  ("kula);  Nd^  615  (Sakka  =  addho  mahad- 
dhano  dhanava);  DA  1.281  (=issara);  DhA  11.37  (°kula); 
Sdhp  270  (satasakh"),  312  (gun°),  540  sq.  (id.),  561. 

A(j()haka  (adj.)  wealthy,  rich,  influential  J  iv.495 ;  Pv  11.8' 
(=  mahSvibhava  PvA   107). 

A4<]hatl  (f.)  [abstr.  to  addha]  riches,  wealth,  opulence 
Sdhp  316. 

A(ja  [Sk.  fna;  see  etym.  under  ina,  of  which  ana  is  a 
doublet.  See  also  Sijanya]  debt,  only  in  neg.  ana^a  (adj.) 
free  from  debt  Vin  1.6  =  S  1.137,  234  =  D  11.39;  Th  2, 
364  (i.  e.  without  a  new  birth);  A  11.69;  J  v.481  ; 
ThA  245. 


AqU  (adj.)  [Sk.  anu;  as  to  etym.  see  Walde  Lat.  Wtb. 
under  ulna.  See  also  ini]  small,  minute,  atomic,  subtle 
(opp.  tbula,  q.  v.)  D  1.223;  S  1.136;  v.96  (°bija);  Sn  299 
(anuto  anui)  gradually);  J  in. 12  (=r  appamattaka);  iv.203 ; 
Dhs  230,  617  (=kisa);  ThA  173;  Miln  361.  Ne/e  anu 
is  freq.  spelt  anu,  thus  usually  in  cpd.  °matta. 

-tbula  (anuqthula)  fine  and  coarse,  small  &  large  Dh 
31  (=  mahantaii  ca  khuddakaii  ca  DhA  1.282),  409  =  Sn 
633;  J  IV.192;  Dh.\  iv.184.  -mitta  of  small  size,  atomic, 
least  Sn  431;  Vbh  244,  247  (cp.  M  111.134;  A  11.22); 
Dpvs  IV.20.  The  spelling  is  antunatta  at  D  1.63  =  It 
118;  Dh  284;  DA  1. 181;  Sdhp  347.  -sahagata  accomp- 
anied by  a  minimum  of,  i.  e.  residuum  Kvu  81,  cp.  Kvu 
trsl.  66  n.  3. 

Aquka  (adj.)  =  anu  Sn   146,  KhA  246. 

A^da  (nt.)  [Etym.  unknown.  Cp.  Sk.  anda]  I.  an  egg  Vin 
111.3;  S  11.258;  M  1. 104;  A  IV.125  sq.  —  2.  (pi.)  the 
testicles  Vin  111.106.  —  3.  (in  camm°)  a  water-bag  J  1.249 
(see  Morris  J.  P.  T.  S.   1884,  69). 

-kosa  shell  of  eggs  Vin  111.3  =  M  .104;  A  iv.126, 
176.  -cheda(ka)  one  who  castrates,  a  gelder  J  iv.364, 
366.  -ja  I.  born  from  eggs  S  ni.241  (of  snakes);  M  1.73; 
J  11.53  =r  v.8S;  Miln  267.  —  2.  a  bird  J.  v.i8g.  -bharin 
bearing  his  testicles  S  11.258  :=  Vin  iii.ioo.  -sambhava 
the  product  of  an  egg,  i.e.  a  bird  Th  i,  599.  -baraka 
one  who  takes  or  exstirpales  the  testicles  M  1.383. 

A^ljaka'  (nt.)  =  anda,  egg  DhA  1.60;  111.137  (sakuri°). 

A^cjaka^  (^<JJO  [Sk.  ?  prob.  an  inorganic  form ;  the  diaeresis 
of  candaka  into  c'  andaka  seems  very  plausible.  As  to 
meaning  cp.  DhsA  396  and  see  Dhs  trsl.  349,  also  Mor- 
ris J.  P.  T.  S.  1893,  6,  who,  not  satisfactorily,  tries  to 
establish  a  relation  to  ard,  as  in  atta']  only  used  of  vaca, 
speech:  harsh,  rough,  insolent  M  1.286;  A  v.265,  283, 
293  (^loss  kantaka);  J  in. 260;  Dhs  1343,  cp.  DhsA  396. 

Aooa  (food,  cereal).  See  passages  under  aparanija  &  pubbapija. 

AQQava  (nt.)  [Sk.  arna  &  arnava  to  f,  rnoti  to  move,  Idg. 
*er  to  be  in  quick  motion,  cp.  Gr.  'ifrntii ;  Lat.  orior ; 
Goth,  rinnan  =:  E.  run;  Ohg.  runs,  river,  flow.]  i.  a 
great  flood  (.=:  ogha),  the  sea  or  ocean  (often  as  mah°, 
cp.  BSk.  maharnava,  e.g.  Jim  ,'31")  M  1.134;  S  1.214; 
1V.157  (maha  udak°);  Sn  173  (fig.  for  sarjsara  see  SnA 
214),  183,  184;  J  1. 119  (°kucchi),  227  (id.);  v. 1 59  (mah"); 
Mhvs  5,  60;  19,  16  (mah°).  —  2.  a  stream,  river  J  lii. 
521;  V.2S5. 

AQha  [Sk.  ahna,  day,  see  ahan]  day,  only  as  — °  in  apar°, 
pubb°,  majjh°,  say",  q.  v. 

Atakkaka  (adj.)  [a  -f-  takka-]  not  mixed  with  buttermilk 
J  YI.21. 

Ataccha  (nt.)  [a  -|-  taccha*]  falsehood,  untruth  D  1.3 ;  J 
VI. 207. 

Ati  (indecl.)  [Sk.  ati  =  Gr.  'In  moreover,  yet,  and ;  Lat.  et 
and,  Goth.  i{);  also  connected  with  Gr.  onif  but,  Lat. 
at  but  {z=^  over,  outside)  Goth.  a]){)an]  adv.  and  prep, 
of  direction  (forward  motion),  in  primary  meaning  "on, 
and  further",  then  "up  to  and  beyond".  I.  in  abstr. 
position  adverbially  (only  as  Itg):  in  excess,  extremely, 
very  (cp.  11. 3)  J  vi.133  (ati  uggata  C.  =  accuggata  T.), 
307  (ati  ahitai]  C.  ■=  accfihitai)  T.). 

11.  as  prefix,  meaning.  —  l.  on  to,  up  to,  towards, 
until);  as  far  as:  accanta- up  to  the  end;  aticchati  to  go 
further,  pass  on;  atipata  ••falling  on  to";  attack  slaying; 
atimSpeti  to  put  damage  on  to,  i.  e.  to  destroy.  —  2.  over, 
beyond,  past,  by,  trans-;  with  verbs:  (a.)  trs.  atikkamali 
to  pass  beyond,  surpass;  atimaniiati  to  put  one's  "manas" 
over,  to  despise;  atirocati  to  surpass  in  splendour,  (b.) 
intr.  atikkanta  passed  by;  atikkama  traversing;  aticca 
tranrgressing ;    atita    past,   gone    beyond.    —    Also    with 

1—3 


Ati 


i8 


AtJcaritar 


verbal  derivations:  accaya  lapse,  also  sin,  transgression 
("going  over");  aiireka  remainder,  left  over;  atisaya  over- 
flow, abundance;  atisara  stepping  over,  sin.  —  3.  exceed- 
ingly, in  a  high  or  excessive  degree  either  very  (much) 
or  too  (much);  in  nominal  comp"-  (a),  rarely  also  in 
verbal  comp"-  see  (b).  —  (a)  with  nouns  &  adj.:  "asanna 
too  near;  °uttama  the  very  highest;  °udaka  too  much 
water;  °khippa  too  soon;  °dana  excessive  alms  giving; 
°daruna  very  cruel ;  "digha  extremely  long ;  "dura  too  near ; 
deva  a  super-god  °pago  too  early ;  °balha  too  much ;  °bhara 
a  too  heavy  load;  "manapa  very  lovely;  "manohara  very 
charming;  °mahant  too  great;  °vikala  very  inconvenient; 
"vela  a  very  long  time;  °sambadha  too  tight,  etc.  etc.  — 
(b.)  with  verb:  atibhunjati  to  eat  excessively. 

III.  A  peculiar  use  of  ati  is  its'  function  in  reduplica- 
tion-compounds^ expressing  "and,  adding  further,  and  so 
on,  even  more,  etc."  like  that  of  the  other  comparing  or 
contrasting  prefixes  a  (a),  anu,  ava,  pati,  vi  (e.  g.  khan- 
dakhanda,  setthSnusetthi,  chiddiivacchidda,  angapaccanga, 
cunnavicunna).  In  this  function  it  is  however  restricted  to 
comparatively  few  expressions  and  has  not  by  far  the  wide 
range  of  a  (q.  v.),  the  only  phrases  being  the  foil.  viz. 
cakkaticakkar)  manclitimancai)  bandhati  to  heap  carts 
upon  carts,  couches  upon  couches  (in  order  to  see  a  pro- 
cession) Vin  1V.360  (Bdhgh);  J  11.331;  IV.81 ;  DhA  iv.61. 
-devatideva  god  upon  god,  god  and  more  than  a  god 
(see  atideva);  manatimana  all  kinds  of  conceit;  vankati- 
vanka  crooked  all  over  J  1.160.  —  IV.  Semantically  ati 
is  closely  related  to  abhi,  so  that  in  consequence  of 
dialectical  variation  we  frequently  find  ati  in  Pali,  where 
the  corresp.  expression  in  later  Sk.  shows  abhi.  See  e.  g. 
the  foil,  cases  for  comparison:  accunha  ati-jata,  "pllita 
°bruheti,  "vassati,  °vayati,  '^vetheti. 

Note  The  contracted  (assimilation-)  form  of  ati  before' 
vowels  is  ace-  (q.  v.).  See  also  for  adv.  use  atiriva,  ati- 
viya,  atlva. 

Atl-ambila  (adj.)  [ati  +  ambila]  too  sour  DhA  11.85. 

Ati-arahant  [ati  -\-  arahant]  a  super-Arahant,  one  who  sur- 
passes even  other  Arahaots  Miln  277. 

Atl-lssara  (adj.)  very  powerful  (?)  J  V.44I  (°bhesajja,  medicin). 

Ati-U^ha  (adj.)  too  hot  PvA  37  ("atapa  glow).  See  also 
accunha  (which  is  the  usual  form). 

Ati-Uttama  (adj.)  by  far  the  best  or  highest  VvA  80. 

Atl-udaka  too  much  water,  excess  of  water  DhA  1.52. 

Ati-USSUra  (adj.)  only  in  loc.  "e  (adv.)  too  soon  after  sun- 
rise, too  early  VvA  65  (laUdhabhattatS  eating  too  early). 

Atl-etl  [ati  -f  1]  to  go  past  or  beyond,  see  ger.  aticca  and 
pp.  atlta. 

Atikata  (PP-)  more  than  done  to,  i.  e.  retaliated ;  paid  back 
in  an  excessive  degree  A  1.62. 

Atlkaddhatl  [ati  -f-  kaddhati]  to  pull  too  hard,  to  labour, 
trouble,  drudge  Vin  111.17. 

Atika^ha  (adj.)  [ati  -f  kaijha]  too  black  Vin  IV.7. 

AtikarUQa  (adj.)  [ati  -j-  karuna]  very  pitiful,  extremely  mis- 
erable J  1.202:  IV. 142;  VI.S3. 

Atlkassa  (ger.)  [fr.  atikassati  ati  +  krs ;  Sk.  atikf-sya]  pul- 
ling (right)  through  J  v.  173  (rajjuq,  a  rope,  through  the 
nostrils;   v.  1.  BB.  anti°). 

Ailkala  [ati  +  kala]  in  instr.  atikalena  adv.  in  very  good 
time  very  early  Vin  1.70  (-f-  atidivS). 

Atlkkanta  [pp-  of  atikamati]  passed  beyond,  passed  by, 
gone  by,  elapsed;  passed  over,  passing  beyond,  surpassing 
J  11.128  (llpi  saijvaccharani);  DhA  111.133  (layo  vaye  pas- 


sed beyond  the  3  ages  of  life);  PvA  55  (mase  °e  after 
the  lapse  of  a  month),  74  (kati  divasa  °a  how  many  days 
have  passed). 

-manusaka    superhuman    It    1 00;    Pug   60;   cp.   BSk, 
atikrSnta-manusyAka  M  Vastu  111.321. 

Atlkkantika  (f.)  [Der.  abstr.  fr.  prec]  transgressing,  over- 
stepping the  bounds  (of  good  behaviour),  lawlessness 
Miln  122. 

Atikkama  [Sk.  atikrama]  going  over  or  further,  passing 
beyond,  traversing ;  fig.  overcoming  of,  overstepping,  failing 
against,  transgression  Dh  191;  Dhs  299;  PvA  154  (kati- 
payayojan°),  159  ("carana  sinful  mode  of  life);  Miln  158 
(dur°  hard  to  overcome);  Sdhp  64. 

Atikkamaqaka  (adj.)  [atikkamana  -f  ka]  exceeding  J  1.153. 

Atikkamatl  [ati  -f-kamati]  (i)  to  go  beyond,  to  pass  over, 
to  cross,  to  pass  by.  (2)  to  overcome,  to  conquer,  to  sur- 
pass, to  be  superior  to.  —  J  iv.i4i;  Dh  221  (Pot.  °eyya, 
overcome);  PvA  67  (maggena:  passes  by),  grd.  atikka- 
tnanlya  to  be  overcome  D  11.13  (an°);  SnA  568  (dur"). 
ger.  atikkamtna  D  11. 12  (surpassing);  It  51  (maradheyyaq, 
passing  over),  cp.  vv.  11.  under  adhigayha;  and  atikka- 
mitva  going  beyond,  overcoming,  transcending  (J  iv.139 
(samuddai]);  Pug  17;  J  1.162  (ratthaq  having  left).  Often 
to  be  trsl.  as  adv.  "beyond",  e.  g.  pare  beyond  others 
PvA  15;  Vasabhagamai)  beyond  the  village  of  V.  I'vA 
168.  —  pp.  atikkanta  (q.  v.). 

Atlkkametl  [Caus.  of  atikkamati]  to  make  pass,  to  cause 
to  pass  over  J  1.151. 

Atlkkhippai)   (adv.)  [ati  4- thippa]  too  soon  Vin  11.284. 

Atlkha^a  (nt.)  [ati  +  khana(na)]  too  much  digging  J  11.296. 

Atlkhata  (nt.)  =  prec.  J  11.296. 

AtlkhiQa  (adj.)  [ati  -f  khina]  in  capatikhlna  broken  bow(?) 
Dh  156  (expld-  at  DhA  m.132  as  capato  alikhlna  capa 
vinimmutta). 

Atiga  ( — °)  (adj.)  [ati  +  ga]  going  over,  overcoming,  sur- 
mounting, getting  over  Sn  250  (sanga°);  Dh  370  (id.); 
Sn  795  (sima°,  cp.  Nd"  .99),  1096  (ogha°);  Nd'  100  (= 
atikkanta);  Nd*  180  (id.). 

Atlgacchati  [ati  -}-  gacchati]  to  go  over,  i.  e.  to  overcome, 
surmount,  conquer,  get  the  better  of,  only  in  prel.  (aor.) 
3rd  sg.  accaga  (q.  v.  and  see  gacchati  3)  Sn  1040;  Dh 
414  and  accagama  (see  gacchati  2)  Vin  11.192;  D  1.85; 
S  11.205 ;  DA  1.236  (=  abhibhavitva  pavatta).  Also  3'-'l  pi. 
accagur)  It  93,  95. 

Atlga|etl  [ati  +  galeti,  Caus.  of  galati,  cp.  Sk.  vi-galayati] 
to  destroy,  make  perish,  waste  away  J  VI.211  (=  atig5- 
layati  vinaseti  C.  p.  215).  Perhaps  reading  should  be 
atigajheti  (see  atigalhita. 

Atlga|ha  (adj.)  [ati  +  galha  i]  very  tight  or  close,  inten- 
sive J  1.62.  Cp.  atigajhita. 

Atigalhita  [pp-  of  atigalheti,  Denom.  fr.  atigalha;  cp.  Sk. 
aiigahate  to  overcome]  oppressed,  harmed,  overcome,  de- 
feated, destroyed  J  V.401  (=:  atipllita  C). 

Atlghora  (adj.)  [ati  +  ghora]  very  terrible  or  fierce  Sdhp  285. 

Atlcarana  (nt.)  [fr.  aticarati]  transgression  PvA  159. 

Aticaratl  [ati  -|-  carati]  I.  to  go  about,  to  roam  about  Pv 
II.I2"-  PvA  57.  —  2.  to  transgress,  to  commit  adultery 
J  1.496.  Cp.  next. 

Atlcaritar  [n-  ag.  of.  aticarati]  one  who  transgresses,  esp. 
a  woman  who  commits  adultery  A  11.61  (all  MSS.  read 
aticaritvS);  iv.66  (T.  aticaritta). 


Aticariya 


19 


Atiplnita 


Aticariya  (f-)  [ati  +  cariyg]  transgression,  sin,  adultery  D 
111.190. 

Aticara  [from  aticarati]  transgression  Vv  158  (=  aticca 
cara  VvA   72). 

Aticarin  (adj.  n.)  [from  aticarati]  transgressing,  sinning, 
esp.  as  f.  aticarini  an  adultress  S  11.259 ;  iv. 242;  D  lli.190; 
A  111.261;  Pvii.t2'«;  PvA  151  (v.  1.  BB),  152;  VvA  no. 

Atlcltra  (adj.)  [ati  +  citra]  very  splendid,  brilliant,  quite 
exceptional  Miln   28. 

Aticca  (grd.)  [ger.  of  ati  +  eti,  ati  +  i]  '■  passing  beyond, 
traversing,  overcoming,  surmounting  Sn  519,  529,  531. 
Used  adverbially  =  beyond,  in  access,  more  than  usual, 
exceedingly  Sn  373,  804  (=:  vassasatai)  atikkamitva  Nd' 
120).  —  2.  failing,  transgressing,  sinning,  esp  committing 
adultery  J  v,424;  VvA  72, 

AtiCChat!  [*Sk.  ati-rcchati,  ati  +  f,  cp.  annava]  to  go  on, 
only  occurring  in  imper.  aticchatha  (bhante)  "please  go 
on,  Sir",  asking  a  bhikkhu  to  seek  alms  elsewhere,  thus 
refusing  a  gift  in  a  civil  way.  [The  interpretation  given 
by  Trenckner,  as  quoted  by  Childers,  is  from  ati  -(-  i§ 
"go  and  beg  further  on".  (Tr.  Notes  65)  but  this  would 
entail  a  meaning  like  "desire  in  excess",  since  ij  does 
not  convey  the  notion  of  movement]  J  III. 462 ;  DhA  IV. 98 
(T.  aticcha,  vv.  11.  °atha);  VvA  101;  Miln  8.  —  Caus. 
aticchapeti  to  make  go  on,  to  ask  to  go  further  J  111.462.  — 
Cp.  icchata. 

AtiCChatta  [ati  +  chatta]  a  "super"-sunshade,  a  sunshade 
of  extraordinary  size  &  colours  DhsA   2. 

Atltata  (adj.)  [ati  -|-  jata,  perhaps  ati  in  sense  of  abhi,  cp. 
abhijata]  well-born,  well  behaved,  gentlemanly  It  14  (opp. 
avajata). 

Atitarati  [ati  -|-  tarati]  to  pass  over,  cross,  go  beyond  aor. 
accatari  S  iv.l57  =  lt   57  (°ari). 

AtitUCCha  (adj.)  [ati  +  tuccha]  very,  or  quite  empty  Sdhp  430. 

Atitutthi  (f.)  [ati  +  tutthi]  extreme  joy  J   1.207. 

Atitula  (iidj.)  [ati  -j-  tula]  beyond  compare,  incomparable 
Th  I,  831  =  Sn  561  (=  tular)  atito  nirupamo  ti  allho 
SnA  455). 

Atitta  (adj.)  [a  -|-  titta]  dissatisfied,  unsatisfied  J  1.440 ;  Dh  48. 

Atittha  (nt.)  [a  +  tittha]  "that  which  is  not  a  fording- 
place".  i.  e.  not  the  right  way,  manner  or  time;  as  " — 
wrongly  in  the  wrong  way  J  1343;  IV. 379;  VI. 241  ;  DhA 
111.347;  DA  1.38. 

Atlthl  [Sk.  atithi  of  at  =  at,  see  atati ;  orig.  the  wanderer, 
cp.  Vedic  atithin  wandering]  a  guest,  stranger,  newcomer 
D  I.I  17  (=  aganluka-navaka  pahunaka  DA  1.288);  A 
11.68;  111.45,  260;  J  iv.31^  274;  V.388;  Kh  VIII.7  (= 
n'  althi  assa  thiti  yamlii  va  tamhi  va  divase  agacchati  ti 
atithi  KhA  222);  VvA  24  (=  agantuka). 

Atldana  (m.)  [ati  -{-  dana]  too  generous  giving,  an  exces- 
sive gift  of  alms  Miln  277;  PvA   129,  130. 

Atidaruna  (adj.)  [Sk.  atidaruna,  ati  +  daruna]  very  cruel, 
extremely  fierce  Pv  111.7'. 

Atlditthi  (f)  [ati  -f  ditthi]  higher  doctrine,  super  know- 
ledge (?)  Vin  1.63  =z  11.4  (-|-  adhisila;  should  we  read 
adhi-ditthi  ?) 

Atidlva  (adv.)  [ati  -f  div5]  late  in  the  day,  in  the  afternoon 
Vin  1.70  (4-  atikalena);  S  1.200;  A  in. 117. 


Atldlsati  [ati  +  disali]  to  give  further  explanation,  to  explain 
in  detail  Miln.  304. 

Atidigha  (adj.)  [ati  -f  dfgha]  too  long,  extremely  long  J 
IV.  165;  Pv  II. lo^;  VvA  103  (opp.  atirassa). 

Atidukkha  [ati  +  dukkha]  great  evil,  exceedingly  painful 
excessive  suffering  PvA  65;  Sdhp  95.  In  atidukkhavaca 
PvA  15  ati  belongs  to  the  whole  cpd.,  i.e.  of  very  hurt- 
ful speech. 

AtidQra  (adj.)  [ati  +  dura]  very  or  too  far  Vin  I.46;  J 
II. 1 54;  Pv  II. 9"  =  DhA  III. 220  (vv.  11.  suvidure);  PvA 
42  (opp.  accasanna). 

Atideva  [ati  -f  deva]  a  super  god,  god  above  gods,  usually 
Ep.  of  the  Buddha  S  1.141  ;  Th  I,  489;  Nd'  307  (cp. 
adhi°);  Miln  277.  atidevadeva  id.  Miln  203,  209.  devati- 
deva  god  over  the  gods  (of  the  Buddha)  Nd^  307   a. 

Atidhamati  [ati  -f-  dhamati]  to  beat  a  drum  too  hard  J  1.283  ; 
pp.  atidhanta  ibid. 

Atidhatata  [ati  +  dhsta  +  ta]  oversatiation  J  11.X93. 

Atidhavatl  [ati  +  dhavati  1]  to  run  past,  to  outstrip  or  get 
ahead  of  S  111.103;  iv.230;  M  in. 19;  It  43;  Miln  136; 
SnA  21. 

Atidhonacarin  [ati  -{■  dhonacarin]  indulging  too  much  in 
the  use  of  the  "dhonas",  i.  e.  the  four  requisites  of  the 
bhikkhu,  or  transgressing  the  proper  use  or  normal  ap- 
plication of  the  requisites  (expl"-  at  DhA  111.344,  cp. 
dhona)  Dh  240  =  Nett   129. 

Atlnametl  [BSk.  atinamayati,  e.  g.  Divy  82,  443 ;  ati  -f 
nanieti]  to  pass  time  A  1. 206;   Miln  345. 

Atlnigganhati  [ati  4-  nigganhati]  to  rebuke  too  much  J 
VI.417.  ■ 

Atinlcaka  (adj.)  [ati  +  nlcaka]  too  low,  only  in  phrase 
cakkavalar)  atisambadhat]  Brahmaloko  atinicako  the 
World  is  too  narrow  and  Heaven  too  low  (to  comprehend 
the  merit  of  a  person,  as  sign  of  exceeding  merit)  DhA 
1.310;  111.310  =  VvA  68. 

Atinetl  [ati  +  neti]  to  bring  up  to,  to  fetch,  to  provide 
with  Vin  II. 1 80  (udakaij). 

Atlpao^ita  (adj.  [ati  -f  pandita]  too  clever  DhA  IV.38. 

AtlpriQ(Jltata  (f.)  [abstr.  of  atipandita]  too  much  clever- 
ness DhA  n.29. 

Atipadana  (nt.)  [ati  -J-  pa  -f  dana]  too  much  alms-giving 
Pv  n.943  (:=atidana  PvA  130). 

Atipapafica  [ati  -f  p.]  too  great  a  delay,  excessive  tarrying 
J   1.64;   11.93. 

Atipariccaga  [ati  -(-  pariccaga]  excess  iu  liberality  DhA 
III. II. 

Atipassatl  [ati  -|-  passati:  cp.  Sk.  anupasyati]  to  look  for, 
catch  sight  of,  discover  M  III. 132  (nigai]). 

Atipata  [ati  -^-  pat]  attack ,  only  in  phrase  panatipata 
destruction  of  life,  slaying,  killing,  murder  D  1.4  (panati- 
pata vcramani,  refraining  from  killing,  the  first  of  the 
dasasila  or  decalogue);  DA  1.69  (=  panavadha,  pana- 
ghata);  Sn  242;  Kh  n.  cp.  KhA  26;  PvA  28,  33  etc. 

Atipatln  (adj.  -n.)  one  who  attacks  or  destroys  Sn  248; 
I  VI.449  (in  war  nagakkhandh"  ==:  hatthikkhande  khaggena 
chinditva  C);  PvA  27  (pan"). 

Atipateti  [Denom.  fr.  atipata]  to  destroy  S  V.4S3;  Dh  246 
(v.  1.   for  atimSpeti,  q.  v.).  Cp.  paripateti. 

Atlpipita  (adj.)  [ati  +  pinita]  too  much  beloved,  too  dear, 
loo  lovely  DhA  V.70. 


Atipijita 


20 


Atlvattar 


Atlpl]ita  [ati  +  pllita,  cp.  Sk.  abhipidita]  pressed  against, 
oppressed,  harassed,  vexed  J  V.401   (=  atigalhila). 

AtippagO  (adv.)  [cp.  Sk.  atiprage]  too  early,  usually  ellip- 
tical =  it  is  too  early  (with  inf.  caritui)  etc.)  D  1.178; 
M  1.84;  A  IV.35. 

Atibaddha  [pp.  of  atibandhati ;  cp.  Sk.  anubaddha]  tied  to, 
coupled  J   1.192  =  Vin  IV.5. 

Atibandhati  [ati  +  bandhati;  cp.  Sk.  anubandhati]  to  tie 
close  to,  to  harness  on,  to  couple  J  I.191  sq.  —  pp. 
atibaddha  q.  v. 

Atibahala  (adj.)  [ati  +  bahala]  very  thick  J  vi.365. 

Atiba|ha  (adj.)  [ati  +  balha]  very  great  or  strong  PvA  178; 
nt.  adv.  "g  too  much  D  1.93,  95;  M  1.253. 

Atibaheti  [ati  +  baheti,  Caus.  to  bfh' ;  cp.  Sk.  abrhati]  to 
drive  away,  to  pull  out  J  iv.366  {=  abbaheti). 

Atibrahina  [ati  -f-  brahraa]  a  greater  Brahma,  a  super-god 
Miln  277 ;  DhA  II. 60  (Brahmuna  a.  greater  than   B.). 

Atibruheti  [ati  4-  brnheti,  bfh'^,  but  by  C.  taken  incorrectly 
to  bru;  cp.  Sk.  abhi-brnhayati]  to  shout  out,  roar,  cry 
J  V.361   (=  mahasaddai)  nicchareti). 

Atibhagjni-putta  [ati  -|-  bh.-p.]  a  very  dear  nephew  J  1.223. 

Atibhara  [ati  +  bbara]  too  heavy  a  load  Miln  277  ("ena 
sakatassa  akkho  bhijjati). 

Atlbharita  (adj.)  [ati  -)-  bharita]  too  heavily  weighed,  over- 
loaded Vtn  IV.47. 

Atibhariya  (adj.)  too  serious  DhA  1.70. 

Atlbhuiijati  [ati  -f-  bhunjati]  to  eat  too  much,  to  overeat 
Miln   153. 

Atibhutta  (nt.)  [ati -|- bhutta]  overeating  Miln   135. 

Atlbhoti  [ati  -f-  bhavati,  cp.  Sk.  atibhavati  &  abhibhavati] 
to  excel,  overcome,  to  get  the  better  of,  to  deceive  J  1.163 
(^  ajjhottharati  vanceti  C). 

Atimannati  [Sk.  atimanyate;  ati  +  man]  to  despise,  slighten, 
neglect  Sn  148  (=:  KhA  247  atikkamitva  maniiati);  Dh 
365,  366;  J  11.347;  P»  '-7°  ("issaij,  V.  1.  °asir|  =  atikka- 
mitva avamaiiSiq   PvA  37);  PvA  36;   Sdhp  609. 

Atimannana  (f-)  [abstr.  to  prec,  cp.  atimana]  arrogance, 
contempt,  neglect  Miln  122. 

Atimanapa  (adj.)  [ati  -\-  manapa]  very  lovely  PvA  77  (-f 
abhirQpa). 

Atinianorama  (adj.)  [ati  -|-  manorama]  very  charming  J  1.60. 

Atimanohara  (adj.)  [ati  -\-  manohara]  very  charming  PvA  46. 

Atlmanda(ka)  (adj.)  [ati  -J-  manda]  too  slow,  too  weak 
Sdhp  204,  273,  488. 

Atimamayati  [ati  -f  mamayati,  cp.  Sk.  atimamayate  in  diff. 
meaning  z=  envy]  to  favour  too  much,  to  spoil  or  fondle 
J  11.316. 

Atimahant  (adj.)  [ati  -f  mahant]  very  or  too  great  J  1. 221 ; 

I'vA    75. 

Atltnapeti  [ati  -j-  mapeti,  Caus.  of  mi,  minate,  orig.  meaning 
"to  do  damage  to"]  to  injure,  destroy,  kill;  only  in  the 
stock  phrase  panag  atimapeti  (with  v.  1.  atipateti)  to 
destroy  life,  to  kill  D  1.52  (v.  1.  "pateti)  =  DA  1.159 
(:  panai)  hanati  pi  parehi  hanapeti  either  to  kill  or  incite 
others  to  murder);  M  1.404,  516;  S  IV.343;  A  ill. 205 
(correct  T.  reading  atimateti;  v.  I.  pateti);  Dh  246  (v.  1. 
°pateti)  =  DhA  111.356  (:  parassa  jivitindriyai)  upacchindati). 


Atimana  [Sk.  atimina,  ati  -|-  mana]  high  opinion  (of  one- 
self), pride,  arrogance,  conceit,  M  1.363;  Sn  853  (see 
expl"-  at  Nd'  233),  942,  968;  J  vi.235;  Nd'  490;  Miln 
289.   Cp.  atimaiinaDa. 

Atimanin  (adj.)  [fr.  atimana]  D  11.45  (thaddha -)-);  Sn  143 
(an")  244;  KhA  236. 

Atimukhara  (adj.)  [ati  -f-  mukhara]  very  talkative,  a  chat- 
terbox J  1. 418;  DhA  11.70.  atimukharata  (f.  abstr.)  ibid. 

Atimuttaka  [Sk.  atimuktaka]  N.  of  a  plant,  Gaertnera 
Racemosa  Vin  11.256  =  M  1.32  ;  Miln  338. 

Atimuduka  (adj.)  [ati  -f-  muduka]  very  soft,  mild  or  feeble 
J  1.262. 

Atiyakkha  (ati  -j-  yakkha]  a  sorcerer,  wizard,  fortuneteller 
J   VI. 502  (C. :   bhutavijja  ikkhanika). 

Atiyacaka  (adj.)  [ati  -)-  yacaka]  one  who  asks  too  much 
Vin  III  147. 

Atiyacana  (f.)  [ati  -|-  yacana]  asking  or  begging  too  much 
Vin  111.147. 

Atirattig  (adv.)  [ati  -f-  fatti ;  cp.  atidiva]  late  in  the  night, 
at  midnight  J  1.436  (opp.  atipabhate). 

Atirassa  (adj.)  [ati  4-  rassa]  too  short  (opp.  atidigha)  Vin 

IV.7;  J  VI.457;  VvA   103. 

Atiraja  [ati  -)-  raja]  a  higher  king,  the  greatest  king,  more 
than  a  king  DhA  11.60;   Miln  277. 

AtiriCCati  [ati  -f-  riccati,  see  ritta]  to  be  left  over,  to  remain 
Sdhp  23,   126. 

Atiritta  (adj.)  [pp.  of  ati  -f  rlC,  see  ritta]  left  over,  only 
as  neg.  an"  applied  to  food,  i.  e.  food  which  is  not  the 
leavings  of  a  meal,  fresh  food  Vin  1.213  sq  ,  238;  11. 301; 
IV.82  sq.,  85. 

Atiriva  (ati-r-iva)  see  ativiya. 

Atireka  (adj.)  [Sk.  atireka,  ati -J- ric,  rinakti ;  see  ritta] 
surplus,  too  much;  exceeding,  excessive,  in  a  high  degree; 
extra  Vin  1.255;  J  '-72  (°padasata),  109;  441  (in  higher 
positions);  Miln  216;  DhsA  2;  DhA  11.98. 

-civara  an  extra  robe  Vin  1.289.  -pada  exceeding  the 
worth  of  a  pada,  more  than  a  pada,   Vin  III. 47. 

Atlrekata  (f.)  [abstr.  to  prec]  excessiveness,  surplus,  excess 
Kvu  607. 

AtlrOCati  [ati  -j-  rue]  to  shine  magnificently  (trs.)  to  out- 
shine, to  surpass  in  splendour  D  II  208;  Dh  59;  Pv  ll.gW; 
Miln  336  (4- virocati);  DhA  1.446  (=  atikkamitva  viro- 
cati);  111.219;  FvA  139  (=  ativiya  virocati). 

Ativankin  (adj.)  [ati  -|-  vankin]  very  crooked  J  1.160  (van- 
kativankin  crooked  all  over;  cp.  ati  III.). 

AtivaOOatl  [ati  -\-  vannati]   to  surpass,  excel  D  11.267. 

Ativatta  [pp.  of  ativattati :  Sk.  ativrtta]  passed  beyond, 
surpassed,  overcome  (act.  &  pass.),  conquered  Sn  H33 
(bhava°);  Nd^  21  (=  atikkanta,  vitivatta);  J  v.84  (bhaya"); 
Miln   146,  154. 

Ativattati  [ati  -f-  Vft,  Sk.  ativartate]  to  pass,  pass  over, 
go  beyond;  to  overcome,  get  over;  conquer  Vin  11.237 
(samuddo  velar)  n');  S  11.92  (saijsarar)) ;  IV. 158  (id.)  It  9 
(sar)sarar|)=  A  lI.lo  =  Nd'  172=;  Th  1,412;  J  1.58,  280; 
1V.134;  VI. 113,  114;  PvA  276.  —  pp.  ativatta  (q.  v.). 

Ativattar'  [Sk.  *alivaktr,  n.  ag.  to  ati-vacati;  cp.  ativakya] 
one  who  insults  or  offends  J  v.266  (isinaq  ativattiro  = 
dharusavacahi  atikkamitva  vattaro  C). 


Ativattar 


21 


Atita 


Ativattar^  [Sk.  *ativartr,  n.  ag.  to  ati-vattati]  one  who  over- 
comes or  is  to  be  overcome  Sn  785  (svativatta  =  durati- 
vatta  duttara  duppatara  Nd'   76). 

Atlvasa  (a4J0  ["''  +  ^^^^  ^'^-  vas]  being  under  somebody's 
rule,  dependent  upon  (c.  gen.)  Dh  74  (=:  vase  vattati 
DhA  11.79). 

AtivaSSatl  [ati  4-  vassati,  cp.  Sk.  abhivarsati]  to  rain  down 
on,  upon  or  into  Th   I,  447  :=  Vin  11.240. 

Atlvakya  (nt.)  [ati  +  vac,  cp.  Sk.  ativada,  fr.  ati  +  vad] 
abuse,  blame,  reproach  Dh  320,  321  (=  attha-anariya- 
vohara-vasena  pavattaij  vitikkama-vacanaq  DhA  IV.3); 
J   VI. 508. 

Ativata  [ati  +  vSta]  too  much  wind,  a  wind  which  is  too 
strong,  a  gale,  storm  Miln  277. 

Atlvayati  [ati  -f-  vayati]  to  fill  (excessively)  with  an  odour 
or  perfume,  to  satiate,  permeate,  pervade  Miln  333  (-f- 
vayati;   cp.  abhivayati  ibid  385). 

Atlvaha  [fr.  ati  -\-  vah,  cp.  Sk.  ativahati  &  abhivaha]  car- 
rying, carrying  over;  a  conveyance;  one  who  conveys, 
i.e.  a  conductor,  guide  Th  I,  616  (said  of  sila,  good 
character);  J  v.433.  —  Cp.  ativahika. 

Ativahika  [fr.  alivaha]  one  who  belongs  to  a  conveyance, 
one  who  conveys  or  guides,  a  conductor  (of  a  caravan) 
J   V.471,  472  (°puri.sa). 

Ativlkala  (adj.)  [ati  -j-  vikala]  at  a  very  inconvenient  time, 
much  too  exete  D  i  108  (=  sutthu  vikala  DA  1.277). 

Ativijjhati  [Sk.  atividhyati,  ati  +  vyadh]  to  pierce,^  to 
enter  into  (fig.),  to  see  through,  only  in  phrase  pannaya 
ativijjha  (ger.)  passati  to  recognise  in  all  details  M  1.480 ; 
S  V.226;  A  11.178. 

Ativiya  (idv.)  [Sk.  ativa]  =  ati  +  '*»,  orig.  "much-like" 
like  an  excess  ^  excessive-Iy.  There  are  three  forms  of 
this  expression,  viz.  (i)  ati  -|-  iva  in  contraction  ativa 
(q.  v.);  —  (2)  ati  -f-  iva  with  epenthetic  r:  atiriva  D 
11.264  (v- '•  SS.  ativa);  Sn  679,  680,  683;  SnA  486;  — 
(3)  ati  -f-  viya  (the  doublet  of  iva)  =:  ativiya  J  1.61,  263 ; 
DhA  11.71  (a.  upakara  of  great  service);  PvA  22,  56,  139. 

Atlvisa  (f.)  [Sk.  ativisa]  N.  of  a  plant  Vin  1. 201 ;  IV.3S. 

Ativlssattha  (adj.)  [ati  +  vissattha]  too  abundant,  in  "vakya 
one  who  talks  too  much,  a  chatterbox  J  V.204. 

AtlviSSaslka  (adj.)  [ati  -j-  vissasika]  very,  or  too  confiden- 
tial J   1.86. 

AtivlSSUta  (adj.)  [ati  -j-  vissuta]  very  famous,  renowned 
Sdhp  473. 

Ative^hetl  [ati  -f  vejt,  cp.  Sk.  abhivestate]  to  wrap  over, 
to  cover,  to  enclose;  to  press,  oppress,  stifle  Vin  II.IOI; 
J  V.452  (-ativiya  vetheti  pileti  C). 

Atlvela  (adj.)  [ati  +  vela]  excessive  (of  time);  nt.  adv.  "g 
a  very  long  time;  excessively  D  1.19  (=  atikalai)  aticiran 
ti  attho  DA  1.113);  M  1.122;  Sn  973  (see  expl"-  at  Nd' 
504);  J  111.103  =  Nd'   504. 

Atilfna  (adj.)  [ati  -f-  Ii°^]  t°°  much  attached  to  worldly 
matters  S  v.263. 

Atflukha  (adj.)  [ati  -|-  lukha]  too  wretched,  very  miserable 
Sdhp  409. 

Atiloma  (adj.)  [ati  +  loma]  too  hairy,  having  too  much 
hair  J  VI.457  (opp.  aloma). 

Atlsaficara  ("cara?)  [ati  +  saiicara]  wandering  about  too 
much  Miln  277. 


AtlsaQha  (adj.)  [ati  +  sanha]  too  subtle  DhA  111.326. 

Atlsanta  (adj.)  [ati  +  santa']  extremely  peaceful  Sdhp  496. 

Atisambadha  (adj.)  [ali  +  sambadha]  too  light,  crowded 
or  narrow  DhA  1. 310;  111.310  =  VvA  68;  cp.  atinicaka. — 
f.  abstr.  atisambadhata  the  state  of  being  too  narrow  J  1.7. 

Atisaya  [cp.  Sk.  atisaya,  fr.  ati  +  Si]  superiority,  distinc- 
tion, excellence,  abundance  VvA  135  (=  visesa);  PvA 
86;  Davs  11.62. 

Atisayati  [ati  +  si]  to  surpass,  excel ;  ger.  atisayitva  Miln 
336  (+  atikkamitva). 

Atisara  (adj.;  [fr.  atisarati;  cp.  accasara]  transgressing, 
sinning  J  IV.6;  cp.  atisara. 

Atisarati  [ati  +  Sf]  'o  go  '°o  ''"■'i  '°  B°  beyond  the  limit, 
to  overstep,  transgress,  aor.  accasari  (q.  v.)  Sn  8  sq. 
(opp.  paccasari;  C.  atidhavi);  J  v.70  and  atisari  J  iv.6.  — 
ger.  atisitva  (for  *atisaritva)  D  1.222;  S  IV.94 ;  A  1.145; 
v.226,  256;  Sn  908  (=  Nd'  324  atikkamitva  etc.). 

Atisayai)  (adv.)  [ati  +  sayaij]  very  late,  late  in  the  evening 
J   V.94. 

Atisara  [fr-  ati  4-  Sfi  see  atisarati.  Cp.  Sk.  atisara  in  diff. 
meaning  but  BSk.  atisara  (sStisara)  in  the  same  meaning) 
going  too  far,  overstepping  the  limit,  trespassing,  false 
step,  slip,  danger  Vin  1.55  (sStisara),  326  (id);  S  1.74; 
M  III. 237;  Sn  889  (atisaraij  ditthiyo  =  ditthigatani  Nd' 
297;  going  beyond  the  proper  limits  of  the  right  faith), 
J  V.221  (dhamm°),  379;  DhA  1. 1 82;  DhsA  28.  See  also 
atisara. 

Atislthila  (adj.)  [ati  +  sithila]  very  loose,  shaky  or  weak 
A  111.375. 

Atisita  (adj.)  [ati  +  sita]  too  cold  DhA  11.85. 

Atisitala  (adj.)  [ati  +  sitala]  very  cold  J  111.55. 

Atiliattha  (adj.)  [ati  -f  hattha]  very  pleased  Sdhp  323, 

Atiliarati  [ati  -f  hf]  to  ca'"T  over,  to  bring  over,  bring, 
draw  over  Vin  11.209;  iv.264;  S  1.89;  J  I.292;  v. 347. — 
Caus.  aliharapeti  to  cause  to  bring  over,  bring  in,  reap, 
collect,  harvest  Vin  11.181;  III. 18;  Miln  66;  DhAiv.77. — 
See  also  atihita. 

Atillita    [ati  +  hf,   PP-  of  atiharati,  hita  unusual  for  hata, 

perhaps  through  analogy  with  Sk.  abhi  -|-  dhi]  brought 

over   (from   the   field   into   the    house),  harvested,   borne 
home  Th  I,  381  (vihi). 

Atihina  (adj.)  [ati  4-  hina]  very  poor  or  destitute  A  iv.282, 
287;  323  (opp.  accogalha). 

Atihi]eti  [ati  +  hid]  to  despise  J  IV.331  (=  atimanoati  C). 

Atita  (adj.-n.)  [Sk.  atita,  ati  -f  ita,  pp.  of  |.  Cp.  accaya  & 
ati  eti]  1.  (temporal)  past,  gone  by  (cp.  accaya  I)  (a) 
adj.  atitai)  addbanai)  in  the  time  which  is  past  S  111.86; 
A  IV. 219;  V.32.  —  Pv  II. 12'-  (atltanai),  scil.  attabhava- 
oari,  pariyanto  na  dissati);  khan&tita  with  the  right  mo- 
ment past  Dh  315  =  Sn  333;  atitayobbana  he  who  is 
past  youth  or  whose  youth  is  past  Sn  no.  —  (b)  nt. 
the  past:  atite  (loc.)  once  upon  a  time  J  1.98  etc.  atitai] 
ahari  he  told  (a  tale  of)  the  past,  i.e.  a  JStaka  J  1.213, 
218,  221  etc.  —  S  1.5  (atitai)  n&nusocati);  A  111.400  (a. 
eko  anto);  Sn  851,  1112.  In  this  sense  very  frequently 
comb<i-  with  or  opposed  to  anagata  the  future  &  pac- 
cuppanna  the  present,  e.  g.  atitinagate  in  past  &  future 
S  11.58;  Sn  373;  J  VI. 364.  Or  all  three  in  ster.  comb"- 
atlt'-auagata-paccuppanna  (this  the  usual  order)  D  in, 100, 
135;  S  11.26,  no,  252;  111.19,  47,  187;  IV.4  sq.;  151 
sq. ;  A  1.264  sq.,  284;  11.171,  202;  111.151;  v.33;  It  53; 
Nd'^  22;  but  also  occasionally  atita  paccuppaona  anagata, 


Atita 


22 


Attan 


e.  g.  PvA  lOO.  —  2.  (modal)  passed  out  of,  having  over- 
come or  surmounted,  gone  over,  free  from  (cp.  accaya  2) 
S  1.97  (maranai)  an°  not  free  from  death),  121  (sabba- 
vera-bhaya") ;  A  11.21;  in. 346  (sabbasaqyojana°);  Sn  373 
(kappa'),  598  (khaya°,  of  the  moon  =  unabhfivai)  atlta 
Sn  A  463);  Th  I,  413  (c.  abl.)  —  3.  (id.)  overstepping, 
having  transgressed  or  neglected  (cp.  accaya  3)  Dh  176 
(dhammai)). 

-at)9a  the  past  (=  atita  kotthase,  atikkantabhavesu  ti 
attho  ThA  233)  D  n.222;  111.275;  Th  2,  314.  -aramm- 
ana  state  of  mind  arising  out  of  the  past  Dhs  1041. 

AtfradaSSifl  (adj.-n.)  [a  -f  tira  +  dassin]  not  seeing  the 
shore  J  1.46;  vi.440;  also  as  atiradassani  (f.)  J  v. 75 
(nava).  Cp.  D  i  222. 

Ativa  (indecl.)  [ati  -|-  iva,  see  also  ativiya]  very  much, 
exceedingly  J  n.413;  Mhvs   33,  2   etc. 

Ato  (adv.)  [Sk.  atah]  hence,  now,  therefore  S1.15;  M  1.498; 
Miln  87;  J  V.398  (=tato  C). 

AtOina  [etym.?)  a  class  of  jugglers  or  acrobats  (?)  Miln  191. 

Atta'  [a  +  d  -|-  ta ;  that  is,  pp.  of  Sdadati  with  the  base 
form  reduced  to  d.  Idg  *d-to;  cp.  Sk.  atta]  that  which 
has  been  taken  up,  assumed.  Atta-danda,  he  who  has 
taken  a  stick  in  hand,  a  violent  person,  S  1.236;  iv.117; 
Sn  630,  935 ;  Dh  406.  Attanjaha,  rejecting  what  had 
been  assumed,  Sn  790.  Attaq  pahaya  Sn  800.  The  opp. 
is  niratta,  that  which  has  not  been  assumed,  has  been 
thrown  off,  rejected.  The  Arahant  has  neither  atta  nor 
niratta  (Sn  787,  858,  919),  neither  assumption  nor  rejec- 
tion, he  keeps  an  open  mind  on  all  speculative  theories. 
See  Nd  1.82,  90,  107,  352;  11.271;  Sn.\  523;  Dh.A.  iv.180 
for  the  traditional  exegesis.  As  legal  t.  t.  attadanarj 
adiyati  is  to  take  upon  oneself  the  conduct,  before  the 
Chapter,  of  a  legal  point  already  raised.  Vin  11.247 
(quoted  V.91). 

Atta'^  see  attan. 

Atta-^  [Sk.  akta,   pp.  of  aiijati]  see  upatta. 

Attan  (m.)  &  atta  (the  latter  is  the  form  used  in  comp") 
[Vedic  atman,  not  to  Gr.  msimi;  =  Lat.  animus,  but  to 
Gr.  arjidf  steam,  Ohg.  atum  breath,  Ags.  ae{)m].  —  I. 
Inflection,  (i)  of  at  Ian-  (n.  stem);  the  foil,  cases  are  the 
most  freq.:  ace.  attanar)  D  1.13,  185;  S  1.24;  Sn  132, 
45'-  —  ge°-  dat.  attatio  Sn  334,  592  etc.,  also  as  abl. 
^  '"-SS?  (attano  ca  parato  ca  as  regards  himself  and 
others).  —  instr.  abl.  attana  S  1.24;  Sn  132,  451;  DhA 
11.75;  PvA  15,  214  etc.  On  use  of  attana  see  below 
111.1  C.  —  loc.  attani  S  v. 177;  A  1.149  (attani  metri 
causa);  11.52  (anattani);  111.181;  M  1. 138;  Sn  666,  756, 
784;  Vbh  376  (an°).  —  (2)  of  atta-  (a-stem)  we  find 
the  foil,  cases:  ace.  attai]  Dh  379.  —  instr.  attena  S 
IV.54.  —  abl.  attato  S  1.188;  Ps  1.143;  11.48;  Vbh  336. 
Meanings,  i.  The  soul  as  postulated  in  the  animistic 
theories  held  in  N  India  in  the  6tli  and  7'h  cent.  B.  C. 
It  is  described  in  the  Upanishads  as  a  small  creature,  in 
shape  like  a  man,  dwelling  in  ordinary  times  in  the  heart. 
It  escapes  from  the  body  in  sleep  or  trance ;  when  it 
returns  to  the  body  life  and  motion  reappear.  It  escapes 
from  the  body  at  death,  then  continues  to  carry  on  an 
everlasting  life  of  its  own.  For  numerous  other  details 
see  Rh.  D.  Theory  of  Soul  in  the  Upanishads  J  Ji  A  S 
1899.  Bt.  India  251 — 255.  Buddhism  repudiated  all  such 
theories,  thus  differing  from  other  religions.  Sixteen  such 
theories  about  the  soul  D  1.3 1.  Seven  other  theories  D 
1.34.  Three  others  D  1.186/7.  A  'souV  according  to  general 
belief  was  some  thing  permanent,  unchangeable,  not  af- 
fected by  sorrow  S  iv.54=:Kvu  67;  Vin  1.14;  M  1. 138. 
See  also  M  1.233;  iii-265,  271;  S  11. 17,  109;  in. 135; 
A  1.284;  n.164,  171;  V.188;  S  IV.400.  Cp.  atuman,  tuma, 
puggala,  jiva,  satta,  pana  and  nama-riipa. 

2.    Oneself,   himself,   yourself.   Nom.  atta,  very  rare.  S 


1. 71,  169;  III  120;  A  1.57,  149  (you  yourself  know  whether 
that  is  true  or  false.  Cp.  Manu  vin. 84.  Here  atta  comes 
very  near  to  the  European  idea  of  conscience.  But  con- 
science as  a  unity  or  entity  is  not  accepted  by  Buddhism) 
Sn  284;  Dh  166,  380;  Miln  54  (the  image,  outward 
appearance,  of  oneself).  .\cc.  attanar)  S  1.44  (would  not 
give  for  himself,  as  a  slave)  A  1.89;  Sn  709.  Ace.  attar) 
Dh  379.  Abl.  attato  as  oneself  S  1.188;  Ps  1.143;  11.48; 
Vbh  336.  Loc.  vttani  A  1.149;  111.181;  Sn  666,  784. 
Instr.  attana  S  1.57  =  Dh  66;  S  1.75;  11.68;  A  1.53; 
in. 211;  IV. 405;  Dh  165.  On  one's  own  account,  sponta- 
neously S  IV.307;  V.354;  A  1.297;  11.99,  218;  111.81  ;  J 
I.I 56;  PvA  15,  20.  In  composition  with  numerals  atta- 
dutiya  himself  and  one  other  D  II. 147;  "catultha  with 
himself  as  fourth  M  1.393;  A  111.36;  "pancaraa  Dpvs 
VIII.2;  °saltama  J  1.233;  "atthama  VvA  149  (as  atta-n- 
atthama  Vv  34"),  &  "atthamaka  Miln   291. 

anatta  (n.  and  predicative  adj.)  not  a  soul,  without  a 
soul.  Most  freq.  in  comb"-  with  dukkha  &  anicca  —  (i)  as 
noun:  S  111.141  ("anupassin);  IV.49;  v.345  ("saiiriin) ;  A 
11.52  =  Ps  11.80  (anattani  anatta;  opp.  to  anattani  atta, 
the  opinion  of  the  micchaditthigata  satta);  Dh  279;  Ps 
"■37i  45  ^1-  (°anupassana),  106  (yaq  aniccan  ca  dukkhan 
ca  tai]  anatta);  DhA  in.  406  ("lakkhana).  —  (2)  as  adj. 
(pred.):  S  iv.152  sq. ;  S  IV.166;  S  iv.i30  sq.,  148  sq.; 
Vin  1. 1 3  =  S  111.66  =:  Nd2  6S0  Q  I  ;  S  in. 20  sq. ;  178 
sq  ,  196  sq.;  sabbe  dhamnia  anatta  Vin  v. 86;  S  in. 1 33; 
IV.28,  401. 

-attha  one's  own  profit  or  interest  Sn  75;  Nd'^  23;  J 
IV.56,  96;  otherwise  as  atta-d-attha,  e.g.  Sn  284.  -atthiya 
looking  after  one's  own  needs  Th  i,  1097.  -adbipaka 
master  of  oneself,  self-mastered  A  1.150.  -adhipateyya  self- 
dependence,  self-reliance,  independence  A  1.147.  -Sdhlna 
independent  D  1.72.  -anuditthi  speculation  about  souls 
S  nr.185;  IV.148;  A  in. 447;  Sn  1119;  Ps  1.143;  Vbh 
368;  Miln  146.  -anuyogin  one  who  concentrates  his 
attention  on  himself  Dh  209;  DhA  in. 275.  -anuvada 
blaming  oneself  A  11.121 ;  Vbh  376.  -unna  self-humiliation 
Vbh  353  (4-  att-avaiiiia).  -uddesa  relation  to  oneself  Vin 
III. 149  (=  attano  atthaya),  also  "ika  ibid.  144.  -kata 
self-made  S  1.134  (opp.  para°).  -kama  love  of  self  A 
11.21;  adj.  a  lover  of  "soul",  one  who  cares  for  his  own 
soul  S  1.75.  -kara  individual  self,  fixed  individuality, 
oneself  (cp.  ahaijkara)  D  1.53  (opp.  para°);  A  111337' 
(id.)  DA  1. 160;  as  nt.  at  J  v.401  in  the  sense  of  service 
(self-doing",  slavery)  (atlakarani  karonti  bhattusu).  -kila- 
matba  self-mortification  D  in. 113;  S  iv.330;  V.421 ;  M 
ni.230.  -garahin  self-censuring  Sn  778.  -gutta  self- 
guarded  Dh  379.  -gutti  watchfulness  as  regards  one's 
self,  self-care  A  n.72.  -ghaiina  self-destruction  Dh  164. 
-ja  proceeding  from  oneself  Dh  161  (papa),  -nu  knowing 
oneself  A  IV. 113,  cp.  D  111.252.  -(n)tapa  self-mortifying, 
self-vexing  D  in. 232  =  A  11.205  (opp.  paran°);  M  1.34I, 
411;  11.159;  Pug  55,  56.  -danda  see  atta'.  -danta  self- 
restrained,  self-controlled  Dh  104,  322.  -ditthi  speculation 
concerning  the  nature  of  the  soul  Nd'  107;  SnA  523, 
527.  -dlpa  relying  on  oneself,  independent,  founded  on 
oneself  (-(-  attasarana,  opp.  atina")  D  II.  1 00  :=  HI. 42; 
V.154;  Sn  501  {^=  attano  gune  eva  attano  dlpaij  katva 
Sn.A  416).  -paccakkha  only  in  instr.  °ena  by  or  with 
his  own  presence,  i.e.  himself  J  v.  119.  -paccakkbika 
eye-witness  J  v.  11 9.  -paccattbika  hostile  to  oneself  Vin 
11.94,  96.  -patilabba  acquisition  of  a  personality  D  1.195 
(tayo:  olarika,  manomaya,  arupa).  -paritapana  self-chast- 
isement, mortification  D  111232  =  A  11.205;  M  1. 341; 
PvA  18,  30.  -paritta  charm  (protection)  for  oneself  Vin 
II. 1 10.  -paribhava  disrespect  for  one's  own  person  Vbh 
353.  -bhava  one's  own  nature  (i)  person,  personality, 
individuality,  living  creature;  form,  appearance  [cp.  Dhs 
irsl.  LX.XI  and  BSk.  atmabhava  body  Divy  70,  73 
(°pratilambha),  230;  Sp.  Av.  is  1.162  (pratilambha),  167, 
171]  Vin  11.238  (living  beings,  forms);  S  v.442  (bodily 
appearance);  A  1.279  (olarika  a  substantial  creature); 
II. 17  (creature);  DhA  11.64,  69  (appearance);  Sn.\  132 
(personality).   —  (2)    life,    rebirth    A    1.134    sq.;   1114 12; 


Attan 


23 


Attha 


UhA  11.68;  PvA  8,  15,  166  (atita  °a  former  lives),  "q 
pavatteti  to  lead  a  life,  to  live  PvA  29,  i8l.  Thus  in 
cpd.  patilabba  assumption  of  an  existence,  becoming 
rebovn  as  an  individual  Vin  H.185;  in. 105;  D  III. 231; 
M  111.46;  S  11.255,  272,  283;  III. 144;  A  11.159,  '88; 
III  122  sq.  —  (3)  character,  quality  of  heart  Sn  388  (= 
citta  SnA  374);  J  1.61.  -rtipa  "of  the  form  of  self", 
self-like  only  in  instr.  ''ena  as  adv.  by  oneself,  on  one's 
own  account,  for  the  sake  of  oneself  S  iv.97;.A  11. 120. 
-vadha  self-destruction  S  11.241;  A  11.73.  -vada  theory 
of  (a  persistent)  soul  D  111.230;  M  1.66;  D  11.58;  S  11.3, 
245  sq.;  111.103,  165,  203;  iv.l  sq.,  43  sq.,  153  sq.; 
Ps  1. 1 56  sq.;  Vbh  136,  375.  For  var.  points  of  an  "at- 
tavadic"  doctrine  see  Index  to  Saqyutta  Nikaya.  -vya- 
badha  personal  harm  or  distress  self-suffering,  one's  own 
disaster  (opp.  para°)  M  1 369;  S  iv.339  =  A  1.157;  A 
11.179.  -vetana  supporting  oneself,  earning  one's  own 
living  Sn  24.  -sancetana  self-perception,  self-conscious- 
ness (opp.  para")  D  111.231  ;  A  11.159.  -sambhava  origin- 
ating from  one's  self  S  1.70;  A  IV. 312;  Dh  161  (papa); 
Th  1 ,  260.  -sambhuta  arisen  from  oneself  Sn  272. 
-sammapanidhi  thorough  pursuit  or  development  of  one's 
personality  A  11.32;  Sn  260,  cp.  KhA  132.  -sarana  see 
"dipa.  -sukba  happiness  of  oneself,  self-success  Dpvs 
1.66,  cp.  II. II.  -hita  personal  welfare  one's  own  good 
(opp.  para")  D  11.233;  A  11.95  sq.  -hetu  for  one's  own 
sake,  out  of  self-consideration  Sn  122;  Dh  328. 

Attaniya  (adj.)  [from  alts]  belonging  to  the  soul,  having  a 
soul,  of  the  nature  of  soul,  soul-lika;  usually  nt.  anything 
of  the  nature  of  soul  M  1. 1 38  =  Kvu  67;  M  1.297; 
11.263;  S  III. 77  (yai)  kho  anattaniyai]  whatever  has  no 
soul),  127;  iv.54  =  Nd2  680  F;  S  iv.82  =  111.33  =  Nd^ 
680  Q  3;  S  1V.168;  V.6;  Nd;  680  D.  Cp.  Dhs  trsl. 
XXXV  ff. 

Attamana  [atta'  +  mano,  having  an  up  raised  mind.  Bdhgh's 
expl"-  is  saka-mano  DA  1.255  =  atta -|- mano.  ^^  applies 
the  same  expl"-  to  attamanata  (at  Dhs  9,  see  Dhs  trsl. 
12)  =  attano  manata  mentality  of  one's  self]  delighted, 
pleased,  enraptured  D  1.3,  90  (an");  11.14;  A  in. 337, 
343;  IV.344;  Sn  45  =  Dh  328  (=:  upalthita-satt  Dh.\ 
IV.29);  Sn  995;  Nd'  24  (=  tuttha-mano  hattha-mano  etc.); 
Vv  i«;  Pug  33  (an");  Miln"i8;  DA  1.52;  DhA  1.89 
(an^-dhatuka  displeased);  PvA  23,  132;  VvA  21  (where 
Dhpala  gives  two  expl°^,  either  tutthamano  or  sakamano). 

Attamanata  (f)  [abstr.  to  prec]  satisfaction,  joy,  pleasure, 
transport  of  mind  M  1. 114;  A  1. 276;  IV.62;  Pug  18  (an"); 
Dhs  9,  86,  418  (an");  PvA  132;  VvA  67  (an°). 

Attala  (adj.)  [a  -\-  tana]  without  shelter  or  protection  J 
1.229;  M'ln  148,  325;  ThA  285. 

Attha'  (also  attba,  esp.  in  combns  mentioned  under  3) 
(m.  &  nt.)  [Vedic  artha  from  f,  arti  &  rnoti  to  reach, 
attain  or  to  proceed  (to  or  from),  thus  originally  result 
(or  cause),  profit,  attainment.  Cp.  semantically  Fr.  chose, 
Lat.  causa]  1.  interest,  advantage,  gain;  (moral)  good, 
blessing,  welfare;  profit,  prosperity,  well-being  M  i.iii 
(atthassa  ninnetar,  of  the  Buddha,  bringer  of  good);  S 
IV.94  (id.);  S  1.34  (attano  a.  one's  own  welfare),  55  (id.) 
86,  102,  126=  A  11.46  (atthassa  patti);  S  1.162  (attano 
ca  parassa  ca);  11.222  (id.);  iv.347  (°r|  bhaiijati  destroy 
the  good  or  welfare,  always  with  musavadena  by  lying, 
cp.  attha-bhanjanaka);  A  161  (°r)  anubhoti  to  fare  well, 
to  have  a  (good)  result);  in. 364  (samparayika  a.  profit 
in  the  future  life);  A  v.223  sq.  (analtho  ca  attho  ca 
detriment  &  profit);  It  44  (v.  1.  atta  better);  Sn  37,  58 
(=  Nd'^  26,  where  the  six  kinds  of  advantages  are  cnum^- 
as  att°  par°  ubhay",  i.  e.  advantage,  resulting  for  oneself, 
for  others,  for  both;  ditthadhammik"  samparayik"  param" 
gain  for  this  life,  for  a  future  life,  and  highest  gain  of 
all,  i.e.  Arahantship);  Sn  331  (ko  attho  supitena  what 
good   is  it  to  sleep  =  na  hi  sakka  supantena  koci  attho 


papnnitui]  SnA  338;  cp.  ko  attho  supinena  te  Pv  11.6'); 
PvA  30  (atthai)  sadheti  does  good,  results  in  good,  69 
(samparayikena  atthena).  —  dat.  atthaya  lor  the  good, 
for  the  benefit  of  (gen.);  to  advantage,  often  eombd-  with 
hitaya  sukhaya,  e.g.  D  in. 211  sq.;  It  79.  —  Kh  vni.i 
(to  my  benefit);  Pv  1.4'  (=:  upakaraya  PvA  18),  11.12' 
(to  great  advantage).  See  also  below  6. 

Sometimes  in  a  more  concrete  meaning  =  riches,  wealth, 
e.g.  J  1.256  (=  vaddhir)  C);  in. 394  (id.);  Pv  iv.i*  (= 
dhanar)  PvA  219).  —  Often  as  — °:  att",  one's  own  well- 
fare,  usually  comb<i-  with  par"  and  ubhay"  (see  above) 
S  11.29;  V.121;  A  1.158,  216;  111.63  sq.;  IV.134;  Sn  75 
(att-attha,  v.  1.  attha  Nd-i),  284  (atta-d-attha);  uttam"  the 
highest  gain,  the  very  best  thing  Dh  386  (=  arahatta 
DhA  IV.  1 42);  Sn  324  (=  arahatta  SnA  332);  param" 
id.  Nd'  26;  sad"  one's  own  weal  D  11.141;  M  1.4;  S 
11.29;  v'45;  A  1.144;  sattha  (adj.)  connected  with  ad- 
vantage, beneficial,  profitable  (of  the  Dhamma;  or  should 
we  take  it  as  "with  the  meaning,  in  spirit"?  see  sattha) 
D  1.62;  S  V.352;  A  n.147;  111.152;  Ndi  316.  —  2.  need, 
want  (c.  instr.),  use  (for  =  instr.)  S  1.37  ("jata  when 
need  has  arisen,  in  need);  J  1.254;  in. 126,  281;  iv.i; 
DhA  1.398  (n'  atthi  eteh'  attho  I  have  no  use  for  them); 
VvA  250;  PvA  24  (yavadattha,  adj.  as  much  as  is  needed, 
sufficient  r=  .inappaka).  —  3.  sense,  meaning,  import  (of 
a  word),  denotation,  signification.  In  this  application  attha 
is  always  spelt  attha  in  cpds.  atth-uppatti  and  attha-katha 
(see  below).  On  term  see  also  Cpd.  4.  —  S  in.93  (atthaq 
vibhajati  explain  the  sense);  A  1.23  (id.),  60  (nit°  primary 
meaning,  literal  meaning;  neyy"  secondary  or  inferred 
meaning);  11.189  ("■)  aclkkhati  to  interpret);  Sn  126  ("q 
pucchlta  asked  the  (correct)  sense,  the  lit.  meaning),  251 
("r|  akkhati);  Th  I,  374;  attho  paramo  the  highest  sense, 
the  ultimate  sense  or  intrinsic  meaning  It  98,  cp.  Cpd. 
6,  81,  223;  Miln  28  (paramatthato  in  the  absolute  sense); 
Miln  18  (atthato  according  to  Its  meaning,  opp.  vyan- 
janato  by  letter,  orthographlcally);  DhA  11.82;  111.175; 
KhA  81  (pad"  meaning  of  a  word);  SnA  91  (id.);  PvA 
15  ("ij  vadati  to  explain,  interpret),  16,  19  (hltattha- 
dhammata  "fitness  of  the  best  sense",  i.  e.  practical  ap- 
plication), 71.  V'ery  frequent  in  Commentary  style  at  the 
conclusion  of  an  explained  passage  as  tl  attho  "this  is 
the  meaning",  thus  it  Is  meant,  this  is  the  sense,  e.  g. 
DA  1.65;  DhA  IV.140,  141;  PvA  33,  etc.  —  Contrasted 
with  dhamma  in  the  comb"-  attho  ca  dhammo  ca  it 
(attha)  refers  to  the  (piimary,  natural)  meaning  of  the 
word,  while  dhamma  relates  to  the  (interpreted)  meaning 
of  the  text,  to  its  bearing  on  the  norm  and  conduct;  or 
one  might  say  they  represent  the  theoretical  and  practical 
side  of  the  text  (pall)  to  be  discussed,  the  "letter"  and 
the  "spirit''.  Thus  at  A  1.69;  v.222,  254;  Sn  326  (= 
bhasitatthaii  ca  paUdhamman  ca  SnA  333):  It  84  (duttho 
althar)  na  janati  dhammai)  na  pa.ssali:  he  realises  neither 
the  meaning  nor  the  importance);  Dh  363  (=  bhasitatlhaii 
c"  eva  desanadhammaii  ca);  J  11.353;  vi.368;  Nd'  386 
(meaning  &  proper  nature);  Pv  111.9"  (but  expld-  by  PvA 
211  as  hita  =  benefit,  good,  thus  referring  it  to  above  i). 
For  the  same  use  see  cpds.  "dhamma,  "patisambhida,  esp. 
in  adv.  use  (see  under  6)  Sn  430  (yen^  atthena  for  which 
purpose),  508  (kena  atthena  v.  1.  BB  for  T  attana),  J 
1.41 1  (atthai]  va  kSranai]  va  reason  and  cause);  DhA 
"•95  (+  karana( ;  PvA  11  (ayaij  h'  ettha  atlho  this  is 
the  reason  why).  —  5.  (In  very  wide  application,  covering 
the  same  ground  as  Lat.  res  &  Fr.  chose):  (a)  matter, 
affair,  thing,  often  untranslatable  and  simply  to  be  given 
as  "this"  or  "that"  S  11.36  (ekena-padena  sabbo  attho 
vutto  the  whole  matter  is  said  with  one  word);  J  1.151 
(tai)  atthaq  the  matter);  n.i6o  (Imaij  a.  this);  vi.289 
(tai)  atthar)  pakascnto);  PvA  6  (lai)  atthaq  pucchi  asked 
It),  II  (visajjeti  explains  it),  29  (vuttai}  atthaq  what  had 
been  said),  82  (id.).  —  (b)  affair,  cause,  case  (cp.  atta' 
and  Lat.  causa)  Dh  256,  331;  Miln  47  (kassa  atthaq 
dharesi  whose  cause  do  you  support,  with  whom  do  you 
agree?).  See  also  alamattha.  —  6.  Adv.  use  of  oblique 
cases   in    the    sense   of  a  prep. :  (a)  dat.  atthaya  for  the 


Attha 


24 


Attharati 


sake  of,  in  order  to,  for  J  1.254  dhan'  atthaya  for  wealth, 
kim"  what  for,  why?),  279;  11.133;  111-54;  DhA  11.82; 
PvA  55,  75,  78.  —  (b)  ace.  attba^  on  account  of,  in 
order  to,  often  instead  of  an  infinitive  or  with  another 
inf.  substitute  J  1.279  (kim");  111.53  i"^-)'-!  1-253;  n.128; 
Dpvs  VI. 79;  DhA  1.397;  PvA  32  (dassan"  in  order  to 
see),  78,  167,  etc.  —  (c)  abl.  attha  J  111.518  (pitu 
attha  =  atthaya  C).  —  (d)  loc.  atthe  instead  of,  for 
VvA  10;  PvA  33;  etc. 

anattba  (m.  &  nt.)  I.  unprofitable  situation  or  con- 
dition, mischief,  harm,  misery,  misfortune  S  1. 103;  11.196 
(analthaya  saqvattati);  A  iv.96  (°i)  adhipajjati)  It  84 
(°jaoano  doso  ill-will  brings  discomfort);  J  1.63,  196; 
Pug  37;  Dhs  1060,  1231;  Sdhp  87;  DA  1.52  (anattha- 
janano  kodho,  cp.  It  83  and  Nd^  420  Q2);  DhA  11.73; 
PvA  13,  61,  114,  199.  —  2.  (=  attha  3)  incorrect  sense, 
false  meaning,  as  adj.  senseless  (and  therefore  unprofit- 
able, no  good,  irrelevant)  A  v. 222,  254  (adhammo  ca); 
Dh  100  (=  aniyyanad°Ipaka  DhA  11.208);  Sn  126  (expH- 
at  SnA   180  as  ahitaq). 

-akkbayin  showing  what  is  profitable  D  111-187.  -attha 
riches  J  vi.290  (=  atthabhatai)  atthai)  C).  -antara  dif- 
ference between  the  (two)  meanings  Miln  158.  At  Th  i, 
374,  Oldenberg's  reading,  but  the  v.  1.  (also  C.  reading) 
atthandhara  is  much  belter  =z  he  who  knows  the  (cor- 
rect) meaning,  esp.  as  it  coiTesponds  with  dhamma-dhara 
(q.  v.).  -abbisamaya  grasp  of  the  proficient  S  1.87  (see 
abhisamaya).  -uddbara  synopsis  or  abstract  of  contents 
("matter")  of  the  Vinaya  Dpvs  v.37.  -upaparilckba  in- 
vestigation of  meaning,  (-|- dhamma-savanna)  M  III. 175; 
A  III. 381  sq.;  IV.221;  V.126.  -uppatti  (atth")  sense, 
meaning,  explanation,  interpretation  J  1.89;  DA  1.242; 
KhA  216;  VvA  197,  203  (cp.  palito)  PvA  2,  6,  78;  etc. 
-kama  (adj.)  (a)  well-wishing,  a  well-wisher,  friend,  one 
who  is  interested  in  the  welfare  of  others  (cp.  Sk.  artha- 
kama,  e.g.  Bhagavadglta  11.5:  gurun  arthakaman)  S  1.140, 
144,  197;  A  111.143;  D  III. 164  (bahuno  janassa  a.,  -\- 
hitakamo);  J  1.241 ;  Pv  iv.3" ;  Pv  A  25  ;  SnA  287  (an°).  — 
(b)  one  who  is  interested  in  his  own  gain  or  good,  either 
in  good  or  bad  sense  (^greedy)  S  1.44;  PvA  112.  — 
-katha  (attha")  exposition  of  the  sense,  explanation,  com- 
mentary J  V.38,  170;  PvA  I,  7l,  etc.  freq.  in  N.  of 
Com.  -kara  beneficial,  useful  Vin  111.149;  Miln  321. 
-karana  the  business  of  trying  a  case,  holding  court, 
giving  judgment  (v.  1.  atta°)  D  11.20;  S  1.74  (judgment 
hall?),  -kavi  a  didactic  poet  (see  kavi)  A  11.230.  -kamin 
=  °kama,  well-wishing  Sn  986  (devata  atthakamin!). 
-karaicia  (abl.)  for  the  sake  of  gain  D  in. 186.  -kusala 
clever  in  finding  out  what  is  good  or  profitable  Sn  143 
(=  atthacheka  KhA  236).  -cara  doing  good,  busy  in  the 
interest  of  others,  obliging  S  1.23  (naranai)  =z  "working 
out  man's  salvation"),  -caraka  (adj.)  one  who  devotes 
himself  to  being  useful  to  others,  doing  good,  one  who 
renders  service  to  others,  e.  g.  an  attendant,  messenger, 
agent  etc.  D  1.107  (=  hitakSraka  DA  1.276);  J  11.87; 
III. 326;  IV.230;  VI.369.  -cariya  useful  conduct  or  behaviour 
D  IU.1S2,  190,  232;  A  11.32,  248;  IV.219,  364.  -nu  one 
who  knows  what  is  useful  or  who  knows  the  (plain  or 
correct)  meaning  of  something  (-|-  dhammannu)  D  111.252; 
A  111.148;  IV.H3  sq.  -dassia  intent  upon  the  (moral) 
good  Sn  385  (=  hilSnupassin  SnA  373).  -dassimant  one 
who  examines  a  cause  (cp.  Sk.  arthadarsika)  J  vi.286 
(but  expld-  by  C.  as  "sanha-sukhuma-paiina"  of  deep  in- 
sight, one  who  has  a  fine  and  minute  knowledge),  -desana 
interpretation,  exegesis  Miln  21  (dhamm").  -dhamma 
"reason  and  morality",  see  above  n".  3.  °anusasaha  one 
who  advises  regarding  the  meaning  and  application  of  the 
Law,  a  professor  of  moral  philosophy  J  11.105;  DhAll.71. 
^pada  a  profitable  saying,  a  word  of  good  sense,  text, 
motto  A  n.189;  ni-356;  Dh  100.  -patUambbida  know- 
ledge of  the  meaning  (of  words)  combd-  with  dhamma° 
of  the  text  or  spirit  (see  above  n".  3)  Ps  1.132;  11. 150; 
Vbh  293  sq.  -pa^lsagvedin  experiencing  good  D  111.24 1 
(4-  dhamma°);  A  1.151;  111.21.  -baddha  expecting  some 
good  from  (c.  loc.)   Sn   382.  -bhanjanaka  breaking  the 


welfare  of,  hurting  DhA  111.356  (paresai)  of  others,  by 
means  of  telling  lies,  musavadena).  -majjha  of  beautiful 
waist  J  V.170  (=  sumajjha  C. ;  reading  must  be  faulty, 
there  is  hardly  any  connection  with  attha;  v.  1.  atta). 
•rasa  sweetness  (or  substance,  essence)  of  meaning  (-j- 
dhamma°,  vimutti°)  Nd^  466;  Ps  11.88,  89.  -vasa  "de- 
pendence on  the  sense",  reasonableness,  reason,  conse- 
quence, cause  D  11.285;  ^  '•464;  11.120;  111.150;  S  11.202; 
111.93;  IV.303;  V.224:  A  i.6i,  77,  98;  11.240;  111.72,  169, 
237;  Dh  289  (=  karana  DhA  111.435);  I'  ^9;  Sn  297; 
Ud  14.  -vasika  sensible  It  89;  Miln  406.  -vasin  bent 
on  (one's)  aim  or  purpose  Th  i,  539.  -vadin  one  who 
speaks  good,  i.  e.  whose  words  are  doing  good  or  who 
speaks  only  useful  speech,  always  in  comb"-  with  kala° 
bhuta"  dhamma"  D  1.4;  111.175;  A  1.204;  11-22,  209; 
Pug  58;  DA  1.76  (expld-  as  "one  who  speaks  for  the 
sake  of  reaping  blessings  here  and  hereaiter").  -sat]van- 
nana  explanation,  exegesis  PvA  i.  -saijbita  connected 
with  good,  bringing  good,  profitable,  useful,  salutary  D 
1.189;  S  11.223;  IV.330;  V.417;  A  111.196  sq.,  244;  Sn 
722  (=  hitena  sai)hitar|  SnA  500);  Pug  58.  -sandassana 
determination  of  meaning,  definition  Ps  1.105.  -siddhi 
profit,  advantage,  benefit  J  1.402;  PvA  63. 

Attha^  (nt.)  [Vedic  asta,  of  uncertain  etym.]  home,  primarily 
as  place  of  rest  &  shelter,  but  in  P.  phraselogy  abstracted 
from  the  "going  home",  i.  e.  setting  of  the  sun,  as  dis- 
appearance, going  out  of  existence,  annihilation,  extinction. 
Only  in  ace.  and  as  ° —  in  foil  phrases:  attbangacchati 
to  disappear,  to  go  out  of  existence,  to  vanish  Dh  226 
(=  vinasaq  natthibhavai)  gacchati  DhA  111.324),  384  (= 
parikkhayai]  gacchati);  pp.  attbangata  gone  home,  gone 
to  rest,  gone,  disappeared;  of  the  sun  (=:  set):  J  1.175 
(atthangate  suriye  at  sunset);  PvA  55  (id.)  216  (anatthan- 
gate  s.  before  sunset)  fig.  Sn  472  (atthagata).  475  (id.); 
1075  (=  niruddha  ucchinna  vinattha  anupadi-sesaya  nib- 
bana-dhatuya  nibbuta);  it  58;  Dhs  1038;  Vbh  195. 
-attbagatatta  (nt.  abstr.)  disappearance  SnA  409.  -attban- 
gama  (atthagama  passim)  aunihilatioo ,  disappearance; 
opposed  to  samudaya  (coming  into  existence)  and  syno- 
nymous wiih  nirodha  (destruction)  D  1.34,  37,  183;  S 
IV.327;  A  111.326;  Ps  11.4,  6,  39;  Pug  52;  Dhs  165, 
265,  501,  579;  Vbh  105.  -atthagamana  (nt.)  setting 
(of  the  sun)  J  1. 101  (suriyass'  atthagamana  at  sunset) 
DA  1.95  (=:  ogamana).  —  attba-glmin,  in  phrase  uday^ 
atthagSmin  leading  to  birth  and  death  (of  pan&a):  see 
udaya.  -attbai)  paleti  =  attbangacchati  (fig.)  Sn  1074 
(==  atthangameti  nirujjhati  Nd^  28).  —  Also  atthamita 
(pp.  of  i)  set  (of  the  sun)  in  phrase  anattharaite  suriye 
before  sunset  (with  anatthangamite  as  v.  1.  at  both  pass.) 
DhA  1.86;  111.127.  —  Cp.  also  abbhaltha. 

Attha^  pres.  2"d  pi.  of  atlhi  (q.  v.). 

Atthata  [pp.  of  attharati]  spread,  covered,  spread  over  with 
(— °)  Vin  1.265;  IV.287;  V.I 72  (also  °an);  A  ni.50; 
PvA  141. 

Atthatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  attha']  reason,  cause;  only  in  abl. 
atthatia  according  to  the  sense,  by  reason  of,  on  account 
of  PvA   189  (— "). 

Atthara  [fr.  attharati]  a  rug  (for  horses,  elephants  etc.)  D  1.7. 

Attharaka  [=  atthara]  a  covering  J  1.9;  DA  1.87.  —  f. 
°ika  a  layer  J  1.9;  v.280. 

Attharaka  (nt.)  [fr.  attharati]  a  covering,  carpet,  cover, 
rug  Vin  11.291;  A  11.56;  in.53;  Mhvs  3,  20;  15,  40; 
25,  102;  ThA  22. 

Attharati  [a  +  Stf]  'o  spread,  to  cover,  to  spread  out; 
stretch,  lay  out  Vin  1.254;  V.172;  J  1.199;  V.II3;  VI.428; 
Dh  1.272.  —  pp.  attbata  (q.v.).  —  Caus.  attbarapeti  to 
caused  to  be  spread  J  v.lio;  Mhvs  3,  20;  29,  7;  34,  69. 


Atthavant 


25 


Adasa 


Atthavant  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  anhavant]  full  of  benefit  S  1.30; 
Th   I,   740;  Miln   172. 

Atthara  [cp.  Sk.  astara,  fr.  attharati]  spreading  out  Vin  v. 172 
(see  kathina).  attbaraka  same  ibid.;  Vin  11.87  (covering). 

Atthl  [Sk.  asli,  ist  sg.  asmi;  Gr.  elfu'-is-Ti ,  l^t.  sum-est; 
Goth,  im-ist;  Ags.  eom-is  E.  am-is]  to  be,  to  exist.  — 
Pres.  Ind.  is>  sg.  asmi  Sn  1120,  1143;]  1.151;  m-SS, 
and  amhi  M  1.429;  Sn  694;  J  11.153;  Pv  i.iO'';  11. 8^.  — 
2nd  sg.  asi  Sn  420;  J  n.i6o  ("si);  111.278;  Vv  32*; 
PvA  4.  —  3"i  sg.  atthi  Sn  377,  672,  884;  J  1.278. 
Often  used  for  yd  pi.  (=  sanli),  e.g.  J  1.280;  11.2: 
111.55.  —  i^'  pi.  asma  [Sk.  smah]  Sn  594,  595 ;  asmase 
Sn  595,  and  amha  Sn  570;  J  11.128.  2nd  pi.  attba 
J  11.128;  PvA  39,  74  (agat'  attha  you  /laz't  come).  — 
yi  pi.  santi  Sn  1077;  Nd-  637  (==  saijvijjanti  atthi 
upalabbhanli);  J  11.353;  Pv.\  7,  22.  —  Imper.  atthu  Sn 
340;  J  1.59;  111.26.  —  Pot.  ist  sg.  siya  [Sk.  syam]  Pv 
11.88,  and  assarj  [Cond.  used  as  Pot.]  Sn  11 20;  Pv  1.12' 
(=  bhaveyyar)  PvA  64).  —  2nd  sg.  siya  [Sk.  syah]  Pv 
U.8'.  —  3fd  sg.  siya  [Sk.  syat]  D  n.154;  Sn  325,  1092; 
Nd'  105  (=janeyya,  nibbatteyya) ;  J  1.262;  PvA  13,  and 
assa  D  1.135,  196;  n.154;  A  v.194;  Sn  49,  143;  Dh 
124,  260;  Pv  11.3^^;  9-*.  —  1^'  pi.  assu  PvA  27.  — 
3rd  pi.  assu  [cp.  Sk.  syuh]  Sn  532;  Dh  74;  Pv  iv.i'6 
(^bhaveyyuq  PvA  231).  —  Aor.  is'  sg.  asii)  [Sk.  asai)] 
Sn  284;  Pv  1.2'  (^  ahosii)  PvA  10);  11.3'  (=  ahosiij 
PvA  83).  —  y^  sg.  asi  [Sk.  asit]  Sn  994.  —  3rd  asur) 
[cp.  Sk.  Perf.  asuh]  Pv  11.3^',  13'  (ti  pi  patho  for  su).  — 
Ppr.  'sat  only  in  loc.  sati  (as  loc.  abs.)  Dh  146;  J  1.150, 
263,  santa  Sn  105;  Nd^  635;  J  1.150  (loc.  evaq  same 
in  this  case);  111. 26,  and  samana  (q.  v.)  J  1.266;  iv.138. 
-bhava  state  of  being,  existence,  being  J  1.222,  290; 
11.415;  DhA  11.5;  IV.217  (atthibhava  vS  natthibhava  va 
whether  there  is  or  not). 

Atthika  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  arthika]  I.  (to  attha')  profitable, 
good,  proper.  In  this  meaning  the  MSS  show  a  variance 
of  spelling  either  atthika  or  atthika  or  atthita;  in  all 
cases  atthika  should  be  preferred  D  1.55  (°vada);  M  11.212 
(atthita);  A  111.219  sq.  (idaq  atlhikaij  this  is  suitable,  of 
good  avail;  T  atthitai),  vv.  11.  as  above);  Sn  1058  (atthita; 
Nd*  20  also  atthita,  which  at  this  pass,  shows  a  confusion 
between  attha  and  a-thita);  J  v.151  (in  def.  of  atthikatva 
q.  v.);  Pug  69,  70  (f  atthika,  atthita  SS;  expld-  by  Pug 
A  V.4  by  kalyanaya).  —  2.  (to  attha'  2)  desirous  of  ( — °), 
wanting,  seeking  for,  in  need  of  (c.  instr.)  A  11.199  (uday" 
desirous  of  increase);  Sn  333,  460,  487  (punn"),  987 
(dhan"  greedy  for  wealth);  J  1.263  ("■^jj"  coveting  a  king- 
dom); v.ig;  Pv  11.228  (bhojan"  in  need  of  food);  IV. l' 
(karan°),  l^'  (khidd°  for  play),  1"  (puiin°);  PvA  95 
(sasena  a.  wanting  a  rabbit),  120;  DA  1.70  (atthiks  those 
who  like  to),  -anattbika  one  who  does  not  care  for,  or 
is  not  satisfied  with  (c.  instr.)  J  v.460;  PvA  20;  of  no 
good  Th  1,  956  ("of  little  zeal"  Mrs.  Rh.  D.). 

-bhava   (a)   usefulness,   profitableness   Pug   A  v.4.   (b) 
state  of  need,  distress  PvA  120. 

Atthlkavant  (adj.)  [atthika  +  vant]  one  who  wants  some- 
thing, one  who  is  on  a  certain  errand  D  1.90  (atthikaq 
assa  atthi  ti  DA  1.255). 

Atthita  (f.)  [f.  abstr.  fr.  atthi  cp.  atthibhava]  state  of  being, 
existence,  being,  reality  M  1.486;  S  11. 1 7  (°aii  C  cva 
natthitaii  ca  to  be  and  not  to  be);  111.135;  J  v. no  (kas- 
saci  atthitai]  va  natthilar)  va  janahi  see  if  there  is  any- 
body or  not);  DhsA  394.  —  Often  in  abl.  atthitaya  by 
reason  of,  on  account  of,  this  being  so  DhA  111.344  (idam- 
atthitaya  under  this  condition)  PvA  94,  97,  143. 

Atthln  (adj.)  (— °)  [Vedic  arthin]  desirous,  wanting  anything ; 
see  mant°,  vad". 

Atthlya  (adj.)  (— °)  [=  atthika]  having  a  purpose  or  end 
S  m.189  (kim°  for  what  purpose?);  A  v.l  sq.  (id.),  311 


sq.;    Th   I,  1097  (att°  having  one's  purpose  in  oneself), 
1274;  Sn  354  (yad  atthiyaq  on  account  of  what). 

Atra  (adv.)  [Sk.  alra]  here;  atra  atra  here  &  there  J  1.414 
=  IV.5  (in  expln-  of  atriccha). 

Atraja  (adj.)  [Sk.  *atma-ja,  corrupted  form  for  attaja  (see 
atta)  through  analogy  with  Sk.  atra  "here".  This  form 
occurs  only  in  J  and  similar  sources,  i.  e.  popular  lore] 
born  from  oneself,  one's  own,  appl.  to  sons,  of  which 
there  are  4  kinds  enumd- ,  viz.  atraja  khettaja,  dinnaka, 
antevasika  p.  Nd'^  448.  —  J  1. 135;  ill. 103  =  Nd'  504; 
J   III.181;  V.465;  VI.20;  Mhvs  4,   12;   13,  4;  36,  57. 

Atriccha  (adj.)  [the  popular  etym.  suggested  at  JA  IV.4  is 
atra  alra  icchamana  desiring  here  &  there;  but  see  atriccha] 
very  covetous,  greedy,  wanting  too  much  J  1.414:=  IV.4; 
111.206. 

Atriccha  (f)  [Sk.  •atrptya,  a  -|-  trpt  +  ya,  influenced  by 
Desid.  titrpsati,  so  that  atriccha  phonetically  rather  cor- 
responds to  a  form  *a.-trpsya  (cch  ==  psy,  cp.  P.  chSta 
Sk.  psata).  For  the  simple  Sk.  trpti  see  tilti  (from  tap- 
patl').  According  to  Kern,  but  phonetically  hardly  justifi- 
able it  is  Sk.  aticcha  ==  ati  -f-  iccha  "too  much  desire", 
with  r  in  dissolution  of  geminated  tt,  like  atraja  for  attaja. 
See  also  atriccha  adj.  and  cp.  y  F  T S.  1884,  69]  great 
desire,   greed,  excessive  longing,  insatiability  J  IV.5,  327. 

AtriCChata  (f.)  [see  atriccha]  excessive  lust  J.  111.222. 

Atha  (indecl.)  [Sk.  atha,  cp.  atho]  copulative  &  adversative 
part.  1.  after  positive  clauses,  in  enumerations,  in  the 
beginning  &  continuation  of  a  story:  and,  and  also,  or; 
and  then,  now  D  11.2;  111.152,  199  (athaparar]  etad 
avoca);  M  1.435;  Sn  1006,  1007,  1017;  Sn  p.  126  (athS- 
parai]  etad  avoca:  and  further,  something  else);  Dh  69, 
i'9i  377;  J  "'5^;  P^  11.6*;  Pv.\  3,  8  (atha  na  and  not), 
70.  —  2.  after  negative  clauses:  but  M  1.430;  Sn  990, 
1047;  Dh  85,  136,  387;  PvA  68.  Often  combd.  with 
other  part.,  e.g.  atba  kbo  (pos.  &  neg.)  now,  and  then; 
but,  rather,  moreover  Vin  i.i  ;  D  1. 141,  167,  174;  A 
v.195;  I'^A  79,  221,  251.  na-atha  kho  na  neither-nor 
PvA  28.  atha  kho  pana  and  yet  D  1.139.  atha  ca  pana 
on  the  other  hand  J  1.279.  atba  va  or  (after  prec.  ca), 
nor  (after  prec.  na)  Sn  134;  Dh  140,  271;  Pv  1.4';  ll.i*. 
atha  va  pi  Sn  917,  921. 

Athabbaoa  [Vedic  atharvan ;  as  regards  etym.  see  Walde, 
Lat.  Wtb.  under  ater]  (1)  the  Atharva  Veda  DA  1.247 
^  Sn.\  447  (°veda).  —  (2)  one  who  is  familiar  with 
the  (magic  formulas  of  the)  Atharvaveda  J  vi.490  (sSt- 
habbana  =  sahatthivejja,with  the  elephant-healer  or  doctor). 
See  also  Sthabbana. 

Atho  (indecl.)  [Sk.  atho,  atha  +  u]  copulative  and  adver- 
sative part.:  and,  also,  and  further,  likewise,  nay  S  1.106; 

Sn  43,  155,  647;  Dh  151,  234,  423;  J  1-83;  "■«85; 
IV.495;  It  106;  Kh  VIII.7;  Pv  1V.3'»;  PvA  251  (atho  ti 
nipatamatlaq  avadharan-atthe  va).  Also  combd  with  other 
part.,  like  atho  pi  Sn  222,  537,  985;  Pvii.3";  KhA  166. 

Ada  (adj.)  (— °)  [to  ad,  see  adeti,  cp.  °ga,  "tha,  °da  etc.] 
eating  S  iv.195  (kitthida  eating  corn);  J  11.439  (vantada 
=  vantakhadaka  C). 

Adaka  (adj.)  =  ada  J  V.91  (puris&daka  man-eater). 

Adana  (nt.)  [from  adeti]  eating,  food  J  v.374  (v.l.  modana). 

Adasaka  (adj.)  see  dasa. 

Adasa  [prob.  =  adaqsa,  from  dasati  to  bite,  cp.  dathS 
tooth;  lit  meaning  "toothless"  or  "not  biting"]  a  kind 
of  bird  J  IV.466. 


Adittha 


26 


Addhana 


Adittha  [a  +  dittha,  ger.  of  *dassati]  not  seeing,  without 
seeing  J  IV.192  (T.  adattha,  v.  1.  BB  na  dittha,  C.  adisva); 
V.219. 

Adinna  (pp-)  [a  +  dinna]  that  which  is  not  given,  freq. 
in  phrase  adinn'  adana  (BSk.  adaltadana  Divy  302) 
seizing  or  grasping  that  whieh  is  not  given  to  one, 
i.  e.  stealing,  is  the  2nd  of  the  ten  qualifications  of  bad 
character  or  sila  (dasasila  see  sila  11.).  Vin  1.83  ^a 
veramanl);  D  1.4  (=  parassa  haranaq  theyyai)  corika  ti 
vuttaq  hoti  DA  1.71);  111.68  sq.,  82,  92,  181  _sq.;  M 
1.361;  It  63;  Kh  II.,  cp.  KhA  26.  —  adinnadayin  he 
who  takes  what  is  not  given,  a  thief;  stealing,  thieving 
(cp.  BSk.  adattadayika  Divy  301,  418)  Vin  1.85;  D  1.138; 
Sdhp   78. 

AdU  (or  adu)  (indecl.)  [perhaps  identical  with  adur),  nt. 
of  pron.  asu]  part,  of  affirmation:  even,  yea,  nay;  always 
in  emphatic  exclamations  Vv  62'^  (=  udahu  VvA  258; 
v.l.  SS.  adu)  —  Pv  IV.3I'  (adu)  =  DhA  1.3 1  (T.  adu, 
V.  1.  adu);  Vv  63'  (v.l.  adu);  J  v.330  (T.  adu,  C.  adu; 
expld.  on  p.  331  fantastically  as  adun  ca  adun  ca  kam- 
mat)  karohl  ti).  See  also  adu. 

AdUl)  nt.  of  pron.  asu. 

Adusaka  (adj.)  [a  +  dusaka]  innocent  J  V.143  (=  nirapa- 
radha  C);  vi.84,  552.  f.  adusika  Sn  312. 

AdUSiya  ^  adusaka  J  V.220  (=  anaparadha  C). 

Adeti  [Sk.  adayati,  Caus.  of  atti,  ad  to  eat,  l^t  sg.  admi  = 
Gr.  eSai,  Lat.  edo;  Goth,  ilan  =  Ohg.  ezzan  ;=  E.  eat]  to 
eat.  Pres.  ind.  ademi  etc.  J  v. 31,  92,  197,  496;  vi.106. 
pot.  adeyya  J  v.  107,  392,  493. 

Adda'  [cp.  Sk.  ardraka]  ginger  J  1.244  (°singivera). 

Adda^  &  Adda  y^  sg.  aor.  of  *dassati;  see  ®dassati  2.  a. 

Adda'  (adj.)  [Sk.  ardra,  from  rdali  or  ardati  to  mell,  cp. 
Gr.  'xfSu  to  moisten,  eipSsc  dirt;  see  also  alia]  wet,  moist, 
slippery  J  IV.353;  VI.309;  Miln  346. 

-^valepana  "smeared  with  moisture",  i.  e.  shiny,  glit- 
tering S  IV. 1 87  (kutagSra);  M  1.86  =  Nd^  99''  (upakariyo). 
See  also  addha^. 

Addakkhl  3"^  sg.  aor.  of  *dassati ;  see  *dassati  I  b. 

Addasa  3"*  sg.  aor.  of  'dassati;  see  *dassati  2  a. 

Adda  &  Addayana  at  Vbh  371  in  def.  of.anadariya  is 
either  faulty  writing,  or  dial,  form  or  pop.  etym.  for  ada 
and  adayana ;  see  adariya. 

Addayate  [v.  denom.  fr.  adda]  to  be  or  get  wet,  fig.  to 
Ije  attached  to  j   iv.351.  See  also  alllyati. 

Addi  [Sk.  ardri]  a  mountain  Davs  11.13. 

Addita  (pp.)  [see  attita  which  is  the  more  correct  spelling] 
afflicted,  smarted,  oppressed]  1. 21  ;  11.407;  m.261  ;  iv.295  ; 
V.53,  268;  Th  I,  406;  Mhvs  1,  25;  PvA  260;  Sdhp 
37,  281- 

Addha<  (num.)  [—  addha,  q.  v.]  one  half,  half  (°— )  D 
1. 166  (°masika);  A  11.160  (°masa);  J  1.59  (,°yojana);  ill. 
189  (°masa). 

Addha'^  (adj.)  [=adda-'',  Sk.  ardra]  soiled,  wet;  fig.  attached 
to,  intoxicated  with  (cp.  sineha)  M  11.223  (°a  anaddha- 
bhutai)  attanaq  dukkhena  addhabhaveti  he  dirties  the  im- 
pure self  with  ill);  S  iii.i  (addhabhuto  kayo  impure  body); 
J  VI. 548  (°nakha  with  dirty  nails,  C.  pntinakha). 

Addhan  (in  cpds.  addha°)  [Vedic  adhvan,  orig.  meaning 
"stretch,  length",  both  of  space  &  time.  —  Cases:  noiii. 
addha,  gtn.  diit.  addhuno,  instr.  addhuna,  ace.  addhanaq, 
loc.  addhani;  //.  addha.  See  also  addhana]   i.  (of  space) 


a  path,  road,  also  journey  (see  cpds.  &  derivations);  only 
in  out  sler.  phrase  J  iv.384^v.  137  (pathaddbuno  pan- 
narase  va  cando,  gen.  for  loc.  "addhani,  on  his  course, 
in  his  orbit;  explJ-  at  iv.384  by  akasa-patha-sankhatassa 
adtlhnno  majjhe  Ihito  and  at  v. 137  by  pathaddhagato 
addha-pathe  gaganamajjhe  thito);  Pv  ill.  3'  (pathaddhani 
pannarase  va  cando ;  loc.  same  meaning  as  prec,  expld-  at 
PvA  1 88  by  attano  pathabhute  addhani  gaganatala-magge). 
This  phrase  (pathaddhan)  however  is  expl^by  Kern  (Toev. 
s.  v.  pathaddu)  as  "gone  half-way",  i.  e.  on  fuU-moon-day. 
He  rejects  the  expl".  of  C.  —  2.  (of  time)  a  stretch  of 
time,  an  interval  of  lime,  a  period,  also  a  lifetime  (see 
cpds.);  only  in  huo  standard  applications  viz.  (a)  as  mode 
of  time  (past,  present  &  future)  in  tayo  addha  three 
divisions  of  time  (alita,  anagata,  paccuppanna)  D  111.216; 
I'  53i  7°-  (l")  '°  phrase  dighat)  addhanai]  (ace.)  a  very 
long  time  A  11. i,  10  (dlghar)  addhanar)  saijsarai));  Sn  740 
(dighai)  addhana  saijsara);  Dh  207  (dighoq  addhana  socati); 
J  ■•'37-  fisu-  dighassa  addhuno  PvA  148  (gatatta  because 
a  long  time  has  elapsed),  instr.  dighena  addhuna  S  1.78; 
A  II.118;   PvA  28. 

-ayu  duration  of  life  A  11.66  (dighaq  °i)  a  long  life- 
time, -gata  one  who  has  gone  the  road  or  traversed  the 
space  or  span  of  life,  an  old  man  [cp.  BSk.  adhvagata 
M  Vastu  11.150],  always  combd.  with  vayo  anuppatto, 
sometimes  in  ster.  formula  with  jinna  &  maballaka  Vin 
Il.i88;  D  1.48  (cp.  DA  1.143);  M  1.82;  Sn  pp.  50,  92; 
PvA  149.  -gu  [Vedic  adhvaga]  a  wayfarer,  traveller, 
journeyman  Th  255  =  8  1.212  (but  the  latter  has  panthagu, 
v.l.  addhagu);  J  11195  (*'•'■  patthagu  =  panthagu);  Dh  302. 

Addha  (adv.)  [Vedic  addha,  cp.  Av.  azda  certainly]  part, 
of  affirmation  and  emphasis:  certainly,  for  sure,  really, 
truly  D  1. 143;  J  l.ig  (a.  ahaij  Buddho  bhavissarai)  66 
(a.  tvar)  Buddho  bhavissasi),  203,  279:  111.340;  v. 307, 
410  (C.  expln-  differs)  Sn  47,  1057;  Nd^  30  =  Ps  II. 21 
(ekaqsa-vacanaq  nissaqsaya-vacanaq  etc.)  addha  hi  J  IV. 
399;  Pv  1V.I52. 

Addhaneyya  (adj.)  =.  adhaniya  2,  lasting  J   v.507  (an"). 

Addhaniya  (adj.)  [fr.  addhan]  I.  belonging  to  the  road' 
fit  for  travelling  (of  the  travelling  season)  Th  I,  529.  — 
2.  belonging  to  a  (long)  time,  lasting  a  long  geriod, 
lasting,  enduring  D  ill. 211;  J  1393  (an°)  VI. 71.  See  also 
addhaneyya. 

Addhariya  [Vedic  adhvaryu  fr.  adhvara  sacrifice]  a  sacri- 
ficing priest.  N.  of  a  class  of  Brahmins  D  1.237  (brahmana). 

Addhana  (nt.)  [orig.  the  ace.  of  addhan,  taken  as  nt. 
from  phrase  dfghai)  addhanaij.  It  occurs  only  in  ace.  which 
may  always  be  taken  as  ace.  of  addhan ;  thus  the  as- 
sumption of  a  special  form  addhana  would  be  superfluous, 
were  it  not  for  later  forms  like  addhane  (loc.)  Miln  126; 
PvA  75  V.I.  BB,  and  for  cpds.]  same  meaning  as  addhan, 
but  as  simplex  only  used  with  reference  to  time  (i.  e.  a 
long  time,  cp.  Vv.\  117  addhanaq  =  cirai)).  Usually  in 
phrase  atltar)  (anagataij  etc.)  addhanai]  in  the  past  (future 
etc.),  e.g.  D  1.200;  S  1.140:  A  v. 32;  Miln  126  (anaga- 
tamaddhane  for  °ar|);  Pv.\  75  (v.l.  addhane).  dlghag 
addhanai]  Pv  i.io^.  Also  in  phrase  addhanai]  apadeti 
to  make  out  the  length  of  time  or  period,  i.  e.  to  live 
out  one's  lifetime  S  iv.iio;  J  11.293  (=  jivitaddhanai) 
apadi  ayur)   vindi  C  ). 

•daratba  exhaustion  from  travelling  DA  1.287.  -magga 
a  (proper)  road  for  journeying,  a  long  road  between 
two  towns,  high  road  D  l.l,  73,  79;  M  1.276  (kanlar°); 
DA  1.35  (interpreted  as  "addhayojanaq  gacchissami  ti 
bhunjitabban  ti  adi  vacanato  addha-yojanam  pi  addhana 
maggo  hoti",  thus  taken  to  addha  "half",  from  counting 
by  A  miles);  VvA  40,  292.  Cp.  also  antaramagga.  -pa- 
rissama  "fatigue  of  the  road",  i.  e.  fatigue  from  travelling 
VvA  305.  -vemattata  difference  of  time  or  period  Miln 
285  (-)-  ayuvemattata). 


Addhika 


27 


Adhikara 


Addhika  [fr-  addhan]  a  wanderer,  wayfarer,  traveller  DA 
1.298  (:=  patliavin),  270;  PvA  78,  127  ("jana  people 
travelling).  Often  combd-  with  kapana  beggar,  tramp,  as 
kapaiiaddhika  (pi.)  tramps  and  travellers  (in  which  con- 
nection also  as  °iddhika,  q.  v.),  e.g.  J  1.6  (v.  1.  ""iddhika 
262  ;  DhA  11.26. 

Addhita  at  Pv  11.6-  is  to  be  corrected  to  at^ita  (sic  v.  1.  BB). 

Addhln  (adj.)  ( — "^)  [fr.  addhan]  belonging  to  the  road  or 
travelling,  one  who  is  on  the  road,  a  traveller,  in  gataddhin 
one  who  has  performed  his  journey  (=  addhagata)  Dh  90. 

Addhuva  see  dhuva. 

Adrubhaka  see  dubbha. 

Advejjhata  see  dvejjhata. 

Adha°  in  cpds.  like  adhagga  see  under  adho. 

Adhanuna  see  dhamma. 

Adhama  (adj.)  [Vedic  adhama  =  Lat.  infimus,  supcrl.  of 
adho,  q.  v.]  the  lowest  (lit.  &  fig),  the  vilest,  worst  Sn 
12  (naradhama),  135  (vasaladhama) ;  Dh  78  (purisa°); 
J  HI.151  (miga");  v,394  (uttamddhama),  437  (id.),  397; 
Sdhp  387. 

Adhara  (adj.)  [Vedic  adbara,  compar.  of  adho]  the  lower 
J  111.26  (adharottha  the  1.  lip). 

Adhl  [Vedic  adhi;  base  of  demonstr.  pron.  a° -f- suffix-dhi, 
corresponding  in  form  to  Gr.  'h-ia  "on  this"  =  here,  cp. 
Bii  where,  in  meaning  equal  to  adv.  of  direction  Gr.  Se 
(toward)  ^  Ohg.  zuo,  E.  to]. 

A.  Prep,  and  pref.  of  direction  &  place:  (a)  as  direction 
denoting  a  movement  towards  a  definite  end  or  goal  = 
up  to,  over,  toward,  to,  on  (see  C  I  a).  —  (b)  as  place 
where  (prep.  c.  loc.  or  abs.)  =r  on  top  of  above,  over, 
in;  in  addition  to.  Often  simply  deictic  "here"  (e.g.) 
ajjhatta  =  adhi  -|-  atman  "this  self  here"  (see  C  i  b). 

B.  adhi  is  freq.  as  modification  pref.,  i.  e.  in  loose 
compn-  with  n.  or  v.  and  as  first  part  of  a  double  prefix- 
cpd.,  like  ajjha°  (adhi  -)-  a),  adhippa°  (adhi  +  pra),  but 
never  occurs  as  a  fixed  base,  i.  e.  as  2"d  part  of  a  pref.- 
cpd.,  like  a  in  pacca^  (prati  +  S),  parya°  (pari  -j-  a)  or 
ava  in  paryava'^  (pari  +  ava)  or  ud  in  abhyud"  (abhi  -(- 
ud),  samud"  (sam  -|-  ud).  As  such  (i.  e.  modification)  it 
is  usually  intensifying,  meaning  "over  above,  in  addition, 
quite,  par  excellence,  super"-(adhideva  a  super-god,  cp. 
ati-deva),  but  very  often  has  lost  this  power  &  become 
meaningless  (like  E.  up  in  "shut  up,  fill  up,  join  up  etc  ), 
esp.  in  double  pref.-cpds.  (ajjhavasati  "to  dwell  here-in" 
=  avasati  "to  dwell  in,  to  inhabit")  (see  C  2).  —  In 
the  explns  of  P.  Commentators  adhi  is  often  (sometimes 
far-fetchedly)  interpreted  by  abhibhii  "overpowering"  see 
e.g.  C.  on  adhitthati  &  adhitthila;  and  by  virtue  of  this 
intens.  meaning  we  find  a  close  relationship  between  the 
prefixes  ati,  adhi  and  abhi,  all  interchanging  dialectically 
so  that  P.  adhi  often  represents  Sk.  ati  or  abhi;  thus 
adhi  >  ali  in  adhikusala,  ''kodhila,  "jeguccha,  °brahma; 
adhi  >  abhi  in  adhippatthita,  "pateti,  °ppaya,  °ppeta, 
"badheti,  ^bhu,  °vaha.  Cp.  also  ati  IV. 

C.  The  main  applications  of  adhi  are  the  foil.:  \.priviary 
meaning  (in  verbs  &  verb  derivations):  either  direction 
in  which  or  place  where,  depending  on  the  meaning  of 
the  verb  determinate,  either  lit.  or  fig.  —  (a)  where  to: 
adhiyita  (adhi  -j-  fta)  "gone  on  to  or  into"  :=  studied; 
ajjhesita  (adtti -|- esita)  "wished  for";  °kata  "put  to"  i.e. 
commissioned;  °kara  commission;  "gacchali  "to  go  on  to 
&  reach  it"  =  obtain ;  °gania  attainment ;  "ganhati  to 
overtake  =  surpass,  °peta  (adhi  -j-  pra  -|-  ita)  "gone  in 
to"  =  meant,  understood  ;  °paya  sense  meaning,  intention  ; 
°bhasati  to  speak  to  :=  address;  °mutta  intent  upon; 
"vacana  "saying  in  addition"  =  attribute,  metaphor,  cp. 
Fr.   sur-nom;    "vasana   assent,   °vaseti    to   dwell   in,  give 


in  =  consent.  —  (b)  where:  "litlhati  ("tthati)  to  stand 
by  =:  look  after,  perform;  ^tthana  place  where;  ''vasati 
to  inhabit;  °sayana  "lying  in",  inhabiting.  —  2.  secondary 
meaning  (as  emphatic  modification):  (a)  with  nouns  or 
adjectives:  adhi-jcguccha  very  detestable;  "matta  "in  an 
extreme  measure",  °pa  supreme  lord;  "pacca  lordship; 
"paiina  higher,  additional  wisdom;  "vara  the  very  best; 
"sila  thorough  character  or  morality.  —  (b)  with  verbs 
(in  double  pref.-cpds.);  adhi  +  ava :  ajjhogaheti  plunge 
into;  ajjhothapeti  to  bring  down  to  (its  destination); 
°otthata  covered  completely;  "oharati  to  swallow  right 
down,  adhi  -)-  a:  ajjhappatta  having  reached  (the  end); 
ajjhapilita  quite  overwhelmed;  ''avuttha  inhabited;  "aruhati 
grown  up  over;  °asaya  desire,  wish  (cp.  Ger.  n.  Anliegen 
&  V.  daranliegen).  adhi  -|-  upa :  ajjhupagacchati  to  reach, 
obtain;  "upeti  to  receive;  °upekkhati  "to  look  all  along 
over"  =:  to  superintend  adhi  -}-  pra :  adhippattheti  to 
long  for,  to  desire. 

Note.  The  contracted  (assimilation-)form  of  adhi  before 
vowels  is  ajjh-  (q.  v.). 

Adhlka  (adj.)  [fr.  adhi;  cp.  Sk.  adhika]  exceeding,  extra- 
ordinary, superior,  Pug  35;  VvA  80  (=  anadhivara,  vi- 
sittha);  DA  1.141,  222;  Dpvs  v.32  (an°);  DhA  111.238; 
KhA  193  (:=r  anuttara);  .Sdhp  337,  447.  —  compar. 
adhikatara  DhA  11. 7;  m.176;  nt.  °r)  as  adv.  extra- 
ordinarily PvA  86  (=  adhimatlaij).  In  comb"-  with  num- 
erals adhika  has  the  meaning  of  "in  addition,  with  an 
additional,  plus"  (cp.  adi  -|-  adika,  with  which  itis  evidently 
confounded,  adhika  being  constructed  in  the  same  way  as 
adika,  i.  e.  preceding  the  noun-determination),  e.  g.  catu- 
nahutidhikani  dve  yojana-sahassani  2000  +  94  (^=  294000) 
J  1.25  ;  sattamasadhikani  sattavassani  7  years  and  7  months 
J  V.319;  panriasadhikani  panca  vassa-satani  500 -(-  50  (=: 
550)  PvA   152.  See  also  f adhika. 

Adhlkata  (adj.)  [adhi  +  kata;  cp.  Sk.  adhikrta]  l.  com- 
missioned with,  an  overseer,  Pv  I!. 9"  (dane  adhikata  = 
thapita  PvA  124).  —  2.  caused  by  Miln  67  (kamma"). — 
3.  affected  by  something,  i.  e.  confused,  puzzled,  in  doubt 
Miln  144  (+  vimatijata). 

Adhikarana  (nt.)  [adhi  -f-  karana]  I.  attendance,  super- 
vision, management  of  affairs,  administration  PvA  209.  — 
2.  relation,  reference,  reason,  cause,  consequence  D  11.59 
( — ":  in  consequence  of);  S  11.41 ;  v.19.  Esp.  ace.  "r)  as 
adv.  ( — °)  in  consequence  of,  for  the  sake  of,  because  of, 
from  M  1.410  (riipadhikaranar)) ;  S  iv.339  (raga°);  Miln 
281  (mudda°  for  the  sake  of  the  royal  seal,  orig.  in 
attendance  on  the  r.  s.).  Kimadhikaranaq  why,  on  account 
of  what  J  IV.4  (r=  kii]karanai])  yatvadhikaranai]  (yat  + 
adhi")  by  reason  of  what,  since,  because  (used  as  conj.) 
D  1.70=  A  1.113^  It. 16  =  D  III. 225.  —  3.  case,  question, 
cause,  subject  of  discussion,  dispute.  There  are  4  sorts  of 
a.  enumJ-  at  var.  passages,  viz.  vivada"  anuvada"  apatta" 
kicca"  "questions  of  dispute,  of  censure,  of  misconduct, 
of  duties"  Vin  11.88;  111.164;  iv.126,  238;  M  11.247.  — 
Often  ref. :  Vin  11.74;  S  iv.63  =  v.346  (dhamma°  a 
question  of  the  Dh.);  A  1.53  (case),  79;  11.239  (vupasanta); 
V.71,  72;  Pug  20,  55;  DhA  iv.2  (°ssa  uppamassa  vupa- 
sama),  adhikaranaq  karoti  to  raise  a  dispute  M  1.122  °i) 
vupasameti  to  settle  a  question  or  difficulty  Vin  11.261. 
-karaka  one  who  causes  dispute  discussions  or  dissent 
Vin  1V.230  (f.  "ika);  A  III. 252.  -samatha  the  settlings  of 
questions  that  have  arisen.  There  are  seven  rules  for  settling 
cases  enum<'-  at  D  in.254;  M  11.247;  A  1.99;  iv.144. 

Adhikarai^lka  [fr-  adhikarana]  one  who  has  to  do  with 
che  settling  of  disputes  or  questions,  a  judge  A  v.164, 167. 

Adhlkarani  (f.)  [to  adhikarana  I,  orig.  meaning  "serving, 
that  which  serves,  i.  e.  instrument"]  a  smith's  anvil  J 
111.285;   Davs  in. 16  sq. ;  DhsA  263. 

Adhikara  [cp.  Sk.  adhikara]  attendance,  service,  adminis- 
tration,   supervision,  management,  help  Vin  1.55;  J  156; 


Adhikara 


28 


AdhipanfSa 


VI.251;    Miln    60,    115,    165;    PvA    124   (dana";   cp.   Pv 
11.9-');  DhA  11.41. 

Adhikarika  (adj.)  ( — °)  [to  adhikara]  serving  as,  referring 
to  Vin  ni.274  (Bdhgh). 

Adhikuttana  (f.)  [adhi  +  kottana  or  kottana]  an  executi- 
oner's block  Th  2,  58;  cp.  ThA  65  (v.  1.  kuddana,  should 
prob.   be  read  kottana);  ThA  287. 

AdhJkUSala  (adj.)  [adhi  -)-  kusala]  in  °a  dhamma  "items 
of  higher  righteousness"  D  in. 145. 

Adhikodhlta  (adj.)  [adhi  +  kodhita]  very  angry  J  v.117. 

AdhigaCChati  [adhi  4-  gacchati]  to  get  to,  to  come  into 
possession  of,  to  acquire,  attain,  find;  fig.  to  understand 
D  1.229  (vives.iij)  M  1. 140  (anvesar)  n'  adhigacchanti  do 
not  find);  S  1.22  (Nibb.inar/);  11.27S  (id.);  A  1. 162  (id.); 
Dh  187,  365;  It  82  (santiq);  Th  2,  51;  Pug  30,  31; 
Pv  1.7*  (nibbutii)  =  labhati  PvA  37);  iii.7'0  (amataij 
padaq).  opt.  adhigaccheyya  D  1.224  (kusalaq  dhammai]); 
M  1. 114  (madhu-pindikaij);  Dh  61  and  adhigacche  Dh 
368.  ger.  °gantva  D  1.224;  J  i-45  (anisaqse) ;  and  "gamma 
Pv  hi"  (==  vinditva  patilabhitva  PvA  60).  grd.  °gan- 
tabba  It  104  (nibbana).  cond.  '^gacchissar)  Sn  446.  i^t 
aor.  3  sg.  ajjhaga  Sn  225  (=  vindi  patilabhi  Kh.\  180); 
Dh  154;  Vv  32';  3  pi.  ajjhagu  J  1.256  (vyasanaq)  & 
ajjhagamur)  S  1.12.  2>"1  aor.  3  sg.  adhigacchi  Nd'  457.  — 
pp.  adhigata  (q.  v.). 

Adhiganhati    [adhi  +  ganhati]   to  surpass,  excel  S  I.87  = 
DA    1.32;    D    III. 146;    S    IV.275;    A    IH.33;    It    19.  Ger. 
adhigayha   Pv    ii.g"^  =  Dh.\    in. 219   (v.  1.    BB  at  both 
pass,  atikkamma) ;  &  adhiggahetva  It  20.  —   pp.  adhig-  ■ 
gahita  (q.  v.). 

Adhigata  [pp.  of  adhigacchati]  got  into  possession  of,  con- 
quered, attained,  found  J   1.374;   VvA   135. 

Adhigatavant  (adj.-n  )  [fr.  adhigata]  one  who  has  found 
or  obtained  VvA  296  (Nibbanaq). 

Adhigama  [fr.  adhigacchati]  attainment,  acquisition ;  also 
fig.  knowledge,  information,  study  (the  latter  mainly  in 
Miln)  D  III. 255;  S  II. 139;  A  11.148;  iv.22,  332;  v.ig4; 
J  1.406;  Nett  91;  Miln  133,  215,  358,  362,  388;  PvA  207. 

Adhigameti  [adhi  -j-  gameti,  Caus.  of  gacchati]  to  make 
obtain,  to   procure  PvA   30. 

Adhiggahlta  [pp.  of  adhiganhati]  excelled,  surpassed;  over- 
powered, taken  by  (instr.),  possessed  J  111.427  (=  anug- 
gahita  C);  v. 102;  vi.525  =  574;  It  103;  Miln  188, 
189;  Sdhp  98. 

Adhicinna  only  at  S  II1.I2,  where  v.  1.  is  avicinna,  which 
is  to  be  preferred.  See  vicinna. 

Adhicitta  (nt.)  [adhi  -f-  citta]  "higher  thought",  meditation, 
contemplation,  usually  in  comb"-  with  adhisila  and  ad- 
bipanna  Vin  170;  D  111. 219;  M  1.451;  A  1.254,  256; 
N'd'  39  =  Nd2  689  ("sikkhs);  Dh  185  (=  attha-samapatti- 
sankhata  adhika-citta  DhA  111.238). 

AdhicetO  (adj.)  [adhi  -f  ceto]  lofty-minded,  entranced  Th  I, 
68  =  Ud  43  =  Vin  iv.54  =  DhA  111.384. 

AdhiCCa'  [ger.  of  adhi  -J-  eti,  see  adhiyati]  learning,  studying, 
learning  by  heart  J  III. 218,  327  1=  iv.301;  IV.1S4  (vede 
^  adhiyitva  C),  477  (sajjhayitva  C);  V1.213;   Miln  164. 

AdhJCCa'2  ("— )  [Sk.  »adhrtya,  a  -f  «dhicca,  ger.  of  dhf, 
cp.  dhara,  dharana  3,  dhareti  4]  unsupported,  uncaused, 
fortuitous,  without  cause  or  reason;  in  foil,  phrases: 
"apattika  quilly  without  intention  M  1.443;  "uppatti 
spontaneous  origin  DhsA  238 ;  "laddba  obtained  without 
being  asked  for,  unexpectedly  Vv  84*^  ^=  J  v. 171  = 
VI  315    (expl'l    at  J   V.171   by  ahetuna,  at  VI.316  by  aka- 


ranena)  "^samuppanna  arisen  without  a  cause,  spontaneous, 
unconditioned  D  1.28  =  Ud  69;  D  111.33,  138;  S  11.223 
(sukhadukkhai));  A  m.440  (id.);  Ps  1.155;  DA  1.118 
(=:  akarana"). 

AdhicCa'  (adj.)  [=  adhicca  2  in  adj.  function,  influenced 
by,  homonym  abhabba]  without  a  cause  (for  assumption), 
unreasonable,  unlikely  S  v. 457. 

AdhijegUCCha  (nt.)  [adhi  -|-  jeguccha]  intense  scrupulous 
regard  (for  others)  D  1.174,   176- 

Adhitthaka    (adj.)  (— °)  [fr.  adhitthati]  bent  on,  given  to, 

addicted  to  J   v.427  (sura°). 

Adhltthati  (adhitthahati)  [Sk.  adhitisthati,  adhi  +  stha] 
I.  to  stand  on  J  111.278  (ger.  °aya);  DhA  IV.183  (ger. 
°hitva);  fig.  to  insist  on  Th  I,  1 131  (aor.  "ahi).  —  2. 
to  concentrate  or  fix  one's  attention  on  (c.  ace),  to 
direct  one's  thoughts  to,  to  make  up  one's  mind,  to  wish 
Vin  I. II 5  (inf.  °thatur]),  297  (id.),  125  (grd.  °thatabba) 
J  1.80  (aor.  °ahi);  111.278;  iv.i34  (v.  1.  ali°  C.  expls- 
abhibhavitva  titlhati);  DhA  1.34;  IV.201  (ger.  °hitvS); 
PvA  23  (aor.  ''thasi)  171  (id.),  75  (ger.  "hitva).  On  ad- 
hittheyya  see  Cftf.  209,  n.  2;  219,  n.  I.  —  3.  to  under- 
take, practice,  perform,  look  after,  to  celebrate  S  11.17; 
A  1.1 1 5  sq. ;  J  1.50;  PvA  209  (ger.  °thaya).  —  pp.  ad- 
hitthita  (q.  v.). 

Adhitthana  (nt.)  [fr.  adhi -(- stha]  l.  decision,  resolution, 
self  determination,  will  (cp.  on  this  meaning  C/ni.  62) 
D  111.229  (where  4  are  enum^-,  viu.  paiina",  sacca"  caga° 
upasama°);  J  1.23;  V.174;  Ps  1.108;  11.171  sq.,  207; 
DhsA  166  (cp.  V/is.  its/.  44).  —  2.  mentioned  in  bad 
sense  with  abhinivesa  and  anusaya,  obstinacy,  prejudice 
and  bias  M  1.136;  111.31,  240;  S  11.17;  m.io,  135, 
194.  —  As  adj.  ( — °)  applying  oneself  to,  bent  on  A 
111.363.  —  3.  looking  after,  management,  direction,  power 
Miln  309  ^devanaI));  Pv.\  141  (so  read  for  adhitatthana). 
[aditthana  as  PvA  89,  used  as  explanatory  for  avasa, 
should  perhaps  be  read  adhitthana  in  the  sense  of  fixed, 
permanent,  abode], 

Adhitthayaka  (adj.)  ( — °)  superintending,  watching,  looking 
after,  in  kamma^  Mhvs  5,  175;  30,  98;  kammanta° 
DhA  1.393. 

Adhit^hita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  adhitthSti]  I.  standing  on  (c.  loc), 
esp.  with  the  idea  of  standing  above,  towering  over  Vv 
63-"'  (hemaraihe  a.  =^  sakalaij  th.anari  abhibhavitva  thila 
VvA  269).  —  (a)  looked  after,  managed,  undertaken, 
governed  Vin  1.57;  S  v. 278  (sv'adhitthita);  PvA  141 
(kammanta).  —  (b)  undertaking,  bent  on  (c.  ace.)  Sn  820 
(ekacariyar)). 

Adhideva  [adhi  -|-  deva]  a  superior  or  supreme  god,  above 
the  gods  M  11.132;  A  iv.304;  Sn  1148;  Nd^  307'',  422  a. 
Cp.  atideva. 

Adhipa  [Sk.  adhipa,  abbrev.  of  adhipati]  ruler,  lord,  master 
J  11.369;  111.324;  V.393;  Pv  ii.8«  (jan°  king);  Davs  111.52; 
VvA  314. 

Adhlpaka  (adj.)  (— ")  [fr.  prec]  mastering,  ruling  or 
governed,  influenced  by  (cp.  adhipati)  A  1.150  (alta° 
loka"  dhamma"). 

Adhipajjati  [adhi  -|-  pajjati]  to  come  to,  reach,  attain  A 
IV. 96  (anatthaij);  pp.  adbipanna. 

Adhipanna  (f)  [adhi  -(-  paiiua]  higher  wisdom  or  know- 
ledge, insight  (cp.  jhana  &  pafina);  usually  in  comb"' 
with  adhicitta  &  adhisila  Vin  I.70;  D  1.174;  IH-219 
("sikkha);  A  1240;  11.92  sq.,  239;  111.106  sq.,  327; 
IV.360;  Nd'  39  (id.);  Ps  1.20,  25  sq.,  45  sq.,  169;  II.II, 
244;  Pug  61. 


Adhipatati 


29 


Adhimutti 


Adhipatati  [adhi  +  P^'ati]  to  fly  past,  vanish  J  iv.iil(=: 
aliviya  patati  sighai)  aiikkamati  C).  —  Caus.  adhipateti 
(q.  V.)  in  dilT.  meaning.  Cp    also  adhipata. 

Adhlpatana  (nt.)  [fr.  adhipatati]  attack,  pressing  ThA  271. 

Adhipati  (n.-adj.)  [adhi  -f  pati,  cp.  adhipa]  1.  ruler,  master 
J  1V.223;  Vv  81';  Miln  388;  Dh.\  1.36  (=  settha).  — 
2.  ruling  over,  governing,  predominant;  ruled  or  governed 
by  Vbh  216  sq.  (chandaij  adhipatii]  katva  making  energy 
predominant);  DhsA  125,  126  (atta°  autonomous,  loka° 
heteronomous,  influenced  by  society).  See  also  Dhs.  Irsl. 
20  &  Cpd.  60. 

Adhipateyya  (nt.)  A  1.147;  11133  =  5  IV.275  is  probably 
misreading  for  adhipateyya. 

Adilipatthita  [pp.  adhi  -)-  patlheti,  cp.  Sk.  abhi  +  arthayati] 
desired,  wished,  begged  for  D  1. 1 20. 

Adhipanna  [cp.  Sk.  abhipanna,  adhi  +  pad]  gone  into, 
affected  with,  seized  by  ( — °),  a  victim  of  (c.  loc.)  S  1.72, 
Th  2,  345  (kamesu);  Sn  1 123  (tanha"  =  tanhanugata  Nd^ 
32);  Dh  288;  J  111.38,  369;  IV.396;  V.91,  379(=dosena 
ajjhotthata);  vi.27. 

Adtlipatlmoklcha  (nt.)  [adhi  +  patimokkha]  the  higher, 
moral,  code  Vin  v. I   (patim°  -J-);   M  11.245  (+  ajjhajiva). 

Adhipata'  [adhipateti]  splitting,  breaking,  only  in  phrase 
muddba°  head-splitting  Sn  988  sq.,  1004,  1025  (v.  1. 
Nd-i  °vipata). 

Adhipata^  [from  adhipatati  =  Sk.  atipatati,  to  fly  past,  flit] 
a  moth  Su  964.  Expld-  at  Nd'  484  as  "adhipatika  ti  ta 
uppatitva  khadanti  taqkarana  a.  vuccanti";  Ud  72  (expW- 
by   C.  as  salabha). 

Adhipatilca  (f.)  [fr.  adhipata']  a  moth,  a  mosquito  Nd' 
484  (see  adhipata'). 

Adhipateti  [Caus.  fr.  adhipatati,  cp.  Sk.  abhipatayati  &  P. 
atipateti]  to  break,  split  J  iv.337  (=  chindati).  At  Ud  8 
prob.  to  be  read  adhibadheti  (v.  1.  avibadeti.  T.  adhipateti). 

Adhlppagharati  [adhi  -f  ppa  ■\-  gharati]  to  flow,  to  trickle 
ThA  284. 

Adhippaga   3   sg.  aor.   of  adbippagacchati  to  go  to  J  v.  59. 

Adhippaya  [adhi  +  ppa-]- i»  Sk.  abhipraya]  I.  intention, 
wish  desire  S  1. 124;  v.108;  A  11.81;  111.363  (bhoga°); 
V.65 ;  J  1.79,  83;  Sdhp  62.  As  adj.  (— •")  desiring  PvA 
226  (hass°  in  play  =  khiddalthika).  —  2.  sense,  meaning, 
conclusion,  inference  (cp.  adhigama)  Miln  148;  PvA  8, 
16,  48,  J31  (the  moral  of  a  story),  -adhippayena  (instr.) 
in  the  way  of,  like  PvA   215  (kil  for  fun). 

AdhippayOSa  [adhi  -f-  payosa]  distinction,  difference,  pe- 
culiarity, special  meaning  M  146;  S  111.66;  iv.208;  A 
1.267;  IV.158;  V.48  sq. 

Adhippeta  [Sk.  abhipreta,  adhi  -|-  ppa  +  i,  lit.  gone  into, 
gone  for;  cp.  adhippaya]  I.  desired,  approved  of,  agree- 
able D  1. 120;  11.236;  Vv.\  312,  315.  —  2.  meant,  under- 
stood, intended  as  J  IH.263;  P^A  9,  80,  120,  164. 

Adhippetatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  adhippeta]  the  fact  of  being 
meant  or  understood  as,  in  abl.  ^a  with  reference  to,  as 
is  to  be  understood  of  VvA  13;  PvA  52. 

Adhibadheti  [adhi  -f  badheti,  cp.  Sk.  abhibadhayati]  to 
vex,  oppress,  gore  (to  death)  Ud  8  (T.  adhipateti,  v.  1. 
avibadeti). 

Adhibrahma  [adhi  -)-  Brahma,  cp.  atibrahma]  a  superior 
Brahma,  higher  than  Brahma  M  II. 1 32. 

Adhibhavati  [adhi  -f-  bhavati,  cp.  Sk.  &  P.  abhibhavati]  to 
overcome,  overpower,  surpass  S  IV.185  sq.  (cp.  adhibha); 


A  V.248,  282  ("bhoti);  J  n.336;  V.30.  —  aor.  adhibhavi 
J  ll.8o.  3.  pi.  adhibbaijsu  S  iv.185.  See  also  ajjhabhavi 
&  ajjhabhu    pp.  adhibhuta  (q.  v.). 

Adhibhasati  [adhi  -f-  bhasati]  to  address,  to  speak  to;  aor. 
ajjhabhasi  Vin  11. 195;  S  1.103;  iv.117;  Sn  p.  87;  PvA 
56,  90. 

Adhibhu  (adj.)  (— °)  [fr.  adhi  -f  bhu,  cp.  adhibhavati  & 
Sk.  adhibhu]  overpowering,  having  power  over;  master, 
conqueror,  lord  S  IV.186  (anadhibhQ  not  mastering.  For 
adhibhuta  the  v.  1.  abhi°  is  to  be  preferred  as  more 
usual  in  this  connection,  see  abhibhu);  Sn  684  (miga" ; 
v.  I.  abhi"). 

Adhibhuta  [cp.  adhibhu  &  adhibhuta]  overpowered  S  iv.186. 

Adhimatta  (adj.)  [adhi  -f  matta  of  mS]  extreme,  exceeding, 
ext.iaordinary;  nt.  adv.  "i]  extremely  M  1.152,  243;  S  i\'. 
160;  k  11.150;  IV.241;  J  1.92;  Pug  15;  Miln  146,  189, 
274,  290;  Pv  II. 3»  (=  adhikatarar)  PvA  86);  DhA  11.8$; 
cp.  PvA  281, 

Adhimattata  (nt.)  [abslr.  fr.  prec]  preponderance  A  11.150; 
DhsA  334  (cp.  Dhs.  irsl.  200). 

Adhimana  (n.-adj.)  [adhi  -\-  mano]  (n.)  attention,  direction 
of  mind,  concentration  Sn  692  (adhimanasa  bhavatha).  — 
(adj.)  directing  one's  mind  upon,  intent  (on)  J  iv.433 
(:=  pasannacitta);  v.29  (an°;  v.l.  °mana). 

Adhimana  [adhi  -|-  mana]  undue  estimate  of  oneself  M 
11.252;   A  V.162  sq. 

Adhimanilta  (adj.)  [fr.  adhimana]  having  undue  confidence 
in  oneself,  conceited  A  V  162,   169,   317;   DhA  mill. 

AdhimuCCati  [Pass,  of  adhi  -f  muc]  I.  to  be  drawn  to. 
feel  attached  to  or  inclined  towards,  to  indulge  in  (c.  loc.) 
S  111.225;  IV. 185  ;  A  iv,24,  145  sq.,  460;  v.17;  Pug  63.  — 

2.  to  become  settled,  to  make  up  one's  mind  as  to  (with 
loc),  to  become  clear  about  Vin  1.209  (aor.  "raucci);  D 
1. 106;    S    1. 116    (pot.    °mucceyya);    It    43;    DA  1.275.  — 

3.  to  take  courage,  to  have  faith  Sn  559;  Miln  234;  DA 
1. 214,  316;  J  IV.272;  V.103  ;  DhH  1.196;  111.258;  IV. 1 70.  — 

4.  of  a  spirit,  to  possess,  to  enter  into  a  body,  with  loc. 
of  the  body.  A  late  idiom  for  the  older  anvavisati.  J 
IV.172;  v.103,  429;  L*hA  1.196;  111.258;  IV. 170.  — 
pp.  adhimuccita  and  adhimutta.  —  Caus.  adhimoceti 
to  inpline  to  (trs.);  to  direct  upon  (with  loc.)  S  v. 409 
(cittai)  devesu  a.). 

AdhlmUCCana  (nt.)  [fr.  adhi  -)-  muc]  making  up  one's  mind, 
I        confidence  I)hs.\   133,   190. 

Adhimuccita  &  Adhimucchita  (pp.)  [cither  adhi  -f  muc 

or  murch;  it  would  seem  more  probable  to  connect  it 
with  the  former  (cp.  adhimuccati)  and  consider  all  vv.  11. 
°mucchita  as  spurious;  but  in  view  of  the  credit  of  several 
passages  we  have  to  assume  a  regular  analogy-form  "muc- 
chila,  cp.  mucchati  and  see  also  JPTS  1886,  109] 
drawn  towards,  attached  to,  infatuated,  indulging  in  (with 
loc.)  M  11.223  (an");  S  1.113;  Th  l,  732  (v.l.  "muccita), 
923  (cch),  1175;  J  11.437  (cch);  111.242;  v.255  (kamesu 
"mucchita,  v.  1.  '^muccita).  Cp.  ajjhomucchita. 

AdhimuCCitar  [n.  ag.  of  adhimuccati]  one  who  determines 
for  something,  easily  trusting,  giving  credence  A  HI. 165 
(v.  I.  °mucchita). 

Adhimutta  (adj.)  [pp.  of  adhimuccati,  cp.  BSk.  adhimukta. 
Av.  ^  1.8,  112;  Divy  49,  302  etc.]  intent  upon  ( — "  or 
with  loc.  or  ace),  applying  oneself  to,  keen  on,  inclined 
to,  given  to  Vin  1.183;  A  v.34,  38;  Dh  226;  Sn  107 1, 
1149  (°cilta);  NdJ  33;  J  1.370  (dan")  Pug  26;  PvA 
134  (dan°). 

Adhimutti  (f.)  [adhi  -)  niulti]  resolve,  intention,  disposition 
D  1. 174;  A  V.36;  Ps  1.124;  Miln  161,  169;  Vbh  340, 
341;  DA  1.44,  103;  Sdhp  378. 


Adhimattika 


30 


Anabhava 


Adhlmuttika  (adj.)  [=  adhimutta]  inclined  to,  attached  to, 
bent  on  S  JI.154,  158;  It  70;  Vbh  339  sq.  +  ta  (f.) 
inclination  D  1.2. 

Adhlmokkha  [fr.  adhi  -|-  mUC]  firm  resolve,  determination, 
decision  M  111.25  sq.;  Vbh  165  sq.,  425;  DhsA  145,  264. 
See  Dhs.  trsl.  5;   Cpd.   17,  40,  95. 

Adhiyita  see  adUlyati. 

Adhiroha  [fr.  adhi  +  ruh]  ascent,  ascending;  in  dur"  hard 
to  ascend  Miln  322. 

Adhlvacana  (nt.)  [adhi  -f  vacana]  designation,  term,  attri- 
bute, metaphor,  metaphorical  expression  D  11.62;  M  1. 113, 
144,  460;  A  11.70,  124;  m.310;  IV.89,  285,  340;  It  15, 
114;  Sn  p.  218;  J  1.117;  Nd2  34  =  Dhs  1306  (=  nama 
sankha  paniiatti  etc.);  Vbh  6;  PvA  63.  See  on  term 
Dhs.  Irs  I.  340. 

-patha    "process    of  synonymous   nomenclature"   (Mrs. 
Rh.  D.)  D  11.68;  S  111.7 1 ;  Dhs  1306:  DhsA  51. 

Adhivattati  [adhi  +  vattati]  to  come  on,  proceed,  issue, 
result  S  l.ioi  ;  A  11.32. 

Adhivattha  (adj.)  [pp.  of  adhivasati]  inhabiting,  living  in 
(c.  loc.)  Vin  1.28;  S  1. 197;  J  1.223;  "385;  111.327;  PvA 
17.  The  form  adhivuttha  occurs  at  J  vi.37o. 

Adhlvara  (adj.)  [adhi  -\-  vara]  superb,  excellent,  surpassing 
Vv  i63  (an°  unsurpassed,  unrivalled;  VvA  80  :^  adhilca, 
visittha). 

Adhlvasa  [fr.  adhi  -f  vas]  endurance,  forbearance,  holding 
out;  only  as  adj.  in   dur°  difficult  to  hold  out  Th  I,  iii. 

Adhivasaka  (&  "ilea)  (adj.)  [fr.  adhlvasa]  willing,  agree- 
able, enduring,  patient  Vin  iv.130;  Mi.io,  526;  An.iiS; 
111.163;  V.132;  J   111.369  (an'');  iv.ii,   77. 

Adhivasana  (nt.)  [fr.  adhi  -f- vas]  I  assent  A  111.31;  DhA 
1-33-  ~-  2.  forbearance,  endurance  M  l.io;  J  11.237; 
111.263;  IV.307;  V.174. 

Adhivasanata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  adhivasana]  patience,  endurance, 
Dhs  1342;  Vbh  360  (an°). 

Adhivaseti  [Caus.  of  adhivasat.,  cp.  BSk.  adhivasayati  in 
meaning  of  3]  i.  to  wait  for  (c.  ace.)  J  1.254;  11.352; 
in.277.  —  2.  to  have  patience,  bear,  endure  (c.  ace.)  D 
11.128,  157;  J  1.46;  H1.2S1  (pahSre);  IV.279,  407;  V.51, 
200;  VvA  336,  337.  _  3.  to  consent,  agree,  give  in 
Vin  1.17;  D  1.109  (cp.  DA  1.277);  S  iv  76;  DhA  1.33; 
PvA  17,  20,  75  and  freq.  passim.  —  Caus.  adhivasapeti 
to  cause  to  wait  J  1.254. 

Adhivaha  [fr.  adhi  -f-  vah;  cp.  Sk.  abhivahati]  a  carrier, 
bearer,  adj.  bringing  S  iv.70  (dukkha°);  A  1.6;  Th  1,494. 

Adhlvahana  (nt  -adj.)  [fr.  adhi  +  vah]  carrying,  bringing, 
bearing  Sn   79;  f.  "i  Th   I,  519. 

Adhivlmuttatta  (nt.)  =  adhivimokkhatta  &  adhimulti,  i.  e. 
propensity,  the  fact  of  being  inclined  or  given  to  J  v. 254 
(T.  kamadhivimuttita,  v.  1.   °muttata). 

Adhivimokkhatta  (nt.)  =  adhimokkha ;  being  inclined  to 
DhsA  261. 

Adhlvutti  (f.)  [adhi  -\-  vutti,  fr.  adhi  -f-  vaC,  cp.  Sk.  abhi- 
vadati]  expression,  saying,  opinion;  only  in  tt.  adhivutti- 
pada  (v.  1.  adhimutti-p.  at  all  passages)  D  1.13  (explJ- 
by  adhivacana-pada  DA  1.103);  M  11.228;  A  v.36. 

Adhivuttha  see  adhivattha. 

Adhisayana  (nt.-adj.)  [fr.  adhiseti]  lying  on  or  in,  inhabiting 
PvA  80  (maiicaq). 

Adhisayita  [pp.  of  adhiseti]  sat  on,  addled  (of  eggs)  Vin 
111.3;  S  111.153. 


Adhlsila  (nt.)  [adhi  +  sila]  higher  morality,  usually  in 
threefold  set  of  adbicitta-sikkha,  adhipanna°  adhisl'la" 
Vin  1.70;  D  1.174;  111-219;  A  111.133;  IV.25;  DhA  1.334; 
PvA  207.  See  also  adhicitta,  sikkha  &  slla. 

Adhiseti  [adhi  +  seti]  to  lie  on,  sit  on,  live  in,  to  follow, 
pursue  Dh  41  :  Sn  671  (=  gacchati  C.)  —  pp.  adhisayita. 

Adhina  (adj.)  ( — '^)  [cp.  Sk.  adhlna]  subject,  dependent 
D  1.72  (atta°  &  para°);  J  iv.112;  DA  1.217;  also  writ- 
ten adhlna  J  v.350.  See  also  under  para. 

Adhiyatl  &  adhiyati  [Med.  of  adhi  -j-  J,  1st  sg.  adhiye 
taken  as  base  in  Pali]  to  study,  lit.  to  approach  (cp. 
adhigacchati);  to  learn  by  heart  (the  Vedas  &  other 
Sacred  Books)  Vin  1.270;  S  1.202  (dhamniapadani);  J 
IV. 184  (adhiyitva),  496  (adhiyamana) ;  vi.458;  DhA  111.446 
(adhryassu).  —  ger.  adhiyitva  J  iv.75  ;  adhiyanar)  J  v.450 
(=  sajjhayitva  C.)  &  adhicca :  see  adhicca  2 ;  pp.  adhi- 
yita D  1.96. 

Adhuna   (adv.)    [Vedic    adhuna]    just    now,    quite    recently 

D    11.208;    Vin    11.185    (kalakata);   Miln   155;  Davs  11.94. 

-agata    a    new    comer    M    1.457;   J    "105.    -abbisitta 

newly   or  just   anointed    D    11.227.    -uppanna  just  arisen 

D  11.208,  221. 

Adhura  (nt.)  [a  -f-  dhura,  see  dhura  2]  irresponsibility, 
indifference  to  oblihations  J   IV.241. 

Adho  (adv.)  [Vedic  adhah ;  compar.  adharah  ;=  Lat.  inferus, 
Goth,  undar,  E.  under,  Ind.  *ndher-;  superl.  adhamah  = 
Lat.  infimus]  below,  usually  combd-  or  contrasted  with 
uddbai]  "above"  and  tiriyarj  "across" ,  describing  the 
3  dimensions.  —  uddhai)  and  adho  above  and  below, 
marking  zenith  &  nadir.  Thus  with  uddhaq  and  the  4 
bearings  (disa)  and  intermediate  points  (anudisa)  at  S 
1.122;  III. 124;  A  1V.167;  with  uddhai)  &  tiriyar)  at  Sn 
•50i  537)  I055i  1068.  Expld-  at  KhA  248  by  heltha  and 
in  detail  (dogmatically  &  speculatively^  at  Nd^  155.  For 
further  ref.  see  uddhaq.  The  comp"-  form  of  adho  before 
vowels   is  adh°. 

-akkhaka  beneath  the  collar-bone  Vin  iv.2i3.  -agga 
with  the  points  downward  (of  the  upper  row  of  teeth) 
J  V.I 56  (-|-  uddh°  expld.  by  uparima-danta  C).  -kata 
tuined  down,  or  upside  down  J  1.20 ;  vi.298.  -gata  gone 
by,  past.  Adv.  "r^  since  (cp.  uddhai]  adv.  later  or  after) 
J  VI. 1 87  (ito  masar)  adhogataij  since  one  month  ago). 
-gala  (so  read  for  T.  udho°)  down  the  throat  PvA  104. 
-mukha  head  forward,  face  downward,  bent  over,  upturned 
Vin  11.78;  M  1.132,  234:  Vv  16'  (^  hettha  mukha  VvA 
78).  -bhaga  the  lower  part  (of  the  body)  M  1.473;  DhA 
1.148.  -virecana  action  of  a  purgative  (opp.  uddha°  of 
an  emetic)  D  1.12;  DA  1.98  (=:  adho  dosanaij  niharanar)); 
DhsA  404.  -sakhai)  (-)-  uddhamulari)  branches  down  (& 
roots  up,  i.  e.  uprooted)  DhA  1.75.  -sira  (adj.)  head  down- 
ward J  IV. 194.  -sirai)  (adv.)  with  bowed  head  (cp.  avay- 
sirai])  J  VI. 298  (=  siraq  adhokatv.^  hetthamukho  C).  -sisa 
(adj.)  head  first,  headlong  J  1.233;  v.472  ("ka). 

An-  form  of  the  neg.  prefix  a-before  vowels.  For  negatives 
beginning  with  an'  see  the  positive. 

Ana-  negative  prefix,  contained  in  anappameyya,  (Th  i, 
1089),  anamatagga  &  anabhava.  See  Vinaya  Texts.  11. 113. 

Anajjhittha  (adj.)  [an  -j-  ajjhittha]  uncalled,  unbidden,  un- 
asked Vin  1. 113;  Pv  1.12'  (T.  anabbhita,  v.  1.  anijjhiltha; 
J  111.165  has  anavhata;  Th  2,  129  ayacita;  PvA  64 
expK  by  anavhata). 

Anabhava  [ana  -f-  bhava]  the  utter  cessation  of  becoming. 
In  the  oldest  Pali  only  in  adj.  form  anabhavai)  kata  or 
gata.  This  again  found  only  in  a  siring  of  four  adjectives 
together  expressing  the  most  utter  destruction.  They  are 
used  at  Vin  111.3  of  had  qualities,  at  S  11.63  of  certain 
wrong  opinions,  at  M  1487;  S  IV. 62  =  v.527  of  the 
khandas,  at  M  1.33 1  of  the  Mental  Intoxications  (Asavas), 
at  A  IV.73  of  certain  tastes,  of  a  bad  kamma  A  1. 135,  of 
evil  passions  A  1.137,  184,  218;  11.214  of  pride  A  11.4 1, 


Anabhava 


31 


Anagamin 


of  craving  A  n.249,  of  the  bonds  A  IV. 8.  In  the  sup- 
plement to  the  Digha  (D  in. 326)  and  in  the  Iti-vuttaka 
(p.  115)  a  later  idiom,  anabhavar)  gameti,  cause  to  perish, 
is  used  of  evil  thoughts.  Bdhgh  (quoted  Vin  111.267)  reports 
as  V.  I.  anubhava.  Cp.  Nd  1.90;  and  Nd*  under  pahina. 

Anabbhlta  (adj.)  [an  +  abbhita]  not  restored,  not  to  be 
restored  Vin  iv.242;  Pv  1. 12''  (where  reading  prob.  faulty 
&  due  to  a  gloss;  the  id.  p.  at  Th  2,  129  has  ayacita 
&  at  J  III. 165  anavhata;  PvA  64  expls-  by  anavhata, 
V.  1.  anabbhita). 

Anabhunnatata  (f-)  [an  +  abbhunnata  -\-  la]  the  state  of 
not   being  erect,  i.e.   hanging  down  J  v.156. 

Anabhljjha  (f-)  [an  -|-  abhijjha]  absence  of  covetousness 
or  desire  D  111.229,  269;  Dhs  32,  35,  277. 

Anabhijjhalu  (adj.)  [an  -f-  abhijjhalQ]  not  greedy  or  covetous 
D  111.82;  Pug  40. 

Anabhijjhita  (adj.)  [an  +  abhijjhita]  not  desired  Sn  40  (cp. 
Nd'^  38);  Vv  4?*  (=  na  abhikankhita  VvA   201). 

Anabhlnandatl  etc.  see  abhi°  etc. 

Anabhirata  (adj.)  [an  -(-  abhirata]  not  taking  delight  in  J 
1.61   (naccadisu). 

Anabhirati  (f.)  [an  -|-  abhirati]  not  delighting  in,  dissatis- 
faction, discontent  D  1. 17  (-|- paritassana);  111.289;  J  '"• 
395;  DA  I. III. 

Anabhiraddha  (adj.)  [an  +  abhiraddha]  in  anger  Vin  IV.236. 

AnabhiraddhI  (f)  [an  -f  abhiraddhi]  anger,  wrath  D  1.3 
(=  kopass'etai)  adhivacanaij   DA   1.52). 

Anabhisambhuijaniana  (adj.)  [ppr.  med.  of  an  -)-  abhisam- 
bhunati]  not  obtaining,  unable  to  get  or  keep  up  D  l.ioi 
(=  asampSpunanto  avisahamano  va  DA  1.268). 

Anamatagga  (adj.)  [ana  (=  a  neg.)  -f  mata  (fr.  man)  + 
agga  (pi.).  So  Dhammapala  (avidit-agga  ThA  289);  Na- 
nakitti  in  Tikg  on  DhsA  11;  Trenckner,  Notes  64;  Olden- 
berg,  K;«.  Texts  11.114.  Childers  takes  it  as  an  +  amata  -f 
agga,  and  Jacobi  {Erzdhl.  33  and  89)  and  Pischel  {Gram. 
§  251)  as  a  -f-  namat  (fr.  nam)  -f  agga.  It  is  Sanskritired 
at  Divy  197  by  anavaragra,  doubtless  by  some  mistake. 
Weber,  /nd.  Sir.  111. 150  suggests  an  -f-  amrta,  which  does 
not  suit  the  context  at  all].  Ep.  of  Samsara  'whose  be- 
ginning and  end  are  alike  unthinkable",  i.  e.,  without 
beginning  or  end.  Found  in  two  passages  of  the  Canon : 
S  11.178,  187  sq.  =  111.149,  •$'  =  V.226,  441  (quoted 
Kvu  29,  called  Anamatagga-pariyaya  at  DhA  11.268)  and 
Th  2,  495,  6.  Later  references  are  Nd^  664;  PvA  166; 
DhA  III;  II. 13,  32;  Sdhp  505.  [Cp.  anamata  and  ama- 
tagga,  and  cp.  the  English  idiom  "world  without  end". 
The  meaning  can  best  be  seen,  not  from  the  derivation 
(which  is  uncertain),  but  from  the  examples  quoted  above 
from  the  Samyulta.  According  to  the  Yoga,  on  the  con- 
trary (see  e.g.,  Woods,  Yoga-system  of  Putanjali,  1 19), 
it  is  a  possible,  and  indeed  a  necessary  quality  of  the 
Yogi,  to  understand  the  beginning  and  end  of  Samsara]. 

Anamha  (adj.)  [according  to  Morris  JPTS  1884,  70  = 
ana-niha  "unlaughing"  wiih  ana  =  an  (cp.  anabhava  & 
anamatagga)  and  mha  from  smi,  cp.  vimhayati  =  Sk. 
vismayati]  being  in  consternation  or  distress,  crying  J  III. 
223  ("kale  =  arodana-kale  C). 

Anaya  [a  -j-  naya]  misfortune,  distress  Miln  277,  usually 
combd-  with  vyasana  (as  also  in  BSk,  e.  g.  Jtm  215) 
Vin  U.199;  S  IV. 159;  A  v.156;  Miln  292;  VvA  327; 
Sdhp  362. 

Anaiiya  (adj.)  [an  -|-  ariya,  see  also  anariya]  not  Aiyan, 
ignoble,   low    Vin    1.10 ;   D  HI. 232  (°vohara,  3  sets  of  4; 


the   same   at   Vin   v. 125);  Sn  664,  782  (°dhamma);  Pug 
13.  —  See  ariya. 

Anala  (adj.)  [an  -f-  ala]  i-  not  sufficient,  not  enough;  un- 
able, impossible,  unmanageable  M  1455;  J  11326  =  IV. 
471.  —  2.  dissatisfied,  insatiate  J  v. 63  (=  atilta  C).  — 
3.  °i)  kata  dissatisfied,  satiated,  S  1.15  (kamesu). 

Anavaya  (adj.)  [derivation  doubtful.  See  Trenckner  Pall 
Misc.  65J  not  lacking,  complete  in  (loc),  fulfilling  D  1.88 
(_=  anuna  paripura-karin  DA  1.248);  A  111.152  (=  samatta 
paripunna  A  A  quoted  by  Tr.  on  Miln   10). 

AnaVOSita  (atlj-)  [an  +  avosita ;  or  ana  -j-  avosita  =  avusita  ?] 
unfulfilled,  undone  Th   1,   101. 

Anasana  (nt.)  [an  -|-  asana,  cp.  Sk.  an-asana]  not  eating, 
fasting,  hunger  D  ni.75  &  in  same  context  at  Sn  311 
(=  khuda  SnA  324). 

Anasitvana    [ger.    of  an   +  asati]    without    eating,  fasting 

Anasuyyag  [Sk.  anasuyan,  ppr.  of  an  +  asuyati]  not  grum- 
bling J  111.27  (v.  1.  for  anusuyyaq  T.). 

Anasuropa  [.in  -f-  asuropa]  absence  of  abruptness  Dhs  1341. 

Anasuyaka  (adj.)  [Sk.  anasuyaka,  cp.  usuya  not  grumbling, 
not  envious  J  11.192. 

Anassaka  (adj.)  either  an-assaka  or  a-nassaka  (q.  v.). 

AnaSSana  (nt.)  [a  4-  nassana,  nas;  cp.  Sk.  nasan.a]  im- 
perishableness,  freedom  from  waste  J   IV.168. 

Anassavin  (a^'j-)  [an  -f  assavin;  cp.  assava -f- asava]  not 
intoxicated,  not  enjoying  or  finding  pleasure  in  Sn  853 
(satiyesu  a.  =  satavatthusa  kamagunesu  tanhasanthava- 
virahita  SnA   549). 

Anassasika  (adj.)  [an  -f-  assSsa  -f-  ika;  cp.  Sk.  asvasana  & 
BSk.  anasvSsika  Divy  207]  not  consoling,  discouraging, 
not  comforting  M  1.514;  S  11.191. 

AnasSUf)  1^'  sq,  pret.  of  anusuyati  (=  Sk.  anvasruvaq)  I 
have  heard  M  1.393. 

Anagata  (adj.)  [an  -f-  agata]  not  come  yet,  i.  e.  future.  On 
usual  comb",  with  atita:  see  this.  D  iii.ioo  sq.,  134  S'j., 
220,  275;  M  III.188  sq.;  S  1.5;  11.283;  A  III. 100  sq.,  400; 
Sn  3>8,  373,851;  1153;  J1V.159;  VI.364;  Dhs  1039,  1416. 

Anagamana  (nt.)  [an  -f  agamana]  not  coming,  not  returning 
j   I  203,  264. 

Anagamita  (f.)  [anagamin  -|-  ta]  the  state  or  condition  of 
an  Anagamin  S  v. 129,  181,  285;  A  III. 82  ;  v.108,  300  sq. ; 
Sn  p.   140=  A  111.143;  It   •   sq.,  39,  40. 

Anagamin  (adj.-n.)  [an  -j-  Sgamin]  one  who  does  not  return, 
a  Never-Returner,  as  tt.  designating  one  who  has  attained 
the  3fJ  stage  out  of  four  in  the  breaking  of  the  bonds 
(Saqyojanas)  which  keep  a  man  tack  from  Arahantship. 
So  near  is  the  Anagamin  to  the  goal,  that  after  death 
he  will  be  reborn  in  one  of  the  highest  heaven  and  there 
obtain  Arahantship,  never  returning  to  rebirth  as  a  man. 
But  in  the  oldest  passages  referring  to  these  4  stages, 
the  description  of  the  third  does  not  use  the  word  ana- 
gamin (D  1.156;  11.92;  111.107;  M  11.146)  and  anSgSmin 
does  not  mean  tlie  breaking  of  bonds,  but  the  cultivation 
of  certain  specified  good  menl.al  habits  (S  III.  168,  the 
anatta  doctrine;  S  v. 200-2,  the  five  Indriyas ;  A  1.64; 
1.200,  cultivation  of  good  qualities,  11163;  v. 86,  17I  = 
S  149).  We  have  only  two  cases  in  the  canon  of  any 
living  persons  being  called  anagamin.  Those  are  at  S 
v. 177  and  178.  The  word  there  means  one  who  has 
broken  the  lower  five  of  the  ten  bonds,  &  the  indivi- 
duals   named    are    laymen.    At    D    11.92    nine   others,   of 


AnSgamin 


32 


AnSsava 


whom  eight  are  laymen,  are  declared  after  their  death 
to  have  reached  the  third  stage  (as  above)  during  life, 
but  they  are  not  called  anagamins.  At  It  96  there  are 
only  3  stages,  the  worldling,  the  Anagamin,  and  the 
Arahant;  and  the  Saqyojanas  are  not  referred  to.  It  is 
probable  that  already  in  the  Nikaya  period  the  older, 
wider  meaning  was  falling  into  disuse.  The  Abhidhamma 
books  seem  to  refer  only  to  the  Saijyojaaa  explanation ; 
the  commentaries,  so  far  as  we  know  them,  ignore  any 
other.  See  Ps  11.194;  Kv.  Tr.  74;  Dhs.  Tr.  302  n;  Cp.  69. 
-phala  fruition  of  the  state  of  an  Anagamin ;  always 
in  comhn-  sotapatti°  sakadagami"  anagami°  arahatta"  Vin 
1.293;  11-240;  IV. 29;  D  1.229;  "•227,  255;  S  111.168; 
V.411;  A  1.23,  44;  III.272  sq.;  IV.204,  276,  372  sq. 
-magga  the  path  of  one  who  does  not  return  (in  rebirths) 
Ndi  569b. 

Anagara  &  Anagarlya  sec  agara  &  agariya. 

Anaghata    [an  -[-  aghata]    freedom   from   anger   or   ill-will 

\'in   11.249. 

AnaCara  [an-j-acara]  misconduct,  immorality  J  11.133;  m. 
276;  adj.  anacarin  Pug  57. 

Anajaniya  (^dj.)  [an  -|-  ajSnlya]  of  inferior  race,  not  of 
good  blood  M  1.367. 

Anadara  [an  +  adara]  (a)  (m)  disrespect  Pv.\  257. — (b.) 
(adj.)  disrespectful  Sn  247  (=  adaravirahita  SnA  290). 

Anadarata  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  anadara]  want  of  consideration, 
in  expin-  of  dovacassata  at  Dhs  l325:^Vbh  359^  Pug 
30  (where  reading  is  anadariyata). 

Anadariya  (nt.)  [fr.  anadara]  disregard,  disrespect  Vin 
1.176;  IV.113  (where  expW-  in  extenso);  Dhs  1325  r= 
jug  20  =  Vbh  359. 

Anada  [ger.  of  an  -f-  adiyati]  without  taking  up  or  on  to 
oneself  Vin  1V.I20  (=  anadiyltva  C). 

Anadana  (adj.)  [an  -|-  adana]  free  from  attachment  (opp. 
sadana)  A  u.io  =  It  9  =  109  =  Nd*  172^;  Sn  620,  741, 
1094;  Ndi  41  (where  as  nt.  =  tanha);  Dh  352  (=  khan- 
dhadisu  niggahana  Dh.\  IV. 70),  396,  406,  421. 

Anaditva  [ger-  of  an  -)-  adiyati]  not  taking  up,  not  heeding 
J  IV.352  (v.  1.  for  T.  anadiyitva). 

Anadiyitva  [ger.  of  an  -}-  adiyati,  Sk.  anadaya]  without 
assuming  or  taking  up,  not  heeding  Vin  IV. 120;  J  IV.352; 
DhA  1.41.  See  also  adiyati. 

Ananu-  represents  the  metrically  lengthened  from  of  ananu- 
(an  +  anu),  as  found  e.  g.  in  the  foil.  cpds. :  °tappai) 
(ppr.)  not  regretting  J  v.492;  °puttha  questioned  Sn  782 
(=  apucchita  SnA  521);  °yayin  mt  following  or  not 
defiled  by  evil  Sn  1071  (explJ-  at  Nd^  42  by  both 
avedhamana(?)  avigacchamana  &  by  ar.njjamana  adussam- 
ana);  °loma  not  fit  or  suitable  D  11.273  (v- 1-   anu°). 

Anapathagata  (adj.)  [an  -\-  apatha  +  gita]  not  fallen  into 
the  way  of  (the  hunter),  escaped  him  M  1. 1 74. 

Anapada  (adj.)  [an  +  apada]  unmarried  (of  a  woman)  J 
IV. 178  (apada  =  apadana  C. ;  annehi  akata-pariggaha). 

Anapuccha  see  Spucchati. 

Anabadha  (adj.)   [an -|- abadha]   safe  and  sound  VvA  351. 

Anamata  (adj.)  [an  -|-  amata  the  a  being  due  to  metrical 
lengthening]  not  affected  by  death,  immortal  J  11.56  (=: 
asusana-tthaua  C);   DhA  11.99. 

Anatnanta  (° — )  [an  -(-  amanta]  without  asking  or  being 
asked;  in  °kata  unasked,  unpermitted,  uninvited  J  Vl.226; 
°cara  living  uninvited  Vin  v.132;  A  111.259. 


Anamaya  (adj.)  [an  -f-  amaya]  free  from  illness,  not  decaying, 
healthy   Vv   151"  (=  aroga  VvA   74),   17'. 

Anamasita  (adj.)  [an  -\-  amasita,  pp.  of  amassati]  not 
touched,  virgin-  VvA   113  (°khetta). 

Anamassa  (adj.)  [grd.  of  an  +  amassati,  Sk.  amasya]  not 
to  be  touched  J   11  360  (C.  anamasitabba). 

Anayatana  (nt.)  [an  4-  ayatana]  nonexertion,  not  exerting 
oneself,  sluggishness,  indolence  J  v. 121  (°sila  :=  dussila  C). 

Anayasa  (adj.)  [an  -j-  aya  -f-  sa,  or  should  we  read  anayasar] 
void  of  means,  unluckly,  unfortunate  Vv  84^  (=  natthi 
ettha  ayo  sukhan  ti  anayasai]   Vv.\  335). 

Anayasa  (adj.)  [an  -\-  ayasa]  free  from  trouble  or  sorrow, 
peaceful  Th    1,   1008. 

Anarambha  [an  -f  arambha]  that  which  is  without  moil 
and  toil  Sn  745  (=  nibbana   SnA  507). 

Anaradhaka  (adj.)  [an  -|-  aradhaka]  one  who  fails,  unsuc- 
cessful  Vin  1.70. 

Anariya  (adj.)  [doublet  of  anariya]  not  Aryan,  ignoble, 
Sn  815  (v.  1.   SS.  anariya). 

Analamba  (adj.)  [an  -(-  alamba]  without  support  (from 
above),  unsuspended,  not  held  Sn  173  (+  appatittha; 
expld-  at  SnA  214  by  hettha  patitth4bhavena  upari  alam- 
bhavena  ca  gambhira). 

Analaya  [an  -f-  alaya]  aversion,  doing  away  with  Vin  l.io 
(tanhaya). 

Ana|hiya  &  Ana|hika  (adj.)  [an  -f  alhiya,  Sk.  adhya,  see 
also  addha'-]  not  rich,  poor,  miserable,  destitute,  usually 
combd.  with  dalidda  M  1.450;  11. 1 78  (v.  1.  BB.  analiya); 
A  111.352  sq.  (vv.  11.  BB.  analhika),   384;   J   v. 96. 

Anavata  (" — )  [an  -)-avata]  not  shut;  in  °dvarata  (f.)  not 
closing  the  door  against  another,  accessibility,  openhand 
edness  D  111.191. 

Anavattin  (adj.-n.)  [an  +  avattin]  one  who  does  not  return, 
almost  syn.  with  anagamin  in  phrase  anavatti-dbamma, 
one  who  is  not  destined  to  shift  or  return  from  one  birth 
to  another,  D  1. 1 56  (cp.  DA  1.3 1 3) ;  in.  132;  Pug  1 6  sq.,  62. 

Anavasurai)    (adv  )    [an  +  ava  -f-  sura  =:  suriya,    with  ava 

lengthened  to  ava  in  verse]  as  long  as  the  sun   does  not 

set,    before  sun-down  J  v. 56  (=  anatthangata-suriyai)  C.) 
cp.  Sk.  utsura. 

Anavasa  (adj.-n.)  [an  -)-  avasa]  uninhabited,  an  uninhabited 
place  Vin  11.22,  33;  J   1177. 

Anavikata  etc.  see  ivikata. 

Anavila  (adj.)  [an  -f-  avila]  undisturbed,  unstained,  clean, 
pure  D  1.84  (=  nikkaddama  DA  1.226);  111.269,  270; 
Sn  637  (=  nikkilesa  SnA  469  =:  DhA  iv.192);  Th  2,  369 
(avilacitta +);  Dh  82,  413;  ThA  251;  Sdhp  479. 

AnaVUttha  (adj.)  [an  -)-  avuttha,  pp.  of  avasati]  not  dwelt 
in  D  .1130. 

Anasaka  (adj.)  [an  -f-  asaka]  fasting,  not  taking  food  S 
IV. 118.  f.  °a  [cp.  Sk.  anasaka  nt.]  fasting,  abstaining  from 
food  Dh   141   (=:  bhatta-patikkhepa  DhA  111.77). 

Anasakatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  of  anasaka]'  fasting  Sn  249  (= 
abhojana  Sn.\  292). 

Anasava  (adj.)  [an  +  asava]  free  from  the  4  intoxications 
(see  asava)  Vin  11.148=1164;  D  111.112;  Sn  1105,  1133; 
Dh  94,  126,  386;  Nd2  44;  It  75;  Pug  27,  Dhs  1 101, 
1451;  Vbh  426;  Th  I,  100;  Pv  11.6*5;  VvA  9.  See 
Ssava  and  cp.  nirSsava. 


Anasasana 


33 


Anu 


Anasasana  (adj.)  [an  -(-  Ssasana]  not  longing  after  anything   I 
Sn  369  (SnA  365  however  reads  anasayaoa  &  has  anSsa-   1 
Sana   as   v.  1.   Cp.  also  vv.  11.  to  asasSna.  Expl''   by  kaiici 
rup&di-dhammai]  nSsiqsati  SnA  365. 

Anahara  (adj.)  [an  -j-ShSra]  being  without  food  M  1.487; 
Sn  985. 

Anlkka4<jhana  (f.)  [a  -{-  nikkaddhana]  not  throwing  out 
or  expelling  J  m.22. 

Anikkasava  (adj.)  [a  -|~  nikkasava,  cp.  nikasSva]  not  free 
from  impurity,  impure,  stained  Dh  9  =  Th  1,  969  =  J 
11.198  =  v. 50;  DhA  1.82  (=  ragSdihi  kasavehi  sakasSva). 

Anikhata  (adj.)  [a  -|-  nikhsta,  pp.  of  nikhanati]  not  dug  into, 
not  dug  down,  not  deep  J   vi.109  {°kula;  C.  agambhira). 

Anigha  see  Digha<  and  igha. 

Aniccha  (f.)  [an  -|-  icchS]  -dispassion  S  v.6 ;  adj.  °a  without 
desires,  not  desiring  Sn   707. 

Anlnjana(nt.)  [an  -|-  injana]  immobility,  steadfastness  Ps  1.15. 

Anliijlta  (adj.)  [an  +  iiijita]  immoveable,  undisturbed,  un- 
shaken Th  I,  386. 

Anltthangata  see  nitthai. 

Anitthita  see  nitthita. 

Anltthl  (f.)  [an  +  itthi]  a  woman  lacking  the  characteristics 
of  womanhood,  a  woman  ceasing  to  be  a  woman,  "non- 
woman"  J  11.126  (compd  with  anadi  a  river  without  water  °, 
interpreted  by  ucchitth-itthi). 

Anindl-  [the  comp"-  form  of  ninda]  in  °locana  (with)  fault- 
less eyes  J  vi.265. 

Anindlta  (adj.)  [a  -f  nindita]  blameless,  faultless  J  iv.106 
(°angin  of  blameless  body  or  limbs). 

Anibbisat)  [ppr.  of  nibbisati,  q.  v.]  not  finding  Th  I,  78;= 
Dh  153  (=  taq  napai)  avindanto  DhA  111.  128). 

Animlsa  (adj.)  [Ved.  animesa,  cp.  nimisati]  not  winking, 
waking,  watchful  Davs  v.26  (nayana). 

Aniyata  (adj.)  [a  -j-  niyata]  not  settled,  uncertain,  doubtful 
Vin  1.112;  11.287;  D  IU.217. 

Anlyamita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  a  -j-  niyameli]  indefinite  (as  tt.  g.) 
VvA  231. 

Anlla  [from  an,  cp.  Sk.  aniti  to  breathe,  cp.  Gr.  Hveixof 
wind;  Lat.  animus  breath,  soul,  mind]  wind  J  IV.119 
(°patha  air,  sky);  Mila   181;   VvA  237;  Sdhp  594. 

Anirakata  (adj.)  [a  -|-  nirSkata]  see  nirankaroti. 

Anissara  (adj.)  [an  -f  issara]  without  a  personal  creator 
Th   I,  713- 

Anlssukin  (adj.)  [an  -f  issukin,  see  also  an-ussukin]  not 
hard,  not  greedy,  generous  D  111.47  (  4"  amaccharin ;  v.  1. 
anussukin);  SnA   569  (see  under  nitthurin). 

Anika  (nt.)  [Ved.  anika  face,  front,  army  to  Idg.  'og;;  (see), 
cp.  Gr.  '6ttna  eye,  Lat.  oculus,  see  also  Sk.  pralika  and 
P.  akkhi]  army,  array,  troops  (orig.  "front",  i.e.  of  the 
battle-array)  Vin  iv.107  (where  expH-  in  detail);  Sn  623 
(bala°  strong  in  arms,  with  strong  array  i.  e.  of  khanti, 
which  precedes;  cp.  SnA  467). 

-agga  a  splendid  army  Sn  421  (=  balakaya  senSmukha 
SnA  384).  -\\bA  a  .sentinel,  royal  guard  1)  111.64,  '48; 
J  v.ioo;  VI. 15  ("men  on  horseback",  horseguard);  Miln 
234,  264.  -dassana  troop-inspection  D  1.6  (anika°  at  DA 
1.85,  q.  V.   interpretation);   Vin  IV.107   (senabyuha -{-). 


Anigha  see  nigha'  and  cp.  igha. 

Aniti  (f.)  [an  -|-  Iti]  safety,  soundness,  sound  condition, 
health  A  IV.238;  Miln  323  (abl.  °ito). 

Anitika  (adj.)  [fr.  aniti]  free  from  injury  or  harm,  healthy, 
secure  Vin  II. 79  =  124  (-f-  anupaddava) ;  III.162;  S  iv.371 ; 
Sn  1 137  (Iti  vuccanti  kilesa  etc.  Nd'  48);   Miln  304. 

Anitiha  (adj.)  [an  +  itiha,  the  latter  a  cpd.  der.  fr.  iti  + 
ha  =  saying  so  and  so,  cp.  itihasa  &  itihitihaq]  not  such 
and  such,  not  based  00  hearsay  (itiha),  not  guesswork  or 
(mere)  talk  A  11.26;  Th  I,  331  (cp.  M  1. 520);  Sn  1053 
(=Nd»  49,   151);  J  1.456;  Nett  166  (cp.  It  28). 

Anu'  (indecl.)  [Vedic  anu,  Av.  anu;  Gr.  Uvu  to  'ova 
along,  up ;  Av.  ana,  Goth,  ana,  Ohg.  ana,  Ags.  on,  Ger. 
an,  Lat.  an  (in  anbelare  etc.)]  prep.  &  pref.  —  A.  As 
/AC/,  anu  is  only  found  occasionally,  and  here  its  old 
(vedic)  function  with  au.  is  superseded  by  the  /ac.  — 
Traces  of  use  w.  ncc.  may  be  seen  in  expressions  of  time 
like  anu  pancabai]  by  5  days,  i.  e.  after  (every)  5  days 
(cp.  ved.  anu  dyun  day  by  day) ;  a.  vassat]  for  one  year 
or  yearly ;  a.  sar)vaccbarar)  id.  —  (b)  More  freq.  w. 
/oc.  (=  alongside,  with,  by)  a.  tire  by  the  bank  S  iv.177; 
pathe  by  the  way  J  v. 302;  pariveniyai)  in  every  cell 
Vin  1.80;  magge  along  the  road  J  v.201 ;  vate  with  the 
wind  J  11.382. 

B.  As  /re/. :  (a)  General  character,  anu  is  freq.  as 
modifying  (directional)  element  with  well-defined  meaning 
("along"),  as  such  also  as  1"  component  of  pref.-cpds., 
e.g.  anu  -|-  a  (anva°),  anu  +  pra  (anuppa"),  -f- pari,  + 
vi,  -|-  saij.  —  As  base,  i.  e,  2""'  part  of  a  pref.-cpd.  it  is 
rare  and  only  found  in  comb"  sam-anu".  The  prefix  sag 
is  its  nearest  relation  as  modifying  pref.  The  opp.  of  anu 
is  pati  and  both  are  often  found  in  one  cpd.  (cp.  °loma, 
°vata).  (b)  Meanings.  \.  With  verbs  of  motion:  "along 
towards".  —  (a)  the  motion  viewed  from  the  front  back- 
ward =  after,  behind ;  esp.  with  verbs  denoting  to  go, 
follow  etc.  E.g.  °aya  going  after,  connexion;  °agacch° 
follow,  "kkamati  follow,  °dhavali  run  after,  °patta  received, 
"parivattati  move  about  after,  "bandhali  run  after,  °bala 
rear-guard,  °bhasati  speak  after,  repeat,  °v5da  speaking 
after,  blame,  °vicarati  roam  about  °viloketi  look  round 
after  (survey),  "saqcarati  proceed  around  etc.  —  (b)  the 
motion  viewed  from  the  back  forward  =  for,  towards  an 
aim,  on  to,  over  to,  forward.  Esp.  in  double  pref.-cpds. 
(esp.  with  ''pp8°),  e.  g.  anu-adisati  design  for,  dedicate 
"kankhin  longing  for,  °cintana  care  for,  °titlhati  look  after, 
°padinna  given  over  to,  °pavecchati  hand  over,  °pavittha 
entered  into,  "pasaijkamati  go  up  to,  "rodati  cry  for,  "socati 
mourn  for.  —  II.  Witb  verbs  denoting  a  state  or  condi- 
tion: (a)  literal:  along,  at,  to,  combined  with.  Often 
resembling  E.  be-  or  Ger.  be-,  also  Lat.  ad-  and  con-. 
Thus  often  transitiving  or  simply  emphatic.  E.  g.  °kampS 
fuwi-passion,  "kinpa  be-set,  ''ganhati  take  pity  on,  "gSyati 
be-singen,  "jagghati  laugh  at,  belaugh,  °ddaya  pity  with, 
°masati  touch  u/,  "yunjati  order  along,  °yoga  devotion  /«, 
"rakkhati  be-guard,  °litta  be-smeared  or  jn-ointed,  °vitakheti 
reflect  over,  °sara  con-sequential;  etc.  —  (b)  applied:  ac- 
cording to,  in  conformity  with.  E.  g.  °kiila  being  to  will, 
"chavika  befitting,  °nata  permitted,  a/-lowed,  "mati  con- 
sent,  a-greement,  °madati  ap-precia;e,  °rupa  =  con-form, 
°vattin  acting  according  to,  "ssavana  by  hearsay,  "sasati 
ad-vise,  com-mand  etc.  —  III.  (a)  (fig.)  following  after  = 
second  to,  secondary,  supplemenly,  inferior  minor  after-, 
smaller;  e.g.  "dhamma  lesser  morality,  "pabbaja  disciple- 
ship,  "pavattaka  ruling  after,  "bhaga  after-share,  °majjha 
mediocre,  °y5gin  assisting  in  sacrifice,  "vyanjana  smaller 
marks,  etc.;  cp.  pati  in  same  sense.  —  (b)  distributive 
(cp.  A.  a.)  each,  every,  one  by  one,  (one  after  one):  "disS 
in  each  direction,  "pancfihaij  every  5  days,  "pubba  one 
after  the  other.  —  IV.  As  one  of  the  contrasting  (-com- 
parative) prefixes  (see  remarks  on  ati  &  cp.  a')  anu  often 
occurs  in  reduplicative  cpds.  after  the  style  of  khuddl- 
nukhuddaka    "small    and    still    smaller",    i.  e.   all  sorts  of 

1—4 


Anu 


34 


Anugati 


small  items  or  whatever  is  small  or  insigDificant.  More 
freq.  comb""  are  the  foil. :  (q.  v.  under  each  heading) 
padSnupadaij,  pubbSnupubbaka,  ponkhSnuponkhai],  buddhS- 
nubuddha,  vadinuvada,  setthanusetthi.  —  V.  As  regards 
dialectical  differences  in  meanings  of  prefixes,  anu  is  freq. 
found  in  Pali  where  the  Sk.  variant  presents  apa  (for 
ava),  abhi  or  ava.  For  P.  anu  =  Sk.  (Ved.)  apa  see 
anuddhasta;  =  Sk.  abhi  see  anu-gijjhati,  °bruheti,  °san- 
dahati;  =:  Sk.  ava  see  anu-kantati ,  "kassati',  °kinpa, 
"gahati,  °bujjhati  "bodha,  ''lokin,  °vajja. 

Note  (a)  anu  in  comp"  is  always  contracted  to  °anu°, 
never  elided  like  adhi  =  Mhi  or  abhi  =  'bhi.  The  rigid 
character  of  this  rule  accounts  for  forms  isolated  out  of 
this  sort  of  epds.  (like  mahanubhava),  like  anupubbikalha 
(fr.  'pubbanupubba"),  anubhava  etc.  We  find  anu  also  in 
comb",  with  an-  under  the  influence  of  metre. — (b)  the 
assimilation  (contracted)  fdrm  of  anu  before  vowels  is  anv". 

Anu'^  (adj.)  subtile;  freq.  spelling  for  anu,  e.g.  D  1.223' 
Sdhp  271,  346  (anui)  thulai]).  See  anu. 

Anukankhin  (adj.)  [fr.  anu  +  kank$]  striving  after,  longing 
for  J  V.499  (piya°). 

Anukantatl  [anu  +  kantali^]  to  cut  Dh  311  (hatthai)  = 
phaleti  Dh.\  111.484). 

Anukampaka  &  °ika  (adj.)  [fr.  anukampati]  kind  of  heart, 
merciful,  compassionate,  full  of  pity  ( — °  or  c.  loc.)  D 
111.187;  S  1. 105  (loka°),  197;  V.157;  A  IV.265  sq.;  It 
66  (sabba-bhata°) ;  Pv  1.3'  (=:  kSrunika  PvA  16),  $'  (= 
atthakama,  hitesin  PvA  25),  8^;  ii.i*  (r=  anuggaijhataka 
PvA  69),  2';  ThA   174;  PvA   196  (sattha  sattesu  a.). 

Anukampati  [anu  -\-  kampati]  to  have  pity  on,  to  com- 
miserate, to  pity,  to  sympathise  with  (c.  ace.)  S  1.82,  206; 
V.189.  Imper.  anukampa  Pv  11. i"  (==  anuddayaij  karohi 
PvA  70)  &  anukampassu  Pv  111.28  (:^  anugganha  PvA 
181).  Med.  ppr.  anukampamana  Sn  37  (=  anupekkha- 
mana  anugayhamana  Nd-  50):  PvA  35  (>ar|),  62  (pitarai)), 
104.  —  pp.  anukampita  (q.  v.). 

Anukampana  (nt.)  [fr.  last]  compassion,  pity  FvA  16,  88. 

Anukampa  (f-)  [abstr.  fr.  anukampati]  compassion,  X'''>'i 
mercy  D  1.204;  M  1.161;  11.113;  S  1.206;  11.274  (loka°); 
IV.323;  V.259  sq.;  A  1.64,  92;  11.1^59;  III-49:  IV.I39; 
Pug  35-  —  Often  in  abl.  anukampaya  out  of  pity,  for 
the  sake  of  D  III. 21 1  (loka°  ont  of  compassion  for  all 
mankind,  -f- atthaya  hitaya);  J  111.280;  PvA  47,  147. 

Anukampita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  anukampati]  compassioned,  gra- 
tified, remembered,  having  done  a  good  deed  (of  mercy) 
Pv    1II.23». 

Anukampin  (adj.)  [cp.  anukampaka]  compassionate,  anxious 
for,  commiserating.  Only  in  foil,  phrases :  hita°  full  of 
solicitude  for  the  welfare  of  S  v. 86 ;  Sn  693 ;  Pv  1II.7'''. 
sabbapa^a-bhuta-hita"  id.  S  iv.314;  A  11.210;  111.92; 
IV.249;  Pug  57,  68.  sabba-bhata°  S  1.25,  110;  A  11.9; 
It  102. 

AnukarOtl  [anu  -f  kr]  to  imitate,  "to  do  after"'  A  1.212; 
J  1.491 ;  11.162;  DhA  IV. 197.  —  ppr.  anukabbai]  Vin 
11.201  (mam&°).  —  Med.  anukubbati  S  1.19  =  J  iv.65.  — 
See  also  anukubba.  On  anvakSsi  see  anukassati  2. 

AnukaSSatl  [anu  -|-  kassati,  kf$]  i.  [Sk.  anukarsati]  to  draw 
after,  to  repeat,  recite,  quote  D  11.255  (silokaq).  —  2. 
[Sk.  ava-karsati]  to  draw  or  take  of,  to  remove,  throw 
down,  Th  I,  869  (aor.  anvakasl  =  khipi,  chaddesi  C). 

Anukama  (adj.)  [anu  -f-  kama]  responding  to  love,  loving 
in  return  J  II.157. 

Anukdra  [cp,  anukaroli]  imitation  Dpvs  v.39. 

Annkarin  (adj.)  imitating  Davs  v. 32. 


AnuklpQa  [pp.  of  anu  +  kirati]  strewn  with,  beset  with, 
dotted  all  over  Pv  iv.12'  (bhamara-gaija°). 

Anukubba  (adj.)  ( — °)  \=  Sk.  anukurvat,  ppr.  of  anu- 
karoti]  "doing  correspondingly"  giving  back,  retaliating 
J   11.205  (kicca°). 

Anukubbati  see  anukaroti. 

Anukula  freq.  spelling  for  anukula. 

Anukulaka  (adj.)  =  anukula  Sdhp  242  (iccha°  according 
to  wish). 

Anukula  (adj.)  [anu  -f-  kula,  opp.  patikula]  favourable, 
agreeable,  suitable,  pleasant  VvA  280;  spelt  anukula  at 
Sdhp  297,  312. 

-bhava  complaisance,  willingness  VvA  71.  -yanna  a 
propitiative  sacrifice  D  1.144  (expH-  at  DA  1.302  as  anu- 
kula" =  sacrifice  for  the  propagation  of  the  clan). 

AnukkaiJ^hati  [an  4-  ukkanthati]  not  to  be  sorry  or  not  to 

lack  anything,  in  ppr.  "^anto  J  v.io;  and  pp.  °ita  without 
regret  or  in  plenty  PvA   13. 

Anukkaothana  (nt.)  [an  -\-  ukkanthana]  having  no  lack 
anything,  being  contented  or  happy  J  VI.4. 

Anukkama  [to  anukkamati]  t.  order,  turn,  succession,  going 
along:  only  in  instr.  anukkamena  gradually,  in  due 
course  or  succession  J  1. 157,  262,  290;  VvA  157;  PvA 
5,  14,  35  etc.  —  2.  that  which  keeps  an  animal  in  (legular) 
step,  i.  e.  a  bridle  M  1.446 ;  Sn  622  (sandanai)  saha°). 

Anukkamati  [anu  +  kram]  1.  to  follow,  go  along  (a  path 
=  ace.)  A  v. 195  ;  It  80  (maggaq).  —  2.  to  advance  (not 
with  Morris  J P  T S.  1886,  III  as  "abandon")  S  I.24, 
Th  I,  194. 

Anukkhlpatl  [anu  -|-  khipati]  to  throw  out  Cp.  XI.6  (vattag). 

Anukkhepa  [anu  -|-  khepa,  see  anukkhipati]  compensation 
Vin  1.285. 

Anukha^atl  [anu  -f-  khapati]  to  dig  after  or  further  J  v.233. 

Anukhuddaka  (adj.)  [anu  -f  khuddaka]  in  cpd.  khudda° 
whatever  there  is  of  minor  things,  all  less  important  items 
Vin  11.287  =  D  11.154  :=  Miln  142;  Miln  144. 

Anuga  ( — °)  (adj.-sufr.)  [fr.  anu  -\-  gam]  following  or  fol- 
lowed by,  going  after,  undergoing,  being  in  or  under, 
standing  under  the  influence  of  Sn  332  (vasa°  in  the 
power  of),  791  (eja°  ^  abhibhiita  Sn  527),  1095  (Mara- 
vasa°  =  abhibhuyya  viharanti  Nd-  507);  It  91  (eja°); 
J   III. 224  (vasa'"  =  vasavatlin  C.) ;  Mhvs  7,  3. 

AnUgaCChatl  [anu  +  gacchati]  to  go  after,  to  follow,  to 
go  or  fall  into  (w.  ace.)  KhA  223;  PvA  141  ("gacchanto); 
aor.  "gamasi  Vin  n6,  &  anvaga  Mhvs  7,  lo;  y^  pi. 
anvagu  Sn  586  (vasaq  =  vasaij  gata  SnA  461).  Pass, 
anugammati,  ppr.  anugammamana  accompanied  or  fol- 
lowed by,  surrounded,  adorned  with  J  1.53;  v.370.  — 
pp.  anugata  (q.  v.). 

Anugata  (adj.)  [pp.  of  anugacchati]  gone  after,  accompanied 
by,  come  to;  following;  fig.  fallen  or  gone  into,  affected 
with  ( — "),  being  a  victim  of,  suffering  M  1.16;  D  111.85, 
173  (parisa);  A  n.185  (sota°,  v.  1.  anudhata);  J  11.292 
(samudda");  v. 369;  Nd*  32  (lanha°);  PvA  102  (nSmai) 
mayhaq  a.  has  been  given  to  me),   133  (kammaphala°). 

Anugati  (f)  (— °)  [f^-  an"  +  gam]  following,  being  in 
the  train  of,  falling  under,  adherence  to,  dependence  on 
S  1.104  (vas°  being  in  the  power).  Usually  in  cpd.  ditt- 
hanugati  a  sign  (lit.  belonging  to)  of  speculation  Vin 
11.108;  S  11.203;  Pug  33;  DhA  IV. 39. 


Anu£ 


35 


Anutthaka 


AnUgama  [fr-  anu  -f-  gam]  following  after,  only  as  adj.  in 
dur"  diOkult  to  be  followed  J  iv.65. 

Anugamika  (adj.)  going  along  with,  following,  accompa- 
nying; resulting  I'rom,  consequential  on  Kh  vm.S  (nidhi, 
a  treasure  ace.  a  man  to  the  next  world);  J  I  v. 280 
^°nidhi):   Miln    159  (parisS);  PvA  132,  253  (danatj  naina 

°ai)   nidanan   li). 

Anugamin  (adj.j  [fr.  anugacchati]  following,  attending  on; 
an  attendant,   follower  SnA  453  (=:  anuyutta). 

Anugayati  [anu  -f  gayali]  to  sing  after  or  to,  recite  (a 
magic  formula  or  hymn)  praise,  celebrate  IJ  1.104,  238; 
Sn   I131   ( anugayissaijj;   Miln   ijo. 

Anugahati  [anu  -(-  gahati]  to  plunge  into,  to  enter  (ace.  I 
.'^dhp  Oil. 

Anugijjhati  [anu  4-  gijjhati]  to  be  greedy  after,  to  covet 
Sn  709  (cp.  Xd'  12);  J  111.207;  '^•4  (=  giddha  gathita 
hutva  alliyanti  C).   pp.  '^giddha  (q.  v.).    Cp.  al)higiijhati. 

Anugiddha  [pp.  of  anugijjhati]  greedy  after,  hankering  after, 
desiring,  coveting  Sn  86  (ananu°),   144,  952;  Th   I,  580. 

Anuggaijlha  (adj.)  [cp.  anuggaha]  compassionate,  ready  to 
help   PvA  42  "sila. 

Anugganhataka  (adj.)  [=  anugganha]  compassionate,  com- 
miserating, helping  PvA   69  (=r  anukampalia). 

Anugganhana  (nt.)  anuggaha'   Dlis.\.  403. 

Anu(g)ganhati  [anu  +  ganhati]  to  have  pity  on,  to  feel 
Sony  for.  to  help,  give  protection  T  1  53  (vacay;  cp.  DA 
1.160:  sarato  agai.ihantol;  J  11.74;  l^d'  50  ( ppr.  med. 
°gayhamana  =  anukampamana);  Pug  36;  PvA  181  (im- 
per.  anugganha  =  anukampassu).  pp.  anuggahlta  (q.  v.). 

Anuggaha  [anu  +  grah]  "taking  up',  compassion,  love 
for,  kindness,  assistance,  help,  favour,  benefit  S  11. II; 
III. 109;  IV. 104;  V.162;  A  1,92,  114;  11.145;  IV.167;  V.70; 
It   12,  98;  J   1.151;  V.150;  Pug  25:  PvA  145:  ThA  104. 

Anuggaha^  (adj.)  [an  -j-  uggaha]  not  taking  up  Sn  912 
(=:na  gaiihati  Nd'   330). 

Anuggahlta  (&  °ita)  [pp.  of  anuggauhati]  commiserated, 
made  happy,  satisfied  M  I.457  ;  S  11.274;  ll'-gi ',  1^263; 
A  111.172  ;  J   111.428. 

Anuggahaka  (adj.)  [fr.  anuggaha]  helping  as.sisling  S  111.5: 
V.162;  Miln   354   (nt.  =  help). 

Anugghateti  [an  +  ugghateti]  not  to  unfasten  or  open  (a 
door;   Miln   371   (kavStaij). 

Anugghata  [an  -f  ugghata]  not  shaking,  a  steady  walk 
J  VI. 253. 

Anugghatln  (adj.)  [fr.  last]  not  shaking,  not  jerking,  J 
VI. 252;  Vv  5'  (read  °I  for  i);  VvA  36. 

Anughayatl  [anu  +  ghSyati']  to  smell,  snuft',  sniff  up  Miln 
343   (gandhaij). 

Anucankamati  [anu -f- cankamati]  to  follow  (along)  after, 
to  go  after  D  1.235;  M  '227;  Th  i,  481,  1044;  Caus. 
'apeti  M  1.253,  cp.  Lai.   Viit.   147,   3;  M  Vastu  1.350. 

Anucankamana  (nt.)  [fr.  anucankamati]  sidewalk  J    1.7. 

Anucarati  [anu  +  cariti]  to  more  along,  to  follow;  to 
practice;  pp.  anuclnna  &  anucarita  (q- v.) 

AnUCaiita  ( — °)  [pp.  of  anucarati]  connected  with,  ac- 
companied by,  pervaded  with  1)  1.16,  21  (vlmar)sa°  == 
anuvicarita  DA  1. 106);   M   t.68  (id.);   Miln   226. 


AnUCi^na  (pp.)  fpp-  of  anucarati]  I.  pursuing,  following 
out,  practising,  doing;  having  attained  or  practised  Vin 
11.203  =  '•  S6  (pam.adaij);  T  120  (v.126);  Th  i,  236; 
2,  206;  Dpvs  1V.9.  —  2.  adorned  with,  accompanied  by, 
connected   with  J  iv.286. 

AnUCintana  (nt.)  [fr.  anucintetij  lliinkiog,  upon,  intentioni 
care   for  Pv.\    164. 

Anucinteti  [anu  -f-  cinteti)  to  think  upon,  to  meditate, 
consider  S  1.203  (*'.'•  for  anuvicinteti). 

Anuccangin  sec  anujjangin. 

AnUCChavika  (&  "ya)  (adj.)  [anu  +  chavi  +  ka]  "according 
to  one's  skin",  befitting,  suitable,  proper,  pleasing,  fit 
for,  J  1.58,  62,  126,  218;  II. 5;  IV. 137,  138;  Miln  358; 
DhA'  1.203,  390;  11.55,  56;  \'vA  68,  78;  PvA  13,  26 
(=  kappiya).  66,  81,  2S6.  anucchavija  at  \'in  11.7  (an"); 
III. 120  (id. -|- ananulomika)  ;   Miln    13. 

AnUCChittha  (adj.)  [see  ucchittha]  (food)  that  is  not  thrown 
away  or  left  over;  untouched,  clean  (food)  J  111.257;  DhA 
II. 3  (vv.  U.  anuccittha). 

Anujanati  [anu  4-  janali]  I.  to  give  permission,  grant, 
allow  Vin  IV. 225 ;  A  II. 197;  Pv  iv.l";  PvA  55,  79, 
142.  —  2.  to  advise,  prescribe  Vin  183;  11.301  ;  Sn  982. — 
grd.  anunneyya  that  which  is  allowed  A  11. 197;  pp. 
anunnata  (qv.)  Caus.  anujanapeti  J  1.156. 

Anujagghati  [anu  -|-  jagghatij  to  laugh  at,  deride,  mock 
D   1.91  ;   U.\  1.258  (cp.  sanjagghali  ibid  256). 

Anujavati  [anu  -\-  javati]  to  run  after,  to  hasten  after,  to 
follow  J   VI. 452  (=  anubandhati). 

Anujata  (adj.)  [anu  +  jata]  "born  after"  i.e.  after  the 
image  of,  resembling,  taking  after;  esp.  said  of  a  son 
(putta),  resembling  his  father,  a  worthy  son  It  64  (atijata-f, 
opp.  avajata);  Th  I,  827  (fig.  following  the  example  of), 
1279;  J  VI. 380;   DhA  1. 1 29;   Uavs  11.66. 

Anujivati  [anu  -|-  jivati]  to  live  after,  i.  e.  like  (ace),  to  live 
for  or  on,  subsist  by  J  IV.271  (=  upajivati,  tassanubhavena 
jivitaij  laddhaij  (C).  —  pp.  anujivata  (q.  v.). 

Anujivita  (nt.)  [pp.  of  anujivati]  living  (after),  living, 
livelihood,  subsistence,  life  Sn  836  (=  jivitaij  SnA   545). 

Anujivln  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  anujivati]  living  upon,  another, 
dependent;  a  follower,  a  dependant  A  1.152;  111.44;] 
111  4S5  :  Davs  v.43. 

Anujju  (adj.)  [an  -f  ujju]  not  straight,  crooked,  bent,  in 
cpds.  ''angin  (anujjangin)  with  (evenly)  bent  limbs,  i.e. 
with  perfect  limbs,  graceful  f.  ^i  Ep.  of  a  beautiful  woman 
J  V.40  (=  kancana-sannibha-sarira  C);  vi.500  (T.  anucc- 
angi,  C.  anindita  agarahitangi);  °gamin  going  crooked 
i.e.  snake  j  iv.330;  °bhufa  not  upright  (fig.  of  citta) 
J   V.293. 

Anujjuka  =  anujju  J  111.318. 

Anujjhana  (nt.)  [anu  +  jhana]  meditation,  reflection,  intro- 
spection  Miln   352   ("bahula). 

Anunnata    (adj.)    [pp.    of    anujanati]    permitted,    allowed; 
sanctioned,  given  leave,  ordained  D  1.88;   J   1.92;   11.353, 
416;   Pv   1.12'  (na.  a.  ^  ananunnaia  at  id.  p.  Th  2,  129 
expld    at    PvA    64    by    ananumata);    Pug    28;  DA  1.247 
248,  267;  PvA   12,  81. 

Anuiinatatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  to  anunnata]  being  permitted, 
permission  J   11.353. 

Anutthaka  (adj.)  [fr.  an  +  utthahali]  not  rising,  not  rousing 
oneself,  inactive,  lazy  Th   I,  1033, 


Anutthahati 


36 


Anuddharin 


Anutthahati  [anu  +  thahati  =  'ihali,  see  "titthali]  to  earry 
out,  look  after,  practise  do  J  v.121.  —  pp.  anutthita  (q.  v.). 

Anutthahana  (a<lj.)  [ppr-  of  an  +  utthahati]  one  who  does 
not  rouse  himself,  not  gelling  up,  inactive  Dh  280  (== 
anutthahanto  avayamanto   DhA  III. 409). 

Anutthatar  ["•  ag.  to  an  -f-  utthahatij  one  without  energy 
or  zeal  Sn  96  (niddasilin  sabhasilin  +)  SoA  169  (== 
viriya-tejavirahita). 

Anutthana  (nt.)  [an  +  ulU'^na]  "the  not  getting  up",  in- 
activity, want  of  energy  Dh  241  (sarira-patijagganar)  akar- 
onto  DhA  HI. 347). 

Anutthita  [pp-  of  anutthati  =anutitthati]  practising,  effecting 
or  effected,  come  to,  experienced,  done  D  11.103;  S  iv. 
200;  A  III. 290  sq.;  1V.300;  J  II. 61;  Miln  198;  PvA  132 
(cp.  anugata). 

Anutthubhatl  [formally  Sk.  anustobhali,  but  in  meaning  = 
'anustivati;  anu  -(-  tlhubhati,  the  etym.  of  which  see  under 
nitthubhati]  to  lick  up  with  one's  saliva  DA  1.138. 

Anutthurln  v.  1.  at  SnA  569,  see  nitthurin. 

Anu<Jasati   [anu -f  dasati]   to  bite  J  VI.192. 

AnU(}ahati  [anu  -\-  dahati]  to  burn  over  again,  burn  tho- 
roughly, fig.  to  destroy,  consume  J  11.330;  vi.423.  Pass, 
"dayhati  J  v. 426.  —  Also  spelt  °dahati,  e.  g.  at  S  iv. 
I90r=v.53;  Th  2,  488. 

AnUlJahana  (nt.)  [fr.  anudahati]  conflagration,  burning  up, 
consumption  J   v.27t;   Th.\   287   (d). 

Anunnata  (adj.)  [uppata]  not  raised,  not  elated,  not  haughty, 
humble   Sn   702  (care  =  uddhaccaq   napajjeyya  SnA  492). 

Anutappati  [anu  -\-  tappati';  Sk.  anutapyate,  Pass,  of 
anuiapati]  to  be  sorry  for,  to  regret,  repent,  feel  remorse 
J  I.II3;  IV.358;  v.492  (ppr.  au-anutappaq);  Dh  67,  314; 
Pv  H.9*^;  DhA  11.40.  grd.  anutappa  to  be  regretted  A 
1.22,  77;  III. 294,  and  anufapiya  A  111.46  (an"). 

Anutapa  [fr.  anu  -j-  tapa]  anguish,  remorse,  conscience 
Vv  40^   (=  vippatisara   VvA   180);  DhsA  384. 

Anutapln  (adj.)  [fr.  anutapa]  repenting,  regretting  Th  2, 
57,   190;   VvA   115. 

Anutaplya  grd.  of  anutappati,  q.  v. 

Anuta]etl  [anu  -f-  taleti]  to  beat  J   11.280. 

Anutltthatl  [anu  4-  titthali  see  also  anutthahati]  to  look 
after,  to  manage,  carry  on  J  v. 1 13  (=  anugacchati); 
PvA   78. 

Anutire  (adv.)  [anu  -f-  tire,  loc.  of  lira]  along  side  or  near 
the  bank  (of  a  river)  Sn  18  (=  tira-samlpe  SnA  28). 
Cp.  anu   A  b. 

Anuttara  (adj.)  [an  -|-  uttara]  "nothing  higher",  without  a 
superior,  incomparable,  second  to  none,  unsurpassed, 
excellent,  preeminent  Sn  234  (:=adhikassa  kassaci  abha- 
vato  KhA  193),  1003;  Dh  23,  55  (=  asadisa  appatibhaga 
DhA  1.423);  Pv  IV. 3^-  (dhamma);  Dhs  1294;  DA  1.129; 
PvA    1,  5,  6,   i8,  etc. 

Anuttariya  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  anultara]  preeminence,  superi- 
ority, excellency;  highest  ideal,  greatest  good.  They  are 
mentioned  as  sets  of  3  (viz.  dassana",  patipada°,  vim- 
utti°)  at  D  III. 219,  or  of  6  (viz.  dassana",  savana", 
labha°,  silckba°,  paricariya",  anussata^)  at  D  in. 250, 
281;  A  1.22;  111.284,  325  sq.,  452;  Ps  1.5.  Cp.  M  1.235; 
A   V.37.   See  also  anuttariya. 

Anuttana  (adj.)  [an  -f-  utlSna]  not  (lying)  open,  not  exposed; 
fig.   unexplained,  unclear  J    VI. 247. 


Anutthuna  (f)  [fr.  anutlhunati]  wailing,  crying,  lamenting 
Nd'    167   (=  vacapalapa  vippalapa  etc.). 

Anutthunati  [anu  -f  thunati  (thunati);  anu  -|-  stan]  to 
wail,  moan,  deplore,  lament,  bewail  D  III. 86;  Sn  827 
(cp.  Nd'  167);  Dh  156;  J  III. 115;  v.346,  479;  DhA 
111.133;  PvA  60  (wrongly  applied  for  ghayati,  of  the  fire 
of  conscience). 

Anutrasin  (adj.)  [an  -)-  ulrasin)  not  terrified,  at  ease 
Th    I,  864. 

Anuthera  [anu  -j-  theraj  an  inferior  Thera,  one  who  comes 
next  to  the  elder  Vin  11.212  (theranuthera  Th.  &  next 
in  age). 

Anudadati  [anu  4-  dadati]  to  concede,  grant,  admit,  fut. 
anudassati  Miln  276,  375. 

Anudayati  (to  sympathise  with)  see  under  annudda. 

AnudaSSita  [pp-  of  anudasseti]   manifested  Miln    119. 

Anudahati  see  anudahati. 

Anudittha  [pp^  of  anudisatij  pointed  out,  appointed,  dedi- 
cated, fit.  consecration,  dedication  J  v. 393  (anudittha  = 
asukassa  nama  dassati  ti  C.) ;  Pv  1. 10'  (=  udditlha  PvA  50). 

Anuditthi  (f)  |anu  -f  dilthi]  an  "after  view",  sceptical 
view,  speculation,  heresy  D  1.12;  M  11.228;  S  III. 45  sq.; 
Th    I,   754;  Miln  325;  DA  H03.  attanuditthi  (q.  v.)  a 

soul-speculation. 

Anudisati  [anu  -f-disati]  to  point  out,  direct,  bid,  address 
PvA  99  (aor.  anudesi  -j-  anvesi)    —  pp.  anudittha  (q.v.). 

Anudisa  (f- )  [anu  -|-  disa]  an  intermediate  point  of  ihe 
compass,  often  collectively  for  the  usual  4  intermediate 
points  D  1.222;  S  1. 122;  111.124. 

Anudipeti  [anu  -)-  dipeti]  to  explain  Miln  227  (dhamma- 
dliammai]). 

Anuduta  [anu  4-  duta]  a  person  sent  with  another,  a 
travelling  companion   Vin   U.19,  295;  Uh'^  "-76,  78. 

Anudeva  see  anvadeva. 

Anuddayata  (f)  [abstr.  to  anuddaya]  sympathy  with  ( — ") 
compassion,  kindness,  favour,  usually  as  par°  kindness  to 
or  sympathy  with  other  people  S  11. 218;  v. 169  (T.  anu- 
dayata);  A  III. 1 84;  It   72;   Vbh  356. 

Anuddaya  (&  anudaya)  (f.)  [anu  +  daya]  compassion,  pity, 
mercy,  care  Vin  11,196;  S  1.204;  "-'99",  iv.323;  A  u.176; 
111.189;  Pug  35  (anukampa);  J  1. 147,  186,  214;  PvA  70, 
88,  181  (=anukamp.i).  In  comp"  anudaya"  e.g.  "sam- 
panna  full  of  mercy  J   1.151,  262;  PvA  66. 

Anudda  (f-)  [contracted  form  of  anuddaya]  =  anuddaya 
Dhs  1056,  where  also  the  other  abstr.  formations  anud- 
dayana  &  anuddayitattai)  "care,  forbearance  &  consi- 
deration"; DhsA   362  (anudayati  ti  anudda). 

Anuddhagsetl  [anu  +  dharjseti]  to  spoil,  corrupt,  degrade 
Vin  IV. 148  (expln-  here  in  slightly  diff.  meaning  =  codeti 
va  codapeti  va  to  reprove,  scold,  bring  down) ;  It  42. 
Usually  in  ster.  phrase  rago  cittai]  a.  lust  degrades  the 
heart  Vin  III. in;  M  1.26;  S  1. 186;  A  1.266;  11. 126;  ill. 
393  sq.  —  pp.  anuddhasta  (q.  v.). 

Anuddhata  (adj.)  [an4-uddhata]  not  puffed  up,  not  proud, 
unconceited  calm,  subdued  Sn  850  (=  uddhacca-virahita 
SnA  549,  cp.  anuuuata);  It  30;  Dh  363  (=  nibbutacitta 
DhA  IV.93);   Vv  648;  Pug   59. 

Anuddharin  (adj.)  [an  +  uddharin]  not  proud  Sn  952  (= 
anussukin  SnA  569)  see  nitthurin. 


Anuddhasta 


37 


Anupadana 


AnuddhRSta  (k'J)  [anu  +  dhasta,  pp.  of  anuddhai)seti, 
cp.  Sk.  npadhvasta]  spoilt,  corrupt,  degraded  M  1462 
(citta);  A  11.126  (id.). 

Anudhamma  [anu  -|-  dhamma]  1.  in  comp"-  with  dhamma 
as  dhamtnanudhamma  to  be  judged  as  a  redupl.  cpd. 
after  the  manner  of  cpds.  mentioned  under  anu  iv.  & 
meaning  "the  Law  in  all  its  parts,  the  dhamma  and  what 
belongs  to  it,  the  Law  in  its  fullness".  For  instances  see 
dhamma  C.  iv.  Freq.  in  phrase  dh°-anudh°-patipanna 
"one  who  masters  the  completeness  of  the  Dh.",  e.  g.  S 
11.18;  111.163;  It  81;  Ps  il.lSg.  —  2.  conformity  or  ac- 
cordance with  the  Law,  lawfulness,  relation,  essence,  con- 
sistency, truth;  in  phrase  dbammassa  (c)  anudhammai) 
Vyakarotl  to  explain  the  truth  of  the  Dh.  Vin  1.234;  D 
1.161;  M  1.368,  482;  S  U.33;  III. 6;  IV. 51;  V.7.  See 
further  M  111.30;  Sn  963  (cp.  Nd'  481  for  exegesis). 
Also  in  cpd.  "^carin  living  according  to  the  Uhamma, 
living  in  truth  S  U.81,  108;  A  11.8;  Dh  20  (cp.  Dh.\ 
1.158);  Vv  3r;  Sn  69  (see  Nd^  51). 

Anudhamntata  (f-)  [abstr.  to  anudhamma)  lawfulness,  con- 
formity to  the  Dhamma  A  11.46;  Ps  135,  36. 

Anudhareti  [anu  +  dhareti]  to  hold  up  DA  1. 61  fchattai)), 
cp.  J  1.53,  dhariyamana. 

Anudhavatl  [anu  -j-  dhavati]  to  run  after,  to  chase,  follow, 
persecute,  pursue  M  1.474;  S  1.9;  Dh  85;  Th  i,  1174; 
Miln   253,  372. 

Anudhavin  (adj.-o.)  [fr.  anudhavati]  one  who  runs  after 
S  1.9,   117. 

Anunadt(-tire)  along  the  bank  of  the  river  S  1V.177  should 
be  read  anu  naditire  (=  anu  prep.  c.  loc.;  see  under  anu  A). 

Anunamati  [anu  -f-  namati]  to  incline,  bend  (intrs.),  give 
way  Miln  372  (of  a  bow). 

Antmaya  [fr.  anuneti]  "leading  along",  friendliness,  courtesy, 
falling  in  with,  fawning  D  111.254  (°sai]yojana);  A  iv.  7sq. 
(id.)  M  1. 191;  Dhi  1059;  Mjh  145;  Nett  79;  comb^- w. 
opp.  pattgha  (repu_gnance)  at  Miln  44,   122,  322. 

Airanayana  (nt.)  [fr.  anuneti]  fawning  DhsA  362. 

Antmasfloi  (adj.)  [ami -foasa -}- ilea]  nasal;  as  tt,  g.  the 
sound  5.;  in  °lopa  apocope  of  lie  nasal  ij  VvA  114, 
253,  275»  .333. 

VVnunita  (»4i;)  [PP-  of  »nune6]  led,  induced  S  iv.71 ;  Sn  781. 

Anunetar  [b.  ag.  fr.  anuneti]  one  who  reconciles  or  con- 
ciliates Ps  Ha94  (neta   vinetii  anunetS). 

Anineti  [ann-^meti]  to  conciliate,  appease,  win  over,  flatter 
b  1.232  (ppr.  anunayanana);  )jp.  anontta  (q.  v.). 

Antnia  sec  anupa. 

Amtftakampati  [v.nu  4-  pakampaii]  to  shake,  xnove,  to  be 
•uwleady    I'h   I,  J91  =  Ud  41. 

Anupakkama  [an  -}-  upakkama]  not  attacking,  iiistr.  °ena 
not  I  V  attack  (from   exlernal  eneaiies)  Vin  11.195. 

Anupakhuttha  (adj.)  [an  +  upak°]  liameless,  irreproachahle 
IJ  1.103;   \''"   iv.l6p;  Sn   p.   115;  DA   1.281. 

Anupakkbandati  [ans  -|-  pa  +  khan^ti]  to  push  oneself 
forward,  10  encroach  00  D  1. 122  (=  anupavisati  DA  1.290); 
ger.  aoapakhajja  pushing  oneself  in,  intruding  Vin 
11.88  (;=  antopavisati),  213;  iv.43  (=  anupavisati);  M 
1. 151,  469;   S  III. 113;  Vism   18. 

Anupakhajjati  [den.  fr.  anupakhajja,  ger.  of  anupakkhan- 
dati]  to  encroach,  intrude  Vin  V.163. 


Anupagacchatl  [anu  +  pa  +  gacchati]  to  go  or  return  into 
(c.  ace.)  D  1.55  (anupeti  -1-). 

Anupaghata  [an  +  upaghala]  not  hurting  Dh  185  (anupa° 
metri  causa;  expld-  by  anupahananan  c'eva  anupaghalanan 
ca  DhA   111.238). 

Anupacita  (adj.)  [anu  +  pa  -f  cita,  pp.  of  anupacinati] 
heaped  up,  accumulated  ThA   56. 

Anupacinati  [an  -f  upacinati]  not  to  obse.rve  or  notice  J 
V.339  (=anoloketi  C;  v.  I.   anapavinali). 

Anupajaggtiati  [auu  +  pa  -f  jagghati]  to  laugh  at,  to 
deride,  mock  over  A   1.198  (v.  1.  anusaq"). 

Anupajjati  [anu  -f  pad]  to  follow,  accompany  J  iv.304.  — 
pp.  anupanna  (q.  v.). 

Anupancaliag  (adv.)  [anu  +  panca  -|-  ahai)]  every  five  days 
Pv.-\    139  (-f- anudasahaq). 

Anupaiiiiatti  (f.)  [anu  4-  paiinatti]  a  supplementary  regula- 
tion or  order  Vin   11.286;  v. 2   sq. 

Anupatlpati  (f.)  [anu  +  patipaii]  succession ;  as  adv.  in 
order,  successively  D.\  1. 277  (katha  =  anupubbikatha); 
DhA  III  340  (anupatipatiya  =  anupubbena);  Vism  244. 

Anupatthita  (adj.)  [anu  -f  pa  -j-  thila]  setting  out  after, 
following,  attacking  J   v.452. 

Anupatati  [anu  +  patati]  I.  to  follow,  go  after,  J  VI. 555 
anupatiyasi  Subj.).  • —  2.  to  fall  upon,  to  befall,  attack 
Vin  111.106  =  M  1.364;  S  1.23  (read  °patanti  for  "patatanti) 
=  Dh  221  (dukkha);  Th  i,  41  =  1167  (of  lightning). — 
pp.  anupatita  (q.  v.).  Cp.  also  anupata  &  anupatin. 

Anupatita  [pp.  of  anupatati]  "befallen",  affected  with,  op- 
pressed by  ( — °)  S  11.173  (dukkha°);  111.69  (id.);  Sn  334 
(pamada"). 

Anupatitatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  of  anupatita]  the  fact  of  being 
attacked  by,  being  a  victim  of  ( — ")  SnA  339. 

Anupatta  (anuppatta)  [pp.  of  anupapunSti;  cp.  Sk.  anu- 
piapia]  (having)  attained,  received,  got  to  (c.  ace  ),  reached 
D  1.87 — III;  112;  It  38;  Sn  027,  635;  Dh  386,  403; 
Pv  nM^O;  PvA  59  (dukkhai)),  242.  In  phrase  addhagata 
vayo-anuppatta  having  reached  old  age,  e.g.  Vin  11.188; 
D  1.48;   Sn  pp.  50,  92;  PvA   149. 

Anupatti  (anuppatti)  (f.)  [anu  +  patti]  attainment,  accom- 
plishment, wish,  desire  (fulfilled),  ideal  S  1.46,  52. 

Anupathe  at  J  v. 302  should  be  read  as  anu  pathe  by  the 
way  at  the  wayside;  anu  to  be  taken  as  prep.  c.  loc.  (see 
anu  A).  C.  explns    as  janghamagga-mihamagganai)  antare. 

Anupada  [cp.  Sk.  anupadar)  adv.,  anu-f  pada]  i.  the  "after- 
foot",  i.  e.  second  foot  a  verse,  also  a  mode  of  reciting, 
where  the  second  foot  is  recited  without  the  first  one 
Vin  IV.15  (cp.  355);  Miln  340  (anupadena  anupadaq  ka- 
theti).  —  2.  (adj.)  (following)  on  foot,  at  every,  step, 
continuous,  repeated,  in  "dhamma-vipas.sana  uninter- 
rupted conlemplalion  M  111.25;  "vannana  word-by-word 
CAplanaSiop  DhsA  1 58.  As  nt.  adv.  '~r)  close  behind,  im- 
mediately after  (c.  gen.)  J  11.230  (tassaaupadai)  agamasi); 
V1.422.  Esp.  freq.  in  comb"-  padinupadai]  (adv.)  foot 
after  foot,  i.  e.  in  the  footsteps,  immediately  behind  J  ill. 
504;   VI.555;   DhA   1.69;  11.38. 

Anupadatar  (anuppadatar)  [n.  ag.  of  anupadeti]  one  who 
gives,  or  one  who  sets  forth,  effects,  designs  D  1.4  (cp. 
DA  1.74);  A   11.209. 

Anupadana  (anuppadana)  (nt.)  [anu  -f  pa  -f  dana,  cp.  anu- 
jiadeli]  giving,  administering,  furnishing,  the  giving  of 
(— °)  D  1.12  (cp.  DA  1.98;  both  read  anuppadana);  J 
111.205;  Miln  315. 


Anupadiniia 


38 


Anupassati 


Anupadinna  (anujipaJinna)  [pp.  ot  anupadeti]  given,  handed 
over,   furnished,  dedicated   Pv   1.5''. 

Anupadeti  (anuppadeli)  [ami  +  P^  +  dadati]  to  give  out, 
give  as  a  present,  hand  over;  to  design,  set  forth,  under- 
take S  111131  (Pot.  anuppadajjuij);  M  1. 416  (Tot.  anupa- 
dajjeyya.  see  dadati  1.3);  Miln  210  ('deti).  fut.  ^dassati 
(see  dadati  i.l);  D  111.92;  S  iv.303  (v.  1.  .SS  for  T.  anu- 
sarissati);  A  in.43;  Sn  983.  ger.  ''datva  ."^n.X  35.  inf. 
~daturj  A  1.117.  pp.  "dinna  (q.  v.). 

Anupaddava  (adj.)  [an  +  upaddava]  free  from  danger, 
uninjured,  safe  V'in  11.79=124  (-(- anitika):  ill. 162;  I>h 
338;  DhA  IV. 48;   PvA  250  (expl"    for  siv.a). 

Anupadhareti  [an  -j-  upadhar'"]  to  disregard,  to  heed  not, 
to  neglect   Uh.\    1V.197:    VvA    2O0. 

Anupadhika  (adj.)  [an  +  upadhi  -f  ka]  free  from  attach- 
ment (see  upadhi)  Vin  1  36  (anupadhika);  D.  ill  112  (anu- 
padhika opp.  to  sa-upadhika);  Sn  1057  (anupadhika  T., 
but   Nd-  aaiipadhika.   with  ii   for  u  metri  causa). 

Anupanna,  [pp.  of  anupajjati]  gone  into,  reached,  attained 
Sn   764  (maradheyya'"). 

Anupabandhati  (anuppa")  [anu  -[-  pa  +  bandhali]  to  follow 
immediately,  to  be  incessant,  to  keep  on  (without  stopp- 
ing), to  continue  Miln   132.  —  Caus.  "^apeti  ibid. 

Anupabandhanata  (anupp.i°)  (f)  [aljstr.  to  prec]  non- 
stopping,  not   ceasing  Aliln    132. 

Anupabandhana  (anuppa")  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  anupabandhati] 
continuance,  incessance,  Pug  l8  =  Vbh  357  (in  exegesis 
of  upanaha). 

Anupabbajja  (f.)  [anu  -\-  pabbajja,  cp.  BSk.  anupravrajati 
Divy  61]  giving  up  wordly  life  in  imitation  of  another 
S  V.97  =It   107. 

Anupaya  (adj.)  [an -f- upaya]  unattached,  "aloof"  S  1.181 
(akankha  apiha +). 

Anuparigacchatl  [anu  +  pari  -|-  gacchati]  to  walk  round 
and  round,  to  go  round  about  (c.  ace.)  Vin  111.119; 
S  '-75  (ger-  "gamma);  Sn  447  (aor.  ''parlyaga  =  parito 
parito  agamasi   Sn   A  393):  J   IV.267. 

Anuparidhavati  [anu  -{-  pari  -f-  dhavati]  to  run  up  &  down 
or  to  move  round  &  round  (cp.  anuparivattati)  S.  111.150 
(khilan). 

Anupariyati  [auu  -{-  pari  -f  yati]  to  go  round  about,  to  go 
about,  to  wander  or  travel  all  over  (c.  ace.)  Vin  ri.iil; 
S  1. 102,  124;  Th  I,  1235  ("pariyeti),  1250  (id.  to  search); 
Pv  III. 3*  (=  anuvicarati);  Miln  38;  PvA  92  C^yayitva, 
ger.)  217. 

Anupariyaya  (adj)  [adjectivised  ger.  of  anupariyati]  going 
round,  encircling,  in  ''patha  the  path  leading  or  going 
round  the  city  D  11.83  =  5  iv   i94r=Av.i95;  Aiv.107. 

Anuparivattati  [anu  ~\-  pari  -f-  vrt]  to  go  or  move  round, 
viz.  I.  to  deal  with,  be  engaged  in,  perform,  worship 
Vin  III. 307  (adiccar)):  D  1.240;  PvA  97.  —  2.  to  meet 
Miln  204  (Devadatto  ca  Bodhisatto  ca  ekato  anuparivat- 
tanti).  —  3.  to  move  round  &  round,  move  on  and  on, 
keep  on  rolling  (c.  ace),  evolve  S.  111.150  (anupari- 
dhavati -f )  Miln  253  (anudhavati  -f-  kayan). 

Anuparivatti  (f.)  (— °)  [anu  +  parivatti]  dealing  with,  oc- 
cupation, connection  with  S  111.16. 

Anuparivareti  [anu  -f  pari  -f-  vareti]  lo  surround,  stand  by, 
attend  on  (c.  ace.)  Vin  1.338;   M   1.153;   DhA  1.55. 


Anupariveniyaq  [anu  -f  paviveniyaq  =  loc.  of  pariveni] 
should  be  written  anu  pariveniyaq  ("in  every  cell,  cell 
by  cell"'),  anu  here  functioning  as  prep.  c.  loc.  (see  anu  A) 
\in   I. So,   106. 

Anuparisakkati  [anu  -f  pari  +  sakkati]  to  move  round,  to 
be  occupied  with,  t.ike  an  interest  in  (c.  ace.)  S  1V.312 
(v.l.  "vattati). 

Anuparisakkana  (nt.)  [fr.  anuparisakkati]  dealing  with, 
interest   in   .S   IV.312   (v.l.   '^vattnna). 

Anupariharati  [anu  +  pari -[- harati]  to  surround,  enfold, 
embrace   M   1.306. 

Anupalitta  (adj.)  [an  -f-  upalitta]  unsmeared,  unstained,  free 
from  taint  M  1.319,  386  (in  verse):  as  "upalitta  in  verse 
of  Sn  &  Dh :  Sn  211  (=^  lepanaij  abhava  Sn.\  261),  392, 
468,  790,  845:  Dh  353. 

Anupavajja  (adj.)  [grd.  of  an -:  upavadati]  blameless, 
without  fault  Miln   391. 

Anupavattaka  (anuppa*")  (adj.)  to  anupavatteti]  one  who 
succeeds  (another)  King  or  Ruler  in  the  ruling  of  an 
empire  (cakkaq)  Miln  342,  362  ;  Sn.\  454.  See  also  anu- 
vattaka. 

Anupavatteti  (anuppa'')  [anu  -f  pa  +  vatteti,  fr.  vft]  to 
keep  moving  on  after,  to  continue  rolling,  with  cakkai) 
to  wield  suppreme  power  after,  i.e.  in  succession  or  imi- 
tation of  a  predecessor  S  1191;  Miln  362.  See  also 
anuvatteti. 

Anupavada  [an  -\-  upavada]  not  blaming  or  finding  fault, 
abstaining  from  grumbling  or  abuse  Dh  185  (aniipa°  in 
nretie;  expld  at  Dh.\  111.238  as  anupavadanaii  c'eva  anu- 
pavadapanan  ca  "not  scolding  as  well  as  not  inciting 
others  to  grumbling");  adj.  "vadaka  Pug  60,  &  °vadin 
M  1.360. 

Anupaviftba  (anuppa')  [pp.  of  anupavisati]  entered,  gone 
or  got  into,  fallen  into  (c.  ace.)  Miln  270,  318  sq.,  409 
(coming  for  shelter);  PvA  97,  152  (Ganganadiq  a.  nadi: 
flowing  into   the   G.). 

Anupavitthata  (f)  [abstr.  to  anupavittha]  the  fact  of  having 
entered  Miln   257. 

Anupavisati  [anu  ^  pa -f- visati]  to  go  into,  to  enter  Dh 
1.290:  VvA  42  (^  ogahati).  —  pp.  "pavittha  (q.v.)  — ■ 
Caus.  "paveseti  (q.v.). 

AnupaveCChati  (anuppa^)  [see  under  pavecchati]  to  give, 
give  over  to,  offer  up,  present,  supply  Vin  1.22 1  ("pavac- 
chati);  D  1.74  (=  pavesati  DA  1.218);  11.78;  M  1.446; 
111.133;  A  11.64;  111.26  (v.l.  '^vacch°);  J  v. 394;  Sn  208 
(v.l.  °vacch°);  SnA  256  (:=  anupavesati);   PvA   28. 

Anupaveseti  [anu  -{-  pa  -{-  vis,  cp.  BSk.  anupravesayali 
Divy  238]  to  make  enter,  to  give  over,  to  supply  Sn.\ 
256  (=  "pavecchati). 

Anupasankamati'  [anu  -[-  pa  -(-  saijkamati]  to  go  along  up 
to  (c.  ace.)   PvA    179. 

Anupasankamati^  [an  +  upasank"]  not  to  go  to.  not  to 
approach  DhA  11.30  (-f  apayirupiisati). 

Anupasaothapana  (f-)  [an  -f  upasanthapana]  not  stopping, 
incessance,  continuance  Pug  18  (but  id.  p.  at  Vbh  357 
has  anusansandana  instead);  cp.  anupabandhana. 

Anupassaka  (adj.)  [fr.  anupassati]  observing,  viewing, 
contemplating  Th   i,  420. 

Anupassati  [anu  +  passati]  to  look  at,  contemplate,  observe 
Sn  477;  Ps  1.57,   187;  Sn  A   505. 


Anupassana 


39 


Anubandhati 


AnupaSSanS  ((■)  [abstr.  of  anupassati,  cf.  Sk.  anudarsana] 
looking  at,  viewing,  contemplating,  consideration,  realisa- 
tion S  V.178  sq.,  Sn  p.  140;  Ps  1. 10,  20,  96;  11.37,41  sq., 
67  sq.;  Vbh  194.  See  anicca°,  aDatta°,  dukkha°. 

AnupaSSin  ( — ")  (adj.)  [fr.  anupassati]  viewing,  observing, 
realising  S  11.84  sq.,  v.294  sq.,  311  sq.,  345,  Dh  7,253; 
Sn  255,  728;   Ps  1. 191  sq.;  Vbh  193  sq.,  236;  Sdhp4ll. 

Anupahata'  [anu  +  pa  +  hata,  pp.  of  anu  +  pa  +  han] 
thrown   up,  blown  up  Miln  274. 

Anupahata^  (*dj.)  [an  +  upahata]  not  destroyed,  not  spoilt 
Dh.A.   11.33   CJivhapasada). 

Anupata  [of  anupatati]  attack  in  speech,  contest,  reproach 
A   1. 161. 

Anupatin  (adj.)  [fr.  anupata]  I.  following,  indulging  in 
J   111.523  (khana°).  —  2.  attacking,  hurting  J  v.39g. 

AnupadaQ  (adv.)  [anu  -f-  pada]  at  the  foot  Vism  1S2  (opp. 
anusisat]  at  the  head). 

Anupada  [ger.  of  an  +  upadiyati  =:  anupadaya]  anupada- 
niya,  anupadaya,  anupadiyana,  anupadiyi^va  see 
upadiyati. 

Anupadana  &  Anupadl  see  upadana  &  upadi. 

Anupapita  [pp.  of  anupapeti]  having  been  lead  to  or  made 
to  reach,  attained,  found  Miln  252. 

Anupapuiiati  (anuppa^)  [anu  -|-  papunati]  to  reach,  attain, 
get  to,  find  S  1.105;  S"-  anuppatvana  Pv  11. 9'*  (= 
°papunitva  PvA  123).  —  pp.  anupatta  (q.  v.).  —  Caus. 
anupapeti  (q.  v.). 

Anupapeti  [Caus.  of  anupapuiiati]  to  make  reach  or  attain, 
to  lead  to,  to  give  or  make  find  J  vi.88;  Cp.  XI.  4  (aor. 
anupapayi);  Miln  276.  —  pp.  anupapita  (q.  v.). 

AnupSya  [an  +  upaya]  wrong  means  J   1.256;  SJhp  405. 

Anupayasa  see  upayasa. 

Anupalaka  (adj.)  [anu  -j-  palaka]  guarding,  preserving 
Sdhp  474. 

Anupalana  (nt.)  [fr.  anupaleti]  maintenance,  guarding, 
keeping  Dpvs  111.2. 

AUupaleti  [anu  -f  paleti]  to  safeguard,  warrant,  maintain 
Miln   160  (santatii)). 

Anupahana  (adj.)  [an  +  upahana]  without  shoes  J   vi.552. 

Anupiya  (anuppiya)  (adj  )  [anu  +  piya]  flattering,  plessant, 
nt.  pleasanlne.ss,  flattery,  in  °bha;iin  one  who  flatters  D 
111.185;  J  11.390;  V.360;  and  "bhipitar  id.  Vbh  352. 

Anupl|ag  at  PvA  161   is  to  be  read  anuppijan  (q.  v.). 

AnupuCChati  [anu  -|-  pucchati]  to  ask  or  inquire  after  (c. 
ace.)  Sn  432,   1113.  —  pp.  anuputtba  (q.  v.). 

Anuputtha  [pp.  of  anupucchali]  asked  Sn  782  (=  pucchita 
Sn.\   521). 

AnupUbba  (adj.)  [anu  -f  pubba]  following  in  one's  turn, 
successive,  gradual,  by  and  by,  regular  Vin  11.237  (ma- 
hasamuddo  a'-ninno  etc.);  D  1.184;  Sn  511;  J  v.  155 
(regularly  formed,  of  iiiu).  Cases  adverbially:  anupub- 
bena  (instr.)  by  and  by,  in  course  of  lime,  later,  gradually 
Vin  1.83;  Dh  239  (=  anupatipatiya  DhA  111.340);  Pug 
41,  64;  J  II. 2,  105;  III. 127;  Miln  22;  PvA  19.  anupub- 
baso  (abl.  cp.  Sk.  anupQrvasah)  in  regular  order  Sn  1000.  — 
In  comp".  both  anupubba°  &  anupubbi°  (q.  v.). 

-karana  gradual  performance,  graded  practice  M  1.446. 
-nirodha  successive  passing  away,  fading  away  in  regular 
succession,   i.  e.   in  due   course.   The  nine    stages  of  this 


process  are  the  same  as  those  mentioned  under  "vihEra, 
&  are  enum^-  as  such  at  D  III. 266,  29O;  A  1V.409,  456; 
Ps  1.35.  -vihara  a  state  of  gradually  ascending  stages, 
by  means  of  which  the  highest  aim  of  meditation  &  trance 
is  attained,  viz.  complete  ce.ssation  of  all  consciousness. 
These  are  9  stages,  consisting  of  the  4  jhanos,  the  4 
ayatanani  &  as  the  crowning  phrase  "saiiM-vedayita- 
nirodha"  (see  jhana').  Enumd.  as  such  in  var.  places,  esp. 
at  the  foil.:  D  11.156;  111.265,  ^9°;  ^  iv.410;  Nd'  under 
jhana;  Ps  1. 5;  Miln  176.  -sikkha  regular  instruction  or 
study  (dhammavinoye)  M  1.479;  lil.l  (-(-"kiriya  °patipada). 

Anupubbaka  (adj.)  =  anupubba,  in  cpd.  pubbanupubbaka 
all  in  succession  or  in  turn,  one  by  one  (on  nature  of 
this  kind  of  cpd.  see  anu  15  iv.)  Vin  1.20  ("anaq  kulanaq 
putta   the  sons  of  each  clan,  one  by  one). 

Anupubbata  (nt.)  [fr.  anupubba]  acting  in  turn,  gradation, 
succession  Vv  64'*  (=  anukula  kiriya  i.  e.  as  it  pleases 
VvA  280)  cp.  anupubbata. 

'  Anupubbl-katha  (f.)  [anupubba  +  kath^,  formation  like 
dhammi-katha]  a  gradiul  instruction,  graduated  sermon, 
regulated  exposition  of  the  ever  higher  values  of  four 
subjects  (dana-katha,  sila°,  s.igga°,  magga^)  i.  e.  charity, 
righteousness,  the  heavens,  and  the  Path.  Bdhgh.  explains 
the  term  as  anupubbikatha  nama  daninantarar)  silai]  sila- 
nantaro  saggo  sagganantaro  maggo  ti  etesaq  dipana-katha" 
(DA  1.277).  Vin  1.15,  18;  11.156,  192;  D  i.iio;  11.41 ; 
M  1.379;  J  1.8;  VvA  66,  197,  208;  DA  1.308;  DhA  1.6; 
j  Miln  228.  —  The  spelling  is  frequently  anupubbikatha 
j  (as  to  lengthening  of  anu  see  anu  Note  (a)),  e.g.  at  D 
i.iio;  II. 41;  M  1.379;  J  1.8;  Miln  228. 

1  Anupekkhatl  ]anu  -f  pekkhati]  I.  to  concentrate  oneself 
on,  to  look  carefully  A  111.23.  —  2.  to  consider,  to  show 
consideration    for,    Nd-    50    (ppr.    °amana  =  anukampa- 

j  mana).  —  Caus.  anupekkbetl  to  cause  some  one  to  con- 
sider carefully   Vin  11.73. 

AnupekkhanatS  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  anupekkhana,  see  anupek- 
khatl] concentration  (of  thought)  Dhs  8,  85,  284,  372. 

I  Anupetl  [ana  -f  pa  +  i]  to  go  into  D  1.55  (+  anupagac- 
chati)  S  111.207;  DA  1. 165. 

Anupesetl  [anu  -f  pa  -f  i§]  to  send  forth  after  Miln  36. 

AnupOSathikaQ  see  anvaddbamSsar). 

AnupOSlya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  anu  -f-  pU$]  to  be  nourished  or 
fostered  Sdhp  318. 

Anuppa°  in  all  comb"s.  of  anu  -f-  ppa  see  under  headings 
anupa'~. 

Anuppadajjuo  (S  in.i3>)  see  anupadetl. 

Anuppanna  (°uppada,  °uppadeti)  see  uppanna  etc. 

Anuppi]a  (adj.)  [an  -)-  uppija]  not  molested,  not  oppressed 
(by  robbers  etc.)  not  ruined,  free  from  harm  J  111.443; 
V.378;  VvA  351;  PvA  161. 

Anupharapa  (nt.)  [anu  -|-  pharapa]  flashing  through,  per- 
vading Miln   148. 

AnuphUSlyatI  [anu  -f-  phuslyati,  cp.  Sk.  prusayati,  Caus.  of 
pru$]  to  sprinkle,  moisten,  make  wet  J  v. 242  (himai); 
C.  pateyya). 

Anubajjhati  at  PvA  56  is  faulty  reading  for  anubandh- 
ati (q.  v.). 

Anubaddha  [pp.  of  anubandhati]  following,  standing  be- 
hind (pitthito)  D  I.I,  226. 

Anubandha  [aim -f  bandh]  bondage  M  1 11. 170;  It  91. 

Anubandhati  [anu  -)-  bandhati]  to  follow,  run  after,  pursue 
J    1. 195;   11.230;   VI.452  (:=anujavali);  PvA  56  (substitute 


Anubandhati 


40 


Anumanftatj 


for  anubajjhanti!),  103,  J55.  aor.  °bandhl  J  11.154,  3535 
111.504;  PvA  260  (=  anvagacchi).  ger.  °bandbitva  J  1.254. 
grd.  °bandhitabba  M  1.106.  —  pp.  anubaddha  (q.  v.). 

Anubandhana  (ct.)  [fr.  anubandhati]  that  which  connects 
or  follows,  connection,  consequence  J  71.526  (°dukkha). 

Anubala  (nt.)  [anu  +  bala]  rear-guard,  retinue,  suite,  in  °r) 
bhavati  to  accompany  or  follow  somebody  Miln  125. 

Anubujjhati  [anu  +  bujjhati,  Med.  of  budh,  cp.  Sk.  ava- 
budhyate]  to  remember,  recollect  J  III.387  (with  avabujjhati 
in  prcc.  verse). 

Anubujjhana  (nt.)  [fr.  anubujjhati]  awakening,  recognition 
Ps  l.l!5  (bujjhana  -j-)- 

Anubuddha  [pp.  of  anu  -|-  bodhati]  I.  awakened  (act.  & 
pass.),  recognised,  conceived,  seen,  known  D  II. 1 23  ("a 
ime  dhamma);  S  1.137  (dhammo  vimalen'  Snubuddho) 
11.203;  IV. 188;  A  II. I ;  111.14;  'V.105;  SnA  431.  In  phrase 
buddbanubuddba  (as  to  nature  of  cpd.  see  anu  B  iv.) 
either  "fully  awakened  (enlightened)"  or  "wakened  hy 
by  the  wake"  (Mrs.  Rh.  D.)  Th  1,  679  =  1246.  —  2. 
a  lesser  Buddha,  inferior  than  the  Buddha  DA  1.40.  Cp. 
buddbanubuddba. 

Anubodha  [anu  -f-  budh]  awakening,  perception,  recogni- 
tion, understanding  S  I.I26(?)^A  v. 46  (anubodhiij  as 
aor.  of  anubodhati?);  Pug  21;  Miln  233.  Freq.  in  comp"' 
ananubodha  (adj.)  not  understanding,  not  knowing  the 
truth  S  11.92;  111.261;  V.431;  A  II. I ;  IV. 105;  Dhs  390, 
1061;  VvA  321  (=  anavabodha)  and  duranubodha  (adj.) 
hard  to  understand,  difficult  to  known  D  1.12,22;  S  I.136. 

Anubodhati  [anu  -)-  budh]  to  wake  up,  to  realise,  perceive, 
understand;  aor.  anubodhiij  A  v.46  (?)  :=  Si. 126  (anu- 
bodhai)).  —  Caus.  "bodheti  to  awaken,  fig.  to  make  see 
to  instruct  J  vi.i3g  Cayamana)  —  pp.  anubuddba  (q.v.). 

Anubodhana(nt.)[fr.  anubodhati]  awakening,  understanding, 
recognition  Ps  1.18  (bodhana  +). 

Anubbajati  [anu  +  vraj]  to  go  along,  wander,  follow, 
tread  (a  path)  J   IV.399  (maggaq  =  pabbajati  C). 

Anubbata  (adj.)  [Vedic  anuvrata,  anu  -f-  vata]  subject  to 
the  will  of  another,  obedient,  faithful,  devoted  J  111.52 1  ; 
VI.557. 

Anubbillavitatta  see  ubbilP. 

Anubyanjana  see  anuvyaijana. 

Anubruhita  [qq.  of  anubrnheti]  strengthened  with  ( — "), 
full  of  Ps  1.167. 

Anubruheti  [bruheti]  to  do  very  much  or  often,  to  practice, 
frequent,  to  be  fond  of  (c.  ace),  foster  S  1.178  (anubru- 
haye);  M  in. 187  (id.,  so  read  for  manu°),  Th  2,  163 
(°ehi);  Cp.  111.1-  (saijvegai)  anubruhayiq  aor.);  J  ill. 191 
(sunSagaraq).  Often  in  phrase  vivekar)  anubruheti  to 
devote  oneself  to  detachment  or  solitude,  e.g.  J  1.9  (inf 
°bruhetui));  III. 31  ("bruhessami),  Dh  75  ("brQhaye  = 
"bruheyya  vaddlieyya  DhA  11.103).  —  PP-  anubruhita 
(q.v.)  Cp.  also  bruhana. 

Anubha^ana  (f )  [ami  -f-  bhanana]  talking  to,  admonition, 
scolding  Vin  11.88  (anuvadana  -f). 

Anubhavatl  &  Anubhotj  [anu  +  bhavati]  to  come  to  or 
by,  to  undergo,  suffer  (feel),  get,  undertake,  partake  in, 
experience  D  1.129;  »  '2  ("bhonti);  M  11.204;  A  1.61 
(atthai)  "bhoti  to  have  a  good  result);  J  vi.97  (°bhoma); 
Pv  1. 10"  Cbhomi  vipakaij);  PvA  52  (°issati  =  vedissati); 
Sdhf  290.  Esp.  freq.  with  dukkhat]  to  suffer  pain,  e.g. 
PvA  l.lJio  (°blionti);  PvA  43,  68,  79  etc.  (cp.  anubha- 
vana).  —  ppr.  med.  "bhavamana  J  1.50;  aor.  "bhavi 
PvA  75  (sarapattii]);  ger.  "bhavitva  J  iv.i;  PvA  4  (sam- 


patliij),  67  (dukkhaij),  73  fsampattiq);  grd.  "bhaviyana 
(in  order  to  receive)  Pv  ii.8"(=  anubhavitva  PvA  109).  — 
Pass,  anubhuyati  &  °bhavlyati  to  be  undergone  or  being 
experienced;  ppr.  °bbuyainana  PvA  8,  159  (maya  a.  = 
anubhuta),  214  (attana  by  him)  &  °bhaviyamana  PvA  33 
(dukkhaq).  —  pp.  anubhuta  (q.v.). 

Anubhavana  (nt.)  [fr.  anubhavati]  experiencing,  suffering; 
sensation  or  physical  sensibility  (cf  Cj>c/.  229,  232')  Nett 
28  (itth4nitth-anubhavana-Iakkhana  vfcdana  "feeling  is 
characterised  by  the  experiencing  of  what  is  pleasant  and 
unpleasant");  Miln  60  (vedayita-lakkhana  vedana  anubha- 
vana-lakkhana  ca);  PvA  152  (kamma-vipaka°).  Esp.  in 
comb",  with  dukkha°  suffering  painful  sensations,  e.g.  at 
J  IV. 3;  Miln  181;  DhA  iv.75  ;  PvA  52. 

Anubhaga  [anu  -\-  bhaga]  a  secondary  or  inferior  part, 
(after-)share,  what  is  left  over  Vin  11.167. 

Anubhayati  [anu  -|-  bhSyali]  to  be  afraid  of  J  vi.302  (kissa 
nv'  inubhayissai),  so  read  for  kissSnu"). 

Anubhava  [fr.  anubhavati]  orig.  meaning  "experience,  con- 
comitance" and  found  only  in  cpds.  as  — °,  in  meaning 
"experiencing  the  sensation  of  or  belonging  to,  experience 
of,  accordance  with",  e.  g.  mahS°  sensation  of  greatness, 
raja"  s.  belonging  to  a  king,  what  is  in  accordance  with 
king<ihip,  i.  e.  majesty.  Through  preponderance  of  expres- 
sions of  distinction  there  arises  uie  meaning  of  anubhava 
as  "power,  majesty,  greatness,  splendour  etc."  &  as  such 
it  was  separated  from  the  I^'  component  and  taken  as 
anubhava  with  a  instead  of  a,  since  the  compositional 
character  had  obliterated  the  character  of  the  a.  As  such 
(anubhava  abs.)  found  only  in  later  language.  —  (O  anu- 
bhava ( — °):  mahanubhava  (of)  great  majestat,  eminence, 
power  S  1.146  sq.;  11.274;  'v.323;  Sn  p.  93;  Pv  II. l'^; 
PvA  76.  deva°  of  divine  power  or  majesty  D  11. 12;  de- 
vata"  id.  J  1.168;  dibba°  id.  PvA  71,  110.  raja"  kingly 
splendour,  pomp  D  1.49;  J  IV247;  Pv.\  279  etc.  -anu- 
bbavena  (instr.  — '^)  in  accordance  with,  by  means  of  J 
11.200  (angavijja");  Pv.\  53  (iddh°),  77  (kamma°),  148 
(id),  162  (raja"),  184  (dana°),  186  (pufina°).  yatbanu- 
bhavat]  (adv.)  in  accordance  with  (me),  as  much  as  (9 
can),  after  ability,  according  to  power  S  1.31;  Vv  1^  (= 
yath.^balar)  VvA  25).  —  (2)  anubhava  majesty  power, 
magnificence,  glory,  splendour  J  v. 10,  456;  Pv  11.8"; 
VvA  14;  PvA  43,  122,  272.  See  also  anu". 

Anubhavata  (f.)  [=r  anubhava  +  ta]  majesty,  power  S  I.I  56 

(maha°). 

Anubhasati  [anu  +  bhasati]  to  speak  after,  to  repeat  D 
1,104;  M'ln  345;  DA  T.273. 

Anubhuta  [pp.  of  anubhavati]  (having  or  being)  experienced, 
suffered,  enjoyed  PvA  II. 1 2".  nt.  suffering,  experience  J 
1.254;  Miln  78,  80. 

Anubhuyamanatta  (nt.)  [.ibstr.  fr.  ppr.  Pass,  of  anubhavati] 
the  fact  of  having  to  undergo,  experiencing  PvA   103. 

Anunia  (-dassika)  see  anoma°. 

Anumagge  at  J  v. 201  .should  be  read  anu  magge  along 
the  road,  by  the  way ;  anu  here  used  as  prep.  c.  loc. 
(see  anu   A  b). 

Anumajjati  [anu  +  majjati]  I.  to  strike  along,  to  stroke, 
to  touch  0.\  1.276  (=  anumasati).  —  2.  to  beat,  thresh, 
fig.  to  thresh  ont  J  vi.548 :  Miln  90.  —  Pass,  anumajjiyati 
Miln  275  (cp.  p.  428). 

Anumajjana  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  anum.ijjati]  threshing  ont, 
pounding  up  {Dhs.  trsl.  11),  always  used  with  ref  to  the 
term  vicara  (q.v.)  Miln  62;  DhsA  114;  DA  1.63,  122. 

Anumajjha  (adj.)  [anu  4-  majjha]  mediocre,  without  going 
to  extremes  J  1V.192;  v.387. 

Anumaniiatl  [anu  -\-  maniiatl]  to  assent,  approve,  give  leave 
Th  I,  72.  —  pp.  anumata  (q.v.). 


Anumata 


41 


Anuranjita 


Anumata  [pp.  of  anumannati]  approved  of,  given  consent 
to,  finding  approval,  given  leave  D  1.99  (=  anuiliiata 
DA  1.267);  J  V.399  (=muta);  Miln  185,  2J2,  231,  275; 
PvA  64  (^  annuunata). 

Anumati  (f.)  [from  anumannati]  consent,  permission,  agree- 
ment, assent,  approval  Vin  11.294,  SO'j  3"6)  D.  1. 137, 
143;  Dpvs  iv.47,  Cf.  V.18;  DA  1.297;  VvA  17,  PvA  114. 

Anumatta  see  anu°. 

Anumasati  [anu -)- masati]  to  touch  D  1.106  (^  anumajjati 
DA  1.276). 

Anumana  [fr.  anu  |- man]  inference  Miln  330  (naya +), 
372,  4«3;  Sdhp  74. 

Anumitta  [anu  -f-  mitta]  a  secondary  friend,  a  follower, 
acquaintance  J   v. 77. 

Anuminati  [cf.  Sk.  anumati,  anu  -\-  minati  from  ml,  Sk. 
minoti,  with  confusion  of  roots  ma  &  mi]  to  observe, 
draw  an  inference  M  1.97;  PvA  227  ("anto  -f- nayat) 
nento).  See  also  anumlyati. 

Anumiyatl  [Sk.  anumiyate.  Pass,  of  anu  +  ma,  measure,  in 
sense  of  Med.]  to  observe,  conclude  or  infer  from  S  111.36. 
Cp.  anuminati. 

Anumodaka  (adj.)  [fr.  anumodati]  one  who  enjoys,  one 
who  is  glad  of  or  thankful  for  (c.  ace.)  Vin  v.172;  PvA 
122;  Sdhf  512. 

Anumodati  [anu  -)-  modati]  to  find  satisfaction  in  (ace), 
to  rejoice  in,  be  thankful  for  (c.  ace),  appreciate,  benefit 
from,  to  be  pleased,  to  enjoy  Vin  11.212  (bhattagge  a.  to 
say  grace  after  a  meal);  S  11.54;  A  III. 50  (°modaniya); 
IV.411 ;  Dh  177  (ppr.  °modamana);  It  78;  Pv  11.9" 
(danai)  "modamana  =  enjoying,  gladly  receiving);  1,5* 
(anumodare  :^are  pleased;  pitisomanassajata  honti  PvA 
27);  J  It. 112;  PvA  19,  46,  81,  201)  imper.  modahi); 
Sdhp.  501  sq.  —  pp.  anumodita  (q.  v.). 

Anumodana  (nt.)  [fr.  anumodati]  "according  to  taste",  i.e. 
satisfaction,  thanlis,  esp.  after  a  meal  or  after  receiving 
gifts  =  to  say  grace  or  benediction,  blessing,  thanksgiving. 
In  latter  sense  with  dadati  (give  thanks  for  =:  loc), 
karoti  (=  Lat.  gratias  agere)  or  vacati  (say  or  tell  thanks) : 
°ij  datva  PvA  89;  "q  katva  J  1.91  ;  DhA  111.170,  172; 
VvA  1 18;  PvA  17,  47;  °r)  vatva  VvA  40  (paniyadane 
for  the  gift  of  water),  295,  306  etc.  °r|  karoti  also  "to 
do  a  favour"  PvA  275.  Cp.  further  DhA  1.198  ("gatha 
verses  expressing  thanks,  benediction);  11.97  (Sattharaq 
°r)  yaciqsu  asked  his  blessing);  PvA  23  ("atthaij  in  order 
to  thank),  26  (id.),  121,  I4I  (katabhatla°),  142;  Sdhp 
213,  218,  516. 

Anumodita  [pp.  of  anumodati]  enjoyed,  rejoiced  in  PvA  77. 

Anummatta  (adj.)  [an  +  ummatta]  not  out  of  mind,  sane, 
of  sound  mind  Miln  122;  Sdhp  205. 

Anuyanta  at  A  v.22  is  doubtful  reading  (v.l.  anuyutta). 
The  meaning  is  either  "inferior  to,  dependent  on,  a  suIj- 
jeci  of,  a  vassal"  or  "attending  on".  The  explanation  may 
compare  Sk.  anuyatai]  attendance  [anu  -|-  ya,  cp.  anuyayin] 
or  Sk.  yantr  ruler  [yam],  in  which  latter  case  anu-yantr 
would  be  "an  inferior  ruler"  and  P.  yanta  would  represent 
the  n.  a.g.  yanta  as  a-siem.  The  v.  1.  is  perhaps  prefe- 
rable as  long  as  other  passages  with  anuyanta  are  not 
found  (see  anuyutta  2). 

Anuyagin  (adj  )  [fr.  anu  +  yaj]  offering  after  the  example 
of  another  D  1.142. 

Anuyata  [pp.  of  annySti]  gone  through  or  after,  followed, 
pursued  S  11.105  (magga);  A  v. 236;  It  29;  Miln  217. 


Anuyati  (&  anuyayati)  [anu  -)-  ya]  t.  to  go  after,  to  follow 
J  VI.49  (fut.  °yissati),  499  (yayantaq  anuyayati  =  anu- 
gacchati  C).  —  2.  to  go  along  by,  to  go  over,  to  visit 
Miln  391  Cyayati).  —  pp.  anuyata  (q.  v.).  See  also  anu- 
saijyayati. 

Anuyayin  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  anuyayin,  anu  -f  ya]  going  after, 
following,  subject  to  (gen.)  Sn  1017  (ananuyayin) ;  J  VI.309; 
Miln   284. 

Anuyunjana  (f.)  (&  °yuBjana  nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  anuyufijati] 
application  or  devotion  to  ( — ")  Miln  178;  VvA  346 
(anuyujjanaij  wrong  spelling?) 

Anuyuiljati  [anu  4-  yufijati]  l.  to  practice,  give  oneself  up 
to  (ace),  attend,  pursue  S  1.25.  122  ("yuiijan  "in  loving 
self-devotion"  Mrs.  Rh.  D.);  III.154;  IV.104,  175;  Dh  26 
(pamadari  =  pavatteti  DhA  1.257),  247  (surameraya-pa- 
nai)  =:  sevati  bahulikaroti  DhA  111.356);  PvA  61  (kam- 
matthaoag).  —  2.  to  ask  a  question,  to  call  to  account, 
take  to  task  Vin  11.79;  Vv  33*;  ppr.  Pass,  "yunjiyamana 
PvA  192.  —  pp.  anuyutta  (q.  v.).  —  Cans,  anuyojeti  "to 
put  to",  to  address,  admonish,  exhort  DhA   lv.20. 

Anuyutta  [pp.  of  anuyufijati]  I.  applying  oneself  to,  dealing 
with,  practising,  given  to,  intent  upon  D  1.166,  167;  III. 
232  =  A  II  205  (attaparitapan'  anuyogai)  a.);  S  III. 1 53; 
IV. 104;  Sn  663  (lobhagune),  814  (methunar)  =  samayutta 
SnA  536),  972  (jhan°);'  Pug  55;  PvA  163  (jagariya°), 
206.  —  2.  following,  attending  on ;  an  attendant,  inferior, 
vassal,  in  expression  khattiya  or  raja  anuyutta  a  prince 
royal  or  a  smaller  king  (see  khattiya  3  b)  A  v.22  (v  1. 
for  T.  anuyanta,  q.  v.);  Sn  553  (=  anugamin,  sevaka 
SnA  453). 

AnuyOga  [Sk.  anuyoga,  fr.  anu  +  yuj]  l.  application,  devo- 
tion to  ( — '^),  execution,  practice  of  ( — °);  often  combd- 
with  anuyutta  in  phrase  "anuyogaq  anuyutta  =  practising, 
e.g.  Vin  1.190  (mandan'  anuyogai)  anuyutta);  D  111.II3 
(attakilamath'  anuyogai)  a.);  A  11.205  (attaparitapan'  anu- 
yogai) a.).  —  As  adj.  ( — °)  doing,  given  to,  practising 
(cp.  anuyutta).  D  1.5;  111.107;  M  1.385;  S  1.182;  111.239; 
IV.330;  V.320;  A  1.14;  111.249;  IV.460  sq.;  V.  17  sq., 
205;  J  1.90  (padhan'Snuyogakiccai));  Vv  8438  (dhamma°); 
Miln  348;  DA  I.  78,  104.  —  2.  invitation,  appeal,  ques- 
tion (cp.  anuyuiijati  2)  Miln    10  (acariyassa  °i)  datva). 

Anuyogavant  (adj.)  [anuyoga  -f  vant]  applying  oneself  to, 
full  of  application  or  zeal,  devoted   PvA  207. 

AnuyOgln  (adj.)  [fr.  anuyoga]  applying  oneself  to,  devoted 
to  ( — °)  Dh  209  (atta°  given  to  oneself,  self-concentrated). 

Anurakkhaka  (adj.)  [fr.  anurakkhati,  cp.  "rakkhin]  pre- 
serving, keeping  up  J  iv.192  (var)Sa°);  vi.l  (id.). 

Anurakkhapa  (nt.)  &  °a  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  anurakkhati]  guarding, 
protection  preservation  D  III. 225  sq.;  All.l6sq. ;  J  1. 1 33; 
Rug   12;    Dpvs  1V.24  (adj.);  VvA  32  (citta");  Sdhp  449. 

Anurakkhati  [anu  -f  rakkhati]  to  guard,  watch  over  (ace), 
preserve,  protect,  shield  Sn  149;  Dh327;  J  1.46;  Pug  12. 
—  ppr.  med.°  rakkhamana(ka)  as  adj.  Sdhp  621. 

Anurakkha  (f)  [=  anurakkhanS]  guarding,  protection,  pre- 
servation S  IV.323  (anuddaya  a.  anukampS). 

Anurakkhin  (adj.)  [fr.  anurakkhati]  guarding,  preserving, 
keeping  J   v. 24. 

Anurakkhiya  (adj.)  [f.  anurakkhati]  in  dur°  difficult  to 
guard    Vin   III.149. 

Anuranjita  [pp.  of  anu  +  raiijeti,  Caus.  of  raiij]  illumined, 
brightened,  beautified  Bu  1.45  (bySmapabha"  by  the  shine 
of  the  halo);  VvA  4  (sanihstapa"  for  sanih5pabha°). 


Anuratta 


42 


Anuvigarteti 


Anuratta  (adj.)  pp.  of  anu  +  rafij]  attached  or  devoted 
to,  fond  of,  faithful  Th  a,  446  (bhattarai));  J  1.297; 
Miln  146. 

Anuravati  [anu  -|-  ravati]  to  resound,  to  sound  after,  linger 
(of  sound)  Miln  63. 

Anuravanfi  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  anuravati]  lingering  of  the  sound, 
resounding  Miln  63. 

AnurahO  (adv.)  [anu  -{-  raho]  in  secret,  face  to  face,  private 
M  I. ay. 

Anurujjhatl  [Sk.  anurudhyate,  Pass,  of  anu  -)-  rudh]  to 
conform  oneself  to,  have  a  regard  for,  approve,  to  be 
pleased  A  1V.158;  Dhs  A  362.  —  pp.  aauruddha  (q.  v.). 

Anuruddha  [pp.  of  anurujjhati]  enggaged  in,  devoted  to; 
compliant  or  complied  with,  pleased  S  IV.71,  (ananuruddha). 

Anurupa  (adj.)  [anu  +  rupa]  suitable,  adequate,  seeming, 
fit,  Worthy;  adapted  to,  corresponding,  conform  with  ( — ") 
I  l.gi;  VI.366  (tad°);  PvA  61  (ajjhasaya°  according  to 
his  wish),  128  (id.)  78,  122,  130,  155;  etc.  Cp.  also 
patirGpa  in  same  meaning. 

Anurodati  [anu -j- rodati]  to  cry  after,  cry  for  J  Hl.l66  = 
Pv  1.12I  (dSrako  candai)  a.). 

Anurodha  [fr.  anu  -|-  rudh]  compliance,  consideration  satis- 
faction (opp.  virodha)  S  i.iii;  iv.210;  Sn  362;  Dhs 
1059;    Vbh   145  ;  DhsA   362. 

Anulapana  (f.)  [anu  4-  lapana,  lap]  scolding,  blame,  accusa- 
tion Vin  11.88  (spelt  anuUapana;  comb^  with  anuvadana 
&  anubhanana). 

Anulitta  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  anulipta,  pp.  of  anulimpati]  anointed, 
besmeared  J  1.266;   PvA  21 1. 

Anulimpati  [anu  -\-  limpati]  to  anoint,  besmear,  Miln  394 
(°limpilabba).  Caus.  ''limpeti  in  same  meaning  Miln  169, 
and  °lepeti  Milm  169  (grd.  ^lepaniya  to  be  treated  with 
ointment).  —  pp.  anulitta  (q.  v.). 

Anulimpana  (nt.)  [fr.  anulimpati]  anointing  Miln  353,  394. 

Anulepa  [fr.  anu-f-Hp]  anointing  Miln    152. 

AnuiOkin  (adj.)  [fr.  anu  +  loketi,  cp.  Sk.  &  P.  avalokin  & 
anuviloketi]  looking  (up)  at,  seeing  ( — °)  M  1. 147  (sisa"). 

Anuloma  (adj.)  [Sk.  anu  +  loma]  "with  the  hair  or  grain", 
i.  e.  in  natural  order,  suitable,  fit,  adapted  to,  adaptable, 
straight  forward  D  11.273  (ananuloma,  q.  v.)  S  IV.401 ; 
Ps  11.67,  70;  DhA  11.208.  —  nt.  direct  order,  state  of 
fitting  in,  adaptation    Miln   148. 

-na?*  insight  of  adaptation  (cp.  CfJ.  66,  68)  DhA 
11.208.  -pa^iloma  in  regular  order  &  reverse^,  forward  & 
backward  (Ep.  of  p.-iliccasamuppada,  also  in  BSk.)  Vin 
1.1 ;   A  IV.448. 

Anulomiica  (&  °ya)  (adj.)  [fr.  anuloma]  suitable,  fit,  agree- 
able; in  proper  order,  adapted  to  ( — °)  Vin  11.7  (an°); 
111.120  (an"  =  ananucchaviya);  iv.239;  A  1.106;  111.116 
s^.;  It  103  (samaiinassa°) ;  Sn  385  (pabbajita");  KhA 
243  (ananulomiy.a);  DhsA  25;   Sdhp  65. 

AnulOtneti  [v.  denom.  fr.  anuloma]  to  conform  to,  to  be 
in  accordance  with   Miln   372. 

Anu]aratta  (nt.^  [abstr.  fr.  an  -|-  ulara]  smallness,  littleness, 
insignificance  VvA  24. 

Anuvajja  (adj.)  [grd.  of  anu  +  vadati,  cp.  anuvada  &  Sk. 
avavadya]  to  be  blamed,  censurable,  worthy  of  reproach 
Sn  p.   78  (an"  =  anuvadavimutta  SnA  396). 

Anuvattalca  (adj.)  [fr.  anuvatteti]  I.  =  anupavattaka  (q.  v.) 
Th  I,  1014  (cakka°).  —  2.  following,  siding  in  with 
( — °)  Vin  lV.2i8  (ukkhittanuvattika  f.). 


Anuvattati  [Sk.  anuvartati,  anu  -f-  vatlati]  I.  to  follow, 
imitate,  follow  one's  example  (c.  ace),  to  be  obedient 
D  11.244;  Vin  11.309  (Bdhgh.);  1V.218;  J  1.125,  3°°\ 
DA  1.288;  PvA  19.  —  2.  to  practice,  execute  Pv  IV. 
7  '■'.  —  Caus.  "vatteti  (q.  v.). 

Anuvattana  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  anuvattati]  complying  with, 
conformity  with  ( — °),  compliance,  observance,  obedience 
J   1.367  (dhamma°);  v. 78. 

Anuvattin  (adj.)  [fr.  anuvattati]  following,  acting  according 
to  or  in  conformity  with  ( — °),  obedient  J  11.348  (f.  °ini); 
111.319  (id.);  Dh  86  (dhamma°);  Vv  155  (vasa"  =  anu- 
knlabhavena  vattana  sila  VvA  71);  DhA   11. 161. 

Anuvatteti  [anu  +  vatteti]  =  anupavatteti   (q.  v.)  Th  i, 

826  (dhammacakkai) :   "after  his  example  turn  the  wheel" 
Mrs.  Rh.  D.). 

Anuvadati  [Sk.  ava°;  anu  -(-  vadati]  to  blame,  censure, 
reproach  Vin  11.80,  88.  —  grd.  atiuvajja  (q.  v.). 

Anuvadana  (f)  [fr.  anuvadati]  blaming,  blame,  censure  Vin 

11.88  (anuvada  -f). 

Anuvasati  [anu  4-  vasati]  to  live  with  somebody,  to  dwell, 
inhabit  J  11.421.  Caus.  "vasetl  to  pass,  spend  (time)  J 
VI. 296.  —  pp.  "vuttha  (q.  v.). 

Anuvassat)  (adv.)  [anu  -f-  vassa]  for  one  rainy  season; 
every  rainy  season  or  year,  i.  e.  annually  C.  on  Th  I,  24. 

AnuvaSSiIca  (adj.)  [fr.  anuvassaij]  one  who  has  (just)  pas- 
sed one  rainy  season  Th  I,  24  ("scarce  have  the  rains 
gone  by"   Mrs.  Rh.  D.;  see  frs/.  p.   29  n.  2). 

AnUVaceti  [anu  +  Caus.  of  vac]  to  say  after,  to  repeat 
(words),  to  recite  or  make  recite  after  or  again  D  1.104 
(=  tehi  aiiiiesai]  vacitaij  anuvacentl  DA  1.273);  Miln  345. 
Cp.  anubhaseti. 

Anuvata'  [anu  +  va  to  blow]  a  forward  wind,  the  wind 
that  blows  from  behind,  a  favourable  wind;  °r)  adv.  with 
the  wind,  in  the  direction  of  the  wind  (opp.  pativatar)). 
A  1.226  ("pativatar));  Sdhp  425  (pativata°).  In  anuvate 
(anu  -f  vate)  at  J  11.382  "with  the  wind,  facing  te  w., 
in  front  of  the  wind"  anu  is  to  be  taken  as  prep.  c.  loc. 
&  to  be  separated  from  vate  (see  anu  A  b.). 

Anuvata-  [anu  -f-  va  to  weave  (?)  in  analogy  to  vata  from 
va  to  blow]  only  in  connection  with  the  making  of  the 
bhikkhus  garment  (civara)  "weaving  on,  supplementary 
weaving,  or  along  the  seam",  i.  e.  hem,  seam,  binding 
Vin  1.254,  297;  11.177;  1V.121  (aggala-f);  PvA  73  (anu- 
vate appabhonte  since   the  binding  was  insufficient). 

Anuvada  [fr.  anuvadati,  cp.  Sk.  anuvada  in  meaning  of 
"repetition"]  i.  blaming,  censure,  admonition  Vin  11. 5, 
32;  A  II. 121  (atta°,  para°);  Vbh  376.  —  2.  in  comb" 
yadanuvada :  talk  and  lesser  or  additional  talk,  i.  e. 
"small  talk"  (see  anu  B  IV.)  D  j.161;   M   1.368. 

-adhikarana    a    question    or    case  of  censure   Vin  11.88 
sq. ;  III. 164  (one  of  the  4  adhikaranani,  q.  v.). 

Anuvasana  (nt.)  [fr.  anuvaseti]  an  oily  enema,  an  injection 
Miln  353. 

Anuvaseti  [anu  +  vaseti,  Caus.  of  vasa'  odour,  perfume] 
to  treat  with  fragrant  oil,  i.  e.  to  make  an  injection  or 
give  an  enema  of  salubrious  oil  Miln  169;  grd.  "vasanlya 
ibid.;  pp.  °vasita  Miln   214. 

Anuvikkhitta  (adj.)  [anu  -|-  vi  -|-  khitta,  pp.  of  anu  -f 
vikkhipati]  dispersed  over  S  v. 277  sq.  (-|-  anuvisataj. 

Anuviga^eti  [anu  -|-  vi  -f-  ganeli]  to  take  care  of,  regard, 
heed,  consider  Th   I,   109. 


Anuvicarati 


43 


Anusandhi 


Anuvicarati  [.inn  -f-  vi  +  carati]  to  wander  about,  stroll 
roam  through,  explore  D  I.2J5;  J  11.128;  III. 188;  FvA 
1S9  (=-:  .Tuupaiivati).  —  Caus.  "vicareti  to  think  over  i 
(111.  to  make  one's  mind  wander  over),  to  meditate, 
ponder  (cp.  anuvicinteti);  always  conibJ  with  anuvitak- 
keti  (q.  V.)  A  1.264  (cetasa),  111.178  (dhammaij  cetasa 
a.).  —  pp.  anuvicarita  (q.  v.). 

Anuvicarita  [pp.  of  anuvicareti]  reflected,  pondered  over, 
thou>;ht  out  S  111.203  (manasa);  D.-\  1.106  (=:  anucarita). 

Anuvicara  [anu  -|-  vicara,  cf.  anuvicareti]  meditation, 
reflexion,  thought  Uhs  85  (=:  vicara). 

Anuvlclnaka  [fr.  anu  -f-  vicinati]  one  who  examines,  an 
examiner    Miln  365. 

Anuvicinteti  [anu  +  vi  -|-  cintetl]  to  think  or  ponder  over, 
to  meditate  II  11.203;  S  1203  (yoniso  "cintaya,  imper. 
"marshall  thy  thoughts  in  ordered  governance"  Mrs.  Rh.  D.; 
V.  1.  anucintaya);  Th  I,  747:  Dh  364;  It  82  (dhammaq 
^'ayai));    J   111.396;    iv.227;   v.223  (dhatnmaij   °cintayanto). 

Anuvicca  [ger.  of  anuvijjati,  for  the  regular  from  anuvijja 
prob.  through  influence  of  anu  +  i  (anu-v-icca  for  anvicca), 
cf.  anveti  &  adhicca;  &  see  anuvijjati]  having  known  or 
found  out,  knowing  well  or  thoroughly,  testing,  finding 
out  M  I  301,  361  (v.l.  '^vijja);  A  11. 3,  84;  v.88;  I)h  229 
(=  janitva  UhA  111.329);  Sn  530  (=  onuviditva  SnA  431); 
j   1.459  (=janitva  C);   111.426;  Pug.  49. 

-kara  a  thorough  investigation,  examination,  test  Vin 
1.236  (here  spelt  anuvijja)  =:  M  1.379  (=  "viditva  C.)  = 
A  IV. 1 85. 

Anuvijjaka  [fr.  anuvijja,  ger.  of  anuvijjati]  one  who  finds 
out,  an   examiner  Vin   v. 161. 

Anuvijjati  [anu  -|-  vid,  with  fusion  of  Vedic  vetti  to  know, 
and  Pass,  of  vindati  to  find  (=  vidyate)]  to  know 
thoroughly,  to  find  out,  to  trace,  to  come  to  know;  inf. 
"vijjitirj  J  111.506;  ger.  ^viditva  Sn  A  431,  also  "vijja 
&  vicca  (see  both  under  anuvicca);  grd.  anuvejja  not  to 
be  known,  unfathomable,  unknowable  M  1. 140  (Tathagato 
ananuvejjo).  —  Caus.  anuvijjapeti  to  make  some  one 
find  out  J   V.162.  —  pp.  anuvidita  (q- v.). 

Anuvijjhati  [anu  -f  vyadh]  l.  to  pierce  or  be  pierced,  to 
be  struck  or  hurt  with  (instr.)  J  vi.439  —  2.  to  be 
affected  with,  to  fall  into,  to  incur  UhA  III. 380  (apa- 
radhaq).  —  pp.  anuviddha  (q.  v.). 

Anuvitakketi  [anu  +  vi  +  takketi]  to  reflect,  think,  ponder 
over,  usually  comb<t  with  anuvicareti  D  1.119;  111.242 ; 
S  V.67  =  It   107  (anussarati +);   A   ni.383. 

Anuvidita  [pp.  of  anuvijjati]  found  out,  recognised;  one 
who  has  found  out  or  knows  well  Sn  528,  530  (=  anu- 
buddha  Sn  A  431).  Same  in  B.Sk.,  e.g.  M   Vastu  111.398. 

Anuviddha  (.idj.)  [pp.  of  anuvijjhati]  pierced,  intertwined 
or  set  with  ( — ")  VvA  278. 

Anuvidhiyatl  [cf.  Sk.  anuvidhtyate  &  adj.  anuvidhayin; 
Pass,  of  anu  -|-  vi  -)-  dhfi,  cf.  vidahali]  to  act  in  confor- 
mity with,  to  follow  (instruction)  M  11.105  =  Th  1,  875; 
S  IV.199;  J   11.98;  III.357. 

Anuvidhtyana  (f.)  [abslr.  fr.  anuvidhlyati]  acting  according 
to,  conformity   with   M   1.43. 

AnUViloketi  [anu  -f-  vi  +  lokeli;  B.Sk.  anuvilokayati]  to  look 
round  at,  look  over,  survey,  muster  M  1.339;  Sn  p.  140; 
J   1.53;   Miln  7  (lakai)),   21   (parisaij),  230. 

Anuvivatta  [anu  -{-  vivatta]  an  "after-evolution",  devolution; 
as  part  of  a  bhikkhu^s  dress:  a  sub-vivatta  (q.  v.)  Vin 
1.287  (vivatta  -f-). 


Anuvisa^a  (anu  -\-  visata,  pp.  of  anu  -f  vi  -(-  Sf]  sp'**^ 
over  S    V.277   sq.;  J   IV.102. 

Anuvuttha  [pp.  of  anuvasali,  cf.  Sk.  auusita]  living  with, 
staying,  dwelling  J   11.42  (cira");  V.445  (id.). 

Anuvejja  (adj.)  in  an'  see  anuvijjati. 

Anuvyanjana  &  anubyaRjana  (e.g.  Vin  iv.is;  J  1.12) 
(nt.)  [anu  -|-  vyanjana]  acDompanying  (i.  e.  secondary) 
attribute,  minor  or  inferior  characteristic,  supplementary 
or  additional  sign  or  mark  (cf.  mahapurisa-lakkhana)  Vin 
1.65  (abl.  anuvyanjanaso  'in  detail");  M  ill. 126;  S  iv.168; 
A  IV.279  (abl.);  v.73  sq.;  Pug  24,  58;  Miln  339;  VvA 
315 ;  Dhs.\  400. 

-gabin  taking  up  or  occupying  oneself  with  details, 
taken  up  with  lesser  or  inferior  marks  D  1.70  (cf.  MVastu 
III. 52);  111.225;  S  1V.104;  A  1. 113;  11.16,  152  sq.;  Dhs 
1345  (cf.  D/is  trsl.  351). 

Anusagyayati  [anu -f  sarj -j- yayati]  to  traverse;  to  go  up 
to,  surround,  visit  (ace.)  M  1.209  (Bhagavantaq  °itv5), 
J  IV.214  (v.l.  anuyayitva).  See  also  anuyatl  and  anuaaftSati. 

AnUSagvaCChara  (adj.;  [anu  +  sai)V°]  yearly  DhA  1.388 
(nakkhattat)).  L'sually  nt.  "ij  as  adv.  yearly,  every  year 
J  1.68;  V.99.  On   use  of  anu  in   this  comb"-  see  anu   A  a. 

Anusaiicarati  [anu  -f  saq  -f  carati]  to  walk  along,  to  go 
round  about,  to  visit  M  1. 279;  S  v. 53,  301 ;  J  I.202 ; 
111502;  PvA  279  (nagaraij).  —  pp.  anusancarita  (q.  v.). 

Anusaficarita  [pp.  of  anusaiicarati]  frequented,  visited, 
resorted  to  Miln  387. 

AnUSanceteti  [anu  -\-  sai)  -\-  ceteli]  to  set  ones  mind  on, 
concentrate,  think  over,  meditate  Pug   12. 

Anusanfiati  [either  anu  +  sai)  +  jfiS  (janSti)  or  (preferably) 
^  anusaqyati  as  short  form  of  anusat)yayati,  like  anu- 
yati  ^  anuyayali  of  anu  -|-  sai]  +  yS,  cf-  Sk.  anusaqyati 
in  same  meaning]  to  go  to,  to  visit,  inspect,  control; 
ppr.  med.  "sanfiayamana  Vin  111.43  (kammante);  inf. 
"sannatug  A  1.68.  (janapade). 

Anusata  [Sk.  anusrta,  pp.  of  anu  -|-  Sf]  sprinkled  with  ( — °), 
bestrewn,  scattered  Vv  5'  (paduraa"  magga  =  vippakinna 
VvA   36). 

Anusatthar  [n.  ag.  to  anu  -f  sag,  cf.  St.  anuiSsitr  &  P. 
satthar]  instructor,  adviser  j  IV.178  (Scariya  +).  Cp. 
anusasaka. 

Anusatthi  (f)  [Sk.  anusasti,  anu -|- sSS,  cp.  anustsana] 
admonition,  rule  instruction  J  1.241 ;  Miln  98,  172,  l86 
(dhamma°),  225,  227,  347. 

Anusandati  [Vedic  anusyandati,  anu  +  syad]  to  stream 
along  after,  to  follow,  to  be  nonnected  with.  Thus  to  be 
read  at  Miln  63  for  anusandahati  (anuravaii  -|- ;  of  sound), 
while  at  A  iv.47  the  reading  is  to  be  corrected  to  anu- 
sandahati. 

Anusandahati  [anu  +  sai)  -)-  dha,  cf.  Vedic  abhi  -f  sag  -f- 
dha]  to  direct  upon,  to  apply  to  A  iv.47  sq.  (cittaq 
samapattiyS;  so  to  be  read  with  v.l.  for  anusandati); 
Miln  63  (but  here  prob.  to  be  read  as  anuaandall,  q.r,), 

Anusandhanata  (f.)  [=  anusandhi]  application,  adjuiting 
Dhs  8  (cilassa). 

Anusandhi  (f)  [fr.  anu  +  sag  +dhl]  connection,  (logical) 
conclusion,  application  DA  1. 122  (where  3  kinds  are 
enumd.,  viz.  puccha",  ajjhasaya",  yath5°);  Nett  14  (puc- 
chato;  Hard.,  in  Index  "complete  cessation"?!).  Esp.  freq. 
in  (Jataka)  phrase  anusandhii)  ghatetl  "to  form  the  con- 
nection", to  draw  the  conclusion,  to  show  the  application 
of  the  story  or  point  out  its  maxim  J  i.io6;  308;  DhA 
11.40,  47;  etc. 


Anusampavankata 


44 


Anu.sota° 


Anusampavankata  (f.)  [anu  -|-  saq  +  pavankata;  is  reading 
coriectpj  disputing,  quarelling  (?)  Vin  n. 88  (under  anuvad- 
adhikarana). 

Aniisaya  [anu  +  si,  set!  Sk.  anusaya  has  a  diff.  meaning] 
(see  kvu  trsl.  234  n.  2  and  Cpd.  172  n.  2).  Bent,  bias, 
proclivity,  the  persistancc  of  a  dormant  or  latent  dispo- 
sition, predisposition,  tendency.  Always  in  bad  sense.  In 
the  oldect  texts  the  word  usually  occurs  absolutely,  with- 
out mention  of  the  cause  or  direction  of  the  bias.  So 
Sn.  14  =  369,  545;  M.  111.31;  S.  III. 130,  IV. 33,  V.28 
236;  A.  1.44;  11.157;  111.74,  246,  443.  Or  in  the  triplet 
obstinacy,  prejudice  and  bias  (adbitthanabhinivesanu- 
saya)  S.  11.17;  ni.io,  135,  161;  A.  v.iii.  Occusionally  a 
source  of  the  bias  il  mentioned.  Thns  pride  at  S.  1.188; 
11.252  ff.,  275;  111.80,  103,  169,  253;  IV.41,  197;  A  1. 132, 
IV. 70  doubt  at  M.  1.483  —  ignorance  lust  and  hatred 
at  S  IV.205,  M  III. 285.  At  D  III. 254,  282;  S  V.60;  and 
A  IV. 9.  we  have  a  list  of  seven  anusaya's,  the  above 
fine  and  delusion  and  craving  for  rebirth.  Hence-forward 
these  lists  govern  the  connotation  of  the  word;  but  it 
would  be  wrong  to  put  that  connotation  back  into  the 
earlier  passages.  Later  referenses  are  Ps  1.26,  70  flf.,  123, 
130,  195;  11.36,  84,  94,  158;  Pug  21;  Vbh  340,  383, 
356;   Kvu   405   ff.  Dpvs  1.42. 

AnilSaylta  [pp.  of  anuseti,  anu  +  Sf]  dormant,  only  in 
comb"-  digharatta°  latent  so  long  Th  i,  768;  Sn  355, 
649.  Cp.  anusaya  &  anusayin. 

Anusayin  (adj.)  [fr.  anusaya]  D  11.283  (""e  digharalta"), 
'for  me,  so  long  obsessed  (with  doubts)".  The  reading  is 
uncertain. 

Anusaratl  [anu  -f  sf]  to  follow,  conform  oneself  to  S  iv. 
303  (phalai]  anusarissati  BB,  but  balar)  anupadassati  SS 
perhaps  to  be  preferred).  —  Caus.  anusareti  to  bring 
together  with,  to  send  up  to  or  against  Miln  36  (afiiiam- 
aiinaij   a.  anupeseti). 

Anusavatl  at  S  n.54  (asava  na  a.;  v.  I.  anusayanti)  &  iv. 
188  (akusala  dhamma  na  a.;  v.  1.  anusenti)  should  prefer- 
ably be  read  anusayati:   see  anuseti  2. 

Anusahagata  (adj.)  having  a  residium,  accompanied  by  a 
minimum  of..  S  111.130;  Kvu  81,  see  anu°. 

AnUSayika  (adj.)  [fr.  anusaya]  attached  to  one,  i.e.  inherent, 
chronic  (of  disease)  M  n.7.0  (abadha,  v.  1.  BB  anussayika); 
DhA  1.431   (roga). 

Anusara  [fr.  anu  -|-  sf]  "going  along  with",  following, 
conformity.  Only  in  obi.  eases  ( — °)  anusarena  (instr.) 
in  consequence  of,  in  accordance  with,  according  to  J  1.8; 
PvA   187  (tad  ),  227;  and  anusarato  (abl.)  id.  Sdhp  91. 

Anusaiin  ( — °)  (adj.)  [fr.  anu  -)-  sarati]  following,  striving 
after,  acting  in  accordance  with,  living  up  to  or  after. 
Freq.  in  formula  dhammanusarin  saddhanusarin  living 
in  conformity  with  the  Norm  &  the  Faith  D  111.254;  M 
1.142,  479;  S  III. 225;  V.200  sq.;  A  1.74;  IV. 10;  Pug 
15.  —  Cp.  also  S  1.15  (bhavasola");  iv.128  (id.);  J  vi.444 
(panditassa"  ^  veyyavaccakara  C);  Sdhp   528  (altha"). 

Anusareti  see  anusarati. 

Anusasaka  [fr.  anusSsati]  adviser,  instructor,  counsellor  J 
11.105;   ^'''d   186,  217,  264.  Cp.  anusatthar. 

>'AnUSasati  [Vedic  anusasati,  anu -f- sSs]  I.  to  advise,  ad- 
monish, instruct  in  or  give  advice  upon  (c.  ace.)  to  exhort 
to  Vin  1.83;  D  1. 135;  11.154;  Dh  77,  159  (aiiiiajj);  J 
VI. 368;  cp.  i.io';  Pv  11.68;  PvA  148.  —  grd.  anusasiya 
Vin  1.59;  and  °sasitabba  DhA  111.99.  —  Pass  sasiyati 
Vin  11.200;  Miln  186.  —  2.  to  rule,  govern  (ace.)  ad- 
minister to  (dat.)  S  1.236  =  Sn  1002  (pathaviq  dhammena- 
m-anusasali,  of  a  Cakkavattin) ;  J  11.2;  VI. 517  (rajjassa  = 


rajjar)  C,  i.e.  take  care  of)  DA  1.246  (read  '"sasantena) i 
PvA  161  (rajjar)).  —  pp.  anusiftha  (q.  v.);  cp.  anusatthar, 
anusalthi  &  ovadati. 

Anusasana  (nt.)  [Vedic  anusasana,  fr.  anu  -f-  sfis]  advice, 
instruction,  admonitioii  D  III. 107;  A  1.292  ("patihariya, 
cp.  anusasani);  Miln   359. 

AnUSasani  (f.)  [fr.  anusasati,  cp.  anusasana]  instruction, 
teaching,  commandment,  order  S  v.  108;  A  11. 147;  111.87; 
V.24  sq.,  49,  338;  J  V.113;  Th  2,  172,  180;  Pv  111.7O; 
ThA    162;  VvA    19,  80,  81. 

-patihariya  (anusasani")  the  miracle  of  teaching,  the 
wonder  worked  by  the  commandments  (of  the  Buddha) 
Vin  11.200;  D  1. 212,  214;  111.220;  A  1.170;  v.327;J 
111.323;  Ps  11.227  sq. 

Anusikkhatl  [Vedic  anusiksati ;  anu  -)-  Desid.  of  sak]  to 
learn  of  somebody  (gen.);  to  follow  one's  example,  to 
imitate  Vin  11.201  (ppr.  med.  "amSna) ;  S  1235;  A  IV. 
282,  286,  323;  Sn  294  (vattai],  cp.  RV  111.59,  2:  vratena 
siksati),  934;  J  1.89;  11.98;  111.315;  V.334;  VI.62;  Th  1, 
963;  Miln  61.  —  Caus  anusikkhapeti  to  teach  [=  Sk. 
anusiksayati]   Miln  352. 

Anusikkhin  (adj.)  [fr.  anusikhati]  studying,  learning  M  i. 
100;  Dh  226  (ahoratta"  r=  diva  ca  rattin  ca  tisso  sikkha 
sikkhamana  DhA   111.324). 

Anusittha  (Vedic  anusista,  pp.  of  anus.-isati]  instructed,  ad- 
monished, advised;  ordered,  commanded  M  11.96;  J  1.226; 
Pv  11.81';   Miln  284,  349. 

Anusibbati  [anu  -|-  sibbati,  siv  to  sew]  to  interweave  Vin 
111.336  (introd.   to  Sam.  Pas.). 

Anusuoatl  [anu  +  sru]  to  hear;  pret.  anassurj  [.Sk.  an- 
vasruvai)]   1  heard  M  1.333. 

Anusumbhatl  [anu  -|-  sumbhati  (sobloxti).;  subh  or  (Vetlic,) 
sumbh]   to  adorn,  embellish,  prepare  J  VI.76. 


Anusuyyaq 

anasuyyar). 


[cp.    Sk.    anasuyaq]    readimg    at    J    111.27,    toe 


Anusuyyaka  (adj.)  [an -l-iusuyyaka]  not  eoviotjj;,  not  jealous 

Sn    325    (=  usuyyaviganiena  a.  Sn.X   332);  J   11.192  (v.  I. 
anussuyyaka);  V.112. 

AnUSet|U  [anu  +  setthi]  u  an  under-setthi  (hanker,  mer- 
chant) J  V.384  (see  anu  B  ill.  a).  —  2.  in  rsSupl.  cpd. 
setthanasettbi  (see  anu  B  iv)  "bankers  &  lesser \bankers", 
i.e.'  all  kinds  of  well-to-do  families  J  VI. 331. 

Anuseti  [anu  -)-  seti.  cp.  Sk.  .tinusayate  or°  sete,  from  si] 
to  "lie  down  with",  i.e.  (l)  trs.  to  dwell  on, -barp  on 
(an  idea)  S  11.65 ;  111.36;  IV..308.  —  2.  (of  the  idea)  to 
obsess,  to  fill  tie  mind  persistently,  to  lie  dormanl  &  be 
continually  cropping  up.  M  1.40,  108,  433;  S  11,54  (so 
read  with  SS  for  anusavanti)  iv.188;  A  1.283;  n>-246; 
Pug  32,  48.  —  pp.   anusayita  (q.  v.). 

AnuSOCati  [anu  +  socatij  to  mourn  for,  to  bewail  .Su  S5 1 
(aljtaij  na  a.;  cp.  Nd'   222);  Pv  1.12';  11.68;  PvA  95. 

AnuSOCana  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  anusocatjj  bewailing,  mourning 
PvA  65. 

AnuSOta°  [anu  +  sota,  in  "r)  as  adv.  or  ace.  to  cxpl"-  under 
anu  A  a.]  in  anusotai]  (adv.)  along  the  stream  or  cur- 
rent, down-stream  A  11. u;  J  1.70  (opp.  patisotag  against 
the  stream);   PvA    169  (Gangaya  a.  agacchanto). 

-gamin  "one  who  follows  the  stream",  i.  e.  giving  way 
to  ones  inclinations,  following  ones  will  A  11.5,  6  (opp. 
pati°);  Sn.  319  (=  sotaq  anugacchanto  Sn  A  33°);  Pug  62. 


Anussati 


45 


Anela 


Anussati  (f)  [Sk.  anusmrti,  fr.  anu  +  SHlf,  cp.  sati] 
remembrance,  recollection,  thinking  of,  mindfulness.  A 
late  list  of  subjects  to  be  kept  in  mind  comprises  six 
anussati-tthanani,  viz.  Buddha°,  Dhamma°,  Sangha", 
sila",  caga",  devata",  i.  e.  proper  attention  to  the  Buddha, 
the  Doctrines,  the  Church,  to  morality,  charity,  the  gods. 
Thus  at  D  111.250,  280  (cp.  A  l.2it);  A  111.284,  3'2sq., 
452;  V.329  sq.;  Ps  1.23.  Expanded  to  10  subjects  (the 
above  plus  anapana-sati,  marana-sati,  kayagata-sati, 
upasamaoussati)  at  A  1.30,  42  (cp.  I.al.  Vist  34).  I-"or 
other  references  see  D  l.8i;  S  v.67  =  It  107  (anussarana 
at  latter  pass,);  A  Hi. 284,  325,  452.  Ps  1.48,  95,  186; 
Pug  25,  60;  Dhs  14,  23,  1350  (anussati  here  to  be  corr. 
to  asali,  see  BAs.  trsl.  351);  Sdhp.  225,  231,  482.  See 
also  anuttariya  (anussat-anultariya). 

AnuSSada  (^dj.)  [an  -|~  ussada  without  haughtiness  Sn  624 
(vv.  U.  auusaddha  &  anussuda;  Sn  A  467  expl"-  by  tanha 
ussadabhav.i)  =  Dh  400  (which  pass,  has  anussuta;  v.l. 
K.B.  anussada;  Dh.\iv.i65  expl^  with  tanha-ussavabhava, 
vv.  11.  "uss.tda") ;  It  97  (w.  11.  anussata  &  anussara). 

Anussarana  (nt.)  [abstr.  to  anussarati]  remembrance,  me- 
mory, recollection  It  107  (=  anussati  at  id.  p.  S  v.67); 
PvA  25,  29. 

Anussarati  [Vedic  anusmarati,  anu  +  Smf]  to  remember^ 
recollect,  have  memory  of  (ace),  bear  in  mind;  be  aware 
of  Dll.8,  53,  54  (jatito  etc.);  S  111.86  sq.  (pubbenivasaij); 
v.67  (dhammaij  a.  anuvitakketi),  303  (kappasahassaq); 
A  1.25,  164  (pubbeuivasari),  207  (Tathagatar),  Dhammar) 
etc.);  111.2S5  (id.),  323  (uivasai)),  418;  v.34,  38,  132, 
•99i  336  (kalyanamitte);  It  82  (dhammnij),  98  (pubbeni- 
vasai));  J  1.167;  "-in;  Dh  364;  Pv  !.5»;  Pug  60;  Sdhp 
580,  587;  DA  1.257;  KhA  213;  DhA  11.84;  'V.95;  PvA 
29,  53,  69,  79,  107.  —  pp.  anussarita  (see  anussaritar). 
—  Caus  anvissarapeti  to  remind  someone,  to  call  to 
mind  J   11.147 

Anussaritar  [n.  ag.  to  anussarita,  pp.  of  anussarati]  one 
who  recollects  or  remembers  S  v. 197,  225  (saritar+); 
A   V.25,  28. 

Anussava  [anu  +  sava  fr.  sni,  cp.  Vedic  sravas  nt.]  hear- 
say, report,  tradition  M  1520;  11.21 1 ;  S  11.115;  'V.138; 
A  1.26;  J  1.158  (with  rcf.  to  part,  kira  =  annussav'atthe 
nipato;  so  also  at  VvA  322,  cf.  anussavana);  11.396,430 
(id.);  IV. 441 ;  instr.  "ena  from  hearsay,  by  report  A11.191 
(cf.  itihitihaij). 

Anussavana  (nt.)  [anu+savana  fr.  ^ru]  =  anussava  PvA 
103   (kira-saddo  anussavane,  from  hearsay). 

AnilSSavika  (adj.)  [fr.  anussava]  "belonging  to  hearsay", 
traditional ;  one  who  is  familiar  with  tradition  or  who 
learns  from  hearsay  M  1.520;  11.211.  Cp.  anussutika. 

AnUSSavaka  [fr.  anussaveti]  one  who  proclaims  or  announces, 
a  speaker  (of  a  kammavaca)  Vin  1.74. 

Anussavana  (nt.)  &  °a  (f.)  [fr.  anussaveti]  a  proclamation 
Vin  1. 317,  340;  V.170,   186,  202  sq. 

AniiSSavita  [pp.  of  anussaveti]  proclaimed,  announced 
Vin  1.103. 

Anussaveti  [anu  -)-  saveti,  Caus.  of  gru,  cp.  B.Sk.  anusra- 
vayati  "to  proclaim  aloud  the  guilt  of  a  criminal"  AvS. 
1.102;  II. 1 82]  to  cause  to  be  heard  or  sound;  to  proclaim, 
utter  speak  out  Vin  1.103  ("ssaviyamana  ppr.  Pass.); 
11.48  (soddai)  a.).  —  pp.  anussavita. 

Anussuka  (adj.)  [an -|- ussuka]  free  from  greed  Dh  199; 
cf.    anussukin    v.  I.  D  111.47,  s'*"  anissukin  and  apalasin. 

Anussukita  [an  -f  ussuk°]  VvA  74  &  anussukin  Pug  23 
=  anussuka. 


Anussuta'  (adj.)  [an  +  ussuta,  ud  +  Sf]  ^^ree  ffo™  lost 
Dh  400  (=  ussavabhSvena  anussuta  C).  See  also  anussada. 

Anussuta^  [anu  -\-  suta,  pp.  of  sni]  heard  of;  only  in  cpd. 
ananussuta  unheard  of  S  11.9;  Pug  14. 

Anussutika  (adj.)  [fr.  anu  -f-  sru,  cp.  anussavika]  according 
to  liadition  or  report^  one  who  goes  by  or  learns  from 
hearsay   DA  1.106,   107. 

Anussuyyaka  see  anusuyyaka. 

Anuhasatl  [anu  -|-  hasati]  to  laugh  at,  to  ridicnle  DA  1.256. 

Anuhirati  [for  '  hariyati,  anu  -\-  hf]  to  be  held  up  over, 
ppr.  anuhirainana  D  11. 15  (w.  11.  v.  1.  anubhiram"; 
glosses  B.  K.  anudhariyam",  cp.  Trenckner,  Notes  79). 

Anuna  (adj.)  [Vedic  anuna,  an  +  ana]  not  lacking,  entire, 
complete,  without  deficiency  J  VI273;  Dpvs  v. 52;  Miln 
226;  DA  1.248  (+  paripura,  expW  by  anavaya). 

Anunaka  =  anuna  Dpvs  iv.34. 

Anunata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  anuna]  completeness  Cp.  111.6''. 

Anupa  (adj.)  [Vedic  anupa,  anu  -|-  ap:  see  apa,  orig.  along- 
side of  water]  watery,  moist;  watery  land,  lowland  J.  iv.358 
(anopa  T;  anupa  C.  p.  359),  381  (°khetta);  Miln  129 
(=khetta). 

Anupghata  [metrically  for  ,inupa°]  not  killing,  not  mur- 
dering. Dh  185  (=  anupahananan  c^eva  anupaghatanan 
ca  DhA  III. 238). 

Anupadhika  for  anu°  in  metre  Sn  1057,  see  upadhi. 

Anupanahln  (adj.)  [an  -f-  upanahin.  with  u  metri  causa] 
not  bearing  ill-will,  not  angry  with  J   iv.463. 

AnQpama  at  It  122  is  metric  reading  for  anupama  (see 
upama). 

Anupalitta  (adj.)  [an  +  upalitta,  with  a  in  metre]  free 
from  taint,  unstained,  unsmeared  Sn  211,  392,  468,  790, 
845;  Dh  353;  cf.  Nd'   90   and  DhA  iv.72. 

Anupavada  [an  -|-  upavada,  with  metrically  lengthened  u] 
not  grumbling,  not  finding  fault  Dh  185  (^=  anupavadanaii 
c'  eva  anupavadapanaii  ca  DhA  111.238). 

Anuhata  (adj.)  [pp.  of  an  +  uhaniiati,  ud  -\-  han]  not 
rooted  out,  not  removed  or  destroyed  Th  I,  223  =  Nd' 
97* ;  Dh  338  (^  asamucchinna  DhA  iv.48). 

Aneka  (adj.)  (usually  " — )  [an  =  eka]  not  one,  i.  e.  many, 
various;  countless,  numberless  It  99  (saqvattakappa  count- 
less aeons);  Sn  688  (°sakhs);  Dh  153  (''jatisara);  J  IV.2 ; 
vi.366. 

-pariyayena  (instr.)  in  many  ways  Vin  1.16;  Sn  p.  15. 
-rupa  various,  manifold  Sn  1049,  1079,  1082;  Nd'  54 
(=  anekavidha).  -vidha  manifold  Nd'  54;  D.'V  1.103. 
-vihita  various,  manifold  D  1.12,  13,  178:  It  98;  Pug 
55;   DA  1. 103  (:=  anekavidha). 

Anekagsa  (f.)  [an -f  ekaqsa]   doubt  Nd'   1. 

Anekagsikata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  anekaijsa  +  kata]  uncertainty, 
doubtfulness  Miln  93. 

Aneja  (adj.)  [an  +  eja]  free  from  desires  or  lust  D  H.157; 
Sn  920,  1043,  iioi,  IH2;  It  91  (opp.  ejSnuga  Nd' 
353  ^=  Nd'  55;  Dh  414  (:=  tanhaya  abhavena  DhA  IV. 
194),  422;  Pv   IV. l'"  (  nittanha  PvA  230). 

Anedha(adj.)  [an  +  edha]  without  fuel  J  iv.26  (=anindhana). 

Ane|a  (adj.)  [an  -f  e!a  =  ena,  see  nela  &  cp.  BSk.  eda 
(muka);  Vedic  ancna]  faultless,  pure;  only  in  foil.  cpds. : 
"gala  free  from  the  dripping  or  oozing  of  impurity  (thus 


Anela 


46 


Anta 


expl''-  at  DA  1.282 ,  viz.  elagalana-virahita),  but  more 
likely  in  lit.  meaning  "having  a  pure  or  clear  throat' 
or,  of  vaca  speech ;  "clearly  enunciated"  (thus  Mrs.  Kh.  U. 
at  Kindred  Sayings  I.241)  Vin  1. 197  =  D  I.II4  ^  S 
1.189;  A  11-51,  97;  111.114,  195.  Cp.  also  M  \'aslu  111. 
322.  —  "miiga  same  as  prec.  "having  a  clear  throat', 
i.  e.  not  dumb,  fig.  clever,  skilled  D  111.265  '1  ^"  7°  (= 
alalamukha  SnA   124),  cp.  Nd-  259. 

Ane|aka  (adj.)  (cp.  BSk.  anedaka,  e.g.  Av.  S.  1.187,  243; 
M  Vaslu  1.339;  111.322]:=  .inela,  pure,  clear  M  11.5  ;  J  vi.529. 

Anesana  (f.)  [an  -f-  esana]  impropriety  S  11.194;  J  11-86; 
IV. 381;  Miln  343,  401;  DA  1.169;  LihA  iv.34:  Sdlip 
392,  427. 

Ano-  is  a  frequent  form  of  comp»-  an-ava,  sec  ava. 

Anoka  (nt.)  [an  4-  oka]  houselessness,  a  houseless  state, 
fig  freedom  from  worldliness  or  attachment  to  life,  single- 
ness S  V.24  ^  A  V.232  =  Dh  87  (oka  anokaij  .igamma).  — 
adj.  homeless,  free  from  attachment  S  1.17b;  Uh  87  (= 
analaya  DhA  11.162);  Sn  966  (adj.;  expld  at  Ndi  487 
by  abhisankhara-sahagatassa  vinfianassa  okasaq  na  karoti, 
&  at  SqA  573  by  abhisankhara-viiinan"'  adinar)  anokasa- 
bhuta). 

-sarin  living  in  a  houseless  state,  fig.  being  free  from 
wordly  attachment  S  111.10  =  Nd'  197:  Sn  62S  (=:  ana- 
laya-carin  SnA  468);  Ud  32;  Dh  404  (v.  1.  anokka"); 
DhA  1V.174  (=  analaya-carin);  Miln  386. 

Anogha  in  anogha-tinna  see  ogha. 

Anojaka  =  anoja  Vv  35<  (=  VvA  161,  where  classed 
with  yodhika  bandhujivaka). 

Anojagghati  at  D  1.91   is  v.  1.  for  anujagghati. 

Anoja  (f.)  [*Sk.  anuja]  a  kind  of  shrub  or  tree  with  red 
flowers  J  VI.536  (korandaka +) ;  usually  in  cpd.  anoja- 
puppha  the  a.  flower,  used  for  wreaths  etc.  J  1.9  ('do?  la, 
a  garland  of  a  flowers);  vi.227  (id.);  DhA  11. 116  (^can- 
gotaka). 

Anottappa  (nt.)  [an  +  ottappa]  recklessness,  hardness  D 
111.21 2  ;  It  34  (ahirika  +);  Pug  20;  Dhs  365.  Cp.  anottapin. 

Anottapln  &  Anottappin   (adj.)  [fr.  anottappa]   not  afraid  I 
of  sin,  bold,  reckless,  shameless  D  111.252,  282  (pp;  ahir- 
ika); Sn   133  (p;  ahirika +);  It  27,   115  (anatapin  anot-  | 
tappin,  vv.  11.   anottapin);  Pug  .?o,  24'.  1 

Anodaka  (adj.)  [an  -|-  udaka]  without  water,  dry  J   1.307 ;    I 
DhA   1.52  ;  Sdhp  443. 

AnodiSSaka  (adj.)  [an  4-  odissa  -f-  ka]  unrestricted,  without 
exception,    general,  universal;  only  in  cpd.  "vasena  uni- 
versally,   thoroughly    (with    ref.    to   metta)  J   1.81;   11146;    : 
VvA   97    (in   general;   opp.    odissaka-vasena).  See  also    I 
Mrs.  Rh.  D.  Psalms  of  the  Brethren  p.   5   n.   i.  ! 

Anonamati    [an  -p  onamati]    not    to  bend,  to  be  inflexible,    1 
in  foil,  expressions:  anonamaka  (nt.)  not  stooping  DhA 
11.136;   auonaraanto   (ppr.)   not  bending  I)   11.17  =  111. 
•43;  anonami-danda  (for  anonamiya°)  an  inflexible  stick 
Miln  238  (anonaini°  T,  hut  anonami°  vv.  II.,  see  Miln  427). 

Anopa  see  anupa. 

Anoma  (adj.)  (only  ° — )  [art  -}-  oma]  not  inferior,  superior, 
perfect,  supreme,  in  foil.  cpds. 

-guna  supreme  virtue  dA  1.288.  -dassika  of  superior 
beauty  Vv  20',  VvA  103  (both  as  v.  1. ;  T.  anuma°);  Vv 
43'.  -dassin  one  who  has  supreme  knowledge;  of  un- 
excelled wisdom  (Name  of  a  Buddha)  J  1.228.  -nama  of 
perfect  name  S  1.33  ("by  name  the  Peerless"  Mrs.  Rh.  I).), 
235;  Sn  153,  177  (cp.  SnA  200).  -nikkama  of  perfect 
energy    Vv    64^'    (=  paripunna-viriyat.iya    a.    Vv.\    284). 


-paiina  of  lofty  or  supreme  wisdom  (Kp.  of  the  Buddha) 
Sn  343.  352  (=  niahapanna  Sn.\  347);  Th  2,  522  (= 
paripunna-panna  Th.\  296),  Dh.\  1. 31.  -vanna  of  excel- 
lent colour  Sn  686  J  vi.202,  -viriya  of  supreme  exertion 
or  energy  Sn  353. 

Anomajjati  [aim  -|-  ava  4-  majjati,  mrj]  tu  rub  along  over, 
to  stroke,  only  in  phrase  gattani  panina  a.  to  rub  over 
one's  limbs  with  the  hand  .M   1.80,   509;   S   v. 216. 

Anorapara  (adj  )  [an  -(-  ora  4-  para]  having  (a  shore) 
neither  on   this  side  nor  beyond   Miln   319. 

Anoramati  [an  4-  ava  ~  ram]  not  to  stop,  to  continue  J 
111.4S7;   Dh.\  111.9  (gsr-  ^itva  continually). 

Anovassa  (nt.)  [an  -|-  ovassa;  cp.  Sk.  auavavar^ana]  absence 
uf  rain,  drought  I   \'.3I7  (v.  1.  BB  for  anvavassa  T. ;  ij.  v.). 

AnOVaSSaka  (adj.)  [an  -f  ovassaka]  sheltered  from  the  raiu, 
dry  Vin  11.211;  IV. 272:  J  1.172;  1150;  !ll.7i;  DhA  11. 
263;  ThA   188. 

Anosita  (adj.)  [an  4-  ava  4-  sita,  pp.  of  sa]  not  inhabited 
(by),  not  accessible  (to)  Sn  937  (=  anajjhositaij  Ndi  441; 
jaradihi  anajjhavutthai)  thanar)  SnA   566). 

Anta'  [Vedic  anta;  Goih.  audeis  ^  Ohg.  anti  =:  E.  end; 
cp.  also  Lat.  antiae  forehead  (;  E.  anller),  and  the  prep, 
anti  opposite,  antika  near  ^  I,at.  ante;  Gr.  ivr/  &  'aaix 
opposite;  Goth.,  Ags.  and:  Ger.  ant-;  orig.  the  opposite 
(i.  e.  what  stands  ngainst  or  faces  the  starting-point)]. 
I.  end,  finish,  goal  S  IV. 368  (of  Nibliana):  Sn  467;  J 
11.159.  antarj  karoti  to  niaUe  an  end  (of)  6n  283.  512; 
Dh  275,  cp.  antakara,  °kiriya.  —  loc.  ante  at  the  end 
of,  immediately  after  J  1.203  (^''jay°).  —  2.  limit,  border, 
edge  Vin  1.47;  Dh  305  (van°) ;  J  111.188.  —  3.  side: 
see  ekamantai)  (on  one  side,  aside).  —  4.  opposite  side, 
opposite,  counterpart;  pi.  parts,  contrasts,  extremes;  thus 
also  used  as  "constituent,  prisciple"  (in  tayo  &  cattaro 
anta;  or  does  it  belong  to  anta-  2.  in  this  meaning? 
Cp.  ekantai]  extremely,  under  anta'):  dve  anta  (two 
extremes)  Vin  no;  S  II  17;  111.135.  ubho  anta  (both 
sides)  Vin  i.io;  S  11.17;  J  1-8;  Nd'  109.  eko,  dutiyo 
anlo  (contrasts)  Nd'  52.  As  tayo  anta  or  principles  (?), 
viz.  sakkaya,  s.-samudaya,  s.-nirodha  D  111.216,  cp.  A  ill. 
401 ;  as  cattaro,  viz.  the  3  mentioned  plus  s.-nirodha- 
gamini-patipada  at  S  11H57.  Interpreted  by  Morris  as 
"goal"  {jf  P  TS.  1S94,  70).  —  Often  pleonastically,  to 
be  expld  as  a  "pars  pro  toto"  figure,  like  kammanta 
(q.  V.)  the  end  of  the  work,  i.  e.  the  whole  work  (cp.  E. 
sea-side,  coanlry-side);  vananta  the  border  of  the. wood  = 
the  woods  Dh  305;  Pv  11.3'"  (expH  by  vana  FvA  86; 
same  use  in  BSk.,  vananta  e.g.  at  Jtm  V1.21;  cp.  also 
gramanta  Av.  S.  1.210);  suttanta  (q.v.),  etc.  Cp.  akasanta 
J  VI. 89  &:  the  pleonastic  use  of  patha.  -ananta  (n.)  no 
end,  infinitude;  (adj.)  endless,  corresponds  either  to  Sk. 
anta  or  antya,  see  anta-. 

-ananta  end  &  no  end,  or  finite  and  endless,  D  1.22; 
DA  1. 1 1 5.  -anantika  (holding  views  of.  or  talking  about) 
finiteness  and  infinitude  D  1.22  (see  expl"-  at  DA  1.115); 
S  111.214,  258  sq.;  Ps  1.155.  -kara  putting  an  end  to, 
(n.)  a  deliverer,  saviour;  usually  in  phrase  dukkhass'a. 
(of  the  Buddha)  M  1.48,  53:;  A  11.2;  111.400  sq. ;  Th  i, 
195;    It   18;    Sn  32,  337.  539;    Pug  71.   In  other  comb"- 

A  11.163  (^'iji^y');  Sn   II 4S  (pafihan"). kiriya  putting 

an  end  to,  ending,  relief,  extirpation;  always  used  with 
ref.  to  dukkha  S  iv.93;  It  89;  Sn  454,  725;  DhA  iv.45. 
-gata  =  antagu  Nd^  436  (-|- kotigata).  -gabika  (f.),  viz. 
ditthi,  is  an  attribute  of  niicchaditthi,  i.  e.  heretical  doc- 
trine. The  meaning  of  anta  in  this  comb"-  is  not  quite 
clear:  either  "holding  (wrong)  principles  (goals,  Morris)", 
viz.  the  3  as  specified  above  4  under  tayo  anta  (thus 
Morris  j'P  TS.  1884,  70),  or  "taking  extreme  sides,  i.  e. 
extremist",  or  "wrong,  opposite  (=  antya,  see  anta^y 
(thus  Kern,  Ton:  s.  v.)  Vin  1.172;  D  111.45,  4^  (an°); 
S  1.154;    .\  1.154;   11.240;    111.130;   Ps  1.151   sq.  -gu  one 


Anta 


47 


Antaradhayati 


who  has  gone  to  the  end,  one  who  has  gone  through  or 
overcome  (dukkha)  A  IV. 254,  258,  26a;  Sn  401  (=  vatta- 
dukkhassa  antagata);  539.  -ruddhi  at  J  vi.8  is  doubtful 
reading  (antaruci?).  -Vat^i  rimmed  circumference  J  HI. 159. 
-sahnin  being  conscious  of  an  end  (of  the  world)  D  1.22, 
cp.  DA   I  115. 

Anta-  (adj.)  [Vedic  antya]  I.  having  an  end,  belonging  to 
the  end;  only  in  neg.  anaata  endless,  infinite,  boundless 
(opp.  antavant);  which  may  be  taken  as  equal  to  anta' 
(corresp.  with  Sk.  anta  (adj.)  or  antya;  also  in  doublet 
anaiica,  see  akas'anaiica  and  viniian'ananca);  D  1.23,  34 
=  D  111.224,  262  sq.;  Sn  468  ("paufia);  Dh  179,  180 
('gocara  having  an  unlimited  range  of  mental  vision,  cp. 
Dh.\  III. 197);  J  I.I 78.  —  2.  extreme,  last,  worst  J  11.440 
(C.  hloa,  lamaka);  see  also  anta'  4.  —  ace.  as  adv.  in 
ekantai]  extremely,  very  much,  "utterly"  Dh  22S  etc. 
See  eka. 

Anta'  (nt.)  [Vedic  antra,  conlr.  fr.  antara  inner  =z  Lat. 
inlerus,  Gr.  'f/rifx  intestines]  the  lower  intestine,  bowels, 
mesentery  It  89;  J  1.66,  260  (°vaddhi-mar|sa  etc.);  Vism 
258;  DhA  1.80. 

-gan^hi  twisting  of  the  bowels,  lit.  "a  knot  in  the 
intestines"  Vin  1.275  (°abadha).  -guna  [see  gu^ia- ^  gula'] 
the  intestinal  tract,  the  bowels  S  11,270;  A  IV. 132;  Kh 
in.  =  Miln  26;  Vism  42;  KhA  57.  -mukha  the  anus 
J  IV.402.  -vatti  =  °guna  Vism   258. 

Antaka  [Vedic  antaka]  being  at  the  end,  or  making  an 
end,  Ep.  of  Death  or  Mara  Vin  1.21;  S  1.72;  Th  2,  59 
(expl<i  by  ThA  65  as  lamaka  va  Mara,  thus  taken  = 
anta'i);  Dh  48  (^  marana-sankhato  antako  DhA  11.366), 
288  {=  marana  DhA  in. 434). 

Antamaso  (adv.)  [orig.  abl.  of  antama,  *Sk.  antamasah ; 
cp.  BSk.  antasah  as  same  formation  fr.  anta,  io  same 
meaning  ("even")  Av.  S.  1. 314;  Divy  161]  even  Vin  III. 
260;  IV.123;  D  1.168;  M  III. 127;  A  V.195;  J  11.129; 
DA  1.170;  SnA  35;  VvA   155. 

Antara  (adj.)  [Vedic  antara,  cp.  Gr.  '/KTfpa  =  Sk.  antra 
(see  anta'),  Lat.  interus  fr.  prep,  inter.  See  also  ante  & 
anlo].  Primary  meanings  are  "inside"  and  "in  between"; 
as  adj.  "inner";  in  prep,  u^e  &  in  cpds  "inside,  in  be- 
tween". Further  development  of  meaning  is  with  a  view 
of  contrasting  the  (two)  sides  of  the  inside  relation,  i.  e. 
having  a  space  between,  different  from ;  thus  nt.  anta- 
rar)  difference. 

I.  (^AilJ.-?i)  I.  (a)  inner,  having  or  being  inside  It  83 
(tayu  antara  mala  three  inward  stains);  esp.  as  — °  in 
cpds.  ami8°  with  greed  inside,  greedy,  selfish  Vin  1.303  ; 
dos°  with  anger  inside,  i.e.  angry  Vin  11.249;  D  111.237; 
M  1. 123;  TvA  78  (so  read  for  des").  Abl.  antarato  from 
within  It  S3,  (b)  in  between,  distant;  dvadasa  yojan' 
antarar)  thanar)  PvA  139  139.  — ■  2.  In  noun-funr.ion 
(nt.):  (a),  spatial:  the  insiile  (of)  Vv  36'  (pitantara  a 
yellow  cloak  or  inside  garment  =  pitavanna  uttariya  VvA 
I '6);  Davs  l.io  (dtp'  antara-vasin  living  on  the  island); 
DhA  1.358  (kanna-chidd"  the  inside  of  the  ear;  VvA  50 
(kacch°  inner  room  or  apartment).  Therefore  also  "space 
in  between",  break  J  v. 352  (=  chidda  C),  &  obstacle^ 
hindrance,  i.  g.  what  stands  in  between :  see  cpds.  and 
antara-dhayati  (for  antaraq  dhayati).  —  (b).  leinforal:  an 
interval  of  lime,  hence  time  in  general,  &  also  a  speci- 
fied time,  i.  e.  occasion.  As  interval  in  Buddhantarai]  the 
time  between  the  death  of  one  Buddha  and  the  appea- 
rance of  another,  Pv.\  10,  14,  21,  47,  191  etc.  As  !ime: 
It  121  (etasmii)  antare  in  that  time  or  at  this  occasion); 
Pv  1. 10"  (dighai)  antaraq  =  dighaq  kalai)  PvA  52); 
I'vA  5  (etasraii)  antarc  at  this  time,  just  then).  As  »ci'(ii»o«: 
J  V.287;  Pug  55  (elakara-antaraq  occasion  of  getting 
rnin).  S  1.20,  quoted  I).\  1.34,  (man  ca  tan  ca  kiq  antaraij 
what  is  there  between  me  and  yon  ?)  C.  exi)ls-  kit)  karana. 
M's  Rh.  D.  in  trsl".  p.  256  'of  me  if  is  and  thee  (this 
talk)  —  now  why  is  this";  J  Vl.8  (assa  antaratj  na  pass- 
ii)su   they   did    not   see   a   diff.   in   him).  —   3    Phrases : 


antaraq   karotl  (a)  to  keep  away  from  or  at  a  distance 

(trs.  and  intrs.),  to  hold  aloof,  lit.  "to  make  a  space  in 
between"  M  ill. 14;  J.  iv.2  (°katva  leaving  behind);  Pug 
A  231  (ummaraq  a.  katva  staying  away  from  a  threshold); 
also  adverbially:  dasa  yojanani  a.  katva  at  a  distance  of 
10  y.  PvA  139.  —  (b.)  to  remove,  destroy  J  VI. 56  (v.  1. 
BB.  antarSyaij  karoti). 

II.  Irt  prep,  use  (" — )  with  ace.  (direction)  or  loc. 
(rest):  inside  (of),  in  the  midst  of,  between,  during  (cp. 
HI.  use  of  cases),  (a.)  w.  ace:  antaragharaq  pavittha 
gone  into  the  house  Miln  11.  —  (b.)  w.  loc:  antara- 
ghaie  nisldanti  (inside  the  house)  Vin  11.2I3;  "dlpake  in 
the  centre  of  the  island  J  1.240;  "dvare  in  the  door 
J  V.231;  °magge  on  the  road  (cp,  antarSmagge)  PvA  109; 
°bhatte  in  phrase  ekasmiq  yeva  a.  during  one  meal  J  I  ig  = 
DhA  1.249;  "bhattasmiq  id.  DhA  IV.12;  "vithiyan  in  the 
middle  of  the  road  PvA  96.  "satthlsu  between  the  thighs 
Vin   It. 161   (has  antara  satthtnai))  =  J   1.218. 

III.  Adverbial  use  of  eases^  instr.  antarena  in  between 
D  1.56;  S  1V.S9,  73;  J  1.393;  PvA  13  (kaP  in  a  little 
while,  na  kalantarena  ib.  19),  Often  in  comb"-  antaran- 
tarena  (c.  gen.)  right  in  between  (lit.  in  between  the  space 
of)  DhA  1.63,  358.  —  loc.  antare  in,  inside  of,  in  be- 
tween ( — "  or  c.  gen.  KhA  81  (sutt"  in  the  Sutta);  DhA 
III. 416  (mama  a.);  PvA  56,  63  (rukkh°).  Also  as  anta- 
rantare  right  inside,  right  in  the  middle  of  (c.  gen.) 
KhA  57 ;  DhA  1.59  (vanasandassa  a.).  —  abl.  antara 
(see  also  sep.  article  of  antara)  in  comb"-  antarantara 
from  time  to  time,  occasionally ;  successively  time  after 
time  Sn  p.   107;   DhA  11.86;   IV.191  ;   PvA  272. 

IV.  anantara  (adj.)  having  or  leaving  nothing  in  be- 
tween i.  e.  immediately  following,  incessant,  next,  adjoining 
Jiv.i3g;  Miln  382  (solid;  DhA  1.397;  PvA63  (tadantaraq 
immediately  hereafter),  92  (immed.  preceding),  97  (next  in 
caste).  See  also  abbhantara. 

-atita  gone  past  in  the  meantime  J  11.243.  -kappa 
an  intermediary  kappa  (q.  v.)  D  I  54.  -kSrana  a  cause 
of  impediment,  hindrance,  obstacle  Pug  A  231.  -cakka 
"the  intermediate  round",  i.  e.  in  astrology  all  that  be- 
longs to  the  intermediate  points  of  the  compass  Miln 
178.  -cara  one  who  goes  in  between  or  inside,  i.e.  a 
robber  S  iv,i73.  -bahira  (adj.)  inside  &  outside  J  1.125. 
-bbogika  one  who  has  power  (wealth,  influence)  inside 
the  kings  dominion  or  under  ihe  king,  a  subordinate 
chieftain  (cp.  antara-rattha)  Vin  111.47  -rattha  an  inter- 
mediate kingdom,  rulership  of  a  subordinate  prince  J  v.  135. 
-v3sa  an  interregnum  Dpvs  v. 80.  -vasaka  "inner  or  inter- 
mediate garment",  one  of  the  3  robes  of  a  Buddhist 
bhikkhu  (viz.  ihe  sanghati,  uttarSsanga  &  a.)  Vin  1.94, 
289;  11.272.  Cf.  next.  -sStaka  an  inner  or  lower  garment 
[cp.  Sk,  antariya  id,],  under  garment,  i.  e.  the  one  be- 
tween the  outer  one  &  the  body   VvA   166  (q.  v.). 

AntaraQsa  [B.Sk.  antaraqsa;  antara -{- aQsa]  "in  between 
the  shoulders",  i.e.  the  chest  J  v.173  ::=  VI.171  (phrase 
lohitakkho  vihat'  antaraijso). 

Antaratthaka  (adj.)  [antara  -f  atlhaka]  only  in  phrases 
rattisu  antaratthakasu  and  antaratthake  hima-pata- 
samaye  (in  which  antara  functions  as  prep.  c.  loc,  ac- 
cording to  antara  II.  b.)  i.e.  in  the  nights  (&  in  the  time 
of  the  falling  of  snow)  between  the  eighths  (i.  e.  the 
eighth  day  before  &  after  the  full  moon:  see  atthaka'). 
First  phrase  at  Vin  1.31,  288;  ill  31;  second  at  M  1.79 
(cp.  p.  536  where  Trenckener  divides  anta-ratthaka); 
A  f.136  (in   nom.);  J   I.390;  Miln  396. 

Antaradhana  (nt.)  [fr.  antacadhayati]  disappearance  A  1.58 
(saddhammassa);  n.147;  ill. 176  sq.;  Miln  133;  Dhs  645, 
738,  871.  Cp.  "dhayana. 

Antaradhayati  [antara  -\-  dhayati]  to  disappear  So  449 
(°dhayatlia  3rd  sg.  med.);  Vv  81"  (id.);  J  1.119  =  DhA 
1.248;  DhA  1V.191  (ppr.  °dh5yamana  &  aor.  dhayi)  PvA 
152,  217,  (°dhayi),  245;  VvA  48.  —  ppr.  antarabita 
(q.  v.).  —  Cans,  antaradhapeti  to  cause  to  disappear,  to 
destroy  J   I.147;  11.415;  PvA   123. 


Antaradhayana 


48 


Anto 


Antaradhayana  (nt.)  [fr.  an  taradhSyati]  disappearance  Dh A 
IV. 191.  (v.  1.  °adhana). 

Antarayatl  [cp.  denom.  fr.  antara]  to  go  or  step  in  be- 
tween, ger.  antaritva  (=:  antarayitva)  J  1.2 18. 

Antarahlta  (adj.)  [pp.  of  antaradhayati]  i.  disappeared, 
gone,  left  D  1.222.  M  1.487.  Miln  18.  PvA  245.  —  2  in 
phrase  anantarahitaya  bhumiya  (loc)  on  the  bare  soil 
(lit.  on  the  ground  with  nothing  put  in  between  it  &  the 
person  lying  down,  i.  e.  on  an  uncovered  or  unobstructed 
ground)  Vin  1.47;   11.209;   M   11.57. 

Antara  (adv.)  [abl.  or  adv.  forruation  fr.  antara;  Vedic 
antara.]  prep,  (c.  gen.  ace.  or  loc),  pref.  (° — )  and  adv. 
"in  between"  (of  space  &  time),  midway,  inside;  during, 
meanwhile,  between.  On  interpretation  of  term  see  DA 
1.34  sq.  — ■  (l).  (prep.)  c.  ace.  (of  the  two  points  com- 
pared as  termini;  cp.  B.Sk.  antara  ca  Divy  94  etc.)  Dl.l 
(antara  ca  Rajagahaij  antara  ca  Nalandai)  between  R.  and 
N.).  —  c.  gen.  &  loc.  Vin  11. 161  (satthinar)  between  the 
thighs,  where  id.  p.  at  J  1.2 18  has  antara-satthlsu);  A 
ir.245  (satthinar).  but  v.  1.  satthimhi).  —  (2)  (adv.)  mean- 
while Sn  291,  694;  It  85;  Dh  237.  —  occasionally 
Miln  251.  —  (3).  (pref)  see  cpds. 

-katha  "in  between  talk,  talk  for  pastime,  chance  con- 
versation, D  ii.i,  8,  9;  S  1.79;  IV. 281;  A  III. 167;  Sn 
p.  115;  DA  1.49  and  freq.  passim,  -gattchati  to  come 
in  between,  to  prevent  J  VI. 295.  -parinibbayin  an  Ana- 
gamin  who  passes  away  in  the  middle  of  his  term  of 
life  in  some  particular  heaven  D  in. 237;  A  1.233;  ''"g  ^^• 
-magge  (loc.)  on  the  road,  on  the  way  J  1.253;  Miln  16; 
DhA  11.21;  III. 337;  PvA  151,258,269,273  (cp.  antara"). 
-marana  premature  death  DhA  1.409;  PvA  136.  -mut- 
taka  one  who  is  released  in  the  meantime  Vin  11.167. 

Antarapana  (nt.)  [antara  -j-  pana  "in  between  the  shopping 
or  trading"]  place  where  the  trading  goes  on,  bazaar 
J   '-55;  '^''•52;  Miln   t,  330;  DhA  1. 181. 

Antaraya'  [antara  4-  aya  from  i,  lit.  "coming  in  between"] 
obstacle,  hindrance,  impediment  to  ( — ");  prevention,  bar; 
danger,  accident  to  ( —  ).  There  are  10  dangers  (to  or 
from)  enumd-  at  Vin  1.112,  169  etc.,  viz.  raja°,  cora°, 
aggi°,  udaka°,  maaussa°,  amanussa°,  vala°,  sirii]sapa°, 
jivita°,  brakmacariya".  In  B.Sk.  7  at  Divy  544,  viz. 
raja-caura-manusy-amanusya-vyad-agny-udakaij.  —  D  1.3, 
25,  26;  A  111.243,  3°6;  IV.320;  Sn  691,  692;  Dh  286 
(=jlvit°  DhA  111.431);  J  1.62,  128;  KhA  l8i;  DhA 
II  52;  VvA  1  =  PvA  I  (hat°  removing  the  obstacles) 
-antarayai]  karoti  to  keep  away  from,  hinder,  hold  back, 
prevent,  destroy  Vin  1. 15;  J  vi.171;  Vism  120;  PvA  20. 
-kara  one  who  causes  impediments  or  bars  the  way, 
an  obstructor  D  1.227;  S  1.34;  A  1. 161;  Pv  IV.3". 

Antaraya^  (adv.)  [dat.  of  antara  cr  formation  fr.  antara  -f- 
ger.  of  V.)  in  the  meantime  Sn  II20  (cp  Nd^  58)  = 
antara  Sn  A  603. 

AntarSyika  (adj.)  [fr.  antaraya]  causing  an  obstacle,  forming 
an  impediment  Vin  1.94=11.272;  M  1. 130;  S  11.226; 
ThA   288. 

Antarayikln  (adj.-n.)  [cp.  antarayika]  one  who  meets  with 
an  obsticle,  finding  difficulties  Viu  IV.280  (an°  =  asati 
antaraye). 

Antaraja  (nt.)  [Sk  antarala]  interior,  interval  Davs  1.52; 
III. 53  (nabh°). 

Antarika  (adj.)  [fr.  antara]  "being  in  between",  i.e.  — 
I.  intermediate,  next,  following:  see  an°.  . —  2.  distant, 
lying  in  between  PvA  173  (aneka-yojan°  thana).  See  also 
f.  antarika.  —  3.  inside:  see  antarika.  -anantcirika  with 
no  interval,  succeeding,  immediately  following,  next  Vin 
II. 165,  212  (an°);  iv.234. 


Antarika  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  antarika]  "what  lies  in  between  or 
near",  i.e.  —  I.  the  inside  of  Vin  iv.272  (bhajan°).  — 
2.  the  neighbourhood,  region  of  ( — °),  sphere,  compass 
Vin  III. 39  (ur°,  angul°);  J  1.265  (yakkhassa  sim°  inside 
the  ys  sphere  of  influence).  —  3.  interval,  interstice  Vin 
ll.l  16  (sutt°  in  lace);  A  1.124  (vijj°  the  interval  of  lightning). 

Antalikkha  (nt.)  [Vedic  antariksa  =  antari-ksa  (kjOi  !''• 
situated  in  between  sky  and  earth]  the  atmosphere  or  air 
D  11.15;  A  111.239;  IV.I99;  Sn  222,  688;  Dh  127  = 
Miln  1 50=:  PvA  104;  Pv  1.3'  (:=  vehayasa-saiiiiita  a. 
PvA   14);  KhA   166. 

-ga  going  through  the  air  A  1.215.  -cara  walking 
through  the  air  Vin  1.21;  D  1.17;  S  l.Ili;  J  v.267 ; 
DA   1. 110. 

Antavant  (adj.)  [anta'  -\-  °vant]  having  an  end,  finite  D  1.22, 
31,  187;  Ps  1.151  sq.;  157;  Dhs  1099,  1117,  1175; 
Miln  145.   -anantayant   endless,  infinite  A  v.193  (loka). 

See  also  loka. 

Anti  (indecl.)  [Vedic  anti  =  Lat  ante,  Gr.  avr/,  Goth,  and; 
Ags.  and-,  Ger.  ant-,  ent-]  adv.  &  prep.  c.  gen.:  opposite, 
near  J  v. 399  (tav'  antir)  agata,  read  z.\  tav'  anti-m-agata ; 
C.  santikari),  400,404;  vi.565  (samikass' anti  =  antike  C). 
—  Cp.  antika. 

Antika  (adj.-n.)  — l.  [der  fr.  anti]  near  KhA  217;  nt. 
neighbourhood  Khvill.l.  (odak°);  J  vi.565  (antike  loc.  = 
anti  near).  —  2.  [der  fr.  anta  =:  Sk.  antya]  being  at  the 
end,  final,  finished,  over  S  1.130  (purisa  etad-antika,  v.  1. 
SS  antiya:  men  are  (to  me)  at  the  end  for  that,  i.e.  men 
do  not  exist  any  more  for  me,  for  the  purpose  of  beget- 
ting sons. 

Antlma  (adj.)  [Cp.  superl.  of  anta]  last,  final  (used  almost 
exclusively  with  ref.  to  the  last  &  final  reincarnation ; 
thus  in  comb"-  with  deha  &  sarlra,  the  last  body)  D  11.15  ; 
Dh  351;  It  50  (antimai)  deharj  dhareti),  53  (id.);Vv5'2; 
Sn  478  (sariraq  antimaij  dhareti)  502;  Miln  122,  148; 
VvA   106  (sarir^  antima-dharin);  Sdhp   278. 

-dehadhara  one  who  wears  his  last,  body  It  101  (  dhara 
T,  "dhara  v.  1.);  VvA  163.  -dharin  =  prec.  S  1.14,  53 
(-j- khinasava);  II. 278;  It  32,  40;  Sn  471.  -vatthu  "the 
last  thing",  i.e.  the  extreme,  final  or  worst  (sin)  Vin  I. 
121,  135,  167,  320.  -sarlra  the  last  body;  (adj.)  having 
ones  last  rebirth  S  1. 210  (Buddho  a°-sariro);  A  11.37; 
Sn  624;  Dh  352,  400;  DhA  iv.166  (=  kotiyaij  thito 
attabhavo). 

Ante"  (pref.)  [Sk.  antah,  with  change  of  -ah  to  -e,  instead 
of  the  usual  -o,  prob.  through  interpreting  it  as  loc.  ot 
anta]  near,  inside,  within ;  only  in  foil.  cpds. :  °pura  (nt.) 
"inner  town",  the  king's  palace,  esp.  its  inner  apartments, 
i.  e.  harem  [Sk.  antahpura,  cp.  also  P.  antopuraj  Vin 
1.75,  269;  A  V.81;  J  II. 125;  IV.472;  Miln  i;  PvA  23, 
81,  280;  "purika  harem  woman  DhsA403;  °vasika  one 
who  lives  in,  i.  e.  lodges  or  lives  with  his  master  or 
teacher,  a  pupil  Vin  1.60;  111.25;  S  1. 180;  iv.136;  Jl. 
166;  11278;  111.83,  463;  PvA  12;  VvA  138;  "vasin  = 
°vasika  Vin  III. 66;  D  l.i,  45,  74,  78,  88,  108,  157;  M 
III. 1 16;  DA  1.36. 

Anto  (indecl.)  [Sk.  antah;  Av  ant.ira  I,at.  inter,  Oir.  etar 
between,  Ohg.  untar;  Idg.  *entar,  compar.  of  *en  (in)  = 
inner,  inside]  prep,  inside,  either  c.  ace.  denoting  direc- 
tion =  into,  or  c.  loc.  denoting  place  where  =  in.  As 
prefix  (° — )  in,  within,  inside,  inner  (see  cpds.)  (i.)  prep. 
c.  ace.  anto  nivesanai)  gata  gone  into  the  house  J  1.158; 
anto  jalaq  pavisati  go  into  the  net  DhA  in. 175;  anto 
gamai)  pavisati  to  go  into  the  village  DhA  11.273;  anto 
nagarai)  pavisati  DhA  11.89;  PvA  47.  —  (2)  c.  loe.  anto 
gabbhe  J  11. 1 82;  game  DhA  11.52;  gehe  DhA  11.84; 
nadiyai)  J  VI.278;  nivesane  J  11.323;  vasse  in  the  rainy 
season  J  iv.242;  vimanasmir)  Pv  1.10';  sattahe  inside  of 
a  week  PvA  55. 


Anto 


49 


Anvarohati 


-kotisantbara  "house  of  the  Golden  Pavement"  J  iv.  113. 
-gadba  (°gata?  Kern  Toev.')  in  phrase  "hetu^  by  inner 
reason  or  by  reason  of  its  intensity  PvA  10;  VvA  12, 
-jana  "the  inside  people",  i.e.  people  belonging  to  the 
house,  the  family  (==  Lat.  familia)  D  ill. 61  (opp.  to  ser- 
vants); A  1. 1 52;  J  VI. 301;  DA  1.300.  -jala  the  inside  of 
the  net,  the  net  DhA  iv.41.  -jalikata  "in-netted",  gone 
into  the  net  D  1.45;  DA  1.127.  -nijjhana  inner  confla- 
gration PvA  18.  -nimugga  altogether  immersed  D  1.75; 
A  III. 26.  -parisoka  inner  grief  Ps  1.38.  -pura  =:  antepura 
J  1.262.  -mano  "turning  ones  mind  inside",  thoughtful, 
melancholy  Via  III.  19.  -bhavika  being  inside  Miln  95. 
-rukkhata  being  among  trees  J  1.7.  -vasatl  to  inhabit, 
live  within  S  iv.136.  -valaiijanaka  (parijana)  indoov- 
people  J  V.I  18.  -vassa  the  rainy  season  (lit.  the  interval 
of  the  r.  s.)  VvA  66.  -vihara  the  inside  of  the  V.  DhA 
1.50  ("abhimukhi  turning  towards  etc.),  -samorodba  bar- 
ricading within  Dhs  11 57  (so  read  for  anta°,  cp.  Dhs. 
trsl.  311).  -soka  inner  grief  Ps  1.38. 

AndU  [cp.  Sk.  andu,  andu  &  anduka]  a  chain,  fetter  Vin 
1.108  =  111.249  (tin°);  L)  1.245;  J  '21  (°ghara  prison- 
house);  DhA  IV.54  (°bandhana). 

Andha  (adj.)  [Vedic  andha,  Lat.  andabata  (see  Walde,  Lat. 
Wtb.  s.  v.),  other  etym.  doubtful]  I.  (lit.)  blind,  blinded, 
blindfolded  J  I.216  (dhum°);  Pv  iv.i«;  PvA  3.  —  dark, 
dull,  blinding  M  111.151  (°andhar|  adv.  dulled);  Sn  669 
(Ep.  of  timisa,  like  Vedic  andhaij  tamah);  DhA  11.49 
("vana  dark  forest).  —  2.  (fig.)  mentally  blinded,  dull  of 
mind,  foolish,  not  seeing  D  1.191  (-|-  acakkhuka),  239 
(°veni,  reading  &  meaning  uncertain);  A  1. 128;  Th  2, 
394  (=  bala  ThA  258).  See  cpds.  "karana,  °k5ra,  "bala, 
°bhuta. 

-akula  blinded,  foolish  Vv  84'  {=  paiifiacakkhuno  abha- 
vena  VvA  337).  -karana  blinding,  making  blind,  causing 
bewilderment  (fig.),  confusing  It  82  (+  acakkhukarana); 
Miln  113  (paiiha,  -)- gambhira).  -kara  blindness  (lit.  & 
fig),  darkness,  dullness,  bewilderment  Vin  I.16;  D  II. 12; 
A  1.56;  ir.54;  111.233;  J  iii.iSS;  Th  I,  1034;  Dh  146; 
Sn  763;  Vv  21*  (=avijj°  VvA  io6);  Pug  30;  Dhs  617; 
DA  1.228;  VvA  51,  53,  116,  161;  PvA  6;  Sdhp  14,  280. 
-tamo  deep  darkness  (lit.  &  fig.)  S  v.443;  It  84  (v.  1.; 
T.  andhar)  tamai));  Jvi.247.  -bala  blinded  by  folly,  foolish, 
dull  of  mind,  silly  J  I.246,  262;  VI. 337;  DhA  II.43,  89; 
III. 179;  VvA  67;  PvA  4,  264.  -bbuta  blinded  (fig.), 
mentally  blind,  not  knowing,  ignorant  S  IV.21;  A  11.72; 
J  VI. 139  (spelled  °bata);  Dh  59,  174  (=;:  paiina-cakkhuno 
abhavena  DhA  in. 175).  -vesa  "blind  form",  disguise 
J  IU.418. 

Andhaka  [fr.  andha]  "blind  fly",  i.  e.  dark  or  yellow  fly  or 
gad-fly  Sn  20  (=  kana-makhhikanai)  adhivacanai)  SnA  33). 

Anna  (nt.)  [Vedic  anna,  orig.  pp.  of  adali  to  eat]  "eating", 
food,  esp.  boiled  rice,  but  includes  all  that  is  eaten  as 
food,  viz.  odana,  kummasa,  sattu,  maccha,  maijsa  (rice, 
gruel,  flour,  fish,  meat)  Nd'  372  =  495.  Anna  is  spelt 
anna  in  combn^  apar^  a;>na  and  pubb'  anna.  Under  dhaiina 
(Nd2  314J  are  distinguished  2  kinds,  viz.  raw,  natural 
cereals  (pubb'  annai) :  sali,  vihi,  yava,  godhuma,  kangu, 
varaka,  kuditisaka)  and  boiled,  prepared  food  (apar°  annai] : 
supeyya  curry).  SnA  378  (on  Sn  403)  expls-  anna  by 
yagubhattadi.  —  D  1.7;  A  1.107,  '32;  ".70,  85,  203;  Sn 
82,240,  403,  924;  J  ITI.190;  Pug  51;  Sdhp   106,  214. 

-apa  food  &  water  Sdhp  100.  -da  giving  food  Sn  297. 
-pana  food  &  water,  eating  &  drinking,  to  eat  &  to  drink 
Sn  485,  487;  Pv  1.52,  82;  KhA  207,  209;  PvA  7,  8, 
30,  31,  43- 

Annaya  in  dur°  see  anvaya. 

Anvakasl  3''''  sg.  aor.  of  anukassati  2 :  drew  out,  removed, 
threw  down  Th  I,  869  (=  khipi,  chaddesi  C). 


Anvakkhara  (adj.)  [anu  -|-  akkhara]  "according  to  the  syl- 
lable", syll.  after  syll.,  also  a  mode  of  reciting  by  syllables 
Vin  IV.  15,  cp.  355.  Cp.  anupadag. 

Anvaga  3'<^  sg.  aor.  of  anugacchati  Mhvs  7,  10.  Also  in 
assim.  form  annaga  J  v.258. 

AnvagU  3'^''  pi.  aor.  of  anugacchati  S  1.39;  Sn  586. 

AnvacJcJhamasaQ  (adv.)  [anu  -\-  addha  -f  masa]  every  fort- 
night, twice  a  month  M  11.8;  Vin  IV.315  (=  anuposathikaq) ; 
DhA  1. 162;  11.25. 

Anvattha  (adj.)  [anu  -f-  attha]  according  to  the  sense,  ans- 
wering to  the  matter,  having  sense  ThA  6  (°san3abhava). 

Anvadeva  (adv.)  [anva-d-eva  with  euphonic  d.;  like  samma- 
d-eva  corresponding  to  Sk.  anvag-eva]  behind,  after,  later 
D  1. 172;  M  111.172;  S  V.I  (spelt  anudeva);  A  l.it;  v. 
214;  It  34. 

Anvaya  (n.-adj.)  [Vedic  anvaya  in  diff.  meaning;  fr.  anu -(- li 
see  anveti  &  anvaya]  I.  (n.)  conformity,  accordance  D  11. 
83  =  iii.ioo;  M  5,  69  (dhamm°  logical  conclusion  of); 
S  11.58;  D  3,  226  (anvaye  nanaq);  Pv  II. Il'  (tassa  kam- 
massa  anvaya,  v.  1.  BB  anvaya  &  anvaya;  accordingly, 
according  to  =  paccaya  PvA  147);  PvA  228  (anvayato, 
adv.  in  accordance).  —  2.  (adj.)  following,  having  the 
same  course,  behaving  according  to,  consequential,  in 
conformity  with  (— °)  D  I.46  (tad°);  M  1.238  (kayo  citt" 
acting  in  conformity  to  the  mind,  obeying  the  mind); 
Sn  254  (an°  inconsistent);  It  79  (tass°).  —  dur°  .spelt 
durannaya  conforming  with  diflSculty,  hard  to  manage 
or  to  find  out  Dh  92  (gati  :=  na  sakka  paiiiiiipetuq  DhA 
II. 173);  Sn  243,  251  (=  duviniiapaya  SnA  287  dunneyya 
ibid.   293). 

Anvayata  (f.)  [abstr.  to  anvaya]  conformity,  accordance  M 
1.500  (kay°  giving  in  to  the  body). 

AnvahaQ  (adv.)  [anu  -)-  aha]  every  day,  daily  DSvs  iv.8. 

AnvagaCChatl  [anu -|- a -|- gacchati]  I.  to  go  along  after, 
to  follow,  run  after,  pursue;  aor.  anvagaccbi  Pv  iv.s" 
(=:  anubandhi  PvA  260).  —  2.  to  come  back  again  J 
1.454  (g^f-  °gantvana).  —  pp.  anvagata  (q.  v.). 

Anvagata  [pp.  of  anvagacchati]  having  pursued,  attained ; 
endowed  with  Th   I,  63 ;  J  iv.385 ;  v.4. 

Anvadlsati  [anu  -|-  a  -f-  disati]  to  advise,  dedicate,  assign ; 
imper.  °dlsabl  Pv  11.2"  {=  uddissa  dehi  PvA  80);  lll.2« 
(=  adisa  PvA  181). 

Anvadhlka  (adj.)  [derivation  uncertain]  a  tailoring  term. 
Only  at  Vin  1.297.  Rendered  {^Vinaya  Texts  11.232)  by 
'half  and  half ;  that  is  a  patchwork,  half  of  new  material, 
half  of  old.  Bdhgh's  note  (see  the  text,  p.  392)  adds 
that  the  new  material  must  be  cut  up. 

Anvamaddati  [anu  -j-  a  -|-  maddati]  to  squeeze,  wring  J  ill. 
481  (galakai)  anvamaddi  wrung  his  neck;  vv.  II.  anvanu- 
matti  &  anvavamaddi;  C.  glvaq  maddi). 

Anvaya  [ger.  of  anveti ;  cp.  anvaya]  undergoing,  experiencing, 
attaining;  as  prep.  (c.  ace.)  in  consequence  of,  through, 
after  D  1.13  (atappai}  by  means  of  self-sacrifice),  97  (saq- 
vasar)  as  a  result  of  their  cohabitation);  J  1.56  (buddhiq), 
127  (piyasar) vasal)),  148  (gabbhaparipSkari).  Often  in 
phrase  vuddhir)  anvaya  growing  up,  e.g.  J  1.278;  in. 
126;  DhA  11.87. 

AnvSyika  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  anvSya]  following;  one  who  follows, 
a  companion  D  in. 169;  Nd^  59;  J   111.348. 

Anvarohati  [anu  -)-  a  -|-  rohati]  to  go  up  to,  visit,  ascend 
J  IV. 465  (aor.  anvaruhi). 

1—5 


Anvavassa 


50 


Apacaya 


Anvavassa  at  J  v.317  should  be  read  with  v.  I.  UB  as 
anovassa  absence  of  rain. 

Anvavlttha  [pp.  of  anvavisati]  possessed  (by  evil  spirits) 
S  1.114. 

Anvavisati  [anu  +  a  +  visati]  to  go  into,  to  take  posses- 
sion of,  to  visit  M  1326;  S  1.67;  Miln  156.  —  pp.  an- 
vavittha  (q.  v.).  Cp.  adhimuccati. 

Anvasatta  [pp-  of  anu  +  a  +  saiij,  cp.  anusatta  =  Sk. 
anusakta]  clung  on  to,  befallen  by  (instr.),  attached  to 
A  1V.356  (v.  1.  anvahata),  cp.  Ud  35  (anvasanna  q.  v.). 
See  also  foil. 

Anvasattata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  anvasatta]  being  attacked  by, 
falling  a  prey  to  (instr.),  attachment  to  DhA  1.287  ('"  same 
context  as  anvasatta  A  iv.356  &  anvasanna  Ud  35). 

Anvasanna  [pp.  of  anu  +  S  +  sad]  endowed  with,  pos- 
sessed of,  attacked  by,  Ud  35  (doubtfull;  v.  1.  ajjhapanna), 
=  A  IV.356  which  has  anvasatta. 

Anvassavati  [anu  -f  a  +  savati,  srtl]  to  stream  into,  to 
attack,  befall  D  1. 70;   A  111.99;   Pug  20,  58. 

Anvahata  [pp.  of  anu  +  a  +  han]  struck,  beaten;  per- 
plexed Dh  39  C^cetasa). 

Anvahinijati  [anu  -|-  a  -|-  hindati]  to  wander  to  (ace.)  A 
'V.374,  376  [BSk.  same,  e.  g.  Divy  68  etc.]. 

Anvetl  [cp.  anu  -j-  eti,  from  i]  to  follow,  approach,  go  with 
Sn  1103  (:=  anugacchati  anvayiko  hoti  Nd'  59);  Dh  I 
(=  kayikaq  .  .  .  dukkhaij  anugacchati  DhA  1.24),  2,  71, 
124;  perhaps  at  Pv  II.6'^<'  (with  v.  1.  BB  at  PvA  99)- for 
anvesi  (see  anvesati;  expl<''  by  anudesi  =  was  anxious 
for,  helped,  instructed). 

Anvesa  [from  next]  seeking,  searching,  investigation,  M 
1. 140  ("q   n^  adhigacchanti  do  not  find). 

Anvesati  [anu  -|-  esati]  to  look,  for  search,  seek  S  1. 1 12 
(ppr.  anvesai]  =  pariyesamana  C);  Cp  lil.ll'  (ppr.  an- 
vesanto).  —  aor.  anvesi  [Sk.  anvesi  fr.  icchati]  Pv  11.6^° 
(?  perhaps  better  with  v.  1.  PvA  99  as  anventi  of  anveti). 

Anvesin  [anu-esin]  (adj.)  striving  after,  seeking,  wishing 
for  Sn  965   (kusala"). 

Anha  [Vedic  ahan]  see  pubbauha,  majjhanha,  sayanha. 
Cp.  aha. 

Apa°  [Vedic  apa;  Idg.  *apo  =  Gr.  aa-rf,  Av.  apa,  Lat.  ab 
from  ^'ap  (cp.  aperio);  Goth,  af,  Ger.  ab,  Ags.  E.  of.  — 
A  compar.  form  fr.  apa  is  apara  "further  away"]  Well- 
defined  directional  prefix,  meaning  "away  from,  ofT'. 
Usually  as  base-prefix  (except  with  a),  &  very  seldom  in 
comp".  with  other  modifying  prefixes  (like  sam,  abhi  etc.).  — 

1.  apa  =  Vedic  apa  (Idg.  *apo):  apeti  to  go  away  =r 
Gr.  'aveitii,  Lat.  abeo,  Goth,  afiddja;  apeta  gone  away, 
rid ;  °kad<lhati  to  draw  away,  remove ;  "kamati  walk  away ; 
"gacchati  go  away ;  "nidhati  put  away  (:=  xTcriSiiiii, 
abdo);  "nudati  push  away;  °neti  lead  away;  "vattati  turn 
away  (=  averto);  °sakkati  step  aside;  °harati  take  away.  — 

2.  apa  =  Vedic  ava  (Idg.  *aue;  see  ava  for  details). 
There  exists  a  widespread  confusion  between  the  two 
preps,  apa  &  ava,  favoured  both  by  semantic  (apa  = 
away,  ava  =  down,  cp.  E.  off)  &  phonetic  affinity  (p 
softened  to  b,  esp.  in  BB  Mss.,  &  then  to  v,  as  b  >  v 
is  frequent,  e.  g.  bya°  >  vya°  etc.).  Thus  we  find  in  Pali 
apa  where  Vedic  and  later  literary  Sk.  have  ava  in  the 
foil,  instances:  apakanti,  "kassati,  "kivati,  °gata,  °cara, 
"jhayati,  "thata,  °dana,  "dhareti,  "nata,  "nameti,  "nita, 
"lekhana,    'loketi,    "vadati. 

Apaka<}(]hati  [apa  +  kaddhati,  cp.  Sk.  apa-karsati]  to  draw 
away,  take  off,  remove  D  1.180;  Iir.127;  DhA  11.86.  — 
Caus.  apakaddhapeti  J  1.342;  iv.415;  Miln  34.  —  Cp. 
apakassati;  &  see  pakattheti. 


Apakata  [pp.  of  apakaroti]  put  off,  done  away,  in  ajivik'' 
apakata  being  without  a  living  M  1.463  (the  usual 
phrase  being  "apagata);  Miln  279  (id.).  At  It  89  the 
reading  of  same  phrase  is  sjivika  pakata  (v.  1.  a°  vakata). 

ApakataiitiU  (adj.)  [a  +  pa  -f-  katannu]  ungrateful  Vin  11.199. 

Apakantatl  [apa  +  kantati,  Sk.  ava  -f  krntati]  to  cut  off 
Th  2,  217  (gale  =:  givaq  chindati  ThA  178;  Kern,  Tocv. 
corrects  to  kabale  a.). 

Apakaroti  [apa  +  karoti,  cp.  Sk.  apakaroti  &  apakrta  in 
same  meaning]  to  throw  away,  put  off;  hurt,  offend, 
slight ;  possibly  in  reading  T.  apakirituna  at  Th  2,  447 
(q.  v.).  —  pp.  apskkata  (q.  v.).  Cp.  apakara. 

Apakassati  [Sk.  apa-  &  ava-karsati,  cp.  apakaddhati]  to 
throw  away,  remove  Sn  281  (v.l.  BB  &  SnA  ava°;  expld- 
by  niddhamati  &  nikkaddhati  SnA  31 1).  -ger.  apakassa 
Sn  11.198  =  Miln  389.  See  also  apakasati. 

Apakara  &  °ka  [cf.  Sk.  apakSra  &  apakaroti]  injury, 
mischief;  one  who  injures  or  offends  DhA  in.63  ;  Sdhp  283. 

Apakasati  at  Vin  11.204  >^  to  t>e  read  as  apakassati  and 
interpreted  as  "draw  away,  distract,  bring  about  a  split 
or  dissension  (of  the  Sangha)".  The  v.  1.  on  p.  325  justi- 
fies the  correction  (apakassati)  as  well  as  Bdhgh's  expl"- 
"parisaq  akaddhanti".  —  Cp.  A  111.145  &  see  avapakasati. 
The  reading  at  the  id.  p.  at  A  v.74  is  avakassati 
(comb'l-  w.  vav.ikassati,  where  Vin  11.204  I'as  avapakasati), 
which  is  much  to  be  preferred  (see  vavakassati). 

Apakirituna  at  Th  2,  447  T  (reading  of  C.  is  abhi°)  is 
explained  Th.\  271  to  mean  apakiritva  chaddetva  throwing 
away,  slighting,  offending.  The  correct  etym  =  Sk.  ava- 
kirati  (ava  +  kf-  to  strew,  cast  out)  in  sense  "to  cast 
off,  reject",  to  which  also  belongs  kirata  in  meaning  "cast 
off"  i.  e.  man  of  a  so-called  low  tribe.  See  also  avakirati  2. 

Apakkamati  [cp.  Sk.  apakramati,  apa  +  kram]  to  go 
away,  depart,  go  to  one  side  J  111.27;  Sdhp  294.  —  aor. 
apakkanni  Pv  iv.7';  ger.  apakkamitva  PvA  43,  124, 
&  apakkamma  Pv  11.928, 

Apagacchati  [apa  +  gam]  to  go  away,  turn  aside  DhA 
1.401  (°gantva).  —  pp.  apagata  (q.  v.). 

Apagata  [pp.  of  apagacchati]  1.  gone,  gone  away  from 
(c.  abl.),  removed;  deceased,  departed  It  112;  PvA  39, 
63  (=  peta),  64  (==  gata).  —  2.  (° — )  freq.  as  prefix, 
meaning  without,  lit.  liaving  lost,  removed  from ;  free 
from  Vin  11.129  ^gabbha  having  lost  her  foetus,  having 
a  miscarriage);  J  1.61  (°vattha  without  clothes);  PvA  38 
("soka  free  from  grief),  47  (°lajja  not  shy),  219  ("viiiiiana 
without  feeling).  —  Cp.  apakata. 

Apagabbha  (adj.)  [a  -|-  pa  +  gabbha]  not  entering  another 
womb,  i.  e.  not  destined  to  another  rebirth  Vin  111.3. 

Apagama  [Sk.  apagama]  going  away,  disappearance  Sdhp  508. 

Apanga  (apanga)  [Sk.  apanga]  the  outer  corner  of  the  eye 
J  111.419  (asitapangin  black-eyed);  IV.219  (bahi°).  Spelt 
avanga  at  Vin  11.267,  where  the  phrase  avangaij  karoti, 
i.  e.  expld-  by  Bdhgh.  ibid  p.  327  as  "avangadese  adho- 
mukhar)  lekhaq  karonti".  According  to  Kern,  Torv.  20, 
Bdhgh's  expl"  is  not  quite  correct,  since  avanga  stands 
here  in  the  meaning  of  "a  coloured  mark  upon  the  body" 
(cp.   PW.  apanga). 

Apacaya  [fr.  apa  +  Ci]  falling  off,  diminution  (opp.  acaya 
gathering,  heaping  up),  unmaking,  esp.  loss  (of  wordliness), 
decrease  (of  possibility  of  rebirth  Vin  11.2  =  111.21  =1V.2I3; 
cp,  J  111.342;  S  11.95  (kayassa  acayo  pi  apacayo  pi);  A 
IV.280  =  Vin  11.259  (opp.  acaya);  J  111. 342  (sekho  °ena 
na  tappati);  Vbh  106,  319,  326,  330. 


Apacaya 


5' 


Apanudati 


-gamin  goiDg  towards  decrease,  "making  for  the  un- 
doing of  rebirth"  {Dhs  trsl.  82)  A  v.243,  277;  Dhs  277, 
339,  5°5,   1014;   Vbh   12,  16  sq.;  Nett  87  (cp.  Kvu  156). 

Apacayatl  [fr.  apa — ci,  cp.  cinati  &  cayati,  with  diff. 
meaning  in  Sic.;  better  expld-  perhaps  as  denom.  fr.  'apa- 
caya in  meaning  of  apacayana,  cp.  apacita]  to  honour, 
respect,  pay  reverence  D  1. 91  (pujeti+);  J  111.82.  — 
Pot.  apace  (for  apaceyya,  may  be  taken  to  apacinati  2) 
A  IV. 245;  ThA  72  (here  to  apacinati  i).  —  pp.  apa- 
cita (q.  v.). 

Apacayana  (nt.)  [abstr.  rr.  apa  -[-  cay,  which  is  itself  a 
der.  fr.  cl,  cinati]  honouring,  honour,  worship,  reverence 
J  1.220;  V.326;  DA  1.256  (°kamma);  VvA  24  (°i)  karoti 
=  a5jalikar|  karoti);  PvA  104  (°kara,  adj.),  128  (-f  pari- 
cariya). 

Apacayika  (adj.)  .[fr.  *apacaya,  cp.  B.Sk.  apacayaka  MVastu 
1. 1 98;  Divy  293]  honouring,  respecting  J  iv.94  (vaddha°, 
cp.  vaddhapacayin);  Pv  11. 7  8  (jettha°);  IV.3"  (id.).  In 
B.Sk.  the  corresp.  phrase  is  jyesthapacayaka. 

Apacayin  (adj.)  [fr.  *apacaya;  cp.  apacayika]  honouring, 
paying  homage,  revering  Sn  325  (vaddha"  =:  vaddhanai) 
apaciti  karanena  SnA  332)  =  Dh  109;  J  1.47,  132,  201; 
11.299;  V.325;  Miln  206;  Sdhp  549. 

Apacara  [fr.  apa  +  car,  cp.  Sk.  apa  &  abhi-carati]  falling 
off,  fault,  wrong  doing  J  vt.375. 

Apacita  [pp.  of  apacayatl  or  apacinSti]  honoured,  wors- 
hipped, esteemed  Th  i,  186;  J  11.169;  )V.75;  Vv  5"! 
(=  pQjita   VvA  39);   35"  (cp.   VvA    164);  Miln   21. 

Apacltl  (f.)  [Vedic  apaciti  in  diff.  meaning,  viz.  expiation] 
honour,  respect,  esteem,  reverence  Th  1,  589;  J  1.220; 
n.435;  "1.82;  !V.3o8;  vi.88;  Miln  180,  234  (°r)  karoti), 
377  (pujana  -f );  SnA  332  (°karana).  Cp.  apacayana. 

Apacinati  [apa -{- cinati]  i.  [in  meaning  of  Sk.  apaclyate 
cp.  P.  upaciyyati  Pass,  of  upacinati]  to  get  rid  of,  do 
away  with,  (cp.  apacaya),  diminish,  make  less  S  111.89 
(opp.  acinati);  Th  I,  807;  J  IV.172  (apacineth'  eva 
kamani  =:  viddhaqseyyatha  C).  Here  belong  prob.  aor. 
y^  pi.  apaciyii)su  (to  be  read  for  upacciijnsu)  at  J  vi. 
187  (akkhini  a.  "the  eyes  gave  out")  and  Pot.  pres.  apace 
ThA  72  (on  V.40).  —  2.  [=  apacayatl]  to  honour, 
esteem;  observe,  guard  Vin  1.264  (apacinayamana  civaraq 
(?)  V.  1  apacitiyamana;  trsl.  guarding  his  claim  is,  Vin 
Texls)\  M  1.324  (see  detail  under  apavinati)  Th  I,  186 
(grd.  apacineyya  to  be  honoured);  J  v.339  (anapacinanto 
for  T.  anupacinanto,  v.  1.  anapavinati). —  pp.  apacita  (q.v.). 

Apacca  [Vedic  apatya  nt.;  der.  fr.  apa]  offspring,  child 
D  1.90  (bandhupada"  cp.  mundaka),  103  (id.);  S  I.69 
(an°)  Sn  991  ;  DA   1. 254. 

Apaccakkha  (adj.)  [a  -\-  pati  -\-  akkha]  unseen;  in  instr.  f. 
apaccakkbaya  as  adv.  without  being  seen,  not  by  direct 
evidence  Miln  46  sq. 

Apacchapurima  (adj.)  [a  -f-  paccha  +  purima]  "neither 
after    nor    before",    i.  e.    at    the    same    time,    simultaneous 

J  "'-zgs- 

Apajaha  (adj.)  [a  -j-  pajaha]  not  giving  up,  greedy,  miserly 
A  111.76  (v.  I.  apanuta;  C.  expU-  (a)vaddhinissita  manat- 
thaddha). 

Apajita  (nt.)  [pp.  of  apa  +  \\]  defeat  Dh.   105. 

Apajjhayati  [apa  f  jhayati' ;  cp.  Sk.  abhi-dhyayati]  to  muse, 
meditate,  ponder,  consider  M  1.334  (nijjhayati  +);  m.l4(id.). 

Apannaka  (adj.)  =  apaiina,  ignorant  Dpvs  VI. 29. 

Apatthapeti    [Cans.   fr.  apa-tilthati,  cp.  Sk.  apa  +  sthS  to 

stand  aloof]  to  put  aside,  leave  out,  neglect  J  iv.308;  v.236. 


Apa^qaka  (adj.)  [a -f- pannaka;  see  pannaka;  Weber  Ind. 
Str.  UI.150  &  Kuhn,  Beitr.  p.  53  take  it  as  ^a-prasna-ka] 
certain,  true,  absolute  M  1.401,  411 ;  A  v.85,  294,  296; 
J  1.104  (where  expl"!  as  elcatjsika  aviruddba  niyyanika). 

ApanQtjakata  (f.)  [abstr.  of  apannaka]  certainty,  absolu- 
teness S  IV.351   sq. 

Apatacchika  only  in  kbarapatacch°  (q.  v.)  a  kind  of  torture. 

Apattha'  (adj.)  [Sk.  apSsta,  pp.  of  apa  +  as']  thrown 
away   Dh   149  (=:chaddita  DhA  ill. 112). 

Apattha^  2"''   pi.  pret.  of  papunati  (q.  v.). 

Apatthaja  =:  avatthata  covered  Th  i,  759. 

Apatthita  &  Apatthlya  see  pattbeti. 

Apadana  (nt.)  i.  [=Sk.  apadana]  removing,  breaking  off, 
D  111.88.  —  2.  [=  Sk.  avadana  cp.  ovada]  advice,  admoni- 
tion, instruction,  morals  Vin  11.4  (an°  not  taking  advice), 
7  (id.)  M  1.96;  A  V.337  sq.  (saddha°)  Th  i,  47.  —  3. 
legend,  life  history.  In  the  title  Mahapadana  suttanta  it 
refers  to  the  7  Buddhas.  In  the  title  Apadanai),  that  is 
'the  stories',  it  refers  almost  exclusively  to  Arahants.  The 
other,  (older),  connotation  seems  to  have  afterwards  died 
out.  See  Dialogues  11. 3.  —  Cp.  also  pariyapadana. 

Apadisa  [fr.  apa  -j-  dis']  reference,  testimony,  witness 
DhA  11.39. 

Apadisati  [apa  -f-  disati]  to  call  to  witness,  to  refer  to,  to 
quote  Vin  111.159;  J  1215;  in.234;  IV.203;  Miln  270; 
DhA  11.39;  Nett  93. 

Apadesa  [cp.  Sk.  apadesa]  i.  reason,  cause,  argument  M  1.287 
(an°).  —  2.  statement,  designation  PvA  8.  —  3.  pretext  J 
111.60;    IV.13;   PvA  154.  Thus  also  apadesaka  J  vi.179. 

Apadharetl  [Caus.  of  apa  +  dllf,  cp.  Sk.  ava-dhSrayati,  but 
also  BSk.  apadharayati  Divy  231]  to  observe,  request, 
ask  ThA   16. 

Apanata  [pp.  of  apanamati]  "bent  away",  drawn  aside,  in 
sler.  eombn  abhinata  -\-  apanata  ("strained  forth  &  strained 
aside"  Mrs  Rh.  D.  Kindred  S.  p.  39)  M  1.386;  S  I.28. 

Apanamati  [semantically  doubtful]  to  go  away  Sn  1102 
(apanamissati,  v.  1.  apalam°  &  apagam";  expld  at  Nd'^  60 
by  vajissati  pakkhamissati  etc.  —  pp.  apanata  (q.  v.)  — 
Caus.  apanameti. 

Apanameti  [Caus.  fr.  apanamati]  I.  to  take  away,  remove 
M  1.96  =  A  1. 198  (kathaij  bahiddha  a.  carry  outside); 
Kh  V111.4  (=  aiinar)  thanaq  gameti  KhA  220).  —  2. 
[=Sk.  ava-namati]  to  bend  down,  lower,  put  down  Vin 
11.208  (chattai));  S  1.226  (id.);  J  11.287  (id-,  v.  1.  apanelva); 
I)   I.I 26  (hatthai),  for  salute). 

Apanidahati  (&  apanidheti)  [apa  +  ni  +  dha,  cp.  Vedic 
apadha  hiding-place;  Sk.  apadadhali  =  Gr.  «tot/&i(j«i  = 
Lat.  abdo  "do  away"]  to  hide,  conceal  Vin  iv.123  ("dheli, 
''dheyya,  "dhessali);  PvA  215  ("dhaya  ger.).  —  pp.  apa- 
nihita.  —  Caus.  apanidbapeti  to  induce  somebody  to 
conceal  Vin   iv.123. 

Apanihita  [pp.  of  apanidahati]  concealed,  in  abstr.  "(tat) 
(nt.)  hiding,  concealing,  theft  PvA  216. 

Apanita  [Sk.  apamta,  pp.  of  apa  -|-  »>,  see  apaneti  &  cp. 
also  onita  =  apanita]  taken  away  or  off.  removed,  dis- 
pelled PvA  39. 

Apanudati  &  Apanudeti  [apa  +  nud,  cp.  Vedic  apanudati 
&  Caus.  Sk.  apanudayati]  to  push  or  drive  away,  remove, 
dispel;  pres.  apanudeti  Miln  38.  aor.  apanudi  Pv  1.8° 
(=  apanesi  PvA  41);  il.3'«  (=  avahari  aggahesi  PvA  86); 
Davs  i.S.  ger.  apanujja  D  ii.2«3.  See  also  der.  apanudana. 


Apanudana 


52 


Apalokita 


Apanudana  &  Apanudana  (nt.)  [Sk.  apanodana,  fr.  apa- 
nudati]  taking  or  diiving  away,  removal  Vin  11.148  = 
J  1.94  (dukkha°);  Sn  252  (id.);  PvA   114  (id.). 

Apanuditar  [n-  ag.  fr.  apanudali,  Sk.  apanoditr]  remover, 
dispeller  D  111.148. 

Apancti  [apa  +  ni]  to  lead  away,  take  or  put  away, 
remove  J  1.62,  138;  11.4,  155  (aor.  apanayi)  111.26;  Miln 
188,  259,  413;  PvA  41,  74,  198  (=harati)  Sdhp  63. 
Pass,  apanlyati  S  1.176.  —  pp.  apanita  (q.  v.). 

Apaplbatl  [apa+pibati]  to  drink  from  something  J  111.126 
(aor.   apapasi). 

Apabbuhati  &  Apabyuhatl  [apa  +  vi  +  uh]  to  push  off, 

remove,  scrape  away  A  111.187  (apaviyuhitva,  vv.  11.  °bbn- 
hitva);  J  1.265  (pagsur)).  —  Caus.  "byuhapeti  to  make 
remove  or  brush  J  IV. 349  (pagsuq). 

Apabyama  see  apavyama. 

Apamara]  [Sk.  apasmara]  epilepsy  Vin  1.93.  Cp.  apasmara. 

Apamarika  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  apasmarin]  epileptic  Vin  iv.8, 
10,   II. 

Apayati  [Sk.  apayati,  apa  +  yg]  to  go  away  J  vi.j83 
(apayati  metri  causa;  expld-  by  C.  as  apagacchati  pala- 
yati).  —  Caus.  apayapeti  [Sk.  apayapayati]  to  make  go, 
drive  away,  dismiss  M   111.176;   S  II.  1 1 9. 

Apayana  (nt.)  [Sk.  apayana,  fr.  apayati]  going  away,  retreat 
D  1.9  (opp.  upa°);  DA  1.95. 

Apara  (adj.)  [Vedic  apara,  der.  fr.  apa  with  compar.  suffix 
-ra  =  ldg.  *aporos  "further  away,  second";  cp.  Gr.  xTruTifU 
farther,  Lat.  aprilis  the  second  month  (after  March,  i.  e. 
April).  Goth,  afar  r:=  after]  another,  i.  e.  additional,  fol- 
lowing, next,  second  (with  pron.  inflexion,  i.  e.  nom.  pi. 
apare)  D  111.190  ("paja  another,  i.e.  future  generation); 
Sn  791,  1089  (n^);  J  1.59  (aparaq  divasar]  on  some  day 
following);  III. 51  (apare  tayo  sahaya  "other  friends  three", 
i.e.  three  friends,  cp.  similarly  Fr.  nous  autres  Frangais); 
IV. 3  (dlpa);  PvA  81  ("divase  on  another  day),  226;  with 
other  part,  like  aparo  pi  D  iii  12S.  —  nt.  apararj  what 
follows  i.  e.  future  state,  consequence;  future  Vin  1.35 
(nSparaq  nothing  more);  Sn  1092  (much  the  same  as 
punabbhava,  cp.  Nd^  61).  Cases  adverbially;  aparai)  (ace.) 
further,  besides,  also  J  1.256;  111.278;  often  with  other  part, 
like  athaparar)  &  further,  moreover  Sn  974;  and  puna 
c^  aparar)  It  100;  Miln  418  (so  read  for  puna  ca  paraij) 
and  passim ;  aparam  pi  Vism  9.  —  aparena  in  future  U 
III. 201.  —  Repeated  (reduplicative  formation)  aparaparai] 
(local)  to  &  fro  J  1.265,  278;  PvA  198;  (temporal)  again 
and  again,  off  &  on  J  11.377;  Miln  132  VvA  271;  PvA 
176  (=  punappunai)). 

-anta  (aparanta)  =  aparai],  with  anta  in  same  function 
as  in  cpds,  vananta  (see  anta'  5):  (a.)  further  away,  west- 
ward J  V.471;  Miln  292  (janapada).  (b.)  future  D  1.30 
(°kappika,  cp.  DA  1.118);  M  11.228  (°anuditthi  thought 
of  the  future);  S  HI. 46  (id.),  -apariya  (fr.  aparapara) 
ever- following ,  successive,  continuou ,  everlasting;  used 
with  ref.  to  kamma  J  v.  1 26;  Miln  108.  -bhaga  the  future, 
lit.  a  later  part  of  time,  only  in  loc.  aparabhage  at  a 
future  date,  later  on  J  1.34,  262;  iv.i;  VvA  66. 

Aparajju  (adv.)  [Sk.  apare-dyus]  on  the  foil,  day  Vin  II. 167  ; 
S  1.186;  Miln  48. 

Aparajjhatl  [Sk.  aparadhyate,  apa  -f-  radh]  to  sin  or  offend 
against  (c.  loc.)  Vin  11.78  =  111.161  ;  J  v.68;  vi.367;  Miln 
189;  PvA '263.  —  pp.  aparaddha  &  aparadhita  (q.  v.). 

Aparaiina  (nt.)  [apara  -f-  anna  =  anna]  "the  other  kind  of 
cereal",  prepared  or  cooked  cereals,  pulse  etc.  Opp.  to 
pubbanna  the  unprepared  or  raw  corn  (=  amakadhaiifia 
Vin  IV. 265;  Vin  III.151  (pubb^^-);  IV.265,  267;  A  IV. 
108,  112  (tila-mugga-masa°;  opp.  sali-yavaka  etc.);  Nd' 
314  (aparannai)  nama  supeyyaq);  J  v. 406  ("jS  =  harenuka, 
pea);  Miln  1 06  (pubbanna").  See  also  dhanna  &  harita. 


Aparaddha  [pp-  of  aparajjhati]  missed  (c.  ace),  gone 
wrong,  failed,  sinned  (against  =  loc.)  D  1.91,  103,  180; 
S  1. 103  (suddhimaggari);  Th  I,  78;  Sn  891  (suddhir)  = 
viraddha  khalita  Nd'  300);  PvA   195. 

Aparapaccaya  (adj.)  [a  +  para  +  paccaya]  not  dependent 
or  relying  on  others  Vin  1. 1 2  (vesarajja-ppatta  -f);  D 
I.I  10  (id.);  M  II 41;  M  1.491 ;  S  111.83;  DA  1.278  (— 
nassa  paro  paccayo). 

Aparajlta  (adj.)  [Vedic  aparajita;  a  -f  parajita]  unconquered 
Sn   269;  J   1.71,   165. 

Aparadha  [fr.  apa  +  radh]  sin,  fault,  offence,  guilt  J  1.264 
(nir°);  111.394;   IV.495;   VvA  69;    PvA   87,   116. 

Aparadhika  (adj.)  [fr.  aparadha,  cp.  Sk.  aparadhin]  guilty, 
offending,  criminal  J  11.117  (v5ja°);  Miln  149  (issara°), 
189  (aparadhikata). 

Aparadhita  [pp.  of  aparadheti,  Caus.  of  apa  +  radh;  cp. 
aparaddha]  transgressed,  sinned,  failing  J  V.26  (so  read 
for  aparadh^  ito). 

Aparayin  (adj.)  [a  -f  parayin,  cp.  parayana]  having  no  sup- 
port J   111.386  (f.  °I;    C.  appatittha  appatisarana). 

Apalapin  see  apalasin  [Sk.  apalapin  "denying,  concealing" 

different]. 

Apalajeti  [apa  -}-  laleti]  to  draw  over  to  Vin  1.85. 

Apalayin  (adj.)  [a  -)-  palayin]  not  running  away,  steadfast, 
brave,  fearless  Nd'^  13  (abhini  anutrasin  apalayin  as 
expln-  of  acchambhin  and  vira);  J  IV.296 ;  v.4  (where  C. 
gives  variant  "apalapini  ti  pi  patho",  which  latter  has 
V. !.  apalasini  &  is  expld-  by  C.  as  palapa-rahite  anavajja- 
sarlre  p.  5 ).  See  also  apalasin. 

Apalasin  (adj.)  [apalasin;  but  spelling  altogether  uncertain. 
There  seems  to  exist  a  confusion  between  the  forms  apa- 
layin, apalapin  &  apalasin,  owing  to  freq.  miswriting  of 
s,  y,  p  in  MSS.  (cp.  Nd-  introd.  p.  XIX.).  We  should 
be  inclined  to  give  apalasin,  as  the  lectio  difficilior,  the 
preference.  The  expl"-  at  Pug  22  as  "yassa  puggalassa 
ayar)  palaso  pahino  ayaq  vuccati  puggalo  apalasi"  does 
not  help  us  to  clear  up  the  etym.  nor  the  vv.  11.]  either 
"not  neglectful,  pure,  clean"  (=  apalapin  fr.  palasa  chaff, 
cp.  apalayin  at  J  v.4),  or  "not  selfish,  not  hard,  generous" 
(as  inferred  from  comb"-  with  amakkhin  &  amaccharin), 
or  "brave,  fearless,  energetic"  (=  apalayin)  D  III  47, 
cp.  Pug  22.  See  palasin. 

Apalibuddha  &  Apalibodha  [a  +  palibuddha,  pp.  of  pari  + 
brh,  see  palibujjhati]  unobstructed,  unhindered,  free  J  III. 
3S1   (^bodha);  Miln  388;  DhA  m.198. 

Apalekhana  (nt.)  [apa  -f  lekhana  from  Hkh  in  meaning 
of  lih,  corresponding  to  Sk.  ava-lehana]  licking  off,  in 
cpd.  hatthapalekhana  "hand-licking"  (i.  e.  licking  one's 
hand  after  a  meal,  the  practice  of  certain  ascetics)  M 
177  (with  V.  1.  hatthavalekhana  M  1.535;  Trenckner  com- 
pares BSk.  hastapralehaka  Lai.  Vist.  312  &  hastdvalehaka 
ibid.  323),  412;  Pug  55  (expld-  at  Pug  A  231  as  hatthe 
pindamhe  nitthite  jivhaya  hatthaq  apalekhati). 

Apalekhati  [apa  +  lekhati  in  meaning  of  Sk.  avalihati]  to 
lick  off  Pug  A  231   (hatthaq). 

Apalepa  in  "so  ^palepa  patito  jaragharo"  at  Th  2,  270  is 
to  be  read  as  "so  palepa°".  Morris's  interpret,  j P  T S. 
1886,   126  therefore  superfluous. 

Apalokana  (nt.)  [fr.  apaloketi]  permission,  leave,  in  '^kamma 
proposal  of  a  resolution,  obtaining  leave  (see  kamma  1.3) 
Vin  11.89;  'V.152 

Apalokita  [pp.  of  apaloketi;  Sk.  avalokita]  I.  asked  per- 
mission, consulted  S  111.5.  —  ^-  ("t.)  permission,  consent, 
M  1.337  (Nagapalokitar)  apalokesi).  —  3.  (nt.)  an  Ep.  of 
Nibbana  S  iv.370. 


Apalokin 


53 


Apatubha 


Apalokin  Gidj-)  [Sk.  avalokin]  "looking  before  oneself, 
looking  at,  cautious  Miln  398. 

Apaloketi  [BSk.  ava-lokayati]  I.  to  look  ahead,  to  look 
before,  to  be  cautious,  to  look  after  M  1-557  (v.  1.  for 
apacinatl,  where  J  v. 339  C.  has  avaloketi);  Miln  398.  — 
2.  to  look  up  to,  to  obtain  permission  from  (ace.),  to 
get  leave,  to  give  notice  of  Vin  III. 10,  II;  IV. 226  (ana- 
paloketva  :=  anapuccha),  267  (-f-  Spucchitva);  M  1.337; 
S  III. 95  (bhikkhusanghar)  anapaloketva  without  informing 
the  Sangha);  J  VI.298  (vajanaq);  DhA  I.67.  —  pp.  apalo- 
kita  (q.  v.).  See  also  apalokana  &  "lokin. 

Apavagga  [Sk.  apavarga]  completion,  end,  final  delivery, 
Nibbsna;  in  phrase  saggapavagga  Davs  11.62;  111.75. 

Apavattati  [apa  +  Vft,  cp.  Lat.  SvertoJ  to  turn  away  or 
aside,  to  go  away  J   iv.347  (v.  1.  apasakkati). 

Apavadati  [apa  +  vadati]  tq  reproach,  reprove,  reject, 
despise  D  1.122  (=  patikkhipati  DA  1.290);  S  v. 118 
(-f-  patikkosati). 

Apavahatl  [apa  -j-  vahati]  to  carry  or  drive  away;  Caus. 
apav3hett  to  remove,  give  up  Miln  324  (kaddamai)). 

Apavlttha  at  Pv  iii  8'  is  to  be  read  apaviddba  (q.  v.). 

ApaviQatl  is  probably  misreading  for  apacinatl  (see  apac"  2). 
As  V.  1.  at  J  V.339  (anapavinanto)  for  T.  anupacinanto 
(expld-  by  avaloketi  C).  Other  vv.  11.  are  anuvi"  &  apavi" ; 
meaning  "not  paying  attention".  The  positive  form  we 
find  as  apavinati  *to  take  care  of,  to  pay  attention  to" 
(c.  ace.)  at  M  1.324,  where  Trenckiier  unwarrantedly  as- 
sumes a  special  roet  ve^J  (see  Notes  p.  78'),  but  the 
vv.  U.  to  this  passage  (see  M.  1.557)  with  apavinati  and 
apacinatl  confirm  the  reading  apacinati,  as  does  the  gloss 
apaloketi. 

Apavlddha  [pp.  of  apavijjhati,  Vedic  apa  +  vyadh]  thrown 
away,  rejected,  discarded,  removed  S  I.202;  111.143;  Sn 
200  (susanasmir)  =  chaddita  SnA  250);  Th  i,  635  = 
Dh  292  (=  chaddita  DhA  111.452);  Pv  111.8-  (susanas- 
mii);  so  read  for  T.  apavittha);  J  1255;  111.426 ;  YI.90 
(=  chaddita  C).  Sdhp  366." 

Apaviyuhati  see  appabbuhatl. 

Apavlljati  see  apavinati  (=  apacinati). 

Apavyama  [apa  +  vyama]  disrespect,  neglect,  in  phrase 
apayvamato  (apaby°)  karoti  to  treat  disrespectfully,  to 
insult,  defile  S  1.226  (v.  1.  abyamato;  C.  expls-  apabya- 
inato  karitva  abyamato  katva);  Kvu  472  (vv.  11.  asabya- 
kato,  abyato,  apabyato;  Kvu  trsl.  270  n.  I  remarks:  "B. 
trsl. :  abyasakato.  The  Burmese  scholar  U.  Pandi,  suggests 
we  should  read  apabyakato,  by  which  he  understands 
blasphemously";  it  is  here  combd.  with  nitthubhati,  as 
at  DhA  11.36);  DhA  11.36  ("want  of  forbearance"  Ed.; 
doubtful  reading;  vv.  II.  appabyayakamma  &  apasama). 
For  further  detail  see  apasavya. 

Apasakkati  [apa  +  sakkati]  to  go  away,  to  go  aside  J 
'V.347  (v.  I.  for  apavattati);  VvA  loi;  PvA  265  (aor. 
°sakki  ^  apakkami). 

Apasavya  (adj.)  [apa  -f-  savya]  right  (i.  e.  not  left),  con- 
trary b'd  50  (T.  has  nitthubhitva  abyamato  karitva ;  vv. 
11.  are  apabhyamato,  abhyamato  &  C.  apasabySmato), 
where  C.  expU-  apasabyamato  karitva  by  apasabyai)  katva, 
"which  latter  corresponds  in  form  but  not  in  meaning  to 
Sk.  apasavyai)  karoti  to  go  on  the  right  side"  (Morris 
yPTS.   1886,  127).  —  See  apavyama. 

Apasada  [fr.  apa  -f  sad]  putting  down,  blame,  dispara- 
gement M  111.230. 

Apasadlta  [pp.  of  apasadeli]  blamed,  reproached,  disparaged 
S  11.219;  SnA  541. 


Apasadetl  [Caus.  of  apa -|- sad]  I-  to  refuse,  decline  Vin 
IV. 213,  263;  J  V.417  (=  uyyojeti).  —  2.  to  depreciate, 
blame,  disparage  Vin  lll.ioi;  M  111.230  (opp.  ussadeti); 
DA  1. 160.  —  pp.  apasadlta  (q.  v.). 

Apasmara  [Sk.  apasmara,  lit.  want  of  memory,  apa  -f  smf] 
epilepsy,  convulsion,  fit  J   lv.84.  Cp.  apamara. 

ApassantO  etc.  see  passati. 

Apassaya  [cp.  Sk.  apasraya,  fr.  apasseti]  I.  support,  rest 
ThA  258.  —  2.  bed,  bolster,  mattress,  in  kantak°  a 
mattress  of  thorns,  a  bolster  filled  with  thorns  (as  cushion 
for  ascetics)  M  1.78;  J  1493;  III. 235.  -sappassaya  with 
a  head  rest  J  iv.299. 

-pithaka  a  chair  with  a  head-rest  J  111235. 

Apassaylka  (adj.)  [fr.  apassaya;  cp.  Sk.  apasrayin  — °] 
reclining  on,  in  kantaka°  one  who  lies  on  a  bed  of 
thorns  (see  kantaka)  M  1.78 ;  J  IV.299  (v.  1.  kandikesa- 
yika);  Pug  55. 

Apassita  [pp.  of  apasseti]  I.  leaning  against  J  11.69  (tala- 
mular)  :=  nissaya  thita  C.).  —  2.  depending  on,  trusting 
in  (c.  ace.  or  loc.)  Vv  lo'  (parSgaraq  =  nissita  VvA 
loi);  J  1V.25  (balamhi  :=z  balanissita).  See  also  avassita. 

Apasseti  [Sk.  apasrayati,  apa  +  a  -f  sri]  to  lean  against, 
have  a  support  in  (ace),  to  depend  on.  —  I.  (lit.)  lean 
against  Vin  11.175  (bh'tti  apassetabbo  the  wall  to  be 
used  as  a  head-rest).  —  2.  (fig.)  mostly  in  ger.  apassaya 
dependent  upon,  depending  on,  trusting  in  (loc.  or  ace. 
or  — °)  Vin  111.38;  J  1. 214;  PvA  189.  —  pp.  apassita 
(q.  v.).  —  See  also  avasseti. 

Apassena  (nt.)  [fr.  apasseti]  a  rest,  support,  dependence 
M  111.127  (°ka);  D  111.224  (cattari  apassenani);  as  adj. 
caturSpassena  one  who  has  the  fourfold  support  viz. 
sankhay^  ekaq  patisevati,  adhivaseti,  parivajjeti,  vinodeti 
A  V.30. 

-phalaka   (cp.    Morris    jf  P  T  S.    1884,    71)   a   bolster- 
slab,  head-rest  Vin  1.48;  11.175,  209. 

Apahattar  [n.  ag.  to  apaharati]  one  who  takes  away  or 
removes,  destroyer  M  I  447  =  Kvu  528. 

Apahara  [Sk.  apahara,  fr.  apaharati]  taking  away,  stealing, 
robbing  J  11.34. 

ApaharaQa  (nt.)  =  apahara  Miln  195. 

Apaharati  [apa  -|-  hf]  to  take  away,  remove,  captivate,  rob 
J   111.315  (aor.   apaharayii));  Miln  413;  DA  I.38. 

Apakatata  (f)  [a  +  pakata  4- ta]  unfitness  Miln  232  (v.  1. 
apakatatta  perhaps  better). 

Apakatika  (adj.)  [a  -f  pakata  -f-  ika]  not  in  proper  or  natural 
shape,   out  of  order,  disturbed  DhA  II. 7.  Cp.  appakara. 

Apacina  (adj.)  [Vedic  apacina;  cp.  apScah  &  apaka,  western ; 
to  Lat.  opacus,  orig.  turned  away  (from  the  east  or  the 
sun)  i.  e.  opposite,  dark]  westerly,  backward,  below  S  111.84  i 
It  120  (apacfnai)  used  as  adv.  and  taking  here  the  place 
of  adho  in  comb"-  with  uddhaij  tiriyaij ;  the  reading  is  a 
conjecture  of  Windisch's,  the  vv.  U.  are  apacinaij ;  apacini, 
apaci  &  apaminai],  C.  exph   by  hettha). 

Apafuka  (adj.)  [a  -f  piltu  -f  ka(?),  ace.  to  Morris  J  P  T S. 
1893,  7  der.  fr.  apatu  not  sharp,  blunt,  uncouth.  This  is 
hardly  correct.  See  pfitur]  not  open,  sly,  insidious  Th  I, 
940  (as  v.  1.  for  T.  avatuka,  trsl.  by  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  as 
"unscrupulous",  by  Neumann  as  "ohne  Redlichkeit"). 
Context  suggests  a  meaning  similar  to  the  preceding 
nekatika,  i.  e.  fraudulent.  See  also  next. 

Apatubha  (adj.)  [a -f  patu -f  bha  (?),  at  the  only  passage 
changed    by    Morris    y  P  T  S.    1893,   7    to  apfituka  but 


Apatubha 


54 


Apitika 


without  reason]  =  apatuka,  i.e.  sly,  fraudulent  J  iv.i84 
(in  context  with  nekatika;  C.  expl^-  apatubhava  dhanup- 
pada-virahita,  in  which  latter  virahita  does  not  fit  in ;  the 
pass,   seems  corrupt). 

Apada  (?)  [apa  +  a  +  da]  giving  away  in  marriage  J  IV. 
179  (in  expl"-  of  anapada  unmarried;  reading  should  prob. 
be  apada  =  pariggaha). 

Apadaka  (adj.)  [a  +  pada  4-  ka]  not  having  feet,  footless, 
creeping,  Ep.  of  snakes  &  fishes  Vin  II.  1 10^  J  11.146 
(where  see  expl°-)-  Spelt  apada(ka)  at  It  87  (v.  1.  apada). 

Apana  (nt.)  breathing  out,  respiration  (so  Ch.;  no  ref.  in 
P.  Cauon?)  On  Prana  &  Ap5na  see  G.  W.  Brown  in 
J.  Am.  Or.  See.  39,  1919  PP-  104— 112.  See  anapana. 

Apanakatta  (nt.)  [a  +  panaka  +  ttaij]  "waterless  state", 
living  without  drinking  water  J  v.243. 

Apapaka  (adj.)  [a  +  papaka]  guiltless,  innocent  f.  ''ika 
Vv  3i<;  326. 

Apapata  (adj.)  [apa  +  a  +  pata]  falling  down  into  (c.  ace.) 
J  IV. 234  (aggio). 

Apapurana  (nt.)  [fr.  apapurati]  a  key  (to  a  door)  Vin 
1.80;  III. 119;  M  IU.127.  See  also  avapurana. 

Apapurati  &  Apapunati  [Sk.  apavrnoti ,  apa  +  a  -f  Vf, 
but  Vedic  oaly  apa-vrnoti  corresponding  to  Lat.  aperio  r= 
*apa-uerio.  On  form  see  Trenckner,  jK'oh-s  63]  to  open 
(a  door)  Vin  1.5  (apapur'  etai)  Amatassa  dvarar) :  imper. ; 
where  id.  p.  S  1.137  has  avapur°,  T.,  but  v.  1.  apapur°); 
Vv  64-1  (apapuranto  Amatassa  dvaraq,  expld-  at  VvA 
284  by  vivaranto);  It  80  (apavunanti  A.  dv.  as  T.  conj.; 
with  V.  1.  apanuinanti,  apapurenti  &  apapuranti).  —  pp. 
aparuta  (q.  v.).  —  Pass,  apapuriyati  [cp.  BSk.  apavuri- 
yali  M  Vastu  11. 158]  to  be  opened  M  III. 184  (v.  1.  ava°): 
J   1.63  (ava");  Th  2,  494  (apapunitva).  See  also  avapurati. 

Apabhata  [pp-  of  apa  +  a  +  bhf  cp.  Vedic  apa-bharati, 
but  Lat.  aufero  to  ava^j  taken  away,  stolen  J   III  54. 

Apaya  [Sk.  apSya,  fr.  apa  -|-  I,  cp.  apeti]  "going  away" 
viz.  —  I.  separation,  loss  Dh  211  (piya°  =  viyoga  DhA 
111.276).  —  2.  loss  (of  property)  D  111.181,  1S2;  A  H. 
166;  IV. 283;  J  111.387  (atth°).  —  3.  leakage,  out  flow 
(of  water)  D  1.74;  A  II. 166;  IV.287.  —  4.  lapse,  falling 
away  (in  conduct)  D  1. 100.  —  5.  a  transient  state  of  loss 
and  woe  after  death.  Four  such  states  are  specified  pur- 
gatory (niraya),  rebirth  as  an  animal,  or  as  a  ghost,  or 
as  a  Titan  (Asura).  Analogous  expressions  are  vinipata 
&  duggati.  All  combined  at  D  1.82;  in  1 1 1 ;  A  1.55;  It 
12,  73;  Nd^  under  kaya;  &  freq.  elsewhere.  —  apaya- 
duggativinipata  as  attr.  of  saqsara  S  11.92,  232;  IV.  158, 
313;  V.342;  opp.  to  khinapaya-duggati-vinipata  of  an 
Arahant  A  iv.405;  v. 182  sq.  —  See  also  foil,  pass.:  M 
111.25  (anapaya);  Sn  231;  Th  2,  63;  J  iv.299;  P"g  S'j 
VvA  118  (opp.  sugati);  PvA  103;  Sdhp  43,  75  &  cp. 
niraya,  duggati,  vinipata. 

-gamin  going  te  ruin  or  leading  to  a  state  of  suffering 
DhA  III. 175;  cp.  °gamaniya  id.  Ps.  1.94,  "gamanlyata 
J  IV. 499.  -mukha  "facing  ruin",  leading  to  destruction 
(=  vinasa-mukha  DA  1.268),  usually  as  nt.  „cause  ol 
ruin"  D  I.IOI  (cattari  apaya  mukhani);  III. 181,  182  (cha 
bhoganar)  a°  -mukhani,  i.  e.  causes  of  the  loss  of  one's 
possessions);  A  11.166;  iv.283,  287.  -samudda  the  ocean 
of  distress  DhA  III  432.  -sahaya  a  spendthrift  compa- 
nion D  III. 185. 

ApSylka  (adj.)  [also  as  apayika(q.  v.);  fr.  apaya]  belonging 
to  the  apayas  or  states  of  misery  D  1.103;  ill. 6,  9,  12; 
It  42;  PvA  60  (dukkha). 

Apayin  (adj.)  [fr.  apaya]  going  away  J  1. 1 63  (addha- 
raltav'apayin  =  addharatte  apayin  C).  -an°  not  going 
away,  i.  e.  constantly  following  (chaya  anapayini,  the 
shadow)  Dh  2;  Th  1,  1041 ;  Miln  72. 


Apara  (nt.)  [a  -f-  para]  I.  the  near  bank  of  a  river  J  111.230 
(-|-  atinnar),  C.  paratlrai)  atinnai)).  —  2.  (fig.)  not  the 
further  shore  (of  life),  the  world  here,  i.e.  (opp.  parag  ^ 
Nibbana)  Sn  1129,  1 130;  Nd^  62;  Dh  385  (expld-  as 
bahirani  cha  Syatanani  DhA  iv.i4i).  See  para  &  cp.  avara. 

Aparaneyya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  paraneti  -|-  a'']  that  which 
cannot  be  achieved,  unattainable  J  vi.36  (=  apapetabba). 

Aparuta  [Sk.  apavrta,  pp.  of  apapurati]  open  (of  a  door) 
Vin  1.7  =  M  1. 169  (aparuta  tesaij  Amatassa  dvara);  D 
1.136  (=  vivata-dvara  DA  1.297);  J  1-264  (°dvara). 

Apalamba  ["a  Vedic  term  for  the  hinder  part  of  a  carriage" 
Morris  J P T S.  1886,  128;  the  "Vedic"  unidentified]  a 
mechanism  to  stop  a  chariot,  a  safe  guard  "to  prevent 
warriors  from  falling  out"  (C.)  S  1.33  (Mrs  Rh.  D.  trsl. 
"leaning  board");  J  Vi.252  (v.  1.  upa";  Kern  trsl.  "rem- 
hout",  i.  e.   brake). 

Apahata  [pp.  of  apa  -\-  hf]  driven  off  or  back,  refuted, 
refused  Sn  826  (°smii)  =  apasadite  vade  SnA  54*)- 

Apl  (indecl.)  [Sk.  api  &  pi;  Idg.  *epi  *pi  *opi;  cp.  Gr. 
6T<  on  to,  ot;  (iSx/Sfv  behind,  hitiircx  back  ^  close  at  one's 
heels);  Lat.  ob.  in  certain  functions;  Goth,  iftuma.  — 
The  assimil.  form  before  vorvels  is  app°  (z=  Sk.  apy°). 
See  further  details  under  pi.]  both  prep.  &  conj,,  orig. 
meaning  "close  by",  then  as  prep,  "towards,  to,  on  to, 
on"  and  as  adv.  "later,  and,  moreover".  —  I  (prep.  & 
pref.)  (a)  prep.  c.  loc:  api  ratte  later  on  in  the  night 
(q.  v.)  —  (b)  pref.:  apidbana  putting  on  to;  apilahati 
bind  on  to,  apihita  (=Gr.  ixiierii,  epithet)  put  on  to, 
(q.  v.).  —  2.  (conj.  &  part  ).  (a)  in  affirmative  sentences 
meaning  primarily  "moreover,  further,  and  then,  even" : 
—  (a)  (single)  prothetic:  api  dibbesu  kamesu  even  in 
heavenly  joys  Dh  187;  ko  disva  na  pasldeyya  api  kanha- 
bhijatiko  even  an  unfortunate-born  Sn  563  api  yojanani 
gacchama,  even  for  leagues  we  go  Pv  IV. 10''  (=anekani 
yojanani  pi  g.  PvA  270.  Epithetic  (more  freq.  in  the 
form  pi):  muhuttam  api  even  a  little  while  Dh  106,  107; 
aham  api  datthukamo  I  also  wish  to  see  Sn  685.  Out  of 
prothetic  use  (=  even  =  even  if)  develops  the  conditional 
meaning  of  "if",  as  in  api  sakkunemu  (and  then  we 
may  =  if  we  may)  J  v.24  (c.  ^  api  nama  sakkuneyyama; 
see  further  under  (3  app'eva  nama).  —  api-api  in  corre- 
lation corresponds  to  Lat.  et-et  Sk  ca-ca,  meaning  both 
. . .  and,  and  ...  as  well  as,  &  is  esp.  freq.  in  comb"- 
app'  ekacce  .  . .  app'  ekacce  (and)  some  .  .  .  and  others, 
i.  e.  some  .  .  .  others  [not  with  Kern  Toev.  s.  v.  to  appa!], 
e.g.  at  D  1. 1 18;  Th  2,  216;  VvA  208,  etc.  -app'  ekada 
"morever  once"  =  sometimes  Vin  iv.178  ;  S  1.162  ;  iv.i  11 ; 
J  1.67;  DhA  in. 303,  etc.  —  (j3)  (in  comb"  with  other 
emphatic  or  executive  particles)  api  ca  further,  and  also, 
moreover  D  1.96;  Miln  25,  47.  -api  ca  kho  moreover, 
and  yet,  still,  all  the  same  It  89  (+ pana  v.  1.);  Miln 
20,  239.  -api  ca  kho  pana  all  the  same,  never  mind, 
nevertheless  J  1.253.  -ap*  ssu  so  much  so  Vin  11.76. 
-app'  eva  nama  (with  pot.)  (either)  surely,  indeed,  yes, 
I  reckon,  (or)  I  presume,  it  is  likely  that,  perhaps  Vin 
1. 16  (surely);  11.85  (id.);  cp.  pi  D  1.205  (sve  pi  upasaq- 
kameyyama  tomorrow  1  shall  surely  come  along),  226 
(siya  thus  shall  it  be);  M  1.46c  =  It  89  (moreover,  indeed); 
J  1. 168  (surely)  Vin  11.262  (perhaps)  J  v.421  (id.,  piya- 
vacar)  labheyyama).  —  (b)  in  interrog.-dubit.  sentences 
as  part,  of  interrog.  (w.  indie,  or  pot.)  corresponding  to 
Lat.  nonn*^,  i  e.  awaiting  an  affirmative  answer  ("not,  not 
then"):  api  yasai)  kulaputtai)  passeyya  do  you  not  see  .  .  . 
Vin  1.16;  api  samafla  balivadde  addasa  have  you  not 
then  seen  ...  S  1.115  ;  api  kinci  labhSmase  shall  we  then 
not  get  anything?  J  ill. 26;  api  me  pitarar)  passatha  do 
you  then  not  see  my  father?  PvA  38.  —  Also  combd- 
with  other  interr.  part.  e.g.  api  nu  J.  11.415. 

Apitika  (adj.)  [a  +  pitika]  fatherless  J  v.251. 


Apekkhati 


55 


Appa 


Apithiyati  [for  apidhiyati;  api  -f-  dha]  Pass,  of  apidahatl 
to  be  obstructed,  covered,  barred,  obscured  J  11.158.  See 
also  pithiyati. 

Apidahati  [api  +  dha,  cp.  Gr.  ixirliniiii]  to  put  on  (see 
api  I  b),  to  cover  up,  obstruct,  J  v. 60  (inf.  apidhetui)). 
pp.  apihita,  Pass,  apithiyati,  Der.  apidhana  (q.  v.). 

Apidhana  (nt.)  [Vedic  apidhana  in  same  meaning]  cover, 
lid  Vin  1.203,  204;  II. 1 22.  See  apidahati. 

Apiratte  [read  api  ratle,  see  api  i  aj  later  in  the  night 
J  VI.560. 

Apllapana  (nt.)  [fr.  api  -(-  lap]  counting  up,  repetition 
[Kern,  Toev,  s.v.  gives  der.  fr.  a  +  plavana]  Nctt  15,28, 
54;  Miln  37. 

Apilapanata  (f.)  in  the  pass,  at  Dhs  l4  =  Nd2  628  is 
evidently  meant  to  be  taken  as  a  -f-  pilapana  +  ta  (fr. 
pilavati,  plu),  but  whether  the  der.  &  interpret,  of  Dhs  A 
is  correct,  we  are  unable  to  say.  On  general  principles 
it  looks  like  popular  etym.  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  translates  (p.  16) 
"opposite  of  superficiality"  (lit  "not  floating");  see  her 
detailed  note  Dis  trsl.   16. 

Apiiapeti  [api  +  lap]  "to  talk  close  by",  i.  e.  to  count  up, 
recite,  or:  talk  idly,  boast  of  Miln  37  (sapatheyyaij). 

Api|andha  (adj.)  at  Vv  36'  should  be  read  as  apiladdha 
{=  Sk.  apinaddha)  pp.  of  apilandhati  (apilandhati)  "adorned 
with",  or  (vfith  v.  1.  SS)  as  apilandhana;  VvA  167  expls- 
by  analankata,  mistaking  the  a  of  api  for  a  negation. 

Apilandhana  (nt.)  [fr.  apilandhati,  also  in  shorter  (&  more 
usual)  form  pilandhana,  q.  v.]  that  which  is  tied  on,  i.e. 
band,  ornament,  apparel,  parure  Vv  64'",  64'8  (expW. 
inacurately  at  VvA  279  by;  a-karo  nipatamattai),  piland- 
hanai)  ^  abharanari);  J  VI. 472  (c.  pilandhitui]  pi  ayuttai)?). 

Api|ahatl  &  Apijandhatl  [Sk.  apinahyati,  on  n :  !  see  note 
on  gala,  &  cp.  guna:  gula,  venu:  velu  etc.  On  ndh  for 
yh  see  avanandhati]  to  tie  on,  fasten,  bind  together;  to 
adorn  oneself  with  (ace.)  J  V.400  (ger.  apilayha  r=  pijand- 
hitva  C.)  —  Cp.  apilandhana  &  pp    apiladdha. 

Apiha  (adj.)  [apihalu?  a -|-  piha,  uncertain  origin,  see  next. 
Morris  y.P.l.S.  1886  takes  it  as  a  +  sprha]  "unhankering" 
(Mrs  Rh.  D.)  S  i  181   (+akankha;  v.'l.  BB  asita). 

Apihalu  (adj.)  [a  -j-  pihalu,  analysed  by  Fausbbll  Sn.  Gloss, 
p.  229  as  a-sprhayalu,  but  Bdligh  evidently  different 
(see  below)]  not  hankering,  free  from  craving,  not  greedy 
S  1.187  =  Th  ',  1218  (akuhako  nipako  apihalu);  Sn  852 
(+  amaccharin,  expld-  at  SnA  549  as  apihana-silo,  patthana- 
tanhaya  rahito  ti  vultai)  hoti,  thus  perhaps  taking  it  as 
a -|- pi  (=  api) -|- hana  (fr.  dha,  cp.  pidahati  &  pihita); 
cp.  also  Nd^  227). 

Apihita  [pp.  of  apidahati]  covered  J   IV.4. 

ApuCCao4ata  (f.)  [a  +  puti  +  anda  -f-  ta]  "not  being  a 
rotten  egg,"  i.  e.  normal  state,  healthy  birth,  soundness 
M  1.357. 

ApuCCha  (adj.)  [a  +  puccha]  "not  a  question",  i.e.  not  to 
be  asked  Miln  316. 

Apekkha  (adj.)  [=apekkha]  waiting  for,  looking  for  S  1.122 

(otara°). 

Apekkhati  l.  [Sk.  aplksate,  apa  +  ik§]  to  desire,  long  for, 
look  for,  expect  Sn  435  (kame  n^apekkhate  cittar)),  773 
(ppr.  apekkhamana);  J  iv.226  (id.);  Dhs  A  365.  ana- 
pekkhamSna  paying  no  attention  to  (ace.)  Sn  59 !  J  v. 359-  — 
2.  [Sk.  aviksate,  ava  +  ik§;  see  avekkhati]  to  consider, 
refer  to,  look  at,  ger.  apekkhitva  (cp.  Sk.  aviksya)  with 
reference  to  VvA   13.  —  pp.  apekkhita  (q.  v.). 


Apelckhavant  (adj.)  [fr.  apekkha]  full  of  longing  or  desire, 
longing,  craving  Vin  iv.214;  S  III. 16;  Th  I,  558;  J  v.453 
(:=;  satanha);  Sn  A   76. 

Apekkha    &    Apekha  (f.)  [Sk.   apeksa,  fr.  apa  +  ik§.  The 

spelling  is  either  kkli  or  kh,  they  are  both  used  pro- 
miscuously, a  tendency  towards  kh  prevailing,  as  in 
upekha,  sekha]  attention,  regard,  affection  for  (loc);  desire, 
longing  for  (c.  loc.)  S  1.77;  HI.132;  v.409  (mata-pitusu); 
Vin  IV.214;  Sn  38  (^  vuccati  tanha  etc.  Nd265;  =  lanha 
sineha  SnA  76):  J  1.9,  141;  Thi,558;  Dh  345  (puttesu 
daresu  ca  ^  tanha  DhA  IV. 56);  Dhs  1059,  Il36(=alaya- 
karana-vasena  apekkhati  ti  apekkha  Dhs  A  365,  cp.  Dhs 
trsl.  279).  Freq.  as  adj.  ( — °or  in  comb"-  with  sa°  and 
an"),  viz.  Vin  111.90  (visuddha°);  S  1. 1 22  (otara'^);  sa° 
A  III. 258,  433;  iv6o  sq.;  an°  without  consideration, 
regardless,  indifferent  S  V.164;  A  111.252,  347,  434;  Sn 
200  (anapekkha  honti  nalayo);  J  19.  Cp.  anapekkhin  & 
dpekkhavant ;  also  B.Sk.  aveksata. 

Apekkhita  [pp.  of  apekkhati]  taken  care  of,  looked  after, 
considered  J  VI. 142,  149  (=  olokita  C). 

Apekkhln  (adj.)  [Sk.  apeksin,  but  B.Sk.  aveksin,  e.g.  Jtm 
215;  fr  apa  +  iks]  considering,  regarding,  expecting, 
looking  for;  usually  neg.  an"  indifferent  (against)  =  loc.) 
S  1. 16,  77;  II. 281  ;  111.19,  87;  Sn  166  (kamesu),  823 
(id),  857;  Dh  346.  Cp.  apekkhavant. 

Apeta  (adj.)  [pp.  of  apetl]  gone  away;  (med.)  freed  of, 
rid  of,  deprived  of  (instr.,  abl.  or  ° — )  Dh  9  (damasac- 
cena) ;  PvA  35  (dukkhato);  usually  ° —  in  sense  of 
"without,  -less",  e.  g.  apeta-kaddama  free  from  mud, 
stainless  Dh  95;  "valtha  without  dress  J  V.l6;  "viiiiiaiia 
without  feeling,  senseless  Dh  41 ;  Th  2,  468;  "vinnanatlai) 
senselessness,  lack  of  feeling  PvA  63. 

Apetatta  (nt.)  [abstr.   to  apeta]   absence  (of)  PvA  92. 

Apeti  [apa  -j-  I,  cp.  Gr.  '(x-mi)j.i,  Lat.  abeo,  Goth,  af-iddja] 
to  go  away,  to  disappear  D  1. 180  (upeti  pi  apeti  pij; 
J  1.292;  Sn  1143  (=  n'  apagacchanti  na  vijah.anli  Nd* 
66).  —  pp.  apeta  (q.  v.). 

Apetteyyata  (f.)  [a  +  petteyyata,  abstr.  fr.  "paitrya  fatherly] 
in  combn-  with  amatteyyata  irreverence  against  father 
and  mother  D  111.70  (cp.  Dh  332  &  DhA  iv.34). 

Apeyya    (adj.)    [a  +  peyya,  grd.  of  pa]  not   to  be  drunk, 

not  drinkable  J   VI. 205  (sagara). 

Apeslya  (nt.)  [?  of  uncertain  origin]  a  means  of  barring  a 
door  Vin  11. 154  (Bdhgh.  explns  on  p.  321:  apesi  ti  digha- 
darumhi  khanuke  pavesetva  kandaka-sakhahi  vinandhitva 
katatj  dvara-tthakanakai]). 

Apeslyamana  (adj.)  [ppr.  fr.  a -f  peseti  (q.  V.)]  not  being 
in  service  Vin  11. 177. 

App'  in  app^  ekacce  etc.  see  api. 

Appa  (adj.)  [Vedic  alpa,  cp.  Gr.  aKxiriX"  (AsTa^oi)  to 
empty  (to  make  little),  iAavecSvit;  weak;  Lilh.  alpnas  weak, 
alpstii  to  faint]  small,  little,  insignificant,  often  in  the 
sense  of  "very  little  =  (next  to)  nothing"  (so  in  most 
cpds.);  thus  expld.  at  VvA  334  as  equivalent  to  a  negative 
part,  (see  appodaka)  D  1.6 1  (opp.  mahant,  D.\  1.170^ 
pariltaka);  Sn  713,  775,  805,  896  (:=  appaka,  omaka, 
thoka,  lamaka,  jatukka,  parittaka  Nd'  306);  Dh  174;  J 
1.262;  Pug  39.  —  nt.  appar]  a  little,  a  small  portion,  a 
trifle;  pi.  appani  small  things,  trifles  A  11.26  r=  It  102: 
A  11.138;  Dh  20  (=  thokai)  eka-vagga-dvi-vagga-mattam 
pi  Dh.\  1. 158),  224  (°smiq  yacito  asked  for  little),  259. 
-aggha  of  little  value  (opp.  mahaggha  priceless)  J  1.9; 
P"g  33)  Dh.\  IV. 184.  -asaada  [liSk,  alpasvada,  cp.  Divy 
224  =  Dh  186;  alpa  +  a  -)-  svadj  of  little  taste  or  en- 
joyment, affording  little  pleasure  (always  used  of  kama) 
Vin  n.25  =  M  1. 130  =  A  111.97  =  Nd'  71  ;  Sn  61 ;  Dh 


Appa 


56 


Appativanlya 


1 86  {t^  supina-sadisataya  paritta-sukha  DhA  m  240);  Th  2, 
358  (:=  ThA  244);  J  11.313;  Vism  124. -atanka  little  (or  no) 
illness,  freedom  from  illness,  good  health  (=  appabadha 
with  which  often  conibd)  [BSk.  alpatanka  &  alpatankata] 
D  1.204  (+ appabadha);  ill. 166;  A  III. 65,  103;  Miln  14. 
-abadba  same  as  appatanka  (q.v.)  D  1.204;  in. 166,  237; 
M  11.125;  A.  1.25;  n.88;  111.30,  65  sq.,  103,  153;  Pv 
iv.i**;  "abadhata  id.  [cp.  BSk.  alpabadhata  good  health] 
A  1.38.  -ayuka  short  lived  D  1. 18;  PvA  103,  also  as 
"ayukin  Vv  41".  -ahara  taking  little  or  no  food,  fasting 
M  11.5;  Sn  165  (=  eka.sana-bhojitaya  ca  parimlta-bhojitaya 
ca  SnA  207),  also  as  °aharata  M  1.245;  i'-5-  -odaka 
having  little  or  no  water,  dry  Sn  777  (macche  va  appodake 
khinasote  =  parittodake  Nd'  50) ;  Vv  84'  (+  appabhakkha  ; 
expld-  at  VvA  334  as  "appa-saddo  h'  ettha  abhavattho 
appiccho  appanigghoso  ti  adisu  viya"J;  J  1-70;  DhA  IV. 12. 
-kasira  in  instr.  °kasirena  with  little  or  no  difficulty  D 
1. 251;  S  V.51;  Th  I,  16.  -kicca  having  few  duties,  free 
from  obligations,  free  from  care  Sn  144  (=  appai) -kiccar) 
assa  ti  KhA  241).  -gandba  not  smelling  or  having  a  bad 
smell  Miln  252  (opp.  sugandha).  -ttha  "standing  in  little"; 
i.e.  connected  with  little  trouble  D  1.143;  ^  1. 169.  -tha- 
maka  having  little  or  no  strength,  weak  S  iv.206.  -dassa 
having  little  knowledge  or  wisdom  Sn  1 1 34  (see  Nd^  69; 
expH-  by  paritta-paiiiia  SnA  605).  -nigghosa  with  little 
sound,  quiet,  still,  soundless  (cp.  VvA  334,  as  quoted 
above  under  ^odaka)  A  v.  15  (-j- appasadda);  Sn338;  Nd' 
377;  Miln  371.  -panna,  of  little  wisdom  J  11.166;  111.223, 
263.  -punna  of  little  merit  M  11. 5.  -punnata  having  little 
merit,  unworthiness  Pv  iv.io'.  -pbalata  bringing  little 
fruit  PvA  139.  -bhakkha  having  little  or  nothing  to  eat 
Vv  84'.  -bhoga  having  little  wealth,  i.  e.  poor,  indigent 
Sn  114  (:=  sannicitanaq  ca  bhoganai)  ayamukhassa  ca 
abhavato  SnA  173).  -mannati  to  consider  as  small,' to 
underrate:  see  separately,  -matta  little,  slight,  mean, 
(usually  as  °ka;  not  to  be  confounded  with  appamatta^) 
A  III. 275;  J  1.242;  also  meaning  "contented  with  little" 
(of  the  bhikkhu)  It  103  =  A  11.27  ;  f-  °^  trifle,  smallness, 
Insignificance  D  1. 91;  DA  1.55.  -mattaka  small,  insigni- 
ficant, trifling,  nt.  a  trifle  (cp.  "matta)  Vin  I,  213;  II. 177 
(°vissajjaka  the  distributor  of  little  things,  cp.  A  111.275 
&  Vin  IV.38,  155);  D  1.3  (=appamatta  etassa  ti  appa- 
mattakaq  DA  1.55);  J  1167;  111.12  (=  anu);  PvA  262. 
-middha  "little  slothful",  i.e.  diligent,  alert  Miln  412. 
-rajakkha  having  little  or  no  obtuseness  D  11.37;  M  1.169; 
Sdhp  519.  -ssaka  having  little  of  one's  own,  possessing 
little  A  1.261;  11.203.  -sattha  having  few  or  no  com- 
panions, lonely,  alone  Dh  123.  -sadda  free  from  noise, 
quiet  M  II. 2,  23,  30;  A  V.15;  Sn  925  (=  appanigghosa 
Nd'  377);  Pug  35;  Miln  371.  -siddhika  bringing  little 
success  or  welfare,  dangerous  J  IV.4  (=  mandasiddhi 
vinasabahula  C);  VI.34  (samuddo  a.  bahu-antavayiko). 
-SSUta  possessing  small  knowledge,  ignorant,  uneducated 
D  1.93  (opp.  bahussuta);  111.252,  282;  S  iv.242;  It  59; 
Dh  152;  Pug  20,  62;  Dhs  1327.  -harita  having  little 
or  no  grass  S  1. 169;  Sn  p.  15  (=  pavitta-harita-tina 
SnA   154). 

Appaka  (adj.)  [appa -f  ka]  little,  small,  trifling;  pi.  few.  nt. 
°r)  adv.  a  little  D  II. 4;  A  v. 232  sq.,  253  sq.;  Sn  909 
(opp.  bahu);  Dh  85  (appaka  =  thoka  na  bahu  DhA  11. 
160);  Pv  i.io'  (=paritta  PvA  48);  il.g";  Pug  62;  PvA 
6,  60  (:=  paritta).  f.  appika  J  1.228.  —  instr.  appakena 
by  little,  i.  e.  easily  DA  1. 256.  -anappaka  not  little,  i.  e. 
much,  considerable,  great;  pi.  many  S  IV. 46;  Dh  144; 
Pv  i.ii'  (=  bahu  PvA  58);  PvA  24,  25  (read  anappake 
pi  for  T.  ''appakeci;  so  also  KhA  208). 

Appakara  (adj.)  [a  -\-  pakara]  not  of  natural  form,  of  bad 
appearance,  ugly,  deformed  J  v.69  (=  sarlrappakSra-rahita 
dussanthana  C).  Cp.  apakatika. 

Appaki^liia  [nppa  +  kinna,  although  in  formation  also  = 
a  -f"  pakinna]  little  or  not  crowded,  not  overheaped  A 
V.I 5  (C.  anakinna). 


Appagabbha  (adj.)  [a  -(-  pagabbha]  unobtrusive,  free  from 
boldness,  modest  S  11.198^  Miln  389,  Sn  144,  852  (cp. 
Nd'  228  &  KhA  232);  Dh  245. 

AppaCCaya  [a  +  paccaya]  I.  (n.)  discontent,  dissatisfaction, 
dejection,  sulkiness  D  1.3  (==  appatlta  houti  tena  atuttha 
asomanassita  ti  appacayo:  domanass'  etai]  adhivacanai) 
DA  1.52);  III. 159;  M  1.442;  A  1.79,  124,  187;  11203; 
Ill.l8l  sq. ;  IV.168,  193;  J  11.277;  Sn  p.  92  (kapa -f 
dosa  -f-  appacaya);  Vv  8331  (=  domanassaq  VvA  343); 
SnA  423  (=  appatitai]  domanassaij).  —  2.  (adj.)  uncon- 
ditioned  Dhs   1084,   1437. 

Appall"  [a  +  pati°]  see  in  general  under  pati°. 

Appatlkarika(adj.)  [a  -f  patikarika]  "not  providing  against", 
i.  e.  not  making  good,  not  making  amends  for,  destructive 
J  V.418  (spelling  here  &  in  C.  appati"). 

Appatlkopeti  [a  +  patikopeti]  not  to  disturb,  shake  or 
break  (fig.)  J   v.  173  (uposathaq). 

Appatikkhippa  (adj.)  [a  +  patikkhippa,  grd.  of  patikkhi- 
pati]  not  to  be  refused  J  11.370. 

Appatlgandhlka  &  °iya  (adj.)  [a  +  pati  +  gandha  +  ika] 
not  smelling  disagreeable,  i.  e.  with  beautiful  smell,  scented, 
odorous  J  V.405  (°ika,  but  C.  °iya;  expld-  by  sugandhena 
udakena  samannagata);  Vl.518;  Pv  Il.r-^O;  II1.2'"'. 

Appa^lgha  (adj.)  [a  -f-  patigha]  (a)  not  forming  an  obstacle, 
not  injuring,  unobstructive  Sn  42  (see  expld-  at  Nd'^  239; 
SnA  88  expls.  "katthaci  satte  va  sankhare  va  bhayena 
na  patihaniiati  ti  a.").  —  (b)  psychol.  1. 1.  appld.  to  rupa: 
not  reacting  or  impinging  (opp.  sappatigha)  D  HI.217; 
Dhs  660,  756,   1090,   1443. 

Appa^icchavi  (adj.)  at  Pv  u.l"  is  faulty  reading  for  sam- 
patitacchavi  (v.  1.). 

Appa^lbhaga  (adj.)  [a  -\-  patibhaga]  not  having  a  counterpart, 
unequalled,  incomparable  DhA  1.423  (=  anuttara). 

Appa^ibhaQa  (adj.)  [a  +  patibhana]  not  answering  back, 
bewildered,  cowed  down  Vin  111.162;  A  111.57;  °r)  karoti 
to  intimidate,  bewilder  J   V.238,  369. 

Appa^lina  (adj.)  [a  +  patima  fr.  prep,  pati  but  cp.  Vedic 
apratimana  fr.  prati  -f-  mi]  matchless,  incomparable,  in- 
valuable Th   I,  614;  Miln   239. 

Appatlvattiya  (adj.)  [a  -f  pati  +  vattiya  =  vrtya,  grd.  01 
Vft]  (a)  not  to  be  rolled  back  Sn  554  (of  dhammacakka, 
may  however  be  taken  in  meaning  of  I).).  —  (b)  irresist- 
able  J  11.245  (sihanada).  A'oie.  The  spelling  with  t  is 
only  found  as  v.  1.  at  J  11.245  j  otherwise  as  t. 

Appatlvaoa  (nt.)  [a  -|-  pativana,  for  "vrana,  the  guna-form 
of  Vf,  cp.  Sk.  prativarana]  non-obstruction,  not  hindering, 
not  opposing  or  contradicting  A  150;  III.41 ;  V.93  sq. ; 
adj.  J  1.326;  Th  2,   55. 

AppatlvaQita  (f.)  [abstr.  from  ( ap  )pativana]  not  being 
hindered,  non-obstruction,  free  effort;  only  in  phrase 
"asantufthita  ca  kusalesu  dhammesu  appativanita  ca 
padhaaasmirj"  (discontent  with  good  states  and  the  not 
shrinking  back  in  the  struggle  Dhs  trsl.  358)  A  1. 50, 
95  =  D  III. 214  =  Dhs   1367. 

AppatlvaQi  (f.)  [almost  identical  w.  appativanita,  only  used 
in  diff.  phrase]  non-hindrance,  non-restriction,  free  action, 
inpulsive  effort;  only  in  stock  phrase  cbando  vayamo 
ussaho  ussolhi  appativani  S  11.132;  v.440;  A  11.93, 
195;  111.307  sq. ;  IV.320;  Nd'i  under  chanda  C.  [cp.  simi- 
larly   Divy  654]. 

Appativaoiya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  a  +  pati  +  Vf;  cp.  BSk. 
aprativanih  Divy  655;  M  Vastu  111-343]  "o'  'o  be  ob- 
structed, irresistible  S  1.2 1 2  (appld-  to  Nibbana ;  Mrs.  Rh.  D. 
Kindred  S.  p.  274  trsls.  "that  source  from  whence  there 
is  no  turning  back"). 


Appamanna 


57 


Appicchata 


Appativlddha  (adj.)  [a  +  pati  -)-  viddha]  "not  shot  through" 
i.  e.   unhurt  J   vi.446. 

Appativibhatta  ("bhogin)  (adj.)  [a  +  pati  +  vibhatta]  (not 
eating)  without  sharing  with  others  (with  omission  of 
another  negative:  see  Trenckner,  Miln  p.  429,  where  also 
Bdhgh's  expln)  A  H1289;  Miln  373;  cp.  Miln  trsl.  11.292. 

Appatlvekkhiya  [ger.  of  a  -|-  pati  +  avekkhati]  not  ob- 
serving or  noticing  J  IV.4  (=  apaccavekkhitva  anavek- 
khitvS  C). 

Appafisankha  (f.)  [a  +  patisankha]  want  of  judgment  Pug 
21   =  Dhs   1346. 

AppaHsandhlka  (and  °iya)  (adj.)  [a  +  patisandhi  -j-  ka 
(ya)j  I.  what  cannot  be  put  together  again,  unmendable, 
irreparable  (°iya)  Pv  1.12'  (=  puna  pakatiko  na  hoti  PvA 
66)  =  J  111.167  (=  patipakaliko  katug  na  sakka  C).  — 
2.  incapable  of  reunion,  not  subject  to  reunion,  i.  e.  to 
rebirth  J   v.ioo  (°bhava). 

Appatlsama  (adj.)  [a  -|-  pati  =  sama  ;  cp.  BSk.  apratisama 
M  Vastu  1. 104]  not  having  it's  equal,  incomparable  J  1.94 
(Baddha-siri). 

AppaflssavatS  (f-)  [a  +  patissavatS]  want  of  deference 
Pug  20  =  Dhs  1325. 

Appa^lhita  (adj.)  [a  +  panihita]  aimless,  not  bent  on 
anything,  free  from  desire,  usually  as  nt.  aimlessness, 
comb<i-  w.  animittat]  Vin  iu.92,  93  =  iv.25;  Dhs  351, 
508,  556.  See  on  term  Cpd.  67;  Dhs  trsl.  93,  143  & 
cp.   panihita. 

Appatittha  (adj.)  [a  -f  patittha]  I.  not  standing  still  S 
I.I.  —  2.  without  a  footing  or  ground  to  stand  on,  bot- 
tomless Sn  173. 

AppatiSSa  (&  appatissa)  (adj.)  [a  -)-  pati  -|-  sru]  not  docile, 
rebellious,  always  in  comb"-  with  agarava  A  11.20;  111.7 
sq.,  14  sq.,  247,  439.  Appatissa-vasa  an  unruly  elate, 
anarchy  J  U.352.  See  also  pa^iSEa. 

Appatita  (adj.)  [a  -f  patita,  of  prati  -)-  i,  Sk.  pratita]  dis- 
satisfied, displeased,  disappointed  (cp.  appaccaya)  J  v.  103 
(at  this  passage  preferably  to  be  read  with  v.  1.  as  ap- 
patika  =  without  husband,  C.  ex  pis-  assamika),  155  (cp. 
C.  on  p.  156);  DA  1.52;  SnA  423. 

App^duttha  (adj.)  [a  -f-  paduttha]  not  corrupt,  faultless,  of 
good  behaviour  Sn  662  (=  pados&bhavena  a.  SnA  478); 
Dh  137  (=  niraparadha  DhA  in. 70). 

Appadhagsa  (adj.)  \j=^  appadhaijsiya,  Sk.  apradhvaqsya]  not 
to  be  destroyed  J  iv.344  (v.  1.  duppadhaqsa)' 

AppadhaQSlka  (&  °iya)  (adj.)  [grd.  of  a  +  padhaijseti] 
not  to  be  violated  or  destroyed,  inconquerable,  indestruct- 
able  D  ui.175  (°ika,  v.  1.  °iya);  J  m.159  (°iya);  VvA 
208  ("iyaj;  PvA  117  (°iya).  Cp.  appadbaqsa. 

Appadhaqslta  (adj.)  [pp.  of  a  +  padhagseti]  not  violated, 
unhurt,  not  offended  Vin  IV. 229. 

Appana  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  arpana,  abstr.  fr.  appeti  =  arpayati 
from  of  f,  to  fix,  turn,  direct  one's  mind;  see  appeti] 
application  (of  mind),  ecstasy,fixing  of  thought  on  an  ob- 
ject, conception  (as  psychol.  1. 1.)  J  11.61  ("patta);  Miln  62 
(of  vitakka);  Dhs  7,21,298;  Vism  144  ("samadhi);  DhsA 
55,  142  (def.  by  Bdhg.  as  "ekaggaq  cittar|  arammane  ap- 
peti"), 214  Cjhana).  See  on  term  Cpd.  pp.  56  sq.,  68, 
129,  215;  Dhs  trsl.   XXVIII,   10,   53,  82,  347. 

Appabhotl  (Appahoti)  see  pahoti. 

Appamanfiatl  [appa  -|-  mannati]  to  think  little  of,  to  under- 
rate, despise  Dh  12 1  (=r  avajanati  DhA  ill.  16;  v.  1. 
avapamannati). 

Appamaniifi  (f.)  [a  -f-  pamanna,  abstr.  fr.  pamana  =  Sk. 
*pramanya]  boundlessness,  infinitude,  as  psych,  t.  t.  appW- 


in  later  books  to  the  four  varieties  of  philanthropy,  viz. 
metta  karu;)a  mudita  upekkba  i.  e.  love,  pity,  sympathy, 
desinterestedness,  and  as  such  enumd-  at  D  III.223  (q.  v. 
for  detailed  ref.  as  to  var.  passages);  Ps  1.84;  Vbh  272 
sq. ;  DhsA  195.  By  itself  at  Sn  507  (=  mettajjhana- 
sankhata  a.  SnA  417).  See  for  further  expl"-  Dhs  trsl. 
p.  66  and  metta. 

Appamatta'  (adj.)  [appa  +  matta]  see  appa. 

Appamatta^  (adj.)  [a  -\-  pamatta,  pp.  of  pamadati]  not 
negligent,  i.  e.  diligent,  careful,  heedful,  vigilant,  alert, 
zealous  M  1.391 — 92;  S  1.4;  Sn  223  (cp.  KhA  169),  507, 
779  (cp.  Nd'  59);  Dh  22  (cp.  DhA  1.229);  Th  2,  338 
=  upatthitasati  Th  A  239). 

Appamada  [a  -{-  pamada]  thoughtfulness,  carefulness,  con- 
scientiousness, watchfulness,  vigilance,  earnestness,  zeal  D 
1. 13  (:  a.  vuccati  satiya  avippavaso  DA  1. 104);  HI. 30, 
104  sq.,  112,  244,  248,  272;  M  1.477  (°phala);  S  1.25, 
86,  158,  214;  11.29,  132;  IV.78  ("viharin),  97,  125,  252 
sq.;  V.30  sq.  ("sampada),  41  sq.,  91,  135,  240,  250,  308, 
350;  A  1. 16,  50.  (°adhigata);  111.330,  364,  449;  iv.28 
Cgaravata)  120  (°i)  garu-karoti) ;  V.21,  126  (kusalesu 
dhammesu);  Sn  184,  264,  334  (=  sati-avippavasa-sankhata 
a.  SnA  339);  It  16  (°r|  pasaijsanti  pufinakiriyasu  pandita), 
74  ("viharin);  Dh  57  (°viharin,  cp.  DhA  1. 434);  327 
(°rata  =:  satiya  avippavSse  abhirata  DhA  iv.26);  Davs  11. 
35;  KhA   142. 

Appamaoa  (freq.  spelled  appamana)  (adj.)  [a  +  pamana] 
I.  "without  measure",  immeasurable,  endless,  boundless, 
unlimited,  unrestricted  all-permeating  S  IV. 186  (^cetaso); 
A  11.73;  ^-63;  Sn  507  (raettaq  cittaq  bhavayaq  appama- 
nai)  =:  anavasesa-pharanena  SnA  417;  cp.  appamaiiua) ; 
It  21  (metta),  78;  J  11.61  ;  Ps  II. 126  sq.;  Vbh  16,  24, 
49,  62,  326  sq. ;  Dhs  182,  1021,  1024,  1405;  DhsA  45, 
196  ("gocara,  cp.  anantagocara).  See  also  on  term  Dhs 
trsl.  60.  —  2.  "without  difference",  irrelevant,  in  general 
(in  commentary  style)  J  1. 165;  11.323. 

Appames^a  (adj.)  [a  +  pameyya  =  Sk.  aprameya,  grd.  of 
a  -j-  pra  -|-  ma]  immeasurable,  infinite,  boundless  M  1.386 ; 
S  V.400;  A  1.266;  Th  I,  1089  (an°);  Pug  35;  Miln  331; 
Sdhp  338. 

Appavatta  (f)  [a  +  pavatta]  the  state  of  not  going  on, 
the  stop  (to  all  that),  the  non-continuance  (of  all  that) 
Th  I,  767;  Miln  326. 

Appasada  see  pasada. 

Appassada  see  appa. 

Appahina  (adj.)  [a  -j-  pahina,  pp.  of  pahayati]  not  given 
up,  not  renounced  M  1.386;  It  56,  57;  Nd^  70  D'; 
Pug  12,   18. 

AppaQaka  (adj.)  [a  -|-  pSna  -f  ka]  breathless,  i.  e.  (l)  holding 
one's  breath  in  a  form  of  ecstatic  meditation  (jhana)  M 
1.243;  J  1-67  [cp-  BSk.  asphanaka  Lai.  V.314,  324;  M  Vaslu 
11.124;  should  the  Pali  form  be  taken  as  *a -f  pranaka?]. 
(2)  not  holding  anything  breathing,  i.  e.  inanimate,  life- 
less, not  containing  life  Sn  p.   15  (of  water). 

Applka  (f)  of  appaka. 

ApplCCha  (adj.)  [appa  -f  iccha  from  Ij,  cp.  iccha]  desiring 
little  or  nothing,  easily  satisfied,  unassuming,  contented, 
unpretentious  S  1.63,  65;  A  111,432;  iv.2,  218  sq.,  229; 
V.I 24  sq.,  130,  154,  167;  Sn  628,  707;  Dh  404;  Pv 
IV.7';  Pug  70. 

ApplCChati  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  prec]  contentment,  being  satisfied 
with  litile,  UDOstentatiousness  Vin  111.21;  D  111.115;  M 
1. 13;  S  II  202,  208  sq.;  A  I.12,  16  sq. ;  111.219  sq.,  448; 
IV.2I8,  280  (opp.  mahicchata);  Miln  242;  SnA  494 
(catubbidha,  viz.  paccaya-dhutanga-pariyatti-adhigama-va- 
sena);  PvA  73.  As  one  of  the  5  dhutanga-dhamma  at  Vism  81. 


Appita 


58 


Abbuda 


Appita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  appeti,  cp.  BSk.  arpita,  e.  g.  prityar- 
pitaq  caksuh  Jtm  316O]  i.  fixed,  applied,  concentrated 
(mind)  Miln  415  (manasa)  Sdhp  233  (citta).  —  2.  brought 
to,  put  to,  fixed  on  J  VI.78  (maranamukhe) ;  visappita 
(an  arrow  to  which)  poison  (is)  applied,  so  read  for 
visap(p)ita  at  J  v.36  &  Vism  303. 

Appiya  &  Applyata  see  piya  etc 

Appekada  (adv.)  see  api  2  a^. 

Appeti  [Vedic  arpayati,  Caus.  of  f,  rnoti  _&  rcchati  (cp. 
icchati''),  Idg.  *ar  (to  insert  or  put  together,  cp.  also 
"er  under  annava)  to  which  belong  Sk.  ara  spoke  of  a 
wheel;  Gr.  ifxfiirxu  to  put  together,  apiix  chariot,  afipo-j 
limb,  xferr/i  virtue;  Lat.  arma  =:  E.  arms  (i.e.  weapon), 
artus  fixed,  tight,  also  limb,  ars  =  art.  For  further  con- 
nections see  annava]  I.  (*er)  to  move  forward,  rush  on, 
run  into  (of  river)  Vin  11. 238;  Milu  70.  —  2.  (*ar)  to 
fit  in,  fix,  apply,  insert,  put  on  to  (lit.  &  fig.)  Vin  n  136, 
137;  J  '"•34  (nimba-sulasmii)  to  impale,  C.  avunati); 
vi.iy  (T.  sulasmii)  acceti,  vv.  U.  abbeti  =  appeti  &  upeti, 
C.  avunati);  Miln  62  (daruq  sandhismir)) ;  VvA  no 
(saniianari).  Cp.  Trenckner,  Notes  64  n.  19,  who  defends 
reading  abbeti  at  T.  passages. 

Appesakkha  (adj.)  [ace.  to  Childers  :=  Sk.  *alpa  +  isa  + 
akhya,  the  latter  fr.  a  -\-  khya  'being  called  lord  of 
little";  Trenckner  on  Miln  65  (see  p.  422)  says:  "appe- 
sakkha &  mahesakkha  are  traditionally  expld-  appapari- 
vara  &  mahaparivara,  the  former,  I  suppose,  from  appe 
&  sakkha  (Sk.  sakhya),  the  latter  an  imitation  of  it". 
Thus  the  etym.  would  be  "having  little  association  or 
friendship"  and  resemble  the  term  appasattha.  The  BSk., 
forms  are  alpesakhya  &  mahesakhya,  e.  g.  at  Av.  S  II. 
153;  Divy  243]  of  little  power,  weak,  impotent  S  II. 229; 
Miln  65;  Sdhp  89. 

Appoti  [the  contracted  form  of  apnoti,  usually  papunati,  fr. 
ap]   to  attain,  reach,  get  Vism   350  (in  etym.  of  apo). 

Appodaka  see  appa. 

AppoSSUkka  (adj.)  [appa  -f-  ussuka,  Sk.  alpotsuka,  e.  g. 
Lai.  V.  509;  Divy  41,  57,  86,  159.  It  is  not  necessary 
to  assume  a  hypothetic  form  of  *autsukya  as  der.  fr. 
ussuka]  unconcerned,  living  at  ease,  careless",  not  bother- 
ing", keeping  still,  inactive  Vin  II. 1 88;  M  in. 1 75,  176; 
S  I  202  (in  stock  phrase  appossukka  tunhibhuta  san- 
kasaya  "living  at  ease,  given  to  silence,  resigned"  Mrs. 
Rh.  D.  nils  lisl.  258,  see  also  y T  T S.  1909,  22);  II. 
177  (id.);  IV. 178  (id.);  Th  2,  457  (=:  nirussukka  ThA 
282);  Sn  43  (=  abyavata  anapekkha  Nd'^  72);  Dh  330 
(=;=  niralaya  Dh.\  IV. 31);  J  1.197;  iv.71;  Milu  371  (a. 
titthati  to  keep  still);  DA   1.264. 

AppOSSUkkata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  prec]  inaction,  reluctance, 
carelessness,  indifference  Vin  1.5;  D  n.36;  Miln  232; 
DhA  11.15. 

Apphuta  (&  apphuta)  [Sk.  *a-sphrta  for  a-spharlta  pp.  of 
sphar,  cp.  phurati ;  phuta  &  also  phusati]  untouched,  un- 
pervaded,  not  penetrated  D  1.74  =:  M  1.276  (pitisukhena). 

Apphota  (f.)  [fr.  appoteti  to  blossom]  N.  of  a  kind  of 
Jasmine  J  VI.336. 

Apphotita  [pp.  of  apphoteti]  having  snapped  one's  fingers 
or  clapped  one's  hands  J  11  311  (°kale). 

ApphO^et!  [a  +  photeti,  sphut]  to  snap  the  fingers  or  clap  the 
hands  (as  sign  of  pleasure)  Miln  13,  20,  pp.  apphothita. 

Aphusa  [Sk.  *asprsya,  a  +  grd.  of  phusati  to  touch]  not 
to  be  touched  Miln  157  (trsl.  unchangeable  by  other 
circumstances;  Tr.  on  p.  425  remarks  "aphusani  kiiiyani 
seems  wrong,  at  any  rate  it  is  unintelligible  to  me"). 


Aphegguka  (adj.)  [a  -f-  pheggu  -f-  ka]  not  weak,  i.  e  strong 
J  111.318. 

Abaddha  [a  -\-  baddha]  not  tied,  unbound,  unfettered  Sn 
39  (v.  1.  and  Nd*  abandha;  expld-  by  rajju-bandhan'  adisu 
yena  kenaci  abaddha  SnA  83). 

Abandha  (n.-adj.)  [a  -|-  bandha]  not  tied  to,  not  a  follower 
or  victim  of  It  56  (marassa;  v.  1.  abaddha). 

Abandhana  (adj.)  [a  -\-  bandhana]  without  fetters  or  bonds, 
unfettered,  untrammelled  Sn  948,  cp.  Nd'  433. 

Ababa  [of  uncertain  origin,  prob.  onomatopoetic].  N.  of  a 
cert.  Purgatory,  enumd-  with  many  other  similar  names 
at  A  V.I 73  =  Sn  p.  126  (cp.  atata,  abbuda  &  also  Av. 
S  1.4,    10  &  see  for  further  expln-  of  term  SnA  476  sq. 

Abala  (adj.)  [a  -j-  bala]  not  strong,  weak,  feeble  Sn  It20 
(=  dulbala,  appabala,  appathama  Nd'^  73);  Dh  29  (°assa 
a  weak  horse  ^  dubbalassa  DhA  1.262;  opp.  sighassa 
a  quick  horse). 

Abbaje  T.  reading  at  A  11.39,  evidently  interpreted  by  ed. 
as  a  +  vraje,  pot.  of  a  +  Vraj  to  go  to,  come  to  (cp. 
pabbajati),  but  is  preferably  with  v.  1.  SS  to  be  read 
andaje  (corresponding  with  vihangama  in  prec.  line). 

Abba^a  (adj.)  [a  -|-  vana,  Sk.  avrana]  without  wounds  Dh  124. 

Abbata  (n.-adj.)  [a  +  vata,  Sk.  avrata]  (a)  (nt.)  that  which 
is  not  "vata"  i.e.  moral  obligation,  breaking  of  the  moral 
obligation  Sn  839  (asllata  -f);  IXdi  188  (v.  1.  SS  abhab- 
bata;  expl^-  again  as  a-vatta).  SnA  545  (^  dhutangavatar) 
vina'.  —  (b)  (adj.)  one  who  offends  against  the  moral 
obligation,  lawless  Dh  264  (=  silavatena  ca  dhutavatena 
ca  virahita  DhA  111.391  ;  vv.  11.  k.  adhuta  &  abhuta;  B. 
abbhuta,  C.  abbuta). 

Abbaya  in  uday°  at  Miln  393  stands  for  avyaya. 

Abbahatl  (&  abbuhatl)  [the  first  more  freq.  for  pres.,  the 
second  often  in  aor.  forms;  Sk.  abrhati,  a -|- bfh',  pp. 
brdha  (see  abbrdha)]  to  draw  off,  pull  out  (a  sting  or 
dart);  imper.  pres.  abbaha  Th  i,  404;  J  11.95  (v- '■  ^^ 
appuha  =  abbuha ;  C.  expls-  by  uddharatha).  —  aor.  ab- 
bahi  J  V.198  (v.  1.  BB  abbuhi),  abbahl  (metri  causa)  J 
111.390  (v.  1.  BB  dhabbuli  =  abbulhi)  =  Pv  l.8»  (which 
reads  T.  abbulha,  but  PvA  41  expls-  nihari)  =  DhA  1.30 
(vv.  11.  sabbahi,  s.abbamhi;  gloss  K.  B  abbulhaq)  =  Vv 
835  (T.  abbulhi;  v.  1.  BB  abbulhaq,  SS  avyalii ;  VvA  327 
expl5-  as  uddhari),  &  abbuhi  A  111.55  (v-  !•  abbahi,  C. 
abbahl  ti  nihari),  see  also  vv.  11.  under  abbahi.  —  gerl. 
abbuyha  Sn  939  (=  abbuhitva  uddharitva  Nd'  419;  v.  . 
SS  abbuyhitva;  SnA  567  reads  avyuyha  &  expls-  by 
uddharitva);  S  1. 121  (tanhar|);  III. 26  (id.;  but  spelt  ab- 
bhuyha).  —  pp.  abbulha  (q.  v.).  —  Caus.  abbaheti  [Sk. 
abaihayati]  to  pull  out,  drag  out  J  iv.364  (satthai)  abba- 
hayanti;  v.  1.  abbha°);  Dh.\  11249  (asir|)-  ger.  abbahitva 
[=  °hetva)  Vin  11  201  (bhisa-mujalai))  with  v.  1.  BB  ag- 
gahetva,  -SS  abbuhitva,  cp.  Vin  1. 214  (vv.  11.  aggahitva  & 
abb.ihitva).  pp.  abbulhita  (q.  v.). 

Abbahana  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  abbahati]  pulling  out  (of  a  sting) 
DhA  ni.404  (sic.  T. ;  v.  1.  abbuhana;  Fausbbll  aclahana; 
glosses  C.  atthangeta  &  atthangika,  K.  nibbapana).  See 
also  abbulhatia  and  abbhabana. 

Abbuda  (nt.)  [elym.  unknown,  orig.  meaning  "swelling", 
the  Sk.  form  arbuda  seems  to  be  a  trsl.  of  P.  abbuda] 
I.  the  foetus  in  the  l^t  &  2'"i  months  after  conception, 
the  2"J  of  the  five  prenatal  stages  of  development,  viz. 
kalala,  abbuda,  pesi,  ghana,  pasakhaNd'  120;  Miln  40; 
Vism  236.  —  2.  a  tumour,  canker,  sore  Vin  III. 294,  307  (only 
in  Samantapasadika;  both  times  as  sasanassa  a).  —  3,  a 
very  high  numeral,  appH-  exclusively  to  the  denotation 
of  a  vast  period  of  suffering  in  Purgatory ;  in  this  sense 
used    as  adj.  of  Niraya  (abbudo  nirayo  the   "vast-period" 


Abbuda 


59 


Abbhantarima 


hell,  cp.  nirabbuda).  S  1.149  =  A  II. 3  (chattiijsati  pafica 
ca  abbudani);  S  1.152  =  A  v.i73  =  Sd  p.  126  (cp.  Sn.\ 
476:  abbudo  nSnia  koci  pacceka-nirayo  n^  atthi,  Avicimhi 
yeva  abbuda-gananaya  paccanokaso  pana  abbudo  nirayo 
ti  vulto;  see  also  KiiKiriJ  Sayings  p.  190);  J  III. 360 
(satar)  ninnahuta-sahassanaq  ekai)  abbudai]).  —  4.  a  terra 
used  for  "hell"  in  the  riddle  S  1. 43  (kiijsu  lokastnir)  abhu- 
daq  "who  are  they  who  make  a  hell  on  earth"  Mrs. 
Rh.  D.  The  answer  is  "thieves";  so  we  can  scarcely  take 
it  in  meaning  of  2  or  3.    The  C.  has  vinasa-karanaq. 

Abbu|hatl(?)  &  Abbuhatt  see  abbahati. 

Abbu|hana  (nt.)  [fr.  abbahati  =  abbuhati  (abbulhati)]  the 
pulling  out  (of  a  sting),  in  phrase  tanha-sallassa  abbul- 
taanarj  as  one  of  the  12  acchievements  of  a  Mahesi  Nd' 
343  =:  Nd2  503  (eds-  of  Ndi  have  abbuhana,  v.  1.  83 
abbussana ;  ed.  of  Nd^  abbulhana,  v.  1.  SS  abbahana,  BB 
abbuhana).  Cp.  abbahana. 

Abbu|ha  (adj.)  [Sk.  abrdha,  pp.  of  a  -)-  bfh',  see  abbahati] 
drawn  out,  pulled  (of  a  sting  or  dart),  fig.  removed, 
destroyed.  Most  freq.  in  comb"-  ^salla  with  the  sting 
removed,  having  the  sting  (of  craving  thirst,  tanha)  pulled 
out  D  11.283  (v.  1.  SS  asammulha) ;  Sn  593,  779  (=:  ab- 
bulhita-salla  Ndi  59;  ragadi-sallanar|  abbulhatta  a.  SnA 
518);  J  111.390  =  Vv  83>o  =  Pv  i.8'  =  DhA  1.30.  —  In 
other  connection:  M  t  139  =  A  in. 84  ("esika  =  tanha 
pahina;  see  esika);  Th   i,  321;  KhA   153  (°soka). 

Abbulhatta  (nt.)  [abslr.  of  abbolha]  pulling  out,  removal, 
destroying  SnA   518. 

Abbu|hlta  (&  abbuhitta  at  J  111.541)  [pp.  of  abbaheti  Cans, 
of  abbahati]  pulled  out,  removed,  destroyed  Ndi  59  (ab- 
bulhita-sallo  4- uddhata°  etc.  fo.r  abbOlha) ;  J  III. 541  (un- 
certain reading ;  v.  1.  BB  appahita,  SS  abyahita ;  C.  expl^ 
pupphakar)  thapitar;  appaggharakar)  katai) ;  should  we 
explain  as  a  -f-  vi  +  Uh  and  read  abyuhitar). 

Abbetl  [Trenckner,  Notes  64  n.  19]  at  J  in. 34  &  vi.iy  is 
probably  a  mistake  in  MSS  for  appeti. 

Abboki^^  I.  [=  abbhokinna,  abhi  +  ava -j- kinna,  cp. 
abhikinna]  filled  M  1.387  (paripunna  -f);  DhA  iv.182 
(panca  jatisatani  a.).  —  2.  [seems  to  be  misunderstood 
for  abbocchinna,  a  -|-  vi  4-  ava  -|-  chinna]  uninterrupted, 
constant,  as  "r^  adv.  in  comb"-  with  satatat]  samitai)  A 
IV.I3:=I45;  Kvu  401  (v.  1.  abbhokinna),  cp.  also  Kvu 
trsl.  231  n.  I  (abbokinna  undiluted?);  Vbh  320.  —  3. 
doubtful  spelling  at  Vin  111.27 1  (Bdhgh  on  Paraj.  III.I,  3). 

Abbocchinna  see  abbokinna  2  and  abbhochinna. 

Abboharika  (adj.)  [a  -|-  vi  +  ava  -f-  harika  of  voharati]  not 
of  legal  or  conventional  status,  i.  e.  —  (a)  negligible,  not 
to  be  decided  Vin  111.91,  1 12  (see  also  Kvu  trsl.  361 
n.  4).  —  (b)  uncommon,  extraordinary  J  III. 309  (v.  1.  BB 
abbho°);  v.271,  286  (Kern:   ineffective). 

Abbha  (nt.)  [Vedic  abhra  nt.  &  later  Sk.  abhra  m.  "dark 
cloud";  Idg.  •mbhro,  cp.  Gr.  aiffo;  scum,  froth,  Lat.  imber 
rain;  also  Sk.  ambha  water,  Gr.  'S/ijipoi;  rain,  Oir  ambu 
water].  A  (dense  &  dark)  cloud,  a  cloudy  mass  A  11.53  = 
Vin  11.295  =  Miln  273  in  list  of  to  things  that  obscure 
moon-  &  sunshine,  viz.  abbhai)  mahika  (mahiya  A)  dhu- 
marajo  (megho  Miln),  Rabu.  This  list  is  referred  to  at 
SnA  487  &  VvA  134.  S  l.ioi  (°saina  pabbata  a  mountain 
like  a  thunder-cloud);  J  VI.581  (abbhar)  rajo  acchadesi); 
Pv  IV. 39  (nil°  =  nila-megha  PvA  251).  As  f.  abbha  at 
Dhs  617  &  DhsA  317  (used  in  sense  of  adj.  "dull": 
DhsA  explS'  by  valabaka);  perhaps  also  in  abbbamatta. 
-kuta  the  point  or  summit  of  a  storm-cloud  Th  I, 
1064;  J  VL249,  250;  Vv  i'  (=:  valahaka-sikhara  VvA  12). 
-ghana  a  mass  of  clouds,  a  thick  cloud  It  64;  Sn  348 
(cp.  SnA  348).  -patala  a  mass  of  clouds  DhsA  239. 
-matta  free  from  clouds  Sn  687  (also  as  abbhamutla  Dh 
382).  -sac)Tilapa  thundering  S  iv.289. 


Abbhakkhati  [abhi  +  a  +  khya,  cp.  Sk.  akhyati]  to  speak 
against  to  accuse,  slander  D  1161  =  A  1.161  (an-abbhak- 
khatu-kama);  1V.182  (id.);  J  iv.377.  Cp.  Intens.  abbha- 
cikkhati. 

Abbhakkhana  (nt.)  [fr.  abbhakkhati]  accusation,  slander, 
calumny  D  111.248,  250;  M  I.130;  111.207;  A  111.290  sq.; 
Dh   139  (cp.  DhA  III. 70). 

Abbhacchadita  [pp.  of  abhi  -|-  a  -j-  chadeti]  covered  (with) 
Th   I,   1068. 

Abbhaiijati  [abhi  -f-  anj]  to  anoint;  to  oil,  to  lubricate  M 
1.343  (sappi-telena);  S  IV.177;  Pug  56;  DhA  111.311  := 
VvA  68  (sata-paka-telena).  Caus.  abbbanjeti  same  J  1.438 
(telena  "etva);  v. 376  (sata-paka-telena  °ayir|su);  Caus.  II. 
abbbanjapeti  to  cause  to  anoint  J  111.372. 

Abbhaiijana  (nt.)  [fr.  abbhaiijati]  anointing,  lubricating, 
oiling;  unction,  unguent  Vin  1205;  111-79;  ^^''"  3^7 
(akkhassa  a.);  Vism  264;   VvA  295. 

Abbhatlka  (adj.)  [a  +  bhata  +  ika,  bhf]  brought  (to), 
procured,  got,  J   VI.291. 

Abbhatikkanta  [pp.  of  abhi  -f  ati  -f  kram,  cp.  atikkanta] 
one  who  has  thoroughly,  left  behind  J  v.376. 

Abbhatlta  [pp.  of  abhi  -|-  ati  +  i,  cp.  atita  &  atikkanta] 
emphatic  of  atita  in  all  meanings,  viz.  I  passed,  gone  by 
S  II. 1 83  (+  atikkanta);  nt.  "rj  what  is  gone  or  over, 
the  past  J  III.  169.  —  2.  passed  away,  dead  M  1.465 ;  S 
IV.398;  Th  I,  242,  1035.  —  3.  transgressed,  overstepped, 
neglected  J  in. 541  (saijyama). 

Abbhattha  (nt.)  [abhi  -j-  attha^  in  ace.  abhi  -f  atlharj,  abhi 
in  function  of  "towards"  =  homeward,  as  under  abhi 
I.I  a;  cp.  Vedic  abhi  sadhastbai)  to  the  seat  R.  V.  ix. 
21.  3]  =  attha'^,  only  in  phrase  abbbattai]  gacchati  "to 
go  towards  home",  i.e.  setting;  fig.  to  disappear,  vanish, 
M  1.115,  119;  111.25;  A  IV.32;  Miln  305;  pp.  abhhat- 
tangata  "set",  gone,  disappeared  Dhs  1038  (atlhangata  -)-) ; 
Kvu  576. 

Abbhatthata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  abbhatta]  "going  towards  setting", 
disappearance,  death  J  v.469. 

Abbhanumodati  [abhi  -{-  anu  -j-  modati]  to  be  much  pleased 
at  to  show  great  appreciation  of  Vin  1. 196;  D  1.143,  '9°) 
S  IV. 224;   Miln  29,  210;  DhA  iv.102  (v.  1.  °anu°). 

Abbhanumodana  (nt.)  (&  "a  f.)  [fr.  abbhanumodati]  being 
pleased,  satisfaction,  thanksgiving  DA  1. 227;  VvA  52 
("anu");  Sdhp   218. 

Abbhantara  (adj.)  [abhi  -\-  antara;  abhi  here  in  directive 
function  =  towards  the  inside,  in  there,  with-in,  cp.  abhi 
I.I  a]  :=  antara,  i.  e.  internal,  inner,  being  within  or 
between ;  nt.  °g  the  inner  part,  interior,  interval  (also 
as  ° — )  Vin  I. Ill  (satt"  with  interval  of  seven);  A  iv.16 
(opp.  bahira);  Dh  394  (id.);  Th  i,  757  ("ipassaya  lying 
inside);  J  in.395  ("amba  the  inside  of  the  Mango);  Miln 
30  ("e  vayo  jivo),  262,  281  (bahir-abbhantara  dhaua); 
DhA  11.74  (adj.  c.  gen.  being  among ;  v.  1.  abbhantare).  — 
Cases  used  adverbially :  instr.  abbbantarena  in  the  mean- 
time, in  between  DhA  11.59.  loc.  abbhantare  in  the  midst 
of,  inside  of,  within  (c.  gen.  or  — ")  J  1.262  (raiino),  280 
(tuyhar));  DhA  II. 64  (v.  1.  antare),  92  (sattavass") ;  PvA 
48  (=  anto). 

Abbhantarika  (adj  -n.)  [fr.  abbhantara,  cp.  Sk.  abhyantara 
in  same  meaning]  intimate  friend,  confidant,  "chum"  J 
1.86  (+  ativissasika),  337  ("insider",  opp.  bahiraka). 

Abbhantarima  (adj.)  [superl.  formation  fr.  abbhantara  in 
contrasting  function]  internal,  inner  (opp.  babitima)  Vin 
ni.149;  J  v.38. 


Abbhakutika 


60 


Abbhuddhunati 


Abbhakutika  (adj.)  [a  +  bhakuti  +  ka;  Sk.  bhrakuti  frown] 
not  frowning,  genial  Vin  III. 181  (but  here  spelt  bhakutik- 
abhakutika);  D  i.n6,  cp.  DA  1.287;  DhA  IV.8  (as  v.l.; 
T.  has  abbhokutika). 

Abbhagata  [abhi  +  a  +  gata]  having  arrived  or  come ;  (m.) 
a  guest,  stranger  Vv  i'  (=  abhi-Sgata,  agantuka  VvA  24). 

Abbhagamana  (nt.)  [abhi  +  a  +  gamana ;  cp.  Sk.  abhya- 
gama]  coming  arrival,  approach  Vin   IV. 22 1. 

Abbhaghata  [abhi  +  aghata]  slaughtering-place  Vin  111.151 

(+aghata). 

Abbhacikkhatl  [Intens.  of  abbhakkhati]  to  accuse,  slander, 
calumniate  D  1.161;  in. 248,  250;  M  1. 130,  368,482; 
111.207;   A  1.161. 

Abbhana  (nt.)  [abhi  -|-  ayana  of  a  +  yg  (i)]  coming  back, 
rehabilitation  of  a  bhikkhu  who  has  undergone  a  penance 
for  an  expiable  offence  Vin  1.49  (°araha),  53  (id.),  143, 
327;  11.33,  4°)  '62;  A  1.99.  —  Cp.  abbbeti. 

Abbhamatta  (adj.)  [abbha  -\-  matta  (?)  according  to  the 
Pali  Com.;  but  more  likely  =  Vedic  abhva  huge,  enorm- 
ous, monstrous,  with  a  metri  causa.  On  abhva  (a  +  bhu 
what  is  contradictory  to  anything  that  is)  cp.  abbhuta  & 
abbhurj,  and  see  Walde,  Lat.  Wtb.  under  dubius]  mons- 
trous, dreadful,  enormous,  "of  the  size  of  a  large  cloud" 
(thus  C.  on  S  1.205  &  J  111.309)  S  1.205  =^  Ti  'i  ^S^ 
(v.  1.  abbha"  Z!'.  abbhamutta)  =  J   111.309  (v.  1.  °mutta). 

Abbhahata  [abhi  -f  a  +  hata,  pp.  of  han]  struck,  attacked, 
afflicted  S  1.40  (raaccuna);  Th  i,  448;  Sn  581;  J  vi.26, 
440;   Vism  31,  232;  DA  1.140,   147;  DhA  IV.25. 

Abbhahana  (nt.)  [either  z=  abbShana  or  Svahana]  in  udaka° 
the  pulling  up  or  drawing  up  of  water  Vin  11.318  (Bdhgh. 
on  CuUavagga  v.  16,  2,  corresponding  to  udaka-vahana 
on  p.   122). 

Abbhita  [pp.  of  abbheti]  I.  come  back,  rehabilitated,  rein- 
stated Vin  III. 1 86  =  IV. 242  (an'').  —  2.  uncertain  reading 
at  Pv  1. 12'  in  sense  of  "called"  (an°  uncalled),  where  id. 
p.  at  J  111.165   reads  anavhata  &  at  Th  2,   129  ayacita. 

Abbhu  [a  +  bhu  most  likely  =  Vedic  abhva  and  P.  abbhuq, 
see  also  abbhamatta]  unprofitableness,  idleness,  nonsense 
J   V.295  (=  abhuti  avaddhi  C). 

Abbhut)  (inlerj.)  [Vedic  abhvai),  nt.  of  abhva,  see  expld. 
under  abbhamatta.  Not  quite  correct  Morris  J  P  T  S. 
1889,  201:  abbhui)  =  a -f- bhuk ;  cp  also  abbhuta]  alas! 
terrible,  dreadful,  awful  (excl.  of  fright  &  shock)  Vin  11. 
115  (Bdhgh.  expls-  as  "utrasa-vacanam-etar)");  M  I.448. — 
See  also  abbhu  &  abbhuta, 

Abbhukklraoa  (nt.)  [abhi  +  ud  +  kf]  drawing  out,  pulling, 
in  danda-satlha"  drawing  a  stick  or  sword  Nd^  576*  (cp. 
abbhokkirana).  Or  is  it  abbhuttirana  (cp.  uttinna  outlet). 

Abbhukkirati  [abhi  +  ud  -(-  kirati]  to  sprinkle  over,  to 
rinse  (with  water)  D  11.172  (cakkaratanaq ;  neither  with 
Morris  jf  P  T  S.  i886,  131  "give  up",  nor  with  trsl.  of 
J  II. 311  "roll  along");  J  v.390;  PvA  75.  Cp.  abbhokkirati. 

AbbhUggacChati  [abhi  -f  ud  -f  gacchati]  to  go  forth,  go 
out,  rise  into  D  1. 11 2,  127;  A  111.252  (kitti-saddo  a.); 
P"g  36.  ger.  "gantva  J  1.88  (akasaq),  202;  DhA  iv.i98. 
aor.  °ganchi  M  1.126  (kittisaddo);  J  1.93.  —  pp.  ab- 
bbuggata. 

Abbhuggata  [pp.  of  abbhuggacchati]  gone  forth,  gone  out, 
risen  D  1.88  (kitti-saddo  a.,  cp.  DhA  1. 146  :  sadevakaq  lokaq 
ajjholtharitva  uggato),  107  (saddo);  Sn  p.  103  (kittisaddo). 

Abbhuggamana  (nt.-adj.)  [fr.  abbhuggacchati]  going  out 
over,  rising  over  (c.  ace.)  PvA  65  (candaq  nabhaij  abbhug- 
gamanai) ;  so  read  for  T.  abbhuggamanai)). 


Abbhujjalana  (nt.)  [abhi  +  ud  +  jalana,  from  Jval]  breathing 
out  fire,  i.  e.  carrying  fire  in  one's  month  (by  means  of 
a  charm)  D  i.il  (^  mantena  mukhato  aggi-jala-niharanai) 
DA  1.97). 

Abbhutthati  (°tthahati)  [abhi  -F  ud  -f  sthfi]  to  get  up  to, 
proceed  to,  D  1.105  (cankamar)). 

Abbhuil^Qata  [pp.  of  abbhunnamati]  standing  up,  held  up, 
erect  J  v. 156  (in  abbhunnatata  state  of  being  erect,  stiff- 
ness),  197  (°unnata;  v.l.  abbhantara,  is  reading  correct?). 

AbbhU^ha  (adj.)  [ahhi  -f  unha]  (a)  very  hot  DhA  11.87  (^'l- 
accunha).    (b)    quite  hot,  still  warm  (of  milk)  DhA  11.67. 

Abbhuta'  (adj.  nt.)  [*Sk.  adbhuta  which  appears  to  be 
constructed  from  the  Pali  &  offers  like  its  companion 
*ascarya  (acchariya  abbhuta  see  below)  serious  difficulties 
as  to  etym.  The  most  probable  solution  is  that  P.  abbhuta 
is  a  secondary  adj .-formation  from  abbhurj  which  in  itself 
is  nt.  of  abbha  =r  Vedic  abhva  (see  etym.  under  abbha- 
matta and  cp.  abbhu,  abbhurj  &  J  P  T  S.  1889,  201).  In 
meaning  abbhuta  is  identical  with  Vedic  abhva  contrary 
to  what  usually  happens,  i.  e.  striking,  abnormal,  gruesome, 
horrible  etc. ;  &  that  its  significance  as  a  -)-  bhU  ("un- 
real ?")  is  felt  in  the  background  is  also  evident  from  the 
traditional  etym.  of  the  Pali  Commentators  (see  below). 
See  also  acchariya]  terrifying,  astonishing;  strange,  ex- 
ceptional, puzzling,  extraordinary,  marvellous,  supernormal. 
Described  as  a  term  of  surprise  &  consternation  (vimhay' 
avahass'  adhivacanai)  DA  1.43  &  VvA  329)  &  expld-  as 
"something  that  is  not"  or  "has  not  been  before",  viz. 
abhutai]  ThA  233;  abhula-pubbataya  abbhutaq  VvA  191, 
329;  abhuta-pubbai]  DA  1.43.  —  l.  (adj.)  wonderful, 
marvellous  etc.  Sn  681  (kiij  °i),  comb^-  with  lomahai]sana) ; 
J  'V.355  (id);  Th  2,  316  (abbhutai)  vata  vacai)  bhasasi 
z=  acchariyaij  ThA  233);  Vv  44"  (°dassaneyya);  Sdhp 
345,  496.  —  2.  (nt.)  the  wonderful,  a  wonder,  marvel 
S  IV. 37 1,  also  in  "dhamma  (see  Cpd.).  Very  freq.  in 
comb"-  with  accbariyai]  and  a  part,  of  exclamation,  viz. 
acchartyai)  bho  abbbutai)  bho  wonderful  indeed  &  beyond 
comprehension,  strange  &  stupefying  D  1. 206;  acch.  vata 
bho  abbh.  Vata  bho  D  1.60;  acch.  bhante  abbh.  A  11.50; 
aho  acch.  aho  abbh.  J  1.88 ;  acch.  vata  abbh.  vata  Vv 
83 '0.  — Thus  also  in  phrase  acchariya  abbhuta  dhamma 
wonderful  &  extraordinary  signs  or  things  M  III.  118,  125; 
A  11.130;  IV.198;  Miln  8;  and  in  accbariya-abbhuta- 
citta-jata  dumbfounded  &  surprised  J  1.88;  Dh.'V  iv.52  ; 
PvA  6,  50. 

-dhamma  mysterious  phenomenon,  something  wonder- 
ful, supernormal;  designation  of  one  of  the  nine  angas 
or  divisions  of  the  Buddhist  Scriptures  (see  nava  B  2) 
Vin  III. 8;  M  1.133;  A  11. 103;  111.86,  177;  Pug  43;  Miln 
344;  PvA  2,  etc. 

Abbhuta'^  (nt.)  [=  abbhuta'  in  the  sense  of  invoking  strange 
powers  in  gambling,  thus  being  under  direct  spell  of  the 
"unknown"]  a  bet,  a  wager,  only  in  phrase  abbhutai] 
karoti  (sahassena)  to  make  a  bet  or  to  bet  (a  thousand, 
i.  e.  kahapana's  or  pieces  of  money)  Vin  111.138;  IV.5;  J 
1.191;  v.427;  VI. 192;  PvA  151;  &  in  phrase  pancahi 
sahassehi  abbhutaq  hotu  J   VI.  193 

Abbhudaharati  [abhi  -f  ud  +  a  -f-  harati]  to  bring  towards, 
to  fetch,  to  begin  or  introduce  (a  conversation)  M  II.132. 

Abbhudireti  [abhi  -f  ud  -f-  freti]  to  raise  the  voice,  to  utter 
Th  2,  402;  DA  1.6 1 ;  Sdhp  514. 

Abbhudeti  [abhi  -|-  ud  +  eti]  to  go  out  over,  to  rise  A 
11.50,  51  (opp.  atthaq  eti,  of  the  sun).  —  ppr.  abbhud- 
dayar)  Vv  64'!  (=  abhi-uggacchanto  VvA  280;  abbhu- 
sayar)    ti  pi  patho). 

Abbhuddhunati  [abhi  -f  ud  -f-  dhunSti]  to  shake  very  much 
Vv  64"  (=adhikai)  uddhunSti  VvA  278). 


Abbhunnadita 


6i 


Abhi 


Abbhunnadita  [pp-  of  abhi  -|-  ud  +  nadati]  resounding, 
resonant  Th   i,   1065). 

Abbhunnamatl  [abhi  +  ud  +  namati]  to,  spring  up,  burst 
forth  D  11.164.  —  pp.  abbhunnata  (&  °unnata),  q.  v.  — 
Caus.  abbhtinnameti  to  stiffen,  straighten  out,  hold  up, 
erect  D  1.120  (kayar)  one's  body);  A  11.245  ('d-);  D  1.126 
(patodalatthii) ;  opp.  apanameti  to  bend  down). 

Abbhuyyata  [pp.  of  abbhuyyati]  marched  against,  attacked 
Vin   1.342;  M  11.124. 

Abbhuyyati  [abhi  +  up  +  ySti  of  ya]  to  go  against,  to 
go  against,  to  march  (an  army)  against,  to  attack  S  I.82 
(aor  °uyyasi).  —  pp.  abbhuyyata  (q.  v.). 

Abbhusuyaka  (adj.)  [abhi  +  usuya  +  ka]  zealous,  showing 
zeal,  endeavouring  in  ( — °)  Pgdp   101. 

Abbhussakatl  &  "usukkati  [abhi  +  ud  -f  $vask,  see  sak- 
kati]  to  go  out  over,  rise  above  (ace),  ascend,  freq.  in 
phrase  adicco  nabhai)  abbhussakkamano  M  1.317=: 
S  111.156  =  11  20.  — ^  See  also  S  1.65;  v.44;  A  1.242 
(same  simile);   v.22  (id.). 

Abbhussahanata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  abhi  +  *utsahana,  cp. 
ussaha]   instigation,  incitement  Vin  11. 8S. 

AbbhuSSetl  [abhi  +  ud -f  seti  of  si]  to  rise;  v.  1.  at  Vv 
64'^  according  to  VvA  280:  abbhuddayaq  (see  abbhudeti) 
abbhussayan   ti  pi   patho. 

Abbheti  [abhi  +  5  +  1]  to  rehabilitate  a  bhikkhu  who  has 
been  suspended  for  breach  of  rules  Vin  11. 7  (abbhento), 
33  (abbheyya);  111.112  (abbheti),  186  ^  IV.242  (abbhe- 
tabba)  —  pp.  abbhita  (q.  v.).  See  also  abbhana. 

Abbhokasa  [abhi  +  avakasa]  the  open  air,  an  open  &  un- 
sheltered space  D  1.63  (=r  alagganatthena  a.  viya  D.\ 
1.180),  71  (=:acchanna  DA  1.210),  89;  M  111.132;  A 
11.210;  111.92;  IV.437,  V.65;  Sn  p.  139  (°e  nissinna  sitting 
in  the  open)  J  1.29,  215;  Pug  57. 

Abbhokaslka  (adj.)  [fr.  abbhokasa]  belonging  to  the  open 
air,  one  who  lives  in  the  open,  the  practice  of  certain 
ascetics.  D  1.167;  M  1.282;  A  111.220;  Vin  v. 1 3 1,  193; 
J  IV. 8  (+  nesajjika);  Pug  69;  Miln  20,  342.  (One  of  the 
13  Dhutarjgas).  See  also  Nd'    188;  Nd^   587. 

-anga  the  practice  or  system  of  the  "campers-out"  Nd' 
558  (so  read  for  abbhokasi-kankha,  cp.   Nd'    188). 

AbbhoklOO^  [PP-  °^  abhhokirati]  see  abbokinna. 

Abbhoklratl  [abhi  +  ava  +  kirati]  to  sprinkle  over,  to 
cover,  bedeck  Vv  5'  (=  abhi-okirati  abhippakirati),  35' 
(v.  I.  abbhuk°).  Cp.  abbbukkirati  &  abbhokkirana  — 
pp.  abbhokinna  see  under  abbokinna. 

Abbhokutika  spelling  at  DhA  IV.8  for  abbbakutika. 

Abbhokkirana  (nt.)  [fr.  abbhokirati]  iiv|natanat)  a.  "turnings 
of  dancers"  DA  1,84  in  expl"-  of  sobha-nagarakai)  of  D  1.6. 

Abbhocchinna  (besides  abbocch°,  q.  v.  under  abbokinna^) 
[a  +  vi  +  ava  +  chinna]  not  cut  off,  uninterrupted,  con- 
tinuous J  1.470  (v.  1.  abbo°);  VI. 254,  373;  Cp.  1.6^;  Miln  72; 
Vism  362  (bb),  391   (lib). 

Abbhohaiika  see  abbo°. 
Aby°  see  avy°. 

Abhabba  (adj.)  [a  +  bhavya.  The  Sk.  abhavya  has  a  different 
meaning]  impossible,  not  likely,  unable  I)  ill. 13  sip,  19, 
26  sq.,  133;  It  106,  117;  Sn  231  (see  KhA  189);  Dh 
32;  J  J  116;   Pug   13. 

-tthana  a  (moral)  impossibility  of  which  there  are  9 
enum<i-  among  things  that  are  not  likely  to  be  found  in 
an  Arahant's  character:  see  D  111.133  &  ^35  (wl'ce  'he 
five  first  only  are  given  as  a  set). 


Abhabbata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  abhabba]  an  impossibility,  unli- 
kelihood Sn  232,  cp.  KhA  191. 

Abhaya  (adj.)  [a  +  bhaya]  free  from  fear  or  danger,  fearless, 
safe  Dh  258.  —  nt.  abhayat)  confidence,  safety  Dhsiy, 
cp.  DhA  111.491.  For  further  refs-  see  bhaya. 

Abhi-  [prefix,  Vedic  abhi,  which  represents  both  Idg  *iribhi, 
as  in  Or.  iinfii  around,  Lat.  ambi,  amb  round  about,  Oir. 
imb.  Gall,  ambi,  Ohg.  umbi,  Ags.  ymb,  cp.  also  Vedic 
(Pali)  abhitah  on  both  sides;  and  Idg.  *obhi,  as  in  Lat. 
ob  towards,  against  (cp.  obsess,  obstruct),  Goth,  bi,  Ohg. 
Ags.  bi  =  E.  be-. 

I.  Meaning.  —  I.  The  primary  meaning  of  abhi  is 
that  of  taking  possession  and  mastering,  as  contained  in 
E.  coming  by  and  OT'fr-coming,  thus  literally  having  the 
function  of  (n)  facing  and  aggressing  =  towards,  against, 
on  to,  at  (see  II.  1,  a);  and  {b)  mastering  =  over,  along 
over,  out  over,  on  top  of  (see  II.  I,  i).  2.  Out  of  this 
is  developed  the  fig.  meaning  of  increasing,  i.  e.,  an  inten- 
sifying of  the  action  implied  in  the  verb  (see  III.  l). 
Next  to  saq-  it  is  the  most  frequent  modification  prefix 
in  the  meaning  of  "very  much,  greatly'  as  the  first  part 
of  a  double-prefix  cpd.  (see  III.  2),  and  therefore  often 
seemingly  superfluous,  i.  e.,  weakened  in  meaning,  where 
the  second  part  already  denotes  intensity  as  in  abhi-vi-ji 
(side  by  side  with  vi-ji),  abhi-a-kkha  (side  by  side  with 
a-kkha),  abhi-anu-mud  (side  by  side  with  anu-mud).  In 
these  latter  cases  abhi  shows  a  purely  deictic  character 
corresponding  to  Ger.  her-bei-kommen  (for  bei-kommen), 
E.  fill  up  (for  fill);  e.  g.,  abhhatikkanta  (=  ati  °  C), 
abbhatita  ("vorbei  gegangen"),  abbhantara  ("with-in", 
b-innen  or  "in  here"),  abbhudaharati,  abhipOreti  ("fill  up"), 
etc.  (see  also  II.   i,  c). 

II.  Lit,  Meaning.  —  I.  As  single  pref. :  (a)  against, 
to,  on  to,  at-,  viz.,  abbhatthangata  gone  towards  home, 
abhighata  striking  at,  °jjha  think  at,  "mana  thinking  on, 
"mukha  facing,  turned  towards,  "yati  at-tack,  °ruhati  ascend, 
°lasa  long  for,  °vadati  ad-dress,  "sapati  ac-curse,  "hata  hit 
at.  {i)  out,  over,  all  around:  abbhudeti  go  out  over, 
"kamati  exceed,  °jati  off-spring,  °janati  know  all  over, 
"bhavali  overcome,  °vaddhati  increase,  °vuttha  poured  out 
or  over,  "sandeti  make  over-flow,  "siiicati  sprinkle  over. 
(<■)  abhi  has  the  function  of  transitivising  inlrs.  verbs 
after  the  manner  of  E.  be-  (con-)  and  Ger.  er-,  thus 
resembling  in  meaning  a  simple  Caus.  formation,  like  the 
foil.:  abhigajjati  thunder  on,  °janati  "er-kennen"  ''jayati 
be-get,  "tthaneti  =  "gajjali,  "nadati  "er  tdnen",  °nandati 
approve  of  (cp.  anerkennen),  °passati  con-template,  "ra- 
mati  indulge  in,  "ropeti  honour,  ''vuddha  increased,  °sad- 
dahati  believe  in.  —  2.  As  base  in  comp"-  (2>i<i  part  of 
cpd.)  abhi  occurs  only  in  comb"-  sam-abhl  (which  is, 
however,  of  late  occurrence  and  a  peculiarity  of  later 
texts,    and    is   still    more  freq.   in  BSk. :  see  under  sam-). 

III.  Fig.  Meaning  (intensifying).  —  I.  A  single  pref.: 
abhikinna  strewn  all  over,  "jalati  shine  forth,  "jighacchati 
be  very  hungry,  "tatta  much  exhausted,  "tapa  very  hot, 
"toseti  pleuse  greatly ,  °nava  quite  fresh ,  "nipuna  very 
clever,  °nila  of  a  deep  black,  ^manapa  very  pleasant, 
"mangaly  very  lucky,  "yobbana  full  youth,  "rati  great 
liking,  "ratta  deep  red,  °ruci  intense  satisfaction,  "riipa 
very  handsome  {=  adhika-rUpa  C  ),  "sambuddha  wide  and 
fully-awake,  cp.  abbhuddhunati  to  shake  greatly  (::= 
adhikaquddh"  C.).  —  As  !«'  part  of  a  prep.-cpd.  (as 
modification-pref.)  in  foil,  combinations:  abhi-ud  (abbhud-) 
°ati,  "anu,  °ava,  "a,  °ni,  °ppa,  "vi,  °sai).  See  all  these 
s.  V.  and  note  that  the  contraction  (assimilation  before 
vowel)  form  of  abhi  is  abbh".  —  On  its  relation  to  pari, 
see  pari",  to  ava  see  ava°. 

IV.  Dialectical  Variation.  —  There  are  dial,  variations 
in  the  use  and  meanings  of  abhi.  Vedic  abhi  besides 
corresponding  to  abhi  in  P.  is  represented  also  by  ati^, 
adhi"  and  anu°,  since  all  are  similar  in  meaning,  and 
psychologically  easily  fused  and  confused  (cp.  meanings: 
abhi  =  on  to,  towards;  ati  =r  up  to  and  beyond;  adhi  ^ 
up   to,  towards,  over ;  anu  =  along  towards).  For  all  the 


Abhi 


62 


Abhijappa 


foil,  verbs  we  find  in  Pali  one  or  other  of  these  three 
prefixes.  So  atl  in  "jati,  "piHta,  °bruheti,  °vassati,  °vgyali, 
"vetheti;  also  as  vv.  11.  with  abhi-klrati,  °pavassati,  "roceti, 
cp.  atikkanta-abhi°  (Sk.  abhikranta);  adhi  in  °patthita, 
°pateti,  "ppaya,  °ppeta,  ''badheti,  ''bhu,  °vaha  (vice  versa 
P.  abhi-ropeti  compared  with  Sk.  adhiropayati) ;  anu  in 
"gijjhati,  "bruheti,  'sandahati. 

Abhikankhatl  [abhi  -j-  kankhati]  to  desire  after,  long  for, 
wish  for  S  1.140,  198  (Nibbanai)) ;  J  11. 428;  iv.io,  241; 
VvA  38,  283;  ThA  244.  —  pp.  abhikankhita.  Cp.  BSk. 
abhikanksati,  e.  g.  Jtm.   p.   221. 

Abhikankhanata  (f.)  [abhi  +  kankhana  +  ta]  wishing, 
longing,   desire  DA  1.242. 

Abhikankhita  [pp.  of  abhikankhatl]  desired,  wished,  longed 
for  Vv.\  201  (=  abhijjhita). 

Abhikankhin    (adj.)   cp.   wishing  for,  desirous  of  ( — °)  Th 

2.  360  (sitibhava"). 

Abhikinna  [pp.  of  abhikirati]  I.  strewn  over  with  ( — °), 
adorned,  covered  filled  Pv  ll.ll'^  (puppha°).  —  2.  over- 
whelmed, overcome,  crushed  by  ( — °)  It  89  (dukkh° ; 
vv.  11.  dukkhatinna  &  otinna)  =  A  I.147  (which  reads 
dukkhotinna).  See  also  avatinna. 

Abhikirati  —  l.  [Sk.  abhikirati]  to  sprinkle  or  cover  over: 
see  abhikinna  i.  —  2.  [Sk.  avakirati,  cp.  apakirituna] 
to  overwhelm,  destroy,  put  out,  throw  away,  crush  S 
1.54;  Th  I,  598;  2,  447  (ger.  "kirituna,  reading  of  C. 
for  T.  apa",  expl<i-  by  chaddetva);  Dh  25  (°k!rati  metri 
causa;  dlpai)  abhikirati  ^  viddhaqseti  vikirati  Dh.\  1.255; 
v.  1.  atikirati);  J  IV.121  ("kirati;  dipai)  =  viddharjseti  C.); 
VI. 541  (nandiyo  m'  abhikirare  =  abhikiranti  abhikkamanti 
C);  DhA  1.255  (inf-  °kiritut)).  —  pp.  abhikinna  see 
abhikinna  2. 

Abhikl]atl  [nbhi  -f-  kijati]  to  play  (a  game),  to  sport  Miln 
359  ('"!!>■))■ 

AbhikQjita  [abhi  -f  kiijila,  pp.  of  kuj]  resounding  (with 
the  song  of  birds)  Pv  11.12'  (cakkavaka" ;  so  read  for 
kujita).  Cp.  abbinikujita. 

Abhikkanta  (adj.-n.)  [pp.  of  abhikkamati,  in  sense  of  Sk. 
and  also  P.  atikkanta]  (a)  {adj.')  lit.  gone  forward,  gone 
out,  gone  beyond.  According  to  the  traditional  expl"- 
preserved  by  Bdhgh.  &  Dhp  (see  e.  g.  DA  1.227  =  KhA 
114  =  VvA  52)  it  is  used  in  4  applications:  abhikkanta- 
saddo  khaya  (-}-  pabbaniya  KhA)  sundar'-abhiriipa-abbha- 
numodanesu  dissati.  These  are:  I.  (lit.)  gone  away,  passed, 
gone  out,  departed  (-f-  nikkhanta,  meaning  khaya  "wane"), 
in  phrase  abhikkantaya  rattiya  at  the  waning  of  the  night 
Vin  1.26;  D  11.220;  M  1.142.  2.  excellent,  supreme  (= 
sundara)  Sn  1118  (°dassavin  having  the  most  exellent 
knowledge  =  aggadassavin  etc.  Nd^  76);  usually  in  compar 
°tara  (-|-  panitatara)  D  1.62,  74,  216;  A  ll.ioi;  III. 350 
sq.;     V.  140,     207     sq.;     DA     I.171     (=  atimanapatara). 

3.  pleasing,  superb,  extremely  wonderful,  as  exclamation 
°i)  repeated  with  bho  (bhante),  showing  appreciation  (;= 
abbhanumodana)  D  1. 85,  110,  234;  Sn  p.  15,  24,  etc.  freq. 

4.  surpassing,  beautiful  (always  with  °vanna  =  abhirupa) 
Vin  1.26;  D  11.220;  M  1.142;  Pv  ll.l'»  =  Vv  9'  (== 
atimanapa  abhirupa  PvA  71);  KhA  115  (==  abhirupa- 
chavin).  —  (*)  («/.)  abhikkantai]  (combd-  with  and  opp. 
to  patikkantai))  going  forward  (and  backward),  approach 
(and  receding)  D  1.70  (=  gamana  +  nivattana  DA  1.183); 
Vin  ni.i8i;_A  11.104,  106  sq. ;  VvA  6. 

Abhlkkama  going  forward,  approach,  going  out  Pv  IV.  1^ 
(opp.   patikkama  going  back);  DhA  ni.124  (°patikkama). 

Abhikkamati  [Vedic  abhikramati,  abhi  +  kamati]  to  go 
forward,  to  proceed,  approach  D  1.50  (:=abhim«kho  ka- 
mati, gacchati,  pavisati  DA  1.151);  II. 147,  256  (abhikka- 


mui)  aor.);  DhA  III. 1 24  (evaq  "itabbar]  evaq  patikkami- 
tabbar)  thus  to  approach  &  thus  to  withdraw).  —  pp. 
abhikkanta  (q.  v.). 

Abhikkhana'  (nt.)  [fr.  abhikkhanati]  digging  up  of  the 
ground   M   1. 143. 

Abhlkkhaoa^  (nt.)  [abhi  -|-  »ikkhana  from  ik§,  cp.  Sk. 
abhiksna  of  which  the  contracted  form  is  P.  abhinha] 
only  as  ace.  adv.  '^q  constantly,  repeated,  often  Vv  24''^ 
(=  abhinhai)  VvA  116);  Pv  11. 8'  (=  abhinhai)  bahuso 
PvA   107);  Pug  31;  DhA   11.91. 

Abhikkhanati  [abhi  +  khanati]  to  dig  up  M  1. 142. 

Abhikkhipati  [abhi  +  khipati]  to  throw  Davs  III. 60;  cp. 
abhinikkhipati  ibid.   12. 

Abhigajjati  [abhi  -\-  gajjati  from  garj,  sound-root,  cp.  P. 
gaggara]  (a)  to  roar,  shout,  thunder,  to  shout  or  roar  at 
(c.  ace.)  Sn  831  (shouting  or  railing  =  gajjanto  uggajjanto 
Nd'  172);  ger.  abhigajjiya  thunderin.  Cp.  iii.io*.  — 
(b)  hum,  chatler,  twitter  (of  birds);  see  abhigajjin. 

Abhigajjin  (adj.)  [fr.  abhigajjati]  warbling,  singing,  chat- 
tering Th   I,   1 108,   H36. 

Abhigamanlya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  abhigacchati]  to  be  approached, 
accessible   PvA  9. 

Abhigijjhati  [abhi -(- gijjhati]  I.  to  be  greedy  for,  to  crave 
for,  show  delight  in  (c.  loc.)  Sn  1039  (kamesu,  cp.  Nd''' 
77).  —  2.   to  envy  (ace.)  S  I.15  (aiiiiam-aiiiiar)). 

Abhiglta  [pp.  of  abhigayati,  cp.  gita]  i.  sung  for.  Only 
in  one  phrase,  gathabhigilai),  that  which  is  gained  by 
singing  or  chanting  verses  (Ger.  "ersungen")  S  1.173  = 
Sn  81  =  Miln  228.  See  SnA  151.  —  2.  resounding  with, 
filled  with  song  (of  birds)  J  VI. 272  (=  abhiruda). 

Abhighata  [Sk.  abhighata,  abhi  -f-  ghata]  (a)  striking, 
slaying,  killing  PvA  58  (danda"),  283  (sakkhara").  — 
(b)  impact,  contact  DhsA  312  (rupa°  etc.). 

Abhicetasika  (adj.)  [abhi  +  ceto  +  ika]  dependent  on  the 
clearest  consciousness.  On  the  spelling  see  abhic*^  (of 
jhana)  M  1.33,  356;  III. 11 ;  S  11.278;  A  11.23;  v.132. 
(Spelt.  abhi°  at  M  I.33;  A  III. 1 14;  Vin  V.136).  See  Dial. 
III.108. 

Abhiceteti  [abhi  -j-  ceteti]  to  intend,  devise,  have  in  mind 
J   IV. 3 10  (manasa  papar)). 

AbhiCChanna  (adj.)  [abhi  -f-chanua]  covered  with,  bedecked 
or  adorned  with  ( — ")  J  11.48  (hema-jala°,  v.  1.  abhisan- 
channa),  370  (id.);  Sn  772  (=  ucchanna  avuta  etc.  Nd' 
24,  cp.  Nd2  365). 

AbhiCChita  (adj.)  [abhi  -j-  icchita,  cp.  Sk.  abhipsita]  desired 
J  VI.445   (so  read  for  abhijjhita). 

Abhijacca  (adj.)  [Sk.  abhijatya;  abhi  -f-  jacca]  of  noble 
birth  J   V.I 20. 

Abhijaneti  occasional  spelling  for  abhijaneti. 

Abhijappati  [abhi  -\-.  jappati]  to  wish  for,  strive  after,  pray 
for  S  1.143  (fead  asmabhijappanii  &  cp.  Khidrcd  Sayings 
p.  180)  =  J  111.359  (=  namati  pattheti  piheti  C);  Sn 
923,  1046  (-)- asiqsali  thometi ;  Nd-  79  =  jappati  &  same 
under  icchati).  Cp.  in  meaning  abhigijjhati. 

Abhijappana  (nt.)  [doubtful  whether  to  jappati  or  to  japati 
to  mumble,  to  which  belongs  jappana  in  kanqa"  DA  1.97] 
in  hattha°  casting  a  spell  to  make  the  victim  throw  up 
or  wring  his  hands  D   i.ii;   DA  1.97. 

Abhijappa  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  abhijappati,  cp.  jappa]  praying 
for,  wishing,  desire,  longing  Dhs  1 059  =  Nd^  tanha  11.; 
Dhs   1 136. 


Abhijappin 


63 


Abhinna 


Abhijappin  (aJj)  [fr-  abhijappati]  praying  for,  desiring  A 
111.353  (kama-labha"). 

Abhijalati  [abhi  -|-  jalatl]  to  shine  forlli,  ppr.  °anto  res- 
plendent PvA   189. 

Abhijavati  [abhi  +  javati]  to  be  eager,  active  Sn  668. 

Abhijata  (adj.)  [abi  -)-  jata]  of  noble  birth,  well-born,  S 
1.69;  Vv  29^;  Miln  359  ("kulakullna  belonging  to  a 
family  of  high  or  noble  Ijirth). 

Abhijatl  (f.)  [abhi -|- jati]  I.  Species.  Only  as  1. 1.  in  use 
by  certain  non-Buddhist  teachers.  They  divided  mankind 
into  six  species,  each  named  after  a  colour  D  1.53,  54: 
A  III. 383  fT.  (quoted  DA  1. 162)  gives  details  of  each 
species.  Two  of  them,  the  black  and  the  white,  are  in- 
terpreted in  a  Buddhist  sense  at  D  111.250,  M  11.222, 
and  Netti  158.  This  interpretation  (but  not  the  theory 
of  the  six  species)  has  been  widely  adopted  by  sub- 
sequent Hindu  writers.  —  2.  Rebirth,  descent,  Miln  226. 

Abhijatika  (adj.)  [fr.  abhijati]  belonging  to  ones  birth  or 
race,  born  of,  being  by  birth:  only  in  cpd.  kanhabhijatika 
of  dark  birth,  that  is,  low  in  the  social  scale  D  111.251  := 
A  in.348;  Sn  563  =  Th  I,  833;  cp.  JPTS.  1893,  11; 
in  sense  of  "evil  disposed  or  of  bad  character"  at  J  v.87 
(=  kalaka-sabhava  C). 

Abhijatita  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  abhijati]  the  fact  of  being  born, 
descendency   VvA   216. 

Abhijana  (nt.  or  m?)  [Sk.  abhijfiana]  recognition,  remem- 
brance, recollection  Miln  78.  See  also  abhinna. 

AbtlijanatI  [abhi  -f-  jiia,  cp.  janati  &  abhinna]  to  know 
by  experience,  to  know  fully  or  thoroughly,  to  recognise, 
know  of  (c.  ace),   to  be  conscious  or  aware  of  D  1.143; 

s  n.58,  105,  219,  278;  111.59,  91;  1V.50,  324,  399;  V.52, 

J 76,  282,  299;  Sn  1 1 17  (ditthii)  Gotamassa  na  a,); 
J  IV.  142;  Pv  II. 7 10=:  II.  10'  (n'abhijanami  bhuttai)  va  pitai)); 
Sdhp  550;  etc.  —  Pot.  abhijaneyya  Nd^  78^,  &  abbij- 
anna  Sn  917,  1059  (=rjaneyySsi  SnA  592);  .aor  abban- 
iiasi  Sn  p.  i6.  —  ppr.  abhijanai]  S  iv.i9,  89;  Sn  788 
(=  "jananto  C),  11 14  (=  "janants  Nd-  78'')  abhijanitva 
DhA  IV.233;  abhinnaya  Siv.16;  v.392;  Sn  534  (sabbad- 
hanimai)),  743  (jatikkhayaij),  II15,  1148;  Itgi  (dhammaq); 
Dh  166  (atta-d-atthaq);  freq.  in  phrase  sayat)  abhinnaya 
from  personal  knowledge  or  self-experience  It  97  (v.l. 
abhinna);  Dh  353;  and  abhinna  [short  form,  like  ada 
for  adaya,  cp.  upada]  in  phrase  sayai)  abhinna  D  t.31 
(-|- sacchikatva);  S  11.217;  I'  97  (^■■''  f°^  °abhiiii5aya),  in 
abhiiina-vosita  perfected  by  highest  knowledge  S  1.167^ 
175  =  Dh  423  ("master  of  supernormal  lore"  Mrs  Rh.  D. 
in  kindred  S.  p.  208;  cp.  also  Dh.^  iv.233);  It  47  = 
61=81,  and  perhaps  also  in  phrase  sabbai]  abhinna- 
parinneyya  S  U'.29.  —  grd.  abhinne^ya  S  iv.29;  Sn 
558  ("ij  abhiniiatai)  known  is  the  knowable);  Nd-  .s.v.; 
DhA  IV.233.  —  PP-  abhinnata  (q.  v.). 

Abtlijayatl  [abhi  -f  jayali.  Pass,  of  jan,  but  in  sense  of  a 
Caus.  =r  janeti]  to  beget,  produce,  effect,  attain,  in  phrase 
akanhax)  asukkai)  Nibbanai)  a.  D  III. 251;  A  111.384  sq. 
At  Sn  214  abhijayali  means  "to  behave,  to  be",  cp. 
SnA   265  (ahhijayati  =  bhavati). 

Abhijigigsati  [abhi  -f  jigiijsati]  to  wish  to  overcome,  to 
covet  J  VM93  (=:jinitui]  icchati  C).  Burmese  scribes 
spell  "jiglsati;  Th  i,  743  ("cheat"?  Mrs  Rh.  D.;  "ver- 
nichtcn"    Neumann).    Sec  also  abhijeti,  and  nijigiqsanata. 

Abhijighacchatl  [abhi  -1-  jighacchati]  to  be  very  hungry 
PvA   271. 

Abhijivanika  (adj.)  [abhi  +  jivana  -f-  ika]  belonging  to  ones 
livehood,  forming  ones  living  Vin  1.187  (s'Pi'a)' 


Abhijihana  (f.)  [abhi  -|-  jihana  of  jeh  to  open  ones  mouth] 
strenuousness,  exertion,  strong  endeavour  J  VI.373  (viriya- 
karana  C). 

Abhijeti  [abhi  +  jayati]  to  win,  acquire,  conquer  J  VI.273 
(abhi°  melri  causa). 

Abhijotetl  [abhi -f  joteti]  to  make  clear,  explain,  illumiaate 

J   V.339. 

Abhijjanaka  (adj.)  [a  -)-  bhijjana  -f-  ka,  from  bhijja,  grd.  of 
bhld]  not  to  be  broken,  not  to  be  moved  or  changed, 
uninfluenced  J   11.170;  DhA  III. 189. 

Abhijjamana  (adj.)  [ppr.  passive  of  a  4-  bhid,  see  bhindati] 
that  which  is  not  being  broken  up  or  divided.  In  the 
stock  description  of  the  varieties  of  the  lower  Iddhi  the 
phrase  udake  pi  abhijjamane  gacchati  is  doubtful.  The 
principal  passages  are  D  1.78,  212;  III. 112,  281;  M  1.34, 
494;  II. 18;  A  1. 170,  255;  III. 17;  V.199;  S  H  121  ;  V.264. 
In  about  half  of  these  passages  the  reading  is  abhijja- 
mano.  The  various  readings  show  that  the  MSS  also  are 
equally  divided  on  this  point.  Bdgh.  (Vism  396)  reads 
°mane,  and  explains  it,  relying  on  Ps  11.208,  as  that 
sort  of  water  in  which  a  man  does  not  sink.  Pv  lli.i' 
has  the  same  idiom.  Dhammapala's  note  on  that  (PvA 
169)  is  corrupt.  At  D  1. 78  the  Colombo  ed.  1904,  reads 
abhejjamane  and  tr.  'not  dividing  (the  water)';  at  D  1.2 12 
it  reads  abhijjamano  and  tr.  'not  sinking  (in  the  water)'. 

Abhijjha(f)  [fr.  abhi  -f  dhyfi  (jhayatii),cp.  Sk.  abhidhyana], 
covetousness,  in  meaning  almost  identical  with  lobha 
(cp.  D/is.  irsl.  22)  D  1.70,  71  ("aya  cittai)  parisodheti  he 
cleanses  his  heart  from  coveting;  abhijjhaya  =  abl.;  cp. 
DA  1.21 1  =  abhijjhato);  M  1.347  (''J-);  ^  III. 49,  71  sq., 
172,  230,  269;  S  IV.73,  104,  188,  322  (adj.  vigat'abhijjha), 
343  (°ayavipaka);  A  1.280;  111.92;  v. 251  sq.;  It  118; 
Nd'  98  (as  one  of  the  4  kaya-gantha,  q.  v.);  Nd-  tanha 
II.';  Pug  20,  59;  Dhs  1 136  ("kayagantha) ;  Vbh  195.244 
(vigat'abhijjha),  362,  364,  391;  Nett  13;  DhA  1.23;  PvA 
103,  282;  Sdhp  56,  69.  —  Often  comb<i  with  °doma- 
nassa  covetousness  &  discontent,  e.g.  at  D  111.58,  77, 
141,  221,  276;  M  1.340;  III. 2;  A  1.39,  296;  11.16.  152; 
IV. 300  sq.^  457  sq.;  v.348,  351;  Vbh  105,  1.93  sq. 
-anabhijjha  absence  of  covetousness  Dhs  35,  62.  —  See 
also  anupassin,  ganlha,  domanassa,  sila. 

Abhijjhatar  see  abhijjhitar. 

Abhijjhatl  [cp.  abhidyati,  abhi  +  jhayati';  see  also  abhij- 
jhayati]  to  wish  for  (ace),  long  for,  covet  S  v. 74  (so 
read  for  abhijjhati):  ger.  abhijjhaya  J  VM74  (=  patthetva 
C^)    —  PP-  abhijjhita. 

Abhijjhayati  [Sk.  abhidhyayati,  abhi  -|-  jhayati' ;  see  also 
abhijjhati]  to  wish  for,  covet  (c.  ace).  Sn  301  (aor. 
abhijjhayiijsu  =  abhipatthayamana  jhayiqsu  Sn   A   320). 

Abhijjhalu  (&  "u)  (adj.)  [cp.  jhiiyin  from  jhayati';  abhijj- 
halu  with  'alu  for  "agu  which  in  its  turn  is  for  ayin. 
The  B.Sk.  form  is  abhidyalu,  e.  g.  Divy  301,  a  curious 
reconstruction]  covetous  D  1.139;  I'I.82;  S  11.168;  111.93; 
A  1.298;  11.30,  59,  220  (an°  4" '"yp*"^'*^'^''"'  samma- 
ditthiko  at  conclusion  of  sila);  v.92  sq.,  163,  286  sq.; 
It  90,  91 ;  Pug  39,  40. 

Abhijjhitta  v.  1.  at  DhA  iv.ioi  for  ajjhittba. 

Abhijjhita  [pp.  of  abhijjhati]  coveted,  J.  vi.445;  usually 
neg.  an°  not  coveted,  Vin  1.287;  Sn  40  (=  anabhipatlhita 
So  A  85;  cp.  Nd^  38);  Vv  47«  (=  na  abhikankhita 
VvA   201). 

Abhijjhitar  [n.  ag.  fr.  abhijjhita  in  med.  function]  one  who 
covets  M  1.287  (T.  abhijjhatar,  v.  1.  "itar)  =  A  V.26S 
(T.  "itar,  V.  I.  ''aiar). 

Abhiiifia  (adj.)  (usually  — °)  [Sk.  abhijiia]  knowing,  pos- 
sessed of  knowledge,  esp.  higher  or  supernormal  know- 
ledge   (abhiiiiia),    intelligent;    thus    in   cbalabhlnna   one 


Abhinna 


64 


Abhidosa 


who  possesses  the  6  abhinnSs  Vin  iTt.88;  dandh°  of  slug- 
gish intellect  D  ill. 106;  A  11.149;  v.63  (opp.  khipp°) ; 
inah°  of  great  insight  S  11. 1 39.  —  Compar.  abhiiinatara 
S  V.I 59  (read  bhiyyo  'bhiSfiataro). 

Abhinnata  (f.)  [fr.  abhiiiBa]  in  cpd.  maha°  state  or  con- 
dition   of   great    intelligence    or    supernormal    knowledge 

5  IV.263;  V.I 75,  298  sq. 

Abhinna'  (f.)  [fr.  abhi-f-  Jiia,  see  janati].  Rare  in  the  older 
texts.  It  appears  in  two  contexts.  Firstly,  certain  conditions 
are  said  to  conduce  (inter  alia)  to  serenity,  to  special 
knowledge  (abhinna),  to  special  wisdom,  and  to  Nibbana. 
These  conditions  precedent  are  the  Path  (S  V.421  r=  Vin 
i.io  =  S  IV.331),  the  Path  -|-  best  knowledge  and  full 
emancipation  (A  v.238),  the  Four  Applications  of  Mind- 
fulness (S  V.I 79)  and  the  Four  Steps  to  Iddhi  (S.  v.255). 
The  contrary  is  three  times  stated ;  wrong-doing,  priestly 
superstitions,  and  vain  speculation  do  not  conduce  to 
abhiSna  and  the  rest  (D  111.131 ;  A  HI  325  sq.  and  v. 216). 
Secondly,  we  find  a  list  of  what  might  now  be  called 
psychic  powers.  It  gives  us  i,  Iddhi  (cp.  levitation);  2, 
the  Heavenly  Ear  (cp.  clairaudience);  3,  knowing  others' 
thoughts  (cp.  thought-reading) ;  4,  recollecting  one's  pre- 
vious births;  5,  knowing  other  people's  rebirths;  6,  cer- 
tainty of  emancipation  already  attained  (cp.  final  assurance). 
This  list  occurs  only  at  D  ni.281  as  a  list  of  abhinnas. 
It  stands  there  in  a  sort  of  index  of  principal  subjects 
appended  at  the  end  of  the  Digha,  and  belongs  therefore 
to  the  very  close  of  the  Nikaya  period.  But  it  is  based 
on  older  material.  Descriptions  of  each  of  the  six,  not 
called  abhiiina's,  and  interspersed  by  expository  sentences 
or  paragraphs,  are  found  at  D  1.89  sq.  (^trsl.  Dial.  1.89 
sq.);  M  1.34  (see  Btiddh.  5»//'rtj,  210  sq.);  A  1.255,  258  == 
111.17,  28o  =  iv.42i.  At  S  1. 191;  Vin  11. 16;  Pug  14,  we 
have  the  adj.  chalabhinna  ("endowed  with  the  6  Apper- 
ceptions"). At  S  11.216  we  have  five,  and  at  S  v. 282, 
290  six  abhiiina's  mentioned  in  glosses  to  the  text.  And 
at  S  II. 21 7,  222  a  bhikkhu  claims  the  6  powers.  See  also 
M  ll.ii;  111.96.  It  is  from  these  passages  that  the  list  at 
D  in.   has  been  made  up,  and  called  abhifina's. 

Afterwards  the  use  of  the  word  becomes  stereotyped. 
In  the  Old  Commentaries  (in  the  Canon),  in  the  later 
ones  (of  the  5'''  cent.  A.D.),  and  in  medieval  and  modern 
Pali,  abhinna,  nine  times  out  ten,  means  just  the  powers 
given  in  this  list.  Here  and  there  we  find  glimpses  of 
the  older,  wider  meaning  of  special,  supernormal  power 
of  apperception  and  knowledge  to  be  acquired  by  long 
training  in  life  aud  thought.  See  Nd'  108,  328  (expl"-  of 
nana);  Nd'^  s.  v.  and  N».  466;  Ps  1.35;  11.156,  189;  Vbh 
228,  334;  Pug  14;  Nett  19,  20;  Miln  342;  Vism  373; 
Mhvs  XIX. 20;  DA  I.I 75;  DhA  11.49;  iv.30;  Sdhp  228, 
470,  482.  See  also  the  discussion  in  the  Cpd.  60  sp., 
224  sq.  For  the  phrase  sayarn  abhinna  sacchikatva  and 
abhiSna-vosita  see  abhijanati.  The  late  phrase  yath^  abhin- 
nam  means  'as  you  please,  according  to  liking,  as  you 
like',  J  V.365  {=  yathadhippayara  yatharucira  C).  For 
abhinna  in  the  use  of  an  adj.  (°abhii5na)  see  abhinna. 

Abhinna''  ger.  of  abhijanati. 

Abhiiiiiata  [pp.  of  abhijanati]  I.  known,  recognised  Sn  588 
(abhiiineyyai]  =15).  —  2.  (well)-known,  distinguished  D  I.89 
("kolanna  ^  pakata-kulaja  DA  1.252),   235;  Sn  p.    115. 

Abhiiineyya  grd.  of  abhijanati. 

Abhithana  (nt.)  [abhi  +  thana,  cp.  abhititthati;  lit.  that 
which  stands  out  above  others]  a  great  or  deadly  crime. 
Only  at  Sn  231  =  Kh  vi.io  (quoted  Kvu  109).  Six  are 
there  mentioned,  &  are  explained  (KhA  189)  as  "matricide, 
parricide,  killing  an  Arahant,  causing  schisms,  wounding 
a  Buddha,   following  other  teachers".    For  other  relations 

6  suggestions  see  Dhs  trsl.  267.  —  See  also  anantarika. 

Abhinhag  (adv.)  [contracted  form  of  abhikkhanar)]  repeat- 
edly, continuous,  often  M  1.442  ("apattika  a  habitual 
offender),    446    ("kararia    continuous    practice);     Sn    335 


("sagvasa  continuous  living  together);  J  1.190;  Pug  32; 
DhA  11.239;  Vv.\  116  (=  al)hikkhana),  207,  332;  PvA 
107  (=  abhikkhanaq).  Cp.  abhinhaso. 

AbhinhaSO  (adv.)  [adv.  case  fr.  abhinha;  cp.  bahuso  =  Sk. 
bahusah]  always,  ever  S  1.194;  Th  1,25;  Sn  559,560,998. 

Abhltaklteti  [abhi  -|-  takketi]  to  search  for  Davs  v.4. 

Abhitatta  [pp.  of  abhi  -f-tapati]  scorched  (by  heat),  dried 
up,  exhausted,  in  phrases  unha"  Vin  11.220;  Miln  97,  and 
ghamma°  S  ii.lio,  118;  Sn  1014;  J  11.223;  ^^A  40; 
PvA   114. 

Abhltapa  [abhi -f- tapa]  extreme  heat,  glow;  adj.  very  hot 
Vin  HI. 83  (slsa'^  sunstroke);  M  1.507  (maha"  very  hot); 
Miln  67  (mahabhitapatara  much  hotter);  Pviv.18  (maha°, 
of  niraya). 

Abhita]ita  [abhi  +  talita  fr.  taleti]  hammered  to  pieces, 
beaten,  struck  Vism  231   (muggara°). 

Abhititthati  [abhi  -\-  titthali]  to  stand  out  supreme,  to  excel, 
surpass  D  11.261 ;  J  vi.474  (abhitthaya  =  abhibhavitva  C). 

Abhitunna  (tunna)  [not  as  Morris,  jf.P.l'.S.  1886,  135, 
suggested  fr.  abhi  -\-  tud,  but  ace.  to  Kern,  Toiv.  p.  4 
fr.  abhi  -f  tiirv.  (Cp.  turati  &  tarati'  and  Ved.  turvati). 
Thus  the  correct  spelling  is  "tunna  :=  Sk.  abhiturna.  The 
latter  occurs  as  v.  1.  under  the  disguise  of  (sok-)ahitunda 
for  "abhitunna  at  M.  Vastu  III. 2].  Overwhelmed,  overcome 
overpowered  S  11.20;  Ps  1.129  (dukkha°),  164;  J  1.407 
509  C^tunna);  II. 399,  401;  III. 23  (soka");  iv.330;  v.268 
Sdhp   281." 

AbhitO  (indecl.)  adv.  case  fr.  prep,  abhi  etym.]. —  I.  round 
about,  on  both  sides  J  VI. 535  (=  ubhayapassesu  C), 
539.  —  2.  near,  in  the  presence  of  Vv  64'  (=^  samipe 
VvA  275). 

Abhitosetl  [abhi  -f  toseti]  to  please  thoroughly,  to  satisfy, 
gratify  Sn   709  (=  ativa  toseti  Sn  A  496). 

Abhitthaneti  [abhi  ■{■  thaneti]  to  roar,  to  thunder  J  1.330, 
332  =  Cp.  in.io'. 

Abhittharati  [abhi  -\-  tarati^,  evidently  wrong  for  abhittarati] 
to  make  haste  Dh  u6  (:=:  turitaturitai)  sighasighai)  karoti 
DhA  111.4). 

Abhitthavati  [abhi  +  thavati]  to  praise  J  1.89;  III. 531  ; 
Davs  III. 23;  DhA  1.77;  PvA  22;  cp.  abhltthunati. 

Abhitthavana  (nt.)  [fr.  prec]  praise  Th   A   74. 

Abhitthunati  [abhi  -f  thunati ;  cp.  abhitthavati]  to  praise 
J  1. 1 7  (aor  abhitthunirjsu);  cp.  thunati  2. —  pp.  °tthuta 
DhA  1.88. 

Abhida'  (adj.)  as  attr.  of  sun  &  moon  at  M  II.34,  35  is 
doubtful  in  reading  &  meaning;  vv.  11.  abhidosa  &  abhi- 
desa,  Neumann  Irsl.  "unbeschrankt".  The  context  seems 
to  require  a  meaning  like  "full,  powerful"  or  unbroken, 
unrestricted  (abhijja  or  abhfta  "fearless"?")  or  does  abhida 
represent  Vedic  abhidyu  heavenly  ? 

Abhida'^  Only  in  the  difficult  old  verse  D  11.107  (=  S 
v.263  =  A  IV.312  ^  Nd  64  ^  Nett  60  =  Divy  203). 
Aorist  y^  sg.  fr.  bhindati  he  broke. 

Abhidassana  (nt.)  [abhi  +  dassana]  sight,  appearance, 
show  J  VI. 193. 

Abhideyya  in  sabba°  at  Pv.\  78  is  with  v.  1.  BE  to  be 
read  sabbapatheyyarj. 

Abhidosa  (° — )  the  evening  before,  last  night;  "kalakata 
M  1. 1 70  =  J  1. 81;  "gala  gone  last  night  J  vi.386  (= 
hiyyo  pathama-yame  C). 


Abhidosika 


6S 


Abhinippanna 


Abhidosika  belonging  to  last  night  (of  gruel)  Vin  111.15; 
Miln  291.  See  &bhi°. 

Abhlddavati  [abhi  +  dru,  cp.  dava»]  to  rush  on,  to  assail 
Mhvs  6.  5  ;  Davs  111.47. 

Abhidhamati  [abhi  -|-  dhamati,  cp.  Sk.  abhi"  &  api-dhamati] 
blow  on  or  at  A  1.257. 

Abhldhamma  [abhi  -j-  dhamma]  the  "special  Dhamma," 
i.e.,  I.  theory-  of  the  doctrine,  the  doctrine  classified,  the 
doctrine  pure  and  simple  (without  any  admixture  of  lite- 
rary grace  or  of  personalities,  or  of  anecdotes,  or  of 
arguments  ad  personam),  Vin  1.64,  68;  111.144;  IV. 344. 
Coupled  with  abhivinaya,  D  111.267;  ^'  1. 272.  —  2.  (only 
in  the  Chronicles  and  Commentaries)  name  of  the  Third 
Pitaka,  the  third  group  of  the  canonical  books.  Dpvs 
V.37 ;  PvA  140.  See  the  detailed  discussion  at  DA  1. 1 5, 
18  sq.  [As  the  word  abhidhamma  standing  alone  is  not 
found  in  Sn  or  S  Qr  A,  and  only  once  or  twice  in  the 
Dialogues,  it  probably  came  into  use  only  towards  the 
end  of  the  period  in  which  the  4  great  Nikayas  grew  up.] 
-katba  discourse  on  philosophical  or  psychological 
matters,  M  1.214,  218;  A  111.106,392.  See  dhammakatha. 

Abhidhammlka  see  abhidhammika. 

AbMdhara  (adj.)  [abhi  +  dhara]  firm,  bold,  in  °inana  firm- 
minded  Dh  p.  81  (ace.  to  Morris  y.P.T.S.  1886,  135; 
not  verified). 

Abhidhayin  (adj.)  [abhi  -f  dhayin  fr.  dhS]"  putting  on", 
designing,  calling,  meaning  Pgdp  98. 

Abhidhareti  [abhi  +  dhareti]  to  hold  aloft  J  1.34  =  Bu  iv.i. 

Abhldhavatl  [abhi  -\-  dhavati]  to  run  towards,  to  rush 
about,  rush  on,  hasten  Vin  11.195;  S  1.209;  J  n.217; 
111.83;  DhA  IV.23. 

Abhidhavin  (adj.)  fr.  abhidhSvati]  "pouring  in",  rushing  on, 
running  J  vi.559. 

Abhlnata  [pp.  of  abhi  4-  namati]  bent,  (strained,  fig.  bent 
on  pleasure  M  1.386  (+ apanata);  S  1.28  (id.;  Mrs.  Rh.  D. 
"strained    forth",  cp.  Kindred  S  1.39).  See  also  apaaata. 

Abhinadatl  [abhi  -|-  nadati]  to  resound,  to  be  full  of  noise 
J  VI. 531.  Cp.  abhinadita. 

Abhlnandatl  [abhi  -f  nandati]  to  rejoice  at,  find  pleasure 
in  (ace),  approve  of,  be  pleased  or  delighted  with  (ace.) 
D  1.46  (bhasitaq),  55  (id.),  158,  223;  M  1.109,  458; 
S  1.32  (annai)),  57,  14,  (cakkhur),  rupe  etc.);  A  IV.411; 
Th  1,  1006;  Dh  75,  219;  Sn  1054,  1057,  iili;  Nd*  82; 
Miln  25;  DA  i.i6o;  DhA  111.194  (aof-  abhinandi,  opp. 
patikkosi)  VvA  65  (vacanai)).  —  pp.  abhinandlta  (q.  v.).  — 
Often  in  comb"-  with  abhlvadatl  (q.  v.). 

AbUnandana  (nt.)  &  °ai  (f.)  [fr.  abhinandati,  cp.  nandana], 
pleasure,  delight,  enjoyment  D  1.244;  M  1.498;  J  iv.397. 

Abhinandlta  [pp.  of  abhinandati]  only  in  an°  not  enjoyed, 
not  (being)  an  object  of  pleasure  Siv^l3  .=  It  38;  S  v.  319. 

Abhinandln  (adj.)  [fr.  abhinandati,  cp.  nandln]  rejoicing 
at,  finding  pleasure  in  (loc.  or  — °),  enjoying  A  11.54 
(piyarupa);  esp.  freq.  in  phrase  (tanha)  tatratatr'4bhinan- 
dini  finding  its  pleasure  in  this  or  that  [cp.  B.Sk.  trsna 
totra-tatr'abhinant'ini  M  Vastu  111.332]  Vin  i.io;  S  v.421; 
Ps  11.147;  Nett  72,  etc. 

Abhinamati  [abhi  -f  namati]  to  bend.  —  pp.  abhlnata  (q.v.). 

Abhinaya  [abhi  +  naya]  a  dramatic  representation  VvA 
209  (sakha°). 


Abhlnava  (adj.)  [abhi  -|-  nava]  quite  young,  new  or  fresh 
Vin  iu.337;J  11.143  (devaputta),  435  (so  read  for  accunha 
in  expl°  of  paccaggha;  v. v.  11.  abbhu^ha  &  abhi^ha); 
ThA  201  ("yobbana  =  abhiyobbana) ;  PvA  40  ("sapthana), 
87  (=  paccaggha)    155. 

Abhinadita  [pp-  of  abhinadeti,  Caus.  of  abhi  -|-  nad ;  see 
nadati]  resounding  with  ( — °),  filled  with  the  noise  (or 
song)  of  (birds)  J  VI. 530  (=  abhinadanto  C);  PvA  157 
(=  abhirtida). 

Abhlnlkujlta  (adj.)  [abhi  -f  nikujita]  resounding  with,  full 
of  the  noise  of  (birds)  J  v.232  (of  the  barking  of  a  dog), 
304  (of  the  cuckoo) ;  so  read  for  "kunjita  T.).  Cp.  abhikujita. 

Abhinikkhamatl  [abhi  -|-  nikkhamati]  to  go  forth  from 
(abl.),  go  out,  issue  Dhs  A  91 ;  esp.  fig.  to  leave  ihe 
household  life,  to  retire  from  the  world  Sn  64  (=  geha 
abhinikkhamitva  kasaya-vattho  hutva  Sn  A   1 1 7). 

Abhinlkkhamana  (nt.)  [abhi  -f-  nikkhamana]  departure,  going 
away,  esp.  the  going  out  into  monastic  life,  retirement, 
renunciation.  Usually  as  inaba°  the  great  renunciation 
J  1.61;  PvA   19. 

Abhinikkhlpati  [abhi  -|-  nikkhipati]  to  lay  down,  put  down 
Davs  IIH2,  60. 

Abhlnlgganhana  (f.)  [abslr.  fr.  abhiniggaphati]  holding 
back  Vin  III. 121   (-|-  abhinippilana). 

AbhlniggaQhatl  [abhi  -|-  nigganhSti]  to  hold  fcack,  restrain, 
prevent,  prohibit;  always  in  comb°-  with  abbinipplleti 
M  1. 1 20;  A  V.230.  —  Cp.  abhinigganhana. 

Abhlnlndliya  [w.  11.  at  all  passages  for  abinindriya] 
doubtful  meaning.  The  other  is  expH  by  Bdhgh  at  D.\ 
1.120  as  paripunn";  and  at  222  as  avikal-indriya  not 
defective,  perfect  sense-organ.  He  must  have  read  ahin°. 
Abhi-n-indriya  could  only  be  expl"!  as  "with  supersense- 
organs",  i.  e.  with  organs  of  supernormal  thought  or  per- 
ception, thus  coming  near  in  meaning  to  ^abhinnindriya; 
We  should  read  ahin"  throughout  D  1.34,  77,  186,  195. 
11.13;    M  II. 18;  111. 121;  Nd-  under  puccha'  (only  ahln°). 

Abhinlnnameti  [abhi  -|-  ninnameti  cp.  BSk.  abhinirnSmayati 
l,al.  V.  439]  to  bend  towards,  to  turn  or  direct  to  D  1.76 
(cittai)  iiana-dassanaya) ;  M  1.234;  Si. 123;  iv.178;  Pug 60. 

Abhlnipajjati  [abhi  -\-  nipajjati]  to  lie  down  on  Vin  iv.273 
(+  abhinisidati);  A  IV.188  (in  =  ace.  +  abhinisidati); 
Pug  67  (id.). 

Abhinlpatatl  [abhi  4-  nipatatl]  to  rush  on  (to)  J  II. 8. 

Abhlnlpata  (-matta)  destroying,  hurting  (?)  at  Vbh  321  is 
expl<f  by  apatha-matta  [cp.  Divy  125  sastrSbhinipata 
splitting  open  or  cutting  with  a  knife]. 

Abhlnlpatana  (nt.)  [fr.  abhi-ni-pateti]  in  danda-sattba° 
attacking  with  stick  or  knife  Nd^  576*. 

Abhlnlpatin  (adj.)  [abhi  +  nipSlin]  falling  on  io  (— °)  J  11.7. 

Abhinlpuoa  (adj.)  [abhi  +  nipupa]  very  thorough,  very 
clever  D  111.167. 

Abhinlppajjatl  [abhi  -|-  nippajjati]  to  be  produced,  accrue, 
get,  come  (to)  M  1.86  (bhoga  abhinipphajjanti:  sic)  = 
Nd'   99   (has   n'abhinippajjanti).  —  Cp.  abbinipphadeti, 

Abhlnippata  at  J  vi.36  is  to  be  read  abhinippanna  (so 
V.  1.  BB.). 

Abhlnlppatta  at  Dhs  1035,  "'S^  '^  '°  ^^  '^^<^  abbinibbatta. 

Abhinippanna  (&  "nlppbanna)  [abhi  -|-  nippanna,  pp.  of 
"nippajjati]  produced,  effected,  accomplished  D  11.223 
(siloka);  J  vi.36  (so  read  for  abhinippata);  Miln  8  (pph.). 

1—6 


Abhinippllana 


66 


Abhiniharati 


Abhinippllana  (f.)  [abstr.  to  abhinipplleti,  cp.  nippijana] 
pressing,  squeezing,  taking  hold  of  Vin  111.121  f+  abhi- 
nigganhana). 

AbhinippHeti  [abhi  +  nippfleti]  to  squeeze,  crush,  subdue 
Vism  399;  often  in  comb"-  with  abbinigganhati  M  1. 
120;  A  V.230. 

Abhinipphatti  (f.)  [abhi  +  nipphatti]  production,  effecting 
D  ii.2»3  (v.l.  °nibbatti). 

Abhinipphadetl  [abhi  +  nipphadeti]  to  bring  into  existence, 
produce,  effect,  work,  perform  D  1.78  (bhajana-vikatiq); 
Vin  11.183  (iddhiij);  S  V.156,  255;  Miln  39. 

Abhinibbatta  [abhi  -|-  nibbatta,  pp.  of  abhinibbattati]  repro- 
duced, reborn  A  IV.40,  401 ;  Nd'^  256  (nibbatta  abhi° 
patubhnta);  Dhs  1035,  1036  (so  read  for°  nippatta); 
VvA  9  (puiiii^anubhava''  by  the  power  of  merit). 

Abhinibbattati  [abhi  +  nibbattati]  to  become,  to  be  repro- 
duced,   to   result    Pug    51.  —  pp.   abhinibbatta.  —  Cp. 

H.Sk.   wrongly  abhinivartate]. 

Abhinibbatti  (f.)  [abhi  +  nibbatti]  becoming,  birth,  rebirth, 
1)  1.229;  11-283  (v.l-  for  abhinipphatti)  S  11.65  (punab- 
bhava^),    loi   (id.);   IV. 14,   215;   A   V.121;   PvA  35. 

Abhinibbatteti  [abhi  +  nibbatteti,  cans,  of  ''nibbattati]  to 
produce,  cause,  cause  to  become  S  111.152;  A  v.47;  Nd^ 
under  janeti. 

Abhinibbijjati  [either  Med.  fr.  nibbindati  of  vid  for  *nir- 
vidyate  (see  nibbindati  B),  or  secondary  formation-  fr. 
ger.  nibbijja.  Reading  however  not  beyond  all  doubt]  to 
be  disgusted  with,  to  avoid,  shun,  turn  away  from  Sn  281 
(T.  abhinibbijjayatha,  v.  1.  BB°  nibbijjiyatha  &  °nibbajji- 
yatha,  SnA  expls-  by  vivajjeyyatha  ma  bhajeyyatha;  v.l. 
BB.  abhinippajjiya)  =  A  iv.  172  (T.  abhinibbajjaystha, 
vv.  11.  °nibbajjeyyatha  &  "nibbijjayatha);  ger.  abhinibbijja 
Th  2,  84. 

Abhinibbijjhatl  [abhi  +  nibbijjhati]  to  break  quite  through 
(of  the  chick  coming  through  the  shell  of  the  egg)  Vin 
UI.3 ;  M  1.104  =  S  ll'-'SS  (read°  nibbijjheyyun  for  nibbij- 
jeyyun  —   Cp.  Btiddh.  Sultas  233,  234. 

Abhinibblda  (f.)  [abhi  +  nibbida;  confused  with  abhinibb- 
hida]  disgust  with  the  world,  taedium  Nett  61  (taken  as 
abhinibbhida,  according  to  expl"-  as  "padalana-paniiatti 
avijfanda-kosanar)"),   98    (so    MSS,   but  C.  abhinibbidha). 

Abhinibbuta  (adj.)  [abhi  -|-  nibbuta]  perfectly  cooled,  calmed, 
serene,    esp.    in   two   phrases,   viz.   ditlha  dhamm'  abhi- 
nibbuta   A    1.142  =  M    III. 187;    Sn    1087;    Nd-  83,    and 
abhinibbutatta   of   cooled   mind   Sn  343  (=  aparidayha- 
"mana-citta    SnA   347),    456,  469,  783.  Also  at  Sdhp.  35. 

Abhinibbhida  (f.)  [this  the  better,  although  not  correct 
spelling;  there  exists  a  confusion  with  abhinibblda,  there- 
fore spelling  also  abhinibbidha  (Vin  in. 4,  C.  on  Nett  98). 
To  abhinibbijjhati,  cp.  B.Sk.  abhinirbheda  M  Vastu  1.272, 
which  is  wrongly  referred  to  bhid  instead  of  vyadh.] 
the  successful  breaking  through  (like  the  chick  through 
the  shell  of  the  egg),  coming  into  (proper)  life  Vin  iii  4; 
M  1. 104;  357;  Nett  98  (C.  reading).  See  also  abhinibblda. 

Abhinimantanata  (f.)  [absti.  to  abhinimanteti]  speaking 
to,  adiessing,  invitation  M  1.331. 

Abhinimanteti  [abhi  -(-  nimanteti]  to  invite  to  (c.  instr.), 
to  offer  to  D   1.6 1   (asanena). 

Abhinimmadana  (nt.)  [abhi  -\-  nimmadana]  crushing,  sub- 
duing, levelling  out  M  111.132;  A  IV.189  sq. 

Abhinintmita  [abhi  +  nimmita,  pp.  of  abhinimminati]  created, 
(by  magic)  Vv   16'  (paiica  ratha  sata;  cp.   VvA   79). 


Abhinimnilnfiti  [abhi  -)~  nimminati,  cp.  BSk.  abhinirmati 
Jtm  32;  abhinirminoti  Divy  251;  abliinirmimite  Divy  l66] 
to  create  (by  magic),  produce,  shape,  make  S  in. 152 
(riipar));  A  1.279  (olarikaij  attabhavai));  Nd'^  under  puccha" 
(rupai)  manomayaij);  VvA  16  (mahantaij  hatthi-raja-van- 
oaq).  —  pp.  abhinimmita  (q.  v.). 

Abhiniropana  (nt.)  &  a  (f)  [fr.  abhiniropeti]  fixing  one's 
mind  upon,  application  of  the  mind  Ps  1.16,  21,  30,  69, 
75i  90;  ^bh  87;  Dhs  7,  21,  298  (cp.  Dhs  trsl.  ii.i<)). 
See  also  abbiropana. 

Abhiniropeti  [abhi  -|-  niropeli]  to  implant,  fix  into  (one's 
mind),  inculcate  Nett  33. 

Abhinivajjetl  [abhi  -\-  nivajjeti]  to  avoid,  get  rid  of  D  III. 
113;  M  1. 119,  364,  402;  S  V.119,  295,  318;  A  III. 169 
sq.;  It  81. 

Abhinivassati  [abhi  -f  ni  +  vassati  fr.  vfj]  lit-  to  pour 
out  in  abundance,  fig.  to  produce  in  plenty.  Cp  1. 10-' 
(kalyane  good  deeds). 

Abhinivit^ha  (adj.)  [abhi  -)-  nivittha,  pp.  of  abhi-nivisati] 
"settled  in",  attached  to,  clinging  on  Nd''  152  (gahita 
paramattha  a.);  PvA  267  (=  ajjhasita  Pv  iv.8*). 

AbhinivisatI  [abhi  4-  nivlsati]  to  cling  to,  adhere  to,  be 
attached  to  Nd'  308,  309  (paramasati  -[-)•  —  pp.  abhi- 
nivittba;  cp.  also  abbinivesa. 

Abhinivesa  [abhi  -|-  nivesa,  see  nivesa-  &  cp.  nivesana] 
"settling  in",  i.  e.  wishing  for,  tendency  towards  ( — -"I, 
inclination,  adherence;  as  adj.  liking,  loving,  being  given 
or  inclined  to  D  111.230;  M  1.136,  251;  S  11.17;  HI. 10, 
13,  135,  161,  186  (sar)yojana°  iv.50;  A  in. 363  (pathavi°, 
adj.);  Nd-  227  (gaha  paramasa-f-);  Pug  22;  Vbh  145; 
Dhs  381,  1003,  1099;  Nett  28;  PvA  252  (rniccha"),  267 
(tanha°);  Sdhp  71.  —  Often  combd-  with  adhitthana 
e.g.  S  11.17 ;  Nd'  176,  and  in  phrase  idarj-sacc'  abhi- 
nivesa adherence  to  one's  dogmas,  as  one  of  the  4  Ties: 
see  kayagantha  and  cp.   Cpd.    171  n.   5. 

Abhinisidati  [abhi  -|-  nisidati]  to  sit  down  by  or  on  (ace), 
always  comtjd.  with  abhinipajjati  Vin  111.29;  iv.273;  A 
V.I 88;  Pug  67. 

AbhiniSSata  (pp.)  [abhi  -f  nissata]  escaped  Th    i,   io8g. 

Abhinihata  (pp-)  [abhi  -\-  nihata]  oppressed,  crushed,  slain 
J  IV.4. 

Abhinita  (pp.)  [pp.  of  abhi-neti]  led  to,  brought  to,  obliged 
by  (— °)  M  1.463  =  Miln  32  (raja  &  cora");  M  1.282; 
S  111.93;  Th  I,  350  =  435  (vataroga°  "foredone  with 
cramping  pains"  Mrs.  Rh.  D.);   Pug  29;  Miln   362. 

Abhinila  (adj.)  [abhi  -|-  nlla]  very  black,  deep  black,  only 
with  ref.  to  the  eyes,  in  phrase  "netta  with  deep-black 
eyes  D  n.i8;  ni.144,  167  sq.  [cp.  Sp.  Av.  S  1.367  & 
370  abhinila-padma-netra] ;  Th  2,  257  (netta  ahesui)  abbi- 
mla-m-ayatS). 

Abhinlhanati  [abhi  +  nis  -f-  han,  cp.  Sk.  nirhanti]  to  drive 
away,  put  away,  destroy,  remove,  avoid  M  1. 119  (in 
phrase  anir)  a.  abhiniharati  abhinivajjetl). 

Abhiniharati  [abhi  -\-  niharati]  I.  to  take  out,  throw  out 
M  1. 119  (see  abhinlhanati).  —  2.  to  direct  to,  to  apply 
to  (orig.  to  isolate?  Is  reading  correct?)  in  phrase  nana- 
dassanaya  cittai]  abhiniharati  abhininnameti  D  1.76 
(=  tanninnar)  tapponai)  karoti  DA  1.220,  224;  v.l.  ab- 
hini")  Cp.  the  latter  phrase  also  in  BSk.  as  abhijMbhinir- 
hara  A  v.  S  11.3  (see  ref.  &  note  Index  p.  221);  and  the 
pp.  abhinirhrta  (rddhih)  in  Divy  48,  49  to  obtain  ?  Ind.), 
264  (take  to  burial),  542. 


Abhinihara 


67 


Abhiinata 


Abhinihara  [abhi  -)-  mhara,  to  abhiniharati;  cp.  BSk.  sarir' 
"bhinirhara  taking  (the  body)  out  to  burial,  lit.  meaniDg, 
see  note  on  abhiniharati]  being  bent  on  ("downward 
force"  Dhs  trsl.  242),  i.  e.  taking  oneself  out  to,  way  of 
acting,  (proper)  behaviour,  endeavour,  resolve,  aspiration 
S  111.267  sq.  (°kusala);  A  11. 189;  111311;  iv.34  (°kusala); 
J  1. 14  (Buddhabhavaya  a.  resolve  to  become  a  Buddha), 
15  (Buddhaltaya) ;  Ps  1.61  sq.;  U.121;  Nett  26;  Miln 
216;  DhA  1.392;  11.82  (kata°). 

Abhipattika  (adj.)  [fr.  abhipatti]  one  who  has  attained, 
attaining  ( — °),  getting  possession  of  S  1.200  (devakanua°). 

Abhipatthita  (pp)  [fr.  abhipattheti]  hoped,  wished,  longed 
for  Miln   383;   SnA  85. 

Abllipattheti  [abhi  -f-  paltheti]  to  hope  for,  long  for,  wish 
for  Kh  VIII. 10;  SnA  320;  DhA  1.30.  —  pp.  abhipat- 
thita (q.  v.). 

Abhlpassatl  [abhi  +  passati]  to  have  regard  for,  look  for, 
strive  after  A  1. 147  (Nibbanaq);  111.75;  Sn  896  (khema°), 
1070  (rattamaha")  Nd'   308;   Nd^  428;  J  VI.370. 

Abhlpateti  [abhi  -|-  pateti]  to  make  fall,  to  bring  to  fall, 
to  throw  J  11.91   (kaudaq). 

Abhiparuta  (adj.)  [abhi  +  paruta,  pp.  of  abhiparupati] 
dressed  Miln   222. 

Abhipaleti  [abhi  +  paleti]  to  protect  Vv  842',  cp.  VvA  341. 

Abhipi]ita  (pp )  [fr-  abhiplleti]  crushed,  squeezed  Sdhp 
278,  279. 

Abhipijeti  [abhi  +  P'!eti]  to  crush,  squeeze  Miln  166.  — • 
pp.  abhipilita  (q.  v.). 

Abhipucchatl  [abhi  -\-  puccbati]  Sk.  abhiprcchati]  to  ask 
J  IV. 1 8. 

AbhipQreti  [abhi  +  pureli]  to  fill  (up)  Miln  238;  Davs  ill. 
60  (pai}suhi). 

Abhippaki^^a  [pp-  of  abhippakirati]  completely  strewn 
(with)  J   1.62. 

Abhippakirati  [abhi  -|-  pakirali]  to  sirew  over,  to  cover 
(completely)  D  11.137  (pupphani  Tathagatassa  sarirai]  okir- 
anti  ajjhokiranli  a.);  VvA  38  (for  abbhokiiali  Vv  5").  — 
pp.  abbippakinna  (q.  v.). 

Abhlppainodati  [abhi  -j-  pamodati]  to  rejoice  (iotrs.);  to 
please,  satisfy  (irs,  c.  ace.)  M  1.425;  S  v. 312,  330;  A 
V.112;  J  III  530;  Ps  1.95,   176,   190. 

Abhippalambatl  [abhi  -)-  palambati]  to  hang  down  M  III. 
164  (olambati  ajjholaml)ati  a.). 

Abhippavassati  [abhi  +  pavassati]  to  shed  rain  upon,  to 
pour  down;  intrs.  to  rain,  to  pour,  fall.  Usually  in  phrase 
mahamegho  abhippavassati  a  great  cloud  bursts  Miln  8, 
'3i  36,  304;  PvA  132  (v.  1.  ati");  intrs.  Miln  18  (pupp- 
hSni  °ii]su  poured  down).  —  pp.   abhippavuttha. 

Abhippavut^ha  (pp.)  [fr.  abhippavassati]  having  rained, 
poured,  fallen;  trs.  S  v. 51  (bandhanani  meghena  °ani)  = 
A  V.I 27;  intrs.  M  11.117  (mahamegho  "o  there  has  been 
a  cloudburst). 

Abhippasanna  (adj.)  [pp.  of  abhippasidati,  cp.  BSk.  abhi- 
prasannaj  finding  one's  peace  in  (c.  loc),  trusting  in, 
having  faith  in,  believing  in,  devoted  to  (loc.)  Vin  111.43; 
D  1.211  (Bhagavati)  S  1.134;  iv.319;  v. 225,  378;  A  111. 
237,  270,  326  sq.;  Sn  p.  104  (brahmaoesu);  PvA  54 
(sasand),  142  (id.).  Cp.  vippasanna  in  same  meaning. 

Abhippasada  [abhi  -f-  pasada,  cp.  BSk.  abhiprasada  Av.  S 
12  (cittasyu")  &  vippasada]  faith,  belief,  reliance,  trust 
Dhs  12  ("sense  of  assurance"  /«/.,  +  saddha),  25,  96, 
288;  PvA  223. 


Abhippasadeti  [Caus.  of  abhippasidati,  cp.  BSk.  abhipra- 
sadayati  Uivy  68,  85,  pp.  abhiprasadita-manah  Jtm  213, 
220]  to  establish  one's  faith  in  (loc),  to  be  reconciled 
with,  to  propitiate  Th  I,  11 73  ^  Vv  21''  (manai)  ara- 
hantamhi  ^  cittaij  pasadeti  VvA   105). 

Abhippasareti  [abhi  +  pasareti,  cp.  BSk.  abhiprasarayati 
Divy  389]   to  stretch  out  Vin  1.179  (pade). 

Abhippasidati  [abhi -|- pasldati]  to  have  faith  in  D  1.211 
(fut.  "issati).  —  pp.  abhippasanna;  Caus.  abhippasadeti. 

Abhippaharana  (nt.)  [abhi  +  paharapa]  attacking,  fighting, 
as  adj.  f.  "anl  fighting,  Ep.  of  Marassa  sena,  the  army  of 
M.  Sn  439  (kaphassa"  the  fighting  army  of  k.  =  samai.ia- 
brahmananag  nippothani  antarayakari  SnA  390). 

Abhibyapeti  [abhi  -|-  vySpeti,  cp.  Sk.  vyapnoti,  vi  -\-  gp] 
to  pervade  Miln  251. 

Abhibhakkhayati  [abhi  4-  bhakkhayati]  to  eat  (of  animals) 
Vin   11.201   (bhinko  pankai)  a.). 

Abhibhava    \ix-    abhibhavati]  defeat,  humiliation  SnA  436. 

Abhibhavati  [abhi  +  bhavati]  to  overcome,  master,  be  Lord 
over,  vanguisli,  conquer  S  1. 1 8,  32,  121  (maraiiaij);  iv. 
71  (ragadose),  117  (kodhaij),  246,  249  (samikai));  J  1.56, 
280;  FvA  94  (=  baliyati,  vaddhati).  —  fut.  abhihessatl 
see  abhihareti  4.  —  ger.  abhibhuyya  Vin  1.294;  L)h  328; 
It  41  (marar)  sasenaij);  Sn  45,  72  (°carin),  1097,  Nd^  85 
(=  abhibhavitva  ajjhottharitva  pariyadiyitva);  and  abhi- 
bhavitva  PvA  113  (=pasayha),  136.  —  grd.  abhibhava- 
niya  to  be  overcome  PvA  57.  —  Pass.  ppr.  abhibhuyamana 
being  overcome  (by)  PvA  80,  103.  —  pp.  abhibhuta  (q.v.). 

Abhibhavana(nt.)  [fr.  abhibhavati]  overcoming,  vanquishing, 
mastering  S  11.210  (v.  1.  BB  abhipatthana). 

Abhibhavaniyata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  abhibhavaniya,  grd.  of  abhi- 
bhavati] as  an°  invincibility  PvA   II 7. 

Abhibhayatana  (nt.)  [abhibhu  -f"  Syalana]  position  of  a 
master  or  lord,  station  of  mastery.  The  traditional  account 
of  these  gives  8  stations  or  stages  of  mastery  over  the 
senses  (see  Dial.  Il.il8;  Exp.  1.252),  detailed  identically 
at  all  the  foil,  passages,  viz.  U  11.110;  in. 260  (&  287); 
M  11.13;  A  1.40;  IV.305,  348;  V.61.  Mentioned  only  at 
S  IV. 77  (6  stations);  Ps  1.5;  Nd'^  466  (as  an  accomplish- 
'        ment  of  the  Bhagavant);   Dhs  247. 

Abhibhasana  (nt  )  [abhi  +  bhSsana  fr.  bhas]  enlightenment 
or  delight  ("light  &  delight"  trsl.)  Th  I,  613  (=  losana  C). 

Abhibhu  (n.-adj.)  [Vedic  abhibhu,  fr.  abhi  +  bhii,  cj).  abhi- 
bhavati] overcoming,  conquering,  vanquishing,  having 
power  over,  a  Lord  or  Master  of  ( — °)  D  ill. 29;  S  11. 
284;  Sn  211  (sabba°),  545  (Mara",  cp.  Marasena-pamad- 
dana  561),  642.  —  Often  in  phrase  abhibhtl  anabhibhuta 
aiiiiadatthudasa  vasavattin,  i.  e.  unvanquished  Lord  of  all 
D  118;  111.135  =  Nd-  276;  A  11.24:  IV.94;  It  122;  cp. 
DA  i.lll   (^abhibhavitva  thito  jetthako'  ham  asmiti). 

Abhibhiita  [pp  of  abhibhavati]  overpowered,  overwhelmed, 
vanquished  D  1,121;  S  1. 137  (jati-jara°);  11.228  (labha- 
sakkara-silokena);  A  1.202  (papakehi  dhammehi);  J  1.189; 
PvA  14,  41  (=  pareta),  60  (^  upagata),  68,  77,  80  (= 
pareta).  Often  neg.  an°  unconquered,  e.g.  Sn  934;  Nd' 
400;  &  see  phrase  under  abhibhu. 

Abhimangala  (.idj.)  [abhi  -1-  mangala]  (very)  fortunate, 
lucky,  anspicious,  in  °sammata  (of  Visakha)  "benedicted  ", 
blessed  Vin   111.187  =  DhA   1  409.   0pp.  avamangala. 

Abhimandita  (pp.  — °)  [abhi  -|-  mapdita]  adorned,  embel- 
lished, beautified  Miln  361;  Sdhp   17. 

Abhimata  (adj.)  [BSk.  abhimata,  e.g.  Jtm  211;  pp.  of 
abhimanyate]  desired,  wished  for;  agreeable,  pleasant  C. 
on  Th   I,  91. 


Abhimatthati 


68 


Abhirnhana 


Abhimatthati  ("eti)  &  "mantheti  [abhi  +  math  or  manth, 

cp.  nimmatheti]  1.  to  cleave,  cut;  to  crush,  destroy  M 
1.243  (sikharena  muddhanaij  °mantheti);  S  1.127;  Dh  161 
(v.  1.  °nth°);  J  IV.457  (matthako  sikharena  "matthiyamano) ; 
DhA  111.152  (==  kantati  viddhaqseti).  —  2.  to  rub,  to 
produce  by  friction  (esp.  fire,  aggiq;  cp.  Vedic  agniij 
nimianthati)  M  1. 240. 

Abhimaddatl  [Sk.  abhimardati  &  "mrdnati ;  abhi  -\-  mfd] 
to  crush  S  1.102;   A  1.198;  Sdhp   288. 

Abhlmana  (idjO  [abhi  +  mano,  BSk.  abhimana,  e.  g.  M 
Vastu  in.259]  having  one's  mind  turned  on,  thinking  of 
or  on  (c.  ace.)  Th   I,   1 1 22;  J   vt.45l. 

Abhlmanapa  (adj.)  [abhi  +  manSpa]  very  pleasing  VvA  53 
(where  id.  p.  at  I'vA  71   has  atimanapa). 

Abhimanthetl  see  abhimatthati. 

Abhimara  [cp.  Sk.  abhimara  slaughter]  a  bandit,  bravo, 
robber  J  11. 199;  DA  1.152. 

Abhimukha    (adj.)  [abhi  -f-  mukha]  facing,  turned  towards, 
approaching   J    11. 3    ("a    ahesui)    met  each  other).   Usually 
— "  turned  to,  going  to,  inclined  towards  D  1.50  (purattha°); 
J  1.203  (devaloka"),  223  (varana-rukkha°);  II. 3  (nagara°),   , 
416  (Jetavana");  DhA  1.170  (tad°);  11.89  (nagara");  PvA  3    \ 
(kama°,  opp.  vimukha),  74  (uyyana°).  —  nt.  °g   adv.  to, 
towards   J    1.263    (matta-varane) ;  PvA  4  (5ghatana°,  may   ; 
here  be  taken  as  pred.  adj.);  DhA  111.310  (uttara"). 

Abhiyacati  [abhi  -f-  yacati]  to  ask,  beg,  entreat  Sn  IIOI, 
cp.  Nd'i  86. 

Abhiyatl  [Vedic  abhiyati  in  same  meaning;  abhi -f- yfi]  to 
go  against  (in  a  hostile  manner,  to  attack  (c.  ace.)  S 
I.216  (aor.  abhiyaqsu,  v.  1.  SS  abhijiyiijsu) ;  DhA  III. 310 
(aor.  abhiyasi  as  v.  1.  for  T.  reading  payasi ;  the  id.  p. 
VvA  68  reads  payiisi  with  v.  1.  upayasi). 

Abhiyujjhatl  [abhi  +  yujjhati  from  yudh]  to  contend, 
quarrel  with  J  1.342. 

Abhlyunjatl  [abhi  --|-  yuj]  to  accuse,  charge ;  intrs.  fall  to 
one's  share   Vin  III. 50;  IV. 304. 

Abhiyoga  [cp.  abhiyunjati]  practice,  observance  Davs  IV.7. 

Abhiyogin  (adj.)  [fr.  abhiyoga]  applying  oneself  to,  prac- 
tised, skilled  (an  augur,  sooth  sayer)  D  III.  1 68. 

Abhiyobbana  (nt.)  [abhi  -f-  yobbana]  much  youthfulness, 
early  or  tender  youth  Th  2,  258  (=  abhinavayobbanakala 
ThA  211). 

Abhlrakkhati  [abhi  4-  rakkhati]  to  guard,  protect  J  VI.  589 
(=  paleti  C).  Cp.  parirakkhati. 

Abhirakkha  (f.)  [fr.  abhlrakkhati]  protection,  guard  J  1.204 
(=  arakkha  203). 

Abhirata  (adj.)  ( — °)  [pp.  of  abhiramati]  fond  of,  indulging 
in,  finding  delight  in  A  iv.224  (nekkhamma°);  v. 1 75  (id.), 
Sn  86  (nibbana°),  275  (vihesa^),  276  (kalaha°) ;  J  v.382 
(dana°);  PvA  54  (pufinakamma°),  61  (satibhavana"),  105 
(danadiputjaa"). 

Abhlratatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  abhirata]  the  fact  of  being  fond 
of,  delighting  in  ( — °)  J  v.254  (kama°). 

Abhirati  (f.)  [fr.  abhi  -|-  ram]  delight  or  pleasure  in  (loc. 
or  — ")  S  1. 1 85;  IV.260;  A  V.I 22;  Dh  88.  -an°  displea- 
sure, discontent,  distaste  Vin  ii.no;  D  1.17  (-|- paritas- 
sana);  S  1.185;  '^•132;  A  III. 259;  IV. 50;  V.72  sq.,  122; 
J  III. 395;  DA  i.ui;  PvA  187. 

Abhiratta  (adj.)  [abhi  +  ratta]  very  red  J  v.  156;  fig.  very 
much  excited  or  affected  with  ( — ")  Sn  891  (sanditthi- 
ragena  a.). 


Abhiraddha  (adj.)  [pp.  of  abhi  +  radh]  propitiated,  satis- 
fied  A  IV.185   (-|-  attamana). 

Abhiraddhi  (f.)  [fr.  abhiraddha]  only  in  neg.  an°  displeasure, 
dislike,  discontent  A  1.79;  DA  1.52  (=:  kopass'  etaij 
adhivacanar)). 

Abhiramati  [abhi  -f  ram]  to  sport,  enjoy  oneself,  find 
pleasure  in  or  with  (c.  loc),  to  indulge  in  love  Sn  718, 
1085;  J  1.192;  III. 189,  393;  DhA  1.119;  PvA  3,  61, 
145.  —  ppr.  act.  abhiranto  only  as  nt.  °t)  in  adv.  phrase 
yathabhirantari  after  one's  liking,  as  much  as  he  pleases, 
after  one's  heart's  content  Vin  1.34;  M  1.170;  Sn  53. — 
ppr.  med.  abhiramamana  J  iu.188,  PvA  162.  —  pp. 
abhirata  (q.  v.).  —  2"d  Caus.  abhiramapeti  (q.  v.). 

Abhlramana  (nt.)  [fr.  abhiramati]  sporting,  dallying,  amusing 
oneself  PvA   l6. 

Abhiramapana  (nt.)  [fr.  abhiramapeti,  Caus^  of  abhiramati] 
causing  pleasure  to  (ace),  being  a  source  of  pleasure, 
making   happy   M  III. 132  (gamante). 

Abhiramapeti  [Caus.  II.  fr.  abhiramati]  I.  to  induce  to 
sport,  to  cause  one  to  take  pleasure  J  111.393.  —  2.  to 
delight,  amuse,  divert  J  1. 61.  —  Cp.  abhiramapana. 

Abhiravati  [abhi -f- ravati]  to  shout  ont  Bu  11.90  =  ]  1. 18 
(V.99)- 

Abhiradhita  [pp.  of  abhiradheti]  having  succeeded  in,  fallen 
to  one's  share,  attained  Th   I,  259. 

Abhiradhin  (adj.)  ( — °)  [fr.  abhiradheti]  pleasing,  giving  plea- 
sure, satisfaction  J  IV.274  (mitta°  :=  aradhento  tosento  C). 

Abhiradheti  [abhi  +  radheti]  to  please,  satisfy,  make  happy 
J  1.421 ;  DA  1.52.  —  aor.  (prel.)  abbiradbayi  Vv  31' 
(=  abhiradhesi  VvA  130);  Vv  64"  (gloss  for  abhirocayi 
VvA  282);  J  1.42 1 ;  111.386  (::=  paritosesi  C).  —  pp. 
abhiradhita. 

Abhiruci  (f-)  [Sk.  abhiruci,  fr.  abhi  -f  ruc]  delight,  longing, 
pleasure,  satisfaction  PvA    168  (=::  ajjhasaya). 

Abhirucita  (adj.)  [pp.  fr.  abhi  -f  ruc]  pleasing,  agreeable, 
liked  J  1.402;  DhA  1.45. 

Abhinida  (adj.  — ")  [Sk.  abhiruta]  resounding  with  (the 
cries  of  animals,  esp.  the  song  of  birds),  full  of  the  sound 
of  (birds)  Th  I,  1062  (kuiijara"),  11 13  (raayura-konca°); 
J  IV. 466  (adasakunta°);  v.304  (mayura-konca°);  vi.172  (id., 
=  upaglta  C),  272  (sakunta°;  =  abhiglta  C.),  483  (nia- 
yura-konca°),  539;  Pv  11.12'  (haijca-konca";  ^  abhinadita 
PvA   157).  —  The  form  abhiruta  occurs  at  Th  1,  49. 

Abhirupa  (adj.)  [abhi  4-  rupa]  of  perfect  form,  (very), 
handsome,  beautiful,  lovely  Sn  410  (=dassaniya^  anga- 
pcccanga  SnA  383);  J  1.207;  l'"g  S^'i  DA  1.281  (=: 
i  aiinehi  manussehi  adhikarQpa);  VvA  53;  PvA  61  (:= 
]  abhikkanta).  Occurs  in  the  idiomatic  phrase  denoting  the 
characteristics  of  true  beauty  abhirupa  dassaniya  pasa- 
dika  (-|- paramaya  vanna-pokkharatSya  samannagata),  e.g. 
Vin  1.268;  D  1.47,  114,  120;  S  11.279;  A  11.86,  203; 
Nd2  659;  Pug  66;  DhA  1.28 1  (compar.);  PvA  46. 

AbhirQIha  [pp-  of  abbiruhati]  mounted,  gone  up  to,  ascended 
J  v. 217;  DhA  1.103. 

Abhiruhati  (abhiruhati)  [abhi  -|-  ruh]  to  ascend,  mount, 
climb;  to  go  on  or  in  to  (c.  ace.)  Dh  321;  Th  I,  271; 
J  1.259;  "-388;  III. 220;  IV.138  (navai));  VI. 272  (peculiar 
aor.  "rucchi  with  abhi  metri  causa;  =  abhiruhi  C.);  DA 
1.253.  —  ger.  abhiruyha  J  111.189;  PvA  75,  152  (as  v.  1.; 
T.  has  "ruyhitva),  271  (navaq),  &  abhiruhitva  J  1.50 
(pabbataij)  II.128. 

Abhiruhana  (nt.)  [BSk.  °ruhana,  e.g.  M  Vastu  II.289] 
climbing,  ascending,  climb  Miln  356. 


Abhiroceti 


69 


Abhivissattha 


Abhiroceti  [abhi  4-  roceti,  Caus.  of  ruc]  ••  to  like,  to  find 
delight  in  (ace),  to  desire,  long  for  J  ill.  192;  v. 222  (= 
roceti);  Vv  64'''  (vataq  abhirocayi  =  abhirocesi  ruccitva 
paresi  ti  attho;  abhiradhayi  ti  pi  patho;  sadhesi  nippha- 
desi  ti  atlho  VvA  282).  —  2.  to  please,  satisfy,  entertain, 
gladden  Vv  64'^*  (but  VvA  292 :  abhibhavitva  vijjotali, 
thus  to  no.  3).  —  3.  V.  1.  for  atiroceti  (to  surpass  in 
splendour)  at   Vv  Si'-,  cp.  also  no.   2. 

Abhlropana  (nt.)  [fr.  abhiropeti]  concentration  of  mind, 
attention  (seems  restricted  to  Ps  11.  only)  Ps  11.82  (v.  I. 
abhiniropana),  84,  93,  11$  (buddhi°),  142  ("viraga),  145 
("vimutti),  216  ("abhisamaya).  See  also  abhiniropana. 

Abhiropeti  [abhi  +  ropeti,  cp.  Sk.  adhiropayati,  Caus.-  of 
ruh]  to  fix  one's  mind  on,  to  pay  attention,  to  show 
reverence,  to  honour  Vv  37'  (aor.  °ropayi  =:  ropesi  VvA 
169),  37'"  (id.;  =  pujaq  karesi  VvA  172),  6o*  (:=  pujesi 
VvA  253);  Davs  V.19. 

Ahhilakkhlta  (adj.)  [Sk.  abhilaksita  in  diff.  meaning;  pp. 
of  abhi  -\-  Iak$]  fixed,  designed,  inaugurated,  marked  by 
auspices  J  iv.i ;  DA   1.18. 

Abhilaldchltatta  (nt.)  [abslr.  fr.  abhilakkhita]  having  signs 
or  marks,  being  characterised,  characteristics  DhsA  62. 

Abhilanghati  [abhi  -j-  langhati]  to  ascend,  rise,  travel  or  pass 
over   (of  the  moon  traversing  the  sky)  J  1:1.364;  vi.221. 

Abhilambati  [abhi-f-lambati]  to  hang  down  over  (c.  ace.) 
M  111.164  ^Nett  '79  (+ 3JJ'*o'*™bati);  J  v. 70  (papatar)), 
269  (Vetaratiii)).  —  pp.  abhilambita  (q.  v.). 

Abhilambita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  abhilambati]  hanging  down  J 
V.407   (niladuma°). 

Abhilapa  [fr.  abhi  -|-  lap]  talk,  phrasing,  expression  Sn  49 
(vacSbhilSpa  making  phrases,  talking,  idle  or  objectionable 
speech  =  tiracchanakatha  Nd'  561);  It  89  (?  reading 
abhilapayai}  uncertain ,  vv.  11.  abbipayai)  abhipapayar), 
abhisapayai),  abhisapayag,  atisappayai).  The  corresp.  pas- 
sage S  111.93  reads  abhisapayaq :  curse,  and  C.  on  It  89 
expls.  abhilapo  ti  akkoso,  see  Brethren  376  n.  1);  Dhs 
1306  =  Nd'  34  (as  exegesis  or  paraphrase  of  adhivacana, 
comb<l-  with  vyanjana  &  trsl.  by  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  as  "a  dis- 
tinctive mark  of  discourse");  DA  1.20,  23,  281;  DhsA  51. 

Abhllasa  [Sk.  abhilasa,  abhi  -f-  laf]  desire,  wish,  longing 
Pv.\   154. 

Abhilelcheti  [Caus.  of  abhi  -f  likh]  to  cause  to  be  inscribed 
Davs  V.67  (caritta-lekhai)  °lekhayi). 

Abhllepana  (nt.)  [abhi  -|-  lepana]  "smearing  over",  stain, 
pollution  Sn  1032,  1033  =  Nett  10,  II  (see  Nd*  88  = 
laggana  "sticking  to",  bandhana,  upakkilesa). 

Abhivagga  [abhi  4-  vagga]  great  mass  (?),  superior  force  (?), 
only  in  phrase  °ena  omaddati  to  crush  with  sup.  force 
or  overpower  M  1.87  =  Nd^  I99°. 

Abhivancana  (nt.)  [abhi  +  vaiic]  deceit,  fraud  Davs  ui.64. 

Abhiva^  [pp.  of  abhivassati,  see  also  abhivulthaj  rained 
upon  Dh  335  (gloss  °vuttha ;  cp.  DhA  IV'.45);  Miln  176, 
197,  286.  —  Note.  Andersen  P.  R.  prefers  reading  abhi- 
vaddha  at  Dh  335   "the  abounding  Birana  grass"). 

AbhivaiJ<Jhati  [Vedic  abhivardhati ,  abhi  -f  Vfdh]  I.  to 
increase  (intrs.)  D  1.I13,  195  (opp.  hayati);  M  11.225;  A 
UI.46  (bhoga  a.);  Dh  24;  Miln  374;  PvA  8,  133;  Sdhp 
288,  523.  —  2.  to  grow  over  or  beyond,  to  outgrow  J 
111.399  (vanaspatir)).  —  pp.  abhivuijdha  A  ^vuddha  (q.  v.). 

Abhlva()(jlhana  (adj.nt.)  [fr.  abhivaddhati]  increasing  (trs.), 
augmenting;  f.  °I  Sdhp  68. 

Abhlva()(}hi  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  abhivrddhi,  fr.  abhi  +  Vfdh]  in- 
crease, growth  Miln  94.  —  See  also  abhivu()dbi. 


Abhivaonlta  [pp.  of  abhivanneti]  praised  Dpvs  1.4. 

Abhlvap^eti  [abhi  -f-  vanneti]  to  praise  Sdhp  $88  (°ayi).  — 
pp.  abhivannita. 

Abhivadati  [abhi  -|-  vadati]  I.  to  speak  ont,  declare,  pro- 
mise J  1.83  =  Vin  1.36  ;  J  VI. 220.  —  2.  to  speak  (kindly) 
to,  to  welcome,  salute,  greet.  In  this  sense  always  comb^ 
with  abhinandati,  e.g.  at  M  1.109,  ^^^i  45^i  ^  ui-t4i 
IV.36  sq.;  Miln  69.  —  Caus.  abbivadeti. 

Abhivandati  [abhi  -|-  vandati]  to  salute  respectfully,  to 
honour,  greet;  grd.  "vandanlya  Miln  227. 

AbhivaSSaIca  (adj.)  [fr.  abhivassati]  raining,  fig.  shedding, 
pouring  ont,  yielding  VvA  38  (puppha°). 

Abhivassati  [abhi  -f  vassali  from  vr§]  to  rain,  shed  rain, 
pour;  fig.  rain  down,  pour  ont,  shed  D  111.160  (abhi- 
vassai)  metri  causa);  A  111.34;  Th  I,  985;  J  1.18  (v.ioo; 
puppha  a.  stream  down);  cp.  111.10';  Miln  132,  411.  — 
pp.  abhivatta  &  abhivu^ba  (q.  v.).  —  Caus.  II.  abbi- 
vassapeti  to  cause  (the  sky  to)  rain  Miln   132. 

Abtlivassln  (adj.)  =  abbivassaka  It  64,  65  (sabbattha°). 

Abhivadana  (nt.)  [fr.  abhivadeti]  respectful  greeting,  salu- 
tation, giving  welcome,  showing  respect  or  devotion  A 
11.180;  IV.I30,  276;  J  1.81,  82,  218;  Dh  109  (°silin  of 
devout   character,  cp.   DhA  11.239);  VvA  24;  Sdhp  549 

fsila). 

Abhivadeti  [Caus.  of  abhivadati]  to  salute,  greet,  welcome, 
honour  Vin  11.208  sq.;  D  1.61 ;  A  111.223;  'V.173;  Vv  l' 
(abhivSdayii)  aor.  =  abhivadanaq  karesii)  vandir)  VvA  24) ; 
Miln  162.  Often  in  comb"  with  padakkbinat]  karoti  in 
sense  of  to  bid  goodbye,  to  say  adieu,  farewell,  e.  g.  D 
1.89,  125,  225;  Sn  1010.  —  Caus.  II.  abhivadapeti  to 
cause  some  one  to  salute,  to  make  welcome  Vin  11.208 
(°etabba). 

Abhivayati  [abhi  4-  vayati ;  cp.  Sk.  abhivati]  to  blow  through, 
to  pervade  Miln  385. 

Abhivaretl  [abhi  +  vareti,  Caus.  of  Vf]  to  hold  back,  refuse, 
deny  J   v. 325  (=  nivareti  C). 

Abhivaheti  [abhi  -f  vaheti,  Caus.  of  vah]  to  remove,  to 
put  away  Bu  X.5. 

Abhivijayati  (&  vijinati)  [abhi  +  vijayati]  to  overpower, 
to  conquer.  Of  "jayati  the  ger.  °jiya  at  D  1.89,  134; 
11.16.  Of  "jinati  the  pres.  y^  pi.  °jinanti  at  Miln  39; 
the  ger.  °jinit?a  at  M  1.253 ;  Pug  66. 

Abhivinnapeti  [abhi  -)-  vinnapeti]  to  turn  somebody's  mind 
on  (c.  ace),  to  induce  somebody  (dat.)  to  (ace.)  Vinlil.i8 
(purapadutiyikaya   methunDr)  dhammai]  abhivinSapesi). 

Abhivitarati  [abhi  -f  vitarati]  "to  go  down  to",  i.  e.  give 
in,  to  pay  heed,  observe  Vin  1.134  and  in  ster.  expl"-  of 
sancicca  at  Vin  11.9I;  111.73,  "2;  iv.290. 

Abhivinaya  [abhi  -\-  vinaya]  higher  discipline,  the  refinements 
of  discipline  or  Vinaya;  comb"*-  with  abhidhamma,  e.g.  D 
III. 267;  M  1.472;   also  with   vinaya  Vin  v. I    sg. 

Abhivindati  [abhi  -f  vindati]  In  find,  get,  obtain  Sn  460 
(=r  lahhati  adhigacchati  SnA  405). 

Abhivislttha  (adj.)  [abhi  -f  visittha]  most  excellent,  very 
distinguished  DA  1.99,  313. 

Abhivissajjati  [abhi  -f  vissajjati]  to  send  ont,  send  forth, 
deal  out,  give  D  111.160. 

Abhivissattha  [abhi  4-  vissattha,  pp.  of  abhivissasati,  Sk. 
abhivisvasta]  confided  in,  taken  into  confidence  M  11.52 
(v.l.  °visattha). 


Abhivuttha 


70 


Abhisandana 


Abhivuttha  [pp-  of  abhivassati,  see  also  abhivatta]  poured 
out  or  over,  shed  out  (of  water  or  rain)  Th  1,  1065; 
Dh  335  (gloss);  PvA  29. 

Abhivu<jl()ha  [pp-  of  abhivaddhati,  see  also  °vuddha]  in- 
creased, enriched  PvA   150. 

Abhivuddha  [pp.  of  abhivaddhati,  see  also  °vuddha]  grown 
up  Milo  361. 

Abhivuddhl  (f.)  [■'^li.  abhivrddhi,  see  also  abhivaddhi]  in- 
crease, growth,  prosperity  Miln  J4. 

Abhivetheti :  Kern's  (Toev.  s.  v.)  proposed  reading  at  J 
V.452  for  ati°,  which  however  does  not  agree  with  C. 
expln-  on  p.  454. 

Abhivedeti  [abhi  -j-  Caus.  of  vid]  l.  to  make  known,  to 
communicate  Davs  v.2,  II.  —  2.  to  know  J  VI. 1 75  (= 
jana'.i  C). 

AbhivihaCCa  [ger.  of  abhi  -\-  vihanati]  having  destroyed, 
removed  or  expelled;  only  in  one  simile  of  the  sun  driving 
darkness  away  at  M  1.317  =  8  111156;  v.44  ^  It  20. 

Abhivyapeti  see  abhibyapeti. 

Abhisagvisati  [abhi  -|-  sarjvisati].  Only  in  abhisaijvisseyya- 
gattai]  (or-bhastai)  or-santuij)  Th  2,  466  a  compound  of 
doubtful  derivation  and  meaning.  Mrs.  Rh.  D.,  following 
Dhammapala  (p.  283)  'a  bag  of  skin  with  carrion  filled". 

Abhisagsati  [Vedic  abhisaqsati,  abhi  +  Sat|S]  to  execrate, 
revile,  lay  a  curse  on  J  v.  174  ("saijsiuha  3rd  sg.  pret. 
med.  =  paribhasi  C.)  —  aor.  abbisasi  J  vi.187,  505,  522 
(==  akkosi  C),  563  (id.).  —  pp.  abbisattba.  Cp.  also 
abbisirjsati. 

AbhisaQSana  (f.)  [^  abhisatjsati]  is  doubtful  reading  at  Vv 
64'";    meaning  "neighing"  (of  horses)  VvA  272,  279. 

Abhisankhata  (adj.)  [abhi  -|-  sankhata,  pp.  of  abhisan- 
kharoli]  prepared,  fixed,  made  up,  arranged,  done  M  1.350; 
A  11.43;  V.343;  J   1.50;  Nd'  186  (kappita-f);  PvA  7,  8. 

Abhisankharoti  (&  "kbareti  in  Pot.)  [abhi  -\-  sankharoti] 
to  prepare,  do,  perform,  work,  get  up  V'in  i  16  (iddh^ 
abhisankharar)  °khareyya);  D  1. 184  (id.);  S  1140;  111.87, 
92;  IV.132,  290;  V.449;  A  1. 201;  Sn  984  (ger.  °itva: 
having  got  up  this  curse,  cp.  Sn.\  582);  PvA  56  (iddh' 
abhisaijkharari),  172  (id.),  212  (id.).  —  pp.  abhisan- 
khata fq.  v.). 

Abhjsankhara  [abhi  +  sankhara]  I.  putting  forth,  perform- 
anee,  doing,  working,  practice:  only  in  two  comb"s.,  viz. 
(a)  gamiya"  (or  gamika")  a  heathenisch  practice  Vin 
1.233;  A.  IV. 180,  &  (b)  iddba°  (=  iddhi")  working  of  super- 
normal powers  Vin  1.16;  D  1.106;  S  ui.92;  iv.28g;  v.270; 
Sn  p.  107;  PvA  56,  172,  212.  —  2.  preparation,  store, 
accumulation  (of  kamma,  merit  or  demerit),  substratum, 
state  (see  for  detail  sankhara)  S  111.58  (an°);  Nd'  334, 
442;  Nd*  s.  v.;  Vbh  135  (puiina°  etc.),  340;  Dhs.\  357 
("vinfiana   "storing  intellect"  Dhs  trsl.  262). 

Abhisankharika  (adj.)  [fr.  abhisankhara]  what  belongs  to 
or  is  done  by  the  sankharas ;  accumulated  by  or  accumul- 
ating merit,  having  special  (meritorious)  effect  (or  specially 
prepared?)   Vin  11.77  =  111.160;  Sdhp  309  (sa  °paccaya). 

Abhisankhipatl  [abhi  +  sankhipati]  to  throw  together, 
heap  together,  concentrate  Vbh  I  sq.,  82  sq.,  216  sq., 
400;   Miln  46. 

Abhlsanga  [fr.  abhi  -f-  sanj,  cp.  abhisajjati  &  Sk.  abhisanga] 
I.  sticking  to,  cleaving  to,  adherence  to  J  v.6;  Nett  no, 
112;  Dhs  A   129  ("hetukari  dukkhaq)  249  (°rasa). 

Abhisangin  (adj.)  [fr.  abhisanga]  cleaving  to  ( — ")  Sdhp  566. 


Abhisajjati  [abhi  +  saiij ;  cp.  abhisanga]  to  be  in  ill 
temper,  to  be  angry,  to  curse,  imprecate  (in  meaning  of 
abhisanga  2)  D  1.91  (^  kodha-vasena  laggati  DA  1.257); 
III. 1 59;  J  111.120  (-f-  kuppati);  iv.22  (obhisajji  kuppi 
vyapajji,  cp.  BSk.  abhisajyate  kupyati  vyapadyate.  Av.  S 
1.286);  V.175  (=  kopeti  C):  Dh  408  (abhisaje  Pot.  = 
kujjhapana-vasena  laggapeyya  DhA  iv.l82);  Pug  30,  36.  — 
See  also  abhisajjana  &  abhisajjana. 

Abhisajjana  (nt.-adj.)  [abstr.  fr.  abhisajjati  in  meaning  of 
abhisanga  2]  only  as  adv.  f.  °ni  Ep.  of  vaca  scolding, 
abusing,  cursing  A   V.265   (para°).   Cp.  next. 

Abhisajjana  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  abhisajjati,  cp.  abhisajjana]  at 
Sn  49  evidently  means  "scolding,  cursing,  being  in  bad 
temper"  (cp.  abhisajjati),  as  its  comb"-  with  vac'  abhilapa 
indicates,  but  is  expW-  both  by  Nd^  &  Bdhgh.  as  "sticking 
to,  cleaving,  craving,  desire"  (:=  tapha),  after  the  meaning 
of  abhisanga.  See  Nd'^  89  &  107;  SnA  98  (sineha-vasena), 
cp.  also  the  compromise-expl"  by  Bdhgh.  of  abhisajjati 
as  kodha-vasena  laggati  (DA  1.257). 

Abhisancinati  (&  'cayati)  [abhi  -j-  sancinati]  to  accumulate, 

collect    (merit)    Vv    47'  (Pot.  "sanceyyaij  ^  "sancineyyai) 
VvA  202). 

Abhisaiicetayita  [pp.  of  abhisaficeteti]  raised  into  consci- 
ousness, thought  out,  intended,  planned  M  1.350;  S  II. 
65;  IV.132;   A  v.343. 

Abhisaficeteti  [abhi  +  sanceteti  or  °cinteti]  to  bring  to 
consciousness,  think  out,  devise,  plan  S  11.82.  —  pp.  abbi- 
sancetayita  (q.  v.). 

Abhisaiina  (f-)-  Only  in  the  compound  abbi-sanna-nlrodha 
D  1.179,  184.  The  prefix  abhi  qualifies,  not  saniia,  but 
the  whole  compound,  which  means  'trance'.  It  is  an 
expression  used,  not  by  Buddhists,  but  by  certain  wan- 
derers. See  sanna-vedayita-nirodha. 

Abhisaniitihati  [abhi  +  safinuhati,  i.  e.  sar|-ni-uhati]  to  heap 
up,  concentrate  Vbh  1,  2,  82  sq.;  216  sq.,  400;  Miln  46. 
Cp.  abhisankbipati. 

Abhisata  [pp.  of  abhisarati,  abhi -j- Sf  to  flow]  i.  (med.) 
streamed  forth,  come  together  J  VI.56  (=  sannipatita  C.).  — 
2.  (pass.)  approached,  visited  Vin  1.268. 

Abhisatta  [pp.  of  abhisapati,  cp.  Sk.  abhisapta,  fr.  abhi  -j- 
Sap]  cursed,  accursed,  railed  at,  reviled  J  111.460;  V.71; 
SnA  364  (=akkuttha);  VvA  335. 

Abhisattha  [pp-  of  abhisarisati]  cursed,  accursed  Th  I,  n8 
"old  age  falls  on  her  as  if  it  had  been  cursed  upon  her" 
(that  is,  laid  upon  her  by:  a  curse).  Morris  J P  TS.  1886, 
145  gives  the  commentator's  equivalents,  "commanded, 
worked  by  a  charm".  This  is  a  curious  idiom.  Any  Euro- 
pean would  say  that  the  woman  herself,  not  the  old  age, 
was  accursed.  But  the  whole  verse  is  a  riddle  and  Kern's 
translation  {Toev.  s.  v.)  'hurried  up' seems  to  us  impossible. 

Abhisaddahati  [abhi  -|-  saddahati,  cp.  Sk.  abhisraddadhati, 
e.g.  Divy  17,  337]  to  have  faith  in,  believe  in  (c.  ace), 
believe  S  v.226;  Th  l,  785  ;  Pv  iv.!'-',  I "  (°saddahey ya  ^ 
patiiieyya  PvA  226) ;  Nett  1 1 ;  Miln  258 ;  PvA  26 ; 
Davs  111.58. 

Abhisantapeti  [ahhi  +  santSpeti,  Caus.  of  santapati]  to 
burn  out,  scorch,  destroy   M  1.121. 

Abhlsanda  [abhi  -f  sanda  of  syad,  cp.  BSk.  abhisyanda, 
e.  g.  M  Vastu  11.276]  outflow,  overflow,  yield,  issue,  result; 
only  in  foil,  phrases:  cattaro  punn'  abbisanda  kusal' 
abbisanda  (yields  in  merit)  S  v.391  sq. ;  A  11.54  sq. ; 
111.51,  337;  V1.245,  ^  kamm'  Sbhisanda  result  of  kamma 
Miln  276.  —  Cp.  abbisandana. 

Abhisaadana  (nt.)  [=  abhisanda]  result,  outcome,  con- 
sequence Ps  1.17   (sukhassa). 


Abhisandahati 


7t 


Abhisambhavati 


Abhisandahati  [abhi  +  sandahati  ot  saq  -f-  dhS]  to  put 
together,  to  make  ready  Th  I,  151;  ger.  abhisandhaya 
in  sense  of  a  prep.  =  on  account  of,  because  of  J  11.386 

(=  paticca  C). 

Abhlsandeti  [abhi  -|-  sandeti,  Caus.  of  syad]  to  make  over- 
flow, to  make  full,  fill,  pervade  D  1.73,  74. 

Abhlsanna  (adj.)  [pp.  of  abhisandati  =  abhi  +  syand,  cp. 

Sk.  abhisanna]  overflowing,  filled  with  ( — °),  full  Vin  I. 
279  (°kaya  a  body  full  of  humours,  cp.  11.119  &  M''°  134); 
J  1.17  (v.88;  pitiya);  Miln  112  (duggandha°). 

Abhisapati  [abhi  +  sapati,  of  Sap]  to  execrate,  curse,  ac- 
curse  Vin  IV.276;  J  IV.389;  v. 87;  DhA  1.42.  —  pp. 
abbisatta. 

Abhlsapana  (m.)  [fr.  abhisapati]  cursing,  curse  PvA  144 
(so   read  for  abhisampanna). 

Abhisamaya  [abhi  +  samaya,  from  sam  -j-  i,  cp.  abhisameti 
&  sameti;  BSk.  abhisamaya,  e.g.  Divy  200,  654]  "coming 
by  completely",  insight  into,  comprehension,  realization, 
clear  understanding,  grasp,  penetration.  See  on  term  A'vu 
trsl.  381  sq.  —  Esp.  in  full  phrases:  attha°  grasp  of 
what  is  proficient  S  1.87  =  A  111,49  ^  It  17,  cp.  A  11.46; 
ariyasaccanai]  a.  full  understanding  of  the  4  noble  truths 

5  V.415,  440,  441  [cp.  Divy  654:  anabhisamitanar)  ca- 
turnaij  aryasatyanaij  a.];  Sn  758  (sacca°  ^  sacc^  avabodha 
SnA  509);  Miln  214  (c^tusacc°);  Sdhp  467  (catusacc"), 
525  (saccanai));  dbamm^  abhisamaya  full  grasp  of  the 
Dhamma,  quasi  conversion  [cp.  dharm'  Abhisamaya  Divy 
200]  S  II. 134;  Miln  20,  350;  VvA  219;  PvA  9  etc. 
frequent;  samma-man'  abhisamaya  full  understanding  of 
false  pride  in  ster.  phrase"  acchecchi  (for  acchejji)  taijhai), 
vivattayi  saniiojanar|  sammaman&bhisamaya  antam  akasi 
dukkhassa"  at  S  iv,205,  207,  399;  A  111.246,  444;  It  47; 
cp.  mana°  S  1.  i88  =  Th  2,  20  (tato  msn&bhisamaya  upa- 
santo  carissasi,  trsl.  by  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  in  K.  S.  239  "hath 
the  mind  mastered  vain  imaginings,  then  mayst  thou  go 
thy  ways  calm  and  serene") ;  Sn  342  (expld-  by  manassa 
abhisamayo  khayo  vayo  pahanaij  SnA  344).  Also  in  foil, 
passages:  S  11. 5  (pafinaya),  104  (id.),  133  sq.  (Abhisa- 
maya Saqyutta);  Sn  737  (phassa°,  expH  ad  sensum  but 
not  at  verbum  by  phassa-nirodha  SnA  509);  Ps  11.215; 
Pug  41;  Vv  161"  (==  saccapativedha  VvA  85);  DA  1.32; 
DhA  1.109;  VvA  73  (bhavana°),  84  (sacchikiriya°);  Dpvs 
1.3 1,  -anabhisamaya  not  grasping  correctly,  insufficient 
understanding,  taken  up  wrongly  S  III. 260;  Pug  21  ;  Dhs 
390,  1061,  1162  (Mrs.  Rh.  D.  trsl^-  "lack  of  coordination"). 

Abhlsamagacchati  [abhi  -f-  sam  -|-  agacchati,  cp.  in  meaning 
adhigacchati]  to  come  to  (understand)  completely,  to  grasp 
fully,  to  master  KhA  236  (for  abhisamecca  Sn   143). 

Abhlsamacarika  (adj.)  [abhi  4-  samacarika,  to  samacara] 
belonging  to  the  practice  of  the  lesser  ethics;  to  be 
practiced;  belonging  to  or  what  is  the  least  to  be  ex- 
pected of  good  conduct,  proper.  Of  sikkha  Vin  v.  181; 
A  11.243  ^q-'i  °^  dhamma  M  1.469;  A  111.14  sq.;  422. 

Abhisamikkhatl  (&  "ekkhati),  [abhi  4-  sam  +  iks,  cp.  sa- 
mikkhati]  to  behold,  see,  regard,  notice  J.  iv.19  (2'^^  sg. 
med.  "samekkhase  =  olokesi  C).  —  ger.  °3amikkha  & 
'samekkha  fB.Sk.  "samiksya,  e.g.  Jtm.  p.  28,  30  etc.] 
J  V.340  (°samikkha,  v.  1.  saiicikkha  =  passitva  C);  393, 
394  (=:disva  C). 

Abhisameta  [pp.  of  abhisameti,  fr.  abhi  +  sam  -j-  I,  taken 
as  caus.   formation,  against  the  regular  form  Sk.P.  samita 

6  B..Sk.  abhisamita]  completely  grasped  or  realised,  under- 
stood, mastered  S  v.  128  (dhamma  a.),  440  (anabhisame- 
tani  cattari  ariyasaccani,  cp.  Divy  654  anabhisamitani  c.a.); 
A  IV. 384  (appattaq  asacchikataij  -)-). 

Abhlsametavin  (adj.)  [possess,  adj.  -formation,  equalling  a 
n.  ag.  form.,  pp.  abhisameta]  commanding  full  under- 
standing or  penetration,  posessing  complete  insight  (of 
the  truth)  Vin  111.189;   S  11.133;  v.458  sq. 


Abhisameti  [abhi -f- sameti,  sam-|-|;  in  inflexion  base  is 
taken  partly  as  ordinary  &  partly  as  causative,  e.  g.  aor. 
"samirisu  &  "samesuij,  pp.  sameta:  Sk.  samita.  Cp.  B.Sk. 
abhisamayati,  either  caus.  or  denom.  formation,  Divy  617: 
caturaryasatyani  a.]  to  come  by,  to  attain,  to  realise, 
grasp,  understand  (cp.  adhigacchati)  Miln  214  (catusaccab- 
hisamayar)  abhisameti).  Freg.  in  comb"  abbisambujjhati, 
abhisameti ;  abhisambujijhitva  abhlsametva,  e.  g.  S  11.25  '. 
III. 1 39;  Kvu  321.  —  fut.  "samessati  S  v.441.  —  aor. 
°samiQSU  Miln  350;  "samesut)  S  v.415.  —  ger.  "samecca 
(for  "icca  under  influence  of  "sametva  as  caus.  form.; 
Trenckner's  expl"-  Ai'oles  56*  is  unnecessary  &  hardly  justi- 
fiable) S  V.438  (an°  by  not  thoroughly  understanding); 
A  v.50  (samm'attha°  through  complete  realisation  of  what 
is  proficient);  Sn  143  (=  abhisamagantva  KhA  236); 
and  "sametva  S  11.25;  iii-'39-  —  pp-  abhisameta  (qv.). 

Abhisampanna    at    Pv.\     144    is    wrong   reading   for    v.  I. 

abhisapana  (curse). 

Abhisamparaya  [abhi  +  samparaya]  future  lot,  fate,  state 
after  death,  future  condition  of  rebirth;  usually  in  foil, 
phrases:  ka  gati  ko  abbisamparayo  (as  hendiadys) 'what 
fate  in  the  world-to-come',  D  11.91  i  Vin  1.293  ;  S  iv.59, 
63;  V.346,  356,  369;  DhA  1.221.  —  evag-gatika  evan- 
abhisamparaya  (adj.)  "leading  to  such  .&  such  a  revirn, 
such  &  such  a  future  state"  D  1.16,  24,  32,  33  etc. 
(=  evaq-vidha  paraloka  ti  DA  1.108).  -abhisamparayai] 
(ace.  as  adv.)  in  future,  after  death  A  1.48;  11.197;  111.347; 
IV. 104;  Pv  111.5'"  (=  punabbhave  PvA  200).  —  ditthe 
c'eva  dhamme  abbisamparayan  ca  "in  this  world  and 
in  the  world  to  come"  A  11.61;  Pug  38;  Miln  162; 
PvA  195  etc.  (see  also  dittha).  —  Used  absolutely  at 
PvA   122  (=  fate). 

Abhisambujjiiati  [abhi  +  sambujjhatij  to  become  wide- 
-awake,  to  awake  to  the  highest  knowledge,  to  gain  the 
highest  wisdom  (sammlsambodhii))  D  in. 135;  It  121. 
aor.  °sambujjhl  S  v.433 ;  PvA  19.  In  comb"  abhisam- 
bujjhati  abhisameti,  e.g.  S.  11.25;  "■•i39-  —  ppr.  med. 
°sambudhana;  pp.  °sambuddha  —  Caus.  °sambodheti 
to    make   awake,  to  awaken,  to  enlighten ;   pp.  '^bodhita, 

Abhisambujjhana  (at.)  =  abhisambodhi  J  1.59. 

Abhisambuddha  [pp.  of  abhisambujjhati]  (a)  (pass.)  rea- 
lised, perfectly  understood  D  III. 273;  S1V.331;  It  121. 
an°  not  understood  M  1.71,  92,  114,  163,  240.  —  (I.) 
(med.)  one  who  has  come  to  the  realisation  of  the  highest 
wisdom,  fully-awakened,  attained  Buddhahood,  realising, 
enlightened  (in  or  as  to  =r  ace.)  Vin  i.l ;  D  11.4 ;  M  1.6  (sam- 
masambodhii));  S  168,   1 38,  139  &  passim  PvA  94,  99. 

Abhi8ambuddhatta(nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  abhisambuddha]  thorough 
realisation,  perfect  understanding  S  v.433. 

Abhlsambudhana  (adj.)  [formation  of  a  ppr.  med.  fr.  pp. 
abhsnm  -|-  budh  instead  of  abhisam  -f  bujjh"]  awaking, 
realising,  knowing,  understanding  Dh  46  (=  bujjbanto 
jananto  ti  altho  DhA  I.337). 

Abhisambodhl  (f.)  [abhi  -f-  sambodhi]  the  highest  enlight- 
enment J  1.14  (parama°).  Cp.  abhisambujjhana  and 
(samma-)   sambodhi. 

Abhisambodhita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  abhisambodheti,  Caus.  of 
abhi  -|-  sambujjhati]  awakened  to  the  highest  wisdom 
PvA   137  (Hhagava). 

Abhisambhava  [fr.  abhisambhavati]  only  in  dur°  hard  to 
overcome  or  get  over,  hard  to  obtain  or  reach,  trouble- 
some S  V.454;  A  V.202  ;  Sn  429,  701  ;  J  V.269,  vi.139,  439. 

Abhisambhavati  ("bhoti)  [abhi  +  sambhavati]  "to  come 
up  to",  i.  e.  to  be  able  to  (get  or  stand  or  overcome) ; 
to  attain,  reach,  to  bear  A  iv.241 ;  Th   i,  436;  Nd'471, 


Abhisambhavatt 


72 


Abhejja 


485;  J  III.  140;  V.I 50,  417;  VI.292,  293,  507  (fut.  med. 
°sattibhossal)  :=  sahissami  adhivSsessami  C.);  Ps  11.193.— 
ger.  "bhutva  Tb  i,  1057  &  "bhavitva  Sn  52  (cp.  Nd^ 
85).  —  aor.  'bhosi  D  11.232.  —  grd.  °bhavanIyaD  u.210; 
Ps  II.I93.  —  See  also  abhisambbunati. 

Abhlsambhuil^atl  [considered  to  be  a  bastard  form  of  abhi- 
sambhavati,  but  probably  of  diff.  origin  &  etym.;  also  in 
Bh.  Sk.  freq.]  to  be  able  (to  get  or  reach);  only  in  neg. 
ppr.  anabhisambhunanto  unable  D  i.ioi  (=:  asampapu- 
nanto  avisahamano  va  DA  1.268);  Nd'  77,  312. 

Abhsambhu  (adj.)  [fr.  abhi  +  sam  +  bhu]  getting,  attain- 
ing (?)  D  11.255  (loinahar|sa°). 

Abhlsambhuta  [pp.  of  abhisambhavati]  attained,  got 
Sdhp  556. 

Abhlsatnmati  [abhi  +  Sam,  Sk.  abhisamyati]  to  cease,  stop ; 
trs.  (Caus.)  to  allay,  pacify,  still  J  vi.420  (pp.  abhisam- 
manto  for  °sammento  i  Reading  uncertain). 

Abhisara  [fr.  abhi  +  sarati,  of  sf  to  go]  retinue  J  v.373. 

Abhisallekhika  (adj  )  [abhi  -f-  sallekha  +  ika]  austere,  stern, 
only  in  f.  ^a  (scil.  katha)  A  111.117  sq.;  1V.352,  357;v.67. 

Abhisavati  (better  ''ssavati  ?)  [abhi  +  savati,  of  sru]  to 
flow   towards  or  into  J   VI.359  (najjo  Gangaq  a.). 

Abhisasl  aor.  of  abbisa^jsati  (q.  v.). 

Abhisadhetl  [abhi  -)-  sadheti]  to  carry  out,  arrange ;  to 
get;  procure,  attain  J  VI.180;  Miln  264. 

Abhlsapa  [abhisapati]  a  curse,  anathema  S  111.93  =  U  89 
(which  letter  reads  abhilapa  and  It  A  expls  by  akkosa: 
see  vv.  11.  under  abhilapa  &  cp.  Brethren  376  n.  i.); 
Th  I,   118. 

Abhlsariya  (f.)  [Sk.  abhisarika,  fr.  abhi  -|-  Sf]  a  woman 
who  goes  to  meet  her  lover  J  III.  1 39. 

Abhisareti  [abhi  +  sareti,  Caus.  of  abhisarati]  to  approach, 
to  persecute  J   vl.377. 

AbhislQSatl  [=  abhisagsati,  abhi  -f-  iagS-   As  to  Sk.  Sags 

>  P.  SigS  cp.  asiqsati,  as  to  meaning  cp.  nature  of  prayer 
as  a  solemn  rite  to  the  "infemals",  cp.  im-precare],  to 
utter  a  solemn  wish,  Vv  81 '8  (aor.  °sisi.  v.  1.  "sisi.  VvA 
316  expls-  by  icchi  sampaticchi). 

Abhlsliicatl  [abhi  +  siiincati  fr.  slC  to  sprinkle;  see  also 
asincati  &  ava°,  Vedic  only  a"]  to  sprinkle  over,  6g.  to 
anoint  (King),  to  consecrate  A  I.107  (Khattiy'  abhisekena) 
J  1.399  (fig.  °itva  ger.  11.409  (id.);  VI.161  (id.);  Nd'  298; 
Miln  336  (amatena  lokaq  abhisiiici  Bhagavs);  PvA  144 
(read  abhisiiici  cimillik  an  ca .  .  .)  —  Pass,  abhisificati 
Miln  359.  —  pp.  abhisitta.  —  Caus.  abhiseceti. 

Abhlsltta  [pp.  of  abhisancati,  Sk.  °sikta]  I.  sprinkled  over, 
anointed  Sn  889  (manasa,  cp.  N'  298);  Miln  336  (ama- 
tena loka  a).  —  2.  consecrated  (King),  inaugurated  (more 
freq.  in  this  conn,  is  avasitta),  Vin  III-44;  A  1.107  (Khaltiyo 
Khattiyehi  Khattiy'  abhisekena  a.);  11.87  (v-1.  for  avasitta, 
also  an°). 

Abhiseka  [fr.  abhi  +  sic,  cp.  Sk.  abhiseka]  anointing, 
consecration,  inauguration  (as  king)  A  1. 107  (cp.  abhisitta); 
11.87  fcad  abhisek^  -anabhisitto;  J  11.104,  35^;  DhA  1.350; 
PvA   74.  Gr.  abhisekika. 

Abhlsecana  (nt.)  =  abhiseka,  viz.  (a)  ablution,  washing  off 
Th  2,  239  &  245  (udaka°).  —  (b)  consecration  J  11.353. 

Abhiseceti  [caus.  of  abhisiilcati]  to  cause  to  be  sprinkled 
or  inaugurated  J  V.26.  (imper.  abhisecayassu). 

AbhisevanS  (f-)  [abhi  -f-  sevana  fr.  sev]  pursuit,  indulgence 
in  ( — °)  Sdhp  210  (papakamma°). 


Abhissara  (adj.)  [abhi  -f-  issara]  only  neg.  an°  in  formula 
atSno  loko  anabhissaro  "without  a  Lord  or  protector" 
M  ii.68  (v.l.  °abhisaro);  Ps  1.126  (v.l.  id.). 

Abhihansatl  [abhi  +  haqsati  fr.  hf?]  I-  (trs.)  to  gladden, 
please,  satisfy  S  IV.190  (abhihatthuq);  A  v. 350  (id.).  — 
2.  (intr.)  to  find  delight  in  (c.  ace),  to  enjoy  S  v.74 
(rupai)  manapai));  A  IV.419  sq.  (T.  reads  "hiqsamSna 
jhinai]  v.l.  °hisamana). 

Abhihafa  [pp-  of  abhiharati]  brought,  oflTered,  presented, 
fetched  D  1.166=:  Pug  55  (=  puretarai)  gahetva  ahatan 
bhikkhai)  Pug  A  231);  DhA  11.79. 

Abhiha^hut)  [ger.  of  abhiharati].  Only  in  praise  abhihatthui] 
pavareti,  to  offer  having  fetched  up.  M.  1.224;  A  v.350, 
352;  S  IV.190;  V.53,  300.  See  note  in  Vinaya  Texts  W.^o. 

Abhihata  [pp.  of  abhihanati]  hit,  struck  PvA  55. 

Abhihanati  (&  °hanti)  [abhi  +  han]  l.  to  strike,  hit  PvA 
258.  —  2.  to  overpower  kill,  destroy  J  v. 174  (inf.  °hantu 
for  T.  hantuq).  —  pp.  abhihata  (q.  v.). 

Abhiharati  [abhi  -|-  harati,  cp.  Sk.  abhyaharati  &  Vedic 
aharati  &  abharatij  —  I.  to  bring  (to),  to  offer,  fetch 
D  111.170;  J  1.54,  157;  m.537;  1V.421;  Dh  1.272.  —  2. 
to  curse,  revile,  abuse  [cp.  Sk.  anuvyaharati  &  abhivya"] 
A  1. 1 98.  —  Pass,  abhihariyati  VvA  172  (for  abhiharati 
of  Vv  37'";  corresp.  with  abhata  VvA  172).  —  pp.  abhi- 
hata (q.v.).  —  Caus.  abbihareti  i.  to  cause  to  be  brought, 
to  gain,  to  acquire  D  11.188  =  192  =:  195  Th  I,  637; 
J  IV.421  (abhiharayai)  with  gloss  abhibharayin).  —  2.  to 
betake  oneself  to,  to  visit,  take  to,  go  to  Sn  414  (Pandavaq 
"haresi  =  aruhi  Sn  A  383),  708  (vanantar)  abhiharaye  := 
vanai)  gaccheyya  SnA  495);  Th  2,  146  (aor.  "harayiq ; 
uyyanar)  =  upanesi  ThA  138).  —  3.  to  put  on  (mail), 
only  in  fut.  abhihessati  J  iv.92  (kavacaq;  C.  expl^-  wrongly 
by  °hanissati  bhindissati  so  evidently  taking  it  as  abhi- 
bhavissati).  —  4.  At  J  VI. 27  kiq  yobbanena  cinnena  yai) 
jara  abhihessati  the  latter  is  fut  of  abbibhavati  (for 
°bhavissati)  as  indicated  by  gloss  abhibhuyyati. 

AbhihSra  [fr.  abhiharati]  bringing,  offering,  gift  S  I.82 ; 
Sn  710;  J  1. 81   (jtsani). 

Abhihlgsati  spurious  reading  at  A  iv.419  for  °hai)3ati  (q.v.). 

AbhihiQSana  (&  °i))  [for  abhihesana  cp.  P.  hesa  =  Sk. 
hresa,  &  hesilaij]  neighing  Vv  64'"  =VvA  279  (gloss 
abhihesana).  See  in  detail  under  abhi3ai)san3. 

Abhihita  S  1.50.  Read  atjhiglta  with  SS.  So  also  for  abhihita 
on  p.  51.  'So  enchanted  was  I  by  the  Buddha's  rune'. 
The  godlet  abscribes  a  magic  potency  to  the  couplet. 

Abhihesana  see  abhibirjsana. 

Abhihessati  see  abhiharetl  3  &  4. 

Abhita  (adj.)  [a  4-  bhila]  fearless  J  VI.  1 93.  See  also  abhida  i . 

Abhiruka  (adj.)  [a  +  bhiru  +  ka^  fearless  DA  1.250. 

Abhumma  (adj.)  [a  -f  bhumma]  groundless,  unfounded,  un- 
substantial, J  V.178;  VI.495. 

Abhuta  (adj.)  [a  -j-  bhuta]  not  real,  false,  not  true,  usually 
as  nt.  °g  falsehood,  lie,  deceit  Sn  387;  It  37;  instr. 
abhutena  falsely  D  1.161. 

-vadin  one  wbo  speaks  falsely  or  tells  lies  Sn  661  ^ 
Dh  306  =  It  42;  expW-  as  "ariy^  u'pavada-vasena  alika 
-vadin"  SnA  478;  as  "tucchena  paraij  abhacikkbanto" 
DhA  111.477. 

Abhejja  (adj.)  [grd.  of  a  -f  bhid,  cp.  Sk.  abhedya]  not  to 
be  split  or  divided,  not  to  be  drawn  away  or  caused  to 
be  dissented,  inalienable  Sn  255  (mitto  abhejjo  parehi); 
J  1.263  (varasura.  . .)  111.318  (°rupa  of  strong  character  = 


Abhejjj 


71 


A 


niaya 


abhijja-hadaya) ;  Pug  30  (=  acchejja  Pug  A  212);  Miln  160 
("parisa);  Sdhp  312  (+  appadusiya);  Pgdp  97  ("parivara). 

AmaCCa  [Vedic  amatya  (only  in  meaning  "companion"), 
adj.  formation  fr.  amS  an  adverbial  loc.-gen.  of  pron.  I^' 
person,  Sk.  ahar)  =  Idg.  *emo  (cp.  Sk.  ra-araa),  meaning 
"(those)  of  me  or  with  me",  i.  e.  those  who  are  in  my 
house]  I.  friend,  companion,  fellow-worker,  helper,  esp. 
one  who  gives  his  advice,  a  bosom-friend  It  73 ;  J  VI. 
512  (sahajata  amacca);  Pv  u.t'^"  (a  ° —  paricarika  well- 
advising  friends  as  company  or  around  him).  Freq.  in 
comb"  with  mitta  as  mitt^  amacca,  friends  &:  colleagues 
D  111.189— 90;  S  190  =  A  11.67;  PvA  29;  or  with  nati 
(nati-salohita  intimate  friends  &  near-relations),  mitt&macca 
fiatisalohits  Vin  n.126;  Sn  p.  104  (^  mitla  ca  Uamma- 
kara  ca  SnA  447);  mitta  va  amacca  va  nati  va  salohita 
va  A  1.222;  PvA  28;  amacca  nati-sangha  ca  A  1.152.  — 
2.  Especially  a  king's  intimate  friend,  king's  favourite, 
confidant  J  1.262 ;  PvA  73  (°kula),  74  (amacca  ca  puro- 
hito  ca),  81  (sabba-kammika  amacca),  93;  and  his  special 
adviser  or  piivy  councillor,  as  such  distinguished  from  the 
official  ministers  (purohita,  mahamatta,  parisajja);  usually 
combd.  with  parisajja  (pi.)  viz.  D  1.136  (=  piya-sahayaka 
DA  1.297,  but  cp.  the  foil,  expl"-  of  parisajja  as  "sesa 
anatti-kara");  Vin  1.348;  D  111.64  (amacca  parisajja  ganaka- 
mahamatta);  A  1.142  (catunnaq  maharajanai)  a.  parisajja). 
See  on  the  question  of  ministers  in  general  Fick,  Sociale 
Gliederung  p.  93,  164  &  Banerjea,  Public  Administralion 
in  Ancient  India  pp.    106 — 120. 

Amajja  [etym.?]  a  bud  J  v.416  (=  makula  C). 

Amajjapayaka  [a  +  majja  +  payaka,  cp.  Sk.  amadyapa] 
one  who  abstains  from  intoxicants,  a  teetotaler  J  11.192. 

Amata'  (nt.)  [a  -)-  mata  =  mrta  pp.  of  mf,  Vedic  ararla  := 
Gr.  a-fi((3)poT-o  &  iiififoiria  ^  Lat.  im-mort-a(lis]  i.  The 
drink  of  the  gods,  ambrosia,  water  of  immortality,  (cp. 
BSk.  amrta-varsa  "rain  of  Ambrosia"  Jtm  221).  —  2.  A 
general  conception  of  a  state  of  durability  &  non-change, 
a  state  of  security  i.  e.  where  there  is  not  any  more  rebirth 
or  re-death.  So  Bdhgh  at  Kh.\  180  (on  Sn  225)  "na 
jayati  na  jiyati  na  miyati  ti  amatan  ti  vuccati",  or  at  DhA 
1.228  "ajatatta  na  jiyyati  na  miyyati  tasma  amatan  tl 
vuccati".  —  Vin  1.7  ^  M  1. 169  (aparuta  tesar)  amatassa 
dvara);  Vin  1.39;  D  11.39,  217,  241;  S  1.32  (=  ragado- 
samoha-khayo),  193;  111.2  ("ena  abhisitta  "sprinkled  with 
A.");  IV.94  (°assa  data),  370;  v.402  (°assa  patti);  A  1.45 
sq.;  111.451;  IV.455;  V.226  sq.,  256  sq.  (°assa  data);  j 
1.4  (V.25);  IV.378,  386;  V.456  (°maha-nibbana);  Sn  204, 
225,  228  (=:  nibbana  KhA  185);  Th  1,  310  (=  agada 
antidote);  It  46  =:  62  (as  dh.itu),  80  (°assa  dvara);  Dh 
114,  374  (=  araata-maha-nibbsna  DhA  iv.iio);  Miln  258 
(°dhura  savanupaga),  319  (agado  amataij  &  nibbanar) 
amataq),  336  (amatena  lokai)  abhisinci  Bhagava),  346 
(dhamm'  amatai]);  DA  1.217  ("nibbana);  DhA  1. 87  (°i) 
payeti);  Davs  11.34;  v.31;  Sdhp   i,  209,  530,  571. 

-ogadba  diving  into  the  ambrosia  (of  Nibbana)  S  v. 
41,  54,  181,  220,  232;  A  111.79,  3°4;  IV.46  sq.,  317, 
387;  V.105  sq.;  Sn  635;  Th  I,  179,  748,  Dh  411  (= 
amatar)  nibbanaij  ogahetva  DhA  IV.186);  Vv  50'"'.  -osadha 
the  medicine  of  Ambrosia,  ambrosial  medicine  Miln  247. 
-gamin  going  or  leading  to  the  ambrosia  (of  Nibbana) 
S  1. 123;  1V.370;  V.8;  A  111.329;  Th  2,  222.  -dasa  one 
who  sees  Amata  or  Nibbana  Th  i,  336.  -dundubhi  the 
drum  of  the  Immortal  (Nibbana)  M  1.171  =r  Vin  1.8  (has 
°dudrabhi).  -dvara  the  door  to  Nibbana  M  1.353;  S  i. 
137  =  Vin  1.5;  S  11.43,  45,  58,  80;  A  V.346.  -dhatu 
the  element  of  Ambrosia  or  Nibbana  A  III. 356.  -patta 
having  attained  to  Ambrosia  A  IV.455.  -pada  the  region 
or  place  of  Ambrosia  S  1.2 1 2  ("Bourne  Ambrosial"  Irsl"- 
p.  274);  11.280;  Dh  21  (=  amatassa  adhigama-vupayo 
vultai)  hoti  DhA  1.228).  -pbala  ambrosial  fruit  S  1.173 
=  Sn  80.  -magga  the  path  to  Ambrosia  DhA  1.94. 

Amata^  (adj.)  [see  amata']  belonging  to  Amrta  =  ambrosial 
Sn  452  =  S  1. 1 89  (amata  vaca  =  amata-sadisa  sadubhavena 


SnA  399:  "ambrosial"),  960  (gacchati  amatai)  disai)  = 
nibbanar),  tar|  hi  amatan  ti  tathi  niddisilabbato  disa  ca 
ti  SnA  572).  Perhaps  also  at  It  46  =  62  (amatar)  dha- 
tuq  =:  ambrosial  state  or   Amrta  as  dhatu). 

Amatabbaka  (?)  at  VvA  III,  ace.  to  Hardy  (Index)  "a 
precious  stone  of  dark  blue  colour". 

Amattannu  (adj.)  [a  +  matta  -|-  "iiu  =  Sk.  amatrajna]  not 
knowing  any  bounds  (in  the  taking  of  food),  intemperate, 
immoderate  It  23  (bhojanamhi);  Dh  7  (id.);  Pug  21. 

Amattannuta  (f)  [abstr.  to  prec]  immoderation  (in  foo4) 
D  111.213;  It  23  (bhojane);  Pug  21;  Dhs  1346  (bhojane) ; 
DhsA  402. 

Amatteyyata  (f.)  [from  matteyyata]  irreverence  towards 
one's  mother  D  ill. 70,  71. 

AmanuSSa  [a  -f-  manussa]  a  being  which  is  not  human,  a 
fairy  demon,  ghost,  god,  spirit,  yakkha  Vin  1.277 ;  D  1. 
116;  S  1. 9 1,  J  1.99;  Dhs  617;  Miln  207;  DhsA  319;  DhA 
1.13  ("pariggahlta  haunted);  PvA  216.  —  Cp.  amanusa. 

AmanUSSika  (adj.)  [fr.  amanussa]  belonging  to  or  caused 
by  a  spirit  Vin  1.202,  203  ("abadha  being  possessed  by 
a  demon). 

Amama  (adj.)  [a  -|-  mama,  gen.  of  ahaq,  pron.  l^t  person, 
lit.  "not  (saying:  this  is)  of  me"]  not  egotistical,  unselfish 
Sn  220  (-|- subbata),  777;  J  IV. 372  (+ nirasaya);  vi.259 
(=  mamayana-tanha-rahita  C.);  Pv  iv.i^*  (^  mamaqkara- 
virahita  PvA  230);  Mhvs  I,  66,  combd-  with  nirasa  (free 
from  longing),  at  Sn  469  =  494;  Ud  32;  J  iv.303;  vi.259. 

Amara  (adj.)  [a  -f  mara  from  mf]  not  mortal,  not  subject 
to  death  Th  1,  276;  Sn  249  (=  amara-bhava-patthanataya 
pavatta-kaya-kilesa  SnA  291);  J  v.8o(=  amarana-sabhava), 
218;   Davs  V.62. 

Amaratta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  amara]  immortality  J  v.223  (= 
devatta  C). 

Amara  (?)  a  kind  of  slippery  fish,  an  eel  (?)  Only  in  expres- 
sion amara-vikkhepika  eel-wobbler,  one  who  practices 
eel-wriggling,  fr.  "vikkhepa  "oscillation  like  the  a.  fish". 
In  English  idiom  "a  man  who  sits  on  the  fence"  D  1.24; 
M  1.521;  Ps  1. 155.  The  expl"-  given  by  Bdhgh  at  DA 
1.1 15  is  "amara  nama  maccha-jati,  sa  ummujjana-nimmuj- 
jan  adi  vasena  .  .  gahetur)  na  .sakkoti"  etc.  This  meaning 
is  not  beyond  doubt,  but  Kern's  expl"-  Toev.  71  does  not 
help  to  clear  it  up. 

Amala  (adj.)  [a  -f-  mala]  without  stain  or  fault  J  V.4;  Sdhp 

246,  59>,  596. 
Amassuka  (adj.)  [a  +  massu  -f-  ka]  beardless  J  11.175. 

Amajata  (adj.)  [amS  -j-  jsta;  ama  adv.  "at  home",  Vedic 
ama,  see  under  amacca]  born  in  the  house,  of  a  slave  J 
1.226  (dasa,  so  read  for  amajata,  an  old  mistake,  expH- 
by  C.  forcibly  as  "ama  ahaq  vo  dasi  ti"!).  See  also  amaya. 

Amatika  (adj.)  [a  -f  matika  from  mata]  without  a  mother, 
motherless  J   V.2SI. 

Amanusa  (adj.)  [Vedic  amanusa,  usually  of  demons,  but 
also  of  gods;  a  +  manusa,  cp.  amanussa]  non-  or  super- 
human, unhuman,  demonic,  peculiar  to  a  non-human 
(Peta  or  Yakkha)  Pv  11. I2-^  (ksma);  iv.i"  (as  n.);  iv.3« 
(gandha,  of  Petas).  —  f.  °l  Dh  373  (rati  =  dibba  rati 
DhA  IV. no);  Pv  lli.7»  (ratti,  love). 

Amamaka  (adj.)  [a  +  mama  4"  ka,  cp.  amama]  "not  of  me" 
i.  e.  not  belonging  to  my  party,  not  siding  with  me 
DhA  1.66. 

AmSya  (adj.)  [a  +  maya]  not  deceiving,  open,  honest  Sn  941 
(see  Nd'  422:  maya  vuccati  vancanikii  cariyS).  Cp.  next. 


Amayavin 


74 


Aya 


Amayavin  (adj.)  [a  +  mayavin,  cp.  amaya]  without  guile, 
not  deceiving,  honest  D  III. 47  (asatha -j-),  55  (id.),  237; 
DhA  1.69  (asathena  a.). 

Amitabha  (adj.)  [a  +  mita  (pp.  of  ma)  +  a  +  bha]  of 

boundless  or  ininieasuiable  splendour  Sdhp   255. 

Amitta  [Vedic  amltra;  a  +  mitta]  one  who  is  not  friend, 
an  enemy  D  111.185;  It  83;  Sn  561  (=  paccatthika  SnA 
455);  Dh66,  207;  J  VI. 274  Ctapana  harassing  the  enemies). 

Amllatata  (f.)  [a  +  milata  +  ta]  the  condition  of  not  being 
withered  J   V.156. 

Amu°  base  of  demonstr.  pron.   "that",  see  asu. 

AmuCChita  (adj.)  [a  +  mucchita]  not  infatuated  (lit.  not 
stupified  or  bewildered),  not  greedy ;  only  in  phrase  aga- 
thita  amucchita  anajjhapanna  (or  anajjhopanna)  D  IU465 
M  1.369;  S  II.  194.  See  ajjhopanna. 

Amutta  (adj.)  [a  -}-  mutta]  not  released,  not  free  from  (c. 
abl.)   It  93   (marabandhana). 

Amtltra  (adv.)  [pron.  base  amu  +  tra]  in  that  place,  there; 
in  another  state  of  existence  D  1.4,   14,   184;  It  99. 

Amujha-vinaya  "acquittal  on  the  ground  of  restored  sanity" 

(Cliilderi;)  Vin  1.325  (ix.6,  2);  11.81  (1V.5),  99  (iv.14,  27); 
IV.207,  351 ;  M  11.248. 

Amoha  (adj.)  [a  4-  moha,  cp.  Sk.  amogha]  not  dull.  As  n. 
ab.sence  of  stupidity  or  delusion  D  m.214;  Pug  25.  — 
The  form  amogha  occurs  at  J  vi.26  in  the  meaning  of 
"efficacious,  auspicious"  (said  of  ratya  nights). 

Amba  [Derivation  unknown.  Not  found  in  pre-Buddhist 
literature.  The  Sk.  is  amra.  Probably  non-Aryan],  the 
Mango  tree,  Mangifera  Indica  D  1.46,  53,  235;  J  11. 105, 
160;  Vv   79IO;  Pug  45;  Miln  46;  PvA    153,   187. 

-atthi  the  kernel  or  stone  of  the  m.  fruit  DhA  III. 207, 
208.  -arama  a  garden  of  mangoes,  mango  grove  Vv  79^; 
VvA  305.  -kaiijika  mango  gruel  Vv  33"  (=  ambila- 
kanjika  VvA  147).  -pakka  a  (ripe)  mango  fruit  J  11.104, 
394;  DhA  111.207.  -panta  a  border  of  mango  trees  VvA 
198.  -panaka  a  drink  made  from  mangoes  DhA  III. 207. 
-pindi  a  bunch  of  mangoes  J  111.53;  DhA  111.207.  -pesika 
the  peel,  rind,  of  the  m.  fruit  Vin  11. 109.  -potaka  a 
mango  sprout  DhA  HI. 206  sq.  -pbala  a  m.  fruit  PvA 
273,  274.  -rukkha  a  m.  tree  Dh.A  in. 207;  VvA  198. 
-vana  a  m.  grove  or  wood  D  11.126;  J  1. 139;  VvA  305. 
-sincaka  one  who  waters  the  mangoes,  a  tender  or  keeper 
of  mangoes  Vv  79'. 

Ambaka'  (adj.)  [=ambaka?]  "womanish"  (?),  inferior,  silly, 
stupid,  of  narrow  intellect.  Occurs  only  with  reference  to 
a  woman,  in  comb"-  with  bala  A  HI. 349  (v.  1.  amrna")  = 
V.139  (where  spelt  ambhaka  with  v.  I.  appaka°  and  gloss 
andhaka);  v. 150  (spelt  ambhaka  perhaps  in  diff.  meaning). 
-maddarl  see  next. 

Ambaka-  [demin.  of  amba]  a  little  mango,  only  in  "mad- 
darl a  kind  of  bird  [etym.  uncertain]  A  1.188. 

Ambaka  (f )  [Sk.  ambiks  demin.  of  ambi  mother,  wife,  see 
P.  amma  &  cp.  also  Sk.  ambalika  f.]  mother,  good  wife, 
used  as  a  general  endearing  term  for  a  woman  Vin  1.232  = 
D  11.97  (here  in  play  of  words  with  Ambapali  expl^  by 
Bdhgh  at  Vin  1.385  as  ambaka  ti  itthiyika). 

Ambara'  (nt.)  [Vedic  ambara  circumference,  horizon]  the 
sky,  Davs  1.38;  IV. 51;  V.32.  —  A'ote.  At  J  v.390  we 
have  to  read  muraja-alambara,  and  not  mura-jala-arabara. 

Ambara^  (m.-nt.)  [etym.  =  ambara'  (?)  or  more  likely  a 
distortion  of  kambala;  for  the  latter  speaks  the  comb"- 
rattambara  =  ratta-kambala.  —  The  woid  would  thus  be 
due    to    an    erroneous    syllable  division  raltak-ambala  (^ 


ambara)  instead  of  ralta-kambala]  some  sort  of  cloth  and 
an  (upper)  garment  made  of  it  (cp.  kambala)  Vv  53' 
(ratt°  ==  uttariya  VvA  236). 

Ambala  at  J  11.246  ("kotthaka-asana-sala)  for  ambara' (?)  or 
for  ambaka'^  (?),  or  should  we  read  kambala°  ?. 

Ambataka  the  hog-plum,  Spondias  Mangifera  (a  kind  of 
mango)  Vin  11.17  (°vana);   DA   1.27 1   Crukkha). 

Ambila  (adj.)  [Sk.  ambla  =  Lat.  amarus]  sour,  acid ;  one 
of  the  6  rasas  or  tastes,  viz.  a.,  lavana,  tittaka,  katuka, 
kasaya,  madhura  (see  under  rasa):  thus  at  Miln  56.  An- 
other enumeration  at  Nd^  540  &  Dhs  629.  —  J  1.242 
("anambila),  505  (lon°);  11.394  (lon°);  DA  1.270  ("yagu 
sour  gruel) ;  DhA  11.85  (ati-ambila,  with  accunha  &  atisita). 

Ambu  (nt.)  [Vedic  ambu  &  ambhas  =  Gr.  dfi(3po?,  Lat. 
imber  rain ;  cp.  also  Sk.  abhra  rain-cloud  &  Gr.  a<f>/)^; 
scum :  see  P.  abbha]  water  J  v. 6 ;  Nd'  202  (a.  vuccati 
udakaq);  Davs  11. 16.  —  Cp.  ambha. 

-carin  "living  in   the  water",  a  fish  Sn  62  (=:  maccha 
Nd'i  91).  -sevala  a  water-plant  Th   I,   113. 

Ambuja  (m.  &  nt.)  [ambu  +  ja  of  jan]   "water-born",  i.e. 

1.  (m.)  a  fish  S  1.52.  —  2.  (nt.)  a  lotus  Sn  845  (=: 
paduma  Nd'  202);  Davs  v.46;  .Sdhp  360. 

Ambuda  [ambu-}- da  fr.  dS]  "water-giver",  a  cloud  Dav.s 
v.32;  Sdhp  270,  275. 

Ambha  &  Ambho  (nt.)  [see  ambu]  water,   sea  D.ivs  iv.54. 

Ambhaka  see  ambaka. 

Ambho  (indecl.)  [fr.  hai)  -f  bho,  see  bho,  orig.  "hallo  you 
there']  part,  of  exclamation,  employed:  I.  to  draw  atten- 
tion =  look  here,  hey!  hallo!  Vin  111.73  (=  alapau' 
adhivacana);  J  11. 3;  PvA  62.  —  2.  to  mark  reproach  & 
anger  =  you  silly,  you  rascal  D  1.194;  It  114;  J  1.174 
(v.  1.  amho),  254;  Miln  48. 

Amma  (indecl.)  [voc.  of  amma]  endearing  term,  used  (l)  by 
children  in  addressing  their  mother  =  mammy,  mother 
dear  D  1.93;  J  11.133;  ''^'i  ^8'  (amma  lata  utthetha 
daddy  mammy,  get  up!);  DhA  11.87;  PvA  73,  74,  — 
(2)  in  general  when  addressing  a  woman  familiarly  = 
good  woman,  my  (good)  lady,  dear,  thus  to  a  woman  J 
1.292;  PvA  63;  Dh.\  11.44;  to  a  girl  PvA  6;  to  a 
daughter  DhA  11.48;  HI. 172.  —  Cp.  ambaka. 

Ammana  (nt.)  [of  uncertain  etym. ;  Sk.  armaria  is  Sans- 
kritised  Pali.  See  on  form  &  meaning  Childers  s.  v.  and 
Kern,   Toev.  p.  72]   I.  a  trough  J  v.297;  vi.381  (bhatt°). — 

2.  a  certain  measure  of  capacity  J  1.62;  11.436  (tandul°).  — 
As  °ka  at  J  11. 117  (v.  1.  anipanaka);  DA  1.84. 

Amma  (f.)  [onomat.  from  child  language;  Sk.  amba,  cp. 
Gr.  aiziJ.x(  mother,  Oisl.  amma  "granny",  Ohg.  amma 
"mammy",  nurse;  also  Lat.  amita  father's  sister  &  amare 
to  love]  mother  J  HI. 392  (gen.  ammaya).  —  Voc.  amma 
(see  Sep.). 

Amha  &  Amhan  (nt.)  [Sk.  asman,  see  also  asama']  a  stone 
Sn  443  (instr.  amhana,  but  SnA  392  reads  asmana  ^ 
pasanena). 

-maya  made  of  stone,  hard  Dh   161   (=  pas5na°  DhA 
HI. 151). 

Amha,  Amhi  see  atthi. 

Amha  (f.)  [etym.  uncertain;  Morris  J P  T S.  1889,  201  too 

vague]  a  cow  (?)  A  1.229.   The  C.  says  nothing. 

Amhakat),  Amhe  see  aharj. 
Amho  =  ambho  J  1.174  (v.  1.). 
Aya'  see  ayo. 


Aya 


75 


Ayyaka 


Aya'^  (fr.  i,  go)  l.  income,  in  aya-potthaka  receipt  book 
J  1.2.  —  2.  inlet  (for  water,  aya-mukha)  D  1.74;  A  11. 
166,  IV.287. 

AyaiJ  (pron.)  [Sk.  ayaq  etc.,  pron.  base  Idg.  *i  (cp.  Sk. 
iba;,  f.  *i.  Cp.  Gr.  Iv,  iiiv;  Lat.  is  (f.  ea,  nt.  id);  Goth 
is,  nt.  ita;  Ohg.  er  (:=  he),  nt.  e^  (=  it);  Lith.  jis  (he), 
f.  ji  (she).]  demonstr.  pron.  "this,  he";  f.  ayaij ;  nt.  idaij 
&  imai)  "this,  it"  etc.  This  pron.  combines  in  its  inflection 
two  stems,  viz.  as°  (ayaij  in  nom.  m.  &  f.)  &  im°  (id° 
in   nom.  nt.). 

I.  Forms.  A.  (^sg.)  nom.  m.  ayai)  Sn  235;  J  1.168.  279; 
f.  ayai)  [Sk.  iyaq]  Kh  vil.12;  J  11.128,  133;  nt.  idar)  Sn 
224;  J  111.53;  ^  imai)  Miln  46.  ai-c.  m.  imai)  J  ln6o; 
f.  imoi)  [Sk.  Imai)]  Sn  545,  1002;  J  1.280.  gen.  dat.  va. 
imassa  J  1.222,  279  &  assa  Sn  234,  lioo;  Kh  vii.12 
(dat.);  J  11.158;  f.  imissa  J  1.179  &  assa  [Sk.  asyah]  J 
1.290;  DhA  111.172.  instr.  m.  nt.  imina  J  1.279;  PvA  80 
&  (peculiarly  or  perhaps  for  amuna)  amina  Sn  137;  f. 
imaya  [Sk.  anaya]  J  1.267.  The  instr.  anena  [Sk.  anena] 
is  not  proved  in  Pali.  alil.  asma  Sn  185;  Dh  220;  & 
imasma  (not  proved),  loc.  m.  nt.  imasmiij  Kh  III.;  J  11. 
159  &  asmir)  Sn  634;  Dh  242;  f.  imissa  PvA  79  (or 
imissar)?)  &  imayai)  (no  ref.).  —  B.  {pi.)  nom.  m.  ime 
J  1.221;  Pv  1.8';  f.  ima  [Sk.  imah]  Sn  897  &  imayo  Sn 
1122;  nt.  imani  [^  Sk.]  Vin  1.84.  ace.  m.  ime  [Sk.  iman] 
J  1.266;  II. 416;  f.  ima  [Sk.  imah]  Sn  429;  J  11.160.  gen. 
imesai)  J  in  60  &  esai)  [Sk.  esai)]  M  11.86,  &  esanaij  M 
11.154;  III. 259;  f.  also  asaq  J  1.302  (=  etasar)  C.)  &  ima- 
saq.  instr.  m.  nt  imehi  J  vi.364;  f.  imahi.  loc.  m.  nt. 
imesu  [Sk.  esu]  J  1.307. 

II.  Meanings  (i)  ayat)  refers  to  what  is  immediately 
in  front  of  the  speaker  (the  subject  in  question)  or  be- 
fore his  eyes  or  in  his  present  time  &  situation,  thus 
often  to  be  trsl<i.  by  "before  our  eyes",  "the  present", 
"this  here",  "just  this"  (&  not  the  other)  (opp.  para), 
viz.  atlhi  imasmii)  kaye  "in  this  our  visible  body"  Khill.; 
yath'  ayai)  padipo  "like  this  lamp  here"  Sn  235 ;  ayai) 
dakkhina  dinnS  "the  gift  which  is  just  given  before  our 
eyes"  Kh  VI1.12;  ime  pada  iraai)  sisai)  ayai)  kayo  Pv  1.8-'; 
asmii)  loke  paramhi  ca  "in  this  world  &  the  other"  Sn 
634,  asma  loka  parai)  lokar)  kathai]  pecca  na  socati  Sn 
185;  cp.  also  Dh  220,  410;  J  1. 168;  111.53.  —  (2)  It 
refers  to  what  immediately  precedes  the  present  of  the 
speaker,  or  to  what  has  just  been  mentioned  in  the 
sentence;  viz.  yai)  kiiici  vittaij  ...  idam  pi  Buddhe  rata- 
nai)  "whatever  ...  that"  Sn  224;  ime  divase  these  days 
(just  gone)  J  11.416;  cp.  also  Vin  1.84;  Sn  429;  J  11.128, 
160.  —  (3)  It  refers  to  what  immediately  follows  either 
in  time  or  in  thought  or  in  connection :  dve  ime  anta 
"these  are  the  two  extremes,  viz."  Vin  i.io;  ayai)  eva 
ariyo  maggo  "this  then  is  the  way"  ibid.;  cp.  J  1.280.  — 
(4)  With  a  touch  of  (often  sarcastic)  characterisation  it 
establishes  a  closer  personal  relation  between  the  speaker 
&  the  object  in  question  &  is  to  be  trsl^-  by  "like  that, 
such  (like),  that  there,  yonder,  yon",  e.  g.  imassa  vana- 
rindassa  "of  that  fellow,  the  monkey"  J  1.279;  cp  J  I. 
222,  307;  11160  (imesai)  sattanai)  "creatures  like  us"). 
So  also  repeated  as  ayaii  ca  ayaii  ca  "this  and  this",  "so 
and  so"  J  11.3;  idan  c'  idan  ca  "such  &  such  a  thing" 
J  11.5.  —  (5)  In  comb"  with  a  pron.  rel.  it  expresses 
either  a  generalisation  (whoever,  whatever)  or  a  special- 
isation (=  that  is  to  say,  what  there  is  of,  i.  e.  Ger.  und 
zwar),  e.g.  yjyai)  tanha  Vin  1. 10;  yo  ca  ayaq  .  . .  yo  ca 
ayai)  "I  mean  this  ...  and  I  mean"  ibid.;  ye  kec^  ime 
Sn  381;  yadidaq  "i.e."  Miln  25;  yatha-y-idaij  "in  order 
that"  (w.  pot.)  Sn  1092.  See  also  seyyalhidai).  —  (6)  The 
gen.  of  all  genders  functions  in  general  as  a  possessive 
pron.  of  the  3rd  =  his,  her,  its  (lit.  of  him  etc.)  and 
thus  resembles  the  use  of  tassa,  e.  g.  asava'  ssa  na  vijjanti 
"his  are  no  intoxications"  Sn  1 100;  silai)  assa  bhinda- 
pessami  "I  shall  cause  her  character  to  be  defamed"  J 
1.290;  assa  bhariyS   "his  wife"  J  11.158  etc.  freq. 

Ayana  (nt.)  [Vedic  ayana,  fr.  J]  (a)  "going",  road.  —  (b) 
going   to,   goal   S    v. 167  (ekayano  maggo  leading  to  one 


goal,  a  direct  way),   185  (id.);  DA 
See  also  eka". 


.313;  Davs  IV.40.  — 


Ayasa  (nt.)  [a  -f-  yasa,  cp.  Sk.  ayasah]  ill  repute,  disgrace 
Miln  J39,  272;  Davs  1.8. 

Ayira  (&  Ayyira)  (n.-adj.)  [Vedic  arya,  Metathesis  lor  ariya 
as  diaeretic  form  of  arya,  of  which  the  contracted  (as- 
similation) form  is  ayya.  See  also  ariya]  (n.)  ariyan, 
nobleman,  gentleman  (opp.  servant);  (adj.)  ariyan,  well- 
born, belonging  to  the  ruling  race,  noble,  aristocratic, 
gentlemanly  J  v. 257;  Vv  39'.  —  f.  ayira  lady,  mistress 
(of  a  servant)  J  11.349  (v.  1.  oyyaka);  voc.  ayire  my  lady 
J  V.I 38  (=ayye  C). 

Aylraka  =  ayira;  cp.  ariyaka  &  ayyaka;  D  111.190  (v.  1. 
BB  yy);  J  11.313. 

Ayo  &  Aya  (nt.)  [Sk.  ayah  nt.  iron  &  ore,  Idg.  ^ajes-,  cp. 
Av.  ayah,  Lat.  aes,  Goth,  aiz,  Ohg.  er  (=  Ger.  Erz.), 
Ags.  ar  (=  E.  ore).]  iron.  The  nom.  ayo  found  only  in 
set  of  5  metals  forming  an.  alloy  of  gold  (jatarupa),  viz. 
ayo,  loha  (copper),  tipu  (tin),  sTsa  (lead),  sajjha  (silver) 
A  111.16  =  S  V.92;  of  obi.  cases  only  the  instr.  ayasa 
occurs  Dh  240  (=ayato  DhA  III. 344);  Pv  l.io"  (pati- 
kujjita,  of  Niraya).  —  Iron  is  the  material  used  xxT'i^ox'i' 
in  the  outfit  &  construction  of  Purgatory  or  Niraya  (see 
niraya  &  Avici  &  cp.  Vism  56  sq.).  —  In  comp"-  both 
ayo°  &  aya°  occur  as  bases. 

I.  ayo":  -kapala  an  iron  pot  A  iv.70  (v.  1.  "guhala); 
Nd^  304  '"  D  2  (of  Niraya).  -kuta  an  iron  hammer  PvA 
284.  -kbila  an  iron  stake  S  v.444;  M  111.183  =  Nd' 
304  "■  c;  Sn.\  479.  -gula  an  iron  ball  S  v. 283;  Dh3o8; 
It  43  =:  90;  Th  2,  489;  DA  1.84.  -ghana  an  iron  club 
Ud  93;  VvA  20.  -ghara  an  iron  house  J  iv.492.  -patala 
an  iron  roof  or  ceiling  (of  Niraya)  PvA  52.  -pakara  an 
iron  fence  Pv  i.io"  =  Nd^  304  '"■  "  '.  -maya  made  of 
iron  Sn  669  (kuta):  J  iv.492  (nava);  Pv  i.io"  (bhumi 
of  N.);  PvA  43,  52.  -muggara  an  iron  club  PvA  55. 
-sanku  an  iron  spike  S  IV. 168;  Sn  667. 

II.  aya°:  -kapSla  =  ayo°  DhA  1.148  (v.l.  ayo°).  -kara 
a  worker  in  iron  Miln  331.  -kuta  =  ayo°  J  1. 108;  DhA 
11.69  (v- '■)  -nangala  an  iron  plough  DhA  1.223;  111-67. 
-pattaka  an  iron  plate  or  sheet  (cp.  loha°)  J  v.359. 
-pa^havi  an  iron  floor  (of  Avici)  DhA  1.148.  -sangbataka 
an  iron  (door)  post  DhA  IV.  104.  -sula  an  iron  stake  Sn 
667;  DhA  1.148. 

Ayojjha  (adj.)  [Sk.  ayodhya]  not  to  be  conquered  or  sub- 
dued M  11.24. 

Ayya  (n.-adj.)  [contracted  form  for  the  diaeretic  ariya  (q.  v. 
for  etym.).  See  also  ayira]  (a)  (n.)  gentleman,  sire,  lord, 
master  J  III. 167  ^  PvA  65;  DhA  1.8  (ayya  pi.  the  worthy 
gentlemen,  the  worthies),  13  (amhakaq  ayyo  our  worthy 
Sir);  11.95.  —  C')  (*<^j-)  worthy,  gentlemanly,  honourable 
Vin  11.191;  DhA  11.94  sq.  —  The  voc.  is  used  as  a  polite 
form  of  address  (cp.  Ger.  "Sie"  and  E.  address  "Esq.") 
like  E.  Sir,  milord  or  simply  "you"  with  the  implication 
of  a  pluralis  majestatis;  thus  voc.  proper  ayya  J  1. 221, 
279,  308;  pi.  nom.  as  voc.  ayya  in  addressing  several 
J  11.128,  415;  nom.  sg.  as  voc.  (for  all  genders  &  num- 
bers) ayyo  Vin  11.215;  J  111126,  127.  —  f.  ayya  lady, 
mistress  M  11.96  (=:  mother  of  a  prince);  DhA  1.398; 
voc.  ayye  my  lady  J  v.  138. 

-putta  lit.  son  of  an  Ariyan,  i.  e.  an  aristocratic  (young) 
man  gentleman  (cp.  in  meaning  kulaputta);  thus  (a)  son 
of  my  master  (lit.)  said  by  a  servant  J  in.  167;  (b)  lord, 
master,  "governor"  J  1.62  (by  a  servant);  DA  1,257  (= 
sami,  opp.  dasi-putta);  PvA  145  (by  a  wife  to  her  hus- 
band); DhA  II. no;  (c)  prince  (see  fV.Z.A'.M.  xii.,  1898, 
75  sq.  &  Epigraphia  Indica  111.137  sq.)  J  V1.I46. 

Ayyaka   [demin.   of  ayya]  grandfather,  (so  also  BSk  ,  e.  g. 

M  Vastu  11.426;  111.264)  J  111.155;  iv.146;  vi.196;  Pv  i.8«; 
Miln  284.  ayyaka-payyaka  grandfather  &  great  grandfather, 


Ayyaka 


7^ 


Arahatta 


forefathers,  ancestors  J  1.2;  PvA  107  (=r  pitamaha)  — f. 
a3ryaka  grandmother,  granny  Vin  11. 169;  S  1.97;  J  11-349 
(here  used  for  "lady",  as  v.  1.  I!B);  &  ayyika  Th  2,  159; 
Vism  379. 

Ara  [Vedic  ara  fr.  \,  rnoti;  see  etym.  under  appeti  &  cp. 
more  esp.  Lat.  artus  limb,  Gr.  'afy.a  chariot,  also  P. 
annava]  the  spoke  of  a  wheel  D  II. 1 7  (sahass^  Sra  adj. 
with  thousand  spokes),  cp.  Miln  285;  J  IV. 209;  vi.261 ; 
Miln  238;  DhA  11.142;  VvA  106  (in  allegorical  etym. 
of  arahant  =  saqsara-cakkassa  aranai)  hatatts  "breaker  of 
the  spokes  of  the  wheel  of  transmigration")  =  PvA  7 
(has  sarjsara-vattassa) ;  VvA  277. 

Arakkhiya  (adj.)  [a  -f-  rakkhiya,  grd.  of  rakkhati]  not  to 
be  guarded,  viz.  (i)  impossible  to  watch  (said  of  women 
folk)  J  11.326  (a.  nSma  itthiyo);  ill. 90  (matugamo  nama 
a.).  —  (2)  unnecessary  to  be  guarded  Vin  11.194  (Tathagala), 

Arakkheyya  (adj.)  [in  form  =  arakkhiya]  only  in  nt.  "that 
which  does  not  need  to  be  guarded  against",  what  one 
does  not  need  to  heed,  superfluous  to  beware  of  A  IV. 82 
(catlari  Tathagatassa  a°  ani).  —  3  arakkheyyani  are  enum<i- 
at  D  111.217  (but  as  arakkh",  which  is  also  given  by 
Childers). 

Aragha^t^  [Sk.  araghattaka  (so  Halayudha,  see  Aufrecht  p. 
138),  dialect.]  a  wheel  for  raising  water  from  a  well  ' 
Bdgh.  on  cakkavattaka  at  cv  v.16,  2  (Vin  11.318).  So 
read  for  T.  arahatta-ghati-yanta  ace  to  Morris,  J  P  T  S. 
1^85,  30;  cp.  also  Vin.  Texts  111.112.  —  The  2'-d  part 
of  the  cpd.  is  doubtful;  Morris  &  Aufrecht  compare  the 
modern  Hindi  form  arhat  or  rahat  "a  well-wheel". 

Araja  (adj.)  [a  -|-  raja]  free  from  dust  or  impurity  S  iv.2l8- 
(of  the  wind) ;  Vv  536  (=  apagata-raja  VvA  236). 

Aranfia  (nt.)  [Vedic  aranya;  from  arana,  remote,  +y'*-  '" 
the  Rig  V.  aranya  still  means  remoteness  (opp.  to  ama, 
at  home).  In  the  Ath  V.  it  has  come  to  mean  wilderness 
or  forest.  Connected  with  arad  and  are,  remote,  far  from], 
forest  D  1.71;  M  1.16;  111.104;  S  1.4,  7,  29,  181,  203 
(maha);  A  1.60  (°vanapatthani);  11.252;  111.135,  138;  Sn 
39,  53,  i'9;  Dh  99,  329,  330;  It  90;  Vv  56';  Ps  1.176. 
[The  commentators,  give  a  wider  meaning  to  the  word. 
Thus  the  O.  C.  (Vin  111.46,  quoted  Vism  72  &  SnA  83) 
says  every  place,  except  a  village  and  ihe  approach 
thereto,  is  araiina.  See  also  Vin  111.51;  DA  1.209;  PvA 
73;_VvA   249;  J   1.149,  215;  11-138;  V.70]. 

-ayatana  a  forest  haunt  Vin  11.201;  S  11.269;  J  1.173; 
VvA  301;  PvA  54,  78,  141.  -kutika  a  hut  in  the  forest, 
a  forest  lodge  S  1.61;  111.116;  iv.116,  380;  DhA  IV.31 
(as  V.  1. ;  T.  has  "kuti).  -gata  gone  into  the  forest  (as 
loneliness)  M  1.323;  A  111.353;  v. 109  sq.,  207,  323  sq. 
-thana  a  place  in  the  forest  J  1.253.  -vasa  a  dwelling 
in  the  forest,  a  hermitage  J  1.90.  -vihara  living  in  (the) 
loneliness  (of  the  forest)  A  111.343  sq. 

Arafinaka  (&  Aranfiaka)  (adj.)  [araiina  +  ka]  belonging 
to  solitude  or  to  the  forest,  living  in  the  forest,  fond  of 
solitude,  living  as  hermits  (bhikkha)  M  1.214  (5°),  469; 
111.89;  S  11.187,  202  (v.  1.  a°),  208  sq.;  281;  A  ni.343, 
391;  IV. 291,  344,  435;  v.io.  See  also  arafinaka. 

Arannakatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  arafinaka]  the  habit  of  one 
who  lives  in  the  forest,  indulgence  in  solitude  &  seques- 
tration, a  hermit's  practice,  seclusion  S  11.202,  208  sq. 
See   also  arannakatta. 

Arapa'  (adj.-n.)  [Vedic  arana  fr.  *ara  ]/f,  which  as  abl. 
ara  is  used  as  adv.  far  from,  cp.  P.  araka.  Orig.  meaning 
"removed  from,  remote,  far".  See  also  aranfia]  I.  (adj.) 
living  in  solitude,  far  from  the  madding  crowd  M  ill. 237 
(°vibhanga-sutta) ;  S  1.44,  45;  J  1.340  (tittha"  ?). 

Ara^a'^  (nt.)  [a-j-rana]  quietude,  peace  Nett  55  (+ tana), 
176  (or  as  adj.  =  peaceful)  ThA  134  (-|-sarana);  Vbh 
19  sq.  (opp.  sarana).  See  sarana^. 


-viharin  (or  arana-viharin)  [to  be  most  likely  taken 
as  arana°,  abl.  of  arana  in  function  of  araka,  i.  e.  adv. 
far  from,  away;  the  spelling  arana  would  refer  it  to  arana^. 
As  regards  meaning  the  P.  Commentators  expl"-  it  as 
opp.  of  rana  fight,  battle,  i.  e.  peacefuUness,  friendliness 
&  see  in  it  a  syn.  of  metta.  Thus  Dhammapala  at  PvA 
230  expls-  it  as  "raetta-viharin",  &  in  this  meaning  it  is 
found  freq.  in  BSk.  e.  g.  Divy  401  ;  Av.  ^  11.131  (q.  v. 
for  further  ref.  under  note  3);  M  Vastu  1. 165;  11.292.  Cp. 
also  the  epithet  of  the  Buddhas  rananjaha]  one  who  lives 
in  seclusion,  an  anchoret,  hermit ;  hence  a  harmless,  peace- 
ful person  A  1.24;  Th  2,  358,  360;  Pv  IV.I^^  (=  PvA 
230);  ThA   244.   Cp.   Dhs  trsl.   336. 

Arai^l  &  °i  (f.)  [Vedic  arani  &  arani  fr.  f]  wood  for  kind- 
ling fire  by  attrition,  only  in  foil.  cpds. :  °potaka  small 
firewood,  all  that  is  needed  for  producing  fire,  chiefly 
drill  sticks  Miln  53;  "sahita  (nt.)  same  Vin  11.217;  J  i. 
212  (I);  V.46  (1);  DhA  11.246;  °mathana  rubbing  of 
firewood  J  vi.209.  —  Note.  The  reading  at  PvA  211 
araniyehi  devehi  sadi-savanna  is  surely  a  misreading  (v.  1. 
BB  ariyehi). 

Aratl  (f.)  [a  -j-  rati]  dislike,  discontent,  aversion  Sn  270, 
436,  642,  938;  Dh  418  (=:  ukkanthitattaq  DhA  IV.225); 
Th  2,  339  (=  ukkanthi  ThA  239);  Sdhp  476. 

Aravlnda  [ara  4-  vinda  (?)  Halayudha  gives  as  Sk,  aravinda 

nt.]  a  lotus,  Nymphaea  Nelumbo  Davs  v.62. 

Araha  (adj.)  ( — °)  [Vedic  arha  of  arh]  I.  worthy  of,  de- 
serving, entitled  to,  worth  Dh  195  (puja°);  Pv  11.8" 
(dakkhina°);  VvA  23  (danda°  deserving  punishment). 
Freq.  in  cpd.  maharaha  [Sk.  mahargha]  worth  much,  of 
great  value,  costly,  dear  J  1.50,  58;  111.83,  etc.  (see  ma- 
hant).  —  2.  fit  for,  apt  for,  suitable  PvA  26  (paribhoga° 
fit  for  eating). 

Arahati  [Vedic  arhati,  etym.  uncertain  but  cp.  agghati]  to 
be  worthy  of,  to  deserve,  to  merit  (=■  Lat.  debeo)  Sn 
431,  552  (raja  arahasi  bhavitui));  J  1.262;  Dh  9,  10,  230; 
Pv  111.6".  —  ppr.  arahant  (q.v.).  Cp.  also  adj.  araha. 

Arahatta'  (nt.)  [abstr.  formation  fr.  arahat",  2nd  base  of 
arahant  in  comp"- :  see  arahant  IV.2]  the  state  or  con- 
dition of  an  Arahant,  i.  e.  perfection  in  the  Buddhist 
sense  =:  Nibbana  (S  IV. 151)  final  &  absolute  emancipation, 
Arahantship,  the  attainment  of  the  last  &  highest  stage 
of  the  Path  (see  magga  &  anagamin).  This  is  not  restricted 
by  age  or  sex  or  calling.  There  is  one  instance  in  the 
Canon  of  a  child  having  attained  Arahantship  at  the  age 
of  7.  One  or  two  others  occur  in  the  ComV  ThA  64(Se!a); 
PvA  53  (Sankicca).  Many  women  Arahants  are  mentioned 
by  name  in  the  oldest  texts.  About  400  men  Arahanis 
are  known.  Most  of  them  were  bhikkhus,  but  A  HI. 451 
gives  the  names  of  more  than  a  score  lay  Arahants  (cp. 
D  11.93  =  S  V.360,  and  the  references  in  Dial.  HI. 5  n*).  — 
Arahattai]  is  defined  at  S  iv.252  as  raga-kkhaya,  dosa", 
moha".  Descriptions  of  this  state  are  to  be  found  in  the 
formulae  expressing  the  feelings  of  an  Arahant  (see  ara- 
hant II.).  Vin  11.254;  D  III. 10,  II,  255;  A  11L34,  421, 
430;  V.209;  Pug  73;  Nett  15,  82;  DA  1.180,  188,  191; 
DhA  1195;  IV.193;  PvA  14.  —  Phrases:  arahattai)  sac- 
chikaroti  to  experience  Arahantship  Vin  11.74;  D  1.229; 
arahattai)  papunati  to  attain  or  reach  Arahantship  (usu- 
ally in  aor.  papuni)  J  11.229  ThA  64;  DhA  II 49  (saha 
patisambhidahi)  93  (id.);  PvA  53,  54,  61,  233  &  freq. 
elsewhere;  cp.  arahattaya  patipanna  D  111.255;  A.  1.120; 
IV. 292  sq.,   372    sq. 

-gahana  attainment  of  Arahantship  DhA  1.8.  -patta 
(&  patti)  one  who  has  attained  Ar.  S  1.196;  v. 273;  A 
II. 157;  111.376;  IV. 235.  -phala  the  fruit  of  Ar.  Vin  1.39, 
41,  293;  111.93;  D  111.227,  277;  S  111.168;  v.44;  A  1.23, 
45;  111.272;  1V.276;  Dhs  1017;  Vbh  326.  -magga  the 
Path  of  Ar.  S  1.78;  A  111.391;  DA  1.224.  -vimokkha 
the  emancipation  of  Ar.  Nd2  19. 

Arahatta^  in  "ghati  see  araghatta. 


Arahant 


n 


Ariya 


Arahant  (adj.-n.)  [Vedic  arhant,  ppr.  of  arhati  (see  arahati), 
meaning  deserving ,  worthy].  Before  Buddhism  used  as 
honorific  title  of  high  officials  like  the  English  'His  Wor- 
ship'; at  the  rise  of  Buddhism  applied  popularly  to  all 
ascetics  (^Dial.  in. 3 — (>).  Adopted  by  the  Buddhists  as  1. 1. 
for  one  who  has  attained  the  Summum  Bonum  of  reli- 
gious aspiration  (Nibbana). 

I.  Cases  nom.  sg.  arabai)  Vin  1.9;  D  1.49;  M  1.245, 
280;  S  1.169;  see  also  formula  C.  under  11.,  &  araha 
Vin  1.8,  25,  26;  ii.iio,  161;  D  111.255;  It  95;  Kh  iv.; 
gen.  arahato  S  iv.i75;  Sn  590;  instr.  arahata  S  111.168; 
DA  1.43;  ace.  arabantar)  D  111. 10;  Dh  420;  Sn  644; 
Loc.  arabantamhi  Vv  21'-.  —  nom.  pi.  arahanto  Vic 
1. 19;  IV.112;  S  1.78,  235;  11.220;  IV.123;  gen.  arahatai) 
Vin  iii.i;  S  1.214;  Sn  186;  It  112;  Pv  1.11'^.  Other 
cases  are  of  rare  occurrence 

II.  Formulae.  Arahantship  finds  its  expression  in  freq. 
occurring  formulae,  of  which  the  standard  ones  are  the 
foil. :  A.  khina  jati  vusitag  brahmacariyai)  katarj  ka- 
raniyar)  napararj  itthattaya  "destroyed  is  (re-)  birth, 
lived  is  a  chaste  life,  (of  a  student)  done  is  what  had  to 
be  done,  after  this  present  life  there  in  no  beyond".  Vin 
I.I4,  35,  183;  D  1.84,  177,  203;  M  1.139;  "-39;  S  I. 
140;  11.51,  82,  95,  120,  245;  111.21,  45,  55,  68,  71,  90, 
94,  195,  223;  IV.2,  20,  35,  45,  86,  107,  151,  383;  V.72, 
90,  144,  222;  A  1.165;  11-21 1;  111-93;  IV.88,  179,  302; 
V.155,  162;  Sn  p.  16;  Pug  61,  etc.  —  B.  eko  vupa- 
kattho  appamatto  atapi  pahitatto  'alone,  secluded,  ear- 
nest, zealous,  master  of  himseir  D  1. 177;,  11.153  &  "^o"" 
tinned  with  A:  S  1.140,  161;  11.21;  111.36,  74;  IV.64; 
V.144,  166;  A  1.282;  11.249;  111-70,  217,  301-1  376;  IV. 
235.  —  C.  arahag  khinasavo  vusitava  katakaraniyo 
ohitabbaro  anupatta-sadattbo  parikkhina-bhava-san- 
nojano  sammad-anna  vimutto :  D  111.83,  97  j  M  1.4, 
236;  S  1.71;  111.161,  193;  1V.125;  V.145,  205i  273,  302; 
A  1.144;  111.359,  376;  IV. 362,  369,  371^  sq..  It  38.  — 
D.  nanan  ca  pana  me  dassanar)  udapadi  akuppa  me 
ceto-vlmutti  ayar)  antima  jati  nattbi  dani  punabbbavo 
"there  arose  in  me  insight,  the  emancipation  of  my  heart 
became  unshake  able,  this  is  my  last  birth,  there  is  now 
no  rebirth  for  me:  S  11.171;  111.28;  iv.8 ;  v. 204;  A  1.259; 
IV.56,  305,  448. 

III.  Other  passages  (selected)  Vin  1.8  (araha  sitibhuto 
nibbuto),  9  (arahai)  Tathagato  Sammasambuddho),  19 
(ekadasa  loke  arahanto),  20  (ekasatthi  id.).  25  sq.;  II. 
110,  161;  lli.l  ;  1V.H2  (te  arahanto  udake  kilanti);  D 
1.49  (Bhagava  arahaq),  144;  111.10,  255:  M  1.245  (*J°' 
tamo  na  pi  kalai)  karoti;  arahai]  samano  Gotamo),  280; 
S  1.9,  26,  50  (Tathagato),  78,  140,  161,  169,  175,  178 
(4-  sitibhuta),  208,  214,  235  (khinasava  arahanto);  III. 
160  (araha  tissa?),  168;  iv.123,  175,  260,  393:  v.  159 
sq.,  164,  200  sq.;  A  1.22  (Sammasambuddho),  27,  109, 
266;  11.134;  I1I-376,  39',  439;  iv.3_64,  394;  v.120;  Sn 
186,  590,  644,  1003;  It  95  (-|- khinasava),  112;  Kh  iv. 
(dasahi  angehi  samannagato  araha  ti  vuccati:  see  KhA 
88);  Vv  2ii;  1.217;  Dh  164,  420  (khinasava +);  Ps  11.3, 
19,  194,  203  sq.;  Pug  37,  73;  Vbh  324,  336,  422; 
Pv  l.l'  (khettupama  arahanto),  ii''^;  iv.i". 

IV.  In  compi-  &,  dcr.  we  find  two  bases,  viz.  (l)  ara- 
haDta°  in  °ghata  the  killing  or  murder  of  an  Arahant 
(considered  as  one  of  the  six  deadly  crimes):  see  abhi 
thana;  °ghataka  the  murderer  of  the  A.:  Vin  1.89,  136, 
168,  320;  °magga  (arahatta°?)  the  path  of  an  A.:  D  I. 
144.  —  (2)  arabat"  in  (arahad-)dhaja  the  flag  or  banner 
of  an  A.:  J  1.65. 

V.  See  further  details  &  passages  under  anagamin, 
khina,  buddha.  On  the  relationship  of  Buddha  and  Ara- 
hant see  Dial.  11. 1 — 3;  111.6.  For  riddles  or  word-play 
on  the  form  arahant  see  M  1.280;  A  iv.145;  DA  1.146 
=r  VvA  105,  6  =  PvA  7;  DhA  iv.228;  DhsA  349. 

ArSti  [a  +  rati,  cp.  Sk.  arati]  an  enemy  DSvs  iv.i. 

All    [Ved.    ari;    fr.    f]   an  enemy.  —  The  word  is  used  in 
exegesis   &   word   expl" ,   thus    in   etym.   of  arahant  (see 


ref.  under  arahant  v.);  of  bhuri  Ps  11. 197.  —  Otherwise 
in  late  language  only,  e.  g.  Sdhp  493  ("bhuta).  See  also 
arindama  &  aribhaseti. 

ArinCamana  [ppr.  med.  of  P.  viiicati  for  ricyati]  not  leaving 
behind,  not  giving  up,  i.  e.  pursuing  earnestly  Sn  69 
(jhanai)  ^  ajdhamana  SnA  123,  cp.  Nd^  94). 

Arittha'  (adj.)  [a  +  ritt'ia  =  Vedic  arista,  pp  of  a  +  rl§  to 

hurt  or  be  hurt]  unhurt  Sdhp  279. 

Arittha-  [Sk.  arista,  N.  of  a  tree]  a  kind  of  spiritous 
liquor  Vin  IV.IIO. 

Aritthaka  (adj.)  [fr.  arittha]  (a)  unhurt;  perfect  DA  1,94 
(°i)  fianai)).  —  (b)  [fr.  arittha  in  meaning  of  "soap-berry 
plant"?]  in  phrase  maha  aritthako  mani  S  1.104  "a  great 
mass  of  soap  stone"  (cp.  Rh.  D.  in  y.K.A.S.  1895, 
893  sq-),  "a  shaped  block  of  steatite"  (Mrs.  Kh.  D.  in 
K.S    130). 

Aritta  (nt.)  [Vedic  aritra,  Idg.  »ere  to  row  (Sk.  f  to  move); 
cf.  Gr.  ifi<r<ru  to  row,  ifSTni(  rudder,  Lat.  remus,  Ohg. 
ruodar  =  rudder;  Ags.  rowan  =  E.  row]  a  rudder.  Usually 
in  comb"-  with  piya  (phiya)  oar,  as  piyarittai)  (phiy'') 
oar  &  rudder,  thus  at  S  1.103  (T.  piya°,  v.  1.  phiya"); 
A  11.201  (piya°);  J  IV.164  (T.  piya°,  v.l.  phiya°);  t-n32i 
(piya+;  SnA  330  phiya  ^  dabbi-padara,  aritta  :=  veju- 
danda).  DhsA  149. 

Arindama  [Sk.  arindama,  arii)  -|-  dama  of  dam]  a  tamer 
of  enemies  victor,  conqueror  Pv  IV.315  (=  arinaq  damana- 
sila  PvA   251);  Sdhp   276. 

Aribhaseti  [=  ariq  bhaseli]  to  denounce,  lit.  to  call  an 
enemy  J  IV. 285. 

Ariya  (adj.-n.)  [Vedic  arya,  of  uncertain  etym.  The  other 
Pali  forms  are  ayira  &  ayya]  I.  (racial)  Aryan  D  11.87. — 
2.  (social)  noble,  distinguished,  of  high  birth.  —  3.  (ethical) 
in  accord  with  the  customs  and  ideals  of  the  Aryan 
clans,  held  in  esteem  by  Aryans,  generally  approved. 
Hence:  right,  good,  (ideal.  [The  early  Buddhists  had  no 
such  ideas  as  we  cover  with  the  words  Buddhist  and  Indian. 
Ariya  does  not  exactly  mean  either.  But  it  often  comes 
very  near  to  what  they  would  have  considered  the  best 
in  each].  — (adj.):  D  1.70  =  (°ena  silakkhandhena  saman- 
nSgata  fitted  out  with  our  standard  morality);  111.64 
(cakkavatti-vatta),  246  (ditthi);  M  1. 139  (pannaddhaja); 
11.103  (ariyaya  jatiya  jato,  become  of  the  Aryan  lineage); 
S  11.273  (tunhlbhava);  iv.250  (vaddhi),  287  (dhamma); 
V.82  (bojjhanga),  166  (satipatthana),  222  (vimutti),  228 
(nana),  255  (iddhipada),  421  (maggo),  435  (saccani),  467 
(panna-cakkhu);  A  1.71  (parisa);  11.36  (iiaya);  111.451  (iiatia); 
IV.153  (tunhibhava) ;  v.206  (silakkhandha);  It  35  (panna), 
47  (bhikkhu  sammaddaso);  Sn  177  (palha  =  atthangiko 
maggo  SnA  216);  Dh  236  (bhumi),  270;  Ps  11.212  (iddhi). 
-alamariya  fully  or  thoroughly  good  D  1.163  =  111.82  = 
A  IV. 363;  nSlamariya  not  at  all  good,  object,  ignoble 
ibid.  —  (til.)  Vin  1. 197  (na  ramati  pSpe);  D  1.37  =:  (yai) 
tai)  ariya  acikkhanti  upekkhako  satima  etc. :  see  3'''.  jhSna), 
245;  lll.lll  ("anaij  anupavadaka  one  who  defames  the 
noble);  M  1.17,  280  (sotliyo  ariyo  arahaq);  S  1.225  (°5nar) 
upavadaka);  11.123  (id.);  iv.53  (°assa  vinayo),  95  (id.); 
A  1.256  ("anai)  upavadaka);  111.19,  252  (id.);  iv.145  (dele! 
see  arihatatta);  v.68,  145  sq.,  200,  317;  It  21,  108 
Dh  22,  164,  207;  J  111.354  =  Miln  230;  M  1.7,  I 
(ariyanar)  adassavin:  "not  recognising  the  Noble  Ones 
PvA  26,  146;  DhA  11.99;  Sdhp  444  (°Snaq  vai)sa).  — 
anartya  (adj.  &  «.)  not  Ariyan,  ignoble,  undignified,  low, 
common,  uncultured  A  1.81;  Sn  664  (=  asappurisa  SnA 
479;  DhsA  353);  J  11.281  (=  dussila  papadbamma  C); 
v.48  (°rupa  shameless),  87 :  DhA  IV.3.  —  See  also  fiaija, 
magga,  sacca,  savaka. 

-Svakasa  appearing  noble  J  v.87.  —  uposatha  the  ideal 
feast  day  (as  one  of  3)  A  1.205  sq.,  212.  — kanta  loved 
by    the  Best  D  111.227.  —  ga?*  (p'-)  tfoops  of  worthies 


Ariya 


78 


Alai] 


J  VI. 50  (:^  brahmapa-gapa,  te  kira  tada  ariyacara  ahesui), 
tena  te  evam  aha  C).  —  garahin  casting  blnme  on  the 
righteous  Sn  660.  —  citta  a  noble  heart.  —  traja  a  true 
descendant  of  the  Noblp  ones  Dpvs  v.92.  —  dasa  having 
the  ideal  (or  best)  belief  It  93  =  94.  —  dhana  sublime 
treasure;  always  as  sattavidha"  sevenfold,  viz.  saddha", 
slla°,  hiri°,  ottappa°,  suta°,  caga",  paiifia°  "faith,  a  moral 
life,  modesty,  fear  of  evil,  learning,  self-denial,  wisdom" 
ThA  240;  VvA  113;  DA  11.34.  —  dhamma  the  national 
customs  of  the  Argans  (:=  ariyanaq  eso  dhammo  Nd'  71, 
72)  M  I.I,  7,  135;  A  11.69;  V.i45sq.,  241,  274;  Sn  783; 
Dhs  1003.  —  puggala  an  (ethically)  model  person,  Ps 
1. 167;  Vin  V.117;  ThA  206.  —  magga  the  Aryan  Path. 
—  var)sa  the  (fourfold)  noble  family,  i.  e.  of  recluses 
content  with  the  4  requisites  D  in. 224  =  A  11.27  =  Ps 
1.84  =  Nd2  141;  cp.  A  111.146.  —  vattin  leading  a  noble 
life,  of  good  conduct  J  111.443.  —  vata  at  Th  i,  334 
should  be  read  °vatta  (nom.  sg.  of  vattar,  vac)  "speaking 
noble  words".  —  vasa  the  most  excellent  state  of  mind, 
habitual  disposition,  constant  practice.  Ten  such  at  D  in. 269, 
291  r=  A  V.29  (Passage  recommended  to  all  Buddhists  by 
Asoka  in  the  Bhabra  Edict).  —  vihara  the  best  practice 
S  v.326.  —  vohara  noble  or  honorable  practice.  There 
are  four,  abstinence  from  lying,  from  slander,  from  harsh 
language,  from  frivolous  talk.  They  are  otherwise  known 
as  the  4  vaci-kammanta  &  represent  sila  nos.  4 — 7.  See 
D  111.232  ;  A  11.246;  Vin  v.125.  —  satigha  the  commu- 
nion of  the  Nobles  ones  PvA  i.  —  sacca,  a  standard 
truth,  an  established  fact,  D  1. 189,  II. 90,  304  sq.;  111^77; 
M  1.62,  184;  111.248;  S  V.415  sq.  =  Vin  i.io,  230.  It  17; 
Sn  229,  230,  267;  Dh  190;  DhA  ill. 246;  KhA  81,151, 
185,  187;  ThA  178,  282,  291;  VvA  73.  —  savaka  a 
disciple  of  the  noble  ones  (=  ariyanar)  santike  sutatta  ^. 
SnA  166).  M  1.8,  46,  91,  181,  323;  11,262:  III. 134,  228, 
272;  It  75;  Sn  90;  Miln  339;  Dh.\  1.5,  (opp.  putthuj- 
jana).  —  sllin  of  unblemished  conduct,  practising  virtue 
D  I.I  1 5  (=  sllai)  ariyai)  uttamaij  parisuddhaq  DA  1.286); 
M  11.167. 

When  the  commentators,  many  centuries  afterwards, 
began  to  write  Pali  in  S.  India  &  Ceylon,  far  from  the  ancient 
seat  of  the  Aryan  clans,  the  racial  sense  of  the  word 
ariya  was  scarcely,  if  at  all,  present  to  their  minds. 
Dhammapala  especially  was  probably  a  non-Aryan,  and 
certainly  lived  in  a  Dravidian  environment.  The  then 
current  similar  popular  etmologies  of  ariya  and  arahant 
(cp.  next  article)  also  assisted  the  confusion  in  their 
minds.  They  sometimes  therefore  erroneously  identify  the 
two  words  and  explain  Aryans  as  meaning  Arahants 
(DhA  1.230;  SnA  537;  PvA  60).  In  other  ways  also  they 
misrepresented  the  old  texts  by  ignoring  the  racial  force 
of  the  word.  Thus  at  J  v.48  the  text,  speaking  of  a 
hunter  belonging  to  one  of  the  aboriginal  tribes,  calls 
him  anariya-rupa.  The  C.  explains  this  as  "shameless", 
but  what  the  text  has,  is  simply  that  he  looked  like  a 
non-Aryan,  (cp  'frank'  in  English).. 

Arihatatta  in  phrase  "arihatta  ariyo  hoti"  at  A  iv.145  's 
wrong  reading  for  arinai]  hatatta.  The  whole  phrase  is 
inserted  by  mistake  from  a  gloss  explaining  araha  in  the 
foil,  sentence  "arakatta  kilesanar)  arlnai)  hatatta  .  . .  araha 
hoti",  and  is  to  be  deleted  (omitted  also  by  SS). 

ArU  (nt.)  [Vedic  aruh,  unknown  etym.]  a  wound,  a  sore, 
only  in  cpds. :  °kaya  a  heap  of  sores  M  11.64  =  Dh  I47 
=  Th  1,  769  (^  navannai)  vaijamukhanaq  vasena  arub- 
huta  kaya  DhA  111.109  =  VvA  77);  °gatta  (adj.)  with 
wounds  in  the  body  M  1.506  (-\-  pakka-gatta);  Miln  357 
(id);  °pakka  decaying  with  sores  S  iv.198  (°ani  gattani); 
°bhuta  consisting  of  wounds,  a  mass  of  wounds  VvA  77  = 
DhA  111.109. 

Aruka=;aru;  only  in  cpd.  "lipamacitto  (adj.)  having  a 
heart  like  a  sore  (of  a  man  in  anger  A  1.124  =  Pug  3° 
(expld  at  Pug  A  212  as  puraria-vana-sadisa-citto  "an  old 
wound"  i.  e.  continually  breaking  open). 


Aruoa  [Vedic  aruija  (adj.)  of  the  colour  of  fire,  i.  e.  ruddy, 
nt.  the  dawn  ;  of  Idg.  *ereu  as  in  Sk.  arusa  reddish,  Av. 
aurusa  white,  also  Sk  ravi  sun;  an  enlarged  from  of  Idg. 
^reu  as  in  Sk.  rudhira,  rohita  red  (bloody;  see  etym. 
under  rohita),  Gr.  efvSpd^,  Lat.  ruber.]  the  sun  Vin  11.68; 
IV.245;  J  "-154;  V.403;  VI.330;  Dpvs  1.56;  DA  1.30.— 
a.  uggacchati  the  sun  rises  J  1.108;  VvA  75,  &  see  cpds. 
-ugga  sunrise  Vin  iv.272;  S  v.29,  78,  loi,  442  (at 
?11  Saqyutta  pass,  the  v.l.  SS  is  aruiiagga);  Vism  49. 
-uggamana  sunrise  (opp.  oggamanna).  Vin  111.196,  204, 
264;  IV.86,  166,  230,  244;  DhA  1. 165;  11.6;  PvA  109. 
-utu  the  occasion  of  the  sun  (-rise)  DhA  1.165.  -vanna 
of  the  colour  of  the  sun,  reddish,  yellowish,  golden  Vism 
123;  DhA  1 1.3  =  PvA  216.  -sadisa  (vaona)  like  the  sun 
(in  colour)  PvA  211   (gloss  for  suriyavaiiria). 

Arubheda  the  Rigveda  Th.\  206. 

Arupa  (adj.)  [a  -|-  rupa]  without  form  or  body,  incorporeal, 
D  1. 195  sq.;  HI. 240;  Sn  755;  It  62;  Sdhp  228,  463, 
480.  See  details  under  rtipa. 

-avacara  the  realm  or  world  of  Formlessness,  Dhs 
1281  — 1285;  Ps  1.83  sq.,  loi.  -kayika  belonging  to  the 
group  of  formless  beings  Miln  317  (deva).  -thayin  standing 
in  or  being  founded  on  the  Formless  It  62.  -tanha  "thirst" 
for  the  Formless  D  111.216.  -dhatu  the  element  or  sphere 
of  the  Incoporeal  (as  one  of  the  3  dhatus  rnpa",  arupa°, 
niiodha°;  see  dhatu)  D  in. 215,  275;  It  45.  -bhava 
formless  existence  D  111.216.  -loka  the  world  of  the  Form- 
less, Sdhp  494.  -safinin  not  having  the  idea  of  form 
D  ll.lio;  III. 260;   Exp.  1.252. 

Arupln  (adj.)  [a -j- rupin]  ^  ariipa ;  Di.3l  (arupi  atta  hoti: 
see  DA  1.119),  195;  in. I II,  139;  It  87  (rupino  va  aru- 
pino  va  satta). 

Are  (indecl.)  [onomat.  Cp.  Sk.  lalalla,  Gr.  AaAf'u,  Lat. 
lallo  =  E.  lull,  Ger.  lallen  &  without  redupl.  Ags.  hola, 
Ger.  halloh,  E.  lo.  An  abbrev.  form  of  are  is  re.  Cf.  also 
alala]  exclam.  of  astonishment  &  excitement:  he!  hallo! 
I  say!,  implying  an  imprecation:  Away  with  you  (with 
voc.)  J  1.225  (dasiputta-cetaka);  IV.391  (duttha-candala); 
DA  1.265  (=:re);  VvA  68  (dubbinl),  217  (^how  in  the 
world"). 

Ala'  freq.  spelling  for  ala. 

Ala"  (adj.)    [alai)  adv.  as  adj.]   enough,  only  in  neg.  anala 

insufficient,  impossible  M  1455;  J   11.326  =  IV. 471. 

Alat)  (indecl.)  [Vedic  arar).  In  meaning  I.  alar)  is  the  ex- 
panded continuation  of  Vedic  arai),  an  adv.  ace.  of  ara 
(adj.)  suitable;  fitly,  aptly  rightly  fr.  f  Cp.  anijava,  appeti, 
ara.  In  meaning  2.  alai)  is  the  same  as  are]  emphatic 
particle  1.  in  affirmative  sentences:  part,  of  assurance  & 
emphasis  =  for  sure,  very  much  (so),  indeed,  truly.  Note. 
In  connection  with  a  dat.  or  an  infin.  the  latter  only 
apparently  depend  upon  alaq,  in  reality  they  belong  II. 
the  syntax  of  the  whole  sentence  (as  dat.  or  inf.  absolute). 
It  is  customary  however  (since  the  practice  of  the  Pali 
grammarians)  to  regard  them  as  interdependent  and  inter- 
pret the  construction  as  "fit  for,  proper"  (=  yuttaq  Pali 
Com.),  which  meaning  easily  arises  ont  of  the  connotation 
of  alai),  e.g.  alam  eva  katug  to  be  sure,  this  is  to  be 
done  ^  this  is  proper  to  be  done.  In  this  sense  (c.  dat.) 
it  may  also  be  compd-  with  Vedic  araq  c.  dat.  —  (a) 
(abs.)  only  in  comb"-  with  dat.  or  inf.  (see  c.  &  Note 
above).  —  (b.)  (" — )  see  cpds.  —  (c.)  with  t/ai.  or  in/in. : 
alai)  antarayaya  for  certain  an  obstacle  M  1.130  (opp. 
nalai)  not  at  all);  alaq  te  vippatisaraya  you  ought  to  feel 
sorry  for  it  Vin  11.250;  alai)  vacanaya  one  says  rightly 
S  II. 18;    alaq  hitaya  untold  happiness  DhA  II. 41.  —  ito 

ce  pi  so  bhavai)  Gotamo  yojanasate  viharati  alam  eva 

upasankamitui)  even  if  he  were  100  miles  from  here, 
(surely)  even  so  (i.e.  it  is  fit  or  proper  even  then)  one 
must  go  to  him  D  1.117  (expW-  at  DA  1.288  by  yuttam 
eva  =  it  is  proper) ;  alam  eva  katuq  kalyanaij  indeed  one 


Alao 


79 


AUapa 


must  do  good  =  it  is  appropriate  to  do  good  Pv  11.9*' 
(=z  yuttaq  PvA  122);  alai)  puiinaDi  katave  "come,  let  us 
do  meritorious  works"  Vv  44"'  (rzr  yultar)  VvA  191).  — 
2.  in  negative  or  prohibitive  sentences:  part,  of  disap- 
probation reproach  &  warning;  enough!  have  done  with! 
fie!  stop!  alas!  (etc.  see  are).  —  (a)  (abs.)  enough:  nalaq 
thutui]  it  is  not  enough  to  praise  Sn  217;  te  pi  na  honti 
me  alaq  they  are  not  enough  for  me  Pv  l.6\  —  (b)  with 
voc. :  alai)  Devadatta  ma  to  rucci  sanghabhedo  "look  out 
D.  or  take  care  D.  that  you  do  not  split  up  the  community" 
Vin  II.  1 98 ;  alar)  Vakkali  kin  te  imina  putikayena  ditthena . . . 
S  111.120.  —  (c)  enough  of  (with  ins/r.):  alai)  ettakena 
enough  of  this,  so  much  of  that  Miln  18;  alam  me  Bud- 
dhena  enough  for  me  of  the  Buddha  r=  I  am  tired  of  the 
B.   DhA  11.34. 

-attba  (adj.)  "quite  the  thing",  truly  good,  very  pro- 
fitable, useful  D  U.231  ;  M  11.69  (so  read  for  alamatta); 
A  11.180;  Th  I,  252;  J  1.401  (so  read  for  °atta).  -ariya 
truly  genuine,  right  noble,  honourable  indeed,  only  in 
"uana-dassana  [cp.  BSk.  alamarya-jtiana-darsana  Lai  v. 309, 
509]  Vin  1.9;  A  111.64,  430;  V.88;  J  1.389  (cp.  ariya). 
-kammaniya  (quite  or  thoroughly)  suitable  Vin  111.187. 
-pateyya:  see  the  latter,  -vacanlya  (f.)  a  woman  who 
has  lo  be  addressed  with  "alar)"  (i.  e.  "fie"),  which 
means  that  she  ceases  to  be  the  wife  of  a  man  &  returus 
into  her  parental  home  Vin  in. 144,  cp.  274  (Bdhgh's. 
expl"  ).  -samakkhatar  one  who  makes  sufficiently  clear 
It  107.  -sajiva  one  who  is  thoroughly  fit  to  associate 
with  his  fellow  A  111.81.  -sataka  "curse-coat",  one  who 
curses  his  waist-coat  (alar)  sataka!)  because  of  his  having 
eaten  too  much   it  will  not  fit;  an  over-eater;  one  of  the 

5  kinds  of  gluttons  or  improper  eaters  as  enum't   at  DhA 
IV.  16  =  DhsA  404. 

Alakkhika  (&  ika)  (adj.)  [a  4-  lakkhika]  unfortunate  un- 
happy, of  bad  luck  Vin  111.23;  J  in-259. 

Alakkhi  (f.)  [a  -f-  lakkhi]  bad  luck,  misfortune  Th  I,  1 123. 

Alagadda  [Der.  unknown.  In  late  Sk.  alagarda  is  a  water- 
snake]  a  kind  of  snake  M  1. 133  =  DA  1.21  ;  DhA  iv. 
132    (°camma,   so  read  for  T.   alla-camma,  vv.  11.  alanda° 

6  alandu"). 

Alagga  (adj.)  [pp.  of  laggati]  not  stuck  or  attached  Nd'^ 
107  (also  alaggita);  alaggamana  (ppr.)  id.  DhA  111.298. 

Alaggana  (nt.)  [a  +  lagg^na]  not  hanging  on  anything, 
not  being  suspended  DA  1.180. 

Atagkata  [pp.  of  alankaroti]  1.  "made  too  much",  made 
much  of,  done  up,  adorned,  fitted  out  Dh  142  (=  valt- 
habharana-patimandita  DhA  111.83);  Pv  11. 3";  Vv  l';  J 
111.392;  IV.60.  —  2.  "done  enough"  (see  alaij,  use  with 
instr.),  only  neg.  analankata  in  meaning  "insatiate"  S 
1. 1 5  (kamesu). 

Alagkara^a  (nt.)  [alaq  4-  karana,  fr.  alankaroti]  doing  up, 
fitting  out,  ornamentation  J   1.60. 

AlaQkaranaka  (adj.)  [fr.  alankarapa]  adorning,  erabellishiDg, 
decorating   DhA   1.410. 

Alagkaroti  [alaq  -|-  karoti,  Vedic  araiikaroti]  to  make  much 
of  i.e.  to  adorn,  embellish,  decorate  J  1.60;  111.189;  ^''■ 
368.  ger.  °karitva  DhA  1.410;  PvA  74.  —  pp.  alan- 
kata.  —  Caus.  alankaiapeti  to  cause  to  be  adorned  J  1.52. 

AlaQkara  [fr.  alankaroti,  cp.  Vedic  arankfti]  "getting  up" 
i.e.  fining  ont,  ornament,  decoration;  esp.  trinkets,  orna- 
ments D  111.190;  A  111.239;  263  sq.;  J  VI. 368;  PvA  23, 
46,  70  ( — °  adj.  adorned  with),   74;  Sdhp  249. 

Alattaka  [Sk.  alaktaka]  lac,  a  red  animal  dye  J  IV. 1 14 
("patala);  DhA   11.174;  IV.197. 

Alanda  &  Alandii  see  alagadda. 


Alamba  (adj.)  [a  -|-  lamba]  not  hanging  down,  not  drooping, 
short  J  V.302;  VI. 3  (°tthaniyo  not  flabby:  of  a  woman's 
breasts  cp.  alamb'  ordhva-stani   Susruta  1.37 1 ). 

Alasa  (adj.)  [a  -f  lasa]  idle,  lazy,  slack,  slothful,  languid  S 
1.44,  217;  Sn  96  (=  jati-alaso  SnA  170);  J  IV. 30;  Dh 
280  (=  maha-alaso  DhA  111. 410).  Opp.  analasa  vigorous, 
energetic  S  1.44;  D  111.190  (dakka-f);  Vin  iv.211;  Nd-! 
141  (id.). 

Alasata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  alasa]  sloth-,  laziness;  only  in  neg. 
analasata  zeal,  indiistry  VvA  229. 

Alassa  (nt.)  at  S  1.43  is  spurious  spelling  for  alassa  idleness, 
sloth;  V.  1.  BB  alasya. 

Alata  (nt.)  [Sk.  alata,  related  to  Lat.  altare  altar,  adoleo 
to  burn]  a  firebrand  A  11.95  (chava°  a  burning  corpse, 
see  chava);  J  1.68;  Pug  36;  DhA  111.442. 

1  Alapu  (nt.)  [=  alabu,  with  p  for  b :  soe  Trenckner  Notes 
I  62i«]  a  gourd,  pumpkin  Dh  149  (=:  DhA  111.112;  vv.  U. 
I        alabu  &  alabbu). 

Alabu  [Sk.  alabu  f.]  a  long  white  gourd,  Cucurbita  Lage- 
naris  M  1.80  (titlaka^),  315  (id.);  PvA  47  (id.);  DhsA 
405.  —  See  also  alapu. 

Alabhaka  [a  +  labhaka]  not  getting,  loss,  detriment  Vin 
111.77. 

Alala  (indecl.)  [a  -\-  lala  interjection  fr.  sound  root  ''lal, 
see  etym.  under  are]  "not  saying  la  la"  i.  e.  not  babbling, 
not  dumb,  in  °mukha  not  (deaf  &)  dumb  SnA  124  (= 
anejamuga  of  Sn  70). 

Allka  (adj.)  [Sk.  alfka]  contrary,  false,  untrue  S  1.189;  J 
111.198;  VI. 361;  Miln  26,  99.  —  nt.  °r)  a  lie,  falsehood 
Dh  264. 

-vadin   one  who  tells  a  lie,  a  liar  Dh  223=1  VvA  69 
(has  allka");  J  11.4;  SnA  478  (for  abhnta-vadin  Sn  661). 

Alfnata  (f.)  [abstr.  of  alina]  open  mindedness,  prudence, 
sincerity  J  1.366. 

Alujita  (adj.)  [a  +  lujila,  pp.  of  lul]  umoved,  undisturbed 
Miln  383. 

AlOOika  (adj.)  [a  -f  lonika]   not  salted  J  111.409;  VvA  184. 

Aloma  (adj.)  [a  +  loma]  not  hairy  (upon  the  body)J  Vl.457. 

Alola  (adj.)  [a  +  lola]  undisturbed,  not  distracted  (by  desires), 
not  wavering:  of  firm  resolution,  concentrated  Sn  65 
(z=  nillolupa   Nd*   98;  =  rasavisesesu   anakula  SnA  118). 

Alia  (adj.)  (only  ° — )  [Vedic  ardra,  to  Gr.  ^fiu  moisten, 
'ifix  dirt]  —  1.  moist,  wet  M  111.94  ("mattika-punja  a 
heap  of  moist  clay;  may  be  taken  in  meaning  2).  —  2. 
fresh  (opp.  stale),  new;  freshly  plucked,  gathered  or 
caught,  viz.  °kusamuttbi  freshly  plucked  grass  A  v. 234  = 
249;  °gomaya  fresh  dung  A  v.234;  DhA  1.377;  "camma 
living  skin  Vism  195;  "ti^ja  fresh  grass  DA  1.77;  PvA  40; 
"daruni  green  sticks  J  1.318;  "madhu  fresh  honey  DhA 
11.197;  °inar)Sa-sarira  a  body  of  living  flesh  DhA  11.51  = 
1V.166;  "rasa  fresh-tasting  DhA  11.155;  "rohita-maccha 
fresh  fish  J  111.333.  —  3.  wet  ==  with  connotation  of  clean 
(through  being  washed),  freshly  washed,  "kesa  with  clean 
hair  PvA  82  (sisaq  nahatva  allakesa);  usually  comb''  with 
allavattba  with  clean  clothes  (in  an  ablution ;  often  as 
a  sign  of  mourning)  Ud  14,  91;  Dh.\  iv.220;  or  with 
odata  valtha  (id.)  J  111.425.  °pani  with  clean  hand  Pv 
11.99  (=  dhota-payi  PvA  116).  [For  analla-gatta  at  S  1.183 
better  read,  with  ibid  169,  an-alllna-gatta.  For  alla- 
camma  at  Dhp  A  IV. 132.  alagadda -camma,  with  the  v.l., 
is  preferable]. 

AUapa  [Sk.  alapa;  5  4" 'apa]  conversation,  talk;  only  in 
cpd.  "sallapa  conversation  (lit.  talking  to  &  pro  or  together) 
J  1.189;  Miln  15;  VvA  96;  PvA  86, 


Allika 


80 


Avakankhati 


Allika  (0  [eitber  from  alia  =  allikar)  nt.  in  meaning  defi- 
lement, getting  soiled  by  ( — °),  or  from  alliyati  =  alliyakai), 
a  der.  fr.  ger.  alliya  clinging  to,  sticl<ing  to.  The  whole 
word  is  doubtful.]  only  in  cpd.  (kama-)  sukh'  allik^anuyoga 
given  to  the  attachment  to  sensual  joys  Vin  I.  lo;  D  111.113, 
130;  S  IV.330;  V.421;  Nett  no. 

Allina  [pp.  of  alliyati ;  Sk.  altna]  (a)  sticking  to,  adhering 
or  adhered  to,  clinging  M  1.80;  A  v.  187;  Nd^  under 
nissita  (in  form  asita  allina  upagata).  —  (b.)  soiled  by 
( — °),  dirtied  A  11. 201.  -anallina  "to  which  nothing  sticks", 
i.  e.  pure,  undefiled,  clean  S  1. 169  (id.  p.  on  p.  183 
reads  analla:  see  alia).  Cp.  alaya. 

Alliyati  [a  +  llyati,  li,  llyate,  layate]  to  cling  to,  stick  to, 
adhere  to  (in  both  senses,  good  or  bad);  to  covet.  — (a) 
lit.  kesa  sisai)  alliyirjsu  the  hair  stuck  to  the  head  J  1.64; 
khaggo  loniesu  alllyi  the  sword  stuck  in  the  hair  J  1.273. 
—  (b)  fig.  to  covet,  desire  etc.:  in  idiomatic  phrase 
alliyati  (S  111.190  v.  1.;  T.  alayati)  kelayati  vanayati 
(S  111.190  V.I.;  T.  manayati;  M  1.260  T.  dhanayati,  but 
v.l.  p.  552  vanayati)  mamayali  "to  caress  dearly  &  be 
extremely  jealous  of"  (c.  ace.)  at  M  1.260  &  S  III. 190. — 
J  IV.5:  V.154  (alllyituq,  v.l.  illiyituri);  DhsA  364  (vanati 
bhajati  a);  pp.  allina  —  Caus.  alliyapeti  [cp.  Sk.  ala- 
payati,  but  B.Sk.  allipeti  M  Vastu  111.144;  pp.  alllpita 
ibid.  1.311 ;  111.408;  pass,  alllpiyate  111.127.]  to  make  stick, 
to  to  bring  near  to  (c.  ace.  or  loc.)  J  11.325  (hatthiij  maha- 
bhittiyan  alliyapetva);  I  v. 392  (slsena  slsaij  alliyapetva). 

A|a  [etym.  unknown]  i.  the  claw  of  a  crab  M  1.234;  S  1. 123; 
J  1.223,  505  ("chinno  kakkatako;  T.  spells  ala°);  11.342; 
111.295;  —  2.  the  nails  (of  finger  or  toe)  (?)  in  °chinna 
one  whose  nails  are  cut  off  Vin  I.91. 

A)Sra  (adj.)  [Is  it  the  same  as  ulara?]  only  used  with  ref. 
to  the  eyelashes,  &  usually  expld-  by  visala,  i.e.  extended, 
wide,  but  also  by  bahala,  i.e.  thick.  The  meaning  & 
etym.  is  as  yet  uncertain.  Kern,  (^Toev.  s.v.)  transit'  by 
"bent,  crooked,  arched",  "akkhin  with  wide  eyes  (eye- 
lashes?) J  1.306  (=  visala-netta  C);  °painba  with  thick 
eye-lashes  Vv  35'  (=  bahala-saijyata-pakhuma  C;  v.l. 
°pamukha);  °bhamuka  having  thick  eyebrows  or  "lashes 
J  VI.503  (so  read  for  "pamukha;  C.  expl'  by  visal-akkhi- 
gatida).  Cp.  alara. 

A|haka  in  udak'  alhaka  VvA  155  read  alhaka. 

Ava°  (prefix)  I.  Relation  between  ava  Of  0.  Phonetically  the 
difference  between  ava  &  o  is  this,  that  ava  is  the  older 
form,  whereas  o  represents  a  later  development.  Histori- 
cally the  case  is  often  reversed  —  that  is,  the  form  in  o 
was  in  use  first  &  the  form  in  ava  was  built  up,  some- 
times quite  independently,  long  afterwards.  Okaddhati, 
okappati,  okappana,  okassati,  okara,  okantatl,  okka- 
mati,  ogacchat),  odata  and  others  may  be  used  as  examples. 
The  difference  in  many  cases  has  given  rise  to  a  diffe- 
rentiation of  meaning,  like  E.  ripe :  rife,  quash :  squash ; 
Ger.  Knabe:  Knappe  etc.  (see  below  B  2).  —  A.  The 
old  Pali  form  Of  the  prefix  is  o.  In  same  cases  however 
a  Vedic  form  in  ava  has  been  preserved  by  virtue  of  its 
archaic  character.  In  words  forming  the  2'"1  part  of  a 
cpd.  we  have  ava,  while  the  absolute  form  of  the  same 
word  has  o.  See  e.g.  avakasa  ( — ")  >  okasa  (° — );avacara 
>ocaraka;  avatata;  avadata;  avabhasa;  avasana.  —  B. 
I.  the  proportion  in  the  words  before  us  (early  and  later) 
is  that  o  alone  is  found  in  65°/^  of  all  cases,  ava  alone 
in  24%)  and  ava  as  well  as  o  in  ii"/^.  The  proportion 
of  forms  in  ava  increases  as  the  books  or  passages  be- 
come later.  Restricted  to  the  older  literature  (the  4  NikSyas) 
are  the  foil,  forms  with  o:  okiri,  okkanti,  okkamali, 
okkhipati,  ogacchati,  ossajati.  —  (i)  The  Pali  form  (0°) 
shows  a  differentiation  in  meaning  against  the  later  Sanskrit 
forms  (ava°).  See  the  foil. : 

avakappan3  harnessing:  okappana  confidence; 

avakkanti  (not  Sk.):  okkanti  appearance; 


avakkhitta  thrown  down :  okkhitta  subdued ; 

avacara  sphere  of  motion :  ocaraka  spy ; 

avatiuna  descended:  otiqpa   affected  with  love; 

avaharali  to  move  down,  put  off:  oharati  to  steal. 
(2)  In  certain  secondary  verb-formations,  arisen  on  Pali 
grounds,  the  form  0°  is  used  almost  exclusively  pointing 
thus  to  a  clearly  marked  dialectical  development  of  Pali. 
Among  these  formations  are  Deminulives  in  °ka  usually ;  the 
Gerund  &  the  Infinitive  usually;  the  Cmisntives  throughout. 

II.  Ava  as  prefix  .[P.  ava  =  Vedic  ava  &  occasionally  o ; 
Av.  ava;  Lat.  au-  (aufero  =  avabharati,  aufugio  etc.); 
Obg.  u- ;  Oir.  o,  ua.  See  further  relations  in  Walde,  Lat. 
Wtb.  under  au].  —  Meaning.  (Rest:)  lower,  low  (opp. 
ut°,  see  e.  g.  uccSvaca  high  &  low,  and  below  III.  c), 
expld-  as  hettha  (DhA  iv.54  under  avaq)  or  adho  (ibid. 
153;  SnA  290).  —  (Motion:)  down,  downward,  away 
(down),  off;  e.g.  avasura  sun-down;  adv.  avaq  (q.  v., 
opp.  uddhaq).  —  (a)  ///.  away  from.,  off:  ava-kantati  to 
cut  off;  °gana  away  from  the  crowd ;  ^chindati  cut  off; 
"yiyati  fall  off;  °bhasati  shine  out,  elfulge;  "muiicati  take 
off;  °sittha  left  over.  —  down.,  out.,  over:  °kirati  pour 
down  or  out  over;  °khilta  thrown  down;  "gacchati  go 
down;  °gaheti  dip  down;  °tarati  descend;  "patita  fallen 
down;  °sajjati  emit;  °siiicati  pour  out  over;  "sidati  sink 
down.  —  (b)  jig.  down  in  connection  with  verbs  of  emo- 
tion (cp.  Lat.  de-  in  despico  to  despise,  lit.  look  down 
on),  see  ava-janati,  "bhata,  °manita,  "vajja,  °hasati.  — ■ 
away  from.,  i.e.  the  opposite  of,  as  equivalent  to  a  nega- 
tion and  often  taking  the  place  of  the  neg.  prefix  a" 
(an°),  e.  g.  in  avajaya  (=  ajaya),  "jata,  "mangala  (=  a°), 
°pakkhin,  °patta. 

Affinities  of  ava.  —  (a)  apa.  There  exists  an  exceed- 
ingly frequent  interchange  of  forms  with  apa°  and  ava°, 
the  historical  relation  of  which  has  not  yet  been  thoroughly 
investigated.  For  a  comparison  of  the  two  the  BSk.  forms 
are  indispensable,  and  often  afford  a  clue  as  to  the  nature 
of  the  word  in  question.  See  on  this  apa  a  and  cp.  the 
foil,  words  under  ava:  avakata,  "karoti,  °khalita,  °anga, 
ottappa,  avattha,  °nlta,  "dana,  °pivati,  °rundhati,  °lekhati, 
°vadati,  "varaka,  °sakkati,  avassaya,  avasseti,  "hita,  ava- 
puriyati,  avekkhati.  —  (b)  abhi.  The  similarity  between 
abhi  &  ava  is  seen  from  a  comparison  of  meaning  abhi 
II.  b  and  ava  ir.  a.  The  two  prefixes  are  practically  syno- 
nymous in  the  foil,  words:  °kankhati,  °kamati,  "kipya, 
°khipati,  "maddati,  °rata,  °lambati,  "lekheti,  "lepana, 
"sincati.  —  (c)  The  contrary  of  ava  is  ut  (cp.  above  11.2). 
Among  the  freq.  contrast-pairs  showing  the  two,  like  E. 
up  &  down,  are  the  foil.  ukkaqsSvakaqsa,  uggaman-ogga- 
mana,  uccavaca,  uUangheti-olangheti,  ullittAvalitta;  ogilitui)- 
uggilitui),  onaman-unnamana.  Two  other  combns-  founded 
on  the  same  principle  (of  intensifying  contrast)  are  chid- 
dSvacchidda  and  ava°  in  contrast  with  vi°  in  olamba- 
vilamba,  olugga-vilugga. 

AvaQ  (adv.)  [Vedic  avak  &  avaq]  the  prep,  ava  in  adv. 
use,  down,  downward;  in  C.  often  expl^'  by  adho.  Rarely 
absolute,  the  only  passage  found  so  far  being  Sn  685 
(avaij  sari  he  went  down,  v.  1.  avasari,  expl^.  by  otari 
SnA  486).  Opp.  uddhaq  (above,  up  high).  Freq.  in  cpd. 
avaijsira  (adj.)  head  downward  (-}-  uddhagpada  feet  up), 
a  position  characteristic  of  beings  in  Niraya  (Purgatory), 
e.g.  S  1.48;  Sn  248  (patanti  satta  nirayaij  avarjsira  := 
adhogata-sisa  SnA  290);  Vv  52^'  (of  Revati, -)- uddhoi)- 
pada);  Pv  iv.i";  J  1.233  (+  uddhapada);  IV.103  (nirayaq 
vajanti  yatha  adhammo  patito  avaijsiro);  Nd'  404  (uddhai)- 
pada  -f);  DhA  iv.153  (gloss  adhosira).  —  On  avaij"  cp. 
further  avakkara,  avakaroti,  avekkhipati. 

AvakaQSa  [fr.  ava-karsati;  on  qs:  *rs  cp.  haijsati:  harsati] 
dragging  down,  detraction,  abasement,  in  cpd.  ukkai)- 
savak°  lifting  up  &  pulling  down,  raising  and  lowering, 
rise  &  fall  D  1.54. 

Avakankhati  ( — °)  [ava  +  kankhati ;  cp.  Sk.  anu-kankjati] 
to  wish  for,  strive  after  S  iv.57  (n');  J  IV.371  (n');  V 
340  (n'),  348  (n'  s=  na  pattheti  C). 


Avakaddhati 


8i 


Avacaraka 


Avaka(}()hati  [^va  -f-  kaddhati,  cp.  avakassati  &  apakassati] 
Nett  4  (avakaddhayitva).  Pass,  avakaddhati  J  IV.415 
(hadayai)  me  a.  my  heart  is  weighed  down  =  sokena 
avakaddhiyali  C ;  v.l.  avakassati).  —  pp.  avakaddhita. 

Avakai)(}hita  [pp-  of  avakaddhati]  pulled  down,  dragged 
away   I)h.\  ill. 195. 

Avakata  =  apakata,  v.l.  at  It  89. 

Avakanta  [for  *avakatta,  Sk.  avakrtta;  pp.  of  avakantati, 
see  kanta*]  cut,  cut  open,  cut  off  J  IV.251  (galak'avakantai)). 

Avakantati  &  Okantati  (okk°)  [cp.  Sk.  avakrntati,  ava  -f 
kantati,  cp.  also  apakantati]  to  cut  off,  cut  out,  cut  away, 
carve  —  (ava:)  J  iv.155.  —  pp.  avakanta  & avakantita. 

Avakantlta  [pp.  of  avakantati]  cut  out  PvA   213. 

Avakappana  &  okappana  (f)  [ava  -f-  kappana]  prepara- 
tion, fixing  up,  esp.   harnessing  J   VI. 408. 

Avakaroti  [Sk.  apakaroti,  cp.  P.  apa"^]  „to  put  down",  to 
despise,  throw  away;  only  in  der,  avakara  &  avakarin.  - — 
pp.  avakata  (q.  v.),  —  See  ajso  avakaroti  &  cp.  avakirati  2. 

Avakassati  &  okassatl  [cp.  Sk.  avakarsati,  ava  +  krs; 
see  also  apakassati  c&  avakaddhati]  to  drag  down,  to  draw 
or  pull  away,  distract,  remove.  —  A  v.74r=Vin  11.204 
(-|-  vavakassati). 

Avakarakai)  (adv.)  [fr.  avakara]  throwing  away,  scattering 
about  Vin  II. 214. 

Avakarin  (adj.)  ( — ")  [fr.  avakara]  despising,  degrading, 
neglecting  Vbh  393  sq.  (an°). 

Avakasa  &  Okasa  [ava  -|-  kai  to  shine,  cp.  Sk.  nvakasa] 
I.  "appearance":  akkhuddavakaso  dassanaya  not  little  (or 
inferior)  to  behold  (of  appearance)  D  1. 114;  ariyavakasa 
appearing  noble  or  having  the  app.  of  an  Aryan  J 
V.87 ;  katavakasa  put  into  appearance  Vv  22'.  —  2.  "op- 
portunity": kata°  given  leave  D  1.276  Sn  1030;  anava- 
kasakarin  not  giving  occasion  Miln  383.  —  anavakasa 
not  having  a  chance  or  opportunity  (to  happen),  impos- 
sible; always  in  sicr.  phrase  atthanar)  etag  anavaka.so  Vin 
11.199;  A  1.26;  V.169;   Pug   II,   12;  PvA  28. 

Avakirati  &  Okiratl  [ava  +  kirati]  I.  to  pour  down  on, 
to  pour  out  over;  aor.  avakiri  PvA  86;  ger.  °kiritva  J 
V.144.  —  2.  to  cast  out,  reject,  throw  out;  aor.  avakiri 
Vv  305=48*  (v.l.  °kari;  VvA  126  expis  by  chaddesi  vina- 
sesi).  —  Pass,  avakiriyati  Pv  iii.i'"  (=  chaddiyati  PvA 
174);  grd.  °kiriya  (see  sep.).  See  also  apakirituna.  pp. 
okinna. 

Avakiriya  [grd  of  avakirati]  to  be  cast  out  or  thrown 
away;  rejectable,  low,  contemptible  J  v. 143  (taken  by 
C.  as  ger.  =  avakiritva). 

Avakujja  (adj.)  [ava  -)-  kujjp,  cp.  B.Sk.  avakubja  MVastu 
1.29,  avakubjaka  ibid.  213;  11. 41 2]  face  downward,  head 
first,  prone,  bent  over  (opp.  ukkujja  &  uttana)  J  1.13  = 
Bu   11.52;  J   V.295;  VI. 40;  Pv   IV. 108;  PvA   178. 

-paniia  (adj.)  one  whose  reason  is  turned  upside  down 
(like  an  upturned  pot,  i.e.  empty)  A  1130;  Pug  31 
(=  adhomukha-pafiiia  Pug  A   214). 

Avakkanta  ( — ")  [pp.  of  last]  entered  by,  beset  with,  over- 
whelmed by  (instr.)  S  111.69  (dukkha",  sukha°  and  an°). 

Avakkanti  (f.)  [fr.  avakkamati]  entry,  appearance,  coming 
down  into,  opportunity  for  rebirth  S  11.66  (niimarupassa); 
111.46  (paiicannaq  indriyanai));  Pug  13  (^  okkanti  nibbatti 
patubhavo  Pug  A  184);  Kvu  142  (namarupassa) ;  Miln 
123  (gabbhassa). 

Avakkama  [fr.  avakkamati]  entering,  appearance  J  v.330 
(gabbhassa). 


Avakkamati  &  okkamati  [ava  -f  kamati  fr.  kram]  to  ap- 
proach, to  enter,  go  into  or  near  to,  to  fall  into,  appear 
in,  only  in  ger.  (poetically)  avakamma  J  111.480  (v.l.  apa°). 

Avakkara  [Sk.  avaskara  faeces,  fr.  avaij  -)-  karoti]  throwiitg 
away,  refuse,  sweepings;  only  in  cpd.  °pati  a  bowl  for 
refuse,  slop  basin,  ash-bin  Vin  1.157,  352  ;  II.216;  M  1.207  ; 
DhA  1.305. 

Avakkhalita  [pp.  of  avakkhal^ti,  Caus.  of  k§al]  washed 
off,  taken  away   from,  detracted  DA  1.66  (v.l.  apa"). 

Avakkhitta  &  okkhitta  [pp.  of  avakkhipati]  i.  [=:Sk. 

avaksipta]  thrown  down,  flung  down,  cast  down,  dropped; 
thrown  out,  rejected,  (ava:)  M  1.296  (ujjhita  -f);  DA  1.281 
(an°),  289  (pinda);  PvA  174  (pipda).  2.  [=  Sk.  utksipta  ?] 
thrown  off,  gained,  produced,  got  (cp.  uppadita),  in  phrase 
sed'  avakkhitta  gained  by  sweat  A  11.67 ;  ii>-45- 

Avakkhipati  &  Okkhipati  [ava  +  khipati;  cp.  Sk.  ava- 
ksipati]  to  throw  down  or  out,  cast  down,  drop;  fig. 
usually  appld  to  the  eyes  =  to  cast  down,  hence  trans- 
ferred to  the  other  senses  and  used  in  meaning  of  "to 
keep  under,  to  restrain,  to  have  control  over"  (cp.  also 
avakkhayati),  aor.  "khipi  DA  1.268  (bhusaq,  v.l.  avakkhasi). 

Avakkhipana  (nt.)  [fr.  avakkhipati]  throwing  down,  putting 
down  J   1. 163. 

AvagaCChatl  [ava  -f  gacchati]  to  come  to,  approach,  visit 
(cp.  Vedic  avagacchati)  PvA  87. 

AvagaQ^a  (-karaka)  (adj.)  [ava  -|-  gapda°]  "making  a 
swelling",  i.  e.  puffing  out  the  cheeks,  stuffing  the  cheeks, 
full  (when  eating);  only  nt.  °n  as  adv.  after  the  manner 
or  in  the  way  of  stuffing  etc.  Vin  11.214;  iv.196. 

Avagata  [pp.  of  avagacchati]  at  PvA  222  is  uncertain 
reading;  the  meaning  is  „known,  understood"  (afinata 
Pv  iv.l");  perhaps  we  should  read  avikata  or  adhigata 
(so  v.l.  BE). 

Avagahati  &  Ogaliati  [ava  +  gahati]  to  plunge  or  enter 
into,  to  be  absorbed  in  (ace.  &  loc.)  Vism  678 ;  (vipas- 
sanavidhiq)  Sdhp  370,  383. 

Avaguottiana  (adj.)  (— °)  [fr.  oguntheti]  covering  Sdhp  314. 

Avaggaha  [Sk.  avagraha]  hindrance,  impediment,  used  at 
DA  1.95  as  syn.  for  drought  (dubutthika). 

Avanga  see  apanga. 

Avaca  (adj.)  [der.  fr.  ava  after  the  analogy  of  ucca  y  ul] 
low,  only  in  comb",  uccavaca  (pi.)  high  and  low,  see 
ucca.  KvuA  38. 

Avacana  (nt.)  [a  -f  vacana]  "non-word",  i.  e.  the  wrong 
word  or  expression  J   1.410. 

Avacara  ( — °)  (n. — adj.)  [ava  -f  car,  also  BSk.  avaeara  in 
same  sense,  e.g.  antahpuravacara  the  inmates  of  the  harem 
Jtm  210]  (a)  (adj.)  living  in  or  with,  moving  in  D  1. 206 
(santika"  one  who  stays  near,  a  companion);  fig.  dealing 
or  familiar  with,  at  home  in  A  11.189  (atakka°);  IV.314 
(parisa°);  J  1.60  (taja"  one  conversant  with  music,  a  mu- 
sician, see  tala');  11.95  (sangama°);  Miln  44  (id.  and 
yoga°).  —  (b)  (n.)  sphere  (of  moving  or  activity),  realm, 
plane  (of  temporal  existence);  only  as  t.t.  in  kamavacara 
rupavacara  arupavacara  or  the  3  realms  of  sense-desires, 
form  and  non-form:  kama°  D  1.34  ("deva);  Dhs43l  (as 
adj.);  rupa"  Pug  37;  arupa°  Pug  38;  Ps  1.83,  84,  loi; 
Dhs  A  387 ;  PvA  1 38,  1 63  ;  to  be  omitted  in  Dhs  1 268,  1 278. 

Avacaraka  &  OCaraka(adj. — n.)  [fr.  avacara]  I.  only  in  cpd. 
kamivacarika  as  adj.  to  kJmdvacara,  belonging  to  the 
sphere  of  sense  expcriencies,  Sdhp.  254.  —  2.  Late  form 
of  ocaraka,  spy,  only  in  C.  on  Th  I,  315  ff.  quoted  in 
Brethren   189,  n   3.  Occurs  in  BSk  (Divy   127). 

1—7 


Avacarana 


82 


Avadiyati 


Avacarana  (nt.)  [fr.  avacaiati  l]  being  familiar  with,  dealing 
with,  occupation  J   n.95. 

Avacuttha  2nd  pret.  of  vac,  in  prohib  form  niS  evaij  ava- 
cuttha  do  not  speak  thus  J  vi.72;   DhA  IV.228. 

Avacchidda  ( — ")  (adj.)  [ava  -)-  chidda]  perforated,  only 
in  redupl.  (intensive)  cpd.  chiddavacchidda  perforated 
all  over,  nothing  but  holes  J  111.491  ;  DhA  1.122.  284, 
319.  Cp.  chidda-vicchidda. 

Avacchedaka  (  — ")  (adj  )  [ava  +  cheda  4-  I'a]  cutting  off, 
as  nt.  'q  adv.  in  phrase  kabaldvacchedakat)  after  the 
manner  of  cutting  off  mouthfuls  (of  food)  Vin  11. 214; 
IV. 196;  cp.  asSvacchedika  whose  hope  or  longing  has 
been  cut  off  or  destroyed  Vin  i.  259. 

Avajaya  [ava  -f-  jaya,  cp.  apajita]  defeat  DhA  11.228  (v.l. 
for    r.  ajaya). 

Avajata  (adj.)  [ava-f-jata;  cp.  B.Sk.  avajata  in  meaning 
misljorn,  miscarriage]  low-born,  of  low  or  base  birth,  fig. 
of  low  character  (opp.  abhijata)  Sn  664  (=:  buddhassa 
avajataputta  SnA  479);  It  63;  Miln  359. 

Avajanati  [ava-f  jfig]  l.  to  deny  Vin  11.85;  A  in. 164  — 
Pug  65.  —  2.  (later)  to  despise  DhA  ■:'.l6;  PvA  175  (grd. 
"janitabba)  —  Of  short  stem-form  na  are  found  the  foil : 
grd.  avanfieyya  I'vA  175,  and  with  0°;  grd.  onatabba 
PvA   195;  pp.  avanata,  besides  avannata. 

AvajiyatI  [ava  -f-  jiyati ;  Sk.  avajiryate]  to  be  diminished, 
to  be  lost,  be  undone  J  1.313  (jilai)  a;  v.l.  avaj;jy°);  Dh 
179  (jitaij  a  =  dujjitar)  hoti  DhA  111.197). 

Avajja  (adj.)  [Sk.  avadya,  seemigly  a  -4-  vadya,  but  in  realiiy 
a  der.  fr.  ava.  According  to  Childers  =  Sk.  avarjya  from 
vraj,  thus  meaning  "not  to  be  shunned,  not  forbidden". 
This  interpret"  is  justified  by  context  of  Dh  318,  319. 
The  P.  commentator  refers  it  to  ava  +  vad  (for  *ava-vadya) 
in  sense  of  to  blame,  cp.  apavadati]  low,  inferior,  biamable, 
bad,  deprecable  Dh  318,  319;  Dhs  1160.  More  fig.  in 
neg.  form  anavajja  blameless,  faultless  D  i.7o(=  anindita 
DA  1.1S3);  A  l!.26  =  It  I02;  Sn  47  (°bhojin  carrying 
on  a  blameless  mode  of  livelihood,  see  Nd-  39),  263 
(=  anindita  agarahita  KhA  I40):  Ps  II. 116,  170;  Pug 
30,  41,  58;  Sdhp  436.  Opp.  savajja. 

Avajjata  (f.)  [abstr.  to  prec),  only  neg.  an°  blamelessnses, 
fauUle.:sness  Pug  25,  41  ;  Dhs   1349. 

Avajjha  (adj.)  [grd  of  a  -f  vadhati,  Sk.  vadhya,  vadh]  not 
to  be  killed  or  destroyed,  inviolable  Sn  288;  J  v.49;  vi. 132. 

Avancana  (adj.)  [a  -|-  vancana  from  Vafic]  not  (even)  tot- 
tering, i.e.  unfit  for  any  motion  (esp.  walking),  said  of 
crippled  feet  J  1.214  =  Cp  m-g'". 

Avaiina  (adj.)  [to  avaiina]  despised,  despicable  Pv  ni.l'' 
(=  avaufieyya  avajanitabba  PvA   175). 

Avafiflatti  (f.)  [ava  -f-  iiatti  =  Sk.  %vajiiapti,  fr.  ava  + 
jna]  only  as  neg.  an"  the  fact  of  not  being  despised, 
inferior  or  surpassed,  egotism,  pride,  arrogance  It  72; 
Vbh  350,  356;  °kama  (adj.)  wishing  not  to  be  surpassed, 
uuvilling  to  be  second,  wanting  to  be  praised  A  11.240; 
IV. I    sq. 

Avanna  (f.)  [Sk.  avajB.!,  fr.  ava  -{-  jna]  contempt,  disregard, 
disrespect  J  1.257  (°ya). 

Avaiinata  (adj.)  [pp.  of  avajSnati]  despised,  treated  with 
contempt  PvA  135  (an°);  Sdhp  88,  go. 

Avatagsaka  (=  vat")  see  Vin  Tixts  11.347. 

Avatthana  (nt.)  [Sk.  avasthana]  position,  standing  place 
J   1.50S;  PvA  286. 


Avatthlta  (ad.)  [Sk.  avasthita,  ava  -j-  thita]  "standing  down" 
=  standing  up,  firm,  fixed,  settled,  lasting  Th  i,  1140. 
Usually  ueg.  an°  unsettled,  unsteady ;  not  lasting,  chan- 
geable Dh  38  (-citta;  cp.  DhA  1.308  cittaij  ihavaraij 
natthi);  PvA  87  (=  na  sassata  not  lasting  for  ever). 

Avatthitata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  prec]  steadiness,  only  as  neg. 
an"  unsteadiness,  fickleness  ThA  259. 

Avatthlti  (f.)  [Sk.  avasthiti]  (firm)  position,  posture,  stead- 
fastness S  V.22S  ;  Dhs   II,  570. 

Ava(j()hi  (f.)  [a  +  vaddhi]  "non-growth",  decay  Dh.\  HI.33S  ; 
C  on  A  III. 76  (cp.  apajaha). 

Ava^t^  (adj.)  [a -|- vaiita]  without  a  stalk  J  V.155. 

AvaOO^  [a  +  vaniia]  blame,  reproach,  fault  D  1. 1  (=  dosa 
ninda  DA  1.37);  It  67;  Pug  48,  59. 

Avannaniya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  a  -f  vanneli]  indescribable  J  V.282. 

Avatagsa  see  vatar<saka. 

Avatata  &  otata  [ava  -|-  tata,  pp.  of  tan]  stretched  over, 
covered,  spre.id  over  with  Vv  64^  ( — ");  Vv.\  276  (= 
chadita). 

Avatitthati  [ava  -|-  titthati]  to  abide,  linger,  stand  still. 
D  1. 251  r=:  S  IV. 322  =  A  V.299  (tatra");  S  I.25  (v.l. 
otitthati);  Th.  t,  21;  J  n.62 ;  IV.208  (aor.  avatthasi).  — 
pp.  avat^bita  (q.  v.). 

Avationa  &  Oti^lja  [pp.  of  starati]  fallen  into,  affected 
with  ( — °),  as  ava"  rare  late  or  poetical  form  of  o",  e.  g. 
J  V.98  (issa°).   See  otinna. 

Avattha'  [der.  uncertain]  aimless  (of  carika,  a  bhikkhu's 
wandering,  going  on  tour)  A  II1.171   (C.  avavatthika). 

Avattha'^  [Sk.  apasta,  apa  -f-  asta,  pp.  of  as^]  thrown  away 
J   V.302  (=  chaddita  C). 

AvattharaQa  (nt.)  [fr.  avattharati]  setting  in  array,  deploying 
(of  an  army)  J   U.104  (of  a  robber-band),   336. 

Avattharati  [ava  -j-  tharati,  stfj  to  strew,  cover  over  or 
up  J  1.74  (°amilna  ppr.),  255  (°itvii  ger.);  IV.84;  Davs 
1,38.  —  pp.  otthata  Cp.  pariy". 

Avatthara^a  (nt.)  =  ayattharana  DA  1.274. 

Avatthu  (&°  ka)  (adj.)  [a  -f-  vatthu]  groundless,  unfounded 
(lig)  Vin  11.241;  J  1.440  (°kai]  vacanaq).  For  lit  meaning 
see  vatthu. 

Avadata  (^odata)   Davs  111.14  (matri  causa). 

Avadana  sec  apadana. 

Avadaniya   (adj.)    [fr.    avadana    cutting    off;    ava  -\-  da'^   to 

cut]  stingy,  niggardly  Sn  774  (=  Nd'  36  which  expU. 
as  follows:  avaq  gacchanti  ti  pi  avadaniya;  maccharino 
pi  vuccanti  avadaniya;  buddhanai)  vacanai)  n'adiyanti  ti 
avadaniya.  Sn  A  516  condenses  this  expl"-  into  the  foil.: 
.avangamanataya  maccharitaya  buddhadlnaq  vacanaq  ana- 
diyanalaya  ca  av.adaniya). 

Avadapana  (cleansing):  see  vodSpana. 

Avadapeti  (to  deal  out)  only  BSk  pary°   Divy  202. 

Avadayatl  [denom.  fr.  avada  in  same  meaning  as  anudda, 
to  da' :  see  dayati-j  to  have  pity  on,  to  feel  sorry  for 
J  IV. 178    (bhutanaij    navadiiyissaij,    gloss    n'Snukampiyaq). 

Avadiyati  [Sk.  avadlryati,  ava  -f-  <Jr',  drnati,  see  etym. 
under  dari]  to  burst,  split  open  J  VI.  183  (;=:  bhijjati  C.) 
see  also  uddiyati, 


Avadehaka 


83 


Avasitthaka 


Avadehaka  ( — °)  (adj)  [ava  +  deha  +  ka  but  more  likely 
direct  fr.  ava  -f-  dlh]  in  the  idiom  udaravadehakat]  bhuri- 
jati,  to  eat  ones  fill  M  1. 102;  Th  i,  935.  Vism  33  has 
udaravadehaka-bhojana,  a  heavy  meal. 

Avadharai]ia  (nt.)  [Cp.  Sk.  avadhsrana,  fr.  ava  +  dhf] 
calling  attention  to,  affirmation,  emphasis;  as  t.t.  used  by 
C's  in  explanation  of  evai]  at  DA  1.27;  and  of  kho  at 
PvA   II,   18. 

AvadhI  3  sg.  aor.  ofvadhati.  —  At  DhA  11.73  avadhi  =z  odhi. 

Avanata  see  avanata. 

Avanati  ( — °)  (f.)  [fr.  avanamati]  stooping,  bending,  bowing 
down,  humiliation  Miln  387  (unnat'avanati). 

Avani  (f.)  [Vedic  avani]  bed  or  course  of  a  river;  earth, 
ground  Davs  IV.5. 

AvapakSsati  [ava  +  pa  +  kasati  =  kassali,  fr.  kf?]  is  a 
doubtful  compd-  of  kabsati,  the  combd-  ava  +  pa  occurring 
only  in  this  word.  In  all  likelihood  it  is  a  distortion  of 
Tavakassatl  (vi  -|-  ava  -f-  kassali),  supplementing  the  ordi- 
nary apakassati.  See  meaning  &  further  discussion  under 
apakasati  —  Vin  II. 204  (apakasati -f- ;  v.l.  avapakassati; 
Bdhgh.  in  expl"-  on  p.  325  has  apapakasati  which  seems, 
to  imply  (a)vavakassati);   A  III. 145  sq.  (avapakasitui)). 

Avapatta  see  opatta. 

Avapayin  ( — ")  (adj.)  [cp.  avapivati]  coming  for  a  drink, 
drinking  J  1. 163. 

Avapivati  [ava  -|-  pa,  cp.  apapibati]  to  drink  from  J  1.163. 

Avabujjhati  ( — °)  [Cp.  BSk.  avabudhyate]  to  understand 
A  IV. 66  =  It  83  (n^avabujjhati);  A  IV.98  (id.)  J  1.378  = 
III. 387   (interchanging  with  anubujjhati  at  the  latter  pass). 

Avabodha  [ava  -f-  bodha]  perception,  understanding,  full 
knowledge  Sn  A  509  (sacca°).  — •  Neg.  an°  not  awakened 
to  the  truth   Vv   82''  (=ananubodha  VvA   319). 

Avabodhatl  ( — °)  [cp.  Sk.  avabodhati]  to  realise,  perceive, 
pay  attention  to  J   111,151   nava°). 

Avabhasa  [later  form  of  obhasa]  Only  in  cpd.  gambhlra- 
vabhaao  D  11.55,  looking  deep.  Same  cpd.  at  A  11.105  = 
I'ug  46  has  obhasa. 

Avabhasaka  ( — °)  (adj.)  [fr.  avabhasa]  shining,  shedding 
light  on,  illuminating  Sdhp  14. 

Avabhasita  ( — °)  [late  form  of  obhasita]  shining  with, 
resplendent  Sdhp  590. 

Avabhuiijati  [ava  +  bhuHjatl]  to  eat,  to  eat  up  J  111.272 
(inf.  "bholtui)),  273. 

Avabhuta  (adj.)  [ava  -|-  bhata,  pp.  of  ava  -f  bhu]  "come 
down",  despised,  low,  unworthy  M  11. 210. 

Avamangala  (adj.)  [ava  4- mangala,  ava  here  in  privative 
function]  of  bad  omen,  unlucky,  infaustus  (opp.  abhiman- 
gala);  nt.  bad  luck,  ill  omen  J  1.372,  402;  11.197;  VI. lo, 
424;  DhA  111.123;  PvA  261.  Cf.  next. 

Avamanfiati  [Sk.  avamanyate]  to  slight,  to  disregard,  despise 
DhA  1. 170;  PvA  37,  175;  Sdhp  271.  —  pp.  Caus. 
avamanita. 

Avamangalla  (adj.)  [fr.  avamangala]  of  bad  omen,  nt.  any- 
thing importune,  unlucky  J   1.446. 

Avamana  &  omana  [fr.  ava  -f  man,  think]  disregard,  dis- 
respect, contempt  J   11.386;  111.423;  v. 384.  Cp.  next. 

Avamanana  (nt.)  [fr.  avamana]  =  avamana  J  1.22. 


Avamaneti  [Caus.  of  avamannati]  to  despise  j  v.246.  — 
pp.  avamanita  PvA  36. 

Avaya  only  in  neg.  anavaya. 

Avayava  [Der"  uncertain.  Cp.  mediaeval  Sk.  avayava]  limb, 
member,  constituent,  part  VvA  53  (sarira°  =  gatta).  168, 
201,  276;  PvA  211  (sanra°  =  gatta),  251  (mul°  the  fibres 
of  the  root).  As  t.  t.  g.  at  Sn.\  397.  In  the  commentaries 
avayava  is  often  used  where  arjga  would  have  been 
used  in  the  older  texts. 

Avarajjhatl  (— ")  [ava  +  rajjhati  of  radh,  cp.  Sk.  avarad- 
hyate]  to  neglect,  fail,  spurn  Th  1,167;]  iv.428  (v.l.  °rujjh°). 

Avaruddha  [fr.  avarundhati]  I.  Doubtful  reading  at  Vin 
IV. 181,  apparently  meaning  'in  revolt,  out  of  hand'  (of 
slaves)  —  2.  [late  form  of  oruddha]  restrained  Sdhp.  592. 

Avaruddhaka  [avruddha  -|-  ka]  subdued,  expelled,  banished 
J   VI.575;   Dpvs  I.21   (Np). 

Avaruddhatl  [Sk.  aparundhati ;  ava  -|-  ruddhati  of  rudh] 
to  expel,  remove,  banish  J  VI. 505  (=  niharati  C),  515. 
See  also  avarundhati. 

Avarundhati  [ava  -f-  rundhati.  Only  referred  to  by  Dhp.  in 
his  Cy  (ThA  271)  on  oruddha]  to  put  under  restraint, 
to  put  into  one's  harem  as  subsidiary  wife. 

Avalambatl  [^=  olambati].  Only  in  late  verse.  To  hang 
down.  Pv  ll.l'8;  10^.  Ger.  avalamba  (for  °bya)  Pv  III. 3'; 
cp.  olubbha. 

Avalitta  ( — °)  [Sk.  avalipta,  pp.  of  ava-limpati]  besmeared; 
in  cpd.  uUittavalitta  "smeared  up  &  down"  i.e.  plastered 
inside  &  outside  A  I.IOI. 

Avalekhati  [ava  +  lekhati,  Hkh,  Sk.  avalikhati]  to  scrape 
off  Vin  II. 221   (v.l.  apa°). 

Avalekhana'  (nt.)  [fr.  avalekhati]  (a)  scraping,  scraping 
off  Vin  II. 141  (°pidhara),  221  ("kattha).  (b)  scratching  in, 
writing  down  J  IV.402,  (°sattha  a  chisel  for  engraving 
letters). 

Avalekhana-  (nt.)  v.  1.  for  apalekhana. 

Avalepana  (— °)  (nt.)  [fr.  ava -flip]  smearing,  daubing, 
plastering  M  1.385  (pita°);  Sn  194  (kayo  taca-maqs'  ava- 
lepano  the  body  plastered  with  skin  &  flesh). 

Avasa  (adj.)  [a  -|-  vasa]  powerless  Sdhp   290. 

Avasafa  &  Osata  [Sk.  apasrta,  cp.  also  samavasrta,  pp.  01 
ava  -(-  srl  withdrawn,  gone  away ;  one  who  has  left  a 
community  &  gone  over  to  another  sect,  a  renegade  Vin 
IV.216,  217  (==  tilthayatanai]   saijkata). 

AvasaratI  [ava  -f  Sf]  to  go  down,  to  go  away  (to)  Sn  685 
(v.  1.  BB.   T.  avaijsari). 

Avasana  ( — ")  [for  osana]  (nt.)  stopping  ceasing;  end, 
finish,  conclusion  J  1.87  (bhattakicc-ivasane  at  the  end 
of  the    meal);   PvA  76  (id.). 

Avasaya  [fr.  avaseti]  stopping,  end,  finish  Th  2,  12  (= 
avasanai)  nitthanai)  ThA  19).  But  the  id.  p.  at  Dhp  218 
has  anakkhate. 

Avaslficanaka  (— °)  (adj.)  [fr.  osincati]  pouring  over  (act. 
&  med.),  overflowing  J  1.400  (an°). 

Avaslttha  (sic  &  not  osittha)  [pp.  of  avasissati,  Sk.  avasista] 
left,  remaining,  over  S  II. 133;  J  1138;  v,339;  VvA  66, 
pi.  avasittha  all  who  are  left,  the  others  PvA  165  (jana). 

Avasitthaka    (adj.)   [fr.  avasittha]  remaining,  left  J  111.311. 

1—7* 


Avasitia 


84 


Avikkhepa 


Avasltta  ( — °)  [pp-  of  osificati]  besprinkled,  anointed,  con- 
secrated,  only    in    phrase   raja  khattiyo  muddha7asitto 
of  a   properly    consecrated    king   (see  also  khattiya)  D  i. 
69;  11.227;  111.64;   Pug  56;  DA  1. 1 82  (T.  muddhavassita,    | 
V.  1.  "abhisitta);  etc.  —  See  also  abhisitta.  1 

Avasin  (adj.-n.)  [a  -f-  vasin  fr.  \ai]  not  having  control 
over  oneself,  D  11.275. 

AvasiSSati  [Sk.  avasisyate.  Pass,  of  ava  -|-  SiS ;  but  expl<^- 
by  Kern,  Tom.  s.  v.  as  fut  of  avasidati]  to  be  left  over, 
to  remain,  in  phrase  yaq  pamana-katai]  kammai]  na  taij 
tatravasissati  D  1.251;  A  v.299  =  S  iv.322;  J  11.61  (see 
ex  pi",  on  p.  62).  Also  in  the  phrases  taco  ca  naharu 
ca  atthi  ca  avasissatu  sarire  upasussatu  mai)sa-lohita;) 
M  1.481;  A  1.50;  S  11.28,  and  sarTrani  avasissanti  S  11. 
83.  With  the  latter  phrases  cp.  avasussati. 

AvaSi  metri  causa  for  avasi,  a  -f  vasi,  aor.  of  vas*  to  stop, 
stay,  rest  J  v.66  (ma  avasi). 

Avasussati  [Sk.  '••ava-susyati  of  §us]  to  dry  up,  to  wither; 
in  later  quotations  of  the  old  kamai]  taco  ca  naharu 
ca  atthi  ca  avasussatu  (upasussatu  sarire  maqsalohitai)) 
J  1. 71,  no;  Sdhp  46.  It  is  a  later  spelling  for  the  older 
avasissatu  see  Trenckner  (M  1.569).  —  fut.  avasucchati 
(=  Sk.  S'^soksyati,  fut.  of  Intens.)  J  vi.550  (v.  1.  BB 
"sussati;  C.  avasucchissati). 

AvaSUra  [ava  -j-  sura;  ava  here  in  function  of  *avai)S  see 
ava  11]  sundown,  sunset,  ace.  °g  as  adv.  at  or  with  sun- 
down J   V.56  (anavasurar)  metrically). 

Avasesa'  [Sk.  avasesa,  fr.  ava  -|-  SIS,  cp.  avasissati]  remainder, 
remaining  part;  only  in  cpds.  an"  (adj.)  without  any  re- 
mainder, i.  e.  fully,  completely  M  1.220  =  A  v.347 
(°dohin);  A  1.20  sq.,  88;  Sn  146;  Pug  17;  Dhs  363, 
553;  SnA  417  ("pharana);  PvA  71  ("ato,  adv.  altogether, 
not  leaving  anything  out);  &  savasesa  leaving  something 
over,  having  something  left  A  1.20  sq.,  88;  Pv  III. 5' 
(jivita"  having  still  a  little  life  left). 

Avasesa^  (adj.)  [see  prec]  remaining,  left  Sn  694  (ayu 
avaseso);  J  111. 19;  Vbh  107  (tanhS  ca  avasesa  ca  kilesa); 
PvA  19  (avasesa  ca  iiataka  the  rest  of  the  relatives),  21 
(avasesa  parisa),  201  (atthi-tacamatt'  avasesa-sarira  with  a 
body  on  which  nothing  but  skin  &  bones  were  left),  206 
(atthi-sanghatamatf  avasesa-sarira).  —  nt.  (as  pred.)  °I) 
what  is  left  FvA  52  (app'  avasesaq);  KhA  245  (n'  atthi 
tesaq  avasesaq). 

Avasesaka  (adj.)  [fr.  avasesa'^]  being  left,  overflowing,  ad- 
ditional, more  J   1.400  (an°);  Dpvs  IV.45. 

Avassa  (adj.)  [a  +  va§]  against  one's  will,  inevitable  J  i. 
19  ("bhavin);  V.319  ^°gamita).  Usually  as  nt.  °r)  adv. 
inevitably  (cp.  BSk.  avasyai)  Divy  347 ;  Av.  S  1.209  ^tc.) 
J   III. 271;  DA  1.263;  Sdhp  293. 

Avassakat)  (adv.)  [see  avassa]  inevitably  Dpvs  IX.  1 3. 

Avassajati  &  ossajati  [ava  +  Sfj,  perhaps  ud  +  Sfj  = 
Sk.  utsrjati,  although  the  usual  Vedic  form  is  avasrjati. 
The  form  ossajati  puzzled  the  BSk.  writers  in  their  sans- 
kritisation  apotsrjati  =  apa  -f-  ut  +  Sfj  Divy  203]  to  let 
loose,  let  go,  send  off,  give  up,  dismiss,  release  (ava) : 
J  IV.425;   V.487  (aor.  avassaji  read  for  avissaji). 

Avassana  (nt.)  [a  +  vassana,  Sk.  vasana  of  vSS  to  bleat] 
not  bleating  J  iv.251. 

Avassaya  [Sk.  *avasraya  for  the  usual  apasraya,  see  P. 
apassaya']  support,  help,  protection,  refuge  J  1.2  n;  11. 
197;  IV. 167;  Miln  160;  DhA  11.267;  IV.198;  PvA  5,  113. 

AvaSSava  [ava  -f-  sava,  Sk.  "srava  fr.  sfU  to  flow]  outflow, 
effect,  only  neg.  anassava  no  further  effect  Vin  11.89; 
M  1.93;  11.246;  A  111.334  sp. 


Avasseti  [ava  -f-  S  -[-  Sri,  for  the  usual  'apasrayati;  see 
apasseti]  to  lean  against,  to  depend  on,  find  shelter  in 
(loc.)  J  11.80  (aor.  avassayiq  ^  vasaq  kappesiq  C).  — 
pp.  avassita. 

AvaSSavana  (nt.)  [fr.  ava  -|-  Caus.  of  sru  to  flow]  straining, 
filtering  (?)  J  II.2S8. 

Avassita  [for  apassila,  Sk.  apasrita]  depending  on,  dealing 
with  J  V.375.  See  apassita. 

AvaSSUta  (adj.)  [Sk.  *avasruta,  pp.  of  ava  -)-  sru,  cp.  avas- 
sava]  I.  (lit.)  flowing  out  or  down,  oozing,  leaking  J  IV. 
20.  —  2.  (fig.)  (cp.  anvassava  &  asava)  filled  with  desire, 
lustful  (opp.  anaVassuta,  q.  v.)  Vin  11.236;  S  iv.70,  184 
(an°);  A  1.261,  262  (an°);  11.240;  iv.128,  201;  Sn  63 
(an");  Pug  27,  36;  Dpvs  11.5  (T.  reads  avassita).  — 
Neg.  anavassuta:  i.  not  leaking,  without  a  leak  J  iv.20 
(nava  :^  udaka-pavesan'  abhavena  a.  C).  —  2.  free  from 
leakage,  i.  e.  from  lust  or  moral  intoxication  Dh  39  (°citta) ; 
Sn  63  (see  expH-  in  detail  at  Nd'  40);  SnA  116  (= 
kilesa-anvassava-virahita). 

Avaha^a  [pp.  of  avaharati]  taken  away,  stolen  Miln  46,  47. 

Avaharaija  ( — °)  [fr.  avaharati  in  both  meanings]  taking 
away,   removal;    theft    PvA    47    (sataka°),   92  (soka°). 

Avaharati  &  oharati  [ava  +  hf]  to  steal  j  1.384;  PvA 

47    (avahari    vatthaq),    86  (id.,  =  apanudi).  —  pp.  ava- 
hata  (q.  v.). 

Avatiasati  [ava  -f-  has]  to  laugh  at,  deride,  mock  J  V.1 1 1 
(afiiiamaiiiiai));  PvA   178.  —  aor.  avahasi  J  IV. 41 3. 

Avahara  [fr.  avaharati]  taking,  acquiring,  acquisition  Vin 
v.  1 29  (paiica  avahara,  viz.  theyya°,  pasayha°,  parikappa°, 
paticchanna",  kusa°). 

Avahiyati  [for  ohiyati]  to  be  left  behind,  to  stay  behind 
J   V.340. 

Avagata  [ava  -|-  a  +  gacchati]  only  in  phrase  dhamma 
avagat-amha,  we  are  fallen  from  righteousness,  J  V.82. 
(C.  explains  apagata). 

Avakarotl  [either  ava  -j-  a  -]-  karoti  or  aval)  -f-  karoti,  the 
latter  more  probable.  It  is  not  necessary  to  take  it  with 
Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  as  Sk.  apakrnoti,  apa -f- a  +  kf]  I.  to 
revoke,  undo,  rescind,  not  fulfill,  spoil,  destroy  J  111.339 
(avakayira  =  avakareyya  chindeyya  C);  v,495,  500;  VI. 
280.  —  2.  to  give  back,  restore  J   vi.577  (=:  deti   C). 

Avakirati  wrong  by  Hardy  VvA  Index  for  avakirati  (q.  v.). 

Avatuka  see  apatuka. 

Avapurana  (m.)  [same  as  apapurana]  a  key  S  11H32;  A 
IV. 374-" 

AvapuratI  [same  as  apapurati]  to  open  (a  door)  J  1.63;  VI.373. 

Avavata  (adj.)  [a  -f-  vavata]  unobstructed,  unhindered,  free. 
Of  a  woman,  not  married  J  V.213  (=:  apetavarana,  which 
read  for  ''bharana,  apariggahita  C). 

Avikampamana  (adj.)  [a  +  vi  +  kampamana,  ppr.  med. 
of  kamp]  not  hesitating,  not  wavering,  not  doubting 
J  IV. 3 10  {:=  anosakkamana  C. ;  Kern  takes  it  at  this  passage 
as  a  +  vikalpamana,  see  Tpev.  s.v.,  but  unnecessarily); 
VI. 176  (^  niiasanka  C);  J  vi.273. 

Avikampin  (adj.)  [fr.  a  +  vi  -f  kamp]  unmoved,  not  shaking, 
steady   Vv   5022  (— acala  VvA  215). 

Avikopin  (adj.)  [a  +  vikopin;  fr.  vi  +  kup]  not  agitated, 
not  moving,  unshaken,  undisturbed  J  vi.226  (acchejja  +). 

Avikkhepa  [a  -f  vikkhepa]  calmness,  balance,  equanimity 
D  iii.213;  A  1.83;  Psi.94;  "-228;  Dhs  11,  15,  570. 


Avicareti 


85 


Avecca 


Avicareti  [a  +  vicareti]  not  to  examine  VvA  336. 

AvlCCat)  at  J  V.434  read  aviviccai)  [a  +  viviccaij]  i.  e.  not 
secretly,  openly. 

AvIJanag  [a  +  vijanaq]  not  knowing,  ignorant  Dh  38,  60; 
It   103. 

Avijja  (f-)  [Sl<.  avidya;  ft.  a -f- vid]  ignorance;  the  main 
root  of  evil  and  of  continual  rebirth  (see  paticca-samup- 
pada,  cp.  S  11.6,9,  '^i  Sn  p.  141  &  many  other  passages). 
See  on  term  Cpd.  83  n.  3,  187  sq  ,  262  sq.  &  for  further 
detail  vijja.  avijja  is  termed  an  anusaya  (D  111.254,282; 
S  1V.205,  208  sq.,  212);  it  is  one  of  the  asava  (Vin 
111.4;  D  1.84;  111.216;  It  49;  Dhs  iioo,  1109),  of  the 
ogha  (D  III. 230,  276;  Dhs  390,  1061,  1162),  of  the  nlva- 
ranani  (S  11.23;  A  1.223;  I'  ^i  Dhs  1162,  i486),  of  the 
sarjyojanani  (D  111.254;  Dhs  H31,  1460).  See  for  various 
characterisatons  the  foil,  passages:  Vini.i;  111.3;  D  IU.212, 
230,  234,  274;  M  1.54,  67,  144;  S  11.4,  26,  263;  111.47, 
162:  iv.256;  V.52;  A  1.8,  285;  11.132,  158,  247 ;  111.84  sq., 
414;  IV. 228;  It  34  (ya  kac'  ima  duggatiyo  asmii)  loke 
paramhi  ca  avijjamiilaka  sabb.^  iccha-lobha-sammussaya), 
57,  81;  Sn  199,  277,  729  (jati-marana-sarjiiSrai)  ye  vajanti 
punapunaq  .  .  .  avijjay'eva  sa  gatl),  730,  1026,  1033  (avij- 
jaya  nivuto  loko);  Dh  243;  Nd*  99;  Pug  21;  Dhs  390, 
1061,  1162;  DhA  111.350;  IV.161   (°paligha). 

Av)nnai;iaka  (aJj.)  [a  +  viiiiiana  -(-  ka]  senseless,  without 
feeling  or  consciousness,  unfeeling  DhA  1.6  (saviiinanaka  -|-). 

Avliinu  (adj.)  =  aviddasu. 

Avltakka  (adj.)  [a  +  vitakka]  free  from  thought  D  111.219, 
274;  Th  2,  75  ("where  reasonings  cease"  trsl.);  Dhs  i6l 
("free  from  the  working  of  conception"  trsl.),  504  etc. 

Avldura  (adj.)  [a+vidura]  not  far,  near;  usually  in  loc. 
°e  as  adv.  near  Sn.  147. 

AvlddaSU  (adj.)  [a  -\-  viddasu]  ignorant,  foolish  Sn  762 
(=bala  Sn  A  509);  Dh  268  =  Nd^  514  (=  avifinu  DhA 
111.395);  PvA   18  (so  read  for  avindasu). 

Avinasaka  (°ika)  (adj.)  [a  +  vinasa  +  ka]  not  causing 
destruction  A  ui.38  (°ika);  J  v.  116  (=  anasaka  C). 

Avinasana    (adj.)    [a -f- vinasana]  imperishable  Dpvs  IV.16. 

AvlnlCChayannu  (adj.)  [a  +  vinicchaya  +  nu]  not  knowing 
how  to  decide  J   v.367. 

Avlnibbhujag  (adj.)  [ppr.  of  a  +  vinibbhujati]  unable  to 
distinguish  or  to  know  J  v.121  (=:  atirento  C). 

Avlnibbhoga  (ad.)  [a  -|-  vinibbhoga]  not  to  be  distinguished, 
indistinct  J   III.428   ("sadda). 

Avlparinama  [a  +  viparinama]  absence  of  change,  stead- 
fastness, endurance  D1.18;  111.31,33  (°dhamma);  DA  1.113 
(=:;  jara-vasena  viparinamassa  abhavato). 

Avippatlsara  [a  +  vippatisara]  absence  of  regret  or  remorse 
A  111.46. 

Avlppavasa  (adj.-n.)  [a  -\-  vippavasa]  ihoughtfulness,  mind- 
fulness, attention;  adj.  not  neglectful,  mindful,  attentive, 
eager  Vin  v.216;  Sn  1142  (cp.  Nd^  loi  :  anussatiyfi 
bhavento) ;  DA  1.104  (appamado  vuccati  satiya  avippavSso) ; 
Dh.\   IV.26  (appamada  =  satiya  avippavasa). 

Aviruddha  (adj.)  [a  +  viruddha]  not  contrary,  unobstructed, 
free,  without  difficulties  Dh  406;  Sn   365,  704,  854. 

Avlri)]hl  (f.)  [a  +  virulhi]  absence  or  cesssation  of  growth 
Sn  235;  DhA  1.245  (°dhamma). 

Avirodha  [a  -f  virodha]  absence  of  obstruction,  gentleness 
M  11.105  =Th  I,  875. 


Avirodhana  (nt.)  =  avirodha  J  111.320,  412;  V.378. 

Avlvada  [a  -|-  vivada]  absence  of  contesting  or  disputing, 
agreement,  harmony  D  IU.245 ;  Sn  896  (°bhuma  SnA  557 
or  "bhumma  Nd'  308,  expW-  as  Nibbana). 

Avisaijvadaka  (adj.)  [a  +  visaqvada  -f  ka]  not  deceiving, 
not  lying  D  1.4;  III. 170;   Pug  57;  DA  I.73. 

Avlsagvadanata  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  a  +  visaqvada]  honesty, 
faithfulness,  uprightness  D  III. 190. 

Avisatjvadeti  [a  +  visaij  ■\-  Caus.  of  vad]  to  keep  one's 
word,  to  be  honest,  to  be  true  J  v.  124. 

Avisaggata  (f.)  [a  +  visaggata,  v.l.  viy'=,  thus  as  a  -f-  viy- 
agga,  Sk.  vyagra  =3  akula]  state  of  being  undisturbed, 
harmony,  balance  J   vi.224  (C.  avisaggata).  Cp.  avyagga. 

Avisare  at  J  v. 117  according  to  Kern,  Tom.  s.v.  corrupted 
from  avisaye,  i.e.  towards  a  wrong  or  unworthy  object 
[a  +  visaya,  loc],  C.  differently:  avisare  =  avisaritva  atik- 
kamitvs;  v.l.  adhisare. 

Avisahata  (adj.)  [a -|- visahata]  imperturbed  Dhs  15,  24, 
287,  570.  (°manasata). 

AviSSaji  at  J  VI.79  is  with  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  better  to  be 
read  avassajl  (see  avassajati). 

Avlssajjlya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  a  +  vissajjati]  not  to  be  given 
away,  inalienable  (cp.  avebhangiya)  Vin  1.305  ("ika  for 
°iya);  11.170  (five  such  objects  in  detail);  v.216  (+  avebh°); 
J   VI.568. 

AviSSasanlya  (adj.)  [a  +  visasana  -f^  iya,  ika]  not  to  be 
trusted,  untrustworthy  J  111.474. 

Aviha  [of  uncertain  etym.]  the  world  of  the  Aviha's,  i.e. 
the  1 2th  of  the  16  Brahma-words,  cd.  Kindred  Sayings 
48  n.  3;  cpd.  139.  —  S  1.35,  60;  A  1.279;  Tug  I7- 

Avlhiqsa  (Avlhesa)  (f)  [a  +  vihiijsS]  absence  of  cruelty, 
mercy,  humanity,  friendliness,  love  D  111.213,  215,  240 
(avihesa);  Sn  292  (=  sakarunabhava  SnA  318);  It  82 
("vitakka). 

Avihefhaka  (adj.)  [a  4-  vihethaka]  not  harassing,  not  hurting 
D  111.166  (but  cp.  SnA  318  avihesaka  In  same  context); 
Miln  219. 

Avf  in  general  see  vl°. 

Avici  [B.Sk.  avici  a  -f-  vici  (?)  no  intermission,  or  no  plea- 
sure (?),  unknown,  but  very  likely  popular  etym.]  I.avlci- 
niraya,  one  of  the  (great)  hells  (see  niraya),  described 
in  vivid  colours  at  many  passages  of  the  Pali  canon,  e.g. 
at  Vin  11.203  =  It  86;  Nd'  18,  347,  405  =  Nd^  304 
1110;  Fs  1.83;  Dhs  1281;  J  1.71,  96;  111.182;  IV.159;  DhA 
1.148;  PvA  52;  SnA  290;  Sdhp  37,  194;  Pgdp  5  sq.; 
etc    etc.  —  2.  disintegration,  decay  Vism  449  (a.  jara  nSma). 

Avekalla  (° — )  adj.)  [a  -f  vekalla]  without  deficiency,  in 
°buddhi  complete  knowledge  J  vi.297. 

AvekkhaU  [B.Sk.  avlksate.  The  regular  Pali  form  however 
is  apekkhati,  to  which  the  BSk.  av"  corresponds],  to  look 
at,  to  consider,  to  see  It  33  (v.l.  ap°);  Dh  28,  50,  J  IV.6; 
DhA  1.259  (=  passati). 

Avekktllpati  [avaq  +  khipati,  avar)  here  in  form  ave  cor- 
resp.  to  avah,  cp.  pure  for  purah  etc.]  to  jump,  hop, 
lit.  to  throw  (a  foot)  down  J  iv.251  (=  pacchimapSde 
khipati  C). 

Avecca  (adv.)  [Uusually  taken  as  ava  -f  ger.  of  i  (*itya), 
cp.  adhicca  &  abhisamecca,  but  by  P.  grammarians  as  a  + 
vecca.  The  form  is  not  sufficiently  cleared  semantically ; 
B.Sk.  avetya,  e.g.  Ilm.  210,  is  a  Sanskritisation  of  the 
P.    form]  certainly,  definitely,  absolutely,  perfectly,  expld. 


Avecca 


86 


Asakyadhita 


by  Bdhgh.  as  acala  (on  D  11.217),  or  as  pannaya  ajjho- 
gahetva  (on  Sn  229);  by  Dhp.  as  apara-paccaya-bhavena 
(on  Pv  IV. I").  —  Usually  in  phrase  Buddhe  Dbamme 
Sanghe  avecca-pasado  perfect  faith  in  the  B.,  the  Dhamma 
&  the  Sangha,  e.g.  at  M  1.45;  S  11.69;  iv.271  sq.,  304; 
V.344,  405;  A  1.222;  11.56;  III. 212,  332,  451;  1V.406; 
V.183;  further  at  Ps  1.161  ("pasanna);  Sn  229  (yo  ariya- 
saccani  avecca  passati);   Pv  IV.  i'*. 

Avedha  (adj.)  [a  +  vdha,  grd.  of  vidh  (vyadh)  to  pierce, 
Sk.  avedhya]  not  to  be  hurt  or  disturbed,  inviolable, 
unshakable,  imperturbable  Sn  322  ("dhamma  =  akampana- 
sabhava  SnA  331). 

Avebhangika  (adj.)  [fr.  a  +  vi  -|-  bhanga]  not  to  be  divided 
or  distributed  Vin  1.305.   Cp.  next. 

Avebhanglya  (nt.)  [=  avebhangika]  that  which  is  not  to 
be  divided,  an  inalienable  possession;  5  such  objects 
enumd-  at  Vin  II.  171,  which  are  the  same  as  under  avis- 
sajjiya  (q.  v.);    v.  129. 

Avera  (adj.)  [a -j- vera]  peaceable,  mild,  friendly  Sn  150 
(^  veravirahita  KhA  248);  Sdhp  338.  —  °g  (nt.)  friend- 
liness, kindness  D  1.247  (°citta);  Dh  5  (^  khantimetta 
DhA  151). 

Averin  (adj. — n.)  =  avera   Dh    197,  258. 

Avosita  [reading  uncertain,  cp.  avyosita]  only  in  neg.  an° 
unfultiUed,  undone  Th   i,   loi. 

Avyagga  (ad)  [a  +  vyagga,  Sc.  vyagra]  not  bewildered,  not 
confused  S  v.66.  Cp.  avisaggata. 

Avyattata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  avyatta]  state  or  condition  of  not 
being  manifest  or  visible,  concealment,  hiding  DhA  11.38. 

Avyatha  (adj.)  [a  +  vyatha,  cp.  Sk.  vyatha  misfortune]  not 
miserable,  fortunate  J   111.466  (=  akilamana  C). 

Avyaya  [a  -f-  vyaya]  absence  of  loss  or  change,  safety 
D  1.72  (instr.  °ena  safely);   Miln  393  (as  abbaya  T.). 

Avyapajjha'  (abyabajjha)  (nt.)  [a  -|-  vyapajjha  or  bajjha,  a 
confusion  between  the  roots  bSdh  or  pad]  (act.)  kindness 
of  heart;  (pass.)  freedom  from  suffering  (Ep.  of  Nibbana) 
Vin  1. 183  (avyapajjh^adhimut)a);  It  31   (abyabojjh'arama). 

Avyapajjha^  (abyabajjha)  adj.)  [either  a  +  *vyapadya  or 
more  likely  a  -(-  *vyabadhya]  free  from  oppression  or  injury; 
not  hurting,  kind  D  11.242  (avera +),  276;  M  1.90;  It 
16^52  (sukhai));  Miln  410  (avera-)-). 

Avyapanna  (adj.)  [a  -f-  vyapanna]  free  from  desire  to  injure, 
free  from  malice,  friendly,  benevolent  D  ni. 82,83  ("citta); 
A  11.220  (id.);  Pug  68  (id.).  —  Same  in  B.Sk.  e.g.  Divy 
105,  302. 

Avyapada  [a  -)-  vyapada]  absence  of  desire  to  injure,  free- 
dom from  malice  D  111.215,  229,  240;  It  82  (all  MSS. 
have  aby°);   Dhs  33,  36,  277,  313,   1056. 

Avyayata  (adj.)  [a  -)-  vyayata  of  yam]  at  random,  without 
discrimination,  careless  J  1.496  (=:  avyatta  C). 

Avyaylka  (adj.)  [fr.  avyaya]  not  liable  to  loss  or  change, 
imperishable  J  v. 508  (=  avigacchanaka  C). 

Avyavata  (adj.)  [a  -|-  vySvata  =  Sk  vyaprta]  not  occupied, 
i.e.  careless,  neglectful,  not  worrying  Vin  III. 136;  Nd^  72 
(abyavata  for  appossukka  Sn  43);  J  111.65;  vi.188.  Miln 
177  (abya"). 

Avyaseka  (adj.)  [a  -}-  vy  4-  aseka]  untouched,  unimpaired 
I)  1. 1 82  Csukha  =  kilesa  vyaseka-virahitatta  avyaseka 
DA  1.183);  Pug   59- 

Avyaharatl  [a  -[-  vy  -|-  aharati]  not  to  bring  or  procure  J  v. 80. 


Avyosita  (adj.)  [a  -)-  vyosita,  Sk.  vyavasita]  not  having 
reached  perfection,  imperfect  Th   1,  784  (aby°). 

Avhaya  [fr.  avhayati;  cp.  Sk.  Shvaya  "betting"]  calling, 
name;  adj.  ( — °)  called,  having  the  name  of  Sn  684  (isi°), 
686  (Asit"^),  689  (kanhasiri^),  1133  (Sacc°,  cp.  Nd^  624). 

Avhayati  &  Avheti  [Sk.  ahvayati,  a  4-  hu  or  hva]  —  i. 

to  call  upon,  invoke,  appeal  to  D  1.244  (avhayama  imper.); 
PvA  164.  —  2.  to  call,  call  up,  summon  M  I.i7;jil.l0, 
252  (=:  pakkosati);  v.220  (avhayesi);  vi.iS,  192,  273 
(avhettha  pret.);  Vv  33'  (avheti).  —  3.  to  give  a  name, 
to  call,  to  address  SnA  487  (=  amanteti  alapati).  —  pp. 
avbata  (q.  v.). 

Avhata  [pp.  of  avhayati]  called,  summoned  J  111.165=; 
(an°  =  anahuta  ayactia)  :=  Pv  1.12^,  cp.  PvA  64.  The  id. 
p.  at  Th  2,  129  reads  ayacita. 

Avhana  (nt.)  [fr.  avhayati,  Sk.  ahvana  in  diff.  meaning]  — 
I.  begging,  calling,  asking  Sn  710;  Vism  68  ("anabhi- 
nandana).    —  2.  addressing,  naming  SnA  605  (=  nama). 

Avhayana  (nt )  [cp.  Sk.  ahvayana]  calling  to,  asking,  in- 
vocation, imploration  D  1. 11  (Sir-avhayane,  v.  1.  avhayana; 
expld.  at  DA  1.97  with  reading  Sirivhayana  as  "ehi  Siri 
mayhaq  sire  patitthahi  ti  evai)  sire  Siriya  avhayanaq"), 
244,  245  (v.  1.  avhana). 

Avhayika  (adj.)  [fr.  avhaya]  calling,  giving  a  name;  (m.) 
one   who  gives  a  name  J  1.401  ::=  III. 234. 

Asa  (adj.)  [for  asaq  =  asanto,  a  -j-  santo,  ppr.  ol  aS  in 
meaning  "good"]  bad  J  iv'.435  =  vi.235  (sataij  va  asaq, 
ace.  sg.  with  v.  1.  santaq  .  .  .,  expH-  by  sappurisaij  va 
asappurisaij  va  C);  V.448  (n.  pi.  f.  asa  expl^.  by  asaliyo 
lamika  C;   cp.  p.  446  V.319). 

Asagvata  (adj.)  [pp.  of  4-  saijvunati,  cp.  saijvuta]  unres- 
tricted, open  J   VI. 306. 

Asagvara  [a  -\-  saqvara]  absence  of  closing  or  restraint,  no 
control   Dhs   1345. 

Asagvasa  (adj.)  [a  -|-  saqvasa]  deprived  of  co-residence, 
expelled  from  the  community  Vin  iv.213,  214. 

Asagvindat)  [ppr.  a  -f  saqvindati]  not  finding,  not  knowing 
Th    I,   717. 

Asagvuta  (adj.)  [pp.  of  a  -j-  sagvunati,  cp.  saqvata]  not 
restrained  Dhs   1345,   1347. 

Asagsattha  (adj.)  [a  -f  saijsattha]  not  mixed  or  mixing, 
not  associating,  not  given  to  society  M  I.al4;  S  1.63;  Sn 
628  =  Dh  404  (=  dassana-savana-samullapa  paribhoga- 
kaya-saqsagganai)   abhavena  SnA  46r  =  DhA  iv.173). 

Asagharima  (adj.)  =  asaijhariya  (?)  Vin  iv.272. 

Asaghariya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  a  -j-  sagharati]  not  to  be  destroyed 
or  shattered  It   77;  Th   I,  372;  Nd'^   no. 

Asaghira  (adj.)  [=  asaqhariya  of  saq  -|-  hf]  immovable, 
unconquerable,  irrefutable  Vin  11.96;  S  1. 193;  A  iv.141 ; 
V.71;  Sn  1149  (as  Ep.  of  Nibbana,  cp.  Nd'^  no);  J  I. 
62;  IV. 283  (°cilta  unfaltering);  Dpvs  IV.  12. 

Asakka  (adj.)  [a  -j-  sakka;  Sk.  asakya]  impossible  J  v. 
362  (°rupa). 

Asakkuneyya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  a  -j-  sakkoti]  impossible,  un- 
able to  J   1.55;   KhA   185   and  passim. 

Asakkhara  (adj.)  [a -|- sakkhara]  not  stony,  free  from  gravel 
or  stones,  smooth  J  V.168;  DhA  III.401  (opp.  sasakkhara). 

Asakyadhita  (f.)  [a  -f-  sakyadhltS]  not  a  true  Buddhist  nun 
Vin  IV. 214. 


Asagguna 


87 


Asabbha 


AsaggUOa  ["  +  sagguna]  bad  quality,  vice  Sdhp  382  (°bh5- 
vin,  the  a"  belongs   to  the  whole  cpd.). 

Asankita  &  "iya  (adj.)  [a  +  sankita,  pp.  of  iank]  not 
hesilating,  not  afraid,  not  anxious,  firm,  bold  J  I.334  ("iya); 
V.Z41;  Sdhp  435,  541. 

Asankuppa    (adj.)  [a"+  sankuppa,  grd.  of  kup]   not   to  be 

shaken;  immovable,  steady,  safe  (Ep.  of  Nibbana)  Sn  II49 
(cp.  Ndi   106);  Th   1,  649. 

AsankUSaka  (adj.)  [a  -f-  sankusaka,  which  is  distorted  from 
Sk.  sankasuka  splitting,  crumbling,  see  Kern,  Toev.  p.  18] 
not  contrary  J  vi.297  (°vattin,  C.  appatilomavattin,  cp.  J 
trsl".  VI. 143). 

Asankheyya  (adj.)  [a  -f-  sankheyya,  grd.  of  saij-khya]  in- 
calculable, innumerable,  nt.  an  immense  period  A  11.142; 
Miln  232  (cattari  a.),  289  DhA  1.5,  83,   104. 

Asanga  (adj.)  [a  -j-  sanga]  not  sticking  to  anything,  free 
from  attachment,  unattached  Th  2,  396  (^manasa,  :=  ana- 
sattacitta  ThA  259);  Miln  343.   Cp.  next. 

Asangita  (adj.)  [fr.  asanga,  a  +  sangita,  or  should  we  read 
asangika?]  not  sticking  or  stuck,  unimpeded,  free,  quick 
J   V.409. 

Asacca  (adj.)  [a  -f  sacca]   not  true,  false  J   v. 399. 

Asajjamana  (adj.)  [ppr.  med.  of  a  -f  sajjali,  safij]  not 
clinging,  not  stuck,  unattached  Sn  38,  71  (cp.  Nd^  107); 
Dh  221   (namarupasmiq  a.  =  alaggamana  DhA  ui.298). 

Asajjittho  2"^  sg.  pret.  med.  of  sajjati  to  stick  or  cling 
to,  to  hesitate  J  1.376.  See  sajjati. 

Asajjhaya  [a  +  sajjhaya]  non-repetition  Dh  241  (cp.  DhA 
i'i-347)- 

Asanna  (adj.)  [a  +  sanSa]  .unconscious,  "satta  unconscious 
beings  N.  of  a  class  of  Devas  D  1.28  (cp.  DA  1.118  and 
BSk.  asaqjnika-sattvah  Divy   505). 

Asaniiata  (adj.)  [a  -f  saiinata,  pp.  of  saq  -f  yam]  unres- 
trained, intemperate,  lacking  self-control  It  43  ^  90  = 
Sn  662   =   Dh  307. 

Asaniiln  (adj.)  [a-j-sannin]  unconscious  D  1.54  ("gabbha, 
cp.  DA  1.163);  in.in,  140,  263;  It  87;  Sn  874. 

Asatha  (adj.)  [a  -t-  satha]  without  guile,  not  fraudulent, 
honest   D  111.47,  55,  237;   DhA  1.69. 

AsaQthita  (adj.)  [a  \-  santhita]  not  composed,  unsettled, 
fickle  It  62,  94. 

Asat  (Asanto)  [a  -f  sat,  ppr.  of  asti]  not  being,  not  being 
good,  i.e.  bad,  not  genuine  (cp.  asa);  freq.,  e.g.  Sn  94, 
131,  881,  950;  Dh  73,  77,  367;  It  69  (asamo  nirayao 
nenii).  See  also  asaddhamma. 

•Asati  (&  Asanati  q.  v.)  [Sk.  asnSti,  ai  to  panake  of,  to 
eat  or  drink  cp.  aqsa  share,  part]  to  eat;  imper.  asnatu 
I  V376;  fut.  asissami  Th  i,  223;  Sn  970.  —  ppr.  med. 
asatnana  J  v.59;  Sn  239.  ger.  asitva  Miln  167;  &  asit- 
vana  J  iv.371  (an°).  pp.  asita  (q.v.).  See  also  the  spurious 
forms  asmiye  &  aiibati  (anhamana  Sn  240),  also  Sslta'. 

Asatlyi  (adv.)  [instr.  of  a  -|-  sati]  heedlessly,  unintentionally 
J  111.486. 

Asatta  (adj.)  [pp.  of  a  -(-  sajjati]  not  clinging  or  attached, 
free  from  attachment  Sn  1059;  Dh  419;  Nd'  107,  108; 
DhA  IV.228. 

Asattha  Cn.  adj.)  [a  +  sattha]  absence  of  a  sword  or  knife, 
without  a  knife,  usually  combd-  with  adai^da  in  var.  phrases  : 
see  under  danda.  Also  at  Th  i,  757  (-j-  avapa). 


Asadlsa  (adj.)  [a  -|-  sadisa]  incomparable,  not  having  its 
like  DhA  11.89;  111.120  ("dana). 

Asaddha  (adj.)  [a  +  saddha]  not  believing,  without  faith 
D   III. 252,   282. 

Asaddhamma  [a  -|-  sat  -|-  dhamma,  cp.  asat  &  BSk.  asad- 
dharma]  evil  condition,  sin,  esp.  sexual  intercourse;  usually 
mentioned  as  a  set  of  several  sins,  viz.  as  3  at  It  85;  as  4 
at    A    11.47;    as  7  at  D  IU.252,  282;  as  8  at  Vin  11.202. 

Asana'  (nt.)  [Vedic  asan(m)]  stone,  rock  J  11.91 ;  V.i3i. 

Asana-  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  asana  of  ai,  cp.  asati]  eating,  food; 
adj.  eating  J  I.472  (ghatasana  Ep.  of  the  fire;  v.64  (id.). 
Usually  in  neg.  form  anasana  fasting,  famine,  hunger  Sn 
311  (=  khuda  SnA  324);  DA  1.139.  See  also  nirasana. 

Asana^  (nt.)  [Sk.  asana]  the  tree  Pentaptera  Tomentosa  J 
1.40  (as  Bodhi-tree  of  Gotama);  11.91 ;   v.420;  VI. 530. 

Asana*  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  asana,  to  asyati  to  hurl,  throw]  an 
arrow  M  1.82  =  S  1.62.  Cp.  asani. 

Asanati  [see  asati]  to  eat,  to  consume  (food)  J  1.472;  v. 
64;  VI.14  (Fsb.  note;  read  asnSti;  C.  paribhunjali). 

Asani  (f.)  [Vedic  asani  in  same  meaning ;  with  Sk.  asri 
corner,  caturasra  four  cornered  (see  assa),  to  Lat.  acer 
pointed,  sharp,  Gr.  axpo;  pointed,  Ags.  egl  sting,  Ohg. 
ekka  corner,  point.  Connected  with  this  is  Sk.  asan  (see 
asana').  Cp.  olso  aqsa  &  asama-]  orig.  a  sharp  stone  as 
hurling-weapon  thence  in  mylhol.  Indra's  thunderbolt, 
thunder-clap,  lightning  J  1.71,  167;  11.154;  III.323;  Miln 
277;  VvA  83. 

-aggi  the  fire  of  thunder,  i.  e.  lightning  or  fire  caused 
by  lightning  DhA  111.71.  -pata  the  falling  of  the  thunder- 
bolt, thunderclap,  lightning  DA  1.280  (or  should  we  read 
asannipatar);  PvA  45.  -vicakka  same  as  °pata(?)  S  11. 
229  (=  labha-sakkara-silokassa  adhivacana);  D  111.44,  47. 

Asantasag  &  "antO  (adj.)  [ppr.  of  a  +  santasati]  fearless, 
not  afraid  Sn  71,  74;  j  IV.IOI  ;  VI. 306;   Nd^   109. 

Asantasin  (adj.)  [a  -|-  santasin,  cp.  asantasaq]  fearless,  not 
trembling,  not  afraid  Sn  850;  Dh  351  ;  Nd^  109;  DhA  iv.70. 

Asantuttha  [pp.  of  a  -)-  santussati]  not  contented  with, 
greedy,  insatiate,  unhappy  Sn   108.   Cp.  next. 

Asantutthita  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  asantutthita  =  asantuttha]  dis- 
satisfaction, discontentment  D  in. 2 14  (so  read  for  tutth") 
=  A  1.95. 

Asanthava  [a  -|-  santhava]  dissociation,  separation  from 
society,  seclusion  Sn  207. 

Asandhlta  (f.)  [a  +  sandhi  -f-  la]  absence  of  joints,  discon- 
nected state  J  VI.  16. 

Asannata  (adj.)  [a  -\-  sannata]  not  bent  or  bending  Sdhp  417. 

Asapatta  (adj.-n.)  [a  -f-  sapalta  =  Sk.  sapatna]  (act.)  with- 
out enmity,  friendly  (med.)  having  no  enemy  or  foe,  secure, 
peaceful  D  11.276;  Sn  150  (=  vigata-paccatlhika,  metta- 
viharin  KhA  249);  Th  2,  512. 

Asapatti  (f.)  [a  -|-  sapatti]  without  co-wife  or  rival  in  mar- 
riage S  IV.249. 

Asappurisa  [a  -4-  sappurisa,  cp.  asat]  a  low,  bad  or  un- 
worthy man  M  111.37 ;  SnA  479  (=  anariya  Sn  664). 

Asabala  (adj.)  [a  -f-  sabala]  unspotted  D  11.80  =  in. 245. 

Asabbha  (adj.)  [a  -f  sabbha,  i.  e.  *sabhya  cp.  sabha  &  in 
meaning  court:  courteous,  hof:  hoflich  etc.]  not  belonging 
to  the  assembly-room,  not  consistent  with  good  manners. 


Asabbha 


S8 


Asita 


impolite,  vile,  low,  of  base  character  J  m.527  (matu- 
gama);  Dh  77=  J  111.367=  Th  I,  994;  Miln  221;  UhA 
1.256;  ThA  246  (akkhi).  Cp.  next.  —  Note.  Both  sabbha 
and  sabbhin  occur  only  in  the  negative  form. 

Asabbhin  =  asabbha  J  1.494,  more  freq.  in  cpds.  as 
asabbhi°,  e.  g. 

-karana  a  low  or  sinful  act  Miln  280.  -rupa  low, 
common  J  VI. 386  (=  asadhu-jatika,  lamaka),  387  (=  asab- 
bhijatika),  414  (==  apandita-jatika).  Cp.  prec. 

'Asabha  [Sk.  rsabha]  see  usabha. 

Asama'  (adj.)  [a  -|-  sama]  unequal,  incomparable  J  1.40  (+ 
appatipuggala);  Sdhp  578  (+  atula).  Esp.  freq.  in  cpd. 
°dhura  lit.  carrying  more  than  an  equal  burden,  of  in- 
comparable strength,  very  steadfast  or  resolute  Sn  694 
(=  asama-viriya  SnA  489);  J  I.193;  vi.259,  330. 

Asama'^  (nt.)  [the  diaeretic  form  of  Sk.  asman  hurling  stone, 
of  which  the  contracted  form  is  amha  (q.  v.);  connected 
with  Lat.  ocris  "mons  confragosus" ;  Gr.  ax/iuv  anvil; 
Lith.  akmu  stone,  see  also  asana'  (Sk.  asan  stone  for 
throwing)  and  asani]  stone,  rock  DA  1.270,  271  (°mutt- 
hika  having  a  hammer  of  stone;  v.  1.  BB.  ayamutthika); 
SnA  392  (instr.   asmana). 

Asamaggiya  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  a  -f-  samagga]  lack  of  concord, 
disharmony  J  vr.516  (so  read  for  asamaggiya). 

Asamana  at  Pug  27  is  to  be  read  assamana  (q.v.). 

Asamapekkhana  (nt.)  &  °a  (f.)  [fr.  a  +  sam  +  apekkhati] 
lack  of  consideration  S  HI.261  ;  Dhs  390,   1061,   1162.  ' 

Asamahita  (adj.)  [a  -f-  samahila]  not  composed,  uncontrolled, 
not  6rm  It   113  (opp.  susamahita);  Dh  no,  in;  Pug  35. 

Asatnijjhanaka  (adj.)  [a  +  samijjhana  +  ka]  unsuccessful, 
without  result,  fruitless;  f.  °ika  J    111.252. 

Asamlddhi  (f.)  [a  +  samiddhi]  misfortune,  lack  of  success 
J  VI.  5  84. 

AsaniOSarai]ia  (nt.)  [a  -I-  samosarana]  not  coming  together, 
not  meeting,  separation  J  v. 233. 

Asampakampiya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  a  4-  sampakampeti]  not  to 
be  shaken,  not  to  be  moved  Sn  229  (=  kampetuq  va 
caletur)  va  asakkuneyyo  KhA   185). 

Asampajanna  (nt.)  [a  4-  sampajaiiiSa]  lack  of  intelligence 
D  III. 213;  Dhs  390,   1061,    1162,   1351. 

AsampayantO  [ppr.  of  a  -|-  sampSyati]  unable  to  solve  or 
explain  Sn   p.  92. 

Asatnbadha  (adj.)  [a -|- sambSdhaj  unobstructed  Sn  150 
(=  sambadha-virahita  KhA  248);  J  1.80;  ThA  293. 

Asammodlya  (nt.)  [a  -f-  sammodiya]  disagreement,  dissension 
J   V1.517  (=  asamaggiya  C). 

Asammosa  [a  -|~  sammosa  cp.  B.Sk.  asammosadharman  Ep. 
of  the  Buddha;  Divy  49  etc]  absence  of  confusion  D  in. 221 
=  Dhs  1366. 

Asayagvasin  (adj.)  [a  -|-  sayaq  -|-  vasiq]  not  under  one's 
own  control,  i.  e.  dependent  D   11.262 ;  J  1.337. 

Asayha  (adj.)  [a  +  sayha,  grd.  of  sah  =  Sk.  asahya]  im- 
possible, insuperable  J  vi.337.  Usually  in  cpd.  °sahin 
conquering  the  unconquerable,  doing  the  impossible,  ac- 
chieving  what  has  not  been  achieved  before  Th  i,  536, 
Pv  11.9"  (Angirasa):  It  32. 

Asahana  (nt.-adj.)  [a  -|-  sahana]  not  enduring,  non-endurance, 
inability  J  111.20;  PvA  17. 


Asahaya  (adj.)  [a -f- sahaya]  one  who  is  without  friends; 
who  is  dependent  on  himself  Miln  225. 

Asa  see  asa. 

Asata  (adj.)  [a  -|-  sata,  Sk.  asata,  Kern's  interpretation  & 
etymology  of  asata  at  Toev.  s.v.  p.  90  is  improbable] 
disagreeable  Vin  1.78  (asata  vedana,  cp.  asata  vedana 
M  Vastu  I  5);  Sn  867;  J  1.288,  410;  II.  105;  Dhs  152,  1343. 

Asadharai[ia  (adj.)  [a  -]-  sadharana  cp.  asadharana  Divy  561] 
not  general,  not  shared,  uncommon,  unique  Vin  in. 35 ; 
Kh  VIII. 9;  J  1.58,  78;  Miln  285;  DA  1.7 1 ;  Sdhp  589,  592. 

Asamapaka  (adj.)  [a  -)-  sama  +  paka]  one  who  does  not 
cook  (a  meal)  for  himself  (a  practice  of  ascetics)  DA  1.270. 

Asara  (n.  adj.)  [a-f-sira]  that  which  is  not  substance, 
worthlessness ;  adj.  worthless,  vain,  idle  Sn  937  (=  asara 
nissara  sarapagata  Nd'  409);  Dh  n,  I2  (cp.  DhA  1. 114 
for  interpretation). 

Asaraka  (adj.)  [a  -j-  saraka]  unessential,  worthless,  sapless, 
rotten  Th   I,  260;  J  11.163  =  DhA  '•'44. 

Asaraddha  (adj.)  [a  -j-  saraddha]  not  excited,  cool  A  1.148  = 
It   119  (passaddho  kayo  a.;  v.  1.  assaraddha). 

Asahasa  (nt.)  [a  -|-  sahasa]  absence  of  violence,  meekness, 
peaceableness  D  ill. 147  (asahase  rata  fond  of  peace) ;  ace. 
as  adv.  asahasaij  without  violence,  not  arbitrarily  J  III. 319; 
instr.  asahasena  id.  J  vi.280;  Dh  257  (:=  amusavadena 
DhA  111.382). 

As!  [Vedic  asi,  Av.  aqhu  Lat.  ensis]  a  sword,  a  large  knife 
D  1.77  (=DA  1.222);  M  11.99;  ^  l.48  =  (asina  sisaq 
chindante);  IV. 97  (asina  hanti  attanag);  J  IV.  118  (asi 
sunisito),  184;  v.45  (here  meaning  "sickle"),  475  (asiii 
ca  me  maiinasi,  probably  faulty  for  either  "asiii  ca  me" 
or  "asificam  me");  Vism  201  (iianasi  the  sword  of  know- 
ledge);  PvA  253   (asina  pahata). 

-camma  sword  &  shield  Vin  11. 192;  A  111.93 ;  J  vi.449. 
-tharu  the  hilt  of  a  sword  DhA  iv.66.  -nakha  having 
nails  like  swords  Pgdp  29.  -patta  having  sword-like  leaves, 
wiih  swords  (knives)  for  leaves  (of  the  sword-leaf-wood  in 
Niraya,  a  late  feature  in  the  descriptions  of  Purgatory 
in  Indian  speculative  Theology,  see  e.  g.  Mark-andeya- 
purana  XII. 24  sq. ;  Mhbhatata  XII.321 ;  Manu  iv.90;  XII. 
75;  Scherman,  Vistonslileraiur  pp.  23  sq.)  J  VI. 250 
(°niraya);  PvA  221  (°vana);  Sdhp  194.  -pasa  having 
swords  for  snares  (a  class  of  deities)  Miln  191.  -mala 
"sword-dirt",  i.e.  rust  on  a  sword,  a  rusty  sword  or  kuife, 
in  °i)  karoti  or  kareti  "to  do  the  rusty  sword  trick",  a 
kind  of  torture  J  III. 178  (+ slsaq  chindapeti);  Davs  111.35. 
-lakkhana  "sword-sign",  i.  e.  (fortune-telling  from)  marks 
on  a  sword  D  1.9 ;  J  1455.  -loma  having  swords  for  hair 
S  11.257,  cp.  Vin  III. 106.  -suna  slaughter-house  (so  also 
B.Sk.  asisQna  Divy  lo,  15;  see  further  detail  under 
"kama"similes)  Vin  11.26;  M  1.130,  143;  A  11197.  -sul'a 
a  sword-blade  Th  2,  488  (expld.  at  ThA  287  by  adhi- 
kuttanatlhena,  i.  e.  with  reference  to  the  executioner's  block, 
cp.  also  sattisula). 

Asika  (adj.)  ( — °)  [asi  +  ka]  having  a  sword,  with  a  sword 
in  phrase  ukkhitt'asika  with  drawn  sword,  M  1.377;  J  1.393. 

Asita'  [Sk.  asita,  pp.  of  *asati,  Sk.  asnati]  having  eaten, 
eating;  (nt.)  that  which  is  eaten  or  enjoyed,  food  M  1.57; 
A  111.30,  32  ("pita-khayita  etc.);  PvA  25  (id.);  J  vi.555 
°(asana   having    enjoyed  one's  food,  satisfied).  Cp.  asita'. 

Asita'^  (*dj.)  [a  -\-  sita  pp.  of  *5rl,  Sk.  asrita]  not  clinging 
to,  unattached,  independent,  free  (from  wrong  desires) 
D  11.261  (°atiga);  M  1.386;  Th  I,  38,  1242  (see  Mrs 
Rh.  D.  in  Brethren  404  note  2);  J  11.247;  It  97;  Sn 
251,  519,  593,  686  (Asilavhaya,  called  the  Asita  i.e.  the 
Unattached;  cp.  SnA  487),  698  (id.),  717,  957,  1065 
(cp.  Nd2  III   &  nissaya). 


Asita 


89 


Asmimana 


Aslta'  (adj.)  [Sk.  asita;  Idg.  *as,  cp.  Lat.  areo  to  be  dry, 
i.e.  burnt  up;  Gr.  U^u  to  dry;  orig.  meaning  burnt,  hence 
of  burnt,  i.  e.  black  colour  (of  ashes)]  black-blue,  black 
M  II. 180  ("vyabhangi);  A  in. 5  (id.);  Th  2,  480  (=  in- 
danila  ThA  286);  J  111.419  ("apangin  black-eyed);  v.  302; 
Davs  1.45. 

Astti  (num.)  [Sk.  asiti]  80  (on  symbolical  meaning  &  freq. 
application  see  attha'  B  I  c,  where  also  most  of  the  rePs. 
In  addition  we  mention  the  foil.:)  J  1.233  ("hallha  80 
hands,  i.e.  80  cubits  deep);  111174  ("sahassa-varaija-pari- 
vuta);  VI. 20  (vassasahassSni);  Miln  23  (asitiya  bhikkhu- 
sahassehi  saddhiq);  Vism  46  (satakotiyo)  DhA  1. 1 4,  19 
(mahathers);  11.25  (°koti-vibhava).   Cp.  asitika. 

Asa  (pron.)  [Sk.  asau  (m.),  adas  (nt.);  base  amu°  in  oblique 
cases  &  derivation,  e.g.  adv.  amutra(q.v.)]  pron.  demonstr. 
'that",  that  one,  usually  combrf  with  yo  (yaq),  e.g.  asu 
yo  so  puriso  M  1.366;  yaij  adui)  khettaq  S  1V.315.  — 
nom.  sg.  m.  asu  S  iv.195;  Miln  242;  f.  asu  J  v.396 
(asu  metri  causa):  nt.  adug  M  1.364,  483;  A  1.250.  Of 
oblique  cases  e.  g.  amuna  (inslr.)  A  1.250.  Cp.  also  next. 

Asilka  (pron.-adj.)  [asn  -j-  ka]  such  a  one,  this  or  that,  a 
certain  Vin  IU.87;  J  1. 148;  PvA  29,  30,  35,  109,  122 
(°i)  gatio  gata). 

ASUCl  (adj.)  [a  -|-  suci]  not  clean,  impure,  unclean  Sn  75 
("manussa,  see  N'd^   112);  Pug  27,   36;  Sdhp  378,  603. 

AsUClka  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  asuci]  impurity,  unclean  living, 
defilemeDt  Sn  243  ("missita  =  asuci bhava-missita  SnA  286. 

Asubha  (adj.)  [a  +  subha]  impure,  unpleasant,  bad,  ugly, 
nasty ;  nt.  °r)  nastiness,  impurity.  Cp.  on  term  and  the 
Asubha-meditalion,  as  well  as  on  the  10  asubhas  or  offen- 
sive objects  D/is.  trsl.  70  and  CpJ.  121  n.  6.  —  Siv.iii 
(asubhato  manasikaroli);  v. 320;  Sn  341 ;  Sdhp  368.  -sub- 
hasubba  pleasant  unpleasant,  good  &  bad  Sn  633;  J  in. 
243;  Miln   136. 

-anupassin  realising  or  intuitising  the  corruptness  (of 
the  body)  It  80,  81;  DhA  1.76.  -katha  talk  about  im- 
purity Vin  111.68.  -kammatthana  reflection  on  impurity 
DhA  in. 425.  -nimitta  sign  of  the  unclean  i.  e.  idea  of 
impurity  Vism  77.  -bhavana  contemplation  of  the  impu- 
rity (of  the  body)  Vin  111.68.  -sanna  idea  of  impurity 
D  in. 253,  283,  289,  291.  -safinin  having  an  idea  of  or 
realising  the  impurity  (of  the  body)  It  93. 

Asura  [Vedic  asura  in  more  comprehensive  meaning;  con- 
nected with  Av.  ahuro  Lord,  ahuro  mazda";  perhaps  to 
Av.  anhus  &  Lat.  erus  master]  a  fallen  angel,  a  Titan ; 
pi.  asura  the  Titans,  a  class  of  mythological  beings.  Dhpala 
at  PvA  272  &  the  C.  on  J  v. 186  define  them  as  kala- 
kanjaka-bheda  asura.  The  are  classed  with  other  similar 
inferior  deities,  e.  g.  with  garula,  naga,  yakkha  at  Miln 
117;  with  supanna,  gandhabba,  yakkha  at  DA  1. 5 1.  — 
The  fight  between  Gods  &  Titans  is  also  reflected  in  the 
oldest  books  of  the  Pali  Canon  and  occurs  in  identical 
description  at  the  foil,  passages  under  the  tittle  of  deva- 
sura-sangama :  D  11.285;  S  1.222  (cp.  216  sq.),  iv.201 
sq.,  V.447;  M  1.253;  A  IV.432.  —  Rebirth  as  an  Asura 
is  considered  as  one  of  the  four  umhappy  rebirths  or  evil 
fates  after  death  (apaya;  viz.  niraya,  tiracchana-yoni,  peti 
or  pettivisaya,  asura),  e.g.  at  It  93;  J  v. 186;  Pv  IVMI', 
see  also  apaya.  —  Other  passages  in  general:  S  1,216  sq. 
(fight  of  Devas  &  Asuras);  iv.203;  A  11.91 ;  iv.198  sq., 
206;  Sn  681;  Ndi  89,  92,  448;  DhA  1.264  ("kaiifia); 
Sdhp  366,  436. 

-Inda  Chief  or  king  of  the  Titans.  Several  Asuras  are 
accredited  with  the  role  of  leaders,  most  commonly  Vepa- 
cilti  (S  1.222;  IV.201  sq.)  and  kahu  (A  1117,  53;  111.243). 
Besides  these  we  find  Paharada  (gloss  Mahabhadda)  at 
A  IV.197.  -kaya  the  body  or  assembly  of  the  asuras  A  1.143; 
J  V.186;  Th.\  285.  -parivara  a  retinue  of  Asuras  A  11. 91. 
-rakkhasa  Asuras  and  Rakkhasas  (Raksasas)  Sn  310 
(defined  by  Bdhgh  at  SnA  323  as  pabbata-p5da-nivasino 
dSoava-yakkha-saiiiiitfi). 


Asuropa  [probably  a  haplological  contraction  of  asura-ropa. 
On  various  suggestions  as  to  etym.  &  meaning  see  Morris's 
discussion  at  J  P  T S.  1893,  8  sq.  The  word  is  found  as 
asulopa  in  the  Asoka  inscriptions]  anger,  malice,  hatred ; 
abruptness,  want  of  forbearance  Pug  i8  =  Vbh  357;  Dhs 
418,   io6o,  1115,  1341  (an°);  DhsA  396. 

Asussusag  [ppr.  of  a  -|-  sususati,  Desid.  of  4ru,  cp.  Sk. 
susrusati]  not  wishing  to  hear  or  listen,  disobedient  J  v.121. 

Asuyaka  see  anasuyaka. 

Asura  (adj.)  [a  +  sura']  —  I.  not  brave,  not  valiant,  co- 
wardly Sn  439.  —  2.  uncouth,  stupid  J  vi.292  (cp.  Kern. 
Tciv.  p.  48). 

Asekha  (&  Asekkha)  (adj.  n.)  [a  +  sekha]  not  requiring 
to  be  trained,  adept,  perfect,  m.  one  who  is  no  longer  a 
learner,  an  expert;  very  often  meaning  an  Arahant  (cp. 
B.Sk.  asaiksa  occurring  only  in  phrase  saiksasaiksah  those 
in  training  &  the  adepts,  e.g.  Divy  261,  337;  Av.S  1.269, 
335;  n.144)  Vin  1.62  sq.;  III. 24;  S  1.99;  D  III. 218,  219; 
It  51  (asekho  sllakkhandho ;  v.  1.  asekkha);  Pug  14 
(:=  arahant);  Dhs  584,   1017,   1401;   Kvu  303  sq. 

-muni  the  perfectly  Wise  DhA  in. 321.  -bala  the  power 
of  an  Arahant,  euumd.  in  a  set  of  10  at  Ps  11.173,  <=P-  '76. 

Asecanaka  (adj.)  [a  +  secana  -f  ka,  fr.  siC  to  sprinkle,  cp. 
B.Sk.  asecanaka-darsana  in  same  meaning  e  g.  Divy  23, 
226,  334]  unmixed,  un  adulterated,  i.  e.  with  full  and 
unimpaired  properties,  delicious,  sublime,  lovely  M  1. 114; 
S  1.2 13  (a.  ojava  "that  elixir  that  no  infusion  needs" 
Mrs  Rh.  D.)  =  Th  2,  55  (expH-  as  anasittakaij  pakatiya 
\a  mahaiasaq  at  ThA  6l)  =  Th  2,  196  (=  anasittakat) 
ojavantaq  sabhava-madhurai)  ThA  168);  S  v. 321;  A  III. 
237  sq.  Miln  405. 

Asevana  (f.)  [a  4-  sevana]  not  practising,  abstinence  from 
Sn   259  (=:  abhajana  apayirupasana  KhA   124). 

Asesa  (adj.)  [a  -f-  sesa]  not  leaving  a  remnant,  without  a 
remainder,  all,  entire,  complete  Sn  2  sq.,  351,  355,  500, 
1037  (=:  sabba  Nd'^  113).  As  ° —  (adv.)  entirely,  fully, 
completely  Sn  p.  141  (°viraga-nirodha);  Miln  212  )''v.'»cana 
inclusive  statement). 

Aseslta  (adj.)  [pp.  of  a  -f-  Caus.  of  61?,  see  seseti  &  sissati] 
leaving  nothing  over,  having  nothing  left,  entire,  whole, 
all  J   111.153. 

Asoka'  (adj.)  [a  -f  soka,  cp.  Sk.  asoka]  free  from  sorrow 
Sn  268  (=  nissoka  abbulha-soka-salla  KhA  153);  Dh4l2; 
Th  2,  512. 

Asoka'  [Sk.  asoka]  the  Asoka  tree,  Jonesia  Asoka  J  v.  1 88; 
Vv  35«,  35'  (°rukkha);  Vism  625  (°ankura);  VvA  173 
(°rukkha). 

ASOQiJa  (adj.)  [a  -)-  sondia]  not  being  a  drunkard,  abstaining 
from  drink  J  V.116.  —  f.  aso^di  A  111.38. 

Asotata  (nt.)  [abstr.  a  -f  sola  -(-  ta,  having  no  ears,  being 
earless  J   VI. 16. 

Asnatl  [Sk.  asnati  to  eat,  to  take  food;  the  regular  Pali 
forms  are  asati  (as  base)  and  asanSti]  to  eat;  imper. 
asnatu  J  v. 376. 

Asman  (nt.)  [Vedic  asraan;  the  usual  P.  forms  areamhaand 
asama']  stone,  rock;  only  in  inslr.  asmanS  SnA  362. 

Asniasati  [spurious  form  for  the  usual  assasati  =  Sk.  asva- 
sati]  to  trust,  to  rely  on  J  v.56  (Pot.  asmase). 

Asm!  (1  am)  see  atthi. 

Asmimana  [asmi  -f-  mSna]  the  pride  that  says  "I  am", 
pride  of  self,  egotism  (same  in  B.Sk.  e.g.  Divy  210,  314) 
Vin  1.3;  D  111.273;  M  "'39,  425;  A  m.85;  Ps  1.26; 
Kvu  212;  DhA  1.237.  Cp.  ahaq  asmi. 


Asmiye 


90 


Assasati 


Asmiye  i  sg.  ind.  pres.  med.  of  a£  to  eat,  in  sense  of  a 
fut.  "I  shall  eat"  J  v.397,  405  (C.  bhunjissami).  The  form 
is  to  be  expld-  as  denom.  form"  fr.  -asa  food,  ^  aijsiyati 
and  with  metathesis  asmiyati.  See  also  anhati  which 
would  correspond  either  to  %qsyali  or  asnati  (see  asati). 

Assa'  [for  aijsa',  q.  v.  for  etym.]  shoulder;  in  cpd.  assaputa 
shoulder-bag,  knapsack  i.  e.  a  bag  containing  provisions, 
instr.  assuputena  with  provisions.  Later  exegesis  has  in- 
terpreted this  as  a  bag  full  of  ashes,  and  vv.  11.  as  well 
as  Commentators  take  assa  =  bhasma  ashes  (thus  also 
Morrif  J P  TS.  1893,  to  without  being  able  to  give  an 
etymology).  The  word  was  already  misunderstood  by 
Bdhgh.  when  he  explained  the  Digha  passage  by  bhasma- 
putena,  sise  charikar)  okiritva  ti  attho  D.-\  1.267.  After 
all  it  is  the  same  as  putarjsa  (see  under  ar)sa').  —  D 
198,  cp.  A  11.242  (v.  1.  bhasma");  D.\  1.267  (v-i-  bhassa°). 

Assa'  [for  aqsa'^  r=  Sk.  asra  point,  corner,  cp.  Sk.  asri,  Gr. 
axfOi  &  iiui;  sharp,  Lat.  acer]  corner,  point;  occurs  only 
in  cpd.  caturassa  four-cornered,  quadrangular,  regular  (of 
symmetrical  form,  Vin  11.316;  J  iv.46,  492;  Pv  II. l'^. 
Perhaps  also  at  Th  2,  229  (see  under  assa^).  Occurs  also 
in  form  caturar)sa  under  catur). 

Assa'  [Vedic  asva,  cp.  Av.  aspo;  Gr.  7tto;,  dial,  '/kko?;  Lat. 
equus;  Oir.  ech ;  Gall,  epo-;  Cymr.  ep,  Goth,  aihva;  Os. 
ehu;  Ags.  eoh]  a  horse;  often  mentioned  alongside  of  | 
and  combJ-  with  hatthi  (elephant)  Vin  in. 6  fpaficamattehi  i 
assa-satehi),  52  (enumd-  under  catuppada,  quadrupeds, 
with  hatthi  ottha  gona  gadrabha  &  pasuka);  A  11.207; 
V.271;  Sn  769  (gavSssa).  At  Th  II. 229  the  commentary 
explains  caturassa  as  'four  in  hand' ;  but  the  context 
shows  that  the  more  usual  sense  of  caturassa  (see  assa-) 
was  probably  what  the  poet  meant;  Dh  94,  143,  I44 
(bhadra,  a  good  horse),  380  (id.);  Vv  20'  (+  assatar!); 
VvA  78;  DhA  1.392  (hatlhi-assadayo);  Sdhp  367  (dutth"). 
-ajaniya  [cp.  BSk.  asvajaneya  Divy  509,  51 1]  a  thorough- 
bred horse,  a  blood  horse  A  1.77,  244;  II. 113  sq.,  250 
sq.;  III. 248,  282  sq.;  IV. 188,  397;  v.166,  323;  PvA  216. 
See  also  ajaniya.  -aroha  one  who  climbs  on  a  horse,  a 
rider  on  horseback,  N.  of  an  occupation  "cavalry"  D  1.5 1 
(+  haltharoha;  expld-  at  DA  1. 156  by  sabbe  pi  assacariya- 
assavejja-assabhandadayo).  -kanna  N.  of  a  tree,  Vatica 
Robusta,  lit.  "horse-ear"  (cp.  similarly  Goth,  aihva-tundi 
the  thornbush,  lit.  horse-tooth)  J  II. 161;  IV. 209;  VI.528, 
-khalunka  an  inferior  horse  ("shaker"),  opp.  sadassa.  A 
1.287  ^=  >v.397.  -tthara  a  horse  cover,  a  horse  blanket 
Vin  1. 192;  D  1.7.  -damma  a  horse  to  be  tamed,  a  fierce 
horse,  a  stallion  A  11.112;  °sarathi  a  horse  trainer  A  II. 
112,  114;  V.323  sq.;  DhA  IV. 4.  -potaka  the  young  of 
a  horse,  a  foal  or  colt  J  11.288.  -bandha  a  groom  J  II. 
98;  V.449;  DhA  1.392.  -bhanda  (for  "bandha?  or  should 
we  read  °pandaka?)  a  groom  or  horse-trainer,  a  trader  in 
horses  \'in  1.85  (see  on  form  of  word  Kern,  Toiv.  p.  35). 
-bhandaka  horse-trappings  J  11.113.  -mandala  circus 
Vism  308,  cp.  M  1.446.  -mandalika  exercising-ground 
Vin  111.6.  -medha  N.  of  a  sacrifice:  the  horse-sacrifice 
[Vedic  asvamedha  as  Np.]  S  1.76  (v.  1.  sassa°);  It  21 
(+  purisamedha);  Sn  303.  -yuddha  a  horse-fight  D  1.7. 
-rupaka  a  figure  of  a  horse,  a  toy  horse  DhA  11.69 
(-f-  hatthi-rupaka).  -lakkbana  (earning  fees  by  judging) 
the  marks  on  a  horse  D  1.9.  -landa  horse-manure,  horse- 
dung  DhA  IV. 1 56  (hatthi-landa  -f-).  -vanija  a  horse- 
dealer  Vin  111.6.  -sadassa  a  noble  steed  of  the  horse  kind 
A  1.289  =  tv.397  (in  comparison   with  purisa°). 

AsSa^  is  gen.  dat.  sg.  of  aya^,  this. 

Assa^  3.  sg.  Pot.  of  asmi  (see  atthi). 

Assaka'  ( — °)  [assa'-f-ka]  with  a  horse,  having  a  horse; 
an'  without  a  horse  J  vi.515  (-|- arathaka). 

Assaka-  (adj.)  [a  -f  saka;  Sk.  asvaka]  not  having  one's 
own,  poor,  destitute  M  1.450;  11.68;  A  111.352;  Ps  I  126 
(v.  1.  asaka). 


Assatara  [Vedic  asvatara,  asva  -\-  compar.  suffix  tara  in  func- 
tion of  "a  kind  of",  thus  lit.  a  kind  of  horse,  cp.  Lat. 
matertera  a  kind  of  mother,  i.  e.  aunt]  a  mule  Dh  322  = 
DhA  1.2 13;  DhA  IV.4  (=  valavaya  gadrahhena  jata);  J 
IV. 464  (kambojake  assatare  sudante :  imported  from  Cam- 
bodia);   VI.342.  —  f.  aseatari   a  she-mule  Vin  11. 188;  S 


1.154;    11.241;    A    11.73 


Miln    166. 


assatari-ratha  a 


chariot  drawn   by  she-mules  Vv  20',  20*  (T.  assatari  rata) 
=  438;  Pv  I.I  I'  (=  assatariyutta  ratha  PvA  56);  J  VI. 355. 

Assattha'  [Vedic  asvattha,  explJ-  in  K Z  1.467  as  asva-ttha 
dial,  for  asva-stha  "standing  place  for  horses,  which  etym. 
is  problematic;  it  is  likely  that  the  Sk.  word  is  borrowed 
from  a  local  dialect.]  the  holy  fig-tree,  Ficus  Religiosa; 
the  tree  under  which  the  Buddha  attained  enlightenment, 
i.e.  the  Bo  tree  Vin  iv.35;  D  11.4  (samma-sambuddho 
assatthassa  mule  abhisambuddho);  S  v.96 ;  J  1. 16  (v. 75, 
in  word-play  with  assattha*  of  V.79). 

Assattha'^  [pp.  of  assasati;  cp.  BSk.  asvasta  Av.  S  1.210] 
encouraged,  comforted  A  iv.l84(v.  1.  as  gloss  assasaka); 
Ps  1. 13 1  (loka  an";  v.  1.  assaka);  J  1. 1 6  (v.79  cp.  assattha'); 
VI.309  (=  laddhassasa  C),  566. 

Assaddha  (adj.)  [a  -f  saddha]  without  faith,  unbelieving, 
Sn  663;  Pug   13,  20;   Dhs   1327;  DhA  II. 187. 

Assaddhiya  (nt.)  [a  -j-  saddhiya,  in  form,  but  not  in 
meaning  a  grd.  of  saddahati,  for  which  usually  saddheyya; 
cp.  Sk.  asradheyya  incredible]  disbelief  S  1.25;  A  ill. 421; 
V.U3  sq.,  146,  148  sq.,  158,  l6i;  Vbh  371;  DA  1.235; 
Sdhp  80. 

Assama  [S  +  Sram]  a  hermitage  (of  a  brahmin  ascetic 
esp.  a  jatila)  Vin  1.24  =  iv. 108;  126,  246;  III. 147;  Sd 
979;  Sn  p.  104,  in;  J  1.315  (°pada)  v.75  (id.)  321.  Vi.76 
(°pada).  The  word  is  not  found  anywhere  in  the  Canon 
in  the  technical  sense  of  the  later  Sanskrit  law  books, 
where  "the  4  asramas"  is  used  as  a  1. 1.  for  the  four 
stages  in  the  life  of  a  brahmin  priest  (not  of  a  brahmin 
by  birth).  See  Dial.   1.2 1 1 — 217. 

Assamana  [a  -|-  samana]  not  a  true  Samana  Vin  1.96 ;  Sn 
282;  Pug  27  (so  read  for  asamana);  Pug  A  207.  —  f. 
assamanl  Vin  iv.214. 

Assaya  [a  -\-  sayati,  srJ]  resting  place,  shelter,  refuge,  seat 
DA  1.67  (puiiii").  Cp.  BSk.  rajSsraya  Jtm  31";  asraya 
also  in  meaning  "body";  see  Av.  S.  1. 175  &  Index  11.223. 

Assava  (adj.)  [a  +  sunati,  §ru]  loy.il  D  1.137;  Sn  22,  23, 
32;  J  iv.98;  VI.49;  Miln  254;  an°  inattentive,  not 
docile  DhA  1.7. 

Assavati  [a  +  Srtl]  to  flow  J  11.276  (=  paggharali  C). 
Cp.  also  asavati. 

Assavanata  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  assavana]  not  listening  to,  in- 
attention M  1. 168. 

Assavaniya  (adj.)  [a  -\-  savanlya]  not  pleasant  to  hear 
Sdhp  82. 

Assasati  [a  +  Svas,  on  semantical  inversion  of  a  &  pa 
see  under  a'  3]  I.  to  breathe,  to  breathe  out,  to  exhale, 
J  I  163;  VI. 305  (gloss  assasento  passasento  susu  ti  saddar) 
karonto);  Vism  272.  Usually  in  comb"-  with  passasati  to 
inhale,  i.  e.  to  breathe  in  &  out,  D  11.291  =  M  1.56,  cp. 
M  1.425 ;  J  IT. 53,  cp.  V.36.  —  2.  to  breathe  freely  or 
quietly,  to  feel  relieved,  to  be  comforted,  to  have  courage 
S  IV.43 ;  J  IV. 93  assasitvana  ger.  =  vissamitva  c);  vi.190 
(assasa  imper.,  with  ma  soci);  med.  assase  J  IV. 5 7  (C. 
for  asmase  T. ;  expl^.  by  vissase).  III  (°itva).  —  3.  to 
enter  by  the  breath,  to  bewitch,  enchant,  take  possession 
J  IV. 495  {=  assasa-vatena  upahanati  avisati  C).  —  Cans, 
assasati.  —  pp.  assattha'^.  See  also  assasa-passasa. 


Assad  a 


91 


Ahai) 


Assada  [S  +  sadiyali,  SVad]  taste,  sweetness,  enjoyment, 
satisfaclion  D  t.22  (vedanaoai)  samudaya  atthangama  assada 
etc.);  M  1.85;  S  11.84  sq.  Canupassin),  170  sq.;  111.27  sq. 
(Uo  rupassa  assado),  62,  102;  iv.8  sq.,  220;  v. 193,  203 
sq.;  A  1.50  Canupassin),  258,  260;  II. 10;  111.447  ("ditthi) 
J  1.508;  IV.113,  Sn  448;  Ps  1.139  sq.,  ("ditthi),  157; 
cp.  l.io";  Pv  1V.62  (kam°);  Vbh  368  ("ditthij-  Nett  27 
sq.;  Miln  38S ;  Vism  76  (paviveka-ras^);  Sdhp  37,  51. 
See  also  appassada  under  appa. 

Assadana  (f)  [cp.  assada]  sweetness,  taste,  enjoyment  S 
I  124:   Sn  447  (=  sadubhava  SnA  393). 

Assadetl  [Denom.  fr.  assada]  to  taste  S  U.227  (labha-sakkara- 
silokaij);  Vism  73  (paviveka-sukba-rasai));  DhA  1.318. 

Ass&raddha  v.  l.  at  It  m  for  asaraddha. 

Assavin  (adj.)  [a  -(-  sru]  only  in  an°  not  enjoying  or 
finding  pleasure,  not  intoricated  Sn  853  (satiyesu  a.  = 
sata-vatthusa  kSmagunesu  tanha-santhava-virahita  SnA  549). 
See  also  asava. 

Assasa  [Sk.  asvasa,  a  +  ivas]  l-  (lit.)  breathing,  esp. 
breathing  out  (so  Vism  272),  exhalation,  opp.  to  passasa 
inhalation,  with  which  often  combd  or  contrasted;  thus 
as  cpd.  assasa-passasa  meaning  breathing  (in  &  out),  sign 
of  life,  process  pf  breathing,  breatli  D  11.157  =  S  1.159  = 
Th  I,  905;  D  III. 266;  M  1.243;  S  1.106;  IV. 293;  V.330, 
336,  A  IV.409;  v.135^  J  11146;  VI.82;  Miln  31,  85; 
Vism  116,  197.  —  assasa  in  contrast  with  passasa  at  Ps 
1.95,  164  sq.,  182  sq.  —  2.  (fig.)  breathing  easily,  freely 
or  quietly,  relief,  comfort,  consolation,  confidence  M  1.64; 
S  11.50  (dhanima-vinaye) ;  IV.254  (param-assasa-ppatta):  A 
1.192;  111.297  sq.  (dhamma-vinaye);  iv.lSs;  J  VI. 309  (see 
assaltha*);  Miln  354;  PvA  104  (°malta  only  a  little 
breathing  space);  Sdhp   299  (param'),  313. 

Assasaka  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  ass.asa]  I.  (cp.  assasa  l)  having 
breath,  breathing,  in  an°  not  able  to  draw  breath  Vin 
111.84;  'V.I  11.  —  2.  (cp.  assasa'^)  (m.  &  nt.)  that  which 
gives  comfort  iV  relief,  confidence,  expectancy  J  1.84;  VI. 
150.  Cp.  next. 

ASSasika  (adj.)  [fr.  assasa  in  meaning  of  assasa  2,  cp. 
asiasaka  2]  only  in  neg.  an"  not  able  to  afford  comfort, 
giving  no  comfort  or  security  M  1.514;  III. 30;  J  11.298 
(=  aiiilar)  assasetur)  asamatthataya  na  assasika).  Cp.  BSk. 
anasvasika  in  ster.  phrase  anitya  adhruva  anasvasika  vi- 
parinamadharman  Divy  207;  Av.  S.  139,  144;  whereas 
the  corresp.  Pali  equivalent  runs  anicca  addhuva  asassata 
(=  appayuka)  viparinama-dhamma  thus  inviting  the  con- 
jecture that  BSk.  asvasika  is  somehow  destorted  out  of 
P.  asassata. 

AsSasin  (adj.)  [Sk.  asvasin]  reviving,  cheering  up,  consoled, 
happy  S  IV.43  (an"). 

Assaseti  [Caus.  of  assasati]  to  console,  soothe,  calin,  com- 
fort, satisfy  J   VI.190,  512;   DhA  1.13. 

Assita  (adj.)  [Sk.  asrita,  a  +  pp.  of  Sri]  dependent  on, 
relying,  supported  by  (ace);  abiding,  living  in  or  on  D 
11.255  ('ad°);  Vv  50'"  (slho  va  guhai)  a.):  Th  I,  149 
(janai)  ev'  assito  jano);  Sdhp  401. 

Asslri  (adj.)  [a  -f  sirl]  without  splendour,  having  lost  its 
brightness,  in  assiri  viya  khayati  Nett  62  =  Ud  79 
(which  latter  has  sassar'  iva,  cp.   C.  on  passage  I.e.). 

ASSU'  (nt.)  [Vedic  asru,  Av.  asru,  Lith  aszara,  with  etym. 
not  definitely  clear:  see  Walde,  Lat.  Wlh.  under  lacrima] 
a  tear  Vin  1.87  (assuui  pavatleti  to  shed  tears);  S  11.282 
(id.);  l)h  74;  Th  2,  496  (cp.  ThA  289):  KhA  65;  DhA 
1. 12  ("punna-netta  with  eyes  full  of  tears);  11.98;  PvA  125. 
-dhara  a  shower  of  tears  DhA  iv  15  (pavatlcli  to  shed). 
-mukha  (adj.)  with  tearful  face  [cp.  BSk.  airunnikha  c.  g. 
Jtni  3i'«]  D  1.115,  141:  Dh  67;  Pug  56;  DA  1.284; 
PvA   39.  -mocana  shedding  of  tears  PvA   18. 


Assu'  is  y^  pi.  pot.  of  atthi. 

Assu'  (indecl.)  [Sk.  sma]  expletive  part,  also  used  in  emphatic 
sense  of  "surely,  yes,  indeed"  Sn  231  (according  to  Faus- 
bbll,  but  preferably  with  P.  T.  S.  ed.  as  tayas  su  for  tay' 
assu,  cp.  KhA  188);  Vv  32*  (assa  v.  1.  SS)  =  VvA  135 
(assu  ti  nipata-mattaq).  Perhaps  we  ought  to  take  this 
assu'  together  with  the  foil,  assu*  as  a  modification  01 
ssu  (see  su''').  Cp.  asu. 

Assu*  part,  for  Sk  svid  (and  sma?)  see  under  su'.  Ac- 
cording to  this  view  Fausbolls  reading  ken^  assu  at  Sn 
1032  is  to  be  emended  to  kena  ssu. 

Assuka  (nt.)  [assu'  +  ka]  a  tear  Vin  11.289;  Sn  691 ;  Pv  IV.5'. 

Assutavant  (^dj.)  [a  -f-  sutavant]  one  who  has  not  heard , 
ignorant  M  I.I,  8,  135;  Dhs  1003,  1217,  cp.  Dhs  trsl.  258. 

Aha'  (indecl.)  [cp.  Sk.  aha  &  P.  aho;  Germ,  aha;  Lat. 
ehem  etc.]  exclamation  of  surprise,  consternation,  pain  etc. 
'oh!  alas!  woe!"'.  Perhaps  to  be  seen  in  cpd.  '^kama 
miserable  pleasures  lit.  "woe  to  these  pleasures!")  gloss 
at  ThA  292  for  T.  kamakama  of  Th  2,  506  (expW-  by 
C.  as  "aha  ti  lamaka-pariySyo").  See  also  ahaba. 

Aha-  (— °)  &  Aho  (°— )  (nt.)  [Vedic  ahan  &  ahas]  a  day. 
(i)  °aha  only  in  foil.  cpds.  &  cases:  inslr.  ekdhena  in 
one  day  J  vi.  366;  loc.  tadahe  on  that  (same)  day  PvA 
46;  ace.  katipahai)  (for)  some  or  several  days  J  1.152  etc. 
(kattpaha);  sattahai]  seven  days,  a  week  Vin  1.1;  D  11. 
14 ;  J  IV. 2,  and  freq. ;  anvahai)  daily  Davs  iv.8.  —  The 
initial  a  of  ahai)  (ace.)  is  elided  after  i,  which  often  ap- 
pears lengthened:  kati  'haij  how  many  days?  S  1.7; 
ekSha-dvi  'haq  one  or  two  days  J  1.292 ;  dviha-ti  'han  two 
or  three  days  J  11.103;  ^vA  45;  ekaha-dvl  'h'  accayena 
after  the  lapse  of  one  or  two  days  J  1.253.  —  A  doublet 
of  aha  is  anha  (through  metathesis  from  ahan),  which 
only  occurs  in  phrases  pubbanho  &  sayanba  (q.v.);  an 
adj.    der.  fr.  aha  is  ''abika:  see  pancihika  (consisting  of 

5  days).  —  (2)  aho^  in  cpd.  ahoratta  (m.  &  nt.)  [cp. 
BSk.  ahoratrai)  Av.  S.  1.209]  '■'^  aboratti  (f.)  day  &  night, 
occurring  mostly  in  oblique  cases  and  adverbially  in  ace. 
ahorattaij:  M  1.417  ('anusikkhin);  Dh  226  (id.;  expl"*- 
by  diva  ca  rattiii  ca  tisso  sikkha  sikkhamana  DhA  in. 
324);  Th  1,  145  (ahoratta  accayanti);  J  lv.io8  ("anai) 
accaye);  Pv  11.13'  ('■));  ^'"'"^  82  (ena).  — aborattii]  Dh 
387;  J  VI. 313  (v.  I.  BB  for  T.  aho  va  rattii)). 

Ahaq  (pron.)  [Vedic  ahar)  ^=  Av.  azsm;  Gr.  £>-«(»);  I.at.  ego; 
Goth,  ik,  Ags.  ic,  Ohg.  ih  etc.]  pron.  of  I"  person  "I". — 
noin.  sg.  ahai)  S  111235;  A  iv.53;  Dh  222,  320;  Sn 
172,  192,  685,  989,  1054,  1143;  J  1.61;  11.159.  —  In 
pregnant  sense  (my  ego,  myself,  I  as  the  one  &  only, 
i.  e.  egotistically)  in  foil,  phrases:  yai)  vadanti  mama  .  . 
na  te  ahar)  S  1.116,  123;  ahai)  .asmi  "I  am"  (cp.  ahaq- 
kara  below)  S  1.129;  "l^S,  128  sq.;  IV. 203;  A  11.212, 
215  sq.;  Vism  13;  ahai)  pure  ti  "I  am  the  first"  Vv 
84«o  (^  ahamaharikara  ti  VvA  351).  — gen.  dat.  maybai) 
Sn  431,  479;  J  1.279;  "160,  mama  S  1.115;  Sn  22,  23, 
341,  997;  J  11.159,  &  mamar)  S  1.116;  Sn  253  (=  mama 
C),  694,  982.  —  instr.  maya  Sn  135,  336,  557,  982; 
J  1.222,  279.  —  ace.  mag  Sn  356,  366,  425,  936;  J  11. 
159;  111.26,  &  mamat)  J  111.55,  394-  —  ^°^-  "lay'  Sn 
559;  J  III  188.  The  enclitic  form  the  sg.  is  me,  &  func- 
tions in  diff.  cases,  as  gen.  (Sn  983;  J  11.159),  ="=<=•  (Sn 
982),  instr.  (J  1.138,  222),  &  abl.  —  PI.  nom.  mayai) 
(we)  Sn  31,  91,  167,  999i  J  "'59;  vi.365,  ambe  J  11. 
129,  &   vayai)  (q.v.).  —  gen.  ambakarj  J  1.221;  11.159 

6  asmakag  Sn  p.  106.  —  ace.  ambe  J  1.222;  11.415  & 
asme  J  111.359.  —  instr.  amhebi  J  1150;  11.417  &  as- 
mabhl  ThA  153  (Ap.  132).  —  loc.  ambesu  J  1.222.  — 
The  enclitic  form  for  the  pi.  is  no  (for  ace  dat  \  gen.): 
see  under  vayag. 

-kara   selfishness,  egotism,  arrogance  (see  also  mamai)- 
kara)  M  111.18,  32;  S  11.253;  111.80,  156,  169  sq.;  iv.41, 
197,   202;    A   1.132   sq.;   111.444;  Ud  70;  Nett   127,  and 
!        freq.  passim. 


Ahaha 


92 


Ahosi-kamma 


Ahaha  [onomat.  after  exclamation  ahaha;  see  aha']  I.  ex- 
clamation of  woe  J  111.450  (ahaha  in  metre).  —  2.  (nt.) 
N.  of  a  certain  division  of  Purgatory  (Niraya),  lit.  oh 
woe!  A  V.173  =^  Sn  p.  126. 

Ahasa  [a  -f-  hSsa,  cp.  Sk.  ahasa  &  aharsa]  absence  of  exult- 
ancy, modesty  J  111.466  (=  an-ubbillavitattat)   C). 

AhasI  y^  sg.  aor.  of  harati  (q.  v.), 

Ahl  [Vedic  ahi,  with  Av.  aii  perhaps  to  Lat.  anguis  etc., 
see  Walde  Lat.  Wtd.  s.  v.]  a  snake  Vin  11. 109;  D  1.77; 
S  IV. 198;  A  111.306  sq.;  IV. 320;  V.289;  Nd'  484;  Vism 
345  (+  kukkura  etc.);  VvA   100;  PvA   144. 

-kunapa  the  carcase  of  a  snake  Vin  111.68  =  M  1.73  = 
A  IV.377.  -gaha  a  snake  catcher  or  traifler  J  vi.192. 
-gunthika  (?  reading  uncertain,  we  find  as  vv.  U.  "gun- 
dika,  °guntika  &  "kundika;  the  BSk.  paraphrase  is  °tun- 
dika  Divy  497.  In  view  of  this  uncertainty  we  are  unable 
to  pronounce  a  safe  etymology ;  it  is  in  all  probability 
a  dialectical,  may  be  Non-Aryan,  word.  See  also  under 
kundika  &  gunthika  &  cp.  Morris  in  J  P  T  S.  1886,  153) 
a  snake  charmer  J  1.370  (°gund°);  11.267;  III.348  ("gund"); 
IV.456  (T.  °gunt;  V.  1.  BB  "knpd")  308  (T.  °kund°,  v.  1. 
SS  "gunth"),  456  (T.  ^gunt";  v.  1.  BB  °kund°);  VI.171 
(T.  "gupd";  v.  1.  BB  °kund'°);  Miln  23,  305.  -chattaka 
(nt.)  "a  snake's  parasol",  a  mushroom  D  111.87 ;  J  11.95  i 
L'd  81  (C.  on  VIII.5,  I),  -tundika  =  "gunthika  Vism  304, 
500.  -peta  a  Peta  in  form  of  a  snake  DhA  11.63.  -mekhala 
"snake-girdle",  i.e.  outfit  or  appearance  of  a  snake  DhA 
1. 139.  -vataka  (-roga)  N.  of  a  certain  disease  ("snake- 
wind-sickness")  Vin  1.78;  J  11.79;  IV.200;  DhA  1. 169, 
187,  231;  111.437.  -vijja  "snake-craft",  i.e.  fiirtune-telling 
or  sorcery  by  means  of  snakes  D  1.9  {^^  sappa-dattha- 
tikicchana-vijja  c'  eva  sapp'  avhayana-vijja  ea  "the  art  of 
healing  snake  bites  as  well  as  the  invocation  of  snakes 
(for  magic  purposes)"  DA  1.93). 

Ahiljsaka  (adj.)  [fr.  ahiijsS]  not  injuring  others,  harmless, 
humane,  S  1. 165;  Th   i,  879;  Dh  225;  J   iv.447. 


Ahigsi  (f.)  [a  -|-  hiqsa]  not  hurting,  humanity,  kindness  D 
III. 147;  A  1.151;  Dh  261,  270;  J  IV.71;  Miln  402. 

Ahlta  (adj.-n.)  [a  -\-  hita]  not  good  or  friendly,  harmful, 
bad;  unkindliness  D  111.246;  Dh  163;  So  665,  692;  Miln 
199  (°kama). 

Ahirika  &  Ahirika  (adj.)  [fr.  a  -|-  'i'"]  shameless,  unscru- 
pulous D  111.212,  252,  282;  A  11.219;  Dh  244;  Sn  133 
(°ika);  It  27  (°ika);  Pug  19  (also  nt.  unscrupulousness) ; 
Dhs  365;  Nett  39,   126;  DhA  111.352. 

Ahinlndriya  see  discussed  under  abhlnindriya. 

Ahuvasig  l^'  sg.  pret.  of  holi  (q.  v.)  I  was  Vv  82''  (= 
ahosii]   VvA  321). 

Ahuhaliya  (nt.)  [onomat.]  a  hoarse  &  loud  laugh  J  111.223 
(=  danta-vidai)saka-maha-hasita  C). 

Ahe  (iudecl.)  [=  aho,  cp.  aha']  exclamation  of  surprise  or 
bewilderment:  alas',  woe  etc.,  perhaps  in  cpd.  abevana 
a  dense  forest  (lit.  oh!  this  forest,  alas!  the  forest  (i.e. 
how  big  it  is)  J  v.63  (uttamahevanandaho,  if  reading  is 
correct,  which  is  not  beyond  doubt.  C.  on  p.  64  expl'- 
as  "ahevanar)  vuccati  vanasando"). 

Aho  (indecl.)  [Sk.  aho,  for  etym.  see  aha']  exclamation 
of  surprise,  astonishment  or  consternation :  yea,  indeed, 
well;  I  say!  for  sure!  VvA  103  (aho  ti  acchariy'  atthena 
nipato);  J  1.88  (aho  acchariyaij  aho  abbhutaij),  140.  Usu- 
ally combd-  with  similar  emphatic  particles,  e.  g.  aho  vata 
DhA  11.85;  PvA  131  (=  sadhu  vata);  aho  vata  re  D  i. 
107;  Pv  11.9*5.  Cp.  ahe. 

Ahosi-kamma  (nt.)  an  act  or  thought  whose  kamma  has  no 
longer  any  potential  force:  Cpd.  145.  At  p.  45  ahosika- 
kamma  is  said  to  be  a  kamma  inhibited  by  a  more  power- 
ful one.  See   Buddhaghosa  in  Vism.   Chap.   xix. 


LIST  OF   CORRECTIONS. 


p.   15,  col.   2,  1.   21    fr.  b.  read  symmetry  for  summetiy. 
p.  45,  c<d.  2,  I.  22  fr.  t.  read  anupaghata  for  anupghSla. 


p.   19,  col.   2,  I.  9  fr,  t.  read  atidura  for  atidum. 
p.  54,  col.   2,  I.  22  fr.   t.  read  vowels  for  vorvels. 


THE    PALI    TEXT    SOCIETY'S 
PALI-ENGLISH   DICTIONARY 


EDITED  BY 


T.  W.  RHYS  DAVIDS  F.B.A.  D.Sc.  Ph.D.   LL.D.  D.Litt. 
and  WILLIAM  STEDE  Ph.D. 


Part  II  (A— O) 


PUBLISHED  BY 

THE  PALI  TEXT  SOCIETY 

LONDON 


First  published 

Reprinted 

Reprinted 


1922 
1948 
1952 


93 


Akara 


A'  (iodecl.)  [Vedic  a,  prep,  with  ace,  loc,  abl.,  meauing 
'to,  towards",  &  also  'from".  Grig,  an  emphatic-deictic 
part.  (Idg.  »e)  =  Gr.  ?  surely,  really;  Ohg.  -a  etc.,  in- 
crement of  a  (Idg.  *e),  as  in  Sk.  a-sau ;  Gr.  ixi7  (cp.  a'), 
see  Brugmann,  A^Mrzc  l^erg/.  Gr.  464,  465]  a  frequent 
prefix,  used  as  well-defined  simple  base-prefix  (with  root- 
derivations),  but  not  as  modification  (i.  e.  first  part  of  a 
double  prefix  cpd.  like  sam-a-dhi)  except  in  one  case 
a-ni-sai)sa  (which  is  doubtful  &  of  diff.  origin,  viz.  from 
comb".  asar)sa-nisai)sa,  see  below  3b).  It  denotes  either 
/oiu/i  (contact)  or  a  personal  (close)  relation  to  the  ob- 
ject (a  ti  anussaran'  atthe  nipato  PvA  165),  or  the  aim 
of  the  action  expressed  in  the  verb.  —  (l.)  As/ri'/.  c.  abl. 
only  in  J  in  meaning  "up  to,  until,  about,  near"  J  vi.192 
(a  sahassehi  =:  yijva  s.  C),  prob.  a  late  development. 
As  pit/,  in  meaning  'forth,  out,  to,  towards,  at,  on"  in 
foil,  applications :  —  (a)  aim  in  general  or  iouc/i  in  par- 
ticular (lit.),  e.  g.  akaddhati  pull  to,  along  or  up ;  °kasa 
shining  forth;  °koteti  knock  ar,  "gacchati  go  towards; 
°camati  rin?e  over;  "neti  bring  towards,  aif-dace;  "bha 
shining  forth;  "bhujati  bend  in;  °masati  touch  at;  °yata 
stretched  out;  "rabhati  aC-tempt;  °rohana  a-scending;  °laya 
hanging  on;  °loketi  look  at;  "vattati  ad-vert;  °vahati 
bring  to;  "vasa  dwelling  at;  °sadeti  touch;  "sidati  sit  by; 
"hanati  strike  at.  —  (b)  in  reflexive  function:  close  rela- 
tion to  subject  or  person  actively  concerned,  e.  g.  adati 
take  on  or  up  (to  oneself);  °dasa  looking  at,  mirror; 
°dhara  support;  "nandati  rejoice;  "nisarjsa  sul>jective  gain; 
°badha  being  affected;  "modita  pleased;  °rakkha  guarding; 
°radhita  satisfied;  °rama  (personal)  delight  in;  "lingati 
embrace  (to  oneself);  °hara  taking  to  (oneself).  —  (c)  in 
transitive  function :  close  relation  to  the  object  passively 
concerned,  e.g.  aghalana  killing;  °carati  indulge  in;  °cik- 
khati  point  ont,  explain;  °jiva  living  on;  "napeti  give  an 
order  to  somebody ;  "disati  point  out  to  some  one ;  °bhin- 
dati  cut;  °manteti  ad-dress;  "yacati  pray  to;  "roceti  speak 
to;  sincati  besprinkle;  "sevati  indulge  in.  —  (d)  out  of 
meaning  (a)  develops  that  of  an  intensive-frequentative 
prefix  in  sense  of  "all-round,  completely,  very  much", 
e.g.  akinna  strewn  all  over;  "kula  mixed  up;  °dhuta 
moved  about;  "rava  shouting  out  or  very  much;  "lulati 
move  about ;  "hindati  roam  about.  —  2.  Affinities.  Closely 
related  in  meaning  and  often  interchanging  are  the  foil. 
prep,  (prefixes):  anu  ("bhati),  abhi  ("saqsati),  pa  ("lapati), 
pati  ("kankhati)  in  meaning  I  a — c;  and  vi  (°kirali, 
°ghata,  °cameti,  °lepa,  "lopa),  sam  (°tapati,  °dassati)  in 
meaning  i  d.  See  also  3''.  —  3.  Combinations:  (a)  Inten- 
sifying combns.  of  other  modifying  prefixes  with  a  as  base: 
anu  -f  a  (anva-gacchati,  "disati,  "maddali,  °rohati,  °visati, 
"sanna,  "hata),  pati  -J-  a  (pacca-janati,  "ttharati,  °dati,  °sa- 
vali),  pari  +  a  (pariya-uata.  °dati,  °pajjati,  °harati),  sam -(- a 
(sama-disati,  "dana,  "dhi,  °pajjali,  "rabhati).  —  (b)  Con- 
trast-combns-  with  other  pref.  in  a  double  cpd.  of  noun,  adj. 
or  verb  (cp.  above  2)  in  meaning  of  "up  &  down,  in  &  out, 
to  &  fro";  a  -f-  D'.  avedhika-nibbedhika,  asaqsa-nisarjsa 
(contracted  to  anisar|sa),  aisevita-nisevita;  a-(-pa:  assasati- 
passasati  (where  both  terms  are  semantically  alike;  in 
exegesis  however  they  have  been  differentiated  in  a  way 
which  looks  like  a  distortion  of  the  original  meaning, 
viz.  assasali  is  taken  as  'breathing  ouf\  passasati  as 
"breathing  ;»" :  see  Vism  271),  assasa-passasa,  amodila- 
pamodita,  ahuna-pahuna,  ahuneyya-pahuneyya  ;  a  +  pacca: 
akotita-paccakotita;  a  -)-  pari:  akaddhana-parikaddhana, 
asankita-parisankita;  a  -|-vi:  alokila-vilokita,  avaha-vivaha, 
avethana-vinivethana;  a -(-Sam:  allapa-sallapa:  a -(- sama: 
acinna-samaciniia.  —  4.  Before  double  consonants  a  is 
shortened  to  a  and  words  containing  a  in  this  form  are 
to  be  found  under  a°,  e.  g.  akkamaija,  akkhilta,  acchadeti, 
anfiata,  appoteti,  allapa,  assada. 


A°  *  guna  or  increment  of  a"  in  connection  with  such  suf- 
fixes as  -ya,  -iya,  -itta.  So  in  ayasakya  fr.  ayasaka;  aruppa 
from  arupa;  arogya  fr,  aroga;  alasiya  fr.  alasa;  adhipacca 
fr.  adhipati;  Sbhidosika  fr.  abbidosa  etc. 


A°'  of  various  other  origins  (guna  e.  g.  of  r  or  lengthening 
of  ordinary  root  a°),  rare,  as  alinda  (for  alinda),  asabha 
(fr.  usabha). 

A°  *  infix  in  repetition-cpds.  denoting  accumulation  or  vaiiety 
(by  contrast  with  the  opposite,  cp.  a'  31)),  constitutes  a 
guna-  or  increment-form  of  neg.  pref.  a  (see  a'),  as  in 
foil.:  phaUphala  all  sorts  of  fruit  (lit.  what  is  fruit  & 
not  fruit)  freq.  in  Jatakas,  e.g.  1. 416;  II. 160;  111.127; 
IV. 220,  307,  449;  V.313;  VI. 520;  karanakaranani  all 
sorts  of  duties  J  VI. 333;  DhA  1.385:  khandakbanda 
pele-mele  J  I  114;  111.256;  gandaganda  a  mass  of  boils 
DhA  111.297;  ciracirai)  continually  Vin  iv.261  ;  bhava- 
bbava  all  kinds  of  existences  Su  801,  cp.  Nd'  109;  Nd'^ 
664;  Th  I,  784  (°esu  :=  mahant-amahantesu  bh.  C,  see 
Brethren  305);  ruparupa  the  whole  aggregate  ThA  285  ;  etc. 

Akankhatl  [a  -f  kank$,  cp.  kankhati]  to  wish  for,  think 
of,  desire;  intend,  plan,  design  Vin  11.244  (°amana);  D 
1.78,  176;  S  1.46;  Sn  569  (°amana);  Sn  p.  102  (=  icchali 
SnA  436);  DhA  1.29;  SnA  229;  VvA  149;  PvA  229. 

Akankha  f.  [fr.  a  -|-  kank$]  longing,  wish ;  as  adj.  at  Th 
I,   1030. 

Aka(J4hatl  [a  -|-  kaddhati]  to  pull  along,  pull  to  (oneself), 
drag  or  draw  out,  pull  up  Vin  11.325  (Bdhgh.  for  apa- 
kassati,  see  under  apakasati) ;  iv.219;  J  1. 172,  192,  417; 
Miln  102,  135;  ThA  117  (°eti);  VvA  226;  PvA  68.  — 
Pass,  akaddhiyati  J  11. 122  ("amana-locana  with  eyes  drawn 
away  or  attracted);  Miln  102;  Vism  163;  VvA  207 
("aniana-hadaya  with  torn  heart).  —  pp.  akaddbita. 

Aka(j(jlhana  (nt.)  [fr.  akaddhati]  drawing  away  or  to,  pulling 
out,  distraction  VvA  212  (°parikaddhana  pulling  about); 
DhsA  363;  Miln  154  (°parikaddhana),  352.  —  As  f. 
Vin  III. 121. 

Aka(j(jhita    [pp.    of  akaddheti]  pulled  out,  dragged  along; 
upset,  overthrown  J  111.256  (=:  akkhitta^). 

Akantana(0  a  possible  reading,  for  the  durakantana  of 
the  text  at  Th  l,  1123,  for  which  we  might  read  dura- 
kantana. 

Akappa  [cp.  Sk.  Skalpa  a  -|-  kappa]  I.  attire,  appearance, 
Vin  1.44  (an°)  =  11.213;  J  1. 505.  —  2.  deportment  Dhs 
713   (a°  gamanadi-akaro  DhsA  321). 

-sampanna,    suitably  attired,  well  dressed,  A  111.78;  J 
IV. 542;  an°  sampanna,  ill  dressed,  J  1.420. 

Akamplta  [pp.  of  akampeti,  Caus.  of  a  -(-  kamp]  shaking, 
trembling   Miln   154  (°hadaya). 

Akara  [cp.  Sk.  akara]  a  mine,  usually  in  cpd.  ratan-akara 
a  mine  of  jewels  Th  i,  1049;  J  11. 414;  vi.  459;  Dpvs 
1. 18.  —  Cp.  also  Miln  356;  VvA  13. 

Akassatl  [a  -f-  kassati]  to  draw  along,  draw  after,  plough, 
cultivate  Nd'  428. 

Akara  [a-fkaroli,  kf]  "the  (way  of)  making",  i.e.  (i) 
state,  condition  J  1.237  (avasan°  condition  of  inhabita- 
bilily);  II. 154  (patan°  state  of  falling,  labile  equilibrium), 
cp.  pann°.  —  (2)  properly,  quality,  attribute  D  1.76  (ana- 
vila  sabb°-sampanna  endowed  with  all  good  qualities,  of 
a  jewel);  11. 157  (°varupela);  J  11.352  (sabb"  paripunna 
altogether  perfect  in  qualities).  —  (3)  sign,  appearance, 
form,  D  1.17s;  J  '-266  (chaiak"  sign  of  hunger);  Miln 
24  (°ena  by  the  sign  of..);  VvA  27  (therassa  a.  form 
of  the  Th.);  PvA  90,  283  (ranSo  a.  the  king's  person); 
Sdhp  363.  —  (4)  way,  mode,  manner,  sa-akara  in  all 
their  modes  D  1. 13  =  82  =  III. in  ;  J  1.266  (agaman°  the 
mode  of  his  coming).  Esp.  in  instr.  sg.  &  pi.  with  num. 
or  pron.  (in  this  way,  io  two  ways  etc.):  chah'akSrehi  in 
a  sixfold  manner  Nd'  680  (cp.  kSra^ehi  in  same  sense); 
Nett  73,  74  (dvadasah'Skarehi);  Vism  613  (navah'akSrehi 

II— I 


Ik; 


ara 


04 


Akotana 


indriyani  tikkhani  bhavanti);  PvA  64  (yen'akarena  agato 
ten'akarena  gato  as  he  came  so  he  went),  99  (id.).  — 
(5)  reason,  ground,  account  D  1.138,  139;  Nett  4,  8  sq., 
38;  DhA  1.14;  KhA  100  (in  expl""-  of  evarj).  In  this 
meaning  freq.  with  daSS  (dasseti,  dassana,  nidassana  etc.) 
in  commentary  style  "what  is  meant  by",  the  (statement 
of)  reason  why  or  of,  notion,  idea  PvA  26  (databb°- 
dassana),  27  (thoman^-dassana),  75  (karuan"!)  dassesi), 
121  (pucchan'^-nidassanar)  what  has  been  asked);  SnA  135 
C^nidassana). 

-parivitakka  study  of  conditions,  careful  consideration, 
examination  of  reasons  S  11.115;  IV.  1 38;  A  n.191  := 
Nd«  151. 

Akaraka  (nt.)  [akara  -(-  ka]  appearance;  reason,  manner 
(cp.  akara*)  J   1.269  (akarakena  =  karanena  C). 

Akaravant  (adj.)  [fr.  akara]  having  a  reason,  reasonable, 
founded  M  1.401  (saddha). 

Akasa'  [Sk.  aklsa  fr.  a  +  kas,  lit.  shining  forth,  i.  e.  the 
illuminated  space]  air,  sky,  atmosphere;  space.  On  the 
concept  see  Cfi/.  5,  16,  226.  On  a  fanciful  etym.  of  akasa 
(fr.  a  +  kassati  of  kf^)  at  DhsA  325  see  D/is  trsl.  194.  — 
D  1.55  (°i)  indriyani  sankamanti  the  sense-faculties  pass 
into  space);  III. 224,  253,  262,  265;  S  111.207;  iv-2i8; 
V.49,  264;  J  1.253;  '1-353;  "I-52.  188;  IV.154;  VI.126; 
Sn  944,  1065;  Nd'  428;  Pv  ii.l'S;  SnA  no,  152;  PvA 
93 ;  Sdhp  42,  464.  -akasena  gacchati  to  go  through  the 
air  PvA  75  (agacch°),  103,  105,  162;  °ena  carati  id.  J 
11.103;  °e  gacchati  id.  PvA  65  (cando).  —  Formula 
"ananto  akaso"  freq.;  e.g.  at  D  1.183;  A  11.184;  iv. 
40,  410  sq.;   V.345. 

-anta  "the  end  of  the  sky",  the  sky,  the  air  (on  °anta 
see  anta'  4)  J  vi.89.  -ananca  (or  ananca)  the  infinity 
ef  space,  in  cpd.  ".lyatana  the  sphere  or  plane  of  the 
infinity  of  space,  the  "space-infinity-plane",  the  sphere  of 
unbounded  space.  The  consciousness  of  this  sphere  forms 
the  first  one  of  the  4  (or  6)  higher  attainments  or  re- 
cognitions of  the  mind,  standing  beyond  the  fourth  jbana, 
viz.  (i)  akas°,  (2)  viriiian'anaiic-ayataDa  (3)  akincann'', 
(4)  n^eva  sa5nanSsaB5°,  (5)  nirodha,  (6)  phala.  —  D  1.34, 
183;  11.70,  112,  156;  111.224,  262  sq.;  M  1.40,  159;  III. 
27,  44;  S  V.1I9;  Ps  1.36;  Dhs  205,  501,  579,  1418; 
Nett  26,39;  Vism  326,  340,  453;  DA  1.120  (see  Nd^  under 
akSsa;  Dhs  265  sq.;  Dhs  trsl.  71).  As  classed  with  jhSna  see 
also  Nd2  672  (sadhu-viharin).  -kasina  one  of  the  kasin'aya- 
tanas  (see  under  kasina)  D  111.268;  A  1.4 1,  -ganga  N.  of 
the  celestial  river  J  1.95 ;  111.344.  -gamana  going  through 
the  air  (as  a  trick  of  elephants)  Miln  201.  -carika 
walking  through  the  air  J  11.103.  -carin  =  "carika  VvA  6. 
-^^ha  living  in  the  sky  (of  devata)  Bu  1.29;  Miln  181, 
285;  KhA  120;  SnA  476.  -tala  upper  story,  terrace  on 
the  top  of  a  palace  SnA  87.  -dbatu  the  element  of  space 
D  IU.247;  M  1423;  111.31;  A  1.176;  m-34;  Dhs  638. 

Akasa^  (°'*)  ^  6*™^,  P'^yiig  chess  'in  the  air'  {sans  voir) 
Vin  11.10  =  D  1.6  (=  atthapada-dasapadesu  viya  &kase 
yeva  kilanai)  DA  1.85). 

Akasaka  (adj.)  [akasa -|-ka]  being  in  or  belonging  to  the 
air  or  sky  J  VI.124. 

Akasati  [fr.  akasa']  to  shine  J  vi.89. 

Aklncaiifla  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  akincana]  state  of  having  nothing, 
absence  of  (any)  possessions;  nothingness  (the  latter  as 
philosophical  1. 1.;  cp.  below  "Syatana  &  see  Dhs  trsl. 
74).  —  Sn  976,  1070,  H15  ("sambhava,  cp.  Nd*  I16); 
Th  2,  341  (=  akincanabhava  ThA  240;  trsl.  "cherish 
no  wordly  wishes  whatsoeer");  Nd*  115,  see  akasa; 
Miln   342. 

-ayatana  realm  or  sphere  of  nothingness  (ep.  akasa") 
D  1.35,  184;  11.156;  m.224,  253,  262  sq.;  M  1.41,  165; 


11.254,  263;  m.28,  44,  S   IV.217;  A  1.268;  IV.40,  401;  Ps 
1.36;  Nett  26,  39;  Vism  333.  See  also  jhana  &  vimokkha. 

Akipna  [pp.  of  akirali]  I.  strewn  over,  beset  with,  crowded, 
full  of,  dense,  rich  in  (° — )  Vin  111.130  (°loma  with  dense 
hair);  S  1.204  ("kammanta  "in  motley  tasks  engaged"); 
IV.37  (gamanto  a.  bhikkhuhi  etc.);  A  IU.104  (°viharo); 
IV.4;  V.I 5  (an°  C.  for  appakinna);  Sn  408  (°varalakkhana 
:=  vipula-varalakkh°  SnA  383);  Pv  11.12*  (nana-dijagan° 
:=  ayutta  PvA  157);  Pug  31;  PvA  32  {=  parikinna); 
Sdhp  595.  —  Freq.  in  idiomatic  phrase  describing  a 
flourishing  city  "iddha  phita  bahujana  akinna-manussa", 
e.g.  D  1.211;  U.147  ("yakkha  for  "manussa;  full  of  yak- 
khas,  i.e.  under  their  protection);  A  111.215;  cp.  Miln  2 
(°jana-manussa).  — •  2.  (uncertain  whether  to  be  taken  as 
above  1  or  as  equal  to  avakinna  fr.  avakirati  2)  dejected, 
base,  vile,  ruthless  S  1. 205  =  J  m.309  =  539  =  SnA  383. 
At  K.S.  261,  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  translates  "ruthless"  &  quotes 
C.  as  implying  twofold  exegesis  of  (a)  impure,  and  (b) 
hard,  ruthless.  It  is  interesting  to  notice  that  Bdhgh. 
explains  the  same  verse  differently  at  SnA  383,  viz.  by 
vipula",  as  above  under  Sn  408,  &  takes  akinnaludda  as 
vipulaludda,  i.  e.  beset  with  cruelty,  very  or  intensely 
cruel,  thus  referring  it  to  akinna  1. 

Akiratl  [a  -|-  kirati]  to  strew  over,  scatter,  sprinkle,  disperse, 
fill,  heap  Sn  665;  Dh  313;  Pv  U.4»  (danai)  vipulaq  akiri  = 
vippakirati  PvA  92);  Miln  175,  238,  323  (imper.  akirahi); 
Sn  383.  —  pp.  akinna. 

Aklfitatta  (nt)  [akirita  -f-  tta;  abstr.  fr.  akirita,  pp.  of 
akirati  Caus.]  the  fact  or  state  of  being  filled  or  heaped 
with  Miln  173  (sakatag  dhannassa  a). 

Akllayati  v.  1.  at  KhA  66  for  agilSyati. 

AkuCCa  (or  °a  ?)  [etym.  unknown ,  prob.  non-Aryan]  an 
iguana  J  vi.538  (C.  godha;  gloss  amatt'akucca). 

Akuratl  [onomat.  to  sound-root  *kur  =  *kor  as  in  Lat. 
comix,  corvus  etc.  See  gala  note  2  B  and  cp.  kukkuta 
kokila,  khata  etc.,  all  words  expressing  a  rasping  noise 
in  the  throat.  The  attempts  at  etym.  by  Trenckner  (Miln 
p.  425  as  Denom.  of  akula)  &  Morris  {JPTS.  1886, 
154  as  conlr.  Denom.  of  ankura  "intumescence",  thus 
meaning  "to  swell")  are  hardly  correct]  to  be  hoarse  Miln 
152  (kaptho  akurati). 

Aknla  (adj.)  [a  -f-  *kal  of  wTiich  Sk.-P.  kula,  to  Idg 
»quel  to  turn  round,  cp.  also  cakka  &  carati;  lit.  meaning 
"revolving  quickly",  &  so  "confused"]  entangled,  con- 
fused, upset,  twisted,  bewildered  J  1. 123  (salakaggaq  °g 
karoti  to  upset  or  disturb);  Vv  84"  (andha°);  PvA  287 
(an°  clear).  Often  reduplicated  as  akulakula  thoroughly 
confused  Miln  117,  220;  PvA  56;  akula-pakula  Ud  5 
(so  read  for  akkula-pakkula);  akula-samakula  J  vi.270. — 
On   phrase  tantakula-jata  gula-gunthika-jSta  see  gu)a. 

Aktilaka  (adj.)  [fr.  akula]  entangled  D  11.55  (tanf  for  the 
usual  tantakula,  as  given  under  gu|a). 

Akulaniya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  a  -f-  •kulayali,  Denom.  of  kula] 
in  aa°  not  to  be  confounded  or  upset  PvA  118. 

AknU  (-puppha)  at  KhA  60  (milata'')  read  (according  to 
Index  p.  870)  as  milata-bakula-puppha.  Vism  260  (id.  p.) 
however  reads  akuli-puppha  "tangle-flower"  (r),  cp.  Ud  5, 
gatha  7  bakkula,  which  is  preferably  to  be  read  as  pakula. 

Akotana'  (nt.)  [fr.  akoteti]  beating  on,  knocking  M  1.385; 
Miln  63,  306;  DhsA  144. 

Akotana^  (adj.)  [=  SkoUna']  beating,  driving,  inciting, 
urging  J  VI. 253  (f.  Bko{anI  of  panfia,  expH-  by  ''nivara^Ja- 
patoda-lat^hi  viya  pauni  ko{int  hot!"  p.  254). 


Akotita 


95 


AgaUia 


Akotita  [pp.  of  akoteti]  —  i.  beaten,  touched,  knocked 
against  J  1.303;  Miln  62  (of  a  gong).  —  2.  pressed, 
beaten  down  (tight),  flattened,  in  phrase  akotita- pacca- 
kotita  flattened  &  pressed  all  round  (of  the  civara)  S  it. 
281  ;  Vh\  1.37. 

Akoteti  [a  +  kotteti,  Sk.  kuttayati;  BSk.  akotayati  e.g.  Divy 
117  dvarai)  trir  a°,  Cowell  "break"  (?);  Av.  6.  Index  p. 
222  s.  v.]  —  I.  to  beat  down,  pound,  stamp  J  1.264.  — 
2.  to  beat,  knock,  thrash  Vin  11. 21 7;  J  11.274;  PvA  55 
(anfiamaiiiiar));  Sdhp  159.  —  3.  Esp.  with  ref.  to  knocking 
at  the  door,  in  phrases  aggalar)  koteti  to  beat  on  the 
bolt  D  1.89;  A  IV.359;  V.65';  DA  "1.252  (cp.  aggala); 
dvarai)  a.  J  V.2I7;  DhA  11. 145;  or  simply  akoteti  Vv 
81"  (akotayitvana  ;=  appotetva  VvA  316).  —  4.  (intrs.) 
to  knock  against  anything  J  1. 239.  —  pp.  akotita  (q.  v.). 
Cans.  II.  akotapeti  J  111.361. 

AkhU  [Vedic  akhu,  fr.  a  +  khan,  lit.  the  digger  in,  i.  e. 
a  mole;  but  given  as  rat  or  mouse  by  Halayudha]  a 
mouse  or  rat  Pgdp  10. 

AgaCChatl  [a  -f  gacchati,  gam]  to  come  to  or  towards, 
approach,  go  back,  arive  etc. 

I.  Forms  (same  arrangement  as  under  gacchati):  (i) 
'j/gacch:   prcs.    agacchati    D  1.161;   J  11.153;   Pv  iv.l'i; 

/lit.  agacchissati  J  III. 53;  nor.  agacchi  Pv  11.13';  PvA 
64.  —  (2)  l/gam  :  aor.  agamasi  PvA  8l,  agama  D1.108; 
J  III. 128,  and  pi.  agamiijsu  J  1.118; /«/.  agamissati  VvA 
3;  PvA  122;  gc-r.  agamma  (q.  v.)  &  agantva  J  I.I 51; 
Miln  14;  Cans,  agameti  (q.  v.).  —  (3)  V^ga:  aor.  aga 
Sn  841;  Pv  1. 1 2''  (^agacchi  PvA  64).  —  pp.  agata(q.  v.). 

II.  Meanings:  (i)  to  come  to,  approach,  arrive  D  1. 108; 
Pv  I.ll';  II. 1 3';  Miln  14;  to  return,  to  come  back  (cp. 
agata)  I'vA  81,  122.  —  (2)  to  come  into,  to  result,  deserve 
(cp.  agaraa'^)  D  I.l6l  (garayhai)  thanag  deserve  blame, 
come  to  be  blamed);  Pv  iv.l'i  (get  to,  be  a  profit  to  = 
upakappati  PvA  241).  —  (3)  to  come  by,  to  come  out 
to  (be  understood  as),  to  refer  or  be  referred  to,  to  be 
meant  or  understood  (cp.  agata  3  &  agama  3)  J  1. 1 18 
(tini  pitakani  agamiijsu);  SnA  321;  VvA  3.  See  also 
agamma. 

Agata  [pp.  of  agacchati]  (i)  come,  arrived  Miln  18  (°ka- 
rana  the  reason  of  his  coming);  VvA  78  ("tlhana);  PvA 
81  (kir|  agat'attha  why  have  you  come  here)  come  ty, 
got  attained  (° — )  A  li.llo^Pug  48  (°visa);  Mhvs  XIV. 
28  (°phala  =  anlganuphala)  -agat'agata  (pi.)  people 
coming  &  going,  passers  by,  all  comers  PvA  39,  78,  1 29; 
VvA  190  (Ep.  of  sangha).  -sv'agata  "wel-come",  greeted, 
hailed;  nt.  welcome,  hail  Th  2,  337;  Pv  IV. 3",  opp. 
duragata  not  liked,  unwelcome,  A  11.117,  143,  153;  in. 
163;  Th  2,  337.  —  (2)  come  down,  handed  down  (by 
memory,  said  of  texts)  D  1.88;  DhA  11.35;  KhA  229; 
VvA  30;  agatagamo,  one  to  whom  the  agama,  or  the  ag.i- 
mas,  have  been  handed  down,  Vin  1.127,  337  ;  n  8;  IV.158  ; 
A  11.147;  Miln  19,  21.  —  (3)  anagata  not  come  yet, 
i.e.  future;  usually  in  comb"-  with  atita  (past)  &  pac- 
cuppanna  (present):  see  atlta  and  anagata. 

Agati  (f.)  [a  +  gati]  coming,  coming  back,  return  S  111.53 ; 
J  II. 172.  Usually  opp.  to  gati  going  away.  Used  in  spe- 
cial sense  of  rebirth  and  re-death  in  the  course  of  saqsara. 
Thus  in  agati  gati  cuti  upapatti  D  1. 162;  A  111.54  sq., 
60  sq.,  74;  cp.  also  S  n.67 ;  Pv  11.9''^  (gatii)  agatiij  va). 

Agada(m.)  &  Agadana  (at.)  [a  +  gad  to  speak]  a  word; 

talk,  speech  DA  1.66  (=  vacana). 

Agantar  [N.  ag.  fr.  agacchati]  one  who  is  coming  or  going 
to  come  A  1.63;  11.159;  It  4,  95  (nom.  aganta  only  one 
MS,  all  others  agantva).  an°   A  1.64;  II. 160. 

Agantu   (adj.)   [Sk.   sgantu]  —  I.    occasional,  incidental  J 


'  VI. 358.  —  2.  an  occasional  arrival,  a  new  comer,  stranger 
J   VI. 529  (=r  aganluka-jana  C);  ThA    16. 

Agantuka  (adj.-n.)  [agantu  +  ka;  cp.  BSk.  agantuka  in 
same  meaning  as  P.  viz.  agantuk.l  bhiksavah  Av.  S  1.87, 
286;  Divy  50]  —  I.  coming,  arriving,  new  comer,  guest, 
stranger,  esp.  a  newly  arrived  bhikkhu;  a  visitor  (opp. 
gamika  one  who  goes  away)  Vin  1. 1 32,   167;  11. 170;  III. 

I        65,    181;    IV.24,    A    1. 10;  111.41,  366;  J   VI.333;  Ud  25; 

'  DhA  11.54,  74;  VvA  24;  Pv.\  54.  —  2.  adventitions, 
incidental   (=:  agantu')   Miln   304  (of  megha  &  roga).  — 

3.  accessory,  superimposed,  added  Vism   195. 

-bbatta    food   given   to  a  guest,  meal  for'  a  visitor  Vin 
1.292  (opp.  gamika°);  11.16. 

Agama    [fr.    a-J-gam]  —  l.    coming,   approach,  result,  D 
'•53    (agamanai)    pavattati    ti    DA    1. 160;    cp.    Sdhp    249 
dukkli").  —  2.   that    which    one  goes  by,  resource,  refer- 
ence,  source    of  reference,  text.  Scripture,  Canon;  thus  a 
designation  of(?)  the  Patimokkha,  Vin  11.95  =  249,  or  of 
j        the    Four   Nikayas,    DA    I.I,    2    (dlgh°).    A  def.  at  Vism 
442    runs    'antamaso    opamma-vagga-mattassa   pi  buddha- 
vacanassa    pariyapunanai)".    See    also    agata   2,  for  phrase 
agat'agama,   handed   down    in    the   Canon,   Vin  /oc.   cit. 
Svagamo,  versed  in  the  doctrine,   Pv  iv.i"  (sv°  =  sutthu 
'        agat^agarao,  PvA  230);  Miln  215.  BSk.  in  same  use  and 
I        meaning,   e.  g.    Divy    17,   333,  againani  =  the  Four  Ni- 
kayas.  —  3.    rule   practice,  discipline,  obedience,  Sn  834 
(agama    parivitakkai)),    cp.    Davs    v.22    (takk°,    discipline 
of  right  thought)  Sdhp  224  (agamato,  in  obedience  to).  — 

4.  meaning,  understanding,  KhA  107  (vann°).  —  5.  repay- 
ment (of  a  debt)  J.  vi.245.  —  6.  as  gram.  tt.  "aug- 
ment", a  consonant  or  syllable  added  or  inserted  SnA  23 
(sa-kar'agama). 

Agamana  (nt.)  [fr.  agacchati,  Sk.  same]  oncoming,  ar- 
rival, approach  A  111.172;  DA  1.160;  PvA  4,  81;  Sdhp 
224,  356.  an°  not  coming  or  jelurning  J  1.203,  264. 


Agameti  [caus  of  agacchati]  to  cause  somebody  or  some- 
thing to  come  to  one,  i.  e.  (1)  to  wait,  to  stay  Vin  II. 
166,  182,  2:2;  D  1. 112,  113;  S  1V.291;  PvA  4,  55.  — 
(2)  to  wait  for,  to  welcome  Vin  11.128  (ppr.  Sgamaya- 
mana);  M  1.161   (id.)  j  1.69  (id. -f- kalaq). 

Agamma  (adv.)  [orJg.  ger.  of  agacchati,  q.  v.  under  1.2  for 
form  &  under  11. 3  for  meaning.  BSk.  agamya  in  meaning 
after    the   Pali  form,  e.g.   Divy  95,  405  (with  gen.);  Av. 

5  185,  210  etc.;  M  Vastu  1.243,  S'J].  VVith  reference  to 
(c.  ace),  owing  to,  relating  to;  by  means  of,  thanks  to. 
In    meaning    nearly    synonymous    with    arabbha,  sandhaya 

6  paticca  (see  K.  S.  318  s.  v.)  D  1.229;  I'  7';  J  '-So; 
VI. 424;  Kh  VIII. 14  (=  nissSya  KhA  229);  PvA  5,  21  etc. 

Agamita  found  only  in  neg.  form  anagamita. 

Agamin  (adj.  n.)  [a  -\-  gamin]  returning,  one  who  returns, 
esp.  one  who  returns  to  another  form  of  life  in  saijsSra 
(cp.  agati),  one  who  is  liable  to  rebirth  A  1.63;  11.159; 
It  95.  See  anagamin. 

Agara  (— ")  see  agara. 

Agaraka  &  °ika  (adj.-n.)  ( — °)  [cp.  BSk.  agarika  Divy 
275,  &  agarika]  belonging  to  the  house,  viz.  (1)  having 
control  over  the  house,  keeping,  surveying,  in  cpds.  kot^h' 
possessor  or  keeper  of  a  storehouse  Vin  1.209;  bandhan" 
prison. keeper  A  11.207;  bhand°  keeper  of  wares,  treasurer 
PvA  2  (see  also  bhand").  —  (2)  being  in  the  house,  sharing 
(the  house),  companion  S  111.190  (par|sv°  playmate). 

Aga|ha  (adj.)  (a  -f  gSlha  l ;  cp.  Sk.  samSgadhai)]  strong, 
hard,  harsh,  rough  (of  speech),  usually  in  inslr.  as  adv. 
agalbena  roughly,  harshly  A  1.283,  295 ;  Pug  32  (so  to 
be  read  for  agajhena,  although  Pug  A  215  has  a",  but 
expls-  by  atigalhena  v.-ic.nnena) ;  instr.  f.  agalhaya  Vin  v. 
122  (ceteyya;  Bdhgh.  on  p.  230  reads  agalaya  and  expU. 


Agalha 


96 


Acikkhati 


by   dalhabhavaya).   See   also   Nett   77  (agalha  patipada  a 
rough  path),  95  (id.:  v.  1.   agalha). 

Agilayati  [a  +  gilayati;  Sk.  glayati,  cp.  gilana]  to  be 
wearied,  exhausted  or  tired,  to  ache,  to  become  weak  or 
faint  Vin  n.200;  D  in. 209;  M  1.354;  S  iv.184;  KhA  66 
(hadayai)  a ).  Cp.  ayamati. 

AgU  (nt.)  [for  Vedic  agas  nt.]  guilt,  offence,  S  I.123;  A 
111.346;  Sn  522  =  Nd2  337  (in  expl"-  of  naga  as  agui] 
na  karoti  ti  nago);  Nd>  201.  Note.  A  reconstructed  agas 
is  found  at  Sdhp  294  in  cpd.  akatagasa  not  having  com- 
mitted sin. 

-carin  one  who  does  evil,  D  n.339;  M  11.88;  in. 163; 
S  li.ioo,  128;  A  n.240;  Miln   no. 

Aghata  [Sk.  aghata  only  in  lit.  meaning  of  striking,  killing, 
but  cp.  BSk.  aghata  in  meaning  "hurtfulness"  at  M  Vastu 
1.79;  Av.  S  11.129;  cp.  ghata  &  ghateti]  anger,  ill-will, 
hatred,  malice  D  1.3,  31;  III. 72  sq.;  S  1179;  J  1.113; 
Dhs  1060,  1231;  Vbh  167,  362,  389;  Miln  136;  Vism 
306;  DA  1.52;  VvA  67;  PvA  178.  -anaghata  freedom 
from   ill  will  Vin  II. 249 ;  A  v.8o. 

-pativinaya  repression  of  ill-will;  the  usual  enum"-  of 
a-°  pativinaya  comprises  «;«f,  for  which  see  D  111.262, 
289;  Vin  V.137;  A  IV.408;  besides  this  there  are  sets 
of  five  at  A  111.185  ^^- i  ^"^  '°i  "i  ^^^  °"^  °f  '"'  '•' 
Vin  V.138.  -vatthtl  occasion  of  ill-will;  closely  connected 
with  "pativinaya  &  like  that  enum^.  in  sets  of  nine  (Vin 
V.137;  A  IV.408;  Ps  1. 130;  J  III. 291,  404;  V.149;  Vbh 
389;  Nett  23;  SnA  12),  and  of  ten  (Vin  v.138;  A  v. 
150;  Ps  1.130;  Vbh  391). 

Aghatana  (nt.)  [a  -f  ghata(na),  cp.  aghata  which  has  changed 
Its  meaning]  —  i.  slaying,  striking,  destroying,  killing 
Th  I,  418,  711;  death  D  1. 31  (^  marana  DA  1. 119). — 
2.  shambles,  slaughter-house  Vin  1. 182  (gav°);  A  iv.138; 
J  VI. 113.  —  3.  place  of  execution  Vin  111.151;  J  1.326, 
439;  111.59;  Miln   no;   DhA  iv.52;  PvA  4,   5. 

Aghateti  [Denom.  fr.  aghata,  in  form  =  5  +  ghateti,  but 
diff.  in  meaning]  only  in  phrase  cittai)  a.  (with  loc.)  to 
incite  one's  heart  to  haired  against,  to  obdurate  one's 
heart  Sdhp,   I26=:S  1.151  =  A  v.  172. 

Acatnati  [a  -)-  cam]  to  take  in  water,  to  resorb,  to  rinse 
J  III. 297 ;  Miln  152,  262  (-|- dhamati).  —  Cans.  I.  aca- 
mcti  (a)  to  purge,  rinse  one's  mouth  Vin  II. 142;  M  II. 
112;  A  III. 337;  Pv  IV.I'3  (acamayitva  =  mukhai)  vikkha- 
letva  PvA  241);  Miln  152  ("ayamana).  —  (b)  to  wash 
off,  clean  oneself  after  evacuation  Vin  II. 221.  —  Caus. 
II.  acamapeti  to  cause  somebody  to  rinse  himself  J  vi.8. 

Acamana  (nt.)  [a  -4-  camana  of  cam]  rinsing,  washing  with 
water,  used  (a)  for  the  mouth  D  1.12  (=  udakena  mukha- 
siddhi-karana  DA   1.98);   (b)  after  evacuation  J   III  486. 

-kumbhi  water-pitcher  used  for  rinsing  Vin  1.49,  52; 
11.142,  210,  222.  -paduka  slippers  worn  when  rinsing 
Vin  1. 190;  IM42,  222.  -saravaka  a  saucer  for  rinsing 
Vin  11.142,  221. 

Acama  (f.)  [fr.  a  -\-  cam]  absorption,  resorption  Nd'  429 
(on  Sn  945,  which  both  in  T.  and  in  Sn.\  reads  ajava; 
expld-  by  tanha  in  Nidd.).  Note.  Index  to  SnA  (I'j  in) 
has  acama. 

Acaya  [a  +  caya]  heaping  up,  accumulation,  collection, 
mass  (opp.  apacaya).  See  on  term  Dhs  trsl.  195  &  Cpd. 
251,  252.  —  S  11.94  (kayassa  acayo  pi  apacayo  pi);  A 
Iv.28o  =  Vin  11.259  (opp-  apacaya);  Dhs  642,  685;  Vbh 
3'9,_326,  330;  Vism  449;   DhA  11.25. 

-gamin  making  for  piling  up  (of  rebirth)  A  v.243, 
276;  Dhs  584,   1013,   1397;  Kvu  357. 

Acarati  [a-|-aarati]  —   i.  to  practice,  perform,  indulge  in 


Vin  1.56;  n.ll8;  Sn  327  (acare  dhamma-sandosa-vadaq), 
401 ;  Miln  171,  257  (papaij).  Cp.  pp.  acarita  in  BSk. 
e.  g.  Av.  S  1. 124,  153,  213  in  same  meaning.  —  pp. 
acinna.  —   2.  to  step  upon,  pass  through  J  v. 153. 

Acarin  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  a  -j-  car]  treaching,  f  acarini  a  female 
teacher  Vin  IV. 227  (in  contrast  to  gana  &  in  same  sense 
as  acariya  m.  at  Vin  iv.  130),   317   (id.). 

Acarlya  [fr.  a-|-car]  a  teacher  (almost  syn.  with  upajjhaya) 
Vin  1.60,  61,  119  ("upajjhaya);  11.231;  iv.130  (gano  va 
acariyo  a  meeting  of  the  bhikkhus  or  a  single  teacher, 
cp.  f.  acarini);  D  1.103,  "^  (gan'")  238  (sattamacariya- 
mahayuga  seventh  age  of  great  teachers);  111.189  sq.;  M 
lll.ns;  S  1.68  (gan°),  177;  iv.176  (yogg");  A  1.132 
(pubb°);  Sd  595;  Nd'  350  (upajjhaya  va  ac°);  J  ll.loo, 
411;  IV.91;  v.501  ;  Pv  IV. 3^3^  3^1  (=:  acara-samacara-sik- 
khapaka  PvA  252);  Miln  201,  262  (master  goldsmith?); 
Vism  99  sq.;  KhA  12,  155;  SnA  422;  VvA  138.  — 
For  contracted  form  of  acariya  see  acera. 

-kula  the  clan  of  the  teacher  A  11. 112.  -dhana  a 
teacher's  fee  S  1.177;  A  v.347.  -pacariya  teacher  upon 
teacher,  lit.  "teacher  &  teacher's  teacher"  (see  a'  S^) 
D  1.94,  114,  115,  238;  S  iv.306,  308;  DA  1.2S6;  SnA 
452  (^  acariyo  c'eva  acariyaacariyo  ca).  -bhariya  the 
teacher's  fee  J  v.457  ;  VI. 178;  DhA  1.253.  -mutthi  "the 
teacher's  fist"  i.  e.  close-fistedness  in  teaching,  keeping 
things  back,  D  il.ioo;  S  v.153;  J  11. 221,  250;  Miln  144; 
Sn.\  180,  368.  -vaqsa  the  line  of  the  teachers  Miln  148. 
-vafta  serving  the  teacher,  service  to  the  t.  Dh.\  1. 92. 
-vada  traditional  teaching ;  later  as  heterodox  teaching, 
sectarian  teaching  (opp.  theravada  orthodox  doctrine)  Miln 
148;   Dpvs   v.30;  Mhbv   96. 

Acariyaka  [acariya  -\-  ka,  diff.  from  Sk.  acariyaka  nt.  art 
of  teaching]  a  teacher  Vin  1.249;  'II-25,  41;  D  1.88, 
119,  187;  11.112;  M  1.514;  11.32;  S  V.261;  A  11.170;  IV. 
310.  See  also  sacariyaka. 

Acama  [Sk.  acama]  the  scum  or  foam  of  boiling  rice  D 
1.166;  M  1.78;  A  1.295;  J  11-289;  Pug  55;  VvA  99  sq.; 
DhA  111.325   ("kundaka). 

Acameti  [for  acameti?  cp.  Sk.  acamayati,  Caus.  of  a +  cam] 
at  M  11.112  in  imper.  acamehi  be  pleased  or  be  thanked  (r); 
perhaps  the  reading  is  incorrect. 

Acara  [a  -|-  car]  way  of  behaving,  condact,  practice,  csp. 
right  conduct,  good  manners;  adj.  ( — °)  practising,  in- 
dulging in,  or  of  such  &  such  a  conduct.  —  Sn  280 
(papa°);J  1.106  (vipassana°);  11.280 (°ariya);  VI. 52  (ariya"); 
SnA  157;  PvA  12  (srla°),  36,  67,  252;  Sdhp  44I.  -an" 
bad  behaviour  Vin  11.118  (°q  acarati  indulge  in  bad  habits); 
Dh.\  11.201   (°kiriya).  Cp.  sain°. 

-kusala  versed  in  good  manners  Dh  376  (cp.  DhA 
IV. Ill),  -gocara  pasturing  in  good  conduct;  i.e.  practice 
of  right  behaviour  D  1.63  =  It  118;  M  1.33;  S  V.187; 
A  1.63  sq.;  11.14,  39;  I"-'I3,  «S5,  262;  IV.140,  172, 
352;  V.71  sq.,  89,  133,  198;  Vbh  244,  246  (cp.  Miln 
368,  370,  quot.  Vin  III. 185);  Vism  1.8.  -vipatti  failure 
of  morality,  a  slip  in  good  conduct   Vin  1.171. 

Acarin  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  acara]  of  good  conduct,  one  who  be- 
haves well  A  1.211  (anacari  virata  1.  4  fr.  bottom  is  better 
read  as  acSrl  virato,  in  accordance  with  v.  1.). 

Acikkhaka  (adj.  n.)  [a  -j-  cikkha  -|-  ka  of  cikkhati]  one 
who  tells  or  shows  DhA  1.71. 

Acikkhati  [Freq.  of  a  +  khya,  i.  e.  akkhati]  to  tell,  relate, 
show,  describe,  explain  D  i.lio;  A  11  189  (atthaq  a  to 
interpret);  Pug  59;  Dh.-V  1. 14;  SnA  155;  PvA  121,  164 
(describe).  —  imper.  pres.  acikkha  Sn  1097  (=:  bruhi  Nd'^ 
119  &  455);  Pv  1. 10";  II. 8';  and  acikkhahi  DhA  11.27. — 
aor.  acikkbi  PvA  6,  58,  61,  83.  —  acikkhati  often  occurs 


Acikkhati 


97 


Ana 


in    stock   phrase  acikkhati  deseti  pannapeti  patthapeti  vi-    j 
varati  etc.,  e.g.  Nd'  271;  Nd^  465;  Vism  163.  —  altanai) 
a.    to   disclose  one's  identity  PvA  89,  100.  —  pp.  acik-    ! 
khita   (q.  v.).  —  Caus.    II.    acikkhapefi    to   cause  some-    j 
body  to  tell  DhA  11.27. 

Acikkhana  (adj.-nt.)  [a  -|-  cikkhana  of  cikkhati]  telliog, 
announcing  J   111.444 ;  PvA   121.  j 

Acikkhita    [pp-    of   acikkhati]    shown,   described,  told  PvA    j 
154  ("niagga),  203  (an°  =3  anakkhata). 

Aclkkhitar  [n.  ag.  fr.  acikkhati]  one  who  tells  or  shows 
DhA  II. 1 07  (for  pavattar). 

Aci^a  [pp.  of  acinati?  or  is  it  distorted  from  acinna?]  ac- 
cumulated; practised,  performed  Dh  121  (papaq  =  papaq 
acinanto  karonto  DhA  Iii.i6).  It  may  also  be  spelt  acina. 

Aclp^a  [a  -|-  cinna,  pp.  of  acarati]  practiced,  performed, 
(habitually)  indulged  in  M  1.372  (kamma,  cp.  Miln  226 
and  the  expl"-  of  acinnaka  kamma  as  "chronic  kavma" 
at  CpJ.  144);  S  IV. 419;  A  V.74  sq.;  J  1.81;  D.\  1.91 
(for  avicinna  at  D  1.8),  275;  Vism  269;  Dh.\  1.37  ("sa- 
macinna  thoroughly  fultilled);  VvA  108;  PvA  54;  Sdhp  90. 
-kappa  ordinance  or  rule  of  right  conduct  or  customary 
practice(r)  Vin  1.79;   11.301 ;   Upvs  iv.47;  cp.  V.18. 

Acita  [pp.  of  acinati]  accumulated,  collected,  covered,  fur- 
nished or  endowed  with  J  VI. 250  (=  nicita);  Vv  41'; 
DhsA  310.  See  also  acina. 

Acinati  [a  +  cinati]  to  heap  up,  accumulate  S  III. 89  (v.  1. 
acinati);  iv.73  (ppr.  acinato  dukkhaq);  DhsA  44.  —  pp. 
acita  &  acina  (acina).  —  Pass,  aciyati  (q.  v.). 

Aciyati  (&  Aceyyati)  [Pass,  of  acinati,  cp.  ciyati]  to  be 
heaped  up,  to  increase,  to  grow ;  ppr.  aceyyamana  J  v. 6 
(=  aciyanto   vaddhanto  C). 

Acera  is  the  contracted  form  of  acariya;  only  found  in 
the  Jatakas^  e.  g.  J  IV.24S ;  VI. 563. 

Acela  in  kaiicanacela-bhusita  "adorned  with  golden  clothes" 
Pv  II.12'  stands  for  cela°. 

Ajaiina  is  the  contracted  form  of  ajaniya. 

Ajava  see  acama. 

Ajana  (adj.)  [a  -)-  jSna  from  jng]  understandable,  only  in  cpd. 
durajana  hard  to  understand  S  iv.127;  Sn  145,  162; 
J  I-29S,  300. 

Ajanana  (m.)  [a  -f-  janana,  cp.  Sk.  ajSana]  learning,  knowing, 
understanding;  knowledge  J  1. 181  ("sabhava  of  the  cha- 
racter of  knowing,  fit  to  learn);  PvA  225. 

Ajanati  [a  -)-  janati]  to  understand,  to  know,  to  learn  D 
1. 189;  Sn  1064  Camana  =  vijanamana  Nd^  120).  As 
aiinati  at  Vism  200.  —  pp.  annata.  Cp.  also  anapeti. 

Ajaniya  (ajaniya)  (adj.  n.)  [cp.  BSk.  ajaneya  &  Sk.  ajati 
birth,  good  birth.  Instead  of  its  correct  derivation  from 
a  -|-  jan  (to  be  born,  i.  e.  well-born)  it  is  by  Bdhgh.  con- 
nected with  a  -f-  jiia  (to  learn,  i.  e.  to  be  trained).  See 
for  these  popular  elym.  e.g.  J  I.l8i:  saralhissa  cittaru- 
citai)  karanar)  ajanana-sabhavo  ajanuo,  and  Dh.\  \\'.\:  yai) 
assadamma-sarathi  karanaq  kareti  tas.sa  khippaq  janana- 
samattha  ajaniya.  —  The  contracted  form  of  the  word 
is  ajanna]  of  good  race  or  breed;  almost  exclusively  used 
to  denote  a  thoroughbred  horse  (cp.  assajaniya  under 
assa^).  (a)  ajaniya  (the  more  common  &  younger  Pali 
form):  Sn  462,  528,  532;  J  1.178,  194;  Dpvs  iv.26 ; 
DhA  1.402;  UI.49;  1V.4;  VvA  78;  PvA  216.  —  (b)  aja- 


niya: M  1.445;  A  V.323;  Dh  322  =  Nd^  475.  —  (c) 
ajanna  =  (mostly  in  poetry):  Sn  300=:  304:  J  1.181  ; 
Pv  IV. i'*;  purisajarma  "a  steed  of  man",  i.e.  a  man  01 
noble  race)  S  111.91=:  Th  I,  1084  =  Sn  544  ^  VvA  9; 
A  v.325.  -anajaniya  of  inferior  birth  M  1367. 

-SUSU  the  young  of  a  noble  horse,  a  noble  foal  M  I. 
445  (°upamo  dhamma-pariyayo). 

Ajaniyata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  ajaniya]  good  breed  PvA  214. 

Ajlra[=:ajirawith  lengthened  initial  a]acourtyardMhvs35,3. 

Ajiva  [S  -|- jiva;  Sk.  ajiva]  livelihood,  mode  of  living,  living, 
subsistence,  D  1.54;  A  111.124  (parisuddha'-) ;  Sn  407  (°i) 
^  parisodhayi  =  micchajivaq  hitva  sammajivaq  eva  pavat- 
tayi  SnA  382),  617;  Pug  51;  Vbh  107,  235;  Miln  229 
(bhinna");  Vism  306  (id.);  DhsA  390;  Sdhp  342,  375, 
392.  Esp.  freq.  in  the  contrast  pair  samma-ajiva  & 
miccha-a"  right  mode  &  wrong  mode  of  gaining  a  living, 
e.  g.  at  S  11.168  sq.;  111.239;  v  9;  A1.271 ;  II  53,  240,  270; 
IV.82 ;  Vbh  105,  246.  See  also  magga  (ariyatthangika). 

-parisuddhi  purity  or  propriety  of  livelihood  Miln  336; 
Vism  22  sq.,  44;  Dh.A.  iv.iu.  -Vipatti  failure  in  method 
of  gaining  a  living  A  1.270.  -sampada  perfection  of  (right) 
livelihood  A  1. 271;  DA  1.235. 

AjTvaka  (&  "ika)  [ajiva  -|-  ka,  orig.  "one  finding  his  living" 
(scil.  in  a  peculiar  way);  cp.  BSk.  ajivika  Divy  393, 
427]  an  ascetic,  one  of  the  numerous  sects  of  non-buddhist 
ascetics.  On  their  austerities,  practice  &  way  of  living 
see  esp.  DhA  11.55  sq.  and  on  the  whole  question  Barua, 
B.  M.  The  Ajiviias,  Univ.  of  Calcutta  1920.  —  (a)  aji- 
vika: Vin  1. 291;  11.284;  i\'-74.  9';  M  1.31,  483;  S  I. 
217;  A  111.276,  384;  J  1.81,  257,  390.  —  (b)  ajivika: 
Vin  1.8;  Sn  381  (v.  1.  BB.  °aka). 

-savaka  a  hearer  or  lay  disciple  of  the  ajivaka  ascetics 
Vin  II  130,   165 ;  A  1. 217. 

Ajivika  (nt.)  (or  ajivika  f.?)  [fr.  ajiva]  sustenance  of  life, 
livelihood,  living  Vbh  379  (°bhaya)  Miln  196  (id.);  PvA 
274,  and  in  phrase  ajivik'apakata  being  deprived  of  a 
livelihood,  without  a  living  M  1.463^:5  111.93  (T.  reads 
jivika  pakata)  ==  It   89  (reads  ajivika  pakata)  =:  Miln  279. 

Ajivin  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  ajiva]  having  one's  livelihood,  finding 
one's  subsistence,  living,  leading  a  life  of  ( — °)  D  111.64; 
A  V.190  (lakha°). 

Ata  [etym.?  Cp.  Sk.  ati  Turdus  Ginginianus,  see  Aufrecht, 
Halayudha  p.  148]  a  kind  of  bird  J  vi.539  (=  dabbi- 
mukha  C). 

Ataviya  is  to  be  read  for  ataviyo  (q.  v.)  at  J  vi.55  [= 
Sk.  atavika]. 

Athapana  (f.)  at  Pug  i8  &  v.l.  at  Vbh  357  is  to  be  read 
attbapana  (so  T.  at  Vbh  357). 

Anatija  see  anejja. 

AQanya  see  ananya. 

Anattl  (f.)  [a  -f  natti  (cp.  aniipeli),  Caus.  of  jiia]  order, 
command,  ordinance,  injunction  Vin  I.62;  Kh.\  29;  PvA 
260;  Sdhp   59,  354. 

Aoattika  (adj.)  [anatti  -\-  ka]  belonging  to  an  ordinance  or 
command,  of  the  nature  of  an  injunction  KhA  29. 

Apa  (f)  [Sk.  ajna,  a  -f  jiia]  order,  command,  authority 
Miln  253;  DA  1.289;  KhA  179,  180,  194;  PvA  217; 
Sdhp  347,  576.  raj'ana  the  king's  command  or  authority 
J  '-433;  "'•35')  P^A  242.  anar)  deti  to  give  an  order 
J  1.398;  "9  pavattetl  to  issue  an  order  Miln  189,  cp. 
anapavatti  j  111.504;  iv.  145. 


Anapaka 


98 


Adahati 


Anapaka  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  anapeti]  I.  (adj.)  giving  an  order 
Vism  303.  —  2.  (n.)  one  who  gives  or  calls  out  orders, 
a  town-crier,  an  announcer  of  the  orders  (of  an  authority) 
Miln   147. 

Aoap&na  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  anapeti]  ordering  or  being,  ordered, 
command,  order  PvA   135. 

Anapeti  [a  +  fiapeli,  Caus.  of  a  -|-  jansti  fr.  jna,  cp.  Sk. 
ajnapayati]  to  give  an  order,  to  enjoin,  command  (with 
ace.  of  person)  J  111.351;  Miln  I47;  DhA  11.82;  VvA 
68  (dasiyo),  69;  PvA  4,   39,  81. 

A^Jl  (Vedic  ani  to  anu  fine,  thin,  flexible,  in  formation  an 
»-enlargement  of  Idg.  *olena,  cp.  Ohg.  lun,  Ger.  liinse, 
Ags.  lynes  =  E.  linch,  further  related  to  Lat.  ulna  elbow, 
Gr.  wAf'vij,  Ohg.  elina,  Ags.  eln  ;=  E.  el-bow.  See  Walde, 
Lat.  Wtb.  under  ulna  &  lacertus].  —  I.  the  pin  of  a 
wheel-axle,  a  linch-pin  M  1. 1 19;  S  11.266,  267;  A  11.32; 
Sn  654;  J  VI.253,  432;  SnA  243;  KhA  45,  50.  —  2.  a 
peg,  pin,  bolt,  stop  (at  a  door)  M  1.119;  S  11266  (drum 
stick);  J  IV.30;  VI.432,  460;  Th  I,  744;  Dh  1.39.  — 
3.  (fig.)  (° — )  peg-like  (or  secured  by  a  peg,  of  a  door), 
small,  lifle  in  "colaka  a  small  (piece  of)  rag  Vin  11. 271, 
cp.  1.205  (vanabandhana-colaka);  °dvara  Th  i,  355;  C. 
khuddaka-dvara,  quoted  at  Brethren  200,  trsl.  by  Mrs. 
Rh.  D.  as  "the  towngate's  sallyport"  by  Neumann  as 
"Gestdck"  (fastening,  enclosure)  ani-ganthik^ahato  ayopatto 
at  Vism  108;  DA  r.199  is  apparently  a  sort  of  brush 
made  of  four  or  fire  small  pieces  of  flexible  wood. 

Atanka  [etym.  uncertain;  Sk.  atanka]  illness,  sickness, 
disease  M  1.437;  S  lll.i;  Sn  966  ("phassa,  cp.  Nd'  486). 
Freq.  in  cpd.  appatanka  freedom  from  illness,  health 
(cp.  appabadha)  D  1.204;  ni.l66;  A  III. 65,  103;  Miln 
14.  —  f.  abstr.  appatankata  M  1.124. 

Atankln  (adj.)  [fr.  atanka]  sick,  ill  J  v.84  (=  gilana  C). 

Atata  [fr.  a  -)-  tan,  pp.  tata;  lit.  stretched,  covered  over] 
generic  name  for  drums  covered  with  leather  on  one  side 
Dpvs  .\1V.I4;  VvA  37  (q.  v.  for  enum".  of  musical  in- 
struments), 96. 

Atatta  [a  -f  tatta',  pp.  of  a-tapati]  heated,  burnt,  scorched, 
dry  J   V.69  (°rupa  ^  sukkha-saiira  C). 

Atapa  [a  -j-  tapa]  —  I.  sun-heat  Sn  52;  J  1. 3 36;  Dhs  617; 
Dpvs  1.57;  VvA  54;  PvA  58.  —  2.  glow,  heat  (in  general) 
Pv  1.7';  Sdhp  396.  —  3.  (fig.)  (cp.  tapa^)  ardour,  zeal, 
exertion  PvA  98  (viriya-tapa;  perhaps  better  to  be  read 
°atapa  q.  v.).    Cp.  atappa. 

-varana    "warding   ofl^  the   sun-heat",   i.  e.   a    parasol, 
sun-shade  Davs  1.28;  v.35. 

Atapata  (f.)  [abstr.  of  atapa]  glowing  or  burning  state, 
heat  Sdhp   122. 

Atapatl   [a  -f  tap]   to  burn  J  111.447. 

Atappa  (nt.)  [Sk.  *atapya,  fr.  atSpa]  ardour,  zeal,  exertion 
D  1.13;  111.30  sq.,  104  sq.,  238  sq.;  M  111.210;  S  11.132, 
196  sq.;  A  1.153;  111.249;  1V.460  sq. ;  V.17  sq.;  Sn  1062 
(:=  ussaha  ussolhi  thama  etc.  Nd^  122);  J  111.447;  Nd' 
378;   Vbh   194  (=vayama);   DA  1.104. 

Atapa  [a  -f-  tapa  fr.  tap;  cp.  tSpeti]  glow,  heat;  fig.  ardour, 
keen  endeavour,  or  perhaps  better  "torturing,  mortifica- 
tion" Miln  313  (cittassa  atapo  paritapo);  PvA  98  (viriya"). 
Cp.  atappa  &  atapana. 

Atapana  (nt.)  [a  -|-  tapana]  tormenting,  torture,  mortifica- 
tion M  1.78;  A  1.296  (°paritapana);  n.207  (id.);  Pug  55 
(id.);  Vism  3  (id.). 


Atapin  (adj.)  [fr.  atapa,  cp.  BSk.  atapin  Av.  S  1.233;  "■ 
194  =  Divy  37;  618]  ardent,  zealous,  strenuous,  active 
D  111.58,  76  sq.,  141  (-f  sampajana),  221,  276;  M  1.22, 
56,  116,  207,  349;  ll.li;  111.89,  128,  156;  S  113,  117 
sq.,  140,  165;  11.21,  136  sq.;  I1I.73  sq.;  IV.37,  48,  54, 
218;  V.165,  187,  213;  A  11.13  ^l-j  '"38,  it^'O  sq.;  IV. 
29,  177  sq.,  266  sq.,  300,  457  sq.;  V.343  sq. ;  Sn  926; 
Nd'  378;  It  41,  42;  Vbh  193  sq.;  Miln  34,  366;  Vism 
3  (=viriyava);  Dh.^  1.120;  Sn.\  157,  503.  —  Freq.  in 
the  formula  of  Arahantship  "eko  vupakattho  appamatto 
atapl  pahitatto"  :  see  arahant  II.  B.  See  also  satipafthana, . — 
0pp.  anatapin  S  11.195  5<l-i  ^  "-'3;  I'  27  (-f  anottappin). 

Atapeti  [a -f- tapeti]  to  burn,  scorch;  fig.  to  torment,  in- 
flict pain,  torture  M  1.341  (+  paritapeti);  S  iv.337;  Miln 
314,  3"5- 

Atitheyya  (nt.)  [fr.  ati  +  theyya]  great  theft  (?)  A  1.93 ;  iv. 
63   sq.  (v.  1.  ati"  which  is  perhaps  to  be   preferred). 

AtU  [dialectical]  father  M  1.449  (cp.  Trenckner's  note  on 
p.  567  :  the  text  no  doubt  purports  to  make  the  woman 
speak  a  sort  of  patois). 

Atutnan  [Vedic  atman,  diaeretic  form  for  the  usual  con- 
tracted attan ;  only  found  in  poetry.  Cp.  also  the  shortened 
form  tuman]  self.  nom.  sg.  atumo  Pv  iv.52  {^=  sabhavo 
PvA  259),  atuma  Nd'  69  (atuma  vuccati  atla),  296  (id.), 
&  atumano  Nd'  351;  ace.  atumanar)  Sn  782  (=  attanaij 
SnA  521),  888,  918;  loc.  atume  Pv  11.13"  (=  attani  C). 

Atura  (adj.)  [Sk.  atura,  cp.  BSk.  atura,  e.g.  Jtm  31^"]  ill, 
sick,  diseased;  miserable,  affected  S  ill. I  ("kaya);  A  I. 
250;  Sn  331;  Vv  83''*  (°rupa  =  abhitunna-kaya  VvA 
328);  J  1.197  (^anna  "food  of  the  miserable",  i.e.  last 
meal  of  one  going  to  be  killed;  C.  expl^-  as  raarana- 
bhojana),  211  (^cilta);  11.420  (°anna,  as  above);  111.201; 
V.90,  433;  VI. 248;  Miln  139,  168;  DhA  1. 31  ("rupa); 
PvA  160,  161;  VvA  77;  Sdhp  507.  Used  by  Commenta- 
tors as  syn.  of  atfo,  e.g.  at  J  iv.293;  SnA  489  -ana- 
ttira  healthy,  well,  in  good  condition  S  lll.i;  Dh  198. 

Athabbana  (nt.)  [=  athabbana,  q.  v.]  the  Atharva  Veda  as 
a  code  of  magic  working  formulas,  witchcraft,  sorceiy  Sn 
927  (v.  1.  ath",  see  interpieted  at  Nd'  381;  expW-  as 
athabbanika-manta-ppayoga  at  SnA   564)' 

Athabbanika  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  athabbana]  one  conversant  with 
magic,  wonder-worker,  medicine-man   Nd'   3S1;  SnA  564. 

Adapetl  [Caus.  of  adati]  to  cause  one  to  take,  to  accept, 
agree  to  M   11.104;    S  1. 132. 

Adara  [Sk.  adara,  prob.  a  -\-  dara,  cp.  scmantically  Ger. 
ehrfurcht  awe]  consideration  of,  esteem,  regard,  lespect, 
reverence,  honour  J  v.493;  SnA  290;  DA  1.30;  DhsA 
61;  VvA  36,  61,  101,  321^;  PvA  121,  123,  135,  278; 
Sdhp  2,  21,  207,  560.  -anadara  lack  of  reverence,  dis- 
regard, disrespect;  (adj.)  disrespectful  S  1.96;  Vin  iv.2l8; 
Sn  247  (:=  adara-virahita  SnA  290;  DA  1.284;  VvA  219; 
PvA  3,   5,   54,  67,  257. 

Adarata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  adara]  =  adara,  in  neg.  an°  want 
of  consideration  J  IV.229;  Dhs  1325  =  Vbh  359  (in 
expln-  of  dovacassata). 

Adariya  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  adara]  showing  respect  of  honour; 
neg.  an°  disregard,  disrespect  Vin  11.220;  A  v.146,  148; 
Pug  20;  Vbh  371;  miln  266. 

Adava  [a  -f  dav.i^?]  is  gloss  at  VvA  216  for  maddava  Vv 
512'';  meaning:  excitement,  adj.  exciting.  The  passage  in 
VvA  is  somewhat  corrupt,  &  therefore  unclear. 

Adahati'  [a  -|-  dahati']  to  put  down,  put  on,  settle,  fix 
Vism  289  (samai)  a.  =  samadahati).  Cp.  sam°  and  adhiyati. 


Adahati 


99 


Adiyati 


Adahati'  [a  +dabati^]  to  set  fire  to,  to  burn  J  vi.zoi,  203. 

Ada  [ger.  of  adali  from  reduced  base  *da  of  dadati  l^] 
taking  up,  taking  to  oneself  Vin  IV. 1 20  (=:  anadiyilva 
C. ;  cp.  the  usual  form  adaya). 

AdatI  (Adadati)  [a  -f-  dadati  of  dadati  base  I  da]  to  take 
up,  accept,  appropriate,  grasp,  seize;  grd.  adatabba  Vin 
1.50;  inf.  adaturj  Dm  133  (adinnai)  theyyasankhaiai)  a.). — 
ger.  ada  &  adaya  (see  sep.);  grd.  adeyya,  Caus.  ada- 
peti  (q.  v.).  —  See  also  adiyati  &  adeti. 

Adana  (nt.)  [ad  +  ana,  or  directly  from  a  +  dfi,  base  I 
of  dadati]  taking  up,  getting,  grasping,  seizing;  fig.  ap- 
propriating, clinging  to  the  world,  seizing  on  (worldly 
objects),  (i)  (lit.)  takicg  (food),  pasturing  M  m.133;  J 
V.371  (&  °esana).  —  (2)  getting,  acquiring,  taking,  seizing 
S  11.94;  A  IV.400  (dand°);  I'vA  27  (phal");  esp.  freq. 
in  adinn°  seizing  what  is  not  given,  i.e.  theft:  see  under 
adinna.  —  (3)  (fig)  attachment,  clinging  A  v. 233,  253 
(°patinissagga);  Dh  89  (id.;  cp.  DhA  11.163);  Sn  1 103 
(°tanha),  H04  (°satta);  Nd'  98  ("gantha);  Nd*  123,  124. 
-an°  free  from  attachment  S  1.236  (sadanesu  anadano  "not 
laying  hold  mong  them  that  grip"  trsl.);  A  11. 10;  It 
109;  J  IV. 354;  Miln  342;  DhA  IV.70  (=  khandhadisu 
niggahano).  Cp.  upa°,  pari". 

Adaya  [ger.  of  adati,  either  from  base  I  of  dadati  (da)  or 
base  2  (day).  See  also  adiya]  having  received  or  taken, 
taking  up,  seizing  on,  receiving;  freq.  used  in  the  sense 
of  a  prep,  "with"  (c.  ace.)  Sn  120,  247,  452;  J  V.13; 
Vbh  245;  DliA  11.74;  SnA  139;  PvA  10,  13,  38,  61 
etc.  —  At  Vin  1.70  the  form  adaya  is  used  as  a  noun  f. 
adaya  in  meaning  of  "a  casually  taken  up  belief"  (lassa 
Sdayassa  vanne  bhanati).  Cp.  upa°,  pari". 

Adayin  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  a  +  dadati  base  2,  cp.  adaya]  taking 
up,  grasping,  receiving;  one  who  takes,  seizes  or  appro- 
priates D  1.4  (dinn°);  A  iu.80;  V.137  (sar°);  DA  1.72. 

Adasa  [Sk.  adarsa,  a  4-  dfi,  P.  dass,  of  dassati '  2]  a  mir- 
ror Vin  II.  107;  D  1.7,  II  (°paiiha  mirror-questioning,  cp. 
DA  1.97:  "adase  devatai]  otaretva  paiiha-pucchanai)"),  80; 
11.93  (dhamna'-adasai]  nama  dhamma-pariyayai)  desessarai) ; 

5  V.357  (id.);  A  V.92,  97  sq.,  103;  J  1.504;  Dhs  617 
(°mandala);  Vism  591  (in  simile);  KhA  50  (°danda)  237; 
DhA  i.226. 

-tala  the  surface  of  the  mirror,  in  similes  at  Vism  450, 
456,  489. 

Adasaka  =  adasa  Th  2,  411. 

Adl  [Sk.  adi,  etym.  uncertain]  —  i.  (m.)  slarling-point  be- 
ginning Sn  358  (ace.  adiq  =  karanaq  SnA  351);  Dh  375 
(nom.  adi);  Miln  10  (adimhi);  J  vi.567  (abl.  adito  from 
the  beginning).  For  use  as  nt.  see  below  2  b.  —  2.  (adj. 

6  adv.)  (a)  C — )  beginning,  initially,  first,  principal, 
chief:  see  cpds.  —  (b)  (° — )  beginning  with,  being  the 
first  (of  a  series  which  either  is  supposed  to  be  familiar 
in  its  constituents  to  the  reader  or  hearer  or  is  immedi- 
ately intelligible  from  the  context),  i.  e.  and  so  on,  so 
forth  (cp.  adhika);  c.  g.  rukkha-gumb-adayo  (ace.  pi.) 
trees,  jungle  etc.  J  1.150;  ambapanas^  adihi  rukkehi  sam- 
panno  (and  similar  kinds  of  fruit)  J  1.278;  amba-labuj'adi- 
nai)  phalanai]  anto  J  11.159;  asi-satti-dhamiadini  avudhani 
(weapous,  such  as  sword,  knife,  bow  &  the  like)  J  1.150; 
kasi-gorakkh^  adini  karonte  manusse  J  11.128;  . .  .  ti  adina 
nayena  in  this  and  similar  ways  J  1.81 ;  PvA  30.  Abso- 
lute as  nt.  pi.  adini  with  ti  (evai))  (adini),  closing  a 
quotation,  meaning  "this  and  such  like",  e.  g.  at  J  11.128, 
416  (ti  adini  viravitvl).  —  In  phrase  adiq  katva  meaning 
"putting  (him,  her,  it)  first",  i.e.  beginning  with,  from  .  . . 
on,  from  .  .  .  down  (c.  ace.)  e.  g.  DhA  1.393  (rajanai)  adii) 
K.  from  the  king  down);  PvA  20  (viharai)  adikatva),  21 
(pancavaggiye  adiq   K.). 

-kammika  [cp.  BSk.  adikaimaka  Divy  544]  a  beginner  Vin 


111.116;  iv.ioo;  Miln  59;  Vism  241;  DhsA  187.  -kalyana 
in  phrase  adikalyS^a  tnajjhe-kalyana  pariyosana-kalyana  of 
the  Dhamma,  "beautiful  in  the  beginning,  the  middle  & 
the  end"  see  references  under  dbamma  C.  3  and  cp.  DA 
I.I 75  (=  adimhi  kalyana  etc.);  SnA  444;  abstr.  "kalya- 
nata  Vism  4.  -pubbatigama  original  Dpvs  iv.26.  -brah- 
macariyaka  belonging  to  the  principles  or  fundaments 
of  moral  life  D  1.189;  111.284;  M  '^SM  ll-'25,  211;  HI. 
192;  S  11.75,  223;  IV.91;  V.417,  438;  f.  °iia  Vin  1.64, 
68;  A  1. 231  sq.  -majjbapariyosana  beginning,  middle 
&  end  Miln  10;  cp.  above  adikalyana. 

Adika(adj.)[adi  -|- ka]  from  the  beginning,  initial  (see  adhika); 
instr.  adikena  in  the  beginning,  at  once,  at  the  same  time 
M  1.395,  479;  "-213;  S  11.224;  J  VI.567.  Cp.  adiya'. 

AdiCCa  [Vedic  aditya]  the  sun  S  1. 15,  47;  11.284;  UI156; 
v.44,  101;  A  1.242;  V.22,  263,  266  sq.;  It  85;  Sn  550, 
569,  1097  ("adicco  vuccati  suriyo"  Nd'^  125);  DhA  iv. 
143;  Sdhp  14,  17,  40. 

-upattbana  sun-worship  D  i.u  (^  jivikatthgya  adicca- 
paricariya  DA  1.97);  J  11.72  (°jalaka;  adiccai)  upatitthati 
p.  73  =  suriyai)  namassamano  titthati  C).  -patha  the 
path  of  the  sun,  i.e.  the  sky,  the  heavens  Dh  175  (= 
akasa  Dh.\  III. 177).  -bandhu  "kinsman  of  the  sun",  Ep. 
of  the  Buddha  Vin  11.296;  S  1.186,  192;  A  11.54;  Sn  54, 
915,  1128;  Nd'  341;  Nd2  i25l>;  Vv  42',  78'";  VvA  116. 

AdIOOa  [3k.  adirna,  pp.  of  a  +  df,  see  adiyati^]  broken, 
split  open  S  IV.  193  (:=  sipatika  with  burst  pod);  cp. 
M  1.306. 

Adlooata  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  adinna]  state  of  being  broken  or 
split  Ps  I  49. 

Aditta  [a  +  ditta',  Sk.  adipta,  pp.  of  a  -f-  dip]  set  on  fire, 
blazing,  burning  Vin  1.34;  Kv  209  (sabbar)  adittarj);  S 
111.71;  1V.19,  108;  A  IV.320  (°cela);  Sn  591;  J  iv.391 ; 
Pv  l.8»  (=paditta  jalita  PvA  41);  Kvu  209;  DA  I.264; 
PvA   149;  Sdhp  599. 

-pariyaya  the  discourse  or  sermon  on  the  fire  (lit.  being 
in  fllames)  S  iv.168  sq. ;   Vin  1.34;  DhA  1.88. 

Adina  only  at  D  I  115  (T.  reading  adina,  but  v.  1.  S  id. 
adina,  B  p.  abhinna)  in  phrase  adina-khattiya-kula  prim- 
ordial. See  note  in  Dia/.  1.148. 

Adiya'  (adj.)  grd.  of  admi,  ad,  Sk.  adya]  edible,  eatable 
A  111.45  (bhojanani). 

Adiya'^  in  °mukha  is  uncertain  reading  at  A  in.  164  sq. 
(vv.  11.  adeyya"  &  adheyya),  meaning  perhaps  "grasp- 
month",  i.  e.  gossip  ;  thus  equal  to  ger.  of  adiyati'.  Per- 
haps to  be  taken  to  adiyati*.  The  same  phrase  occurs  at 
Pug  65  (T.  adheyya",  C.  has  v.  1.  adheyya")  where  Pug 
A  248  expl"s.  "adito  dheyyamukho,  pathama-vacanasmiq 
yeva  thapita-mukho  ti  attho"  (sticking  to  one's  word?). 
See  adheyya. 

Adiya'  =  adika,  instr.  adiyena  in  the  beginning  J  vi.567 
(=  adikena  C). 

Adiya*   ger.  of  adiyati. 

Adiyati  [a  +  diyati,  med.  pass,  base  of  dadati<,  viz.  di°  & 
di° ;  see  also  adati  &  adeti]  to  take  up:  take  to  oneself, 
seize  on,  grasp,  appropriate,  fig.  take  notice  of,  take  to 
heart,  heed.  —  pres.  adiyati  A  iij.46;  Sn  119,  156,  633, 
785,  Nd'  67;  Nd»  123,  124;)  111.296:  V.367.  —  pot. 
adiye  Sn  400;  imper.  adiya  M  111.133  (so  read  for 
adissa?).  —  aor.  adiyi  D  111.65;  A  111.209,  idiySsi  Pv 
iv.i<8  (sayaq  daijdai)  a.  =  acchinditva  ganhasi  PvA  241), 
&  adapayi  (Caus.  formation  fr.  adati?)  to  take  heed  S 
1. 1 32  (v.  1.  adiyi,  trsl.  "put  this  into  thy  mind").  —  ger. 
adiyitva  Vin  iv.120  (=5da);  J  11.224  (C.  for  adiya  T.); 
111.104;  >v.352  (an°  not  heeding;  v.  1.  anaditva,  cp.  ana- 
diyanto    not    attending   J  111.196);  Dh.\  III. 32  (id.);  PvA 


Adiyati 


Adiyati  [S  +  diyati,  Sk.  adiryate,  Pass,  of  df  to  split :  see 
etym.  under  darl]  to  split,  go  asunder,  break  Ps  1.49.  — 
pp.  adinna.  See  also  avadiyati,  Cp.  also  upadinna. 

Adlyanata  (f.)  [abstr.  formation  adiyana  (fr.  adiya  ger.  of 
adiyati)  +  ta]  in  an"  the  fact  of  not  taking  up  or  heeding 
SnA  516. 

Adlsati  [a  +  disati]  (a)  to  announce,  tell,  point  out,  refer 
to.  —  (b)  to  dedicate  (a  gift,  dakkhinai)  or  danaq).  — 
pres.  ind.  adisati  D  1.213^  A  1.170  (tell  or  read  one's 
character);  Sn  1 1 12  (atitaq);  Nd'  382  (nakkhattaq  set 
the  horoscope);  Miln  294  (danaq);  pot.  adiseyya  Th  2, 
307  (dakkhinaq);  Pv  iv.i^"  (id.  =  uddiseyya  PvA  228}, 
&  adise  Vin  1.229  =  D  11.88  (dakkhinarj) ;  imper.  adisa 
PvA  49.  —  fut.  adissati  Th  2,  308  (dakkhinaq)  Pv.\ 
88  (id.).  — aor.  adisi  Pv  11.28;  PvA  46  (dakkhinari);  pi. 
adisii]su  ibid.  53  (id.)  &  adisuq  Pv  1. 10"  (id.).  —  ger. 
adissa  Vin  ni.127;  Sn  1018;  Pv  ii.i''(danar|),  &  adisitvana 
Th  2,  311.  —  grd.  adissa  (adj.)  to  be  told  or  shown  M  1.12. 

Adiso  (adv.)  [orig.  abl.  of  adi,  formed  with  °sah]  from  the 
beginning,  i.e.  thoroughly,  absolutely  D  1. 180;  M  111.208. 

Adissa  at  M  III.133  is  an  imper.  pres.  meaning  "take",  & 
should  probably  better  be  read  adiya  (in  corresponsion 
with  adana).  It  is  not  grd.  of  adisati,  which  its  form 
might  suggest. 

Adina  at  D  1.115  ^  S  v.  74  (w.  11.  adina,  &  abhinna)  see 
adina.  See  dlpna. 

Adinava  [a  +  dina  -j-  va  (nt.),  a  substantivised  adj.,  orig. 
meaning  "full  of  wretchedness",  cp.  BSk.  adinava  M  Vastu 
III.297  (misery);  Divy  329]  disadvantage,  danger  (in  or 
through  =  loc.^  D  1.38  (vedananaq  assadan  ca  adinavaii 
ca  etc.),  213  (iddhi-patihariye  M  1. 318;  S  1.9  (etlha  bhiyo); 
11.170  sq.  (dhatunar));  111.27,  62,  102  (rupassa  etc.);  IV.7, 
168;  A  1.57  (akaraniye  kayiramane)  258  (ko  loke  assado); 
111.250  sq. ;  267  sq.  (duccarite),  270  (puggala-ppasade); 
IV. 439  sq.;  V.81;  J  1.146;  IV.2;  It  9  =  A  11.10  =  Nd- 
172a;  Sn  36,  50  (cp.  Nd-!  127),  69,  424,  732;  Th  2,  17 
(kaye  a.  =  dosa  ThA  23),  485  (kamesu  a.  =  dosa  ThA 
287);  Pv  lll.io''  (=  dosa  PvA  214);  iv.ei  (^  dosa  PvA 
263);  Ps  1. 192  sq.;  11.9,  10;  PvA  12,  208.  —  There  are 
several  sets  of  sources  of  evil  or  danger,  viz.  five  dussi- 
lassa  slla-vipattiya  a.  at  D  11.85  =  I'l-^SS  =  A  111.252; 
five  akkhantiya  a.  at  Vbh  378;  si.\  of  six  each  at  D 
111.182  sq.  —  In  phrase  kamanar)  a.  okaro  sankileso  D 
I. no,  148;  M  1. 115;  Nett  42;  DhA  16. 

-Snupassin  realising  the  danger  or  evil  of  S  11.85  ("P^' 
daniyesu  dhammesu)  abstr.  "anupassana  Vism  647  sq.,  695. 
-dassavin  same  as  °&nupassin  D  1.245  (^"'')i  A  v.  178 
(id.);  D  111.46;  S  11.194,  269;  A  111.146;  v.181  sq.;  Nd^ 
141.  -pariyesana  search  for  danger  in  ( — °)  S  11. 171; 
111.29;  IV.8  sq.  -sanna  consciousness  of  danger  D  1.79; 
111.253,  283;  A  111.79. 

Adipaniya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  S  +  dipeti]  to  be  explained  Miln  270. 

Adipita  [pp.  of  Sdipeli,  a  -f-  caus.  of  dip,  cp.  dipeti]  ablaze, 
in  flames  S  1.31  (loka;  v.  1.  adittaka)  108;  J  v.366;  DhA 
III  32  (v.  1.  aditta). 

AdU  (indecl.)  [see  also  adu]  emphatic  (adversative)  part. 
(l)  of  affirmation  &  emphasis:  but,  indeed,  rather  J  ill. 
499  =  ^1.443;  V.180;  VI.552.  —  (2)  as  2nd  component 
of  a  disjunctive  question,  mostly  in  corresponsion  udahu 
. . .  adu  (=  kir)  . . .  udahu  SnA  350),  viz.  is  it  so  . . .  or" 
Th  I,  1274  =  Sn  354;  Pv  iv.3ii  =  DhA  1.31;  J  v.384; 
VI.382;   without   udahu  at  J  v.460  (adu).  The  close  con- 


100  Adhipacca 


nection  with  udahu  suggesto  an  expl"-  of  adu  as  a  some- 
how distorted  abbreviation  of  udahu. 

Adetl  [a  +  deti,  base^  of  dadati  (day'  &  de°),  cp.  also 
adiyati]  to  take,  receive,  get  Sn  121  (==  ganhati  SnA 
'79)1  954  (=  upadiyati  ganhati  Nd'  444);  cp.  1.4';  J  III. 
103,  296;  v.366  (=  ganhati  C. ;  cp.  adiyati  on  p.  367); 
Miln   336. 

Ade)^a  (adj.)  [grd.  of  adati  (q.  v.)]  to  be  taken  up,  accept- 
able, pleasant,  welcome,  only  in  phrase  °vacana  welcome 
or  acceptable  speech,  glad  words  Vin  n.158;  j'vi.243; 
Miln  no;  ThA  42. 

Adeva,  Adevana  [a  +  div.  devati]  lamenting,  deploring, 
crying  etc.  in  ster.  phrase  (explaining  parideva  or  parid- 
dava)   adevo   paridevo  adevana  pari"  adevitattar)  pari" 

Ndi  370  =  Nd2  416  =  Ps  1.38. 

Adesa  [fr.  adisati,  cp.  Sk.  iidesa]  information,  pointing  out; 
as  tt.  g.  characteristic,  determination,  substitute,  e.  g.  kuto- 
nidana  is  at  SnA  303  said  to  equal  kiq-nidana,  the  to 
of  kuto  (abl.)  equalling  or  being  substituted  for  the  ace. 
case:  paccatta-vacanassa  to-adeso  veditabbo. 

Adesana  (f-)  [a  +  desana]  pointing  out,  guessing,  prophesy; 
only  in  phrase  "patihariya  trick  or  marvellous  ability  of 
mind-reading  or  guessing  other  peoples  character  Vin  II. 
200;  D  1.212,  213;  III. 220;  A  1. 170,  292;  v,327;  Ps  11. 
227.  For  patihariya  is  subsiituted  °vidha  (lit.  variety  of, 
i.  e.  act  or  performance  etc.)  at  D  111.103. 

Adhana  (nt.)  [a  -f-  dhana]  —  I.  putting  up,  putting  down, 
placing,  laying  A  IV. 41  (aggissa  adhanaq,  v.  1.  of  6  MSS 
adanaq).  —  2.  receptacle  M  I  414  (udak°),  cp.  adheyya. — 
3.  enclosure,  hedge  Miln  220  (kantak°  thorny  brake,  see 
under  kantaka). 

-gahin  holding  one's  own  place,  i.  e.  obstinate  (?), 
reading  uncertain  &  interchanging  with  adana,  only  in 
one  ster.  phrase,  viz.  sanditthi-paramSsin  adhana-gahin 
duppatinissaggin  Vin  11.89;  M  1.43,  96;  A  III. 335  (v.  1. 
adana",  C.  expl^    by  dalhagahin);  D  III.247  (adhana"). 

Adhara  [a  +  dhara]  —  1.  a  container,  receptacle,  basin, 
lit.  holder  A  111.27;  J  VI. 257.  —  2.  ^holding  up",  i.e. 
support,  basis,  prop.  esp.  a  (round)  stool  or  stand  for 
the  alms-bowl  (patta)  Vin  11. 113  (an"  patto);  M  in.95  ; 
S  V.21;  J  V.202.  —  fig.  S  V.20  (an°  without  a  support, 
cittat));  Vism  8,  444.  —  3.  (tt.  g.)  name  for  the  loc.  case 
("resting  on")  Sq  211. 

Adharaka  (m.  &  nt.)  [a  +  dharaka,  or  simply  adhara  + 
ka]  —  1.  a  stool  or  stand  (as  adhara')  (always  m.,  except 
at  J  1.33  where  "ani  pi.  nt.)  J  1.33;  DhA  111.290=  VvA 
220;  DhA  111.120=  186  (one  of  the  four  priceless  things 
of  a  Talhagata,  viz.:  setacchattai),  nisldanapallanko,  adha- 
rako  padaplthai]).  —  2.  a  reading  desk,  pulpit  J  111.235; 
IV.299. 

Adhara^ata  (f.)  [a  +  dharanatS]  concentration,  attention, 
mindfulness  Sn.\  290  (-f-  dalhikarana),  398  (id.). 

Adharlta  [pp.  of  a  +  dhareti,  cp.  dhareti']  supported,  held 
up  Miln  68. 

Adhavatl  [a  -|-  dhavati']  to  run  towards  a  goal,  to  run 
after  M  1.265  (where  id.  p.  S  11.26  has  upadh");  DA  I. 
39.  Freq.  in  comb"-  adhavati  paridbara)!  to  run  about, 
e.g.  J  1.127,  134,  158;  11.68. 

Adhavana(nt.)[fr.  adhavati]  onrush,  violent  motion  Miln  135. 

Adhipacca  (&  Adhlpateyya)  (nt.)  [fr.  adhi  -f  pati  +  ya 

"being  over-lord";  see  also  adhipateyya]  supreme  rule, 
lordship,  sovereignty,  power  S  v.342  (issariy");  A  1.62 
(id.),  147,  212;  11.205  (id);  111.33,  76;  iv.252  sg.;  Pv 
11.9'"  (one  of  the  thanas,  cp.  thana  11. 2b;  see  also  D  111. 


Adhipacca 


lot 


Anejja 


146,  wbere  spelt  adhipateyya;  expld.  by  issariya  at  PvA 
137);  J  1.57;  Davs  V.17;  VvA  126  (gehe  a  =  issariya). 
The  three  (att°,  lok",  dhamm")  at  Vism   14. 

Adhuta  [a  -\-  dhuta']  shaken,  moved  (by  the  wind,  i.e. 
fanned  Vv  39*  (v.  1.  adhuta  which  is  perhaps  to  be 
preferred,  i.  e.  not  shaken,  cp.  vatadhutar)  Davs  v. 49; 
VvA  178  expls-  by  sanikaq  vidhupayamana,  i.e.  gently 
fanned). 

Adheyya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  a  +  dadhati  cp.  adhana^]  to  be 
deposited  (in  one's  head  &  heart  Pug  A),  to  be  heeded, 
to  be  appropriated  [in  latter  meaning  easily  mixed  with 
adheyya,  cp.  w.  11,  under  adiya^];  nt.  depository  (=: 
adhalabliata  thapetabbala  Pug  A  217)  Pug  34  (°i)  gacchati 
is  deposited);  Miln  359  (sabbe  lass'  adheyya^  honti  they 
all  become  deposited  in  him,  i.  e.  his  deposits  or  his 
property). 

-mukha  see  adiya^. 

Anaka  [Sk.  anaka,  cp.  Morris  J  P  T S.  1893,  10]  a  kind 
of  kettledrum,  beaten  only  at  one  end  S  11.266;  J  11. 
344;  Dpvs  XVI.  14. 

Anaiica  see  akasa"  and  vinnana". 

Ananja  see  anejja. 

AnaQya  (nt.)  [Sk.  anrnya,  so  also  RSk.  e.  g.  Jtm  3 1 '8; 
from  a  +  FO^i  -f-  'P''  ^"'  *'^°  ^0^  '"  composition,  thus 
an-nna  as  base  of  ananya]  freedom  from  debt  D  1.73; 
A  111-354  (Ep.  of  Nibbana,  cp.  anana) ;  Nd'  160;  Vism 
44;  DA  1.3. 

AnadatI  [a  +  nadali]  to  trumpet  (of  elephants)  J  IV. 233. 

Anana  (nt.)  [Vedic  ana,  later  Sk.  anana  from  an  to  breathe] 
the  mouth;  adj.  ( — °)  having  a  mouth  Sdhp  103;  Pgdp 
63  (vikat"). 

Anantarika  (&  °ya)  [fr.  an  -f-  antara  -)-  ika]  without  an 
interval,  immediately  following,  successive  Vin  1. 321;  II. 
JI2 ;   Pug   13;  Dhs   1291. 

-kamma  "conduct  that  finds  retribution  without  delay" 
(Az/jj  Irsl.  275  n.  2)  Vin  II. 193;  J  1-45;  Kvu  480;  Miln 
25  (cp.  Dhs  Irsl.  267);  Vism  177  (as  prohibiting  practice 
of  kammattbana). 

Ananda  [Vedic  aoanda,  fr.  a  -\-  nand,  cp.  BSk.  anandl  joy 
Divy  37]  joy,  pleasure,  bliss,  delight  D  1.3;  Sn  679,  687; 
J  1.207  (°maccha  Leviathan);  VI. 589  (°bheri  festive  drum); 
DA  I  53  (=  pitiya  etaq  adhivacanaq). 

Anandatl  [a  +  nandati]  to  be  pleased  or  delighted  J  vi. 
589  (aor.  anandi  in  T.  reading  anandi  vitta,  expld.  by 
C.  as  nandittha  was  pleased ;  we  should  however  read 
aaandi-citta  with  gladdened  heart).  See  also  anandiya. 

Anandin  (adj.)  [fr.  a -f  nand]  joyful,  friendly  Th  I,  555; 
J  IV. 226. 

Anandiya  (adj.-.)  [grd.  of  anandati]  enjoyable,  nt.  joy,  feast 
J  VI.  5  89  (°q  acarati  to  celebrate  the  feast  =:  ananda- 
cbana  C.). 

Anandi  (f.)  [a  +  nandl,  cp.  ananda]  joy,  happiness  in  cpd. 
anandi-citta  J  vi.589  (so  read  probably  for  anandi  vitta: 
see  anandati). 

Anaya  (adj-)  [a  4-  naya]  to  be  brought,  in  suvanaya  easy 
to  bring  S  1.124=  J   t-8o. 

Anayatl  see  aneti. 

Anapana  (nt.)  [ana  -f  apana,  cpds.  of  an  to  breathe]  in- 
haled &  exhaled  breath,  inspiration  &  respiration  S  v. 1 32, 
311  sq.;  J  1.58;  Ps  1. 162  (°katha);  usually  in  cpd.  °sati 
concentration  by  in-breathing  &  out-breathing  (cp.  Man. 
of  Mystic  70)  M  1.425  (cp.  D  U.291);  lll.S^;  Vin  111.70; 


A  1.30;  It  80;  Ps  I.J66,  172,  185  ("samadhi);  Nd^  466  B 
(id.);  Miln  332;  Vism  III,  197,  266  sq.;  SnA  165.  See 
detail  under  sati. 

Anapetl  see  aneti. 

Anameti  [a  +  nameti.  Cans,  of  namati,  which  is  usually 
spelt  nameti]  to  make  bend,  to  bend,  to  bring  toward  or 
under  J  V.154  (doubtful  reading  fut  anamayissasi.  v.  1. 
anayissati,  C.  anessasi  =  lead  to). 

AnisaiJSa  [a  4-  ">  +  saqsa,  BSk.  distorted  to  anusarjsa] 
praise  i.  e.  that  which  is  commendable,  profit,  merit,  ad- 
vantage, good  result,  blessing  in  or  from  (c.  loc).  — 
There  are  five  anisar|sa  sllavato  sila-sampadaya  or  bles- 
sings which  accrue  to  the  virtuous  enum<i  at  D  11.86, 
viz.  bhogakkhandha  great  wealth,  kittisadda  good  report, 
visarada  self-confidence,  asammulho  kalar)  karoti  an 
untroubled  death,  saggar)  lokarj  uppajjati  a  happy  state 
after  death.  —  D  i.iio,  143;  111.132  (four),  236  (five); 
M  1.204;  S  1.46,  52;  III. 8,  93  (maha");  v.69  (seven), 
73,  129,  133,  237  (seven),  267,  276;  A  1.58  (karanlye 
kariyamane);  11.26,  185,  239,  243  (sikkha°);  IH.41  (dane), 
248  (dhammasavane),  250  (yaguya),  251  (upatthita-satissa), 
253  sq.  (silavato  silasampadaya  etc.,  as  above),  267  (su- 
carite),  441  ;  IV. 150  (mettaya  ceto-vimuttiya),  361  (dhamma- 
savane), 439  sq.  (nekkhamme  avilakke  nippltike),  442, 
443  sq.  (akas'anaiicayatane);  v.i,  106  (maha°),  311;  It 
28,  29,  40  (sikkha°);  Sn  256  (phala°),  784,  952;  J  I.9, 
94;  V.491  (v,  1.  anu°);  Nd'  73,  104,  441;  Kvu  400; 
Miln  198;  VvA  6,  113;  PvA  9  (dana°)  12,  64  (=;  phala), 
208,  221  (=  guna);  Sdhp  263.  —  Eleven  anisai}sas  of 
metia  (cp.  Ps  11. 130)  are  given  in  detail  at  Vism  31 1 — 
314;  on  another  light  see  pp.  644  sq. 

Anisada  (nt.)  [a  -|-  sad]  "sit  down",  bottom,  behind  M  I. 
80  =  245;  J  111.435  (gloss  asata)  Vism  251  =  KhA  45 
(°ltaca),  252  (°maijsa). 

Anuttariya  (nt.)  [see  also  anuttariya  which  as  — °  probably 
represents  anulf]  incomparableness,  excellency,  supreme 
ideal  D  III. 102  sq.;   A   v.37. 

Anita  [pp.  of  aneti]  fetched,  brought  (here),  brought  back 
adduced  J  1.291;  in. 127;  iv.i. 

Anuputtha  metri  causa  for  aauptittha  (q.  v.). 

Anupubba  (nt.)  [abslr.  fr.  anupubba]  rule,  regularity,  order 
Th  I,  727  (cp.  M  Vastu  11.224  anupubba). 

Anupubbata  (f.)  (or  °ta  nt.?)  [fr.  last]  succession;  only 
in  tt.  g.  padanu-pubbata  word  sequence,  in  expln-  of  iti 
Ndi   140;  Nd'   137   (v.  1.  "ka). 

Anupubbikatha  [for  anupubbi'  representing  its  isolated 
composition  form,  cp.  anubhava  &  see  also  anupubbi°] 
regulated  exposition,  gr?duated  sermon  D  i.uo;  11.4I  sq. ; 
M  1-379;  J  '-8;  Miln  228;  DA  1.277,  308;  DhA  iv.199. 

Anubhava  [the  dissociated  composition  form  of  anubhava, 
q.  V.  for  details.  Only  in  later  language]  greatness,  mag- 
nificence, majesty,  splendour  J  I.69  (mahanto);  11.102  (of 
a  jewel)  v.491;   DhA  11.58. 

Anejja  and  Ananja  [abstr.  fr.  an  -|-  'aiija  or  *ejja  =  *ijja. 
The  Sanskrilised  equivalent  would  be  *iujya  or  *ingya 
of  jng  to  stir,  move,  with  a  peculiar  substitution  of  *ang 
in  Pali,  referring  it  to  a  base  with  r  (probably  Sk.  fj, 
fnjati)  in  analogy  to  a  form  like  Sk.  rna  =  Pali  ana  & 
ina,  both  a  &  i  representing  Sk.  r.  The  form  anja  would 
thus  correspond  to  a  Sk.  •anjya  ('angya).  The  third  P. 
form  an-enja  is  a  direct  (later,  and  probably  re-instituted) 
formation  from  Sk.  iujya,  which  in  an  interesting  way 
became  in  BSk.  re-sanskrilised  to  anijya  (which  on  the 
oiher  hand  may  represent  anejja  &  thus  give  the  latter 
the   feature    of  a   later,   but  more  specifically  Pali  form). 


Anejja 


1 02 


Apadeti 


The  editions  of  P.  Texts  show  a  great  variince  of  spel- 
ling, based  on  MSS.  vacillation,  in  part  also  due  to  con- 
fusion of  derivation]  immovability,  imperturbability,  im- 
passibility. The  word  is  n.  but  occurs  as  adj.  at  Vin  ill. 
109  (anarija  samadhi,  with  which  cp.  BSk.  anijya  santih 
at  Av.  §  I.I99-  —  ^"he  term  usually  occurs  in  cpd. 
anejja  ppatta  (adj.)  immovable  lit.  having  attained  im- 
passibility, expld-  by  Bdhgh.  at  Vin  ill. 267  (on  Par.  1.1,6) 
as  acala,  niccala,  i.  e.  motionless.  This  cpd.  is  indicated 
below  by  (p.)  after  the  reference.  —  The  various  spel- 
lings of  the  word  are  as  follows:  —  I.  anejja  D  1.76 
(v.  1.  ananja-p.)  A  11.184  (p.);  111.93  (p.),  100  (p.),  377 
sq.  (p.);  Ndi  471  (v.  1.  aneja,  ananja)  =  Vbh  137  (anefija); 
Nd'  569"  (v.  1.  ananjaj,  601  (v.  1.  anejja  &  anenja);  Pug 
60  (p.);  DA  1. 219  (v.  1.  BB  anenja).  —  2.  ananja  Vin 
111.4  (P-)  (v- 1-  anaiica",  ananja°,  anaiija°;  Bdhgh.  anejja° 
p.  267),  log;  Ud  27  (samadhi,  adj.  v.  1.  ananca);  DhA 
IV.46.  See  also  below  cpd.  ''karana,  —  A  peculiarity  of 
Trenckner's  spelling  is  ananja  at  M  n.229  (v.  1.  anaiija, 
anefija,  anenja),  253,  254.  —  3.  anenja  S  ir.82  (v.  1. 
anaiije,  or  is  it  anenja?);  D  HI.217  (°abhisankhara  of 
imperturbable  character,  remaining  static,  cp.  Kvu  trsl. 
358);  Nd'  90  (id.),  206,  442;  Ps  11.206;  Vbh  135,  340; 
Vism  377  (p.),  386  (sixteen"  fold),  571;  Nett  87,  99.  — 
See  also  iujati. 

-karana  trick  of  immovability,  i.  e.  pretending  to  be 
dead  (done  by  an  elephant,  but  see  differently  Morris 
J P  T S.  1886,  154)  J  1. 415;  11.325  (v.  1.  anaiija,  anenca, 
ananca);  IV.308 ;  v.273,  310. 

Anenjata  (f.)   [fr-  anenja]  steadfastness  Vism  330,   386. 

Aneti  [a  +  "S'']  '°  bring,  to  bring  towards,  to  fetch,  pro- 
cure, convey,  bring  back  Sn  no;  PvA  54,  92.  pot.  I?' 
pi.  anema  (or  imper.  2nd  pi.  anetha  M  1.371.  fut.  ana- 
yissati  S  1.124;  Pv  >■  6»;  J  in. 173;  v.154  (v.J.),  & 
anessati  J  v.154.  inf.  anayitui)  Pv  11611,  ger.  anetva 
PvA  42,  74.  aor.  'anesi  PvA  3,  &  anayi  Pv  1.7'  (sapa- 
tii)).  —  pp.  anita  (q.  v.).  —  Med.  pass,  anlyati  &  aniy- 
yati  D  11.245  (aniyyataq  imper.  shall  be  brought);  M  I. 
371  (ppr.  aniyamana).  —  Caus.  II.  anapeti  to  cause  to 
be  fetched  J  111.391;  v.225. 

Apa  &  ApO  (nt.)  [Vedic  ap  &  ap,  f.  sg.  apa,  pi.  apah, 
later  Sk.  also  apah  nt.  —  Idg.  *ap  &  "-'ab,  primarily  to 
Lith.  upe  water.  Old  Prussian  ape  river,  Gr.  'AT/a  N.  of 
the  Peloponnesus;  further  (as  *ab)  to  Lat.  amnis  river, 
Sk.  abda  cloud,  &  perhaps  ambu  water]  water;  philoso- 
phically 1. 1.  for  cohesion,  representative  of  one  of  the  4 
great  elements  (cp.  mahabhuta),  viz.  pathavl,  apo,  tejo, 
vayo :  see  Cpd.  268  &  Dhs  Irsl.  201,  also  below  "dhatu.  — 
D  11.259;  M  1.327;  S  11.103;  111.54,  207;  A  IV.312,  375; 
Kn  307,  391  (°i]),  392  (loc.  ape),  437  (id.);  J  iv.8 
(pathavi-apa-teja");  Dhs  652;  Miln  363  (gen.  apassa,  with 
pathavl  etc.);  Sdhp   100. 

-kasina  the  water-device,  i.e.  meditation  by  (the  element 
of)  water  (cp.  Mystic  75  n.)  D  111.268 ;  J  1.313 ;  Dhs  203; 
Vism  170;  DhA  I  312;  111.214.  -dhatu  the  flind  element, 
the  essential  element  in  water,  i.  e  element  of  cohesion 
(see  Cpd.  155  n.  2;  Mystic  9  n.  2;  Dhs  trsl.  201,  242) 
D  111.228,  247;  M  1.187,  422:  Dhs  652;  Nett  74.  See 
also  dtiatu.  -rasa  the  taste  of  water  A  1.32 ;  SnA  6. 
-sama  resembling  water  M  1.423. 

Apaka  (f.)  [=  apaga]  river  J  v.452;  VI. 518. 

Apaga  (f.)  [apa  +  ga  of  gam]  a  river  Th  I,  309;  Sn  319; 
J   V.454;  Davs  1.52;  VvA  41. 

Apajjatl  [Sk.  apadyate,  a  +  pad]  to  get  into,  to  meet 
with  (ace);  to  undergo;  to  make,  produce,  exhibit  Vin 
11.126  (satjvaraq);  D  1.222  (pariyetthii)) ;  It  113  (vuddhiq); 
J  1.73;  Pug  20,  33  (ditth'anugatii)) ;  PvA  29  (ppr.  apaj- 
janto);  DhA  11.71  —  pot.  apajjeyya  D  1.119  (musa- 
vadaq).  —  aor.  apajji  J  v.349:  PvA  124  (sankocai))  & 
apadi   S   1.37 ;   A  11.34 ;   It   85 ;  J  11.293  i  V^  pl-  apadu 


D  11.273.  —  g"-  apajjitva  PvA  22  (saqvegaq),  151.  — 
pp.  apanna  (q.  v.).  —  Caus.  apadeti  (q.  v.).  —  Note.  The 
reading  apajja  in  apajja  naq  It  86  is  uncertain  (vv.  11. 
asajja  &  alajja).  The  id.  p.  at  Vin  11.203  (CV.  VII.4,  8) 
has  asajjanaq,  for  which  Bdhgh,  on  p.  325  has  apajjanag. 
Cp.   pariyapajjati. 

Apapa  [Sk.  apana,  a  paijl]  a  bazaar,  shop  Vin  1.140;  J 
1.55;  V.445;  Pv  11.3^^;  Miln  2,  341;  SnA  440;  DhA  I. 
317;  11,89;  VvA  157;  PvA  88,  333  (phal-''  fruit  shop),  215. 

Apanika  [fr.  apana]  a  shopkeeper,  tradesman  J  1. 1 24;  Miln 
344;   VvA   157;  DhA  11.89. 

ApataCChika  at  J  vi.17  is  C.  reading  for  apatacchika  in 
kharapat"  (q.  v.). 

Apatati  [a  -)-  patati]  to  fall  on  to,  to  rush  on  to  J  v.349 
(=  upadhavati  C);  vi.45i  (=:  agacchati  C);  Miln  371. 

Apattl  (f)  [Sk.  apatti,  fr.  a  -)-  pad,  cp.  apajjati  &  BSk. 
apatti,  e.  g,  Divy  330]  an  ecclesiastical  offence  (cp.  Kvu 
trsl.  362  n.  l),  Vin  1.103  ("khandha),  164  ("q  patikaroti), 
322  (°r)  passati),  354  (avasesa  &  anavasesa);  11.2  sq.  (°g 
ropeti),  59,  60  (°pariyanta),  88  ("adhikarana),  259  (°i) 
patikaroti);  IV.344;  D  IU.212  ("kusalala);  A  1.84  (id.), 
87;  11.2.10  (°bhaya);  Dhs  1330  sq.  (cp.  Dhs  trsl.  346).  — 
anapatti  Vin  111.35. 

Apattika  (adj.)  [apatti  -|-  ka,  cp.  BSk.  apaltika  Divy  303] 
guilty  of  an  offence  M  1.443;  Vin  IV. 224.    an°  Vin  1.127. 

Apatha  in  micchapatha,  dvedhapatha  as  classified  in  Vbh 
Ind.  p.  441  should  be  grouped  under  patha  as  iniccha", 
dvedha°. 

Apathaka   in   °jjhayin  Nd^  342^  is  read  apadaka°  at  Nd' 

226,  and  apataka°  at  Vism  26. 

Apada  (f)  [Sk.  apad,  fr.  a  -j-  pad,  cp.  apajjati  &  BSk. 
apad,  e.  g.  in  apadgata  Jtm  3I'''']  accident,  misfortune, 
distress,  D  111.190;  A  11.68  (loc.  pi.  apadasu),  187;  111. 
45;  IV.31;  Th  I,  371;  J  1V.I63  (apadattha,  a  difficult 
form;  vv.  II.  T.  aparatta,  apadatva,  C.  aparattha;  expH- 
by  apadaya);  v.340  (loc.  apade),  368;  PvA  130  (quot.); 
Sdhp  312,  554.  Note.  For  the  contracted  form  in  loc.  pi. 
apasu  {=  *apatsu)  see  *apa. 

Apanna  [pp.  of  apajjati]  —  I.  entered  upon,  fallen  into, 
possessed  of,  having  done  Vin  1.164  (apattii]  a.);  111.90; 
D  1.4  (dayapanna  merciful);  Nd'^  32  (tanhaya).  —  2.  un- 
fortunate, miserable  J  1. 1 9  (v.124).  Cp.  pari". 

*Apa  (&  *Ava)  (f.)  [for  apada,  q.  v.]  misery,  misfortune  J 
11.317  (loc.  pi.  apasu,  v.  1.  avasu,  C.  apadasu);  in. 12  (BB 
aviisu);  v.82  (avagata  gone  into  misery,  v.  1.  apagata,  C. 
apagata  parihina),  445  (loc.  avasu,  v.  1.  avasu,  C.  apadasu), 
448  (avasu  kiccesu;  v.  1.  apassu,  read  apasu).  Note.  Since 
*apa  only  occurs  in  loc.  pi.,  the  form  apasu  is  to  be 
regarded  as  a  direct  contraction  of  Sk.   apatsu. 

Apa^a  [S  -\-  pana]  life,  lit.  breathing,  only  in  cpd.  °koti 
the  end  of  life  Miln  397;  Davs  I11.93 ;  adj.  -kotlka  M 
11.120;   Vism   lo. 

Apadaka  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  a  -f  pad]  —  i.  (adj.)  producing, 
leading  to  ( — °)  VvA  4  (abhinfi"  catutlha-jjhana).  —  2. 
(n.)  one  who  takes  care  of  a  child,  a  protector,  guardian 
A  1.62  =  132  =:  It  no  (-|-  posaka).  —  f.  apadika  a 
nurse,  foster-mother  Vin  11.289  (-|-  posika). 

Apada  (f)  [short  for  apadika]  a  nursing  woman,  in  an° 
not  nursing,  unmarried  J  iv.178. 

Apadi  aor.  of  apajjatt  (q.  v.). 

Apadeti  [Caus.  of  apajjati]  to  produce,  make  out,  bring, 
bring    into    M    1.78;    111.248;    S   IV. 1 10  (addhanaq  to  live 


Apadeti 


103 


Abhidosika 


one's    life,    cp.    addhanar)   Spadi  J  11.293  =  jivil'addhanai) 
apadi  ayui)  vindi  C);  SnA  466.  —  Cp.   pari". 

Apatha  [elym.?  Trenckner,  Miln  p.  428  says:  "I  suspect  a. 
to  be  corrupted  from  apata  (cp.  apatati),  under  an  impres- 
sion that  it  is  allied  to  patha;  but  it  is  scarcely  ever  written 
so"]  sphere,  range,  focus,  field  (of  consciousness  or  per- 
ception;  cp.  Dhs  Irsl.  199),  appearance  A  11.67;  J  '-336; 
Vbh  321;  Miln  298;  Vism  21,  548;  DA  1.228;  DhsA  308, 
333;  VvA  2}2  (°kala);  DhA  iv.85;  Sdhp  356.  L'sually 
in  phrase  apathar]  gacchati  to  come  into  focus,  to  become 
clear,  to  appear  M  1.190;  S  1V.160,  or  °r)  agacchati  Vin 
1. 184;  A  111.377  sq.;  IV.404;  Vism  125.  Cp.  °gata  below. 
-gata  come  into  the  sphere  of,  appearing,  visible  M  1.174 
^=  Nd2  jhana  (an°  unapproached);  PvA  23  (apathaq  gata). 
-gatatta  abstr.  fr.  last:  appearance  Vism  617. 

Apathaka  (adj.)  [fr.  apatha]  belonging  to  the  (perceptual) 
sphere  of,  visible,  in  "nisadin  lying  down  visible  D 
111.44,  47.  Cp.  apathaka. 

Apana  (nt.)  [fr.  a  +  pa]  drinking ;  drinking  party,  banquet ; 
banqueting-hall,  drinking-hall  J  1. 52  C^mandala);  v.292 
(°bhumi);  Vism  399  (id.);   DhA  1.213  (id.,  raiiiio). 

Apanaka  (adj.)  [apana  +  ka]  drinking,  one  who  is  in  the 
habit  of  drinking  U  1. 1 67. 

Apaniya  (adj.)  [fr.  apana,  a  +  pa]  drinkable,  fit  for  drinking 
or  drinking  with,  in  °kar)sa  drinking-bowl,  goblet  M  1. 
316;  S  II. no. 

Apayika  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  apaya]  one  suffering  in  an  apaya  or 
state  of  misery  after  death  Vin  11.202  ^=  It  85  (v.  1.  ap") ; 
Vin  11.205;  D  1. 103;   A  1.265;  It  42;   Vism  16;  PvA  60. 

Apiyati  [fr.  r,  cp.  appayati  &  appeti]  to  be  in  motion  (in 
etym.  of  apo)  Vism  364. 

ApUCChati  [5  +  pucchati]  to  enquire  after,  look  for,  ask, 
esp.  to  ask  permission  or  leave;  aor.  apucchi  J  1. 140; 
PvA  no;  grd.  apucchitabba  DhA  1.6;  ger.  apucchitva 
Vin  IV.267  (apaloketva -f-);  Miln  29;  PvA  iii;apucchi- 
tuna  (cp.  Geiger  §  211)  Th  2,  426;  apuccha  Th  2,  416, 
&  apuccha  [=r  aprcchya,  cp.  Vedic  acya  for  acya],  only  in 
neg.  form  an°  without  asking  Vin  ii.2li,  219;  1V.165,  226 
(=  anapaloketva) ;  DhA  1.81.  —  pp.  apucchita  Vin  iv.272. 

Apuratl  [a  +  purati]  to  be  filled,  to  become  full,  to  increase 
J  111.154  (cando  a.  :=  purati  C);  IV.26,  99,   100. 

Apeti  [Cans,  of  ap,  see  appoti  &  papunati]  to  cause  to 
reach  or  obtain  J  vi.46.  Cp.  vy". 

AphUSati  [a  +  phusati]  to  feel,  realise,  attain  to,  reach ; 
aor.  aphusi  Vv   l69  (^  adhigacchi  VvA  84). 

Abaddha  [pp.  of  abandhati]  tied,  bound,  bound  up  DA  I. 
127;  fig.  bound  to,  attached  to,  in  love  with  DhA  1.88; 
PvA   82  (Tissaya  °sineha);  Sdhp  372  (sineh,  °hadaya). 

Abandhaka  (adj.)  [a  +  bandh,  cp.  Sk.  abandha  tie,  bond] 
(being)  tied  to  (loc.)  PvA   169  (sise). 

Abandhati  (a  -f  bandhati,  Sk.  abadhnaii,  bandh]  to  bind 
to,  tie,  fasten  on  to,  hold  fast;  fig.  to  tie  to,  to  attach 
to,  J  1V.132,  289;  V.319,  338,  359.  —  pp.  abaddha. 

Abandhana  (nt.)  [fr.  a  +  bandh]  —  i.  tie,  bond  DA  i. 

181  =  Pug  A  236  ("althena  fiati  yeva  nati-parivatto).  — 

2.  tying,  binding  Vism  351  (°lakkhana,  of  apodhatu).  — 

3.  reins  (?)  or  harness  (on  a  chariot)  J  V.319  (but  cp.  C. 
expln-  "hatthi-assa-rathesu  abandhitabbani  bhandakSni", 
thus  taking  it  as  a  -f-  bhanda  +  na,  i.e.  wares,  loads  etc.). 
With  this  cp.  Sk.  abandha,  according  to  Halayudha  2, 
420  a  thong  of  leather  which  fastens  the  oxen  to  the 
yoke  of  a  plough. 


Abadha  [a  4-  badh  to  oppress,  Vedic  abadha  oppression] 
afiliction,  illness,  disease  Vin  IV. 261;  D  1.72;  11.13;  A. 
1.121;  iit.94,  143;  IV.333,  415  sq.,  440;  Dhi38;  Pug  28 ; 
Vism  41  (udara-vata°)  95;  VvA  351  (an°  safe  &  sound); 
SnA  476;  Sdhp  85.  —  A  list  of  abadhas  or  illnesses,  as 
classified  on  grounds  of  aetiology,  runs  as  follows:  pitta- 
sarautthana,  semha",  vata°,  sannipatika,  utu-parinamaja, 
visama-pariharaja,  opakkainika,  kammavipakaja  (after  Nd'^ 
304'c,  recurring  with  slight  variations  at  S  iv.23o;  A 
11.87;  i".i3i;  v.iio;  Nd'  17,  47;  Miln  112,  cp.  135).  — 
Another  list  of  illnesses  mentioned  in  tha  Vinaya  is  given 
in  Index  to  Vin  11.,  p.  351.  —  Five  abaJhas  at  Vin  i. 
71,  viz.  kutthai)  gando  kilaso  soso  apamaro  said  to  be 
raging  in  Magadha  cp.  p.  93.  —  Three  abadhas  at  D 
111.75,  v'^-  iccha  anasanaq  jara,  cp.  Sn  311.  —  See  also 
cpd.  appabadha  (health)  under  appa. 

Abadhika  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  abadha]  affected  with  illness,  a  sick 
person  A  111.189,  238;  Nd'  l6o;  Miln  302;  DA  212; 
DhA  1.31;  PvA  271.  —  f.  abadhikini  a  sick  woman 
A  11.144. 

Abadhita  [pp.  of  abadheti,  Caus.  of  a  +  badh]  afflicted, 
oppressed,  molested  Th   I,    185. 

Abadheti  [a  +  Caus.  of  badh,  cp.  abadha]  to  oppress, 
vex,  annoy,  harass  S  iv.329. 

Abila  (adj.)  [Sk.  avila;  see  also  P.  avila]  turbid,  disturbed, 
soiled  J   v.go. 

Abhata  [pp.  of  a  +  bharati  from  bhf]  brought  (there  or 
here),  carried,  conveyed,  taken  D  1. 142;  S  1.65;  A  11.83 
(for  yathabhutai)?);  Pv  111.5*  (''^tt"  =  rattiyaq  a.  PvA 
199);  DhA  11.57,  81;  IV.89;  VvA  65. 

Abhataka  (adj.)  =  abhata ;  DA  1.205  (v-'-  abhata). 

Abharaoa  (nt.)  [Sk.  abharana,  a  +  bhf]  that  which  is  taken 
up  or  put  on,  viz.  ornament,  decoration,  trinkets  D  I. 
104;  Vv  8o2;  J  iii.ii,  31;  DhA  111.83;  VvA   187. 

Abharati  [a  +  bhf]  to  bring,  to  carry;  ger.  abhatva  J  iv.351. 

Abhassara  (adj.-n)  [etym.  uncertain;  one  suggested  in  Cpd. 
138  D.  4  is  a  4- *bha  + 'sar,  i.e.  from  whose  bodies 
are  emitted  rays  like  lightning,  more  probably  a  combo- 
of  abha  -|-  svar  (to  shine,  be  bright),  i.  e.  shining  in 
splendour]  shining,  brilliant,  radiant,  N.  of  a  class  of  gods 
in  the  Brahma  heavens  "the  radiant  gods",  usually  referrad 
to  as  the  representatives  of  supreme  love  (piti  &  metta); 
thus  at  D  1.17;  Dh  200;  It  15;  DhA  111.258  (°loka).  In 
another  context  at  Vism  414  sq. 

Abha  (f.)  [Sk.  abha,  fr.  a  -f  bhS,  see  abhati]  shine,  splendour, 
lustre,  light  D  11.12;  M  111.147  (adj. —');  S  11.150  ("dhatu); 
A  11.130,  139;  111.34;  Mhvs  XI. 11;  VvA  234  (of  a  Vi- 
mana,  v.  1.  pabha);  DhA  iv.191;  Sdhp  286. 

Abhati  [a  +  bha]  to  shine,  shine  forth,  radiate  Dh  387 
(=  virocati  DhA  IV.144);  J  V.204.  See  also  abbeti. 

Abhavetl  [a  +  bhaveti]  to  cultivate,  pursue  Pv  11.13'"  (met- 
taciltaij;  gloss  &  v.  I.  abhavetva;  expl''-  as  vaddhetva 
bruhetva  PvA   168). 

Abhasa  [Sk.  abhasa,  fr.  a  +  bhas]  splendour,  light,  appear- 
ance M  11.215;  111.215. 

Abhicetaslka  (adj.)  See  abhicetasika.  This  spelling,  with 
guna  of  the  first  syllable,  is  probably  more  correct;  but 
the  short  a  is  the  more  frequent. 

Abhidosika  (adj.)  [abhidos -f- 'ka]  belonging  to  the  evening 
before,  of  last  night  Vin  111.15  (of  food;  stale);  M  1.170 
(°kalakata  died  last  night);  Miln  291. 


Abhidhammika 


104 


Amaya 


Abhidhammika  (adj.)  [abhidhamma  +  ika]  belonging  to 
the  specialised  Dhamma,  versed  in  or  studying  the  Abhi- 
dhamma Miln  17,  341;  Vism  93.  As  abhi''  atKhA  151; 
J  IV. 219. 

Abhindati  [a  +  bhindati]  to  split,  cut,  strike  (with  an  axe) 
S   IV.160  (v.  1.  a^). 

Abhisekika  (adj.)  [fr.  abhiseka]  belonging  to  the  conse- 
cration (of  a  king)  Via   v. 129. 

Abhujati  [a  -{-  bhujati,  bhuj']  to  bend,  bend  towards  or 
in,  contract;  usually  in  phrase  pallankarj  a°  "to  bend 
in  the  round  lap"  or  "bend  in  hookwise",  to  sit  cross- 
legged  (as  a  devotee  with  straightened  back),  e.  g.  at 
Vin  1.24;  D  1.71 ;  M  1.56  (v.  1.  abhunjitva),  219;  A  in. 
320;  Pug  68;  Ps  1.176;  J  1.71,  213;  Miln  289;  DA  i. 
58,  210.  In  other  connection  J  1.18  (v.ioi;  of  the  ocean 
"to  recede");  Miln  253  (kayaij). 

Abhujana  (nt.)  [fr.  abhujati]  crouching,  bending,  turning 
in,  io  phrase  pallank'abhujana  sitting  cross-legged  J  i  17 
(v.91);   PvA  219. 

Abhuji  (f.)  [lit.  the  one  that  bends,  prob.  a  poetic  meta- 
phor] N.  of  a  tree,  the  Bhuija  or  Bhojpatr  J  v. 195  (= 
bhujapatta-vana  C),  405   (=  bhujapatta  C). 

Abhitiijati  [a  -f-  bhuj^  Sk.  bhunakti]  to  enjoy,  partake  of, 
take  in,  feel,  experience  J  IV.456  (bhoge;  Rh.  D.  "hold 
in  its  hood"?);  DhsA   333. 

Abhufijana  (nt.)  [fr.  abhunjati]  partaking  of,  enjoying,  ex- 
periencing DhsA  333. 

Abhetl  ['■  abhayati  =  abhati,  q.  v.]  to  shine  Pv  11. 12''  (ppr. 
°enti);   Vv  8-  (°anti,  v.  1.   "enti;  =  obhasenti  VvA  50). 

Abhoga  [fr.  abhuiijati,  bhuj^  to  enjoy  etc.  The  translators 
of  Kvu  derive  it  from  bhuj'  to  bend  etc.  (A't'«  irsl.  221 
n.  4)  which  however  is  hardly  correct,  cp.  the  similar 
meaning  of  gocara  "pasturing",  fig.  perception  etc.]  idea- 
tion, idea,  thought  D  1.37  (^  manasikaro  samannaharo 
DA  1. 122;  cp.  semantically  ahara  =  abhoga,  food);  Vbh 
320;  Miln  97;  Vism  164,  325,  354;  Davs  62;  KhA  42 
("paccavekkhana),   43  (id.)  68. 

Ama'  (indecl.)  [a  specific  Pali  formation  representing  either 
amma  (q.  v.)  or  a  gradation  of  pron.  base  amu"  "that" 
(see  asu),  thus  deictic-emphatic  exclam"-  Cp.  also  BSk. 
ama  e.  g.  Av.  b  1.36]  affirmative  part,  "yes,  indeed,  cer- 
tainly" D  1. 1 92  sq.  (as  v.  1.  BB. ;  T.  has  amo);  J  1. 1 15, 
226  (in  C.  expl".  of  T.  ama-jata  which  is  to  be  read  for 
amajata);  11.92;  V.448;  Miln  11,  19,  253;  DhA  l.io,  34; 
"'•39,  44;  VvA  69;  PvA  12,  22,  56,  61,  75,  93  etc. 

Ama^  (adj.)  [Vedic  ama  =  Gr.  wfio'?,  connected  with  Lat. 
amarus.  The  more  common  P.  form  is  amaka  (q  v.)] 
raw,  viz.  (a)  unbaked  (of  an  earthen  vessel),  unfinished 
Sn  443;  (b)  uncooked  (of  flesh),  nt.  raw  flesh,  only  in 
foil,  cpds.;  "gandha  "smell  of  raw  flesh",  verminous  odour, 
a  smell  attributed  in  particular  to  rotting  corpses  (cp. 
similarly  BSk.  amagandha  M  Vastu  111.214)  D  11.242  sq.; 
A  1.280;  Sn  241,  242  (=  vissagandha  kunapagandha 
SnA  286),  248,  251;  Dhs  625;  and  "giddha  greedy  after 
flesh  (used  as  bait)  J   VI. 416  (:=  amasankhata  amisa  C). 

Amaka  (adj.)  [=  ama^]  raw,  uncooked  D  1.5  =:  Pug  58 
(^maqsa  r.iw  flesh);  M  1.80  (titta-kalabu  amaka-cchinno). 
-dhanna  "raw"  grain,  corn  in  its  natural,  unprepared 
state  D  1.5  =:  Pug  58  (see  DA  1.78  for  definition);  Vin 
IV. 264;  V.135.  -saka  raw  vegetables  Vism  70.  -susana 
"cemetery  of  raw  flesh"  charnelgrove  (cp.  amagandha  under 
ama'^),  i.  e.  fetid  smelling  cremation  ground  J  1.264,  489 ; 
IV.45   sq.;  VI. 10;  DhA  1. 176;  VvA   76;  PvA   196. 

Amattha  [Sk.  amrsta,  pp.  of  amasati;  cp.  amasita]  touched, 
handled  J  1.98  (an°);  DA  1. 107  (=  paramattha);  Sdhp  333. 


Atnandaliya  [a  +  mandala  -(-  iya]  a  formation  resembling 
a  circle,  in  phrase  °r)  karoti  to  form  a  ring  (of  people) 
or  a  circle,  to  stand  closely  together  M  I  225  (cp.  Sk. 
amandalikaroti). 

Amata  in  anamata  at  J  11,56  is  metric  for  amata. 

Amattika  (f.)  [a  -j-  mattika]  earthenware,  crockery;  in  "apana 
a  crockery  shop,  chandler's  shop  Vin   IV. 243. 

Amaddana  (nt.)  [a  +  maddana  of  mrd]  crushing  VvA  311. 

Amanta  (adj. -adv.)  [either  ger.  of  amanteti  (q.  v.)  or  root 
der.  fr.  a  -j-  mant,  cp.  araantana]  asking  or  asked,  in- 
vited, only  as  an"  without  being  asked,  unasked,  unin- 
vited Vin  1.254  (°cara);   A  III. 259  (id.). 

Amantana  (nt.)  &  "na  (f.,  also  "na)  [from  amanteti]  ad- 
dressing, calling;  invitation,  greeting  Sn  40  (ep.  Nd-  128); 
"vacana  the  address-form  of  speech  i.  e.  the  vocative  case 
(cp.  Sk.  amantritai]   id.)  SnA  435;  KhA   167. 

Atnantanaka  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  amanlaria]  addressing,  speaking 
to,  conversing;  f.  °ika  interlocutor,  companion,  favourite 
queen  Vv  188  (^  allapa-sallapa-yogga  kilanakale  va  tena 
(i.  e.  Sakkena)  amantetabba  VvA  96). 

Amantaniya(adj.)  [grd.  of  amanteti]  to  be  addressed  J  IV.371. 

Amantita  [pp.  of  amanteti]  addressed,  called,  invited  Pv 
11.3'!  (=  nimantita  PvA  86). 

Amanteti  [denom.  of  a  4-  *mantra]  to  call,  address,  speak 
to,  invite,  consult  J  Vi.265;  DA  1.297;  SnA  487  (= 
alapati  &  avhayati);  PvA  75,  80,  127.  —  aor.  amantesi 
D  11.16;  Sn  p.  78  (=  alapi  SnA  394)  &  in  poetry  aman- 
tayi  Sn  997;  Pv  11.2';  3'  (perhaps  better  with  v.  1.  SS 
samantayi).  —  ger.  amanta  (^  Sk.  ■■■amantrya)  J  in. 209, 
315  (^=  Smantayitva  C),  329;  iv.iM;  v.233;  V1.511.  — 
pp.  amantita  (q.  v.).  —  Caus.  II.  amantapeti  to  invite 
to  come,  to  cause  to  be  called,  to  send  for  D  1. 134  (v.  1. 
amanteti);  Miln   149. 

Amaya  [etym?  cp.  Sk.  amaya]  affliction,  illness,  misery; 
only  as  an°  (adj  )  not  afllicted,  not  decaying,  healthy, 
well  (cp.  BSk.  niramaya  Asvaghosa  11. 9)  Vin  1.294;  Vv 
1510  (=  aroga  VvA  74);  17'';  36';  J  111.260,  528;  IV. 
427;   vi.23.  Positive  only  very  late,  e.g.  Sdhp   397. 

Amalaka  [cp.  Sk.  amalaka]  emblic  myrobalan,  Phyllanthus 
Emblica  Vin  1.201,  278;  11. 149  ("vantika  pithu);  S  1.150; 
A  V.170;  Sn  p.  125  (°matti);  J  IV. 363;  v. 380  (as  v.  1. 
for  T.  amala);  Miln   11;   Dh.\   1.319;  VvA   7. 

AmalakI  (f.)  amalaka  Vin   1.30;   M   1.456  ("vana). 

Amasati  [a  +  masati  fr.  mfS]  to  touch  (upon),  to  handle, 
to  lay  hold  on  Vin  11. 221;  111.48  (kumbhii));  J  ill. 319 
(id.);  A  V.263,  266;  J  iv.67;  Ps  11.209;  Mi'"  30^;  SnA 
400;  Dhs.\  302;  VvA  17.  —  aor.  amasi  J  11.360;  ger. 
amasitva  Vin  111.140  (udakapattaij)  J  11.330;  grd.  amassa 
J  11.360  (an")  and  amasitabba  id.  (C).  —  pp.  amattha 
&  amasita  (q.  v.). 

Amasana  (nt.)  [fr.  amasati]  touching,  handling;  touch  Vin 
IV. 214.  Cp.  III. 118;  Miln   127,  306;   DA  1.78. 

Amasita  [pp.  of  amasati]  touched,  taken  hold  of,  occupied 
VvA    113  (an°  khetta  virgin  land). 

Amaya  (adj.)  [to  be  considered  either  a  der.  from  amS 
(see  amajata  in  same  meaning)  or  to  be  spelt  amaya  which 
metri  causa  may  be  written  a°]  "born  in  the  house"  (cp. 
semantically  Gr.  j^aytvij;  >  indigenous),  inborn,  being  by 
birth,  in  cpd.  °dasa  (dasi)  a  born  slave,  a  slave  by  birth 
J  VI. 117  (=  gehadasiya  kucchismir)  jatadasi  C),  285  (= 
dasassa  dasiya  kucchimhi  jatadasa). 


Amasaya 


105 


Ayatana 


Amasaya  [Sma^  4-  asaya,  cp.  Sk.  amasaya  &  amasraya] 
receptacle  of  undigested  food,  i.e.  llie  stomach  Visin  260; 
Kh.\   59.  Opp.  pakkasaya. 

Atnilaka  (nt.  ?)  [etym.  ?]  a  woollen  cover  into  which  a  floral 
pattern   is  woven   DA  1. 87. 

Amisa  (nt.)  [der.  fr.  ania  raw,  q.  v.  for  etym.  —  Vedic  amis 
(m.);  later  Sk.  Smisa  (nt.),  both  in  lit.  &  fig.  meaning]  — 

1.  originally  raw  meat;  hence  prevailing  notion  of  "raw, 
unprepared,  uncultivated" ;  thus  "khara  raw  lye  Vin  i. 
206.  —  2.  "fleshy,  of  the  flesh"  (as  opposed  to  mind  or 
spirit),  hence  material,  physical;  generally  in  opposition 
to  dhamma  (see  dhamma  15  i.  a.  and  also  next  no.), 
thus  at  M  1. 12  ("dayada);  It  loi  (id.);  A  1.91  =  It  98 
("dana  material  gifis  opp.  to  spiiitual  ones);  Dhs  1 344 
('patisanthara  hospitality  towards  bodily  needs,  cp.  Dhs 
Irs/.  350).  —  3.  food,  esp.  palatable  food  (cp.  E.  sweet- 
meat); food  for  enjoyment,  dainties  Vin  11.269  sq.;  J  II. 6; 
Miln  413  (lok°);  D.-V  1.83  (°sannidhi),  —  4.  bait  S  I.67; 
IV. 158;  J  IV.57,  219;  VI. 416;  DA  1.270.  —  5.  gain, 
reward,  money,  douceur,  gratuity,  "tip"  Pv.\  36,  46;  esp. 
in  phrase  "kincikkha-hetu  for  ihe  sake  of  some  (little) 
gain  S  11.234;  A  1.128;  v.265,  2S3  sq.,  293  sq.;  Pug 
29;  Pv  II. 8^  (=  kinci  amisatj  palthento  PvA  107);  Miln 
53;  V'vA  241  (==  bhogahetu).  —  6.  enjoyment  Pv  11.82 
(=  kamamise-laggacitto  PvA  107).  —  7.  greed,  desire, 
lust  Vin  1.303  ('antara  out  of  greed,  selfish,  opp.  metta- 
cilto);  A  111.144  (id.),  184  (id.);  1.73  (°garu  parisa);  J  v. 91 
(°cakkhu);  Ps  11.238  (mar°).  See  also  cpds.  with  nir°  and  sa°. 

AmuncatI  [a  +  muc]  to  put  on,  take  up;  to  be  attached 
to,  cling  to  DhsA  305.  —  pp.  amutta  (q.  v.). 

Amutla  [Sk.  amukta,  pp.  of  a  +  mUC,  cp.  also  BSk.  Smukta 
jewel  Divy  2,  3  ^'c-i  a  meaning  which  might  also  be  seen 
in  the  later  Pali  passages,  e.g.  at  PvA  134.  Semantically 
cp.  abharana]  having  put  on,  clothed  in,  dressed  with, 
adorned  with  (always  ° — )  D  1.104  ("malabharana);  Vin 
11.156  =  Vv  208  (°mani-kundala);  S  1. 211;  J  iv.460;  v. 
155;  VI.492;  Vv  72I  (=  patimukka);  80^  ("hatlhabha- 
rana);  Pv  ll.g'"  ("manikundala)  J  iv.183;   VvA   182. 

Ame^ijita  (or  Ametjtta)  [Sk.  amredita  fiam  a  -f  mrec), 

dialectical]  —  i.  (nt.)  sympathy  in  °r)  karoti  to  show 
sympathy  (?  so  Morris  J P  T  S.  1887,  106)  DA  1.228  = 
SuA  155  (v.  1.  at  DA  amedita). 

AraO  =  ama  D  1.192,  3. 

Amoda  [Sk.  amoda,  fr.  a  +  mud]  that  which  pleases; 
fragrance,   perfume  Davs  v. 51. 

Atnodana  (f)  [fr.  a  -\-  mud]  rejoicing  Dhs  86,  285. 

Amodatnana  (adj.)  [ppr.  med.  of  amodeti]  rejoicing,  glad 
S  1. 100  (v.  1.  anu°)  =r  It  66;  Vv  648  (=:  pamodamana 
VvA  278);  J   V.45. 

Amodita  [pp.  fr-  amodeti]  pleased,  satisfied,  glad  J  1. 1 7 
(v. 80);  v.45  (°pamodita  highly  pleased);  Miln  346. 

Amodeti  [Sk.  amodayati,  Caus.  of  a  -j*  mud]  to  please, 
gladden,  satisfy  Th  I,  649  (cittai));  J  v. 34.  —  pp.  amo- 
dita (q.  v.). 

Aya  [Sk.  aya;   a -j- |]    i.   coming  in,  entrance  M   ill  93.  — 

2.  tax  J  V.I  13.  —  3.  income,  earning,  profit,  gain  (opp. 
vaya  loss)  A  iv.282  ^  323 ;  Sn  978;  J  1.228;  KhA  38 
(in  expl"-  of  kaya),  82  (in  etym.  of  ayatana);  PvA  130.  — 
4.  (aya  f.  ■)  a  lucky   dice  ("the  incomer")  J   VI.2S1. 

-kammika  a  treasurer  DhA  1.184.  -kusala  clever  in 
earnings  Nett  20.  -kosalla  proficiency  in  money  making 
D  111.220  (one  of  the  three  kosallas);  Vbh  325.  -paric- 
caga  expediture  of  one's  income  PvA  8.  -mukha  (lit.) 
entrance,  inflow,  going  in  D  1. 74  (:=  agamana-magga  DA 


1.78);  M  11.15;  A  11.166;  (fig.)  revenue  income,  money 
Sn.\    173. 

Ayata  [Sk.  ayata,  pp.  of  5  +  yam,  cp.  ayamati]  —  I.  (adj.) 
outstretched,  extended,  long,  in  length  (with  numeral)  D 
111.73  (iiaiikkhaya,  prolonged  or  heavy?);  M  1.178  (dighato 
a° ;  tiriyaii  ca  vitthata);  J  1.77,  273  (tetlir|s'-angurayato 
khaggo);  111.43S;  Vv  84"  C^aqsa;  cp.  expl"- at  VvA  339); 
SnA  447;  Dhs.\  48;  Pv.\  152  (datha  fangs;  loma  hair), 
185  (°vatta);  Sdhp  257.  —  2.  (n.)  a  bow  J   ill. 438. 

-agga  having  its  point  (end)  stretched  forward,  i.  e.  in 
the  future  (see  ayati)  It  15,  52.  -paijhin  having  long 
eye-lashes  (one  of  the  signs  of  a  Mahapurisa)  D  11.17  =^ 
111.143.  -pamha  a  long  eye-lash  Th  2,  384  (=r  digha- 
pakhuma  Th.\   250). 

Ayataka  (adj.)  [=  ayata]  —  I.  long,  extended,  prolonged, 
kept  up,  lasting  Vin  11.108  (gitassara);  A  111.251  (id.); 
J  1.362.  —  2.  sudden,  abrupt,  instr.  °ena  abruptly  Vin 
11.237. 

Ayatana  (nt.)  [Sk.  ayatana,  not  found  in  the  Vedas;  but 
freq.  in  BSk.  From  a  -|-  yam,  cp.  ayata.  The  pi.  is  aya- 
tana at  S  IV. 70.  —  For  full  definition  of  term  as  seen 
by  the  PiiU  Commentators  see  Bdhgh's  expl"  at  D.\  1. 
124,  125,  with  which  cp.  the  popular  etym.  at  KhA  82: 
"ayassa  va  tananalo  ayatassa  va  saijsaradukkhassa  naya- 
nato  ayatanSni"  and  at  Vism  527  "aye  tanoti  ayatan 
ca  nayati  ti  a."]  —  I.  stretch,  extent,  reach,  compass, 
region ;  sphere,  locus,  place,  spot ;  position,  occasion  (cor- 
responding to  Bdhgh's  definition  at  DA  1.124  ^5  "samo- 
saraija")  D  IH.241,  279  (vimutti°);  S  11.41,  269;  IV.217; 
V.119  sq.,  318  sq. ;  A  ill. 141  (ariya°);  V.61  (abhibh°, 
q.  v.)  Sn  406  (rajass°  "haunt  of  passion"  =  ragadi-rajassa 
uppatli-deso  SnA  381);  J  1.80  (raj°).  Freq.  in  phrase 
arann'  a  lonely  spot,  a  spot  in  the  forest  j  1.173;  VvA 
301;  PvA  42,  54.  —  2.  exertion,  doing,  working,  practice, 
performance  (comprising  Bdhgh's  definition  at  DA  1. 124 
as  pannatti),  usually  — °,  viz.  kamm°  Nd'  505;  Vbh  324, 
353;  kas:n°  A  v.46  sq.,  60;  Ps  1.28;  titth"  A  1. 173, 
175;  Vbh  145,  367;  sipp'  (art,  craft)  D  1.51;  Nd=  505; 
Vbh  324,  353;  cp.  an''  non-exertion,  indolence,  sluggish- 
ness J  v. 1 21.  —  3.  sphere  of  perception  or  sense  in 
general,  object  of  thought,  sense-organ  &  object;  relation, 
order.  —  Cpil.  p.  183  says  rightly:  "ayatana  cannot 
be  rendered  by  a  single  English  word  to  cover  both 
sense-organs   (the  mind  being  regarded  as  6>f'  sense)  and 

sense    objects". These    ayatanani    (relations,   functions, 

reciprocalitics)  are  thus  divided  into  two  groups,  inner 
(ajjhattikani)  and  outer  (bahirani),  and  comprise  the 
foil.:  (a)  ajjhatt'':  1.  cakkhu  eye,  2.  sota  ear,  3.  ghana 
nose,  4.  jivha  tongue,  5.  kaya  body,  6.  raano  mind; 
(b)  bah":  1.  rupa  visible  object,  2.  sadda  sound,  3. 
gandha  odour,  4.  rasa  taste,  5.  photthabba  tangible 
object,  6.  dhamma  cognizable  object.  — ■  For  details  as 
regards  connotation  &  application  see  Dhs  trsl.  introduc- 
tion li  sq.  Cpd.  90  n.  2;  254  sq.  —  Approximately 
covering  this  meaning  (3)  is  Bdhgh's  definition  of  ayatana 
at  DA  1.124  ''s  saiijali  and  as  karana  (origin  &  cause, 
i.  e.  mutually  occasioning  &  conditioning  relations  or 
adaptations).  See  also  Nd*  under  rupa  for  further  classi- 
fications. —  For  the  above  mentioned  12  ayatanani  see 
the  foil,  passages:  D  11.302  sq.;  ill. 102,  243;  A  ill. 400; 
V.52;  Sn  373  (cp.  SnA  366);  Ps  1.7,  22,  loi,  137;  11. 
181,  225,  230;  Dhs  1335;  Vbh  401  sq. ;  Nett  57,  82; 
Vism  481;  Th.A.  49,  285.  Of  these  6  are  mentioned  at  S 
1. 113,  II. 3;  iv.ioo,  174  .sq.;  It  114;  Vbh  135  sq.,  294; 
Nett  13,  28,  30;  Vism  565  sq.  Other  sets  of  10  at  Nett 
69;  of  ii  at  I)  II. 1 1 2,  156;  of  5  at  D  11.69.  —  Here  also 
belongs  akas^  anaiic^  ayatana,  akincauii''  etc.  (see  under 
akasa  etc.  and  s.  v.),  e.g.  at  D  1.34  sq.,  183;  A  iv.451 
sq.;  Vbh  172,  189,  262  sq. ;  Vism  324  sq.  —Unclassified 
passages:  M  1.61;  11.233;  H'-S^,  216,  273;  S  1.196;  11.6, 
8,  24,  72  sq. ;  111.228;  IV. 98;  v.426;  A  1.113,  163,  225; 
111.17,    27,    82,    426;    IV.146,   426;  V.30,  321,  351,  359; 


5.yatana 


1 06 


5.yuta 


Nd>    109,    133,    171,    340;    J    1.381    (paripunna°);    Vbh 
412  sq.  (id.). 

-uppada  birth  of  the  ayatanas  (see  above  3)  Vin  1.185. 
-kusala  skilled  in  the  a.  M  in. 63.  -kusalata  skill  in 
the  spheres  (of  sense)  D  III. 212;  Dhs  1335.  -ttha  founded 
in  the  sense-organs  Ps  1.132:   II. 121. 

Ayatanika  (adj.)  [fr.  ayatana]  belonging  to  the  sphere  of 
(some  special  sense,  see  ayatana  3)  S  IV.126  (phass° 
niraya  &  sagga). 

Ayatl  (f.)  [fr.  a  +  yam,  cp.  Sk.  gyati]  "stretching  forth", 
extension,  length  (of  time),  future.  Only  (?)  in  ace.  aya- 
tii]  (adv.)  in  future  Vin  11.89,  '85;  "1-3;  Sn  49;  It  115 
(T.  reads  ayati  but  cp.  p.  94  where  T.  ayatir),  v.  1.  ayati); 
J  189;  V.43I;  DA  1236. 

Ayatika  (adj.)   [fr.   last]   future   S  1.142. 

Ayatika  (f.)  [of  ayataka]  a  tube,  waterpipe  Vin  II. 123. 

Ayatta  [Sk.  ayatta,  pp.  of  3  -f-  yat].  —  1.  striving,  active, 
ready,  exerted  J  v. 395  ("mana  =  ussukkamana  C).  — 
2.  striven  after,  pursued  J  1. 341.  —  3.  dependent  on 
Vism  310  (assasa-passasa°);  Nett   194;  Sdhp  477,  605. 

Ayana  (f.)  [?]  at  DhsA  259  and  Vism  26  is  a  grammarian's 
construction,  abstracted  from  f.  abstr.  words  ending  in 
°ayana,  e.  g.  kankha  >  kankhayana,  of  which  the  correct 
expl"-  is  a  derivation  fr.  caus.-formation  kankhayati  > 
kankhay  -|-  a  -)-  na.  What  the  idea  of  Bdhgh.  was  in 
propounding  his  expl".  is  hard  to  say,  perhaps  he  related 
it  to  i  and  understood  it  to  be  the  same  as  ayana. 

Ayamati  [a  4-  yam]  to  stretch,  extend,  stretch  out,  draw 
out  Miln  176,  usually  in  ster.  phrase  pitthi  me  agilayati 
tarn  aharj  ayamissami  "my  back  feels  weak,  I  will  stretch 
it"  Vin  11.200;  D  III. 209;  M  1.354;  S  IV. 184;  J  1.491.  — 
Besides  this  in  commentaries  e.  g.  J  111.489  (mukhai) 
ayamitui]). 

Ayasa  (adj.)  [Sk.  ayasa,  of  ayas  iron]  made  of  iron  S  11. 
182;  A  111.58;  Dh  345;  J  IV.416;  V.81;  Vv  845  (an°? 
cp.  the  rather  strange  expl"-  at  VvA  335). 

Ayasakya  (nt.)  dishonour,  disgrace,  bad  repute  A  IV.96 ; 
J  V.17;  VvA  no;  usually  in  phrase  °IJ  papunati  to  fall 
into  disgrace  Th  i,  292;  J  11,33  =  271;  III. 514.  [Bdhgh. 
on  A  IV.96  explains  it  as  ayasaka  +  ya  with  guna  of  the 
initial,  cp.  arogya]. 

Ayasmant  (adj.)  [Sk.  ayusmant,  the  P.  form  showing  as- 
similation of  u  to  a]  lit.  old,  i.  e.  venerable ;  used,  either 
as  adj.  or  absolute  as  a  respectful  appellation  of  a  bhikkhu 
of  some  standing  (cp.  the  semantically  identical  thera).  It 
occurs  usually  in  nom.  ayasma  and  is  expld-  in  Nd  by 
typical  formula  "piya-vacanaq  garu°,  sagarava-sappatiss- 
adhivacanar)",  e.  .g.  Nd'  140,  445;  Nd'^  130  on  var.  Sn 
loci  (e.g.  814,  1032,  1040,  1061,  1096).  —  Freq.  in  all 
texts,  of  later  passages  see  SnA  158;  PvA  53,  54,  63, 
78.  —  See  also  ayuso. 

Ayaga  [a  -\-  yaga  of  yaj]  sacrificial  fee,  gift ;  (m.)  recipient 
of  a  sacrifice  or  gift  (deyyadhamma)  Sn  486  (=:  deyya- 
dhammanar)  adhitthana-bhuta  SnA  412);  Th  i,  566;  J  VI. 
205  (°vatthu  worthy  objact  of  sacrificial  fees). 

AyaCaka  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  a  +  yac]  one  who  begs  or  prays, 
petitioner  Miln   129. 

Ayacati  [S  +  yac,  cp.  Buddh.  Sk.  ayacate  Divy  I.]  —  I.  to 
request,  beg,  implore,  pray  to  (ace.)  Vin  111.127;  D  1.240; 
PvA  160.  —  2.  to  make  a  vow,  to  vow,  promise  A  I. 
88;  J  1. 169  =  V.472;  1.260;  11.1x7.  —  PP-  ayacita  (q.  v.). 

Ayacana  (nt.)  [fr.  ayacati]  —  I.  asking,  adhortation,  ad- 
dressing (t.  t.  g.  in  expln-  of  imperative)  SnA  43,  176, 
412.  —  2.  a  vow,  prayer  A  1.88;  111.47;  J  1.169  =  v.472. 


Ayacita  [pp.  of  ayacati]  vowed,  promised  J  1.169  ("bhatta- 
jataka,  N.). 

Ayata  [pp.  of  ayat. ;  cp.  BSk.  ayata  in  same  meaning  at 
Jtm  210]  gone  to,  undertaken  Sdhp  407. 

Ayati  [a  -f  yati  of  ya]  to  come  on  or  here,  to  come  near, 
approach,  get  into  .S  1.240;  Sn  669;  Sn  p.  116  (=  gac- 
chati  SnA  463);  J  iv.410;  Pv  11.12'^  (=  agacchati  Pv.\ 
158);   Dh.A.  1.93  (imper.  ayama  let  us  go).  —  pp.  ayata. 

Ayana  (nt.)  [fr.  a  -f-  ya  to  go]  coming,  arrival:  see  ayana. 

Ayama  [fr.  a  +  yam,  see  ayamati]  —  I.  (lit.)  stretching, 
stretching  out,  extension  Vin  1.349  =  )  111.488  (mukh°). — 
2.  (appl.)  usually  as  linear  measure:  extension,  length 
(often  comb<J-  with  and  contrasted  to  vitthara  breadth  or 
width  &  ubbedha  height),  as  n.  (esp.  in  abl.  ayamato  & 
instr.  ayamena  in  length)  or  as  adj.  ( — °) :  J  1.7,  49  ("ato 
tini  yojanasatani,  vittharato  addhatiyani);  ill. 389;  Miln  17 
(ratanaq  solasahatthar)  ayamena  atthahatthai)  vittharena), 
282  (ratanai)  catuhatth'ayamari) ;  Vism  205  (-f-  vitth"); 
Khb  133  (4-  vitthara  &  parikkhepa);  VvA  188  (solasa- 
yojan°),  199  (°vittharehi),  221  (°ato  +  vitth"');  PvA  77 
(-f- vitlh"),  113  (id.  -f  ubbedha);  DhA  1.17  (satthi-yojan"). 

Ayasa  [cp.  Sk.  ayasa,  etym.  ?]  trouble,  sorrow,  only  neg. 
an°  (adj.)  peaceful,  free  from  trouble  A  iv.98;  Th  i,  1008. 

Ayu  (nt.)  [Vedic  ayus;  Av.  ayu,  gradation  form  of  same 
root  as  Gr.  xim  "aeon",  a;Vv  always;  Lat.  aevum,  Goth, 
aiws.  Ohg.  ewa,  io  always ;  Ger.  ewig  eternal ;  Ags.  ae 
eternity,  a  always  (cp.  ever  and  aye)]  life,  vitality,  dura- 
tion of  life,  longevity  D  111.6S,  69,  73,  77;  S  III.  143 
(usma  ca);  iv.294;  A  1.155;  n.63,  66  (addh°);  111.47; 
iv.76,  139;  Sn  694,  1019;  It  89;  J  1.197  (digh");  Vv 
555  (cp.  VvA  247  with  its  definition  of  divine  life  as 
comprising  30600000  years);  Vism  229  (length  of  man's 
ayu  =  100  years);  Dhs  19,  82,  295,  644,  716;  Sdhp 
234,  239,  258.  —  Long  or  divine  life,  dibbar)  ayu  is  one 
of  the  10  attributes  of  adhipateyya  or  majesty  (see  thana), 
thus  at  Vin  1.294:  D  III. 146;  S  iv.275  sq.;  A  1.115;  III. 
33;  IV. 242,  396;  Pv  II. 9"  (=jlvitai)   PvA   136). 

-uha  see  ayQha.  -kappa  duration  of  life  Miln  141; 
Dh.\  1.250.  -khaya  decay  of  life  (cp.  jivita-kkhaya)  D 
1. 1 7  (cp.  DA  1. 1 10);  III. 29.  -pamana  span  or  measure 
of  life  time  D  11.3;  A  1.213,  267;  11. 126  sq.;  IV. 138, 
252  sq.,  261;  V.172;  Pug  16;  Vbh  422  sq.;  SnA  476. 
-pariyanta  end  of  life  It  99;  Vism  422.  -sankhaya  ex- 
haustion of  life  or  lifetime  Dpvs  v.102.  -sankhara  (usually 
pi.  °a)  constituent  of  life,  conditions  or  properties  resulting 
in  life,  vital  principle  D  11.106;  M  1.295  ^q.;  S  11.266; 
A  IV. 31 1  sq.;  Ud  64;  J  IV.215;  Miln  285;  Vism  292; 
DhA  1. 129;   PvA  210.    Cp.  BSk.  ayuh-saijskara  Divy  203. 

Ayuka  (— °)  (adj.)  [fr.  ayu]  —  I.  being  of  life;  having  a 
life  or  age  A  IV. 396  (niyat°);  VvA  196  (yavatayuka  dib- 
basampatti  divine  bliss  lasting  for  a  lifetime).  Esp.  freq. 
in  comb"-  with  digha  (long)  and  appa  (short)  as  dlgha- 
yuka  A  IV.240;  PvA  27;  appayuka  A  iv.247  ;  PvA  103; 
both  at  Vism  422.  In  phrase  visati-vassasahass'ayukesu 
manussesu  at  the  lime  when  men  lived  20  000  years  D 
11.5—12  (see  Table  at  DiaL  11.6);  DhA  II. 9;  PvA  135; 
dasa-vassasahass'ayukesu  manussesu  (10  000  years)  PvA 
73;  cattalisa"  Dh.\  1.103;  catusatthi-kapp'ayuka  subha' 
kinha  Vism  422. 

Ayukin  (adj.)  [fr.  ayu]  =  ayuka;  in  appayukin  short  lived 
Vv  4i«. 

Ayuta  (adj.)  [Sk.  ayuta,  pp.  of  a  -f- yu,  yuvati]  —  I.  con- 
nected with,  endowed,  furnished  with  Th  I,  753  (dve 
pannaras'ayuta  due  to  twice  fifteen);  Sn  301  (narivara- 
gan°  =  °sai)yutta  Sn.\  320);  Pv  II.I2<  (nana-saragan"  = 
°yutta  PvA  157).  —  2.  seized,  conquered,  in  dur°  hard  to 
conquer,  invincible  J  VI. 27 1  (:=  paccatthikehi  durasada  C). 


Ayutta 


107 


S.rabbha 


Ayutta  [Sk.  ayukta;  pp.  of  a  -f-  yuj]  —  I.  yoked,  to  con- 
nected with,  full  of  Pv  i.io'*  (tejas'ayuta  T.,  but  PvA  52 
reads  "ayutta  and  explns.  as  samayutta);  PvA  157  (= 
akinna  of  Pv  11. 1 2*).  —  2.  intent  upon,  devoted  to  S  1.67. 

Ayuttaka  (adj.-n.)  [ayutta  +  ka]  one  who  is  devoted  to  or 
entrusted  with,  a  trustee,  agent,  superintendent,  overseer 
J  1.230  (°vesa);  iv.492;  DhA  i.ioi,  103,  180. 

Ayudha  is  the  Vedic  form  of  the  common  Pali  form  avudha 
weapon,  and  occurs  oiily  spuriously  at  D  1.9  (v.  1.  avudha). 

Ayuvant  (adj.)  [fr.  ayu]  advanced  in  years,  old,  of  age 
Th    I,  234. 

Ayusmant  (adj.)  [Sk.  Syusmant;  see  also  the  regular  P. 
form  ayasmant]  having  life  or  vitality  PvA  63  (ayusma- 
vinnana  feeling  or  sense  of  Vitality;  is  reading  correct?). 

AyUSSa  (adj.)  [Sk.  *ayusya]  connected  with  life,  bringing 
(long)  life  A  III. 145  dhamma). 

Ayuhaka  (adj.)  [fr.  aySihati]  keen,  eager,  active  Miln  207 
(-j-  viriyava). 

Ayuhati  [a  +  y  +  Ohati  with  euphonic  y,  fr.  Vedic  uhati, 
uh',  a  gradation  of  vah  (see  elym.  under  vahati).  Kern's 
etym.  on  Toev.  99  =  ayodhati  is  to  be  doubted,  more 
acceptable  is  Morris'  expl".  at  J P  T S.  1885,  58  sq  , 
alihough  contradictory  in  part.]  lit.  to  push  on  or  for- 
ward, aim  at,  go  for,  i.e.  (i)  to  endeavour,  strain,  exert 
oneself  S  l.i  (ppr.  anayuhai)  unstriving),  48;  J  vi.35  {= 
viriyai)  karoti  C.),  283  (=  vayamati  C).  —  (2)  to  be 
keen  on  (w.  ace),  to  cultivate,  pursue,  do  Sn  210  (= 
karoti  SnA  258);  Miln  108  (kammar)  uyuhitva),  214  (kam- 
mar)  ayuhi),  326  (maggaq).  —  pp.  ayiihita  (q.  v.). 

Ayuhana  (adj.-nt.)  [fr.  ayahati]  —  I.  endeavouring,  striving, 
Ps  1. 10  sq.,  32,  52;  11.218;  Vism  103,  212.,  462,  579. 
f.  ayuhani  Dhs  1059  ("she  who  toils"  trsl.)=  Vbh  361  ^ 
Nd*  tanha  I.  (has  ayuhana).  —  2.  furtherance,  pursuit  DA 
1.64  (bhavassa). 

Ayuha  f.  [ayu  -f  nha]  life,  lifetime,  only  in  °pariyosana 
at  the  end  of  (his)  life  Pv.\   136,   162;   VvA   319. 

Ayuhapeti  [Cans.  II.  fr.  ayuhati]  to  cause  somebody  to 
toil  01   strive  after    DhsA  364. 

Ayuhita  [*Sk.  a  -f-  uhila,  pp.  of  uh]  busy,  eager,  active 
MUn  181. 

AyOga  [Sk.  ayoga,  of  a-f-JTUJ!  cp.  ayutta]  —  I.  binding, 
bandage  Vin  11.135;  Vv  33«';  VvA  142  (°patta).  —  2. 
yoke  Dhs  1061  (avijj°),  1162.  —  3.  ornament,  decoration 
Nd'  226;  J  111.447  (°vatta,  for  v.  1.  °vanta?).  —  4.  oc- 
cupation, devotion  to,  pursuit,  exertion  D  1. 187;  Dh  185 
{=^  payoga-karana  DhA  111.238).  —  5.  (t.t.)  obligation, 
guarantee  (?)  SnA   179.  —  Cp.  sam°. 

Arakatta  (nt.)  ['arakat  +  tvaq]  warding  off,  keeping  away, 
holding  aloof,  beihg  far  from  (c.  gen.);  occurring  only 
in  pop.  etym.  of  arahant  at  A  IV.145;  DhA  iv.228;  DA 
1.146^  VvA  105,  106  =  PvA  7;  cp.  DhsA  349. 

Araka  (adv.)  [Sk.  arat  &  arakat,  abl.  form.  fr.  *araka,  see 
ara']  far  off,  far  from,  away  from,  also  used  as  prep.  c. 
abl.  and  as  adj.  pi.  keeping  away  from,  removed,  far 
Vin  11.239  :=  A  IV.202  (sanghamha);  D  1.99,  102  (adj.) 
167;  M  1.280  (adj.)  S  11.99;  IV.43  sq.;  A  1.281  ;  it  91; 
J  1.272J  111.525;  V.451;  Miln  243;  VvA  72,  73  (adj. 
-|-  virata). 

Arakkha  [a  +  rakkha]  watch,  guard,  protection,  care  D 
11.59;  111.289;  S  1V.97,  175,  195;  A  11.120;  111.38;  IV. 
266,  270,  281  (°sampada),  322  (id.),  400;  v. 29  sq.;  J 
1.203;  11.326;  IV.29  (°purisa);  v. 212  ("Ithana,  i.e.  harem), 
374   ("parivara);    Pug  21  (an"),  24;    Miln   154:   Vism   19 


(°gocara  preventive  behaviour,  cautiousness);  SnA  476 
("devata);  KhA  120  (id.),  169;  DhA  11.146;  PvA  195; 
Sdhp  357,  365. 

Arakkhlka  [fr.  arakkha]  a  guard,  watchman  J   iv.29. 

Arakkheyya  see  arakkheyya. 

Aragga  (nt.)  [ara  -\-  agga;  Sk.  arSgra  ol  ara  an  awl,  a 
prick]  the  point  of  an  awl,  the  head  of  certain  arrows, 
having  the  shape  of  an  awl,  or  an  arrow  of  that  kind 
(see  Halayudha  p.  151)  A  1.65;  Sn  625,  631;  Dh  401, 
407;  Vism  306;   DhA  11.51;  IV. 181. 

Aracayaracaya  [a  -j-  racaya  a  ger.  or  abl.  form.  fr.  a  -}- 
*rac,  in  usual  Sk.  meaning  "to  produce",  but  here  as  a 
sound-root  for  slashing  noise,  in  reduplication  for  sake 
of  intensification.  Altogether  problematic]  by  means  of 
hammering,  slashing  or  beating  (like  beating  a  hide)  Sn 
673  (gloss  arajayarajaya  fr.  a  -f-  *ranj  or  *raj).  —  SnA 
481  expl"s.  the  passage  as  follows:  arajayarajaya;  i.e. 
yatha  manussa  allacammaq  bhumiyai]  patlharitva  khilehi 
akotenti,  evaq  akotetva  pharasuhi  phaletva  ekam  ekaq 
kotir)  chinditva  vihananti,  chinnachinnakoti  punappuna 
sarautthati;  aracayaracaya  ti  pi  patho,  avinjitva  (v.l.  BB. 
avijjhitva)  avinjitva  ti  atthp.  —  Cp.  aranjita. 

Araiinaka  (adj.)  [fr.  arafina  -|-  ka]  belonging  to  solitude 
or  the  forest,  sequestered;  living  in  the  forest,  fond  of 
seclusion,  living  as  hermits  (bhikkhn).  Freq.  spelt  araii- 
naka (q.v.).  —  Vin  1.92  (bhikkhQ);  11.32,  197,  217  (bh.), 
265  (bh.);  M  1. 214;  A  in. 100  sq.,  219;  iv.21;  v.66;  J 
III.  174  (v.l.   BB.  a°);  Miln   342;  DhA  11.94  (vihSra). 

Arannakatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  araiinaka,  see  also  araniia- 
katla]  the  habit  of  sequestration  or  living  in  solitude  M 
1.214;  111.40;  A  1.38. 

Arannlka  (adj.)  =  arannaka  Vin  111.15;  A  1.24;  Pug  69; 
Vism  61,  71   (where  defined);  Miln   341. 

Aranjita  [in  form  =  Sk.  *aranjitq,  a  -f-  pp.  of  ranjayati, 
Caus.  of  rafiij  or  raj,  but  in  meaning  different.  Perhaps 
to  rac  (as  *racita)  to  furnish  with,  prepare,  or  better 
still  to  be  regarded  as  an  idiomatic  Pali  form  of  sound- 
root  *rac  (see  aracaya")  mixed  with  rafij,  of  which  we 
find  another  example  in  the  double  spelling  of  aracaya 
(&  arajaya)  q- v.]  furrowed,  cut  open,  dug  up.  slashed, 
torn  (perhaps  also  "beaten")  M  1. 178  (hatthipadar)  dan- 
tehi  aranjitai)  an  elephant-track  bearing  the  marks  of 
tusks,  i.  e.  occasional  slashes  or  furrows). 

Arata  [Sk.  arata,  pp.  of  a  -|-  ram,  cp.  arati]  leaving  off, 
keeping  away  from,  abstaining  J  iv.372  (=  virata);  Nd' 
591  (-|-  virata  pativirata). 

Aratl  (f.)  [Sk.  arati,  a  -|-  ram]  leaving  off,  abstinence  Vv 
63'  (=  pativirati  VvA  263);  in  exegetical  style  occurring 
in  typ.  comb"-  with  virati  pativirati  veramani,  e.  g.  at 
Nd>  462;  Dhs  299. 

Aratta  (nt.  ?)  [Sk.  cp.  arakta,  pp.  of  a  -f  raj]  time,  period 
(orig.  affected,  tinted  with),  only  in  cpd.  vassaratta  the 
rainy  season,  lent  J  iv.444;  Davs  11.74. 

Araddha  (adj.)  [pp.  of  a  -|-  rabh]  begun,  started,  bent  on, 
undertaking,  holding  on  to,  resolved,  firm  A  1. 148  (arad- 
dharj  me  viriyaij  It  30;  PvA  73  (thapetun  began  to  place), 
212  (gantui]).  Cp.  aradbaka  i. 

-cltta  concentrated  of  mind,  decided,  settled  D  1.176; 
M  1.414;  S  11.21;  Sn  p.  102;  SnA  436.  Cp.  aradheti  I. 
-viriya  (adj.)  strenuous,  energetic,  resolute  Vin  1.182; 
D  111.252,  268,  282,  285;  A  1.24;  Sn  68,  344;  It  71 
(opp.  hina-viriya);  Nd«  131;  Ps  1. 171;  ThA  95.  Cp. 
yiriyarambha;  f.  abstr.  °viriyata  M  1.19. 

Arabbha  (indecl.)  [ger.  of  arabhati'  in  abs.  function ;  cp. 
Sk.  arabhya  meaning  since,  from]  —  i.  beginning,  under- 


Arabbha 


1 08 


Arama 


taking  etc.,  in  cpd.  °vatthu  occasion  for  making  an  effort, 
concern,  duty,  obligation  D  111.256  =  A  iv.334  (eight 
such  occasions  enuni^ ).  —  2.  (prep,  with  ace.)  lit.  be- 
ginning with,  taking  (into  consideration),  referring  to, 
concerning,  with  reference  to,  about  D  t.lSo;  A  11.27  =^ 
It  103  (senasanaq  a.);  Sn  972  (upekhaij ;  v.  1.  arambha; 
C.  uppadetva);  Pv  1.4'  (pubbe  pete  a.);  DhA  13;  11.37; 
PvA  3  (setthiputta-petar)  a.),    16,  and  passim. 

Arabhati'  [not  with  Morris  J  P  T  S.  1889,  202  fr.  rabh 
and  identical  with  arabhati^,  but  wilh  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v. 
identical  with  Sk.  alabhale,  a  +  labh  meaning  to  seize 
the  sacrificial  animal  in  order  to  kill  it;  cp.  nirarambha] 
to  kill,  destroy   M  1.371   (panaij). 

Arabhati-   &   Arabbhati   [a  +  rabhati,   Sk.    Srabhati  & 

arambhati,  a  -f  rabb]  to  begin,  start,  underjake,  attempt 
S  I.I 56  (arabbhatha  "bestir  yourselves")  =  iVIiln  245  = 
Th  I,  256  (bh.);  Pug  64  (bh.);  viriyai)  arabhati  to  make 
an  effort,  to  exert  oneself  (cp.  arambha)  A  IV.334.  — 
aor.  arabhi  DhA  11.38  &  arabbhi  PvA  35.  —  ger. 
arabbha,  see  sep.  —  pp.  araddha  (q.  v.). 

Arambha  [Sk.  arambha  in  meaning  "beginning",  f r  a  -j- 
rabh  (rambh)  cp.  arabhati]  — •  i.  attempt,  effort,  in- 
ception of  energy  (cp.  Dhs  trsl.  15  &  A'.  5.  p.  318  giving 
C.  def  as  kicca,  karaniya,  attha,  i.e.  I.  undertaking  & 
duty,  2.  object)  S  1.76  (mah°);  v. 66,  104  sq.  (°dhatu); 
111.338  (id.),  166  Cja;  T.  arabbhaja,  v.  1.  arambhaja  to 
be  preferred)  =  Pug  64;  Miln  244;  Net  41;  DhsA  145. 
-viriyarambha  (cp.  araddha-viriya)  zeal,  resolution,  energy 
Vin  11.197;  S  IV.175;  A  I.12,  16.  —  2.  support,  ground, 
object,  thing  Nett  70  sq.,  107;  an°  unsupported,  inde- 
pendent Sn  743  {=  nibbana  SnA  507).  Cp.  also  nirambha, 
uparambha,   sarambha. 

ArammaQa  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  alambana,  lamb,  but  in  meaning 
confounded  with  rambh  (see  rabhati)]  primary  meaning 
"foundation",  from  this  applied  in  the  foil,  senses:  (i) 
support,  help,  footing,  expedient,  anything  to  be  depended 
upon  as  a  means  of  achieving  what  is  desired,  i.  e.  basis 
of  operation,  chance  Sn  1069  (=  alambana,  nissaya,  upa- 
nissaya  Nd'  132);  Pv  1.4'  (yaq  kiiic^  arammanar)  katva); 
arammanai)  labhati  (-}-  otarai)  labhati)  to  get  the  chance 
S  11.268;  IV.185.  —  (2)  condition,  ground,  cause,  means, 
esp.  a  cause  of  desire  or  clinging  to  life,  pi.  ''a  causes 
of  rebirth  (interpreted  by  tanha  at  Nd'  429),  lust  Sn  474 
(;:=  paccaya  Sn.\  410),  945  (=zNd'  429);  KhA  23;  DhA 
1.288  (sappay");  PvA  279.  —  (3)  a  basis  for  the  working 
of  the  mind  &  intellect;  i.e.  sense-object,  object  of  thought 
or  consciousness,  the  outward  constituent  in  the  relation 
of  subject  &  object,  object  in  general.  In  this  meaning 
of  "relation"  it  is  closely  connected  with  ayatana  (see 
ayatana'),  so  that  it  sometimes  takes  its  place,  it  is  also 
similar  to  visaya.  Cfd.  3  distinguishes  a  5  fold  object, 
viz.  citta,  cetasika,  pasada-  &  sukhuma-rupa,  paniiatti, 
nibbana.  See  on  term  especially  Cpd.  3,  14;  Dhs  lisl. 
XU.  &  209.  —  A  1.82  sq.;  IV.385;  Sn  506;  Ps  1. 57  sq., 
84  (four  a);  11.97,  u^i  '43;  Uhs  I  (dhamm°  object  of 
ideation),  180,  584,  1 186  et  passim;  Vbh  12,  79,  92, 
319,  332  (four);  Nett  191  (six);  VisA  87  sq.,  375  (°san- 
kantika),  430  sq.  (in  var.  sets  with  ref.  to  var.  objects), 
533;  DhsA  48,  127;  VvA  II,  38.  —  ruparammana  lit. 
dependence  on  form,  i.  e.  object  of  sight,  visible  form, 
especially  striking  appearance,  visibility,  sight  D  III. 228; 
S  111.53;  A  ■•82;  J  1.304;  'l^Sg,  442;  PvA  265.  — 
arammanai)  karoti  to  make  it  an  object  (of  intellection  or 
intention),  to  make  it  one's  concern  (cp.  Pvl.4',  above  1). 
—  arammana-kusala  clever  in  the  objects  (of  meditation) 
S  111.266;  a°-paccayata  relation  of  presentation  (i.e.  of 
subj.  &  obj.)  Nett  80.  —  (4)  ( — ")  (adj.)  being  supported 
by,  depending  on,  centred  in,  concentrated  upon  PvA  8 
(nissay°),  98  (ek");  VvA  119  (buddh"  piti  rapture  centred 
in  the  Buddha). 

Araha  (adj.)  melri  causa  for  araha  deserving  J  vi.164. 


Ara'  (f.)  [Sk.  ara;  *el  "pointed",  as  in  Ohg.  ala  =  Ger. 
ahle,  Ags.  ael  ^=  E  awl ;  Oicel.  air]  an  awl ;  see  cp. 
aragga.  Perhaps  a  der.  of  ara  is  alaka  (q.  v.). 

Ara-  (indecl.)  [Vedic  arad,  abl.  as  adv.;  orig.  a  root  der. 
fr.  *ara  remoteness,  as  in  Sk.  arana  foreign  &  aranya 
solitude  q.  v.  under  arana'  and  aranna]  far  from,  remote 
(from)  (adv.  as  well  as  prep,  with  abl.)  Sn  156  (pama- 
damhS),  736;  Dh  253  (asavakkhaya;  DhA  111.377  expls. 
by  diiragala);  J  11.449  (jhanabhumiya;  =  dure  thita  C); 
V.78  (saijyame;  =  duralo  C).  See  also  araka. 

-cara  [in  this  comb"-  by  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  unecessarily 
explJ-  as  ara  =  arya;  cp.  similar  phrases  under  araka]  a 
life  remote  (from  evil)  A  iv.389.  -carin  living  far  from 
evil  leading  a  virtuous  life  D  1.4;  M  1. 179;  HI. 33;  A  HI, 
216,  348;  IV.249;  V.138,  205;  DA  1.72  (=:  abrahmaca- 
riyato  dilra-carin). 

Aradhaka  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  a-j-radh]  i.  [perhaps  for  *araddhaka 
because  of  analogy  to  araddha  of  a  -f-  rabh]  successful, 
accomplishing  or  accomplished,  undertaking,  eager  Vin 
1.70  (an"  one  who  fails);  M  1. 491;  II.  197  ^=  A  1.69  =: 
Miln  243;  S  V.19;  A  V.329  (in  correlation  with  araddha- 
viriya).  —  2.  pleasing,  propitiating  Miln  227;  VvA  220 
(°ika  f.). 

Aradhana  (nt.)  &  °a  (f)  (either  fr.  a-fradh  or  a-|-  rabh, 

cp.  aradhaka]  satisfying,  accomplishing;  satisfaction,  ac- 
complishment D  11.287  (opp.  viradhana  failure);  M  I.479; 
n.199;  A  V.211   sq.;  J   IV. 427. 

Aradhaniya  (adj.)  [grd.  fr.  aradheti]  to  be  attained,  to  be 
won;   successful   Vin  1.70  (an");  J   11.233  (dur°). 

Aradhita  [pp.  of  aradheti;  Sk.  aradhita,  but  BSk.  aragita, 
e.g.  Divy   131,  233]   pleased  Sdhp  510. 

Aradheti  [Caus.  of  a  -|-  radh,  in  meaning  2  confused  with 
arabhati.  In  BSk.  strangely  distorted  to  aragayati;  freq. 
in  Divy  as  well  as  A  v.  S]  —  i.  to  please,  win  favour, 
propitiate,  convince  J  1.337  (darake),  421,  452;  II.72 
(manusse);  IV.274  (for  abhiradheti  T.);  Vism  73  (aradha- 
yanto  Nathassa  vana-vasena  manasai]);  DhA  II. 71;  Davs 
III. 93  (ariidhayi  sabbajanaij);  Miln  352.  In  older  literature 
only  in  phrase  cit(ar)  aradheti  to  please  one's  heart,  to 
gladden,  win  over,  propitiate  D  1. 1 18  sq.,  175  (but  cp. 
araddha-citta  to  arabhati);  M  1.85,  341;  S  II. 107;  V.109; 
J  11.372;  Miln  25.  —  2.  to  attain,  accomplish,  fulfill, 
succeed  S  v. 23  (maggaij),  82,  180,  294;  It  ill.  (v.  1. 
5ram°);  Sn  488  =  509.  Cp.  aradhaka  I.  —  pp.  atadhita 
(q.  v.).   —   See  also  parabhetva. 

Arama  [Sk.  arama,  a  +  ram]  —  i-  pleasure,  fondness  of 
( — °),  delight,  always  as  adj.  ( — °)  delighting  in,  enjoying, 
finding  pleasure  in  (usually  combd-  with  rata,  e.  g.  dham- 
marama  dhammarata  finding  delight  in  the  Dh.)  S  1.235; 
IV. 389  sq.  (bhav°,  upadan");  A  1.35,  37,  130;  11.28  (bha- 
van');  It  82  (dhamm°);  Sn  327  (id.;  expld-  by  SnA  333 
as  rati  and  "dhanime  aramo  assa  ti");  Pug  53  (samagg°); 
Vbh  351.  —  2.  a  pleasure-ground,  park,  garden  (lit. 
sport,  sporting);  classified  at  Vin  III. 49  as  pupph"  and 
phal°  a  park  with  flowers  or  with  fruit  (i.  e.  orchard), 
def.  at  DhA  III. 246  as  Vejuvana-Jivak'  ambavan^  adayo, 
i.  e.  the  park  of  Veluvana,  or  the  park  belonging  to 
Jivaka  or  mango-groves  in  general.  Therefore :  (a)  (in 
general)  ■  park,  resort  for  pastime  etc.  Vin  11.109;  D  1. 
106;  Dh  188;  Vv  79''  (amb"  garden  of  mangoes);  VvA 
305  (id.);  Pv  11.78  (pi.  aramani  =  aram'  ilpavanani  PvA 
102).  —  (b)  (in  special)  a  private  park,  given  to  the 
Buddha  or  the  Sangha  for  the  benefit  of  the  bhikkhus, 
where  they  meet  &  hold  discussions  about  sacred  & 
secular  matters;  a  place  of  recreation  and  meditation,  a 
meeting  place  for  religious  gatherings.  Amongst  the  many 
aramas  given  to  the  bhikkhus  the  most  renowned  is  that 
of  Anathapindika  (Jetavana;  see  J  1.92 — 94)  D  1.178; 
Vin    IV.69 ;    others    more   frequently    mentioned    are    e.  g. 


Lrama 


109 


Alambara 


the  park  of  Ambapall  (Vin  I.233);  of  Mallika  (D  1.178), 
etc.  —  Vin  1.39,  140,  283,  291;  11.170;  111.6,  45,  162; 
IV.85  ;  A  11.176;  Dpvs  V.18. 

-pala  keeper  of  a  park  or  orchard,  gardener  Vin  II. 
109;  VVA288.  -ropa,  -ropana  planter,  planting  of  pleasure- 
groves  S  1.33;  PvA  151.  -vatthu  the  site  of  an  Arama  Vin 
1.140;  II.  170;  111.50,  90. 

Aramaklni  (f-)  see  aramika. 

Aramata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  arama  1]  pleasure,  satisfaction  A 
n.28;  III. 116;  Vbh  381;  Miln  233. 

Aramika  (adj.)  [fr.  arSma]  I.  (to  arama  i)  finding  delight 
in,  fond  of  (c.  gen.)  (or  servant  in  general?)  Miln  6 
(sangbassa  trsl.  at  the  service  of  the  order).  —  2.  (to 
arSma  2)  belonging  to  an  Arama,  one  who  shares  the 
congregation,  an  attendant  of  the  Arama  Vin  1.207  sq.; 
11.177  (&  °pesaka),  211;  111.24;  iv.40;  v.204 ;  A  11.78 
(°samanuddesa);  111.109  (id.),  275  (°pesaka);  J  i.38(°kicca) 
Vism  74  (°samanuddesa).  —  f.  aramakinl  a  female  attendant 
or  visitor  of  an   Arama  Vin  1.208. 

Arava  [cp.  Sk.  arava,  fr.  a  -|-  ru]  cry,  sound,  noise  Davs  iv.46. 

Araha  (nt)  only  in  pi.  giblaai)  arahani,  things  proper  to 
laymen,  D  in.  163. 

Ariya  in  anSriya  at  Su  815  is  metric  for  anariya  (q.  v.). 

Arup^a  (nt.)  [orig.  pp  of  a  -f  rud]  weeping,  crying,  lam- 
enting Miln  357. 

Aruppa  (adj.)  [fr.  arapa  as  a  (=  a'^)  —  *rapya]  formless, 
incorporeal;  nt.  formless  existence  D  in.275;  M  1.410, 
cp.  472;  111.163;  S  1. 131  ("tthayin);  11.123;  A  iv.316; 
It  61;  Sn  754;  J  1.406;  Dhs  1385  (cp.  trsl.  57);  Vism 
338;  DA  1.224;  SnA  488,  508;  Sdhp  5,  10;  the  four: 
Vism   III,  326  sq. 

AruhatI  [a  -f-  ruh]  to  climb,  ascend,  go  up  or  on  to  Sn 
1014  (aor.  aruhar));  Sdhp  188;  ger.  aruhitvS  Sn  321  & 
aruyha  J  VI. 452;  Sn  139  (v.  1.  abhiruyha);  It  71.  — 
Caus.  aropeti  (q.  v.). 

Arngya  see  arogya. 

Aru|ha  [pp.  of  aruhati]  —  I.  ascended,  mounted,  gone  up- 
gone  on  to  IV.137;  J  VI. 452  (T.  arulha);  Vism  135  (nek, 
khamma-patipadai)  an°);  VvA  64  (magga°;;  PvA  47 
(°nava),  56  (hatthi°).  —  2.  come  about,  effected,  made, 
done  PvA  2,  144  (cp.  BSk.  pratijfiam  arudha  having 
taken  a  vow  Divy  26).  —  3.  (of  an  ornament)  put  on 
(to),  arrayed  J  VI.  1 53,  488. 

Aruha  see  aroba. 

ArogatS  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  a  -J-  roga  +  ta]  freedom  from  illness, 
health  Miln  341. 

Arogya  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  aroga,  i.  e.  a  (^  a')  -f  roga  -\-  ya] 
absence  of  illness,  health  D  l.ii;  111.220  ("mada),  235 
(°sampada);  M  1.45 1  (T.  arOgya,  v.  1.  arogya),  508,  509; 
S  11.109;  A  I.146  (°mada);  11.143;  "'-TZ;  v. 135  sq. ;  Sn 
749)  257  =  Dh  204  =  J  III. 196;  Nd'  160;  Vism  77 
("mada  pride  of  health);  PvA  129,  198;  Sdhp  234. 

Arocapana  (nt.)  [fr.  Srocapeti,  Caus.  of  aroceti]  announ- 
cement DhA  11.167. 

Arocapeti  (Caus.  II.  of  aroceti]  to  make  some  one  announce, 
to  let  somebody  know,  usually  in  phrase  kalaQ  a.  Sn  p. 
Ill;  J  1.115,  125;  DhA  11.89;  PvA   141. 

ArOClta  [pp.  of  Iroceti]  announced,  called  Vin  11.213  (kSla). 

Aroceti  [5  -f-  roceli,  Caus.  of  rUC ;  cp.  BSk.  Srocayati  Sp. 
Av.  b  1.9  etc.]  to  relate,  to  tell,  announce,  speak  to, 
address  D  1.109,  224;  Pv  11.8"  (aor,  arocayi);  PvA  4,  13 


(aniiamannai)  anSrocetva  not  speaking  to  each  other),  81, 
274  &  freq.  passim.  —  pp.  arocita;  Caus.  II.  arocapeti  (q.  v.). 

Arodana  (nt.)  [fr.  a  -f-  rud,  cp.  arunna]  crying,  lamenting 
A  IU.268  sq. ;  J  1.34;  DhA  1.184;  11. 100. 

Aropana  (nt.)  [fr.  aropeti]  "putting  on  to",  impaling  Miln 
197  (sul°),  290  (id.). 

Aroplta  [pp.  of  aropeti]  —  I.  produced,  come  forward, 
set  up  PvA  2.  —  2.  effected,  made  S  111.12;  PvA  92, 
257.  —  3.  put  on  (to  a  stake),  impaled  PvA  220  (=  avuta). 

Aropeti  [Caus.  of  aruhati].  —  i.  to  make  ascend,  to  lead 
up  to  (w.  ace.)  PvA  76  (pasadaq),  160  (id.)  —  2  to  put 
on,  take  up  to  (w.  ace.  or  loc.)  Pv  11.9^  (yakkhaq  yanag 
aropayitvana);  PvA  62  (sarlrai)  citakaq  a.),  100  (bhandaq 
sakatesu  a.).  —  3.  to  put  on,  commit  to  the  care  of, 
entrust,  give  over  to  (w.  loc.)  J  1.227;  PvA  154  (rajjaq 
amaccesu  a.).  —  4.  to  bring  about,  get  ready,  make  PvA 
73i  257  (sangahaq  a.  make  a  collection);  SnA  51,  142. — 
5.  to  exhibit,  tell,  show,  give  S  1.160  (ovadaq);  Miln 
176  (dosai));  DhA  11.75  ("d.)  —  6.  vadaq  aropeti  to  refute 
a  person,  to  get  the  better  of  (gen.)  Vin  1.60;  M  11.122; 
S  1.160.  —  pp.  aropita  (q.  v.). 

Aroha  ( — ")  [fr.  a  +  ruh]  —  i.  climbing  up,  growth,  in- 
crease, extent,  in  cpd.  °parinaba  length  &  circumference 
S  11.206;  A  1.288;  11.250;  IV.397;  v. 19;  J  111.192;  v. 
299;  VI. 20;  Vbh  345  (°mana  +  parinaha-mSna);  SnA 
382.  —  2.  one  who  has  climbed  up,  mounted  on,  a  rider, 
usually  in  cpd.  ass°  &  hatth°  horse-rider  &  elephant- 
rider  S  IV.310;  A  11.166  =  111.162  (T.  aruha);  iv.107; 
DhsA  305.  —  3.  outfit,  possession  (or  increase,  as  i  ?) 
Sn  420  (vann°). 

Arohaoa  (nt.)  [fr.  a -f  ruh]  climbing,  ascending;  ascent  J 
1.70;  VI. 488;  Miln  352;  Vism  244;  PvA  74. 

Alaka-manda  [alaya°?]  at  Vin  11.152  is  of  uncertain  reading 
and  meaning  ("open  to  view"?  or  "not  having  pegs"  = 
alaka?)  vv.  11.  alakamanta  &  alakamandara ;  Bdhgh  on 
p.  321  expl°^  alakamanda  ti  ekangana  manussabhikiniiia, 
i.  e.  full  of  a  crowd  of  people,  Ch.  quotes  alakamanda  as 
"the  city  of  Kuvera"  (cp.  Sk.  alaka). 

Alaggetl  [a  +  Caus.  of  lag]  to  (make)  hang  on  to  (loc.), 
to  stick  on,  fasten  to  Vin  II.1 10  (pattaij  velagge  Slaggetva). 

Afapati  [a  +  lapali]  to  address  S  1.177,  212;  J  v.201 ; 
SnA  42,  347,  383,  394  (=  amantayi  of  Sn  997),  487  (— 
avhayati);  PvA   II,   13,  33,  69. 

Alapana  (nt.)  &  "a  (f.)  [fr.  a  +  lap]  talking  to,  addressing, 
conversation  Vin  iu.73  (with  ref.  to  exclam.  "ambho"); 
J  V.253  ("a);  Vism  23  ("a);  SnA  396;  PvA  131  (re  ti  a.). 

Alapanata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  Slapana]  speaking  to,  conversing 
with,  conversation  M  1.33 1 )  (an"). 

Alamba  [Sk.  alamba,  S.  -f  lamb]  anything  to  hang  on, 
support  S  1.53  (an°  without  support);  Sn  173  (id.  +  ap- 
patittha);  J  111.396:  Miln  343;  Sdhp  245,  463. 

Alarabati  [a  +  lamb]  to  hang  on  to  or  up,  to  take  hold 
of,  to  fasjen  to  Vin  1.28,  J  1.57;  vi.192;  Vv  84*8;  ThA 
34.  —  alambeti  id.  VvA  32. 

Alambanfl  (adj.-nt.)  [fr.  S  +  lamb,  cp.  Slamba]  (adj.) 
hanging  down  from,  hanging  up  J  III. 396;  iv.457;  SnA 
214.  —  (nt.)  support,  balustrade  (or  screen?)  Vin  11.117, 
152  (°baha)  Miln   126. 

Alambara  &  A|ambara  (nt.)  [Sk.  adambara]  a  drum  Vin 
1.15  (1);  J  11.344  (1);  V.390  (1);  Vv  54'e  (i). 

11—2 


Xlaya 


no 


Aloketi 


Alaya  (m.  &  nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  alaya,  a  +  lii  liyate,  cp.  allina 
&  allfyati,  also  niralaya]  —  1.  orig.  roosting  place,  perch, 
i.e.  abode  settling  place,  house  J  MO  (geh°);  Miln  213; 
DhA  11.162  (an°  =  anoka),  170  (=  oka).  —  2.  "hanging 
on",  attachment,  desire,  clinging,  lust  S  1.136  =  Vin  1.4 
(°rama  "devoted  to  the  things  to  which  it  clings"  K.  S.); 
Vin  III. 20,  III;  S  IV.372  (an°);  v.421  sq.  (id.);  A  II. 
34,  131  (°rama);  111.35;  It  88;  Sn  177  (kam°  :=  kamesu 
lanha-ditthi-vasena  duvidho  alayo  SnA  216),  535  (-J-  asa- 
vani),  635;  Nett  121,  123  ("samugghata);  Vism  293  (id.), 
497;  Miln  203  (Buddh  °ri  akasi?);  DhA  1. 121;  iv.i86(=; 
tanha);  SnA  468  (=r  anoka  of  Sn  366).  —  3.  pretence, 
pretext,  feint  [cp.  BSk.  alaya  MVastu  111.314])  1.157  (gilan°), 
438;  111.533  (m^'°);  '^-37   (gabbhinl);  vi  20,  262  (gilan°). 

Alayati  see  alliyati. 

Alassa  (nt.)  [Der.  fr.  alasa]  sloth,  idleness,  laziness  S  1.43  ; 
D  111.182;  A  IV. 59;  V.136;  Sdhp  567.  Spelling  also 
alasya  S  1.43  (v.  1.  BB);  Vbh  352;  Miln  289,  and  ala- 
siya  J  1.427;  DA  1.310;  DhA  1.299;  ^'^A.  43. 

Alana  &  A|ana  (nt.^  [for  anahana  with  substitution  of  1 
for  n  (cp.  apilandhana  for  apinandh"  and  contraction  of 
"ahana  to  °Sna  originally  meaning  "tying  to"  then  the 
thing  to  which  anything  is  tied]  a  peg,  slake,  post,  esp. 
one  to  which  an  elephant  is  tied  J  1.415;  IV.308;  DhA 
1.126  (!)  where  all  MSS.  have  alahana,  perhaps  correctly. 

AH'  (m.  or  f.  ?  [Sk.  ali]  a  certain  kind  of  fish  J  v.405. 

Air^  &  A|i  (f.)  [Sk.  all]  a  dike,  embankment  Vin  11.256,; 
M  111.96;  A  11.166  (°pabbheda);  111.28;  J  1.336;  111.533,  334- 

Alika  in  saccalika  at  S  IV.306  is  sacc^alika  distortion  of 
truth,   falsehood  S  iv.306. 

Alikhatl  [a  -)-  likhati]  to  draw,  delineate,  copy  in  writing 
or  drawing  J  1.7 1;  Miln   51. 

Alinga  [a -)- ling]  a  small  drum  J  v.156  (suvann''-tala). 

Alingatl  [fi  +  ling]  to  embrace,  enfold  D  1.230;  111.73;  J 
1.281;  IV.21,  316,438;  v.S;  Mihi  7;  DhAl.loi :  VvA  260. 

Alitta  [pp.  of  alimpati;  Sk.  alipta]  besmeared,  stained 
Th  I,  737- 

Alinda  (&  Ajinda)  [Sk.  alinda]  a  terrace  or  verandah  be- 
fore the  house-door  Vin  1.248;  11.153;  D  1.89;  M  11.119; 
S.IV.290  (!);  A  V.65  (!);  J  VI.429;  DA  1.252;  DhA  I. 
26;  IV. 196;  SnA  55  ("ka-vasin;  v.  1.  alindaka);  Mhvs 
35,  3.  As  alindaka  at  J  111.283. 

Alippatl  Pass,  of  alimpeti  (q.  v.). 

Allmpana  (nt.)  [for  alimp°  =  Sk.  adipana,  see  alimpeti^] 
conflagration,  burning,  fiame  Miln  43. 

Allmpita  [pp.  of  ?llmpeti2]  ignited,  lit.  A  iv.102  (v.  1.  alepita). 

AUmpeti'    [Sk.    alimpayati  or  alepayati.  a  -f  Up  or  limp] 

to  smear,  anoint  Vin  11.107;  S  iv.177  (vanar)).  —  Caus. 
11.  alimpapeti  Vin  iv.316.  —  Pass,  alimplyati  Miln  74 
&alippatiDhA  iv.166  (v.l.  for  lippati).  —  pp.  alitta  (q.  v.). 

Alimpeti'  [for  Sk.  Idlpayati,  with  change  of  d  to  1  over 
1  and  substitution  of  limp  for  lip  after  analogy  of  roots 
in  °mp,  like  lup  >  lump,  lip  >  limp]  to  kindle,  ignite, 
set  fire  to  Vin  11.138  (dayo  alimpetabbo);  111.58;  Dn.163 
(citakarj);  A  1.257;  DhA  1.177  (avasaq  read  avapai)),  225; 
PvA  62  (katthani).  —  pp.  alimpita  (q.  v.). 

AlU  (nt.)  [Sk.  alu  &  °ka;  cognate  with  Lat.  alum  &  alium, 
see  Walde  Lat.  Wtb.  under  alium]  a  bulbous  plant.  Radix 


Globosa  Esculenta  or  Amorphophallus  (Kern),  Arum  Cam- 
panulatum  (Hardy)  J  IV.371  =  vi.578 ;  iv.373. 

Aluka'  =  alu  J   IV. 46  (C.  for  alupa). 

Aluka'^  (*<^j-)  [etym.  r]  susceptible  of,  longing  for,  affected 
with  (— ")  Vin  1.288  (sit°);  DA  1.198  (id.);  J  11.278 
(tanh°  greedy). 

Alupa  (nt.)  [etym.  ?  Kern,  Toev.  s,  v.  suggests  alu-a  >  alu- 
va  >  alupa]  =:  aluka  the  edible  root  of  Amorphophallus 
Campanulatus  J  IV. 46  (:=  aluka-kanda  C). 

Alumpakara  [reading  not  sure,  to  alumpati  or  alopa]  breaking 
off,  falling  olT(?)  or  forming  into  bits  (?)  DhA  11.55  (°gutha). 

Alumpati  [a  +  lup  or  lump,  cp.  alopa]  to  pull  out,  break 
off  M  1.324. 

Alu|a  (adj.  [fr.  a  +  lul]  being  in  motion,  confusion  or 
agitation,  disturbed,  agitated  J   Vi.431. 

Alu|ati  [a  -|-  lul;  Sk.  alolati,  cp.  also  P.  aloleti]  to  move 
here  &  there,  ppr.  med.  alujamana  agitated,  whirling 
about  DhA  iv.47  (T.  alul°;  v.l.  alul°)  confuse  DhsA  375. 
Caus.  aluleti  to  set  in  motion,  agitate,  confound  J  11.9, 
33.  —  pp.  alulita  (q.  v.). 

Alu|ita   [pp.   of  aluleti]   agitated,   confused  J   ii.ioi;  Miln 

397  (+  khalita). 

Alepa  [cp.  Sk.  alepa,  of  a  +  lip]  ointment,  salve,  lioiment 
Vin  1.274;  M'l°   74;  DhsA   249. 

Alepana  (nt.)  [fr.  a  -f  lip]  anointing,  application  of  salve 
D  1.7   (mukkh"). 

Aloka  [a  -|-  lok,  Sk.  aloka]  seeing,  sight  (obj.  &  subj.), 
i.  e.  — •  I.  sight,  view,  look  S  iv.128  =  Sn  763;  A  111. 
236  (aloke  nikkhilta  laid  before  one's  eye),  analoka  with- 
out sight,  blind  Miln  296  (andha  -f-).  —  2.  light  A  1. 
164  (tamo  vigato  a.  uppanno)  =  It  100  (vihato);  A  11. 
139  (four  lights,  i.e.  canda^,  suriya°,  agg°,  pann",  of  the 
moon,  sun,  fire  &  wisdom);  J  1134;  Dhs  617  (opp.  an- 
dhakara);  VvA  51  (dip°).  —  3.  (clear)  sight,  power  of 
observation,  intuition,  in  comb"-  with  vijja  knowledge  D 
11.33  =  S  11.7  =  105,  cp.  Ps  II. 1 50  sq.  (obhasatthena,  S  A. 
on  11.7).  —  4.  splendour  VvA   53;  DvA  71. 

-kara  making  light,  bringing  light,  n.  light-bringer  It 
108.  -karana  making  light,  illumining  It  108.  -da  giving 
light  or  insight  Th  i,  3.  -dassana  seeing  light,  i.  e. 
perceiving  Th  1,  422.  -pharana  diffusing  light  or  dif- 
fusion of  light  Vbh  334;  Nett  89.  -bahula  good  in  sight, 
fig.  full  of  foresight  A  111.432.  -bbuta  light  J  vi  459. 
-sanfia  conscicmsness  or  faculty  of  sight  or  perception 
D  111.223;  A  11.45;  '"-93  -sannin  conscious  of  sight, 
i.e.  susceptible  to  sight  or  insight  D  111.49;  M  "1-3;  A 
11 211;  111.92,  323;  1V.437;  V.207;  Pug  69.  -sandhi 
"break  for  the  light",  a  slit  to  look  through,  an  opening, 
a  crack  or  casement  Vin  1.48  =  II. 209  ^  218;  11.172: 
111.65;  IV.47;  J  IV. 310;  PvA  24. 

Alokana  (nt.)  [fr.  a  -f  lok]  looking  at,  regarding  DA  1.194. 

AlOkita  (nt.)  [pp.  of  aloketi]  looking  before,  looking  at, 
looking  forward  (opp.  vilokitar)  looking  behind  or  back- 
ward), always  in  comb"-  alokita-vilokita  in  ster.  phrase 
at  D  1.70  =  e.  g.  A  11.104,  106,  210;  Pug  44,  45,  50; 
Vism  19;  VvA  6;  DA  1.193  (alokitai]  purato  pekkhanaq 
vil°  anudisa  p.). 

Aloketar  [n.  ag.  to  aloketi]  one  who  looks  forward  or  be- 
fore, a  beholder  DA  1. 194  (opp.  viloketar). 

Aloketi  [Sk.  alokayali,  3  -|-  lok]  to  look  before,  look  at, 
regard,  see  DA  1.193,   194.  —   pp.  31okita  (q.v.). 


Alopa 


1 1 1 


Avattanin 


Alopa  [a  +  lup,  cp.  alumpati;  BSk.  alopa,  e.g.  A  v.  S  I. 
173,  341;  Divy  290,  481]  a  piece  (cut  off),  a  bit  (of 
food)  morsel,  esp.  bits  of  food  gathered  by  bhikkhus  D 
1.5  ^  A  V.206;  III. 176;  A  11209;  III. 304;  IV.318;  Th  I, 
1055;  It  18;  Pv  ii.i';  Pug  58;  Miln  231,  406;  Vism 
106;  DA  1.80  (=  vilopa-karanarj). 

Alopatl  [alopeti?  a  +  lopeti,  Caus.  of  alumpali]  to  break 
Id,  plunder,  violate  Th   1,  743. 

Aloplka  (adj.)  [alopa  -f-  'l^a]  getting  or  having,  or  con- 
sisting of  pieces  (of  food)  A  1295;  11.206;  Pug  55. 

Alo|a  [fr.  a  +  Inl,  cp.  alulati  &  aloleti]  confusion,  uproar, 
agitation  DhA  1.38. 

Alo|i  (f)  [a  +  lull  that  which  is  stirred  up,  mud,  in  cpd. 
sitaloli  mud  or  loam  from  the  furrow  adhering  to  the 
plough  Vin  1.206. 

AIo]etl  [Caus.  of  alulati,  cp.  aluleti]  to  confuse,  mix,  shake 
together,  jumble  S  1.175;  J  11272,  363;  iv.333;  vi.331; 
Vism  105. 

A|aka  (or  '^  f.)  [Dimin  of  z\a  (?)  or  of  ara  i  (?).  See  Mor- 
ris J P  T S.  1886,  158]  —  I.  a  thorn,  sting,  dart,  spike, 
used  either  as  arrow-straightener  Miln  418;  DhA  1.288; 
or  (perhaps  also  for  piece  of  bone,  fishbone)  in  making 
up  a  comb  VvA  349  (°»andhapana  ^  comb;  how  Hardy 
got  the  meaning  of  "alum"  in  Ind.  to  VvA  is  incompreh- 
ensible). —  2  a  peg,  spike,  slake  or  post  (to  tie  an  ele- 
phant to,  cp.  alana).  Cp.  11, i'. 

A|amba  =  alambara  Vv  18^  =  50".  See  alambara, 

A|avaka  (&  °ika)  (adj.-n.)  [=  atavika]  dwelling  in  forests, 
a  forest-dweller  S  n.235.  As  Np.  at  Vism   208. 

A|&dvaraka  (adj.)  at  J  v.8i,  82  is  corrupt  &  should  with 
v.  I.  perhaps  better  be  read  advaraka  without  doors.  Cp. 
Kern,   Totv.  29  (alaraka?).  J  v. 8 1   has  alaraka  only. 

A|Sra  (adj.)  [=  alara  or  ujSra  or  =  Sk.  arala?]  thick,  mas- 
sed, dense  or  crooked,  arched  (?),  only  in  cpd.  °pamha 
with  thick  eyelashes  Vv  64"  (=r  gopakhuma  VvA  279); 
Pv  111.3'  (=:  vellita-digha-nila-pamukha).  Cp.  alara. 

A|&lika  &  °lya  (adj.-n.)  [Sk.  aralika,  of  uncertain  etym.] 
a  cook  D  1. 51  (=  bhattakaraka  DA  1.157);  J  v.296  (== 
bhattakiraka  C);  307;  VI. 276  ("iya,  C.  °ika  =  supika); 
Miln  331. 

Al&hana  (nt.i  [fr.  a  +  «Jah  or  dah,  see  dahati]  a  place 
of  cremation,  cemetery  D  1-55;  J  1.287  (here  meaning 
the  funereal  fire)  402;  in. 505  ;  Pv  11. 12*;  Vism  76;  Miln 
350;  DA  1. 166;  DhA  1.26;  III. 276;  PvA  92,  161,  163 
(==  sarirassa  daddha-tthaca).  —  Note.  For  ilahana  in 
meaning  "peg,  stake"  see  alana. 

A|ika  at  A  III. 352,  384  (an°)  is  preferably  to  be  read 
alhika,  see  alhaka. 

A|ha  (nt.)  =:  albaka;  only  at  A  in. 5  2  (udak°),  where 
perhaps  better  with  v.  I.  to  be  read  as  alhaka.  The  id. 
p.  at   A   11.55   has  alhaka  only. 

A|haka  (m.  &  nt.)  [Sk.  adhaka,  fr.  *adba  probably  meaning 
"grain"]  a  certain  measure  of  capacity ,  originally  for 
grain ;  in  older  texts  usually  applied  to  a  liquid  measure 
(udaka°;.  Its  siie  is  given  by  Bdhgh.  at  SnA  476  as  fol- 
lows: "cattaro  pattha  ajhakani  donai]  etc."  —  udakajhaka 
\r  S  V.400:    A  11.55  =  111.337;   VvA    155.  —  In  other  con- 

nections at  J  1. 419  (addh°);  111.541  (mitar)  alhakena  =: 
dhanna-mapaka-kammar)  katai)  C);  Miln  2Z9(patt°);  DhA 
III. 367   (addh"). 


-tbalika   a   bowl   of  the   capacity  of  an  alhaka  Vin  i. 
240;   A  111.369;  Dh.\  111.370  (v.  1.  bhatta-thalika). 

A|h]ya  (&  alhika)  (adj.)  [fr.  ^alha,  Sk.  adhya,  orig.  pos- 
sessing grain,  rich  in  grain,  i.e.  wealth;  semanlically  cp. 
dhaiiiia-]  rich,  happy,  fortunate;  only  in  neg.  analhiya 
poor,  unlucky,  miserable  M  1.450;  11.178  (+  dalidda); 
A  III. 352  sq.  (so  read  with  v.  1.  BB.  ''ajhika  for  T. 
"alika ;  combd-  with  dalidda ;  v.  1.  SS.  anaddhika) ;  J  v. 
96,  97  ("l-daUdda;  C.  na  alhika). 

Avajatl  [a  +  vajati,  vraj]  —  I.  to  go  into,  to  or  towards 
J  111.434;  IV.49,  107.  —  2.  to  return,  comeback  J  V.24,  479. 

AvajjaH  [not  with  Senart  M  Vastu  377  =  ava  +  dhyi, 
but  =  Sk.  avrnakli  a  -j-  Vfj,  with  pres.  act.  avajjeti  ^= 
Sk.  avarjayati]  —  I.  to  letlect  upon,  notice,  take  in, 
advert  to,  catch  (a  sound),  listen  J  1. 8 1:  n.423;  v.3;  Miln 
106.  —  2.  to  remove,  upset  (a  vessel),  pour  out  Vin 
1.286  (kumbhii));  J  II.  102  (gloss  asiucati;.  —  Caus  avaj- 
jeti (q.  v.). 

Avajjana  (nt.)  [fr.  avajjati,  cp.  BSk.  avarjana  in  diff.  meaning] 
turning  to,  paying  attention,  apprehending,  advening  the 
mind.  —  See  discussion  of  term  at  Cpd.  85,  227  (the 
C.  derive  avajjana  fr.  avatteti  to  turn  towards,  this  con- 
fusion being  due  to  close  resemblance  of  jj  and  tt  in 
writing);  also  Kvu  Irsl.  221  n.  4  (on  Kvu  380  which 
has  avattana),  282  n.  2  (un  Kvu  491  avattana).  —  Ps 
11.5,  120;  J  11.243;  Vbh  320;  Miln  102  sq. ;  Vism  432; 
DA   1. 271. 

Avajjita  [pp.  of  avajjeti  cp.  BSk.  avarjita,  e.g.  Divy  171; 
Itm  221]  bent,  turned  to,  inclined;  noticed,  observed 
Miln  297;  Vism  432  (citta);  Sdhp  433. 

Avajjitatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  avajjita]  inclination  of  mind, 
observation,  paying  attention  Ps  II.27  sq. 

Avajjeti  [Caus.  of  avajjati]  I.  to  turn  over,  incline,  bend  M 
111.96;  J  IV. 56  (so  read  for  avijjhanto);  DA  I.IO  (kayaq).  — 
2.  to  incline  (the  mind);  observe,  reflect,  muse,  think, 
heed,  listen  for.  According  to  Cpd.  227  often  paraphrased 
in  C.  by  parinameti.  —  J  1.69,  74,  81,  89,  108,  200; 
Miln  297;  DhA  11.96;  PvA  181  (=  manasikaroti).  —  3. 
to  cause  to  yield  A  iit.27  (perhaps  better  avatt°).  — 
pp.  avajjita  (q.  v.). 

Avata  [Sk.  avrta,  pp.  of  a  -f-  Vf]  covered,  veiled,  shut 
off  against,  prohibited  D  1.97,  246;  M  1.38 1  (°dvara);  J 
VI. 267.  -anavata  uncovered,  unveiled,  exposed,  open  L) 
1.137  ("dvara);  III. 191  ("dvarata);  S  1.55;  J  v. 213;  Pv 
III.6*;  Miln  283.  Cp.  avuta^  &  vy°. 

Avatt^  (adj.-n.)  [Sk.  avarta,  a  -f-  Vft]  —  I.  turning  round, 
winding,  twisting  M  1.382;  S  1.32  (dvi-r-a°  turning  twice) 
J  11.217;  SnA  439  (°ganga).  —  2.  turned,  brought  round 
changed,  enticed  M  1.381;  DhA  11153.  —  3-  an  eddy' 
whirlpool,  vortex  M  1.460  =;  A  11.123  (°bhaya);  Miln  1221 
196,  377.  —  4.  circumference  J  v. 337;  Davs  v.24;  DhA 
III  184. 

Ava^t^^tl  [:=  avattati]  in  phrase  a.  vivattati  to  turn  forward 
&:   [backward  Vism  504. 

Avattana  (nt.)  [fr.  a  +  vj^,  cp.  avatta  2  and  avattanin] 
turning,  twisting;  enticement,  snare,  temptation  J  111.494; 
DhA  11.153. 

Avattana  (f)  [most  likely  for  avajjana.  q.  v.  &  see  also 
Kvu  trsl.  221,  282]  turning  to  (of  the  mind),  adverting, 
apprehending    Kvu   380,  491. 

Avattanin  (adj.)  [fr.  avattana]  turning  (away  or  towards), 
changing,  tempting,  enticing  M  1375,  381  ;  A  11.190;  J 
11.330  =  IV. 471;  DA  1.250.  —  Cp.  etymologically  the 
same,  but  semanlically  diff.  avattanin. 


Avattin 


112 


Lvi 


Avatftl  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  avatta  instead  of  avattana]  only  at 
M  1.9 1  in  neg.  an°  not  enticed  by  (loc),  i.e.  kamesu. — 
Cp.  avattin. 

Avattetl  [a  +  vatteti,  Caus.  of  Vft,  cp.  BSk.  avaitayati  to 
employ  spells  Divy  438]  to  turn  round,  entice,  change, 
convert,  bring  or  win  over  M  I.375,  381,  383,  505;  A 
111.27;   DA  1.272. 

Avatta'  (adj.)  [pp.  of  Svattati]  gone  away  to,  fallen  back 
to,  in  phrase  hlnay'avatta  (see  same  phrase  under  avattati) 
M  1.460;  S  11.50;  J  1.206. 

Avatta'^  (nt.)  [.Sk.  avarta,  of  a  -}-  Vft,  cp.  5vatta[  winding, 
turn,  bent  J  1.70  (in  a  river);  Nett  81  (v.l.  avatta ?),  105 
Charasampata). 

Avattaka  (adj.)  [avatta  +  ka]  turning,  in  dakkhin°  turning 
to  the  right,  dextrorsal  U  II.  18;  cp.  dakkhinavatta  at 
DA  1.259. 

Avattati  [a  -|-  vattati,  of  vft]  to  turn  round,  come  to,  go 
back,  go  away  to,  turn  to ;  only  in  phrase  hinaya  avattati 
to  turn  to  "the  low",  i.  e.  to  give  up  orders  &  return 
to  the  world  Vin  1. 17;  M  1.460;  S  11.231;  iv.191;  Sn  p. 
92  (=  osakkati  SnA  423);  Ud  21;  Pug  66;  Miln  246. — 
pp.  avatta  (q.  v.).  Cp.  avattati. 

Avattana  (adj.-nt.)  [Sk.  avartana]  turning;  turn,  return 
Nett  113;  Miln  251. 

Avattanin  (adj.)  [fr.  avattana]  turning  round  or  back  Th 
I,  16  (cp.  avattanin). 

Avattin  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  avatta,  cp.  avattin  in  diff.  meaning] 
returning,  coming  back,  one  who  returns,  in  spec,  mean- 
ing of  one  who  comes  back  in  transmigration,  syn.  with 
agamin  (an°),  only  in  neg.  anavattin  not  returning,  a 
non-returner,  with  °dhamma  not  liable  to  return  at  D  I. 
156;  III. 132;  S  V.346,  357,  376,  406;  M  1.91;  DA  I.313. 

Avattllilta  (adj.)  [a  -|-  vatthika]  befitting,  original,  inherent 
(one  of  the  4  kinds  of  nomenclature)  Vism  210  =  KhA  107. 

Avapati  [a  -f  vap]  to  give  away  to  offer,  to  deposit  as  a 
pledge  Miln   279. 

Avapana  (nt.)  [tr.  avapati]  sowing,  dispersing,  offering  de- 
positing, scattering  J   1. 321. 

Avara  (adj.)  [fr.  a  -f-  vp]  obstructing,  keeping  off  from  J 
V.325  (so  to  be  read  in  ariya-magg-&vara). 

Avaraija  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  a  -f  Vf,  cp.  avarati;  BSk.  avarana 
in  pane'  .ivaranaoi  Divy  378]  shutting  off,  barring  out, 
withstanding;  nt.  hindrance,  obstruction,  bar  Vin  1.84 
(°r)  karoti  to  prohibit,  hinder);  11.262  (id.);  D  1.246 
(syn.  of  pafica  nivaranani);  S  v. 93  sq.;  A  111.63 ;  J  1.78 
(an°);  v. 41 2  (nadiq  °ena  bandhapeti  to  obstruct  or  dam 
off  the  river);  Sn  66  (pahaya  paiic'  avaranani  cetaso,  cp. 
Nd'  379),  1005  (an°-dassavin);  Ps  1.131  sq.;  11.158  (an°); 
Pug  13;  Dhs  1059,  1136;  Vbh  341,  342;  .Miln  21  (dur° 
hard  to  withstand  or  oppose).  —  dant°  "screen  of  the 
teeth",  lip  J  IV.188;  VI. 590. 

Avaranata  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  avarana]  keeping  away  from, 
withholding  from  A  III  436. 

Avaraniya  (adj.)  [grd.  fr.  avarati],  only  neg.  an°  not  to 
be   obstructed,  impossible  to  obstruct  M  111.3;  Mi'"  157- 

Avarati  [a  +  Vf,  cp,  avunati]  to  shut  out  from  (abl.),  hold 
back  from,  refuse,  withhold,  obstruct  M  1.380  (dvaraij) ; 
Sn  922  (pot.  °aye,  cp.  Nd'  368);  DA  1.235  (dvarai)); 
Dpvs  1.38.  —  pp.  avata  and  avuta'  {q.  v.). 

Avail  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  avail  &  see  vali]  a  row,  range  J  v.69 ; 
DA  1.140. 


Avasati  [a  -j-  vas]  to  live  at  or  in,  to  inhabit,  reside,  stay 
M  11.72;  S  1.42;  Sn  43,  805,  1134;  Nd'  123,  127;  Nd* 
133;  J  vi-3«7.  —  pp.  avuttha  (q.  v.). 

Avasatha  [Sk  Svasatha,  fr.  a  -|-  vas]  dwelling-place,  lia- 
bitation;  abode,  house,  dwelling  Vin  I  226  ("agara  resting- 
house);  iv.304  (=  kavatabaddha);  S  1.94,  229;  iv.329; 
Sn  287,  672;  J  iv.396;  VI.425:  Pug   51;    Miln   279. 

Avaha  (adj.)  (— ")  [fr.  a  -f  vah]  bringing,  going,  causing 
Pv  11.9^4  (sukh°);  Vv  22"  (id);  Davs  11.37;  TvA  86 
(upakar°),   116  (anatth");  Sdhp   15,  98,  206. 

Avahatl  [a  -|-  vahati]  to  bring,  cause,  entail,  give  S  1.42  = 
Sn  181,  182  (avahati  sukhaij  metri  causa);  J  III. 169;  v. 
80;  Sn  823;  N'd'  302;  PvA  6.  —  Pass,  avuyhati  VvA 
237  (ppr.  °amana). 

Avahana  (adj  )  ( — °)  [=  avalia]  bringing,  causing  Th  I , 
519;  Sn  256. 

Avahanaka  (adj.-nt )  [=  avahana]  one  who  brings  VvA 
114  (sukbassa), 

Ava  (misery,  misfortune)  see  ava. 

Avata  [etym.?]  a  hole  dug  in  the  ground,  a  pit,  a  well 
D  1. 142  (yaiin°);  J  1.99,  264;  II  406;  111.286;  IV  46  (ca- 
turassa);   vi.io;  Dh.\  1.223;   ^vA  63;  PvA  225. 

Avapa  [if  correct,  fr.  a  -|-  va-  to  blow  with  caus.  p.  —  Cp. 
J  Ji  A  S.  1898,  750  sp.]  a  potter's  furnace  DhA  1.177 
(read  for  avasa?),   178. 

Avara  [Sk.  avara,  fr.  a  -f-  vf]  warding  off,  protection,  guard 
J  VI  432  (yanta-yutta°,  does  it  mean  "cover,  shield"?). — 
For  cpd.  khandh'avara  see  khandba. 

Avaretl  [Sk.  avarayati,  a  +  Caus.  of  Vf]  to  ward  off,  hold 
back,  bar,  S  IV  298 ;  Nett  99. 

Avasa  [Sk.  avasa;  a  -f-  vas]  sojourn,  stay,  dwelling,  living; 
dwelling-place,  residence  Vin  1.92;  D  111.234;  S  IV.91 ; 
A  II 68,  168;  111.46,  262;  Sn  406;  Dh  73  (cp.  DhA 
11.77);  Nd'  128;  J  VL105;  Dhs  1122;  Pug,  15,  19,  57; 
KhA  40;  DhA  1.177  (avasai)  alimpeti:  read  avapai]);  PvA 
13,  14,  36;  VvA  113;  Sdhp  247.  -anavasa  (n.  &  adj.) 
uninhabited,  without  a  home;  an  uninhabited  place  A 
IV.345;  J  11.77;  Pv  II. 3'';  PvA  80  (=anagara);  VvA  46. 
-kappa  the  practice  of  (holding  I'posatha  in  different) 
residence  (within  the  same  boundary)  Vin  11.294,300,306; 
Dpvs  IV.47,  cp.  V.l 8.  -palibodha  the  obstruction  of 
having  a  home  (in  set  of  10  Palibodhas)  KhA  39;  cp. 
Vism  90  sq.  -sappayata  suitability  of  residence  Vism  127. 

Avasika  (adj.)  [avasa  -|-  ika]  living  in,  residing  at  home, 
being  in  (constant  or  fixed)  residence,  usually  appl"*-  to 
bhikkhus  (opp.  iigantuka)  Vin  7.128  sq. ;  11.15,  '7o;  ill. 
65;  V.203  sq.;  M  1.473;  A  1-236;  111.261  sq.,  366;  J 
IV.310;  Pv  IV. 8*  (=  nibaddha-vasanaka  PvA  267). 

Avaha  [a  +  vah]  taking  in  marriage,  lit.  carrying  away  to 
oneself,  marriage  D  1.99 ;  J  VI. 363  ;  SnA  273,  448 ;  DhA  IV.7. 
Often  in  cpd.  a°  vivaha(ka)  lit.  leading  to  (one's  home) 
&  leading  away  (from  the  bride's  home),  wedding  feast 
D  111.183  (°ka);  J  1.452;   VvA   109,   157  (v.l.  "ka). 

Avahana  (nt.)  [a  +  vshana,  of  vah]  —  l.  =  avaha,  i.e. 
marriage,  taking  a  wife  D  1. 11  (:=  aviiha-karana  DA  I. 
96).  —  2.  "getting  up,  bringing  together",  i.  e.  a  mass,  a 
group  or  formation,  in  sena"  a  contingent  of  an  army  J  IV.91. 

Avi  (adv.)  [Sk.  avih,  to  Gr.  ilu  to  hear,  Lat.  audio  (fr. 
"anizdio)  to  hear]  clear,  manifest,  evident ;  openly,  before 
one's  eyes,  in  full  view.  Only  in  phrase  avi  va  rabo 
openly   or  secret  A  v.350,  353;  Pv  11.710  =  DhA  iv.21 


U3 


Avela 


(avi  V.  1.),  expH-  at  PvA  103  by  pakasanai]  paresai)  pa- 
katavasana.  Ocherwise  in  foil.  cpds.  (with  kar  &  bhu): 
°kamma  making  clear,  evidence,  explanation  Vin  11.88 ; 
111.24;  Pug  19,  23;  °karoti  to  make  clear,  show,  explain 
D  lii.:2i;  Sn  84,  85,  349;  J  v.457;  Pug  57;  VvA  79, 
150;  °bhavati  ("bhoti)  to  become  visible  or  evident,  to 
be  explained,  to  get  clear  J  1. 136;  Vism  2S7  (fnt.  Svibha- 
vissati);  UhA  11.51,  82;  bhava  appearance,  manifestation 
D  1.78;  A  III. 17;  J  11.50,  III;  Vism  390  sq.  (revelation, 
opp.  tirobhava).  Cp.   patur. 

Avtjjhatl  (avinjati,  a7inchati)  [a  +  vijjhati  of  vyadh  to 
pierce;  thus  recognised  by  Morris  y  P  T S.  1884,  72, 
against  Trenckner,  Nctis  59  (to  pinj)  &  Hardy  Nett. 
///(/.  z=  vicchay] — l.to  encircle,  encompass,  comprise,  go 
round,  usually  in  ger.  avijjhitva  (w.  ace.)  used  as  prep, 
round  about,  near  J  1. 153  (khettaij),  170  (pokkharaniij); 
DA  1.245  (nagarar)  bahi  avijjhitva  round  the  outer  circle 
of  the  town).  Ordinarily  =  go  round  (ace.)  at  J  IV.59 
(charika-punjai)).  —  2.  [a-s  in  lit.  Sk.]  to  swing  round, 
brandish,  twirl,  whirl  round  Vin  ill.  127  (dandaq  avinji); 
M  III. 141  (matthena  avinjati  to  churn);  J  1. 313;  v. 291 
(cakkari,  of  a  potter's  wheel);  SnA  481  (T.  avinj°,  v.  1. 
avijjh'^;  see  aracaya");  DhA  11.277  (aviuchamana  T. ;  v.  1. 
asiiiciy",  avajiy",  agaiich").  —  3.  to  resort  to,  go  to,  ap- 
proach, incline  to  S  IV.  199  (T.  avinch";  v.  1.  avicch"  & 
avinj");  Nett  13.  —  4.  to  arrange,  set  in  order  J  11.406. — 
5.  to  pull  (?)  A  IV.86  (kannasotani  avijjeyyasi,  v.l.  avijj', 
avii)j°,  avicc",  avinch" ;  cp.  Trenckner,  Notes  59  avinjati 
"to  pull").  —  pp.  aviddha  (q.  v.). 

Avijjhana  (so  for  aviiichana  &  Sviiijana)  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  avijj- 
hati,  lit.  piercing  through,  i.  e.  revolving  axis]  —  I.  (= 
avijjhali  2)  swinging  round,  hanging  loose,  spinning  in 
avijjhana-rajju  a  loose,  rope,  esp.  in  mythology  the 
swinging  or  whirling  rope  by  which  Sakka  holds  the 
world's  wheel  or  axis,  in  the  latter  sense  at  Dh.\  11.X43 
(T.  Sviiich"  (v.  1.  avijj")  =  111.97,  9^  (where  aviujana- 
tthana  for  °rajju).  Otherwise  a  rope  used  in  connection 
with  the  opening  &  shutting  of  a  door  (pulling  rope?) 
Vin  11.120,  148;  J  V.29S,  299  (T.  aviiij',  v.l.  avicch"  & 
avij°).  —  2.  (cp.  avijjhati  3)  going  to,  approach,  contact 
with  DhsA  312  ("rasa,  T.  aviiSj",  v.l.  aviiich° ;  or  is  it 
"encompassing"?  =  avijjhati  l  ?):  Vism  444  (avii5jana- 
rasa).  —  3.  (cp.  avijjhati  5)  pulling,  drawing  along  Vin 
III. 121   (=  akaddhana   nama). 

Avijjhanaka  (nt )  [fr.  avijjhati  in  meaning  2]  whirling 
round,  (hat  which  spins  round,  the  whirling-round  wheel 
(or  pole)  of  the  world  (cp.  the  potter's  wheel),  the  world- 
axis  Dh.\  11.146  (T.  avinch"). 

Aviddha  [pp.  of  avijjhati  2,  cp.  BSk.  aviddha  in  meaning 
curved,  crooked  Av.  S  1.87  Lai.  V.  207]  whirling  or  spin- 
ning round,  revolving;  swung  round,  set  into  whirling 
motion  J  iv  6  (cakkaij  =  kumbhakara-cakkam  iva  bhamali 
C);  V.291.   What  does  an-aviddha  at  PvA   135  mean? 

Avila  (adj.)  [is  it  a  haplological  contraction  from  a  -f  vi  -f- 
lul  to  roll  about?]  stirred  up,  agitaied,  disturbed,  stained, 
soiled,  dirty  A  1. 9;  111.233;  J  v.i6,  90  (abila);  Nd"  488 
(+  lujita),  489;  ThA  251;  DA  1.226.  More  frequent  as 
anavila  undisturbed,  clean,  pure,  serene  D  1.76;  S  ill. 
83;  IV.118;  A  1.9;  III. 236;  Sn  160;  Dh  82,  413;  J  III. 
157;  Miln  34;  VvA  29,  30;  ThA  251. 

Avllati  [fr.  avila  or  is  it  a  direct  contraction  of  a  -|-  vi  -|- 
lulati  ?]  to  whirl  round,  to  be  agitated,  to  be  in  motion 
Miln  259  (-f  lulati). 

Avllatta  (nl.)  [abstr.  fr.  avila]  confusion,  disturbance,  agita- 
tion Sn  967;  Nd<  488. 

Avisati    [a  -f-  vis]    to  approach,  to  enter  Vin  1V.334  ;  Sn 

936  (aor.  avisi);  J  1V.4I0,  496;   Vism  42. 


Avunatl  [in  form  =  »avrnoti,  a  -f  Vf,  cp.  avarati,  but  in 
meaning  :=r  *avayati,  a  -|-  va  t"  weave,  thus  a  confusion 
of  the  two  roots,  the  latter  being  merged  into  the  former] 
to  string  upon,  to  fix  on  to  (c.  loc),  to  impale  J  1.430; 
111.35;  V.145;  ^'1105.  —  Caus.  II.  avunapeti  J  111.218 
(sale).  —  pp.  avuta'  (q.  v.),  whereas  the  other  pp.  avata 
is  the  true  derivative  of  a  -f-  Vf. 

Avuta  [pp.  of  avunati  in  meaning  of  Sk.  avayati,  the  cor- 
responding Sk.  form  being  a -[- uta  ::=:  ota]  —  I.  strung 
upon,  tied  on,  fixed  on  to  D  1.76  (suttaq);  11.13  (''J)) 
A  1.286  (tantavuiaq  web);  J  111.52  (valliya);  vi.346  (sut- 
takena);  b.\  1.94  C^sutta).  —  2.  impaled,  stuck  on  (sule 
on  the  pale)  J  1.430;  III. 35  ;  v.497 ;  vi.105;  l'vA2i7,  220. 

Avuta'^  =  Avafa  (see  avunati  &  avuta')  covered,  obstructed, 
hindered  It  8  (mohena);  also  in  phrase  avuta  nivuta 
ophuta  etc.  Nd'  24  (t)  =  Nd-  365  =  DA  1.59. 

Avuttha  [pp.  of  avasati]  inhabited  D  11.50  (an°);  S  1.33. 

Avudha  (nt.)  [Vedic  ayudha,  fr.  a  4  yudh  to  fight]  an 
instrument  to  fight  with,  a  weapon,  stick  etc.  D  III  219; 
M  11.100;  A  IV. 107,  no;  Sn  1008;  J  1.150;  11. no;  in. 
467;  IV. 160,  283,  437;  Nd-  on  Sn  72;  Miln  8,  339; 
DhA  II. 2;  IV.207;  Sn.\  225,  466  (°jivika  :=  issattha).  See 
also  ayudba. 

Avuyhamana  ppr.  of  avuyhati  (Pass,  of  avahati),  being 
conveyed  or  brought  VvA  237  (reading  uncertain). 

AVUSO  (voc.  pi.  m.)  [a  contracted  form  of  ayusmanto  pi. 
of  ayusman,  of  which  the  regular  Pali  form  is  ayasmant, 
with  v  for  y  as  frequently  in  Pali,  e.  g.  avudha  for 
ayudha]  friend,  a  form  of  polite  address  "friend,  brother, 
Sir",  usually  in  conversation  between  bhikkhus.  The 
grammatical  construction  is  with  the  pi.  of  the  verb,  like 
bhavai)  and  bhavanto.  —  Vin  11.302;  D  H51,  157;  118; 
SnA  227;  DhA  1.9;  11.93;  PvA   12,   13,  38,  208. 

Avethana  (nt.)  [a  -J-  vethana,  ve$t]  rolling  up,  winding 
up  or  round,  fig.  explanation  Miln  28  (-(-  nibbethana,  lit. 
rolling  up  and  rolling  down,  ravelling  &  unravelling), 
231   ("vinivethana). 

Avefhlta  [pp.  of  avelheti,  a  -f  ve§t,  cp.  avedhika]  turned 
round,  slung  round  or  over  J  iv.383  sq.  (v.  1.  avedhita 
&  avelita,  C.  expU-  by  parivattita). 

Avepl  (adj  )  ( — °)  [according  to  Trenckner,  Kotes  75  fr. 
a  -f"  vina  "Sine  qua  non",  but  very  doubtful]  special, 
peculiar,  separate  Vin  11.204  ("uposatha  etc.);  J  1490 
(^sangha-kammani). 

Avenika  (adj)  [fr.  aveni;  cp.  BSk.  avenika  Av.  S  1. 14, 
108;  Divy  2,  182,  268,  302]  special,  extraordinary,  ex- 
ceptional S  IV. 239;  A  v.74  sq.;  Vism  268;  VvA  1 12 
("bhava  peculiarity,  specialty),  KhA  23,  35. 

Ave^ilya  (adj.)  =  avenika  Vin  1.7 1;  J  iv.358;  vi.128. 

Avedha  [cp.  Sk.  aviddha,  a  -|-  pp.  of  vyadh]  piercing,  hole, 
wound  J   11.276  (v.l.  aveddha;  C.  =  viddha-tthane  vana), 

Avedhika  (adj.  f.  sell,  paiiiia)  [a  4-  vedhaka  of  avedha, 
vyadh,  but  confused  with  aveth°  of  a -)- ve§t,  cp.  avethana 
4i  nibbedhaka]  piercing,  penetrating;  or  ravelling,  turning, 
rolling  up  or  round  (cp.  Svijjhati  which  is  derived  from 
5  +  vyadh,  but  takes  its  meaning  from  avetheti),  dis- 
crimination, thinking  over  J  11.9  (-|-  nibbedhika,  v.l.  for 
both  th). 

Ave]a  (adj.  &  "a  f.)  [not  with  Miiller  P.Gr.  10,  30,  37  = 
Sk.  apida,  but  fr.  a  -}-  ve^th  to  wind  or  turn  round, 
which  in  P.  is  represented  by  avetheti  as  well  as  avijjhati; 
!  then  standing  for  either  dh  (ih)  or  dh  (avedha,  q.  v.). 
There  may  have  been  an  analogy  influence  through  vCll 
to    move    to   and    fro,    cp.   avejita.   MiiUcr  refers  to  avcla 


Avela 


114 


Asana 


rightly  the  late  dial.  (Prk.)  amela]  —  i.  turning  round, 
swinging  round;  diffusion,  radiation;  protuberance,  with 
reference  to  the  rays  of  the  Buddha  at  J  1. 12,  95,  501.  — 
2.  (f.)  a  garland  or  other  ornament  slung  round  &  worn 
over  the  head  Vv  36'^  (kancan°;  =  avela-pilandhana  VuA 
167).  See  avelin. 

Avelita  (!?)  [pp.  of  a  +  veil,  cp.  avela  &  BSk.  aviddha 
curved,  crooked  Av.  S  1.87,  Lai.  V.  207]  turned  round, 
■wound,  curved  J  VI. 354  ("singika  with  curved  horns, 
v.  1.  avellita). 

Ave|ll1  (adj.)  [fr.  avela]  wearing  garlands  or  other  head- 
ornaments,  usually  in  f.  °inl  J  v.409  (=:  kannalankarehi 
yutta  C);  Vv  30'  (voc.  avelini,  but  at  id.  p.  48'^  aveline), 
32';  VvA  125  (on  Vv  30-  expls-  as  ratana-maya-pupph'- 
avejavati). 

Avesana  (nt.)  [fr.  a'isati]  entrance;  workshop;  living-place, 
house  Vin  11  117  ("vitthaka,  meaning?);  M  II  53;  Pv  11.9". 

Asa'  contr.-form  of  aijsa  in  cpd.  kotthasa  part.,  portion  etc.: 
see  aijsa'.  Can  we  compare  BSk.  asapStrl  (see   next). 

Asa-^  [Sk,  asa]  food,  only  in  cpd.  patarasa  morning  food, 
breakfast  Sn  387  (pato  asitabbo  li  patar-aso  pindapatass' 
etai)  namaq  Sn.A  374^;  DhA  iv.211;  see  further  ref. 
under  patar;  and  paccba-asa  aftermath  S  1.74.  Can  we 
compare  BSk.  asa-patrl  (vessel)  Divy  246?  Der.  fr.  asa 
is  asaka  with  .abstr.  ending  asakattaij  "eating",  food,  in 
nana°  various  food  or  na  -|-  anasak°)  Sn  249.  See  also 
nirasa,  which  may  be  taken  either  as  nir  -)-  *asa  or 
nir  -f-  'asa. 

Asa'''  the  adj.  form  of  asS  (f.),  wish,  hope.  See  under  asa. 

Asa^  archaic  3rd  sg.  perf.  of  atthi  to  be,  only  in  cpd. 
itibasa  =:  iti  ha  asa  "thus  it  has  been". 

AsaQSa  (adj.)  [of  "'asarisa,  see  next]  hoping,  expecting 
something,  longing  for  A  1. 108  =  Pug  27  (expli^-  by  Pug 
A  208  as  "so  hi  arahattai]  asaqsati  patthetl  li  asaqso"); 
SnA   321,  336.   Cp.  nir°. 

AsaQSati  [for  the  usual  asiqsali,  a  -f-  SaQS]  to  expect,  hope 
for,  wish  Pug  A  208  (=  pattheti).  See  also  asamana. 

Asat)Sa  (f.)  [from  a  +  saijs]  wish,  desire,  expectation,  hope 
J  IV. 92.  —  Cp.  nirasarjsa. 

Asagsuka  (adj.)  [fr.  asaijsS]  full  of  expectation,  longing, 
hankerin"  after,  Th  2,  273  (=  asiqsanaka  Th.A  217; 
trsl.  "cadging"). 

Asaka  (adj.)  [of  asa-]  belonging  to  food,  having  food,  only 
in  neg.  an"  fasting  S  IV.118;  Dh  141  (f.  a  fasting  = 
bhafa-patikkhepa  UhA  111.77);  J   v.17;  vi.63. 

Asakatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  asaka]  having  food,  feeding,  in 
an'    fasting  Sn   249  (==  abhojana  SnA  292). 

Asankati  [i  -f  sank]  to  be  doubtful  or  afraid,  to  suspect, 
distrust,  J  1. 151  (pret.  .nsankittha),  163  (aor.  asanki);  11. 
203;  SnA  298.  —  pp.  asankita  (q  v.), 

Asanka  (f)  [Sk.  asanka  fr.  a -|- sank]  fear,  apprehension, 
doubt,  suspicion  J  1.338:  11.383  ;iii-533 ;  vi.350,  370; 
Dh.\  111.485;  VvA  no.  —  Cp.  sasanka  &  nirasanka. 

Asankita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  asankati]  suspected,  in  fear,  afraid, 
apprehensive,  doubtful  (obj.  &  subj.)  Miln  173,  372  (°pari- 
sankita  full  of  apprehension  and  suspicion);  DhA  1.223; 
VvA  no.  —  Cp.  ussankita  &  parisankita. 

Asankin  ( — °)  (adj  )  [fr.  asank.a]  fearing,  anxious,  appre- 
hensive Sn   255  (bheda°);  J   in. 192  (id.). 


Asanga  [a  -f-  sanga  fr.  saiij   to  hang  on,  cp.  Sk.  asangi  & 

asakti]  —  I.  adhering,  clinging  to,  attachment,  pursuit 
J  IV. 1 1.  —  2.  thai  which  hangs  on  (the  body),  clothing, 
garment,  dress;  adj.  dressed  or  clothed  in  ( — °);  usually 
in  cpd.  uttarasanga  a  loose  (hanging)  "outer  robe  e.  g. 
Vin  1.289;  S  lv.2go;  PvA  73;  VvA  33  (suddh"),  51  (id.), 

Asangin  (adj.)  [fr.  astjnga]  hanging  on,  attached  to  J  IV  11. 

Asajja  (indecl.)  [ger.  of  asadeti.  Cans,  of  asfdati,  a  +  sad; 
Sk.  asadya]  —  i.  sitting  on,  going  to,  approaching;  al- 
located, belonging  to;  sometimes  merely  as  prep.  ace. 
"near"  (cp.  asanna)  Sn  4:8  (asajja  naq  upavisi  he  came 
up  near  to  him),  448  (kako  va  selari  a.  nibbijjapema 
Gotamaq);  J  11.95;  vi.194;  Miln  271.  —  2.  put  on  to 
(lit.  silting  or  sticking  on),  hitting,  striking  S  1. 127 
(khanur)  va  urasa  a.  nibbijjapetha  Gotama  "ye've  ihrust 
as  't  were  your  breast  against  a  slake.  Disgusted,  come 
ye  hence  from  Gotama"  trs/.  p.  159;  C.  expl^-  by  paha- 
ritva,  which  comes  near  the  usual  paraphrase  ghattetva)  — 
3.  knocking  against  or  "giving  one  a  seltingto",  insulting, 
offending,  assailing  D  1. 107  (a.  a.  avocasi  =  ghattetva 
DA  1.276);  A  III. 373  (tadisai)  bhikkhui]  a.);  J  v. 267  (isiq 
a.  Gotamai) ;  C.  p.  272  asadetva);  Pv  IV.7I''  (isiq  a.  = 
asadetva  PvA  266).  —  4.  "sitting  on",  i.  e.  attending 
constantly  to,  persevering,  energetically,  with  energy  or 
emphasis,  willingly,  spontaneously  M  1.250;  D  111.258  = 
A  IV. 236  (danaq  deli);  Vv  10'  (danai)  adasiq;  cp.  VvA 
55   samagantva).   See  asada,  asadeti,  asideti,  asajjana. 

Asajjana  (nt.)  [fr.  asajja  in  meaning  of  no.  3]  "knocking 
against",  setting  on,  insult,  offence  Vin  11.203  (°^  Tatha- 
galai)  an  insult  to  the  T. ;  quoted  as  such  at  VvA  55, 
where  two  meanings  of  a.  are  given,  corresponding  to 
asajja  I  &  3,  viz.  samagama  &  ghattana,  the  latter  in 
this  quot.)  =  It  86  (so  to  be  read  with  v.  1. ;  T.  has 
apajja  nay);  S  1.114  (apunnai)  pasavi  Maro  asajjanar)  Ta- 
thagatai] ;  trsl.   "in  seeking  the  T.  to  assail");  J   v.208. 

Asati  [from  as]  to  sit  DA  1.208;  h.  sg.  asi  S  1. 1 30.  — 
pp.  asina  (q.  v.). 

Asatta'  [pp.  of  a  -f  saiij]  (a)  lit.  hanging  on,  in  phrase 
kanthe  asatto  kuriapo  a  corpse  hanging  round  one's  neck 
M  I.I 20;  J  1.5.  —  (b)  fig.  attached  to,  clinging  to  J  I. 
377   (-{- satta  lagga);  ThA  259  (an°). 

Asatta-  [pp.  of  a  -f-  lap]  accursed,  cursed  J    V.446  (an°). 

Asatti  (f.)  [a  +  saiij]  attachment,  hanging  on  (w.  loc), 
dependence,  clinging  Vin  11.156=  A  1138;  S  1. 212;  Sn 
777  (bhavesu);  Nd'  51,  221;  Nett  12,  128.  —  Cp. 
nirasattin. 

Asada  [a  -|-  sad;  cp.  asajja  &  asadeti]  —  I.  approach, 
dealing  with,  business  with  (ace),  concern,  affair,  means 
of  acting  or  getting  Vin  11.195  ^=  J  v.336  (ma  kuiijara 
nagam  asado);  M  1.326  (metaq  asado  =  ma  etaij  asado 
do  not  meddle  with  this,  lit.,  be  not  this  any  affair);  J 
1 414  (cakkai)  asado  you  have  to  do  with  the  wheel; 
interpreted  as  adj,  in  meaning  patto  ^  finding,  getting); 
VI. 5 28  (interpreted  as  ankusa  a  hook,  i.  e.  means  of  get- 
ting something).  —  2.  (as  adj.)  in  phrase  durasada  hard 
to  sit  on,  i.e.  hard  to  get  at,  unapproachable,  difficult 
to  attack  or  manage  or  conquer  Sn  p.  I07  (cp.  SnA 
451):  J  VI. 272  ;  Vv  50"*  (=  anupagamaniyato  kenaci  pi 
anasadaniyato  ca  durasado  VvA  213);  Miln  21;  Dpvs 
V.21 ;   VI. 38;  Sdhp  384. 

Asana  (nt.)  [from  asati]  sitting,  sitting  down;  a  seat,  throne 
M  1.469;  Vin  1.272  (=  pallankassa  okasa);  S  1.46  (ek° 
sitting  alone,  a  solitary  seat);  A  III. 389  (an°  without  a 
seat);  Sn  338,  718,  8:0,  981;  Nd'  131;  J  iv.435  (dsan' 
udaka-dayin    giving    seat    &   drink);    V.403   (id.);  vi.413; 


Asana 


IIS 


Asa 


DhA  11.31   (dhamm°  the  preacher's  seat  or  throne);  SnA 
401 ;   PvA   i6,  23,   141. 

-abhibara  gift  or  distinction  of  the  seat  J  1.81.  -tlpa- 
gata  endowed  with  a  seat,  sitting  down  Sn  708  (=  ni- 
sinna  SnA  495).  -pannapaka  one  who  appoints  seats  Vin 
11.305.  -patikkhitta  one  who  rejects  all  seats,  or  objects 
to  sitting  down  D  1.167;  A  1.296;  11,206;  Pug  55.  -sala 
a  hall  with  seating  accommodation  Vism  69;  DhA  11. 
65;  IV.46. 

Asanaka  (nt.)  [asana  -|-  ka]  a  small  seat  Vv   i'. 

Asanika  (adj.)  [fr.  asana]  having  a  seat;  in  ek°  sitting  by 
oneself  Vism  69. 

Asandi  (f.)  [fr.  a  -)-  sad]  an  extra  long  chair,  a  deck-chair 
Vin  1.192;  11.142,  163,  169,  170;  D  1.7  (:=  pamanatik- 
kant'  asanai]  DA  1.86),  55  =r  M  1.515  =  S  111.307  (used 
as  a  bier)  A  1.181;  J  1. 108.  See  note  at  Dia/,  l.ll. 

Asandlka  (f.)  fr.  Slsandi]  a  small  chair  or  tabouret  Vin  11. 
149;  KhA  44. 

Asanna  (adj.)  [pp.  of  a  +  sad,  see  asldati]  near  (cp.  asajja'), 
opp.  dura  J  II. 154;  DhA  11  91;  PvA  42,  243. 

Asappana  (fr.)  [fr.  +  srp]  !''•  "creeping  on  to",  doubt, 
mistrust,  always  coinbd-  with  parisappana  Nd^  i ;  Dhs 
1004  (trsl.  "evasion",  cp.  £>/is  irsl.  p  116),  1 1 18,  1235; 
DA  1.69. 

Asabha  [the  guna-  and  compn  form  of  usabha,  corresponding 
to  Sk.  arsabha  >  rsabha,  see  usabha]  (in  comp")  a  bull, 
peculiar  to  a  bull,  bull-like,  fig.  a  man  of  strong  &  eminent 
qualities,  a  hero  or  great  man,  a  leader,  thus  in  tar°  Sn 
687;  nar°  Sn  6S4,  696;  asabha-camma  bull's  hide  J  vi. 
453  (v.  1.  usabha'). 

-tthana  (as  asabhanthana)  "bull's  place",  first  place, 
distinguished  position,  leadership  M  1.69;  S  11.27;  A  11. 8 
(C.  settha-Uhana  uttama-tthana);  ill. 9;  v.33  sq. ;  DA  r. 
31 ;  KhA  104. 

Asabhin  (adj  )  [fr.  asabha]  bull-like,  becoming  to  a  bull, 
lordly,  majestic,  imposing,  bold;  only  in  phrase  °r]  vacaij 
bhasati  "speak  the  lordly  word"  D  11.15,  82;  M  111.123J 
J  1.53!  DA  1. 91;  cp.  Davs  1.28  (niccharayi  vacar)  asabhiij). 

Asamana  (adj.)  [ppr.  of  asaqsati  or  asiqsati,  for  the  usual 
earlier  asasana]  wishing,  desiring,  hoping,  expecting  Vv 
84'  (kiq  a  =  kiq  paccasiq  santo  VvA  336);  Pv  IV. i^* 
(==  asir|samana  patlhayamana  PvA  226). 

Asaya  [a  +  4i,  cp.  in  similar  meaning  &  derivation  anusaya. 
The  semantically  related  Sk.  asraya  from  a  +  ill  is  in 
P.  represented  by  assaya.  Cp.  also  BSk.  asayatah  intention- 
ally, in  earnest  Divy  281;  Av.  S  II  161]  —  I.  abode, 
haunt,  receptacle;  dependence  on,  refuge,  support,  con- 
dition S  1.38;  Vin  III. 151;  J  11.99;  ^'''d  257;  VvA  60; 
PvA  210;  jal"  river  VvA  47;  Pgdp  80;  adj.  depending 
on,  living  in  ( — ")  Miln  317;  Ndi  362  (bil°,  dak°  etc.). 
See  also  amasaya,  pakkasaya.  —  2.  (fig.)  inclination,  in- 
tention, will,  hope;  often  combd-  &  compared  with  anu- 
saya (inclination,  hankering,  disposition),  e.  g.  at  Ps  i. 
133;  II. 158;  Vbh  340;  Vism  140  (°posana);  PvA  197. — 
Sn.\  182  (°vipatli),  314  (°suddhi),  KhA  103  ("sampatti). 
Cp.  nirasaya.  —  3.  outflow,  excretion  Pv  III. 5'  (gabbh" 
=  gabbha-mala  PvA   198);  Vism  344. 

Asayati  [a  -f  gi;  lit.  "lie  on",  cp.  Ger.  anliegen  &  Sk. 
asaya  ^  Ger.  Angelegenheit]  to  wish,  desire,  hope,  intend 
J  1V.291   (grd.  asayana,  gloss  esamana).  See  asaya. 

Asava  [fr.  a  -|-  sni,  would  corresp.  to  a  Sk.  *asrava,  cp. 
Sk.  asrava.  The  BSk.  asrava  is  a  (wrong)  sankrilisation 
of  the  Pali  asava,  cp.  Divy  391  &  ksloasrava]  that  which 


flows  (out  or  on  to)  outflow  &  influx,  i.  spirit,  the  in- 
toxicating extract  or  secretion  of  a  tree  or  flower.  O.  C. 
in  Vin  iv.iio  (four  kinds);  B.  on  D  III. 182  (five  kinds) 
DhsA  48;  KhA  26;  J  ;v.222;  VI.9.  —  2.  discharge  from 
a  sore,  A  1.124,  127  =  Pug  30.  —  3.  in  psychology, 
t.t.  for  certain  specified  ideas  which  intoxicate  the  mind 
(bemuddle  it,  befoozle  it,  so  that  it  cannot  rise  to 
higher  things).  Freedom  from  the  "Asavas"  constitutes 
Arahantship,  &  the  fight  for  the  extinction  of  these  asavas 
forms  one  of  the  main  duties  of  man.  On  the  difficulty 
of  translating  the  terra  see  CfJ.  227.  See  also  discussion 
of  term  asava  (=  asavanti  ti  asava)  at  DhsA  48  (cp. 
Expositor  pp.  63  sq.).  See  also  Cfd.  227  sq.,  &  especially 
Dhs  Irsl.  291  sq.  —  The  4  asavas  are  kam°,  bhav°, 
ditth°,  avijj°,  i.  e.  sensualily,  rebirth  (lust  of  life),  spe- 
culation and  ignorance.  —  They  are  mentioned  as  such 
at  D  11.81,  84,  91,  94,  98,  123,  126;  A  1. 165  sq.,  196; 
11.211;  111.93,  414;  IV.79;  Ps  1.94,  117;  Dhs  1099,  1448; 
Nd2  134;  Nett  31,  114  sq.  —  The  set  of  3,  which  is 
probably  older  (kama°,  bhava°,  avijja")  occurs  at  M  155; 
A  1.165;  m.4i4;  S  IV.256;  V.56,  189;  It  49;  Vbh  364. 
For  other  connections  see  Vin  1. 14  (.inupadaya  asavehi 
cittSni  viinuccirjsu),  17,  20,  182;  11.202;  in. 5  ("samudaya, 
°nirodha  etc.);  D  1.83,  167;  111.78,  108,  130,  220,  223, 
230,  240,  283;  M  1.7  sq.,  23,  35,  76,  219,  279,  445 
("thaniya);  11.22;  111.72,  277;  S  11.187  sq.  (°ehi  cittai) 
vimucci);  111.45  (id);  iv.107  (id.),  20;  v.8,  28,  410;  A 
1.85  sq.  (vaddhanti),  98,  165  (°samudaya,  °nirodha  etc.), 
187;  II. 154  (°ehi  ciltai]  vimuttaq),  196;  111.21,  93  (°samu- 
daya,  "nirodha  etc.),  245,  387  sq.,  410,  414;  iv.13,  146 
(°pariyadana  end  of  the  a.),  161  (°vighata-pari|aha);  v.70, 
237;  Th  2,  4,  99,  loi  (pahasi  asave  sabbe);  Sn  162, 
374,  535  (pl-  asavani),  546,  749,  915,  iioo;  Dh  93, 
253,  292;  Nd'  331  (pubb°);  Vbh  42,  64,  426;  Pug  11, 
13,  27,  30  sq.;  Miln  419;  DhsA  48;  ThA  94,  173;  KhA 
26;  DA  1224;  Sdhp  1 ;  Pgdp  65  (piyasava-sura,  meaning?). 
Referring  specially  to  the  cxiinclion  (kbaya)  of  the 
asavas  &  10  Arahanlship  following  as  a  result  are  the 
foil,  passages:  (1)  asavanar;  khaya  D  1.156;  S  1129, 
214;  11157,  96  sq,  152  sq  ;  IV.105,  175;  V.92,  203, 
220,  271,  284;  A  1.107  sq.,  123  sq.,  232  sq.,  273,  291; 
II.6,  36,  44  sq.,  149  sq.,  214;  HI  69,  114,  131,  202,  306, 
319  sq.;  IV  83  sq.,  119,  140sq,  3I4sq.;  v.lo  sq,  36,  69,  94 
sq,  105,  132.  174  sq,  343  sq.;  It  49;  Pug  27,  62;  Voh 
334,  344;  Vism  9;  DA  1.224;  cp.  "parikkhaya  A  v  343 
sq.  See  also  arahalta  formula  C.  —  (2)  kbinasava  (adj.) 
one  whose  Asavas  are  destroyed  (see  khina)  S  1.13,  48, 
53,  146;  1183,  239;  111.199,  '28,  178;  IV.217;  A  177, 
109,  241,  266;  IV.120,  224,  370  sq.;  V.40,  253  sq  ;  Ps 
II  173;  cp.  parikkhina  asava  A  IV. 418,  434,  451  sq.; 
asavakhina  Sn  370.  —  (3)  anasava  (adj.)  one  who  is 
free  from  the  asavas,  an  Arahant  Vin  II  148  =  164;  D 
III.112;  S  1130;  II  214,  222;  111.83;  IV.128;  A  1.81,  107 
sq,  123  sq.,  273,  291;  11.6,  36,  87,  146;  III  19,  29,  114, 
166;  IV.98,  140  sq.,  314  sq.,  400;  A  V.io  sq  .  36,  242, 
340;  Sn  1105,  1133;  Dh  94,  126,  386;  Th  l.ioo;  It 
75;  Ndi  44;  Pv  11.6";  Pug  27;  Vbh  426;  Dhs  11 01,  1451  ; 
VvA  9.  Cp.  nirasava  ThA  148.  —  Opp.  sasava  S  11147; 
V.232;  A  1.81;  V242;  Dhs  990;  Nett  10;  Vism  13,  438. 

Asavati  [a  +  sru,  cp.  Sk.  asravali ;  its  doublet  is  assavati] 
to  flow  towards,  come  to,  occur,  happen  Nett   1 16. 

Asasana  [either  grd.  for  "iisaysana  or  contracted  form  of 
ppr,  med.  of  asaqsati  (=  asiijsali)  for  *asar)samana]  hoping, 
wishing,  desiring,  longing  for  Sn  369  (an";  SnA  365  how- 
ever reads  asaySna),  1090;  Th  2,  528;  J  iv.18  (=  asiij- 
santo  C),  381;  V.391  (=  asiijsanto  C).  See  anasasana, 
asagsati,  asamana  &  asayana. 

Asa  (f.)  [cp.  Sk,  asah  f,]  expectation,  hope,  wish,  longing, 
desire ;  adj.  asa  ( — °)  longing  for,  anticipating,  desirous 
of  Vin  1255  ("avacchedika  hope-destroying),  259;  D  11. 
206;  111.88;  M  111.138  (asaq  karoti);  A  1 86  (dve  asa), 
107   (vigat-aso  one  whose  longings  have  gone);  Sn  474, 


A.sa 


Ii6 


Asevana 


634,  794,  864;  J  1.267,  285;  V.401;  VI.452  ("chinna  = 
chinnasa  C);  Nd'  99,  261,  213  sq  ;  Vv  37"  (perhaps 
belter  to  be  read  with  v.  1.  SS  ahai],  cp.  VvA  172);  Pug 
27  (vigat°  =  arahatlasaya  vigatatta  vigalaso  Pug  A  208); 
Dhs  1059  (+  asiqsana  etc.),  1 136;  PvA  22  (chinn°  dis- 
appointed), 29  ("abhibhuta),  105;  Davs  V13;  Sdhp  78, 
III,  498,  609. 

Asatika  (f.)  [cp.  Marathi  asadi]  a  fly's  egg,  a  nit  M  1.220 
sq.;  A  V.347  sq.,  ss'l,  359';  Nett  59;  J  111.176. 

AsSdeti  [Caus.  of  asidati,  5  -|-  sad ;  cp.  Ssajja  &  asauna]  — 
I.  to  lay  hand  on,  to  touch,  strike;  fig.  the  offend,  assail, 
insult  M  1. 371;  J  1.48 1 ;  v. 197;  aor.  asadesi  Th  i,  280 
(ma  a.  Tathagate);  ger.  asadetva  J  v.272;  Miln  100,  205 
(''ayitva);  PvA  266  (isiq),  asadiya  J  v.  154  (asadiya  metri 
causa;  isiij,  cp.  asajja'),  &  asajja  (q.  v.);  infin.  asadurj 
J  V.I 54  &  asadituri  ibid.;  grd.  asadanlya  Miln  205; 
VvA  213  (an").  —  2.  to  come  near  to  (c.  ace),  approach, 
get  J  111.206  (Ivhuracakkar)). 

Asajha  &  Asa|hi  (f.)  [Sk.  asadha]  N.  of  a  month  (June- 
July)  and  of  a  Nakkhatta;  only  in  comp"-  as  Asalha"  & 
Asalhi",  viz.  °nakkhatta  J  1.50;  SnA  208;  °punnama 
J  1.63;  DhA  1.87;  SnA  199;  VvA  66;  PvA  I37;'°masa 
SnA  378  (=  vassupanayikaya  purimabhage  A.);  VvA  307 
(=  gimhanai)  pacchirao  maso). 

Asavati  (f.)  N.  of  a  creeper  (growing  at  the  celestial  grove 
Cittalata)  J   ill. 250,  251. 

Asasati  [cp.  Sk.  asasati  &  asasti,  a  -f  Sas]  to  pray  for, 
expect,  hope;  confounded  with  ^ags  in  asaqsati  &  asiij- 
sati  (q.  V.)  &  their  derivations.  —  pp.  asittha  (q.  v.). 

As!  &  Asll)  3^''  &  IS'  sg.  aor.  of  atthi  (q.  v.). 

AsilJSaka  (adj.)  [fr.  a  -|-  siqsati,  cp.  asagsa]  wishing,  aspiring 
after,  praying  for  Miln   342. 

Aslgsatl  [Sk.  asagsati,  a  -f  Sags,  cp.  also  SaS  &  asSsati, 
further  abhisaqsati,  abhisiqsati  &  asaqsati]  to  hope  for, 
wish,  pray  for  (lit.  praise  for  the  sake  of  gain),  desire, 
(w.  ace.)  S  1.34,  62;  Sn  779,  1044,  1046  (see  Nd'  135); 
J  1.267;  Ill.25l;iv.i8;  V.435;  VI.43;  Nd'  60;  Mhvs  30, 100; 
VvA  337 ;  PvA  226  (ppr.  asiqsamana  for  Ssamana,  q.  v.). 

Asiljsanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  asiqsana]  hoping  for  something,  lit. 
praising  somebody  for  the  sake  of  gain,  cadging  ThA 
217  (for  asaqsuka  Th  2,  273). 

Aslgsana  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  a  -\-  §aQS,  cp.  asiqsati]  desire,  wish, 
craving  J  v. 28;  Dhs  1059,  1136  (+ asiqsitatta).  As  asi- 
sana  at  Nttt  53. 

Aslgsanlya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  asiqsati]  to  be  wished  for,  desir- 
able Miln  2  (°ratana). 

Asikkhita  [pp.  of  I  -f  Hks,  Sk.  asiksita]  schooled,  in- 
structed PvA  67,  68. 

Aslficatl  [5  H-  sic,  cp.  abhisiScati  &  avasincati]  to  sprinkle, 
besprinkle  Vin  1.44;  11.208;  J  iv.376;  Vv  796  (=  siiicati 
VvA  307);  PvA  41  (udakena),  104,  213  (ger.  °itva).  — 
pp.  asitta  (q.  v.).   Cp.  vy°. 

Asittha  [pp.  of  asasati,  Sk.  asista]  wished  or  longed  for 
PvA   104. 

*A8ita'  [=  asita'  ?]  "having  eaten",  but  probably  masita 
(pp.  of  nirS  to  touch,  cp.  Sk.  mrsita,  which  is  ordinarily 
in  massita),  since  it  only  occurs  in  comb"^.  where  m 
precedes,  viz.  J  11.446  (dumapakkani-m-asita,  where  C. 
reading  is  masita  &  expl"-  khaditvS  asita  (v.  1.  asita)  dhata); 
Miln  302  (visam-Ssita  affected  with  poison  =  visamasita). 


Cp.  also  the  form  inasi(n)  touching,  eating  at  J  vi.354 
(tina°,  expld-  by  C.  as  khadaka).  —  asita  at  J  V.70  is 
very  doubtful,  v.  1.  asina  &  asita ;  C.  expls-  by  dhata 
suhita  p.  73. 

*Asita^  [registered  as  such  with  meaning  "performed"  by 
Hardy  in  Index]  at  VvA  276  is  better  read  with  v.l.  SS 
bhasita  (-vadana  etc.). 

Asitta  [pp.  of  asiiicati,  Sk.  asikta]  sprinkled,  poured  out, 
anointed  J  v.87 ;  Pug  31;  Miln  286;  DhsA  307;  DhA 
1. 10;  VvA  69. 

Asittaka  (adj.)  [asilta  -)-  ka]  mixed,  mingled,  adulterated 
Vin  11.123  C'upadhana  "decorated  divan"?);  ThA  61,  i68 
(an"  for  asecanaka,  q.  v.). 

Asitika  (adj.)  [fr.  asita]  80  years  old  M  11.124;  J  111.395; 
SnA  172. 

Asitiki  (f.)  [etym.?  Cp.  BSk.  asltaki  Lai.  V.  319]  a  certain 
plant  M  180  =  245  (°pabba). 

Asidati  [cp.  Sk.  asidati,  a -f  sad]  —  I.  to  come  together, 
lit.  to  sit  by  D  1.248  (v.l.  BB  adisitva  for  aslditva,  to 
be  preferred?).  —  2.  to  come  or  go  near,  to  approach 
(w.  ace),  to  get  (to)  A  111.69  (asivisaq),  373  (na  sadhu- 
rupaq  aside,  should  perhaps  be  read  without  the  na);  J 
IV.56.  —  3.  to  knock  against,  insult,  offend  attack  J  v. 
267  (Pot.  Sside  =  pharusa-vacanehe  kayakammena  va 
gbattento  upagaccheyya  C).  —  pp.  asanna  (q.  v.).  See 
also  asajja,  asajjana,  asada  &  Caus.  3sadeti, 

Asina  (adj.)  [pp.  of  as,  see  asati]  sitting  S  1.195  =^  Nd'^ 
136;  Sn  1105,  1 136;  Dh  227,  386;  J  1.390;  111.9s;  V. 
340;  VI. 297  ;  Davs  11.17. 

Asiyati  [etym.  doubtful;  Trenckner  Miln  p.  422  r=  a  +  iya 
to  freeze  or  dry  up,  but  taken  by  him  in  meaning  to 
thaw,  to  warm  oneself;  Miiller,  F.  Gr.  40  same  with 
meaning  "cool  oneself";  Morris'  J  P  T  S.  1884,  72  as 
a  +  Sra  or  Sri  to  become  ripe,  come  to  perfection,  evi- 
dently at  fault  because  of  §ra  etc.  not  found  in  Sk.  More 
likely  as  a  Pass,  formation  to  be  referred  to  a  -f-  Si  as 
in  asaya,  i.  e.  to  abide  etc.]  to  have  one's  home,  one's 
abode  or  support  in  (loc),  to  live  in,  thrive  by  means 
of,  to  depend  on  Miln  75  (kaddame  jayati  udake  asiyati 
i.  e.  the  lotus  is  born  in  the  mud  and  is  supported  or 
thrives  by  means  of  the  water). 

Asivisa  Derivation  uncertain.  The  BSk.  aslvisa  (c.  g.  Jtm 
31''')  is  a  Sanskritisation  of  the  Pali.  To  suppose  this  to 
come  from  ahi  -\-  visa  (snake's  poison)  would  give  a 
wrong  meaning,  and  leave  unexplained  the  change  from 
ahi  to  asi]  a  snake  Vin  1V.108;  S  IV.172;  A  u.iio;  ill. 
69;  J  1.245;  "■274;  1V.30,  496;  V.82,  267;  Pug  48;  Vism 
470  (in  comp.);  DhA  1.139;  11.8,  38;  SnA  334,458,465; 
VvA  30S. 

Asisana  see  aslijsana. 

ASU  expletive  particles  assu^  J  V.241  (v.l.  assu;  nipaita- 
mattaq   Cp.  243). 

Asui)  3''''   pl-  aor.  of  atthi. 

Asumbhati  (&  AsumliatI)  [a  -f  Sumbh  to  glide]  to  bring 

to  fall,  throw  down  or  round,  sling  round  Vin  lv.263, 
265  ;  Vv  50"  (°itvana);  J  UI.435  (aor.  asumhi,  gloss  khipi). 

Asevatl  [a  +  sev]  to  frequent,  visit;  to  practise,  pursue, 
indulge,  enjoy  A  i.io;  Sn  73  (cp.  Nd'  94);  Ps  U.93 
(maggaq).  —  pp.   asevita. 

Asevana  (nt.)  &  asevana  (f.)  [fr.  asevati]  —  1.  practice, 
pursuit,  indulgence  in  Vin  Hi  17;  PvA  45.  —  2.  succession, 
repetition  Dhs  1 367 ;  Kvu  510  (cp.  trsL  294, 362);  Vism  538. 


Asevita 


ti; 


Ahita 


Asevita  [pp.  of  asevati]  frequented,  indulged,  practised,  en- 
joyed J  1. 21  (V.141  ;  asevila-nisevita);  11.60:  Sdhp  93,  237. 

Aha  [Vedic  aha,  orig.  perfect  of  ah  to  speak,  meaning  "he 
began  to  speak",  thus  in  meaning  of  pres.  "he  says"]  a 
perfect  in  meaning  of  pret.  &  pres.  "he  says  or  he  said", 
he  spoke,  also  spoke  to  somebody  (w.  ace),  as  at  J  1. 197 
(cullalohitai)  aha).  Usually  in  3rd  person,  very  rarely  used 
of  2"^  person,  as  at  Sn  839,  840  (=  kathesi  bhanasi  Nd 
188,  191).  —  3rd  sg.  aha  Vin  11. 191;  Sn  790  (^  bhanati 
Nd'  87),  888;  J  1.280;  111.53  and  freq.  passim;  3'd  pi. 
ahu  Sn  87,  181;  Dh  345;  J  1.59;  SnA  377,  and  abaijsu 
J  1.222;  III. 278  and  freq. 

Ahacca'  ger.  of  abanati. 

AhaCCa^  (adj.)  [grd.  of  aharati,  corresponding  to  a  Sk. 
"ahrtya]  I.  (cp.  aharati')  to  be  removed,  removable,  in 
°padaka-pi(ha  &  "manca  a  collapsible  bed  or  chair,  i  e. 
whose  legs  or  feet  can  be  put  on  &  taken  away  at  pleasure 
(by  drawing  out  a  pin)  Vin  11.149  (cp-  ^'"  Tfxis  IU.164 
D.  5);  IV. 40,  46  (def.  as  'ange  vijjhitva  thito  hoti"  it 
stands  by  means  of  a  perforated  limb),  168,  169.  —  2. 
(cp.  aharati^)  reciting,  repeating,  or  to  be  quoted,  reci- 
tation (of  the  Scriptures);  by  authority  or  by  tradition 
M  III.  1 39;  DhsA  9,  &  in  cpds.  °pada  a  text  quoted 
from  Scripture),  tradition  Miln  148  (°ena  by  reference 
to  the  text  of  the  Scriptures);  "^vacana  a  saying  of  the 
Scriptures,  a  traditional  or  proverbial  saying  Nett  21  (in 
def.  of  suttai]). 

Ahafa  [pp.  of  aharati]  brought,  carried,  obtained  Vin  1. 121; 
111.53;  D  11.180  (spelt  ahata);  J  III. 512  (gloss  anita); 
Davs  1.58. 

Ahata  [pp.  of  ahanati]  struck,  beaten,  stamped ;  adllcted, 
affected  with  ( — °)  Vin  iv.236  =  D  III. 238  (kupito  anat- 
tamano  ahata-citto);  Vin  1.75,  76;  S  1. 170  (tilak",  so  read 
for  tilaka-hata,  affected  with  freckles,  C.  kala-setadi  vannehi 
tilakehi  ahatagatta,  A'.  S  p.  318);  J  in  456;  Sdhp  187,  401. 

Ahataka  [fr.  ahata]  "one  who  is  beaten",  a  slave,  a  worker 
(of  low  grade)  Vin  iv.224  (in  def.  of  karamakara,  as 
bhataka  -|-  a  ). 

Ahanatl  [a  -|-  han]  to  beat,  strike,  press  against,  touch 
ppr.  ahananto  Miln  21  (dhamma-bherir));  Davs  iy.50.  — 
ger.  abacca  touching  M  l  493 ;  J  1.330;  vi  2,  200;  Sn  716 
=  uppiletva  SnA  498;   Vism  420.  —  pp.  ahata  (q.v.). 

Ahanana  (nt.)  [fr.  a  -f  han]  beatipg,  striking,  coming  into 
touch,  "impinging"  Vism  142  (4-  pariyahanana,  in  def. 
of  vitakka)  =  UhsA  114  (cp.  Expos.  151);  Vism  515  (id.). 

Aharaija  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  aharati]  to  be  taken ;  taking  away ; 
only  in  phrase  acoraharatjo  nidhi  a  treasure  not  to  be  taken 
by  thieves  Miln  320;  Kh  VIH.9;  KhA  224;  Sdhp  589. 

Aharaoaka  [aharana  +  ka]  one  who  has  to  take  or  bring, 
a  messenger  J  11. 199;  111328. 

Aharati  [a  +  hf]  —  l.  to  take,  take  up,  take  hold  of, 
take  out,  take  away  M  1.429  (sallaq);  S  1  121  ;  111.123; 
J  1.40  (ger.  aharitva  "with"),  293  (te  hattaq) ;  Nd^  540<^ 
(puttamai)sai],read  ahareyya?);  Pvll.3"';  DA  1. 186,  188. — 

2.  to  bring,  bring  down,  fetch  D  11.245;  J  l^'  '59  (navaq; 
v.  1.    ahahilva);    v. 466;    Vv.A.    63    (bhattaij);    PvA  75.  — 

3.  to  get,  acquire,  bring  upon  oneself  J  v. 433  (padosaij); 
DhA  11.89.  —  4.  to  bring  on  to,  put  into  (w.  loc);  fig. 
&  intrs.  to  hold  on  to,  put  oneself  to,  touch,  resort  to 
M  1.395  (ka5halai3  mukhe  a.;  also  inf.  ahattuq);  Th  i, 
1156  (papacitte  a.;  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  Brethren  ver.  115O,  not 
as  "accost"  p.  419,/;.). —  5.  to  assault,  strike,  offend  (for 
pahari?)Th  I,  1 1 73.  —  6.  (fig  )  to  take  up,  fall  or  go  back  on 


(w.  ace.),  recite,  quote,  repeat  (usually  with  desanaq  & 
dasseti  of  an  instructive  story  or  sermon  or  homily)  J 
HI  383  (desanaq),  401 ;  V  462  (vatlhuij  aharitva  dassesi 
told  a  story  for  example);  SnA  376;  PvA  38,  39  (atltar)), 
42,  66,  99  (dhamma-desanai)).  See  also  payirudabarati.  — 
pp.  ahata  (q.  v.).  —  Caus.  II  abarapeti  to  cause  to  be 
brought  or  fetched ;  to  wish  to  take,  to  call  or  ask  for 
J   111.88,  342;  V.466  ;  Pv.A  215. 

Aharima  (adj.)  [fr.  aharoti]  "fetching",  fascinating,  captiv- 
ating, charming  Vin  iv.299;  Th  2,  299;  ThA  227;  VvA 
"4,  15,  77- 

Ahariya  [grd.  of  aharati]  one  who  is  to  bring  something 
J   ni.328. 

Ahavana  &  Ahavaniya  see  under  ahuneyya. 

Ahara  [fr.  a  -(-  hf,  lit.  taking  up  or  on  to  oneself]  feeding, 
support,  food,  nutriment  (lit  &  fig.).  The  term  is  used 
comprehensively  and  the  usual  enum".  comprises  four 
kinds  of  nutriment,  viz  (i)  kabajinkara  aharo  (bodily 
nutriment,  either  olariko  gross,  solid,  or  sukhumo  fine), 
(2)  phassaharo  n.  of  contact,  (3)  manosaucetana°  n.  of 
volition  (=  cetana  S.  A.  on  ii.iif.),  (4)  viniian"  of  con- 
sciousness. Thus  at  M  1.261;  D  111.228,  276;  Dhs7i — 73; 
Vism  341.  Another  definition  of  Dhainmapala's  refejs  it  to 
the  fourfold  tasting  as  asita  (eaten),  pita  (drunk),  khayita 
(chewed),  sayita  (tasted)  food  PvA  25.  A  synonym  with 
mula,  hetu,  etc.  for  cause,  Yamaka,  1.3;  Yam.  A  {/I'TS.., 
1910 — 12)  54.  See  on  term  also  Dhs  Irsl.  30.  —  Vin 
1.84;  D  1.166;  S  1. 172;  il.ll,  13,  98  sq.  (the  4  kinds, 
in  detail);  III  54  (sa°);  v.64,  391;  A  111.51  (sukhass"), 
79,  142  sq.,  192  sq.;  IV.49,  108;  V.52  (the  four), 
108,  113  (avijjaya  etc.),  116  (bhavatanhaya),  269  sq. 
(nerayikanar)  etc.);  Sn  78,  165,  707,  747;  Nd'  25; 
Ps  1.22  (the  four)  122  (id.),  55,  76  sq  ;  Kvu  508;  Pug 
21,  55;  Vbh  2,  13,  72,  89,  320,  383,  401  sq.  (the  four); 
Dhs  58,  121,  35S,  646;  Nett  31,  114,  124;  DhsA  153, 
401;  DhA  1. 1 83  (°r|  pacchindati  to  bring  up  food,  to 
vomit);  1187;  VvA  118;  PvA  14,  35,  112,  148  (utu° 
physical  nutriment);  Sdhp  100,  395,  406;  A  v. 136  gives 
ten  ahara  opposed  to  ten  paripantha.  -an°  without  food, 
unfed  M  1.487  (aggi);  S  in.  126;  v.  105;  Sn  985 

-Cpahara  consumption  of  food,  feeding,  eating  Vin  in. 
136.  -thitika  subsisting  or  living  on  food  D  111. 211,  273; 
A  V.50,  55;  Ps  1.5,  122.  -pariggaha  taking  up  or  ac- 
quirement of  food  Miln  244  or  is  il  "restraint  or  abstinence 
in  food"?  Same  coinb"-  at  Miln  313.  -maya  "food-like", 
feeding  stuff,  food  J  111.523.  -lolata  greed  after  food  SnA 
35.    -samudaya  origin  of  nutriment  S  111.59. 

AharatthaQ  [ahara  -|-  tta]  the  state  of  being  food.  In  the 
idiom  aharatlan  pharati;  Vin  1.199,  of  medicine,  'to  pene- 
trate into  food-ness',  to  come  under  the  category  of  food; 
Miln  152,  of  poison,  to  turn  into  food.  [.According  to 
Oldenberg  (Vin  I.381)  his  MSS  read  about  equally  "attaq 
and  "althaq.  Trenckner  prints  '"atthaq,  and  records  no 
variant  (see  p.  425)]. 

Ahareti  [Denom.  fr.  ahara]  to  take  food,  eat,  feed  on  S 
11.13;  111.240;  IV.104;  A  1.114,  295;  11.40,  145,  206;  IV. 
167;  Nd^  540<:   (aharai)  &  puttamaqsai)  cp.  S  11.98). 

Ahika  ( — °)  (adj.)  [der.  fr.  aha-]  only  in  pancahika  every 
five  days  (cp.   paiicahaij  &  sattahaij)  M  III. 1 57. 

AhlOlJati  [a  -f  hincj,  cp.  BSk.  ahiijdate  Divy  165  etc.]  to 
wander  about,  to  roam,  to  be  on  an  errand,  to  be  en- 
gaged in  (w.  ace.)  Vin  1203  (sen.asana-carikay),  217;  11. 
132  (na  sakkoti  vina  daijdena  ahindituy);  iv.62;  J  1.48, 
108,  239;  Nd'  540";  Pv  111.22"  (=  vicarali  Pv.\  185); 
Vism  38,  284  (ataviij);  VvA  238  (tattha  tattha);PvA  143. 

Ahita  [pp.  of  a  -f  dha]  put  up,  heaped;  provided  with 
fuel  (of  a  fire),  blazing  Sn  18  (gini  =  abhato  jalito  v5 
SnA  28).  See  sam". 


Ahu 


II! 


Injita 


Ahu  3''''  pl-  of  aha  (q.  v.). 

Ahutl  (f-)  [Vedic  ahuti,  a  +  hu]  oblation,  sacrifice;  vener- 
ation, adoration  M  ill  167;  S  1. 141;  Th  1,  566  ("inaij 
patiggaho  recipient  of  sacrificial  gifts);  J  1. 15;  v.70  (id.); 
Vv  64'''  (paramahutiq  gato  deserving  the  highest  ador- 
ation); Sn  249,  458;  Kvu   530;  SnA   175;   VvA   285. 


Ahuna  =  ahuti ,     in    ahuna-pahuna    giving    oblations    and 
sacrificing  VvA    155;  by  itself  at  Vism   219. 


Ahuneyya  (adj.)  [a  grd.  form.  fr.  a  -|-  hu,  cp.  ahuti]  sacrificial-, 
worthy  of  offerings  or  of  sacrifice,  venerable,  adorable,  v^or- 
shipful  D  III. 5,  217  (aggi);  A  n.56,  70  (sahuneyyaka),  145 
sq.  (id.);  IV.13,  41  (aggi);  It  88  (+pahuneyya);  Vv  64" 
(cp.  VvA  285).  See  def.  at  Vism  219  where  expl<i-  by  "aha- 
vanlya"  and  "ahavanar)  arahati"'  deserving  of  offerings. 

Ahundarika  (adj.)  [doubtful  or  ahund°r]  according  to  Morris 
y  P  T S.  1884,  73  "crowded  up,  blocked  up,  impassable" 
Vin  1.79;  IV. 297  ;   V'ism  413   ("13  andha-tamaij). 


I  in  i-kara  the  letter  or  sound  i  SnA  12  (°lopa),  508  (id.). 

Ikka  [Sk.  rksa,  of  which  the  regular  representation  is  P. 
accha^]  a  bear  J   vi.538  [=  accha  C). 

lkkasa(?)  [uncertain  as  regard  mcacing  &  etym.]  at  Vin 
11.151  (-p-  kasava)  is  trsl.  by  "slime  of  trees",  according 
to  Bdhgh's  expl"-  on  p.  321  (to  C.  V.  V1.3,  i),  who  how- 
ever reads  nikkasa. 

Ikkha^a  (nt.)  [fr.  ik§]  seeing  Vism   16. 

Ikkhaoika  [fr.  iks  to  look  or  sec,  cp.  akkhi]  a  fortune- 
teller Vin  III. 107;  S  11.260;  J  1.456,  457;  VI. 504. 

Ikkhati  [fr-  iks]   to  look  J   v  153;  ThA   147;  DhsA  172. 

Ingita  (nt.)  [pp.  of  ingati  =  iiijati]  movement,  gesture,  sign 
J   11.195,  408;  VI.368,  459. 

Ingha  (indecl.)  [Sk.  anga  prob.  after  P.  ingha  (or  aiija, 
q.  v.);  fr.  iBjati,  cp.  J P  T S.  1883,  84]  pait.  of  exhort- 
ation, lit.  "get  a  move  on",  come  on,  go  on,  look  here, 
Sn  83,  189,  862,  875  =  1052;  J  V.148;  Pv  IV.5';  Vv 
53'  (=  codan'atthe  nipato  VvA  237);  VvA  47  ;  DhA  iv.62. 

lngha|a  [according  to  Morris  J P  T S.  1884,  74  =:  angara, 
cp.  Marathi  ingala  live  coal]  coal,  embers,  in  inghajakhu 
Th  2,  386  a  pit  of  glowing  embers  (=  angara-kasu  ThA 
256).  The  whole  cpd.  is  doubtful. 

Ice'  see  iti. 

Iccha  ( — °)  (adj.)  [the  adj.  form  of  iccha]  wishing,  longing, 

having   desires,    only  in  pap°  having  evil  desires  S  1.50; 

11.156;    an°    without  desires    S    1.61,   204;  Sn  707;  app° 
id.  Sn  628,  707. 

ICChaka  ( — °)  (adj.)  [fr.  iccha]  wishing,  desirous,  only  in 
nt.  adv.  yad-icchikag  (and  yen")  after  one's  wish  or 
liking  M   111.97;  A  111.28. 

Icchatl'  [Sk.  icchati,  Js,  cp.  A  v.  isaiti,  Obulg.  iskati,  Ohg. 
eiscoo,  Ags.  ascian  =  E.  ask ;  all  of  same  meaning  "seek, 
wish"]  to  wish,  desire,  ask  for  (c.  ace),  expect  S  1.210 
(dhammai)  sotuij  i.);  Sn  127,  345,  512,  813,  836;  Dh 
162,  291;  Nd'  3,"  138,  164;  Nd^s.  v.;  Pv  11.6^;  Pug  19; 
Miln  269,  327;  SnA  i6,  23,  321;  Kli.-V  17;  PvA  20, 
71,  74;  Pot.  icche  Dh  84;  Sn  835  Pv  11.66  &  iccheyya 
D  II. 2,  10;  Sn  35;  Dh  73,  88;  ppr.  icchar)  Sn  826, 
83"i  937;  Clh  334  (phalaq)  aor.  icchi  Pv.\  31.  —  grd. 
icchitabba  PvA  8.  —  pp.  i{tha  &  icchita  (q.  v.),  — 
Note.  In  prep.-cpds.  ihe  root  i§2  (icchati)  is  confused 
with  root  is'  (isati,  esali)  with  pp.  both  "ittha  and  "isita. 
Thus  ajjhesati,  pp.  ajjhiltha  &  ajjhesiia;  anvesati  (Sk.  an- 
vicchati);  pariyesati  (Sk.  parlcchati),  pp.  pariyittha  & 
pariyesita. 

Icchati-  [Sk.  rcchati  of  r,  concerning  which  see  appeti]  see 
aticchati  &  cp.  icchata. 


Icchata  ( — °)  (f.)  [abslr.  fr.  iccha]  wishfulness,  wishing : 
only  in  aticchata  too  great  wish  for,  covetousness,  greed 
Vbh  350  (cp.  aticchati,  which  is  probably  the  primary 
basis  of  the  word);  mah°  &  pap°   \'bh   351,  370. 

Icchana  (nt.)  [fr.  i§^,  cp.  Sk.  Ipsana]  desiring,  wish  J  IV. 
5;  V1.244. 

ICChS  (f.)  [fr.  icchati,  ij-]  wish,  longing,  desire  D  11.243; 
111.75;  S  1.40  ("dhupayito  loko),  44  (narar)  parikassati) ; 
A  11.143;  lV-293  sq.;  325  sq.;  V.40,  42  sq.;  Sn  773, 
872;  Dh  74,  264  (°lobha-samapanna);  Nd'  29,  30;  Pug 
19;  Dhs  1059,  1136;  Vbh  loi,  357,  361,  370;  Nelt  18, 
23,  24;  Asl.  363;  DhsA  250  (read  iccha  for  issa?  See 
Dhs  trsl.  100);  SnA  108;  PvA  65,  155;  Sdhp  242,  320. 
-avacara  moving  in  desires  M  1.27  (papaka);  Nett  27. 
-avatinna  affected  with  desire,  overcome  by  covetousness 
Sn  306.  -pakata  same  Vin  1.97;  A  111.119,  191,  219  sq.; 
Pug  69;  Miln  357;  Vism  24  (where  Bdhgh  however  takes 
it  as  "icchaya  apakata"  and  puts  apakata  =  upadduta). 
-vinaya  discipline  of  one's  wishes  D  III. 252,  A  iv.15; 
V.165   sq. 

Icchita  [pp.  of  icchati]  wished,  desired,  longed  for  J  1.208; 
DhsA  364;  PvA  3,  53,  64  (read  anicchita  for  anijjhittha, 
which  may  be  a  contamination  of  icchita  &  ittha),  113, 
127  (twice). 

Ijjhati  [Vedic  rdhyate  &  rdhnoti;  Gr.  aX'ioy.xt  to  thrive, 
Lat.  alo  to  nourish,  also  Vedic  ids  refreshment  &  P.  iddhi 
power]  to  have  a  good  result,  turn  out  a  blessing,  suc- 
ceed, prosper,  be  successful  S  1.175  ("work  effeclively" 
trsl.;  =  samijjhati  mahapphalaq  hoti  C);  lv.303  ;  Sn  461, 
485;  J  V.393;  Pv  li.lii;  11.9'^  (=  samijjhati  PvA  120); 
Pot.  ijjhe  Sn  458,  459;  pret.  ijjhittha  (=  Sk.  rdhyistha) 
Vv  zo"  (=  nippajjitlha  mahapphalo  ahuvattha  VvA  103).  — 
pp.  iddha.  See  also  addha-  &  addhaka.  Cp.  sam°. 

Ijjhana  (nt.)  &  "a  (f.)  [fr.  ijjhati]  success,  carrying  out  suc- 
cessfully Ps  1.17  sq.,  74,  181;  11.125,  '43  sq-,  161,  174; 
Vbh  217  sq.;  Vism  266,  383  ("althena  iddhi);  Dhs.\  91, 
118,  237. 

Injana  (f.)  &  "ag  (nt.)  [fr.  igj,  see  iiijati]  shaking,  movement, 
motion  Sn  193  (=  calana  phandana  SnA  245);  Nett  88 
(=  phandana  C).  an"  immobility,  steadfastness  Ps  1. 15; 
11.118. 

liijita  [pp.  of  iiijati]  shaken,  moved  Th  I,  386  (an°).  Usually 
as  nt.  injitag  shaking,  turning  about,  movement,  vacil- 
lation  M  1.454;  S  1. 109;  1V.202;  A  11.45;  Sn  750,  1O40 

Ifijati  [Vedic  rnjati  (cp.  P.  ajjati).  Also  found  as  ingati  (so 
Veda),  and  as  ang  in  Sk.  anga  =^  P.  aiija  &  ingha  & 
Vedic  pali-angati  to  turn  about.  See  also  anejja  &  an- 
jati']  to  shake,  move,  turn  about,  stir  D  1.56;  S  1.107, 
132,  181  (aniBjamana  ppr.  raed.  "impassive");  ill. 211; 
Th  I,  42;  2,  231;  Nd'^  s.  V.  (+calati  vedhati);  Vism  377; 
DA  1.167.  —  PP-  ifijita  (q-  v.). 


Injita 


119 


Iti 


(pi.    injita),    1048  (see  Nd'   140);  Dh  255;  Vbh  390.  — 
On  the  7   injitas  see  jf  P  T S.   1884,  58. 

Injitatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  injita  nt.]  state  of  %'aclllation, 
wavering,  motion  S  v.315  (kayassa). 

It^ha  (adj.)  [pp.  of  icchati]  pleasing,  welcome,  agreeable, 
pleasant,  often  in  the  idiomatic  group  ittha  kanta  ma- 
napa  (of  objects  pleasing  to  the  senses)  D  1.245;  i''92; 
M  185;  S  IV.60,  158,  235  sq.;  v. 22,  60,  147;  A  11.66 
sq.;  V.135  (dasa,  dhamma  etc.,  ten  objects  affording 
pleasure);  Sn  759;  It  15;  Vbh  2,  100,  337.  —  Alone 
as  nt.  meaning  welfare,  good  state,  pleasure,  happiness 
at  Sn  154  (4-  anittha);  Nelt  28  (-f-  anittha);  Vism  167 
(id.);  PvA  116  (=  bhadrai)),  140.  -anittha  unpleasant, 
disagreeable  Pv.\  32,  52,  60,  116.  —  See  also  pariy°, 
in   which  ittha  stands  for  ettha. 

Itthaka  (Itthaka)  (f.)  [BSk.  istaka,  e.g.  Divy  221;  from 
the  hig.  root  *idh  ^  °aldh  to  burn,  cp.  Sk.  idhma  fire- 
wood, inddhe  to  kindle  (Idh  or  Indh),  edhah  fuel;  Gr. 
aiitu  burn,  ciiioti  fire-brand;  Lat.  aedes,  aestas  &  aeslus; 
more  especially  Av.  istya  tile,  brick]  —  i.  a  burnt  brick, 
a  tile  Vin  II  121  ("pakara  a  brick  wall,  distinguished  fr. 
silapakara  &  daru");  J  111.435,  44^  (pakar  itthika  read 
"atthaka);  V.213  (rattitthika);  Vism  355  ("darugomaya); 
PvA  4  (°cunna-makkhita-sisa  the  head  rubbed  with  brick- 
powder,  i.e.  plaster;  a  ceremony  performed  on  one  to  be 
executed,  cp.  Mrcchakatika  x.5  pisla-curn'avakirnasca  pu- 
ruso  'haij  pasukrtah  with  striking  equation  istaka  >  pista).  — 
2.  pi.  (as  savanna")  gold  or  gilt  tiles  used  for  covering  a 
cetiya  or  tope  DhA  111.29,  61;   VvA   157. 

Itthi°  if  °khagga-dhara  at   J  vi.223  should  be  read  iddha. 

I^a  (nt.)  [Sk.  rna,  see  also  P.  an-ana]  debt  D  1.71,  73;  A 
111.352;  V.324  (enumd-  with  baddha,  jani  &  kali);  Sn  120; 
J  1.307;  11.388,  423;  111.66;  IV. 184  (inagga  for  nagga?); 
256;  V.253  (where  enum<i-  as  one  of  the  4  paribhogas, 
viz.  theyya",  ina",  daya°,  sami°);  vi.69,  193;  Miln  375; 
PvA  273,  276,  inai)  ganhali  to  borrow  money  or  take 
up  a  loan  Vism  556;  SnA  289;  PvA  3.  —  inai)  muncati 
to  discharge  a  debt  J  iv.280;  v.238 ;  °r)  sodheti  same 
Pv.\  276;  labhati  same  PvA  3. 

-apagama  absence  of  debt  ThA  245.  -gabaka  a  bor- 
rower Miln  364.  -ghata  stricken  by  debt  Sn  246  (= 
inai)  gahetva  tassa  appadanena  inaghata).  -ttha  (with 
inatta  as  v.  1.  at  all  passages ,  see  atta)  fallen  into  or 
being  in  debt  M  1.463  ==  S  111.93  =  it  89  :=  Miln  279. 
-panna  promissory  nole  J  1.230;  iv.256.  -mokkba  release 
from  debt  J  iv.280;  v. 239.  -sadbaka  negotiator  of  a 
loan   Miln   365. 

Inayika  [fr.  ina]  one  connected  with  a  debt,  viz.  (1)  a 
creditor  S  1.170;  J  IV. 159,  256;  V1.178;  ThA  271  see 
also  dhanika);  PvA  3.  —  (2)  a  debtor  Vin  1.76;  Nd   160. 

Ita  [pp.  of  eli,  i]  gone,  only  in  cpd.  dur-ita  gone  badly, 
as  nt.  evil,  wrong  Davs  1.61  ;  otherwise  in  comp".  with 
prep.,  as  peta,  vita  etc. 

Itara'  (adj.)  [Ved.  itara  :=  Lat.  iterum  a  second  lime; 
compar.  of  pron.  base  *i,  as  in  ayai),  etai],  iti  etc.]  other, 
second,  next;  different  Uh  85,  104,  222;  J  11.3;  111.26; 
IV.4;  PvA  13,  14,  42,  83,  117.  In  repetition  cpd.  itart- 
lara  one  or  the  other,  whatsoever,  any  Sn  42 ;  J  v.425; 
Nd2  141;  Miln  395;  KhA  145,  147;  ace.  itaritarai]  & 
instr.  itaritarena  used  as  adv.  of  one  kind  or  another, 
in  every  way,  anyhow  [cp.  BSk.  itaretara  M  Vastu  in. 
348  and  see  Wackernagel  AltinJ.  Gram.  II.  §  121  c]  J 
VI  448  ("!));  Dh  331  (°ena);  Vv  84'  (text  reads  itritarcna, 
v.  1.  itaritarena,  expH-  by  itaritarai)  VvA   333). 

Itara'  (adj.)  freq.  spelling  for  ittara  (q.  v.). 

Iti  (ti)  (indecl.)  [Vedic  ill,  of  pron.  base  *i,  cp.  Sk.  itthai) 
thus,  ittha  here,  there;  Av.  ipa  so;  Lat.  ita  &  item  thus. 
Cp.  also  P.  ettha;  lit.  "here,  there  (now),  then"]  emphatic- 


deictic  particle  "thus".  Occurs  in  both  forms  iti  &  ti,  the 
former  in  higher  style  (poetry),  the  latter  more  familiar 
in  conversational  prose.  The  function  of  "iti"  is  expH- 
by  the  old  Pali  C.  in  a  conventional  phrase,  looking 
upon  it  more  as  a  "filling"  particle  ihan  trying  to  define 
its  meaning  viz.  "it;  ti  padasandhi  padasai)saggo  padapa- 
ripuri  akkharasamavSyo  etc."  Nd'  123  =  Nd^  137.  The 
same  expl"  also  for  iti'  hai)  (see  below  iv.)  —  I.  As 
dcutic  aiiv.  "thus,  in  this  way"  (Vism  423  iti  ^  evai)) 
pointing  to  something  either  just  mentioned  or  about  to 
be  mentioned;  (a)  referring  to  what  precedes  Sn  253 
(n'eso  maman  ti  ili  nai)  vijaiina),  805;  It  123  (ito  deva... 
tai)  namassanti);  Dh  74  (iti  balassa  sankappo  thus  think 
the  foolish),  286  (iti  balo  vicinteti);  Vv  79'"  (=  evaq 
VvA  307);  \'vA  5. — (b)  referring  to  what  follows  D  1.63 
(iti  palisaiicikkhati);  A  1.205  ('d)  —  II.  As  eniphalic 
pari,  pointing  out  or  marking  off  a  statement  either  as 
not  one's  own  (reported)  or  as  the  definite  contents  of 
(one's  own  or  other's)  thoughts.  On  the  whole  untrans- 
latable (unless  written  as  quotation  marks),  often  only 
setting  off  a  statement  as  emphatic,  where  we  would  either 
underline  the  word  or  phrase  in  question,  or  print  it  in 
italics,  or  put  it  in  quot.  marks  (e.  g.  balo  ti  vuccati 
Dh  63  ==  balo  vuccati).  —  i.  in  direct  speech  (as  given 
by  writer  or  narrator),  e.  g.  sadhu  bhante  Kassapa  l.ib- 
hatai)  esa  Janata  dassanaya  ti.  Tena  hi  Siha  tvar)  yeva 
Bhagavato  arocehi  ti.  Evai)  bhante  ti  kho  Siho  .  . .  .  D 
1.15 1.  —  2.  in  indirect  speech:  (a)  as  statement  of  a  fact 
"so  it  is  that"  (cp.  E.  "viz.",  Ger.  "und  zwar"),  mostly 
untranslated  Kh  iv.  (araha  ti  pavuccali);  J  1253  (tasma 
pesanaka-cora  t'  eva  vuccanti);  ill. 51  (tayo  sahaya  ahesuq 
makkato  sigalo  uddo  ti);  Pv.\  II2  (ankuro  paiica-.sakata- 
satehi  . .  .  aiinataro  pi  brahmano  pauca-sakatasatehi  ti  dve 
jana  sakata-sahassehi . .  .  patipanna).  —  (b)  as  statement 
of  a  thought  "like  this",  "I  think",  so,  thus  Sn  61 
("sango  eso"  iti  iiatva  knowing  "this  is  defilement"),  253 
("neso  maman"  ti  iti  nai)  vijanna),  783  ("iti'  han"  ti), 
1094  (etai)  dipai)  aniiparai)  Nibbanar)  iti  nai)  brilmi  I 
call  this  N.),  1130  (apara  parai)  gaccheyya  tasma  "Para- 
yanaq"  iti).  —  III.  Peculiarities  of  spelling,  (i)  in  comb"- 
with  other  part,  iti  is  elided  &  contracted  as  follows; 
ice'  eva,  t'  eva,  etc.  —  (2)  final  a,  i,  u  preceding  ti  are 
lengthened  to  a,  1,  ii,  e.g.  ma  evai)  akattba  ti  Dh.\  1.7; 
kati  dhurani  ti  ibid;  dve  yeva  dhurani  bhikkhu  ti  ibid  — 
IV.  Combinations  with  other  emphatic  particles;  -\-  eva 
thus  indeed,  in  truth,  really;  as  ice'  eva  Pv  III'  (=r 
evam  eva  PvA  59);  t'  eva  J  1.253;  Mi'n  114;  tv'  eva 
J  1.203;  'l^.  -iti  kira  thus  now,  perhaps,  1  should  say 
D  1.228,  229,  240.  -iti  kho  thus,  therefore  D  1.98,  103; 
111.135.  iti  va  and  so  on(?),  thus  and  such  (similar  cases) 
Nd'  13  =  Nd2  420  A',  -iti  ha  thus  surely,  indeed  Sn 
934,  1084  (see  below  under  ilihllihai) ;  cp.  SnA  Index 
669:  itiha?  and  ilikira);  It  76;  DA  1247,  as  iti  hoi)  at 
Sn  783  (same  expl"-   at  Ndi  71  as  for  iti).    -kin  ti  how 

J  "-jsg- 

-kira  (f.)  [a  substantivised  ili  kira]  hearsay,  lit.  "so  I 
guess"  or  "I  have  heard"  A  1.189  =  11.191  sq.  =  Nd'^ 
151.  Cp.  iliha.  -bhava  becoming  so  &  so  (opp.  abhava 
not  becoming)  \'in  it. 184  ("abhava);  D  1.8  (ip  =  iti  bhavo 
iti  abhavo  DA  1.91);  A  11.248;  It  109  (id.);  syn.  with 
itthabhava  (q.  v.).  -vada  "speaking  so  &  so",  talk,  gos- 
sip M  1.133;  S  v.73;  A  11.26;  It  111.35.  -vuttaka  (nl.) 
[a  noun  formation  fr.  iti  vuttai)]  "so  it  has  been  said', 
(book  of)  quotations,  "I.ogia",  N.  of  the  fouith  book 
of  the  Khuddakanikaya,  named  thus  because  every  sutta 
begins  with  vuttai)  h'  etai)  Bhagavata  "thus  has  the 
Buddha  said"  (see  khuddaka  and  navanga)  Vin  III. 8;  M 
1.133;  A  11.7,  103;  111.86,  177,  361  sq.;  Pug  43,  62; 
Kh.\  12.  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  compares  the  interesting 
BSk.  distortion  itivrttaq.  -basa  [=  iti  ha  asa,  preserving 
the  Vedic  form  asa,  3rd  sg.  perf.  of  atthi]  "thus  indeed 
it  has  been",  legendary  love,  oral  tradition,  history; 
usually  mentioned  as  a  branch  of  brahmanic  learning,  in 
phrase  ilihasa-panca-manai]  padako  veyyakarano  etc.  D 
188  =  (see  D.'\  1.247);  A  1.163;  111.223;  Sn  447,   1020. 


Iti 


1 20 


Ida 


Cp.  also  M  Vastu  1.556.  -hltiha  [itiha  -f-  itiha]  "so  & 
so"  talk,  gossip,  oral  tradition  belief  by  hearsay  etc.  (cp. 
itikira  &  anitiha.  Nd-  spells  itihitiha)  M  I  520;  S  I.154; 
Sn   1084;  Nd-   151. 

ItO  (indecl.)  [V'edic  itah,  abl.-advl  formation  fr.  pron.  base 
*i  cp.  iti,  ayar)  etc.]  adv.  of  succession  or  motion  in 
space  &  lime  "from  here",  "^from  now",  (i)  with  ref.  to 
space:  (a)  from  here,  from  this,  often  implying  the  present 
existence  (in  opp.  to  the  "other"  world)  It  77;  Sn  271 
(°ja.  °nidana  caused  or  founded  in  or  by  this  existence  := 
attabhavaij  sandhay'  aha  SnA  303},  774  (cutase),  870 
("nidana),  1062  (from  this  source,  i.e.  from  me),  IIOI; 
Vv  1.5'  (ito  dinnai)  wliat  is  given  in  this  world);  l.b- 
(i.  e.  manussalokato  PvA  33);  1. 1 2'  (=:  idhalokato  PvA 
64);  Nett  93  (ito  bahiddh.i);  PvA  46  (ito  dukkhato 
mutti).  —  (b)  here  (with  implication  of  movement),  in 
phrases  ito  c'  ito  here  and  there  PvA  4.  6;  and  ito  va 
etto  va  here  &  there  DhA  n.So.  —  (2)  with  ref.  to  time: 
from  here,  from  now,  hence  (in  chronological  records 
with  num.  ord.  or  card.,  with  ref.  either  to  past  or  future), 
(a)  referring  to  the  fast,  since  D  11.2  (ito  so  ekanavuto 
kappo  91  kappas  ago):  Sn  570  (ito  atthame,  scil.  divase 
&  days  ago  SnA  457;  T.  reads  atthami);  VvA  319  (ito 
kira  tiijsa-kappa-sahassej ;  PvA  19  (dva  navuti  kappe  92 
kappas  ago),  21  (id.),  78  (paiicamaya  jatiya  in  the  fifth 
previous  re-birth).  —  (b)  referring  to  the  future^  1.  e.  hence- 
forth, in  future,  from  now  e.  g.  ito  sattanie  divase  in  a 
week  VvA  138;  ito  paraq  further,  after  this  SnA  160, 
178,  412,  549;  PvA  83;  ito  patthaya  from  now  on,  hence- 
forward J   1.63  (ito  dani  p.);  PvA  41. 

Ittara  (sometimes  spelt  itara)  (adj.)  [Vedic  itvara  in  meaning 
"going",  going  along,  hence  developed  meaning  "passing"; 
fr.  i]  —  I.  passing,  changeable,  short,  temporary,  brief, 
unstable  M  1. 318  (opp.  dlgharattai]);  A  11.187;  J  1393; 
111.83  ("dassana  =  khanika"  C),  iv.112  ("vasa  temporary 
abode);  Pv  iii"  (=  na  cira-kala-tthayin  anicca  vipari- 
nama-dhamma  PvA  60);  DA  1.195;  P^'^  ^°  (=^  paritta 
khanika).  —  2.  small,  inferior,  poor,  unreliable,  mean  M 
11,47  (°jacca  of  inferior  birth);  A  11.34;  Sn  757  (=  paritta 
paccupatthana  SnA  509);  Miln  93,  114  ("panila  of  small 
wisdom).  This  meaning  (2)  also  in  BSk.  itvara,  e.  g.  Divy 
317   (dana). 

Ittarata  (f.)  [fr.  ittara]  changeableness  Miln  93  (of  a  woman). 

Ittha  (indecl.)  [the  regular  representative  of  Vedic  ittha  here, 
there,  but  preserved  only  in  cpds.  while  the  Pali  form 
is  ettha]  here,  in  this  world  (or  "thus,  in  such  a  way), 
only  in  cpd.  "bhav'  anfiatha-bhava  such  an  (i.  e.  earthly) 
existence  and  one  of  another  kind,  or  existence  here  (in 
this  life)  and  in  another  form"  (cp.  itibhava  &  itthatta) 
Sn  729,  740  =  752;  It  9  (v.  1.  itthi''  for  iti°)  =  A  11.10 
=  Nd-  172^;  It  94  (v.  1.  ittha").  There  is  likely  to  have 
been  a  confusion  between  ittha  :=  Sk.  ittha  &  itthaq  = 
Sk.  itthar]  (see  next). 

Itthag  (indecl.)  [adv.  fr.  pron.  base  °i,  as  also  iti  in  same 
meaning]  thus,  in  this  way  D  1.53,213;  Davsiv.35;  V.18. 
-nama  (itthan°)  having  such  as  name,  called  thus,  so- 
called  Vin  1.56;  IV. 136;  J  1.297;  Miln  115;  DhA  11.98. 
-bhUta  being  thus,  of  this  kind,  modal,  only  in  cpd.  °liilt- 
kliana  or  ''akhyana  the  sign  or  case  of  modality,  i.  e.  the 
ablative  ease  SnA  441;  VvA   162,   174;  PvA   150. 

Itthatta'  (nt.)  [ittha  +  ®tvar),  abstr.  fr.  ittha.  The  curious 
BSk.  distortion  of  this  word  is  icchatta  M  Vastu  417] 
being  here  (in  this  world),  in  the  present  state  of 
becoming,  this  (earthly)  state  (not  "ihusness"  or  "life  as 
we  conceive  it",  as  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  in  K.S.  1. 1 77;  although 
a  confusion  between  ittha  &  ilthar)  seems  to  exist,  see 
ittha);  "life  in  these  conditions"  K.S.  11.17;  expl<i.  by 
itthabhava  C.  on  S  1.140  (see  K.  S.  318).  —  See  also  freq. 
formula  A  of  arahatta.  —  D  1.18,  84;  A  1.63;  11.82,  159, 
203;  Sn  158;  Dhs  633;  Pug  70,  71;  DA  1.112. 


Itthatta-  fnt.)  [itthi  -f-  *tvai)  abstr.  fr.  itthi]  stale  or  con- 
dition of  femininity,  womanhood,  mtiliebrity  Dhs  633  (z:^ 
itthi-sabhava  Dhs.\  321). 

Itthi  &  Itthi  (f.)  [Vedic  stri,  Av.  stri  woman,  perhaps  with 
Sk.  satuh  uterus  fr.  Idg.  ''si  to  sow  or  produce,  Lat.  sero, 
Goth,  saian,  Ohg.  srten,  Ags.  sawan  etc.,  cp.  also  Cymr. 
hil  progeny,  Oir.  sil  seed;  see  J.  Schmidt,  /.'.  Z.  xxv.29. 
The  regular  representative  of  Vedic  stri  is  P.  thi,  which 
only  occurs  rarely  (in  poetry  &  comp".)  see  thi]  woman, 
female ;  also  (usually  as  — '^)  wife.  Opp.  purisa  man  (see 
e.g.  for  contrast  of  itthi  and  purisa  J  v. 72,  398;  Nett  93; 
DhA  1.390;  PvA  153).  —  S  1.33  (nibbanass'  eva  sanlike), 
42,  125  (majjhim°,  mah°l,  185;  A  1.28,  138;  11.115,  209; 
111.68,  90,  156;  IV. 196  (purisaq  bandhati);  Sn  112,  769 
(nom.  pi.  thiyo  ^  ilthi-saiiuika  thiyo  SnA  5'3)i  J  '.286 
(itthi  doso),  300  (gen.  pi.  illhinai));  11.415  (nom.  pi.  thiyo); 
V.397  (thi-ghataka),  398  (gen.  dat.  itthiya),  v.425  (nom 
pi.  itthiyo);  Vbh  336,  337;  DA  1.147;  PvA  5,  44,  46, 
67,  154  (amanuss°  of  petis);  Sdhp  64,  79.  —  anitthi  a 
woman  lacking  the  characteristics  of  womanhood,  an  un- 
faithful wife  J  II. 1 26  (=  ucchitth"  C);  kul'-itlhi  a  wife 
of  good  descent  Vin  11. 10;  A  111.76;  iv.i6,  19;  dahar° 
a  young  wife  J  1.291;  dur°  a  poor  woman  J  iv.38.  — 
Some  general  characterisations  of  womanhood:  10  kinds 
of  women  enumd.  at  Vin  111.139  =  ^  v. 264  =  VvA  72, 
viz.  matu-rakkhita,  pitu°,  matapitu",  bhatu°,  bhagini", 
iiati°,  gotta",  dhamma",  sarakkh.a,  saparidanda;  see  Vin 
III.  1 39  for  expl".  —  S  1.38  (malai)  brahmacariyassa),  43 
(id.);  J  1.287  (itthiyo  nama  asa  lamika  pacchimika);  iv. 
222  (itthiyo  papato  akkhato ;  pamattaq  pamathenli);  v. 
425  (siho  yatha .  .  .  tath'  itthiyo);  women  as  goods  for 
sale  S  1.43  (bhandanaq  uttamaq);  DhA  1.390  (itthiyo 
vikkiniya  bhandai)). 

-agara  (-agara)  as  itthagara  women's  apartment,  seraglio 
Vin  1.72;  IV.158;  S  1.58,  89;  J  1.90;  also  coll.  for  women- 
folk, women  (cp.  Ger.  frauenzimmer)  D  11.249;  J  v. 188. 
-indriya  the  female  principle  or  sex,  femininity  (opp.  puris' 
indriya)S  V.204;  A  iv.57  sq.;  Vism  447,  492  ;  Dhs  585,633, 
653  et  passim,  -katha  talk  about  women  D  1.7  (cp.  DA 
1.90).  -kama  the  craving  for  a  woman  S  iv.343.  -kutta  a 
woman's  behaviour,  woman's  wiles,  charming  behaviour, 
coquetry  A  iv.57  =  Dhs  633;  J  1.296,  433;  11.127,  3^9; 
IV.219,  472;  DhA  1V.197.  -ghataka  a  woman-killer  J  v. 
398.  -dhana  wife's  treasure,  dowry  Vin  ill.  16.  -dhutta 
a  rogue  in  the  matter  of  women,  one  who  indulges  in 
women  Sn  106;  J  111.260;  Pv.\  5.  -nimitta  characteristic 
of  a  woman  Dhs  633,  713,  836.  -pariggaha  a  woman's 
company,  a  woman  Nd'  ii.  -bhava  existence  as  woman, 
womanhood  S  1.129;  Th  2,  216  (referring  to  a  yakkhini, 
cp.  ThA  178;  Dhs  633;  PvA  168.  -riipa  womanly  beauty 
A  i.i;  111.68;  Th  2,  294.  -lakkhana  fortune-telling  re- 
garding a  woman  D  1.9  (cp.  DhA  1.94, -|-  purisa");  J  vi. 
135.  -linga  "sign  of  a  woman",  feminine  quality,  female 
sex  Vism  184;  Dhs  633,  713,  836;  Dhs.\  321  sq.  -sadda 
the  sound  (or  word)  "woman"  DhA  1.15.  -sondl  a  woman 
addicted  to  drink  So   112. 

Itthlka  (f.)  [fr.  itthi]  a  woman  Vin  111.16;  D  11.14;  J  '• 
336;  Vv  18';  Sdhp  79.  As  adj.  itthika  in  bahuttbika 
having  many  women,  plentiful  in  women  Vin  11.256  (ku- 
lani  bahuttikani  appapurisakani  rich  in  women  &  lacking 
in  men);  S  11.264  ('d.  and  appitthikani). 

Ida  &  Idag  (indecl.)  [nt.  of  ayar)  (idaij)  in  function  of  a 
deictic  part.]  emphatic  deraonslr.  adv.  in  local,  temporal 
&  modal  function,  as  (i)  in  this,  here:  idappaccayata 
having  its  foundation  in  this.  i.e.  causally  connected,  by 
way  of  cause  Vin  1.5  =  S  1.136;  D  1.185;  Dhs  1004, 
1061;  Vbh  340,  362,365;  Vism  518;  etc.  —  (2)  now,  then 
which  idha  is  more  freq.)  D  11.267,  270,  almost  syn.  (for 
w  ith  kira.  —  (3)  just  (this),  even  so,  only :  idam-atthika 
just  sufficient,  proper,  right  Th  I,  984  (civara);  Pug  69 
(read  so  for  °matthika,  see  Pug  A  250);  as  idam-atthita 
"being    satisfied    with    what    is    sufficient"    at    Vism   81; 


Ida 


[21 


Inda 


expl<l'  as  attbika-bbava  at  Pug  A  250.  idaijsaccabhini- 
vesa  inclination  to  say  :  only  this  is  the  truth,  i.  e.  in- 
clination to  dogmatise,  one  of  the  four  kaya-gantha,  viz. 
abhijjha,  byapada,  silabbata-paramasa,  idar)°  (see  Dhs  1135 
&  Dhs  trsl.  304);  D  111.230;  Sv.S9;  Nd'98;  NettilSsq. 

IdSni  (indecl.)  [Vedic  idanli]]  now  Dh  235,  237;  KhA  247. 

Iddha'  [pp.  of  iddhe  to  idh  or  indh,  cp.  indhana  &  idhuma] 
in  flames,  burning, 'flaming  bright,  clear  J  VI.223  (°khagga- 
dhara  balT;   so   read  for  T.  itthi-khagga") ;  Dpvs  VI. 42. 

Iddha'  [pp.  of  ijjhati ;  cp.  Sk.  rddha]  (a)  prosperous,  opulent, 
wealthy  D  1.21 1  (in  idiomatic  phrase  iddha  phita  bahu- 
jana,  of  a  prosperous  town);  A  111.215  (id.);  J  vi.227, 
361  (=  issara  C),  517;  Davs  i.ii.  —  (b)  successful, 
satisfactory,  suflicieut  Vin  1.2 1 2  (bhattaq);  IV.313  (ovado). 

Iddhl  [Vedic  rddhi  from  ardh,  to  prosper;  Pali  ijjhati]. 
There  is  no  single  word  in  English  for  Iddhi,  as  the  idea 
is  unknown  in  Europe.  The  main  sense  seems  tj  be 
'potency'.  —  i.  I're-Uuddhistic;  the  Iddhi  of  a  layman. 
The  four  Iddhis  of  a  king  are  personal  beauty,  long  life, 
good  health,  and  popularity  (D  11.177;  M  111.176,  cp.  J 
111.454  for  a  later  set).  The  Iddhi  of  a  rich  young  noble  is 
I.  The  use  of  a  beautiful  garden,  2.  of  soft  and  pleasant 
clothing.  3.  of  different  houses  for  Ihe  different  seasons, 
4.  of  good  food,  A  1.145.  At  M  1.152  the  Iddhi  of  a  hunter, 
is  the  craft  and  skill  with  which  he  captures  game;  but 
at  p.  155  other  game  have  an  Iddhi  of  their  own  by 
which  they  outwit  the  hunter.  The  Iddhi,  the  power  of 
a  confederation  of  clans,  is  referred  to  at  D  u.72.  It  is 
by  the  Iddhi  they  possess  that  birds  are  able  to  fly 
(Dhp  175).  —  2.  Psychic  powers,  including  most  of  those 
claimed  for  modern  mediums  (see  under  Abhinna).  Ten 
such  are  given  in  a  slock  paragraph.  They  are  the  power 
to  project  mind-made  images  of  oneself;  to  become  in- 
visible; to  pass  through  solid  things,  such  as  a  wall;  to 
penetrate  solid  ground  as  if  it  were  water;  to  walk  on 
water;  to  fly  through  the  air;  to  touch  sun  and  moon;  to 
ascend  into  the  highest  heavens  (D  177,  212;  11.87,  ^'Si 
Ut.ll2,  281;  S  11.121;  V.264,  303;  A  I  170,  255;  111.17, 
28,  82,  425;  V.199;  Ps  I  mi;  n.207;  Visni  378  sq.,  384; 
DA  1.122).  For  other  such  powers  see  S  1.144;  lv.290; 
V.263;  A  111.340.  —  3.  The  Buddhist  theory  of  Iddhi.  At 
D  1.213  the  Buddha  is  represented  as  saying:  'It  is  be- 
cause 1  see  danger  in  the  practice  of  these  mystic  wonders 
that  I  loathe  and  abhor  and  am  ashamed  thereof.  The 
mystic  wonder  that  he  himself  believed  in  and  advocated 
(p.  214)  was  the  wonder  of  education.  What  education 
was  meant  in  the  case  of  Iddhi,  we  learn  from  M  1.33; 
A  111.425,  and  from  the  four  bases  of  Iddhi,  the  Iddhi- 
pada.  They  are  the  making  determination  in  respect  of 
concentration  on  purpose,  on  will,  on  thoughts  &  on  in- 
vestigation (D  11.212;  M  1.103;  A.  1.39,  297;  11.256;  III. 
82;  Ps  l.lll;  It  154,  164,  205;  Vbh  216).  It  was  an 
offence  against  the  regulations  of  the  Sarigha  for  a  Bhikkhu 
to  display  before  the  laity  these  psychic  powers  beyond 
the  capacity  of  ordinary  men  (Vin  11. 112).  And  falsely 
to  claim  the  possession  of  such  powers  involved  expulsion 
from  the  Order  (Vin  111.91).  The  psychic  powers  of  Iddhi 
were  looked  upon  as  inferior  (as  the  Iddhi  of  an  uncon- 
verted man  seeking  his  own  profit),  compared  to  the 
higher  Iddhi,  the  Ariyan  Iddhi  (D  111.112;  A  1.93;  Vin 
11.183).  There  is  no  valid  evidence  that  any  one  of  the 
ten  Iddhis  in  the  above  list  actually  took  place.  A  few 
instances  are  given,  but  all  are  in  texts  more  than  a 
century  later  than  the  recorded  wonder.  And  now  for 
nearly  two  thousand  years  we  have  no  further  instances. 
Various  points  on  Iddhi  discussed  at  Dial.  1.272,  3;  Cpd. 
60  ff. ;  Expositor  121.  Also  at  Kvu  55;  Ps  11.150;  Vism 
XII ;  DhA  1.91  ;  J  1.47,  360. 

-Snubbava  (iddhanu°)  power  or  majesty  of  thaumaturgy 

C  Vin    31,    209.    240;    in.67;    S    I  147;    IV.290;    PvA    53. 

-4bhisankbara  (iddhabhi")  exercise  of  any  of  the  psychic 

powers  Vin  1.16,  17,25;  D  1.106;  S  111.92;  iv.289;  V.270; 


Sn  p.  107;  PvA  57,  172  212.  -patihariya  a  wonder  of 
psychic  power  Vin  1.25,  28,  180,  209;  11.76,  112,  200; 
D  1.211,  212;  111.3,  4i  9i  '2  sq.,  27;  S  IV.290;  A  1.170, 
292 ;  Ps  11.227.  -pada  constituent  or  basis  of  psychic 
power  Vin  11.240;  D  11.J03,  115  sq.,  120;  111.77,  102, 
127,  221;  M  11.11;  111.296;  S  1. 116,  132;  111.96,  153; 
IV.360;  V.254,  255,  ^59  sq.,  264  sq.,  269  sq.,  275,  285; 
A  1V.I28  sq.,  203,  463;  V.t75;  Nd'  14.  45  (°dhira),  340 
("puccha);  Nd'  s.  v.;  I's  1.17,  21,  84;  n.56,  85  sq.,  120, 
166,  174;  Ud  62;  Dhs  358,  528,  552;  Nett  16,  31,  83; 
DhsA237;  DhA  111.177;  iv.32.  -bala  the  power  of  working 
wonders  VvA  4;  PvA  171.  -yana  the  carriage  (fig)  of 
psychic  faculties  Miln  276.  -vikubbana  the  practice  of 
psychic  powers  Vism  373  sq.  -vidha  kinds  of  iddhi  D 
1.77,  212;  11.213;  1II.1I2,  281:  S  II. 121  ;  v.264  sq  1  303; 
A  1.170  sq.;  255;  111.17,  28,  82  sq.,  425  sq. ;  V.199;  Ps 
Mil;  11.207;  Vism  384;  DA  1.222.  -visaya  range  or 
extent  of  psychic  power  Vin  111.67 ;  Nett  23. 

Iddhika'  ( — ")  (adj.)  the  compn-  form  of  addhika  in  cpd. 
kapan-iddbika  tramps  &  wayfarers  (see  kapana),  e.  g.  at 
J   1.6;'  1V.15;  PvA   78. 

Iddhika'  ( — ")  (adj.)  [iddhi  -|-  ka]  possessed  of  power,  only 
in  cpd.  mah-iddhika  of  great  power,  always  comVW-  with 
mah-anubhava,  e.g.  at  Vin  1.31;  11.193;  m.ioi;  S  11. 
155;  M  134;  Th  I,  429.  As  mahiddhiya  at  J  v. 149. 
See  mahiddhika. 

Iddhimant  (adj.)  [fr.  iddhi]  —  1.  (lit.)  successful,  proficient, 
only  in  neg.  an°  unfortunate,  miserable,  poor  J  vi.361.  — 
2.  (fig.)  possessing  psychic  powers  Vin  111.67;  IV.108; 
A  1.23,  25;  11.185;  m-340;  IV.312;  Sn  179;  Nett  23; 
Sdhp  32,  472. 

Idha  (indecl.)  [Sk.  iha,  adv.  of  space  fr.  pron.  base  ~\  (cp. 
ayar),  iti  etc.),  cp.  Lat.  ihi,  Gr.  iSa-yfvi)?,  Av.  ida]  here, 
in  this  place,  in  this  connection,  now;  esp.  in  this  world 
or  present  existence  Sn  1038,  1056,  1065;  It  99  (idh' 
lipapanna  reborn  in  this  existence);  Uh  5,  15,  267,  343, 
392;  N'd'  40,  109,  156;  Nd2  145,  146;  SnA  147;  PvA 
45,  60,  71.  -idhaloka  this  world,  the  world  of  men  Sn 
1043  (=  manussaloka  Nd-  552<:);  PvA  64;  in  this  religion, 
Vbh  245.  On  difT.  meanings  of  idha  see  UhsA  348. 

Idhuma  [Sk.  idhma,  see  elym.  under  itthaka]  fire-wood  — 
Tela-katahagatha,  p.   53,  J P  T S.    1884. 

Inda  [Vedic  indra,  most  likely  to  same  root  as  indu  moon, 
viz.  *Idg.  *eid  to  shine,  cp.  Lat.  idQs  middle  of  month 
(after  the  full  moon),  Oir.  esce  moon.  Jacobi  in  A'.  Z. 
XXXI  316  sq.  connects  Indra  with  Lat.  neriosus  strong  & 
Nero).  —  I.  The  Vedic  god  Indra  D  1.244;  11261,  274; 
Sn  310,  316,  679,  1024;  Nd  1.177. — -2.  lord,  chief,  king. 
Sakko  devanar)  indo  D  1.216,  217;  11.221,  275;  S  1.219. 
Vepacitti  asuriudo  S  1  221  ff.  maniissinda,  S  1.69,  manuj- 
inda,  Sn  553,  narinda,  Sn  863,  all  of  the  Buddha,  'chief 
of  men';  cp.  Vism  491.  [Europeans  have  found  a  strange 
difficulty  in  understanding  the  real  relation  of  Sakka  to 
Indra.  The  few  references  to  Indra  in  the  Nikayas  should  be 
classed  with  the  other  fragments  of  Vedic  mythology  to  be 
found  in  them.  Sakka  belongs  only  to  the  Buddhist  mytho- 
logy then  being  built  up.  He  is  not  only  quite  different  from 
Indra,  but  is  the  direct  contrary  of  that  blustering,  drunken, 
god  of  war.  See  the  passages  collected  in  Via/.  11.294 — 
298.  The  idiom  sa-Inda  deva,  U  11.261,  274;  A  v. 325, 
means  'the  gods  about  Indra,  Indras  retinue',  this  being 
a  Vedic  story.  But  Deva  Tavatii]sa  sahindaka  means 
the  T.  gods  together  with  their  leader  (D  11.208—212;  S 
111.90;  cp.   Vv   30')  this  being  a   Buddhist  story]. 

-aggi  (ind'  aggi)  Indra's  fire,  i.  e.  lightning  Pv.\  56. 
-gajjita  (nt.)  Indra's  thunder  Miln  22.  -jala  deception 
DA  1.85.  -jalika  a  juggler,  conjurer  Miln  331.  -dbanu 
the  rainbow  DA  1.40.  -bhavana  the  realm  of  Indra  Nd' 
448  (cp.  Tavatirjsa-bhavana).  -linga  the  characteristic  of 
Indra  Vism  491.    -sala  N.  of  tree  J  iv.92. 


Inda 


122 


Indriya 


Indaka  [dimin.  fr.  inda]  —  I.  Np.  (see  Diet,  of  names), 
e.g.  at  Pv  11.9";  PvA   136  sq.  —  2.  ( — °)  see  inda  2. 

Indakhlla  [inda  +  khlla,  cp.  BSk.  indrakila  Divy  250,  365, 
544;  Av.  b  1.109,  223].  "lodra's  post";  the  post,  stake 
or  column  of  Indra,  at  or  before  the  city  gate;  also  a  large 
slab  of  stone  let  into  the  ground  at  the  entrance  of  a 
house  D  It. 254  (°r|  uhacca,  cp.  DhA  11. 181);  Vin  iv.160 
(expld-  ibid,  as  sayani-gharassa  ummaro,  i.e.  threshold); 
S  V.444  (ayokhilo -f);  Dh  95  ("upama,  cp.  DhA  11. 181); 
Th  1,  663;  J  1.89;  Miln  364;  Vism  72,  466;  SnA  201; 
DA  1.209  (nikkhamitva  bahi  °a);  Dh.^  11. 180  ("sadisai) 
Sariputtassa  cittaijj,   181   (nagara-dvare  nikhatar)   °i)). 

Indagu  see  hitidagu. 

Indagopaka  [inda  -(-  gopaka,  cp.  Vedic  indragopa  having 
Indra  as  protector]  a  sort  of  insect  ("cochineal,  a  red 
beetle",  Bohtlingk),  observed  to  come  out  of  the  ground 
after  rain  Th  I,  13  ;  Vin  111.42  ;  J  iv.258;  v. 168;  DhA  1.20; 
Brethren  p.    18,  n. 

Indanila  [inda  -(-  nila  "Indra's  blue"]  a  sapphire  J  1.80; 
Miln   118;   VvA   III   (4- mahfinila). 

IndavarUQI  (f.)  [inda  +  vSruna]  the  Coloquintida  plant  J 
IV.8  (°ka-rukkha). 

Indivara  (nt.)  [etym.  ?]  the  blue  water  lily,  Nymphaea  Stel- 
lata  or  Cassia  Fistula  J  v.92  (°rsama  ratti);  VI. 536;  Vv 
45'   (=  uddslaka-puppha  VvA   197). 

Indriya  (nt.)  [Vedic  indriya  adj.  only  in  meaning  "belonging 
to  Indra";  nt.  strength,  might  (cp.  inda),  but  in  specific 
Pali  sense  "belonging  to  the  ruler",  i  e.  governing,  ruling 
nt.  governing,  ruling  or  controlling  principle]  A.  On  term: 
Indfiya  is  one  of  the  most  comprehensive  &  important 
categories  of  liuddhist  psychological  philosophy  &  ethics, 
meaning  "controlling  principle,  directive  force, elan,  Jyva/zi?", 
in  the  foil,  applications:  (a)  with  reference  to  sense-per- 
ceptibility "faculty,  function",  often  wrongly  interpreted  as 
"organ" ;  (b)  w.  ref.  to  objective  aspects  of  form  and 
matter  "kind,  characteristic,  determinating  principle,  sign, 
mark"  (cp.  woman-hood,  hood  =  Goth,  haidus  "kind, 
form");  (e)  w.  ref.  to  moods  of  sensation  and  (d)  to  moral 
powers  or  motives  controlling  action,  "principle,  control- 
ling" force;  (e)  vv.  ref.  to  cognition  &  insight  "category".  — 
Definitions  of  indriya  among  others  at  DhsA  119;  cp. 
Expositor  157;  Dhs  trsl.  i.vil;   Cpii.  228,  229. 

B.  Classifications  and  groups  of  indriyani.  An  exhaustive 
list  comprises  the  indriyani  enumd  under  A  a — e,  thus 
establishing  a  canonical  scheme  of  22  Controlling  Powers 
(bavisati  indriyani),  running  thus  at  Vbh  122  sq.  (see  trsl.  at 
Cpd.  175,  176);  and  discussed  in  detail  at  Vism  491  sq. 
(a.  sensorial)  (i)  cakkh-undriya  ("the  eye  which  is  a 
power",  Cpd.  228)  the  eye  or  (personal  potentiality  of) 
vision,  (2)  sot-indriya  the  ear  or  hearing,  (3)  ghan°  nose 
or  smell,  (4)  jivh°  tongue  or  taste,  (5)  kay°  body-sen- 
sibiliiy,  (6)  man")  mind;  (/'.  maleri,tl)  (7)  itth"  female 
sex  or  femininity,  (8)  pufis"  male  sex  or  masculinity, 
(9)  ji»it°  life  or  vitality;  (<•.  sensational)  (10)  sukh° 
pleasure,  (11)  dukkh°  pain,  (12)  somanass°  joy,  (13) 
domanass"  gf'ef,  (14)  upekh"  hedonic  indifference  [d. 
moral)  (15)  saddh"  faith,  (16)  viriy°  energy,  (17)  sat" 
mindfulness,  (18)  samadh°  concentration,  (19)  pann° 
reason;  (e.  cognitional)  (20)  anannata-nas^mit°  the 
thought  "I  shall  come  to  know  the  unknown",  (21)  ann° 
(:=  anna)  gnosis,  (22)  annata-v°  one  who  knows.  — Jivilin- 
driya  (no.  9)  is  in  some  redactions  placed  before  ilth" 
(no.  7),  e.g.  at  Ps  1.7,  137.  —  From  this  list  are  detached 
several  groups,  mentioned  frequently  and  in  various  con- 
nections, no.  6  manas  (mano,  man-indriya)  wavering  in 
its  function,  being  either  included  under  (a)  or  (more 
frequently)  omitted,  so  that  the  first  set  (a)  is  marked 
off  as  pane'  indriyani ,  the  6'*>  being  silently  included 
(see  below).  This  uncertainty  regarding  manas  deserves 
to  be  noted.  The  foil,  groups  may  be  mentioned  here 
viz.    19   (nos,    1  —  19)   at    Ps   1. 137;    10    (pafica  rOpIni  & 


paiica  arupini)  at  Nett  69 ;  three  groups  of  five  (nos. 
I — 5,  10 — 14,  15 — 19)  at  D  111.239,  "^p.  278;  four  (group 
d  without  paiiiia,  i.e.  nos.  15 — 18)  at  A  11.14!  ;  three 
(saddh°,  samadh'',  paru"!",  i.e.  nos.  15,  18,  19)  at  A  I. 
118  sq.  Under  atthavidhaij  indriya-rupaq  {Cpd.  159)  or 
rupar)  as  indriyaq  "form  which  is  faculty"  Dhs  661  (cp. 
trsl.  p.  204)  are  understood  the  5  sensitives  (nos.  I — 5), 
the  2  sex-states  (nos.  7,  8)  and  the  vital  force  (no.  9), 
i.  e.  groups  a  &  b  of  enum"- ;  discussed  &  defined  in 
detail  at  Dhs  709 — 717,  971 — 973.  —  It  is  often  to  he 
guessed  from  the  context  only,  which  of  the  sets  of  5 
indriyani  (usually  either  group  a  or  d)  is  meant.  These 
detached  groups  are  classed  as  below  under  C.  f.  —  Note. 
This  system  of  22  indriyani  reflects  a  revised  &  more 
elaborate  form  of  the  25  (or  23)  categories  of  the  Sankhya 
philosophy,  with  its  10  elements,  10  indriyani  &  the 
isolated  position  of  manas. 

C.  Material  in  detail  (grouped  according  to  A  a — e) 
(a)  sensorial:  (mentioned  or  referred  to  as  set  of  5  vii 
B.  nos.  I — 5):  M  1.295:  S  m.46  (paricannai)  "anarj  avak 
kanti),  225;  IV. 168;  A  n.151  (js  set  of  6,  viz.  B.  nos. 
I — 6):  M  1.9;  S  IV. 176;  V.74,  205,  230;  A  I.ii3;ii.i6, 
39,  152;  111.99,  163,  387  sq.;  V.348.  Specially  referring 
to  restraint  &  control  of  the  senses  in  foil,  phrases:  in 
driyani  saqvutani  S  II 231,  271 ;  iv.ii2;  pancasu  °esu 
saqvuto  Sn  340  (=  lakkhanato  pana  chatthai)  pi  vuttai) 
yeva  hoti,  i.e.  the  6'h  as  manas  included,  SnA  343); 
"esu  susaijvuta  Th  2,  196  (=  mana-chatthesu  i°  sutthu 
sarjvuta  ThA  168)  indriyesu  guttadvara  &  guttadvarala 
D  in. 107;  S  Ii.2i8;  iv.io3,  112,  175;  A  1.25,  94,  113; 
11.39;  111-70,  138,  173,  199,  449  sq.;  iv.^5,  166;  v.134; 
It  23,  24;  Nd'  14;  Vbh  248,  360;  DA  1.182  (:=  mana- 
chattesu  indriyesu  pihita-dvSro  hoti),  i.  vippasannani  S  II. 
275;  111.2,  235;  IV. 294;  V.301;  A  1.181 ;  111.380.  °anar| 
samata  (v.  1.  samatha)  A  III. 375  sq.  (see  also  f.  below) 
°ani  bhaviiani  Sn  516  (=  cakkh'  adini  cha  i.  SnA  426); 
Nd'^  475  B6.  —  Various:  S  1.26  (rakkhati),  48  ("lipasame 
rato);  iv.40,  140  (°sampanna);  v. 216,  217  sq.  (independent 
in  function,  mano  as  referee);  Ps  1.190  (man°);  Vbh  13 
(rupa),  341  (mud"  &  tikkh°)  384  (akAn°').  — {h)  physical: 
(above  B  7 — 9)  all  three:  S  v.204;  Vism  447;  itthi°  &  pu- 
risa"  A  iv.57;  Vbh  122,  415  sq. ;  puris°  A  111.404;  jivit" 
Vbh  123,  137;  Vism  230  (^'upaccheda  =:  marana).  See  also 
-under    itthi,   jivita   &  purisa.  —  (c)  sensational  (above  B 

10—14):  S  V.207  sq.  (see  Cpd.  ill  &  cp.  p.  15),  211 
sq.;  Vbh  15,  71;  Nett  88.  —  (d)  moral  (above  B  15 — 
19):  S  m.96,  153;  IV.36,  365  sq.;  V.193  sq.,  202,  219 
(corresponding  to  pancabalSni),  220  sq.  (and  amata),  223 
sq.  (their  culture  brings  assurance  of  no  rebirth),  227  sq. 
(paiiii.a  the  chief  one),  235,  237  (sevenfold  fruit  of),  A 
IV.125  sq.,  203,  225;  v.56,  175;  Ps  11.49,  51  sq.,  86; 
Nd'  14;  Nd2  628  (sat"  +  satibala);  Kvu  589;  Vbh  341; 
Nett  15,  28,  47,  54.  Often  in  standard  comb",  with  sati- 
patthana,  sammappadhana.  iddhipada,  indriya,  bala,  bojj- 
hanga,  magga  (see  Nd-  s.  v.  p.  263)  D  ir.120;  Vin  111. 
93;  Ps  11.166  &  passim.  As  set  of  4  indriyani  (nos.  16 — 
19)  at  Nett  83.  —  (e)  cognitional  (above  B  20 — 22)  D 
111.219  ^  S  v.204  (iis  peculiar  to  Arahantship);  It  53; 
Ps  1.115;  11.30.  —  (f)  collectively.,  either  two  or  more 
of  groups  a — e,  also  var.  peculiar  uses:  personal;  esp. 
physical  faculties  S  1. 61  (pakat°),  204  (id.);  HI. 207  (aka- 
saq  °ani  sankamanti);  iv.294  (vipari-bhinnani);  A  III. 441 
(°annr|  avekallata).  magic  power  A  iv.264  sq.  (okkhipati 
°ani).  indriyanai)  paripako  (moral  or  physical)  over-ripeness 
of  faculties  S  11.2,  42;  A  v.203 ;  Nd-  252  (in  def.  of 
jara):  Vbh  137.  moral  forces  Vin  1. 183  ("anaq  samata, 
-\-  viriyanaq  s.  as  sign  of  Arahant);  11.240  (pane"),  prin- 
ciple of  life  ekindriyai)  jivar)  Vin  iii.156;  Miln  259  heart 
or  seat  of  feeling  in  phrase  °ani  paricareti  to  satisfy  one's 
heart  PvA  16,  58,  77.  obligation,  duty,  vow  in  phrase 
°ani  bhinditva  breaking  one's  vow  J   11.274;   iv.  190. 

D.  Unclassified  material  D  177  (ahln°);  in  239  (dom- 
anass°  &  somanass")  M  1.437  (vemattata),  453  (id.);  11. 
II,  106;  III. 296;  S  III. 225;  V.209  (dukkh°,  domanass'); 
A  1.39,  42  sq.,   297;  11.38  (sant"),   149  sq.;  in.277,  282; 


Indriya 


153 


Issa 


Ps  1.16,  21,  88,  180;  U.I  sq  ,  13,  84,  119,  132,  143, 
145,  no,  223;  Nd"  45  (°dhira),  171  (^kusala),  341  (puc- 
cha);  Dhs  58,  121,  528,  556  (dukkh°),  560,  6t'4.  736; 
Netl  18  (sotSpaanassa),  28  ("vavatthana),  162  (lok'uttara); 
Vism  350  (°vekallala);Sdhp  280,  342,  364,  371,449.473- 

E.  .-/j  adj.  ( — °)  having  one's  senses,  mind  or  heart 
as  such  &  such  S  1. 138  (iikkh°  &  mud°);  in. 93  (pakat°); 
V.269  (id.);  A  1.70  (id)  &  passim  (id.);  A  1.70  (saqvul") 
266  (id.),  236  (gutt°);  :i  6  (samahit^);  8n  214  (susam- 
ahit°  his  senses  well-composed);  I'vA  70  (pinit°  joyful  or 
gladdened  of  heart). 

F.  Sonti  compounds :  -gutta  one  who  restrains  &  watches 
his  senses  S  1.154;  Dh  375.  -gutti  keeping  watch  over 
the  senses,  self-restraint  Dh.\  iv.iii.  a  paropariya,  l"  pa- 
ropariyatta  &  <:  paropariyatti  (°iSana)  (knowledge  of) 
what  goes  on  in  the  senses  and  intentions  of  others  ^  J 
1.78;  b  A  V34,  38;  b  Ps  I.I2I  sq.,  133  sq.;  11. 158,  175; 
b  Vbh  340,  342;  c  S  V.205;  c  Nelt  loi.  See  remark 
under  paropariya.  -bhavana  cultivation  of  the  (five,  see 
above  C^)  moral  qualities  Via  1.294  (-{-  balabhavana); 
M  III. 298.  -sarjvara  restraint  or  subjugation  of  the  senses 
D  11.281;  M  1.269,  346;  S  1.54;  A  III. 360;  IV.99;  V.113 
sq.,   136,  206;   Nd'  483;  Nett   27,   121   sq  :  Vism  20  sq. 

Indhana  (nt.)  [Vedic  indhana,  uf  idh  or  indh  <o  kindle, 
cp.  iddha']  firewood,  fuel  J  iv.27  (adj.  an°  without  fuel, 
aggi);  V.447  ;  ThA  256;  VvA  335  ;  Sdhp  608.  Cp.  idhuma. 

Ibbha  (adj.)  [Ved.  ibhya  belonging  to  the  servants]  menial; 
a  retainer,  in  the  phrase  mundaka  samanaka  ibbha 
kanba  (kinha)  bandbupadapacca  D  1.90  (v.  1.  SS  imbha; 
T.  kinha,  v.  1.  kanha),  91,  103,  M  1.334  (kinha,  v.  1. 
kanha).  Also  at  J  VI.214.  Expld  by  Bdhgh.  as  gahapa- 
tika  at  DA  1.254,  (also  at  J   VI. 215). 

Iri^a  (nt.)  [Vedic  irina,  on  etym.  see  Walde,  Lat.  Wtb. 
under  rarus]  barren  soil,  desert  J  vi.560  (=  niroja  C). 
Cp.  iri^ia. 

Iriyatl  [fr.  ir  to  set  in  motion,  to  stir,  Sk.  irte,  but  pres. 
formation  influenced  by  iriya  &  also  by  Sk.  iyarti  of  f 
(see  acchati  &  icchati^);  cp.  Caus.  irayati  (=  P.  ireti), 
pp.  irpa  &  irita.  See  also  issa]  to  move,  to  wander  about, 
stir;  fig.  to  move,  behave,  show  a  certain  way  of  deport- 
ment M  1.74,  75;  S  1.53  (dukkhaq  aticca  iriyati);  IV. 71; 
A  111.451;  V.41  ;  Sn  947,  1063,  1097;  Th  1.276;  J  111.498 
(:=  viharati);  Nd'431;  Nd-*  147  (=  carati  etc.);  Vism  16; 
DA  1.70. 

Iriyana  (f.)  [fr.  iriyati]  way  of  moving  on,  progress,  Dhs 
19,  82,  295,  380,  441,  716. 

Iriya  (f.)  [cp.  from  iriyati,  BSk.  Irya  Divy  485]  movement, 
posture,  deportment  M  1.81;  Sn  1038  (=  cariya  valti 
viharo  Nd'  148);  It  31 ;  Vism  145  (-f-  vutti  palana  yapana). 
-patha  way  of  deportment ;  mode  of  movement ;  good 
behaviour.  There  are  4  iriyapathas  or  postures,  viz.  walk- 
ing, standing,  sitting,  lying  down  (see  Ps  11.225  ^  ^A 
1.183).  Cp.  BSk.  iryapatha  Divy  37.  --  Vin  1.39;  II. 146 
(°sampanna);  M  1. 71  (chinn°  a  cripple);  S  v.78  (cattaro 
i.);  Sn  385;  Nd'  225,  226;  Nd^  s.  v.;  J  1.22  (of  a  lion), 
66,  506;  Miln  17;  Vism  104,  128,  290,  396;  DhA  1.9; 
IV.17;  VvA  6;  PvA  141;  Sdhp  604. 

Irtlbbeda  the  Rig-veda  Dpvs  v.62  (iruveda);  Miln  17S; 
DA  1.247;  SnA  447. 

llUya  (f.)  [fr.  illl,  cp.  Sk.  »tlika]  =  illi  J  v.259;  vi.50. 

UII  (f.)  [cp.  Vedic  illbian  Np.  of  a  demon]  -a  sort  of  weapon, 
a  short  one-edged  sword  J  v.259. 

nUyltUQ  v.  1.  for  alllyitUQ  at  J  v.154. 

Iva  (indecl.)  [Vedic  iva  &  va]  part,  of  comparison:  like, 
as  Dh  I,  2,  7,  8,  287,  334;  J  1.295;  SnA  12  (= 
opamma-vacanai)').  Elided  to  'va,  diaeretic-melathetic  form 
Tiy«  (q.  v.). 


Isi  [Vedic  rsi  fr.  fs.  —  Voc.  ise  Sn  1025;  pi.  npm.  isayo,  gen. 
isinai]  S  11.280  &  isinaq  S  1.192;  etc.  inst.  isibhi  Th  i,  1065] 
—  I.  a  holy  man,  one  gifted  with  special  powers  of  insight 
&  inspiration,  an  anchoret,  a  Seer,  Sage,  Saint,  "Master" 
D  1.96  (kanho  isi  ahosi);  S  1.33,  35,  65,  128,  191,  192, 
226  sq  ,  236  (acaro  isinai));  11.280  (dhammo  isinai]  dhajo); 
A  11.24,  5';  Vin  iv.i5  =  22  (°bhasito  dhammo);  It  123; 
Sn  284,  458,  979,  689,  691,  1008,  1025,  1043,  1044, 
1 116  (dev"  divine  Seer),  11 26,  Nd'  149  (isi-namaka  ye 
keci  isi-pabbajjai)  pabbajita  ajivika  nigantha  jatila  tapasa); 
Dh  281 ;  J  1. 1 7  (v. go:  isayo  n'  atthi  me  sama  of  Buddha); 
J  v.  140  (°gana),  266,  267  (isi  Gotamo);  Pv  11.6K  (=: 
yama-niyam'  adinai]  esanatthena  isayo  PvA  98);  II.  13' 
(=:jhan'  adinar)  gunanai}  esanatthena  isi  PvA  163);  iv,73 
(^  asckkhanai)  silakkhandh'  adinoi]  esanatthena  isiq  PvA 
265);  Miln  19  (°vata)  248  ("bhattika);  DA  1.266  (gen 
isino);  Sdhp  200,  384.  See  also  mahesi.  —  2.  (in  brah- 
iiianic  tradition)  the  ten  (divinely)  inspired  singers  or 
composers  of  the  Vedic  hymns  (brahmananai)  pubbaka 
isayo  mant&nai]  kattaro  pavattaro),  whose  names  are  given 
at  D  1. 104  =  238  =  A  III. 224  =  IV. 61  as  follows:  Atthaka, 
Vamaka,  Vamadeva,  Vessamitta,  Vamataggi  (Yamadaggi), 
Angirasa,  Bharadvaja,  Vasettha,  Kassapa,  Bhagu. 

-nisabha  the  first  (lit.  "bull")  among  Saints,  Ep.  of  the 
Buddha  Sn  698;  Vv  16'  (cp.  VvA  82).  -pabbajja  the 
(holy)  life  of  an  anchoret  Vism  123;  DhA  1. 105;  IV. 55; 
PvA  162.  -vata  the  wind  of  a  Saint  Miln  19;  Vism  18. 
-sattama  the  7'b  of  the  great  Sages  (i.e.  Gotama  Buddha, 
as  7'h  in  the  sequence  of  Vipassin,  Sikhin,  Vessabhu, 
Kakusandha,  Konagamana  &  Kassapa  Buddhas)  M  1.386; 
S  1.192;  .Sn  356;  Th  I,  1240  (^  Bhagava  isi  ca  sattamo 
ca  uttamatthena  SnA  351);  Vv  21'  (=  buddha-isinai)  Vi- 
passi-adinaq  sattamo  VvA   105). 


a  reed  D  1.77,  cp.  DA  1.222; 


Isika  (isika)  (f.)  [Sk.  isika] 

J   vt.67  (isika). 

Isltta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  isi]  rishi-ship  D  1.104  (=  isi-bhSva 
DA  1.274). 

Issati  [denom.  fr.  issa.  Av.  arasye'ti  to  be  jealous,  Gr. 
'epxrai  lo  desire ;  connected  also  with  Sk.  arsati  fr.  f§  to 
flow,  Lat.  erro;  &  Sk.  irasyati  lo  be  angry  =  Gr.  Afiit 
God  of  war,  Hfii ;  Ags.  eorsian  to  be  angry]  to  bear  ill- 
will,  to  be  angry,  to  envy  J  111.7 !  PP""-  med.  issamanaka 
Sdhp  89,  f.  °ika  A  11.203.  —  PP-  issita  (q.  v.). 

Issattha  (nt.  m.)  [cp.  Sk.  isvastra  nt.  bow,  fr.  isu  (=  P. 
usu)  an  arrow  +  aS  to  throw.  Cp.  P.  issasa,  —  Bdhgh. 
in  a  strange  way  dissects  it  as  "usuii  ca  satthan  ca  ti 
vuttai)  holi"  (i.  e.  isu  arrow  -{•  sattha  sword,  knife)  SnA 
466]  —  I.  (nt.)  archery  (as  means  of  livelihood  &  oc- 
cupation) M  1.85;  lll.i;  S  1. 100  (so  read  with  v.  1.;  T. 
has  issatta,  C.  expl"s.  by  usu-sippai)  A".  5.  p.  318);  Sn 
617  (°i)  upajlvati  =  avudha  jivikai]  SnA  466);  J  vi.81; 
Sdhp  390.  —  2.  (m.)  an  archer  Miln   250,  305,  352,  418. 

ISSatthaka  [issattha -f  ka]  an  archer  Miln  419. 

Issara  [Vedic  isvara,  from  H  to  have  power,  cp.  also  P. 
isa]  lord,  ruler,  master,  chief  A  iv.go;  So  552;  J  1.89 
(°jana),  100,  283  (°bheri);  IV.132  (°jana);  Pv  iv.6' (°mada); 
Miln  253  (an°  without  a  ruler);  DhsA  141;  DA  i.ili; 
PvA  31  (gehassa  issara);  Sdhp  348,  431.  —  2.  creative 
deity,  Brahma,  D  111.28;  M  11.222  =  A  1.173;  Vism  598. 

issariya  [fr.  issara]  rulership,  mastership,  supremacy,  domi- 
nion (Syn.  adhipacca)  D  111.190;  S  1.43,  100  (°mada); 
v. 342  (issariy-adhipacca);  A  1.62  ("adhipacca);  ".205, 
249;  111.38;  IV.263;  Sn  112;  Dh  73;  Ud  i8;  Ps  11.171, 
176;  J  1.156;  V.443;  DhA  11.73;  VvA  126  (for adhipacca) 
PvA  42,   117,   137  (for  adhipacca);  Sdhp  418,  583. 

Issariyata  (f.)  [fr.  issariya]  mastership,  lordship  Sdhp  422. 

Issa'  (f.)  [Sk.  Irsya  to  Sk.  irin  forceful,  irasyati  to  be  angry, 

Lat.   Ira   anger,   Gr.    "Af)){   God  of  war;  Ags.  eorsian  to 

e   angry.    See   also   issati]  jealousy,  anger,  envy,  ill-will 


Is 


124 


Ukkattha 


D  n.277  (°macchariya) ;  111.44  (id.);  M  1.15;  S  n.260: 
A  1.95,  105  (°mala),  299;  II  203;  IV.8  ("sanfiojana),  148, 
349,  465;  V.42  sq.,  156,  310;  Sn  no;  J  v.9o(°avatinna); 
Pv  11.37;  Vv  155;  Pug  19,  23;  Vbh  380,  391;  Dhsll2l, 
1 131,  1460;  Vism  470  (def.):  I'vA  24,  46,  87  ;  DhA  11.76  ; 
Miln   155;  Sdhp  313.   510. 

-pakata  overcome  by  envy,  of  an  envious  nature  S  11.260  ; 
Miln    155;  PvA  31.  See  remarks  under  apakata  &  pakata. 

Issa'^  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  rsya-mrga]  in  issammiga  (=  issamiga) 
J  V.410,  &  issamiga  f  v.431,  a  species  of  antelope,  cp. 
J  V.425  issasinga  tiie  antlers  of  this  antelope. 

Issayana  (&  Issayitatta)  [abstr.  formations  fr.  issa]  =  issa 
Pug  19,  23;  Dhs  1121;  Vism  470. 

Issasa    [Sk.    isvasa,   see  issattha]  an  archer  Vin  IV.  124;  M 


lll.i;    A    IV.423    (issaso    va    issas'    antevasi   va);  J  U.87 ; 
IV.494;   Miln  232;  DA  1. 1 56. 

ISSasin  [Sk.  isvasa  in  meaning  "bow"  -)-  in]  an  archer,  lit. 
one  l)aving  a  bow  J  iv.494  (r=  issasa  C). 

Issita  [pp.  of  Irs  (see  issati);  Sk.  irsita]  being  envied  or 
scolded,  giving  offence  or  causing  anger  J  v. 44. 

ISSttkkl  (adj.)  [fr.  issa,  Sk.  irsyu4-k*+  •"]  envious,  jealous 
Vin  11.89  (+  maccharin);  D  11145,  246;  M  1.43,  96;  S 
IV.241;  A  III. 140,  335;  IV.2;  Dh  262;  J  111.259;  Pv.ii.3«; 
Pug   19,  23;  DhA  III. 389;  PvA   174.    See  also  an°. 

Iha  (indecl.)  [Sk.  iha;  form  iha  is  rare  in  Pali,  the  usual 
form  is  idha  (q.  v.)]  adv.  of  place  "here"  Sn  460. 


I. 


Tgha  (?)  [doubtful  as  to  origin  &  etym.  since  only  found 
in  cpd.  anigha  &  abs.  only  in  exegetical  literature.  If 
genuine,  it  should  belong  to  fgh  Sk.  rghayati  to  tremble, 
rage  etc.  See  discussed  under  nigha']  confusion,  rage, 
badness  SnA  590  (in  expl"  of  anigha).  Usually  as  an° 
(or  anigha),  e.g.  J  111.343  (=  niddukkha  C);  v.343. 

Iti  &  Iti  (f.)  [Sk.  Ill,  of  doubtful  origin]  ill,  calamity,  plague, 
distress,  often  comb''-  with  &  substituted  for  upaddava, 
cp.  BSk.  itay'  opadrava  (attack  of  plague)  Divy  iig.  — 
Sn  51;  J  1.27  (v.189);  V.401  =  upaddava;  Nd'  381; 
Nd2  48,  636  (+  upaddava  =  santapa);  Miln  152,  247, 
418.  -aniti  sound  condition,  health,  safety  A  iv.238; 
Miln   323. 

Itika  (adj.)  [fr.  Hi]  connected  or  affected  with  ill  or  harm, 
only  in  neg.  an°. 

Itlha  a  doublet  of  itiha,  only  found  in  neg.  an°. 

Idisa  (adj.)  [Sk.  Idrs,  I  -|-  dfi,  lit.  so-looking]  such  like, 
such  DhsA  400  (f.  °i);  PvA  50,  (id.)   51. 

Iri^a  (nt.)  [==  iriija,  q.  v.  &  cp.  Sk.  irina]  barren  soil, 
desert  D  1.248;  A  V.156  sq.;  J  v.70  (=  sukkha-kantara 
C);  V1.560;  VvA  334. 

Irita  [pp-  of  Ireti,  Caus.  of  jf,  see  iriyati]  —  I.  set  in 
motion,  stirred,  moved,  shaken  Vv  39*  (vat'erita  moved  by 
the  wind);  J  1.32  (id.);  Vv  64-0  (haday'erita);  Pv  11.12' 
(malut'erita);  PvA  156  (has  erita  for  1°);  VvA  177  (=: 
calita).  — •  2.  uttered,  proclaimed,  said  Davs  v. 12. 


Isa  [fr.  is  to  have  power,  perf.  ise  =  Goth,  aih ;  cp.  Sk. 
jsvara  ;=  P.  issara,  &  BSk.  Isa,  e.  g.  Jtm  31"]  lord,  owner, 
ruler  J  iv.209  (of  a  black  lion  =  kala-siha  C);  VvA  168. 
f.  isl  see  mahesi  a  chief  queen.  Cp.  also  mahesakkha. 

Isaka  [dimin.  of  isa]  a  pole  J  11.152;  vi.456  (°agga  the 
top  of  a  pole). 

Isakat)  (adv.)  [nt.  of  isaka]  a  little,  slightly,  easily  M  I. 
450;  J  1-77;  VI.456;  DA  1.252,  310;  VvA  36;  Vism  136, 
I37i  231,  Isakam  pi  even  a  little  Vism   106;  Sdhp  586. 

Isa  (f.)  [Vedic  isa]  the  pole  of  a  plough  or  of  a  carriage 
S  1.104  (nangal'  Isa  read  with  v.  1.  for  nangala-sisa  T.), 
172,  224  (°mukha):  A  iv.  191  (rath°);  Sn  77;  J  1.203 
("mukha);  lv.209;  Ud  42;  Miln  27;  SnA  146;  VvA  269 
("miliar)  =  rathassa  uro). 

-danta  having  teeth  (tusks)  as  long  as  a  plough-pole 
(of  an  elephant)  Vin  1.352;  M  1. 414;  Vv  20''  =  43"  (= 
ratha-isa-sadisa-danto);  J   V1.490  =  515. 

Isaka  (adj.)  [fr.  Isa]  having  a  pole  (said  of  a  carriage) 
J  VI.252. 

Ihati  [Vedic  ih,  cp.  \v.  125  .irdour,  eagerness,  azis  greed] 
to  endeavour,  attempt,  strive  after  Vin  ill. 268  (Bdhgh.) 
J  VI. 518  (cp.   Kern,   Toev.  p.   112);  DA  1. 139;  VvA  35. 

Iha  (f.)  [fr.  ih]  exertion,  endeavour,  activity,  only  in  adj-. 
nir-iha  void  of  activity  Miln  413. 


u. 


U  the  sound  or  syllable  u,  expH-  by  Bdhgh  at  Vism  495 
as  expressing  origin  (=  ud). 

Ukkaqsa  [fr.  ud  +  kfj  see  ukkassati]  exaltation,  excellence, 
superiority  (opp.  avakkarjsa)  D  1. 54  (ukkaqs-avakkaqsa  =r 
hayana-vaddhana  DA  1. 165);  M  1.518;  Vism  563  (id.); 
VvA  146  ("gata  excellent),  335  (instr.  ukkaijsena  par  excel- 
lence, exceedingly)  PvA  228  (°vasena,  with  ref.  to  deva- 
tas;  v.  1.  SS  okk°). 

Ukkagsaka  (adj.)  [fr.  ukkaqsa]  raising,  exalting  (oneself), 
extolling  M  1. 19  (att";  opp.  para-vambhin) ;  J  11.152.  Cp. 
samukkarjsika. 

Ukkagsati  [ud  -f-  kf5,  karsati,  lit  draw  or  up,  raise]  to 
exalt,  praise  M  1.498;  J  iv.108.  —  pp.  ukkattha.  —  uk- 
ka;]seti  in  same  meaning  M  1.402  sq.  (attanaq  u.  parai] 
vambheti);  A  II.27  ;  Fd'   141. 


UkkalJSana  (f)  [abstr.  of  ukkaqsati]  raising,  extolling, 
exaltation,  in  att"  self-exaltation,  self-praise  M  1.402  (opp. 
para-vambhana) ;  Nd''  5°5  ('d-)- 

Ukkattha  (adj.)  [pp.  of  ukkassati]  —  I.  exalted,  high, 
prominent,  glorious,  excellent,  most  freq.  opp.  to  bina, 
in  phrase  hina-m-ukkattha-majjhime  Vin  1V.7;  J  1.20 
(v. 129),  22  (v. 143);  III. 218  (==  uttama  C).  In  other 
comb"-  at  Vism  64  (u.  majjhima  mudu  referring  to  the 
3  grades  of  the  Dhutangas);  SnA  160  (dvipada  sabba 
sattanar)  ukkattha);  VvA  105  (superl.  ukkattliatama  with 
ref.  to  Gotama  as  the  most  exalted  of  the  7  Rishis); 
Sdhp  506  (opp.  lamaka).  —  2.  large,  comprehensive, 
great,  in  ukkattho  patto  a  bowl  of  great  capacity  (as 
diff.  from  majjhima  &  omaka  p.)  Vin  IV. 243  (=r  uk.  nama 
patto  addhslhak'  odanai]  ga^hati  catu-bhagar)  khadanai] 
va    tadupiyaq    va   byaiijanaij).  —  3.    detailed,  exhaustive, 


Ukkattha 


125 


Ukkutika 


specialised  Vism  37  (ati-ukkattha-desana);  also  in  phrase 
"vasena  in  detail  SnA.  181.  —  4.  arrogant,  insolent  J  v. 
16.  —  5.  used  as  nom  at  J  1.387  in  meaning  jjbattle, 
conflict".  —  an°  Vism  64  ("civara). 

-niddesa  exhaustive  exposition,  special  designation,  term 
par  excellence  DhsA  70;  VvA  231;  PvA  7.  -pariccheda 
comprehensive  connotation  SnA  229,  231,  376. 

Ukkatthata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  ukkattha]  superiority,  eminence, 
exalted  state  J  iv.303  (opp.  hinata). 

Ukkatthlta  [for  ukkathita,  ud  +  PP-  of  kvath,  see  kathati 
&  kuthati]  lioiled  up,  boiling,  seething  A  llt.231  &  234 
(udapatto  aggina  santatto  ukkatthito,  v.  1.  ukkuUhilo);  J 
IV.118  (v.  1.  pakkudhita  =  pakkuthita,  as  gloss). 

Ukkaothati  [d-  ua-|-kaoth  in  secondary  meaning  of  kantha 
neck,  lit.  to  stretch  one's  neck  for  anything;  i.e.  long 
for,  be  hungry  after  etc.]  to  long  for,  to  be  dissatisfied, 
to  fret  J  1.386  (°mana);  III.  143  (°itva);  IV. 3,  160;  V.io 
(anukkhanthanio);  DhsA  407;  PvA  162  (ma  ukkanthi, 
V.  1.  ukkanhi,  so  read  for  T.  m5  khundali).  —  pp.  uk- 
kanthita  (q.  v.).  Cp.  pari". 

UkkaQthana(f.)[fr.  ukkanthati]  emotion,  commotion  D  11.239. 

Ukkaotha  (f.)  [fr.  ukkanth"]  longing,  desire;  distress,  regret 
Nett  88;  PvA   55  (spelt  kkh),  60,   145,   152. 

Ukkaothl  (f-)  [fr-  nkkanth"]  longing,  dissatisfaction  ThA 
239  (=  arati). 

Ukkaothlka  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  ukkanthita]  =  ukkaythi,  i.  e. 
longing,  slate  of  distress,   pain  J  III. 643. 

Ukkaothita  [pp.  of  ukkanthati]  dissatisfied,  repretting, 
longing,  fretting  J  1. 196;  11.92,  115;  111.185;  Miln  281; 
DhA  1V.66,  225;  PvA   13  (an°),  55,   187. 

UkkaQQa  (adj.)  [ud  -f-  kanna]  having  the  ears  erect  (?) 
J   VI.559. 

UkkaOQaka  (ad.)  [ut  -f-  kanna  +  ka  lit.  "with  ears  out" 
or  is  it  ukkandaka?]  a  certain  disease  (?  mange)  of  jackals, 
S  11.230,  271  ;  S.  A.  'the  fur  falls  off  from  the  whole  body'. 

Ukkantatl  [ud  +  kantati]  to  cut  out,  tear  out,  skin  Vin 
1.217  ("itva);  J  1. 164;  IV. 210  (v.  1.  for  okk°)j  v. 10  (ger. 
ukkacca);  Pv  111.9^  (ukkantva,  v.  1.  BB  ukkacca);  PvA 
210  (v.  1.  SS  ni°),  211  (=  chinditva). 

Ukkaplll^tjaka  [etymology  unknown]  only  in  pi.;  vermin, 
Vin   12111=239.  See  comment  at    Vin.    Texts  11.70. 

Ukkantlkat)  (nt.  adv.),  in  jhan"  &  kasin",  after  the  method 
of  stepping  away  from  or  skipping  Vism  374. 

Ukkamati  (or  okk°  which  is  V.  1.  at  all  passages  quoted) 
[ud  -j-  kamati  from  kram]  to  step  aside,  step  out  from 
(w.  abl.),  depart  from  K  111.301  (maggS):  J  111.531;  IV. 
loi  (magga);  Ud  13  (id.);  DA  1.185  ('^O-  Caus.  ukka- 
meti;  Caus.  11.  ukkamapeti  J  11.3. 

Ukkamana  (nt.)  [fr.  ukkamati]  stepping  away  from  Vism  374. 

Ukkala  in  phrase  ukkala-vassa-bhanna  S  111.73  =  A  11.31 
=  Kvu  141  is  trsld.  as  "the  folk  of  Ukkala,  Lenten 
speakers  of  old"  (see  Kvu  trsl.  95  with  n.  2).  Another 
interpretation  is  ukkalavassa" ,  i.  e.  ukkala  -\-  avassa° 
[*avasya°],  one  who  speaks  of,  or  like,  a  porter  (ukkala 
=  Sk  utkala  porter,  one  who  carries  a  load)  and  bonds- 
man M  III. 78  reads  Okkala  (v.  1.  Ukkala)- Vassa-Bhannii, 
all  as  N.  pr. 

UkkalSpa  see  ukI3pa. 

Ukkalissatl  [=  ukkilissatl?  ud  -|-  kilissati]  to  become 
depraved,  to  revoke  (?)  Miln   143. 

Ukka  (f.)  [Vedic  ulkS  &  ulkusi,  cp.  Gr.  '<ir>M\  (=  fMnirfSi; 
torch  Hesychius),  re^xi^H  (=  Volcanus) ;  Lat.  Volcanus, 


Oir.  Olcan,  Idg.  'ulq  to  be  fiery]  I.  firebrand,  glow  of 
fire,  torch  D  1.49,  108;  S  11.264;  Th  2,  488  (°upama); 
T  1.34  (dhamm-okka);  II. 401  ;  IV. 291 ;  v. 322;  Vism  428; 
ThA  287;  DA  1.148;  DhA  1.42,  205;  PvA  154.  Esp. 
as  tin°  firebrand  of  dry  grass  M  1.128,  365;  Nd*  40!'; 
DhA  1.126;  Sdhp  573.  —  2.  a  furnace  or  forge  of  a 
smith  A  1. 310,  257;  J  vi.437;  see  also  below  "mukha.  — 
3.  a  meteor:  see  below  "pata. 

-dhara  a  torch-bearer  Sn  335;  It  108;  Miln  I.  -pata 
"falling  of  a  firebrand",  a  meteor  D  i.io  (=  akasato 
ukkanaq  patanai)  DA  1.95);  J  1374;  vi.476;  Miln  178. 
-mukba  the  opening  or  receiver  of  a  furnace,  a  gold- 
smith's smelting  pot  A  1.257;  J  VI. 217  (=  kammar'ud- 
dhana  C),  574;  Sn  686;  DhA  11.250. 

Ukkacana  (f.)  [fr.  ukkSceti,  ud  -f-  *kac,  see  ukkacita]  en- 
lightening, clearing  up,  instruction  Vbh  352  (in  def.  of 
lapana,  v.  1.  "kgpana).  A'ote  Kern,  Ton/,  s.  v.  compares 
Vism  p.  115  &  Sk.  uddlpana  in  same  sense.  Def.  at  Vism 
27   (==  uddipana). 

Ukkacita  [pp.  either  to  *kaC  to  shine  or  to  kaceti  denom. 
fr.  kaca']  enlightened,  made  bright  (fig.)  or  cleaned,  cleared 
up  A  1.72,  286  (°vinrta   parisa  enlightened  c&  trained). 

UkkSceti  [according  to  Morris  JPTS.  1884,  112  a  denom. 
fr.  kaca^  a  carrying  pole,  although  the  idea  of  a  bucket 
is  somewhat  removed  from  that  of  a  pole]  to  bale  out 
water,  to  empty  by  means  of  buckets  J  11.70  (v.  1.  ussiiScati). 

Ukkametl  [Caus.  of  ukkamati]  to  cause  to  step  aside  J  vi.i  i. 

Ukkara  [fr.  ud  +  kf  "do  out"]  dung,  excrement  J  iv.485, 
otherwise  only  in  cpd.  ukkara-bhumi  dung-hill  J  1.5,  146 
(so  read  for  ukkar^),  11.40;  HI. 16,  75,  377;  iv.72,  305; 
Vism   196  ('upama  kunapa);  DhA  111.208.  Cp.  uccara. 

Ukkasika  (f?)  [doubtful]  at  Vin  11.106  is  not  clear.  Vin 
Texts  111.68  leave  it  untranslated.  Bdhgh's  expl"  is  valta- 
vatti  (patta":  a  leaf?  Cp.  S  HI.141),  prob.  =  valti  (Sk. 
varti  a  kind  of  pad).  See  details  given  by  Morris  y P  TS. 
1887,  113,  who  trsl*.  "rubber,  a  kind  of  pad  or  roll  of 
cotton  with  which  the  delicate  bather  could  rub  himself 
without  too  much  friction". 

Ukkasati  [ud  +  kasati  of  kas  to  cough]  to  "ahem"!  to 
cough,  to  clear  one's  throat  Vin  11.222;  iv.16;  M  11.4; 
A  v.65;  aor.  ukkasi  J  1.161,  217.  —  pp.  ukkasita. 

Ukkaslta  [pp.  of  ukkasati]  coughed,  clearing  one's  throat, 
coughed  out,  hawking  D  1.89;  Bu  1.52  (+  khipita)  — 
"sadda  the  noise  of  clearing  the  throat  D  1.50;  J  1.119; 
DhA  1.250  (-f  khipita"). 

Ukkiopa  [pp.  of  ud  -f  kf  digS]  dug  up  or  out  D  1.105; 
J  IV. 106;  Miln  330;  DA  1.274  (=  khata). 

Ukkiledeti  [Caus.  of  ud  4-  klid,  see  kilijjati]  to  take  the 
dirt  out,  to  clean  out  DA  1.255  (dosaij);  SnA  274(ragaq; 
v.  1.  BB.  uggileti). 

Ukkujja  (adj.)  [ud  +  kujja]  set  up,  upright,  opp.  either 
nikkujja  or  avakujja  A  1. 131;  S  V.89  (ukkujj'Svakujja); 
Pug  32  (=  uparimukho  thapito  C.   214). 

Ukkujjati  ("eti)  [Denom.  fr.  ukkujja]  to  bend  up,  turn  up, 
set  upright  Vin  1.181;  11.126  (pattai)),  269  (bhikkhur)); 
mostly  in  phrase  nikkujjitaij  ukkujjeyya  "(like)  one  might 
raise  up  one  who  has  fallen"  D  1.85,  110;  11.132,  152; 
Sn  p.   15  (^  uparimukhar)  karoli  DA  1.228:=  SnA  155). 

Ukkujjana  (nt.)  [fr.  ukkujjati]  raising  up,  setting  up  again 
Vin  11.126  (patt"). 

Ukkutika  [fr.  ud  -j-  'kut  =  *kuiiC,  as  in  kujila  &  kuncila; 
lit.  "bending  up".  The  BSk.  form  is  ukkutuka,  e.g.  Av. 
S  1.3 1 5]  ^  special  manner  of  squatting.  The  soles  of  the 
feet   are  firmly  on  the  ground,  the  man  sinks  down,  the 

11—3 


Ukkutika 


126 


Uggatta 


heels  slightly  rising  as  he  does  so,  until  the  thighs  rest 
on  the  calves,  and  the  hams  are  about  six  inches  or  more 
from  the  ground.  Then  with  elbows  on  knees  he  balances 
himself.  Few  Europeans  can  adopt  this  posture,  &  none  (save 
miners)  can  maintain  it  with  comfort,  as  the  calf  muscles  up- 
set the  balance.  Indians  find  it  easy,  &  when  the  palms  of 
the  hands  are  also  held  together  upwards,  it  indicates 
submission.  See  Dial.  1.23 1  n.  4.  —  Vin  1.45  ("i)  nisi- 
dati);  UI.228;  A  1.296;  11.206;  Pug  55;  Vism  62,  104, 
105  (quot.  fr.  Papanca  Sudani)  426;  DhA  I.20I,  217; 
11.61   (as  posture  of  humility);   III. 195;  iv.223. 

-padhana  [in  BSk.  distorted  to  utkutuka-prahana  Divy 
339  =  Dh  141]  exertion  when  squatting  (an  ascetic  habit) 
D  1167;  M  1.78,  515;  A  1.296;  11.206;  J  1.493;  '"•235; 
IV. 299;  Dh  141  (=:  ukkutika-bhavena  araddha-viriyo 
DhA  111.78). 

Ukkutthi  (f)  [fr-  ud  +  kruS,  cp.  "krufiC  as  ih  P.  kunca 
&  Sk.  krosati]  shouting  out,  acclamation  J  11.367;  VI. 41; 
Bu  1.35:  Miln  21;  Vism  245;  DhA  11.43;  ^^^  132  (°sadda). 

Ukkusa  [see  ukkutjhi  &  cp.  BSk.  utkrosa  watchman  (?) 
Divy  453]  an  osprey  J  IV.291   (°r5ja),  392. 

Ukkula  (adj.)  [ud  +  kula]  sloping  up,  steep,  high  (opp. 
vikkula)  A  1.35  sq.;  Vism  153  (nadi);  SnA  42.  Cp.  utkula- 
nikula-sama  Lai.  V.  340. 

Ukkotana  (nt.)  [fr.  ud  -\-  *kut  to  be  crooked  or  to  deceive, 
cp.  kujja  c&  kutila  crooked]  crookedness,  perverting  justice, 
taking  bribes  to  get  people  into  unlawful  possessions 
(Bdhgh.)  D  1.5;  III. 176;  S  V.473;  A  11.209,  v. 206;  DA 
1.79  r=  Pug  A  240  ("assamike  samike  katui]  lancagahanar)"-). 

Ukkofanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  ukkotana]  belonging  to  the  perversion 
of  justice  Vin  11.94. 

UkkOfeti  [denom.  fr.  *ukkot-ana]  to  disturb  what  is  settled, 
to  open  up  again  a  legal  question  that  has  been  adjudged, 
Vin  11.94,  303;  IV.126;  J   11.387;  DA  1.5. 

UkkhaH  (°li)  (f.)  [der.  fr.  Vedic  ukha  &  ukha  pot,  boiler; 
related  to  Lat.  auUa  (fr.  *auxla);  Goth,  auhns  oven]  a 
pot  in  which  to  boil  rice  (&  other  food)  J  I.6S,  235;  v. 
389,  471;  Pug  33;  Vism  346  (°mukhavatti),  356  ("kapala, 
in  comp.);  DhA  1. 136;  11.5;  ill. 371;  IV.130;  Pug  A  231; 
VvA   100.  Cp.  next. 

Ukkhalika  (f.)  =  ukkhali.  Th  2,  23  (=:  bhatta-pacana- 
bhajanai]  ThA  29);  DhA  IV.98  (°kala);  DhsA  376. 

Ukkha  (?)  [can  it  be  compared  with  Vedic  uksan  ?]  in  ukkha- 
satai)  danar),  given  at  various  times  of  the  day  (meaning  = 
SKXTififiif  ?)  S  11.264  (.''•  1-  ukka).  Or  is  it  to  be  read 
ukhasatai]  d.  i.  e.  consisting  of  100  pots  (of  rice  ^  maha- 
danar)?).  SA:  paflitabhojana-bharitanai)  maha-ukkhalrnai] 
satai)  danai).  Cp.  ukha  cooking  vessel  ThA  71  (Ap.  V.38). 
Kern,  Ton/,  under  ukkha  trsl.  "zeker  muntstuck",  i.  e. 
kind  of  gift. 

Ukkhita  [pp.  of  uk§  sprinkle]  besmeared,  besprinkled 
J  IV. 331   (ruhir»,  so  read  for  °rakkhita).  Cp.  okkhita. 

Ukkhitta  [pp.  of  ukkhipati]  taken  up,  lifted  up,  t.t.  of 
the  canon  law  '.--uspended"  Vin  iv.218;  J   111.487. 

-°asika  with  d^awn  sword  M  1.377;  S  iv.173;  J  1.393; 
DhsA  329;  Vism  230  (vadhaka),  479.  -paligba  having 
the  obstacles  removed  M  1.139;  A  111.S4;  Dh  398  =  Sn 
622  (=  ayijja-palighassa  ukkhittataya  u.  SnA  467  = 
DhA  IV. 161).  —  sira  with  uplifted  head  Vism  162. 

Ukkhittaka  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  ukkhitta]  a  bhikkhu  who  has  been 
suspended   Vin    1.97,   121  ;   II.61,    173,  213. 

Ukkhipati  [ut  +  khipati,  k§ip].  To  hold  up,  to  take  up 
J  1.213;  IV.391:  VI.350;  Vism  4  (satthari);  PvA  265.  At 
t.  t.  of  canon  law,  to  suspend  (a  bhikkhu  for  breach  of 
rules)  Vin  lv.3oy;  I'ug  33.  -ukkhipiyati  to  be  suspended 


Vin  II. 61.  Caus.  II.  ukkhipapeti  to  cause  to  be  supported 
J  1.52;  11.15,  38;  III. 285,  436.^ — pp.  ukkhitta,  ger.  ukk- 
hipitva  as  adv.   "upright"   Vism    126. 

Ukkhipana  (nt.)  [fr.  ud  -|-  k$ip]  l.  pushing  upwards  J 
1. 163.  —  2.  throwing  up,  sneering  Vism  29  (vacaya). 

Ukkhetlta  [pp.  of  ud  +  kliet  or  *khe|,  see  kheja]  spit  out, 
thrown  off,  in  phrase  moho  (rago  etc  )  catto  vanto  multo 
pahino  patinissattho  u.  Vin  III. 97  =  iv.27. 

Ukkhepa  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  ud  +  k$lp]  (adj.)  throwing  away 
UhA  iv.59  (°daya  a  throw-away  donation,  tip).  —  (m.) 
lifting  up  raising  J  1.394  (eel");  vi.508;  DA  1.273;  **ir° 
hard  to  lift  or  raise  Sdhp  347. 

Ukkhepaka  (adj.)  [fr.  ukkhepa]  throwing  (up);  °q  (ace.) 
in   the  manner  of  throwing   Vin  11.214  =  iV-'95  (P''j4°)' 

Ukkhepana  (nt.)  [fr.  ud  -|-  k?ip]  suspension  J   111.487. 

Ukkhepana  (l.)  [=  last]  throwing  up,  provocation,  sneering 
Vbh  352  =  Vism  23,  expW-  at  p.  29. 

Ukkhepaniya  (adj  )  [ukkhepana  -f-  iya,  cp.  BSk.  utksepa- 
niyarj  karma  Divy  329]  referring  to  the  suspension  (of  a 
bhikkhu),  °kainma  act  or  resolution  of  suspension  Vin 
1-49,  53,  98,  143.  168;  11.27,  226,  2 JO,  298:  A  1.99. 

UklSpa  (ukkalapa)  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  ut-kalapayati  to  let  go]  — 
I.  deserted  J  11.275  (ukkalapa  T. ;  vv.  11.  uklapa  & 
uUapa).  —  2.  dirtied,  soiled  Vin  11.154,  208,  222;  Vism 
128;  DhA  III.  1 68  (ukkalapa). 

Ugga'  (adj.)  [Vedic  ugra,  from  uksati,  weak  base  of  vak$ 
as  in  vaksana,  vaksayati  r=  Gr.  irs^u,  Goth,  wahsjan  "to 
wax",  also  Lat.  augeo  &  P.  oja]  mighty,  huge,  strong, 
fierce,  grave,  m.  a  mighty  or  great  person,  noble  lord 
D  I  103;  S  1.51  =  VvA  116  (uggateja  "the  fiery  heat"); 
J  iv.496;  V.452  (°teja);  vi.490  (+ rajaputta,  expld-  with 
etymologising  effort  as  uggata  paiinata  by  C);  Miln  331; 
DhA  11.57  (°tapa);  Sdhp  286  (°danda),  304  (id.).  — 
Cp.  sam".  As  Np.  at   Vism  233  &  J   1.94. 

-putta   a   nobleman,    mighty    lord  S  1. 1 85  ("high  born 
wariior"  trsl.);  J  VI. 353  (^  amacca-putta  C.) ;  Th  I,  1210. 

Ugga^  =  uggamana,  in  arun-ugga  sunrise  Vin  IT.272. 

UggaCChati  [ud  +  gam]  to  rise,  get  up  out  of  (lit.  &  fig.) 
Th  I,  181;  arune  uggacchante  at  sunrise  VvA  75;  Pv 
IV.8;  Vism  43,  ger.  uf^ancbitvaoa  Miln  376.  —  pp. 
uggata  (q.  v.). 

Uggajjati  [ud  -|-  gajjati]  to  shout  out  Nd'  17a. 

Ugga^hatl  [ud  -|-  gfh,  see  gauhati]  to  take  up,  acquire, 
learn  [cp.  BSk.  udgrhnati  in  same  sense,  e.  g.  Divy  18, 
77  etc.]  Sn  912  (uggahananta  =  uggahapanti  ^  uggan- 
hanti  SnA  561);  imper.  ugga^ha  J  11.30  (sippaij)  & 
ugganbahi  Miln  10  (mantani);  ger,  uggayba  Sn  832, 
845;  Nd'  173.  —  Caus.  uggabeti  in  same  meaning  Sdhp 
520;  aor.  uggahesi  Pv  111.5*  (nakkhatta-yogan  =  akari 
PvA  198);  ger.  uggabetva  J  v. 282,  VvA  98  (vipassana- 
kammatthanai));  infin.  uggabetui)  VvA  138  (sippai)  to 
study  a  craft).  —  Caus.  II.  ugganbapeti  to  instruct  J  v. 
217;  VI.353.  —  PP-  uggabita  (q.  v.).  See  also  uggaha- 
yati.  —  A  peculiar  ppr.  med.  is  uggahamana  going  or 
wanting  to  learn  DA  I  32  (cp.  uggahaka). 

Uggata  [pp.  of  uggacchati]  come  out,  risen ;  high,  lofty, 
exalted  J  iv.213  (suriya),  296  Catta),  490;  v.244;  Pv 
IV. I*  ("atta  one  who  has  risen  =  uggata-sabhava  samiddha 
PvA  220);  VvA  217  (^manasa);  DA  1.248;  PvA  68 
(°phasuka  with  ribs  come  out  or  showing,  i.  e.  emaciated, 
for  upphasulika).   Cp.  acc°. 

Uggatta  in  all  Pv.  readings  is  to  be  read  uttatta",  thus 
at  Pv  111.32;  PvA   10,   188, 


Uggatthana 


127 


Uccarita 


Uggatthana  at  J  vi  590  means  a  kind  of  ornament  or 
trinket,  it  should  prob.  be  read  ugghattana  [fr.  gliatteli] 
lit.  "tinkling",  i.  e.  a  bangle. 

Uggama  [fr.  ud-fgam;  Sk.  udgama]  rising  up  Sdhp  594. 

Uggamana  ("na)  (nt.)  [fr.  ud  +  gam]  going  up,  rising; 
rise  (of  sun  &  stars)  D  i.io,  240;  S  11.268  (suriy°);  J 
IV.321  (an°),  38S;  Pv  119^1  (suriy");  DA  1.95  (=  uda- 
yana);  UhA  1.165  (arun");  11.6  (id.);  VvA  326  (oggaman°); 
VvA   109  farun").  Cp.  ugga'^  &  uggama. 

Uggaha  (adj)  (— °)  [fr.  ud  +  gfh,  see  ganhati]  —  i. 
taking  up,  acquiring,  learning  Vism  96  (acariy°),  99  (°pari- 
puccha);  277  (kananalthanassa).  —  2.  noticing,  taking 
notice,  perception  (as  opp.  to  manasikara)  Vism  125,  241  sq. 
neg.  an°  Sn  912  (^ganhati  Nd'  330).  Cp.  dhanuggaha. 

Uggahaoa  (nt.)  [fr.  ugganhati]  learning,  taking  up,  studying 
fvA  3  (sipp°).  As  ugganhana  at  Vism  277. 

Uggahayati  [poetic  form  of  uggahcti  (see  ugganhSti),  but 
according  to  Kern,  Tmv.  s.  v.  representing  Ved.  « dgrbha- 
yati]  to  take  hold  of,  to  take  up  Sn  791  (=  ganhati 
Nd'  91).  —  ger.  uggahaya  Sn  837. 

Uggahlta  [pp.  of  ugganhati]  taken  up,  taken,  acquired  Viu 
1.212;  J  III.I6S  ("sippa,  adj.),  325;  iv.220;  V176;  Vism 
241.  The  metric  form  is  uggahlta  at  Sn  795,  833,  1098; 
Nd'   r75  =  Nd2  152  (^  gahita  paramattha). 

Uggahetar  [n.  ag.  to  ugganhati,  Caus.  uggaheti]  one  who 
takes   up,  acquires  or  learns  A  IV. 196. 

Uggara  [ud  +  gr  or  *gl  to  swallow,  see  gala  &  gilati; 
lit.  to  swallow  up]  spitting  out,  vomiting,  ejection  Vism 
54;  UA  1.41  ;  KhA  61. 

Uggahaka  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  ud  +  gfh,  see  ugganhati]  one  who 
is  eager  to  learn  J  v.148  [cp.  M  Vastu  III. 373  ograhaka 
in  same  context]. 

Uggahamana  see  ugganhati. 

Uggirati'  [Sk.  udgirati,  ud  -|-  gr-;  but  BSk.  udgirati  in 
meaning  to  sing,  chant,  utter,  formation  fr.  gr'^  instead 
of  gf  ,  pres.  grnati;  in  gir.ii]  udgirati  Jtm  31'^''.  —  The 
by-form  uggirati  is  uggilati  with  interchange  of  1  and  r, 
roots  'gr  &  '^gl,  see  gala  &  gilati]  to  vomit  up  ("swallow 
up")  to  spit  out  Ud  14  (uggiritvana);  DA  1,41  (uggarai) 
uggiranto).  Cp.  BSk.  prodglrna  cast  out   Divy   589. 

Uggirati-  [cp.  Sk.  udgurate,  ud  -|-  gur]  to  lift  up,  carry 
Vin  IV.  147  =  DhA  III  50  (talasattikai)  e.vplJ-  by  uccareti); 
J  1. 150  (avudhani);  vi.460,  472.   Cp.  sam°. 

Uggilati  ^  uggirati',  i.  e.  to  spit  out  (opp.  ogilati)  M  1.393  ; 
S  IV. 323;  J   III  529:   Miln   5;  PvA  283. 

Uggiva  (nt.)  [ud  -(-  g'va]  a  neckband  to  hold  a  basket 
hanging  down  J  VI. 562  (uggivaii  c^api  aijsato  =  ai]sakute 
pacchi-lagganakai)  C). 

Ugghaqseti  [ud  -f-  ghfS,  see  ghaqsati']  to  rub  Vin  11.106.  — 
pp.  uggbattha  (q.  v.). 

Ugghatita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  ud  -f-  ghatati;  cp.  BSk.  udghataka 
skilled  Divy  3,  26  and  phrase  at  M  Vastu  111.260  udgha- 
titajfia]  striving,  exerting  oneself;  keen,  eager  in  cpd 
"nnu  of  quick  understanding  A  II.135;  Pug  41;  Nett 
7 — 9,   125;  DA  1. 291. 

Ugghafetl  [ud  +  ghatati]  to  open,  reveal  (?  so  Hardy  in 
Index  to  Nett)  Nett  9;  ugghatiyafi  &  ugghatana  ibid. 

Ugghatta  (Ugghattha?)  [should  be  pp.  of  ugghaijsati  = 
Sk.  udghrsta,  see  ghaijsati',  but  taken  by  Bdhgh.  either 
as  pp.  of  or  an  adj.  der.  fj.  ghatt,  sec  ghatlcti]  knocked, 
crushed,    rubbed    against,   only   in    phrase   ughatta-pada 


foot-sore  Sn  980  (^maggakkamanena  ghatla-padatala  etc. 
SnA  582);  J  IV.20  (tth;  expl't-  by  unha-valukaya  ghatta- 
pada);  v. 69  (^  raj'okinna-pada  C.  not  to  the  point). 

Uggharati  [«d  +  ksar]  to  ooze  Th  i,  394  =  DhA  111.117. 

Ugghatana  (nt.  ?)  [fr.  ugghatcti]  that  which  cxjn  be  removed, 
in  °kitika  a  curtain  to  be  drawn  aside  Viu  II.  153  (cp.  Vin 
Tests  111.174,  176).  Ch  s.  V.  gives  "rope  &  bucket  of  a 
well"  as  meaning  (kavataij  anugghateti).   Cp.  ugghatana. 

Ugghatita  [pp.  of  ugghateti]  opened  Miln  55;  DhA  1.134. 

Ugghafeti  [for  ugghalteti,  ud  4"  gl"-att  but  BSk.  udghatayati 
Divy  130]  to  remove,  take  away,  unfasten,  abolish,  put 
an  end  to  Vin  11.148  (lalani),  208  (ghatikai));  IV. 37 ;  J 
11.31;  VI. 68;  Miln  140  (bhava-palisandhiq),  371;  Vism 
374.  —  Caus.  II.  ugghatapeti  to  have  opened  J  v.381. 

Ugghata  [ud  -)-  ghata]  shaking,  jolting;  jolt,  jerk  Vin  11. 
276  (yan°);  J  vi.253  (an°);   DhA  III.283  (yan°). 

Ugghati  (f.)  [fr.  ud  4-  ghata]  —  i.  shaking,  shock  VvA 
36.  —  2.  striking,  conquering;  victory,  combd  with  nighati 
Sn  82S  ;  Nd'  167  ;  SnA  541  ;  Nett  no  (T.  reads  ugghata"). 

Ugghatita  [pp.  of  ugghateti,  denom.  fr.  udghata]  struck, 
killed  A  111.68.. 

UgghOSana  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  ugghoseti,  cp.  ghosanii]  procla- 
mation  DA  1. 310. 

Ugghoseti  [ud  +  ghoseti]  to  shout  out,  announce,  proclaim 
j   1.75;   Dh.A  11.94;  PvA   127. 

UCCa  (adj.)  [For  udya,  adj.  formation  from  prep,  ud  above, 
up]  high  (opp.  avaca  low)  D  1. 194;  M  II. 213;  A  V.82 
(°thaniyai)  nice  thane  thapeti  puts  on  a  low  place  which 
ought  to  be  placed  high);  Pv  IV.7*  (uccai)  paggayha 
lifting  high  up  =  uccataraq  katva  Pv.\  265);  Pug  52, 
58;  D.^  1.135;    PvA   176. 

-avaca  high  and  low,  various,  manifold  Vin  1.70,  203 ; 
J  IV. 1 15,  363  (=  mahaggha-samaggha  C.  p.  366);  Sn 
703,  714,  792,  959;  Dh  83;  Nd'_93,  467;  Vv  12'  (=r 
vividha  VvA  60);  31'.  -kullnata  high  birth  A  111.48 
(cp.    ucca"). 

Uccaka  (adj.)  [fr.  ucca]  high  Vin  11.149  (asandika  a  kind 
of  high  chair). 

Uccatta  (nt.)  [fr.   ucca  =;  Sk.   uccatvai)]  height  J  111.318. 

UCCaya  [fr.  ud  -\-  ci,  see  cinati ;  Sk.  uecaya]  heaping  up, 
heap,  pile,  accumulation  Dh  115,  191,  192;  Vv  47"; 
82'  (=  cetiya  \'v.\  321);  EhA  III. 5,  9;  DhsA  41  (pa- 
passa).  -siluccaya  a  mountain  Th  i,  692;  J  1.29  (v.209); 
VI. 272,  278;    Davs  T.63. 

Ucca  (° — )  (adv.)  [cp.  Sk.  ucca,  iiistr.  sg.  of  uccaq,  cp. 
pasca  behind,  as  well  as  uccaih  instr.  pi.  —  In  BSk.  we 
find  ucca°  (uccakullna  A  v.  S  ill.  117)  as  well  as  uccai] 
(uccaqgama  Divy  476).  It  is  in  all  cases  restricted  to 
cpds.]  high  (lit.  &  fig.),  raised,  in  foil.  cpds. 

-kaneruka  a  tall  female  elephant  M  1.178.  -kalarika 
id.  M  1.178  (v.  1.  "kalarika  to  be  preferred),  -kula  a  high, 
noble  family  Pv  lU.i'"  (=  ucca  khattiya-kul-adino  l'v.\ 
176).  -kulinata  birth  in  a  high-class  family,  high  rank 
M  111.37;  VvA  32.  -sadda  a  loud  noise  D  1.143,  178; 
A  111.30.  -sayana  a  high  bed  (-f-  mahasayana)  Via  I. 
192;  D  1.5,  7;  cp.  DA  1.78. 

UCCSra  [LM  4-  car]  discharge,  excrement,  faeces  Vin  ill. 36 
Cq  gacchati  to  go  to  stool);  iv.265,  266  (uccaro  nama 
gutho  vuccati);  DhA  11.56  (°karana  defecation);  uccara- 
passava  faeces  &  urine  D  1.70;  M  1.83;  J  1.5;  11.19. 

Uccarana    (f.)    [fr.  uccareti]  lifting  up,  raising  Vin  III. 121. 

Uccarita  [pp.  of  uccareti]  —  I.  uttered,  let  out  PvA  280 
(akkharani).  —  2.  lifted,  raised  ThA  255. 


Uccareti 

Uccareti  [ud  +  careti,  Caus.  of  car]  to  lift  up,  raise  aloft 
Vin  111.81;  iv.i47  =  DliA  111.50;  M  1.135.  —  PP-  ucca- 
rita  (q.  v.). 

Uccalinga  [etym.?]  a  maw-worm   Vin  111.38,  112;  J  H.146. 

Uccinati  [ud  4-  cinati]  to  select,  choose,  search,  gather, 
pick  out  or  up  Vin  1.73;  11.285  i<^°'-  uccini);  J  IV.9; 
Pv  III. 2  *  (nantake  =  gavesana-vasena  gahetvana  PvA 
185);  Dpvs  IV. 2. 

Ucchanga  [Sk.  utsanga,  ts  >  cch  like  Sk.  utsahate  >  BSk. 
ucchaliate  see  ussahati]  the  hip,  the  lap  Vin  I.225 ;  M  I. 
366;  A  1. 1 30  (°paiiiia);  J  1.5,  308;  11.412;  111.22;  IV.38, 
151;   r'ug  31;  Vism  279;  DhA  11.72. 

Ucchadana  (at.)  [ut  +  sad,  Caus.  of  sad,  sidati,  cp.  ussada] 
rubbing  the  limbs,  anointing  the  body  with  perfumes 
shampooing  D  1.7,  76;  at  the  latter  passage  in  comb"- 
anicc^-dhamma,  of  the  body,  meaning  "erosion,  decay", 
and  comb<i-  with  parimaddana  abrasion  (see  about  detail 
of  meaning  Dhi/.  1.87);  thus  in  same  formula  at  M  I. 
500;  S  IV. 83;  J  1. 146  &  passim;  A  1.62;  11.70  (-(-  naha- 
pana);  IV. 54,  3S6;  It  III;  Tli  2,  89  (nahapan°);  Miln 
241  (°paiima(idana)  315   (+  nahapana);   DA  1.S8. 

UCChadeti  [fr.  ut  -|-  sad,  see  ucchadana]  to  rub  the  body 
with  perfumes  J  VI.29S;  Miln  241  (+ parimaddati  naha- 
peli):   DA  1.88. 

Ucchittha  [pp.  of  ud  -f  sis]  left,  left  over,  rejected,  thrown 
out;  impure,  vile  Vin  11.115  ("odakai]);  iv.266  (id.);  J 
11.83  (bhattai]  ucchitthar)  akatva),  126  (°nadi  impure;  also 
itthi  outcast),  363;  iv.386  ("ij  pindaij),  388;  vi.508;  Miln 
315;  DhA  1.52;  11.85;  ni.2o8;  PvA  80  (=  chaddita),  {73 
("bhattar)).  At  J  iv.433  read  ucch°  for  uccittha.  -an° 
not  touched  or  thrown  away  (of  food)  J  111.257;  Dh..\ 
II. 3.  —  See  also  uttittha  &  uccbepaka. 

Ucchitthaka  (fr.  ucchittha)  =  ucchittha  J  IV.386;  vi.63,  509. 

UCChindati  [ud  -f-  chid,  see  chindati]  to  break  up,  destroy, 
annihilate  S  v. 432  (bhavatanhai]);  A  IV.  17  (fut  ucche- 
cchami  to  be  read  with  v.  1.  for  T.  ucchejjissami);  Sn  2 
(pret.  udacchida),  208  (ger.  ucchijja);  J  v.383;  Dh  285. — 
Pass,  ucchijjafi  to  be  destroyed  or  annihilated,  to  cease 
to  exist  S  IV. 309;  J  V.242,  467;  Miln  192;  PvA  63,  130 
(=  na  pavattati),  253  (=  natthi).  — pp.  ucchinna  (q.  v.). 

Ucchinna    [pp.    of   ucchindati]    broken  up,  destroyed  S  III. 

10;   A   V.32;  Sn   746.   Cp.  sam". 

Ucchu  [Sk.  cp.  Vedic  Np.  Iksvaku  fr.  iksu]  sugar-cane  Vin 
IV.35;  A  III. 76;  IV. 279;  Miln  46;  DhA  iv.199  ("unaq 
yanta  sugar-cane  mill),  PvA  257,   260;  VvA    124. 

-agga  (ucch°)  top  of  s.  c.  Vism  172.  -khapdika  a 
bit  of  sugar-cane  Vv  33-I'.  -khadana  eating  s.c.  Vism  70. 
-khetta  sugar-cane  field  J  1.339;  \'v.\  256.  -ganthika  a 
kind  of  sugar-cane.  Batatas  Paniculata  J  1.339;  vi.114  (so 
read  for  "ghatika).  -pala  watchman  of  s.-c.  VvA  256. 
-pilana,  cane-pressing,  Asl.  274.  -puta  sugar-cane  basket 
J  IV. 363.  -bija  seed  of  s.-c.  A  1.32;  v.213.  -yanfra  a 
sugar-mill  J  1.339.  -rasa  s.-c.  juice  Vin  1.246;  Vism  489; 
VvA   180.    -vata,  Asl.  274.    -sala,  Asl.  274. 

Uccheda  [fr.  ud  +  chid,  chind,  see  ucchindati  &  cp.  cheda] 
breaking  up,  disintegration,  perishing  (of  the  soul)  Vin 
111.2  (either  after  this  life,  or  after  kamadeva  life,  or  after 
brahmadeva  life)  D  1.34,  55;  S  iv.323;  Nd'  324;  Miln 
413;  Nett  95,   112,   160;  DA  1.120. 

-ditthi  the  doctrine  of  the  annihilation  (of  the  soul), 
as  opp.  to  sassata-  or  atta-ditthi  ([the  continuance  of  the 
soul  after  death)  S  11.20;  111.99,  no  sq  ;  Ps  1. 150,  158; 
Ndi  248  (opp.  sassati^);  Dhs  1317:  N'ett  40,  127;  SnA 
523  (opp.  atta°).  -vada  (adj.)  one  who  professes  the 
doctrine  of  annihilation  (ucchedaditthi)  Vin  1.235;  '"-Z; 
I'  1-34,  55;  S  n.i8;  iv.401;  A  iv.174,  182  sq.;  Nd' 
282;  Pug  38.    -vadin  =  °vada  Nett  ni;  J  v.244. 


128  Ujjava 


Ucchedana  (adj.)  [fr.  ud  -f  chid]  cutting  off,  destroying ; 
f.  ^ani  J  V.  16  (sura). 

UCChedin  (adj.)  an  adherent  of  the   ucchedavada  J  v.241. 

Ucchepaka  (nt.)  [=  ucchitthaka  in  sense  of  ucchittha- 
bhatta]  leavings  of  food  M  11.7  (v.  1.  uccepaka  with  cc 
for  cch  as  uccittha:  ucchittha).  The  passage  is  to  be 
read  ucchepake  va  te  rata.  A  diff.  connotation  would  be 
implied  by  taking  ucchepaka  =  uiicha,  as  Neumann  does 
(Majjhima  trsl.^  11.682). 

UJU  &  UjjU  (adj.)  [Vedic  rju,  also  rjyati,  irajyate  to  stretch 
out:  cp.  Gr.  opc-yio  to  stretch;  Lat.  rego  to  govern;  Goth. 
ufrakjan  to  straighten  up;  Ohg.  recchen  =3  Ger.  recken  = 
E.  reach;  Oir.  ren  span.  See  also  P.  ajjava]  straight, 
direct;  straightforward,  honest,  upright  D  III. 150  [T.  ujja), 
352  (do.)  422,  550;  VP  18^  (=  sabba-jimha-vanka-kutila- 
bhav^apagama-hetutaya  u.  Vv.A  96);  Pug  59;  Vbh  244 
(ujuij  kayai)  panidhaya);  Vism  219  (uju  avanka  akutila); 
D.\  1. 210  (id.);  KhA  236;  DhA  1.288  (ciltai]  ujuij  aku- 
tilaq  nibbisevanaq  karoti);  VvA  281  (°koti-vanka);  PvA 
123  (an°). 

-angin  ^ujjangin)  having  straight  limbs,  neg.  an°  not 
having  .straight  limbs,  i.  e.  pliable,  skilful,  nimble,  grace- 
ful J  V.40  (=  kaiicana-sannibha-sarira  C);  vi.500  (T. 
anuccangin  =  anindita-agarahiiangin  C).  -gata  walking 
straight,  of  upright  life  M  1.46;  A  111.285  sq.  ("citta); 
V.290  sq.;  Sn  350  (ujju°),  477  (id.);  Dh  108  (ujju°,  see 
DhA  11.234  for  interpretation),  -gamin,  neg.  an°  going 
crooked,  a  snake  J  iv.330.  -cittata  straightness,  unwield- 
iness  of  heart  Vbh  350.  -ditthita  the  fact  of  having  a 
straightforward  view  or  theory  (of  life)  Miln  257.  -pati- 
panna  living  uprightly  D  1. 192:  Siv.304;  v.343;  Vism  219. 
-magga  the  straight  road  D  1.235  ;  Vin  v.  149;  It  104;  J  1.344; 
YI.252;  DhA  11.192.  -bhava  straightness,  uprightness  Sn.'V 
292,  317;  PvA  51.  -bhuta  straight,  upright  S  i.ioo,  170; 
11.279;  V.384,  404;  A  11.57;  1V.292;  J  1.94;  V.293  (a°°); 
Vv  34'^3  (see  VvA  155);  Pv  l.io'''  (=  citta-jimha-vanka- 
kutila-bhava-karanai]  kilesanaij  abhavena  ujubhavappatta 
PvA  51).  -var)sa  straight  lineage,  direct  descendency  J 
V.251.  -vata  a  soft  wind  Miln  283.  -vipaccanlka  in  direct 
opposition  D  i.i;  M  1.402;  DA  1.38. 

Ujuka  &  Ujjuka  (adj.)  [uju  +  ka]  straight,  direct,  upright 
M  1. 1 24;  S  1.33  (ujuko  so  maggo,  the  road  to  Nibbana), 
260  (citta);  IV. 298;  V.l43i  '65;  J  1. 163;  v. 297  (opp. 
khujja);  DhA  1. 18  (°magga);  Sdhp  321.  -anujjuka  crooked, 
not  straight  S  iv.299;  J   111.3 18. 

Ujukata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  ujuka]  straightness,  rectitude  Dhs 
50,   51   (kayassa,  cittassa);  Vism  436  sq. 

Ujuta  (f.)  [abstr.  of  uju]  straight(forward)ness ,  rectitude 
Dhs  50,   51. 

Ujjagghati  [ud  -f-  jagghati]  to  laugh  at,  deride,  mock,  make 
fun  of  Vin  111.128;  Th  2,  74  (spelt  jjh  =  hasati  ThA 
78);  A  III. 91  (ujjh°,  V.  1.  ujj")  =  Pug  67  (=  paniq  paha- 
ritva  mahahasitai}  hasati  Pug  A  249). 

Ujjangala  [ud  -j-  jangala]  hard,  barren  soil ;  a  very  sandy 
and  deserted  place  D  11.146  (°nagaraka,  Irsl.  "town  in 
the  midst  of  a  jungle",  cp.  Dial.  11.161);  J  1. 391;  Vv 
855  (=  ukkarjsena  jangala  i.e.  exceedingly  dusty  or  sandy, 
dry);  Pv  II. 9"'  (spelt  ujjhangala,  expld-  by  ativiya-thaddha- 
bhumibhaga  at  PvA  139);  Vism  107.  Also  in  BSk.  ujjan- 
gala, e.g.  M  Vastu  11.207. 

Ujjala  (adj.)  [ud  +  jval,  see  jalati]  blazing,  flashing;  bright, 
beautiful  J   1.220;   Davs  11.63. 

Ujjalati  [ud  -f  jalati,  jval]  to  blaze  up,  shine  forth  Vin 
1.31;  VvA  161  (f  jotati).  —  Caus.  ujjaleti  to  make 
shine,  to  kindle  Vin  1.31  ;  Miln  259;  Vism  428;  ThA 
69  (Ap.  V.14,  read  dipan  ujjalayiq);   VvA  51  (padipaq). 

Ujjava  (adj.)  [ud  -f  Java]  "running  up",  in  cpd.  ujjav-ujjava 
a  certain   term  in  the  art  of  spinning  or  weaving  Vin  IV. 


Ujjava 


129 


Utthana 


300,   expl<i-   by    "yattakaq    patthena    (patthana?)  ancitai) 
hoti  tasmi  takkamhi  vedhite". 

Ujjavati  [ud  -f  javati]   to  go  up-stream  Vin  II. 301. 

Ujjavanlkaya  instr.  fem.  of  ujjavanaka  used  as  adv.  [ud  -f- 
javanaka,  q.  v.]  up-stream,  lit  "running  up"  Vin  11.290; 
IV.65  (in  expl"-  of  uddhaqgamin,  opp.  ojavanikaya). 

Ujjahati  [ud  -|-  jahati]  to  give  up,  let  go ;  imper.  ujjaha 
S  1.188;  Th   2,   19;  Sn  342. 

Ujju  &  Ujjuka  see  uju  &  ujuka. 

UjjOta  [ud  +  *jot  of  jotati,  Sk.  u  dyotate]  light,  lustre  J 
1.183  (°kara);  Miln  321. 

Ujjotita  [pp.  of  ujjoteti,  ud  -\-  joteti]  illumined  Davs  v. 53. 

l^jjhaggatl  see  ujjagghati. 

Ujjhaggika  (f-)  [fr-  ujjagghati,  spelling  varies]  loud  laughter 
Vin  11.213,  cp.  IV.187. 

Ujjhati  [Sk.  ujjhati,  ujjh]  —  1.  to  forsake,  leave,  give  up 
J  VI. 138;  Davs  ir.86.  —  2.  to  sweep  or  brush  away  J 
VI.296.  —  pp.  ujjhita  (q.  v.). 

Ujjhattl  (f.)  [fr.  ud  +  jhayati' ,  corresponding  to  a  Sk. 
*ud-dhySti]  irritation,  discontent  A  iv.223,  467  (v.  1.  ujj°); 
cp.  ujjhana. 

UjjhSna  (nt.)  [ud  +  jhana'  or  jhana'''?]  —  I.  taking  offence, 
captiousness  Dh  253  (=  paresar)  randha-gavesitaya  DhA 
•"•377);  Milti  352  (an°-bahula).  —  2.  complaining,  wailing 
J   IV.287. 

-saiiBin,  -saiinika  irritable  .S  1.23;  Th  i,  958;  Vin  11.214, 
cp.   IV.  194;  Dpvs  II. 6;   DhA  111.376  ('saiinita  irritability). 

Ujjhapana  (nt.)  [fr.  ud  4-  jhayati'  or  jhayati^  to  burn,  to 
which  jhapeti  to  bring  to  ruin  etc.?  cp.  ujjhana]  stirring 
up,  provoking  J  v. 91   (devat"),  94  (°kamma). 

Ujjhapanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  ujjhapana]  one  who  stirs  up  an- 
other to  discontent  Vin  iv.38. 

UJjhapeti  [Caus.  of  ujjhSyati]  to  harass,  vex,  irritate  M  i. 
126;  S  1.209  ("give  occasion  for  offence");  Vin  IV. 38 
(cp.  p.  356);  J  v. 286;  Pv.\  266. 

UjjhSyati  [ud  -{-  jhayati'  or  perhaps  more  likely  jhayati* 
to  burn,  fig.  to  be  consumed.  According  to  Miiller  P.  G. 
pp.  12  &  42  =  Sk.  ava-dhya,  but  that  is  doubtful 
phonetically  as  well  as  semantically]  to  be  irritated,  to 
be  annoyed  or  offended,  to  get  angry,  grumble;  often  in 
phrase  ujjbayati  khiyati  vipaceti  expressing  great  an- 
noyance Vin  1.53,  62,  73;  11.207;  IV.226;  S  1232  ^c 
passim.  —  S  1.232  (ma  ujjhayiltha);  J  11.15;  DhA  I1.20; 
aor.  ujjhayi  J  1.475;  DhA  11.88,  inf.  ujjhatui)  J  11.355.  — 
Caus.  ujjbapeti  (q.  v.). 

Ujjhita  [pp.  of  ujjhati]  destitute ,  forsaken ;  thrown  out, 
cist  away  M  1.296  (-j- avakkhitta);  Th  I,  315  (itthi);  2, 
386  (cp.  ThA  256  vatakkhitto  viya  yo  koci  dahano); 
Dh  58  (=  chaddita  of  sweepings  DhA  1.445);  J  '"•499  j 
V.302;  VI. 51. 

UfiCha  &  Uiicha  (f.)  [Sk.  uficha  &  unchana,  to  uiich  Neu- 
mann's elym.  uficha  =  E.  ounce,  Ger.  unze  (Majjhima 
trsl.'  U.682)  is  incorrect,  see  Walde  La/.  IVtb.  under 
uncia]  anything  gathered  for  sustenance,  gleaning  S  II. 
281;  A  1.36;  111.66  sq.,  104;  Vin  111.87;  Sn  977;  Th  2, 
329,  349;  J  "1389;  ■V.23,  28,  434,  471  (°ya,  dat.  = 
phalJphaPatthaya  C);   Th.\  235,  242.   Cp.  samunchaka. 

-cariya  wandering  for,  or  on  search  foz  gleaning,  J 
11.272;  111.37,  515;  V.3;  DA  1.270;  VvA  103;  ThA  208. 
-carika  (adj.)  going  about  after  gleanings,  one  of  8  kinds 
of  tapasa  SnA  295  (cp.  DA  1.270,  271).  -patta  the 
gleaning-bowl ,    in    phrase    unchapattSgate    rato    "fond    of 


that  which  has  come  into  the  gl.  b."  Th  I,  155  =  Pv 
IV.7-'  (=  urichena  bhikkhacarena  laddhe  pattagate  ihare 
rato  PvA  265 ;  trsl^.  in  Psalms  of  Hrethren  "contented 
with  whatever  fills  the  bowl"),  aiinal" ,  marked  off  as 
discarded  (goods)  S  11. 281,  so  S  A. 

Unchati   [fr.   unch]    to   gather  for  sustenance,  seek  (alms), 
glean   Vism  60  (=  gavesati). 


unna- 


Utlria   (f )    [=  avanna  (?)    from  ava  +  jiia,  or  after 
tabba?]  contempt  Vin  iv.241  ;  Vbh  353  sq.  (att"). 

Ufinatabba  (adj.)  [grd.  fr.  ava -f  jfig  (?)]  to  be  despised, 
contemptible,  only  in  stock-phrase  "daharo  na  unnatabbo 
na  paribhotabbo"  S  1.69;  Sn  p.  93;  SnA  424  (==  na 
avajanitabbo,  na  nlcaij  katva  janitabbo  ti).  In  same  con- 
nection at  J  v. 63  ma  nai)  dahaio  [ti]  unflSsi  (v.  1.  maii- 
fiasi)  apucchitvana  (v.  1.  a°). 

Uttitva  at  Vin  11.131  is  doubtful  reading  (see  p.  318,  v.  1. 
uddhetva),  and  should  perhaps  be  read  uddetva  (= 
oddetva,  see  uddeti),  meaning  ^putting  into  a  sling,  tying 
or  binding  up". 

Uttcpaka  one  who  scares  away  (or  catches?)  crows  (kak") 
Vin  1.79  (vv.  11.  utthe",  udde°,  ude°).  See  remarks  on 
uttepeti. 

Uttepeti  in  phrase  kake  u.  "to  scare  crows  away"  (or  to 
catch  them  in  snares?)  at  Vin  1.79.  Reading  doubtful  & 
should  probably  be  read  uddepeti  (?  Caus.  of  uddeti  =: 
oddeti,  or  of  uddeti  to  make  fly  away).  The  vv.  11.  given 
to  this  passage  are  utteceti,  upatthapeti,  uddoyeti.  See 
also  uttepaka. 

Utthapana  see  vo°. 

Utthahati  &  Ufthati  [ud  -f  stha  see  titthati  &  uttitthati] 

to  rise,  stand  up,  get  up,  to  arise,  to  be  produced,  to 
rouse  or  exert  oneself,  to  be  active,  pres.  utthahati  Pug 
51.  —  pot.  utthaheyya  S  1.217;  ^'^  imper,  uttitthe  Dh 
168  (expld-  by  uttitthitva  paresaq  gharadvSre  thatva  DhA 
III. 165,  cp.  Vin  Texts  1. 152).  —  imper.  2"^  pi.  uttha- 
halha  Sn  331;  2nd  sg.  utthehi  Pv  11.6';  J  IV.433.  —  ppr. 
utthabanto  M  1.86;  S  1.217;  J  1-476.  —  aor.  utthahi 
j'1.117;  PvA  75.  —  ger.  utthabitva  PvA  4,  43,  55, 
152,  &  utthaya  Sn  401.  —  inf.  utthatuq  J  1.187.  — 
Nolf.  When  utth"  follows  a  word  ending  in  a  vowel, 
and  without  a  pause  in  the  sense,  a  V  is  generally  pre- 
fixed for  euphony,  e.  g.  gabbho  vutthasi  an  embryo  was 
produced  or  arose  Vin  II. 278;  asana  vutthaya  arising  from 
his  seat,  Vism  126.  See  also  under  vutthahati.  —  pp. 
ut^hita;  Caus.  utthapeti.  —  Cp.  pariyutthati. 

Utthahana  [ppr-  of  utthahati]  exerting  oneself,  rousing  one- 
self; an"  sluggish,  lazy  Dh  280  (=  aySyamanto  DhA  III. 
409);  cp.  anutthahai)  S  1.217. 

Utthatar  [u.  ag.  of  ut  -|-  §thBi  ^"^^  utthahati]  one  who  gets 
up  or  rouses  himself,  one  who  shows  energy  S  1.214;  A 
IV.285,  288,  322;  Sn  187;  J  VI. 297.  -an°  one  who  is 
without  energy  S  1.217;  Sn  96. 

Utthana  (nt.)  [fr.  ut  +  §tha]  —  l-  rising,  rise,  getting 
up,  standing  (opp.  sayana  &  nisidana  lying  or  sitting 
down)  D  11.134  (siha-seyyaq  kappesi  utthana-safinai]  ma- 
nasikaritva);  Dh  280  (°kala);  J  1. 392  (an°-seyya  a  bed 
from  which  one  cannot  get  up);  Vism  73  (arun-utthana- 
vela  time  of  sunrise)  DhA  1. 17.  —  2.  rise,  origin,  occasion 
or  opportunity  for;  as  adj.  ( — °)  producing  J  i.47(kapp°); 
VI.459;  Miln  326  (dhanii°  khettar)  atthi).  —  3.  "rousing", 
exertion,  energy,  zeal,  activity,  manly  vigour,  industry, 
often  syn.  with  viriya  M  1.86;  A  1.94;  11.135  (°phala); 
111.45  ("viriya),  311  ;  IV. 281  (°sampada);  It  66  ("adhigatay 
dhanaq  earned  by  industry);  Pv  IV. 32*;  Pug  51  (°phala); 
Miln  344,  416;  ThA  267  ("viriya);  PvA  129  (+ viriya). 
-an°  want  of  energy,  sluggishness  A  iv.195;  Dh  241. — 
Noll.  The  form  vutthana  appears  for  utth"  after  a  vowel 


Utthana 


•30 


Utu 


under  the  same  condilions  as  vutthahati  for  utthahali 
(q.  V.)  gabbha-vutthanay  J  1. 114.  See  also  vutth",  and 
cp.  pariy". 

Utthanaka  (— ")  (adj.)  [fr.  utthana]  —  I.  giving  rise  to 
yielding  (revenue),  producing  J  1.377,  420  (satasahass°):  III. 
229  (id.);  V.44  (ii).  Cp.  utthayika.  —  2.  energetic  J  vi.246. 

UtthSnavant  (adj.)  [utthana  -\-  vant]  strenuous,  active  Dh  24. 

Utthapeti  [Cans.  II.  of  utthahati]  —  I.  to  make  rise  only 
in  phrase  arunar]  (suriyaij)  u.  to  let  the  sun  rise,  i.  e. 
wait  for  sunrise  or  to  go  on  till  sunrise  J  13 tS;  vi.330; 
Vism  71,  73  (arunci)).  —  2.  to  raise  J  vi.32  (pathavii]). — 
3.  to  fit  up  J  VI. 445  (navai)).  —  4.  to  exalt,  praise  DA 
1.256.  —  5.  to  turn  a  person  out  DhA  iv.69.  —  See 
also  vut^hapeti. 

Utthayaka  (adj.)  [adj.  formation  fr.  ulthaya,  gcr.  of  uttha- 
hati] "getting-up-ish",  i.  e.  ready  to  get  up,  quick,  alert, 
active,  industrious;  f.  °ika  Th  2,  413  (=^  utthana-viriya- 
sampanna  ThA   267 ;  v.  1.  utthahika). 

Utthayika  (adj.)  [=;  utthanaka]  yielding,  producing  J  11.403 
(satasahass'). 

Utthayin  (adj.)  [adj.  form.  fr.  utthaya,  cp.  utthayaka]  get- 
ting up  D  1.60  (pubb°  -)-  paccha-nipatin  rising  early  & 
lying  down  late). 

Utthahaka  (adj.)  [for  utthayaka  after  analogy  of  gahaka 
etc.]  =  utthayaka  J  v.448;  f.  °ika  A  in. 38  (v.  1.  °ayika); 
IV.266  sq. 

Utthita  [pp.  of  utthahati]  —  I.  risen,  got  up  Pv  IL<)*' 
(kal°);  Vism  73.  —  2.  arisen,  produced  J  136;  Miln 
155.  —  3.  striving,  exerting  oneself,  active  J  11.61;  Dh 
168;  Miln  213.  -an°  S  11.264;  1*5  1.172.  —  Cp.  pariy". — 
Noie.  The  form  is  vutthita  when  following  upon  a  vowel 
see  yutthita  &  utthahati,  e.  g.  patisallana  vutthito  arisen 
from  the  seclusion  D  11.9:  pato  vutthito  risen  eaily 
PvA   128. 

U(}ljlayhana  (nt.)  [fr.  uddayhati,  see  uJdahati]  burning  up, 
conflagration  Pug  13  (°vela  =  jhsyana-kalo  Pug  A  187); 
KhA   181  (T.  uddahanavela  v.  1.  preferable  uddayh"). 

U(J()ahatl  [ud  -|-  dahati]  to  burn  up  (intrs.)  Kh.\  181 
(uddaheyya  with  v.  1.  uddayheyya,  the  latter  preferable). 
Usually  in  Pass,  uddayhati  to  be  burnt,  to  burn  up 
(intrs.)  S  111.149,  '5°  {v-i-  for  dayhati);  J  111.22  (uday- 
hate);  v.  194.  fut.  uddayhissati  J   1.48. 

U441tA  [PP-  °f  uddeti'^]  ensnared  (?),  bound,  tied  up  S  1.40  (= 
tanhaya  ullanghita  C. ;  trsld-  "the  world  is  all  strung  up"). 

U(J<jeti'  [ud  -f  deti  to  fly.  The  etym.  is  doubtful,  Muller 
P.  Gr.  99  identifies  uddeti'  &  uddeti^  both  as  causatives 
to  (Ji.  Of  uddeti^  two  forms  exist,  udd°  &  odd°,  the  lat- 
ter of  which  may  be  a  variant  of  the  former,  but  with 
specialisation  of  meaning  ("lay  snares"),  it  may  be  a  cpd. 
with  ava"  instead  of  ud°.  It  is  extremely  doubtful  whether 
uddeti-  belongs  here,  we  should  rather  separate  it  &  refer 
it  to  another  root,  probably  li,  layate  (as  in  alllna,  nili- 
yati  etc.),  to  stick  to,  adhere,  fasten  etc.  The  change 
1  >  d  is  a  freq.  Pali  phenomenon.  Another  Cans.  II.  of 
the  same  root  (4l?)  is  uttepeti]  to  fly  up  M  1.364  (kako 
mar]sapesir|  adaya  uddayeyya;  vv.  11.  ubbadaheyya,  uyya, 
dayeyya);  J   v.256,  368,  417. 

U(jl(jeti'  [see  discussion  under  uddeti']  (a)  to  bind  up,  tie 
up  to,  siring  up  Vin  11.13 1  (so  read  for  uttitva,  v.  1. 
uddhetva).  —  (b)  to  throw  away,  reject  PvA  256  (-f- 
chaddayami  gloss).  —  pp.  uddita. 

U(J4ha  ( — ')  (num.  ord.)  [the  apocope  form  of  catuttha  = 
uttha,  dialectically  reduced  to  uddha  under  the  influence 
of  the  preceding  addha]  the  fourth,  only  in  cpd.  addh- 
uddha  "half  of  the  fourth  unit",  i.  e.  three  &  a  half'(cp. 


diyaddha   i|  and  addha-teyya  2J)  J   V.417  sq.  ("ani  itthi- 
sahassani);   Mhvs  X11.53. 

Unna  (nt.)  i:  Uona  (f.)  [Sk.  urna  &  urna;  Sat.  lana  wool; 
tioth.  wuUa;  Ohg.  woUa  =  E.  wool;  Lilh.  vilna;  Cymr. 
gwlan  (:=  E.  flannel);  Gr.  Ai)»oc,  also  0SA05  =  Lat.  vellus 
(fleece)  =  Ags.  wil-mod]  —  i.  wool  A  111.37  =:  iv.265 
(-)-  kappasa  cotton);  J  U.147;  SnA  263  (patl').  —  2.  hair 
between  the  eyebrows  Sn  1022,  &  in  stock  phrase,  des- 
cribing one  of  the  32  signs  of  a  Mahapurisa,  bhamuk'an- 
tare  jata  unna  ocata  etc.  D  11.18  =:  111.144  ^  170  =  SnA 
285.  Also  at   Vism  552  in  jati-unnaya. 

-ja  in  unnaja  mukha  J  VI. 218,  meaning  "rounded, 
swelling"?  (C.  expls.  by  kaficah'adaso  viya  paripunnar| 
mukhai]).  -nabhi  (either  unna°  or  unna,  cp.  Vedic  urna- 
vabhi,  urna  -j-  vabhi  from  Idg.  'ucbh  to  weave  as  in 
Lat.  vespa  =  wasp,  of  which  shorter  root  in  Sk.  va)  a 
spider,  lit.  "wool-  i.  e.  thre.id-weaver",  only  in  comb°- 
with  sarabu  &  musika  at  Vin  11.110=:  A  11.73=)  "-'47 
(=r  makkataka  C). 

Unnata  (adj.)  [pp.  of  unnamati,  Sk.  unnata]  raised,  high, 
fig.  haughty  (opp.  onata)  A  11.86;  Sn  702  (an°  care  = 
uddhaccaij  n'apajjeyya  SnA  492);  Pug  52  (=  ucca  uggata 
Pug  A  229).  Cp.  unnata. 

U^qatl  (f.)  [fr.  unnamati]  haughtiness  Sn  830;  Md'  158, 
17*0;  Dhs  II 16,  1233.  Cp.  unnati. 

U^nama  [fr.  unnamati]  loftiness,  height,  haughtiness  Dhs 
1 116,  1233.  Cp.  unnama. 

Urinatnati  [ud  -j-  nam]  to  rise  up,  to  be  raised,  to  straighten 
up,  to  be  haughty  or  conceited  Sn  366,  829,  92S ;  Nd' 
169;  J  VI. 346  inf.  unnametave  Sn  206.  Cp.  unnamati, 

Unili  (f)  [Sk.  aurni  fr.  aurna  woollen,  der.  of  iirna]  a 
woollen  dress   Vin  11.108. 

U^a  (adj.-n.)  [adj.  usna  f.  to  osati  to  burn,  pp.  usta  burnt, 
Sk.  usna  =  Lat.  ustus;  cp.  Gr.  iba,  Lat.  uro  to  burn, 
Ags.  ysla  glowing  cinders,  Lith.  usnis  nettle]  hot,  as  adj. 
only  in  phrase  unharj  lohitaq  chaddeti  to  spill  hot 
blood,  i.e.  to  kill  oneself  DhA  195;  otherwise  in  cpds. ; 
abs.  only  as  nt.  "heat"  &  always  in  contrast  to  sltaq 
"cold"  Vin  11.117  (sltena  pi  unhena  pi);  D  11.15  (opp- 
sita);  M  1.85;  A  1.145^  I70  =  J  v.417  (sitaq  va  unhaij 
va  tiijai]  va  rajo  va  uss.avo  va);  Sn  52,  966  (acc.°);  Nd' 
486  =  Nd2  677  (same  as  under  sita);  J  1.17  (V93);  Miln 
410  (megho  unhai]   nibbapeti);  PvA   37  (ati^). 

-akara  appearance  of  heat,  often  in  phrase  (Sakkassa) 
pandu-kambala-siPasanari  unhakarar)  dassesi ,  of  Sakka's 
throne  showing  an  appearance  of  heat  as  a  sign  of  some 
extraordinary  event  happening  in  the  world,  e.  g.  J.1.330; 
V.92;  Dh.A.  1.17,  and  passim,  -odaka  hot  water  VvA  68. 
-kalla  glowing-hot  embers  or  ashes  J  11.94  (so  read  for 
^kalala);  IV. 389  ("vassa,  rain  of  hot  ashes,  v.  1.  °kukkula- 
vassa).    -kala  hot  weather  Vin  11.209. 

U^atta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  unha]  hot  state,  heat  Vism   171. 

U^hisa  [Sk.  usnisa]  a  turban  D  1.7;  11.19=  in.l45  (°slsa 
cp.  Via/.  11.16)";  J  11.88;  Miln  330;  UA  1.89;  DhsA  198. 

Ut(t)aq4a  see  uddanda. 

Utu  (m.  &  nt.)  [Vedic  rtu  special  or  proper  time,  with  adj. 
rta  straight,  right,  rite,  rti  manner  to  Lat.  ars  "art",  Gr. 
Jajtf«p(T),  further  Lat.  ritus  (rite),  Ags.  rim  number;  of 
*ar  to  fit  in,  adjust  etc.  q.  v.  under  appeti]  —  I.  (lit.) 
(a)  (good  or  proper)  time,  season :  aruna-utu  occasion  or 
time  of  the  sun(-rise)  DhA  1. 165;  utui)  ganhati  to  watch 
for  the  right  time  (in  hoioscopic  practice),  to  prognosticate 
ibid,  sarlrai]  utur)  ganhapeti  "to  cause  the  body  to  take 
season",  i.  e.  to  refresh  the  body  by  cool,  sleep,  washing 
etc.  J  111.527;  DA  1.252.  —  (b)  yearly  change,  time  of  the 
year,  season  Vism  128.  There  are  usually  three  seasons  men- 


Utu 


«3i 


Uttari 


tioned,  viz.  the  hot,  rainy  and  wintry  season  or  gimba, 
vassa  &  hemanta  A  iv.138;  SnA  317.  Six  seasons  (in 
connection  with  nakkhatta)  at  J  v.330  &  VI. 524.  Often 
utu  is  to  be  understood,  as  in  bemantikena  (scil.  utuna) 
in  the  wintry  season  S  v. 51.  —  (c)  the  menses  SnA 
317;  J  v.330  (utusinataya  read  utusi  nhataya;  utusi  loc, 
as  expH-  by  C.  pupphe  uppanne  utumhi  nahataya).  —  2. 
(applied  in  a  philosophical  sense:  one  of  the  five  fold 
cosmic  order,  physical  change,  physical  law  of  causation 
(opp.  kamma),  physical  order:  see  Asl.  272  f.;  Dialogues, 
II,  8,  n. ;  Kvu  trsl"  207 ;  cp.  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  Buddhism, 
p.  Iigf.,  Cpd.  161,  Dhs  trsl"-  introd.  XVII ;  &  cp.  cpds. 
So  in  connection  with  kamma  at  Vism  451,  614;  J  VJ.105 
(kamma-paccayena  utuna  samutthita  Verarani) ;  perhaps 
also  at  Miln  410  (megha  ututo  samutthahitva). 

-ahara  physical  nutriment  (cp.  Dhs  trsl"-  174)  PvA 
148.  -Opasevana  seasonable  activity,  pursuit  (of  activities) 
according  to  the  seasons,  observance  of  the  seasons  Sn  249 
(=  gimhe  atapa-tthana-sevana  vasse  rukkha-mula-sevana 
hemante  jalappavesa-sevana  SnA  291).  -kala  seasonable, 
favourable  time  (of  the  year)  Vin  1.299;  "ITS-  "j*  produced 
by  the  seasons  or  by  physical  change  Miln  268  (kamma", 
hetu°,  utu°);  Vism  451.  -nibbatta  coming  to  existence 
through  physical  causes  Miln  268.  -pamana  measure  of  the 
season,  i.  e.  the  exact  season  Vin  1.95.  -parinama  change 
(adversity)  of  the  season  (as  cause  of  disease)  S  IV. 230;  A 
11.87;  iii.<3i;  v.iio;  Miln  112,  304;  Vism  31.  -paris- 
saya  danger  or  risk  of  the  seasons  A  III. 388.  -pubba 
festival  on  the  eve  of  each  of  the  (6)  seasons  J  va.524. 
-vara  time  of  the  season,  "^varena  °varena  according  to 
the  turn  of  the  season  J  1.58.  -vikara  change  of  season 
Vism  262.  -yeramanl  abstinence  during  the  time  of 
menstruation  Sn  291  (cp.  SnA  317).  -satjvacchara  the 
year  or  cycle  of  the  sea.sons,  pi.  °a  the  seasons  D  iu.85  ^ 
A  11-75;  S  v. 442.  The  phrase  ulusaijvaccharani  at  Pv 
Il.g's  is  by  Dhammapala  taken  as  a  bahuviihi  cpd.,  viz. 
cycles  of  seasons  &  of  years,  i.  e.  vasanta-gimh'adike  bahu 
utu  ca  citta-saijvacchar'adi  bahQni  saqvaccharani  ca  PvA 
135.  Similarly  at  J  v.330  (with  Cy).  -sappaya  suitable 
to  the  season,  seasonable  DhA  327.  -samaya  time  of 
the  menses  SnA  317. 

Utuka  ( — °)  (adj.)  [utu  -f  ka]  seasonable,  only  in  cpd.  sabb- 
otuka  belonging  to  all  seasons,  perennial  D  II. 179;  Pv  IV. 
12'  (=  pupphupaga-rukkhadihi  sabbesu  utusu  sukkhavaha 
PvA  27s);  Sdhp  248. 

UtUIU  (f)  [formed  fr.  utu  like  bhikkhuni  fr.  bhikkhu]  a 
menstruating  woman  Vin  111.18;  iv.303 ;  S  iv.239;  A  ill. 
221,  229;  Miln  127.  an°  A  in. 221,  226. 

Utta  [pp.  of  vac,  Sk.  ukta;  for  which  the  usual  form  is 
vutta  only  as  dur°  speaking  badly  or  spoken  of  badly, 
i.  e.  of  bad  repute  A  11.117,  143;  in. 163;  Kh  V111.2; 
KhA  218. 

Uttaq(Jata  (adj.)  [ud  4-  tandula]  "grainy",  i.  e.  having  too 
many  rice  grains  (of  rice  gruel),  too  thick  or  solid  (opp. 
atikilinna  too  thin  or  liquid)  J  1.340;  111.383  (id.); 
iv.44  (id.). 

Uttatta  [ud  -(-  tatta",  pp.  ol  ud  +  tap,  Sk,  uttapta]  heated; 
of  metals:  molten,  refined;  shining,  splendid,  pure  J  vi. 
574  (hemar)  uttattar)  aggina);  Vv  84";  Pv  111.3'  (°nipa, 
so  read  for  uggata",  reading  correct  at  PvA  188  'singi); 
PvA   10  ("kanaka,  T.  uggatta°);    Mhbv  25  (id.). 

Uttanta  [=  utrasta,  is  reading  correct?  frightened,  faint 
Vin  111.84.  See  uttasta  &  utrasta. 

Uttama  (adj.)  [superl.  of  ud°,  to  which  compar.  is  uttara. 
See  etym.  under  ud°]  "ut-most",  highest,  greatest,  best 
Sn  1054  (dhammai)  utlamai)  the  highest  ideal  =  Nibbana, 
for  which  setthaq  Sn  1064;  cp.  Nd»  317);  Dh  56;  Nd' 
211;  Nd*  502  (in  paraphrase  of  mahS  comb''- with  pavara); 


KbA  124;  DhA  1.430:  PvA  I,  50.  —  dum-uttama  a 
splendid  tree  Vv  39';  nar°  the  best  of  men  Su  1021  (= 
narasabha  of  996);  pur°  the  most  magnificent  town  Sn 
1012;  puris°  the  noblest  man  Th  i,  629,  1084;  nt.  utta- 
mag   the  highest  ideal,  i.  e.   Arahantship  J  1.96. 

-anga  the  best  or  most  important  limb  or  part  of  the 
body,  viz.  (a)  the  head  Vin  11  256  =  M  1.32  =  A  iv.278 
(in  phrase  uttamange  sirasmiq);  J  11.163;  also  in  cpd. 
"bhtila  the  hair  of  the  head  Th  2,  253  (=  kesa-kalapa 
ThA  209,  210)  &  °ruha  id.  J  I.i38  =  vi.96  (=  kesa  C); 
(b)  the  eye  J  iv.403;  (c)  the  penis  J  v.  197.  -attba  the 
highest  gain  or  good  (i.e.  Arahantship  SnA  332)  Sn324; 
Dh  386,  403;  DhA  IV. 142;  ThA  160.  -adbama  most 
contemptible  J  v. 394,  437.  -guna  (pi.)  loftiest  virtues  J 
1.96.  -purisa  It  97  &  -porisa  the  greatest  man  (=  ma- 
hapurisa)  Dh  97  (see  DhA  11-188)-  -bbava  the  highest 
condition,  state  or  place  DhA  II.  1 88  (°r)  patto  :=  puris'- 
utlamo). 

Uttamata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  uttama]  highest  amount,  climax, 
limit  DA  1.169  (ff"'  paramata). 

Uttara'  (adj.)  compar.  of  ud",  q.  v.  for  etym. ;  the  superl. 
is  uttama]  —  i.  higher,  high,  superior,  upper,  only  in 
cpds.,  J  11.420  (musal°  with  the  club  on  top  of  him?  Cy 
not  clear,  perhaps  to  uttara*);  see  also  below.  —  2. 
northern  (with  diss  region  or  point  of  compass)  D  1.153; 
M  1.123;  S  1.224;  P^A  75-  uttaramukha  (for  uttarai)- 
mukha)  turning  north,  facing  north  Sn  loio.  —  3.  subse- 
quent, following,  second  (° — )  J  I-63  (°asalha-nakkhatta).  — 
4.  over,  beyond  ( — °):  atth'utara-sata  eight  over  a  hundred, 
i.  e.  108;  DhA  1.388.  —  sa-uttara  having  something 
above  or  higher,  having  a  superior  i.  e.  inferior  D  1. 80 
(citta),  11.299;  M  1.59;  S  V.265;  Vbh  324  (padna);  Dhs 
1292,  1596;  DhsA  50.  —  anuttara  without  a  superior, 
unrivalled,  unparalleled  D  1.40;  S  1.124;  11.278;  IU.84; 
Sn   179.  See  also  under  annuttara. 

-attharana  upper  cover  J  vi.253.  -abbimukba  facing 
North  D  11.15.  -asanga  an  upper  robe  Vin  1.289;  U' 
126;  S  1.81;  IV. 290;  A  1.67,  145;  11.146;  DhA  1.218; 
PvA  73;  VvA  33  =  51.  -itara  something  higher,  superior 
D  1.45,  156,  174;  S  1.81;  J  1.364;  DhA  11.60;  IV.4. 
-ot^ha  the  upper  lip  (opp.  adhar")  J  11.420;  111.26;  iv. 
184.  -chada  a  cover,  coverlet,  awning  (sa°  a  carpet  with 
awnings  or  canopy  above  it)  D  1.7;  A  1.181;  III. 50. 
•chadana  =  °chada  D  11.187;  DhA  1.87.  -dvara  the 
northern  gate  J  VI. 364.  -dhamma  the  higher  norm  of 
the  world  (lok°),  higher  righteousness  D  11.188  (pati- 
viddha-lok'utlara-dhammataya  uttama-bhavai]  patta).  -pa- 
saka  the  (upper)  lintel  (of  a  door)  Vin  11.120  =  148. 
-pubba  north-eastern  J  vi,5i8.  -sse  (v.  1.  "suve)  on  the 
day  after  tomorrow  A  1.240. 

Uttara'  (adj.)  [fr.  uttarati]  crossing  over,  to  be  crossed,  in 
dur°  difficult  to  cross  or  to  get  out  of  S  1.197  ("o'  durut- 
tamo);  Miln  158;  and  in  cpd.  °setu  one  who  is  going 
to  cross  a  bridge   Miln   194  (cp.  uttara-setu). 

UttaraQa  (nt.)  [fr.  uttarati]  bringing  or  moving  out,  saving, 
delivery  Th  1,  418;  J  1.195.  '°  BSk.  uttaraijia  only  in 
sense  of  crossing,  overcoming,  e.  g.  Jtm  31  *  (°setu).  — 
Cp.  uttara. 

Uttarati  [ud  -(-  tarati']  —  1.  to  come  out  of  (water)  Via 
11.221  (opp.  otarati);  J  1.108  (id.).  —  2.  to  go  over,  to 
(low  over  (of  water),  to  boil  over  Miln  117,  118,  132, 
260,  277.  —  3.  to  cross  over,  to  go  beyond  M  1.135; 
aor.  udatari  Sn  471  (oghaij).  —  4.  to  go  over,  to  over- 
spread J  v. 204  (ger.  uttariyana  =  avattharitva  C).  —  pp. 
oti^^a  (q.  v.).  —  Cans,  uttareti  (q.  v.). 

Uttari  (° — )  &  Uttarifl  (adv.)  [comp"-  form  of  uttara,  cp. 
angi-bhnta  uttani-karoti  etc.]  out,  over,  beyond;  additional, 
moreover,  further,  besides.  —  (1)  uttarir) :  D  1.71;  M1.83; 
III. 148;  S  IV.15;  Sn  796  (uttarii)  kurule  =  uttariq  karoti 
Nd*  102,  i.  e.  to  do  more  than  anything,  to  do  best,  to 
esteem   especially);  J  11.23;  '"■324;  Miln  10  (ito  utlariij 


Uttari 


132 


Ud- 


anythiog  beyond  this,  any  more)  DhA  IV.  109  (bhaveti  to 
cultivate  especially;  see  vutlari);  VvA  152.  —  uttariij  ap- 
pativijjhanto  not  going  further  in  comprehension,  i.  e. 
reaching  the  highest  degree  of  comprehension,  Vism  314, 
referring  to  Ps  11.131,  which  is  quoted  at  Miln  198,  as 
the  last  of  the  11  blessings  of  metta.  —  (2)  uttari°  in 
foil.  cpds. 

-karapiya  an  additional  duty,  higher  obligation  S  n. 
99;  III. 168;  A  v.i57  =  i64.  It  118.  -bhanga  an  extra 
portion,  tit-bit,  dainties,  additional  or  after-meal  bits  Vin 
11.214;  111.160;  IV. 259;  J  11.419;  DhA  1. 214  sa-uttari- 
bhanga  together  with  dainty  bits  J  1. 186,  cp.  196  (vagu). 
-bhangika  serving  as  dainties  J  1.196.  -manussa  beyond 
the  power  of  men,  superhuman,  in  cpd.  'dhamtna  an 
order  which  is  above  man,  extraordinary  condition,  tran- 
scendental norm,  adj.  of  a  transcendental  character,  mira- 
culous, overwhelming  Vin  1.209;  Ii.ii2;  111.105;  iv.24; 
D  I  211;  III. 3,  12,  18;  M  1.68;  11.200,  S  1V.290,  300, 
337;  A  111.430;  V.88;  DhA  111.480.  -sataka  a  further, 
i.e.  upper  or  outer  garment,  cloak,  mantle  J  11.246;  DhA 
IV.200;  PvA  48,  49  (=  uttarlyaq). 

Uttarika  (adj.)  [fr.  uttara]  transcending,  superior,  super- 
human Nett  50. 

Uttariya  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  uttara ;  uttara  -f-  ya  =  Sk.  *ut- 
tarya]  —  I.  state  of  being  higher.  Cp.  111.3^  ;  neg.  an° 
state  of  being  unsurpassed  (lit.  with  nothing  higher),  pre- 
eminence; see  annuttariya.  —  2.  an  answer,  rejoinder 
DhA  1.44  (karan'-karaija). 

Uttariya  (nt.)  [fr.  uttara]  an  outer  garment,  cloak  Pv  lo' 
(=  uparivasanaq  upariharaij  uttarisatakaij  PvA  49);  Davs 
111.30;  ThA  253. 

Uttasatl'  [identical  in  form  with  next]  only  in  Caus.  utta- 
seti  to  impale,  q.  v. 

Uttasatl'^  [ut  4-  tasati^]  —  I.  to  frighten  J  1.47  (v.267).  — 
to  be  alarmed  or  terrified  Vin  1.74  (ubbijjati  u.  palayati); 
111.145  (id.);  J  11-384;  VI. 79;  ppr.  uttasaq  Th  I,  86;  & 
uttasanto  Pv  II. 2-'.  —  See  utrasati.  Caus.  uttaseti(q.  v.). — 
pp.  uttasta  &  utrasta  (q.  v.).  Cp.  also  uttanta. 

Uttasana  (adj.-nt.)  [fr.  ud  +  tras,  cp.  uttasana]  frightening, 
fear  J   1.414  (v.  1.  for  uttasta). 

Uttasta  [pp.  of  uttasati';  usual  form  utrasta  (q.  v.)]  frightened, 
terrified,  faint-hearted  J  1.414  (°bhikkhu;  v.  1.  uttasana"). 

Uttana  (adj.)  [fr.  ut  -|-  tan,  see  tanoti  &  tanta]  —  I.  streched 
out  (flat),  lying  on  one's  back,  supine  Vin  1.271  (mancake 
uttanai)  nipajjapetva  making  her  lie  back  on  the  couch) ; 
II. 215;  J  1.205;  P*  IV.108  (opp.  avakujja);  PvA  178  (id.), 
265.  —  2.  clear,  manifest,  open,  evident  [cp.  BSk.  uttana 
in  same  sense  at  Av.  S  II. 106]  D  1. 116;  S  II. 28  (dhammo 
uttano  vivato  pakasito);  J  n.i68  (=pakata);  V.460;  PvA 
66,  89,  140,  i58.  —  anuttaoa  unclear,  not  explained  J 
VI. 247.  —  The  cpd.  form  (° — )  of  ultsna  in  comb"-  with 
kf  &  bhu  is  uttani"  (q.  v.).  —  3.  superficial,  "flat",  shal- 
low A  1.70  (parisa);  Pug  46. 

-mukha  "clear  mouthed",  speaking  plainly,  easily  under- 
stood D  1. 116  (see  DA  1. 287);  DhA  iv.8.  -seyyaka 
"lying  on  one's  back",  i.e.  an  infant  M  1.432;  A  111. 6; 
Th  I,  935;  Miln  40;  Vism  97  (°daraka). 

Uttanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  utlana]  —  l.  (=  uttana')  lying  on 
one's  back  J  VI.38  (°i)  pStetva);  DhA  I.184.  —  2.  {— 
uttana^)  clear,  open  D  1155:  M  1.340  =  DhA  1.173. 

Uttani  _(° — )  [the  compn-  form  of  uttana  in  cpds.  with  kf 
&  bhu  cp  BSk.  uttanl-karoti  M  Vastu  III. 408 ;  uttani-krta 
Av.  S  1.287;  "15']  open,  manifest  etc.,  in  °kamma 
(uttani")  declaration,  exposition,  manifestation  S  v.443 ; 
Pug  19;  Vbh  259,  358;  Nett  5,  8,  9,  38.  —  "kara^a  id. 
SnA  445.  —  °karoti  to  make  clear  or  open,  to  declare, 
show  up,  confess  (a  sin)  Vin  1.103;  S  11.25,  ^54;  ni.132, 
139;  IV.166;  V.261;  A  1.286;  UI.361  sq. 


Uttapeti  [Caus.  of  uttapati]  to  heat,  to  cause  pain,  torment 
J  VI. 161. 

Uttara  [fr.  ud  -f-  tj"  as  in  uttarati]  crossing,  passing  over, 
°3etu  a  bridge  for  crossing  (a  river)  S  IV.174  =  M  1.134; 
cp.  uttara^. 

Uttarita  [pp.  of  uttareli]  pulled  outj  brought  or  moved 
out  J   1.194. 

Uttaritatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  uttarita]  the  fact  of  having  or 
being  brought  or  moved  out  J    1.195. 

Uttaretl  [Caus.  cf  uttarati]  to  make  come  out,  to  move  or 
pull  out  J  1.194;  SnA   349.  —  pp.  uttarita  (q. v.). 

Uttasa  [Sk.  uttrasa,  fr.  ud  -|-  tras]  terror,  fear,  fright  D 
in.148;  S  V.386;  Miln  170;  PvA  180. 

Uttasana  (nt.)  [fr.  uttSseti^]  impalement  J  n.444;  SnA 
61    (sQle). 

Uttasavant  (adj.)  [uttasa  -f-  vant]  showing  fear  or  fright, 
fearful  S  III.  16  sq. 

Uttaslta  [pp.  of  uttaseti'^]  impaled  Pv  iv.iO  (=  avuta 
aropita  VvA  220);  J  I.499;  IV.29. 

Uttasetl'  [Caus  of  uttasati,  ud  -f  traS,  of  which  tags  is  utta- 
seti^  is  a  variant]  tu  frighten,  terrify  J  1. 230,  385;  II. 117. 

Uttasetl'  [cp.  Sk.  uttaijsayati  in  meaning  to  adorn  with  a 
wreath  ud  -(-  taQS  to  shake,  a  variation  of  tarS  to  shake, 
tremble]  to  impale  A  1.48;  J  1.230,  326;  11.443;  ■"•34; 
IV. 29.  —  pp.  uttasita  (q.  v.).  Cp.  uttasana. 

Uttittha  [=  ucchittha  ?  Cp.  ucchepaka.  By  Pali  Cys.  referred 
to  utthahati  "alms  which  one  stands  up  for,  or  expects"] 
left  over,  thrown  out  Vin  1.44  (°patta);  Th  1,  1057 
Cpinda);  2,  348  (°pinda  ^  vivatadvare  ghare  ghare  pa- 
titthitva  labhanaka-pinda  ThA  242);  J  IV.380  ("pinda;  C. 
similarly  as  at  ThA;  not  to  the  point);  386  ("pinda  = 
ucchitthaka  pinda  C);  Miln  213,  214. 

Uttitthe  see  utthahati. 

Uttiqa  (adj.)  [ud  +  tina]  in  iittinai)  karoti  to  take  the 
straw  off,  lit.  to  make  off-straw;  to  deprive  of  the  roof 
M  11.53.  Cp.  next. 

Uttiljqa  [pp.  of  uttarati]  drawn  out,  pulled  out,  nt.  outlet, 
passage  J  11.72  (pannasalaya  uttinnani  karoti  make  en- 
trances in  the  hut).  Or  should  it  be  utti;^a? 

Utrasta  [pp.  of  uttasati,  also  cp.  uttasta]  frightened,  ter- 
rified, alarmed  Vin  II. 184;  S  1.53,  54  (an");  Sn  986; 
Miln  23;  DhA  II.6  ("manasa);  PvA  243  (°citla),  250 
(°sabhava). 

Utrasa  [=  uttasa]  terror  J  11.8  (citt°). 

UtrSsln  (adj.)  [fr.  *Sk.  uttrasa  =  P.  uttasa]  terrified,  fright- 
ened, fearful,  anxious  S  1.99,  219.  —  Usually  neg.  an" 
in  phrase  abhiru  anutrasin  apalayin  without  fear,  stead- 
fast &  not  running  away  S  1.99;  Th  I,  864;  Nd^  13;  J 
IV.296;  V.4;  Miln  339.  See  also  apalayin. 

Ud-  [Vedic  ud-;  Goth,  ut  =  Ohg.  uz  =  E.  out,  Oir.  ud-; 
cp.  Lat.  usque  "from-unto"  &  Gr.  iirrtpot  =  Sk.  uttara] 
prefix  in  verbal  &  nominal  comb".  One  half  of  all  the 
words  beginning  with  u°  are  combn^.  with  ud",  which  in 
comp°.  appears  modified  according  to  the  rules  of  assim- 
ilation as  prevailing  in  Pali.  —  I.  Original  meaning  "out 
in  an  upward  direction",  out  of,  forth;  like  ummujjati  to 
rise  up  out  of  (water),  ujjalati  to  blaze  up  high;  udeti 
to  come  out  of  &  go  up;  ukka^tha  stretching  one's  neck 
out  high  (cp.  Ger.  "erapor");  uggilati  to  "swallow  up", 
i.  e.  spit  out.  —  The  opposites  of  ud-  are  represented  by 
either   ava   or  0°  (see  under  II.  &  IV.  &  cp.  ucc-avaca; 


Ud- 


133 


Udangana 


uddharabhagiya :  orambhsgiya),  ni  (see  below)  or  vi  (as 
udaya:  vi-aya  or  vaya).  —  II.  Hence  develop  2  clearly 
defined  meanings,  viz.  (i)  out,  out  of,  away  from  — : 
°anha  ("day-out");  °agga  ("top-out");  °agacchati;  "ikkhati 
look  out  for,  expect;  °kantati  tear  out;  "khitta  thrown 
off;  "khipati  pick  out;  "gacchati  come  out;  °gamana  rising 
(opp.  0°);  °gajjati  shout  out;  "gilati  (opp.  0°);  "ghoseti 
shout  out;  °cinati  pick  out;  "chittha  thrown  out;  "jagghati 
laugh  at,  cp.  Ger.  aus-lachen  "tatta  smelted  out ;  °tsna 
stretched  out;  °daleti  tear  out;  "dhata  lifted  out,  drawn 
out;  °disati  point  out  to;  "drlyati  pull  out;  °pajjati  to 
be  produced;  °patti  &  °pada  coming  out,  origin,  biith; 
°patipatiya  out  of  reach;  "pajaseti  sound  out;  "phasulika 
"ribs  out";  etc.  etc.  —  (2)  up  (high)  or  high  up,  up- 
wards, on  to  (cp.  ucca  high,  uttara  higher)  — :  "kujja 
erect  (opp.  ava°);  "kula  sloping  up  (opp.  vi°j;  "khipati 
throw-up,  "ganhati  take  up;  °chindati  cut  up;  "javati  go 
up-stream,  "javana  id.  (opp.  0°);  uiina  pride;  °thana 
"standing  up";  "thita  got  up;  °tarati  come  out,  go  up 
(opp.  0°) ;  °nata  raised  up,  high  (opp.  0°) ;  "nama  e-levation ; 
°namin  raised  (opp.  ni°);  "patati  fly  up;  etc.  etc.  —  III. 
More  specialised  meanings  (from  elliptical  or  figurative 
use)  are:  (l)  ud°  =  without,  "ex-",  e.g.  unuangala  "out- 
plough"  =  without  a  plough;  uppabbajita  an  ex-bhikkhu.  — 
(2)  ud°  =  off,  i.  e.  out  of  the  way,  wrong,  e.  g.  uppatha 
a  wrong  road,  ummagga  id.  —  (3)  ud°  =1  out  of  the 
ordinary,  i.e.  exceedingly,  e.g.  ujjangala  extremely  dusty; 
uppanduka  very  pale;  uppotheti  to  beat  hard.  —  IV. 
Dialectical  variations  &  combinations.  —  (i)  Owing  to 
semantic  affinity  we  often  find  an  interchange  between 
ud°  and  ava°  (cp.  E.  break  up  =  break  down,  grind  up 
or  down,  lie  up  or  down),  according  to  different  points 
of  view.  This  wavering  between  the  two  prefixes  was 
favoured  by  the  fact  that  o  always  had  shown  an  unstable 
tendency  &  had  often  been  substituted  for  or  replaced 
by  u,  which  in  its  place  was  reduced  to  u  before  a  double 
consonant,  thus  doing  away  with  the  diff.  between  u  &  u 
or  o  &  u.  For  comparison  see  the  foil. :  ukkamati  &  okk° ; 
uiin3:  avanna;  uddiyati :  odd";  uddeyya:  odd";  uppileti: 
opil°;  etc.,  &  cp.  abbhokirati  >  abbhukkirati.  —  (2)  the 
most  freq.  combos,  ihat  ud°  enters  into  are  those  with 
the  intensifying  prefixes  abbi°  and  sam° ;  see  e.  g.  abhi  -\- 
ud  (=  abbhud") -)- gacchati,  °jalati;  °thati;  "namati  etc.; 
sam -)- ud -|- eti;    "kamali;   °chindati ;   °tejeti;  "pajjati  etc. 

Uda'  (indecl.)  [Sk.  uta  &  u,  with  Lat.  aut  (or),  Gr.  avri 
(again),  alraf  (but,  or),  Goth,  auk  =  Ger.  auch  to  pron. 
base  ava°  yonder,  cp.  ava  11.]  disjunctive  part,  "or"; 
either  singly,  as  at  Sn  455,  955,  1090;  J  v.478  (v.  1. 
udahu);  Nd'  445  (expld-  as  "padasandhi"  with  same 
formula  as  iti,  qv.);  Pv  II. 12""  (kayena  uda  cetasa);  or 
comb'',  with  other  synonymous  particles,  as  uda  va  at 
Sn  193,  842,  1075;  It  82  =  117  (caraij  va  yadi  va 
titthat]  nisinno  uda  va  sayar)  walking  or  standing,  sitting 
or  lying  down);  KhA  191.  —  See  also  udahu. 

Uda^  (°— )  [Vedic  udan  (nt.),  also  later  uda  (but  only  °— ), 
commonly  udaka,  t).  v.]  water,  wave.  In  cpds.  sometimes 
the  older  form  udan°  is  preserved  (like  udaiijala,  udaiina- 
vant),  but  generally  it  has  been  substituted  by  the  later 
uda°  (see  under  udakaccha,  udakanti,  udakumbha,  uda- 
patta,  udapana,  udabindu). 

Udaka  (nt.)  [Vedic  udaka,  uda  +  ka  (see  uda^),  of  Idg. 
*ued,  'ud,  fuller  form  'eyed  (as  in  Sk.  odatL  odman  flood, 
odana  gruel,  q.  v.);  cp.  Sk.  unatti,  undati  to  water,  udra 
:=  Av.  udra  =  Ags.  otor  =  E.  otter  ("water-animal"); 
Gr.  ^iuf  water  ("hydro"),  liifa  hydra  ("water-animal"); 
Lat.  unda  wave;  Goth.  wato  =  Ohg.  waszar  =  E.  water: 
Obulg.  voda  water,  vydra  otter]  water  Vin  II.  120,  213; 
D  II. 1 5  (°assa  dharS  gushes  or  showers  of  w.);  Dh  80, 
I4S;  J  1.212;  Pv  1.5';  Pug  31,  32:  Miln  318;  VvA  20 
(udake  temanai)  aggimhe  tapanai));  DhA  1.289;  DhA  in. 
176,  256;  PvA  39,  70.  —  Syn.  ambu,  ela,  jala  etc.  — 
The  compn-  form  ( — °)  is  either  fidaka  (asanCidaka-dayin 


J  IV.435)  or  °odaka  (padodaka  water  for  the  feet  PvA  78). 
odaka  occors  also  in  abs.  form  (q.  v.),  cp.  also  oka. 
Bdgh.'s  kai)  =  udakar),  tena  daritan:  kandaran  ti  is  a 
false  etymology;  DA  1.209. 

-annava  water-flood  M  1. 134.  -ayatika  a  water-pipe 
Vin  II. 123.  -alhaka  a  certain  measure  of  water,  an  alhaka 
of  w.  S  V.400;  A  11.55  =  "i-SS?;  ^'v'^  '55-  -vipama 
resembling  water,  like  water  A  iv.ii  (puggala).  -ogabana 
plunging  into  water  J  111.235.  -ogha  a  water  flood  VvA 
48.  -orohaka  descending  into  water,  bathing;  N.  of  a 
class  of  ascetics,  lit.  "bather"  M  1.281  ;  S  IV.312;  A  v. 
263.  -orohana  plunging  into  water,  taking  a  bath,  bathing 
D  1. 167;  S  1. 182;  A  1.296;  11.206;  J  IV. 299;  Pug  55. 
-kalaha  the  "water  dispute"  DhA  111.256.  -kaka  a  water 
crow  J  II. 441.  -kicca  lil)ation  of  water,  lit.  water-per- 
formance; cleansing,  washing  D  11.15.  -klla  sporting  in 
the  w.  J  VI.420.  -gahanasataka  bathing-gown  J  v.477. 
-ghata  a  water  pitcher  PvA  66.  -cati  a  water  jar  Dh.A 
1.52.  -tthana  a  stand  for  water  Vin  11. 120.  -tumba  a 
water  vessel  J  n.441  :  DA  1.202;  DhA  11193.  -telaka 
an  oily  preparation  mixed  with  water  Vin  11.107.  -danta- 
pona  water  for  rinsing  the  mouth  &  tooth-cleaner  Vin 
III.51;  IV.90,  92,  233;  J  IV. 69.  -daha  a  lake  (of  water) 
D  1.45.  -donika  a  water-tub  or  trough  Vin  11.220.  -dhara 
a  shower  of  water  I's  1.125  ;  J  iv.351.  -niddhamana  a 
water  spout  or  drain  Vin  11. 120,  123;  Dh.\  1137.  -nib- 
bahana  an  aquaduct  Miln  295.  -patiggaha  receiving  or 
accepting  water  Vin  11.213.  -patta  a  waterbowl  Vin  11. 
107;  D  1.80;  S  III. 105.  -puiichani  a  towel  Vin  11.122. 
-posita  fed  or  nourished  by  water  VvA  173.  -phusita  a 
drop  of  water  S  11.135.  -bindu  a  drop  of  w.  It  84  (v.  1. 
for  udabindu);  PvA  99.  -bubbula  a  w.  bubble  A  1V.137; 
Vism  109,  479  (in  comp).  -bhasta  devoid  of  water  ThA 
212  (for  anodaka  Th  2,  265).  -manika  a  water-pot  Vin 
1.227;  M  1-354;  A  111.27;  Miln  28;  DhA  1.79.  -mallaka 
a  cup  for  w.  A  1.250.  -rakkhasa  a  water-sprite  DhA  111.74. 
-rahada  a  lake  (of  w.)  D  1.74,  84;  A  1.9;  n.105;  ni  25; 
Sn  467;  Pug  47.  -Tuha  a  water  plant  Vv  35".  -lekha 
writing  on  w.  A  1.283  =  P"g  3^  (in  simile  "iipama  like 
writing  on  w.;  cp.  Pug  A  215).  -vara  "waterturn",  i.e. 
fetshing  water  DhA  1.49.  -varaka  bucket  S  11. 118. 
-vaha  a  flow  of  water,  flowing  w.  J  vi.162.  -vahaka 
rise  or  swelling  (lit.  carrying  or  pulling  along  (of  water), 
overflowing,  flood  A  1. 178.  -vahana  pulling  up  water 
Vin  11.122  (°rajju).  -sadda  sound  of  water  Dhs  621. 
-saravaka  a  saucer  for  w.  Vin  11. 120.  -sataka  =  satika 
J  II  13.  -satika  "water-cloak",  a  bathing-mantle  Vin  1. 
74  =  11.272;  IV.279  (=r  yaya  nivattha  nhayati  C);  DhA 
11.61  (T.  "sataka).  -suddhika  ablution  with  water  (after 
passing  urine)  Vin  IV.262  (==  mutta-karapassa  dhovana  C), 

Udakaccha  [uda  -|-  kaccha]  watery  soil,  swamp  J  v.  137. 

Udakanti  [uda  +  kanti]  descent  into  the  water  S II.  1 79  =  1 87. 

Udakumbha  [uda  -|-  kumbha]  a  water  jug  J  I  20;  Dh  121, 
122;  Pv  1. 12'. 

Udagga  (adj.)  [ud  -|-  agga,  lit.  "out-top",  cp.  Sk.  udagra]  top- 
most, high,  lofty  Th  1,  no;  fig.  elated,  exalted,  exultant, 
joyful,  Kappy  D  l.lio  ("citia);  Sn  689  (-[- sumana),  1028 
(id.);  Pv  iv.l"  (attamana  -|-);  IV.58  (ha(tha  -|-);  Miln 
248;  Dh.A  11.42  (hattha-pahat(ha  udagg-udagga  in  high 
glee  &  (jubilant),  Vism  346  (id.);  Sdhp  323.  See  also 
der.  odagya. 

Udaggata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  udagga]  exaltation,  jubilation,  glee 
Sdhp   298. 

Udaggi°  in  udaggihuttar]  [=  ud  -|-  aggi  -|-  hutta,  cp.  Vedic 
agnihotra]  the  fire  prepared  (for  sacrifice)  J  V  396  (= 
uda-aggihuttai)  C.  wrongly),  lit.  "the  sacrifice  (being)  out" 

Udangapa  (nt.)  [ud  -|-  angaria' ;  Kern  unnecessarily  changes 
it  to  uttankana  "a  place  for  digging  for  water"  see  Torn. 
p.   96]  an  open  place  J  1.109. 


Udacchida 


134 


Udara 


Udacchida  3''''  sg.  piaet  of  ucchindati  to  break  up  Sn  2, 
3  (°a  metri  causa). 

Udaiicana  (nt.)  [fr.  ud  -|-  anC,  see  anchati]  a  bucket  for 
drawing  water  out  of  a  well  DhA  1.94. 

Udancanin  (adj.-n.)  [ud  +  aucanin  to  afic  see  anchati] 
draining,  pulling  up  water  f.  °i  a  bucket  or  pail  J  i. 
417  (f.  ^i). 

Udanjala  [udan  -f-  jala  see  uda-]  in  °r)  kilati  a  water-game : 
playing  with  drops  of  water  (?)  Vin  111.118  (Bdhgh. : 
udaiijalan  ti  udaka-cikkhallo  vuccati  p.  274). 

Udannavant  (adj.)  [udan  =  uda(ka)  4-  vant]  rich  in  water, 
well-watered  J  v. 405  (=  udaka-sampanna  C). 

Uda^ha  [ud-f-^nha]  day-break,  dawn,  sunrise  J   v.155. 

Udatarl  3'''1  sg  aor.  of  uttarati  to  cross  over  Sn  471  (oghaq). 

Udatta  (adj.)  [Sk.  udatta]  elevated,  high,  lofty,  clever  Nett 
7,   118,   123  (:=  ul.arapanna  C). 

Udadhi  [uda  +  dhl,  lit.  water-container]  the  sea,  ocean  S 
1.67;  It  86;  Sn  720;  J  v.326;  VI. 526;  ThA  289;  VvA  155 
("udakar)  ettha  dhiyati  ti  udadhi");  Sdhp   322,   577. 

Udapatta'  [uda  for  ud,  and  patta,  pp.  of  pat,  for  patita? 
Kern,  Tocv.  s.  v.  takes  it  as  *udak-prapta,  risen,  flying  up, 
sprung  up  J   111.484  (=  uppatita  C);  V.71  (^  utthita  C). 

Udapatta-  [uda -)- patta ;  Sk.  udapatra]  a  bowl  of  water, 
a  water-jug,  ewer  M  1. 100;  S  v. 121;  A  in. 230  sq.,  236; 
V-92,  94,  97  sq- 

Udapadl  3'''^  sg.  aor.  of  uppajjati  to  arise,  originate,-  be- 
come D  I.I  10,  180,  185;  S  11.273;  I'  52,99;  SnA  346,462. 

Udapana  [uda  -|-  pana  lit.  "(place  for)  drinking  water"; 
cp.  opana,  which  in  the  incorrect  opinion  of  Pali  Com- 
mentators represents  a  contracted  udapana]  a  well,  a 
cistern  Vin  1. 139;  11122;  M  1.80;  A  iv.171  ;  J  in. 216; 
Ud  78;  Pv  II. 7';  11.9";  Miln  411;  Vism  244  (in  simile); 
DA  1.298;  VvA  40;   PvA   78. 

Udappatta  see  udapatta. 

Udablndu  [uda  -)-  bindu]  a  drop  of  water  M  I  78;  Sn  812; 
Dh  121,  122,  336;  It  84  (v.  1.  udaka°);  Nd'  135;  SnA 
114;   DhA  11.51. 

Udabbhadhl  aor.   ■y^  sg.  of  ubbadhati  [ud  +  vadh]  to 

destroy,  kill  Sn  4  (=  ucchindanto  vadhati  SnA   18). 

Udabbahe  3'^'*  sg.  Pot.  of  ubbahati  [ud  -f  bfh',  see  also 
abbahati]  to  draw  out,  tear  out,  remove  Th  i,  158;  Sn 
583  (:=  ubbaheyya  dh5reyya(?)  SnA  460);  J  11.223  (= 
udabbaheyya  C);  VI. 587  (=  hareyya  C);  aor.  udabbahi 
Vin  IV. 5. 

Udaya  [fr.  ud  -|-  1,  cp.  udeti]  rise,  growth ;  increment,  in- 
crease; income,  revenue,  interest  A  11.199;  Ps  1.34;  Vv 
84'  (dhan'atlhika  uddayaq  patthaySna  r=  anisarjsaq  atire- 
kalabhai)  VvA  336);  845^;  DhA  11.270;  PvA  146  (ular° 
vipaka),  273  ("bhutani  panca  kahapana-satani  labhitva, 
with  interest);  Sdhp  40,  230,  258.  —  See  also  uddaya. 
-attha  rise  and  fall,  birth  &  death  (to  attha^)  M  1.356; 
S  V.197  sq.,  395;  A  111.152  sq.;  iv.ui,  289,  352;  V.15, 
25.  -atthika  desirous  of  increase,  interest  or  wealth  (cp. 
above  Vv  84''  dhan'atthika)  A  11.199.  -bbaya  (ud-aya  -\- 
vyaya)  increase  &  decrease,  rise  &  fall,  birth  &  death, 
up  &  down  D  111.223;  S  i^^  =  52  (lokassa);  ill. 130; 
A  11.90;  111.32;  IV.32;  It  120;  Vism  287;  Ps  1.54;  Th.\  90. 
-vyaya  =  °bbaya  S  iv.140;  A  11.15  (khandhSnai)) ;  Dh 
113,  374  (khandhanan,  see  DhA  iv.iio). 

Udayai)  &  Udayanto  ppr.  of  udeti  (q.  v.). 

Udayana  (nt.)  [fr.  ud  -f  i]  going  up,  rise  DA  1.95. 


Udara  (nt.)  [Vedic  udara;  Av.  udara  belly;  Gr.  tVrfpo^  = 
I^at.  uterus  belly,  womb;  Lith.  vedaras  stomach,  See  also 
Walde,  Lilt.  Wtli.  nnder  vensica]  —  1.  the  belly,  stomach 
D  11.266;  Sn  78,  604,  609,  716;  J  1. 146,  164,  265;  Miln 
213;  PvA  283;  KhA  57,  58;  DhA  1.47  (pregnant);  Sdhp 
102.  —  2.  cavity,  interior,  inside  Davs  1.56  (niandir-odare). 
-unudara  with  empty  belly  Th  i,  982;  Miln  406,  407; 
cp.    una. 

-aggi  the  fire  of  the  belly  or  stomach  (i.  e.  of  digestion) 
KhA  59;  SnA  462;  PvA  33;  -avadehakar)  (adv.)  bhun- 
jati  to  eat  to  fill  the  stomach,  eat  to  satiety,  to  be  glut- 
tonous M  1.102;  A  V.18;  Th  I,  935;  Vism  33.  -patala 
the  mucous  membrane  of  the  stomach  Vism  359(1=  sarir'- 
abbhantara  261);  SnA  248;  KhA  55,  61.  -pura  stomach- 
filling  Vism  108.  -vatti  "belly-sack",  belly  Vin  111.39, 
117;  Vism  262  where  KhA  reads  ud.  patala).  -vata  the 
wind  of  the  belly,  stomach-ache  9J  1.33,  433;  Vism  41 
(°abadha);  DhA  iv.129. 

Udariya  (nt.)  [fr.  udara]  the  stomach  Kh  III.  (cp.  KhA  57) ; 
Vism  258,  358.  Cp.  sodariya. 

Udassaye  2"^  sg.  pot.  of  ud  -|-  assayati  [.a  -|-  ^rJ,  cp. 
assaya]  J  V.26  (meaning  to  instal,  raise?),  expld-  by  C.  as 
ussayapesi  (?)  Reading  may  be  faulty   for  udasase  ('). 

Udaharaka  [uda   -\-  haraka]   a  water-carrier  J   11.80. 

Udahariya  (adj.)  [fr.  udah.ara  fetching  of  water,  uda  -|-  hf] 
going  for  water   Vv  50'. 

Udagacchati  [ud  -|-  a  -j-  gacchati]  to  eome  to  completion 
DA  1.288.   Cp.  sam°. 

Udana  (nt.)  [fr.  ud  -j-  an  to  breathe]  —  I.  "breathing 
out",  exulting  cry,  i.  e.  an  utterance,  mostly  in  metrical 
form,  inspired  by  a  particularly  intense  emotion,  whether 
it  be  joyful  or  sorrowful  (cp.  K.  S.  p.  29  n.  2)  D  150, 
92;  S  1.20,  27,  82,  160;  A  1.67;  J  1.76;  Pug  43,  62; 
Nett  174;  PvA  67;  Sdhp  514.  —  The  utterance  ol  such 
an  inspired  thought  is  usually  introduced  with  the  standing 
phrase  "imar)  udanai}  udanesi"  i.  e.  breathed  forth  this 
solemn  utterance  [Cp.  BSk.  udanaij  udanayati  Divy  99 
etc.],  e.  g.  at  Vin  1.2  sq.,  12,  230,  353;  D  1.47;  11.107 
(udana  of  triumph);  S  111-55;  Mhvs  xix.29;  DA  I.140; 
Ud.  I  passim;  SnA  354  ("the  familiar  quotation  about  the 
sakyas").  Occasionally  (later)  we  find  other  phrases,  as  e.g. 
ud.anar)  pavatti  J  1. 61;  abhasi  Vin  iv.54;  kathesi  J  vi. 
38.  —  2.  one  of  the  angas  or  categories  of  the  Buddhist 
Scriptures :  see  under  nava  &  anga.  —  Cp.  vodaoa. 

Udanita  [pp.  of  udaneti]  uttered,  breathed  forth,  said 
DhA  IV.55. 

Udaneti  [denom.  f.  udana,  cp.  BSk.  udanayati]  to  breathe 
out  or  forth,  usually  in  phrase  udanai)  udanesi:  see  under 
udana'.  Absolutely  only  at  J  111.218. 

Udapatva  at  J  v.255  '^  uncertain  reading  (v.  1.  udapatvS, 
C.  expl"s.  reading  udapatva  by  uppatitva  =  flying  up), 
perhaps  we  should  read  udapatta  flew  up,  pret.  of  ud  -f- 
pat  =  Sk.  *udapaptat  (so  Kern,    Toev.  s.  v.). 

UdayatI  at  da  1.266  (udayissati  fut.)  is  hardly  correct; 
D  1.96  has  here  udriyissati  (q.  v.),  which  belongs  to  darati 
to  break,  tear  etc.,  udayati  could  only  belong  to  dayati 
meaning  to  cut.  mow,  reap,  but  not  to  split  etc.  DA  1.266 
expl"S'  udayissati  with  bhijjhissali.  The  difficulty  is  removed 
by  reading  udriyissati.  To  v.  1.  undriyati  cp.  "undriya 
for  °uddaya  (dukkh°  for  dukkhudraya  see  udraya).  We 
find  udayati  once  more  at  Vism  156  in  expl"-  of  ekodi 
where  it  is  evidently  meant  for  udeti  (Caus.  =  utthapeli) 

Udara  (adj.)  [Sk.  udara,  of  which  the  usual  P.  form  is 
ulata  (q.  v.).  Cp.  BSk.  audara  &  audarika.]  raised,  sublime, 
noble,  excellent  Davs  UI.4  (samussit-odara-sitatapattaij) ; 
DA  1.50  ("issariya);   Sdhp  429,  591. 


Udavatta 


13s 


Uddapa 


Udavatta  [pp-  of  udavattate,  ud  -(-  a  vallati]  retired,  de- 
sisting J  V.158  (=  udavattitva  nivattitva  C  ). 

Udasina  (adj.)  [ud  +  aslna,  pp.  of  aS  to  sit;  lit.  sit  apart, 
be  iodifferent]  indifferent,  passive,  neutral  DhsA   129. 

Udahata  [pp.  of  udaharati]  uttered,  spoken;  called,  quoted 
Pug  41. 

Udahara^a  (nt.)  [fr.  udaharati]  example,  instance  J  111.401 
('i)  aharitvS  dassento),  510;  Miln  345  ;  SnA  445;  VvA  297. 

Udaharati  [ud  +  S  -|-  hf]  to  utter,  recite,  speak.  Sn  389; 
J  111.289;  t>A  1.140  (see  udahara).  —  pp.  udahata  (q.  v.). 
Cp.  pariy°. 

Udahara  [fr.  udaharati]  utterance,  speech  DA  1.140  Cq 
udahari  ^  udanarj   udanesi);   Pug  A  223, 

Udahu  (indecl.)  [ula  -|-  5ho,  cp.  P.  uda  &  aho  und  Sk. 
ularo]  disjunctive-adversative  particle  "or",  in  direct  ques- 
tions D  I  157;  ii.S;  Sn  599,  875,  SS5;  J  [.20,  83;  VvA 
258  (=  adu);  PvA  33,  51;  Miln  10.  —  The  first  part 
of  the  question  is  often  introduced  with  kig,  while  udahu 
follows  in  the  second  (disjunctive)  part,  e.  g.  kin  nakk- 
haltar)  kijissasi  udahu  bhatiq  karissasi  VvA  63;  kiq  am- 
hehi  saddhiij  agamissasi  udahu  paccha  will  you  come 
with  us  or  later?  DhA  11.96:  See  under  kii).  —  Often 
combil-  with  other  expletive  particles,  e.  g.  udahu  ve  Sn 
1075,  1077;  udahu  no  Sn  347;  eva  .  . .  no  udahu  (so... 
or  not)  D1.152;  (ayaq)  nu  kho  —  udahu  (ayaq)  is  it 
(this)  —  (this)  Vism  313. 

Udi  (or  udl)  is  artificial  adj.  formo-  fr.  udeti,  meaning 
"rising,  excelling",  in  expl"-  of  ekodi  at  Vism  156  (udayali 
li  udi   utthapelf  ti  attho). 

Udlkkhatl  [ud  +  iks,  Sk.  udlksate]  —  1.  to  look  at,  to 
survey,  to  perceive  Vin  1.25  (udiccare,  3=^.  pi.  pres.  med.); 
J  V.71,  296;  Vv  8i2i  (aor.  udikkhisai]  =  uUokesii)  VvA 
316);  Davs  II  109;  Sdhp  308.  —  2.  to  look  out  for,  to 
expect  J   1.344;   VvA   118.  —  3.  to  envy  Milu  338. 

Udikkhltar  [n.  ag.  of  udikkhati]  one  who  looks  for  or 
after  U  III  167. 

Udlcca  (adj.)  [apparently  an  adjectivised  ger.  of  udeti  but 
distorted  from  &  in  meaning  =  Sk.  udanc,  f.  udici  northern, 
the  north]  "rising",  used  in  a  geographical  sense  of  the 
N.  W.  country,  i.  e.  north-westerly,  of  north-western  origin 
(cp.  Bnthren  79,  Miln  trsl"-  11 45  n.  1)  J  1.140,  324, 
343)  373)  ViWti  236.  —  See  also  uddiya. 

Udiccare  3'^''-  pi-   pres.  nied.  of  udikkhati  (q.v.). 

Udita'  [pp.  of  ud — i,  see  udeti]  risen,  high,  elevated 
Miln  222;  (°odita);  Davs  iv.42;  Sdhp  14  (of  the  sun) 
442  (°odita). 

Udita-  [pp.  of  vad,  see  vadati]  spoken,  proclaimed,  uttered 
Vutlodaya  2  (quoted  by  Childers  in  Khuddaka-patha  ed. 
1869,  p.  22). 

Udiraija  (nt.)  [fr.  udSreti]  utterance,  saying  J  v. 237  ;  Dhs 
637,  720;  Miln   145. 

Udlrita  [pp.  of  udireti]   uttered  J   111.339;  v.394  =  407. 

Udireti  [ud  -)-  Ireti,  cp.  in  meaning  Trita]  —  I.  to  set  in 
motion,  stir  up,  cause  J  II1.441  (dukkhaij  udlraye  Pot.  = 
udireyya  C.) ;  v. 395  (kalahar)  to  begin  a  quarrel).  —  2.  to 
utter,  proclaim,  speak,  say  S  1. 190;  Sn  632  (pot.  °raye^ 
bhaseyya  SnA  468);  Dh  408  (giraij  udiraye  =  bhaseyya 
DhA  IV.182);  J  V.78  (vakyar));  Pass,  udiyati  (uddiyyati 
=  Sk.  udiryate)  Th    I,   1232  (nigghoso). 

UdU  (adj.)  \_z=z  »rtu?  cp.  utu  &  uju]  straight,  upright,  in 
"mano  straight-minded  D  111.167,  168  (=  uju°  in  v.  1. 
and  expln-  by  C). 


Udulckhala  (m.  &  nt.)  [Sk.  ulnkhala]  a  mortar  Vin  1.202  (+ 
musala  pestle);  J  1.502;  11.428;  v.49;  II. 161,  335;  Ud 
69  (m;  -f-  musala);  Dh.\  II. 131  ("sala);  Vism  354  (in 
comp.).  The  relation  between  udukkhala  and  musala  is 
seen  best  from  the  description  of  eating  at  Vism  344  and 
DA  1.200,  where  the  lower  teeth  play  the  role  of  ud., 
the  upper  teeth  act  as  m.,  while  the  tongue  takes  the 
part  of  a  hand.  On  this  passage  &  other  connections  as 
well  as  etym.  see  Morris  J  I'  T S.   1893,  37. 

Udukkhalika  (f.)  [fr.  udukkhala]  part  of  a  door  (threshold  r) 
Vin  II. 148  (-f-  uttara-pasaka  lintel  of  a  door). 

Udumbara  [Sk.  udumbara]  the  glomerous  fig  tree,  Ficus 
(ilomerata  D  II. 4 ;  Vin  IV35;  A  iv  2S3  ("khadika),  283 
(id.),  324  (id.);  Sn  5;  Dh.\  1.284;  SnA  19;  KhA  46,  56; 
VvA  213.  Cp.  odumbara. 

Udeti  (ud  -j-  eli  of  i  to  go]  to  go  out  or  up,  to  rise  (of 
the  sun),  to  come  out,  to  increase  Asl.  169;  Vism  156 
(eko  udeti  ti  ekodi);  J  11.33;  '"•324;  ppr.  udayaq  It  85 
(adicco),  &  udayanto  PvA  154  (udayante  suriye  =  sole 
surgente).  —  pp.  udita  (see  udita').  Cp.  udicca  &  udi. 

Udda'  [Vedlc  udra,  to  uda^  water,  lit.  living  in  water;  Cp. 
Gr.  Mfo;  "hydra";  Ohg.  ottar  =  .Ags.  otor  ^  E.  otter; 
Lith.  udra  =  Obulg.  vydra  otter]  an  aquatic  animal,  the 
otter  (?)  Childers  s.  v.  doubts  the  identity  of  this  creature 
with  the  regular  otter,  since  it  lives  in  the  jungle.  Is  it 
a  beaver?  —  Vin  I.l86  ("camma  otter-skin,  used  for 
sandals);  Cp.  I.IO^  ("pota);  J  ill  51  sq.,  335.  The  names 
of  two  otters  at  J  111.333  are  Gambhira-carin  and  Anu- 
tira-cSrin. 

Udda''  [for  uda^?]  water,  in  passage  amakkhito  iiddena, 
amakkhito  semhena,  a.  ruhirena  i.  e.  not  stained  by  any 
kind  of  (dirty)  fluid   D   11.14;   ^  111.122. 

Uddanda  [uJ  -|-  danda]  a  kind  of  building  (or  hut),  in 
which  the  sticks  stand  out  (?)  Nd'  226  =  Nd- g7i"'(utanda) 
=  Vism  25  (v.  1.  BB  uttanda). 

Uddaya'  [a  (metric?)  variant  of  udaya]  gain,  advantage, 
profit  Vv  84^  (see  udaya);  J  v. 39  (satt°-mahapaduma  of 
profit  to  beings?). 

Uddaya'^  in  compounds  dukkh°  and  sukh°.  see  udraya. 

Uddalomi  [=  udda  -|-  lomin  beaver-hair-y  r]  a  woollen 
coverlet  with  a  fringe  at  each  end  D  1.7  (=  ubhato  dasag 
unna-raay^  attharanaij ;  keci  ubhato  uggata-pupphaq  ti  va- 
danti  DA  1.87);  A  1. 181.  See  however  uddha-lomin  under 
uddhai). 

Uddasseti  [ud  -f  dasseti,  Caus.  of  dassati']  Lo  show,  reveal, 
point  out,  order,  inform,  instruct  D  11.321  sq.;  M  1.480 
(read  uddassessami  for  conjectured  reading  uddisissami  ?)  ; 
11.60  (v.  1.  uddiset")  A  iv.66. 

Uddana  (nt.)  [fr.  ud  -\-  da,  dayati  to  bind:  see  under  dama] 
a  group  of  Suttas,  used  throughout  the  Vinaya  Pitaka, 
with  ref.  to  each  Khandhaka,  in  the  Saqyutta,  the  An- 
guttara  and  other  books  (cp.  Miln  407)  for  each  group 
of  about  ten  Suttas  (cp.  Dhs.\  27).  The  Uddana  gives, 
in  a  sort  of  doggerel  verse,  at  the  end  of  each  group, 
the  titles  of  the  Suttas  in  the  group.  It  may  then  be 
roughly  rendered  "summary".  If  all  the  Uddanas  were 
collected  together,  they  would  form  a  table  of  contents 
to  the  whole  work.  —  Otherwise  the  word  has  only  been 
found  used  of  fishes  "macchuddana"  (so  J  11.425;  DhA 
II. 1 32).  It  then  means  a  group  of  fish  placed  apart  for 
for  sale  in  one  lot.  Perhaps  a  scl  or  a  batch  would  meet 
the  case. 

Uddapa  [*udvapa]  foundation  of  a  wall,  in  stock  phrase 
dalh°  etc.  D  iii.ioi ;  S  v.i94  =  also  at  J  vi.276  (=  pa- 
kara-vatthu  C).  Kern,  Tocv.  s.  v,  refers  it  to  Sk.  ud-vapati 
to    dig    out,    and    translates    "moat,   ditch".  The  meaning 


Uddapa 


136 


Uddhaij 


"wall"  or  "mound"  however  harmonises  quite  well  with 
the  der.  fr.  "digging",  cp.  E.  dike  >  Ger.  Teich.  See 
also  uddama  2. 

Uddapavant  (adj.)  [fr.  uddapa]  having  a  wall  or  embank- 
ment S  11.106  (v.  I.  uddha°);  C.  expls-  as  apato  uggatatta 
J  IV.536  (so  read  with  v.  1.  for  T.  uddha  pavatta;  C. 
expls-  as   tiia-mariyada-baudhana). 

Uddama  [fr.  ud  -{-  da  as  in  uddana,  see  dama]  i.  (adj.) 
"out  of  bounds",  unrestrained,  restless  Davs  v. 56  (°sa- 
gara).  —  2.  (n.)  wall,  enclosure  (either  as  "binding  in", 
protecting  or  as  equivalent  of  uddapa  fr.  ud  -\-  vam  "to 
throw  up"  in  sense  of  to  throw  up  earth,  to  dig  a  mound 
=  udvapati)  in  phrase  attala-uddama-parikhadini  watch- 
towers,  enceintes,  moats  etc.  DhA  III. 488. 

Uddaraka  [?]  some  wild  animal  J  v. 416  (reading  uncertain, 
expln-    ditto). 

Uddala  =  uddalaka,  only  as  Np.  J   iv.298  sq. 

Uddalaka  [fr.  ud  -f  dal,  see  dalati]  the  Uddala  tree. 
Cassia  Fistula  (also  known  as  indlvara),  or  Cordia  Myxa, 
lit.  "uprooter"  Vv  6'  (=  vataghatako  yo  rajarukkho  ti 
pi  vuccati  VvA  43);  J  IV. 301  (°rukkha),  440;  v. 199  (= 
vataghataka  C),  405;  vi.530  (so  read  for  uddh");  VvA 
197   (^puppha  =  indivara);   PvA   169. 

Uddalanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  uddalana  >  ud  -j-  daleti]  referring 
to  destruction  or  vandalism,  tearing  out  Vin  IV. 169. 

Uddaleti  [»d  -|-  daleti,  Caus.  of  dal,  see  dalati]  to  tear 
out  or  off  Vin  iv.170;  S  IV.178. 

Uddittha  [pp.  of  uddisati]  —  I.  pointed  out,  appointed, 
set  out,  put  forth,  proposed,  put  down,  codified  M  1.480 
(panha);  Sn  p.  91  (id.  ^=:  uddesa-matten^  eva  vutta,  na 
vibhangena  Sn.\  422);  SnA  372.  —  2.  appointed,  dedic- 
ated J  V.393  (an  ''i}  pupphaq  =  asukassa  nama  dassami 
ti);  PvA  50;  KhA   138. 

Uddiya  (adj.)  [Sk.  udlcya?]  northern,  northwestern  (i.e. 
Nepalese)  J  iv.352  ("kambala)  in  expl"-  of  uddiyana  [Sk. 
udicina?].  See  udicca  &  cp.  Morris  in  /F  TS.  1889, 
202.  and  last  not  least  Liiders  in  A'.  Z.  1920  (vol.  49), 
233  sq.  The  word  is  not  sufficiently  cleared  up  yet. 

Uddisati  [ud  -f-  disati]  —  I.  to  propose,  point  out,  ap- 
point, allot  Dh  353,  cp.  DhA  IV. 72;  Miln  94  (satiharatj); 
fut.  uddisissati  M  1.480  (ex  conj.,  is  probably  to  be 
changed  to  uddassessati,  q.  v.).  —  2.  to  specify  PvA  22 
(aor.  uddisi),  25  (=^  nlyadeli,  dadati),  27.  —  Pass,  uddis- 
sati  to  show  oneself,  to  be  seen  Pv  lii.2'2,  and  uddissi- 
yati  PvA  46.  —  pp.  uddittha  (q.  v.).  —  Caus.  II.  uddi- 
sapeti  (q.  v.).  —  ger.  uddissa  (q.  v.). 

Uddisapetl  [Caus.  II.  of  uddisati]  —  I.  to  make  recite 
Vin  1.47  =  11.224;  IV.290.  —  2.  to  dedicate  PvA  35 
(v.  1.  adisati). 

Udlssa  (indecl.)  [orig.  ger.  of  uddisati]  —  I.  indicating, 
with  signs  or  indications  J  111.354  =  Miln  230.  —  2.  prep 
w.  ace:  (a)  (lit.)  pointing  to,  tending  towards,  towards, 
to  PvA  250  Surattha-visayaq).  —  (b)  (appl<i  )  with  refer- 
ence to,  on  account  of,  for,  concerning  PvA  8  (pete),  17 
(=  arabbha),  49  (ratanattayai}),   70  (maij),   146. 

-kata  allotted  to,  specified  as,  meant  for  (cp.  odissa 
&  odissaka)  Vin  1.237  (maqsa);  II. 163;  D  1.166  ^  A  I. 
295  =  Pug  55  (viz.  bhikkha);  M  1.77;  KhA  222;  J  II. 
262,  263  (bhatla). 

UddiSSana  (nt.)  [fr.  uddissa]   dedication  PvA  27,  80. 

Uddipana  (f.)  [fr-  ud  -j-  dlpeti]  explanation,  reasoning, 
argument  Vism  27  (for  ukkacana). 

Uddiyatl,  Uddiyana  ete.  see  udrl°. 


Uddeka  [Sk.  udreka,  ud  -|-  ric]  vomit,  spouting  out,  erup- 
tion Vism  261  (where  id.  p.  at  KhA  61  reads  uggara); 
"'r)  dadati  to  vomit  Vin  1.277. 

Uddekanlka  (adj.)  [uddeka  +  ana  -f-  >ka]  spouting,  ejecting 
M  11.39  (manika;  perhaps  better  to  be  read  with  v.  1.  as 
udaujanika  =^  udaiicanika  fit  for  drawing  up  water). 

Uddesa  [fr.  uddisati]  — •  I.  pointing  out,  setting  forth, 
proposition,  exposition,  indication,  programme  M  111.223 
(u.  uddittha),  239;  S  IV.299;  SnA  422.  —  2.  explanation 
S  v.iio  sq.;  sa-uddesa  (adj.)  with  (the  necessary)  expl"-, 
point  by  point,  in  detail,  D  1.13,  81;  ill.ni;  A  111.418; 
It  99;  Nd-i  617'.  —  3.  samanuddesa  one  marked  as  a 
Samana,  a  novice  (cp.  samanera)  D  1.151;  M  ui.  128;  A 
IV. 343;  uddesa-bhatta  special  or  specified  food  Vin  1.58 
^=  96,  cp.  11.175,  propounding,  recitation,  repetition  Vin 
1.50  ^  11.228  (uddesena  paripucchaya  ovadena  by  recita- 
tion, questioning  &  advice);  11.219  ("q  dadati  to  hold  a 
recitation  -f-  paripucchaq  d);  A  IV.114  (-f-  paripuccha); 
V.50  sq.  (paiiho,  u.  veyyakaranaq);  Nd^  385'^  (-[-pari- 
puccha); J  1. 116;  Miln  257  (-|- paripuccha).  ek'udesa  a 
single  repetition  Vin  III. 47;    A  111.67,   180;   Miln   lo,   18. 

Uddesaka  (adj.)  [fr.  uddesa]  assigning,  defining,  determining, 

in   bhatt^  one  who  sorts  out  the  food   VvA  92. 

Uddesika  (adj.  nt.)  [fr.  uddesa]  —  i.  indicating,  referring 
to,  respecting,  defining;  (nt.)  indication,  definition  D  II. 
lOO  (mam  "bhikkhusangho);  Miln  159  (id);  KhA  29.  — 
Esp.  as  — °  in  phrase  attha-vass'  uddesika-kala  the  time 
referring  to  (or  indicating)  the  8'''  year,  i.  e.  at  the  age 
of  8  PvA  67;  solasa-vass°  M  1.88;  J  1.456;  VvA  259. 
In  the  same  application  padesika  (q.  v.).  —  2.  memorial 
J   IV. 228  (cetiya). 

Uddehaka  (adj.)  [fr.  ud  -f  dill,  see  deha]  "bubbling  up", 
only  adv.  "q  in  cpd.  phen"  (paccamana)  boiling)  under 
production  of  scum  (foam)  M  in.167;  A  1. 141;  J  111.46; 
Miln  357. 

UddOSita  [Derivation  uncertain.  Cp.  MitUcr  P.  Gr.  42]  shed, 
stable  (?)   Vin  1.140;  11.278;  111.200;  IV. 223. 

Uddha  (adj.)  [possibly  a  comb"  of  addha-  &  uddhaij ;  or 
should  we  read  addh"  or  vuddh"?]  in  phrase  uddhehi 
vatthehi  in  rich,  lofty  clothes  J  iv.154  (of  a  devala; 
passage  may  be  corrupt). 

Uddhag  (&  Uddha")  (mdecl.)  [nt.  of  adj.  ^uddha  ~  Sk. 
urdhva  high;  to  Idg.  *ared(h)  as  in  Lat.  arduus  steep, 
or  *ijred  as  in  Sk.  vardhate  to  raise,  Gr.  opSrf^  straight] 
high  up,  on  top,  above  (adv.  &  prep.).  —  On  uddhaq 
in  spatial,  temporal,  ethical  &  psychological  application 
see  in  detail  Nd^  155.  —  I.  (adv.).  —  A.  (of  space)  up, 
aloft,  on  top,  above  (opp.  adho)  Vin  111. 121;  KhA  248 
{z=  upari).  —  In  contrast  with  adho  (above  >  below) 
D  1.23,  153,  251;  Vism  176  (u.  adho  liriyaq  expld); 
DA  I  98  (see  also  adho).  —  Esp.  with  ref.  to  the  points 
of  the  compass  as  "in  zenith"  (opp.  adho  "in  nadir"), 
e.  g.  at  D  1.222  ("straight  up");  It  120;  J  1.20.  — 
B.  (of  time)  in  future,  ahead,  hence  Sn  894;  Nd'  303  (u. 
vuccati  anagataq).  —  II.  {prep,  with  abl.  &  instr.).  — 
A.  (of  space)  in  phrase  uddhaq  padatala  adho  kesa- 
matthaka  (above  the  soles  &  below  the  scalp)  D  11. 
293,  294;  111.104;  A  111.323;  V.109.  —  B.  (of  lime) 
after,  hence  Pv  i.io'^  (u.  catuhi  masehi  after  4  months  =: 
catunnar)  masSnaq  upari  PvA  52);  PvA  147  (sattahi 
vassa  satebi  u.,  meaning  here  700  years  ago,  cp.  ito  in 
similar  application,  meaning  both  past  &  future),  148 
(sattahato  u.  after  a  week;  uttari  v.  1.  BB.).  —  In  cpds. 
uddha"  &  uddhai)"  (see  below).  The  reading  udhogalai} 
at  PvA  104  is  to  corrected  to  adho°.  —  III.  Note  (cp. 
Trenckner,  Notes  60).  In  certain  cases  we  find  ubbbai) 
for  uddhaq.  Notice  the  foil. :  ubbhaq  yojanaq  uggato  J 
V.269;  ubbhatthako  hoti  "standing  erect"  D  1. 167;  M 
1.78;  ubbhamukhu  "mouth  (face)  upwards",  turned  up- 
wards S  111.238;  Miln    122. 


Uddhai] 


137 


Uddhumata 


(i)  uddha°  in:  -gamin  going  upwards  S  v.370  sq. 
ccbiddaka  (-vatapana)  (windows)  having  openings  above 
DhA  1. 21 1,  -pada  heels  upwards  either  with  aJhosira 
(head  down)  A  iv.133,  or  avansira  Vv  521^  (v-1);  J  I- 
233.  -mukha  turned  upwards,  adv.  °a  upwards  or  back- 
wards (of  a  river)  Miln  295  (Ganga  u.  sandati;  in  same 
context  ubbha°  Miln  122).  -lomin  "having  hair  on  the 
upper  side",  a  kind  of  couch  or  bed  (or  rug  on  a  couch) 
Vin  I.192  =  11.163,  '69.  So  is  prob.  to  be  read  for  ud- 
dalomi  (q.  v.).  -virecana  action  of  an  emetic  (lit.  throwing 
up)  (opp.  adho-virecana  of  a  purgative)  D  1.12  (=  uddhaij 
dosanai)  niharanarj  DA  198);  DhA  111.126;  SoA  86. 
-suddha  clean  on  top  Vin  11. 152.  —  (2)  uddhar)°  in: 
-agbatanika  an  after-deather,  a  teacher  who  maintains 
that  the  soul  exists  after  death  D  1.31,  cp.  DA  1.119. 
-pada  feet  up  (&  head  down)  Vv  52'^5  (y.  1.  uddha°). 
-bhagiya  belonging  to  the  upper  part  (opp.  oram°):  see 
sai)yojana.  -virecana  v.  1.  B13.  at  Sn.\  86  for  uddha". 
-sara(r))  (adv.)  with  raised  or  lofty  voice,  lit.  "sounding 
high"  Sn  901,  see  Nd'  315.  -sota  (adj.)  one  who  is 
going  upwards  in  the  stream  of  life  [cp.  BSk.  iirdhva- 
srolah  Mahavy  §  46]  D  in. 237;  S  v.69,  201,  205,  237, 
285,  314,  378;  A  1.233;  11.134;  IV.14  sq.,  73  sq.,  146, 
380;  V.120;  Dh  218;  Th  11.12;  Pug  17;  Nett  190;  DhA 
1112S9;  lit.  up-slream  at  J  in. 371. 

Uddhagsati  [ud  -f  dhaijsati,  in  lit.  meaning  of  dhvatJS, 
sec  dharjsati]  to  fly  out  or  up  (of  dust)  Vv  78'  na  tatth' 
uddhaijsati  lajo;  expld-  by  uggacchati  VvA  304.  —  pp. 
uddbasta  (q.  v.). 

Uddhagga  (adj.)  [uddha  -j-  agga]  —  I.  standing  on  end 
(lit.  with  raised  point),  bristling,  of  the  hair  of  a  Mahapu- 
risa  D  11.18  =  111.144,  154.  —  2.  prominent,  conspicuous 
J  IV. 345   (°rajin   having  prominent  stripes,  of  a  lion).  — 

3.  pointing    upwards    (of   the    lower    teeth,  opp.   adhagga 
point-doivnwards)    J    v.  156     (=  hetthima-danta    C).    — 

4.  lofty,    beneficial    (of   gifts)    A    n.68  (dakkhina);  ni.46 
(id.)  see  also  uddbaggika. 

Uddhagglka  (adj.)  [cp.  uddhagga)  aiming  at  or  resulting 
in  a  lofty  end,  promoting  spiritual  welfare,  beneficial  (of 
gifts)  D  1. 51  ^111.66:  S  1.90;   A  III. 259;  DA  1. 158. 

UddhaCCa  (nt.)  [substantivised  ger.  of  ud-dharati,  ud  -)-  dhf, 
cp.  uddhata  &  uddhata.  The  BSk.  auddhalya  shows  a 
strange  distortion.  BSk.  udihava  seems  to  be  also  a  sub- 
stitute for  uddhacca]  over-balancing,  agitation,  excitement, 
distraction,  flurry  (see  on  meaning  Dialogues  1.82;  Dhs 
Irsl"-  119;  CfJ.  18,  45,  83).  A  1.256,  282;  111.375,  421, 
449;  IV.87;  V.142,  145,  "48;  D  111.234;  S  V.277  sq.; 
DhSA  260;  SnA  492  (in  sense  of  "haughtiness"?  for 
Sn  702  unnata);  Nd'  220,  501;  Ps  1.81,  83;  11.9,  97  sq.; 
119,  142,'  145,  169,  176;  Pug  18,  59;  Dhs  427,  429 
(cittassa), .  1159,  1229,  1426,  1482;  Vbh  168,  369,  372, 
377;  Visni  137,  469  (=  uddhata- bhava);  Sdhp  459.  To- 
gether with  kukkucca  "flurry  or  worry"  u.  is  enumd-  as 
the  4ih  of  the  5th  nivarana's  and  as  the  g'h  of  the  10 
sariyojana's  (q.  v.),  e.g.  at  D  I.71,  246;  III  49,  234,  269, 
278;  S  1.99;  A  1.3;  III. 16;  V.30;  Nd'  379;  Dhs  i486. 

Uddhaja  (adj.)  [uddhaq  -f  ja]  upright,  honest  M  1.386 
(v.  1.  for  pannadhaja). 

Uddhata  [pp.  of  uddharati'^;  see  also  uddhata,  uddhita  & 
uddhacca]  —  i.  pulled  out  J  11.26.  —  2.  pulled  out, 
destroyed,  extirpated,  in  phrase"  datha  with  its  fangs 
removed  (of  a  snake)  J  1.505;  H.259;  vi.6.  —  3.  cut  off 
or  out  Miln  231  (uddhat-uddhate  Slope  whenever  a  piece 
is  cut  off).  —  4.  drawn  out,  lifted  out,  raised  J  1.143; 
sass°kale  at  the  time  of  lifting  the  corn ;  v. 49  Cpaqsu). 
Cp.  uddhata-bija  castrated  J  11. 237. 

Uddhata  [pp.  of  uddharati';  as  to  its  relation  to  uddhata 
see  remarks  under  uddhacca].  —  I.  lifted  up,  raised, 
risen,  high  (of  the  sun,  only  In  this  special  phrase  u. 
aruno)  Vin  11.236 ;  Ud  27  (vv.  11.  uggata  &  uddhasta).  — 


2.  unbalanced,  disturbed,  agitated,  shaken  S  I.61  (+  un- 
nala  "muddled  in  mind  &  puffed  up"  Irsl.),  204  (id.) 
V.II2  (linar)  cittai)  uddhataq  c),  114  =  Vism  133,  269; 
A  11.23;  111- 39';  V.93  sq.,  142,  '63;  It  72;  Th  2,  77  (so 
read  with  v.  1.,  T.  has  uddhata;  ThA  80  explns.  as  nan' 
arammane  vikkhitta-citta  asamShita);  Nd^  433  (-)-  avupa- 
santa-citto);  Pug  35  (=  uddhaccena  samannSgata  Pug  A 
217).  -an"  well  balanced,  not  shaken,  calm,  subdued 
M  1.470;  A  11.21 1 ;  V.93  sq.,  104;  Sn  850  (=  uddhacca- 
virahita  5nA  549);  Dh  363  (=  nibbutacitto  DhA  iv.93) ; 
J  V.203 ;  Vv  64'.  —  See  also  ubbhata. 

Uddhana  (nt.)  ['ud-dhvana,  fr.  ud  +  dhvan  instead  of 
dhma,  for  uddhamona  ("uddhmana  Sk.),  see  dhamati]  an 
oven  J  1.33,  68,  71,  346;  11.133,  277;  111.178,  425; 
^■385,  471;  11.218  (kammar°),  574;  Sn  p.  105;  Miln  118, 
257;  Vism  171,  254;  DhA  1.52,  224;  11.3;  111.219 
(°panti);   IV.176. 

Uddhamma  [ud  +  dhamma]  false  doctrine  Dpos  V.19. 

Uddharana  (nt)  [abstr.  fr.  uddharati]  —  I.  taking  up, 
lifting,  raising  Miln  307  (sass°-samaya  the  time  of  gathering 
the  corn;  to  uddharati  i.  but  cp.  in  same  meaning  ud- 
dhata from  uddharati  2).  DA  1.192.  —  2.  pulling  or  drawing 
out  (cp.  uddharati  2)  Vin  ill. 29.  See  also  ubbahati-. 

Uddharati  [ud  -f  dharate  of  dhf]  —  I-  (in  'his  meaning 
confused  with  ubbharati  from  bfh,  cp.  interchange  of 
ddh  &  bbh  in  uddha:  ubbha,  possibly  also  with  bfh: 
see  abbahati  and  cp.  ubbahatii).  (a)  to  raise,  rise,  lift  up; 
hence:  to  raise  too  much,  overbalance,  shake  etc.:  see  pp. 
uddhata  (*udbhrta)  &  cp.  uddhacca  &  uddharana.  —  (b)  to 
take  up,  lift,  to  remove,  take  away  D  1.135  (ballq  uddhareyya 
raise  a  tax);  M  1.306  (hiyaij);  J  1.193  (aor.  poet,  udaddhari 
=  uddharitva  kaddhilvii  pavattesi  C);  VvA  157.  —  Caus. 
uddharapeti  Vin  M.180,  iSi;  J  VI.9S.  —  2.  to  pull  out, 
draw  out  (syn.  with  abbahati,  q.  v.  for  comparison)  D  I. 
77  (ahii)  karanda  uddhareyya,  further  on  ahi  k.  ubbhato) 
PvA  115  (=  abbahati);  imper.  uddharatha  J  11.95  (fof 
abbaha);  Dh  327  (atlanar)  dugga);  aor.  uddhari  J  111.190 
(ankena);cond.  uddhare  Th  1,  756;  ger.  uddharitva  D  1.234; 
Ndi  419;  SnA  567;  DhA  IV. 26;  PvA  139,  &  (poet.)  uddhatva 
J  IV.406  (cakkhuni.  so  read  for  T.  laddhatvaii  cakkhuni  =: 
akkhini  uddharitva  C).  —  pp.  uddbata  &  ubbhata. 

Uddharln  in  an°  Sn  952  see  under  nitthurin. 

Uddhaseta  see  uddhasta. 

Uddhasta  [pp-  of  uddhaijseli,  see  dhaijsati  &  cp.  anuddhaq 
seti]  attacked,  perhaps  "spoilt"  (smothered!)  In  comb"- 
with  pariyonaddha  (covered)  at  A  1.202  (T.  uddhaseta, 
expl"*-  by  uparl  dhaqsita  C);  11.2II  (vv.  11.  uddhasota  for 
"eta  &  uddhaqso).  —  Registered  with  an"  as  anuddhasta 
in  Index  vol.  to  A,  should  however  be  read  as  anu- 
ddhasta (q.  v.).  Cp.  also  viddhasta. 

Uddhara  (&  ubbhara  In  Vin.;  e.g.  11.255,  <=p.  256  where 
ubbhata  unterchanges  with  uddhara)  [fr.  uddharati']  — 
I.  taking  away,  withdrawal,  suspension,  in  kathin°  (q.  v.) 
Vin  1.255  sq.;  111. 262;  IV.287;  v. 177  sq.  —  2.  a  tax, 
levy,  debt,  in  phrase  °ij  sodheti  (so  read  for  sadheti  loc. 
cit.)  to  clear  up  a  debt  J  U.341;  111.106;  iv.45,  247. 
uddhara-sodhana  (v.  1.  sadh")  the  clearance  of  a  debt 
J  11.341.  —  3-  synopsis  or  abstract  Dpvs  v. 37  (atth"  of 
the  meaning  of  the  Vin.);  SnA  237  (atth°  -f  pad"). 

Uddhalaka  at  J  vi.530  is  to  be  read  udd31aka. 

Uddhita  [a  by-form  of  uddhata]  pulled  out,  destroyed, 
extirpated,  removed  J  vi.237  (°pphala  =  uddhata-bija  C). 

Uddhunati   [ud  -|-  dhunSti]  to  shake  VvA  279. 

Uddhumata  (adj.)  [pp.  of  uddhumayatl]  swollen,  bloated, 
risen  (of  flour)  A  1.140;  Sn  200  (of  a  corpse);  SnA  100 
sq.,   171;  DA  1.114.   Cp.  next. 


Uddhumataka 


■38 


Upa 


Uddhumataka  (adj.)  [prec.  +  ka]  swollen,  bloated,  puffed 
up  M  1.88  (of  a  corpse;  +  vinilaka);  Vism  178,  193  (id.); 
J  1.164  (udarar)  "q  katva),  420  ("nimitta  appearance  of 
being  blown  up);  Miln  332;  DhA  1.307.  See  also  subha 
&  asubha. 

-sanna  the  idea  of  a  bloated  corpse  A  11.17;  Dhs  263; 
Miln  331;  cp.  Dhs  Irsl"-  69. 

Uddhumatatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  uddhumata]  swollen  con- 
dition  \'ism   178. 

Uddhumayati  [ud  -|-  dhma,  see  dhamati  &  remarks  on 
uddhacca]  to  be  blown  up,  to  swell  up,  rise;  aor.  "ayi  J 
111.26;  VvA  76;  ger.  "ajitva  J  H.18;  Dh.\  1. 126.  —  pp. 
uddhumata  &  ''ayita  (q.  v.). 

Uddhumayana  (nt.)  [fr.  uddhumayati]  puffing,  blowing  or 
swelling  up  J  IV. 37. 

Uddhumayika  (adj.)  [cp.  uddhumSyita]  like  blowing  or 
swelling  up,  of  blown-up  appearance  M  1.142  sq. 

Uddhumayita  [pp.  of  uddhumayati]  swollen,  bloated,  pnfied 
up   VvA  218. 

Udrabhati  [?  doubtful  in  form  &  etym.]  to  eat  M  1.306 
(upacika  bijaq  na  udrabheyyur) ;  vv.  11.  on  p.  555:  udrah", 
udah°,  udah",  uddhah",  utthah" ;  udraheyyun  ti  khadeyyuq 
C.  (udrabhasane  dhatuni)).  —  AWc.  The  Dhatupatha, 
212,  and  the  Dhatu-maujusa,  311,  explain  udrabha  by 
adane,   eating. 

Udraya  (&  Uddaya)  ( — °)  [perhaps  a  bastard  form  of 
uddaya  =  udaya  yielding  etc.  The  BSk.  usually  renders 
P.  dd  by  dr.  If  so,  then  equal  to  adaya  &  uddaya*] 
coming  forth,  result,  consequence.  Usually  in  foil,  two 
phrases;  dukkh"  (yielding  pain)  &  sukh"  (giving  pleasure); 
e.g.  as  dukkh"  at  M  1415;  J  iv.398;  v. 119  (v.  1.  °in- 
driya);  Pv  i.iiio  (so  read  for  T.  "andriya,  cp.  undriyati 
as  V.  1.  for  udayati);  Ps  11.79  (kammaij);  as  sukh"  at  J 
V.389  (v.  1.  "indriya);  DhA  11.47  ("uddaya).  Both  dukkh" 
&  sukh°  at  Ps  I  80.  Besides  these  in  foil,  comfans.;  katuk° 
causing  bitterness  J  v.241;  sa°  with  (good  or  evilj  con- 
sequences S  11.29;   M   1.27 1. 

Udriyati  (&  Uddiyati)  [cp.  Sk.  ud  drryate.  Pass  of  ud  + 
df,  drnoli,  and  P.  darati  &  dalali;  see  also  avadiyati 
which  may  be  a  Sanskritised  oddiyati  for  uddiyati]  to 
burst,  split  open,  break,  fall  to  pieces  Vin  1.148  (viharo 
udriyati);  II  174  (id);  iv.254  (i):  D  1.96  ("iyissati  ^ 
bhijjhissati   D.\   1.96,  so  read  for  udayati);  S  I  113,   119. 

Udriyana  &  Uddiyana  (nt.)  [fr.  udriyati]  breaking  or 
splitting  open,  bursting  J  1.72 ;  DhA  11. 7  (°sadda),  100 
(pathavi-uddiyana-sadda;  vv.  11.  uddri°,  udri°). 

Undura  [etym  ?]  a  rat  Vin  1.209;  11.148,  152;  111.151;  J 
1. 120;  Miln   23,  363.  Spelt  undura  at  Vism  62. 

Unna  [pp.  of  ud,  unatti  &  undati,  see  udaka]  in  phrase 
piti-vegen'unna  "bubbling  up  with  the  excitement  of  joy", 
overflowing  with  joy  Mhvs  19,  29  (expld  by  uggatacitta 
i.  e.  lofty,  exalted  C).  —  It  may  however  be  better  & 
more  in  keeping  with  Pali  word-formation  as  well  as  with 
meaning  &  interpretation  to  explain  the  word  as  ud  -\- 
na,  taking  °na  as  abs.  (base)-form  of  nam,  thus  lit.  "bent 
up",  i.  e.  raised,  high,  in  meaning  of  unnata.  Cp.  the 
exactly  similar  formation,  use  &  meaning  of  ninna  = 
ninnata.  Thus  unna  >  ninna  would  correspond  to  un- 
nata >  ninnata. 

Unnaka  [etym.?]  a  species  of  perfume  J  vi  537  (gloss 
kutantaja). 

Unnangala  (adj.)  [ud  4-  nangala,  on  meaning  of  ud  in  this 
case  see  ud]  in  phrase  °g  karoti,  according  to  Morris, 
y  F  TS.  1887,  I20  "to  make  an  up-ploughing,  to  turn 
up    etc.",    but    more   aptly  with  C.  on  J   vi.328  to  make 


"out-plough"  {not  "up-plough")  in  sense  of  out-of-work, 
i.  e.  to  make  the  people  put  their  ploughs  (or  work  in 
general)  away  and  prepare  for  a  festival;  to  take  a  holi- 
day. A  typical  "Jataka"-phrase ;  J  1.228;  n.296,  367;  ill. 
129,  414;  IV.355;  VI.328;  DhA  III. 10. 

Unnata  [pp.  of  unnamati.  Besides  this  form  we  find  unnata 

in  fig.  special  meaning,  q.  v.]  raised,  high,  lufiy,  in  high 
situation  (opp.  onata)  Pv  iv.6"  (=  sarain  PvA  262);  J 
1. 71;  II  369;  VI  487;  Miln  146,  387;  DA  1.45  See  also 
unnala. 

Unnati  (f)  [fr.  unnamati;  cp.  uiinati]  rising,  lifting  up, 
elevation   Miln  387  (^avnnati). 

Unnadati  [ud  -)-  nadati]  to  resound,  shout  out,  roar  J  i.ilo; 
II  90;  111.271,  325;  Miln  18;  aor.  unnadi  J  174;  Miln 
13.  —  Caus.  unnadeti  (q.  v  ). 

Unnama  [fr  ud-)-nam;  cp.  also  unnama  in  fig.  meaning] 
rising  ground,  elevation,  plateau  Kh  VII.7  =  Pv  1.5'  (= 
thala  unnata-padesa  PvA   29);   Miln   349;  DA  1.154. 

Unnamati  [ud  -f-  namati,  see  unnamati  in  fig.  meaning]  to 
rise  up,  ascend  Miln  117  (onamati  -|-);  Vism  306.  —  Caus. 
unnameti  (q.  v.).  —  pp.  unnara  &  unnata  (q.  v.). 

Unnala  &  Unnala  (adj.)  [Bdhgh.  has  ud  +  nala;  but  it  is 
either  a  dissimilated  form  for  ■■'uUala  (n  >  1  change  freq., 
cp.  P.  nangala  >  langala;  nalata  >  lalata)  from  ud  -)-  lal 
to  sport,  thus  meaning  "sporting,  sporty,  wild"  etc. ;  or 
(still  more  likely)  with  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  a  dial,  form  of 
unnata  P.  unnata,  although  the  P.  Commentators  never 
thought  of  that.  Cp.  with  this  the  BSk.  unnata  in  same 
stock  phrase  uddhata  unnata  capala  M  Vastu  1.305,  and 
the  Maralhic  Prk.  mula  =:  Sk.  mrta,  Pischel,  Gr.  §  244. 
To  these  may  be  added  P.  celakedu  >  cetakedu  J 
VI. 538]  showing  off,  insolent,  arrogant,  proud,  haughty, 
in  phrase  uddbata  unnala  capala  M  1.32;  S  1.61  =  204 
(trsld-  as  "muddled  in  mind,  puffed  up,  vain",  expl<^-  as 
uggala-nala  uddhata-tuccha-mana  K.  S.  318);  A  1.70,  266; 
n.26;  III  199,  355,  391;  It  113  (+ asamahita);  Dh  292 
(•j-  pamalta;  explJ.  as  "mana-nalai)  ukkhipitva  caranena 
unnala"  DhA  111.452);  Th  i,  634;  Pug  35  (^  uggata- 
nalo  tuccha-manar)  ukkhipitv.i  ti  attho  PugA  217). 

Unnahana  (f.)  [ud  -f  nah,  see  nayhati]  flattering,  tying 
or  pushing  oneself  on  to  somebody,  begging  Vism  27. 

Unnada  [fr.  ud  +  nad]  shout,  shouting  J  11 405. 

Unnadin  (adj.)  [fr.  ud  -f  nad]  shouting  out;  resounding, 
noisy,  loud,  tumultuous  Vin  111.336;  D  1.95,  143,  J  78; 
J  11.216. 

Unnadeti  [Caus.  of  unnadati]  to  make  resound  J  1.408 
(pathaviq);  11.34. 

Unnamin  (adj  )  [ud  -f-  nam  in  Caus.  form]  raisjng  or  rising; 
in    comb"    with  ninnamin  raised  &  bent,  high  &  low  A 

IV. 237  (of  cultivated  land). 

Unnameti  (unn°)  [Caus.  of  unnamati]  to  raise  DhsA  5; 
written  unnameti  (with  a  for  a  before  mutes  &  liquids) 
at  Sn   206  (inf.   uijnametave). 

Upa  —  [Vedic  upa;  Av.  upa  on,  up;  Gr.  iito  under,  t/a-ep 
over;  Lat.  sub  fr.  *(e)ks-upo;  Goth,  uf  under  &  on;  Ohg. 
uf  :=  Ags.  up  ^  E.  up;  Oir.  fo  under.  See  also  upari] 
prefix  denoting  nearness  or  close  touch  (cp.  similarly  a), 
usually  with  the  idea  of  approach  from  below  or  rest  on 
top ,  on,  upon,  up,  by.  —  In  compn-  a  upa  is  always 
contracted  to  flpa,  e.  g.  devOpatthana,  lokupaga,  puiiiiu- 
palthambhita.  —  Meanings:  (1)  (Rest):  on  upon,  up  — : 
■^kinna  covered  over;  "jivati  live  on  (cp.  anu°);  °ttham- 
bhita  propped  up,  sup-ported;  °cita  heaped  up,  ac-cumulated; 
"dhareti  hold  or  take  up;  °nata  bent  on;  "nissaya  foun- 
dation;   °nissita    depending    on    etc.  —    (2)  (Aim):  (out) 


Upa 


139 


Upakusita 


1^ 


up  to  (the  speaker  or  hearer);  cp.  the  meaniogs  developed 
out  of  this  as  'higher,  above"  in  upara,  upari,  upama  := 
Lat.  superus,  supremus  E.  g.  °kaddhati  drag  on  to ;  °kap- 
pati  come  to,  accrue;  "kappana  ad-ministering;  'kara  ser- 
vice to;  "kkhata  administered;  "gacchati  go  to,  ap-proach 
(cp.  upatigacchati) ;  "disati  ad-vise:  "dhavati  run  up  to: 
''nadati  to  sound  out;  "nikkhamati  come  out  up  to;  "nise- 
vita  gone  on  to  or  after;  "neti  bring  on  to;  etc.  —  (3) 
(Nearness):  close  by,  close  to,  near,  "ad-";  e.g.  °kannaka 
close  to  the  ear;  ^cSra  ap-plication;  "tthana  at-tending; 
tthita  ap-proached;  "titthati  stand  by,  look  after;  °dduta 
urged;  "nameti  place  close  to;  "^nibandhati  tie  close  to; 
°nisidati  sit  close  to  or  down  by.  —  (4)  (Intensive  use): 
<iuite,  altogether,  "up";  e.g.  "antika  quite  near;  "chindati 
cut  up.  —  (5)  (Diminutive  use  as  in  Lat.  subabsurdus; 
Gr.  i/T^Ao/xo;  whitish;  Oir.  fo-dord;  Cymr.  go-durdd 
murmur):  nearly,  about,  somewhat,  a  little,  secondary, 
by  — ,  miniature,  made  after  the  style  of,  e.  g.  °addha 
about  half;  "'kacchaka  like  a  little  hollow;  "kandakin 
(=  "pandukin?  whitish);  "deva  a  minor  god;  °nibha some- 
what similar  to;  ''nila  bluish;  upapurohita  minor  priest; 
uparajja  viceroyalty;  upalohitaka,  uparopa;  °vana  a  little 
forest,  etc.  Au/i".  The  nearest  semantic  affinity  of  upa  is  a". 

Upaka  ( — °)  [for  °upaga]  found  only  in  comli"-  kultlpaka 
where  second  k  stands  for  g.  through  assimilation  with 
first  k.  Only  with  ref.  to  a  bhikkhu  =  one  who  frequents 
a  certain  family  (for  the  purpose  of  getting  alms),  a  family 
friend,  associate  Vin  1.192,  208;  III. 84;  S  11.200  sq. ;  A 
111.258  sq.;  Nd-:  385';  Pv  lli.8»;  PvA  266.  —  f  kulti- 
pika  (bhikkhuni)  Vin  11.268;  iv.66.  —  Sporadic  in  gayh- 
upaka  (for  °upaga)  at  J   IV. 219. 

UpakaCCha  (° — )  [upa  +  kaccha']  only  in  comb"-  with 
''antare  lit.  "in  between  the  hips  or  loins  or  arm-pits", 
in  3  phrases  (cp.  Kern,  Toev.  11.140  s.  v.),  viz.  upakac- 
chantare  katva  taking  (it)  between  the  legs  J  1.63,  425, 
khipitva  throwing  (it)  into  the  armpits  J  v. 21 1  &  tha- 
petva  id.  J  v.46. 

UpakaCChaka  [upa  -f  kaccha  -)-  ka,  cp.  Sk.  upakaksa  in 
diff.  meaning]  (l)  [=  upa  +  kaccha'  +  ^^  ''l^^  ""  enclo- 
sure, adj.  in  the  form  of  a  hollow  or  a  shelter  J  1.158. 
(2)  [=  upa  -|-  kaccha'^  -|-  ^^  '"'^'^  'he  armpit,  a  hollow, 
usually  the  armpit,  but  occasionally  it  seems  to  be  applied 
to  the  hip  or  waist  Vin  111.39;  iv.260  (pudendum  mulie- 
bre);  Miln  293;  J  v.437  (=  kaccha'^). 

Upakattha  (adj.)  [pp.  of  upa  4-  karS  to  draw  up  or  near 
to]  approaching,  near  J  iv.213  (yava  upakattha-majjhantika 
till  nearly  noon).  Usually  in  foil,  two  phrases:  upakatthe 
kale  when  the  time  was  near,  i.  e.  at  the  approach  of 
mealtime  Vin  iv.175;  VvA  6,  294;  and  upakatthaya 
vassdpanayikaya  as  Lent  was  approaching  Vin  1.253; 
PvA  42;  VvA  44.  Cp.  vupakattha.  —  loc.  upakatthe  as 
adv.  or  prep,  'near,  in  the  neighbourhood  oT'  Nd^  639 
(=santike);  Davs  v.41   (so  read  for  upakanthe). 

Upaka(}(Jhat]  [upa  -j-  kaddhati,  cp.  upakattha]  to  drag  or 
pull  on  to  (w.  dat.),  or  down  to  D  1.180  (+  apakadd- 
hati);  111.127  (id.);  M  1.365;  S  1.49;  11.99;  Dh  311 
(nirayaya  =  niraye  nibbattapeti  DhA  III.484). 

Upakai^^tha  at  Davs  V.41  is  to  be  corrected  to  upakattha. 

Upakao(}akin  (Pv  It.i")  see  under  uppai^dukin. 

Upakaooa  (°— )  [upa  +  kanpa]  lit.  (spot)  near  the  ear,  only 
in  oblique  cases  or  in  der.  °ka  (q.  v.)  Th  I,  200  (upa- 
kaijnamhi  close  to  the  ear,  under  the  ear). 

UpakaOQaka  (adj.)  [upa  +  kappa  +  ka)  by  the  ear,  being 
at  or  on  the  ear  of  somebody,  only  in  loc.  as  adv.  upa- 
kapnake  secretly  Vin  1.237;  "-99;  'v.20,  271;  S  1.86; 
A  111.57;  SnA  186;  and  in  cpd.  'jappin  one  who  whis- 
pers into  the  ear  (of  another),  spreader  of  reports  A  III. 
136.  Cp.  kappajappaka  &  kanpajappana. 


Upakappatl  [upa  -\-  kappati]  intrs.)  to  be  beneficial  to  (w. 
dat.),  to  serve,  to  accrue  S  1.85;  Pv  1.4*  (==  nippajjati 
Pv.\  19);  1.5'  (petanaq);  l.io*  (^  viniyujjati  PvA  49); 
J  ^-35°;  VtK  8,  29  (petanar)),  27  (id.),  241;  Sdhp 
501,  504. 

Upakappana   (m.)    [fr.   upakappatl]   profit  PvA  29  (dan"), 

49  (an°). 


upakappana]  profitable  J  1.398 ; 


Upakappanaka  (adj.)  [fr. 

DhA   11.133. 

Upakaraoa  (nt.)  [fr.  upa  -f  kf]  help,  service,  support; 
means  of  existence,  livelihood  D  11.340;  A  11.86;  J  1.7; 
PvA  60  (commodities),  133  (°manussa,  adj.  suitable,  fit); 
Sdhp  69.  In  general  any  instrument  or  means  of  achieving 
a  pui'pose,  viz.  apparatus  of  a  ship  J  IV. 165  ;  tunnavaya° 
a  weaver's  outfit  J  11.364;  dabb°  fit  to  be  used  as  wood 
Vism  120;  dan°  materials  for  a  gift  PvA  105  (so  read 
&  cp.  upakkhata);  nahan°  bathing  requisites  VvA  248; 
Vitt°  luxuries  A  v.264  sq.,  283,  290  sq.;  PvA   71. 

Upakaroti  [upa  \-  karoti]  to  do  a  service,  serve,  help,  sup- 
port Th  2,  89  (aor.  upakasiij  =r  anuganhirj  santappesii) 
ThA  88).  —  pp.  upakkhata  (q.  v.). 

Upakara  [fr.  upa  -)-  kf,  cp.  upakarana]  service,  help,  be- 
nefit, obligation,  favour  D  111.187  sq.;  VaA  68;  PvA  8, 
18  (°aya  hoti  is  good  for);  Sdhp  283,  447,  530.  — 
bahi^pakara  (adj.)  of  great  help,  very  serviceable  or 
helpful  S  IV. 295;  PvA  114.  upakaraij  karoti  to  do  a 
favour,  to  oblige  PvA  42,  88,  159  (kata);  katupakara 
one  to  whom  a  service  has  been  rendered  PvA  116. 
-avaha  useful,  serviceable,  doing  good  PvA  86. 

Upakaraka  (adj.)  [fr.  upakara]  serviceable,  helping,  effec- 
tive J  v.99;  Vism  534.  —  f.  upakarika  i.  [benefactress, 
helper  J  in. 437.  —  2.  fortification  (strengthening  of  the 
defence)  on  a  city  wall  D  1. 105,  see  DA  1.274  &  cp. 
parikkhara.  —  3.  (philosophy)  =  cause  (that  which  is  an 
aid  in  the  persistence  or  happening  of  any  given  thing) 
Tikapatthana  i.ii. 

Upakarin  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  upakara;  cp.  ASk.  upakarin  Jtm. 
31'^]  a  benefactor  M  1.86;  J  ill. 11;  DA  1. 187;  Sdhp 
540,   546. 

Upaki^lja  [pp.  of  upakirati]  strewn  over  with  ( — °),  covered 
Vv  35'  (rucak°,  so  read  for  rajak°;  expl"!  by  okinna 
VvA   160). 

Upakiriya  (f)  [fr.  upa  -j-  kr]  implement,  ornament  J  v.408. 

Upakujatl  [upa  -\-  kSjati]  to  sing  to  (of  birds)  J  IV.296 
(knjantai]  u.  =  replies  w.  song  to  the  singing).  —  pp. 
upakujita  (q.  v.). 

Upakujita  ( — ")  [pp.  of  upakajati]  resounding,  filled  with 
the  hum  or  song  of  (birds)  J   iv.359;  PvA   154. 

Upakula  [upa  -|-  kSla]  embankment,  a  river's  bank,  river- 
side J  VI.26  (rukkh'ilpakulaje  the  trees  sprung  up  at 
its  bank). 

Upakulita  [derivation  uncertain]  used  of  the  nose  in  old 
age  Th  2,  258  (jaraya  pa^isedhika  viya  says  the  com- 
mentary. Morris  J P  TS.  1884,  74  trsl«-  obstructed;  Mrs. 
Kh.  D.  in  "Sis/ers"  takes  it  for  upakDlita  and  trsU-  seared 
and  shrivelled.  So  also  Ed.  MUller  j  K  A  S.  1919.  538. 
This  is  probably  right;  but  Oldenberg,  Pischel  and  Hardy 
all  read  upakUlita. 

Upakulita  [pp.  of  ku<J,  a  variant  of  kuth,  kvathati]  singed, 
boiled,  roasted  J  1.405  ("half-roasled"  :=  addhajjhamaka  C). 
See  also  upakusita. 

Upakusita  at  J  11.134  is  perhaps  faulty  for  "kulita,  which 
is  suggested  by  C.  expl"'  "kukkule  jhamo"  and  also  by 
V.  1.   °kujhita  (for   ka(thita   boiled,  sweltering,  hot).  The 


UpakDsita 


140 


Upacara 


variant  (gloss)  "knjita  mny  have  the  same  origin,  viz. 
"kulita,  was  however  interpreted  (v.  1.  BB.)  by  "kupita 
(meaning  "shaken,  disturbed  by  fire"). 

Upakka  see  uppakka. 

Upakkanta  [pp.  of  upakkamati]  I.  attacked  by  ( — °)  Miln 
112.  —  2.  attacking,  intriguing  or  plotting  against  (loc.) 
DA  1. 1 40. 

Upakkama  [fr.  upa  +  kratn]  (l)  lit.  (a)  going  to,  nearing, 
approach  ( — °)  VvA  72.  —  (b)  attack  Vin  II. 195;  Miln 
157;  DA  1.69,  71.  —  (2)  applied  (a)  in  general:  doing, 
acting,  undertaking,  act  S  1. 152  =  Sn  p.  126.  —  (b)  in 
special:  ways,  means,  i.e.  either  good  of  helpful  means, 
expedient,  remedy  Sn  575;  Miln  151,  152;  or  bad  or 
unfair  means,  treachery,  plotting  Th  I,  143;  J  IV. 115 
(punishment);  Miln   135,   176. 

Upakkamati   [upa  +  kamati   of  kram]  to  go  on  to,  i.  e. 

(I)  to  attack  M  1.86  ;=  Ud  71.  —  (2)  to  undertake  Vin 
lll.lio.   III.  —  (3)  to  begin  Vin  IV.316;  DA  1.318. 

Upakkamana  (nt.)  [fr.  upa  4-  kram]  going  near  to,  attacking 
J   IV. 1 2. 

Upakkitaka  [fr.  upa  -f  kri  to  buy]  a  buyer,  hawker,  dealer 
comb''-  with  bliataka  DhA  1. 119  =  I'd  23  (C.  expl^  by 
"yo  kahapanadlhi  kinci  kinati  so  upakkitako  ti  vuccali"); 
Ps   11.196  (?  T.  upakkhittaka). 

Upakkilittha  [pp.  of  upa  -|-  kHd  or  klis,  cp.  kilesa  &  next] 
soiled,  stained,  depraved,  impure  S  1.179;  A  1.207  (citta); 
Vism   13. 

Upakkilesa  [fr.  upa  -{■  kliS]  anything  that  spoils  or  obstructs, 
a  minor  stain,  impurity,  defilement,  depravity,  Vin  11.295 
(cp.  SnA  487  &  VvA  134  &  see  abbha);  M  1.36,  91;  D 
111.42  sq.,  49  sq.,  201;  S  V.92  sq.  (panca  cittassa  upak- 
kilesa), 108,  115;  A  I.IO  (agantuka),  207  (cittassa),  253 
(olarika  etc.);  n.53  (candima-suriyanar)  samana-brahma- 
nanari),  67:  111.16  (jatartipassa,  cittassa),  3S6  sq.;  IV.177 
(vigata);  v.  195;  Ps  1.164  (eighteen);  Pug  60;  Dhs  1059, 
1 1 36;  Nett  86  sq.,  94,  114  sq.;  Sdhp  216,  225  (as 
upaklesa).  Ten  stains  at   Vism  633. 

Upakkuttha  [pp.  of  upakkosati]  blamed,  reproached,  cen- 
sured, faulty  D  1. 113  (an°);  Sn  p.  115  (id.);  J  111.523; 
DA   1.2 1 1. 

UpakkOSa  [fr.  upa  -|-  kru§]  censure,  reproach  J   vi.489. 

Upakkosati  [upa  -|-  kosati]  to  scold,  reprove,  l)Iame  D  I. 
161;  J   111.436,   523;  iv.8i,  317,  409. 

Upakkhata  &  "ta  [pp.  of  upakaroti]  done  as  a  favour  or 
service,  given,  prepared,  administered  D  1.1^7  (=  sajjita 
DA  1.294);  Pv  ir.8«(=  sajjita  PvA  107);  J  VI. 139;  Miln  156. 

Upakkhalati  [upa  -f-  khalati]  to  stumble,  hip  I)  11.250; 
M  11209;  A  iii.ioi;  J  111.433. 

Upakkhalana  (ut.)  [fr.  prec]  stumbling,  tripping  Vism  500. 

Upakkhittaka  at  Ps  11. 196  see  upakk°. 

Upakhandha  [upa  -\-  khandha]  lit.  upper  (side  of  the) 
trunk,  back,  shoulder  J   iv.210  (=  khandha  C). 

Upaga  (always  as  °upaga)  (adj.)  [upa  -f-  ga]  —  I.  going  to, 
getting  to,  reaching,  in  phrases  kay°,S  11.24;  akas'anaiic'aya- 
tan°  etc.  Ps  1.84;  kay°  S  11.24;  brahmalok"  Pv  II.I3'3; 
yathakamm°  D  1.82.  —  2.  coming  into,  experiencing,  having, 
as  vikappan"  according  to  option  Vin  iv.283;  phal"  bearing 
fruit,  &  p«pph°  having  flowers,  in  flower  PvA  275.  — 
3.  attached  to,  belonging  to,  being  at  J  1.51  (hatth"); 
VvA  12  (id.  -|-  padflpaga).  —  4.  in  phrase  gayh°  lit.  "ac- 
cessible to  the  grip",  acquisition  of  property,  theft  J 
IV. 219  (T.  gayhiipaka);  Miln  325;  DhA   11.29;  PvA  4. 


UpagaCChati  [upa  -f-  gacchati]  —  I.  to  come  to,  go  to, 
approach,  flow  to  (of  water)  D  11.12;  PvA  12  (vasa- 
natthanaij),  29,  32  (vasai))  132;  ger.  "gantva  PvA  70 
(attano  santikai]),  &  "gamma  S  11.17,  20.  —  2.  to  undergo, 
go  (in)  to,  to  begin,  undertake  Sn  152  (ditthir)  anupa- 
gamma);  J  1.106  (vassarj);  PvA  42  (id.);  J  1.200;  niddar) 
upagacchati  to  drop  off  into  sleep  PvA  43  (aor.  upa- 
gacchi,  MSS.  °gafichi),  105,   128.  —  pp.  upagata   (q.v.). 

Upagatlhana  (f.)  [abstr.  of  upa  -f  gfh]  taking  up,  keeping 
up.  meditating  Miln  37. 

Upaga^hati  [upa  -(-  ganhati]  to  take  up  (for  meditation) 
Miln   38. 

Upagata  [pp.  of  upagacchati]  —  i.  gone  to,  come,  ap- 
proached (intrs.)  Sn  708  (asan°  =  nisinna  SnA  495); 
PvA  77  (santikai]),  78,  79  (petalokai)),  123.  —  2.  under- 
going, coming  or  come  under,  overpowered,  suffering  Nd^ 
under  asita  (=:  ajjhupagata  in  same  conn,  at  A  V.187); 
Pv   Ml")  (khuppipas°);  PvA  60  (=  abhibhuta). 

Upagamana  (nt.)  [fr.  upa  -f  gam]  approaching,  going  or 
coming  to,  undergoing,  undertaking  Vin  11.97  (-(-  ajjhupag°); 
Nett  27;   Vism  600;   PvA  42  (vass°). 

Upagamanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  upagamana]  going  to,  one  who 
goes  to  (with  ace.)  PvA   168  (=  "upaga). 

Upagajlta  [pp.  of  upagalati]  flowing  out,  spat  or  slobbered 
out  J    V.471   ("khelo;   v.  1.  paggharita). 

Upagamin    (adj.)   [fr.  upa  -f   gam,    cp.   °upaga]  going  to, 

undergoing,  experiencing  A  ii.6  (jati  jar°). 

Upaguhati  [upa  -(-guhati]  to  embrace  J  1.346,  349;  11.424; 
111.437;  V.157,  328,  384.  —  ger.  upaguyha  J  vi.300. 

Upagghata  [pp.  of  next]  scented,  smelled,  kissed  J  vi.543 
(C.  sisamhi  upasinghita). 

Upagghayati  [upa  +  ghra,  see  ghayatii]  to  smell  at,  in 
sense  of  "to  kiss"  J  v.328  (also  inf.   upagghatui]). 

Upaghatfita  [pp.  of  upaghatteti]  knocked  or  knocking 
against  J   1. 26   (v.  179). 

Upaghata  [fr.  upa  +  (g)lian,  cp.  ghata]  hurting,  injuring,  _ 

injury  M  111.237;  .S  11.218;  iv.323  sq. ;  A  III. 173;  Th   i,  ■ 

583;    Miln    274,    307,    347;    DA    1.273.    3t>°  °t)t  hurling  ■ 
others,  kindness  Dh   185. 

Upaghatana  (nt.)  [fr.  upaghata]  hurting  DhA  111.237  (an°). 

Upaghatika  (adj.)  [fr.  upaghata]  injuring,  offending  Vin  11.13. 

Upaghatin  (adj.)  [fr.  upaghata]   hurting,  injuring  J  111.523. 

Upacaya  [fr.  upa  +  ci,  cp.  caya  &  acaya]  heaping  up, 
gathering,  accumulation,  heap.  As  t.t.  with  ref.  to  kamma 
"conservation",  with  ref.  to  body  &  form  "integration". 
(See  discussion  &  defin.  at  Cpd.  253;  /)/is  trsl.  195).  — 
D  1.75  {~  odana  =  kummas^upacayo,  see  under  kaya); 
Dhs  582,  642  (rupassa  u.  =  ayatananai]  acayo),  864; 
Vbh  147,  151  sq.;  Kvu  520;  Kelt  113;  Vism  449;  DA 
1.220;  PvA   198  (but  v.  I.  paccayassa  preferable). 

Upacarati  [upa  -f-  carati]  to  deal  with,  handle,  use  J  VI. 
180.  —  pp.  upacinna  &  upacarita  (q.  v.). 

Upacarita  [pp.  of  upacarati]  practised,  served,  enacted, 
performed  Miln  359,  360. 

Upacara  [fr.  upa  +  car] —  1.  approach,  access  Vin  11.120, 
152;  1V.304;  J  1.83,  172;  Dhs.\  328  (phal°).  —  2.  habit, 
practice,  conduct  Vin  11.20  (dassan°);  SuA  140  (id.);  J 
111.280.  —  3.  way,  means  application,  use  of  (esp.  of 
spells  etc.)  J  111.280  (mantassa);  V1.180;  Miln  153,  154 
(dur°  an  evil  spell);  VvA  127  (gram.  t.t.  kaian").  —  4. 
entrance,  access,  i.  e.  immediate  vicinity  or  neighbourhood 


Upacara 


141 


Upatthana 


of  (— °)  J  IV. 1 82  (nagar'=);  usually  as  gam°  Vin  1.109; 
111.46;  IV.230;  KhA  77;  SnA  83,  179.  -  5.  attention, 
attendance  Vin  IV.272;  J  VI. 180;  Miln  154.  —  6.  civility, 
polite  behaviour  J  11.56;  VI.102.  —  7.  On  upacSra  as 
philos.  t.t.  and  its  relation  to  appana  see  Dhs  trsl"-  53, 
54;  CpJ.  55;  Mystic  p.  XI.  Thus  used  of  samadhl  (neigh- 
bourhood-, or  access-concentration,  distinguishing  it  from 
appana-samadhi)  at  Vism  85,  126,   144  and  passim. 

Upadka  (f.)  [connected  with  Sk.  upadikS,  although  the 
relation  is  not  quite  clear.  Attempts  at  explns.  by  Trencker 
Notes  62  (*utpadika  >  upatika  >  upacika)  &  Kern,  Ton/. 
p.  102  (upacika  =  Vedic  upajika,  this  fr.  upajihika  for 
°dihika,  vv.  11.  upadehiha  &  upadika).  It  may  however 
be  a  direct  der.  from  upa  -j-  cJ,  thus  meaning  "making 
heaps,  a  builder"]  the  termite  or  white  ant  Vin  11. 11 3, 
148,  152;  111.151;  M  1.306;  J  111.320;  IV.331;  Miln  363, 
392;  Vism  62;  DhA  11.25;  HL'S. 

Upaciqoa  [pp.  of  upacarati]  used,  frequented,  known  (as 
valuej  J  VI.  1 80. 

Upaclta  [pp.  of  upacinati]  —  I.  heaped  up,  accumulated, 
collected,  produced  (usually  of  puniia  merit,  &  kamma 
karma)  Sn  697;  KhA  132;  SnA  492;  VvA  7,  271,  342; 
PvA  30,  150.  —  2.  built  up,  conserved  (of  the  body) 
Miln  232;  DA  1.220. 

Upacitatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  upacita]  storing  up,  accumulation 
Dhs  431. 

Upacinati  [upa  +  ci]  —  l.  to  collect,  heap  up,  accumulate 
(punnai)  or  papaij)  VvA  254;  PvA  8,  241.  —  2.  to  con- 
centrate, pay  attention  Th  i,  199  (C.  upacetuij  for  oce- 
tui)  T.);  J  V.339  (r=oloketi).  —  Pass,  upaciyyatl  Th  i, 
807.  —  pp.  upacita  (q.  v.). 

UpaCCa  =  uppacca  (q.  v.)  "flying  up"  (=  uppatitvS  PvA 
103)  at  Th  2,  248  (=:  ThA  205,  where  v.  1.  and  gloss 
upecca  &  upacca,  expld.  by  upanetva),  as  well  as  at  Pv 
II. 7"  (=  PvA  103  where  readg  upaccha;  &  gloss  upacca 
&  upecca). 

Upaccaga  [upa  -f-  ati  +  aga  of  gam]  y^  sg.  pret.  of  up4- 
ligacchati  (q.  v.)  to  escape,  pass,  go  by;  to  overcome  Sn 
333  (ma  upaccaga  =  ma  atikkami  SnA  339)  =  Th  2,  5 
(=  ma  atikkami  ThA  12);  Sn  636,  641,  827  (:=  accaga 
atikkanta  Nd'  167);  Dh  315,  412,  417  (=  atikkanta  DhA 
IV.225);  Bu  11.43.  —  pl-  upaccagug  S  1.35;  A  111.311. 

UpaCCati  (?)  in  phrase  "akkhlni  upacciqsu"  at  J  VI. 187  is 
probably  faulty  for  apaciyit)su  aor.  of  apaciyyati,  Pass, 
of  apacinati  (cp.  upaciyyali  >  upacinati)  "the  eyes  failed", 
lost  power,  went  bad;  cp.  apacaya  falling  off,  diminution. 
If  not  this  reading  we  should  suggest  upaccbijjiijsu  from 
upacchindati  "were  destroyed",  which  however  is  not  quite 
the  sense  wanted. 

Upacchindati  [upa  +  chindati]  to  break  up  or  off,  to 
destroy,  interrupt,  to  stop  Sn  972  (pot.  °chinde);  J  IV. 
127;  Nd'  502;  ThA  267;  PvA  31  (kulavaqso  upacchijji 
aor.  pass.);  Vism  164,  676  (bhavangai]). 

Upacchlnna]  [pp.  of  upacchindati]  cut  off,  interrupted  J  1. 
477;  Miln   306. 

UpaCChubhati  [upa  +  chubhati  from  k^ubh  or  chubh,  see 
chuddha,  khobha,  niccbubhati,  nicchodeti]  to  throw  at  M 
1.364  (vv.  U.  "chumbh*,  "cubh"). 

Upaccheda  [fr.  upa  -|-  chid]  breaking  or  cutting  off, 
destruction,  stoppage,  interruption  M  1.245,  3^7  (paij° 
murder);  J  1.67;  Miln  134  (paven°  break  of  tradition) 
PvA  82  (kulavai)s'') ;  DhA  1.152  (ahar  °i)  karoti  to  prevent 
fr.  taking  food);  DA  1. 136,  159. 

Upacchedaka  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  upaccheda]  destroying,  breaking 
off,  stopping,  interrupting  J  1.418  (vacan");  iv.357;  DA 
1.69  (jivit'  indriy");  VvA   72  (id.). 


Upajanatl  [upa  -|-  janlti]  to  learn,  acquire  or  have  know- 
ledge of  (w.  gen.  or  instr.),  to  know  Vin  1.272  (saqya- 
massa);  11.181  (gharavSs'atthena);  A  1.50  (dvinnai)  dham- 
maoai]  upanMsin).  —  fut.  upanfiissati  (&  upanftassatl 
Sn  716)  Sn  701,  716  (=  upaiinayissati  kathayissati  SnA 
498);  J  V.215.  —  pp.  upaii&ata  (q.  v.). 

Upajivatl  [upa  +  jfvati]  to  live  on  (w.  ace),  to  depend 
on,  to  live  by  somebody,  to  be  supported  by  (ace.)  D 
1.228;  S  1.217;  Sn  612  sq.;  Th  i,  943;  J  111.309,  338; 
iv.271  (=  anujivati);  Pv  11.9M  (Ankuraq  u.  ti  tai)  nissSya 
jivanti  PvA   134);  Miln   231. 

Upajivlka  (adj.)  [=apajlvin]  Sdhp  501  (see  next). 

Upajivin  (— °)  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  upa  +  jiv]  living  on,  sub- 
sisting by  A  11.135  (phal°);  Sn  217  (para-datt°),  J  1.227 
(vohar°);  iv.380;  Pug  51;  Miln  160  (Satth°);  VvA  141 
(sipp°).  f.  upajivini  in  rup°  (itthi)  a  woman  earning  her 
living  by  her  beauty  (i.e.  a  courtesan)  Miln  122;  PvA 
46;  cp.  kilittha-kamm°  gaijika  PvA   195. 

Upajuta  (nt.)  [upa  -f-  jQta]  stake  at  game  J  vi.192. 

Upajjha  see  next, 

Upajjhaya  [Vedic  upadhySya,  upa  -f  adhi  -f-  i,  1ft.  "one 
who  is  gone  close  up  to"]  a  spiritual  teacher  or  pre- 
ceptor, master.  Often  combd  with  acariya  e.  g.  Vin  i, 
119;  Nd'  350;  the  acariya  being  only  the  deputy  or 
substitute  of  the  upajjhaya.  Vin  1.45,  53,  62,  120;  iv. 
130;  S  1.185;  A  11.66,  78;  111.69;  Sn  346;  DhA  11.93; 
PvA  55,  60,  230.  —  A  short  form  of  upajjhaya  is 
upajjha,  found  in  the  Vinaya,  e.g.  at  Vin  1.94;  111.35; 
with  f.  upajjha  Vin  iv.326, 

Upanii&ta  [pp.  of  upajanati]  found  out,  learnt,  known  Vin 
1.40;  J  V.325,  368;  A  1.61. 

Upattita  [upa  -f  attita,  from  ard,  see  ajfita]  pained,  terri- 
fied ;  overcome,  overwhelmed  J  vi,82  (visavegena), 

Upatthapetl  &  "tt^apetl  [Cans.  II.  of  upa(thahati]  I.  to 
provide,  procure,  get  ready,  put  forth,  give  Vin  11,210; 
D  II. 19;  M  1.429;  J  1.266;  IV.2;  v,2i8;  Pug  59,  68; 
Miln  15,  257,  366  (panlyar)  paribhojanlyaij),  397;  DA 
1,270;  Sdhp  356,  —  2.  to  cause  to  be  present  Vin  1.45; 
S  1. 170;  Pv  iv.i'o.  —  3.  to  cause  to  be  waited  on  or  to 
be  nursed  A  v,72  (gilanai)  upatthatui]  va  upatthapetuq 
va).  —  4.  to  keep  (a  servant)  for  hire  Vin  11.267.  — 
5.  to  ordain  Vin  1.62,  83. 

Upatthahatl  &  "tthatl  [upa  +  stha,  cp.  upatitjhati]  i 
(trs.)  to  stand  near  or  at  hand  (with  acc.1,  to  wait  on, 
attend  on,  serve,  minister,  to  care  for,  look  after,  nurse 
(in  sickness)  Vin  1.50,  302;  iv.326;  M  iu.25;  S  1.167; 
A  111.94;  V.72;  Sn  82  =  481  (imper.  °t(hahassu);  J  1.67 
(ppr.  °tthahamana),  262  (ppr.  °tthahanto);  iv.131;  v.396; 
Dpvs  II. 16;  PvA  19,  20.  —  aor.  upaf^bahi  PvA  14,  42, 
82.  —  inf.  upatthatui]  A  v,72 ;  PvA  20.  —  ger.  upa- 
tthabitva  PvA  76,  —  grd,  upatfhatabba  Vin  1,302;  PvA 
20.  —  pp.  upattblta  (q,  v.),  —  2.  (intrs,)  to  stand  out 
or  forth,  to  appear,  to  arise,  occur,  to  be  present  M  1,104 
sq. ;  A  iv,32,;  J  iv.203  (mante  anupatthahante  since  the 
spell  did  not  occur  to  him);  v,207  ;  Miln  64;  ThA  258, — 
aor,  upattbasl  J  1,61;  iv,3;  PvA  42,  —  Caus,  I.  upa- 
ttheti;  Caus.  II.  upattbapeti  &  "ttbfipeti  (q.  v.).  —  Pass, 
upattbiyati  J  iv.131  (ppr.  °tthiyamana),  &  upattbabiyati 
A  111.94  (PP''-  °ttliahiyamana). 

Upatthaka  [fr.  upa  -|-  sthS,  cp.  BSk.  upasthaka  M  Vastu 
1.25 1,  and  upasthayaka  Divy  426;  Av.  S.  1.21.);  11.85, 
112.]  a  servitor,  personal  attendant,  servant,  "famulus". 
Ananda  was  the  last  u.  of  Gotama  Buddha  (see  D  1.206 ; 
Th  I,  1041  f. ;  ThA  in  Brethren  loc.  cit. ;  Vin  1,179 
(Sagato  u.),  194;  11.186;  111.66;  iv.47 ;  D  1.150  (Nagito); 
S  III. 113;  A  I.121;  111.31,  189;  J  I  15,  100 (a  merchant's); 
11.416;  Pug  28;  DhA  11.93;  VvA  149;  PvA  211.  —  agg" 


Upatthana 


142 


Upaddavati 


main  follower,  chief  attendant  D  11.6;  gilan°  an  attendant 
in  sickness,  nurse  Vin  1.303;  A  1.26;  sangh"  one  who 
looks  after  the  community  of  Bhikkhus  Vin  1. 216;  A  1.26; 
111.39.  —  dupatthaka  &  supatthaka  a  bad  (&  good)  at- 
tendant Vin  1.302. 

-kula  a  family  entertaining  (or  ministering  to)  a  thera 
or  a  bhikkhu,  a  family  devoted  to  the  service  of  (gen.) 
Vin  1.83  (Sariputtassa),  213:  111.62,  66,  67;  iv.283,  286; 
VvA  120. 

Upatthana  (m.)  [fr.  upa  +  Sthft]  —  l-  attendance,  wai- 
ting on,  looking  after,  service,  care,  ministering  A  1.15I1 
225;  Sn  138;  J  1.226,  237,  291;  ii.ioi;  iv.138;  vi.351. 
Ps  1.107;  11.7  sq.,  28,  230;  PvA  104,  145  (pacceka- 
buddhassa),  176;  VvA  75  (ther°);  Sdhp  560.  —  2.  wor- 
ship, (divine)  service  D  III. 188  sq.  (°i)  gacchati);  PvA 
122.  Buddh°  attendance  on  a  Buddha  PvA  93;  ThA  18.  — 
3.  a  slate  room  J  llt.257. 

-sambhara  means  of  catering,  provisions  PvA  20.  -saia 
hall  for  attendance,  assembly  room,  chapel  [cp.  BSk. 
upasthana-sala  Dlvy  207]  Vin  1.49,  139;  11. 153,  208;  III. 
70  (at  Vesali);  iv.15,  42;  D  11.119  (*'  Vesali);  S  ix.280; 
V.321;  A  11.51,  197;  111.298;  DhA  1.37,  38;   111.413. 

Upatthapana  (nt.)  [fr.  upa  +  Stha]  attendance,  service 
Vin  IV.  291. 

Upatthlta  [pp.  of  upajthahati  or  upatitthati,  cp.  BSk.  upa- 
sthiia  Divy  281,  342]  —  I.  furnished  provided,  served, 
got  ready,  honoured  with  Sn  295  (°asmii)  yannasmii)); 
J  V.  173  (annene  panena);  Pv  1.5'^  (=;  s^jjita  patiyatta 
PvA  25);  11.98  (=  payirupasita  PvA   116);  PvA   132.  — 

2.  come,  come  about,  appeared,  arrived;  present,  existing 
Sn  130  (bhattakale  upatthite  when  mealtime  has  coiife), 
898;    Dh    235;    Miln    274;    PvA    124    (danakale    °e).  — 

3.  standing  up  (ready),  keeping  in  readiness  M  1.77;  A 
11.206;  Sn  708  (=  thito  C);  Pv  ii.g"  (ready  for  service, 
serving,  waiting  upon  cp.  PvA   135. 

-sati  with  ready  attention,  one  whose  attention  is  fixed, 
concentrated  Vin  1.63;  D  111.252,  282;  S  IV.186;  A  III. 
251;  P"g  35- 

Upatthetl  [Cans,  of  upatthahati]  to  make  serve  or  attend ; 
sakkaccaq  u  (with  ace.)  to  bestow  respect  (upon)  Vin 
IV.275.  f"'-  °essati  Vin  iv.291.  to  place,  fix  (parimukhar) 
satii)  upatthapelva)  Vibh.  244. 

Upatjayhati  [upa  +  dayhati]   to  be  burnt  up  Miln  277. 

Upa<j(Jha  (adj.-nt.)  [upa  +  addha,  used  abs.  whereas  addha 
only  in  comp" ,  cp.  also  BSk.  upardha  Divy  86,  144, 
514;  AvS  1. 211,  240]  half  Vin  1. 281  ("kasina);  n.200 
(°asana);  J  iii.li  (°rajja);  Vism  320  (°gama);  DhA  1.15, 
205  ("uposathakamma);  11.85;  KhA  239  (°gatha);  SnA 
298;  VvA  38,  61,   120;  PvA  209,   276. 

Upatappati  [upa  -j-  tappati')]  to  be  vexed  or  tormented 
J  V.90;  DhsA  42. 

Upatapa  [fr.   upa  -\-  tap]   vexation,  trouble  Vism   166. 

Upatapana  (nt.)  [upa  -|-  tapana]  vexation,  tormenting, 
torture  J   IV.13;   ThA  243. 

Upataplka  (adj.)  [fr.  upatapa]  causing  pain,  molesting 
J  n.224. 

Upatapetl  [upa  -f-  tSpeti]  to  cause  pain,  to  vex,  torment, 
harass  J  11.178,  224;  iv.li;   DhsA  42  (vibadhati   -f). 

Upatitthati  [upa  +  stha,  cp.  upatthahati,  °tthati  etc.]  lit. 
"to  stand  by",  to  look  after,  to  worship  Pv  111.1I8;  J  n.73 
(adiccai)  =  namassamano  titthati  C);  Miln  231  (ger. 
"titthitva);  J  V.173  ("liuhate).  pp.  upat^hita  (q.  v.). 

Upatta    [upa   -f   akta,    pp.    of   afij]    smeared,    spread    over 

M  1.343;  J  '-sgg- 

Upatthaddha  [upa  -)-  thaddha,  pp.  of  upatthambhati]  — 
I.  stiff   Vin    III.37    (angani).  —    2.  supported  or  held  up 


by,  resting  on,  founded  on,  relying  on  Th  1,  1058,  1194; 
2,  72  (yobbanena);  J  1.47  (v.  267:  mettabalena);  V.  121, 
301;  Kvu  251  (cakkhu  dhamm°  "when  it  is  the  medium 
of  an   idea");   Nett   117;   Miln    no  (karu55a-bal°). 

Upatthambha  [fr.  upa  +  stambh]  —  i.  a  support,  prop, 
stay  Miln  355,  415,  417;  Sdhp  565.  —  2.  relief,  ease 
Vin  Iir.ii2.  —  3.  encouragement  J   v.270;  DhA  1.279. 

Upatthambhalca  (adj.  nt.)  [fr.  upatthambha)  holding  up, 
supporting,  sustaining  DhsA   153. 

Upatthambhana  (nt.)  =  upatthambha  Miln  36 ;  J  1.447 ; 
DA  1.124;  ThA  258;  Vism  279. 

Upatthambhita  [pp.  of  upatthambheti]  propped  up,  sup- 
ported, sustained  J  I.107;  Miln  36;  DA  1234;  PvA  117 
(pui5na-phal°),   148  (utu-aharehi  u.). 

Upatthambheti  [upa  -f-  thambheti,  Caus.  of  thambhati]  to 
make  firm,  shore  up,  support,  prop  up  J  1.127  [ppr. 
°ayamana),  447;  DA  1.113;  DhA  111.73  (°ayamana  ppr.). . — 
pp.  upatthambhita. 

Upatthara  [fr.  upa  +  stf]  »  (floor)  covering,  carpet,  rug 
D  1. 103  (rath°);  J   11.126  (pabbat°);  II. 534. 

Upatheyya  [for  upadheyya,  see  Trenckner,  JVo/es  62 '8]  a 
cushion  J  VI.490,   513. 

Upadagsitar  [n.  ag.  fr.  upadaqseti]  one  who  shows  Pug 
49  (where  upadharjsita  is  to  be  corrected  to  upad°,  as 
already  pointed  out  by  Mortis  / F  T  S.  1887,  126.  The 
word  seems  to  be  a  crux  to  commentators,  philologists, 
and  translators,  like  upadaqseti.  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  keeps 
to  the  reading  upah",  tries  to  connect  it  with  Sk.  dharsati 
&  trsls-  "one  who  confirms".  The  Pug  A  leaves  the  word 
unexplained). 

UpadaQSeti  [=  upadasseti  with  °ai)s°  for  °ass°  like  dhai)- 
seti  =  Sk.  dharsayati,  haqsa  =  harsa  etc.  only  in  poetical 
passages]  to  cause  to  appear,  to  manifest  M  11. 120;  S  I. 
64,  65  (of  gods,  to  become  resplendent,  to  show  divers 
colour-tones);  A  n.84  =  HI. 139  =  264  =  Pug  49  (to 
show  pleasure);  Th  1.335,  '"  bring  forth  (a  goad,  and  so 
incite,  urge  on);  Vin  iv.309. 

Upadasseti  (upa  -|-  dasseti,  Caus.  of  dr6,  cp.  also  upa- 
daijseti]    lo  make  manifest,  to  show  Miln  276,  316,  347. 

Upadahati  [upa  +  dahati']  to  put  down,  supply,  furnish, 
put  on;  give,  cause,  make  Vin  iv.149;  D  II. 135  (vippa- 
tisarai]);  A  1.203  (dukkhar));  Miln  109,  139,  164,  286, 
383.  grd.  pass.  °dahatabba  to  be  given  or  caused  Vin 
11.250  =  A  III. 197  (vippatisSra).  Cp.  upadhi. 

Upadayaka  (adj.)  (— ")  [fr.  upa  -f  da]  giving,  bestowing 
Sdhp  319. 

Upadittha  [pp.  of  upadisati]  pointed  out,  put  forth,  speci- 
fied Miln    144  (panha). 

Upadisati  [upa  -|-  disati]  to  point  out,  show,  advise,  specify 
J  V.  457  (sippaq);  Miln  21  (dhamma-maggai)).  —  pp. 
upadittha  (q.  v.). 

Upadlssati  [upa  -f-  dissati]  to  be  seen  (open),  to  be  shown 
up,  to  be  found  out  or  discovered  Sn  140  (pres.  upadis- 
sare  =  °nti  SnA  192). 

Upadeva  [upa  -|-  deva,  on  use  of  upa  in  this  meaning  see 
upa  5]  a  secondary,  lesser,  minor  god  PvA   136. 

Upadesa  [fr.  upadisati]  pointing  out,  indication,  instruction, 
advice  PvA  26  (tadupadesena  read  for  tadupad";  KhA 
208  differs  at  id.  p.);  KhA   100;  Sdhp  227. 

Upaddava  [upa  -j-  dava'  of  dru]  lit.  rushing  on ;  accident, 
misfortune,  distress,  oppression  S  11.210;  A  l.ioi;  Sn  51; 
Dh  338  (an");  DhA  1.16;  Sdhp   267,  398. 

Upaddavati  [fr.  upa  -|-  dru]  to  annoy,  trouble  DA  1.213. 
—  pp.  upadduta  (q.  v.l. 


Upadduta 


143 


Upanikkhepa 


Upadduta  [pp-  of  upaddavati]  overrun,  oppressed,  annoyed, 
overcome,  distressed  Vin  11.170;  111.144,  283;  S  11.210; 
iV.29;  J  1.26,  61,  339;  II. 102;  IV.324,  494;  Pv  ii.ioS; 
Vism  24  (=  apakata);  Miln  279;  VvA  311  (attita-j-); 
PvA  61.  an°  unmolested  PvA  195;  anupaddutatta  state 
of  not  being  molested  VvA  95. 

Upadhar|sltar  &  Upadhagseti  at  Pug  49  is  to  be  read 
upad°  (q.  v.). 

Upadhana  (adj.  nt.)  [fr.  upa  +  dha,  cp.  upadahati]  "put- 
ting under",  i.e.  (l)  a  pillow,  cushion  D  1.7;  S  11.267  ^ 
Miln  366  (kalingar');  S  in. 145;  A  1.137,  181;  111.50; 
J  IV.201 ;  V.506  (tamb°  ^  ratt"  C);  (2)  imposing,  giving, 
causing  Dh  291   dukkh"). 

Upadhaneti  [f.  upa  +  dha]  to  suppose,  think,  reflect 
DhA  I  239  (should  be  corrected  to  upadhareti). 

Upadharana  (m.)  [fr.  upa  -|-  dhf)  "receptacle",  milk-pail 
D  11.192;  A  IV. 393;  J  VI. 503.  See  kai]s°.  Kern,  Toev.  I. 
142  proposes  corruption  fr.  kaijs'iipadohana,  which  latter 
however  does  not  occur  in  Pali. 

Upadharaina  (f)  [cp.  upadharana]  calculation  VvA  7. 

Upadharita  [pp.  of  upadhareti]  considered,  reflected  upon 
Dh  1.28;  sCipadh°  Miln   10;  diipadh"  Vib  lv.275. 

Upadhareti  (Caus.  of  upa  -|-  dhf,  cp.  dhareli  3]  I.  "to 
hold  or  take  up"  (cp.  semantically  Lat.  teneo  ^  E.  tenet), 
to  reason  out,  conclude,  reflect,  surmise,  know  as  such  & 
such,  realise  J  1.338;  DhA  1.28,  41;  1115,  20,  37,  96; 
:v.l97  (an°J;  VvA  48,  200  (an°),  234,  260  (an°),  324; 
PvA  119  (for  janati).  —  2.  to  look  out  for  (ace.)  J  in. 
65;  VI. 2. 

Upadhavatl  [upa  -f-  dhavati  l]  to  run  up  to  or  after,  fall 
upon,  surround  Vin  11.207;  iv.260  (pp.  °dhavita);  S  1.185 ; 
S  11.26  (aparantar));  Th  1,  1209;  Miln  209;  VvA  256; 
PvA   154,   168,   173   (for  padhavita). 

Upadhl  [fr.  upa  -|-  dha,  cp.  upadahati  &  BSk.  upadhi 
Divy  50,  224,  534]  1.  putting  down  or  under,  founda- 
tion, basis,  ground,  substratum  (of  rebirth)  S  1.117,  124, 
134,  186;  A  11.24  ("sankhaya);  III. 382  (id.);  iv.150 
(°kkhaya);  It  21,  69;  Sn  364,  728  (upadhi-nidana  dukkha 
=  vatta-dukkhai)  SnA  505),  789,  992;  Nd'  27,  141 ;  Nd^ 
157;  Vbh  33S;  Nett  29;  DhA  IV.33.  —  (2)  clinging  to 
rebirth  (as  impeding  spiritual  progress),  attachment  (almost 
syn.  with  kilesa  or  tanha,  cp.  nirupadhi  &  anupadhi); 
S  A.  =  pancakkhandhs,  S  11. 108.  At  M  1162  (cp.  Sn 
33  :=  S  1.6=:  1. 107)  wife  and  children,  flocks  and  herds, 
silver  and  gold  are  called  upadhayo.  upadhi  is  the 
root  of  sorrow  ib.  45;  S  11.108;  Sn  728  =  1930  = 
Th  1. 152  and  the  rejection  of  all  upadhis  is  Nibbana 
D  11.36.  (cp.  S  1. 136;  111.133;  V.226;  A  1.80;  M  1. 107 
=  11.93;  Vin  1.5,  36  =  J  1.83  =  Mvst  11.444;  It  46, 
62).;  D  III.  112  calls  that  which  has  upadhi  ignoble  (= 
non-Aryan).  At  S  1.117  =  Divy  224  upadhi  is  called 
a  bond  (saqgo).  Cp.  opadhika,  —  The  upadhis  were  later 
systematized  into  a  set  of  10,  which  are  given  at  Nd^ 
157  as  follows:  5  tanh'  upadhis  (tanhst,  ditlhi,  kilesa, 
kamma,  duccarita),  ahar-upadhi,  patigh°,  calasso  upadinna 
dhatuyo  u.  (viz.  kama,  ditthi,  silabbata,  attavada;  see  D 
III. 230),  cha  ajjhattikani  ayatanani  u.,  cha  vinnana-kaya 
u.  Another  modified  classification  see  at  Brethren  p.  398. 

Upadhika  (Upadhika)  (adj.)  (— °)  [fr.  upadhi]  having  a 
substratum,  showing  attachment  to  rebirth,  only  in  cpds.  an" 
free  from  clinging  Vin  1.36;  Sn  1057,  &  nir°  id.  S  1. 141. 

Upadheyya  (m.)  [cp.  upadhana]  a  cushion  J  vi.490  (for 
upalheyya,  q.  v.). 

UpanaCCati  [upa  +  naccati]   to  perform  a  dance  D  11.268. 

Upanata  [pp.  of  upanamati]  inclined,  bent,  prone  PvA  190. 

Upanadatl  [upa  4-  nadati]  to  resound  (with  song)  Pv  111.3* 
(=:  vikujati  PvA   189). 


Upanandha  [pp.  of  upanayhati,  see  naddha  &  nandhati] 
scorned,  grumbled  at  Vin  11.118. 

Upanandhatl  [a  secondai7  der.  fr.  upanandha,  pp.  of  upa- 
nayhati] to  bear  enmity  towards,  to  grumble  at  (with  loc.) ; 
aor.  upanandbi  Vin  11.118  (tasmiij);  iv.83 ;  Mhvs  36,  117. 

Upanamati  [upa  +  namati]  to  be  bent  on,  strive  after 
J  III  324  (:=  upagacchati  C).  —  pp.  upanata;  Caus. 
upanameti  (q.  v.). 

Upanayana  (nt.)  [fr.  upa  +  ni;  cp.  naya  &  nayana]  tt. 
for  the  minor  premiss,  subsumption  (see  Kvtt  Irs/.  11) 
Miln  154;  Nett  63:  DhsA  329  (so  read  with  v.  1.  for 
°najana). 

Upanayhati  [upa  -(-  nayhati]  —  I.  to  come  into  touch 
with  It  68  =  J  IV. 435  (pulimacchai)  kusaggena,  cp  DhA 
1.45).  —  2.  to  bear  enmity  towards  (loc),  to  grudge, 
scorn  Dh  3,  4.  —  pp.  upanandha  (for  °naddha).  —  See 
also  upanandhati. 

Upanayhana  (f)  &  °nayhitatta  (nt.)  are  syn.  for  upanaha 
(grudge,  ill-will)  in  exegesis  at  Pug  iS  =  22,  whereas  id. 
p.  at  Vbh  357  reads  upanahana  upanahitattaij  (with  v.  1. 
upanayihana  &  upanayihitattaij). 

Upanamita  [pp.  of  upanameti]  brought  up  to,  placed  against 
D  11.134. 

Upanameti  [Caus.  of  upanamati]  i.  to  bend  over  to,  to 
place  against  or  close  to,  to  approach,  bring  near  D  11. 
134;  S  1.207;  Th  I,  1055;  Sn  p.  48  (=  attano  kayaij 
Bhagavato  upanameti);  J  1.62;  v.215;  Sn'A  151.  —  2.  to 
offer,  to  present  J  IV.386;  11.5;  Miln  210,  373;  PvA  274. 

—  pp.  upanamita  (q.  v.).  [cp.  BSk.  upanamayati  to  hand 
over  Divy   13,   14,  22]. 

Upanayika  (— °)  (adj.)  [fr.  upa  +  ni]  —  1.  referring  to, 
belonging  to  in  cpd.  att°  ref.  to  oneself  Vin  111.91  ;  Vism 
27.  —  2.  beginning,  in  phrase  vass'iipanayika  (f.)  the 
approach  of  the  rainy  season,  period  for  entering  on  Lent 
(cp.  BSk.  varsopanayika  Divy  18,  489  &  see  also  upa- 
kattha  and  vassa)  Vin  1.253;  A  1.51  (divided  into  2  parts, 
first  &  second,  or  purimika  &  pacchimika);  J  111.332; 
DA  1.8;  DhA  1.203;   "1-438;  VvA  44;   PvA  42. 

Upanaha  [fr.  upa  -f-  nah,  see  upanayhati,  same  in  BSk.; 
e.  g  at  M  Vasiu  11.56.]  ill-will,  grudge,  enmity  M  1. 15; 
A  1.91,  95,  299;  IV.148,  349,  456;  V.39,  41  sq.,  209, 
310;  Pug  18  r=  Vbh  357  (pubbakalaq  kodho  aparakalag 
upanaho  Miln   289. 

Upanahin  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  upanaha]  one  who  bears  ill-will, 
grudging,  grumbling,  finding  fault  Vin  11.89;  M  1.95;  D 
111.45;  ^  11.206;  IV.241;  A  111.260,  334;  V.123,  156;  Sn 
u6;  Th  I,  502;  J  III. 260  (kodhana  +);  Pug  18;  Vbh 
357.  —  0pp.  an"  not  being  angry  (loc.)  D  111.47;  S  11. 
207;  IV.244;   A  V.124  sq.;  J   1V.463. 

Upanlkkhamati  [upa  -f  nikkhamati]  to  go  out,  to  come 
out  (up  to  somebody)  Th  2,  37;  169;  J  III  244;  Pv  I. 
10'  (aor.  "^nikkhami;   imper.  °nikkhamassu). 

Upanlkkhitta  [upa  +  n"]  laid  down  (secretly),  placed  by 
or  on  top  S  V.457;  J  vi.390;  Miln  80.  —  m.  a  spy  J 
V1.394  ("purisa). 

Upanlkkhittaka  [=prec.]  a  spy  J  V1409  (°manussa),  431 
(id.),  450  (id.). 

Upanikkhlpati  (upa  -f  n°]  to  deposit  near,  to  lay  up  Vin 
1. 312;  S  II. 136  sq  ;  Miln  78,  80;  Nett  21,  22;  DA  1. 
125.  —  pp.  upanlkkhitta  (q.  v.). 

Upanikkhipana  (nt.)  [fr.  °nikkhipati]  putting  down  (near 
somebody),   putting  in  the  way,   trap  Vin  111.77. 

Upanikkhepa  [fr.  upa  -f  nis  -f  kjlp]  "putting  near", 
depositing;  —  I.  appW-  to  Ihe  course  of  memory,  asso- 
ciation   of   ideas  Milo  78,  80;  cp.  "nikkhepana  S  11.276. 

—  2.  deposit,  pledge  J  VI.192,  193  (=  upajata). 


Upanighat)sati 


144 


Upapajjati 


UpanighaQSati  [upa  +  ni  +  ghai)sati>]  to  rub  up  against, 
to  crush  (close)  up  to  DhA  1.58. 

Upanijjhana  (nt.)  [upa  -f-  nijjhana']  meditation,  reflection, 
consideration  only  in  two  phrases :  arammana°  &  lakkhana', 
with  ref.  to  jhana  J  v.251;  DhA  1.230;  111.276;  VvA 
38,  213.  Cp.  nijjbayana. 

Upanijjhayati  [upa  -|-  nijjhayati]  to  meditate  upon,  con- 
sider, look  at,  reflect  on  Vin  1.193  ("covet");  It  269;  HI. 
118;  D  1.20;  A  IV. 55;  Miln  124;  Vism  418.  —  pp. 
upanijjbayita  (q.  v.). 

Upanljjhayana  [for  °nijjhana]  meditation,  reflection  Miln 
127  ;   Vism   418. 

Upanljjhayita  [pp.  of  "nijjhayati]  considered,  looked  at, 
thought  over  or  about  Sn  p.  147  (=  dittha,  alokita 
SnA  508). 

Upanldha  (f.)  [abstracted  from  upanidhaya  or  direct  for- 
mation fr.  upa  -f-  ni  -f-  dhS?]  comparison  Nd^  158 
(=  upama;  should  we  read  upanidhaya?). 

Upanidhaya  (indecl)  [ger.  of  upa  -f  nidahati  of  dha] 
comparing  in  comparison,  as  prep.  w.  ace.  "compared 
with"  M  1.374;  III. 177  (Himavantai)  pabbatarajanar));  S 
II.  1 33  (mahapathavii)),  262  ;  v.457  (Sineru-pabbata-rajSnai)); 
A  III. 181  sq.;  IV.253  sq.  (dibbasukhar));  Th  I,  496  (kam- 
mai3);  J   11.93;  DA  1.29,  59,  283. 

Upanidhi  (f.)  [upa  -f  ni  +  dha,  cp.  nidhi]  —  I.  deposit, 
pledge  Vin  in. 5 1.  —  2.  comparison,  in  phrase  upanidhii] 
na  upeti  "does  not  come  into  comparison,  cannot  be 
compared  with"  M  111.177;  S  11.263;  V.457  (so  read- for 
upanidhan);   Ud  23. 

Upanipajjati  [upa  -}-  ni  -f  pad]  to  lie  down  close  to  or 
on   top  of  (ace.)  Vism  269;  J   v. 231. 

Upanibajjhatl  see  upanibandhati. 

Upanibaddha  [pp.  of  "nibandhati]  —  1.  tied  on  to  Miln 
253,  254.  —  2.  closely  connected  with,  close  to  Vin  in. 
308  (Samanta  Pasadika).  —  3.  attached  to  DA  1. 128. 

Upanlbandha  [upa  -f  ni  +  bandh]  l.  dose  connection, 
dependence  Vism  19  ("gocara).  —  2.  (adj.  — °)  connected 
with,  dependent  on  Visra  235  (jivitaq  assasa-passasa"  etc  ). 

Upanibandhati  [upa  -f-  n")  to  tie  close  to,  to  bind  on  to, 
attach  M  III.  132;  Miln  254,  412.  —  Pass,  upanibajjhatl 
to  be  attached  to  Sn  218.  —  pp.  °nibaddha  (q.  v.). 

Upanibandhana  (adj.  nt.)  [upa  -f  n°]  (adj.)  closely  con- 
nected with  D  1.46;  DA  1. 1 28;  (nt.)  tie,  fetter,  leash 
Miln  253. 

Upanibbatta  [upa  -f-  nibbatta]  come  out,  produced  DA 
1.247. 

Upanibha  (adj.  [upa  +  nibha]  somewhat  like  ( — °)  M  I. 
58  =:  A  111.324  (sankha-vanna°) ;  J  1.207  (=  sadisa  C); 
v. 302  (tala°). 

Upanivattatl  [upa  -|-  n°]  to  return  Sn  712;  J  iv.417 ;  v.126. 

Upanisa  (f.)  [if  =  Vedic  upanisad,  it  would  be  fr.  upa  -\- 
ni  +  sad,  but  if,  what  is  more  likely,  a  contracted  form 
of  upanissaya,  it  would  be  fr.  upa  -f  ni  -|-  M,  The 
history  of  this  word  has  yet  to  be  written,  cp.  Kern,  Toev. 
s.  V.  &  Divy  530  svopanisad]  —  i.  cause,  means  D  II. 
217,  259;  M  111.71  (samadhir)  sa-upanisaq);  S  11.30 — 32 
(S  A.  :=r  karana,  paccaya);  v. 25;  A  1.198;  111.20,  200  sq., 
360;  IV.99,  336,  351;  v.4  sq.,  313  sq.;  Sn  322  (=  upa- 
nissaya SnA  331);  p.  140  (=  karana,  payojana  SnA  503); 
Dh  75  (cp.  DhA  11.102  aSna  nibbanagamini  patipada). — 
2.  likeness,  counterfeit  [=  Sk.  upanisad  =  aupamye  Pa- 
nini  1.4,  79]  J  Vl,470  (=  patirupaka  C). 


UpanlSfdatl  [upa  -f-  nisldati  of  sad]  to  sit  close  to  or 
down  by  D  1.95;  A  iv.io;  J  11.347;  Pv  iv.i«3  (ger.  "sajja 
=  "siditva  PvA  242);   Vism   269. 

Upanisevati  [upa  -j-  n"]  to  pursue,  follow,  go  up  after, 
cling  to  (ace.)  M  1. 306.  —  pp.  upanisevita  (q.  v.). 

Upanlsevana  (adj.)  [fr.  upanisevati]  going  close  after,  fol- 
lowing J  v.399  [f.  °i.). 

Upanisevita  [pp.  of  upanisevati]  gone  on  to,  furnished 
with,  sticking  or  clinging  to,  full  of  J  v. 302  (kakka°). 

Upanissaya  [upa  -j-  ni°]  basis,  reliance,  support,  founda- 
tion, assurance,  certainty;  esp.  suflScing  condition  or  qua- 
lification for  Arahantship  (see  long  article  in  Childers 
s.  V.) ;  no  9  in  the  24  paccayas,  Tikapatthana,  TikapatthSna 
l.l,  a  term  only  found  in  the  Patthana,  the  Jataka  &  later 
exegetical  literature  J  1.78,  508;  I  v. 96;  vi.70;  Nett  80; 
Vism  19  ("gocara),  535  (°paccaya);  DhsA  315  (id.);  DhA 
H-33;  VvA  98;  PvA  38  (sotapatti-pbalassa),  55  (°sampatti); 
Sdhp   265,   320. 

UpaniSSayati  [upa  +  "'°]  'o  depend  or  rely  on  (ace.) 
Miln  240  (atlanaq).  —  ger.  °nissaya  (q.  v.);  —  pp. 
°nissita  (q.  v.). 

Upanissaya  (adv.)  [ger.  of  upanissayati,  cp.  nissayati  in 
same  use  &  meaning)  near,  close  by  (with  ace);  depend- 
ing on,  by  means  of  (ace)  M  11. 3 ;  S  11.269;  Sn  867 
(tari),  901  (tapa"),  978,  PvA  9  (Rajagahaij),  67  (id.); 
VvA  63  (Rajagiiha-setthii)  "with").  Cp.  BSk.  upaniiritya 
also  a  ger.  formation,  in  same  meaning,  e.  g.  at  Divy  54, 
207,  505. 

UpaniSSita  [upa  +  ni°]  dependent  or  relying  on  Sn  877; 
Nd'  283,  Miln  245. 

Upanita  [pp.  of  upaneti]  1.  brought  up  to  or  into  (mostly 
— °)  Th  2,  498;  Sn  677  (niraye),  774  (dukkha°),  898 
(bhava");  J  111.45  (thuna°);  iv.271  (dukkh°);  Nd'  38; 
Dh  237  (°yaya  =  atikkantavayo  DhA  ill. 337,  advanced 
in  age);  Pv  iv. i'"  (dukkha°  made  to  suffer).  an°  Sn 
846.  —  2.  offered,  presented  J  1 88;  PvA  274,  286.  — 
3.  brought  to  conclusion,  brought  to  an  end  (of  life)  J 
V.375  (=  marana-santikai)  u.  C).  —  4.  bringing  up  (for 
trial),  charging  M  1.251   (vacanapatha,  cp.  upanlya). 

Upaniya  ("iyya,  °eyya)  [ger.  of  upaneti]  "bringing  up" 
(for  trial),  charging,  accusing  D  1.107  (vadati,  cp.  DA  1. 
276);  A  1. 172  (°vaca);  cp.  upanita  3. 

UpanHa  (adj.)  [upa  -|-  mla]  somewhat  dark-blue  J  v. 168. 

Upaneti  [upa  -|-  neti]  to  bring  up  to,  conduce,  adduce ;  to 
present,  give  J  1.200;  Miln  396;  DA  1.276;  PvA  39,  43, 
49,  53,  74.  —  Pass,  upatiiyati  ("niyyatl)  —  i.  to  be 
brought  (up  to)  J  iv.398;  ppr.  °niyamana  J  1.200;  PvA 
5.  —  2.  to  be  brought  to  conclusioi,  or  to  and  end  (of 
life)  M  11.68 ;  S  1.2.  —  3.  to  be  carried  along  or  away 
A  1.155.  —  PP-  upanita  (q.  v.).  —  ger.  upaniya  (q.  v.). 

Upanti  (adv.)  [upa  -f-  anti]  near,  before,  in  presence  of 
J  1V.337. 

Upantika  (adj.)  [upa  4-  antika]  nt.  ace.  °r)  near  J  iv.337 ; 
v. 58  (with  gen.);  vi.418  (so  read  for  "a);  loc.  °e  near 
or  quite  near  Pv  11. 9I*  (=  saniipe  gehassa  PvA   120). 

Upapacciyati  see  uppaccati. 

Upapajjati  [doubtful  whether  a  legitimate  form  as  upa  -j- 
pad  or  a  diaeretic  form  of  uppajjati  =r  ud  +  pad.  In  this 
case  all  passages  ought  to  go  under  the  latter.  Trenckner 
however  (Notes  77)  defends  upa°  &  considers  in  many 
cases  upp°  a  substitution  for  upa.  The  diaeresis  may  be 
due  to  metre,  as  nearly  all  forms  are  found  in  poetry. 
The  V.  1.  upp°  is  apparently  frequent;  but  it  is  almost 
impossible  to  distinguish  between  upap°  and  upp°  in  the 


Upapajjati 


145 


Upayacati 


Sinhalese  writing,  and  cither  the  scribe  or  the  reader  may 
mistake  one  for  the  other]  to  get  to,  be  reborn  in  (ace); 
to  originate,  rise  Vin  111.20  (nirayaq);  A  111.415;  v. 292 
sq.;  Sn  584;  It  13  (nirayaq),  14  (sugatiq;  v.l.  upp°),  67 
(saggai)  lokaij;  v.l.  upp°);  43  =  Dh  307  (nirayar));  Dh 
126,  140;  Pv  i.io''  (v.l.  BB.  udapajjatha  =:  uppajja  TvA 
50);  Pug  16,  51,  60;  Nett  37,  99,  cp.  Kvu  611  sq.  — 
pp.  upapanna  (q.  v.).  —  Caus.  upapadeti  &  pp.  upa- 
padita   (qv.). 

Upapatti  [fr.  upa  -f-  pad,  cp.  uppatti]  —  I.  birth,  re- 
birth, (lit.  attainment;  M  1.82;  S  111.53;  iv.398;  A  v. 
289  sq.;  Sn  139,  643,  836;  Dh  419  (sattanarj);  in  var. 
specifications  as:  deva"  rebirth  among  gods  PvA  6,  81; 
devaloka"  A  1.115;  kama"  existence  in  the  sensuous  uni- 
verse D  111.218;  It  94;  arapa°  in  the  formless  spheres 
Vbh  172,  267,  296;  rupa°,  in  the  world  of  form  Vbh 
171  sq.,  263  sq.;  299;  niraya"  in  Purgatory  PvA  53.  — 
2.  occasion,  opportunity  (lit.  "coming  to");  object  for, 
in  dana°  objects  suitable  for  gifts  A  IV.239  (where  8 
enum''  ,  see  dana). 

-deva  a  god  by   birth  (or  rebirth)  VvA   18;  also  given 
as  uppatti-deva,  e.g.  at  KhA  123.  See  detail  under  deva. 

Upapattlka  ( — °)  (adj.)  [fr.  upapatti]  belonging  to  a  birth 
or  rebirth;  in  peta"  born  as  a  Peta  PvA  119.  —  Cp. 
upapatika. 

Upapanna  [pp.  of  upapajjati]  —  l.  ( — °)  possessed  of, 
having  attained,  being  furnished  with  Sn  68  (thama-bala), 
212,  322,  1077  (iiana°,  cp.  Nd'^  266''  and  uppanna-riana).  — 
2.  reborn,  come  to  existence  in  (with  ace.)  S  1.35  (Avi- 
har),  expld-  by  C.  not  quite  to  the  point  as  "nipphatti- 
vasena  upagata",  i.  e.  gone  to  A,  on  account  of  their 
perfection.  Should  we  read  uppanna?)  A  v.68. 

Upaparikkhana  (nt.)  =  upaparikkha  VvA  232. 

Upaparikkhatl  [upa  +  pari -|- rk§;  cp.  BSk.  upapanksate 
Divy  5,  230]  to  investigate,  ascertain,  test,  examine  M 
I.133,  292,  443;  S  11.216;  111.42,  140;  IV.174;  J  1.489; 
lt.400:  V.235;  M''"  9'i  293;  Davs  V.27 ;  Sdhp  539;  Pv.\ 
60  (pannaya  u.  =  iiatva),   140  (=  viceyya). 

Upaparikkha  (f.)  [fr.  upaparikkhatl,  cp.  BSk.  upaparlksa 
Divy  3  etc.]  investigation,  examination  Vin  111.314;  M 
11.175  (attha");  A  UI.381  sq. ;  IV. 221  ;  v. 126;  Dhs  16,  20, 
292;  Pug  25;  Nett  8,  42;  DA  1.171. 

Upaparikkhin  (adj.)  [fr.  upaparikkhati]  investigating,  re- 
flecting, testing  S  111.61;  A  iv.221  sq.,  296,  328.  Cp. 
BSk.  upaparlksaka  Divy  212. 

Upapata  =  upapatti  [but  der.  fr.  pat  (cp.  uppada'  =  ud  -j- 
pat  but  uppada'^  =  ud  -+-  pad)  «ith  the  meaning  of  the 
casual  &  unusual]  rebirth  Vin  111.4;  S  iv.59  (cut°);  Pug  50. 

Upapatika  (adj.)  [fr.  upapata  but  evidently  mixed  with 
uppada'  and  uppada',  cp.  upapajjati,  upapatti  &  BSk. 
upapaduka  Av.  S  11.94,  95;  Divy  523]  =  opapatika  i.e. 
rebirth  without  parents,  as  a  deva  UA  on  D  ill. 107; 
ThA  207. 

Upapadlta  [pp.  of  upapadeti,  Caus.  of  upapajjati]  accom- 
plished J  11.236. 

Upapadeti  [Caus.  of  upapajjati]  to  execute,  perfoi-m  J  v.346. 

Upaparami  (f)  [upa  -{-  pSrami,  cp.  upa  5]  minor  perfection 
Bu  1.77  (opp.  paramattha-pSraml) ;  UhA  1.84. 

Upapisana  [upa  -f  pi§]  grinding,  powder,  in  anjan°  pow- 
dered ointment  (for   the  eyes)  Vin  I.203  ;  11.112. 

f     Upapurohlta    [upa  -j-  purohita,    see    upa    5]    a    minor   or 
""^  assistant  priest  J   IV. 304. 

Upapi|a  at  D  1.135  ■■sad  uppila  (q.  v.). 


UpapphUSati  [upa  -f  phusati,  of  spfS]  to  '<>"<:'> ;  aor.  upap- 
phusi  J   V.417,  420. 

Upaplavatl  [upa  -j-  plavati,  cp.  uppilavati]  to  swim  or  float 
to  (ace),  in  uncertain  reading  as  aor.  upaplavir)  at  Sn 
1145  (dipa  dipai]  upaplavii)  floated  from  land  to  land; 
vv.  11.  at  SnA  606  uppalaviq  &  upallaviq;  all  MSS.  of 
Nd'^  p.  54  &  no.  160  write  upallavii)).  Perhaps  we  should 
better  read  uppalavir)  (or  upallavii))  as  diaeretic  form 
for  *upplaviij,  aor.  of  uppilavati  (or  uplavati),  q.  v. 
Expld-  at  Nd'i   160  by  samupallavii]. 

Upabbajati  [upa  -|-  vraj]  to  go  to,  resort  to,  visit  Th  I, 
1052;  J  IV. 270,  295;   V.495  (=  upagacchati  C);  vi.43. 

Upabbu|ha  see  sam°. 

Upabruhana  (nt.)  [fr.  upa  +  bfh-,  cp.  BSk.  up.ibrnhita 
Jtm  31°']  expansion,  increase,  augmentation  Vism  145; 
DhsA    117. 

Upabhunjaka  (adj.)  [fr.  next]  one  who  eats  or  enjoys  Vism  555. 

Upabhunjatl  [upa  -f  bhuj]  to  enjoy  J  111.495 ;  V.350  (inf. 
"bhottuij).  —  grd.  upabhogga.  —  pp.  upabhattu  (q.  v.). 

Upabhutta  [pp.  of  upabhunjati]  enjuyed   Davs  111.65. 

Upabhoga  [fr.  upa  -f  bhuj  cp.  upabhuiijati]  enjoyment, 
profit  Vin  iv.267  ;  J  ll.43>;  iv.219  (v.l.  paribhoga);  vi. 
361;  Miln  201,  403;  PvA  49,  220  ("paribhoga);  DhA 
IV.7  (id.);  Sdhp  268,  341,  547- 

Upabhogin  (adj.)  [fr.  upabhunjati]  enjoying  Miln   267. 

Upabhogga  (adj.)  [Sk.  upabhogya,  grd.  of  upabhufijati]  to 
be  enjoyed,  enjoyable  Miln  201. 

Upama  (adj.)  [compar.-superl.  formation  fr.  upa,  cp.  Lat. 
summus  fr.  *(s)ub-mo]  "coming  quite  or  nearly  up  to", 
i.  e.  like,  similar,  equal  D  1.239  (andha-ven°) ;  M  1.432 
(tarun°  a  young  looking  fellow);  A  I  v.  11  udak°  puggala 
a  man  like  water);  Pv  l.l'  (khett"  like  a  well  cultivated 
field;  :=  sadisa  PvA  7);  PvA  2,  8  etc.  —  Mo/€.  upama 
metri  causa  see  a°  and  cp.  opamma  &  upama. 

Upama  (f.)  [f.  of  upama  in  abstract  meaning]  likeness, 
simile,  parable,  example  (cp.  formula  introducing  u.  S  II. 
114;  M  1.148);  Sn  705  (cp.  Dh  129,  130),  1137  (=upa- 
nidha  sadisai]  patibhago  Nd-  158);  It  114;  Vism  341, 
478,  512,  582  sq.,  591  sq.;  PvA  29,  112  (dhen°);  SnA 
329,   384;  Sdhp  29,  44,  259. 

-vacana   expression   of  comparison  (usually  applied  to 
part,  evai))  SnA  13,  472;  KhA  185,  195,  208,  212;  PvA  25. 

Upamana  (nt.)  [fr.  upa  +  nia]  comparison,  the  2"d  part 
of  the  comparison  J  v.341;   VvA   13. 

Upamanlta  [pp.  of  caus.  upa  -f-  ma]  measured  out,  likened, 
like,  comparable  Th  2,  382  (=  sadisa  ThA  255). 

Upametl  [upa  -f  ma]  to  measure  one  thing  by  another, 
to  compare  J   VI. 252;   Vism  314  (°metva,  read  °netva-). 

Upameyya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  upa  -f  ma]  to  be  compared, 
that  which  is  to  be  likened  or  compared,  the  fst  part 
of  a  comparison  VvA   13. 

Upaya  [fr.  upa  -)-  i,  cp.  upaya]  approach ,  undertaking, 
taking  up;  clinging  to,  attachment,  only  as  adj.  ( — °)  in 
an°  (aniipaya  metri  causa)  not  going  near,  aloof,  unat- 
tached S  1. 141,  181;  11.284;  Sn  786,  787,  897  (cp.  SnA 
558);  and  in  rupOpaya  (vv.  11.  riipupaya  &  rupupaya) 
"clinging  to  form"  (etc.)  S  111.53  =  Nd'  '25  :=  Nd-  570 
(4-  rup'arammana). 

Upayacati  [upa  -\-  yacati]  to  beg,  entreat,  pray  to  J  vi. 
150  (divyaij). 


Upayacitaka 


146 


Upaladdhi 


Upayacitaka  (nt.)  [of  adj.  upa  +  yacita  +  ka;  pp.  ol 
yacati]  begging,  asking,  praying,  propitiation  J  vi.150 
(=  devatanaij  ayacana). 

Upayati  [upa  -f-  ySti  of  ya]  to  go  to,  to  approach  S  I.76; 
11.118  (also  Caus.  °yapeti);  Dpvs  vi.69 ;   Sdhp  579. 

Upayana  (nt.)  [fr.  upa-fyg,  cp.  BSk.  upayana  Jtm  31"] 
nearing,  approach,  arrival  D  1. 10;  DA  1.94. 

Upayanaka  [fr.  upayana]   a  crab  J   VI.530. 

Upayunjati  [upa  +  yuj]  to  combine,  connect  with ;  to  use, 
apply ;  ppr.  med.  upayujjamana  VvA  245  (preferably 
be  read  as  "bhunjaniana,  with  reference  to  enjoying  drink 
&  food). 

Upayoga  [fr.  upa  -\-  yuj]  connection,  combination;  em- 
ployment, application  J  VI. 432  (nagare  upayogar)  netva 
for  use  in  the  ^town  r  v.  1.  upabhogaq).  Usually  in  cpd. 
"vacana  as  tt.  g.  meaning  either  combined  or  condensed 
expression,  ellipsis  SnA  386;  KhA  236;  PvA  73,  135; 
or  the  (7(V.  case,  which  is  frequently  substituted  for  the 
foil,  cases:  sami-vacana  SnA  127;  PvA  102;  bhumma" 
SnA  140;  Kh.-V  116;  karana"  Sn.\  148;  sampadana"  J 
V.214;  SnA  317;  itthambhuta°  SnA  441;  nissakka"  J  v. 498. 

Uparacita  [pp.  of  upa  -)-  rac]  formed  ThA  211 ;  Sdhp  6i6. 

Uparajja  (nt.)  [upa  -j-  rajja,  cp.  uparaja]  viceroyalty  A  ill. 
154  (v.  1.  opa°);  J  1.511;  IV.176;  DA  1.134. 

Uparata  [pp.  of  uparamati]  having  ceased,  desisting  from 
( — "),  restraining  oneself  (cp.  orata)  Vin  1.245  (ratt-up.arata 
abstaining  from  food  at  night  =  ratti-bhojanato  uparata 
DA  1.77);  D  1.5  (id.);  M  1.3 19  (bhaya=);  Sn  914  (= 
Virata  etc.  Nd'   337);  Miln  96,  307;  DhsA  403  (vihir|s°). 

Uparati  (f.)  [fr.  upa  -]-  ram]  ceasing,  resting;  cessation  M 
l.io;  S  IV.104;  Miln  274. 

Uparamati  [upa  -(-  ram]  to  cease,  desist,  to  be  quiet  J  ill. 
489;   V.391   (v.  1.  for  uparamati,  also  in  C);  Miln   152. 

Uparama  (f.)  [cp.  lit.  Sk.  uparama,  to  uparamati]  cessation 
.Miln  41,  44    (an°). 

Uparava  [fr.  upa  -|-  ru]  noise  J  11.2, 

Uparaja  [upa  -)-  raja;  see  upa  5]  a  secondary  or  deputy 
king,  a  viceroy  J  1.504;   11. 316;  DhA  1.392. 

Upari  (indecl.)  [Vedic  upari,  der.  fr.  upa,  Idg.  -■uper(i); 
Gr.  i/Tf'f,  Lat.  s-uper;  Goth,  ufar,  Ohg.  ubir  =  Ger.  iiber 
E.  over;  Oir.  .''or]  over,  above  (prep.  &  prefix)  i.  (adv.) 
on  top,  above  (opp.  adho  below)  Vin  iv.46  (opp.  hettha); 
J  V1.432;  KhA  248  (=  uddharj;  opp.  adho);  SnA  392 
(abtimukho  u.  gacchati  explaining  paccuggacchati  of  Sn 
442);  PvA  II  (hettha  manussa-santhanaij  upari  sukara-s°), 
47  (upari  chattai)  dhariyamana),  145  (sabbattha  upari 
upon  everything).  —  2.  (prep.  w.  gen )  with  ref.  either 
to  space  =  on  top  of,  on,  upon,  as  in  kassa  upari  sapo 
patissati  on  whom  shall  the  curse  fall?  DhA  141;  attano 
u.  patati  falls  upon  himself  PvA  45  ;  etissa  upari  kodho 
anger  on  her,  i.e.  against  her  VvA  68;  or  to  lime  =  oa 
top  of,  after,  later,  as  in  catunnar)  mas.anar)  upari  after 
4  months  Vv.\  52  (=  uddhaij  catuhi  masehi  of  Pv  1. 10'-); 
sattannai]  vassa-satanai}  upari  after  700  years  Pv.\  144.  — 
3.  (adv.  in  comp"-,  meaning  "upper,  higher,  on  the  upper 
or  lop  side",  or  "on  top  of",  if  the  phrase  is  in  loc.  case. 
See  below. 

-cara  walking  in  the  air,  suspended,  flying  J  ill  454. 
-pasada  the  upper  story  of  a  palace,  loc.  on  the  terrace 
D  1.112  (loc);  PvA  105,  279.  -pitthi  top  side,  platform 
Vin  11  207  (loc ).  -bhaddaka  N.  of  a  tree  [either  Sk. 
bhadraka  Pinus  Deodara,  or  bhadra  Nauclea  Cadamba, 
after  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.]  J  vi.269.  -bhaga  the  upper  part; 
used   ia   instr.,  loc.   or   aor.    in   sense    of   "above,   over, 


beyond"  J  iv,232  (instr.).  -bhava  higher  state  or  con- 
dition M  1.45  (opp.  adh°).  -mukha  face  upwards  DA  i. 
228;  Pug  A  214.  -vasana  upper  garment  PvA  49.  -vata 
higher  than  the  wind,  loc.  on  the  wind  J  ii.ii;  or  in 
°passe  {\oc.)  on  the  upper  (wind-)  side  DhA  11. 17.  -Tisala 
extended  on  top,  i.  e.  of  great  width,  very  wide  J  111.207. 
-vehasa  high  in  the  air  (° — ),  in  "kuti  a  lofty  or  open 
air  chamber,  or  a  room  in  the  upper  story  of  the  Vihara 
Vin  IV. 46  (what  the  C.  means  by  expl"-  majjhimassa 
purisassa  aslsa-ghatta  "not  knocking  against  the  head  ot 
a  middle-(sized)  man"  is  not  quite  clear),  -sacca  higher 
truth  PvA  66  (so  read  for  upari  sacca). 

Uparl^ha  (adj.)  [superl.  formation  fr.  upari  in  analogy  to 
settha]  highest,  topmost,  most  excellent  Th  1,  910.  Cp.  next. 

Upari^hima  (adj  )  [double-superl.  formation  after  analogy 
of  settha,  pacchima  &  hetthima:  hettha]  =  uparittha  & 
uparima  Dlis  1016,  1300,  1401;  Pug  16,  17  (sanyoja- 
nani  =  uddhai]bhagiya-sanyojanani    Pug   A   198). 

Uparima  (adj.)  [upari  +  ma,  superl.  formation]  uppermost, 
above,  overhead  D  111.189  (disa);  Nett  88.  Cp.  uparitthima. 

Upariya  (adv.)  [fr.  upari]  above,  on  lop,  in  compd.  hetth" 
below  and  above  Vism   i. 

Uparujjhati  [Sk.  uparudhyate.  Pass,  of  uparundhali]  to  be 
stopped,  broken,  annihilated,  destroyed  D  1.223;  Th  I, 
145;  It  106;  Sn  724,  1036,  1 1 10;  Nd-  159  (=nirujjhati 
vupasammati  atthangacchali) ;  Miln  151;  Sdhp  280.  — 
pp.  uparuddba. 

Uparuddtia  [pp-  of  uparujjhati]  stopped,  ceased  Miln  151 
Cjivita). 

Uparundtiati  [upa  +  rudh]  to  break  up,  hinder,  stop,  keep 
in  check  M  1.243;  J  1-358;  Th  i,  143,  1117;  Sn  118, 
916  (pot.  uparundhe,  but  uparuddhe  Nd'  346  =  upa- 
ruddheyya  etc.);  Miln  151,  245,  313.  —  ger.  uparund- 
hiya  Th  i,  525;  Sn  751;  aor.  uparundbi  J  iv.133;  PvA 
271.  —  Pass,  uparujjhati  (q.  v.). 

Uparujha  [upa  -f  rulha,  pp.  of  ruh]  grown  again,  recovered 
J  IV.408  (cakkhu). 

Uparocati   [upa  -f  rue]   to  please  (inlrs.)  J  vl.64. 

Uparodati  [upa  -f  rud]  l.  to  lament  J  VI.SSI  (fut  "rucchati) 
—  2.  to  sing  in  a  whining  tone  J   v.304. 

Uparodha  [fr.  upa  -f  rudh]  obstacle ;  breaking  up,  destruc- 
tion,  end  J   HI. 210,  252;    Pv   IV. l5;   Miln   245,  313. 

Uparodhana  (nt.)  [fr.  upa  +  rudh]  breaking  up,  destruc- 
tion  Sn   732,   761. 

Uparodheti  [Caus  of  uparundhali]  to  cause  to  break  up; 
to   hinder,  stop;  destroy   Vin   111.73. 

Uparopa  [upa  +  ropa,  cp.  upa  5]  "little  plant",  sapling 
Vin  11.154.  See  also  next. 

Uparopaka  =  uparopa,  sapling  J  II  345;  iv-359- 

Upala  [Lit.  Sk.  upala,  etym.  uncertain]  a  stone  Davs  111.87. 

Upalakkha^ia  (f-)  &  "ag  (m  )  [upa  -|-  lakkhana]  discrimi- 
nation S  111.261  (an°);  Dhs  16,  20,  292,  1057;  Pug  25; 
Vv.\   240. 

Upalakkheti  [upa  +  lak$ay]  to  distinguish,  discriminate 
Vism   172. 

Upaladdha  [pp.  of  upalabhali]  acquired,  got,  found  J  VI. 
211   (°bala;   v.  1.   paluddha°);  Sdhp  4,  386. 

Upaladdhi  (f.)  [fr.  upa  -f  labh]  acquisition ;  knowledge 
-Miln  268;   VvA  279. 


Upalabhati 


147 


Upasarjhita 


Upalabhati  [upa  4-  labh]  to  receive,  get,  obtain  to  find, 
made  out  Miln  124  (karanar));  usually  in  Pass,  upalabb- 
hati  to  be  found  or  got,  to  be  known;  to  exist  M  1. 1 38 
(an°);  S  1.135;  iv.384;  Sn  858;  Pv  n.n'  (=  paccanu- 
bhavlyati  PvA  146);  Kvu  i,  2;  Miln  25;  PvA  87. 

Upalapana  (nt.)  [fr.  upa  +  lap]  talking  over  or  down,  per- 
suasion;  diplomacy,  humbug   D  n.76;  Miln   115,   1 17. 

Upalapeti  [Caus.  of  upa  -|-  lap]  to  persuade,  coax,  prevail 
upon,  talk  over,  cajole  Vin  1.119;  111.21 ;  J  n.266  ;  ni.265 ; 
1V.2I5;  PvA  36,  46,  276. 

Upala|lta  [pp.  of  upalsjeti]  caressed,  coaxed  Sdlip  301. 

Upala|etl  [Caus.  of  upa  +  lal;  cp.  BSk.  upaladayati  Divy 
114,  503].  —  I.  to  caress,  coax,  fondle,  win  over  J  II. 
267;  Vism  300;  Sdhp  375.  —  2.  to  boast  of,  exult  in 
J  11.151.  —  pp.  upalalita  (q.  v.). 

Upa|aseti  [upa  +  Caus.  of  las]  to  sound  forth,  to  (make) 
sound  (a  bugle)  D  11.337  (for  uppalaseti?  q.  v.). 

Upallkkhatl  [upa  +  Hkh]  to  scratch,  scrape,  wound  A  III. 
94  sq.   (=:  vijjhati  C). 

Upalltta  [pp.  of  upalimpati]  smeared  with  ( — "),  stained, 
tainted  Th  2,  467  (cp.  Th.\  284;  T.  reads  apalitta); 
Pug  56.  Usually  neg.  an°  free  from  taint,  undefiled  M 
•!3'9i  386;  Miln  318;  metri  causa  anCpalitta  S  1.141; 
284;  Sn  211,  392,  468,  790,  845;  Dh  353(cp.  DhAiv.7). 

Upalippatl  [Pass,  of  upalimpati]  to  be  defiled;  to  stick  to, 
hang  on  to  Sn  547,  812;  J  in. 66  (=  alliyatt  C);  Miln 
250,  337- 

Upalimpati  [upa  +  Up]  to  smear,  defile  D  11. 18;  Vin  iii. 
312;  J  1.178;  IV.435;  Miln  154.  —  Pass,  upalippati,  pp. 
upalltta  (q.  v.). 

Upalepa  [fr.  upa  -f  up]  defilement  J  iv.435. 

Upalohitaka  (adj.  [upa  -f-  lohita  +  ka,  see  upa  5]  reddish 
J  III. 2 1    (=  rattavanna  C.). 

Upallavlg  Sn  1145  see  upaplavati. 

Upavajja  (adj.)  [grd.  of  upavadati]  blameworthy  S  1V.59, 
60;  A  11.242.  an°  blameless,  without  fault  S  iv.57  sq  ; 
A  1V.82;  Miln  391. 

Upavajjata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  upavajja]  blameworthiness  S  iv. 
59  (an°). 

UpavaQOCtl  [upa  +  vanneti]  to  describe  fully  Sdhp  487. 

Upavattatl  [upa  -|-  Vft]  to  come  to  pass,  to  take  place 
J  VI.58. 

Upavadati  [upa  +  vad]  to  tell  (secretly)  against,  to  tell 
tales;  to  insult,  blame  D  1.90;  S  III. 125  (atta  silato  na 
upav.;;  A  11. 121  (id.);  v. 88;  J  11.196;  PvA   13. 

Upavana  (nt.)  [upa  -\-  vana,  see  upa  5]  a  kind  of  wood, 
miniature  wood,  park  J  IV.431 ;  v.249;  Miln  i;  VvA  170 
(=  vana),  344;  ThA  201;  PvA  102  (aram°),  177  (maha°). 

Upavasati  [upa  -f-  vasiti].  —  I.  to  dwell  in  or  at  J  III.113; 
DA  1. 139.  —  2.  to  live  (trs.);  to  observe,  keep  (a  holy 
day) ;  only  in  phrase  uposathai]  upovasati  to  observe 
the  fast  day  S  1.208;  A  1. 142,  144,  205;  Sn  402  (ger. 
upavassa);  J  111.444;  SnA  199;  PvA  209.  —  pp.  upa- 
vuttha  (q.  v.).  See  also  uposatha. 

Upavada  [fr.  upa  -f-  vad]  insulting,  railing;  blaming,  finding 
fault  Nd'  386;  PvA  269;  an°  (adj.)  not  grumbling  or 
abusing  Dh   185  (anfloa"  metri  causa). 

Upavadaka  (adj.)  [fr.  MpavSda]  blaming,  finding  fault, 
speaking  evil  of  (gen.),  generally  in  phrase  ariyanaQ  u. 


insulting   the   gentle   Vin    111.5 ;    A   1.256:  111.19;  iv.178; 
V.68;  It  58,  99.  —  an°  Ps  1.115;  Pug  60. 

Upavadin  (adj.  [fr.  upavada]  =  upavadaka;  in  ariy"  S  I. 
225;  11.124;  V.266;  Pv  IV. 331.  an°  M  1.360. 

Upavayati  [upa  +  vayati]  to  blow  on  or  towards  somebody 
M  1.424;  A  IV.46;  Th   I,  544;  Pv  iii.6»;  Miln  97. 

Upavasa  [fr.  upa  -j-  vas,  see  upavasati]  keeping  a  prescri- 
bed day,  fasting,  self-denial,  abstaining  from  enjoyments 
[Same  as  uposatha;  used  extensively  in  BSk.  in  meaning 
of  uposatha,  e.  g.  at  Av.  S  1. 338,  339;  Divy  398  in  phrase 
astanga-samanvagatai)  upavSsaij  upavasati]  A  V.40  (?  un- 
certain; vv.  11.  upasaka,  ovapavassa,  yopavasa);  J  vi.508; 
SnA  199  (in  expl"-  of  uposatha). 

Upavaslta  (adj.)  (upa  -\-  v.nsila]  perfumed  PvA  164  (for 
gandh,-i-samerita). 

Upavahana  (nt.)  [upa  -f  vahana]  carrying  away,  washing 
away  Sn  391  (sanghati-raj-upa"  =  paqsu-maladino  sanghati- 
rajassa  dhovanai]   SnA   375). 

Upavicara  [upa  -f-  vicara;  cp.  BSk.  upavicara  Divy  19, 
trsld-  on  p.  704  in  Notes  by  "perplexed  by  doubts"  (?)] 
applying  (ones  mind),  to,  discrimination  D  111.245  (doma- 
nass"^);  M  111.239;  S  iv.232  (.somanass"  etc.);  A  in. 363 
sq.;  v. 1 34;  Ps  I.17;  Dh  8,  85,  284;  Vbh  381. 

Upavijafina  (f.)  (adj.)  [grd.  fo/mation  of  upa  -f  vi  +  jan, 
cp.  Sk.  vijanya]  about  to  bring  forth  a  child,  nearing 
childbirth  M  1.384;  Th  2,  218;  Ud  13;  Davs  lrl.38 ; 
ThA   197. 

Upavisati  [upa  4-  visati]  to  come  near,  to  approach  a  per- 
son J  IV.408;  v. 377;  aor.  upavisi  Sn  415,  418  (asajja 
upavisi  =:  samipai)  gantva  nisidi  SnA   384). 

Upavi^a  [upa  -f-  viija]  the  neck  of  a  lute  S  iv.  197 ;  Miln  53. 

Upavita  [?]  covered  (?)  at  VvA  8  in  phrase  "vettalatadihi 
upavitai]  asanarj"  should  prob.  be  read  upanita  (vv.  11. 
uparivita    &    upajita);    or    could    it    be    pp.    of   upaviyati 

(woven  with)? 

Upaviyati  [Pass,  of  upa  -)-  va^  to  weave]  te  be  woven 
J  VI.26. 

Upavuttha  [pp.  of  upavasati]  celebrated,  kept  (ofafastday) 
A  1.2 II  (uposalh.t);  Sn  403  (uposatha).  Cp.  uposatha. 

Upavhyati  [upa  -j-  a  -f-  hfi,  cp.  avhayati  for  *ahvayali]  to 
invoke,  call  upon  D  11.259;  S  1. 168. 

UpasaQVasati  [upa  -j-  saq  -f-  vas]  to  live  with  somebody, 
to  associate  with  (ace.)  J  1.152. 

Upasaohara^a  (nt.)  [fr.  upasaijharati]  drawing  together, 
bringing  up   to,  comparison  Vism  232  sq.;  J   V.l86. 

Upasat)harati  [upa  -f  sao  +  hf]  —  l.  to  collect,  bring 
together,  heap  up,  gather  Miln  132.  —  2.  to  dispose, 
arrange,  concentrate,  collect,  focus  Vin  IV. 220  (kayaq); 
M  1.436  (cittal)),  468  (cittaq  tathattay.i);  S  v.213  sq.  (id.); 
DhsA  309  (cakkhuij).  —  3.  to  take  hold  of,  take  care 
of,  provide,  serve,  look  after  Miln  232. 

Upasaqhara  [fr.  upa  -|-  sat)  -\-  hf]  taking  hold  of,  taking 
up,  possession,  in  devat"  being  seized  or  possessed  by  a 
god  Miln  298. 

Upasaghlta  (adj.)  [pp.  of  «pa  4  saij  +  dha]  accomj^niei'. 
by,  furnished  or  connected  with  ( — °)  D  1.152;  M  1.37, 
119  (chand");  S  11.220  (kusal");  iv.60  (kam°),  79  (id.); 
Sn  341  (rig"),  1132  (girai)  vann°  1^  vannena  upetaijNd-); 
Th   I,  970;  J  1.6;  11.134,  '72;  V.361. 


Upasankamati 


148 


Upassasa 


Upasankamati  [upa  4-  sai)  +  kram,  cp.  BSk.  upasankra- 
mati  Av.  6.  1. 209]  —  I.  to  go  up  to  (with  ace),  to  ap- 
proach, come  near;  freq.  in  stock  phrase  "yena  (Pokkha- 
rasSdissa  parivesana)  ten'  upasankami,  upasankamitva  paii- 
Ealte  asane  nisidP',  e.  g.  Vin  1. 270;  D  1.109;  n.i,  and 
passim.  —  aor.  "sankami  Pv.  II. 2'";  SnA  130,  140;  KhA 
116;  PvA  88;  ger.  "sankamitva  SnA  140;  PvA  6,  12, 
19,  20,  88;  "sankamma  Sn  166,  418,  460,  980,  986;  inf. 
"sankamitur)  PvA  79.  — .  2.  to  attend  on  (as  a  physi- 
cian), to  treat  Miln  169,  233,  353;  DA  1.7. 

Upasankamana  (nt.)  [fr.  upasankamati]  going  near,  ap- 
proach M  n.176;  S  V.67  =  It  107;  PvA  232. 

Upasankheyya  (adj.)  [grd  of  upa  4-  sankharoti]  to  be  pre- 
pared, produced  or  contracted  Sn  849  (=  °sankhatabba 
SnA  549;  cp.  Ndi  213. 

Upasagga  [Sk  upasarga,  of  upa  -f  SfJ]  —  1.  attack,  trouble, 
danger  Vin  1.33;  A  l.ioi;  Th  2,  353;  Dh  139  (where 
spelt  upassaga,  cp.  DhA  ui.70);  Miln  41S.  —  2.  (tt.  g.) 
prefix,  preposition  J  n.67  (saij),  126  (apa);  IH.121  (ni, 
pa);  DA  1.245  (adhi);  KhA  1 01  (sa°  and  an");  PvA  88 
(atthe  nipato  a  particle  put  in  metri  causa,  expl"- of  handa); 
DhsA  163,  405. 

Upasagga  [follows  here!]. 

Upasaqthapana  (f.)  [fr.  upa  +  santhapeti]  stopping,  cau- 
sing to  cease,  settling  Pug   18  (see  also  an°). 

Upasanta  [pp.  of  upa  -|-  Sam,  cp.  upasammati]  calmed, 
composed,  tranquil,  at  pease  M  1.125;  S  1.83,  162;  A  ui. 
394;  Sn  848,  919,  1087,  1099;  Nd'  210,  352,  434;  Nd2 
161;  Dh  201,  378;  Miln  394;  DhA  III. 260;  iv.11'4; 
PvA  132  (=  santa). 

Upasama  [Sk.  upasama,  upa  -|-  Sam]  calm,  quiet,  appea- 
sement, allaying,  assuagement,  tranquillizing  Vin  1X0  = 
S  IV. 331  :^  V. 421  (in  fieq.  phrase  upasamaya  abhiiiiiaya 
sambodhaya  nibbanaya  saijvattali;  see  nibbana  III.7);  D 
1.50;  HI. 130  sq.,  136  sq.,  229  (as  one  of  the  4  objects 
of  adhitthana,  viz.  paniia°  sacca"  caga"  upasama");  M  I. 
67 ;  III. 246 ;  S  t.30,  34  (silena),  46  citta-v-fipasama),  48, 
55;  11.223,  277;  III. 86  (sankharanai)  ...  v-upasamo)  D  11. 
157;  S  1.158  (see  vnpasama  and  sankhara);  (ariyaq  mag- 
gai)  dukkh°-gaminai));  iv.62,  331;  v. 65  (avupasama),  179, 
234  (°gamin),  378  sq.;  A  1.3  (avupasama),  30,  42;  II.14 
(vitakk°);  III.325  sq.;  V.216,  238  sq.;  Sn  257,  724,  735, 
737;  It  18  (dukkh°)  83;  Dh  205;  Nd'  351;  J  1.97;  Ps 
1.95;  Miln  170,  248;  Vism  197  (°5nussati);  Sdhp  587. 
Cp.  vi"  (vu°). 

Upasamati  [upa  4-  Sam  in  trs.  meaning  for  usual  sammali 
in  intrs.  meaning]  to  appease,  calm,  allay,  assuage  Sn 
919;  Th  1,  50  (po'-  upasama  =  upasameyya  nibbapeyya 
Ndi  352).  —  pp.  upasanta  q.  v.). 

Upasamana  (nt.)  =  upasama  Th  1,  421  ;  Sdhp  335  (dukkh"). 

Upasampajjati  [upa  -f-  sampajjati]  to  attain,  enter  on, 
acquire,  take  upon  oneself  usually  in  ger.  upasampajja 
M  1.89;  S  111.8;  A  IV.13;  V.69;  Dhs  160  (see  DhsA  167); 
DA  1.313;  SnA   158.  —  pp.  upasampanna  (q.  v.). 

Upasampada  (f)  [fr.  upa  -f  sai)  +  pad]  —  l-  taking, 
acquiring;  obtaining,  taking  upon  oneself,  undertaking 
D  11.49;  M  1.93;  A  111.65;  Dh  183  (cp.  DhA  111.236); 
Nctt  44  (kusalassa).  —  2.  (in  special  sense)  taking  up 
the  bhikkhuship,  higher  ordination,  admission  to  the  pri- 
vileges of  recognized  bhikkhus  [cp.  BSk.  upasampad  & 
"pads  Divy  21,  281  etc.]  Vin  1.12,  20,  95,  146  and  pas- 
sim; 111.15;  IV.52;  D  1.176,  177,  202 ;  S  1. 161;  A  IV.276 
sq.  &  passim;  DhA  11.61  (pabbajja+)j  PvA  54  (laddh° 
one  who  has  received  ordination),  179  (id.). 

Upasampanna  [pp.  of  upasampajjati]  obtained,  got,  received; 
in  special  sense  of  having  attained  the  recognition  of  bhik- 


khuship,  ordained   [cp.   BSk.    upasampanna    Divy  281]  S 
l.i6l;  A  V.70;  Vin  111.24;  1^-52,   130;  Miln   13. 

Upasampadeti  [Denom.  fr.  upasampada]  i.  to  attain  to, 
obtain,  produce  DhsA  167  (=  nipphadeti).  —  2.  to  admit 
to  bhikkhuship,  to  ordain  Vin  iv.130,  226,  317  (=  vutt- 
hapeti);  grd.  °etabba  Vin  1.64  sq.;  iv.48;  A  v.72. 

Upasamphassati  [upa  +  sam  +  spfSj  to  embrace  J  v.297- 

Upasammati  [Sk.  upasamyati,  upa  +  Sam  in  intrs.  function] 
to  grow  calm,  to  cease,  to  be  settled  or  composed,  to  be 
appeased  S  1.62,  221  ;  Dh   100  sq. 

Upasavyana  (nt.f)  [?]  "a  robe  worn  over  the  left  shoulder" 
(Hardy,  Index  to  ed.)  VvA  166  (v.  1.  upavasavya). 

UpasiQSaka  (adj.)  [fr.  upa  4-  slqsati  =  SaiJS,  cp.  asiqsaka] 
striving  after,  longing  or  wishing  for  Miln  393  (ahar°; 
Morris  jf  P  T  S.  1884,  75  proposes  reading  upasinghaka). 

Upasingiiaka  (adj.)  [fr.  upa  -f  singtl]  sniffing  after  J  11. 
339;  111.144;  Miln  393  (f  see  upasii)saka). 

Upasinghati  [upa  4-  singh]  —  i.  to  sniff  at  S  1.204  (pa- 
dumaq);  1.455;  J  "-3391  4o8;  vi.336.  —  2.  to  sniff  up 
Vin  1.279.  —  Cans.  °ayatl  to  touch  gently  KhA  136. 
Caus.  II.  "apeti  to  touch  lightly,  to  stroke  J  iv.407. 

Upasinghita  [pp.  of  upasinghati]  scented,  smelled  at  (loc.) 
J   VI. 543  (sisarjhi;  C.  for  upagghata). 

Upasussati  [upa  4-  sussati]  to  dry  up  M  1.481 ;  Sn  433  ;  J  1.71. 

Upasecana  (nt.)  [fr.  upa  4-  sic]  sprinkling  over,  i.  e.  sauce 
Th  1,  842;  J  11.422;  111.144;  IV.371  (mags°);  vi.24.  See 
also   nandi°  &  magsa". 

Upaseniya  (f.)  [Sk.  upa  4-  either  sayanika  of  sayana,  or 
sayaniya  of  Si]  (a  girl)  who  likes  to  be  always  near  (her 
mother),  a  pet,  darling,  fondling  J  VI.64  (=matarar)  upa- 
gantva  sayanika  C). 

Upasevati  [upa  4-  sev]  —  l.  to  practice,  frequent,  pursue 
Miln  355.  —  2.  to  serve,  honour,  Sn  318  (°amana).  — 
pp.  upasevita  (q.  v.). 

Upasevana  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  upasevati]  serving,  pursuing,  fol- 
lowing, service,  honouring,  pursuit  S  111.53  =  Nd'  25  = 
Nd2  570  (nand"  pleasure-seeking);  It  68  (bal°  &  dhir°); 
Sn  249  (utu°  observance  of  the  seasons);  Miln  351. 

Upasevita  [pp.  of  upasevati]  visited,  frequented  PvA  147 
(for  sevita). 

Upasevin  (adj.)  ( — °)  [fr  upasevati]  pursuing,  following, 
going  after  A  111.136  (vyatta");  Miln  264  (raj");  DhA 
111.482  (para-dar°). 

Upasobhati  [upa  -\-  Subh]  to  appear  beautiful,  to  shine 
forth  Th  1,  1080.  —  Caus.  "sobheti  to  make  beautiful, 
embellish,  adorn  Vv  52";  j  v.  132;  PvA  153.  —  pp. 
upasobhita  (q.  v.). 

Upasobhita  [pp.  of  upasobheti]  embellished,  beautified, 
adorned  PvA  153,  187;  Sdhp  593. 

Upassagga  see  upasagga. 

Upassattha  [Sk.  upaspsja,  pp.  of  upa  4-  Sfj]  "thrown  upon", 
overcome,  visited,  afflicted,  ruined,  oppressed  S  iv.29;  A 
111.226  (udak");  J  1.61;  11.239. 

UpaSSaya  [fr.  upa  4-  Sri,  cp.  assaya  &  missaya]  abode, 
resting  home,  dwelling,  asylum  S  1.32,  33;  Vv  68*; 
Miln  160.  Esp.  freq.  as  bhlkkhuni°  or  bbikkhun"  a 
nunnery  Vin  11.259;  iv.265,  292;  S  11.215;  J  i'47,  428; 
Miln   124. 

Upassasa  [upa  4-  assasa ;  upa  -f  5  4-  Svas]  breathing  J  1.160. 


Upassuti 


149 


Upadaya 


Upassuti  (f.)  [fr.  upa  +  Sru]  listening  to,  attention  S  11. 
75;  iv.gi ;  J  v.ioo;  Miln  92. 

Upassutika  (adJO  [fr-  upassuti]  one  who  lislens,  an  eaves- 
dropper J  V.81. 

UpahaCCa  (° — )  [ger.  of  upahanti]  —  I.  spoiling,  impairing, 
defiling  J  V.267  (manai))  —  2.  reducing,  cutting  short; 
only  in  phrase  upahacca-parinibbayin  "coming  to  ex- 
tinction after  reducing  the  time  of  rebirths  (or  after  having 
almost  reached  the  destruction  of  life")  S  v. 70,  201  sq.; 
A  1.233  *<l-i  1^-380;  Pug  17  (upagantva  kslakiriyaq 
ayukkhayassa  asane  thatva  ti  attho  Pug  A  199);  Nett 
190.  —  The  term  is  not  quite  clear;  there  seems  to  have 
existed  very  early  confusion  with  upapacca  >  upapajja  > 
uppajja,  as  indicated  by  BSk.  upapadya-parinirvayin,  and 
by  remarks  of  C.  on  Kvu  268,  as  quoted  at  Kvu  trsl"- 
158,   159. 

Upahannati  [Pass,  of  upahanti]  to  be  spoilt  or  injured  Sn 
584;  J  IV. 14;   Miln  26. 

Upahata  [pp.  of  upahanti]  injured,  spoilt;  destroyed  D  1.85 
(phrase  khata  +  upahata);  S  1.238  (na  supahata  "not 
easily  put  out"  trsl.);  H227;  A  1. 161;  Uh  134;  J  VI. 
515;  Miln  223,  302;  DhA  11.33  (an°). 

Upahattar  [Sk.  *upahartr,  n.  ag.  of  upa  -j-  hf]  a  bringer 
(of)  M   1.447  sq. 

Upahanti  (&  "hanati  J  1.454)  ["pa  +  han]  to  impair,  in- 
jure; to  reduce,  cut  short;  to  destroy,  only  in  ger.  upa- 
hacca;  pp.  upahata  &  Pass,  upahannati  (q.  v.). 

Upaharaqa  (nt.)  [fr.  upa  +  hf]  —  l-  presentation;  luxury 
J  1.231.  —  2.  taking,  seizing  J  vi.198. 

Upaharati  [upa  -f  hf]  to  bring,  offer,  present  A  11.87;  '"■ 
33;  Dh  1.301,   302;  J  V.477. 

Upahara  [fr.  upa  -{■  hf]  bringing  forward,  present,  offering, 
gift  Vin  111.136  (ahar°)  A  11.87;  >'i-33;  v.66  (melt°);  J 
1.47;  IV.455;  VI.117;  DA  1.97. 

UpaWqsatl  [upa  +  higs]  to  injure,  hurt  Vin  II.203 ;  J  iv.is6. 

Upagacchati  [upa  +  a  -f  gam]  to  come  to,  arrive  at, 
reach,  obtain,  usually  aor.  upagafichi  Cp  I  lo'",  pi.  upa- 
gauchui]  Sn  1 126;  or  upagami  Sn  426,  685,  pi.  upaga- 
niui)  Sn  302,  1126.  Besides  in  pres.  imper.  upagaccha 
PvA  64  (so  read  for  upagaccha).  —  pp.  upagata. 

Upagata  [pp.  of  upagacchati]  come  to,  having  reached  or 
attained  Sn  1016;  PvA  1 17  (yakkhattag) ;  Sdhp  280. 

UpSta  [according  to  Kern,  Toiv.  s.  v.  =  Sk.  upatta,  pp  of 
upa -|- a  +  da  "taken  up";  after  Morris  jfP  T S.  1884, 
75  =  uppata  "flying  up"]  thrown  up,  cast  up,  raised  (of 
dust)  Th  1,  675. 

Up&tlgacchatl  [upa  +  ati  +  gacchati]  to  "go  out  over", 
to  surpass,  overcome,  only  in  y^  sg.  pret.  upaccaga  Sn 
333,  636,  641,  827;  Th  I,  181;  2,  4;  J  1.258;  VI.I82;- 
&  3"'<'  pi.  upaccagui)  S  1.35;  A  111.31 1;  J  111. 201. 

UpAtldhavatl  [upa  4-^4-  dhavati]  to  tun  on  or  in  to  Ud  72. 

Updtlpanna  [pp.  of  upatipajjati,  upa  -)-  a  -f  pad]  fallen 
into,  a  prey  to  (with  loc.)  Sn  495  (=  nipanna  with  gloss 
adhimutta  SnA  415). 

Upfitlvatta  [pp.  of  upitivattati]  gone  beyond,  escaped  from, 
free  from  (with  ace.)  S  1.143;  A  11.15;  Sn  55,  474,  520, 
907;  J  III. 7,  360;  Fd'  322  =  Nd''  163.  Cp.  BSk.  up.v 
tivrtta  in  same  sense  at  M  Vastu  111.281. 

Up&tlvattatl  [upa  -\-  ati  +  vattati]  to  go  beyond,  overstep 
M  1.327;  Sn  712  (v.  I.  for  upanivattati);  Nett  49.  — 
pp.  upativatta  (q.  v.). 


Upada  (adv.)  [shortened  ger.  of  upadiyati  for  the  usual 
upadsya  in  specialised  meaning]  lit.  "taking  up",  i.e. 
subsisting  on  something  else,  not  original,  secondar)-, 
derived  (of  rupa  form)  Dhs  877,  960,  1210;  Vism  275, 
444  (24  fold);  DhsA  215,  299,  333,  cp.  Dhs  trsl"-  127, 
197.  —  Usually  (and  this  is  the  earlier  use  of  upada) 
as  neg.  anupada  (for  anupSdaya)  in  meaning  "not  taking 
up  any  more  (fuel,  so  as  to  keep  the  fire  of  rebirth 
alive)",  not  clinging  to  love  of  the  world,  or  the  kilesas 
q.  v.,  having  no  more  tendency  to  becoming;  in  phrases 
a.  parinibbanar]  "unsupported  emancipation"  M  1.148; 
S  IV.48;  V.29;  DhA  1.286  etc.;  a.  vimokkho  mental 
release  A  V.64  (A  A:  catuhi  upadanehi  agahetva  cittassa 
vimokkho;  arahattass'etai]  namai));  Vin  v. 164;  Ps  11.45 
sq.;  a.  vimutto  D  1.17  (=  kinci  dhammaq  anupadiyitva 
vimutto  DA  1.109);  cp.  M  111.227  (paritassana). 

Upadana  (nt.)  [fr.  upa  -|-  a  -|-  da]  —  (lit.  that  (material) 
substratum  by  means  of  which  an  active  process  is  kept 
alive  or  going),  fuel,  supply,  provision ;  adj.  ( — °)  sup- 
ported by,  drawing  one's  existence  from  S  1.69 ;  n  85 
(aggikkhandho  °assa  pariyadana  by  means  of  taking  up 
fuel);  v. 284  (vat°) ;  J  111.342  sa-upadana  (adj.)  provided 
with  fuel  S  IV.399;  anupadana  wilhout  fuel  DhA  11.163. — 
2.  (appl<i)  "drawing  upon",  grasping,  holding  on,  grip, 
attachment;  adj.  ( — ")  finding  one's  support  by  or  in, 
clinging  to,  taking  up,  nourished  by.  See  on  term  Dhs 
trsl"-  323  &  Cpd.  171.  They  are  classified  as  4  upadanani 
or  four  Graspings  viz.  kam°,  ditth°,  silabbat",  attavad" 
or  the  graspings  arising  from  sense-desires,  speculation, 
belief  in  rites,  belief  in  the  soul-theory  D  11.58;  111.230; 
M  1. 51,  66;  S  II. 3;  V59;  Dhs  1213;  Ps  1.129;  11.46, 
47;  Vbh  375;  Nett  48;  Vism  569.  —  For  upadana  in 
var.  connections  see  the  foil,  passages:  D  1.25;  II. 31,  33, 
56;  111.278;  M  1.66,  136  (attavad")  266;  S  11.I4,  17,  30, 
85;  III.IO,  13  sq.,  lOI,  135,  167,  191;  IV.32,  87  sq., 
102  (tannissitar)  viiinanar)  tadupadanai]),  390,  400  (== 
tanha);  A  iv.69;  V.iil  (upay");  Sn  170,  358,  546;  Ps 
1.51  sq.,  193;  11.45  sq,  113;  Vbh  18,  30,  67,  79,  119, 
132;  Dhs  1059,  1136,  1213,  1536  sq.;  Nett  28  sq.,  41 
sq.,  114  sq.;  DhA  IV.  194.  —  sa°  full  of  attachment  (to 
life)  M  165;  Vin  III. Ill;  S  IV.  102;  an"  unattached,  not 
showing  attachment  to  existence  S  IV. 399;  Vin  ill.iii; 
Th  I,  840;  Miln  32;  DA  1.98. 

-kkhandha,  usually  as  pane'  upadana-kkhandha  the 
factors  of  the  "fivefold  clinging  to  existence"  [cp.  BSk. 
pane'  u°-skandhah  Av.  S  11.168'  &  note]  D  11.35,  3°! 
sq.;  111.223,  286;  M  1.61,  144,  :85;  111.15,  3°,  "4,  2951 
Ps  11.109  sq.;  Vbh  loi ;  Vism  505  (khandha-paucaka). 
See  for  detail  khandha  II. B  2.  -kkhaya  extinction  or 
disappearance  of  attachment  S  11.54;  A  111.376  sq. ;  Sn 
475,  743;  It  75.  -nidana  the  ground  of  upadana;  adj. 
founded  on  or  caused  by  attachment  Ps  11.11 1 ;  Vbh  135  sq. 
-nlrodba  destruction  of  "grasping"  Vin  l.l  (in  formula 
of  paticca-samuppada);  S  II. 7;  111.14;  A  1. 177.  -paccaya 
=  "nidana  S  II. 5;  11194;  Sn  507,  742. 

Upadaniya  (adj.)  [fr.  upadana,  for  *upadanika  >  °aka]  be- 
longing to  or  connected  with  upadana,  sensual,  (inclined 
to)  grasping ;  material  (of  rupa),  derived.  See  on  term 
Dhs  trsl"-  203,  322.  —  S  11.84;  "'-47;  IV. 89,  108;  Dhs 
584,  1219,  1538;  Vbh  12  sq.,  30,  56,  119,  125,319,326. 

Upadaya  (adv.)  [ger.  of  upadiyati]  —  I.  (as  prep,  with 
ace.)  lit.  "taking  it  up"  (as  such  &  such),  i.  e.  (a)  out 
of,  as,  for;  in  phrase  anukampai)  upadaya  out  of  pity  or 
mercy  D  1.204;  P^'A  61,  141,  164.  —  (b)  compared  with, 
alongside  of,  with  reference  to,  according  to  D  1.205 
(kalaii  ca  samayan  ca  ace.  to  time  &  convenience);  Dh.\ 
1.391;  VvA  65  (paijsucunnar));  PvA  268  (manussalokaij). 
The  same  use  of  upadaya  is  found  in  BSk.,  e.  g.  at  Divy 
25,  359,  4'3;  Av.  6  1.255.  —  2-  ('"^  same  meaning  & 
application  as  upada,  i.  e.  in  ncg.  form  first  &  then  in 
positive  abstraction  from  the  latter)  as  philosophical  Icrm 
"hanging  on  to",  i.e.  derived,  secondary  (with  rupa)  Vbh 
12,    67    etc.;    Nd'    266.     Usually    as    anupadaya    "not 


Upadaya 


150 


Upahana 


clinging  to",  without  any  (further)  clinging  (to  rebirth), 
emancipated,  unconditioned,  free  [cp.  BSk.  paritt-anupa- 
daya  free  from  the  world  Divy  655],  freq.  in  phrase  a. 
nibbuta  completely  emancipated  S  11.279;  A  1. 162;  IV. 
290;  besides  in  foil,  pass.:  Vin  1.14  (a.  cittat)  vimuccati) 
182  (id.);  S  U.187  sq. ;  IV. 20,  107;  V.317;  Uh  89  =  S 
V.24  (adanapati-nisagge  a.  ye  rata);  Dh  414;  Sn  3^3! 
It  94  (-f-  aparitassato). 

Upadi°  [the  compD-from  of  upadana,  derived  fr.  upada  in 
analogy  to  nouns  in  °a  &  °a  which  change  their  a  to  i 
in  compn-  with  kf  &  bhu ;  otherwise  a  n.  formation  fr. 
da  analogous  to  "dhi  fr.  dha  in  upadhi]  =z  upadana,  but 
in  more  concrete  meaning  of  "stuff  of  life",  substratum 
of  being,  khandha;  only  in  corabn- with  "sesa  (adj.)  having 
some  fuel  of  life  (=;  khandhas  or  substratum)  left,  i.  e.  still 
dependent  (on  existence),  not  free,  materially  determined 
S  V.I 29,  181;  A  III.  143;  It  40;  Vism  509.  More  fre- 
quently neg.  an-upadi-sesa  (nibbana,  nibbanadhatu  or 
parinibbana,  cp.  similarly  BSk.  anupadi-vimukti  M  Vastu 
1.69)  completely  emancipated,  free,  without  any  (material) 
substratum  Vin  11.239  (nibbana-dhatu);  Dm. 135;  M  1.148 
(parinibbana);  A  11.120;  IV.75  sq.,  202,  313;  J  128,  55; 
Sn  876;  It  39,  121  (nibbana-dhatu);  Ps.  I.ioi;  Vism 
509;  DhA  IV. 108  (nibbana);  VvA  164,  165.  Opp.  sa- 
upadisesa  A  IV.7S  sq.,  378  sq.;  Sn  354  (opp.  nibbayi); 
Vism  509;  Nett  92.  See  further  ref.  under  nibbana  & 
parinibbana. 

Upadi^^a  [for  °adinna  with  substitution  of  nn  for  nn  owing 
to  wrong  derivation  as  pp.  from  adiyati*  instead  of 
adiyalii]  grasped  at,  laid  hold  of;  or  "the  issue  of  gras- 
ping", i.  e.  material,  derived,  secondary  (cp.  upada)  see 
def.  at  Dhs  Irsl"-  201,  324.  —  Dhs  585,877,1211,  1534; 
Vbh  2  sq.,  326,  433;  Vism  349,  451;  an°  Vin  UI.113; 
Dhs   585,  991,   1212,   1535. 

Upadlqqaka  (adj,)  =  upadinna  DhsA  311,  315,  378; 
Vism   398. 

Upadiyati  [upa  -)-  5  +  da,  see  aJiyatl']  to  take  hold  of,  to 
grasp,  cling  to,  show  attachment  (to  the  world),  cp.  upa- 
dana D  11.292;  M  1.56,  67;  S  11.14;  111.73,  94,  135;  IV. 
168  (na  kiuci  loke  u.  =  parinibbayati);  Sn  752,  1 103, 
1104;  Kdi  444  (:=adeti);  Nd^  164.  ppr.  upadiyar)  S  iv. 
24  =  65  (an°);  —  ppr.  med.  upadiyamana  S  111.73; 
SnA  409,  &  upadiyana  ("adiyano)  Sn  470;  Dh  20.  — 
ger.  upadaya  in  lit.  meaning  "taking  up"  J  1.30;  Miln 
184,  338,  341  ;  for  specialised  meaning  &  use  as  prep, 
see  separately  as  also  upada  and  upadiyitva  VvA  209 ; 
DA  1. 1 09  (an°) ;  DhA  IV.  1 94  (an°).  —  pp.  upadinna  (q.  v.). 

Upadhi  [fr.  upa  +  a  +  dha]  l.  cushion  J  vi.253.  —  2.  sup- 
plement, ornament  (?),  in  °ratha  "the  chariot  with  the 
outfit",  expld-  by  C.  as  the  royal  chariot  with  the  golden 
slipper  J  VI.22. 

Upadhlya  [fr.  upahi]  being  furnished  with  a  cushion  J  VI. 
252  (adj.). 

Upaya  [fr.  upa  -f-  1,  cp.  upaya]  approach;  fig.  vay,  means, 
expedient,  stratagem  S  111.53  sq.,  58;  D  111.220  (°kosalla); 
Sn  321  ("fiiiu);  J  1.2 56;  Nd^  570  (for  upaya);  PvA  20, 
31,  39,  45,  104,  161;  Sdhp  10,  12,  350,  385.  —  Cases 
adverbially;  instr.  upayena  by  artifice  or  means  of  a  trick 
Pv.\  93;  yena  kenaci  u.  PvA  113.  —  abl.  upayaso  by 
some  means,  somehow  J  111.443  \  v. 401  {=  upayena  C).  — 
anupaya  wrong  means  J  1.256;  Sdhp  405;  without  going 
near,  without  having  a  propensity  for  S  1.181 ;  M  111.25. 
-kusala  clever  in  resource  J  1.98;  Nett  20;  SnA  274. 

Upayatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  upay.i]  a  means  of  ( — °)  VvA 
84  (patipajjan"). 

Upayana  (nt.)  [fr.  upa  +  |,  cp.  upaya]  going  to  (in  special 
sense),  enterprise,  offering,  tribute,  present  J  v. 347;  vi. 
327;  Miln   155,   171,  241;   Sillip  616,  619. 


Upayasa  [np^  +  aySsa,  cp.  BSk.  upilyasa  Divy  210,  314.] 
(a  kind  of)  trouble,  turbulence,  tribulation,  unrest,  distur- 
bance, unsettled  condition  M  1.8,  144,  368;  111.237;  A 
1.144,  177,  203  (sa°);  11.123,  203;  "1-3,  97,  429;  Sn  542; 
It  89  =  A  1.147  ^  M  1.460;  J  11.277  (°bahula);  iv  22 
(id.);  Pug  30,  36;  Vbh  247;  Nett  29;  Miln  69;  Vism 
504  (def.);  DA  1.121.  —  anupayasa  peacefulness,  com- 
posure, serenity,  sincerity  D  ill. 1 59;  A  111.429;  PsI  11  sq. 

Uparamati  [upa  +  a  +  ram]  to  cease,  to  desist  j  v.391, 498. 

Uparaddha  [pp.  of  up.irambhati]  blamed,  reprimanded, 
reproved  A  V  230. 

Upirambha  [Sk.  uparambha,  upa  -f  alambhatc]  —  I.  re- 
proof, reproach,  censure  M  1. 134,  432;  S  111.73 ;  v. 73; 
A  1. 199;  11.181 ;  III  175;  IV.25;  Vbh  372.  —  2.  (adj.)  itl- 
disposed,  hostile  Th   I,  360  sq.;  DA  1.21,  263. 

Uparambhati  [Sk.  upalambhate,  upa  +  a  -|-  labh]  to  blame, 
reprimand,  reproach  M  1.432, 433.  —  pp.  uparaddha  (q.  v.). 

Upalapetl  at  PvA  276  read  upalapeti  (q.  v.). 

Upavisi  3''''  sg.  aor.  of  upavisati  (q.  v.). 

Upasaka  [fr.  upa  -)-  as,  cp.  upasati]  a  devout  or  faithful 
layman,  a  lay  devotee  Vin  1.4,  16  (tevaciko  u.),  37,  139, 
195  sq.;  n.125;  111.6,  92;  IV.14,  109;  D  1.85;  11.105, 
113;  111.134,  148,  153,  168,  172  sq.,  264;  M  1.29,  467, 
490;  S  v.395,  410;  A  1.56  sq.;  11. 132  (°parisa);  III  206 
("candala,  °ratana);  I  v. 220  sq.  (kittavata  hoti);  Sn  376, 
384;';  1.83;  Pv  I  I0«;  Vbh  24S  (^sikkha);  DA  1.234; 
PvA  36,  38,  54,  61,  207.  —  f.  upasika  Vin  1.18,  141, 
216;  III. 39;  IV. 21,  79;  D  111.124,  148,  172,  264;  M  1.29, 
467,  49:;  S  11235  sq.;  A  1.88;  II  132;  V.287  sq.;  Miln 
383;  PvA   151,   160. 

Upasakatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  upasaka]  state  of  being  a  be- 
lieving layman  or  a  lay  follower  of  the  Buddha  Vin  1.37 ; 
S  iv,30i ;  Vv  842'. 

Upasati  [upa  +  as]  lit.  "to  sit  close  by",  to  go  after,  attend, 
follow,  serve,  honour,  worship  D  11.287;  A  I.162;  J  v. 
339,  371  (^=  upagacchati  C);  Miln  41S  (lakkhe  upaseti 
fix  his  attention  on  the  target).  —  y^  pi.  pres.  med. 
upasare  A  1.162;  J  iv.417  (=  upayanti  C.).  Cp.  payi- 
rupasati.  —  pp.  upasita  &  upasina  (q.  v.).  See  also 
upasaka,  upasana'. 

Upasana'  (nt.)  [fr.  upasali]  attendance,  service,  honour 
S  1.46  (saman°);  Th   I,  239;  Miln   115.   Cp.   payir". 

Upasana-  (nt.)  [fr.  up.asati]  —  I.  archery  J  Vl.448;  usually 
in  phrase  katupasana  skilled  in  archery  M  1.82 ;  S  11. 
266;  A  11.48;  J  1V.211;  Mhvs  24,  I.  —  Miln  232  {"^ 
sikkhitva).  —  2.  practice  Miln  419.  —  3.  in  "sala  gym- 
nasium, training  ground  Miln  352. 

Upasika  see  upasaka;  cp.  payii°. 

Upasita  [pp.  of  upasati]  honoured,  served,  attended  S  1 133, 
cp.  Nd^  165;  Th   I,  179. 

Upasina    [pp.    of  upasati]   sitting  near  or  close  to  J   V.336. 

Upahata  [upa  -f-  ahata]  struck,  afflicted,  hurt  J  1.414. 

Upahana  (f)  [with  metathesis  for  upanaha  =  Sk.  upanah 
f.  or  upanaha  m. ;  but  cp.  BSk.  upanaha  nt.  Divy  6]  a 
shoe,  sandal  Vin  1. 185;  II. 118,  207  (adj.  sa-upahana),  208 ; 
S  1.226;  J  IV.173,  223;  Pv  II. 41";  Ndi  226;  KhA  45; 
DhA  I  381  (chatt  "i)  as  nt?  v.  1.  '"na);  PvA  127,  186.  — 
upabanai)  (or  upahana)  arohati  to  put  on  sandals  J  iv. 
16;  VI.  524;  opp.  omuiicati  take  off  Vin  11.207,  208; 
J  III  415;  IV. 16.  —  Note,  An  older  form  upanad"  (for 
upanadh=:Sk.  upanah)  is  seen  by  Kern  in  panadupama 
J  11.223,  which  is  read  by  him  as  upanadupama  (v.  1. 
upahan-upama).  See   Toev.  s,  v.  upanad. 


Upiya 


151 


Upajjati 


Uplyfl  [g^f-  °f  upeti]  undergoing,  going  into,  metri  causa 
as  upiya  ( — ")  and  opiya,  viz.  hadayasmii]  opiya  S  i  199 
^  Th  I,  119;  senupiya  J  v.96  (v.  1.  senopiya;  C.  sayan- 
upagata).  In  tadCpiya  the  2"'<i  part  upiya  represents  an 
adj.  upaka  fr.  upa  (see  ta  I.  a),  thus  found  at  Miln  9. 

Upekkhaka  (adj.)  [fr.  upekkha]  disinterested,  resigned,  stoi- 
cal Vin  HI. 4;  D  1.37,  183;  III. 113,  222,  245,  269,  28:: 
S  V.295  sq.,  318;  A  111.169  sq.,  279;  V.30;  Sn  515, 
855,  912;  It  8i;  Nd'  241,  330;  Pug  50,  59;  Dhs  163: 
Dhs.\  172. 

Upekkhati  [upa  -\-  flc§]  to  look  on,  to  be  disinterested  or 
iodifTerent  Sn  911;  Nd'  328;  J  vi.294. 

Upekkhana  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  upa  +  iks]  is  commentator's 
paraphrase  for  upekkha  (q.  v.)  Nd'  501  =  Nd'^  166; 
Vbh  230. 

Upekkhavant  (adj.)  =  upekkhaka  J   V.403. 

Upekkha  &  Upekha  (f.)  [fr.  upa  +  ik?,  cp.  BSk.  upekss 

Divy  483;  Jtm  2H.  On  spelling  upekha  for  upekkha  see 
Miiller  P.  Gr.  16]  'looking  on",  hedonic  neutrality  or 
indifference,  zero  point  between  joy  &  sorrow  (Cpd.  66); 
disinterestedness,  neutral  feeling,  equanimity.  Sometimes 
equivalent  to  adukkhamasukha-vedana  "feeling  which  is 
neither  pain  nor  pleasure".  See  detailed  discussion  of 
term  at  Cpd.  229—232,  &  cp.  Vis  its/"-  39.  —  Ten 
kinds  of  upekkha  are  eoumd-  at  DhsA  172  (cp.  Dhs  trsl"- 
48;  Hardy,  Man.  Buddhism  505).  —  D  I  38  ("satipari- 
suddhi  purity  of  mindfulness  which  comes  of  disinterest- 
edness cp.  Vin  111.4;  Dhs  165  &  Dhs  trsln"-  50),  251; 
11.279  (twofold);  111.50,  78,  106,  224  sq.,  239,  245  (six 
"upavicaias),  252,  282;  M  1.79,  364;  111  219;  S  iv.71, 
114  sq.,  V.209  sq.  (^itidriya);  A  142;  81  (°sukha),  256 
("nimitta);  IU.185,  29:  ("cetovimutti);  iv.47  sq.,  70  sq., 
300,  443;  V.301,  360;  Sn  67,  73,  972,  1107,  (°sali- 
saqsuddha);  Nd'  501  =  Nd^  166;  Ps  1.8,  36,  60,  167, 
•77;  Pug  59  ("sati);  Nett  25,  97  ("dhatu),  121  sq.;  Vbh 
12,  15  (='indriya),  54  (id.),  69,  85  ("dhatu),  228,  324,  326 
(°samboijhanga),  381  ("upavicara);  Dhs  150,  153,  165, 
262,  556,  1001,  l.'!78,  1582;  Vism  134  ("sambojjhanga, 
5  conditions  of),  148  (°anubruhana),  160  (def.  &  tenfold), 
317  Cbhavana),  319  (°brahmavihara),  325  ("viharin),  461  ; 
SnA  128;  Sdhp  461. 

Upeta  [pp.  of  upeti]  furnished  v^■ilh,  endowed  with,  pos- 
sessed of  Sn  402,  463,  700,  722;  Dh  10,  280:  Nd-  s.  v., 
Th  I,  789;  Pv  1.76  (baP);  11  7 '^  (phal°,  v.  1.  preferable 
°upaga),  IV.  1^-  (ariyaq  atthangavarar)  upelan  ^=  atthahi 
angehi  upetaq  yuttai)  PvA  243);  Vism  l8(-)-sam",  upa- 
gata,  samupagata  etc);  PvA  7.  —  Xolc.  The  BSk.  usually 
has  samanvagata  for  upeta  (see  atthanga). 

Upeti  [upa  +  1]  to  go  to  (with  ace),  come  to,  approach, 
undergo,  attain  D  1.55  (pathavi-kayai)  an-upeti  does  not 
go  into  an  earthly  body),  180;  M  1.486  (na  upeti,  as 
answer:  "does  not  meet  the  question");  S  111.93  ;  It  89; 
Sn  209,  (na  sankhai)  "cannot  be  reckoned  as")  749,  911, 
1074;  728  (dukkhai)),  897;  Sn  404  (deve);  Nd'  63;  Nd^ 
167;  Dh  151,  306,  342;  Sn  318;  J  IV.309  (maranai)  upeti 
to  die),  312  (id.),  463  (id.);  v.212  (v.  1.  opeti,  q.  v.); 
Th  I,  17  (gabbhai));  Pv  11. 3'*  (saggai)  upehi  thanaq);  iv. 
3'2  (saranaq  buddharj  dhamraar));  Nett  66;  fut.  upessai] 
Sn  29;  2nd  sg.  upehisi  Dh  238,  348.  • —  ger.  upecca  Vv 
33';  S  1.209  =  N'c"  '3';  ^^A.  146  (realising  =  upa- 
gantva  celetva  va);  PvA  103  (gloss  for  uppacca  flying 
up);  see  also  upiya  &  uppacca.  —  pp.  upeta. 

Upocita  [pp.  of  upa  -|-  ava  -|-  cl]  heaped  up,  abounding, 
comfortable  J  IV.471. 

UpOSatha  [Vedic  upavasatha,  the  eve  of  the  Soma  sacrifice, 
day  of  preparation].  At  the  time  of  the  rise  of  Buddhism 
the  word  had  come  to  mean  the  day  preceding  four  stages 
of   the   moon's    waxing   and    waning,    viz.    I't,   S'*",    IS'**) 


23d  nights  of  the  lunar  month  that  is  to  say,  a  weekly 
sacred  day,  a  Sabbath.  These  days  were  utilized  by  the 
pre-Buddhistic  reforming  communities  for  the  expounding 
of  their  views,  Vin  i.  loi.  The  Buddhists  adopted  this 
practice  and  on  the  is'h  day  of  the  half-month  held  a 
chapter  of  the  Order  to  expound  their  dhamma,  ib.  102. 
They  also  utilized  one  or  other  of  these  Up.  days  for 
the  recitation  of  the  P.itimokkha  (patimokkbuddesa),  ibid. 
On  Up.  days  laymen  take  upon  themselves  the  Up.  vows, 
that  is  to  say,  the  eight  Silas,  during  the  day.  See  Sila. 
The  day  in  the  middle  of  the  month  is  called  catudassiko 
or  pannarasiko  according  as  the  month  is  shorter  or  longer. 
The  reckoning  is  not  by  the  month  (masa),  but  by  the 
half-monlh  (pakkha),  so  the  twenty-third  day  is  simply 
atthamf,  the  same  as  the  eighth  day.  There  is  an  accasional 
Up.  called  samaggi-uposatho,  "reconciliation-Up.",  which 
is  held  when  a  quarrel  among  the  fraternity  has  been 
made  up,  the  gen.  confession  forming  as  it  were  a  seal 
to  the  reconciliation  (Vin  v. 123;  Mah.  42).  —  Vin  l.ui, 
112,  175,  177;  11.5,  32,  204,  276;  111.164,  169:  D  III, 
60,  61,  145,  147;  A  1.205  sq.  (3  uposathas:  gopalaka", 
nigantha^,  ariya"),  208  (dhamm°),  211  (devata°) ;  iv.248 
(atthanga-samannagata),  258  sq.  (id.),  276,  388  (navah 
angehi  upavutiha);  v.83;  Sn  153  (pannaraso  u);  Vbh 
422;  Vism  227  ("sutta  =  A  1.206  sq.);  Sdhp  439;  DA 
1. 139;  Sn.-V  199;  VvA  71,  109;  PvA  66,  201.  —  The 
hall  or  chapel  in  the  monastery  in  which  the  Patimokkha 
is  recited  is  called  uposathaggarj  (Vin  111.66),  or  '"agarar) 
(Vin  1. 107;  DhA  11.49).  The  Up.  service  is  called '^kamma 
(Vin  1. 102:  V.142;  J  1.232;  111.342,  444:  DhA  1.205). 
uposathag  karoti  to  hold  the  Up.  service  (Vin  1.107, 
175,  177;  J  1.425).  Keeping  the  Sabbath  (by  laymen) 
is  called  uposathar)  upavasati  (A  1.142,  144,  205,  208; 
IV.248;  see  upavasati),  or  uposathavasaij  vasati  (J  v.  177). 
The  ceremony  of  a  layman  taking  upon  himself  the  eight 
Silas  is  called  uposathai)  saraadiyati  (see  silar)  &  sama- 
diyati);  uposatha-sila  observance  of  the  Up.  (VvA  71). 
The  Up.  day  or  Sabbath  is  also  called  uposatha-divasa 
(J  1II-52)- 

Uposathika  (adj.)  [fr.  uposalha]  —  I.  belonging  to  the  Upo 
satha  in  phrase  anuposathikaq  (adv.)  on  every  U.,  i.  e. 
every  fortnight  Vin  IV.315.  —  2.  observing  the  Sabbath, 
fasting  (cp.  BSk.  uposadhika  M  Vastu  11. 9);  Vin  I  58;  iv. 
75,  78;  J   111.52;  Vism  66  (bhatta);  DhA  1.205. 

UpOSathin  (adj.)  [fr.  upusatha]  =  uposathika,  fasting  Mhvs 
17,  6. 

Uppakitaka  indexed  at  Ud  111.2  wrongly  for  upakki- 
taka  (q.  v.). 

Uppakka  (adj.)  [fr.  ud  -f  pac,  cp.  Sk.  pakva  &  see  also 
uppaccati]  —  1.  "boiled  out",  scorched,  seared,  dried  or 
shrivelled  up;  in  phrase  itthii)  uppakkaq  okiliniq  okirinii) 
Vin  111.107  =  S  11.260;  cxpld  by  Bdligh.  Vin  111.273  as 
"kharena  aggina  pakkasarira".  —  2.  "boiled  up",  swollen 
(of  eyes  through  crying)  J  VI.  10. 

Uppacca  [ger.  of  uppatati]  flying  up  Th  2,  248  (see  under 
upacca));  S  1.209  (v.  1.  BB.  upecca,  C.  uppatitva  pi  sa- 
kuno  viya)  =:  Pv  11.7"  (^  uppatitva  Pv.'V  103)  ^=  DhA 
lv.21  (gloss  uppatitva)  =  Nett  131  (upecca) 

Uppaccati  [ud  -f-  paccati.  Pass,  of  pac]  in  ppr.  uppacci- 
yamana  (so  read  for  upapacciyamana,  as  suggested  by 
V.  1.  BB.  uppajj")  "being  boiled  out",  i.  e.  dried  or  shrivelled 
up  (cp.  uppakka  l)  J  IV.327.  Not  with  Morris  J P  T S. 
1887,  129  "being  tormented",  nor  with  Kern,  Tvn'.  under 
upapacc"  as  ppr.  to  pfC  ('upaprcyamana)  "dicht  opge- 
sloten",  a  meaning  foreign  to  this  root. 

Upajjati  [ud  -r  pajjati  of  pad]  to  come  out,  to  arise,  to  be 
produced,  to  be  born  or  reborn,  to  come  into  existence 
D  1. 180;  Sn  584;  Pv  II. l"  (=  nibbattati  PvA  71);  PvA 
8  (nibbattati  -p)i  9,  20,  129  {=  patubhavati);  DA  1.165.  — 
Pass,  uppajjiyati  Vin  1.50.  —  ppr.  uppajjanto  PvA  5, 
21;    fut.  "pajjissali  PvA  5  (bhummadevesu,  corresp.  with 


Upajjati 


152 


Uppadin 


niraye  nibbatlissati  ibid.(,  67  (niraye);  aor.  uppajji  PvA 
21,  50,  66;  &  udapadi  (q.  v.)  Vin  111.4;  J  '-81;  ger. 
"pajjitva  D  11.157  =  8  1.6,  158  =  11.193=:)  1.392  =  Th 
I,  1 159;  &  uppajja  J  IV.24.  —  Caus.  uppadeti  (q.  v.). — 
pp.  uppanna  (q.  v.).  See  also  upapajjati  and  upapanna. 

Uppajjana  (adj.-nt.)  [fr.  uppajjati]  coming  into  existence; 
birth,  rebirth  PvA  9  (°vasena),  33  (id.). 

Uppajjanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  uppajjana]  (belonging  to)  coming 
into  existence,  i.  e.  arising  suddenly  or  without  apparent 
cause,  in  "bhanda  a  treasure  trove  J  111. 150. 

Uppajjltar  [n.  ag.  fr.  uppajjati]  one  who  produces  or  is 
reborn  in  (with  ace.)  D  1. 143  (saggaq  etc.). 

Uppatipatiya  [abl.  of  uppatipati,  ud  -j-  patipati]  lit.  "out 
of  reach",  i.e.  in  a  distance  J  1.89;  or  impossible  Vism 
96  (ekapaiiho  pi  u.  agato  nahosi  not  one  question  was 
impossible  to  be  understood).  As  tt.  g.  "with  reference 
to  the  preceding",  supra  Vism  272;  SnA  1 24,  128;  DhsA 
135  (T.  °patipatika). 

Uppa^ldana  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  ut  +  paiJCi  or  unknown  etym.] 
ridiculing,  mocking  Miln  357  ;  Vism  29;  PugA  250  ("katha). 

Uppa9(juppan(Jukajata  (adj.)  [redupl.  intens.  formation; 
ud  -\-  pandu  -j-  ka  -j- jata;  pandu  yellowish.  The  word  is 
evidently  a  corruption  of  something  else,  perhaps  upa- 
pannduka  upa  in  meaning  of  "somewhat  like",  cp.  upanlla, 
upanibha  etc.  and  reading  at  Pv  11. i'^  upakandakin.  The 
latter  may  itself  be  a  corruption,  but  is  expld.  at  PvA  72 
by  upakandaka-jata  "shrivelled  up  all  over,  nothing  but 
pieces  (?)".  The  trsl"-  is  thus  doubtful;  the  USk.  is  the 
P.  form  retranslated  into  utpanduka  Divy  334,  463,  and 
trsld.  "very  pale"]  "having  become  very  pale"  (■),  or 
"somewhat  pale"  (?),  with  dubbanna  in  Khp,  A  234,  and 
in  a  stock  phrase  of  three  different  settings,  viz.  (i)  kiso 
lukho  dubbanno  upp°  dhamani-santhata-gatto  Vin  1.276; 
III. 19,  1 10,  M  11.121 ;  distorted  to  BSk.  bhito  utp°.  krsaluko 
durbalako  mlanako  at  Divy  334.  —  (2)  kiso  upp°.  J  VI. 
;i;  DhA  IV.66.  —  (3)  upp°  dhamanisanth°  J  1.346;  11.92; 
V.95  ;  DhA  1.367.  Besides  in  a  doubtful  passage  at  Pv  11. 1 " 
(upakandakin,  v.  1.  upp.ind'  BB.),  expld.  at  PvA  72  "upa- 
kandakajata",  vv.  11.  uppandaka^  and  uppandupanduka°. 

Uppan^etl  [ut  +  pan(J,  of  uncertain  origin]  to  ridicule, 
mock,  to  deride,  make  fun  of  Vin  1. 216,  272,  293;  IV. 
278;  A  111.91  =  Pug  67  (uhasati  uUapati  +);  J  v.288, 
300;  DhA  11.29;  "'.4';  TvA  175  (avamaiiaati  -(-).  . — 
Note.  The  BSk.  utprasayati  at  Divy  17  represents  the  P. 
uppandeti  &  must  somehow  be  a  corruption  of  the  latter 
(vv.  11.  at  Divy  17  are  utprasayati,  utpranayati  &  utpras- 
rayati). 

Uppatati  [ud  -)-  patati]  to  fly  or  rise  up  into  the  air; 
to  spring  upwards,  jump  up;  3rd  sq.  pret.  udapatta  [Sk. 
*udapaplat]  J  111.484  (so  read  for  °palto,  &  change  si  to 
pi);  ger.  uppatitva  J  111.484;  iv.213;  PvA  103,  215;  and 
uppacca  (q.  v.).  —  pp.  uppatita  (q.  v.). 

Uppatita  [pp.  of  uppatati]  jumped  up,  arisen,  come  about 
Sn  I  (=  uddhamukhaq  patitaq  gatai)  SnA  4),  591;  Dh 
222  (=  uppanna  DhA  111.301);  Th   I,  371. 

Uppatti  (f.)  [Vedic  utpatti,  ud  +  pad]  coming  forth,  product, 
genesis,  origin,  rebirth,  occasion  A  H.133  ("patilabhikani 
sanyojanSni) ;  Vbh  137  (°bhava),  4ii;cp.  Compendium.^ 
liii  f.  (khana);  Miln  127  (°divasa);  Vism  571  sq.  (°bhava, 
9  fold:  kama"  etc.);  SnA  46,  159,  241,  254,  312,  445; 
PvA  144,  215.  On  uppatti  deva  see  deva  and  upapatti. — 
See  also  atthuppatti,  danuppatti. 

Uppatha  [Sk.  utpatha,  ud  +  patha]  a  wrong  road  or  course 
D  1. 10  Cgamana,  of  planets);  S  1.38,  43;  J  v,453;  vi. 
235;  DhA  111.356  Ccar.i). 


I   Uppanna  [pp.  of  uppajjati]  born,  reborn,  arisen,  produced, 
'        D  1.192  (lokaq  u.  born  into  the  world);  Vin  111.4 ;  Sn  55 

"liana;  see  Nd»  168),  998;  J  1.99;  Pv  11.22  (pettivisayar)); 

Dhs    1035,    1416;    Vbh    12,  17,  50,  319;  327;  DhA  111. 

301;  PvA  21  (petesu),  33,  144,  155.  —  anuppanna  not 

arisen  M  11.11;  not  of  good  class  D  1.97  (see  DA  1.267). 

Uppabbajati  [ud  -f  pabbajati]  to  leave  the  Order  DhA  i. 
68;  PvA  55.  —  pp.  ''pabbajita.  —  Caus.  uppabbajeti 
to  turn  out  of  the  Order  J  iv.219;  DhA  IV.195.  —  Caus. 
II.  uppabbajapeti  to  induce  some  one  to  leave  the  Order 
J  IV.304. 

Uppabbajjta  [ud  -f-  pabbajita]  one  who  has  left  the  com- 
munity of  bhikkhus,  an  ex-bhikkhu  VvA  319;  DhA  1.311. 

Uppala  [Sk.  utpala,  uncertain  etym.]  the  (blue)  lotus;  a 
waterlily.  The  7  kinds  of  lotuses,  mentioned  at  J  v. 37 
are:  nila-ratta-set-uppala,  ratta-seta-paduma,  seta-kumuda, 
kalla-hara.  —  D  1.75;  n.19;  Vin  111.33  (°gandha) ;  J  11. 
443;  Dh  55;  Vv  32»;  35*;  Pv  Ii.i2»,  iii.ioS;  DhA  1.384 
(nil°);  111.394  (id.);  ThA  254,  255;  VvA  132,  161.  — 
What  is  meant  by  uppala-patta  (lotus-leaf?)  at  Vin  iv.  261  ? 

Uppalaka  [uppala  -|-  ka]  "lotus-like",  N.  of  a  hell  (cp.  BSk. 
utpala  at  Divy  67  etc.)  A  V.173.  See  also  pundarika. 

Uppalln  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  uppala]  having  lotuses  rich  in  1.,  only 
in  f.  uppalini  a  lotus-pond  D  1.75;  11. 38;  S  1. 138;  A  iii. 
26;  Vv  322 ;  DA  1.219.  • 

Uppa|aseti  [ud  +  pra  -|-  las,  cp.  Sk.  samullasayati  in  same 
meaning]  to  sound  out  or  forth,  to  make  sound  Miln  21 
(dhamma-sankhaq).  Reading  at  D  II. 337  is  upalaseti  in 
same   meaning. 

Uppalaka  [fr.  ud  +  pat  in  meaning  of  "biting,  slinging"] 
an  insect,  vermin  S  1.170  (santharo  °ehi  saiichanno  "a 
siesta-couch  covered  by  vermin  swarm"  trsld-  p.  215  &  note). 

Uppa^ana  (nt.)  [fr.  ud  -|-  pa^]  pulling  out,  uprooting,  de- 
stroying, skinning  J  1454;  11.283;  vi.238;  Miln  166;  PvA 
46  (kes°);  Sdhp  140  (camm°).  Cp.  sam°. 

Uppa^anaka  (adj.)  [fr.  uppatana]  pulling  up,  tearing  out, 
uprooting  J   1.303  (°vata);  iv.333   (id.). 

Uppateti  [Sk.  utpatayati,  Caus.  uf  ud  +  paf  'o  split,  cp. 
also    BSk.  utpatayati  nidhanan  to  dig  out  a  treasure   Av. 

5  1.294]  'o  split,  tear  asunder;  root  out,  remove,  destroy 
Vin  11.151  (chaviq  to  skin);  M  11.110  (attanaq);  Th  2, 
396  (ger.  uppatiya  =  "patetva  ThA  259);  J  1.281  (bijani); 
IV. 162,  382;  VI.109  (=lu5cati);  Miln  86;  DhA  ni.206. — 
Caus.  uppatapeti  in  pp.  uppatapita  caused  to  be  torn  off 
DhA  111.208.  See  also  uppbaleti. 

Uppada'  [Sk.  utpata,  ud  -)-  pat]  flying  up,  jump ;  a  sudden 

6  unusual  event,  portent,  omen  D  1.9  (v.).  uppata)  = 
Vism  30  (T.  uppata,  v.  1.  uppada)  Sn  360;  J  1.374;  VI. 
475;   Miln   178. 

Uppada'^  [Sk.  utp.=ida,  ud  +  pad]  coming  into  existence, 
appearance,  birlh  Vin  1.185;  D  1.185;  S  111.39  (+ *aya); 
IV.14;  V.30;  A  1.152  (+  vaya),  286,  296;  11.248  (tanh°); 
HI. 1 23  (citt°  state  of  consciousness);  IV.65  (id.);  Dh  182, 
194;  J  1-59,  107  (sat°);  Vbh  303  (citt°),  375  (tanh"); 
PvA  10;  Th.\  282.  —  anuppada  either  "not  coming  into 
existence"  D  ill. 270,  M  1.60;  A  1.286,  296;  11.214,  249; 
111.84  sq. ;  Ps  1.59,  66;  Dhs   1367;  or  "not  ripe"  D  1. 12. 

Uppadaka  (adj.)  ( — °)  [fr.  uppada^]  producing,  generating 
PvA   13  (dukkh°).  f.  "ika  DhA  iv.109  (jhan'). 

Uppadana  (nt.)  [fr.  uppada']  making,  generating,  causing 
PvA   71   (anubal"  read  for  anubalappadana?)   114. 

Uppadin  (adj.)  [fr.  uppada'^]  having  an  origin,  arising, 
bound  to  arise  Dhs  1037,  1416;  Vbh  17,  50,  74,  92 
and  passim;  DhsA  45. 


Uppadetar 


153 


Ubbilavita 


Uppadetar  [n.  ag.  fr.  uppadeti]  one  who  produces,  causes 
or  brings  into  existence,  creator,  producer  M  1.79;  S  I. 
191;  111.66;  V.35I-,  Miln  217. 

Uppadeti  [Caus.  of  uppajjati,  ud  -f  pad]  —  I .  to  give  rise 
to,  to  produce,  put  forth,  show,  evince,  make  D  1. 1 35; 
M  1.162,  185;  Pug  25;  PvA  4,  16,  19,  59;  Sdhp  539. 
cittai)  u.  to  give  a  (temporary)  thought  to  (with  loc.) 
J  1.81;  Miln  85;  DhA  11.89;  P^A  3.  —  2.  to  get,  ob- 
tain, find  J  IV. 2;  Miln  140;  DhA  1.90;  PvA  121.  —  3. 
in  lohitaij  u.   to  draw  (blood)  Miln  214. 

Uppilavatl  (&  Uplavatl)  [Sk.  utplavati,  ud  +  plu,  cp. 
utplutya  jumping  up,  rising  Sp.  Av.  S  1.209]  —  ••  'o 
enierge  (out  of  water),  to  rise,  float  S  iv.313  (uplava 
imper.);  Miln  80,  379;  VvA  47  (uplavitva,  v.l.  uppala- 
vitva);  DA  1.256  (v.l.  upari  lavati).  —  2.  to  jump  up, 
frisk  about,  to  be  elated  or  buoyant  J  11.97  (<^P'  Morris 
yPTS.  1887,  139);  Miln  370.  —  See  also  upaplavali, 
upISpeti  &  ubbillavita  etc. 

UppHa  (adj.)  [ud  4-  picj]  oppressing  or  oppressed:  an°  free 
from  oppression,  not  hurt  or  destroyed  D  1.135  ("PP- 
sa-uppl]a;  T.  upaplla  but  v.l.  upp");  J  111.443;  V-378; 
PvA  161. 

Uppi]ita  [pp.  of  uppileti]  pressed  J   VI.3. 

Upfrileti  [ud  +  pi<J  for  ava  +  pi<},  cp.  uplapeti  =  opilapeti, 
&  opileti]  —  I.  to  press  (down)  on  to,  to  hold  (tight) 
to  (with  ace),  to  cover  up  or  close  M  1.539  (pitthi-panir) 
hanukena);  J  1483  (hatthena  akkhini);  11.245  (hatthi- 
kumbhe  raukhaq);  v.293  (='gg'>l^')) ;  ThA  188.  —  2.  to 
stampede   vvA  83  (pathaviq). 

Uppofhetl  [ud  +  potheti]  to  beat  PvA  4. 

Upplavana  at  DhA  1.309  remains  to  be  explained,  T.  faulty. 

Upphaletl  [Caus.  of  ud  +  phal]  to  cut,  rip  or  split  open 
Vin  1.276  (udara-cchavii)  uppbaletva;  v.l.  uppatetva,  per- 
haps preferable). 

UpphiSUlika  (adj.)  [ud  +  phasulika  for  phasukika  =  pha- 
suka  a  rib]  "with  ribs  out",  i.  e.  with  ribs  showing, 
emaciated,  thin,  "skinny"  Pv  ii.i'  ^=  uggata-phasuka  PvA 
68);  iv.io'  (MSS.  uppa");  ThA   133  (spelt  uppa°). 

Uplapeti  [Sk.  avaplavayati,  Caus.  of  ava  +  plu,  with  sub- 
stitution of  ud  for  ava;  see  also  uppilavati]  to  immerse 
M  1. 135  (vv.  II.  upal°  &  opiP);  J  iv.i62  (fig.  put  into 
the  shade,  overpower;  v.l.  upal").  See  also  opilapeti  & 
ubbillarita. 

Ubbatuma  (adj.)  [ud  -\-  »vrti  (of  Vft)  +  ma  (for  ma  > 
mant);  cp.  Sk.  udvrtta  &  vrtimant]  going  out  of  its 
direction,  going  wrong  (or  upset  r),  in  phrase  ubbatumai) 
rathai)  karoti  to  put  a  cart  out  of  its  direction  A  iv. 
'91,  193- 

Ubbatteti  [Caus.  of  ud  -)-  vft,  as  doublet  of  ubbatteti,  cp. 
BSk.  udvartayati  Divy  12,  36]  to  anoint,  give  perfumes 
(to  a  guest),  to  shampoo  J  1.87  (gandhacunnena),  238 
(id.);  V.89,  438. 

Ubbatthaka  misprint  in  Pug  Index  as  well  as  at  Pug  A 
233  for  ubbhatthaka  (q.  v.). 

Ubbattatl  [ud  -\-  Vft]  to  go  upwards,  to  rise,  swell  J  VI. 
486  (sagaro  ubbatti).  See  also  next. 

Ubbatteti  [Caus.  of  ud  +  v|i,  of  which  doublet  is  ubbatteti; 
cp.  also  ubbatuma]  —  i.  to  tear  out  J  1.199;  Miln  loi 
(sadevake  loke  ubbattiyante);  DhA  1.5  (hadayamaqsar)), 
75  (rukkhai)).  —  2.  to  cause  to  swell  or  rise  J  111.36 1 
(GangSsotai)) ;  iv.161  (samuddai)).  —  3.  (intrs.)  to  go  out 
of  direction,  or  in  the  wrong  direction  Vism  327  (neva 
ubbattati  na  vivattati;  v.l.  uppattali);  DhA  111.155. 


Ubbadhatl  [ud  -\-  vadhati]  to  kill,  destroy  Sn  4  (praet. 
udabbadhi   =  ucchindanto  vadheti  SnA   18). 

Ubbandhatl  [ud  -f  bandhati]  to  hang  up,  strangle  Vin  ill. 
73  (rajjuys);  J  i-504  ('<!•);  "■•345j  Th  2,  80;  Vism  501; 
VvA  139,  207  (ubbandhitu-kSma  in  the  intention  of 
hanging  herself). 

Ubbari  (f.)  [Sk.  urvara,  Av.  urvara  plant]  fertile  soil,  sown 
field;  fig.  woman,  wife  J  vi  473  (=  orodha  C). 

Ubbasatl  see  ubbisati. 

Ubbaha  (adj.)  {—")  [fr.  ud  +  vrh,  i.  e.  to  ubbahati']  only 
in  cpd.  dur°  hard  to  pull  out,  difficult  to  remove  Th  I, 
'24,  495  =  1053- 

Ubbahati'  [ud  +  bph  or  Vfh,  see  also  uddharati]  to  pull  out, 
take  away,  destroy  .Sn  583  (udabbahe  pot.  =  ubbaheyya 
dhareyya  SnA  460);  Th  I,  158;  J  11.223  (udabbahe  = 
udabbaheyya  C);  iv.462  (ubbahe);  vi.587  (=  hareyya  C). 

Ubbahati^  [ud  +  vahati,  although  possibly  same  as  ubba- 
hati', in  meaning  of  uddharati,  which  has  taken  up 
meanings  of  *udbharati,  as  well  as  of  *udbrhati  and  *ud- 
vahati]  to  cany  away,  take  away,  lift  (the  corn  after 
cutting):  only  in  Caus.  II.  ubbahapeti  to  have  the  corn 
harvested  Vin  11  180  =  A  1.241.  —  Here  belong  uddhata 
and  uddharana.  Cp.  also  pavalha. 

Ubba|ha  [adj.  pp.  of  ud  -\-  bahati  :=  vSh  or  more  likely 
of  ud  -|-  badh]  oppressed,  troubled,  harassed,  annoyed, 
vexed  Vin  1.148,  353;  n.119;  IV. 308;  J  1.300;  Vism  182 
(kunapa-gandhena);  DhA  1.343. 

Ubbasiyatl  [Pass,  of  ubbaseti,  ud  -f  vas]  "to  be  dis-in- 
habited",  i.  e.  to  be  abandoned  by  the  inhabitants  Mhvs 
6,  22  (=  chaddiyati  C).  —  Cp.  ubbisati. 

Ubbahana  (nt.)  [fr.  ubbahati']  carrying,  lifting,  in  "sa- 
mattha  fit  for  carrying,  i.  e.  a  beast  of  burden,  of  an 
elephant  J  vi.448. 

Ubbahlka  (f-)  [°^g-  f-  of  ubbShika,  adj.  fr.  ubbaheti  in 
abstr.  use]  a  method  of  deciding  on  the  expulsion  of  a 
bhikkhu,  always  in  instr.  ubbabikaya  "by  means  of  a 
referendum",  the  settlement  of  a  dispute  being  laid  in  the 
hands  of  certain  chosen  brethren  (see  f^in  Texts  111.49  sq.) 
Vin  11.95,  97,  305;  V.139,   197;  A  V.41;  Mhvs  4,  46. 

Ubbaheti  [hardly  to  be  decided  whether  fr.  ud  -|-  vSh  (to 
press,  urge),  or  bfh  or  badh;  cp.  uddharati  2]  to  oppress, 
vex,  hinder,  incommodate  J   v.41 7  sq. 

Ubblgga  [Sk.  udvigna,  pp.  of  ud  -)-  vlj]  agitated,  flurried, 
anxious  Vin  II. 184;  S  1.53;  Th  I,  408;  J  1.486;  III. 313; 
Miln  23,  236,  340  (an°);  Vism  54  (satat°);  Dh.\  11.27; 
ThA  267;  Sdhp  8,  77. 

UbUJjatl  [Pass,  of  ud  -f  vlj]  to  be  agitated,  frightened  or 
afraid  Vin  1.74  (u.  uttasati  palayati);  111.145  (''^•)i  S  1. 
228  (aor.  ubbijji);  Miln  149  (tasali  -)-),  286  (-)-  saqviji); 
Vism  58.  —  Caus.  ubbejeti  (q.  v.).  —  pp.  ubblgga  (q.  v.). 

Ubbljjan&  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  ubbijjatij  agitation,  uneasiness 
DA  I.I  1 1.  Cp.  ubbega. 

Ubblnaya  (^dj.)  [ud  -|-  vinaya]  being  outside  the  Vinaya, 
ex-  or  un-Vinaya,  wrong  Vinaya  Vin  11.307;  Dpvs  v. 19. 

Ubbllapa  (v.  1.  uppilSva,  which  is  prob.  the  correct  reading] 
joyous  stale  of  mind,  elation  Ud  37.  See  next. 

UbbllSvlta  (according  to  the  very  plausible  expl"  given  by 
Morris  J  P  T S.  1887,  137  sq.  for  uppilipita,  pp.  of  up- 
pilapeti  ^=  uplapeti  <  uplaveli,  as  expl"!-  under  uppilavati, 
ud  4-  plu;  with  11  for  1  after  cases  like  Sk.  aliyate  >  P. 
alliyati,  alapa  ]>  allapa  etc.,  and  bb  for  pp  as  in  vanibbaka 
=  Sk.    vanlpaka   ('vanipp")]  happy,  elated,  buoyant,  lit. 


Ubbilavita 


154 


Ummatta 


frisky;  only  in  cpds.  °atta  rejoicing,  exultancy,  elation  of 
mind  D  1. 3,  37;  J  ill  466;  Miln  183;  DA  1.53,  122;  and 
'^akara  id.  DhA  1.237.  At  Vism  158  "cetaso  ubbilavitaq" 
stands  for  ubbilavitattar),  with  v.  1.  BB  uppilavitar).  Cp. 
J  V.I  14  (ubbilavita-cittata). 

Ubbilla  [either  a  secondary  formation  fr.  ubbilavita,  or 
representing  uppilava  (uppilava)  for  upplava,  ud  -)-  plu, 
as  discussed  under  ubbilavita. '  The  BSk.  word  udvilya 
Lai.  V.  351,  357,  or  audvilya  Divy  82  is  an  artificial 
reconstruction  from  the  Pali,  after  the  equation  of  Sk. 
dvadasa  >  dial.  P.  barasa,  whereas  the  original  Sk.  dv. 
is  in  regular  P.  represented  by  dd,  as  in  *dvipa  >  dipa, 
*udvapa  >  uddapa.  Miiller's  construction  ubbilla  >  *udvela 
rests  on  the  same  grounds,  see  P.  Gr.  12.]  elation,  elated 
state  of  mind  M  in.159;  °bhava  id.  DA  1.122;  Sdhp 
167.  See  next. 

Ubblsati  [better  reading  v.  1.  ubbasati,  ud  +  vas]  "to  be 
out  home",  to  live  away  from  home  J  11.76.  —  See  also 
ubbasiyati.  —  pp.  ubbisita  ("kale)  ibid. 

Ubbu|havant  see  urulhavant. 

Ubbega  [Sk.  udvega,  fr.  ud  -|-  vlj]  excitement,  fright,  an- 
guish D  III.  148;  later,  also  transport,  rapture,  in  cpd. 
(°plti);  Vism  143;  DhsA  124;  PugA  226. 

Ubbegin  (adj.)  [fr.  ubbega]  full  of  anguish  or  fear  J  III. 
313  (=  ubbegavant  C). 

Ubbejaniya  (adj.)  [fr.  ubbejeti]  agitating,  causing  anxiety 
J  1-323,  504- 

Ubbejitar  &  Ubbejetar  [n.  ag.  fr.  ubbejeti]  a  terrifiep,  a 
terror  to  A  11.109  (°etar);  iv.189  (id.);  Pug  47,  48 
(=  ghattetva  vijjhitva  ubbegappattai)  karoti  ti  PugA  226). 

Ubbejeti  [Caus.  of  ud  4-  vij]  to  set  into  agitation,  terrify, 
frighten  Miln  388  ("jayitabba  grd.);  Pug.\  226. 

Ubbethana  (nt.)  [fr.  ud  +  ve?t]  a°  envelope,  wrap  J  VI.508. 

Ubbedha  [ud  -f-  vedha  of  vyadh]  height,  only  as  measure, 
contrasted  with  ayama  length,  &  vitthara  width  J  1.29 
(v.2l9;asiti-hatth°), 203  (yojana-sahass");  VvA  33(yojana°), 
66  (asiti-hatth°),  158  (haitha-sat°),  188  (solasa-yojan"),  221, 
339;  PvA   113.  See  also  pabbedha. 

Ubbedhati  [ud  -f  vedhati  =  Sk.  vyathate]  to  be  moved,  to 
shake  (intrs.),  quifer,  quake  J   vi.437  (=  kampati  C). 

Ubbhat)  (&  Ubbha")  (indecl.)  [a  doublet  of  uddhaq,  see 
uddhai]  III.]  up,  over,  above,  on  top  J  v.269  (ubbhar) 
yojanai]  uggata);  in  cpds.  like  ubbhakkhakai)  above  the  col- 
lar bone  Vin  iv.213;  ubbhajanumandalar)  above  the  knee 
Vin  IV.213;  ubbbamukha  upwards  S  ni.238;  Miln  122. 

Ubbhatthaka  (adj.)  [ubbha  +  tha  +  ka  of  stha,  prob. 
contracted  fr.  ubbhatthitaka]  standing  erect  or  upright  D 
1.167;  M  I-TS,  92,  167,  282,  308;  A  1.296;  11.206;  Pug 
55  (ubb°;  =ruddhar)  thitaka  PugA  233). 

Ubbhao<}lta  [pp.  of  ubbhandeti,  ud  -f  *bhatl<jl,  cp.  bhanda] 
bundled  up,  fixed  up,  wrapped  up,  full  Vin  1.287. 

Ubbhata  [pp.  of  uddharati  with  bbh  for  ddh  as  in  ubbhaq 
for  uddhai) ;  cp.  ubbahati  and  see  also  the  doublet  uddhata] 
drawn  out,  pulled  out,  brought  out,  thrown  out  or  up, 
withdrawn  Vin  1.256  (kathina,  cp.  uddhara  &  ubbhara); 
11L196  (id.);  D  1.77  (cp.  uddharati);  M  1.383  (ubbhatehi 
akkhthi);  Dh  34  (okamokata  u.  ^  *okamokatah  u.);  J 
1.268';  PvA  163. 

Ubbhava  [ud  +  bhava]  birth,  origination,  production  Pgdp 
91  (danassa  phaP).  Cp.  BSk.  udbhavana  Divy  184  (gun°) 
492  (id.). 

Ubbhara  =  uddhara  (suspension,  withdrawal,  removal)  Vin 
1.255,  300;  V.I36,   175;  cp.    F;«   Texts  1.19;  11.157. 


Ubbhijjatl  [ud  -j-  bhid]  to  burst  upwards,  to  spring  up 
out  of  the  ground,  to  well  up;  to  sprout  D  1.74  :=^  M  iii. 
93  =:  III. 26;  J  1. 18  (v. 104);  Dh  339  (ger.  ubbhijja  = 
uppajitva  DhA  iv.49);  DA  1.218.  —  pp.  ubbbiana, 

Ubbhida'  (nt.)  [Sk.  udbhida]  kitchen  salt  Vin  1.202,  cp. 
Vin  Texts  11.48. 

Ubbhida'  (adj.)  [fr.  ud  -j-  bhid]  breaking  or  bursting  forth, 
in  cpd.  °odaka  "whose  waters  well  up",  or  "spring  water" 
D  1.74;  M  1.276;  DA  1.218. 

Ubbhinna  [pp.  of  ubbhijjati]  springing  up,  welling  up  Dh 
1.218. 

UbbhujatI  [ud  -f-  bhuj]  to  bend  up,  to  lift  up  (forcibly), 
ger.  °itva  in  meaning  of  "forcibly"  Vin  11.222 ;  111.40. 

*Ubha  see  ubho;  cp.  ubhato  &  ubhaya. 

Ubhato  (adv.)  [abl.  of  *ubha,  to  which  ubhaya  &  ubho] 
both,  twofold,  in  both  (or  two)  ways,  on  both  sides ; 
usually  " — ,  as  °bbagavimutta  one  who  is  emancipated 
in  two  ways  D  11.71;  Dialogues  11.70,  k.  I ;  M  1.477 
(cp.  385  "vimattha) ;__ S  1.191;  A  1.73;  IV.IO,  77;  Png  14, 
73;  Nett  190;  "byanjanaka  (vyaSj°)  having  the  charact- 
eristics of  both  sexes,  hermaphrodite  Vin  1.89,  136,  168; 
111.28;  V.  222;  °sangha  twofold  Sangha,  viz.  bhikkhu"  & 
bhikkhuni  Vin  11.255;  '^.52,  242,  287;  Mhvs  32'*.  — 
See  further  Vin  11.287  (°vinaye);  D  1.7  ("lohitaka,  cp.  DA 
1.87);  M  1.57  (°mukha  tied  up  at  both  ends),  1 29  (°dandaka- 
kakaca  a  saw  with  teeth  on  both  sides),  393  (kotiko  panho ; 
S  IV.323  (id.). 

Ubhaya  (adj.)  [*ubha  -\-  ya,  see  ubho]  both,  twofold  Sn 
547,  628,  712,  1106,  1107,  801  ("ante);  Nd'  109  ("ante); 
J  1.52;  PvA  II,  24,  35,  51.  —  nt.  °i]  as  adv.  in  comb"- 
with  ca  c'Cibhayai)  following  after  2'"'.  part  of  compre- 
hension) "and  both"  for  both-and;  and  also,  alike,  as 
well  Dh  404  (gahatthehi  anagarehi  c'ubhayai)  with  house- 
holders and  houseless  alike);  Pv  1.69.  —  Note.  The  form 
ubhayo  at  Pv  il.S'"  is  to  be  regarded  as  fern.  pi.  of  ubho 
(=duve  PvA  86). 

-ai]sa  lit.  both  shoulders  or  both  parts,  i.  e.  completely, 
thoroughly,  all  round  (° — )  in  "bhavita  thoroughly  trained 
D  1.154  (cp.  DA  1.312  ubhaya-kotthasaya  bhavito). 

Ubhayattha  [adv.)  [Sk.  ubhayatra,  fr.  ubhaya]  in  bolh 
places,  in  both  cases  Vin  1. 107;  A  111.64;  Dh  15  —  17; 
DhA  1.29  (°ettha),  30;  I'vA   130. 

Ubho  (udj.)  [Sk.  ubhau,  an  old  remnant  of  a  dual  form  in 
Pali;  cp.  Gr.  otii^a  both,  Lat.  ambo,  Lith.  ahu,  Goth,  bai, 
Ohg.  beide  =  E.  bolh.  To  prep.-adv.  *amb,  *ambi;  see 
abhi  &  cp.  also  visati]  both;  nom.  ace.  ubho  S  1.87  =: 
A  111.48  =  It  16;  It  43  =  Sn  661  =  Dh  306;  Sn  220, 
543,  597;  Dh  74,  256,  269;  412;  Ndi  109;  Pv  1.7"; 
J  1.223;'  "-3;  P*'A  13,  82  (la  ubho).  —  ubbantar)  both 
ends,  both  sides  Sn  1042  (see  Nd^  169;  Sn  A  588  expls- 
by  ubho  ante).  —  gen.  ubhinnar)  S  1.162;  11.  222;  J  11.3; 
instr.  ubhohi  (hatthehi)  Vin  11.256;  J  iv.i42;loc.  ubhosu 
Sn  778  (antesu);  J  1.264  (passesu;  PvA  94  (hatthesu). — 
Note.  The  form  ubhayo  at  Pv  11.3'"  is  to  be  regarded 
as  a  nom.  fem.  (=  duve  PvA  86). 

Ummagga  [ud -f  magga,  lit.  "off-track"]  —  l.  an  under- 
ground watercourse,  a  conduit,  main  M  1.171;  A  11.189; 
J  VI. 426,  432;  SnA  50  ("ummaggo  pafina  pavuccati"); 
DhA  1.252  ("cora);  11.37  (v.  1.  umanga);  iv.104;  PvA  44 
(read  with  v.  1.  SS  kummagga).  —  2.  a  side  track,  a 
wrong  way,  devious  way  S  1. 1 93  (v.  1.  "manga)  :=  Th  I, 
1242;  S  IV.195;  A  IV.191. 

Ummanga  [ud  -f  manga  (?)  or  for  ummagga,  q.  v.  for  vv. 
I!.]  "out  luck",  i.e.  unlucky;  or  "one  who  has  gone  off 
the  right  path"  Vin  V.T44. 

Ummatta  (adj  )  [ud  +  matta  of  mad]  out  of  one's  mind, 
mad   S    V.447  (-f  viceta);  J  v.386;  Miln   122;  Sdhp  88; 


Ummatta 


ISS 


Urabbha 


PvA  40  ("puggala  read  with  v.  1.  SS  for  dummati  pug- 
gala).  Cp.  next  &  ummada. 

-rupa    like   mad,   madly,    insane  Pv    1.8';  11. 6'  (where 
J  III.  1 56  has  sanlaramana). 

Ummattaka  (adj.)  =  ummatta;  Vin  1.123,  321;  11.60,  80; 

111.27,  33;  A  IV.248;  Vism  260  (reason  for);  Miln  277; 
PvA  38,  39,  93  (°vesa  appearance  of  a  madman),  95.  — 
f.  ummattika  Vin  iv.259,  265;    Th.\   iii. 

Uniniaddeti  [ud  -f-  maddeti,  Caus.  ofmrd]  to  rub  something 
on  (ace.)  Vin  11.107=:  266  (mukhai)).  . 

Uramasatl  [ud  -|-  masati  of  nifS.]  to  touch,  take  hold  of, 
lift  up  Vin  III. 121.  Cp.  next. 

Ummasana  (f-)  [abstr.  fr.  ummasati]  lifting  up  Vin  Iil.i2t 
(=  uddhaq   uccarana). 

Ununl  t.f)  [cp.  Sk.  uma]  flass,  only  in  cpd.  '^puppba  the 
(aiure)  flower  of  flax  M  11.13  =  A  V.61  (v.  1.  damma", 
ummata°);  D  11.260;  Th  i,  1068;  DhsA  13.  Also  (m.) 
N.  of  a  ^em  Miln   118. 

Ummada  [ud  -\-  mSda]  madness,  distraction,  mental  aberra- 
tion S  1.126  Co  papuneyya  citta-vikkhepai)  va);  A  11.80; 
III.  119;  V.169;  Pug  69;  PvA  6  ("patta  frantic,  out  of 
mind),  94  (°vata),   162  (°palta). 

Ummadana  (f.)  (or  "aq  nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  ummada]  maddening 
So  399  (-\-  mohanai)  =  paraloke  ummadanai)  ihaloke  mo- 
hanai)  SnA  377);  ThA  2,  357  (cp.  ThA  243). 

Ummara  [according  to  MUUer  P.  Gr.  =  Sk.  udumbara(?)]  — 
I.  a  threshold  Vin  lv.i6o  (=  indakhila) ;  Th  2,  410;  J  I. 
62;  lll.ioi;  Vism  425;  DhA  1.350.  —  2.  a  curb-stone 
J  Vl.ll.  —  3.  as  uttar°  (the  upper  threshold)  the  lintel 
J  I. Ill;  DhA  U.5  (v.  1.  upari°).  —  4.  window-sash  or 
sill  J  1.347;  IV.356. 

Ummi  (&*4Immi)  (f.)  [f^r  the  usual  umi,  cp.  similar  double 
forms  of  bhammi  >  bltumi]  a  wave  Th  I,  681 ;  Miln  346. 

Ummisati  [ud  -|-  misati]  to  open  one's  eyes  J  111.96  (opp. 
nimisati;   v.  1.  ummisati  for  °mij°?). 

Ummlhati  [ud-fmlh]  to  urinate  Vin  I  78  (uhanati +). 

Umnuleti  [Caus.  of  ud  +  mil;  opp.  ni(m)mileti]  to  open 
one's  eyes  J  1.439 ;' 11.195  ;  tV-457;  vi.185;  Miln  179,357, 
394;  Vism  185,  186;  DhA  IL28  (opp.  ni°);  VvA  205,  314. 

Ummuka  (nt.)  [Sk.  ulmuka  perhaps  to  Lat.  adoleo,  cp.  also 
alata  firebrand;  see  Walde,  L.at.  Wtb.  s.  v.  adoleo]  a  fire 
brand  Vin  iv.265 ;  S  iv.92  (T.  ummukka  meaning  "loos- 
ened"?); J   H.69  V.  1.  °kk),  404  (kk);   111.356. 

Ummajjatl  [ud  -|-  majj]  to  emerge,  rise  up  (out  of  water) 
Vin  1.180;  S  IV. 312;  A  iv.ii  sq;  J  11.149,  284;  111.507; 
IV.139;  Pug  71;  Miln   118;  DA  1.37,  127;  PvA   113. 

Ummnjjana  (nt.)  [fr.  ummujjati]  emerging  Vism  175  (-f  nim- 
roujjana);  DA    1. 1 15, 

Ummujjamanaka  (adj.)  [ummujjamSna,  ppr.  med.  of  um- 
mujjati, -)-  ka]  emerging  A  11.182. 

Ummujja  (f)  [fr.  ummujjati]  emerging,  jumping  out  of 
(water),  only  in  phrase  ummujja-nimujjaij  karotl  to 
emerge  &  dive  D  1.78;  M  1.69;  A  1.170;  J  iv.139;  Nett 
no;  Vism  395  (=  Ps  11.208). 

Ummiuia  (adj.)  [ud  +  muU]  "roots-oul",  with  roots  showing, 
laying  bare  the  roots  J  1249  ("i)  karoti);  Sdhp  452. 

Ummulaka  (»dj.)  [:=  ummDla]  uprooting,  laying  bare  the 
roots  J   1.303  (vata). 

Ummuleti  [Cnus.  fr.  ummnia]  to  uproot,  to  root  out  J  1.329. 


Umhayatl  [Sk.  *ut-smayate,  ud  -\-  smi]  to  laugh  out  loud 
J  11.131  (=  hasitai)  karoti);  111.44;  1V.I97;  v.299  (°amana  =: 
hasamana  C).  Caus.  umhapeti  J  v.297. 

UyyasSU  (imper.  3'<i.  sg.)  is  v.  1.  BB.  and  C.  reading  at 
J    VI. 145,    146   for  dayassu,  fly;  probobly  for  (i)  yassu  of 

ya  to  go. 

Uyyati  [«d  -f  yg]  to  go  out,  to  go  away  J  II. 3,  4  (imper. 
uyyahi);  iv.ioi.  —  Caus.  uyyapeti  to  cause  to  go  away, 
to  bring  or  take  out  S  IV.312. 

Uyyana  (nt.)  [Sk.  udyana,  fr.  ud  -}-  yfi]  a  park,  pleasure 
grove,  a  (royal)  garden  J  1.120,  149;  II. 104;  IV.213; 
V.95;  v'-333;  PvA  6,  74,  76;  VvA  7;  Sdhp  7. 

-kila  amusement  in  the  park,  sports  DhA  1.220;  IV.3. 
-pala  overseer  of  parks,,  head  gardener,  park  keeper  J  II. 
105,  191;  IV. 264.  -bhumi  garden  ground,  pleasure  ground 
J  1.58;  Vv  64";   Pv  II.12»;  DA  1.235. 

Uyyanavant  (adj  )  [fr.  uyyana]  full  of  pleasure  gardens 
Pv  111.3*. 

Uyyama  [Sk.  udyama,  ud  -f-  yam;  P.  uyySma  with  a  for 
a,  as  niyama  >  niyama;  cp.  BSk.  udyama  Jtm  210]  exer- 
tion, effort,  endeavour  Dhs   13,  22,  289,  571;  DhsA  146. 

Uyyuiijatl  [ud  +  yuj]  to  go  away,  depart,  leave  one's 
house  Dh  91  (cp.  DhA  11.170).  —  pp.  uyyutta.  —  Caus. 
uyyojeti  (q.  v.). 

Uyyuta  (adj.)  [ud  -\-  ynta]  striving,  busy  (in  a  good  or  bad 
cause)  Sn  247,  248;  J  v.95. 

Uyyutta  [pp.  of  uyyuSjati]  striving,  active,  zeolaus,  energ- 
etic J  1.232. 

Ujryoga  [fr.  ud  -j-  yiij]  departure,  approach  of  death  Dh 
236  (cp.  DhA  111.335). 

Uyyojana  (nt.)  [fr.  uyyojeti]  inciting,  instigation  A  iv.233. 

Uyyojita  [pp.  of  uyyojeti]  instigated  Miln  228;  PvA   105. 

Uyyojeti  [Caus.  of  uyyunjati]  —  1.  to  instigate  Vin  iv.235 ; 
J  111.265.  —  2.  to  dismiss,  take  leave  of  (ace),  send  off, 
let  go  Vin  11 79;  A  111.75;  J  '-"9  (bhikkhu-sanghai)), 
293;  III. 188;  V.217;  VI.72;  Vism  91;  DhA  I.14,  15,  398; 
11.44;  VvA  179;  PvA  93.  —  pp.  uyyojita  (q.  v.). 

Uyyodhlka  (nt.)  [fr.  ud  -|-  yudh]  a  plan  of  combat,  sham 
fight  Vin  IV.107;  D  1.6;  A  v.65;  DA  1.85. 

Ura  (m.  nt.)  &  Uro  (nt.)  [Sk.  uras]  —  I.  the  breast, 
chest.  —  Cases  after  the  nt.  s.-declension  are  instr.  urusa 
Th  I,  27;  Sn  609;  &  loc.  urasi  Sn  255;  J  111.148;  iv. 
118,  also  urasii]  J  111.386  (=  urasmiq  C).  Other  cases 
of  nt.  a-stem,  e.g.  instr.  urena  J  111.90;  PvA  75;  loc. 
ure  D  1.135;  J  1.156,  433,  447;  PvA  62  (ure  jata;  cp. 
orasa).  —  Vin  11.105  (contrasted  with  pitt hi  back);  IV.  129  ; 
J  IV.3;  V.159,  202;  Nd'i  659;  Pv  iv.io';  DhA  111.175; 
DA  1.254;  DhsA  321;  PvA  62,  66.  —  urat)  deti  (with, 
loc.)  to  put  oneself  on  to  something  with  one's  chest, 
fig.  to  apply  oneself  to  J  1.367,  401,  408;  in. 139,  4S5; 
IV.219;  v. 118,  278.  —  2.  (appl'')  the  base  of  a  carriage 
pole  Vv  6328  (=lsamula  VvA  269). 

-ga  going  on  the  chest,  creeping,  i.e.  a  snake  S  1.69; 
Sn  r,  604;  J  I  7;  IV. 330;  VI.208;  Vv  808;  Pv  1. 12'  (=: 
urena  gacchati  ti  urago  sappass'  etai]  adhivacanai]  PvA 
63);  PvA  61,  67.  -cakka  an  iron  wheel  (put  on  the 
chest),  as  an  instrument  of  torture  in  Niraya  J  1.363,  414. 
-cchada  'breast  cover",  breast  plate  (for  ornament)  Vin 
ll.io;  J  IV.3;  V.21S,  409;  VI. 4.80;  ThA  253.  -ttaji  beating 
one's  breast  (as  a  sign  of  mourning  &  sorrow)  M  1.86, 
136;  A  11.188;  111.54,  416;  1V.293;  PvA  39.  -tthala 
the  breast  A  11. 1 74. 

Urabbha  [Sk,  urabhra,  with  uia  &  urana  to  be  compared 
with   Gr.  aftiv  wether,  cp.   Hoin.  ilfot  wool;    Lat.  vetvex; 


Urabbha 


156 


Ujumpa 


Ags.  waru  =  E.  ware  (orig.  sheepskins)  =  Ger.  ware. 
Here  also  belongs  P.  urani]  a  ram  D  1.127;  A  1.251  sq.; 
11.207;  IV.41  sq.;  J  V241;  Pug  56;  DA  1.294;  DliA  II.6. 
See  also  orabbbika. 

UrSoi  (f.)  [or  urani?,  f.  of  urana,  see  urabbha]  an  ewe  J 
V.241   (=  uranika  C);  v.  1.  urani  &  uranika. 

Uru  (adj.)  [cp.  Av.  ravah  space;  Gr.  lufui  wide;  Lat.  rus 
free  or  wide  space,  field;  Idg.  '^ru,  *uer  wide,  to  which 
also  Goih.  riims  space  =  Ags.  riim,  E.  room,  Ger.  raum] 
wide,  large;  excellent,  eminent  J  v. 89;  Miln  354;  Sdhp 
345,  592.  —  pi.  uru  sands,  soil  J  v. 303. 

Uninda(f.)  [ura  -f-  unda?]  freedom  of  the  chest,  free  breathing, 
relief  D  11.269  (v.  1.  uruddha  perhaps  preferable,  for  ura  + 
uddharana  lifting  or  raising  the  chest). 

Uru|hava  (adj.)  [doubtful,  prob.  for  uriiihavant,  with  afRx 
vant  to  a  pp.  formed  with  ud°.  The  word  is  taken  by 
Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  as  ud-alha  of  vah  (with  d  for  r).  The 
well  accredited  (and  older)  variant  ubbulhava  is  expld- 
(see  Kern,  s.  v.)  as  pp.  of  ud  -j-  bph'-',  cp.  upabrOhana. 
Perhaps  we  have  to  consider  this  as  the  legitimate  form 
urTUhava  as  its  corruption.  Morris,  jf  P  T S.  1887,  141 
takes  uriilhava  as  ud  4-  rulha,  pp.  of  ruh  (with  r.  for 
rr  =  dr),  thus  "overgrown"]  large,  bulky,  immense;  great, 
big,  strong.  Only  in  one  stock  phrase  "nago  isadanto 
uruihavo"  Vv  20',  438;  J  vi.488;  of  which  variant  n.  i. 
ubbulhava  M  1.414  =  450.  The  word  is  expH-  at  J  vi.488 
by  "ubbahana-samallha" ;  at  VvA  104  (pi.  urulhava)  by 
"thamajava-parakkamehi  byuhanto  (v.  1.  brahmanto)  ma- 
hantar)  yuddha-kiccaq  vahitur]  samattha  ti  attho".  The 
BSk.  udviddba  (Divy  7)  may  possibly  be  a  corruption 
of  ubbiilha. 

Ulatl  is  a  commentator's  invention ;  said  to  be  =:  gaccbati 
to  go  Vism  60  (in  definition  of  paqsu-kiila;  paijsu  viya 
kucchita-bhavaij  ulati  ti   paqsu-kular)). 

Uluka  [Sk.  uliika;  cp.  Lat.  ulucus  &  ulula  owl,  uliilare  to 
howl,  Ger.  uhu;  onomat,  *ul,  as  in  Gr.  ^AoAt/^oi,  Sk. 
ululi,  Lith.  uluti]  an  owl  Vin  1.186  ("camma,  sandals 
of  owl's  skin);  111.34;  A  v.289  sq.;  J  11.208,  352  (as  king 
of  the  birds);  Miln  403;  DhA  1.50  (kaka°  crows  &  owls). 
-pakkba  owls'  wings  (used  as  dress')  Vin  1.305 ;  D 
1. 167.  -pakkhika  dress  of  owls'  wings,  or  owl  feathers 
A  1. 241,  296;  n.206;  Pug  55  (^  uliika-pattani  ganthetva 
kala-nivasanar|   Pug   A  233). 

Ullanghati  [ud  4-  langh,  cp.  BSk.  proUanghya  transgres- 
sing (=:  pra  -|-  uUangh")  Divy  596]  to  leap  up  J  111.222 
(udakato  "itva).  —  Cans,  ullangbeti  to  make  jump  up 
(always  with  olangheli,  i.e.  to  make  dance  up  &  down) 
Viniir.i2i ;  J  V.434;  DhA  IV.197.  —  pp.  unanghita(q  v.). 

Ullanghana  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  ud  -\-  langh]  jumping  up,  lifting 
up,  raising  Vin  in.121;  J  1V.5  ^samattha  ?). 

Ullanghita  [pp.  of  uUangheti]  being  jumped  on,  set  on  C.  on 
.    S  1.40  (see  K.  S.  1.318)  (for  uddita  =r  tanhaya  ullanghita). 

Ullapatl  [ud  +  lapati]  to  call  out,  to  talk  to,  lay  claim  to 
Vin  1.97;  111.105;  Pug  67  (=  katheti  Pug  A  249). 

Ullapana  (nt.)  &  °a  (f.)  [fr.  ullapati]  calling  out,  enticing, 
laying  claim  to  Vin  lll.ioi ;  Th  2,  357;  Miln  127;  ThA 
243.  —  uUapana  =:  uddhai]  katva  lapana  Vism  27. 

Ullahaka  (adj  )  [?]  only  in  ace.  nt.  uUahakaq  used  adverbially, 
in  cpd.  dant°  after  the  manner  of  rubbing  the  teeth,  by 
means   of  grinding   the   teeth   M   111.167.  Seems  to  be  a 

Ullapa  is  V.  1.  for  uklapa  (q.  v.). 

Ullikhana  (nt.)  [fr.  ud  +  Hkh]  combing,  scratching  VaA 
349;  ThA  267. 


Ulllkhlta  [pp.  of  ud  4- Hkh]  scratched,  combed  Vin  1.254; 
J  11.92  (addhullikhitehi  kesehi);  Ud  22  (id.  with  upaddh° 
for  addh°);   VvA   197. 

Ulllngeti  [Denom.  of  ud  4-  linga]  to  exhibit,  show  as  a 
characteristic  Vism  492. 

Ullitta  [pp.  of  ud  4-  Hp]  smeared ;  only  in  comb"-  ullitta- 
valitta  smeared  up  &  down,  i.  e.  smeared  all  round  Vin 
11.117;  M  11.8;  A  i.ioi,  137;  IV.231;  Th  I,  737. 

Ullumpati  [ud  4-  lup,  cp.  BSk.  ullumpati  Mahavy  §  268] 
to  take  up,  to  help  (with  ace),  to  save  Vin  11.277 ;  D  1.249. 

UHumpana  (nt.)  [fr.  ullumpati]  saving,  helping;  in  phrase 
°sabhava-santhita  of  a  helping  disposition,  full  of  mercy 
DA  1177;  PvA  35.  Same  as  ullopana  (q.  v.). 

Ullulita  [pp.  of  ulloleti]  waved,  shaken  (by  the  wind); 
waving  J  VI. 536, 

Ultoka  [ud  4"  lok"]  doubtful  in  its  meaning;  occurs  at  Vin 
1.48  =  H.209  as  uUoka  pathamaq  ohareti,  trsl.  Vin  Texts 
by  "a  cloth  to  remove  cobwebs",  but  better  by  Andersen, 
J'ali  Header  as  "as  soon  as  it  is  seen";  at  Vin  11. 151 
the  translators  give  "a  cloth  placed  under  the  bedstead 
to  keep  the  stuffing  from  coming  out".  See  on  term 
Morris  J  P  T  S.  1885,  31.  —  In  cpd  uUoka-paduma  at 
J  VI.432  it  may  mean  "bright  lotus"  (lit.  to  be  looked  al). 
See  uUoketi. 

Ullokaka  (adj.)  [fr.  ulloketi]  looking  on  (to),  looking  out ; 
in  phrase  mukh"  looking  into  a  person's  face;  i.e.  cheer- 
ful, winning;  or  "of  bright  face",  with  a  winning  smile 
D  1.60;  DA  1.59,  168;  PvA  219  (°ika  for  °aka). 

UUokita  [pp.  of  ulloketi]  looked  at,  looked  on  J  1.253; 
DA  I  193. 

Ulloketi  [ud  4-  lok",  cp.  loka,  aloka  &  viloka]  to  look  on 
to,  look  for,  await  J  I.232  (akasaijl,  253;  11.221,  434; 
DA  1.153,  168;  VvA  316.  —  pp.  uUokita  (q.  v.). 

Ullopana  (nt.)  =  uUumpana  DhA  1.309  (T.  faulty;  see 
remarks  ad  locum). 

Ullola  [fr.  ud  4-  lul]  —  I.  a  wave  J  111.228 ;  VI. 394.  — 
2.  commotion,  unrest  J  iv.306,  476. 

Ullolana  (f)  [fr.  ulloleti]  wavering,  loitering  (in  expectation 
of  something),  greed  ThA  243. 

Ulloleti  [denom.  fr.  ullola]  to  stroll  or  hang  about,  to  wait 
for,  expect  ThA  243.  —  pp.  ullulita. 

U|ara  (adj.)  [Vedic  udara,  BSk.  audara]  great,  eminent, 
excellent,  superb,  lofty,  noble,  rich.  —  Dhammapala  at 
VvA  10 — II  distinguishes  3  meanings:  tihi  atlhehi  iilarar); 
panitaij  (excellent),  setthaq  (best),  mahantaij  (great)  Vin 
III. 41  ("bhoga);  D  1.96;  M  111.38  (°bhogata);  S  V.159; 
Sn  53,  58,  301;  Ndi  170;  J  1.399;  V.95;  Vv  1'; 
84I6;  Pv  ,.512  (=  hita  samiddha  PvA  30);  VvA  18 
(°pabhava  =  mahanubhava) ;  ThA  173,  280;  PvA  5,  6, 
7,  8,  25,  30,  43,  58  and  passim;  Sdhp  26,  260,  416.  — 
Der.  olarika  (q.  v.). 

Ujarata  (f.)  =  ularatta  Sdhp  254. 

U]aratta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  ulara]  greatness  etc. ;  only  neg.  an° 
smallness,  insignificance,  inferiority   VvA  24. 

U|U  [Sk.  udu,  dialectical?]  a  lunar  mansion   Miln   178. 

U|unka  [dial.?]  a  ladle,  a  spoon  Vin  1.286;  J  1.120,  157; 
111.461;  Miln  8;  DhA  1.425;  11.3,  20;  iv.75,  123. 

Ufumpa  [dial.?]  a  raft,  a  float  Vin  I.230;  III  63  (°i)  ban- 
dhati);  J  IV.2 ;  DhA  II. 120. 


Uvitta 


157 


Ussaya 


Uvltts  [=v'!tha,  pp.  ofvlS,  with  prefixed  u]  having  entered, 
come  in  D  U.274  (v.  1.  BK.  upa°). 

Usabha'  [Vedic  rsabha;  Av.  ar^an  male,  Gr.  i^pTtfv,  iippifv 
masculine,  to  Idg.  *eres  &  *res  to  wet,  sprinkle  (with 
semeu),  as  also  in  Sk.  rasa  juice,  rasa  wet,  liquid,  Lat. 
ros  dew.  A  parallel  root  *ueres  in  Sk.  varsa  rain,  Gr. 
IffOTf  dew;  Sk.  vrsan  &  vrsabha  bull]  a  bull;  often  fig. 
as  symbol  of  manliness  and  strength  (cp.  nisabha)  D  1.6 
(°yuddha  bull-fight),  9  ("lakkhana  signs  on  a  b.),  127; 
Vin  1H.39  (puris°  "bull  of  a  man",  a  very  strong  man); 
A  1.188;  11.207;  IV.41  sq.,  376;  V.347,  350;  Sn  26  sq., 
416,  646,  684;  Dh  422;  J  1.28  (v.203;  "kkhandha  broad- 
shouldered),  336;  V.99  (bharatusabha);  vi.136;  Pug  56; 
Vism  153  (°camma,  in  simile);  DhA  1.396;  SnA226,  333; 
KhA  144;  PvA  163;  VvA  85.  —  The  comp"-  forms  of 
usabha  are  asabba,  isabha  (in  nisabha)  &  esabha  (q.v.). 
The  relations  between  usabha,  vasabha  &  nisabha  are 
discussed  at  SnA  40. 

Usabha-  (nt.)  [=  usabha',  in  special  application  (?)]  a  cer- 
tain measure  of  length,  consisting  of  20  yatthis  (see  yatthi) 
or  140  cubits  J  1.64  (eight),  70  (id.);  11.91;  IV. 1 7  (one), 
142  (eight);  DhA  1.108  (°mattaij). 

Usa  ((■)  [doubtful]  (a  certain)  food  J  vi.80. 

Utini  (in.  &  nt.)  [Sk.  usira]  the  fragrant  root  of  Andropogon 
Muricatum  (cp.  blrana)  Vin  1.201 ;  11. 130  ("maya  vijani); 
S  11.88  ("nali);  A  n.199  (id.);  Dh  337;  J  v.39;  Th  i, 
402  (*attho). 

USU  (m.  &  f)  Sk.  isu]  an  arrow  Vin  111.106  (°loma);  D 
1.9;  M  1.86;  III. 133;  Si. 127;  A  n.117;  in. 162;  J  iv.416; 
VI.79,  248,  454;    Miln  331,  339;  SnA  466;  PvA   155. 

-kara  an  arrow-maker,  fletcher  M  II. 105;  Dh  80,  145; 
Th   I,  29;  J  11.275;  ^1.66;  DhA  1.288. 

Ustima  (f.)  [the  diaeretic  form  of  Sk,  u^man,  of  which  the 
direct  equivalent  is  P.  usma  (q.v.)]  heat  J  1.31  (=  unha 
m.55),  243;  11.433;  Vism  172  (usuma-vatti-sadisa);  DA 
I.l86;  DhA  1.225;  "-^o- 

Usuyyaka  (adj.)  [fr.  usuyya]  envious,  jealous  Vin  11.190; 
Sn  318,  325;  J  11.192  (v.l.  asuyy°);  v.  114.  —  /^o/e.  The 
long  vowel  form  usuyaka  occurs  in  cpd.  abbhusuyaka 
(q.  v.).  Spelling  ussuyika  occurs  at  Vv  33"  (see  VvA  147). 

Usuyyatl  &  Usuyatl  [Sk.  asSyali ;  fr.  usuya  envy]  to  be 
jealous  or  envious,  to  envy  (with  ace.)  Vin  1. 242;  J  III. 
27  (ppr.  an-usuyyaq);  Pv  11.3'"  (mai)  usQyasi  =  mayhaq 
issai)  karosi  PvA  87). 

Usuyyana  (f.)  &  Usuyyltatta  (nt.)  are  exegetical  abstr. 
formations  of  usuyya  (q.v.).  Dhs  1121;  Pug  19. 

UsUyy3  &  Usuya  (f )  [Sk.  asuyS]  envy,  jealousy,  detraction 
S  1.127  (u);  Sn  24s  (u);  J  11.193  (u);  iu.99  (u;  v.l. 
ussuyya);  Miln  402  (u);  Dhs  1121  (u);  VvA  71  (u); 
SnA  332  (u). 

UsmS  (f.)  [see  usuma]  heat  D  11.335,  338;  M  1295;  S  11. 
III. 143;  IV.215,  294;  V.212;  Dhs  964;  DA  1.310.  —  In 
comb"-  with  °kata  it  appears  as  usmr,  e.  g.  at  M  1  132,  258. 
-gata  heated,  belonging  to  heat  Dhs  964;  as  tt.  one 
who  mortifies  or  chastises  himself,  an  ascetic  j  v. 209  (== 
samapateja  C. ;  cp.  BSk.  usnagata  &  ujmagata  Divy  166, 
240,  271,  469,  &  see  Kern's  mistakes  at  Totv.  s.  v.). 

Ussa  (adj.)  [der.  fr.  ud  ^  •ud-s(y)a,  in  analogy  to  oma  fr. 
ava ;  but  taken  by  Kern,  Tom.  s.  v.  as  an  abbreviated 
ussada]  superior,  higher  (opp.  oma  inferior)  A  111.359; 
Sn  860  (=Nd'  251   with  spelling  ossa),  954. 

Ussakkatl'  [ud  -|-  Sfp,  see  sakkati]  to  creep  out  or  up  to, 
to   rise  A  III. 241   sq.;  Miln   260. 

UssakkatP  [by-form  of  ussukkati]  to  endeavour  Vism  437 ; 
VvA  95  (Cans.  II.  ussakkapesi),  214. 


Ussankita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  ud -(-  Sank]  =  ussankin  A  IU.I28-, 
DhA  111.485  (+pari°;  cp.  a"). 

Ussankin  (adj.)  [fir.  nd  4-  took]  distrustful,  fearful,  anxious 

Vin  11.192. 

Ussankha  (adj.)  [ud  -f-  sankha]  with  ankles  midway  (?)  in 
°pada  the  7<h  of  the  characteristics  of  a  Mahapurisa  D 
II. 17;  111143,  '54)  DA  explains:  the  ankles  are  not  over 
the  heels,  but  midway  in  the  length  of  the  foot. 

Ussajjatl  [ud  -f  SfJ,  cp.  BSk.  protsrjati  Divy  587]  to  dis- 
miss, set  free,  take  off,  hurl  A  IV.191. 

Ussata  [pp.  of  ud  -f-  sarati  of  sri  cp.  sata  for  'sQta]  run 
away   M  11.65. 

Ussada  [most  likely  to  ud  -f-  syad;  see  ussanna]:  this 
word  is  beset  with  difficulties,  the  phrase  satt-ussada  is 
applied  in  all  kinds  of  meanings,  evidently  the  result  of 
an  original  application  &  meaning  having  become  obliter- 
ated. satt°  is  taken  as  *sapta  (seven)  as  well  as  "sattva 
(being),  ussada  as  prominence,  protuberance,  fulness, 
arrogance.  The  meanings  may  be  tabulated  as  follows: 
(i)  prominence  (cp.  Sk.  utsedha),  used  in  characterisation 
of  the  Nirayas,  as  "projecting,  prominent  hells",  ussada- 
niraya  (but  see  also  below  4)  J  1.174;  '^.3,  422  (pallan- 
kaq,  v.l.  caturassaq,  with  four  corners);  v.266.  —  adj. 
prominent  ThA  13  (tej-ussadehi  ariyamaggadhammehi,  or 
as  below  4?).  — 2.  protuberance,  bump,  swelling  J  iv.  188; 
also  in  phrase  sattussada  having  7  protuberances,  a 
qualification  of  the  Mahapurisa  D  111.151  (viz.  on  both 
hands,  feet,  shoulders,  and  on  his  back).  —  3.  rubbing 
in,  anointing,  ointment;  adj.  anointed  with  ( — °),  in  can- 
dan"  J  111.139;  1V.60;  Th  I,  267;  Vv  53!;  DhA  1.28; 
VvA  237.  —  4.  a  crowd  adj.  full  of  ( — °)  in  phrase 
sattussada  crowded  with  (human  beings)  D  1.87  (cp.  DA 
1.245:  aneka-satta-samakin^a;  but  in  same  sense  BSk, 
Sapt-otsada  Divy  620,  621);  Pv  IV.18  (of  Niraya  =  full 
of  beings,  expH'  by  sattehi  ussanna  uparupari  nicita  PvA 
221.  —  5.  qualification,  characteristic,  mark,  attribute,  in 
catussada  "having  the  four  qualifications  (of  a  good 
village)"  J  IV. 309  (viz.  plenty  of  people,  com,  wood  and 
water  C).  The  phrase  is  evidently  shaped  after  D  1,87 
(under  4).  As  "preponderant  quality,  characteristic"  we 
find  ussada  used  at  Vism  103  (cf.  Asl.  267)  in  comb""- 
lobh",  dos°,  moh",  alobh°  etc.  (quoted  from  the  "Ussada- 
kittana"),  and  similarly  at  VvA  19  in Dhammapala's  defini- 
tion of  manussa  (lobh^adihi  alobh'adlhi  sabitassa  manassa 
ussannataya  manussa),  viz.  satta  manussa-jatika  tesu  lobh'- 
adayo  alobh'adayo  ca  ussada,  —  6.  (metaph.)  self-eleva- 
tion, arrogance,  conceit,  haughtiness  Vin  1.3 ;  Sn  515,624 
(an°  =  taijha-ussada-abhavena  SnA  467),  783  (expl^-  by 
Nd'  72  under  formula  sattussada;  i.e.  showing  7  bad 
qualities,  viz.  raga,  dosa,  moha  etc.),  855.  —  See  also 
ussadana,  ussadeti  etc, 

Ussadaka  (adj.)  [fr.  ussada  4]  over-full,  overflowing  A  111.231, 
234  (°jata,  of  a  kettle,  with  vv.  11.  ussuraka"  &  ussuka"). 

Ussanna  (adj.)  [pp.  of  ud  +  syad,  cp.  abhisanna]  —  I. 
overflowing,  heaped  up,  crowded;  extensive,  abundant, 
preponderant,  excessive,  full  of  (° — )  Vin  1.285  (clvaraq 
u.  overstocked;  11.270  (amisai)  too  abundant);  111.286; 
Th  2,  444  (=  upaciu  ThA  271);  J  1.48,  145  "kusala- 
mula);  DhA  1. 26  (id.);  (lobho  etc.)  Asl.  267;  Miln  223 
(id.);  J  1.336  (kala,  fulfilled);  111.418;  iv.140;  Pv  in. 5' 
("puiiiia,  cp.  PvA  197);  PvA  71  (°pabh5  thick  glow).  Cp. 
accussanna.  —  2.  anointed  VvA  237.  —  3.  spread  out, 
wide  DhA  11.67  (mahapathavl  u.),  72  (id.). 

Ussannata  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  ussanna]  accumulation,  fulness, 
plenty  Kvu  467  (where  A'vu  trsl"-  p.  275  gives  ussa- 
datta);  VvA   18,   19. 

Ussaya  in  °vadika  Vin  IV.224  is  a  variant  of  uiuyya° 
"using  envious  language,  quarrelsome".  —  Another  ussaya 
[fr.  ud  -\-  iri,  cp.  Sk,  ucchrita,  P.  ussita  &  ussapeti] 
meaning  "accumulation"  is  found  in  cpd.  samuMaya  only. 

II— S 


tJssayapeti 


158 


Ussenetl 


Ussayapetl  see  udassaye. 

Ussarati  [ud  -f-  sarati  of  8f]  to  run  out,  run  away  J  1.434 
(imper.  ussaratha);  v.437.  —  pp.  ussata  (q.v.).  —  Caus. 
ussareti  (q.  v.). 

Ussava  [Sk.  utsava]  least,  making  merry,  holiday  Vin  III. 
249;  J  1475;  "IS,  248;  VvA  7,  109  ("divasa). 

Ussahati  [ud-(-sah,  cp.  BSk.  utsaha  Jtm  215;  utsahetavya 
Divy  494;  utsahana  Divy  490;  ucchahate  for  utsahate 
Av.  b  11.21]  to  be  able,  to  be  fit  for,  to  dare,  venture 
Vin  1.47,  83;  11.208;  III.17;  D  1. 135  ;  S  IV.30S,  310;  Miln 
242;  VvA  100.  —  Caus.  ussahati  (see  pp.  ussahita). 

Ussada  [fr.  ussadeli]  throwing  up  on  DA  1.122. 

Ussadana  (nt.)  [to  ussadeti,  cp.  ussadita] —  1.  overflowing, 
piling  up,  abundance  M  in. 230  (opp.  apasadana).  —  2. 
(probably  confused  with  ussarana)  tumult,  uproar,  con- 
fusion A  III. 91,  92  (v.  1.  ussarana)  =:  Pug  66  (=  hatthi- 
assarathadlnaij  c^eva  balakayassa  ca  uccasadda-mahasaddo 
Tug  A  249). 

Ussadita  [fr.  ussadeti,  BSk.  ucchrayita  Divy  76,  77,  466]. 
[See  ussSpita  &  ussarita  under  ussapeti  &  ussareti.  There 
exists  in  Pali  as  well  as  in  BSk.  a  confusion  of  diflTerent 
roots  to  express  the  notion  of  raising,  rising,  lifting  & 
unfolding,  viz.  sf,  Syad,  M,  Sad,  chad.  (See  ussada, 
uccliadana,  ussadeti,  ussapeti,  ussareti)]. 

Ussadiyatl  [Pass.  med.  of  ussadeti,  cp.  ussada  4]  to  be 
in   abundiince,  to  be  over  Vin   11. 167. 

Ussadeti  [denom.  fr.  ussada  l]  —  i.  to  dismiss  D  III. 128 
[for  ussareti']  —  2.  to  raise,  cause  to  rise  up  on,  fiaul 
up,  pile  up  M  1. 135;  m.230;  A  IV.198,  201;  Miln  187, 
250.  —  I'ass.  ussadiyati  (q.  v.).  —  pp.  ussadita  (q.  v.). 

Ussapana  (nt.)  [fr.  ussapeti]  lifting  up,  raising,  erecting, 
unfolding  (of  a  flag  or  banner)  A  iv.41;  Nd^  503 
(dhamma-dhajassa). 

Ussaplta  [pp.  of  ussapeti,  cp.  ussadita]  lifted,  raised,  un- 
furled Miln  328  (dhamma-dhaja) ;  J  11,219. 

Ussapeti  [Caus.  of  ud  +  M,  cp.  BSk.  ucchrapayati  Av. 
S  1.384,  386,  387;  11.2]  to  lift  up,  erect,  raise,  exalt  Vin 
11.195;  A  IV.43;  J  11.219;  IV. 16;  V.95  (chattar));  PvA  75 
(id.);  Miln  21;  DhA  1.3;  iii  118  (katthani).  —  pp.  ussa- 
pita  &  usslta  (q.  v.).  See  also  usseti. 

Ussarana  (nt.)  [fr.  ussareti]  procession,  going  or  running 
about,  tumult  DhA  11.7  (so  read  for  ossarana).  Cp.  ussadana. 

Ussarita  [pp.  of  ussareti'^]  lifted  out  or  up  Vism  63  (samudda- 
viclhi  thale  ussarita;  v.l.  ussadita). 

Ussareti'  [Caus.  of  ussarati]  to  cause  to  move  back,  to 
cause  to  go  away  or  to  recede  Vin  1.32,  46  (here  a 
student,  when  folding  up  his  master's  robe,  has  to  make 
the  corners  move  back  a  hand's  breadth  each  time.  Then 
the  crease  or  fold  will  change  and  not  tend  to  wear 
through),  276;  11.237  (here  the  reading  ussSdeti  may  be 
preferred);  J  1.419;  iv.349;  v. 347.  —  Caus.  11.  ussara- 
peti  J  11.290. 

Ussareti'  [=  ussadeti]  to  cause  to  raise  aloft  (of  a  flag), 
to  lift  J  V.3I9  (=  ussapeti).  —  pp.  ussarita. 

Ussava'  [either  =  Sk.  avasyaya,  or  to  ud  +  sru]  hoar- 
frost, dew  D  II. 19;  J  IV.I20;  v.417;  "bindu  a  dew  drop 
A  IV.137;  Pv  IV. i5;  SnA  458;  in  comparisons:  Vism 
231,  633. 

Ussava^  [fr.  ud  -f  sru]  outflow,  taint,  stain  (cp.  asava) 
DhA   IV. 165  (tanha°;  v.l.  ussada,   to  ussada  6). 

Ussavana    (nt.)   [=  ussapana]  proclamation  (of  a  building 


as   legal    store  house);  in  °antika  within  the  proclaimed 
limit  Vin  1.239. 

Ussasa  see  niruss3sa. 

Ussaiia  [Sk.  utsaha  &  utsaha,  see  ussahati]  strength,  power, 
energy;  endeavour,  good-will  M  11. 174;  S  v.440;  A  I. 
147;  "93.  195;  "i-VSi  307;  IV.320;  V.93  sq.;  Miln  323, 
329  (dhiti-f)  Vism  330;  Sdhp  49,  223,  535,  619;  SnA 
50;  DhA  III. 394;  PvA  31,  106,  166;  VvA  32,  48.  —  In 
exegetical  literature  often  combd-  with  the  quSsi  synonym 
ussolhi  e.g.  at  Nd^  s.  v.;  Dhs  13,  22,  289,  571. 

Ussahana  (f)  [fr.  ussahati,  cp.  BSk.  utsahana  Divy  490] 
=  ussaha  Nett  8. 

Ussahita  [pp.  of  ussaheti,  Caus.  of  ussahati]  determined, 
incited,  encouraged,  urged  J  1.329;  VvA  109;  PvA  201. 
Cp.  sam°. 

Usslticati  [ud  -f  sic]  to  bale  out,  exhaust  J  1.450;  11.70; 
IV.16;    Miln  261. 

Ussificana  (nt.)  [fr.  ussiiicatl]  drying,  baling  out,  raising 
water,  exhausting  J   1.417. 

Ussita  [Sk.  ucchrita,  pp.  of  ud  -f-  Sri,  see  ussapeti]  erected, 
high  S  V.228;  Th  I,  424  (pannaddhaja);  J  v. 386;  Vv 
84";   VvA  339.  Cp.  sam".  • 

Ussisalca  (m.)  [ud  -(-  slsa  -)-  ka]  the  head  of  a  bed,  a  pillow 
for  the  head  J  1.266;  n.410,  443;  IV.  1 54;  v.99;  VI. 32, 
37,  56;  DhA  1.184  (°passe,  opp.  pada-passe). 

Ussuica  (adj.)  [Sk.  utsuka,  also  BSk.  e.g.  Jim  3i'>8]  —  l. 
endeavouring,  zealous,  eager,  active  S  1.15  (an°  inactive); 
A  IV.266;  Sn  298.  —  2.  greedy,  longing  for  Dh  199  (an°). 

Ussukita  (adj.)  =  ussukin;  only  neg.  an°  free  from  greed 
VvA  74. 

Ussul(in  (adj.)  [fr.  ussuka]  greedy,  longing ;  only  neg.  an° 
Pug  23. 

Ussukka  (nt.)  [*'Utsukya  fr.  ussuka;  cp.  BSk.  utsukya  Divy 
601  and  autsukya  Av.  S  1.85]  zeal,  energy,  endeavour, 
hard  work,  eagerness  Vin  1.50;  S  iv.288,  291,  302;  Nd^ 
s.  V.  Nett  29;  VvA  147;  PvA  5,  135;  Vism  90  (apajjati); 
644  ("ppahanaq).  —  Cp.  appossukka. 

Ussukkata  (f.)  =  ussukka  A  Y.195. 

Ussukkati  [denom.  fr.  ussukka]  to  endeavour  D  1.230.  — 
Caus.  II.  ussukkapeti  to  practice  eagerly,  to  indulge  in, 
to  perform  VvA  95,  98,  243.  See  also  ussakkati. 

USSUta  (adj.)  [pp.  of  ud  -f-  SrU,  cp.  avassuta]  defiled,  lust- 
ful (cp.  asava),  only  neg.  an"  free  from  defilement  Dh  400. 

Ussuya,  Ussuyaka,  uss. 

UsSUSSati  [ud  -f-  sussati  of  5u$]  to  dry  up  (intrs.)  S  1.1 26; 
IH.149  (mahasamuddo  u.);  Sn  985;  J   vi.195. 

Ussura  (adj  )  [ut  -j-  sura]  "sun-out",  the  sun  being  out ; 
i.  e.  after  sunrise  or  after  noon,  adverbially  in  °bbatta 
eating  after  mid-day,  unpunctual  meals  A  in. 260,  and 
°seyya  sleep  after  sunrise,  sleeping  late  D  III. 184;  DhA 
11.227.  Besides  as  loc.  adv.  assure  the  sun  having  been 
up  (for  a  long  time),  i.e.  at  evening  Vin  1293;  l^'77) 
J  11.286,  also  in  ati-ussure  too  long  after  sunrise  VvA 
65;  DhA  111.305. 

Usseti  [ud  -\-  §ri]  to  erect,  raise,  stand  up  J  iv  302 ;  aor. 
ussesi  J  V1.203.  —  Caus.  ussapeti ;  pp.  ussita  &  ussa- 
pita  (q.  v.). 

Usseneti  [denom.  fr.  ussena  :=  ussayana,  ud  -f-  iri  (?)]  to 
draw    on    to    oneself,    to  be  friendly  S  111.89  (v.l.  ussi°); 


Usseneti 


159 


Uha 


A  tl.214  sq.  (opp.  patisseneti);  Ps  11.167  (ussi°);   Kvu  i. 
93  (reading  ussineti  -|-  visineti).  See  also  patiseneli. 

Us8e|hetl(?)  Vin  ii.io  (for  ussolh"?);  cp.  ussolhikaya. 

Ussota  (adj.)  [ud  -(-  sola]  nt.  ussotai)  as  adv.  "up-stream" 
Mila  117. 

UsSOfhl  (f-)  [a  by-form   of  ussaha  fr.  ud  +  sah,  pp.  ♦sodha 
dialectical]    exertion    M    1.103;    S    11.132;    v.440;    A   11. 


93,    195;    i'i-307;   IV. 320;    V.93   sq.    Often   combd    with 
uasaha  (q.  v.). 

UsSOlhika  (f-)  [adj.  of  ussolhl]  belonging  to  exertion,  only 
in  instr.  as  adv.  ussolhikaya  "in  the  way  of  exertion", 
i.e.  ardently,  keenly,  eagerly  S  1.170  (naccati) 

Uhunkara  [onomat.  uhu  -f  kara,  see  under  uluka]  an  owl 
(lit.   "uhu"-maker)  J   vi.538  (=  ulUka  C). 


u. 


Uka  (f.)  [Sk.  yuka,  prob.  dialectical]  a  louse  J  1.453 ;  II. 
324;  111.393;  V.298;  Miln  11;  Vism  445;  DhsA  307, 
319;  DhA  111. 342;  VvA  86. 

Utagltag  at  J  1.290  in  phrase  "jimaij  atagitai)  gayanto" 
read  "imaq  jutagitaij  g." 

Una  (adj.)  [Vedic  una;  cp.  Av.  una,  Gr.  eZvi(,  Lat.  vanus, 
Goth,  wans,  Ags.  won  =  E.  want]  wanting,  deficient, 
less  M  11.73;  J  V.330;  DhA  1.77;  DhA  iv.2io.  Mostly 
adverbially  with  numerals  =:  one  less,  but  one,  minus 
(one  or  two);  usually  with  eka  (as  ekuna  one  less,  e.g. 
ekiSna-althasatai)  (799)  J  1-57;  ekUna-pancasate  KhA  91, 
ekuna-visati  (19)  Vism  287;  eken'unesu  paiicasu  attabhava- 
satesu  (499)  J  1. 167;  also  with  eka  in  instr.  as  eken'una- 
paiicasatani  (deficient  by  one)  Vin  11. 285  ;  KhA  91  ;  some- 
times without  eka,  e.g.  unapancasatani  (499)  Vin  111.284; 
unavisati  (19)  Vin  IV.130,  148.  With  "two"  less:  dvihi 
unar)  sahassar)  (998)  J  1.255.  —  anuna  not  deficient, 
complete  PvA  285  (=  paripunna). 

-udara  (unudara,  unudara,  unodara)  an  empty  stomach, 
adj.  of  empty  stomach;  °udara  J  11.293;  Vl.295;  "udara 
J  VI. 258;  Miln  406;  odara  Sn  707;  DhA  1.170.  -bhava 
depletion,  deficiency  SnA  463  (v.  1.  hanabhava). 

Unaka  (adj.)  [una  -f  ka]  deficient,  wanting,  lacking  Vin 
111.81,  254;  IV. 263;  Sn  721;  Miln  310,  311,  ("satta-vas- 
sika  one  who  is  not  yet  7  years  old),  414;  DhA  1.79. 

Unatta  (m.)  [abstr.  fr.  ana]  depletion,  deficiency  Vin  U. 
239;   J  V.450. 

Upaya  at  DhA  11.93  stands  for  upaya. 

Uplya  see  upiya  &  opiya. 

Utnlka  [f.  umi]  wave  Miln   197  (°vanka  waterfall,  cataract). 

Umi  &  Uml  (f.)  [Sk.  urmi,  fr.  Idg.  *uel  (see  nibbSna  1.2); 
cp.  Gr.  eAi/«  io  wind,  ?A/|  wound ;  Lat.  volvo  to  roll ; 
Ags.  wylm  wave;  Ohg.  wallan ;  also  Sk.  ulva,  varutra, 
valaya,  valli,  vrnoti.  See  details  fn  Walde,  Lat.  Wtb. 
under  volvo]  a  wave  M  1.460  (°bhaya);  S  iv.157;  v. 123 
Cjsta);  A  111.232  sq.  (id.);  Sn  920;  J  11.216;  111.262; 
IV.141;  Miln  260  (°jata).  —  J\^i>/c.  A  parallel  form  of 
Qmi  is  ummi. 

Urn  [Vedic  Oru ;  cp.  Lat.  varus  bow-legged,  of  Idg.  'ua,  to 
which  also  Ohg.  wado  =  Ger.  wade  calf  of  leg]  the 
thigh  Sn  6jo;  Vin  11.105  ('o  contrast  with  baha);  ill. 
106;  J  1.277;  "•27Si  443;  111-82;  V.89,  155;  Ndi  659 
(so  read  for  uru);   Vv   64";   DA  1.135  =  ^'°  11.190. 

-atthi(ka)  the  thigh  bone  M  1.58;  111.92;  J  1.428 
(uratlhika) ;  KhA  49,  50  (uratthi).  -(k)khambba  stiffening 
or  rigidity  of  the  thigh,  paralysis  of  the  leg  (as  symptom 
of  fright)  M  1.237 ;  J  v.23. 


Usa  [Sk.  Osa]  salt-ground;  saline  substance,  always  combd- 
with  khara  S  ill.  131   (°gandha);  A  1.209. 

Usara  (adj.)  [Sk.  nsara,  fr.  usa]  saline  S  iv.315;  A  iv.237; 
DhsA  243.  —  nt.  "^q  a  spot  with  saline  soil  PvA  139 
(gloss  for  ujjhangala). 

Uha  see  vy°,  sam°. 

Uhacca'  (indecl.)  [ger.  of  uhaiati,  ud  -|-  hf  (or  ava  4-  hf, 
cp.  ohacca  &  oharati)  for  uddharali  1  &  2]  —  i.  lifting 
up,  raising  or  rising  J  111.206.  —  2.  pulling  out,  taking 
away,  removing  D  11.254  (cp-  DhA  11.181);  S  1.27  (v.  1. 
for  ohacca);  Sn  1119  (=  uddhaiitva  uppatayitva  Nd'  171). 

Uhacca'  (indecl.)  [ger.  of  uhanati*  =  ahadati]  soiling  by  defe- 
cation, defecating  J  11.71  (=  vaccaq  katva  C). 

Uhannati  [Pass,  of  uhanati']  to  be  soiled;  to  be  disturbed 
aor.  uhaniii  Vin  1.48;  M  1.116;  aor.  also  uhani  M  1.243. 

Uhata'  [pp.  of  ud  -{-  hj"  or  dhf  thus  for  uddhata  as  well  as 
uddhata]  —  I.  lifted,  risen,  raised  Vin  111.70;  J  v. 403. — 
2.  taken  out,  pulled  out,  destroyed  Th  I,  223  =  Nd'^  97*; 
Th  I,  514;  Dh  338  (=ucchinna  Dh.\  IV. 48).  —  3.  soiled 
with  excrements  Vin  11.222. 

Uhata^  [pp-  of  uhanatiH  disturbed  M  I.n6. 

Uhadatl  [for  Qhanati^  (?)  or  formed  secondarily  fr.  ahacca 
or  ohacca?]  to  defecate  J  II. 355;  DhA  II.181  (so  read 
with  v.  1.  for  T.  nhadayati). 

Uhana  (nt.)  [fr.  uhanati?]  reasoning,  consideration,  examin- 
ation Miln  32  ("comprehension"  trsl. ;  as  characteristic  of 
manasikara);  Vism  142  =  DhsA  114  ("prescinding"  trsl.; 
as  characteristic  of  vitakka). 

Uhanati'  [ud  -)-  ban]  to  disturb,  shake  up;  defile,  soil  M 
1.243;  J  11.73.  —  Pass.  aor.  uhani:  see  uhannati.  —  pp. 
uhata'  (q.  v.).  Cp.  sam°. 

Uhanati'    [either    ud   -f   han    or   ava  -f  han,  cp.  ohanati] 

1.  to  cut  off,  discharge,  emit,  defecate  Vin  1.78;  111.227.  — 

2.  [prob.  for  uharati,  cp.  uhacca']  to  lift  up,  to  take  away 
M  1.1 1 7  (opp.  odahati).  Cp.  ohana  in  bimb-ohana.  — 
ger.  Dbacca'  (q.  v.). 

Uharati  [for  uddharati]  only  in  forms  of  ger.  uhacca'  and 
pp.  uhata'  (q.  v.). 

Uhasati  [either  ud  or  ava  +  has,  cp.  avahasati]  to  laugh 
at,  deride,  mock  A  111.91;  J  v.452  (-f-  pahasati);  Pug  67 
(=  avahasati  Pug  A  249). 

Uhasana  (nt.)  [fr.  uhasati]  laughing,  mocking  Miln  127. 

Uha  (f.)  [etym.?]  life,  only  in  cpd.  Syuha  lifetime  PvA  136, 
162  ("pariyosana).  —  As  N.  of  a  river  at  Miln  70.  — 
Cp.  BSk.  uh4  in  uhapoha  Av.  S  1.209,  235- 


Eka 


1 60 


Ekanta 


E. 


Hca  (adj.-num.)  [Vedic  eka,  i.  e.  e-ka  to  Idg.  *oi  as  in  Av. 
aeva,  Gr.  eZoc  one,  alone;  and  also  with  dift".  suffix  in 
Lat.  Q-nus,  cp.  Gr.  oiv6(  (one  on  the  dice),  Goth.  etc. 
ains  =  E.  one]  one.  Eka  follows  the  pron.  declension, 
i.  e.  nom.  pi.  is  eke  (e.  g.  Sn  43,  294,  780  etc.)  —  i. 
"one"  as  number,  either  with  or  without  contrast  to  two 
or  more;  often  also  "single"  opp.  to  nana  various,  many 
(q.  V.)  Very  frequent  by  itself  as  well  as  with  other 
numerals,  ekangula  one  thumb  Mhvs  29,  11;  DhA  iii. 
127;  ekapasse  in  one  quarter  DhA  11.52;  ekamaccha  a 
single  fish  J  1.222.  In  enumeration:  eka  dve  paiica  dasa 
DhA  1.24.  With  other  numerals:  eka-tir)sa  (31)  D  11.2; 
°satthi  (61)  Vin  1.20;  "navuti  (91)  DhA  1.97;  °sata  (loi) 
DhA  11.14.  Cp.  use  of  "one  less"  in  ekana  (see  under 
cpds.  &  una).  —  2.  (as  predicative  and  adj.)  one,  by 
oneself,  one  only,  alone,  solitary  A  111.67  (ek-uddesa); 
J  '•59  (ekadivasena  on  the  one  day  only,  i.  e.  on  the 
same  day);  Dh  395;  Sn  35,  1 136  (see  Nd2  172a),  ekaq 
ekai)  one  by  one  S  I  104  (devo  ekai)  ekaij  phusayati  rains 
drop  by  drop),  cp.  ekameka.  —  3.  a  certain  one,  some 
one,  some;  adj.  in  function  9f  an  indefinite  article  =  a, 
one  (definite  or  indefinite):  ekasmiij  samaye  once  upon  a 
time  J  1.306;  ekena  upayena  by  some  means  J  III. 393; 
ekaij  kulaq  gantug  to  a  certain  clan  (corresp.  with  asuka) 
DhA  1.45;  ekadivasaq  one  day  J  1.58;  111.26;  PvA  67. 
Cp.  Sn  1069  (see  Nd'^  172'').  —  AH  these  three  cate- 
gories are  found  represented  in  freq.  cpds.,  of  which  the 
foil,  are  but  a  small  selection. 

-akkbi  see  "pokkhara.  -agga  calm,  tranquil  (of  per- 
sons just  converted),  collected  [cp.  Buddh.  Sk.  ekagra 
Jtm  3i'<']  S  IV.125;  A  1.70,  266;  II. 14,  29;  111.175 
("citta),  391;  Sn  341;  J  1.88;  Nett  28,  cp.  Miln  139. 
-aggata  concentration;  capacity  to  individualise;  contem- 
plation, tranquillity  of  mind  (see  on  term  CpJ.  16,  1 78', 
237,  240)  S  V.21,  197,  269  (cittassa);  A  1.36;  iv.40; 
Dhs  II  (cittassa);  Vism  84.  -anga  a  part,  division,  some- 
thing belonging  to  J  in. 308;  Ud  69.  -angana  one  (clear) 
space  J  11.357.  -agarika  a  thief,  robber  D  1.52,  166; 
A  1.154,  295;  11.206;  111.129;  Nd'  416;  Nd2  304  '"■*■ 
DA  1. 1 59  (=  ekam  eva  gharar)  parivaretva  vilumpanaq 
DA  1. 1 59).  -Syana  leading  to  one  goal,  direct  way  or 
"leading  to  the  goal  as  the  one  &  only  way  (magga) 
M  1.63;  S  V.167,  185.  -3rakkha  having  one  protector 
or  guardian  D  111.269;  A  v. 29  sq.  -alopika  =  ekagarika 
D  1.166;  A  1.295;  n.2o6-  -asana  sitting  or  living  alone 
M  1.437;  Sn  718;  Dh  305;  J  V.397;  Miln  342;  Vism 
60  (expld-  with  reference  to  eating,  viz.  ekasane  bhojanai) 
ekasanaq,  perhaps  comparing  asana  with  asana'''.  The  foil. 
°asanika  is  ibid.  expH-  as  "taq  silam  assa  ti  ekasaniko"). 
-Ssanika  one  who  keeps  to  himself  Miln  20,  216;  Vism 
69.  -Sha  one  day  M  1.88;  usually  in  cpd.  ek&hadvihai) 
one  or  two  days  J  1.255;  DhA  1.391.  -ahika  of  or  for 
one  day  D  1,166.  -uttarika(-nikaya)  is  another  title  for 
Anguttarika-nikSya  Miln  392.  -una  one  less,  minus  one, 
usually  as  is'  part  of  a  numeral  cpd.,  like  °vtsa/i  (20 — I 
=  19)  DhA  1.4;  "pannasa  (49)  J  III.220;  "sattlii  (59) 
DhA  111.412;  °pahcasat3  (499)  DhA  11.204.  See  una. 
-eka  one  by  one,  each,  severally,  one  to  each  D  11. 18 
{°loma);  111.144  (id.),  157;  J  1.222;  DhA  l.ioi  (ekekassa 
no  ekekar)  masai]  one  month  for  each  of  us);  11. 114; 
VvA  256;  PvA  42,  43.  -ghana  compact,  solid,  hard 
Dh  81.  -cara  wandering  or  living  alooe,  solitary  S  I.l6; 
Sn  166,  451;  Dh  37.  -cariya  walking  alone,  solitude 
Dh  61 ;  Sn  820.  -carin  =  °cara  Miln  105.  -cittakkha- 
nika  of  the  duration  of  one  thought  Vism  138.  -clntin 
"thinking  one  thing  (only)",  simple  Miln  92.  -thupa  (all) 
in  one  heap,  mixed  up,  together  J  v.  17  (=r  sukarapotaka 
viya  C).  -donika(-nilvS)  a  trough-shaped  canoe  with 
an  outrigger  J  vi.305.  -pafalika  having  a  single  sole  (of 
sandals,  upShana)  Vism  125.  -pafta  single  cloth  (cp.  du- 
patta)  Vism  109.  -padika(-magga)  a  small  (lit.  for  one 
foot)   foot-path  J   1.315;   V.491.    -pala   one   carat  worth 


(see  pala)  Vism  339.  -passayika  is  to  be  read  eVapas- 
sayika  (see  under  apa°).  -paharena  all  at  once  Vism 
418;  DhsA  333.  -pitaka  knowing  one  Pitaka  Vism  62. 
-puttika  having  only  one  son  KhA  237.  -purisika  (itihi) 
(a  woman)  true  to  one  man  J  1.290.  -pokkhara  a  sort 
of  drum  J  vi.21,  580  (C.  expl°s.  by  ek-akkhi-bherij. 
-bijin  having  or  ly  one  (more)  seed,  i.  e.  destined  to  be 
reborn  only  once  S  v.205;  A  1.233;  iv.380;  Nett  189. 
-bhattika  having  one  meal  a  day  A  1.212;  ill. 216;  J  I.91. 
-bhattakini  a  woman  true  to  one  husband  J  111.63.  ■''3JJ3 
sole  sovereignty  Dh  178;  PvA  74.  -raja  universal  king 
J  1.47  (of  the  Sun),  -vaciya  a  single  remark  or  ob- 
jection J  11.353.  -vararj  once  J  1.292;  °varena  id.  DhA 
1. 10.  -sadisa  fully  alike  or  resembling,  identical  J  1.291. 
-sama  equal  J  vi  261.  -sata  &  sataka  having  a  single 
vestment,  a  "one-rober"  S  1.78  (°ka)  ;   Ud  65. 

Ekagsa'  (adj.)  [eka  -f  ai)sa']  belonging  to  one  shoulder, 
on  or  with  one  shoulder ;  only  in  phrase  ekarjsar)  uttara- 
sangai)  karoti  to  arrange  the  upper  robe  over  one  shoulder 
(the  left)  Vin  1.46;  11.188  &  passim. 

Ekatjsa^  [eka  -)-  arjsa'  or  better  agsa"]  "one  part  or  point", 
i.  e.  one-pointedness,  definiteness;  affirmation,  certainty, 
absoluteness  D  1153;  A  11.46;  Sn  427,  1027;  J  in. 224 
(ekaqsatthe  nipato  for  "nuna");  SnA  414  ("vacana  for 
"taggha").  —  Opp.  an°  Miln  225.  —  instr.  ekai)sena  as 
adv.  for  certain,  absolutely,  definitely,  inevitably  D  1.122, 
161,  162;  M  1.393;  S  IV. 326;  A  V.190;  J  1.150;  111. 
224;  PvA   II. 

EkaQSlka  (adj.)  [fr.  ekar|sa2]  certain  D  1.189,  191;  an° 
uncertain,  indefinite  D  1. 191. 

Ekagsikata  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  ekaijsika]  as  neg.  an"  indefini- 
teness  Miln  93. 

Ekaka  (adj.)  [eka -j- ka]  single,  alone,  solitary  Vin  11.212; 
J  1.255;  "•234;  1V.2.  —  f.  ekika  Vin  iv.229;  J  1.307;  iu.139. 

EkaCCa  (adj.)  [der.  fr.  eka  with  suffix  *tya,  implying  likeness 
or  comparison,  lit.  "one-like",  cp.  E.  one-like  r=  one-ly  = 
only]  one,  certain,  definite  D  1.162;  A  1.8;  often  in  pi. 
ekacce  some,  a  few  D  1.118;  A  v.194 ;  Th  2,  216;  J  11. 
129;  111.126.  See  also  app°  under  api. 

EkaCCika  (adj.)  [fr.  ekacca]  single,  not  doubled  (of  cloth, 
opp.  to  diguna)  J  v.21 6  (°vasana  =  eka-patta-nivattha). 

EkaCClya  (adj.)  =  ekacca  S  1.199;  J  lV-259;  ace.  as  adv. 
°r)  once,  single  Vin  1.289  (cp.  Vin  Texts  11.212). 

Ekajjhar)  (adv.)  [fr.  eka,  cp.  literary  Sk.  aikadhyaq,  but 
BSk.  ekadhyat)  M  Vastu  1.304]  in  the  same  place,  in  con- 
junction, together  Miln   144  (karoti),  KhA   167;  SnA  38. 

Ekato  (adv.)  [abl.  formation  fr.  eka,  cp.  Sk.  ekatah]  —  I. 
on  the  one  side  (opp.  on  the  other)  J  111.51;  iv.141.  — 
2.  together  J  11.415;  111.57  (vasanto),  52  (sannipatanti), 
391;  IV.390;  DhA  1.18.  ekato  karoti  to  put  together,  to 
collect  VvA  3.  ekato  hutva  "coming  to  one",  agreeing 
DhA  1.102,  cp.  ekato  ahesui]  J   1.201. 

Ekatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  eka]  —  I.  unity  D  1.31.  —  2.  lone- 
liness, solitude,  separation  Sn  718;  Th  1,  49;  Miln  162; 
J  VI. 64 ;  VvA  202  (=  ekibhava). 

Ekattata  (f.)  [fr.  ekatta]  unity,  combination,  unification, 
concentration  Nett  4,  72  sq  ,   107   sq. 

Ekadatthu  (adv.)  [eka-d-atthu,  cp.  afiiiadatthu]  once,  defi- 
nitely, specially  J   111.105  (=  ekaijsena  C). 

Ekada  (adv.)  [fr.  eka]  once,  at  the  same  time,  at  one  time, 
once  upon  a  time  S  1.162;  Sn  198;  DhA  11.41;  Miln  213. 

Ekanta  (adj.)  [Sk.  ekanta]  one-sided,  on  one  end,  with  one 
top,  topmost  (° — )  usually  in  function  of  an  adv.  as  ° — , 


Ekanta 


i6i 


Ettha 


meaning  "absolutely,  extremely,  extraordinary,  quite"  etc.  — 
I.  (lit.)  at  one  end,  only  in  °lomin  a  woollen  coverlet 
with  a  fringe  at  one  end  D  1.7  (=  ekato  dasai)  unnamay' 
attharanai)  keci  ekato  uggata-pupphan  ti  vadanli  DA  1.87); 
Vin  1.192;  11.163,  169;  A  i.iSi.  —  2.  (fig.)  extremely, 
very  much,  in  freq.  combns;  e.g.  "kalaka  A  III. 406;  iv. 
II  ;  °gata  S  v.225;  A  111.326;  "dukkha  M  1.74;  S  11.173; 
111.70  (-f  sukha);  A  v.289;  "dussilya  DhA  111.153;  °n't>- 
bida  A  111.83;  IV.143;  ''paripiinna  S  11.219;  v.204;  °ma- 
napa  S  lv.238;  "sukha  A  11.231;  111.409;  "sukhin  DA 
1.I19  etc. 

Ekantaiika  (adj-)  [eka  -}-  antarika]  with  one  in  between, 
alternate  J  IV.  195,  "bhavena  (instr.  adv.)  in  alternation, 
alternately  Vism  374;  ekantarikaya  (adv.)  with  intervals 
Vism  244. 

Ekamantai)  (adv.)  [eka  +  anta,  ace.  in  adv.  function,  cp. 
BSk.  ekamante  M  Vastu  1.35]  on  one  side,  apart,  aside 
Vin  147,  94  =  11.272;  D  1.106;  Sn  p.  13  (expH-  at  SnA 
140  as  follows:  bhavana-pur)saka-niddeso,  ek^okasaq  ek.i- 
passan  ti  vuttai)  hoti,  bhummatthe  va  upayogavacanar)); 
Sn  580,  1009,  1017;  J  1. 291;  n.lo2,  III ;  Sn.\  314,456. — 
Also  ia  loc.  ekamante  on  one  side  DhA  1.40. 

Ekameka  (adj.)  [eka-m-eka,  cp.  BSk.  ekameka  M  Vastu 
111.358]  one  by  one,  each  A  v.173;   Vv  78'. 

Ekavldha  (adj.)  [eka  -|-  vidha]  of  one  kind,  single,  simple 
Vism  514;  adv.  ekavidha  singly,  simply  Vism  528. 

EkaSO  (adv.)  [Sk.  ekasah]  singly,  one  by  one  J  111.224  (an°). 

Ekakiya  (adj.)  alone,  solitary  Th  i,  541 ;  Miln  398. 

Ekadasa  (num.)  [Sk.  eksdasa]  eleven  Vin  1.19.  — •  num. 
ord.  ekadasama  the  eleventh  Sn  ill,  113. 

Ekanika  (adj)  =:  ekakiya;  instr.  ekanikena  as  adv.  "by 
oneself   Miln  402. 

Ekiki  see  ekaka. 

Ekibhava  [eka  +  bhava,  with  I  for  a  in  comp°-  with  bhu] 
being  alone,  lonelioe-ss,  solitude  D  111245;  M  11.250;  A 
111.289;  'V-89,  164;  Vism  34;  SnA  92,  93;  DhA  U.103; 
VvA  202;  DA  1.253,  309- 

Ekodl  (adj.)  [most  likely  eka  +  odi  for  odhi,  see  avadhi* 
&  cp.  avadabati,  avadahana^  lit.  of  one  attention,  limited 
to  one  point.  Thus  also  suggested  by  Morris  jf  P  T S. 
1885,  32  sq.  The  word  was  Sanskritised  into  ekoti,  e.g. 
at  M  Vastu  111.212,  213;  Lai.  Vist.  147,  439]  concentrated, 
attentive,  fixed  A  111.354;  Nd'  478.  Usually  in  compn- 
with  kf  &  bhu  (which  points  however  to  a  form  ekoda" 
with  the  regular  change  of  a  to  i  in  connection  with  these 
roots!),  as  ekodi-karoti  to  concentrate  M  1.116;  S  iv. 
263;  °bhavati  to  become  settled  S  iv.196;  V.144;  °bhuta 
concentrated  Sn  975 ;  °bhava  concentration,  fixing  one's 
mind  on  one  point  D  1.37;  111.78,  131;  A  1.254;  111.24; 
Vism  156  (expll-  as  eko  udeti);  Dhs  161  (cp.  D/is  Irsl"- 
46);  DhsA   169;  Nett  89. 

Eja  (f.)  [to  iiij,  q.  V.  and  see  anejja.  There  is  also  a  Sk. 
root  ej  to  stir,  move]  motion,  turbulence,'  distraction, 
seduction,  craving  S  iv.64;  Sn  791;  It  91;  Nd'  91,  353; 
Dhs  1059  (cp.  Dhs  trsl"  277);  VvA  232.  —  aneja  (adj.) 
unmoved,  undisturbed,  calm,  passionless  S  1.27,  141,  159; 
111.83;  iv.64;  A  11.15;  I^'d'   353;  VvA   107. 

Et^ha  [pp.  of  a  +  1§]  see  pariy'';  do.  "etthi. 

Effhi  (f)  [fr.  ettha,  S  -|-  |§,  cp.  Sk.  esti]  desire,  wish,  in  comb"- 
with  gavetthi   pariyetthi  etc.  Vbh  353  =  Vism  23,  29  etc. 

Eo'  (f-)  [etym.  ?  dial.]  a  kind  of  antelope,  only  two  foil, 
cpds. :  °jangha  "limbed  like  the  antelope"  (one  of  the 
physical  characteristics  of  the  Superman)  D  11.17;  I'll43i 
156;  M  11.136;  S  1.16;  Sn  165;  °miga  the  eni  deer  J 
V.416;  SnA  207,  217. 


Eoeyya  D  111.157;  J  vi.537  sq.,  &  Eoeyyaka  A  1.48;  11. 

122;  J   V.155  Nd*  604  =  eni. 

Etad  (pron.  adj.)  [Vedic  etad,  of  pron.  base  'e;  see  Walde, 
Lat.  Wtb.  under  equidem]  demonstr.  pron.  "this",  with 
on  the  whole  the  same  meaning  and  function  as  tad, 
only  more  definite  and  emphatic.  Declined  like  tad. 
Casts:  nt.  sg.  etad  (poetical-archaic  form)  A  11.17;  Sn 
274,  430,  822,  1087;  J  1.61,  279;  &  etarj  (the  usual 
form)  Sn  51,  207,  1036,  1115;  J  11.159;  P'-  etani  Sn  52; 
J  U.159.  —  m.  sg.  esa  Sn  81,  416,  1052;  J  1.279;  "• 
159;  Miln  18;  DhA  1. 18;  &  eso  Sn  61,  312,  393;  J  vi. 
336;  pi.  ete  Sn  188,  760;  J  1. 223.  —  f.  sg.  esa  Sn  80, 
451;  J  1.307;  pi.  eta  Sn  297,  897;  J  11.129.  —  Oblique 
cases:  gen.  dat.  etassa  J  11.159;  f.  etissa  J  111.280;  instr. 
etena  Sn  655  ;|J  1.222;  pi.  loc.  etesu  Sn  248,  339,  1055; 
f.  etasti  Sn  607.  Other  cases  regular  &  frequent. 

Etarahi  (adv.)  [Sk.  etarhi,  cp.  tarahi  &  carahi]  now,  at 
present  D  1.29,  151,  179,  200;  11.3;  J  1.215  (opp.  tada); 
111.82 ;   VI. 364  (instead  of  paccuppanna). 

Etadisa  (adj.)  [etad  -\-  disa,  of  dfS,  cp.  Sk.  elSdrsa]  such, 
such  like,  of  this  Icind  D  11.157;  Sn  588,  681,  836;  Pv  i. 
9*;  iv.iM  (=:edisa  yatha-vutta-rupa  PvA  243);  PvA  u.71. 

Eti  [P.  eli  represents  Sk.  eti  as  well  as  a-eti,  i.  e.  to  go 
and  to  come  (here);  with  Sk.  eti  cp.  Av.  aeili,  Gr.  f7«-<, 
Lat.  eo,  it;  Goth,  iddja  went,  Obulg.  iti,  Oir.  etha]  to 
go,  go  to,  reach;  often  (■=&  +  eti)  to  come  back,  return 
Sn  364,  376,  666  (come);  J  vi.365  (return);  ppr.  ento 
J  111.433  (ace.  suriyai)  althai)  entai)  the  setting  sun);  imper. 
2'x'  sg.  ehl  only  in  meaning  "come"  (see  separately), 
3rd  etu  D  1.60;  2nd  pi.  etha  D  1.211;  Sn  997;  J  11.129; 
DhA  1.95  (in  admission  formula  "etha  bhikkhavo",  come 
ye  [and  be]  bhikkhus !  See  ehi  bhikkhu).  —  fut.  essati  J 
V1.190,  365,  &  ehiti  J  i:.i53;  2"<l  sg.  ehisi  Dh  236, 
369.  —  pp.  ita  (q.  v.). 

Etta  (adv.)  [=  Sk.  atra,  see  also  ettha]  there,  here  Pv  1.5'' 
(sic;  cp.  KhA  254  note). 

Ettaka  (adj.)  [etta  +  ka,  contrasting-comparative  function, 
cp.  tattaka]  so  much,  this  much,  according  to  context 
referring  either  to  deficiency  or  abundance,  thus  developing 
2  meanings,  viz.  (l)  just  as  much  (&  no  more),  only  so 
little,  all  this,  just  this,  such  a  small  number,  a  little; 
pi.  so  few,  just  so  many  D  1.117  (opp.  aparimana),  124; 
A  IV.  1 14;  Nd2  304 '"■  (ettakena  na  tussati  is  not  satisfied 
with  this  much);  Vv  7912  (cp.  VvA  307);  Miln  10,  18 
(alar)  ettakena  enough  of  this  much);  DhA  1.90  (enough, 
this  much),  93,  399  (pi.  ettaka);  11.54  (only  one),  I74sq.; 
VvA  233  (a  little),  323.  —  eltakai)  kalai)  a  short  time 
(but  see  also  under  2)  J  1.34;  Dh.A  11.20.  —  (2)  ever 
so  much  (and  not  less),  so  much,  pi.  so  many,  ever  so 
many,  so  &  so  many,  such  a  lot  A  111.337;  J  1.207  (pl- 
ettaka),  375  (nt.  ettakaq);  111.80  (id.),  94  ("q  dhanai) 
such  great  wealth);  Miln  37  (pl.);  DhA  1.392,  396  (pl. 
f.  ettika),  397,  398;  11.14,"  89  (pl),  241  (pl.  so  many); 
VvA  65  (dhanaq).  —  eltakai)  kalaq  for  some  time,  such 
a  long  lime  (see  also  above,  under  i)  DhA  11.62,  81; 
111.318;  VvA  330. 

EttatO  (adv.)  [with  double  suffix  for  •atra-lah]  from  here, 
therefore  S  I.185. 

Ettavata  (adv.)  [fr.  etta  =  ettaka,  cp.  kitlSvata:  kittaka] 
so  far,  to  that  extent,  even  by  this  much  D  1.205,  207; 
S  11.17;  Sn  478;  Vv  556  (cp.  VvA  248);  Pv  iv.i"; 
Miln   14;  DA  1.80;  SnA   4;  PvA  243. 

EttO  (adv.)  [in  analogy  to  ito  fr.  »et°,  as  ilo  fr.  *it°]  orig. 
abl.  of  elad;  from  this,  from  it,  thence,  hence,  out  of 
here  Sn  448,  875;  J  1.223  (opP-  '<<>),  v.498;  Pv  l.ii; 
11.10*;  DhA  11.80  (ito  vi  elto  va  here  &  there);  PvA  103. 

Ettha  (adv.)  [=  Sk.  ntra,  cp.  etta]  here,  in  this  place! 
also    temporal    "now",   &    modal    "in    this   case,    in    this 


Ettha 


162 


Ehi 


matter"   D   11.12;   S   v.375;   Dh    174;  Sn  61,  171,  424, 
441,  502,   1037,  &  freq.  passim. 

Edlsa  (adj.)  [Sk.  idrsa]  such  like,  such  Vv  37';  PvA  69,  243. 

Edisaka  =  edisa  Sn  313. 

Edha  [Sk.  edhah,  cp.  idhma,  inddhe;  Gr.  afeo;,  eiliii),  Lat. 
aeJes,  Ohg.  eit,  Ags.  ad  funeral  pile,  etc.  See  idhuma  & 
itthaka]  fuel,  fire  etc.  Only  in  adj.  neg.  an"  without 
fuel  J  IV.26. 

Edhati  [edh,  cp.  iddhati]  to  prosper,  succeed  in,  increase 
S  1. 217  (sukhar));  Sn  298;  Dh  193;  J  1.223;  "l-iSl-  — 
sukh^edhita  at  Vin  111.13  '^  better  read  as  sukhe  thita, 
as  at  J  VI. 219. 

Ena  (pron.)  [fr.  pron.  ba.se  -e,  cp.  e-ka;  to  this  cp.  in 
form  &  meaning  Lat.  uniis,  Gr.  oivo';,  Ohg.  ein,  Oir.  oin] 
only  used  in  ace.  enar|  (taij  enaij)  "him,  this  one,  the 
same"  Sn  583,  981,  1114;  Dh  118,  313;  J  111.395;  Nd^ 
304  "'-B.   See  also  nar). 

Eraka'  (adj.)  [fr.  ereti]  driving  away,  moving  J  iv.20 
(°vata);  "vattika  a  certain  kind  of  torture  M  1.87  ^=  A 
1.47  =z  11.122  =  Nd'i  604  =  Miln   197. 

Eraka^  (nt.)  [fr.  ereti]  Typha-grass  J  IV.8S.  As  eragu(?)  a 
kind  of  grass  used  for  making  coverlets  Vin  1. 196  (eraka 
Bdhgh.  on  D  1.166). 

Era^ija  [dial.?]  the  castor  oil  plant  Nd^  68o"-;  J  11.440. 
Cp.  elanda. 

Eravana  N.  of  Indra's  elephant  Sn  379;  Vv  44";  VvA  15. 

Erita  [pp.  of  ereti]  moved,  shaken,  driven  J  iv.424 ;  Vv 
39*,  42'';  Th  l,  104,  Pv  ii.i2>;  Vism  172  (-[- samerita), 
342  (val°  moved  by  the  wind).  Cp.  Irita. 

Ereti  [=  ireli  (q.  v.)  Caus.  of  if,  Sk.  Irayati]  to  move,  set 
into  motion,  raise  (one's  voice)  M  I.21;  Sn  350  (eraya 
imper.);  Th  I,  209  (eraye);  J  iv.478.  —  pp.  erita  (q.v.). 

Eta  (nt.)  [r]  sa!t(?)  or  water(?)  in  elambiya  (=  el^anibu-ja) 
born  in  (salt)  water  Sn  845  (=:  ela-sanriaka  ambumhi 
jSta);  Nd'   202  (elaij  vuccati  udakag). 

Elan(Ja  =  eranda(?)  M  1.124. 

Elambaraka  [?]  N.  of  a  creeping   vine  J   VI. 536. 

Elaluka  (Ejatuka)  (m.)  [etym  ?]  a  kind  of  cucumber  (?) 
Vv   33":  J   1.20s;  V.37;  DhA  1.278. 

Ela  (nt.)  [Sk.  enas]  in  elamuga  deaf  &  dumb  A  11.252; 
111.436;  IV. 226;  Miln  20,  251  (cp.  Miln  trsl.  11. 71).  A 
rather  strange  use  and  expl"-  of  elainuga  (with  ref.  to  a 
snake  "spitting"')  we  find  at  J  111.347,  where  it  is  expl<l- 
as  "ela-paggharantena  mukhena  elamugai)"  i.  e.  called 
elamuga  because  of  the  saliva  (foam?)  dripping  from  its 
mouth,  V.  1.  elamukha.  —  Cp.  nela  &  anela. 

Elaka'  [?]  a  threshold  (see  Morris,  JP  T  S.  1887,  146) 
Vin  11. 149  ("padaka-pitha,  why  not  "having  feet  resembling 
those  of  a  ram"?  Cp.  Vin  Texts  in. 165  "a  chair  raised 
on  a  pedestal");  D  1.166;  A  1.295;  ll-2o6.  The  word  & 
its  meaning  seems  uncertain. 

E|aka'^  [Sk.  edaka]  a  ram,  a  wild  goat  Sn  309;  Vism  500 
(in  simile);  J  1.166;  Tug  A  233  (=  urabbha).  —  f.  elaka 
S  11.228,  elika  Th  2,  438,  eliki  J  111.481. 

E]agala  see  anel» 

Ejagala  (f.)  [dial.?]  the  plant  Cassia  Tora  (cp.  Sk.  edagaja 
the  ringworm-shrub,  Cassia  Alata,  after  Halayudha),  J  ill. 
222  (=  kamboji   C). 

'igga    in   kamamis"   at    PvA    107    is    to    be   read   kamg- 
e  lagga". 


Eva  (adv.)  [Vedic  eva]  emphatic  part  "so,  even,  just";  very 
freq.  in  all  contexts  &  combns-  —  i.  eva  J  I.61  (ajj'eva 
this  veryday),  278  (tath^eva  likewise);  11.113  (ahaq  e. 
just  I),  154  (ekam  e.  just  one),  160  (attano  e.  his  very 
own).  —  2.  eva  often  appears  with  prothetic  (sandhi-)y 
as  yeva,  most  frequently  after  i  and  e,  but  also  after  the 
other  vowels  and  q,  cp.  J  1.293,  3°7)  HI  10,  128,  129, 
'59;  'V.3;  VI. 363.  —  3.  After  ij  eva  also  takes  the  form 
of  neva,  mostly  with  assimilation  of  i)  to  ii,  viz.  tan  neva 
J  1.223;  tasmiii  iieva  J  1. 139;  ahan  neva  Miln  40.  —  4. 
After  long  vowels  eva  is  often  shortened  to  va  (q.v.)., 
-rupa  (l)  such,  like  that  Sn  279,  280;  It  108;  J  II. 
352,  etc.  —  (2)  of  such  form,  beauty  or  virtue  J  I.294; 
111.128,  etc. 

Evar)  (adv.)  [Vedic  evaq]  so,  thus,  in  this  way,  either  re- 
ferring to  what  precedes  or  what  follows,  e.g.  (l)  thus 
(as  mentioned  expld-  at  Vism  528  as  "niddittha-naya- 
nidassana")  D  1.193  (evaq  sante  this  being  being  so), 
195  (id.);  Vin  11.194  (evai)  bhante,  yes);  J  1.222;  Pv 
11.13''^  evai)  etaq,  just  so).  —  (2)  thus  (as  follows)  M  I. 
483  (evai)  me  sutar)  "thus  have  I  heard").  —  Often 
combd  with  similar  emphatic  part.,  as  evam  eva  kho  "in 
just  the  same  way"  (in  final  conclusions)  D  1.104,  199, 
228,  237,  239;  in  older  form  evar)  bya  kho  (=  evam 
iva  kho)  Vin  11.26;  IV.I34=:D.\  1.27;  evam  evarj  "just 
so"  D  1.51;  Sn  1115;  evaq  kho  D  I.113;  evam  pi  Sn 
X134;  evar)   su  D  1.104;  etc.  etc. 

-ditthin  holding  such  a  view  M  1.484.   -nama  having 
that  name  M  1.429. 

Esa'  see  etad. 

Esa^  (adj.)  =  esin  Sn  286. 

Esati  [a  +  i§'  with  confusion  of  is'  and  ij^^  icchati,  see 
also  ajjhesati,  anvcsati,  pariyesati]  to  seek,  search,  strive 
for  Sn  592  (esano  ppr.  medL),  919;  Dh   131. 

Esana  (f.)  [fr.  esati]  desire,  longing,  wih  D  111.216,  270; 
M  1.79;  S  V.54,  139;  A  1.93;  11.41;  V.31;  VvA  83;  PvA 
98,  163,  265.  See  also  anesana,  isi  &  pariy°. 

EsanI  (f.)  [fr.  i§]  a  surgeon's  probe  M  11.256. 

Esabha  ( — °)  a  by-form  of  usabha  (p.  v.),  in  cpd.  rathesabha. 

Esika  (nt.)  &  Esika'  (f.)  [a  by-form  of  isika]  a  pillar,  post 
A  IV.106,  109.  Freq.  in  cpd.  °tthayin  as  stable  as  a 
pillar  D  1.14;  S  111.202,  211,  217;  DA  1.105. 

Esika-  desire,  see  abbulha. 

Esin  (adj.)  [Sk.  esin,  of  is]  seeking,  wishing,  desiring  S 
11.11  (sambhav");  J  1.87  (phal°);  IV.26  (dukkham°);  Pv 
11.9"  (gharam);  PvA   132. 

Ehi  [imper.  of  eti]  come,  come  here  Sn  165;  J  II  159;  VI. 
367;  DhA  1.49.  In  the  later  language  part,  of  exhort- 
ation ^  Gr.  'iyi,  Lat.  age,  "come  on"  DhA  II.91  ;  PvA 
201  (-|-  tava  =  jrys  Jijj.  ebipassika  (adj.)  [ehi  -|-  passa  + 
ika]  of  the  Dhamma,  that  which  inviles  every  man  to 
come  to  see  for  himself,  open  to  all,  expl^-  at  Vism  216 
as  "ehi,  passa  imar)  dhamman  ti  evar)  pavattar)  ehi-passa- 
vidhaq  arahall  ti",  D  11.217;  III. 5,  227;  S  1.9;  iv.41,  272; 
V.343 ;  A  1. 1 58;  11.198.  ehibhadantika  one  who  accepts 
an  invitation  D  1. 166;  M  1.342;  11.161;  A  1.295;  II-206. 
ehi  bhikkhu  "come  bhikkhu!"  the  oldest  formula  of  ad- 
mission to  the  order  Vin  1.12;  111.24;  DhA  1.87;}  1.82; 
f.  ehi  bhikkhum  Vin  iv.214  pi.  etha  bhikkhavo  DhA 
1.95.  ehibhikkhu-pabbajja  initiation  into  Bhikkhuship  SnA 
456.  ehibhikkhubhava  state  of  being  invited  to  join  the 
Sangha,  admission  to  the  Order  J  1.82,  86;  DhA  11.32; 
SnA  456.  ehisagata-(&  svagata-)vadin  a  man  of  courtesy 
(lit.    one  who  habitually  says:   "come  you  are  welcome") 


163 


Okirana 


O. 


0  Initial  o  in  Pali  may  represent  a  Vedic  o  or  a  Vedic  au 
(see  ojas,  cgha,  etc.).  Or  it  may  be  guna  of  u  (see  ola- 
rika,  opakammika,  etc.).  But  it  is  usually  a  prefix  repres- 
enting Vedic  ava.  The  form  in  o  is  the  regular  use  in 
old  Pali;  there  are  only  two  or  three  cases  where  ava, 
for  metrical  or  other  reasons,  introduced.  In  post-canonical 
Pali  the  form  in  ava  is  the  regular  one.  For  new  form- 
ations we  believe  there  is  no  exception  to  this  rule.  But 
the  old  form  in  o  has  in  a  few  cases,  survived.  Though 
o;  standing  alone,  is  derived  from  ava,  yet  compounds 
with  o  are  almost  invariably  older  than  the  corresponding 
compounds  with  ava  (see  note  on  ogamana). 

Oka  (nt.)  [Vedic  okas  (nt.),  fr.  UC  to  like,  thus  orig. 
"comfort",  hence  place  of  comfort,  sheltered  place,  habit- 
ation. The  indigenous  interpretation  connects  oka  partly 
with  okasa  i=  fig.  room  (for  rising),  chance,  occasion  (thus 
Nd'  487  on  Sn  966:  see  anoka;  SnA  573  ibid.;  SnA 
547:  see  anoka;  Sn.\  573  ibid.;  .SnA  547:  See  below), 
partly  with  udaka  (as  contraction):  see  below  on  Dh  34. 
Ueiger  (/'.  Gr.  S  20)  considers  oka  to  be  a  direct  con- 
traction of  udaka  (via  *udaka,  'utka,  ®ukka,  *okka).  The 
customary  synomym  for  oka  (both  lit.  &  fig.)  is  alaya] 
resting  place,  shelter,  resort ;  house,  dwelling ;  fig.  (this 
meaning  according  to  later  commentators  prevailing  in 
anoka,  liking,  fondness,  attachment  to  (worldly  things)  S 
111.9  =  Sn  844  (okam  pahaya;  oka  here  is  expl^  at  SnA 
547  by  rupa-vatth'  adi-vinnanass'  okaso) ;  .S  v. 24  ^^  A  v. 
232  =  Dh  87  (oka  anokam  agamma);  Dh  34  (oka-m-okata 
ubbhato,  i.  e.  oka-m-okato  from  this  &  that  abode,  from 
all  places,  thus  taken  as  okato,  whereas  Bdhgh.  takes  it 
as  okasya  okato  and  interprets  the  first  oka  as  contracted 
form  of  udaka,  water,  which  happens  to  fit  in  with  the 
sense  required  at  this  passage,  but  is  not  warranted  other- 
wise excpt  by  Bdhgh's  quotation  "okapuijnehi  civarehi  ti 
etlha  udakaq".  This  quot.  is  taken  from  Vin  1.253,  which 
must  be  regarded  as  a  corrupt  passage  cp.  remarks  of 
Bdhgh.  on  p.  387  :  oghapunnehi  ti  pi  patho.  The  rest  of 
his  interpretation  at  DhA  1.289  runs:  "okaij  okai)  pahaya 
aniketa-sarl  ti  ettha  alayo,  idha  (i.  e.  at  Dh  34)  ubhayam 
pi  labbhati  okamokato  udaka-sankhata  alayS  ti  attho", 
i.e.  from  the  water's  abode.  Bdhgh's  ex  pi",  is  of  course 
problematic);  Dh  91  (okam  okaq  jahanti  'they  leave  what- 
ever shelter  they  have",  expld.  by  alaya   DhA  11.170). 

-cara  (f.  °carika  J  vi.416;  "carika  M  1.117)  living  in 
the  house  (said  of  animals),  i.  e.  tame  (cp.  same  etyni. 
of  "tame"  =  Lat.  domus,  domesticus).  The  passage  M  1. 
117,  118  has  caused  confusion  by  oka  being  taken  as 
"water".  But  from  the  context  as  well  as  from  C.  on  J 
VI. 41 6  it  is  clear  that  here  a  tame  animal  is  meant  by 
means  of  which  other  wild  ones  are  caught.  The  passage 
at  M  1.I17  runs  "odaheyya  okacaraq  thapeyya  okaca- 
rikaq"  i.  e.  he  puts  down  a  male  decoy  and  places  a 
female  (to  entice  the  others),  opp.  "uhaneyya  o.  na- 
seyya  o."  i.  e.  takes  away  the  male  &  kills  the  female. 
-{fi)jaha  giving  up  the  house  (and  its  comfort),  renouncing 
(the  world),  giving  up  attachment  Sn  lioi  (=  alayaq- 
jahai)  SnA  598;  cp.  Nd^  176  with  v. 1.  oghaqjaha).  -anoka 
houseless,  homeless,  comfortless,  renouncing,  free  from 
attachment :  see  separately. 

Oka()<jhatl  [o  -f-  kaddhati]  to  drag  away,  remove  Th  2, 
444.  See  also  ava". 

Okantatl  (okkant°)  [o  -|-  kaiitati,  cp.  also  apakantati]  to 
cut  off,  cut  out,  cut  away,  carve;  pres.  okantatl  M  i. 
129;  Pv  iii.io^  (=  ava°  PvA  213);  ger.  okantitva  J  i. 
154  (migaij  o.  after  carving  the  deer);  PvA  192  (pi5thi- 
maijsSni),  &  okacca  J  iv.210  (T.  okkacca,  v.  1.  BB  ukk° ; 
C.  expls-  by  okkantitva).  —  pp.  avakanta  &  avakantita. 

Okappatl    [o  -|-  kappati]  to  preface,  arrange,  make  ready, 


settle  on,  feel  confident,  pat  (trust)  in  Vin  IV.4;  Ps  n.19 
{=  saddahati  ibid.  21);  Miln  150,  234;  DA  1.243. 

Okappana  (f.)  [o  -j-  kappana]  fixing  one's  mind  (on),  sett- 
ling in,  putting  (trust)  in,  confidence  Dhs  12,  25,  96, 
288;  Nett  15,  19,  28;  Vbh  170. 

Okappetl  [o  -|-  kappeli]  to  fix  one's  mind  on,  to  put  one's 
trust  in  M  I.I  I;  Miln  234  (okappessati). 

Okampetl  [o  +  Caus.  of  kamp]  to  shake,  to  wag,  only  in 
phrase  sisaq  okampetl  to  shake  one's  head  M  1.108, 
171  ;  S  1.118. 

OkaSSati  [o  -j-  kassati,  see  also  apakassati  &  avakaddhati] 
to  drag  down,  draw  or  pull  away,  distract,  remove.  Only 
in  ger.  okassa,  always  comb<i.  with  pasayha  "removing 
by  force"  D  n.74  (T.  okk°);  A  IV.16  (T.  okk",  v.l.  ok°), 
65  (id.);  Miln  210.  Also  in  Caus.  okasseti  to  pull  out, 
draw  out  Th  2,  116  (vattiq  r=  dipavattir)  akaddheti  ThA 
117).  [MSS.  often  spell  okk°]. 

Okara  [o  -\-  kara  fr.  karoti,  BSk.  okara,  e.  g.  M  Vastu  in. 
357]  only  in  stock  phrase  k-lmanaq  adinavo  okaro  sanki- 
leso  D  l.lio,  148  (=  lamaka-bh.^va  D.\  1277);  M  1. 115, 
379i  405  sq.;  II. 145;  A  IV.186;  Nett  42  (v.l.  vokara); 
DhA  1.6,  67.  The  exact  meaning  is  uncertain.  Etymolo- 
gically  it  would  be  degradation.  But  Bdhgh.  prefers  folly, 
vanity,  and  this  suits  the  context  better. 

Okasa  [ava  -j-  kaS  to  shine]  —  I.  lit.  "visibility",  (visible) 
space  as  geometrical  term,  open  space,  atmosphere,  air 
as  space  D  1.34  (ananto  okaso);  Vism  184  (with  disa  & 
pariccheda),  243  (id.);  PvA  14  (okasaij  pharitva  perme- 
ating the  atmosphere).  This  meaning  is  more  pronounced 
in  akasa.  —  2.  "visibility",  i.  e.  appearance,  as  adj. 
looking  like,  appearing.  This  meaning  closely  resembles 
&  often  passes  over  into  meaning  3,  e.g.  katokasa  kamma 
when  the  k.  makes  its  appearance  =  when  its  chance  or 
opportunity  arises  PvA  63;  okasai]  deli  to  give  one's 
appearance,  i.  e.  to  let  any  one  see,  to  be  seen  by  (dat.) 
PvA  19.  —  3.  occasion,  chance,  opportunity,  permission, 
consent,  leave  A  1.253;  'V.449;  J  IV.413  (vatassa  o.  natthi 
the  wind  has  no  access);  SnA  547.  —  In  this  meaning 
freq.  in  comb"-  with  foil,  verbs:  (a)  okasaij  karoti  to 
give  permission,  to  admit,  allow;  to  give  a  chance  or 
opportunity,  freq.  with  panhassa  veyya-karanaya  (to  ask 
a  question),  e.  g.  D  1.51,  205;  M  11.142;  S  iv  57.  — 
Vin  1. 114,  170;  Nd'  487;  PvA  222.  —  Caus.  "q  karoti 
Vin  11.5,  6,  276;  Caus.  II.  "q  karapeti  Vin  1. 114,  170.  — 
katokasa  given  permission  (to  speak),  admitted  in  audience, 
granted  leave  Sn  1031  ;  VvA  65  (rafiria);  anokasakata 
without  having  got  permission  Vin  1.114.  —  (b)  okasaq 
yacati  to  ask  permission  M  11. 123.  —  (c)  okSsaq  deti  to 
give  permission,  to  consent,  give  room  J  11.3;  Vv.\  138.  — 
(d)  with  bhu:  anokasa-bhava  want  of  opportunity  Sdhp 
15;  anokasa-bhuta  not  giving  (lit.  becoming)  an  oppor- 
tunity SnA  573.  EUiptically  for  o.  detha  Yogavacaras 
Man.  4  etc. 

-Sdhigama  finding  an  opportunity  D  11.214  ^l-i  ^  ^^■ 
449.  -kamma  giving  opportunity  ur  permission  Sn  p.  94 
(°kata  allowed);  Pv  iv.l'i  (°q  karoti  to  give  permission), 
-matta  permission  Sn  p.  94.  -loka  the  visible  world  (= 
manussa-loka)  Vism  20$;  VvA  29. 

Okasati  [ava  -f  ka§]  to  be  visible ;  Caus.  okaseti  to  make 

visible,  let  appear,  show  S  iv.290. 

Okiqoa  [pp.  of  okirati;  BSk.  avakirna  Divy  282 ;  Jtm  3l'2] 
strewn  over,  beset  by,  covered  with,  full  of  J  v.74,  370; 
PvA  86,  189  (=  otata  of  Pv  111.3'). 

Okiraoa  [o  -f-  kira^a]  casting  out  (see  the  later  avakirati'), 
only  as  adj  -f.  Okirini  (okilini  through  dialect,  variation) 
a   cast-out    woman   (cast-out   on   acct   of  some  cutaneous 


Okirana 


164 


Ogadha 


disease),  in  double  comb"-  okilinl  okirini  (perhaps  only 
the  latter  should  be  written)  Vin  111.107  =  S  11.260  (in 
play  of  words  with  avakirati').  Bdhgh's  allegorical  expln. 
at  Vin  111.273  puts  okilini  =  kilinnasarirS,  okirip;  =  au- 
garaparikinna.  Cp.  kirata. 

Oklrati  [o  4- kirati]  —  I.  to  pour  down  on,  pour  out  over 
M  1.79;  aor.  okiri  Vin  ni.i07=:S  11.260;  Pv  11.3*;  PvA 
82.  —  2.  to  cast-out,  reject,  throw  out:  see  okirana.  — 
pp.  okii^^icia  (q.  v.).  —  Caus.  II.  okirapeti  to  cause  to 
pour  out  or  to  sprinkle  over  Vism  74  (valikaij). 

Okllini  see  okirana. 

Okotimaka  (adj.)  [o  +  koti  -f  mant  +  ka.  Ava  in  BSk., 
in  formula  durvarna  durdassana  avakotimaka  Sp.  Av.  §  I. 
280.  Kern  (note  on  above  passage)  problematically  refers 
it  to  Sk.  avakutara  =  vairupya  (Panini  V.2,  30).  The 
Commentary  on  S  1.237  explns.  by  mahodara  (fat-bellied) 
as  well  as  lakuntaka  (dwarf);  Piig  A  227  expl^-  by  lakun- 
taka  only]  lit.  "having  the  top  lowered",  with  the  head 
squashed  in  or  down,  i.  e.  of  compressed  &  bulging  out 
stature ;  misshapen,  deformed,  of  ugly  shape  (Mrs.'  Rh.  D. 
trsls  hunchback  at  S  1.94,  pot-bellied  at  S  1.237 ;  Warren, 
Buddhism  p.  426  trsl*-  decrepit).  It  occurs  only  in  one 
stock  phrase,  viz.  dubbanna  dud-da8(s)ika  okotimaka 
"of  bad  complexion,  of  ugly  appearance  and  dwarfed''  at 
Vin  tl.90  =  S  1.94  =  A  1. 107  =:  11.85  =  IU.285  sq.  =  Pug 
51.  The  same  also  at  M  lir.169;  S  1.237;  "-279;  Ud  76. 

Okkanta  [pp.  of  okkamati]  coming  on,  approaching,  taking 
place  D  11.12;  Miln  299  (middhe  okkante).  See  also  avak- 
kanta  S  II.  174;  111.46. 

Okkantl  (f.)  [fr.  okkamati]  entry  (lit.  descent),  appearance, 
coming  to  be.  Usually  in  stock  phrase  jati  sanjatl  o.  nib- 
battl  M  111.249;  S  II. 3;  111.225;  Ndi  257;  Pug  A  184. 
Also  in  gabbh°  entry  into  the  womb  DA  1.130. 

Okkantlka  (adj.)  [fr.  okkanti]  coming  into  existence  again 
and  again,  recurring.  Only  as  epithet  of  piti,  joy.  The 
opposite  is  khapika,  momentary  Vism  143  =  DhsA  115 
{^Expositor  153  trsls-  "flooding"). 

Okkandlka  [kand  or  krani?]  at  J  11.448  is  doubtful,  v.l. 
okkantika.  It  is  used  adverbially:  okkandikai)  kilati 
to  sport  (loudly  or  joyfully).  C.  expl^s.  as  "migo  viya 
okkandi-katva  kilati";  in  the  way  of  roaring  (?)  or  frisking 
about (•),  like  a  deer. 

Okkamati  [o  -f-  kamati  fr.  kram]  lit.  to  enter,  go  down 
into,  fall  into.  fig.  to  come  on,  to  develop,  to  appear  in 
(of  a  subjective  state).  It  is  strange  that  this  important 
word  has  been  so  much  misunderstood,  for  the  English 
idiom  is  the  same.  We  say  'he  went  to  sleep',  without 
meaning  that  he  went  anywhere.  So  we  may  twist  it 
round  and  say  that  'sleep  overcame  him',  without  meaning 
any  struggle.  The  two  phrases  mean  exactly  the  same  — 
an  internal  change,  or  developement,  culminating  in  sleep. 
So  in  Pali  nidda  okkaml  sleep  fell  upon  him,  Vin  1.15; 
niddar]  okkami  he  fell  on  sleep,  asleep,  Dh A  1.9;  PvA  47. 
At  It  76  we  hear  that  a  dullness  developed  (dubban^iiyar) 
okkami)  on  the  body  of  a  god,  he  lost  his  radiance.  At 
D  11.12;  M  III. 119  a  god,  on  his  rebirth,  entered  his  new 
mother's  womb  (kucchiij  okkami).  At  D  II  63  occurs  the 
question  'if  consciousness  were  not  to  develop  in  the 
womb?'  (viniianar)  na  okkamissalha)  S  v.283  'abiding  in 
the  sense  of  bliss'  (sukha-sanriai)  okkamitva).  See  also 
Pug  13  =  28  (niyama  okk°,  'he  enters  on  the  Path').  — 
Caus.  okkameti  to  make  enter,  to  bring  to  S  iv,3i2 
(saggar)).  —  pp.  okkanta.  See  also  avakkamati. 

Okkamana  (nt.)  [fr.  okkamati]  entering  into,  approaching, 
reaching  M  111.6;  A  III.108  (entering  the  path);  also  in 
phrase  nibbanassa  okk.-imanaya  A  iv.iii  sq.,  cp.  230  sq. 

Okkala  see  ukkala. 


Okkassa  see  okkassati. 

Okkhayatl  [ava  -\-  khayati,  corresp.  to  Sk.  kseti  fr.  k§l  to 
lie]  to  lie  low,  to  be  restrained  (in  this  sense  evidently 
confounded  with  avakkhipati)  S  IV.  144  sq.  (cakkhuq  etc. 
okkhayati). 

Okkhaylka  (adj.)  [fr.  ava  -f-  khayin  fr.  k§I,  cp.  avakkha- 
yati ;  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  suggests  relation  to  BSk.  avakhata 
of  khan,  and  compares  Lai.  V.  319]  low-lying,  deep, 
remote,  only  in  one  phrase,  viz.  udaka-taraka  gambhlra- 
gata  okkhayika  M  1.80,  245. 

Okkhita  [pp.  of  ava  -(-  ukkhati,  Sk,  avoksita,  fr.  uk$  to 
sprinkle]  besprinkled,  bestrewn  with  ( — °)  Th  2,  145 
(candan°  =  candanSnulitta  ThA  137);  J  v. 72  (so  in  v.l. 
T.  reads  okkita;  C.  explns.  by  okinna  parikkita  parivSrita). 

Okkhitta  [pp.  of  okkhipati]  thrown  down,  flung  down,  cast 
down,  dropped;  thrown  out,  rejected;  only  in  phrase 
okkhitta-cakkhu,  with  down-cast  eyes,  i.  e.  turning  the 
eyes  away  from  any  objectionable  sight  which  might  im- 
pair the  morale  of  the  bhikkhu;  thus  meaning  "with  eyes 
under  control  Sn  63,  411,  972;  Ndi  498;  Nd^  177;  Pv 
IV.3**  (v.l.  ukkh');  VvA  6.  —  For  further  use  &  meaning. 
See  avakkhitta. 

Okkhipati  [ava  4-  khipati ;  Sk.  avaksipati]  to  throw  down 
or  out,  cast  down,  drop ;  lig.  usually  appld-  to  the  eyes 
=  cast  down,  hence  transferred  to  the  other  senses  and 
used  in  meaning  "keep  under,  restrain,  to  have  control 
over"  (cp.  also  avakkhayati) ;  aor.  °khipi  A  IV.264  (in- 
driyani);  ger.  "khipitva  Vin  IV.18  (id.).  —  pp.  avakkhitta 
&  okkhitta  (q.T.). 

Ogacchati  [ava  -\-  gacchati]  to  go  down,  sink  down,  recede; 
of  sun  &  moon:  to  set  D  1.240  (opp.  uggacchati);  A  iv. 
loi   (udakani  og.).  See  also  ava°. 

Ogapa  (adj.)  [Vedic  ogaija  with  dial.  0  for  ava]  separated 
from  the  troop  or  crowd,  standing  alone,  Vin  1.80;  J  IV. 
432  =  (gaijaq  ohina  C). 

Ogadha  ( — °)  (adj.)  [Sk.  avagadha;  P.  form  with  shortened 
a,  fr.  ava-)-gah,  see  gSdha'  &  gahati]  immersed,  merging 
into,  diving  or  plunging  into.  Only  in  two  main  phrases, 
viz.  Amatogadha  &  Nibbanogadha  diving  into  N.  — 
Besides  these  only  in  jagat''ogadha  steeped  in  the  world 
S  i.i86. 

Ogamana  (nt.)  [o  -|-  gam  -f  ^^^i  Sk.  avagamana.  That 
word  is  rather  more  than  a  thousand  years  later  than  the  Pali 
one.  It  would  be  ridiculous  were  one  to  suppose  that  the 
P.  could  be  derived  from  the  Sk.  On  the  other  hand  the 
Sk.  cannot  be  derived  from  the  P.  for  it  was  formed  at 
a  time  &  place  when  &  where  P.  was  unknown,  just  as  the 
Pali  was  formed  at  a  time  &  place  when  &  where  Sk.  was 
unknown.  The  two  words  are  quite  independent.  They  have 
no  connection  with  one  another  except  that  they  are 
examples  of  a  rule  of  word-formation  common  to  the  two 
languages]  going  down,  setting  (of  sun  &  moon),  always 
in  contrast  to  uggamana  (rising),  therefore  freq.  v.  1.  ogg" 
D  1. 10,  68;  DA  1.95  (=  atthangamana) ;  VvA  326. 

Ogahana  (nt.)  [o  -|-  gahana  fr.  gahati;  Sk.  avagihana; 
concerning  shortening  of  a  cp.  avagadha]  submersion, 
ducking,  bathing;  fig.  for  bathing-place  Sn  214  (=  manuss- 
anag  nahana-tittha  SnA  265).   See  also  avagahana. 

Ogadha'  (adj.)  [Sk.  avagadha;  ava  -|-  gadha']  immersed, 
entered;  firm,  firmly  fooled  or  grounded  in  ( — "),  spelt 
oga}ha  Miln  i  (abhidhamma-vinay°).  Cp.  BSk.  avagSdha- 
sraddha  of  deep  faith  Dlvy  268.  Cp.  pariyogalha. 

Ogadha^  (nt.)  [ava  ■\-  gadha2]  a  firm  place,  firm  ground, 
only  in  cpd.  ogadhappatta  having  gained  a  sure  footing 
A  III.297  sq. 


Ogaha 


i6s 


Ojinati 


Ogaha  [fr.  o  +  gah]  diving  into;  only  in  cpd.  pariy°. 

Ogahati  (ogaheti)  [Sk.  avagahate  ;  ava  -f-  gahati]  to  plunge 
or  enter  into,  to  be  absorbed  in  (w.  ace  or  loc.).  Pv  II. 
12";  Vv  6'  (=  anupavisati  VvA  42),  392  (salavanaij  o. 
=  pavisati  VvA  177).  ogabeti  PvA  155  (pokkharaniq); 
ger.  ogahetva  M  111.175  (J-  ogah°;  v.  1.  ogahitva;;  TvA 
287  (lokanathassa  sasanar),  v.  1.  °itva).  See  also  ava°. 

Ogahana   (nt.)  [fr.  ogahati]  plunging  into  ( — ")  PvA   158. 

Ogilatl  [o  +  gilati]  to  swallow  down  (opp.  uggilati)  M  I. 
393  (inf.  ogilitui))  Milo   5  (id.). 

OgUQthita  [pp.  of  oguntheti,  cp.  BSk.  avagunthita,  e.  g. 
Jtm  30]  covered  or  dressed  (with)  Vin  11.207;  ^vA  86 
(v.  1.  okunthita). 

OgUOthet]  [o  +  guntheti]  to  cover,  veil  over,  hide  S  IV.I22 
(ger.  ogunthitva  sisai),  perhaps  better  read  as  ogunthita; 
V.  1.  SS.  okunthitu).  —  pp.  ogunthita  (q.  v.). 

Ogunipheti  [ava  -|-  Denom.  of  gumpha  garland]  to  string 
together,  wind  round,  adorn  with  wreaths,  cover,  dress 
Vin  1. 194  (Pass,  oguraphiyanli;  vv.  11.  ogumbhiyanti, 
ogubbiy°,  ogummiy",  okumpiy");  II. 142  (ogumphetva). 

Oggata  [pp.  of  avagacchati:  spelling  gg  on  acct.  of  con- 
trast with  uggata,  cp.  avagamana.  Miiller  /*.  Gr.  43  un- 
warrantedly  puts  oggata  =:  apagata]  gone  down,  set  (of 
the  sun)  Vin  IV.55  (oggate  suriye  ^  atthangate  s.),  268 
(id.  =  ratt'  andhakare);  Th  I,  477  (anoggatasmiij  suri- 
yasmiq). 

Ogha  [Vedic  ogha  and  augha ;  BSk.  ogha,  e.  g.  Divy  95 
caturogh'  ottirna,  Jtm  215  mahaugha.  Etym.  uncertain]. 
I.  (rare  in  the  old  texts)  a  flood  of  water  VvA  48  (udaV 
ogha);  usually  as  mabogha  a  great  flood  Dh  47;  Vism 
512;  VvA  110;  Dh.\  11.274  =  ThA  175.  —  2.  (^always  in 
sg.)  the  flood  of  ignorance  and  vain  desires  which  sweep 
a  man  down,  away  from  the  security  of  emancipation. 
To  him  who  has  "crossed  the  flood",  oghatinno,  are 
ascribed  all,  or  nearly  all,  the  mental  and  moral  qualifica- 
tions of  the  Arahant.  For  details  see  Sn  173,  219,  471, 
495,  1059,  1064,  1070,  1082;  A  11.200  sq.  Less  often 
we  have  details  of  what  the  flood  consists  of.  Thus  kam- 
ogha  the  fl.  of  lusts  A  111.69  (<=P-  Dhs  1095,  where  o.  is 
one  of  the  many  names  of  tanha,  craving,  thirst).  In  the 
popular  old  riddle  at  S  I.3  and  Th  I,  15,  633  (included 
also  in  the  Dhp.  Anthology,  370)  the  "flood"  is  15  states 
of  mind  (the  5  bonds  which  impede  a  man  on  his  en- 
trance upon  the  Aryan  Path,  the  5  which  impede  him 
in  his  progress  towards  the  en-l  of  the  Path,  and  5  other 
bonds:  lust,  ill-temper,  stupidity,  conceit,  and  vain  specula- 
tion). Five  Oghas  referred  to  at  S  1.126  are  possibly 
these  last.  Sn  945  says  that  the  flood  is  gedha  greed, 
and  the  avijjogba  of  Pug  21  may  perhaps  belong  here.  As 
means  of  crossing  the  flood  we  have  the  Path  S  1.193  (°assa 
nittharanatthaq);  IV. 257;  v. 59;  It  III.  (°assa  nittharan- 
atthaya);  faith  S  1.214  =  Sn  l84:=Miln  36;  mindfulness 
S  V.168,  186;  the  island  Dh  25;  and  the  dyke  Th  1,7  = 
Sn  4  (cp.  D  11.89).  3-  Towards  the  close  of  the  Nikaya 
period  we  find,  for  the  first  time,  the  use  of  the  word  in 
the    pi.,    and   the  mention  of  4   Oghas  identical  with  the 

4  Asavas    (mental    Intoxicants).    See    D    in. 230,    276; 

5  IV. 175,  257;  V.59,  292,  309;  Ndi  57,  159;  Nd-!  178. 
When  the  oghas  had  been  thus  grouped  and  classified 
in  the  livery,  as  it  were,  of  a  more  popular  simile,  the 
older  use  of  the  word  fell  ofl",  a  tendency  arose  to  think 
only  of  4  oghas,  and  of  these  only  as  a  name  or  phase 
of  the  4  Ssavas.  So  the  Abhidhamma  books  (Dhs  11 51; 
Vbh  25  sq.,  43,  65,  77,  129;  Comp.  Phil.  171).  The 
Netti  follows  this  (31,  114-24).  Grouped  in  comb"-  asava- 
gantha-ogha-yogaagali-tanh^ipadana  at  Vism  211.  The 
later  history  of  the  word  has  yet  to  be  investigated.  But 
it  may  be  already  stated  that  the  S'h  cent,  commentators 
persist   in   the   error   of  explaining    the   old    word  ogha. 


used  in  the  singular,  as  referring  to  the  4  Asavas;  and 
they  extend  the  old  simile  in  other  ways.  Dhammapala 
of  Kancipura  twice  uses  the  word  in  the  sense  of  flood 
of  water  (VvA  48,   1 10,  see  above   l). 

-atiga  one  who  has  overcome  the  flood  Sn  1096  (cp. 
Nd^  180).  -tinna  id.  S  1.3,  142;  Sn  178,  823,  1082, 
lioi,  1 145;  Dh  370  (=  cattaro  oghe  tinna  DhA  IV. 109); 
Vv  64^8  (=  catunnai)  oghanai)  saqsara-mah^oghassa  taritatta 
o.  VvA  284);  821 ;  Nd'   159;  Nd^  179. 

Oghana  (nt.)  watering,  flooding  (?)  M  I.306  (v.  1.  ogha). 

Oghaniya  (adj.)  [fr.  ogha(na)]  that  which  can  be  engulfed 
by  floods  (metaph.)  Dhs  584  (cp.  DAs  trsl.  308);  Vbh 
12,  25  &  passim;  DhsA  49. 

Ocaraka  [fr.  ocarati]  in  special  meaning  of  one  who  makes 
himself  at  home  or  familiar  with,  an  investigator,  informant, 
scout,  spy  (ocaraka  ti  carapurisa  C.  on  Ud  66).  —  Thus 
also  in  BSk.  as  avacaraka  one  who  furnishes  information 
Divy  127;  an  adaptation  from  the  Pali.  —  Vin  111.47, 
52;  M  1.129  =:  189  (cora  ocaraka,  for  cara?);  S  1. 79 
(purisa  cara  (v.  1.  cora)  ocaraka  (okacara  v.  1.  SS)  jana- 
padar)  ocaritva  etc.;  cp.  K.  S,  p.  106  n.  l)  =  Ud  66 
(reads  cora  o.). 

Ocarati  [o  +  carati]  to  be  after  something,  to  go  into,  to 
search,  reconnoitre,  investigate,  pry  Vin  111.52  (ger.  °itva); 
M  1502  (ocarati);  S  1.79  (°itva:  so  read  for  T.  ocarita; 
C.  expln^  by  vimaqsitva  taq  taq  pavattiq  tiatva).  — 
pp.  ocinpa. 

Oclppa  [pp.  of  ocarati]  gone  into,  investigated,  scouted, 
explored  S  1.79  =  Ud  66  (reads  otinna). 

Ocita  [o  +  cita,  pp.  of  ocinati']  gathered,  picked  off  J  III. 
22;  1V.135,  156;  Sdhp  387. 

Oclnatl  (ocinati)  —  l.  [=  Sk.  avacinoti,  ava  +  cl']  to 
gather,  pluck,  pick  off  DhA  1. 366;  also  in  pp.  ocita.  — 
2.  \=.  Sk.  avacinoti  or  ''ciketi  ava  -J-  ci*,  cp.  apacinati'^] 
to  disregard,  disrespect,  treat  with  contempt;  pres.  oci- 
nayati  (for  ocinati  metri  causa)  J  VI.4  {=  avajanati  C). 

Ociraka  see  odiraka. 

Occhindati  [o  +  chindati]  to  cut  off,  sever  J  11.388  (maggaij 
occhindati  &  occhindamana  to  bar  the  way ;  v.  1.  KB. 
ochijjati),  404. 

Ojavant  (adj.)  [fr.  oja;  Vedic  ojasvant  in  diff.  meaning: 
powerful]  possessing  strengthening  qualities,  giving  strength 
M  1.480;  S  1. 212  (so  read  for  ovajai);  phrase  ojavaq  ase- 
canakai)  of  NibbSna,  trsl^-  "elixir");  Th  2,  196  (id.  = 
ojavantaq  ThA  168);  A  111.260  (an°  of  food,  i.  e,  not 
nourishing  DhA  I.106. 

Ojavantata  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  ajavant]  richness  in  sap,  strength 
giving  (nourishing)  quality  J  1.68  (of  milk). 

OJahatI  [o  +  jahati]  to  give  up,  leave,  leave  behind,  renounce, 
ger.  ohaya  D  1.115  (nati-sanghar)  &  hiraiiiia-suvaijnai]) ; 
M  II. 166  (id.);  J  v.340(=:chaddetvaC.);  PvA  93  (maq). — 
Pass,  avablyati  &  obiyati,  pp.  china  (q.  v.).  —  See  also 
ohanati. 

Oja  (f.)  [Vedic  ojas  nt.,  also  BSk.  oja  nt.  Divy  105;  fr. 
*aug  to  increase,  as  in  Lat.  auges,  augustus  &  auxilium, 
Goth,  aukan  (augment),  Ags.  eacian ;  cp.  also  Gr.  a.i%a, 
Sk.  uksati  &  vaksana  increase]  strength,  but  only  in  meaning 
of  strength-giving,  nutritive  essence  (appl<l-  to  food)  M 
1.245;  S  1187;  V.162  (dhamm');  A  III. 396;  J  1.68;  Dhs 
646,  740,  875;  Miln  156;  DhA  II. 154  (pathav").  See 
also  def.  at  Vism  450  (referring  to  kabalinkar'ahSra.  The 
comp"-  iorm  is  oja,  e.g.  ojadana  J  v. 243;  ojatthamaka 
(rupa)  Vism  341. 

OjInStl  [Sk.  avajayati,  ava  -f-  j|]  to  conquer,  vanquish,  sub- 
due J  VI. 222  (ojinamase). 


Onata 


1 66 


Ottappa 


Onata  [pp.  o  +  janSti,  see  also  avanSta]  despised  Miln 
191,  229,  288. 

Ottha'  [Vedic  ostha,  idg.  *o  (u)  s;  Av.  aosta  lip;  Lat.  os 
mouth  =  Sk.  ah;  Ags.  or  margin]  ihe  lip  A  IV.131;  Sn 
608;  J  11.264;  111.26  (adhar"  c&  utlar"  lower  &  upper  lip), 
278;  V.I 56:  DhA  1.212;  III. 1 63;  IV. I  ;  VvA  11 ;  PvA  260. 
Cp.  bimbottha. 

Oftha^  [Vedic  ustra,  f.  ustri,  buffalo  =  Ohg.  Ags.  ur,  Lat. 
urus  bison,  aurochs.  In  cl.  Sk.  it  means  a  camel].  It  is 
mentioned  in  two  lists  of  domestic  animals,  Vin  in.52; 
Miln  32.  At  J  III. 385  a  story  is  told  of  an  otthl-vyadhi 
who  fought  gallantly  in  the  wars,  and  was  afterwards 
used  to  drag  a  dung-cart.  Morris,  y  P  T  S.  1887,  150 
suggests  elephant. 

Otthubhati  [cp.  Sk.  avasthlvati]   to  spit  out  M   1.79,  127. 

Otjijita  [pp.  of  oddeti]  thrown  out,  laid  (of  a  snare)  J  i. 
183;  11,443;  V.341;  ThA  243. 

0(j(jetl  [for  uddeti  (?).  See  further  under  uddeti]  to  throw 
out  (a  net),  to  lay  snares  A  1.33=]  11.37.  153;  111.184 
and  passim ;  ThA   243.  . — •  pp.  oddita  (q.  v.). 

0(j(jha  [better  spelling  odba,  pp.  of  a  +  vah]  carried  away, 
appropriated,  only  in  cpd.  sah-odha  cora  thieves  with 
their   plunder    Vism   180  (cp.  Sk.  sahodha  Manu  IX.270). 

O^ata  [pp.  of  onamati]  bent  down,  low,  inclined.  L'sually 
of  social  rank  or  grade,  comb''  with  &  opp.  to  unnata, 
i.  e.  raised  &  degraded,  lofty  and  low  A  11.86  =  Pug  52 
(=  nica  lamaka  Pug  A  229);  Pv  IV. 6";  Miln  387;  UA 
1.45;   PvA  29. 

Ooamatl  [o  -\-  namati]  (instr.)  to  incline,  bend  down  to, 
bow  to  (dat.)  Miln  220,  234  (onamati  &  onamissati),  400; 
DA  I. II 2.  Cans,  onameti  M  11. 137  (kayaq).  —  pp.  onata 
&  Caus.  onamita. 

Oljainana  (nt.)  [fr.  onamati]  bending  down,  inclining,  bowing 
down  to  Miln  234. 

Onamita  [pp.  of  onameti,  Caus.  of  nam]  having  bowed 
down,  bowing  down  Miln  234. 

0^1  ("!•  or  f.)  [cp.  Vedic  oni  charge,  or  a  kind  of  Soma 
vessel]  charge,  only  in  cpd.  oni-rakkha  a  keeper  of 
entrusted  wares,  bailee  Vin  III.47,  53  (=  ahataij  bhandar) 
gopento). 

Onlta  see  onita. 

OriOJana  (nt.)  [fr.  onojeti,  Sk.  avanejana]  washing  off, 
cleaning,  washing  one's  hands  Vin  11.31  (Bdhgh.  refers 
it  to  fig.  meaning  onojeti-  by  explaining  as  "vissajjana" 
gift,  presentation). 

Ooojetl  (with  vowel  assimilation  o  >  e  for  onejeti  =  ava  -f- 
nejeti,  Sk.  °nejayati  fr.  nij.  Kern,  Toev.  11.138,  comple- 
mentary to  remarks  s.  v.  on  p.  5  expl"5.  as  assimil.  onuj°  > 
onij°,  like  anu"  BSk.  ani°  (anisaqsa  anusarjsa),  the  further 
process  being  onoj°  for  unuj°.  The  etym.  remains  however 
doubtful]  —  I.  to  £ause  to  wash  off,  to  wash,  cleanse: 
see  onojana.  —  2.  (fig.)  to  give  as  a  present,  dedicate 
(with  the  rite  of  washing  one's  hands,  i.  e.  a  clean  gift) 
Vin  1.39;  I  v.  1 56;  A  iv.210::n;  2l4(onojesi  aor.);  Miln  236. 

Otata  [o  -f-  tata,  pp.  of  tan]  stretched  over,  covered,  spread 
over  with;  Dh  162  (v.  1.  otthata);  Miln  307  (+vitata); 
DhA  III.  1 53  (:=  pariyonandhitva  thila).  See  also  avatata 
&  sam-otata. 

Otaraoa  (adj.)  [fr.  otarati]  going  down,  descending  Nett 
I,  2,  4,   107. 

Otarati  [o  4-  tarati]  to  descend,  to  go  down  to  (c.  ace), 
to   be  t.ike  oneself  to,  ppr.  otaranto  Vin  11.22 1.  —  aor. 


otari  SnA  486  (for  avaqsari);  DhA  1.19  (cankamanaq); 
PvA  47  (navaya  mahasamuddaij),  75.  —  inf.  otaritur) 
P"g  ^5i  75  (sangamaij).  — •  ger.  otaritva  Pv.\  94  (pasada 
from  the  palace),  140  (dev.ilokato).  —  Caus.  II.  otarapett 
to  cause  to  descend,  to  bring  down  to  J  vi.345.  —  pp. 
otinna.  —  Caus.  1.  otareti.  Opp.  uttarati. 

Otallaka  (adj.)  [of  uncertain  etym.  perhaps  ^'avataryaka 
from  ava  -|-  tf,  or  from  uttala?]  clothed  in  rags,  poor, 
indigent  J  IV. 380  (=:  lamaka  olamba-vilamba-nantaka- 
dharo  C). 

Otapaka  (adj.)  [fr.  otapeti]  drying  or  dried  (in  the  sun), 
with  ref.  to  food  SnA  35  (parivasika-bhattaq  bhunjaii 
hatth'otapakai]  khadati). 

Otapeti  [o -f  tapeti]  to  dry  in  the  sun  Vin  11. 1 13;  IV.281 ; 
Miln  371  (kummo  udakato  nikkhamitva  kayaij  o.  fig. 
applied  to  manasa). 

Otara  [fr.  otarati,  BSk.  avatara.  The  Sk.  avatara  is  cen- 
turies later  and  means  'incarnation']  —  I.  descent  to,  i.e. 
approach  to,  access,  fig.  chance,  opportunity  otarai) 
labhati.  Only  in  the  Mara  myth,  e,  the  tempter,  'gets 
his  chance'  to  tempt  the  Huddha  or  the  disciples,  M  i. 
334;  S  1. 122;  IV.17S,  185;  DhA  IU.121.  (avataraij  la- 
bhati, Divy  144,  145)  ot°  adhigacchati,  to  find  a  chance, 
Sn  446.  [FausboU  here  translates  'defect'.  This  is  fair  as 
exegesis.  Every  moral  or  intellectual  defect  gives  the 
enemy  a  chance.  But  otara  does  not  mean  defect].  Ot° 
gavesati  to  seek  an  opportunity,  DhA  III  21.  Otarapekkha, 
watching  for  a  chance,  S  1. 122.  At  one  passage,  A  ill. 
67  ^  259,  it  is  said  that  constant  association  leads  to 
agreement,  agreement  to  trust,  and  trust  to  otara.  The 
Com.  has  nothing.  'Carelessness'  would  suit  the  context, 
o.  gavesati  to  look  for  an  opportunity  DhA  ill. 21,  and 
otarai]  labhati  to  get  a  chance  S  1. 122;  IV. 178,  185;  M 
1.334;  DhA  III. 2 1  (gloss  okara  &  okasa);  cp.  avalaraq 
labhati  Divy  144,  145  etc.  —  2.  access,  fig.  inclination 
to,  being  at  home  with,  approach,  familiarity  (cp.  otinna 
and  avacara  adj.)  A  111.67,  259.  —  3.  (influenced  by 
ocarati^  and  ocinna)  being  after  something,  spying,  finding 
out;  hence:  fault,  blame,  defect,  flaw  Sn  446  (=  randha 
vivara  SnA  393);  .also  in  phrase  otarapekkha  spying 
faults  S  1.122  (which  may  be  taken  tomeaning  i,but  mean- 
ing 3  is  accredited  by  BSk.  avatarapreksin  Divy  322), 
Mrs.  Rh.  D.  translates  the  latter  passage  by  "watching 
for  access". 

Otareti  [Caus.  of  otarati]  to  cause  to  come  down,  to  bring 
down,  take  down  J  1.426;  iv.402  ;  Nett  21,  22;  DhA  II. 81. 

OtioO^  [PP-  °^  otarati ;  the  form  ava°  only  found  in  poetry 
as  — °  e.g.  issavatinna  J  v. 98;  dukkha",  soka°  etc.  see 
below  2]  —  I.  (med.)  gone  down,  descended  PvA  104 
(uddho-galar)  na  otinnai)  not  gone  down  further  than  the 
throat).  —  2.  (pass.)  beset  by  (cp.  avatara  2),  affected 
with,  a  victim  of,  approached  by  M  1.460  =:  A  11.123 
(dukkh^  otinna)  =:  It  89  (as  v.  1. ;  T.  has  dukkhabhikinna, 
which  is  either  gloss  or  wrong  reading  for  dukkh&vatinna); 
M  II. 10;  S  1. 123  (sokava°),  137  (id.);  Sn  306  (icchava- 
tinna  affected  with  desire),  939  (sallena  otinno  =  pierced 
by  an  arrow,  expld-  byNd'414  as  "sallena  viddho  phuttho"); 
J  v. 98  (issSva°  =  issaya  otinna  C).  —  3.  (in  special  sense) 
affected  with  love,  enamoured,  clinging  to,  fallen  in  love 
with  Vin  111.128  (=  saratto  apekkhava  patibaddha-citto); 
A  111.67,  259  (°citta);  SnA  322  (id.).  —  Note,  otinna  at 
S  v.  1 62  should  with  v.  1.  SS  be  deleted.  See  also  avatinpa. 

Ottappa  (nt.)  [fr.  tappati'  -|-  ud,  would  corresp.  to  a  Sk. 
form  *autlapya  fr.  ut-tapya  to  be  regretted,  tormented  by 
remorse.  The  BSk.  form  is  a  wrong  adaptation  of  the 
Pali  form,  taking  o"  for  apa°,  viz.  apatrapya  M  Vastu  ill. 
53  and  apatrapa  ibid.  1.463.  MUller,  P.  Gr.  &  Fausboll, 
Sutta  Nip.ata  Index  were  both  misled  by  the  BSk.  form, 
as  also  recently  Kern,   Toev.  s.  v.]  fear  of  exile,  shrinking 


Ottappa 


167 


Odhi 


back  from  doing  wrong,  remorse.  See  on  term  and  its 
distinction  from  hiri  (shame)  Dhs  trsl.  20,  also  DhsA 
124,  126;  Vism  8,  9  and  the  definition  at  SnA  181. 
Ottappa  generally  goes  with  hiri  as  one  of  the  7  noble 
treasures  (see  ariya-dhana).  Hiri-oltappa  It  36;  J  1. 129; 
hir-otlappa  at  M  1. 271;  S  11.220;  v.i;  A  1178;  iv.99, 
151;  V.214;  It  34;  J  1.127,  206;  VvA  23.  See  also 
hiri.  —  Further  passages:  D  111.212;  M  1.356;  S  11.196, 
206,  208;  V.89;  A  1.50,  83,  95;  m.4  sq.,  352;  iv.ii; 
V.123  sq.;  Pug  71;  Dhs  147,  277;  Nett  39.  —  anot- 
tappa  (nt. )  lack  of  conscience,  unscrupulousness,  disregard 
of  morality  A  1.50,  83,  95;  111.421;  v. 146,  214;  Vbh 
34«,_359,  370,  391 ;  as  adj.  It  34  (ahirika  +). 

-garavata  respect  for  conscience,  A  111.331;  iv.29. 
-dhana  the  treasure  of  (moral)  self-control  D  III. 163,  251, 
282;  VvA  113.  -bala  the  power  of  a  (good)  conscience 
U  IU253;  Ps  11.169,  176;  Dhs  31,  102  (irl"-  power  of 
the  fear  of  blame). 

Ottappati  [ut  -f-  lappati']  to  feel  a  sense  of  guilt,  to  be 
con.-.cious  or  afraid  of  evil  S  1.154;  I's  II. 169,  176;  Pug 
20,  21;   Dhs  31;  Miln  171. 

Ottappin  &  Ottapin  (adj.)  [fr.  ottappa]  afraid  of  WTong, 
conscientious,  scrupulous  (a)  ottappin  D  in. 252,  282;  It 
28,  119.  —  (b)  otlapin  M  1.43  sq.;  S  11.159  sq.,  196, 
207;  IV. 243  sq.;  A  11.13  sq.;  1II.3  sq.,  112;  IV. I  sq. ; 
V.  123,  146.  Anottappin  bold,  reckless,  unscrupulous  Pug 
20  (+ ahirika).  anottapin  at  S  11.159  sq.,  195,  206;  IV. 
240  sq.;  Sn   133  (ahirika +). 

Otthata  [pp.  of  onharati]  —  1.  spread  over,  veiled,  hidden 
by  ( — °)  Miln  299  (mahik°  suriya  the  sun  hidden  by  a 
fog).  —  2.   strewn   over  (with)  Sdhp   246  ( — °). 

Otthata  =  Otthata,  v.  l.  at  Dh  162  for  otata. 

Ottharaka  (m.)  [fr.  of  tharati]  a  kind  of  strainer,  a  filter 
Vin   11.119. 

Ottharana  (nt.)  [fr.  ottharati]  spreading  over,  veiling  Miln 
299  (inahik"). 

Ottharati  [o  •\-  tharati,  Sk.  root  str]  to  spread  over,  spread 
I  out,   cover    Miln    121    (opp.    patikkaraati,   of  water).  See 

I  also  avattharati. 

Odaka  (nt.)  [comp"  form  of  udaka]  water;  abs.  only  at  J 
111.282.  —  an°  without  water,  dried  up  Th  2,  265  (^= 
udakabhasta  ThA  212).  Cp.  comb"-  sitodaka,  e.g.  M  1. 
376.  See  udaka. 

-antika  —  l.  neighbourhood  of  the  water,  a  place  near 
the  water  (see  antika')  Kh  viii.i,  3  (gambhire  odakantike, 
which  C;  ilders,  Kh.  trsl"-  p.  30,  interprets  "a  deep  pit"; 
see  also  KhA  217  sq.).  —  2.  "water  at  the  end",  i.e. 
final  ablution  (see  antika^),  in  spec,  sense  the  ablution 
following  upon  the  sexual  act  Vin  ill. 2 1  ;  cp.  odak-anti- 
kata  (f.  abstr.)  final  ablution,  cleansing  J   11.126. 

Odagya  (nt.)  [der.  fr.  udagga]  exultation,  elation  Nd'  3  = 
Nd»  446  =  Dhs  9,  86,  285,  373;  DhsA  143  (^  udaggasa- 
bhava  a  "topmost"  condition). 

Odana  (m.  &  nt.)  [Sk.  odana,  to  Idg.  "ud,  from  which 
also  udaka,  q.  v.  for  full  etym.]  boiled  (milk-)rice,  gruel 
Vin  11.214  (m.);  D  1.76,  103;  S  1.82  (nsUk");  DhA  iv. 
17  (id.);  A  111.49;  IV.231;  Sd  18;  J  111.425  (til°  m.); 
Dhs  646,  740,  875;  PvA  73;  VvA  98:  Sdhp  113.  Combd 
with  kummasa  (sour  milk)  in  phrase  o-k-upa-caya  a  heap 
of  boiled  rice  and  sour  milk,  of  the  body  (see  kaya  I.); 
also  at   M  1.247. 

Odanlka  [fr.  odana]  a  cook  J  111.49. 

Odanlya  (adj.)  [fr.  odana,  cp.  Sk.  odanika]  belonging  to 
rice-gruel,  made  of  rice-gruel  Vin  III.59  ("ghara  a  rice- 
kitchen);   VvA  73  (°sura  rice-liquor). 


Odapattakini  (f.)  (adj.)  [f.  of  uda  -f-  pattaka  +  in,  i.  e. 
having  a  bowl  of  water,  Ep.  of  bhariya  a  wife,  viz.  the 
wife  in  the  quality  of  providing  the  house  with  water. 
Thus  in  enum"-  of  the  lo  kinds  of  wives  (&  women  in 
general)  at  Vin  III. 140  (expld.  by  udakapatlai)  amasitva 
vaseti)  1=  VvA   73. 

Odapattiya  at  Cp.  11.48  =  last. 

Odarika  &  °ya  (adj.)  [fr.  udara]  living  for  one's  belly,  vor- 
acious, gluttonous  Miln  357;  J  vi.208  C^ya);  Th  i,  loi. 

Odarikatta  (nt.)  [fr.  odarika]  stomach-filling  M  1.461 ; 
Vism   71. 

Odahatl  [o  -f  dahati,  fr.  dhS]  —  1.  to  put  down,  to  put 
in,  supply  M  1.117  (okacarai) ,  see  under  oka);  II. 216 
(agad'angarai)  van.vmukhe  odaheyya);  Th  i,  774  (migavo 
pasari  odahi  the  hunler  set  a  snare;  Morris,  J P  T S. 
1884,  76  suggests  change  of  reading  to  addayi,  hardly 
justified);  J  111.201  (visaq  odahi  araiine),  272  (passaq  o. 
to  turn  one's  flanks  towards,  dat.);  Miln  156  (kaye  ojaq 
odahissama  supply  the  body  with  strength).  —  2.  (fig.) 
to  apply,  in  phrase  sotarj  odahati  to  listen  D  1.230; 
Davs  V.68.  —  pp.  obita. 

Odahana  (nt.)  [fr.  odahati]  —  I.  putting  down,  applying, 
application  M  1.216;  heaping  up,  storing  DhA  III. 118.  — 
2.  putting  in,  fig.  attention,  devotion  Nett  29. 

Odata  (adj.)  [Derivation  unknown.  The  Sk.  is  avadata, 
ava  -f-  data,  pp.  of  hypothetical  dfi*  to  clean,  purify] 
clean,  white,  prominently  applied  to  the  dress  as  a  sign 
of  distinction  (white),  or  special  purity  at  festivities,  ablu- 
tions &  sacrificial  functions  D  11.18  (unna,  of  the  Buddha); 
III. 268;  A  111.239;  IV.94,  263,  306,  349;  V.62;  Dhs 
617  =  (in  enumn.  of  colours);  DA  I.219;  VvA  ill.  See 
also  ava". 

-kasina  meditation  on  the  white  (colour)  Vism  174. 
-vaijna  of  white  colour,  white  M  11.14;  Dhs  247.  -vattha 
a  white  dress;  adj.  wearing  a  white  dress,  dressed  in 
white  D  1.7,  76,  104;  J  111.425  (-|- alla-ke<a).  -vasana 
dressed  in  white  (of  householders  or  laymen  as  opposed 
to  the  yellow  dress  of  the  bhikkhus)  D  1.211;  ill. 118, 
124  sq.,  210;  M  1.49',  "-23;  A  1.73;  111.384;  IV.217 
[cp.  BSk.  avadsta-vasana  Divy   160]. 

Odataka  (a<lj.)  [fr.  odata]  while,  clean,  dressed  in  white 
S  11.284  (v.  1.  SB  odat.a);  Th  J,  965  (dhaja). 

OdiSSa  (adv.)  [ger.  of  o  -|-disati  =  Sk.  disati,  cp.  uddissa] 
only  in  neg.  anodissa  without  a  purpose,  indefinitely  (?) 
Miln   156  (should  we  read  anudissa:). 

Odlssaka  (adj.)  [fr.  odissa]  only  in  adv.  expression  odis- 
saka-vasena  definitely,  in  special,  specifically  (opp.  to 
anodissaka-vasena  in  general,  universally)  J  1.82;  11.146; 
VvA  97.  See  also  anodissaka  &  odbiso. 

Odiraka  in  odlrakajsta  S  iv.193  should  with  v.  1.  be  read 
ociraka  [=  ava -|- cira -)- ka]  "with  its  bark  off",  strip- 
ped of  its  bark. 

Odumbara  (adj.)  [fr.  udumbara]  belonging  to  the  Udum- 
bara  tree  Vv   50'S;   cp.  Vv.\   213. 

Odhasta  [Sk.  avadhvasia,  pp.  of  ava  -|-  dhvaijsali;  see 
dhaijsali]  fallen  down,  scattered  M  1.124  =  S  iv.176 
(°patoda ;  S  reads  odhasata  but  has  v.  1.  odhasta). 

Odhaniya  (nt.)  [fr.  avadhSna,  ava  4  db§,  cp.  Gr.  aTo^xif, 
see  odahati]  a  place  for  putting  something  down  or  into, 
a  receptacle  Vin  1.204  (salfik",  vy.  11.  and  gloss  on  p.  381 
as  follows:  salakatlhaniya  A,  salSkStaniya  C,  salfikadha- 
raya  B,  salak'odhaniyan  ti  yallha  salikai]  odahanti  tai) 
D  E).  —  Cp.  samodhaneli. 

Odhi  [from  odahati,  Sk.  avadhi,  fr.  ava  -|-  dha]  putting 
down,    fixing,    i.  e.    boundary,    limit,    extent    DhA    11.80 


Odhi 


1 68 


Opateti 


(jannu-matteaa  odhii.a  to  the  extent  of  the  knee,  i.  e. 
kneedeep);  iV.204  (id).  —  odhiso  (adv.)  limited,  speci- 
fically Vbh  246;  Nett  12;  Vism  309.  Opp.  anodhi  M  m. 
219  Cjina),  also  in  anodhiso  (adv.)  unlimited,  universal, 
general  Ps  11.  130,  cp.  anodissaka  (odissaka);  also  as  ano- 
dhikatva  without  limit  or  distinction,  absolutely  Kvu 
208,  and  odhisodhiso  "piecemeal"  Kvu  103  (cp.  Kvu 
trsl"-  76'^,    127'). 

-sunka    "extent    of  toll",   stake  J   vi.279  (=:  sunkha- 
kotthasaq  C). 

Odhika  (adj.)  [fr  odhi]  "according  to  limit",  i.  e.  all  kinds 
of,  various,  in  phrase  yathodhikani  kamani  Sn  60,  cp. 
Nd2  526;  J  V.3)2  (id.). 

Odhunatl  [o-|-dh4nSti]  to  shake  off  M  1.229;  S  HI. 155;  A 
III. 365  (-f  nidd.iunati);  Pv  IV.3"  (v.  1.  BB  ophun°,  SS 
otu°)  =  PvA  256;  Vin  II. 317  (Bdhgh.  in  expl"-  of  ogum- 
phetva  of  CV.  v.  1 1,  6;  p.   117);  Miln  399  (+  vidhunati). 

Onaddha  [pp.  of  onandhati]  bound,  tied;  put  over,  covered 
Vin  11.150,  270  ;>q.  ("manca,  °pltha);  M  11.64;  Dh  146 
(andhakarena);  Sdhp   182.  See  also  onaybati. 

Onandhati  [o  -)-  niindhati,  a  secondary  pres.  form  con- 
structed from  naddlia  after  bandhati  >  baddha;  see  also 
apilandhati]  to  bine,  fasten;  to  cover  up  Vin  11.150  (inf. 
onandhitui}) ;  Miln    j6l. 

Onamaka  (^dj.)  [fr.  onamati]  bending  down',  stooping  DhA 
11.136  (an°). 

Onamati  [o  +  namati]  to  bend  down  (instr.),  stoop  D  11. 
17  (anonamanto  ppr.  not  bending);  IU.143  (id.);  Vv  39' 
(onamitva  ger.).  —  pp.  onata. 

Onamana  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  onamati]  in  compn-  with  °unna- 
mana  lowering  &  raising,  bending  down  &  up  DhA  1.17. 

Onayliati  [ava  -\-  nayhati]  to  tie  down,  to  cover  over,  envelop, 
shroud  DhsA  378  (megho  akasaij  o.)  —  pp.  onaddha. 

Onaha  [fr.  ava  +  nah,  cp.  onaddha  &  onayhati]  drawing 
over,  covering,  shrouding  D  1.246  (spelt  onaha);  Milu 
300;  Dhs   1 157  (^ megho  viya  akasai)  kayai]  onayhati). 

Onita  [in  form  =  Sk.  avanlta,  but  semantically  =:  apanlta. 
Thus  also  BSk.  apanita,  pp.  of  apa  -)-  ni,  see  apaneti] 
only  found  in  one  ster.  phrase ,  viz.  onita-patta-pant 
"having  removed  (or  removing)  his  hand  from  the  bowl", 
a  phrase  causing  constructional  difficulties  &  sometimes 
taken  in  glosses  as  "onitta°"  (fr.  nij),  i.  e.  having  washed 
(bowl  and  hands  after  the  meal).  The  O-  expl"-  as  onito 
pattato  pani  yeva,  i.  e.  "the  hand  is  taken  away  from  the 
bowl".  The  spelling  is  frequently  onita,  probably  through 
BB  sources.  See  on  terra  also  Trenckner^  Azotes  66-*  & 
cp.  apa-nita-patra  at  M  Vastu  III.  142.  The  expression  is 
always  comb^-  with  bhuttavin  "having  eaten"  and  occurs 
very  frequently,  e.g.  at  Vin  II. 147:  D  1.109  (=  DA  I. 
277,  q.  v.  for  the  2  explns.  mentioned  above  M  11.50,  93; 
S  V.384;  A  11.63;  Sn  p.  Ill  (=  pattato  onitapani,  apa- 
nltahattha  SnA  456);  VvA  118;  PvA  278. 

Oneti,  prob.  for  apaneti,  see  apaneti  &  pp.  onita. 

Onojeti  see  onojeti. 

Opakkamika  (adj.)  [fr.  upakkama]  characterising  a  sensa- 
tion of  pain:  attacking  suddenly,  spasmodic,  acute;  always 
in  connection  with  abadha  or  vedana  M  1.92,  241 ;  S  iv. 
230  =  An.87  =ui.i3i  =:V.iio==  Nd*304'<:  :=  Miln  1 12. 

Opakkhin  (adj.)  [0  +  pakkhin.  adj.  fr.  pakkha  wing,  cp. 
similarly  avapatta]  "with  wings  ofT",  i.  e.  having  one's 
wings  clipped,  powerless  A  I  18S  (°i)  karoti  to  deprive 
of  one's   wings   or   strength;   so   read  for  T.  opapakkhii) 

karoti). 

Opaguylia  see  opayayha. 


Opatati  [o  -f  pat]  to  fall  or  fly  down  (on),  to  fall  over 
(w.  ace.)  J  11.228  (lokamisaq  °anto);  Vi.561  (°itvg  ger.); 
Miln  368,  396.  —  pp.  opatita. 

Opatita  [pp.  of  opatati]  falling  (down)  PvA  29  (udaka; 
V.  1.  ovulhita,  opalahita;  context  reads  at  PvA  29  maha- 
sobbhehi  opatitena  udakena,  but  id.  p.  at  KhA  213  reads 
mahasobbha-sannipaiehi). 

Opatta  (adj.)  [o  -f-  patta,  Sk.  avapattra]  with  leaves  fallen 
off,  leafless  (of  trees)  J  HI. 495  (opatta  =  avapatta  nippatta 
patita-patta  C), 

Opadhlka  (adj.)  [fr.  upadhi.  BSk.  after  the  P.,  ailpadhika 
Divy  542]  forming  a  substratum  for  rebirth  (always  with 
ref.  to  punna,  merit).  Not  with  Morris,  J P  TS.  1885, 
38  as  "e.vceedingly  great";  the  correct  interpretation  is 
given  by  Dhpala  at  VvA  154  as  "atta-bhava-janaka  pati- 
sandhi-pavatti-vipaka-dayaka".  —  S  1.233  =  A  IV. 292  = 
Vv  3421 ;  It  20  (v.  1.  osadhika),  78. 

Opanayika  (adj.)  [fr.  upaneti,  upa  -f  nl]  leading  to  (Nib- 
bana)  S  IV.41  sq.,  272,  339;  v.343;  A  1.158;  11.198; 
D  III. 5;   Vism  217. 

Opapakkili  in  phrase  °r|  karoti  at  A  1.188  read  opakkhir) 
karoti  to  deprive  of  one's  wings,  to  render  powerless. 

Opapaccayika  (adj.)  [=  opapatika]  having  the  character- 
istic of  being  born  without  parents,  as  deva  Nett  28 
(upadana). 

Opapatika  (adj.)  [fr.  upapatti;  the  BSk.  form  is  a  curious 
distortion  of  the  P.  form,  viz.  aupapaduka  Av.  S  11-89; 
Divy  300,  627,  649]  arisen  or  reborn  without  visible 
cause  (i.  e.  without  parents),  spontaneous  rebirth  {JCvu 
trsl.  283-),  apparitional  rebirth  (CpJ.  165*,  q.  v.)  D  1.27, 
55,  '56;  111.132,  230  (°yoni),  265;  M  1.34,  73,  287,  401 
sq.,  436  sq  ,  465  sq.;  II.52;  111.22,  80,  247;  S  111.206, 
240  sq.,  246  sq.;  iv.34i»;  v.346,  357  sq.,  406;  A  1.232, 
245,  269;  11.5,  89,  186;  IV.12,  226,  399,  423  sq.;  V. 
265  sq.,  286  sq.,  343  sq. ;  Pug  16,  62,  63;  Vbh  412  sq.; 
Miln  267;  Vism  552  sq.,  559;  DA  1.165,  313.  The  C. 
on  M  1.34  expl"s-  by  "sesa-yoni-patikkhepa-vacanar|  etag". 
See  also  Pug.  A  1,  §  40. 

Opapatin  (adj.)  =  opapatika,  in  phrase  opapatiya  (for 
opapatiniya?)  iddhiya  at  S  v  282  (so  read  for  T.  opapati 
ha?)  is  doubtful  reading  &  perhaps  best  to  be  omitted 
altogether. 

Opama  at  J  1.89  &  Sdhp  93  (anopama)  stands  for  upama, 
which  metri  causa  for  upama. 

Opamma  (nt.)  [fr.  upama;  cp.  Sk.  aupamya]  likeness, 
simile,  comparison,  metaphor  M  1378;  Vin  v. 164;  Miln 
'1  7°i  33°;  Vism  117,  622;  ThA  290. 

Oparajja  viceroyalty  is  v.  1.  for  uparajja.  Thus  at  M  ii. 
76;  A  111.154. 

Opavayha  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  upavayha,  grd.  of  upavahati]  fit 
for  riding,  suitable  as  conveyance,  slate-elephant  (of  the 
elephant  of  the  king)  S  v. 35 1  =:  Nett  136  (v.l.  opaguyha; 
C.  expl"s.  by  arohana-yogga);  J  1I.20  (SS  opavuyha);  IV. 
91  (v.l.  °guyha);  VI.488  (T.  opavuyha,  v.l.  opaguyha; 
gajuttama  opavayha  =:^  raja-vahana  C);  DA  1. 147  (arohana- 
yogga  opavuyha,  v.l.  °guyha);  VvA  316  (T.  opaguyha  to 
be  corrected  to  °vayha). 

0pa8aniika(adj.)  [fr.  upa  -J-  sama  -|-  ika;  cp.  BSk.  aupasamika 
Av.  S  H.107;  M  Vastu  11.41]  leading  to  quiet,  allaying, 
quieting;  Ep.  of  Dhamma  D  111.264  sq.;  A  11.132. 

Opasayika  (adj.)  [fr.  upasaya,  upa  +  ii\  being  near  at  hand 
or  at  one's  bidding  (?)  M  I.328. 

0|ntCti  [ava  +  Caus.  of  paf,  Sk.  avapatayati]  to  tear  as 
under,  unravel,  open  Vin  U.150  (chaviq  opatetva). 


Opata 

Opata  [o  +  pSta  ('■  patati  10  fall.  Vedic  avapata]  —  i. 
falling  or  flying  down,  downfall,  descent  J  v;  561.  —  2.  a 
pitfall  J  1.143;  I">A.  IV.211. 

Opateti  [o  +  Cans,  of  pat]  to  make  fall,  to  destroy  (cp. 
atipfiteti),  i.e.  I.  to  break,  to  interrupt,  in  kathaq  opateti 
to  interrupt  a  conversation  M  u.io,  I2i,  168;  A  UI.137, 
392  sq.;  Sn  p.  107.  —  2.  to  drop,  to  omit  (a  syllable) 
Vin  IV.  1 5. 

Opana  (nt.)  [o  4-  pSna  fr.  pivati.  Vedic  avapana.  The'  P. 
Commentators  however  take  o  as  a  contracted  form  of 
udaka,  e.  g.  Bdhgh.  at  DA  1.298  =  udapana].  Only  in 
phrase  opana-bhuta  (adj.)  a  man  who  has  become  a 
welling  spring  as  it  were,  for  the  satisfaction  of  all  men's 
wants;  explti-  as  "khala-pokkharani  viya  hutva"  DA  I. 
298  =  J  V.174.  —  Vin  1.236;  D  i.137;  M  1.379;  A  IV. 
185;  Vv  65<;  Pv  IV.16O;  J  111.142;  IV.34;  V.172;  Vbh 
247;  Miln  411;  Vism   18;  VvA  286;  DA  I  177,  298. 

Oparambha  (adj.)  [fr.  uparambha]  acting  as  a  support, 
supporting,  helpful  M  11.113. 

Oplya  is  metric  for  upiya  [upa  -f  ger.  of  i]  undergoing, 
going  into  S  1.199  =  Th  i,  119  (nibbanaq  hadayasmiq 
opiya;  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  trsls-  "suffering  N.  in  thy  heart  to 
sink",  S  A.  hadayasmiq  pakkhipitva. 

Opllavatl  [Sk.  avaplavati,  ava  +  plu]  to  be  immersed,  to 
sink  down  S  11.224.  —  Caus.  optlapeti  (see  sep.). 

Opilaplta  [pp.  of  opilapeli]  immersed  into  (loc),  gutted 
with  water,  drenched  J  1.212,  214. 

Opllapeti  [Caus.  of  opilavati,  cp.  Sk.  avaplavayati]  to  im- 
merse, to  dip  in  or  down,  to  drop  (into  =  loc.)  Vin  I. 
157  =  225  =  S  1. 169  (C:  nimujjapeti,  see  /C.  S.  318); 
M  1.207  =  111.157;  UhA  111.3  ("apetva;  so  read  with 
vv.  11.  for  oplletva);  J  111.282.  —  pp.  opilaplta. 

Opi|etl  in  "bhattar)  pacchiyaij  opiletva"  at  DhA  II. 3  is  wiih 
V.  1.  to  be  read  opilapetva  (gloss  odahitva),  i.e.  dropping 
the  food  into  the  basket. 

Opunchati  is  uncertain  reading  for  opunjeti. 

Opufichana  or  Opaiijana  (nt.)  [fr.  opunjeti]  heaping  up, 
covering  over;  a  heap,  layer  DhA  111.296. 

Opunjeti  or  °atl  [0  -f-  puiijeti  Denom.  of  punja,  heap]  to 
heap  up,  make  a  heap,  cover  over  with  (Morris,  JPTS. 
1887,  153  trslS'  "cleanse")  Vin  11.176  (opunjati  bhattaq); 
J  IV.377  (opuSchetva  T.,  but  v.  1.  opunjelva;  gloss  upa- 
limpitva);  DhA  111.296  (opunchilva,  gloss  sammajjitvS). — 
Caus.  opunjapeti  in  same  meaning  "to  smear"  Vin  111.16 
(opunjapelva;  v.  1.   opunchapetva). 

Opunati  also  as  opunati  (Dh)  [o  -)-  punati  fr.  pu]  to  win- 
now, sift;  fig.  lay  bare,  expose  Dh  252  (=  bhusai) 
opunanto  viya  DhA  111.375);  SnA  312.  —  Caus.  opuna- 
peti  [cp.  BSk.  opunapeti  M  Vastu  111.178]  to  cause  to 
sift  A  1.242;  J   1.447. 

Opuppha  [o  -f  puppha]  bud,  young  flower  J  Vl.497  (vv.  11. 
p.  498  opanna  &  opatta). 

Opeti  [unless  we  here  deal  with  a  very  old  misspelling  for 
oseti  we  have  to  consider  it  a  secondary  derivation  from 
opiya  in  Caus.  sense,  i  e.  Caus.  fr.  upa  +  i.  Trenckner, 
Notes  77,  78  offers  an  elym.  of  a  -f-  vapati,  thus  opiya 
would  be  'avupiya,  a  risky  conclusion,  which  besides  being 
discrepant  in  meaning  (avapati  =  to  distribute)  necessitates 
der.  of  opiya  fr.  opati  (•avapati)  instead  of  vice  versa. 
There  is  no  other  instance  of  'ava  being  contracted  to  o. 
Trenckner  then  puts  opiya  =  upiya  in  tadupiya  ("con- 
form with  this",  see  ta°  I»),  which  is  however  a  direct 
derivation  from  upa  =:  upaka,  upiya,  of  which  a  superl. 
formation    is   upamS   ("likeness").    Trenckner's   expi".   of 


169  Oma 


upiya  as  der.  fr.  a  -|-  Vap  does  not  fit  in  with  its  meaning] 
to  make  go  into  (c.  loc),  to  deposit,  receive  (syn.  wiih 
osapeti)  S  1.236  (SA  na  . .  pakkhipanti)  =  Th  2,  283  = 
J  V.252  (T.  upeti);  in  which  Th  2,  283  has  oseti  (ThA 
216,  with  expln-  of  oseti  =:  thapeti  on  p.  219).  —  aor. 
opi  J  IV. 457  (ukkhipi  gloss);  VI. 185  (=  pakkhipi  gloss).  — 
ger.  opitva  (opetvS?)  J  IV.4S7  (gloss  khipetva). 

Ophuta  [a  difficult,  but  legitimate  form  arisen  out  of  analogy, 
fusing  ava-vuta  (=  Sk.  vrta  from  Vf;  opp.  *apavuta  = 
P.  aparuta)  and  ava-phuta  (Sk.  sphuta  from  sphut)-  We 
should  probably  read  ovuta  in  all  instances]  coverid,  ob- 
structed; always  in  comb"  avuta  nivuta  opbuta  fopula, 
ovuta)  D  1.246  (T.  ophuta,  vv.  II.  ophuta  &  oputa);  M 
111.131  (T.  ovuta);  Nd'  24  ovuta,  v.  1.  SS  ophuta);  Nd^ 
365  (ophuta,  V.  1.  BB  opula;  SS  ovuta);  D.\  1.59  (o  luta); 
Sn.\   596  (oputa  =  pariyo-n.iddha);  Miln    161  (ovut.  ). 

Obandhati  [o  -fbandhati]   to  bind,  to  lie  on  to  Vin  1  .116 

(obandhitva  ger.). 

Obhagga  [o  -f-  bhagga,  pp.  of  bhafij,  Sk.  avabhaj^na] 
broken  down,  broken  up,  broken  S  V  96  ("vibhagga);  A 
•V.435  (obhagg'obhagga) ;  DhA  1.58  (id.);  J  1.55  ("sarira). 

Obhafijatl  [o  +  bhanj]  to  fold  up,  bend  over,  crease  (a 
garment);  only  Caus.  II.  obbanjapeti  J  1.499  (dhova- 
peti  -|-).  See  also  pp.  obhagga, 

Obhata  [pp.  of  obharati]  having  taken  away  or  off,  only 
in  cpd.  "cumbata  with  the  "cumbata"  taken  off,  des- 
criptive of  a  woman  in  her  habit  of  carrying  vessels  on 
her  head  (on  the  cumbata  stand)  Vin  111.140  =  VvA  73 
(Hardy:  "a  woman  with  a  circlet  of  cloth  on  her  head"?). 

Obharati  [ava  -|-  bharati,  cp.  Sk.  avabharati  =  Lat.  aufero] 
to  carry  away  or  off,  to  lake  off.  —  pp.  Obhata. 

Obhasa  [from  obhasati]  shine,  splendour,  light,  lustre,  efful- 
gence ;  appearance.  In  clairvoyant  language  also  "aura" 
(see  Cfii.  214'  with  C.  expl"  "rays  emitted  from  the 
body  on  account  of  insight")  —  D  1.220  (effulgence 
of  light);  M  III. 120,  157;  A  11  130,  139;  IV.302;  It  108 
(obhasakara);  Ps  1. 11^,  119  (pani"ia°);  n.ioo,  150  sq., 
159,  162;  Vism  28,  41;  PvA  276  (i)  pharati  to  emit  a 
radiance);  Sdhp  325.  With  nimitta  and  parikatba  at 
Vism  23;  SnA  497.  See  also  avabhasa. 

Obhasati'  [o  +  bhasati  from  bhSS,  ep.  Sk.  avabhasali]  to 
shine,  to  be  splendid  Pv  1.2'  (=  pabhSseti  vijjoteti  PvA 
10).  —  Caus.  obhaseti  to  make  radiant  or  resplendent, 
to  illumine,  to  fill  with  light  or  splendour.  —  pres.  Ob- 
haseti Pv  ni.li'  (=  joteti  PvA  176);  Miln  336;  ppr. 
obbasayanto  Pv  i.ii'  (=  vijjotamana  PvA  56)  &  obba- 
sento  Pv  III  "  (=r  jotanto  ekalokai}  karonto  PvA  71); 
ger.  obhasetva  S  1.66;  Kh  v.  =  Sn  p.  46;  KhA  116  (= 
abhaya    pharitva   ekobhasai)  karitva).  —  pp.  avabhaslta. 

Obhasati-  [ava  +  bhSsati  fr.  bha$;  Sk.  apabhasati]  to 
speak  to  (inopportunely),  to  rail  at,  offend,  abuse  Vin 
11.262;    III  128. 

Obhasana  (m.-adj.)  [fr.  obhasa,  cp.  Sk.  avabhasana]  shining 
VvA  276  (Hardy:  "speaking  to  someone"). 

Obhoga  [o  -)-  bhoga  from  bhuj  to  bend]  bending,  winding, 
curve,  the  fold  of  a  robe  Vin  1.46  (obhogc  kayabandhanai) 
katabbaq). 

Oma  (adj.)  [Vedic  avama,  superl.  formation  fr.  ava]  lower 
(in  position  &  rank),  inferior,  low;  pi.  oma  A  iu.359  (in 
contrast  with  ussa  superiors);  Sn  860  (ussa  sama  oma 
superiors,  equals,  inferiors),  954;  SnA  347  (=  paritta 
lamaka).  —  More  freq.  in  neg.  form  anoma  not  inferior, 
i.  e.  excellent. 


Omaka 


170 


Olanghana 


Omaka  (adj-)  [oma -j- ka]  lower  in  rank,  inferior;  low,  in- 
sigoificant  Nd'   306  (appaka +);  J  11.142;  DhA  1. 203. 

Omattha  [pp.  of  omasati]  touched  S  1.13  =  53  =:  Th  i,  39. 

Omaddatl  [o  +  maddati  from  mfd,  BSk.  avamardati  Jtm 
31:1:1]  —  i_  to  rub  J  VI. 262  (sariraq  omaddanto);  Miln 
220.  —  2.  to  crush,  oppress  M  I  87  =  Nd-  199"  (abhi- 
vaggena);  J  11.95. 

Omasati  [o  -j-  mas  z=  Sk.  mr§]  —  l.  (lit.)  to  touch  J  V. 
446.  —  2.  (fig.)  to  touch  a  person,  to  reproach,  insult 
Vin  IV.4  sq.  — -  pp.  omattha. 

Omasana  (f)  [fr.  omasati]  touching,  touch  Vin  III. 121  (=: 
hettha  oropana). 

Omana'  [fr.  o  -j-  man,  think.  The  Sk.  avamSna  is  later] 
disregard,  disrespect,  contempt  DhA  11.52  (-f-  atimSna). 
Cp.  foil.  &  see  also  avamana. 

Omana'  [at  J  u.443  we  read  ucce  sakuna  omana  meaning 
'Oh  bird,  flying  high'.  With  the  present  material  we  see 
no  satisfactory  solution  of  this  puLzle.  There  is  a  Burmese 
correction  which  is  at  variance  with  the  commentary] 
"flying",  the  v.  1.  Bl!  is  demana  (fr.  di).  C.  explns.  by 
caiamana  gacchamana.  Miiller,  /'.  Gr.  gg  proposes  to 
read  demana  for  omana. 

OmiSSaka  (adj.)  [o -|- missaka]  mixed,  miscellaneous,  various 
J   V.37;  VI. 224  (°parisa).  Cp.   vo°. 

Omukka  (adj.)  [fr. -j-muc]  cast  off,  second  hand  Vin  1. 187. 

OmuncatI  [o  +  mUC]  to  take  off,  loosen,  release;  unfasten, 
undo,  doff  D  1. 1 26  (vethanai]  as  form  of  salute);  J  11.326; 
VI. 73  (satakaij);  Vism  338;  PvA  63  (tacaq);  VvA  75 
(abharanani).  —  Cans,  omuncapeti  to  cause  to  take  off' 
Vin  1.273.  —  pp.  omutta. 

Omutta  [pp.  of  omuiicati]  released,  freed,  discharged,  taken 
off  It  56  (read  omutt'assa  Marapaso  for  T.  omukkassa  m.). 

Omutteti  [Sk.  avamntrayati,  Denom.  fr.  mutra,  urine]  to 
discharge  urine,  pass  water  M   1.79,  127. 

Oyacati  [o  +  yac,  opp.  ayacati]  to  wish  ill,  lo  curse, 
imprecate   Vin  IH.137. 

Ora  (adj.)  [compar.  formation  fr.  ava;  Vedic  avaia]  below, 
inferior,  posterior.  Usually  as  nt.  oral)  the  below,  the 
near  side,  this  world  Sn  15;  VvA  42  (orato  abl.  from  I 
this  side).  —  Coses  adverbially:  ace.  orai]  (with  abl.) 
on  this  side  of,  below,  under,  within  M  111.142;  Sn  804 
(orarj  vassasats);  Pv  IV. 3^'  (orar)  chahi  masehi  in  less 
than  6  months  or  after  6  months;  id.  p.  at  Pv  1. 10" 
has  uddhari);  PvA  154  (dahato);  inslr.  orena  J.  v. 72; 
abl.  orato  on  this  side  Miln  210. 

-para  the  below  and  the  above,  the  lower  &  higher 
worlds  Sn  i  (see  SnA  13  ^=  Nd'^  42  2l>  and  cp.  paropa- 
rai));  Miln  319  (samuddo  anoraparo,  boundless  ocean). 
-pure  (avarapure)  below  the  fortress  M  1.68  (bahinagare  -|-). 
-mattaka  belonging  only  to  this  world,  mundane;  hence: 
trifling,  insignificant,  little,  evanescent  \'in  11.85,  203  = 
It  85;  D  13;  M  1.449:  A  IV.22  ;  V.  157,  164;  Vbh  247; 
Nett  62;  DhA  1203;  L)A  1.55. 

Oraka  (adj.)  [ora  +  l^a]  inferior,  posterior  Vin  1. 19;  11. 
159;  M  11.47;  Sn  692  (=:  paritta  SnA  489;  cp.  omaka); 
J   1.381. 

Orata  [o  +  rata,  pp.  of  ramati]  —  i.  delighted,  satisfied, 
pleased  Miln  2 to  (cp.  abhirata).  —  2.  desisting,  abstaining 
from,  restraining  oneself  VvA  72  (=:virato;  cp.  uparata). 

Orabbhika  [fr.  urabbha.  The  Sk.  aurabhrika  is  later  & 
differs  in  meaning  one  who  kills  sheep,  a  butcher  (of 
sheep)  M  1343,  412;  S  11.256;  A  1.251;  11.207  =  Png 
56;    111.303;    Th    2,   242  (:=  urabbhaghataka  ThA  204); 


J   V.270  VI.III   (and  their  punishment  in  Niraya);  Pug  A 
244  (urabbha  vuccanti  elaka;  urabbhe  hanati  ti  orabbhiko). 

Oramatl  [Denom.  fr.  ora  instead  of  orameti]  to  stay  or 
be  on  this  side,  i.  e.  to  stand  still,  to  get  no  further  J 
1.492  (oramitur)  na  icchi),  498  (oramSma  na  parema). 
Note.  This  form  may  also  be  expld-  &  taken  as  imper. 
of  ava  -j-  ramati  (cp.  avarata  2),  i  e.  let  us  desist,  let  us 
give  up,  (i.e.  we  shall  not  get  through  to  the  other  side). 
-anoramati  (neg.)  see  sep.  —  On  the  whole  question 
see  also  Morris,  j  P  TS.   1887,   154  sq. 

Oramapeti  (Caus.  II.  of  oramati]  to  make  someone  desist 
from  J   V.474  (manussa-maqsa). 

Orambtiagiya  (adj.)  [ora -|- bhaga -f- iya ;  BSk.  avarabha- 
giya,  e.  g.  Divy  533]  being  a  shore  of  the  lower,  i  e. 
this  world,  belonging  to  the  kama  world,  Ep.  of  the  5 
saijyojanani  (see  also  saijyojana)  D  1.156;  111.107,  'O^i 
132;  M  1.432;  It  114;  Pug  22;  Nett  14;  SnA  13;  DA 
1.3 1 3.  —  Note.  A  curious  form  of  this  word  is  found  at 
Th  2,  166  orambhaga-maniya,  with  gloss  (ThA  158)  oraij 
agamaniya.  Probably  the  bh  should   be  deleted. 

Oravitar  [ora-|-n.  ag.  of  vilarati.']  doubtful  reading  at  A 
V.149,  meaning  concerned  with  worldly  things  (?).  The 
vv.  11.  are  oramita,  oravika,  oramato,  oravi. 

Orasa  (adj.)  [Fr.  ura,  uras  breast  Vedic  aurasa]  belonging 
to  one's  own  breast,  se)f-begotten,  legitimate;  innate, 
natural,  own  M  11.84;  111.29;  S  11.221  (Bhagavato  putto 
o.  mukhato  jato);  ill. 83  ;  J  111.272;  Vv  50";  ThA  236; 
KhA  248;  PvA  62  (urejata+). 

Orima  [superl.  formation  fr.  ora,  equivalent  to  avama]  the 
lower  or  lowest,  the  one  on  this  side,  this  (opp.  yonder); 
only  in  comb"-  orima-tira  the  shore  on  this  side,  the 
near  shore  (opp.  p5ra°  and  parima'^  the  far  side)  D  1.244; 
S  IV.175  (sakkayass'  adhivacanaij)  =  SnA  24;  Dhs  597; 
Vism   512  (°tIra-mah^oghi);    DhA  11.99. 

Oruddha  [fr.  orundhati.  In  meaning  equalling  Sk.  aparuddha 
as  well  as  ava"]  —  I.  kept  back,  restrained,  subdued  A 
111.393.  —  2.  imprisoned  J   IV.4.  See  also  ava°. 

Orundhati  [cp.  Sk.  avarundhate]  to  get,  attain,  lake  for  a 
wife.  —  ger.  orundhiya  J  iv.480.  —  aor.  oruddha  Th 
2,  445.  —  pp.  oruddha.  See  also  avarundhati. 

Orodha  [fr.  orundhati;  Sk.  avarodha]  obstruction;  con- 
finement, harem,  seraglio  Vin  ii.290;  IV. 261  (raj^  orodha 
harem-lady,  concubine);  J  I  v. 393,  404. 

Oropai^a  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  oropeti]  taking  down,  removal, 
cutting  off  (hair),  in  kes'  oropana  hair-cutting  DhA  11. 
53  (T.  has  at  one  place  oroharia,  v.  1.  oropana). 

Oropeti  [Cans.  fr.  orohati;  BSk.  avaropayati]  to  take  down, 
bring  down,  deprive  of,  lay  aside,  take  away,  cut  off 
(hair)  VvA  64  (bhattabhajanarj  oropeti)  —  ger.  oropay- 
itva  Sn  44  (=  nikkhipitva  patippassambhayitva  Nd'^  181; 
apanetva  SnA  91);  J   VI.211   (kesamassuij). 

Orohana  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  orahati]  descent,  in  udak'orohani- 
nuyoga  practice  of  descending  in  to  the  water  (i.  s.  bathing) 
P"g  55;  J  '.193;  Miln  350. 

Orohati  [o -|- rohati]  to  descend,  climb  down  D  11.21;  M 
UI.131;  J  1.50;  Miln  395;  PvA  14.  —  Caus.  oropeti (q.  v.). 

Otaggeti  [Caus.  of  o  -f  lag]  to  make  stick  to,  to  put  on, 
hold  fast,  restrain  M  11  178;  A  III. 384  (vv.  11.  oloketi, 
olabheti,  oketi);  Th   I,  355. 

Olagga  [Sk.  avalagna,  pp.  of  avalagati]  restrained,  checked 
Th    I,   356. 

Olanghana  (f )  [fr.  Olangheti]  bending  down  Vin  III. 121 
(:=  hettha  onamana). 


I 


Olangheti 


171 


Ovada 


Olangheti  [Caus.  cf  ava  -f-  langh]  to  make  jump  down, 
in  phrase  uUangbeti  olangheti  to  make  dance  up  & 
down  J  v.434  =  DhA  iv.197  (the  latter  has  T.  uUaggheti 
ol°;  but  V.  1.  ullangheti  ol°). 

Olamba  (adj.)  [fr.  ava -f  lamb]  hanging  down  Vin  111.49; 
J  IV.380  (°vilamba). 

Otambaka  (adj.-n.)  [see  Olambatl]  —  l.  (adj.)  hanging 
down  VvA  32  (°dama).  —  2.  (11.)  (a)  support,  walking 
slick  J   IV.40  (hatth").  —  (b)  plumb-line  J  vi.392. 

Olambatl  &  avalambati  [ava  -{-  lamb]  to  hang  down, 
hang  on,  to  be  supported  by,  rest  on.  The  form  in  o  is 
the  older.  Pres.  avalambare  Pv  II. I '8  (=  olambamana 
littbanti  PvA  77);  11. 10'^  (=:  olambanti  PvA  142);  olamb- 
atl M  111.164  (-f- ajjholambati);  J  1. 194;  PvA  46.  —  ger. 
avalamba  (for  °bya)  Pv  111.3'  C=  olambitva  PvA  189) 
&  olambetva  J  111.218.  See  also  olubbha. 

Olambanaka  [fr.  olambatl]  an  armchair,  lit.  a  chair  with 
supports  Vin  II. 142. 

Olikhati  [o  +  Hkh,  cp.  Sk.  apalikhati]  to  scr.-ipe  off,  cut 
off,  shave  off  (hair)  A  111.295  (veniq  olikhituq);  Th  1, 
169  (kese  olikhissai));   2,  88. 

Oligalla  [of  unknown  etym. :  prob.  Non- Aryan,  cp.  BSk; 
odigalla  Saddh.  P.  chap.  VI. ]  a  dirty  pool  near  a  village  M 
III. 168;  S  V.361;  A  1. 161;  III. 389;  Miln  220;  Vism  343. 

Oliyati  [o-|-liyate  from  H]  to  stick,  stick  fast,  adhere,  cling 
to  It  43;  Nett   174.  —  pp    ollna  (see  avalina). 

Olina  [pp.  of  oliyate]  adhering,  sticking  or  clinging  lo 
(worldliness),  infatuated  M  1.200  ("vuttika);  J  VI.569 
(anollna-manasa);  Vbh   350  (°vuttika);  Miln  393  (an°). 

Oliyana  [fr.  oliyati]  adhering,  infatuation  Ps  1.157;  Dhs 
1156,   1236. 

OlUgga  [pp.  of  olujjati]  breaking  off,  falling  to  pieces, 
rotting  away  M  1.80,  245  (olugga-vilugga),  450  (id.); 
Vism  107  (id.). 

Olujjati  [Sk.  avarujyate,  Pass,  of  ava  +  mj]  to  break  off, 
go  to  wreck,  fall  away  S  11. 218  (v.  1.  ull°).  —  pp.  olugga. 

Olubbha  [assimil.  form  of  olumbha  which  in  all  likelihood 
for  olambya,  ger.  of  olambati.  The  form  presents  difficul- 
ties. See  also  Morris,  J F  TS.  1887,  156]  holding  on  to, 
leaning  on,  supporting  oneself  by  (with  ace);  most  fre- 
quently in  phrase  dandai)  olubbha  leaning  on  a  stick, 
e.g.  M  1. 108  (=  dandar)  olambitva  C;  see  M  1539);  A 
111.298;  Th  2,  27  (=  alambitva);  VvA  105.  In  other 
connections:  S  1,118;  III. 129;  J  1,265  (avata-mukha-vatti- 
yaij);  vi.40  (hatthe);  DhA  n.57  (passar);  gloss  olambi); 
VvA   217,  219. 

Olumpeti  [o  +  Caus.  of  lup]  to  strip  off,  seize,  pick,  pluck 
Vin  1.278  (bhesajjan  olumpetva,  vv.ll.  ulumpetva,  oIump°, 
odamelva). 

Olokana  (nt.)  [see  oloketi]  looking,  looking  at,  sight  Sdhp 
479  (mukhass"). 

Olokanaka  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  oloketi]  window  Vin  II. 267  (olo- 
kanakena  olokenti,  adv.), 

Oloketi  [BSk.  avalokayati  or  apalokeli]  to  look  at,  to  look 
down  or  over  lo,  to  examine,  contemplate,  inspect,  con- 
sider J  1.85,  108  (nakkhattaij);  Pv  11  g"*;  DhA  1,10,  12, 
25,  26;  11.96  (v.  1.  for  T.  voloketi);  111.296;  PvA  4,  5, 
74,  J24- 

0|ara  at  PvA  110  is  with  v.  1.  BB  to  be  read  u)ara. 

Ojaiika  (adj.)  [fr.  ulSra]  gross,  coarse,  material,  ample  (see 
on  term  Dhs  Irsl.  208  &  Cpd.    159  n.  4)  1)  1. 37,  186  sq. 


(atta)  195,  197,  199;  M  1.48,  139,  247;  lt.230;  UI.I6, 
299;  S  11.275  (vihara);  111.47  (opp-  sukhuma);  IV. 382 
(id.);  V.259  sq.;  A  IV.309  sq.  (nimittai]  obhaso);  J  1.67; 
Dhs  585,  675,  889;  Vbh  I,  13,  379;  Vism  155  (°anga), 
274  sq.  (with  ref.  to  breathing),  450. 

Ojumpika  (adj.)  [Deriv.  unknown,  BSk.  olumpika  and  odum- 
pika  M  Vastu  111.113,  443.  In  the  Svel-Upan.  we  find  the 
form  udupa  a  skiff.]  Sen.  Kacc  390  belonging  to  a  skiff 
(no  ref.  in  Pali  Canon?);  cp.  BSk.  olumpika  M  Vastu  III. 
113  &  odumpika  ibid.  443. 

Ovaja  at  S  1.212  read  ojava. 

Ovafa  [o  -|-  vata,  pp.  of  Vf,  another  form  of  ovuta  =: 
ophuta,  q.  v.]  obstructed,  prevented  Vin  11.255  ^  IV.52  = 
A  IV.277  (v,  1.  ovada);  also  an°  ibid. 

Ovattlka  (m.)  [fr.  ava-fvft]  —  I.  girdle,  waistband  M 
11.47;  J  III. 285  (v.  1.  ovaddhi");  Vism  312;  DhA  11.37; 
IV.206;  DA  1.21S  (Morris,  J P  T S.  1887,  156:  a  kind 
of  bag).  • —  2.  a 'bracelet  Vin  II.  106  (=  valayar]  C).  — 
3.  a  patch,  patching  (°karana),  darning  (?)  Vin  1.254  (''*'• 
11.  ovattiya",  ovadhila"  ovadhiya°);  J  11.197  (v.l.  ovaddhi°). 
See  also  ovaddheyya  (ava°). 

Ovadati  [o  -|-  vadati.  The  Sk.  avavadati  is  .some  centuries 
later  and  is  diff.  in  meaning]  to  give  advice,  to  admonish, 
exhort,  instruct,  usually  combJ-  with  anusasati.  —  pres. 
ovadati  Vin  iv.52  sq.;  DhA  l.ll,  13;  imper.  ovadatu 
M  111.267.  —  P°t.  avadeyya  Vin  iv.52  (=:  atthahi  ga- 
rudhammehi  ovadati);  Sn  105 1  (:=  anusaseyya).  —  aor. 
ovadi  DhA  1.397.  —  inf.  ovaditur)  Vin  1.59  (-|~  anusasi- 
tuq).  —  grd.  ovaditabba  Vin  11. 5;  and  ovadiya  (see 
Sep.).  —  Pass,  avadiyati;  ppr.  °iyamana  Pug  64  (-f- 
anusasiyamana). 

Ovadiya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  ovadati]  who  or  what  can  be  ad- 
vised, advisable  Vin  1,59  (-}-  anusasiya);  Vv  84^"  (= 
ovada-vasena  vattabbaq  VvA  345). 

Ovaddheyya  a  process  to  be  carried  out  with  the  kathina 
robes.  The  meaning  is  obscure  Vin  1254.  See  the  note 
at  Vin.  Texts  11.154;  Vin  1.254  is  not  clear  (see  cxpl". 
by  C.  on  p.  388).  The  vv.  II.  are  ovadeyya"  ovadheyya" 
ovattheyya°. 

Ovamati  [o  -f-  vam]  to  throw  up,  vomit  Ud  78. 

Ovaraka  (m.)  [Deriv.  uncertain.  The  Sk.  apavaraka  is  some 
centuries  later.  'The  Sk.  apavaraka  forbidden  or  secret 
room,  Halayudha  "lying-in  chamber"]  an  inner  room  Vin 
1. 21 7;  M  1.253;  J  '■39'  (J5'o  varake  T.  to  be  read  as 
jat'ovarake  i.e.  the  inner  chamber  where  he  was  born,  thus 
also  at  VvA    158);  Vism  90,  431  ;  VvA  304  (=  gabbha). 

Ovariyana  [g^f.  of  o  4-  Vf]  forbidding,  obstructing,  holding 
back,  preventing  Th  2,  367  (v.  1.  ovadiyana,  thus  also 
ThA  250  explained  "mat)  gacchantii)  avaditva  gamanai] 
nisedhetva". 

Ovassa  &  °ka  see  anovassa(ka). 

OvaSSati  [o  +  vassati]  to  rain  down  on,  to  make  wet.  — 
Pass,  ovassati  to  become  wet  through  rain  Vin  11. 121. 

Ovahati  [o  -|-  vahati]  to  carry  down.  —  Pass,  ovuyhati  It 
114  (ind.  &  pot.  ovuyheyya). 

Ovada  [BSk.  avavada  in  same  sense  as  P.]  advice,  instruc- 
tion, admonition,  exhortation  Vin  1.50  =  11.228;  11.255  = 
IV.52;  D  I.137  ("pajikara,  function  of  a  king);  J  111.256 
(anovadakara  one  who  cannot  be  helped  by  advice,  cp. 
ovadaka);  Nett  91,  92;  DhA  1.13,  398  (dasavidha  o,); 
VvA  345.  —  ovadaq  deti  to  give  advice  PvA  11,  12,  15, 
89,  100  etc.;  ovadar)  ga^hati  to  take  or  accept  advice 
J  l->59- 


Ovadaka 


172 


Ossavana 


Ovadaka  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  ovada;  cp.  BSk.  avavadaka  in  same 
meaning,  e.  g.  Divy  48,  254,  385]  admonishing  (act.)  or 
being  admonished  (pass.);  giving  or  taking  advice;  a  spi- 
ritual instructor  or  adviser  M  1.145;  A  1.25;  S  v.67  = 
It  107.  —  anovadaka  one  who  cannot  or  does  not  want 
to  be  advised,  incorrigible  J  1. 159;  111.256,  304;  v. 314. 

Ovadln  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  ovada]  =  ovadaka  M  1.360  (anovadin). 

Ovijjhati  [ava  -f  vyadh]  to  pierce  through  Vism  304. 

Ovuta  see  ophuta. 

Ovuyhati  [Pass,  of  ovahati]  to  be  carried  down  (a  river) 
It   114. 

Osakkati  [o  +  sakkati  fr.   P.  sakk  =  *Sk.  $va$k,  cp. 

Magadhi  osakkai ;  but  sometimes  confused  with  sfp,  cp. 
P.  osappati  &  Sk.  apasarpati]  to  draw  back,  move  back 
D  1.230;  J  IV.348  (for  apavattati  C);  v.295  (an-osakkitva). 
See  also  Trenckner,  Notes  p.  60. 

Osajjati  [o  +  Sfj]  to  emit,  evacuate  PvA  268  (vaccaq 
excrement,  -)-  ohanati).  —  pp.  osattha. 

Osata  [pp.  of  o  +  Sf]  having  withdrawn  to  (ace),  gone 
to  or  into,  undergone,  visited  M  1. 1 76,  469  (padasamacaro 
sangha-majjhe  o.);  111.2  (Rajagahar)  vass^avasai)  o.);  Miln 
24  (sakaccha  osata  bahu).  See  also  avasata. 

Osa^hetl  [o  +  sanheti,  denom.  fr.  sanha]  to  make  smooth, 
to  smooth  out,  comb  or  brush  down  (hair)  Vin  II.  107 
(kese);  J   IV.219  (id.). 

Osadha  (nt.)  [Vedic  ausadha]  see  osadhl. 

Osadhika  v.  1.  it  20  for  opadhika. 

Osadhika  (f.)  [fr.  osadha]  remedy,  esp.  poultice,  foment- 
ation J   IV.361. 

Osadhi  (f.)  [Vedic  avasa  -f  dhi;  bearer  of  balm,  comfort, 
refreshment].  There  is  no  difference  in  meaning  between 
osadha  and  osadhi ;  both  mean  equally  any  medicine, 
whether  of  herbs  or  other  ingredients.  Cp.  e.g.  A  iv.ioo 
(bijagama-bhutagama  . .  osadhi-tinavanappatayo)  Pv  11.6'", 
with  Sn  296  (gavo  .  . .  yasa  jayanti  osadha);  D  1.12,  cp. 
DA  1.98;  Pv  111.53;  PvA  86;  J  iv.31;  vi.331  (?  trsln- 
medicinal  herb).  Figuratively,  'balm  of  salvation'  (amato- 
sadha)  Miln  247.  Osadhi-taraka,  star  of  healing.  The  only 
thing  we  know  about  this  star  is  its  white  brilliance,  S 
1.65;  It  20  =  A  V.62;  Vv  92;  Pv  il.l'O;  ep.  PvA  71; 
Vism  412.  Childers  calls  it  Venus,  but  gives  no  evidence; 
other  translators  render  it  'morning  star'.  According  to 
Hindu  mythology  the  lord  of  medicine  is  the  moon  (osa- 
dhlsa),  not  any  particular  str.r. 

Osanna  (adj.)  [o  +  pp.  of  syad  to  move  on]  given  out, 
exhausted,   weak  Miln  250  ("viriya). 

Osappati  [o  +  Sfp  to  creep]  to  draw  back,  give  way  J 
VI. 190  (osappissati;  gloss  apiyati). 

Osaraka  (adj.)  [fr.  osarati,  osarana  &  osataj  of  the  nature 
of  a  resort,  fit  for  resorting  to,  over-hanging  eaves,  af- 
fording shelter  Vin  11.153.  See  also  osaraka. 

Osaraoa  (nt.)  [fr.  avasarati]  —  1.  return  to,  going  into 
(ace.)  visiting  J  1. 1 54  (gamantaij  °kale).  —  2.  withdrawal, 
distraction,  drawing  or  moving  away,  heresy  Sn  538  (= 
ogahanani  titthSni,  ditthiyo  ti  attho  SnA  434). 

Osarati  [0  ■\-  Sf,  blow  to  go  away  to  recede  to,  to  visit 
M  1. 176  (gamaq  etc.);  XI. 122.  —  pp.  osata.  See  also 
avasarati. 

Osana  (nt.)  [fr.  osiipeti]  stopping,  ceasing;  end,  finish,  con- 
clusion S  V.79  (read  patikkamosana),  177,  344;  Sn  938 
(see  Nd'  412):  osana-gatha  the  concluding  stanza  J  IV. 
373;  PvA  15,  30  etc.  See  also  avasana  &  pariy". 


Osapetl  [With  Morris,  JPTS.  1887,  158  Caus.  of  ava -f 
sa,  Sk.  avasayayati  (cp.  P.  avaseti,  oseti),  but  by  MSS. 
&  Pali  grammarians  taken  as  Caus.  of  Sf:  sarapeti  con- 
tracted fo  sapeti,  thus  ultimately  the  same  as  Sk.  sara- 
yati  =  P.  sareti  (thus  vv.  II.).  Not  with  Trenckner,  Notes 
78  and  Miiller  P.  Gr.  42.  Caus.  of  a  -|-  vl4  to  sling]  to 
put  forth,  bring  to  an  end,  settle,  put  down,  fix,  decide 
S  1. 81  (fut.  osapayissami ;  vv.  11.  oyayiss"  and  obhayiss"  ^ 
Ud  66  (T.  otarissami?  vv.  11.  obh£yiss°,  otay°  &  osay°; 
C.  patipajjissami  karissami);  J  1.25  (osapeti,  v.  I.  obha- 
seti);  Nd'  412  (in  expl"-  of  os.ina);  VvA  77  (agghaq  o. 
to  fix  a  price;  vv.  11.  ohapeti  &  onarapeti)  =  DhA  III.  108 
(v.  1.  osareti).  Cp.  osareti. 

Osaraka  [fr.  osarati]  shelter,  outhouse  J  III. 446.  See  also 
osaraka. 

Osarana  (f.)  [fr.  osareti  3]  —  I.  restoration,  rehabilitation 
reinstatement  (of  a  bhikkhu  after  exclusion  from  the 
Sangha)  Vin  1.322;  Miln  344.  —  2.  procession  (?)  (per- 
haps reading  should  be  ussarana)  DhA   II. i   (T.  oss°). 

Osarita  [pp.  of  osareti  3]  restored,  rehabilitated  Vin  IV. 1 38. 

Osareti  [Caus.  of  o +sf  to  flow]  —  I.  (with  v.  1.  osapeti, 
reading  osareti  is  uncertain)  to  stow  away,  deposit,  put 
in,  put  away  (see  also  opeti)  J  VI.52,  67  (pattaq  Ihavi- 
kaya  o).  —  2.  to  bring  out,  expound,  propound,  explain 
Miln  13  (abhidhammapitikai)),  203  (kSranaq),  349  (lekhag 
to  compose  a  letter).  —  3.  (t.t.)  to  restore  a  bhikkhu  who 
has  undergone  penance  Vin  1.96,  322,  340;  iv.53  (osarehi 
ayya  ti  vuccamano  osareti).  —  Pass,  osariyati  Vin  11.61; 
pp.  osarita  (cp.  osarai^a). 

Ositicatl  [o  +  siiicati]  — •  I.  to  pour  out  or  down  over,  to 
besprinkle  Vin  11.262;  M  1.87  (telena);  Pv  1.8'  (ppr. 
osiiicari  =  asiiicanto  PvA  41).  ■ —  2.  to  scoop  out,  empty, 
drain  (water)  J  v.450  (osinciya,  pot.  =  osinceyya  C).  — 
pp.  avasitta  &  ositta. 

Osita  [pp.  of  ava  \-  sa]  inhabited  (by),  accessible  (to)  Sn 
937  (an°).  Cp.  vy°. 

Ositta  [pp.  of  osincati]  sprinkled,  besprinkled  J  V.400. 
See   also  avasitta. 

Osidati  [fr.  o  +  sad]  to  settle  down,  to  sink,  run  aground 
(of  ships)  S  IV.314  (osida  bho  sappi-tela);  Miln  277 
(nava  osidati).  —  ger.  osiditva  J  11.293.  —  Caus.  II. 
osidapeti  J  iv.139  (navaq). 

Osidana  (nt.)  [fr.  osidati]  sinking  DhsA  363. 

Ossa  see  ussa.  '. 

Ossakk"  see  osakk°. 

Ossagga  [fr.  ossajati]  relaxation,  in  cpd.  sati-ossagga  (for 
which  more  common  sati-vossagga)  relaxation  of  memory, 
inattention,  thoughtlessness  DhA  in.  1 63  (for  pamada  Dh 
167).  See  vossagga. 

Ossajati  [o  -f-  Sfj  send  off]  to  let  loose,  let  go,  send  off, 
give  up,  dismiss,  release  D  11.106  (aor.  ossaji);  Sn  270 
=  S  1.207;  Th  I,  321;  J  iv.260.  —  pp.  ossattha.  See 
also  avassajati. 

Osajjana  (nt.)  [fr.  ossajati]  release,  dismissal,  sending  off 
DA  1. 1 30. 

Ossattha  [pp.  of  ossajati]  let  loose,  released,  given  up,  thrown 
down  D  11.106;  S  111.241;  J  1.64;  iv.460  (=  nissattha). 

Ossanna  [pp.  of  osidati  for  osanna,  ss  after  ussanna]  sunk, 
low  down,  deficient,  lacking  J  1.336  (opp.  ussanna). 
Hardly  to  be  dertved  from  ava  -|-  syad. 

Ossavana  (nt  )  [fr.  ava  +  sru]  outflow,  running  water  M 
1.189  (*'•'■  ossavana  &  osavana).  Cp.  avasaava. 


Ohana 


173 


Ohilana 


OhanA  only  in  cpd.  bimb'ohana,  see  under  bimba. 

Ohanatl  [ava  +  han,  l>ut  prob.  a  new  formation  from  Pass, 
avahlyati  of  ha,  taking  it  to  han  instead  of  the  latter] 
to  defecate,  to  empty  the  bowels  PvA  268  (+  osajjati). 

Ohara^a  (nt.)  [fr.  oharati]  lit.  "taking  away",  leading  astray, 
side-track,  deviating  path  J  VI. 525  (C. :  gamana-magga). 
Cp.  avaharana. 

Oharati  [o  +  hf  take]  —  I.  to  take  away,  take  down,  take 
off  S  1.27  (ger.  ohacca,  v.  1.  uhacca);  Pv  11.6°  (imper. 
ohara  =  oharehi  PvA  95);  DhA  iv.56  (see  oharin).  See 
also  ava".  —  Cans.  I.  ohareti  (see  avaharati);  Caus.  II. 
oharapeti  in  meaning  of  oh.Trati  to  take  down,  to  cut  or 
shave  off  (hair)  J  vi.52  (kesamassuij) ;  DhA  11.53  (cp- 
oropeti).  —  pp.  avahata. 

Ohaya  ger.  of  ojahati. 

Ohara  see  avahara  &  cp.  vohara. 

Ohararia  (nt.)  [fr.  ohareli ,  cp.  avaharana]  taking  down, 
cutting  off  (hair)  J   I.64  (kesa-massu°). 

Oharin  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  avaharati]  dragging  down,  weighty, 
heavy  I)h  346  (=  avaharati  hettha  harati  ti  DhA  iv.56). 

Ohareti  [Caus.  of  oharati]  —  I.  to  give  up,  leave  behind, 
renounce  (cp.  ojahati)  Sn  64  (=  oropeti  Nd^  183).  —  2. 


to  take  down  (see  oharati  i)  Vin  1.48;  PvA  95.  —  3.  to 
cut  down,  shave  off  (hair;  see  oharapeti  under  oharati)  It  75 
(kesamassui)  hair  &  beard,  v.  1.  ohSyapetva);  Pug  56  (id.). 

Ohlta  [pp.  of  odahati;  BSk.  avahita  (Jtm  210  e.g.)  as  well 
as  apahita  (Lai.  V.  552  e.  g.)]  —  i.  put  down  into,  de- 
posited Dh  150.  —  2.  put  down,  laid  down,  taken  off, 
relieved  of,  in  phrase  ohitabharo  (arahaij)  (a  Saint)  who 
has  laid  down  the  burden:  see  arahatta  III.  C;  cp.  ''khandha- 
bhara  DhA  iv.  168.  —  3.  put  down  in,  hidden,  put  away 
in  ( — °)  Sn  1022  =  (kos'ohila).  —  4.  (fig.)  put  down  to, 
applied  to,  in  ohita-sota  listening,  attentive,  intent  upon 
(cp.  sotaq  odahati  to  listen)  usually  in  phrase  ohitasoto 
dhammaq  suiiati;  M  1.480;  111.201;  S  v.96;  A  IV.391  ; 
Vism  300  (-f  atthiq  katva). 

Ohiyyalia  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  ohiyati,  avahiyyati]  one  who  is  left 
behind  (in  the  house  as  a  guard)  Vin  111.208;  iv.94;  S 
I.I 85   (viharapala). 

Ohina  [pp.  of  ojaliati]  having  left  behind  J  IV.432  (gaiiaq). 

Ohiyati  (ohiyyati)  [ava  -f-  liiyati,  Pass,  of  ha,  see  avajahati]  — 
I.  to  be  left  behind,  to  stay  behind  J  v. 340  (avahiyati  ^ 
ohiyyati  C).  —  2.  to  stay  behind,  to  fall  out  (in  order 
to  urinate  or  defecate);  ger.  ohijitva  Vin  iv.229;  DhA 
11.21  (cp.  ohanati).  See  also  ohiyyaka. 

Ohi]ana  (f.)  [ava  -f  hllans,  of  hi«J]  scorning,  scornfulness 
Vbh   353  (-P  ohllattaq). 


II— $♦ 


LIST   OF    CORRECTIONS. 


To  pari  I: 

.  X.    befove    Mahavaqsa ,  Khuddhasikkha.  J P  T S. 

1883  (Rhus). 

„        Netti ,  Mulasikkha,  7f  r5. 18S3 

(Muls;. 

XI.  after  Visuddhi ,    Yogavacava's    Manual ,    F  T S. 

1896  (Yog). 
for  Ilaward  read  Harvard. 

to  Mahavastu add  (Mvst). 

under  3  add  Neumann,  Die  Reden  Gotamo  Buddha's 
(Mittlere  Sammlung).  vols.  I.— 11I.»  1921 
for  Anug  read  S.  Z.   Aung, 
to  Questions  of . .  .  .  add  (Miln). 
to  Vinaya  Texts  .    .   add  (Vin  T.). 
„       4      „    Brahmana  (Br.). 

add  Satapatha-Krahmana  (trsl.  J.  Eggc- 
ling)  SBE.   vols.       (Sat.   Br.). 
„     Dhatupatha  &  Dhatumafiinsa,  ed.  Ander- 
.sen  &  Smith,  Copenhagen  1 921  (Dhtp,  Dhtm). 

XII.  „    B.I.  add  BK.   Bohtlingk  and   Roth. 

„      Dhtm  Uhatumanjusa 4. 

Dhtp    Dhatupatha 4. 

XIII.  „      2  ,     cond.  conditional. 
I     col.   I,  I.   25   read  a'  for  S-. 

6        „     2,  „   22       „     "part  or  interest  (opp.  b.^hiraij  the 
interest    in   the  outsiilc  world)". 
II       „     2,  3,  „     excessive  for  ccc°. 

14  „      2,  28  „     believes      ,     belives. 

15  n      2,  to  p.    "7,  col.    I   he.idlines  read  Allha,  Addha 

for  Atlha,  Addha. 
19        „      I,  6,  read  adulteress  for  adullress. 
21        „      I,  26     „     late  for  exete. 
24        „      I,     transfer  "kama  to  precede-kamin. 

,      2,  25   read  phraseology   for  phrasclogy. 
26        „      2,  41      „       period  for  geriod. 


p.  32 
„  33 

n    35 

,  38 

r    42 

„  43 
„  44 

«  47 
-  48 
»   52 

»   56 

r.    57 

,  59 

r,    70 

,  7' 

„  72 
»  77 


Si 
82 
89 


n    9' 


10     ,       unlucky  for  unluckly. 

1 1,  fr.  b.  read  supplementary  for  supplemenly. 

5,        „  „     move  for  more. 

30,  read  worldly  for  wordly  &  67  for  97. 

24        ,     supreme   „     supprcme. 

I,  fr.  b.  dele  in. 

36  read  facing  llii  wind. 

line  46  read  connected   for  nonnected. 

„        2     „      quarrelling  ,    quarelling. 

n      39     n       residuum      „    residium. 

„      11   fr.  b.  read  Trenckner  for  Trenckener. 
under  AntarS  read  -gacchati  for  -gattchali. 

„       Apapibali  read  J   11.T26  for  in.  126. 
line   16,  fr.  b    read   continuous  for  continuou. 

„        8,     ,  „      impulsive       „     in". 

„      19,     „  „      indestructible  for  "able. 

„      14,  read  .ichievements  for  .icch''. 

„      19,   fr.  b.  re.id  heathenish  for  "isch. 

„        2,      „         „       possessing     „    pose.ss". 

„      II,  read   ,\bhisambhu  for   .\bsambhu. 
Aribhaseti  correct  to  Pari°  according  to  Faus- 

boll    (J    V.    COIT.). 
I.  9  read  spirituous  for  spirltous. 
„   3  fr.  b.  read  experiences, 
under  Avadata  read  metri  for  nialri. 
after   .\sita-^  put  in  new  article  Asita''  (m.  nt.) 

[fr.  asi]  a  sickle  J  HI. 1 29;  V.4O. 
1.  35  read  intuiting  for  intuilising. 
_    16     _       intoxicated  for  iutoricated. 


A  number  of  minor  printer's  errors,  like  omitting  an  oc- 
casional spiritus,  or  putting  i  as  accent  for  1  ,  as  well  as 
c  for  e,  n  for  u  &  vice  versa  in  familiar  words,  are  not 
mentioned  as  they  will  be  easily  found  out  A:  corrected  by 
the  reader. 


* 


THE    PALI    TEXT    SOCIETY'S 
PALI-ENGLISH   DICTIONARY 


EDITED  BY 


T.  W.  RHYS  DAVIDS  F.B.A.  DSc.  Ph.D.  LL.D.  D.Litt. 
and  WILLIAM  STEDE  Ph.D. 


Part  III  (K— Cit) 


PUBLISHED  BY 

THE  PALI  TEXT  SOCIETY 

LONDON 


First  published  -  -  -  1922 
Reprinted  -  -  .  _  1947 
Reprinted         -     .     -     .     1952 


K. 


Ka°  (pron.  interr.)  [Sk.  kah,  Idg.  'quo  besides  'qui  (see 
ki"  &  kig)  &  'qiju  (see  ku°).  Cp.  Av.  ka- ;  Gr.  jrj, 
iriuf,  jroloj,  etc. ;  Lat.  qui ;  Oir.  co-te  ;  Cymr.  pa ;  Goth, 
hvas,  Ags.  hwa  (=  E.  who),  Ohg.  hwer]  who  ?  —  in.  ko. 
f.  kA  (nt.  kir),  q.  v.)  ;  follows  regular  decl.  of  an  a- 
thcme  with  some  formations  fr.  ki°,  which  base  is  other- 
wise restricted  to  the  nt.  —  From  ka°  also  nt.  pi.  kani 
(Sn  324,  961)  &.  some  adv.  forms  like  kathai),  kadJ, 
kahag,  etc.  —  i.  (a)  ka°  :  nom.  m.  ko  Sn  173,  765,  1024; 
J  1.279  ;  Dh  146  ;  f.  ka  J  vi.364  ;  PvA  41  ;  gen.  sg.  kassa 
Miln  25  ;  instr.  kena  ;  abl.  kasma  (nt.)  as  adv.  "  why  " 
Sn  883.  885  :  PvA  4,  13,  63,  etc.  —  (6)  ki°  (ra.  &  i. ;  nt. 
S3e  kii)) :  gen.  sg.  kissa  Dh  237;  J  11. 104.  ko-namo 
(of)  what  name  Miln  14;  DhA  11.92,  occurs  besides 
kin-namo  Miln  15.  — ^kvattho  what  (is  the)  use  Vv  50'" 
stands  for  ko  attho.  —  All  cases  are  freq.  emphasized 
by  addition  of  the  affirm,  part,  nu  &  su,  e.  g.  ko  su'dha 
tarati  oghai)  (who  then  or  who  possibly)  Sn  1 73  ;  kena 
ssu  nivuto  loko  "  by  what  then  is  the  world  obstructed  ?" 
Sn  1032  ;  kasmi  nu  sacc&ni  vadanti  .  .  .  Sn  885.  — 
2.  In  indef.  meaning  comb"*  with  -ci  (Sk.  cid  :  see  under 
ca  I  and  ci°) :  koci,  kad,  etc.,  whoever,  some  (usually 
with  neg.  na  koci,  etc.,  equalling  "  not  anybody  "),  nt. 
kiflci  (q.  v.)  ;  e.  g.  mj  jitu  koci  lokasmig  pjpiccho  It 
85;  no  yiti  koci  loke  Dh  179;  n'4hai)  bhatako  'smi 
kassaci  Sn  25  ;  na  hi  nassati  kassaci  kammai)  "  nobody's 
trace  of  action  is  lost  "  Sn  666  ;  kassaci  kiftci  na  (deti) 
(he  gives)  nothing  to  anybody  VvA  322  ;  PvA  45.  —  In 
Sandhi  the  orig.  d  of  cid  is  restored,  e.  g.  app'  eva 
nSma  kocid  eva  puriso  idh'  agaccheyya,  "  would  that 
some  man  or  other  would  come  here  I"  PvA  153. — 
Also  in  correl.  with  rel.  pron.  ya  (see  details  under  ya")  : 
yo  hi  koci  gorakkhar)  upajivati  kaissako  so  na  brah- 
mano  (whoever — he)  Sn  612.     See  also  kad". 

KaoM  [cp.  Sk.  kagsa ;  of  uncertain  etym.,  perhaps  of 
Babylonian  origin,  cp.  hiraiktia]  i .  bronze  Miln  2 ; 
magnified  by  late  commentators  occasionally  into  silver 
or  gold.  Thus  J  vi.504  (silver)  and  J  1.338;  iv.107; 
VI. 509  (gold),  considered  more  suitable  to  a  fairy  king. 
—  2.  a  bronze  gong  Dh  134  (DhA  111.58).  —  3.  a  bronze 
dish  J  1.336 ;  ap5nlya°  a  bronze  drinking  cup.  goblet 
M.  1.316.  — 4.  a  "  bronze."  i.  e.  a  bronze  coin  worth 
4  kahjpaijas  Vin  iv.255,  256.  See  Rhys  Davids,  Coins 
and  Measures  §§  12,  22.  —  "  Golden  bronze  "  in  a  fairy 
tale  at  Vv  5*  is  explained  by  Dhammapala  VvA  36  as 
"  bells."  —  It  is  doubtful  whether  brass  was  known  in 
the  Ganges  valley  when  the  earlier  books  were  com- 
posed ;  but  kagsa  may  have  meant  metal  as  opposed  to 
earthenware.     See  the  compounds. 

-upadaharana  (n.  a.)  metal  milk-pail  (?)  in  phrase: 
dhenusahassSni  dukula-sandan^ni  (7)  kagsupadhiranilm 
D  II. 192;  A  IV. 393  ;  J  VI. 503  (expl""  at  504).  Kern 
(Toev.  p.  142)  proposes  correction  to  kaijs'fipadohana 
(  =  Sk.  kagsy'opodohana),  i.e.  giving  milk  to  the 
extent  of  a  metal  pailful.  -kan(aka  metal  thorns, 
bits  of  sharp  metal,  nails  J  v.  102  (cp.  sakantaka) 
-kuta  cheating  with  false  or  spurious  metal  D  1.5 
(  =  DA  1.79:  selling  brass  plates  for  gold  ones),  -tala 
bronze  gong  DhA  1.389 ;  Dhs.\  319  (°tala)  ;  VvA 
161  or  cymbals  J  vi.277,  411.     .thila  metal  dish,  as 


distinguished  from  earthenware  D  1.74  (in  simile  of 
dakkho  nahapako=A  111.25)  cp.  DA  i.  2L7;  Vism  283 
(in  simile);  DhA  111.57  (:  a  gong);  DA  1.217:  DhA 
iv.67  =  J  111.224;  reading  at  Miln  62  to  be  °tala  (see 
J.P.T.S.  1886,  122).  -pattharika  a  dealer  in  bronze 
ware  Vin  11.135.  -patJ  &  P«tl  a  bronze  bowl,  usually 
for  food  :  M  1.25  ;  A  iv.393  ;  Sn  14  ;  PvA  274.  -pura  full 
of  metal  J  iv.107.  -bhan4a  brass  ware  Vin  11.135. 
-bhajana  a  bronze  vessel  Vism  142  (in  simile),  -maya 
made  of  bronze  Vin  1. 190  ;  ii.i  12  ;  -mallaka  metal  dish, 
e.  g.  of  gold  J  HI.21.     -loha  bronze  Miln  267. 

Kaggati=kassati,  see  ava°. 

Kakaca  [onomat.  to  sound  root  kj,  cp.  note  on  gala;  Sk. 
krakaca]  a  saw  Th  i,  445 ;  J  iv.30 ;  v.52 ;  vi.261  ; 
DA  1.212  ;  in  simile  °-iipama  ovada  M  1.129.  Another 
simile  of  the  saw  (a  man  sawing  a  tree)  is  found  at 
Ps  1. 171,  quoted  &  referred  to  at  Vism  280,  281. 

-khanda  fragment  or  bit  of  saw  J  1.32 1 .  -danta  tooth 
of  a  saw,  DA  1.37  (kakaca-danta-pantiyai)  kl]amana). 

Kaka^^a,  the  chameleon  J  1.442,  487 ;  n.63 ;  vi.346  ; 
VvA  258. 

Kakn  [Brh.  kakud,  cp.  kakud  hollow,  curvature,  Lat. 
cacumen,  &  cumulus]  a  peak,  summit,  projecting 
comer  S  i.ioo  (where  satakkatu  in  Text  has  to  be 
corrected  to  satakkaku  :  megho  thanayai)  vijjumm 
satakkaku.  Com.  expl"  sikhara,  kuta)  A  111.34 
(  =  AA  620~kuta).  Cp.  satakkaku  &  Morris,  J.P.T.S. 
1891-93.  5- 

Kaka^  a  dove,  pigeon,  only  in  cpds. : 

-pada  dove-footed  (i.  e.  having  beautiful  feet)  DhA 
1. 119;  f.  pad!  appl.  to  Apsaras,  J  11.93;  DhA  1.119; 
Miln  169. 

Kakntthaka  see  ku°. 

Kakndha  [cp.  Sk.  kakuda,  and  kaku  above]  i .  the  hump 
on  the  shoulders  of  an  Indian  bull  J  11.225  :  J  ^1.340.  — 
2.  a  cock's  comb:  see  sisa  kakudba.  —  3.  a  king's 
symbol  or  emblem  (nt.)  J  v.264.  There  are  5  sjich 
insignia  regis,  regalia:  3.  kakudha-bhaqija.  —  4.  a  tree, 
the  Tefminalia  Arjuna,  Vin  1.28;  J  vi.519;  kakudha- 
rukkha  DhA  iv.153.  Note.  On  pakudha  as  twin-form 
of  ka°  see  Trenckner,  J.P.T.S.  1908,  108. 

-phala  the  fruit  of  the  kakudha  tree  Mhvsxi.  14,  where 
it  is  also  said  to  be  a  kind  of  pearl ;  see  mutta.  -bhan^a 
ensign  of  royalty  J  1.53;  iv.151  ;  v.289  (  =  sakayura). 
The  5  regalia  (as  mentioned  at  J  v.264)  ^re  vSlavijani, 
uohisa,  kbagga,  chatta,  pSdukA  :  the  fan,  diadem,  sword, 
canopy,  slippers.  —  pai\cavidha-k°  PvA  74. 

Kakka'  [cp.  Sk.  kalka,  also  kalanka  &  kalusa]  a  sedi- 
ment deposited  by  oily  substances,  when  ground  ;  a 
paste  Vin  1.205  (tila°),  255.  Throe  kinds  enumerated 
at  J.  VI. 232  :  sasapa"  (mustard-paste),  mattika"  (fra- 
grant earth-paste,  cp.  Fuller's  earth),  tila°  ("jsamum 
paste).  At  DA  1.88,  a  fourth  paste  is  given  as  haliddi°, 
used  before  the  application  of  face  powder  (poudre  de 
riz,  mukha-cunoa).     Cp    kakku. 

Ill— I 


Kakka 


KankbS 


Kakka'  [cp-  Sk.  karka)  a  kind  of  gem ;  a  precious  stone 
of  yellowish  colour  VvA  i :  I. 

Kakkafa  a  large  deer  (?)  J  vi.538  (expl*'  as  maMmiga). 

Kakkatakii  [cp.  Sk.  karkata,  karkara  "  hard,"  kankata 
"  mail  "  ;  cp.  Gr.  captives  &  Lat.  cancer ;  also  B.  Sk. 
kakkataka  hook]  a  crab  S  1.123;  M  1.234:  J  1.222; 
Vv  54*  (VvA  243,  245)  ;  DhA  111.299  (mama  .  .  .  kak- 
katakassa  viya  akkhini  nikkhamimsu,  as  a  sign  of  being 
in  love).     Cp.  kakkhala. 

-nala  a  kind  of  sea-reed  of  reddish  colour.  ]  rv.141  ; 
also  a  name  for  coral,  ibid,  -magga  fissures  in  canals  ; 
frequented  by  crabs.  DhsA  270.  -yantaka  a  ladder 
with  hooks  at  one  end  for  fastening  it  to  a  wall,  Mhvs 
IX. 17.  -rasa  a  flavour  made  from  crabs,  crab-curry, 
VvA  243- 

Eakkara  [onomat,  cp.  Sk.  kfkaviku  cock,  Gr.  cipnai, 
rtpicli,  Lat.  querquedula,  partridge ;  sound-root  kj, 
see  note  on  gala]  a  jungle  cock  used  as  a  decoy  J  11.162, 
purana",  11. 161  ;  cp.  dipaka'  &  see  Kern,  Toev.  p.  ii8: 
K°-Jataka,  N°  209. 

Kakkaratt  (f.)  roughness,  harshness,  deceitfulness.  Pug 
19.  23- 

Eakkariya  (nt.)  harshness.  Pug  19,  23. 

Kakkarn  a  kind  of  creeper  (°j5tani=valliphalani) 
J  VI.536. 

Kakkasa  (adj.)  [Sk.  karkaia  to  root  kj  as  in  kakkataka] 
rough,  hard,  harsh,  esp.  of  speech  (vScS  para-katuki 
Dhs  1343),  M  i.286  =  Dhs  1343;  A  v.265  =  283.  293; 
DhsA  396.  —  akakkasa :  smooth  Sn  632  ;  J  m.282  ; 
V.203,  206,  405.  406  (cp.  J.P.T.S.  1891-93,  13);  akak- 
kasaijga,  with  smooth  Umbs,  handsome,  J  v.204. 

Kakkaasa  roughness  Sn  328,  Miln  252. 

Kakkarika  (and  °uka)  [fr.  karkaru]  a  kind  of  cucumber 
Vv  33"=elaluka  VvA  347. 

Kakkftra  (Sk.  karkam,  connected  with  karkataka]  i.  a 
pumpkin-gourd,  the  Beninkasa  Cerifera  J  vi.536: 
kakkaruj5tani=valUphalani  (reading  kakkaru  to  be 
corr.).  —  2.  a  heavenly  flower  J  111.87,  88  =  dibbapuppha 

Kakk&ieti  [*kat-k&reti  to  make  kat,  see  note  on  gala  for 
sound-root  kf  &  cp.  khajakhafa]  to  make  the  sound 
kak,  to  half  choke  J  11. 105. 

Kakka  [cp.  kakka  =kalka]  a  powder  for  the  face,  slightly 
adhesive,  used  by  ladies,  J  v.302  where  5  kinds  are 
ennm" :  s5sapa°,  lova°,  mattika".  tila°,  hahddi°. 

Kakkotaka  (?)  KhA  38,  spelt  takk°  at  Vism  258. 

Kakkola  see  takkola. 

Kakkhala  [kakkhata,  cp.  Sk.  karkara  =  P.  kakkafaka] 
I.  rough,  hard,  harsh  (lit.  &  fig.)  Dhs  648  (opp.  muduka 
Dhs  962  (rupari  pathavidhatu  :  kakkhalar)  kharagatar) 
kakkhajattai)  kakkhajabhavo)  ;  Vism  349  (  =  thaddha), 
591.  592  (°lakkharia)  ;  DhA  n.95  ;  IV.104  ;  Miln  67.  112  ; 
PvA  243  (  =  asaddha,  akkosakaraka,  opp.  muduka); 
VvA  138  (  =  phanisa). —  2.  cruel,  fierce,  pitiless  J  1.187, 
266;  11.204;  IV. 162.  427.  Akakkhala  not  hard  or  harsh, 
smooth,  pleasant  DhsA  397.  -°vacata,  kind  speech, 
ibid.  (=apharusa  °vacata  mudu°). 

-katha  h:ird  speech,  crxiel  words  J  vi.561.  -kamma 
cnielty.  atrocity  J  in. 481 .  -bhava  rigidity  Dhs  962  (see 
kakkhala)  MA  21  :  harshness,  cruelty  J  111.480.  a" 
absence  of  hardness  or  rigiditj-  DhsA  151. 

Kakkhalata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  prec.]  hardness,  rigidity,  Dhs 
859;  Vbh  82;  J  v. 167;  DhsA  166. — akakkhalata 
absence  of  roughness,  pleasantness  Dhs  44,  45.  324. 
64O,  728,  859;  DhsA  151  ;  VvA  214  (  =  sa^iha). 


Kakkhalatta  (nt.)  hardness,  roughness,  harshness  Vin 
11.86;  Vbh  82;  Vism  365;  cp.  M.Vastu  i.t66: 
kakkhatatva. 

Kakkha}iya  hardness,  rigidity,  roughness,  Vbh  350. 

Kanka  [Sk.  kanka,  to  sound-root  kg,  cp.  IdnkiQi  &  see 
note  on  gala]  a  heron  M  1.364,  429 ;  J  v.475. 
-patta  a  heron's  plume  J  v.475. 

Kankata  [=  kao  or  kir)  +  kfta,  to  kioi,  "  the  tinklings  "] 
elephant's  trappings  VvA  104  (  =  kappa). 

Kankani>  (nt.)  [to  same  root  as  kanka]  a  bracelet,  orna- 
ment for  the  wrist  Th  2.  259  (  =  ThA  211). 

ir»nfc«l»  i^Sk.  kank&la  &  cp.  ^rnkhala  (as  kanpa>^niga), 
orig.  meaning  "  chain  "]  skeleton  ;  only  in  cpd.  atthi°. 
Atthikankal'  upam^  k&ma  Vin  11.25;  M  1.130,  364; 
J  V.210;  Th  I,  1 150  (°kutika)  :  atthikankalasannibha 
Th  2,  488  (  =  ThA  287;  cp.  Morris,  J.P.T.S.  1885,  75): 
atthikankala  atthi-punja  attbi-rasi  S  ii.i85==It  17 
(but  in  the  verses  on  same  page :  puggalass'  attbi- 
sancayo).  Cp.  attbisankhalika  PvA  152  ;  atttuka 
sankhalika  J  1.433  ;  atthi-sanghSta  Th  i,  60. 

Kanknttkaka  [cp.  Sk.  kankustha]  a  kind  of  soil  or  mould, 
of  a  golden  or  silver  colour  Mhvs  ^2.  6  (see  note  on  p.  355). 

Kankhati  [Sk.  kinkf  cp.  iank.  I^t.  cnnctor]  1 .  with  loc. : 
to  be  uncertain,  unsettled,  to  doubt  (syn.  vicikicchati, 
with  which  always  combined).  Kankhati  vicikicchati 
dvisu  mahapurisa-lakkhanesu  D  1.106  is  in  doubt  and 
perplexity  about  (Bgh's  gloss,  patthanag  uppadati  DA 
1.275,  is  more  edifying  than  exact.)  =  Sn  107;  na 
kankhati  na  vicikicchati  S  11.17  =  111.135;  kankheyya 
vicikiccheyya  S  11.50,  54;  111.122;  v.225  (corr.  khan- 
kheyya  I)  226  ;  same  with  Satthari  kankheyya  dhamme" 
sanghe"  sikkb3ya°  A  lv.46o  =  v.i7  =  M  i.ioi  =Dhs  1004  ; 
cp.  Dhs.  1 1 18.  —  2.  with  ace. :  to  expect,  to  wait  for,  to 
look  forward  to.  Kalag  k.  to  abide  one's  time,  to  wait 
for  death  S  1.65  (appiccho  sorato  danto  k.  k.  bhSvito 
(so  read  for  bhatiko)  sudanto) ;  Sn  516  (id.  with  bhSvito 
sadanto) ;  It  69  (id.  bhSvitatto). — J  v. 411  (  =  icchati); 
VI. 229  (  =  oloketi).  pp.  kankhita  S  111.99;  Sn  540; 
(-(- vicikicchita) ;  inf.  kankhitug  S  iv.350  =  399  (-(-vici- 
kicchitug). 

Kankhana  (nt.)  doubting,  doubt,  hesitation  MA  97 : 
DhsA  259. 

Kankhanlya  [grd.  of  kankhati]  to  be  doubted  S  iv.399. 

ir^nlrht  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  kSnkfi]  1.  doubt,  uncertainty  S  1.181  ; 
111.203  (dukkhc  k.  etc.;  cp.  Nd'  i) ;  Sn  541,  1149;  °g 
vinayati  Sn  58,  559,  1025  ;  k.  pahiyati  Ps  11.62  ;  comb* 
with  vimati :  D  1.105  ;  111. 1 16  ;  S  iv.327  ;  v.161  ;  A  11.79, 
160,  185  ;  DA  1.274  ;  vfith  vicikiccba  :  S  iv.350  ;  Dhs.  423. 
Defined  as  =  kankhSyana  &  kankhSyitatta  Nd'i  ; 
Dhs  425  (under  vicikiccha).  3  doubts  enum"*  at 
D  111.217;  4  in  passages  with  vimati  (see  above) ;  7  at 
Dhs  1004;  8  at  Nd»  i  &  Dhs  11 18;  16  at  M  1.8  &  Vism 
518.  —  2.  as  adj.  doubting,  doubtful,  in  akankha  one 
who  has  overcome  all  doubt,  one  who  possesses  right 
knowledge  (vijj&),  jn  comb'"  akankha  apiha  anupaya 
S  i.i8i  ;  akhila  a.  Sn  477,  1059;  Nd=i  ;  cp.  vitinija" 
Sn  514  ;  aviti^jpa"  Sn  249,  318,  320  (=ajanai))  ;  nikkan- 
kha  S  11.84  ( -I- nibbicikiccha) .  —  3.  expectation  SA  183. 
—  On  connotation  of  k.  in  general  see  Dhs  Irsl.  p.  1 15  n". 
-cchida  removing  or  destroying  doubt  Sn  87.  -ccbe- 
dana  the  removal  of  d.  J  1.98  ;  iv.69.  -tthaniya  founded 
on  d.,  doubtful  (dhamma)  D  111.285;  A  iv.152,  154; 
v.  16;  AA  689.  -dhamma  a  doubting  state  of  mind, 
doubt  D  II. 149;  S  IV.350.  -vitarana  overcoming  of 
doubt  Miln  233  ;  DhsA  352,  °visuddhi  complete  purifica- 
tion in  consequence  of  the  removal  of  all  doubt  D  111.288; 
M  1. 147  ;  Ud  60  ;  Vism  5:!3  ;  Bdhd  1 16  .sq.  -samangin 
alfected  with  doubts,  having  doubts  DhsA  259. 


Kankhayati 


Kancana 


Kankb&yati  [Deaom.  fr.  kankha)  to  doubt,  pp.  Kankha- 
yita  Sn  102 1. 

Kankh&yana  {(■)  4- kankhiyitatta  (nt.)  doabting  and 
hesitation,  doubtfulness,  Nd*  i ;  Dha  425,  1004,  11 18; 
DhsA  259. 

Kankhin  (adj.)  [Sk.  kank^in]  i.  doubting,  wavering,  un- 
decided, irresolute  D  n.241;  Sn  1148;  Nd'  185;  comb'' 
with  vecikicchin   S  111.99;    M  1.18;   A  11. 174;    Sn  510. 

—  2.  longing  for  Pgdp  106  (mokkha°).  —  akankhin 
not  doubting,  confident,  sure  (cp.  akankha)  D  11.241; 
A  11.175. 

Kanga  (f.)  [derivation  unknown,  prob.  non-Aryan,  cp. 
Sk.  kangu]  the  panic  seed,  Panicum  Italicum;  millet, 
used  as  food  by  the  poor  (cp.  piyangu) ;  mentioned  as 
one  of  the  seven  kinds  of  grains  (see  dhaiifia)  at  Vin 
IV. 264;  DA  1.78.  —  Miln  267;  Mhvs  32,  30. 

-pittha  millet  flour,  in  °maya  made  of  m.  meal 
J  VI. 58 1,  -bhatta  a  dish  of  (boiled)  millet  meal  Vism 
418  (in  simile). 

Kaoa  [Sk.  kaca,  cp.  k4&ci  and  Latin  cingo,  cicatrix]  the 
hciir  (of  the  head),  in  °kalapa  a  mass  of  hair,  tresses 
Davs  IV.51. 

Kacavara  [to  kaca  ?]  i .  sweepings,  dust,  rubbish  (usually 
in  comb"  with  chaddeti  and  sammajjati)  J  1.292; 
111.163;  IV. 300;  Vism  70:  DA  1.7;  DhA  1,52;  SnA  311. 

—  2.  rags,  old  clothes  SA  283  (=  pilotik^). 
-chaddana  throwing  out  sweepings,  m  "pacchi  a  dust 

basket,  a  bin  J  1.290.  -chaddanaka  a  dust  pan  J  1. 161 
(+  mutthi-sammujjani).  -cbaddani  a  dust  pan  DhA 
III. 7  (sammajjani +  ).  -chaddika  (dasi)  a  maid  for 
sweeping  dust,  a  Cinderella  DhA  iv.210. 

Kaoci  &  kaccid  (indecl.)  [Sk.  kaccid=kad-l-cid,  see  kad"] 
indef.  interrog.  particle  expressing  doubt  or  suspense, 
equivalent  to  Gr.  dv,  Lat.  ne,  num.  nonne :  then 
perhaps;  I  doubt  whether,  I  hope,  I  am  not  sure,  etc.. 
Vin  1.158,  350  ;  D  1.50  (k.  mar)  na  vaflcesi  I  hope  you 
do  not  deceive  me),  106;  S  111.120,  125;  Sn.  335,  354, 
p.  87 ;  J  1. 103,  279:  V.373  ;  DhA  11.39  (k.  tumhe  gata 
"  have  you  not  gone,"  answer:  aina  "  yes  ") ;  PvA  27 
(k.  tan  danag  upakappati  does  that  gift  really  benefit 
the  dead  ?),  178  (k.  vo  piijdapato  laddho  have  you 
received  any  alms?).  Cp.  kin. — Often  comb''  with 
other  indef.  particles,  e.  g.  kacci  nu  Vin  1.41  ;  J  111.236 ; 
VI.542  ;  k.  nu  kho  "  perhaps  "  (Ger.  etwa,  doch  nicht) 
J  1.279  ;  k.  pana  J  1.103.  —  When  followed  by  nu  or  su 
the  original  d  reappears  according  to  rules  of  Sandhi : 
kaccinnu  J  11. 133  ;  v.174,  348  ;  vi.  23  ;  kaccissu  Sn  1045, 
IU79  (see  Nd=  186). 

Kaooikara  a  kind  of  large  shrub,  the  Caesalpina  Digyna 
J  VI. 535  (should  we  write  with  BB  kacchi"  ?). 

Kacoha'  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  kaccba,  prob.  dial.]  1.  marshy 
land,  marshes;  long  grass,  rush,  reed  S  1.52  (te  hi 
sotthig  gamissanti  kacche  vamakase  magS),  78  (parulha 
k-nakha-loma  with  nails  and  hair  like  long-grown  grass, 
cp.  same  at  J  111.315  &  Sdhp  104)  ;  J  v.23  (carami 
kacchani  vanSni  ca)  ;  vi.ioo  (parulha- kacchi  tagara)  ; 
Sn  20  (kacche  rulhatiiie  caranti  gavo) ;  SnA  33  (pabbata" 
opp.  to  nadi",  mountain,  &  river  marshes).  Kern 
(Toev.  11.139)  doubts  the  genuineness  of  the  phrase 
parulha".  —  2.  an  arrow  (made  of  reed)  M  1.429  (kaijdo 
.  .  .  yen'  amhi  viddho  yadi  va  kacchag  yadi  v4 
ropiman  ti). 

Kacoha'  (adj.)  [ger.  of  katb]  fit  to  be  spoken  of  A  1.197 
(Cora.  =  kathetug  yutta).     akaccha  ibid. 

Kacchaka'  a  kind  of  fig-tree  DA  1.8 1.  — 2.  the  tree 
Cedrcla  Toona  Vin  iv.35  ;  S  v.9(i ;  Vism  183. 

Kacchati*  Pass,  of  katheti   (ppr.  kacchainana  A  iii.iSt). 

—  2.  Pass,  of  karoti. 


Eaochantara  (nt.)  [see  kaccha^J  1.  interior,  dwelling, 
apartment  VvA  50  ( =  nivesa) .  —  2 .  the  armpit :  see  upa°. 

Kacchapa  [Sk.  kacchapa,  di<il.  fr.  *ka^yapa,  orig.  Ep  of 
kumma,  like  magga  of  patipadS]  a  tortoise,  turtle 
S  IV.  1 77  (kummo  kacchapo)  ;  in  simile  of  the  blind 
turtle  (k^Qo  k.)  M  iii.i69  =  S  v.455  ;  Th  2,  500  (cp. 
J.P.T.S.  1907,  73,  174). — f.  kacchapini  a  female  t. 
Miln  67. 

-lakkhana  "tortoise-sign,"  i.  e.  fortune-telling  on  the 
ground  of  a  tortoise  being  found  in  a  painting  or  an 
ornament ;  a  superstition  included  in  the  list  of  tirac- 
china-vijjj  D  i.9f«;  DA  1.94.  -loma  "  tortoise-hair," 
i.  e.  an  impossibility,  absurdity  J  111.477,  cp.  sasavisaqa  ; 
maya  made  of  t.  hair  J  in. 478. 

Kacchapaka  see  hattha°. 

Kacchaputa  [see  kaccha']  reed-basket,  sling-basket,  pingo, 
in  -vanija  a  trader,  hawker,  pedlar  J  i.i  1 1 . 

Kaooh&'  (f.)  [derivation  unknown,  cp.  Sk.  kaksa,  Lat. 
cohus,  incohare  &  see  details  under  gaha']  1.  enclo- 
sure, denoting  both  the  enclosing  and  the  enclosed, 
i.  e.  wall  or  room:  see  kacchantara. — 2.  an  ornament 
for  head  &  neck  (of  an  elephant),  veilings,  ribbon 
Vv  2i»  =  69*  (=giveyyaka  VvA);  J  iv.395  (kacchai) 
naganag  bandhatha  giveyyag  patimuiicatha).  3.  belt, 
loin-  or  waist-cloth  (cp.  next)  Vin  11.319;  J  v.306 
(  =  sagvelli)  ;  Miln  36;  DhA  1.389. 

KaccU'  (f.)  &  kaccha  (m.  nt.)  [Derivation  unknown,  cp. 
Sk.  kak^  &  kak?a,  Lat.  coxa,  Ohg.  hahsa]  ;  the  arm- 
pit Vin  1.15  (addasa  .  .  .  kacche  vinag  •  •  •  aflfiissa 
kacche  alambarag)  ;  S  i.i22  =  Sn  449  (sokaparetassa 
Vina  kaccha  abhassatha)  ;  It  76  (kacchelii  seda  muccanti : 
sweat  drops  from  their  armpits)  ;  J  v.434  =  DhA  iv.197 
(thanag  dasseti  k^g  dass"  nabhig  dass°)  ;  J  v.435  (tha- 
nani  k°  4ni  ca  dassayanti ;  expl""  on  p.  437  by  upa- 
kacchaka)  ;  vi.378.  The  phrase  parulha-kaccha-nakha- 
loma  means  "  with  long-grown  finger-nails  and  long 
hair  in  the  armpit,"  e.  g.  S  1.78. 

-loma  (kaccha")  hair  growing  in  the  armpit  Miln  163 
(should  probably  be  read  parulha-k.-nakha-l.,  as  above). 

KacohikSra  see  kacci". 

Kaccha  [Derivation  uncertain,  cp.  Sk.  kaccUu,  dial,  for 
kharju  :  perhaps  connected  with  khajjati,  eating,  bitiugj 
I.  the  plant  Carpopogon  pruriens,  the  fruit  of  which 
causes  itch  when  applied  to  the  skin  DhA  iti.297  (maha' 
-phaUni). — 2.  itch,  scab,  a  cutaneous  disease,  usually 
in  phrase  kacchuya  khajjati  "  to  be  eaten  by  itch  " 
(cp.  E.  itch  >  eat)  Vin  1.202,  296;  J  v.207 ;  Pv  11.3" 
(cp.  kapi")  :  Vism  345  ;  DhA  1.299- 

-cup^a  the  powdered  fruit  of  Carpopogon  pruriens, 
causing  itch  DhA  111.297.     -pilaka  scab  &  boils  J  v.307. 

KaiJala  [Sk.  kajjala,  dial.  fr.  kad-f-jala.  from  jalati, 
Jval,  orig.  burning  badly  or  dimly,  a  dirty  bum] 
lamp-black  or  soot,  used  as  a  coUyriura  Vin  11.50  (read 
k.  for  kapalla,  cp.  J.P.T.S.  1887,  167). 

Kajjopakkamaka  a  kind  of  gem  Miln  118  (v.ijira  k.  phus- 
saraga  lohitanka). 

Kaaoaka  a  kind  of  tree  (disima")  J  VI.53O  (expH  as  "  dve 
rukkhajatiyo  ").     BB  have  koiicaka. 

Kaficana  (nt.)  [Derivation  uncertain,  cp.  Sk.  kaficana, 
either  from  khacati  (shine=the  shiiiiii);  metal,  cp.  kaca 
(glass)  &  Sk.  kai),  or  from  kanaka  gold,  cp.  Gr.  ct^coi' 
(yellow).  P.  kai\cana  is  poetical]  gold  A  111.346  = 
Th  I,  691  (muttag  bcla  va  k.)  ;  Th  2,  2OO  (k^  ssa  phalakag 
va)  ;  VvA  4,  9  (  =  jatarupa).  Hsp.  frcq.  in  cpd3.  =  of 
or  like  i^ld. 

•agghika  a  golden  garland  Bu  X.  2O.  -agghiya  id. 
Bu  V.29.     -avela  id.  J  vi.49 ;  Vv  36';  Pv  11.12'  (thus 


Kaficanaka 


Kati 


for  °acela)  ;  iii.q';  PvA  157.  -kadalikkhaq^a  a  g. 
bunch  of  bananas  J  vi.13.  -thupa  a  gilt  stupa  DhA 
111.483;  IV.I20.  -patima  a  gilt  or  golden  image  or 
statue  J  VI.553 ;  VvA  168.  -pafta  a  g.  turban  or 
coronet  J  vi.217.  -patta  a  g.  dish  J  v. 377.  -pallanka 
a  gilt  palanquin  J  1.204.  -bimba  the  golden  bimba 
fruit  Vv  36*  (but  expl**  at  VvA  168  by  majjita-k- 
patima-sadisa  "  like  a  polished  golden  statue  "). 
-bubbula  a  gilt  ornament  in  form  of  a  ball  Mhvs  34,  74. 
-riipa  a  g.  figure  J  111.93.  -lata  g.  strings  surroundipg 
the  royal  drum  J  vi.589.  -Tanna  of  g.  colour,  gilt, 
shining,  bright  J  v.342  (  =  pap<Jara).  -velli  a  g.  robe, 
girdle  or  waist  cloth  J  v. 398  (but  expl"*  as  "  k-rvipaka- 
sadisa-sarira  "  having  a  body  like  a  g.  statue  "),  cp. 
J  V.306,  where  velli  is  expl"*  by  kacchS,  girdle,  -san- 
nibha  like  g.,  golden-coloured  (cp.  k-vaQQa  and  Sk. 
kanaka-varqa  Sp.  Av.  S.  1.12 1,  135,  etc.),  in  phrase  °laca 
"with  golden  coloured  skin,"  Ep.  of  the  Buddha  and 
one  of  the  32  signs  of  a  great  man  (mah&purisa-lak- 
khana)  D  n.17;  111.143,  '59;  M  11.136;  Miln  75;  attr. 
of  a  devata  Vv  30',  32' ;  VvA  284 ;  of  a  bhikkhu  Sn 
5St=:Th  I.  821.     -suci  a  gold  pin,  a  hair-pin  of  gold 

J  V1.243. 

Kaftcanaka  (adj.)  golden  J  iv.379  (°da?i(Ja). 

Kaftonka  [from  ka&O  (kac)  to  bind,  cp.  Gr.  tdicaXa  fetter, 
Sk.  kaficuka]  i.  a  closely  fitting  jacket,  a  bodice 
Via  1.306=11.267;  A  1.145;  DhA  in. 295  (pata°r)  pafi- 
muiicitvS  dressed  in  a  close  bodice) ;  PvA  63  (urago 
tacar)  kaflcukai)  omuiicanto  viya).  —  2.  the  slough 
of  a  snake  (cp.  i)  DA  1.222.  —  3.  armour,  coat  of  mail 
J  V.128  (sannaha°)  ;  DA  1.157  M  leather)  ;  DSvs  v. 14. 
—  4.  a  case,  covering,  encasement ;  of  one  pagoda 
incasing  another:  Mhvs  1,42. 

Kafijaka  N.  of  a  class  of  Titans  PvA  272  (k&la-k°-bheda 
Asura ;  should  we  read  khafijaka  ?  Cp.  Hardy, 
Manual  of  Buddhism  59). 

Kailjika  (nt.)  [Sk.  kSfijika]  sour  rice-gruel  J  1.23S 
(udaka°) ;  Vv  3337  (amba°),  43'  (=yagu  VvA  186); 
DhA  1.78,  288 ;  VvA  99  (icama-k'-loQudaka  as  expl° 
of  lopa-soviraka  "  salty  fluid,  i.  e.  the  scum  of  sour 
gruel ").     Cp.  uext. 

Ka&iiya  (nt.)  =  kanjika ;  J  111.145  (ambila°) ;  vi.365 
(°apaua)  ;  DhA  11.3  ;  iv.164. 

-tela  a  thick  substance  rising  as  a  scum  on  rice-gruel, 
used  in  straightening  arrows  DhA  1.288. 

Ka&U  (f.)  [from  kanina  young,  compar.  kaniyah,  superl. 
kani^tha ;  orig.  "  newly  sprung  "  from  '401,  cp.  Gr. 
Kaivoi,  Vedic  kany&,  Lat.  re-cen(t)s,  Ags.  hindema 
"  novissimus."  See  also  kanittha]  a  young  (unmarried) 
woman,  maiden,  girl  Pv  i.ii*.  —  As  emblem  of  beauty 
in  simile  khattiya-kaiiiia  vA  .  .  .  pannarasa-vas- 
suddesika  vft  solasa-vassuddesikA  v&  .  .  .  M  1.88 ;  in 
comb"  khattiya-kaflM,  brahiuaQa-k°,  etc.  A  11.205; 
IV.128;  Kisagotami  nOma  k]iattiya-k°  J  1.60;  deva°  a 
celestial  nymph  }  1.61. 

-dana  giving  away  of  a  girl  in  marriage  Pgdp  85. 

Kata*  [Sk.  kata  from  kniatti :  to  do  wicker-work,  roll  up, 
plait;  *gerti  cp.  Gr.  KopraXot,  Lat.  cratis=E.  crate, 
Goth,  haurds,  £.  hurdle]  a  mat :  see  cpds.  &  katallaka. 
-ura  a  reed :  Sacchamm  Sara,  used  as  medicine 
DhsA  78.  -sara  (DhA  1.268)  &  siraka  a  mat  for  sitting 
or  lying  on,  made  of  the  stalks  of  the  screw-pine,  Pan- 
danus  Farcatus  J  vi.474 ;  v.97  ;  DA  1.137;  DhA  11.183 

Kata'  another  form  of  kafi  (hip),  only  used  in  cpds.  : 

-attbilta  the  hip-bone  D  11.296= M  1.58,  89= M  111.92 
(as  V.I.).  Note,  katitthika  at  M  nx.92  and  as  v.l.  at 
13  U.296.     -sataka  a  loin-cloth  J  rv.248. 

Kata'^'kata  [pp.  of  karoti]  in  meaning  of  "original," 
good  (cp.  sat)  ;  as  nt.  "  the  lucky  die  "  in  phrase  kafag- 


gaha  (see  below).  Also  in  comb"  with  su°  &  duk°  for 
sukata  &  dukkata  (e.  g.  Vin  11.289  ;  DhA  111.486  ;  iv.150), 
and  in  meaning  of  "  bad,  evil  "  in  katana.  Cp.  also 
kaU. 

-ggaha  "  he  who  throws  the  lucky  die,"  one  who  is 
lucky,  fortunate,  in  phrase  "  ubhayattha  k."  lucky  in 
both  worlds,  i.  e.  here  &  beyond  Th  i,  462  ;  J  iv.322 
(  =  jayaggaba  victorious  C.) ;  cp.  Morris  in  J.P.T.S. 
1887,  159.  Also  in  "  ubhayam  ettha  k."  S  iv.351  sq. 
—  Opposed  to  kali  the  unlucky  die,  in  phrase  kalig 
garUiati  to  have  bad  luck  J  vi.206  (kaliggaha^para- 
jayasagkhclta,  i.  e.  one  who  is  defeated,  as  opp.  to 
kataggaha=jayasankhata),  228,  282. 

Kanaka  (m.  nt.)  anything  circular,  a  ring,  a  wheel  (thns 
in  kara°  Vin  11.122) ;  a  bracelet  PvA  134. 

Kataka&onkati  see  katu°. 

S^(akatayati=tatatatayati  to  crush,  grind,  creak,  snap 
PugA.  1.34;  VvA  121  (as  v.l.);  Visjn  264.  Cp.  also 
karakara. 

Kataodin  [cp.  on  etym.  Morris  in  J.P.T.S.  1887,  163]  a 
ladle,  a  spoon;  expl""  by  ulunka  DhA  iv.75,  123;  by 
dabbi  PvA  135.  Used  for  butter  VvA  68,  otherwise 
for  cooked  food  in  general,  esp.  rice  gruel.  —  Vin  11.2 16 ; 
J  1.454  :  "I-277- 

-gaha  "  holding  on  to  one's  spoon,"  i.  e.  disinclina- 
tion to  give  food,  niggardliness,  stinginess  Dhs^  376, 
cp.  Dhs  trsl.  300  n».  -gahika  "  spoon  in  hand,"  serving 
with  ladles  (in  the  distribution  of  food  at  the  MahSdSna) 
PvA  135.  -pariss&vana  a  perforated  ladle  Vin  11. 118. 
-bhikkha  "  ladle-begging,"  i.  e.  the  food  given  with  a 
ladle  to  a  bhikkhu  when  he  calls  at  a  house  on  his  begging 
tour  Th  I,  934  ;  Miln  9;  DhA  iv.123  ;  as  representing  a 
small  gift  to  one  individual,  opposed  to  the  MahadanS 
Pv  ii.9>7 ;  as  an  individual  meal  contrasted  with  public 
feeding  (salska-bhatta)  DhA  1.379.  -matta  (bhatta) 
"  only  a  spoonful  of  rice  "  Miln  8  ;  DhA  rv.7j. 

Kataochoka  (adj.)  relating  to  spoons  Vin  n.233. 

^ftf"*^  (it.)  [from  kata,  pp.  of  karoti]  an  evil  deed 
A  IV.  1 72  (v.l.  =  AA  744  katanai)  vuccati  pSpakammar)) . 

Katallaka  [to  kata']  a  puppet  (pagliaccio) ,  a  marionette 
with  some  contriveince  to  make  it  dance  J  v.  16  (daru°, 
expl"*  by  dlUumaya-yanta-rvipaka). 

KatasI  (f.)  [prob.  a  contamination  of  kata  +  siva(thika), 
charnel-house,  under  influence  of  foil.  ya(<j4^°),  cp. 
Sk.  kata  (?)  a  corpse]  a  cemetery;  only  in  phrase 
kafasiQ  va^^heti  "  to  increase  the  cemetery,  referring 
to  dying  and  being  bnried  repeatedly  in  the  course  of 
numerous  rebirths,  expl*'  by  susAna  &  filahana  ThA  291. 
— vaiji^enti  katasii)  ghorai)  Sdiyanti  punabbhavag 
Vin  ii.296=A  ii.54  =  Th  i,  456  (where  Acinanti  (?)  for 
&diy°),  575 ;  Th  2,  502.  Also  in  cpds.  °ya4^an» 
J  1.146;  Ud  72  =  Nett  174;  °Ta44hita  S  11.178  sq.= 
Nd»  664. 

Katikata  see  kata  1.3. 

Iff^Iha  (m.  nt.)  [Sk.  kat&ba]  a  pot  [in  older  texts  only  as 
— °].  —  I*  pot,  vessel,  vase,  receptacle.  udaka°  Vin 
11.122;  ghati°  Vin  11.115;  loha°  Vin  11.170.  ayo°  (in 
simile  "  diva-santatte  ayokatihe  ")  M  1.453  =  A  iv.i38; 
gutha°  Vin  iv.265 ;  tumb«°  (a  gourd  used  as  receptacle 
for  food)  Vin  11. 1 14  ;  alabu°  DhsA  405.  —  Uncompounded 
only  at  Dpvs  92  (°ka) ;  Mhvs  17,  47  ;  18,  24.  —  2.  any- 
thing shaped  like  a  pot,  as  the  skull:  slsa°  D  11.297=: 
M  1.58  ;  Miln  197. 

Kati  [S^-  ^t>.  *(s)aael;  orig.  bending,  curvature,  cp. 
Gr.  atiXoc  hip,  Lat.  scelus  crooked  deed,  Ger.  scheel 
squint]  hip,  waist  Vin  111.22,  112;  Nd'  659;  J  iv.32  ; 
Miln  418.     In  cpds.  also  kafa  (q.  v.). 


Katuka 


Katthaka 


-thaiaka  a  cert,  bone  on  the  small  of  the  back  J 
VI. 309.  -padesa  the  buttocks  J  111.37.  -pamana  (adj.) 
as  far  as  the  waist  J  vi.593.  -pariyosana  the  end  of 
the  hips,  the  bottom  J  u.275.  -puthulaka  (adj.)  with 
broad  hips,  having  beautiful  hips  J  v. 303  (in  expl"  of 
soQi  puthuia).  -bhaga  the  waist  J  111.373.  -bhara  a 
burden  carriea  on  the  hip  (also  a  way  of  carrying 
children)  Vin  11. 137;  iu.49.  -sandhi  the  joint  of  the 
hip  Miln  418,  Vism  185.  -samohita  (adj.)  fastened  or 
clinging  to  the  waist  J  v.206.  -sutta  a  belt,  girdle 
(as  ornament)  PvA  134.  -suttaka  a  string  or  cord 
around  the  waist  to  fasten  the  loin-cloth  Vin  11.271  ; 
also  an  ornamental  waist-band,  girdle  Vin  11. 10  7  (see 
Vin.  Texts  111.69,  142.  348). 

Kanaka  (adj.)  [Sk.  katu(ka),  from  *(s)(iner  to  cut;  cp. 
Sk.  kpjoti  (kpjtati),  Lat.  caro  "  cutlet.  — k.  is  almost 
exclusively  poetical;  usually  expl''  in  prose  by  anittba, 
tikbiQa,  ghora  (of  niraya) ;  often  comb**  with  khara, 
opp.  madhura,  e.  g.  PvA  1 19]  sharp,  bitter,  acid,  severe. 
— I.  severe,  sharp  (fig.),  of  dukkha,  vedan^,  kSm^,  etc. 
M  i.io  =  A  II. 143;  J  VI. 115;  Th  2,  451  (=ThA  281); 
SA  56.  —  painful,  terrible,  frightful  (-appl"  to  the  fruits 
of  evil  actions  and  to  the  sufferings  in  Niraya:  see 
kammapphala  &  niraya)  J  111.519;  Pv  i.io^,  ii>; 
rv.i',  7*.  —  bitter,  or  perhaps  pungent  of  taste  DhS  291  ; 
Miln  65,  112;  J  111.201.  —  2.  (nt.)  pungency,  acidity, 
bitterness  D  11.349=5  1.380;  Th  2,  503  (paiica°); 
J  VI.509.  —  Note.  Is  k.  to  be  written  instead  of  kadukkha 
at  VvA  316,  where  it  explains  maxapa  ?  Cp.  J  111.201  : 
tesax)  tai)  katukai)  Ssi,  maraijai)  ten'  upigamui). 

-udraya  causing  bitterness  or  pain  J  v.241,  cp.  duk- 
khudraya  J  v. 119.  -odaka  a  bitter  draught  Sdhp  159. 
•pabhedana  (adj.)  having  a  pungent  juice  exuding  from 
the  temples,  said  of  an  elephant  in  rut  Dh  324  (  =  tikhiva- 
mada  DhA  rv.13).  -pphala  a  kind  of  perfume  made  of 
the  berry  of  an  aromatic  plant  J  li.4i6  =  DhA  111.475 
(kappura-k°-3dini),  cp.  Sk.  kakkolaka.  —  (adj.)  of  bitter 
fruit  J  II. 106  (of  the  mango)  ;  S  1.57=  J  iii.29i  =  Dh  66 
(of  kamma) ;  Pv  i.i  i*"  (id.).  -oban^Ut  (sg.  &  pi.)  spices. 
There  are  4  enum<'  at  J  in. 86  :  hingujiraka,  singiveraka, 
marica,  pipphali ;  3  at  VvA  186  (as  tikatuka,  cp. 
katula) :  ajamoja,  hingujiraka,  lasupa;  PvA  135; 
DhA  II.  1 31.  -bhava  stinginess  DhaA  376.  -rohini  the 
black  hellebore  Vin  1.201  (as  medicine),  -vipaka  (adj.) 
having  a  bitter  result  (of  pipa)  Miln  206  ;  compar.  °tara 
S  II.  128.     -sasana  a  harsh  command  J  vi.498. 

Katakafionkati  (f.)  [der.  by  Bdhgh.  as  katuka  -I-  aficuka 
(a&c),  a  popular  etymology  (DhsA  376).  At  Dhs  1122 
and  as  v.l.  K  in  Vbh  we  have  the  spelling  katakancu- 
kata  (for  katakuiicakata  ?),  on  which  and  °knficaka 
see  Morris.  J.P.T.S.  1887,  159  sq.  and  Dhs.  irsl.  300  n'. 
—  Monis'  derivation  is  kafa  (kar)  +  kaflcuka  -I-  ta 
(kailcnka=kuftcaka  to  knflo,  to  contract),  thus  a 
der"  fr.  kaflcuka  "  bodice "  and  meaning  "  being 
tightened  in  by  a  bodice,"  i.  e.  tightness.  Although  the 
reading  katukaflc°  is  the  eetabUshed  reading,  the  var. 
lect.  katakufic°  is  probably  etym.  correct,  semantically 
undoubtedly  better.  It  has  undergone  dissimilatory 
vowel- metathesis  under  influence  of  popular  analogy 
with  katuka.  With  ku&cikata  cp.  the  similar  ex- 
pression derived  from  the  same  root :  ku^all-mukha,  of 
a  stingy  person  Pv  11.9'',  which  is  expl''  by  "  sanku 
citai)  mukhai)  akisi  "  (see  kuficita)]  closeness,  tight- 
ness, close-fistedness,  niggardliness.  Expl'*  as  "  the 
shxinking  up  of  the  heart,"  which  prevents  the  flow  or 
manifestation  of  generosity.  It  occurs  only  in  the 
stock  phrase  "  vevicchai)  kadariyar)  k.  aggahitattai) 
cittassa  "  in  maccbariya-passage  at  Nd'  6i4  =  Dhs  1 122 
=  Pug  19,  23>=Vbh  357,  371  ;  and  in  the  macchariya 
expl"  at  Vism  470. 

Katnkatta  (nt.)  pungency,  acidity,  bitterness  Miln  56,  63. 

f       Katnmiki  (f.)  [from  karoti ;  see  Sk.  krtrima  &  kuttima ; 
also  kutta  &  kutti]  artificiaUty,  outward  help,  sugges- 


tion, appl**  to  sati  Miln  78,  79  (cp.  Mtln  tfsl.  1.121  n  and 
MVastu  1.477). 

Ka(ala  (adj.)  [Sk.  katura]  containing  pungent  substances 
(generally  three:  tekatula)  Vin  1.2 10  (yagu),  cp.  tika- 
tuka. 

EkatUTiya  (adj.)  [katu  viya  ?]  impure,  defiled,  in  'Icata 
A  1.280. 

Ka^ernkkha  a  kind  of  creeper  J  vi.336  (perhaps  read 
as  next). 

Katernha  a  flowering  plant  J  vi.537  (=pupphagaccha). 
Cp.  kaseruka. 

Katt^A^  [S'l'  ^r$ta,  pp.  of  kasati,  cp.  kittha]  ploughed, 
tilled  Sn  80  ;  Miln  25.'> ;  PvA  45,  62.  -a"  untilled,  un- 
prepared An  vs  2  7.    -su"  well-ploughed  A  1.229  ;  Miln  255. 

Kattha'  (adj.)  [Sk.  ka^ta]  bad,  useless:  see  kattliaka'. 
Only  in  cpds. ;  perhaps  also  in  pakatthaka. 

-anga  pithless,  sapless,  of  no  value  (of  trees)  J  11.163== 
DhA  1. 144.  -mukha  "with  the  injurious  month,"  a 
kind  of  snake  DhsA  300. 

Kt^tlU*  (nt.)  [Brh.  ka$tha,  cp.  Obg.  holzj  1.  a  piece 
of  wood,  esp.  a  stick  used  as  fuel,  chips,  firewood 
S  i.i68  =  Sn  462;  M  1.234  (+kathala);  PvA  256 
[+  tipa).  In  phrase  "  sattussada  sa-tiQa-katth'  odaka 
sa-dhafiAa  "  (densely  populated  with  good  supply  of 
grass,  firewood,  water,  and  coru)  in  ster.  description  of 
a  prosperous  place  (cp.  Xenophon's  iroXij  o/cov/icvii 
(viaiftuv  Kal  fuyaXii  D  I.87,  III,  etc.).  Both  sg. 
(coll.)  &  pi.  as  "  sticks  "  D  11.341,  esp.  in  phrase  ka^tliag 
phaleti  to  chop  sticks  Vin  1.31  ;  Sn  p.  104;  J  11.144; 
Pv  ii.gs'  (  =  PvA  135),  or  k°g  pateti  (phateti  =  phaleti  ? 
See  pateti)  M  1.21.  Frequent  also  in  similes  :  M  1.241  = 
11.93  =  111.95  (alia  k.) ;  M  111.242  =  8  ii.97  =  iv.2i5  = 
V.212  (dve  k.) ;  A  111.6  (+  kathala) ;  iv.72  (+  ti^ia) ; 
l.i24=Pug  30,  36  {+  kathala). — 2.  a  piece  of  stick 
used  for  building  huts  (wattle  and  daub)  M  1.190. — 
3.  a  stick,  in  aTalekhiina°  (for  scraping)  Vin  11.141,  221, 
and  in  danta°  a  tooth-pick  VvA  63,  etc.  (see  danta). 
—  4.  (adj.)  in  cpds.  =  oi  wood,  wooden. 

•aggi  wood-fire,  natural  fire  A  iv.41,  45,  enumerated 
last  among  the  7  fires,  -atthag  for  the  purpose  of  fuel, 
in  phrase  k.  pharati  to  serve  as  fuel  A  11.95  =  8  111.93  = 
It  90=  J  1.482.  -atthara  a  mat  made  of  twigs  (cp. 
katasara)  J  v.  197,  also  as  -attharika  (&  °ka)  J  vi.2i  ; 
DhA  1.135;  *•  at  J  1.9;  IV.329;  VI. 57.  -kalingara  chips 
and  chafi  DhA  111.122  (cp.  k-khaQ(^a).  -khan^a  a  piece 
of  wood,  splinter,  chip,  suggesting  something  useless, 
trifling  DhA  1.32 1  (as  expl"  of  niratthar)  va  kalingarag) ; 
ThA  284  (as  expl°  of  chuttho  kalingarag  viya).  -tala 
a  wooden  key  Vin  11.148  (cp.  Vin.  Texts  111.162). 
-ta|a  a  w.  gong  DhsA  319.  -tumba  a  w.  vessel  Vin 
1.205.  -paduka  a  wooden  shoe,  clog  Vin  1.188.  -puAja 
a  heap  of  w.  A  rv.72  ;  J  11.327.  -philaka  wood-cutter 
Vism  413.  -bhatin  a  wood-cutter  Dpvs  20,  28,  where 
given  as  a  nickname  of  King  Tissa.  -maflcaka  a  wooden 
bed  MUn  366.  -maya  wooden  Vin  1.203;  J  1-289  — 
v.435.  -rupa  (&  °ka)  a  w.  figure,  doll  J  1.287.  •raha 
a  cartload  of  fire-wood  S  11.84.  •▼•liana  riding  on  a 
faggot  J  1. 136.  -vipalavita  drifting  wood  J  1.326. 
-hatthin  a  w.  elephant,  built  by  order  of  King  Cao^a- 
pajjota  to  decoy  King  Udena  (cp.  the  horse  of  Troy) 
DhA  1. 193.  -baraka  (f.  °ika)  gathering  fire-wood,  an 
occupation  of  poor  people  M  1.79;  S  1.180;  J  1.134; 
11.412  ;  IV.  148 ;  V.417  ;  Miln  331  ;  Vism  120  ;  VvA  173. 
-hann=°haraka  Vin  in. 41  ;  J  1.133  (title  of  J  no.  7. 
referred  to  at  DhA  1.349). 

Katthaka*  (m.  nt )  [to  kattbaa]  a  kind  of  reed  Dh  164; 
DhA  III. 156  (•svelu-sankhata-kattba). 

Katthaka'  (m.  pi.)  [to  kattba*]  a  kind  of  fairy  D  11.361 


Katthtssa 


Kantaka 


Katthww  (nt.)  [Sk.  ?]  a  silken  coverlet  embroidered  with 
gems  D  1.7=  Vin  1.192  =  11.163;  DA  i.87  =  AA  445. 

KatluUi  [Sk.  kvathati ;  cp.  Goth.  hva{K)  scum,  hvajjjan  to 
seethe.  The  Dhatumafijusa  (no.  132,  ed.  Andersen  & 
Smith)  comments  on  ka^h  with  "  sosSna-pakesu."  See 
also  kuthati]  i.  to  boil,  to  stew  Bdhgh  on  Vin  1.205. 
see  Vtn.  Texts  11.57  "',  where  pp.  is  given  as  kuthita. 
Similarly  Th  2.  504  (cp.  Sisters  174  n*.  but  cp.  Mil. 
trs.  11.271  "distressed";  E.  Miiller,  J.R.A.S.  1910. 
539)-  —  2-  to  be  scorched,  pp.  kafhita  (  =  hot)  Miln 
323.  325.  357.  397  —The  pp.  occurs  as  "katthita  & 
°kutthita  in  cpds  uk"  pa"  (q.  v.).     See  also  kuUhita. 

KathaU  [Sk.  kathara  (°la.  °Ua.  "lya :  all  found  in  Av.  S 
and  Divy).  to  kjTjati ;  cp.  khifi]  gravel,  pebble,  pots- 
herd J  UI.225;  V.417;  VvA  157;  comb<'  with  sakkhara 
at  D  1.84= A  1.9.  and  in  simile  at  A  1.253.  A-S  f.  comb"" 
with  kattha  at  A  1.124  =  Pug  3°,  36  ;  A  111.6  ;  as  m.  in 
same  comb"  at  Vism  261. 

Kathalaka  gravel,  potsherd  J  111.227  :  ^liln  34. 

Kathina  (adj.-n.)  [Sk.  kafhina  &  kafhora  with  dial,  th 
for  rth ;  cp.  Gr.  Kparvs,  Kparipof  strong,  rparof 
strength;  Goth.  hardus  =  Ags.  heard  =  E.  hard.  Cp. 
also  Sk.  krtsna=P.  kasina].  i.  (adj.)  hard,  firm,  stiff. 
Cp.  U.2  ;  Dhs  44.  45  (where  also  der.  f.  abstr.  akathinata 
absence  of  rigidity,  comb"*  with  akakkhalat&,  cp. 
DhsA  151  akathina-bhava)  ;  PvA  152  ("datha). — (fig.) 
hard,  harsh,  cruel  J  1.295  =  v.448  ( =  thaddha-hadaya)  ; 
adv.  °g  fiercely,  violently  Miln  273.  274. — 2.  (nt.)  the 
cotton  cloth  which  was  annually  supplied  by  the  laity 
to  the  bl-ikkhus  for  the  purpose  of  making  robes  Vin 
1.253  sq. ;  also  a  wooden  fi^me  used  by  the  bh.  in  sewing 
their  robes  Vin.  11.115-117.  —  On  the  k.  robe  see  Viu. 
1.298  sq. ;  HI.  196  sq.,  203  sq.,  261  sq. ;  iv.74.  100.  245  sq.. 
286  sq. ;  V.15.  88.  119.  172  sq. ;  218.  Cp.  Vin.  Texts 
1. 18  ;  II. 148  ;  111.92. 

-attharana  the  dedication  of  the  k.  cloth  Vin  1.2O6. 
see  next,  -atthara  the  spreading  out.  i.  e.  dedication  of 
the  k.  cloth  by  the  people  to  the  community  of  bhikkhus. 
On  rules  concerning  this  distribution  and  description  of 
the  ceremony  see  Vin  1.254  sq.  ;  Bu  IX.7 ;  cp.  Vin  v.  128 
sq..  205  -uddhara  the  withdrawal  or  suspension  of  the 
five  privileges  accorded  to  a  bhikkhu  at  the  k.  ceremony 
Vin  1.255.  259;  111.262  ;  IV.287,  288;  V.I 77- 1 79.  cp.  next 
&  Vtn.  Texts  n.157.  234.  235.  -ubbhara  =  "uddhara.  in 
kathinassa  ubbhirSya  "  for  the  suspension  of  the  k. 
privileges"  Vin  1.255.  -khandhaka  the  chapter  or 
section  treating  of  k.,  the  7th  of  the  Mahavagga  of  the 
Vinaya  Vin  11.253-267.  -civara  a  k.  robe  made  of  k. 
cloth  Bn  IX. 7.  -dussa  the  k.  cloth  Vin  1.254.  -mandapa 
a  shed  in  which  the  bhikkhus  stitched  their  k.  cloth  into 
robes  Vin  0.117.  -rajju  string  used  to  fix  the  k.  cloth 
on  to  the  frame  Vin  11.116.  -saia=:°mai^apa  Vin 
II. 1 16. 

Kathinaka  (adj.)  referringto  the  kathina  cloth  Vin  v.6i ,  1 14. 

Kajjhati  [dialect,  form  supposed  to  equal  Sk.  kar^ti. 
cp.  Prk.  ka44hai  to  pull,  tear,  kha44a  pit,  dug-out. 
See    also    Bloomfield,    J.A.O.S.     xiv.     192 1    p.    465.] 

1.  to  draw  out,  drag,  pull,  tug  J  1.193.  225,  265,  273 
(khaggag  k.  to  draw  the  sword).  —  2.  to  draw  in,  suck 
up  (udakag)  J  iv.141.  —  3.  to  draw  a  line,  to  scratch 
J.  1.78,  III.  123;  vi.56  (lekhag). 

Ka4^lia     (nt.).        1.  pulling,     drawing     Miln     231. — 

2.  refusing,  rejecting,  renunciation,  appl.  to  the  self- 
denial  of  missionary  theras  following  Gotama  Buddha's 
example  Mhvs  12,  55. 

Ka^^lianaka  tadj.)  pulling,  dragging  J  V.260. 

Kaoa  [Derivation  uncertain,  possibly  connected  with  kana  ; 
positive  of  kaniyan  =  small ;  Vedic  kaoa]  the  fine  red 


powder  between  the  husk  and  the  grain  of  rice,  husk- 
powder  D  1.9  ("homa).  expl''  at  DA  1.93  by  kuQ(^aka.  — 
(adj.)  made  of  husk-powder  or  of  finely  broken  rice,  of 
cakes  J  1.423  (k-puva  =  kun(^akena  pakka-puva). 
— akana  (adj.)  free  from  the  coating  of  red  powder, 
characteristic  of  the  best  rice  Mhvs  5,  30;  Anvs  27 
(akanar)  karoti  to  whiten  the  rice).     Cp.  k&kapa. 

-bhakkha  eating  husk-powder,    a   practice  of  c«rt. 
ascetics  D  i.i66=M  i.78=A  1.241;%. 

Kaoaya  [Derivatlcn  unknown,  cp.  Sk.  katiaya=kaiiapa] 
a  sort  of  spear,  lance  J  1.273  ;  11.364  (hke  a  spear,  of  a 
bird's  beak)  ;  Miln  339. 

-agga  the  point  of  a  spear  J  1.329  (like  .  .  .,  of  a  beak). 

Kaqavlra  [Sk.  karavira]  Nerium  odorum,  oleander,  the 
flower  of  which  is  frequently  used  in  the  garland  worn 
by  criminals  when  led  to  the  place  of  execution  (cp. 
Rouse,  /.  trsl.  iv.119  and  Mfcchakatika  X.  beginning: 
diriija-kalavila-dame.  See  also  under  kaijfha)  Vism 
183  (n) ;  DhsA  317;  SnA  283;  VvA  177;  cp.  next. 

KaQaTera=  karavira  T  111.61  ;  iv.191  ;  v.420  ;  vi.406. 

Kao&jaka  (nt.)  a  pomdge  of  broken  rice,  eaten  together 
with  sour  gruel  (bilanga-dutiya ;  always  in  this  comb" 
except  at  J  v.230)  Vin  11.77  (cp-  ^t"-  Texts  111.9)  ; 
S  1.90.  91;  A  1.145;  iv.392  ;  J  1.228;  111.299;  DhA 
111.10;  IV.77;  VvA  222.  298  (corr.  bilanka;  Hardy  at 
VvA  Index  p.  364  expl.  as  "  a  certain  weight  "(?)). 
•bhatta  a  meal  of  k.  porridge  J  v.230. 

Ka^ik&  (f.)  [cp.  kaoa]  i.  a  small  particle  of  broken  rice 
(opp.  tao^ula  a  full  grain)  J  vi.34i,  366  (°ahi  puvag 
pacitva).  2.  a  small  spot,  a  freckle,  mole,  in  a°  (adj.) 
having  no  moles  D  1.80,  and  sa°  with  moles  D.  i.^  (cp. 
DA  1.223). 

Kaqikara  (m.  nt.)  fz  kaoQikara  J  iv.440 ;  v.420 ;  the 
difference  stated  at  J.  v.422  is  kapi°=mahapupdha 
kaQQi°  =  khuddakapuppha)  [Sk.  karriikara] — i.  (m.)  the 
tree  Pterospermum  acerifoUum  J.  1.40;  v.295;  vi.269, 
537.  —  2.  (nt.)  its  (yellow)  flower  (k-puppha).  taken 
metaphorically  as  typical  emblem  of  yellow  and  of 
brightness.  Thus  in  similes  at  D.  ii.iii  (=:pita)  = 
M  11.14  (on)  =  A  V.61  (ijij)  ;  DhA  1.388;  of  the  yellow 
robes  (kasayani)  J  11.25  ;  with  ref.  to  the  blood  of  the 
heart  Vism  256  ;  =  golden  VvA  65  ;  DhA  11.250  (v.  I.  pij). 
-makula  a  k.  bud  J.  11.83. 

Kavetika  (nt.)  a  helmet  (?)  J  vi.397. 

Ea^era  (m.  f.)  [Derivation  uncertain,  just  possibly  con- 
nected with  kara.  trunk.  Sanskrit  has  karepu,  but  the 
medieval  vocabularies  give  also  kaijeru]  a  young 
elephant  J  11.342;  iv.49 ;  v. 39.  50,  416;  vi.497;  DhA 
1.196  (v.  1.)  karepuka)  —  f.  °ka  M  1.178.  —  See  also 
karenu. 

KaQta  (cp.  next)  a  thorn  Miln  351. 

Kav^a  [From  kantab'  to  cut.  Brh.  kantaka.  Spelt 
also  kanthaka]  i.  a  thorn  Sn  845 ;  Vin  1.188 ;  J  v.102  ; 
VI.  105  (in  description  of  the  Vetaraai)  ;  cp.  kusa°. 
—  2.  any  instrument  with  a  sharp  point  Sdhp  201.  — 
3.  a  bone,  fish-bone  J  1.222  ;  in  pittii>°  a  bone  of  the 
spine  D  11.297SS  (see  katafthi)  ;  M  1.80  =  245;  Vism 
271;  Sdhp  102.  —  4.  (fig)  an  obstacle,  hJndrauice, 
nuisance  ("  thorn  in  my  side  ")  ;  Kvu  572  ;  enemy, 
infestor  ;  a  dacoit,  thief,  robber  D  1.135  (sa°  and  a°,  of  the 
country  as  infested  with  dacoits  or  free  from  them.  cp. 
DA  1.296)  ;  J.  i.i86  (patikaqtaka.  enemy)  ;  v. 450;  Th  i, 
946;  DhA  1.177  (akkhimhi)  ;  VvA  301.  —  5.  (fig.)  any- 
thing sharp,  thorny,  causing  pain :  of  kama  (passions) 
S  IV. 189.  195,  198;  Ud  24;  Kvu  202;  cp.  sa°. — Thus 
grouped,  like  sarjyojanaui,  into  10  obstacles  to  perfec- 
tion (dasa  k.)  A  v.  134;  as  "bringing  much  trouble" 
J    IV. II 7.     Often   in   standing   phrase   khaou-kaQt^ka 


Kantaki 


Ka^na 


stumbling  and  obstructioii  A  1.35  ;  SnA  334.  As  abstr. 
kantakattai)  hindrance  at  Vism  269  (sadda°].  — akan- 
(aka  I.  free  from  thorns  J  11. 118;  v.260. — 2.  (fig.) 
free  from  thieves,  quiet,  peaceful  D  1.135  ;  also  not 
difficult,  easy,  happy,  bringing  blessings  (of  the  right 
path)  A  V.135  ;  Vv  i^  ;  VvA  96.  — sakantaka  i.  having 
bones  (of  food)  J  rv.192,  193.  —  2.  (fig.)  beset  with 
thieves,  dangerous  D  1.135  ;  thorny,  i.  e.  painful,  miser- 
able (of  dnggati  and  kima)  S  IV.19S  ;  Th  2,  352  ;  J 
V.2OC.  — Cp.  also  kandaka  and  nikkan^a. 

-tpacita  covered  with  thorns  J  vi.249  (cp.  °Jcita)  ; 
-ipassaya  (c=kantak'  apasraya)  a  bed  made  of  an  out- 
stretched skin,  under  which  are  placed  ^:homs  or  iron 
spikes ;  to  lie  or  stand  on  such  is  a  practice  of  certain 
naked  ascetics  D  i.i67  =  M  1.78^.  -&passayika  (adj. 
to  prec.)  "  bed-of-thoms-man  "  D  1.167?;;.  At  J 
1.493  the  reading  is  k-^passaya,  at  111.74  k-apassaya ;  at 
111.235  the  reading  is  kaiithaka-seyyai)  kappetha 
(should  it  be  k-Spassaye  seyyai)  k°  ?) ;  D  1.167  reads 
kai^tbaka-passayika.  -acita  covered  with  thorns 
J  V.167.  -idhana  a  thorny  brake,  a  thorny  hedge 
M  1. 10  (k-dh&na ;  for  dhlna— thana  see  dh&na  &  cp. 
rSja-dhSni) ;  A  1.35  ;  Miln  220.  -kasd  a  thorny  whip 
used  for  punishment  and  torture  J  111.41.  -gahana  a 
thorny  thicket  or  jungle  S  11.228.  -giunba  a  th.  bush 
J  1.208.  -lata  a  th.  creeper,  the  Capparis  Zeilanica 
J  V.I 75.     -Ta^ta  a  thorny  brake  or  hedge  M  1.448. 


"rata  a  thorny  fence  (cactus  hedge?) 


Kavtaki  (/.)  in  cpd. 
Vin  II. 154. 

ir«^^h«  r*4neilt  from  *qaelt,  primarily  neck,  cp.  Lat.  coUus 
"  the  turner."  Syn.  with  k.  is  giva,  primarily  throat, 
Brh.  kantha]  i.  throat  A  iv.131  ;  J  v.448 ;  Miln  152 
(kaijtho  akurati,  is  hoarse)  ;  Pv.\  280  (akkharani  mahata 
kanthena  uccarit&ni).  The  throat  of  Petas  is  narrow 
and  parched  with  thirst :  Pv.\  99  (k-ottba-talunai) 
tassita),  180  (suci°  like  a  needle's  eye,  cp.  sucicchidda. 
v.  1.  sucikattha  "whose  bones  are  like  needles"),  260 
(visukkha-k-ttha-jivh&).  —  2.  neck  Vin  1.15  ;  Dh  307 
(kSsiva")  ;  Vv  64"  (expl''  at  VvA  280  by  givupaga- 
sisupagadi-ibharantoi) .  Esp.  in  loc.  kanfhe  round  the 
neck,  with  ref .  to  var.  things  tied  round,  e.  g.  knDapai)  k. 
isatta^  A  iv.377 ;  knnapai)  k.  baddhag  J  1.5  ;  k.  m&U 
J  1. 166,  192  ;  k.  bandhanti  vaijdhanar)  J  111.226 ;  with 
the  wreath  of  karavira  flowers  (q.  v.)  on  a  criminal 
ready  for  execution  :  rattavanua-virala-maliya  bandha- 
kai)tha  PvA  4  (cp.  Av6  1.102  ;  11.182  :  karavira-raaU- 
baddha  [sakta  Ii.i82]-kantheguria). 

-kupa  the  cavity  of  the  throat  Mhbv  137.  -ja  pro- 
duced in  the  throat,  i.  e.  guttural  Sasv  150.  -suttaka 
an  ornamental  string  or  string  of  beads  worn  round  the 
neck  Vin  11. 106. 

Ka^thaka'  thorn,  see  kandaka 

Ka^thaka'  N.  of  Gotama's  horse,  on  which  he  left  his 
father's  palace  Mhbv  25  ;  spelt  kanthaka  at  J  1.54,  62  sq. 

Ka94a  (m.  nt.)  [perhaps  as  *kaldno  fr.  *kalad  to  break, 
cp.  Gr.  rXaiapi'if,  Lat.  clades.  etc.,  Sk.  kap^a.  See  also 
khagga  and  khan<Ja]  1.  the  portion  of  a  stalk  or  cane 
between  one  knot  and  another ;  the  whole  stalk  or 
shaft ;  the  shaft  of  an  arrow,  an  arrow  in  general 
M  1.429  (two  kinds  of  arrows :  kaccha  &  ropima,  cp. 
kaQ<la-cittaka)  ;  J  1.150  ;  11.91  ;  111.273  ;  v.39 ;  Miln 
44,  73  ;  Mhvs  25,  89.  As  arrow  also  in  the  "  Tell  " 
story  of  Culladhanuggaha  at  J  111.220  &  DhA  iv.66.  — 
2.  a  section,  portion  or  paragraph  of  a  book  DA  1.12  ; 
Pgdp  161.  —  3.  a  small  portion,  a  bit  or  lump  DhA 
1.134  (puva°)  ;  Mhvs  17.  35.  —  4.  kan^ai)  (adv.)  a 
portion  of  time,  for  a  while,  a  little  Pgdp  36.  —  See  also 
khanda,  with  which  it  is  often  confounded.  Dcr. 
upa-kandakin  (adj.)  (thin)  like  a  stalk  or  arrow 
Pv.  ii.i"  (of  a  Peti). 

-gamana  the  going  of  an  arrow,  i.  e.  the  distance 
covered  by  an  arrow  in  flight,  a  bow-shot  J  11.334  ;  cp. 


{  kaq^o.  •cittaka  (Sk.  kaocja-dtraka)  an  excellent 
arrow  A.  n.202.  -ni)I  a  quiver  J  111.220.  -pah&ra  an 
arrow-shot,  arrow- wound  Miln  16  (ekena  k-paharena 
dve  Taab&kiyi  pad&lita.  "  two  birds  killed  with  one 
stone  "),  73.  -varana  (adj.)  warding  ofi  arrows,  appL 
to  a  shield  J  vi.592  (nt.) ;  a  shield  J  iv.366. 

Ka94<kka=kaQtaka  Vin  it.318  (Bdhgh.)  ;  A  111.383;  Bu 
XI11.29.  — akandaka  free  from  thieves,  safe,  secure 
PvA  161. 

Ka94ari  (f)  sinew,  tendon  Vin  1.91,  322  (in  cpd.  kao- 
(Jara-cchinna  one  whose  tendons  (of  the  feet)  have  been 
cut)  ;  Kvu  23,  31  ;  Vism  253,  254  (where  KhA  49  reads 
mi&ja). 

Kaijk^ita  at  J  1.155  i^  misprint ;  read :  kai;u}am  assa  atthi 
ti  kandl  tai)  kav(^inai). 

ir»^^in  (adj.)  having  a  shaft  inserted,  appl.  to  the  head  of 
an  arrow  (salla)  J  1. 155  ;  (m.)  an  archer  ibid. 

Ka^4a'  (f.)  [perhaps  from  *kanad  to  bite,  scratch ;  cp.  Sk. 
kandara,  Gr.  evnlaXXv  to  bite,  cvwjwv,  mtlaXov,  etc.,  Sk. 
kaijc^u  m.  &  f .]  the  itch,  itching,  itchy  feeling,  desire  to 
scratch  Vin  1.202,  296;  J.  v.198;  Vism  345.  kai><jni] 
karoti  to  make  or  cause  to  itch  J  v.198  ;  vineti  to  allay 
the  itch,  to  scratch  J  v.  199. — (fig.)  worldly  attachment, 
irritation  caused  by  the  lusts,  in  "  kai^^ui)  sai)hanti  " 
(as  result  of  jhina)  A  rv.  437. 

-uppala  a  kind  of  lotus-blossom  D&vs  iv.48 ;  -pafic- 
chadi  an  "  itch-cloth,"  i.  e.  a  covering  allowed  to  the 
bhikkhus  when  sufiering  from  itch  or  other  cutaneous 
disease  Vin  1.296.  297;  iv.171,  172.  -rogin  (adj.) 
sufiering  from  the  itch  Khus  105. 

KaQ4o°'  ["^kap^a  in  comp"]  an  arrow-shot  (as  measure), 
in  sahassa-kapdu  sata-bheruju  Th  1,  164=  J  11-334  (but 
the  latter:  sata-bhcdo),  expl"*  at  Th  i,  164"  by  sahas- 
sakan^o  sahassa  [sata  ?]-bhumako  and  at  J  11.334  ^V 
sahassa-kancjubbedho  ti  pSsSdo  satabhumiko  ahosi ;  in 
preceding  lines  the  expression  used  is  "  sahassa- kaQ^a- 
gamanai)  uccag." 

KaQ4DkB  the  itch,  itchy  feeling,  irritation  J  v.198. 

Kav^ovsti  (kanduvati)  [Denom.  fr.  kaQiJu.  Sk.  kandS- 
yati]  I.  to  itch,  to  be  itchy,  to  be  irritated,  to  sufier 
from  itch  Vin  1.205;  H.ui;  J  v.198  (kaQ^uviyati) ; 
DhA  III. 297  (kaijijuvanti).  — i.  to  scratch,  rub,  scrape 
A.  11.207  ;  J  VI. 413  ;  Pug  56. 

Ka^4ovana  (nt.)  [fr.  kao^nvati]  i.  itching,  itchy  feeling 
DhA  1.440 ;  cp.  DhStumaiijusi  no.  416  kan^uvana. — 
2.  scratching,  scraping  M  1.508;  J  11.249  (appl.  to  bad 
music) . 

Ifn^^n^  {rJ  )  a.  strip  of  cloth  used  to  mark  the  kathina 
robe,  in  °karana  Vin  1.254,  *°<1  °ka  ibid.  290. 

KaQ^fiyana  (nt.)  [See  karu^uvana]  the  itch  J  v.69. 

KaQ^olika  (f)  a  wicker-basket  or  stand  Vin  11. 114,   143 

(see  Vin.  Texts  in. 86). 

Kawa  [Vedic  karoa.  orig.  not  associated  with  hearing, 
therefore  not  used  to  signify  the  sense  (sota  is  used 
instead;  cp.  akkhi>  cakkhu),  but  as  "projection"  to 
*ker,  from  which  also  Sk.  iniga  horn.  Cp.  Gr.  ripnc 
helmet;  Lat.  comu  &  cervus=E.  comer,  horn  <S  hart. 
Further  related  Sk.  airi  (caturairah  four-cornered), 
$a.skuli  auditory  passage;  Lat.  2cer=Gr.  acpic, 
I'tKaviif,  A£i''c ;  Ger.  ecke ;  also  Sk.  Sula  A  P.  kopa] 
I.  a  comer,  an  angle  Vin  1.48,  286;  J  1.73:  111.42; 
V.38;  VI.519;  PvA  74;  DhA  11.178;  Davs  II. III. 
— ci7ara°  the  edge  of  the  garment  Vism  389.  Freq.  in 
cpd,  catu°  (catukkanqa)  four-cornered,  square,  as  Ep. 
of  Niraya  Nd'  304".  =  Pv  i.io"  (expl''   by  catu-kopa). 


Ka^naka 

Also  of  cloth  Vin  n.228;  J  1.426;  iv.250.  — 2.  the  ear 
Sn  608;  J  1. 146,  194;  DhA  1.390  (dasa").  Freq.  in 
phrase  kannai)  chindati  (to  cut  oS  the  ear)  as  punish- 
ment, e.  g.  A  1.47.  —  loc.  kanne  in  the  ear,  i.  e.  in  a  low 
tone,  in  a  whisper  DhA  t.i66.  —  3.  the  tip  of  a  spoon 
J.  1.347.     — assakanna  N.  of  a  tree  (see  under  assa^). 

-alankara  an  ornament  for  the  ear  J  v.409.  -ayata 
(mutta)  (a  pearl)  inserted  in  the  lobe  of  the  ear  J  11.  275, 
276.  -kita  (should  it  be  kaQha°  ?  cp.  paQsnkita,  malag- 
gakita;  kita=kata)  spoiled,  rusty,  blunt  Vin  11. 113  (of 
needles) ;  dirty,  mouldy  Vin  1.48  (of  a  floor) ;  11.209  (of 
walls);  stained,  soiled  Vin  iv.281  (of  robes),  -giithaka 
the  cerumen,  wax,  of  the  ear,  Vin  11. 134;  Sn  197  = 
J  1. 146.  -calana  shaking  the  ears  J  111.99.  -cula  the 
root  of  the  ear  J  vi.488  ;  as  "ciilika  at  J  11.276  ;  Vism  255  ; 
DhA  IV.  1 3.  -chidda  (nt.)  the  orifice  of  the  ear,  the 
outer  auditory  passage  (cp.  suci-chidda  eye  of  the  needle) 
Vin  III. 39 ;  J  11.244,  26'-  -chinna  one  whose  ears  are 
cut  off  Vin  1.322  ;  Kvu  31.  •cheda  cutting  or  tearing 
off  of  the  ear  Miln  197,  290.  -jappaka  one  who  whispers 
into  the  ear,  one  who  tells  secretly,  also  a  gossip  Vin 
11.98 ;  sa°  whispered  into  the  ear,  appl.  to  a  method  of 
taking  votes  ibid.  Cp.  upakannakajappin.  -jappana 
whispering  into  the  ear  D  i.i  i  ;  DA  1.97.  -tela  anoint- 
ing the  ear  with  medicinal  oil  D  1.12  (expl""  at  DA  1.98, 
where  reading  is  °telanai)).  -nasa  ear  &  nose  J  11.117  ; 
Miln  5  (°chinna).  -patta  the  lobe  of  the  ear  J  v.463. 
As  °panta  at  ThA  211.  -pali  =  °patta  Th  2,  259 
(expl**  by  °panta).  -pitt^I  the  upper  part  or  top  of  the 
ear  DhA  1.394.  -puccha  the  "  tail  "  or  flap  of  the  ear 
Sdhp  i68.  -bila  orifice  of  the  ear  Vism  195.  -bheri  a 
sort  of  drum.  Cp.  ix.24.  -mala  "  ear-dirt,"  ear-wax, 
in  "harant,  an  instrument  for  removing  the  wax 
from  the  ear  Vin  11.135.  -mala  a  garland  ,from 
comer  to  comer  (of  a  temple)  Divs  ii.iii.  -munda 
I.  (adj.)  one  whose  ears  have  been  shorn  or  clipped 
Pv  II. 12'*  (of  the  dog  of  Hell,  cp.  PvA  152  chinna- 
kaoQa). — 2.  (°ka)  "with  blunt  corners,"  N.  of  the 
first  one  of  the  fabulous  7  Great  Lakes  (satta-maha- 
sara)  in  the  Himavant,  enum''  at  J  v.415 ;  Vism 
416;  DA  1. 164.  -miila  the  root  of  the  ear,  the  ear 
in  gen.  J  1.335;  111.124;  loc.  fig  in  a  low  tone  DhA 
1. 173;  near,  near  by  DhA  ii.8  (mama  k.).  -roga  a 
disease  of  the  ear  DhsA  340.  -valli  the  lobe  of  the  ear 
Mhvs  25,  94.  -vijjhana  perforating  the  ear,  "mangala 
the  ceremony  of  ear-piercing  DhA  11.87 ;  <^P-  mangala. 
-vedha  (cp.  prec.)  ear-piercing,  a  quasi  religious  cere- 
mony on  children  J  v.  1 67.  -sakkhali  &  °ika  the  orifice 
or  auditory  passage  of  the  ear  DhA  1.148;  DhsA  334, 
in  which  latter  passage  "ikatj  paharati  means  to  im- 
pinge on  the  ear  (said  of  the  wind) ;  "ikar)  bhindati 
(  =  bhindanto  viya  paharati)  to  break  the  ear  (with 
unpleasant  words)  DhA  11. 178  (T.  sankhalir),  v.  1. 
sakkhalir)).  -sankhali  a  small  chain  attached  to  the 
ear  with  a  small  ornament  suspended  from  it  J  v.438. 
-sandhoTika  washing  the  ears  A  v. 202.  -sukha  i. 
(adj.)  pleasant  to  the  ear,  agreable  D  i.4  =  M  1.179.  268 
=  A  n.209;w;  Miln  i;  DA  i.75  =  DhsA  397;  —  2.  (nt.) 
pleasant  speech  J  11. 187;  v. 167;  opp.  kanna-sula. 
-sutta  an  ornamental  string  hanging  from  the  ear  Vin 
II. 1 43.  -suttaka  a  string  from  corner  to  comer,  a 
clothes-line  Vin  1.286.  -siila  i.  a  piercing  pain  (lit. 
stake)  in  the  ear.  ear-ache  VvA  243.  —  2.  what  is  dis- 
agreeable to  hear,  harsh  speech  DhsA  397  (opp.  °sukha). 
-sota  the  auditory  passage,  the  ear  (+  nasika-sotani, 
as  ubho  sotani,  i.  e.  hettha  &  uparima)  D  1.106  =  Sn  108  ; 
A  IV.86 ;  J  11.359  ;  Miln  286.  357  ;  DhA  11.72. 

Kawaka  (&  °ilta)  (adj.)  [fr.  ka^oa]  having  corners  or  ears 
(-°);  f.  °ika  Vin  11.137;  J  11. 185.  — kaja-kaninika  see 
under  ka|a. 

Kawavant  (adj.)  [fr.  kaoija]  having  an  (open)  ear,  i.  e. 
clever,  sharp  J  11. 261  ( =  kanqachiddar)  pana  na  kassaci 
n'atthi  C). 


8  Kanha 

I  Ka^Qiki  (f.)  [cp.  kaqijaka  &  Sk.  kanjikaj  i.  an  ornament 
for  the  ear,  in  °Iakkhana :  see  below.  —  2.  the  pericarp 
of  a  lotus  J  1. 152,  183;  V.416;  Miln  361;  Vism  124 
(paduma") ;  VvA  43.  —  3.  the  comer  of  the  upper  story 
of  a  palace  or  pagoda,  house-top  J  1.20 1  ;  111.146,  318, 
431,  472;  DhA  1.77  (kutagara°);  DA  1.43;  VvA  304; 
Bdhd  92.  — 4.  a  sheaf  in  the  form  of  a  pinnacle  DhA 
1.98.  —  In  cpds.  kannika°. 

-baddha  bound  into  a  sheaf  ;  fig.  of  objects  of  thoughts 
DhA  1. 304.  -mandala  part  of  the  roof  of  a  house 
J.  III. 317;  DhA  111.66;  VI. 178.  -rukkha  a  tree  or  log. 
used  to  form  the  top  of  a  house  J  i.20i=DhA  1.269. 
-lakkhana  the  art  of  telling  fortune  by  marks  on  orna- 
ments of  the  ear,  or  of  the  house-top  D  1.9  (=:pilan- 
dhana-k°  pi  geha-k°  pi  vasena  DA  1.94). 

Kawik&ra  see  kanikara. 

KaQha  (adj.)  [cp.  Vedic  krsoa,  Lith.  k^rszas]  dark,  black, 
as  attr.  of  darkness,  opposed  to  light,  syn.  with  kala 
(q.  V.  for  etym.) ;  opp.  sukka.  In  general  it  is  hard  to 
separate  the  lit.  and  fig.  meanings,  an  ethical  implication 
is  to  be  found  in  nearly  all  cases  (except  I.).  The  con- 
trast with  sukka  (brightness)  goes  through  all  applica- 
tions, with  ref.  to  light  as  well  as  quality.  —  I.  Of  the 
sense  of  sight :  k-sukka  dark  &  bright  (about  black  & 
white  see  nila  &  seta),  forming  one  system  of  colour- 
sensations  (the  colourless,  as  distinguished  from  the 
red-green  and  yellow-blue  systems).  As  such  enum**  in 
connection  with  quasi  definition  of  vision,  together  with 
nila,  pita,  lohita.  raafijettha  at  D  11.328  =  M  1.509  sq. 
=  11.201  (see  also  mafljettha).  —  II.  (objective). 
I.  of  dark  (black),  poisonous  snakes :  kanha  (f.)  J  11.215 
(  =  kaia-sappa  C) ;  °sappa  J  1.336;  111.269.  347;  v.446; 
Vism  664  (in  simile) ;  Miln  1 49 ;  PvA  62  ;  °sisa  with 
black  heads  A  111.241  (kimi).  —  2.  of  (an  abundance  of) 
smooth,  dark  (= shiny)  hair  (cp.  in  meaning  E.  gloom: 
gloss  =  black :  shiny),  as  Ep.  of  King  Vasudeva  Pv  11. 6', 
syn.  with  Kesava  (the  Hairy,  cp.  'ATtiXkatv  OwXmoc 
Samson,  etc.,  see  also  siniddha-,  nila-,  kala-kesa). 
sukaqha-sisa  with  very  dark  hair  J  v.205,  also  as 
sukanha-kanha-sisa  J  v.202  (cp.  susukaia).  °ja^  an 
ascetic  with  dark  &  glossy  hair  J  vi.507,  cp.  v.205 
sukaQhajatila.  °aiijana  glossy  polish  J  v.  155  (expl""  as 
sukhumakaQha-lom'  acitatta).  —  3.  of  the  black  trail 
of  fire  in  "vattanin  (cp.  Vedic  kfsna-vartanig  agnig 
R.V.  VIII. 23,  19)  S  1.69=  J  III. 140  (cp.  111.9) ;  J  V.63.  — 
4.  of  the  black  (fertile)  soil  of  Avanti  "  kaqh-uttara  " 
black  on  the  surface  Vin  1.195.  —  HI.  (Applied). 
I.  °pakkha  the  dark  (moonless)  half  of  the  month, 
during  which  the  spirits  of  the  departed  suffer  and  the 
powers  of  darkness  prevail  PvA  135,  cp.  Pv  111.6*,  see 
also  pakkha^  3.  —  2.  attr.  of  all  dark  powers  and  any- 
thing belonging  to  their  sphere,  e.  g.  of  Mara  Sn  355, 
439  (=Namuci);  of  demons,  goblins  (pisaca)  D  1.93 
with  ref.  to  the  "  black-bom  "  ancestor  of  the  Kaqha- 
yanas  (cp.  Dh  1.263  kala-varina),  cp.  also  kala  in 
"sunakha,  the  Dog  of  Purgatory  PvA  152.  —  3.  of  a 
dark,  i.  e.  miserable,  unfortunate  birth,  or  social  con- 
dition D  lit. 8 1  sq.  (brahmano  va  sukko  vanpo.  kanho 
a&iio  vapijo).  °abhijati  a  special  species  of  men 
according  to  the  doctrine  of  GosSla  DA  1.162  ;  A 
HI. 383  sq.  °abhijatika  "  of  black  birth."  of  low  social 
grade  D  111.251  =  A.  111.384 ;  Sn  563;  cp.  Th  i,  833  and 
J.P.T.S.  1893,  II  ;  in  the  sense  of  "  evil  disposition  "  at 
J  V.87  (expl"*  as  kalaka-sabhava).  —  4.  of  dark,  evil 
actions  or  qualities:  °dhainma  A  v.232  =  Dh  87; 
D  111.82  ;  Sn  967 ;  Pug  30  ;  Miln  200,  337 ;  "pafipada 
J  1. 105,  and  °magga  the  evil  way  A  v.244,  278  ;  °bhava- 
kara  causing  a  low  (re-)birth  J  IV.9  (-f-  papa-kam- 
mani),  and  in  same  context  as  dhamma  comb""  with 
°sukka  at  A  iv.  33  ;  Sn  526  (where  kanha°  for  kaQha°) ; 
Miln  37 ;  °kainma  "  black  action  "  M  1.39 ;  °vipaka 
black  result.  4  kinds  of  actions  and  4  results,  viz. 
kai}ha°,     sukka°,     kanha-sukka°,     akaoha-asukka°     D 


I 


Kata 


Kata 


iii.230  =  M  1.389  sq.  =  A  11.230  sq. ;  Nett  232.  akanha 
I.  not  dark,  i.  e.  light,  in  "netta  with  bright  eyes,  Ep. 
of  King  Pingala-netta  J  11.242  in  contrast  with  Mdra 
(although  pingala-cakkhu  is  also  Ep.  of  Mara  or  his 
representatives,  cp.  J  v.42  ;  Pv  11.4').  —  2.  not  evil, 
i.  e.  good  A  11.230,  231.  — atikanha  very  dark  Vin  IV.7  ; 
sukanha  id.  see  above  11.2. 

Kata  (&  sometimes  kafa)  [pp.  of  karotil  done,  worked, 
made.  Extremely  rare  as  v.  trs.  in  the  common  meaning 
of  E.  make,  Ger.  raaclien,  or  Fr.  faire  (see  the  cognate 
kapp  and  jaa.  also  uppajjati  &  vissajjati) ;  its  proper 
sphere  of  application  is  either  ethical  (as  papar),  kusalar), 
kammag  :  cp.  11.  i  b)  or  in  such  combinations,  where  its 
original  meaning  of  "  built,  prepared,  worked  out  "  is 
still  preserved  (cp.  i.i  a  nagara,  and  2  a). 

I.  As  verb-determinant  (predicative).  —  i.  in  verbal 
function   (Pass.)   with   nominal   determination  "  done, 
made  "(a) in  predicative  (epithetic) position  :Dh  1 7  (papar) 
me  katai)  evil  has  been  done  by  me),  68  (tail  ca  kammag 
katat)V    150   (atthinag  nagarag   katai)  a  city  built  of 
bones,  of  the  body),  173  (yassa  papai)  katai)  kammar)). 
—  (b)  in  absolute  (prothetic)  position,  often  with  expres- 
sion of  the  agent  in  instr.  D  1.84=  177  =  M  1.40  =  Sn  p.  16 
(in  formula  katar)  karanlyar),  etc.,  done  is  what  had  to 
be  done,   cp.  arahant  ll.A.) ;  Vin  111.72   (katar)   maya 
kalyJnar)    akatai]    mayJ    papai)) ;    Pv    1.5'    (amh<lkai) 
kata  puja  done  to  us  is  homage).  —  So  also  in  compo- 
sition (°-),  e.  g.   (nahapakehi)  "parikammata   the  pre- 
parations (being)  finished  (by  the  barbers)  J  vi.145; 
(tena)    "paricaya   the    acquaintance   made    (with    him) 
VvA  24  ;  PvA  4  ;  (tattha)  °paricayata  the  acquaintance 
(with  that  spot)  VvA  331  ;  (tesag)  °pubba  done  before 
D    11.75  =  A    IV.17;    (kena)    J    vi.575  ;    "matta   (made) 
drunk  Th  i,  199 ;  (cira)  °sai)sagga  having  (long)  been  in 
contact  with,    familiar   J    in. 63    (and   a°).     2.  in   adj. 
(med-passive)  function  (kata  &  kata) ;  either  passive : 
made,  or  made  of;  done  by  =  being  like,  consisting  of; 
or  medio-reflexive :  one  who  has  done,  having  done ; 
also  "  with  "  (i.  e.  this  or  that  action  done).  —  (a)  in 
pregnant  meaning :  prepared,  cultivated,  trained,  skilled  ; 
kat-akata   prepared   &   natural   Vin    1.206   (of   yusa) ; 
akata  natural  ibid.,  not  cultivated  (of  soil)  Vin  1.48  = 
n.209  ;  DA  1.78,  98  ;  untrained  J  111.57,  58. — °atta  self- 
possessed,  disciplined  J  iv.291  ;  "indiya  trained  in  his 
senses   Th    i,   725;   "(kpasana  skilled,    esp.   in  archery 
M  1.82;   S   1.62;   A  ii.48  =  iv.429;   S  1.99;   J   iv.2ii: 
Miln   352  ,   Icamma  practised,   skilled   J   v.243 ;   of  a 
servant  S  1.205  (read  Sse  for  ase),  of  a  thief  A  m.102 
(cp.  below  ij.i  a) ;  "phana  having  (i.  e.  with)  its  hood 
erected,  of  a  snake  J  vi.166;  "buddhi  of  trained  mind, 
clever  J  111.58  ;  a"  ibid. ;  °mallaka  of  made-up  teeth,  an 
artificial  back-scratcher  Vin  11.316;  a°  not  artificially 
made,  the  genuine  article  Vin  11.106;  °yogga  trained 
serviceable    S    1.99;    a°    useless    S    r.98.      °rupa    done 
natnrally,    spontaneously   J    v.317   (expl'*  by  "janiya ; 
•sabhava)  ;  °venl  having  (i.  e.  with)  the  hair  done  up 
into  a  chignon  j  v.431  ;  °hattha  (one)  who  has  exercised 
his  hands,  dexterous,  skilful,  esp.  in  archery  M  1.82; 
S  1.62,  98;  11.266;  A  11.48;  J  1V.211,:  v.41  ;  VI.448; 
Miln  353 ;  DhA  1.358 ;  a°  unskilled,  awkward  S  1.98 ; 
su°  well-trained  J  v  41   (cp.  "upisana) ,   "hatthika   an 
artificial  or  toy-elephant   J   vl.551.  —  (b)   in  ordinary 
meaning  :  made  or  done ,  "kamma  the  deed  done  (in  a 
former  existence)  J  1.167;  VvA  252;  PvA  10  ;  °pitt*>a 
made  of  flour  (dough)  PvA  16  (of  a  doll)  ;  "bhava  the 
performance   or   happening   of   J    111.400 ;    Mhbv    33  ; 
°sanketa   (one  who  has  made  an  agreement)   J  v.436 
—  (c)  with  adverbial  determination  (su°,  du"  ;  cp.  durato, 
puro,  atta,  sayai],  &  11. 2  c) :  sukata  well  laid  out,  of  a 
road   J  VI. 293,  well  built,  of  a  cart  Sn   300  =  304;   J 
IV. 395,  well  done,  i.  e.  good  A  1.102  ("kamma-karin  doing 
good  works),     -dukkata  badly  made,  of  a  robe  Vin  iv.279 
(t),   badly  done,   i.   e.   evil   A   1. 102    ("kamma  karin) ; 
sukata-dukkata  good  &  evil  ("kammani  deeds)  D  1.27  = 


55  =  S  IV.351  ;  Miln  5,  25.  3.  as  noun  (nt.)  katag  that 
which  has  been  done,  the  deed.  —  (a)  absolute :  J  111.26 
(katassa  appatikaraka  not  reciprocating  the  deed)  ; 
V.434  (katag  anukaroti  he  imitates  what  has  been  done) 
kat-Akatag  what  has  been  done  &  left  undone  Vin 
IV. 2 1 1  ;  katani  akatani  ca  deeds  done  &  not  done 
Dh  50.  —  (b)  uith  adv.  determination  (su°,  du") : 
sukatag  goodness  (in  moral  sense)  Sn  240;  Dh  314; 
dukkatag  badness  Vin  1.76;  11.106;  Dh  314;  dukkata- 
karin  doing  wrong  Sn  664 

II.  As  noun-determinant  (attributive)  in  composition 
(var.  applications  &  meanings).  —  i.  As  i"  pt.  oj 
comp'':  Impersonal,  denoting  the  result  or  finishing  of 
that  which  is  implied  in  the  object  with  ref.  to  the  act 
or  state  resulting,  i.  e.  "  so  and  so  made  or  done  "  ; 
or  personal,  denoting  the  person  affected  by  or  concerned 
with  the  act.  The  lit.  translation  would  be  "  having 
become  one  who  has  done  "  (act. ;  see  a),  or  "  to  whom 
has  been  done  "  (pass. :  see  b).  ^  (a)  medio-aclive. 
Temporal  :  the  action  being  done,  i.  e.  "  after."  The 
noun-determinates  usually  bear  a  relation  to  time, 
especially  to  meal-times,  as  kat-anna-kicca  having 
finished  his  meal  Davs  1.59;  "bhatta-kicca  after  the 
meal  J  iv.123 ;  PvA  93 ;  "purebhatta-kicca  having 
finished  the  duties  of  the  morning  DA  1.45  sq. ;  SnA 
131  sq.  ;  "patarasa  breakfast  J  1.227;  DhA  1.117,  a" 
before  br.  A  iv.64 ;  "patarasa-bhatta  id.  J  vi.349 ; 
"Anumodana  after  thanking  (for  the  meal)  J  1.304; 
"bhatt'Anumodana  after  expressing  satisfaction  with  the 
meal  PvA  141.  In  the  same  application:  kat-okasa 
having  made  its  appearance,  of  kamma  Vv  32*  (cp. 
VvA  113)  ;  PvA  63  ;  °kamma(-cora)  (a  thief)  who  has 
just  "  done  the  deed,"  i.  e.  committed  a  theft  J  111.34  ; 
Vism  180  (katakamma  cora  &  akata°  thieves  who  have 
finished  their  "  job  "  &  those  who  have  not) ;  Dh.\ 
11.38  (corehi  katakammag  the  job  done  by  the  th.),  cp. 
above  1.2  a;  Icala  "done  their  time,"  deceased,  of 
Petas  J  III.  1 64  (pete  kalakate^ ;  PvA  29,  cp.  kala; 
"civara  after  finishing  his  robe  Vin  1.255,  265;^'pac- 
cuggamana  having  gone  forth  to  meet  J  m.  93-  °pani- 
dhana  from  the  moment  of  his  making  an  earnest 
resolve  (to  become  a  Buddha)  VvA  3;  "pariyosiU 
finished,  ready,  i.  e.  after  the  end  was  made  VvA  250 ; 
"buddha-kicca  after  he  had  done  the  obligations  of  a 
Buddha  VvA  165,  319;  DA  1.2  ;  "marana  after  dying, 
i.  e.  dead  PvA  29;  ""massu-karama  after  having  his 
beard  done  J  v.309  (see  note  to  11. i  b).  —Qualitative  : 
with  ethical  import,  the  state  resulting  out  of  action, 
i.  e.  of  such  habit,  or  "  like,  of  such  character."  The 
qualification  is  either  made  by  kamma,  deed,  work,  or 
kicca,  what  can  be  or  ought  to  be  done,  or  any  other 
specified  action,  as  °papa-kamma  one  who  has  done 
wrong  DhA  1.360  (&  a°) ;  °karanlya  one  who  has  done 
all  that  could  be  done,  one  who  is  in  the  state  of  per- 
fection (an  Arahant),  in  formula  arahag  khin'asavo 
vusitava  ohitabharo  (cp.  above  i.i  b  &  arahant  ii.A) 
M  1.4,  235  ;  It  38 ;  Miln  138  ;  °kicca  having  performed 
his  obligations,  perfected,  Ep.  of  an  Arahant,  usually  in 
comb"  with  anasava  S  f.47,  178;  Dh  386;  Pv  ii.6»: 
Th  2,  337,  as  adj. :  kata-kiccSni  hi  arahato  indriyani 
Nett  20  ;  "kiccata  the  perfection  of  Arahantship  Miln 
339.  —  With  other  determinations  :  -agasa  one  who  has 
done  evil  Sdhp  294.  -Adhikara  having  exerted  one- 
self, one  who  strives  after  the  right  path  J  1.56  ;  Miln  115. 
-iparadha  guilty,  a  transgressor  J  111.42.  -Abhinihara 
(one)  who  has  formed  the  resolution  (to  become  a 
Buddha)  J.  1.2;  DhA  1.135.  -Abhinivesa  (one)  who 
studies  intently,  or  one  who  has  made  a  strong  deter- 
mination J  I.I  10  (&  a"),  -ussaha  energetic  Sdhp  127. 
-kalyana  in  passage  kata-kalyino  kata-kusalo  kata- 
bhiruttano  akata-papo  akata-luddho  (luddo)  [:  °tbad- 
dho  It]  akata-kibbiso  having  done  good,  of  good 
character,  etc.  A  ii.i74  =  Vin  in.72  =  It  25  =  DhsA  383  ; 
PvA  1 74 ;  also  Pass,  to  whom  something  good  has  been 
done  J  1. 1 37;  11M2  :  Pv  11. 9*;  akata- kalyaija  a  man  of 


Kataka 


lo 


Katipaya 


bad  actions  It  25 ;  Pv  11. t*.     -kibbisa  a  guilty  person 

M  1.39  ;  Vin  m.72  (a"),  o(  beings  tormented  in  Purgatory 

Pv  rv'.7' ;  PvA  59.     •kusala  a  good  man  :  see  °kalycl?a. 

-thaddha  hard-hearted,  unfeeling,  cruel :  see  °kalyclna. 

-nissama  untiring,  valiant,  bold  J  v. 243.     -parappavada 

practised  in  disputing  with  others  DA  i.i  17.     .papa  an 

evil-doer  It  25;  Pv  11. 7^  {+  akata-kaly&na) ;  PvA  5; 

a°  :  see  °kalyaiia.     •puftfia  one  who  has  done  good  deeds, 

a  good  man  D  11. 144  ;  Dh  16,  18,  220  ;  Pv  111.5";  Miln  129; 

PvA  5.  176 ;  a°  one  who  has  not  done  good  (in  previous 

lives)  Miln  250 ;  VvA  94.     -puflflata  the  fact  of  having 

done  good  deeds  D  in. 2 76  (pubbe  in  former  births); 

A  II. 31  ;  Sn  260,  cp.  KhA  132,  230  ;  J  11. 1 14.     -bahukara 

having  done  much  favour,  obliging  Davs  iv.39.    -bhlrut- 

tana  one  who  has  offered  protection   to   the  fearful : 

see  "kalyaija.     -bhumikanuna   one   who   has  laid  the 

ground-work     (of     sanctification)    Miln     352.       -ludda 

cruel    M   111.165;    a°   gentle  Nett    180;    cp   "kalyapa. 

-▼inasaka  (one)  who  has  caused  ruin  J  1.467.     -vissasa 

trusting,  confiding  J  1.389.     -ssama  painstaking,  taking 

trouble  Sdhp  277  (and  a°).  —  (b)  medio-passive  :  The 

state  as  result  of  an  action,  which  affected  the  person 

concerned   with   the   action    (reflexive   or   passive),   or 

"  possessed   of,    afflicted    or   affected   with."     In    this 

application  it  is  simply  periphrastic  for  the  ordinary 

Passive.  —  Note.  In  the  case  of  the  noun  being  incapable 

of  functioning  as  verb  (when  primary),  the  object  in 

question  is  specified  by  °kainma  or  "kicca,  both  of  which 

are  then  only  supplementary  to  the  initial  kata°,  e.  g. 

kata-massu-kamma   "  having  had   the   beard    (-doing) 

done,"  as  diff.  fr.  secondary  nouns  (i.  e.  verb-derivations). 

e.  g.  kat-Abhiseka  "  having  had  the  anointing  done." 

—  In  this  application  :  °citta-kamma  decorated,  varie- 
gated DhA  1. 192  ;  °danda-kamma  afflicted  with  punish- 
ment (=daijdayita  punished)  Vin  1.76;  "massu-kamraa 
with  trimmed  beard,  after  the  beard-trimming  J  v.309 
(cp.  J  III.  1 1  &  karaiia).  —  Various  combinations:  kat- 
afijaJin  with  raised  hands,  as  a  token  of  veneration  or 
suppUcation  Sn  1023;  Th  2,  482;  J  i.i7  =  Bu  24,  27; 
PvA  50,  141  ;  VvA  78.  -attha  one  who  has  received 
benefits  J  1.378.  -Anuggaha  assisted,  aided  J  11.449; 
VvA  102.  -&bhiseka  anointed,  consecrated  Mhvs  26,  6. 
-Apakara  assisted,  befriended  J  1.378  ;  PvA  1 16.  -okasa 
one  who  has  been  given  permission,  received  into 
audience,  or  permitted  to  speak  Vin  1.7;  D  11.39,  277; 
Sn  1030,  1031  (°ava°) ;  J  V.140  ;  vi.341  ;  Miln  95.  '  -jaU- 
hingulika  done  up,  adorned  with  pure  vermilion  J  111.303. 
-namadheyya  having  received  a  name,  called  J  v.492. 
-patisanthara  having  been  received  kindly  J  vi.iGo; 
DhA  J.80.  -pariggaba  being  taken  to  wife,  married  to 
(instr.)  PvA  161  (&  a"),  -paritta  one  on  whom  a  pro- 
tective spell  has  been  worked,  charm-protected  Mihi  152. 
-bhaddaka  one  to  whom  good  has  been  done  VvA  1 16. 
-sakkara  honoured,  revered  J  v.353  ;  Mhvs  9,  8  (eu°). 
-sangaha  one  who  has  taken  part  in  the  redaction  of  the 
Scriptures  Mhvs  5,  io6.  -samiaha  clad  in  armour 
DhA  1.358.     -sikkha  (having  been)  trained  Miln  353. 

—  3.  As2'>*  pt.  of  comp*  ;  Denoting  the  performance  of 
the  verbal  notion  with  ref.  to  the  object  affected  by  it, 
i.  e.  simply  a  Passive  of  the  verb  implied  in  the  deter- 
minant, with  emphasis  of  the  verb-notion  :  "  made  so 
&  so,  used  as,  reduced  to"  (garukata  =  garavita). — 
(a)  with  nouns  (see  s.  v.)  e.  g.,  anabhava-kata,  kavi°, 
kala-vanna°  (reduced  to  a  black  colour)  Vin  1.48  = 
11.209,  tal'Svatthu",  pamana",  bahuli°,  yani°,  sankhSr'- 
flpekKha",  etc.  —  (b)  with  adjectives,  e.  g.  garu°,  bahu°. 

—  (c)  with  adverbial  substitutes,  e.  g.  atta°.  para° 
(parai)°),  sacchi",  sayag,  etc. 

Kataka  (nt.)  [fr.  kantati»]  a  scrubber,  used  after  a  bath 
Vm  11.129,  143  ;  cp.  Vin.  Texts  11.318. 

Katafifin  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  krtajfia]  Ut.  knowing,  i.  e. 
acknowledging  what  has  been  done  (to  one),  i.  e.  grate- 
ful often  in  comb"  with  katavedin  grateful  and  mind- 
ful of    benefits  S  11.   272;  A  i.87  =  Pug  26;  Vv  81"; 


Sdhp  509,  524.  akataflflu  1.  ungrateful  S  1.223; 
J  111.26  (==kata-guQai)  ajananto  C),  474;  iv.134; 
PvA  116;  Bdhd  81.  —  2.  (separate  akata-fli^n)  know- 
ing the  Uncreated,  i.  e.  knowing  Nibbana  Dh  97,  383 ; 
DhA  11.188;  rv.139.  —  akataiifiu-riipa  (&  "sambhavaj 
of  ungrateful  nature  J  iv.98,  99. 

Katafiflnti  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  last]  gratefulness  (defined  at 
KhA  144  as  katassa  jananata)  Sn  265 ;  J  1.122  (T.  °nS, 
v.  1.  °ta) ;  ni.25  ;  Pv  II. 9' ;  VvA  63  ;  Sdhp  497,  540.  In 
comb"  with  katavedita  S  ir.272  ;  A  1.61  ;  11.226,  229. 
katafiflu-katavedita  J  111.492.  -akataflfluti  ungrate- 
fulnes.s,  in  comb"  with  akatavedita  A  1.61  ;  111.273 ; 
J  V.419 ;  as  one  of  the  4  offences  deserving  of  Niraya 
A  11.226. 

Katatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  kata,  cp.  Sk.  kftatvai)]  the  f'oing 
of,  performance  of,  only  in  abl.  katatta  D  11. 2. j 
A  1.56;  J  111.128;  Dhs43i,654  ;  SnA356;  DhA  111. 154; 
IV.  142.  Used  adverbially  in  meaning  of  "  owing  to,  on 
account  of  "  Miln  275  ;  DhsA  262  ;  Mhvs  3,  40.  -akatatta 
through  non-performance  of,  in  absence  or  in  default  of 
A.  1.56;  PvA  69,  154. 

Katana  (nt.)  [fr.  kata]  a  bad  deed,  injuring,  doing  evil 
(cp.  katana)  J  iv.42  (yam  me  akkhasi  .  .  .  katanai) 
katao),  cp.  Morris  in  J.P.T.S.  1893,  15. 

Katama  (adj.)  [cp.  Vedic  katama,  interr.  pron.  with 
formation  of  num.  ord.,  in  function  =  katara,  cp. 
antama  >  antara,  Lat.  dextimus  >  dexter]  which,  which 
one  (of  two  or  more)  Vin  11.89  ;  M  1.7  ;  J  1.172  ;  Miln  309  ; 
PvA  27.  In  some  cases  merely  emphatic  for  ko,  e.  g. 
Vin  1.30  (katamena  maggena  agato  ?) ;  D  1.197  (katamo 
so  atta-patilabho  ?) ;  J  1.97  :  Sn  995  ;  Miln  51.  —  instr. 
katamena  (scil.  maggena)  adv.  by  which  way,  how  ? 
Miln  57,  58. 

Katara  (adj.)  [Vedic  katara,  interr.  pron.  with  formation 
of  num.  ord.,  cp.  Gr.  vortpoQ,  Lat.  uter]  which  one  (of 
a  certain  number,  usually  of  two)  J  1.4;  PvA  119. 
Often  only  emphatic  for  ko,  e.  g.  J  1.298  (katarai) 
upaddavai)  na  kareyya),  and  used  uninflected  in  cpds., 
as  katara-geha  J  111.9 )  "gandhai)  J  vi.336 ;  "divasai) 
J  11.251  ;  °nagarato  (from  what  city)  DhA  1.3C0 ;  °nama 
(katarai)nama,  adj.)  (of  what  name)  ibid.  — ^katarasmif) 
magge  in  which  way,  how  ?  J  iv.i  10. 

Katavedin  (adj.)  [kata  -f-  vedin,  see  kataflflu]  mindful, 
grateful  S  1.225  ;  I^g  26 ;  ]  1.424  :  11.26. 

Katavediti  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  last]  gratefulness:  see  katalll- 
fluta. 

Kativin  (adj.-n.)  [secondarj'  formation  fr.  kata]  one  who 
has  done  (what  could  be  done),  used  like  katakicca  to 
denote  one  who  has  attained  Arahantship  S  1.14  ;  Miln 

264. 

Kati  (indecl.)  [interr.  pron. ;  used  like  Lat.  quot.  Already 
Vedic]  how  many  ?  Vin  1.83  (k.  sikkhapadani),  155; 
S  1.3  ("sangatiga  having  overcome  how  many  attach- 
ments ?),  70;  Sn  83,  960,  1018;  Ps  11.72;  Miln  78; 
DhA  1.7,  188;  PvA  74. 

Katikft  (f.)  [to  katheti  or  karoti  ?]  1.  agreement,  contract, 
pact  Vin  1.153  (T-  katika),  309;  J  vi.71  ;  Miln  171,  360. 
—  2.  talking,  conversation,  talk  (adhammika  k.,  cp. 
kathika  &  katha)  J  11.449.  — katikar)  karoti  to  make  an 
arrangement  or  agreement  Vin  111.104,  220,  230; 
J.  1.81  ;  IV. 267;  DhA  1.91  ;  VvA  46.  In  cpds.  katika^ 
e.  g.  "vatta  observance  of  an  agreement,  °i)  karoti  to 
be  faithful  to  a  pact  Dh  1.8 ;  °r|  bhindati  to  break  an 
agreement  J  vi.541  ;  °santhana  the  entering  of  an 
agreement  Vin  11.76,  208  ;  111.160. 

Katipaya  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  katipaya]  some,  several,  a  few 
(in  cpds.  or  in  pi.)  J  1.230,  487;  111.280,  419;  iv.125; 
V.162  ;  Pv  n.9*  (  =  appake  only  a  few) ;  DhA  1.94  (very 


Katip>ahan 


II 


Kathai) 


few) ;  PvA  46.  In  sg.  little,  insignificant  Vv  ss* 
(  =  appiki  f.).  °vare  a  few  times,  a  few  turns  J  v. 132  ; 
VI.52  ;  PvA  135  ;  Mhbv  3. 

Katipihan  (adv.)  rkatipaya  +  ahan,  contracted,  see  aha*] 
(for)  a  few  days  Vin  111. 14;  J  1.152,  298,  466;  11.38; 
m.48  ;  IV. 147:  Mhvs  7,  38;  PvA  145.  161  ;  VvA  222. 
katipabena  (instr.)  within  a  few  days  Mhvs  17,  41  ; 
DhA  1.344:  PvA  13,  161.  katipab'accaycna  after  (the 
lapse  of)  a  few  days  J  J. 245  ;  DhA  1. 175  ;  PvA  47. 

Katima  [num.  ord.  fr.  kati],  f.  katitni  in  k.  pakkhassa 
which  (of  many  other)  day  of  the  half-month  Vin  1.117. 

Katirasia    (adj.)    [kati  +  vassa]    i.  (having)    how    many 
years,  how  old  ?  J  v. 331.  — 2.  (having  had)  how  many   I 
rainy  seasons  (in  the  bhikkhu's  career)  of  how  many   | 
years'  seniority  ?  Vin  1.86  ;  Ud  59  ;  Miln  28  ;  DhA  1.37.      | 

Katifidha  (adj.)  [kati  +  vidha,  for  Vedic  katidba]  of  how 
many  kinds  Vism  84. 

Kate  (adv.)  [loc.  of  kata]  for  tue  sake  of,  on  behalf  of  ;  with   | 
ace.  mai)  k.  J  iv.14  ;  with  gen.  maijsassa  k.  J  v.500.  ! 

Katta  [pp.  of  kantati*:  cp.  Sk.  krtta]  is  represented  in 
Pali  by  kanta* ;  katta  being  found  only  in  cpd.  pari°. 

Kattabba  (adj.)  [grd.  of  karoti]  i.  to  be  done,  to  be  made 
or  performed ;  that  which  might  or  could  be  done 
Dh  53  ;  J  1.77,  267  ;  V.362.  —  2.  (nt.)  that  which  is  to 
be  done,  obligation,  duty  Th  i,  330;  J  it.154;  v.402  ; 
DhA  1.211.  — akattabba  (adj.)  not  to  be  done  J  111.131  ; 
V.147;  (nt.)  that  which  ought  not  to  be  done  J  v.402. 
kattabb'  Akattabba  to  be  done  and  not  to  be  done 
J  1.387.  kattabba-yuttaka  i.  (adj.)  fit  or  proper  to 
be  done  DhA  1.13.  —  2.  (nt.)  duty,  obligation  J  111.9; 
VI. 164:  DhA  1. 180;  (the  last)  duties  towards  the 
deceased  J  1.431.  —  Cp.  katabba. 

Kattabbaka  (nt.)  [fr.  last]  task,  duty  Th  1.  330. 

Kattabbati  (f.)  [fr.  kattabba]  fitness,  duty,  that  which  is 
to  be  done  J  11.  179  (iti-°&ya  because  I  had  to  do  it 
thus). 

Kattar  [n.  ag.  fr.  karoti,  cp.  Sk.  kartr]  one  who  makes  or 
creates,  a  maker,  doer  ;  in  foil,  construction.  I.  Depen- 
dent. Either  in  verb-function  with  ace,  as  n.  agent  to 
all  phrases  with  karoti  e.  g.  pailhai)  karoti  to  put 
a  question,  paAhai]  katta  one  who  puts  a  question  ; 
or  in  n.  function  with  gen.,  e.  g.  raantanar)  kattiro  the 
authors  of  the  Mantas,  or  in  cpd.  raja-kattaro  makers 
of  kings.  —  II.  Dependent,  as  n.  katta  the  doer: 
kattSL  hoti  no  bhasitcl  he  is  a  man  of  action,  and  not  of 
words.  —  I.  (indef.)  one  who  does  anything  (with  ace.) 
A  1. 103;  11.67;  V.347.  350  sq.;  (with  gen.)  J  1.378: 
III.  1 36  (one  who  does  evil,  in  same  meaning  at  111.26, 
C.  akatai\i\u,  cp.  J.P.T.S.  1893,  15:  not  to  krti  ) : 
IV.98  (expH  as  kata  by  C) ;  v. 258  ;  Miln  25,  296  ;  Bdhd 
85  sq.  —  2.  an  author,  maker,  creator  D  1.18  (of 
Brahm& :  issaro,  k.,  nimmata),  104  (mantanar));  A 
11.102  ;  Dh  i.iii.  —  3.  an  officer  of  a  king,  the  king's 
messenger  J  v.220  (  =  225);  vi.259,  268,  302,  313,  49J. 
Note.  At  J  v. 225  &  VI. 302  the  voc.  is  katte  (of  a-decl.), 
cp.  also  nom.  "katta  for  "katta  in  salla-katta.  —  4.  as 
t.t.g.  N.  of  the  instr.  case  VvA  97  :  Kacc  136,  143,  277. 

Kattara  (adj.)  (only°-)  [cp.  Sk.  krtvan  (?),  in  diff.  meaning] 
°dan4a  a  walking-stick  or  staff  (of  an  ascetic)  Vin  1.188  ; 
11.76  =  208  sq.;  III. 160;  J  1.9;  v. 132;  VI. 52,  56,  5:;o  ; 
Vism  91,  125,  181.  °yatthi  =  prec.  J  11.441  ;  DA  1.207; 
III. 140.  "ratha  an  old  (?)  chariot  J  111.299.  "suppa  a 
winnowing  basket  Vin  i.269  =  DhA  1.174  \,°e  pakkhipitva 
sankara-kute  chatjdehi). 

Kattari  &  °I  (f.)  [to  kanUti*)  scissors,  shears  J  111.298,  with 
ref.  to  the  "  shears  "  of  a  crab,  "  as  with  scissors  "  ;  cp. 
Vin.  Texts  in.  138  (see  next). 


Kattariki  (f.)  [fr.  last]  scissors,  or  a  knife  Vin  11. 134; 
J.  1.223. 

Kattika  (f.)  (&  "katUka)  [cp.  Sk.  krttika  f.  pi.  the  Pleiades 
&  BSk.  karthika]  N.  of  a  month  (Oct.-Nov.),  during 
which  the  full  moon  is  near  the  constellation  of  Pleiades. 
It  is  the  last  month  of  the  rainy  season,  terminating  on 
the  full  moon  day  of  Kattika  (kattika-puiinama).  This 
season  is  divided  into  5  months :  Asalha,  Savaija, 
Bhaddara  (Potthapada),  Assayufa,  Kattika  ;  the  month 
Assayuja  is  also  called  pubba-kattika,  whereas  the  fifth, 
K.,  is  also  known  as  pacchima-kattika;  both  are  com- 
pri.sed  in  the  term  k.-dvemasika.  Bhikkhus  retiring 
for  the  first  3  months  of  the  Vassa  (rainy  season)  are 
kattika-temasika,  if  they  include  the  4th,  they  are 
k.-catumasika.  The  full  moon  of  Assayuja  is  termed 
k.-temasini  that  of  Kattika  is  k.-catumasini.  See 
Vinaya  passages  &  cp.  nakkhatta.  —  Nett  143  (kattiko, 
v.  1.  kattika). 

-catumasini  see  above  Vin  111.263.  -coraka  a  thief 
who  in  the  month  of  K.,  after  the  distribution  of  robes, 
attacks  bhikkhus  Vin  111.262.  -chana  a  festival  held 
at  the  end  of  Lent  on  the  full  moon  of  pubba-kattik&, 
and  coinciding  with  the  Pavaraija  J  1.433 :  "•372  ; 
V.212  sq. ;  Mhvs  17,  17.  -temasi(-pnopama)  (the  full 
moon)  of  pnbbakattika  Vin  111.261  ;  Mhvs  17,  i  {°pnn- 
namasi).  -masa  the  month  K.  J  11372  ;  Mhvs  12,  2 
(kattike  mase).  -sukkapakkha  the  bright  fortnight  of 
K.  Mhvs  17,  64. 

Katta°  1.  base  of  inf.  kattuQ  (of  karoti),  in  compd* 
"kamyata  willingness  to  do  sontething  Vbh  208 ;  Vism 
320,  385  ;  DhA  111.289  ;  "kama  desirous  to  do  Vin  11.226. 
'^kamata  desire  to  do  or  to  perform  Vism  466 ;  VvA  43. 
—  2 .  base  of  kattar  in  comp". 

Kattha  (adv.)  [der.  fr.  intcrr.  base  ka°  (kad«),  whereas  Sk. 
kutra  is  der.  fr.  base  ku°,  cp.  kuttha]  where  ?  wnere  to, 
whither  ?  Vin  i.8i.  107:  11.76;  D  1.223:  Sn  487,  1036; 
J  111.76;  Pv  11.9";  DhA  1.3.  — k.  nu  kho  where  then, 
where  I  wonder  ?  D  1.2 15  sq.,  PvA  22  (with  Pot.) 
-katthaci(d)  (indef.)  anywhere,  at  some  place  or  other 
J  1.137:  v.468 ;  wherever,  in  whatever  place  Miln  366; 
PvA  284  ;  KhA  247 ;  J  111.229  :  IV.9,  45  ;  as  katthacid  eva 
J.  IV.  92;  PvA  173.  Sometimes  doubled  katthaci 
katthaci  in  whatsoever  place  J  iv.341.  -na  k.  nowhere 
M.  1.424  ;  Miln  77  ;  VvA  14. 

-{hita  fig.  in  what  condirion  or  state  ?  D  11.241 
(corresp.  with  ettha) ;  J  iv.iio.  -visa  in  what  resi- 
dence ?  Sn  412.     -vasika  residing  where  ?  J  11.128,  273. 

Katthati  [cp.  Sk.  batthate,  ctym.  unexpl"*]  to  boast  Sn 
783  (ppr.  med.  akatthamana).     Cp.  pavikatthita. 

E^atthitar  (n.  ag.  fr.  katthaH]  a  boaster  Sn  930. 

KatthJn  (adj.)  [fr.  katth]  boasting  A  v.  157  1+  vikatthin). 

Katthn  (?)  a  jackal,  in  "sona  j.  &  dogs  J  vi.538  (for  koUbn")- 

Kathag  (adv.)  [cp.  Vedic  kathai)  &  katha]  dubit.  interr. 
part.  I .  how  ;  with  ind.  pres.  PvA  6  (k.  puriso  pati- 
labhati),  or  with  fut.  &  cond.  J  1.222  ;  11.159  (k.  tattha 
gamissami) ;  vi.500  ;  PvA  54  (na  dassami)  —  2.  why, 
for  what  reason  ?  J  111. 81  ;  v. 506.  Combined  with  -ca 
Vin  I.I  14;  11.83.  -carahi  D  11. 192.  -nu  &  -nu  kho 
Vin  11.26,  J  III. 99;  IV.  339;  Nd'  189,  see  also  evai)  nu 
kho.  -pana  D  11.163.  -su  Nd«  189.  .'\i  J  iv.339 ; 
DhA  1.432.  -hi  nama  Vin  1.45  ;  11. 105  ;  111.137  :  iv.30(. ; 
all  in  the  same  meaning  ;  -ci  (kathaQci)  scarcely,  with 
difficulty  Th  i,  456. 

-katha  "  saying  how  ?  how  ?"  i.  e.  doubt,  uncertainty, 
unsettled  mind  (cp.  kahkha);  expl.  as  vicikiccha 
dukkhe  kankha  Nd*  190  ;  D  11.282  ;  Sn  500,  866.  1063, 
1088 ;  DhA  IV.  194  ;  as  adj.  and  at  end  of  cpd.  "-katha, 
e.  g.  vigata"  (in  phrase  tinna-vicikiccha  .  .  .  vesaraj- 
j.ippatta)  P  I.I  10  =  Vin  1.12  ;  tinija"  (-1-  visalla)  Sn  17, 
86.   367.     k-ksalla   "  the   ari-ow   of  doubt "   D    11.283 


Kathana 


12 


Kad° 


(vicikiccha  + ).  -kathin  having  doubts,  unsettled, 
uncertain  D  11.2S7  ;  M  1.8  ;  Nd»  191  ;  DhsA  352  ;  a°  free 
from  doubt.  Ep.  of  Arahant  (expl''  DA  1.211  :  "  not 
saying  how  and  how  is  this  ?") ;  M  1. 108  ;  It  49  ;  Sn  534, 
635,  868,  1064 ;  in  phrases  tipoa-vicikiccho  viharati 
akathankathi  kusalesu  dhammesu  D  1.71  =  Pug  59, 
jhayi  anejo  a°  Dh  414  ( :  DhA  rv.i94)  =  Sn  638.  -kara 
(adj.)  how  acting,  what  doing?  k.  ahag  no  nirayam 
pateyyag  {"  ri  iroiwv  ^axopiof  ^lTo^at")  J  rv.339 ;  Sn 
376;  J  IV.75 ;  V.148.  -jivin  leading  what  kind  of 
life  ?  Sn  181.  -dassin  holding  what  views  ?  Sn  848  (see 
"slla).  -pakara  of  what  kind  Vin  1.358;  Sn  241  ( :ka- 
thappakara).  -pa^panna  going  what  way,  i.  e.  how 
acting?  D  11.277,  279,  281.  -bhavita  how  cultivated 
or  practised  ?  S  v. 119.  -bhuta  "  how  being,"  of  what 
sort,  what  like  D  11.139,  158;  -rupa  of  what  kind  ? 
M  i.2i8;  A  1.249;  III. 35;  J  111.525.  -vani>a  of  what 
appearance,  what  like  ?  D  11.244.  -vidha  what  sort  of  ? 
J  V.95,  146;  DhsAv305.  -sameta  how  constituted? 
Sn  873.  -sQa  of  what  character  or  conduct  ?  how  in 
his  morality  ?  Sn  848  (kathai)dassi  katharisilo  upasanto 
ti  vuccati). 

ir>thftna  (nt.)  [fr.  katb,  see  katheti]  i.  conversing,  talking 
J  1.299;  "1.459;  VI. 340.  —  2.  telling  i.  e.  answering, 
soh-ing  (a  question)  J  v.66  (paflha°). — 3.  preaching 
DI1A1.7.  —  4.  reciting,  narrating  Kacc.  130.  Cp.  kathita. 
— akithana  not  talking  or  telling  J  1.420  ;  vi.424 ;  not 
speaking  fr.  anger  J  iv.108  ;  DhA  1.440. 

-akara,  in  °g  karoti  to  enter  into  conversation  with 
j  VI. 413.  -samattha  able  to  .speak  (of  the  tongue) 
J  111.459 ;  able  to  talk  or  converse  with  (saddbii)) 
J  VI. 340.  -sHa  (one)  in  the  habit  of  talking,  garrulous 
J  1.299;  a°  J  1.420. 

ir^^thftlff  (potsherd)  spelling  at  Vism  261  for  kafhala. 

Ksthali  (metri  caus&)=next,  in  the  Uddana  at  Vin  11.234 

Kathalika  (nt.)  [der.  uncertain],  always  in  comb"  pad'- 
odaka  pada-pitha  pada-k° :  either  a  cloth  to  wipe  the 
feet  with  after  washing  them,  or  a  footstool  Vin  1.9,  47  ; 
11.22  sq.,  210,  216.  At  VvA  8  however  with  pada-pitha 
expl""  as  a  footstool  (pida-thapana-yoggai)  daru- 
khaQ(Jar)  asanai)).  Bdhgh  (on  CV  ii.i.i)  expl"*  pada- 
pitha  as  a  stool  to  put  the  washed  foot  on,  pada-katha- 
lika  as  a  stool  to  put  the  unwashed  foot  on,  or  a  cloth 
to  rub  the  feet  with  (ghaQsana). 

Katha  (f.)  [fr.  kath  to  tell  or  talk,  see  katheti ;  nearest 
synonym  is  lap,  cp.  v&c'  dbhilapa  &  sallapa]  i.  talk, 
talking,  conversation  A  1.130;  PvA  39.  So  in  antara" 
D  1. 1 79;  Sn  p.  107,  115;  cp.  sallSpa.  Also  in  tirac- 
chana°  low,  common  speech,  comprising  28  kinds  of 
conversational  talk  a  bhikkhu  should  not  indulge  in, 
enum"*  in  full  at  D  1.7=178  =  111.36  &  passim  (e.  g. 
S  V.419  :  corr.  suddha"  to  yuddha°  1 ;  A  v.i28=Nd*  192) ; 
ref.  to  at  A  111.256;  v. 185;  J  1.58;  Pug  35.  Similarly 
in  gama°  Sn  922  ;  viggahika  k.  A  iv.87 ;  Sn  930.  Ten 
good  themes  of  conversation  (katha-vatthfini)  are 
enum''at  M  111.11 3  =  A  iii.ii7=iv.357=v.67  ;  Wiln  344  ; 
similarly  dhammi  kathd  A  11.51  ;  iv.307  ;  v. 192  ;  Sn  325  ; 
paVattani  k.  A  1.151  ;  yutta  kathayai)  Sn  826;  sammo- 
daniya  k.  in  salutation  formula  s°i)  k°t}  sSraiiiyai)  viti- 
s&retva  D  1.52,  108,  etc.  ;  A  v. 185  ;  Sn  419,  pp.  86,  93, 
107,  116.  —  2.  speech,  sermon,  discourse,  lecture 
Vin  1.203,  290  (°r)  karoti  to  discuss) ;  A  111.174  '•  'v.  358. 
Freq.  in  anupubbi°  a  sermon  in  regular  succession, 
graduated  sermon,  discussing  the  4  points  of  the  ladder 
of  "  holiness,"  viz.  danakatha,  sila",  sagga°,  magga°  (see 
anupubba)  Vin  1.15;  A  111.184;  rv.i86,  209,  213; 
DhA  1.6 ;  VvA  66.  —  3.  a  (longer)  story,  often  with 
vitthara"  an  account  in  detail,  e.  g.  PvA  19.  bahira° 
profane  story  KhA  48.  —  4.  word,  words,  advice :  "5 
ganhati  to  accept  an  advice  J  11. 173;  ill. 424.  —  5. 
explanation,    exposition,   in   attha°   (q.    v.),   cp.   gati° 


Ps  11.72.  —  6.  discussion,  in  °vatthu  (see  below)  Mhvs  5, 
138.  -dukkatha  harmful  conversation  or  idle  talk  A  iii. 
181  ;  opp.  su°  A  111.182.  -kathag  vad^heti  "  to  in- 
crease the  talk,"  to  dispute  sharply  J  1.404 ;  v. 412. 
°i)  samutthapcti  to  start  a  conversation  J  1.119  iv.  73. 
—  At  the  end  of  cpds.  (as  adj.)  °katha  e.  g.  cbinna° 
Sn  711  ;  thita"  DA  1.73  ;  madhura"  J  111.342  ;  vi.255. 

-AbhiAi^ana  recollection  due  to  speech  Miln  78,  79. 
-ojja  (k°-udya,  to  vad)  a  dispute,  quarrel  Sn  825,  828. 
-dbamma  a  topic  of  conversation  DA  1.43.  -nigghosa 
the  sound  of  praise,  flattery  J  11.350.  -pavatti  the 
course  of  a  conversation  J  1.119  ;  DhA  1.249  ;  Mhbv  61 . 
-pabhata  subject  of  a  conversation,  story  J  1.252,  364. 
-babuUa  abundance  of  talk,  loquacity  A  iv.87.  •magga 
narrative,  account,  history  J  1.2.  -rasa  the  sweetness 
of  (this)  speech  Miln  345.  -vatthu  i.  subject  of  a 
discourse  or  discussion,  argument  M  1.372  ;  11.127,  'S*- 
There  are  10  enum''  at  A  iv.352,  357  (see  katha)  and  at 
Vism  19  as  qualities  of  a  kalyapa-mitta,  referred  to  at 
A  V.67,  129 ;  Vism  127  ;  DhA  iv.30.  Three  are  given  at 
D  111.220  =  A  1.197.  °kusala  well  up  in  the  subjects  of 
discussion  VvA  354.  —  2.  N.  of  the  fifth  book  of  the 
Abhidhamma  Pitaka,  the  seven  constituents  of  which 
are  enum""  at  var.  places  (e.  g.  DA  1.17 ;  Mhbv  94,  where 
Xvu  takes  the  3""  place),  see  also  J.P.T.S.  1882,  1888, 
1896.  •samutthana  the  arising  of  a  discussion  Mhvs  5, 
138.  -samutthapsn^  starting  a  conversation  J  1.119; 
111.278;  DhA  1.250.  -satnpayoga  conversational  inter- 
course A  1.197.  -sallapa  talk,  conversation  Vin  1.77; 
D  1.89  sq.,  107  sq.  ;  11.150  ;  M  1.178 ;  A  11. 197 ;  v.188  ; 
Ud  40  ;  J  11.283  ;  Miln  31  ;  DA  1.276  (expl""  as  kathana- 
patikathana) ;  DhA  11.91  (°i)  karoti) ;  VvA  153. 

Kathapeti  Caus.  11.  of  katheti  (q.  v.). 

Kathika  (adj.)  (— °)  [fr.  katha,  cp.  Sk.  kathaka]  relating, 
speaking,  conversing  about,  expounding,  in  cpds.  citta° 
Th  2,  449  (cp.  citra-kathin) ;  (a)  tiracchana°  A  iv.153; 
dhamtna°  J  1.148  ;  111.342  ;  iv.2  (°thera) ;  vi.255  (mahS") ; 
as  noun  a  preacher,  speaker,  expounder  A  In.  1 74: 
Mhvs  14,  64  (maha°). 

Kathika  (f.)  [fr.  last  ?]  agreement  Dpvs  19,  22  ;  see  katika. 

Kathita  [pp.  of  katheti,  cp.  Sk.  kathita]  said,  spoken, 
related  J  11.310;  iv.73  ;  v.493.  su°  well  said  or  told 
J.  IV. 73.  As  nt.  with  instr.  J  iv.72  (tena  kathitai)  the 
discourse  (given)  by  him). 

Kathin  (adj.)  ( — °)  [cp.  kathika]  speaking  ;  one  who  speaks, 
a  speaker,  preacher  J  1.148  (dhamma-kathikesu  citra- 
kathi) ;  Mibi  90,  348  (°settha  best  of  speakers).  See  also 
kathag-kathin. 

Katheti  (v.  den.  fr.  katha,  cp.  Sk.  kathayate]  aor.  katbesi, 
inf.  kathetui)  &  kathetave  (Vin  1.359) :  Pass,  kathiyati 
&  katheti  (Miln  22,  cp.  Trenckner,  Notes  122);  ppr. 
Pass,  kathiyam^na  &  kacchamana  (A.  in. 181);  grd. 
kathetabba,  kathaniya  &  kaccha,  —  i .  to  speak,  say, 
tell,  relate  (in  detail :  vittharato  PvA  77).  mft  kathesi 
(=  ma  bhaI^)  do  not  speak  PvA  16.  —  to  tell  (a  story) : 
J.  1.2;  IV. 137;  PvA  12,  13.  —  2.  to  converse  with 
J.  VI. 413  ;  PvA  86  (^amantayi).  • — 3.  to  report,  to 
inform  J  v. 460.  —  4.  to  recite  DhA  1.166.  —  5.  to 
expound,  explain,  preach  J  1.30;  Miln  131  ;  DhA  188; 
Nd*  s.  V.  —  6.  to  speak  about  (with  ace.)  Vin  11.168. 
■ —  7.  to  refer  to  J  1.307.  —  8.  to  answer  or  solve  (a 
question)  J  1.165;  v.66.  —  Caus  11.  kathapeti  to  make 
say  Mhvs  24,  4  (aor.  katbapayi) ;  DhA  11.35  ;  KbA  118. 

Kad°  [old  form  of  interr.  pron.  nt.,  equal  to  kig;  cp. 
(Vedic)  kad  in  kadarthai)  =  kir)artbai)  to  what  purpose] 
orig.  "  what  ?"  used  adverbially ;  then  indef.  "  any 
kind  of,"  as  (na)  kac(-cana)  "  not  at  all  "  ;  kac-cid  "  any 
kind  of ;  is  it  anything  ?  what  then  ?"  Mostly  used  in 
disparaging  sense  of  showing  inferiority,  contempt,  or 
defectiveness,  and  equal  to  ka°  (in  denoting  badness  or 


Kadamba 


13 


Kanta 


smallness,  e.  g.  kakanika,  k§purisa,  see  also  kanUia  & 
kappata),  kig°,  ku.°  For  relation  of  ku  > ka  cp.  kutra > 
kattha  &  kada. 

-anna  bad  food  Kacc  178.  -asana  id.  Kacc  178. 
-dukkha  (?)  great  evil  (=  death)  VvA  316  (expl''  as 
maraija,  cp.  katuka). 

Kadamba  (cp.  Sk.  kadamba]  the  kadamba  tree,  Naudea 
cordifolia  (with  orange-coloured,  fragrant  blossoms) 
J-  VI. 535,  539;  Vism  206;  DhA  1.309  ("puppha); 
Bilhvs  25,  48  (id). 

Kadara  (adj.)  miserable  ]  11. 136  (cxpl''  as  liikha,  kasira). 

Kadariya  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  kadarya,  kad  +  arya  ?]  mean, 
miserly,  stingy,  selfish ;  usually  expl"'  by  thaddha- 
macchari  (PvA  102  ;  DhA  JI1.189,  313),  and  mentioned 
with  maccharl,  freq.  also  with  paribhasaka  S  1.34,  96 ; 
A  U.59 ;  IV. 79  sq. ;  Dh  177,  223;  J  v.273  ;  Sn  663; 
Vv  29*.  As  cause  of  Peta  birth  freq.  in  Pv.,  e.  g. 
1.9';  II. 7';  rv.i**;  PvA  25,  99,  236.  —  (nt.)  avarice, 
stinginess,  selfishness,  grouped  under  macchariya 
Dhs  1 122  ;  Sn  362  (with  kodha). 

Xadariyatt  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  last]  stinginess,  niggardliness 
D  11.243  ;  Miln  180  ;  PvA  45. 

Kadala  (nt.)  the  plantain  tree  Kacc  335. 

KadalP  (f-)  [Sk.  kadadi]  —  i.  the  plantain,  Musa  sapien- 
tium.  Owing  to  the  softness  and  unsubstantiality  of 
its  trunk  it  is  used  as  a  frequent  symbol  of  unsubstan- 
tiality, transitoriness  and  worthlessness.  As  the 
plantain  or  banana  plant  always  dies  down  after  pro- 
ducing fruit,  is  destroyed  as  it  were  by  its  own  fruit,  it 
is  used  as  a  simile  for  a  bad  man  destroyed  by  the  fruit 
of  his  own  deeds:  S  i.i54  =  Vin  ii.i88=S  ii.24i=A  11.73 
=  DhA  III.  1 56 ;  cp.  Miln  166 ;  —  as  an  image  of  unsub- 
stantiality, Cp.  III. 2*.  The  tree  is  used  as  ornament  on 
great  festivals:  J  i.ii  ;  vi.590  (in  simile),  592  :  VvA  31. 
—  2.  a  flag,  banner,  i.  e.  plantain  leaves  having  the 
appearance  of  banners  (-dhaja)  J  v. 195;  vi.412.  In 
cpds.  kadali°. 

-khandha  the  trunk  of  the  plantain  tree,  often  in 
similes  as  symbol  of  worthlessness.  e.  g.  M  1.233  = 
S  Iii.i4i  =  rv.i67 ;  Vism  479;  Nd*  680  A".;  J  vi.442  ; 
as  symbol  of  smoothness  and  beauty  of  limbs  VvA  280  ; 
-taru  the  plantain  tree  Davs  v. 49  ;  •torana  a  triumphal 
arch  made  of  pi.  steins  and  leaves  Mhbv  169 ;  -patta  a 
pi.  leaf  used  as  an  improvised  plate  to  eat  from  J  v. 4 ; 
DhA  1.59 ;  -phala  the  fruit  of  the  plantain  J  v.37. 

Kadall*  (f.)  a  kind  of  deer,  an  antelope  only  in  °miga 
J  V.405,  416;  VI. 539;  DA  1.87;  and  "pavara-pacc- 
attfaarana  (nt.)  the  hide  of  the  k.  deer,  used  as  a  rug  or 
cover  D  l.7!=A  l.i8i  =  Vin  1.192  =  11.163,  169;  sim. 
D.  II. 187;  (adj.)  (of  pallanka)  A  i.i37=iii.5o=iv.394. 

Kadi  (indecl.)  [Vedic  kada.  Cp.  tada,  sada  in  Pali,  and 
perhaps  Latin  quando].  interr.  adv.  when  ?  (very  often 
foil,  by  fut.)  Th  i,  iogi-1106;  J  11. 212  ;  vi.  46 ;  DhA 
1.33  ;  PvA  2.  —  Comb*"  with  -ssu  J  v. 103,  215  ;  vi.49  sq. 
-ci  [cid]  indef.  —  i.  at  some  time  A  iv.ioi.  —  2.  some- 
times J  1.98;  PvA  271.  —  3.  once  upon  a  time  Davs 
1.30.  —  4.  perhaps,  may  be  J  1.297;  VI. 364.  +  eva; 
kadScideva  VvA  213;  -kadaci  kadaci  from  time  to 
time,  every  now  and  then  J  1. 216;  Iv.  120  ;  DhsA  238  ; 
PvA  253.  -kadaci  karahaci  at  some  time  or  other,  at 
times  A  1.179 ;  Miln  73  ;  DhA  III. 362.  -na  kadaci  at  no 
time,  never  S  1.66 ;  J  v. 434  ;  vi.363 ;  same  with  ma  k° 
J  VI. 310;  Mhvs  25,  113;  cp.  kudicana.  — kadSc- 
-uppattika  (adj.)  happening  only  sometimes,  occasional 
Miln  114. 


IT/erivation  unknown.  Sk.  kardama]  mud, 
mire,  filth  Nd*  374  (=panka);  J  1. 100;  111.220  (written 
kadamo  in  verse  and  kaddemo  in  gloss) ;  vi.240,  390 ; 
PvA  189   (  =  panka),  215;  compared  with  moral  im- 


purities J  111.290  &  Miln  35.  a"  free  from  mud  or  dirt, 
clean  Vin  11.201,  of  a  lake  J  ill. 289  ;  fig.  pure  of  character 
J  111.290.  kaddamlkata  made  muddy  or  dirty,  defiled 
J  VI. 59  (kilesehi). 

-odaka  muddy  water  Vin  11:262  ;  Vism  127.  -parikha 
a  moat  filled  with  mud,  as  a  defence  J  vi.  390  ;  -babula 
(adj.)  muddy,  full  of  mud  DhA  1.333  ; 

Kanaka  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  kanaka ;  Gr.  Kvqror  yellow ;  Ags. 
hunig=£.  honey.  See  also  kailcana]  gold,  usually  as 
uttatta"  molten  gold ;  said  of  the  colour  of  the  skin 
Bu  1.59;  Pv  III. 3';  J  V.416;  PvA  10    suvanna). 

-agga  gold-crested  J  v.  156;  -chavin  of  golden  com- 
plexion J  VI. 13  ;  -taca  (adj.)  id.  J  v. 393  ;  -pabha  golden 
splendour  Bn  xxiii.23 ;  -vimana  a  fairy  palace  of  gold 
VvA  6 ;  PvA  47,  53  ;  -sikhari  a  golden  peak,  in  °r5ja 
king  of  the  golden  peaks  (i.  e.  Himalayas) :  Davs  iv.30. 

Kanittba  (adj.)  [Sk.  kani^tba ;  compar.  &.  superl. ;  see 
kafifla]  younger,  youngest,  younger  bom  Vin  111.146 
(isi  the  younger) ;  J  11. 6  ;  PvA  42,  54  ;  esp.  the  younger 
brother  (opp.  jettha,  "ka)  J  1.132  ;  DhA  1.6,  13;  Mhvs. 
9,  7 ;  PvA  19,  55.  Comb""  with  jet^haka  the  elder  & 
younger  brothers  J  1.253 ;  sabba-  k.  the  very  youngest 
J  1-395-  f-  kanittha  the  youngest  daughter  DhA  1.396. 
—  fig.  later,  lesser,  inferior,  in  °phala  the  lesser  fruit 
(of  sanctification)  Pv  iv.i'*.  —  akaniftha  "not  the 
smaller  "  i.  e.  the  greatest,  highest ;  in  akanittbagamin 
going  to  the  highest  gods  (cp.  parinibbayin)  S  v. 237  = 
285,  etc.  "bhavana  the  abode  of  the  highest  gods 
J.  111.487. 

Kanittbaka  (adj.)  younger  (opp.  jettha)  A  iv.93  =  J  11.348  ; 
DhA  1.152;  the  younger  brother  Mhvs  5,  33,  8,  10; 
35.  49 ;  36,  116 ;  -°ika  and  °aka  a  younger  sister,  Mhvs 
1,  49;  Pv  i.ii'  (better  read  for  kaniuba). 

Kanit^batta  (nt.)  the  more  recent  and  therefore  lower,  less 
developed  state  (of  sanctification)  DhA  1.152. 

Kanittbl  (i)  a  younger  sister  Mhvs  7,  67. 

Kaniya  (adj.)  [compar.  of  kan°,  Sk.  kaniyags]  younger, 
less,  inferior  Kacc  122  (only  as  a  grammarian's  con- 
struction, not  in  the  living  language  where  it  bad 
coalesced  with  •kanya=kaiifiS). 

Kanta^  [Sk.  kanta,  pp.  of  kSmeti]  —  i.  (adj.)  in  special 
sense  an  attribute  of  worldly  pleasure  (cp.  kama, 
kSmaguija) :  plea.sant,  lovely,  enjoyable ;  freq.  in  foim. 
ittha  kanta  manapa,  referring  to  the  pleasures  of  the 
senses  S  1.245  ;  11.192  ;  iv.60,  158.  235  sq.  ;  v. 22,  60,  147  ; 
A  11.66  sq.;  M  1.85;  Sn  759;  It  15;  Vbh  2,  100,  337; 
bala°  (lovely  in  the  opinion  of  the  ignorant)  Sn  399.  — 
D  11.265  I1I-227  (ariya°);  J  in. 264  ;  v. 447;  with  ref.  to 
the  fruit  of  action  as  giving  pleasure  :  °phala  Kvu  35,211, 
PvA  277  (hatthi-)  k°  pleasing  to  elephants;  of  manta 
DhA  1.163  ;  of  Vina  J  vi.255,  262  ;  DhA  1.163.  —  2.  be- 
loved by,  ifavourite  of,  charming  J  vi.255,  262  ;  DhA 
1. 163.  —  3.  (n.)  the  beloved  one,  the  husband  J  vi.370 
(wrongly  written  kan  tena) ;  of  a  precious  stone  Miln 
118;  Sdhp  608,  rp.  suriya",  canda"— kanta  (f.)  the 
beloved  one,  the  wife  J  v. 293  ;  kantena  (instr.)  agree- 
ably, with  kind  words  A  11.213  '•  J  v. 486  (where  porisa- 
dassa  kante  should  te  read  as  porisadassak'  ante). 
— a"  undesired,  disagreeable,  unpleasant,  in  same  form 
as  kanta,  e.  g.  D  11.192;  in  other  comb"  J  v.295 ; 
Vbh  100;  Neit  180;  PvA  193.  — akantena  with  un- 
pleasant words  A  II. 2 1 3.  — kantatara  compar.  J  111.260. 
-bhava  the  state  of  being  pleasant  DA  1.76 ;  VvA  323. 

Kanta'  [pp.  of  kantati',  Sk.  kftta.  kanta  is  analogy- 
form,  after  pres.  kantati,  regularly  we  should  expect 
katta.  See  also  avakanta.  It  may  be  simply  mis- 
reading for  katta,  cp.  kern,  Toev.  under  parikanta.]  cut, 
cut  out  or  of!  Th  2,  223  (°salla=samucchinna-rag'-adi- 
salla  ThA  179)  cp.  katta  &  pari". 


Kantati 


14 


Kapifijala 


Kuitati^  [Sk.  kn>atti,  *Qert,  cp.  kata,  &  Lat.  cratis,  crassus, 
E.  crate]  to  plait,  twist,  spin.  esp.  suttar)  (thread)  Vin 
IV.300 ;  PvA  75 ;  DhA  111.273  ;  kappasag  A  111.295.  Cp. 
pari". 

Kantati*  [Sk.  krotati ;  *(g)qert,  to  cut ;  cp.  Gr.  koVju,  to 
shear ;  Lat.  caro,  cena ;  Uhg.  sceran,  E.  shear ;  see  also 
katu]  to  cut,  cut  oS  J  11.53  ( :  as  nik°  in  gloss,  where  it 
should  be  mulani  kant°);  in. 185:  vi.154,  DhA  in. 152 
(+  viddhagseti). 

Kant&ra  (adj.  n.)  [perhaps  from  kad-tarati,  diflicult  to 
cross,  Sk.  (?)  kantara]  difficult  to  pass,  scil.  magga,  a 
difficult  road,  waste  land,  wilderness,  expW  as  nirudaka 
irina  VvA  334  (on  Vv  84»),  comb''  with  maru"  PvA  99 
and  marukantaramagga  PvA  112;  opp.  khemanta- 
bhumi.  Usually  5  kinds  of  wilds  are  enumerated: 
cora*",  vala°,  nirudaka",  amanussa°,  appabbhakkha" 
J  1. 99 ;  SA  324  ;  4  kinds  at  Nd'  630  :  cora°.  vala"  du- 
bhikkha°  nirudaka".  The  term  is  used  both  lit.  &  fig. 
(of  the  wilds  of  ignorance,  false  doctrine,  or  of  difficulties, 
hardship).  As  the  seat  of  demons  (Petas  and  Yakkhas) 
freq.  in  Pv  (see  above),  also  J  1.395.  As  di^i°  in  pass, 
ditthi-gata,  etc.  M  1.8,  486,  Pug  22  (on  ditthi  vipatti). 

•addhana  a  road  in  the  wilderness,  a  dangerous  path 
(fig.)Th  I,  95-^-0  l.73  =  M  1.276 ;  -pa^panna  a  wanderer 
through  the  wilderness,  i.  e.  a  forester  J  111.537.  -magga 
a  difficult  road  (cp.  kummagga)  J  11.294  (1'^)  •  ''^  simile  : 
S  II. 1 18.     -mukha  the  entrance  to  a  desert  J  1.99. 

Kant&riya  (adj.)  [from  kantAra]  (one)  living  in  or  belonging 
to  the  desert,  the  guardian  of  a  wilderness,  applied  to  a 
Yakkha  Vv  84"  (  =  VvA  341). 

Kantika'  (adj.)  [to  kantat^]  spinning  PvA  75  (si)tta° 
itthiyo). 

Kantika*=  kanta^  in  a°  unpleasant,  disgusting  Pv  111.4^ 
(  =  PvA  193)- 

Kantita^  [Sk.  kftta,  pp.  of  kantati']  spun,  (sutta)  Vin  iv.300. 

Kantita'  (adj.)  Sk.  kftta  pp.  of  kantati*]  cut  off,  severed 
Miln  240. 

ir^nJft  [Sk.  kanda]  a  tuberous  root,  a  bulb,  tuber,  as  radish, 
etc.  J  1.273  ;  '^.373  ;  VI. 516 ;  VvA  335  ;  °mula  bulbs  and 
roots  (°phala)  D  i.ioi  ;  a  bulbous  root  J  v.202. 

Kandati  [Sk.  krandati  to  *Q(e)lem  ;  cp.  Gr.  ca\Eu>,  «\njuf, 
Lat.  clamor,  calare,  ralendae,  Ohg.  hellan  to  shout]  to 
cry,  wail,  weep,  lament,  bewail  Dh  371;  Vv  83**; 
J  VI. 166;  Miln  II,  148;  freq.  of  Petas:  PvA  43,  160, 
362  (cp.  rodati).  —  In  kamaguva  pass,  urattaliij  k. 
M.  i.86  =  Nd'  s.  v.  ;  A  hi. 54  (urattaji  for  °ir)  v.  1.);  in 
phrase  b&hi  paggayha  k°  Vin   1.237;  11.284;  J  v. 267. 

Kandana  (nt.)  [Sk.  kraudana]  crying,  lamenting  PvA  262 

Kandara  [Sk.  kandara]  —  i .  a  cave,  grotto,  generally,  on 
the  slope  or  at  the  foot  of  a  mountain  Vin  11.76,  146 ; 
used  as  a  dwelling-place  Th  i,  602  ;  J  1.205  ;  111.172.  — 
2.  a  glen,  defile,  gully  V  1.71  =  A  11.2 10=  Pug  59; 
A  IV. 437  ;  Miln  36  ;  cxpl''  at  DA  1.209  (as  a  mountainous 
part  broken  by  the  water  of  a  river ;  the  etym.  is  a 
popular  one,  viz.  "  kag  vuccati  udakag  ;  teua  daritag  "). 
k-padarasakha  A  1.243=11.240  ;  PvA  29. 

Kandala  N.  of  a  plant  with  white  flowers  J  iv.442.  — ma- 
kula  knob  (?)  of  k.  plant  Vism  253  (as  in  description  of 
sinews). 

Kanda)a  N.  of  esculent  water  lily,  having  an  enormous 
bulb  D  1.264. 

Kandita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  kandati]  weeping.  lamenting  Davs 
IV. 46  ;  a°  not  weeping  J  111.58.  (n.  nt.)  crying,  lamenta- 
tion J  IH.57;  Miln  148. 

Kanna  (adj.)  [Sk.  skauna]  trickling  down  J  v.445. 


Kannfima^  kihnima  J  vi.126. 

Kapaoa  (adj.  n.)  [Sk.  krpapa  from  krp  wail,  cp.  Lat. 
crepo;  Ags.  liraefn=E.  raven.     Cp.  also  Sk.  kj-cchra] 

—  I.  poor,  miserable,  wretched;  a  beggar;  freq. 
e.'cpl''  by  varaka,  duggata.  dina  and  da|idda ;  very 
often  classed  with  low-caste  people,  as  cao4ala  Pv. 
iii.i"  Apesakara  (Ud4).  Sn  818  J  1.312,  321;  in. 199; 
Pv  n.91*;  ui.i",  iv.5»;  DA  1.298  ;  DhA  1.233  ;  Th  A  178. 

—  2.  small,  short,  insignificant  A  1.2 13  ;  Bdhd  84.  (f.) 
"a  a  miserable  woman  J  iv.285 ;  -"an  (adv.)  pitifully, 
piteously,  with  verbs  of  weeping,  etc.  J  in. 295  ;  v. 499 ; 
VI. 143  ;  a°  not  poor  J  111.199  ;  — ati°  very  miserable  Pgdp 
74.     Der.  °ta  wretchedness  Sdhp  315. 

-addhika  pi.  often  with  °adi,  which  means  samapa- 
brahmana-k°-vanibbaka-yacaka  (e.  g.  D  1.137  ;  PvA  78) 
beggars  and  wayfarers,  tramps  J  1.6,  262,  DhA  1.105,  188 
(written  k°-aDdhika)  ;  see  also  DA  1.298  and  kapai:Lika ; 
-iddhika  pi.  (probably  miswriting  for  °addh°,  cp. 
Trenckner,y.P.r.S.  1908,  130)  D  1.137  ;  It65  ;  DA  1.298  ; 
-itthi  a  poor  woman  J  111.448  ;  -jivika  in  "ag  kappeti  to 
make  a  poor  liveUhood  J  1.312  ;  -bhava  the  state  of  being 
miserable  PvA  274;  -manussa  a  wretched  fellow,  a 
beggar  Vism  343  ;  -laddhaka  obtained  in  pain,  said  of 
children  J  vi.150,  cp.  kiccha  laddhaka;  -visikha  the 
street  or  quarter  of  the  poor,  the  slums  Ud  4 ;  -vuttin 
leading  a  poor  life  PvA  175. 

Kapaoika  (f)  a  (mentally)  miserable  woman  Th  2,  219; 
ThA  178 ;  cp.  kapaoa  ;  also  as  kapaniya  J  vi.93. 

Kapalla  at  Vin  1.203,  is  an  error  for  kajjala,  lamp-black, 
used  in  preparation  of  a  coUyrium  (cp.  J.P.T.S.  1887, 
167). 

Kapalla  (nt.)  [Sk  kapala ;  orig.  skull,  bowl,  cp.  kapola  & 
Lat.  caput,  capula,  capillus,  Goth,  baubi,  E.  head] — 
I.  a  bowl  in  form  of  a  skull,  or  tlie  shell  of  reptiles ;  see 
kapala. —  2.  an  earthenware  pan  used  to  carry  ashes 
J  1.8;  VI.66,  75;  DhA  1.288.  —  3.  a  frying  pan  (see 
cpds.  &  cp.  angara-kapalla)  Sn  672.  -kapalla  is  only  a 
variant  of  kapala. 

-pati  an  earthen  pot,  a  pan  J  1.347  =  Dh  A  1. 371  ; 
-piJTa  a  pancake  J  1.345 ;  DhA  1.367 ;  VvA  123  ;  Mhvs 
35.  <>7- 

Kapallaka  —  i  ■  a  small  earthen  bowl  J  vi.59  ;  DhA  1.224. 

—  2.  a  frying  pan  J  1.346. 

Kapala  (nt.)  [Sk.  kapala,  see  kapalla]  —  i.  a  tortoise- 
or  turtle-shell  S  i.7  =  MiIn  371  ;  S  iv.179;  as  ornament 
at  DA  1.89.  —  2.  the  skull,  cp.  kataha  in  sisakatSha.  — 
3.  a  frying  pan  (usually  as  ayo°,  of  iron,  e.  g.  A  iv.70 ; 
Nd»  304'";  VvA  335)  J  H.352  ;  Vv  84*;  DhA  1.148 
(v.  1.  "kapalla) ;  Bdhd  100  (in  simile).  —  4.  a  begging 
bowl,  used  by  certain  ascetics  S  iv.190;  v.53,  3c  1  ; 
A  1.36  ;  ni.225  ;  J  1.89  ;  PvA  3.  —  5.  a  potsherd  J  11.301. 
-abhata  the  food  collected  in  a  bowl  A  1.36  ;  -khanda 
a  bit  of  potsherd  J  n.301  ;  -battha  "  with  a  bowl  in  his 
hand."  begging,  or  a  beggar,  Th  i.  1 1 18  ;  J  1.89  ;  111.32  ; 
v. 468  ;  PvA  3. 

Kapalaka — i.  a  small  vessel,  bowl  J  1.425.  —  2.  a 
beggar's  bowl  J  1.235  ;  DhA  11.26. 

Kapasa=kappasa.  q.  v.  Davs  11.39- 

Kapi  [Sk.  kapi.  origmal  designation  of  a  brownish  colour, 
cp.  kapila  &  kapotaj  a  monkey  (freq.  in  similes)  Sn 
791  ;  Th  2,  K'8o  ;  J  1.170;  in.  1 48,  cp.  kavi. 

-kacchu  the  plant  Mucuna  pruritus  Pv  11.3'" ;  "pltnla 
its  fruit  PvA  86 ;  -citta  "  having  a  monkey's  mind," 
capricious,  fickle  J  111.148=525:  -naccana  Npl.,  Pv 
IV.  1";  -nidda  "  monkey-.sleep,"  dozing  Miln  300. 

Kapinjala  [Derivation  unknown.  Sk.  kapinjala]  a  wild 
bird,  possibly  the  francoUu  partridge  Kvu  268 ;  J 
VI. 538  (IJ.U.  kapifijara). 


Kapithana 


15 


Kappisika 


Kapithana  the  tree  Thespesia  populneoides  Vin  nr.  35. 

Kapittha  and  °ttha  —  i .  the  tree  Feronia  elephantnm,  the 
wood-apple  tree  J  vi.534  ;  Vism  183  ("ka) ;  Mhvs  29,  1 1  ; 
—  2.  °i)  (nt.)  the  wood  apple  Miln  189 ;  —  3.  the  posi- 
tion of  the  hand  when  the  fingers  are  slightly  and 
loosely  bent  in  J  1.237 ;  kapitthaka  S  v.96. 

Kapltthana=  kapithana  J  "445;  VI. 529,  550,  553;  V.  1. 
at  Vism  183  for  "itthaka. 

KapUa  (adj.)  [Sk.  kapila,  cp.  kapi]  brown,  tawny,  reddish, 
of  hair  &  beard  VvA  222  ;  ''a  f .  a  brown  cow  DhA  iv.153. 

irf(pi«t«i»  [Sk.  kapi:5irsa]  the  lintel  of  a  door  D  n.143  (cp. 
Rh.D.  Buddh.  Suttas  p.  95  n')  -°ka  the  cavity  in  a  door- 
post for  receiving  the  bolt  Vin  11. 120,  148  (cp.  Vin. 
Texts  II.  106  n'). 

Kapota  [Sk.  kapota,  greyish  blue,  cp.  kapi) —  i.  (m.)  a 
pigeon,  a  dove  J  1.243  ;  Miln  403  ;  —  2.  (f.)  ■'i  a  female 
pigeon  PvA  47 ;  °ka  (f.  °ildi  Miln  365)  a  small  pigeon 

J  '•244- 
-pada  (of  the  colour)  of  a  pigeon's  foot  J  1.9. 

Kapob  [Sk.  kapola,  cp.  kapalla,  orig.  meaning  "  hollow  "1 
the  cheek  Vism  263,  362  ;  DhA  1.194. 

Kappa  (adj.  n.)  [Sk.  kalpa,  see  kappeti  for  etym.  &  forma- 
tion! anything  made  with  a  definite  object  in  view, 
prepared,  arranged  ;  or  that  which  is  fit,  suitable,  proper. 
See   also  DhA  1.103  &   KhA   115  for  var.   meanings. 
— I  Literal  Meaning. —  i.  (adj.)  fitting,  suitable,  proper 
(cp.  "taj  (  =  kappiya)  in  kappAkappesu  kusalo  Th  i,  251, 
"kovido  Mhvs  75,   16;  Sn  911;  as  juice  Miln  161. — 
( — °)   made  m,   like,   resembling  Vin   1.290    (ahata°) ; 
Sn  35  (khaggavis&Qa°) ;  hetu°  acting  as  cause  to  Sn  16  ; 
Miln  105  ;  — a°  incomparable  Mhvs  14,  65  ;  —  2.  (nt.)  a 
fitting,  i.  e.  harness  or  trapping  (cp.  kappana)  Vv  20* 
(VvA   104) ;  —  a  small  black  dot  or  smudge   (kappa- 
bindu)  imprinted  on  a  new  robe  to  make  it  lawful 
Vin  1.255  ;  IV. 22  7,  286  :  also  fig.  a  making-up  (of  a  trick) : 
lesa"  DA  1.103;   VvA  348.-11.  Applied  Meaning.— 
I.  (qualitative)    ordinance,    precept,    rule;     practice, 
manner  Vin  11.294,  301  ( rkappati  singilo^a-kappo  "fit 
is  the  rule  concerning  .  .  .  ") ;  cp.  Mhvs  4,  9  ;  one  of  the 
chalanga,    the   6   disciplines   of   Vedic   interpretation, 
VvA  265  ;  —  2.   (temporal)  a  "  fixed  "  time,  time  with 
ref.  to  individual  and  cosmic  life.     As  5yu  at  DA  1. 103 
(cp.kappai)) ;  as  a  cycle  of  time=  saijsara  at  Sn  52 1,  535, 
860  (na  eti  kappai)) ;  as  a  measure  of  time :  an  age  of 
the  world  Vin  iu.i09  ;  Miln  108  ;  Sdhp256.  257;  PvA  21  ; 
It  i7  =  Bdhd  87=S  n.185.     There  are  3  principal  cycles 
or  aeons :   maha°,  asankbeyya",  antara" ;  each  maha° 
consists   of  4  asankheyya-kappas,  viz.  sagvafta"  saq- 
vattatthayi"   vivatta"   vivaftafthayi'   A  II. 142  ;    often 
abbreviated  to  sagvatta-vivatta"  D  1. 14:  It  15;  freq. 
in  formula  ekarapijatii),  etc.  Vin  111.4  =  0  III. 51,  111  = 
It   99.     On    pubbanta"    &    aparanta",    past    &    future 
kappas  see  D  1. 12  sq.  pafhama-kappe  at  the  beginning 
of  the  world,  once  upon  a  time  (cp.  atite)  J  1.207.   When 
kappa  stands  by  itself,  a  Maha-kappa  is  understood : 
DA  1. 162.     A  whole,  complete  kappa  is  designated  by 
kevala"   Sn   pp.    i8  =  46~'i25;    Sn    517;    also   digha° 
S  ii.iSi  ;  Sdhp  257.     For  similes  as  to  the  enoimous 
length  of  a  kappa  see  S  11.181  &  DA  i.i64  =  FVA  254. 
—  ace.  kappat)  adv.:  for  a  long  time  D  11.103=115  = 
Ud  62,  quot.  at  DA  1.103  :  ^'"^  11.198  ;  It  17 ;  Miln  108  ; 
mayi  &yukappai)  J  1.119,  cp.  Miln  141.     Cp.  sankappa. 
-Atita  one  who  has  gone  beyond  time,  an  Arahant 
Sn  373.     avasesai)  (ace.)  for  the  rest  of  the  kappa,  in 
kappai)  vS  k-ftvasesai)  va  D  n.ii7=A  iv.309=Ud  62  ; 
Miln  140  :  -iyuka  (one)  whose  life. extends  over  a  kappa 
Mhvs  V.87 ;  -uf^hana  arising  at  or  belonging  to  the  (end 
of  a)  kappa :  -aggi  the  fire  which  destroys  the  Universe 
J   n.397;   111.185;   rv.498;   V.336;   VI.554;   Vism  304; 
-ktia  the  time  of  the  end  of  the  world  J  v.244  ;  -ntthana 


(by  itself)  the  end  of  the  world  J  1.4  =  Vism  415;  -kata 
on  which  a  kappa,  i.  e.  smudge,  has  been  made,  ref.  to 
the  civzxa  of  a  bhikkhu  (see  above)  Vin  1.255 ;  iv.227, 
286 ;  DA  1.103  ;  -(fl)jaha  (one)  who  has  left  time  behind, 
free  from  sai)sara,  an  Arahant  Sn  1101  (but  expl""  at 
Nd'  s.  v.,  see  also  DA  1.103  as  free  from  dve  kappa: 
ditthi"  tanha").  -jila  the  consumption  of  the  kappa  by 
fire,  the  end  of  a  kappa  Dpvs  1.6:.  -ttba  staying  there 
for  a  kappa,  i.  e.  in  pnrgatorj'  in  Spayiko  nerayiko  + 
atekiccho,  said  of  Devadatta  Vin  11.202.  206 ;  A  111.402 
^-r/.ife;  It  ii.~85.  -(^ayin  lasting  a  whole  cycle, 
of  a  vimSna  Th  i.  1 190.  .(^hika  enduring  for  an  aeon  : 
kibbisa  (of  Devadatta)  Vin  11.198  =  204;  (cp.  Vin.  Texts 
111.254)  salarukkha  J  v.416 ;  see  also  thitakappig  Pug 
13.  -tthitika  id.  DhA  1.50  (vera) ;  Miln  108  (kammar)). 
("sabbe  pi  magga-samangino  puggala  thita  kappino.") 
-tthiya-  =  prec.  A  v.75 ;  J  1.172,  213;  v.33  ;  Miln  109, 
214.  °rukkha  the  tree  that  lasts  for  a  kappa,  ref.  to 
the  cittapatali,  the  pied  trumpet-tree  in  the  abode  of  the 
Asnras  J  1.202  ;  -nibbatta  originated  at  the  beginning 
of  the  k.  (appl.  to  the  flames  of  purgatory)  J  v.272  ; 
•pari▼at^  the  evolution  of  a  k ;  the  end  of  the  world 
Dpvs  1.59;  -padapa=°rukkha  Mhbv  2;  -rukkha  a 
wishing  tree,  magical  tree,  fulfilling  all  wishes ;  some- 
times fig.  J  VI. 117,  594  ;  Vism  206  ;  PvA  75,  176,  121  ; 
VvA  32  (where  comb''  with  cintamapi) ;  DhA  rv.208 ; 
-lata  a  creeper  like  the  kappanikkha  VvA  12  ;  -vinasaka 
(scil.  aggi) :  the  fire  consuming  the  world  at  the  end  of 
a  k.  Vism  414  sq. ;  (mahamegho)  DhA  111.362  ;  -samana 
an  ascetic  ace.  to  precepts,  an  earnest  ascetic  J  vi.60 
(cp.  samaoa-kappa) ;  -halahala  "  the  k-uproar,'"  the  up- 
roar near  the  end  of  a  kalpa  J  1.47. 

Kappaka  [fr.  k)p,  kappeti]  a  barber,  hairdresser,  also 
attendant  to  the  king  ;  his  other  function  (of  preparing 
baths)  is  expressed  in  the  term  nahapaka  (Pv  11.9")  or 
nahapita  (°a  ?)  (DA  1.157)  Vin.  1.344;  "182;  D  1.51 
(  =  DA  1. 1 57,  in  list  of  various  occupations) ;  J  1.60,  137  ; 
in.315  ;  Pv  11.9"  ;  iii.i*  (where  expl.  by  nahapita  in  the 
meaning  of  "bathed,"  cp.  expl.  ad  i.ic*)  DhA  1.85 
("vesa  disguise  of  a  barber),  342  (pasadhana°  one  who 
arranges  the  dress,  etc.,  hairdresser). 

-jitika  belonging  to  or  reborn  in  the  barber  class,  in 
this  sense  representing  a  low.  "  black"  birth  PvA  176. 

Kappata  [kad-pata=ku-pata]  a  dirty,  old  rag,  torn  gar- 
ment (of  a  bhikkhu)  Th  1.199. 

Kappatt  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  kappa]  fitness,  suitability  DA  1.207. 

Kappati  [Pass,  of  kappeti,  cp.  Sk.  kalpyate]  to  be  fit, 
seeming,  proper,  with  dat.  of  person  D  11. 162;  Vin 
11.263,  294  ;  111.36 ;  Th  1.488  ;  Mhvg  4.  II  ;  15,  16. 

Kappaaa  (nt.)  [fr.  kappeti,  cp.  Sk.  kalpana]  the  act  of 
preparing,  fixing ;  that  which  is  fixed,  arranged,  per- 
formed. 1 .  kappana  (f.)  the  fixing  of  a  horse's  harness, 
harnessing,  saddling  J  1.62  ;  —  2.  (nt.)  ( — °)  procuring, 
making :  jivika" ;  a  livelihood  J  111.32  ;  putting  into 
order;  danta"  J  1.321;  —  3.  (adj.)  ( — °)  trimmed, 
arranged  with  :  nanaratana°  VvA  35. 

Kappara  [cp.  Sk.  kOrpara]  the  elbow  Vin  iii.i2i«iv^3i ; 
J  1.293  ;  297  i  DhA  1.48.  394  ;  VvA  206. 

ffarplia  [cp.  Sk.  karp3sa]  i.  the  silk-cotton  tree  J  iu.386; 
VI. 336.  —  2.  cotton  D  II. 141;  A  U1.295 ;  S  v.284; 
J  1.350;  vt.41  ;  comb.  w.  uriQa  A  111.37=  iv.265"i268. 

-afthi  a  cotton  seed  DhA  111.71  ;  -pa^ala  the  film  of 
the  cotton  seed  Vism  446 ;  Bdhd  66 ;  -picu  cotton 
S  V.284 ;  J  v. no,  343;  VI. 184  :  -majra  made  of  cotton 
PvA  77. 

Kappifika  (adj.)  made  of  cotton  D  11. 188,  cp.  A  rv.394  ; 
D  II. 351  ;  Vin  1.58  =  97=281  ;  J  vi.590  ;  Pv  11. 1".  (nt) 
cotton  stuff  Miln  267. 

-panna  the  leaf  of  the  cotton  tree,  used  medicinally 


Kappasi 


i6 


Kama 


Vin  1. 20 1  ;  -sukhuma  fine,  delicate  cotton  stnfl  D  u.188  ; 
A  IV. 394  ;  Miln  105. 

EappasI  (f.)  [=kapp5sa]  cotton  J  vi.537;  PvA  146. 

Kappika  ( — °)  (adj.)  ffr.  kappa]  i.  belonging  to  a  kappa, 
in  patharaa"  -kala  the  time  of  the  first  Age  DA  1.247  ; 
Vbh  412  (of  manussi);  VvA  ig  (of  Manu) ;  without  the 
kala  (id.)  at  J  1.222  ;  as  noun  the  men  of  the  first  Age 
J  11.352.  —  2.  In  cpds.  .  .  .  pubbanta"  and  aparanta" 
the  ika°  belongs  to  the  whole  cpd.  D  1.39  sq.  ;  DA  1.103. 
See  also  kappiya  2. 

Kappita  [pp.  of  kappeti]  i.  prepared,  arranged,  i.  e.  har- 
nessed D  1.49;  J  VI. 268  ;  i.  e.  plaited  DA  1274;  i.  e. 
trimmed  :  °kesamassu  "  with  hair  &  beard  trimmed  " 
D  11.325;  S  IV.343;  J  V.173.  350;  VI.268;  Vv  73». — 

2.  getting    procuring;     as    "jivika   a    living   ]    v.270  ; 
made  ready,  drawn  up  (in  battle  array)  D  11. 189;  — 

3.  decorated  with,  adorned  with  Sdhp  247.      -su°  well 
prepared,  beautifully  harnessed  or  trimmed  Vv  60'. 

Kappin  (adj.)  [fr.  kappa]  i.  (cp.  kappa  11. i^)  getting, 
procuring,  acquiring  (panfia")  Sn  1090;  —  2.  (cp. 
kappa  II. ii")  having  a  kappa  (as  duration),  lasting  a 
Cycle  Pu  13  ;  in  Maha°  enduring  a  Mahakappa'  DA 
1.164=  PvA  254. 

Eappijra  (adj.)  [fr.  kappa]  i.  (cp.  kappa  11. i')  according 
to  rule,  right,  suitable,  fitting,  proper,  appropriate  (PvA 
26=anucchavika  pafirupa)  J  1.392;  DA  1.9;  PvA  25, 
141.  — a"  not  right,  not  proper,  unlawful  Vin  1.45, 
211;  11.118;  111.20  ;  (nt)  that  which  is  proper  A  1.84; 
Dhs  1 1 60;  — a°  ibid;  -kappiyakappiya  (nt)  that  which 
is  proper  and  that  which  is  not  J  1.3 16;  DA  1.78. — 
2.  (cp.  kappa  u.i'')  connected  with  time,  subject  to 
kappa,  i.  e.  temporal,  of  time,  subject  to  sagsara ;  of 
devamanussa  Sn  521;  na+of  the  Muni  Sn  914.  In 
another  sense  ("  belonging  to  an  Age  ")  in  cpd.  pathama 
°-k51a  the  time  of  the  first  Age  J  11.352.  — a°  delivered 
from  time,  free  from  saQsira,  Ep.  of  an  Arahant  Sn  860  ; 
cp.  Miln  49,  50.     See  also  kappika. 

-Anuloma  (nt.)  accordance  with  the  rule  Nett  192. 
-karaka  "  one  who  makes  it  befitting,"  i.  e.  who  by 
offering  anything  to  a  Bhikkhu,  makes  it  legally  accept- 
able Vin  1.206 ;  -kuti  (f.)  a  building  outside  the  Vihira, 
wherein  allowable  articles  were  stored,  a  kind  of  ware- 
house Vin  1. 139;  II. 159;  -daraka  a  boy  given  to  the 
Bhikkhus  to  work  for  them  in  the  Vihara  DA  1.78  (v.  1. 
BB  "karaka) ;  -bhanda  utensils  allowable  to  the  Bhik- 
khus J  1.41  ;  DhA  1.412.  a°  thing  unauthorised  Vin. 
11.169;  a  list  of  such  forbidden  articles  is  found  at 
Vin  1. 192  ;  -bhami  (f.)  a  plot  of  ground  set  apart  for 
storing  (allowable)  provisions  Vin  1.239  (cp.  °kuti); 
-lesa  [cp.  Sk.  kalpya]  guile  appropriate  to  one's  own 
purpose  VvA  348  ;  -safiftin  (a)  imagining  as  lawful  (that 
which  is  not)  A  1.84  ;  a°  opp.  ibid.  -°ta  the  imagining  as 
lawful  (that  which  is  not)  appl.  to  kukkucca  Dhs  1 160  ; 
a°  opp.  ibid. 

Kappn  (nt.)= kappa  in  the  dialect  used  by  Makkhali 
Gosala,  presumably  the  dialect  of  Vesali.  D  1.54  ; 
DA  1. 164  (a  Burmese  MS.  reads  kappi,  and  so  do  Pv 
IV.  3";  PvA  254). 

Kapp6ra  (m.  &  nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  karpura]  camphor:  (a)  the 
plant  J  VI. 537.  —  (b)  the  resinous  exudation,  the 
prepared  odoriferant  substance  (cp.  katukapphala) 
J  ii.4i6=DhA  in.475  ;  Miln  382  ;  Davs  v.50. 

Kappeti  [Der.  from  kappa,  cp.  Sk.  kjpa  shape,  form; 
•qnrep  cans.  from.  fr.  •(iner=Sk.  kl,  karoti  to  shape,  to 
malce,  cp.  karoti]  to  cause  to  fit,  to  create,  build,  con- 
struct, arrange,  prepare,  order. 

I.  lit.  I .  in  special  sense :  to  prepare,  get  done,  i.  e. 
harness :  J  1.62  ;  plait  DA  1.274,  an  offering  (yaiifiar))  Sn 
1043  ;  i.  e.  to  trim  etc.  M  11.155  ;  J  111.223  ;  Mhvs  25.  64. 


2,  generally  (to  be  translated  according  to  the  meaning 
of  accompanying  noun),  to  make,  get  up,  carry  on  etc. 
(=Fr.  passer),  viz.  iriyapathai)  to  keep  one's  composure 
Th  1.570  ;  J  v. 262  ;  Bdhd  33  ;  jivitai) :  to  lead  one's  life 
PvA  3,4,  13;  divaviharai]  to  take  the  noonday  rest  Mhvs 
19.  79  ,"  nisajjar)  to  sit  down  Vin  111.191  ;  vasai},  sagvasai) 
to  make  one's  abode  D  11.88;  Sn  283;  PvA  36,  47; 
sagvasai]  to  have  (sexual)  intercourse  with  J  in. 448 ; 
Mhvs  5,  2 12  ;  PvA  6  ;  seyyag :  to  lie  down,  to  make  one's 
bed  Pug  55  etc.  (acelaka-passage=D  1.166). 

II.  fig.  I.  in  special  sense:  to  construct  or  form 
an  opinion,  to  conjecture,  to  think  Sn  799  ;  DA  1.103  ; 
—  2.  generally:  to  ordain,  prescribe,  determine  J 
v. 238  (  =  say  vidahati)  —  Cans.  II.  kappapeti  to  cause 
to  be  made  in  all  senses  of  kappeti;  e.  g.  Vin  n.134 
(massui)  k.  to  get  one's  beard  done) ;  J  v. 262  (hatthi- 
yanani  k.  to  harness  the  elephant-cars)  ;  DA  1. 147  (panca 
hatthinika-satani  k.  harness  the  500  elephants).  Pass, 
kappiyati  in  ppr.  kappiyamana  getting  harnessed  J  1.62. 

Eabara  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  kabara]  variegated,  spotted,  striped ; 
mixed,  intermingled;  in  patches  Vism  190.  Of  a  cow 
(°gavi)  DhA  1.71  (°go-rupa)  ibid.  99  ;  of  a  calf  ("vaccha) 
J  V.106;  of  a  dog  (°vaijria=sabala  q.  v.)  J  vi.107;  of 
leprosy  J  v. 69  ;  of  the  shade  of  trees  ("cchSya,  opp. 
sanda°)  M  1.75  ;  J  iv.152  ;  DhA  1.375. 

-kucchi  having  a  belly  striped  with  many  colours,  of 
a  monster  J  1.273 ;  -kuttha  a  kind  of  leprosy  J  v.6g ; 
-mani  the  cat's  eye,  a  precious  stone,  also  called  mas3- 
ragalla,  but  also  an  emerald ;  both  are  prob.  varieties 
of  the  cat's  eye  VvA  167,  304. 

Kabala  (m.,  nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  kavala  BSk.  kavada  Divy  290 
(  +  alopa),  298,  470]  a  small  piece  (  =  alopa  PvA  70). 
a  mouthful,  always  appl.  to  food,  either  solid  (i.  e.  as 
much  as  is  made  into  a  ball  with  the  fingers  when  eating) , 
or  liquid  Vin  11. 214;  It  18=  J  111.409 ;  iv.93  ;  Dh  324; 
Miln  180,  400  ;  Bdhd  69  ;  DhA  11.65  ;  PvA  39 ;  Mhvs  19, 
74.  Kabale  ka.bale  on  every  morsel  J  1.68;  Miln  231  ; 
-sakabala  appl.  to  the  mouth,  with  the  mouth  full  of 
food  Vin  11.214  ;  rv-  '95  ^  —  Sometimes  written  kabala. 
-4vacchedaka  choosing  portions  of  a  mouthful, 
nibbling  at  a  morsel  Vin  11. 214;  rv.196. 

KabalinkSra  (adj.)  [kabala  in  comp°  form  kabali°  before 
kr  &  bhfl;  kabaUn  for  kabali°]  always  in  comb"  with 
ahara,  food  "  made  into  a  ball,"  i.  e.  eatable,  material 
food,  as  one  of  the  4  kinds  cf  food  (see  stock  phrase 
k°  aharo  olariko  va  sukhumo  va  .  .  .  at  M  1.48  = 
S  ii.ii,  98  =  D  in. 228,  276;  Bdhd  135)  Dhs  585,  646 
(where  fully  described),  816;  Miln  245;  Vism  236,  341, 
450,  616  ;  Bdhd  69,  74  ;  DA  1.120.  Written  kabalikara 
nearly  always  in  Burmese,  and  sometimes  in  Singh. 
MSS.  ;  s.  also  Nett  11 4- 118. 

-ahara-bhakkha  (of  atta,  soul)  feeding  on  material 
food  D  1.34,  186,  195;  -bhakkha,  same  A  in.i92  =  v.336 
(appl.  to  the  kamivacara  devas) ;  DA  1.120. 

Kaba)ik&  (f)  [cp.  Sk.  kavaUka]  a  bandage,  a  piece  of  cloth 
put  over  a  sore  or  wound  Vin  1.205  (cp.  Vi».  Textx 
11.58  n*). 

Kabba  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  kavya]  a  poem,  poetical  composition, 
song,  ballad  in  "g  karoti  to  compose  a  song  J  vi.410  ; 
-karana  making  poems  DA  1.95 ;  and  -kara  a  poet 
Kh  21  ;  J  VI. 4 to. 

Kabya=  kabba  in  cpds.  °aiankara  composing  in  beautiful 
verse,  a  beautiful  poem  in  "g  bandhati,  to  compose  a 
poem  ibid.  ;  and  -karaka  a  poet,  ibid. 

Kama  [fr.  kram,  cp.  Vedic  krama  ( — °)  step,  in  uru°,  BSk. 
krama  reprieve,  Divy  505]  —  i.  (nt.)  going,  proceeding, 
course,  step,  way,  manner,  e.  g.  sabbatth'avihata- 
kkama  "  having  a  course  on  all  sides  unobstructed  " 
Sdhp  425  ;  va^<Jhana°  process  of  development  Bdhd  oO 
patiloma"  (going)  the  opposite  way  Bdhd  106 ;  cp.  also 


Kamana 


Kamboja 


Bdhd  107,  III.  a  fivefold  kama  or  process  (of  develop- 
ment or  division),  succession,  is  given  at  Vism  476  with 
nppattik".  pahina",  patipattik",  bhumik",  desanSk". 
where  they  are  illustrated  by  examples.  Threefold 
applied  to  upSdina  at  Vism  570  (viz.  nppattik°. 
pahinak",  desanik°)  —  2.  oblique  cases  (late  and 
technical)  "  by  way  of  going,"  i.  e.  in  order  or  in  due 
course,  in  succession :  kamato  Vism  476,  483,  497 ; 
Bdhd  70,  103  ;  kamena  by  &  by,  gradually  Mhvs.  3.  33  ; 
5,  136  ;  13.  6  ;  DSvs  1.30  ;  SnA  455  ;  Bdhd  88  ;  yathik- 
kamai)  Bdhd  96.  —  3.  (adj.)  ( — °)  having  a  certain  way 
of  going :  catukkama  walking  on  all  fours  (=  catupp&da) 

Pv  I.I  I*. 

Kuuma  a  step,  stepping,  gait  J  v. 153,  in  expl"  J  v.156 
taken  to  be  ppr.  med.  —  See  san°. 

Kimati  [kmn.  Dhtp.  expl''  by  padavikkhepc ;  ppr.  med. 
kamamina  S  1.33  ;  Sn  176  ;  Intens.  cankamati.]  to  walk. 
(1)  Ht.  I.  c.  loc.  to  walk,  travel,  go  through:  dibbe 
pathe  Sn  176;  ariye  pathe  S  1.33;  ak&se  D  i.2i2csM 
I  69=  A  111.17;  —  2. -c.  ace.  to  go  or  get  to,  to  enter 
M  11.18;  J  VI.107;  Pv  !.!•  (saggai))  —  (11)  fig.  i.  to 
succeed,  have  efiect.  to  afiect  M  1.186;  J  v.198;  Miln 
198;  —  2.  to  plunge  into,  to  enter  into  A  11. 144;  — 
3.  impers.  to  come  to  (c.  dat)  S  iv.283. 

Ktwttij^flhT  (m.,  nt.)  [etym.  uncertain]  the  waterpot  with 
long  spout  used  by  non- Buddhist  ascetics  S  1.167; 
J  H.73  (=kuo4>l'a);  iv.362,  370;  V1.86,  525,  570; 
Sn  p.  80  ;  DhA  in. 448 — adj.  kamandaluka  [read  ka°  ?] 
"  with  the  waterpot  "  A  v. 263  (brahmapi  pacchJbhu- 
makS  k.). 

KuutthkO  (adv.)  [kaQ  atthai)]  for  what  purpose,  why  ? 
J  III. 398  (=kimatthar|). 

Kanunlra  (a^jO  [grd  of  k^mayati]  (a)  desirable,  beautiful, 
lovely  J  v.  1 55,  156;  Miln  11;  (b)  pleasant,  sweet 
(-sounding)  D  11.171  ;  J  1.96.  —  As  nt.  a  desirable 
object  S  1.22. 

Kkmkte  (nt.)  a  lotus,  freq.  comb''  with  kuvalaya  ;  or  with 
uppala  J  1. 146;  DA  1.40,  expl''  as  varikiajakkha 
PVA  77.  I.  lotus,  the  lotus  flower.  Nelumbium 
J  1. 146;  DA  1.40  :  Mhbv  3  ;  Sdhp  325  ;  VvA  43,  181.  191  ; 
PvA  23,  77;  —  At  J  I.I  19,  149  a  better  reading  is 
obtained  by  corr.  kambala  to  kamala,  at  J  1.178  how- 
ever kamb"  should  be  retained. —  2.  a  kind  of  grass,  of 
which  sandals  were  made  Vin.  1.190  (s.  Fin.  Texts 
11.23  °0  —  3-  i-  kamala  a  graceful  woman  J  v.  160; 
-komalakara  (f.)  (of  a  woman)  having  lotus-like  (soft) 
hands  Mhbv  29  ;  -dala  a  lotus  leaf  Vism  465  ;  Mhbv  3  ; 

Bdhd  19;  DhsA  127;  VvA  35,  38. paduka  sandals 

of  k.  grass  Vin  1.190. 

Kinnlin  (adj.)  [fr.  kamala]  rich  in  lotus,  covered  with 
lotuses  (of  a  pond)  in  kamalini-kimuka  "  the  lover  of 
lotuses,"  Ep.  of  the  Sun  Mhbv.  3  (v.  1.  °s<lmika  perhaps 
to  be  preferred). 

Ksmpa  ( — °)  [fr.  kamp]  trembling,  shaking  ;  tremor  DA 
1. 130  (pathavi") ;  Sdhp  401;  a"  (adj.)  not  trembling, 
unshaken;  calm,  tranquil  Sdhp  594;  Mhvs  15,  175. 

Ktmpaka  (adj.)  [fr.  kampa]  shaking,  one  who  shakes  or 
causes  to  tremble  Miln  343  (pathavi"). 

Kampati  [kamp  to  shake  Dhtp.  186 :  calane  ;  p.  pres.  kam- 
panto,  kampai),  kampamSna ;  aor.  akampi ;  caus. 
kampeti;  p.  pres.  kampetan  Dpvsxvii.ji  ;  ger.  kampa- 
yitvina  D  n.108  ;  J  v.  178]  —  to  shake,  tremble,  waver 
Kb  6 ;  J  1.23 ;  Sn  268  (expl.  KhA  153  ;  calati.  vedhati) ; 
Bdhd  84  r — Cp.  anu°,  pa°,  vi",  sam". — kampamana 
(adj.)  trembling  J  in.  161  ;  agitated,  troubled  ("citta) 
J  11-337 '  a°  i>ot  trembling,  unhesitating,  steadfast 
J  VI.  293. 


Kampana  [fr.  kamp]  i-  adj.  causing  to  shake  DhA  1.84, 
trembling  Kacc  271  ;  2.  (nt)  (a)  an  earthquake  J  1.26 
47;  (b)  tremor  (of  feelings)  J  in.  163. 

-rasa  (adj.)  "  whose  essence  is  to  tremble,"  said  of 
doubt  (vicikiccha)  DhsA  259. 

KampiA  (adj.)  [fr.  kampa]  see  vi°. 

Kampiya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  kampati]  in  a°  not  to  be  shaken, 
immovable,  strong  Th  2,  195  ;  Miln  386;  (nt.)  firmness, 
said  of  the  5  moral  powers  (baUUii)  DA  1.64. 

Kampail  (va.)  at  Th  2,  262  is  to  be  corr.  into  kambu-r-iva 
(see  Morris,  J.P.T.S.  1884.  76). 

Kambala  (m.,  nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  kambala]  i .  woollen  stuff,  woollen 
blanket  or  garment.  From  J  iv.353  it  appears  that  it 
was  a  product  of  the  north,  probably  Nepal  (cp.  J.P.T.S. 
1889,  203);  enum""  as  one  of  the  6  kinds  of  civaras, 
together  w.  koseyya  &  kappasika  at  Vin  1.58=96,  also 
at  A  IV.394  (s.  "sukhuma) ;  freq.  preceded  by  ratta 
(e.  g.  DA  1. 40.  Cp.  also  ambara'  and  ambala),  which 
shows  that  it  was  commonly  dyed  red ;  also  as  pan^u 
Sn  689 ;  Bdhd  i .  —  Some  woollen  garments  {a44^^' 
sika)  were  not  allowed  for  Bhikkhas:  Vin  1.28 1  ;  11. 174  ; 
see  further  J  1.43,  178,  322  ;  iv.138  ;  Miln  17,  88.  105; 
DhA  1.226  ;  n.89  sq.  2.  a  garment :  two  kinds  of  haur- 
(blankets,  i.  e.)  garments  viz.  kesa°  and  vSla"  men- 
tioned Vin  1.305  =  0  1. 167  =  A  1. 240,  295.  —  3.  woollen 
thread  Vin  1.190  (expl'*  by  unrii)  (cp.  Vin.  Texts  11.23); 
J  VI. 340  ;  — 4.  a  tribe  of  NSgas  J  vi.165. 

-kaAcuka  a  (red)  woollen  covering  thrown  over  a 
temple,  as  an  ornament  Mhvs  34,  74 ;  -kfl^gira  a 
bamboo  structure  covered  with  (red)  woollen  cloth, 
used  as  funeral  pile  DhA  1.69  ;  -paduka  woollen  slippers 
Vin  1. 190  ;  -pufija  a  heap  of  blankets  J  1.149 ;  -maddiuia 
dyeing  the  rug  Vin  1.254  (cp-  ''"'•  Texts  11.154) ;  -ratana 
a  precious  rug  of  wool  J  rv.138 ;  Miln  17  (16  ft.  long  St 
18  ft.  wide);  -vanna  (adj.)  of  the  colour  of  woollen 
fabric,  i.  e.  red  }  v.359  ("maQsa) ;  -silasana  (pavdn")  a 
stone-seat,  covered  with  a  white  k.  blanket,  forming  the 
throne  of  Sakka  DhA  1.17;  -sukhuma  fine,  delicate 
woollen  stuff  D  11.188  =  A  iv.394  ;  Miln  105;  -sutta  a 
woollen  thread  J  vi.340. 

Kambalin  (adj.)  [fr.  kambala]  having  a  woollen  garment 
D  1.55;  11.150. 

Kamballjra  (nt.)  [fr.  kambala]  (a  sort  of)  woollen  garment 
Pv  II. i"  (cp.  PyA  77). 

Kamba  [cp.  Sk.  kambu.  HaUyudha  =  iankha ;  Dhtp. 
saijvararie]  i .  a  conch,  a  shell :  saoha-kambu-r-iva 
.  .  .  Bobhate  su  givS  Th  2,  262  (for  kampuri'va) ;  s. 
cpds.  —  2 .  a  ring  or  bracelet  (made  of  shells  or  perhaps 
gold:  see  Kem.  Toev.  s.  v.)  J  iv.18,  466  (-fkayiira); 
Pv  II. 12*,  III.9*  (=PvA  157,  sankhavalaya)  Vv  36* 
(=VvA  167  hatth'aiankSra),  worn  on  the  wrist,  while 
the  kiyura  is  worn  on  the  upper  part  of  the  arm  (bhu- 
jilankira  ibid.) ;  —  3.  a  golden  ring,  given  as  second 
meaning  at  VvA  167,  so  also  expl.  at  J  IV.18,  130; 
J  v. 400. 

-giva  (adj.)  having  a  neck  shaped  like  a  shell,  i.  e.  in 
spirals,  having  lines  or  folds,  considered  as  lucky 
J  IV.  1 30  (=suvannalingasadisagivo),  cp.  above  i  ; 
-tala  the  base  or  lower  part  of  a  shell,  viz.  the  spiral 
part,  fig.  the  lines  of  the  neck  J  v.  155  (°abhJsa  givft. 
expl*  on  p.  156  as  suvanijilingatala-sannibhi) ;  also  the 
(polished)  surface  of  a  shell,  used  as  simile  for  smoothness 
Jv.204,  207;  -pariharaka  a  wristlet  or  bracelet  VvA  167. 

KSLmbossa  [fr.  preceding]  gold  or  golden  ornament 
(bracelet)  J  v. 260,  261  ( :  kambussao  vuccati  suvai;ii;ar|). 

Kambojaka  (adj.)  coming  fr.  Kamboja  J  iv.464  (assatara). 

Kamboji  (f )  N  of  a  country  J  v. 446  (°ka  rattha) ;  Pv  11.91 
(etc.) ;  Vism  332,  334,  336. 

Ill— 2 


Kamboji 


i8 


Kamma 


Kamboji  (m.,  nt.)  [meaning  fc  etym.  unexpl"*]  the  plant 
Cassia  tpra  or  alata  J  111.223  (°gumba  =  elagala- 
gumba;  vv.  U.  kammoja"  &  tampo"  [for  kambo°]). 

ITainiT^n  (nt.)  [\'edic  karman,  work  esp.  sacrificial  process. 
For  ending  °man=Idg.  *men  cp.  Sk.  dhaman  =  Gr. 
lijlia,  Sk.  n5man  =  Lat  nomen]  the  doing,  deed,  work; 
orig.  meaning  (see  karoti)  either  building  (cp.  Lit. 
ktlrti,  Opr.  kura  to  build)  or  weaving,  plaiting  (still  in 
malJkamma  and  lata"  "  the  intertwining  of  garlands 
and  creepers  "  ;  also  in  kamma-kara  possibly  orig. 
employed  in  weaving,  i.  e.  serving)  ;  cp.  Lat.  texo,  to 
weave=Sk.  taksan  builder,  artisan,  &  Ger.  wirken, 
orig.  weben.  Grammatically  karman  has  in  Pali 
almost  altogether  passed  into  the  -a  decl.,  the  cons, 
forms  for  instr.  &  abl.  kamma  and  kammana  gen.  dat. 
kammuno,  are  rare.  The  nom.  pi.  is  both  kamma  and 
kammani. 

1.  Crude  meaning,  i.  (lit.)  Acting  in  a  special  sense, 
i.  e.  office,  occupation,  doing,  action,  profession.  Two 
kinds  are  given  at  Vin  iv.6.  viz.  low  (hina)  &  high 
(ukkattha)  professions.  To  the  former  belong  the 
kammani  of  a  kofthaka  and  a  pupphacchaddaka,  to  the 
latter  belong  vanijja  and  gorakkha. — Kamma  as  a 
profession  or  business  is  regarded  as  a  hindrance  to  the 
religious  life,  &  is  counted  among  the  ten  obstacles  (see 
palibodha).  In  this  sense  it  is  at  Vism  94  expl''  by 
navakamma  (see  below  2a). — kassa°  ploughing,  occu- 
pation of  a  ploughman  Vism  284  ;  kumbhakara"  pro- 
fession of  a  potter  J  vi.372  ;  tunna°  weaving  \  ism  122  ; 
PvA  161.  purohita°  office  of  a  high-priest  (=abstr. 
n.  porohiccar))  SnA  466;  vanija"  trade  Sasv.  40.- — kam- 
mana by  profession  Sn  650,  651  ;  kammani  (pi.)  x>ccu- 
pations  Sn  263=  Kh  v. 6  (anavajjani  k.  =  an5kula 
kammanta  Sn  262).  parcsar)  k'l)  katva  doing  other 
people's  work  =  being  a  servant  VvA  299;  sa°  pasuta 
bent  upon  their  own  occupations  D  1.135,  cp.  attano 
k°-  kubbanar)  Dh  217.  kamma-karaija-sala  work-room 
(here:  weaving  shed)  PvA  120. 

2.  Acting  in  general,  action,  deed,  doing  (nearly 
always  — ")  (a)  (active)  act,  deed,  job,  often  to  be  ren- 
dered by  the  special  verb  befitting  the  special  action, 
like  civara°  mending  the  cloak  VvA  250  ;  uposatha° 
observing  the  Sabbath  Vbh  422  ;  nava°  making  new, 
renovating,  repairing,  patching  Vin  ii.iig,  159  ("karoti 
to  make  repairs) ;  J  1.92  :  Vism  94,  adj.  navakammika 
one  occupied  with  repairs  Vin  11.15  :  S  1.179  ;  patthita° 
the  desired  action  (i.  e.  sexual  intercourse)  DhA  11.49  ; 
kammai)  karoti  to  be  active  or  in  working,  to  act : 
nJgo  padehi  k.k.  the  elephant  works  with  his  feet 
M  1.414  ;  kate°  the  job  done  by  the  thieves  DhA  11. 38 
(corehi),  as  adj.  kata°  cora  (&  akata  °cora)  a  thief  who 
has  finished  his  deed  (&  one  who  has  not)  Vism  180, 
also  in  special  sense:  occasion  for  action  or  work,  i.  e. 
necessity,  purpose:  ukkiya  kammai)  n'atthi,  the  torch 
does  not  work,  is  no  good  Vism  428.  (b)  (passive)  the 
act  of  being  done  ( — ").  anything  done  (in  its  result), 
work,  often  as  collect,  abstr  (to  be  trsl"".  by  E.  ending 
-ing) ;  apaccakkha"  not  being  aware,  deception  Vbh  85  ; 
dalhr  strengthening,  increase  Vbh  357,  Vism  122  ; 
citta"  variegated  work,  mala"  garlands,  lata"  creeper 
(work)  Vism  108 ;  nama°  naming  Bdhd  83  ;  panha° 
questioning,  "  questionnaire  "  Vism  6.  —  So  in  defini- 
tions nitthuriya°  =  nitthuriya  Vbh  357;  nimitta''  = 
nimitta,  obhasa"'  =  obh5sa  (apparition  >  appearing)  Vbh 
.15.5-  —  (c)  (intrs.)  making,  getting,  act,  process  (-°). 
Often  trsl.  as  abstr.  n.  with  ending  -ion  or  -ment,  e.  g. 
okasa°  opportunity  of  speaking,  giving  an  audience 
Sn  p.  94  ;  patu°  making  clear,  manifestation  DhA 
IV.  1 98  anavi°,  anuttini"  concealment  Vbh  358;  kata° 
(adj.)  one  who  has  done  the  act  or  process,  gone  through 
the  experience  SnA  355  ;  afijali",  samici"  veneration, 
honouring  (in  formula  with  nipaccakSra  abhivadana  pac- 
cutthSna)  D  in. 83  («Vin  n.162,  255)  ;  A  1.123  ;  11. 180  ; 
J.  1. 218,  219. 


3.  (Specialised)  an  "  act  "  in  an  ecclesiastical  sense; 
proceedings,  ceremony,  performed  by  a  lawfully  con- 
stituted chapter  of  bhikkhus  Vin  1.49,  53,  144,  318  ;  H.70, 
93  ;  v.220sq. ;  Khus/.P.r.5.  1883,  101.  At  these  formal 
functions  a  motion  is  put  before  the  assembly  and  the 
announcement  of  it  is  called  the  iiatti  Vin  1.56,  after  which 
the  bhikkhus  are  asked  whether  they  approve  of  the 
motion  or  not.  li  this  question  is  put  once,  it  is  a 
iiattidutiyakamma  Vin  11.89 ;  if  put  three  times,  a 
ilatticatuttha"  Vin  1.50  (cp.  Vin.  Texts  1.169  n^). 
There  are  6  kinds  of  official  acts  the  Sangha  can  per- 
form :  see  Vin  1.317  sq.  ;  for  the  rules  about  the  validity 
of  these  ecclesiastical  functions  see  Vin  1.3 12-333  {^P- 
Vin  T.  11.256-285).  The  most  important  ecclesiastical 
acts  are :  apalokanakamma,  ukkhepaniya"  uposatha" 
tajjaniya"  tassapapiyyasika"  nissaya",  patifliiakara- 
niya°,  patipucchakaraniya"  pafisaraniya"  pabbSjaniya", 
sammukhakaraijlya°.  —  In  this  sense  :  kammag  karoti 
(w.  gen.)  to  take  proceedings  against  Vin  1.49,  143,  317  ; 
11.83,  260  ;  kammai)  garahati  to  find  fault  with  pro- 
ceedings gone  through  Vin  11.5 ;  kammar)  patippas- 
sambheti  to  revoke  official  proceedings  against  a 
bhikkhu  Vin  111.145. 

4.  In  cpds.  : fldhit^hayaka  superintendent  of  work, 

inspector  Mhvs  5,  1 74  ;  30,  98  ;  -Adhipateyya  one  whose 
supremacy  is  action  Miln  288  ;  -arambha  commence- 
ment of  an  undertaking  Mhvs  28,  2 1  ;  -ftraha  (a)  entitled 
to  take  part  in  the  performance  of  an  "  act  "  Vin  iv.i53  ; 
V.221;  -arama  (a)  delighting  in  activity  D  11.77;  A 
IV. 22  ;  It  71,  79  ;  -aramata  taking  pleasure  in  (worldly) 
activity  D  ii.78  =  A  iv.22,  cp.  Vbh  381  ;  A  in. 116,  173, 
293  sq.,  330,  449;  IV.22  sq.,  331  ;  v. 163;  It  71  ;  Ava- 
dana  a  tale  of  heroic  deeds  J  vi.295  ;  -kara  or  °kara : 
used  indiscriminately.  1.  (adj.)  doing  work,  or  active, 
in  puriso  daso-f  pubbutthSyi  "willing  to  work" 
D  1.60  et  sim.  (  =  I)A  1.1(38;  analaso).  A  1145;  11.67; 
Vv  75*;  2.  (n.)  a  workman,  a  servant  (a  weaver  ?) 
usually  in  form  dasa  ti  va  pessa  ti  v5  kammakara  ti  vi 
Vin  1.243;  I-*  1.141  =  Pug  56  (also  °kara) ;  A  11.208; 
III. 77,  172;  Th  2,  340;  J  1.57.  Also  as  dasa  pessa 
k"kara  A  111.37=  iv. 265,  393.  *"d  dasa  k°  kara  Vin 
1. 240,  272;  n.154;  D  111.191;  S  1.92: — a  handyman 
J  1.239;  Miln  378;  (f)  -5  a  female  servant  Vin  11.267; 
°kara  Vin  iv.224,  kari  Dhs  A98  =  VvA  73  (appl.  to  a 
wife);  -karana  i.  working,  labour,  service  J  111.219; 
FvA  120  ;  DA  1.168;  2.  the  effects  of  karma  J  1.146; 
-karana  and  karai;ia  see  below ;  -kama  liking  work, 
industrious;  a°  lazy  A  iv.93=J  11.348;  -karaka  a 
workman,  a  servant  DA  1.8  ;  Mhvs  3(1,  42  ;  Nd^  427  ; 
a  sailor  J  iv.139  ;  -garu  bent  on  work  Miln  288  ;  -ccheda 
the  interruption  of  work  J  1.149;  246;  111.270;  -jata 
sort  of  action  J  v. 24  (=kammam  eva) ;  -dhura  (ra.  nt.) 
draught-work  J  1.196;  -dhejrya  work  to  be  performed, 
duty  A  IV. 285  =  325;  cp.  3  VI. 297  ;  -dhoreyya  "fit  to 
bear  the  burden  of  action  "  Miln  288  (cp.  Mil.  trsl. 
II.  1 40);  -niketava  having  action  as  one's  house  or 
temple  ibid.  ;  -nipphadana  accomplishing  the  business 
]  VI. 1 62  ;  -ppatta  entitled  to  take  part  in  an  eccles. 
act  Vin  1.318;  v.221;  -bahula  abounding  in  action 
(appl.  to  the  world  of  men)  Miln  7  ;  -mula  the  price  of 
the  transaction  Miln  334  ;  -rata  delighting  in  business 
D  11.78  ;  It  71  ;  -vatthu  objects,  items  of  an  act  Vin 
V.116 ;  -vaca  the  te.\t  or  word  of  an  official  Act.  These 
texts  form  some  of  the  oldest  literature  and  are  em- 
bodied in  the  Vinaya  (cp.  Vin  1.317  sq.  ;  111.174,  '76: 
IV. 1 53,  etc.).  The  number  of  officially  recognized  k° 
is  eleven,  see  J.P.T.S.  1882,  1888,  i'896,  1907:  k°o 
karoti  to  carry  out  an  official  Act  Mhvs  5,  207  ;  DhsA 
399  ;  "°D  anussiveti  to  proclaim  a  k°,  to  put  a  resolution 
to  a  chapter  of  bhikkhus  Vin  1.317;  -vossagga  difier- 
cnce  of  occupation  J  vi.216;  -sajja  (a)  "ready  for 
action,"  i.  e.  for  battle  J  v. 232  ;  -saduta  "  agreeableness 
to  work"  DhsA  151  (cp.  kammannata  &  kamyata) ; 
-samin  "  a  master  in  action,"  an  active  man  Miln  288 ; 
-sippi  an  artisan  VvA  278  ;  -sHa  one  whose  habit  it  is 


I 


Kamma. 


19 


Kamma 


to  work,  energetic,  persevering  Milu  288  ,  a°  indolent, 
lazy  J  VI. 245  ;  a^-ttag  indolence,  laziness  Mhvs  23,  21  ; 
-him  devoid  of  occupation,  inactive  Miln  288. 

II.  Applied  (pregnant)  meaning:  doing,  acting  with 
ref.  to  both  deed  and  doer.  It  is  impossible  to  draw  a 
clear  line  between  the  source  of  the  act  (i.  e.  the  acting 
subject,  the  actor)  and  the  act  (either  the  object  or 
phenomenon  acted,  produced,  i.  e.  the  deed  as  objective 
phenomenon,  or  the  process  of  acting,  i.  e.  the  deed  as 
subjective  phenomenon).  Since  the  latter  (the  act)  is 
to  be  judged  by  its  consequences,  its  effects,  its  mani- 
festation always  assumes  a  quality  (in  its  most  obvious 
characteristics  either  good  or  bad  or  indifferent),  and 
since  the  act  reflects  on  the  actor,  this  quality  is  also 
attached  to  him.  This  is  the  popular,  psychological 
view,  and  so  it  is  expressed  in  language,  although  reason 
attributes  goodness  and  badness  to  the  actor  first,  and 
then  to  the  act.  In  the  expression  of  language  there 
is  no  difference  between:  i.  the  deed  as  such  and  the 
doer  in  character:  anything  done  (as  good  or  bad)  has 
a  corresponding  source;  2.  the  performance  of  the 
single  act  and  the  habit  of  acting  :  anything  done  tends 
to  be  repeated  ;  3.  the  deed  with  ref.  both  to  its  cause 
and  its  effect :  anythmg  done  is  caused  and  is  in  itself 
the  cause  of  something  else  As  meanings  of  kamma 
we  therefore  have  to  disCmguish  the  foil,  different  sides 
of  a  "  deed,"  viz. 

I.  the  deed  as  expressing  the  doer's  will.  i.  e.  quali- 
fied deed,  good  or  bad ;  2.  the  repeated  deed  as  expres- 
sion of  the  doer's  habit=his  character;  3.  the  deed  as 
having  consequences  for  the  doer,  as  such  a  source 
qualified  according  to  good  and  evil ;  as  deed  done 
accumulated  and  forming  a  deposit  of  the  doer's  merit 
and  demerit  (his  "karma").  Thus  papakamma=a 
bad  deed,  one  who  h£ts  done  a  bad  deed,  one  who  has 
a  bad  character,  the  potential  effect  of  a  bad  deed  =  bad 
karma.  The  context  alone  decides  which  of  these 
meanings  is  the  one  intended  by  the  speaker  or 
writer. 

Concerning  the  analysis  of  the  various  semantic 
developments  the  following  practical  distinctions  can 
be  made:  i.  Objective  action,  characterized  by  time; 
as  past  =  done,  meaning  deed  (with  kata) ;  or  future=to 
be  done,  meaning  duty  (with  kitabba).  2.  Subjective 
action,  characterized  by  quality,  as  reflecting  on  the 
agent.  3.  Interaction  of  act  and  agent :  (a)  in  sub- 
jective relation,  cause  and  effect  as  action  and  reaction 
on  the  individual  (individual  "  karma,"  appearing  in 
his  life,  either  here  or  beyond),  characterized  as  regards 
action  (having  results)  and  as  regards  actor  (having  to 
cope  with  these  results)  :  (b)  in  objective  relation,  i.  e. 
abstracted  from  the  individual  and  geneiaUzed  as 
Principl",  or  cause  and  effect  as  Norm  of  Happening 
(universal  "  karma."  appearing  in  Sagsira.  as  driving 
power  of  the  world),  characterized  (a)  as  cause,  (b)  as 
consequence,  (c)  as  cause-consequence  in  the  principle 
of  retribution  (talio),  (d)  as  restricted  to  time. 

1.  (Objective):  with  ref.  to  the  Past:  kig  kammag 
akasi  njri  what  (deed)  has  this  woman  done  .■'  Pv  1.9'  ; 
tassa  katakammag  pucchi  he  asked  what  had  been  done 
by  her  PvA  37,  83,  etc.  —  with  ref.  to  the  Future :  k. 
katabbag  hoti  I  have  an  obligation,  under  8  kusitavat- 
thuni  D  iii.255  =  A  iv.332  ;  cattari  kammani  katta  hoti 
"  he  performs  the  4  obligations  "  (of  gahapati)  A  11.67. 

2.  (Subjective)  (a)  doing  in  general,  acting,  action, 
deed ;  var.  kinds  of  doings  enum.  under  micchSjiva 
D  1. 12  (santikamma,  panidhi",  etc.);  tassa  kammassa 
katatti  through  (the  performance  of)  that  deed  D 
III.  1 36;  dukkarag  kamma-kubbatag  he  who  of  those 
who  act,  acts  badly  S  1.19;  abhabbo  tag  kammag 
kStum  incapable  of  doing  that  deed  S  111.225;  saiice- 
tanika  k.  deed  done  intentionally  M  111.207  ;  A  v. 292  sq.  ; 
pamiriakatag  k.  D  1.251  =  5  iv.322.  katarag  k^g 
karonto  ahag  nirayag  na  gaccheyyag  ?  how  (i.  e.  what 
doing)  shall  I  not  go  to  Niraya  ?   J  iv.340  ;  yag  kii\ci 


sithilag  k'^g  .  .  .  na  tag  huti  mahapphalag  .  .  . 
S  1.49=  Dh  3i2  =  Th  t.  277;  kadariya"  a  stingy  action 
Pv.\  25;  k.  classed  with  sippa.  vijja-carana  D  111.156; 
kani  k^ani  samma-nivitjha  established  slightly  in  what 
doings  ?  Sn  324  ;  (b)  Repeated  action  in  general,  con- 
stituting a  person's  habit  of  acting  or  character  (cp. 
kata  II.  1.  a.)  ;  action  as  reflecting  on  the  agent  or  bear- 
ing his  characteristics  ;  disposition,  character.  Esp.  in 
phrase  kammena  samannagata  "  endowed  with  the 
quality  of  acting  in  such  and  such  a  manner,  being  of 
such  and  such  character  "  :  tihi  dhammehi  samanna- 
gato  niraye  nikkhitto  "  endowed  with  (these)  three 
qualites  a  man  will  go  to  N."  A  1.292  sq.  ;  asucina  kaya- 
k°ena  sam°  asucimanussi  "  bad  people  are  those  who 
are  of  bad  ways  (or  character)"  Nd^  112;  anavajja 
kaya-k°  sam°  A  11.69  (cp.  A  1V.3O4)  ;  kaya-kamma- 
vaci-kammena  sam°  kusalena  (pabbajita)  "  a  bhikkhu 
of  good  character  in  deed  and  speech  "  D  1.63  ;  kAya 
.  .  .  (etc.)  -k''sam"'  bala  (and  opp.  pandita)  A  11.252 
(cp.  A  1.102.  104);  visamena  kaya  (etc.)  -k°  sam" 
A  1.154  =  111.129;  savajjena  kaya  (etc.)  -k"  sam°  A 
II. 135  —  kammag  vijja  ca  dhammo  ca  silag  jivitam 
uttamag,  etena  macca  sujjhanti,  na  gottena  dhanena 
va  S  1.34=55;  M  III. 262,  quoted  at  Vism  3.  where  k. 
is  grouped  with  vipassana.  jhana,  sila,  satipa{lhana  as 
main  ideals  of  virtue;  kammani  by  character,  as  opp. 
to  jacca  or  jatiya.  by  birth  :  Sn  136  ;  1O4  ;  599  ;  nihina'* 
manussa  (of  bad,  wretched  character)  Sn  661  ;  mana- 
pena  bahulag  kaya  (etc.)  -kammena  A  11.87=  111.33.  131  ; 
and  esp.  with  metta,  as  enum.  under  aparihaniya  and 
siriniya  dhammi  D  11.80  ;  A  111.288  ;  mettena  kaya- 
(etc.)-kammena  D  11. 144:  111.191  ;  A  v. 350  sq.  (c)  Par- 
ticular actions,  as  manifested  in  various  ways,  by  various 
channels  of  activity  (k°-dvara).  expressions  of  per- 
sonality, as  by  deed,  word  and  thought  (kayena. 
viciya,  manasa).  Kamma  xar'  t^oxjiv  means  action  by 
hand  (body)  in  formula  vacasa  manasi  kammana  ca 
Sn  330,  365  ;  later  specified  by  kaya-kamma,  for  which 
kaya-kammanta  in  some  sense  (q.  v.).  and  comple- 
menting vaci-k"  mano-k° ;  so  in  foil,  comb"* :  citte 
arakkhite  kaya-k"  pi  arakkhitag  hoti  (vaci"  mano°) 
A  1.261  sq.  ;  yag  nu  kho  ahag  idag  kayena  k°  kattu- 
kamo  idag  me  kaya-k°  attabyadhaya  pi  sagvatteyya 
..."  whatever  deed  I  am  going  to  do  with  my  hands 
(I  have  to  consider:)  is  this  deed,  done  by  my  hands, 
Ukely  to  bring  me  evil?"  M  1.415;  kaya-(vaci-  etc.) 
kamma,  which  to  perform  &  to  leave  (sevitabbag  and 
a°)  A  1.110  =  111.150;  as  anulomika°  A  1.106;  sabbag 
kaya-k"  (vaci°  mano°)  Buddhassa  naijanuparivattati 
"  all  manifestation  of  deed  (word  &  thought)  are  within 
the  knowledge  of  Buddha  "  Nd'  235  ;  yag  lobhapakatag 
kammag  karoti  kiyena  vS  vacaya  vi  manasa  va  tassa 
vipakag  anubhoti  .  .  .  Nett  37  ;  kin  nu  kayena  v°  m" 
dukkatag  katag  what  evil  have  you  done  by  body,  word 
or  thought?  Pv  11. 1'  and  freq.  ;  ekuna-tigsa  kiya- 
kammini  Bdhd  49.  (d)  Deeds  characterized  as  evil 
(pipa-kammani,  papani  k°,  pipakani  k"  ;  papakamma 
adj..  cp.  papa-kammanta  adj.).  papakamma:  n'atthi 
loke  raho  nama  p°  pakubhato  "  there  is  no  hiding 
(-place)  in  this  world  for  him  who  does  evil  "  A  1.149  ; 
so  p°-o  dummedho  janag  dukkatag  attano  ..."  he, 
afflicted  with  (the  result  of)  evil-doing  ..."  A  in. 354  : 
p°-g  pavad(}hento  ibid.  ;  yag  p'-g  katag  sabban  tag 
idha  vedaiiiyag  "  whatever  wrong  I  have  done  I  have 
to  suffer  for"  A  v. 301;  pabbajitvana  kayena  p°-g 
vivajjayi  "avoid  evil  acting  "  Sn  407;  nissagsayag 
p°.g  ..."  undoubtedly  there  is  some  evil  deed  (the 
cause  of  this)  i.  e.  some  evil  karma  Pv  iv.i6'.— papag 
kammag :  appamattikam  pi  p°  k°  katag  tag  enag 
nirayag  upaneti  "  even  a  small  sin  brings  man  to  N." 
A  1.249,  taya  v'etag  p'  k'  katag  tvai\  nova  etassa 
vipakag  patisagvedissasi  "  you  yourself  have  done  this 
sin  you  yourself  shall  feel  its  consequences  "  M  111.180  = 
.\  1. 139.  na  hi  p°  katag  k°  sajju  khlrag  va  muccati 
Dh  71  =  Nett  161  ;  yassa  p'  katag  k°  kusalena  pithiyati 


Kamma 


20 


Kamma 


so  imai)  lokag  pabh&seti  "  he  will  shine  in  this  world 
who  covers  an  evil  deed  with  a  good  one  "  M  11.104  = 
Dh  i73  =  Th  I,  872  ;  p°-ssa  k°-ssa  samatikkamo  "  the 
overcoming  of  evil  karma"  S  iv.320  ;  p°ssa  k°s3a  kiri- 
yiya   "  in   the  performance  of  evil  "   M   1.372  ;   p°ani 
k°<lai  karar)  b&lo  na  bujjhati  "  he,  like  a  fool,  awaketh 
not,   doing  sinful  deeds"   Dh   i36=Th    i.    146;   papa 
p°ehi  k°ehi  nirayar)  upapajjare  "  sinners  by  virtue  of 
evil  deeds  go  to  N."  Dh  307  ;  te  ca  p"esu  k°esu  abhip- 
ham  upadissare  Sn  140.     -pipakani  kammini:  p°Anai) 
k°ILnai)    hetu   corai)    rSj&no   gahetvj   vividhd   kamma- 
kSra^a  kSrenti  "  for  bis  evil  deeds  the  kings  seize  the 
thief  and  have  him  punished  "  A  1.48  ;  ye  loke  p°ani  k" 
karonti    te   vividhil    kamma-karaija    kariyanti    "  those 
who  do  evil  deeds  in  this  world,   are  punished   with 
various  punishments"  M  111.186=  A  1.142  ;  k°g  karoti 
p°r)   k&yena  vkci.  uda  cetasS  va  Sn  232    (  =  IUi   190); 
similarly  Sn   127;  karontA  p°g  k°i)  yar)  hoti  katukap- 
phalag,  "  doing  evil  which  is  of  bitter  fruit  "  Dh  66  = 
S  i.57=Nett   131  ;  k^ehi  p°ehi  Sn  215.  —  In  the  same 
sense :  na  tai)  k°i)  katat)  sSdhu  yag  katv^  anutappati 
"  not  well  done  is  that  deed   for  which    he   feels   re- 
morse "    S    1.57=  Dh    67=Nett    132;    aveni-kammani 
karonti  (with  ref.  to  sangha-bheda)  A  v.74  ;  adhammika- 
kamm&ni  A  1.74  ;  asuci-k°&ni  (as  suggested  by  5  and 
attributes:  asuci,  duggandha,  etc.)  A  111.269;  s&vajja- 
kammini   (as   deserving   Niraya)   (opp.   avajja  >  sagga) 
A  11.237;  kamm&ni  anantarikdni  deeds  which  have  an 
immediate  efiect ;  there  are  five,  enum"*  at  Vbh  378.  — 
(e)  deeds  characterized  as  good  or  meritorious  (kiisala, 
bhoddaka,  etc.)     tar)  k°g  katva  kusalar)  sukhudrayar) 
D    III.  1 57;    puiifia-kammo   of   meritorious   (character) 
S    1. 143;    kusalehi   k''ehi   vippayutta   carati   vififtaiDa- 
cariya  Ps  i.8o  ;  kusalassa  k^ssa  katattd  Vbh   173  sq. ; 
266  sq. ;  297  sq. ;  kusala-k°-paccayani  Bdhd  12  ;  puiiiia- 
kamma,   merit,   corap''   with    kappanikkha   in    its    re- 
warding power  VvA  32   (cp.  puflfidnubhava-nissandena 
"  in  consequence  of   their  being  afiected  with  merit  " 
PvA   58) — Cp.   also   cpds.:   kamma-kilesa,    k°-Uhana, 
k°-patha ;    k'lakkhaqa   k°-samadana. 

3.  (Interaction)  A.  in  subjecUve  relation  ;  (a)  character 
of  interaction  as  regards  action  ;  action  or  deed  as  having 
results  :  phala  and  vipaka  (fruit  and  maturing) ;  both  ex- 
pressions being  used  either  singly  or  jointly,  either  ° — or 
independ' :  phala:  tassa  mayhag  atite  katassa  kammassa 
phalag  "  the  fruit  of  a  deed  done  by  me  in  former  times  " 
ThA  270:  Vv  47»  (=VvA  202):  desanS  .  .  .  k-phalag 
paccakkhakariql  "  an  instruction  demonstrating  the 
fruit  of  action  "  PvA  i  ;  similarly  PvA  2  ;  cp.  also  ibid. 
26, 49,  52, 82  (v.  1.  for  kammabala).  vipaka :  yassa k°ssa 
vipSkena  .  .  .  niiaye  pacceyyasi  .  .  .  "  through  the  ripen- 
ing of  whatever  deed  will  you  be  matured  (i.  e.  tortured) 
in  N."  M  11.104;  tassa  k°ssa  vip&kena  saggag  lokag 
uppajji "  by  the  result  of  that  deed  he  went  to  Heaven  " 
S  1.92  ;  11.255 ;  k-vip4ka-kovida  "  well  aware  of  the 
fruit  of  action."  i.  e.  of  retribution  Sn  653 ;  kissa  k- 
vipakena  "  through  the  result  of  what  (action)  "  Pv 
i.6»;  inuna  asubhena  k-vipakena  Nett  160;  k- vipaka 
with  ref.  to  avyakata-dhamma :  Vbh  182  ;  with  ref.  to 
jhana  ibid.  268,  281  ;  with  ref.  to  dukkha  ibid.  106; 
k-vipaka-ja  produced  by  the  maturing  of  (some  evil) 
action,  as  one  kind  of  abadha,  illness:  A  v.iio  =  Nd* 
304' ;  same  as  result  of  good  action,  as  one  kind  of  iddhi 
(supernatural  power)  Ps  11.174;  -vipaka  (adj.).  asak- 
kaccakatanag  kammanag  vipako  the  reaper  of  careless 
deeds  A  iv.393 ;  der.  vepakka  (adj.)  in  dukkha-vepakka 

resulting  in  pain  Sn  537. phala -(-vipaka:  freq.  in 

form,  sukata  dukkhatanag  kammanag  phalag  vipako ; 
D  1.55=  111.264  =  M  1.401  =  3  lv.348=A  l.268  =  iv.226  = 
v.265,  286  sq. ;  cp.  J.P.T.S.  1883,  8;  nissanda-phala- 
bhuto  vipako  ThA  270  ;  ti^nag  k'anag  phalag,  tippag 
k-anag  vipako  D  11.186  —  (b)  the  effect  of  the  deed  on 
the  doer:  the  con.sequences  fall  upon  the  doer,  in  the 
majority  of  cases  expressed  as  punishment  or  afflic- 
tion:    yatha    yath4yag    puriso    kammag    karoti    tatha 


tatha    tag    patisagvedissati    "  in    whichever    way   this 
man  does  a  deed,  in  the  same  way  he  will  experience  it 
(in  its  efiect)  "  A  U49 ;  na  vijjati  so  jagati-ppadeso 
yatha  tbito  muflceyya  pSpa-kamma  "  there  is  no  place 
in  the  world  where  you  could  escape  the  consequences 
of  evil-doing"  Dh  i27  =  Miln  i50  =  PvA  104,  cp.  Divy 
532  ;  so  the  action  is  represented  as  vedaniya,  to  be 
felt ;   in   various  combinations :    in   this   world   or  the 
future  state,  as  good  or  bad,  as  much  or  little  A  iv.382  ; 
the  agent  is  represented  as  the  inheritor,  possessor,  of 
(the  results  of)  his  action  in  the  old  formula :  kammas- 
saka   satta   k-dayada  k-yoni   k-bandha  .  .  .  yag   k°i) 
karonti  kalyanag  va  papakag  va  tassa  dayada  bhavanti 
M  111.703=  A  111.72  sq.=  i86=v.88<~288  sq.   (see  also 
cpds.).     The    punishment    is    expressed    by    kanuna- 
karana  (or  °karaQa),  "  being  done  back  with  the  deed," 
or  the  reaction  of  the  deed,  in  phrase  kamma-karaQag 
kareti  or  k&rapeti  "  he  causes  the  reaction  of  the  deed 
to  take  place  "  and  pass,  kamma-karana  kariyati  he  is 
afflicted  with  the  reaction,  i.  e.  the  punishment  of  his 
doing.     The  5  main  punishments  in  Niraya  see  under 
karanag,  the  usual  punishments  (beating  with  whips, 
etc.)  are  enumerated  passim,  e.  g.  M  111.164,   181,  and 
Nd*  604.  [As  regards  form  and  meaning  Morris  J.P.T.S. 
1884,  76  and  1893,  15  proposes  karapa  f.  "  pain,  punish- 
ment," fr.  H  to  tear  or  injure,  "  the  pains  of  karma,  or 
torture "  ;  Prof.  Duroiselle  follows  him,  but  with  no 
special  reason  :  the  derivation  as  nt.  causative-abstr.  fr. 
karoti  presents  no  difficulty.]  —  ye  kira  bbo  p&pak&ni 
k°-ani  karonti  te  ditth'  eva  dhamme  evarupa  vividha 
k-kara^a  kariyanti,  kim  anga  pana  parattha  I     "  Those 
who,  as  you  know,  do  evil  are  punished  with  various 
tortures  even  in  this  world,  how  much  more  then  in  the 
world  to  comel"  M  Iii.i8i  ;  M  111.186=  A  1.142  ;  sim. 
k°-kAiaQani   kftrenti    (v.   1.   better   than   text-reading) 
S   rv.344 :   Sdhp   7 ;   Nd»  on   dukkha.     As  k-karapag 
sagvidahigsu     J     11.398 ;    kamma-karana-ppatta    one 
who    undergoes    punishment    Vism    500.      See    also 
examples  under   2d   and  M   1.87 ;   A   1.47 ;    J    v.429 ; 
Miln  197. 

B.  in  objective  relation  :  universal  karma,  law  of 
cause  and  consequence.  —  (a)  karma  as  cause  of  exist- 
ence (see  also  d,  purlpa"  and  pnbbe  katag  k") :  com- 
pared to  the  fruitful  soil  (khetta),  as  substratum  of  all 
existence  in  kama,  riipa,  ariJpa  dbatu  A  1.223  (kama- 
dhatu-vepakkafi  ce  kammag  ndbhavissa  api  nu  kho 
kamabhavo  paflaayetha  ti  ?  No  h'etag  .  .  .  iti  kho 
kammag  khettag  .  .  ■) ;  as  one  of  the  6  causes  or 
substrata  of  existence  A  ill. 4 10  ;  kammana  vattati  loko 
kammana  vattati  paja  "  by  means  of  karma  the  world 
goes  on,  mankind  goes  on  "  Sn  654 ;  kamma-paccaya 
through  karma  PvA  25  (=Kh  207);  k°g  kilesa  hetu 
sagsarassa  "  k.  and  passions  are  the  cause  of  sagsara 
(renewed  existence)  "  Nett  1 13  ;  see  on  k.  as  principle  : 
Ps  11.78 ;  79  (ch.  VII.,  kamma-katha)  M  1.372  sq. ;  Nett. 
161 ;  180-182  ;  k.  as  3  fold  :  Bdhd  117  ;  as4foldMiii.2i5; 
and  as  cause  in  general  Vism  600  (where  enum**  as  one 
of  the  4  paccaya's  or  stays  of  liipa,  viz.  k.,  citta,  utu, 
ahara);  Bdhd  63,  57,  116,  134  sq. ;  Vbh  366;  Miln 
40  sq.  as  a  factor  in  the  five-fold  order  (dhammata 
or  niy  ama)  of  the  cosmos  :  k°-niy  ama  DA.  onD  11,12; 
DhsA.  272  ;  Cp.  cpds.  :  kammaja  (resulting  from  karma) 
Bdhd  68,  72,  75;  °-vata,  birth-pains  i.  e.  the  winds 
resulting  from  karma  (caligsu)  DhA  1.165 ;  DhA  11.262 ; 
k°-nimitta  Bdhd  11,  57,  62;  k°-sambhava  Bdhd  66; 
k°-samuttbana  Vism  600  ;  Bdhd  67,  72  ;  see  further 
cpds.  below.  —  (b)  karma  as  result  or  consequence. 
There  are  3  kamma-nidanani,  factors  producing  karma 
and  its  efiect :  lobha,  dosa,  moha,  as  such  (iiifi  nida- 
nani  kammanag  samudayaya,  3  causes  of  the  arising 
of  karma)  described  A  1. 134=263=111. 338  =  Nd"  517; 
so  also  A  v.86  ;  262  ;  Vbh  208.  With  the  cessation  of 
these  3  the  factor  of  karma  ceases:  lobha- kkhayft 
kamma-nidana-sagkhayo  A  v.262.  There  are  3  other 
nidanani  as  atite  anagate  paccuppanne  chanda  A  1.264, 


Kamma 


21 


Kamma 


and  3  others  as  prodilcing  or  inciting  existence  (called 
here     kamma-bhava,      consequential     existence)     are 
pufi&a,   apuAiia,  Jnejia    (merit,    demerit   and  immova- 
bility)   Vbh    i37  =  Nd'    471.  —  (c)    karma    as    cause- 
consequence  :    its    manifestation    consists    in    essential 
likeness  between  deed  and  result,  cause  and  efiect :  like 
for  like  "  as  the  cause,  so  the  result."     Karma  in  this 
special  sense  is  Retribution  or  Retaliation ;  a  law,  the 
working  of  which  cannot  be  escaped  (cp.  Dh   127,  as 
quoted  above  3  A  (b).  and  Pv  11. 7I'  :  sace  tag  pipakai) 
kammai)  karissatha  karotha  va,  na  vo  dukkhl  pamutt' 
attbi)  —  na    hi    nassati    kassaci    kammai]    "  nobody's 
(trace,  result  of)  action  is  ever  lost  "  Sn  666 ;    pu&fi- 
ftpu&fia-kammassa    nissandena    kanaka    vimane    ekikA 
hntvi    nibbatti    "  through    the    consequence    of    both 
merit  and  demerit  "  PvA  47  ;  cp.  VvA  14;  yatth'  assa 
attabhavo  nibbattati  tattha  tai)  k°i)  vipaccati  "  wher- 
ever a  man  comes  to  be  bom,  there  ripens  his  action  " 
A     1. 1 34; — correspondence     between     "light"     and 
"  dark "   deeds   and   their  respective   consequence   are 
4  fold  :   kapha-kanlma  >  kapha  vipdka,  sukka°,  kapha- 
sukka,   aka^ha-asukka :   D   iii.230  =  M  1.389=  A   11.230 
sq.  ;  so  sakena  kammena  nirayai)  upapajjati  Nd*  304™  ; 
k°-inubha7a  -ukkhitta  "  thrown,  set  into  motion,  by 
the  power  of  k."  PvA  78  ;  sncarita-k-dnubhav&vanib- 
battani  vim<ln&ni  "  created  by  the  power  of  their  result 
of   good    conduct"    VvA    i";    k-dnubh^vena   by    the 
working  of  k.  PvA   77 ;  k°-Tega-ukkhitta  (same)  PvA 
284 ;  yatha  kamm-flpaga  "  undergoing  the  respective 
consequences  (of  former  deeds)  afiected  with  respective 
karma :  see   cpds.,   and  cp.  yatha  kammai)  gato  gone 
(into  a  new  existence)  according  to  his  karma  J  1.153 
ft  freq.  ;  see  cpds.  ;  k-sarikkhata  "  the  karma-likeness," 
the    correspondence    of   cause    and    consequence :    tar) 
k-s°g  vibhaventar)  suvappamayai)  ahosi  "  this,   mani- 
festing    the      karma-correspondence,      was      golden  " 
VvA  6 ;  so  also  k-sarikkhaka,  in  accordance  with  their 
deed,  retributionary,  of   kamma-phalai),   the   result  of 
action :   tassa  kamma-sarikkhakai)   kammaphalai)  hoti 
"  for  her  the  fruit  of  action  became  Uke  action,"  i.  e. 
the  consequence  was  according  to  her  deed.     PvA  206  ; 
284  ;  258  ;  as  nt.  :  k-s°i)  pan'assa  udapSdi  "  the  retribu- 
tion for  him  has  come  "  DhA  1.128 ;  J  111.203  ;  cp.  also 
Miln    40    sq. ;    65    sq.  ;    108.  —  (d)    The    working    and 
exhaustion  of  karma,   it<>   building   up  by  new  karma 
(nava°)  and  its  destruction  by  expiration  of  old  karma 
(puraqa).     The  final  annihilation  of  all  result  (°kkhaya) 
constitutes    Arahantship.     nava  >  pura^a-kamma :     as 
aparipakka,   not  ripe,  and  paropakka,   ripe  D  1.34=8 
III. 2 12  :  as  pafica-kammuno  satani,  etc.  ibid.  :  kayo  .   .  . 
puranai)  k°i)  abhisankhatai)  ("  our  body  is  an  accumu- 
lation of    former   karma")    S    11.65  =  Nd*   680   D;    see 
also  A  II. 197;   Pv  IV. 7' ;  PvA   i,   45;  Nett   179;   and 
with  simile  of  the  snake  stripping  its  slough  (poraqassa 
k°ssa    parikkhinatta  .   .   .  santo    yatha    kammai)    gac- 
cbab)  PvA  63.  —  k°-nirodha  or  °kkhaya :  so  .   .   .  na 
tava  kalai)   karoti  yava  na  tajg   papakammai)   vyanti 
hoti  "  He  does  not  die  so  long  as  the  evil  karma  is  un- 
exhausted "    A    1.14ISS  ;    nava-puranani    k°ani    desis- 
aimi    k°-iiirodhai)    k°-nirodha-gaminifl    ca    patipadai) 
"  the  new  and  the  old  karma  I  shall  demonstrate  to  you, 
the  destruction  of  k.  and  the  way  which  leads  to  the 
destruction  of  k."  S  iv.i32'~A  111.410;   .   .   .  navanai) 
k°anai)    akarana   setughatai]  ;   iti   k-kkhaya   dukkhak- 
khayo  .  .   .   (end  of  misery  through  the  end  of  karma) 
A  i.22o  =  M  11.214;  same  Ps  1.55-57;  cp.  also  A  1.263; 
Nd'  411   (expl.  as  kamma-parayaija  vipaka-p° :  "gone 
beyond  karma  and  its  results,"  i.  e.  having  attained 
Nibbana).     See  also  the   foil.   cpds.  :   k°-abhisankhisa, 
"avarana,  "kkhaya,  °nibandhana. 

-Adhikata  ruled  by  karma,  Miln  67,  68  ;  "ena  by  the 
in&aence  of  k.  ibid.  -4dhiggahita  gripped  by  karma 
Miln  188,  189;  -inurupa  (adj.)  (of  vipaka)  according 
to  one's  karma  J  111.160;  DA  1.37;  -Abhisankhara 
(3  B)  accumulation  of  k.  Nd'  116,  283,  506.     -tbhisanda 


in  °ena  in  consequence  of  k.  Miln  276,  cp.  J.P.T.S.  1886, 
146;  -Araha  see  I.;  -Ayatana  i.  work  Vbh  324,  cp. 
Miln  78  ;  2.  action  =  kamma  J  ni.542  ;  cp.  J  iv.451,  452. 
-Ayuhana  the  heaping  up  of  k.  Vism  530  ;  DhsA  267, 
268;  cp.  k°g  ayiihi  Miln  214  and  J.P.T.S.  1885,  58. 
-avarana  the  obstruction  caused  by  k.  A  111.436  = 
Pug  13  =  Vbh  341  (in  defin.  of  satta  abhabba  :  kamm- 
Avaranena  samannagata,  kiles°,  vipak°  .  .  ),  Kvu 
341  ;  Miln  154.  155;  Vism  177  ( =  anantanya-kamma) ; 
-upaga  in  yatha  kamm-Apage  satte :  the  beings  as 
undergoing  (the  consequences  of)  their  respective 
kamma  (3B)  in  form,  cavamane  upapajjamAne  hine 
pa^^ite  suvaiMie  dubbanne  sugate  duggate  .  .  .  paja- 
nati  (or  passati)  Vin  ni.5  =  D  1.82  =  8  11.122  (214)= 
v.266  =  A  iv.i78  =  v.i3  (35,  200,  34D)  =  Vbh  344  ;  abbre- 
viated in  M  111.178  ;  Nett.  178;  see  also  similar  8n  587  ; 
Bdhd  III  ;  -upacaya  accumulation  of  k.  Kvn  A.  156; 
-katha  exposition  of  k.  ;  chapter  in  Ps  11.98  ;  -kama  (adj.) 
desirous  of  good  karma  Th  2,  275  ;  PvA  174  ;  a"  opp.= 
inactive,  indolent  A  iv.92,  PvA  174:  -kiriya-dassana 
(adj.)  understanding  the  workings  of  k.  J  1.45  ;  -kilittha 
bad,  evil  k.  Dh  15  (  =  DhA  1.129,  expl.  kiU»ha-k°) ; 
-kilesa  (2)  depravity  of  action,  bad  works,  there  are  4 
enum"  at  D  111.181  =  J  in. 321,  as  the  non-performance 
of  sila  1-4  (see  sila),  equal  to  papa-kaya-k° ;  -kkhaya 
(3  B)  the  termination,  exhaustion  of  the  influence  of  k. ; 
its  destruction :  sabba-k°-kkhayai)  patto  vimutto 
upadhi-sankhaye  S  1.134  ;  ^^  brought  about  by  neutral, 
indifferent  kamma:  D  111.230  =  A  11.230  sq. ;  M  1.93, 
DhsA  89  ;  -ja  (3  B)  produced  by  k.  J  1.52  ;  as  one  mode 
of  the  origin  of  disease  Miln  1 35  ;  Nd'  304' ;  appl"*.  to 
all  existence  Miln  271  ;  Vism  624  (kammajai)  ayatana- 
dvara-vasena  pakatar)  hoti);  appl"*  to  rfipa  Vism  451, 
614  ;appl.  to  pains  of  childbirth  ("vatS)  J  1.52,  DhA  1. 165; 
a°  not  caused  by  k.,  of  akAsa  and  nibbana  Miln  268,  271 ; 
-tthana  (2)  i.  a  branch  of  industry  or  occupation,  pro- 
fession, said  of  difi.  occupations  as  farmer,  trader, 
householder  and  mendicant  M  11.197  ;  A.  v.83.  2.  occa- 
sion or  ground  for  (contemplating)  kamma  (see  (hSna 
II. 2.  c),  kamma-subject,  a  technical  term  referring  to 
the  instruments  of  meditation,  esp.  objects  used  by 
meditation  to  realize  impermauence.  These  exercises 
("  stations  of  exercise  "  Expos.  224)  are  highly  valued 
as  leading  to  Arahantship  DhA  1.8  (yava  arahattai) 
kamma-tthanag  kathesi),  96 ;  PvA  98  (catn-sacca- 
kamma-tthana-bbAvana  meditation  on  the  4  truths 
and  the  objects  of  meditation).  Freq.  in  phrase  kam- 
matthAne  anuyutto  (or  anuyoga- vasena)  na  cirass'eva 
arahattai)  papuvi :  J  in. 36  ;  SAsv  49 ;  see  also  J  1.7,  97, 
182,  303,  4Z4;  Sdhp  493.  These  subjects  of  meditatioa 
are  given  As  38  at  DhsA  168  (cp.  Cpd.  202),  a*  32 
(dvattigg'  akara-k°)  at  Vism  240  sq.,  as  40  at  Vism 
no  sq.  (in  detail);  as  paSca-aandbika  at  Vism  277: 
some  of  them  are  mentioned  at  J  i.i  16  ;  DhA  1.221,  336 ; 
IV.90  ;  -°i)  anuyuhjati  to  give  oneself  up  to  meditation 
SAsv  151  ;  PvA  61  ;  -°T)  uggaphdii  to  accept  from  his 
teacher  a  particular  instrument  of  meditation  Vism 
277  sq.  (also  °assa  uggaho  &  ugga«hana) ;  KhA  40; 
DhA  1.9,  262  ;  rv.io6 ;  PvA  42  ;  -%  hatheti  to  teach  a 
pupil  how  to  meditate  on  one  of  the  k°  DhA  1.8,  248, 
336  ;  PvA  61  ;  -°g  adasi  DhA  rv.io6  ;  'gaifkdti  J  111.246  ; 
Vism  89  ;  °Scihhhana  instruction  in  a  formula  of  exercise 
DhaA  246 ;  'ddyaka  the  giver  of  a  k-tth°  object,  the 
spiritual  adviser  and  teacher,  who  must  be  a  kalyA^a- 
mitta  (q.  v.),  one  who  has  entered  the  Path ;  Vism  89 ; 
Bdhd  89,  91,  cp.  Vism  241 ;  -tthanika  a  person  practising 
kammatthana  Vism  97,  187,  189  ;  DhA  1.335  ;  -tappana 
the   being    depressed   on    acct.  of   one's    (bad)    karma 

DhA  1.150. dayada  (3  A   (b)  and  cp.   °ssaka)  the 

inheritor  of  k.,  i.  e.  inheriting  the  consequences  of  one's 
own  deeds  M  1.390  ;  Miln  65  =  DhsA  66;  -dvara  "  the 
door  of  action,"  i.  e.  the  medium  by  which  action  is 
manifested  (by  kAya,  vaci,  mano)  (s.  2b)  J  iv.14; 
KvuA  135  ;  DhsA  82  ;  Bdhd  8  ;  -dbaraya  name  of  a  class 
of  noun-compounds  Kacc   166;  -nanatta  manifoldness 


Kamma 


22 


Kammantika 


of  k.  DhsA  64  (also  -nau^karacia  ib.) ;  -nibandhana 
(3  B)  bound  to  k.  ( ;  rathass'ani  va  yayato,  as  the  linch- 
pin to  the  cart)  Sn  654 ;  -nibbatta  (3  B)  produced 
through  k.  Miln  268 ;  DhsA  361  ;  -nimitta  the  sign, 
token  of  k.  DhsA  411  ;  -nirodha  the  destruction  of  k. 
[see  3  B  (d)]  ;  -paccaya  the  ground,  basis  of  karma 
Vism  538;  KvuA  10 1  ;  "paccayena  by  means  of  k. 
J  VI. 105,  Vism  538;  (adj.)  J  v. 271,  DhsA  304;  -pati- 
sarana  (a)  having  k.  as  a  place  of  refuge  or  as  a  protector 
J  VI.  102  ;  Miln  65;  cp.  DhsA  66;  -pafibalha  strong  by 
k.  Miln  301  ;  -patha  (2  b)  pi.  the  ways  of  acting  (  =  sila 
q.  v.),  divided  into  kusala  (meritorious,  good)  and 
akusala  (demeritorious,  evil)  and  classified  according  to 
the  3  manifestations  into  3  kaya°,  4  vaci".  3  mano", 
altogether  10  ;  so  at  Vin  v. 138,  S  11. 168,  A  v. 57,  268; 
as  kus°  and  akus°  at  D  111.71,  269,  290;  as  7  only  at 
S  II. 167  ;  as  akus"  only  at  A  v. 54,  266 ;  Vbh  391  ;  Nett 
43;  Bdhd  129,  131;  "ppatta  having  acquired  the  10 
items  of  (good)  action  Sdhp  56,  57.  -phala  [3  A  (a)]  the 
fruit  of  k.,  the  result  of  (formerly)  performed  actions 
J  1.350;  VvA  39,  PvA  I,  26,  52;  "-upajiuin  i.  living 
on  the  iruit  of  one's  labour  (ad  I)  J  iv.ibo  ;  —  2.  living 
according  to  the  result  of  former  deeds  A  11. 135; 
-bandhu  having  k.  as  one's  relative,  i.  e.  closely  tied  to 
one's  karma  (see  °ssaka)  Th  i,  496;  cp.  J  vi.ioo,  etc. 
-bala  the  power  of  k.  J  vi.108;  PvA  82.  -bhava 
[3  B  (b)]  karmic  existence,  existence  through  karma 
Vbh  137:  DhsA  37;  -bhumi  i.  the  place  of  work 
J  III. 41 1  ;  2.  the  ground  of  actions,  i.  e.  the  field  of 
meritorious  deeds  Miln  229  ;  -mula  (good)  k.  as  a  price 
(for  long  life,  etc.)  Miln  333,  334,  341  ;  -miilaka  pro- 
duced by  k.  Miln  134  ;  -yoni  having  k.  for  matrix,  i.  e. 
as  the  cause  of  rebirth  Miln  65  ;  DhsA  66.  -lakkhana 
having  k.  as  distinctive  characteristic  A  1.102; 
AA  370  ;  -vagga  name  of  section  in  NipSta  IV  of  An- 
guttara  (Nos.  232-238)  A  11.230  sq.  ;  -vavat^hana  the 
continuance  of  k.  DhsA  85  ;  -vada  (a)  holding  to  the 
view  of  (the  power  and  efficacy  of)  k.  S  11.33  sq.  ;  A 
1.287  ( +  kiriyavada,  viriyavada) ;  -vadin  believing  in 
k.  D  1. 115;  Vin  1. 71  ;  J  vi.60  ;  -vipaka  [3  A  (a)]  the 
ripening  of  k.,  the  result  of  one's  actions  (see  above) 
Vbh  106,  182,  268,  281  ;  as  one  of  the  four  mysteries 
(acinteyySni)  of  Buddhism  at  Miln  189.  — °ja  produced 
as  a  result  of  k. :  D  11.20;  Mhbv  78;  Ps  11.174,  213; 
Miln  135;  Vism  382  (appH  to  iddhi) ;  concernmg 
disease  as  not  produced  by  k..  see  A  v.  110;  Miln  134, 
1 35 ;  AA  433,  556.  -visuddhi  meritorious  karma 
Dh  16  (=Dh  1. 1 32) :  -visesa  variety  or  difference  of  k. 
DhsA  313;  -vega  the  impetus  of  k.  PvA  284;  -sacca 
(adj.)  having  its  reality  only  in  k.  ;  said  of  loka,  the 
world  A  11.232.  -samadana  (2)  the  acquisition  of  ways 
of  acting,  one's  character,  or  the  incurring  of  karma, 
either  as  micchaditthi"  (of  wrong  views)  or  samma- 
ditthi  (conforming  to  the  right  doctrine),  so  in  yathi- 
kamm-ilpaga  passage  (q.  v.);  D  111.96;  M  1.70;  111.178,  i 
179;  four  such  qualities  or  kinds  of  karma  enum.  at  j 
Nett  98  ;  of  Buddha's  knowledge  as  regards  the  quality 
of  a  man's  character  :  S  v. 304  ;  A  111.41  7  sq.  ;  Ps  11. 174  ; 
Vbh  338  ;  -samarambha  [3  B  (a)]  having  its  beginning 
in  k.  ;  said  of  loka,  the  world  of  men  ;  with  °uhiyin: 
lasting  as  long  as  the  origin  (cause)  of  k.  exists  A  11.232  ; 
-samufthana  [3  B  (a)]  rising  from  k.  Miln  127  ;  DhsA  82  ; 
Kvn  100  ;  -sambhava  produced  by  k.  Miln  127  ;  -sarik 
kbaka  [see  above  3  B  (c)]  similar  or  like  in  consequence 
to  the  deed  done  DhA  111.334  (°vip5ka).  -sarikkhata 
(do.)  the  likeness  between  deed  and  result ;  -sahaya 
"  companion  to  the  deed,"  said  of  thought  DhsA  333  ; 
-socana  sorrowing  for  one's  (bad)  deeds  DhA  1.128. 
-(s)saka  [3  A  (b),  q.  v.]  (a)  one  whose  karma  is  his  own 
property,  possessed  of  his  own  k.  M  in. 203,  etc.  (in 
phrase  k.,  kammadiyada,  kamma-bandhu,  etc.  ;  cp. 
Vism  301);  J  IV. 128;  Miln  65;  DA  i.37  =  who  goes 
according  to  his  own  karma  (attano  k°anurupar)  gatir) 
gacchanti,  n'eva  pita  puttassa  kammena  gacchati,  na 
putto  pitu   kammena  .  .  .  ) ;   der.   "td  the  fact  that 


every  being  has  his  very  own  karma  A  iii.i86;Dhs  1366  ; 
Vbh  324  ;  °ta  as  adj.  ;  qualifying  nana,  i.  c.  the  know- 
ledge of  the  individual,  specific  nature  of  karma  Dhs 
1366,  Vbh  328. 

Kammaka  (adj.)  [fr.  kamma]  connected  with,  depend' 
on  karma  Miln  137  (a^). 

KammaiUIya,  ''iya  &  kammaniia  (adj.)  "  workable,"  fit 

for  work,  dexterous,  ready,  wieldy.  Often  of  citta 
"  with  active  mind  "  in  formula  vigatupakkilesa 
mudubhuta  k"  thita  anejjappatta  D  1.76,  etc.  =  M  1.22  = 
Pug  68  ;  S  III. 232  :  v.92,  2i3  ;  A  1.9  ;  DhA  1.289  ;  Bdhd 
10 1,  expl''  at  Vism  377  ("iya).  Further  of  citta 
(muduti  ca  kammaniiafi  ca  pabhassarati  ca)  A  1.257 
(reads  °iyan)  =  Vism  247;  of  upekha  and  sati  Md'  661, 
cp.  Bdhd  104;  of  kaya  &  citta  Bdhd  121.  Said  of  a 
lute  =  workable,  ready  for  playing  A  111.375=  Vin  '182. 
Of  the  body  A  iv.335. — a"  not  ready,  sluggish  A 
IV. 333  ;  Vism  146. — kammaAita-bhava  the  state  of 
being  workable,  readiness,  of  kaya  Dhs  46,  of  vedana, 
etc., Dhs  326,  of  citta  DhsA  130, see  next;  a"  unworkable 
condition  Dhs.\  130. 

Kammannata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  prcc]  workableness,  adapta- 
bility, readiness,  appl.  to  the  wood  of  the  sandal  tree 
(in  simile)  A  1.9  ;  said  of  kaya  and  citta  in  connection 
with  kammannattai)  k^bhavo  k°muduta :  Dhs  46, 
47=  326  =  641  =  730  ;  cp.  Dhs  583  ;  similar  Bdhd  16,  20, 
71  ;  DhsA  136,  151  (  =  kammasaduta)  a°  unworkableness, 
inertness,  unwieldiness,  sluggishness  Miln  y>o  ;  Nett  86, 
108,  cp.  Dhs  1156,  1236;  DhsA  255;  expl"*  as  citta- 
gelafinai)  DhsA  377  ;  as  cetaso  linattag  Vbh  373. 

Kammanta  [Sk.  karminta;  kamma -Hanta,  cp.  anta  I4.] 
I.  doing,  acting,  working;  work,  business,  occupation, 
profession,  paticchanna"  of  secret  acting  Sn  127  = 
Vbh  357  ;  as  being  punished  in  Niraya  A  1.60  ;  S  iv.180  ; 
as  occupation  esp.  in  pi.  kamraanta  :  S  v. 45=  135; 
DhA  1.42  (kammanta  nappavattanti,  no  business  pro- 
ceeds, all  occupations  are  at  a  standstill) ;  anakula" 
Sn  262  =  Kh  v.5  ;  abbhantara  k"  unija  ti  va,  kappasa 
ti  va  as  housework,  falling  to  the  share  of  the  wife 
A  iii.37  =  iv.365  ;  khetta"  occupation  in  the  field 
A  III. 77  ;  see  also  D  1.71  ;  M  in. 7 ;  S  1.204 ;  Miln  9,  33  ; 
and  below;  as  place  of  occupation:  Sn  p.  13.  PvA  62. 
Phrases :  °r)  adhitfhati  to  look  after  the  business  A 
1.115  ;  PvA  141  ;  jahati  give  up  the  occupation  S  iv.324  ; 
PvA  133;  "o  payojeti  to  do  or  carry  on  business  D 
1. 71  ;  11.175;  111.66,  95;  A  111.57;  °r)  pavatteti  to  set  a 
business  on  foot  PvA  42  (and  vicareti :  PvA  93)  ;  °i) 
sagvidahati  to  provide  with  work  A  iv. 269  =  272. 
Mhvs  VI.  16.  —  2.  deed,  action  in  ethical  sense  = 
kamma,  character,  etc.,  Kh  136  (k°  =  kamma);  papa" 
doing  wrong  Pv  IV. 8';  IV. i6»,  J  vi.104  (opp.  pui^iia") ; 
as  specified  by  klya°  vacl  °mano°  A  v. 292  sq.  ;  VvA  130 
(in  parisuddha-kaya-kammantata) ;  dhammika  k°a 
M  11.191  ;  akirn)a-k°  (evam-)  of  such  character  S  1.204; 
kurura-k"  (adj.)  of  cruel  character  A  111.383=  Pug  56 
(in  def.  of  puggalo  orabbhiko) ;  samma"  of  right  doing, 
opp.  miccha°,  as  constituting  one  element  of  character 
as  pertaining  to  "  Magga  "  ( ;  q.  v.)  D  11.216;  S  11.168; 
v.i  ;  A  111.411  ;  Bdhd  133  ;  expl.  as  kayakamma  (  =  sila 
1-3)  at  S  v.9  =  Vbh  105  ;  Vbh  235  ;  as  kaya-duccaritehi 
arati  virati  .   .   .  Vbh  106. 

-Adhitthayika  superintendent  of  work  DhA  1.393 ; 
-t^hana:  1.  the  spot  where  the  ceremonies  of  the 
Ploughing  Festival  take  place  J  1.57;  2.  the  common 
ground  of  a  village,  a  village  bazaar  J  iv.306  ;  -dasa  a 
farm-servant  J  1.468 ;  -bheri  the  drum  announcing  the 
(taking  up  of)  business  DhA  in.  100  ;  -vipatti  "  failure  of 
action,"  evil-doing  A  1.270  opp.  -sampada  "  perfection  of 
action,  right-doing"  A  1.2 71  ;  -saovidhana  the  providing 
of  work  D  III.  191  (one  of  the  5  duties  of  the  gahapati). 

Kammantika  (adj.)  [fr.  kammanta]  1.  a  business  manager 
J  1.227. — 2.  a  labourer,  artisan,  assistant  J  1.377. 


Kammara 


23 


Karakara 


Kanimara  [Vedic  karmlra]  a  smith,  a  worker  in  metals 
generally  D  II. 126,  A  v.263  ;  a  silversmith  Sn  962  = 
Dh  239;  J  1.223;  a  goldsmith  J  in. 281  ;  v. 282.  The 
smiths  in  old  India  do  not  seem  to  be  divided  into 
black-,  gold-  and  silver-smiths,  but  seem  to  have  been 
able  to  work  equally  well  in  iron,  gold,  and  silver,  as 
can  be  seen  e.  g.  from  J  in. 282  and  VvA  250,  where  the 
smith  is  the  maker  of  a  needle.  They  were  constituted 
into  a  guild,  and  some  of  them  were  well-to-do  as 
appears  from  what  is  said  of  Cunda  at  D  11. 126;  owing 
to  their  usefulness  they  were  held  in  great  esteem  by 
the  people  and  king  alike  J  111.281. 

-uddhaua  a  smith's  furnace,  a  forge  J  vi.218:  -kula 
a  smithy  M  1.25  ;  ku^a  a  smith's  hammer  Vism  254  ; 
•gaggari  a  smith's  bellows  S  1.106 ;  J  vi.165  ;  Vism  287 
(in  comparison);  -putta  "  son  of  a  smith,"  i.  e.  a  smith 
by  birth  and  trade  D  11. 126;  A  v.263;  as  goldsmith 
J  VI. 237,  Sn  48  (Nd*  ad  loc.  :  k"  vuccati  suvaiinakSro) ; 
-bhan^u  (bhand,  cp.  Sk.  bhSn4ika  a  barber)  a  smith 
with  a  bald  head  Vin  1.76;  -sala  a  smithy  Vism  413  ; 
Mhvs  5,  31. 

Kammiia  [Vedic  kalm§$a,  which  may  be  referred,  with 
kalana,  kalu$a,  kalanka  and  Gr.  cfXau'of  to  *qel, 
fr.  which  also  Sk.  kala  black-blue,  Gr.  njXof,  rijXif  ; 
Lat.  caligo  &  callidus]  i .  variegated,  spotted,  blemished 
J  v. 69  ("vaijua),  said  of  the  spotted  appearance  of 
leprosy.  —  fig.  inconsistent,  varying  A  11.187.  —  2.  (nt.) 
inconsistency,  blemish,  blot  A  iv.55  ;  Vism  51.  —  a° 
not  spotted,  i.  e.  unblemished,  pure,  said  of  moral 
conduct  D  11.80  ;  A  11.52  ;  111.36,  572  ;  vi.54,  ^9^  '• 
Bdhd  89. 

-karin  in  a°  not  acting  inconsistently  A  11. 187;  cp. 
ibid.  243.  -pada  i.  (a)  having  speckled  feet  J  v.475  ; 
(b)  (m)  one  who  has  speckled  feet.  i.  e.  an  ogre ;  also 
N.  of  a  Yakkha  J  v. 503,  51 1  (cp.  J.P.T.S.  1909,  236  sq,). 

Kammika  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  kamma]  i.  (-")  one  who  does  or 
looks  after ;  one  whose  occupation  is  of  such  &  such  a 
character  :  aya°  revenue-overseer,  treasurer  DhA  1.184  '• 
sabba'  (always  with  ref.  to  amacca,  the  king's  minister) 
ono  who  does  everything,  the  king's  confidant  Vism 
130  ;  PvA  81.  —  On  term  5di°  beginner  (e.  g.  Vism  241) 
see  Cpd.  53,  129  n  2.  —  2.  a  merchant,  trader,  in 
jalapatha°  and  thalapatha°  by  sea  &  by  land  J  1.121. 
—  3.  a  superintendent,  overseer,  manager  J  11.303 
(executioner  of  an  order) ;  vi.294  i  Mhvs  30,  31.  —  4.  one 
connected  with  the  execution  of  an  ecclesiastical  Act 
Vin  11.5  (cp.  p.  22) ;  Bdhd  106. 

Kammin  (adj.)  ( — ")  [fr.  kamma,  cp.  kammaka]  doing,  per- 
forming, practising  J  vi.105;  Sdhp  ig6,  292. 

Kamya  (adj.)  (— °)  [fr.  kirn]  wishing  for,  desiring  DhsA  365 
(sadhu°  ;  v.  1.  °kama)  ;  kamyS,  abl.  in  the  desire  for,  see 
next. 

Kamyi  ( — °)  in  abl.  function  (of  kamyi  f.  for  kamyiya  or 
kamya  adj.?)  in  the  desire  for:  S  1.143=]  111. 361 
(expl")  by  kamatSya) ;  Sn  854,  929. 

Kamjrati  (— °)  &  kammati  (Nd)  [fr,  kSm]  wish,  desire, 
longing  for,  striving  after ;  with  inf.  or  equivalent : 
kathetu"  VvA  18;  mui\citu°  (  + patisankha)  Ps  1.60, 
65;  Bdhd  123;  asotu",  adatthu°  and  adassana°  Vbh 
372.  Esp.  in  definitions,  as  of  chartda  :  kattu°  Vbh 
208  ;  Bdhd  20  ;  of  jappa  :  puilcikata  sadhu°  Vbh  351  ; 
36i  =  Dhs  1059;  Nd'  s.  v.  tanha"  (:  has  the  better 
reading  mucchafici  katS  asSdhu" ;  v.  1.  pucchaflci" ; 
both  Vbh  and  Dhs  have  sSdu  in  text  which  should 
be  corrected  to  asSdhu"  ;  see  detail  under  puftcikata)  ; 
of  mana;  ketu°  Nd«  505;  Dhs  1116=1233;  Vbh  350 
sq.  ;  Bdhd  24  ;  of  lapani  :  pStu"  (v.  I.  cStu")  Vbh  246  = 
352.  —  As  abl.  (  =  kamyi)  in  dassana°  S  i.i93  =  Th  i, 
1241  ;  Sn  121  lexpl.  as  icchaya  SnA  179I.  Cp.  kam- 
maSilata  &  kamma-sadutA. 


.    Kaya  [fr.  kri]  purchase,  buying  A  iu.226  (-^vi°). 

'  -(a)kkaya,   buying  &   selling   Pv   1.5*   (see  also   Kh 

V11.6  and  note),  -vikkaya  (kraya  vikraya)  buying  & 
selling,  trade  in  "pativirata  D  1.5=  A  11.209  =  v. 205  = 
Pug  58  ;  D  1.64  ;  S  v. 473  ;  Sn  929  ;  J  v.243;  Khus  114; 
DhA  1.78;  PvA  29  (=KhA  212). 

Eayati  [krI,  perhaps  connected  with  kf]   to  buy ;   luf . 
ketuT)  J  111.282  ;  cp.  ki^ati. 


Kayika  [fr.  krI,  cp.  BSk.  krayika  Divy  505]  a  buyer,  trader, 
dealer  Miln  334. 

Kayin  a  buyer  J  vi.iio. 


I  Kara  [fr.  i{]  i.  (adj.)  ( — °)  producing,  causing,  forming, 
making,  doing,  e.  g.  anta°  putting  an  end  to  ;  pabhai) 
causing  splendour ;  papa°  doing  evil ;  divS"  &  divasa 
the  day-maker,  i.  e.  the  sun  ;  kaohabbava°  causing  a 
"  black "  existence  (of  papakamma)  J  IV.9 ;  pada- 
sandhi°  forming  a  hiatus  PvA  52  ;  vacana°,  etc.  — 
2.  (m)  "the  maker,"  i.  e.  the  hand  Mhvs  5,  255-256; 
30,  67.  -atikarag  (adv.)  doing  too  much,  going  too 
far  }  1. 431  ;  -dukkara  (a)  difficult  to  do,  not  easy,  hard, 
arduous  S  1.7;  iv.260  ;  A  1.286:  iv.31,  135;  v.202  ; 
+  durabhisambhavo  Su  429  701  ;  Ud.  61  ;  (n.  nt.)  some- 
thing difficult,  a  difficult  task  A  1.286  (cp.  rv.31); 
J  1.395;  Miln  121  ,  dukkara-karika  "doing  of  a  hard 
task,"  exertion,  austerity  M  1.93  ;  Nd*  262''.  -sukara 
easy  to  do  S  1.9 ;  11. 181  ;  Dh  163  ;  Ud  <>i  ;  na  sukarsii) 
w.  inf.  it  is  not  easy  to  ...  D  1.250  ;  A  111.52,   184  ; 

1V.334- 

-kanaka  (m.  nt.)  a  hand-wheel,  i.  e.  a  pulley  by  which 
to  draw  up  a  bucket  of  water  Vin  11.122  ;  cp.  Vin.  Texts 
iii.i  12  ;  -ja  "  bom  of  kamma"  in  karaja-kuya  the  body 
sprung  from  action,  an  expression  always  used  in  a 
contemptible  manner.  therefore=the  impure,  vile,  lov? 
body  A  V.300  ;  J  1.5;  Vism  287,  404;  DA  1.113.  217, 
221:  DhA  i.io  ;  111.420;  DhsA  403.  karaja-rUpa 
Vism  326.  -tala  the  palm  of  the  hand  Mhbv  6,  34  ; 
-mara  "  one  who  ought  to  die  from  the  hand  (of  the 
enemy)."  but  who,  when  captured,  was  spared  and 
employed  as  slave;  a  slave  J  111.147,  3^1;  iv.220  ; 
DhA  111.487  ;  -°dn  i  a.  woman  taken  in  a  raid,  but  sub- 
sequently taken  to  wife  ;  one  of  the  10  kinds  of  wives 
(see  itthi)  Vin  111.140  (  =  dhajahata)  ;  -gihan  gatihati  to 
make  prisoner  J  1.355  :  i"-36i  ;  -mita  "  to  be  measured 
with  (two)  hands,"  in  "majjha.  a  woman  of  slender 
waist  J  V.219 ;  vi.457. 

Karaka'  [Etymology  unknown.  The  Sanskrit  is  also 
karaka,  and  the  medieval  kojas  give  as  meaning,  besides 
drinking  vessel,  also  a  coco-nut  shell  used  as  such  (with 
which  may  be  compared  Lat.  carina,  nutshell,  keel  of  a 
boat ;  and  Gr.  tapva,  nut.)  It  is  scarcely  possible  that 
this  could  have  been  the  original  meaning.  The  coco- 
nut was  not  cultivated,  perhaps  not  even  known,  in 
Kosala  at  the  date  of  the  rise  of  Pali  and  Buddhism] 
I.  Water-pot,  drinking- vessel  (=  :  paniya-bhajana 
PvA  251).  It  is  one  of  the  seven  requisites  of  a 
samana  Vin  11.302.  It  is  called  dhammakaraka  there, 
and  at  11.  118,  177.  This  means  "regulation  water- 
pot"  as  it  was  provided  with  a  strainer  (parissavana) 
to  prevent  injury  to  living  things.  See  also  Miln  68  ; 
Pv  111.2**  ;  PvA  185.  — 2.  hail  (also  karaka)  J  iv.  167; 
Miln  38  ;  Mhvs  xii.  9. 

-vassa  a  shower  of  hail,  hail-storm  J  iv.167  ;  Miln  38, 
308  ;  DhA  1.360. 

Karakart  (for  katakata.  q.  v.)  (adv.)  by  way  of  gnashing 
or  grinding  the  teeth  (cp.  Sk.  dantan  katakatapya), 
i.  e.  severely  (of  biting)  J  ni.203  (passage  ought  to  be 
read  as  karakara  nikhaditva). 


Karafija 


24 


Karfsa 


Kanflja  [cp.  Sk.  karaaja,  accord,  to  Aofrecht,  HalAyudba 
p.  176  the  Dalbergia  arborea]  the  tree  Pongamia 
glabra,  used  medicinally  Vin  1.201  ;  J  vi.518.  519. 

Kan^a  [fr.  ky,  cp.  Vedic  kara^a]  i.  adj.  (f.  i)  ( — °)  doing, 
malting,  causing,  producing ;  as  cakkhu°  &&i}a,°  (leading 
to  clear  knowledge)  S  rv.33!  ;  v.97  ;  It  83  ;  and  acakkbu" 
etc.  S  v.97 ;  natha  °a  dhamma  A  v. 23  (cp.  v.89)  and 
thera"  A  11.22  ;  dubbaiwa"  S  v.217 ;  see  also  D  1.245 ; 
M.  1. 15;  S  V.96,  115;  A  rv.94 ;  Y.268  ;  Miln  289. — 
2.  (nt.)  ( — °)  the  making,  producing  of ;  the  doing,  per- 
tormance  of  (  =  kamma),  as  bali°  ofiering  of  food 
=:bali  kamma)  PvA  81;  gabbha°  Sn  927;  panujja° 
Sn  256.  3.  (abs.)  (a)  the  doing  up,  preparing  J  V.4C0, 
VI.270  (of  a  building:  the  construction)  (b)  the  doing, 
performance  of,  as  paQ&tipatassa  k°  and  ak°  ("  com- 
mission and  omission  ") ;  DhA  1.2 14;  means  of  action 
J  111.92.  (c)  ttg.  the  instrumental  case  (with  or  without 
°vacana)  PvA  33  ;  VvA  25,  53,  162,  174.  -°atthe  in  the 
sense  of,  with  the  meaning  of  the  instrumental  case 
J  111.98  ;  V.444 ;  PvA  35  ;  VvA  304  ;  DhsA  48  ;  Kacc  157. 

—  4.  ( — °)  state,  condition  ;  in  noun-abstract  function's 
°ttai)  (cp.  kamma  I.2)  as  nana"  (=nanattai))  difference 
M  11.128  ;  S  rv.294  ;  Bdhd  94  ;  kasi°  ploughing  PvA  66  ; 
kattabba°  (  =  kattabbattai))  "what  is  to  be  done," 
i.  e.  duty  PvA  30  ;  p8ja°  veneration  PvA  30.  sakkara" 
reverence,  devotion  SnA  284. 

Note  :  in  massu°  and  kamma^  some  grammarians  have 
tried  to  derive  k°  from  a  root  1st,  to  hurt,  cut,  torture 
(see  Morris  J.P.T.S.  1893,  15),  which  is  however  quite 
unnecessary  [see  kamma  3  A  (b),  kata"  i  (b)].  Karaoa 
here  stands  for  kamma,  as  clearly  indicated  by  semantic 
grounds  as  well  as  by  J  vi.270  where  it  e.xplains  kap- 
pita-kesa-massu,  and  J  111.114  =  v. 309  where  massu- 
kamma  takes  the  place  of  °karaQa,  so  also  DA  1.137. 
a°  Negative  in  all  meanings  of  the  positive,  i.  e.  the 
non-performing  J  1.131  ;  v.222  ;  Nett  81;  PvA  59; 
DdsA  127;  non-undertaking  (of  business)  J  1.229;  non- 
commission  M  1.93  ;  abstaining  from  Dhs  299.  Cpd. 
-uttariya  (nt.)  angry  rejoinder,  vehement  defence 
DhA  1.44. 

Karaplya  [grd.  of  karoti]  i.  adj.  (a)  that  ought  to  be,  must 
or  should  be  done,  to  be  done,  to  be  made  (=katabbai) 
karaoarahai)  KhA  236)  Vin  1.58;  D  1.3,  cp.  Miln  183; 
A  V.210  ;  DA  1.7.  Often  — °  in  the  sense  of  "  doing, 
making,"  as  yatha  kama°  S  11.226;  cp.  iv.91,  159; 
"having  business"  bahu°  D  n.76;  A  in.i!6;  S  11.215; 
anukampa°  PvA  61  :  —  (b)  done,  in  the  sense  of  un- 
doing, i.  e.  overcome,  undone  D  n.76  cp.  Dial.  11.81  n. 

—  2.  (m.)  one  who  has  still  something  left  to  perform 
(for  the  attainment  of  Arahantship,  a  sekha  J  111.23. 

—  3.  (nt.)  (a)  what  ought  to  be  done,  duty,  obligation ; 
affairs,  business  D  1.85  ;  11.68,  74  cp.  A  iv.16 ;  M  1.271  ; 
S  111.168;  IV. 281  cp.  Vin  111.12;  Vin  1.139;  A  T.58  ; 
Sn  143;  Sn  p.  32  (yan  te  karaniyai)  tag  karohi  "do 
what  you  have  to  do  ") ;  —  °g  tireti  to  conclude  a  business 
Vin  11.158  ,  J  v. 298.  Katai)  °g  done  is  what  was  to  be 
done,  I  have  done  my  task,  in  freq.  formula  "  khina 
jati  vusitag  brahmacariyag  .  .  ."  to  mark  the  attain- 
ment of  Arahantship  D  1.84;  11.68=153;  Th  2,  223; 
Vin  1.14  ;  Sn  p.  16  ;  DA  1.226,  etc.  See  Arahant  n.C.  — 
There  are  3  duties  each  of  a  samara,  farmer  and  house- 
holder enumerated  at  A  1.229  ;  3  of  a  bhikkhu  A  1.230  ; 

—  (b)  use,  need  (with  instr.) :  appamadena  k°  S  rv.125  ; 
cetanaya  k°  A  v.2,   312  ;  cp.  Miln  5,   78.     akaraniya 

1.  (adj.)  (a)  what  ought  not  to  be  done,  prohibited 
A  1.58;  ni.2o8  =  DA  1.235. —  (b)  incapable  of  being 
done  (c.  gen.)  It  18.  —  (c)  improper,  not  befitting 
(c.  gen.)  Vin  1.45  =  216  =  111.20;  PvA  64.  —  (d)  not  to 
be  "  done,"  i.  e.  not  to  be  overcome  or  defeated  D  11.76  ; 
A   IV. 113;  —  (e)   having   nothing  to  do  Vin   1.154.  — 1 

2.  (nt.)  a  forbidden  matter,  prohibition  Vin  11.278 

sa°  I.  having  business,  busy  Vin  1.155;  —  2.  one  who 
has  still  something  to  do  (in  sense  of  above  2)  D  11.143  ; 
Th  I,  1045;  DA  1.9- 


KMtQlycti  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  prec.]  the  fact  that  something 
has  to  be  performed,  an  obUgation  Vin  11.89,  93  ;  m" 
being  left  with  something  to  do  Miln  140. 

KarsQ^a  (m.  nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  karau^a,  °ka,  °ika.  The  Dhatu- 
maiijusa  expl'  k.  by  "  bhajanatthe  "]  i.  a  basket  or 
box  of  wicker-work  Mhvs  31,  98;  Davs  v.6o  ;  DhA 
111.18;  —  2.  the  cast  skin,  slough  of  a  serpent  D  1.77 
(=DA  1.222  ahi-kaiicuka)  cp.  Dial.  1.88. 

Karapjaka  [fr.  last]  a  box,  basket,  casket,  as  dussa" 
M  i.2i5  =  S  v.7i  =  A  1V.230  (in  simile);  S  111.131; 
v. 351  cp.  Pug  34;  J  196;  111.527;  V.473  (here  to  be 
changed  into  kora^^aka) ;  DA  1.222  (viliva°) ;  SnA  11. 

Karamanda  [etjnn.  i]  a  shrub  Vism  183  (-t-kanavira). 

Karati'  [cp.  Sk.  krntati]  to  cat,  injure,  hurt;  in  "  kara^^' 
karayato  chindato  chedapajrato  .  .  ."  D  1.53:9  H  1.516; 
S  111.208. 

Karaif  (°ti)  (f.)  a  superior  Idnd  of  bean,  the  Dobchos 
catjang  J  vi.536  (=rajainasa). 

Karabha  the  trunk  of  aa  elephant;  in  karabhoni  (k'-l-  Om) 
(a  woman)  with  beautiful  thighs  Mhbv  29. 

Karamatft  see  Kara. 

Kaia|a  (karala)  a  wisp  of  grass  (ti9a°)  DhA  111.38 ;  DhaA 
272. 

Karavl  [cp.  Sk.  kala-ka^tha  cuckoo,  &  kalavinka  sparrow] 
the  Indian  cuckoo  J  vi.539. 

Karavlka  same  J  v.304,  416;  Vv  36*;  Vism  112,  206; 
VvA  166,  219. 

-bha^iin  speaking  like  the  cuckoo,  i.  e.  with  a  clear 
and  melodious  voice,  one  of  the  mahapurisa-lakkhaoas 
D  11.20  =  111.144=  I73  =  M  11137,  etc. ;  cp.  Dial.  ii.i7n. 
and  BSk.  kalavmka-manojna-bha^in  Sp.  Av.S  i'37> 
(Index  p.  225,  where  references  to  Lahtavist.  are  given). 

Kaiavlya  (°iya)=prec.  J  vi.538. 

Karavlia  [cp.  Sk.  karavira]  i.  the  oleander,  Nerium 
odorum.  Its  flower  was  used  especially  in  garlands 
worn  by  delinquents  (see  kaatha)  —  2.  a  kind  of  grass 
J  IV.92.     -patta  a  kind  of  arrow  M  1.429. 

Kazahi  (Sk.  karhi,  when  ?  kar=loc.  of  pron.  st.  •qttO= 
Lat.  cur  why,  Goth,  hvar,  E.  where),  only  in  kar<iba-ci 
(karhi  cid)  at  some  tii.ie,  generally  preceded  by  kadaci 
D  1.17;  11.139;  M  1.177,  454;  A  1.179;  iv.ioi  ;  Miln 
73.  76. 

Xarin  (adj.)  [fr.  kara]  "  one  who  has  a  hand,"  an  elephant 
(cp.  hatthin)  Mhvs  24,  34;  J5,  68;  Davs  IV.2.  In 
cpds.  kari. 

-gajjita  the  cry  of  the  elephant,  an  elephant's  trumpet  ■ 
ing  Davs  V.56 ;  -vara  an  excellent  elephant  Mhbv  4,  143 ; 
Davs  1V.2. 

Kari-patibaodha  (adj.)  [=karisa-paribaddhal  bound  up  in 
filth,  full  of  filth,  disgusting  ;  Ep.  of  the  body  Th  1,  1 152. 
Kari  here  is  abbrev.  of  karisa'  (see  note  ad  loc.). 

Katlsa'  (nt.)  a  square  measure  of  land,  being  that  space 
on  which  a  karisa  of  seed  can  be  sown  (Tamil  karisa), 
see  Rhys  Davids,  Ancient  Coins  and  Measures  of  Ceylon, 
p.  i8 ;  J  1.94,  212  ;  rv.233,  276 ;  VvA  64. 

Karisa*  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  kari?a,  to  chpjatti  to  vomit,  cp. 
Lat.  -cerda  in  mQscerda,  sQcerda]  refuse,  filth,  excre- 
ment, dung  D  11.293  ;  J  15  :  VUm  259,  358  (in  detaU) ; 
PvA  87,  258  ;  KhA  59  ;  mutta°  urine  and  faeces  A  i.i  39 ; 
Sn835.  "  ,      .  . 

-magga  the  anus  J  iv.327 ;  -vaca  (nt.)  a  cesspool 
J  111. 263  (=guthakupa) ;  -vayin,  f.  "ini  diffusing  an 
odour  of  excrement  PvA  87. 


Karuna 


25 


Karoti 


Ktravi  (f.)  [cp.  Vedic  kanl^a  nt.  (holy)  action ;  Sk. 
kaiiiQcl,  fr.  kf.  As  adj.  karupa  see  under  3.]  pity, 
compassion.  KarupJ  is  one  of  the  4  qualities  of 
character  significant  of  a  human  being  who  has  attained 
enfranchisement  of  heart  (ceto-vimutti)  in  the  4  senti- 
ments, viz.  m:tta  k.°  up:kha  mudita  Freq.  found  in  this 
formula  with  °sahagatena  cetasS..  The  first  two 
qualities  are  complementary,  and  SnA  128  (on  Sn  73) 
explains  k°  as  "  ahita-dukkh-ipanaya-kSmaUt,"  the 
desire  of  removing  bane  and  sorrow  (from  one's  fellow- 
men),  whilst  metta  is  expl.  as  "  hita-sukh-fipanaya- 
kamati,"  the  desire  of  bringing  (to  one's  fellow-men)  that 
which  is  welfare  and  good.  Other  definitions  are  "  para- 
dukkhe  sati  s&dhSnai)  hadayakampanar)  karoti  ti  "  Bdhd 
21;  "  sattesu  k°  karuijiyana  karup&yitattai)  karupS 
cetovimutti "  as  expl.  of  avihiQsa  dhJtu  Vbh  87 ;  para- 
dukkhasahana-ras&  Vism  318.  K°' sahatgatena  cetas& 
denotes  the  exalted  state  of  compassion  for  all 
beings  (all  that  is  encompassed  in  the  sphere  of  one's 
good  influence :  see  cituddisa  "  extending  over  the  4, 
i.  e.  all,  directions) :  D  1.251  ;  iti.78,  50,  224 ;  S  iv.296, 
322,  351;  V.I  15;  A  1. 183,  196;  11.129,  184;  HI. 223; 
v. 300,  345;  J  11.129;  Nd=  on  Sn  73;  Vbh  273,  280; 
Dhs  1258.  The  def.  of  karuiji  at  Vism  318  runs  "  para- 
dukkhe  sati  s&dhunai)  hadaya-kampanai)  karoti." 
Frequently  referred  to  as  an  ideal  of  contemplation  (in 
conn.  w.  bhlvana  &  jhSna),  so  in  "  karupaQ  cetovi- 
muttir)  bhaveti  "  S  v.ii9;  A  1.38;  v.360  ;  in  k°  ceto- 
vimutti bhiviti  bahuli  kata,  etc.  D  in. 248  ;  A  in. 291  ; 
IV. 300 ;  in  k°-3ahagatai]  saddhindriyag  A  1.42  ;  un- 
specified S  V.I3I  ;  A  III. 185;  Nett  121,  124;  Ps  1.8; 
k°-(-mett5  Nett  25;  k°  +  mudita  Bdhd  16  sq.,  26  sq.. 
29 ;  ananta  k°  paiifia  as  Ep.  of  Buddha  Bdhd  i  ; 
karunaQ  durato  katvS,  without  mercy,  of  the  Yama- 
duti,  messengers  of  Death  Sdhp  287;  maha"  great 
compassion  Ps  1.126,  133  ;  -"samipatti  a  'gest,'  feat  of 
great  compassion  :  in  which  Buddha  is  represented  when 
rising  and  surveying  the  world  to  look  for  beings  to  be 
worthy  of  his  mercy  and  help  D  n.237 ;  Ps.  i,  126  f. 
DhA  1.26,  367;  PvA  61,  195;  —  3.  As  adj.  only  in 
cpds.  (e.  g.  "vica  merciful  speech ;  neg.  akaruria 
merciless  Mhbv  85,  &  ati°  very  merciful  J  iv.142)  and 
as  adv.  karunat]  pitifully,  piteously,  mournfully,  in  k" 
paridevati  J  vi.498.  513,  551  ;  Cp.  ix.54  ;  a'^o  '"  abl. 
karu|>a  J  VI. 466.  — See  also  karuniia. 

-idhimutta  intent  upon  compassion  D  11.241,  242  ; 
-Anuvattin  following  the  dictates  of  mercy  DSvs  111.4O ; 
-gunaja  originating  in  the  quality  of  compassion  Sdhp 
570  :  -jala  water  of  c,  shower  of  mercy  Miln  22  ;  Mhbv 
16  ;  -jhana  meditation  on  pity,  ecstasy  of  c.  D  11.237-30  ; 
-tthaniya  worthy  of  c.  PvA  72  ;  -para  one  who  is  highest 
in  compassion,  compassionate  Sdhp  112,  345  ;  -bala  the 
power  of  c.  Mhvs  15,  61,  130  ;  Sdhp  577  ;  -brahmavihara 
divine  state  of  pity  Visra  319.  -bhavana  consideration 
or  cultivation  of  pity  Vism  314  sq.  -rasa  the  sweet- 
ness of  c.  Mhbv  16;  -vihara  (a  heart)  in  the  state 
of  c.  Vism  324  (&  adj.  "viharin) ;  DA  1.33  ;  -sagara  an 
ocean  of  mercy  Mhbv  7  ;  -sitala  "  cool  with  c."  +  hadaya, 
whose  heart  is  tempered  with  mercy  Sdhp  33  ;  DA  1. 1 . 

Karao&rati  [v.  den.  fr.  karuria  ;  cp.  BSk.  karunayati  Divy 
105]  to  feel  pity  for,  to  have  compassion  on  Sn  1065 
("ayamina ;  expl.  by  Nd'  as  anuddayamano  anurakkh" 
anuggai}h°  anukamp")  ;  Vbh  273;  Vism  314.  Der. 
°ayana  compassionateness  Vbh  87=273  (and  ''iyitattat) 
ibid). 

Kunmbhaka  a  species  of  rice-plant  of  a  ruddy  colour 
Miln  252  (see  Mil.  trsl.  n.73). 

Kannnhi  (pi.)  a  class  of  Devas  D  11.260. 

KaieQU   [metathesis   for  karieru,   q.  v.,  cp.   Sk.   karcnu] 
f         elephant,  in  cpd.  -lotita  resounding  with  the  noise  made 
by  elephants,  of  a  forest  Th  2,  273. 


Kan^aki  (f.)  [fr.  karepu)  a  female  elephant  J  11.343 : 
DhA  1. 196  (V.  1.  for  ka^eru). 

Kami  in  Chllders  the  tree  Capparis  trifoliata,  but  see 
Brethren,  p.  363,  n.  2  :  musk-rose  tree  or  "  karer  "  ; 
Th  I,  1062  ;  Ud  31  ;  J  v.405;  vi.534. 

Karoti*  (i)  i-  a  basin,  cup,  bowl,  dish  J  1.243;  11.363; 
111.225;  IV.67 ;  V.289,  290.  —  2.  the  skull  (cp.  kalopi. 
On  the  form  cp.  Dial.  1.227  ».)  J  vi.592. 

Karoti'  (m.)  a  class  of  genii  that  formed  one  of  the  5 
guards  of  the  devas  against  the  asuras  J  1.204,  associated 
with  the  nagas  (cp.  Divy  218;  and  Morris,  J.P.T.S. 
1893,  22).  As  N.  of  Supappas  (a  kind  of  Garuijas) 
expl""  as  "  tesar)  karoU  nama  panabhojanat)  "  by  C. 
on  J  1.204.  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  compares  BSk.  karota- 
pa^ayah  a  class  of  Yak$as  MVastu  1.30. 

Karotika  [fr.  karofi')]  i.  a  bowl,  basin  J  iv.68  ;  DhA  11. 131 
(sappi°).  —  2.  the  skull  J  vi.592  ;  where  it  may  be  a 
helmet  in  the  form  of  a  skull. 

Karotiya=  karotika  2.  J  vi.593. 

Karoti  v.  irreg.  [Sk.  karoti,  *Q|}er  to  form,  to  build  (or 
plait,  weave  ?  see  kamma),  cp.  kar-man,  Lith.  kiirti  to 
build,  O.Tr.  cruth  form ;  Lat.  corpus,  with  p-  addition, 
as  Sk.  k]-pa,  k}p=krp.  Derived  are  kalpa>  kappa, 
kalpate>kappeti].  Of  the  endless  variety  of  forms 
given  by  grammarians  only  the  foil,  are  bona  fide  and 
borne  out  by  passages  from  our  texts  (when  bracketed, 
found  in  gram,  works  only):  I.  Act.  i.  Ind.  Pres. 
karomi,  etc.  Sn  78,  216,  512,  666=Dh  306=  It  42; 
Opt.  kare  Dh  42,  43,  pi.  (kareyyama)  kareyyatha 
Sn  p.  10 1  ;  or  (sing.)  karej-ya  (freq.),  kareyyisi  PvA  1 1  ; 
kareyya  Sn  920,  923;  kuriya  (  =  Sk.  kuryat)  J  vi.206 ; 
Ppr.  karan  Dh  136,  or  karonto  (f.  karonti)  Dh  16,  116. 
—  2.  Impf.  (akara,  etc.). —  3.  Aor.  (akai))  akarir), 
etc.,  3rd  sing,  akasi  Sn  343,  537,  2nd  pi.  akattha  Pv 
i.ii«;  PvA  45,  75;  3rd  pi.  akarir)su  ;  akarjsu  Sn  882; 
PvA  74  ;  without  augment  kari  DhA  11.59.  Prohibitive 
ma(a)kasi  Sn  339,  1068,  etc.  —  4.  Imper.  karohi 
Sn  p.  32  ;  1062  ;  karotba  Sn  223  ;  KhA  168.  —  5.  Fut. 
karissami,  etc.;  kassami  Pv  iv.i™;  kasai)  J  iv.286; 
VI. 36  ;  kahami  (in  sense  of  I  will  do,  I  am  determined  to 
do,  usually  w.  puflfiai)  &  kusalai)  poetical  only)  Pv 
II. 11'  ;  Vv  33"-  ;  2nd  sing,  kahasi  Sn  427,  428  ;  Dh  154  ; 
ist  pi.  kahama  Pv  iv.io".- — 6.  Inf.  katUQ  PvA  4,  61, 
69,  115,  Kh  VI.  10,  etc.  ;  kattur)  VvA  13  ;  katave  Mhvs 
35,  29  ;  Vv  44"  (  =  katur))  ;  katuye  Th  2.  418.  —  7.  Pp. 
kata,  see  sep.  —  8.  Ger.  katva  Sn  127,  661,  705,  etc.; 
katvana  (poet.)  Sn  89,  269,  Pv  i.i»;  karitva  see  iv. 
11.  Med.  I.  Ind.  pres.  (kubbe,  etc.)  3rd  sing,  kubbati 
Sn  168,  811;  3rd  pi.  kubbanti  Sn  794;  or  3rd  sing, 
kurute  Sn  94,  796,  819;  It.  67;  Opt.  (kubbe,  etc.)  2nd 
pi.  kubbetha  Sn  702,  719,  917:  It  87;  or  3rd  sing, 
kayira  Sn  728=1051  ;  S  1.24;  Dh  53,  117;  kayiratha 
(always  expl.  by  kareyya)  Dh  25,  117  ;  It  13  ;  Pv  i.i  i"  ; 
KhA  224  ;  kubbaye  Sn  943.  —  Ppr.  (kurumana,  kub- 
bano,  karano)  (a)kubbai)  Sn  844,  913;  (a)kubbanto 
It  86 ;  f .  (vi)kubbanti  Vv  1 1»  ;  (a)kubbamana  Sn  777, 
778,  897;  (vi)kubbaraana  Vv  33*.  —  2.  Impf.  (akarir), 
2nd  sing,  akarase,  etc.)  3rd  sing,  akubbatha  Pv  11.13"; 
ist  pi.  akaramhase  J  111.26,  "a  DhA  1.145.  —  3.  Aor. 
(none)  —  4.  Imper.  (2nd  sing,  kurussu,  3rd  sing,  kuru- 
tai),  2nd  pi.  kunivho)  3rd  sing,  kurutar)  (  =  Sk.  kurutar)) 
J  VI. 288.  —  5.  Fut.  (none).  III.  Pass.  i.  Ind.  pres. 
(kariyati,  etc.)  kayirati  Dh  292  =  Th  i,  635;  KhA  i68; 
and  kirati  Th  1,  14 3.  Ppr.  (kariyamina,  kayira'). — 
2.  Fut.  kariyissati  Vin  1. 107.  —  3.  Grd.  karaijiya 
(q.  v.),  (kayya)  katabba  DhA  1.338.  IV.  Caus.  1. 
(Denom.  to  kara)  karayati  =  kareti,  in  origin,  meaning 
of  build,  construct,  and  fig.  perform,  exercise,  rule, 
wield  (raj jar))  :  karehi  PvA  81  (of  huts),  karayissSmi 
Pv  11.6*  (of  doll);  karessag  J  v. 297  (do.),  akarayi  Pv 
11.13"';    akarayui)   Mhvs   IV.3 ;   akarcsi   Mhvs   23,    85; 


Kalakala 


26 


Kalapa 


karetui)  PvA  74  ;  karayamana  VvA  9  (of  chair) ;  karetva 
(namai))  PvA  162  ;  karitva  Sn  444  (vasii))  674 ;  680 
(vittig);  p.  97  (uttarasangar)).  V.  Caus.  II.  Kara- 
peti  S  1.179  ;  PvA  20  ;  Aor.  karapesi  he  had  (=  caused 
to  be)  erected,  constructed  Vin  li.i  j9  ;  fut.  karapessami 
Mhvs  20,  9  ;  ger.  karapetvS  PvA  123  ;  grd.  karapetabba 
Vin  II.  134. 

Meanings  of  karoti  :  i.  to  build,  erect  Mhvs  19,  36; 
20,  9  (Caus.).  —  2.  to  act,  perform,  make,  do  Vin  1.155  ; 
J  1.24;  II. 153  (tatha  karomi  yatha  na  .  .  .  I  prevent, 
cp.  Lat.  facio  ne  .  .  .) ;  111.297 ;  Pv  i. 8*=  11.6";  Mhvs 
3,  I  ;  7,  22  ;  —  3.  to  produce  DhA  1.172  ;  —  4.  to  write, 
compose  J  vi.410;  PvA  287;  —  5.  to  put  on,  dress 
Vin  11.277;  J  1.9;  —  6.  to  impose  (a  punishment) 
Mhvs  4,  14;  —  7.  to  turn  into  (with  loc.  or  two  ace.) 
J  11.32;  Mhvs  9,  27; — 8.  to  use  as  (with  two  ace.) 
J  I.I  13  ;  11.24  ;  —  9.  to  bring  into  (with  loc.)  J  v. 454  — 
10.  to  place  (with  loc.)  J  v. 274  ;  (with  ace.  of  the  person) 
Dh  162.  It  is  very  often  used  periphrastically,  where 
the  trsl"  would  simply  employ  the  noun  as  verb,  e.  g. 
kathar)  k°  D  11.98  ;  kodhag  k°  and  kopai)  k°  to  be 
angry  J  iv.22  ;  vi.257 ;  cayag  k°  to  hoard  up ;  corikarj 
k°  to  steal  Vin  1.75  ;  tanhag  k"  (c.  loc.)  to  desire  J  1.5  ; 
sitag  k"  to  cool  D  11. 129.  —  It  is  often  comp"*  with 
nouns  or  adjectives  with  a  change  of  final  vowel  to  i 
(i)  uttani"  to  make  clear  D  11. 105;  pakati°,  bahuli^, 
mutthi°,  etc.  (q.  v.).  Cp.  the  same  process  in  conn, 
with  bhavati.  —  The  meanings  of  karoti  are  varied 
according  to  the  word  with  which  it  is  connected ;  it 
would  be  impossible  and  unnecessary  to  give  an  ex- 
haustive list  of  all  its  various  shades.  Only  a  few 
illustrations  may  suffice :  agse  k"  to  place  on  one's 
shoulder  J  1.9;  antarayag  k°  to  prevent  J  1.232  ;  adig 
k°  (c.  ace.)  to  begin  with ;  nimittag  k"  to  give  a'  hint 
D  II.  103  ;  patarasag  k°  to  breakfast ;  manasag  k°  to 
make  up  one's  mind ;  mahag  k°  to  hold  a  festival  D 
11. 1 65  ;  massug  k°  to  trim  the  beard  DhA  1.253  ;  musi- 
vadag  k°  to  tell  a  lie  J  vi.401  ;  raj  jag  k°  to  reign  S  1.218  ; 
vase  k°  to  bring  into  one's  power  J  1.79  ;  sandhig  k°  to 
make  an  agreement  Mhvs  16;  sinehag  k°  to  become 
fond  of  J  1. 190.  —  Similarly,  cp"*  with  adverbs:  alag 
k°  to  make  much  of,  i.  e.  to  adorn,  embellish  ;  diirato 
k°  to  keep  at  a  distance,  i.  e.  keep  free  from  PvA  1 7 ; 
Sdhp  287  ;  purak  k°  (purakkharoti)  to  place  before,  i.  e. 
to  honour  Pv  111.7".  —  Note  phrase  kig  karissati  what 
difference  does  it  make  ?  (Cp.  Ger.  was  macht's)  D  1.120  ; 
or  what  about  ...  J  1.152. 

Kalakala  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  kala]  any  indistinct  and  confused 
noise  Mhbv  23  (of  the  tramping  of  an  army)  ;  in  -mu- 
khara  sounding  confusedly  (of  the  ocean)  ibid.  18.  Cp. 
karakara. 

Ealati  [kal,  kalayati]  to  utter  an  (indistinct)  sound : 
pp.  kalita  Th  i,  22. 

Kalanda  [cp.  Sk.  karanda  piece  of  wood  ?]  heap,  stack 
(like  a  heap  of  wood  }  cp.  kalingara)  Miln  292  (sisa"). 

Kalandaka  i.  a  squirrel  Miln  368;  — 2.  an  (ornamt  ital) 
cloth  or  mat,  spread  as  a  seat  J  vi.224 ;  -nivapa  N.  of 
a  locality  in  Ve|uvana,  near  Rajagaha,  where  oblations 
had  been  made  to  squirrels  D  11.116;  Vin  1.137;  11. 105, 
290,  etc. 

Kalabha  [cp.  Sk.  kalabha]  the  young  of  an  elephant :  see 
hatthi°  and  cp.  kalara 

Kalamba  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  kalamba  menispermum  calumba, 
kalamb!  convolvulus  repen.s]  N.  of  a  certain  herb  or 
plant  (Convolv.  repcns  ?) ;  miy  be  a  bulb  or  radish 
J  IV. 4b  (  =  talak,inda).  cp.  p.  371,  373  (where  C  expl-  by 
tala-kanda;  gloss  BB  however  sivci  lata-tanta)  ;  vi.57,S. 
See  also  kadamba  <S:  kaUmba. 

•rukkha  the  Cadamba  tree  J  vi.290. 

Kalambaka- kalamba,  the  C.  tree  J  vi.535. 


Kalamboka  (f.)  =  kalambaka  D  111.87  (vv.  U,  kaladuka, 
kalabaka)  the  trsl"  (Dial.  111.84)  has  "  bamboo." 

Ealala  (m.  nt.)  i.  mud  J  1.12,  73;  Miln  125,  324,  346; 
Mhbv  150  ;  PvA  215  (  =  kaddama) ;  DhA  111.61  ;  rv.25. 
—  su°  "  well-muddied  "  i.  e.  having  soft  soil  (of  a  field) 
Miln  255.  —  2.  the  residue  of  sesamum  oil  (tela"),  used 
for  embalming  J  11. 155.  —  3.  in  Embryology:  the 
"soil,"  the  placenta  S  1.206=  Kvu  11.494;  Miln  125. 
Also  the  first  stage  in  the  formation  of  the  foetus  (of 
which  the  first  4  during  the  first  month  are  k.,  abbuda. 
pesi,  ghana,  after  which  the  stages  are  counted  by 
months  1-5  &  10  ;  see  Vism  23O ;  Nd"  120  ;  &  cp.  Miln 
40).  —  4.  the  foetus,  appl.  to  an  egg,  i.  e.  the  yolk 
Miln  49.  —  In  cpds  with  kar  &  bhu  the  form  is  kalali". 
-gata  (a)  fallen  into  the  mud  Miln  325  ;  -gahana  "  mud 
thicket,"  dense  mud  at  the  bottom  of  rivers  or  lakes 
J  1.329  ;  -kata  made  muddy,  disturbed  Vv  84"  (VvA 
343);  -bhuta  =  prec.,  A  1.9,  cp.  J  11. 100;  A  111.233; 
Miln  35  ;  -makkhita  soiled  with  mud  DhA  111.61. 

Kalasa  (nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  kalasa]  i.  a  pot,  waterpot,  dish, 
jar  M  III. 141  ;  J  iv.384  ;  Davs  iv.49  ;  PvA  162.  —  2.  the 
female  breasts  (likened  to  a  jar)  Mhbv  2,  22. 

Kalaha  [cp.  Sk.  kalaha.  fr.  kal]  quarrel,  dispute,  fight 
A  1.170;  IV. 196,  401  ;  Sn  862,  863  (-l-vivada);  J  1.483; 
Nd'  427;  DhA  III. 256  (udaka°  about  the  water); 
IV. 2 19;  Sdhp  135.  °g  udireti  to  quarrel  J  v.395 ; 
karoti  id.  J  1.191,  404;  PvA  13;  vaddheti  to  increase 
the  tumult,  noise  J  v.412  ;  DhA  111.255.  —  ^°  harmony, 
accord,  agreement  S  1.224 ;  maha°  a  serious  quarrel,  a 
row  J  IV.88. 

-ftbhirata  delighting  in  quarrels,  quarrelsome  Sn  276  , 
Th  I,  958.  -gkara  picking  up  a  quarrel  J  vi.45 ; 
-karana  quarrelling,  fighting  J  v.4r3;  -karaka  (f.-i) 
quarrelsome,  pugnacious  A  iv.196;  Vin  1.328;  11. i  ; 
-karana  the  cause  or  reason  of  a  dispute  J  in. 151  ; 
VI. 336 ;  -jata  "  to  whom  a  quarrel  has  arisen,"  quarrel- 
ling, disputing  A  1.70;  Vin  1.341  ;  11.86,  261  ;  Ud  67; 
J  III. 1 49;  -pavaddhani  growth  or  increase  of  quarrels, 
prolongation  of  strife  (under  6  evils  arising  from  in- 
temperance) D  m.i82  =  DhsA  380;  -vaddhana  (nt.) 
inciting  &  incitement  to  quarrel  J  v.393,  394  ;  -sadda 
brawl,  dispute  J  vi.336. 

Kala  [Vedic  kala  *s4Uel,  to  Lat  scalpo,  Gr.  axaWu,  Ohg 
scoUa,  scilling.  scala.  The  Dhtp.  (no  613)  expl^  kala 
by  "  sankhyanc."]  1.  a  small  fraction  of  a  whole, 
generally  the  i6th  part;  the  i6th  part  of  the  moon's 
disk  ;  often  the  i6th  part  again  subdivided  into  16  parts 
and  so  on  :  one  infinitesimal  part  (see  VvA  103  ;  DhA 
11.63),  in  this  sense  in  the  expression  kalag  nagghati 
solasig  "  not  worth  an  infinitesimal  portion  of  "=  very 
much  inferior  to  S  1.19;  111.150  =  v. 44=  It  2«  ;  A  1.11)6, 
213  ;  IV. 252  ;  Ud  1 1  ;  Dh  70  ;  Vv  43' ;  DhA  11.63  (  =  !">*- 
thasa)  DhA  iv.74.  —  2.  an  art.  a  trick  (lit.  part,  turn) 
J  1. 1 63. — kalag  upeti  to  be  divided  or  separated  Miln 
106;  DhA  I.I  19:  see  sakala.  —  In  cpd.  with  bhu  as 
kali  -bhavati  to  be  divided,  broken  up  J  1.467  (=bhij- 
jati).     Cp.  vikala. 

Kalapa  [cp.  Sk.  kalapa]  i.  anything  that  comprises  a 
number  of  things  of  the  same  kind  :  a  bundle,  bunch  ; 
sheaf ;  a  row,  multitude ;  usually  of  grass,  bamboo-  or 
sugar-canes,  sometimes  of  hair  and  feathers  S  iv.2i^ 
(tina°) ;  J  1.15S  (do.) ;  25  (nala°),  51  (mala°),  lOO  (uppala- 
kumuda°)  ;  v. 39  (usira") ;  Miln  33  ;  V\\  257,  260  (ucrhii"), 
272  (veju") ;  46  (kesa),  142  (mora-pifija")  —  2.  a  quiver 
Vin  II. 192  ;  It  68  ;  J  vi.236  ;  Miln  418  ;  PvA  154.  169. 
—  3.  in  philosophy  :  a  group  of  qualities,  pertaining  to 
the  material  body  (cp.  ri'ipa")  Vism  3(>4  (dasadhamnia") 
A26  (phassa-pancamaka  dhamma) ;  lidhd  77  (rupa"). 
78.  120. 

-agga    (nt.)   "  the   first   (of    the)    bunch,"    the    first 
(sheaves)  of  a  crop,   given   away  as   alms  Dh.\   1.98 


Kalapaka 


27 


Kalyana 


-sammasana  grasping  (characteristics)  by  groups  Vism 

287,  606,  626  sq. 

Kalipaka  i.  a  band,  string  (of  pearls)  Vin  11313:  Mhvs 
30,  67.  —  2.  a  bundle,  group  J  1.239. 

Kalapin  (adj.)  [fr.  kalapa]  having  a  quiver  J  vi.49  (ace. 
pi.  "ine).  f.  kalapini  a  bundle,  sheai  (yava°)  S  iv.20i  ; 
11.114  (nala°). 

Kalabaka(nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  kalipaka]  a  girdle,  made  of  several 
strings  or  bands  plaited  together  Vin  11. 136,   144,  319; 

Kalaya  a  kind  of  pea,  the  chick-pea  M  1.243  (kaUya)  ; 
S  1. 150  ;  A  V.170  ;  Sn  p.  124  ;  J  11.75  (=  varaka.  the  bean 
Phaseolus  trilobus,  and  kalaraja-masa) ;  J  111.371.1; 
DhA  1,319.  Its  size  may  be  gathered  from  its  relation 
to  other  fruits  in  ascending  scale  at  A  v.  170=  j  1.130  = 
Sn  p.  124  (where  the  size  of  an  ever-increasing  boil  is  I 
described).  It  is  larger  than  a  kidney  bean  (raugga) 
and  smaller  than  the  kernel  of  the  jujube  (kolatthi). 

-matta  of  the  size  of  a  chick  pea  S  1.150  ;  A  v. 170  ; 
Sn  p.  124  (1) ;  J  111.370  :  DhA  1.319. 

Kal&}rati  [Denom.  fr.  kali]  to  have  a  measure,  to  outstrip 
J  1.163  (taken  here  as  "  trick,  deceive  "). 

Kftttn  in  hatthi"  at  Ud  41,  expl"*  in  C  by  potaka,  but  cp 
the  same  passage  at  DhA  1.58  which  reads  kalabha, 
undoubtedly  better.     Cp.  kalarika. 

Kali  (m.)  [cp.  Sk.  kali]  i .  the  unlucky  die  (see  akkha) ; 
"  the  dice  were  seeds  of  a  tree  called  the  vibhitaka  .  .  . 
An  extra  seed  was  called  the  kali  "  {Dial.  11.368  n.) 
D  11.349  ;  J  1.380  ;  Dh  1.252  (  =  DhA  111. 375) ;  at  J  vi.228, 
282,  357  it  is  opposed  to  kata,  q.  v.  —  2.  (  =  kaUggaha) 
an  unlucky  throw  at  dice,  bad  luck,  symbolically  as  a 
piece  of  bad  luck  in  a  general  worldly  sense  or  bad  quality, 
demerit,  sin  (in  moral  sense)  kalir)  vicinati  "  gathers  up 
demerit  "  Sn  658  ;  appamatto  kali  .  .  .  akkhesu  dhana- 
parajayo  .  .  .  mahaotataro  kaU  yo  sugatesu  manam 
padosaye  S  1.I49=A  Ii.3  =  v.i7i,  i74=Sn  659  =  Nett 
132;  cp.  M  III. 170;  A  V.324  ;  Dh  202  (  =  DhA  111.261 
aparSdha).  —  3.  the  last  of  the  4  ages  of  the  world  (see 
°yuga).  —  4.  sinful,  a  sinner  Sn  664  (  =  papaka). — 
5.  saliva,   spittle,   froth   (cp.  khe|a)  Th  2.   458,   501  ; 

J  V.I34- 

-(g)gaha  the  unlucky  throw  at  dice,  the  losing  throw  ; 
symbolically  bad  luck,  evil  consequence  in  worldly  & 
moral  sense  (ubhayattha  k°  faring  badly  in  both  worlds) 
M  1.403  =  406;  III. 170  (in  simile).  See  kataggaha ; 
-devata  (m.  pi.)  the  devotees  of  kali,  the  followers  of 
the  goddess  kaU  Miln  191  (see  Miln  Irsl.  1.266  n.) ; 
-(pjpiya  one  who  is  fond  of  cheating  at  dice,  a  gambler 
Pgdp  68  ;  -yuga  (nt.)  one  of  the  4  (or  8)  ages  of  the 
world,  the  age  of  vice,  misery  and  bad  luck ;  it  is  the 
age  in  which  we  are  Sasv  4,  44  ,  Vinl  281  ;  -sasana  (nt.) 
in  "g  aropeti  to  find  fault  with  others  Vin  vi.93,  360. 

Kaliugara  (m.  nt.)  (BB  I)  [cp.  Sk.  ka4ankara  &  kai^angara, 
on  which  in  sense  of  "  log  "  see  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  kalin- 
gara]  t.  a  log,  a  piece  of  wood  M  1.449,  451  ;  S  11.268  ; 
DhA  111.315  ;  often  in  sense  of  something  useless,  or  a 
trifle  (comb"*  with  kattha  q.  v.)  Dh  41  ;  DhA  1.32 1 
(=katthakhan4a,  a  chip)  Th  2,  468  (id.)  as  kattha- 
kalingarani  DhA  11.142.  —  2.  a  plank,  viz.  a  step  in  a 
staircase,  in  sopSna"  Vin  11.128,  cp.  sopana-kalevara. 

-Opadhana  a  wooden  block  used  for  putting  one's 
head  on  when  sleeping  S  11.267 ;  Miln  366 ;  -kanda  a 
wooden  arrow  J  111.273  (acittat)  k° :  without  feeling) 

KalinKU  (m.  nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  kalinga  &  kalingaka]  the  Laurus 
camphora,  the  Indian  laurel  J  vi.537. 

Kalita  [pp.  of  kalati]  sounding  indistinctly  Th  2.  22. 

Kalua  [cp.  Sk.  kalu^a]  muddy,  dirty,  impure;  in  °bhava 
the  state  of  being  turbid,  impure,  obscured  (of  the 
mind)  DA  1.275. 


Kalevara  see  kalebara. 

Kalya  see  kalla ;  -rupa  pleased,  glad  Sn  680,  683  ;  a°  not 
pleased  Sn  691. 

Kalyati  (f.)  i.  the  state  of  being  sound,  able,  pliant 
J  11.12.  —  2.  pleasantness,  agreeableness,  readiness,  in 
a"  opp.  (appl"*  to  citta)  Dhs  1136;  DhsA  377  (  =  gila- 
nabhJlva). 

Kalyft^a  (&  kallana)  [Vedic  kalyana]  i.  (adj.)  beautiful, 
charming ;  auspicious,  helpful,  morally  good.  Syn. 
bhaddaka  PvA  9,  116)  and  kusala  (S  11.118;  PvA' 9, 
122);  opp.  papa  (S  1.83;  M  1.43;  PvA  lot,  116  and 
under  "mitta).  kata°=katupakara  PvA  n6  Appl"" 
to  dhamma  in  phrase  5di°  majjhe"  pariyosSne"  D  1.62 
and  Si ;  S  V.152  ;  Sn  p.  103  ;  VvA  87;  Vism  213  sq.  (in 
var.  applications)  ;  etc.  —  As  m  one  who  observes  the 
silapadai)  (opp.  papa,  who  violates  it)  A  11.222,  cp. 
k''-mitta  =  siUdihi  adhik^  SnA  341.  —  S  1V.303  ;  v. 2, 
29,  78  ;  A  111.77  ;  IV. 361  ;  Vin  11.8,  95  ;  J  1.4  ;  Miln  797  ; 
-kata°  (opp.  kata-p&pa)  of  good,  virtuous  character,  in 
phrase  k"  katakusala,  etc.  It  25,  etc.  {s^.e  kata  11. i  a). 
k°  of  kitU  (-sadda)  D  1.49  (  =  DA  1.146  setfha) ;  S  iv.374  ; 
V.352  ;  of  jhina  (tividba")  Bdhd  96,  98,  99  ;  of  mitta. 
friends  in  general  (see  also  cpd.)  Dh  78  (na  bhaje  papake 
mitte  .  .  .  bhajetha  m°  kalyirie),  116,  375  (  =  suddha- 
jivin)  ;  Sn  338. — 2.  (nt.)  (a)  a  good  or  useful  thing, 
good  things  Vin  1.117;  A  111.109;  cp.  bhadrar). — 
(b)  goodness,  virtue,  merit,  meritorious  action  J  v. 49 
(kalyana  here  nt.  nom.  in  sense  of  pi.  ;  cp.  Vedic  nt.), 
492  ;  —  °Tj  karoti  to  perform  good  deeds  S  1.72  ;  A 
1. 1 38  sq.  ;  Vin  1.73:  PvA  122.  —  (c)  kindness,  good 
service  J  1.378;  Iii.i2(  =  upakara),  68  (°r)  karoti). — 
(d)  beauty,  attraction,  perfection ;  enum''  as  5  kalyani, 
viz.  kesa",  magsa",  atthi".  chavi",  vaya°  i.  e.  beaut; 
of  hair,  flesh,  teeth,  skin,  youth  J  1.394  ;  DhA  1.387. 
-ajjhasaya   the  wish  or  intention   to  do   good  DhA 

1.9 ; Mhimuttika  disposed  towards  virtue,  bent  on 

goodness  S  11.134,  '5*'';  It  /"■  7^  ;  Vbh  341;  -kama 
desiring  what  is  good  A  111.109;  -karin  (a)  doing  good, 
virtuous  (opp.  papa")  S  1.227,  cp.  J  11.202  =  111.158; 
DhsA  390  ;  (m.)  who  has  rendered  a  service  J  vi.182  ; 
-carita  walking  in  goodness,  practising  virtue  Vbh  341  ; 
-jatika  one  whose  nature  is  pleasantness,  agieeable 
J  111.82  ;  -dassana  looking  nice,  lovely,  handsome  Sn 
55i=Th  I,  821  (-f  karicanasannibhattaca)  ;  -dhamma 
(i)  of  virtuous  character,  of  good  conduct,  virtuous 
Vin  1.73  ;  111.133  ;  S  v.352  ;  Pug  26  ;  It  96  :  Pv  iv.i»  ; 
Miln  129;  DhA  1.380;  J  11.65  (=sundara°),  PvA  230 
(  =  sundara-sila) ;  sHavS-i-k"  (of  bhikkhu.  etc.)  .M  1.334  ; 
S  IV.303  ;  PvA  13.  —  k°ena  k"atara  perfectly  good  or 
virtuous  A  11.224.  —  (2)  *^^  Good  Doctrine  DhA  1.7. 
-"ta  the  state  of  having  a  virtuous  character  A  11.36; 
-paflAa  "  wise  in  goodness  "  possessed  of  true  wisdom 
Th  1,  306;  It  97;  -patipada  the  path  of  goodness  or 
virtue,  consisting  of  dSna,  uposathakamma  &  dasa- 
kusalakammapatha  J  111.342  ;  -pafibhana  of  happy 
retort,  of  good  reply  A  111.58,  cp.  Miln  3  ;  -papaka  good 
and  bad  J  v. 238  ;  vi.223  ;  Kvu  45  ;  (nt.)  goodness  and 
evil  J  V.493  ;  -piti  one  who  delights  in  what  is  good 
Sn  969  ;  -bhattika  having  good,  nice  food  Vin  11.77  : 
III. 160  (of  a  householder) ;  -mitta  i.  a  good  companion, 
a  virtuous  friend,  an  honest,  pure  friend  ;  at  Pug  24  he 
is  said  to  "  have  faith,  be  virtuous,  learned,  liberal  and 
wise";  M  1.43  (opp.  pSpa') ;  S  1.83,  87  (do.);  A  iv.y. 
357  ;  Pug  37,  41  ;  J  111.197  ;  Bdhd  90  ;  a°  not  a  virtuous 
friend  Dhs.\  247.  —  2.  as  t.t.  a  spiritual  guide,  spiritual 
adviser.  The  Buddha  is  the  .spiritual  friend  par  ex- 
cellence, but  any  other  .\rahant  can  act  as  such  S  v. 3  : 
Vism  89,  98,  121  ;  cp.  kamraaUhana-ddyaka.  -mittata 
friendship  with  the  good  and  virtuous,  association  with 
the  virtuous  S  1.87  ■  such  friendship  is  of  immense  help 
for  the  attainment  of  the  Path  and  Perfection  S  v. 3, 
32  ;  it  is  the  sign  that  the  bhikkhu  will  reaUze  the  7 


Kalyanaka 


28 


Kavata 


bojjhangas  S  v. 78=  ici  ;  A  1.16,  83  ,  it  is  one  of  the  7 
things  conducive  to  the  welfare  of  a  bhikkhu  D  111.212  ; 
A  IV. 29,  282;  Th  2,  213;  It  10;  Dhs  i328  =  Pug  24; 
Vistn  107.  —  a°  not  having  a  virtuous  friend  and  good 
adviser  DhsA  247.  -rupa  beautiful,  handsome  J  m.82  ; 
V.204  ;  -vakkarana,  usually  comb,  with  °vaca,  of  pleasant 
conversation,  of  good  address  or  enunciation,  reciting 
clearly  D  1.93,  115;  A  n.97  ;  ui.114,  263;  iv.279  ;  Vin 
II. 139;  Miln  21;  DA  1.263  (  =  madhura-vacana) ;  a° 
not  pronouncing  or  reciting  clearly  D  1.94.  122  ;  -°ta 
the  fact  of  being  of  good  and  pleasing  address  A  1.38  ; 
-vaca,  usually  in  form.  k°  k°-vakkarano  poriya  vacaya 
samannagato  D  1.114;  A  11.97;  111.114,  195,  263: 
IV. 2 79  ;  Vin  n.139 ;  DA  1.282  ;  -sadda  a  lucky  word  or 
speech  J  11.64  '•  -sampavanka  a  good  companion  A 
IV. 357  (in  phrase  k°-mitta  k'-sahaya  k°-s°) ;  Pug  37 ; 
-"ta  companionship  with  a  virtuous  friend  S  1.87. 
-sabaya  a  good,  virtuous  companion  A  iv.284;  357; 
Pug  37;  cp.  prec. ,  -°ta=prec.  S  1.87;  -sJla  practising 
virtue,  of  good  conduct,  virtuous  Th  i,  1008  ;  It  96. 


last]    good,    virtuous   DA    1.226 ; 


Kalyiaaka   (adj.)    [fr. 
DhsA  32. 

Kalyapati  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  kalyapa]  beauty,  goodness, 
virtuousness  Vism  4  (adi) ;  k°-kusala  clever,  experienced 
in  what  is  good  Nett  20. 

Kalyaoin  (adj.)  [fr.  kalyana]  (a)  beautiful,  handsome 
Vv  IV.' ;  —  (b)  auspicious,  lucky,  good,  proper  J  v. 124  ; 
Ud  59  ;  —  (c)  f.  [cp.-l  Vedic  kalySni]  a  beautiful  woman, 
a  belle,  usually  in  janapada°  D  i.i93  =  M  11.40  ;  S  11.234  : 
J  1.394;  V.I 54. 

KaUa^  &  Kalya  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  kalya]  i.  well,  healthy, 
sound  Vin  1.291.  —  2.  clever,  able,  dexterous  Miln  48, 
Sy.  —  3.  ready,  prepared  J  11.12,  cp.  -citta.  —  4.  fit, 
proper,  right  S  11. 13  (paf\ha).  —  nt.  kallar)  it  is  proper, 
befitting  (with  inf.  or  inf.-substitute)  :  vacanaya  proper 
to  say  D  1.168,  169;  A  1.144;  abhinanditui)  D  11.69; 
-kallar)  nu  [kho]  is  it  proper  ?  M  111.19 ;  S  iv.346 ;  Miln 
25.  — a°  I.  not  well,  unfit  Th  2,  439,  cp.  ThA  270.  — 
2.  unbecoming,  unbefitting  D  11.68  ;  J  v. 394. 

-kaya  sound  (in  body),  refreshed  Vin  1.291  ;  -kusala 
of  sound  skill  (cp.  kalUta)  S  111.265  ;  -citta  of  ready,  amen- 
able mind,  in  form.  k°,  mudu-citta,  vinivaraija",  udagga°. 
etc.  D  1. 1 10=  148=11.41  =  A  iv.209  =  Vin  1.16  =  11.156; 
VvA  53,  286;  Vv  50"  (=kammaniya-citta  "  her  mind 
was  prepared  for,  responsive  to  the  teaching  of  the 
dhamma  ") ;  PvA  38.  -cittata  the  preparedness  of  the 
mind  (to  receive  the  truth)  J  11.12  (cp  citta-kalyata)  ; 
-rupa  1.  of  beautiful  appearance  Th  1,212,  —  2.  pleased, 
joyful  (kalya°)  Sn  680,  683,  691  ;  -sarira  having  a  sound 
body,  healthy  J  11.51  ;  a°-ta  not  being  sound  in  body, 
ill-health  VvA  243. 

Kalla*  (m.  nt.)  ashes  }  111.94  i^o^  kalala),  also  in  °-7assa 
a  shower  of  ashes  J  iv.389. 

Kanaka  (adj.)  ffr.  last]  in  a°  unwell,  indisposed  Vin  111.62  ; 
J  111.464  ;  DhsA  377. 

Kallati  (f.)  see  kalyati  ;  -a"  unreadiness,  unpreparedness, 
indisposition  (of  citta),  in  expl°  of  thina  Nd*  290  = 
Dhs  ii56=i236  =  Nett  86;  DhsA  378;  Nett  26.  The 
reading  in  Nd*  is  akalyanata,  in  Dhs  akalyata ;  follows 
akammaAnat<i. 

Kallahba  [cp.  Sk.  kahlara,  the  P.  form  to  be  expl"*  as  a 
diaeretic  inversion  kalhara  >  kallahara]  the  white 
esculent  water  hly  J  v. 37;  Dpvs  xvi.ig. 

Kallita  (nt.)  [fr.  kalla]  pleasantness,  agreeableness  S 
111.270,  273  (samldhismir)  -°kusala) ;  A  111. 311;  iv.34 
(id.). 

Kallola  [cp.  Sk.  kallola]  a  billow,  in  -°mala  a  series  of 
billows  Davs  iv.44. 


Ka)aya=  kalSya. 

Ka]ara  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  karala  projecting  (of  teeth),  whereas 
ka^ara  means  tawny]  always  referring  to  teeth :  with 
long,  protruding  teeth,  of  Petas  (cp.  attr.  of  the  dog  of 
the  "  Underworld  "  PvA  152  :  tikhio^yatakathina-datho 
and  the  figure  of  the  witch  in  fairy-tales)  J  v. 91  (=ni- 
kkhantadanto) ;  vi.548  (=sukara-dathehi  samannagato 
p.  549)  ;  Pv  11. 4>  (=k°-danto  PvA  90). 

Ka|uik&  (f.)  [fr.  last,  lit.  with  protruding  teeth]  a  kind  of 
large  (female)  elephant  M  i.  1 78  (so  read  with  v.  1.  for 
kar).     Cp.  kalara. 

Kalingara=  kalingara. 

Ka|imb(h)aka  (cp.  ka^amba,  kalamba)  a  mark  used  to 
keep  the  interstices  between  the  threads  of  the  kathina 
even,  when  being  woven  Vin  ll.n6,  317  (v.  1.  kalim- 
paka). 

Ka)Ira  the  top  sprout  of  a  plant  or  tree,  esp.  of  the  bamboo 
and  cert,  palm  trees  (e.  g.  coco-nut  tree)  which  is 
edible  Sn  38  (vagsa°=  vejugumba  Nd'  556  and  p.  58); 
Th  I,  72  ;  J  1.74,  cp.  111.179  ;  vi.26 ;  Miln  201  (vai)sa°) ; 
Vism  255  (var)sa°-cakkalaka,  so  read  for  kaUra" ; 
KhA  50  at  id.  passage  reads  kalira-dancja). 

-(c)chejja  (nt.)  "  the  cutting  off  of  the  sprout,"  a 
kind  of  torture  MUn  193,  cp.  Miln.  trsl.  1.270  and 
kadaliccheda. 

Ka)ebara  ( :  kale°  and  kalevara)  (m.  &  nt.)  [cp.  BSk.  katje- 
bara  Av.  §.  11.26]  i.  the  body  S  1.62  =  A  11.48  ;  =  iv. 429 
=  M  1.82;  J  11.437,  111.96.  244;  Vism  49,  230.  —  2.  a 
dead  body,  corpse,  carcass ;  often  in  description  of 
death  :  khandhanai)  bhedo  k°assa  nikkhepo,  D  11.355  = 
M.  i.49  =  Vbh  137;  Th  2,  467;  J  111.180,  511;  v.459 ; 
Mhvs  20'*;  3','^ ;  PvA  80.  Cp.  kunapa.  —  3.  the  step 
in  a  flight  of  stairs  M  11.92,  cp.  kalingara. 

Ka|opI  (  =  khalopi)  f.  I.  a  vessel,  basin,  pot :  see  cpds.  — 
2.  a  basket,  crate  (=pacchi  ThA  219  ;  J  v.252)  M  1.77, 
342  ;  S  i.236  =  Th  2,  283  (where  osenti  is  to  be  corr.  to 
openti)  ;  J  v.252.  —  On  the  form  of  the  word  (=karoti  ?) 
see  Trencknei  J.P.T.S.  1908,  109  and  Davids,  Dial. 
1.227.  kalopi  (as  khalopi)  is  expl"*  at  Pug  A  p.  231  as 
"  ukkbali,  pacchi  va." 

-mukha  the  brim  of  a  pan  or  cooking  vessel  D  1.166 
=  M  i.77=342  =  A  1.295  =  11.206  (kumbhi-m°-(-kaJopi- 
m°) ;  -hattha  with  a  vessel  or  basket  in  his  hand  A 
IV. 376. 

Kavaca   (nt.)   [cp.   Sk.   kavaca]  a  mail,   a  coat  of  mail, 
armour   D  11.107=  Ud  64  (appl""    to  existence);  Th  i, 
614  (of  sila)  ;  J  iv.92,  296  ;  MUn  199,  257  ;  Vism  73. 
-jilika  a  mail-coat  Miln  199. 

Kavandha  (m.  nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  kavandha  &  kabandha]  i.  the 
(headless)  trunk  of  the  body,  endowed  with  the  power 
of  motion  Vin  ill.  107  ;  cp.  S  11.260  (asisaka") ;  Miln  292  ; 
DhA  1.314.  —  2.  a  headless  dwarf,  whose  head  has  been 
crushed  down  into  his  body  J  v. 424,  427  (cp.  the  story 
of  Dhanu,  the  Rak$asa  who  was  punished  \>y  having 
his  head  and  thighs  forced  into  his  body,  Raghuvagsa 
XII. 57). 

Kavata  (m.  nt.)  1.  the  panels  of  the  door,  the  door  proper, 
not  the  aperture  Vin  11. 114.  12c,  207,  208  (see  Vin 
11.148  for  the  description  of  a  door)  iv.269,  304  (°baddha 
=  avasatha);  J  1.19;  Nd^  235''';  Vism  28  ("koija  door- 
corner).  —  2.  dvara°  a  door-post  J  1.63  ;  11.334  ;  PvA 
280.  —  3.  a  window  Mhvs  ix.17;  —  "g  paijameti  to 
open  the  door  Vin  11. 1 14,  120,  267  ;  "rj  akofeti  to  knock 
at  the  door  D  1.88  (  =  Dh  1.252);  Vin  11.208.  —  akava- 
taka  (adj.)  having  no  doors,  doorless  Vin  11. 148,  154 
(v.  1.  for  akkavata  Text). 


I 


Kavataka 


29 


Kasira 


-pittha  the  panels  and  posts  of  a  door ;  the  door  and 
the  door-posts  Via  1.47,  48=11.208,  218;  -baddha 
"  door-bound,"  closed,  secure  Vin  iv.292  (see  also 
above). 

KaTataka  =  kavata  Vin  11. 148;  DA  1.62  (nivarana°). 

Kavi  [Vedic  kavi]  a  poet  S  1.38;  11.267;  Davs  i.io  ;  four 
classes  enum"'  at  A  11.230  &  DA  1.95,  viz.  i.  cinta"  an 
original  p.  2.  suta°onewho  puts  into  verse  what  he  has 
heard.  3.  attba°  a  didactic  p.  4.  patibbaQa°  an  impro- 
vjsor. 

-kata  composed  by  poets  S  11.267  •  A  i-?^- 

Kavya  [cp.  Vedic  kavya  wise;  sacrificer]  poetry;  ballad, 
ode  (cp.  kabba)  J  vi.213,  216. 
-kira  a  poet  J  vi.216. 

Kaviltba  [cp.  kapittha]  the  elephant-apple  tree,  Feronia 
elephantum  J  v.38  (°vana). 

Kaiaka  see  kassaka. 

Kasa^a  (metathesis  of  sakata,  cp.  Trenckner,  Miln  p.  423) 
I.  (adj.)  bad,  nasty;  bitter,  acrid;  insipid,  disgusting 
A  1.72;  J  11.96;  159.  —  2.  (m.)  (a)  fault,  vice,  defect 
M  1. 281  ;  Ps  11.87.  —  (t>)  leavings,  dregs  VvA  288  (v.  1. 
sakata).  —  (c)  something  bitter  or  nasty  J  11.96  ;  v.  18. 
—  (d)  bitter  juice  J  11. 105  (nimba°).  —  sa°  faulty, 
wrong,  bitter  to  eat,  unpalatable  Miln  119. 
-6daka  insipid,  tasteless  water  J  11.97. 

Kasati  [kfs  or  kan]  to  till,  to  plough  S  1.172,  i73  =  Sn  80  ; 
Th  1.531  ;  J  1.57;  11.165;  VI. 365.  —  kassate  (3rd  sing, 
med.)  Th  i.  530.  —  pp.  kattha  (q.  v.)  Caus.  II.  kata- 
peti  Miln  66,  82  ;  DhA  1.224. 

Kasana  (nt.)  ploughing,  tilling  J  IV. 167;  vi.328,  364; 
Vism  384  (-l-vapana  sowing). 

Katambn  [Derivation  uncertain]  anything  worthless, 
rubbish,  filth,  impurity;  fig.  low  passions  S  1.166; 
Sn  28i  =  Miln  4i4  =  A  iv.i72;  Vism  258  (mar|sa°),  259 
(parama°). 

-jata  one  whose  nature  is  impurity,  in  comb,  brah- 
macaripatinflo  antoputi  avassuto  k°  S  iv.r8i  ;  A 
11.240;  IV. 128,  201  ;  Vin  11.236;  Pug  27,  34,  36;  Vism 
57  (-i-avassuta  papa).     °ka-jata  ibid,  in  vv.  U. 


(f.)    [Vedic   ka£J]    a   whip   Vin   1.99    (in    Udd&na); 

M  1.87,  etc.;  Dh  143;  Miln  197. kasahi  ta}eti  to  whip, 

lash,  flog  as  punishment  for  malefactors  here,  as  well 
as  in  Niraya  (see  kamma-karatia)  M  i.87=A  1.47  = 
II. 1 22,  etc.  ;  PvA  4  (of  a  thief  scourged  on  his  way  to  the 
place  of  execution);  DhA  11.39  (id.). 

•nivit^ba  touched  by  the  whip,  whipped  Dh  144 
(=DhA  III. 86);  -pahara  a  stroke  with  the  whip,  a  lash 
J  III.  1 78;  -bata  struck  with  the  whip,  scourged  Vin 
'•75;  91  =  322;  Sdhp  147. 

Klftja  and  KasSva  [Derivation  uncertain.  The  word 
first  appears  in  the  late  Vedic  form  kasaya,  a  decoction, 
distillation,  essence ;  used  fig*  of  evil.  The  old  Pali 
form  is  kasava]  1.  a  kind  of  paste  or  gum  used  in 
colouring  walls  Vin  11.151.  —  2.  an  astringent  decoction 
extracted  from  plants  Vin  1.207;  277;  J  v.  198.  —  3.  (of 
taste),  astringent  DhS  629;  Miln  65;  DhA  11.31. — 
4.  (of  colour)  reddish-yellow,  orange  coloured  Vin  1.277. 
—  5.  (ethical)  the  fundamental  faults  (raga,  dosa, 
moha)  A  1.112;  Dh  10;  Vbh  368.  -a"  faultless,  flawless, 
in  akasavattai)  being  without  defect  A  i.i  12  (of  a  wheel, 
with  -sa°  ibid.);  -sa°  faulty  DhA  1.82;  -nvaha°  wicked 
J  IV. 387.  In  cpds.  both  forms,  viz.  (kasaya)-yoga  an 
astringent  remedy  J  v.  198  (kasava°  ibid.);  -rasa  reddish- 
yellow  dye  J  11.198;  (kasava)-6daka  an  astringent 
decoction  Vin  1.205;  -gandha  having  a  pungent  smell 
Vin  1.277;  -rasa  having  an  astringent  taste  ibid.; 
•Tanna  of  reddish-yellow  colour  ibid. 


Kasayatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  kasSya]  astringency  Miln  56. 

Kaai  and  KasI  (f)  [fr.  kasSti]  tilling,  ploughing;  agricul- 
ture, cultivation  M  11.158;  S  1.172,  i73  =  Sn  76  sq.; 
Vin  IV.6;  Pv  i.5«  (k°,  gorakkha,  vaijijja) ;  PvA  7; 
Sdhp  390  (k",  vanijja) ;  VvA  63.  —  °g  kasati  to  plough, 
to  till  the  land  J  1.277 ;  Vism  284. 

-kamma  the  act  or  occupation  of  ploughing,  agricul- 
ture J  11.165,  300  ;  III. 270.  -karana  ploughing,  tilUng  of 
the  field  PvA  66 ;  -khetta  a  place  for  cultivation,  a  field 
PvA  8  (kasi°) ;  -gorakkha  agriculture  and  cattle  breeding 
D  1.135;  -bhanda  ploughing  implements  DhA  1.307. 

Kaai^a'    [Vedic    kftsna]    (adj.)    entire,   whole   J   iv.iii. 


Kasiva'  [Deriv.  uncertain]  (nt.)  one  of  the  aids  to  kam- 
mafthana  the  practice  by  means  of  which  mystic 
meditation  (bhavana,  jhana)  may  be  attained.  They 
are  fully  described  at  A  v. 46  sq.,  60  ;  usually  enumerated 
as  Un  [savaka  dasa  k°  -SyatanSni  bhaventi]: 
pathavi",  apo°,  tejo°.  vayo°,  nila",  pita",  lohita", 
odata°,  Skisa",  viflflaija" — that  is,  earth,  water,  fire, 
air ;  blue,  yellow,  red,  white ;  space,  intellection  (or 
perhaps  consciousness)  M  11. 14  ;  D  in. 268,  290  ;  Nett  89, 
112;  Dhs  202  ;  Ps  1.6,  95  ;  cp.  Manual  49-52  ;  Bdbd  4, 
90  sq.,  95  sq.  —  For  the  last  two  (4kasa°  and  viiiisana") 
we  find  in  later  sources  aloka°  and  (paricchinn')  akasa° 
Vism  1 10  ;  cp.  Dhs  trsl.  43  n.  4,  57  n.  2  ;  Cpd.  54,  202. 
—  Eight  (the  above  omitting  the  last  two)  are  given 
at  Ps  1.49,  143.  149.  —  See  further  J  1.313;  111.519; 
Dhs  A  186  sq.  There  are  14  manners  of  practising  the 
kasinas  (of  which  the  first  nine  are :  k°-dnuIomai) ; 
k°-patilomag  ;  k°-anupatilomai)  ;  jhan&nulomai) ;  jh"- 
pati°;  jb°-anupati°  ;  jh°-ukkantikai) ;  k°  ukk"  ;  jh°- 
k°-ukk°)  Vism  374;  cp.  Bdhd  5,  101  sq.,  104,  152. — 
Nine  qualities  or  properties  of  (pafhavi-)  kasina  are 
enum""  at  Vism  117.  —  Each  k.  is  fivefold,  according 
touddhar),  adho,  tiriyag,advayai),appamauar)  ;  M  11.15, 
etc.  —  kasina^  oloketi  to  fix  one's  gaze  on  the  particular 
kasina  chosen  J  v.314  ;  °ij  samannaharati  to  concentrate 
one's  mind  on  the  k.  J  in. 519. 

-ayatana  the  base  or  object  of  a  kasina  exercise  (see 
above  as  10  such  objects)  D  in. 268  ;  M  11.14 ;  Ps  1.28, 
etc. ;  -aramma9a  =  °ayatana  Vism  427  (three,  viz.  tejo°, 
odata",  aloka°).  -kanuna  the  k.  practice  J  1.141  ; 
rv.306;  v.162,  193.  -jhana  the  k.  meditation  DhsA  413. 
•dosa  fault  of  the  k.  object  Vism  117.  123  (the  4  faults 
of  pathavi- kasina  being  confusion  of  the  4  colours), 
-parikamma  the  preliminary,  preparatory  rites  to  the 
exercise  of  a  kasina  meditation,  such  as  preparing  the 
frame,  repeating  the  necessary  formulas,  etc.  J  1.8, 
245  ;  111.13  526  ;  DhsA  187  ;  -°g  katheti  to  give  instruc- 
tions in  these  preparations  J  111.369 ;  °g  karoti  to  per- 
form the  k-preparations  J  iv.117;  v. 132,  427;  vi.68  ; 
-mandala  a  board  or  stone  or  piece  of  ground  divided 
by  depressions  to  be  used  as  a  mechanical  aid  to  jhana 
exercise.  In  each  division  of  the  manijala  a  sample  of 
a  kasina  was  put.  Several  of  these  stone  maiiidalas 
have  been  found  in  the  ruins  at  Anuradbapura.  Cp. 
Cpd.  54  f.  202  f.  J  III. 501  ;  DhA  iv.208.  -samipalti 
attainment  in  respect  of  the  k.  exercise  Nd*  466*  (ten 
such). 

Kacita  (pp.  of  kasati)  ploughed,  tilled  Anvs  44 ;  -a°  un- 
filled ibid.  27,  44.  —  Cp.  vi". 

Kasira  (adj.)  [Probably  fr.  Vedic  krccbra,  the  deriv.  of 
which  is  uncertain]  miserable,  painful,  troubled, 
wretched  A  iv.283  ;  Sn  574;  J  11.136;  iv.ii3  =  vm7; 
Pviv.i"  (=PvA  229  dukkha).  —  adv.  kasira  (abl.)  with 
difficulty  J  v.435  ;  -kasirena  (instr.)  D  1.251  :  M  1.104  ; 
S  1.94;  Vin  1.195;  J  '-338;  III. 513.  -a°  without  pain, 
easy,  comfortable  J  vi.224  (  =  niddukkba) ;  -labbin 
obtaining  without  difficulty  (f°  ini  A  iv.342)  in  foimula 


Kaseruka 


30 


Kacaoa 


akicchaUbhl    akasiraUbhl      etc.     M    1.33;     S     H.278; 
A  1.184  ;  11.23,  36 ;  IV.  106 ;  Ud  36;  Pug  11,  12. 

-abhata  amassed  with  toil  and  difficulty  (of  wealth) 
J  v-435 ;  -vuttika  finding  it  hard  to  get  a  livelihood 
A  i.i07=Pug  51. 

Kaseruka  [etym.  connected  with  Sk.  kaseru  backbone  ?] 
a  plant,  shrub  SnA  284  (v.  1.  kagsiruka  for  kii)suka  ?). 
See  also  kateruha. 

Kassaka  [fr.  kasati]  a  husbandman,  cultivator,  peasant, 
farmer,  ploughman  D  1.61  (k°  gahapatiko  karakarako 
r5si-va<J<Jhako) ;  A  1.241  ;  A.  1.229,  239  (the  three  duties 
of  a  farmer) ;  S  1.172  =  Sn  76  ;  111.155  (v- 1-  forT.kasaka) ; 
IV.  314;  Vin  IV. 108;  Bdhd  96;  DA  1.170;  often  in 
similes,  e.  g.  Pv  i.i*  ;  11.9"  (hkeness  to  the  doer  of  good 
works);  Vism  152,  284,  320.  -vanna  (under)  the  dis- 
guise of  a  peasant  S  i.i  15  (of  Mara). 

Kastati  [kfs]  see  ava°,  aou°  (aor.  anvakasi),  pari" ;  other- 
wise kasati ;  cp.  also  kissati. 

Kauima  fut.  of  karoti. 

KataaQ  [cp-  Vedic  kuha ;  for  a :  u  cp.  kad°.]  interr.  adv. 
where  ?  whither  ?  Vin  1. 217  ;  D  1.151  ;  Sn  p.  106  ;  J  11. 7  ; 
III. 76;  V.440.  —  k-nu  kho  where  then  ?  D  1.92;  11. 143, 
263. 

Kah&pa^a  [doubtful  as  regards  etym.  ;  the  (later)  Sk. 
kar$4pana  looks  like  an  adaptation  of  a  dial,  form] 
I.  A  square  copper  coin  M  11.163 :  A  1.250  ;  v. 83  sq. ; 
Vin  11.294  ;  "'■  238  ;  DhsA  280  (at  this  passage  included 
under  rajatar),  silver,  together  with  loha-masaka,  daru- 
masaka  and  jatu-masaka) ;  S  1.82  ;  A  1.250  ;  Vin  11.294  ; 
IV. 249 ;  J  1.478,  483 ;  11.388 ;  Mhvs  30".  The  extant 
specimens  in  our  museums  weigh  about  g  of  a  penny, 
and  the  purchasing  power  of  a  k.  in  our  earliest  records 
seems  to  have  been  about  a  florin.  —  Frequent  numbers 
as  denoting  a  gift,  a  remuneration  or  alms,  are  100,000 
(J  11.96) ;  18  kotis  (J  1.92) ;  1,000  (J  11. 277,  431  ;  v. 128, 
217  ;  PvA  153,  161) ;  700  (J  111.343) ;  100  (DhA  111.239) ; 
80  (PvA  102) ;  10  or  20  (DhA  iv.226) ;  8  (which  is  con- 
sidered, socially,  almost  the  lowest  sum  J  iv.138  ;  1.483). 
A  nominal  fine  of  1  k.  (  =  a  farthing)  Miln  193.  —  ekag 
k°  pi  not  a  single  farthing  J  1.2  ;  similarly  eka-kahapapen' 
eva  Vism  312. — -Various  quaUties  of  a  kahapaija  are 
referred  to  by  Bdhgh  in  similes  at  Vism  437  and  515. 
Black  kahcipaoas  are  mentioned  at  DhA  111.254.  —  See 
Rh.  Davids,  Ancient  Measures oj Ceylon  ;  Buddk.  India, 
pp.  100-102,  fig-  24  ;  Miln  trsl.  I-239. 

-gabbha  a  closet  for  storing  money,  a  safe  DhA  iv.  104  ; 
-vassa  a  shower  of  money  Dh  186  (=DhA  111.240). 

KahapaQaka  (nt.)  N.  of  a  torture  which  consisted  in  cutting 
oft  small  pieces  of  flesh,  the  size  of  a  kahapatia,  all 
over  the  body,  with  sharp  razors  M  1.87  =  A  1.47, 11.122  ; 
cp.  Miln  97,  290,  358. 

K&  (inded.)  inter],  imitating  the  crow's  cry :  k2  k&  J  iv.72. 

Ka°  in  composition,  is  assimilated  (and  contracted)  form 
of  kad°,  as  kSpuppha,  kapurisa. 

Kaka  [onomat.,  cp.  Sk.  kaka;  for  other  onomat.  relatives 
see  note  on  gala]  the  crow  ;  freq.  in  similes :  S  1.124  = 
Sn  448;  J  1.164.  1^  thievish  ways  are  described  at 
DhA  111. 352  ;  said  to  have  ten  bad  qualities  A  v.149  ; 
J  1.342;  III. 126;  kaka  va  kulala  va  Vin  iv.40.  —  As 
bird  (of  the  dead)  frequenting  places  of  interment  and 
cremation,  often  with  other  carcass-eating  animals 
(sigala,  gijjha)  Sn  201  ;  PvA  198  (  =  dhanka) ;  cp.  kakola. 
— ■  lacpds.  often  used  derisively.  —  f.  kaki  J  11.39,  150  ; 
111.431. 

-amasaka  "  touching  as  much  as  a  crow,"  attr.  of  a 
person  not  enjoying  his  meals  DhA  iv.16;  DhsA  404  ; 
-uttepaka  a  crow-scarer,  a  boy  under  fifteen,  employed 


as  such  in  the  monastery  grounds  Vin  1.79  cp.  371. 
-opama  the  simile  of  the  crow  DhA  11.75.  -orava 
"  crow-cawing,"  appl**  to  angry  and  confused  words 
Vin  1.239,  cp.  IV. 82  ;  -oliika  crows  and  owls  J  11  351  ; 
DhA  1.50;  Mhbv  15;  -guyha  (tall)  enough  to  hide  a 
crow  (of  young  com,  yava)  J  11. 174  ;  cp.  J -trsl.  11. 122  ; 
-nila  a  crow's  nest  J  11.365  ;  -panita  "  crow-wisdom," 
i.  e.  foolishness  which  leads  to  ruin  through  greed 
J  v. 255,  258  ;  cp.  vi.358  ;  -paftanaka  a  deserted  village, 
inhabited  only  by  crows  J  vi.  456 ;  -pada  crow's  foot 
or  footmark  Vism  179  (as  pattern);  -peyya  •'  (so  full) 
that  a  crow  can  easily  drink  of  it,"  full  to  the  brim, 
overflowing,  of  a  pond:  samatittika  k°  "with  even 
banks  and  drinkable  for  crows  "  (i.  e.  with  the  water  on 
a  level  with  the  land)  D  1.244  ;  S  11. 1 34  (do.) ;  D  11.89  ; 
M  1.435  ;  A  III. 27 ;  J.  11.174  ;  Ud  90  :  cp.  note  to  J.  trsl. 
II. 122  ;  PvA  202.  See  also  peyya.  -bhatta  "a  crow's 
meal,"  i.  e.  remnants  left  from  a  meal  thrown  out  for 
the  crows  J  11.149;  -vanna  "crow-coloured"  N.  of  a 
king  Mhvs  22^';  -yassa  the  cry  of  a  crow  Vin  11.17; 
-sisa  the  head  of  a  crow  J  11. 351  ;  as  adj. :  having  a 
crow's  head,  appl*"  to  a  fabulous  flying  horse  D  11.174  '■ 
cp.  J  11. 129  ;  -sura  a  "  crow-hero,"  appl.  to  a  shameless, 
unconscientious  fellow  Dh  244  ;  DhA  111.352  ;  -ssaraka 
(having  a  voice)  sounding  like  a  crow  Vin  i.i  15. 

K&kacohati  [derived  by  FausboU  fr.  kas,  to  cough ;  by 
Trenckner  fr.  krath:  by  Childers  &  E.  MuUer  fr.  kath; 
should  it  not  rather  be  a  den.  fr.  kakaca  a  saw  ?]  to 
snore  Vin  iv.355 ;  A  111.299;  J  1.61,  160  (  =  ghnni- 
ghurupassasa  ;  cp.  DA  1.42  ghurd-ghuriipass&si) ;  1.318  ; 
VI.57 ;  Miln  85;  Vism  311. 

K&kBQa  (nt.)  [k&  (for  kad°)  -I-  kapa  =  less  than  a  particle] 
a  coin  of  very  small  value  Sdhp  514. 

Kika^ikft  (f.)  =  prec.  J  1.120,  419;  vi.346;  DA  1.212; 
DhA  1.391  ;  VvA  77=DhA  in. 108.  From  the  latter 
passages  its  monetary  value  in  the  opinion  of  the  Com- 
mentator may  be  guessed  at  as  being  I  of  a  kahapa^a  ; 
it  occurs  here  in  a  descending  line  where  each  succeeding 
coin  marks  half  the  value  of  the  preceding  one,  viz., 
kahSpapa,  z44^'^'  pada,  masaka,  kAkapika,  upon  which 
follows  mudha  "  for  nothing." 

-agghanaka  "  not  even  a  farthing's  worth,"  worth 
next  to  nothing  J  vi.346. 

K&kola  and  KUo}a  [Onomat.  The  Lit.  Sk.  has  the  same 
form]  a  raven,  esp.  in  his  quaUty  as  bird  of  prey,  feeding 
on  carrion  (cp.  k&ka)  J  in. 246  (  =  vanak£ka) ;  v.268,  270 
(gijjha  k°  a  ca  ayomukha  .  .  .  khadanti  narar)  kibbisa- 
k&rinai)) ;  vi.566. 

-gani  (pi.)  flocks  of  ravens  Sn  675 ;  VV52"  (=VvA 
227)- 

Kica*  [Der.  unknown.  The  word  first  occurs  in  the 
§at  Br.  &  may  well  be  non-Aryan]  a  glass-like  substance 
made  of  siliceous  clay;  crystal  Vin  1.190;  11. 112  (cp. 
Divy  503,  kScamaQi  rock-crystal).  —  a°  not  of  glass  or 
quartz,  i.  e.  pure,  clear,  flawless,  appl.  to  precious  stones 
D  ii.244  =  J  11.418  (  =  akakkasa)  Sn  476.  In  the  same 
sense  also  MVastu  1.164. 

-ambha   (nt.)   red   crystal   J   vi.268   (=rattama^li) ; 
-maya  made  of  crystal,  crystaUine  Vin  1.190  ;  ii.i  12. 

Kaca'  [cp.  Sk.  kaca  &  kSja]  a  pingo,  a  yoke,  a  carrying- 
pole,  usually  made  of  bamboo,  at  both  ends  of  which 
baskets  are  hung  (double  pingo).  Besides  this  there  is 
a  single  pingo  (ekato-kajo)  with  only  one  basket  and 
"  middle  "  p.  (antara°)  with  two  bearers  and  the  basket 
suspended  in  the  middle  Vin  n.137  ;  J  1.154  ;  v.  13,  293. 
295  sq.,  320,  345  ;  PvA  1O8 

-dandaka  the  pole  of  a  pingo  DA  1.4 1. 

Kacana  (f.)  [fr.  kaca']  balancing  hke  carrying  on  a  kaca, 
fig.  deliberation,  pondering  Vbh  352=Vism  27. 


Kacin 


31  Kama 


Kicin  (adj.)  [fr.  kaca'],  only  neg.  a"  free  from  quartz,  free 
from  grit,  flawless  Vv  60'  (=nicldosa  VvA  253). 

Kija=kica*,  i.  e.  carrying-pole  M  111.148 ;  J  1.9  ;  111.325  ; 
V.200  ;  Dpvs  xn  3  ;  Mhvs  5.  24  ;  DhA  iv.232. 

-koti  the  end  of  a  carrying-pole  J  1.9  ;  v.200.  -haraka 
a  pingo-bearer  DhA  iv.i28. 

Kit^^kotacika  [k^ta  +  kotacika]  a  low  term  of  abuse, 
"  pudendum  virile  &  mulicbre  "  Vjn  IV.7  (Buddhagh 
IV.354  :  katan  ti  purisa-nimittag) ;  cp.  Morris,  J.P.T.S. 
1884,  1889. 

Ki^a  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  kiria]  blind,  usually  of  one  eye,  occa- 
sionally of  both  (see  PugA  227)  S  1.94;  Vin  11.90  = 
A  1.107  =i(. 85  =  Pug  51  (in  expl"  of  tamaparaya?ja 
purisa) :  Th  2,  438;  J  1.222  (one-eyed);  vi.74  (of  both 
eyes) ;  DhA  in. 71. 

-kaccha  Np.  Sdhp  44  ;  -kacchapa  "  the  blind  turtle  " 
in  the  well-known  parable  of  a  man's  chances  of  human 
rebirth  after  a  state  of  punishment  Th  2,  500  (=ThA 
290)  ;  Miln  204  ;  DhsA  60  ;  cp.  M  in. 169  =S  v. 455. 

Kitabba  (adj.  -n.)  (grd.  of  karoti)  that  which  ought  to,  can 
or  must  be  done  (see  karoti)  J  1.2G4,  etc.  Also  as 
kattabba  PvA  30. 

Katag  and  Katll°  (in  comp"  with  kama)  inf.  of  karoti. 

-kama  desirous  of  doing  or  making,  etc.  Mhvs  37**  (a°) . 
PvA  115;  -kamata  the  desire  to  do,  etc.  J  iv.253  ;  v.364. 
See  also  kattu°  in  same  comb"' 

Katuye  is  Vedic  inf.  of  karoti  Th  2,  418  (in  ThA  268  taken 
as  katur)  ayye  I) 

Kidamba  [cp.  Sk.  kadamba]  a  kind  of  goose  with  grey 
wings  J  v. 420  ;  VvA  163. 

K&dambaka  made  of  Kadamba  wood ;  also  "ya  for  °ka ; 

both  at  J  v. 320. 

Kanana  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  kinana]  a  glade  in  the  forest,  a 
grove,  wood  Sn  1134  (  =  Nd*s.  v.  vanasaqda) ;  Th  2,  254 
(  =  ThA  210  upavana) ;  J  vi.557  ;  Sdhp  574. 

KSn&ma  f.  of  konSma  of  what  name  ?  what  is  her  (or 
your)  name  ?  Vin  11.272,  273  ;  J  vi.338. 

KapilanI  patron,  f.  of  Kapila  ;  the  lady  of  the  Kapila  clan 

Th  2,  65. 

Kapilavatthava  (adj.)  of  or  from  Kapilavatthu,  belonging 
to  K.  D  11.165,  256 ;  S  IV.I82. 

K&porisa  [kad  +  purisa]  a  low,  vile,'  contemptible  man, 
a  wretch  Vin  11. 188;  D  111.279;  S  1.91,  154;  11.241; 
V.204  ;  Th  I,  124,  495;  J  11. 42  ;  vi.437  ;  Pv  11.9^  (PvA 
125  ^lamaka") ;  sometimes  denoting  one  who  has  not 
entered  the  Path  A  111.24  ;  Th  2,  189. 

Kipotaka  (adj.)  [fr.  kapota]  pigeon-coloured,  grey,  of  a 
dull  white,  said  of  the  bones  of  a  skeleton  D  1.55  ; 
Dh  149  (=DhA  III. 112). 

K&potika  (f.)  [of  doubtful  origin,  fr.  kapota,  but  probably 
popular  etym.,  one  may  compare  Sk.  kapi^yana,  a  sort 
of  spirituous  liquor  Halayudha  2,  175,  which  expresses 
a  dili.  notion,  i.  c.  fr.  kapi]  a  kind  of  intoxicating  drink, 
of  a  reddish  colour  (like  pigeons'  feet)  Vin  iv.109,  cp. 
J  1.3').'  (sura). 

Kima  (m.  nt.)  fUhtp  ((X13)  fc  Dhtm  (843)  paraphrase  by 
"  icchayar),"  cp.  \edic  kama,  kain=  Iclg.  'qfij  to  desire, 
cp.  Lat.  cams,  Cloth,  hors,  V.  whore. —  i.  Objective: 
pleasantness,  pleasure-giving,  an  object  of  sensual 
enjoyment;- — j.  subjective:  (a)  enjoyment,  pleasure 
on  occasion  of  sen.se,  (b)  sense-desire.  Buddhist  com- 
mentators express  1  and  2  by  kamiyati  ti  kamo,  and 
kameti  ti  kamo  Cpd.  81,  «.  2.     Kama  as  sense-desire 


and  enjoyment  plus  objects  of  the  same  is  a  collective 
name  for  all  but  the  very  higher  or  refined  conditions 
of  life.  The  kama-bhava  or  -loka  (worlds  of  sense- 
desire)  includes  4  of  the  5  modes  (gati's)  of  existence 
and  part  of  the  fifth  or  deva-loka.  See  Bhava.  The 
term  is  not  found  analyzed  till  the  later  books  of  the 
Canon  are  consulted,  thus,  Nd*  i  distinguishes  (i) 
vatthukima :  desires  relating  to  a  base,  i.  e.  physical 
organ  or  external  object,  and  (2)  kilesakSma :  desire 
considered  subjectively.  So  also  Nd*  202,  quoted 
DhA  II.  162  ;  III. 240  ;  and  very  often  as  ubho  kSma.  A 
more  logical  definition  is  given  by  Dhammapala  on 
Vv  i'  (VvA  11).  Reclassifies  as  follows  :  1.  manipiya 
rupadi-visaya.  —  2.  chandaraga.  —  3.  sabbasmig  lobha. 
—  4.  gamadhamma.  —  5.  hitacchanda.  —  0.  seribhava, 
I.  e.  k.  concerned  with  (i)  pleasant  objects,  (2)  impul- 
sive desire,  (3)  greed  for  a'nything,  (4)  sexual  lust, 
(3)  effort  to  do  good,  (6)  self-determination. 

In  all  enumerations  of  obstacles  to  perfection,  or  of 
general  divisions  and  definitions  of  mental  conditions, 
kama  occupies  the  leading  position.  It  is  the  first  of 
the  five  obstacles  (nivaranani),  the  three  esanas  (long- 
ings), the  four  upadanas  (attachments),  the  four  oghas 
(floods  of  worldly  turbulence),  the  four  asavas  (intoxi- 
cants of  mind),  the  three  tanhas,  the  four  yogas  ;  and  k. 
stands  first  on  the  list  of  the  six  factors  of  existence : 
kama,  vedana,  saiiiia,  asava,  kamma,  dukkha,  which 
are  discussed  at  A  ill. 410  sq.  as  regards  their  Qrigin, 
difference,  consequences,  destruction  and  remedy.  — 
Kama  is  most  frequently  connected  with  raga  (passion), 
with  chanda  (impulse)  and  gedha  (greed),  all  expressing 
the  active,  cUnging,  and  impulsive  character  of  desire.  — 
The  foil,  is  the  list  of  synonyms  given  at  various  places 
for  kama-cchanda :(i)  chanda,  impulse;  (2)  raga, 
excitement ;  (3)  nandi,  enjoyment ;  (4)  taijha,  thirst ; 
(5)  sineha,  love ;  (6)  pipasa,  thirst ;  (7)  parilaba,  con- 
suming passion ;  (8)  gedha,  greed ;  (9)  muccha,  swoon, 
or  confused  state  of  mind  ;  (10)  ajjhosana,  hanging  on,  or 
attachment  Nd'.  At  Nd'  200  ;  Dhs  1097  (omitting 
No.  8),  cp.  DhsA  370  ;  similarly  at  Vism  569  (omitting 
Nos.  6  and  8),  cp.  Dhs  1214;  Vbh  375.  This  set  of  10 
characteristics  is  followed  by  kam-ogha,  kama-yoga, 
kam-upadana  at  Nd*  200,  cp.  Vism  141  (kam-ogha, 
"asava,  "upadana).  Similarly  at  D  111.238 :  kame 
avigata-raga,  "chanda,  °pema,  "pipasa,  °pari|aha, 
"tanha.  See  also  kama-chanda  below  under  cpds.  In 
connection  with  synonyms  it  may  be  noticed  that  most 
of  the  verbs  used  in  a  kama-context  are  verbs  the 
primary  meaning  of  which  is  "  adhering  to"  or  "grasp- 
ing," hence,  attachment;  viz.  esana  (ia  to  Lat  ira), 
upadana  (upa  -f-  a  -t-  da  taking  up),  taiiha  (trR,  Lat. 
torreo=  thirst)  pipasa  (the  wish  to  drink),  sineha 
(snih,  Lat.  nix  =  melting),  etc.  —  On  the  other  hand,  the 
reaction  of  the  passions  on  the  subject  is  expressed  by 
khajjati  "  to  be  eaten  up  "  paridaybati  "  to  be  burnt," 
etc.  The  foil,  passage  also  illustrates  the  various 
synonymic  expressions :  kame  paribhufijati,  kama- 
majjhe  vasati,  kama-parijahena  paridayhati,  kama- 
vitakkchi  khajjati,  kama-pariyesanaya  ussukko,  A  1.68  ; 
cp.  M  1.463  ;  111.129.  Under  this  aspect  kama  is  essen- 
tially an  evil,  but  to  the  popular  view  it  is  one  of  the 
indispensable  attributes  of  bliss  and  happiness  to  be 
enjoyed  as  a  reward  of  virtue  in  this  world  (manussa- 
kama)  as  well  as  in  the  next  (dibba  kama).  Sec  kania- 
vacara  about  the  various  stages  of  next-'vorld  happiness. 
Numerous  examples  are  to  be  found  in  Pv  and  Vv, 
where  a  standing  I^p.  of  the  Blest  is  sabbakSnia- 
samiddha  "  fully  equipped  with  all  objects  of  pleasure," 
c.  g.  l^v  i.iu';  PvA  46.  The  other-world  pleasures  arc 
greater  than  the  earthly  ones  :  S  v. 409  ;  but  lo  the  Wise 
even  these  are  unsatisfactory,  since  they  still  arc  signs 
of,  and  lead  to.  rebirth  (kamfipapatti.  It  94) :  api  dibbesu 
kSmesu  ratiQ  so  nddliigacchati  Dh  187;  ragar)  vina- 
yetha  mSnusesu  dibbesu  kamesu  cSpi  bhikkhu  Sn  361, 
see  also  It  94.  —  Kima  as  sensual  pleasure  finds  its 


Kama 

most  marked  application  in  the  sphere  ot  the  sexual : 
kamesu  micchacSrin,  transgressing  in  lusts,  sinning  in 
the  lusts  of  the  flesh,  or  violating  the  third  rule  of  con- 
duct equivalent  to  abrahmicariya,  inchastity  (see  sila) 
Pug  3°-  39 ;  It  ^i-  ^''--  itthi-kimehi  pariCcU-eti  "  he 
enjoys  himself  with  the  charms  of  woman  "  S  iv.343. 
Kimesu  brahmicariyava  practising  chastity  Sn  104 1. 
KimatthS  for  sextMl  amusement  A  111.229. 

Redemption  from  k^ma  is  to  be  efiected  by  self- 
control  (saTjyama)  and  meditation  {jhahta),  by  know- 
ledge, right  effort  and  renunciation.  "  To  give  up 
passion  "  as  a  practice  of  him  who  wishes  to  enter  on 
the  Path  is  expressed  l>y :  kiminag  pahSnai),  kJma- 
sailiianat)  piriflaa,  kimi-pipasanag-pativinayo,  kilma- 
vitaVkinat)  samugghato  kimi-parilahinai)  vupasamo 
Vin  lil.iii  ;  -kamesu  (ca)  appafibaddhacitto  "  uddhai)- 
soto  "  ti  vuccati :  he  whose  mind  is  not  in  the  bonds  of 
desire  is  called  "  one  who  is  above  the  stream  "  Dh  218  ; 
cp.  Th  2,  12  ;  —  tasmi  jantu  sadi  sato  kclm&ni  parivaj- 
jaye  Sn  771;— yokSrae  parivajjeti  Sn  768=Nett  69. 

—  nikkhamma  ghara  panujja  kime  Sn  359;  —  ye  ca 
k^me  pari&a&ya  caranti  akutobhay&  te  ve  pSragati 
loke  ye  patta  Ssavakkhayai)  A  111.69.  —  K£m&nat) 
piritihv}  p&SiUpeti  Gotamo  M  1.84 ;  cp.  A  v.64 ; 
klme  pijahati :  S  1.12=31;  Sn  704;  k&manai)  vippa- 
h(na  S  t.47r — 'ye  kame  hitva  agiha  caranti  Sn  464; 

—  kimi  nirujjhanti  (through  jhina)  A  iv.410  ;  kkme 
pamidati  Dh  383=8  1.15  (context  broken),  cp.  kama- 
sukhat]  analaqkaritva  Sn  59 ;  —  k&mesu  anapekkhin 
Sn  166  =  ^  1. 16  (abbrev.);  S  11.281  ;  Sn  857; — cp. 
rSgat)  vinayetha  .  .  .  Sn  361.  vivicc'  eva  kAmebi, 
aloof  irom  sensuous  joys  is  the  prescription  lor  all 
Jhlna-exercise. 

Applications  of  these  expressions : — kamesu  palaiita 
A  111.5 :  k&raesn  mocchita  S  1.74 ;  kamSlaye  asatta 
S  1.33;  kamesu  kathat)  nameyya  S  1.117;  kamesu 
anikllitivin  S  1.9  (cp.  kela) ;  kittassa  munino  carato 
kamesu  anapekhino  oghatiij^assa  pihayanti  kamesu 
gathitd  paja  Sn  823  (gadhita  Nd*) ;  —  kamesu  asaflSata 
Sn  243 ;  —  yo  na  lippati  kimesu  tam  ahai)  brumi 
brahmaijiar)  Dh  401  ;  — Muni  santivado  agiddho  kSme 
ca  loke  ca  anQpalitto  Sn  845  ;  kamesu  giddha  D  111.107  ; 
Sn  774  ;  kamesu  gedhai)  apajjati  S  1.73  ;  —  na  so  rajjaii 
kamesu  Sn  161  ;  —  kamanai)  vasam  upagamum  Sn  315 
(=kamanai)  asattatai)  papuniijsu  SnA  325);  kame 
parivajjeti  Sn  768,  kame  anugijjhati  Sn  769. 

Character  of  Kama.  The  pleasures  of  the  senses  are 
evanescent,  transient  (sabbe  kama  anicca,  etc.  A  11.177), 
and  of  no  real  taste  (appasada) ;  they  do  not  give 
permanent  satisfaction  ;  the  happiness  which  they  yield 
is  only  a  deception,  or  a  dream,  from  which  the  dreamer 
awakens  with  sorrow  and  regret.  Therefore  the  Buddha 
says  "  Even  though  the  pleasure  is  great,  the  regret  is 
greater :  adinavo  ettha  bhiyyo  "  (see  k-sukha).  Thus 
kama  as  kalika  (needing  time)  S  1.9.  117  ;  anicca  (tran- 
sitory) S  1.22  ;  kama  citra  madhura  "  pleasures  are 
manifold  and  sweet "  (i.  e.  tasty)  Sn  50 ;  but  also 
appassada  bahudukkha  bahupayasa :  quot.  M  1.9 1  ; 
see  Nd*  71.  Another  pjissage  with  var.  descriptions 
and  comparisons  of  kama,  beginning  with  app'  assada 
dukkha  kama  is  found  at  J  iv.118.  -atittaT)  yeva 
kamesu  antako  kurute  vasai)  Dh  48  ;  —  na  kahapana- 
vassena  titti  kamesu  vijjati  appasada  dukkha  kama  iti 
viiiaaya  paQ^ito  "  not  for  showers  of  coins  is  satisfac- 
tion to  be  found  in  pleasures— of  no  taste  and  full  of 
misery  are  pleasures  :  thus  say  the  wise  and  they  under- 
stand "  Dh  186;  cp.  M  1. 130  ;  Vin  11.25  (cp-  Divy  224). 
—  Kamato  jayati  soko  kamato  jayati  bhayarj  kamato 
vippamuttassa  n'atthi  soko  kutobhayan  ti  "  of  pleasure 
is  born  sorrow,  of  pleasure  is  bom  fear"  Dh  215. — 
Kamanam  adhivacanani,  attributes  of  kama  are : 
bhaya,  dukkha,  roga,  ganda,  salla,  sanga,  panka,  gabbha 
A  IV.289 ;  Nd*  p.  62  on  Sn  51  ;  same,  except  salla  & 
gabbha:  A  in.310.  The  misery  of  such  pleasures  is 
painted  in  vivid  colours  in  the  Buddha's  discourse  on 


32  Kama 


pains  of  pleasures  M  1.85  and  parallel  passages  (see 
e.  g.  Nd'  199),  how  kama  is  the  cause  of  egoism,  avarice, 
quarrels  between  kings,  nations,  families,  how  it  leads 
to  warfare,  murder,  lasciviousness,  torture  and  madness. 
Kaminag  adinavo  'the  danger  of  passions)  M  1.85  sq. 
=  Nd'  199,  quot.  SnA  1 14  (on  Sn  61) ;  as  one  of  the  five 
anupubbikathas :  K"  adinavai)  okarag  sagkilesai) 
A  IV.  186,  209,  439  ;  —  they  are  the  leaders  in  the  army 
of  Mara :  kama  te  pathama  sena  Sn  436 ;  —  yo  evam- 
vadi  .  .  .  n'atthi  kamesu  doso  ti  so  kamesu  patav- 
yatai)  apajjati  A  1.266  =M  1.305  sq. 

Similes. — In  the  foil,  passage  (following  on  appas- 
sida  bahudukkha,  etc.)  the  pleasures  of  the  senses  are 
likened  to:  (1)  atthi-kankhala,  a  chain  of  bones;  — 
(2)  marjsapesa,  a  piece  of  (decaying)  flesh ;  —  (3)  tip'- 
ukka,  a  torch  of  grass  ;  (4)  angara-kasu,  a  pit  of  glowing 
cinders  ;  —  (5)  supina,  a  dream  ;  (6)  yScita,  beggings  ; 
—  (7)  rukkha-phala,  the  fruit  of  a  tree ;  —  (8)  asi- 
siina,  a  slaughter-house ;  —  (9)  satti-sula,  a  sharp 
stake;  —  (10)  sappa-sira,  a  snake's  head,  i.  e.  the  bite 
of  a  snake  at  Vin  11.25  ;  M  1.130  ;  A  111.97  (where  atthi- 
sankhala);  Nd'  71  (leaving  out  No.  10).  Out  of  this 
list  are  taken  single  quotations  of  No.  4  at  D  111.283 ; 
A  iv.224=v.i75 ;  No.  5  at  DhA  111.240;  No.  8  at 
M  1.144;  No.  9  at  S  1.128  =Th  2,  58  &  141  (with 
khandhknai)  for  khandhasar)) ;  No.  10  as  asivisa  (poison- 
ous fangs  of  a  snake)  yesu  mucchita  baia  Th  2,  451,  and 
several  at  many  other  places  of  the  Canon. 

Cases  used  adverbially : — ^kamai)  ace.  cis  adv.  (a) 
yatha  kamar)  according  to  inclination,  at  will,  as  much 
as  one  chooses  S  1.227  :  J  i-203  ;  PvA  63,  113,  176 ;  yena 
kamar)  wherever  he  likes,  just  as  he  pleases  A  iv.194 ; 
Vv  i.i'  (:=icchanurupai)  VvA  11)  —  (b)  willingly, 
gladly,  let  it  be  that,  usually  with  imper.  S  1.222  ; 
J  1.233  ;  III. 147  ;  IV. 273  ;  VvA  95  ;  kamar)  taco  naharu 
ca  atthi  ca  avasissatu  (avasnssatu  in  J)  sarire  upasus- 
satu  maT|sa-lohitar)  "  willingly  shall  skin,  sinews  and 
bone  remain,  whilst  flesh  and  blood  shall  wither  in  the 
body  "  M  1. 481  ;  A  1.50  ;  S  11.28  ;  J  1.71,  no  ; -kamasi 
(instr.)  in  same  sense  J  iv.320  ;  vi.181 ;  -kamena  (instr.) 
do.  J  V.222,  226 ;  -kama  for  the  love  of,  longing 
after  (often  with  hi)  J  111-^66;  iv.285,  365;  v. 294; 
VI. 563,  589  ;  cp.  Mhv  111.18,  467.  -akama  unwillingly 
D  1.94  ;  J  VI. 506  ;  involuntarily  J  v. 237. 

°kaina  (adj.)  desiring,  striving  after,  fond  of,  pursuing, 
in  kama-kama  pleasure-loving  Sn  239  (kame  kama- 
yanto  SnA  284) ;  Dh  83  (cp.  on  this  passage  Morris, 
J.P.T.S.  1893.  39-41);  same  expl"  as  prec.  at  DhA 
II.  1 56;  Th  2,  506.  —  atthakama  well-wishing,  desirous 
of  good,  benevolent  J  1.241  ;  V.504  (anukampaka  +); 
sic  lege  for  attakamarupa,  M  1.205.  111,155,  cf.  S  i.44 
with  ib.  75  ;  A  11.2 1  ;  Pv  IV.3"  ;  VvA  1 1  (in  quotation) ; 
PvA  25,112;  manakama  proud  S  1.4  ;  labhakama  fond  of 
taking ;  grasping,  selfish  A  11.240  ;  diisetu°  desiring  to 
molest  Vin  iv.212  ;  dhamma"  Sn  92  ;  pasai)sa°  Sn  825. 
So  frequently  in  comb.  w.  inf.,  meaning,  willing  to. 
wishing  to,  going  to,  desirous  of :  jivitu",  amaritu", 
datu°,  datthu°,  dassana",  katu°,  pattu",  netu°,  gantu°, 
bhojetu",  etc.  -sakama  (-adj.)  willing  J  v.295.  -akam* 
I.  not  desiring,  i.  e.  unwilling:  M  11. 181  ;  mayhai) 
akamaya  against  my  wish  ( =  mama  anicchantiya)  Pv 
11.10^,  J  V.12I,  183,  etc.  2.  without  desire,  desireless, 
passionless  Sn  445.     -nikkama  same  Sn  1 1 3 1 . 

-agga  (nt.)  the  greatest  pleasure,  intense  enjoyment 
M  11.43  ;  Vv  16'  (=VvA  79,  attributed  to  the  Paranim- 
mita-vasavattino-deva) ;  -aggi  the  fire  of  passion  J 
V.487 ;  •ajjhosana  (nt.)  attachment  to  lust  and  desire. 
No.  10  in  kamacchanda  series  (see  above) ;  -Adhikarana 
having  its  cause  in  desire  M  1.85 ;  S  1.74 ;  -ftdhimutta. 
bent  upon  the  enjoyment  of  sensual  pleasures  A  iii.  168  ; 
J  VI.  1 59  ;  -Anusarin  pursuing  worldly  pleasures  J  11. 1 1 7  ; 
-ondha  blinded  by  passion  Ud  76  =  Th  i,  297  ;-  Abhibhu 
overcoming  pjissions,  Ep.  of  the  Buddha  D  11.274; 
-Abhimukha  bent  upon  lust,  voluptuous  PvA  3  ;  -Ava- 
cara  "  having  its  province  in  kama."  belonging  to  the 


Kama 


33 


Kama 


realm  of  sensuous  pleasures.  This  term  applies  to  the 
eleven  grades  o£  beings  who  are  stiU  under  the  influence 
of  sensual  desires  and  pleasures,  as  well  as  to  all  thoughts 
and  conditions  arising  in  this  sphere  of  sensuous  ex- 
perience D  1.34  (of  the  soul,  expH  DA  120  :  cha  k°-deva- 
pariyapanna) ;  J  1.47;  Dhs  i,  431  ;  Ps  i,  84,  85,  loi  ; 
Vbh  324 ;  Vism  88,  372,  452  (rupa°.  arQpa°,  lokuttara). 
493  (of  indriyas);  574;  PvA  138.  -kamma  an  action 
causing  rebirth  in  the  six  kama-worlds  Dhs  4 14,  418, 
431  ;  -devoid  PvA  138  ( +  brahmadevata)  and  -deva  the 
gods  of  the  pleasure-heavens  J  1.47 ;  v. 5 ;  vi.99  ;  Vism 
392  ;  or  of  the  kamdvacara-devaloka  J  vi.586,  -bhumi 
and  -loka  the  plane  or  world  of  kama  Ps  1.83  ;  J  vi.99  ; 
see  also  avacara ;  -&vacaraka  belonging  to  the  realm  of 
kama  J  vi.99 ;  Sdhp  2  54(°ika);  -assada  the  relish  of 
sensual  pleasures  PvA  262  ;  DA  1.89,  311;  -atura  affected 
by  passion,  love-sick  J  111.17c  ;  •arama  pleasure-loving 
A  IV.43S  (gihi  k-bhogi,  "rata,  °sammudita) ;  -al  ya,  the 
abode  of  sensual  pleasure  (i.  e.  kama-loka)  S  1.33  =  Sn 
1 77 ;  Sn  306 ;  -avafta  the  whirlpool  of  sensuality  J 
11.330  ;  -asava  the  intoxication  of  passion,  sensuality, 
lusts ;  def .  as  k^mesu  kama-chando,  etc.  (see  above 
k-chando)  Vbh  364,  374  ;  Dhs  1097  ;  as  the  first  of  four 
impurities,  viz.  k°,  bhava",  ditthi",  avijja°  at  Vin  111.5 
(the  detachment  from  which  constitutes  Arabantship) ; 
Vbh  373;  Dhs  1096,  1448;  as  three  (prec.  without 
ditthi°)  at  It  49  ;  Vbh  364  ;  cp.  D  1.84  ;  11.81  ;  111.2 16  ; 
M  1.7 ;  -itthi  a  pleasure-woman,  a  concubine  Vin  1.36 ; 
J  1.83 ;  V.490  ;  VI. 220  ;  -upabhoga  the  enjoyment  of 
pleasures  VvA  79 ;  -upadana  clinging  to  sensuaUty. 
arising  from  ta^ha,  as  k°  ditthi°  silabbata",  attavada" 
D  III. 230  ;  M  1. 51  ;  Vbh  136,  375  ;  Vism  569  ;  -fipapatti 
existence  or  rebirth  in  the  sensuous  universe.  These 
are  three  :  (i)  PaccupaUbita-kama  (including  mankind, 
four  lowest  devalokas,  Asuras,  Petas  and  animals), 
(2)  NimmSna-ratino  deva,  (3)  Paranimmita-vasavattino 
deva  D  111.218;  It  94.  -upasaghita  endowed  with 
pleasantness :  in  formula  rupa  (sadda,  etc.)  ittha 
kanta  raanapa  piyariipa  k°  rajaniya  "  forms  (sounds, 
etc.=any  object  of  sense),  desirable,  lovely,  agree- 
able, pleasant,  endowed  with  pleasantness,  prompting 
desires"  D  1.245  =M  1.85;  504;  D  11.265;  M  111.267 ; 
VvA  127.  -esana  the  craving  for  pleasure.  There  are 
three  esan^ :  kama°,  bhava",  brahmacariya"  D  111.216 
270  ;  A  11.42  ;  Vbh  366  ;  It  48  ;  S  v.54  ;  -ogha  the  flood 
of  sensual  desires  A  111.69;  D  in. 230,  276;  Vbh  375; 
Vism  141;  DhsA  166;  Nd*  178  (viz.  kam°.  bhav°, 
ditth°,  avijj°).  -kanfaka  the  sting  of  lust  Ud  27; 
-kara  the  fulfilment  of  one's  desires  J  v.370  (  =  kama- 
kiriya)  -karaniya  in  yatha"  papimato  the  puppet  of 
the  wicked  (lit.  one  with  whom  one  can  do  as  one  likes) 
M  1.173 ;  It  56 ;  -kalala  the  mud  of  passions  J  111.293  ; 
-kara  the  fulfilment  of  desires  Sn  351  =Th  1,  1271  ; 
-karin  acting  according  to  one's  own  inclination  Th  1 . 
971  ;  or  acting  willingly  DA  1.71  ;  -kotthasa  a  constituent 
of  sensual  pleasure  ( =  kamaguija)  J  in. 382  ;  v.149; 
DA  1. 12 1  ;  PvA  205  ;  -kopa  the  fury  of  passion  Th  i,  671  ; 
-gavesin,  pleasure-seeking  Dh  99=Th  i,  992.  -gijjha 
J  1.210  and  -giddha  greedy  for  pleasure,  craving  for 
love  J  III. 432  ;  V.256  ;  vi.245  ;  -giddhima,  same  J  vi.525. 
-giddhin  f.  °ini  same  Mhvs  VI.3.  -guna  (pi.)  always  as 
patica :  the  five  strands  of  sensual  pleasures,  viz.,  the 
pleasures  which  are  to  be  enjoyed  by  means  of  the  five 
senses ;  collectively  all  sensual  pleasures.  Def.  as 
cakkhuviiiiieyya  rupa,  etc.  A  in. 411  ;  D  1.245  ;  11. 271  ; 
III. 131,  234;  Nd'  s.  v.;  Ps  1129;  as  manapiyehi  rupS- 
dlhi  pancahi  kama-kottb^etu  bandhanehi  va  DA  1.121, 
where  it  is  also  divided  into  two  groups  :  manusaki  and 
dibba.  As  constituents  of  kamaraga  at  Nett  28 ;  as 
vana  (desire)  Nett  81.  —  In  the  popular  view  they  are 
also  to  be  enjoyed  in  "  heaven  "  :  saggai)  lokag  upa- 
pajjissami  tattha  dibbehi  paiicahi  k-gupehi  samappito 
samangibhijto  paricaressami  ti  Vin  in. 72  ;  mentioned 
as  pleasures  in  Nandana  S  1.5  ;  M  1.505  ;  A  111.40,  iv.  1 1 8  ; 
in  various  other  connections  S  iv.202  ;  Vv  30'  ;  Pv  in. 7' 


I  (°ehi  sobfaasi ;  expl.  PvA  305  by  k^ma-kotthSsebi) ; 
I  PvA  58  (paricSrenti) ;  cp.  also  k&ma-kSmin.  As  the 
I  highest  joys  of  this  earth  they  are  the  share  of  men  of 
good  fortune,  like  kingS,  etc.  (n^inQsak&  k°  gui)a) 
S  V.409 ;  A  V.272,  but  the  same  passage  with  "  dibbehi 
paficahi  k°-guQehi  samappita  ..."  also  refers  to 
earthly  pleasures,  e.  g.  S  1.79,  80  (of  kings) ;  S  v. 342  (of 
a  Cakkavatti) ;  A  11.125  ;  '^.55,  239  ;  v.203  ;  of  the  soul 
D  1.36 ;  Vbh  379 ;  other  passages  simply  quoting  k-g° 
as  worldly  pleasures  are  e.  g.  S  i.i6  =  Sn  171  ;  S  1.92  ; 
IV. 196,  326;  A  111.69  (itthirupasmig) ;  D  1.60,  104; 
Sdhp  261.  In  the  estimation  of  the  early  Buddhists, 
however,  this  bundle  of  pleasures  is  to  be  banned  from 
the  thought  of  every  earnest  striver  after  perfection : 
their  critique  of  the  kamaguQ&  begins  with  "  pafic'  ime 
bhikkhave  k3.maguQ^  ..."  and  is  found  at  various 
places,  e.  g.  in  full  at  M  1.85  =Nd"  s.  v. ;  M  1.454  ;  "42  ; 
III. 1 14  ;  quoted  at  M  1.92  ;  A  111.411  ;  iv.415,  430,  449, 
458.  Other  expressions  voicing  the  same  view  are : 
gedho  paficannai)  k'-gupSnai)  adhivacanai)  A  111.312  sq. ; 
asisuna  .  .  .  adhivac°  M  1.144:  nivapo  .  .  .  adhivac° 
M.  1.155;  sAvatto  •  •  •  adhivac"  It  114.  In  connection 
w.  rata  &  giddha  PvA  3  ;  paMna  M  in. 295 ;  gathita  & 
mucchita  M  1.173;  °^*  t^  kSmagupe  bhamassu  cittag 
"  Let  not  thy  heart  roam  in  the  fivefold  pleasures  " 
Dh  371  ;  cittassa  vossaggo  Vbh  370  ;  asantuttba  Vbh 
350.  See  also  Sn  50,  51,  171,  284,  337.  -gunika  con- 
sisting of  fivefold  desire,  appl.  to  raga  S  n.99  ;  J  iv.220  ; 
Dhs  A.371  ;  -gedha  a  craving  for  pleasure  S  i.ioo; 
ThA  225;  -cagin  he  who  has  abandoned  lusts  Sn  719. 
-dtla  impure  thought  J  11.2 14  ;  -chanda  excitement  of 
sensual  pleasure,  grouped  as  the  first  of  the  series  of 
five  obstacles  (panca  nivaraijani)  D  1.156,  246;  111.234, 
278;  A  1.231  ;  rv.457 ;  A  i.i34  =  Sn  1106;  S  1.99;  v.64 ; 
Bdhd  72,  96,  130  ;  Nd*  200,  420A.  Also  as  the  first  in 
the  series  of  ten  fetters  (sagyojanani)  which  are  given 
above  (p.  31)  as  synonyms  of  kilma.  Enumerated 
under  i-io  at  Nd*  200  as  eight  in  order ;  i,  2,  3.  4.  5, 
7,  9,  10  (omitting  pipasa  and  gedha)  Vbh  364  ;  Dhs  1 1 14( 
1153  ;  Nd^  ad  chandarSga  and  bhavachanda;  in  order: 
•2.  3.  5.  9.  6,  7,  10,  4  at  A  11.10  ;  —  as  nine  (like  above, 
omitting  gedha)  at  Vbh  374  ;  Dhs  1097  ;  —  as  five  in 
order:  1,  5,  9,  6,  7,  (cp.  above  passage  A  ii.io)  at  M 
1. 241  ;  —  as  four  in  order :  i,  5.  9,  7  at  S  1V.18S  ;  —  as 
six  nivaravas  (5  +  avijja)  at  Dhs  1170,  i486.  See  also 
D  1.246 ;  111.234,  269 ;  Ps  1. 103,  108  ;  11.22,  26.  44,  169 ; 
Vism  141  ;  Sdhp  459  ;  -jala  the  net  of  desires  Th  i,  355  ; 
-tanha  thirst  after  sensual  pleasures ;  the  first  of  the 
three  taphas,  viz.  kama°,  bhava",  vibhava°  D  111.216, 
275  ;  It  50  ;  Vbh  365  (where  defined  as  kSmadhatu- 
patisagyutto  rago) ;  Dhs  1059,  1136  (cp.  tapha  :  jappa- 
pj^sage) ;  as  the  three  tapha,  viz.  ponobbhavikS ,  nandi- 
raga-sahagata,  tatratatr'  abhinandini  at  Vin  1.10  = 
Vbh  101  ;  as  k-taijhahi  khajjamano  k-pari|ahena  pari- 
(Jayhamano  M  1.504.  See  also  D  11.308;  S  1.131; 
A  11.11;  Th  2,  140;  J  11.311;  V.451  ;  Miln  318.  -d» 
granting  desires,  bestowing  objects  of  pleasure  and 
deUght ;  Ep.  of  Yakkhas  and  of  Vessantara  (cp.  the 
good  fairy)  J 'vi.498,  525;  Mhvs  19,  9;  as  sabba"  Pv 
ii.i3»;  .dada=prec.  Pv  11.9";  PvA  112  ;  J  vi.508 ;  of  a 
stone  Miln  243,  252  ;  of  Nibbana  Miln  321  ;  Kh  viii.io  : 
esa  devamanussanag  sabbakamadado  nidhi  "  this  is  the 
treasure  which  gives  all  pleasures  to  gods  and  men  "  ; 
-dukkha  the  pain  of  sensual  pleasures  J  iv.118 ;  -duba 
granting  wishes,  like  a  cow  giving  milk  J  v. 33  •  vi.214  ; 
f°  duha  the  cow  of  plenty  J  iv.20  ;  •dhatu  "  element  of 
desire."  i.  e.  i.  the  world  of  desire,  that  sphere  of  exist- 
ence in  which  beings  are  still  in  the  bonds  of  sensuaUty. 
extending  from  the  Avici-niraya  to  the  heaven  of  the 
Paranimmita-vasavatti-devas  S  11. 151  ;  Th  i,  181  ;  also 
2.  sensual  pleasures,  desires,  of  which  there  are  six 
dhatus,  viz.  kama',  vyapSda,  vihigsa".  nekkhanuna°, 
avyapada",  avihigsS".  Vbh  86;  Nett  97;  D  111.215  = 
Vbh  363  (as  the  first  three  =  akusaladhitus) ;  Vbh  404. 
See  also  D  111.275 ;  Th  1,  378  ;  J  v.454  ;  Vism  486  (cp. 

Ill— 3 


Kama 


34 


Kameti 


Vbh  SO),     -nandi  sensual  delight  (cp.  °chanc!a)  A  ii.ll  ; 
Dhs  1 1 14,  etc.     -nidanai)  ncc.  adv.  as  the  consequence 
uf  passion,  through  passion,  M  1.85,  etc.  (in  kimagUQi 
passage) :    -nissarana    deliverance    from    passion,    the 
extinction  of  passion  It  61   (as  three  nissaraniya  dht- 
tuyo),    cp.    A    111.245  ;    -nissita   depending   on   craving 
Milu  II  :  -nita  led  by  desire  J  11.214,  215;  -panka  the 
mire  of  lusts  Sn  945  :  Th  2,  J54  ;  J  v.i8b,  356 ;  vi.230, 
505  ;  Mhbv  3  ;  -pa^isandhi-sukhin  finding  happiness  in 
the   association   with   desire   M   111.230  ;   -parilaha   the 
flame  or  the  fever  of  passion  M  1.242,  508;  S  iv.188; 
A  1.08  (paridayhati,  khajjati,  etc.) ;  A  ii.ii  ;  Vin  111.20  ; 
Nd^  374  (com''   with   "palibodhai  ;  DhA   11. 2  ;  see  also 
kSmacchanda  passage,     -pala  the  guardian  of  wishes, 
i.  e.  benefactor  J   v. 221  ;  -pipasa  thirst  for  sensuaHty 
M  1.242  ;  A  n.i  I,  and  under  k°-chanda  ;  -bandha  Ud  93, 
and  -bandhana  the  bonds  of  desire  J  vi.28,  also  in  the 
sense  of  k°-guna,  q.  v. ;  •bhava  a  state  of  existence 
dominated    by    pleasures.     It   is   the   second    kind   of 
existence,  the  first  being  caused  by  kamma  Vbh  137. 
It  rests  on  the  etfect  of  kamma,  which  is  manifested  in 
the  kilma-dhatu  A  1.223.     It  is  the  first  form  of  the 
3  bhavas,  viz.  kama°,  rupa°,  arupa"  Vin  1.36  ;  D  111.2 16  ; 
A.  IV.402  ;  Visra  572.     Emancipation  from  this  exist- 
ence is  the  first  condition  to  the  attainment  of  Arahant- 
ship:  kamabhave  asatta  aki&cana  Sn  17O,  1059,  1091 
(expl.   SnA   ?I5:   tividhe  bhavc  aiaggana) ;   Bdhd  6i. 
"parikkhiria  one  who  has  overcome  the  desire-existence 
Dh  413  =Sn  639.     -bhoga  enjoyment  of  sensual  plea- 
sures,   gratification    of    desires    S    1.74    ^saratta    -°esu 
giddha   karaesu   mucchita) ;   Th   2,    464;   It  94    (-°csu 
pandito    who    discriminates    in     worldly    pleasures) ; 
J   11.65  ;  -bhogin  enjoying  the  pleasures  of  the  senses 
Vin  1.203,  287;  11.136,   149;  D  111.134,   125;  Miln'243, 
350,  as  Ep.  of  the  kSraupapatti-beings   It  94 ;  as  ten 
kinds  A  v.  177;   as  bringing  evil,   being  blameworthy 
S  r.78  ;  cp.  \  IV.281,  438 ;  S  IV. 333  sq.  ;  A  111.351  ;  Th  2, 
4.'*<j :   J    III.  154.    ye   keci   kamesu    asaftiiata    jana  avi- 
tarSga.  idha   k-bhogino  (etc.)   A  11.6,  cp.  11.17.  kima- 
bhogi  kdm'arjmo  kamarato  kSma-sammudita  A  iv.439  ; 
-°s«v>'ii  sleeping  at  ease,  way  of  lying  down,  the  second 
of  the  four  ways  of  sleeping  (kimabhogiseyya  vSmena 
passena)  A  11.244  ;  -bhojin  =  "bhogin  Ud  65  ;  -magga  the 
path  of  sensuous  pleasures  J  v.07 ;  .tnatta  intoxicated 
with   sensuous   pieasiures    J    vi.231  ;    -tnuccha   sensual 
stupor  or  languor  S  iv.  189  ;  A  ll.i  i  ;  Dhs  1 1 14,  etc.  (see 
kamacchanda) :   -jo^  applicstion  to  sensuous  enjoy- 
ment, one  of  the  four  yogas,  viz.  kama°,  bbava°,  dittlii' . 
avijja"  (cp.  aaavfi)  A  n.'.o  :  only  the  first  two. at  It  95 ; 
cp.  D  111.230,  .276;  S  v. 59;  DhsA  166  ;  -rata  delighting 
in  pleasures  J  v. 255  ;  -rati  amoroas  enjoyment  (as  arati) 
Th  2,   58  and   141;   j  1.211  ;  111.396;   iv.107.     -n'atthi 
nissaranari    loke    kig    vivekena   kShasi   bhuiijassii    k- 
ratiyo   ra&hu  pacchanutapini  S  1.128.    ma  pamadam 
anuyuiijetha,    ma    kamaratisanthavar)     appamatto   hi 
jhSyanto  pappoti  paramaij  sukhan  S  1.25  =Dh  27  =  Th  i, 
884;  -rasa  the  taste  of  love  J  11.329;  111.170;  v.451  ; 
-raga    sensual    passion,    lust.      This   term    embraces 
tbe  kamaguija  &   the  three  ragas :   Dhs   1131,    1460; 
Nett    23 ;    M    1.433    sq. ;     D    111.254,    282  ;    S    1.22  = 
A  HI. 41 1  ;  S  1.13,  53;  111.155;  Th  2,  68,  77;  PvA  6;  see 
also  k-chanda  passage.     Relinquishing  this  desire  befits 
the  Saint:  Sn  139  {°i)  virajetvi  brahmalokOpago).     As 
k-ragavyapada    Dhs    362 ;    SnA    205 ;    -rupa    a    form 
assumed  at  will  VvA  80,  or  a  form  which  enjoys  the 
pleasures  of  heaven  Vbh  426  ;  -lapin  talking  as  one  likes 
D   1.91    (=DA   1.257   yadicchaka-bhanin) ;   -labha   the 
grasping  of  pleasures,  in  "abhijappin  A  111.353  ;  -loka  the 
world  of  pleasures  =  k4iiiavacara.  q.  v.  Sdhp  233,  261  ; 
-vannin  assuming  any  form  at  will,  Protean  J  11.255  = 
111.409.= Vv  33'"  ;  J  V.157;  Vv  i63;  VvA  80,  143,  146; 
-vasika  under  the  influence  of  passions  J  11.215  ;  -vitakka 
a  thought  concerning  some  sensuous  pleasure,  one  of 
the   three    evil    thoughts    (kama"    vyapada"    vihii)s4°) 
n  111.215,  226;  M.i.114;  A  1.68;  J  1.63;  iil.iS,  375; 


IV. 490 ;  vi.29 ;  It  82,  115;  Vbh  362;  Miln  310;  -vega 
the  impulse  of  lust  J  vi.268  ;  -sagga  the  heaven  of  sen- 
suous beings,  there  arc  six  q.  v.  under  sagga  J  1.105: 
II.  1 30;  111.258;  IV. 490  ;  VI. 29,  432;  at  all  these  passages 
only  referred  to,  not  enum'' ;  cp.  k-Avacara  ;  -sankappa- 
bahula  full  of  aspirations  after  pleasure  A  111.145,  259  ; 
D  HI. 2 15  ;  -sanga  attachment  to  passion  Ud  75  ;  -safkfia 
lustful  idea  or  thought ;  one  of  the  three  akusala- 
saiiiias  (as  vitakka)D  1.182  ;  III. 215  :  M  11.262  ;  Si. 126; 
Vbh  363  ;  Th  1,  1039;  Virata  k  aya  S  1.53  =  Sn  175; 
-saAilojana  the  obstacle  or  hindrance  formed  by  plea- 
sures ;  °atiga  Ep.  of  Arahant,  free  of  the  fetters  of  lust 
A  111.373  {+  kamaragaij  virajetva) ;  -sineha  love  of 
pleasures  Dhs  1097  (also  as  °sneha  M  1.24:  ;  S  iv.188 ; 
A  H.io);  see  k-chanda;  -sukha  happiness  or  welfare 
arising  from  (sensual)  pleasure,  worldly  happiness, 
valued  as  miiha".  puthujjana",  anariya",  and  not  worth 
pursuit :  see  kamaguga,  which  passage  closes :  yag  ime 
paAca  k-gune  paticca  uppajjati  sukhar)  somanassat) 
idai)  vuccati  k-sukbar)  A  iv.4 1 5  ;  S  iv.225  ;  varying  with 
.  .  .  somanassai)  ayag  kamanai)  assado  M  1.85,  92, 
etc.  — '  As  kama°  and  nekkhamma"  A  1.80  ;  as  renounced 
by  the  Saint:  anapekkhino  k°  r)  pahaya  Dh  346  = 
S  1.77;  M  111.230;  Sn  59  (see  Nd»  s.  v.).  See  also 
S  iv.2c8;  M  11.43;  Th2,483;  Vv  6"  ;  J  11. 140;  in. 396; 
v.428  ;  kamasukhaUik'dnuyoga  attachment  to  worldly 
enjoyment  S  iv.330 ;  v.421  ;  Vin  1. 10;  D  ill. 113; 
Nett  no;  Vism  5,  32;  -sutta  N.  of  the  first  sutta  of 
the  Atthakavagga  of  Sn;  -settha  (pi.)  a  class  of  devas 
D  11.258 ;  -ssvaoa  pursuit  of,  indulgence  in,  sensuous 
pleasure  J  11.180  ;  III. 464  ;  -sevin  adj.  to  prec.  J  iv.118; 
-hetu  having  craving  as  a  cause :  in  adinava  section, 
foil,  on  kamaguni  M  1.86,  etc.,  of  wealth  S  t.74 ; 
-hetuka  caused  by  passion  Th  2,  355=ThA  243; 
J  v. 220,  225. 

Kimaka  (adj.)  [fr.  kama]  only  — °  in  neg.  akamaka  un- 
wiUing,  unde8irousDl.ii5  ;  M  1.163  ;  Vin  111.13  ;  J  iv.31  ; 
cp.  kamuka. 

KsmaQ^nka  (adj.)  having  a  kamapd^l"  {<l-  v.)  S  iv.3i2 
cp.  A  V.263. 

Kftmata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  kama]  desire,  longing,  with  noun : 
viveka"  ...  to  be  alone  PvA  43;  anattha°  J  iv.i4; 
with  inf.  PvA  65  (gahetu°);  J  in. 362  (vinSsetu") ; 
Mhvs  5,  260  ;  DhA  1.91. 

Kimin  (adj.)  [fr.  kama]  :.  having  kama,  i.  e.  enjoying 
pleasure,  gratifying  or.n's  own  desires  in  kama-kamin 
realizing  all  wishes  ;  at'/,  of  beings  in  one  of  the  Sugati*, 
the  blissful  states,  of  Vakkhas,  Devas  or  Devaiifiataras 
(Pv  i.3'  =  pvA  16),  as  a  reward  for  former  merit; 
usually  in  comb"  with  bhufijami  paribhogavant 
(Pv  IV. 3<*)  or  as  "  nandino  devalokasmii)  modanti  k- 
kamino "  A  11.62=11  112;  Th  1,  242;  J  111.154;  Pv 
ll.i'*;  Pv  lll.i'*  (expl.  "  as  enjojring  after  their  hearts' 
content  all  pleasures  they  can  wish  for  ").  • —  2.  giving 
kama,  i.  e.  benevolent,  fulfilling  people's  wishes;  satis- 
fying their  desires,  in  atthakfimini  devat.a  Sn  986. 
—  akamakamin  passionless,  dispassionate  Sn  1096, 
syn.  of  vftata^jha  without  desire  (cp.  Nd'  4). 

Kimnka  (adj.  -n.)  [c?.  Sk.  kamuka]  desiring,  loving,  fond 
of ;  a  sweetheart,  lover  J  v. 306 ;  Mhbv  3. 

K&meti  [den.  fr.  kama]  to  desire,  to  crave,  1 .  to  crave  for 
any  object  of  pleasure:  Th  1,  93;  J  111.154;  iv.167; 
v.480  ;  —  2.  to  desire  a  woman,  to  be  in  love  with 
D  1. 241  ;  M  11.40;  J  11.226;  V.425;  VI. 307,  326,  etc. — 
pp.  kimita  in  kamita-vatthu  the  desired  object  PvA 
119  :  VvA  122  ;  grd.  kimitabba  to  be  desired,  desirable 
PvA  16  (v.  1.  for  kafiila,  better).  73;  VvA  127;  and 
kimetabba  J.  v. 556  (  =  kamaQiya)  ;  ppr.  (kamai)) 
kamayamanaasa  So  766  ( —  icchamanassa,  etc.,  Nd>); 
J  VI.  1 72  =Nett  69. 


Kaya 


35 


Kaya 


Kira  [der.  probably  fr.  oi,  cinoti  to  heap  up.  cp.  nik^ya 
heaping  up,  accumulation  or  collection ;  Sk.  kaya] 
group,  heap,  collection,  aggregate,  body.  —  Definitions 
and  synonyms.  —  SnA  31  gives  the  foil,  synonyms  and 
similes  of  kaya:  kuti,  guha  (Sn  772).  deha,  sandeha 
(Dh  148  =Th  I.  20),  nSva  (Dh  3O9),  ratha  (S  iv.29.'). 
dhaja,  vammika  (M  1144),  kutika  (Th  i,  i);  and  at 
KhA  38  the  foil.  def. :  kaye  ti  satire,  sarirar)  hi  asuci- 
saAcayato  kucchitdnai)  vS.  kesadinai)  iyabhutato  kayo 
tj  vuccati.  ...  It  is  equivalent  to  deha:  S  1.27; 
PvA  10  ;  to  sarira  KhA  38  ;  PvA  63,  to  nikaya  (deva") 
D  111.264  :  ^"d  cp.  formula  of  jSti :  sattanarj  tamhi 
tamhi  sattanikaye  j4ti  .  .  .  Nd'  257. 

Literal  meaning. —  i.  mahajana-kaya  a  collection  of 
people,  a  crowd  Siv.191  ;  v.170;  VvA  78;  — bala°  a 
great  crowd  Sn  p.  105  ;  DhA  1.193.  ^9^-  —  -■  group  or 
division  :  satta  kaya  akat3,  etc.  (seven  eternal  groups 
or  principles)  D  i.sO^M  1.517-8  111.211  (in  Pakudha 
KaccAyana's  theory) ;  with  reference  to  groups  of  sen- 
sations or  sense-organs,  as  vedana-kaya,  saftiiS°,  vii\- 
fiSna".  phassa°.  etc.  S  111.60,  61  ;  D  111.243,  244  ;  tanha" 
D  IK. 244 ;  appl.  to  hatthi",  ratha",  patti°,  groups  of 
elephants,  carriages  or  soldiers  S  1.72.  —  A  good  idea 
of  the  extensive  meaning  of  kaya  may  be  gathered  from 
the  classification  of  the  7  kayas  at  J  11.91 ,  viz.  camma°, 
diru°,  loha°,  ayo°,  valuka°,  udaka",  phalaka".  or 
"  bodies "  (great  masses,  substances)  of  skin,  wood, 
copper,  iron,  sand,  water,  and  planks.  —  Var.  other 
comb"^:  Asura°  A  1.143  ;  D  111.7  ;  Abhassara"  ("  world 
of  radiance")  D  1.17  =  111.29.  84;  Deva°  S  1.27,  30; 
D  111.264  ("nikaya);  dibba  kaya  A  1143;  Tavatir)sa° 
D  III. 15. 

Applied  meaning. — I.  Kaya  under  the  physical 
aspect  is  an  aggregate  of  a  multiplicity  of  elements 
which  finally  can  be  reduced  to  the  four  "  great " 
elements,  viz.  earth,  water,  fire,  and  air  (D  1.55).  This 
"  heap."  in  the  valuation  of  the  Wise  (muni),  shares 
with  all  other  objects  the  qualities  of  such  elements, 
and  is  therefore  regarded  as  contemptible,  as  something 
which  one  has  to  get  rid  of.  as  a  source  of  impurity.  It 
is  subject  to  time  and  change,  it  is  built  up  and  kept 
alive  by  cravings,  and  with  death  it  is  disintegrated 
into  the  elements.  But  the  kamma  which  determined 
the  appearance  of  this  physical  body  has  naturally  been 
renewed  and  assumes  a  new  form.  II.  Kaya  under  the 
psychological  a.spect  is  the  seat  of  sensation  (Dhs  §§013- 
16).  and  represents  the  fundamental  organ  of  touch 
which  underUes  all  other  sensation.  Developed  only  in 
later  thought  DhsA.  3 1 1  cf .  Mrs.  Rhys  Davids.  Bud.  Psy. 
Ethics  Ivi.  fl. ;  Bud.  Psy.  143,  185  f. 

I.  (Physical). — (a)  Understanding  of  the  body  is 
attained  through  introspection  (sati).  In  the  group  of 
the  four  sati-palthanas,  the  foundations  of  introspection, 
the  recognition  of  the  true  character  of  "  body  "  comes 
first  (see  Vbh  103).  The  standing  formula  of  this 
recognition  is  kaye  kay&nupassi  .  .  .  contemplating 
body  as  an  accumulation,  on  which  follows  the  descrip- 
tion of  this  aggregate  :  "  he  sees  that  the  body  is  clothed 
in  skin,  full  of  all  kinds  of  dirty  matter,  and  that  in  this 
body  there  are  hair,  nails,  teeth."  etc  (the  enumera- 
tion of  the  32  akaras,  as  given  Kh  iii.).  The  conclu- 
sions drawn  from  this  mrditation  give  a  man  the 
right  attitude.  The  formula  occurs  frequently,  both  in 
full  and  abridged,  e.  g.  D  11.293,  294:  111.104,  141  ; 
A  iu.323=v.io9 ;  S  1v.1n_v.j7S;  Vbh  193,  194; 
Nett  83,  123;  with  slight  variation:  kaye  asubhanu- 
pass!  ...  A  III. 142  sq. ;  v.iog  (under  a.subhasai)i\a) ; 
it  81  ;  cp.  kSye  aniccinupassi  S  iv.211  ;  and  kayngat.^ 
sati.  —  This  accumulation  is  described  in  another 
formula  with:  ayar)  .  .  .  kayo  rupi  catum(m)aha- 
bhQtiko  mSia-pettika-sambhavo  odana-kiimmas'  upa- 
cayo.  etc.  "  this  lx>Jy  has  form  (i.  e.  is  material,  vi.stblc), 
is  born  from  mother  and  father,  is  a  heap  of  gruel  and 
sour  milk,  is  subject  to  constant  dressing  and  tentling, 
to  breaking  up  and  decay,"  etc.,   with  inferences  D 


l.55=S  111.207;  S  11.94;  IV. 194;  V.282,  371) ;  D  1.76, 
209;  M  1. 144,  500;  II. 17;  A  IV. 386  =  5  IV  83. 

(b)  Various  quahtief  und  fuvcliovs  of  the  n\.TltTi;\l 
body.  As  trunk  of  the  body  (opposed  to  pakkha  and 
sisa)  S  11.231  ;  also  at  Pv  1.8^;  as  depending  on  nourish- 
ment (ahara-Ubitika,  etc.)  Sv.64  ;  A  11. 145  (with  tanhn, 
mana,  methuna) ;  as  needing  attention:  see  'pariha- 
rika.  As  savii^fianaka,  having  consciousness  A  iv.53  = 
S  11.252=5  111.80,  103,  136,  169;  cp.  aj-u  usnia  ca 
vifii^anai)  yada  kayarj  jahant'  imar)  S  m.143.  As  in 
need  of  breathing  assasa-passasa  S  v. 330,  336  ;  as  tired, 
fatigued  (kilanta-kaya)  kilanta-kaya  kilanta.-citta  tc 
deva  tamha  kaya  cavanti  "  tired  in  body,  tired  in  mind 
these  gods  fall  out  of  this  assembly  "  (D  1.20  ;  iii.325t) ; 
in  other  connection  PvA  43  ;  sec  also  kilanta.  kayo 
kilanto  D  111255  sq.  ;  =A  iv.332  :  S  v.317;  M  1.1  lO; 
jinnassa  me  .  .  .  kSyo  na  paleti  Sn  1144;  atura-kayo 
5  111.  I  (cittai)  anSturar))  ;  paripunna-k"  suruci  sujato, 
etc.,  with  a  perfect  body  (of  the  Buddha)  Sn  548  = 
Th  I,  818;  cp.  maha-k"  (of  Brahmins)  Sn  298.  The 
body  of  a  Buddha  is  said  to  bo  endowed  with  the  32 
signs  of  a  great  man  :  Bhagavato  kaye  dvattir)sa  maha- 
purisa-lakkhanani  .  .  .  Sn  p.  107,  cp.  549.  TheTatha- 
gata  is  said  to  be  dhamma-kayo  "  author  and  speaker 
of  Doctrine,"  in  the  same  sense  Brahma-kayo  "  the  best 
body  "  (i.  e.  of  Doctrine)  D  111.84  {Dial.  iii.  81). 

(c)  Valuation  0/  physical  body.  From  the  contemp- 
lating of  its  true  character  (kaySnupassi)  follows  its 
estimation  as  a  transient,  decaying,  and  repulsive  object. 
—  kaye  anicc'  anupassi  S  iv.211  (and  vay'  Snupassi, 
nirodh'  anupassi).  so  also  asubh4nupassi  It  81  ; 
kayafi  ca  bhindantar)  iiatva  It  69  ;  evagdhammo  (i.  c. 
a  heap  of  changing  elements)  A  111.324  ;  acirarj  vat' 
ayai)  kayo  pafhavig  adhisessati  chuddho  apetavinfiano 
niratthar)  va  kalingarar)  Dh  41.  pittai)  scnihaii  ca 
vamati  kayamha  Sn  198.  As  bahu-dukkho  bahu- 
adinavo  A  v.  109  ;  as  anicca  dukkha.  etc.  M  1.5(10  ;  11.17  ; 
kayena  attiyamanS  harayamana  S  iv.62  ;  v. 320 ; 
dissati  imassa  kayassa  acayo  pi  apacayo  pi  adanani  pi 
nikkhepanam  pi  S  11.94.  —  This  body  is  eaten  by  crows 
and  vultures  after  its  death  :  S  v. 371).  Represented  as 
puti°  foul  S  1.131  ;  III. 120.  —  Bdhgh.  at  Vism  240 
defines  kaya  as  "  catu-mahabhutika  piiti-kaya"  (cp. 
similar  passages  on  p.  367  :  patthaddho  bhavati  kayo, 
putiko  bhavati  kayo). 

(d)  Similes. — Out  of  the  great  number  of  epithets 
(adhivacanani)  and  comparisons  only  a  few  can  be 
mentioned  (cp.  above  under  def.  &  syn.) :  The  body  is 
compared  to  an  abscess  (ganda)  S  iv.83  =  A  iv.386  ;  a 
city  (nagara)  S  iv.194  ;  a  cart  (rath.n)  S  iv.292  ;  an  ant- 
hill (vammika)  M  1.144  ;  all  in  reference  to  its  consisting 
of  the  four  fundamental  elements,  cp.  also :  phcn' 
flpamai)  kiyai)  imai)  viditva  "  knowing  that  the  body 
is  like  froth "  Dh  46 ;  kumbh'  flpamai)  kayat)  imai) 
viditva  nag?r'  flpamar)  cittaij  idar)  thapetva  Dh  40: 
the  body  is  as  fragile  as  a  water-pot. 

(c)  Dissolution  of  the  body  is  expressed  in  the  stan- 
dard phrase:  kayassa  bhcda  param  marana  .  .  .,  J.  e. 
after  death  .  .  .  upon  which  usually  follows  the  mention 
of  one  of  the  gatis,  the  destinies  which  the  new  kaya  has 
to  experience,  e.  g.  D  1.82,  107,  143,  162.  245,  247.  252  ; 
111.96,  97,  146,  i«i.  235;  M  1.22  ;  5  1.94  ;  ni.2(i  ;  Dh 
140  ;  It  12,  14  ;  J  1. 152  ;  PvA  27.  etc.,  etc.     Cp.  also  iv. 

IJ.  {Psychological). — As  the  scat  of  feeling,  k.lya  is 
the  fifth  in  the  enumeration  of  the  senses  (ayatanani). 
It  is  ajjhattika  as  sense  (i.  e.  subjective)  and  its  object 
is  the  tangible  (photthabba).  Tlic  contact  between 
subject  and  object  consists  either  in  touching  (i>husilv5) 
or  in  sensing  (viili^cyya).  The  formulas  vary,  but  are 
in  essence  the  same  all  through,  e.  g.  kSyavififlcyya 
photthabba  D  1.245;  kSyena  photlhabbao  phusitv.l 
D  111.226,  250.  269;  M  1.33:  n.42  ;  S  IV. 104.  112; 
kayena  phusitv.l  A  v.ii  :  k5yo  c'  cva  photthabba  ca 
D  111.102.  Best  to  be  grouped  here  is  an  application  of 
kaya  in  the  sense  of  the  self  as  experiencing  a  great  joy  ; 


Kaya 


36 


Kaya 


the  whole  being,  the  "  inner  sense."  or  heart.  This 
realization  of  intense  happiness  (such  as  it  is  while  it 
lasts),  piti-sukha,  is  the  result  of  the  four  stages  of 
meditation,  and  as  such  it  is  alwajrs  mentioned  after 
the  jhJnas  in  the  formula :  so  imai)  eva  kSyai)  viveka- 
jena  piti-sukhena  abhisandeti  ..."  His  very  body 
does  he  so  pervade  with  the  joy  and  ease  bom  of  detach- 
ment from  worldliness  "  D  1.73  sq.=M  1.277;  A  11.41, 
etc.  —  A  similar  context  is  that  in  which  kSya  is  repre- 
sented as  possaddha,  calmed  down,  i.  e.  in  a  state  which 
is  free  from  worldly  attachment  (vivekaja).  This 
"  peace  "  of  the  body  (may  be  translated  as  "  my  senses, 
my  spirits  "  in  this  connection)  flows  out  of  the  peace 
of  the  mind  and  this  is  bom  out  of  the  joy  accompanying 
complete  satisfaction  (pamuditS)  in  attaining  the  desired 
end.  The  formula  is  pamuditassa  piti  jayati  pitima- 
nassa  kiyo  passambhati,  passaddhakayo  sukhai)  vedeti, 
snkhiao  cittai)  samS.dhiyati  D  111.241,  288;  S  iv.351  ; 
M  1.37:  A  III. 21,  285;  IV. 176;  V.3,  333;  Vbh  227. — 
Similarly  :  pamudit&ya  piti  jSyati,  pitdman&ya  kJyo  p°, 
passadhakiyi  sukhai)  ved°  Vin  1.294  ((^P-  Vif-  Texts 
11.224 :  "  all  my  frame  will  be  at  peace,"  or  "  indi- 
viduality "  ;  see  note)  passaddhakiya-sankhSxa  men- 
tioned at  A  V.29  sq.  is  one  of  the  ten  ariya-vasH,  the 
noblest  conditions.  A  qnasi-analogy  between  kAya 
and  k5ma  is  apparent  from  a  number  of  other  passages : 
k£ya-chando  -"sneho  -"anvayati  pahiyati  M  1.500  ;  aj- 
jhattatl  ca  bahiddha  ca  k&ye  chandar)  virSjaye  Sn  203  ; 
kaye  avigata-rigo  hoti  (kSme,  rilpe)  D  iu.238=A 
in. 249  ;  madhurakajclto  vijra  kayo  S  in. 106;  A  111.69. 

III.  {Ethical). — K5ya  is  one  of  the  three  channels  by 
which  a  man's  personality  is  connected  with  his  en- 
vironment &  by  which  his  character  is  judged,  vir. 
action,  the  three  being  kJya,  vac!  (v5ca)  and  manas. 
These  three  kammantas,  activities  or  agents,  form  the 
three  subdivisions  of  the  sila,  the  rules  of  conduct. 
KSya  is  the  first  and  most  conspicuons  agent,  or  the 
principle  of  action  car'  Uoxh*',  character  in  its  pregnant 
sense. 

Kaya  as  one  of  a  triad. — Its  nsual  combination  is  in 
the  formula  mentioned,  and  as  such  found  in  the  whole 
of  the  Pali  Canon.  But  there  is  also  another  combina- 
tion, found  only  in  the  older  texts,  viz.  kayena  vacaya 
uda  cetasa :  yaii  ca  karoti  kayena  vacaya  uda  cetasa 
tat)  hi  tassa  sakag  hoti  taft  ca  adaya  gaccbati  S  1.93  yo 
dhammacari  kayena  vacaya  uda  cetasa  idh  eva  nam 
pasaQsanti  pacca  sagge  pamodati  S  1.102.  —  So  also  at 
A  1.63  ;  Sn  232.  Besides  in  formula  arakkhitena 
kayena  a°  v5c5ya  a°  cittena  S  11.231  =271  ;  rv.112.  — 
With  su-  and  duccarita  the  comb"  is  extremely  fre- 
quent, e.  g.  S  1.71,  72  ;  M  1.22,  etc.,  etc.  In  other  comb, 
we  have  kaya-  (v°.,  m.°)  kamma,  moneyya.  soceyya,  etc. 
—  k°.  v°.  m°.  bigsati  S  1.165  ;  sarjsappati  A  v. 289  sq.  ; 
kiye  (v°.  m°.)  sati  kSya-saficetana-hetu  uppajjati  S 
11.39  sq. ;  The  variations  of  k-  in  the  ethics  of  the 
Dhamma  under  this  view  of  k°.  v°.  m°.  are  manifold,  all 
based  on  the  fundamental  distinctions  between  good 
and  bad,  all  being  the  raison  d'etre  of  kamma  :  yai)  .  .  . 
etarahi  kammai)  karoti  kayena  v.  m.  idai)  vuccati 
navakammai)  S  iv.132.  —  Passages  with  reference  to 
good  works  are  e.  g.  D  ill. 245  ;  A  1.151  ;  v. 302  sq. ;  (see 
also  Kamma  11. 2  b.  c).  —  With  reference  to  evil : 
S  III. 241,  247 ;  A  1. 201  ;  kin  nu  kayena  vacaya  mana,sa 
dukkatar)  katai)  Pv  ii.i'and  passim.  Assutava  puthnj- 
jano  tihi  thanehi  miccha  patipajjati  kayena  v.  m. 
S  11.151  :  p5par)  na  kayira  vacasa  manasa  kayena  v?. 
kincana  sabbaloke  S  1.12=31;  yassa  kayena  vacaya 
manasa  n'atthi  dukkatai)  sagvutap  tlhi  fhanehi,  tam 
ahat)  brumi  brahmanai)  Dh  391  =Nett  183.  Kayena 
sar)varo  sadhu  sadhu  vacaya  sar)varo  manasa  sagvaro 
sadhu  sidhu  sabbattha  sarjvaro  Dh  361=8  1.73  = 
Miln  399  ;  ye  ca  kayena  v.  m.  ca  susar)vuta  na  te  Mara- 
vasdnuga,  na  te  Mirassa  paccagu  S  1.104  ;  vacanurak- 
khi  manasa  susagvuto  kayena  ca  aknsalai)  na  kayira 
Dh  281  =Nett  183. 


Kdya  as  one  of  a  dyad:  vaca  and  kaya:  S  1. 1 72 
(°gutta)  M  1.461  (rakkhita  and  a°) ;  Pv  1.2'  ("saiSiiata 
and  opp.) ;  Vism  28  (k°-vaci-kamma) ;  PvA  98. 

Kdya  alone  as  a  collective  expression  for  the  three: 
A  1.54;  Dh  259.  391  ;  Sn  206,  407;  kaye  avitarago 
M  i.ioi  ;  A  III. 249 ;  iv.461  sq. ;  °-samacara  S  v.354; 
kayar)  panidhaya  Ps  1.175;  Vbh  244  =  252;  bhavita" 
and  a°  M  1.239  ;  A  1.250  ;  in.  106  sq.,cp. :  kaya-ppakopai) 
rakkhey)ra.  kayena  sagvuto  siya  kayaduccaritaj)  hitva, 
kayena  sucaritai)  care  Dh  231.  AhiQsaka  ye  munayo 
niccai)  kayena  sarjvuta  Dh  225. 

Kaya  in  comb"  with  citta  :  tbito  va  kiyo  hoti  (I^tai) 
cittai)  .  .  .  S  v. 74 ;  anikattba-kAyo  nikattba-citto  A 
H.137;  saraddha-kayo  sankilittba-citto  A  v.93=95  = 
97 ;  bhavita-kayo,  "silo,  "citto,  "pafiilo  S  iv.  1 1 1  ; 
A  iv.iii;  V.42  sq.  Apakassa  kayag  apakassa  cittai) 
S  n.198.  Kaya-citta-passaddhi.  etc.  Dhs  §§  29-51. 
In  these  six  couples  (or  yugalas)  later  Abhidhamma 
distinguished  k3ya  as^th-;  cetasikas  (mental  properties, 
or  the  vedana,  safUa  and  sankhara  khandhas).  body 
being  excluded.  Cpd.  96.  See  also  comb"  kilanta- 
kaya,  kilanta-citta  under  kilamati. 

IV.  (  Various). — Kayena  (i.  e.  "  visibly  ")  ailfiamaii- 
&ai)  passitui)  A  11.61  ;  as  nanatta°  and  ekatta°  at  A  iv.39 
=  Nd'  570.  The  relation  between ru^a-Aaya  ( =catuma- 
habhutika),  and  nama-kaya,  the  mental  compound 
(=  vedana  sailiia,  etc.)  is  discussed  at  Nett  77,  78.  and 
Ps  1. 183  sq.,  see  also  S  n.24.  K.  is  anatta,  i.  e.  k.  has 
no  soul  A  V.109;  S  IV.  1 66.  n'ayar)  kayo  tumhakat) 
n'api  paresai],  purapai)  idar)  kammai)  ..."  neither  is 
this  IxKly  yours,  nor  anyone  else's :  it  is  (the  appear- 
ance of)  former  karma"  S  11.64,  65=Nd*  680.  Dissa- 
manena  kayena  and  upaddha-dissamanena  S  1.156. — 
Manomaya-UAya  a  body  made  by  the  mind  (cp.  VvA  10 
and  DA  i.i  10,  120,  222)  according  to  Bdhgh  only  at  the 
time  of  jhana  S  v. 282  sq. ;  manomaya  piti-bhakkha 
sayaopabha  D  1.17=  VvA  10;  manomayai)  kayai) 
abhinimminaya  .  .  .  D  1.77 ;  m°  sabbanga-paccangi 
D  1.34,  77,  186,  195.  —  Under  the  control  of  psychic 
powers  (iddhi)  :  kayena  va  sagvatteti  he  does  as  he  likes 
with  his  body.  i.  e.  he  walks  on  water,  is  ubiquitous,  etc. 
(yava  brahmaloka  pi :  even  up  to  heaven)  S  v. 265  = 
D  1.78  =A  1. 170  :  see  also  S  v. 283,  284.  —  In  the  various 
stages  of  Saysdra  ;  kayar)  nikkhipati  he  lays  down  his 
(old)  body  S  iv.60,  400  ;  cp.  S  111.241  (ossattha-kaya) ; 
referring  to  continuous  change  of  body  during  day  and 
night  (of  a  Peti)  Pv  n.i2i*. 

-anga  a  limb  of  the  body,  kay'angag  vac'angai)  va  na 
kopenti  :  they  remain  motionless  and  speechless  (ref.  to 
the  bhikkhus  begging)  J  111.354;  DhsA  93.  240;  -ftnu- 
passin  in  comb"  kaye  kayanupassi  "  realizing  in  the 
body  an  aggregate  "  D  11.94,  'OO-  291  sq.  ;  D  111.58, 
77,  141.  221,  276;  M  1.56;  A  1.39.  296;  11.256;  111.449; 
IV.3C0,  457  sq. ;  S  IV. 21 1  ;  v.g.  75,  298,  329  sq. ;  Vbh 
193  sq. ;  236 ;  see  also  above.  Der. :  "anupassana 
Ps.  1. 178,  184;  II. 152,  163,  232;  "passita  Nett.  123; 
-ayatana  the  sense  of  touch  D  in. 243,  280,  290  ;  Dhs 
585,  613,  653.  783; — indriya  same  D  in. 239 ;  Dhs  585, 
613,  972  ;  -ujjukata  straightness  of  body  (+ citta",  of 
thought)  Dhs  53.  277.  330;  Vism  466;  Bdhd  16,  20. 
-Opaga  going  to  a  (new)  body  S  11.24  ;  -kamma  "  bodily 
action,"  deed  performed  by  the  body  in  contradis- 
tinction to  deeds  by  speech  or  thought  (see  above) 
D  1.250;  III. 191,  245,  279;  M  1.415;  111.206;  A  1.104  ; 
III. 6,  9,  141  sq. ;  V.289  ;  Th  2.  277  ;  Ps  n.195  ;  Dhs  981, 
1C06 ;  Vbh  208,  321,  366 ;  Pug  41  ;  Bdhd  69 ;  DhsA  68, 
77,  344.  -kammaftflata  wieldiness,  alertness  of  the 
bodily  senses  included  under  namakaya  Dhs  46,  277, 
326.  -kammanta=  "kamma,  in  comb,  "sampatti  and 
"sandosa  A  v.292,  294,  297;  M  1.17.  -kali  "the  mis- 
fortune of  having  a  body  "  =this  miserable  body  Th  2. 
458,  501  ;  ThA  282,  291  ;  -kasava  bodily  impurity  or 
depravity  A  1.112;  -gata  "relating  to  the  body," 
always  combined  with  sati  in  the  same  sense  as  °anu- 
paisin  (see  above)  S  1.188;  M.  in. 92  ;  A  1.44;  Sn  34c 


Kaya 


37 


Kara 


(cp.  SnA  343);  Th  i.  468,  1225;  J  1.394;  Dh  293  = 
Nett  39;  Dh  299;  Miln  248,  336,  393;  Vism  iii,  197. 
240  sq.  -gantha  bodily  tie  or  fetter  (binding  one  to 
sagsira),  of  which  there  are  four :  abhijjhcl,  byapida, 
silabbata-paramisa,  idai)-sacc^bhimvesa  D  111.230  = 
S  v.59=Dhs  ii35=Vbh  374;  cp.  Mrs.  Rh.  D.,  Dhs. 
trsl.  p.  304  ;  — gandha  spelling  for  "gantha  at  Nett  1 1 5- 
119 ;  -gutta  one  who  guards  his  body,  i.  e.  controls  his 
action  (  +  vacigutta)  S  i.i72=Sn  74;  -gutti  the  care 
or  protection  of  the  body  Vin  1.295;  J  11162  ;  -citta 
body  and  mind :  °dbddha  physical  and  mental  disease 
J  iv.ib6;  see  other  comb"^  above;  -daha  fever  Vin 
1.214;  -tapana  chastisement  of  body,  curbing  one's 
material  desires,  asceticism  PvA  98.  -thama  physical 
strength  J  111.114;  -daratha  bodily  distress  J  v.397 ; 
VI. 295  ;  -dalha  bodily  vigour  Vin  11.76,  313;  -dukkha 
bodily  pain  (  +  ceto°)  M  111.288;  -duccarita  misconduct 
by  the  body,  evil  deeds  done  through  the  instrumen- 
tality of  the  body  (cp.  °kamma)  D  111.52,  96,  in,  214 ; 
A  1.48  ;  Dh  231  ;  It  54,  58  ;  Dhs  300,  1305  ;  Bdhd  16,  20  ; 
-dutihulla  unchastity  Th  i,  114;  -dvara  the  channel  or 
outlet  of  bodily  senses  J  1.276;  iv.14;  VvA  73;  DhA 
IV. 85  ;  Bdhd  69 ;  -dhatu  the  "  element  "  of  body,  i.  e. 
the  faculty  of  touch,  sensibility  Dhs  613;  Kvu  12; 
-pakopa  blameworthy  conduct,  misbehaviour  (  +  vaci°, 
mano°)  Dh  23i=DhA  330;  -pacalalca  (nt.)  shaking 
or  swaying  the  body,  "  swaggering  "  Vin  11.213 :  -pa{i- 
baddha  i.  adj.  (of  the  breath),  dependent  on,  or  con- 
nected with  the  body  S  iv.293  ;  attached  or  bound  to 
the  body  J  111.377;  v.254  ;  2.  m.  an  article  of  dress 
worn  on  the  body  Vin  111.123,  iv.214;  -payoga  the 
instrumentality  or  use  of  the  body  DA  1.72  =DhsA  98  ; 
-pariyantika  limited  by  the  body,  said  of  vedana,  sen- 
sation S  v.320=A  11.198;  -pariharika  tending  or  pro- 
tecting the  body  D  i.7i=A  ii.209  =  Pug  58;  Vism  65 
(civara) ;  DA  1.207 ;  -pasada  clearness  of  the  sense  of 
touch  or  sense  in  general  DhsA  306 ;  Bdhd  62,  66,  74 ; 
cp.  Dhs.  trsl.  p.  173",  198";  -p&ssaddhi  serenity  or 
quietude  of  the  senses  S  iv.125  (cp.  iv.351  and  above) ; 
V.66,  104;  Dhs  40,  277,  320;  DhsA  130;  Bdhd  16,  19, 
29 ;  -pagabbhiya  "  body-forwardness "  immodesty, 
lasciviousness,  gener.  said  of  women  J  n.32  ;  v. 449 ; 
-pagabbhiniya  same  J  1.288  ;  -paguiiSata  good  condition 
of  the  mental  faculties,  fitness  of  sen.se,  opp.  kaya- 
gelaflfia,  apathy  Dhs  46,  277,  326 ;  Vism  466 ;  Bdhd 
16,  20,  157;  -phandita  (nt.)  bodily  activity  J  111.25; 
•baddha  fastened  to  the  body,  appl.  to  robes  DA  1.207  ; 
-bandhana  a  girdle  or  waistband  Vin  1.46,  51  ;  11. 118, 
'35.  177.  213.  266;  M  1.237;  -bala  physical  strength 
PvA  30 ;  -bhavana  meditation  or  training  with  regard 
to  action  D  111.219;  M  1.237;  cp-  Miln  85;  -macchera 
"body-selfishness,"  pampering  the  body  Th  i,  1033; 
-muduta  pliability  of  sense  =  °kammaflnata  Dhs  44, 
277.  324:  Bdhd  16,  20,  157;  -muni  a  sage  with  regard 
to  action  It  56 ;  -moneyya  the  true  wisdom  regarding 
the  use  of  the  body  as  an  instrument  of  action  It  56 , 
67 ;  D  in. 220  ;  A  1.273  ;  Nd*  514  ;  -ratha  the  "  carriage- 
like "  body  J  VI. 253 ;  -lahuta  buoyancy  of  sense  = 
"muduta,  same  loci ;  -vanka  crookedness  of  action 
A  1. 1 12  ;  -vikara  cliange  of  position  of  the  body  J  111.354  : 
-vijambhana  alertness  DhA  iv.113;  -viAflatti  intima- 
tion by  body,  i.  e.  merely  by  one's  appesirance,  appl. 
chiefly  to  the  begging  bhikkhu  Dhs  585,  636.  654,  844 ; 
DhsA  8>,  301  ;  Miln  229,  230  ;  Vism  448;  Bdhd  69,  70  ; 
-TiAfiana  consciousness  by  means  of  touch,  sensory 
consciousness  D  111.243  ;  Dhs  556,  585,  651.  685,  790; 
Miln  59  ;  Vbh  180  ;  °dhatu  element  of  touch-conscious- 
ness Dhs  560  ;  Vbh  88  ;  Kvu  12  ;  -viflfleyya  to  be  per- 
ceived by  the  sense  of  touch  (-(-photthabba,  see  above) 
D  1.245;  11.281;  111.234;  M  1.85,  144;  Dhs  589.  967. 
1095;  Vbh  14;  Kvu  210;  Miln  270;  -vipphandana 
throbbing  of  the  body,  bodily  suffusion,  appl"*  to 
"vinnatti  Bdhd  69,  70  ;  DhsA  323  ;  -viveka  seclusion  of 
the  body,  hermitism  J  1.289;  DhsA  165;  -vCkpakasa  ^ 
"viveka   D    111.285    (-t-citta"   "singleness"   of    heart); 


-veyyavacca  menial  duties  J  1.12  ;  "kara  a  servant 
J  11.334;  -veyyavatika  same  J  vi.418;  Sn  p.  104; 
DhA  1.27;  °kamma  id.  J  v. 317  ( =  veyySvacca)  DhsA 
160 ;  .saijsagga  bodily  contact,  sexual  intercourse 
Vin  111.  12 1,  190  ;  J  VI. 566  ;  >sakkhin  he  who  has  realized 
and  gained  the  final  truth  concerning  the  body  (cp. 
"anupassin)  D  111.105,  254;  M  1.478  =  Pug  14,  29; 
M  11.113;  '"•45;  A  '-74;  "8;  IV. 10,  451;  V.23 ;  Ps 
11.52,  62;  Nett  190;  Kvu  58;  Vism  93,  387.  -san- 
khara  the  material  aggregate,  substratum  of  body 
Vin  111.71;  S  11.40;  III. 125;  IV.293;  A  1.122;  11.158,' 
231;  Ps  1. 184,  186;  Vism  530.  -sangaha  control  of 
body  (-t-citta°)  Nett  91  ;  -saficetana  (-hetu)  ground 
(for  the  rise  of),  material,  i.  e.  impure  thoughts  A  11.157  ; 
Vism  530  (-f-vaci°,  mano").  -samacara  (good)  conduct 
as  regards  one's  actions  D  11.279  (-t-  vaci")  M  1.272  sq. ; 
11.113;  "'•45;  S  V.354;  A  111.186  sq.  -sampHana 
crushing  the  body  (of  dukkha)  Nett  29  ;  -samphassa  the 
sense  of  touch  (see  &yatana)  D  in. 243  ;  S  v.351  ;  Dhs 
585,  616,  651,  684;  °ja  arisen  through  touch  or  sen- 
sibility D  111.244  ;  ^^  445.  558  ;  -sucarita  good  conduct 
in  action,  as  one  of  the  three  "kamnxclm  (vaci°,  mano"; 
D  111.52,  96,  111,  169,  215;  It  55,  59.  99,  Dhs  1306; 
-suci  purity  of  body,  i.  e.  of  action  (-fvaci",  ceto") 
A  1.273  ;  It  55;  -soceyya  purification  of  body  (  +  vaci°. 
mano")  D  111.219;  A  1.271  ;  v  264,  266;  It  55. 

K&yika  (adj.)  [fr.  kSya]  1.  belonging  to  the  body,  i.  e. 
felt  by  the  body  (experienced  by  the  senses),  or  resulting 
from  the  body,  i.e.  done  by  the  body  ( =  acted  as  opposed 
to  spoken  or  thought),  sukhar)  physical  happiness 
(opp.  cetasika")  S  v.209 ;  A  1.81;  dukkhai)  D  11.306; 
M  1.302  (opp.  cetasikar));  k£yikai)  (sc.  dhammar)) 
sikkhati  to  teach  the  conduct  of  body  (opp.  vacasikai)) 
Vin  11.248.  In  comb,  with  vJcasika  also  at  S  1.190; 
Pug  21  ;  Vism  18  (of  anScara) ;  PvA  119  (of  sagyama, 
control)  Shhp  55  ;  Bdhd  26,  134  ;  referring  to  diff.  kinds 
of  amusements  Nd'  2 19  =  SnA  86.  2.  -°  (of  devas) 
belonging  to  the  company  of — :  °  D  1.220  ;  gandhabba" 
PvA  119. 

K&yOra  &  K&ynra  [see  also  keyiira,  which  is  the  only 
form  in  Sk.]  1.  an  ornamental  bracket  or  ring  worn  on 
the  upper  arm  (b&h'ilankara  Pv ;  bhuj"  Vv)  or  neck 
(glvSya  pilandhana  J  111.437) ;  a  bracelet  or  necklace 
Vin  11.106  ;  J  III. 437  ;  iv.92  ;  PV  111.9^;  Vv  36'.  —  2.  adj. 
as  sakayura  rattha  having  the  insignia  "  regis  "  J 
v. 2  89  =  486. 

K&yOria  (adj.)  [fr.  last]  wearing  bracelets  Pv  111.9''. 

Ear — secondary  root  of  karoti,  in  denom.  and  intensive 

function   in    kilra,   kSraka,    kSrapa,   kSrin,   kareti  and 

their  derivations. 

K&ra  [fr.  kar-,  cp.  Vedic  k5ra  song  of  praise,  which  is, 
however,  derived  fr.  kf  =  kir  to  praise  ;  also  Vedic  "kara 
in  brahma",  fr.  kr]  i.  abs.  (a)  deed,  sei-vice,  act  of 
mercy  or  worship,  homage :  kara-panpaka  J  vi.24 
(vegetable  as  oblation) ;  appako  pi  kato  karo  devflpa- 
pattig  avahati  "  even  a  small  gift  of  mercy  brings  about 
rebirth  among  the  gods  "  PvA  6.  -karaka  one  who 
performs  a  religious  duty  D  1.61  (  =  DA  1.170).  (b)  doing, 
manner,  way :  yena  karena  akattha  tena  k"  pavatta- 
manai)  phalai)  "  as  you  have  done  so  will  be  the  fruit  " 
PvA  45.  —  2.  (-")  (a)  the  production  or  application  of, 
i.  e.  the  state  or  quality  of  ...  :  atta"  one's  own  state 
=  ahat)  kara,  individuality  ;  para"  the  personality  of 
others  A  111.337;  citti"  reflection,  thought  PvA  26;  see 
e.  g.  andha"  darkness,  sak"  homage,  etc.  —  balakkarena 
forcibly  PvA  68.  —  (b)  as  ttg.  the  item,  i.  e.  particle, 
letter,  sound  or  word,  e.  g.  ma-kara  the  letter  m  PvA 
52  ;  ca-kira  the  particle  ca  PvA  15  ;  sa-kara  the  sound 
sa  SnA  23.  —  (c)  (adj.  -n.)  [cp.  kara]  one  who  does, 
hantilcs  or  deals  with  :  ayakara  iron-smith  Miln  331. 

K&rft  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  kara]  confinement,  captivity,  jail,  in 
"bhedaka  cora  a  thief  who  has  broken  out  of  jail  Vin 
1.75. 


Kiraka 


38 


Kala 


Kiraka  (usually  ■°)  the  doer  (of) :  Vin  11.22 1  (capu-capu°) ; 
sasana"  he  who  does  according  to  (my)  advice  Sn  445  ; 
Bdhd  83  sq. ;  —  f .  karika :  veyyavacca"  a  servant 
PvA  65  (text  reads  °ta) ;  as  n.  the  performance  of  (-"), 
service ;  dukkara-karika  the  performance  of  evil  deeds 
S  1.103:  Th  2,  413  (=ThA  267).  -agga-karika  first 
test,  sample  Vin  111.80. 

KiraQa  (nt.)  [in  meaning  i  represented  in  later  Sk.  by 
kirana  f.,  in  meaning  2  =Sk.  karana  nt.,  equivalent  to 
prakfti,    natural    form,    constituent,    reason,    cause]. 

1.  — (a)  a  deed,  action,  performance,  esp.  an  act  im- 
posed or  inflicted  .pon  somebody  by  a  higher  authority 
(by  the  king  as  representative  of  justice  or  by  kamma  : 
M  III.  181  ;  see  kamma  11  3.A  b.)  as  an  ordeal,  a  feat  or 
punishment:  a  labour  or  task  in  the  sense  of  the  12 
labours  of  Heracles  or  the  labours  of  Hades,  karanai) 
karapeti  "  he  makes  somebody  perform  the  task." 
Pass,  k&ranar)  or  kJrana  kariyati.  Thus  as  a  set  of 
five  tasks  or  purgatory  obligations  under  the  name  of 
pailcavidha-bandhana  "  the  group  of  five "  (not,  as 
Warren  trsl.  p.  257  "  inflict  on  him  the  torture  called 
the  fivefold  pinion "),  a  means  of  punishment  in 
Niraya  (q.  v.  under  paiica).  Not  primarily  torture 
(Rh.  Davids,  Miln  trsl.  1.254,  ^"'J  others  with  wrong 
derivation  from  kr^tati).  At  DhA  111.70  these  punish- 
ments are  comprehended  under  the  term  dasa-dukkha- 
karapclni  (the  ten  punishments  in  misery) ;  the  meaning 
"  punishment "  also  at  J  iv.87  (tantarajjukai)  k'g 
katvS),  whereas  at  J  vi.4i6  k.  is  directly  paraphrased  by 
"  maraija,"  as  much  as  "  killing."  Often  spelt  karaoa, 
q.  v. ;  the  spelling  karana  (as  f.)  at  Miln  185  seems  to 
be  a  i-'ter  spelling  for  k&rapai).  See  karapa  for  further 
reference.  —  Kir)  kJrariai)  ajja  kJressati  "  what  task 
wi'1  he  impose  on  me  to-day  ?"  A  v. 324  ;  as  paflca- 
vidhabandhana  K°  A  1.141.  PvA  251,  Nd*  304"'-  —  As 
adj.  "karana  in  darupa°  "  being  obliged  to  go  through 
the  dreadful  trial  "  PvA  221.  —  (b)  duty  obligation,  in 
karao'  Akarana  (pi.)  duties  great  and  small  DhA  1.385. 
Cp.  also  karaiiar)  karoti  to  try  M  1.444.  —  (c)  a  trick 
(i.  e.  a  duty  imposed  by  a  higher  authority  through 
training)  J  11.325  (Jnaflja") ;  Miln  201  (akasa-gamana°). 

2.  — (a)  acting,  action  as  (material)  cause:  k°-bhi3ta 
being  the  cause  of  .  .  .  PvA  15; — (b)  (intellectual) 
cause,  reason  Miln  150  ;  DhA  1.389  ;  esp.  as  -"  :  arodana" 
the  reason  for  not  crying  PvA  63  ;  asocana"  same,  ibid. 
62;  5gamana°  the  reason  for  coming  (here)  ibid.  81, 
106.  =  pariyatti,  DliA.  36.  =  attha,  SA  on  1.215,  SnA. 
I.238^nstr.  karanena  by  necessity,  needs  PvA  195  ; 
tena  k°  therefore  ibid.  40  —  abl.  karana  by  means  of, 
through,  by  (=hetu  or  nissiya)  PvA  27:  imasma  k° 
therefore  PvA  40  ;  karanat^ha  (expl.  as  attha-karana 
Nd')  for  the  purpose  of  some  object  or  advantage 
Sn  75;  opp.  nikkarana  from  unselfishness  ibid. — saka- 
rana  (adj.)  with  good  reason  (of  vacana)  PvA  109. 

K&ra^ika  [der.  fr.  prec]  the  meaning  ought  to  be  "  one 
who  is  under  a  certain  obligation  "  or  "  one  who  dis- 
penses certain  obligations."  In  usu"  S  11.257  however 
used  simply  in  the  sense  of  making :  arrow-maker, 
fletcher.     Perhaps  the  reading  should  be  "kiraka. 

K&raQ^ava'  [of  uncertain  etym.,  cp.  karapda]  chaff,  offal, 
sweepings,  fig.  dirt,  impurity:  yava°  A  iv.169  (chaff); 
samaoa"  ibid.  —  In  passage  karandavag  niddhamatha, 
kasambui)  apakassatha  A  iv.172— Sn  281=  Miln  414 
trsH  by  Rh.  Davids  Miln  trsl.  11. 31)3  "  get  rid  of  filth, 
put  aside  rubbish  from  you,"  cxpl.  SnA  311  by  kaca- 
vara  (q.  v.).  Rh.  D's  note'  loc.  cit.  is  to  be  modified 
according  to  the  parallel  passages  just  given. 

Kara^^t^va'  [cp.  Sk.  karaijdava]  a  sort  of  duck  Vv  35' 
(expH  as  also  by  Haiayudha  2,  99  by  kadamba,  black 
goose). 

K&rSpaka  [fr.  karapeti]  a  schemer,  inventor  J  vi.333. 

Kir&pa^a  see  kareti. 


Kiripita  [pp-  of  karapeti,  Caus.  of  karoti]  made  to  do 
J  VI.374. 

KarikS  see  karaka 

Karit&  =  karik\  (performance)  ;  see  paripiiri". 

K&rin  (-°)  (adj.)  doing :  yathSvadT  tathakari  "  as  he  says 
so  he  does"  D  111.135,  Sn  357;  see  for  examples  the 
various  cpds.  as  kamma",  kibbisa",  khanda",  chidda", 
dukkata",  dvaya",  paccakkha",  pubba",  sakkacca", 
sampajana",  etc. 

Kftriya  (adj.)  [grd  of  kareti,  Caus.  of  karoti]  to  be  done, 
neg.  akariya  to  be  undone,  (not)  to  be  made  good  It  18. 

Karuiifia  (nt.)  [fr.  karuna]  compassion  (usually  with 
anudaya  and  anukampa)  S  11.199;  A  111.189;  Vism 
300  ;  PvA  75  ;  Sdhp  509. 

Karnfifiata  (f)  compassionateness  S  T.138. 

Karnvika  (adj.)  [fr.  karuna]  compassionate,  merciful 
Pv  n.i''';  PvA  16;  Bdhd  49;  often  with  maha°  :  of 
great  mercy  Sdhp  330,  557:  so  of  the  Buddha:  maha- 
karunika  natha  "  the  Saviour  of  great  mercy  "  in  in- 
troductory stanzas  to  Pv  and  Vv. 

Kareti  (Causative  of  karoti),  to  construct,  to  build,  etc. ; 
pp.  karita ;  der.  -karapana  the  construction  of  (vihira") 
DhA  1. 416.  FcT  details  see  karoti  rv. ;  see  also  kara- 
paka  &  karapita. 

K&la  (and  K&|a)  —  Preliminary,  i.  dark  (sjm.  kapha, 
which  cp.  for  meaning  and  applications),  black,  blue- 
black,  misty,  cloudy.  Its  proper  sphere  of  application 
is  the  dark  as  opposed  to  light,  and  it  is  therefore 
characteristic  cf  all  phenomena  or  beings  belonging  to 
the  realm  of  darkness,  as  the  night,  the  new  moon,  death, 
ghosts,  etc.  —  There  are  two  etymologies  suggestible, 
both  of  which  may  have  been  blended  since  Indo- 
Aryan  times:  (a)  kala  =  Sk.  kala,  blue-black,  kali  black 
cloud  from  *nU  (with  which  conn.  *qel  in  kalanka, 
spot,  kalusa  dirty,  kammasa  speckled.  Gr.  KiXmvot, 
Mhg.  hilwe  mist)=I-at.  calidus  spot  Gr.  njXif  spot, 
and  KtjXai  dark  cloud  ;  cp.  Lat.  caligo  mist,  fog,  dark- 
ness. —  (b)  see  below,  under  note.  —  Hence  .  2.  the 
morning  mist,  or  darkness  preceding  light,  daybreak, 
morning  (cp.  E.  morning  =  Goth,  maurgins  twilight, 
Sk.  marka  eclipse,  darkness ;  and  also  gloaming  = 
gleaming  =  twilight),  then  :  time  in  general,  esp.  a  fixed 
time,  a  point  from  or  to  which  to  reckon,  i.  e.  term  or 
terminus  (a  quo  or  ad  quem).  —  Note.  The  definition  of 
colour-expressions  is  extremely  difficult.  To  a  primi- 
tive colour-sense  the  principal  difference  worthy  of 
notation  is  that  between  dark  and  light,  or  dull  and 
bright,  which  in  their  expressions,  however,  are  repre- 
sented as  complements  for  which  the  same  word  may 
be  used  in  either  sense  of  the  complementary  part  (dark 
for  light  and  vice  versa,  cp.  E.  gleam  >  gloom).  All  we 
can  say  is  that  kala  belongs  to  the  group  of  expressions 
for  dark  which  may  be  represented  simultaneously  by 
black,  blue,  or  brown.  That  on  the  other  hand,  black, 
when  polished  or  smooth,  supplies  also  the  notion  of 
"  shining  "  is  evidenced  by  kala  and  kapha  as  well, 
as  c.  g.  by  *gkei  in  Sk.  chaya  =  Gr.  axm  shadow  as 
against  Ags.  haSven  "blue"  (E.  heaven)  and  Ohg. 
skinan,  E.  to  shine  and  sky.  The  psychological  value 
of  a  colour  depends  on  its  light-reflecting  (or  light- 
absorbing)  quality.  A  bright  black  appears  lighter 
(reflects  more  light)  than  a  dull  grey,  therefore  a  polished 
(afijana)  black  (=sukala)  may  readily  be  called  "  bril- 
Uant."  In  the  same  way  kala,  combined  with  other 
colour-words  of  black  connotation  does  not  need  to 
mean  "  black,"  but  may  mean  simply  a  kind  of  black, 
i.  e.  brown.  This  depends  on  the  sem.asiological  con- 
trast or  equation  of  the  passage  in  question.  Cp.  Sk. 
§yama  (daik-grey)  and  syava  (brown^  under  kasSya. 
That  the  notion  of  the  speckled  or  variegated  colour 


Kala 


39 


Kala 


belongs  to  the  sphere  of  black,  is  psychologically  simple 
( :  dark  specks  against  a  light  ground,  cp.  kamm&sa),  and 
is  also  shown  by  the  second  etymology  of  hSla^Sk. 
S4ra.  mottled,  speckled  =Lat.  caerulus,  black-blue  and 
perhaps  caelum  "  the  blue"  (cp.  heaven)  =  Gr.  iiiprXof 
the  blue  ice-bird.  (On  k>s  cp.  kanna  > Sn.iga,  kila- 
mati  >  iramati,  kilissati  >  ilis°,  etc.)  The  usual  spelling 
of  kala  as  kala  indicates  a  connection  of  the  I  with  the 
r  of  ^ara.  —  The  definition  of  kala  as  jham'  angSra- 
sadisa  is  conventional  and  is  used  both  by  Bdhgh.  and 
DbpSla  :  DhsA  317  and  PvA  90. 

I.  Ka]a,  dark,  black,  etc.,  in  enum"  of  colours 
Vv  22'  (see  VvA  III),  na  kSlo  samaQO  Gotamo,  na 
pi  samo:  manguracchavi  samano  G.  "The  ascetic 
Gotamo  is  neither  black  nor  brown  :  he  is  of  a  golden 
skin  "  M  1.246 ;  similarly  as  k^li  vi  sama  v^  mangura- 
cchavi v&  of  a  kalycLpi,  a  beautiful  woman  at  D  1.193  = 
M.  11.40  ;  kala-silma  at  Vin  iv.120  is  to  be  taken  as 
dark-grey.  —  Of  the  dark  half  of  the  month :  see 
"pakkba,  or  as  the  new  moon  :  3game  kale  "  on  the  next 
new  moon  day"  Vin  1.176.  —  of  Petas :  Pv  11. 4'  (kali 
f.) ;  PvA  56'  (°rGpa) ;  of  the  dog  of  Yama  ("sunakha) 
PvA  151.  —  In  other  conn":  kalavatipa-bhumi  dark- 
brown  (i.  e.  fertile)  soil  Vin  1.48  =  11.209. 

-afljana  black  coUyrium  Vim  .203 ;  -Anusarl  black, 
(polished  ?)  Anusari  ("  a  kind  of  dark,  fragrant  sandal 
wood"  Vin.  Texts  11.51)  Vin  1.203;  S  iii.i56  =  v.44  = 
A  v. 22  ;  -ayasa  black  (dark)  iron  (to  distinguish  it  from 
bronze,  Rh.  D.,  Miln  trsl.  11.364;  cp.  blacksmith  > 
silversmith)  Miln  414,  415  ;  -kafijaka  a  kind  of  Asuras, 
Titans  Dm. 7;  J  v.  187;  PvA  2  72  ; -kannl"  black-cared," 
as  an  unlucky  quality.  Cp.  ni.6"  ;  J  1.239;  iv.189; 
V.134,  2"  '■  'vl-347  I  DhA  1.307  ;  n.26 ;  the  vision  of  the 
"  black-eared  "  is  a  bad  omen,  which  spoils  the  luck  of 
a  hunter,  e.  g.  at  DhA  111.31  (referring  here  to  the  sight 
of  a  bhikkhu) ;  as  "  witch  "  PvA  272  ;  DhA  111.38,  181  ; 
as  k-k.  sakupa,  a  bird  of  ill  omon  J  11.153  ;  -kannika  = 
prec. ;  -kabara  spotted,  freckled  J  vi.540  ;  -kesa  (adj.) 
with  glossy  or  shiny  hair,  by  itself  (kaja-kesa)  rare, 
e.  g.  at  J  VI. 578  ;  usually  in  cpd.  susukafa-kesa  "  having 
an  over-abundance  of  brilliant  hair  "  said  of  Gotama. 
This  was  afterwards  applied  figuratively  in  the  descrip- 
tion of  his  parting  from  home,  rising  to  a  new  life,  as  it 
were,  possessed  of  the  full  strength  and  vigour  of  his 
manhood  (as  the  rising  Sun).  Cp.  the  Shamash-Saga, 
which  attributes  to  the  Sun  a  wealth  of  shiny,  glossy 
(=polished,  dark)  hair  (  =  rays),  and  kala  in  this  con- 
nection is  to  be  interpreted  just  as  kai^ha  (q.  v.)  in 
similar  combinations  (e.  g.  as  Kirj^a  Hr?ikpsa  orKesavS). 
On  this  feature  of  the  Sun-god  and  various  expressions 
of  it  see  ample  material  in  Palmer,  The  Samson  Saga 
pp.  33-46.  —  The  double  application  of  su°  does  iiot 
offer  any  difficulty,  sukala  is  felt  as  a  simplex  in  the 
same  way  as  cujrXoico^of  or  duh°  in  comb"*  like  sudub- 
bala  PvA  149,  suduUabha  VvA  20.  Bdhgh.  already 
interprets  the  cpd.  in  this  way  (DA  1.284  =  suttbu-k'', 
aAjana-vanna  k°  va  hutva ;  cp.  kaph-aiijana  J  v. 155). 
Cp.  also  siniddha-nila-mudu-kuficita-keso  J  1.89,  and 
sukaQhakaQha  J  v.202 . —  susukaiakesa  of  others  than  the 
Buddha  :  M  11.66.  Modern  editors  and  lexicographers 
see  in  susu°  the  Sk.  iiiu  young  of  an  animal,  cub,  over- 
looking the  semantical  difl5culty  involved  by  taking  it 
as  a  separate  word.  This  mistake  has  been  applied  to 
the  compound  at  all  the  passages  where  it  is  found,  and 
so  we  find  the  reading  susu  kSlakeso  at  M  1.82  =  A  11.22 
=  J  11.57  ;  M  1.163  =A  1.68  =  8  1.9,  117;  also  in  Childer's 
(relying  on  Bumouf),  or  even  susfl  k°  at  S  iv.i  11  ;  the 
only  passages  showing  the  right  reading  susu-k°  are 
D  I.I  15,  M  1.463.  Konow  under  susu  J.P.T.S.  1909. 
212  has  both,  -kokila  the  black  (brown)  cuckoo  VvA 
57;  -jallika  (kali°  for  kala")  having  black  drops  or 
specks  (of  dirt)  A  1.253  ;  -danda  a  black  staff,  Sdhp  287 
(attr.  to  the  messengers  of  Yama,  cp.  Yama  as  having 
a  black  stick  at  Sat.  Br.  xi.  6,  i,  7  and  13) ;  -pakkha  the 
dark  side,  i.  e.  moonless  fortnight  of  the  month  A  11.18  ; 


-°  cStuddasi  the  t4th  day  of  the  dark  fortnight  PvA  55  ; 
-°  ratii  a  moonless  night  VvA  167;  (opp.  dosina  r.) 
-meyya  a  sort  of  bird  J  vi.539  ;  -Icna  black  (dark)  salt 
Vin  1.202  (Bdhgh.  pakati-lona,  natural  salt) ;  -loha 
"  black  metal,"  iron  ore  Miln  267  ;  -valli  a  kind  of 
creeper  Vism  36,  183.  -siha  a  special  kind  of  lion 
J  iv.2c8.  -sutta  a  black  thread  or  wire,  a  carpenter's 
measuring  line  J  11.405  ;  Miln  413  ;  also  N .  of  a  Purgatory 
(nivaya)  J  v.266.  See  Morris  J.P.T.S.  1884,  76-78; 
-hatthin  "  black  elephant,"  an  instrument  of  torture 
in  Avici  Sdhp  195. 

2.  kala  time.  etc.  (a)  Morning  :  kale  early  Pv 
11.9*'  (  =  pato  PvA  128),  kalassa  in  the  morning  (gen.  of 
time),  early  VvA  256.  Cp.  paccusa-kale  at  dawn 
DhA  111.242.  Opposed  to  evening  or  night  in  kajena 
in  the  morning  Pv  1.6'  (opp.  sayar)).  K51e  juphe  by 
day  and  by  night  Nd'  631.  —  (b)  time  in  general  :  gac- 
chante  gacchante  kale  in  course  of  time  DhA  1.319; 
evar)  gacchante  kale  as  time  went  on  PvA  54,  75,  127, 
etc.  — kalar)  for  a  time  Vin  1.176  (spelt  kalai)) ;  ka*ci 
kalag  some  time  yet  VvA  288;  ettakai)  kaiag  for  a 
long  time  PvA  102. — kaiena  kala^  (i)  from  time  to 
time  PvA  151;  VvA  255,  276;  —  (2)  continuously, 
constantly  A  iv.  45;  Pug  11  (+samayena  samayar)) ; 
D  1.74  ( :  but  expl*"  at  DA  1.218  by  kale  kale  in  the 
sense  of  "  every  fortnight  or  every  ten  days  ").  kaje 
in  (all)  time,  always  (cp.  alii)  Sn  73  (expl.  in  Nd*  by 
niccakale  under  sada ;  but  at  SnA  128  by  phasu-kalena 
"in  good  time");  -kale  kale  from  time  to  time,  or 
repeatedly  VvA  352 .  See  also  cira°,  sabba°.  —  (c)  Time 
in  special,  either  (i)  appointed  time,  date,  fixed  time, 
or  (2)  suitable  time,  proper  time,  good  time,  opportunity. 
Cp.  Gr.  Kaifiii  and  ipa ;  or  (3)  time  of  death,  death.  — 
(i)  Mealtime:  PvA  25  ;  VvA  6  ;  esp.  in  phrase  Valo  bho 
Gotamo,  nitthitai)  bhattar)  "  it  is  time,  Gotama,  the 
meal  is  ready  "  D  1.119  =  226;  Sn  p.  in  ;  and  in  kalai) 
aroceti  or  arocapeti  he  announces  the  time  (for  dinner) 
D  1.109,  226;  Snp.  Ill  ;  PvA  22,  141  ;  VvA  173.  -date  : 
kalato  from  the  date  or  day  of  .  .  .,  e.  g.  dittha"  pat- 
thaya  "  from  the  day  that  she  first  saw  her  "  VvA  20  6  ; 
gihi°  pattbaya  "  from  the  day  of  being  a  layman  " 
PvA  13.  (2)  proper  time,  right  time  :  also  season,  as  in 
utu°  favourable  time  (of  the  year)  Vin  1299;  11.173; 
kalai)  janati  "  he  knows  the  proper  time  "  A  rv.i  14 ;  as 
cattaro  kaia,  four  opportunities  A  11.140  ;  yassa  kSlag 
mafiiiasi  for  what  you  think  it  is  time  (to  go),  i.  e. 
goodbye  D  i.ic6,  189,  etc.  The  3  times  of  the  cycle  of 
existence  are  given  at  Vism  578  as  past,  present,  and 
future.  — kala°  (adj.)  in  (due)  time,  timely  Vism  229 
("maraoa  timely  death).  —  Opp.  akala  (it  is  the)  wrong 
time  or  inopportune  D  1.205  ;  akala-carin  going  (begging) 
at  the  improper  time  Sn  386.  akalamcgha  a  cloud 
arising  unexpectedly  (at  the  wrong  time)  Miln  144. 
— kale  at  the  proper  time,  with  vikale  (opp.)  Vin  1.199, 
200;  J  11.133;  Sn  386.  akale  in  the  wrong  season 
VvA  288.  kaiena  in  proper  time,  at  the  right  moment 
A  11.140;  Sn  326,  387  (=yutta  kaiena  SnA  374); 
Pv  i.5»  ( =  thitakalena  PvA  26) ;  Pug  50 ;  It  42  ;  KhA 
144  (  =  khauena  samayena).  Cp.  vikala.  (3)  The  day. 
as  appointed  by  fate  or  kamma.  point  of  time  (for 
death,  cp.  Vism  236),  the  "last  hour,"  cp.  ijnap,  iUa 
dies.  So  in  the  meaning  of  death  appl"  not  only  to  thia 
earthly  existence,  but  to  all  others  (peta°.  deva°,  etc.) 
as  well,  in  phrase  kala))  karoti  "  he  does  his  time  =  he 
has  fulfilled  his  time  "  Vin  111.80  ;  Sn  343 .  DhA  1.70  ; 
and  frequently  elsewhere  ;  cp.  -kata,  -kiriya.  —  As  death 
in  kalai)  kankhati  to  await  the  appointed  time  S  1.187  ; 
Sn  516  (cp.  kankhati)  and  in  der°  kalika.  —  Other 
examples  for  this  use  of  kala  see  under  bhatta°,  yafilia", 
vappa". 

-antara  interval,  period  :  kalantarena  in  a  little  while 
PvA  13;  na  kalantare  at  once  PvA  19;  -kata  (adj.) 
dead  Sn  586,  590  ;'  in  comb"  peta  kalakata  "  the  Petas 
who  have  fulfilled  their  (earthly)  time  Sn  807  ;  Pv  1.5' ; 
i.i2>.     Also  as  kalankata  Pv  11. 7*;  Vv  8c';  Vism  296. 


Kalika 


40 


Kin 


-kiriya  death  (often  comb''  with  maraoa)  M  11.108, 
A  1.22.  77,  261  (as  bhaddika,  cp.  A  111.293);  iv.320  ; 
Sn  694  ;  Pv  1. 10^  (of  a  Petl  who  has  come  to  the  end  of 
her  existence);  DhA  n.36;  iv.77.  -gate  =  °kate  PvA 
29,  40.  -fWI  knowing  the  proper  time  for  .  .  .  (c. 
dat.  or  loc.)  Sn  325 ;  described  at  A  iv.113  sq. ;  as  one 
of  the  five  qualities  of  a  raja  cakkavatti  (viz.  atthaniiu. 
dhamma",  matta",  k",  parisa")  A  111.14S,  one  of  the 
seven  qual.  of  a  sappurisa,  a  good  man  (=prec.  +  atta''. 
puggala")  D  111.252,  283  ,  as  quality  of  the  Tathagata 
D  in.i34  =  Nd*  276;  Pug  50.  -niiuta  n.  abstr.  to  prec. 
A  ii.ioi  ;  -(p)pavedana  announcement  of  death(-time) 
Xh  I.  563  =  ]  i.ii8  =  Vism  389=DhA  1.248.  -bhojana 
in  a"  eating  at  the  improper  time  S  v. 470  ;  -vadin  speak- 
ing at  the  proper  time,  in  formula  kala°  bhuta°  attha" 
dhamma"  vinaya"  under  sila  No.  7:  D  1.4;  in. 175; 
DA  1.76;  A  n.22.  209;  Pug  58;  -vipassin  considering 
the  right  moment,  taking  the  opportunity  It  41 .  -satag 
("sahassao.  etc.)  a  hundred  (thousand,  etc.)  times 
Vism  243. 

Kalika  (adj.)  [fr.  kala  2]  belonging  to  time,  in  time,  as 
sabba-kalika  always  in  time,  cp.  Gr.  upaios  Vv  39* ; 
with  time,  i.  e.  gradual,  slowly,  delayed  S  i.ii7=Nd* 
645  ;  usually  neg.  akalika  i .  not  delayed,  immediate,  in 
this  world,  comb,  with  sanditthika  S  11.58;  S  1.117  = 
IV. 41  =339=v.343  ; — 2.  subject  to  time,  i.  e.  temporal, 
vanishing  PvA  87  ; — 3.  unusual,  out  of  season  Miln  114 
(cp.  akala).  —  See  also  tava-kaUka. 

KiBya  a  kind  of  (shiny)  sandal  wood ;  so  to  be  read  for 
talisa  at  Vin  1.203  (see  note  on  p.  381). 

K&losiya  (and  KSltUSiya)  (nt.)  [der.  fr.  kalusa,  stained, 
dirty  see  cognates  under  kammasa  and  kala]  darkness, 
obscurity  DA  1.95 ;  PvA  124  (cakkhu") ;  fig.  (dosa") 
VvA  30. 

Xi|A  see  kala  I . 

Ka)aka  (adj.)  [fr.  kala]  black,  stained ;  in  enumeration  of 
colours  at  Dhs  617  (of  rupa)  with  nila,  pitaka,  lobitaka, 
odata,  k",  mafljettba;  of  a  robe  A  11. 241  ;  f.  kalika 
VvA  103 ;  —  (nt.)  a  black  spot,  a  stain,  also  a  black 
grain  in  the  rice,  in  apagata"  without  a  speck  or  stain 
(of  a  clean  robe)  D  1.1 10=  A  iv.i86  =  2io=2i3  ;  vicita" 
(of  rice)  "  with  the  black  grains  removed  "  D  1.105  ; 
A  IV. 231  :  Miln  16;  Tigata"  (same)  A  111.49.  —  A  black 
spot  (of  hair)  J  v.197  (  =  kai)ha-r-iva).  —  Fig.  of 
character  DhA  iv.172. 

Kalarika  see  kaUlrika. 

K&veyya  (nt.)  [grd.  fr.  kavyate  fr.  kavi  poet  cp.  Sk. 
kavya]  1.  poetry,  the  making  of  poems,  poetry  as 
business;  one  of  the  forbidden  occupations  D  i.ii 
(  =  DA  1.95  kabba-karapa)  — 2.  poetry,  song,  poem 
(of  suttanta)  A  1.72  =111.107. 

-matta  intoxicated  with  poetry,  musing,  dreaming 
S  i.iio,  196. 

K&ia*  [cp.  Sk.  IJiia.]  a  kind  of  reed,  Saccharum  sponta- 
neum  S  ill.  1 37. 

Kasa'  [cp.  Sk.  kisa]  cough ;  in  list  of  diseases  under 
abadha  A  v.iio=Nd*  304'. 

Kasaya  and  Kasiva  (adj.)  [Sk.  ka;aya  from  the  PS.li  ; 
kasaya  prob.  fr.  Sk.  ^yama  or  iyava  brown  =  Pali  sama, 
with  ka  =  kad,  a  kind  of,  thus  meaning  a  kind  of  brown, 
i.  e.  yellow.  See  further  under  sama  and  cp.  kala] 
I.  Kasaya  as  attr.  of  vatthani,  the  yellow  robes  of  the 
Buddhist  mendicant,  in  phrase  kSsayani  v°  acchadetva 
agarasma  anagariyar)  pabbajitvi,  describing  the  taking 
up  of  the  "homeless  state"  D  1.60,  61,  63,  115;  M 
11.67;  A  1.107;  11.208;  IV.118,  274,  280;  Pug  57;  Nd* 
172.  °vattha  (adj.)  with  yellow  robes  Sn  64;  cp. 
'nivattha  J  iii.  \  79  (dressed  in  yellow,  of  the  executioner ; 


see  Pick,  Soziale  Gliederung  p.  104  &  cp.  kasaya-niva- 
sana  J  111.41  ;  kasaviya  J  iv.447);  PvA  20;  °vasin 
dressed  in  yellow  Sn  487.  —  2.  Kasava  (vattha)  the 
yellow  robe  {never  in  above  formula)  Vin  1.2S7;  S 
iv.i90=v.53  =  30i  ;  Dh  9.  io  =  Th  i,  969,  970  =  J  11. 198 
=v.50 ;  Miln  11.  °kantha  (pi.)  the  "  yeUow  necks" 
those  whose  necks  are  dressed  in  yellow  Dh  307  (  = 
DhA  111.480)  =  It  43;  °pajjota  gUttering  with  yellow 
robes  Vbh  247  ;  Miln  19. 

K&iavaka  [fr.  kasava]  a  yellow  robe  DhA  11.86. 

Kasaviya  [fr.  kasava]  one  who  is  dressed  in  yellow,  esp.  of 
the  royal  executioner  jcp.  kasaya-vattha)  J  iv.447 
(  =  cora-ghataka  C). 

Kisika  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  kalika  &  in  a  ditf .  sense  adijha-kasika] 
belonging  to  the  KasI  country,  or  to  Benares;  iu  'u;- 
tama  (scil.  vattha)  an  upper  garment  made  of  Benares 
cloth  Pv  1. 10'  ;  J  VI. 49  (where  to  be  read  kasik'  uttama 
for  kasi-kuttama).  "vattha  Benares  musUn  A  1.248 ; 
111.50  ;  Pug  34 ;  Miln  2  ;  DhA  1. 417  ;  Vism  115. 

Kisn  [cp.  Sk.  kar^u,  fr.  k;s]  a  hole ;  only  in  cpd.  angara- 
kasu  a  cinderhole,  a  fire-pit,  usually  understood  as  a 
pit  of  glowing  cinders  J  1.232.  Mostly  found  in  similes, 
e.  g.  S  IV.56,  188;  Sn  396;  Sdhp.  208;  and  in  kSnia 
angarakas'  fipama  metaphor  A  iv.224  =  v.i75  ;  see  also 
kama. 

Ki°  2nd.  stem  of  interr.  pron.  (cp.  ka°  ku°) ;  i.  in  obbque 
cases  of  ko  (kafe),  as  gen.  kissa.  loc.  kismig  &  kighi.  — 
2.  in  nt.  kig  what  ?  (cp.  Gr.  ri,  Lat.  quid;  ending  -m 
besides  -d  in  kad,  as  Lat.  quom,  turn  besides  quod, 
id).  —  3.  in  primary  derivations,  as  kittaka,  kiva 
(  =  Sk.  kiyant)  which  stands  in  same  relation  to  *qui  as 
Lat.  quantus  to  *quo ;  and  in  secondary  derivations 
from  kii),  as  kiiici.  kincakkha,  kidisa,  etc. 

Kin  [nt.  of  rel.  pron.  ka]  i .  as  «/.  subst.  what  ?  sotanai) 
kig  nivara^ag  what  is  the  obstruction  ?  Sn  1032  ;  kii) 
tava  patthanaya  what  is  it  about  your  wish.  i.  e.  what 
good  is  your  wish  ?  VvA  226  ;  kim  idag  this  is  what,  that 
is  why,  therefore.  PvA  1 1  ;  often  with  su  in  dubitative 
question :  kig  su'  dha  vittag  purisassa  seuhag  what, 
then,  is  the  best  treasure  of  man  in  this  world  ?  Sn  181  ; 
or  with  nu :  kig  nu  kho  what  is  it  then  (in  series  evaii 
nu  kho,  na  nu  kho,  kathag  nu  kho)  Nd*  186.  —  Gen. 
kissa  of  what  ?  Pv  1.9' ;  11. 9**  ( =kidisassa)  and  in  kissa 
hetu  on  the  ground  of  what  i.  e.  why  ?  Sn  1131  ;  Pv 
II.8'  ( =kig  nimittag).  —  Instr.  kena  by  what  or  how  is 
it  that :  kena  ssu  nivuto  loko  Sn  1032.  —  Ace.  kig  :  kig 
kahasi  what  will  you  do  ?  Sn  428  ;  kig  agamma  kig 
arabbha  on  what  grounds  &  for  what  reason  ?  D  1.13, 
14,  etc. ;  kig  nissita  to  what  purpose  Sn  1043.  —  Loc, 
kismig  in  what  or  what  about :  kismig  vivSdo  "  what  is 
the  quarrel  about  ?"  D  1.237  '>  o''  kimhi,  e.  g.  kimhi  sik- 
khamano  in  what  instructed  ?  D  11.241  (corresponds  to 
ettha  =  in  this).  The  g  of  kig  in  Sandhi  is  either  eUded 
or  contracted  or  undergoes  the  usual  Sandhi  changes ; 
ki  ha  =  kig  ha  KhA  78,  kissa  =  kig  assa  Sn  1032  ;  kidisa 
(q.  V.)  =  ldg  disa ;  Idfici  (see  below)  =kig  cid  ;  kig  va  a 
little:  see  kittaka.  —  2.  as  interr.  particle,  introducing 
a  question  =Lat.  nonne,  Gr.  av :  kig  idani  pi  dinne  te 
labheyyug  ?  "  Will  they  receive  that  which  is  given 
now  ?"  PvA  22.  So  as  disjunctive  particle  in  comb, 
with  udahu  (whether — or) :  kig-udahu  what  (about  this) 
...  or  is  it  (otherwise),  is  it  so  .  .  .  or  is  it  not  so  ? 
(cp.  TToTepov — J/.  Lat.  utrum-an) :  kim  imasmig  atta- 
bhave  pitarag  pucchasi  udahu  atite  ?  "  do  you  enquire 
about  your  father  in  this  existence,  or  in  a  past  one  ?" 
PvA  38 ;  kig  nakkhattag  kilissasi  udahu  bhatig  karis- 
sasi  ?  "  Will  you  take  a  hohday  or  will  you  work  ?"  VvA 
63.  —  Very  often  modified  and  intensified  by  other 
exhortative  particles :  kig  afifiatra  (with  abl.)  unless 
(by),  except  for  Sn  206  (see  aflnatra)  kin  nu  kho  why, 
but  why,  why  in  the  world  ?  D  11. 131  ;  J  11. 159;  DhA 


Kinsuka 


41 


Kiccha 


ll.gi.  As  kimo  in  kimo  nu  why  then  ?  J  111.373  ; 
V.479  (  =  kim  eva)  ;  kimu  Sdhp  137  ;  kim  pana  =  nonne  : 
kim  pana  bhante  addasa  ?  "  Have  you  not  seen  ?" 
D  II. 132;  kira  pana  tvai)  mannasi  what  then  do  you 
think  =  do  you  not  think  then,  that?  ...  J  1.171  ; 
kim  anga  how  much  more  or  less,  i.  e.  far  more,  or  far 
less  Miln  274  as  kim  anga  pana  why  then  ?  M  iii.iSt  ; 
Miln  23  ;  Vism  233  ;  kin  ti  how  then  ?  D  11.74  ;  kin  ti  te 
sutai)  have  you  not  heard?  D  1.104;  kintikaro  = 
kathankaro  q.  v.  ;  kiAca  (cp.  ki&cdpi  under  kind)  = 
num-que,  nonne ;  is  it  not  that,  rather  J  1.135  (expl"*  in 
c.  by  garahatte  ca  anuggahatthe  nipato).  —  kiiici  in 
comb,  with  yai)  or  yad :  whatever ;  in  other  comb" 
positive :  some,  neg. :  na  kiilci  nothing  ;  yad  atthi  kinci 
whatever  there  is  of  ...  Sn  231  ;  n'atthi  kinci  there 
is  nothing :  see  under  atthi  and  kiilcana ;  kiiici  n'atthi 
loke  there  is  nothing  in  this  world  .  .  .  Sn  1122. — 
kiAc&pi  whatever,  however  much :  kiiicApi  te  tattha 
yata  caranti  "  however  much  they  endeavour  in  this  " 
Sn  1080  ;  J  1.147  ;  It  1 14  ;  KhA  187.  190.  Same  as  dis- 
junctive conjunction  with  foil,  pana:  (=Lat.  quamvis) 
kificApihi  .  .  .  pana  although  .  .  .  yetDhAi.391  :  kiiic&pi 
with  pot.  .  .  .  atha  kho  although — yet ;  it  may  be  that 
— but  S  1.72.  —  3.  In  composition  {"-)  often  implying 
doubt,  uncertainty  ("  what  is  it,  that  is  so  &  so  ?"),  or 
expressing  strangeness  ( :  doubtful  likeness),  e.  g.  kin- 
nara  a  kind  of  man  (but  not  sure  about  it),  a  half-man  ; 
kimpakka  odd-looking  or  doubtful  (poisonous)  fruit ; 
kimpurisa  a  strange  man  (doubtful  whether  man  or 
beast) ;  cp.  kir)suka. 

-akkhayin  preaching  what  ?  in  conn,  with  kit) 
vadin  saying  what  ?  i.  e.  holding  what  views  ?  A  1.62  ; 
-atthaQ  for  what  purpose  J  1.279.  -atthiya  to  what 
purpose  J  IV. 239  ;  Miln  19  ;  VvA  230  ;  to  any  purpose,  of 
any  use  S  v. 171  ;  -abhiAfia  having  what  name  ?  J  vi,i26. 
-kara  doing,  whatever  (his  duty),  a  servant,  in  k°-patis- 
savin  an  obedient  servant  D  1.61  (cp.  expl"  at  DA  1.168) 
A  III. 37 ;  IV. 265  sq.  ;  ThA  252  ;  -karanlya  business, 
occupation  A  111.113,  116,  258;  v.24,  90,  338;  -karana 
(abl.  of  kclrana)  by  reason  of  what,  i.  e.  why  ?  PvA 
25  ;  -kusalagavesin  striving  after  that  which  is  good 
M  1.163=240  :  -jacca  of  what  caste  ?  Sn  p.  80  ;  •nama 
of  what  name  ?  Miln  15,  17  ;  DhA  111.397  (both  kon§ma 
and  kitjnSma).  -pakka  strange  or  unknown  (doubtful) 
fruit,  in  °rukkha  a  tree  with  odd  fruit  (i.  e.  poisonous 
fruit,  cp.  Rim.  11.66,  6  :  Kem,  Toev.  s.  v.  takes  it  to 
be  Strychnos  nux  vomica)  J  1.368.  -purisa  i.  a  wild 
man  of  the  woods  J  iv.254  ;  vi.272.  497.  —  2.  =kin- 
nara  (q.  v.)  A  1.77  ;  J  v. 42,  416.  f.  kimpurisi  J  v. 2 15, 
216.  -phala  =  °pakka,  in  "rukkha  a  tree  with  unknown 
(poisonous)  fruit  J  1.271.  -rukkha  what  kind  of  tree 
J  V.203.  -vadin  holding  what  view  ?  A  1.62  ;  -sama- 
cara  (a)  of  what  conduct,  in  comb,  with ;  -sUa  of  what 
character  Sn  324  (=SnA  331). 

Kininka  [kit) -1- su -1- ka]  N.  of  a  tree  (creeper),  lit.  "  what- 
ever-like," or  "  what  do  you  call  it,"  i.  e.  strange  tree 
(see  kig  su  &  kig  3).  pop.  name  for  the  Butea  frondosa 
S  IV. 193  (parable  of  the  k.) ;  J  11.265  (°opama-jataka) ; 
V.405  ;  vi.536.     Perhaps  v.  1.  at  SnA  284. 

-puppha  the  (red)  flower  of  the  k.  tree  Vism  252. 
-vanna  of  the  colour  of  the  k.  (flower)  J  1.73  (angara 
ashes). 

KiUU  (?)  dense,  thick  (?)  SS  at  S  iv.289  (for  kutthita), 
said  of  the  heat. 

KiU  [onomat.  to  sound-root  kf  (see  note  on  gala),  cp. 
Sk.  krka-v&ku  cock,  after  the  cry  of  the  bird]  i.  (ra.) 
the  blue  jay  (J  11.350  k.  sakuQO).  —  2.  (f.)  a  hen  for 
the  female  of  the  jay  ?),  in  simile  fr.  the  ApadSna  of  a 
hen  watching  her  egg  Vism  36  (aa<jar)  anurakkbaminS)  ; 
J  ni.375  (rakkhati) ;  cp.  SnA  317  ikiki  sakunika  anc^assa 
upari  seti). 


Kinkaoikk  (m.  nt.)  [  =  kinkioika]  a  small  bell  J  iv.362 ; 

VvA  12. 

Kinkipika  (m.  nt.)  [onomat.  formation  fr.  sound  part. 
kipi,  see  note  on  gala]  a  small  bell  J  iv.259,  413  ;  (su- 
vauna") ;  Vv  78*  (=kinkipi  VvA  303);  Vin  in. 42  (kin- 
kipika  saddo). 

-jila  a  net  or  fringe  if  tinkling  bells  D  11. 183  ;  J  1.32  ; 
DhA  1.274. 

Kicoa  (nt.)  [grd.  of  karoti  =  Sk.  kftya]  i.  (adj.)  that  which 
ought  to  be  done,  that  which  is  to  be  performed  ;  nt. 
something  to  do  DhA  1. 15.  Def''  as  katabban  ti  kiccag, 
kiflcid  eva  karaQiyan  ti  KhA  218  ;  kattabag  karaQiyag 
DhA  III. 452.  —  2.  (nt.)  (a)  duty,  obligation,  service, 
attention ;  ceremony,  performance.  The  sg.  is  used 
collectively  as  pi.  —  adj.  ( — °)  one  who  is  under  an 
obligation,  etc.,  or  to  whom  an  obligation,  etc.,  is  due 
A  11.67;  I^h  276.  293;  J  111.26;  DhA  1.5. — kattabba- 
k°-karapa  "  the  performance  of  incumbent  duties " 
PvA  30  ;  idag  me  Idccag  akasi  "  he  has  done  me  this 
service  "  PvA  29.  —  In  special  sense  of  the  duties  to 
the  dead :  ahag  tava  pitu  "g  karomi  "  I  will  do  the  last 
duty  to  your  father  "  PvA  274.  —  «°  that  which  is  not 
(his)  duty  A  11.67  ;  Dh  292,  293.  —  (b)  (as  philos.  term) 
function  ;  rasa  (essence)  is  either  kicca  r°-  or  sampatti  r, 
function  or  property.  Cpd.  13,  213,  n.  1.;  Vism  162 
(parivyatta°  quite  conspicuous  f.),  264  (abbhafijana" 
f.  of  lucubrating),  338,  493  (indriyanag  kiccag),  547 
(tad-araminaQa°,  bhavanga°,  cuti°,  etc.) ;  kiccavasena 
by  way  of  f.  Abhdh.-sangaha  v.8,  cp.  Dhs.  Irsl.  132  (with 
ref.  to  DhsA  264) ;  Idccato  Vism  581.  — appa°  having 
few  or  no  duties  Sn  144  (cp.  KhA  241.  — arainika° 
duties  of  the  Arama  J  1.38.  — udaka°  water-perform- 
ance, ablution  D  11. 15.  — kata°  one  who  has  performed 
his  duties  or  mission,  i.  e.  an  Arahant  Sn  1 105 ;  Vv  53I 
(cp.  VvA  231.  — bahu°  having  many  obligations,  being 
very  busy  A  in. 116  sq.  — bhatta°  meal  DA  1.45  sq. ; 
PvA  76  ;  freq.  in  formula  kata°  (see  kata),  cp.  kat-anna- 
kiccaDav8i.59.  — mata°  funeral  rites  PvA  274.  — sarira° 
the  duties  of  the  body,  i.  e.  funeral  rites  PvA  74).  — 
Note.  In  comp"  with  kud°  kicca  appears  as  kuk-kucca 
(q.  v.). 

-Akicca  pi.  (kicca -f- kicca,  see  Trenckner,  Notes 
J.P.T.S.  1908,  127;  cp.  thanathana,  bhavabhava 
maggamagga,  phalaphala,  etc.)  duties  of  all  kinds, 
various  duties :  ativasa  assu  Idccakiccesu  "  they  shall 
serve  me  in  all  duties"  Dh  74  (DhA  11.78  =khuddaka- 
mahantesu  karapiyesu  "  in  small  and  great  duties  ") ; 
°esu  yuttapayutto  maoavo  (cp.  a  maid  "  of  all  work  ") 
VvA  298  ;  "esu  ussuka  endeavouring  to  do  all  duties 
Sn  298  (but  expW  at  SnA  319  as  "  zeal  in  what  is  to  be 
done  and  what  is  not  to  be  done,"  taken  as  kicca -H 
akicca  cp.  akicca)  ;  -Adhikarana  settlement  of  the  agenda 
at  formal  meetings  of  a  chapter  Vin  11.89=111.164; 
III. 168  ;  v. 101  sq.  ;  150  sq.  ;  See  Vin  Texts  in. 45  ;  -k«r« 
doing  one's  duty  S  1.91  ;  Sn  676  ;  -karaniyani  pi.  =kic- 
cakicca,  various  duties  A  iv.87 ;  -lurin  =  kiccakara 
A  111.443- 

Kiccayati  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  last]  duty  Vin  11.89  (k°  karapi- 
yata) ;  Miln  42. 

Kiccha  [see  kasira]  i.  (adj.)  (a)  distressed,  in  difliculty, 
poor,  miserable,  painful  :  kiccha  vatayag  idha  vutti 
yag  jano  passati  kibbi-sakari  (miserable  is  the  life  of 
one  who  does  wrong)  Sn  676  =  parihinattha,  in  poverty 
PvA  220  (kicco=kiccho).  —  (b)  difficult  to  obtain,  hard, 
troublesome  Dh  182  (kiccho  manussapatilabho,  DhA 
235  =dullabho).  —  2.  (nt.)  distress,  misery,  pain,  suffer- 
ing :  kicchag  apanno  loko  D  11.30  ;  S  11. 5  ;  °g  va  so 
nigacchati  "  he  gets  into  difficulties  (i.  e.  becomes 
poor)"  J  v. 330  (=dukkhag  nigacchati);  Vism  314; 
DhA  1.80.  —  Oblique  cases  used  adverbially:  instr. 
kicchena  with  difficulty  J  1. 147,  19'  (patijaggita) : 
V. 331  (id.)  abl.  kiccha  id.  J  v. 330.  — akiccha  (°-)  without 


Kiccbati 


42 


Kitti  &  Kitti 


difficulty,  easily,  in  plirase  akiccha-lSbhin  taking  or 
sharing  willingly  (+  kasira-labhin)  M  1.33,  354  =S  11.278 
=  A  i:.23,  36 ;  A  in. 31,  114. 

-patta  fallen  into  misery  Pv  ili.5<  (=PvA  199  duk- 
khappatta)  -vuttin  living  in  misery,  poor  Pv  ii.q'* 
(:  dukkhaji^nta). 

KiCChati  [v.  denom.  fr.  kiccha,  cp.  Sk.  kfcchrayate]  to  be 
troubled,  to  be  wearied,  to  .suffer  Th  t,  962  (w.  ace.  of 
obj.);  usually  with  kilamati :  k°  kayo  kilamati  Th  i, 
1073.  Used  in  a  play  of  words  with  vicikicchati  by 
Bdhgh  at  Dhs."  354  as  "  arammanar)  niccheturj  asak- 
konto  kiccbati  kilamati "  and  at  Bdlid.  25  (on  vici- 
kiccha)  as  sabhavag  vicinanto  etaya  kicchati  kilamati. 

Kificana  (adj.-nt.)  [kig  +  cana,  equal  to  kir)  +  ci,  indef. 
pron.]  only  in  neg.  sentences:  .something,  anything. 
From  the  freq.  context  in  the  older  texts  it  has  assumed 
the  moral  implication  of  something  that  sticks  or  adheres 
to  the  character  of  a  man,  and  which  he  must  get  rid 
of,  if  he  wants  to  attain  to  a  higher  moral  condition.  — 
Def.  as  the  3  impurities  of  character  (raga,  do^a  moha) 
at  D  ni.217;  M  1.298;  S  IV. 297:  Vbh  368;  Kd*  206" 
(adding  mana.  ditthi.  kilesa.  duccarita)  ;  as  obstruction 
(palibujjhana),  consisting  in  raga,  etc.  at  DKi\  in. 258 
(on  Dh  200).  Khina-sar|saio  na  c'attbi  kincanar)  "  he 
has  destroyed  sarisnra  and  there  is  no  obstructit)n  (for 
him)"  Th  i,  306.  n'ahai)  kassaci  kincanar)  tasmir) 
na  ca  mama  katthaci  kincanar)  n'atthi  "  I  am  not  part 
of  anything  (i.  e.  associated  with  anything),  and  herein 
for  me  there  is  no  attachment  to  anything  "  A  11. 177. — 
akincana  (adj.)  having  nothing  Miln  220.  —  In  special 
sense  "  being  without  a  moral  stain,"  def.  at  Nd^  5  as 
not  having  the  above  (3  or  7)  impurities.  Thus  freq.  an 
attribute  of  an  Arahant ;  "  yassa  pure  ca  pacch.a  ca 
raajjhe  ca  n'atthi  kincanar)  akincanag  anadanai)  tarn 
ahar)  brumi  brahmanan  "  Dh  421  =;Sn  645,  cf.  Th  1.  537  ; 
kame  akiiicano  "not  attached  to  kama"  as  Ep.  of  a 
khinasava  A  v. 232  sq.  — 253  sq.  Often  comb"*  with  anS- 
dana:Dh42i  ;Sn62(),645,  1094. — AkincanokSmahhave 
asatto  "  having  nothing  and  not  attached  to  the  world 
of  rebirths"  Vin  1.36;  Sn  176.  1059;  — akificanar) 
ndnupatanti  dukkh&  "  ill  does  not  befall  him  who  has 
nothing"  S  1.23.  —  sakificana  (adj.)  full  of  worldly 
attachment  Sn  620— DA  246. 

Kincikkha  (nt.)  [E.  MuUor  P.  Gr.  p.  35  expl'  kiiicid  +  ka] 
a  trifle,  a  small  thing :  yai)  va  tar)  va  appamattakar) 
Sn  121  :  131  ;  PugA  210  (ill. 4).  5misa-kincikkha-hetu 
"  for  the  sake  of  a  little  gain"  A  i.i28  =  Pug  29;  at 
Pv  II. 8'  as  amisa-kif\ci-hetu  (but  all  vv.  11.  R.  have 
"kificakkho")  "  for  some  food "  (expW  at  PvA  107 : 
kinci  amisari  patthcnto)  ;  — kata  kificikkhabavana  at 
S  iv.iiS  is  evidently  corrupt  (v.  1.  "bhadhana  for  ba- 
dhana  ?). 

-kamyata  in  the  desire  for  some  little  thing  Sn  121 
(cp.  SnA  179  :  appamattakc  kismificid  eva  icchaya). 

Kinjakkha  (m.  nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  kinjalka  &  remarks  at  Aufrecht 
Hiiljyiirllia  ]).  1H6]  a  filament,  esp.  of  thelotns  S  m.130  ; 
J  i.6(',  1S3;  V.39;  Vv  22';  -v5ri°  Pv  II. i'*  (  =  kesara 
PvA  77)  in  comb"  with  kcsara  VvA  12,  in.  175. 

Kitaka  [doubtful]  only  at  Pv  1.9''*,  of  clothes  which  are 
changed  into  missa  kitaka,  which  is  expl.  at  PvA  44 
by  kitakasadisflni  lohapatta.sadis5ni  bhavanti  "they 
become  like  (hot)  copper  plates." 

Kitika  at  Vin  11.153  of  alinda,  a  verandah,  said  to  be  sar)- 
sarana"  ugghatana"  (a  movable  screen  or  a  curtain 
that  can  be  drawn  aside)  Vin  Texts  111.174,  '7<>. 

Kittha  [cp.  Sk.  krsta  kis]  growing  com,  the  crop  on  the 
ground,  a  cornfield  A'fii.393  (in  simile),  cp.  S  iv.195. 

-ada  eating  corn  A  in. 393.     -arakkha  the  guardian  of 
the  comtield  S  iv.ig6.     -sambadha  "  when  the  corn  is 


thick,"  in  'samaye  near  harvest-time  M  i.i  15  (in  simile) ; 
J  1. 1 43  (sassa-samaye+ ).  338. 

KiQaki^ayati  [  =  kinkinSyati,  denom.  fr.  kinkipi,  small 
bell]  to  tinkle;  also  spelt  kinikinayati  J  111.315.  See 
also  kiUkilayati  and  cp.  Sk.  kitikitayati  to  grind  (one's 
teeth)  &  Prk.  kidiki^ya  (chattering)  Weber,  Bhagavati 
p.  289;  also  BSk.  katakatayati  Tal.  Vist.  251.  See 
tatatatayati  &  note  on  gala. 

Ba;)ati  [kri  Vedic  krioiti]  to  buy  Vism  318;  pot.  kioe 
J  V.375 ;  ger.  kinitva  M  1.384;  J  1.92,  94;  inf.  kinitug 
J  111.282. 

Ki^i  (indecl  )  a  part.,  expressing  the  sound  of  a  smalt 
bell :  "  tink  "  DhA  1.339  (v.  1.  kiri ;  see  also  kili  and  note 
on  gala). 

KiQQa*  [cp.  Sk.  kinva]  ferment,  yeast;  Vin  11. 116;  VvA 
73. 

KiW*'  [PP-  o*  kirati]  strewn,  scattered,  covered ;  only  in 
comp"  with  prefixes :  a°,  0°,  ud°,  upa",  pari",  sag" ; 
see  also  appa°. 

KiQha  (adj.)  [see  kapha ;  DA  1.234  kiphJ  ti  kanha,  kS)aka 
ti  attho]  black  ;  in  the  stock  phrase  mundaka  sanianaka 
ibbha  k°  bandhup5d4pacci  D  1.90  =  116:  S  iv.117; 
M  1.334;  "-J??:  •"  ^  moral  sense  =  bad,  wicked,  with 
nSIam-arij'a  dhamma  D  1.163. 

Kita  [pp.  of  kr,  with  i  for  a,  cp.  kirana  for  karapa.  The 
Dhtp.  expl"*  by  nivasane]  1.  adorned:  mala"  adorned 
with  garlands  Vin  in. 249.  —  2.  soiled,  only  in  cpds. 
kanna°  said  of  a  wall,  also  of  the  ground  at  Vin  1.48  = 
11.209 ;  and  pagsu",  soiled  with  dust  Vin  n.ioi,  174. 

Kitava  &  kitaya  [  =  katava  ?  cp.  kata]  one  who  plays  false ; 
a  cheat;  adj.  deceitful  S  1.24;  J  v. 116;  117  (a°) ;  -ki- 
tava at  Dh  252  (=DhA  111.375)  in  comb'  with  sa^ha 
also  at  J  VI. 2 2 8,  where  the  connection  with  kata  is 
evident :  katar)  A)ato  ganhati  kitava  sikkhito  yatliS  = 
like  one  who  is  skilled  in  having  the  kata,  the  lucky 
die.  ExpH  at  DhA  in. 375  as  taken  from  fowUng : 
kitavaya  attabhavar)  paticchadeti  "  he  hides  himself 
by  means  of  a  pretence  "  (behind  sham  branches). 

Kittaka  (pron.  interr.)  [fr.  kiva,  cp.  ettaka  &  BSk.  kettaka 
(MVastu  1.50) ;  see  Trenckner.  Notes  p.  134]  how  much  ? 
how  great  ?  nt.  as  adv. :  to  what  extent  ?  pi. :  how 
many  ?  Vin  1.297  :  k°g  antovassar)  avasitthai)  "  how 
much  of  the  rainy  season  is  left  ?"  VvA  66 ;  kittaka 
pana  vo  bhante  parivara-bhikkhu  ?  "  How  many 
bhikkhus  are  in  your  retinue  ?"  J  1.32.  —  As  indcf. :  a 
little ;  kittakai)  jivissami,  J  v. 505  ;  kittakai]  addhanar) 
a  short  time  VvA  117  (  =  ldgva  cirag). 

Kittana  (nt.)  [f.  kitteti]  praise  PvA  31,  107. 

Kitt&vata  (adv.)  to  what  extent  .'  how  far  ?  in  what 
respect  ?  K°  nu  kho  mahSpurisa  hoti  "  in  what 
respect  is  a  man  a  great  man  ?"  Nd'  502  B ;  k°  nu  kho 
pafinava  ti  vuccati  ?  M  1.292. 

Kitti  &  Kitti  f.  [Vedic  kirti,  *qer :  cp.  Gr.  mptalpu,  Ohg. 
hruod,  hruom  =  Ger.  ruhm ;  *qar:  cp.  Sk.  karu  poet; 
Gr.  KtipvK  herald.  Lat.  carmen  hymn  of  praise.  —  The 
expl""^  of  Dhtp  (579)  &  Dhtm  (812)  are  sarjsadde  Sc 
sajjsnddane]  fame,  renown,  glory,  honour,  yaso  ca  kitti 
ca  S  1.25  ;  kittm  ca  sukhail  ca  S  1.187  :  yaso  kitti  sakhaii 
ca  A  11.32  yaso  kitti  ca  "fame  and  renown"  Sn  817 
(=Nd'  147,  where  appl.  to  the  religious  perfection 
attained  by  a  samana) ;  Sn  185  (in  the  same  sense); 
VvA  68  (bahira°-bhava  becoming  known  outside) ; 
yaso  kitti  Sdhp  234. 

-sadda  the  sound  of  fame,  praise,  renown  (thuti- 
ghosa  DA  1. 1 46)  esp.  appl''  to  the  Buddha,  whose  fame 
is  heralded  before  him  :   Bhagavantai)  Gotamar)  evai) 


Kittika 


43 


Kiriya 


kalyano  k'-saddo  abl)liii(;.i;ato  "  th?  liiKli  reputation 
wciit  forth  over  thu  worKl,  concerning  the  Venerable 
Gotama  "  :  (such  is  tliis  Ex.iitcd  One,  Arahant.  etc.) 
D  1.49.  87,  115,  lib,  236;  S  IV. 323.  374;  V.352  ;  A  i.^-y. 
180  ;  111.30,  39,  58,  253,  267  ;  IV. 81) ;  etc.  The  same 
with  reference  to  others :  Miln  284.  Appl''  to  the  good 
reputation  of  a  inau  (of  a  kalyaijamitta)  at  Pug  37  :  the 
oppciite  is  pipako  kittisaddo.  bad  reputation  :  A  I.i20  ; 
111.269;  Pug  36;  -vanna  praise,  in  "hara  receiving  or 
deserving  praise  D  111.191  ;  cp.  °bhata  Nd'  147. 

Kittika  (adj.)  [fr.  kitti]  famous  VvA  200. 

Kittita  (pp.  of  kitteti]  told  l?dhd  124  ;  su°  well  told  Sn  1057. 

Kittima  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  krtima,  der.  fr.  kfti,  karoti,  in 
sense  of  kata  1.2  (a)  made  up,  artificial ;  clever,  skilful 
ThA  227;  DhA  391  (of  nania) ;  VvA  275  (of  ratha : 
cleverly  constructed)].  Cp.  also  kutta,  ^  f .  kittima  at 
J  111.70  ;  VI. 508  is  according  to  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  a  mis- 
spelling for  tittima. 

Kitteti  [v.  den.  fr.  kitti]  i.  to  praise,  extol  PvA  124,  162  ; 
—  2.  to  proclaim,  announce,  relate,  tell ;  ppr.  kittento 
praising  PvA  159. — fut.  kittayissati  in  sense  of  aor. 
Vv  34'  (  =  katheti  VvA  151).  -kittayissami  I  shall 
relate  Sn  1053,  1132.  grd:  kittaniya  to  be  praised 
PvA  9.  —  aor.  akittayi  Sn  875,  921.  —  pp.  kittita. 

Kinnara  [kig  +  nara,  lit.  what-man,  sec  kir)  3]  a  little  bird 
with  ahead  like  a  man's]  J  iv.106,  254,  438  ,  v. 47,  456 ; 
Mil  267.  Canda  kinnara  Np.  J  1.91  ,  vi.283  ,  vi.74.  — 
f.  kinnara  Np.  of  a  queen  ]  v.  437  sq.  ,  and  kinnari  Th  2, 
381  (cp.  ThA  255),  J  II. 121  (matta-kinnari  viya),  230; 
IV. 432  sq.     Cp.  kiropurisa. 

Kinnama  see  under  kirj. 

Kipillika  (f)  &  Kipillaka  (nt.)  [Cp.  Sk.  pipilika,  see 
Trenckner,  Notes,  p.  108]  an  ant  Sn  602  (kuntha") ; 
DhA  1.360;  J  iv.142  (kuntha°) ;  v. 39  (tamba'-'ani) ; 
Miln  272.  —  kipillaka  J  1.487  (v.  1.  BB.  for  pillaka) ; 
IV. 375  (tamba'-puta) ;  DhA  iv.134  (v.  1.  SS.  for  T. 
pillaka).  —   Cp.  kuntha  &  pipilika. 

Kibbisa  (nt.)  [Ved.  kilbija,  according  to  Grassmann  to 
•kil  as  in  kilSsa,  thus  originally  "  stain,  dirt."  Buddh. 
Sk.  kilvi$a  classed  with  apairadha  at  Mvyntp.  245  No. 
903]  wrongdoing,  demerit,  fault,  usually  with  °i) 
karoti  to  do  wrong  Sn  246 ;  Sdhp,  204  ;  J  in.135  or  °i) 
pasavati  A  v. 75  ;  Yin  11. 198.  -kata°  (adj.)  liaving  done 
wrong  in  akata-kalyano,  etc.  A  n.174  and  :»(see  kal- 
yana  and  kata  11.  i  a) ;  M  1.39 ;  Pv  iv.?' ;  PvA  59. 

-karaka>=ncxt  J  in.14;  -karin,  doing  wrong  Sn  665 
sq. ;  PvA  58. 

Kibbiaaka  =  kibbisa  Sdhp  290. 

Kimi  m.  [Vedic  kfmi]  a  worm,  vermin :  seta  kimi  kanha- 
sisa  A  III. 241  ;  Miln  272;  DA  1.199;  —  As  animal  o) 
death  and  putrefaction  M  1.507;  J  1.146;  Sn  201  ;  esp. 
with  ref.  to  the  punishment  of  Petas :  Pv  1.3';  Th  2, 
439;  PvA  192  ;  Sdhp  603.  As  glow-worm  M  11.34,  4' 
(with  khajjopanaka) ;  salaka°  a  very  minute  insect 
Miln  312.  In  similes:  Th  i,  1175  (kimi  va  milhasal- 
iitto);  Vism  500,  598.  In  cpd.  kimi-kula  the  worm 
kind  (genus  worm)  Miln  100  ;  Vism  235  ;  °gaija  crowd  of 
worms  Vism  314. 

Kifflina  (adj.)  [from  kimi]  covered  with  worms  J  v. 2 70. 

Kira  (&  Kila)  [Vedic  kila]  adv.  i.  emphatic  :  really,  truly, 
surely.  ((Ir.  (V/)  —  2.  presumptive  (with  pres.  or  fut.)  : 
I  should  think  one  would  expect.  —  3.  narrative  (with 
aor.)  :  now,  then,  you  know  (Or.  oi.  Lat.  at,  G.  aber).  -  - 
kira  in  continuous  story  is  what  "  iti  "  is  in  direct  or 
indirect  speech.  It  connects  new  points  in  a  narrative 
with  something  preceding,  either  as  expected  or  gues.sed. 


It  is  aoristic  in  character  (cp.  Sk.  sma).  In  questions 
it  is  dubitative.  while  in  ordinary  statements  it  gives 
the  appearance  of  probabiUty,  rather  than  certainty, 
to  the  sentence.  Therefore  the  definitions  of  com- 
mentators :  "  people  say  "  or  "  I  have  heard  "  :  kira- 
saddo  anttssavane :  "  kira  refers  to  a  report  by  hear- 
say "  PvA  103;  kira-saddo  anussav'althe  J  1. 158; 
VvA  322  are  conventional  and  one-sided,  and  in  both 
cases  do  not  give  the  meaning  required  at  the  speci- 
fied passages.  The  same  holds  good  for  J  1.158  & 
11.430  (kira  ti  anussavatthe  nipato).  —  i .  mahantag 
kira  Baranasirajjai)  "  the  kingdom  of  B.  is  truly  great  " 
J  1.126 ;  atta  hi  kira  duddamo  "  self  is  difficult  to  sub- 
due, we  know  "  Dh  159  ;  amoghag  kira  me  putthag  Sn 
356.  —  na  kira  surely  not  Sn  840;  J  1.158.  —  2.  esa 
kira  Visakha  nama  "  that  I  presume  is  the  Visakha  " 
(of  whom  we  have  heard)  DhA  1.399  :  peta  hi  kira 
jananti  "the  petas,  I  should  say,  will  know  "  Pv  11.7"'; 
evar)  kira  Uttare  ?  "  I  suppose  this  is  so.  Uttura"  VvA 
69.  evar)  kira  saggai)  gamissatha  "  thus  you  will  surely 
go  to  Heaven  "  Vv  82*  ;  "  I  hear  "  DhA  1.39-2 ■  —  3-  atite 
kira  with  aor.  once  upon  a  time  .  .  .  PvA  46,  etc. ;  so 
kira  pubbe  .  .  .  akasi,  at  one  time,  you  know,  he  had 
made  .  .  .  J  1.125  ;  sa  kira  dasi  adasi  now  the  maid 
gave  her  .  .  .  PvA  46;  cp.  J  1.195.  etc. 

Kinma  (nt.)  I.  [fr.  kr,  karoti  to  do]  an  occupation,  place 
of  work,  workshop  J  iv.223.  Cp.  kita  &  kittima. — 
2.  [fr.  kr,  kirati  to  scatter,  cp.  pp.  kiijna]  scattering, 
effusion  (of  sun  rays),  effulgence  VvA  169,  199. 

Kirati  [klr]  to  scatter,  strew ;  not  found  in  simples,  only 
in  cpds.  apa°,  abbhuk",  abhi°,  ava°  (0°),  pari",  vi°. 
See  also  pp.  kip^a'. 

Kitata  (&  kirata)  [prob.  died.]  a  man  of  a  tribe  of  jungle- 
men,  classed  with  dwarfs  among  the  attendants  of  a 
chief  DA  1.148.  See  on  the  Kirata  as  a  mountain  tribe 
Zimmer,  Altindisches  Leben  p.  34.  Cp.  also  apakiri- 
tuna  &  okirati',  okirana.  —  A  secondary  meaning  of 
kirata  is  that  of  a  fraudulent  merchant,  a  cheat  (see 
kirasa  &  keratika). 

Kiiasa  (adj.)  [a  by-form  of  kirata]  false,  fraudulent 
J  iv.223  (=keratika). 

Kiriyati  [Pass,  of  kirati  or  karoti]  to  be  affected  or  moved 
Vism.  318. 

Kiriya,  Kiriya  &  Kriya  [abstr.  fr.  karoti]  i.  (n.)  — (a) 
( — ")  action,  performance,  deed  ;  the  doing -fulfilment ; 
cp.  "karana,  anta°,  making  an  end  of,  putting  a  stop  to 
(dukkhassa)  S  111.149  ;  iv.93  ;  Sn  454,  725  ;  —  kala°  "  ful- 
filment of  one's  time"  i.  e.  death  S  111. 122  ;  Pv  i.io>'; 
Sn  694  ;  Pug  17  ;  kusala"  performance  of  good  actions 
S  i.ioi  ;  v.456 ;  dana°  the  bestowing  of  gifts  PvA  123  ; 
papa°  commission  of  sin  Pug  19  =  23  ;  pufji^a"  the  per- 
formance of  good  works  S  1.87  =89 -^A  111.48 ;  a° 
PvA  54  mangala"  celebrarion  of  a  festival  PvA  86 ; 
massu-kiriya  the  dressing  of  the  beard  J  111.314  (cp. 
ra-karana  and  kappana)  ;  sacchi"  realization,  see  s.  v. 
-akiriya  the  non-performance  of,  omission,  abstaining 
from  (a°  akarana  =  veramapi)  J  111.530;  Vbh  285. — 
(b)  an  act  in  a  speaal  sense  =  promise,  vow,  dedication, 
intention,  pledge:  PvA  18;  justice:  Miln  171  ;  kiriyai) 
bhindati  to  break  one's  vow  Miln  206.  —  (c)  philo- 
sophically :  action  ineffective  as  to  result,  non-causative, 
an  action  which  ends  in  itself  (Mrs.  Rh.  1).  in  Dhs.  trsl. 
xciii.).  inoperative  (see  Cpd.  19).  In  this  sense  it  is 
grouped  with  kamma  (cp.  for  relation  kamma  :  kiriya  = 
Ger.  sachc  :  ursache).  Thus  is  the  theory  of  Makkhali : 
n'atthi  kammar),  n'atthi  kiriyar)  n'atthi  viriyan  ti  = 
tlK-ro  is  no  karma,  no  after-effect  and  no  vigour  in  this 
world  A  1.286  (different  at  D  1.53);  n'atthi  kiriyi  it 
does  not  matter  M  1.405.  —  2.  (adj.)  (a)  making  no 
difference,  indefinite ;  of  no  result,  as  def.  of  avyakata 


Kiriyata 


44 


Kilesa 


dhammSl  Vbh  io6,  i82=302=Dh8  566  and  989  (roaDO- 
dhitu  Idriya  neva  kusali  nAkusalS  na  ca  kamma- 
vipSka :  indifierent,  neither  good  nor  bad  and  having 
no  fruit  of  kamma),  same  of  jhina  Vbh  268=281  ; 
DhsA  388.  —  (b)  indecisive,  in  akiriyar)  vySkaroti  to 
give  an  indecisive  answer,  to  reply  evasively  D  1.53 
andsB 

•pada  (ttg.)  the  verb  (i.  e.  that  which  supplies  the 
action)  VvA  315;  -vada  (adj.)  promulgating  the  (view 
of  a)  consequence  of  action,  beUeving  in  merit  and 
demerit,  usually  comb''  with  kammavada  (q.  v.)  also 
"vadin :  D  1.115  (of  Gotama)  A  1.62;  Vin  1.71;  a°- 
denying  the  difference  between  merit  &  demerit  A 
lv.i74=Vin  1.234  ;  242,  Vin  111.2  ;  Arv.180  sq.  ;  S  111.73. 
(+natthikavada) ;  -vadin  adj.  to  prec.  A  1.62;  -hetu 
being  a  cause  of  discrimination  Dhs  1424  sq. 

Kirlyati  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  last]  the  performance  of  ( — °),  state 
of,  etc.     See  sakkacca°,  sacchi",  satacca". 

Killtin  (adj.)  enveloped,  adorned  Pv  in.g*  (=vethitaslsa). 

Kite  see  kili  (the  sound  click). 

Kiteftji  i^)  a  mat  of  fibre  or  rushes,  matting  Vism  327 ; 
also  a  screen,  a  fascine,  hurdle,  faggots  ;  a  crate,  crating  : 
tassa  gandhabbat)  kilailja-kaii^uvanar)  viya  hutva  .  .  . 
J  11.249  ;  "  his  music  was  Uke  the  scraping  of  a  mat  "  ; 
suvauiia-kilaflja  a  gilt  mat  J  iv.212.  As  a  fascine, 
used  in  making  a  road  ;  DhA  1.442.  as  a  screen  (comb^ 
with  chatta,  fan)  PvA  127;  as  faggots:  J  1.158;  Miln 
287  ;  as  a  crate  or  basket,  used  by  distillers :  M  1.228  = 
374  (soQcjlil^a-kilailja)  (cp.  the  trsl"  under  sori4^  '" 
J.P.T.S.  1909) ;  to  which  is  likened  the  hood  of  a  snake  : 
S  1. 106  (snake  =  mara). 

Ctenta  tpp.  of  kilamati]  tired,  exhausted,  weary,  either 
with  °kara  tired  in  body  PvA  43 ;  VvA  65  (indicating 
the  falhng  asleep);  or  "citta  tired  in  mind  D  1.20  = 
111.32  (padutthacitta+,  of  the  waning  of  the  gods); 
or  both  °kaya-citta  Pv  111.2';  opp.  akilanta-kaya-citta 
alert,  vigorous  ;  with  sound  body  and  mind. 

Kitema  [spelt  klama,  fr.  ktem]  fatigue  J  v.397  (  =  kilanta- 
bhava). 

SUamati  [Sk.  klamati,  a  variation  of  ^ramati  irl  from 
gri  to  lean,  cp.  kilanta,  as  "  sleepy,"  and  Lat.  clinSre, 
Clemens.  To  k  >  ^  cp.  kaniiia  >  ^n>ga,  kilissati  >  iH?- 
yati,  etc.  The  Dhtp  (222)  &  Dhtm  (316)  paraphrase 
kitem  by  gildne]  1.  to  go  short  of,  to  be  in  want  of 
(instr.)  DhA  11.79  ;  na  pin^akena  kilamati  does  not  go 
short  of  food  Vin  11. 15.  87  ;  iv.23  sq.  —  2.  to  weary,  to 
be  wearied,  tired,  fatigued ;  to  be  in  trouble  or  in 
misery  PvA  215  (to  be  incommodated)  277  (be  in 
distress) ;  fut.  kilamissami  PvA  76.  Cp.  pari".  ■ —  pp. 
kilanta. 

Kitematha  [fr.  ktem,  in  formation  cp.  samatha]  tiredness, 
fatigue,  exhaustion  M  1.168;  A  n.199;  S  1.136;  as 
kaya°,  dtta"  S  v.128 ;  as  daratha"  A  111.238 ;  PvA  23  ; 
as  nidda°  A  11.48,  50. 

Kilamita  [pp.  of  kilameti]  worn  out,  tired,  fatigued 
Pvii.83. 

Kitemeti  [denom.  fr.  kilama]  to  be  tired  or  fatigued 
J  1.115;  PPr-  kilamayanto  D  1.52.  —  pp.  kilainita. 

mSaa  [cp.  Sk.  kilasa]  a  cutaneous  disease,  perhaps 
leprosy,  enum"*  under  the  var.  diseases  (abadha) 
together  with  kuttha  gapi^a  k°  sosa  Vin  11.27:  ;  A  v.  1 10  ; 
Nd»  304». 

KilUka  &  °i7a  (adj.)  [fr.  last]  afflicted  with  a  cutaneous 
disease,  a  leper,  in  same  comb"  as  kilasa,  Vin  1.93  ; 
Kvu  31  ("iya). 


Kil&in  [fr.  gram,  cp.  kilamatha.  E  Miiller  P.  Gr.  38  = 
giasnu,  gU,  cp.  gilana]  exhausted,  tired  of  (c.  dat.  or 
inf.)  Vin  111.8 ;  a°  untiring  in  (c.  dat.  or  ace.)  S  1.47; 
V.162  ;  J  1.109  ;  Miln  382. 

Kili  (sometimes  kila)  [onomat.  fr.  sound-root  k|]  i.  in- 
decl.  the  sound  "click,"  of  the  noise  of  a  trap  when 
shutting  J  1.243;  "•363,  397  (as  "kili").  —  Also 
repeated  "  kilikili  ti  "  click,  click  J  1.70.  —  2.  as  n.  f. 
tinkling,  clicking,  ticking  (cp.  kipi),  in  kilii)  karoti  to 
tinkle  J  v. 203. 

Kilikilijrati  [denom.  fr.  kili  with  rednpUcation]  to  tinkle 
J  v. 206  ;  (freq.  fr.  kili  or  den.  fr.  kilikila ;  cp.  kilakjlS 
"  shouting  for  joy  "  AvS  1.48  and  in  cpd.  bahakara- 
kilakila  "  shouting  ha-ha  and  hail-hail "  ibid.  1.67 
MVastu  III. 312  and  Divy  459).  See  also  kipaloQayati. 
Note. — Kil  is  one  of  the  variations  of  the  sound-imitating 
g'l,  which  otherwise  appears  as  q"!,  q"l  in  Gr.  VfX-aioc, 
L.  cal-are,  Ohg.  hell-an  (cp.  Sk.  krandati  ?)  also  Gr. 
t:\atu>,  L.  clango,  Goth,  hlahjan  ("  laugh ")  and  in  Sk 
kolahala,  kokila,  cp.  cuculus  (cuckoo)  and  perhaps  Sk. 
ululi,  uluka  (owl),  Gr.  oXoXv^w,  L.  ululare.  See  also  the 
cognate  q'r  under  kitti. 

Kiliijati  [med-pass.  of  ki]id  =  Sk.  klid,  to  be  wet.  prob.  = 
iUl  to  stick  to,  and  confounded  with  STld,  cp.  also 
keiana  &  khela.  The  meaning  "  to  get  wet,  to  be 
soiled  "  only  in  pp.  kilinna.  —  The  Dhtm  (199),  however, 
expl'  k.  by  parideva  lament,  to  be  in  trouble,  which 
is  not  quite  in  harmony  with  the  meaning ;  it  is  more 
likely  that  in  P.  we  have  a  confusion  between  kBd  & 
klii  in  a  meaning  which  differs  from  Sk.]  to  become 
heated,  to  get  into  a  state  of  inflammation,  to  fester 
(of  wounds)  Vin  1.205  (vano  kilijjittha  festered) ;  Sn 
671  (gloss  for  kilissati,  expl""  at  SriA  481  by  puti  hoti). 
—  pp.  kilinna.  See  also  ukkiledeti  (to  clean  out  a 
stain,  to  "  disinfect "). 

Kilitttia  [pp  of  kilissati]  1 .  soiled,  stained,  impure ;  of 
gatta,  Umbs  J  1. 1 29  ;  of  civara,  cloak  Bdhd  92  ;  of  vattha, 
clothes  DhA  11.261  ;  of  pavara-puppha,  mango  blossom 
KhA  58=Vism  258.  —  2.  unclean,  lustful  (morally) 
bad,  in  "kamma  dirty  pursuit,  i.  e.  cohabitation  J 
IV.190;  PvA  195  (of  a  gaflika);  together  with  kuthita 
Miln  250. 

Kilinna  [pp.  of  kiUjjati]  1.  wet,  usually  with  saliva  and 
perspiration  Vin  111.37;  J  '-^l  (lala°),  164  (khela°) ; 
DA  1.284  (assu°);  VvA  67  (seda°).  —  2.  The  other 
meaning  of  kilid  (to  get  inflamed)  is  to  be  found  in 
kilinna-sarira  (adj.)  with  an  inflamed  body  (i.  e.  suffering 
from  a  skin-disease),  which  is  Bdhgh's  expl°  of  okilini : 
see  under  okira^. 

Kilissati  [Sk.  kli^yAti  =  kbi  or  flis  to  adhere,  cp.  P.  khela 
and  silesuma  or  semha,  Sk.  $le$ma,  slime.  Same  root 
as  Gr.  Xdfiai  snail ;  Ags.  sRm  slime.  Another,  speci- 
fically Pali,  meaning  is  that  of  going  bad,  being  vexed, 
with  ref.  to  a  heated  state.  This  lies  at  the  bottom  of 
the  Dhtp.  (445)  &  Dhtm.  (686)  espl"  by  upaidpe.] 
I.  to  get  wet,  soiled  or  stained,  to  dirty  oneself,  be 
impure  It  76  (of  clothes,  in  the  passing  away  of  a  deva) ; 
Th  I,  954  (kilisissanti,  for  kilissanti) ;  Ps  1.130.  Kilis- 
seyya  Dh  158  (expl""  as  ninda;)  labhati)  to  do  wrong. 
Cp.  pari". 

Kilissana  (nt.)  getting  dirty,  staining  J  1.8. 

Kilesa  (and  kl«sa)  [from  kilissati]  i.  stain,  soil,  impurity, 
fig.  affliction  ;  in  a  moral  sense,  depravity,  lust.  Its 
occurrence  in  the  Pifakas  is  rare;  in  later  works,  very 
frequent,  where  it  is  approx.  tantamount  to  our  terms 
lower,  or  unregenerate  nature,  sinful  desires,  vices, 
passions. 

I.  Kilesa  'as  obstacle   (see   "avarapa,   "-sampayutta, 
°-vippayutta,   °pahana)  Ps  1.33;   Sdhp  455;  bhikkhu 


Kileseti 


45 


Kivatika 


bhinnakileso  "  one  whose  passions  are  broken  up " 
Vbh  246.  PvA  51  ;  upasanta  kileso  "  one  whose  passions 
are  calmed  "  PvA  230  ;  no  ce  pi  jatu  puriso  kilese  vSto 
yatba  abbhaghanai)  vihine  Sn  348 ;  pariyodapeyya 
attinai)  cittaklesehi  pan^ito  S  v.24=A  v. 232,  253  =  Dh 
88.  2-.  Occurs  in  such  combinations  as  kilesi  ca  khandh^ 
ca  abhisankhSri  ca  Nd'  487  ;  kilesa+  khandha  :  Ps  1.69- 
72  ;  11.36,  140  ;  cp.  Vbh  44,  68  ;  kilesa  +  sarjsara  PvA  7  ; 
kammar)  kiles3  hetu  saT)ScLrassa  Nett  113,  cp.  191. — 
3.  kilesa  also  occurs  in  a  series  explanatory  of  tanhS,  in 
the  stereotype  comb"  of  t.,  ditthi.  kilesa  "  clinging  to 
existence,  false  ideas  and  lust "  (see  Nd^  s.  v.  tanhe^ 
V  ).  —  4.  In  the  same  function  it  stands  with  r3ga,  viz. 
rSga  dosa  moha  kilesa,  i.  e.  sensuality,  bewilderment 
and  lust  (see  Nd*  s.  v.  rSga  n.),  cp.  Dhs  982.  1006.  — 
The  grouping  as  dasa  kilesa-vatthuni  is :  lobha  dosa 
oioha  mina  ditthi  vicikicchS  thinar)  uddbaccai)  ahiri- 
kai)  anottappai)  Dhs  i548=Vbh  341  ;  Vism  683;  men- 
tioned at  Ps  1. 1 30.  —  These  with  the  exception  of  the 
last  two,  are  also  grouped  as  aftba  k°-vatthuni  at 
Vbh  385. — As  three  kilesas  (past,  present  and  future) 
at  Ps  11.217.  —  5.  The'  giving  up  of  kilesa  is  one  of  the 
four  essentials  of  perfection :  the  recognition  of  evil, 
the  removal  of  its  source  (which  is  kilesa),  the  meditation 
on  the  Path,  and  the  realization  of  the  extinction  of 
evil  (see  Nd'  s.  v.  dukkha  11.).  Kilesa  in  this  connec- 
tion interchanges  with  samudaya,  as  denoting  the  origin 
of  evil ;  cp.  samudayo  kilesS  Nett  191. 

-avarana  the  obstacle  of  lust  Vbh  342  =  Pug  1 3  ; 
Vism  177;  "avaraijata  id.  A  111.436 ;  -kkhaya  the 
destruction  of  lust  Bdhd  8 1  ;  -paripantha  danger  of  lust 
J  VI. 57 ;  •pabana  the  giving  up  of  worldly  lust  Vin 
111.92  sq.,  IV. 25;  Bdhd  129,  131;  -puflja  the  heap  of 
lusts ;  consisting  of  ten  qualities,  viz.  the  four  ah^ra 
(etc.  four  of  each  :),  vipallisS,  upidanani,  yogS,  gandha, 
Ssava,  ogha,  salla,  vifliiaoatthitiyo,  agatigamanSni. 
Nett  113,  114;  116  sq.  -bhumi  the  substratum  or 
essence  of  lust  Nett  2,  192  ;  there  are  four  mentioned 
at  Nett  161  :  anusaya°,  pariyutthana",  sagyojana", 
upadana° ;  -mara  death  which  is  the  consequence  of 
sinful  desire  DhA  1.317  (in  expl.  of  Mara);  -vatthuni 
(pi.)  the  (lo)  divisions  of  kilesa  (see  above)  Dhs  1229, 
1548 ;  Vism  20.  -vinaya  the  discipline  of  lust  Nett  22  ; 
•▼ippayutta  free  from  lust  (dhamma  principles,  to 
which  belongs  NibbSna)  Dhs  1555;  -sampayutta  con- 
nected or  aftected  with  lust  Dhs  1554  (as  12  principles) ; 
Vbh  18=30=44  =  56,  68,  80.  96,  120,  323. 

KUaieti  [v.  den.  fr.  kilesa]  to  become  soiled  or  stained 
(fig.) :  indriySni  kilesenti  Sdhp.  364. 

KilOffla  [  =  next  ?]  at  J  in. 49  taken  as  syn.  of  loma,  hair 
and  used  in  sense  of  pharusa,  shaggy,  rough  (in  kiloma 
maQsakhap^a  as  simile  for  kiloma-vaca). 

Kilomaka  [  =  Sk.  Woman,  the  right  lung,  cp.  Greek 
itXivfutv,  Lat.  pulmo]  the  pleura  M  1.185  =  Kh  in. 
Nett  77=Vbh  193;  J  iv.292  ;  Miln  26.  Discussed  in 
detail  at  Vism  257,  357. 

Kin  (adj.)  [Sk.  kr^a,  perhaps  to  Lat.  gracilis,  slim]  lean, 
haggard,  emaciated,  opp.  thula  fat  (VvA  103).  As  Ep. 
of  ascetics  Sn  165.  Dh  395  =  Th  i,  243;  esp.  as  Ep.  of 
petas:  Pv  11. i»';  Sn  426,  585;  Sdhp  loi  ;  Miln  303. 
For  phrase  kisa-dhamani-santhata  see  the  latter. 

Kii»l»  =  kisa  Vini.36=-J  1.83;  f.  kisika  Th  2.  27. 

Xtanti  [den.  fr.  kisa]  i.  to  get  thin,  to  become  exhausted, 
to  waste,  weary,  worry  J  vi.495  (pret.  ma  kisittha  = 
C.  ma  kisa  bhava).  —  2.  [Pass,  of  kassati.  kff]  see  pari". 

Xinara  in  neg.  akissava  at  S  i .  1 49  >s  doubtful  in  origin  and 
meaning.  The  trsl"  gives  "  without  wisdom."  Should 
we  read  akittima  or  akiflcana.  as  we  suggested  under 
a°.  although  this  latter  does  not  quite  agree  with  the 
sense  required  ? 


Kit*  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  lata]  a  general  term  for  insect  DhA 
1. 187;  usually  in  comb"  with  patanga,  beetle  (moth  ?) 
M  111.168  (with  pulava);  Sn  602;  J  vi.208  ;  Miln  272 
(°vanna);  PvA  67;  Vism  115.  kl^a  at  J  v. 373  means 
a  kind  of  shield  (  =  catipala  ?  c),  the  reading  should 
prob.  be  kheta. 

KItaka  (nt.)  one  or  all  kinds  of  insects  Vin  1.188. 

KKa  [pp.  of  kiijati]  bought  J  1.224  (°d5sa  a  bought  slave) 
n.185. 

KIdisa  (interr.  adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  kidj4  =  kir)  dria]  what  like  ? 
of  what  kind  ?  which  ?  (cp.  tadisa)  Sn  836,  1089  (=kio 
saijthita  Nd» ;  Pv  II.63;  PvA  50,  51;  VvA  76).  — As 
Np.  S  rv.193.  —  See  also  Kirisa. 

KIra  [cp.  Sk.  kira]  a  parrot  Abhp  640  (cp.  ciriti). 

KIri«a  =  kidi3a  Th  2,  385  (cp.  ThA  256). 

KI]a  =  a  pin,  a  stake,  see  Khila. 

KQati  [Sk.  kri^ati]  to  play,  sport,  enjoy  or  amuse  oneself 
Vin  1V.112  (udake  k.  sport  in  the  water);  Pv  im'* 
(  =  indriy5ni  paricarami  PvA  77)  D  11.196;  J  v.38 ; 
Th  2,  147  ;  PvA  16,  67,  77,  189  ;  —  c.  ace.  to  celebrate  : 
nakkhattag  J  1.50;  VvA  63;  PvA  73;  ThA  137; 
chanag  DhA  in. 100.  —  pp.  kllita.  Cans.  II.  kijapeti 
to  make  play,  to  train  J  n.267  (sappag  to  train  or  tame 
a  snake). 

KQanaka  [fr.  kilati]  a  plaything,  a  toy  Th  2,  384  (with 
ref.  to  the  moon). 

KQanS  (f.)  [fr-  same)  playing,  sport,  amusement  Nett  18 ; 
PvA  67;  DhA  III. 461  (nakkhatta°  celebration). 

Dia  f .  [fr.  krI4,  cp.  Sk.  kri(ja]  play,  sport,  enjoyment ; 
udakakilag  kilanti  enjoying  herself  on  the  water  PvA 
189.  —  uyyana"  amusement  in  the  park  DhA  1.220; 
IV.  3 ;  nakkhatta-kilag  kilati  to  celebrate  a  festival 
(i.  e.  the  full  moon  when  standing  in  a  certain  Nak- 
khatta)  VvA  109,  ThA  137;  sala-kila  sport  in  the  sala 
woods  J  v.38  ;  kiladhippSyena  in  play,  for  fun  PvA  215  ; 
—  Cp.  kilika. 

-gola  a  ball  to  play  with  Vism  254.  -goK-ka  id. 
Vism  256  (cp.  KhA  53) ;  ThA  255  ;  -pasuta  bent  on  play 
J  1.58;  -bhandaka  (nt.)  toy  Miln  229  (=ki|apanaka 
M  1.266);  -mandala  play-circle,  children's  games,  play- 
ground J  VI.332  ;'DhA  III. 146  ;  -sala  playhouse  J  Vl.332. 

Kllipanaka  i.  (nt.)  a  plaything,  toy  M  1.266,  384  ;  a  list 
given  at  A  v.203.  —  2.  (adj.)  one  who  makes  play 
J  IV. 308  (sappa°  a  snake- trainer,  cp.  sappag  kijipeti 
J  11.267). 

KQiki  (f.)  play,  sport,  amusement;  always — ".  like 
kumara"  D  11.196;  uyyana"  (sport  in  the  garden) 
J  111.275  ;  IV. 23,  390  ;  udaka"  ThA  186. 

Kllita  [pp.  of  kilati]  played  or  having  played,  playing, 
sporting;  celebrated  (of  a  festival)  A  iv.55  (hasita- 
lapita°);  PvA  76  (sadhu°).  — (nt.)  amusement,  sport, 
celebration  M  1.229  (kilita-jatag  kilati).  Cp.  saha- 
pagsu°° ;  see  also  keli  &  khicj^a. 

Klvant  &  Eva  (interr.  adj.  and  adv.)  [Sk.  kiyant  and 
kivant ;  formed  fr.  interr.  stem  ki]  how  great  ?  how 
much  ?  how  many  ?  and  in  later  language  how  ?  (cp. 
rel.  yiva).  As  indef. :  Kivanto  tattha  bherava  "  how- 
ever great  the  terrors  "  Sn  959  —  Kiva  katuka  how 
painful  ?  PvA  226  ;  k^-cirag  how  long?  Pj  and  Sn  1004  ; 
k°-dighag  same  Sn  p.  126  ;  k°  dure  how  far  }  Miln  16; 
DhA  1.386  ;  k'-mahantag  how  big  ?  DhA  1.29  ;  VvA  325  ; 
k°  bahug  how  much  ?  DhA  iv.193. 

Kivatika  (interr.  adj.)  [fr.  last]  of  number:  how  much  ? 
how  many  ?  Kivatika  bhikkhQ  how  many  Bhikkhus  ? 
Vin  1.117. 


Ku 


46 


Kujja 


Kd  (kud-  and  kum-)  3rd  stem  of  interrog.  [iron,  ka  (on  lorm 
and  meaning  cp.  kad;=Lat.*  quu  in  (qy)ubi,  like 
katara<  (qu)uter;  cp.  also  Vedic  ku  how  ?  Sk.  kutra, 
kutab,  kuha,  kva)  where  ?  when  ?  whither  ?  whence  ? 
As  adv.  in  cpds.  in  disparaging  sense  of  "  what  of  "  ? 
1.  e.  nothing  of,  bad,  wrong,  little,  e.  g.  kum-magga 
wrong  path;  kuk-kucca  =  kud-kicca  doing  wrong, 
trouUing  about  little  =  worry.  — kur)  at  PvA  57  {in 
expl.  of  kuiijara)  is  interpreted  as  pathavi. 

1 .  Kuto  where  from  ?  whence  ?  Dh  62  ;  k°bhayai) 
whence  i.  e.  why  fear  ?  Dh  212  sq. ;  Sn  271,  862  ;  Pv 
11.6*;  how  ?  J  VI. 330  ;  with  nu  whence  or  why  then  ? 
Sn  1049  (  =  kacci  ssu  Nd*  s.  v.).  kut-ettha  =kuto  ettha 
J.  1.53.  -na  kuto  from  nowhere  Sn  35,  919  ;  a-kuto  id. 
in  akutobhaya  "  with  nothing  to  fear  from  anywhere  " 
i.  e.  with  no  reason  for  fear  S  1.192  ;  Th  i,  510  ;  Th  11, 
3i}',  Su  56;  (modami  akutobhayo) ;  Pv  11. i^'  ('d.) ; 
kuto-ja  arisen  from  where  ?  Sn  270 ;  -"nidana  having 
its  foundation  or  origin  in  what  ?  Sn  270,  864  sq. 

2.  Kuda  at  what  time,  when  ?  (cp.  kadS)  Pug  27; 
iudef.  kudacanar)  :  at  auy  time,  na  k°  never  Sn  221 
(expl.  by  solasim  pi  kaiai)  SnA  277) ;  Dh  5,  210  ;  Bdhd 
125  ;  gamanena  na  pattabbo  lokass'  anto  k°  "  by  walk- 
ing, the  end  of  the  world  can  never  be  reached  "  S  1.62. 

3.  Kuva,  kva,  where  ?  Sn  970  (kuvar)  &  kuva)  indef. 
kvaci  anywhere ;  with  na :  nowhere ;  yassa  n'atthi 
upama  kvaci  "  of  whom  (i.  e.  of  Gotama)  there  is  no 
likeness  anywhere"  Sn  1137;  cp.  218,  395;  expl"*  by 
Nd'  like  kuhinci.     kuvar)  at  D  111.183. 

4.  Kutha  (kudha)  where  ?  J  v. 485  (--kuhir)). 

5.  Kuhii)  (=kuhar),  cp.  Sk.  kuha)  where  ?  whither  ? 
Often  with  fut. :  k°  bhikkhu  gamissati  Sp  41  i;  ko 
gacchasi  where  are  you  going  ?  Pv  11.8' ;  tvai)  ettakar) 
divasar)  k°  gata  where  have  you  been  all  these  days  ? 
PvA  6 ;  13 ;  42  ;  indef.  kuhiiici,  anywhere,  with  na  k°  : 
nowhere,  or :  not  in  anything,  in  :  n'atthi  tanha  k°  loke 
"  he  has  no  desire  for  anything  in  tliis  world  "  Sn  496, 
783,  1048  see  Nd  on  783  &  I048  =  kimhici ;  Dh  180. 

ilnkatthaka  (v.  1.  BB.  kukkuthaka)  a  kind  of  bird  J  vi.539. 
Kern  (Toev.  s.  v.)  takes  it  to  be  Sk.  kukkutaka,  phasia- 
nus  gallus. 

Kukkn  [cp.  Sk.  ki^ku  ?]  a  measure  of  length  S  v. 445  = 
A  IV. 404,  and  in  kukkukata  Vin  1.255  =v.i72  (cp- 
however  Vin.  7>*/s  1. 154,  on  Bdhgh's  note  =^  temporary). 

Knkkuka  [fr.  kukku]  "  of  tlie  kukku-mcasure,"  to  be 
measured  by  a  kukku.  Of  a  stone-pillar,  16  k's  high 
S  v.445  .■V  IV. 404. — akukkuka-jata  of  enormous 
height  (of  a  tree)  M  1.233=^8  111.141  (text :  akukkajata) 
=  iv.i67;  A  11.200  (text:  akukkuccakajata).  Kern 
{Toev.  s.  V.  kukka)  takes  it  to  uiean  "  grown  crooked," 
a°  the  opposite. 

Kokkncca  [kud-kicca]  I.  bad  doing,  misconduct,  bad 
character.  Def.  kucchitaij  katag  kukatar)  tassa  bh.lvo 
kukkuccai)  Vism  470  &  Bdhd  24  ;  —  Various  explana- 
tions in  Nd*  on  Sn  iio6=Dhs  1160,  in  its  literal  sense 
it  is  bad  behaviour  with  hands  and  feet  (hattha-pada°) 
J  i.ii9=DA  1.42  (in  comb"  with  ukkasita  &  khipita- 
sadda) ;  hattha"  alone  J  11. 142.  —  2.  remorse,  scruple, 
worry.  In  this  sense  often  with  vippatissara ;  and  in 
conn.  w.  uddhacca  it  is  the  fourth  of  the  five  nivaranas 
(q.  v.)  Vin  1.49;  iv.70  ;  D  1.246;  S  1.99;  M  1.437;  A 
1.134  =  Sn  1106;  A  1.282:  Sn  925;  Nd'  379;  DhA 
111.483  ;  IV. 88  ;  Sdhp  459  ;  Bdhd  96.  —  na  kinci  k'lj  na 
koci  vippatis-sareti  "  has  nobody  any  remorse  .'"  S 
Ill.l20  =  iv.46.  The  dispelling  of  scrupulousness  is  one 
of  the  duties  and  virtues  of  a  muni :  k'^ij  vinodctuij 
A  v. 72  :  k.  pahaya  D  1.71  =A  11.210  ---  Hug  59  ;  chinna- 
kukkucca  (adj.)  free  from  remorse  M  1.108  ;  khinasava 
k°-vupasanta  S  i.i67--Sn  82.  —  akukkucca  (adj.)  fitc 
from  worry,  having  no  remorse  Sn  850.  Kukkutcar) 
kunite  (c.  gen.)  to  be  scrupulous  about  J  1.377  '•  kariijsii 
DhA  IV.S8  ;  cp.  kukkuccag  apajjati  (e.\pl.  by  sankati) 
J  111.66. 


Kukkuccaka  (adj.)  conscientious  (too)  scrupulous,  "  faith- 
ful in  little  "  J  1.376  ;  VvA.  319. 

Knkknccayati  [denom.  fr.  kukkucca]  to  feel  remorse,  to 
worry  A  1.85 ;  Pug  26.  Der.  are  kukkuccayana  and 
°ayitatta  =  kukkucca  in  def.  at  Dhs  1 160  =Nd'  s.  v 

Knkkacciya  "^  kukkucca  Sn  972. 

Enkkn^a  (Sk.  kurkuta  &  kukkuta  ;  onomatopoetic  =  Lat. 
cucurio,  Ger.  kikeriki)  a  cock  Miln  363 ;  J  iv.58 ;  VvA 
163:  f.  kukkuti  a  hen  DhA  1.48;  ThA  255;  in  simile 
M  1.104-  357=A  IV. 125  sq.,  176  sq.  (cp.  °potako). 

-anda  (kukkut")  a  hen's  egg  Vism  261.  -patta  the 
wing  of  a  cock  A  iv.47.  -potaka  a  chicken,  in  simile 
M  i.i04  =  357=^A  IV. 126  =  176.  -yuddha  a  cock  fight 
D  1.6 ;  -lakkhana  divining  by  means  of  a  cock  D  1.9  ; 
-sampatika  a  shower  of  hot  ashes  (cock  as  symbol  of 
fire)  A  i.i59=D  111.75,  cp.  Divy  316  and  see  Morris, 
J.P.T.S.  1885,  38  ;  -sukara  (pi.)  cocks  and  pigs  D  1.5  = 
A  H.209=Pug  58;  D  1.141  ;  A  11.42  sq. ;  It  36. 

Knkkara  [Sk.  kurkura,  or  is  it  ku-krura  ?  Cp.  kurura)  a 
dog,  usually  of  a  fierce  character,  a  hound  A  111.389; 
V.271  ;  J  I.i75sq.;  189  ;  Pv  111.7';  Sdhpgo.  In  similes: 
S  IV.  198  ;  M  1.364  ;  A  iv.377.  —  f.  kukkurini  Miln  67. 

-vatika  (adj.)  imitating  a  dog,  cynic  M  1.387  (-f-duk- 
kara  karaka ;  also  as  k°-vata,  °sila,  °citta,  "akappa) ; 
D  111.6,  7;  Nett  99  (-fgovatika;  -sangha  a  pack  of 
hounds  A  111.75. 

Kokkn^a  [taken  as  variant  of  kukkuta  by  Morris,  J.P.T.S. 
'885,  39  ;  occurs  also  in  BSk.  as  Name  of  a  Purgatory, 
e.  g.  MVastu  1.6  ;  111.369,  455.  The  classical  Sk.  form  is 
kukula]  hot  ashes,  embers  S  111.177  ;  J  hi  34  ;  Kvu  208, 
cf.  trans.  127;  with  ref.  to  Purgatory  S  1.209;  J  v.143 
(°nama  Niraya) ;   Sdhp  194  ;  Pgdp  24. 

-vassa  a  shower  of  hot  ashes  J  1.73 ;  rv.389  (v.  1.). 

Kakkusa  i.  the  red  powder  of  rice  husks  Vin  H.280  (see 
Bdgh  11.328:  kukkusai]  mattikag  =kuijdakan  c'eva 
mattikan  ca).  —  2.  (adj.)  variegated,  spotted  J  vi.539 
(  =  kalakabara  540  ;  v.  1.  B.  ukkusa). 

Konkama  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  kunkuma]  safiron  Miln  382 ; 
Vism  241. 

Kankninin  (adj.)  fidgety  J  v. 435. 

Kunkumiya  (nt.)  noise,  tumult  J  v. 437  (=kolahala). 

Knccbi  (f.)  [Sk.  kuk^i];!,  cp.  ko^]  a  cavity,  esp.  the  belly 
(Vism  10 1 )  or  the  womb;  arnjava"  the  interior  of  the 
ocean  1.119,  227  ;  J  v. 416;  jala°  the  hollow  of  the  net 
J  1. 210.  As  womb  frequent,  e.  g.  niatu^  J  1.149: 
DA  1.224;  PvA  19,  63,  III,  195;  as  pregnant  womb 
containing  gabbha  J  1.50  ;  11.2  ;  vi.482  ;  DhA  11.261 

-daha  enteric  fever  DhA  1.182;  -pariharika  sustain- 
ing,'feeding  the  belly  D  1.71  =Pug  58  ;  -roga  abdominal 
trouble  J  1.243  .'  -vikara  disturbance  of  the  bowels  Vin 
1.301  ;  -vitthambhana  steadying  the  action  of  the  bowels 
(digestion)  Dhs  646  =  740=875. 

Kacchita  [Sk.  kutsita,  pp.  of  kntsay]  contemptible,  vile, 
bad,  only  in  Com'  VvA  215  ;  in  def.  of  kaya  KhA  38  ; 
in  def.  of  kusala  DhsA  39  ;  VvA  169  ;  in  def.  of  kukkucca 
Vism  470  ;  in  def.  of  pagsu-kula  Vism  60. 

Kucchimant  (adj.)  [fr.  kucchi]  pregnant  J  v. 181. 

Kajati  Tor  kujjati  ?  see  kujja]  in  kujant.l  dinalocana 
Sdhp  166:  to  be  bent,  crooked,  humpbacked  ? 


not  going  crooked,  in 


Kujana  (aJj.)  [fr.  kujati]  only  neg.  a' 
ratho  akujano  nama  S  133. 

Kujja  (adj.)  [Sk.  kubja.  humpbacked  ;  ^/qub,  Lat.  cubare. 
Or.  Kvipw,  Mhg.  hogger.  humpback]  ht.  "bent,"  as  nt. 
kujjaij  in  ajjhena-kujjar)  Sn  .'42  crookedness,  deceit, 
fraud  (cp.  Sn.\  286  kuta  ?).  Cp.  kujati  &  khujja,  see 
also  ava".  uk ',  nik°,  pati°,  pali". 


Knjjhati 


47 


Kudda 


Knjjhsti  [cp.  Vedic  krunhyate,  fr.  krndh]  to  be  angry 
with  (dat.)  A  1.283  =Pug  32.  48;  Vism  306;  ma  kuj- 
jhittha  kujjhatar),  "don't  be  angry"  S  1.240 ;  ma 
kujjhi  J  III. 22  ;  na  kujjheyya  Dh.  224  ;  ger.  kujjhitva 
PvA  117,  grd.  kujjhitabba  Pv  iv.  i  .'* 

Kojjhana  (adj.)  [fr.  kujjhati]  angry  =  kodhana  VvA  71; 
Pug  ,\  215  (°bhava).  Kujjhana  (f.)  anger,  irritation, 
*^ogether  with  kujjhitattai)  in  def"  ofkodhaDhs  1060  = 
Pug  j8,  22. 

Kajjhapana  (nt.)  [Cans,  formation  fr.  kujjhati]  being 
augry  at  DhA  iv.182. 

Kofica  (nt.)  [krnic,  cp.  Sk.  kroSati,  Pali  kofica,  Lat. 
crocio.  comix,  corvus  ;  Gr.  jcpiifw,  upavyi) ;  all  of  crow- 
ing noise  :  from  sound-root  kj.  see  note  on  gala]  a 
crowing  or  trumpeting  noise  (in  compounds  only). 
— kara  cackling  (of  a  hen)  ThA  255  ;  -nida  trumpeting 
(of  an  elephant)  J  111.114. 

Koiieika  (f.)  a  key,  Bdhgh  on  C.V.  v.29,  2  (Vin  11.319)  cp. 
tala  Vin  11. 148 ;  Vism  251  ("kosaka  a  case  for  a  key)  : 
D.\  1.200,  207,  252  ;  DhA  II. 143. 

KuAcita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  kaflc  or  knific  ;  cp.  Sk.  kruiicati,  to 
be  crooked.  Lat.  crux,  Ohg.  hrukki,  also  Sk.  kuncita 
bent]  bent,  crooked  J  1.89  (°kesa  with  wavy  hair)  ; 
V.202  (°agga:  kannesu  lambanti  ca  kuncitagga:  expH 
on  p.  204  by  sihakundale  sandhaya  vadati,  evidently 
taking  kuflcita  as  a  sort  of  earring)  ;  of  Petas,  Sdhp 
102. 

KaAja  (m.)  a  hollow,  a  glen,  dell,  used  by  DhpSLIa  in  expl" 
of  kufljara  at  VvA  35  (kuiijaro  ti  kufije  giritale  ramati) 
and  PvA  57  (kui)  pathavii)  jirayati  kufijo  suvarag 
aticarati  kunjaro  ti).     -nadi°  a  river  glen  DA  1.209. 

Kofijara  (m.)  [Deriv.  unknown.  The  sound  is  not  unlike 
an  elephant's  trumpeting  &  need  not  be  Aryan,  which 
has  hasti.  The  Sk.  of  the  epics  &  fables  uses  both 
h°and  k°]  an  elephant  Vin  11. 195  ;  M  1.229,  375  ;  S  1. 157  ; 
Dh  322,  324,  327;  J  V.336;  Vv  5';  Pv  i.ii';  Dh.-\ 
IV. 4  ;  ThA  252  ;  Miln  245.  -deva°  chief  of  the  gods, 
Ep.  of  Sakka  Vv  47'  ;  J  v.  158. 

-vara  a  state  elephant  VvA  181.     -sala  an  elephant's 
stable  DhA  iv.203. 

Ka^  a  pitcher  Vv  50*;  J  1.120;  DhA  11. 19,  2O1  ;  m.i8. 
Kuta  is  to  be  read  at  J  1.145  for  ki'ita  (antokufe  padipo 
viya  ;  cp.  ghata).  Noie.  Kufa  at  DhsA  263  stands  for 
knta'  sledge-hammer. 

Kanaka  a  cheat  Pgdp  12  ;  read  kutaka.  So  al.so  in  gama 
kutaka  S  11.258. 

Kataja  a  kind  of  root  (Wrightia  antidyscnterica  or  Ncri- 
cum  antidysentericum),  used  as  a  medicine  Vin  1.201 
(cp.  Vin.  Texts  11.45). 

Ka(ati  see  pati°  and  cp.  kuta',  kotteti  &  in  diff.  sense 
kutta'. 

Katava  (v.  l.  S.  ku' ;  B.  kulavaka)  a  nest  J  111.74  ;  v.  I.  at 
DhA  11.23  (for  kutika). 

Katiki  [i)  from  kuti  [B.  Sk.  knfika  Av.;^.  11.15O]  a  little 
hut,  usually  made  of  sticts,  gras.s  and  clay,  poetical  of 
an  abode  of  a  bliikkhu  Vin  111.35,  41,  42  =VvA  10  ;  I'vA 
42.  81;  DhA  11.23.  Cp.  also  tii.ia",  d5ru° ;  arafiOa" 
ahutin  the  woodsS  1.61  ;  iii.iiO  ;  iv.380.  Often  fig.  for 
body  (see  kaya) .  Th  1,  i.  —  As  adj.  -°.  c.  g.  attha- 
kutiko  gimo  a  village  of  8  huts  Dh  1.313. 

Ka^imbika  (also  kutumbika)  a  man  of  property,  a  land- 
lord, the  head  of  a  family,  J  1.68,  126,  169.  225  ;  11.423  : 
P^'A  31,  38.  73,  82.     Kutumbiya-putta  Np.  Vism  48. 


KatUa  (adj.)  bent,  crooked  (cp.  knj  and  kuc,  Morris 
J.P.T.S.  1893,  15)  J  111.112  (=jimha);  Miln  297  (°san- 
kutila).  418  (of  an  arrow);  nt.  a  bend,  a  crook  Miln 
351.     -a°  straight  Vv  16'  (magga). 

-bhava  crookedness  of  character  Vism  466  ;  PvA  51  ; 
VvA  84.     -a°  uprightness  Bdhd  20. 

Ka^ilati  (f.)  [fr.  kutila]  crookedness,  falseness,  in  a°,  up- 
rightness of  character  Dhs  50,  51  ;  DhA  1. 173. 

Kntl  (kuti°)  (f.)  any  single-roomed  abode,  a  hut.  cabin, 
cot,  shed  Vin  111.144  (on  vehSsa-kuti  see  vehSsa  & 
Vin  iv.46) ;  Sn  18.  19  ;  Pv  11.2*  ;  VvA  188,  256  (civara°, 
a  cloak  as  teat).  See  also  kappiya°,  gandha°,  paQna°, 
vacca". 

-kara  the  making  of  a  hut,  in  °sikkhapada,  a  rule 
regarding  the  method  of  building  a  hut  J  11.282  ;  111.78. 
351  ;  -dijsaka  (a)  destroying  a  hut  or  nest  DhA  11.  23; 
-purisa  a  "  hut  man,"  a  peasant  Miln  147. 

Kntokniicaka  see  katukaiicuka. 

Katnmba  (nt.)  family  property  &  estates  J  1.122,  225; 
raja"  (and  "kutumbaka)  the  king's  property  J  1.369, 
439.  -kutumbai)  santhapeti  to  set  up  an  establishment 
J  1.225  ;  i'^^.^  ;  iii.37t>. 

Knlombika  see  kufimbika. 

Kntta'  [cp.  kotteti,  kat  to  crush,  which  is  expl"*  by  Dhtp 
(9".  555)  *  bhtm  (115.  781)  together  with  ko\\  by 
chedana;  it  is  there  taken  together  with  kut  of  kuta', 
which  is  expl''  as  kotilla]  powder.  Sasapa"  mustard 
powder  Vin  1.205  i  U-'S'  (at  the  latter  passage  to  be 
read  for  "kudda,  cp.  Vin  Texts  111.171).  205. 

Kntta'  [of  doubtful  origin  &  form.  cp.  var.  BSk.  forms 
kot|a-r5ja,  kota°  &  kodda",  e.  g.  MVastu  1.231]  only 
found  in  cpds.  "daruni  sticks  in  a  wattle  &  daub  wall 
Vism  354,  and  in  kutfa  raja  subordinate  prince,  possibly 
kudda"  a  wattle  and  daub  prince  S  in.  1 56  (v.  1.  kudda")  ; 
=  v.44  (v.  1.  kujja") ;  cp.  kud(Ja°  J  v. 102  sq.,  where 
expl.  papa-raja,  with  vv.  II.  kuta  and  kuta.  See  also 
khujja  and  khuddaka-raja. 

Knttha'  (nt.)  (cp.  kns;  Sk.  kusthS  f.)  leprosy  J  v.69.  72, 
89.  VI. 196.  383;  Vism  35  (-|-gao4a);  DA  1.260,  261, 
272.  The  disease  described  at  DhA  161  sq.  is  probably 
leprosy.  Cp.  kilSsa.  On  var.  kinds  of  leprosy  see 
J  v.69,  IV.  196. 

Kattha'  a  kind  of  fragrant  plant  (Costus  speciosus)  or 
spice  J  VI. 537. 

Katthita  hot.  sweltering  (of  uiiha)  S  iv.289  (v.  I.  kikita) ; 
molten  (of  tamba,  cp.  uttatta)  Pgdp  33.  See  also 
kathati  kuthati,  ukkaUhita  &  pakkuUhita. 

Kn^hin  a  leper  M  1.506  (in  simile) ;  Th  i,  1054  ,  J  v. 413  ; 
VI. 196  ;  IJd  49  ;  DhA  III. 255. 

Katthilika  the  pericarp  or  envelope  of  a  seed  (phala°) 
VvA  344  (=sipatika). 

Katharl  (f)  [cp  Sk.  kuthara.  axe  =  Lat.  culter,  knife 
from  *(s)aer,  to  cut,  in  Lat.  caro.  etc].  An  axe,  a 
hatchet  Vin  111.144  ;  S  iv.160,  167  ;  M  1.233  =  3  ITI.141  ; 
A.  1. 14 1  ;  II.20I  ;  IV.  I  71  ;  J  1.43 1  ;  DhA  111.59  ;  PvA  277. 
Purisassa  hi  jatassa  kuthSrl  jilyate  mukhe  "  when  man 
is  born,  together  with  him  is  bom  an  axe  in  his  mouth 
(to  cut  evil  speech)  "  S  i.i49^Sn  657  =  A  v. 174. 

Ka^amalaka  [for  kusuma"]  an  opening  bud  A  iv.i  17.  1 19. 

Kn44a  [to  ksad  to  grind,  cp.  cupna]  a  wail  built  of  wattle 
and  daub",  in  "nagaraka  "  a  little  wattle  and  daub 
town  "  D  11.146,  169  (cp.  Kh.D.  on  this  in  Buddh. 
Suttas  p.  99).  Three  such  kinds  of  simply-built  walls 
are  mentioned  at  Vin  iv.266,  viz.  itthaki"  of  tiles,  sili" 


Kudda-tnula 


48 


Kutti 


of  stone,  dim"  of  wood.  The  expl"  of  ku(^i^a  at 
Vism  394  is  "  geha-bhittiya  etam  adhivacanar)." 
Ku^ijia-raja  see  under  kutta).  Also  in  tirokuc^ijat)  out- 
side the  wall  M  1.34=11.18;  A  iv.55  ;  Vism  394,  and 
tiroku(|l4esu  Kh  vni'  =  Pv  is'.  —  parakuc^dai]  nissaya 
J  11.431  (near  another  man's  wall)  is  doubtful;  vv.  U. 
S.  ku(j(Jhai).  B.  kutar)  and  kuttai).  (kudija-)  pada  the 
lower  part  of  a  lath  and  plaster  wall  Vin  11. 152. 
Note.  Ku<J(Ja  at  Vin  11. 151  is  to  be  read  kuU^- 

Ku44B*lll&la  a  sort  of  root  Vin  in. 15. 

Ko^^aIca  >°  ^'''^°  ^^^  <^v'°  having  single  or  double  walls 
J  i-92- 

KoQa  (adj.)  [cp.  ku^i  lame  from  *4er,  to  bend  =  Gr.  ictiXXoc 
crooked  and  lame,  Lat.  curvus  &  coluber  snake]  dis- 
torted, bent,  crooked,  lame  Pv  11.9^'  (v.  1.  kunda ;  cp. 
PvA  123  .  kunita  patikunita  an-ujubhuta) ;  DhA  111.71 
(kcina°  blind  and  lame). 

Ka^apa  [der.  fr.  kuria  ?  ch.  Sk.  kuijapa]  a  corpse,  carcase. 
Vin  111.68=  M  1.73  =  A  IV. 377  (ahi°,  kukkura°,  manussa' 
puti°) ;  A  iv.i98sq.  ;  Sn  205;  J  1.61,  146;  PvA  15. 
Kaothe  isatto  kuriapo  a  corpse  hanging  round  one's 
neck  M  1.120;  J  1.5;  also  Vin  lii.68«a  — The  above- 
mentioned  list  of  corpses  (ahi°,  etc.)  is  amplified  at 
Vism  343  as  follows :  hatthi",  assa",  go°,  mahigsa", 
manussa",  ahi°,  kukkura".     Cp.  kalebara. 

-gandha  smell  of  a  rotting  corpse  SnA  286  ;  PvA  32. 

Kavalia  in  kuoalikata  and  kunaliraukha  contracted,  con- 
torted Pv  11.9  '••'8-  (Hardy,  but  Minayeff  and  Hardy's 
S.S.  Kui)(Jali°),  expl""  PvA  123  by  mukhavikarena 
vikunitag  (or  vikucitar)  SS.)  sakunitai)  (better;  sanku- 
citai])  (cp.  Sk.  kac  or  kaiic  to  shrink). 

Koi^la  N.  of  a  bird  (the  Indian  cuckoo)  J  v. 2 14  sq. 
(kun&la-j&taka).  Kuijala-daha  "  cuckoo-lake,"  N.  of 
one  of  the  seven  great  lakes  in  the  Hiraavant  Vism  416. 

Ko^ilaka  [fr.  kuo&Ia]  the  cuckoo  J  v. 406  (  =  kokiIa). 

Ka^i  (adj.)  deformed,  paralysed  (orig.  bent,  crooked,  cp. 
kuna)  only  of  the  arm.  ace.  to  Pug  A  iv.19  either  of  one 
or  both  arms  (hands)  J  1.353  (expl.  kuothahattha)  = 
DhA  1.376;  Pug  51  (kaua,  kuiji,  khanja) ;  see  khaiija. 

Kimita  (or  kui;iika)=kuna  PvA  123,  125  (or  should  it  be 
kucita  ?).     Cp.  pati°. 

Kaotha  [cp.  ku(>a  and  kuijda]  i .  bent,  lame ;  blunt  (of  a 
sword)  DhA  1.31 1  (°kuddila) ;  Pug  A  1.34  (of  asi,  opp. 
tikkhina) ;  °tina  a  kind  of  grass  Vism  353.  —  2.  a 
cripple  J  II. 1 17. 

Knvthita  [a  variant  of  gunthita,  as  also  found  in  cpd. 
palikuijthita]  Pv  11. 3'  and  kundita  S  1.197,  tioth  in 
phrase  patjsu",  according  to  Hardy,  PvA  p.  302  to  be 
corrected  to  gunthita  covered  with  dust  (see  guijtheti). 
The  V.  I.  at  both  places  is  "kutthita.  Also  found  as 
paQsukunthita  at  J  vi.559  (  =  °makkhita  C ;  v.  1.  B  B. 
kundita). 

Ka^4a  (a)  bent,  crooked  DA  1.296  (°daij(Jaka) ;  PvA  181. 

KoQ^aka  the  red  powder  of  rice  husks  (cp.  kukkusa* 
Vin  II. 151  ;  280  ;  J  11.289  (text  has  kun^adaka)  =DhA 
III. 325  (ibid,  as  acama").  Also  used  as  toilet  powder: 
DhA  II. 261  (kuij(Jakena  sarirar)  makkhetva).  — sakun- 
daka  (-bhatta)  (a  meal)  with  husk  powder-cake  J 
V.383. 

-angarapiiva  pancake  of  rice  powder  DhA  111.324; 
-kucchi  in  "sindhavapotaka  "  the  rice-  (cake)  bellv 
colt  "  J  11.288  ;-khadaka  (a)  eating  rice-powder  J  11.288  ; 
(cp.  DhA  III. 325) ;  -dhuma,  lit.  smoke  of  red  rice  powder, 
Ep.  of  the  blood  J  in. 542  ;  -puva  cake  of  husk-powder 
J  1.422  sq.  ;  -mutthi  a  handful  of  rice-powder  \'vA  5  ; 
DhA  1.425  ;  -yagu  husk-powder  gruel  J  11.288. 


KoQ^^Ia  [cp.  kuii4a>  orig.  bending,  i.  e.  winding]  a  ring 
esp.  earring  Ai. 254  =  111. 16  ;  J  iv. 358  (su°  with  beautiful 
earrings) ;  DhA  1.25.  Frequent  as  maiji°,  a  jewelled 
earring  Vin  n.156  ;  S  1.77  ;  M  1.366  ;  Pv  11.9"  ;  siha°  or 
sihamukha°  an  earring  with  a  jewel  called  "  lion's 
mouth  "  J  V.205  ( =ku6cita),  438.  In  sagara"  it  means 
the  ocean  belt  Miln  220=  J  in. 32  (where  expl.  as  saga- 
ramajjhe  dipavasena  thitatta  tassa  kun<Jalabhutar)). 
Cp.  also  rajju"  a  rope  as  belt  VvA  212.  — kun(Jala- 
vatta  turning,  twisting  round  D  n.i8  (of  the  hair  of  a 
Mahapurisa). 

Envfalin*  (adj.)  [fr.  ku^<Jala]  wearing  earrings  S  iv.343 ; 


J    V.136;     VI. 478. 
DhA  1.23  ;  Pv  II. 5. 


su°    Vv    73'.     Cp.    Mattha°    Np. 


Pv    11.9*'.     See 


KoQ^alin'    in    kuQ<^ali-kata    contorted    Pv 
ku^alin  and  cp.  Morris,  J.P.T.S.  1893.  14. 

KoQ^i  (^')  [  =  kuiidika]  a  pail  or  pot,  in  phrase  kuncji- 
paddhana  giving  a  pailful  of  milk  J  vi.504  (Kern, 
Toev.  s.  V.  compares  phrase  Sk.  k^rjsy'opadohana  & 
proposes  reading  kund'  opadohana.  See  also  kar)- 
supadhjrana). 

KaQ4ika  [cp.  kuoda]  bending,  in  ahi-kundika  (?)  a  snake 
charmer  (lit.  bender)  J  iv.3o8(v.  1.  S.  gurithika)see  ahi; 
and  catu-kundika  bent  as  regards  bis  four  limbs,  i.  e. 
walking  on  all  fours  M  1.79  ;  Pv  111.2*  (expl.  at  PvA 
181). 

KiUji^ikft  (f.)  a  water-pot  J  1.8,  9,  n.73  (  =  kamarida1u), 
317  ;  v. 390  ;  DhA  1.92  (cp.  kuta). 

Kutaka  (adj.)  eager,  in  sakutuka  eagerness  Dclvs  IV.41, 

Kntnmbaka  (-puppha)  N.  of  a  flower  J  1.60. 

Knt&hala  (m.  nt.)  tumult,  excitement;  Davs  v.22  ;  DhA 
in. 1 94  (v.  1.  kot").  a°  (adj.)  unperturbed,  not  sham- 
ming J  1.387  (expl.  by  avikimia-vaco  of  straight  speech). 
See  also  kotuhala. 

-mangala  a  festivity,  ceremony,  Nd^  in  expl.  of 
anekarupena  Sn  1079,  1082  ;  -sala  a  hall  for  recreation, 
a  common  room  D  1.179=8  iv.398  =  M  11.2,  cp.  Divy 
143- 

Kato  see  under  ka°. 

Katta  (nt.)  [Der.  fr.  katta  =  Sk.  krtr  as  krttra  =  P.  kutta, 
cp.  Sk.  kftrima  artificial  =  P.  kuttima,  in  caus.  —pass. 
sense  =  kappita  of  kjp)]  "  being  made  up."  i.  Work. 
The  beginning  of  things  was  the  work  of  Brahma. 
The  use  of  kutta  implies  that  the  work  was  so  easy 
as  to  be  nearer  play  than  work,  and  to  have  been 
carried  out  in  a  mood  of  graceful  sport.  D  111.28. 
—  2.  behaviour,  i.  e.  charming  behaviour,  coquetry 
J  11.329,  comb**  with  lila  (graceful  carriage)  J  1.296, 
433;  and  with  vilasa  (charming  behaviour)  J  11.127; 
IV. 219.  472;  itthi"  and  purisa"  A  iv.57  =  Dhs  633 
(expl.  at  DhsA  321  by  kiriya).  — As  adj.  in  kuttavala, 
well  arranged,  plaited  tails  D  1.105  (expl"*  at  DA  1.274 
as  kappita-vala  ;  cp.  kappita). 

Kattaka  [der.  f  r.  kutta,  that  which  is  made  up  or  "  woven," 
with  orig.  meaning  of  karoti  to  weave  ?]  i .  nt.  a  woollen 
carpet  (DA  1.87  =  as  used  for  dancing-women),  together 
with  kafthissa  and  koseyya  in  list  of  forbidden  articles 
of  beddingD  1.7  =A  i.iSi  =Vin  1. 192  =11.163.  —  2.  adj. 
"  made  up."  pretending,  in  samana-k°  a  sham  ascetic 
Vin  in. 68-71. 

Kattama  in  kasi-kuttama  J  vi. 49  should  be  read  as  kisik'- 
uttaraa. 

Kntti  (f.)  [cp.  kutta]  arrangement,  fitting,  trapping, 
harnessing  Vin  n.io8  (sara°  :  accuracy  in  sound,  har- 
mony);   J    in. 314    (massu°   beard-dressing,   expl''    by 


Kutthaka 


49 


Kumbha 


massu-kiriyi.  Here  corresponding  to  Sk  'klpti !) ; 
IV.3J2  (battha°,  elephant  trappings,  cp.  kappanJ) ; 
V.215  (  =  karaQa,  cp.  Sk.  kalpa). 

Katth&ka  S  1.66  should  be  replaced  by  v.  1.  kotthnka. 

Kntha  see  under  ku°. 

Knthati  [Sk.  kvathati  cp.  kathati.  kathita.  kutthita, 
ukkatthita  &  upakulita*]  to  cook,  to  boil  :  kuthanto 
(ppr)  boiling  (putrid,  foul?  So  Kern.  Toev,  s.  v.) 
J  VI.  105  (of  VetaraijI,  cp.  kuUhita). — pp.  kuthita. 

Knthana  (nt.)  [fr.  kvath=kuth]  digestion  Vism  345. 

Knthita  [pp.  of  kuthati]  I.  boiled,  cooked  Th  2,  504; 
KhA  62;  Vism  2  59  =  KhA  58.  Cp.  vikkuthita. — 
2.  digested  Vism  345.  —  3.  fig.  tormented,  distressed 
(perhaps:  rotten,  foul,  cp.  kilijjati  =  puti  hoti)  Miln 
250  (  +  kilittha).  —  Cp.  Vin.  Texts  11.57  on  Bdhgh's 
note  to  MV  vi.14,  5. 

KndSQ^^'^  ^  throng  J  111.204. 

Kndaua  (kud-assu)  interj.  to  be  sure,  surely  (c.  fut.) 
A  1. 107 ;  Nett  87 ;  SnA  103. 

Kndi  see  under  ku°. 

Kodin  (ku-dSra)  a  bad  wife  Pv  iv.i". 

Kod&rikft  at  Pv  :v.i"  &  PvA  240  is  spelling  for  kuth&rik&. 

Kaditthi  (i)  [ku  +  ditthi]  wrong  belief  Sdhp  86. 

KaddUa  a  spade  or  a  hoe  (kanda-mula-phalagaha(i'- 
attbai)  DA  1.269)  Vin  in. 144;  J  v.45  ;  DhA  iv.218. 
Often  in  comb"  kuddcila-pi^ka  "  hoe  and  basket " 
D  i.ioi  ;  S  11.88  ;  v.53 ;  A  1.204 ;  11.199 ;  J  1.225,  336. 

Kaddilaka=prec.  DhA  1.266. 

Knddha  (adj.)  [pp.  of  kujjhati]  angry  A  iv.96  (and  akkud- 
dha  IV.93) ;  Pv  1.7' ;  J  11.352,  353 ;  vi.517  ;  DhA  11.44. 
Nom.  pi.  kuddh&se  It  2  =  7. 

Kadrflia  a  kind  of  grain  Miln  267 ;  also  as  kudrOsaka 
Vin  IV.264  ;  D  111.71  ;  Nd*  314  ;  DA  1.78  ;  DhsA  331. 

Knnta  [cp.  Sk.  kunta  lance  ?]  a  kind  of  bird,  otherwise 
called  ad&sa  J  iv.  466. 

Knntanl  (f-)  a  curlew  (koilca),  used  as  homing  bird 
J  111.134. 

Knntha,  only  in  comb°  kuntha-kipillaka  (or  °ik&)  a  sort 
of  ant  J  1.439 ;  iv.142  ;  Sn  602  (°ika) ;  Vism  40S  ;  KhA 
189.    Cp.  kimi. 

Knnda  (nt.)  the  jasmine  DSvs  v.28. 

Konnadl  (f)  (kui)-nadi)  a  small  river,  a  rivulet  S  1.109; 
11.32,  118;  A  IV. 100;  J  111.22 1  ;  Vism  231,  416;  DA 
1.58. 

Knpatha  (kuij  +  patha)  wrong  path  (cp.  kummagga) 
Miln  390. 

Knpita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  kuppati] — i.  shaken,  disturbed 
Th  2,  504  (by  fire  =  ThA  292);  J  ni.344  (°indriya). — 
2.  offended,  angry  D  iii.238  =  M  noi^A  lv.46o  = 
V.18;  M.  1.27;  A  III. 196  sq. ;  Pv  1.6'.  Often  comb'' 
with  anattamana  "  angry  and  displeased  "  Vin  11.189 : 
D  1.3,  90  (  =  DA  1.255  kuddha).  —  As  nt.  kupitai)  dis- 
turbance, in  paccanta°  a  disturbance  on  the  borderland 
]  111.497  ;  Miln  314 ;  PvA  20. 

Kappa  (adj.)  [ger.  of  kuppati]  shaking,  unsteady,  movable  ; 
A  111.128  ("dhammo,  unsteady,  of  a  pSpabhikkhu)  ; 
Sn  784  ;  of  a  kamma:  a  proceeding  that  can  be  quashed 
Vin  11.71  (also  a°).  nt.  kuppag  anger  Vin  11.133  (karis- 


simi  I  shall  pretend  to  be  angry).  — akuppa  (adj.)  and 
akuppaQ  (nt.)  steadfast,  not  to  be  shaken,  an  Ep.  of 
arahant  and  nibbSna  (cp.  asankuppa) ;  akuppa-dhammo 
Pug  1 1  (see  akuppa).  Akuppai)  as  freedom  from  anger 
at  Vin  11.251. 

Knppaii  [Sk.  kupyate,  *qap  to  be  agitated,  to  shake— 
Lat.  cupio,  cupidus,  "  to  crave  with  agitation,"  cp. 
semantically  Lat.  tremere  >  Fr.  craindre]  to  shake,  to 
quiver,  to  be  agitated,  to  be  disturbed,  to  be  angry.  — 
aor.  kuppi,  pp.  kupita,  ger.  kuppa.  caus.  kopeti  A  ill.  10 1 ; 
Sn.  826.  854;  Pug  II,  12,  30.  Of  the  wind  Miln  135; 
of  childbirth  udaravftto  kuppi  (or  kupita)  J  11.393,  433  ; 
paccanto  kuppi  the  border  land  was  disturbed  J  iv.446 
(cp.  kupita). 

Kappila  [?]  a  kind  of  flower  J  vi.218  (C:  mantSlaka- 
makula). 

Kabbati'  etc.  see  karoti  11. 

Kabbanaka  [fr.  kuq-vana]  bmshwood  or  a  small,  and 
therefore  unproductive,  wood  Sn  1134  (expl.  Nd'  by 
rittavanaka  appabhakkha  appodaka). 

Kabbara  the  pole  of  a  carriage  A  iv.191,  193  ;  VvA  269, 
271,  275.  ratha°  S  1.109,  Vv  64'  (  =  vedik5  VvA). 
Der.  (vjvidha-)  kubbarata  VvA  276. 

Knmati  wrong  thought,  wrong  view  (cp.  kuditthi) 
Bdhd  137. 

Knmira  rVedic  kumSra]  a  young  boy,  son  Sn  685  sq, 
(kuhir)  kumiro  aham  api  datthukAmo  :  w.  ref.  to  the 
child  Gotama) ;  FV  111.5';  P^A  39,  41  (  =  m5nava); 
daharo  kumSro  M  11.24,  44.  —  a  son  of  (-°)  raja°  PvA 
163;  khattiya°,  brahmapa"  Bdhd  84;  deva°  J  111.392 
ya"kkha°  Bdhd  84. 

-klla  the  amusement  o'  a  boy  J  1.137 ;  -pafihfi  ques- 
tions suitable  for  a  boy  Kh  111.  ;  •lakkhana  divination 
by  means  of  a  young  male  child  (-t-kum&ri°)  D  1.9. 

Komiiaka  i.  m.  a  young  boy,  a  youngster,  kumaraka  va 
kumariyo  boys  and  girls  S  in. 190.     2.  nt.  "r)  a  childish 
thing  A  in. 1 14.  —  f.  °ika  a  young  girl,  a  virgin  J  1.290, 
411  ;  11.180  ;  1V.219  (thulla°)  ;  vi.64  ;  DhA  ill. 171. 
-vada  speech  like  a  young  boy's;  S  11.219. 

Koinill  (f)  a  young  girl  Vin  ii.io  ;  v. 129  (thulla"^) ;  A 
III. 76  ;  J  111.395  (dahari  k°) ;  Pug  66  (itthi  va  k°  vaj. 

-paflha  obtaining  oracular  answers  from  a  girl  sup- 
posed to  be  possessed  by  a  spirit  D  l.i  i  (cp.  DA  1.97). 

Komina  (nt.)  a  fish  net  Vin  111.63;  Th  i,  297;  J  11.238; 
ThA  243. 

Kumada  (nt.)  i.  the  white  lotus  Dh  285  ;  Vv  35*  (  =  VvA 
161);  J  v. 37  (seta°) ;  Vism  174;  DA  1.139. —  2.  a  high 
nomeral,  in  \^ati  kumuda  niraya  A  v.i73  =  Sn  p.  126. 

-naja  a  lotus-stalk  J  1.223  :  -patta  (-vaijija)  (having 
the  colour  of)  white  lotus  petals  J  1.58  (Ep.  of  sindhava, 
steeds) ;  -bban^ki  a  kind  of  com  Miln  292  ;  -vanna 
(adj.)  of  the  colour  of  white  lotus  (sindhava)  PvA  74  , 
-vana  a  mass  of  white  lotuses  J  v  37. 

Kombha  [for  etym.  s.  kQpa  and  cp.  Low  Ger.  kump  or 
kumme.  a  round  potj  i.  a  round  jar,  waterpot  (=ku- 
lalabhajana  earthenware  DhA  1.317),  frequent  in 
similes,  either  as  illustrating  fragility  or  emptiness  and 
fullness:  A  1.130.  i3i=Pug  32;  A  v.337 ;  S  11.83: 
Miln  414.     As  uda°  waterpot  Dh  121  ;  J  1.20  ;  Pv  I.i2». 

2.  one  of  the  frontal  globes  of  an  elephant  Vin  11.195 

(hatthissa)  ;  VvA  182  ("alankara  ornaments  for  these), 
-fipama  resembling  a  jar,  of  kaya  Dh  40  (  =  DhA 
1.317):  of  var.  kinds  of  puggala  A  ii.i04  =  Pug  45. 
-kara  1.  a  potter  ;  enumerated  with  other  occupa- 
tions and  trades  at  D  1.5 1  =  Miln  331.  Vin  IV.7.  In 
similes,  generally  referring  to  his  skill  D  i.78  =  M  11.18  : 
Vism  142.  376;   Sn  577;  DhA  1.39  (°saia).     raja"  the 

III— 4 


Kiimbhanda 


50 


Kula 


king's  potter  J  1.121.  —  2.  a  bird  (Phasianus  gallus  ? 
Hardy)  VvA  163. — Cpds.  :  "anlevasin  the  potter's 
apprentice  D  i.78  =  M  11. :8;  -°nivesana  the  dwelling 
of  a  potter  Vin  1.342.  344;  S  iii.iig;  °pdka  the 
potter's  oven  S  11.83  ;  A  iv.102  ;  °-putta  son  of  a 
potter  (cp.  Dial,  i.ioo),  a  potter  Vin  111.41  sq.  : 
-karika  a  large  earthen  vessel  (used  as  a  hut  to  live  in, 
Bdhgh)  Vin  TI.143,  cp.  Vin.  Texis  ill. 156:  -tthana- 
katha  gossip  at  the  well  I)  1.8  =D  ni.3()  =  A  v.  128  = 
S  V.41Q,  expl''.  at  DA  1.90  by  udaka-tthanakatha,  with 
variant  udakatittha-katha  ti  pi  vuccati  kunibha-dasi- 
kathS  va  ;  -thuna  a  sort  of  drum  D  1.6  {expl.  at  DA  1.84  : 
caturassara-ammanakatalari  kumbhasaddan  ti  pi  eke) ; 
D  til.  183  ;  J  V.506  (panissarar)+  ).  -°ika  one  who  plays 
that  kind  of  drum  Vin  iv.285  =  302  ;  -tthenaka  of  cora, 
a  thief,  "  who  stealsby  means  of  a  pot  "  (i.  e.  lights  his 
candle  under  a  pot  (•')  Bdhgh  on  Vin  11.256,  cp.  Vin. 
Texts  111.325  "robber  burglars")  only  in  simile  Vin 
11.256  =  5  II. 264  =  A  IV. 2 78  ;  -dasi  a  slave  girl  who  brings 
the  water  from  the  well  D  1.168  ;  Miln  331  ;  DhA  1.401 
(udakatitthato  k"  viya  anita).  -duhana  milking  into 
the  pitchers,  giving  a  pail  of  milk  (of  gavo,  cows)  Sn 
309.  Cp.  kundi.  -bharamatta  as  much  as  a  pot  can 
hold  J  v. 46 ;  -matta  of  the  size  of  a  pot,  in  kumbha- 
niattarahassanga  raahodara  yakkha,  expl".  of  kum- 
bhanda  J  111.147. 

KambhOQ^A  i .  ni.  a  class  of  fairies  or  genii  grouped  with 
Yakkhas,  Rakkhasas  and  Asuras  S  11. 258  (k°  puriso 
vehasar)  gacchanto)  ;  J  1.204  ;  111.147  (with  def.) ;  Miln 
267;  DhA  1.280;  Pgdp  60.  —  2.  nt.  a  kind  of  gourd 
J  1.41 1  (labu°)  ;  v.37;  (elaluka-labuka")  ;  DA  1.73  = 
DhA  1.309  (placed  on  the  back  of  a  horse,  as  symbol 
of  instability) ;  the  same  as  f.  kumbhandi  Visrn  183 
(15bu+). 

Kambhl  (f)  a  large  round  pot  (often  comb''  with  kalopi,) 
Vin  1.49,  52,  286  ;  11.142.  210  ;  Th  2.  283.  loha°  a  copper 
(also  as  lohamaya  k°  Sn  670),  in  "pakkhepana.  one  of 
the  ordeals  in  Niraya  PvA  221.  Also  a  name  for  one 
of  the  Nirayas  (sec  lohakumbhi).     Cp.  nidhi". 

-mukha  the  rim  of  a  pot  (always  with  k^-lopi-mukha) 
D  1. 1 66  and;i<(sec  kalopi) ;  Vism  328. 

Kumbhlla  (kug  +  bhira  ?)  a  crocodile  (of  the  Ganges) 
J  1.2  16.  278  ;  DhA  1.201  ;  111.362. 

-bhaya  the  fear  of  the  crocodile,  in  enumeration  of 
several  objects  causing  fear,  at  M  1.459  sq.— A  11.123 
sq.  ;  Miln  ig6  =  Nd'  on  bhaya.  —  Th  2,  502  ;  -raja  the 
king  of  the  crocodiles  J  11.159. 

Kambhnaka  lir.  kumbhtla'l  a  kind  of  bird  ("  little  croco- 
dile ")  J  IV. 347. 

Kumma  [Vedic  kurma]  a  tortoise  S  iv.177  (  +  kacchapa)  ; 
M  1. 143  ;  J  v. 489  ;  Miln  363,  40S  (here  as  land-tortoise: 
cittaka-dhara°). 

Eammagga  (and  kumagga)  [kug -f  maggaj  a  wrong  path 
(lit.  and  fig.)  Miln  390  (-fkupatha);  tig.  (=miccha- 
patha)  Dhs  381,  1003;  Pug  22.  Kummaggag  pati- 
pajjati  to  lose  one's  way,  to  go  astray  .  lit.  Pv  IV.3' ; 
PvA  44  (v.  1.  SS.) ;  fig.  Sn  736 ;  It  1 17  ;  Th  2,  245. 

Kammasa  [Vcdic  kulmasa]  junket,  usually  with  odana, 
boiled  rice.  In  formula  of  kaya  (catummahabhutika 
etc.,  see  kaya)  D  i.76  =  M  U.17  and  ~  ;  in  cnum.  of 
material  food  (kabalinkarAliara)  Dhs  646,  7.10,  875.  — 
Vin  III. 15;  J  1.228;  Vv  i4«  (=VvA  62  yava°)  ,  VvA  98 
(odana°).  In  comb"  with  pQva  (cake)  DhA  1.367  ; 
PvA  244. 

Kammiga  (kug  +  miga]  a  small  or  insignificant  animal 
Miln  346. 

K<l7yaka  a  kind  of  flower  J  1.60  ("puppha). 


Eorav^aka  [cp.  Sk.  kuraritaka  blossom  of  a  species  of 
Amaranth]  a  shrub  and  its  flower  Vism  183  (see  also 
kuravaka  &  koraijdaka).     "leija  Npl.  Vism  38. 

Korara  an  osprey  J  iv.295,  397  (  =  ukkusa);  v. 416; 
VI. 5.39  (  =  seta°). 

Euiavaka  [  =  Sk.  kuraniaka  Halayudha,  cp.  kurandaka] 
N.  of  a  tree,  in  ratta"  J  1.39  (  =bimbijsla  the  red  Ama- 
ranth tree). 

Kurunga  [deriv.  unknown.  The  corresponding  Sk. 
forms  are  kulunga  and  kulanga]  a  kind  of  antelope,  in 
-miga  the  antelope  deer  J  1.173  (k°-jataka) ;  11. 153  (do.). 

Eornttbaru  (v.  1.  kururii)  D  11.242. 

Korondl  N.  of  one  of  the  lost  SS  commentaries  on  the 
Vinaya,  used  by  Buddhaghosa  (cp.   Vin.  Texts  1.258; 

11.14). 

KuruTindaka  vermillion  in  cutina,  a  bath-powder  made 
from  k.  J  111.282  ;  and  °sutt!  a  string  of  beads  covered 
with  this  powder  Vin  11. 106  (cp.  Bdhgh  Vin  11.315; 
Vin.  Texts  111.67). 

Kuriira  (adj.)  [Sk.  krura,  cp.  Lat.  cruor  thick  blood,  Gr. 
spiag  (raw)  flesh.  Sk.  kravih  ;  Ohg.  hro,  E.  raw]  bloody, 
raw.  cruel,  in  °kammanta  following  a  cruel  (bloody) 
occupation  (as  hunting,  fishing,  bird  killing,  etc.) 
A  111.383  =  Pug  56  (expld.  Pug  A  233  by  daruna",  also  at 
PvA  181). 

Kurflriu  =  kuriira  Pv  111.2^. 

Eala  (nt  ;  but  poetic  pi.  kula  Pv  11.9*'  [Idg.  'quel 
(revolve);  sec  under  kantha,  cakka  and  carati]  1.  clan, 
a  high  social  grade,  "  good  family,"  cp.  Gr.  (doric)  ^wii, 
Goth.  kuni.  A  collection  of  cognates  and  agnates,  in 
sense  of  Ohg.  sippa,  clan  ;  "  house  "  in  sense  of  line  or 
descent  (cp.  House  of  Bourbon,  Homeric  yev^ti).  Bdhgh 
at  Vism  91  distinguishes  2  kinds  of  kulSni,  viz.  ii5ti- 
kulai)  &  upatthaka-kular).  —  i.  .\  11.2 49  (on  welfare  and 
ill-luck  of  clans)  ;  Sn  144:  711  ;  It  109  sq.  (sabrahma- 
kani,  etc.)  ;  Dh  193.  —  brahmana"  a  Brahmanic  family 
A  v.249  ;  J  IV. 41 1,  etc.;  vanija°  the  household  of  a 
trader  J  111.82;  kassaka"  id.  of  a  farmer  J  11.109: 
puranasetthi"  of  a  banker  J  vi.364  ;  upatthaka"  (Sari- 
puttassa)  a  family  who  devoted  themselves  to  the 
service  of  S.  Vin  1.83  ;  sindhava"  VvA  280.  —  uccakula 
of  high  descent  Pv  iii.i",  opp.  nica°  of  mean  birth 
Sn  411  (cp.  "kulino)  ;  viz.  caijdalakula,  nesada",  vena", 
etc.  M  11.152  =A  1. 107  =  11. 85  =  111. 385  =  Pug  51  ;  sadisa'' 
a  descent  of  equal  standing  PvA  82  ;  kula-rfipa-  sam- 
panna  endowed  with  "  race  "  and  beauty  PvA  3,  280. 

—  2.  household,  in  the  sense  of  house;  kulani  people 
DhA  1.388  ;  parakulesu  among  other  people  Dh  73  ; 
parakule  do.  VvA  66 ;  kulc  kule  appatibaddhacitto 
not  in  love  with  a  particular  family  Sn  65  ;  cp.  kulc 
gane  avase  (asatto  or  similar  terms)  Nd^  on  tanha  iv. 

—  devakula  temple  J  11.411  ;  raja"  the  king's  household, 
palace  J  1.290;  in. 277;  vi.368  ;  kulani  bahutthikani 
(=baliuitthikani,  bahukitthi"  A  IV.27S)  appapurisani 
"  communities  in  which  there  are  many  women  but 
few  men"  Vin  11.256  =  5  ii.264  =  A  IV.27S;  fiati-kula 
(ray)  home  Vv  37'°  ( :  pitugehag  sandhaya  VvA  171). 

-angara  "  the  charcoal  of  the  family  "  i.  e.  one  who 
brings  a  family  to  ruin,  said  of  a  squanderer  S  iv.324 
(text  kulangaroti :  but  vv.  11.  show  ti  as  superfluous)  ; 
printed  kulanguro  (for  kul-ankuro  ?  v.  1.  kulangaro) 
kulapacchiraako  (should  it  be  kulapacchijjako  ?  cp. 
vv.  11.  at  J  IV. 69)  dhanavinasako  J  vi.380.  ALso  in 
kulapacchimako  kulagaro  papadhammo  J  iv.69.  Both 
these  refer  to  an  avajata  putta.  Cp.  also  kulassa 
angarabhutaDhA  111.350  ;  Sn  .■V  192  (of  adujjatoputto). 
and    kulagandhana  ;    -itthi    a    wife   of   good    descent, 


Kulanka 


51 


Kusala 


together  with  kuladhlta,  "kumari,  °sunha.  "dasi  at 
Vin  11. 10;  A  111.76;  Vism  18.  -upaka  (also  read  as 
°upaka,  °upaga ;  °upaga ;  for  fipaga,  see  Trenckner. 
P.M.  62,  n.  16  ;  cp.  kulopaka  Divy  307)  frequenting  a 
family,  dependent  on  a  (or  one  &  the  same)  family  (for 
alms,  etc.) ;  a  friend,  an  associate.  Freq.  in  formula 
kulupako  hoti  bahukani  kulani  upasankamati,  e.  g. 
Vin  111.131.  135;  IV. 20.  —  Vin  1.192,  208;  111.84,  237; 
V.132  ;  S  11.200  sq.  ;  A  ni.136,  258  sq.  ;  Pv  iii.S'  ;  Vism 
28;  DA  1. 142  (raja");  PvA  266.  f.  kuluptkd  (bhik- 
khuni)  Vin  11.268 ;  iv.66 ;  -gandhana  at  It  64  and  kule 
gandhina  at  J  iv.34  occur  in  the  same  sense  and  context 
as  kulangara  in  J. -passages  on  avajata-putta.  The 
It-MSS.  either  explain  k-  gandhana  by  kuiacchedaka 
or  have  vv.  11.  kuladhagsana  and  kusajantuno.  Should 
it  be  read  as  kulangaraka  ?  Cp.  gandhina  ;  -geha  clan- 
bouse,  i.  e.  father's  house  DhA  1.49.  -tanti  in  kulatanti- 
kulapaveoi-rakkhako  anujato  putto  "  one  who  keeps 
up  the  line  &  tradition  of  the  family  "  J  vi.380  ;  -dat- 
tika  (and  "dattiya)  given  by  the  family  or  clan  J  111.221 
(°s5raika) ;  iv.146  (where  DhA  1.346  reads  "santaka), 
189  (°kambala)  ;  /1.348  (pati).  -dasi  a  female  slave  in 
a  respectable  family  Vin  11.10  ;  VvA  196  ;  -dusaka  one 
who  brings  a  family  into  bad  repute  Sn  89  ;  DhA  11.  log  ; 
-dvara  the  door  of  a  family  Sn  288  ;  -dhita  the  daughter 
of  a  respectable  family  Vin  11. 10  ;  DhA  111.172  ;  VvA  6  : 
PvA  112  ;  -pasada  the  favour  received  by  a  family,  °ka 
one  who  enjoys  this  favour  A  1.25.  cp.  SnA  165,  opp.  of 
kuladusaka ;  -putta  a  clansman,  a  (young)  man  of 
good  family,  fils  de  faraille,  cp.  Low  Ger.  haussohn  ,  a 
gentleman,  man  of  good  birth.  As  2nd  characteristic 
of  a  Brahmin  (with  sujato  as  ist)  in  formula  at  D  1.93, 
94;^;  Vin  1.15,  43,  185,  288,  350  ;  M  i.85«:^(in  kamanar) 
adinavo  passage).  192,  210,  463;  A  11.249;  J  1.82; 
VI. 71  :  It  89  ;  VvA  128  ;  PvA  12,  29  ;  -macchariya  selfish- 
uess  concerning  one's  family,  touchiness  about  his  clan 
D  III. 234  (in  list  of  5  kinds  of  selfishness)  ;  also  to  be 
read  at  Dhs  1122  for  kusala"  ;  -vagsa  lineage,  progeny 
M  II. 181  ;  A  111.43;  IV. 61  ;  DA  1.256;  expressions  for 
the  keeping  up  of  the  lineage  or  its  neglect  are :  °tha- 
pana  D  111189;  PvA  5;  nassati  or  naseti  J  iv.69 ; 
VvA  149  ;  upacchindati  PvA  31,  82  ;  -santaka  belonging 
to  one's  family,  property  of  the  clan  J  1.52  ;  DhA  1.346 
(where  J  iv.146  reads  °dattika). 

Kolanka  -padaka  "  buttresses  of  timber  "  ( Vin.  Texts 
III. 1 74)  Vin  n.152  (cp.  Bdhgh.  p.  321  and  also  Morris, 
J.P.T.S.  1884.  78). 

Kulattba  a  kind  of  vetch  M  1.245  (°yusa) :  Miln  267  ; 
Vism  25O  (°yusa). 

Kulala  a  vulture,  hawk,  falcon,  cither  in  comb"  with 
kaka  or  gijjha,  or  both.  Kaka+k"  Vin  iv..(()  ;  Sn  675 
(  =  SnA  250);  gijjha  +  k°  PvA  19S ;  gijjha  kaka  k° 
Vin  111.106:  kaka  k°  gijjha  M  1.58;  cp.  gijjho  kanko 
kulalo  M  1.364,  429. 

KnlSla  a  potter;  only  in  -cakka  a  potter's  wheel  J  1.63  ; 
-bhajana  a  potter's  vessel  DhA  1.3 16  ;  PvA  274. 

Koliva  I.  waste  (?)Vin  11.292  :  na  kulavar)  gamenti "  don't 
let  anything  go  to  waste."  Reading  doubtful.  —  2.  a 
cert,  bird  J  vi.538. 

KolSvaka  (nt.)  a  nest  D  i.gi  (  =  DA  1.257  nivasatlhanao)  ; 
S  1.8  ;  S  1.224  =  J  1-203  (a  brood  of  birds  =  supaijna- 
potaki) ;  J  HI. 74  (v.  I.  BB).  431  ;  vi.344  ;  DhA  11.22. 

Knlika  (adj.)  I'fr.  kula]  belonging  to  a  family,  in  agga° 
coming  from  a  very  good  family  PvA  199. 

Kolika  (?)  in  kata'-kalapaka  a  bundle  of  beads  ?  Bdhgh 
Vin  11.315  (C.V.  v. I,  3)  in  cxpl"  of  kuruvindaka-sutti. 

Knlinka  a  bird  J  111.541  (=sakui;ika  542)      Cp.  kulunk.-). 


Knlin  =  kuiika.  in  akulino  rajano  ignoble  kings  An  vs. 
introd.  (see  J.P.T.S.  1886  p.  35',  where  akuliro  which 
is  conjectured  as  akulino  by  Andersen,  Pali  Reader, 

p.  102*). 

Ealina  =  prec.  in  abhijata-kula-kulina  descendant  of  a 
recognized  clan  Miln  359  (of  a  king) ;  ucr.a°  of 
noblo  birth,  in  uccakulinata  descent  from  a  high 
family  S  1.87  ;  M  111.37  ;  VvA  32  ;  nica"  of  mean  birth 
Sn  462. 

Ealira  a  crab,  in  kulira-padaka  "  a  crab-footer,"  i.  e.  a 
(sort  of)  bedstead  Vin  11. 149  ;  iv.  4(1  (kulira),  cp.  Bdhgh 
on  latter  passage  at  Vin  iv.357  (kul.ra"  and  ku|iya°) :  a 
bedstead  with  curved  or  carved  legs  ;  csp.  when  carved 
to  represent  animal's  feet  {Vin.  Texts  111. 164). 

Enliraka  a  crab  J  vi.539  (=kakkataka  540). 

Kulanka  a  cert,  small  bird  J  111.478.     Cp.  kulinka. 

Kalla'  a  raft  (of  basket-work)  (orig.  meaning  "  hollow 
shaft,"  cp.  Sk.  kulya.  bone ;  Lat.  caulis  stalk.  Gr. 
Kni'Xdc.  Ohg.  hoi,  E.  hollow)  Vin  1.230  ;  D  11.S9  (kuUaij 
bandhati)  ;  M  1.134  (kullupama  dhammal. 

Knlla'  (adj.)  [fr.  kula,  Sk.  kaula  &  kaulya,  •kulya]  be- 
longing to  the  family  J  iv.34  (°vatta  family  custom). 

Kallaka  crate,  basket  work,  a  kind  of  raft,  a  little  basket 

J  vi.64. 

-vihara  (adj.)  the  state  of  being  like  one  who  has 
found  a  raft  (?)  Vin  Il.3'i4  (cp.  ISdhgh  uttanavihara 
ibid.  p.  330,  and  Vin.  Texts  111.404  :  an  easy  life).  More 
correct  is  Kern's  cxpl"  {Toev.  s.  v.)  which  puts  kuUaka 
in  this  comb"=kulla'  (Sk.  kauyla).  thus  meaning 
well-bred,  of  good  family,  gentlemanly,  -santhana  con- 
sisting of  stalks  bound  together,  like  a  raft  J  11.406-40S 
(not  correct  Morris,  J.P.T.S.  1884,  78).  Cp.  Kern, 
Toev.  1.154. 

Kuva(r))  sec  ku-. 

Kuvalaya  the  (blue)  water-lily,  lotus,  usually  comb''  with 
kamala,  q.  v.  VV35*;  DA  1.50;  VvA  161,  i8i ;  PvA  23,  77. 

Knvilata  =  kovilara  J  v. 69  (v.  1.  B.  ko°). 

Kosa  I-  the  kusa  grass  (Poa  cynosuroides)  Db.\  iii  484  : 
tikhinadharar)  tinar)  antamaso  talapanijam  pi ;  Dh  311; 
J  1. 1 90  (  =  tina)  ;  IV.140.  —  2.  a  blade  of  grass  used  as 
a  mark  or  a  lot  :  patite  kuse  "  when  the  lot  has  been 
cast  "  Vin  1.299  ;  kusag  sankametva  "  having  passed  the 
lot  on  "  Vin  111.58. 

-agga  the  point  of  a  blade  of  grass  PvA  254  -  D.\ 
1.164  ;  Sdhp  349  ;  kusaggena  bhufijati  or  pivati  to  eat  or 
drink  only  (as  little  as)  with  a  blade  of  grass  Dh  70  ; 
VvA  73  (cp.  Udanavarga  p.  105);  -kan^haka -prec. 
Pv  111.2*' ;  -cira  a  garment  of  grass  \in  1.305  =D  1.167 
=  A  1.240.  295  =  11.206  =  Pug  55  ;  -pata  the  casting  of  a 
kusa  lot  Vin  1.285  :  -mufthi  a  handful  of  grass  A  v. 234  = 
249- 

Ka8aka  =  prec.  Vv  35S  (  =  VvA  162). 

Kosala  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  kusala]  1.  (adj.)  clever,  skilful, 
expert ;  good,  right,  meritorious  M  1.226  ;  Dh  44  ;  J  1.222. 
Esp.  appl.  in  moral  sense  (  -puftfta).  whereas  akusala 
is  practically  equivalent  to  papa,  ekam  pi  cc  jianar) 
adutthacitto  niettayati  kusalo  tena  hoti  It  21  ;  sup 
panfio  pandito  kusalo  naio  Sn  591,  cp.  523;  Pv  1.3' 
(  =  nipuna).  With  kanima  =  a  meritorious  action,  in 
kammag  katva  kusalar)  D  111.157  :  Vv  111.2'  ;  Pv  i.io»i 
see  cpds.  —  acara-k"  good  in  conduct  Dh  376  ;  parappa- 
vada"  skilled  in  disputation  Dpvs  iv.19;  magga"  (and 
opp.  amagga")  one  who  is  an  expert  as  regards  the 
Path  (lit.  *  fig.)  S  iii.ir;8  ;  sam'ipatti  .  etc.  A  v. 156  sq.  : 
sSlittaka-payoge  k"  skilled  in  the  ,irt  of  throwing  pot- 


Kusalata 


52 


Kujati 


sherds  PvA  28;.  —  In  derivation  k.  is  expl''  by  Dhp&la 
&  Bdhgh  by  kucchita  and  salana,  viz.  kucchita-sala- 
uidi  attheua  kusalarj  VvA  169  ;  kucchite  papadhamme 
salayanti  calayanti  kappenti  viddharisenti  ti  kusalS 
DhsA  39  ;  where  four  alternative  derivations  are  given 
(cp  Mrs.  Rh.  P.,  Dhs.  trsl.  p.  Ixxxii).  —  2.  (nt.)  a  good 
thing,  good  deeds,  virtue,  merit,  good  consciousness 
(citta  omitted;  cp.  DhsA  162,  200,  etc.):  yassa  pJlpai) 
katar)  kammai)  kusalena  pithiyati,  so  imag  lokar) 
pabhaseti  "  he  makes  this  world  shine,  who  covers  an 
evil  deed  with  a  good  one  "  M  n.104  — Dh  i73  =  Th  i, 
872  ;  snkhafl  ca  k.  pucchi  (fitness)  Sn  981  ;  Vv  30' 
(  =  arogyai));  D  1.24;  J  vi.367 ;  Pv  i.:'  (  =  puili\a); 
i?vA  75;  Miln  25.  —  In  special  sense  as  ten  kusalini 
equivalent  to  the  dasasilai)  (cp.  sUa)  M  1.47 ;  A  V.241, 
274.  All  good  qualities  (dhamm^)  which  constitute 
right  and  meritorious  conduct  are  comprised  in  the 
phrase  -kusala-dhammS  Sn  1039,  1078,  expld.  in  extenso 
Nd'  3.  V.  See  also  cpd.  °dhamma.  —  Kusalag  karoti 
to  do  what  is  good  and  righteous,  i.  e.  k3.yena,  vaCcLya, 
manasa  It  78 ;  cp.  Dh  53  ;  sabba-pilpassa  akaranar) 
kusalassa  upasampada  sacittapariyodapanat)  etai) 
BuddhSnusasanar)  D  11.49  =  Dh  183;  cp.  Nett  43,  81, 
171,  186.  Kusalari  bhaveti  to  pursue  righteousness 
(together  with  akusalar)  pajahati  to  give  up  wrong 
habits)  A  1.58;  iv.109  sq. ;  It  9.  —  akusala  adj.:  im- 
proper, wrong,  bad  ;  nt. :  demerit,  evil  deed  D  1.37,  163  ; 
bSlo  +  akusalo  Sn  879,  887;  =papa  PvA  60,  cp.  pSpa- 
pasuto  akatakusalo  ib.  6.  kusalai)  &  akusalar)  are 
discussed  in  detail  (with  ref.  to  rupavacara"  fivefold,  to 
arupSvacara"  &  lokuttara"  fourfold,  to  kamavacara° 
eight  &  twelvefold)  at  Vism  452-454.  —  kusalAkusala 
good  and  bad  M  1.489  ;  S  v. 91  ;  Miln  25  ;  Nett  161,  192  ; 
Dhs  1 124  sq.  —  sukusala  (dhammanai))  highly  skilled 
D  1. 180  (cp.  M.  n.31). 

-anuesin  striving  after  righteousness  Sn  965  ;  cp. 
kinkusalanuesin  D  11. 151  and  kinkusalagavesin  M  1.163 
sq.  ;  -abhisanda  overflow  of  merit  (  +  pun6a°)  \  11.54 
sq. ;  iii.:,i  ;  337;  -kamma  meritorious  action,  right 
conduct  A  1.104  :  292  sq.  ;  Ps  1.85  ;  n.72  sq.  ;  PvA  9,  26 ; 
-citta  (pi.)  gooid  thoughts  Vbh  169-173,  184,  285  sq., 
294  sq.  ;  -cetana  right  volition  Vbh  135  ;  -dhamma  (pi.) 
(all)  points  of  righteousness,  good  quaUties  of  character 
S  11.206 ;  M  1.98  ;  A  iv.ii  sq.  ;  v. 90  sq.  ;  123  sq.  ;  Pug 
68,  71;  Vbh  105;  Ps  i.ioi,  132;  n.15,  230;  VvA  74, 
127  ;  -pakkha  "  the  side  of  virtue."  all  that  belongs  to 
good  character  M  111.77  (and  a")  with  adj.  "pakkhika 
S  v. 91  ;  -macchariya  Dhs  1122  is  to  be  corrected  to 
kula°  instead  of  kusala°  (meanness  as  regards  family) 
cp.  Nd'  on  veviccha  ;  -mula  the  basis  or  root  of  goodness 
or  merit ;  there  are  three :  alobha,  adosa,  amoha  M 
1.47,  489="A  i,203  =  Nett  183;  D  111.214;  Dhs  32,  313, 
981  ;  Vbh  169  sq.,  210  ;  Nett  126.  Cp.  "paccaya  Vbh 
169 ;  "ropana  Nett  50 ;  'Titakka  good  reasoning,  of 
which  there  are  three :  nekkhamma",  avySpSda",  avi- 
higsjl"  D  HI. 215;  It  82;  Nett  126;  -vipaka  being  a 
fruit  of  good  kamma  Dhs  454  ;  Vism  454  (twofold,  viz. 
dhetuka  &  sahetuka).  -vedana  good,  pure  feeling 
Vbh  3  sq.  ;  cp.  °saiifia  and  °sankhara  Vbh  6  sq.  ;  Nett 
12O  (three  °safiaa.,  same  as  under  °vitakk3) ;  -sUa  good, 
proper  conduct  of  life  M  11.25  ^l-  ■  ^'^j-  °silin  D  1.115 
(  =  nA  1.286). 

KoMtett  [fern,  abstr.  fr.  kusala]  (only  -°)  skill,  cleverness, 
accomplishment ;  good  quality.  —  lakkhaoa°  skill  in 
interpreting  special  signs  VvA  138;  aparicita°  neglect 
in  acquiring  good  qualities  PVA  67.  For  foil.  cp. 
Mrs.  Rh.  D.  Dhs.  trsl.  pp.  345-348  ;  Spatti"  skill  as  to 
what  is  an  oSence ;  samipatti"  in  the  Attainments ; 
dhatu°  in  the  Elements ;  manasikara°  proficiency  in 
attention  ;  Syatana"  skill  in  the  spheres  ;  paticcasam- 
uppada"  skill  in  conditioned  Genesis ;  thana°  and 
auhana°  skill  in  aflirming  (negating)  causal  con- 
juncture: all  at  D  III. 212  and  Dhs  1329-1338;  cp.  A 
1.84.  94. 


Kosi  (nt.)  one  of  the  four  cross  seams  of  the  robe  of  a 
bhikkhu  Vin  1.287;  11.177:  and  a<}4ha°  intermediate 
cross  seam  ibid.     See  Bdhgh's  note  in  Vin.  Texts  11.208. 

Koslta  (adj.)  [Sk.  kusida :  cp.  kosajja]  indolent,  inert, 
inactive.  Expl.  by  kama-vitakkSdihi  vitakkehi  viti- 
namanakapuggalo  DhA  11.260  ;  by  nibbiriyo  DhA 
111.410;  by  alaso  PvA  175,  Often  comb''  with  hlna- 
viriya,  devoid  of  zeal;  It  27,  116;  Dh  7,  112,  280; 
Miln  300,  396.  Also  equivalent  to  alasa  Dh  112; 
comb"*  with  dussila  Miln  3C0,  396 ;  with  duppafifia 
D  111.252=282;  A  11.227,  230;  III. 7,  183,  433.  —  In 
other  connections  :  M  1.43,  471  ;  A  111.7  sq.,  127 ;  v.95, 
146,  153,  329  sq.  ;  S  11.29,  159,  206  ;  It  71,  102  ;  J  iv.131 
(nibbiriya-(- ) ;  Vism  132  ;  DhA  1.69.  The  eight  kusita- 
vatthuni,  occasions  of  indolence,  are  enumerated  at 
A  IV. 332  ;  D  in. 255  ;  Vbh  385.  —  akusita  alert,  mindful, 
careful  Sn  68  (-f-alinacitto) ;  Nd'  s.  v. ;  Sdhp  391. 

Knsltata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  kasita]  in  a°  alertness,  brightness, 
keenness  VvA  138. 

Kasama  (nt.)  any  flower  J  ni.394  (°dama)  ;  v.37 ;  PvA 
157  (  =  puppha);  VvA  42  ;  Dpvs  1.4;  Sdhp  246,  595; 
Davs  V.51  ("agghika),  fig.  vimutti°  the  flower  of  eman- 
cipation Th  I,  ico  ;  Miln  399. 

Knanmita  (adj.)  in  flower,  blooming  VvA  160,  162. 

Kasoinbha  (nt.)  the  safflower,  Carthamus  tinctorius, 
used  for  dying  red  J  v.211  ("rattavattha) ;  vi.264  (do) ; 
Khus  IV. 2. 

Kn88abbha  and  kussobbha  (nt.)  [Sk.  kuSvabhra]  a  small 
pond,  usually  comb**  with  kunnadi  and  appl"*  in 
similes:  S  ii.32=A  I.243=v.ii4;  S  11.118;  v. 47.  63, 
395  ;  A  II.  140  ;  IV.  ICO  ;  Sn  720  ;  PvA  29 ;  DA  1.58. 

Koha  (adj.)  [Sk.  kuha  ;  'qeadh  to  conceal,  cp.  Gr.  KfvSm ; 
Ags  hydan,  E.  hide]  deceitful,  fraudulent,  false,  in 
phrase  kuha  thaddha  lapa  singi  A  11.26— Th  1,  959  = 
It  113.  —  akuha  honest,  upright  M  1.386;  Sn  957; 
Miln  352. 

Kuhaka  [der.  fr.  prec]  deceitfnl,  cheating ;  a  cheat,  a 
fraud,  comb"*  with  lapaka  D  1.8;  A  in. in.  —  A 
V.159  sq.  ;  Sn  984,  987  ;  J  1.375  (°tap£isa) ;  DhA  iv.152 
("brahmaija) ;  iv.153  (°cora) ;  Miln  310,  357;  PvA  13; 
DA  1.91. 

Kabana  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  adj.  kuhana  =  kuhaka]  1.  deceit, 
fraud,  hypocrisy,  usually  in  comb"  kuhana-lapana 
"  deceit  and  talking-over "  =deceitful  talk  D  1.8 ; 
A  111.430  ;  DA  1.92  ;  Miln  383 ;  Nd'  on  avajja.  —  M 
i.465  =  It  28,  29;  S  IV. 118;  A  v.159  sq.  ;  Vism  23; 
Vljh  352;  Sdhp  375.  —  2.  menacing  SnA  582.  —  Opp. 
akuhaka  Sn  852.  —  Var.  commentator's  derivations 
are  kuhayana  (fr.  kuhana)  and  kuhitattag  (fr.  kubeti), 
to  be  found  at  Vism  26. 

-vatthiini  (pi.)  cases  or  opportunities  of  deceit,  three 
of  which  are  discussed  at  Nd'  on  nikkuha,  mentioned 
also  at  Vism  24  ;  DA  1.91  &  SnA  107. 

Kohara  (nt.)  (der.  fr.  kuha)  a  hole,  a  cavity ;  lit.  a  hiding- 
place  Davs  1.62. 

Kotaig  see  under  ku°. 

KahiliU  (pi.)  kuhali  flowers  Attanugaluvai)sa  216. 

Kohlyati  only  in  pahaQsiyati -I-  k°  "  he  exults  and  rejoices  " 
at  Miln  326  (cp.  Miln  trsl.  11.220,  where  printed  kuhu- 
yati). 

Koheti  [v.  denom.  fr.  kuha]  to  deceive  DA  91  ;  ger. 
kuhitva  deceiving  J  vi.212. 

Kajati  [Kuj,  expl""  with  guj  at  Dhtp  78  by  "  avyatte 
sadde "]  to  sing  (of  birds;  cp.  vikujati)  J  11.439; 
iv.296;  Davs  V.51.  —  pp.  kOjita  see  abhi°,  upa°. 


Kuta 


53 


Kedara 


Kftt*'  (°t.)  [Dhtp  472  &  Dhtm  526  expl.  kot  of  kuta»  by 
kotilie  (kotilye),  cp.  Sk.  kuta  trap,  cp.  Gr.  TraXevui  to 
trap  birds]  a  trap,  a  snare ;  fig.  falsehood,  deceit.  As 
trap  J  1. 143  (kutapasadi)  ;  iv.416  (expl"  paticchanna- 
pasa).  As  deceit,  cheating  in  formula  tuli°  kagsa" 
mana°  "cheating  with  weight,  coin  and  measure" 
(DA  i.78=varicana)  D  1.5  =  111.176=8  v.473=M  i.iSo 
=  A  n.209  ;  v.205  =  Pug  58.  mina"  PvA  278.  —  As 
adj.  false,  deceitful,  cheating,  see  cpds.  —  Note,  kute 
J  I.i45  ought  to  be  read  kufe  (antokute  padipo  viya, 
cp.  ghata). 

•a^a  a  false  suit,  in  °k&ra  a  false  suitor  J  11. 2  ;  DhA 
1.353  ;  -ja^ila  a  fraudulent  ascetic  J  1.375  ;  DhA  1.40  ; 
•mana  false  measure  PvA  191  ;  -vanija  a  false- trader 
Pv  111.4'  ;  P^A.  191  ;  -vinicchayikata  a  lie  (false  dis- 
crimination) PvA  zio.-vedin  lier,  calumniator  J  iv.177. 

KAta'  (m.  nt.)  [Vedic  kuta  horn,  bone  of  the  forehead, 
prominence,  point,  'qele  to  jut  forth,  be  prominent ;  cp. 
Lat.  celsus,  collis,  columen  ;  Gr.  roXu/vof  coXo^wv;  Ags. 
holm,  E.  hill]  —  (a)  prominence,  top  (cp.  koti),  in  abbha° 
ridge  of  the  cloud  Vv  i.'  (  =  sikhara)  ;  agsa"  shoulder, 
clavicle,  VvA  121,  123  pabbata"  mountain  peak  Vin 
"193;  J  I-73-  Cp.  kota.  —  (b)  the  top  of  a  house, 
roof,  pinnacle  A  1.261  ;  Vv  78*  (  =  karniik&  VvA  304); 
gaha°  Dh  154;  PvA  55.  Cp.  also  kiitagara.  —  (c)  a 
.(leap,  an  accumulation,  in  sankara"  dust-heap  M  11.7, 
PvA  144.  —  (d)  the  topmost  point,  in  phrase  desan^ya 
kOt^O  gahetv&  or  desana  kutar)  gaijhanto  "  leading  up 
to  the  climax  of  the  instruction  "  J  1.275,  393.  401  ; 
V.151  ;  VI. 478 ;  VvA  243.  Cp.  arahattena  kutai) 
gaohanto  J  i.i  14  ;  arahattaphalena  k.  gaijhir)  ThA  99. 

-anga  the  shoulder  Vv  15'  (  =  VvA  123).  -&gara 
(nt.)  a  building  with  a  peaked  roof  or  pinnacles,  possibly 
gabled  ;  or  with  an  upper  storey  Vin  1.268  ;  S  11. 103  = 
v. 218;  111.156;  IV. 186;  v. 43,  75,  228;  A  i.ioi.  261: 
m.io,  364 ;  IV.231  ;  v. 21  ;  Pv  lii.i'  ;  2"  ;  Vv  8*  (=ra- 
tanamayakai>nikS.ya  bandhaketuvanto  VvA  5c) ;  VvA 
6  (upari°,  with  upper  storey)  v.  1.  kutth^gara  ;  PvA  282 
(°dhaja  with  a  flag  on  the  summit) ;  DhA  iv,i86.  In 
cpds.  :  -°  matta  as  big  as  an  upper  chamber  J  1.273  '■ 
Aliln  67 ;  -"said  a  pavilion  (see  description  of  Mao<ilala- 
m&la  at  DA  1.43)  Vin  111.15,  68,  87;  iv.75  ;  D  1.150; 
S  Ii.i03=v.2i8  ;  iv.i86.  -(n)gama  going  towards  the 
point  (of  the  roof),  converging  to  the  summit  S  11.263  -- 
Iii.i56  =  v.43  ;  -tiha  standing  erect,  straight,  immov- 
able, in  phrase  vafijha  k°  esikatthSyin  D  1.14  =  56  = 
S  ni.2ii=M  1. 517  (expl.  DA  1.105  by  pabbatakutai) 
viya  thita) ;  -pona  at  Vism  268  is  to  be  read  °gOQa:  see 
kuta«. 

KOta'  (nt.)[*aola  to  beat ;  cp.  Lat.  clava  ;  Gr.  arXau,  Ko\of, 
and  also  Sk.  kha^ga  ;  Lat.  clades,  procello  ;  Gr.  ic\alap6<;. 
The  expl"  of  kut*  at  Dhtp  557  &  Dhtm  783  is  "  ako 
tane  "]  a  hammer,  usually  as  aya°  an  iron  sledge- 
hammer J  1.108  ;  or  ayo"  PvA  284  ;  ayomaya°  Sn  669  ; 
kammara°  Vism  254. 

Kftfa*  (adj.)  [Sk.kSta,  not  homed  ;  *(g)Qertocut,  mutilate, 
curtail,  cp.  Lat.  caro,  curtus ;  also  Sk.  krdhu  maimed. 
The  expl"  of  kat  as  "  chede,"  or  "  chedane  "  (cutting) 
at  Dhtp  90,  555  ;  Dhtm  115,  526,  781  may  refer  to  this 
kuta.  See  also  kutta]  without  horns,  i.  e.  harmless,  of 
gona  a  draught  bullock  Vin  rv.5  =  J  1.192  (in  play  of 
words  with  kuta  deceitful  J.  trsl.  misses  the  point  & 
translates  "  rascal  ").  These  maimed  oxen  (cows  iV 
calves)  are  represented  as  practically  useless  &  sluggish 
in  similes  at  Vism  26S,  269  :  kuta-gona-  (so  read  for 
°popa)-yutta-ratha  a  cart  to  which  such  a  bullock  is 
harnessed  (uppathag  dhJvati  runs  the  wrong  way) ; 
kfita-dhenuya  khirat)  pivitva  kuta-vaccho,  etc.,  such 
a  calf  lies  still  at  the  post.  —  Kuta-danta  as  Np.  should 
prob.  belong  here,  thus  meaning"  ox-tooth  "  (derisively) 
(D  1. 127;  Vism  208),  with  which  may  be  compared 
daota-kuta  (see  under  danta). 


Ka(eyya  (nt.)  [der.  fr.  'kutya  of  kuta'.  cp.  in  formation 
sStheyya]  fraud,  deceit,  in  comb"  with  sitheyya  & 
vankeyya  M  1.340  ;  A  v.  167. 

Kfipa  (m.)  [Vedic  kupa.  orig.  curvature  viz.  (a)  interior  — 
cavity,  cp.  Lat.  cupa.  Gr.  ciJireXXoi'  cup;  also  Gr. 
Kiift^n,  Sk.  kumbha;  —  (b)  exterior  =  heap.  cp.  Ags. 
heap,  Ohg.  heap,  Sk.  kupa  mast],  i.  a  pit.  a  cavity  : 
akkhi°  the  socket  of  the  eye  M  1.80,  245 ;  DhsA  306 ; 
gutha°  a  cesspool  D  11.324  ;  Sn  279  ;  PV  11.3"  ;  Pug  36 ; 
milha"  a  pit  for  evacuations  Pgdp  23.  24;  loni*°  the 
root  of  the  hair,  a  pore  of  the  skin  DA  1.57  ;  Vism  262 , 
360  ;  also  in  na  loma-kupamattai)  pi  not  even  a  hair- 
root  J  1.3 1  ;  111-55  :  vacca°  =  gutha°  Vin  11.141.  222.  As 
a  tank  or  a  well :  J  vi.213  ;  VvA  305.  —  2.  the  mast  of 
a  boat  J  111.126 ;  Miln  363.  378.     See  next. 

-kha^a  one  who  digs  a  pit  J  vi.213.  -tala  the  floor 
of  a  pit  Vism  362. 

Kftpaka  =  kupa  i.  Vjsm  361  (akkhi°).  362  (naditira"), 
449  (id.);  =kupa.     2.  J  11. 112;  iv.17. 

Kfila  (nt.)  [Dhtp  271  :  kiila  avarape]  a  slope,  a  bank,  an 
embankment.  Usually  of  rivers  :  S  1.143  =  }  Wif>i  : 
A  1. 162  ;  Sn  977  ;  J  1.227  ;  Miln  36  :  udapana"  the  facing 
of  a  well  Vin  11.122  ;  vaccakiipassa  k°  the  sides  of  a 
cesspool  Vin  11.141.  See  also  pagsu°.  &  cp.  uk°.  upa°, 
pati°. 

KOra  (nt.)  in  sukkha"  boiled  rice  (?)  Vin  iv.86 ;  DhA 
11.171. 

Keka  [?]  N.  of  a  tree  J  v. 405.  Kem,  Toev.  s.  v.  suggests 
misreading  for  koka  Phoenix  sylvestris. 

Ketnbha  [deriv.  unknown]  expl''  by  Buddhaghosa  DA  1. 
247  as  "  the  science  which  assists  the  officiating  priests 
by  laying  down  rules  for  the  rites,  or  by  leaving  them  to 
their  discretion"  (so  Trenckner,  J.P.T.S.  1908.  n6). 
In  short,  the  ritual ;  the  kalpa  as  it  is  called  as  one  of 
the  vedangas.  Only  in  a  stock  list  of  the  subject  a 
learned  Brahmin  is  supposed  to  have  mastered  D  1.88  ; 
A  1.163.  166;  Sn  1020;  Miln  10,  178.  So  in  BSk;  Avi 
11.19;  Divy  619. 

Ketobhin  [deriv.  unknown]  MA  152  (on  M  132)  has 
"  trained  deceivers  (sikkhita  keratika) ;  very  deceitful, 
false  all  through  "  ;  111.6  =  A  111.199. 

Ketaka  [etym.  uncertain]  N .  of  a  flower  J  iv.483. 

Ketana  sign  etc.,  see  sai)°. 

Ketn  [Vedic  ketu.  *(s)qait,  clear ;  cp.  Lat.  caelum  (=  'caid- 
lom),  Ohg  heitar,  heit ;  Goth,  haidus ;  E.  -hood,  orig. 
appearance,  form.  Uke]  —  1 .  ray.  beam  of  light, 
splendour,  eflulgence  Th  i .  64  ;  which  is  a  riddle  on  the 
various  meanings  of  ketu.  —  2.  flag,  banner,  sign, 
perhaps  as  token  of  splendour  Th  i,  64.  dhanuna-k° 
having  the  Doctrine  as  his  banner  A  1.109  =  111.149; 
dhOma-k°  having  smoke  as  its  splendour,  of  fire,  J  rv.26 ; 
VvA  161  in  expl"  of  dhumasikha. 

-kamyata  desire  for  prominence,  self-advertisement 
(perhaps  vainglory,  arrogance)  Vism  469;  Dhs  11 16 
(Dhs  A.  trs.  479),  i233  =  Nd'  505;  Nd'  on  Sn  829 
(  =  uwama);  — mala  "garland  of  rays"  VvA  323. 

Ketog  see  kayati. 

Ketnvant  (adj.)  [fr.  ketu]  having  flags,  adorned  with  flags 
VvA  50. 

Ked&ra  (m.  nt.)  an  irrigated  field,  prepared  for  ploughing, 
arable  land  in  its  first  stage  of  cultivation :  kedare 
payetva  karissima  "  we  shall  till  the  fields  after  water- 
ing them  "  J  1.215  ;  as  square-shaped  (i.  e.  marked  out 
as  an  allotment)  Vin  1.39 1  (caturassa"  ;  Bdhgh  on 
MV  viii.12,  i);  J  111.255  (catukkapi)a°) ;  surrounded  by 
a    trench,    denoting    the    boundary    (-mariyada)    DhA 


Kebuka 


54 


Kesa 


in.6.  —  J  IV.167;  V.35;  PvA  7  (=khetta).  The  speU- 
ing  is  sometimes  ketara  (J  in. 255  v.  1.)  see  Trenckner, 
J.P.T.S.  1908.  112.  Note.  The  prefix  ke-  suggests  an 
obsolete  noun  of  the  meaning  "  water,"  as  also  in  ke- 
buka, ke-vatta;  perhaps  Sk.  k§vid,  k^vedate,  to  be 
wet,  ooze  ?  ke  would  then  be  k(h)ed,  and  kedara= 
ked  +  dr,  bursting  forth  of  water=  inundation  ;  kebuka 
=  kedvu(d)ka  (udaka) ;  kevatta=ked-)- vr,  moving  on 
the  water,  fisherman  ;  (cp.  Av^  Index  Kaivarta  :  name 
of  an  officer  on  board  a  trading  vessel). 

-koji  top  or  corner-point  of  a  field  Vism  180. 

Kebuka  [on  ke-  see  note  to  prec]  water  J  vi.38  (  =  42  : 
k.  vuccati  udakaij).  As  nadi  a  river  at  J  111.91,  where 
Seruma  at  similar  passage  p.  189. 

Keyura  (nt.)  a  bracelet,  bangle  DhA  11.220  (v.  1.  kayura). 

Eeyarm  (adj.)  wearing  a  bracelet  PvA  211  (=kayurin). 

Keyya  (ger.  of  kayati)  for  sale  J  vi.180  (  =  vikkiijitabba). 

Eeratika  (adj.)  [fr.  kirafa]  deceitful,  false,  hypocritic 
J  1. 461  (expl''  by  bijara);  iv.220 ;  iv.223  (  =  kirasa); 
MA  152;  DhA  111.389  (  =  satha).  —  a"  honest,  frank  J 
V.I  17  (  =  akitava,  ajutakara). 

Keratiy8=prec.  J  in.260  (°lakkhaya) ;   MA  152. 

Kelisi  at  Th  i,  loio  is  to  be  corrected  into  keliyo  (see 
keU»). 

Kelana  (f.)  [fr.  kilissati  ?  or  is  it  khelana  .']  desire,  greed, 
usually  shown  in  fondness  for  articles  of  personal 
adornment:  thus  "selfishness"  Vbh  351  =  DA  1.286 
(-fpa^ikelana).  In  this  passage  it  is  given  as  a  rather 
doubtful  expl"  of  capalla,  which  would  connect  it 
with  ksvel  to  jump,  or  khel  to  swing,  oscillate,  waver, 
cp.  expl"  Dhtp  278  kela  khela  =  calane.  Another 
passage  is  Nd*  585,  where  it  is  comb"'  with  parikejana 
and  acts  as  syn.  of  vibhusana. 

Keliyati  [Denom.  fr.  klj  in  meaning  "  to  amuse  oneself 
with,"  i.  e.  take  a  pride  in.  Always  comb''  with 
mamayati.  BSk.  same  meaning  (to  be  fond  of) ; 
Salik^etraiji  k.  gopayati  Divy  631.  Morris.  J.P.T.S. 
1893,  16  puts  it  (wrongly  ?)  to  kel  to  quiver:  see  also 
kejana]  to  adorn  oneself  with  (ace),  to  fondle,  treasure, 
take  pride  in  (gen.)  M  1.260  (alliyati  kelayati  dhanayati 
mamayati,  where  dhanayati  is  to  be  read  as  van&yati 
as  shown  by  v.  1.  S.  in. 190  &  M  1.552);  S  111.190  (id.); 
Miln  73.  —  pp.  ke}ayita. 

Kel&yana  (nt.)  [fr.  kelayati,  cp.  kelana  &  keli]  playfulness, 
unsettledness  Vism  134  (opp.  majjhatta),  317. 

Ke}ayita  [pp.  of  kelayati]  desired,  fondled,  made  much  of 
J  IV.  1 98  (expl""  with  the  ster.  phrase  kelayati  mama- 
yati pattheti  piheti  icchati  ti  attho). 

Kel&sa  (cp.  Sk.  kailasa]  N.  of  a  mountain  Bdhd  138. 

KeU'  (f)  [fr.  krtd  to  play,  sport:  see  kilati]  i.  play, 
amusement,  sport  PvA  265  (  =  khid<Ja);  parihasa" 
merry  play,  fun  J  i.i  16.  —  2.  playing  at  dice,  gambling, 
in  °mandala  "  circle  of  the  game,"  draught-board ;  °g 
bhindati  to  break  the  board,  i.  e.  to  throw  the  die  over 
the  edge  so  as  to  make  the  throw  invalid  (cp.  Cunning- 
ham, Stupa  of  Bharhut,  plate  45)  J  1.379. 

Keji'  (f.)  [either  fr.  kil  as  in  kilijjati  &  kihssati,  or  fr.  kel, 
as  given  under  kelana]  the  meaning  is  not  quite  defined, 
it  may  be  taken  as  "  attachment,  lust,  desire,"  or  "  sel- 
fishness, deceit "  (cp.  kerafika  ft  kilissati).  or  *'  un- 
settledness, wavering."  —  keli-sila  of  unsettled  char- 
acter, nnreliable,  deceitful  PvA  241.  "silaka  id.  J 
11.447.  —  paiica  citta-ke!iyo  =  panca  nivaraijani  (kama- 
cchanda  etc.),  the  gratifications  of  the  heart  Th  i.  1010 
(corr.    kelisa    to    keliyo !).  —  citta-kelig    kilanta    bahur) 


papakammaij  katva  enjoying  themselves  (wrongly)  to 
their  heart's  content  J  111.43.  Cp.  kamesu  a-ni-ki})- 
tavin  unstained  by  desires  S  1.9,  117. 

Kevatta  [""  ke-  see  kedara]  fisherman  D  1.45  (in  simile  of 
dakkho  k°)  A  111.31  =342,  cp.  iv.91  ;  I'd  24  sq. ;  J  1.270  ; 
DhA  11.132;  IV.41  ;  PvA  178  ("gama,  in  which  to  be 
■  eborn,  is  punishment,  fishermen  being  considered  out- 
cast) ;  cp.  J  VI. 399  N.  of  a  brahmin  minister,  a)so  D  1.41 1 
N.  of  Kevaddha  (?). 

-dvara  N.  of  one  of  the  gates  of  Benares,  and  a  village 
near  by  Vv  19' ;  VvA  97. 

Eevala  (ad;.-adv.)  [cp.  Lat.  caelebs=  •caivilo-b°  to  live 
by  oneself,  i.  e.  to  live  in  celibacy,  perhaps  also,  Goth, 
hails.  Ohg.  heil,  E.  whole]  expression  of  the  concept  of 
unity  and  totality  :  only,  alone  ;  whole,  complete  ;  adv. 
altogether  or  only — i.  "c.  (adv.)  (a)  on!y=just:  k. 
tvat)  amhakai)  vacanai)  karohi  "  do  all  we  tell  you  " 
PvA  4; — only  =  but,  with  this  difference:  VvA  203, 
249  ;  —  k.  .  .  .  vippalapati  he  on.y  talks  PvA  93  ;  — 
and  yet :  "  sakka  nu  kiiici  adatva  k.  sagge  uibbatti- 
tui)  ?"  is  it  possible  not  to  give  anything,  and  yet  go  to 
heaven  ?  kevalai)  mano-pasada-mattena  only  by  purity 
of  mind  DhA  1.33 ;  kevalai)  vacchake  balava-piya- 
cittataya  simply  by  the  .strong  love  towards  the  baby- 
cali  Vism  313;  (b)  alone:  k.  arafiiiai)  gamissami  VvA 
260;  —  exclusive  Miln  247. — na  k.  .  .  .  atha  kho  not 
only  .  .  .  but  also  VvA  227.  —  2.  whole,  entire  Sn 
p.  108  ;  Cp.  i.io'*  ;  Pv  11.6'  (  =  sakala  PvA  95) ;  Vism  528 
(  =  asammissa,  sakala) ;  Pv  11. 6'  (  — sakala  PvA  95). — 
k.  >akevala  entire  >  deficient  M  1.326.  °r)  entirely, 
thoroughly,  all  round  :  k°  obhSsenti  VvA  282. 

-kappa  a  whole  kappa  Sn  pp.  18,  45,  125 ;  KhA  115; 
VvA  124,  255.  -paripunna  fulfilled  in  its  entirety  (sa- 
kala DA  1. 1 77)  of  the  Doctrine;  expl''  also  at  Nett  10. 

Kevalin  (adj.)  [fr.  kevala]  one  who  is  fully  accomplished, 
an  Arahant ;  often  with  mahesi  and  uttamapurisa. 
Def"  sabbaguna  -  paripunna  sabba  -  yoga  -  visagyutta 
Sn  A  153.  —  ye  suvimutta  te  kevahno  ye  kevalino 
vattai)  tesat)  natthi  parinSpanaya  S  111.59  sq.,  i.  e. 
"  those  who  are  thoroughly  emancipated,  these  are  the 
accomplished  .  .  ."  ;  kevalinar)  mahesuj  khtij'  asavag 
Sn  82  =  S  1. 1 67;  —  k.  vusitava  uttamapuriso  Nd'  on 
tiuna=  A  v. 16.  —  with  gen. :  brahmacariyassa  k.  "  per- 
fected in  morality  "  A  11.23.  —  As  Ep.  of  "  brahmana  " 
Sn  5i9  =  Nd*  s.  v.;  of  dhammacakka  A  11.9;  see  also 
Sn  490,  595.  —  akevalin  not  accomplished,  not  per- 
fected Sn  878,  891. 

Kesa  [Vedic  ke^a ;  cp.  kesara  hair,  mane  =  Lat.  caesaries, 
hair  of  the  head,  Ags.  he6rd  =  E.  hair]  the  hair  of  the 
head  S  1.115  (hata-hata-k°,  with  dishevelled  hair); 
A  1. 1 38  (paUta-kesa  with  grey  hair;  also  at  J  1.59); 
Sn  456  (nivutta").  608  ;  Th  i,  169  ;  J  1.59,  138  ;  111.393 ; 
Miln  26 ;  KhA  42  ;  Vism  353  (in  detail).  The  wearing 
of  long  hair  was  forbidden  to  the  Bhikkhus :  Vin  11. 107 
sq. ;  133  (cp.  kesa-massu) ;  —  dark  (glossy)  hair  is  a 
distinction  of  beauty :  susukala-keso  (of  Gotama) 
D  1. 1 15;  cp.  kanha  and  kalyana  ;  PvA  26. — The  hair 
of  Petas  is  long  and  dishevelled  PvA  56 ;  Sdhp  103 ; 
it  is  the  only  cover  of  their  nakedness :  kesehi  patic- 
channa  "  covered  only  with  my  hair"  Pv  i.io'.  —  kesesn 
gahctva  to  take  by  the  haii'  (in  Niraya)  D  1.234  '>  —  kesag 
oropeti  to  have  one's  hair  cut  Vin  11. 133. 

-oropana(-satthaka)  (a)  hair-cutting  (knife),  i.  e.  a 
razor  DhA  1.431  ;  -oharaka  one  who  cuts  the  hair,  a 
barber  Vism  413.  -kambala  a  hair  blanket  (according  to 
Bdhgh  human  hair)  D  i.i67  =  A  T.240,  295  =  11.206= 
Vin  i.305  =  M  i.78=Pug  55;  A  1.286.  -kambalin 
wearing  a  hair  blanket  (of  Ajita)  D  1.55.  -kalapa  (pi.) 
(atimanohara")  beautiful  tresses  PvA  46 ;  -kalyana 
beauty  of  hair  DhA  1.387  ;  -karika  hairdresser  Vv  it^; 
-dhatu  the  hair-relic  (of  the  Buddha)  J  1.81  ;  -nivasin 
covered  only  with  hair  of  Petas  ( :  keseh'  eva  paticchS- 


Kesayati 


53 


Kotta 


dita-koplna)  Pv  iii.i*.  °massu  hair  and  beard;  kap- 
pita-k'-m°  (adj.)  with  h.  and  b.  dressed  D  1.04;  A 
IV.94 ;  J  VI. 268.  Esp.  freq.  in  form  kcsa-massur)  oha- 
retva  kasayini  vatthJni  acchadetva  agarasma  anagS- 
riyar)  pabbajati  "  to  shave  off  hair  A  beard,  dress  in 
yellow  robes  and  leave  the  home  for  the  homeless  state," 
i.  e.  renounce  the  world  and  take  up  the  life  of  a  Wan- 
derer D  i.6(\  115;  111.60,  64,  76;  A  1.107;  111.386; 
It  75  ;  Pug  57  ;  similarly  A  11.207  =  Pug  56.  -sobha  the 
splendour  or  beauty  ol  the  hair  PvA  46.  -hattha  a  tuft 
of  hair  PvA  157  ;  VvA  :67. 

Kesayati  see  kisa. 

Kesara*  a  mane,  in  -siha  a  maned  lion  J  11.244 ;  SnA  127. 

Eesara'  [fr-  kesal  filament  of  flowers,  hairy  structures  of 
plants  esp.  of  the  lotus  ;  usually  of  kinjakkha  PvA  77  ; 
VvA  12;  in;  —  sa-ke.sarehi  padumapattehi  lotus- 
leaves  with  their  hairs  VvA  32  ;  nicula-k°  fibres  of  the 
Nicula  tree  VvA  134. 

-bhara  a  sort  of  fan  (cp.  valadhi  and  camara)  VvA 
278. 

Kssatin  [fr.  kesara'l  having  a  mane,  of  a  lion,  also  name 
of  a  battle-array  ("sarjgamo)  Dpvs  1.7  ;  cp.  Av^  1.56. 

Eesava  [fr.  last]  of  rich  hair,  of  beautiful  hair.  Ep.  of  King 
VSsudcva  (cp.  kanha)  Pv  ii.6'. 

Keaika  (adj.)  [fr.  kesa]  hairy,  of  mangoes  Miln  334. 

Ko  see  ka. 

Koka'  [r.ot=Sk.  koka,  cuckoo]  a  wolf  J  vi.525  ;  Nd'  13  = 
Nd'  420;  Miln  267=  J  v. 416.  "vigh?.sa  remainder  of  a 
wolfs  meal  Vin  111.5S. 

Koka'  [cp.  Sk.  koka]  N.  of  a  tree,  Phoenix  svlvcstris:  see 
keka. 

Kokanada  (nt.)  i"cp.  Sk.  kokanada]  the  (red)  lotus  A 
iu.239  =  J  1. 116. 

Kokasika  the  red  lotus  in  °jata  "  like  the  red  lotus,"  said 
of  the  Uowcr  of  the  Paricchattaka  tree  A  iv.  iiS. 

Kokila  [cp.  Sk.  koka  a  kind  of  goose,  also  cuckoo,  with 
derivation  kokila  cuckoo;  cp.  Gr.  r/ncku;,  Lat.  cucuhis. 
E.  riickool  the  Indian  cuckoo.  Two  kinds  mentioned 
at  VvA  57  :  kala"  and  phussa"  black  and  speckled  k.  — 
As  citra'  at  J  v. 416.  —  Vv  11',  58';  VvA  132,  163. 

Koca  i^r.  kncl  sec  sai)''. 

Koci  sr^c  ka. 

Koccha'  (nt.)  some  kind  of  scat  or  settee,  made  of  bark, 
grass  or  rushes  Vin  11.(49.;  iv.4(i  (where  the  foil  dcf.  is 
given  :  kocchar)  nania  vaka-mayar)  va  usira-mayar)  va 
muiTjaniayar)  va  babbaja-niayar)  va  anto  sarjvcihctva 
baddhar)  hoti.  Cp.  i'in.  7c.xls  1.34;  111.165);  J  v. 4(17. 
Also  m  li^t  of  16  obstructions  (paliborlha)  at  Miln  1 1. 

Koccha'  (nt.)  a  comb  (for  hair-dressing)  Vin  11.107;  \'v 
84"  (=VvA  349);  'ih  J,  254,  411  (  =  ThA  267). 

-kara  a  comli-makcr  Miln  331   (not  in  corrcsp.  list  of 
vocations  at  1)  1.51). 

Koja  mail  armour  J  iv.296  (=kavaca). 

Kojava  a  rug  or  cover  with  long  hair,  a  fleecy  counterpane 
Vin  1.281;  PhA  1177;  III. 297  (pavara") ;  Davs  v. 30. 
Often  in  cxpl"  of  gonaka  (q.  v.)  as  digha-lomaka  maha- 
kojava  DA  1.86;  Pv.\  157. 

Konca^  [cp.  Sk.  kraufica  &  krui\c]  the  heron,  often  in 
comb"  with  mayura  (i)eacock)  :  Th  i,  1 1 13  ;  Vv  1 1',  35'  ; 
J  v.31.4:  VI. 272  ;  or  with  harjsa  Pv  11.12''.  —  Expl''  as 
sSrasa  \vA  57;  jinn.i"  an  old  heron  Dh  155. 


Koflca'=abbr.  of  koflca-nida.  trumpeting,  in  koficai) 
karoti  to  trumpet  (of  elephants)  Vin  111.109:  J  vi.497. 
-nada  the  trumpeting  of  an  elephant  {"  the  heron's 
cry")  [not  with  Morris,  J.P.T.S.  1887,  163  sq.  to 
kroiic.  (meaning  to  bend,  cp.  Lat.  crux,  E.  ridge),  but 
prob.  a  contamination  of  krbsa,  fr.  krus  to  crow,  and 
kniiia  =  kuiijara,  elephant  (q.  v.).  Partly  suggested  at 
Divy  251  ;  see  also  expl"  at  VvA  35,  where  this  con- 
nection is  quite  evident.]  J  1.50  ;  Miln  76  (in  etymol. 
play  with  konca) ;  VvA  35.  -rava  =  prcc.  DhA  iv.70. 
•vadika  a  kind  of  bird  J  vi.538. 

Ko^  [fr.  kuta']  belonging  to  a  peak,  in  cpd.  °pabbata 
"  peak-mountain."  Npl.  Vism  127  (write  as  K°).  292. 

KotacikS  pudendum  muliebre,  in  conn,  with  kita  as  a 
vile  term  of  abuse  Vin  IV.7  (Bdhgh.  ko^acika  ti  itthi- 
nimittai)  .  .  .  hino  nama  akkoso). 

Koti  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  koti  &  kuta']  the  end — (a)  0/  space:  the 
extreme  part,  top,  summit,  point  (cp.  anta  to  which  it 
is  opposed  at  J  vi.371) :  dhanu-kotii)  nissiya  "  through 
the  (curved)  end  of  my  bow,"  i.  e.  by  means  of  hunting 
J  II. 20c  ;  afthi-koti  the  tip  of  the  bone  J  111.26 ;  capa° 
a  bow  VvA  261  ;  vema°  the  part  of  a  loom  that  is  moved 
DhA  III.  1 75  ;  khetta"  the  top  (end)  of  the  field  SnA  150  ; 
cankamana°  the  far  end  of  the  cloister  J  iv.30  ;  PvA 
79.  —  (b)  of  lime :  a  division  of  time,  with  reference 
either  to  the  past  or  the  future,  in  pubba°  the  past  (cp. 
pubbanta),  also  as  purima" ;  and  pacchima°  the  future 
(cp.  aparanta).  These  expressions  are  used  only  of 
sarjsara:  sar|sarassa  purima  kofi  na  pafii^ayati  "  the 
first  end,  i.  e.  the  beginning  of  S.  is  not  known  "  Nd' 
664 ;  DhsA  11;  of  pacchima  koti  ibid.  —  anamatagg' 
4yai)  sarjsaro,  pubba°  na  pafliiayati  S's  end  and  be- 
ginning are  unthinkable,  its  starting-point  is  not  known 
(to  beings  obstructed  by  ignorance)  S  11.178  =  111.149  = 
Nd2  664=Kvu  29  =  PvA  166;  cp.  Bdhd  118  (p.k.  na 
ilayati).  —  kotiyai)  {hito  bhavo  "  my  existence  in  the 
past"  J  1.167.  —  (c)  of  7iumber :  the  "end"  of  the 
scale,  i.  e.  extremely  high,  as  numeral  representing 
approximately  the  figure  a  hundred  thousand  (cp. 
Kirfcl,  Knsniographie .  p.  336).  It  follows  on  sata- 
sahassani  Nd'  664,  and  is  often  increased  by  sata"  or 
sahassa",  esp.  in  records  of  wealth  (dhana)  Sn  677 ; 
J  1.227,  23<),  345  =  DhA  1.367  (asiti°-vibhavo) ;  J  1.478; 
PvA  3,  96;  cp.  also  kotisata  arahanto  Miln  6,  18. 
—  kahapana-koti-santharena  "  for  the  price  (lit.  by  the 
spreading  out)  of  a  100, '(.o  kahSpanas  "  Vin  11.159  = 
J  1.94  (ref.  to  the  buying  of  Jetavana  by  Anathapirj- 
dika). 

-gata  "  gone  to  the  end,"  having  reached  the  end, 
i.  e.  perfection,  nibbana.  Nd'  436;  -ppatta=prec. 
Nd-  436 ;  as  "  extreme  "  J  1.67.  -simball  N.  of  a  tree 
(in  Avici)  Sdhp  194. 

Eo(ika  (adj.)  'fr.  koti]  i.  having  a  point  or  a  top,  with 
rcf.  to  the  human  teeth  as  eka°,  dvi^,  ti",  catu",  or  teeth 
with  one,  two,  etc.,  points  Vism  251.  —  2.  having  an 
end  or  climax  SA  on  pariyanta  (see  KS.  p.  320); 
apana='  lasting  till  the  end  of  life  Miln  397 :  Vism  10.  — 
3.  referring  to  (both)  ends  (of  saosara),  in  ubhato° 
pafihii  questions  regarding  past  &  future  M  1.393  sq. 

Kotin  (adj.)  [fr.  k<>ti]  aiming  for  an  end  or  goal  J  vi.254 
(cp.  akofana'). 

Ko^lla  (nt.)  'fr.  kiiiila]  crookedness  Dhtm  526;  Abhp 
859.     As  kotilya  at  Dlitp  472. 

Kotumbara  (nt.)  [cp.  nSk.  kanfumba  Divy  559]  a  kind  of 
cloth  J  VI. 47  (coming  from  the  kingdom  of  k.).  500 
(spelt  kodumb").     -"ka  k.-stuffs  Miln  2. 

Kotta  (?)  breoking,  asi-k"  note  on  Vin  iv.363  (for 
asikot;ha  Vin  iv.171?);  "attl"  at  Vism  254  read 
kotth°. 


Kottana 


56 


Kodba 


Kottana  [fr.  kotteti]  i.  grinding,  crushing,  pounding 
(grains)  J  1.475 ;  "paean'  adi  pounding  and  cooking,  etc. 
DhA  II. 261.  —  2.  hammering  or  cutting  (?)  in  daru" 
J  ii.i8;  VI.86  (magsa°,  here  "beating."  T.  spells  tth). 
Cp.  adhikuttana. 

KoUita  (pp.  of  kotteti]  beaten  down,   made  even  Vism 

254.  255- 
Kottlma  a  floor  of  pounded  stones,  or  is  it  cloth  ?  Da.vs 

IV.47. 

Kott«ti  [cp.  Sk.  kut  &  kuUaV  Expl"'  one-sidedly  by 
£>htp  (91  &  556)  as  "  chedane  "  which  is  found  only  in 
3  and  adhikuttanA.  The  meaning  "  beat "  is  attri- 
buted by  Dhtp  (557)  &  Dhtm  (783)  to  root  kat'  (see 
kuta')  by  expl"  "  akofane."  Cp.  also  kata* ;  akoteti 
&  patikoteti] — i.  to  beat,  smash,  crush,  pound  J  1.478; 
VI. 366  (spelt  tth);  DhA  1.25  (suvaijnai))  165. — 2.  to 
make  even  (the  ground  or  floor)  Vin  11.291  (in  making 
floors);  J  VI.332.  —  3.  to  cut,  kill  SnA  178  {  =  hanti  of 
Sn  121);  DhA  1.70  (pharasun&).  —  pp.  ko^tita.  —  Caus. 
kottapeti  to  cause  to  beat,  to  massage  Vin  11.266 ; 
J  iv.37  (tt  the  only  v.  1.  B. ;  T.  has  tth). 

Eo^ba*  (m.  nt.)  [Sk.  ko?tha  abdomen,  any  cavity  for 
holding  food,  cp.  kujta  groin,  and  also  Gr.  cvtoq  cavity, 
KvaSoi  pudendum  muUebre,  Kvartt  bladder  =  E.  cyst, 
chest;  Lat.  cunnus  pudendum,  Ger.  bode  testicle]  any- 
thing hollow  and  closed  in  (Cp.  gabbha  for  both  mean- 
ings) as —  I.  the  stomach  or  abdomen  Miln  265,  Vism 
357 ;  Sdhp  257.  —  2.  a  closet,  a  monk's  cell,  a  store- 
room, M  1.332;  Th  2,  283  (?)=ThA,  219;  J  H.168. — 
3.  a  sheath,  in  asi°  Vin  iv.171. 

-atfhi  a  stomach  bone  or  bone  of  the  abdomen  Vism 
254.  255.  -abbhantara  the  intestinal  canal  Miln  67; 
-<lgara  (nt.)  storehouse,  granary,  treasury :  in  conn, 
with  kosa  (q,  v.)  in  formula  paripu^^a-kosa-kotthagara 
(adj.)  D  1.134,  expl''  at  DA  1.295  ^  threefold,  viz. 
dhana"  dhaiifia°  vattha",  treasury,  granary,  warehouse ; 
PvA  126,  133;  -Agarika  a  storehouse-keeper,  one  who 
hoards  up  wealth  Vin  1.209 :  DhA  i.ioi  ;  -iaa  [=kottha 
-haosa]  share,  division,  part;  °kotth&sa  (adj.)  divided 
into,  consisting  of.  K.  is  a  prose  word  only  and  in  all 
Com.  passages  is  used  to  explain  bh3.ga :  J  1.254  '•  266 ; 
VI. 368 ;  Miln  324 ;  DhA  iv. ;  108  (=pada).  154 ;  PvA  58, 
III,  205  (kama°=: k&magu]>a) ;  VvA  62  ;  anekena  k'-ena 
infinitely  PvA  221. 

Kottba'  a  bird  J  vi.539  (woodpecker  ?). 

Kottha'  [cp.  Sk.  kuttha]  N.  of  a  plant,  Costus  speciosus  (?) 
J  V.420. 

Kotthaka^  (nt.)  "  a  kind  of  kottha,"  the  stronghold  over 
a  gateway,  used  as  a  store-room  for  various  things,  a 
chamber,  treasury,  granary  Vin  11.153,  210;  for  the 
purpose  of  keeping  water  in  it  Vin  11.121  =  142;  220; 
treasury  J  1.230;  11.168;  —  store-room  J  11.246;  kot- 
tbake  pJturahosi  appeared  at  the  gateway,  i.  e.  arrived 
at  the  mansion  Vin  1.291 . ;  —  udaka-k  a  bath-room,  bath 
cabinet  Vin  1.205  (cp.  Bdhgh's  expl"  at  Vin.  Texts 
11.57);  so  also  nataina-k°  and  pitthi-k°,  bath-room 
behind  a  hermitage  J  111.71;  DhA  11. 19;  a  gateway. 
Vin  n.77;  usually  in  cpd.  dvara-k"  "door  cavity." 
i.  e.  room  over  the  gate :  gharag  satta-dvara-kotthaka- 
patimaQ^tar)  "  a  mansion  adorned  with  seven  gate- 
ways" J  1.227  =  230,  290:  VvA  322.  dvara-kottba- 
kesu  asanani  patthapenti  "  they  spread  mats  in  the 
gateways"  VvA  6;  esp.  with  bahi:  balii-dvirakot- 
thaka  nikkhametva  "  leading  him  out  in  front  of  the 
gateway  "  A  iv.2o6 ;  "e  thita  or  nisinna  standing  or 
sitting  in  front  of  the  gateway  S  1.77;  M  i.i6i,  382; 
A  111.30. — bala-k.  a  line  of  infantry  J  1.179.  —  kof- 
thaka-kamma  or  the  occupation  connected  with  a 
storehouse  (or  bathroom  ?)  is  mentioned  as  an  example 
of  a  low  occupation  at  Vin  iv.6 ;  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v. 
"  someone  who  sweeps  away  dirt." 


Kottbaka'  [cp.  Sk.  koya? tika]  the  paddy-bird,  as  rtikkha* 
J  111.25;  "163  (v.  1.  tt). 

Kottba  see  kotthu. 

Kottbetl  at  J  11.424  the  v.  1.  khobheti  (navat))  should  be 
substituted.     See  also  kotteti. 

KoQa  [cp.  Sk.  kona  &  also  P.  kartpa]  i.  a  comer  Vin 
11.137  ;  catn°=catu-kaijija  PvA  52  ; — °raccha  cross- 
roads PvA  24.  —  2.  a  bow  for  a  musical  instrument 
Miln  53. 

KoQta  (v.  1.  B.  kon^a)  (?)  a  man  of  dirty  habits  J  IT.209. 
210,  212. 

Kootba  a  cripple  J  11. 118. 

KoQ^-damaka  (?)  [cp.  kunda]  J  iv.389;  also  as  v.  1.  B 
at  J  11.209. 

KoQ^afifla  a  well-known  gotta  J  11.360. 

Kotfibala  (nt.)  [on  formation  cp.  kolahala ;  see  also 
kutiihala]  excitemeut,  tumult,  festival,  fair  Davs  11.80  ; 
esp.  in  °mangalai]  paccagacchati  he  visits  the  fair  or 
show  of ...  M  1.265  :  ^-  III-43Q  ;  °mangalika  celebrating 
feasts,  festive  A  111.206 ;  J  1.373  ;  Miln  94  (cp.  Miln 
trsl.  1. 1 43" :  the  native  commentator  refers  it  to  erro- 
neous views  and  discipline  called  kotuhala  and  manga- 
lika)  —  (b)  adj. :  kotuhala  excited,  eager  for,  desirous 
of  Miln  4 ;  DhiA  1.330. 

-sadda  shout  of  excitement  Miln  301. 

Eotthall  (kotthali  r)  a  sack  (?)  Vin  111.189siv.269. 

Kottbn  [kotthu  J  only :  cp.  Sk.  kro^tu,  of  krni]  a  jackal 
D  111.25,  26 ;  M  1.334 ;  Nd'  149  (spelt  kotthu) ;  J  vi.537 
(°suna :  expl''  by  sigala-sunakha,  katthu-son'^  ti  pi 
patho).  kotthaka  (and  kotthuka)  =  prec.  S  1.66  (where 
text  has  kutthaka)  J  11.108 ;  Miln  23. 

KodaQ^a  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  kodanda]  a  cross-bow  M  1.429  (opp. 
to  capa) ;  Miln  351  (dhanu  and  k").  °ka  same  J  iv.433 
(expl''  by  dhanu). 

Kodambara  see  kotumbara. 

Kodba  [Vedic  krodha  fr.  krudb,  cp.  kujjhati]  anger. 
Nearest  synouyms  are  aghata  (Dhs.  1060  =  Nd'  576, 
both  expositions  also  of  dosa),  upanaha  (always  in  chain 
raga,  dosa.  moha,  kodha,  upanaha)  and  dhuma  (cp. 
0vn6s,  Mhg.  toOm=:ani{er).  As  pair  k.  and  upanaha 
A  1.91.  95 ;  in  sequence  kodha  upanaha  makkha  palasa. 
etc.  Nd^  raga  1. ;  Vbh  357  sq. ;  Vism  53,  107,  306 ;  in 
formula  abhijjha  byapada  k.  upanaha  M  1.36 ;  A 
I.299  =  iv.i48 ;  cp.  A  1v.456sv.209;  v.39,  49  sq.,  310, 
361.  As  equivalent  of  aghata  Dhs  1060  =  Nd'  576,  cp. 
Pug  i8.  In  other  comb":  with  mada  and  tbambha 
Sn  245 ;  kadariya  Sn  362  ;  pesuniya  Sn  928 ;  mosa- 
vajja  Sn  866.  868  (cp.  S  1. 169).  Other  passages,  e.  g. 
A  1.283;  S  1.240;  Sn  537  (lobha°);  Pv  11. 3' ;  Dh  1.52 
(anattha-janano  kodho) ;  PvA  55,  222.  —  kodha  is  one 
of  the  obstacles  to  Arahantship.  and  freedom  from 
kodha  is  one  of  the  fundamental  virtues  of  a  well- 
balanced  mind.  —  ma  vo  kodho  ajjbabhavi  "  let  not 
anger  get  the  better  of  you"  S  1.240  ;  mano  hi  te  brah- 
ma^a  kharibhaio  kodho  dhiimo  bhasmani  mosavaj- 
jar|,  etc.  "  anger  is  the  smoke  (smouldering)  in  the 
ashes"  S  l.:69  =  Nd'  576. — kodhag  chetva  cutting 
o£f  anger  S  1.41=47=161  =  237;  kodha;}  jahe  vippaja- 
heyya  manari  "  give  up  anger,  renounce  conceit " 
J  1.23  25  =  Dh  221  ;  kodhag  pajahanti  xapaissino;  "  the 
wise  give  up  anger  "  It  2  =  7  ;  panui>ria- kodha  (adj.)  one 
who  has  driven  out  anger  Sn  469 ;  akkodhena  jine 
kodhag  conquer  anger  by  meekness  Dh  223  =  }  11.4  = 
VvA  69.  Yo  ye  uppatitag  kodhag  rathag  bhantag  va 
dharaye  tarn  ahag  sarathig  brum!  —  "  He  who  restrains 


Kodhana 


57 


Kollniyi 


rising  anger  as  he  would  a  drifting  cart,  him  I  call  a 
waggoner  "  Dh  222,  cp.  Sn  1.  —  akkodha  freedom  from 
anger,  meekness,  conciliation  M  1.44 ;  S  1.240  (with 
avihiQM  tenderness,  kindness);  A  1.95;  Dh  223  =  } 
11.4  =  VvA  69. 

-Atimana  anger  and  conceit  Sn  968.  -upayasa  com- 
panionship or  association  with  anger,  the  state  of  being 
pervaded  with  anger  (opp.  akkodh°)  M  1.360,  363 ; 
often  compared  with  phenomena  of  nature  suggesting 
sweUing  up,  viz.  "  uddhumSyika "  kodhupJySsassa 
adhivacanai)  M  1.144;  "sa-ummi"  It  114;  "  sobbho 
papato  "  S  III. 109;  -garu  "having  respect  for"  i.  e. 
pursuing  anger  (opp.  saddhammagaru)  A  11.46  sq.,  84 ; 
-paiifiana  (adj.)  knowing  the  true  nature  of  anger 
Sn  96  (cp.  SnA  170) ;  -bhakkha  feeding  on,  i.  e.  foster- 
ing anger,  Ep.  of  a  Yakkha  S  1.238 ;  -yinaya  the  disci- 
pline or  control  of  anger  A  1.91;  v. 165,  167  (comb"* 
with  upaniiha  vinaya). 

Kodhana  (adj.)  [fr.  kodha)  having  anger,  angry,  uncon- 
trolled] ;  usually  in  comb"  with  upanahin,  e.  g.  Vin 
11.89;  ^  111.45,  246;  A  V.156,  cp.  Sn  116;  S  11.206; 
Pug  18.  —  k°  kodhSbhibhuta  A  iv.94  sq. ;  k"  kodhavi- 
nayassa  na  vappavadi  A  v.  165.  —  Used  of  cao(Ja 
PvA  83.  —  Cp.  S  :v.240  ;  M  1.42  sq.,  95  sq. ;  PvA  82.  — 
akkodhana  friendly,  well-disposed,  loving  D111.159; 
S  11.207 :  iv.243  ;  M  1.42  sq.,  95  sq. ;  Sn  19,  624,  SjO,  941 ; 
Vv  i5»;  VvA  69. 

Konta  a  pennant,  standard  (cp.  kunta)  J  vi.454 ;  DA  1.244  > 
SnA  317. 

Kontlmant  at  J  vi.454  is  expf  by  camma-kara,  thus 
"  worker  in  leather  (-shields  or  armour),"  with  der.  fr. 
konta  ("  satthitaya  kont^ya  likhatta  .  .  .").  but 
reading  and  meaning  are  uncertain. 

Kopa  [fr.  knp]  ill-temper,  anger,  grudge  Vin  11.184=:  Sn 
6 ;  Dhs  1060  ;  with  appaccaya  (mistrust)  M  1.27 ;  almost 
exclusively  in  phrase  kopciii  ca  dosaii  ca  appaccayafi  ca 
patukaroti  (patvakasi)  "  he  shows  forth  iU-temper, 
malice  and  mistrust "  (of  a  "  codita "  bhikkhu)  D 
111.159;  S  IV.305 ;  M  1.96  sq.,  250,  442;  A  1. 124,  187; 
11.203;  in.iSi  sq. ;  IV.168,  193;  J  1.30 1  ;  Sn  p.  92. — 
akopa  (adj.)  friendly,  without  hatred,  composed  Sn  499. 
-antara  (adj.)  one  who  is  under  the  power  of  ill- 
temper  S  1.24. 

Kopa&eyya  (adj.)  [fr.  kopa]  apt  to  arouse  anger  J  vi.257. 

Koplna  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  kaupina]  a  loin-cloth  J  v.404 ;  Pv 
11.3W;  PvA  172;  Sdhp  106. 

-niddaijsanin  "  one  who  removes  the  loin-cloth,"  i.  e. 
shameless,  impure  D  in. 183. 

Kopeti  [caus.  of  kuppati]  to  set  into  agitation,  to  shake, 
to  disturb :  rajadhamme  akopetva  not  disturbing  the 
royal  rules  PvA  161;  J  11.366=  DhA  iv.88 ;  kammat) 
kopetur)  Vin  iv.133  to  find  fault  with  a  lawful  decision  ; 
kayangaij  na  kopeti  not  to  move  a  Umb  of  the  body : 
see  kaya.     Cp.  pati°,  pari°,  vi".  sai)°. 

Komala  see  kamala  ;  Mhbv  29. 

Komira  [fr.  kumara]  (adj.)  juvenile,  belonging  to  a  youth 
or  maiden:  f.  komari  a  virgin  A  iv.210. 

-pati  husband  of  a  girl-wife  J  11. 120.  •brahma- 
cariya  (  g  carati)  to  practise  the  vow  of  chastity  or 
virginity  A  111.224  ;  ThA  99.  -bhacca  Np.  "  master  of 
the  k°-science."  i.  e.  of  the  medical  treatment  of  infants 
(see  note  on  Vin  1.269  at  Vin.  Texts  11. 174).  As  such 
it  is  the  cognomen  of  Jivaka  D  1.47  (as  Komarabhacca 
DA  1.132);  Vin  1. 71  ;  J  I.n6;  cp.  Sdhp  351. 

Komiiaka  (and  °ika)  =  prec.  A  1.261  ;  J  11. 180  (  dhamma 
virginity);  of  a  young  tree  S  iv,i6o.  — f.  °ika  J 
111.266. 

Komndl  (f.)  [fr.  kumuda  the  white  waterlily,  cp.  Sk. 
kaumudi]  moonlight ;  the  fuU-moon  day  in  the  month 


Kattika,  usually  in  phrase  komudi  catumicinl  Vin 
1.155,  '76.  s<l-  ;  D  1.47  (expl""  at  DA  1.139  as:  tada  kira 
kumudani  supupphitani  honti)  or  in  phrase  komudiya 
puQoamaya  DhA  111. 461. 


a  bud  J  11.265.  — 


Koraka  (m.  nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  koraka] 
2.  a  sheath  J  111.282. 

Korakita  (adj.)  [fr.  koraka]  foil  of  buds  VvA  288. 

Korajika  (adj.)  \fx.  ku-t-rai  or  rafij,  cp.  rSga]  affected, 
excitable,  infatuated  Nd'  226  =  Nd*  342  (v.  1.  koca- 
raka)3iVism  26  (v.  1.  koraiijika). 

Eon94>ka  [=kuraQ(Jaka]  a  shrub  and  its  flower  J  v. 473 
("dama,  so  read  for  karaQ^aka),  vi.536 ;  as  Npl.  in 
Koraq^aka-vihara  Vism  91. 

Korabya  [Sk.  kauravya]  Np.  as  cognomen  :  the  descendant 
of  Kuni  J  11.371  (of  Dhanaiijaya). 

KoriyA  (f.)  a  hen  v.  1.  (ti  va  pali)  at  Th  2.  381  for  turiya. 
See  also  ThA  255  (  =  kuflcakarakukkuti). 

Kola  (m.  nt.)  [Halayudha  11. 71  gives  kola  in  mesming  of 
"  hog,"  corrupted  fr.  kroija]  the  jujube  fruit  M  1.80  ; 
A  111.49  (sampanna-kolakai)  sukaramai)sa  "  pork  with 
jujube");  J  111.22  (=badara);  vi.578. 

-mattiyo  (pi.)  of  the  size  of  a  j.  truit,  always  comb, 
w.  kolatthi-mattiyo,  of  boils  A  v.i70  =  Sn  p.  125,  cp. 
S  1. 150 ;  .rukkha  the  j.  tree  SnA  356 ;  DA  1.262  ;  -sam- 
paka  cooked  with  (the  juice  of)  jujube  Vv  43'  (=iVvA 
186). 

Kolankola  [der.  fr.  kula]  going  from  kula  to  kula  (clan  to 
clan)  in  sagsara :  A  i.233  =  Pug  16;  S  v. 205;  Nett  189, 
cp.  A  IV.381 ;  A  V.120. 

Kolailiia  (adj.)  [fr.  kula]  bom  of  (good)  family  (cp.  ku- 
laja) ;  as  -°,  belonging  to  the  family  of  ...  D  1.89 ; 
DA  1.252  ;  Miln  256.  — khina-kolaiifia  (adj.)  one  who 
has  come  down  in  the  world  Vin  1.86. 

Kolattbi  the  kernel  of  the  jujube,  only  in  cpd.  °niatti]ro 
(pi.)  S  1.150=  A  v.i70=Sn  p.  125  (with  kolamattiyo), 
and  "matta  Th  2,  498  =  ThA  289;  DhA  1.319. 

Kolapntti  at  A  1.38  is  composition  form  of  kulaputta,  and 
is  to  be  combined  with  the  foil.  -vaQpa-pokkharata, 
i.  e.  light  colour  as  becoming  a  man  of  good  family.  Kern, 
Toev.  s.  V.  quite  unnecesssuily  interprets  it  as  "  heron- 
colour,"  compaiing  Sk.  kolapuccha  heron.  A  simitar 
passage  at  Nd'  8o  =  Nd'  505  reads  kolaputtikena  va 
vaT^i^apokkharataya  va,  thus  taking  kolaputtikag  as 
nt,  meaning  a  man  of  good  virtue.  The  A  passage 
may  be  corrupt  and  should  then  be  read  °puttikai). 

KolamtMk  (and  kolamba  VvA)  a  pot  or  vessel  in  generaL 
In  Via  always  together  with  gha^a,  pitcher :  Vin  1.208, 
213,  225.  286;  J  1.33  ;  DA  1.58 ;  VvA  36. 

Kolahala  (nt.)  (cp.  also  halahala)  shouting,  uproar,  excite- 
ment about  (-"),  tumult,  foreboding,  warning  about 
something,  haiUng.  There  are  5  kolahalani  enum^  at 
KhA  120  sq.  viz,  kappa°  (the  announcement  of  the  end 
of  the  world,  cp.  Vism  415  sq.),  cakkavatti°  (of  a  world- 
king),  buddha°  (of  a  Buddha),  mangala°  (that  a  Buddha 
will  pronounce  the  "  tvayyiXiuv "),  moneyya"  (that  a 
monk  will  enquire  of  the  Lord  after  the  highest  wisdom, 
cp.  SnA  490).  One  may  compare  the  3  (raaha-)hala- 
haiani  given  at  J  1.48  as  kappa-halahala,  buddha"  and 
cakkavatti",  eka-kolahalar)  ons  uproar  J  iv.404  ;  vi.586  ; 
DhA  11.96.  See  also  Vin  11. 165,  275,  280;  J  v.437 ; 
DhA  1.190;  PvA  4;  VvA  132. 

Koliya  (adj.)  [fr.  kola]  of  the  fruit  of  the  jujube  tree 
J  III. 22.  but  wrongly  expl"*  as  kula-dattika  ph.<=giveD 
by  a  man  of  (good)  family. 

KoUniyfi  (f )  well-bred,  of  good  family  J  11.348  (BB  koley- 
yaka). 


Koleyyaka 


58 


Kvan 


Kole^aka  (adj.)  of  good  breed,  noble,  appl""  to  dogs 
J  1. 175;  IV.437.  Cp.  koUniya,  and  Divy  165:  kolika- 
gadrabha  a  donkey  of  good  breed. 

Kolfipa  (and  kolapa)  (adj.)  i.  dry.  sapless;  always  appl' 
to  wood,  freq.  in  similes  S  iv.161,  185  ;  M  1.242  ;  111.95 ; 
J  111.495;  Miln  151;  DhA  n.51  ;  iv.166.  —  2.  hollow 
tree  Nd*  40 ;  SnA  355  (where  Weber,  Ind.  Streifen 
V.1862,  p.  429  suggests  reading  kotara=Sk.  kofara 
hollow  tree;  unwarranted). 

Kolika  (or  kolika?)  (f.)  adj.  =  kolaka,  appl.  to  boils,  in 
pijikolika  (ittbi)  having  boils  of  jujube  size  Th  2,  395 
(expl.  at  ThA  259 ;  akkhidalesu  nibbattanaka  pUika 
vuccati). 

Kovida  (adj.)  [ku+vid.]  one  who  is  in  the  possession  of 
right  wisdom,  with  ref.  either  to  dhamma,  magga,  or 
ariyasaccani,  closely  related  to  medhavin  and  pandita. 
S  1. 146,  194.  196  (ceto-pariyaya°) ;  A  11.46;  M  i.i,  7, 
135.  300,  310,  433;  Dh  403  =  Sn  627;  Sn  484  (jati- 
maraua"),  653  (kammavipaka") ;  Pv  i.ii";  Vv  15' 
(=VvA  73),  63^"  (=VvA  269);  Miln  344;  Sdhp  350. 
— akovida  ignorant  of  true  wisdom  (dhammassa)  S  1. 1 62  ; 
Sn  763;  S  iv.287  =  Nd^  on  attanuditthi. 

Kovi}arB  [cp.  Sk.  kovidara]  a  sort  of  ebony,  Bauhinia 
variegata ;  a  tree  in  the  devaloka  (pariccbattaJia  kovi- 
lara:  k-blossom,  called  p.  VvA  174)  A  iv.117  sq.  ; 
Sn  44  ;  J  IV. 29 ;  Vv  38' ;  DhA  1.270. 

-puppha  the  flower  of  the  K.  tree  SnA  354  (where  the 
limbs  of  one  afflicted  with  leprosy  are  compared  with 
this  flower). 

Kosa'  (m.  nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  ko^a  and  ko^,  cavity,  box  vessel, 
cp.  Goth,  hus,  E.  house;  related  also  kuk§i=P.  kucchij 
any  cavity  or  enclosure  containing  anything,  viz.  i.  a 
store-room  or  storehouse,  treasury  or  granary  A  iv.95 
(raja°) ;  Sn  525;  J  iv.409  (  =  wealth,  stores);  J  vi.81 
(a(^dhakosa  only  half  a  house)  in  cpd.  -"  ko^agara, 
expl''  at  DA  1.295  as  koso  vuccati  bhaijcjagarar).  Four 
kinds  are  mentioned  :  hatthj",  ass&°,  rathS",  ratthai)°.  — 

2.  a  sheath,  in  khura°  Vism  251  ,  paijija"  KhA  46.  — 

3.  a  vessel  or  bowl  for  food  :  see  kosaka.  —  4.  a  cocoon, 
see  -°k5raka  ;  —  5.  the  membranous  cover  of  the  male 
sexual  organ,  the  pracputium  J  v.  197.  The  Com. 
expl^  by  sarira-sarjkhata  k°.  See  cpd.  kosohita.  — 
Cp.  also  kosi. 

-arakkha  the  keeper  of  the  king's  treasury  (or  granary) 
A  111.57  '•  -ohita  ensheathed,  in  phrase  kosohita  vat- 
thaguyha  "  having  the  pudendum  in  a  bag."  Only 
in  the  brahmin  cosmogonic  myth  of  the  superman 
(maha-purisa)  D  111.143,  i6i.  Applied  as  to  this  item, 
to  the  Buddha  D  i  106  (in  the  C  D.\  1.275,  correct  the 
misprint  kesa  into  kosa)  D  11.17  ;  Sn  ■'^22  pp.  106,  107 ; 


Miln  167.  For  the  myth  see  Dial  111.132-136.  -ka- 
raka  the  "  cocoon-maker,"  i.  e.  the  silk-worm,  Vin 
111.224;  Vism  251.  -ko(thagara  "treasury  and 
granary  "  usually  in  phrase  paripupna  -k  -k  (adj.)  "  with 
stores  of  treasures  and  other  wealth  "  Vin  1.342 ; 
D  1.134  ;  S  '89 ;  Miln  2  ;  &  passim. 

Kosa'  at  VvA  349  is  marked  by  Hardy,  Index  and  trsl' 
by  scar  or  pock.  It  should  be  corrected  to  kesa,  on 
evidence  of  corresp.  passage  in  ThA  267  (cp.  koccha). 

Kosaka  [fr.  kosa]  i.  a  sheath  for  a  needle  J  m.282  ;  — 
2.  a  bowl,  container,  or  vessel  for  food  J  1.349  (v.  1. 
kesaka) ;  M  11,6,  7,  (-"ahara  adj.  living  on  a  bowl-full  of 
food ;  also  a<J(Jha°)  Vism  263.  —  3.  case  for  a  key 
(kuncika")  Vism  251. 

Kosajja  (nt.)  [From  kusita]  idleness,  sloth,  indolenci. , 
expl""  at  Vbh  369.  —  Vin  11.2  ;  S  v. 277-280  ;  A  1. 11,  16; 
11.218;  111.375,  421;  v.146  sq. ;  159  sq. ;  A  IV. 195  = 
Dh  241  ;  Miln  351  ;  Vism  132  ;  Nett  127;  DhA  111.347; 
iv.85;  DhsA  146;  SnA  21. 

Ko8amattha=ka-(-samattha  "  who  is  able,"  i.  e.  able,  fit 
DA  1.27. 

Kosalla  (nt.)  (der.  fr.  kusala]  proficiency.  There  are  3 
kinds  mentioned  at  D  111.220,  Vbh  325  &  Vism  439  sq., 
viz.  aya",  apaya°  and  upaya° ;  at  Dbs  16  =  20  =  292  = 
555=  Nd*  ad  pafin?.  it  is  classed  between  pandicca  and 
nepuilila.  See  also  Pug  25;  Vism  128  sq.  (appana"), 
241  sq.  (uggaha"  &  manasikara°),  248  (bojjhanga°) ;  PvA 
63.  99  (upSya"). 

KosatakI  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  kosataki]  a  kind  of  creeper  Vv  47* ; 
Vism  256,  260,   359 ;   VvA  2CO  ;  -bija  the  seed  of  the 

k.   A  I.32  =  V.2l2. 

Kosika=  kosiya,  an  owl  J  v.  120. 

Kosiya  an  owl  J  11.353,  cp-  Np.  Kosiyayana  J  1.49'). 
BijSrakosika  (and  °kosiya)  J  iv.69. 

KosI  (f.)  a  sheath  D  i.77=M  11. 17. 

Koseyya  [der.  ir.  kosa,  cp.  Sk.  kauseya  silk-cloth  and  P. 
kosa-karaka]  silk:  silken  material  Vin  1.58=  Miln  267; 
Vin  1.192,  281;  11.163,  169;  D  1.7,  cp.  A  1.181  (see 
DA  1.87);  A  IV. 394  ;  Pv  II. 1";  J  1.43;  VI.47. 

-pavara  a  silk    garment  Vin    1.281  ;   -vattha  a    silk 
garment  DhA  1.395. 

KohaSna  (nt.)  [fr.  kuhana]  hypocrisy,  deceit  J  11.72 ; 
111.268;  IV. 304  ;  DhA  1.141. 

Kva9  (indecl.)  is  together  with  kun  registered  as  a  part, 
of  sound  ("  sadde  ")  at  Dhtp  118  &  Dhtm  173. 


Kh. 


Khs  syllable  &  ending,  functioning  also  as  root,  meaning 
"  void,  empty  "  or  as  n.  meaning  "  space  "  ;  expld.  by 
Bdbgh  with  ref.  to  dukkha  as  "  khar)  saddo  pana 
tucche ;  tucchar)  hi  akisar)  khan  ti  vuccati  "  Vism  494. 
—  In  meaning  "  space,  sky  "  in  cpd.  khaga  "  sky-goer  " 
(cp.  viha-ga  of  same  meaning),  i.  e.  bird  Abhp  624 ; 
Bdhd  56. 

SQiagga  [Sk.  khadga ;  perhaps  to  Lat.  clades  and  gladius ; 
cp.  also  kfifa'']  i.  a  sword  (often  with  dhanu,  bow)  at 
D  1.7  (Dh  1.89  =asi)  as  one  of  the  forbidden  articles  of 
ornament  (cp.  BSk.  khadga-mani  Divy  147,  one  of  the 
royal  insignia) ;  —  khaggar)  bhandati  to  gird  on  one's 
sword  PvA  154,  khaggar)  sannayhati  id.  DhA  111.75  ; 
°gahaka  a  sword-bearer  Miln  114;  °tala  sword-blade 
Mhvs  25,  go.  —  2.  a  rhinoceros,  J  v.406  (  =  gavaja), 
416;  VI. 277  (°miga),  538.  In  cpd.  Msana  (cp.  BSk. 
khadgavi^Sqa  Divy  294  =  Sn  36)  the  horn  of  a  rh. 
( :  khagga-visanag  nSma  khagga-miga-singai)  SnA  65) 
Sn  35  sq.  (N.  of  Sutta) ;  Nd'  217  (khagga-visana-kappa 
"  like  the  horn  of  the  rh."  Ep.  of  a  Paccekabuddha, 
(cp.  Divy  294,  582),  also  at  Vism  234. 

Khaoite  [pp.  of  khac  as  root  expl''  at  Dhtm.  518  by 
"  bandhana  "]  inlaid,  adorned  with,  usually  with  jewels 
e.  g.  VvA  14,  277;  marii-mutt&di  khacit'i  ghaijta  "  bells 
inlaid  with  jewels,  pearls,  etc."  VvA  36 ;  of  a  fan  inlaid 
with  ivory  (danta-khacita)  Vin  ni.287  (Sam.  Pas.). 
Suvanna-khacita-gajak'  attharaoa  "  elephants'  trap- 
pings interwoven  with  gold  "  VvA  104  ;  of  a  chair,  inlaid 
with  pearls  J  1.41  ;  of  a  canopy  embroidered  with 
golden  stars  J  1.57. 

Khajja  (adj.-nt.)  [grd.  of  khajjati]  to  be  eaten  or  chewed, 
eatable,  solid  food,  usually  in  cpd.  -bhojja  solid  and 
other  food,  divided  into  4  kinds,  viz.  asita,  pita,  khayita, 
sayita  Pv  1.5'  (  =  PvA  25)  J  1.58;  Miln  2.  -bhajaka  a 
distributor  of  food  (an  office  falling  to  the  lot  of  a  senior 
bhikkhu)  Vin  11. 176  (  =  v.204);  iii.  38,  155. 

Khajjaka  (adj.)  ffr.  last]  eatable,  i.  e.  solid  food  (as  °bhoj- 
janani  opposed  to  yigu  PvA  23);  (nt.)  J  1.186  (of  18 
kinds,  opp.  ySgu) ;  1.235  (id.);  Miln  294.  -°bhajaka  = 
prec. 

Khajjati  (  =  kh£diyati.  Pass,  of  kh&dati;  Dhtm  93  bhak- 
khana)  i .  to  be  eaten,  chewed,  eaten  up,  as  by  animals  : 
upacikahi  Vin  11. 113;  sunakhehi  Pv  111.7' ;  pulavehi 
J  III. 177;  cp.  Pv  IV.5*  (cut  in  two)  —  2.  to  be  itchy, 
to  be  irritated  by  itch  (cp.  E.  "  itch  "  =Inten3.  of 
"eat")  J  V.198  (kh"  kanduvSyati) ;  Pv  11.3'  (kac- 
chuya  kh°)  —  3.  to  be  devoured  (fig.),  to  be  consumed, 
to  be  a  victim  of :  kamata^hclhi  M  1.504 ;  rupena 
S  111.87,  88  (khajjanlya-pariyaya,  quoted  Vism  479).  — 
ppr.  khajjamana  Pv  ii.i»  (consumed  by  hunger  &  thirst). 

Khajjara  caterpillar  Pgdp  48. 

Khajjopakana  [cp.  Sk.  khadyota]  the  fire-ay  M  11.34  =  41  ; 
J  ".4 '5;  VI. 330,  441  ;  DhA  III. 1 78;  also  khajjupanaka 
Vism  412  (in  simile).  See  Trenckner  J.P.T.S.  1908. 
59  &  79. 


Ebaiija  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  khaSja,  Dhtp  81  :  khailja  gati- 
vekalye]  lame  (either  on  one  foot  or  bolh :  PugA  227) 
Vin  11.90=  A  1. 107  =  11.85  =  Pug  51  (comb,  with  karia 
and  kuiji) ;  Th  2,  438  {+  kina)  ;  DhA  1.376  {+  kuni). 

Eliafijati  [fr.  khaQja]  to  be  lame  Pv  iii.22». 

Khaftjana  (nt.)  hobbling,  walking  lame  PvA  185. 

Khatakhata  (khat-kata,  making  khat ;  cp.  kakkSreti)  the 
noise  of  hawking  or  clearing  one's  throat :  -sadda  Vin 
1.88 ;  DhA  in. 330  ;  cp.  khakkhata  (v.  1.  khatkhata) 
Divy  5 1 8  =  utka^ana^abda. 

Khatopika  (f.)  [perhaps  connected  with  Sk  khatva  ?  un- 
certain] couch,  bedstead  M  1.450,  451  (w.  U.  ka", 
khajj"). 

Kha^a'  (m.)  [Derivation  unknown.  It  has  been  suggested 
that  khapa  and  the  Sk.  kshana  are  derived  from 
ikshana  (seeing)  by  process  of  contraction.  This 
seems  very  forced ;  and  both  words  are.  in  all  proba- 
bility, other  than  the  word  from  which  this  hypo- 
thesis would  derive  them.]  i .  Sdhp  584  ;  khano  ve 
ma  upaccaga  "  let  not  the  slightest  time  be  wasted  " 
Sn  333  =  Dh  315;  cf.  Th.  11. 5  (cp.  khanatita) ;  n'  atthi 
so  kh°  va  layo  va  muhutto  va  yar)  (nadi)  aramati 
"  there  is  no  moment,  no  inkling,  no  particle  of  time 
that  the  river  stops  flowing"  A  iv.137  (as  simile  of 
eternal  flow  of  happening,  of  unbioken  continuity  of 
change) ;  Vism  238  (jivita"),  473  ;  (khana-vasena  uppad'- 
adi-kbana-ttaya,  viz.  uppada.  (biti,  bbanga.  cp.  p.  431); 
J  IV.  128;  attha-kkhana-vinimmutto  kh"  paramadul- 
labho :  one  opportunity  out  of  eight,  very  difidcult  to  be 
obtained  Sdhp  4,  16  ;  cp.  45.  46.  —  2.  moment  as  coin- 
cidence of  two  events:  "  at  the  same  moment."  esp.  in 
phrase  tag  khanag  yeva  "  all  at  once,"  simultaneously, 
with  which  syn.  thanaso  J  1.167,  253  ;  111.276  ,  PvA  19; 
PvA  27,  35  ;  tasmig  khane  J  11.154;  PvA  67  ;  Sdhp  17.  — 
3.  the  moment  as  something  expected  or  appointed  (cp. 
roipdf),  therefore  the  right  moment,  or  the  proper 
time.  So  with  ref.  to  birth,  rebirth,  fruit  of  action, 
attainment  of  Arahantsbip,  presence  on  earth  of  a 
Buddha,  etc.,  in  cpds. :  cuti-kkhano  Bdhd  106 ;  pafi- 
sandhi"  Ps  11.72  sq. ;  Bdhd  59,  77,  78 ;  uppatti"  Vbh 
411  sq. ;  sotapattimagga"  Ps  11.3;  phala°  Ps  1.26, 
Bdhd  80;  nikanti"  Ps  11.72  sq. ;  upacara"  Bdhd  94; 
citta"  id.  38,  95.  -khaoe  kha^e  from  time  to  time  Dh  239 
(=okase  okase  DhA  111.340,  but  cp.  Comp.  161,  n.  5), 
Buddhuppada",  Th  11. A,  12.  akkhana  see  sep.  Also 
akkhanavedhin.  -akkhane  at  the  wrong  time,  in- 
opportune Pv  iv.i**  (  =  akale).  On  kh.  laya.  muhutta 
cp.  Points  of  Contr.  296.  n.  5. 

-Atita.  having  missed  the  opportunity  Sn  333  =  Dh 
315  (=DhA  III. 489) ;  -flflii  knowing,  realizing  the 
opportunity  Sn  325  (cp.  SnA  333).  -paccuppanna 
arisen  at  the  moment  or  momentarily  Vism  431  (one 
of  the  3  kinds  of  paccuppanna :  kh°.,  santatj°,  addha"). 
-paritta  small  as  a  moment  Vism  238. 

Khaoa'  [fr.  kha?]  digging  J  11.296.     Cp.  atikha^a. 

KhaQati  [f  r.  khan  or  khan ;  Dhtp  1 79 :  anadarane]  i .  to 
dig  (?  better  "  destroy  "  ;  cp.  Kern  Toev.  s.  v.),  dig  out. 


59 


Khapana 


60 


•Khattng 


uproot  Dh  247,  337;  Sn  p.  loi ;  J  11.2 05 ;  iv.371,  373: 
Sdhp  394.  Also  khanati  &  cp.  abhikkhanati, 
palikkhanati.  — 2.  [  =  Sk.  kjanati]  to  destroy  Vin  11.26 
(attSnai)) ;  M  1.132  (id.).  —  pp.  khata  &  khata  (cp. 
palikkhata). 

Khapana  (nt.)  [fr.  kha^]  digging  Miln  351  (pokkharani"). 

KhaQika  (adj.)  [fr.  khana]  unstable,  momentary,  tem- 
porary, e\'anescent,  changeable ;  usually  S5T1.  with 
ittara,  e.  g.  J  1.393  ;  111.83  ;  PvA  60.  —  Vism  626  (khani- 
kato  from  the  standpoint  of  the  momentary).  Kha- 
nika  piti  "  momentary  joy  "  is  one  of  the  5  kinds  of 
joy,  viz.  khuddika,  khanikJ,  okkantik&,  ubbega, 
pharana  (see  piti)  Vism  143,  DhsA  115. 

-dtta  temporary  or  momentary  thought  Vism  289. 
-marana  sudden  death  Vism  229.  -vassa  momentary, 
i.  e.  sudden  rain  (-shower)  J  vi.486. 

Khaipikatta  (nt.)  [fr.  kha^ika]  evanescence,  momentariness 
Vism  301. 

WTia^^ft  [frcq.  spelt  ka^^a  (q.  v.).  Cp.  Sk.  khapi^a ;  expl** 
at  Dhtp  T05  as  "  chedana  "]  i.  (adj.)  broken,  usually 
of  teeth  :  Th  2,  260  ( =ThA  211);  Miln  342  ;  Vism  51.  — 
2.  (m.  nt.)  a  broken  piece,  a  bit,  camma°  a  strip  of  hide 
Vin  It.  1 22  ;  coja"  a  bit  of  cloth  PvA  70  ;  pilotika"  bits 
of  rags  PvA  171  ;  puva°  a  bit  of  cake  J  111.276;  —  akhanda 
unbroken,  entire,  whole,  in  -karin  (sikkhiya)  fulfilling 
or  practising  the  whole  of  (the  commandments)  Pv 
IV. 3"  and  "stla  observing  fully  the  sila-precepts  Vv  113; 
cp.  Vism  51  &  Bdhh  89. 

-Akhanda  (redupl.-iter.  formation  with  distributive 
function)  piece  by  piece,  nothing  but  pieces,  broken  up 
into  bits  Vism  115.  -Akhandika  piece  by  piece,  con- 
sisting of  nothing  but  bits,  in  kh  "g  chindati  to  break  up 
into  fragments  A  1.204  (of  m&luvalat<l) ;  11. 199  (of 
thuna) ;  S  11.88  (of  rukkha) ;  cp.  Vin  111.43  (d&runi  °r) 
chedapetvi) ;  J  v.231  (°r)  katva).  -danta  having  broken 
teeth,  as  sign  of  old  age  in  phrase  kh"  palitakesa,  etc. 
"with  broken  teeth  and  grey  hair"  A  1.138  and  ~,- 
J  1-59.  79  (id.),  -phulla  [Bdhgh  on  Vin  n.i6o  ;  khan(Ja 
=  bhinn'ok3so,  phulla  =  phalit"  okaso.]  broken  and 
shattered  portions ;  'r)  patisankharoti  to  repair  dilapi- 
dations Vin  11.160  ( =navakammai)  karoti)  286  ;  111.287  ; 
A  in. 263  ;  cp.  same  expression  at  Divy  22.  a°  unbroken 
and  unimpaired  fig.  of  sila,  the  rule  of  conduct  in  its 
entirety,  with  nothing  detracted  Vy  83'*  =  Pv  iv.i'^ 
(cp.  akhai7(Jasila)  =  DhA  1.32. 

Wia^jati  to  break,  DhA  rv.14;  pp.  khandita  broken, 
PvA  158  (-kaQOO  =  chinnaka)Kio). 

Kha^jikS  (f.)  [fr.  khao^^l  ^  broken  bit,  a  stick,  in  ucchu° 
Vv  33M  (  =  uechu-yatthi  DhA  111.315). 

Khao^ioca  (nt.)  the  state  of  being  broken  (of  teeth), 
having  broken  teeth,  in  phrase  kh°  palicca,  etc.,  as 
signs  of  old  age  (see  above)  M  1.49  =D  11.305  ;  A  111.196  ; 
Dhs  644  =  736  =  869  ;  DhA  ui.123  ;  in  similar  connection 
Vism  449. 

Ifhapjeti  [v.  denom.  fr.  khaijda]  to  renounce,  to  remit,  in 
vetanai)  "etvS.  J  111.188. 

Khata'  [pp.  of  khanati]  i.  dug  up,  uprooted,  fig.  one 
whose  foundation  (of  salvation)  has  been  cut  off ;  in 
comb"  with  upahata  D  1.86  (  =  DA  1.237);  khatar) 
upahatar)  attanai)  pariharati  "  he  keeps  himself  up- 
rooted and  half-dead  "  i.  e.  he  continues  to  lead  a  life 
of  false  ideas  A  1.105  =  11.4  ;  opp.  akkhatai)  anupahatai), 
etc.  A  1.89. 

Khata^  [pp.  of  ksan,  to  wound]  hurt,  wounded ;  p5do  kh" 
hoti  sakalik&ya  "  he  grazed  his  foot  "  S  i,27  =  MiIn  134, 
179.  —  akkhata  unmolested,  unhurt  Vv  84''  (=:anu- 
padduta  VvA  351).     See  also  parikkhata. 


Khataka  [fr.  khata*]  damage,  injury  VvA  206,  khatakar) 
dasiy&  deti  "  she  did  harm  to  the  servant,  she  struck 
the  s."  Or  is  it  khalikai)  ?  (cp.  khaleti) ;  the  passage 
is  corrupt. 

Khatta  (nt.)  [Sk.  k^tra,  to  ksi,  cp.  Gr.  tran^iai,  rr^/ia, 
possession]  rule,  power,  possession ;  only  in  cpds. : 

-dhamma  the  law  of  ruling,  political  science  J  v.490 
(is  it  khattu°  =  khatta°  ?)  -vijja  poHty  D  1.9.  con- 
demned as  a  practice  of  heretics.  Bdhgh  at  DA  1.93 
explains  it  as  niti-sattha,  poUtical  science  (  =  °dhamma). 
See  Rh.  D.  Dialogues  1.18.  -yijjavadin  a  person  who 
inculcates  Macchiavellian  tricks  J  v.228  (paraphrased : 
matapitaro  pi  mSretva  attano  va  attho  kSmetabbo  ti 
"  even  at  the  expense  of  kilUng  father  and  mother  is 
wealth  to  be  desired  for  oneself  ").  so  also  J  v.240  ; 
-vijjacariya  one  who  practises  kh-  °vijja  ibid. ;  -vida 
(so  read  for  °vidha)=  "vijja  (adj.)  a  tricky  per-on,  ibid, 
(v.  1.  °vijja,  better).     Cp  Sk.  k^jtra-vidya. 

Khattar  [Sk.  k$attr  fr.  k$atra]  attendant,  companion, 
charioteer,  the  king's  minister  and  adviser  (Lat.  satelles 
"satellite"  has  bean  compared  for  etym.)  D  1.112 
(=DA  1.280,  kh"  vuccati  pucchita-pucchita-pafthar) 
vyakarana-samattho  mab&matto :  "  kh°  is  called  the 
King's  minister  who  is  able  to  answer  all  his  questions  ")  ; 
Buddhaghosa  evidently  connects  it  with  katheti,  to 
speak,  respond  =  kattha ;  gSdhai)  k°  A  ii.i07  =  Pug  43 
V.  1.  for  katta  (cp.  Pug  A  225). 

Khattiya  [der.  fr.  khatta  ==k^tra  "  having  possessions  "  ; 
Sk.  kjatriya]  pi.  nom.  also  khattiySse  J  in. 441.  A 
shortened  form  is  khatya  J  vi.397.  —  f.  khattiya  A 
111.226-229,  khatti  D.  1. 1 93,  and  khattiyl.  A  member 
of  one  of  the  clans  or  tribes  recognised  as  of  Aryan 
descent.  To  be  such  was  to  belong  to  the  highest 
social  rank.  The  question  of  such  social  divisions  in 
the  Buddha's  time  is  discussed  in  Dialogues  1.97- 107; 
and  it  is  there  shown  that  whenever  they  are  referred 
to  in  lists  the  khattiyas  always  come  first.  Khattiyo 
settho  jane  tasmit)  D  1. 199  =  11. 97  =  M  1.358  =  8  1.153, 
11. 284.  This  favourite  verse  is  put  into  the  mouth  of  a 
god ;  and  he  adds  that  whoever  is  perfect  in  wisdom 
and  righteousness  is  the  best  of  all.  On  the  social 
prestige  of  the  khattiyas  see  further  M  11. 150-157; 
III. 169;  A  11.86;  S  1. 71,  93;  Vin  IV. 6-10.  On  the 
religious  side  of  the  question  D  111.82  ;  93  ;  M  1.149,  177  ; 
11.84  ;  S  1.98.  Wealth  does  not  come  into  consideration 
at  all.  Only  a  verj'  small  percentage  of  the  khattiyas 
were  wealthy  in  the  opinion  of  that  time  and  place. 
Such  are  referred  to  at  S  1.15.  All  kings  and  chieftains 
were  khattiyas  D  1.69,  136;  111.44,  46,  61;  A  i.ioo; 
III. 299 ;  iv.259.  Khattiyas  are  called  rajano  Dhp  294, 
quoted  Netti  165. 

-Abhiseka  the  inauguration  of  a  king  A  1. 107,  108  (of 
the  crown-prince)  =  A  11.87  '•  -kafUla  a  maid  of  khattiya 
birth  J  1.60 ;  111.394 ;  -kuia  a  khattiya  clan,  a  princely 
house,  Vin  11.161  (w.  ref.  to  Gotama's  descent); 
111.80 ;  -parisa  the  assembly  of  the  khattiyas ;  as 
one  of  tiie  four  parisas  (kh°,  brahma^ia",  gahapati", 
samaqa)  at  Vin  1.227 :  A  11.133  ;  ^^  th^  ^i^t  one  of  the 
eight  (1-4  as  above,  Catummaharajika".  Tavatigsa", 
Mara",  Brahma")  at  M  1.72  =D  111.260 ;  -mahasala  "  the 
wealthy  khattiya  "  (see  above  ii.i)  D  in. 2 58,  etc. ;  -maya 
"the  magic  of  the  noble"  DhA  1.166;  -vagsa  aristo- 
cratif-  descent  DA  1.267  :  -sukhumala  a  tender,  youthful 
prince  (of  the  Tathagata :  buddha",  kh")  DhA  1.5. 

Khattiyl  (f.)  a  female  khattiya,  in  series  brahmani  kh" 
vessl  suddi  capclil'  nesidi  veifi  rathakari  pukkusi 
A  111.229;  similarly  M  n.33,  40. 

"Khattag  [Sk.  "krtvah,  cp.  °kad]  in  comp"  with  numerals 
"  times  "  :  dvikkhattui),  tikkhattui),  etc. ;  twice,  three 
times,  etc. 


Khadira 


6i 


Khandha 


Khadin  [Sk.  khadira;  Gr.  tiaaapoi.  ivy;  Lat.  hedera, 
ivy]  the  tree  Acacia  catechu,  in  cpds.  -angara  (pi.) 
embers  of  (burnt)  acacia- wood  J  1.232  ;  PvA  152  ; 
-gha^ika  a  piece  of  a.-wood  J  iv.88 ;  •tthambha  a  post 
of  a.-wood  DhA  111.206  ;  -patta  a  bowl  made  of  a.-wood 
J  V.3S9;  -vana  a  forest  of  acacias  J  11.162  ;  -siila  an 
impaling  stake  of  a.-wood  J  iv.29. 

EtuuuUi  see  khapati. 

KhanitU  (f)  [to  khan,  cp.  Sk.  khanitra]  a  spade  or  hoe 
Vin  1.270  ;  J  vi.520=V.89  {+  anknsa). 

ghantaf  [n.  agent  of  khanti]  possessed  of  meekness  or 
gentleness ;  docile,  manageable.  Said  of  an  elephant 
A  11.116  =  111.161  sq. 

Khanti  &  KhanU  f.  [Sk.  k^nti]  patience,  forbearance, 
forgiveness.  Def.  at  Dhs  1341  :  khanti  khamanata 
adhiv^anata  acap^ikkai)  anasuropo  attamanata  cit- 
tassa.  Most  frequent  combinations :  with  metta  (love) 
(see  below) ;  -titikkha  (forbearance) :  khanti  paramai) 
tapo  titikkh&  nibbSnar)  paramai)  vadanti  Buddha 
Dh  i84  =  D  ii.49  =  Vism  295;  khantiyS  bhiyyo  na 
vijjati,  S  1.226;  cp.  DhA  111.237:  titikkhil-sankhata 
khanti ;  -avihigsa  (tolerance) :  kh°,  avihiijsa,  mettata, 
anudayata,  S  v. 169:  -akodhana  (forbearing,  gentle) 
VvA  71  ;  -soraccai)  (docility,  tractableness)  D  111.213  = 
A  1.94  ;  also  with  maddava  (gentleness)  and  s.  as  quality 
of  a  well-bred  horse  A  in. 248,  cp.  A  ii.i  13  and  khant<i ; 
-sovaccassata  (kind  speech)  Sn  266  (cp.  KhA  148).  See 
also  cpds.  —  Khanti  is  one  of  the  ten  paramitSs  J  1.22, 
23  :  cp.  A  111.254,  255-  —  In  other  connections  :  khan- 
tiyi  upasamena  upeta  S  1.30 ;  ativissuto  Sdhp  473 ; 
anulomikAya  kh°iycl  samannSgata  (being  of  gentle  and 
forbearing  disposition)  A  111.437,  441  ;  Ps  11.236  sq. ; 
Vbh  340.  See  also  A  111.372  ;  Sn  189,  292,  897,  944.  — 
In  scholastic  language  frequent  in  combination  ditthi 
khanti  ruci,  in  def.  of  idha  (Vbh  245),  tattha  (Nd'). 
ditthi  (Nd'),  cp.  Nd'  151  and  Vbh  325  sq.  —  akkhanti 
intolerance  Vin  iv.241  (  =  kopa);  Vbh  360  (in  def  as 
opp.  of  khanti  Dhs  1341.  q.  v.  above),  378. 

-bala  (nt.)  the  force  of  forbearance ;  (adj.)  one  whose 
strength  is  patience:  .  .  .  aduttho  yo  titikkhati 
khantibalai)  balJnikai)  tarn  aharg  brumi  br&binanar) 
Dh  399=Sn  623;  —  DhA  iv.164;  Ps  11. 171,  176; 
-metta  forbearing  love,  in  phrase  kh°  -mett4nuddaya- 
sampanna  (adj.)  one  whose  character  is  compassion  and 
loving  forbearance  J  1.151,  262  ;  PvA  66  (-f  yuttakira) ; 
VvA  71  (in  expl"  of  akodhana) ;  -suiiAa  (nt.)  the  void 
of  khanti  Ps  11.183;  -soracca  (nt.)  gentleness  and  for- 
bearance S  1. 100,  222;  A  11.68;  J  111.487;  DhA  1.56; 
'e  nivittha  "  established  in  forbearance  and  meek- 
ness "  A  111.46  =  0  111.61. 

Khantika  (adj.)  [fr.  prec.}  acquiescing  in-,  of  such  and 
such  a  belief,  in  aAfia°  belonging  to  another  faith, 
comb''  with  afiiiaditthika  and  ail&arucika  D  1.187; 
M  1.487. 

gli«n<l«t<  [skand]  to  ]ump,  only  in  cpd.  pakkhandati ; 
given  as  root  khand  at  Dhtm  196  with  meaning  "  pak- 
khandana." 

^pifH^flliB  [Sk.  skandha]  —  I.  Crude  meaning :  bulk, 
massiveness  (gross)  substance.  A.  esp.  used  (a)  of  an 
elephant :  the  bulk  of  the  body,  i.  e.  its  back  S  1.95 ; 
v&raqassa  J  111.392  ;  hatthi-khandha-vara-gata  on  the 
back  of  the  state  elephant  J  1.325  ;  PvA  75.  Also  with 
ref.  to  an  elephant  (hatthiniga)  safljata°  "  to  whom 
has  grown  bulk  =  a  large  back  "  Sn  53,  expl.  SnA  103  by 
susapthitakkhandho  "  well  endowed  with  bulk."  — 
(b)  of  a  person  :  the  shoulder  or  back  :  nangalar)  khan- 
dhe  karitv3.  S  1.115  appl.  to  M^a;  Vism  100;  DhA 
IV.  168  (ohita°-bh5ra  the  load  lifted  off  his  shoulder).  — 
—  (c)  of  a  tree ;  the  trunk,  nikkhassa  PvA  114,  also  as 
rukkha"  J  1.324 ;  tala"  the  stem  of  a  palm  PvA  56 ; 
oigTodhassa   khandhaja   (see   cpds.)   S   1.207=80   272; 


mulai)  atikkamma  kh"  r)  sftra;)  pariyesitabbai)  "  one 
must  go  beyond  the  root  and  search  the  trunk  for 
sweetness  "  S  iv.94.  —  (d)  as  t.t.  in  exegetical  literature  : 
section,  chapter,  lit.  material  as  collected  into  uniform 
bulk ;  freq.  in  postscripts  to  Texts  and  Commentaries. 
See  also  khandhaka.  —  B.  More  general  as  denoting 
bulk  (-°) ;  e.  g.  aggi"  a  great  mass  of  fire  M  11.34,  4'  ; 
J  IV.  139  ;  udaka°  a  mass  of  water  (i.  e.  ocean)  A  111.336 ; 
S  IV.  179;  J  1.324;  PvA  62;  pufiQa"  a  great  accumula- 
tion of  merit  A  111.336=5  v.400  ;  bhoga"  a  store  of 
wealth  A  v.84 ;  J  1.6 ;  maci"  an  extraordinarily  large 
jewel  (possessing  magic  power)  J  11. 102  sq.  — 

II.  Applied  meaning. — A.  (-°)  the  body  of,  a  collec- 
tion of,  mass,  or  parts  of ;  in  collective  sense  "  all  that 
is  comprised  under " ;  forming  the  substance  of.  — 
(a)  dukkha°  all  that  is  comprised  under  "  dukkha,"  all 
that  goes  to  make  up  or  forms  the  substance,  the  idea 
of  "  ill."  Most  prominent  in  phrase  kevalassa  duk- 
khakhandhassa  samudaya  and  nirodha  (the  origin  & 
destruction  of  all  that  is  suffering)  with  ref.  to  the  paticca- 
samuppada,  the  chain  of  causal  existence  (q.  v.)  Vin 
I.I  ;  S  11.95  ;  III.  14  ;  A  1.177  ;  v.  184&  passim.  Similarly: 
samudaya  Vbh  135  sq.  nirodha  Nett  64  ;  antakiriya 
A  1. 147;  vyadhimarapatunnanar)  dukkhakkhandhai) 
vyapanudi  Th  2,  162.  —  (b)  lobba°  dosa"  moha°  the 
three  ingredients  or  integrations  of  greed,  suffering  and 
bewilderment,  lit.  "  the  big  bulk  or  mass  of  greed  "  (see 
also  under  padaleti),  S  v. 88  (nibbijjhati  through  the 
satta  bojjhanga).  —  (c)  vayo°  a  division  of  age,  part 
of  age,  as  threefold :  purima",  majjhima",  pacchima° 
Nd'  in  def.  of  sada.  —  (d)  sQa  (etc.)  kh°  the  3  (or  5) 
groups  or  parts  which  constitute  the  factors  of  right 
living  (dhamma),  viz.  (i)  sila"  the  group  dealing 
with  the  practice  of  morality  ;  (2)  samadhi"  that  dealing 
with  the  development  of  concentration  ;  (3)  paBaa"  that 
dealing  with  the  development  of  true  wisdom.  They 
are  also  known  under  the  terms  of  sila-sampada,  citta°, 
paiifla°D  1.172  sq. ;  see  sila.  — D  1.206  ;  Nett  64  so. ;  126. 
tihi  dhammehi  samannagato  "  possessed  of  the  three 
qualities,"  viz.  sila-kkhandhesu,  etc.  It  51  ;  cp. 
A  1. 291  ;  v.326.  tihi  khandhehi  .  .  .  attbangiko 
maggo  sangahito  M  1.30 1  ;  silakkhandhai),  etc.  pari- 
pureti  "  to  fulfil  the  sila-group  "  A  1.125;  11.20,  111.15 
sq.  These  3  are  completed  to  a  set  of  5  by  (4)  vimutti" 
the  group  dealing  with  the  attainment  of  emancipation 
and  (5)  vimutti-flai>a-dassana  "the  group  dealing  with 
the  realization  of  the  achievement  of  emancipation.  As 
1-4  only  at  D  111.229  (misprint  puiifla  for  pai^fia) ;  cp. 
A  1.125.  As  5  at  S  l.99  =  A  1.162  ;  S  v.162  ;  A  111.134. 
271;  V.16  (all  loc.=S  1.99);  It  107,  108;  Nd'  under 
sila. 

B.  (absolute)  in  individual  sense :  constituent 
element,  factor,  substantiality.  More  especially  as 
khandha  (pi.)  the  elements  or  substrata  of  sensory 
existence,  sensorial  aggregates  which  condition  the 
appearance  of  life  in  any  form.  Their  character  accord- 
ing to  quality  and  value  of  life  and  body  is  evanescent, 
fraught  with  ills  &  leading  to  rebirth.  Paraphrased  by 
Bdhgh.  as  rasi,  heap,  e.  g.  Asl.  141  ;  Vibh  A  1  f . ;  cf. 
B.Psy.  42.  I .  Unspecified.  They  are  usually  enumerated 
in  the  foil,  stereotyped  set  of  5  :  rupa°  (material  quali- 
ties), vedana  (feeling),  saiifla  (perception),  sankhara 
(coefficients  of  consciousness),  vifUi&na  (consciousness). 
For  further  ref.  see  riipa ;  cp.  also  Mrs.  Rh.  D,  Dhs  Irsl. 
pp.  40-56.  They  are  enumerated  in  a  different  order 
at  S  I.I  12,  viz.  rflpai)  vedayitai)  saAfiar)  vifiBapar)  yaA 
ca  sankhatai)  n'  eso  'ham  asmi.  Detailed  discussions 
as  to  their  nature  see  e.  g.  S  m.ioi  (=Vbh  1-61); 
S  III. 47 ;  111.86.  As  being  comprised  in  each  of  the 
dhatus.  viz.  kama°  rapa°  arupa-dhatu  Vbh  404  sq. 

(a)  As  factors  of  existence  (cp.  bhava).  Their  r61e  as 
such  is  illustrated  by  the  famous  simile :  "  yatha  hi  anga- 
sambhara  hoti  saddo  ratho  iti  evar)  khandhesu  santesu 
boti  satto  ti  sammuti  "  "  just  as  it  is  by  the  condition 
precedent  of  the  co-existence  of  its  various  parts,  that 


Kbandha 


62 


Khandha 


the  word  '  chariot '  is  used,  just  so  it  is  that  when  the 
skandhas  are  there,  we  talk  of  a  'being'"  (Rh.  D.) 
(cp.  Hardy,  Man.  Buddh.  p.  425)  S  i.i35=Miln  28. 
Their  connotation  "  khandha  "  is  discussed  at  S  in.ioi 
=  M  in. 16:  "  kittavata  nu  kho  khandh^nar)  khandh&- 
dhivacanar)  ?  rupar)  (etc.)  atitanagatapaccuppannai) 
ajjhattai)  va  bahiddhS  va  ojarikar)."  etc. :  i.e.  material 
qualities  are  equivalent  terms  for  the  kh.  What 
causes  the  manifestation  of  each  kh.  ?  cattaro 
mahibhiiti  .  .  .  paccayo  rupa-khandhassa  paiiiia- 
pan&ya ;  phasso  .  .  .  vedana",  safifia",  sankhara",  etc. ; 
namarupari  .  .  .  viiifiaija" :  the  material  elements  are 
the  cause  of  riipa,  touch  is  that  of  vedanS.  safliia, 
sankhara,  name  and  shape  that  of  viiliiana  (S 
iii.ioi) ;  cp.  M  1. 138  sq.,  234  sq.  On  the  same  principle 
rests  their  division  in :  rupa-kiyo  rupakkhandho  na- 
makayo  cattaro  arupino  khandha  "  the  material  body 
forms  the  material  factor  (of  existence),  the  individual- 
ized body  the  4  immaterijil  factors  "  Nett  41  ;  the  riipak- 
khandha  only  is  kamadhatu-pariyapanno :  Vbh  409 ; 
the  4  arupino  kh"  discussed  at  Ps  11.74,  ^'so  at  Vbh  230, 
407  sq.  (grouped  with  what  is  apariyapanna)  —  Being 
the  "  substantial  "  factors  of  existence,  birth  &  death 
depend  on  the  khandhas.  They  appear  in  every  new 
conjuncture  of  individuality  concerning  their  function 
in  this  pafisandhi-kkharie ;  see  Ps  11.72-76.  Thus  the  var. 
phases  of  life  in  transmigration  are  defined  as  —  (jati:) 
ya  tesar)  tesar)  sattanar)  tamhi  tamhi  satta-nikaye  jati 
safijati  okkanti  abhinibbatti  khandhanai)  patubhavo 
ayatananar)  patilabho  Nd^  on  Sn  1052  ;  cp.  jati  dvlhi 
khandhehi  sangahita  ti  VvA  29 ;  khandhanat)  patu- 
bhavo jati  S  II. 3  ;  Nett  29  ;  khandhanai)  nibbatti  jati 
Vism  199.  —  (maranaij:)  ya  tesar)  tesai)  sattanai)  .  .  . 
cuti  cavanata  bhedo  antaradhanar)  maccu  maraijar) 
kalakiriya  khandhanai)  bhedo  kalevarassa  nikkhepo 
M  l.49=Vbh  I37  =  S  11. 3,  42.  —  vivatta-kkhandha 
(adj.)  one  whose  khandhas  have  revolved  (passed  away), 
i.  e.  dead  S  1.121  =111.123.  —  kh°anai)  udaya-vyaya  (or 
udayabbaya)  the  rising  and  passing  of  the  kh.,  trans- 
migration Dh  374=Th  i,  23,  379  =  It  i20  =  KhA  82; 
Ps  1.54  sq.  • —  (b)  Their  relation  to  attachment  and 
craving  (kama) :  sattisulupama  kama  khandhanai) 
adhikuttana  S  l.i28=Th  2,  58,  141  (ThA  65:  natthi 
tesai)  adhik°  ?) ;  craving  is  their  cause  &  soil :  hetu- 
paticca  sambhuta  kh.  S  1.134;  ^^^  4  arflpino  kh.  are 
based  on  lobha,  dosa,  moha  Vbh  208.  —  (c)  their 
annihilation :  the  kh.  remain  as  long  as  the  knowledge 
of  their  true  character  is  not  attained,  i.  e.  of  their  cause 
&  removal :  yai)  rupar),  etc.  .  .  .  n'  etag  mama  n'  eso 
'huTj  asmi  na  m'  eso  atta  ti ;  evag  etai)  yathabhutag 
sammappafliiaya  passati ;  evag  kho  janato  passato  .  .  . 
ahankaramamankara-mananusaya  na  honti  ti  S  in.  103  ; 
•pai\ca-kkhandhe  pariniiaya  S  111.83  ;  pai^ca-kkhandha 
pariiinata  titthanti  chinnamulaka  Th  2,  106.  See  also 
S  1. 1 34.  —  (d)  their  relation  to  dhdtu  (the  physical 
elements)  and  dyatan'%  (the  elements  of  sense-percep- 
tion) is  close,  since  they  are  all  dependent  on  sensory 
experience.  The  5  khandhas  are  frequently  mentioned 
with  the  18  dhatuyo  &  the  I2  ayatanani :  khandha  ca 
dh°  cha  ca  ayaUma  ime  hetui)  paticca  sambhuta  hetu- 
bhanga  nirujjhare  S  1.134;  kh°-dh°-ayatanar)  sankha- 
tar)  jatimularj  Th  2,  472  ;  dhammai)  adesesi  khandh'- 
ayatana-dhatuyo  Th  2,  43  (cp.  ThA  49).  Enumerated 
under  sabba-dhamma  Ps  i.ioi  =11.230  ;  under  dhamma 
(states)  Dhs  121,  as  lokuttara-kkhandha,  etc.  Dhs  358, 
528,  553. — khandhanai)  khandhattho  abhiilfieyyo, 
dhatunag  dhatuttho,  etc.  Ps  1.17;  cp.  1.132  ;  11.121,  157. 
In  def.  of  kamavacara  bhumi  Ps  1.83.  In  def.  of 
dukkha  and  its  recognition  Nett  57.  In  def.  of  ara- 
hanto  khTijasava  Nd^  on  sankhata-dhamma  ("  kh. 
sankhata,"  etc.),  on  tinna  ("  khandha-  (etc.)  pariyante 
thita  "),  &  passim.  —  (e)  their  valuation  tic  their  bearing 
on  the  "  soul  "-conception  is  described  in  the  terras 
of  na  mama  (na  turahakaifV  anatta.  aniccai)  and 
dukkhag    (cp.    upadanakkh°    infra   and    riipa) :    rupag 


(etc.)  .  .  .  aniccai),  dukkhag,  n'  eso  'ham  asmi,  n  'eso 
me  atta  "  materia!  qualities  (etc.  kh.  2-5)  are  evanes- 
cent, bad,  I  am  not  this  body,  this  body  is  not  my 
soul  "  Vin  i.i4=S  iv.382.  n'  eso  'ham  asmi  na  m'  eso 
atta  S  I.IJ2  ;  in. 103,  130  &  passim;  cp.  kayo  na  tum- 
hakai)  (anatta  rupag)  S  11.65 .'  Nd^  080 ;  and  rupai) 
na  tumhakai)  S  111.33  M  i.i40=Nd^  680.  —  rupag, 
etc.  as  anatta:  Vin  1.13;  S  in. 78,  132-134:  A  1.284  = 
11.171;  202;  cp.  S  iii.ioi  ;  Vin  1.14.  —  as  aniccai) : 
S  III. 41,  52,  102,  122,  132  sq.,  i8i  sq.,  195  sq.,  202-224, 
227;  A  IV. 147  (aniccanupassi  dukkhanupassi) ;  anicca 
dukkha  roga,  etc.,  Ps  11.238  sq.  ;  Vbh  324.  — 2.  Specified 
as  pane'  upadina-kkhandha  the  factors  of  the  fivefold 
clinging  to  existence.  Defined  &  discussed  in  detail 
(rupupadana-kkhandha,  etc.)  S  111.47;  86-88;  also 
Vin  1. 10;  S  III. 127  sq.  Specified  S  111.58  iii.ioo=M 
in. 16  ;  S  in. 1 14,  158  sq. ;  v.52,  60  ;  Aiv.458  ;  Vism  443  sq. 
(in  ch.  xiv:  Khandha-niddesa),  611  sq.  (judged  aniccato. 
etc.).  —  Mentioned  as  a  set  exemplifying  the  number  5  : 
Kh  III. ;  Ps  1.22,  122.  Enumerated  in  var.  connections 
S  I.I  12;  D  111.233;  M  1. 190;  A  v.52;  Kh  IV.  (expl"' 
KhA  82=  A  v.52);  Miln  12  (var.  references  concerning 
the  discussion  of  the  kh.  in  the  Abhidhamma).  —  What 
is  said  of  the  khandhas  alone — see  above  1  (a)-(e) — is 
equally  applied  to  them  in  connection  with  upadana.  — 
(a)  As  regards  their  origin  they  are  characterized  as 
chandamulaka  "  rooted  in  desire,  or  in  wilful 
desire"  S  in.  100;  cp.  yo  kho  .  .  .  paiicas'  upadana- 
kkhandhesu  chandarago  tag  tattha  upadanag  ti 
M  1.300,  511.  Therefore  the  foil,  attributes  are  charac- 
teristic :  kummo  paiicann'  etag  upad"  anag  adhiva- 
canag  M  1.144;  bhara  have  pancakkh^a  S  111.26 ; 
paucavadhaka  paccatthika  paficann'  .  .  .  adhivacanag 
S  rv.174;  pane"  upad°  .  .  .  sakkayo  vutto  M  1.299  = 
S  iv.259.  —  (b)  their  contemplation  leads  to  the 
recognition  of  their  character  as  dukkha,  anicca,  anatta  : 
na  kiilci  attanag  va  attaniyag  va  pai\casu  upadanak- 
khandhcsu  S  in.  128;  rogato,  etc.  .  .  .  manasikatabba 
pai\c°  S  111.167;  pailcasu  upad°esu  aniccanupassi 
"  realizing  the  evanescence  in  the  5  aggregates  of 
attachment"  A  v.iog;  same  with  udayavyayanupassi 
S  111. 130;  A  11.45,  90;  111.32  ;  IV. 153;  and  dhammanu- 
passi  M  1. 61.  Out  of  which  realization  follows  their 
gradual  destruction :  paiic'  .  .  .  khandhanag  samudayo 
atthangamo  assado,  etc.  S  111.3 1,  160  sq. ;  A  11.45,  90  ; 
rv.  1 53  ;  Nd^  under  sankhara.  That  they  occupy  a  promi- 
nent position  as  determinants  of  dukkha  is  evident  from 
their  role  in  the  exposition  of  dukkha  as  the  first  one 
of  the  noble  truths :  sankhittena  paiic'upadanakkhandha 
pi  dukkha  "  in  short,  the  5  kh.  are  associated  with  pain  " 
Vin  i.io=M  i.48  =  A  1.177=5  v.421  ;  Ps  1.37,  39; 
Vbh  10 1  &  passim;  cp.  katamag  dukkham  ariyasac- 
cag  ?  paiic'upad"  a  tissa  vacaniyag,  seyyathidag  .  .  . 
S  ni.i58  =  v.425 ;  khandhadisa  dukkha  Dh  202  (& 
expl.  DhA  III. 261).  —  3.  Separately  mentioned:  khan- 
dha as  tayo  arupino  kh°  (ved°,  saflfia",  sankh")  DhA 
1.22 ;  vifliiaija-kh°  (the  skandha  of  discriminative 
consciousness)  in  Def.  of  manas :  manindriyag  vifiiiaijag 
viflfi'-khandho  tajja  manoviiiiiaijadhatu  Nd'  on  Sn 
ii42=Dh3  68. 

-Adhivacana  having  kh.  as  attribute  (see  above) 
S  III.IOI  =M  III. 16;  -avara  a  camp,  either  (i)  fortified 
(with  niveseti)  or  (2)  not  (with  bandhapeti),  esp.  in  the 
latter  meaning  w.  ref.  to  a  halting  place  of  a  caravan 
(=khandhavara  ?)  (i)J  iv.  151  ;  v.162  ;DhA  1.193,  '99- — 
(2)  J  i.ioi,  332;  PvA  113;  DhA  11.79.  Said  of  a 
hermitage  J  v.35.  —  fig.  in  sUa-khandhavarag  bandhitva 
"  to  settle  in  the  camp  of  good  conduct "  DA  1.244  ; 
-ja  (adj.-n.)  sprung  from  the  trunk  (of  the  tree),  i.  e.  a 
growth  or  parasite  S  1.207  =Sn  272,  expl.  at  SnA  304  ; 
khandhesu  jata  khandha-ja.  parohanam  etag  adhiva- 
canag. -niddesa  disquisition  about  the  khandhas 
Vism  (ch.  xiv  esp.)  482.  485,  492.  509,  558,  "389.  -pafi- 
pati  succession  of  khanuhas  Vism  411  sq.  -paritta 
protective  spell  as  regards  the  khandhas  (as  N.  of  a 


Kbandhaka 


63 


Khalati 


Suttanta)  Vism  414.  -bija  "  trunk  seed  "  as  one  kind 
of  var.  seeds,  with  mula^  plialu"  agga°  bija"  at  Viu 
V.132,  &  D  1.5,  expl''  DA  I. Si  :  nama  assattho  nigrodho 
pilakidio  udumbaro  kacchako  kapitthano  ti  evam-adi. 
-rasa  taste  of  the  stem,  one  of  various  tastes,  as  niula° 
khandha°  taca°  patta°  puppha",  etc.  Dhs  629  =  Nd2 
540.  -loka  the  world  of  sensory  aggregates,  with 
dhatu-  and  ayatanaloka  Ps  1.122.  -vibhanga  division 
dealing  with  the  khandhas  (i.  e.  Vibh.  i  sq.)  Miln  12. 
-santana  duration  of  the  khandhas  Vism  414. 

Kbandhaka  [fr.  khandha]  division,  chapter,  esp.  in  the 
Vinaya  (at  end  of  each  division  we  find  usually  the 
postscript :  so  &  so  khandhakai)  nitthitag  "  here  ends  the 
chapter  of  .  .  .") ;  in  cpd.  °vatta,  i.  e.  duties  or  observ- 
ances specified  in  the  v.  khandha  or  chapter  of  the  Vinaya 
which  deals  with  these  duties  Vism  12,  10 1  (cp.  Vin 
11.231),  188. 

Khanflhiman  (adj.)  having  a  (big)  trunk,  of  a  tree  A  111.43. 

Khama  (adj.)  [fr.  ksam]  (a)  patient,  forgiving,  (b)  en- 
during, bearing,  h'ardeued  to  (frost  &  heat,  e.  g.),  fit 
for.  —  (a)  kh.  belongs  to  the  lovable  attributes  of  a 
bhikkhu  (kh.  riipanar),  saddanag,  etc. ;  indulgent  as 
regards  sights,  sounds,  etc.)  A  111.113=138;  the  same 
appUed  to  the  king's  horse  A  111.282.  Khama  patipada 
the  way  of  gentleness  (and  opp.  akkhama),  viz.  akko- 
santar)  na  paccakosati  "  not  to  shout  back  at  liim  who 
shouts  at  you"  A  11.152  sq. ;  cp.  Nctt  77;  classified 
under  the  four  pafipada  at  D  111.229.  In  combn.  w. 
vacana  of  meek,  gentle  speech,  in  vatta  vacana"  a 
speaker  of  good  &  meek  words  S  1.63  ;  11.282  ;  Miln  380  ; 
cp.  suvaco  khamo  A  v. 24  sq.,  forgiving:  Miln  21)7. — 
(b)  khamo  sitassa  ui.ihassa,  etc..  enduring  frost  &  heat 
A  111.389  =v. 132  ;  addhana"  padhana"  (fit  for)  A  111.30  ; 
ranga",  anuyoga°,  vimajjana"  M  1.385.  —  akkhama 
(adj.)  impatient,  intolerant,  in  comb"  dubbaca  dova- 
cassa  karanehi  dhammehi  samannagata  S  11.204  sq.  = 
A  11.147  sq.  With  ref.  to  rupa,  sadda,  etc.  (see  also 
above),  of  an  elephant  A  111. 156  sq.  —  D  111.229  ;  Sdhpgs. 

Khamati  [Uhtp  218:  sahane,  cp.  Sk.  k$amate,  perhaps  to 
Lat.  humus,  cp.  Sk.  ksab,  ksAman  soil ;  Gr.  x*''"''. 
X"!""]  I.  to  be  patient,  to  endure,  to  forgive  (ace.  of 
object  and  gen.  of  person) :  n'  ahai)  bbaya  khamami 
Vepacittino  (not  do  I  forgive  V.  out  of  fear)  S  1.221, 
222  ;  aparadhar)  kh.  to  forgive  a  fault  J  111.394.  kha- 
matha  forgive  DhA  11.254  '•  khamatha  me  pardon  me 
Miln  13;  DliA  1.40. — 2.  (impers.)  to  be  fit,  to  seem 
good ;  esp.  in  phrase  yatha  te  kliameyya  "  as  may 
seem  good  to  you  ;  if  you  please  "  D  1.60,  108 ;  M  1.487. 
sabbar)  me  na  khamati  "  I  do  not  approve  of  "  M  1.497 
sq. ;  na  khamati  "  it  is  not  right  "  D  11.67.  —  3-  to  be 
fit  for.  to  indulge  in,  to  approve  of,  in  nijjhanai)  kha- 
manti  M  1.133,  4*-';  cp.  ditthi-nijjhana-kkhanti  M 
1.480  tV  A  1.1S9. — ppr.  med.  khamamana  Vin  1.281 
(uppaddhakasinar)  kh°)  fit  for,  allowing  of,  worth,  cp. 
lidhgh.  note  Vtn  Texts  1.195. —  grd.  khamaniya  to  be 
allayed,  becoming  better  (of  a  disease)  Vin  i.2f4; 
1)  11.99.  —  caus.  khamapeti  to  pacify,  to  ask  one's 
pardon,  to  apologize  (to-acc.)  J  1.2O7 ;  PvA  123,  195; 
L)hA  1.38.  39;  11.75.  254.  —  to  ask  permission  or  leave 
(i.  e.  to  say  good-bye)  DhA  1.14. 

Khamana  (ut.)  long-sulfering  Miln  351  ;  bearing,  suKcring 
Sdhp  202  ;  and  a"  intolerance  Bdhd  24. 

Khamanata  (f.)  forbearance  and  a''  intolerance,  harsh- 
ness both  as  syu.  <1  khanti  Jc  akkhanti  Dhs  1342, 
Vbh  3O0. 

Khama  (f.)  [fr.  ksamj  (a)  patience,  endurance,  (b)  the 
earth  (cp.  chama  iS  see  khamati)  J  iv.S  (v.  1.  13.  cha- 
iiiaya). 

Khamapanfi  (f.)  labstr.  fr.  khamapeti.  Caus.  of  khamati] 
asking  for  pardon  J  iv.389. 


Khambha  [Sk.  khambha  &  sthambba]  1.  prop,  support, 
in  "^kata  "  making  a  prop,"  i.  e.  with  his  arms  akimbo 
Vin  Ii.2i3  =  iv.i88.  —  2.  obstruction,  stiffening,  paraly- 
sis, in  iiru°  "  stiffening  of  the  thigh  "  M  1.237  (through 
pain) ;  J  v. 23  (through  fear).  See  also  chambheti  & 
thambha. 

Khambheti  [Caus.  fr.  prec.  —  Sk.  skambh,  skabhnati] 
I.  to  prop,  to  support  Th  2.  28  (but  expl.  at  ThA  35  by 
vi°,  obstruct)  —  2.  to  obstruct,  to  put  out,  in  pp. 
khambhita  (  =  vi°)  Nd'  220.  where  it  explains  khitta.  — 
ger.  khambhiya :  see  vi°. 

Khaya  [Sk.  ksaya  to  ksi,  k§inoti  &  ksipati ;  cp.  Lat.  situs 
withering.  Gr.  ^Biaii;,  ^O/i-w,  fOiui  wasting.  See  also 
khcpeti  under  khipati]  waste,  destruction,  consumption  ; 
decay,  ruin,  loss ;  of  the  passing  away  of  night  VvA  52  ; 
mostly  in  appUed  meaning  with  ref.  to  the  extinction 
of  passions  &  such  elements  as  condition,  Ufe,  &  rebirth, 
e.  g.  asavanar)  kh.  It  103  sq.,  esp.  in  formula  asavSnar) 
khaya  anasavat)  cetovimuttii)  upasampajja  A  1.107  = 
221  =D  III. 78,  108,  132  =  It  100  and  passim.  —  ragassa, 
dosassa,  mohassa  kh.  M  1.5 ;  A  1.299,  cp.  raga°,  dosa°, 
moha",  A  1.159  ;  dosa°  S  111.160.  191  ;  iv.250.  —  ta^ha- 
nar)  kh.  Dh  154;  sankharanar)  kh.  Dh.  383;  sabba- 
maniiitanag.    etc.    M    1.486;   ayu°,   puilila"   Vism   502. 

—  yo  dukkhassa  pajanati  idh'  eva  khayai)  attano  Sn 
626  =  Dh  402  ;  khayar)  viragag  amatag  paQitag  Sn  225. 

—  In  exegesis  of  rupassa  aniccata  :  rupassa  khayo  vayo 
bhedo  Dhs  645  =  738  =  872.  —  See  also  khiija  and  the 
foil.  cpds.  s.  V. :  ayu°.  upadhi".  upadana",  jati",  jivita", 
taijha",  dukkha°,  pui^iia",  bhava",  loka",  sagyojana, 
sabbadhamma".  samudda". 

-dtita  (a)  gone  beyond,  recovered  from  the  waning 
period  (of  chanda,  the  moon  =  the  new  moon)  Sn  598; 
-inupassin  (a)  reaUzing  the  fact  of  decay  A  iv.i46  sq.  = 
v-359  (+  vayanupassin) ;  -fiana  knowledge  of  the  fact 
of  decay  M  11.38  =  Pug  60;  in  the  same  sense  khaye 
nanaNett  15.  54.  59,  127,  191,  cp.  kvu  230  sq. ;  -dfaamina 
the  law  of  decay  A  111.54  ;  Ps  1.53.  76,  78. 

Khara'  [cp.  Sk.  khara]  i.  (adj.)  rough,  hard,  sharp; 
painful  D  11.127  (abadha) ;  J  ni.26  (vedanS)  Miln  26 
(-(- sakkharakathala-vahka) .  PvA  152  (loma.  shaggy 
hair;  cp.  Np.  Khara-loma-yakkha  Vism  208).  —  ''ka  = 
khara  rough,  stony  PvA  265  ( =  thaijdila).  —  2.  (m.)  a 
donkey,  a  mule,  in  -putta,  nickname  of  a  horse  J 
111.278.  —  3.  a  saw  J  11.230  (  =  kakaca  C.) ;  vi.261. 

-ijina  a  rough  skin,  as  garment  of  an  ascetic  Sn  249 
(  =  kharani  ajina-cammaui  Sn  A  291);  Pug  56;  -gata 
of  rough  constitution  Dhs  962  ;  also  as  khari-gata 
M  1.185;  Vism  349  (=-pharusa).  -mukha  a  conch 
J  vi.580.     -ssara  of  rough  sound  S  11.128. 

Khara-  [Sk.  k^ra]  water  J  111.282. 

Kharatta  (nt.)  [fr.  khara]  roughness  A  1.54;  PvA  90  (in 
expl"  of  pharusa). 

Khala  [cp.  Sk.  kliala]  i.  corn  ready  for  threshing,  the 
threshing  floor  Nd-  587,  Vism  120;  DA  1.203  (khalag 
sodhcti).  —  2.  thresliing,  mash,  in  ekamagsa-khalag 
karoti  "  to  reduce  to  one  mash  of  flesh  "  D  1.52  -  M 
1.377  (-H  magsa-puilja ;  DA  i.i6o  =  magsa-rasi). 

-agga  the  best  corn  for  threshing  DhA  1.98 ;  iv,98  ; 
-kala  the  time  for  threshing  DhA  iv.98;  -bhand'agga 
the  best  agricultural  implement  for  thrcsiiing  DhA 
1.98;  IV  .98;  -bhanda-kala  the  time  for  the  application 
of  the  latter  DliA  iv.98  ;  -mandala  a  threshing-floor 
Vism  123;  DhA  1.266  ("matta,  as  large  as  .  .  .). 

Khalanka  m  -pada  at  J  vi.3  should  probably  be  read 
kalanka"  (q.  v.). 

Khalati  [Dhtp  zbO  :  kampaue ;  Dhtm  375  :  sai^calane  ;  cp. 
Sk.  skhalati,  cp.  Gr.  o^iiXAw  to  bring  to  fall,  to  fail]  to 
stumble;  ger.  khaUtv&  Th  i.  45;  Miln  187;  pp.  khalita 
q.  v.     Cp.  upa°.  pa°. 


KhaU 

KhaH  a  paste  Vin  11.321  ( :B<lhgh.  on  C.V.  VI.3,  i  for 
madda). 

Khalika  (or  khalika  f.)  a  dice- board,  in  khalikaya  kllantt 
to  play  at  dice  (see  iUustr.  in  Rh.  D.  Buddh.  India  p!  77) 
Vin  n.io ;  cp.  D  1.6  (in  enum"  of  various  amusements  ; 
expl.  at  DA  1.85  by  juta-khalika  pisakakilanar)).  See 
also  luli. 

Khalita'  [Sk.  khalati=Lat.  calvus,  baJd;  cp.  khallata] 
bald-headed  A  1.138  (-t- viluna) ;  Th  2,  255  (  =  viluna- 
kesa  ThA  210). 

Khalita'  [pp.  med.  of  khalati,  cp.  Dhtp  611  ;  Dhtm  406 
khala=soceyye]  (adj.  &  n.)  i.  faltering,  stumbling, 
wrong-doing,  failure  A  1.198;  Nd'  300;  Th  2,  261; 
DhA  III. 196  (of  the  voice;  ThA  21 1  =pakkbalita) ; 
J  1.78;  Miln  94,  408.  —  2.  disturbed,  treated  badly 
J  V-  375-    —  akhalita  undisturbed  Th  i,  512. 

Khaln  [indecl.,  usually  contracted  to  kho,  q.  v.]  either 
positive :  indeed,  surely,  truly  D  1.87 ;  Sn  p.  103 ;  J 
IV. 391  (as  khaju) ;  Mhvs  vii.  1 7  ;  or  negative  :  indeed  not 
Vism  60  (=:=patisedhan'  atthe  nipato).  -pacchabhat- 
tika  (adj.)  =  na  p° :  a  person  who  refuses  food  offered 
to  him  after  the  normal  time  Vin  v.131  =193  ;  Pug  69; 
Vism  61.     See  Com.  quot.  by  Childers,  p.  310. 

Khalonka  [adj.  fr.  khalaincaus.  sense  of  khaleti,  to  shake. 
In  formation  =  khalanga  >  khalanka  >  khalunka,  cp. 
kulupaka  for  kulupaga]  only  qppl""  to  a  horse  = 
shaking,  a  shaker,  racer  (esp.  as  Java  A  1.287),  ^8-  °^ 
purisa  at  Anguttara  passages.  Described  as  bold  and 
hard  to  msinage  A  iv.igo  sq. ;  as  a  horse  which  cannot 
be  trusted  and  is  inferior  to  an  2j&niya  (a  thoroughbred) 
A  V.166.  Three  kinds  at  A  1.287  sq.  =iv.397  sq.  In 
expl.  of  valava  (mare)  at  J  i.i8o=sindhavakuIe  ajato 
khalunk'asso ;  as  valava  khalunk^  J  1.184.  —  Der. 
khalunkata  in  a°,  not  shaking,  steadiness  VvA  278. 

Khaleti  [Sk.  k$&layati  of  ksal  ?]  lit.  to  wash  (cp.  pakkha- 
leti),  slang  for  "  to  treat  badly."  "  to  give  a  rubbing" 
or  thrashing  (exact  meaning  problematic) ;  only  at 
J  iv.205  =  382  :  gale  gahetVcL  khalayatha  jammai)  "  take 
the  rascal  by  the  throat  and  thrash  him  "  (Com.  khala- 
yatha khallktlrai)  (i.  e.  a  "  rub,"  kind  of  punishment) 
papetva  niddhamatha=give  him  a  thrashing  &  throw 
him  out.     v.  1.  at  both  passages  is  galayatha). 

Khallaka  in  baddha  up&hanayo  shoes  with  heel-coverings 
(?)  Vin  1. 1 86  (see  Bdbgh.  note  on  it  Vin  Texts  11. 15).  — 
Also  as  khalla-baddh^dibhedai)  upihanar)  at  PvA  127 
in  expl"  of  upahana.  Kern  {Toev.  s.  v.)  sees  in  it  a 
kind  of  stufi  or  material. 

KhalUta  [Sk.  khalvata,  cp.  khalita]  bald,  in  -sisa  a  bald 
head  DhA  1.309.  Der.  khallatiya  baldness,  in  khallatiya- 
peti  the  bald-headed  Peti  PvA  46  (where  spelled  khal&- 
tiya)  and  67. 

Khallika  only  at  S  v.421  ;  cp.  S  iv.330  (Dhamma- 
cakka-p-Sutta).  It  is  a  misreading.  Read  with  Olden- 
berg,  Vin  1. 10,  kamesu  lf»ma»iilrhiilliWiniiynga  (devotion 
to  the  passions,  to  the  pleasures  of  sense).  See  kama- 
sukha  and  allika. 

Kha)opI  [and  khalopi,  also  kalopi,  q.  v.  Cp.  Trenckner 
Notes,  p.  60,  possibly  =  karoti]  a  pot,  usually  with 
knmbhi :  D  1.167  (-mukha  +  kumbhi-mukha) ;  Pug  55: 
Miln  107. 

Kha^a  [also  often  spelled  khanu ;  prob.  =  Sk.  sthaou, 
corrupted  in  etym.  with  khalati,  cp.  Trenckner,  Notes 
58,  n.  6]  a  stump  (of  a  tree),  a  stake.  Often  used  in 
description  of  uneven  roads ;  together  with  kantaka, 
thorns  A  1.35  ;  in. 389 ;  Vism  261  ("pahara^i'  aggi),  342 
(°magga) ;  SnA  334.  —  jh&ma°  a  burnt  stump  (as 
characteristic  of  kklaka)  S  iv.193.  —  nikhata°  an 
uprooted  trunk  DA  1.73.  KhUQU-kondafiiia  N.  of  a 
Thera  Vism  380  ;  DhA  11.254. 


64  Khiyita 


KbiQaka  =  kh&qu  S  v.379  (avihata°):  J  11. 18,  154;  V.4J 
(loha-da]7(}a-kh°  pins  &  stakes  of  brass) ;  Miln  187  (mQle 
vS  kh^Quke  va  .  .  .  khaUtvl  stumbling  over  roots  & 
stumps) ;  Vism  381  =DhA  11.254  (with  ref.  to  the  name 
of  KhaQu-kondafiSa  who  by  robbers  was  mistaken  for 
a  tree  stump);  VvA  338  (in  a  road  — sankuka). 

Khita  (adj.)  [Sk.  khata;  pp.  of  khan]  dug  DA  1.274 
(=ukkirnia),  a°  not  dug  Miln  351  ("tajaka).  Cp. 
atikhata  J  11.296. 

Khida  (nt.)  eating,  in  -karana  the  reason  of  eating  .  .  . 
PvA  37. 

Kh&daka  (adj.)  eating  (nt.)  Vism  479 ;  eating,  Uving  on 
(adj.  -°),  an  eater  J  iv.307 ;  PvA  44  ;  lohita  -mar)sa°  (of 
Yakkhas)  J  1. 133,  266;  camma"  J  1.176;  gutha"  (of  a 
Peta)  PvA  266. 

Khfidati  [Dhtp  155  "  khada  bhakkhane  "  ;  cp.  Sk.  khS- 
dati,  cp.  Gr.  kvuSuiv  the  barbed  hook  of  a  javeUn,  i.  e. 
"  the  biter  "  ;  Lith.  k<indu  to  bite]  to  chew,  bite,  eat. 
devour  (=Ger.  fressen) ;  to  destroy. — Pres.  Dh  240; 
J  1.152  (sassani) ;  in.26 ;  Pv  1.6^  (puttani,  of  a  Peti); 
1.9*.  —  kattbai)  kh°  to  use  a  toothpick  J  1.80,  282,  — 
dante  kh°  to  gnash  the  teeth  J  1.161.  —  santakag  kh" 
to  consume  one's  property  DhsA  135.  —  of  beasts,  e.  g. 
Sn  201,  675.  —  Pot.  khadeyya  J  111.26.  —  Imper. 
khada  J  1. 150  (mai)sai));  11.128  (khadaniyai)) ;  VI.3O7. 
(puvag) ;  PvA  39,  78.  —  Part.  pres.  khadanto  J  1.61  ; 
111.276.  —  Put.  khadissati  J  1.221;  11.129.  —  Aor. 
khadirjsu  PvA  20.  —  Pass.  ppr.  khadiyamana  (cp. 
khajjati)  PvA  69  (tanhaya)  (expl.  of  khajjamana).  — 
Inf.  khaditui)  J  1.222;  11.153;  DhA  iv.226.  —  Ger. 
khaditva  J  1.266,  278  (phalani) ;  PvA  5,  32  (devour); 
poetical  khadiya  J  v.464  (  =  khaditva).  —  Grd.  khadi- 
tabba  J  111.52,  and  khadaniya  (q  .v.).  —  Pp.  khadita 
(q.  v.).     Cp.  paU°. 

Kh&dana  (nt.)  the  act  of  eating  (or  being  eaten)  PvA  158. 
—  adj.  f.  khadani  the  eater  Dpvs  238;  khadana  at 
J  11. 405  is  to  be  read  as  ni°  (q.  v.).     Cp.  vi°. 

Kh&daniya  [grd.  of  khadati ;  also  as  khadaniya]  hard  or 
solid  food,  opp.  to  and  freq,  comb''  with  bhojaniya 
(q.  v.).  So  at  D  u.127  ;  J  1.90,  235  ;  111.127  '•  Sn.  p  no  ; 
Miln  9,  II.  —  Also  in  comb"  anna,  pana,  kh°  Sn  924 ; 
11.4*.     By  itself  J  111.276.  —  pittha°  pastry  Vin  1.248. 

Kb&dS  (f.)  food,  in  raja°  royal  food  Sn  831  (rajakhadaya 
puttbo  =  rajakhadaniyena  rajabhojaniyena  posito  Nd' 
171  ;  where  printed  "khadaya  throughout). 

KhadSpana  [fr.  khadapeti]  causing  to  be  eaten  (kind  of 
punishment)  Miln  197  (sunakhehi). 

Khadapeti  (Caus.  11.  of  khadati]  to  make  eat  J  ui.370 ; 

vi-335- 
Khadika  =  khadaka,  in  aunamaiiua°  S  v.456. 

Khadita  (adj.)  [pp.  med.  &  pass,  of  khadati]  eaten,  or 
having  eaten,  eaten  up,  consumed  J  1.223;  "•'54; 
PvA  5.  —  A  twin  form  of  khadita  is  khayita,  formed 
prob.  on  analogy  of  sayita,  with  which  freq.  combined 
(cp.,  however,  Trenckner  P.M.  57),  e.  g.  Pug  59 ;  Vism 
258;  PvA  25.  Used  as  the  poetical  form  Pv  1.12" 
(expl.  PvA  1 58  =  khadita).  —  Der.  khaditatta  (nt.)  the 
fact  of  being  eaten  J  1.176. 

—  tthana  the  eating  place,  place  of  feeding  J  v.447. 

Khidin,  f.  khadini  =  khadaka  PvA  31. 

Khiyati  [pass.  =Sk.  khyayate,  khya]  to  seem  to  be,  to 
appear  like  (viya)  J  1.279 ;  aor.  khayigsu  J  1.6 1 ;  ppr. 
med.  khayamana  J  rv.  140  ;  PvA  251.     Cp.  pakkhayati. 

Khiyita  see  khadita ;  cp.  avakkhayika. 


I 


Khara 


65 


Kbina 


Khan  [Sk.  kjara,  pungent,  saline,  sharp  to  ksi,  ksayati 
to  bum,  cp.  Gr.  Snpik,  dry ;  Lat.  serenus,  dry,  clear, 
seresco  to  dry]  any  alkaline  substance,  potash,  lye.  In 
comb"  with  usa  (salt  earth)  at  S  111.131  (-gandha) ; 
A  1.209.  —  Used  as  a  caustic  Pv  iii.io^ ;  Sdhp  281.  See 
also  chariki. 

-Apatacchika  a  means  of  torturing,  in  enum"  of  var. 
tortures  (under  vividha-kamma-kirana  karenti)  M  1.87  = 
A  i.48  =  n.i22=Nd2  604;  J  vi.17  (v.  1.  "ficch" ;  C.  has 
apatacchika,  v.  1.  paficchaka) ;  Vism  500;  Miln  197. 
Both  A  &  Nd  have  v.  1.  kharapaticchaka ;  -odaka  an 
alkaUne  solution  Vism  264,  420  ;  DhA  1.189 ;  PvA  213  ; 
cp.  kharodildl  nadi  (in  Niraya)  Sdhp  194. 

Kh&raka  (adj.)  [fr.  kh&ra]  sharp  or  dry,  said  of  the  buds 
of  the  Paricchattaka  A  iv.i  17  sq. 

Khfal  (f.)  [and  kh&ri-]  a  certain  measure  of  capacity  (esp. 
of  grain,  see  below  khSrika).  It  is  used  of  the  eight 
requisites  of  an  ascetic,  and  often  in  conn,  with  his 
yoke  (kaja) :  "  a  khiri-load." 

-kaja  Vin  t.33  (cp.  Vin  Texts  1.132) ;  J  v.204.  -bhanda 
DhA  in. 243  ( :kahar)  te  kh-bh°  ko  pabbajita  parikkharo) ; 
-bhara  a  shoulder-yoke  S  1.169 ;  J  111.83  '•  -vidha  =  °kaja 
S  1.78  =  Ud  65;  D  I.  ID  I.  At  Ud  and  D  passages  it  is 
read  vividha,  but  DA  1.269  makes  it  clear :  khari  ti 
arani-kamandalu-suc^dayo  t^pasa-parikkhara ;  vidho 
ti  kaco,  tasma  kharibharitai)  kacam  adaya  ti  attho. 
As  Kern  {Toev.  s.  v.)  points  out,  "vidha  is  a  distortion 
of  vivadha,  which  is  synonymous  with  kaja. 

Kharika*  [adj.  to  kh&ra]  alkaline,  in  enum"  of  tastes  (cp. 
rasa)  at  S  m  87  ;  Dhs  629  and  isi. 

Kh&rika^  [^dj.  of  khari]  of  the  khari  measure,  in  visati° 
kosalako  tilaviho  A  v.i73  =  Sn  p.  126. 

KUleti  Cans,  of  khalati :  see  khaleti  &  vikkhSleti. 

Khihinti  at  Th  2,  509  is  to  be  read  kAhinti  (  =  karis3anti 
ThA  293). 

Khi44i  [Vedic  krxja,  cp.  kilati]  play,  amusement,  pleasure 
usually  comb**  with  rati,  enjoyment.  Var.  degrees 
of  pleasures  (bala°,  etc.)  mentioned  at  A  v. 203  ;  var. 
kinds  of  amusement  enumerated  at  Nd^  219;  as  ex- 
pounded at  D  1.6  under  juta-pamadat(hana.  Generallv 
divided  into  kayikS  &  vicasika  khicjda  (Nd^ ;  SnA  86). 
Expl.  as  kiiana  SoA  86,  as  hassadhippaya  (means  of 
mirth)  PvA  226 ;  sahayakadihi  ke)i  PvA  265.  Cp. 
Sn  926  ;  Pv  iv.i^'. 

-dasaka  "  the  decad  of  play,"  i.  e.  the  second  10  years 
of  man's  life,  fr.  1 1-20  years  of  age  Vism  619.  -padosika 
corrupted  by  pleasures  D  1.19,  20=DA  1.113  (v.  1. 
padusika)  :  -rati  play  &  enjoyment  Sn  41,  59;  Vv  16'', 
32' ;  Pv  iv.7^  ;  Vism  619. 

Khitta  [pp.  of  khip,  to  throw  Dhtp  479  ;  peraije]  thrown  ; 
cast,  overthrown  Dh  34 ;  rajo  pativitai)  kh°,  dirt 
thrown  against  the  wind  S  1.13,  i64  =  Sn  662=Dh  125  = 
J  III. 203 ;  ratti-khitta  sara  arrows  shot  in  the  night 
Dh  304  =  Nett  1 1  ;  acchi  vatavegena  khitta  a  flame 
overthrown  by  the  power  of  the  wind,  blown  out  Sn 
1074  (expl''  Nd^  220  by  ukkhitta  nunija,  khambhita) ; 
in  interpret,  of  khetta  PvA  7  said  of  sowing :  khittai) 
vuttai)  bijag.  — akkhitta  not  upset,  not  deranged,  un- 
disturbed, in  qualities  required  of  a  brahmin  w.  ref.  to 
his  genealogy :  yava  sattama  pitamahayuga  akkhitto 
D  i.ii3=Sn  p.  115,  etc.     Cp.  vi°. 

-citta  (a)  one  whose  mind  is  thrown  over,  upset,  un- 
hinged, usually  comb''  with  ummattaka,  out  of  one's  mind 
Vin  1.131,  321  ;  11.64,  etc. ;  Sdhp  88.     Cp.  citta-kkhepa. 

Khipa  (nt.)  [fr.  ksip]  a  throw,  anything  thrown  over,  as 
ajina°  a  cloak  0/  antelope  hide  D  1. 1 67  and  x ;  or  thrown 
out,  as  a  fishing  net  (  =  kumina)  eel-basket  A  1.33  =287  ; 
Th  2.  357  ( =ThA  243).     Cp.  khippa  &  vikkhepika. 


Khipati  [V'edic  ksipati]  to  throw,  to  cast,  to  throw  out  or 
forth,  to  upset  Sn  p.  32  (cittar)) ;  J  1.223  (sisap).  290 
(pasake) ;  11. 3  (dalharj  dalhassa :  to  pit  force  against 
force)  —  aor.  khipi  S  iv.2,  3  (khuracakkar)) ;  PvA  87 
(  =  attharesi).  —  ger.  khipitva  J  1.202.  —  is/  caus. 
khepeti  (perhaps  to  ksi,  see  khaya)  to  throw  in,  to  put 
in,  to  spend  (of  time) :  digham  addhanar)  khepetva 
J  1.137;  Th  2.  168  (khepeti  jatisagsarar)  =  pariyosapeti 
ThA  159);  DhA  1. 102  (dvenavuti-kappe  khepesui)); 
ayug  khepehi  spend  (the  rest  of)  your  life  PvA  148  ; 
ger.  khepayitvana  (sagsarar))  Pv  iv.3'2  (=khepetva 
PvA  254).  In  this  sense  Trenckner  (P.  M.  76)  takes  it 
as  corresponding  to  Sk.  ksapayati  of  ksi  =  to  cause  to 
waste.  See  also  khepana. — 2nd  caus.'  khipapeti  to 
cause  to  be  thrown  J  1.202  ;  iv.139  (jalai)).  Cp  also 
khepa. 

Khipana  (nt.)  the  act  of  throwing  or  the  state  of  being 
thrown  J  1.290  (pasaka-  k"). 

KhipanS  (f.)  [fr.  khipati]  throwing  up.  provocation, 
mockery,  slander  Miln  357 ;  Vbh  352  ;  cp.  Vism  29. 

Khipita  (nt.)  [pp.  of  khipati  =  that  which  is  thrown  out; 
ace.  to  Trenckner  Notes  p.  75  foi  khupita  fr.  k;a  to 
sneeze ;  possibly  a  contamination  of  the  two]  sneezing, 
expectoration  Pv  11. 2'  (expl.  PvA  80  :  mukhato  nikkhan- 
tamala) ;  DhA  1.314  (°roga+kasa,  coughing). 

-sadda   the   sound   of   expectorations   D    1.50  ;    DhA 
1.250. 

Khippa  (adj.) :  [Vedic  ksipra  to  kfip]  i.  quick,  lit.  in  the 
way  of  throwing  (cp.  "  like  a  shot  ")  Sn  350  (of  vacana 
=  lahu  SnA). — 2.  a  sort  of  fishing  net  or  eel-basket 
(cp.  khipa  &  Sk.  ksepani)  S  1.74. — nt.  adv.  khippai) 
quickly  A  n. 118  =  111. 164  ;  Sn  413,  682,  998  ;  Dh  65,  137. 
236,  289;  J  IV.  142  ;  Pv  n.8*,  9',  12^',  Pug  32. — Com- 
par.  khippatara  Sn  p.  126. 

-abhiii&a  quick  intuition   (opp,   dandh°)   D   :ii.ro6; 
Dhs  177;  Nett  7,  24,  50,  77,  112  sq.  ;  123  sq.  ;  Vism  138. 

Khippati  [fr.  ksip]  to  ill-treat,  in  ppr.  khippamana  Vt 
84**.  expl''  at  VvA  348  by  vambhento.  pljanto. 

Khila  (m.  nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  khila]  waste  or  fallow  land  A  111.248  ; 
fig.  barrenness  of  mind,  mental  obstruction.  There  are 
five  ceto-khila  enum*"  in  detail  at  M  1.101  =  A  iv.46o  = 
D  III. 238  (see  under  ceto)  ;  mentioned  A  v.17  ;  SnA  262. 
As  three  khila,  viz.  raga,  dosa,  moha  at  S  v.57  ;  also 
with  other  qualities  at  Nd'  9.  In  comb"  with  paligha 
S  1.27  (chetva  kh"  g) ;  khilai)  pabhindati  to  break  up  the 
fallowness  (of  one's  heart)  S  1.193;  in. 134;  Sn  973.— 
akhila  (adj.)  not  fallow,  unobstrncted,  open-hearted  : 
cittar)  susamahitan  .  .  .  akhilai)  sabbabhutesu  D11.261  ; 
S  IV.I  18  ;  in  comb"  with  anasava  Sn  212  ;  with  akankha 
Sn  477,  1059  ;  with  vivattacchada  Sn  1147  ;  cp.  vigata- 
khila  Sn  19. 

Khila  [cp.  Sk.  ki^a]  hard  skin,  callosity  J  v.204  (v.  I. 
ki^a). 

KUQa  [pp.  of  khiyati.  Pass,  to  khayati]  destroyed, 
exhausted,  removed,  wasted,  gone ;  in  cpds.  °-  often 
to  be  translated  "  without."  It  is  mostly  applied 
to  the  destruction  of  the  passions  (asava)  &  de- 
merit (kamma).  Khina  jati  "  destroyed  is  the  possi- 
bility of  rebirth,"  in  freq.  occurring  formula  "  kh.  j. 
vusitai)  brahmacariyai)  katai)  karaniyai)  n^parar) 
itthattaya."  denoting  the  attaiomeat  of  Arahantship. 
(See  arahant  11,  formula  A)  Vin  i.  35 ;  D  1.84.  177,  203 ; 
M  H.39  ;  Sn  p.  16  ;  Pug  6t  etc.  See  expl"  at  DA  1.225  = 
SnA  138.  —  khipai)  mayhai)  kamniai)  J  IV.3,  similarly 
khinai)  puranai)  navai)  natthi  sambhavai)  Sn  235 
(khina=samucchinna  KhA  194):  papakamme  khipe 
PvA  IU5.  asavakhipa  one  whose  cravings  are  destroyed 
Sn  37(1.  cp.  162. 

Ill— S 


Khinatta 


66 


Khura 


-asava  (adj.)  whose  mind  is  free  from  the  four  mental 
obsessions.  Ep.  of  an  Arahant  Vin  1.183;  ^  '•  '45: 
11.43  ;  111.30  ;  D  111.97.  133.  235  ;  It  95  ;  Sn  S2,  471,  539, 
644;  r)h  89,  420  ;  PvA  7  (=arahanto)  :  cp.  BSk  ksina- 
4rava  Divy  542.  —  The  seven  powers  of  a  kh.°  (khina- 
sava-balani)  discussed  at  D  111.283  :  Ps  i-35  :  ten  powers 
at  Ps  n.173,  176;  cp.  Vism  144  (where  a  kh.  walks 
through  the  air),  -punabbhava  one  in  whom  the  con 
ditions  of  another  existence  have  been  destroyed 
(=khinasava)  Sn  514,  656;  -bija  one  who  is  without 
the  seed  {of  renewed  existence)  (  =  prec.)  Sn  233 
(  =  ucchinna-biia  KhA  igj)  ;  -maccha  without  fish  (of  a 
lake)  Dh  155;  -vyappatha  without  the  way  of  (evil) 
speech  (vyapp°  =  vacaya  patho ;  expl.  SnA  204  as  na 
pharusavaco)  Sn  158  ;  -sota  with  the  stream  gone.  i.  e. 
without  water,  in  macche  appodake  kh"  Sn  777. 

KhLjatta  (nt.)  DA  1.225  *  khinata  (f.)  DhA  iv.228.  the 
fact  of  being  destroyed. 

Ktuya  [cp.  khiyati^]  in  -dhammag  apajjati  to  fall  into  a 
state  of  mental  depression  Vin  iv.151.  154;  A  111.269 ; 
IV. 374.     See  also  remarks  by  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v. 

Khlyati  [Sk.  ksiyate,  pass,  to  khayati]  to  be  exhausted, 
to  waste  away,  to  become  dejected,  to  fall  away  from 
Vin  IV. 152  :  J  1.290  (dhana)  ;  Pv  11  9*-  ;  1 1^  ;  Ps  1.94,  9'' ; 
11.31  (asava):  Bdhd  80.  —  ppr.  khiyamana  Sn  434; 
rsdhd  19.  aor.  khiyi  D  111.93;  g"'''-  khiyitabba  ibid, 
see  also  khaya  and  khiyanaka.  In  phrase  "  ujjhfiyati 
khiyati  vipSceti  it  seems  to  correspond  to  jhayati 
rSk.  ksayatil  and  the  meaning  is  "  to  become  chafed  or 
heated,  to  become  vexed,  angry  ;  to  take  offence  "  ;  as 
evidenced  by  the  comb"  with  quasi-synonyms  ujjha- 
yati  &  vipaceti,  both  referring  to  a  heated  state,  fig. 
for  anger  (cp.  kilissati).  Thus  at  Vin  11.259  *  passim. 
See  ujjhayati  for  further  refs. 

Khiyanaka  (a)  [der.  fr.  khiya]  in  comb"  with  pacittiya  a 
"  falling  away  '"  offence  (legal  term  denoting  the  falUng 
away  from  a  consent  once  given)  (see  khiya)  Vin  11.94, 
100  ;  IV. 38. 

Khira  (nt.)  [Sk.  ksira]  milk,  milky  fluid,  milky  juice  Vin 
1.243;  11.30 1  ;  M  1.343  sq.  =  A  ii.207  =  Pug  56;  A  11.95 
(in  simile  with  dadhi,  navanita,  sappi,  sappimanda)  = 
D  1.201;  DhA  1.98;  enum''  with  dadhi,  etc.,  as  one 
constituent  of  material  food  (kabaUnkaro  aharo)  at 
Dhs  6(6=740  =  875;  —J  IV.  138  (matu  kh") ;  140; 
Dh  7r  =  Nett  161  ;  Miln  41  ;  PvA  198  (  =  sneha,  milky 
juice) ;  VvA  75  ;  DhA  1.98  (nirudaka  kh°,  milk  without 
water).     — duddha-khira  one  who  has  milked  Sn  18. 

-odaka  (nt.)  milk-water  or  milk  &  water  lit.  J  11. 104, 
106  ;  fig.  in  simile  khirodakibhuta  for  a  samagga  parisa 
"  a  congregation  at  harmony  as  milk  and  water  blend  " 
A  1.70;  S  iv.225=M  1.207,  398  =  A  III. 67.  104;  -odana 
(nt.)  milk-rice  (boiled)  VV332*  (  =  VvA  147).  -gandha 
the  smell  of  milk  J  vi.357.  -ghata  a  pot  of  milk  Miln 
48  ;  -paka  drinking  milk  ;  sucking  (of  a  calf :  vaccho 
matari  kh")  Dh  284  (v.  1.  khira-pana) ;  DhA  111.424  ; 
-pannin  (m.)  N.  of  a  tree  the  leaves  of  which  contain  a 
milky  sap.  Calotropis  gigantea  M  1.429;  -matta  having 
had  his  fill  of  milk,  happy  (of  a  babe)  S  1.108  ;  -mula  the 
price  of  milk  ;  money  with  which  to  buy  milk  DhA 
IV. 217;  -samin  master  of  the  milk  (-i-dhirasamin) 
Bdhd  62. 

Kblranika  (f )  a  milk-giving  cow  S  1.174. 

EUla  [Sk.  kila  &  khila]  a  stake,  post,  bolt,  peg  Vin  11. 116 
(khilar)  nikhanitva  digging  in  or  erecting  c  post)  ; 
S  III. 150  (kh°  va  thambha  va) ;  1V.200  (da)ha°  a  strong 
post,  Ep.  of  sati)  ;  Mhvs  29.  49.  —  ayo"  an  iron  stake 
A  1.141  ;  S  v. 444  :  Nd=  304™  ;  Sn  28  (nikhata,  erected)  ; 
SnA  479.     Cp.  inda°. 

tthayi-thita  standing  like  a  post  (of  a  stubborn  horse) 
A  IV.  192.  194. 


KUlaka  (adj.)  having  sticks  or  stumps  (as  obstacles),  in 
a°  unobstructed  J  v. 203  (  =  akaca  nikkantalca  206). 

EhQana  [der.  fr.  khlleti]  scorn  Miln  357. 

Khijeti  rto  kl}  or  to  khila  ?]  to  scorn,  deride,  only  in  comb" 
hiUtakhiUta  garahita  (pp.)  Miln  229.  28S  ;  cp.  khilana. 

Khn  (-°)  is  doubtful  second  part  of  inghala"  (q.  v.). 

Khugseti  [krus  ?  Dhtp  625  :  akkosane  ;  cp.  MuUer  P.G.  52 
to  scold,  to  curse,  to  be  angry  at,  to  have  spite  against 
D    1.90,    DA   1.256    (=ghatteti);    Vin    IV.7 ;    SnA   357; 
DhA  IV. 38.  —pp.  khugsita  DhA  11.75. 

Khaija  (adj.)  [either  Sk  kubja,  of  which  khujja  would  be 
the  older  form  (cp.  Walde,  Lat.  Etym.  Wtb.  s.  v.  cubitum). 
or  Sk.  ksudra  (?)  (so  Muller.  P.G.  p.  52).  See  also  the 
variant  kujja  &  cp.  kutta']  i.  humpbacked  J  v.426 
( -f  pithasappi) ;  DA  1.148  (in  comb"  with  vimana  & 
kirata);  f.  DhA  1.194.  226.  —  2.  small,  inferior,  in 
kh°-raja  a  smaller,  subordinate  king  Sdhp  453. 

Khu^4ali  at  PvA  162  (ma  kh.)  is  to  be  read  ukkant'ii 

Khuda  [Sk.  ksudh  &  ksudha,  also  BSk.  ksud  in  ksuttarsa 
hunger  &  thirst  Jtm  p.  30]  hunger  Sn  52  (-t-pipasa; 
Nd2  s.  V.  kh°  vuccati  chatako),  966;  Pv  1.6*  (  =  jighac- 
cha)  11.1=  (-f  tanha),  2*  ;  PvA  72.     See  khuppipasa. 

Khudda  (adj.)  [Vcdic  ksudra]  small,  inferior,  low  ;  trifling, 
insignificant ;  na  khuddag  samacare  kinci  "  he  shall  not 
pursue  anything  trifling  "  Sn  145  (  =  lnmakar)  KhA  243) ; 
kh°  ca  balag  Sn  318.  Opp.  to  strong  Vv  32 '«  (of  mig.H  = 
balavasena  nihina  VvA  136). 

-^nukhuddaka,  in  "ani  sikkhapadani  the  minor 
observances  of  discipline,  the  lesser  &  minor  precepts 
Vin  il.287  =  D  11.  154;  Vin  iv.143;  A  1.233;  cp  Divy 
465  ;  -ivakasa  in  akhuddavakaso  dassanaya  not 
appearing  inferior,  one  of  the  attributes  of  a  well-bred 
brahmin  (with  brahmavanni)  D  i.i  14,  120,  etc.  -desa,  in 
°issara  ruler  of  a  small  district  Sdhp  348. 
Khuddaka=  khudda;  usually  in  cpds.  In  sequence 
khuddaka-majjhima-maha  Vism  100.  Of  smaller 
sections  or  subdivisions  of  canonical  books  Vin  v. 145  sq. 
(with  ref.  to  the  pafiiiattis),  see  also  below,  -catuppade 
kh°  ca  mahallake  Sn  603.  Khuddaka  (m.)  the  little 
one,  Miln  40  (raata  °assa). 

-nadi  =  kunnadi.  a  small  river  PvA  154;  -nikaya 
name  of  a  collection  of  canonical  books,  mostly  short 
(the  fifth  of  the  five  Nikayas)  comprising  the  foil.  15 
books:  Khuddaka- Patha,  Dhammapada,  Udana.  Iti- 
vuttaka,  Sutta-Nipata.  Vimana-Vatthu.  Peta-Vatthu. 
Thera  and  Therl  Gatha,  Jataka  (verses  only),  Niddesa. 
Patisambhidamagga.  Apadana,  Buddha-Vagsa,  Cariya- 
Pifaka.  The  name  Kh-N.  is  taken  from  the  fact  that  it 
is  a  collection  of  short  books— short,  that  is,  as  compared 
with  the  Four  Nikayas.  Anvs  (J.P.T.S.  1886)  p.  35: 
Gvns  (y.P.r.S.  i886)p.  57;PvA2,  etc.  -patha  N.  of  the 
first  book  in  the  Khuddaka  Nikaya  ;  -maficaka  a  small  or 
low  bed  J  1. 1 67;  -raja  an  inferior  king  J  v.37  (-1-  maharaja) : 
SnA  121:  cp.  khujja  &  kutfa ;  -vagguli  (f.)  a  small 
singing  bird  DhA  111.223  ;  -vatthuka  belonging  to  or 
having  smaller  sections  Vin  v.  114. 


Khuppipasa  [cp.  khuda]  hunger  &  thirst:  °aya  miyamano 
M  1.85.  Personified  as  belonging  to  the  army  of  Mara 
Sn  436  =  Nd2  qq  visenikatva.  To  be  tormented  by 
hunger  &  thirst  is  the  special  lot  of  the  Peta<^ .  Pv  i-ii'"  ; 
11.2°,  PvA  10,  32.  37,  58.  etc.  ;  Vism  501  ;  Sdhp  9.  loi, 
507- 

Kbuhhati  see  sag"  &  khobha.  The  root  is  given  at  Dhtp 
206  &  435  as  "  khubha  =  saiicalane." 

Khora'  [Vedic  khura]  the  hoof  of  an  animal  Vv  64'"  (of  a 
horse  =  turaganar)  khuranipata,  the  clattering  of  a 
horse's  hoof  VvA  279).  cp.  Sk.  k§ura.  a  monkey's  claw 
Sp.  .4.vS  1.236. 


Khura 


67 


Khejakapa 


Khnra'  [V'edic  k$ura,  to  kspa,  k^iiioti  to  whet,  ksnotra  whet- 
stone ;  cp.  Gr.  x^'"^'"  scrape,  Kru  shave,  Lat.  novacula 
razor.  The  PaU  Dhtp  (486)  gives  as  meanings  "  che- 
dana  &  vilekhana  "]  a  razor  Vin  11.134  ;  S  iv.iGg  (tiijha 
a  sharp  r.)  DhA  11.257. 

-agga  the  hall  of  tonsure  PvA  53  ;  -appa  a  kind  of 
arrow  D  1.96;  M  1.429  (+vekarida);  Vism  381.  -kosa 
razor-sheath  Vism  251,  255.  -cakka  a  wheel,  eharp  as 
a  razor  J  IV.3  ;  -dhara  i.  carrying  razors,  sjiid  of  the 
Vetarani  whose  waters  are  like  razors  3n  674  (-t-tinha- 
dhara) ;  J  v.269  ;  Vism  163.  —  2.  the  haft  of  a  razor, 
or  its  case  Sn  716  (°upama) ;  Vism  500;  DhA  11.257; 
-nasa  having  a  nose  like  a  razor  J  iv.  1 39 ;  -pariyanta 
a  disk  as  sharp  as  a  razor,  a  butcher-knife  D  1.52  (  =  t)A 
i.ife;  khura-nemi  khura-sadisa-pariyanta),  cp.  "cakka; 
-malaN.  of  an  ocean,  in  "samudda  J  iv.137  ;  -mali  (f.)  = 
prec.  ibid. ;  -munda  close-shaven  Vin  1.344  '■  ^vA  207. 
Khuramunijar)  karoti  to  shave  closely  D  1.98  ;  S  iv.344  = 
A  H.241  ;  -bhanda  the  outfit  of  a  barber,  viz.  khura, 
khura-sila,  khura-sipafika,  namataka  Vin  1.249,  •'•'34- 
cp.  Vin.  Texts  ni.138;  -sila  a  whetstone  Vin  11. 134; 
-sipafika  a  powder  prepared  with  s.  gum  to  prevent 
razors  from  rusting  Vin  II.  134. 

Kheta  [cp.  Sk.  khetaka]  a  shield :  sec  ki(a. 

Khetta(nt.)  [Vedickjetra,  toksi,  kseti,  k?iti,  dwelling-place, 
Gr.  mfw,  Lat.  situs  founded,  situated,  E.  site ;  cp.  also 
Sk.  k§ema  "  being  settled,"  composure.  See  also 
khattiya.  Dhaniniapala  connects  klietta  with  ksip  & 
tri  in  his  expl"  at  PvA  7 :  khittag  vuttag  bijar)  tayati 
.  .  .  ti  khettai)]  i.  (lit.)  a  field,  a  plot  of  land,  arable 
land,  a  site,  D  1.231  ;  S  1.134  (bijaij  khette  viruhati  ;  in 
simile);  three  kinds  of  fields  at  S  iv.315.  viz.  agga", 
majjhima",  hina"  (in  simile);  A  1.229  =  239;  iv.237 
(do.);  Sn  524;  J  1.153  (saU-yava°);  Pv  ii.9'"=nhA 
111.220  (khette  bijai)  ropitag) ;  Miln  47 ;  PvA  62  ;  DhA 
1.98.  Often  as  a  mark  of  wealth  =  possession,  e.  g.  D 
111.93  in  def"  of  khattiya:  khettanar)  pati  ti  khattiya.. 
In  the  same  sense  connected  with  vatthu  (field  Ot  farm 
cp.  Haus  und  Hof),  to  denote  objects  of  trade,  etc. 
D  1.5  (expl'  at  DA  1.78  :  khetta  nania  yasmir)  pubban- 
nar)  rfihati,  vatthu  nama  yasmir)  aparanriar)  ruhati, 
"  kh.  is  where  the  first  crop  grows  and  v.  where  the 
second."  A  similar  expl"  at  Nd'  248,  where  hhetta 
is  divided  into  sali",  vlhi.  mugga°,  masa",  yava", 
godhuma",  tila",  i.  e.  the  pubbannani,  and  vatthu  expl' 
ghara",  kotthaka",  pure",  paccha",  arama",  vihara" 
without  ref.  to  anna.)  S  11.41  ;  Sn  769.  Together  with 
other  earthly  possessions  as  wealtli  (hirafifia,  suvanna) 
Sn  858  ;  Nd^  on  lepa,  gahattha,  etc.  As  example  in 
definition  of  visible  objects  Dhs  597  ;  Vbli  71  sq.  —  Kasi" 
a  tilled  fiild,  a  field  ready  to  bear  Pv  1. 1",  cp.  PvA  8; 
jati"  "  a  region  in  which  a  Buddha  may  be  born  " 
(Hardy,  after  Childers  s.  khetta)  PvA  Ij8.  Cp.  the 
threefold  division  of  a  Buddha-kkhetta  at  Vism  414, 
viz.  jati",  ana",  visaya".  — 2.  fig.  (of  kaninia)  the  soil  of 
merit,  tlie  deposit  of  good  deeds,  which,  like  a  fertile 
field,  bears  fruit  to  the  advantage  of  the  "  giver  "  of 
gifts  or  the  "  doer  "  of  good  works.  See  dakkhineyya", 
punfia"  (see  detailed  expl"  at  Vism  220;  khetta  here= 
viruhana-tjhana),  brahma".  —  A  1.162,  223  (kammaij. 
kliettag,  vifii'ian.ir)  bijar)) ;  iv.237  :  It  9S  ;  VvA  113. — 
akhetta  barren  soil  A  111.384  (akliettaiinu  not  finding  a 
good  soil);  iv.418  (do);  PvA  137.  Sukhetta  a  good 
soil,  fertile  land  S  1.21  ;  PvA  137;  opf.  dukkhetta  S 
V-379- 

-iipama  to  be  likened  to  a  (fruitful)  field,  Ep.  of  an 
Arahant  Pv  i.i'  ;  -kammanta  work  in  the  field  A  111.77  ; 
-gata  turned  into  a  field,  of  pufifiakamma  "  good  work 
becoming  a  field  of  merit"  PvA  130,  lyi  ;  -gopaka  a  field 
wal  :her  J  111.52  :  -ja  "  born  on  one's  land,"  one  of  the 
4  kinds  of  sons  Nd'  247  ;  Nd"  448  ;  J  1.135.  -j'"^  o"*^ 
unsurpassed  in  the  possession  of  a  "  field  "  Sn  523,  524 ; 
-pala  one  who  guards  a  field  J  111.54  ;  -mahantata  the 
supremeness  of  the  tield  (of  merit)  VvA  108  ;  -rakkhaka 


the  guardian  of  a  field  J  11. no;  -vatthu  possession  of 
land  &  goods  (see  above)  D  111.164;  S  v. 473  =  A  11.209; 
A  v. 137;  Pug  58;  PvA  3;  -sampatti  the  successful 
attainment  ol  a  field  of  (merit)  PvA  198  ;  VvA  102  ;  see 
VvA  30,  32  on  the  three  sampattis,  viz.  khetta",  citta", 
payoga"  ;  -samika  the  owner  of  the  field  Miln  47  ;  VvA 
311.  -sodhana  the  cleaning  of  the  field  (before  it  is 
ploughed)  DhA  111.284. 

Kbeda  (adj.)  [Sk.  kheda  fatigue,  khedati ;  perhaps  to 
Lat.  caedo]  subject  to  fatigue,  tired  VvA  2  76.  —  As 
noun  "  fatigue  "  at  Vism  71. 

Khepa  [cp.  khipati]  (-")  throwing,  casting,  Sdhp  42. 
Usually  in  citta-kkhepa  loss  of  mind,  perplexity  Dh  1  58. 
Cp.  vi",  sag". 

Khepana  [cp.  khepeti]  -"  the  passing  of,  appl '  to  time: 
ayu"  VvA  311. 

Ktaepita  ipp.  of  khepeti]  destroyed,  brought  to  waste, 
annihilated,  khepitatta  (nt.)  the  fact  of  being  de- 
stroyed, destruction,  annihilation,  DhA  11.163  (kilesa- 
vaUassa  kh.). 

Khepeti  see  khipati. 

Khema  [Vedic  ksema  to  ksi,  cp.  khetta]  i.  (adj.)  full  of 
peace,  safe;  tranquil,  calm  D  1.73  (of  a  country); 
S  1.123  (of  the  path  leading  to  the  ambrosial,  i.  e.  Nib- 
bana)  1.189=  Sn  454  (t>f  vaca  nibbanapattiya)  ;  M  1.227 
(vivatag  aniatadvarag  khemag  nibbanapattiya  "  opened 
is  the  door  to  the  Immortal,  leading  to  peace,  for  the 
attainment  of  Nibbana  ")  A  111. 354  (of  nana)  It  ^z  ; 
Sn  268  (  =  abhaya.  nirupaddava  KliA  153) ;  Dli  i8g  sq.  ; 
Pv  IV. 3'  (of  a  road=nibbhaya  PvA  250);  VvA  85.  — 
2.  (nt.)  shelter,  place  of  security,  tranquillity,  home  of 
peace,  the  Serene  (Ep.  of  Nibbana).  In  general : 
D  i.ii  (peace,  opp.  bliaya) ;  Sn  896  (-^  aviv.ldabhiimi)  ; 
953.  —  In  particular  of  Nibbana:  S  lv.371  ;  A  iv.455  ; 
Vv  53^°  (amatag  khemag);  Ps  1.59.  Sec  also  yoga. 
.•\bl.  khemato,  from  the  standpoint  of  the  Serene 
S  11.109;  Sn  414,  1098;  Nd-  s.  v.  (4-tanato,  etc.). 

-atta  one  who  is  at  peace  ( ■)-  viratta)  S  i.i  12  (  =  kheml- 
bhutag  assabhavag  SA).  -anta  security,  in  "bhumi  a 
peaceful  country  (opp.  kantara),  a  paradise  (as  Ep.  of 
Nibbana)  V>  1.73;  Nd-  on  Sattha  ;  Vism  yi^.  -(fhana 
the  place  of  shelter,  the  home  of  tranquillity  Th  2,  350 
(=  Nibbana  TliA  242);  -tthita  peaceful,  appeased,  un- 
molested D  1. 135;  -dassin  looking  upon  the  Serene 
Sn  8(i9;-ppatta  having  attained  tranquiUity  (  =  abha- 
yappatta.  vesarajjappatta)  M  1.72  =  A  11. 9. 

Kbemin  (adj.)  one  who  enjoys  security  or  peace  S  111.13  '• 
Sn  145  (  =  abhaya  KhA  244);  Dh  258. 

Kbela  [Sk.  kheta,  cp.  ksvcda  and  sle>ma,  P.  silesuma. 
See  also  kilid  A  kilis.  cp.  ukkhetita.  On  root  khela  see 
kelana  :  it  is  given  by  Dhtp  279  in  meaning  "  calana." 
The  latter  (khela)  has  of  course  nothing  to  do  with 
klieja]  phlegm,  saliva,  foam  ;  usually  with  singhanika 
mucus,  sometimes  in  the  sense  of  perspiration,  sweat 
A  1.34;  IV. 137;  Sn  196  (-t-singh");  Kh  ii.  =  Miln  26  (cp. 
Vism  263  in  detail,  &  KhA  66)  ;  J  1.61  ;  iv.23;  vi.367 ; 
Vism  259,  343  (4-singhanika),  }Ui  ;  DhA  lll.iSi  ;  iv.2"), 
170;  Pv  11.2^  as  food  for  Petas,  cp.  Av.S.  1.279  (k)ieja- 
mutropajivini ;  11.113:  khelavadutsrjya) ;  PvA  So 
(=  nifthubhana). 

-kilinna  wet  with  exudation  J  1.164;  -mallaka  a' 
spitting  box,  a  cuspidor  Vin  1.48;  11.175,  2C9  sq.  ; 
-singhanika  phlegm  iS:  mucus  DhA  1.50. 

Ehe|akapa  (Vin)  \'  khe]asika  (DhA)  an  abusive  teim 
"eating  phlegm"  (?)  [Midler,  I'.O.  30  =  khetatmaka] 
Vin  11.188.  cp.  Vin.  Tcits  111.239;  °vada  the  use  of  the 
term  "  phlegm-eater,"  calling  one  by  this  name  Vin 
II.  189  ;  DhA  1 40. 


Kho 


68 


Khoma 


Kbo  rt^^'ofs  vowels  often  khv' ;  contr.  of  khalu^Sk. 
khalu]  an  enclitic  particle  of  affirmation  &  emphasis  : 
indeed,  really,  surely ;  in  narration :  tnen,  now  (cp. 
kira) ;  in  question :  then,  perhaps,  really.  Def.  as 
adhikar'  antara-nidassan'  atthe  nipato  KhA  113: 
as  avadharaijar)  (affirmative  particle)  PvA  ii,  18.  —  A 
few  of  its  uses  are  as  foil.:  abhabbo  kho  Vin  1.17; 
pasada  kho  D  11. 155.  After  pron.  :  mayhag  kho 
J  1.279;  ^'^  ''ho  Vin  1. 10  ;  idar)  kho  ibid.  ;  so  ca  kho 
J  1. 51  ;  yo  kho  M  1.428;  —  After  a  negation:  na  kho 
indeed  not  J  ii.i  1 1  ;  no  ca  khv'  assa  A  v.  195  ;  ma  kho 
J  1.253;  —  Often  comb''  with  pana:  na  sakkha  kho 
pana  "  is  it  then  not  possible  "  J  1.151  ;  api  ca  kho  pana 
J  1.253;  siya  kho  pana  D  11. 154;  —  Following  other 
particles,  esp.  in  aoristic  narration  :  atha  kho  (extremely 


frequent) ;  tatra  kho ;  t&pi  kho ;  api  ca  kho ;  evai) 
bhante  ti  kho;  evai)  byi  kho  Vin  iv.i34;  Dh  1.27,  etc. 
—  In  interr.  sentences  it  often  follows  nu :  kin  nu  kho 
J  1.279  '<  atthi  nu  kho  J  111.52  ;  kahan  nu  kho  J  1.255. 

Khobha  (m.)  [cp.  Vedic  kfubb  ksobhayati,  to  shake  =  Goth. 
skiuban  Ger.  schieben,  to  push.  E.  shove]  shaking,  shock 
Vism  31,  157;  khobhar)  karoti  to  shake  VvA  35,  36, 
278  ;  lihobha-karaija  shaking  up,  disturbance  Vism  474. 
See  also  akkhobbha. 

Khoma  [cp.  Vedic  ksauma]  adj.  flaxen  ;  nt.  a  Unen  cloth, 
hnen  garment,  usually  comb''  with  kappasika  Vin  1.58, 
96,  281  ;  A  IV. 394;  V. 234=  249  (°yuga);  J  vi.47,  500; 
Pv  ii.i"  ;  DhA  1.417. 
-pilotika  a  linen  cloth  Vin  1.296. 


"Oa  [fr.  gam]  adj.,  only  as  ending  :  going.  See  e.  g.  atiga, 
anuga,  antalikkha",  ura°,  para°,  majjha",  samipa°, 
hattha°.  It  also  appears  as  °gu,  e.  g.  in  addha",  anta°, 
patti>a°,  para°,  veda°.  —  dugga  (m.  &  nt. )  a  difficult  road 
Dh  327=Miln  379;  Pv  11.7"  (=duggamana-ttliaaa  PvA 
102) ;  11.9"*;  J  11.385. 

OaganA  (nt.)  the  sky  (with  reference  to  sidereal  motions) ; 
usually  of  the  moon  :  g°  majjhe  punijacando  viya 
J  1. 149,  213;  g°  tale  canda-man^aUar)  J  111.365 ;  cando 
g°  majjhe  thito  J  v.  137;  cando  gagane  viya  sobhati 
Vism  58  ;  g°  tale  candai)  viya  DhA  1.372  ;  g°  tale  puQi^a- 
canda  "  the  fuU-moon  in  the  expanse  of  the  heavens  " 
VvA  3  :  g°  talamagga  the  (moon's)  course  in  the  sky 
PvA  188;  etc.  Of  the  sun:  suriyo  &k&se  antalikkhe 
gaganapathe  gacchati  Nd"  on  Sn  1097.  Unspecified  : 
J  1.57;  Vism  176  (°tal-abhimakhai)). 

Oaggara  [Vcdic  gargara  throat,  whirlpool.  *gger  to  sUng 
down,  to  whirl,  cp.  Gr.  jidpaOpoy,  Lat.  gurges,  gurgulio. 
Ohg.  querucUela  "  kchle  "]  i.  roaring,  only  in  f.  gaggari 
a  blacksmith's  bellows :  kammara°,  in  simile  M  1.243  ; 
S  1. 106;  Vism  287.  —  2.  (nt.)  cackhng,  cawing,  in 
hai)sa°  the  sound  of  geese  J  v.90  (expl.  by  hai)sa- 
madhuiassara).     Gaggara  as  N.  oi  a  lake  at  Vism  208. 

—  See  note  on  gala. 

Oaggaraka  [fr.  gaggara]  a  whirlpool,  eddy  J  v,4u5 ; 
according  to  Kern  Toev.  s.  v.  a  sort  of  fish  (Sk.  gargaraka, 
Pimelodus  Gagora) ;  as  gaggalaka  at  Miln  197. 

Gaggariyati  [v.  den.  fr.  prec.  ;  cp.  gurguUo :  gurges,  E. 
gargle  &  gurgle]  to  whirl,  roar,  bellow,  of  the  waves  of 
the  Ganga  Miln  3.  —  cp.  galaga|ayati. 

Oaccha  [not=Sk.  kaccha,  grass- land,  as  Morris,  J.P.T.S. 
1893,  16.  The  pcissage  J  111.287  stands  with  gaccba ; 
V.  1.  kaccha  for  gaccha  at  A  iv.74  ;  g"  for  k'^  at  Sn  20] 
a  shrub,  a  bush,  usually  together  with  lata,  creeper  & 
rukkha,  tree,  e.  g.  Nd^  235,  i*"  ;  J  1.73  ;  Miln  208 ;  Vism 
182  (described  on  p.  183).  With  daya,  wood  A  iv.74. 
puppha°  a  dowering  shrub  J  1.120  ;  khuddaka'^-vana  a 
wood  of  small  shrubs  J  v. 37.  —  PvA  274;  VvA  301 
(-guraba,  brushwood,  underwood);  DhA  1.171  (-po- 
thana-tthana) ;  iv.78  (-mula). 

Oacchatl  LVedic  gacchati,  a  desiderativc  (future)  formation 
from  'gaem  "  I  am  intent  upon  going,"  i.  e.  I  go,  with 
the  loll,  bases.  ^ — (1)  Future-present  •guemsketi> 
•gascati^Sk.  gacchati  =  Gr.  ^attf>  (to  fiuit'io).  In 
meaning  cp.  i,  Sk.  emi,  Gr.  flitt  "  I  shall  go  "  A  in  fjrm 
also  Sk.  prcchati=Lat.  porsco  "  I  want  to  know."  Vtdic 
icchati  "to  desire."  —  (2)  Present  *gucmio=Sk.  ga 
mati  =  Gr.  fiuivu,  Lat.  venio,  Goth,  qiman,  Ohg 
koman,  E.  come ;  and  non-present  formations  as  Osk 
kumbened,  Sk.  gata=Lat.  ventus  ;  gantu=(ad)  ventus 

—  (3)  'gua,  which  is  correlated  to  'sta.  in  Pret.  Sk 
4gam,  Gr.  tlir/v,  cp.  i}^ip<i].  These  three  formations  arc 
represented  in  Pali  as  follows  (i)  gacch",  in  pros 
gacchati ;  imper.  gaccha  &  gacchahi ;  pot.  gacche  (Dh 
46,  224)  A  garcheyya ;  p.pres.  gacchanto.  med.  gaccha- 
mana ;  fut  (2nd)  gacclussati ;  aor.   agacchi  (VvA  307; 


V.  1.  aganchi).  —  (2)  gam°  in  three  variations ;  viz. 
(a)  gam°,  in  pres.  cans,  gameti ;  fut.  gamissati ;  aor. 
3  sg.  agama  (Sn  408,  976 ;  Vv  79'  ;  Mhvs  vii.g),  agamasi 
&  gami  (Pv  II. 8*)  i.  pi.  agaimi)hase  (Pv  11.3"),  pi. 
agamur)  (Sn  290),  agamai)su  &  gamigsu ;  prohib.  ma 
gami;  ger.  gamya  (J  v. 31);  grd.  gamaniya  (KhA  223). 
See  also  der.  gama,  gamana,  gamika,  gimin.  —  (b) 
gan°,  in  aor.  agaAchi  (on  this  form  see  Trenckner, 
Notes,  p.  71  sq.  —  In  n'&gaftchi  J  111.190  it  belongs  to 
a-f-gam);  pres.-aor  gafichisi  (Sn  665);  inf.  gautui) ; 
ger.  gantva ;  grd.  gantabba.  See  also  der.  gantar.  — 
(c;  ga°,  in  pp.  gata.  See  also  ga,  gati,  gatta.  —  3.  g4°, 
in  pret.  aga  (Pv  11.3"),  3rd  pi.  aor.  agu  (=Sk.  °\iit),  in 
ajjhagu,  anvagu  (q.  v.). 

Meanings  and  Use  :  1.  to  go,  to  be  in  motion,  to 
move,  to  go  on  (opp.  to  stand  still,  tit(hati).  Freq. 
in  comb"  with  titthati  nisidati  seyyag  kappeti  "  to  go, 
to  stand,  sit  down  &  he  down,"  to  denote  all  positions 
and  every  kind  of  behaviour ;  Nd^  s.  v.  gacchati.  — 
evai)  kale  gacchante,  as  time  went  on  J  111.52,  or  evai) 
g°  kale  (PvA  54,  75)  or  gacchante  gacchante  kale 
DhA  1. 319;  gacchati  =  paleti  PvA  56;  vemakofi  gantvi 
pahari  (whilst  moving)  DhA  in.  176.  —  2.  to  go,  to 
walk  (opp.  to  run,  dhavati)  DhA  1.389.  —  3.  to  go 
away,  to  go  out,  to  go  forth  (opp.  to  stay,  or  to  come 
^gacchati) :  agamasi  he  went  Pv  11.8^  ;  yo  mar|  icchati 
anvetu  yo  va  n'  icchati  gacchatu  "  who  wants  me  may 
come,  who  does  not  may  go  "  Sn  5O4  ;  agacchantanaii 
ca  gacchantanaii  ca  pamariai)  n'  atthi  "  there  was  no 
end  of  all  who  came  &  went  "  J  11.133  ;  gacchama  "  let 
us  go  "  J  1.263  ;  gaccha  dani  go  away  now  !  J  ii.ibo ; 
gaccha  re  muiicjaka  Vism  343 ;  gacchahi  go  then  ! 
J  1. 151,  222  ;  ma  gami  do  not  go  away  !  J  IV.2  ;  pi.  ma 
gamittha  J  1263;  gacchanto  on  his  way  J  1.255,  278; 
agamaijsu  they  went  away  J  IV.3  ;  gantukama  anxious 
to  go  J  1.222,  292  ;  kattha  gamissasi  where  are  you 
going?  (opp.  agacchasi)  DhA  111.173;  kahar)  gaccbis- 
satha  id.  J  11. 128 ;  kuiiii)  gamissati  where  is  he  going  ? 
Sn  411.  412.  —  4.  with  ace.  or  substitute:  to  go  to,  to 
have  access  to,  to  arrive  or  get  at  (with  the  aim  of  the 
movement  or  the  object  of  the  intention) ;  hence  tig. 
to  come  to  know,  to  experience,  to  reaUze.  —  (a)  with 
ace.  of  direction:  Kajagahai)  gami  he  went  to  H. 
Pv  11.8^  ;  Devadaha-nagarai)  gantug  J  1.52  ;  gaccham' 
ahai)  Kusinarar)  I  shall  go  to  K.  D  11.12S  ;  Suvaijoabhu- 
mig  gacchanti  they  intended  to  go  ("  were  going  ") 
to  S.  J  III.  188  ;  migavai)  g.  to  go  hunting  J  1.149;  jana- 
padag  gamissama  J  11.129;  paradarag  g.  to  approach 
another  man's  wife  Dh  246.  —  (b)  with  adverbs  of  direc- 
tion or  purpose  (atth4ya) :  santikar)  (or  santike)  gacchati 
to  go  near  a  person  (in  gen.),  pitu  s.  gaccbama  DhA 
III.  1 72  ;  devana  santike  gacche  Dh  224  santikag  also 
J  1.152  T  II  159,  etc.  Kathag  tattha  ganussami  how 
shall  1  get  there  ?  ]  1159;  11159:  tattha  agamasi  he 
went  there  J  ii.iOo.  dukkhanubhavanatthuya  gac- 
chamuna  "  going  away  lor  the  purpose  of  undergoing 
suffering  "  J  IV.3  ;  voharatthaya  gacchSmi  1  am  going 
out  (  =  fut.)  on  business  j  11.133.  —  Similarly  (hg.)  in 
foil,  expressions  (op.  "to  go  to  Heaven."  etc.  =  to  live 
or    experience    a    heavenly    life.    op.    next) ;    Nirayag 


09 


Gaja 


70 


Ganthi 


gamissati  J  vi.368 ;  saggap  lokai)  g.  J  1.152  ;  gacche 
param  aparato  Sn  1129,  in  this  sense  interpreted  at 
Nd^  223  as  adhigacchati  phusati  sacchikaroti,  to  ex- 
perience. —  Sometimes  with  double  ace.  :  Bhagavantai) 
saranar)  gacchami  "  I  entrust  myself  to  Bh."  Vin  1.16. 
—  Cp.  also  phrases  as  atthangacchati  to  go  home,  to 
set,  to  disappear ;  antara-gacchati  to  come  between,  to 
obstruct.  —  5.  io  go  as  a.  stronger  expression  for  to  be, 
i.  e.  to  behave,  to  have  existence,  to  fare  (cp.  Ger.  es 
geht  gut,  Fr.  cela  va  bien  =  it  is  good).  Here  belongs 
gati  "  existence,"  as  mode  of  existing,  element,  sphere 
of  being,  and  out  of  this  use  is  developed  the  peri- 
phrastic use  of  gam",  which  places  it  on  the  same  level 
with  the  verb  "to  be"  (see  b).  —  (a)  sugatii)  gamissasi 
you  will  go  to  the  state  of  well-being,  i.  e.  Heaven 
Vin  II. 195;  It  77;  opp.  duggatir)  gacchanti  Dh  317-319; 
maggag  na  jananti  yena  gacchanti  subbata  (which  will 
fall  to  their  share)  Sn  441  ;  gamissanti  yattha  gantva 
ua  socare  "  they  will  go  where  one  sorrows  not "  Sn 
445  ;  V  V  5 1  *  ;  yan  ca  karoti  .  .  .  tan  ca  adaya  gacchati 
"  whatever  a  man  does  that  he  will  take  with  him " 
S  1.93. --(b)  periphrastic  (w.  ger.  of  governing  verb): 
nagarai)  pattharitva  gaccheyya  "  would  spread  through 
the  town  "  J  1.62  ;  parinamag  gaccheyya  "  could  be 
digested"  D  11.127;  sihacammai)  adaya  agamagsu 
"  they  took  the  lion's  skin  away  with  them  "  J  ii.iiu  ; 
itthig  pahaya  gamissati  shall  leave  the  woman  alone 
J  VI. 348  ;  sve  gahetva  gamissanii  "  I  shall  come  for  it 
tomorrow  "  MUn  48. 

Qaja  [Sk.  gaja]  an  elephant  J  iv.494 ;  Miln  2,  346;  UhsA 
-95  (appl''  to  a  kind  of  thought). 

-potaka  the  young  of  an  elephant  PvA  152  ;  -raja  the 
king  of  the  elephants  Miln  346. 

Gajaka  =  gaja,  in  gajakattharana  an  elephant's  cover 
VvA  104. 

Gajiati  [Sk  garjati,  cp.  gargara  &  jara  roaring,  cp.  uggaj- 
jati  Uhtp  76  :  gajja  sadde]  to  roar,  to  thunder,  usually 
of  clouds.  Of  the  earth  :  Davs  v. 29 ;  of  a  man  (using 
harsh  speech)  J  1.22O;  II. 412  jma  gajji) ;  Nd'  172 
(=abhi°);  J  iv.25.  —  Cans,  gajjayati,  ger.  gajjayitva 
(megho  g°  thanayitva  (megho  g°  thanayitva  pavassati) 
It  66. 

Gaijitar  [n.  agent  fr.  prec]  one  who  thunders,  of  a  man 
in  comparison  with  a  cloud  A  11.102  =  Pug  42. 

GaQa  [\'edic  gana  ;  'ger  to  comprise,  hold,  or  come  together, 
cp.  Gr.  aydiiio  to  collect,  aynpa  meeting,  Lat.  grex, 
tlock,  Sk.  jarante  "  conveniunt  "  (sei-  W'ackernagel, 
AHnid.  Gr.  1.193).  Another  form  of  this  root  is  grem 
in  Sk.  grama,  Lat.  greraium  ;  see  under  gama] — i.  (a)  in 
special  sense  :  a  meeting  or  a  chapter  of  (two  or  three) 
bhikkhus,  a  company  (opposed  both  to  sangha,  the 
order  <S  puggala,  the  individual)  Vin  1.58,  74,  195,  197; 
II. 170,  171;  IV. 130,  216,  226,  231,  283,  31U,  316,  317; 
v. 123,  1O7.  —  (b)  in  general:  a  crowd,  a  multitude,  a 
great  many.  See  cpds.  —  2.  as  -°  :  a  collection  of,  viz., 
of  gods,  men,  animals  or  things ;  a  multitude,  mass ; 
flock,  herd  ;  host,  group,  cluster.  —  (a)  deva"  J  1.203  ; 
DhA  111.441  ;  PvA  140  ("parivuta) ;  pisaca"  S  1.33 ; 
tidasa"  Sn  679.  —  (b)  amacca"  suite  of  ministers  J 
1. 264  ;  ariya"  troup  of  worthies  J  vi.50  ;  naranari"  crowds 
of  men  Ov:  women  Miln  2  ;  dasi"  a  crowd  of  servants 
J  II. 127  ;  tapasa"  a  group  of  ascetics  J  1.140  ("parivuta) ; 
bhikkliu"  J  1. 212  (°parivuta).  —  (c)  dvija"  J  1.152  ; 
ilija°  Vv  II. 12*;  sakuna",  of  birds  J  1.207;  11.352;  go°, 
of  cows  A  1.229  •  V.347,  359  ;  J  II.  1-28  ;  kakola°,  of  ravens 
Sn  675 ;  '"haniara",  of  bees  J  1.52  ;  miga°  of  beasts 
j  1. 150.  —  (d)  taru°  a  cluster  of  trees  PvA  154  ;  tara°, 
a  host  of  stars  A  1.215  ;  Pv  11. 9"  ;  with  ref.  to  the  books 
of  the  Canon  :  Suttantika"  V  S  bhidhammika"  Vism  93. 
-acariya  "  a  teacher  of  a  crowd,"  i.  e.  a  t.  who  has 
(many)  followers.  Always  in  phrase  sanghi  ca  gani  ca 
ganacariyo  ca,  and  always  with  ref.  either  to  Gotama  : 


D  I.I  16;  M  II. 3 ;  or  to  the  6  chief  sectarian  leaders,  as 
Piirana  Ktissapa,  etc.;  D  1.47,  163;  S  1.68;  iv.398 ; 
M  1.198.  227,  233;  II. 2  ;  Sn  p.  91;  cp.  DA  1.143.  In 
general;  Miln  4.  -araina  (adj.)  &  -aramata  in  phrase 
gaijaramo  ganarato  ganaramatai)  anuyutto  :  a  lover  of 
the  crowd  A  111.422  sq.  ;  M  iii.iiu  =  Nd-  on  Sn  54. 
-ganin  the  leader  of  many,  Ep.  of  Bhagava  Nd^  307. 
-(g)ganupahana  (pi.)  shoes  with  many  linings  Vin  1. 185. 
187;  cp.  Vin.  Texts  11.14.  See  also  Bdhgh.  on  ataUyo 
(q.  v.  under  ajala).  -puraka  (adj.)  one  who  completes 
the  quorum  (of  a  bhikkhus  chapter)  Vin  1.143  sq.  ; 
-bandhana  in  "ena  danai)  datva  to  give  by  co-operation, 
to  give  jointly  DhA  11. 160  ;  -bhojana  food  prepared  as  a 
joint  meal  Vin  11. 196;  iv.  71  ;  v. 128.  135.  205;  -magga 
in  °ena  ganetug  to  count  by  way  of  batches  Vin  1.117; 
-vassika  (adj.)  through  a  great  many  years  Sn  279; 
-sanganika  (adj.)  coming  into  contact  with  one  another 
DhA  1.162. 

Gaoaka  [fr.  gaQ,  to  comprise  in  the  sense  of  to  count  up] 
a  counter,  one  skilled  in  counting  familiar  with  arith- 
metic ;  an  accountant,  overseer  or  calculator.  Enum'' 
as  an  occupation  together  with  muddika  at  D  1.51  (expl. 
DA  1.157  t>y  acchidda-pafhaka) ;  also  with  muddika  and 
sankhayika  S  iv.376;  as  an  office  at  the  king's  court 
(together  with  amacca  as  ganaka-mahamatta=a  minis- 
terial treasurer)  D  in. 64,  and  in  same  context  D  111.148, 
153,  169,  171,  177  ;  as  overseer  Vin  111.43  ;  as  accountant 
MUn  79,  293  ;  VvA  66. 

GanaU  (f.)  =  gaijika  Vin  111.135-136.  in  purana"  a  woman 
who  was  formerly  a  courtesan,  &  as  adj.  ganaki-dhita 
the  daughter  of  a  courtesan. 

Ga^ana  (f.)  counting,  i.  e.  I.  counting  up.  arithmetic, 
number  J  1.29;  Vism  278  sq.  ;  Miln  79;  VvA  194. — 
2.  counting,  census,  statistics  ;  Tikap.  94  ;  J  1.35  ;  Miln  4 
(sena  °r)  karetva) ;  DhA  1. 11.  34.  —  3.  the  art  of  counting, 
arithmetics  as  a  study  &  a  profession,  forbidden  to  the 
bhikkhus  Vin  I.77=iv.i29  {'i)  sikkhati  to  study  ar.) ; 
D  i.ii  (expl.  DA  1.95  by  acchiddaka-gaiiana; ;  M  1.85; 
iii.i  (°ajiva)  :  DA  1.157.  -ganana-patha  (time-)  reckon- 
ing, period  of  time  Miln  20,  1 16. 

Ga^ika'  (f)  "  one  who  belongs  to  the  crowd."  a  harlot,  a 
courtesan  (cp.  ganaki)  Vin  1.231  (Ambapali)  268,  (do); 
11.277  (Addhakasi) ;  Ud  71;  Miln  122;  DhA  111. 104; 
VvA  75  (Sirima) ;  I'vA  195,  199.  —  Customs  of  a  ganika 
J  iv.249;  V.134.  —  Cp.  sag". 

Gavika^  (f.)  =  ganana,  arithmetic  Miln  3. 

Gainin'  (adj.)  one  who  has  a  host  of  followers,  Ep.  of  a 
teacher  who  has  a  large  attendance  of  disciples  ;  usually 
in  standing  comb"  sanghi  gani  ganacariyo  (see  above). 
Also  in  foil.:  Sn  955,  957;  Dpvs  iv.8  (mahagani).  14 
(thera  gani) ;  gaiji-bhuta  (pi.)  in  crowds,  comb''  with 
sangha  sanghi  D  1.112,  expl"'  at  DA  1.280:  pubbe 
nagarassa  anto  agapa  bahi  nikkhamitva  gaija-sam- 
panna  ti.     See  also  paccekaganin. 

Qajoin^  a  large  species  of  deer  J  v. 406  (  =  gokanija). 

Ga^eti  [denora.  to  gana  Dhtp  574  :  sankhyane]  1 .  to  count, 
to  reckon,  to  do  sums  Dh  19  ;  J  vi.334  '■  Miln  79,  293  ; 
pp.  ganita  Sn  677  ;  pass,  ganiyati  Sdhp  434  ;  inf.  (vedic) 
ganetuye  Bw.  iv.28  ;  caus.  ganapeti  M  iii.i.  —  2.  to 
regard,  to  take  notice  of,  to  consider,  to  care  for  J  1.300  ; 
IV. 267. 

Qa^thi  (m.)  [Vedic  granthi,  to  grem  to  comprise,  hold  to- 
gether, cp.  Lat.  gremium.  Sk  gana  &  grama,  see  also 
gantha]  i.  a  knot,  a  tie,  a  knot  or  joint  in  a  stalk  (of  a 
plant)  J  1. 1 72  ;  DA  1.163  ;  DhA  1.321  (°jatag  what  has  be 
come  knotty  or  hard) ;  -ditthi-ganthi  the  tangle  of  false 
doctrine  VvA  297  ;  anta-ganth-abadha  entanglement  of 
intestines  Vin  1.275.  —  -•  3  (wooden)  block  Vin  11. 110 
(of  sandal  wood). 


Ganthika 


71 


Gata 


-tthana  (for  ganthikatthana  ?)  the  place  of  the  block 
(i.  e.  of  execution)  J  111.538  ;  (reads ganthi-ganti-tthana) ; 
Vism  248.  —  bhedaka,  in  "cora  "  the  thief  who  breaks  the 
block  "  (or  rope,  knot  ?)  DhA  n.30. 

Ga^thika  (f.)  (freq.  spelled  gandika,  q.  v.)=ganthi,  viz. 
I.  a  knot,  a  tie  DA  1.199  (catu-panca-gaijthik'ahata 
patta  a  bowl  with  4  or  5  knots,  similarly  ani-ganthik'- 
ahata  ayopatta  Vism  108  ;  but  see  ani)  ;  DhA  1.335 
(°jata  =  ganfhijata  knotty  part),  394.  —  2 .  a  block  (or  is  it 
knot?)  Vin  11. 136  (?  +  pasaka;  cp.  Vin.  Texts  HI.144); 
V.I 40.  Esp.  in  phrase  ganthikar)  patimui^citva  Vin  1.46  = 
II. 213,  215,  trsl''  at  Vin.  Texts  III. 286  "fasten  the 
block  on  (to  the  robe)  "  but  at  1.155  "  tie  the  knots." 
Also  in  dhamma-garithika  a  block  for  execution  J  1.150 
(v.  1.  gaijdika).  —  3.  N.  of  a  plant  PvA  127.  — ucchu- 
ganthikS.  sugar  cane :  see  ucchu. 

-kasava  a  yellow  robe  which  was  to  be  tied  (or  which 
had  a  block  .')  J  iv.446. 

GaO^a  [a  variation  of  gantha  (-i),  in  both  meanings  of 
( I )  swelling,  knot,  protuberance,  and  ( 2 )  the  interstice 
between  two  knots  or  the  whole  of  the  knotty  object, 
i.  e.  stem,  stalk] — i.  a  swelling,  esp.  as  a  disease,  an 
abscess,  a  boil.  Freq.  in  similes  with  ref.  to  karaa  and 
kaya.  Mentioned  with  similar  cutaneous  diseases  under 
kilasa  (q.  v.  for  loci).  As  Ep.  of  kaya  S  iv.83  =  A  iv.38b, 
of  karai  A  hi. 310,  iv.289 ;  Nd^  on  Sn  51  ;  also  Th  2, 
491  (=dukkhata  sulaya  ThA  288);  S  iv.64  (  =  eja); 
Sn  51,  61  (v.  1.  for  gala) ;  J  1.293  ;  Vism  360  (°pilaka)  ; 
DhA  III. 297  (gand-a-gandajata,  covered  with  all  kinds 
of  boils);  IV. 175;  PvA  55.  Cp.  Av.  S  11. 168'.  —  2.  a 
stalk,  a  shaft,  in  N.  of  a  plant  -°tindu-rukkha  J  v. 99, 
and  in  der.  gaijdika  &  gandi,  cp.  also  Av.  S  11.133'^.  — 
3.  =  gari<Juppada  in  cpd.  gandamattika  clay  mixed  with 
earth-worms  Vin  11.151  (cp.  Bdhgh.  gaijduppada- 
gfitha-mattika  clay  mixed  with  excrement  of  earthworms 
l'i«.  Texts  III. 1 72). 

-uppada  (lit.  producing  upheavals,  cp.  a  mole)  an 
earth-worm,  classed  as  a  very  low  creature  with  kifa  & 
puiavaatMiii.i68;  J  v. 2 10  (°pana) ;  DhA  in. 361  (°yoni) ; 
SnA  317. 

Ga94^&  (adj.)  having  boils  Sdhp  103. 

GaQ^ika  (f)  [a-n.  formation  from  ganda  or  gantha,  see 
also  ganthika] — i.  a  stalk,  a  shaft  (cp.  gandi)  J  1.474  : 
DhsA  319  (of  the  branches  of  trees:  g°-akotana-sadda). 
—  2.  a  lump,  a  block  of  wood  (more  freq.  spelling 
ganthika,  q.  v.).  —  3.  N.  of  a  plant  Vv  35*  (  =  bandhu- 
jivaka  VvA  161). 

-adhana  the  putting  on  of  a  shaft  or  stem,  as  a  bolt 
or  bar  Vin  11. 172  ;  cp.  Vtn.  Texts  111.213  and  gaijdi ;  also 
ghafika'^. 

OsQ^in  [adj.  fr.  gaijda] — i.  having  swellings,  in  ure  gaijdi 
(f.)  with  swellings  on  the  chest,  i.  e.  breasts  J  v.  159, 
202  (thane  sandhSyaha  205).  —  2.  having  boils,  being 
afflicted  with  a  glandular  disease  (with  kutthin  & 
kilasin)  Kvu  31. 

QtJXijl  (f.)  [=gandika  in  meaning  i;  prob.  =  Sk.  ghanta 
in  meaning  2] — i .  a  shaft  or  stalk,  used  as  a  bar  J  '237. 
— 2.  a  gong  DhA  1.291  (gaijdir)  paharati  to  beat  the  g.) ; 
11.54,  244;  gaijdir)  akojetva  KhA  251.  Cp.  AvS  1.258, 
264,  272  ;  11.87,  95  &  Divy  335,  336.  Also  in  garxji- 
sailiia  "  sign  with  the  gong  "  J  iv.306.  — ■  3.  the  execu- 
tioner's block  (  =  gaijdika  or  gaijthika)  J  111.41. 

GaQ^AHiba  N.  of  the  tree,  under  which  Gotama  Buddha 
performed  the  double  miracle ;  with  ref.  to  this  freq. 
in  phrase  gandamba-nikkha-mule  vamakapatihSriyar) 
katva  J  1.77  ;  iv.263  sq.  ;  DA  1.57  ;  f'vA  137  ;  Miln  349  ; 
Davs  v. 54.  Also  at  DhA  III. 207  in  play  of  words  with 
amba-rukkha. 

QaQ4asa  [cp.  Sk.  garu^u^a]  a  mouthful  J  1.249  (khira°). 


QaQhati  &  Ga9hati  [Vedicgrah  (grabh).  grhnati  pp.  grhita 
to  grasp.  *gher  to  hold,  hold  in.  contain  ;  cp.  Gr. 
Xi'pTor  enclosure,  Lat.  hortus,  co-hors  (homestead)  ; 
Goth,  gards  (house) ;  Ohg.  gart ;  R.  yard  &  garden.  To 
this  belong  Vedic  grha  (house)  in  P.  gaha°,  gihin,  gcha. 
ghara.  Sc  also  \'edic  harati  to  seize,  hasta  hand].  The 
forms  of  the  verb  are  from  three  bases,  viz.  (1)  ganha- 
(Sk.  grhna-)  ;  Pres.  :  ind.  ganhati  (ganhasi  PvA  S7), 
pot.  ganhcyya.  imper.  ganha  (J  1159;  PvA  49  = 
handa)  &  ganhahi  (J  1.279).  ^"'-  ganhissati  ;  Aor 
ganhi.  Inf.  ganhitur)  (J  in. 281).  Ger.  gaijhitva. 
Caus.  ganhapeti  Sc  gahapeti.  —  2.  gahe-  (Sk.  grhi-)  : 
Fut.  gahessati.  Aor.  aggahesi  (Sn  847;  J  1.52).  Inf. 
gahetug  (J  1.190,  222).  Ger.  gahetva  &  gahetvana 
(poet.)  (Sn  309;  Pv  n.3).  —  3.  gah-  (Sk.  grh-) :  Aor. 
aggahi.  Ger.  gayha  &  gahiya  (Sn  791).  Pass,  gayhati. 
Pp.  gahita  &  gahita.     Cp.  gaha,  gahaija,  gaha. 

Meanings :  to  take,  take  up ;  take  hold  of ;  grasp, 
seize;  assume;  e.  g.  ovadai)  g.  to  take  advice  J  1.159; 
khaggag  to  seize  the  sword  J  1.254-255  ;  gocararj  to  take 
food  J  III. 275  ;  jane  to  seize  people  J  1.253  :  dhanag  to 
grasp  the  treasure  J  1.255  '■  nagarag  to  occupy  the  city 
J  1.202  ;  pade  galhar)  gahetva  holding  her  feet  tight 
J  1.255 ;  macche  to  catch  fish  J  111.52  ;  mantai)  to  use  a 
charm  J  in. 280  ;  rajjag  to  seize  the  kingdom  J  1.263  : 

II.  102  ;  sakhar)  to  take  hold  of  a  branch  Sn  791  ;  J  1.52. 
Very  often  as  a  phrase  to  be  translated  by  a  single 
word,  as  :  namato  g.  to  enumerate  PvA  18  ;  patisandhii) 
g.  to  be  born  J  1. 149;  maranai)  g.  to  die  J  1.151  ; 
mulena  g.  to  buy  J  in. 126.  vacanar)  g.  to  obey 
J  in. 2 76  (in  neg.).  The  ger.  gahetva  is  very  often 
simply  to  be  translated  as  "  with,"  e.  g.  tidandag 
gahetva  caranto  J  11.317;  satta  bhikkhu  gahetva 
agamasi  VvA  149. 

Caus.  ganhapeti  to  cause  to  be  seized,  to  procure,  to 
have  taken  :  phalani  J  11. 105  ;  rajanai)  J  1.264.  Cp. 
gahapeti. 

Gata  [pp.  of  gacchati  in  medio-reflexive  function]  gone, 
in  all  meanings  of  gacchati  (q.  v.)  viz.  i.  literal; 
gone  away,  arrived  at,  directed  to  (c.  ace),  opp. 
thita :  gate  thite  nisinne  (loc.  abs.)  when  going, 
standing,  sitting  down  (cp.  gacchati  i)  D  1.70;  opp. 
agata :  yassa  maggag  na  janasi  agatassa  gatassa  va 
Sn  582  (cp.  gati  2).  Also  periphrastic  (  =  gacchati  5  b) : 
atthi  paritva  gatar)  "  the  bone  fell  down  "  J  111.26. 
Very  often  gata  stands  in  the  sense  of  a  finite 
verb  (  =  aor.  gacchi  or  agamasi):  yo  ca  Buddhag  .  .  . 
saranai)  gato  (cp.  gacchati  4)  Dh  igo;  attano  vasanat- 
thanar)  gato  he  went  to  his  domicile  J  1.280  ;  11. 160  ;  nava 
Aggimalari  gati  the  ship  went  to  Aggimala  J  IV.  139.  — 
2.  in  applied  meaning :  gone  in  a  certain  way.  i.  e. 
affected,  behaved,  fared,  fated,  being  in  or  having  come 
into  a  state  or  condition.  So  in  sugata  &  duggata  (see 
below)  and  as  2nd  part  of  cpds.  in  gen.,  viz.  gone  ; 
atthai)°  gone  home,  set ;  addha"  done  with  the  journey 
(cp.  gat-addhin) ;  gone  into :  tanha"  fallen  a  victim  to 
thirst,  tama"  obscured,  raho°,  secluded,  vyasana"  fallen 
into  misery ;  having  reached :  anta"  arrived  at  the  goal 
(in  this  sense  often  comb'^  with  patta :  antagata  anta- 
patta  Nd^,  436,  612),  koti°  perfected,  parinibbana" 
having  ceased  to  exist,  vijja"  having  attained  (right) 
knowledge ;  connected  with,  referring  to,  concerning : 
kaya"  relating  to  the  body  (kayagata  sati,  e.  g.  Vism 

III,  197,  240  sq.)  ;  ditthi°  being  of  a  (wrong)  view; 
sankhara°,  etc.  —  Sometimes  gata  is  replaced  by  kata 
and  vice  versa;  anabhavagkata>  anabhavag  gacchati; 
kcLlagata  >  kalakata  (q.  v.). 

agata   not   gone   to,    not   frequented :    °g    disai)    (of 
Nibbana)    Dh   323  ;    purisantarag    °g    matugamag    "  a 
'maid  who  has  not  been  with  a  man  "  J  1.290. 

sugata  of  happy,    blessed  existence,   fortunate ;   one 
who  has  attained  the  realm  of  bliss  (  =  sugatig  gata,  see 
gati),  blessed.     As  np.  a  common  ijp.  of  the  Buddha: 
Vin  1.35;  III.  I  ;  D  1.49;  S  1.192  ;  A  11.147  et  passim  (see 
Sugata).  —  D  1.83;  Sn  227  (see  expl.  KhA  183). 


Gataka 


73 


Gathita 


duggata  of  miserable  existence,  poor,  unhappy,  ill- 
fated,  gone  to  the  realm  of  misery  (duggatir)  gata 
PvA  33.  see  gati)  Pv  1.6'  ;  11.3" ;  duggata-bhava 
(poverty)  J  vi,366;  duggat-itthi  (miserable,  poor) 
J  1.290 ;  parama-duggatani  kulani  clans  in  utmost 
misery  (poverty)  PvA  176. — Compar.  duggatatara 
DhA  1.427:  II. 135. 

-atta  (fr.  atta)  self-perfected,  perfect  D  1.57  (expl. 
by  kofippatta-citto  DA  1.-168) ;  cp.  paramaya  satiya  ca 
gatiya  ca  dhitiyS  ca  samannagata  M  1.82  ;  -addhin  (adj. 
of  addhan)  one  who  has  completed  his  journey  (cp. 
addhagata)  Dh  90  ;  -kale  (in  gata-gata-kale)  whenever 
he  went  J  in.  188  ;  -(thana  place  of  existence  PvA  38  ; 
=  gamana  in  agata-tthJnai)  vS. :  coming  and  going 
(lit.  state  of  going)  J  111.188;  -yobbana  (adj.)  past 
youth,  of  old  age  A  1.138  ;  Sn  98=  124. 

Oataks  a  messenger  J  1.86. 

Oatatta  i.  =  Sk.  gat-atman  (see  prec.).  — 2.  =  Sk.  gatatvai) 
the  fact  of  having  gone  KhA  183. 

Oati  (f.)  [fr.  gacchati ;  cp.  Gr.  /iriffii-,  Lat.  (in-)  ventio. 
Goth,  (ga-)qumps]  i.  going,  going  away,  (opp.  agati 
coming)  (both  gati  &  agati  usually  in  pregnant  sense 
of  No.  2.  See  agati);  direction,  course,  career.  Freq. 
of  the  two  careers  of  a  Mahapurisa  (viz.  either  a  Cak- 
kavatti  or  a  Buddha)  D  11.16=  Sn  p.  106;  Sn  looi,  or 
of  a  gihi  arahattat)  patto  Miln  264,  with  ref.  to  the  dis- 
tinction of  the  child  Gotama  J  1.56.  —  phassaya tana- 
nag  gati  (course  or  direction)  A  n.i6i  ;  jagato  gati  (id.) 
A  11.15,  17;  sakuntanag  g.  the  course,  flight  of  birds 
Dh  92  =  Th  I,  92.  — Opp.  agati  Pv  11.9^2  -tassa  gatig 
janati  "  he  knows  her  going  away,  i.  e.  where  sh^  has 
gone"  PvA  6.-2.  going  away,  passing  on  (  =  cuti, 
opp.  upapatti  coming  into  another  existence) ,  course, 
esp  after  death,  destiny,  as  regards  another  (future) 
existence  A  1.112  ;  D  n.91  ;  M  1.388  (tassa  ka  gati  ko 
abhisamparayo  ?  what  is  his  rebirth  and  what  his 
destiny?);  in  comb"  agati  va  gati  va  (  =  cutupapatti), 
rebirth  &  death  M  1.328,  334.  In  def"  of  sagsara 
expl''  as  gati  bhavdbhava  cuti  upapatti  =  one  existence 
after  the  other  Nd^  664 ;  as  gati  upapatti  patisandhi 
Nd'  on  dhatu  (also  as  puna-gati  rebirth).  —  The 
Arahant  as  being  beyond  Sagsara  is  also  beyond  gati : 
yassa  gatii)  na  jananti  deva  gandhabba-manusa  Dh 
420  =  Sn  644  ;  yesag  gati  n'  atthi  Sn  499  ;  and  Nibbana 
coincides  with  release  from  the  galis  :  gativippamok- 
khag  parinibbanag  SdA  368.  —  atta  hi  attano  gati 
"  everybody  is  (the  maker  of)  his  own  future  life  " 
Dh  380  ;  esa  maccharino  gati  "  this  is  the  fate  of  the 
selfish  "  Pv  iu.i*« ;  sabbagati  te  ijjhantu  "  all  fate  be  a 
success  to  you  "  J  v. 393  ;  gato  so  tassa  ya  gati  "  he  has 
gone  where  he  had  to  go  (after  death)"  Pv  1.12^.   — 

3.  behaviour,  state  or  condition  of  Ufe,  sphere  of  exist- 
ence, element,  especially  characterized  as  sugati  & 
duggati,  a  happy  or  an  unhappy  existence,  gati  miganag 
pavanag,  iikaso  pakkhtnag  gati,  vibhavo  gati  dhamma- 
nag,  nibbanag  arahato  gati :  the  wood  is  the  sphere  of 
the  beasts,  the  air  of  the  birds,  decay  is  the  state  of 
(all)  things,  Nibbana  the  sphere  of  the  Arahant  Vin 
v.i49=SnA  346;  apuiUSalabho  ca  gati  ca  papika 
Dh  310 ;  duggati  J  1.28 ;  avijjay'  eva  gati  the  quality  of 
ignorance  Sn  729 ;  paramaya  gatiya  samannagato  of 
perfect  behaviour  M  1.82  ;  see  also  def"  at  Vism  237.  — 

4.  one  of  the  five  realms  of  existence  of  sentient  beings 
(  =  loka).  divided  into  the  two  categories  of  sugati 
(  =  Sagga,  realm  of  bliss)  &  duggati  (  =  yamaloka, 
apaya,  realm  of  misery).  These  gatis  are  given  in  the 
foil,  order:  (i)  niraya  purgatory,  (2)  tiracchanayoni 
the  brute  creation,  (3)  pittivisaya  the  ghost  world, 
(4)  manussa  (m-loka)  human  beings,  (5)  dev5  gods : 
M  1.73 ;  D  111.234;  A  IV.459;  Nd»  550 ;  cp.  S  v.474-77 ; 
Vism  552.  They  are  described  in  detail  in  the  Paflca- 
gatidipana  (ed.  L.  Feer,  J.P.T.S.  1884.  152  sq. ;  trsl.  by 
the  same  in  Annates  du  Musie  Guimet  v.  514-528)  under 


Naraka-kanda,  Tiracchana",  Peta°,  Manussa°,  Deva*. 
Of  these  Nos.  1-3  are  considered  duggatis,  whilst 
Nos.  4  and  5  are  sugati.  In  later  sources  we  find  6 
divisions,  viz.  1-3  as  above.  (4)  asura.  (5)  manussA, 
(6)  deva,  of  which  1-4  are  comprised  under  apaya  (con- 
ditions of  suffering,  q.  v.)  or  duggatiyo  (see  Pv  iv.ii, 
cp.  PvA  103).  These  six  also  at  D  111.264.  —  lokassa 
gatig  pajanati  Bhagava  Sn  377  (gati=nirayadipai^cap- 
pabhedag  SnA  368).  The  first  two  gatis  are  said  to  be 
the  fate  of  the  micchaditthino  D  1.228,  dve  nittha 
DA  1.249  (<!■  V.  for  var.  appl.  of  gati)  as  well  as  the 
dussila  (A  1.60).  whilst  the  last  two  are  the  share  of  the 
silavanto  (A.  1.60). 

-gata  gone  its  course  (of  a  legal  enquiry,  vinicchaya) 
Vin  11. 85  (cp.  Vin  Texts  111.26) ;  J  11. i. 

agati  I.  no  course,  no  access,  in  agati  tava  tatrh.i : 
there  you  have  no  access  S  1.115. — 2=duggati, 
wrong  course,  agatigamana  a  wrong  course  of  life 
D  III. 133 ;  A  1.72  ;  11. 18  sq.  ;  111.274  sq,  ;  J  v.sio  ;  PvA 
161.  Technically  the  four  agati-gamanani  are  :  chanda" 
dosa°  moha°  bhaya"  D  in. 228  (see  also  under  chanda). 

sugati  (sometimes  suggati  after  duggati  e.  g.  J  vi.224) 
a  happy  existence  ;  a  realm  of  bliss  ;  the  devaloka.  Cp. 
sugatin.  Usually  with  gacchati  (sugatig)  &  gata  "  gone 
to  Heaven  "  Vin  11.195;  D  11.202  ;  It  77;  PvA  65.  In 
comb"  w.  sagga  loka  (sugatig.  etc.  uppajjati)  D  1.143: 
A  1.97;  J  1. 152.  parammarana  sugati  patikankhS 
It  24;  suggatig  gata  Dh  18;  sugati  papehi  kanunehi 
sulabha  na  hoti  "  bliss  is  not  gained  by  evil  "  PvA  87  ; 
==sugga  &  dibbatthana  PvA  89;  sugati-parayana  sure 
of  rebirth  in  a  realm  of  bliss,  ib. 

duggati  a  miserable  existence ;  a  realm  of  misery  (sec 
above  gati  4).  Usually  with  gacchati  (duggatig  gata, 
reborn  in  a  miserable  state)  or  uppajjati  D  i  .82  ;  A  1.97, 
138  ( -1- vinipatag  nirayag) ;  11. 123;  111.3  ;  iv.364  ;  Dh 
17;  Sn  141;  SnA  192  ( =  dukkhappatti) ;  PvA  87. 
Sakakammani  nayanti  duggatig,  one's  own  deeds  lead 
to  rebirth  in  misery,  Dh  240  ;  with  ref.  to  a  Peta  exist- 
ence :  Pv  1.6';  II. I*:  i";  3".     Cp.  duggata. 

-Oatika  (adj.)  1.  going  to,  staying  with,  in  bhikkhu°  a 
person  living  with  the  bhikkhus  Vin  1.148.  —  2.  leading 
to :  yag°  what  they  lead  to  (of  the  5  indriyas)  S  v.230. 
—  3.  having  a  certain  gati,  leading  to  one  of  the  four 
kinds  of  rebirth  :  evag°  D  1.16  (w.  ref.  to  one  of  the  first 
3  gatis :  DA  1. 108)  ;  niyata°  whose  destiny  is  certain 
(w.  ref.  to  sugati)  and  aniyata"  whose  destiny  is  uncer- 
tain (w.  ref.  to  a  duggati)  DhA  in.  173. 

-Qatin  (adj.  =  gatika)  i.  going,  i.  e.  having  a  certain 
course :  sabba  nadi  vankagati  "  every  river  flows 
crooked"  J  1.289.  —  2.  having  a  certain  gati,  fated, 
destined,  esp.  in  su°  &  dug" :  samparaye  suggati  going 
to  a  happy  existence  after  death  Vin  11.162  =  J  1.219; 
saggai)  sugatino  yanti  "  those  who  have  a  happy  fate 
(because  of  leading  a  good  life)  go  to  one  of  the 
Heavens  "  Dh  126. 

Qatimant  (adj.)  of  (perfect)  behaviour,  going  right,  clevef 
(cp.  gatatta  under  gata,  &  gati  3)  M  1.82. 

Qatta  (nt.)  [Vedic  gatra]  the  body,  pi.  gattani  the  limbs.  — 
As  body:  Vin  1.47;  S  1.169=183  (analla°  with  pure 
bodies;  anallina°  at  169,  but  v.  1.  analla") ;  A  1.138; 
Sn  673  (samacchida"  with  bodies  cut  up);  Pv  1.1 1* 
(bhinna-pabhinna°,  id.);  tVA  56  (  =  sarira) ;  68. — As 
limbs:  S  iv.igS  (arupakkanl  festering  with  sores); 
M  1.506  (id.);  M  1.80  =  246;  J  1.61  (lalakilinna°) ;  Sn 
1001  (honti  gattesu  mahapurisalakkha^a),  1017,  1019; 
Pv  111.9^  (=sariravayava  PvA  211);  Miln  357  (aru- 
pakkani). 

Oathita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  ganthati  to  tie,  cp.  gantha,  knott 
Sk.  grathita]  tied,  bound,  fettered ;  enslaved,  bound  to, 
greedy  for,  intoxicated  with  (c.  loc.).  When  abs.  always 
in  comb"  w.  paribhuiijati  and  w.  ref.  to  some  object 
of    desire     (bhoga,     labha,    kamagune).     Usually    in 


Gaddula 


73 


Gandba 


standing  phrase  gathita  mucchita  ajjhapanna  (ajjho-  { 
panna)  "full  of  greed  &  blind  desire."  In  this  connec- 
tion it  is  frequently  (by  B  MSS.)  spelt  gadhita  and  the 
editors  of  S,  A.  &  Miln  have  put  that  in  the  text  through- 
out. With  mucchita  &  ajjhapanna:  D  1.243;  ill. 43  : 
M  1.162,  173;  S  11.270;  1V.332  ;  A  V.I 78,  i8i  Nd'  on 
nissita  C.  — c.  loc. :  J  iv.371  (gharesu) ;  DA  1.59  (klma- 
gutiesu).  In  other  connections :  adSnaganthai)  gathi- 
tag  visajja  Sn  794  (cp.  Nd'  98) ;  yani  loke  gathitani  na 
tesu  pasuto  siya  Sn  940.  —  J  IV.5  (=giddha);  v.274 
(gedhita  for  pagiddha)  ;  PvA  26:>  (gadhita  as  expl"  of 
giddha) — «gathita  (agadhita)  not  fettered  (by  desire) 
without  desire,  free  from  the  ties  of  craving  (H-m",  a°) 
S  11.194,  269;  A  V.181  ;  MUn  401  (trsl.  Rh.D.  11.339: 
"  without  craving,  without  faintness,  without  sinking  "). 

QsdA  speech,  sentence  Dh  1.66,  DA  1.66  f.  ;  and  on 
D  III  i.?5  (§  28);  gada  at  S  11.230  (v.  1.)  in  phrase 
ditthagadena  sallena  is  to  be  read  diddhagadena  s.  | 

Oaddnla  (and  gaddjla)  a  leather  strap  S  111.150  ;    J  11.246  ;    I 
II. 2" 4  ;  fig.  in  tanha-gaddula  "  the  leash  of  thirst,"  Nd^ 
on  jappa  (tanha)  =  Dhs  1059= Vbh  361,  cp.  DhsA  367. 

OaddGhaiUI  (nt.)  [Derivation  unknown  ;  Sk.  dadrughna] 
a  small  measure  of  space  &  time  M  111. 127;  S  11.264 
(°mattam  pi.  SA  "pulling  just  once  the  cow's  teat"); 
A  rv.305  ;  Miln  no.  See  Trenckner  P.M.  59.  60  ;  Rh. 
D.  J.R.A.S.  1903,  375. 

Qaddha  [Vedic  grdha ;  see  gijjha]  a  vulture ;  in  gaddha- 
badhipubbo,  of  the  bhikkhu  Arittha.  who  had  been 
a  vulture  trainer  in  a  former  life  Vin  11.25  =  iv. 2 18  = 
M  1. 130;  see  also  Vin.  Texts  11.377. 

Oadrabha  [Vedic  gardabha.,  Lat.  burdo,  a  mule  ;  seeWalde 
Lat.  Wti)..  s.  v.]  an  ass,  donkey  Vin  v. 129:  M  1.334; 
A  1.229;  J  11-109,  110;  V.453;  DA  1.163.  —  f.  gadrabhi 
J  11.340- 

-bharaka  a  donkey  load  1  11.109;  DhA  1.123; 
-bhara  the  fact  of  being  an  ass  J  ii.iio;  -rava  (& 
-rava)  the  braying  of  an  ass  ibid.  &  Vism  415. 

Oadhita  see  gathita. 

Oant&r  [n.  agent  of  gacchati  in  the  sense  of  a  periphrastic 
future]  "  goer  "  in  ganta  hoti  he  will  go,  he  is  in  the 
habit  of  going,  comb''  w.  sots  hanta  khanta,  of  the 
king's  elephant  A  n.ii6=iii-i6i  ;  v.  1.  for  gata  at 
M  11.155. 

Chmtha  (in  BB  often  misspelt  gandha)  [fr.  ganthati] — i.  a 
bond,  fetter,  trammel ;  always  fig.  and  usually  referring 
to  and  enum""  as  the  four  bodily  ties,  or  knots  (kaya°,  see 
under  kaya) :  Sv.59=Dhs  1135  ;  D  111.230  ;  Nd'98  ;  DhA 
111.276;  4  kayagantha,  viz.,  abhijjha,  by&pada,  silabba- 
taparamasa,  idagsaccabhinivesa ;  thus  Nd'  98  ;  Vism 
683.  In  other  conn.  Sn  347,  798,  847,  857,  912  ;  Nd^ 
on  jappa  (tanha) ;  Dh  211  ;  Ps  1.129  ;  Dhs  1059,  1472  ; 
Vbh  18,  24,  55,  65,  77.  117,  120;  Nett  31,  54,  114,  124 
(gandha) ;  Sdhp  616.  —  chinna°  (adj.)  one  who  has  cut 
the  ties  (of  bad  desires,  binding  him  to  the  body). 
Comb"  w.  anigha  nirasa  S  1.12  ("gandha),  23  ;  w.  asita 
anasava  Sn  219.  Cp.  pahinamanassa  na  santi  gantha 
S  1.14.  See  also  adana" ;  cp.  ganthaniya.  —  2.  [only 
in  late  Pali,  and  in  Sk.]  composition,  text,  book  (not 
with  ref.  to  books  as  tied  together,  but  to  books  as 
composed,  put  together.     See  gantheti  2). 

-dhura  the  burden  of  the  books,  i.  e.  of  stud5ang  the 
Scriptures,  expl""  as  one  who  knows  by  heart  one,  two, 
or  all  Nikayas.  Always  comb''  w.  vipassanadhurai), 
the  burden  of  contemplation  DhA  1.8  ;  iv.37 ;  -pamo- 
cana  the  state  of  being  released  from,  freed  from  the 
fetters  of  the  "  body  "  always  w.  ref .t  o  NibbSna  S  1.2 10  ; 
A  11.24;  It  '04,  cp.  122  ;  -pahina  (adj.)  connected  with 
or  referring  to  the  ganthas  Dhs  1480  ;  opp.  vi°  Dhs  1482. 

Qanthati  &  Oantheti  [Vedic  grath.  granth,  grathnati,  to 
*CTeiu,  cp.  Lat.  gremium ;  see  also  gaijithi  gathita, 
gantha]  i.  to  tie,  knot,  bind,  fasten  together:   kathai) 


mittani  ganthati  "  how  does  he  bind  friends  "  S  1.214= 
Sn  185;  malar)  ganthamana  tying  a  garland  Vv  38' 
(ganthento  VvA  173).  Of  medicines:  to  mix,  to  pre- 
pare J  rv.361.  —  pp.  ganthita  tied,  bound,  fettered: 
catahi  ganthehi  g°  Ps  1.129;  —  grd.  ganthaniya  to  be 
tied  or  tending  to  act  as  a  tie  (of  "  body  ") ;  expl.  as 
araminatia-karava-vsisena  ganthehi  ganthitabba  DhsA 
69  ;  dhamma  g°  a  ("  states  that  tend  to  be.  are  liable  to  be 
ties  "  Buddh.  Ps.  p.  305  ;  Expositor  64)  Dhs  1141  ;  1478. 
In  comb"  saflnojaniya  g°  oghaniya  (of  riipa)  Dhs 
584=  Vbh  12  ;  of  rupa-kkhandha  Vbh  65,  of  dasaya- 
tana  ib.  77,  dasindriya  ib.  1.29,  sacca  g"  and  ag^ 
(=gantha-sampayutta  &  vippayutta)  ib.  117.  —  2.  to 
put  together,  to  compose :  mante  ganthetva  (v.  1. 
gandhitva)  Sn  302,  306. 

Ctamtbika  (adj.)   [fr.  gantha  2]  hard-studying  DhA  1.156 
(bhikktau ;  cp.  gantha-dhura). 

Gandha  [Vedic  gandha,  from  ghra,  ghrati  to  smell,  ghrana 
smell,  &  see  P.  ghana.     Possibly  conn.  w.  Lat.  fragro= 
E.  fragrant]  sraeU,  viz. —  i.  odour,  smell,  scent  in  gen. 
J  III. 189;  Dh  54-56=Miln  333;  Dhs  605  under  ghand- 
yatanani)  :  ama°  smell  of  raw  flesh  A  1.280  ;  D  11.242  ; 
Sn  241  sq  ;  maccha°  the  scent  of  fish  J  111.52  ;  mutta- 
karisa"  the  smell  of  faeces  and  urine  A  111.158;  catu- 
jati"  four  kinds  of  scent  J  1.265;  PvA  127;  dibba-g°- 
puppha  a  flower  of  heavenly  odour  J  1.289.  —  2.  odour, 
smell    in    particular:     enumerated    as    mula°,    s5ra°, 
puppha",  etc.,  S  iii.i56=:=v.44»=A  v.22  ;  Dhs  625  (under 
ghandayatanani,     sphere     of     odours).     Specified     as 
mala",  sara°,  puppha"  under  tiiji  gandhajatani  A  1.255  '< 
—  puppha"  Dh  54  =  A  1.226.  —  3.  smell   as  olfactory 
sensation,    belonging    to    the    sphere    (ayatanani)    of 
sense-impressions  and  sensory  objects  &  enum.  in  set 
of  the  12  ajjhatta-bahirani  ayatanani  (see  under  rflpa} 
with   ghanena   gandhag   ghiyitva   "  sensing  smell   by 
means  of  the  olfactory  organ  "  D  in. 102  ;  244  =  250  = 
269  =  Nd'  on  riipa;  M  111.55,  267;  S  iv.71  ^  Vin  1.35; 
Defined  at  Vism  447.     Also  as  gandha  ghanaviiiiieyya 
under  kamaguna  M  11.42  ;  D  m.234,  etc.     In  series  of 
10  attributes  of  physical  quality  (-rupa,  etc.)  as  charac- 
teristic of  devas  D  m.146  ;  Pv  11.9'' ;  as  sara°,  pheggu", 
taca",  etc.  (nine  qualities  in  all)  in  definition  of  Gan- 
dhabba-kayika  deva  S  111.250  sq.  —  In  the  same  sense 
&    similar    connections :    vanna-g°-ras'upeto    Dh    49 , 
J    11.106;    gandhanar)    khamo   &   akkharao    (of  king's 
elephant)  A  IU-158  sq.  ;  itthi°,  purisa"  A  l.i,  2  ;  111.68 ; 
in  comb"  w.   other  four   senses   Sn   387,    759,    974.  — 
4.  perfume,    prepared    odorific    substance    used    as    a 
toilet   requisite,    either   in   form   of   an   unguent   or   a 
powder.     Abstinence  from  the  use  of  kallassthetics  is 
stated  in  the  Silas  (D  1.8)  as  characteristic  of  certain 
Wainderers  and  Brahmins.     Here  gandha  is  mentioned 
together  with  mala  (flowers,  garlands):  D  1.5=  Kh  11; 
D  1.7  (°katha)  ;  Vin  11. 123  ;  Sn  401  ;  J  1.50.  291  ;  PvA 
62.     The  use  of  scented  ointment  (-vilepana  &  aiepa, 
see  cpds.)  is  allowed  to  the  Buddhist  bhikkhus  (Vin 
1.206) ;    and   the   giving   of   this,    together   with    other 
commodities,   is   included   in   the  second   part  of  the 
deyyadhamma    (the    list   of    meritorious  gifts    to    the 
Sangha),     under    Nos.     5-14    (anna-pana-vattha-yana- 
mala-gandha-vilepana  -  seyy  -  avasatha  -  padipej^'a) :     S 
111.252;   Nd'   523=  It  65.     Out  of  this   enumeration: 
g°-m°-v°-Pv    II. 3"  ;    chatta-g°-m°-upahana    Pv    11.4*; 
11.9'" ;    m°-g°-v°   kappura-katukapphalani    J    11.416.  — 
The    application    of   scented    ointment    (gandhena    or 
gandhehi  vilimpati)  is  customary  after  a  bath,   e.   g. 
PvA  50  (on  Pv  i.io«) ;  J  1.254,  265  ;  111.277.     ^^^-  l^inds 
of  perfumes  or  scented   substances   are  given   as   g"- 
dhupa-cuijna-kappura    (incense,    powder,    camphor)    J 
1.290  ;  vasa-cunna-dhupanadi  g°  KhA  37.     See  also  cpds. 
duggandha  a  disagreeable  smell  Dhs  625 ;  °g  vayati 
to  emit  a  nasty  odour  PvA  14;  as  adj.  having  a  bad 
smell,  putrid  Sn  205;  PvA   15  (=putigandha),   f.  -i: 
duggandha  puti   vayasi    "  you   emit  a  bad   odour ") 


Gandhana 


74 


Gamana 


Pv  1.6*  (=anittha°).  -sugandha  an  agreeable  smell 
Dhs  625  ;  as  adj.  of  pleasant  smell  J  111.277  ;  Sdhp.  246. 
-apana  a  perfumery  shop  J  1.290  ;  °ika  perfume  seller 
Miln  344  ;  -ayatana  an  olfactory  sense-relation,  belonging 
to  the  six  bahirani  ayatanani,  the  objective  sensations 
D  HI. 243,  290  ;  Dhs  585,  625,  655  ;  -arammana  bearing 
on  smell,  having  smell  as  its  object  Dhs  147,  157,  365. 
410,  556,  608;  -alepa  (nt.)  anointing  with  perfumes 
Vin  1.206;  -isa  "hunger  for  odours,"  craving  for 
olfactory  sensations  Dhs  1059 ;  -odaka  scented  water 
J    1.50;    II. 106:    III. 189;    -karandaka    a    perfume-box 

5  HI. 131  ;  V.351  ;  Pug  34:  -kuti  (f.)  a  perfumed  cabin, 
name  of  a  room  or  hut  occupied  by  the  Buddha,  esp. 
that  made  for  him  by  Anathapindika  in  Jetavana 
(J  1.92).  Gotamassa  g°  J  11.416.  cp.  Av.  ^  11.40'; 
DhA  IV.203,  206 ;  -cunna  scented  (bath-)  powder  J 
III. 277 ;  -jata  (nt.)  odour,  perfume  ("  consisting  of 
smell  ").  Three  kinds  at  A  1.225  (mala°,  sara°,  pup- 
pha°) ;  enum.  as  candanadi  DhA  1.423 ;  in  detin.  of 
gandha  DA  1.77  ;  —  Dh  55  ;  -tanha  thirst  or  craving  for 
odours  (cp.  g°-asa)  Dhs  i059  =  Nd-  on  jappa ;  -tela 
scented  oil  (for  a  lamp)  J  1.61  ;  11. 104;  DhA  1.205; 
-tthena  a  perfume-thief  S  1.204;  -dhatu  the  (sensory) 
element  of  smell  Dhs  585  ;  625.  707  (in  conn.  w.  "aya- 
tana) ;  -pancangulika  see  sep.  ;  -sancetana  the  olfactory 
sensation ;  together  with  "saiifla  perception  of  odours 
D  III. 244  ;  A  IV.  147  ;  v.359  ;  -sannidhi  the  storing  up  of 
scented  unguents  D  1.6  (=DA  1.82). 

Gandhana  see  gandhina. 

Qandhabba  [Vedic  gandharva]  i.  a  musician,  a  singer 
J  11.249  sq. ;  III.188;  VvA  36,  137. — 2.  a  Gandharva 
or  heavenly  musician,  as  a  class  (see  ''kayika)  belonging 
to  the  demigods  who  inhabit  the  Catummaharajika 
realm  D  11. 2 12;  A  11.39  (as  birds);   iv.200   (with  asura 

6  uaga),  204,  207  ;  cp.  S  111.250  sq. ;  also  said  to  preside 
over  child-conception:  M  1.265  sq. ;  Miln  123  sq. 

-kayika  belonging  to  the  company  of  the  G.  S  111.250 
sq. ;  PvA  119;  -manusa  (pi.)  G.  &  men  Dh  420=^ 
Sn  644  ;  -hatthaka  "  a  G.-hand,"  i.  e.  a  wooden  instru- 
ment in  the  shape  of  a  bird's  claw  with  which  the  body 
was  rubbed  in  bathing  Vin  11. 106,  see  Vin.  Texts  111.67. 

Crandhabba  (f.)  music,  song  J  11.254;  ^'^A  139;  Miln  3; 
°r)  karoti  to  make  music  J  11.249;  "J.  188. 

Gandhara  (adj.)  belonging  to  the  Gandhara  country 
(Kandahar)  f.  gandhari  in  gandhari  vijja  N.  of  a  magical 
charm  D  1.2 13  ;  at  J  iv.498  it  renders  one  invisible. 

Gandhika  (and  °uja  Pv  ii.i'»;  11.12') — i.  having  perfume, 
fragrant,  scentful.  J  1.2O6  (su°) ;  Pv  ii.i-"  (^surabhi- 
gandha) ;  11.12'  (sogandhiya) ;  VvA  58  (read  gandhika- 
gandhikehi). — 2.  dealing  in  perfume,  a  perfumer 
Miln  262  (cp.  gandhin  2). 

Gandhin  (adj.)  i.  having  a  scent  of,  smelling  of  (-°).  i.  e. 
candana°  of  sandal  wood  J  in. 190;  gutha  of  feecca 
Pvii.3'5  (=karisavayinIPvA).  — 2.  dealing  with  scents, 
a  perfumer  PvA  127  (=magadha  ;  cp.  gandhika  2). 

Gandhina  in  kule  antiraacjandhina  J  iv.34  (expl.  by  sabba- 
paccliimaka)  and  gandhana  in  kula-gandhana  It  64  see 
under  kula°. 

Gabbita  (adj.)  proud,  arrogant  J  11.340  (°bhava=issariya) ; 
111.264  ('sabliavai=dittasabhava) ;  Sum.  V.  on  D  111.15^ 
(  =  avaniata). 

Gabbha  [Vedic  garbha,  either  to  *Kelbh,  as  in  Lat.  galba, 
Goth,  kalbo,  Ohg.  kalba,  E.  calf,  or  *gue  bh,  as  in  Gr! 
hXfi'r  womb,  oiifX'/ii'ir  sharing  the  womb,  brother, 
SiKipni  young  pig  ;  cp,  *gelt  in  Goth.  kil(<ei  womb  Ags. 
cild,  Ger.  kind,  E.  child.  jMcaning :  a  cavity,  a  hollow, 
or,  seen  from  its  outside,  a  swelling]  1.  interior,  cavity 
(loc.  gabbhe  in  the  midst  of :  angara°  J  111.55) ;  an  inner 
room,  private  chamber,  bedroom,  cell.  Of  a  Vihara: 
Vin   11.303;   111.119;    1V.45;   VvA    188;   220;  —  J   1.90 


(siri°    royal    chamber);    in. 276;    Vv    78'    (=ovaraka 

VvA  304) ;  DhA  1397  :  Miln  10,  295.  See  also  anto°.  — 
2.  the  swelling  of  the  (pregnant)  womb,  the  womb  (cp. 
kucchi).  °ij  upeti  to  be  born  Dh  32  5  =  Th  1,  17  = 
Nett  34,  129:  °r)  upapajjati  to  be  boin  again  Dh  126; 
gabbha  gabbhag  .  .  .  dukkar)  nigacchanti  from  womb 
to  womb  (i.  e.  from  birth  to  birth)  Sn  278;  gabbhato 
patthaya  from  the  time  of  birth  J  1.290,  293.  As  a 
symbol  of  defilement  g.  is  an  ep.  of  kama  A  iv.289,  etc. 
—  3.  the  contents  of  the  womb,  i.  e.  the  embryo, 
foetus :  dasa  mase  "r)  kucchina  pariharitva  having 
nourished  the  fcetus  in  the  womb  for  lo  months  D  11  14  ; 
dibba  gabbha  D  1.229;  o"  S-  as  contained  in  kucchi, 
foetus  in  utero,  sec  J  1.50  (kucchimhi  patitfhito)  134; 
11.2;  iv.482  ;  M  1.265;  Miln  123  (gabbhassa  avak- 
kanti) ;  DhA  1.3,  47  ;  11. 261.  —  Pv  1.6'  ;  PvA  31  ;  ^vbVho 
vutthasi  the  child  was  delivered  Vin  11.278  ;  itthi-gabbao 
&  purisa"  female  &  male  child  J  151  ;  gabbhag  pSteti  to 
destroy  the  foetus  Vin  11.268;  apagatagabbha  (adj.) 
having  had  a  miscarriage  Vin  11.129;  mulha-gabbha 
id.  M  11.102  (-f  visata") ;  paripmiija-gabbha  ready  to  be 
delivered  J  1.52  ;  PvA  86 ;  sanni°  a  conscious  foetus 
D  1.54  =  M  1.518=5  111.212  ;  sannisinna-gabbha  having 
conceived  Vin  11.278. 

-avakkanti  (gabbhe  okkanti  Nd-  304')  conception 
D  111.103,  231  ;  Vism  499,  500  (°okkanti) ;  this  is  followed 
by  gabbhe  thiti  &  gabbhe  vut^hana,  see  Nd- ;  -asaya 
the  impurities  of  childbirth  Pv  111.5'  (=°mala); 
-karana  effecting  a  conception  Sn  927;  -gata  leaving 
the  womb,  in  putte  gabbhagate  when  the  child  was 
born  Pv.\  112;  -dvara  the  door  of  the  bed-chamber 
J  1.62;  -pariharana  =  next  Vism  500:  -parihara  "the 
protection  of  the  embryo,"  a  ceremony  performed  when 
a  woman  became  pregnant  J  11.2  ;  DhA  1.4  ;  -patana  the 
destruction  of  the  embryo,  abortion,  an  abortive  pre- 
paration Vin  III. 83  sq.  ,  Pv  1.6"  (akariri) ;  PvA  31 
(dQpesi) ;  DhA  1.47  ("bhesajja) ;  -mala  the  uncleanness 
of  delivery,  i.  e.  all  accompanying  dirty  matter  PvA 
80,  173  (as  food  for  Petas),  198;  DhA  iv.215;  -visa  in 
ahafic'  amhi  gabbhaviso  "  I  am  20  years,  counting  from 
my  conception  "  Vin  1.93  ;  -vutthana  (nt.)  childbirth, 
delivery  J  1.52;  DhA  1.399;  ii-26i  ;  -seyya  (f.)  the 
womb ;  only  in  e.xpressions  relating  to  reincarnation, 
as :  na  punar  eti  (or  upeti)  gabbhaseyyai)  "  he  does  not 
go  into  another  womb,"  of  an  Arahant  Sn  29,  152, 
535  '.  Vv  53^^  :  and  gabbhaseyyaka  (adj.)  one  who  enters 
another  womb  Vbh  413  sq. ;  Vism  272,  559,  560; 
Bdhd  77,  78. 

Gabbhara  (nt.)  [Derivation  uncertain.     Cp.  Sk.  gahvara] 

a  cavern  Sn  416  (giri°) ;  Vv  63*  (giri°). 

GabbhinI  (adj.  f.)  pregnant,  enceinte  Vin  11.268 ;  S  111.202  ; 
J  1.151,  290;  iv.37 ;  Pv  1.6';  PvA  31,  82:  VvA  no 
(-bhava) ;  in  comb"  g"  payamana  purisantaragata 
(pregnant,  lactating  &  having  had  sex.  intercourse) 
A  1. 295=11. 2o6  =  M  1.77,  238,  307,  342  =  Pug  55;  with 
utuni  anutuni  (menstruating  &  having  ceased  to 
menstruate)  A  H1.226  sq. 

°6ama  1.  adj.  going,  able  to  go;  going  to,  leading  to ;  in 
vihangama  going  in  the  air  Sn  221,  606;  Th  1.H08  : 
J  1.216  (cp.  gamana);  aghasi°  id.  Vv  16'  (=vehasa5'' 
^'vA  78);  nabhasi"  going  on  clouds  Sn  687;  nibbana" 
leading  to  N.  S  v.i  1  ;  durar)"  going  far,  hadayag"  going 
to  one's  heart,  q.  v.  —  2.  m.  course,  going  to  ;  in  attharj" 
going  home,  going  to  rest,  etc.,  q.  v. 

Gamana  1.  (nt.)  the  fact  or  the  state  of  going,  movement, 
journey,  walk  ;  (-")  striving  for,  the  leading  of,  pursuit 
A  II. 48  sq.  (gamanena  na  pattabbo  lokass'  anto  =  one 
cannot  walk  to  the  end  of  the  world)  ;  Dh  178  (saggassa 
going  to  heaven);  Sn  40,  691,  cp.  varar)°  ;  J  1.62  ;  216 
(in  expl.  of  vihaggama  :  (akase)  gamanato  pakkhi  vihaij 
gama  ti  vuccanti)  ;  295  ;  PvA  57.  —  pahina"  going  on 
messages  D  1.5,  etc.  ;  agati"  wrong  pursuit,  °i)  gacchati 
to  pursue  a  wrong  walk  of  life  A  11. 18  ;  PvA  161  ;  magga" 


Gamaniya 


75 


Garuka 


tramping,  being  on  the  road  PvA  43  ;  saraija"  finding 
shelter  (in  the  Dhamma)  PvA  49. — 2.  (adj.)  (-°)  going 
or  leading  to,  conducive  to:  nibbina"  maggo  the  Path 
leading  to  NibbSna  S  1.186;  Dh  289;  duggati"  raagga 
the  road  to  misery  Th  2,  355  ;  duggamana-tJhana  (pi.) 
inaccessible  places  PvA  102  (in  expl.  of  dugga). 

-antaraya  an  obstacle  to  one's  departure  J  1.62  ; 
-agamana  going  &  coming,  rise  and  set  Vv  83*  (  =  oga- 
manuggamana  V'vA  326) ;  DhA  i.8o  (°kale) ;  °sampanna 
senasana  a  dwelling  or  lodging  fit  for  going  and 
coming,  i.  e.  easily  accessible  A  v.15  ;  J  1.85  ;  "g  karoti 
to  go  to  and  fro  VvA  139.  -kamma  going  away  DhA 
11.81.  -karana  a  reason  for  cr  a  means  to  going,  in  °i) 
karoti  to  try  to  go  J  1.2  ;  -bhava  the  state  of  having 
gone  away  J  11. 133;  -magga  (pleonastic)  the  way  J 
1.202  ;  2  79 ;  -vanna  the  praise  of  his  course  or  journey 
J  1.87. 

Qamaniya  (adj.;  grd  to  gam)  1.  as  grd.  to  gacchati:  (a 
place  where  one)  ought  to  go ;  in  a°  not  to  be  gone  to 
(+thana)  VvA  72.  —  2.  as  grd.  to  gameti:  in  bhoga 
pahaya  gamaniya  (riches  that  have)  to  be  given  up  (by 
leaving)  Kh  viii.S  (see  expl.  as  KhA  223);  PvA  87 
(=  kahka,  transient). 

Qamika  (and  gamiya  J  1.87)  (adj.)  going  away,  setting 
out  for  a  journey  (opp.  agantuka  coming  back)  appl.  to 
bhikkhus  only :  Vin  1.292  (°  bhatta  food  for  outgoing 
bh.) ;  11.170  (agantuka"),  211,  265;  v. 196;  J  vi.333 
(agantuka°).  See  also  under  abhisankh&ra.  Cp.  Av 
§  1.87 ;  Divy  50. 

Qamina  (adj.)  being  on  a  "  gati,"  oiJy  at  Sn  587  in  "  sAfie 
pi  passe  gamine  yathakamm'  upage  nare." 

(Hmeti  [cans,  of  gacchati]  to  make  go,  to  send,  to  set  into 
motion,  to  cause  to  go  It  1 1 5  (anabhavar)  to  destroy), 
see  under  gacchati. 

Qambhlra  (adj.)  [Vedic  gambhira  &  gabhira]  deep,  pro- 
found, unfathomable,  well  founded,  hard  to  perceive, 
difficult.  —  (a)  ht.  of  lakes  :  Dh  83  ;  Pv  ii.ii'  (  =  agadha) ; 
Pug  46 ;  of  a  road  (full  of  swamps)  J  1.196.  —  (b)  fig. 
of  knowledge  &  wisdom :  dhammo  g.  duddaso  .  .  . 
M  1.487  ;  S  1.136;  Tathagato  g.  appameyyo  duppariyo- 
gaho  M  1.487 ;  parisa  g.  (opp.  utt4na,  shallow,  super- 
ficial, thoughtless)  A  1.70;  g.  (hSna  w.  ref.  jhana,  etc. 
Ps  11.21;  saddhamma  g.  Sdhp.  530;  g.  gulha  nipuna 
Nd  342  ;  lokan&tho  nipuijo  g.  PvA  i  ;  also  w.  nipuQa 
J  VI. 355  ;  Miln  234  ;  Bdhd.  118,  137  ;  —  (nt.)  the  deep  ; 
deep  ground,  i.  e.  secure  foundation  Sn  173 ;  Kh  viii.i, 
3  (see  KhA  217). 

-avabhasa  (adj.)  having  the  appearance  of  depth  or 
profundity,  D  11.55;  S  11.36;  Pug  46  (-HuttSna).  cp. 
Pug  A  226 ;  -paAfla  one  whose  wisdom  is  profound 
Sn  176,  230;  627  — Dh  403  ( -)- medhavin)  cp.  DhA 
IV.169  &  see  Ps  II. 192  for  detailed  explanation;  -sita 
resting  on  depth  (of  soil),  well-founded  A  iv.237. 

Oambhlrati  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  prec.]  depth  DhA  1.92. 

Oanuna  (adj.)  [fr.  gama.  Vedic  gramya]  of  or  belonging 
to  the  village,  common,  pagan  (cp.  Fr.  villain),  always 
comb"*  with  hina,  low  &  pagan  Vin  i.io  and  rs  (anta, 
standard  of  life);  A  111.325  (dassana,  view);  D  111.130 
(sukhallikdnuyoga,  hedonist)  Sdhp  254.  Cp.  pothuj- 
janika. 

Oayha  (adj.)  [grd.  of  gayhati ;  Vedic  grahya]  to  be  taken,  to 
be  seized,  as  nt,  the  grip,  in  gayhupaga  (adj.)  for  being 
taken  up,  for  common  use  SnA  283.  —  (nt.)  that  which 
comes  into  one's  grasp,  movable  property,  acquisition 
of  property  DhA  11.29;  111.119;  PvA  4.  As  gayhu- 
pakai)  at  J  iv.219. 

Qayhaka  (adj.  =  gayha)  one  who  is  to  be  taken  (prisoner), 
in  "niyyamana  id.  S  1.143  =  }  in. 361  (expl.  as  kara- 
maragahag  gahetva  niyyaniana ;  cp.  kciramara). 


Oayhati  [Pass,  to  gaijhati]  to  get  seized,  to  be  taken  (see 
ganhati) ;  p.pres.  gayhamana  being  caught  DhA  111.175 
(°ka).  —  grd.  gayha. 

Garahaka  (adj.)  finding  fault  with,  rebuking;  in  pathavi° 
apa°,  etc.,  comb"*  w.  pathavi-jigucchaka,  etc.  (dis- 
gusted w.  the  great  elements)  M  1.327. 

Qarahava  (nt.)  reproof  VvA  16,  as  f.  "^a  at  Vism  29. 

Oarahati  [Vedic  garhati  Dhtp  340  nind^yarj]  to  reproach, 
to  blame,  scold,  censure,  find  fault  with :  agaraluyam 
ma  garahittha  "  do  not  blame  the  blameless  "  S  1.240 ; 
D  1. 161  (tapag  to  reject,  disapprove  of);  D  111.92,  93 
(aor.  garahi,  grd.  garahitabba) ;  Sn  313,  665;  Miln  222 
(-l-jigucchanti) ;  PvA  125,  126;  Sdhp.  382.  —  pp. 
garahita  blameworthy  Dh  30  (pamado) ;  Sn  313; 
J  V.453  ;  Miln  288  (dcisa  puggala  g.).  agarahita  blame- 
less, faultless  PvA  89  (=anindita.  131).  —  See  also 
garayha  &  cp.  vi°. 

Garahi  (f)  blame,  reproach  D  1. 135  "  stating  an  example," 
see  DA  1.296;  D  111.92,  93;  Sn  141;  J  i.io  (garaha- 
paticchadanabhava  preventing  all  occasion  for  finding 
fault) ;  132  (garaha-bhaya-bhita  for  fear  of  blame),  135 
(garaiiatthe  as  a  blame) ;  Nett  184. 

Qarahin  (adj.)  blaming,  censuring  Sn  660  (ariya°),  778 
(atta"),  913  (anatta");  Miln  380  (papa°). 

Gam  [Vedic  guru ;  Gr.  liapic,  Lat.  gravis  &  brutus,  Goth. 
kaurus]  i.  adj.  (a)  lit.  heavy,  opp.  lahu  Ught,  appl'' 
to  bhara,  a  load  S  111.26;  J  1.196  (=bliirika);  vi.420 ; 
DhA  1.48  ;  Sdhp  494  (riipagarubhara  the  heavy  load  of 
"  form  ").  Compar.  garutara  (as  against  Sk.  gariyai)) 
PvA  191.  —  (b)  fig.  important,  to  be  esteemed,  valued 
or  valuable  A  111. 110  sq.  (piya  manapa  g.  bhavaniya) ; 
c.  gen.  or  -"  bent  on  (often  in  sequence  °garu,  °ninna 
°pona,  etc.,  e.  g.  Vism  135);  pursuing,  paying  homage 
to,  reverent ;  (or)  esteemed  by,  honoured,  venerated : 
Satthugaru  esteeming  the  Lord ;  Dhamma",  Sanghe 
g.  A  iii.33i  =  iv.28  sq. ;  dosa°  S  1.24;  kodha°,  sad- 
dhamma" (pursuing,  fostering)  A  11.46  sq.  =  84  sq.  ; 
Sdhp  I  (sabba-loka"  worshipped  by  all .  the  world) ; 
Dpvs  IV.  12.  —  agaru  (c.  gen.)  irreverent  towards  Sn 
p.  51  (Gotamassa).  Cp.  garuka,  garava;  also  agaru  & 
agalu.  —  2.  N.  a  venerable  person,  a  teacher :  garunar) 
dassanaya  A  sakasag  Sn  325,  326  (v.  1.  garunag  to  be 
preferred,  so  also  SnA  332,  333) ;  gariinai)  dara  It  36. 
—  garukaroti  (for  ganii)  k°)  to  esteem,  respect,  honour ; 
usually  in  series  sakkaroti  g°  maneti  pujeti  Vin  11,162  ; 
M  1. 31  ;  D  1.91  ;  A  111.76;  iv.276;  Nd'  334  (on  namati), 
530  (on  yasassin) ;  FVA  54.  Expl.  at  DA  1.256  by 
garavag  karoti.  —  garukatabba  worthy  of  esteem 
PvA  9.  —  garukara  (sakk<ira  g.  manana  vandana) 
esteem,  honour,  regard  Pug  i9  =  I)hs  112 1.  —  See  also 
guru. 

-upanissita  (adj.)  depending  on  a  teacher,  one  being 
taught  Ps  11.202  ;  -(^aniya  one  who  takes  the  place  of  a 
teacher  A  111.21,  393  ;  .Nett  8;  Vism  344.  -dhamnu 
a  rule  to  be  observed.  There  are  8  ciiief  rules  enum. 
at  Vin  11.255  =  A  iv.276,  280;  see  also  Vin  iv.51,  315; 
v.  136.  Taken  in  the  sense  of  a  violation  of  these  rules 
Vin  1.49=11.226;  1.52,  143,  144;  11.279;  -nissaya  in 
°r)  ganhati  to  take  up  dependency  on  a  teacher,  i.  e. 
to  consider  oneself  a  pupil  Vin  11.303 ;  -sajjvasa 
association  with  a  teacher  Nd'  235  4^" ;  Miln  408. 

Qarnka  [from  gam]  somewhat  heavy. — 1.  lit.  J  1.134  (of 
the  womb  in  pregnancy);  Dh  310;  Miln  102.  Usually 
coupled  &  contrasted  with  lahuka,  lighi :  in  def.  of 
sense  of  touch  Dhs  648 ;  similarly  w.  sithila,  dhanita, 
digha,  rassa  Miln  344;  DA  1.177  ('°  expl.  of  dasavidha 
vyaiijana).  —  2.  fig.  (a)  heavy,  grave,  serious  esp.  appl"* 
to  —  apatti,  breach  of  regulations,  offence  (opp.  lahuka) 
Vin  V.115,  130,  I j5,  153:  Dh  138  (ibadha,  illness); 
appl'  to  kanuna  at  Vism  601  (one  of  the  four  kinds); 
nt.  as  adv.  considerably  Miln  92   (°i)  parinamati).  — 


Garutta 


76 


Gajayati 


(b)  important,  venerable,  worthy  of  reverence  Th  2, 
308  (Satthu  sasana=garukatabba  ThA  251);  Miln 
140.  —  (c)  -"  "  heavy  on,"  bent  on,  attaching  import- 
ance to;  nahana°  fond  of  bathing  Vin  1.196;  tadattha" 
engaged  in  (jhana)  Nd^  264 ;  kamma°  attributing  im- 
portance to  k.  Nd*  411  ;  saddhamma"  revering  the 
Doctrine  Sdhp.  520.  Nibbana-garuka  Vism  117  (  +  N- 
adhimutta  &  N-pabbhara). 

-apatti    a    grievous    offence,   see    above.     As  terasa 
g-°ino  at  Mihi  310. 

Gamtta  (nt.)  the  fact  of  being  honoured  or  considered 
worthy  of  esteem,  honourableness  A  v.  164  sq. 

Qani}a  [Derivation  uncertain.  Sk.  garu^a,  Lat.  volucer 
winged,  volo  to  fly].  N.  of  a  mythical  bird,  a  harpy 
Ps  II.  196= Nd' 235.  3  q.  ;  Vism  206;  VvAg  (=suvani3a) ; 
DhA  1. 144. 

Gala  [*gel  to  devour,  to  swallow=Lat.  gula,  Ohg. 
kela.  cp.  Sk.  gala  jaluka,  and  *ggel,  as  Gr.  HKfop, 
cp.  also  Sk.  girati,  gilati  Dhtp  262  gives  as  meaning  of 
gal  "  adana."  This  root  gal  also  occurs  at  Vism  410 
in  fanciful  def.  of  "  puggsda  "  ;  the  meaning  here  is  not 
exactly  sure  (to  cry,  shout  ?)]  the  throat  J  1.2 16,  264, 
111.26;  IV. 494;  1.194  (^  dewlap);  PvA  11,  104. 

-agga  the  top  of  the  throat  Sdhp  379  ;  -ajjhoharaniya 
able  to  be  swallowed  (of  solid  food)  Dhs  646,  740.  875 ; 
-ggaha  taking  by  the  throat,  throttling  D  1. 144  ( +  danda- 
pah?ra)  ;  -naji  the  larynx  DhA  1.253;  '1-257; 
-ppamana  (adj.)  going  up  to  the  neck  J  1.264  (avafa) ; 
-pariyosana  forming  the  end  of  the  throat  J  111.126; 
-ppavedhaka  (nt.)  pain  in  the  throat  M  1.371  ;  -mula 
the  bottom  of  the  throat  PvA  283.  -vataka  the 
bottom  (?)  of  the  throat  (oesophagus?)  Vism  185,  258. 
Note. — gala  with  many  other  words  containing  a 
guttural +  Uquid  element  belongs  to  the  onomatopoetic 
roots  kl  gl  (kr  gr),  usually  reduphcated  (iterative),  the 
main  appUcarions  of  which  are  the  following : 

1.  The  (sounding)  throat  in  designation  of  swallowing, 
mostly  with  a  dark  (guttural)  vowel :  gulp,  belch, 
gargle,  gurgle. 

2.  The  sound  produced  by  the  throat  (voice)  or 
sound  in  general,  particularly  of  noises  or  sounds  either 
inarticulate,  confused  &  indehnable  or  natural  sounds 
striking  enough  per  se  to  form  a  sufficient  means  ol 
recognition  (i.  e.  name)  of  the  animal  which  utters  thi". 
sound  (cuckoo,  e.  g.).     To  be  divided  into: 

A.  palatal  group  ("  hght  "  soundo) :  squeak,  yell 
giggle,  etc.,  applied  to  — (n)  Animate  Nature:  tho 
cackhng,  crowing  noise  of  Palmipeds  (it  related  birds, 
reminding  of  laughter  (heron,  hen,  cock ;.  cp.  P.  koiica. 
Lat.  gaUus)  —  (6)  Inanimate  Nature :  the  grinding, 
nibbUng,  trickhng,  dripping,  fizzing  noises  or  sounds 
(P.  galati,  etc.). 

B.  guttural  group  ("  dark  "  sounds) ;  groan,  growl, 
howl,  etc.,  appl'  to  —  (a)  Animate  N.  :  the  snorting, 
grunting  noise  of  the  Pachyderms  &  related  quadrupeds 
(elephant,  op.  P.  koiica,  kuiijara  ;  pig,  boar)  —  (6)  Inani- 
mate N. :  the  roaring,  crashing,  thundering  noises  (P. 
galagalayati,  ghurughurayati). 

3.  The  sound  as  indicating  motion  (produced  by 
motion) : 

A.  palatal  group  ("  sharp  "  sounds,  characteristic  of 
quick  motion :  whizz,  spin,  whirl) :  P.  gaggaraka  whirl- 
pool, Gr.  «pri(;  spindle,  bobbin. 

B.  guttural  group  ("  dull  "  sounds,  characteristic  of 
slow  and  heavy  motion :  roll,  thud,  thunder).  Some- 
times with  eUmination  of  the  sound-element  appl"*  to 
swelling  &  fullness,  as  in  "  bulge "  or  Gr.  t!(paf,ayi.o 
(be  full). 

These  three  categories  are  not  always  kept  clearly 
separate,  so  that  often  a  palatal  group  shifts  into  the 
sphere  of  a  guttural  one  «i  vice  versa.  —  The  formation 
of  1^1  gj  roots  is  by  no  means  an  extinct  process, 
nor  is  it  restricted  to  any  special  branch  of  a  linguistic 


family,  as  examples  show.  The  main  roots  of  Idg. 
origin  are  the  foil,  which  are  all  represented  in  Pali  — 
(the  categories  are  marked  ace.  to  the  foregoing  scheme 
I,  2 A,  2B,  3)  :  kal  (2 A) :  jcXu^ik,  clango,  Goth,  hlahjan 
laugh ;  k&r  (2  A) :  uripvK.  Sk.  karu  (cp.  P.  kitti), 
carmen ;  kel  (2  A) :  ice\/iouc,  calo  (cp.  P.  kandati), 
Ohg.  hellan ;  ker  (2  A'):  tapicaipu>,  ro())copo£=quer- 
quedula=  kakkara  (partridge);  kol  (2  B) :  cuculus, 
kokila  (a) ;  kolahala  and  halahala  (b) ;  kor  (2  B') : 
cornix  (cp.  P.  kaka),  corvus  =  crow  =  raven  ;  Sk.  kroSati  ; 
P.  koiica. — gael  (l)  Lat.  gula,  glutio,  SiXenp;  gaV: 
(i)  jiiipoQ,  iJifipwoKw,  Lat.  voro,  Sk.  girati,  Ohg. 
querka ;  (3)  liapaSpov  (whirlpool)  Sk.  gargara :  gel 
(i)  Sk.  gilati,  Ohg.  kela  —  gal  (2  A) :  gallus  (a)  gloria 
(6) ;  gar  (2  A'") :  ynpi'i,  garrulus,  Ohg.  kara :  gel  (2  A) : 
xe\tSuiv  (a)  hirrio  (to  whine),  Ohg.  gellan  (b) ;  gs : 
(i)  yapyapit<a  (gargle)  Sk.  gharghara  (gurgling). 
(2  A*)  ■yf'pniof  =  crane,  Ger.  krahen.  Lat.  gracillo 
(cackle) ;  (2  B')  Ohg.  kerran  (grunt),  Sk.  gnjati  (sing) ; 
(2  A'')  Sk.  jarate  (rustle) ;  gur  (2  B") :  ypi'?iu  =  grundio= 
grunt ;  Lat.  gurgulio ;  Sk.  ghurghura. 

With  special  reference  to  Pah  formations  the  foil, 
list  shows  a  few  sound  roots  which  are  further  discussed 
in  the  Dictionary  s.  v.  Closely  connected  with  Idg.  kl 
gl  is  the  Pali  cerebral  t,  th,  I,  r.,  so  that  roots  with  these 
sounds  have  to  be  classed  in  a  mutual  relation  with  the 
Uquids.  In  most  cases  graphic  representation  varies 
between  both  (cp.  gala  &  gala)  —  kil  (kin)  (2  A"*) :  kiki 
(cp.  Sk.  krka"),  kilikilayati  &  kinkiijayati  (tinkle), 
kih  (cUck),  kinkaijika  (bell) ;  kur  (2  B) :  akurati  to  hawk, 
to  be  hoarse;  khat  (i)  khatakhata  (hawking), 
kakacchati  (snore) ;  (2  A')  kukkuta  (cock) ;  gal  (i)  gala 
(throat)  uggilati  (vomit) ;  (2  A*")  geilati  (trickle) :  (2  B^) 
Pk.  galagajjiya  (roar)  &  guluguUya  (bellow) ;  (2  B'') 
galagalayati  (roar)  ;  gar  (2  A) ;  gaggara  (roar  &  cackle, 
cp.  Sk.  gargara  to  3) ;  (2  B) ;  gaggarayati  (roar) ;  (3)  gag- 
garaka (whirlpool);  ghar  (i)  Sk.  gharghara  (gurghng) ; 
(2  A")  gharati  (trickle),  Sk.  ghargharika  (bell) ;  (2  B"-) 
ghurughurayati  (grunt).  —  See  also  kakaca,  kanka, 
kankana,  cakora  (cankora),  cakkavaka.  jagghati,  citi- 
citayati,  tatatatayati,  timingala,  papphasa. 

Qalaka  (ut.)  throat  J  ni.481  ;  IV.251. 

Ga)a  [same  as  gala,  see  note  on  prec]  I.  a  drop,  i.  e.  a 
fall:  see  gajagala. — 2.  a  swelling,  a  boil  (  =  ga.jx^a.) 
J  IV. 494  (matta  gaja  bhinnagala  elephants  in  rut,  with 
the  temple-swelhngs  broken  ;  expl.  p.  497  by  madai) 
galanta) ;  Sn  61  (?  v.  1.  gaijda).  —  3.  a  hook,  a  fish- 
hook Sn  01  (?),  expl.  at  SnA  114  by  aka441ianavasena 
ba|iso. 

galagalai]  gacchati  to  go  from  drop  to  drop,  i.  e. 
from  fall  to  fall,  w.  ref.  to  the  gatis  J  v.453  (expl.  by 
apayar)  gacchati). 

Galagalayati  r  =  gaggarayati,  see  note  on  galaj  to  roar,  to 
Clash,  to  thunder;  deve  gajagalayate  (loc.  abs.)  in  a 
thunderstorm,  usually  as  deve  vassante  deve  g°  amidst 
rain  and  heavy  thunder  D  11. 132  ;  S  l.icb;  A  V.114  sq. 
(gala");  Th  i,  i8g;  Miln  116  (gaganag  ravati  galag") ; 
KhA  1O3  (mahamegha). — Ganga  galagalanti  the 
roaring  Ganga  Miln  122  (cp.  halahalasadda  ibid.). 

Galati  (and  galati)  [Sk.  galati,  cp.  Ohg.  queUan  to  well  up, 
to  flow  out ;  see  note  on  gala  and  cp.  also  jala  water] 
I.  to  drip,  flow,  trickle  (trs.  &  intr.)  Vin  1.204  (nattiiu 
g.) ;  M  1.336  (sisar)  lohitena  gajati) ;  J  iv.497  (madag) ; 
IV. 3  (lohitar)  g.) ;  v. 472  (do.  v.  1.  paggharati) ;  Pv  rv.5* 
(assukani  g.).  —  2.  to  rain  Th  1,  524  (deve  gajantamhi 
in  a  shower  of  rain.  Cp.  gala-galayati).  —  3.  to  drop 
down,  to  fall  DhA  11. 146  (suriyo  majjhatthanato  galito). 
—  Cp.  pari". 

Galayati  [denoni.  to  gala  in  sense  of  gajati  i]  to  drip,  to 
drop,  in  assukani  g.  to  shed  tears  Sn  691. 


Ga)ita 


77 


Gahapati 


Oa)ita  rough,  in  a°  smooth  J  v.203,  206  (  +  mudu  &  akak-   I 
kasa) ;  vi.64. 

OslocI  (i)-  N.  of  a  shrub  (Cocculus  cordifolius) ;  in 
galocilata  UhA  iii.iio;  a  creeper.     Cp.  putilata. 

(}ava°  base  of  the  N.  go,  a  bull,  cow,  used  in  cpds.  See 
gav°,  go. 

•aghatana  slaughtering  of  cows  Vin  1.182  ;  -assa  cows 
&  horses  Vin  v.350  ;  D  i.5~;  Sn  769;  -canda  tierce 
towards  cows  Pug  47  ;  -pana  milky  rice  pudding  J  1.33  ; 
-(°m)pati  "  lord  of  cows,"  a  bull  Sn  26,  27  (usabha). 

OsVBCCtaita  furnished  with  netting  (?)  (Hardy  in  Index) 
VvA  276,  of  a  carriage  (  =  suvaMvajalavitata). 

Qavtis  see  gavaya. 

Otvaya  (and  gavaja)  a  species  of  ox,  the  gayal  [Sk. 
gavaya,  cp.  gavala,  bufialo]  J  v. 406.  (°ja=  khagga) ; 
Miln  149;  DhsA  331. 

Qavi  a  tree-like  creeper,  in  -pphala  the  fruit  of  a  g.  Sn 
239  (  =  rukkhavalliphala  SnA). 

'OaveMkka  (adj.  fr.  next)  looking  for,  seeking  J  1.176 
(karaua") ;  11.3  (agui>a°). 

Oavesati  [gava-l-  esati.  Vedic  gavesate.  Origin,  to  search 
after  cows.  Dhtp  29^=inaggana  tracking]  to 
seek,  to  search  lor.  to  wish  for,  strive  after  Dh  146 
(gavessatha),  153  :  Th  i,  183 ;  Nd^  2,  70,  427  ;  J  1.4,  Oi  ; 
Miln  326  ;  PvA  187,  202  (aor.  gavesi  =  vicini) ;  Bdhd  53. 
In  Nd'  always  in  comb"  esati  gavesati  pariyesati. 

Oaveta&B  search  for  PvA  185. 

Oavesin  (adj.)  seeking,  looking  for,  striving  after  (usually 
-°)  D  1.95  (taua°,  etc.) ;  Dh  99  (kama°),  245  (suci°),  355 
(para°) ;  iSid^  503  (in  expl.  of  mahesi,  with  esin  & 
pariyesin) ;  Bdhd  59. 

OaBSfitai]  at  UhsA  324  is  to  be  coiTected  into  dassetuQ. 

QahA^  [see  under  gaijhati]  a  house,  usually  in  cpds.  (sec 
below).     J  111.39O  (  =  the  layman's  life;  Cora.  geha). 

-karaka  a  house-builder,  metaph.  of  tai.iha  (cp.  kaya 
as  geha)  Dh  153,  i54=Th  i,  183.  184;  DhA  111.128; 
-kufa  the  peak  of  a  house,  the  ridge-pole,  metaph.  of 
ignorance  Dh  154  (=kaijijika-mandala  DhA  128), 
replacing  thuijira  (pillar)  at  Th  1,  184  in  corresp. 
passage  ( =  kaoinika  Com.) ;  -(tha  a  house- 
holder, one  who  leads  the  life  of  a  layman  (opp. 
anagara,  pabbajita  or  paribbajaka)  Vin  1.115  (saga- 
hattha  pansa  an  assembly  in  which  laymen  were 
present);  S  1.201;  A111.114,  116,258;  It.  112  (gliarag 
csino  gahaUha)  Dh  404=  Sn  628;  Sn  43  (gharar)  ava- 
santo,  see  Nd^  226  for  explanation),  9),  134  (paribba- 
jag  gahafthar)  va)  398,  487;  Sdhp  375.  -%alta  a 
layman's  rule  of  conduct  Sn  393  (  =  agariya  pafipada 
SnA  376)  -"ka  belonging  to  a  layman  ;  acting  as  a  lay- 
man cr  in  the  quality  of  a  1.  A  11.35  (kinkaraijiya^ui), 
111.296  (brahmacariya) ;  -pati  see  sep. 

Qaba'  [Sk.  graha,  ganhati,  q  v.  for  etym.]  "  seizer." 
seizing,  grasping,  a  demon,  any  being  or  object  having 
a  hold  upon  man.  So  at  S  1.21)8  where  Sanu  is  *'  seized  " 
by  an  epileptic  fit  (see  note  in  K.i>.  1.267,  268).  Used 
of  dosa  (anger)  Dh  251  (excniplilied  at  DhA  in. 362  by 
ajagara"  the  grip  of  a  boa,  kumbhila"  of  a  cmcodile, 
yakkha°  of  a  demon),  sagaha  having  crocodiles,  full 
of  e.  (of  the  ocean)  ( -I- sarakkliasa)  It  57.  Cp.  gahana 
&  sar)°. 

Oahaoa  [fr.  ganhati]  (adj.)  seizing,  taking;  acquiring;  (n.) 
seizure,  grasp,  hold,  acquisition  Vism  114  (in  detail). 
Usually  -° :  uama°-divabe  on  the  day  on  which  a  child 
gets  its  name  (Ut.  acquiring  a  name)  J  1.199.  2*2; 
arahatta"  DhA  1.8;  dussa"  DhA  11.87,  maccha"  J 
IV. 139;  hattha"  J  1.294;  byanjana°lakkhana  Nett  27. 
gahaijatthaya  in  order  to  get  .  J  1.279;  "-SS^-  — 
amhakar)  g°  sugahanar)  we  have  a  tight  grip  J  1.222,  223. 


Gahaoi  (f)  the  "  seizer,"  a  supposed  organ  of  the  body 
dialing  with  digestion  and  gestation.  Sama-vepa- 
kiniya  g°  iya  samannagata  "  endowed  with  good 
digestion"  D  11.177=  iii. 166.  Same  phrase  at 
Av  S  1.168,  172.     Cp.  Vedic  graha.     B.  Psy.  59,  67. 

Gahanika  in  phrase  sarjsuddha-gahanika  coming 
from  a  cleam  womb,  of  pure  descent,  in  the  enum.  of 
the  indispensable  good  qualities  of  a  brahmin  or  a  noble 
D  1.113,  115,  137  (gahani  expl.  as  kucchi  DA  1.281) ; 
A  H63,  :ii.i54.  223;  Sn  p.  115.  J  1.2;  duttha-gaha- 
nika  having  a  bad  digestion  Vin  1.206. 
Gahana  [Sk.  gahana,  cp.  also  ghana]  i.  adj.  deep,  thick, 
impervious,  only  in  a°  clear,  unobstructed,  free  from 
obstacles  Vv  18'  (akanataka-(- ) ;  Miln  16c.  (gahanar)  a° 
katar)  the  thicket  is  cleared).  —  2.  nt.  an  impenetrable 
place,  a  thicket  jungle,  tangle.  —  (a)  18  gahanani  at 
J  V.46  :  usually  appl.  to  grass:  tina°  A  1.153=111.128 
(-frukkha°);  Miln  369;  adj.  tiiiagahana  obstructed 
with  grass  (of  vihara)  Vin  11.138;  — S  1.199  (rukkha- 
mula°);  J  1.7,  158;  PvA  5  (pabbata°),  43;  VvA  230 
(vaua^).  —  (b)  fig.  imperviousness,  entanglement,  ob- 
struction, appl.  to  ditthi,  the  jungle  of  wrong  views  or 
heresy  (usually  comb'  w.  ditthi— kantara,  the  wilderness 
of  d..  see  ditthi)  M  1.8,  485;  Pug  22;  DA  I.iu8.  Of 
raga°,  moha°,  etc.,  and  kilesa°  Nd^  630  (in  expl.  of 
Sattha  ;  ragagahanar)  tareti) ;  DhA  iv.156  (on  Dh  394) ; 
VvA  96. — mauus,sa°  M  1.340. 

-^hana  a  lair  in  the  jungle  J  1.150,  253. 

(Gahapati  [gaha-l-pati.  Vedic  grhapati,  where  pati  is 
still  felt  in  its  original  meaning  of  "  lord,"  "  master," 
implying  dignity,  power  &  auspiciousness.  Cp.  Sk. 
dainpati  =dominus  =i'nj7r<i-ijt  ;  and  pati  in  P.  scnapati 
commander-in-chief,  Sk.  jaspati  householder,  Lat. 
hospes,  Obulg.  gospoda  =  potestas,  Goth.  brut>-fa|)s, 
bride-groom,  hundafat'S=senapati.  See  details  under 
pati]  the  possessor  of  a  house,  the  head  of  the  house- 
hold, pater  familias  (freq.-*-setthi).  —  i.  In  formulas: 
(a)  as  regards  social  standing,  wealth  &  clanship  :  a  man 
of  private  (i.  e.  not  official)  hfe,  classed  w.  khattiya  & 
brahmana  in  kli'^-mahasala,  wealthy  Nobles,  brahm.°- 
niahasala,  do.  Bralinnns,  gah°  -m°  well-to-do  gentry 
S  1.71;  Nd-  135;  DhA  1.388.  —  kh°-kula,  br°-kula. 
g^-kula  the  kll^  clt.  clans:  Vin  II. 161  ;  J  1.218.  kh°. 
amacc.i,  br'.  g.''  D  1.130.  —  (b)  as  regards  education  & 
mode  of  life  runkmg  with  kh".  br^.  g."'  and  samaija 
Vin  1.227;  ^^  1.00 ;  Nd^  235,  see  also  cpd.  -pai.idita. — 
2.  Other  applications:  freq.  in  comb"  brahma^ia- 
gahapatikn  priests  tV  yeomen :  see  gahapatika.  In 
comb'  w.  gahapatiputta  (cp.  kulaputta)  it  comprises 
the  numbers  of  tlie  g.  rank,  clansmen  of  the  (middle) 
class,  and  implies  a  tinge  of  "  respectable  people  "  esp. 
in  addresses.  So  used  by  the  Buddha  in  enumerating 
the  people  as  gahapati  va  gah^-putto  va  aiinatarasmii) 
va  kule  paccajato  D  1.62  ;  M  1.344.  gahapati  ca  gaha- 
pataniyo  householders  and  their  wives  A  11.57.  I"  sg. 
the  voc.  gahapati  may  be  rendered  by  "  Sir  "  (Miln  17 
e.  g.  and  freq.).  &  in  pi.  gahapatayo  by  "  Sirs  "  (e.  g. 
Vin  1.227;  ^  '•4'"  ■  '^  "-S?)-  —  A.S  regards  occupation 
all  resp.  businesses  are  within  the  sphere  of  the  g.,  most 
f)e(juently  mentioned  as  such  are  setthino  (see  below) 
i\;  cp.  setthi"  Vin  1.16,  but  also  kassaka,  farmer  A  1.229, 
239  SI].  ;  and  darukammika,  carpenter  A  111.391.  Var. 
duties  of  a  g.  enum.  at  A  1.229,  =39-  — The  wealth  & 
comfortably  living  position  of  a  g.  is  evident  from  an 
expression  like  kalyana-bhattiko  g.  a  man  accustomed 
to  good  food  Vin  11.77=111.160.  —  f.  gahapatant  Vin 
111. -MI.  213  sq.,  259  (always  w.  gahapati);  l>hA  1376; 
pi.  gahapataniyo  see  above.  —  .Vote.  The  gen.  sg.  of 
gahapati  is  "ino  (J  1,92)  as  well  as  -issa  (Vin  1.16; 
D  111.36).  —  3.  Single  cases  of  gahapatis.  where  g. 
almost  assumes  the  function  of  a  title  are  Anathapindika 
g.  Vin  11.158  sq.  ;  S  1.5b  ;  11.68  :  A  11.65  :  J  '"J-  :  P^A  16; 
Men(}aka  g  Vin  1.240  sq.  ;  Citta  S  IV. 281  sq.  ;  Nakula- 
pitS  S  II.  I  sq.  ;  Potaliya  M  1.359  :  Sandhaua  D  111.36  sq.  ; 
Haliddikani  S  11. y.  —  See  next. 


Gahapatika 


78 


Gama 


-'aggi  the  sacred  &re  to  be  maintained  by  a  house- 
holder, interpreted  by  the  Buddha  as  the  care  to  be 
bestowed  on  one's  children  &  servants  A  rv.45  ;  see 
enum.  under  aggi  at  A  iv.41  ;  D  111.217;  -civara  the 
robe  of  a  householder  (i.  e.  a  layman's  robu)  Vin  1.280 
sq. ;  °dhara  wearing  the  householder's  (private  man's) 
robe  (of  a  bhikkhu)  M  1.31  ;  A  111.391  sq.  ;  -necayika 
(always  with  brahma^a-mahasala)  a  business  man  of 
substance  D  1.136 ;  111.16  sq.  ;  -pandita  a  learned  house-  I 
holder.  Cp.  above  i  (b),  together  w.  khattiya",  etc. 
M  1. 1 76,  396;  w.  samaija-brahraaija"  Mihi  5;  -parisa  a 
company  of  gahapatis  ^together  w.  khattiya",  etc.,  see 
above)  \'in  1.227 ;  M  1.72  ;  D  111.260  ;  -putta  a  member 
of  ag.  clan  D  1.62,  211  ;  M  1.344;  S  111.48,  112  ;  PvA  22  ; 
-mahasala  a  householder  of  private  means  (cp.  above 
I  a)  usually  in  comb"  with  khattiya",  etc.  D  111.258 ; 
S  1.71  ;  IV. 292  ;  A  11.86;  iv.239;  -ratana  the  "house- 
holder-gem "  one  of  the  seven  fairy  jewels  of  the 
mythical  overlord.  He  is  a  wizard  treasure-finder  (see 
ratana)  D  11.16,  i76;Snp.  106.  Cp.  Rh.D.  Dialogues 
etc.  11.206. 

Oahapatika  (adj.-n.)  belonging  to  the  rank  or  grade  of  a 
householder,  a  member  of  the  gentry,  a  man  of  private 
means  (see  gzihapati)  D  1.61  (expl.  as  gehassa  pati  eka- 
geha-matte  jefthaka  DA  1. 171);  Nd''  342;  PvA  39. 
Often  In  comb"  w.  khattiya  &  brahma^a :  A  1.66 ; 
D  III. 44,  46,  61  ;  cS  often  in  contrast  to  brahmaija  only : 
brSiimapa-gahapatika  Brahmins  &  Privates  (priests  & 
laymen,  Rh.D.  Buddh.  S.  p.  258)  M  1.400  ;  A  i.iio; 
It  III. ;  J  1.83,  152,  267;  PvA  22.  — paiwikag°  "  owner 
of  a  house  of  leaves  "  as  nickname  of  a  fruiterer  J 
111.21  ;  of  an  ascetic  J  iv.446. 

Oahits  (and  gahita  Dh  311)  (adj.)  [pp.  of  gavhati]  seized 
taken,  grasped  D  1.16;  DA  1.107  (=&dinna,  pavattita) ; 
J  1.61  ;  IV.2  ;  PvA  43  (v.  1.  for  text  gaijhita).  —  nt. 
a  grasp,  grip  DhA  iu.175;  ^  gahitakag  karoti  to 
accept  VvA  260.  -duggahita  (always  "gahita)  hard  to 
grasp  M  1. 132  sq. ;  A  11.147,  168;  111.178;  Dh  311; 
J  VI. 307  sq.  ;  sugahita  (sic)  easy  to  get  J  1.222. 

-bhava  fcittassa)  the  state  of  being  held  (back), 
holding  back,  preventing  to  act  (generously)  DhsA  370 
(in  expl"  of  aggahitattai)  cittassa  Dhs  1122  see  undei 
a"). 

O&thaka  [demin.  of  gatha]  =  gatha,  in  ekar)  me  gahi 
gathakag  "  sing  to  me  only  one  little  verse  "  J  111.507. 

Q&tha  (f.)  [Vedic  gatba,  on  der"  see  gayatej  a  verse, 
stanza,  line  of  poetry,  usually  referring  to  an  Anutthub- 
bag  or  a  Tutthubbai),  &  called  a  catuppada  gatha,  a 
stanza  (§loka)  of  four  half-Unes  A  11.178;  J  iv.395. 
Def.  as  akkhara-padaniya-mita-gauthita-vacanar)  at 
KhA  117.  For  a  riddle  on  the  word  see  S  1.38.  As  a 
style  of  composition  it  is  one  of  the  nine  .\ngas  or  di- 
visions of  the  Canon  (see  navanga  Satthu  sasana).  PI. 
gatha  Sn  429;  J  11.160  ;  gathayo  Vin  1.5,  349;  D  11.157. 
gathaya  ajjhabhasati  to  address  with  a  verse  Vin  1.36, 
38 ;  Kh  V.  intr.  —  gathahi  anumodati  to  thank  with 
(these)  lines  Vin  1.222.  230,  246.  294,  etc.  —  gathayo 
giyamana  uttering  the  Unes  Vin  1.38.  —  anantara- 
gatha  the  foU.  stanza  J  iv.142;  Sn  251  ;  J  1.280;  Dh 
102  ("satag). 

-abhigita  gained  by  verses  S  i.i67  =  Sn  81,  480 
(gathayo  bhasitva  laddhag  Cora.  cp.  Ger.  "ersungen"). 
-&vasane  after  the  stanza  has  been  ended  DhA  111.171  ; 
-jananaka  one  who  knows  verses  Anvs.  p.  35 ;  -dvaya 
(nt.)  a  pair  of  stanzas  J  111.395  sq. ;  Pv.\  29,  40  ;  -pada 
a  half  line  of  a  gatha  Dh  10 1  ;  KhA  123  ;  -sukhattaij  in 
order  to  have  a  well-sounding  line,  metri  causa,  PvA  a. 

Qadha'  [Sk.  gajha  pp.  of  gah,  see  gahati]  depth  ;  a  hole, 
a  dugout  A  ii.i07=Pug  43  (cp.  PugA  225);  Sdhp  394 
("g  khaijati).     Cp.  galha^. 

Qadha^  [Sk.  gaJha  firm  Dhtp  167  "patitlhayag  "  cp.  also 
Sk.  gadha.  fordable  &  see  gaJha']  adj.  passable,  fordable, 
in  a°  unfathomable,  deep  PvA  77  (  =  gambhira).     nt.  a 


lord,  a  firm  stand,  firm  ground,  a  safe  place :  gambhire 
"■g  vindati  A  v. 202.  °g  esati  to  seek  the  terra  firma 
S   1.127;    similarly:    °g    labhati   to   gain    firm   footing 

5  1.47  ;  °g  ajjhaga  S  iv.206  ;  "g  labhate  J  vi.440  (  =  patit- 
tha).     Cp.  o",  pafi". 

Qadhati  [v.  der.  fr.  gadha^j  to  stand  fast,  to  be  on  firm 
ground,  to  have  a  firm  footing :  apo  ca  pafhavi  ca  tejo 
vayo  na  gadhati  "  the  four  elements  have  no  footing  " 
D  1.223=51.15;  — Dhamma-Vinaye  gadhati  "  to  stand 
fast  in  the  Doctrine  &  Discipline  "  S  in. 59  sq. 

Oama  [Vedic  grama,  heap,  collection,  parish ;  *giein  to 
comprise ;  Lat.  gremium ;  Ags.  crammian  (E.  cram), 
Obulg.  gramada  (village  community)  Ohg.  chram ;  cp. 
*ger  in  Gr.  aynpM,  uynpa,  Lat,  grex.]  a  collection  of 
houses,  a  hamlet  (cp.  Ger.  gemeinde),  a  habitable  place 
(opp.  aianna:  game  va  yadi  vSraflfle  Sn  119),  a  parish 
or  vUlage  having  boundaries  Sc  distinct  from  the  sur- 
rounding country  (garao  ca  gamupacaro  ca  Vin  1.109, 
no;  111.46).  In  size  varying,  but  usually  small  & 
distinguished  from  nigama,  a  market-town.  It  is  the 
smallest  in  the  list  of  settlements  making  up  a  "  state  " 
(rafthag).  See  definition  &  description  at  Vin  in. 46, 
200.  It  is  the  source  of  support  for  the  bhikkhus,  and 
the  phrase  gamag  pi^cjaya  carati  "  to  visit  the  parish 
for  alms  "  is  extremely  frequent.  —  i.  a  village  as  such  : 
Vin  1.46 ;  Sramika",  Pilinda"  Vin  1.28,  29  (as  Sramika- 
gamaka  &  Pilinda-gamaka  at  Vin  III. 249) ;  Sakyanag 
game  janapade  Lumbineyye  Sn  683 ;  Uruvela'"  Pv 
n.13'';  gamo  natikalena  pavisitabbo  M  1.469;  °g 
ratthan  ca  bhufljati  Sn  619,  711;  game  tigsa  kulani 
honti  J  1.199;  —  Sn  386,  929,  978;  J  11.153;  vi.366; 
Dh  47,  49 ;  Dhs  697  (sunno  g.) ;  PvA  73  (game  amacca- 
kula) ;  67  (gamassa  dvarasamipena).  — gama  gSmag 
from  hamlet  to  hamlet  M  11.20  ;  Sn  i8o  (with  naga 
nagag  ;  expl.  SnA  216  as  devagama  devagamag),  192 
(with  pura  purag) ;  Pv  11.13''.  In  the  same  sense 
gamena  gamag  Nd^  177  (with  nigamena  n°,  nagarena 
n".,  ratthena  r°.,  janapadena  j°.). — -2.  grouped  with 
nigama,  a  market-town :  gamanigamo  sevitabbo  or 
asevitabbo  A  iv.365  sq.,  cp.  v.ioi  (w.  janapadapadeso) ; 

—  Vin  111.25,  '84  (°0  "^^  nigamaig  va  upanissaya) ; 
IV. 93  (pi^daya  pavisati) ;  gamassa  va  nigamassa  va 
avidure  D  1.237 ;  ^  1.488 ;  game  va  nigame  va  Pug  66. 

—  3.  as  a  geographical- poUtical  unit  in  the  constitution 
of  a  kingdom,  enum**  in  two  sets :  (a)  gama-nigama- 
rajadhaniyo  Vin  111.89;  A  111.108  ;  Nd^  271"" ;  Pv  ii.i3'8  ; 
DhA  I  90.  —  (b)  gama-nigama-nagara-rattha-janapada 
Nd^  1 77,  304""  ("bandhana),  305  (°katha) ;  with  the 
foil,  variations:  g.  nigama  nagara  M  11.33-40;  g. 
nigama  janapada  Sn  995  ;  Vism  152  ;  gamani  nigamani 
ca  Sn  118  (expl"*  by  SnA  178:  ettha  ca  saddena  naga- 
rani  ti  pi  vattabbag). — -See  also  dvara" ;  paccanta"; 
bTja°  ;  bhuU°  ;  matu°. 

-anta  the  neighbourhood  of  a  village,  its  border,  the 
village  itself,  in  "mlyaka  leading  to  the  village  A  in.  189; 
°vihci,rin  (=araiifiaka)  living  near  a  v.  M  1.31,  473; 
A  HI. 391  (w.  nemantanika  and  gahapati-civara-dhara) ; 
— •  Sn  710  ;  -antara  the  (interior  of  the)  village,  only  in 
t.  t.  gamantarag  gacchati  to  go  into  the  v.  Vin  11.300, 

6  in  "kappa  the  "  village-trip-licence "  ( Vin.  Texts 
111.398)  ib.  294,  300  ;  cp.  iv.64,  65;  v. 210  ;  -(ipocara  the 
outskirts  of  a  v.  Vin  1.109,  no;  defined  at  Vin  in. 46, 
200  ;  -katha  village-talk,  gossip  about  v.-aSairs.  In- 
cluded in  the  list  of  foolish  talks  (-t- nigama",  nagara", 
janapada")  D  17  (see  expl"  at  DA  190) ;  Sn  922.  See 
katha ;  -kamma  that  which  is  to  be  done  to,  or  in  a 
village,  in  °g  karoti  to  make  a  place  habitable  J  1.199; 
-ku^a  "the  village-fraud,"  a  sycophant  S  n.258; 
J  IV. 1 77  (=kutavedin) ;  -gona  (pi.)  the  village  cattle 
J  1. 1 94;  -ghata  those  who  sack  villages,  a  marauder, 
dacoit  (of  cora  thieves)  D  1. 1 35  ;  S  n.  188  ;  -ghataka  (cora) 
=  "ghata  S  IV.  1 73  ;  Miln  20  ;  Vism  484  ;  nt.  village 
plundering  J  1.200.  -jana  the  people  of  the  v.  Miln  47  ; 
-tthana  in  puraija"  a  ruined  village  J  u.102;  -daraka 


Gamaka 


79 


Gahaka 


(pi.)  the  youngsters  of  the  v.  J  111.275  ;  f.  -darika  the 
girls  of  the  v.  PvA  67  ;  -dvaya,  in  °vasika  living  in 
(these)  two  vs.  PvA  77 ;  -dvara  the  v.  gates,  the  en- 
trance to  the  V.  Vin  111.52  ;  J  ii.i  10,  301  ;  cp.  IVA  67  ; 
-dhamma  doings  with  women-folk  (cp.  niatugama),  vile 
conduct  D  i.4~(+ methuna)  A  1.211  ;  J  11. 180  (  =  vasa- 
ladhamma) ;  VvA  11;  DA  1.72  (  =  gama-vasinar) 
dhamma.');  -poddava  (v.  1.  kamapudava)  a  sham 
pooer  (?  Vin.  Texts  111.66 ;  Bdhgh  explains:  kamapu- 
dava ti  chavi-riga-mandanSnuyutta  nagarikamanussi  ; 
gamar)  podava  ti  pi  padlio  es'  ev'  attho,  Vin  11. 315) 
Vin  11.105;  -bhojaka  the  village  headman  J  1.199; 
DhA  1.69;  -majjhe  in  the  midst  of  the  v.  J  1.199; 
VI. 332  ;  -vara  an  excellent  v.  S  1.97;  J  1.138;  -vasin 
the  inhabitant  of  a  v.  J  11. 1 111  ;  v. 107  ;  DA  1.72  ;  -sanna 
the  thought  of  a  v.  M  111.104  ;  -samipe  near  a  v.  J  1.254  • 
-sahassa  a  thousand  parishes  (So.ooo  under  the  rule 
of  King  Bimbisara)  Vin  1. 179;  -samanta  in  the  neigh- 
bourhood of  a  v.,  near  a  v.  D  i.ioi  ;  (-(-mgama°)  -sima 
the  boundary  of  the  parish  Vin  i.iio  (-1- nigama") ; 
-stikara  a  village  pig  J  111.393. 

Oamaka  i.  =gama  Vin  1.208;  J  1.199  (Macala°),  253; 
IV.431  (cora°);  PvA  67  (Itthakavati  and  Digharaji) : 
DhA  11.25  (dvara°).  —  2.  a  villager  J  v.107  (=gama- 
vasin). 

-avasa  an  abode  in  a  village  PvA  12  ;  VvA  291. 

6ania9ika=gamani  S  1.61  ;  A  111.76  (puga°). 

GamaiM  (m.)  the  head  of  a  company,  a  chief,  a  village 
headman  VIt  11.296  (Mariiculaka).  Title  of  the  G- 
Sai)yutta  (Book  VIII.  of  the  Sajayatana-Vagga)  S 
IV.305  sq.  ;  &  of  the  G.-Jataka  J  1.136,  137. — S  iv.306 
(Talaputa  nafa"),  308  (yodhaiivo  g.),  310  (hattharoho 
g.),  312  (Asibandhakaputta),  330  (Rasiya). 

Oama)94aIa  "  the  round  of  the  ox."  like  the  oxen  driven 
round  &  round  the  threshing-floor  Th  1,  1143.- — Cp. 
gomandala  (s.v.  go). 

Qamika  i.  [to  gama]  a  governor  of  a  village,  overseer  of 
a  parish  Vin  1.179;  A  111.76,  78,  300  (in  series  w.  rat- 
thika  pettanika,  senapatika,  piigagamanika). — 2.  [to 
gam]  adj.  going  wandering,  travelling  (-°)  J  11. 112. 

"Gamin  (adj.)  [from  gacchati,  gam]  f.  °inl,  in  composition 
°gami°.  —  (a)  going,  walking,  lit. :  sigha"  walking 
quickly  Sn  381  ;  —  (b)  leading  to.  making  for.  u.sually 
with  magga  or  patipada  (gami  i).  either  ht.  Pataliputta- 
gami-magga  the  road  to  P.  Miln  1  7  ;  or  tig  of  ways  .% 
means  connected  w.  one  of  the  "  gatis."  as  apaya"^ 
DhA  111.175.  udaya"  patipada  S  v.361  ;  nibbana" 
dhamma  Sn  233  ;  amata-gami-magga  S  v. 8  :  udayattha- 
gamini  panfia  A  v. 15;  dukkhanirodha"  patipada 
Vin  mo;  cp.  Scaya"  Dhs  584,  1013.  Ace.  "gaminar) : 
khemaij  Amata"  M  1.508 ;  brahmacariyag  :  nibban' 
ogadha°  It  28,  29;  dukkhupasama°  maggai)  Sn  724  = 
Dh  191  ;  niraya°  maggari  Sn  277.  ThA  243.  Or  "gamig: 
Sn  233,  381. 

Oameyya  (adj.)  belonging  to  a  village  in  sa°  of  the  same 
v.,  a  clansman  S  1.30  =  61)  (-t-sakh,^). 

Oayaka  [fr.  next]  a  singer  PvA  3  (nataka°). 

Garati  [Vedic  gai.  gayate]  to  sing,  to  recite,  often  comb' 
w.  naccati  to  dance,  ])pr.  gayaiito.  gayamana  A;  giya- 
mana  (Vin  1.38)  ;  inipcr.  gahi  (J  111.507)  ;  fut.  gayissati  ; 
grd.  gayitabba.  Vin  11. 108  (dhammari).  196  (gathaii)  : 
Sn  682  (g°  ca  vadayanti  ca) ;  J  1.2911  (gitar))  ;  in. 507 
(naccitva  gayitvS) ;  \ism  lat  (aor.  gayi)  ;  PvA  151. 
Cp.  gathii,  gita,  geyya. 

Gayana  (nt.)  singing  \vA  315  (naccana-i- ). 

Garayba  (adj.)  [grd.  of  garahati]  contemptible,  low  Vin 
111.186;  IV. 176  sq.  ;  242:  V.149;  M  1.403;  A  it. 241 
(kammar)  padar)  garayhar)  mosallar))  ;  Sn  141  ;  Nett  52  : 
SnA  192.  a°  not  to  be  blamed  J  vi.200  (spelt 
aggarayha). 


Garava  (m.  and  [later]  nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  gaurava,  fr.  gam] 
reverence,  respect,  esteem  ;  with  loc.  respect  for, 
reverence  towards  ;  in  the  set  of  six  venerable  objects  : 
Duddhe  [Satthari],  Dhamme,  Sanghe,  sikkhaya,  appa- 
made,  patisanthare  Vin  v.92  =  D  111.244.  ^^  7  garava 
(the  6-l-samanhi)  in  adj.  a°  andsa°  at  A  iv.84  (sec  below). 
D  ni.284  ;  Sn  265  ;  Visra  464  (atta"  &  para°).  Kxpl'' 
KhA  144  by  garubhavo ;  often  in  comb"  with  bahu- 
mana  PvA  135  (  =  puja),  sanjata-g°-bahumana  (adj.) 
PvA  50  ;  VvA  205.  Instr.  garavena  out  of  respect, 
respectfully  D  11.155;  J  1.465.  Appl''  to  the  terms  of 
address  bhante  Sc  bhaddante  PvA  33.  121,  &  ayasma 
(see  cpd.  "adhivacana).  — agarava  (m.  nt.)  disrespect 
Vin  v.92  (six:  as  above);  J  1.2 17;  PvA  54.  —  As  adj. 
in  sagarava  and  agarava  full  of  reverence  toward  (with 
loc.)  &  disrespectful ;  D  111.244  (six  g.) ;  A  iv.84  (seven) ; 
M  1.469  ;  comb'  witli  appatissa  &  sappatissa  (obedient) 
A  111.7  ^l'  '4  sq..  247,  340.  Also  in  tibba-garava  full 
of  keen  respect  (Satthu-garu  Dhamma-garu  Sanghe  ca 
tibba-garava.  etc.)  A  111.331  =  iv.28  sq. 

-ddhivacana  a  title  of  respect,  a  reverential  address 
Nd-  466  (with  ref.  to  BhagavS.),  cp.  sagarava  sappafis- 
sidhivacana  Nd^   130  (ayasma). 

Garavata  [Der.  ff.  gaiava]  reverence,  respect,  in  Satthu", 
Dhamma",  etc.  A  in. 330  sq.,  423  sq. ;  iv.29  (ottappa"). 

Galha  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  ga<Jha]  i.  [cp.  gadha']  strong,  tight, 
close ;  thick.  In  phrase  pacchabahai)  g"  bandbanar) 
bandhati  to  pinion  the  arms  tightly  D  1.245  ;  A  11. 241  ; 
J  1.264  '■  PvA  4.  Of  an  illness  (gajhena  rogatankena 
phuttha)  A  II. 174  sq.  ;  appl'  to  poison  smeared  on  an 
arrow  M  1.429.  —  galhai)  &  galhakaij  (adv.)  tightly 
J  1.265,  291.  —  agalha  (?  prob.  to  be  read  agalha)  (of 
vacana,  speech,  comb''  with  pharusa)  strong  (?)  Pug  32 
(expl'  by  Coin,  atigajha  thaddha),  cp.  2.  and  galita.  — ■ 
2.  [cp.  gadha']  deep  J  1.155  ("vedhin,  piercing);  Miln 
370  (ogahati).  Cp.  ajjhogajlia,  atigalha,  ogajha,  nigal- 
hita,  pagajha. 

Gavi  (f.)  [sec  go]  gen.  sg.  gaviya  (Pug  56  =  A  11.207) ;  nom. 
pi.  gaviyo  (SnA  323  ;  VvA  308) ;  gen.  pi.  gavinar) 
DhA  1.396;  SnA  323;  VvA  308).  —  A  cow  Vin  1.193; 
A  IV. 418 ;  J  1.50;  IJd  8,  49;  Vism  525  (in  simile); 
DhA  11.35  :  VvA  200. 

Gavuta  (nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  gavyuti  pasture  land,  district]  a 
linear  measure,  a  quarter  of  a  yojana=8o  usabhas,  a 
little  less  than  two  miles,  a  league  J  1.57,  59;  11.209: 
Vism  118  ;  DhA  1.396. 

Gavutika  (adj.)  reaching  a  gavuta  in  extent  DA  1.284. 

6a vo  see  go. 

Gaha  [fr.  ganhati]  1.  (n.)  seizing,  seizure,  grip  (cp.  gaha) : 
canda"  suriya"  an  eclipse  (lit.  the  moon,  etc.,  being 
seized  by  a  demon)  D  i.io  (=DA  1.95:  Rahu  candaii 
ganhati).  K.sp.  appl"  to  the  sphere  of  the  mind  : 
obsession,  being  possessed  (by  a  thought),  an  idea, 
opinion,  view,  usually  as  a  preconceived  idea,  a  wrong 
view,  misconception.  So  in  dcf"  of  ditthi  (wrong 
view.';)  with  patiggaha  tt  abliinivcsa  Nd-  271"'  (cii 
lep.i)  ;  Pug  22  :  Dhs  381  (=  obsession  like  the  grip  of  a 
crocodile  IMisA  253).  1003  ;  \'bh  145,  358.  In  the 
same  formula  as  vipariyesa  ggaha  (wrong  view),  cp. 
viparita"  \'vA  331  (see  ditthi).  As  doubt  &  error  in 
anekar)  sa-)-g°  in  def  of  kanklul  \  vicikiccha  Nd"  1  ; 
Vbh  16S  ;  ekaijsa'  iK  apannaka"  ceitainty.  right  thought 
J  1.97.  —  gahag  vissajjeti  to  give  up  a  preconceived  idea 
J  11.387.  —  2.  (adj.)  act.  holdiuR  :  rasmi°  holding  the 
reins  Dh  222  ;  dabbi"  holding  the  spoons  Pv  11.9^3 
(  =  gahaka  FvA  135).  -  -(b)  ined.-pass.  taken:  jivagaha 
taken  alive,  in  "ij  galieti  to  take  (prisoner)  alive  S  1.S4. 
Uarajnaragahai)  galieti  same  J  111.361   (see  kara). 

Gahaka  (adj.)  (.  gjhika  holding  (-°)  cluitta"  Sn  6.S8 ; 
Davs  11.119;  kat.icchu"  PvA  135;  camari"  J  vi.218. 
Cp.  sai)°. 


Gabati 


80 


Giri 


Ofthati  [Sk.  gSJiate  bat  Dhtp  349=viIolana]  to  immerse, 
to  penetrate,  to  plunge  into:  sec  gadha  &  ga|ha ;  cp. 
also  avagadha  ajjhogahati,  ogahati,  pagahati. 

Oahana  (nt.)  [fr.  last]  submersion,  see  avagahana,  avaga- 
hati  &  avagahaua. 

Q&havant  in  ekagsa-gahavatl  nibbici  kiccha  "  doubtless- 
ness  consisting  in  certainty "  VvA  85  in  expl°  of 
ekai)sika. 

Oahapaka  [fr.  gahapeti]  one  who  is  made  to  take  up,  a 
receiver  Vin  11. 177  (patta"). 

Gahapeti  [caus.  of  ganhati]  to  cause  to  take ;  to  cause  to 
be  seized  or  fetched ;  to  remove.  Aor,  gahapesi 
J  1.53;  11.37;  gahapayi  Pv  rv.i*^.  —  Ger.  gahapetva 
J  1. 166;  II. 127;  III. 281  ;  DhA  1.62  (patta-civarar)). 
With  double  ace.  mahajanar)  kathag  g°  made  people 
believe  your  words  J  11.416;  cetake  kasa  g.  made  the 
servants  seize  their  whips  J  111.281.     Cp.  ganhapeti. 

Qahi  Imper.  pres.  of  gayati  J  iu.507. 

Gahika  (-°)  =  gahin,  see  anta°. 

Oihin  (adj.)  (-°)  grasping,  taking  up,  striving  after,  adhana" 
D  HI. 247 ;  udaka°  J  1.5 ;  piya°  Dh  209 ;  nimitta"  anu- 
byafijana",  etc. 

QSheti  [v.  denom.  fr.  gaha]  to  understand,  to  account  for 
DA  1.117. 

Oingamaka  (v.  1.  BB  kinkamaka)  a  sort  of  ornament 
J  VI.590. 

Gijjha  [Vedic  grdhra,  cp.  gijjhati]  i.  (m.)  a  vulture. 
Classed  with  kaka,  crow&kulala,  hawk  M  1.88  ;  (kaka+  ), 
364  (in  simile,  with  kanka  &  kulata)  429  (do.) ;  Sn  201 
(kaka  +  ):  PvA  198  (  +  kulala).  It  occurs  also  in  the 
form  gaddha. — 2.  (adj.)  greedy,  desirous  of  (-°) : 
kama°  J  1.2 10  (cp.  giddha) ;  cp.  pafi". 

-ku{a  "  Vulture's  Peak "  Np.  of  a  hill  near 
Rajagaha  Vin  11.193  :  ^^^A  1.140  ;  PvA  10  and  passim, 
-potaka  the  young  of  a  vulture  Vism  537  (in  simile). 

Gijjhati  [Sk.  grdhyati.  to  Lat.  gradior  ?]  to  desire,  to  long 
for,  to  wish :  pp.  gaddha  &  giddha.  Cp.  abhi",  paU".  — 
pp.  (Pass.)  gijjhita  Th  2,  152  (  =  paccasii)sita  ThA). 

Giiijaka  (f)  a  brick,  in  °avasatha  a  house  of  bricks,  as 
N  pi.  "  the  Brick  Hall "  D  1.91  ;  Vin  1.232  ;  M  1.205. 

Giddha  (adj.)  [pp.  of  gijjhati]  greedy;  greedy  for, 
hankering  after  (with  loc.)  S  1.74  (  +  kamesu 
mucchita) ;  11.227;  A  11.2  ;  111.68;  Sn  243  (rasesu),  774 
(kamesu) ;  809;  Pv  iv.6^  (sukhe) ;  Pi'A  3  (+rata) 
(=gadhita),  271  (ahare=  hungry ;  cp.  giddhin).  In 
series  with  similar  terms  of  desire :  giddha  gathita  (or 
gadhita)  mucchita  ajjhopanna  Nd''  369  (nissita) ;  SnA 
286.  Cp.  gathita.  —  agiddha  without  greed,  desireless, 
controlled  It  92  (  +  vitagedha) ;  Sn  210  (do),  84s 
Cp.  pa°. 

Qiddhi  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  grdhya  or  grdhnuta]  greed,  usually  in 
cpds. :  °mana  greed  &  conceit  Sn  328,  ^lobha  g.  & 
desire  M  1.360,  362  (also  a°  and  giddhilobhin) ;  J  v. 343. 
Der.  giddhikata  (f.  abstr.  =  Sk.  grdhnuta)  greed  Vbh 
351  (V.  1.  gedhi"). 

Giddhin  (adj.  fr.  prec.)  greedy,  usually  -"  greedy  for, 
desirous  after  Pv  iv.io^  (ahara°)  f.  giddhini:  gavl  vaccha" 
Vin  1.193 ;  S  iv.181.     Cp.  also  paligedhin. 

Giddbima  (adj.  fr.  giddhi)  greedy,  full  of  greed  1  v  464 
(rasa°). 

Gini  (poet.)  [Vedic  agni ;  this  the  aphetic  form,  arisen  in  a 
comb"  Uke  mahagm=maha-gini,  as  against  the  osnal 
assimilation  aggi]  fire  A  111.347  (mahigini) ;  Sn  18, 
19  (ahito  >  nibbuto :  made  -■  extinguished) ;  J  iv.26.  — 


Note.  The  occurrence  of  two  phonetic  representative* 
of  one  Vedic  form  (one  by  diieresis  &  one  by  contraction) 
is  common  in  words  containing  a  liquid  or  nasal  element 
(1.  r.  n  ;  cp.  note  on  gala),  e.  g.  supina  &  soppa  (Sk. 
svapna),  abhikkhapa  and  abhiijiha  (abhik^a),  silesuma 
&  semha  (Sleiman)  galagata  &  gaggara  (gargara),  etc. 

Gimha  [Vedic  gri^ma]  I.  (sg.)  heat,  in  special  application 
to  the  atmosphere :  hot  part  (of  the  day  or  year),  hot 
season,  summer ;  a  summer  month.  Always  used  in 
loc.  as  a  designation  of  time.  1 .  of  the  day :  VvA 
40  (°samaye ;  v.  1.  gimhanamase). — 2.  of  summer: 
usually  in  comb"  w.  and  in  contrast  to  hemanta 
winter :  hemanta-gimhisu  in  w.  &  s.  Dh  286  (cp.  gimhika 
for  °isu).  Miln  274;  Dpvs  1.55;  Vism  231  (°abhitatta 
worn  out  by  the  heat);  Sdhp  275  ("kile).  In  enum" 
w.  other  seasons :  vasse  hemante  gimhe  Nd'  63 1  (sada) ; 
vasanta  gimhadika  ntO  PvA  135. — 3.  of  a  summer 
month:  pathamasmir)  gimhe  Sn  233  (see  KhA  192  for 
expl")  —  II.  (pi.)  gimha  the  hot  months,  the  season  of 
summer,  in  °nar)  pacchime  mase,  in  the  last  month  of 
summer  M  1.79;  S  111.141  ;  v.  50,  321  ;  Vv  79*  (=asalhi- 
mase  VvA  307). 

Oimhana  (adj.  -n.)  [orig.  gen.  pi.  of  gimha=gimhanai), 
fr.  comb"  gimhana(tj)  mase,  in  a  month  of  summer]  of 
summer,  summerly,  the  summer  season  A  iv.138 
(  + hemanta  &  vassa) ;  Sn  233  (gimhanama.se) ;  VvA  40 
(v.  1.).     On  terms  for  seasons  in  gen.  cp.  Milntrsl.  11.113. 

Gimhika  (adj .  f r.  gimha)  summerly,  relating  to  the  summer, 
for  the  summer  Vin  1.15 ;  D  11.21  (  + vassika  &  heman- 
tika). 

Gira  [Vedic  gir  &  ger,  song;  grnati  to  praise,  announce 
gurti  praise  =  Lat.  grates  "  grace  "  ;  to  *ger  or  *gner,  see 
note  on  gala]  utterance  (orig.  song,  important  utter- 
ance, still  felt  as  such  in  older  Pali,  therefore  mostly 
poetical),  speech,  words  D  111.174;  Sn  350,  632,  690, 
1132  ;  Dh  408;  Th  2,  316,  402  ;  Vv  50*8  (=vaca  VvA); 
Dhs  637,  720  ;  DhsA  93  ;  DA  1.61  (attbangupetag  girag), 
J  "•134- 

Giri  [V'edic  giri,  Obulg.  gora  mountain]  a  mountain ;  as  a 
rule  only  Ln  cpds,  by  itself  (poetical)  only  at  Vism  206 
(in  enum"  of  the  7  large  mountains). 

-agga  mountain  top,  in  giraggasamajja  N.  of  a  festival 
celebrated  yearly  at  Rajagaha,  orig.  a  festival  on  the 
mountain  top  (cp.  Dial.  1.8  &  Vin.  Texts  111.71).  Vin 
11.107,  150  :  rv.85,  267  ;  J  111.538  ;  DhA  1.89.  The  BSk. 
version  is  girivaggu-saraagama  AvS  11.24  '•  -kanniki 
(f.)  N.  of  a  plant  (Clitoria  tematea)  Vism  173;  DhA 
1.383  (v.  1.  kanriika  cp.  Sk.  °kami ;)  -gabbhara=°guha 
Sn  416 ;  -guha  a  mountain  cleft,  a  rift,  a  gorge ;  always 
in  formula  pabbata  kandara  g°,  therefore  almost  equiva- 
lent to  kandara,  a  grotto  or  cave  Vin  11.146;  D  1.71  = 
M  1.269,  -74.  346.  440  =  A  11.2 10  =  Pug  59  (as  girig 
guharj) ;  A  iv.437  ;  expl.  at  DA  1.2 10  :  dvinnag  pabba- 
tanag  antaraij  ekasmig  yeva  va  ummagga-sadisag 
maha-vivarag  ;  -bbaja  (nt.)  [Etym.  uncertain,  according 
to  Morris  J.P.T.S.  1884,  79  to  vaja  "  a  pen,"  cp. 
Marath!  vraja  "  a  station  of  cowherds,"  Hindi  vraja 
"  a  cow-pen  "  ;  the  Vedic  giribhraj"  (RV.  x.68.  i)  "  au9 
Bergen  hervorbrechend  "  (Roth)  suggests  relation  to 
bhiaj,  to  break=bhaflj  =  Lat.  frango]  =  °guha,  a  moun- 
tain cave  or  gorge,  serving  as  shelter  &  hiding  place 
J  III. 479  (trsl.  by  Morris  loc.  cit.  a  hill-run,  a  cattle-run 
on  the  liills) ;  v.  2  60  (sihassa,  a  Uon's  abode)  expl**  as 
kaucanaguha  ibid,  (for  kandara-guha  ?  cp.  Kern, 
Toev.  p.  130).  S  11.185.  Also  N.  for  Rajagaha  Sn  408  ; 
Dpvs  v. 5  ;  in  its  Sk.  form  Girivraja,  which  Beal,  BuddJk, 
Records  11. 1 49  expl"'  as  "  the  hill -surrounded."  cp.  ib. 
11. 158  (  =  Chin.  Shan-Shing),  161  ;  see  also  Cunning- 
ham, Ancient  Geogr.  462.  It  does  not  occur  in  the 
Avadanas ;  -raja  king  of  the  mountains,  of  Monn^ 
Sineru  Miln  21,  224;  -sikhara  mountain  top,  peal 
VvA  4 ;  (kaiicana°,  shining). 


Giriya 


8i 


Guna 


Qitifi  (pi.)  in  dhamina°  &  brahiiia°,  a  name  of  certain 
theatrical  entertainers  Miln  191. 

Oilati  [Vedic  girati  &  gilati  Dhtp  488 :  adane ;  cp.  gala 
throat,  Ohg.  kela,  E.  gullet ;  see  note  on  gala]  to  swallow, 
to  devour:  mi  Rahu  gili  caraQ  antaUkkhe  S  1.51  =  VvA 
116;  raa  gili  lohagulag  Dh  371  ;  —  J  in. 338  ;  Miln  106. 
— pp.  gilita  :  gilitabalisa  having  swallowed  the  hook 
S  IV.159.  Cp.  ud°,  o",  pari";  — Caus.  gilapeti  to  make 
swallow  J  III. 338. 

OibUft  (nt.)  [fr.  gilati]  devouring,  swallowing  Miln  10 1. 

Oillna  (adj.)  [Sk.  glana,  gli  to  fade,  wither,  be  exhausted, 
expl""  suitably  by  "  hasa-kkhaya  "  at  Dhtp  439]  sick, 
ill  Vin  1. 51,  53,  61,  92,  142  sq.,  176,  302  sq.  ;  11. 165. 
227  sq. ;  IV.88,  etc.  ;  S  v.8o,  81  (balha"  very  ill) ;  A 
i.i20  =  Pag  27;  A  111.38,  143  sq.  ;  iv.333 ;  v.72  sq.  ; 
J  1. 150;  11.395;  "'.392;  PvA  14;    V'vA  76. 

-alaya  pretence  of  illness  J  vi.262.  -upa^thaka 
(f.  -i)  one  who  attends  to  the  sick  Vin  1.92,  121  sq.  ; 
142  sq.  ;  161,  303,  A  1.26 ;  111.143  sq. ;  -°bhaUa  food  for 
the  attendant  or  nurse  Vin  1.292  sq.  ;  -upatthana  tending 
or  nursing  the  sick  D  111.191  ;  -paccaya  support  or  help 
for  the  sick  PvA  144;  usually  with  "bhesajja  medicine 
for  the  sick  in  freq.  formula  of  civarapindapata"  (the 
requisites  of  the  bhikkhu) :  see  civara ;  -pucchaka  one 
who  asks  (i.  e.  enquires  ajfter)  the  sick  Vin  iv.88=H5, 
ti8;  -bhatta  food  for  the  sick  Vin  1.142  sq.  ;  292  sq.  ; 
303 ;  Vism  66.  -bhesajja  medicine  Vin  1.292  sq.  ; 
-sala  a  hall  for  the  sick,  hospital  S  iv.210  ;  A  111.142  ; 
Vism  259. 

OiUnaka  (adj.)  i.  ill  (  =  gilana)  A  111.142  ;  —  2.  fit  for  an 
illness  (bhesajja  medicine)  Miln  74. 

Gil&yati :  see  igiliyati. 

Oiha  [=gaha]  only  in  agiha  (adj.)  houseless,  homeless 
(=pabbajita,  a  Wanderer);  poet,  for  anagara  Sn  456, 
464,  487,  497. 

Oihin  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  gaha,  cp.  gaha  &  geha;  Sk.  grhin]  a 
householder,  one  who  leads  a  domestic  Ufe,  a  layman 
(opp.  pabbajita  &  paribbajaka).  Geu.  sg.  gihissa 
(D  111.147,  '67)  &  gihino  (D  111.174);  "■  pl-  gihi ;  in 
cpds.  gihl°  &  gihi°  (usually  the  latter),  gihi  agirai) 
ajjh3.vasanta  A  1.49 ;  gihi  odatavasana  (clad  in  white 
robes  as  distinguished  fr.  kasava-vasana  the  yellow- 
robed  i.  e.  bhikkhus)  D  1.211;  in. 117,  124.  210;  M 
1.340;  III. 261  ;  A  1.74. — Contrasted  with  pabbajita: 
A  1.69;  D  111.147,  167,  179.  gihi  dhaiiiiena  dhanena 
va44hati  D  111.165.  —  Other  passages  in  general: 
S  11.120.  269  ;  111.11  ;  rv.180,  300  sq.  ;  A  11.65  .'  ^9  (kama- 
bhogi) ;  IV. 438  (do.);  D  111.124  (do);  A  111.211  (sambo- 
dhipariyano) ;  rv.345  sq.  ;  D  111. 167  sq.  ;  171  sq.  ;  176, 
192  ;  Sn  220,  221,  404 ;  Dh  74  ;  Miln  19,  264  ;  DhA  1.16 
(gihiniyama) ;  Sdhp  376,  426;  PvA  13  (gihikalato 
patttUya  from  the  time  of  our  laymanship)  ;  DhA 
11.49  (id)- 

-kicca  a  layman's  or  householder's  duties  Pv  iv.i*- 
(=kutumba-kiccani  PvA  240);  -dhanuna  a  layman's 
duty  A  III. 41  ;  -parisa  a  congregation  of  laymen  S  1.1 1 1  ; 
M  1.373  ;  A  III.  184  ;  -bandhanani  (pi.)  a  layman's  fetters 
Sn  44  (  =  Nd^  228  putta  ca  dasi  dasS  ca,  etc.) ;  -byaflja- 
nani  (pi.)  characteristics  of  a  layman,  or  of  a  man  of 
the  world  (w.  ref.  to  articles  of  dress  &  ornament) 
Sn  44,  64  (  =  Nd'  229);  Miln  11  ;  -bhuta  as  a  house- 
holder D  11.196;  -bhoga  riches  of  a  worldly  man 
S  111.93  :  It  90  ;  -linga  characteristic  of  a  layman  DhA 
II. 61.  -saiisagga  association  with  laymen  A  111.116,  258; 
-sai}yojana  the  impediments  of  a  householder  (cp.  "ban- 
dhanani) M  1.483  ;  -sukha  the  welfare  of  a  g.  A  1.80. 

Otta  [pp.  of  gayati]  1.  (pp.)  sung,  recited,  solemnly  pro- 
claimed, enunciated :  raantapadar)  gitar)  pavuttai) 
D  1.104  (cp.  gira).  —  2.  (nt.)  singing,  a  song;  grouped 
under  vacasika  khi<J(Ji,  musical  pastimes  at  Nd'  219; 


SnA  86.  Usually  comb''  with  nacca,  dancing:  A  1.261  ; 
VvSi'"  as  naca  gitadi  J  1.61  ;  VvA  131  ;  referring  to 
nacca-gita-vadita.  dancing  with  singing  &  instrumental 
accompaniment  D  ni.183  (under  samajja,  kinds  of 
festivities) ;  Vv  32*.  Same  with  visukadassana,  panto- 
mimic show  at  D  i.5~(cp.  DA  1.77 ;  KhA  36). 

-rava  sound  of  song  Mhvs  vii.30  ;  -sadda  id.  J  IV.3  ; 
Dhs  621  ;  DhA  1.15;  -ssara  id.  Vin  11.108;  A  in. 251  ; 
J  111.188. 

Oltaka  (nt.)  &  gitika  (f.)  a  little  song  J  111.507. 

Olva  (f.)  [Sk.  grivS,  to  *gner  to  swallow,  as  signifying 
throat :  see  note  on  gala  for  etym.]  the  neck  Sn  609 ; 
J  1.74  (°r)  pasareti  to  stretch  forth),  167  (pasarita"), 
207,  222,  265  ;  111.52  ;  VvA  27  (mayura°),  157  ;  DA  1.296 
(°aya  kun(Ja-daij(Jaka-bandhana,  as  exhibition  & 
punishment) :  similarly  in  the  sense  of  "  life  "  (hinting 
at  decapitation)  J  11.300  (°g  karissami  "  I  shall  go  for 
his  neck  ") ;  iv.43i=v.23. — Syn.  kai^tha  the  primary 
meaning  of  which  is  neck,  whereas  giva  orig.  throat. 

Olveyyaka  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  graiveyaka]  necklace,  an  orna- 
ment for  the  neck  (orig.  "  something  belonging  to  the 
neck,"  cp.  necklet,  bracelet,  etc.)  Vin  1.287  ;  -"^  1254  sq. 
(=Vism  247,  where  giveyya  only);  257;  111.16;  J 
IV. 395  (giveyya  only) ;  v.297  ;  vi.590  ;  VvA  104. 

Qoggola  [?]  a  kind  of  perfume  J  vi.537. 

Qacch°  in  jigucchati  (Des.  of  {nip  =  Sk.  jugupsate)  to 
detest,  see  s.  v. 

Onfija  (f.)  a  plant  (Abrus  precatorius) ;  the  redness  of  its 
berries  is  referred  to  in  similes;  DhA  iv.133  ("vaw^ni 
akkhini).     See  also  jiiijuka. 

Qo^a'  [Non-Aryan  ?]  1.  a  string,  a  cord  —  (a)  of  a  robe, 
etc.,  in  (kaya-bandhanag)  sagu;iai]  katvj  to  make  tight 
by  tying  with  a  knot  Vin  1.46  {Vin.  Texts:  "  laying  the 
garments  on  top  of  each  other,"  wrongly  construed)  ; 
11.213  (trsln.  "  folding  his  garments  ") ;  cp.  gunaka.  — 
(b)  of  musical  instruments  Vin  1.182  =  A  111.375  (viija). 
—  (c)  of  a  bow,  in  aguna  stringless  J  v.433  (dhanu). — 
2.  (a  strand  of  a  rope  as)  constituent  part, 
ingredient,  component,  element ;  with  numerals  it  equals 
-fold,  e.  g.  paflca  kamaguuS  the  5  strands  of  kama,  or 
5-fold  craving  (see  kama)  ;  ekagupai)  once,  diguQai) 
twice  Sn  714  ;  diguijai)  nivapai)  pacitvS  cooking  a  double 
meal  VvA  63  ;  catugguna  fourfold,  of  a  sanghati  D 
11.128;  S  11.221,  cp.  Rhys  Davids,  Dialogues  n.145. 
atthaguna  (hiranBa)  Th.  2,  153  ;  aneka-bhagena  gunena 
seyyo  many  times  or  infinitely  better  Pv  iv.i*;  sata- 
gUDena  sahassa"  100  and  1,000  times  PvA  41  ;  asan- 
kheyyena  gunena  infinitely,  inconceivably  Miln  106 ; 
satagunar)  sahassaguijag  Vism  126.  —  3.  (a  part  as) 
quality,  esp.  good  quality,  advantage,  merit  J  1.266; 
11.112;  ni.55,  82. — lobha"  Sn  663;  s5dhu°  Sn  678; 
slla"   J   1. 213;   11.112;   Buddha"   J   11.111;   pabbajita" 

J  I-59- 

-aggata  state  of  having  the  best  qualities,  supenority 
Dpos  IV. T.  -addha  rich  in  virtue  Sdhp  312,  561. 
-upeta  in  khuppipasahi  gunupeto  as  PvA  10  is  to  be 
read  khuppipas'  dbhibhuto  peto.  -katha  "  tale  of 
virtue,"  praise  J  1.307;  11.2.  -kittana  telUng  one's 
praises  PvA  107,  120.  -gunika  in  phrase  tantakula- 
jata  g-g-jata  at  S  iv.158.  see  under  gu|a-gunthika. 

Chipa'  [for  which  often  gula  with  common  substitution  of 
I  for  n,  partly  due  to  dissimilation,  as  malagula  >  mala- 
guna ;  cp.  Sk.  gupika  tumour :  gula  and  gaja, 
velu ;  veiju.  and  note  on  gala]  a  ball,  a  cluster,  a  chain 
(?),  in  anta"  the  intestines  ;  M  1.185- .  Kh  11.,  cp.  KhA  57 
for  expln.  —  malaguija  a  garland  or  chain  (cluster) 
of  flowers  Dh  53  (but  "gula  at  J  1.73,  74).     See  guja'. 

Qapa>  [Derivation  unknown.  Cp.  Sk.  ghuna]  a  wood- 
worm J  111.431  ("paijaka). 

Ill— 6 


Gunaka 


83 


Guhana 


GoQaka  (adj.)  [to  gula',  cp.  gulika  ?]  having  a  knot  at  the 
end,  thickened  at  the  top  (with  ref.  to  kayabandha,  see 
gupa  la)  Vin  11.136,  cp.   Vin.  Texts  11. 143. 

Oipiavant  (adj.)  [to  guna']  possessed  of  good  qualities, 
virtuous  Pv  II. 9"  (  =  jhan'  adiguna-yutta) ;  PvA  62 
(raaha°). 

Qu^i  (f)  [of  adj.  gunin,  having  guijas  or  gulas,  i.  e.  strings 
or  knots]  a  kind  of  armour  J  vi.449  (g.  vuccate  kava- 
caj)  C.) ;  see  Kern,  Toev.  p.  132. 

Qimthika  {in  meaning=gunthita)  one  who  is  covered  with 
or  wrapped  up  in,  only  in  ahi°  a  snake-trainer  (like  a 
Laocoon).  See  details  under  ahi  or  J  11.267  •  111-348  (text : 
"gundika) ;  J  iv.308  (ahi-kundika,  v.  1.  SS  gunthika)  ; 
rv.456  (text  °guntika;  v.  1.  BB  °kundika).  Also  in 
guja-guijthika  (q.  v.). 

GuQtluina  covered  over  (?),  see  pali°. 

OnQtbeti  [cp.  Sk.  gunthayati  Dhtp  (563)  &  Dhtm  (793) 
give  both  roots  gnvt^  ^  SVS^i  as  syn.  of  vefh]  to  cover, 
to  veil,  to  hide :  pp.  gunthita  in  par)su°  covered  with 
dust  Pv  11.3'  (in  Hardy's  conjecture  for  kunthita,  q.  v.). 
Also  in  cpd.  paligunthita  obstructed,  entangled  Sn  131 
(mohena)  where  v.  1.  BB  kuijthita.     Cp.  0°. 

Qu]L4ika  see  guijt^ka- 

Gntta  [Sk.  gupta,  pp.  of  gap  in  med.-pass.  sense,  cp. 
gopeti). —  I.  as  pp.  guarded,  protected.  —  (a)  lit. 
nagarai)  guttarj  a  well-guarded  city  Dh  3i5  =  Th  i,  653. 
1005  ;  Devinda°  protected  by  the  Lord  of  gods  Vv  30^. 
—  (b)  fig.  (med.)  guarded,  watchful,  constrained ; 
guarded  in,  watchful  as  regards  .  .  .  (with  loc.) 
S  IV.  70  (agutta  &  sugutta,  with  danta,  rakkhita)  ; 
A  III. 6  (atta°  self-controlled) ;  Sn  250  (sotesu  gutto-H 
vijitindriyo),  971  (id. -I- yatacarin) ;  Dh  36  (cittar))  — 
II.  as  n.  agent  (=Sk.  goptr,  cp.  kata  in  kala-kata= 
ka]ar)  kartf)  one  who  guards  or  observes,  a  guardian, 
in  Dhammassa  gutta  Dh  257,  obser\'er  of  the  Norm 
(expl.  DhA  III. 282  :  dhammojapaiinaya  satnannagata), 
cp.  dhammagutta  S  1.222. 

-indriya  one  whose  senses  are  guarded  ;  with  well- 
guarded  senses  Sn  63  (-|-rakkhita-manasano ;  expl. 
SnA  ;  chassu  indriyesu  gopitindriyo) ;  Nd^  230  ;  Vv 
J0I6  .  Pv  IV. 1^2;  -dvara  "with  guarded  doors"  always 
in  comb"  with  indriyesu  g-d.  having  the  doors  of  the 
senses  guarded,  practising  self-control  D  i.63;5j(expl'' 
DA  1. 182  by  pihita-dvaro),  70;  S  11.218;  iv.103,  112, 
119  sq.,  175;  Sn  413  (-t-susagvuta) ;  Pug  24.  Cp.  foil.  ; 
-dvarata  (f.  abstr.  to  prec.)  in  indriyesu  g°  self  con- 
straint, control  over  (the  doors  of)  one's  senses,  always 
comb''  with  bhojane  mattaiinuta  (moderation  in  taking 
food)  D  111.213  ;  It  24  ;  Pug  20,  24  ;  Dhs  1347  ;  PvA  163. 
Opp.  a°  lack  of  sense-control  D  in. 2 13  ;  It  23  :  Dhs  1345. 

Gntti  (f.)  [\'edic  gupti]  protection,  defence,  guard  ;  watch- 
fulness. —  (a)  lit.  of  a  city  A  iv.106  sq.  —  (b)  fig.  of  the 
senses  in  indriyanar)  gutti  Dh  375  ;  Pug  24  {-(-gopana)  ; 
Dhs  1348  ;  Sdhp  341  (agutti) ;  Vin  iv.305  ;  A11.72  (atta°)  ; 
also  in  pi.  :  guttisu  ussuka  keen  in  the  practice  of  watch- 
fulness D  in.  148. 

Gattika  [fr.  last]  a  guardian,  one  who  keeps  watch  over, 
in  nagara"  the  town-watchman,  the  chief-constable 
PvA  4  ;  Miln  345. 

Oumpha  see  ogumpheti. 

Gumba  [Sk.  gulma,  *glem  to  *gel,  to  be  thick,  to  con- 
glomerate, cp.  Lat.  giomus  (bain,  globus,  etc.  See 
gula]  I .  a  troop,  a  heap,  cluster,  swarm.  Of  soldiers : 
Vin  1.345;  of  fish  (maccha")  D  i.84  =  M  1.279=11.22  = 
A  1.9. — 2.  a  thicket,  a  bush,  jungle;  the  lair  of  an 
animal  in  a  thicket  (sayana"  J  iv.256)  S  in.6  (elagala°) ; 
J  111.52  (nivasa",  vasana")  ;  VvA  301  (gaccha°  under- 
wood); J  r.T49.   167,  n.19;  iti.55;  iv.438;'VvA  63,  66. 


Cp.  pagumba=  gumba,  in  vana°  Sn  233  (see  KhA  192). 
velu°  Th  1. 919. —  Ace.  gumbai)  (adv.)  thickly,  in  masses 
balled  together  Miln  117  (of  clouds), 
-antara  thicket  VvA  233. 

Gambiya  (adj.)  [fr.  gumba]  one  of  the  troop  (of  soldiers) 
Vin  1.345. 

Goyha  [ger.  of  giih=Vedic  guhya]  i.  adj.  to  be  hidden, 
hidden  in  °bhaij(Jaka  the  hidden  part  (of  the  body) 
DhA  IV. 197.  —  2.  (nt.)  that  which  is  hidden;  lit.  in 
vattha"  hidden  by  the  dress,  i.  e.  the  pudendum  D  1.106  ; 
Sn  1022.  etc.  (see  vattha),  fig.  a  secret  Miln  92  ; 
guyhar)  pariguyhati  to  keep  a  secret  A  iv.31  ;  Nd'  510. 

Gnra  (adj.-n.)  [a  younger  form  of  garu  (q.  v.) ;  Sk.  guru] 
venerable,  reverend,  a  teacher  VvA  229.  230  (°dakkhii)i 
a  teacher's  fee)  ;  PvA  3  (°jana  venerable  persons) ; 
Sdhp  227  (°upadesa),  417. 

Ga|a*  [Sk.  guda  and  guli  ball,  gutika  piU,  gunika  tumour ; 
to  *glcu  to  make  into  a  ball,  to  conglomerate.  Cp. 
Sk.  glauh  ball ;  Gr.  yXovrve  ;  Ohg.  chUuwa  ;  Ger.  kugel, 
kloss ;  E.  clot,  cleat ;  also  *gel  with  same  meaning : 
Sk.  gulma  tumour,  gilayu  glandular  swelling ;  cp.  Lat. 
glomus,  globus  ;  Ger.  klamm  ;  E.  clamp,  clump.  A  root 
gnj  is  given  by  Dhtp  576,77  in  meaning  of  "  mokkha  "] 
a  ball,  in  cpds.  sutta°  a  ball  of  string  (  =  Ohg.  chliuwa) 
D  1.54=  ;  M  III. 95 ;  PvA  145  ;  ayo°  an  iron  globe  Dh 
308  ;  DA  1.84 ;  loha°  of  copper  Dh  371  ;  sela°  a  rockball, 
i.  e.  a  heavy  stone-ball  J  1.147. 

-kila  play  at  ball  DhA  1.178  ;  111.455 ;  iv.124.  -pari- 
mandala  the  circumference  of  a  ball,  or  (adj.)  round, 
globular,  like  a  ball  PvA  253. 

Guja"  (Non- Aryan  ?]  sugar,  molasses  Vin  1.2 10,  224  sq., 
245.  — saguja  sugared,  sweet,  or  "with  molasses" 
J  VI. 324  (sagulani,  i.  e.  saguja-puve  pancakes). 

-asava  sugar-juice  VvA  73.  -odaka  s.  -water  Vin 
1.226.  -karana  a  sugar  factory  ibid.  210.  -puvaka 
sweet  cake  Mhvs  10.  3.     -phanita  molasses  VvA  179. 

Gula''  [for  guna^.  due  to  distance  dissimilation  in  mani- 
guna  and  malaguna  >  manigula  and  malagula ;  cp. 
similarly  in  meaning  and  form  Ohg.  chliuwa  >  Ger. 
knauel]  a  cluster,  a  chain  (?).  in  mani°  a  cluster  of 
jewels,  always  in  simile  with  ref.  to  sparkling  eyes 
"  maniguja-sadisani  akkhini "  J  1.149;  111126.  184  (v.  I. 
BB  °gulika)  ;  iv.256  (v.  1.  id.) ;  mala°  a  cluster,  a  chain 
of  flowers,  a  garland  J  1.73,  54;  puppha°  id.  Dh.  172, 
233- 

Gll}a  (f  )  [to  guja']  a  swelling,  pimple,  pustule,  blight,  in 
cpd.  guja-gunthika-jata  D  11.55,  which  is  also  to  be  read 
at  A  II. 2 1 1  (in  spite  of  Morris,  prelim,  remarks  to  A  11. 4, 
whose  trsln.  is  otherwise  correct)  =  guJ5  -gunfhita  covered 
with  swelhngs  (i.  e.  blight) ;  cp.  similar  expression  at 
DhA  III. .^97  gandagan(Ja  (-jata)  "  having  become  covered 
all  over  with  pustules  (i.  e.  rash)."  All  readings  at 
corresp.  passages  are  to  be  corrected  accordingly,  viz.. 
S  11.92  (guligandhika°)  ;  iv.158  (gunagunika°) ;  the 
reading  at  Dpvs  xii.32,  also  v.  1.  SS  at  A  11.211,  is  as 
quoted  above  and  the  whole  phrase  runs  :  tantakulajatS 
gujagunthikajata  "  entangled  like  a  ball  of  string  and 
covered  with  blight." 

Gu]ika  (adj.)  [to  gula^  =  guna,  cp.  also  gunaka]  like  a  chain, 
or  having  a  chain,  int.  &  f.)  a  cluster,  a  chain  in  mani° 
a  strin  ;  of  jewels,  a  pearl  necklace  J  111.184  (v-  '•  ^^ 
for  °gula) ;  iv.256  ;  Vism  285  (-f  murta-gujika). 

Gu|ika  (f.)  [to  gula'  ;  cp.  Sk.  gufikS  pill,  gunika  tumour] 
a  little  ball  S  v. 462  (satta-kolatthi-mattiyo  gulik.T,  pi.) ; 
Th  2,  498  (kolatthimatta  g°  balls  of  the  size  of  a  jujube), 
cp.  ThA  289. 

Qahana  (f.  abstr.  to  giihati)  hiding,  concealing,  keeping 
secret  Vbh  358  (4-pariguhan5).     Also  as  gubana,  q.  v. 


Guha 


83 


Go 


Chlh&  (i-)  [Vedic  guha,  goh,  guhati  to  hide  (q.  v.)  Dhtp 
337:  sag varana]  a  hiding  place,  a  cave,  cavern  (cp. 
kandara  &  see  giriguha) ;  fig.  the  heart  (in  °asaya). 
According  to  Bdhgh.  (on  Vin  1.58,  see  Kim.  Texts  1.174) 
"  a  hut  of  bricks,  or  in  a  rock,  or  of  wood."  Vin  1.58, 
96,  107,  239,  284;  II. 146;  HI. 155;  IV. 48  (cp.  sattapaQ- 
Qi-guha) ;  Sn  772,  958;  J  11. 418;  vi.574 ;  Vv  50'". 

-asaya  hiding  in  the  heart ;  or  the  shelter  of  the  heart 
A  rv.98  (maccupaso  + ) ;  J  v.367  (id.);  Dh  37  (cittag  ; 
see  DhA  1.304). 

Sa  (-")  [fr.  gam,  cp.  °ga]  going,  having  gone  (through), 
being  skilled  or  perfected  in.  See  addha°,  anta°, 
chanda",  dhamma",  patfha",  para,  veda°. 

8&tlu  [Sk.  gutha;  probably  to  Lat.  bubino.  see  Walde, 
Lat.  Wtb.  s.  v.]  excrements,  fasces,  dung.  As  food  for 
Petas  frequently  mentioned  in  Pv ;  (cp.  Stede,  l^eia 
Vatthu  24  sq.),  as  a  decoction  of  dung  also  used  for 
medicinal  purposes  (Vin  1.20O  e.  g.).  Often  comb 
with  mutta  (urine) :  Pv  1.9'  ;  PvA  45,  78  ;  DA  1.198. 

-kafaha  an  iron  pot  for  defecation  Vin  iv.265.  -kalala 
dung  &  mire  J  111.393  ;  -kilana  playing  with  excrements 
Vism  531.  -kupa  a  privy  (cp.  karisa)  M  1.74 ;  Sn  279 ; 
Pv  11.3'*  ;  Pug  36  ;  J  VI. 370  ;  Vism  54.  -khadaka  living 
on  fxces  J  11.211  ("paijaka)  PvA  266;  -gata  having 
turned  to  dung  It  go  ;  -gandhin  smelling  of  excrements 
Pv  11.3'^;  -t^hana  a  place  tor  excrementation  Th  i, 
"53;  -naraka=foIl.  Vism  501;  -niraya  the  miie- 
purgatory  VvA  226;  Sdhp  194;  -pana  an  insect  living 
on  excrement  (=°khadakapai3a)  J  11.209,  212;  -bhak- 
kha  feeding  on  stercus  M  111.168  ;  PvA  192  ;  DhA  11.61  ; 
-bhanin  of  foul  speech  A  1.128;  Pug  29  (Kern,  Toev. 
s.  v.  corrects  into  kuta°  ?). 

Oathaka  "  a  sort  of  gutha,"  excretion,  secretion,  rheum, 
in  akkhi°  and  kanna°  (of  eye  &  ear)  Sn  197  (cp.  SnA 
248;  Vism  345  sq.j. 

Ofi}ha  &  galhaka  (adj.)  [pp.  of  guhati]  hidden,  secret 
Vin  11.98  (gulha-ko  salakagaho). 

Ofihati  [Sk.  guhati,  pp.  gS<Jna ;  see  guyha.  guhi,  etc.]  to 
hide,  to  conceal.  See  pati",  pari".  —  Caus.  guhayati 
Sdhp  189  (guhayar)  ppr.).     Cp.  gulha. 

Oahana  (nt.)  hiding,  concealment  Sdhp  65  (laddhi°-citta). 

Oahana  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  guhati]  =  guhana  (q.  v.)  I'ug  19. 
Cp.  pari". 

(}«94aka  a  ball  for  playing.  The  SS  spelling  is  in  all 
places  bhenduka,  which  has  been  taken  into  the  text 
by  the  editors  of  J.  and  DlisA.  The  misspelling  is  due 
to  a  misreading  of  Smghalese  bh.  ,■  g  ;  cp.  spelling  para- 
bhetva  for  paragetva.  —  bhe^idukena  kiji  J  iv.30 ; 
bhumiyai)  pahata-bhenduka  (striking  against  the 
ground)  J  iv.30 ;  Vism  143  (pahata-citra"')  =  Dh5A 
116  (where  wrongly  pahattha-citta-bhenduka) ;  J  v.  196 
(citra-bh°) ;  DhA  in. 364. 

Oedha'  [Vedic  gj-dhya,  cp.  gijihati]  greed.  Its  connection 
with  craving  and  worldly  attachment  is  often  referred 
to.  Kamesu  g°  S  1.73;  Sn  152  ;  A  111.312  sq.  (gedho : 
paflcann'  etai)  kamagunanag  adhivacanar)).  gedha- 
tanha  S  1.15  (v.  1.  kodha°) ;  Sn  65,  945,  1098  ;  Th  2,  352  ; 
Nd"  231;  Dha  1059  (under  lobha),  1136;  Nett  18: 
DhA  1.366 ;  PvA  107.  -agedhata  freedom  from  greed 
Miln  276.  —  See  also  gedhi  &  paligedha. 

Oedha''  [=geha  ?  Kern]  a  cave  A  1.154=111.128  (the  latter 
passage  has  rodha,  cp.  v.  1.  under  gedhi). 

Qedtal  [Sk.  grdhi,  cp.  gedha]  greed,  desire,  jealousy,  envy : 
gedhir)  karoti  (c.  loc.)  to  be  desirous  after  M  1.330. 
-gedhikata  in  "citta  (adj.)  jealous,  envious,  ibid.  As 
gedhikata  (f.)  vanity,  greed,  conceit  Nd^  585  (v.  1. 
rodhigata). 


Gedhita  [pp.  of  gijjbati]  greedy,  in  gedhita-mano  greedy- 
minded  Pv  11.8^  ;  as  nt.  greed,  in  der.  gedhifatta  (syn. 
of  gedhikata)  Nd^  585. 

Oeyya  (nt.)  [grd.  of  gayati,  Sk.  geya]  a  certain  style  of 
Buddhist  literature  consisting  of  mixed  prose  &  verse. 
It  is  only  found  in  the  ster.  enum  of  the  Scriptures  in 
their  ninefold  division,  beginning  suttag  gej^ag  veyya- 
karanag.     See  under  navanga. 

Geruka  (nt.)  &  geruka  (f.)  [Sk.  gairika]  yellow  ochre 
(Bdhgh  suvauna"  cp.  Sk.  kaiicana"  &  svarria"),  red 
chalk  used  as  colouring  Vin  1.203;  11. 151  ;  A  1.210; 
Miln  133  (°cunna).  Freq.  in  °parikanuna  a  coating  of 
red  chalk,  red  colounng  Vin  11. 117,  151,  172;  °pari- 
kammakata  "  coated  with  red  colouring  "  Vin  1.48 ; 
11.218. 

Gelanna  (nt.)  [u-abstr.  fr.  gilana]  sickness,  illness  D  11.99; 
A  1. 219;  111.298;  IV. 333  sq.  ;  Vism  321,  4C6,  478. 

Geha  (nt.)  [Sk.  geha=grha,  to  grh,  gaijhati ;  cp.  gaha, 
gihin,  ghara ;  see  also  gedha^]  a  dwelling,  hut,  bouse ; 
the  household  J  1.145,  266,  290;  11.18,  103,  i  lo,  155 
VI. 367 ;  Vism  593;  PvA  22,  62,  73,  82;  fig.  of  kaya 
(body)  Th  i,  i84=Dh  154.  —  Appl'  to  a  cowshed  at 
Miln  396. 

-angana  the  open  space  in  front  of  the  house  VvA  6 ; 
-jana  (sg.  collective)  the  members  of  the  household,  the 
servants  PvA  16,  62,  93  ;  -jhapana  incendiarism  Vism 
326.  -tthana  a  place  for  a  dwelling  DhA  111.307; 
-dvara  the  house  door  PvA  61  ;  -nissita  (adj.)  con- 
cerning the  house,  connected  with  (the  house  and) 
worldly  life  Sn  280  (papiccha)  ;  It  117  (vitakka) ;  cp. 
'sita  ;  -patana  the  falling  of  the  house  J  iii.i  18.  -pave- 
sana  (-mangala)  (the  ceremony  of)  entering  a  new  hut 
DhA  111.307;  -pitthi  the  back  of  the  house  PvA  78; 
-rakkhika  keeping  (in  the)  house,  staying  at  home 
VvA  76  (daraka) ;  -vigata  (nt.;  the  resources  of  the 
house,  worldly  means,  riches  Th  2,  327  (  =  upakarana 
ThA  234);  -sita  (*.srita)=  "nissita,  connected  with 
worldly  life  (opp.  nekkhamma,  renunciation).  Of 
chanda  &  vitakka  (pi.)  M  1.123;  domanassa  &  soma- 
nassa  (grief  &  pleasure)  S  iv.232  =  Miln  45;  Vbh  381  ; 
DhsA  194;  dhamma,  etc.  S  iv.71  ;  Vbh  380  ;  Nett  53. 

Go  (m.-f.)  [Vedic  go,  Lat.  bos,  Gr.  /Jof's,  Ohg.  chuo,  Ags. 
cu  =  E.  cow]  a  cow,  an  ox,  bull,  pi.  cattle.  For  f.  cp. 
gavi ;  see  also  gava°  for  cpds.  — •  Sg.  nom.  go  (Sn  580, 
also  in  composition,  cp.  aja-go-mahisadi  PvA  8o  =  pasu) ; 
gen.  gavassa  (M  1.429) ;  instr.  gavena,  gavena ;  ace. 
gavaij,  gavan ;  abl.  gavamha,  gav,\  (D  1.201=  A  11.95  = 
Pug  69) ;  loc.  gavamhi,  ga\'imhi  (SnA  323),  gave  (Su 
310).  —  PI.  nom.  gavo  (D  1.141  ;  M  1.225;  A  1.205; 
11.42  sq.  ;  Sn  20,  296,  307 ;  J  1.295) ;  gen.  gonag  A  11.75 
(cp.  Vedic  gonam),  gavag  (J  iv.172,  cp.  gavag  pati), 
gunnag  (A  1.229,  "-75  '•  v. 271  ;  J  1.194  ;  iii.i  12  ;  iv.223) ; 
instr.  gohi  (Sn  33) ;  ace.  gavo  (M  1.225 ;  A  1.205  ;  Sn 
304;  Dh  19,  135);  abl.  gohi;  loc.  gosu,  gavesu.  —  See 
also  gava,  gavesati,  gopa. 

-kantaka  the  hoot  of  an  ox,  in  °hata  bliunii,  trampled 
by  the  feet  of  cattle  Vin  1.195  ;  A  1.136  (cp.  \'in.  Tc.tli 
11.34)  ■  -kanna  a  large  species  of  deer  J  v.4c;()  (=ganin), 
410  (kliagga-l- ) ;  DhsA  331  (gavaya-H);  cp.  next; 
-kana  {I.)  =gokani.ia  D  111.38  =  53;  -kula  (nt.)  a  cow 
pen,  a  station  of  cattle  S  iv.289  ;  -gana  a  herd  of  cattle 
M  1.220;  A  1.229;  J  11-127;  DhA  1.175;  ^  v.\  311; 
-ghagsika  a  cow-hide  (.')  \in  11.117  (cp.  Vin.  Texts 
111.98) ;  -ghataka  one  who  kills  cows,  a  butcher  D  11.294 
(in  simile) ;  M  1.58.  244,  364  (°suna,  slaughter-house) ; 
S  11.255;  IV.56;  A  111.302,  3«o  ;  J  v.270  ;  Visn\  348  (in 
simile).  -cara  I.  Lit.  A  (noun-m.)  pasture,  lit.  "  a 
cow's  grazing,"  search  after  food;  fodder,  fuo<l.  sub- 
sistence (a)  of  animals  :  J  1.2-I  ;  111.26  ;  Dh  135  (dancjena 
gopalo  gavo  paceti  gocarag  :  with  a  stick  the  cowherd 
dri"es  the  cattle  to  pasture).  Siho  gocaraya  pakka- 
mati   "  the   hon   goes   forth  for   his   huut  "   A   11. 33"= 


11—6* 


Go 


84 


Gotta 


III.  12 1  ;  gocar&ya  gacchati  to  go  feeding,  to  graze  Sn  39  ;   I 
J  1.243 ;  gocare  carati  to  go  feeding,  to  feed  J  1.242. — 
(b)  metaph.  of  persons,  esp.  the  bhikkhu  :  pucchitabba 
gocara  (and  agocara)  "  enquiries  have  to  be  made  con- 
cerning the  fitness  or  otherwise  of  his  pasturage  (i.  e. 
the  houses  in  which  he  begs  for  food)  "   Vin  11.208  ; 
samaQO  gocarato  nivatto  an  ascetic  returned  from  his 
"grazing"   Pv  iv.i*' :   Similarly  at  Vism    127,  where 
a  suitable  g.-gama  ranks  as  one  of  the  7  desiderata  for 
one  intent  on  meditation.  — B.  (adj.)  (-°)  feeding  on  or 
in,  living  in ;  metaph.  dealing  with,  mixing  with.   vana° 
living  in  the  woods  Pv  u.6^ ;  vSri"  (in  water)  Sn  605  ; 
jala"  (id.)  J  11.158  (opp.  thala").     Veslya"  (etc.)  asso- 
ciating with  V.  Vin  1.70.  —  II.  Applied.  A.  (noun — m.  or 
nt.)  a  "field  "  (of  sense  perception,  etc.),  sphere,  object ; 
-°  food  for,  an  object  of  (a)  psychologically :  indiiyknai) 
n^agocar&ni    various    spheres    of    sense-perception    S 
y.2i8;    sense-object    (  =  arammanai))    Ps   1.180  ;    11.97; 
150  sq. ;   DhsA  314.   315   (sampatta°  physical  contact 
with  an  object,  gandha°  smell-contact,  i.  e.  sensation) ; 
indriya"    Sdhp    365.  —  (b)    ethically :    ariy&nar)    gocare 
rata  "  finding    dehght   in   the   pasture   of   the   good," 
walking  in  the  ways  of  the  good  Dh  22  ;  vimokho  yesai) 
gocaro  "  whose  pasture  is  Uberty  "  Dh  92  =  Th  i,  92. 
Esp.  in  phrase  acara-gocara-sampanna  "  pasturing  in  the 
field  of  good  conduct  "  D  1.63  =  It  118  ;  M  1.33;  S  v.187  ; 
It.  96 ;  analysed   as   Dvandva  cpd.  at  Vbh  246,   247, 
but   cp.   pipacSra-gocara   Sn   280,    282.     This  phra.se 
(acAra-gocara)  is  also  discussed  in  detail  at  Vism  19, 
where  3  kinds  of  gocar&  are  distinguished,  viz.  upanis- 
saya°,  Srakkha°,  upanibandha°.      So  also  in  contrast 
w.  agocara,  an  unfit  pasture,  or  an  unfit,  i.  e.  bad, 
sphere  of  life,  in  gocare  &  agocare  carati  to  move  ip  a 
congenial  or  uncongenial  sphere  A  111.389 ;  iv.345  sq. ; 
D  111.58=77;  S  V.147;  Vbh  246,  247  (expl.  w.  vesiya" 
etc.,  cp.  above = having  bad  -associations). — B    (adj.) 
-° :  belonging  to,  dependent  on,  falling  to  the  share  of : 
eta"  dependent   on   this   M   1.319;    satt£isaddhamma°, 
moving  in  the  sphere  of  the  seven  golden  rules  S  ui.83  ; 
rupa°    to   be   perceived    by   sight    J    1.396 ;    Nibbana" 
belonging  to  N.   Sdhp  467.     -°kusala   (adj.)  skilled  in 
(finding  proper)  food  ;  clever  in  right  Uving  -°  behaving 
properly  in,  exercising  properly  M  1.220  =  A  v.347  (of 
a  cowherd  driving  out  his  cattle) ;  S  111.266  sq.  (samS- 
dhi°);  A  ui.311  (do.)  v  352  sq.  (w.  ref.  to  cattaro  sati- 
pat(hilna) ;  -'gaharta  the  taking  of  food,  feeding  J  1.242  ; 
-'gima  a  village  for  the  supply  of  food  (for  the  bhik- 
khus)  PvA  12,  42  ;  -°Uhana  pasturage  J  iu.52  ;  -"pasuia 
intent  on  feeding  J  111.26  ;  -°bh<imi  pasturage,  a  common 
DhA  111.60  ;  -°visaya  (the  sphere  of)  an  object  of  sense 
S  V.218;  Vbh  319;  -cara^a  pasturing  J  vi.335  ;  -t^ha 
(nt.)  [Sk.  gostha  to  gthi  to  stand ;  cp.  Lat.  stabulum, 
stable ;  super-stes  ;  Goth,  awistr]  a  cow-stable,  cow-pen 
M  1.79 ;  J  rv.223 ;  -pa  [Sk.  gopa,  cp.  gopati]  a  cowherd, 
herdisman  Sn  18  ;  Dh  19 ;  J  iv.364  (a  robber) ;  Vism  166 
\in  simile);  DkA   157,  f.  gopi  Sn  22,   32;  -pakhuma 
(adj.)  having  eyelashes  like  a  heifer  D  11. 18;  in. 144, 
167  sq. ;  VvA  162,  279  (=  aiarapamha) ;  -pada  a  cow's 
footprint,  a  puddle  A  111.188 ;  iv.102  ;  Miln  287  ;  also  °pa- 
daka  A  in.i88  v.  1. ;  DA  1.283  ;  -pari^ayaka  leader  of  the 
cows,  Ep.  of  a  bull  (gopita+)  M  1.220,  225;  -pala  a 
cowherd  (usually  as  °ka)  Dh  135;  -palaka=prec.  Vin 
1. 152,  243  sq. ;  M  1.79,  115  sq.,  220  =  A  v.347;  M  1.333; 
S  IV. 181  ;  A  1.205  (-"uposatha) ;  Miln  18,  48;  Vism  279 
(in  comparison) ;  DhA  111.59  :  -P'ta  "  father  (protector) 
of  the  cows  "  =  gavag  pati,  Ep.  of  a  bull  M  1.220  (-f  °pari- 
payaka) ;  -pi  f.  of  gopa,  q.  v. ;  -pura  (nt.)  [Sk.  gopura] 
the  gate  of  a  city  J  vi.433 ;   Miln   i,  67,   330;   Bdhd 
138,   -balivadda  in  °nayena;  in   the  expression  goba- 
Uvadda  (black-cattle-bull)  i.  e.  by  an  accumulation  of 
words  VvA  258 ;  -bbatta  cows*  fodder  J  iv.67 ;  -man^ala 
ox-beat,   ox-round,   cp.   111.15*   (as  ga°),  quoted  j'  1.47 
(cp.  assa-m°) ;  SnA  39 ;  also  in  phrase  "paribbajha  Sn 
301     (expl''     by    SnA    320    as    goyuthehi    parikixma) ; 
J  vi.27 ;  at  M  1.79  however  it  means  the  cowherds  or 


peasants  (see  note  M  1.536  :  gopaladaraka  or  gamadarakS 
to  V.  1.  gamaQiJala)  cp.  gamaij^ala ;  -maya  (m.  nt.) 
cowdung  M  1.79;  A  1.209,  295;  v. 234,  250,  263  sq. ; 
Nett  23  ;  DhA  1.377.  -°pdnaka  a  coprophagan,  dor 
beetle  J  11. 156;  -"pinda  a  lump  of  cowdung  J  1.242; 
-"bhahkha  eating  cowdung  D  1.166;^;  -mayu  a  jackal 
Pgdp  49 ;  -mutta  (and  °ka)  a  precious  stone  of  light  red 
colour  VvA  hi;  DhsA  151;  -me<laka=gomuttaka 
VvA  III.;  -medha  a  cow  sacrifice,  in  °yaflfia  SnA  323  ; 
-yutha  a  herd  of  cows  SnA  322  ;  DhA  1.323 ;  -rakkha 
(f.)  cow- keeping,  tending  cattle,  usually  comb''  with 
kasi,  agriculturing  M  1.85  ;  Pv  1.5*  ;  J  1.338  ;  II. 128  ;  given 
as  a  superior  profession  (ukkattha-kanuna)  Vin  iv.6. 
-ravaka  the  bellowing  of  a  cow  M  1.225  •  -rasa  (usually 
pi.)  produce  of  the  cow,  enum''  in  set  of  five,  viz. 
khira,  dadhi,  takka,  navanita,  sappi  (milk,  cream, 
buttermilk,  butter,  ghee)  Vin  1.244;  DhA  1.158,  323, 
397 ;  VvA  147 ;  SnA  322  ;  -rupa  (collect.)  cattle  J  1.194  ; 
IV.  1 73  ;  Miln  396  (bull) ;  -lakkhana  fortune  telling  from 
cows  D  1.9;^;  ;  -vaccha  (khira"'  &  takka")  Vism  2  3. 
-vatika  [Sk.  govratin]  one  who  lives  after  the  mode  of 
cows,  of  bovine  practices  M  1.837 .'  Nett  99  (cp.  govata 
DhsA  355,  and  Dhs.  trsl.  p.  261);  -rikattana  (and 
"vikantana;  Sk.  vikrntana)  a  butcher's  knife  M  1.244, 
449;  A  III. 380  Sdhp  381  (vikatta  only);  -vittaka  one 
whose  wealth  is  cattle  J  1.191  ;  -vinda  the  supt.  of  cow- 
herds A  111.373  ;  -sappi  ghee  from  cow's  milk  Vin  111.251  ; 
DhsA  320;  •s&la  cow-stable  A  1.188  ;  -singa  a  cow's 
horn  Vism  254.  -sita  mixed  with  milk  VvA  179; 
-sila=govatika  DhsA  355  ;  -sisa  (nt.)  an  excellent  kind 
of  sandal  wood  PvA  215  (cp.  Sp.  AvS  1.67,  68,  109); 
-hanuka  the  jaw  bone  of  a  cow,  in  "ena  kott&peti 
(kofth"  J)  to  massage  with  a  cow's  jaw  bone  Vin  11.366 , 
J  IV. 1 88  ;  V.3O3. 

Oo^AViya  (gotavisa  Text)  v.  1.  J  vi.225,  part  of  a  boat,  the 
poop  (expl.  ib.  p.  226  by  naviya  pacchimabandho). 

Oothmthala  a  medicinal  seed  [Sk.  gotravrk$a  ?  Kern] 
Vin  1.201. 

OoQa*  [The  Sanskrit  goQa,  according  to  B.  R.,  is  derived 
from  the  Pah]  an  ox,  a  bullock  S  iv.195  sq. ;  J  1. 194; 
iv.67  ;  Pv  1.8'  ;  PvA  39,  40  ;  VvA  63  (for  ploughing) ; 
DA  1.163 ;  DhA  111.60.  -"sira  wild  ox  J  vi.  538(=arafl- 
fiago^aka). 

00Qa'  =  g09aka^,  in  "santhata  (of  a  pallanka),  covered 
with  a  woollen  rug  Vv  81'  ;  Pv  iii.i'^ ;  (text  saQtbita; 
v.  1.  BB  goQakatthata,  cp.  next). 

Qovaka*  [gova'J  a  kind  of  ox,  a  wild  bull  J  vi.538  (araSfia"). 

Oo^aka'  [Sk.  BSk.  gopika,  cp.  Pischel,  Beitr.  111.236 ;  also 
spelled  gonaka]  a  woollen  cover  with  long  fleece  (DA 
1.86 :  dighalomako  mahakojavo ;  caturanguladhikani 
kira  tassa  lomani)  D  i.7~  ;  S  111.144  '■  J  v.506  ;  Pv  11.13*  ; 
Th  2,  378  (-(-tuUka);  ThA  253  ( =  dlgha-lomakajako- 
java).  -"atthata  spread  w.  a  gopaka-cover  A  1.137=" 
111.50=  IV.394;  cp.  rv.94,  231  (always  of  a  pallanka). 
See  also  gopa'. 

QnywMika  an  ox-stall  Vin  1.240;  cp.  Vin.  Texts  u.121. 
As  gonisadi  Vin  111.46. 

Qotta  (nt.)  [Vedic  gotra,  to  go]  ancestry,  lineage.  There  is 
no  word  in  English  for  gotta.  It  includes  ail  those 
descended,  or  supposed  to  be  descended,  from  a  common 
ancestor.  A  gotta  name  is  always  distinguished  from 
the  personal  name,  the  name  drawn  from  place  of  origin 
or  residence,  or  from  occupation,  and  lastly  from  the 
nick-name.  It  probably  means  agnate  rather  than 
cognate.  About  a  score  of  gotta  names  are  known. 
They  are  all  assigned  to  the  Buddha's  time.  See  also 
Rh.  X).  Dialogues  1.27,  195  sq.  — jati  gotta  lakkhana 
Sn  1004;  gotta  salakkhana  Sn  1018;  Sdicca  nama 
gottena,  Sakiya  nama  jatiya  Sn  423;  jati  gotta  kula 


Gotti 


85 


Golaka 


J  II. 3 ;  j&tiya  gottena  bhogena  sadisa  "  equal  in  rank,  ! 
lineage  &  wealth  "  DhA  11.218.  — evag-gotta  (adj.) 
belooging  to  such  &  such  an  ancestry  M  1.429  ;  11.20,  33  ; 
kathai)°  of  what  lineage,  or  :  what  is  your  family  name  ? 
D  1.92  ;  nana"  (pi.)  of  various  famihes  Pv  11. 9^°.  —  With 
nama  (name  &  hneage,  or  nomen  et  cognomen) :  nama- 
gottar)  Vin  1.93 ;  11.239 ."  ^  '-9^  (^^l-  *t  ^^  1-257  ■ 
pafifiatti-vasena  n^mar)  paveni-vasena  gottai)  :  the 
name  for  recognition,  the  surname  for  Uneage) ;  Sn  648  ; 
Vv  84*^  (with  n&ma  &  nameidheyya ;  expl.  at  VvA  348- 
349 :  n^madheyya,  as  Tisso,  Phusso,  etc. ;  gotta,  as 
Bhaggavo  Bharadvajo,  etc.).  —  gottena  by  the  ancestral 
name:  Vin  1.93;  D  11.154;  Sn  1019;  Dh  393;  gottato 
same  J  i.  j6.  Examples :  Ambattba  Kaoh&yana-gottena 
D  1.92  ;  Vipassi  Kopcjafl&o  g° ;  Kakosandho  Kassapo  g°  ; 
Bhagava  Gotamo  g°  D  11.3  ;  Nagito  Kassapo  g°  DA  1.310; 
Vasudevo  Ka^ho  g°  PvA  94. 

-thaddha  conceited  as  regaurds  descent  (  +  jati''  & 
dhana°)  Sn  104 ;  -pafiha  question  after  one's  family 
name  Sn  456;  -pafisarin  (adj.)  relying  on  lineage 
D  1.99  (cp.  Dialogxtes  1.122);  A  v.327  sq. ;  -bandhava 
connected  by  family  ties  (fiati°  + )  Nd*  455  ;  -rakkhita 
protected  by  a  (good)  name  Sn  315;  VvA  72;  -Tada 
uUk  over  Uneage,  boasting  as  regards  descent  D  1.99. 

Gottt  [n.  ag.  to  gopeti=Sk.  goptr]  f.  gotti  protectress 
J  V.329- 

Gotrmbha  [gotr=gottr,  Sk.  goptr  to  gup+bhu]  "  become 
of  the  lineage  " ;  a  technical  term  used  from  tha  end 
of  the  Nikaya  period  to  designate  one,  whether  layman 
or  bhikkhu,  who,  as  converted,  was  no  longer  of  the 
worldlings  (puthujjana),  but  of  the  Ariyas,  having 
Nibbana  as  his  aim.  It  occurs  in  a  snpplementary 
Sutta  in  the  Majjhima  (Vol.  III.  256),  and  in  another, 
found  in  two  versions,  at  the  end  of  the  Angnttara  (A 
iv.373  and  v. 23).  Defined  at  Pug  12,  13  &  Vism  138 
amplified  at  Ps  1.66-68,  frequent  in  P  (Tikap.  154  sq., 
165,  324  etc.),  mentioned  at  VvA  155.  On  the  use  of 
gotrabhu  in  medieval  psychology  see  Aung,  in  Compen- 
dium, 66-68.  Comp.  the  use  of  upanissaya  at  J  1.235. 
—  °flaoa,  PPA  184  ;  Vism  673.     A°  Vism  683. 

Oodhaka  a  kind  of  bird  J  vi.358. 

OodhtraQi  (f.-adj.)  being  able  to  be  paired  (of  a  young 
cow),  or  being  with  calf  (?)  Sn  26. 


Oodhi'  (f.)  [Sk.  godha]  iguana,  a  large  kind  of  lizard 
Vin  1.215-16  (°mukha);  D  I.9S:r(°lakkha^a,  cp.  DA 
1.94);  J  11.118;  111.52;  538;  DhA  111.420.  As  godha 
(m.)  at  J  v. 489.     Dimin.  golika  at  J  11.147. 

Oodhi'  (f.)  string  of  a  lute  J  vi.580  (cp.  RV.  8,  58,  9). 

Oodbfima  wheat  (usually  mentioned  with  yava,   spelt) 
Miln  267  ;  DA  1.163  )  SnA  323.     See  dha&fia. 

Qopaka  a  guardian,  watchman  DA  1.148;  cp.  khetta°. 

Oopani  (f.)  protecting,  protection,  care,  watchfulness  (cp. 
gutti)  Pug  24  (-f-gutti)  Dhs  1348 ;  Miln  8,  243. 

Qop&naal  (f.)  a  beam  supporting  the  framework  of  a  roof; 
shaped  A  ;  fig-  of  old  people,  bent  by  age  (see  °vanka) 
Vin  111.65,  81;  S  11.263;  111156;  v.43,  228;  M  1.80 
A  1.261  ;  III. 364  ;  v. 21  ;  Vism  320  ;  DhA  ii.igo  ;  VvA  188 
-gana  (pi.)  a  collection  of  beams,  the  rafters  Vv  78* 
-bhogga  (-sama)  bent  hke  a  rafter  (nari)  J  111.395 
-vanka  (gopanasi")  as  crooked  as  a  rafter  (of  old  people, 
cp.  BSk.  gopanasi-vakra  A.vt  11.25"*)  S  1.117;  M  1.88 
A  1.138. 

Oopita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  gopeti]  protected,  guarded,  watch. -d 
(lit.  &  fig.)  J  VI. 367;  Miln  345;  SnA  116  (°indriya= 
guttindriya) ;  Sdhp  398. 

Oopeti  [Sk.  gopayati,  gnp;  cp.  gutta,  gotta]  to  watch, 
guard,  pot.  gopetha  Dh  315  ;  —  pp.  gopita  (q.  v.). 

Qopphaka  [Dem.  of  goppha  =  Sk.  gulpha]  the  ankle 
Vin  1V.H2  ;  A  iv.102;  J  v.472  ;  DhA  11.80,  214;  SnA 
11.230. 

Oomika  [Sk.  gomin]  an  owner  of  cows  S  1.6=  Sn  33,  34. 

Qolik&see  godha'. 

Qolomika  (adj.)  [inverted  diaeretic  form  fr.  Sk.  gulnia  =  P. 
gumba  viz.  *golmika  >  *glomika  > golomika]  hke  a 
cluster;  in  phrase  massug  golomikag  karapeti  "to 
have  the  beard  trimmed  into  a  ball-  or  cluster-shape  " 
Vin  11.134.  Bdhgh's  expl"  "like  a  goat's  beard"  (cp. 
Vin.  Texts  111.138)13  based  on  pop.  etym.  go-l-Ioma-f- 
ika  "  cow-hair-like,"  the  discrepancy  being  that  go  does 
not  mean  goat. 

Oolaka  a  baU  ThA  255  (kUa°). 


Gh. 


*Gha  (adj. -suffix  to  ghan)  killing,  destroying,  see  hanati. 
—  ijjagha  at  Sn  246  is  v.  1.  SS  for  inaghata.  Cp.  pati° 
&  see  also  ghana^  &  ghata. 

Ohagsati'  [Sk.  ghar$ati.  ♦ghr?  to  *gher  to  rub  or  grind,  cp. 
Gr.  x^P"^"?,  x*^/"'C'  XP'"i  enlarged  in  Lat  frendo  = 
Ags.  grindan  to  grind]  to  rub,  crush,  grind,  S  11.238  ; 
J  1. 190  (  =  ghasitug  ?  to  next?)  216;  vi.331.  —  Caus. 
ghagsapeti  to  rub  against,  to  allow  to  be  rubbed  or 
crushed  Vin  11.266.  Cp.  upani°,  pari",  &  pahaijsati'.  — 
Pass,  gharjsiyati  (ghagsiyati)  to  rub  (intr.),  to  be  rubbed 
Vin  1. 204  ;  II.  1 12. 

Oha^sati^  [  =  hai)sati  for  Sk.  hafsati,  see  hassati]  to  be 
pleased,  to  rejoice  J  iv.56  (v.  1.  ghasati).  Cp.  pahar)- 
sati^. 

Qhaosana  rubbing,  in  pada-gh°i  a  towel  for  rubbing  the 
feet  Vin  11.130. 

Ohaosiki  in  go°,  cow-hide  (?)  see  go. 

Ohacci  (f.)  [fr.  hanati,  han  and  ghan]  destruction  (usually 
-°)  D  ni.67  (mula°) ;  J  1.176  (sakufla"). 

Qha&fia  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  Sk.  ghana  to  han,  cp.  ghanya  iK; 
hatya]  killing,  destro)ring  (-°)  see  atta". 

Ohata'  [Non-Aryan  ?]  a  hoUow  vessel,  a  bowl,  vase, 
pitcher.  Used  for  holding  water,  as  well  as  for  other 
purposes,  which  are  given  under  paniya°  paribhojana" 
vacca°  at  Vin  i.i57  =  352  =  M  1.207.  In  the  Vinaya 
freq.  comb''  with  kolamba,  also  a  deep  vessel :  1.205, 
213,  225,  286.  — As  water-pitcher:  J  1.52.  93  (pupija"), 
166;  VvA  118,  207,  244  (°satena  nhato  viya) ;  PvA  66 
(udaka°),  179  (piniya"),  282.  —  In  general:  S  iv.196. 
For  holding  a  light  (in  formula  antoghate  padipo  viya 
upanissayo  pajjalati)  J  1.235  (cp-  kuta),  PvA  38.  Used 
as  a  drum  J  vi.277  (=kumbhathuna) ;  as  bhadda° 
Sdhp  319.  329. 

-pamana  (adj.)  of  the  size  of  a  large  pot  J  11.104; 
PvA  55. 

Ohata^  (m.  &  f.)  [Sk.  ghat^;  conn,  with  ganthati  to  bind 
together]  multitude,  heap,  crowd,  dense  mass,  i.  e. 
thicket,  cluster,  itthi"  a  crowd  of  women  J  iv.316; 
maccha°  a  swarm  of  fish  J  11.227;  vana°  dense  forest 
J  11.385;  IV.56;  V.502 ;  VI.  11,  519,  564;  brahma° 
company  of  brahmins  J  vi.99. 

Ghataka  [Dem.  of  prec.]  1.  a  small  jar  (?)  Vin  11.129,  '3° 
(comb''  w.  kataka  &  sammajjani) ;  cp.  Vin.  Texts 
111.130.  —  2.  the  capital  of  a  pillar  J  1.32  (cp.  kumbha). 

Qhatati  [Sk.  ghatate,  to  gtanth,  cp.  ganthati.  The  Dhtp 
gives  two  roots  ghat,  of  which  one  is  expl''  by  "  gha- 
tane  "  (No.  554),  the  other  by  "  ihayar),"  i.  e.  from 
exertion  (No.  98)]  to  apply  oneself  to,  to  exert  oneself, 
to  strive ;  usually  in  formula  utthahati  gh"  vayamati 
M  1.86 ;  S  1.267  (yamati  for  vay°) ;  Pug  51  ;  or  yuQjati 
gh°  vay"  J  IV.  131.  —  Sdhp  426,  450. 

Qha^ana  seeGhattana. 

Gbatiki'  {(■)  [to  ghata']  a  small  bowl,  used  for  begging 

alms  Th  2,  422  (  =  ThA  269:  bhikkha-kapala). 


Ghatika^  (f.)  [to  ghata^,  orig.  meaning  "  knot,"  cp.  gantha 
(%  gaijthi,  also  gaiicja]  i .  a  small  stick,  a  piece  of  a  branch, 
a  twig  J  1.331  ;  IV. 87  (khadira°) ;  vi.331  ;  Th  2,  499 
(  =  khanda  ThA  290).  upadhanaghatika  J  111.179 
(belonging  to  the  outfit  of  an  executioner) ;  pasa° 
J  11.253  is  a  sort  of  magic  stick  or  die  (  =  pasaka)  — 
2.  a  game  of  sticks  ("  tip-cat  "  sticks  Miln  trsl.  11.32). 
D  i.6;«{DA  1.S5 :  ghatika  ti  vuccati  digha-dap4akena 
rassa  dandaka-pabarana  klla,  tip-cat) ;  Vin  11.  lo ; 
III. 181  ;  M  1.266;  A  V.203  ;  Miln  229.  —  3.  a  stack 
of  twigs  S  11.178,  4  ;  (a  stick  used  as)  a  bolt  Vin  11.120, 
2u8 ;  111.  1 19;  usually  as  suci°  a  needle-shaped  stick 
Vin  11.237  (cp.  Vin.  Texts  111.106);  S  iv.290 ;  Ud  52; 
J  1.346.     Cp.  gai;i4ikadhcina. 

Ghatita  [pp.  of  ghateti]  connected,  combined  Vism  192. 

Qhati  (f)  [to  ghatai]  a  jar  DhA  1.426.  In  cpds.  also  ghati°. 
-odana  rice  boiled  in  a  jar  DhA  1.426  ;  -ka^aha  a  water 
pot.  or  rather  a  bowl  for  gathering  alms  (cp.  ghafika') 
Vin  II.  1 15  (  =  ghati-kapala  Bdhgh) ;  -kara  a  potter 
DhA  1.380  ;  Np.  of  a  kumbhakara  S  1.35,  60  ;  M  11.45  sq. 
(  =  "suttanta,  mentioned  as  such  at  DhA  111.251) ;  J  1.43. 

Ghatlyati  [Pass,  of  ghateti]  i.  to  be  connected  or  con- 
tinued DhA  1.46  (paveiji  na  gh.),  174.  —  2.  to  be 
obstructed  Nd^  102  (=  virujjhati,  patihaflfiati). 

Ghateti  [Denom.  fr.  ghata',  cp.  gantheti]  to  join,  to 
connect,  to  unite  J  1.139;  ^1-  '"  anusandhig  ghatetva 
adding  the  connection  (between  one  rebirth  &  an- 
other) J  1.220,  308. 

Ghattasee  araghatta ;  mecning  "  rubbed,  knocked  against  " 
in  phrase  ghatta-pida-tala  SnA  582  (for  ugghattha) ; 
also  at  Vin  iv.46  in  def.  of  vehasa-kuti  (a  cell  or  hut 
with  air,  i.  e.,  spacious,  airy)  as  majjhimassa  purisassa 
a-sisa-ghatta  "  so  that  a  man  of  medium  height  does  not 
knock  liis  head  (against  the  ceiling) "  ;  of  uncertain 
meaning  ("  beating  "?)  at  J  1.454  (v.  1.  for  T.  ghota). 

GhaUana  (nt.)  [Sk.  ghatana,  to  granth,  cp.  gantha] 
1.  combining,  putting  together,  combination,  composi- 
tion, J  1.220;  PA.  312,  etc.  —  2.  striking,  fig.  in- 
sulting (ghattana=  asajjana)  VvA  55.  To  meaning 
"  strike  "  cp.  sai)ghattana. 

Ghatteti  [Sk.  ghattayati]  to  strike,  beat,  knock  against, 
touch;  fig.  to  offend,  mock,  object  to.  (a)  lit.  M  11.4 
(jannukena ;  text  reads  ghatteti,  v.  1.  ghateti) ;  Sn  48 
(=sai)°  Nd"  233);  J  1.218;  Pv  rv.io»  ( =  patihagsati 
PvA  271);  DA  1.256  (=khui)seti);  DhA  1.251.  —  (b)  fig. 
A  111.343;  Sn  847  (cp.  Nd'  208);  Vism  18.  —  pp. 
ghattita  Pug  30,  36  ;  psychologically  ghatta7ati  =  ruppatj. 
B  or  S  111.86.  —  Pass,  ghatiyati  (q.v.).— Cp.  asajja  and 
ugghateti. 

Ghaota  (f)  a  small  bell  (cp.  kinkaniki)  J  iv.215 ;  VvA  36, 
37,  279  (khuddaka°).     As  ghanti  at  Vism  181. 

Ghata  (nt.)  [Vedic  ghrta,  ght  to  sprinkle,  moisten]  clari- 
fied butter  VvA  326;  Miln  41;  Sdhp  201  (-bindn). 
With  ref.  to  the  sacrificial  fire  (fire  as  eating  ghee,  or 
being  sprinkled  w.  ghee)  ghatasana ;  J  1.472  ;  v.64,  446 ; 
Pv  1.8'  (ghata.sitta). 


86 


^1 


Ghana 


87 


Ghasa 


Ghana^  [Vedic  ghana,  cp.  Gr.  ev9rivrit  ?]  (a)  (adj.)  solid, 
compact,  massive ;  dense,  thick ;  in  eka°  of  one  solid 
mass  (of  sela.  rock)  Vin  M85=Dh  8i  =  Th  i,  643  = 
Miln  386;  A  in. 378,  cp.  ghanasela-pabbata  DhA  1.74. 
—  gh.  pagsu  J  1.264  ,  pathavi  (solid  ground)  J  1.74  ; 
PvA  75;  palasa  (foliage)  PvA  113;  buddharasmiyo 
J  1.12;  "magsa  solid,  pure  flesh  DhA  1.80;  "safaka 
(thick  cloth)  J  1.292  ;  °saftcbanna  (thickly  covered) 
PvA  258;  "suvannakoWima  DhA  iv.i35;  abbha"  a 
thick  cloud  Sn  348  (cp.  SnA  348).  —  (b)  (m.) 
the  foetus  at  a  certain  stage  (the  last  before  birth  & 
the  4"^  in  the  enum.  of  the  foil,  stages:  kalala,  abb'jda, 
pesi,  gh.)  S  1.206 ;  J  rv.496 ;  Miln  40  ;  Vism  236.  The 
latter  meaning  is  semantically  to  be  explained  as 
"  swelling  "  &  to  be  compared  with  Gr.  fipiui  to  swell 
and  f/i^pwoi' =  embryo  (the  gravid  uterus). 

Ghana'  [Vedic  ghana  to  hanti  (ghanti.  cp.  ghatayati), 
*g^e3  "strike,"  cp.  Gr.  Odviu,  ip6vo(,  Lat.  of-fendo, 
Ags.  gud",  Ohg.  gundea]  a  club,  a  stick,  a  hammer ;  in 
ayo°  an  iron  club  VvA  20.  Also  coll.  term  for  a  musical 
instrument  played  by  striking,  as  cymbal,  tambourine, 
etc.  VvA  37. 

Gbanika  [to  ghana*  in  meaning  of  "  cloud  "  (Sk.)]  a  class 
of  devas  (cloud-gods  ?)  Miln  191. 

Ohamma  [Vedic  gharma=Gr.  ftf^i/juc.  Lat.  formus,  Ohg. 
etc.  warm;  to  *gnher  "  warm,"  cp.  Sk.  ghrpoti,  hara ; 
Gr.  9ipoc,  etc.]  heat ;  hot  season,  summer.  Either  in 
loc.  ghamme  J  iv.172  (=gimha-kale) ;  Pv  IV.5'  & 
ghammani  ("  in  summer  "  or  "  by  the  heat  ")  S  1.143  = 
J  III. 360  (sampareta  overcome  by  heat) ;  Sn  353 ; 
J  IV. 239  ;  V.  3. —  Or.  in  cpd.  with  °abhitatta  (ghamm.lbhi- 
tatta,  overpowered  by  heat)  M  1.74;  D  n.266;  A  in. 187 
sq. ;  Sn  1014  (cp.  353  ghammatatta) ;  Miln  318;  VvA 
40  ;  PvA  1 14. 

Ohara*  (nt.  ;  pi.  °a  Dh  241,  302)  [cp.  gaha  &  geha]  a  house 
A  11.68:  Sn  43  (gahattba  gharar)  avasanta),  337  (abl. 
ghara),  889  (id.  gharamha) ;  J  1.290  (id.  gharato) ; 
iv.2,  364,  492  (ayo") ;  Pug  57  ;  Miln  47.  Comb''  with 
vatthu  PvA  3,  17.  — sucighara  a  needle-case  VVA251. 
-Sjira  house-yard  Vism  144  (where  Dhs  A  116  in 
id.  passage  reads  gharadvara).  -avasa  the  household 
life  (as  contrasted  with  the  life  of  a  mendicant)  Vin 
it.180  (gharavasatthai)) ;  A  11.208;  M  1.179,  240,  267, 
344;  Sn  406  (cp.  S  v.350) ;  J  1. 61  ;  FVA  61  ;  -kapo^a 
[Sk.  gfhakapota]  the  house-pigeon  Miln  364,  403  ; 
•golika  house  or  domestic  lizard  J  11.147.  -dasi  a  female 
house-slave  Pv  11.3^';  -dvara  a  house-door  J  iv.142; 
Dhs  A  1 16  ;  PvA  93  ;  -bandhana  the  bonds  of  the  house, 
i.  e.  the  establishing  of  marriage  DhA  1.4 ;  -mukha 
an  opening  in  the  house,  the  front  of  the  house  Nd' 
1 77  ;  -mesin  one  who  looks  after  the  house,  a  pater 
familias.  householder  Sn  i88;  It  112  (gahattha+); 
J  VI. 575  ;  -sandhi  a  cleft  or  crevice  in  the  house  PvA  24  ; 
-sukara  a  tame,  domestic  pig  DhA  iv.16. 

Qhara^  [a  drink  (cp.  gala)  &  garala  poison]  ("-) ;  in  -°dinnak- 
abadha  sickness  in  consequence  of  a  poisonous  drink 
(expl.  as  sufiering  fr.  the  results  of  sorcery)  Vin  1.206 
(cp.  Vin.  Texts  11. Co) ;  -visa  poison  Pug  48  ,  DhA  11.38  ; 
-sappa  a  poisonous  snake  DhA  11.256. 

Oharapl  (f.)  [fr.  ghara' 1  a  house-wife  Vin  1.2 71  ;  S  1.20 1  ; 
Pv  iil.i*  (  =  ghara-sannini  PvA  174);  DhA  in. 209. 

Ohasa  (adj.-n.)  eating,  an  eater;  in  mahaggbasa  a  big 
eater  A  v. 149  (of  the  crow);  Dh  325;  Miln  288. 

Ghasati  [Vedic  grasati  &  'ghasti.  pp.  grasta,  cp.  Gr. 
ypau  to  gnaw,  ypiiffrii;  fodder,  Lat.  gramen  grass]  to  eat 
J  in. 2111  ;  ppi.  ghasamana  Vin  11.201  ;  Th  i,  749.  — Cp. 
ghasa,  ghasta  c1-  ghasa.  See  also  jaddhu.  Desid. 
jighacchati. 

Ghasta  [pp.  of  ghasati  =  Sk.  grasta]  only  invanka"  having 
eaten  or  swallowed  the  hook  (cp.  grasta-vanka)  D  11.266 
(v-g°  va  ambujo) ;  J  vi.113. 


OhSta  see  sai)°  ;  ghitana  see  ghatati 

Ghata  (usuaJly  -°)  [Sk.  ghata  &  ghatana ;  to  han  (ghan), 
strike,  kill ;  see  etym.  under  ghana'  Sc  hanti]  killing, 
murdering;  slaughter,  destruction,  robbery  D  1.135 
(g5ma°,  etc.  viUage  robbery) ;  setu°  the  pulling  down 
of  a  bridge  (fig.)  Vin  1.59,  etc.  (see  setu) ;  pantha" 
highway  robbery,  brigandage,  "  waylaying  "  J  1.253.  — 
Th  2,  474,  493  (  =  samugghata  Com.);  Sn  246  (ina°) ; 
VvA  72  (papa'-t-pSpa-vadha  *  °atip4ta).  Cp.  next  & 
vi° ;  sai)°. 

Ghataka  (adj.-°)  murdering,  destrojring,  slaughtering 
Vin  1.89  (arahanta").  136  (id.).  168  (id.);  11. 194  (ma- 
nussa°) ;  iv.260  (tala°)  J  iv.366  (g5ma°  cora  robbers 
infesting  the  village);  v. 397  (thi°  =  itthi'') ;  Pug  56 
(maccha°).  —  As  noun:  (m.)  one  who  slays,  an  execu- 
tioner: go°  a  bull-slaughterer  M  1.244,  etc.  (see  go); 
cora"  an  executioner  or  hangman  J  111.41;  Pug  56; 
PvA  5.  —  (nt.)  brigandage,  robbery,  slaughtering: 
gamaghatakai)  karoti  J  1.200. 

Ghatiki  (f.  abstr.  to  ghataka)  murder  J  1.176  sq. 

Oh&tita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  ghateti]  killed,  destroyed  ThA  289  ; 
also  in  Der.  ghatitatta  (nt.)  the  fact  of  having  killed 
J  1. 167.     Cp.  ugghatita. 

Ghatin  (adj.-n.)  killing;  a  murderer  J  1.168  (papa"); 
VI. 67  (ghatimhi=gha.take). 

Ghatimant  (adj.)  able  to  strike,  able  to  pierce  (of  a  needle), 
in  ghana"  going  through  hard  material  easily  J  in. 282. 

Ghateti  [Denom.  fr.  ghata,  cp.  Sk.  ghatayati  to  han]  to 
kill,  slay,  slaughter  It  22  (yo  na  hanti  na  ghateti) ; 
Dh  129,  405;  J  1.255;  Mhvs  vn.35,  36.  —  aor.  aghi- 
tayi  J  1.254  ;  S^^-  gbatetva  J  1.166.  —  Caus.  ghatapeti  to 
have  somebody  killed  J  iv.t24. — Cp.  ghacca,  ghStita, 
aghateti. 

Ghana  (nt.)  [Sk.  ghraoa  to  ghia,  see  ghSyati.  On  n  for 
n  cp.  Trenckner,  Notes,  p.  81]  the  nose;  usually  in  its 
function  as  organ  of  smell  =  sense  of  smell  (either  in 
phrase  ghanena  gandhai)  ghayati  :  to  smell  an  odour  by 
means  of  the  nose ;  or  in  ghana-viflfleyya  gandha : 
odours  which  are  sensed  by  the  nose).  In  the 
euum.  of  the  senses  gh.  is  always  mentioned  in  the 
3rd  place  (after  cakkhu  &  sota,  eye  &  ear) ;  see  under 
riipa.  In  this  connection:  Vin  1.34;  D  1.21,  245; 
111.102,  244  sq.  ;  S  1.115  ;  M  1.112,  191  ;  11.42  ;  Dh  36c  ; 
Pug  20;  Miln  270;  Vism  444  sq.  (with  def).  —  In 
other  connections :  Pv  ii.2<  (ghana- chinna,  one  whose 
nose  is  cut  off). 

-ayatana  the  organ  of  smell  D  111.243,  280  ;  Dhs  585, 
605,  608  ;  -indriya  the  sense  of  smell  D  111.239  ;  Dhs  585 
etc.  (as  above)  ;  -dhatu  the  element  of  smell  Dhs, 
as  above ;  -viii&ana  perception  of  smell  Dhs  443,  608. 
628  ;  -samphassa  contact  with  the  sense  of  smell  S  i.i  15  ; 
D  III.  &  Dhs  as  above. 

Ghayati*  [Sk.  ghrati  &  jighrati,  to  ghrS,  cp.  gandha]  to 
smell,  always  with  gandhag  ;  ger.  ghatva  S  iv.71,  74 
or  ghayitva  J  1.210  (jalagandhan) ;  in. 52  (maccha- 
gandhai)) ;  Miln  347.     Cp.  sayati  *  upagghayati. 

Ghayati'  [a  variant  of  jhayati]  to  be  consumed,  to  be  tor- 
mented by  thirst  Pv  1.1 1*"  (ghayire=  ghayanti  PvA  60  ; 
v.  1.  BB  jhayire  &  jhaynati)  Miln  397. 

Ghisa  [Vedic  ghasa,  fr.  ghasati,  q.  v.  cp.  Lat.  gramen  = 
grass]  grass  lor  fodder,  pasturing:  food  j  1.511  (°r| 
kurute) ;  PvA  173  ("atthaya  gacchati  "go  feeding"). 
Mostly  in:  -esana  search  for  food  (  — gocara)  S  1.141; 
Sn  711.  — Cp.  vi°. 

-chada  (chada  &  chadana)  food  &  ciothing,  i.  e. 
tending,  fostering,  good  care  (=posana)  (act.)  or  being 
well  looked  after,  well  provided  (pass.) ;  chada  :  Pug  51  ; 
chada:  J  1.94;  A  1.107;  n.85 ;  111.385;  chadana: 
D  1. 60  ;  M  1.360  ;  VvA  23,  137  ;  -haraka  one  who  fetches 
the  fodder  (food)  Th  i,  910. 


Ghisana 


GhoMti 


Qhisana    (nt.)  =  ghasa;    in 
VvA  218. 


°tthana    pasture    (=^gocara) 


Ohntths  [Sk.  ghu§tha,  pp.  ghns,  see  ghoseti  &  cp.  sar)°]  pro- 
claimed, announced ;  renowned  J  1.50  (of  festival)  ; 
425  (nakkhattai))  ;  11.248  (ussava)  ;  Pv  11.8^  (dura°  of 
wide  renown,  world- famed  of  Baraijasi) ;  DhA  lu.ioo 
(chaije  ghufthe  when  the  fair  was  opened). 

Ghnni-ghani  onomat.  expression  of  snoring  &  grunting 
noise  [gr-gT  to  'gel  or  'get,  see  note  on  gala]  in  -passasa 
(A  °in)  snoring  &.  breathing  heavily,  panting,  snorting 
&  puffing  S  I.I  15  (of  Mara);  J  1.160  (of  sleeping  bhik- 
khus,  gh°  kakacchamana  breathing  loud  &  snoring). 
Cp.  next. 

Ohnrughai&yati  [Denom.  fr.  prec.]  to  snore  J  111.538 ; 
DhA  1.307.  Cp.  Prk.  ghurughuranti  varah&  (grunting 
hogs)  &  ghurukkanti  vaggha  (roaring  tigers). 

Ohotaka  [cp.  Sk.  ghotaka,  Halayudha  2,  281]  a  (bad)  horse 
J  VI.452. 

Ghota  is  read  at  J  1.454,  probably  for  ghatfa ;  meaning  is 
"  striking,  stroke."  comb''  with  kasa,  whip. 

Qbora  (adj.)  [Vedic  ghora,  orig.  meaning,  wailing,  howling, 
lamenting,  to  *gher,  *ger,  see  note  on  gala  &  cp.  ghuru. 
A  root  ghni  is  given  by  Dhtp  487  in  meaning  of  "  bhi- 
ma,"  i.  e.  horrible.  —  Rel.  to  Goth,  gaurs,  sad ;  Ohg. 
gorag.  miserable ;  &  perhaps  Lat.  funus,  funeral.  See 
Walde,  Lai.  U'tb.  s.  v.]  terrible,  frightful,  awful  Vin 
11.147.  Freq.  as  attr.  of  niraya  (syn.  with  diUiiQa ; 
PvA  87,  159,  206)  Pv  i.io'- ;  iv.i^.     Of  an  oath  (sapatha) 


Pv  1.6*  ;  11.12".  —  ghorassara  of  a  terrible  cry  (Ep.  of 
an  ass)  Miln  363,  365. 
Qhosa  [Vedic  gho.sa  to  ghas]  i.  shout,  sound,  utterance 
Vin  H.iis  ("  Buddha  "  -ghosa) ;  M  1.294  '■  A  1.87,  228 ; 
Sn  p.  106  ;  Sn  696,  698  ;  Dhs  637,  720  ( -|-  ghosa-kamma). 
— -2.  shouting,  howling,  wailing  (of  Petas)  Pv  :ii.3' ; 
IV.3'.  3^*. 

-pamana  to  be  measured  (or  judged)  by  one's  repu- 
tation A  11.71  =  Pug  53  ;  also  as  pamanika  DhA  in.  114 
(in  same  context). 

Qhosaka  (adj.)  sounding,  proclainung,  shouting  out  (-"), 
in  dhamma°  praising  the  Law  J  11.286;  Satthu  guua° 
sounding  the  praise  of  the  Master  DhA  in. 1 14.  As  n. 
Name  of  a  deva  (Gh.  devaputta)  DhA  11 73. 

Ohonni  (f)  fame,  renown,  praise,  in  M<lra°  J  1.71. 

QbOMVant  (adj.)  fuU  of  sound,  roaring  J  in. 189. 

Qhotita  I.  [pp.  of  ghoseti]  proclaimed,  renowned,  PvA 
'°7  (  =  ghuttha);  VvA  31  (nakkhattarj).  As  Npl. 
GhositarcLma  DhA  1.53,  161,  208.  —  2.  [n.  ag.  =  ghositr. 
cp.  ghosaka]  one  who  proclaims,  advocates,  or  heralds ; 
in  Np.  Ghositasetthi  DhA  1.187. 

Ohoseti  [Denom.  of  ghosa,  cp.  Sk.  ghosayati,  caus.  to 
ghns]  to  proclaim,  announce ;  cry  aloud,  wail,  shout 
J  II. 1 12  ;  111.5.'  ;  Pv  11.937  (=uggh°) ;  iv.6' ;  pp.  ghosita 
&  ghuttba  (q.  v.).  —  Caus.  ghosapeti  to  have  proclaimed 
J  I-7I- 


c. 


Ca  (indef.  enchtic  particle)  [Vedic  ca  adv.  to  rel.  pron. 
•quo,  idg.  *qiie  =  Cr.  rf,  Lat.  que,  Goth.  -h.  Cp.  ka, 
ki,"ku]  I.  Indefinite  (after  demonstr.  pron.  in  the  sense 
of  kii)  =  what  about  .'  or  how  is  it  ?  cp.  kii))  =  ever,  who- 
ever, what-ever,  etc.  [Sk.  knsca,  Gr.  rti,  rs,  Lat.  quisque, 
Goth,  hvauuh]  so  ca  whoever  (see  below  3).  tati  ca  pan' 
amh&kat)  ruccati  tena  c'  amlia  attamana  M  1.93 ;  yan 
ca  kho  .  .  .  ceteti  yan  ca  pakappeti  .  .  .  whatever 
he  thinks,  whatever  he  intends  .  .  .  S  11.65.  As  a  rule 
the  Pali  form  corresp.  to  Sk.  ka^ca  is  *kascid  =  kc>ci, 
&  ci  (cid)  is  the  regular  P.  representative  of  the  indefi- 
nite ca  (cp.  cana  &  api).  —  2.  Copulative  or  disjututive 
according  to  the  general  context  being  positive  or 
negative,  (a)  copulative :  and,  then,  now^ :  tadS  ca 
now  then,  and  then  (in  historical  exposition)  J  111.188. 
Most  frequent  in  connecting  two  or  three  words,  usually 
placed  after  the  second,  but  also  after  the  third  :  atthag 
anatthafi  ca  Dh  256;  pubbelparani  ca  Dh  352; 
alag  etehi  ambehi  jambuhi  panasehi  ca  J  ii.ibo.  — In 
the  ^ame  sense  added  to  each  link  of  the  chain  as  ca-ca 
(cp.  Sk.  ca-ca,  Gr.  r^  re,  Lat.  que  que  ;  also  mixed  with 
constituents  of  similar  pairs  as  api-ca,  cp.  re-Koc) : 
tuyhafi  ca  tass5  ca  to  you  and  her  (orig.  this  or  what- 
ever to  you,  whatever  to  her)  =  to  you  as  well  as  to  her 
J  1. 151.  Often  with  the  first  member  emphasized  by 
eva :  c'  eva,  as  well  as :  hasi  c'  eva  rodi  ca  he  laughed 
as  well  as  cried  J  1. 167  ;  magsena  c'  eva  phalaphalena  ca 
with  flesh  as  well  as  with  all  kinds  of  fruit  J  111.127; 
iubhaddako  c'  eva  supesalo  ca  J  111.82  ;  c'  eva  apace 
padiise  pi  ca  waste  and  even  defile  ThA  72  (Ap  v.40).  — 
(b)  disjunctive :  but  (esp.  after  a  negation) :  yo  ca  but 
who  Th  I,  401  ;  yada  ca  but  when  (cp.  tada  ca)  J  111.128. 
In  conditional  clauses  (cp.  3)  comb''  with  sace=but  if. 
on  the  other  hand :  sace  agarar)  ajjhavasati  .  .  .  sace 
ca  pabbajati  agaru  Sn  io<)3.  With  neg,  na  ca  =  but 
not :  mahati  vata  te  bondi,  na  ca  panna  tadupika  (but 
your  wisdom  is  not  in  the  same  proportion)  J  11.160.  — 
3.  Conditional:  if  [=  Vedic  ced,  Lat.  absque]  D  1. 186, 
207;  11.36,  57  (jati  ca  not  va) ;  M  1.91  ;  S  111.66  (rupaii 
ca  atta  abhavis-sa) ;  A  i.5<S  ;  v.87  ;  J  ii.i  in  (ciram  pi  kho 
khadeyya  yavat)  .  .  .  ravamano  ca  dfisayi :  "  he  might 
have  eaten  a  long  time,  if  he  had  not  come  to  harm  by 
his  cry,"  or  "  but  ";  :  iv.487  ;  v.  185,  216  (Sakko  ca  mc 
varao  dajja  so  ca  labbhetha  me  varo:  "  if  S.  will  give 
me  a  wish,  that  wisli  will  be  granted."  or :  "  whatever 
wish  he  will  allow,  that  one  will  be  fulfilled  ")  ;  vi.zob, 
208.  —  na  ca  (at  the  beginning  of  an  interrog.  phrase)  = 
if  not  S  1. 190  (ahai)  ca  kho  .  .  .  pavirerai,  na  ca  me 
Bhagava  kind  garahati :  if  the  Bh.  will  not  blame  me). 
For  BSk.  ca  =  ced  sec  Av!i  11. 189.  n.  9. 

Oakita  (adj.)  ^Sk.  cakita,  oak]  disturbed;  afraid,  timid 
Davs  IV. 35.  46. 

Oakora  [Sk.  cakora  to  kol  (kor),  see  note  on  gala]  the 
francolin  partridge  (Perdix  rufa)  J  v. 416;  V'v  35*; 
VvA  163.     See  also  cankora. 

Cakka  (nt.)  [N'edic  cakra,  redupl.  formation  fr.  *qnel  to 
turn  round  (cp.  P.  kaiitha>Lat.  collus  &  see  also  note 
on  gala):=that  which  is  (continuously)  turning,  i.  e. 
wheel,  or  abstr,  the  shape  or  periphery  of  it,  i.  e.  circle. 
Cakra  =  Gr.    curXut,    Ags.  hveohl,   hveol  =  wheel.     The 


unredupl.  form  in  Sk.  carati  (versatur),  Gr.  iriXoiim,^ 
iroXf/'w,  rroXoc  (pole) ;  Lat.  colo,  incolo ;  Obiilg.  kolo' 
wheel,  Oisl.  hvel]  I.  Crude  meaning:  i.  a  wheel  (of  a 
carriage)  Dh  i  ;  PvA  65  (ratha°) ;  Miln  27.  —  2.  a 
discus  used  as  a  missile  weapon  J  1.74;  Pgdp  36;  cp. 
khura"  a  razor  as  an  instr.  of  torture.  —  3.  a  disc,  a 
circle :  hettbapadatalesu  cakkini  jatSni,  forming  the 
2'"'  characteristic  mark  of  a  MahSpurisa  D  11.17  = 
III. 143  ;  D  III. 149.  —  J  II. 331  ;  Miln  51.  —  4.  an  array 
of  troops  (under  tayo  vyuha ;  paduma"  cakka°  3akata°) 
J  11.404=  IV. 343.  —  II.  Applied  meaning:  i.  (a  wheel 
as  component  part  of  a  carriage,  or  one  of  a  duad  or 
tetrad  =)  collection,  set,  part;  succession;  sphere, 
region,  cycle  Vin  1.330  (cp.  Vin.  Texts  11.281)  ;  111.96; 
iriyipatha"  the  4  ways  of  behaviour,  the  various  posi- 
tions (standing,  walking,  sitting,  lying  down)  DA  1.249 ; 
Sdhp  1)04.  si°.  miga°  the  sphere  or  region  of  dogs  & 
wild  animals  Miln  178;  cakkena  (instr.)  in  succession 
PvA  III.  cakkag  katabbag,  or  bandhitabbai)  freq.  in 
Vam.  and  Pattb,  "The  cycle  of  formulated  words 
is  to  be  here  repeated."  —  2.  (like  the  four  wheels 
constituting  the  moving  power  of  a  carriage  = )  a 
vehicle,  instrument,  means  &  ways ;  attribute,  quality ; 
state,  condition,  esp.  good  condition  (fit  instrumentaUty), 
catucakka  an  instr.  of  four,  a  lucky  tetrad,  a  four- 
wheeler  of  the  body  as  expressing  itself  in  the  four  kinds 
of  deportment,  iriyipathas  A  1132;  S  1.16.  63  (catu- 
cakkai)).  In  this  sense  generalized  as  a  happy  state, 
consisting  of  "  4  blessings  "  :  patirupadesa-vasa,  sap- 
purisupassaya,  atta-sammapanidhi,  pubbe-kata-pufi- 
iiata  A  11.32  ;  J  v.  114;  mentioned  at  Ps  1.84.  Cp.  also 
Sn  554  sq.  ;  684.  Esp.  pronounced  in  the  two  phrases 
dhamma-cakka  (the  wheel  of  the  Doctrine,  i.  e.  the 
symbol  of  conquering  efficacy,  or  happiness  im- 
plicated in  the  D.)  and  brahma-c"  the  best  wheel,  the 
supreme  instrument,  the  noblest  quality.  Both  with 
pavatteti  to  start  *  keep  up  (like  starting  &  guiding  a 
carriage),  to  set  rolling,  to  originate,  to  make  universally 
known,  dhamma^  e.  g.  S  1.191  ;  A  1.23,  loi  ;  11. J4.  120  ; 
III. 151  ;  IV.313;  Sn  550  sq.  ;  693;  J  111.412  ;  Ps  11.159 
sq  •  PvA  67  (see  dhammaV  brahma"  M  1.71  ;  S  11.27  : 
A  11.9,  24;  III. 9.  417;  V.33;  Vbh  317  sq.;^344  (se«^ 
brahma).     Cp.  cakkavattin  (below).  —  Cp.  vi°. 

-chinna  (udaka)  (water  of  a  well)  the  wheel  of  which 
is  broken  Ud  83  ;  -bhafljanin  one  who  destroys  a  state  of 
welfare  &  good  J  v. 112  (patiripadesavasadino 
kusala-cakkassa  bhaQjani  C.)  :  -bheda  breaking  peace  or 
concord,  sowing  discord  Vin  11.198;  111.171*;  -yuga  a 
pair  of  wheels  \'v  83*  ;  -ratona  the  treasure  of  the  wheel, 
that  is  of  the  sun"(cp.  Rh.  D.  Bxiddh.  Suttas  p.  252; 
Dialogue':  11. 197,  102)  D  11.17:  ;  III. 59  SQ-  75:  J  "'3: 
11.311  ;  DA  1.249.  See  also  cakkavattin  ;  -vaftaka  (nt  ) 
a  scoop-wheel  (a  wheel  revolving  over  a  well  with  a 
string  of  earthen  pots  going  down  empty  &  coming  up 
full,  after  dredger  fashioni  Vin  11. 122  ;  -vattin  (cp. 
dhammacakkar)  pavatteti  above)  he  who  sets  rolling 
the  Wheel,  a  just  ft  faithful  king  (riji  hoti  c.  dham- 
miko  dhammaraja  cSturanto  Sn  p.  106,  in  corresp.  pass, 
v.  1002  as  vijeyva  pathavii)  imag  adaii^ena  asatthena 
dhammena-ra-anusasati).     A    definition    is    given    by 


89 


Cakkalaka 


go 


Cakkhumant 


Bdbgh.  at  DA  i  .249.  — -Three  sorts  of  c.  arc  later  dis- 
tinguished: a  cakkava|a-c°  a  iinii'eisal  king,  or  c3tu 
ranta-c°  (ruling  over  four  great  continents  Sn  p.  106  ; 
KhA  227),  a  dipa-c°  (ruhng  over  one),  a  padesa-c" 
(ruling  over  part  of  one)  Usually  in  phrase  raja  cakka 
vattin:  U  1.88;  in.  156;  iv.3n2  ;  v. 44,  99.  342  ;  D  11. 16. 
172  ;  III. 59  sq.,  75,  142  sq.  ;  M  111.65  :  A  1.76,  109  sq.  ; 
11.37,  '33-  ^45-  J"i47  sq  .  365;  iv  8g,  105;  v.22  ;  Kh 
VIII.12  ("sukha) ;  J  1.51  ;  11.395;  iv.119;  Vbb  336; 
PvA  117;  VvA  18;  Sdhp  238",  453;  DhA  11. 135  (°siri). 
-°gabbha  Vism  126  :  -°rajjai)  karesi  J  11.311;  -viddha 
(nt.)  a  particular  form  of  shooting  J  v.130  ;  -samarulha 
(adj.)  having  mounted  the  wheels,  i.  e.  their  carts  (ol' 
janapada)  A  1.178;  111.66,  104. 

Cakkalaka  [fr.  cakka]  a  disc  or  tuft  (?)  Vism  255  (kalira°, 

where  KhA  50  reads  in  same  context  kalira-dao4^)' 
Cakkali  (f)  drapery  Vin  11. 174. 
Cakkalika  a  window  blind,  curtain  Vin  11. 148. 

Cakkalaka  [Vedic  cakravSka,  cp.  krkavaku,  to  sound 
root  kr,  see  note  on  gala]  the  ruddy  goose  (Anas  Casarca) 
J  III. 520  ;  IV. 70  sq.  (N.  of  J  No.  451) ;  Pv  n.12'  ;  Miln 
364,  401  ;  —  f.  cakkavaki  J  in. 524  ;  vi. 189=501. 

Cakkavi4a  (m.  &  nt.)  a  circle,  a  sphere,  esp.  a  mythical 
range  of  mountains  supposed  to  encircle  the  world  ;  pi. 
worlds  or  spheres  J  1.53,  203 ;  vi.330  ;  Vism  205  (its 
extent),  207,  367,  421  ;  DhsA  297  ;  DhA  11.  15  ;  in. 438  ;  in 
the  trope  "  cakkavatai)  atisambadhai]  brahmaloko 
atinico  "  (  =  the  whole  world  cannot  hold  it)  to  express 
immensity  DhA  1.3 10  ;  VvA  68. 

-gabbha  the  interior  of  the  C.  sphere  J  iv.119;  DA 
1.284;  -pabbata  (nt.)  the  C.  mountains,  "world's  end" 
J  in. 32  ;  vi.272  ;  -rajja  (nt.)  the  whole  world,  strictly 
speaking  the  whole  region  of  a  sphere  J  11.392. 

Oakkhu  (nt.)  [Vedic  cak?uh,  etym.  not  clear,  as  redupl. 
perhaps  to  Iks,  aksa  eye,  kjana  moment,  or  as  intens. 
to  cit,  cp.  cinteti,  &  see  Walde,  L-it.  IVtb.  under  inquaml 
the  eye  (nom.  sg.  cakkhug  Vin  1.34  ;  S  1.115  ;  M  111.136, 
etc.).  —  I.  The  eye  as  organ  of  sense — (a)  psychologically : 
cakkhuna  riipar)  disva  "  seeing  visible  object  (shape) 
with  the  eye  "  (Nd^  on  rupa  q.  v.)  is  the  defin.  of  this 
first  &  most  important  of  the  senses  (cp.  Pv  11.6'  dak- 
khiija  c.  =  the  most  valuable  thing) :  the  psychology  of 
sight  is  discussed  at  i)A  1.194  sq.,  and  more  fully  at  J^lis 
507  sq.  (see  DhsA  306  sq  :  Dhs  trsl.  173  sq.) ;  cp.  cak 
khuna  puriso  alokati  rfipagatani  Nd^  234.  In  any  enu 
meration  of  the  senses  cakkhu  heads  the  list,  e.  g.  Vin 
1.34 ;  D  1.21  ;  11.308.  336  sq.  ;  in. 102,  225,  244  sq. ;  269 ; 
Nett  28. — Sec  rupa.  Also  combd.  with  sota  :  M  1.318  ; 
111.264  ;  A  1.28 1.  —  cakkhusmir)  hai^i^ati  rflpehi  S  iv.201  ; 
hata"  A  1.129.  passami  nar)  manasa  cakkhuna  va  "  I  see 
him  with  my  mind  as  with  my  eye  "  Sn  1 142. — \  in  1.184  ; 
S  1.32,  199  ;  IV. 123  ;  Dh  360  ;  J  IV.137  '•  ^^  1.183  ;  Nett 
191.  Vism  444  sq.  As  adj.  (-°)  seeing,  having  or  catching 
sight  of  :  eka°  (dvi°)  one-eyed  (two°)  A  1.128  sq.  ;  amisa° 
seeing  an  object  of  sensual  enjoyment  S  11.226;  iv.159; 
J  v. 91  (=kilcsaIola).  acakkhu  blind  A  111.250,  256;  Ps 
1. 1 29.  —  (b)  ethically  :  as  a  "  sense  "  belonging  to  what  is 
called  "  body  "  (kaya)  it  shares  all  the  quaUties  of  the 
latter  (see  kaya),  &  is  to  be  regarded  as  an  instr.  only, 
i.  e.  the  person  must  not  value  it  by  itself  or  identify  him- 
self with  it.  Subduing  tlie  senses  means  in  the  first  place 
acquiring  control  over  one's  eyes  (cp.  okkhitta  cakkhu. 
with  down-cast  eyes  Sn  63,  411.  972  ;  Pv  iv.3«  ;  &  indri- 
yesu  guttadvara  ;  "indiiya).  hi  this  connection  the  foil, 
passages  may  be  mentioned  :  Vin  l.34;Di.7o;Slv.i23; 
11.244  (aniccai),  etc.)  :  ur.253  (do.)  iv.81,  128  (na  tumha- 
kag) ;  Ps  1. 132  (aniccatlhar)).  Numerous  others  sec 
under  rupa.  —  II.  The  eve  m  the  most  important  channel 
of  mental  acquiring,  as  faculty  of  perception  &  apper- 
ception ;  insight,  knowledge  (cp.  vcda,  oUa  to  vid,  to 
see).  In  connection  with  tiana  (yrwciij)  it  refers  to  the 
apperception  of  the  truth  (see  dhamnia-cakUhu)  ;  intui 
tioii  and  recognition,  which  means  perfect  understand- 


ing (cp.  the  use  of  the  phrase  j<lniti  passati  "  to  know 
and  to  see"  =  to  understand  clearly).  See  e.  g.  S 
11.7-11,  105;  rv.233;  V.179;  258;  422  sq.  Most  fre- 
quently as  dhamma"  "  the  eye  of  the  truth,"  said  of 
the  attainment  of  that  right  knowledge  which  leads  to 
Arahantship,  in  phra.se  virajai)  vitamalai)  dh-cakkhug 
uppajjati  Vin  1.16;  I)  1.86,  no;  S  n.134  sq.  ;  iv.47 ; 
107;  V.467;  A  IV. 186;  Ps  11.150  sq.  ;  162;  Miln  16. 
Similarly  patii\a°.  It  52  ;  ariya"  M  1.5 10.  —  III.  The  eye 
as  the  instr.  of  supersensuous  perception,  "  clear  "  sight, 
clairvoyance.  This  is  the  gift  of  favoured  beings  whose 
senses  are  more  highly  developed  than  those  of  others, 
and  who  through  right  cognition  have  acquired  the 
two  "  eyes  "  or  visionary  faculties,  termed  dibtM- 
cakkhu  &  buddha-caVkhu  It  52  ;  D  11.38  resp.  They 
are  most  completely  described  at  Nd*  235  (under  cak- 
khuma),  &  the  foil,  categories  of  the  range  of  application 
of  cakkhu  are  set  forth  ;  1 .  magsa-cakkbu  :  the  physical 
eye  which  is  said  to  be  exceptionally  powerful  &  sensi- 
tive. See  Kv  in. 7  (trans,  p.  149  fl.).  'V'ism  428  (magsa"^ 
2  niija").— 2.dibba-°  :  thedeva-eye,  the  eye  of  a  seer,  all- 
pervading.  &  seeing  all  that  proceeds  in  bidden  worlds. — 
3 .  pafifia°  :  the  eye  of  wisdom  ;  he  who  knows  all  that  can  be 
known  (jJnar)  passag  recognizing  &  seeing,  i.  e.  of  perfect 
understanding  ;  cakkhubhiita  ii&Qa°  dhamma°  brahma°). 

—  4.  buddha° :  the  eye  of  a  Buddha  or  of  complete 
intuition,  i.  e.  of  a  person  who  "  sees  the  heart  of  man," 
of  a  being  realizing  the  moral  state  of  other  beings  and 
determined  to  help  them  on  the  Path  to  Right  Knowledge. 

—  5.  sanrianta°  :  (a  summary  account  of  Nos.  1-4,  ft.  in 
all  Scripture-passages  a  standing  Ep.  of  Gotama  Buddha, 
see  below),  the  eye  of  all  round  knowledge,  the  eye  of  a 
Tathagata,  of  a  being  perfected  in  all  wisdom.  —  Out 
of  these  are  mentioned  &  discussed  singly  or  in  sets : 
(Nos.  1-5) :  DhsA  306  ;  SnA  351  ;  (Nos.  1-3  :)  It  52  =  Kvu 
251  sg.  (It}2  =  Kvu  254);  (dibba:)  Vin  1.8,  288;  11.183; 
III. 5  ;D  1.82,  162  ;  III.  52,  III,  281  ;  M  1.213  ;  S  1.144,  196; 
11.122,  213,  276;  IV.240  ;  V.266,  305;  A  1. 165,  256,  281 
sq.  ;  111.19,  29,  418;  IV. 85,  141,  178,  ?9i  ;  v.13.  35,  68, 
200,  211,  340;  J  111.346;  Ps  1. 114;  n  175;  Vbh  344; 
PvA  5.  —  (paiiiia°:)  S  iv.292  ;  v.467;  A  1.35;  DhA 
111.174,  175.  —  (buddha°:)  Vin  1.6;  S  1.138;  Ps  H.33  ; 
PvA  61.  —  (samanta°  :)  S  i.i37  =  Nd*  2^$* ;  Sn  345,  378, 
1063.  1069,  1090,  1133;  Ps  ii.3i=Nd^  235'. 

-ayatana  (either  cakkh'  or  cakkhv°)  the  organ  or 
sense  of  sight  D  in. 243,  280,  290  ;  Dhs  585.  653  ;  -indriya 
(cakkhundriya)  the  organ  of  eye.  faculty  of  vision 
D1.70  ;  111.225,  239  ;  A  I.I  13  ;  Dhs  585,  597,  661.  830,  971  ; 
Vism  7  ;  -karana  (always  in  comb"  w.  iiatia-karana)  pro- 
ducing (right)  insight  (and  knowledge)  It  82  (of  kusala- 
vitakka) ;  f.  1  S  iv.331  (of  majjhim§  pafipada) ;  Ps 
II.  147;  -dada  one  who  gives  the  eye  (of  understanding) 
Th  1.3;  -dhatu  the  element  of  vision  Dhs  597.  703,  817. 
-patha  the  range  of  vision;  sight  J  1.65  =  DhA  1.173; 
J  1.146  ;  IV.189.  378,  4(13  (  =  cakkhunar)  etar)  nSmag  C.) ; 
VvA  119;  -bh'.ita  (-l-i^ana°)  (adj.)  one  who  has  become 
the  possessor  of  right  understanding  S  11.255  ;  rv.94  ; 
A  V.226  sq.  -lola  greed  (or  greedy)  with  the  eye  Nd- 
177;  -viiUiana  consciousness  by  means  of  visual  per- 
ception, xasual  cognition  Vin  1.34;  D  11.308,  310; 
III. 243  ;  Dhs  433,  556,  585,  589,  620  ;  cp.  Mrs.  Rh.  D. 
Biiddh.  Psvch.  Eth.  p.  I  77  ;  Mtln  trsl.  i.8.->,  89  ;  -vifUleyya 
(adj.)  (i  e'  rupa)  to  be  apperceived  by  the  sense  of  sight 
Vin  1. 184;  D  11.281;  111.234  ;  Dhs  589,  967,  1095; 
-samphassa  contact  with  the  sense  of  vision  (usually 
with  "ja:  sprung  from  visual  contact)  (of  vedan3, 
feelings)  Vin  1.34;  D  11.308  sq. ;  in. 243  ;  Ps  1.5,  40,  136. 

Cakkhoka  (adj.)  having  eyes,  seeing  (-°),  in  dibba°  A  1.23. 
148  (see  cakkhu  111.')  and  a"  blind  D  1.191  ;  S  in. 140; 

Nrl  67. 

Cakkhamant  (adj.)  [cakkhu -f-mant]  having  eyes,  being 
gifted  with  sight ;  of  clear  sight,  intuition  or  wisdom  ; 
possessing  knowledge  (cp.  samantacakkhu)  D  1.76  (one 
who  knows,  i.  e.  a  connoisseur) ;  cakkhumanto  rupani 


Cakkbula 


91 


Catur 


dakkhinti  "  those  who  have  eyes  to  see  shall  see  "  (of  the 
Buddha)  D  1.85,  no,  etc.  —  Vin  i.i6;  S  1.27;  A  1.116, 
124;  1V.106;  Vh  273;  It  108,  115;  DA  I.22I  ;  DhA 
:ii.403  ;  IV. 85.  —  £sp.  as  Ep.  of  the  Buddha  :  the  All- 
wise  S  1.121,  134.  159,  210 ;  Sn  31,  160,  992,  1028,  1 1 10, 
1 1 28;  Vv  12'  (  =  paficahi  cakkhuhi  cakkhuma  Buddh 
BhagavS  VvA  60,  cp.  cakkhu  in.);  Vv  81". 

Cakkhala  (adj.)  [  =  cakkhuka]  in  visama"  squint-eyed, 
squinting  J  1.353  ;  vi.548. 

OakUliusa  (adj.)  [Vedic  caksu^ya]  pleasing  to  or  good  for 
the  eyes  (opp.  a°)  Vin  11.137,  148- 

CttOkama  [Sk.  cankrama  &  cankxama,  £r.  cankamati] 
(a)  walking  up  &  down  S  iv.  104.  —  (b)  the  place  where 
one  is  walking,  esp.  a  terraced  walk,  cloister  Vin  1. 15, 
182;  11.220;  D  1.105;  S  1.212  ;  A  1. 114;  183;  III. 29 ; 
IV.87 ;  J  1.17  ;  11.273 ;  V.132  (cp.  kattarada^4a-passages) 

Cftnkamati  [Intens.  of  kamati,  to  kmil=Sk.  cankramiti ; 
cp.  kamati]  to  walk  about,  to  walk  up  &  down  Vin  1.15, 
182  ;  11.193,  220  ;  IV. 18  ;  S  1.107,  212  ;  PvA  105.  —  Caus. 
cankamapeti  J  in. 9. 

Cankamana  (nt.)  [fr.  cankamati]  i.  walking  up  &  down 
S  11.282;  DhA  1. 10.  —  2.  a  cloister  walk  (  =  cankama) 
VvA  188.  Usually  "- :  Vin  1.139  (°sala) ;  J  111.85; 
rv.329 ;  PvA  79  ("koti  the  fax  end  of  the  cloister). 

Cankamika  (adj.)  [fr.  cankama]  one  who  has  the  habit  ol 
walking  about  Miln  216  (thana°  standing  &  walking). 

Cankora  [cp.  cakora]  the  Greek  partridge  Vv  35^  (cp. 
VvA  163);  J  VI. 538. 

Cangavara  [cp.  Tamil  canguva^a  a  dhoney,  Anglo- Ind. 
doni,  a  canoe  hollowed  from  a  log,  see  also  doni]  a  hollow 
vessel,  a  bowl,  cask  M  1.142  ;  J  v.  186  (in  similes).  As 
Ita  Miln  365  (trsl.  Miln  11.278  by  "  straining  cloth  ").  — 
Cp.  caficu  "  a  box  "  Divy  131. 

Oaagotaka  [cp.  cangavara]  a  casket,  a  box  J  1.65  ;  iv.257  ; 
v.iio,  303;  VI. 369,  534;  DhA  II. 116;  iii.ioi  ;  VvA  33. 
158;  Mhvs  IV.  106;  Anvs  p.  35     Vism  173. 

Caocara  (nt.)  [Sk.  catvara,  cp.  Trenckner,  Notes,  p.  56]  a 
quadrangular  place,  a  square,  courtyard  ;  a  place  where 
four  roads  meet,  a  cross' road  Vin  in. 151  ;  iv.271  ;  Miln  i 
(  +  catukkasinghataka),  330  (do.) ;  J  1.425  (°raccha). 

Oaja  (adj.)  giving  up,  to  be  given  up  ;  in  cpd.  duc°  hard 
to  give  up  A  111.511  ;  J  v. 8.     Gp.  caga. 

Caiati  [Sk.tyajate,  tyaj- Gr.  iro  ^iw  to  scare  away]  i.  tu 
let  loose,  to  emit,  to  discharge  A  11.33  •  J  ■1-342  (mutta 
karisarj)  fig.  to  utter  (a  speech)  J  v.362.  —  2.  to  abandon, 
to  give  up,  sacrifice  (with  loc.  of  person  to  whom  : 
Asuresu   paijar)   S   1.224=  J    1-203)  Dh  290;   J    n.205  ; 


UI.211  ;  v.464;  VI. 570. 
[Sk.  tyajya]  q.  v. 


pp.  catta,   q.  v.  —  grd.  caja 


Otftralft  (adj.)  [Intens.  of  cal=car,  to  move,  with  n  instead 
of  r  in  redupUcation,  cp.  Sk.  canc6ryate  =  carcariti, 
caicala  (=*carcara).  Or.  yapy«\c^w  &  yayyaXiZui  to 
tickle ;  see  also  note  on  gaJa  &  cp.  cankamati]  moving 
to  &  fro,  trembling,  unsteady  J  iv.498  (  =  calacala); 
Sdhp  317,  598. 

Oatula  (adj.)  [Sk.  catura]  clever,  skilled  Mhbv  148.  See 
catura. 

Oav^a  (^j.)  [Sk.  canda]  fierce,  violent;  quick-tempered, 
uncontrolled,  passionate  Viu  11. 194  (hatthi) ;  D.  1.90 
(  =  maria-nissita-kopa-yutta  DA  1.250)  ;  S  1.176;  11.242  ; 
A  ii.iog  =  Pug  47  (sakagava°)  ;  J  1.45"  :  11.210.  349; 
Vism  343,  279  (°3ota.  fierce  current),  (°hatthi) ;  OhA 
IV.9  (goQa)  104  ;  Sdhp  41,  590,  598.  —  f.  candi  M  1.126  ; 
J  n.443 ;  111.259;  Pv  II. 3*  (=kodhanS  PvA  83). — 
Compar.  candatara  S  11.242.  —  In  cpds.  carKji",  see 
caijcjikata  &  caijiditta. 

CaQ4aka  (ailj.)  =  canda;  f.  candika  Pv  11. 3''.  iS:  candiya 
J  111.259  (=:kodhaaa). 


Oa^^ikata  (adj.)  [cp.  caij^a]  angry  Vin  iv.3io. 

Cao^ikka  (nt.)  [•can<}ikya,  of  can<Jika > cai)i4aka]  ferocity, 
anger,  churlishness  Nd»  313,  576,  Dhs  418.  1060.  11 15, 
1231  ;  Vbh  357;  DhA  11.227.     Cp.  cap^itta. 

Cav^itta  (nt.)  anger  Dhs  418  ;  Pug  18  =  22.     Cp.  ca^(Jikka. 

CaQ^ala  [Vedic  cai)4ala]  a  man  of  a  certain  low  tribe,  one 
of  the  low  classes,  an  outcaste ;  grouped  with  others 
under  nica  kula  (low  bom  clans)  as  ca^^cUa  nesadS 
vena  rathakara  pukkusa  at  A  1.107=  11.85=  Pug  51. 
As  candala-pukkusa  with  the  four  recognized  grades  of 
society"  (see  jati  &  khattiya)  at  A  1.162.  —  Vin  iv.6 ; 
M  11.152;  S  v. 168  sq.  ("vagsa);  A  in.214,  228  (brah- 
mana°)  ;  iv.376  ;  J  iv.303  ;  PvA  175;  Miln  200.  —  f. 
candili  A  111.226;  Pv  m.i";  DhA  11.25.  See  also 
pukkusa. 

CaQ4ala  (nt.)  a  kind  of  amusement  or  trick  D  i.6a?(=ayo- 
gulakila  play  with  an  iron  ball  DA  184). 

Catnkka*  (nt.)  [fr.  catu  = 'catuka  > 'catukyar)]  i.  a 
tetrad,  a  set  of  four,  conststiiig  of  four  parts  :  "pancaka- 
jjhana  (pi.)  the  fourfold  &  the  fivefold  system  of  medita- 
tion DhsA  168  ;  see  cpds.  —  2.  a  place  where  four  roads 
meet  J  vi.389  ;  Miln  330  (see  also  below) ;  esp.  in  phrase 
catukke  catukke  kasahi  tileti  (or  is  it  "  in  sets  of  four  "? 
See  Morris,  J.P.T.S.  1884,  79)  J  1.326;  11.123;  DhA 
IV. 52.  —  3.  a  square  (in  a  village)  Miln  i,  365  ;  J  11.194  '• 
v.459 ;  DhA  317. 

-bhatta  a  meal  for  four  bhikkhus  Vin  11.77 ;  111.160 ; 
wmagga  the  4  fold  path  Nett  113;  -yaiifla  (usually  sabba 
catukka°)  a  sacrifice  consisting  of  (all)  the  four  parts 
J  in.44,  45;  PvA  280;  cp.  J  1.335-  (Or  is  it  the 
"  cross-road  sacrifice  "?) 

Catnkka^  [origin.  "  consisting  only  of  one  quarter  "  ?] 
empty,  shaUow,  Uttie  Nd^  415  ("paiiila,  with  omaka- 
paflfla,  lamaka-p°);  J  iv.441  (nadl=tuccha  Com.). 

Catnttha  (num.  ord.)  [Vedic  caturthi,  Idg.  •(inetnrt6  =  Gr. 
TiTpa-oi;.  Lat.  quartus,  Ohg.  fiordo]  the  fourth  Sn  97, 
99,  450  ;  J  III-55  '■  VI  367 ;  °g  (adv.)  for  the  fourth  time 
DhA  111.  1 74.  —  f.  catutthi  Sn  436  ;  Vism  338.— See  also 
{s.v.  Addha)  addhuddha. 

-bhatta  food  eaten  only  every  fourth  day  J  v. 424. 
-magga  "  the  fourth  Path,"  of  Arahantship  DhA  1.309; 
-mana  (?)  (nt.)  name  of  the  tongue,  in  so  far  as  it  forms 
the  fourth  vatthu  (beside  eyes,  ears,  nose)  according 
to  tlie  gloss:  J  v.  155  ;  extremely  doubtful. 

Cator,  catu°  in  composition  [Vedic  catvSrah  (m.)  cat- 
vari  (nt.)  fr.  *quctuor,  *quetur  =  Gr.  Tirrapii  (hom. 
Ti-Twp-. )  Lat.  quattuor,  Goth,  fidwor,  Ohg.  fior,  Ags 
fcower,  !■:.  four;  catasras  (f.)  fr.  •qu(e)tru,  cp.  tisr&s. 
Also  as  adv.  catur  fr.  ♦quetrus=Lat.  quater  &  quadru°] 
base  of  numeral  four;  i.  As  num.  ad},  nom.  &  ace.  m. 
cattaro  (Dh  109;  J  111.51)  and  caturo  (Sn  84,  188),  f. 
catasso  (Sn  1122),  nt.  cattari  (Sn.  227);  gen.  m.  catun- 
uan  (Sn  p.  102),  [f.  catassannar)]  ;  instr.  catubbhi  (Sn 
229),  catuhi  (Sn  231)  &  catuhi ;  loc.  catusu  (J  1.262)  & 

catusu. 2.  As    7ium.    adv..     catu°     catur"    in    cpds. 

catuddasa  (14),  also  through  elision  &  reduction 
cuddasa  I'vA  55.  283,  etc.,  cp.  also  catuddasi.  Catu- 
visati  (2^1  Sn  457  :  catusatlhi  (64)  J  1.50  ;  IM93  :  PvA 
74  •  caturasiti  (84)  usually  with  vassa-sahassani  J  1.137  ; 
11.31 1  ;  Pv  IV.7'  ;  Dh\  11.58  ;    PvA  9.  3'.  254.  etc.     See 

also  cattarisa  (4")-  ,  ,  ,      , 

-(r)ansa  (  =  caturassa,  having  four  edges,  four-edged 
Dhs  617;  PvA  189  (read  °sobhitaya) ;  -(r)anga  (con- 
sisting of)  four  limbs  or  divisions,  fourfold  M  1.77; 
J  1.390;  II. 190,  19-:;  VI.169  (uposatha,  cp.  atthanga) ; 
Dnvs  I  6  ;  Sdhp  O4  ;  -(r)angika  ^prec.  Dhs  147,  157.  397  : 
Kh  \  85  ;  Sdhp  58  ;  -(r)angin  (adj.)  comprising  four  parts, 
f  "in!  of  an  army  consisting  of  elephants,  chanots, 
cavalry  &  infantry  D  li.i*^;  J  n.102,  104;  Vism  146; 


Catur 


92 


Candanika 


SnA  225.  353;  DhA  iv.144;  cp.  J  vi.275;  -(r)angula 
(adj.)  measuring  4  fingers,  4  fingers  broad  or  wide,  Vin 
1.46;  S  11.178;  J  VI. 534  ;  Th  I.  1137  ;  Vism  124.     -(r)an- 
gulika  =  prec.    Th   2,    498    (.^ThA,    291);    -(r)anta   see 
catur  ;     -(r)assa    [catur  (-  assa'']     four-cornered,    quad- 
rangular, regular  Vin  11. 3 10  fjidligh) ;  J  iv.4(i  (avala)  492 
(sala) ;  v. 49  ;  Pv  ii.i''.    Cp.  caturagsa  Oc  next :  -(r)assara 
(see  last)  with  4  sharp  sides  (of  a  hammer  ;  °muggara) 
I>liA   1.120;    -(r)4dhitthana   (adj.)   one  who  has  taken 
the  four  resolutions  (see  adhitfliana)  M  111.239 ;  -(r)4pas- 
sena    (adj.)    endowed    with    the    four    apassena :    lit.: 
reclining  on  four  A  v. 29,  30;  D  ni.269,  2711;  -ussada 
(catussada)  full  of  four,  endowed  with  4  things,  rich  in 
four  attributes  J  iv.309  (expld.  p.  311  as  having  plenty 
of  people,   grain,   wood  A  water);   ^.422  =  461    "with 
four  pillows  "  (p.  422  has  caturassada  for  caturussada, 
which  latter  is  also  to  be  preferred  to  catussada,  unless 
this  is  a  haplology).     In  the  same  connection  occurs 
satt-ussada  (full  of  people)  D  i.iii  e.  g.  &  Pv  iv.i*  (see 
satta).     The    formation    "  cattussada "    has    probably 
been  iutluenced  by  "  sattussada  "  ;  -(k)kanna  (&  °ka) 
(a)  with  4  corners  Vin  11. 137  ;  J  111.255  —  (b)  "  between 
four  ears,"  i.  e.  secret,  of  manta  (counsel)   J   vi.391  ; 
-(k)kama  walking  with  four  (feet),  quadruped  Vv  64*  ; 
Pv   i.ii';   -kundika   on   all   fours   M   1.79;   A   m.i88; 
D  iii.O  ;  Pv  III. 2"  (cp.  PvA   181);  -kona  four  cornered, 
crossed,   in   °raccha   cross   road   PvA   24  ;    -(k)khandha 
the  four  khandhas,   viz.   feeling,   perception,   synthesis 
&  intellect  (see  khandha)  DhsA  345  ;  -(g)guna  fourfold, 
quadruple  D  11. 135;  S  127;  J  1. 213;  VvA  186;  Sdhp 
•40;  -cakka  with  four  wheels  S  1.16  =  03  (said  of  the 
jiumau  body,   see   under  cakka) ;   -jata  of  four  sorts, 
viz.  gaudha  (perfume)  having  four  ingredients  ThA,  72 
(see  next)  -jati  of  four  kinds  J  :.265,  v. 79;  (gandha). 
These  4  ingredients  of  perfume  are  saffron,   jasmine, 
Turkish  (tarukkha)  &  Greek  incense  (yavana) ;  -jatiya 
(&   °jatika)  in   "gandha     prec.   J    ni.291  ;   iv.377  ;   PvA 
127  ;  Miln  354  ;  J  1.178  (°ka) ;  -(d)disa  (pi.)  the  4  quarters 
of  the  globe  S  i.i&7=Sn  p.  79;  D  1.251  ;  may  also  be 
taken  for  abl.  sg.  as  adv.  :  in  the  4  quarters  Vin  1.16, 
cp.  ace.  catuddisa,3  D  11.12  ;  -(d)dipika  covering  the  4 
continents,  of  megha  (a  cloud)  DhA  11.95  \  -dvara  with 
4  gates,   of  a  house  D  i.io2   (=DA  1.270);  of  Avici- 
niraya  It  86 ;  J  iv.3  ;  Pv  i.io'^;  cp.  Catudvara  Jataka 
(No.  439  ;  J  IV.  I  sq.)  ;  -nahuta  ninety  four  J  1.25  ;  vi.486  ; 
-paccaya  the  four  requisites   (see  paccaya)   J    111.273, 
"santosa  contentment  with  °DhA  iv.i  1 1  ;  -pannasa  fifty- 
four  DhA  1.4  ;  -(p)pathaafourways  J  iv.460  ;  -(p)pada[Sk. 
caturpad,   Gr.  rerpnTroi't,  Lat.  quadrupes]    a  quadruped 
Vin  III  10  ;  S  1.6;  A  V.21  ;  Sn  603,  964  ;  It  87 ;  J  1.152  ; 
111.82  ;     -parivatta    (cp.    attha    "adhideva-fianadassana 
A  IV  304)  fourfold  circle  S  111.59  sq.   (pailcupadanak- 
khandhe).     -parisa   (f.)   the  fourfold  assembly,  soil,   of 
male  Ov-  female  bhikkhus  ic  upasakas  (cp.  parisa)  PvA 
1 1  ;  -pala   fourfold  Vism  339.       -(p)padaka  (adj.)  con- 
sisting of  4  padas,  i.  e.  a  sloka ;  f .  °ika  (gatha)  a  com- 
plete stanza  or  sloka  Anvs  p.  35  ;  -parisuddhasila   (nt.) 
the   four   precepts   of  purity   j    in. 291  ;    DhA  iv.iii; 
-(b)bidha  (catur -1^  vidha)  fourfold  Th/,  74  ;  -(b)bipallasa 
(catur -f  vipallasa)   the   fourfold   change   (cp.    Nett   85) 
Th+  I,  1 143  ;  SiiA  46  ;  -byuha  (catur  4-  vyfiha)  arranged 
in  4  arrays  (of  hara)  Nett  3,  105  ;  -bhaga  the  4th  part,  a 
quarter  Dh   108 ;  -bhtimika  having  4   stories  or  stages 
(of  citta  or  dhamma)  DhA  1.2 1  ;    iv.72  ;  DhsA  344,  345  ; 
cp.   Vism  493  (of   iiulriya) ;    -madhura  (nt.)    sweetness 
(syrup)  of  4  (ingredients)  DA  1.136  ;  TliA  68  ; -mahapatha 
a  crossing  on  a  high-road  Vism  235.     -mahabhutika  con- 
sisting of  the  four  great  elements  DhsA  4113  ;  -(m)maha- 
rajika  :  see  c"itum° ;  -masa  4  months,  a  season  I'vA  96  ; 
Dpvs  1.24,  37  (ca°) ;  sec  under  masa  ;  -sacca  tlie  four  truths 
or  facts  (see  ariyasacca)  DhA  in. 386  ;  Miln  334  ;  {s)s!lla 
(nt.)  [catur -I-  sala]  a  square  formed  by  4  houses,  in  phrase 
catuhi  gabbhehi  patimanditai)  catussiilaij  karetva  VvA 
22n ;    DhA    111.291  ;    -'ha    (catuha   <t    catfiha)    4    days ; 
catuhena  within  4  days  S  11.191  ;  catuliapai^caha  4  or 
5  days  Vin  iv.280.  —  See  also  cpds.  with  catu". 


Catnra  [Deriv.  uncertain.  Perhaps  from  tvar  to  move. 
that  is  quickly.  Sk.  catura]  clever,  skilled,  shrewd 
J  III. 266  ;  VI. 25.  —  Dcr.  f.  abstr.  caturata  cleverness 
Vbh  351  (=caturiya). 

Caturiya  at  Vv  4 1^  is  to  be  read  ca  turiya,  etc.  Otherwise 
see  caturiya. 

Catta  [pp.  of  cajatij  given  up,  sacrificed  A  11. 41  ;  iii.y; 
Th  1,  209  (°vanna  who  has  lost  fame) ;  J  11.336  ;  iv.195  ; 
v. 4 1  (°jivita). 

Cattatta  (nt.)  [fr.  catta]  the  fact  of  giving  up,  abandon- 
ment, resignation  Vbh  254  sq.  ;  DhsA  381. 

Cattarba  (&  cattalisa)  [Sk.  catvariijsat]  forty  S  11.85; 
Sn  p.  87  ;  It  99  ~.  Usually  cattalisa  J1.5S  ;  v. 433  ;  DhA 
1. 41  ;  11.9.  93. 

-danta  having  40  teeth  (one  of  the  characteristics  of 
a  Mahapurisa)  D  11.18  ;  111.144,  172. 

Catt&risaka  (adj.)  having  forty  M  111.77. 

Cadika  at  Miln  197  (umikavankacadika)  prob.  for  °niadika. 

Cana  (-°)  [Vedic  cana  fr.  rel.  pron.  "quo -I- demonst--.  pron. 
*no,  cp.  ana,  nana;  Gr.  vii ;  Lat.  -ne  in  quandone^P. 
kudacana.  cana  =  Goth,  hun,  Ohg.  gin,  Ger.  ir-gen-d. 
Cp.  ci]  indef.  particle  "  like,  as  if,"  added  to  rel.  or 
interrog.  pronouns,  as  kiiicana  anything,  kudacana  at 
any  time,  etc.     Cp.  ca  &  ci. 

Caiiao  =  cana;  and  then,  if  Vin  in.  121  (cp.  ca  3) ;  or  should 
it  be  separated  at  this  passage  into  ca  nag  ? 

Canda  [Vedic  candra  from  *(s)(inend  to  be  light  or  glow- 
ing, cp.  tandana  sandal  (incense)  wood,  Gr.  kuiSu/ioi; 
cinder ;  Lat.  candeo,  candidus,  incendo ;  Cymr.  cann 
white ;  E.  candid,  candle,  incense,  cinder]  the  moon 
(i.  e.  the  shiner)  S  1.196';  11.2116 ;  M  11. 104;  A  1.227; 
II. 139  sq. ;  III  34  ;  Dh  413  ;  Sn  465,  569,  1016  ;  J  in. 52  : 
VI.232  ;  Pv  1. 12';  II. 6* ;  Vv  64'  (marii°  a  shiny  jewel, 
or  a  moonlike  jewel,  see  VvA  2  78,  v.  1.  "sanda).  -punna" 
the  full  mooTvJ  1149.  267;  v. 215;  ^mukha  with  a  face 
like  a  fuU  moon  (of  the  Buddha)  DhA  111.171.  Canda 
is  extremely  frequent  in  similes  it  comparisons :  see  list 
in  J.P.T.S.  1907,  85  sq.  In  enumerations  of  heavenly 
bodies  or  divine  beings  Canda  always  precedes  Suriya 
(the  Sun),  e.  g.  D  11.259;  A  1.2 15;  u.139;  Nd^  308 
(under  Devata).  Cp.  candimant.  On  qu4si  mythol. 
etym,  see  Vism  41 8. 

-kanta  a  gem  Miln  118;  -(g)gaha  a  moon-eclipse  (lit. 
seizure,  i.  e.  by  Rahu)  D  i.io  (cp.  DA  1.95);  -mandala 
the  moon's  disc,  the  shiny  disc,  i.  e.  the  moon  A  1.285  ; 
J  1.253;  111.55;  IV. 378;  v. 123;  Dhs  617;  Vism  216 
(in  compar.) ;  PvA  65  ;  -suriya  (pi.)  sun  &  moon  J  iv.61 . 

Candaka=  canda   VvA  278  (mani'')  ;  Sdhp  92   (mayura°  • 

the  eye  in  a  peacock's  tail). 
Candatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  canda]  in  cpd.  paripunna°  state 

or  condition  of  the  full  moon  SnA  502. 

Candana  (m.  &  nt.)  [Deriv.  unknown.  Possibly  uou- 
Aryan ;  but  see  under  canda,  Sk.  candana]  sandal  (tree, 
wood  or  unguent,  also  perfume)  Vin  1.2(13  ;  A  1.9.  145, 
226;  III. 237;  I>h  54;  J  V.420  (tree,  m.) ;  Miln  382; 
DhA  1.422  ;  IV. 189  (°pfija) ;  \"vA  158  (agalu°  with  aloe 
&  sandal) ;  PvA  70.  —  Kasika°  sandal  from  KSsi 
A  III. 391  ;  IV.281  ;  Miln  243,  348  ;  ratta°  red  s.  J  IV. 442  ; 
lohita"  id.  A  v. 22  ;  J  137  ;  hari°  yellow  s.  J  1.14O. 

-ussada  covered  with  sandal  perfumes  Th  i,  :(>7; 
Pv  III. 9'  (  -  candanasaranuhtto  PvA  211);  -ganfhi  (or 
better  gandi ;  see  the  latter)  a  block  of  sandal  wood 
\in  11. 110  ;  -gandhin  having  a  scent  of  sandal  J  111.190  ; 
-vilepana  sandal  unguent  J  IV.3.  -sara  choice  sandal 
(wood  or  perfume)  Vv  52-',  J  1.53,  340. 

Candanika  (f)  a  pool  at  the  entrance  of  a  village  (usually, 
but  not  necessarily  dirty:  see  Vin  11.122  it  cp.  candana- 
panka  Av.^  1.221.  see  also  PW  sub  candana*)  S  v. 361  ; 
M  i.i  I,  73.  448  :  A  i.iO]  ;  Th  I,  567  ;  J  v.15 ;  Miln  220; 
Vism  2O4.  343.  359;   iJdhp  132. 


Candima 


93 


Carati 


Candima  (ni.  or  f.  ?)  [Sk.  caudramas  m.  &  candrimS  f., 
cp.  pfirniina  ;  a  cpd.  of  canda+  ma,  cp.  masa.  The 
Pali  form,  liowover,  is  based  on  a  supposed  derivation  fr. 
canda+  mant.  like  bhagava,  and  is  most  likely  m.  On 
this  formation  cp.  Lat.  lumen  =Sk.  rukman  luminous, 
shinyl  the  moon.  By  itself  only  in  similes  at  Dh  208, 
387  (at  end  of  pada)  &  in  "  abbha  mutto  va  candima  " 
M  n.io4=Dh  i72=Th  i,  871;  Dh  382  =Th  i,  873; 
Ps  1.175. — Otherwise  only  in  comb"  with  suriya, 
moon  &  sun,  V  1.240  ;  11. 12  ;  ni.85  sq.,  90,  1 12  ;  S  in. 266  ; 
V.264  sq.  ;  D  1.227;  11.53,  i3<^  ;  v.59 ;  Vv  30;  J  11. 213; 
Miln  191  :  Vism  153.  Also  in  cpd.  candimapabha  the 
light  of  the  moon  (thus  BB,  whereas  SS  read  at  all 
passages  candiya"  or  candiya-pabha)  S  in.  156  =  v. 44  = 
It  20. 

Capala  (adj.)  [Sk.  capala  cp.  capa  bow  ;  from  *iiep  to  shake 
or  quiver,  see  Walde  Lat.  ll'tb.  under  caperro]  moving 
to  &  fro,  wavering,  trembling,  unsteady,  fickle  S  1.204  • 
V.269;  M  1.470  (and  a°  steady);  A  111.199,  355.  39'; 
Dh  33  ;  Pug  35  ;  J  1.295 ;  11.360.  At  J  vi.548  it  means 
one  who  lets  the  saliva  flow  out  of  his  mouth  (expl'' 
by  paggharita-lala  "trickle-spit"). 

Capalata  (f.)  [fr.  last]  fickleness,  unsteadmess  Miln  93, 
251  ;  Pgdp  47,  64.  At  Nd'  585  as  capalana-l-  capalyarj 
with  gedhikata.  meaning  greed,  desire  (<.p.  capala  at 
J  VI.548). 

Capn  (or  capucapu)  a  sound  made  when  smacking  one's 
lips  Vin  11.214  (capucapukaraka  adj.),  221  ;  iv.197. 

Cappnti  [Sk.  carvayati  Dhtp  295  gives  root  cabb  in  meaning 
"  adana  "]  to  chew  Bdhgh  on  Vin  11.115.     Cp.  jappati. 

Camati  (&  cameti)  [cam.  to  sip ;  but  given  at  Dhtm  552 
in  meaning  "  adana,"  eating]  to  rinse,  only  in  cpd. 
acamati  (acameti). 

Camara  [Deriv.  unknown,  probably  non-Aryan.  Sk. 
camara]  i.  the  Yak  ox  (Bos  grunniens)  J  1.149;  111.18, 
375;  V.416;  Miln  365.-1  -I  J  1.20;  Sdhp  621.  —  In 
cpds.  camari°  J  iv.256. — 2.  a  kind  of  antelope  (-1) 
J  VI. 537. 

-vijani  (f.)  a  chowry  (the  bushy  tail  of  the  Yak  made 
into  a  brush  to  drive  away  flies)  Vin  11. 130.  This  is 
one  of  the  royal  ensigns  (see  kakudhabhanda  &  cp. 
vala-vijani). 

Oamasa  [Vedic  camasa,  a  cup]  a  ladle  or  spoon  for  sacri- 
ficing into  the  sacred  fire  J  vi.528'*  =  529*  (unite  ca  with 
masa,  cp.  529'  and  n.  4  :  aggijuhana-katacchu-sankha- 
timasafica  [for  camasaii  ca]  v.  1.  B'').  Cp.  Kern, 
Toevoegselen  s.  v. 

Camn  (f.)  [Both  derivation  and  exact  meaning  uncertain. 
The  Vedic  caniu  is  a.  peculiar  vessel  into  wh.  the  Soma 
flows  from  the  press.  In  late  Pali  &  Sk.  it  means  a 
kind  of  small  army,  perhaps  a  division  drawn  up  more 
or  less  in  the  shape  of  the  Vedic  vessel]  an  army  J 
11.22  ;  °natha  a  general  Mhvs  °pati  id.  Davs  1.3. 

Oampa=  campaka  J  vi.151. 

Campaka  the  Champaka  tree  (Michelia  champaka)  having 
fragrant  white  \-  yellow  flowers  J  v. 420  ;  vi.269  ;  Miln 
338;  DA  1.280  ;  Vism  514  (°nikl<ha,  in  simile);  DhA 
1.384;  VvA  194. 

Campa  (f  )  N.  of  a  town  (Uhagulpore)  &  a  river  U  i.i  1 1  ; 
DA  1.279;  J  iv.454. 

Campeyya  N.  of  a  Nagariija  J  IV. 454  (  =  °jataka.  No.  506)  ; 
Vism   v>4. 

Campeyyaka  (adj. )  belonging  to  CaiiipS  Vin  v.  1  1 4  ;  J  vi.^ikj 
(here  :  a  Champaka-like  tree). 

Camma  (nt.)  fWdic  carman,  cp.  Lat.  curium  hide  or 
leather,  cortex  bark,  .scortum  liide  ;  Ohg.  herdo ;  Agb. 
heor.Na=i:.  hide;  also  Sk.  krtti  ;  Ohg.  scirm  (shield); 
E.  skin  ;  from  *gqer  to  cut.  skin  (cp.  katuj^the  cut-off 


hide,  cp.  Gr.  iipo) :  'Sipiia}  i.  skin,  hide,  leather  Vin 
1. 192  (siha°  vyaggha"  dipi°),  196  (elaka°  aja°  miga") ; 
A  IV. 393  (siha°  dipi°) ;  PvA  157  (kadalimiga°  as  rug); 
J  11. 1  to  (siha") ;  in. 82,  184;  Miln  53;  Sdhp  140.  It  is 
supposed  to  be  subcutaneous  (under  chavi  as  tegument), 
&  next  to  the  bone  :  chavig  chindetva  cammai)  chindati 
S  n.238-A  IV. 129;  freq.  in  expr.  like  atthi-camma- 
naharu-matta  (skin  &  bones)  PvA  68,  see  under  naharu  ; 
camma-mar)sa-naharu  PvA  80. — 2.  a  shield  Vin 
II. 192  (asi°  sword  &  shield) ;  M  1.86  ;  A  in. 93  ;  J  v.373  ; 
VI. 580. 

-anda  a  water-skin  J  1.250  ;  -kara  a  worker  in  leather, 
a  tanner  Vin  IV.7 ;  Miln  331  ;  a  harness-maker  J  v. 45  ; 
a  waggon-builder  and  general  artisan  J  iv.  1 74  (  =  ratha- 
kara)  ;  also  as  -karin  PvA  175  (  =  rathakarin) ;  -khanda 
an  animal's  skin,  used  as  a  rug  Miln  366  ;  Vism  99  ;  skin 
used  as  a  water- vessel  (see  khanda)  Vin  11.122  ;  Ps  1.176  ; 
-ghataka  a  water-skin  J  n.345  ;  -naddha  (nt.)  a  drum 
Bu  1.31  ;  -pasibbaka  a  sack,  made  of  skin  or  leather 
ThA  283  ;  J  VI. 43 1,  432  (as  v.  1.)  ;  -bandha  a  leather 
strap  Vin  1.194  '■  -bhasta  (f.)  a  sack  J  v. 45  ;  -maluka  a 
leather  bag  J  vi.431,  432  ;  -yodhin  a  soldier  in  cuirass 
D  i.5i~(in  list  of  var.  occupations;  DA  1.157  :  camma- 
kaiicukar)  pavisitva) ;  A  iv.107,  110;  -varatta  (f.)  a 
leather  thong  J  11.153  '■  -vasin  one  who  wears  the  skin 
(of  a  black  antelope),  i.  e.  a  hermit  J  vi.528  ;  -sa^aka 
an  ascetic  wearing  clothes  of  skin  J  111.82  (nama  parib- 
bajaka). 

Cammaka  a  skin  Bu  11.52. 

Caya  [from  cinati]  piling,  heaping ;  collection,  mass  Vin 
II. 1 17;  DhsA  44;  in  building;  a  layer  Vin  11. 122,  152. 
As  -"  one  who  heaps  up,  a  collector,  hoarder  M  1.452 
(nikkha",  khetta°,  etc.).     See  also  a°,  apa°,  upa°. 

Oara  (n-adj.)  [from  oar,  carati]  i.  the  act  of  going  about, 
walking  ;  one  who  walks  or  lives  (usually  -°) :  oka°  living 
in  water  M  1. 1 1 7  ;  J  VI.4 16  ;  antara"  S  iv.  1 73  ;  eka°  soUtary 
Sn  166  ;  saddhir)"  a  companion  Sn  45  ;  anattha"  J  v.433  ; 
jala°  Davs  iv.38.  See  also  careti  &  gocara.  —  Instr. 
carasa  (adv.)  walking  M  1.449.  —  cara-vada  "  going 
about  talk,"  gossip,  idle  talk  S  in.  12;  v.419.  —  sucara 
easy,  duccara  difficult  Vin  in. 26.  — 2.  one  who  is  sent 
on  a  message,  a  secret  emissary,  a  spy  S  1.79.  Also  as 
carapurisa  J  11.404;  iv.343 ;  vi.469 ;  DhA  1.193. — 
Nole. — cara-puraya  at  A  v.133  should  be  changed  into 
v.  1.  SS  parampar&ya. 

Caraka  i.  =  cara'-' (a  messenger)  J  vi.369  (attha°) ;  adj. 
walking  through  ;  sabbalokar)"  J  v.395.  —  2.  any  animal 
S  1.106;  PvA  153  (vana°). 

Caraoa  (nt.)  [of  a  deer,  called  paAca-hattha  "having  5 
hands,"  i.  e.  the  mouth  and  the  4  feet]  i.  walking  about, 
grazing,  feeding  VvA  308  (°tthana).  —  2.  the  foot 
Vin  iv.212  ;  J  V.437.  —  3.  acting,  behaviour,  good 
conduct,  freq.  in  comb"  with  vijja,  e.  g.  A  11.163; 
v. 327;  Dh  144;  Vism  202  (in  detail);  PvA  i,  etc. — 
D  111.97,  15&;  S"  4if>.  462,  536;  Miln  24.  sampanna- 
carana  (adj.)  accomplished  in  right  behaviour  S  1.15^, 
166;  Sn  1126;  Pv  Ii.i3». — Cp.  sai\°. 

Cara^vant  (adj.)  one  of  pood  conduct  (  =  sampanna- 
caraija)  Sn  533.536- 

Caiati  [Vedic  carati.  ''quel  to  move,  turn,  turn  round  (cp. 
kantha  &  kula)  =  Lat.  coIo  (incolo),  Gr.  TriXnfm,,  rriAoi; 
(also  nini'iXor  goat-herd  &  /•imikii.Vo^  cowherd  =  gocara)  : 
also  V.  cakka,  q.  v.  A  doublet  of  oar  is  oal,  see  caiati- 
Dhtp  2)3  expl'  car  by  '  gati-bhakkhanesu  "]  to  move 
about,  to  "  live  and  move,"  to  behave,  to  be.  —  Imper. 
act.  cara  (J  1.152).  cara  (metri  causa,  J  in. 393) ;  — 
imper.  med.  carassu  (Sn  696),  pi.  caramase  (  =  exhorta- 
tive, Sn  32);  —  ppr.  caranto  (J  1.152;  PvA  14)  ic 
car.-ii)  (Sn  151;  Oh  61,  .305;  It  117);  med.  caramana 
(Vin  1.83  ;  Pv  i.  lo'"  ;  PvA  160) ;  —  pot.  careyya  (Sn  45, 
386,  1065;  Dh  142.  328)  &  care  (Sn  35;  Dh  49.  168. 
329;   It  120); — jut.  carissati  (M  1.428); — aor.  sg.  1" 


Carahi 


94 


Cavana 


acarig  (S  ni.29),  acarisai)  (Pv  111.9*),  3"*  acari  (Sn  344), 
acari  (Sn  354;  Dh  326);  can  (J  11. 133). — pi.  3"^ 
acaririsu  (Sn  809),  acarisui)  (Sn  284} ;  carigsu  (Sn  289), 
acarug  (Sn  289),  acarur)  (J  vi.114):  —  inf.  caritui) 
(caiitu-kama  J  11. 103) ;  — ger.  caritvS  (J  1.50)  &  carit- 
vana  (Sn  816);  — pp.  cilJ^a  (q.  v.) — Caus.  careti 
(  =  Denom.  of  cara),  pp.  carita.  2"''  caus.  carapeti  (q.  v.). 
—  See  also  cara,  caraQa,  cariya,  caraka,  carika,  carin. 

Meaning:  i.  Lit.  (a)  to  move  about,  to  walk,  travel, 
etc. ;  almost  synon.  with  gacchati  in  contrast  to  titthati 
to  stand  stiU ;  cp.  phrase  caraft  va  yadi  va  titthaij 
nisinno  udahu  sayar)  It  1 1 7  (walking,  standing,  sitting, 
reclining;  the  four  iriyapatha) ;  care  tit  {he  acche  saye 
It  120  ;  titthai)  carai)  nisinno  va  sayano  v5  Sn  151.  — 
Defined  as  "  catuhi  iriyapathehi  vicarati  "  (i.  e.  more 
generally  appUed  as  "  behaviour,"  irrespective  of  posi- 
tion) DhA  11.36.  Expl.  constantly  by  series  viharati 
irijrati  vattati  paleti  yapeti  yapeti  Nd'  237.  —  carami 
loke  I  move  about  (=1  live)  in  the  world  Sn  25,  455  ; 
agiho  c.  I  lead  a  homeless  life  Sn  456,  464  ;  eko  c.  he 
keeps  to  himself  Sn  35,  956;  Dh  305,  329;  sato  c.  he 
is  mindful  Sn  1054,  1085  ;  gocarar)  gaijhanto  c.  to  walk 
about  grazing  (see  below)  J  ni.275  ;  gavesanto  c.  to 
look  for  J  1.61.  —(b)  With  definition  of  a  purpose: 
pifl4aya  c.  to  go  for  alms  (gamag  to  the  village)  Sn  386  ; 
bhikkhaya  c.  id.  J  in. 82.  —  With  ace.  (in  etymol. 
constr.)  to  undertake,  set  out  for,  undorgo,  or  simply  to 
perform,  to  do.  Either  with  c.  carikar)  to  wander 
about,  to  travel :  Vin  1.83  ;  S  1.305  (applied  :  "  walk  ye 
a  walk  ") ;  Sn  92  ;  Dh  326  ;  PvA  14  (janapada-carikai)), 
160  (pabbata-c°  wandering  over  the  mountams) ;  or  with 
carag  ;  piij<Ja-c.°  caratl  to  perform  the  begging-round 
Sn  414  :  or  with  caritatj :  duccaritag  c.  to  lead  a  bad 
life  Sn  665  (see  carita).  Also  with  ace.  of  similar 
meaning,  as  esanag  c.  to  beg  Th  i,  123  ;  vadhag  c.  to 
kill  Th  I,  138 ;  dukkhag  c.  to  undergo  pain  S  1.2 10.  — 
(c)  In  pregnant  sense :  to  go  out  for  food,  to  graze 
(as  gocarag  c.  to  pasture,  see  gocara).  Appl.  to  cows  : 
caranti  gavo  Sn  20  ;  J  in. 479 ;  or  to  the  bhikkhu : 
Pv  i.io^"  (bh.  caramano=  bhikkhaya  c.  PvA  51);  Sn 
386  (vikale  na  c.  buddha :  the  Buddhas  do  not  graze 
at  the  wrong  time). — 2.  Appl-'  meaning:  (a)  abs.  to 
behave,  conduct  oneself  Sn  io8<i ;  J  vi.114;  Miln  25 
(kamesu  miccha  c.  to  commit  immorality).  —  (b)  with 
obj.  to  practise,  exercise,  lead  a  Ufe  :  brahmacariyag  c. 
to  lead  a  Ufe  of  purity  Vin  1.17;  Sn  289,  566,  1128; 
dhammaii  c.  to  walk  in  righteousness  J  1.152  ;  sucaritag 
c.  to  act  rightly,  duccaritag  c.  to  act  perversely  S  1.94  ; 
Dh  231. 

Carahi  (adv.)  [Sk.  tarhi  ;  with  change  t .  c  due  to  analogy 
with  °ci  (°cid)  in  comb"  with  interr.]  then,  therefore, 
now,  esp.  after  interr.  pron.  :  ko  carahi  janati  who  then 
knows  ?  Sn  990  ;  kathan  carahi  janerau  how  then  shall 
we  know  ?  Sn  999;  kifl  c.  A  v. 194.  —  Vin  1.36;  11.292  ; 
Sn  988  ;  J  in.3i2  ;  Miln  25  ;  DA  1.289. 

Oaiipeti  [Caus.  ii.  of  carati]  to  cause  to  move,  to  make 
go  J  1.267  (bherig  c.  to  have  the  drum  beaten) ;  PvA 
75  (do.) ;  DhA  1.398  (to  circulate).  As  carapeti  J  v. 510 
(bherig). 

Carita  [pp.  of  careti,  see  cara  &  carati]  i.  (adj.)  going, 
moving,  being  like,  behaving  (-°)  J  vi.313;  Miln  92 
(ragac°=ratta) ;  Vism  105,  114  (raga°.  dosa°,  moha", 
etc.).  —  2.  (nt.)  action,  behaviour,  living  Dh  ^^o 
(ekassa  c.  living  alone);  Ps  1.124  ;  MiJn  178.  See  also 
carati  i'',  2''.  Esp.  freq.  with  su°  and  due"  :  good,  right, 
proper  or  (nt.)  good  action,  right  conduct  <%  the  oppo- 
site; e.  g.  sucarita  Dh  168,  231;  PvA  12,  71,  120: 
duccarita  A  1.146;  u.85.  141;  ni.267,  352;  D  111  iii 
214 ;  Dh  169,  Sn  665 ;  Pv  1.9*  (°g  caritva),  etc. 
See  also  kaya°  vaci°  mano°  under  kaya. 

Oaritaka  (nt.)  conduct  (^  carita^)  Th  i,  36. 

Caritar  [n.  agent  to  careti,  cp  caiita]  walking,  performing 
(c.  ace.)  M  1.77. 


Carima  (adj.)  [Vedic  carama,  Gr.  riXoc  end,  rraXat  along 
time  (ago)]  subsequent,  last  (opp.  pubba)  Tb  2,  203 ; 
It  18  ;  J  V.  1 20.  —  acarima  not  later  (apubba  ac°  simul- 
taneously) D  1. 185;  M  in.65 ;  Pug.  13. 

-bhava  the  last  rebirth  (in  Sagsara,  with  ref.  to  Ara- 
h'antship)  Th-.\  260,  cp.  caramabhavika  in  Divy  (freq.) 
&  next. 

Carimaka  (adj.)  last  (  =  carima)  M  1.426;  Nd^  569''  (°vifi- 
aanassa  nirodha,  the  destruction  of  the  last  conscious 
state,  of  the  death  of  an  Arahant) ;  Vism  291. 

Cariya  (nt.)  &  cariya  (f.)  [from  car,  carati]  (mostly  -°) 
conduct,  behaviour,  state  of,  life  of.  Three  cariyas  at 
Ps  1.79  ;  .six  at  Vism  loi  ;  eight  at  Ps  11. 19  sq.,  225  &  four 
sets  of  eight  in  detail  at  Nd'  237''.  Very  freq.  in  dhamma° 
&  brahraa",  a  good  walk  of  life,  proper  conduct,  chastity 
—  eka°  living  alone  Sn  820  ;  uncha"  begging  J  11.272  ; 
111.37  '<  bhikkha"  a  Ufe  of  begging  Sn  700  ;  nagga"  naked- 
ness Dh  141.  —  See  also  carati  2".     In  cpds.  cariya". 

-pifaka  the  last  book  in  the  Khuddaka-nikaya ; 
-manussa  a  spy,  an  outpost  J  111.361  (v.  1.  carika"). 

Cala  (adj.)  [see  calati]  moving,  quivering;  nnsteady, 
fickle,  transient  S  iv.68  (dhamma  cala  c'  eva  vyaya  ca 
anicca,  etc.);  J  11.299;  111-381  ;  v.345 ;  Miln  93,  418; 
Sdhp  430,  494.  -acala  steadfast,  immovable  S  1.232  ; 
J  1. 71  (tthana);  Vv  51*  (°tthana=Ep.  of  Nibbina)  ; 
acalag  sukhag  (=Nibbana)  Th  2.  350;  cp.  niccala 
motionless  DhA  ni.38. 

-4cala  [intens.  redupl.]  moving  to  &  fro,  in  constant 
motion,  -onsteady  J  iv.454,  498  (=caflcala);  Miln  92; 
(cp.  Divy  i8<-),  281) ;  -kkaku  having  a  quivering  hump 
J  III. 380  1V.330  (=calamanakakudha  or  calaka- 
kudha). 

Calaka'  (m.)  a  camp  marshal,  adjutant  D  i.5isi(in  list  of 
va.rious  occupations) ;  A  rv.  107  sq. 

Calaka^  (nt.)  [perhaps  from  oarv  to  chew;  but  Sk.  car- 
van  a,  chewing,  is  not  found  in  the  specific  sense  of 
P.  calaka.  Cp.  ucchittha  and  cuij^a]  a  piece  of  meat 
thrown  away  after  having  been  chewed  Vin  11.115; 
IV. 266  (  =  vighasa);  VvA  222  ("atthikani  meat-rem- 
nants &  bones). 

Calati  [Ohtp  251  kampana,  to  shake.  Perhaps  connected 
with  car,  carati]  to  move,  stir,  be  agitated,  tremble,  be 
confused,  waver  S  1.IQ7 ;  Sn  752  ;  J  1.303  (kileso  caU) ; 
111.188  (maccha  c.)  Miln  260.  —  ppr.  med.  calamana 
J  IV. 331.  —  Esp.  freq.  in  expression  kammaja-vata 
caligsu  the  labour-pains  began  to  stir  J  1.52  ;  vi.485.  — 
pp   caiita  (q.  v.).  —  caus.  caleti  to  shake  S  1.109. 

Calana  (adj.  &  nt.)  shaking,  trembUng,  vibrating;  excite- 
ment J  III.  188;  DhsA  72. — f.  calan!  (quick, -h  langhi) 
a  kind  of  antelope  J  vi.537. 

Caiita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  calati]  wavering,  unsteady  Miln  93, 
251  ;  Vism   115  ;  VvA  177.  —  (nt.)  Sn  p.  146. 

Cavati  [Vedic  cyavate  from  cyn=Gr.  <rn'".i',  cp.  Lat.  cieo, 
cio,  soUicitus,  Gr.  leiw,  Kivkm,  Goth,  haitan  =  Ohg, 
heizan]  to  move,  get  into  motion,  shift,  to  faU  away,  de- 
cease, esp.  to  pass  from  one  state  of  existence  into  another 
D  1.14  (safisaranti  c°  upapajjanti,  cp.  DA  1.105),  Kh 
VIII.4  (  =  KhA  220  :  apeti  vigacchati  acetano  pi  samano 
puiinakkhaya-vasena  aiiilag  thanag  gacchati) ;  It  99= 
Nd'  235^  (satte  cavamane  upapajjamane) ;  It  77  (devo 
deva-kaya  c.  "  the  god  faUs  from  the  assembly  of  gods  "), 
Sn  1073  for  bhavetha  (  =  Nd2  238;)  PvA  10.  Caus. 
caveti:  inf.  cavetug  S  1.128  sq.,  134  (°kama.)  —  pp. 
cuta  (q.  v.),  see  also  cuti. 

Cavana  (nt.)  [from  cavati]  shifting,  moving,  passing  away, 
only  in  "dhamma  doomed  to  fall,  destined  to  decease 
D  1.18,  19;  in. 31,  33;  M  1.326;  It  76;  J  iv.484;  vi^a 
("dhammata). 


\ 


Cavanata 


95 


Carin 


Cavanata  (f  )  state  of  shifting,  removal  S  ii.3~(cati  +) : 
M  1.49  (id.). 

Caga  [from  cajati,  to  give  up,  Vedie  tyaj.  Cp.  Sk. 
tyiga]  (a)  abandoning,  giving  up,  renunciation  Vin 
l.io  ;  S  III. 13,  26,  158  ;  M  1.486  ;  A  1.299.  More  freq.  as  ; 
(b)  liberality,  generosity,  munificence  (n.)  generous, 
munificent  (adj.) :  silasampanno  saddho  purisapuggalo 
sabbe  maccharino  loke  c<igena  atirocati  "  he  who  is 
virtuous  &  religious  excels  all  stingy  people  in  gener- 
osity "  A  III. 34.  In  freq.  comb™  e.  g.  sacca  dama 
dhiti  c.  Sn  i88  =  S  1.215  ;  sacca  dama  c.  khanti  Sn  189  = 
S  1.215;  niutta"  (adj.)  liberal,  munificent.  S  v.351  — 392. 
"paribhavita  citta  "  a  heart  bent  on  giving  "  S  v.369. 
In  this  sense  dga  forms  one  of  the  (3,  4,  5  or  7)  noble 
treasures  of  a  man  (cp.  the  Catholic  treasure  of  grace 
Sc  see  °dhana  below),  viz.  (as  5)  saddha,  sila,  suta,  caga, 
pa&dS.  (faith,  virtue,  right  knowledge,  hberality. 
wisdom)  S  1.232;  A  1.210;  iil.8o  =  S  iv.250  ;  M  111.99 ; 
D  III. 164,  165  ;  cp.  A  1.152  =  111.44  ;  (as  4  :  the  last  minus 
suta)  S  V.395  ;  A  11.62  (sama°) ;  (as  3)  saddha,  sila,  caga 
J  U.112;  (as  7)  ajjhesanS,  tapo,  sila,  sacca,  caga.  sati, 
mati  J  n.327 ;  cp.  Ma-^ruta-tyaga  Itm  31^.  —  PvA 
30,  120;  Sdhp  214,  323.  See  also  anussati  &  anus- 
sarati. 

-Adhittliana  the  resolution  of  generosity,  as  one  of  the 
4 :  pa&iia.',  sacca°,  c°.,  upasama"  D  111.229 ;  -4nussatt 
generosity  A  1.30  ;  v.331  ;  Dm. 250, 280  ;  VismiQ7  :-katha 
talk  about  munificence  A  111. 181  ;  -dhana  the  treasure  of 
the  good  gift,  as  one  of  the  7  riches  or  blessings,  the  ariya- 
dhanani,  viz.  saddha,  sila,  hiri,  ottappa.  suta,  c, 
paSaa  D  111.163,  251,;  A  IV. 5  ;  VvA  113;  as  one  of  5 
(see  above)  A  m.53  ;  -sampada  (&  sampanna)  the 
blessing  of  (or  blessed  with)  the  virtue  of  munificence 
A  1.62  ;  11.66  ;  111.53  ;  iv.221,  etc. 

Oigavant  (adj.)  generous  A  111.183  ;  iv.217,  220  ;  Pug  24. 

Cagin  (adj.)  giving  up,  sacrificing,  resigning  Sn  719  (kama°). 

C&t>  i^)  [PV-  Hindi  cata]  I.  a  jar,  vessel,  pot  J  1.199 ;  3O2 
(paniya°) ;  111.277  (madhu°  honey  jar) ;  DhA  1.394  (tela" 
oU  tank) ;  VvA  76  (salibhatta°  holding  a  meal  of  rice). — 
2.  a  measure  of  capacity  J  11. 404  ;  iv.343.  —  3.  a  large 
vessel  of  the  tank  type  used  for  living  in  Vin  1. 153. 

-pafijara  a  cage  made  of,  or  of  the  form  of  a  large 
earthen  jar.  wherein  a  man  could  Ue  in  ambush 
J  V.372,  385  ;  -pala  (nt.)  an  earthenware  shield  (?) 
J  V.373  (=kita). 

Ci^  [cp.  caru]  pleEisant.  poUte  in  "kammata  politeness, 
flattery  Miln  370  (cp.  Sk.  catukara) ;  catu-kamyata 
Vbh  246  ;  Visra  i  7.  23,  27  ;  KhA  236. 

Citar°  (and  catu°)  [see  catur]  consisting  of  four.  Only  in 
cpds.  viz. 

-(r)anta  (adj.)  "  of  our  ends."  i.  e.  covering  or  belong- 
ing to  the  4  points  of  the  compass,  all-encirchng,  Ep 
of  the  earth  :  J  11.343  (pathavi) ;  iv.309  (mahi)  -(n-m.) 
one  who  rules  over  the  4  points ;  i.  e.  over  the  whole 
world  (of  a  Cakkavattin)  D  1.88  (cp.  DA  1.249) ;  11. 16  ; 
Sn  552.  See  also  Sp.  AvS  ii.iii.  n.  2  ;  -kummasa  sour 
gruel  with  four  ingredients  VvA  308  ;  -(d)dasi  (f.)  [to 
catuddasa  fourteen]  the  14""  day  of  the  lunar  half  month 
A  I  141  PvA  55;  VvA  71.  99.  129.  With  paficadasi, 
atthami  &  patihariyapakkha  at  Sn  402  ;  Vv  15'. 
°dasika  belonging  to  the  14'''  day  at  Vin  iv.315: 
-(d)disa  (adj.)  belonging  to,  or  comprising  the  four 
quarters,  appl""  to  a  man  of  humanitarian  mind  Sn  42 
("showing  universal  love,"  see  Nd*  -39):  cp.  RV 
X.I 36.  Esp.  appl''  to  the  bhikkhu-sangha  "  the  uni- 
versal congregation  of  bhikkhus  "  Vin  i  305  ;  11. 147: 
D  1. 145;  J  1.93;  Pv  11.28;  III. 2'*  (expl''  PvA  185  by 
catiihi  disahi  agata-bhikkhu-sangha).  Cp.  AvS  1.266; 
11.109;  -(d)dlpa  of  four  continents:  raja  Th  2.  48b;  cp. 
M  Vastu  1. 108.  114;  -(d)dipaka  sweeping  over  the  whole 
earth  (of  a  storm)  Vin  1.290,  cp.  J  iv.3i4  &  Avi  1.258  ; 


-(b)beda  (pi.)  the  four  Vedas  Miln  3  ;  -misin  of  4  months ; 
f.  °ini  Vin  1.155  ;  D  1.47  ;  M  111.79;  DA  1.139.  cp.  komudi ; 
-(in)niahapatha  the  place  where  4  roads  cross,  a  cross- 
road D  1.102.  194  =  243;  M  1. 124;  111.91;  cp.  catu°. 
-(m)mahabhutika  consisting  of  the  4  great  elements  (of 
kaya)  D  1.34.  55.  186.  195;  S  11.94  sq.  ;  Miln  379;  cp. 
Av.Sii.igi  &  Sk.  caturbhautika :  'm)maharajika  (pi.) 
(sc.  deva)  the  retinue  of  the  Four  Kings,  inhabiting 
the  lowest  of  the  6  devalokas  Vin  1.12  ;  ill.  18  ;  D  1.2 15  ; 
Nd^  307  (under  dev5) ;  J  11.31 1  (deva-loka) ;  -yama 
(sar)vara)  fourfold  restraint  (see  yama)  D  1.57.  58  (cp. 
DA  1. 167);  m.48  sq. ;  S  1.66;  M  1.377;  Vism  416. 
Cp.  Dial.  1.75  n^. 

Caturiya  (nt.)  [cp.  catura -)- iya]  skill,  cleverness,  shrewd- 
ness J  III. 267  ;  VI. 410  ;  ThA,  227;  Vbh  551  ;  Vism  104  ; 
Davs  V.30. 

Capa  (m.  nt.)  [Sk.  c5pa,  from  '(iBp  tremble,  cp.  capala 
wavering,  quivering]  a  bow  M  1.429  (opposed  to  ko- 
daijda) ;  Dh  15b  ("atikhiija  shot  from  the  bow.  cp. 
DhA  III. 13?.).  3211  (abl.  capato  metri  causa);  J  rv.272  ; 
v. 400  ;  Miln  105  (da|ha°),  352. 

-ko^  the  end  of  a  bow  Vv.\  261  ;  nali  (f.)  a  bow-case 
J  11.88 ;  -lasuna  (nt.)  a  kind  of  garlic  Vin  iv.259. 

Capalla  (nt.)  [Der.  fr.  capala.  Sk.  oapalya]  fickleness 
D  I.I  15  (=DA  1.286).  Also  as  capalya  M  1.470; 
Vbh  351  ;   Vism  106. 

Camara  (nt.)  [from  camara]  a  chowrie.  the  tail  of  bos 
grunniens  used  as  a  whisk  Sn  688  ;  Vv  64'  ;  J  vi.510  ; 
VvA  271.  276.  Cpd.  camari-gahaka  J  vi.218  (anka)  a 
hook  holding  the  whisk. 

Camikara  (nt.).  [Deriv.  unknown.  Sk.  camikara]  gold 
VvA  12,  13.  166. 

Cayati  [fr.  ci]  to  honour,  only  in  cpd  -apacayati  (q.  v.)- 
The  Dhtp  (237)  defines  the  root  c4y  by  puja. 

Cara  [fr.  car  carati  to  move  about]  motion,  walking,  going  ; 
doing,  behaviour,  action,  process  Miln  162  (-(-vihara); 
Dhs  8  =  85  (  =  vicara);  DhsA  167.  Usually -°  (n.  & 
adj.) :  kama°  going  at  will  J  iv.261  ;  pamada°  a  slothful 
life  J  1.9;  pinda°  alms-begging  Sn  414,  708  ;  sabbaratti" 
wandering  all  night  S  1.201  ;  samavattha"  A  111.257. 
See  also  carati  i''. 

-vihara  doing  &  behaving,  i.  e.  good  conduct  J  11.232  ; 
Dpvs.  VI. 38  ;  cp.  Miln  162  (above). 

Caraka  (carikal  (adj.)  wandering  about,  Uvmg,  going, 
behaving,  always  -°,  like  akasa".  niketa".  pure"  (see 
pubbangama),  vana°.  —  f.  carika  journey,  wandering, 
esp.  as  carikat)  carati  to  go  on  alms-pilgrimage  (see 
carati  i^)  Vin  1.83  ;  J  1.82  ;  11.286  ;  Dh  326  ;  MUn  14.  22  ; 
°n  pakkamati  to  set  out  wandering  J  1.87  ;  Miln  16.  — 
S  1.199  ;  M  1.117  ;  A  III. 257  :  DA  1.239  sq.  (in  detail  on 
two  carika) ;  VvA  165  ;  EnA  295  (uncha°). 

Caraka  (adj.) ---caraka  Sn  162  (sagsuddha"). 

Caranika  v. v.  varanika  Th  1.1129?  a  little  play,  masque, 
cp.  Sk  cArana  iS:  Mrs  Rh.  1).  Pss   of  the  Brethren.  419. 

Ciritta  fnt.)  [From  car]  practice,  proceeding,  manner  of 
acting,  conduct  J  i.yf".  367;  11.277  (loka°) ;  v. 285 
(vanka°) ;  Miln  133;  VvA  31.  —  carittag  apajjati  to 
mix  with,  to  call  on.  to  have  intercourse  with  (c  loc.) 
M  1.470;  S  11.270  (liulesu) ;  M  1.287.^111.40  (kamesu) ; 
J  III. 46  (rakkhita-gopitesu). 

-varitta  manner  of  acting  &  avoiding  J  111.195,  cp- 
Th  I.  591  ;  \iara  m.  Sec  on  their  mutual  relation 
Vism  1 1  ;  -sila  code  of  morality  VvA  37. 

Carin  (only  -")  (adj.)  walking,  hving.  experiencing;  be- 
having, acting,  practising.  (a)  lit.  asanga°  S  1.199; 
akala°  Sn  386 ;  arabu"  Sn  62  ;  vihangapatha°  Sdhp 
241  ;  .sapadana"  M  i  30  ;  Sn  65  ;  pariyanta°  Sn  9O4.  — 
(b)  tig.  anudhamma"  Sn  b9  ;  agu"  .\  \\.ii\o.  \  111.163; 
dhamnia"  Miln  19  ;  brahma"  Sn  695:  manapa'  Vv  31*; 
yata°  Sn  071  :  sama°  Miln  19.  See  all  s.  v.  &  cp. 
cafu. 


C5r 


96 


Citta 


Oini  (adj.)  [Vedic  cini  &  cayu  to  'qe  -  'qa,  as  in  karaa, 
Lat.  cams,  etc.,  see  under  kama]  charming,  desirable, 
pleasant,  beautiful  J  vi.48r  :  Miln  201  ;  Sdhp  428,  512  ; 
VvA  30  (i^vaggu),  sucaru  S  i.i8:  ;  Pv  n.12'2  (  =  sutthu- 
nianorama). 

-dassana  lovely  to  behold  Sn  548  ;  J  vi.449  (expl.  on 
p.  450  as  :  caru  vuccati  suvanpaii  =  suvanijadassana) ; 
VI. 579;  f.  -i  Pv  ni.6i*. 

C&reti  [Pcnom.  fr.  cara;  cp.  carati]  to  set  going,  to 
pasture,  feed,  preserve :  indriyani  c.  to  feast  one's 
senses  (cp.  Ger.  "  augenweide  ")  PvA  58  ;  khantig  c. 
to  feed  meekness  DA  1.277  :  olambakai)  carento  droop- 
ing J  1. 1 74  ;  Pass.  ppr.  cariyamana  being  handed  round 
J  IV. 2  (not  va°) — pp.  carita.  —  Cp.  vi°. 

Cila  [From  calati]  shaking,  a  shock,  only  in  bhunu°  earth- 
quake. 

Oilanl  (f.)  [to  calana  of  calaka^  a  pestle,  a  mortar  Vin 
1.202  (in  cunna"  &  dussa°,  cp.  sanha). 

Cileti  [cous.  of  calati]  to  move,  to  shake  J  v. 40  ;  to  scatter 
J  1. 71  (tinani)  ;  to  sift  Vin  1.202 

Cavana  (f.)  moving,  shifting,  'disappearance  Vin  111.112 
(thanato) ;  Sdhp  61  (id.). 

Caveti  [caus.  of  cavati]  to  bring  to  fall,  move,  drive  away  ; 
disturb,  distract  A  iv.343  (samSdhimha) ;  J  1.60  (inf. 
cavetu-kama) ;  n.329  (jhana,  abl.).  Aor.  acavayi 
(prohib.)  Sn  442  (thana). 

Ci  (cid  in  Sandhi)  [Vedic  cid  nom.  nt.  to  interr.  base  'qui 
(as  in  Gr.  rie,  Lat.  quis,  Goth,  hvi-leiks.  see  ki°,  cp. 
ka°,  ku°),  =  Gr.  ti{S),  Lat.  quid  &  quid(d)em,  Av.'cit 
(cp.  tad,  yad,  kad  beside  taij,  j-ag,  kir|)]  indef  interr. 
particle  (always  -°),  in  koci  (  -  Sk.  ka^cid)  whoever, 
kifici  (kincid-eva)  whatever,  kadaci  at  some  time  or 
any  time,  etc.  (q.  v.),  see  also  ca,  cana,  ce. 

Cikiccbati  [Sk.  cikitsati,  Desid.  of  cit,  cinteti.  Cp.  vici- 
kiccha],  usually  tikicchati  to  reflect,  think  over,  intend, 
aim  at.  Pp.  cikicchita  KhA  188  (in  expl"  of  vicikic- 
chita  q.  v.). 

Cikkhati  (cikkhana,  etc.)  [Freq.  of  khya.  Dhtp  19  :  cikkb= 
vacane]  to  tell,  to  announce:  see  a°  &  patisar)". 

CikkhaUa  (nt.)  [Sk.  cikkana  &  cikkala,  slippery-t-  ya]  mud, 
mire,  swamp;  often  with  udaka".  Vin  1.253;  11.120, 
159,  291  :  III. 41  ;  A  III. 394  ;  J  1. 196  ;  Miln  286,  3.1 1,  397  ; 
PvA  102,  189,  215.  — (adj.)  Vin  11. 221  ;  iv.312  ;  Pv 
iv.ii';  Miln  286. 

Cikkballavant  (adj.)  muddy  PvA  225. 

Cikkhassati  [Desid.  of  ksar  ^  Sk.  ciksarisati]  to  wish  to 
drop,  to  ooze  out  MUn  152  ("ssanto),  see  Kern.  Toev. 
II. 139  &  Morris,  J.P.T.S.  1884.  87. 

Cingalaka  (&  °ika)  (m.  nt.)  i.  a  kind  of  plant  Sn  239 
(=  kanavlra-pupphasanthana-sisa  SnA  283).  —  2.  a  toy 
windmill,  made  of  palm-leaves,  etc.  (DA  i.Sd ;  tala- 
pannadihi  katai)  vatappaharena  paribbhamana-cakkar)) 
\'in  li.if> ;  D  1.6     .M  1.266  ;  A  v. 203  ;  Miln  229. 

Cingnlayati  [Denom.  fr.  cingula]  to  twirl  round,  to  revolve 
like  a  windmill  A  1.112. 

CiCCiJayati  [onomat.  cp.  citicitayati]  to  hiss,  fizz,  sizzle 
(always  comb'  with  citicitayati)  Vin  1.225;  S  1. 169; 
Sn  p.  15  ;  Pug  30 ;  Miln  258  sq. 

Ciccitayana  (nt.)  fizzing  Vism  408  (°sadda). 

Ciflca  (f.)  [Sk.  cifica  «:  tintidika]  the  tamarind  tree  J  v. 38 

('.-ana).  SiiA  78. 

CHi-ci(i  [redupl.  interj.]  fizz  '  DA  1.137. 
Citicitayati  see  ciccitayati  :  Vin  1.225  ;  cp-  Divy  606. 


Ciwa  [pp.  of  carati]  travelled  over,  resorted  to.  made  a 
habit  of ;  done,  performed,  practised  J  111.541  ;  Miln  360. 
—  su°  well  performed,  accomplished  S  i.42=2i4  =  Sn 
i8[  ;  Pv  ni.5«.  —  Cp.  5°.  pari".  vi°. 

-tthana  the  place  where  one  is  wont  to  go  J  11. 159; 
-manatta  one  who  performs  the  Manatta  Vin  iv.242  ; 
-vasin  one  who  has  reached  mastership  in  (c.  loc.)  ThA 
74  ;  Vism  154.  158.  164.  169,  331  sq.,  37O  ;  der.  -Tasibhava 
DhsA  167  (read  vasi°). 

Ciiwatta  (nt.)  [Der.  fr.  cinna]  custom,  habit  Miln  57.  105. 

Cita  [pp.  of  cinati]  heaped ;  lined  or  faced  with  (cp. 
citaka'')  pokkharaniyo  itthakahi  cita  D  11. 178.  cp.  Vin 
11.123. 

-antaraijsa  "  one  whose  shoulder-hole  is  heaped  up." 
one  who  has  the  shoulders  well  filled  out  (Ep.  of  a 
Mahapurisa)  D  11.18  ■  111.144.  164. 

Citaka  cS:  Citaka  (f)  [from  ci,  cinati  to  heap  up]. —  i.  a 
heap,  a  pUe,  esp.  a  funeral  pile  ;  a  tumulus  D  11.163  ;  cp. 
II.  10".  J  1.255  ;  v. 488  ;  VI. 559,  576  ;  DA  1.6  ;  DhA  1.69; 
11.240  ;  VvA  234  ;  PvA  39.  —  2.  (adj.)  inlaid  :  suvanna". 
with  gold  J  VI.218  (=°khacita). 

Citi  (f.)  [From  ci,  cinati.  to  heap  up]  a  heap,  made  of 
bricks  J  VI. 204  (city-avayata-pitthika).  See  also 
cetiya. 

Cittaka  (nt.)  [to  citta']  a  sectarian  mark  on  the  forehead 
in  °dhara-kumina  a  tortoise  bearing  this  mark,  a  land- 
tortoise  Miln  364,  408,  cp.  Aliln  Irsl.  11.352. 

Citta'  &  Citra  (adj.)  [to  cetati ;  *(g)qait  to  shine,  to  be 
bright,  cp.  Sk.  citra,  Sk.  P.  ketu,  Av.  ci}>r6,  Lat.  caelum, 
Ags.  hador,  Ohg.  heitar.  see  also  citta*]  variegated,  mani- 
fold, beautiful ;  tasty,  sweet,  spiced  (of  cakes).  J  iv,30 
(genqluka) ;  Dh  171  (rajaratha) ;  Vv  47*;  Pv  11. 11* 
(aneka°) ;  iv.3'^  (piiva  =  madhura  PvA  251).  Citta 
(nt.)  painting  Th  i,  674.  —  Sn  50  (kama  =  Nd'  240 
nanavanna),  251  (gatha) ;  J  v. 196  (genduka).  241 
VI. 2 18. — sucitta  gaily  coloured  or  dressed  S  1.226  (b) ; 
Dh  151  (rajaratha)  ;  Pv  i.io*  (vimina). 

-akkhara  (adj.)  with  beautiful  vowels  S  11.267  (Cp. 
°vyanjana)  ;  -attharaka  a  variegated  carpet  DA  1.256  ; 
-agara  a  painted  house,  i.  e.  furnished  with  pictures ; 
a  picture  gallery  \'in  in. 298  ;  -upahana  a  gaily  coloured 
sandal  D  i.7~;  -kata  adorned,  dressed  up  M  11.64  = 
Dh  147 -Th  I,  769;  DhA  in. 109  (  =  vicitta);  -katha 
(adj.)  -nextS  1.199  ( -I- bahussuta) ; -kathin  a  brilliant 
speaker,  a  wise  speaker,  an  orator,  preacher.  Freq. 
comb'  w.  bahussuta  (of  wide  knowledge,  learned),  e.  g. 
pandita  .  .  .  medhavin  kalyanapatibhana  S  iv.375, 
samana  bahussuta  c.  ulara  Vv  84**.  —  A  111.58  ;  J  1.148  ; 
Miln  I,  21  ;  -kathika  -  °kathin  A  1.24  ;  Th  2,  449  (-H  ba- 
hussuta), expl'  at  ThA  281  by  cittadhammakatha ; 
-kanuna  decoration,  ornamentation,  painting  J  iv.408  ; 
VI. 333 ;  Miln  278;  Vism  306;  PvA  147;  DhsA  334; 
(m.)  a  painter  J  vi.481  ;  -kara  a  painter,  a  decorator 
(cp.  rajaka)  S  11.101=111.152;  Th  2,  255;  J  vi.333 ; 
-chatta  at  J  vi.540  to  be  changed  into  °patta ;  -patta 
(adj.)  haN-ing  variegated  wings  J  v. 540,  590  ;  -patali 
(f.)  N.  of  a  plant  (the  "  pied  "  trumpet-flower)  in  the 
world  of  Asuras  J  1.202  ;  DhA  1.2S0  ;  -pekhuna  having 
coloured  wings  J  1.207;  vi.539 ;  -bimba  (mukhi)  (a 
woman  whose  face  is)  like  a  painted  image  J  v. 452  (cp 
cittakata) ;  -miga  the  spotted  antelope  J  vi.538 ; 
-rupa  (nt.)  a  wonder,  something  wonderful  J  vi.512  ; 
as  adv.  °r)  (to  citta*?)  easily  Vin  11.78=111.161  ;  iv.177. 
232  ;  -lata  the  plant  Rubia  Munjista  J  vi.278;  °vana 
the  R.M.  grove,  one  of  Indra's  gardens  [Sk.  caitra- 
ratha]  J  1.52.  104  ;  11.188  ;  vi.590.  etc.  ;  -vitana  a  bright 
canopy  DhA  iv.14  ;  -vyaiijana  (adj.)  with  beautiful 
consonants  (cp.  °akkhara)  S  11.267  A  1.73  —  111.107; 
-sani  variegated  cloth  J  ii.jgo  ;  DhA  iv.  14;  -sala  a 
painted  room  or  picture  gallery  DA  1.253  ;  -sibbana  with 
line  sewing ;  a  cover  of  various  embroidery  Sn  304  = 
J  IV.395;   J  VI.218. 


CitU 


97 


Citta 


Ottta'  (nt.)  [Sk.  citta,  orig.  pp.  of  cinteti,  cit,  cp.  yutta  > 
yu6jati,  mutta  >  muAcati.  On  etym.  from  cit.  see 
cinteti] . 

I.  Meaning:  the  heart  (psychologically),  i.  e.  the 
centre  &  focus  of  man's  emotional  nature  as  well  as  that 
intellectual  element  which  inheres  in  i:  accompanies 
its  manifestations ;  i.  e.  thought.  In  this  wise  citta 
denotes  both  the  agent  &  that  which  is  enacted  (see 
kanuna  II.  introd.),  for  in  Indian  Psychology  citta  is 
the  seat  &  organ  of  thought  (cetasS.  cinteti ;  cp.  Gr. 
fpnv,  although  on  the  whole  it  corresponds  more  to  the 
Homeric  Sw/iiif).  As  in  the  verb  (cinteti)  there  are  two 
stems  closely  allied  and  almost  inseparable  in  meaning 
(see  §  III.),  viz.  cit  &  cet  (citta  &  cetas) :  cp.  ye  should 
restrain,  curb,  subdue  citta  by  ceto,  il  i.izo,  242  (cp. 
attana  coday'  att4nar)  Dhp  379  f.) ;  cetasS  cittag 
samannesati   S    1.194   (cp-    cetas4    cittar)    samannesati 

5  1.194).  1°  their  general  use  there  is  no  distinction  to 
be  made  between  the  two  (see  §  III.).  —  The  meaning 
of  citta  is  best  understood  when  explaining  it  by 
expressions  familiar  to  us,  as .  with  all  my  heart ; 
heart  and  soul ;  I  have  no  heart  to  do  it ;  blessed  are  the 
pure  in  heart ;  singleness  of  heart  (cp.  ekagga)  ;  all  of 
which  emphasize  the  emotional  &  conative  side  or 
"  thought  "  more  than  its  mental  &  rational  side  (for 
which  see  manas  &  viflilina).  It  may  therefore  be 
rendered  by  intention,  impulse,  design  ;  mood,  disposi- 
tion, state  of  mind,  reaction  to  impressions.  It  is  only 
in  later  scholastic  Igg.  that  we  are  justified  in  applying 
the  term  "  thought  "  in  its  technical  sense.  It  needs 
to  be  pointed  out,  as  complementary  to  this  view,  that 
citta  nearly  always   occurs  in  the  singular   (  =  heart), 

6  out  of  150  cases  in  the  NikSyas  only  3  times  in  the 
plural  (  =  thoughts).  The  substantiality  of  citta  (cetas) 
is  also  evident  from  its  connection  with  kamma  (heart 
as  source  of  action),  kSma  &  the  senses  in  general.  — 
On  the  whole  subject  see  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  Buddh.  Psvch. 
Eth.  introd.  &  Bud.  Psy.  ch.  II. 

II.  Cases  of  citta  (cetas),  their  relation  &  frequency 
(enum""  for  gram,  purposes).  —  The  paradigma  is 
(numbers  denoting  ";,,  not  including  cpds.) :  Nom. 
cittai)  ;  Gen.  (Dat.)  cetaso  (44)  &  cittassa  (9) ;  Instr. 
cetasS  (42)  &  cittena  (3);  Loc.  citte  (2)  &  cittamhi  (2). 
—  Nom.  cittai)  (see  below).  Gen.  cittassa  only  (of 
older  passages)  in  c°  upakkileso  S  m.232  ;  v. 92  ;  A 
1.207  ;  c°  damatho  Dh  35  &  c°  vasena  M  1.2 14  ;  iii.  156. 
Instr.  cittena  only  in  S  i.  viz.  cittena  niyati  loko  p.  39 ; 
upakkilittha°  p.  179:  asallinena  c°  p.  159.  Loc.  citte 
oiJy  as  loc.  abs.  in  sam&hite  citte  (see  below)  &  in  citte 
vyapanne  kayakammam  pi  v.  hoti  A  1.162  ;  cittamhi 
only  S  1. 129  &  cittasmig  only  S  1.132.  —  Plural  only  in 
Nom.  cittani  in  one  phrase :  isavehi  cittani  (vi)  muc- 
cii)su  "  they  purified  their  hearts  from  intoxications  " 
Vin  1.35;  S  111.132  ;  iv.20  ;  Sn  p.  149;  besides  this  in 
scholastic  works  =  thoughts,  e.  g.  Vbh  403  (satta 
cittani). 

III.  Citta  &  cetas  in  promiscuous  appUcation.  There 
is  no  cogent  evidence  of  a  clear  separation  of  their 
respective  fields  of  meaning ;  a  few  cases  indicate  the 
role  of  cetas  as  seat  of  citta,  whereas  most  of  them  show 
no  distinction.  There  are  cpds.  having  both  citta"  & 
ceto°  in  identical  meanings  (see  e.  g.  citta-samadhi  & 
ceto°),  others  show  a  preference  for  either  one  or  the 
other,  as  ceto  is  preferred  in  ceto-khila  &  ceto-vimutti 
(but :  vimutta-citta),  whereas  citta  is  restricted  to 
comb"  w.  upakkilesa,  etc.  The  foil,  sentences  will 
illustrate  this.  Vivatena  cetasa  sappabhasai)  cittar) 
bhaveti  "  with  open  heart  he  contemplates  a  radiant 
thought"  S  v.263  =  D  iii.223  =  A  iv.86  ;  cetasa  cittag 
samannesati  vippamuttai)  "  with  his  heart  he  scrutinizes 
their  pure  mind"  S  M94;  vigatibhijjhena  cetasa  is 
followed  by  abhijjaya  cittai)  pansodheti  D  111.49 ; 
anuparambhacitto  bhabbo  cetaso  vikkhepai)  pahatuQ 
A  V.149:  cetaso  vupasamo  foil,  by  vupasanta-citto 
A  1.4;  samahite  citte  foil,  by  ceto-samadhi  D  1.13^; 
cittai)  padutthai)  foil,  by  ceto-padosa  A  1.8  ;  cp.  It.  12, 


1 3  ;  cetaso  tato  cittag  nivaraye  "  a  desire  of  his  heart 
he  shall  exclude  from  this  "  S  iv.195. 

IV.  Citta  in  its  relation  to  other  terms  referring  to 
mental  processes. 

1.  citta^hadaya,  the  heart  as  incorporating  man's 
personality :  hadayag  phaleyya.  cittavikkhepag  pa- 
purieyya  (break  his  heart,  upset  his  reason)  S  1.126; 
cittai)  te  khipissami  hadayan  te  phalessami  id.  S  1.207, 
214;  Sn  p.  32  ;  kamaragena  cittag  me  paric^ayhati  S 
1.188  >nibbapehi  me  hadaya-parilahag  Miln  318  ("  my 
heart  is  on  fire");  cp.  abhinibbutatto  Sn  343  =  apari- 
4ayhamana-citto  SnA  347  ;  cittag  adhitthahati  to  set 
one's  heart  on,  to  wish  DhA  1.327. 

2.  c.  as  mental  status,  contrasted  to  (a)  physical 
status :  citta  >  kaya,  e.  g.  kilanta°  weary  in  body  & 
mind  D  1.20  =  111.32;  atura°  S  111.2-5 ;  nikattha°  A 
II.  1 37;   thita"  steadfast  in  body  &  soul  (cp.   (hitatta) 

5  V.74 ;  °passaddhi  quiet  of  body  &  soul  S  v.66.  The 
Commentators  distinguish  those  six  pairs  of  the  san- 
kharakkhandha,  or  the  cetasikas  :  citta-kaya-passaddhi, 
-lahuta,  etc.  as  quiet,  buoyancy,  etc.,  of  (a)  the  vifliia- 
nakkhandha  (consciousness),  (b)  the  other  3  mental 
khandhas,  making  up  the  nama-kaya  (DhsA  150  on 
Dhs.  62  :  Compendium  of  Phil  96,  n.  3) ;  passaddha" 
D  111.241,  288.  —  (b)  intellectual  status:  citta>  manas 

6  vifiiiana  (mind  >  thought  &  understanding).  These 
three  constitute  the  invisible  energizer  of  the  body, 
alias  mind  in  its  manifestations :  yafi  ca  vuccati  cittan 
ti  va  mano  ti  va  viiiiianan  ti  va :  (a)  ayag  atta  nicco 
dhuvo.  etc.,  D  1.2 1  ;  (^3)  tatr'  assutava  puthujjano 
n'  dlag  nibbinditug,  etc.  S  11.94  •  (t)  *^  rattiya  ca 
divasassa  ca  afina-d-eva  uppajjati  afii^ag  nirujjhati 
S  11.95,  cf.  ThA.  i  on  125.  —  Under  adesana-patihariya 
(thought  reading)  :  evam  pi  te  mano  ittham  pi  te  mano  iti 
pi  te  cittag  (thus  is  your  thought  &  thus  your  mind,  i.  e. 
habit  of  thinking)  D  1.213  =  111.103  ;  A  1.170.  —  niccag 
idag  c.  niccag  idag  mano  S  1.53  ;  cittena  niyyati  loko 
"  by  thoughts  the  world  is  led  "  S  i.39  =  A  11. 177  (cp. 
KS  55)  ;  apatitthita-citto  Sdina-manaso  avyapaona- 
cetaso  S  v.74  •  vyapanna-citto  paduttha-manasan- 
kappo  S  111.93  ;  paduttha-citto=paduttha-manaso 
PvA  34,  43. 

3.  c.  as  emotional  habitus:  (a)  oc<jve  =  intention, 
contrasted  or  compared  with :  (a)  will,  c.  as  one  of  the 
four  samadhis,  viz.  chanda.  viriya,  c,  vimagsa  D 
III. 77  ;  S  v. 268  ;  Vbh  288.  —  (/3)  action,  c.  as  the  source 
of  kamma :  citte  vjapanne  kayakammam  pi  vyapan- 
nag  hoti  "  when  the  intention  is  evil,  the  deed  is  evil  as 
well"  A  1.262;  cittag  appamaijag  .  .  .  yag  kiflci 
pamaijakatag  kammag,  etc.  A  v. 299.  —  Esp.  in  con- 
trast to  kaya  &  vaca,  in  triad  kayena  vacaya  cittena  (in 
deed  &  speech  &  will  otherwise  as  k.  v.  manasa,  see 
under  kaya  III.)  S  11.231,  27i  =  iv.ii2.  Similarly  tag 
vacag  appahaya  (cittag°,  ditthig')  S  iv. 319  =  1)  in.  13, 
15 ;  &  under  the  constituents  of  the  dakkhiijeyya- 
sampatti  as  khetta-sampatti,  citta°,  payoga"  (the 
recipient  of  the  gift,  the  good-will,  the  means)  VvA  30, 
32.  —  (b)  passive  =  mood,  feeUngs,  emotion,  ranging 
with  kaya  &  paflfia  under  the  (3)  bhavana  D  in. 2 19; 

5  IV.  1 1 1  ;  A  III.  106  ;  cp.  M  1.237  '•  Nett  91  ;  classed  with 
kaya  vedana  dhamma  under  the  (4)  satipafthanas 
D  11.95,  100,  299  sq.  ;  S  v. 1 14.  etc.  (see  kaya  cpds.).  As 
part  of  the  silakkhandha  (with  sila  ethics,  pajifta  under- 
standing) in  adhisila,  etc.  Vin  v.i8i  ;  Ps  11.243;  Vbh 
325;  cp.  tisso  sampada,  scil.  sila,  citta,  ditthi  (see  sila 

6  cp.  cetana,  cetasika)  A  1.269.  —  citta  &  pailfia  are 
frequently  grouped  together,  e.  g.  S  1.13=165; 
D  111.269  ;  Th  1.125  sq.  As  feeling  citta  is  contrasted 
with  intellection  in  the  group  safifia  c.  dit(hi  A  11.52  ; 
Ps  n.80  ;  Vbh  376. 

4.  Definitions  of  citta  (direct  or  implied) :  cittan  ti 
vijlfiaoag  bhumikavatthu-arammaija-kiriyadi-cittataya 
pan'  etag  cittan  ti  vuttag  DhA  1.228;  cittan  ti  mano 
manasag  KhA  153;  cittag  manoviflfiaijag  ti  cittassa 
etag  vevacanag  Nett  54.  yag  cittag  mano  manasag 
hadayag  paijdarag,  etc.  Dhs  6=111  (same  for  def.  of 


Citta 


98 


Citta 


manindriya,  under  §  ly  ;  see  Buddh.  Psych.).  As  rup&- 
vacara  citta  at  Vism  376. 

\'.  Citta  in  its  range  of  semantical  applications  : 
(i)  heart,  will,  intention,  etc.  (see  I.). 

(a)  heart  as  general  status  of  sensory-emotional 
being;  its  relation  to  the  senses  (indriyani).  A  stead- 
fast &  constrained  heart  is  the  sign  of  healthy  emotional 
equilibrium,  this  presupposes  the  control  over  the 
senses ;  samadahai)su  cittar)  attano  ujukai)  akagsu, 
sSrathi  va  nettani  gahetva  indriySni  rakkhanti  panditi 
S  1.26;  ujugato-citto  ariyasavako  A  in. 285  ;  thita  c. 
S  i.i59~;  A  111.377  =  1V.404  (-(- anejjappatta) ;  c.  na 
kampati  Sn  268  ;  na  vikampate  S  iv.71  ;  opp.  capalar) 
c.  Dh  33  ;  khitta°  a  heart  unbalanced  A  11.52  {+  visafi- 
nin) ;  opp.  :  avikkhitta"  A  v.  149  ;  PvA  26  ;  c.  rakkhitai] 
mahato  atthaya  sagvattati  a  guarded  heart  turns  to 
great  profit  A  1.7  ;  similarly :  c.  dantag,  guttag,  sag- 
vutag  ibid.  —  cittag  rakkhetha  medhavi  cittag  guttag 
sukhavahag  Dh  36;  cakkhundriyag  asagvutassa  \'iha- 
rato  cittag  vySsiiicati  .  .  .  rupesu  S  iv.78  ;  ye  cittag 
safliiamessanti  mokkhanti  MarabandhanS  "  from  the 
fetters  of  Mara  those  are  released  who  control  their 
heart"  Dh  37;  papa  cittag  nivaraye  Dh  116;  bhik- 
khuno  c.  kulesu  na  sajjati,  gayhati.  bajjhati  S  11. 198 
(cp.  Schiller :  "  Nicht  an  die  Giiter  hange  dein  Herz  "). 

(b)  Contact  with  kama  &  raga :  a  lustful,  worldly, 
craving  heart.  —  (n)  kama  :  kama  mathenti  cittag 
Sn  50  ;  S  IV. 2 10  ;  kamaragena  dayhSmi  S  1.188  ;  kame 
napekkhate  cittag  Sn  435  ;  ma  te  kamagune  bhamassu 
cittag  Dh  371  ;  manussakehi  kamehi  cittag  vuttha- 
petva  S  v. 409 ;  na  ujaresu  kama^^uQesu  bhogSya  cittag 
namati  A  iv.392  ;  S  1.92  ;  kamasava  pi  cittag  vimuccati 
A  11.211,  etc.  ;  kamesu  c.  na  pakkhandati  na  ppasSdati 
na  santitthati  (my  h.  does  not  leap,  sit  or  stand  in 
cravings)  D  ni.239;  kSmesu  tibbasSrago  vyapannacitto 
S  111.93  ;  kamamise  laggacitto  (divide  thus  !)  PvA  107. 

—  (ci)  rdgd :  rSgo  cittai)  anuddhagseti  (defilement 
harasses  his  heart)  S  1.185;  11.231=271;  A  11.126; 
IJ1.393  ;  raga-pariyutthitari  c.  hoti  A  in. 285  ;  saratta- 
citto  S  IV. 73;  viratta"  S  iv.74 ;  Sn  235;  PvA  168. — 
(y)  various  :  patibaddha  —  c.  (fettered  in  the  bonds  of 
°)  A  IV. 60  ;  Sn  37,  65  ;  PvA  46,  151,  etc.  —  pariyadinna° 
(grasping,  greedy),  usually  comb''  w.  labhena  abhi- 
bhSta:    S   n.226,    228;    iv.125;    A   iv.160;    D   111.249. 

—  upakkilittha°  (etc.)  (defiled)  S  1.179;  111.151,  232  sq.  ; 
v. 92  (kamacchando  cittassa  upakkileso)  ;  A  1.207  ; 
V.93  sq.  — otiijna"  fallen  in  love  A  111.67  '■  ^^A  322 

(c)  A  heart,  comjKJsed,  concentrated,  settled,  self- 
controlled,  mastered,  constrained.  —  («)  c.  pasidati 
(pasanna-°c)  (a  heart  full  of  grace,  settled  in  faith)  S 
1.98  ;  A  1.207  ;  III. 248  ;  Sn  434  ;  pasanna°  :  A  iv.209,  213  ; 
Sn  316,  403,  690,  cp.  c.  pakkhandati  pasidati  S  111.133  ; 
A  III. 245 ;  also  vippasanna°  :  S  v. 144;  Sn  506;  cp. 
vippasannena  cetasa  Pv  1.10'°  — (/3)  c.  santitthati  in 
set  s.  sannisidati,  ekodihoti,  samadhiyati  (cp.  cetaso 
ekodibhava)  S  11.273;  iv.263  ;  A  11.94,  '57-  —  M  ^■ 
samadhiyati  (samahita-c°,  cp.  ceto-samadhi  quiescence) 
D  1.13=111.30,  108  ;  S  1.120,  129,  188;  IV. 78  =  351  ;  A 
1.164  ;  II. 211  ;  111. 17,  280  ;  iv.177  ;  Vbh  227  ;  Vism  376, 
etc. — (l)  supatitthita-c°  always  in  formula  catusu  satipat- 
thanesu-s-c°  ;  S  111.93  ;  v. 154  ;  301  ;  D  111. 101  ;.  A  v. 195. 

—  (t)  susanthita  c.  S  V.V4.  —  vasibhuta  c.  S  1.132  ; 
A  1. 165.  —  danta  c.  Dh  35.  —  (d)  "with  purpose  of 
heart,"  a  heart  set  on,  striving  after,  endeavouring, 
etc.  —  (a)  cittag  namati  (inclines  his  h.  on,  with  dat : 
appossukkataya  S  1.137) ;  nekkhamma-ninna  S  111  233  ; 
Nnveka"  D  111.283  ;  A  iv.233  ;  v.  175.  —  (fi)  cittag  pada- 
hati  (pa-(-dh&:  irpo  TiW/jn)  in  phrase  chandag  janeti 
vayamati  viriyag  arabbhati  c°  g  pagganhati  padahati 
D  111.221  ;  A  11.15=  IV. 462  ;  S  V.269;  Nd^  97;  Nett  18. 
In  the  same  sense  pa-ni-dahati  (in  panidhi,  panihita 
bent  down  on)  (cp.  ceto-panidhi)  S  1.133  (tattha) 
IV. 309  (dup°)  ;  V.I 57  ;  Dh  42  =  Ud  39;  Dh  43  (samraa°). 

(e)  An  evil  heart  ("  out  of  heart  proceed  evil  thoughts  " 
Mk.  7.  21)  —  (a)  paduttha-c"  (cp.  ceto-padosa)  D  1.20  = 
III. 32 ;  A  1.8  (opp.  pasanna-c°) ;  iv.92  ;  It  12,   13;  Pv 


A  33,  43,  etc.  —  {li)  Tyapanna-c° :  citte  vySpanne 
kayakammam  pi  vyapannag  hoti  A  1.262.  Opp.  a": 
S  IV. 322  ;  A  11.220.  —  (7)  samoha-c°  {+  saraga,  etc.) 
D  1.79;  11.299;  111-281  ;  Vism  410,  &  passim. 

(f)  "  blessed  are  the  pure  in  heart,"  a  pure,  clean,  puri- 
fied (cp.  Ger.  gelautert),  emancipated,  free,  detached 
heart,  (a)  mutta-c°,  vimutta-c°,  etc.  (cp.  cetaso  vimok- 
kho,  ceto-vimutti,  muttena  cetasa),  3savehi  cittani 
muccigsu  S  111.132,  etc.;  vi°  Sn  p.  149.  —  vimutta: 
S  1.28  (+  subhavita),  29,  46=  52  ;  111.45  (+  viratta),  90  ; 
IV. 236  (raga):  Sn  23  (-(- sudanta) ;  Nd*  587.  —  suvi- 
mutta:  S  1.126,  141,  233;  iv.164;  A  111.245;  v. 29; 
Sn  975  (-t-satim5).  —  (0)  cittag  parisodheti  M  1347; 
A  11.211;  S  IV. 104.  —  {y)  alina  c.  (unstained)  S 
1.159;  A  V.149;  Sn  68;  717;  Nd'  97  (cp.  cetaso 
llnatta). 

(g)  good-will,  a  loving  thought,  kindliness,  tender- 
heartedness, love  ("  love  the  Lord  with  all  your  heart  "). 
—  (n)  metta-c°  usually  in  phrase  mettacittai]  bhaveti 
"  to  nourish  the  heart  with  loving  thought,"  to  produce 
good-will  D  1.167;  S  11.264;  A  1. 10;  v.Pi  ;  Sn  507  (cp. 
metta-sahagatena  cetasa).  —  (0)  bhayita-c"  *'  keep  thy 
heart  with  all  diligence"  (Prov.  4,  23)  S  1.188  (H-su- 
samahita) ;  iv.294  ;  v.369  (saddha-paribhavita) ;  A  1.6 
(-1-bahuUkata,  etc.);  Sn  134  (  =  S  1.188);  Dh  89  =  8 
V.29  ;  PvA  139. 

(h)  a  heait  calmed,  allayed,  passionless  (santa° 
upasanta°)  D  111.49 ;  S  1.141 ;  Sn  746. 

(i)  a  wieldy  heart,  a  heart  ready  &  prepared  for  truth, 
an  open  &  receptive  mind :  kalla"',  mudu".  udagga°, 
pasanna"  A  iv.186;  kalla°  PvA  38  (sanctified);  lahu" 
S  1.201  ;  udagga°  Sn  689,  1028;  S  i.igo  (-1- mudita) ; 
mudu°  PvA  54. 

(k)  Various  phrases.  Abbhuta-cittajata  "  while 
wonder  filled  their  hearts  "  S  1.178  ;  evagcitto  "  in  this 
state  of  mind"  S  11. 199;  Sn  985;  cittam  me  Gotamo 
janati  (G.  knows  my  heart)  S  1.178;  thej^a-citto  in- 
tending to  steal  Vin  in. 58  ;  araddha-citto  of  determined 
mind  M  1.414  ;  S  11.21,  cp.  107  ;  Sn  p.  102  ;  aniiacittar) 
upafthapeti  S  n.267  ;  nana"  of  varying  mind  J  1.295  . 
nihinacitto  low-minded  PvA  107;  nikattha"  A  ri.137; 
ahata"  A  iv.46o  =  v.!8;  supahata°  S  1.238  (cp.  Miln 
26);  visankharagata"  Dh  154;  sampanna°  Sn  164; 
vibbhanta"  S  i.6i  =  A  1.70  =  11.30  =  111.391. 

(2 )  thought :  ma  papakaq  akusalag  cittag  cintejryatha 
(do  not  think  any  evil  thought)  S  v.418  ;  na  cittamat- 
tam  pi  (not  even  one  thought)  PvA  3  ;  mama  cittag 
bhaveyya  (I  should  think)  PvA  40.  For  further  in- 
stances see  Dhs  &  Vbh  Indexes  &  cp.  cpds.  See  also 
remarks  above  (under  I.).  Citta  likened  to  a  monkey 
Vism  425. 

-4dhipati  the  influence  of  thought  (adj.  "paieyya) 
Nett  16;  Dhs  269,  359;  DhsA  213.  Commentators 
define  c.  here  as  javanacittuppada,  our  "  thought "  in 
its  specialized  sense.  Compendium  of  Phil.  177,  n.  2. 
-dnuparivattin  consecutive  to  thought  Dhs  671,  772, 
1522 ;  -dnupassani  the  critique  of  heart,  adj.  "inu- 
passin  D  11,299;  ni.221,  281;  M  1.59  &  passim  (cp. 
kay°) ;  -avila  disturbance  of  mind  Nd'  576  ("karana) ; 
-ujjukata  rectitude  of  mind  Dhs  51,  277,  etc.  ;  -uppada 
the  rise  of  a  thought,  i.  e.  intention,  desire  as  theyya  °tf 
uppadesi  he  had  the  intention  to  steal  (a  thought  of 
theft)  Vin  111.56  ;  —  M  1.43  ;  111.45  ;  J  11.374  ;  -ekaggata 
"  one-pointedness  of  mind,"  concentration  Nett  15,  16; 
\ism  84,  137,  158;  DhA  in. 425 ;  ThA  75;  cp. 
ekagga-citto  A  111.175;  -kali  a  witch  of  a  heart,  a 
witch-like  heart  Th  1,  356;  -kallata  readiness  of 
heart,  preparedness  of  mind  VvA  330  ;  -kilesa  stain 
of  h.  Dh  88  (DhA  n.i62  =  pafica  nivarana) ;  -ke}isa 
pastime  of  the  mind  Th  1,  1010;  -kkhepa  derange- 
ment of  the  mind,  madness  Vin  v. 189=  193  (um- 
mada-(-);  A  111.219  (ummada-H);  DhA  111.70  (  =  um- 
mada)  ;  PvA  39 ;  Dh  1 38  ;  cp.  "vikkhepa ;  -ceta- 
sika  belonging  to  heart  &  thought,  i.  e.  mental  state, 
thought,  mind  D  1.213;  Dhs  1022  (-dhamma,  Mrs. 
Rh.   D.  :   emotional,   perceptual  &  synthetic  states  as 


Citta 


99 


Citta 


well  as  those  of  intellect  applied  to  sense-impressions), 
1282:  Ps  1.84;  Miln  87;  Vism  61,  84,  129.  337; 
-dubbhaka  a  rogue  of  a  heart,  a  rogne-like  heart 
Th  I,  214;  -pakopana  shaking  or  upsetting  the 
mind  It  84  (dosa) ;  -pamaddin  crushing  the  h.  Th 
2,  357  (  =  ThA  243;  V.  I.  pamSthin  &  pam&din) ; 
-pariyaya  the  ways  (i.  e.  behaviour)  of  the  h.  A  v.  160 
(cp.  ceto-paricca) ;  -passaddbi  calm  of  h.,  serenity  of 
mind  (cp.  kaya°)  S  v. 66  ;  Dhs  62  ;  -bhavana  cultivation 
of  the  h.  M  III.  149  ;  -mala  stain  of  h.  PvA  1 7  ;  -muduta 
plasticity  of  mind  (or  thought)  Dhs  62,  277,  325; 
-rudta  aiter  the  heart's  liking  J  1.207  ;  -rupai)  according 
to  intention,  as  much  as  expected  Vin  1.222  :  11  78  ; 
III. 161  ;  1V.177,  232  :  -lahuta  buoyancy  of  thought 
Dhs  62,  323,  1283  ;  Vism  465  ;  -vikkhepa  (cp.  °kkhepa) 
madness  S  1. 1 26  (-t-  ummSda) ;  Xett  27  ;  Vism  34  :  -vippa- 
yutta  disconnected  with  thought  Dhs  1 1 92 ,  1 5 1 5  ;  -Tisar)- 
sat^ha  detached  fr.  thought  Dhs  1 194,  1517  ;  -Tupasama 


allayment  of  one's  h.  S  1.46 ;  •sankilesa  (adj.)  with  im- 
pure heart  (opp.  c.-vodana)  S  111.151  ;  -safifiatti  convic- 
tion Miln  256 ;  -santapa  "  heart-bum,"  sorrow  PvA  18 
(  — soka);  -samadhi  (cp.  ceto-samSdhi)  concentration 
of  mind,  collectedness  of  thought,  self-possession 
S  IV. 350  ;  v.269 ;  Vbh  218;  -samodhana  adjustment, 
calming  of  thoughts  ThA  45 ;  -sampljana  (adj.)  h.- 
crushing  (cp.  °pamaddin  St.  "pakopana)  Nett  29  (doma- 
nassa).  -sahabhu  arising  together  with  thought  Dhs 
670.  769,  1520.  •hetuka  (adj.)  caused  by  thought 
Dhs  667.  767. 


Oitte'  [cp.  Sk.  caitra,  the  first  month  of  the  year :  March- 
April,  orig.  N.  of  the  star  Spica  (in  Virgo) ;  see  E. 
Plunket,  Ancient  Calendars,  etc.,  pp.  134  sq.,  171  sq.] 
N.  of  the  month  Chaitra  PvA  135.  Cp.  Citra-misa 
KhA  192. 


CORRIGENDA. 


TO  PART  I. 
Page  X,  under  la  add.  Dokapa^ana.  P.T.S.  1906  (Dukp). 

Tikapatth&na,  3  vols.    P.T.S.  1921-23  (Tikp). 
ifc    ,.      Papanca  Sadanl,  pt.  I..  P.T.S.  1922  (MA). 
..     xii,     ,,      4      ,,       Kirfcl,  W.  Kosmographie  der  Indcr   Bonn  &  Leipzig  1920. 
Bi    .,       Dukp=  Dukapatthana  .     .     .    \a. 
Tikp=Tikapatthana      .  .   la. 

Patth=Patthana:  see  Duka"  &  Tika"  .     .     .    la. 
.  column  2 ,  read  Anavada  for  AnuTada' 

2.  under  Amfissuka  read  J  ix.i&$  for  175. 

I.       .,      Avyapajjhai  read  It  31  (abyabajjh') /or  abyabojjh'. 


42. 
73. 
80, 
88, 


Asi   read  (under  cpds.):    -mala   (-kamraa)   sword-garland   (-torture)   J   111.178;   Davs  Hi. 35 
Preferable  to  interpretation  "  sword-dirt  " ;  see  mala  (mala). 


TO  PART  II. 

Page  115.  column  i.  after  Asmna.  insert  As&na.*  (?)  eating  Vism  116  (visam°,  cp.  visam-asita  Miln  302).      See,  however, 
masana. 

TO  PART  III. 

Page  17,  column  1,  exchange  respective  position  of  articles  Kamati  and  Kamandalu;  also  write  Kamana  as  Kamana. 

..     24.  I,  under  Karana,  in  Note,  read  passage  as  follows:  Kara^ia  here  ...  as  by  J  vi.270,  where  it  expls. 

kappitakesa-massu  and  J  v.  309  &  DhA  1.253,  where  massukamma  takes  the  place  of 
''karana;  and  J  111.314.  where  it  is  represented  by  massu-kutti  (C:  massukiriya).  Cp.  also 
DA  1.137. 


„     27. 


Kalyana  read  5  kalyanani  for  kalyani. 


TO  PART  IV. 
Page  67.  for  khelakapa  read  khel^paka  .  .   .  cp.  &paka.     ?  spittle -dribbler;  cp.  our  '  windbag.' 


CORRIGENDA 

FURTHER  CORRIGENDA  TO  PART  I. 

Page  22,  coliimn  2,  transfer  atta-kama  to  attha° 

23,        ,,        I,  undfr  attaniya  rea (i  soul-IikS /or  soul-lika. 

,,  26,  ,,  I,  under  adda'  correct  Nd*  gg'  to  Nd'  199*,  and  add  :  The  reading  aUAvalepana  occurs  at  Nd*  40 
(  =  S  rv.187),  &  is  perhaps  to  be  preferred.  The  meaning  is  better  to  be  given  as  "  newly 
plastered.'' 

,,     41,        ,,        2,  un<i«r  anurakkhana  rfaii  Pug /or  Rug. 

•  >     79.        >.        2,  under  alia  2  insert ;  allAvalepana,  see  adda^. 


TO  PART  II. 

Page  93  should  have  heading  \  at  top  of  page. 

98,  column   I,  under  am,  last  line,  read  five  for  fire. 

102,  2,  un(2«r  apana  reati  2+ paQ. 

103,  ,,         I,  under  ipiyati  read  f /or  5. 
103,        ,,        2,  under  abhata  delete  "  for  yathJbhutaj),"  &  insert  ref.  k  n.Ti  ;  It  12,  14  tvith  phrase  "' yatha- 


103, 
'39. 


bhatai)  as  he  hsus  been  reared  (cp.  J  v. 33c*'*  evag  kicch&  bhafo)." 
under  abhasa  delete  ref.  M  11.215. 
under  upakarin  transfer  ref.  M  1.86  (  =  Nd*  igg*)  to  art.  upakarika  in  meant 


"  fortification.' 


THE    PALI    TEXT    SOCIETY'S 
PALI-ENGLISH  DICTIONARY 


EDITED  BY 


T.  W.   RHYS  DAVIDS  F.B.A.  D.Sc.  Ph.D.  LL.D.  D.Litt. 
and  WILLIAM  STEDE  Ph.D. 


Part  IV  (Cit— No) 


PUBLISHED  BY 

THE  PALI  TEXT  SOCIETY 

LONDON 


11 


First  published 

Reprinted 

Reprinted 


1923 
1948 
1952 


Cittaka 


lOI 


Cippiyamana 


Cittak«(-')  &  CitrakaC')  i.  (adj-X--)  coloured  J  iv.464. — 
2.  (m-iC)  the  spotted  antelope  J  vi.538.  —  3.  (nt  ) 
a  (coloured)  mark  (on  the  forehead)  Miln  408  ("dhara- 
kumma).  —  f.  cittaka  a  counterpane  of  many  colours 
(DA  1.86  cittika :  vana  [read  nana°]  citra-uijoS-may' 
attharariari)  Vin  1.192  ;  11.163.  i6g  ;  D  1.7  ;  A  1.181  ~. 

Cittaka' :  see  acittaka. 

Ciitatara,  compar.  of  citta',  more  various,  more  varied. 
S  III. 151  sq.  —  a  punning  passage,  thus:  by  the  pro- 
cedure (carana)  of  mind  (in  the  past)  the  present  mind 
(citta)  is  still  more  varied.  Cp.  SA  in  loco:  Asl.  06; 
Expositor  88. 

Cittati  [f.  ab.>tr.  to  citta']  SA  on  S  rii.  151  sq. 
(bhumicittataya  dvaracittataya  aramma^^acIttatava 
kammananatta). 

Oittati  [f.  abstr.  to  citta^]  "  being  of  such  a  heart  or 
mind,"  state  of  mind,  character  S  111.152  ;  iv.142 
(vimutta")  ;  v.  158  (id.);  A  v.  145  sq.  (uparambha") ; 
Vbh  372  (id  ) ;  Vbh  359  (amudu°)  ;  PvA  13  (visuddhi°, 
noble  character);  patibaddha°  (in  love  with)  PvA  145, 
147,  270.     In  S  III. 152  /  cittita  q.  v. 

Cittatta  (n.)  =  cittata  S  v.158. 

Oitti  (f )  [fr.  cit,  cp.  citta,  cinta,  cinteti,  formation  like 
mutti>rauc,  sitti>sic]  "giving  thought  or  heart" 
only  in  comb"  w.  kar:  cittikaroti  to  honour,  to  esteem 
Ger.  cittikatva  M  111.24;  A  in.172;  Pv  11. g"  (cittig 
k.  =  pujetva  PvA  1 35) ;  Dpvs  1.2  ;  —  acittikatva  M 
111.22;  A  IV. 392.  —  pp.  cittikata  thought  (much)  of 
Vin  iv.6  (&  a");  Vbh  2. 

Oittik&ra  [see  citti]  respect,  consideration  VvA  1 78  (garu°), 
242  ;  PvA  26;  Vbh  371  (a°);  Vism  123  (cittt°),  188. 

Cittita  [pp.  of  citteti,  Denom.  fr.  citta^l  painted,  variegated, 
varied,  coloured  or  resplendent  with  (-°)  S  iir.152  {sic  I. 
for  cittata>.  So  SA,  which,  on  p.  151,  reads  citten'  eva 
cittitag  for  cintitai).  Th  i .  736  ;  2,  390  (su") ;  Vv  36'  ;  40'. 

Citra=  citta',  the  month  Chaitra,  KhA  192  ("mSsa). 

Ciniti  [Sk.  cinoti  A  cayati,  ci,  to  which  also  kaya,  q.  v. 
See  also  caya,  cita]  to  heap  up,  to  collect,  to  accumu- 
late. Inf.  cinitur)  Vin  11. 152;  pp.  cita  (q.  v.).  Pass. 
clyati  J  v. 7.  Caus.  cinapeti  to  construct,  to  build  J 
VI. 204  ;  Miln  81.  —  No/«  cinati  at  J  11.302  (to  weave) 
is  to  be  corr.  to  vinati  (see  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.).  —  Cp. 
5°,  pa°,  vi°. — Nole.  cinati  also  occurs  as  cinati  in  pa°. 

Cintaka  (adj.)  [cp.  cintin]  one  who  thinks  out  or  invents, 
in  akkhara°  the  grammarian  PvA  120,  niti°  the  law- 
giver ib.  130  ;  cp.  Divy  212.  451,  "  overseer." 

Cintana  (nt.)  =  cinta  Th  i,  695:  Miln  233. 

Cintanaka  (adj.)  thoughtful,  considerate  J  1.222. 

Cint&  [to  cit,  cinteti]  "  the  act  of  thinking  "  (cp.  citti), 
thought  S  1.57;  Pug  25;  Dhs  16,  20,  292;  Sdhp  165, 
21O.  — loka"  thinking  over  the  world,  philosophy 
S  V.447  ;  A  11.80. 

-kavi  "  thought-poetry,"  i.  e.  original  poetry  (see 
kavi)  A  11.230  ;  -mani  the  jewel  of  thought,  the  true 
philosopher's  stone  VvA  32  ;  N.  of  a  science  J  111.504  ; 
-maya  consisting  of  pure  thought,  metaphysical  I) 
HI. 2 19;  J  IV. 270;  Vbh  324;  Nett  8,  50,  fo  (°ma>-in,  of 
pafii^a) ;  Vism  439  (id.). 

Cintita  [pp.  of  cinteti,  cp.  also  cintaka]  (a)  (adj.)  thought 
out,  invented,  devised  S  1137  (dhammo  asuddho  sa- 
malehi  c.) ;  111.151  (caranai)  nama  cittag  citten'  cva 
c.) ;  Pv  II. 6"  (mantag  brahma°,  expl.  PvA  97  by  ka- 
thitag).  —  (b)  (nt.)  a  thought,  intention,  in  due"  .'<: 
su°  (bad  &  good)  A  1.102  ;  ThA  76;  -matta  as  much  a, 
a  thought,  loc.  cintita-matte  (yeva)  at  the  mere  thoughts 
just  as  he  thought  it  DhA  1.326  (  =  cintita  kkhaoe  in 
the  moment  of  thinking  it,  p.  329). 


Cintin  [adj.  to  cinta]  only  -° ;  thinking  of,  having  one's 
thoughts  on  A  1.102  (dluccintita"  &  su°) ,  Sn  174  (aj- 
jhatta" ;  v.  1.  B.  "sanfiln)  388;  J  111.306=  iv. 453  = 
v.  1 76  =  V. 478;  Miln  gj 

Cinteti  &  ceteti  [Sk.  cetati  to  appear,  perceive,  &  cinta- 
yati  to  think,  cit  (see  citta')  in  two  forms :  (a)  Act,  base 
with  nasal  infix  cint  (cp.  mufic,  yunj,  sific,  etc.) ;  (b)  Med. 
base  (denom.)  with  guna  cet  (cp.  moc,  yoj,  set.  etc. 
&  the  analogous  formations  of  chid,  chind,  ched  under 
chindati)  to*(s)qait;  see  citta',  with  which  further  cp. 
caksu,  cikita,  ciketi,  cikitsati,  &  in  meaning  passati 
(he  sees=he  knows),  Gr.  oMn=vidi,  K.  view=  thought, 
Ger.  anschauung]  —  Forms;  (a)  cint:  pres.  cinteti. 
pot.  cinteyya ;  ppr.  cintento  &  cintayanto  (Sn  834) ; 
—  aor.  cintesi,  3rd  pi.  cintcsug  (J  1.149),  acintayug 
(Sn  258);  — ger.  cintetva  (J  1279)  &  cintiya  (Mhvs 
VII. 17,  32);  —  grd.  cinteyya  &  cintetabba ;  pp.  cintita 
(q.  v.).  Cp.  also  cintana,  cintin.  —  (b)  cet:  pres. 
ceteti  &  cetayati  (S  1.121),  pot.  cetaye  (Pv  11.9'  = 
cinteyya  PvA  116);  ppr.  cetayana  (J  v. 339);  fut. 
cetessati  (Vin  111.19):  —  aor.  acctayi  (Pv  i.6'  =  cetesi 
PvA  34) ;  —  ger  cecca  (Vin  iii.i  12  ;  iv.29f)) ;  also  cicca: 
see  sail°.  —  grd.  cetabba  (for  *cctetabba  only  at  J 
IV. 1 57,  v.  1.  ceteyya.  expl.  by  cintetabba); — pp. 
cetayita  (q.  v.).     Cp.  also  cetana. 

Note.  The  relation  in  the  use  of  the  two  forms  is  that 
cet  is  the  older  &  less  understood  form,  since  it  is  usually 
expl''  by  cint,  whereas  cint  is  never  expl''  by  cet&  there- 
fore appears  to  be  the  more  frequent  &  familiar  form. 

Meaning:  (a)  (intr.)  to  think,  to  reflect,  to  be  of 
opinion.  Grouped  with  (phuttho)  vedeti,  ceteti,  san- 
janati  he  has  the  feeling,  the  awareness  (of  the  feeling), 
the  consciousness  S  iv.68.  Its  seat  is  freq.  mentioned 
with  manasa  (in  the  heart),  viz.  manasa  ditthigatani 
cintayanto  Sn  834 ;  na  papag  manasa  pi  cetaye  Pv 
II. 9'  ;  J  1.279  ;  PvA  13  (he  thought  it  over),  ib.  (evag  c. 
you  think  so) ;  Sdhp  289  (idisag  c.  id.)  Mhvs  vii.18,  32  ; 
Miln  233  (cintayati),  406  (cintayitabba).  —  Prohibitive  : 
ma  cintayi  don't  think  about  it,  don't  worry,  don't  be 
afraid,  never  mind  J  1.50,  292,  424;  111.289;  vi.176; 
pi.  ma  cinUyittha  J  1.457;  iv.414;  vi.344  ;  Vism  426; 
DhA  1. 12  ;  III. 196  ;  also  ma  cintesi  J  111.535-  —  (t>)  (ai-'A 
aec.)  to  ponder,  think  over,  imagine,  think  out,  design, 
scheme,  intend,  plan.  In  this  sense  grouped  with 
(ceteti)  pakappeti  anuseti  to  intend,  to  start  to  per- 
form, to  carry  out  S  11.65.  maranag  akankhati  ceta- 
yati (ponders  over)  S  1.121  ;  acinteyyani  na  cintetab- 
bani  A  11.80  ;  cetabba-rupa  (a  fit  object  of  thought,  a 
good  thought)  J  IV.  1 57  (  =  cintetabba) ;  loka-cintag  c. 
S  v.447;  ajjhattarupe,  etc.  ceteti  Vin  111.113;  manga- 
lani  acintayug  Sn  258  ;  difthigatani  cintayanto  Sn  834  ; 
kig  cintesi  J  1.22 1  ;  sokavinayan'-upayag  c.  to  devise 
a  means  of  dispelling  the  grief  PvA  39.  —  Ksp.  with 
papag  &  papakag  to  intend  evil,  to  have  ill-will  against 
(c.  dat.) :  ma  papakag  akusalag  cittag  cinteyyatha 
S  V.418;  na  p.  cetaye  manasi  pi  I^v  11. g'  (  =  cintey>a, 
piheyya  PvA  116):  p.  na  cintetabba  PvA  114;  tassa 
p.  acetayi  Pv  i.O*  (  =  cetcsi  PvA  34);  kig  amhakag 
cintesi  what  do  you  intend  against  us  ?  J  1.2 1 1.  —  (t) 
{with  rial.)  (restricted  to  ceteti)  to  set  one's  heart  on.  to 
think  upon,  strive  after,  desire :  agatipunabbhavaya 
c.  to  desire  a  future  rebirth  S  iv.201  ;  vimokkhaya  c. 
to  strive  after  emancipation  S  m.121  ;  attavyabadhaya 
c.  M  iii.23  =  A  I.15'7  =  S  IV. 339;  pabbajjaya  c.  It  75; 
rakkhaya  me  tvag  vihito  .  .  .  udahu  me  cctayase 
vadhaya  J  111. 146  —  acinteyya  that  which  must  not 
or  cannot  be  thought  A  11.80  (cattiri  °ani  four  reflec- 
tions to  be  avoided)  ;  VvA  323  (a.  buddhdnubhava 
unimaginable  majesty  of  a  U). 

Cipita  (adj.)  [pp.  to  cip  (')  see  next:  cp.  Sk.  cipita  grain 
flattened  after  boiling]  pressed  flat,  flattened  VvA  222. 
To  be  read  also  at  J  vi.185  for  vippita. 

Cippiyamana  [ppr.  Pass,  of  cip,  see  cipi(al  crushed  flat 
(l?h.  n,  ;  cp.  also  Kern  Tnev.)  Miln  261. 

IV— I 


Cimilika 


102 


Civara 


Cimilika  (f.)  see  cilimika  Vin  11.150;  iv.40 ;  Cp.  Vin. 
Texts  III.  167  ;  J.P.T.S.  1885,  39. 

Cira  (adj.)  [Vedic.  cira.  perhaps  to  *qneie  to  rest,  cp.  Lat. 
quies,  civis ;  Goth,  hveila ;  Ohg.  wilon  ;  E.  while]  long 
(of  time),  usually  in  cpds.  &  as  adv.  Either  cirag 
(ace.)  for  a  long  time  Sn  678,  730,  1029;  Dh  248;  Kh 
VII. 5  ;  J  II.  1 10;  IV. 3  ;  Pv  11.3'^  or  cirena  (instr.)  after 
a  long  time  Vin  iv.86 ;  DhsA  239;  or  ciraya  (dat.)  for 
long  Dh  342.  cirassa  (gen.)  see  cirassar). — ciratarai] 
(compar.)  for  a  (comparatively)  long  time,  rather  long 
A  III. 58 ;  Pv  11.8^.  cir-^-cirag  continually  Vin  iv.261  ; 
J  v. 233.  — acira  not  long  (ago)  lately,  newly:  "arahat- 
tappatta  S  1.196;  "pabbajita  S  1.185;  "parinibbute 
Bhagavati  shortly  after  the  death  of  the  Bhagavant 
D  1.204,  etc.  ;  Sn  p.  59. 

-kalar)  (adv.)  a  long  time  fr«q.  e.  g.  PvA  19,  45,  60, 
109 ;  -tthitika  perpetual,  lasting  long  A  iv.339  (opp. 
pariyapajjati) ;  Vv  So';  Pug  32,  33;  Vism  37,  175; 
DA  1.3.  -dikkhita  (not  °dakkhita)  having  long  since 
been  initiated  S  1.226  =  }  v.138  (  =  cirapabbajita) ; 
-nivasin  dwelling  (there)  for  a  long  time  S  11.227 ; 
-patika  fcp.  Sk.  cirar)  prati]  long  since,  adj.  constr. 
in  conformity  w.  the  subject  Vin  1.33;  D  11.270  = 
S  in.  1 20;  -pabbajita  having  long  since  become  a 
wanderer  A  111.114;  Sn  p.  92;  DA  1.143;  -ppavasin 
(adj.)  long  absent  Dh  219  (  =  cirappavuttha  DhA 
111.293).  -rattat)  (adv.)  for  a  long  time  Sn  665.  670  ; 
J  IV. 37 1  ;  and  -rattaya  id.  J  11.340  ;  Pv  1.9*. 

Cirassai]  (adv.)  [origin,  gen.  of  cira=cirasya]  at  last  Vin 
II. 195;  D  1. 179;  Si.  142  ;  J  11.439;  in. 315;  iv.446  (read 
cirassa  passami) ;  v.328  ;  Th  i,  868  ;  ThA  217  ;  PvA  60. 
— ^na  cirass'  eva  shortly  after  D  iii.ii  ;  J  IV.2  ;  DhA 
III.  1 76;  PvA  32.  — sucirass'  eva  after  a  very  long 
while  S  1. 193. 

Cirayati  [Sk.  cirayati,  v.  denom.  fr.  cira]  to  be  long,  to 
tarry,  to  delay,  DhA  1. 16;  VvA  64,  208;  cp.  cirar) 
karoti  id.  J  11.443. 

Cir!|a  [Sk.  ciri,  cp.  kira]  a  parrot  J  v. 202  (in  comp"  ciriti°). 

Cilimika  (f)  [Der.  fr.  cira]  as  cimilika  at  Vin  11.150; 
IV. 40  a  kind  of  cloth  or  carpeting,  made  from  palm- 
leaves,  bark,  etc.     Also  at  Pv.\  144  (doubtful  ready). 

Cillaka  fkilaka  or  khilaka,  q.  v.]  a  peg.  post,  pillar,  in 
daruka"  Th  2.  390  (cp.  ThA  257).  Not  with  Kern 
{Toev.)  "  a  wooden  puppet."  as  der.  fr.  citta.i 

Cinaka  (m.  nt.)  a  kind  of  bean  Sn  239  (  =  atavi-pabbata- 
padesu  aropita-jata-cina-mugga  SnA  283);  J  v. 405. 

CInapittha  (nt.)  red  lead  DA  1.40 ;  DhsA  14. 

Clyati  [Pass,  of  cinati]  to  be  gathered,  to  be  heaped  up 
Sn  428  (clyate  pahiitar)  punnai)).     See  also  a°. 

Cira  (nt.)  [Sk.  cira.  cp.  civara]  i.  bark,  fibre  D  1.167 
(kusa°,  vaka°.  phalaka°) ;  Vin  in. 34  ;  A  1.295  ;  Pug  55- 
—  a  bark  dress  Vin  1.305  ;  J  vi.500  (cp.  ciraka).  —  2.  a 
strip  (orig.  of  bark),  in  suvanna°-khacita  gold-brocaded 
VvA  280  (see  also  next).     Cp.  ociraka  (under  odiraka). 

Ciraka  [cp.  cTra]  i.  bark  (see  cpds.)  — 2.  a  strip,  in 
suvanna"  gold  brocade  (dress)  J  v.  197. 

-vasika    (nt.)   bark-dress    (a   punishment)   M   187  = 
A  l.48  =  Miln  197.  ' 

CIriya  (adj.)  [fr.  cira]  like  or  of  bark,  in  cpd.  daru°  (as 
Np.)  "  wood-barker  "  DhA  11.35. 

CIrilika  (f  )  rep.  Sk.  ciri  &  jhillika  a  cricket,  cirilli  a  sort 
of  large  fish]  a  cricket  A  111.397  (v.  1.  cirika).  Cp.  on 
word-formation  pipilika  &  Mod.  Gr.  ririVoiicor  cricket. 

Civara  (nt.)  ['Sk.  civara,  prob.  =  cira,  app!""  orig.  to  a 
dress  of  bark!  the  (upper)  robe  of  a  Buddhist  mendi- 
cant. C.  is  the  first  one  of  the  set  of  4  standard  requi- 
sites of  a  wandering  bhikkhu.  vir.  c°,  pindapata  alms- 
bowl,   senasana  lodging,   a  place  to  sleep  at,  gilana- 


paccaya-bhesajja-parikkhara  medicinal  appliances  fur 
use  in  sickness.  Thus  mentioned  passim  e.  g.  Vin 
III. 89.  99,  211;  IV. 154  sq.  ;  D  1.61  ;  M  11.102  ;  A  1.49; 
Nd'  s.  v.;  It  III.  In  abbreviated  form  Sn  339;  PvA 
7  ;  Sdhp  393.  In  starting  on  his  begging  round  the 
bhikkhu  goes  patta-civaratj  adaya,  that  is  literallj' 
'  taking  his  bowl  &  robe.'  But  this  "is  an  elliptical 
idiom  meaning  '  putting  on  his  outer  robe  and  taking 
his  bowl.'  A  bhikkhu  never  goes  into  a  village  without 
wearing  all  his  robes,  he  never  takes  them,  or  any  one 
of  the  three,  with  him.  Each  of  the  three  is  simply 
an  oblong  piece  of  cloth  (usually  cotton  cloth).  On  the 
mode  of  wearing  these  three  robes  see  the  note  at 
Dialogues  11.145. — Vin  iii.ii;  D  11.85;  Sn  p.  21; 
PvA  10,  13  &  passim.  The  sewin?  of  the  robe  was  a 
festival  for  the  laity  (see  under  kathina).  There  are 
6  kinds  of  cloth  mentioned  for  its  manufacture,  viz. 
khoma,  kappasika,  koseyya.  kambala,  sana,  bhanga 
Vin.  1.58  =  96  =  281  (cp.  °dussa).  Two  kinds  of  robes 
are  distinguished :  one  of  the  gahapatika  (layman)  a 
white  one,  and  the  other  that  of  the  bhikkhu,  the  c. 
proper,  called  parjsukular)  c.  "the  dust-heap  robe" 
Vin  V.I  1 7  (cp.  gahapati).  —  On  civara  in  general  & 
also  on  special  ordinances  concerning  its  making,  wear- 
ing &  handling  see  Vin  1.46,  49  sq.,  196,  198,  253  sq., 
285.  287  sq..  306  =  11.267  (of  var.  colours);  11.115  sq. 
(sibbati  to  sew  the  c.) ;  111.45.  5^  (theft  of  a  c).  195-223, 
254-266  ;  iv.59-62,  120-123,  173,  279  sq.,  283  (six  kinds). 
—  A  III.  108  (civare  kalyanakama) ;  v.  ino,  206  ;  Vism  62  ; 
It  103  ;  PvA  185.  —  Sise  clvarag  karoti  to  drape  the  outer 
robe  over  the  head  Vin  11.207,  217  ;  °g  khandhe  karoti 
to  drape  it  over  the  back  Vin  11.208,  217;  °r)  nikkhi- 
pati  to  lay  it  down  or  put  it  away  Vin  1.47  sq.  ;  11.152, 
224;  in.  198,  203,  263;  °g  sat)harati  to  fold  it  up  Vin 
1.46.  —  Var.  expressions  referring  to  the  use  of  the  robe  : 
atireka°  an  extra  robe  Vin  in.  195  ;  acceka"  id.  Vin  in. 260 
sq.  ;  kala°  (&  akala")  a  robe  given  at  (and  outside)  the 
specified  time  Vin  in. 202  sq. ;  iv.284,  287  ;  gahapati° 
a  layman's  r.  Vin  111.169.  171  ;  ti°  the  three  robes,  viz. 
sanghati,  uttarasanga.  Sntaravasaka  Vin  1.288.  289; 
III.II.  195.  198  sq.  ;  V.142  ;  adj.  tecivarika  wearing  3 
rs.  Vin  v. 193;  dubbala"  (as  adj.)  with  a  woriv-out  c. 
Vin  III  254  ;  IV. 59,  154.  286;  pai)sukula''  the  dust-heap 
robe  PvA  141  ;  sa°-bhatta  food  given  with  a  robe  Vin 
IV. 77;  lukha°  (adj.)  having  a  coarse  robe  Vin  1.109 
{+  duccola) .  III. 263  (id.) ;  A  1.25  ;  vihara"  a  robe  to  b^ 
used  in  the  monastery  Vin  111.212. 

-kanna  the  lappet  of  a  monk's  robe  DhA  in. 420 ; 
VvA  76  =  DhA  in. 106,  cp.  civarakarnaka  Av.§  11.184, 
&  "ika  Divy  239,  341,  350.  -kamma  (nt.)  robe-making 
Vin  II. 218  ;  111.60,  240  ;  iv.i  18,  151  ;  A  v.328  sq.  ;  DhA 
111.342;  PvA  73,  145.  -kara  (-samaya)  (the  time  of) 
sewing  the  robes  Vin  in. 256  sq.  -kila  (-samaya)  the 
right  time  for  accepting  robes  Vin  in. 261  ;  iv.286.  287  ; 
-(Una  (-samaya)  (the  time  for)  giving  robes  Vin  iv.77, 
99;  -dussa  clothing-material  Vin  iv.279,  280;  -nida- 
haka  putting  on  the  c.  Vin  1.284  :  -patiggahaka  the 
receiver  of  a  robe  Vin  1.283  ;  11.176  ;  v.205  ;  A  111.274  sq.  '• 
-pativisa  a  portion  of  the  c.  \'in  1.263.  285,  301  ; 
-palibodha  an  obstacle  to  the  valid  performance  of  the 
kathina  ceremony  arising  from  a  set  of  robes  being 
due  to  a  particular  person  [a  technical  term  of  the 
canon  law.  See  Vinaya  Texts  11.149,  157,  169].  It  is 
one  of  the  two  kathinassa  palibodha  (c.  &  avasa°) 
Vin  1.265  ;  v.  1 1 7.  cp.  178  ;  -paviveka  (nt.)  the  seclusion 
of  the  robe,  i.  e.  of  a  non- Buddhist  with  two  other 
pavivekani  (pindapata"  &  sennsana")  at  A  1. 240 ; 
-bhanga  the  distribution  of  robes  Vin  iv.284  ;  -bbatta 
robes  &  a  meal  (given  to  the  bh.)  \'in  in. 265;  -bha- 
jaka  one  who  deals  out  the  robes  Vin  1.285;  11.176; 
v.205;  A  III. 274  sq.  (cp.  "patiggahakal ;  -bhisi  a  robe 
rolled  up  hke  a  pillow  Vin  1.287  sq.  ;  -rajju  (f.)  a  rope 
for  (hanging  up)  the  robes ;  in  the  Vinaya  always 
comb''  with  "varjsa  (see  below) ;  -liikha  (adj.)  one  who 
is  poorly  dressed  Pug  53  ;  -vagsa  a  bamboo  peg  for 
hanging  up  a  robe  (cp.  °iajju)  Vin  1.47.  286;  11.117, 


Cunna 


103 


Cecca 


121,  152,  153,  209,  222;  III. 59 ;  J  1.9;  Dh.\  iii.3'(2  ; 
•sankamaniya  (nt.)  a  robe  that  ought  to  be  handed 
over  (to  its  legal  owner)  Vin  iv.282  ;  283. 

Ciiwa  [Sk.  curna,  pp.  of  carvati,  to  chew,  to  ♦sQer  to  cut, 
break  up,  as  in  Lat.  caro,  Sk.  knjati  (op.  katu) ;  cp. 
Lit.  kirwis  axe,  Lat.  scrupus  sharp  stone,  scrupulus, 
scortum.  See  also  calaka*  &  cp.  Sk.  ksunna  of  kiod 
to  grind,  to  which  prob.  P.  ku(J(Ja]  i.  pp.  broken  up, 
powdered ;  only  in  cpd.  °vicDnna  crushed  to  bits, 
smashed  up,  piecemeal  J  1.73;  11. 120,  159,  216;  111.74. 

—  2.  (nt.)  (a)  any  hard  substance  ground  into  a  powder  ; 
dust,  sand  J  1.2 16  ;  VvA  65  (pai)su°) ;  Pv  in. 3'  (suvamja" 
gold-dust;  PvA  i89=valika);  DA  1.245  "(id.);  DhsA 
12  —(b)  esp.  "  chunam  "  (.A.nglo-Ind.)  i.  e.  a  plaster, 
of  which  quicklime  &  sand  are  the  chief  ingredients  &• 
which  is  largely  used  in  building,  but  also  applied  to  the 
skin  as  a  sort  of  soap-powder  in  bathing.  Often 
comb''  with  mattika  clay,  in  distinction  of  which  c.  is 
for  delicate  use  (tender  Skin),  whereas  m.  for  rougher 
purposes  (see  Vin  1.202) ;  cunnani  bhesajjani  an  appli- 
cation of  c.  Vin  1. 202.  —  Vin  1.47  =  52  ;  11.220,  224  sq.  ; 
A  1.208  ;  III. 25  ;  J  V.89.  cunnaTtela-valaricJupaka  Vism 
142  (where  Asl  1 15  reads  cunnag  va  telarj  va  le^^upaka). 

—  nahaniya"  D  1.74=1!  111.92-  PvA  46;  na-  hana° 
J  11.403,  404.  —  gandha  -cunna  aromatic  (bath)  powder 
J  1.87,  290  ;  III. 276  ;  candana°id.  Miln  13,  18.  — it^haka" 
plaster  (which  is  rubbed  on  the  head  of  one  to  be 
executed)  PvA  4,  cp.  Mycchakatika  X,  beginning  (stanza 
5)  "  pista-curn4vaklrna5ca  puruso  'hai)  pa4ukrtati." 

-calani  a  mortar  for  the  preparation  of  chunam  Vin 
1.202  ;  -pinda  a  lump  of  ch.  Vin  111.260;  iv.154  sq. 

Cawaka  (adj.)  [fr.  cunna]  (a)  a  preparation  of  chunam, 
paint  (for  the  face,  mukha°)  D  1.7;  M  ii.64  =  Th  1, 
771;  J  V.302.  —  (b)  powder;  cunnakajatani  reduced 
to  powder  M  in. 92  (atthikani).  —  f.  "ika  in  cunpika- 
mar|sa  mince  meat  J  1.243. 

OoQQeti  [Denom.  of  cunna]  to  grind  to  powder,  to  crush ; 
to  powder  or  paint  w.  chunam  Vin  11.107  (mukhar)) ; 
J  IV. 457.  —  ppr.  pass  cunniyamana  being  ground 
J  VI.185. 

Cata  [pp.  of  cavati ;  Sk.  cyutaj  i.  (adj.)  shifted,  dis- 
appeared, deceased,  passed  from  one  existence  to  another 
Vin  IV.2I6;  Sn  774,  899;  It  19,  99;  J  1.139,  205;  Pug 

17. accuta  permanent,  not  under  the  sway  of  Death, 

Ep.  of  Nibbana  Dh  225.  —  2.  (n.)  in  cpd.  cutiipapata 
disappearance  &  reappearance,  transmigration.  San- 
sara.(see  cuti)  S  11.67  (agatigatiya  sati  c°  hoti) ;  A 
III. 420  :  IV.  178  ;  DhA  1.259  ;  usually  in  phrase  sattanaij 
cutupapata-i\ina  the  discerning  of  the  saijsara  of 
beings  D  1.82  =  M  1.248;  D  iii.iii.  As  cutuppata  at 
A  11.183.     Cp.  jatisagsara-iiaoa. 

Cnti  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  cyuti,  to  cavati]  vanishing,  passing  away, 
decease,  shifting  out  of  existence  (opp.  upapatti,  cp 
also  gati  &  agati)  D  1.162  ;  S  11.3  =  42  ;  111.53  ;  M  '-49  '■ 
Sn  643;  Dh  419;  J  1. 19,  434;  Vism  292,  460,  554; 
DhA  IV. 228. 

Cndita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  codati]  being  urged,  receiving  blame, 
being  reproved  Vin  1.173;  11.250;  11.250,  251  ;  M  1.95 
sq.  ;  A  1(1. 196  sq.     -°ka  id.  Vin  v.  115,  158,  161,  164. 

Caddasa  [contracted  fr.  catuddasa,  Sk.  caturda^a,  cp. 
catur]  fourteen  J  1.71  ;  vi.8  ;  Miln  12  ;  DhA  111.120,  186. 

Canda  an  artist  who  works  in  ivory  J  vi.261  (Com: 
dantakara)  ;  Miln  331. 

Condakara  a  turner  J  vi.339. 

Cnmbata  (nt.)  [cp.  Prk.  cumbhala]  (a)  a  coil ;  a  pad  of  cloth, 
a  pillow  J  1.53  (dukula") ;  n.21  (id.);  VvA  73.  — (b)  a 
wreath  J  111.87.'    Cp.  next. 

Cmnbataka  (nt.)  cumbata,  viz.  (a)  a  pillow  DhA  1.139: 
VvA  33.  165. — (b)  a  wreath  J  iv.231  (puppha°) ;  SnA 
137;  DhA  1.72  (mala"). 


Combati  [Sk.  cumbati.  Dhtp  197  defines  as  "  vadana- 
sai)yoge  "]  to  kiss  J  11. 193;  v.328 ;  vi.291,  344;  VvA 
260.     Cp.  pari". 

Calla  &  cQ)a  (adj.)  [Sk.  k§ulla=k5udra  (P.  khudda,  see 
khuddaka),  with  c  :  k  =  cunna  :  kjud]  small,  minor  (opp. 
maha  great,  major),  often  in  conn,  with  names  &  titles 
of  books,  e.  g.  c°  Anathapindika  =  A  jr.  J  11.287,  cp. 
Anglo-Indian  chota  sahib  the  younger  gentleman 
(Hind.  chhota=culla) ;  or  CuUa-vagga,  the  minor 
section  (Vin  11.)  as  subordinate  to  Maha-vagga  (Vin  i.), 
CuUa-niddesa  the  minor  exposition  (following  upon 
Maha-niddesa) ;  culla-slla  the  simple  precepts  of  ethics 
(opp.  raaha"  the  detailed  sila)  D  1.5,  etc.  Otherwise 
only  in  cpds. : 

-anguli  little  finger  DhA  11.86.  -fipafthaka  a  "  lesser  " 
follower,  i.  e.  a  personal  attendant  (of  a  thera)  J  1.108 
(cul°);  11.325  (cull";  DhA  1.135;  11.260;  cu|) ;  -pita 
an  uncle  ("lesser"  father=sort  of  father,  cp.  Lat. 
matertera,  patruus,  Ger.  Vetter=  father  jun.)  J  11. 5 ; 
III. 456  (v.  1.  petteyya);  Pv.\   107;  DhA  1.221  (cu|a°). 

Callasiti  [=caturastti]  eighty-four  J  vi.226  (mahakappe 
as  duration  of  Saijsara) ;  PvA  254  (id.).  Also  as 
culasiti  q.  v. 

Cfiliki  (f.)  [Sk.  culiki,  cp.  cuda]  =  cula;  kanna°  the  root 
of  the  ear  J  11.276;  Vism  249,  255;  DhA  iv.13  (of  an 
elephant).    "baddhaS  11.182  ;  A'S  11.122.    See  also  cu|a. 

Ca]a  [Sk.  cu(Ja  &  culika]  i.  swelling,  protuberance;  root, 
knot,  crest.  As  kanna-cula  the  root  of  an  elephant's 
ear  J  vi.488.  addha-cii|a  a  me2isure  (see  addha).  See 
also  cuUka.  —  2.  (adj.)  see  cuUa. 

C  j]aka  (adj.)  [fr.  cula]  having  a  cula  or  top-knot ;  paflca" 
with  five  top-knots  J  v. 250  (of  a  boy) 

Calanika  (f)  [Der.  fr.  cuUa,  q.  v.]  only  in  phrase  sahassi 
ciilanika  lokadhatu  "  the  system  of  the  1,000  lesser 
worlds "  (distinguished  from  the  dvi-sahassi  majjhi- 
makci  &  the  ti-sahassi  mahasahassi  lokadhatu)  A 
1.227  ;  Nd*  235,  2''. 

Ca}a  (f.)  [Vedic  cu(Ja.  to  cu<la]  =  cu|a,  usually  in  sense  ot 
crest  only,  esp.  denoting  the  lock  of  hair  left  on  the 
crown  of  the  head  when  the  rest  of  the  head  is  shaved 
(cp.  Anglo-Indian  chu(ja  &  Gujarati  chotali)  J  1.64, 
462;  v.  1 53,  249  (pancacula  kumara) ;  DhA  1.294;  as 
mark  of  distinction  of  a  king  J  111.211  ;  v.187;  of  a 
servant  J  vi.135.  —  a  cock's  comb  J  11.410  ;  m.265. 

-mani  (m.)  a  jewel  worn  in  a  crest  or  diadem,  a 
jewelled  crest  J  1.65  ;  11. 122  ;  v.441. 

O0)aslti  for  cullasiti  at  'fh  2,  51. 

Ce  [Vedic  ced ;  ce  =  Lat.  que  in  absque,  ne-c,  etc.,  Goth, 
h  in  ni-h.  see  also  ca  3]  conditional  particle  "  if,"  con- 
structed either  with  Indicative  (ito  ce  pi  yojanasate 
viharati  even  if  he  lived  ico  y.  from  here  D  1.117)  or 
Conditional  (tatra  ce  tumhe  assatha  kupita  D  1.3),  or 
Potential  (passe  ce  vipulai)  sukhar)  Dh  290).  —  Always 
enclitic  (like  Lat.  que)  &  as  a  rule  placed  after  the  em- 
phasized word  at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence :  pun- 
i^aii  ce  puriso  kayira  Dh  118;  brahmano  ce  tvag  brusi 
Sn  457.  Usually  added  to  pronouns  or  pron.  adverbs ; 
ahari  ce  va  kho  pana  ceteyyai)  D  1.185;  ettha  ce  te 
mano  atthi  S  1.116,  or  comb''  with  other  particles,  as 
noce,  yaiice,  sace  (q.  v.).  Freq.  also  in  comb"  with 
other  indef.  interrog.  or  emphatic  particles,  as  ce  va 
kho  pana  if  then,  if  now :  ahai\  ce  va  kho  pana  paHhaij 
puccheyyar)  D  1. 1 1 7  ;  ahan  ce  va  kho  pana  abhivadeyyai) 
D  1.125;  api  (pi)  ce  even  if:  api  ce  vassasatari  jive 
m&navo  Sn  589. 

Cecca=cicca  (equal  to  sartcicca),  ger.  of  cinteti,  corresp. 
to  either  'cetya  [cet]  or  *cintya  feint]  ;  only  in  ster. 
def.  jananto  sai\jananto  cecca  abhivitaritvA  Vin  11. 9J  ; 
III. 73,  1 12  ;  IV. 290. 


Ceta 


104 


Ceto 


Ceia  51  servant,  a  boy  J  in. 478.     See  next. 

Cetaka  a  servant,  a  slave,  a  (bad)  fellow  Vin  iv.66 ;  J 
ii.i76  =  DhA  IV. 92  (duttha°  miserable  fellow);  111.281  ; 
IV. 82  (bhatika-cetaka  rascals  of  brothers);  v.385 ; 
Miln  222. 

Cetaka  a  decoy-bird  (Com.  dipaka-tittira,  exciting  part- 
ridge) J  III. 357. 

Cetakedu  a  kind  of  bird  J  vi.538.     See  also  cela°. 

Cetanaka  (adj.)  [see  cetana]  connected  with  a  thought  or 
intention  J  vi.304;  usually  in  a°  without  a  thought, 
unintentional  J  n.375 ;  vi.178;  Vbh  419. 

Cetana  [f.  abstr.  fr.  cet,  see  cintetij  state  of  ceto  in  action, 
thinking  as  active  thought,  intention,  purpose,  will. 
Defined  a.s  action  (kamma  :  A  iii.415;  cp.  KV.  viii.g, 
)  38  untraced  quotation  ;  cp.  A  v. 292).  Often  comb'' 
tv.  patthana  iS:  parridhi  (wish  &  a.spiration),  e.  g.  S  11.99, 
'54:  A  1.32.  224;  V  212;  Nd«  112  (in  def.  of  asucima- 
nussa,  people  of  ignoble  action :  asuciya  cetanaya. 
patthanaya,  panidhina  samannagata).  Also  classed 
with  these  in  a  larger  group  in  KV.,  e.  g.  343,  380. 

—  Comb**  w.  vedana  sanna  c.  citta  phassa  manasi- 
kara  in  def.  of  namakaya  (opp.  rupakaya)  S  11. 3  (with- 
out citta),  Ps  1. 183  (do.) ;  Nett  77,  78.  —  Enum"  under 
the  four  blessings  of  vatthu.  paccaya,  c,  gunatireka 
(-sampada)  &  def.  as  "  cetanaya  somanassa-sahagata- 
uana-sampayutta-bhavD "  at  DhA  111.94.  —  C.  is 
opposed  to  cetasika  (i.  e.  ceto)  in  its  determination  of 
the  7  items  of  good  conduct  (see  sila)  which  refers  to 
actions  of  the  body  (or  are  wilful,  called  cetanakamma 
Nett  43,  96 ;  otherwise  distinguished  as  kaya-  &  yacl- 
kammanta  A  v. 292  sq.),  whereas  the  3  last  items  (slla 
8-10)  refer  to  the  behaviour  of  the  mind  (cetasika- 
kamma  Nett.,  mano-kammanta  A),  viz.  the  shrinking 
back  from  covetousness,  malice,  &  wrong  views.  — 
Vin  HI. 112;  S  ni.6o ;  A  11.232  (kaohassa  kammassa 
pahanaya  cetana :  intention  to  give  up  wrong-doing) ; 
VvA  72  (vadhaka-cetana  wilful  murder) ;  maraqa- 
cetana  intention  of  death  DhA  1.20  ;  ahar'  asa  cetana 
intention  consisting  in  desire  for  food  Vism  537.  — 
PvA  8,  30  (pariccaga°  intention  to  give) ;  Pug  12  ; 
Miln  94  ;  Sdhp  52,  72.  —  In  scholastic  Igg.  often  expl'' 
IS  cetana  sancetana  sancetayitatta  (viz.  state  or 
behaviour  of  voUtion)  Dhs  5  ;  Vbh  285.  —  Cp.  Dhs 
.■58  (-f  citta);  Vbh  401  (id.);  Vbh  40,  403;  Vism  4O3 
(tetayati  ti  cetana ;  abhisandahati  ti  attho). 

Cetayita  [pp.  of  ceteti,  see  cinteti]  intended  A  v.i87;- 
Miln  62. 

Cetasa*  N.  of  a  tree,  perhaps  the  yellow  Myrobalan  J  v.420. 

Cetasa'  (adj.)  [orig.  the  gen.  of  ceto  used  as  nominative] 
only  in  ■" :  sucetasa  of  a  good  mind,  good-hearted  S 
1.4  =  29,  46  =  52;  paraphrased  by  Buddhaghosa  as 
sundaracetasa ;  papa"  of  a  wicked  mind,  evil-minded 
S  1.70  =  98;  a°  without  mind  S  1.198;  sabba"  all- 
hearted,  with  all  one's  mind  or  heart,  in  phrase  atthi- 
katvS  manasikatva  sabbacetaso  samannaharitva  ohi- 
tasoto  (of  one  paying  careful  &  proper  attention)  S 
I.I  12  sq.=  189,  220  ;  A  II. 1 16;  in.  163.  402  ;  iv.167.  The 
editors  have  often  misunderstood  the  phrase  &  we 
freq.  find  vv.  11.  with  sabbar)  cetaso  &  sabbar;  cetasa, 

—  appamSna"  S  iv.186;  avyapanna"  S  v. 74. 

Cetasika  (adj.)  belonging  to  ceto,  mental  (opp.  kayika 
physical).  Kayikai)  sukhag  >  cetasikag  s.  A  1.81  ;  S 
v.  209 ;  kayika  daratha  >  c.  d.  M  1:1.287,  288  ;  c.  d'uk 
khao  D  II  306;  A  1.157;  c.  roga  J  111.337.  c.  kamma 
is  sila  8-10  (see  under  cetana)  Nett  43.  —  As  n. 
comb"  with  citta  it  is  to  be  taken  as  supplementing 
it.  viz.  mind  &  all  that  belongs  to  it,  mind  and  mental 
properties,  adjuncts,  co  efficients  (cp.  vitakka-vicara  & 
such  cpds.  as  phalaphala,  bhavabhava)  D  1.213;  sec 
also  citta.  Occurring  in  the  Nikayas  in  .sg.  only,  it 
came  to  be  used  in  ])l.  and,  as  an  ultimate  category,  the 


52  cetasikas,  with  citta  as  bare  consciousness,  practically 
superseded  in  mental  analysis,  the  5  khandha-category. 
See  Cpd.  p.  1  and  pt.  II.  Mrs.  Rh.  D.,  Bud.  Psy.  6, 
148  , 1 75.  -"cetasika  dhamma  Ps  1.84  ;  Vbh  42 1  ;  Dhs  3, 
18,  etc.  (cp.  Dhs.  trsl.  pp.  6,  148). 

Cetaso  gen.  sg.  of  ceto,  functioning  as  gen.  to  citta  (see 
citta  &  ceto). 

Cetapana  (nt.)  [see  cetapefi ;  cp.  BSk.  cetanika]  barter 
Vin  III. 2 16,  see  also  Vin.  Texts  1.22  &  Kacc.  322. 

Cetapeti  [Cans,  of  ♦cetati  to  ci,  collect ;  see  also  Kern, 
Toev.  s.  v.]  to  get  in  exchange,  to  barter,  buy  Vin 
III. 216  (expl"  by  parivatteti),  237;  iv.250. 

Cetiya  (nt.)  [cp.  from  ci,  to  heap  up,  cp.  citi,  cinSti]  i.  a 
tumulus,  sepulchral  monument,  cairn,  M  1.20  ;  Dh  188 ; 
J  1.237;  VI. 173;  SnA  194  (dhatu-gharag  katva  cetiyag 
patitthapesur)) ;  KhA  221;  DhA  in. 29  (dhatu°) ; 
IV.  64  ;VvA  142  ;  Sdhp  428,  430.  Pre-Buddhistic 
cetiyas  nientioned  by  name  are  Aggalava"  Vin  11.172  ; 
S  1. 185  ;  Sn  p.  59  ;  DhA  111.170  ;  Ananda"  D  11.123,  '26  ; 
Udena"  D  11. 102,  1 18  ;  in. 9  ;  D.hA  111.246  ;  Gotama  (ka)° 
ibid.;  Capala°  D  11. 102,  118;  S  v.250 ;  Ma-  kuta- 
bandhana°D  11.160  ;  Bahuputta°  Dn.102,  118  ;  in.  10  ;  S 
11.220  ;  A  IV.  16  ;  Sattambaka"  D  11. 102,  1 1 8  ;  Sarandada 
D  II.  1 18,  175;  A  III.  167;  Supatittha"  Vin  1.35. 

-angana  the  open  space  round  a  Cetiya  Miln  366 ; 
Vism  144.  188,  392  ;  D.\i.i9i,  197;  VvA  254.  -vandana 
Cetiya  worship  Vism  299. 

Ceteti  see  cinteti. 

Ceto  (nt.)  [Sk.  cetas]  =  citta,  q.  v.  for  detail  concerning 
derivation,  inflexion  &  meaning.  Cp.  also  cinteti.  — 
Only  the  gen.  cetaso  &  the  instr  cetasa  are  in  use ; 
besides  these  there  is  an  adj.  cetaso,  der.  from  nom. 
base  cetas.  Another  adj. -form  is  the  inflected  nom. 
ceto,  occurring  only  in  viceto  S  v.447  {+  ummatto,  out 
of  mind). 

I.  Ceto  in  its  relation  to  similar  terms :  (a)  with 
kaya  &  vaca  r  kayena  vacaya  cetasa  (with  hand, 
speech  &  heart)  Sn  232  ;  Kh  IX.  kaya  (vaca°,  ceto") 
-muni  a  saint  in  action,  speech  &  thought  A  1.273  = 
Nd*  514.  In  this  phrase  the  Nd  has  mano"  for  ceto", 
which  is  also  a  v.  1.  at  A-passage.  —  (b)  with  paflfia  (see 
citta  IV.  b)  in  ceto-vimutti,  paili^a-vimutti  (see  below 
IV.).  —  (c)  with  samadhi,  p'ti,  sukha,  etc. :  see  "phaia- 
nata  below. 

II.  Cetaso  (gen.)  (a)  heart.  c°  upakkilesa  (stain  of 
h.)  D  111.49,  10 1  ;  S  v.93.  I'natta  (attachment)  S 
V.64.  appasada  (unfaitb)  S  1.179;  ekodibhava  (single- 
ness) D  III. 78  ;  S  IV. 236  (see  2'"'  jhana) ;  avaraqani 
(hindrances)  S  65. — vimokkha  (redemption)  S  1.159. 
santi  (tranquillity)  Sn  584,  593.  vupasaraa  (id.) 
A  1.4;  S  V.65.  vinibandha  (freedom)  D  111.238  = 
A  111.249;  IV. 461  sq.  —  (b)  mind.  c°  vikkhepa  (disturb- 
ance) A  III. 448  ;  v.  149  :  uttrasa  (fear)  Vbh  367.  abhini- 
ropana  (application)  Dhs  7. — (c)  thought,  in  c°  parivi- 
takko  udapadi  "  there  arose  a  reflection  in  me  (gen.)  " 
S  1. 139;  11273;  111.96,  103. 

III.  Cetasa  (instr.)  —  (a)  heart,  metta-sahagatena  c. 
(with  a  h.  full  of  love)  freq.  in  phrase  ekag  disai)  pha- 
ritva,  etc.  e.  g.  D  1.186,  in. 78,  223;  S  iv.296;  A  1. 183; 
!i.i2g;  IV. 390;  V.299,  344;  Vbh  272.  ujubhQtena 
(upright)  S  11.279 ;  A  1.63  ;  vivafena  (open)  D  111.223  = 
S  V.263 ;  A  IV. 86.  macchera-maja-pariyutthitena  (in 
which  has  arisen  the  dirt  of  selfishness)  S  iv.240 ;  A 
11.58.  santim  pappuyya  c.  S  1.212.  taohadhipatev- 
yena  (standing  under  the  sway  of  thirst)  S  ni.  103. 
-  -  vippasannena  (devout)  S  1.32  =  57,  100;  Dh  79;  Pv 
1. 10'°.  muttena  A  IV.244.  vimariyadi-katena  S  111.31. 
vigatabhijjhena  D  in. 49,  pathavi-apo  etc.-samena 
.\  IV. 375  sq.  akasasamena  A  in.315  sq.  sabba"  S  11.220. 
abhijjha-sahagatena  A  1.206.  satarakkhena  D  111.269; 
A  V.30.     —  migabhutena  cetasa,  with  the  heart  of  a 


I 


Cela 


105 


Colaka 


wild  creature  M  1.450.  — acetasa  without  feeling, 
heartlessly  J  iv.52,  57,  —  (b)  mind  :  in  two  phrases, 
viz.  (a)  c  anuvitakketi  anuvicareti  "  to  ponder  &  think 
over  in  one's  mind"  D  111.242  ;  A  1.264;  111.178;. — 
(P)  c.  pajanati  (or  manasikaroti)  "  to  know  in  one's 
mind,"  in  the  foil,  expressions :  para-sattanaQ  para- 
puggalanai)  cetasa  ceto-paricca  pajanati  "  he  knows  in 
his  mind  the  ways  of  thought  (the  state  of  heart)  of 
other  beings"  (see  ceto-paricca  ct  "pariyaya)  M  11. 19; 
S  11.121,  213;  V.265  ;  A  1.255=111.17  =  280.  puggalai) 
paduttha-cittar)  evai)  c°  ceto-paricca  p.  It  12,  cp.  13. 
Arahanto  .  .  .  Bhagavanto  c°  cetoparicca  vidita  T) 
III.  100.  para-cittapariyaya  kusalo  evai)  c°  ceto- 
paricca  manasikaroti  A  v.  160.  Bhagava  [brahraanassa] 
c°  ceto-parivitakkai)  aniiaya  "  perceiving  in  his  mind 
the  thought  of  fthe  b.]"  S  1.178;  D  111.6;  A  111.374 ; 
Miln  10. 

IV.  Cpds.  -khila  fallowness,  waste  of  heart  or  mind, 
usually  as  paiica  c-khila,  viz.  arising  from  doubt  in  the 
Master,  the  Norm,  the  Community,  or  the  Teaching, 
or  from  anger  against  one's  fellow-disciples  D  111.237, 
278  ;  M  x.ioi  ;  A  111.248  =  iv. 460  =  v. 17  ;  J  111.291  ;  Vbh 
377  ;  Vism  211.  -panidhi  resolution,  intention,  aspiration 
Vv  47'*  (  =  cittassa  samma-d-eva  thapanar)  VvA  203); 
Miln  129;  -padosa  corruption  of  the  h.,  wickedness, 
A  1.8  ;  It  12,  13  (opp.  pasada) :  -paricca  "  as  regards  the 
heart,"  i.  e.  state  of  heart,  ways  of  thought,  character, 
mind  (  =  pariyaya)  in  "iiana  Th  2,  71=227  (expl''  at 
ThA  76,  197  by  cetopariyafiana)  see  phrase  cetasa  c-p. 
above  (111.  b.)  ;  -pariyaya  the  ways  of  the  heart 
(  =  paricca),  in  para-ceto-pariyaya-kusalo  "  an  expert  in 
the  ways  of  others'  hearts"  A  v.i6o  ;  c.-p-kovido  en- 
compassing the  heart  of  others  S  1.146,  i94  =  Th  1, 
1248;  i.i96  =  Th  I,  1262.  Also  with  syncope:  °pariya- 
ilana  D  1.79;  111. lOo;  Vism  431;  DA  1.223.  -parivi- 
takka  reflecting,  reasoning  S  1.103,  178  ;  -pharanata  the 
breaking  forth  or  the  eflulgence  of  heart,  as  one  of  five 
ideals  to  be  pursued,  viz.  saraadhi,  piti-pharapatci, 
sukha°,  ceto°,  51oka°  D  111.278 ;  -vasippatta  mastery 
over  one's  h.  A  11.6,  36.  185  ;  iv.312  ;  M  1.377  ;  Vism  382  ; 
Miln  82,  85  ;  -vimulti  emancipation  of  h.  (always  w. 
pafifta-vimutti),  which  follows  out  of  the  destruction  of 
the  intoxications  of  the  heart  (asavanaij  khaya  anSsava 
c.-v.)  Vin  I. II  (akuppa) :  T)  1.156,  167,  251  ;  111.78,  108, 
248  (muditJ) ;  S  11.265  ^metta) ;  M  1.197  (akuppa),  205, 
296;  111.145  (appam&na,  mahaggata) ;  A  1.124;  11.6, 
36;  III. 84 ;  Sn  725,  727=  It  106;  It  20  (metta),  75.  97; 
Pug  27,  62  ;  Vbh  86  (metta)  Nett  81  (viraga) ;  DA  1.313 
(  =  cittavimutti) ;  -vivarana  setting  the  h.  free  A  iv.352  ; 
v.67.  See  also  arahant  II  D.  -samatha  calm  of  h. 
Th  2,  118;  -samadhi  concentration  of  mind  (  =  citta- 
samSdhi  DA  1.104)  D  1.15;  iii.  30;  S  iv.297 ;  A  11.54; 
ni.51  ;  -samphassa  contact  wnth  thought  Dhs  3. 

Cels  (nt.)  [Derivation  unknown.  Cp.  Sk.  cela]  cloth,  esp 
clothes  worn,  garment,  dress  A  1.206;  Pv  11.12'  (kafi- 
cana°  for  kaflcana") ;  111.9'  (for  vela) ;  dhati"  baby's 
napkin  J  111.539.  Insimileof  one  whoseclothesareonfire 
(aditta°-t-adittasisa)  S  v. 440  ;  A  11.93  ;  ni.307  ;  iv.32() 
—  acela  a  naked  asceticD  1.161,  165(5:!;  J  v.75  ;  vi.222. 
-andaka  (v.  1.  anduka)  a  loincloth  M  1.150. ;  -ukkhepa 
waving  of  garments  (as  sign  of  applause),  usually  with 
sadhukara  J  1.54;  n.253 ;  111.285;  v.67;  DhA  11.43; 
SnA  11.225;  VvA  132,  i.>o;  -pattika  (not  °pattika)  a 
bandage  of  cloth,  a  turban  Vin  11.128  (Bdhgh.  cela- 
sandhara) ;  M  11.93;  DhA  111.136;  -vitana  an  awninp 
J  1.178  ;  11.289  ;  ■V.378  ;  Mhbv  122  ;  Vism  108. 

Celaka  1 .  one  who  is  clothed ;  acclaka  without  clothes 
D  1.166  ;  M  1.77.  —  2.  a  standard-bearer  [cp.  ?k.  ce<Jaka 
P.  ceta  &  in  meaning  K.  knight  >  Ger.  knecht ;  knave  ;- 
knabe,  knappe]  D  1.51  ;  DA  1.156;  A  iv.  107,  110  ;  Miln 

Celakeda  =  cetakedu  J  VI. 538. 
CeUpftka=oelavaka  J  v.418. 


Cel&vaka  [cp.  Sk.  chilla  ?1  a  kind  of  bird  J  vi.358  (Com. 
celabaka  ;  is  it  cela  baka  ?) ;  J  v. 4 16.     See  also  celapaka. 

Cokkba  (adj.)  [Cp.  Sk.  cok.sa]  clean  J  111.21;  "bhava 
cleanliness  M  1.39  (  =  visuddhibhftva ;  to  be  read  for  T 
mokkha°  ?     See  Trenckner's  note  on  p.  530). 

Coca  (nt.)  [Both  derivation  &  meaning  uncertain.  The 
word  is  certainly  not  Aryan.  See  the  note  at  Viiiaya 
Texts  11.132]  the  cocoa-nut  or  banana,  or  cinnamon 
J  V.420  (°vana) ;  -°pana  a  sweet  drink  of  banana  or 
cocoa-nut  milk  Vin  1.246. 

Codaka  (adj.)  [to  codeti]  one  who  rebukes;  exhorting, 
reproving  Vin  1.173  ;  11  248  sq.  ;  v. 158,  159  etc.  ;  S  1.63  ; 
M  1.95  sq.  ;  D  111.236;  A  1.53;  111.196;  iv.i93  sq.  ; 
DA  1. 40. 

Codan&  (f.)  [see  codeti]  reproof,  exhortation  D  1.230 ; 
111.218  ;  A  111.352  :  Vin  V.158,  159;  Vism  276.  —  As  ttg. 
in  codan'  atthe  nipato  an  exhortative  particle  J  vi.211 
(for  ingha) ;  VvA  237  (id.) ;  PvA  88  v.  I.  (for  handa). 

Codita  [pp.  of  codeti,  q.  v.]  urged,  exhorted,  incited ; 
questioned  Sn  819;  J  vi.256 ;  Pv  li.g"* ;  Vv  i6' ;  PvA 
152  :  Sdhp  309. 

Codetat  [n.  ag.  to  codeti]  one  who  reproves,  one  who 
exacts  blame,  etc.  Vin  v.  184. 

Codeti  [Vedic  codati  &  codayati,  from  end]  aor.  acodajri 
(J  V.112),  inf.  codetug,  grd.  codetabba ;  Pass,  cujjati 
k  codiyati ;  pp.  cudita  &  codita  (q.  v.):  Cans,  codapeti 
(Vin.  111.165)  to  urge,  incite,  exhort;  to  reprove,  repri- 
mand, to  call  forth,  to  question ;  in  spec,  sense  to 
demand  payment  of  a  debt  (J  vi.69  inar)  codetva ; 
245  ;  Sn  120  iijag  cujjamana  being  pressed  to  pay  up  ; 
PvA  3  iijayikehi  codiyamSna)  D  1.230 ;  Vin  1.43 
(apattiya  c.  to  reprove  for  an  offence),  114,  170  sq., 
322  sq. ;  11.2  sq.,  80  sq.  ;  111.164,  etc.  ;  J  v.112  ;  Dh  379; 
PvA  39,  74. 

Copana  (nt.)  [cap,  copati  to  stir,  rel.  to  knp,  see  kuppati] 
moving,  stirring  DhA  iv.85  ;DhsA  92,  240,  323. 

Cora  [cur,  corayati  to  steal ;  Dhtp  530  =  theyye]  a  thief, 
a  robber  Vin  1.74,  75,  88,  149;  S  11.100,  128  =  A  11.240; 
S  11.188  (gSmaghata,  etc.);  iv.173;  M  ii.74=Th  i,  786; 
A  1.48 ;  11.121  sq.  ;  iv.92,  278  ;  Sn  135,  616,  O52  ;  J  1.264 
("raja,  the  robber  king) ,  11.104  ;  in. 84  ;  Miln  211 ;  Vism 
180  (sah'  o<J^ha  c),  314  (in  simile),  489  (raja-puris' 
,1nubandha°,  in  comparison),  569  (andhakare  corassa 
hattha-pasaranai)  viya) ;  DhA  11.30;  PvA  3,  54,  274. 
—  maha°  a  great  robber  Vin  111.89  ;  D  in. 203  ;  A  1.153  ; 
111.128  ;  IV.339  ;  Miln  185.  —  Often  used  in  similes :  sec 
J.P.T.S.  1907.  87. 

-&^vi  wood  of  robbers  Vism  191). — upaddava  an 
attack  from  robbers  J  1.267  ;  -katha  talk  about  thieves 
(one  of  the  forbidden  pastimes,  sec  katha)  D  i.7  =  Vin 
i.iSSfsi',  -ghataka  an  executioner  A  ii.3i'7,  J  in.  178; 
IV.447  ;  V.303  ;  PvA  5. 

Coraka  [cp.  Sk.  coraka]  a  plant  used  for  the  preparation  of 
perfume  J  vi.537. 

Conki  *.  thieving,  theft  Vin  1.208;  J  in.sn.S  ;  Miln  158; 
PvA  4,  86,  192  ;  VvA  72  (  =  thcyya). 

Oorl  (f.)  a  female  thief  Vin  iv.276  ;  J  11.363  ;  (adj.)  thievish. 

deceitful  J  1.295.     —  daraka°    a  female    kidnapper  J 

VI.337- 
Corovajsikao   at   Nd-  40   (p.   85)  read   terovassikai)   (as 

S  IV.  185). 

Cola  (&  cola)  [Cp.  Sk.  ccxja]  a  piece  of  cloth,  a  rag  S  1.34  ; 
J  IV. 380  ;  Miln  169;  PvA  73  ;  Sdhp  396.  -bhisi  a  mat 
spread  with  a  piece  of  cloth  (as  a  seat)  Vin  iv.40.  — 
duccola  clad  in  rags,  badly  dressed  Vin  1.109;  ni.263. 

Colaka  (<&  colaka)  =  cola  Vin  1.48,296;  11. 113,  151,  174,  20R, 
225  ;  Pv  n.i'  ;  Miln  53  (bark  for  tinder  ?) ;  DhA  n.173. 


Ch. 


Cha  &  Cha]  (cha  in  composition  effects  gemination  of 
consonant,  e.  g.  chabblsati  =  cha+ visati,  chabbanna  = 
cha+  vanna,  chaj  only  before  vowels  in  comp" : 
chajanga,  chal-abhinfia)  [Vedic  sas  &  sat  (§ad=chal), 
Gr.    ii,    Lat.    sex,    Goth,    saihs]    the    number    six. 

Cases :  nom.  cha,  gen.  channafl,  iiistr.  chahi  (A 
chambhi  (?)  J  iv.310,  which  should  be  chambhi  &  prob. 
chabbhi  =  sadbhih ;  see  also  chambhi),  loc.  chasu  (& 
chassu) ,  num.  ord.  chattha  the  sixth.  Cp.  also  satlhi 
(fxa)  solasa  (16).  Six  is  applied  whenever  a  "  major  set" 
is  concerned  (see  2),  as  in  the  foil. ;  6  munis  are  distin- 
guished at  Nd^  514  (in  pairs  of  3  :  see  muni) ;  6  bhikkhus 
as  a  "  clique  "  (see  chabaggiya,  cp.  the  Vestal  virgins  in 
Rome,  6  in  number) ;  6  are  the  sciences  of  the  Veda  (see 
chalanga) ;  there  are  6  buddha-dhamma  (Nd*  466) ; 
6  viufianakaya  (see  upadhi) ;  6  senses  &  sense-organs 
(see  ayatana)  —  cha  danasala  J  1.282  ;  orag  chahi  masehi 
kalakiriya  bhavissati  (1  shall  die  in  6  months,  i.  e.'not 
just  yet,  but  very  soon,  after  the  "  next  "  moon)  IV 
iv.3^^.  Six  bodily  faults  ]  1.394  (viz.  too  long,  too  short, 
too  thin,  too  fat,  too  black,  too  white).  Six  thousand 
Gandhabbas  J  n.334. 

-at)sa  six-cornered  Dhs  617.  -anga  the  set  of  six 
Vedangas,  disciplines  of  Vedic  science,  viz.  i.  kappa, 
2.  vyakarana,  3.  njiutti,  4.  sikkha,  5.  chando  (viciti), 
6.  jotisattha  (thus  enum''  at  VvA  265  ;  at  PvA  97  in 
sequence  4,  i,  3,  2,  6,  5):  D  in. 269;  Vv  63'"  ;  Pv  ii.Oi' ; 
Miln  178,  236.  With  ref.  to  the  upekkhas,  one  is  called 
the  "  one  of  six  parts  "  (cha|-ang'  upekkha)  Vism  160. 
-abhini^a  the  6  branches  of  higher  knowledge  Vin  11. 161  ; 
Pug  14.  See  abhinfiA.  -isiti  eighty-si.x  [i.  e.  twice 
that  many  in  all  directions:  psychologically  6x80  = 
(>  X  (4  X  2)1°],  of  people  an  immense  number,  millions 
Pv  II. 13':  of  Petas  PvA  212;  of  sufferings  in  Niraya 
Pv  III. 10'.  -4har)  for  si.x  days  J  111.471.  -kanna 
heard  by  six  ears,  i.  e.  public  (opp.  catukanna)  J  vi.392. 
-tit)sa(ti)  thirty-six  A  11.3  ;  It  15;  Dh  339;  DhA  in.211, 
22  )  ^"yojana-parimandala) ;  iv.48.  -danta  having  six 
tusks,  in  "daha  N.  of  one  of  the  Great  Lakes  of  the 
Himavant  (satta  maha-sara),  lit.  lake  of  the  elephant 
with  6  tusks,  cp.  cha-visana  Vism  )  16.  -dvarika  enter- 
i:ig  through  six  doors  (i.  e.  the  senses)  DhA  iv.221 
(tanha).  -dhatura  (=dh3,tuya)  consisting  of  six 
elements  M  111.239.  -pafica  (chappanca)  six  or  five 
Miln  292.  -phass'  ayatana  having  six  seats  of  contact 
(i.  e.  the  outer  senses)  M  111.239  ;  Th  1,  755  ;  PvA  52  ; 
cp.  Sn  169.  -banna  (=  vanna)  consisting  of  six  colours 
(of  ragsi,  rays)  J  v. 40  ;  DhA  1.249;  11.41  ;  iv.99.  -bag- 
giya  (  =  vaggiya)  forming  a  group  of  six,  a  set  of  (sinful) 
Bhikkhus  taken  as  exemplification  of  trespassing  the 
rules  of  the  Vinaya  (cp.  Oldenberg,  Buddha  '384). 
Tlieir  names  are  Assaji,  Punabhasu,  Panduka.  Lohi- 
taka,  Mettiya,  Bhummajaka  Vin  11.1,  77,  and  passim; 
J  11.387;  DhA  111.330.  -bassani  (  =  vassani)  six  years 
J  1.85  :  DhA  III. 195.  -bidha  (=vidha)  sixfold  Vism  184. 
-bisana  (=  visana)  having  six  (i.  e.  a  "  major  set  ")  of 
tusks  (of  pre-eminent  elephants)  J  v.42  (Nagaraja),  48 
(kunjara),  cp.  chaddanta.  —  bisati  (  =  visati)  twenty- 
six  DhA  IV. 233  (devaloka). 


Chakana  &  Chakava  (nt.)  [Vedic  sakrt  Abakan,  Gr.  KoTrpoj  : 
Sk.  chagana  is  later,  see  Trenckner.  Notes  62  n.  16]  the 
dung  of  animails  Vin  1.202  ;  J  m.386  (n) ;  v. 286 ;  vi.392 

(n). 

Chakapatl  (f.)  =  chakana  .Nd*  199. 

Chakala  [cp.  Sk.  chagala,  from  chaga  heifer]  a  he-goat 
J  VI. 237  ;  °ka  ibid.  &  Vin  111. i66.  -     f.  chakali  J  vi.559. 

Cbakka  (nt.)  [fr.  cha)  set  of  six  Vism  242  (meda°  &.  mutta°). 

Chakkhattng  ladv.)  [Sk.  satkrtvas]  six  times  D  11.198; 
DhA  111.196. 

Cha^ha  the  sixth  Sn  171,  437;  DhA  in. 200  ;  SnA  364. 
Also  as  chatthama  Sn  10 1,  103  ;  J  111.280. 

Cha44aka  (adj.)  throwing  away,  removing,  in  puppha°  a 
flower-rubbish  remover  (see  pukkusa)  Th  1,  620  ;  Vism 
194  ;  —  f.  chaddika  see  kacavara". 

Cha44ana  (nt.)  throwing  away,  rejecting  J  1.290  ;  Dhtp 
571.  — i  (f.)  a  shovel,  dust-pan  DhA  111.7.  See  kaca- 
vara°. 

Cha44ita  [pp.  of  chaddeti]  thrown  out,  vomited ;  cast 
away,  rejected,  left  behind  S  in. 143;  J  1.91.  478; 
Pv  11.2'  (=^ucchitthar)  vantan  ti  attho  PvA  80);  VvA 
100;  PvA  78,  185. 

Ctaa446ti  [Vedic  chardayati  &  chpiatti  to  vomit ;  cp.  also 
avaskara  excrements  &  karisa  dung.  From  *sqer  to 
eliminate,  separate,  throw  out  (Gr.  Kpivm,  Lat.  ex- 
(s)cerno),  cp.  Gr.  oKto^,  Lat.  mus(s)cerda,  Ags.  sceani] 
to  spit  out,  to  vomit,  throw  away ;  abandon,  leave, 
reject  Vin  214  sq.  ;  iv.265  ;  M  1.207;  S  1.169  (chaJtehi 
wrongly  for  chaddehi)  =  Sn  p.  15 ;  J  1.61,  254,  265,  292  ; 
V.427;  Pug  33;  DhA  1.95  (unhag  lohitai)  ch.  to  kill 
oneself);  ii.ioi  ;  111,171;  VvA  126;  PvA  43,  63,  174. 
211  ;  255  ;  Miln  15.  — •  ger.  chaddGna  Th  2,  469  (  =  chad- 
detva  ThA  284) ;  grd.  chaddetabba  Vin  1.48 ;  J  11,2  ; 
chaddaniya  Miln  252  ;  chaijdiya  (to  be  set  aside)  M 
1. 12  sq.  —  Pass,  chaddiyati  P\'A  174.  —  Caus.  chad- 
dapeti  to  cause  to  be  vomited,  to  cast  off,  to  evacuate, 
to  cause  to  be  deserted  Vin  iv.265  ;  J  1.137;  'v.139; 
VI. 185,  534;  Vism  182.  —  pp.  chaddita  (q.  v.).  —  See 
also  kacayara*^ 

Chaijia  a  festival  J  1423,  489  (sura°),  499  ;  11.48  (mangala°), 
143,  III. 287,  446,  538;  IV. 115  (sura°);  v. 212;  vi.22i  ; 
399  (°bheri) :  DhA  111.  100  (sura°),  443  (°vesa) ;  iv.195  '■ 
VvA  173. 

Chanaka  [=akkhana?  Kern;  cp.  Sk.  *akhai)a]  the 
Chanaka  plant  Miln  352  ;  cp.  akkhana. 

Cbatta'  (nt.)  [late  Vedic  chattra=*chad-tra,  covering  to 
chad,  see  chadatij  a  sunshade  ("parasol"  would  be 
misleading.  The  handle  of  a  chatta  is  affixed  at  the 
circumference,  not  at  the  centre  as  it  is  in  a  parasol),  a 
canopy  Vin  1.152;  11.114;  ^  i-7~  ;  11.15  (seta°,  under 
which    Gotama    is    seated);    J    1.267    (seta°) ;    rv.i6; 


106 


Chatta 


107 


Chando 


V.383  ;  VI. 370  ;  Sn  688,  689  ;  Miln  335  ;  DhA  1.380  sq.  ; 
DA  1.89  ,  PvA  47.  —  Esp.  as  seta°  the  royal  canopy,  oue 
of  the  5  insignia  regis  (setachatta-pamukhar)  paiScavi- 
dhar)  raja-kakudhabhandar)  P\'A  74),  see  kakudha- 
bbanda.  J  vi.4,  223,  389;  °r)  ussapeti  to  unfold  the  r. 
canopy  PvA  73  ;  DhA  1.161,  167.     See  also  panija". 

-danda  the  handle  of  a  sunshade  DhA  111.212  ;  -nali 
the  tube  or  shaft  (of  reeds  or  bamboo)  used  for  the 
making  of  sunshades  M  11. 1 16  ;  -mangala  the  coronation 
festival  J  in.407 ;  DhA  in. 307  ;  VvA  66. 

Chatta'  [cp.  Sk.  chatra,  one  who  carries  his  master's  sun- 
shade] a  pupil,  a  student  J  11.428. 

Chattaka  (m.  nt.)  i.  a  sun-shade  J  vi.252  ;  Th  2,  23 
(  =  ThA  29  as  nickname  of  sun-shade  makers).  See  also 
paijija".  —  2.  ahi°  "  snake's  sun-shade,"  N.  for  a  mush- 
room :  toadstool  D  111.87  ;  J  11.95  ;  ^  mushroom,  toad> 
stool  J  11.95. 

0hattil)8akkhattai)  (adv.)  thirty-six  times  It  15. 

Ohada  [cp.  chadeti  chad=saiivarane  Dhtp  586]  anything 
that  covers,  protects  or  hides,  viz.  a  cover,  an  awning 
D  i.jfs!  (sa-uttara"  but  °chadana  at  D  11. 194) ;  —  a  veil, 
in  phrase  vivatacchada  "  with  the  veil  lifted "  thus 
spelt  only  at  Nd'  242,  593,  DhA  1.106  (vivattha", 
V.  1.  vatta°)  &  PA  1.25 1  (vivatta"),  otherwise  °chadda ; 
—  shelter,  clothing  in  phrase  ghasacchada  Pug  51  (see 
ghasa  &  cp.  chada) ;  — a  hedge  J  vi.60  ;  — a  wing  Th  i, 
1 108  (citra°). 

Chadana  (nt.)  [Vedic  chad]  =  chada,  viz.  lit.  i.  a  cover, 
covering  J  1.376;  v. 241.  —  2.  a  thatch,  a  roof  Vin 
11.154  (various kinds).  195  ;  J  11. 281  ;  DhA  11.65  (°pHtha) ; 
IV. 104  (°assa  udaka-patana-tthana),  178;  PvA  55. — 
3.  a  leaf,  foliage  J  1.87  :  Th  i,  527.  —  4.  hair  J  v. 202. 
— fig.  pretence,  camouflage,  counterfeiting  Sn  89 
(  =  patirQpai)  katva  SnA  164);  Dhs  1059=  Vbh  361  = 
Nd'  271".  Dhs  reads  chandanar)  &  Vbh  chadanar). 
-itthika  a  tile  DhA  iv.203. 

Ohadda  (nt.)  [Dhtp  590  &  Dhtm  820  expl"  a  root  ohadd 
by  "  vamane,"  thus  evidently  taking  it  as  an  equivalent 
of  chaddl  =  chada,  only  in  phrase  vivattacchadda  (or 
vivata")  D  1.89;  Sn  372,  378,  1003,  1147;  DA  1.251. 
Nd'  however  &  DA  read  "chada  expl.  by  vivata-raga- 
dosamoha-chadana  SnA  365. 

Obaddh&  [Sk.  satsah]  sixfold  Miln  2. 

Chanda  [cp.  Vedic  and  Sk.  chanda,  and  skandh  to  jump]. 
I .  impulse,  excitement :  intention,  resolution,  will ; 
desire  for,  wish  for,  delight  in  (c.  loc).  Expl''  at  Vism 
466  as  "  kattu-kamatay "  adhivacanar)  ;  by  Dhtp  587 
&  Dhtm  821  as  olUUld— -icchayai).  —  A.  As  virtue: 
dhammapadesu  ch.  striving  after  righteousness  S  1.202  ; 
tibba"  ardent  desire,  zeal  A  1.229;  iv.15;  kusala- 
dhamma°  .\  in. 441.  Often  comb""  \vith  other  good 
qualities,  e.  g.  ch.  vayama  ussaha  usso)hi  A  iv.320  ; 
ch.  viriya  citta  v?mai)sd  in  set  of  samadhis  (cp.  iddhi- 
pada)  D  111.77  (see  below),  &  in  cpd.  "adhipateyya. 
—  kusalanai)  dhammanar;  uppadaya  chandaij  janeti 
vayamati  viriyag  arabhati,  etc.,  see  citta  v.  i  dfl.  — 
M  11174  ;  A  1. 174  (ch.  vX  vayamo  va) ;  in  50  (chandasa 
instr.);  Sn  1026  (-(-viriya);  Vv  24'*  (=kusala°  VvA 
u6);  J  vi.72  ;  DhA  1.14.  —  B.  As  vice:  (a)  kinds  & 
character  of  ch.  —  With  similar  expressions  :  (kaya-) 
ch.  sneha  anvayata  M  1.500.  —  ch.  dosa  moha  bhaya 
D  III. 1 82  :  Nd'  337*  (See  also  below  chandAgati).  Its 
nearest  analogue  in  this  sense  is  raga  (lust),  e.  g.  ch. 
rSga  dosa  pafigha  D  1.25  (cp.  DA  i.i  16) ;  rupesu  uppaj- 
jatj  ch.  va  r5go  S  iv.195.  See  below  °raga.  In  this 
bad  sense  it  is  nearly  the  same  as  kama  (see  kJma  & 
kamachanda :  sensual  desire,  cp.  DhsA  370.  Vism  466 
&  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  in  Dhs  trsl.  292)  .%  the  comb"  kAma- 
cbanda  is  only  an  enlarged  term  of  kSma.  Kiye 
chanda  "  dchght  in  the  body  "  M  1.500  ;  Sn  203.     bhave 


ch.  (pleasure  in  existence)  Th  2,  14  (cp.  bhavachanda) ; 
lokasmio  ch.  (hankering  after  the  world)  Sn  866  ;  methu- 
nasmii)  (sexual  desire)  Sn  835  (expl.  by  ch.  va  rJgo  va 
peman  Nd'  iSi).  —  Ch.  in  this  quality  is  one  of  the 
roots  of  misery:  cittass'  upakkileso  S  in. 232  sq.  ; 
V.92  ;  mulai)  dukkhassa  J  iv.328  sq.  —  Other  passages 
illustrating  ch.  are  e.  g.  vyapada"  &  vihigsa"  S  11.151  ; 
rupa-dhatiiya°  S  in. 10;  iv.72  ;  yag  aniccai),  etc.  .  .  . 
tattha°  S  III. 122,  177  ;  iv.145  sq. ;  asmi  ti  ch.  S  111.130  ; 
atilino  ch.  S  v.277  sq.,  cp.  also  D  n. 277. —  (b)  the 
emancipation  from  ch.  as  necessary  for  the  attainment 
of  .'Vrahantship.' — vigata"  (free  from  excitement)  and 
a"  S  I.I  it;  III. 7,  107,  190;  IV. 387;  A  11. 173  sq.  ;  D 
III. 238  ;  ettha  chandar)  virajetva  Sn  171  =  S  1.16.  KSye 
chandar)  virajaye  Sn  203.  (a)vita°  A  iv.461  sq.  °r) 
vineti  S  1.22,  197;  °i)  vinodeti  S  1.186;  ch.  suppafi- 
vinita  S  n.283.  na  tamhi  °r)  kayiratha  Dh  117. — 
2.  (in  the  monastic  law)  consent,  declaration  of  consent 
(to  an  official  act:  kamma)  by  an  absentee  Vin  1.121, 
122.  dhammikanaij  kammanar)  chandag  datva  having 
given  (his)  consent  to  valid  proceedings  Vin  iv.  1 5 1 ,  152  ; 
cp.  °dayaka  11.94.  —  Note.  The  commentaries  follow 
the  canonical  usage  of  the  word  without  adding  any 
precision  to  its  connotation.  See  Nd'  s.  v. ;  DhsA  370  ; 
DhA  1. 14,  J  VI. 72,  VvA  77. 

-4gati  in  °gamana  the  wrong  way  (of  behaviour,  con- 
sisting) in  excitement,  one  of  the  four  agatigamanani, 
viz.  ch°,  dosa°,  rnoha",  bhaya"  D  in. 133.  228  ;  Vbh  376 
(see  above);  -ddhipateyya  (adj.)  standing  imder  the 
dominant  influence  of  impulse  Dhs  269,  359,  529; 
Vbh  288  (-1- viriya",  citta",  vimagsa") :  -Snunita  led 
according  to  one's  own  desire  S  iv.71  ;  Sn  781  ;  -4raha 
(adj.)  fit  to  give  one's  consent  Vin  11.93;  v. 221  ;  -ja 
sprung  from  desire  (dukkha)  S  1.22  ;  -nanatta  the 
diversity  or  various  ways  of  impulse  or  desire  S  n.f43 
sq.  ;  D  in. 289 ;  Vbh  425  ;  -pahana  the  giving  up  of 
wrong  desire  S  v. 273  ;  -mulaka  (adj.)  having  its  root  in 
excitement  A  iv.339;  v.  107;  -raga  exciting  desire  (cp. 
kamachanda)  D  n.58,  60;  ni.289;  S  1.198;  H.283  ; 
in.  232  .sq.  (cakkhusmir),  etc.);  1V.7  sq.  164  (Bhagavato 
ch-r.  n"  atthi),  233  ;  A  1.264  (atite  ch-r-tth5niya  dham- 
ma) ;  11.71  ;  ni.73  ;  Nd'  413  ;  DhA  1.334  :  -samadhi  the 
(right)  concentration  of  good  effort,  classed  under  the 

4  iddhipada  with   viriva"  ;  citta"  vimagsa"  D  111.77  ; 

5  v. 268  ;  A  1.39  :  Vbh  216  sq. ;  Nett  15  ;  -sampada  the 
blessing  of  zeal  S  v. 30. 

Chandaka  a  voluntary  collection  (of  alms  for  the  Sangba), 
usually  as  °g  sarjharati  to  make  a  vol.  coll.  Vin  iv.250  ; 
J  1.422;  n.45,  85  (sarjharitva  v.  1.  BB  ;  text  sanka^- 
dhitva),  196,  248;  III. 288  (nava°,  a  new  kind  of  dona- 
tion) ;  Cp.  BSk.  chandaka-bhiksaua  AvS  vol.  11.227. 

Ctaandata  (f.)  [see  chanda]  (strong)  impulse,  will,  desire 
Nd»  394  ;  Vbh  350.  370. 

Ctaandavantata  (f)  [abstr.  to  adj.  chandavant,  chanda -h 
vant]  =  chandata  VvA  319. 

Chandasa  (f)  [see  chando]  metrics,  prosody  Miln  3. 

Cbandika  (adj.)  [see  chanda]  having  zeal,  endeavouring 
usually  as  a"  without  (right)  effort,  d  always  comb* 
w.  anadara  &.  assaddha  Pug  13;  Vbh  341;  PvA  54 
(V.  1.).   175- 

Cbandlkata  (adj.)  *  chandlkati  (f.)  (with)  right  effort, 
zealous,  zeal  (adj.)  Th  i,  1029  (chandi')  (n.)  Vbh  208. 

Chando  (nt.)  [Vedic  chandas,  from  skandh,  cp.  in  mean- 
ing Sk.  pada ;  Gr,  ia/i/3oc]  metre,  metrics,  prosody,  esp. 
applied  to  the  Vedas  Vin  11. 139  (chandaso  buddhava- 
canaij  aropeti  to  recite  in  metrical  fbrm,  or  ace.  to 
Bdhgh.  in  the  dialect  of  the  Vedas  cp.  Win.  Texts  in. 150) ; 
S  1.38 ;  Sn  568  (SavittI  chandaso  mukhar)  :  the  best  of 
Vedic  metres). 

-viciti  prosody  VvA  265   (enum*'   as  one  of  the   6 
discipUnes  dealing  with  the  Vedas :  see  chalanga). 


Channa 


io8 


Chiggaja 


Ohanna^  [pp.  of  chad,  see  chadeti'J  i.  covered  J  iv.  293 
(vari°) ;  vi.432  (padara",  ceiling);  ThA  257. — 
2.  thatched  (of  a  hut)  Sn  18.  —  3.  concealed,  hidden, 
secret  J  11.58 ;  iv.58.  —  nt.  channai)  a  secret  place 
Vin  IV. 220. 

Channa'  [pp.  to  chad  (chand),  chandayati,  see  chadeti'J 
fit.  suitaijle,  proper  Vin  11. 124  (+ patirfipa) :  in. 128; 
D  1.91  (+patiriipa) ;  S  1.9 ;  M  1.360;  J  111.315;  v. 307; 
VI. 572  ;  Pv  n.i2'5  (  =  yutta  PvA  159). 

Chapaka  name  of  a  low-class  tribe  Vin  iv.203  {  =  candala 
Bdhgh.  on  Sekh.  69  at  Vin  iv.364),  f.  °i  ib. 

Chappaiica  [cha+paiica]  six  or  five  Mi!n  292. 

Cbab°  see  under  cha. 

Chama  (f)  [from  kfam,  cp.  khamati.  It  remains  doubtful 
how  the  Dhtm  (553,  555)  came  to  define  the  root  cham 
(=ksam)  as  i.  hilane  and  2.  adane]  the  earth;  only 
in  oblique  cases,  used  as  adv.  Instr.  chama  on  the 
ground,  to  the  ground  (=  ved.  ksamS)  M  1.387  ;  D  iii.G ; 
J  111.232;  IV. 285;  VI. 89,  528;  Vv  4i<  (VvA  183;  bhfi- 
miyari) ;  Th  2,  17  ;  112  (ThA  116 ;  chamayar))  ;  Pv  IV.5' 
(PvA  260:  bhumiyar)). — loc.  chamayai)  \'in  1.118; 
A  1. 215;  Sn  401;  Vism  18;  ThA  116;  chamaya  Vin 
II.214. 

Chambhati  [see  chambheti]  to  be  frightened  Dh.\  iv.52 
(  +  vedhati). 

Chambhita  [pp.  of  chambheti].  Only  in  der.  chambhitatta 
(nt.)  the  state  of  being  stiff,  paralysis,  stupefaction, 
consternation,  always  comb**  with  other  expressions  of 
fear,  viz.  uttasa  S  v.386 ;  bhaya  J  1.345  (where  spelled 
chambhittai)) ;  11. 336  (where  wrongly  expH  by  sari- 
racalanar)),  freq.  in  phrase  bhaya  ch.  lomahaijsa  (fear, 
stupefaction  &  horripilation  ("  gooscflesh  ")  Vin  11.156 ; 

5  1.104;  118;  219;  D  1.49  (expl""  at  DA  1.50  wTongly 
by  sakala-sarira  calanag) ;  Nd"  470  ;  Miln  23  ;  Vbh  367  ; 
Vism  187.  —  In  other  connections  at  Nd'  i  (  =  Uhs  425, 
1 1 18,  where  thambhitatta  instead  of  ch°) ;  Dhs  965  (on 
which  see  Dhs  trsl.  242). 

Chambhin  (adj.)  [see  chambheti]  immovable,  rigid  ;  terri- 
fied, paralysed  with  fear  S  1.219;  M  1.19;  J  iv.310 
(v.  1.  jambhl,  here  with  ref.  to  one  who  is  bound  (stiff) 
with  ropes  (pasasatehi  chambhi)  which  is  however  taken 
by  com.  as  in.str.  of  cha  &  expl''  by  chasu  thanesu,  viz, 
on  4  limbs,  body  &  neck  ;  cp.  cha).  —  acch'atnbhin  firm. 
steady,  undismayed  S  1.220;  Sn  42;  J  1.71. — See 
chambheti  &  chambhita. 

Chambheti  [cp.  Sk.  skabhnati  &  stabhnati,  skambh,  and 
P.  khambha,  thambha  &  khambheti]  to  be  firm  or 
rigid,  fig.  to  be  stiff  with  fear,  paralysed :  see  chambhin 

6  chambhitatta,  Cp.  urukhambha  (under  khambha'). 

Challi  [Sk.  challi]  bark,  bast  DhA  11.165  ;  Bdhgh  on 
MV.  VIII. 29. 

Chava  [Derivation  doubtful.  Vedic  ^ava]  i .  a  corpse 
Vin  11.115  ("sisassa  patta  a  bowl  made  out  of  a  skull). 
See  cpds.  —  2.  (adj.)  vile,  low,  miserable,  wretched 
Vin  11.112,  188;  S  1.66;  M  1.374  :  A  n.57;  J  IV. 263. 

-atthika  bones  of  a  corpes,  a  skeleton  C  111.15,  i  (?); 
-&lata  a  torch  from  a  pyre  S  111.93=  A  ii.95  =  It  90  = 
J  1.482  ;  Vism  54,  299  ("upama).  -kutika  a  charnel- 
house,  morgue,  Vin  1.152  ;  -dahaka  one  who  (officially) 
burns  the  dead,  an  "undertaker"  Vin  1.152;  DhA 
i.bS  (f.  °ika) ;  Vism  230  ;  Miln  331.  -dussa  a  miserable 
garment  D  i.i66»;A  1.240  ;  11.206.  -sarira  a  corpse 
Vism  178  sq.  -sitta  a  water  pot  (see  above  i)  Th  1, 
127. 

Chavaka  i.  a  corpse  J  v. 449.  —  2.  wretched  Miln  156, 
200  ;  ("candala,  see  expl"  at  J  v. 450). 


Chavi  (f.)  [*(s)qeu  to  cover.  Vedic  chavi,  skunati ;  cp. 
Gr.  atdiXof  ;  Lat.  ob-scurus  ;  Ohg.  skura  (Nhg.  scbeuer) ; 
Afjs  sceo>E.  sky  also  Goth.  sk6hs>E.  shoe]  the  (outer, 
thin)  skin,  tegument  S  11.256  ;  A  iv.129  ;  Sn  194  ;  J  11.92. 
Distinguished  from  camma,  the  hide  (under-skin, 
corium)  S  11.238  (see  camma) ;  also  in  comb"  ch-camma- 
magsa  Vism  235  ;  Dh.\  iv.56. 

-kalyana  beauty  of  complexion,  one  of  the  5  beauties 
(See  kalyana  2d)  DhA  1.387  ;  -dos'-abadha  a  skin 
disease,  cutaneous  irritation  Vin  1.206 ;  -roga  skin 
disease  DhA  111.295  ;  -vanna  the  colour  of  the  skin,  the 
complexion,  esp.  beautiful  compl.,  beauty  Vin  1.8 ; 
J  III. 126;  Dh.\  IV.72  ;  PvA  14  (vannadhatu),  70,  71 
(  =  vanna). 

Chata  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  psata  from  bhas  (*bhsa),  Gr.  ^j^ia; 
see  Walde,  Lat.  Wtb.  under  sabulum  &  cp.  bhasman, 
probably  Non-Aryan]  hungry  J  1.338;  11.301;  v.69 ; 
Pv  11  i'3  (  =  bubhukkhita,  khudaya  abhibhuta  PvA  72) 
119^^  (jighacchita  PvA  126);  PvA  62;  VvA  76;  Miln 
253  ;  Mhvs  VII  24.     Cp.  pari". 

-ajjhatta  with  hungry  insides  J  1.345  ;  11.203  )  v.338, 
359  ;  DhA  1.125  ;  DhA  1.367  (chatafe') ;  in. 33,  40.  -kala 
time  of  being  hungrj-. 

Ctaataka  [fr.  prec]  i.  adj.  hungry  J  1.245,  266.  —  2.  (nt.) 
hunger,  famine  J  1.266;  11.124,  149.  367;  vi.487 ; 
DhA  1. 1 70. 

Cbatata  [f.  abstr.  fr.  chata]  hunger  (lit.  hungriness)  DhA 

1. 1 70. 

Chadana  (nt.)  [to  chadeti]  covering,  clothing,  often  comb'' 
with  ghasa°  food  &  clothing  (q.  v.)  J  11.79  (vattha")  ; 
Pv  i.io^  (bhojana") :  n.i^  (vattba") ;  PvA  50  (  =  vattha) : 
DhA  IV. 7.  —  As  adj.  J  vi.354  (of  the  thatch  of  a  house). 

Chadana  (f.)  [fr.  chadeti]  covering,  concealment  Pug  19, 

23.     Cp.  pari". 

Chadi  (f.)  [chadeti']  shade  J  iv.351. 

Chadiya  (nt.)  covering  (of  a  house  or  hut),  thatch,  straw, 
hay  (for  eating)  J  vi.354  (  =  gehacchadana-tina). 

Chadeti^  (Cans,  of  chad,  Sk.  chadayati]  (a)  to  cover,  to 
conceal  Vin  11.211  (Pass,  chadiyati) ;  Sn  1022  (mukhar) 
jivhaya  ch.) ;  Dh  252  ;  Pv  in. 4'.  --  (b)  (of  sound)  to 
penetrate,  to  fill  J  11.253  ;  vi.195.  —  PP-  channa*  (q.  v.). 

Chadeti'  [for  chandcti,  cp.  Sk.  chandati  &  chadayati :  to 
khya  ?]  (a)  to  seem  good,  to  please,  to  give  plea.sure 
S  11.110  ;  A  III. 54  ;  DhA  111.285  (bhattar)  me  na  ch.).  — 
(b)  to  be  pleased  with,  to  delight  in,  to  approve  of  (c 
ace.)  esp.  in  phrase  bhattar)  chadeti  to  appreciate  the 
meal  Vin  11. 138;  D  1.72  (  =  rucceyya);  v. 31  (chada- 
yamana),  33  (chadamana),  463;  Th  2,  409;  Pv  i.ii* 
(nacchadimhamhase),  pp.  channa'. 

Chapa  &  °ka  [Sk.  sava]  the  young  of  an  animal  M  1.384 
("ka)  ;  S  11.269  (bhinka'^);  J  1.460;  11.439  (sakuna°) ; 
Miln  402  ;  -f.  chapi  J  vi.iq2  (manduka"). 

Chaya  (f)  [Ncdic  chaya,  light  &  shade.  *skei  (cp.  (s)qait 
in  ketu),  cp.  Sk.  syava  ;  Gr.  aicia  &  aaun'r  ;  Goth,  skeinan. 
See  note  on  kala,  vol.11,  p.  38^]  shade,  shadow  S  1.72,  93  ; 
M  11.235  ;  i"i.i'>4  ;  A  II. 1 14  ;  Sn  1014  ;  Dh  2  ;  J  11.302  ; 
IV. 304  ;  v. 445  ;  Miln  90,  298  ;  Dh.\  1.35  ;  PvA  12,  32,  45, 
81,  etc.  —  Vakkhas  have  none  ;  J  v. 34  ;  vi.337.  chSya 
is  frequent  in  similes,  sec  J.P.T.S.  1907,  87. 

Charika  (f)  [Cp.  ksayati  to  burn,  k.sara  burning;  Gr. 
fripiif  dry,  I.at.  serenus  dry,  clear.  See  also  kbara  it 
bha-sma.]  Ashes  Vin  1.210;  11.220;  D  ii.i64  =  Ud  93; 
A  1.209;  IV. 103;  J  III. 447  ;  IV. 88;  v,i44;  DhA  1.256; 
11.68  ;  VvA  67  ;  l'v,\  80  (charikangara). 

Chiggala  [cp.  chidda]  a  hole,  in  eka°-yuga  M  111.169W; 
ta|a°  key  hole  S  iv.290 ;  Vism  394. 


Chida 


109 


Cheppa 


Chida  (always  -°)  (adj.)  breaking,  cutting,  destroying 
M  1.386  ;  S  l.iqi  =  Th  i,  1234  ;  Th  i,  521  ;  1 143  ;  Sn  87 
(kaukha°)  491,  1021,  iioi  (tanha^) ;  VvA  82  (id.). 

Chidda  fcp.  Ohg.  scetar.  For  suffix  °ra,  cp.  rudhira,  etc. 
Vcdic  chid+ra.  Cp.  Sk.  chidra]  i.  (adj.)  having  rents 
or  fissures,  perforated  S  iv.316;  J  1.419;  (fig.)  faulty, 
defective,  Vin  l.2gr>.  — j.  (nt.)  a  cutting,  slit,  hole, 
aperture,  S  1.43;  J  i.iyo  (eka°),  172,  419.  5')3  ;  11.244. 
j6i  ;  (kanna°):  Vism  171.  172  (bhitti°),  174  (tala") ; 
SnA  248  (akklii°);  Dh\  111.42  ;  VvA  100  (biiitti°)  ; 
PvA  180  (kanna°).  253  (read  chidde  for  chinde) ;  fig. 
a  fault,  defect,  flaw  Dh  229  (acchidda-vutti  faultless 
conduct)  Miln  94. 

-Avachidda  full  of  breaches  and  holes  J  111.491  ; 
Vism  232;  DhA  1.122,  284  (cp.  "vichidda) ;  111.151. 
•karin  inconsistent  A  11.187;  •vichidda=  °avachidda 
J  1.419;  V.163  (sarirai)  chiddavichiddai)  karoti  to  per- 
forate a  body). 

Cbidrtaka  (adj.)  having  holes  or  meshes  (of  a  net) 
D  1.45. 

Clliddata  (f)  perforation,  being  perforated  J  1.419. 

Chiddavant  (adj.)  having  faults,  full  of  defects  M  1.272. 

Chindati  [Vcdic  chid  in  3  forms  viz.  1.  (Perf.)  base  chid  : 
2.  .\ct.  (pres.)  base  w.  nasal  infix,  chind ;  3.  Med. 
(deiiom).  base  w.  guna  ched.  Cp.  the  analagous 
formations  of  cit  under  cinteti.  —  Idg.*  sk(h)eid,  CIr 
axU"'  (K-  schism) ;  Lat.  scindo  (K.  scissors) ;  Ohg. 
scTzan  ;  Ags.  scitan  ;  cp.  also  Goth,  skaidan,  Ohg.  scci- 
dan.  Root  chid  is  defined  at  Dhtp  382,  406  as  "  dvcdha- 
karana  "]  to  cut  off,  to  destroy,  to  remove,  both  ///. 
(bandhanar),  pasar),  pa.sibbakar),  jivai),  givar),  sisag. 
hatthap.ide,  etc.)  and  fig.  (tanhag,  mohar),  asava. 
saijyojanani,  vicikicchar),  vanathar),  etc.)  Freq.  in 
similes  .  see'/./'.  T.S.  1907,  88.  —  Forms:  (T)chid:  aor. 
acchida  Sn  357,  as  acchidaij  M  11.35,  acchidda  Dh  351 
(cp.  agama) ;  Pa.ss.  pros,  chijjati  (Sk.  chidyate)  Dh  2.S4  ; 
It  711;  J  1.167;  Th  1,  i055  =  Miln  395;  Miln  40;  aor. 
chijji  J  111. 181  (dvidha  ch.  broke  in  two).  —  fut.  chij- 
jissati  J  1.336;  —  ger.  chijjitva  ]  1.202;  iv.120;  —  pp. 
chijjita  J  111.3S9 ;  see  also  chida,  chidda,  ehinna.  — 
(2)  chind:  Act.  pres.  chindati  S  i.i49  =  A  v. 174  = 
Sn  657;  Pv.\  4,  114;  Vv.\  123;  —  imper.  chinda  Sn 
346;  J  11.153;  chindatha  Dh  283;  —  pot.  chinde  Dh 
37);  —  ppr.  chindamana  J  1.70,  233.  —  fut.  chindis- 
sati  Dli.\  It. 258.  —  aor.  acchindi  \'in  1.88  &  chindi 
J  1.140.  —  ger.  chinditva  J  1.222,  254,  326;  11.155  — 
inf.  chinditui)  Vin  1.206;  PvA  253. — grd.  chindiya 
3  11.139  (duc°). — Caus.  chindapeti  J  11.104.  106;  Vism 
190  (rajano  core  ch.).  • — (3)  ched:  fut.  checchati  (Sk. 
chetsyati)  M  1.434  ;  Dh  350  ;  Miln  391.  —  aor.  acchecchi 
(Sk.  acchaitsit)  S  1.12;  A  11.249;  Sn  355-- Th  1,1275; 
J  VI. 261.  acchejji  (v.  1.  of  acchecchi)  is  read  at  S 
IV. 205,  207,  399;  V.441  ;  A  III. 246,  444;  It  47. — inf. 
chetUQ  J  1V.2118  ;  Pv  ^.3*",  5-  chtttuij  Sn  28.  —  ger. 
chetva  Sn  66,  545.  622  ;  Dh  283,  369  ;  J  1.255  :  Nd'  245, 
&  chstrana  Sn  44  ;  Dh  346;  J  11T.396.  • — grcl.  chetabba 
Vin  11.110,  &  chejja  (often  comb''  w.  bhejja,  torture 
\-  maiming,  as  punishments)  \in  111.47  (-(-bh°);  J 
v. 444  (id.)  VI. 536;  Miln  83,  359.  Also  chejja  in  neg. 
acchcjja  S  VI.22I). — Caus.  chedeti  Vin  i.5"i,  *  cheda- 
peti  ib. ;  J  iv.  154.     See  also  cheda,  chedana. 

Chindanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  chindati]  breaking,  sec  pari°. 

Chinna  [pp.  of  chindati]  cut  off,  destroyed  Vin  1.71 
(acchinna-kesa  with  unshaven  hair) ;  M  1.430  ;  D  ir.8 
("papaAca) ;  ]  1.255;  "155;  iv.138;  Dh  338;  Pv  i.ii' 
(v.  1.  for  hhinna),  1 1' ;  DhA  iv.48.  Very  often  in 
punishments  of  decapitation  (sisa°)  or  mutilation 
(hatthapada",  etc.)  e.  g.  Vin  1.91  ;  in. 28;  Pv  11.2* 
(ghaDa-sisa°) ;  Miln  5.     Cp.  safi°.     As  first  part  of  cpd.. 


chinna"  very  frequently  is  to  be  rendered  by  "  without," 
e.  g. 

-asa  without  hope  J  11.230  ;  PvA  22,  174  ;  -iriyapatha 
unable  to  walk,  i.  e.  a  cripple  Vin  1.91  ;  -kanna  without 
ears  PvA  151  ;  -gantha  untrammelled,  unfettered  Sn 
219  ;  -pilotika  with  torn  rags,  or  without  rags  S  11.28  ; 
PvA  171  (+ bhinna°) :  -bhatta  without  food  i.  e.  fam- 
ished, starved  ]  1.S4  ;  v.382  ;  Dh-\  ill.  106— VvA  76; 
-sagsaya  without  doubt  Sn  1112;  It  9O,  97,  123;  Nd' 
244.     -sataka  a  torn  garment  Vism  51. 

Chinnaka  (adj.)  [fr.  chinna]  cut;  a°  uncut  (of  cloth) 
Vin  1.297. 

Chinnika  (f)  deceitful,  fraudulent,  sly,  only  in  comb"  w. 
dhutta  (dhuttika)  Sc  only  appl''  to  women  Vin  111.128; 
iv.61  ;  ]  II. 114;  Miln  122. 

Chnddha  [Sk.  ksubdha  (?)  k$abh,  perhaps  better  jflv,  pp. 
styuta  (see  nitthubhati),  cp.  Pischel,  Prh.  Gr.  §§  66,  120, 
&  Trenckner  Xotes  p.  75.  See  also  khipita]  thrown 
away,  removed,  rejected,  contemptible  Dh  4i=Th  2, 
468  (spelled  chuttha);  J  v. 302. 

Chnpati  [Dhtp  48o  =  samphasse]  to  touch  Vin  1.191  ; 
HI. 37,  121  ;  J  IV.82  ;  VI. 166;  Vism  249;  DhA  1.166  (ma 
chupi).  —  pp.  chupita. 

Chapana  (nt.)  touching  Vin  111.12 1  ;  J  vi.387. 

Chupita  [pp.  of  chupati]  touched  Vin  111.37  :  ]  vi.218. 

Chabhati  given  as  root  chnbh  (for  k.^nbh)  with  def.  "  nic- 
chubhe  "  at  Dhtm  550.     See  khobha. 

Churika  (f)  [Sk.  ksurika  to  k^ura  see  khura,  cp.  charika> 
khara]  a  knife,  a  dagger,  kreese  Th  2,  302  ;  J  111.370  ; 
Miln  339 ;  cp.  Miln  Irsin.  11.227 :  ThA  227  ;  DhA  111.19. 

Chnrita:  see  vi°. 

Cheka  (adj.)  i.  clever,  skilful,  shrewd;  skilled  in  (c.  loc.) 
Vin  11.96  ;  M  1.509;  J  1.290  (anga-vijjaya) ;  11. 161,  403  ; 
v. 216,  366  (°p5paka  good  cS:  bad);  vi.294  (id.);  Miln 
293  ;  D,\  1.90  ;  VvA  36,  215  ;  DhA  1. 178.  —2.  genuine 
Vism  437  (opp.  kuta). 

Chekata  (f  )  [cheka -l-ta]  skill  VvA  131. 

Chejja  I.  see  chindati.  —  2.  one  of  the  7  notes  in  the 
gamut  VvA  139. 

Cheta  an  animal  living  in  mountain  cUfIs,  a  sort  of  leo- 
pard S  1. 198. 

Chettar  [Sk.  chettr.  n-agent  to  chindati]  cntter.  destroyer 
Sn  343  ;  J  VI.226. 

Cheda  [see  chindati]  cutting,  destruction,  loss  Sn  367 
(°bandhana):  J  1.410:  485;  sisa°  decapitation  F'hA 
11.204  ;  PvA  5  ;  anda"  castration  J  iv.364  ;  —  bhatta  °r) 
karoti  to  put  on  short  rations  J  1.156.'  pada°  separa- 
tion of  words  SnA  150.  -"gamin  (adj.)  liable  to  break, 
fragile  A  11.81  ;  J  v.  453.  —  Cp.  vi°. 

Chedaka  (adj.)  [fr.  cheda]  cutting;  in  anda°  one  who 
castrates  J  iv.366. 

Chedana  (nt.)  [sec  chindati]  cutting,  severing,  destroying 
D  1.5;  (  =  DA  I.*)  hattha°-adi) ;  111.176;  Vin  n.133; 
A  11.209;  V.206  ;  S  IV. 169  (nakha°) :  v.473  ;  Miln  86; 
Vism  102  ("vadha-bandana,  etc.). 

Chedanaka  i.  (adj.)  one  who  tears  or  cuts  off  Pv.\  7.  — 
2.  (nt.)  the  process  of  getting  cut  (a  cert,  penance  for 
offences:  in  comb"  with  apattiyo  &  pScittiyar))  Vin 
11.307:  IV. 168.  170,  171,  279;  v. 133,  146  (cha  ch.  5pat- 
tiyo). 

OheppS  (f)  [Sk.  s*pa]  tail  Vin  1.191  ;  111.21. 


J. 


7a  (-")  [adj. -suffix  from  jan,  see  janati ;  cp.  °ga ;  gac- 
chati]  born,  produced,  sprung  or  arisen  from.  Freq. 
in  cpds.,:  atta°,  ito°,  eka°,  kuto°,  khandha",  jala°, 
daratha°,  daru°,  di°,  puthuj",  pubba".  yoni°,  v5ri°, 
saha°,  sineha°. 

Jagat  (nt.)  [A^edic  jagat,  intens.  of  gam,  see  gacchati]  the 
world,  the  earth  A  11.15,  17  (jagato  gati) ;  S  1.186  (jagat- 
ogadha  plunged  into  the  world). 

JagatI  (f.)  [see  jagat]  only  in  cpds.  as  jagati° : 

-ppadesa  a  spot  in  the  world  Dh  i27=PvA  104 ; 
-ruha  earth  grown,  i.  e.  a  tree  J  1.2 16. 

Jagga  (nt.)  [jaggati  +  ya]  wakefulness  S  i.iii. 

Jaggati  (  — jagarati,  Dhtp  22  gives  jagg  as  root  in  meaning 
"  nidda-khaya."]  (a)  to  watch,  to  lie  awake  J  v. 269.  — 
(b)  to  watch  over,  i.  e.  to  tend,  to  nourish,  rear,  bring 
up  J  1.148  (darakari),  245  (asivisaij). 

Jaggana  (nt.)  [from  jaggati]  watching,  tending,  bringing  up 
J  1. 1 48  (daraka"). 

7agganata  (to  jagarati]  watchfulness  J  i.io. 

Jagghati  [Intens.  to  sound-root  ghar.  for  *jaghrati.  See 
note  on  gala.  Kern  compares  Ved.  jaksati,  Intens. 
of  hasati  {Toev.  under  anujagghati) ;  Dhtp  31  jaggh= 
hasane]  to  laugh,  to  deride  J  in. 223  ;  v.436  ;  vi.522.  — 
pp.  jagghita  J  vi.522.     See  also  anu",  pa°. 

Jagghita  (f)  laughter  }  111.226. 

Jaghana  (nt.)  [Vedic  jaghana,  cp.  Gr.  Kox<ivri ;  see  jangha] 
the  loins,  the  buttocks  Vin  11.266 ;  J  v. 203. 

Jaiigala  (nt.)  a  rough,  sandy  &■  waterless  place,  jungle 
A  V.21  ;  J  IV. 71  ;  VvA  338.     Cp.  ujjangala. 

Jangba  (f.)  [Vedic  jangha ;  cp.  Av.  zanga,  ankle ;  Goth, 
gaggan,  to  go  ;  Ags.  gang,  walk.  From  *ghengh  to  walk  ; 
see  also  jaghana]  the  leg.  usually  the  lower  leg  (from 
knee  to  ankle)  D  n.i7ai(S  i.i6  =  Sn  165  (eni°) ;  Sn  610  ; 
J  11.240;  V.42  ;  VI. 34;  ThA  212).  In  cpds.  jangha" 
(except  in  jangha-vihara). 

-ummagga  a  tunnel  fit  for  walking  J  vi.428  ;  -pesa- 
nika  adj.  going  messages  on  foot  Vin  in. 185;  J  11.82; 
Miln  370  (°iya) ;  Vism  17.  -ba!a(g)  (nissaya)  by  means 
of  his  leg  (lit.  by  the  strength  of,  cp.  Fr.  i  force  de) ; 
-magga  a  footpath  J  11.25 1  ;  v. 203  ;  VvA  194.  -vihara 
the  state  of  walking  about  (like  a  wanderer),  usually 
in  phrase  "0  anucankamati  anuvicarati  D  1.235  :  M  1.108  ; 
Sn  p.  105,  p.  115;  or  °g  carati  PvA  73.  —  A  1.136; 
J  n.272  ;  IV. 7,  74 ;  DhA  111.141. 

Jangheyyaka  (nt.)  [see  jangha]  lit.  "  belonging  to  the 
knees  "  ;  the  kneepiece  of  a  robe  Vin  1.287. 

Jacca  (adj.)  [jati-l-tya]  of  birth,  by  birth  (usually  -°)  M 
11.47  (ittara".  of  inferior  birth) ;  Sn  p.  80  (kii)°  of  what 
birth,  i.  e.  of  what  social  standing) ;  J  1.342  (hina"  of 
low  birth):  Sdhp  416  (id.)  J  v.257  (nihina") ;  Miln  189 
(sama"  of  equal  rank). 

-andha  (adj.)  blind  from  birth  Ud  62  sq.  (Jaccandha- 
vagga  VI. 4) ;  J  1.45,  76 ;  iv.i92  ;  Vbh  412  sq. ;  in  similes 
at  Vism  544,  596. 


Jacoft  instr.  of  j&ti. 

Jajjara  [From  intensive  of  jarati]  withered,  feeble  with 
age  Th  2,  270;  J  1.5,  59  (jara°) ;  ThA  212;  PvA  63 
("bhava,  state  of  being  old)  — a°  not  fading  (cp.  amata 
&  ajaramara),  of  NibbSna  S  iv.369. 

Jajjarita  [pp.  of  intens.  of  Jar  see  jarati]  weakened  DhA 

1.7. 

Jailfia  (adj.)  [  =  janya,  cp.  jatya ;  see  kula  &  koleyyaka]  of 
(good)  birth,  excellent,  noble,  charming,  beautiful 
M  1.30  (janfiajafifta,  cp.  p.  528);  J  11. 417  (=manapa 
sadhu).     a°  J  11.436. 

Jata  a  handle,  only  in  vasi°  (h.  of  a  razor)  Vin  iv.168; 
S  ili.i54  =  A  IV. 127. 

Jata  (f.)  [B.Sk.  jata]  tangle,  braid,  plaiting,  esp.  (a)  the 
matted  hair  as  worn  by  ascetics  (see  jatila)  Sn  249; 
Dh  241,  393  ;  J  1.12  (ajina-t- ) ;  n.272.  —  (b)  the  tangled 
branches  of  trees  J  1.64.  —  (c)  (fig.)  (the  tangle  of) 
desire,  lust  S  1.13=  165. 

-anduva  (  =  °andu  ?)  a  chain  of  braided  hair,  a  matted 
topknot  S  1.117;  -ftjina  braided  hair  &  an  antelope's 
hide  (worn  by  ascetics)  Sn  10 10  (°dhara),  cp.  above 
J  1.12  ;  -dharana  the  wearing  of  matted  hair  M  1.282. 

Ja(ita  [pp.  of  jat,  to  which  also  jata  ;  Dhtp  95  :  sanghdte] 
entangled  S  1.13  ;  Miln  102,  390  ;  Vism  i  (etym.). 

Jatin  one  who  wears  a  jata,  an  ascetic  Sn  689 ;  -f.  -in! 

J  V1.555. 

Jatila  [BSk.  jatila]  one  who  wears  a  jata,  i.  e.  a  braid  of 
hair,  or  who  has  his  hair  matted,  an  ascetic.  Enum'' 
amongst  other  '  religious '  as  ajivika  nigantha  j. 
paribbajaka  Nd'  308;  ajivika  nig°  j.  tapasa  Nd«  149, 
513;  —  Vin  i.24=iv.io8;  1.38  (puraija"  who  had  pre- 
viously been  j.)=VvA  i3  =  PvA  22  ;  S  1.78;  Sn  p.  J03, 
104  (Keriiya  j.) ;  J  115  :  "-382  ;  Ud  6  ;  Dpvs  1.38. 

Jatilaka=  jatila  M  1.282  ;  A  in. 276;  Miln  202  ;  Vism  383. 

Jathara  (m.  nt.)  [Vedic  jathara,  to  *gelt=*gelbh  (see 
gabbha),  cp.  Goth.  kil|;ei  uterus,  Ags.  cild  =  E.  child] 
the  belly  Miln  1 75. 

Jam;ia(ka)  [cp.janu  &  jannu]  the  knee  D  11.160  ;  J  vi.332  ; 
SnA  n.230  ;  DhA  1.80  (°ka) ;  H.57  (id.),  80 ;  iv.204 ; 
VvA  206  (jaijiju-kappara). 

Jatit  [Sk.  jatu ;  cp.  Lat.  bitumen  pitch ;  Ags.  cwidu. 
resin,  Ohg.  quiti  glue]  lac.  As  medicine  Vin  1.201. 
°matthaka  a  decking  with  lac.  used  by  women  to  pre- 
vent conception  Vin  iv.26i-;  consisting  of  either  jatu, 
kattha  (wood),  pittha  (flour),  or  mattika  (clay). 

Jatta  (nt.)  [Vedic  jatru]  the  collar-bone  DhA  11.55  (gloss: 
agsakuta) ;  Davs  iv.49. 

Jaddhn  [for  jaddhur).  inf.  to  jaka  (P.  jaggh),  corresp.  to 
Sk.  jagdhi  eating  food  ;  intens.  of  ghasati]  only  in  com- 
position as  a°  not  eating,  abstaining  from  food,  "ka  one 
who  fasts  M  1.245  ;  "miira  death  by  starvation  J  vi.63 
(  =  anasaka-marana;  Fsb.  has  note:  read  ajuttha°  ?) ; 
"marika  A  iv.287  (v.  1.  ajettha"). 


110 


Jana 


III 


Jambala 


I'M!*  [*geni:  see  janati.  Cp.  Gr.  yivoi;,  yivof,  Lat. 
genus=Fr,  gens,  to  which  also  similar  in  meaning]  a 
creature,  Uving  being :  (a)  sg.  an  individual,  a  creature, 
person,  man  Sn  121,  676,  807,  1023  (sabba  everybody). 
Usually  collectively:  people,  they,  one  (=Fr.  on),  with 
pi.  of  verb  Dh  249  (dadanti) ;  often  as  mahajana  the 
people,  the  crowd  S  1.115;  J  1.167,  294;  PvA  0  ;  loka- 
mahajana  =  Ioka  DhA  111.175;  or  as  bahu(j)jana  many 
people,  the  many  A  1.68;  Dh  320;  DhA  ni.17.5.  See 
also  puthujjana.  —  (b)  pi.  men,  persons,  people,  beings  : 
n^na°  various  living  beings  Sn  1102  (expl"*  at  Nd-  248 
as  khattiya  brahmai;!^  vessa  sudda  gahaitha  pabbajita 
devi  manussa.)  dve  jana  J  1.151  ;  11.105  ;  tayo  j.  J  1-63  ; 
in. 52 ;  keci  jani  some  people  PvA  20.  See  also 
Sn  243.  598,  1077,  1 121. 

-ftdhipa  a  king  of  men  J  11.369  ;  -inda  =  prec.  J  111.280, 
294  ;  -esabha  the  leader  of  men,  the  bust  of  all  people 
Dh  255  ;  -kaya  a  body  or  group  of  people  ]  1.28  ;  DhA 
'•33  (dve  j.  .-  miccha  &  samma-ditthika) ;  Dpvs  1.40; 
-pada  country  see  sep.  ;  -majjhe  (loc.)  before  (all)  the 
people  J  1.294  ;  Th  2,  394 ;  -vada  people's  talk,  gossip 
Sn  973. 

JuiAka  [to  janati]  i.  producing,  production  Vism  369; 
adj.  (-°)  producing:  pasada°  Mhvs  1.4  (  =  ''karaka);  a 
species  of  karma  Vism  601  ;  Cpd.  144  (A. i).  —  2.  n.  f. 
°ika  genetrix,  mother  J  1.16;  Dhs  io59~:f(where  it 
represents  another  janika,  viz.  deception,  as  shown  by 
syn.  maya  &  B.Sk.  janika  Lai.  V.  541;  Kern,  Toev. 
p.  41). 

Janati  (f.)  [from  janati]  a  collection  of  people  ("  man- 
kind "),  congregation,  gathering;  people,  folk  D  1.151 
(  =  DA  1.310,  correct  janana),  206;  Vin  11.12S  — M 
11.93  (pacchima) ;  A  1.61  (td.) ;  111.251  (id.);  It  33; 
J  IV. 110;  Pv  111.5^  (  =  janasamiiha  upasakagana  PvA 
200). 

Janati>  [Sk.  janati  (trs.)  A  jayate  (intrs.);  *gene  &  *gne 
to  (be  able  to)  produce ;  Gr.  yiyvoiaat  (yewait)  71'wToi; 
=  jata=  (g)natus ;  Lat.  gigno,  natura,  natio ;  Goth. 
ka6|>s  &  kun^s ;  Cymr.  geni,  Ags.  cennan,  Ohg.  kind, 
etc.]  only  in  Caus.  janeti  [Sk.  janayati]  often  spelled 
janeti  (cp.  jaleti :  jaleti)  &  Pass,  (intrs.)  jayati  to  bring 
forth,  produce,  cause,  syn.  safijaneti  nibbatteti  abhinib- 
batteti  Nd*  s.  v.  (cp.  karoti).  ussahar)  j.  to  put  forth 
exertion  J  11. 407  (see  chanda) ;  (sag)vegan  j.  to  stir  up 
emotion  (aspiration)  J  in. 184;  PvA  32;  Mhvs  1.4; 
dukkhat)  j.  to  cause  discomfort  PvA  63.  —  Aor.  janayi 
Th  2,  162  (Maya  j.  Gotamar) :  she  bore).  —  Pp.  janita 
produced  PvA  i. — See  also  jantu  jamma,  jata,  jati, 
iiati.  etc. 

Janati*  to  make  a  sound  J  vi.64  (=:sanati  saddai)  karoti). 

Janana  (adj.)  [to  janati]  producing,  causing  (-°)  It  84 
(anattha"  dosa) ;  J  iv.141  ;  Dpvs  1.2;  DhsA  25S ; 
Dhtp  428.  —  f.  janani  PvA  i  (sagvega"  desana);  = 
mother  (cp.  janetti)  J  iv.175;  PvA  79.  Note,  janana 
DA  1.310  is  misprint  for  janata. 

Janapada  [jana+  pada,  the  latter  in  function  of  collective 
noun-abstract :  see  pada  3]  inhabited  country,  the 
country  (opp.  town  or  market-place),  the  continent ; 
politically:  a  province,  district,  county  D  1.136  (opp. 
nigama);  11.349;  A  1.160,  178;  Sn  422,  683,  995,  1102; 
]  1.258;  11.3  (opp.  nagara),  139,  300;  PvA  20,  32,  111 
(province).  See  also  gama.  The  16  provinces  of 
Buddhist  India  are  comprised  in  the  solasa  mahS-jana- 
pad&  (Miln  350)  enum''  at  A  1.2 13  =  iv. 252  sq.  =  Nd* 
247  (on  Sn  1102.)  as  follows  :  Auga,  Magadha  {+  KJIinga, 
Nd*]  Kasi,  Kosala.  Vajji,  Malla,  Cetl  (Cetiya  A  iv.), 
Var)sa  (Vanga  A  1.).  Kurfi,  Paiicaia,  Majja  ("Maccha  A), 
Surasena,  As3aka,Avanti,Yona(Gandhara  A),  Kamboja. 
Cp.  Rhys  Davids.  B.  India  p.  23. 

-katha  talk  or  gossip  about  the  province  D  1.71^ ; 
•kalyai^  a  country -beauty,  i.  e.  the  most  beautiful  girl 


in  the  province  D  1.193  (see  kalyana) ;  -carika  tramping 
the  country  PvA  14;  -tthavariya  stableness,  security, 
of  the  realm,  in  "patta,  one  who  has  attained  a  secure 
state  of  his  realm,  of  a  Cakkavattin  D  1.88;  11.16;  Sn 
p.  106;  -padesa  a  rural  district  A  iv.366;  v. 101. 

Janavati  (?)  A  iv.172. 

Janitta  (nt.)  [jan-f-  tra,  cp.  Gr.  ytvmipa]  birthplace  J  11.80. 

Janetti  (f)  [f.  to  janitr=7«>'f7-i«f=genitor,  cp.  genetrix. 
The  Sk.  form  is  janitri.  On  e :  i  cp.  petti° :  pitri°] 
mother  D  II. 7  sq. ;  M  in. 248  ;  A  iv.276  ;  J  1.48  ;  n.381  ; 
IV.48. 

Jantaghara  [ace.  to  Abhp.  214  =  aggisala,  a  room  in  which 
a  fire  is  kept  (viz.  for  the  purpose  of  a  steam  bath,  i.  e. 
a  hot  room,  cp.  in  meaning  Mhg.  kemenate  =  Lat.  cami- 
nata,  Gcr.  stube=E.  stove;  Low  Ger.  pesel  (room)  = 
Lat.  pensile  (bath)  etc.)  Etym.  uncertain.  Buhler 
KZ  25,  p.  32  5  =  yantra-grha  (oil-mill?);  E.  Hardy 
(D.  Lit.  9tg.  1902,  p.  339)  =  jentaka  (hot  dry  bath),  cp. 
Vin.  Texts  1.157;  111103.  In  all  probability  it  is  a 
distorted  form  (by  dissimilation  or  analogy),  perhaps 
of  *jhant-agara,  to  jha  to  burn  =  Sk.  ksa,  jhanti  heat  or 
heating  (  =  Sk.  ksati)-(-agara,  which  latter  received  the 
aspiration  of  the  first  part  (  =  aghara),  both  being  re- 
duced in  length  of  vowels  =jant-aghara] — 1.  a  (hot) 
room  for  bathing  purposes,  a  sitzbath  Vin  1.47,  139; 
II. 119,  220  sq.,  280;  111.55;  M  111.126;  J  11.25,  144; 
Vism  18  ;  Dpvs  viii.45.  —  2.  living  room  J  1.449. 

Janti  at  DA  1.296  in  jantiya  (for  D  1.135  janiya)  =  hani, 
abandonment,  giving  up,  payment,  fine  [prob.  =  jahanti, 
to  jahati].     But  see  jani. 

Jantn^  [Vedic  jantu,  see  janati]  a  creature,  living  being, 
man,  person  S  1.48;  A  iv,227  ;  Sn  586,  773  sq.,  808. 
1103;  Nd*  249  (  =  satta,  nara,  puggala) ;  Dh  105,  176, 
341.  395;  J  1-202:  n.415;  v.495  ;  Pv  ii.9*»  (=satta- 
nikaya,  people,  a  crowd  PvA  134). 

Jantu*  a  grass  Vin  1.196. 

Jannu  [cp.  jannu(ka)  &  janu]  the  knee  DhA  1.394.  -°ka 
D  Ii.i7«;(in  marks  of  a  Mahapurisa,  v.  1.  jjn) ;  J  iv.165  ; 
DhA  1.48. 

Japa  (&  jappa  vv.  11.)  [fr.  japati]  i.  muttering,  mumbling, 
recitation  A  111.56=  J  111.205  (H-  manta) ;  Sn  328  (jappa) 
(  =  niratthaka-katha  SnA  334).  —  2.  studying  J  in. 114 
(  =  ajjhena). 

Jap(p)aka  (adj.)  whispering,  see  kaijija." 

Japati   (&   jappati  Dhtp    189,    aJso   japp    i9o  =  vacane; 

sound-root    jap)    to    mumble,    whisper,    utter,    recite 

]   IV. 204  ;   Pv  II. 6'  ( =  vippalapati  PvA  94);  PvA  97; 

I       ppr.   jappai)   S   1.166   (pala,pai)) ;    J    iv.75.     See   jaj  a, 

I       japana  ;  also  pari". 

i   ?ap<Uia    (sic.    DA    1.97,    otherwise   jappana)   whispering, 
I       mumbhng  (see  japati),  in  kaqi)a°.     See  also  pari". 

j  Jsppati  [not,  as  customary,  to  jalp,  Sk.  jalpati  (  =  japati), 
I  but  in  the  meaning  of  desire,  etc.,  for  cappati  to  capp, 
Af,  in  cappeti  =  Sk,  carvayati  to  chew,  suck,  be  hungry 
(q.  V  )  cp.  also  calaka]  to  hunger  for,  to  desire,  yearn, 
long  for,  (c.  ace.)  Sn  771  (kame),  839  (bhavarj),  899,  902  ; 
Nd*  79  i  li  pajappati),  —  pp.  jappita  Sn  902.  See  also 
jappa,  jappana,  etc.,  also  abhijjappati  &  pa°. 

Jappana=  jappa  Sn  945  ;  Dhs  io59«.    Cp.  pa°. 

Jappa  (f.)  [to  jappati]  desire,  lust,  greed,  attachment, 
hunger  (cp.  Nd^  on  tai:iha)  S  1.123  (bhava-lobha°) ; 
Sn  1033  ;  Nd*  250  ;  Nett  12  ;  Dhs  279,  1059. 

Jamb&la  [Sk.  jambala]  mud  ;  adj.  jatnbalin  muddy,  as  n. 
jambali  (f.)  a  dirty  pool  (at  entrance  to  village)  A  n.  166. 


Jambu 


112 


Jalupika 


Jamba  (f.)  [Sk.  jambu]  the  rose-apple  tree,  Eugenia 
Jambolana  J  11.160;  v.6 ;  Vv  6'';  44*-',  164.  —  As  adj. 
f.  jambi  sarcastically  "  rose-apple-inaid,"  appl''  to  a 
gardener's  daughter  j  :ii.22. 

-dipa  the  country  of  the  rose-apples  i.  e.  India  J. 
1.263;  VvA  18:  Miln  27,  etc.  -nada  see  jambonada; 
-pakka  the  fruit  of  Eugenia  jambolana,  the  rose-apple 
(of  black  or  dark  colour)  Vism  409  ;  -pes!  the  rind  of  the 
r.-a.  fruit  J  v. 465  ;  -rukka  the  r. -a.' free  Dh.\  tii.211  ; 
-sanda  rose-apple  grove  (  =  °dipa.  N.  for  India)  Sn  552  = 
Th  I,  822. 

Jambnka  [Sk.  jambuka,  to  jambh  ?]  a  jackal  J  II.  107; 
111.223. 

Jambonada  [Sk.  jambOnada ;  belonging  to  or  coming 
from  the  Jambu  river  (?)]  a  special  sort  of  gold  (in  its 
unwelded  state);  also  spelled  jambunada  (J  iv.105; 
VvA  13,  340)  A  1. 181  ;  II. 8,  29;  VVS4'''.     Cp.  jatarupa. 

Jambhati  [cp.  Vedic  jehate,  Dhtp  208  &  Dhtm  298  define 
jambh  as  "  gatta-vinima,"  i.  e.  bending  the  body]  to 
yawn,  to  arouse  oneself,  to  rise,  go  forth  (of  a  lion) 
J  VI.40. 

Jambhana  (f)  [to  jambhatij  arousing,  activity,  alertness 
Vbh  352. 

Jamma  (adj.)  [Vedic  *jalma  (?),  dialectical  ?]  miserable, 
wretched,  contemptible  J  ii.iio;  111.99  (  =  lamaka); 
f.  -i  S  V.217  ;  Dh  335,  336  (of  tat>ha) ;  J  11.428  ;  v.421  ; 
DhA  IV.44  (=lamaka). 

J'ammail(a)  (nt.)  [to  janati]  birth,  descent,  rank  Sn 
1018. 

Jaya  [see  jayati]  vanquishing,  overcoming,  victory  D  1. 10  ; 
Sn  681  ;  J  11.406  ;  opp.  parajaya  Vism  401. 

-ggaha  the  lucky  die  J  iv.322  (  =  kataggaha,  q.  v.); 
-parajaya  victory  &  defeat  Dh  201  ;  -pana  the  drink  of 
victory,  carousing,  wassail;  °r)  pivati  DhA  1.193; 
-sumana  "  victory's  joy,"  N.  of  a  plant  (cp.  jatisumana) 
Vism  174;  DhA  1.17,  383. 

Jayati  (jeti,  jinati)  [Sk.  jayati,  ji  to  have  power,  to  con- 
quer, cp.  jaya=jdin;  trans,  of  wliich  the  intrans.  is 
jinati  to  lose  power,  to  become  old  (see  jirati)]  to  con- 
quer, surpass ;  to  pillage,  rob,  to  overpower,  to  defeat. 
—  Pre?,  [jayati]  jeti  J  n.3  ;  jinati  Sn  439;  Dh  354; 
J  1.289;  IV. 71.  —  Pot.  je>'ya  Com.  on  Dh  103;  jine 
Dh  103  =  J  ii.4  =  VvA  69  ;  3rd  pi.  jineyyug  S  1.221  (opp. 
parajeyyui)).  —  Ppr.  jayai)  Dh  201.  —  Put.  jessati 
Vv  332  ;  jayissati  ib. ;  jinissati  J  11. 183.  —  Aor.  jini 
J  1.313;  11.404;  ajini  Dh  3;  pi.  jinii)su  S  1.22 1  (opp. 
parajii)su),  224  (opp.  parajii)su,  with  v.  1.  °jinii)su) ;  A 
IV.432  (opp.  "jiyigsu,  with  v.  1.  "jinigsu).  Also  aor.  ajesi 
DhA  1.44  (  =  ajini).  —  Proh.  (ma)  jiyi  J  iv.107.  —  Ger. 
jetva  Sn  439;  jetvana  It  76.  —  Inf.  jinitut)  J  vi.193; 
VvA  69.  —  Grd.  jeyya  Sn  288  (a°) ;  jinitabba  VvA  69 
(v.  1.  jetabba).  —  Pass,  jiyati  (see  para"),  jiyati  is  also 
Pass,  to  jarati  —  Caus.  i.  jayapeti  to  wish  victory  to, 
to  hail  (as  a  r&spectful  greeting  to  a  king)  J  11.213,  369, 
375;  IV. 403.  —  2.  japayati  to  cause  to  rob,  to  incite, 
to  plunder  M  1.231  ;  It  22  =  J  iv.71  (v.  I.  hapayati)== 
Miln  402;  J  VI. 108  (to  annul);  Miln  227.  —  Des. 
jigigsati  (q.  v.).  —  pp.  jina  &  jita  (q.  v.). 

Jaya  f.  [Vedic  jaya]  wife  only  in  cpd.  jayampatika,  the 
lady  of  the  house  and  her  husband,  the  two  heads  of  the 
household.  That  the  wife  should  be  put.  first  might 
seem  suggestive  of  the  matriarchate,  but  the  expression 
means  just  simply  "  the  pair  of  them,"  and  the  context 
has  never  anything  to  do  with  the  matriarchate.  — 
husband  &  wife,  a  married  couple  S  11.98  ;  J  1.347  .'  iv.70, 
of  birds.     See  also  jayampatika. 

Jara  (adj.)  (°-)  [See  jarati]  old,  decayed  (in  disparaging 
sense),  wretched,  miserable ;  -Odapanag  a  spoilt  well 


J  IV. 387  ;  -gavas'gona  Pv  1.8I ;  -gona  [cp.  Sk.  jarad- 
gava]  a  decrepit,  old  bull  J  n.  1 35  ;  -sakka  "  the  old  S  '' 
J  IV. 389 ;  -sala  a  tumble-down  shed  PvA  78. 

Jarata  (f.)  [see  jarati]  old  age  Dhs644^  (rupassa  j.  decay 
of  form) ;  Vism  449. 

Jaiati  [Vedic  jarati  &  jiryati,  *gera  to  crush,  to  pound, 
overcome  (cp.  jayati) ;  as  intrs.  to  become  brittle,  to  be 
consumed,  to  decay,  cp.  Lat.  granum,  Goth  kaiirn,  E. 
etc.  corn]  to  suffer  destruction  or  decay,  to  become  old. 
in  two  roots,  viz.  1 .  jar  [jarati]  in  Caus.  jarayati  to 
destroy,  to  bring  to  ruin  J  v.501  =  vi.375.  —  2.  jir 
[Sk.  jiryati]  see  jiyati,  jirati,  jlrayati,  jiripeti.  —  Pp. 
jinna.  —  Cp.  also  jara,  jara,  jajjara,  jirapata. 

Jara  (f)  &  (older)  jaras  (nt.)  [of  the  latter  only  the  instr. 
jarasa  iii  use:  Sn  804,  1123  (  =  jaraya  Nd'  249).  —  Sk. 
jara  &  jarah  to  *gera:  see  jarati;  cp.  Gr.  ynpag,  yipas, 
ypnfic;  old  age,  etc.  See  also  jirana(ta)]  decay,  decrepi- 
tude, old  age  Vin  i.io,  34;  A  1.51,  138  (as  Death's 
messenger) ;  v. 144  sq.  (bhabbo  jarar)  pahatui)) ;  Sn  311 
(cp.  D  111.75);  j  1.59;  Th  2,  252  sq.  ;  Vism  502  (def. 
as  twofold  &  discussed  in  its  valuation  as  dukkha). 
Defined  as  "  ya  tesag  sattanag  tamhi  tamhi  satta- 
nikaye  jara  jiranata  khandiccar)  paliccag  valittacata 
ayuno saghani  indriyanai)  paripako  "  D  ii.3o5  =  M  1.49= 
S  ii.2  =  Nd'  252  =  Dhs  644.  cp.  Dhs.  (rsl.  p.  195.  —  Fre- 
quently comb""  with  marai^a  (maccu,  etc.)  "  decay  & 
death "  (see  under  jati  as  to  formulas) :  "marana, 
D  II. 31  sq.  ;  M  1.49 ;  Sn  575  ;  "maccu  Sn  581,  1092,  1094. 
ajaramara  not  subject  to  decay  &  death  (cp.  ajajjara) 
Th  II,  512  ;  Pv  11.6"  ;  Vv  63"  ;  J  111.515. 

-ghara  the  house  of  age  (adj.)  like  a  decayed  house 
Th  2,  270  (=  jii?i;iagharasadisa  ThA  213).  -jajjara 
feeble  with  age  J  1.59 ;  -jiopa  decrepit  with  age  PvA 
148;  -dhamma  subject  to  growing  old  A  1.138.  145; 
11.172,  247;  111.54  sq..  71  sq.  ;  -patta  old  J  111.394; 
IV.403  ;  -bhaya  fear  of  old  age  A  1.179;  11.121  ;  -vata 
the  wind  of  age  DhA  iv.25.  -sutta  the  Suttanta  on  old 
age,  N.  of  Sutta  Niyata  iv.6  (p.  157  sq.  ;  beginning 
with  "  appag  vata  jivitar)  idar)  "),  quoted  at  DhA 
III. 320. 

Jala  (nt.)  [Sk.  jala,  conn,  with  gala  drop  (?),  prob.  dialec- 
tical ;  cp.  udaka]  water  Sn  845  ;  J  1.222  ;  in. 188  ;  iv.137. 
-gocara  living  in  the  water  J  11.158.  -ja  bom  or 
sprung  from  w.  J  iv.333  ;  v. 445  ;  VvA  42  ;  -da  "  giving 
water,"  rain-cloud  Davs  v. 32  ;  -dhara  [cp.  jalandhara 
rain-cloud]  the  sea  Miln  117;  -dhi  =  prec.  Davs  v. 38. 

Jillati  [Sk.  jvalati,  with  jvarati  to  be  hot  or  feverish,  to 
jval  to  burn  (Dhtp  264  :  dittiyai)),  cp.  Ohg.  kol  =  coal ; 
Celt,  gual]  to  burn,  to  shine  D  3,  188 ;  M  1.487  ;  J  1.62  ; 
11.380  ;  IV. 69  ;  It  86  ;  Vv  46^  ;  VvA  107  ;  Miln  223.  343. 
—  Caus.  jaleti  &  jaleti  (cp.  janeti :  jancti)  to  set  on  fire, 
hght.  kindle  S  1.169;  J  11. 104;  Miln  47.  —  Pp.  jalita. 
Intens.  dadda|hati  (q.  v.).     Cp.  ujjaleti. 

Jalana  (n.-adj.)  [Sk.  jvalana]  burning  Pgdp  16. 

7aiaba  [Sk.  jarayu,  slough  &  placenta,  to  jar  see  jarati, 
originally  that  which  decays  (  =  decidua);  cp.  Or 
yiipac:  slough.  As  to  meanings  cp.  gabbha]  1.  the 
womb  S  111.240.  —  2.  the  embryo  J  iv.38.  —  3.  the 
placenta  J  11.38. 

-ja  born  from  a  womb,  viviparous  M  1.73 ;  D  ni.230 ; 
J  ii.53  =  v.85. 

Jalita  (adj.)  [pp.  to  jaiati]  set  on  fire,  burning,  shining, 
bright,  splendid  Sn  396,  668,  686;  Vv  21*  (=jalanto 
jotanto  VvA  107) ;  Pv  1.10"  (burning  floor  of  Niraya) ; 
ii.i'2  ("anubhava:  shining  majesty);  PvA  41  (  =  aditta 
burning) ;  ThA  292. 

<&Iupika  (f  )  [Sk.  •jalukik5  =  jaluka  &  (pop.  etym.) 
jalanka  (sprung  fr.  water),  borrowed  fr.  Npers.  lalfi 
(?  Uhlenbeck) ;  cp.  Gr.  fiiiWa  leech.  Celt,  gel ;  perhaps 


Jalogi 


"3 


J&ta 


to  gal  in  the  sense  of  suck  (?)]  a  leectt  Miln  407  (v.  1. 
jalopika). 

Jalogi  (nt.  ?)  toddy  (i.  e.  juice  extracted  from  the  palmyra, 
the  date  or  the  cocoa  palm)  Vin  11.294  (patut)  the 
drinking  of  j.),  301,  307  ;  Mhvs  4,  10. 

Jalla*  (nt.)  [*jalya  to  jala  or  gal]  moisture,  (wet)  dirt, 
perspiration  (mostly  as  seda°  or  in  cpd.  rajo°,  q.  v.) 
Sn  249  (=rajojalla  SnA  291);  J  vi.578  (sweat  under 
the  armpits  =  jallika  Com.). 

JaUa'  [prob.  =  jhalla,  see  Kern,  Toevoegselen  s.  v.]  athlete, 
acrobat  J  vi.271. 

Jalliki  (f.)  [derain.  of  jalla]  a  drop  (of  perspiration),  dirt 
in  seda°,  etc.  A  1.253  (kali°) ;  Sn  198=  J  1.146;  vi.578. 

Ja)a  (adj.)  [Sk.  jada]  dull,  slow,  stupid  D  111.265  (^°)  '. 
A  11.252  ;  Pug  13  ;  Miln  251  ;  DA  1.290. 

Java  [Sk.  Java,  to  javati]  1.  (n.)  speed  S  11.266;  v. 227; 
M  1.446;  A  II. 113;  III. 248  :  Sn  221;  J  11.290;  IV. 2. 
Often  comb''  with  thama,  in  phrase  thamajava- 
sampanna  endowed  with  strength  &  swiftness  J  1.62  ; 
VvA  104;  PvA  4;  Miln  4.  —  javena  (instr.)  speedily 
J  11.377.  —  2.  (adj.)  swift,  quick  J  ni.25  ;  vi.244 
(mano°,  as  quick  as  thought);  Vv  16  (=vegavanto 
VvA  78) ;  VvA  6  (sigha"). 

-cchinna  without  alacrity,  slow,  stupid  (opp.  sigha- 
java)  DhA  1.262  ;  -sampanna  full  of  swiftness,  nimble- 
ness.  or  alacrity  A  1.244  ^-  ■  11-250  sq. 

Javati  Vcdic  jn  javate  intr.  to  hurry,  junati  trs.  to  incite, 
urgt  to  run,  hurry,  hasten  S  1.33;  J  iv.213;  Davs 
v.24  ;  DhsA  265,  pp.  juta. 

Javana  (nt.)  i.  alacrity,  readiness;  impulse,  shock 
Ps  I. So  sq.  :  Visra  22  ;  DhsA  265  (cp.  Dhs  trsl.  pp.  132, 
156);  DA  1. 194.  Usually  in  cpd.  javana-pai^fia  (adj.) 
of  alert  intellection  of  swift  understanding  together 
with  hasa-pafina  (hasu°  at  M  in. 25  ;  J  iv.136)  &  puthu" 
tikkha°  S  v. 376,  377  ;  Nd^  235,  3'.  Also  in  cpds.  "pafina 
Ps  U.185  sq. ;  °pannata  A  1.45  ;  "pannattai)  S  v. 413.  — 
2.  The  twelfth  stage  in  the  function  (kicca)  of  an  act 
of  perception  (or  Wthicitta) :  the  stage  of  full  percep- 
tion, or  apperception.  Vism  ch.  xiv.  (e.  g.  p.  459) ; 
Abhdhs.  pt.  iii,  §  6  (kiccai))  ;  Comp.  pp.  29,  115,  245. 
In  this  connection  javana  is  taken  in  its  equally  funda- 
mental sense  of  "  going  "  (not  "  swiftness  "),  and 
the  "  going  "  is  understood  as  intellectual  movement. 

Javanaka= Java  2  (adj.)  VvA  78. 

Jaha  (adj.)  (-°)  [to  jahati]  leaving  behind,  giving  up,  sec 
attar)",  okar|°,  kappag",  ranar)",  sabbag".  etc  (S  1.52  ; 
It  58;  Sn  790,  1101,  etc.);  duj°  hard  to  give  up  Th  i, 
495- 

Jahati  &  jahati  [Vedic  root  ha.  Cp.  *ghe(i)  &  ghl  to  be 
devoid  (of),  Gr.  X'lpo^  void  of,  X'W"  widow,  x<^p"  open 
space  (cp.  Sk.  vihaya=akasa),  x'-'P'i"'  separate;  Lat. 
her-es ;  Sk.  jihite  to  go  forth=Ohg.  gen,  gan,  Ags. 
gan  =  go;  also  Sk.  hani  want  =  Goth.  gaidw,  cp.  Gr. 
xnrij.u]  to  leave,  abandon,  lose ;  give  up,  renounce, 
forsake.  Ster.  expl"  at  Nd^  255  (and  passim) :  paja- 
hati  vinodeti  byantikaroti  anabhavar)  garaeti.  Lit.  as 
well  as  fig. ;  esp.  w.  ref.  to  kama,  dosa  &  other  evil 
qualities.  —  Pres.  jahati  Sn  i,  506  (dosar)),  589  ;  Dh  91  ; 
imper.  jsihassu  Sn  1121  (rupai))  ;  pot.  jjihe  It  34;  Dh 
221  ;  J  IV. 58,  &  jaheyya  Sn  362;  It  115;  J  1153; 
IV. 58.  —  Fut.  jabissami  J  111.279;  iv.420  ;  v.465  ;  in 
verse  :  hassami  J  iv.420  ;  v.465.  —  Ger.  hitva  (very 
frequent)  Sn  284,  328  ;  Dh  29,  88,  etc.  ;  hitvana  (Sn  6f)), 
jahitva  &  jahetva  (Sn  500).  —  Inf.  jahitug  J  1.138. 
—  Pp.  jahita  Sn  231  ;  Kh  9;  Miln  261.  —  Pass,  hayati 
S  11.224;  Sn  817;  Miln  297,  hayate  J  v.488  &  hiyati 
J  H.65  ;  Sn  944  (hiyamana),  cp.  hayare  J  11.327 ;  pp. 


hina   (q.   v.).  —  Caus.   bipeti   (q.   v.).     See  also  hani, 
hayin,  jaha. 

Jahitika  (f)  [See  jahati]  (a  woman)  who  has  been  jilted, 
or  rejected,  or  repudiated  J  1.148. 

Jagara  (adj.)  [fr.  jagarti]  waking,  watchful,  careful, 
vigilant  S  1.3  ;  A  11.13=  It  116;  M  11.31  ;  It  41  ;  MUn 
300.  —  bahu°  wide  awake,  well  aware,  cautious  Su 
972  (cp.  rakkhita-manasano  in  same  context  v.  63) ; 
Dh  29. 

JagaTai;ia  (nt.)  [der.  fr.  jagara]  a  means  for  waking  or 
keeping  awake  Miln  301. 

Jagarata  (f)   [cp.  Sk.  jagarapa]  watchfulness,  -  vigilance 

5  1.3. 

Jagarati  [Sk.  jagarti  to  be  awake  (redupl.  perf.  for  jSjarti) 
•ger  &  getei ;  cp.  Lat  expergiscor  (*exprogriscor) ;  Gr. 
tyeipiu,  perf.  lypijyopa  (for  •tyi'/yopa).  Def.  at  Dhtp 
254  by  nidda-khaya]  to  be  awake,  to  be  watchful,  to 
be  on  the  alert  (cp.  guttadvara)  Dh  60  (digha  jagarato 
ratti),  226  ;  It  41  ;  Miln  3C0.  —  pp,  jagarita  (q.  v.). 

Jagarit«i  (nt.)  [pp.  of  jagarti]  waking,  vigil  It  ^\  ;  Pug  59. 

Jagariya  (f)  [BSk.  M  Vastu  jagarika]  keeping  awake, 
watchfulness,  vigilance,  esp.  in  the  sense  of  being 
cautious  of  the  dangers  that  are  likely  to  befall  one 
who  strives  after  perfection.  Therefore  freq.  in  comb" 
"  indriyesu  guttadvaro  bhojane  mattafiiiu  jagariyai) 
anuyutto  "  (anujoinjati ;  to  apply  oneself  to  or  being 
devoted  to  vigilance),  e.  g.  S  11.218  ;  M  1.32,  273,  354  sq., 
471  ;  A  I.I  13  sq.  ;  11.40.  —  Also  in  °g  bhajati  to  pursue 
watchfulness  (bhajetha  keep  vigil)  It  42  ;  Sn  926  (niddai) 
na  bahulikareyya  j°r)  bhajeyya  atapi).  —  S  iv.104; 
M  1.273,355;  MUn  388. 

-•uiuyoga   application    or   practice   of   watchfulness 
Nd'  484. 

Jata  [pp.  of  janati  (janeti),  cp.  Lat.  (g)natus,  Goth,  kunds  ; 
also  Gr.  (Kaai-)  ynjrcij,  Ohg.  knabo]  i.  As  ad  j. -noun  : 
(a)  born,  grown,  arisen,  produced  (  =  nibbatta  patu- 
bhuta  Nd^  256)  Sn  576  (jatanar)  maccanai)  niccai) 
maranato  bhayai)) ;  jatena  maccena  kattabbai]  kusalai) 
bahui)  Dh  53  =  Miln  333;  yakkhini  jat^si  (bom  a  G.) 
J  VI. 337  ;  rukkho  j.  J  1.222  ;  lata  jata  Dh  340  ;  gama- 
nissandhena  jatani  supeyya-paijiiani  Vism  250.  —  (n.) 
he  who  or  that  which  is  born  :  jatassa  maranag  hoti 
Sn  742  ;  jatassa  jara  pannayissati  J  1.59  ;  jatai)-(-  bhutai] 
(opp.  ajatar)  abhutai))  It  37.  —  (b)  "  genuine,"  i.e. 
natural,   true,   good,   sound   (cp.   kata,    bhuta,    taccha 

6  opp.  ajata  like  akata,  abhuta) :  see  cpds.  —  2.  As 
predicate,  often  in  sense  of  a  finite  verb  (cp.  gata) : 
bom,  grown  (or  was  born,  grew) ;  become  ;  occurred, 
happened  Sn  683  (Bodhisatto  hitasukhataya  jato) ; 
bhayai)  jatag  (arose)  Sn  207 ;  vivada  jata  Sn  828 ; 
ekadivase  j.  (were  born  on  the  same  day)  J  III. 391  ; 
aphasukag  jatag  (has  occurred  J  1.291.  —  So  in  loc. 
abs.  jate  (jatambi)  "  when  .  .  .  has  arisen,  when  there 
is  .  .  .."  e.  g.  atthamhi  Vin  1.350  =  M  iii.i54  =  Dh  331  ; 
vadamhi  Sn  832  ;  oghe  Sn  1092  ;  kahapa^esu  jatesu 
J  I.J2I.  —  3.  °jata  (nt.)  characteristic;  pada°  pedal 
character  S  1.86  ;'an^a°  the  sexual  organ  Vin  1.191  ;  as 
adj.  having  become  .  .  .  (  =  bhuta);  being  like  or 
behaving  as,  of  the  kind  of  .  .  .,  sometimes  to  be  ren- 
dered by  an  adj.  or  a  pp.  implied  in  the  uoun  :  cuo^aka- 
jatani  atthikani  (=cui:ipayitani)  M  in. 92  ;  jalakajata 
in  bud  .\  IV. 117;  chandajata  =  chandika  Sn  767; 
sujata  Sn  548  (well-bom,  i.  e.  auspicious,  blessed, 
happy)  ;  pitisomanassa"  joyful  &  glad  Sn  p.  94  ;  J  1.60, 
etc.  :  gandhajata  a  kind  of  perfume  (sec  gandha). 
Often  untranslatable:  IJbhappatto  j5to  J  111.126; 
vinisa-ppaccayo  jato  J  1.256.  —  4.  a  Jataka  or  Bud- 
dhist birth  story  DhA  1.34. 

-amanda  the  (wild)  castor  oil  plant  VvA  10 ;  -ova- 
raka  the  inner  chamber  where  he  was  bom  VvA  158; 


J&taka 


114 


JSti 


J  1.391  (so  read  for  jato  varake).  -kamina  the  (sooth- 
saying) ceremony  connected  w.  birth,  in  °r)  karoti 
to  set  the  horoscope  PvA  198  (=nakkhatta-yogar) 
ugganhati) ;  -divasa  the  day  of  birth,  birthday  J  111.391  ; 
rv.38  ;  -mangala  birth  festival,  i.  e.  the  feast  held  on 
the  birth  of  a  child  DhA  11. 86  ;  -riipa  "  sterling,"  pure 
metal,  i.  e.  gold  (in  its  natural  state,  before  worked, 
cp.  jambonada).  In  its  relation  to  suvanna  (worked 
gold)  it  is  stated  to  be  suvannavanno  (i.  e.  the  bright- 
coloured  metal :  VvA  9  ;  DhA  iv.32  :  suvaijno  jata- 
rupo) ;  at  DA  1.78  it  is  expl'*  by  suvanija  only  &  at 
Vin  111.238  it  is  said  to  be  the  colour  of  the  Buddha: 
j.  Satthu-vanna.  At  A  1.253  't  's  represented  as  the 
material  for  the  suvaijnakara  (the  "  white  "-smith  as 
opp.  to  "  black  "-smith).  —  Comb"'  w.  hirahha  Pv 
II. 7*  ;  very  freq.  w.  rajata  (silver),  in  the  prohibition 
of  accepting  gold  &  silver  (D  i.5)/w  as  well  as  in  other 
connections,  e.  g.  Vin  1.245;  11.294  sq.  ;  S  1.71,  95; 
iv.326  (the  moral  dangers  of  "  money  "  :  yassa  jata- 
rQpa-rajatar)  kappati  panca  pi  tassa  kamaguna  kap- 
panti)  ;  v. 353,  407;  Dhs  617.  —  Other  passages  illustr. 
the  use  &  valuation  of  j.  are  S  11.234  ("paripura)  ;  v. 92 
(upakkilesa) ;  A  1.2 10  (id.);  in. 16  (id.);  —  S  1.93,  117; 
M  1.38  ;  A  1. 215  ;  in. 38  ;  iv.199,  281  ;  v. 290  ;  J  11.296  ; 
IV. 102  ;  -veda  [cp.  Vedic  jataveda=  Agni]  ftre  S  1.168; 
Sn  462  (kattha  jayati  j.)  Ud  93;  J  1.2 14;  11.326  = 
IV. 471  ;  v.326 ;  VI. 204,  578;  Vism  171;  DA  1.226; 
DhA  1.44  (nirindhana,  without  fuel);  -ssara  a  natural 
pond  or  lake  Vin  i.iii  ;  J  1.470;  11.57. 

Jataka^  (nt.)  [jata-l-ka,  belonging  to,  connected  with 
what  has  happened]  i.  a  birth  story  as  found  in  the 
earlier  books.  This  is  always  the  story  of  a  previous 
birth  of  the  Buddha  as  a  wise  man  of  old.  In  this  sense 
it  occurs  as  the  name  of  one  of  the  9  categories  or 
varieties  of  literary  composition  (M  1.133  .'  A.  11. 7,  103, 
/o8 ;  Vin  111.8  ;  Pug  43.  See  navanga). — 2.  the  story 
of  any  previous  birth  of  the  Buddha,  esp.  as  an  animal. 
In  this  sense  the  word  is  not  found  in  the  4  Nikayjis, 
but  it  occurs  on  the  Bharhut  Tope  (say,  end  of 
3rd  cent.  B.C.),  and  is  frequent  in  the  Jataka  book.  — 
3.  the  name  of  a  book  in  the  Pali  canon,  containing  the 
verses  of  547  such  stories.  The  text  of  this  book  has 
not  yet  been  edited.  See  Rh.  Davids'  Buddhist  India, 
189-209,  and  Buddh.  Birth  Stories,  introd  ,  for  history 
of  the  Jataka  literature. — jatakai)  nitthapeti  to  wind 
up  a  Jataka  tale  J  vi.363  ;  jatakag  samodhaneti  to 
apply  a  Jataka  to  the  incident  J  1.106;  DhA  1.S2. — 
Note.  The  form  jata  in  the  sense  of  jataka  occurs  at 
DhA  1.34. 

-atthavannana  the  commentary  on  the  Jataka 
book,  ed.  by  V.  FausboU,  6  vols,  with  Index  vol.  by 
D.  Andersen,  London,  1877  sq.  ;  -bhanaka  a  repeater  of 
the  J.  book  Miln  341. 

Jataka^  (m.)  [jata-f-ka,  belonging  to  what  has  been 
born]  a  son  J  1.239;  iv.138. 

Jatatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  jata]  the  fact  of  being  born  or  of 
having  grown  or  arisen  Vism  250  ;  DhA  1.241. 

Jati  (f.)  [see  janati  &  cp.  Gr.  yevea,  yivtaii: :  Lat.  gens; 
Goth,  kind-ins].  —  Instr.  jatiya  (Sn  423)  &  jacca 
(D  n.8  ;  J  111.395  :  Dh  393)  ;  abl.  jatiya  (S  1.88)  &  jatito 
(by  descent:  D  11.8);  loc.  jatiyag  (PvA  10)  &  jatiya 
(PvA  78).  —  I.  birth,  rebirth,  possibility  of  rebirth, 
"  future  life  "  as  disposition  to  be  born  again,  "  former 
life  "  as  cause  of  this  life.  Defined  (cp.  the  corresp. 
expl"  of  jara)  as :  ya  tesag  tesai)  sattanar)  tamhi 
tamhi  satta-nikaye  jati  saiijati  okkanti  abhinibbatti 
khandhanag  patubhavo  ayatananar)  patilabho  D  11.305 
=  S  ii.3  =  Nd'  257.  —  Jati  is  a  condition  precedent  of 
age,  sickness  &  death,  and  is  fraught  with  sorrow,  pain 
&  disappointment.  It  is  itself  the  final  outcome  of  a 
kamma,  resting  on  avijja,  performed  in  anterior  births  ; 
&  forms  thus  the  concluding  link  in  the  chain  of  the 


Paficca-samuppada.  Under  the  first  aspect  it  is 
enum'^  in  various  formulae,  either  in  full  or  abbreviated 
(see  Nd^  258),  viz.  (a)  as  (i)  jati,  (2)  jara,  (3)  vyadhi, 
(4)  marana.  (5)  sokaparidevadukkhadomanass'  upa- 
yasa  in  the  dukkhai)  ariyasaccag  (the  noble  truth  of 
what  is  misfortune)  Vin  i.io  ;  A  i.i  76  ;  in. 416  ;  "dhamma 
destined  to  be  born,  etc.  M  1.161  sq.,  173;  —  A  v. 216; 
Nd^  258.  304,  630,  etc.,  in  var.  connections  (referring 
to  some  dukkha).  —  (b)  as  Nos.  1-4:  Nd^  254,  494b; 
J  1. 168,  etc.  —  (c)  as  Nos.  i,  2,  4  (the  standard  quota- 
tion, implying  the  whole  series  1-5) :  S  v. 224  ;  A  v.  144  ; 
jatipaccaya  jaramaranai)  Vin  i.i  ;  D  11. 31,  57,  etc.; 
°ika  A  ii.i  I,  173  ;  "lya  M  1.280  ;  Nd^  40.  —  (d)  to  this 
i.s  sometimes  added  (as  summing  upj  sagsara :  Nd' 
282'  ;  cp.  kicchat)  loko  apanno  jayati  ca  jiyati  ca  miyati 
ca  cavati  ca  uppajjati  ca  D  11. 30.  —  (e)  as  Nos.  i  +  4  : 
pahlna-jatimarana  (adj.)  (=free  from  life  &  death, 
i.  e.  sar)sara)  A  1.162  ;  °bhayassa  paraga  A  11.15; 
"kovida  Sn  484 ;  atari  °i)  asesar)  Sn  355  (cp.  5C0)  ; 
°assa  paraga  Sn  32.  —  (f)  =  e-)- sarjsara  (cp.  d) :  satta 
gacchauti  sar)sarai)  jatimaranagamino  A  11.12  =  52  ; 
jatimaranasagsarai)  ye  vajanti  punappunag  .  .  . 
avijjay'  eva  sa  gati  Sn  729.  —  (g)  as  Nos.  1  -f-  2,  which 
implies  the  whole  series:  atari  so  jatijarai)  A  1.133  = 
Sn  1048;  jatijar'  upaga  Sn  725=  It  106;  sagyojanag 
jatijaraya  chetva  It  42  ;  —  Sn  1052,  1060  ;  Dh  23S,  348  ; 
cp.  jati  adina  nihina  PvA  198.  —  Other  phrases  i£ 
applications :  Various  rebirths  are  seen  by  one  who  has 
perfect  insight  into  all  happening  &  remembers  his 
former  existences  (D  1.81  ;  111.50  ;  A  1.164;  M  11.20). 
Arahantship  implies  the  impossibility  of  a  future 
rebirth  :  see  formula  khiija  jati  (M  1.139 ;  Sn  p.  16,  etc.) 
and  arahant  11.  A :  jatiya  parimuccati  S  1.88 ;  jatig 
bhabbo  pahatug  A  v. 144  sq.  —  antima  jati  the  last 
rebirth  D  11. 15  (cp.  carima)  ;  purima  j.  a  former  exist- 
ence PvA  i;  atitajatiyag  in  a  former  life  (  =  pure) 
PvA  10.  On  jati  as  dukkha  see  Vism  498-501. — 
2.  descent,  race,  rank,  genealogy  (cp.  <pvii,  genus),  often 
comb''  w.  gotta.  Two  grades  of  descent  are  enum*" 
at  Vin  IV. 6  as  hina  jati  (low  birth),  consisting  of 
Candala,  Vena,  Nesada,  Rathakara  &  Pukkusa ;  and 
ukkattha  j.  (superior  birth),  comprising  Khattiyas  & 
Brahmanas.  —  The  var.  meanings  of  jati  are  given 
by  Bdhgh  at  Vism  498,  499  in  the  foil,  classification 
(with  examples)  bhava,  nikaya,  sankhata-lakkhana, 
patisandhi,  pasuti,  kula,  ariya-sila.  —  Kig  hi  jati 
karissati  ?  What  difference  makes  his  parentage  ? 
D  1. 121;  jati-rajano  kings  of  birth,  genuine  kings 
J  1.338 ;  na  nag  jati  nivaresi  brahmalok'  upapattiya 
Sn  139 ;  jatig  akkhahi  tell  me  the  rank  of  his  father  & 
mother  Sn  421,  1004;  cp.  462;  na  jacca  vasalo  hoti 
Sn  136  ;  T42  ;  id.  w.  brahmano  Sn  650  ;  with  nama  & 
gotta  in  the  description  of  a  man  jatiya  namena  gottena, 
etc.  Vin  iv.6 ;  jatito  namato  gottato  by  descent,  per- 
sonal &  family  name  D  11. 8;  cp.  jati-gotta-kula  J  11.3. 
See  also  j.-vada.  —  3.  a  sort  of,  kind  of  (cp.  jata  3): 
catujatigandha  four  kinds  of  scent  J  1.265;  11291. — 
4.  (jati°)  by  (mere)  birth  or  nature,  natural  (opp. 
artificial)  ;  or  genuine,  pure,  excellent  (opp.  adulterated. 
inferior),  cp.  jata  i  (b) :  in  cpds.,  like  "maiji,  "vipa,  etc. 
-kkhaya  the  destruction  of  the  chance  of  being  reborn 
S  V.168  ;  A  1. 167  ;  Sn  209,  517,  743  ;  Dh  423.  -khetta 
the  realm  of  rebirth  PvA  138  (=dasa  cakkavalasa- 
hassani)  ;  -thaddha  conceited,  proud  of  birth  Sn  104 
(-1- dhanatthaddha.  gotta":  proud  of  wealth  &  name); 
-thera  aTh.  by  rank  D  in. 2 18  ;  -nirodha  the  extermina- 
tion of  (the  cause  of)  rebirth  Vin  i.i=i  ;  -pabhava  the 
origin  or  root  of  existence  Sn  728  ;  -puppha  nutmeg 
J  VI. 367  ;  -bhaya  the  fear  of  rebirth  A  11. 121  ;  -bhumi 
natural  ground,  in  "bhumaka,  "bhumika,  ^'bhiimiya 
living  on  nat.  gr.  (vassag  vasati)  M  1.145;  A  in. 366  ; 
-mani  a  genuine  precious  stone  J  11.417;  -maya  con- 
stituting birth,  being  like  birth  ThA  285;  -vada  repu- 
tation of  birth,  character  of  descent,  parentage.  The 
I  St  of  the  5  characteristics  constituting  a  "  well-bred  " 


Jatika 


"5 


JSnati 


brahmin :  yiva  sattam^  pitAmahclyugJl  akkhitto  anu- 
pakkuttho  jativadena  "  of  unblemished  parentage  back 
to  the  7th  generation"  D  1.120,  etc.  (=DA  1.281); 
A  1. 166;  III. 152,  223;  Sn  315,  596.  Cp.  gotta-vada 
(e.  g.  D  1.99) ;  -vibbanga  a  characteristic  of  birth,  a 
distinction  in  descent  Sn  600  ;  -yina  a  first-class  lute 
J  11.249 ;  -sampanna  endowed  with  (pure)  birth  (in 
phrase  khattiyo  muddhS-vasitto  j.")  A  in. 152  ;  -sam- 
bhava  the  origin  of  birth  A  1.T42  ;  in. 311  ;  J  1.168; 
-sambheda  difference  of  rank  DhA  1.166;  -sat)sara  the 
cycle  of  transmigration,  the  saqsara  of  rebirths  (see 
above  I  d.  f.) :  pahina  left  behind,  overcome  (by  an 
Arahant)  M  1.139;  A  111.84,  ^6 ;  °i)  khepetva  id.  Th  2, 
168  ;  vitinno  j."  n'  atthi  tassa  punabbhavo  Sn  746  ; 
-sindhava  a  well-bred  horse  J  11.97  '■  -ssara  the  remem- 
brance of  (former)  births  ("nana)  J  1.167;  iv.29 ; 
DhA  11.27;  IV.51  ;  cp.  cutupapata-fiaaa) ;  -hingulaka 
(&  hingulika)  natural  vermilion  J  v.67 ;  VvA  4,  168, 
324- 

ntika  (-°)  (adj.)  I.  being  like,  being  of,  having,  etc.  (see 
jata  3) :  duppanna"  &  sappai)i)a°  M  1.225 ;  dabba" 
A  1.254;  mukhara"  Sn  275;  viflflu"  Sn  294;  mana" 
J  1.88. — 2.  descended  from,  being  of  rank,  belonging 
to  the  class  of:  man^ana"  M  11.19;  avihethaka"  Miln 
219;  samana°  (of  equal  rank)  DhA  1.390;  vepa"  (be- 
longing to  the  bamboo-workers)  PvA  175. 

Jatimant  (adj.)  [jati-t-  mant]  of  good  birth,  having  natural 
or  genuine  qualities,  noble,  excellent  Sn  420  (van^ia- 
rohena  sampanno  jatima  viya  khattiyo) ;  J  1.342 
(jatimanta-kulaputta).  Of  a  precious  stone :  mani 
veluriyo  subho  j."  D  i.76=M  11. 17;  DA  1.221;  Miln 
215.  Sometimes  in  this  spelling  for  jutimant  Sn  1 136= 
Nd^  259  (expl''  by  pandita  pafmava).  —  ajatima  not 
of  good  birth  J  vi.356  (opp.  sujatimant  ibid.). 

JatD  (indecl.)  [Vedic  jatu,  particle  of  affirmation.  Perhaps 
for  janatu  one  would  know,  cp.  Gr.  olfint,  Lat.  credo. 
P.  marine.  But  BR.  ahd  Fausbbll  make  it  a  contraction 
of  jayatu  "  it  might  happen."  Neither  of  these  deri- 
vations is  satisfactory]  surely,  undoubtedly  (ekagsa- 
vacanar)  SnA  348)  usually  in  negative  {&  interrog.) 
sentences  as  na  jatu,  not  at  all.  never  (cp.  also  sadhu) ; 
ma  jatu  Vin  11.203  ;  Sn  152,  348  (no  ce  hi  jatu) ;  J  1.293. 
374;  IV. 261  ;  v. 503.  Na  jatucca  at  J  vi.60  is  appar- 
ently for  na  jatu  ca. 

Jana  (adj.)  [to  jna,  see  janati]  knowing  or  knowable, 
understandable  J  111.24  (=  j2inamana).  dujjana  diffi- 
cult to  understand  D  1.170,  187;  M  1.487;  11.43.  su° 
recognizable,  intelligible  Pv  iv.i-"  (=suviniieyya  PvA 
230).     Cp.  ajana. 

finana  (nt.)  [fr.  jfia]  knowledge,  cognizance,  recognition  ; 
intelligence,  learning,  skill  J  1.145  (attanar)  -°kalato 
patthaya  from  the  time  of  self-recognition),  200 
(-°manta  knowledge  of  a  spell,  a  spell  known  by : 
tumhakar))  11.221;  SnA  330;  DhA  11.73  (°sabhava= 
flatta);  DA  1.86  (akkhara°) ;  Vism  391  ("atthaya  in 
order  to  know),  436  (=pajanana).  Cp.  ajanana. — 
ajanana  not  knowing  (°-)  J  v. 199;  vi.177;  not  known 
J  1-32  (°sippa). 

Jinanaka  (adj.)  [Sk.  *jnanaka,  cp.  janana  &  Sk.  janaka 
(c.  gen.)  expert  Av  S  n.119,  120,  as  n.  ib.  1.216]  knowing 
DhsA  394. 

Jinanata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  janana]  the  fact  of  knowing, 
knowledge  KhA  144. 

Jinapada  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  janapada]  belonging  to  the  country, 
living  in  the  c.  ;  pi.  country-folk  (opp.  negama  towns- 
folk) D  1.136,  142;  M  11.74;  J  II-287,  388;  DA  1.297 
(=  janapada-vasin). 

linati  [Vedic  jfia,  janati  'gene  &  *gne,  cp.  Gr.  yiyvuaicio, 
yvioTof,    yvHaic ;     Lat.     nosco,    notus,    (i)gnanis     (cp. 


E.    i-gnorant) ;    Goth,    kunnan ;    Ohg.    kennan,    Ags. 
cn&wan=E.  know]  to  know. 

I.  Forms  :  The  2  Vedic  roots  jan"  &  jfla°  are  repre- 
sented in  P.  by  jan°  &  Ra.°  (i^a°)  i.  jin:  pres.  janati; 
pot.  jSneyya  (Sn  781)  &  jaiiiia  (A  iv.366  ;  Sn  116,  775  ; 
Dh  157,  352  ;  J  11.346  ;  iv.478)  2nd  sg.  janeyyasi  (M. 
1.487;  J  1.288),  ist  pi.  janiyama  (Sn  873)  &  (archaic) 
janemu  (Sn  76,  599  ;  Vv  83") ;  —  imper.  janahi  (Sn  596, 
1026  ;  Pv  II. 9''),  3rd.  sg.  janatn  (It  28) ;  —  ppr.  jananto 
&  janai)  (D  1. 192  ;  A  1.128  ;  Sn  722),  ppr.  med.  janamana 
(J  1.168);  —  fut.  janissati  (J  n.342  ;  vi.364) ;  —  aor. 
ajani  (Sn  536)  &  jani  (J  1.125,  269),  3rd  pi.  janiQsu 
(J  11.105;  VvA  113);  —  ger.  janitva  (J  1293;  111.276); 
inf.  janitui)  (J  1.125).  Caus.  janapeti  (see  below  1V.2). 
—  2.  2a:  fut.  Aassati  (D  1.165) ;  —  aor.  aftiiasi  (J  1.271) 
&  flasi  (Sn  471).  3rd  pi.  afiiiarisu  (Vv  22*).  —  ger.  flatva 
(freq.);  —  grd.  fleyya  A  11. 135  (see  below)  &  flatabba 
(PvA  133);  —  inf.  iiatui)  (freq.)  —  pp.  aata  (q.  v.). — 
Pass,  fiayati  to  be  called  or  named  (Miln  25). 

II.  Cognate  Forms  :  Nd'  s.  v.  explains  janati  by  passati 
dakkhati  adhigacchati  vindati  patilabhati,  &  fiatva 
(No.  267)  by  janitva  tulayitva  tirayitva  vibhavayitva 
vibhutai)  katva  (very  freq.)  The  ist  expl"  is  also 
applied  to  abhijanati,  &  the  2nd  to  passitva,  viditag 
katva,  abhifiiiaya  &  disva.  The  use  of  the  emphatic 
phrase  janati  passati  is  very  frequent.  Yai)  tvar)  na 
janasi  na  passasi  tar)  tvar)  icchasi  kamesi  .'  Whom 
you  know  not  neither  have  seen,  is  it  she  that  you  love 
and  long  for  ?  D  1.193;  Bhagava  janar)  janati  passag 
passati  cakkhubhuto  i^aijabhuto  M  i.iii;  similarly 
A  IV. 153  sq.  See  further  D  1.2,  40,  84,  157  sq  ,  165, 
192  sq.,  238  sq.  ;  A  1.128;  111.338;  v.226 ;  Sn  9^8; 
Nd*  35,  413,  517;  Vism  200. 

III.  Meaning:  (1)  Intrs.  to  know,  to  have  or  gain 
knowledge,  to  be  experienced,  to  be  aware,  to  find  out : 
mayam  pi  kho  na  janama  surely,  even  we  do  not  know 
D  1.216 ;  te  kho  evar)  janeyyarj  they  ought  to  know  ib.  ; 
jananta  nama  n'  Shcsui)  "nobody  knew"  J  111.1^8; 
janahi  find  out  J  1.18.;  ;  kalantarena  janissatha  you  will 
see  in  time  PvA  13  ;  ajananto  unawares,  unsuspecting 
1.223;  ajanamana  id.  Pv  11. 3'*.  —  2.  Trs.  to  know, 
recognize,  be  familiar  with  (usually  c.  ace,  but  also  with 
gen.  :  J  1.337  ;  "■243),  to  have  knowledge  of,  experience, 
find  ;  to  infer,  conclude,  distinguish,  state,  define :  yag 
ahaq  janami  tai)  tvai)  janasi  D  1.88  ;  aham  p'  etag  na 
janami  Sn  989;  jananti  tag  yakkhabhuta  Pv  iv.i'S; 
paccakkhato  fiatva  finding  out  personally  J  1.262  ; 
111.168;  cittam  me  Gotamo  janati  S  1.178;  janati  mag 
Bhagava  S  1.116;  kathag  janemu  tag  mayag  ?  How 
shall  we  know  (or  identify)  him  ?  Vv  83"  ;  yatha  janemu 
brahmariag  so  that  we  may  know  what  a  b.  is  Sn  599  ; 
yath'  ahag  janeyyag  vasalag  Sn  p.  2 1  ;  ajananto  ignorant 
PvA  4  ;  annapanag  ajananto  (being  without  bread  & 
water)  PvA  169 ;  ittarag  ittarato  i^atva  inferring  the 
trifling  from  the  trifle  Pv  i.i  i"  ;  ingha  me  unh'  odakag 
janahi  find  me  some  hot  water  S  1.174  ;  seyyag  janahi 
Vin  IV. 16:  phalag  papassa  janamana  (having  experi- 
enced )  J  1.168;  man  tag  j .  (to  be  i"  possession  of  a  charm ) 
J  1.253;  maggag  na  j.  Sn  441;  pamanag  ajanitva 
(knowing  no  measure)  PvA  130.  —  3.  With  double 
ace.  :  to  recognize  as.  to  see  in,  take  for,  identify  as,  etc. 
(cp.  Caus.) ;  petag  mag  janahi  "  see  in  me  a  Peta  " 
Pv  11.9I2  (=upadh5rehi  PvA  119);  bhadd'  itthiya  ti 
mag    ai^ilagsu    (they    knew    me    as  =  they    called    me) 

Vv  22*. 

IV.  Various:  1.  Grd.  fieyya  as  nt.  =  knowledge  (cp. 
aaoa) :  yavatakag  iie>'>'ag  tavatakag  fiapag  (knowledge 
coincides  with  the  knowable,  or :  his  knowledge  is  in 
proportion  to  the  k.,  i.  e.  he  knows  all)  Nd'  235^'"; 
iianag  atikkamitva  i^eyyapatho  n'  atthi  "  beyond 
knowledge  there  is  no  way  of  knowledge  "  ib.  ;  jiejrya- 
sagara  the  ocean  of  knowledge  PvA  1.  —  2.  Caus. 
janapeti  to  make  known,  to  inform,  or  (with  attanag) 
to  identify,  to  reveal  oneself  J  1. 107  (att.  ajanapctva) ; 
VI. 363  ;  Vism  92  (att.) ;  PvA  149  (att.) ;  DhA  11.62. 


J&ni 


ii6 


Jinna 


7klli'  (^)  [from  jahati,  confused  in  meaning  with  jayati. 
Se«;  jahati  &  cp.  janti]  deprivation,  loss,  confiscation  of 
•property ;  plundering  robbery ;  using  force,  ill-treat- 
ment D  1. 1 35  — A  I.201  (vadhena  va  bandbena  va 
janiya  va) ;  S  1.66  (hatajanisu) ;  J  1.55  (v.  1.  jati),  212 
(mahajanikara  a  great  robber) ;  iv.72  (dhana,°  v.  1. 
hani) ;  Dh  138  (  =  DhA  111.70  dhanassa  jani,  v.  1.  hani). 

StuaP  (f.)  wife,  in  janipatayo  (pi.)  wife  &  husband  (cp. 
jaya(m)pati)  A  11. 59  sq. 

Jano  (nt  )  [Vedic  janu  =  Gr.  yoi/v,  Lat.  genu,  Goth.,  Ohg., 
etc.  kniu,  E.  knee]  (also  as  jannu(ka),  q.v.)  the  knee 
J  n.311^  IV. 41  :  VI. 471  ;  DA  1.254. 

-mandala    the    knee-cap.    the    knee    A    1.67;  11. 21  ; 
III. 241  sq.  ;  PvA  179. 

JonnkS  (nt.)  =  janu  A  iv.102. 

Japajrati  Caus.  of  jayati. 

Jamatat  (&  jamata  J  IV.219J  [Vedic  jamatar.  Deriv.  un- 
certain. BR.  take  it  as  ja-)-  matar,  the  builder  up  of  the 
family,  supposing  the  case  where  there  is  no  son  and 
the  husband  goes  to  live  in  the  wife's  family,  a  bina 
marriage.  More  likely  fr.  Idg  ♦gem,  to  marry.  Cp.  Or. 
yaiiiu ;  yaitiipiJi,  Lat.  gener]  daughter's  husband,  son-in- 
law  Th  2,  422  (  =  ThA  269  duhitu  pati) ;  J  11.63  ;  v. 442. 

Jftyati  (jayate)  [from  jaa,  see  janati]  to  be  bom,  to  be 
producwl,  to  arise,  to  be  reborn.  Pres.  3rd  pi.  jayare 
J  III. 459 ;  IV. 53  ;  Miln  337 ;  ppr,  jayanto  Sn  208  ;  aor. 
jayi  J  III. 391  :  inf.  jatum  J  1.374.  —  jayati  (loko), 
jiyati,  miyati  one  is  bom,  gets  old,  dies  I>.  11.30  ;  Vism 
235.  Kattha  jayati  jatavedo  out  of  fire-wood  is,  born 
the  fire  Sn  462.  —  Vin  11.95  =  305;  Sn  114,  296,  657; 
Dh  58,  193,  212,  282;  Pv  iii.i'*  (are  reborn  as).  Cp. 
vi°. 

J&yampatiki  (pl.^  [see  jayampatika  (!$:  cp.  jayapatl]  wife 
&  husband  V<iA  286. 

J4yS  (f.)  [from  jan]  wife  Vin  11.259=204  ;  J  iv.285. 
-pati  (pi.)  husband  &  wife  PvA  159:  Oavs  v. 2. 

Jayika  f.  (cp.  jaya)  v/ite  M  1. 451. 

Jara  [Vedic  j3ra]  a  paiamour,  adulterer  J  1.293  ',  11.309. 
f.  °t  adulteress  Vin  11.259,  268;  111.83 

Jala'  (nt.)  [Vedic  jala.  prob.  from  jat  to  plait,  make  a 
tangle  cp.  jatita  &  jafa  ;  on  1 :  t  cp.  phulla  :  sphuta ; 
c*ru :  cifu  ;  cela :  ceta]  a  net ,  netting,  entanglement 
(lit.  or  fig.):  snare,  deception  (=maya).  —  A  Lit. 
Nd*  260  (  =  suttajala,  a  plaiting  of  threads) ;  SnA  115, 
263  (=suttamaya)  D  1.45  (anto-jalikata  caught  in  a 
net);  Sn  62,  71,  213,  669;  J  1.52;  vi.139.  —  kinkinika" 
a  row  of  bells  D  11.183  ;  mutta°  a  net  of  pearls  J  1.9 ; 
VvA  40  ;  loha°  PvA  153 ;  hema'^  Vv  35 ;  a  fowler's  net 
Dh  174  ;  a  spider's  web  Dh  347  ;  nets  for  hair  J  vi.i88  ; 
pabbata°  a  chain  of  mountains  J  11.399:  sira°  network 
of  veins  J  v.69  ;  PvA  68.  —  Freq.  in  similes  ;  see  J.P.T.S. 
1907,  90.  —  B.  Fig.  Very  often  appl'  to  the  snares  of 
Mara:  S  1.48  (raaccuno) ;  Sn  357  (id.);  DhA  111. 175 
(M5ra°);  Sn  527  (deception);  tanha°  the  snare  of 
worldly  thirst  (cp.  "tanha)  M  1.271  ;  Th  i,  306  ;  SnA  351  ; 
kama°  Th  i,  355 ;  moha°  S  111.83  :  mohasama  Dh  251  ; 
ditthi"  the  fallacies  of  heresy  D  1.46;  J  vi.220  ;  iiana° 
the  net  of  knowledge  VvA  63  ;  DhA  111. 171.  bhumma° 
(vijja)  "earthly  net,"  i.e.  gift  of  clearsight  extending 
over  the  earth  SnA  353. 

-akkhi  a  mesh  of  a  net  J  1.208  :  -tanha  the  net  of 
thirst  Dhs  1059,  11 36;  DhsA  307;  -pupa  a  "net- 
cake"?  DhA  1. 319;  -hatthapada  (adj.)  having  net-like 
hands  &  feet  (one  of  the  32  marks  of  a  Mahapurisa) 
prob.  with  reference  to  long  nails  D  11. 17  (see  Dial. 
II. 1 4,  note  3),  cp  jaiitambanakhehi  Vv  81"  (expl''  at 
VvA  315  :  jalavantehi  abhilohita  nakkehi.  Tena  jali 
(v.  1.  jala-)  hatthatai)  mahapurisa-lakkhanar)  tambana- 
khatarj  anuvyartjanaa  ca  dasseti). 


Jala'  [Sk.  jvala,  from  jalati]  glow,  blaze  J  v. 326 ;  PvA  52 
(=tejas),  154  (rar)si°) ;  Miln  357;  Vism  419  (kappa- 
vinasaka"). 

-roruva  N.  of  one  of  the  two  Roruva  hells  ("  blazes  ") 
J  v. 27 1  ;  -sikha  a  glowing  crest  i.  e.  a  flame  Nd'  11 
(=acci). 

Jalaka  (nt.)  [jala'-l-ka]  i.  a  net  J  VI.53O;  Davs  v. 51. — 
2.  a  bud  A  IV.117  sq.  ('jSta  in  bud).  —  f.  jalika  chain 
armour  Miln  199. 

Jala  (f.)  [see  jala']  a  flame  J  1.2  16,  322  ;  Miln  148.  357. 

Jalin  (adj.-n.)  "  having  a  net,"  ensnaring,  deceptive : 
(a)  lit.  a  fisherman  J  11.17S.  —  (b)  fig.  usually  in  f. 
°ini  of  t.inha  (ensnarer,  witch)  S  l.i07  =  Dh  iSo  ;  A  11.21 1  ; 
Th  I,  162,  908;  Dhs  1059:  Vism  i;  DhsA  363;  cp. 
M  Vastu  1. 166  ;  iii  92. 

Jaleti  [caus.  of  jalati.  See  also  jaleti]  to  cause  to  burn, 
to  light,  kindle  J  11.104;  iv.290  ;  v. 32. 

-Ji  (adj. -suffix)  [From  jayati  to  conquer]  winning,  vic- 
torious :  sangama^  victorious  in  fight,  in  sangamaj' 
uttama  "  greatest  of  conquerors "  Dh  103 ;  sabba° 
S  iv.83. 

Jigaccha  (f)  see  jighacca. 

Jigigsaka  (adj.)  [see  next]  one  who  wishes  to  gain,  desirous 
of.  pursuing  Sn  690. 

Jigiijsati  [Desid.  of  ji,  jayati.  On  etym.  see  also  Kern. 
Toev.  p.  44]  to  desire,  to  wish  to  acquire,  to  covet ; 
Sn  710;  J  11.285;  III. 172  (v.  1.  BB.  jigissar)) ;  iv.400 
(v.  1.  SS.  jihiq".  BB.  jigi°) ;  v. 372  ;  vi.208.  As  jigisati 
Th  I,  II  K). 

Jigigsanata  (f)  [n.  abstr.  fr.  jigigsati]  desire  for,  covetous- 
ness  Vbh  353  (v.  1.  BB.  nijigisanata) ;  cp.  Vism.  29 

Jigncchaka    (adj.)    one   who   dislikes   or   disapproves    of 

M  1.327  (pathavi",  apa°  etc.)  Miln  343. 

Jigucchati  [Desid.  of  gup]  to  shun,  avoid,  loathe,  detest. 
to  be  disgusted  with  or  horrified  at  (c.  instr.)  D  1. 213 
(iddhi-patihariytna  attiyami  harayami  j.):  A  iv.174 
(kayaduccaritena) ;  Sn  215  (kammehi  papakehi  ;  SnA 
266=hiriyati)  ;  J  11.287:  Pug.  36.  —  ppr.  jiguccha- 
mana  It  43  ;  grd.  jigucchitabba  A  1.126;  pp.  jigucchita 
Sn  9<5i.  —  See  also  jegiiccha.  jegucchin. 

Jigncchana  (nt.)  dislike,  contempt,  disgust  Vism  159: 
PvA  120. 

Jigaccha  (f.)  disgust  for,  detestation,  avoidance,  shunning  : 
tapo°  (detesting  asceticism)  D  1.174;  S  1.67;  A  11.210; 
jigucchabibhaccha-dassana  detestable  &  fearful-looking 
PvA  56.  Note.  A  diff.  spelling,  diguccha,  occurs  at 
DhsA  210. 

Jighacchati  [Desid.  to  gliasati.  cat]  to  have  a  desire  to  eat. 
to  be  hungry  D  11.266;  pp.  jighacchita  DhA  11. 145. 

Jighaccha  (f  )  [from  jighacchati]  appetite,  hunger,  often 
comb'^  with  pipasa,  desire  to  drink,  thirst,  e.  g.  S  1.18  ; 
A  11.143,  153;  Miln  304.  —  M  1. 13.  114;  364;  III. 1369 
A  III. 163  ;  Dh  203  (j.  parama  roga) ;  J  11445;  111.19; 
(°abhibhuta=chata)  ;  Miln  204.  304;  Sdhp  118,  388. 
Cp.  khuda  &  chata.  Note.  A  diff.  spelling  as  dighaccha 
occurs  at  A  11. 1 17. 

Jinjaka  the  Cunja  shrub  (Abrus  precatorius)  J  iv.333 
(akkhini  j.  "phalasadisani,  cp.  in  same  application 
gufija) ;  V.156  (j.  "phalasannibha) ;  DhA  1.177  (°gumba). 

JiW&  [PP-  of  jarati]  i.  decayed,  broken  up.  frail,  decrepit, 
old :  vuddha  mahallaka  andhagata  vayo-anupatta 
Nd'  261  ;  jarajinnataya  jinna  DA  1283.  —  Vin  11. 189; 
D  1.114;  M  11.48  sq.,  66;  A  11.249;  iv.173;  Sn  I  (urago 


Jinnaka 


"7 


Jivag-jivaka 


va  jioQai)  tacai)  jahati) ;  Pv  1.12'  (same  simile) ;  Sn  1 120, 
1144;  J  1.58;  111.22  {-pilotika  worn-out  rags);  Dh  15s. 
260  ;  Pv  U.I  I*  (jarajiijjja  PvA  147) ;  Pug  33  :  Vism  1 19 
(°vihara),  356  ("sandamanika),  357  ("kottha) ;  ThA  213 
(-ghara  a  tumble-down  house);  PvA  ^o  {-goija=  jarag- 
gava),  55  (of  a  roof).  Cp.  °tara  J  iv.108.  —  2.  digested 
J  11.362 

JqiQaka  (adj.)  =jiooa  Sn  98,  124;  J  iv.178,  366;  Sdhp 
299  (sala). 

JiWata  (f.)  [cp.  ji^oa,  jarata  &  jiraoata]  decrepitude 
DA  1.283  (jara"). 

Jita  [pp.  of  jayati,  conquer]  conquered,  subdued,  mastered  : 
(nt.)  victory,  jita  me  pSpaka  dhamma  Vin  1.8  ;  — - 
Dh  40,  104  (atta  jitai)  seyyo  for  atta  jito  seyyo  see 
DhA  11.228),  105,  179;  Vv  64"  (jitindriya  one  whose 
senses  are  mastered,  cp.  gattindriya).  —  Co.  vi°. 

Jitatta  (nt.)  [n.  abstr.  of  jita]   mastery,  conquest    VvA 

284. 

Jina  [pp.  med.  of  jayati]  conquering,  victorious,  often  of 
the  Buddha,  "  Victor "  :  jiti  me  papaka  dhamma 
tasmahar)  Upaka  jino  ti  Vin  i.8  =  M  1.171  ;  Vin  v.217; 
Sn  379,  697,  989,  996.  magga°  conqueror  of  the  Path 
Sn  84  sq.  ;  sai)suddha°  (id.)  Sn  372.  Cp  khetta".  In 
other  connections:  Pv  iv.3^' ;  Th  2,  419  (jin'  amhase 
rupinao  Lacchii)  expl**  at  ThA  268  as  jina  amhase  jina 
vat'  amha  riipavatig  Sirii)). 

-cakka  the  Buddha's  reign,  rule,  authority  J  iv.ioo  ; 
-putta  disciple  of  the  B.  Miln  177  ;  -bhiuni  the  ground 
or  footing  of  a  conqueror  PvA  254  ;  -sasana  the  doctrine 
of  the  B.  Dpvs  IV.3,  10. 

Jmati= jayati  (jeti).     See  also  vi°. 

Jimha  (adj.)  [Vedic  jihma]  crooked,  oblique,  slant,  tig. 
dishonest,  false  (cp.  vanka,  opp.  ujuj  M  1.3 1  {+  vanka) ; 
A  V.289,  290;  J  1.290  (spelled  jima) ;  iii.ii  1  =  v.222  ; 
VI.66;  Vism  219  (ajimha=  uju) ;  PvA  51  (citta°  vanka 
.  .  . ;  opp.  uju).    Cp.  kutila. 

ysmtiats  (f.)  [n.  abstr.  to  jimha]  crookedness,  deceit  (opp. 
ujuti)  Dhs  50,  51   (-(- vankata) ;  Vbh  359. 

Jimheyya  (nt.)  [from  jimha]  crookedness,  deceit,  fraud 
M  1. 340  (satheyy&ni  kufeyyani  vankeyyani  j.°) ;  A  iv.  i8g 
(id.)  V.167. 

Jiy4  (f.)  [Vedic  jy5=Gr.  /Jiof  bow.  cp.  also  Lat.  filum 
thread]  a  bow  string  M  1.429  (five  kinds) ;  J  11.88  ; 
III. 323  ;  Vism  150;  DA  1.207.  -kara  bowstring-maker 
Miln  331. 

JWU  (f.)  [Vedic  jihva,  cp.  Lat.  lingua  (older  dingua) ; 
Goth,  tuggo ;  Ohg.  zunga ;  E.  tongue]  the  tongue.  — 
(a)  physically  :  Vin  1.34  ;  A  iv.131  ;  Sn  673,  716  ;  Dh  65, 
360 ;  J  11.306 ;  PvA  99  (of  Petas :  visukkha-kantha- 
ttha  j.),  152. — Of  the  tongue  of  the  mahapurusha 
which  could  touch  his  ears  &  cover  his  forehead  :  Sn 
1022  ;  p.  108 ;  &  pcihuta-jivhata  the  characteristic  of 
possessing  a  prominent  tongue  (as  the  27th  of  the  32 
Mahapurisa-lakkhaijani)  D  i.io6=Sn  p.  107;  D  Ii.i8. 
-dujjivha  (adj.)  having  a  bad  tongue  (of  a  poisonous 
snake)  A  111.260.  —  (b)  psychologically :  the  sense  of 
taste.  It  follows  after  ghina  (smell)  as  the  4th  sense 
in  the  enum"  of  sense-organs  (jivMya  rasai)  s&yati 
Nd*  under  rupa;  jivha-viaaeyya  rasa  D  i.?45 ;  11. 281  ; 
M  n.42)  Vin  1.34  ;  D  111.102,  226 ;  M  1.191  ;  Vism  444. 

-agga  the  tip  of  the  tongue  A  in. 109;  iv.137:  DhA 
11.33.  -ayatana  the  organ  of  taste  D  in. 243,  280,  290  ; 
Dhs  585,  609,  653  ;  -indriya  the  sense  of  taste  D  in. 239  ; 
Dhs  585,  609,  972  ;  •nittaddana  (cqrr.  to  -nitthaddhana) 
tying  the  tongue  by  means  of  a  spell  D  1. 1 1  (cp.  DA  1.96) ; 
-TifUUqa  the  cognition  of  taste  M  1.113;   D  in. 243 ; 


Dhs  556,  612,  632  ;  -samphassa  contact  with  the  sense 
of  taste  S  1. 115  ;  D  in. 243  ;  Dhs  585,  032,  787. 

Jina  [pp.  of  jiyati]  diminished,  wasted,  deprived  of  (-.vith 
ace.  or  abl.)  having  lost :  with  ace.  :  J  in.  153,  223,  335  ; 
v.9q  (atthar) :  robbed  of  their  possessions ;  Com. 
parihina  vinattha). — with  abl..  J  v.401  (read  jina 
dhana). 

Jiyati  [Pass,  of  ji,  cp.  Sk.  jyati  &  jiryate]  to  become 
diminished,  to  be  deprived,  to  lose  (cp.  jayati,  jani) ; 
to  decay  ;  to  become  old  (cp.  jarati,  jiijna)  jiyasi  J  v.  100  ; 
jiyanti  J  in. 336  (dhana) ;  jiyittha  S  1.54 ;  J  1.468 ;  m4 
jiyi  do  not  be  deprived  of  (ratig)  J  iv.107.  Koci  kvaci 
na  jiyati  miyati  (cp.  jayati)  D  11.30  ;  cakkhuni  jiyare 
the  eyes  will  become  powerless  J  vi.528  (=  jlyissanti) ; 
grd.  jeyya :  sefe  ajeyya^.  Cp.  parijiyati.  Sometimes 
spelt  jiyy° :  jiyyati  J  vi.150  ;  jiyyama  J  11.75  (we  lose= 
parihayama).     Pp.  jina,  q.  v. 

Jbaka'  [Vedic  jira,  lively,  alert,  cp.  jivati  &  Gr.  ^lepoc, 
Lat.  viridis]  digestion,  in  ajirakena  by  want  or  lack  of 
digestion  J  Ii.i8i.     See  ajiraka. 

nrkaa?  cummin-seed  Miln  63  ;  J  1.244  '•  "-B^S  ;  VvA  186. 

Jliapa  (nt.)  [fr.  jlr]  decaying,  getting  old  Dhtp  252. 

Jlravata  (f.)  [n.  abstr.  of  jir=iar,  see  jarati;  cp.  jara  & 
jinnata]  the  state  of  being  decayed  or  aged,  old  age, 
decay,  decrepitude  M  1.49;  S  11.2  ;  Nd^  252  =  Dhs  644; 
PvA  149. 

Jlrati  &  Jlrayati  [Cans,  of  jarati]  i.  to  destroy,  bring  to 
ruin,  injure,  hurt  Vin  1.237  (jirati) ;  J  v. 501  (v.  1.  BB. 
for  jarayetha.  Com.  vinaseyya)  =  vi.375  ;  PvA  57. — 
2.  (cp.  jiyati)  to  get  old  A  111.54  (jara-dhammar)  ma 
jiri  "  old  age  may  not  get  old,"  or  "  the  law  of  decay 
may  not  work  ") ;  Vism  235  (where  id.  p.  D  11.30  reads 
jiyati) ;  DhA  i.il  (cakkhuni  jiranti).  —  3.  (intrs.)  to  be 
digested  Vism  loi. 

Jlreti  &  Jlrapeti  [Verbal  formation  from  jira']  to  work 
out,  to  digest  J  1.238,  274  (jireti) ;  DhA  1.171.  Appl. 
to  bhati,  wages :  bharir)  ajtrapetva  not  working  off  the 
w.  J  11.309,  381  ;  jirapeti  as  "destroy"  at  ThA  269 
in  expl°  of  nijjareti  {+  vinapeti). 

Jlva"-  (adj.-n.)  [Sk.  jiva,  Idg.  •gyuos  =  Gr.  /Sior.  Lat.  vivus, 
Goth,  quius,  Ohg.  queck,  E.  quick.  Lith.  gyvas]  i.  the 
soul.  Sabbe  jiva  all  the  souls,  enum"*  with  satta  pai;ia 
bhiita  in  the  dialect  used  by  the  followers  of  Gosala 
D  i.53(=DA  1.161  jivasafini).  "  tag  jivai)  tai)  sarirag 
ud^u  a&imij  j.  annar)  s."  (is  the  body  the  soul,  or  is 
the  body  one  thing  and  the  soul  another  ?)  see  D  1.157, 
188;  11.333,  336.  339;  S  IV.392  sq.;  M  1. 157,  426  sq. ; 
A  11.41.  —  Also  in  this  sense  at  Miln  30,  54,  86.  —  Vin 
iv.34;  S  111.215,  258  sq.  ;  IV. 286;  v.418;  Av.31,  186. 
193.  —  2.  life,  in  yayajivai)  as  long  as  life  lasts,  for 
life,  during  (his)  lifetime  D  in. 133  ;  Vin  1.201  ;  Dh  64  ; 
J  II.  1 55;  PvA  76. 

-gahai)  (adv.)  taken  alive,  in  phrase  j.°  gaijhati  or 
gaohapeti  S  1.84  ;  J  1.180  ;  11:404  ;  cp.  karamara  ;  -loka 
the  animate  creation  J  111.394  ;  -siila  "  life-pale,"  a  stake 
for  execution  J  H.443  ;  -sokin  (=Sokajivin)  leading  a  life 
of  sorrow  J  vi.509., 

Jiva'  (nt.)  the  note  of  the  jivaka  bird  Sum.  V.  ou  D  111.201. 

JIvaka  (adj. )= jiva,  in  (>Andhii^  N.  of  a  plant  VvA  43. 
—  LJika  q.  v. 

JIvag-lIvaka  (m.  onom.)  name  of  a  bird,  a  sort  of  pheasant 
(or  partridge  ?),  which  utters  a  note  sounding  like 
jivar)  jiva  D  in. 201  ;  J  v. 406,  416  ;  vi.276,  538  [Fausboll 
reads  jivajivaka  in  all  the  j&taka  passages.  Speyer 
AvS  n.227  has  jivaiijivaka].  With  this  cp.  the  Jain 
phrase  jivagjiveQa  gacchai  jivagjiveijar)  citthai,  Weber 
Bhagavati  pp.  289,  290,  with  doubtful  interpretation 


IV— 2 


Jivati 


ll8 


Jotati 


{"  living  he  goes  with  life  "? 
bird"?). 

Jivati  [Vedic  jivati,  cp.  jinoti  (jinvati) ;  Dhtp  282 :  p^oa' 
dharai:ie  •gSeiS  =  Gr.  iHo/iai  &  fiiw,  ?5»' ;  Lat.  vivo : 
Goth,  ga-quiunau  ;  Mhg.  quicken,  cp.  E.  quicken]  to  live, 
be  alive,  live  by,  subsist  on  (c.  instr.  or  nissSya).  Imper. 
pres.  jiva  Sn  427.  vciy  freq.  with  cirat)  live  long  .  .  ., 
as  a  salutation  &  thanksgiving,  cirai)  jiva  J  vi.337 ; 
c.  jivahj  Sn  1029  ;  Pv  11.3" ;  c.  jivantu  Pv  1.5'  ;  —  pot. 
jive  Sn  440,  589 ;  Dh  1 10  ;  —  ppr.  jivai)  Sn  427,  432  ;  — 
ppr.  med.  jivamana  J  1.307;  PvA  39;  —  inf.  jivitug 
J  1.263;  Dh  123.  —  Sn  84  sq.,  613  sq.,  804;  Dh  197; 
J  HI.2O  ;  IV. 1 37;  VI. 1 83  (jivare) ;  PvA  in. 

JIvana  (nt.)  living,  means  of  subsistence,  liveUhood  PvA 
161.  Spelt  jivana  (v.  1.  jivino)  (adj.)  at  J  in. 353  (ya- 
cana°). 

nvamanaka  (adj.)  [ppr.  med.  of  jivati+ka]  living,  alive 
Vism  194. 

nvika  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  jivaka]  living,  livelihood  S  111.93  ; 
A  v. 87,  aio;  J  IV. 459 ;  Miln  122;  SnA  466.  Freq.  in 
comb"  °r)  kappeti  to  find  or  get  one's  living :  J  11.209 ; 
PvA  40,  etc. ;  °kappaka  finding  one's  Uvelihood  (c.  ger. 
by)  J  11.167.     Cp.  next. 

Jlvita  (nt.)  [Vedic  jivita,  orig.  pp.  of  jivati  "  that  which  is 
lived,"  cp.  same  formation  in  Lat.  vita  =  *vi vita ;  Gr. 
^luTi)  living,  sustenace,  &  SiaiTa,  "  diet  "]  (indi- 
vidual) life,  lifetime,  span  of  life ;  living,  livelihood  (cp. 
jivika)  Vin  11. 191  ;  S  1.42  ;  iv.169,  213  ;  M  11.73  (appag) ; 
A  1. 155,  255  ;  111.72  ;  IV. 136  (appakag  parittar)) ;  Sn  181. 
440.  574.  577.  93'.  '077;  Dh  no,  in,  130;  J  1.222; 
Pv  Lii^i  (ittarai));  n.6'  (vijahati) ;  Dhs  19,  295;  Vism 
235.  236  ;  Ps  11.245  ;  PvA  40.  —  jivita  voropeti  to  deprive 
of  life,  to  kill  Vin  in. 73 ;  D  111.235  ;  M  11.99 ;  A  in. 146, 
436  ;  IV. 370  sq. ;  PvA  617. 

-asa  the  desire  for  life  A  1.86  ;  -indriya  the  faculty  of 
life,  vitality  Vin  in.73  ;  S  v.204  ;  Kvu  8,  10  ;  Miln  56  ; 
Dhs  19;  Vism  32,  230  (°upaccheda  destruction  of  life), 
447  (def.) ;  DhA  11.356  (°i)  upacchindati  to  destroy  Ufe) ; 
VvA  72  ;  -kkhaya  the  dissolution  of  life,  i.  e.  death 
J  1.222  ;  PvA  95,  in  ;  -dana  "  the  gift  of  hfe,"  saving 
or  sparing  life  J  1.167;  11. 154;  -nikanti  desire  for  Ufe 
A  iv.48  ;  -parikkhara(  pi.)  the  requisites  of  Ufe  M 1. 104  sq. ; 
A  111.120  ;  v. 211  ;  -pariyadana  the  cessation  or  consum- 
mation of  Ufe  D  1.46  (=DA  1. 128);  S  11.83;  A  iv.13; 
-pariyosana  the  end  of  life,  i.  e.  death  J  1.256 ;  PvA 
73  ;  -mada  the  pride  of  life,  enum""  under  the  3  mada ; 
viz.  arogya,  yobbana,  j. :  of  health,  youth,  Ufe  D  in. 220  ; 
A  1. 146;  in.72  ;  -riipa  (adj.)  living  (lifelike)  J  11.190; 
-sankhaya=°khaya  Sn  74  ;  Dh  331  ;  Nd'  262  (=  "pari- 
yosana) ;  -hetu  (adv.)  on  the  ground  of  life,  for  the  sake 
of  Ufe  A  IV. 20 1,  270 

JIvin  (adj.)  (usually  -°)  Uving,  leading  a  Ufe  (of  .  .  .) 
S  1.42,  61  ;  Sn  88,  i8i  ;  Dh  164;  PvA  27.  Cp.  dlgha", 
dhamma°. 

JnQha  (f.)  [Sk.  jyotsna,  see  also  P.  dosina)  moonUght,  a 
moonUt  night,  the  bright  fortnight  of  the  month  (opp. 
kalapakkha)  Vin  1.138,  176,  J  1. 165;  IV.49S  (°pakkha). 

Jnti  ({.)  [Sk.  jyuti  &  dyuti,  to  dyotate,  see  jotati]  splen- 
dour, brightness,  effulgence,  light  J  11.353  ;  PvA  122, 
137,  198.  The  spelling  juti  at  M  1.328  (in  comb" 
gati+  juti)  seems  to  be  faulty  for  cuti  (so  as  v.  1.  given 
on  p.  557). 

-dhara  (jutin")  carrying  or  showing  Ught,  shining, 
resplendent,  brilUant  S  1.121  ;  J  11.353  '•  ^^A.  1.432. 

Jatika  (adj.)  (-°)  having  Ught,  in  maha°  of  great  splendour 

D  11.272  ;  A  1.206  ;  rv.248. 

Jatimati  (f.)  [fr.  jutimant]  splendour,  brightness,  promin- 
ence J  1.4 ;  V.405 


or 


'  he  goes  like  the  j. 


Jntimant  (adj.)  [fr.  juti]  briUiant,  bright ;  usually  fig.  as 
prominent  in  wisdom :  "  bright,"  distinguished,  a  great 
light  (in  this  sense  often  as  v.  1.  to  jatimant)  D  11.256 
(i) ;  S  v.24  ;  Dh  89  (=DhA  11.163  fiansjutiya  jotetvS) ; 
Sn  508;  PV  iv.!."*  (=PvA  230  naqajutiya  jutima). 

Jntimantata  (f.)  [fr.  jutimant]  splendour  SnA  453. 

Jobati  [Sk.  juhoti,  *gheu(d) ;  cp.  Gr.  x'"^.  x^i^P".  x^^nc : 
Lat.  fundo  ;  Goth,  giutan,  Ohg.  giozan]  to  pour  (into  the 
fire),  to  sacrifice,  offer  ;  to  give,  dedicate  A  11.207  (aggirj) ; 
Sn  1046  (=Nd2  263  deti  civarar),  etc.) ;  428  (aggihuttai) 
juhato),  p.  79  (aggir)) ;  Pug  56;  fut.  juhissati  S  1.166 
(aggio).  —  pp.  huta  ;  see  also  hava,  havi,  homa. 

Jnhana  (nt.)  [fr.  juhati]  offering,  sacrifice  D  4.12,  J  11.43. 

Juta  (nt.)  [Sk.  dyuta  pp.  of  div,  divyati,  P.  dibbati  to  play 
at  dice]  gambling,  playing  at  dice  D  1.7  ("ppamadat- 
thanacp.  DA  i.85)f«;  in. 182,  186  (id.);  J  1.290  ;  111.198; 
VI. 281  ;  DhA  11.228.  °g  kilati  to  play  at  d.  J  1.289; 
in. 187.  —  See  also  duta^. 

-gita  a  verse  sung  at  playing  dice  (for  luck)  J  1.289, 
293;  -mandala  dice  board  (=phalaka  J  1.290)  J  1.293. 
-sala  gambling  haU  J  vi.281. 

Je  (part.)  exclamation  :  oh  I  ab !  now  then  I  Vin  1.232,  292 
(gaccha  je) ;  M  1.126  ;  VvA  187,  207 ;  DhA  iv.105. 

Jflgncoha  (adj.)  &  jegucchiya  (J  11.437)  [sec.  der.  fr.  jiguc- 
cha]  contemptible,  loathsome,  detestable  J  iv.305 ; 
Vism  250;  Th  i,  1056;  PvA  78,  192  (asuci-H ).  Cp. 
pari".     — a°  not  despised  Sn  852  ;  Th  i,  961. 

JeSaCOhit&  (f.)  [see  jigucchita]  avoidance,  detestation,  dis- 
gust Vin  1.234  :  M  1.30 ;  A  iv.182  sq. 

Jegncchin  (adj.)  one  who  detests  or  avoids  (usually  -°) 
M  1.77;  (parama°),  78  A  iv.174,  182  sq.,  188  sq.  ,  Miln 
352  (papa°). 

Jettha  (adj.)  [compar.-superl.  formation  of  jya  power, 
Gr.  fiia,  from  ji  in  jinati  &  jayati  "  stronger  than  others," 
used  as  superl.  (&  compar.)to  vu<Jdha  old — elder,  eldest. 
The  compar.  *jeyya  is  a  grammarian's  construction, 
see  remarks  on  kanittha]  better  (than  others),  best, 
first,  supreme  ;  first-born  ;  elder  brother  or  sister,  elder, 
eldest  D  11.15  (aggo  jettho  settho=the  first,  foremost 
&  best  of  all) ;  A  1.108  ;  11.87  ;  111.152  ;  iv.175  ;  J  1.138 
(°putta);  11.101  (°bhata),  128  (°yakkhinl);  iv.137. 

-apacayin,  in  phrase  kule-j.-apacayin  paying  due 
respect  to  th«  clan-elders  D  111.72,  74;  S  v.468 ;  Vism 
415;  DhA  1265.  Same  for  °apac4yika  (f.)  honour  to 
.  .  .  Nd^  294,  &  "apacayitar  D  111.70,  71,  145.  169. 
•masa  N.  of  a  month  SnA  359. 

Jetthaka=jettha  J  1.253;  "i"'  ("tapasa);  HI.281  ("kam 
mara:  head  of  the  silversmith's  guild);   iv.137,    161; 
V.282  ;  Pv  i.n^  (putta=  pubbaja  PvA  57);  DhA  in. 237 
(°sila);  iv.iii  (id.);  PvA  36  ("bhariya),  42   ("pesakara 
head  of  the  weaver's  guild),  47  ("vaijija),  75. 

Jeti  see  jayati. 

Jeranlya  (nt.)  a  kind  of  (missile)  weapon  A  iv.io7=iio 

(comb''    with    avudha    &    salaka ;    w.    11.    vedhanika, 

jeganika,  jevanika). 

Jotaka  (adj.)  [from  juti]  illuminating,  making  light; 
explaining  J  11.420;  Dpvs  xiv.50  ;  MUn  343  (=lamp- 
Ughter).  —  f.  "ika  explanation,  commentary,  N.  of 
several  Commentaries,  e.  g.  the  Paramatthajotika  on 
the  Sutta  Nipata  (KhA  n);  cp.  the  similar  expression 
dipani  (Paramatthadipani  on  Th  2  ;  Vv  &  Pv.).  — 
Jotika  Np.  DhA  1.385  (Jotiya) ;  Vism  233,  382. 

Jotati  [Sk.  dyotate  to  shine,  'd^ ;  cp.  Gr.  liarm  shine, 
i^Xof  clear ;  also  Sk.  dl  in  dipyate  ;  Lat.  dies.  Dhtp  120 
gives  jat  in  meaning  "  ditti,"  i.  e.  Ught]  to  shine,  be 
splendid  J  1.53;  vi.ioo,  509;  PvA  71  (jotanti=  obha- 
senti). 


Jotana 


119 


Joteti 


Jotana  (nt.)  &  jotana  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  dyotana]  illumination, 
explanation  J  vi.542  ;  Ps  ii.iia  ;  VvA  17  (°na). 

Joti  (m.  nt.)  [Sk.  jyotis  (cp.  dyuti)  nt.  to  dyotate,  see 
jotati]  I.  light,  splendour,  radiance  S  1.93;  A  11.85; 
Vv  16^.  —  2.  a  star  :  see  cpds.  —  3.  fire  S  1.169  ;  Th  i, 
415;  J  IV. 206 ;  sajotibbuta  set  on  fire  S  11.260;  A 
III. 407  sq.  ;  J  1.232. 

-parayana  (adj.)  attaining  to  light  or  glory  S  '.93  ; 
A  11.85;  D  III. 233  ;  Pug  51;  -pavaka  a  brilliant  hre 
Vv  lb''  (expl.  VvA  79:  candima-suriya-nakkhatta- 
taraka-rupanag  sadharana-namar)) ;  -pasana  a  burning 
glass  made  o{  a  crystal  DhA  iv.209 ;  -malika  a  certain 
torture  (setting  the  body  on  fire  ;  making  a  fiery  garland) 
M  i.87=A  i.47  =  ii.i22  =  Nd'  i54  =  Nd2  6o4  =  Miln  197; 
-rasa  a  certain  jewel  (wishing  stone)   VvA   iii,   339; 


DhA  1. 1 98;  Miln  118;  -sattha  the  science  of  the  st.ars, 
astronomy :  one  of  the  6  Vedic  disciplines  :  see  cha|anga, 
cp.  jotisa. 

Jotimant  (adj.)  [joti+  mant,  cp.  also  P.  jutimant]  lumin- 
ous, endowed  with  light  or  splendour,  bright,  excellent 
(in  knowledge)  Sn  34S  (  =  pariuajoti-sampanna  SnA 
348). 

Jotisa  (f.)  [=Sk.  jyotisa  (nt.)]  astronomy  Miln  3. 

Joteti  [Cans,  of  jotati]  (a)  trs.  to  cause  to  shine,  illuminate, 
make  clear,  explain  A  11.51  =  ]  v.509  (bhasaye  jotaye 
dhammag  ;  Gloss  J  v. 5 10  katheyya  for  jotcyya= jotaye) 
It  108;  J  11.208;  PvA  iS.  —  (b)  intrs.  to  shine  UhA 
II.  163  (naQajutiya  jotetva)  ;  pp.  jotita  resplendent 
PvA  53. 


Jh. 


Jhatta  [pp.  of  jhapeti ;  cp.  flatta>*ja5payati]  set  on  fire, 
consumed,  dried  up  (w.  hunger  or  thirst :  parched) 
comb''  w.  chata  J  n.83  ;  vi.347. 

Jhatva  see  jhapeti. 

Ttaasik  (?)  a  window  or  opening  in  general  J  11.334. 

Jliana^  (nt.)  [from  jhayati,'  BSk.  dhyana.  The  (popular 
etym-)  expl"  of  jhana  is  given  by  Bdhgh  at  Vism  150 
as  follows:  "  aramman'  upanijjhanato  paccanika-jhapa- 
nato  va  jhanai),"  i.e.  called  jh.  froni  meditation  on 
objects  &  from  burning  up  anything  adverse]  Uterally 
meditation.  But  it  never  means  vaguely  meditation. 
It  is  the  technical  term  for  a  special  religious  experience, 
reached  in  a  certain  order  of  mental  states.  It  was  origi- 
nally divided  into  four  such  states.  These  may  be  sum- 
marized :  I.  The  mystic,  with  his  mind  free  from  sensuous 
and  worldly  ideas,  concentrates  his  thoughts  on  some 
special  subject  (for  instance,  the  impermanence  of  all 
things).  This  he  thinks  out~by  attention  to  the  facts,  and 
by  reasoning.  2 .  Then  uplifted  above  attention  &  reason  - 
ing,  he  experiences  joy  &  ease  both  of  body  and  mind. 
3.  Then  the  bhss  passes  away,  &  he  becomes  suffused 
witn  a  sense  of  ease,  and  4.  he  becomes  aware  of  pure 
lucidity  of  mind  &  equanimity  of  heart.  The  whole 
really  forms  one  series  of  mental  states,  &  the  stages 
might  have  been  fixed  at  other  points  in  the  series.  So 
the  Dhamma-sarjgani  makes  a  second  list  of  five  stages. 
by  calling,  in  the  second  jhana,  the  fading  away  of  ob- 
servation one  stage,  &  the  giving  up  of  sustained  think- 
ing another  stage  (Dhs  167-175).  And  the  Vibhagga 
calls  the  first  jhana  the  paficaggtka-jhana  because  it,  by 
itself,  can  be  divided  into  five  parts  (Vbh  267).  The 
state  of  mind  left  after  the  experience  of  the  four  jhanas 
is  described  as  follows  at  D  1.76  :  "  with  his  heart  thus 
serene,  made  pure,  translucent,  cultured,  void  of  evil, 
supple,  ready  to  act,  firm  and  imperturbable."  It  will 
be  seen  that  there  is  no  suggestion  of  trance,  but  rather 
of  an  enhanced  vitahty.  In  the  descriptions  of  the 
crises  in  the  rehgious  experiences  of  Christian  saints 
and  mysrics,  expressions  similar  to  those  used  in  the 
jhanas  are  frequent  (see  F.  Heiler  Die  Buddhistische 
Versenhung.  1918).  Laymen  could  pass  through  the  four 
jhanas  (S  iv.30i).  The  jhanas  are  only  a  means,  not 
the  end.  To  imagine  that  experiencing  them  was 
equivalent  to  Arahantship  (and  was  therefore  the  end 
aimed  at)  is  condemned  (D  1.37  fi.)  as  a  deadly  heresy. 
In  late  PaU  we  find  the  phrase  arupajjhana.  This  is 
merely  a  new  name  for  the  last  four  of  the  eight  Vimok- 
kha,  which  culminate  in  trance.  It  was  because  they 
made  this  the  aim  of  their  teaching  that  Gotama  rejected 
the  doctrines  of  his  two  teachers.  Alara-Kalama  & 
Uddaka-Raraaputta  (M  1.164  f.). — The  jhanas  are 
discussed  in  extenso  &  in  various  combinations  as 
regards  theory  &  practice  at :  D  1.34  sq. ;  73  sq. ;  S  11. 
210  sq.  ;  IV.217  sq.,  263  sq. ;  v.213  sq.  ;  M  1.276  sq., 
350  sq.,  454  sq. ;  A  1.53,  163;  11.126;  111.394  sq. ; 
IV.409  sq. ;  v.  157  sq.  ;  Vin  111.4  ;  Nd^  on  Sn  1119&  s.v. ; 
Ps  1.97  sq.  ;  n.169  sq. ;  Vbh  257  sq. ;  263  sq. ;  279  sq. ; 
Vism  88,  415. — They  are  frequently  mentioned  either 
as  a  set,  or  singly,  when  often  the  set  is  implied  (as  in 
the  case  of  the  4th  jh.).  Mentioned  as  jh.  1-4  e.  g.  at 
Vinl.i04:ii.i6i  (foil,  by  sotapanna,  etc.) ;  D  n.156,  186; 
111.78.  131,  222  :  S  n.278  (nikamalabhin) ;  A  11.36  (id.)  ; 
111.354;  S  JV.299;  v. 307  sq. ,  M  1.2 1.  41,  159,^03,  247, 
398,  521  ;  11.15,  37  ;  Sn  69,  156,  985  ;  Dh  3^72  ;  J  1.139  ; 
VvA  38;  PvA  163. —  Separately:  the  ist:  A  iv.422  ; 
V.135;  M  1.24b,  294;  Miln  289;  }St-3rd:  A  111.323; 
M  1.18:;  ist  &  2nd:  M  11.28;  4th:  A  11.41;  111.325; 
V.31  ;  D  111.270  ;  VvA  4.  —  See  also  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  Buddli. 
Psych.  (Quest  Series)  p.  107  sq.  ;  Dhs.  Irsl.  p.  52  sq.  ; 
Index  to  Sagyutta  N.  for  more  refs. ;  also  Kasina. 


-anuyutta  applying  oneself  to  meditation  Sn  972  ; 
-anga  a  constituent  of  meditation  (with  ref.  to  the  4 
jhanas)  Vism  190.  -kila  sporting  in  the  exercise  of 
meditation  J  111.45.  -pasuta  id.  (-i-dhira)  Sn  709; 
Dh  181  (cp.  DhA  III. 226) ;  -rata  fond  of  meditation 
S  1.53,  122  ;  IV.  117;  It  40 ;  Sn  212,  503,  1009;  Vv  50'* ; 
VvA  38 ;  -vimokkha  emancipation  reached  through 
jhana  A  111.417;  v.34  ;  -sahagata  accompanied  by  jh. 
(of  pani\abala)  A  1.42. 

Jhana'  (nt.)  [from  jhayati']  conflagration,  fire  D  111.94  ■' 
J  I  347- 

Jhanika  (adj.)  [fr.  jhana']  belonging  to  the  {4)  medita- 
tions Vism  III. 

Jhapaka  (adj.)  one  who  sets  fire  to  (cp.  jh&peti),  an  in- 
cendiary J  III. 71. 

Jhapana  (nt.)  setting  fire  to,  consumption  by  fire,  in 
sarira°-kicca  cremation  VvA  76. 

Jhapita  [pp.  jhapeti]  set  on  fire  Miln  47  ;  Vism  76  (°kala 
time  of  cremation). 

Jhapeti  [Cans,  of  jhayati']  i.  to  set  fire  to,  to  bum,  to  cook 
Vin  IV. 265  ;  J  1.255,  294;  DhA  11.66;  PvA  62.. —  2.  to 
destroy,  to  bring  to  ruin,  to  kill  (see  Kefn,  Toev.,  p.  37  sq.) 
J  III. 441  (  =  dahati  pileti) ;  VvA  38  (  =  jhayati',  con- 
nected w.  jhana :  to  destroy  by  means  of  jhana) ;  inf. 
jhapetug  J  VI.3C0  ( -|- ghatetur)  hantui)) ;  ger.  jhatvS 
S  1. 19  (reads  chetva,  vv.  II.  ghatvS  &  jhatva)=J  iv.67 
(T.  jhatva,  v.  1.  chetva;  expl''  by  kilametvi) ;  S  1.41 
(v.  1.  for  T.  chetva,  Bdhgh  says  "  jhatva  ti  vadhitva  ") ; 
J  11.262  (-(-  hantva  vadhitva ;  expH  by  kilametva) ; 
VI. 299  ( -I- vadhitva) ;  also  jhatv&na  J  iv.57  (  =  hantva). 

—  pp.  jhatta  &  jhapita. 

Jhama  (adj.-n.)  [jhayati^  burning,  on  fire,  conflagration, 
in  °khetta  charcoal-burner's  field  J  1.238  ;  11.92  ;  °angara 
a  burning  cinder  PvA  90.  By  itself :  J  1.405  ;  DhA 
11.67. 

Jhamaka  N.  of  a  plant  J  vi.537 ;  also  in  "bhatta  (?) 
J  11.288. 

Jhayaka  (adj.)  one  who  makes  a  fire  D  111.94. 

Jhayati'  {Sk.  dbyayati,  dhl ;  with  dhira,  dhih  from  didheti 
shine,  perceive ;  cp.  Goth,  filu-deisei  cunning,  &  in 
meaning  cinteti>  citta']  to  meditate,  contemplate, 
think  upon,  brood  over  (c.  ace.) :  search  for,  hunt  after 
D  11.237  (jhanai));  S  1.25,  57;  A  v.323  sq.  (-l-pa,°  ni,° 
ava°);  Sn  165,  221,  425,  709,  818  (  =  Ndi  149  pa°,  ni". 
ava°) ;  Dh  27,  371,  395  ;  J  1.67,  410  ;  Vv  50'^;  Pv  iv.i6*; 
Miln  66 ;  SnA  320  (aOr.  jhayiijsu  thought  of).  —  pp. 
jhayita. 

Jhayati-  [Sk.  ksayati  to  bum,  kfSy  &  k?I,  cp.  khara  & 
charika]  to  bum,  to  be  on  fire :  fig.  to.be  consumed,  to 
waste  away,  to  dry  up  D  1.50  (=jaleti  DA  1.151); 
III. 94  (to  make  a  fire);  J  1.61,  62;  Pv  i.ii'"  (jhayare 
V.  I.  BB.  for  ghayire) ;  Miln  47  ;  PvA  33  (=pari^ayhati) ; 

—  aor.  jhayi  DhA  11.240  sq.  —  (fig.)  Dh  155  ;  J  vi.189. 

—  Cans,  jhapeti.  —  Cp.  khiyati^. 

Jhayana*  (nt.)  [der.  fr.  jhayati']  meditating,  in  "sila  the 
practice  of  meditation  (cp.  Sk.  dhyanayoga)  VvA  38. 

Jhayana'  (nt.)  [fr,  jhayati']  cremation,  burning  Pug  A  187. 

Jhayin  (adj.)  [see  jhayati'  &  jhana]  pondering  over  (c. 
ace.)  intent  on :  meditative,  self-concentrated,  engaged 
in  jhana-practice  Vin  11.75  ;  S  1.46  =  52  ;  11.284  ;  M  1.334  '■ 
A  1.24  ;  III. 355  ;  IV. 426  ;  v.  156,  325  sq. ;  Sn  85  (magga"), 
638,  719,  1009,  1 105;  It  71,  74,  112  ;  J  IV. 7 ;  Dh  23, 
110,  387  (reminding  of  jhayati',  cp.  DhA  iv.144); 
Nd'  264;  Vv  5*;  Pv  iv.i32;  Vbh  342.  Nd'  226= 
Nd*  3422  =  Vism  26  (apadaka''). 


N. 


Hatta  (nt.)  [nomen  agentis  from  jS.nati]  the  intellectual 
faculty,  intelligence  Dh  72  (=DhA  11.73:  j&nanasa- 
bhSva). 

Natti  (f.)  [Sk.  jiSapti,  from  jflSpayati,  caus  of  jil&]  announce- 
ment, declaration,  esp.  as  t.  t.  a  motion  or  resolution 
put  at  a  kammavaca  (proceedings  at  a  meeting  of  the 
chapter.  The  usual  formula  is  "  esa  flatti ;  sunatu  me 
bhante  sangho  "  :  Vin  1.340  ;  111.150,  173,  228;  —  °r) 
thapeti  to  propose  a  resolution  Vin  iv.i52.  —  Vin  V.142, 
217  (na  c'  dpi  natti  nac  a  pana  kammav&ca).  This 
resolution  is  also  called  a  iiattikamma :  Vin  11.89 ; 
IV. 152  ;  V.I  16;  A  1.99.  Two  kinds  are  distinguished, 
viz.  that  at  which  the  voting  follows  directly  upon  the 
motion,  i.  e.  a  i5atti-dutiya-kamma,  &  that  at  which 
the  motion  is  put  3  times,  &  is  then  followed  (as  4th 
item)  by  the  decision,  i.  e.  a  n-catuttha-kamraa.  Both 
kinds  are  discussed  at  Vin  1.56,  317  sq.  ;  11.89  '•  in.156  ; 
IV. 152  ;  &  passim.  Cp.  Divy  356:  jiiapticaturtha. 
Cp.  ^natti,  viiinatti. 

Hatva  etc. :  see  j3nati. 

lli^a  (nt.)  [from  janati.  See  also  janana.  *gene,  as  in 
Gr.  ycci  mc  (cp.  gnostic),  yvuifiy) ;  Lat.  (co)gnitio;  Goth, 
kun^i ;  Ogh.  kunst ;  E.  knowledge]  knowledge,  intelli- 
gence, insight,  conviction,  recognition,  opp.  anina  & 
avijja,  lack  of  k,  or  ignorance.  —  i .  Ndva  in  the  theory  oj 
cognition  :  it  occurs  in  intensive  couple-compounds  with 
terms  of  sight  as  cakkhu  (eye)  &  das?\na  (sight,  view), 
e.  g.  in  cakkhu-karana  nana-karana  "  opening  our  eyes 
&  thus  producing  knowledge  "  i.  e.  giving  us  the  eye 
of  knowledge  (a  mental  eye)  (see  cakkhu,  j3.nati  passati, 
&  cpd.  "karapa) :  Bhagava  janag  janati  passar)  passati 
cakkhu-bhuto  fiaria-bhuto  (  =  he  is  one  perfected  in 
knowledge)  M  i.iii  =  Nd'  235"';  natthi  hetu  natthi 
paccayo  iianaya  dassaniya  ahetu  apaccayo  iianai)' 
dassanar)  hoti  "  through  seeing  &  knowing,"  i.  e.  on 
grounds  of  definite  knowledge  arises  the  sure  conviction 
that  where  there  is  no  cause  there  is  no  consequence 
S  v. 126.  Cp.  also  the  relation  of  diffhi  to  fiana.  This 
implies,  that  all  things  visible  are  knowable  as  well  as 
that  all  our  knowledge  is  based  on  empirical  grounds ; 
yavatakai)  neyyai)  tavatakag  rianai)  Nd^  235'"" ;  yai) 
flapai)  tar)  dassanai),  yar)  dassanar)  tar)  fiapar)  Vin 
111.91  ;  fiana-l- dassana  (i.  e.  full  vision)  as  one  of  the 
characteristics  of  Arahantship :  see  arahant  11. D.  Cp. 
BSk.  jrianadarsana,  e.  g.  Av^  1.2 10.  —  2.  Scope  and 
character  of  hana  :  ii.  as  faculty  of  understanding  is 
included  in  pafifla  (cp.  wisdom = perfected  knowledge). 
The  latter  .signifies  the  spiritual  wisdom  which  embraces 
the  fundamental  truths  of  morality  &  conviction  (such 
as  aniccar)  anatta  dukkhai) :  Miln  42);  whereas  ii.  is 
relative  to  common  experience  (see  Nd*  235^  under 
cakkhuma,  &  on  ret.  of  p.  &  ii.  Ps  1.59  sq.  ;  118  sq.  ; 
n.189  sq.).  —  Perception  (safina)  is  necessary  to  the 
forming  of  riana,  it  precedes  it  (D  1.185) ;  as  sure  know- 
ledge fi.  is  preferable  to  saddha  (S  iv.298) ;  at  Vin  ni.91 
the  definition  of  ii.  is  given  with  tisso  vijja  (3  kinds  of 
knowledge);  they  are  specified  at  Nd^  266  as  atjha- 
samapatti-fiana  (consisting  in  the  8  attainments,  viz. 
jhana  &  its  4  succeeding  developments),  parte'  abhiiiiia" 
(the  5  higher  knowledges,  sec  pafina  &  abhi°),  miccha" 
(false  k.  or  heresy).     Three  degrees  of  k.   are  distin- 


guished at  DA  l.icx),  viz.  savaka-parami-iiaija,  pacceka- 
buddha",  sabbaflfluta"  (highest  k.  of  a  relig.  student, 
k.  of  a  wise  man,  &  omniscience).  Four  objects  of  k. 
(as  objects  of  truth  or  sammadifthi)  are  enum''  as 
dhamme  iiaijai),  anvaye  ii..  paricchede  n.,  sammuti  ri. 
at  D  III. 226,  277;  other  four  as  dukkhe  ii.  (dukkha-) 
samudaye  ft.,  nirodhe  fl.,  magge  ii.  (i.  e.  the  knowledge 
of  the  paticca-samuppada)  at  D  111.227;  Ps  1.118; 
Vbh  235  (=sammaditthi).  Right  knowledge  (or  truth) 
is  contrasted  with  false  k.  (miccha-iiana=  micchadit- 
thi)  :  S  v. 384  ;  M  11.29  ;  A  11.222  ;  v. 327  ;  Vbh  392.  — 
y.  Nana  in  application:  (a)  Vin  1.35;  D  11. 155  (opp. 
pasada) ;  S  1.129  (cittamhi  susamahite  iianamhi  vutta- 
manamhi) ;  11.60  (jStipaccaya  jaramararian  ti  ii.  :  see 
fl-vatthu) ;  A  1.219  (on  precedence  of  either  samadhi 
or  a.) ;  Sn  378.  789,  987  (muddhani  iianar)  tassa  na 
vijjati),  1078  (dijthi.  suti.  fl. :  doctrine,  revelation, 
personal  knowledge,  i.  e.  intelligence ;  differently  expl. 
at  Nd^  266),  1113;  Pv  111.5I  (Sugatassa  ii.  is  asadhara- 
riai))  Ps  1.194  sq.  ;  11.244  ;  Vbh  306  sq.  (fl-vibhanga), 
328  sq.  (kammassakatar)  n.) ;  Nett  15  sq.  ;  161  (-1-  fieyya), 
191  (id.).  —  (b)  fianai]  hoti  or  uppajjati  knowledge 
comes  to  (him)  i.  e.  to  reason,  to  arrive  at  a  conclusion 
(with  iti=^that  .  .  .)  S  11.124  =  111.28  (uppajjati); 
D  111.278  (id.) ;  A  n.2ii?«  ;  iv.75  ;  v.igs  ;  S  111.154.  See 
also  aiahant  11. D.  —  (c)  Var.  attributes  of  fi.  :  anut- 
tariya  A  v. 37;  aparapaccaya  (k.  of  the  non-effect  of 
causation  through  lack  of  cause)  S  11.17.  78;  in. 135; 
V.I 79,  422  sq.  (  =  sammaditthi),  same  as  ahetu-riana 
S  v.i2b:  asadharana  (incomparable,  uncommon  k.) 
A  111.441  ;  PvA  197 ;  akuppa  D  III. 273  ;  ariya  A  111.451  ; 
pariyodata  S  1. 198;  bhiyyosomatta  S  111.112;  yatha 
bhutai]  (proper,  definite,  right  k.)  (concerning  kaya, 
etc.)  S  v. 144;  A  III. 420  ;  v. 37.  —  (d)  knowledge  of, 
about  or  concerning,  consisting  in  or  belonging  to,  is 
expressed  either  by  loc.  or  -°  (equal  to  subj.  or  obj.  gen.). 
—  (u)  with  loc:  anuppade  n.  D  111.214.  274;  anvaye 
D  111.226.  277;  kaye  D  111.274;  khaye  D  111.214,  220 
(asavanar) ;  cp.  M  1.23,  183.  348;  11.38),  275;  S  11.30; 
Nett  15;  cutupapate  D  111. iii,  220;  dukkhe  (etc.) 
D  nil. 227  ;  S  II. 4  ;  v. 8,  430  ;  dhamme  D  111.226  ;  S  n.58  ; 
nibbane  S  11. 124  (cp.  iv.86). — ■  {fl)  as  -°  :  anavararia' 
DA  1. 100;  ariya  S  1.228;  A  in. 451  ;  khanti  Ps  1.106; 
jatissara  J  1.167;  cutfipapata  M  1.22,  183,  347;  11.38, 
etc.;  ceto-pariya  D  in.  100,  &  "pariyaya  S  v.  160; 
dibbacakkhu  Ps  1.114;  dhammatthitt  S  11.60,  124; 
Ps  1.50;  nibbida  Ps  1.195  ;  pubbe-nivas4nusati  M  1.22, 
248,  347;  II. 38,  etc.;  Buddha"  Nd^  235^;  Ps  1.133; 
II. 31,  195;  DA  1. 100;  sabbaiiuuta  Ps  1.131  sq.  ;  DA 
1.99  sq.  ;  PvA  197;  sekha  S  n.43,  58,  80,  &  iisekha 
S  HI. 83.  —  (e)  afinaria  wrong  k.,  false  view,  ignorance, 
untruth  S  1.181  ;  11.92;  in. 258  sq. ;  v.126;  A  ii.ii; 
Sn  347,  839;  Ps  1.80;  Pug  21;  Dhs  390,  106 1  ;  see 
avijja  &  micchaditthi. 

-indriya  the  faculty  of  cognition  or  understanding 
Dhs  157;  -upapanna  endowed  with  k.  Sn  1077  (=Nd* 
266''  "upeta) ;  -karana  (adj.)  giving  (right)  under- 
standing, enlightening,  in  comb"  w.  cakkhukarapa 
(giving  (in)-sight,  cp.  "  your  eyes  shall  be  opened  and 
ye  shall  be  knowing  good  and  evil  "  Gen.  3') :  kusala- 
vitakka  anandha-kararia  cakkhu"  fiapa"  It  82  ;  f.  -i  (of 
majjhima-patipada)  S  iv.33i  ;  -cakkhu  the  eye  of  k. 
PvA  166 ;  -jala  the  net  of  k..  in  phrase  nariajalas.sa  anto 


121 


^anika 


122 


Tan 


pavittha  coming  within  the  net,  i.  e.  into  the  range  of 
one's  intelligence  or  mental  eye  (clear  sight)  DhA  1.26  ; 
•'■37.  58,  96;  III. 171,  193;  IV.61  ;  VvA  63;  -dassana 
"  knowing  and  seeing,"  "  clear  sight,"  i.  e.  perfect 
knowledge  ;  having  a  vision  of  truth,  i.  e.  recognition  of 
truth,  philosophy,  (right)  theory  of  life,  all-comprising 
knowledge.  Defined  as  tisso  vijja  (see  above  2)  at 
Vin  iv.26;  fully  discussed  at  DA  1.220,  cp.  also  def.  at 
Ps  11.244.  —  ^i"  II. 178  (parisuddha°  ;+ajiva,  dham- 
madesana,  veyyakarana) ;  111.90  sq.  ;  v. 164,  197; 
D  i.76;5^(following  after  the  jhanas  as  the  first  step  of 
paiifia,  see  paniia-sampada) ;  in. 134,  222  ("pafilabha), 
288  (°visuddhi)  ;  M  1.195  sq.  ;  202  sq.,  482;  ii.g,  31; 
Nett  17,  18,  28;  see  also  vimutti° ;  -dassin  one  who 
possesses  perfect  k.  Sn  478  ;  -patha  the  path  of  k.  Sn 
868 ;  -phusana  experience,  gaining  of  k.  DhA  1.230 ; 
-bandhu  an  associate  or  friend  of  k.  Sn  911  ;  -bhQta  in 
comb"  w.  cakkhubhuta.  having  become  seeing  & 
knowing,  i.  e.  being  wise  S  11.255;  iv.94 ;  A  v. 226  sq.  ; 
-vatthuni  (pi.)  the  objects  or  items  of  (right)  know- 
ledge which  means  k.  of  the  paticcasamuppada  or 
causal  connection  of  phenomena.  As  44  (i.  e.  4x11, 
all  constituents  except  avijja,  in  analogy  to  the  4  parts 
of  the  ariyasaccani)  S  11.56  sq.,  as  77  (7  x  1 1)  S  11.59  sq.  ; 
discussed  in  extenso  at  Vbh  306-344  (called  i^ana- 
vatthu) ;  -vada  talk  about  (the  attainment  of  supreme) 
knowledge  D  111.13  sq.  ;  A  v. 42  sq. ;  -vippayutta  dis- 
connected with  k.  Dhs  147,  157,  270  ;  -vimokkha  eman- 
cipation through  k.  Ps  11.36,  42  ;  -visesa  distinction  of 
k.,  superior  k.  PvA  196  ;  -sampayutta  associated  with  k. 
Dhs  I,  147,  157,  etc.  ;  Vbh  169  sq.,  184,  285  sq.,  414  sq. 

NaQika  (adj.)  in  paiica°  having  five  truths  (of  samadhi) 

D  111.278. 

ifanin  (adj.)  knowing,  one  who  is  possessed  of  (right) 
knowledge  S  11. 169  ;  A  11.89  (samma°) ;  iv.340.  — aAfia- 
nin  not  knowing,  unaware  VvA  76. 

Nata  [pp.  of  janati=Gr.  yrajTuc,  Lat.  (g)notus ;  ajiiata 
(P.  aiifiata)  =  uy^wroy  =  ignotus]  known,  well-known  ; 
experienced,  brought  to  knowledge,  realiEcd.  In  Nd^ 
s.  V.  constantly  expl.  by  tulita  tirita  vibhuta  vibhavita 
which  series  is  also  used  as  expl"  of  dittha  &  vidita 
A  v.  195;  J  1.266;  Sn  343  (-1- yasassin) ;  Miln  21  (id.). 
—  annata  not  known,  unknown  Vin  1.209;  M  1.430; 
S  n.281  ;  DhA  1.208. 

fiataka  [for  *natika  from  nati]  a  relation,  relative,  kins- 
man Vin  II. 194  ;  M  n.67  ;  Dh  43  ;  Sn  263  (=  KhA  140  : 
nayante  amhakar)  ime  ti  nataka),  296,  579;  Pv  11.  i* 
(Minayeff.  but  Hardy  °ika) ;  PvA   19.  21.  31.  62,  69; 

DA  i.giJ. 


Nati  [see  janati ;  cp.  Sk.  ji^ati,  Gr.  yvuroc,  Lat.  cognatus. 
Goth,  knojjs]  a  relation,  relative  (=matito  pitito  ca 
sambandha  PvA  25;  =  bandhu  PvA  86;  specialized  as 
"salohita.  see  below).  PI.  iiatayo  (Pv  1.4^ ;  KhA  209, 
214)  and  fiati  (M  11.73;  KhA  210,  cp.  213;  ace.  also 
nati  Pv  1.6');  Sn  141;  Dh  139,  204,  288;  J  11.353; 
Pv  1.5^,  12^;  11.3'^,  6'.  —  Discussed  in  detail  with 
regard  to  its  being  one  of  the  10  palibodha  at 
Vism  94. 

-katha  (boastful)  talk  about  relatives  D  l.jr^  (cp. 
DA  1.90) ;  -gata  coming  into  (the  ties  of)  relationship 
j  VI. 307  (°gataka  ib.  308) ;  -ghara  the  paternal  home 
J  1.52;  -dhanuna  the  duties  of  relatives  Pv  1.5'^; 
(  =  flatihi  riatinar)  kattabba-karanar)  PvA  3f)) ;  -pari- 
vatta  the  circle  of  relations  D  1.61  ;  M  1.267;  Pug  57'*' ; 
-peta  a  deceased  relation  Pv  1.5*  ;  -majjhagata  (adj.)  in 
the  midst  of  one's  relations  Piig  29  ;  -mitta  (pi.)  friends 
&  relatives  Dh  219;  J  iu.396;  Pv  1.12';  -vyasana  mis- 
fortune of  relatives  (opp.  "sampada)  D  in. 235  ;  enum 
as  one  of  the  general  misfortunes  under  dukkha  (see 
Nd^  304F) ;  -sangha  the  congregation  of  kinsmen,  the 
clan  A  1.152  ;  Sn  589  ;  -salohita  a  relation  by  blood  (con- 
trasted with  friendship :  mittamacca  Sn  p.  104),  often 
with  ref.  to  the  deceased :  peta  ii-salohita  the  spirits  of 
deceased  blood-relations  M  1.33  ;  A  v. 132,  269  ;  PvA  27, 
28  ;  -sineha  the  affection  of  relationship  PvA  29  ;  -hetu- 
sampatti  a  blessing  received  through  the  kinsmen 
PvA  27. 

Napeti  [Caus.  of  jan3.ti,  cp.  also  hatti]  to  make  known, 
to  explain,  to  announce  J  11. 133.  Cp.  janapeti  & 
anapeti. 

Naya  [Sk.  nyaya=  ni-t- i]  i.  method,  truth,  system,  later 
=  logic  :  "gantha  book  on  logic  Davs  111.41.  —  2.  fitness, 
right  manner,  propriety,  right  conduct,  often  appl"* 
to  the  "right  path"  (ariyamagga=ariyaiiaya  Vin 
1. 10)  D  III. 120;  S  V.19,  141,  167  sq.,  185;  A  11.95; 
IV.426;  V.194;  Dh  1.249;  ariya  6.  S  11.68;  v.387 ;  = 
the  causal  law  S  v.388  ;  =  kalyaija-kusala-dhammata 
A  11.36 ;  used  in  apptosition  with  dhamma  and  kusala 
D  11.151;  M  II. 181,  197;  is  replaced  herein  by  sacca 
S  1.240  ;  =  Nibbana  at  Vism  219,  524;  ii.-patipanna 
walking  in  the  right  path  S  v. 343  ;  A  11.56 ;  111.212,  286 ; 
V.183. 

-Su  (-fiflii)  (adj. -suffix)  [Sk.  -jna,  from  janati,  ♦gn :  cp. 
P.  gu  >Sk.  ga]  knowing,  recognizing,  acknowledging,  in 
ughatita",  kata'.  kala°,  khana",  matta°,  ratta",  vara", 
vipacita",  veda',  sabba",  etc.  (q.  v.) — fern,  abstr.  °uut& 
in  same  combinations. 


I 


T. 


Tan  (?)  (adv.)  part  of  sound  J  1.287  (tan  ti  saddo). 


Th. 


°Tha  (°ttha)  (adj. -suffix)  [from  titthati]  standing,  as 
opposed  to  either  lying  down  or  moving ;  located,  being 
based  on,  founded  on  (e.  g.  appa°  based  on  little 
D  :.I43):  see  kappa"  (lasting  a  k),  kuta°  (immovable), 
gaha"  (founding  a  house,  householder),  dhamma°,  nava", 
vehasa"  (  =  vihan-ga).  —  (n.)  a  stand  i.  e.  a  place  for: 
got  (ha  a  stable. 

Thapana  (nt.)  i.  setting  up,  placing,  founding;  establish- 
ment, arrangement,  position  Vin  v. 114:  J  1.99  (aggha° 
fixing  prices);  Miln  352  (pada°) ;  DA  1.294;  (=vidha- 
rite) ;  PvA  5  (kulavar|sa°).  —  2.  letting  alone,  omission, 
suspension,  in  patimokkha"  Vin  n.241. 

Thapana  (f)  i.  arrangement  DA  1.294.  —  2.  application 
of  mind,  attention  Pug  18.  Vism  278  (=appana). 

Thapita  [pp.  of  thapeti]  I.  placed,  put  down;  set  up, 
arranged,  often  simply  pleonastic  for  finite  verb 
(=  being);  sagharitva  th.  being  folded  up  J  1.265  (cp. 
similar  use  of  gahetva  c.  ger.) :  mukkhe  th.  J  vi.366 ; 
°sankara  (dustheap)  PvA  82  ;  pariccajane  th.  appointed 
for  the  distribution  of  gifts  PvA  124.  —  2.  suspended, 
left  over,  set  aside  Vin  11.242  (patimokkha). 

Thapeti  [Cans,  of  titthati]  to  place,  set  up.  fix,  arrange, 
establish ;  appoint  to  (c.  loc.) ;  to  place  aside,  save,  put 
by,  leave  out  Vin  11.32  (pavaranag),  191  (ucce  &  nice 
thane  to  place  high  or  low),  276  (pavaranai)) ;  v. 193 
(uposathari),  196  (give  advice);  D  1.120  (leaving  out, 
discarding) ;  Dh  40  (cittar)  th.  make  firm)  J  1.62,  138, 
223,  293  (except) ;  II.  132  (puttatthane  th.  as  daughter) ; 
J  II. 159;  VI. 365  (putting  by);  VvA  63  (kasir)  thapetva 
except  ploughing) ;  PvA  4,  20  (varai)  thapetva  denying 
a  wish),  39,  1 14  (setting  up)  ;  Miln  13  (thapetva  setting 
aside,  leaving  till  later),. —  inf.  thapetur)  Vin  11. 194; 
PvA  73  (saijharitva  th.  to  fold  up:  cp.  thapita);  grd. 
thapetabba  J  11.352  (rajatthane) ;  PvA  97 ;  &  thapa- 
niya  (in  paSha  th.  a  question  to  be  left  standing  over, 
i.  e.  not  to  be  asked)  D  111.229.  —  ger.  thapetva  (leaving 
out,  setting  aside,  excepting)  also  used  as  prep.  c.  ace. 
(before  or  after  the  noun) :  with  the  omission  of,  besides, 
except  D  1.105  (th.  dve)  ;  J  1.179  (mar)  but  for  me),  294 
(tumhe  th.) ;  n.154  (ekar)  vaddhar)  th.) ;  iv.142  (th. 
mag):  VvA  100  (th.  ekag  itthip) ;  PvA  93  (th.  mag). 
Cp.  BSk.  sthapayitva  "except"  AvS  ii.iii.  —  Cans, 
thapapeti  to  cause  to  be  set  up  ;  to  have  erected,  to  put 
up  J  1.266  ;  DhA  11.191. 

Th&na  (tthana)  (nt.)  [Vedic  sthana,  stha,  see  titthati ;  cp. 
Sk.  sthaman  Gr.  orne/ii'i;.  Lat.  stamen]  —  I.  Conno- 
tation. As  one  of  the  4  iriyapatha  (behaviours)  i.  con- 
trasted (a)  as  standing  position  with  sitting  or  reclining  ; 
(b)  as  rest  with  motion  ;  2.  by  itself  without  particular 
characterization  as  location. 

II.  Meanings — (i)  Literal:  place,  region,  locality, 
abode,  part  (-"  of,  or  belonging  to) — (a)  caltari  thSnani 
dassaniyani  four  places  (in  the  career  of  Buddha)  to 
b^  visited  D  li.i40  =  A  11. 120  ;  vase  thane  gamane  Sn  40 
(expl.  by  SnA  85  as  maha-apatthana-sankhate  thane, 
but  may  be  referred  to  I.  i  (b)  );  thSna  caveti  to  remove 
from  one's  place  Sn  442  ;  J  iv.138  ;  PvA  55  (spot  of  the 
body).  —  (b)  kumbha°  (the  "  locality  of  the  pitcher," 
j.  e.  the  well)  q.  v. ;  arailfia°  (part  of  the  forest)  J  1.253  ) 
PvA  32  ;  nivasaiia°  (abode)  PvA  76 ;  phasuka°  J  11. 103  ; 


PvA  13  ;  vasana"  J  1.150,  278  ;  VvA  66  ;  viruhana°  (place 
for  the  growing  of  .  .  .)  PvA  7  ;  vihara  (place  of  his 
sojourn)  PvA  22  ;  saka°  (his  own  abode)  J  11.129  ;  PvA 
66.  —  (c)  In  this  meaning  it  approarJies  the  meta- 
phorical sense  of  "  condition,  state  "  (see  2  &  cp.  gati) 
in:  dibbani  thanani  heavenly  regions  S  1.2 1  ;  tidivag 
S  1.96  ;  saggag  th.  a  happy  condition  Pv  i.i^  ;  pitu  gata° 
the  place  where  my  father  went  (after  death)  PvA  38  ; 
Yamassa  th.  =  pettivasaya  PvA  59.  —  (d)  In  its  preg- 
nant sense  in  comb"  with  accuta  &  acala  it  represents 
the  connotation  I.  i  (b).  i.  e.  perdurance,  constancy, 
i.  e.  Nibbana  Vv  51^  ;  Dh  225.  —  2.  Applied  meanings — 
(a)  state,  condition  ;  also  -°  (in  sg.)  as  collective-abstract 
suffix  in  the  sense  of  being,  behaviour  (corresponding 
to  E.  ending  hood,  ion,  or  ing).  where  it  resembles  abstr. 
formations  in  °ta  &  "ttag  (Sk.  ta  &  tvag),  as  lahut- 
thana=Iahuta  &  collect,  formations  in  °ti  (Sk.  dasati 
ten-hood;  devatati  godhead,  sarvatati=P.  sabbattag 
comprehensiveness ;  cp.  also  Lat.  civitatem,  juven- 
tutem).  —  S  1. 129  (condition)  11.27  (asabha'')  =  M  1.69; 
S  III. 57  (atasitayag  fearless  state):  A  11.118  sq.  (four 
conditions);  Dh  137  (dasannag  aniiatarag  th.°  nigac- 
chati  he  undergoes  one  of  the  foil,  ten  conditions,  i.  e. 
items  of  affliction,  expl"*  at  DhA  hi. 70  with  karana 
"  labours  "),  309  (states=dukkhakaranani  DhA  in. 482, 
conditions  of  suffering  or  ordeals) ;  hattha-pasarana- 
-tthana  condition  of  outstretched  hands  DhA  1.298 ; 
loc.  thane  (-°)  when  required,  at  the  occasion  of  .  .  . 
DhA  1.89  (hasitabba°,  sagvega°.  datug  yutta°) :  pubbe 
nibbatta  -tfhanato  patthaya  "  since  the  state  (or  the 
time)  of  his  former  birth  "  PvA  100.  —  vibhusana- 
tthana  ornamentation,  decoration,  things  for  adorn- 
ment D  1.5;  Sn  59  (DA  1.77  superficially:  thanag 
vuccati  karanag  ;  SnA  112  simply  vibhusa  eva  v-ttha- 
nag) ;  juta-pamada°  (gambling  &  intoxication)  D  i.6«^ 
(cp.  expl.  at  KhA  26) ;  gata°  &  agata°  (her)  going  & 
coming  J  111.188;  — pariccaga"  distribution  of  gifts 
PvA  124.  —  (b)  (part=)  attribute,  quality,  degree: 
aggasavaka"  (degrees  of  discipleship)  VvA  2  ;  esp.  in 
set  of  10  attributes,  viz.  riipa  (etc.  1-5),  ayu,  vanna. 
sukha,  yasa,  adhipateyya  D  in. 146  ;  S  iv.275  ;  Pv  11.9^', 
also  collectively  [see  (a)]  as  dasatthanag  S  1.193  :  out  of 
these  are  mentioned  as  4  attributes  ayu,  vanna,  sukha, 
bala  at  Vv  32';  other  ten  at  A  v. 129  (pasagsani). — 
(c)  (counter-part  = )  object  (-°  for),  thing;  item,  point; 
pi.  grounds,  ways,  respects.  With  a  numeral  often  =  a 
(five)fold  collection  of  ...  S  iv.249  sq.  (5  objects  or 
things,  cp.  Ger.  funferlei) ;  A  111.54  ^1-  ('f').  60  sq., 
71  sq.  ;  etehi  tihi  thanehi  on  these  3  grounds  Dh  224  ; 
manussa  tihi  thanehi  bahug  pui^fiag  pasavanti :  kayena 
vacaya  manasa  (in  3  ways,  qualities  or  properties) 
A  151  sq.  ;  cp.  11. 119  sq.  (=sagvutag  tihi  thanehi  Dh 
391);  catuhi  thanehi  in  Com.  equals  catuhi  akarehi  or 
karanehi  pamujjakaranaig  th.  (object)  Sn  256 ;  ekaccesu 
thanesu  sameti  ekaccesu  na  sameti  "  I  agree  in  certain 
points,  but  not  in  others"  D  1.162  ;  kankhaniya" 
doubtful  point  S  iv.350,  399  ;  —  n'  atthi  aiiiiag  thanag 
no  other  means,  nothing  else  DhA  11.90  ;  agamanlya" 
something  noc  to  be  done,  not  allowed  VvA  72  ;  cp.  also 
kamma".  —  (d)  (standpoint= )  ground  for  (assump- 
tion) reason,  supposition,  principle,  esp.  a  sound  con- 
clusion, logic,  reasonableness  (opp.  a°  see  4) :  garayhag 
th.  agacchati  "he  advocates  a  faulty  principle"  D  1.161  ; 


"3 


ThSnIya 


124 


Thiyati 


catuhi  th.  panuapeti  (four  arguments)  S  in. 116  ;  iv.38  >  ; 
tbana-kusala  accomplished  in  sound  reasoning  S  111.61  sq. 
(satta°) ;  A  11. 170  sq.  Also  with  at^hana-kusala :  see 
below  4. 

III.  Adverbial  use  of  some  cases  ace.  thanatj:  ettakar) 
th.  even  a  little  bit  DhA  1.389.  —  abl.  thanaso :  in 
comb"  w.  hetuso  with  reason  &  cause,  causally  con- 
ditioned [see  2  (d)]  S  v.3a4 ;  A  in.417;  v.33  ;  Nett  94 
(iiaija) ;  abs.  without  moving  (see  I.  i  (b)  &  cp.  Lat. 
statim)  i.  e.  without  an  interval  or  a  cause  (of  change), 
at  once,  immediately,  spontaneously,  impromptu  (cp. 
cpd.°  uppatti)  S  1. 193;  V.50,  321,  381  ;  Pv  1.4*  (  =  kha- 
nax)  yeva  PvA  ig).  —  loc.  thane  instead=hke,  as  dhitu 
thane  thapesi  he  treats  her  like  a  daughter  VvA  209  ; 
puttafthane  as  a  son  J  11.132. 

IV.  Contrasted  with  negation  of  term  (thana  &  atthana). 
The  meanings  in  this  category  are  restricted  to  those 
mentioned  above  under  i  [esp.  i  (c)]  &  2  (d),  viz.  the 
relations  of  place  >  not  place  (or  wrong  place,  also  as 
proper  time  &  wrong  time),  i.  e.  somewhere  >  nowhere, 
and  of  possibiUty>  impossibihty  (truth  >  falsehood), 
(a)  fhanari  upagacchati  (pathaviya)  to  find  a  (resting) 
place  on  the  ground,  to  :jtay  on  the  ground  (by  means  of 
the  law  of  attraction  and  gravitation)  Miln  255  ;  opp.  na 
thanai)  upa°  to  find,  no  place  to  rest,  to  go  into  nothing- 
ness Miln  180,  237,  270.  —  (b)  thanag  vijjati  there  is 
a  reason,  it  is  logically  sound,  it  is  possible  D  i  163, 
175  ;  M  111.64  ;  Ps  11.236  sq. ;  cp.  M  Vastu  11.448  ;  opp. 
na  etar)  thanaij  vijjati  it  is  not  possible,  feasible,  plaus- 
ible, logically  correct  Vin  n.284  ;  D  1. 104,  239  ;  M  ll.io  ; 
111.64 ;  Miln  237 ;  Nett  92  sq.  —  (c)  atthanag  an  im- 
possibihty Sn  54  (atthana,  with  elision  of  n) ;  at  thane 
at  the  wrong  time  J  1.256  ;  thana  is  that  one  of  the  gatis 
which  is  accessible  to  human  influence,  as  regards  gifts 
of  reUef  or  sacrifice  (this  is  the  pettivisaya),  whilst 
atthana  appUed  to  the  other  4  gatis  (see  gati)  PvA 
27  sq.  In  cpd.  than&thana-gata  it  means  referring  or 
leading  to  good  &  bad  places  (gatis) :  of  sabbe  khaya- 
dhamma  (i.  e.  keci  saggupaga  keci  apayijpaga)  Nett  94. 
In  comb"  apucchi  nipune  panhe  thanathanagate 
(Miln  I )  it  may  mean  either  questions  concerning 
possibilities  &  impossibilities  or  truths  &  falsehoods,  or 
questions  referring  to  happy  &  unhappy  states  (of 
existence) ;  thanathana-iiaiia  is  "  knowledge  of  correct 
&  faulty  conclusions"  Nett  94,  cp.  Kvu  231  sq. ;  the 
same  comb"  occurs  with  "kusala  "kusalata  "  accom- 
plished or  skilled  (&  skill)  in  understanding  correct  or 
faulty  conclusions"  D  in. 2 12  (one  of  the  ten  powers  of 
the  Buddha);  M  111.64  ;  Dhs  1337.  1338  (trsl.  by  Mrs. 
Rh.  D.  on  p.  348  Dhs.  trsl.  as  "  skUl  in  affirming  or 
negating  causal  conjuncture ").  In  the  same  sense : 
thanarj  thanato  pajanati  (&  atthanag  atthanato  p.)  to 
draw  a  logical  inference  from  that  which  is  a  proper 
ground  for  inference  (i.  e.  which  is  logical)  S  v. 304 ; 
M  1.69  sq.  =  A  111.417;  v.33. 

-uppatti  arising  instantaneously  (see  thanaso,  above 
UI.)  VvA  37  ;  J  V1.308  ("karaijavindana  finding  a  means 
right  on  the  spot) ;  -ka  (adj.)  on  the  spot,  momentary, 
spontaneous  J  vi.304. 

Thaniya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  titthati]  standing,  having  a  certain 
position,  founded  on  or  caused  by  (-°)  Vin  11.194  (-alca") ; 
A  1.264  (chanda  -  raga  -  dharama").  See  also  under 
titthati. 

Thayika  (adj.)  at  Miln  201  "  one  who  gains  his  living  or 
*  subsists  on  "  (instr.)  is  doubtful  reading. 


Thayin  (adj.-n.)  [from  titthati]  standing,  being  in,  being 
in  a  state  of  (-°),  staying  with,  dependent  on  (with  gen.) : 
pariyutthatthayin  "  being  in  a  state  of  one  to  whom 
it  has  arisen,"  i.  e.  one  who  has  got  the  idea  of  ...  or 
one  who  imagines  S  111.3  sq.  ;  arupa-tthayin  It  62  ; 
Yamassa  thayino  being  under  the  rule  of  Yama  Pv 
i.ii». 

Thita  [pp.  of  titthati=Gr.  araToi;,  Lat.  status,  Celt,  fossad 
(firm)]  standing,  i.  e.  (see  thana  I)  either  upright  (opp. 
nisinna,  etc.),  or  immovable,  or  being,  behaving  in 
general.  In  the  latter  function  often  (with  ger.) 
pleonastic  for  finite  verb  (cp.  thapita) ;  —  resting  in, 
abiding  in  (-°  or  with  loc.) ;  of  time :  lasting,  enduring; 
fig.  steadfast,  firm,  controUed :  amissikatam  ev'  assa 
cittai)  hoti,  thitar)  anejjappattag  A  111.377=  iv^04 ; 
tassa  thito  va  kayo  hoti  thitai)  cittag  (firm,  unshaken) 
S  v.74  =  Nd=  475  B";— D  1.135  (khema°) ;  A  1.152; 
Sn  250  (dhamme);  It  116  sq.  (th.  caranto  nisinna 
sayana) ;  J  1.167;  279;  ni.53.  —  with  ger.-  nahatva 
th.  &  nivasetva  th.  (after  bathing  &  dressing)  J  1.265  '. 
darakar)  gahetva  th.  J  vi.336.     Cp.  saij°. 

-atta  self-controlled,  composed,  steadfast  D  1.57 
(H-gatattayatatta;  expl.  at  DA  1.168  by  suppatitthita- 
citto) ;  S  1.48  ;  ni.46  ;  A  11.5  ;  iv.93,  428  ;  Sn  370  (-(-  pari- 
nibbuta),  359  (id.  expl.  at  SnA  359  by  lokadhammehi 
akampaneyya-citta) ;  Pug  62  ;  -kappin  (adj.)  (for 
kappa-*thitin)  standing  or  waiting  a  whole  kappa  Pug  13 
(e.xpl.  at  Pug  A  187  by  fhitakappo  assa  atthi  ti ;  kappag 
thapeturi  samattho  ti  attho) ;  -citta  (adj.)  of  controlled 
heart  (=''atta)  D  Ii.i57«;  -dhamma  (adj.)  everlasting, 
eternal  (of  mahasamudda,  the  great  ocean)  Vin  11.237  = 
A  IV.  198. 

Thitaka  (adj.)=  thita  in  meaning  of  standing,  standing  up. 
erect  Vin  11.165  :  D  11.17  =  111.143  ;  M  11.65  ;  J  1.53.  62  ; 
VvA  64. 

ThiUta  (f.)  the  fact  of  standing  or  beitkg  founded  on  (-°) 
S  11.25  =  A  1-286  (dhamma°-H  dhamma-niyamata). 

Thitatta  (nt.)  standing,  being  placed ;  being  appointed  to, 
appointment  J  1.124. 

Thiti  (f.)  [from  titthati  Sk.  sthiti,  Gr.  Traan.,  Lat.  statio 
(cp.  stationary),  Ohg.  stat,  Ags.  stede]  state  (as  opposed 
to  becoming)^  stability,  steadfastness ;  duration,  con- 
tinuance, immobility  ;  persistence,  keeping  up  (of: 
c.  gen.) ;  condition  of  (-°)  relation  S  11. 11  ;  111.31  ;  iv.14, 
104,   228  sq..  A  v.96  ;  Vism  32    (kayassa) ;  in  jhana: 

5  111.264,  269  sq..  saddharamas.sa  (prolongation  of)  S  11. 
225;  A  1.159;   II. 148;  III. 177  (always  with  asammosa 

6  anantaradhana),  cp.  M  11.26  sq. ;  — dhammatthiti- 
iia^a  (state  or  condition  of)  S  n.124;  Ps  1.50  sq.  —  n' 
atthi  dhuvar)  thiti :  the  duration  is  not  for  long  M  11.64 
=  Dh  i47=Th  I,  769  =  VvA  77,  cp.  Th  2,  343  (=ThA 
241);  Sn  1 1 14  (vinfiana")  PvA  198  (position,  constella- 
tion), 199  (ji-vita"  as  remainder  of  hfe,  cp.  thitakappin) ; 
Dhs  iii!=((cittassa),  I9a((-f- ayu=  subsistence). 

-bhagiya  connected  with  duration,  enduring,  lasting, 
permanent  (only  appl.  to  samadhi)  D  111.277  :  -^  ni.427 ; 
Nett  77  ;  cp.  samldhissa  thitikusala  "  one  who  is  accom- 
plished in  lasting  concentration  "  A  111.311,  427  ;  iv.34. 

Thitika  (adj.)  [Der.  fr.  thiti]  standing,  lasting,  enduring; 
existing,  living  on  (-°j,  e.  g.  ahara°  iependent  on  food 
Kh  III.  (see  ahara) ;  rit.  adv.  thitikag  constantly  VvA  75. 

Thiyati  see  patitthiyati. 


i 


D. 


Dftgsa  [see  dasati]  a  yellow  fly,  gadfly  (orig.  "  the  bite  ") 
Nd^  268  (  =  pingala-makkhika,  same  at  J  in. 263  cSt 
SnA  loi);  usually  in  comb"  with  other  biting  or 
stinging  sensations,  as  °sirir)sapa  Sn  52,  &  freq.  in  cpd. 
<ilat)sa-tnakasa-vat'  atapa-sirigsapa-samphassa  M  1.10=:= 
A  II. 117,  143  =  111.163;  A. III. 388;  V.15;  Vin  1.3  ;  Nd2 
s.  V.  (enum''  under  var.  kinds  oi  dukkha)  ;  Vism  31  (here 
expl''  as  dagsana-makkhika  or  andha-makkhika). 

Da^tha  [pp.  of  dagSati  or  dasati  to  bite]  bitten  PvA  144. 


Dasati  (&  darisati)  [cp.  Sk. 
Ohg.  zanga.  Ags.  tonge, 
snakes,    scorpions,    etc.), 
4aseyya  M  1133  ;  A  tii. 
(Jagseyya  A  iu.306  ;  ppr. 
fut.  dagsayissami   ]   vi.i 
Vv  So*  (=Sk.  adanksit). 
DhA  11.258  ;  inf.  <Jasitug 
II.  102  ;  in. 52,  538;  DhA 
ditha  &  saijdasa. 

Dahati  {&  dahati)  [Sk.  dahati,  pp.  dagdha,  cp.  daha, 
nidagha  (summer  heat) ;  Gr.  rippit  ashes,  Lat.  favilla 
(glowing)  cinders,  Goth,  dags,  Ger.  tag.  E.  day  =  hot 
time]  to  bum  (trs.)  consume,  torment  M  1.365  ;  11.73  : 


da<ati  &  dagSati,  Gr.  Sukvw. 
E.  tongj  to  bite  (esp.  of  flies, 

pres.  dasati  M  1. 519;  pot. 
101  =  IV. 320  (where  daris°)  & 
.  dasamSna  J  1.265  (gi'^'^Y'i)  '■ 
93  (v.  1.  dass°)  ;  aor.  adaijsi 
dagsi  PvA  62  &  dasi  J  1.502  ; 
J  1.265  .■  S^^-  dasitva  J  1.222  ; 
'■358.  —  Pp.  dat^ha  ;  cp.  also 


A  V.  1 10  ;  J  11-44  (aor.  3  sg.  med.  adad4ha=  Sk.  adagdha) ; 
Dh  31,  71,  140;  Miln  45,  112  (cauterize).  Pp.  daddha 
—  Pass,  dayhati  S  1.188  (kamara^ena  dayhami  cittam 
me  pari^ayhati) ;  ib.  (maharaga  :  ma  dayhittho  punap- 
punai))  M  11.73  ;  S  in. 150  (mahapathavi  dayhati  vinas- 
sati  na  bhavati)  esp.  in  ppr.  dayhamana  consumed  with 
or  by,  burning,  glowing  Dh  371  ;  It  23  ("ena  kayena  & 
cetasaPvi.ii",  12^;  11. 2')  (of  a  corpse  being  cremated)  ; 
PvA  63,  152  (vippatisarena :  consumed  by  remorse). 
See  also  similes  J.P.T.S.  1907,  90.     Cp.  ud°. 

Daka  (m.  nt.)  [Sk.  saka  (nt.)  on  s>d  cp.  Sk.  sakini> 
dakini]  green  food,  eatable  herbs,  vegetable  Vin  i  246 
(°rasa),  248  ;  Th  2.  i  ;  Vv  30»  (v.  1.  saka) ;  VvA  99 
(= tanduleyyakadi-sakavyanjana). 

Daha  [Sk.  daha,  see  dahati]  burning,  glow,  heat  D  i.io 
(disa°  sky-glow  =  zodiacal  light?);  M  1.244;  PvA  62; 
Miln  325.  Sometimes  spelt  daha,  e.  g.  A  1.178  (aggi") ; 
Sdhp20i  (id.);  — dava°  a  jungle  fire  Vin  11. 138;  J  1.461. 

Deti  [Sk.  *(Jayate=diyati ;  dayana  flying.  The  Dhtp 
gives  the  root  as  ^  or  J!  with  def.  of  "  akasa-gamana  "] 
to  fly;  only  in  simile  "  seyyatha  pakkhi  sakuno  yena 
yen'  eva  deti  .  .  ."  D  l.7i  =  M  1.180.  269  =  A  11.209  = 
Pug  58  ;  J  V.417.     Cp.  dayati  &  diyati,  also  uddeti. 


T. 


-T-  as  composition-consonant  (see  Mijller  pp.  62,  63,  on 
euphonic  cons.)  especially  with  agge  (after,  from),  in 
ajja-t-agge,  tama-t-agge,  dahara-t-agge  A  v,3CO ;  cp. 
dera  ta-t-uttari  for  tad-uttari  A  ill. 287,  314,  316. 

Ta°  [Vedic  tad,  etc. ;  Gr.  tuv  rhv  to  ;  Lat.  is-te,  taUs,  etc. ; 
Lith.  t4s  ta ;  Goth.  )>ata ;  Ohg.  etc.  daz ;  E.  that]  base 
of  demonstr.  pron.  for  nt.,  in  oblique  cases  of  m.  &  f..  & 
in  demonstr.  adv.  of  place  &  time  (see  also  sa).  — 
I.  Cases  :  nom.  sg.  nt.  tad  (older)  Vin  1.83  ;  Sn  1052  ; 
Dh  326;  Miln  25  &  tag  (cp.  yag,  kig)  Sn  1037,  1050; 
J  III. 26 ;  ace.  m.  tag  J  n.158,  f,  tag  J  vi.368  ;  geK.  tassa, 
f.  tassa  (Sn  22,  no  ;  J  1.151)  ;  tnstr.  tena,  f.  taya  (J  in. 
188);  abl.  tasma  (J  1167);  tamha  Sn  291,  1138; 
(J  111.26)  &  tato  (usually  as  adv.)  (Sn  390) ;  loc.  tasmig 
(J  1.278),  tamhi  (Dh  117);  tahig  (adv.)  (Pv  1.5')  & 
tahag  (adv.)  (J  1.384  ;  VvA  36) ;  pi.  nom.  m.  te 
(J  11.129),  f.  ta  (J  11.127),  nt.  tani  (Sn  669,  845);  gen. 
tesag,  f.  tasag  (Sn  916);  instr.  tehi,  f.  tahi  (J  11. 128); 
loc.  tesu,  f.  tasu  (Sn  670).  —  In  composition  (Sandhi) 
both  tad-  &  tag-  are  used  with  consecutive  phonetic 
changes  (assimilation),  viz.  (a)  tad° :  (a)  in  subst. 
function  :  tadagge  henceforth  D  1.93  tadutthaya  DhA 
III. 344  ;  tadupiya  (cp.  Trenckner,  Notes  77,  78  =  tadopya 
(see  discussion  under  opeti),  but  cp.  Sk.  tadriipa  Divy 


543  &  tatrupSya.  It  is  simply  tad-upa-ka,  the  adj.- 
positive  of  upa,  of  which  the  compar.-superlative  is 
upama,  meaning  like  this,  i.  e.  of  this  or  the  same  kind. 
Also  spelt  tadupika  (f.)  (at  J  11. 160)  agreeing  with,  agree- 
able, pleasant  Miln  9  ;  tadatthag  to  such  purpose  SnA 
565.  —  With  assimilation :  taccarita ;  tapparayana 
Sn  1114;  tappona  (  =  tad-pra-ava-nata)  see  taccarita; 
tabbisaya  (various)  PvA  73 :  tabbiparlta  (different) 
Vism  290  ;  Dh.\  in. 2 75  ;  tabbiparitataya  in  contrast  to 
that  Vism  450.  —  (/8)  as  crude  form  (not  nt.)  originally 
only  in  ace.  (nt.)  in  adj.  function  like  tad-ahan  this  day, 
then  felt  as  euphonic  d.  esp.  in  forms  where  similarly 
the  euphonic  t  is  used  (ajja-t-agge).  Hence  ta-  13 
abstracted  as  a  crude  (adverbial)  form  used  like  any 
other  root  in  composition.  Thus:  tad-ah-uposathe  on 
this  day's  fast-day  =  to-day  (or  that  day)  being  Sunday 
D  1.47;  Sn  p.  139  (expl"*  as  tam-ah-uposathe,  upo- 
satha-divase  ti  at  SnA  502);  tadahe  on  the  same  day 
PvA  46;  tadahu  (id.)  J  v. 215  (  =  tasmig  chapa-divase). 
tad-anga  for  certain,  surely,  categorical  (orig.  concern- 
ing this  cp.  kimanga),  in  tadanga-nibbuta  S  in. 43  ; 
tadanga-samatikkama  Nd'  203 ;  tadanga-vikkham- 
bhana-samuccheda  Vism  410;  tadanga-pahana  DhsA 
351;  SnA  8;  tadangena  A  iv.411.  — (b)  Un° :  (a)  as 
subst. :  tammaya  (equal  to  this,  up  to  this)  Sn  846 


125 


Ta" 


126 


Tagara 


(=  tapparayana  Nd-  206) ;  A  1. 150.  —  {ft)  Derived  from 
ace.  use  (like  a  0)  as  adj.  is  tankhaqlkJ  (fr.  tag  khaijag) 
Vin   111.140    (  =  muhuttika).  —  (y)   a  reduced   form   of 
tai)  is  to  be  found  as  ta°  in  the  same  origin  &  applica- 
tion as  ta-d-   (under  a  ft)  in  comb"  ta-y-idag  (for  tag- 
idag>tag-idar|>ta-idao>ta-y-idag)  where  y.  takes  the 
place  of  the  euphonic  consonant.     Cp.  in  application 
also  Gr.   Toino  &  ravra,  used  adverbially  as  therefore 
(orig.  just   that)  Sn   1077;  Pv  1.3^;  PvA  2.   16  (  =  tag 
idag).  76.     The  same  ta°  is  to  be  seen  in  tahag  Vv  83"* 
(=tag-ahag),    &   not  to   be   confused   with   tahag  =  te 
ahag  (see  tvag).  —  A  similar  comb"  is  tagyatha  Miln  i 
(this  is  how,  thus,  as  follows)  which  is  the   Sk.  form 
for  the  usual  P.  seyyatha  (instead  of  ta-(y)-yatha,  like 
ta-y-idag) ;   cp.   Trenckner,   P.M.  p.   75.  —  A  sporadic 
form  for  tad  is  tadag  Sn  p.  147  (even  that,  just  that; 
for  tathag  ?).  —  II.  Application  :  i.  ta°  refers  or  points 
back   to   somebody  or   something  just   mentioned   or 
under  discussion  (like  Gr.  nvToi,  Lat.  hie,  Fr.  ci  in  void, 
ect  homme-ci,  etc.) :  this,  that,  just  this  (or  that),  even 
this  (or  these).     In  this  sense  comb**  with  api :  te  c'  api 
(even  these)  Sn  1058.     It  is  also  used  to  indicate  some- 
thing immediately  following  the  statement  of  the  speaker 
(cp.  Gr.    o5f,  E.  thus) :  this  now,  esp.  in  adv.  use  (see 
below) ;   tag   kig  mannasi   D   1.60 ;   yam  etag  panhag 
apucchiAjitatag  vadamite;  Sn  1037;  tag  te  pavakkhami 
(this  now  shall  I  tell  you  :)  Sn  1050  ;  tesag  Buddho  vyakasi 
(to  those  just  mentioned  answered  B.)  Sn  1 127  ;  te  tosita 
(and  they,  pleased  .  .  .)  ib.  1128.  —  2.  Correlative  use: 
(a)  in  rel.  sentences  with  ya°  (preceding  ta") :  yag  ahag 
janami   tag    tvag    janasi    "  what   I    know    (that)   you 
know  "  D  1.88  ;  yo  nerayikanag  sattSnag  aharo  tena 
so  yapeti  "  he  lives  on  that  food  which  is  (characteristic) 
of  the  beings  in  N.  ;  or :  whichever  is  the  food  of  the 
N.  bemgs,  on  this  he  lives  "  PvA  27.  —  (b)  elhptical 
(with  omission  of  the  verb  to  be)  yag  tag  =  that  which 
(there  is),  what  (is),   whatever,    used  like  an  adj.  ;  ye 
te  those  who,  1.  e.  all  (these),  whatever :  ye  pana  te 
mariussa  saddha  .  .  ,  te  evam  Eihagsu  ..."  all  those 
people  who  were  full  of  faith  said  "  Vin  11. 195;  vena 
tena  upayena  ganha  "  catch  him  by  whatever  means 
(you  like),"  i.  e.  by  all  means  J  11.159;  yag  tag  kayira 
"  whatever  he  may  do  "  Dh  42.  —  3.  Distributive  and 
iterative  use  (cp.  Lat.  quisqnis,  etc.) ;   .  .  .  tag  tag  this 
&  that,  i.  e.  each  one ;  yag  yag  passati  tag  tag  pucchati 
whomsoever  he  sees  (each  one)  he  asks  PvA  38 ;  yag 
yag    manaso    piyag    tag    tag    gahetva    whatever  .  .  . 
(all)  that  PvA  77 ;  yo  yo  yag  yag  icchati  tassa  tassa 
tag  tag  adasi  "  whatever  anybody  wished  he  gave  to 
him"  PvA  113.     So  with  adv.  of  ta° :  tattha  tattha 
here  &  there  (freq.) ;  tahag  tahag  id.  J  1.384  ;  VvA  36, 
187  ;  tato  tato  Sn  390.  —  (b)  the  same  in  disjunctive- 
comparative  sense :  tag  ...  tag  is  this  so  &  is  this  so 
(too)  =  the  same  as,  viz.  tag  jivag  tag  sarirag  is  the  soul 
the  same  as  the  body  (opp.  aiinag  j.  a.  s.)  A  v.  193,  etc. 
(see   jiva).  —  4.  Adverbial  use   of   some   cases    (local', 
temporal*",  &    modaF) :    ace.    tag    (a)   there    (to) :    tad 
avasari  he  withdrew  there  D.  11. 126,  156  ;  (b)  tag  enag 
at  once,  presently  (  =  tavad-eva)  Vin  1.127   (cp-   Ved. 
ena) ;   (c)  therefore   (cp.  kig  wherefore,  why),   that  is 
why,  now,  then:  S  n.17;  M  1.487;  Sn  luo;  Pv  1.2^ 
(=tasma  PvA   11   &   103);  11. 7I*;  cp.  tag  kissa  hetu 
Nd^  on  jhana.  — gen.  tassa  (c)  therefore  A  iv.333.  — 
instr.   tena   (a)  there   (direction  =  there  to),   always  in 
correl.  with  yena :  where — there,  or  in  whatever  direc- 
tion, here  &  there      Freq.  in  formula  denoting  approach 
to  a  place  (often  unnecessary  to  translate) ;  e.  g.  yena 
Jivakassa  ambavanag  tena  payasi :  where  the  Mango- 
grove  of  J.  was,  there  he  went  =  he  went  to  the  M.  of 
1.  D  1.49  ;  yena  Gotamo  ten'  upasankama  go  where  G. 
is  D  1.88  ;  yena  avasathagarag  ten'  upasankami  D  11.85 
etc. ;   yena   va   tena   va  palayanti   they   run   here    & 
there  A  n.33  ;  (c)  so  then,  now  then,  therefore,  thus 
(often  with  hi)  J  1.151.  279 ;  PvA  60 ;  Miln  23  ;  tena  hi 
D  11.2  ;  J  1.266;  111.188;  Miin  19.  —abl.  tasma  (c)  out 


of  this  reason,  therefore  Sn  1051,  1104;  Nd"  279  (=tag 
karanag)  ;  PvA  11,  103;  tato  (a)  from  there,  thence 
Pv  1. 12'';  (b)  then,  hereafter  PvA  39. — loc.  tahig 
(a)  there  (over  there  >  beyond)  Pv  1.5';  (c)  =  therefore 
PvA  25  ;  tahag  (a)  there  ;  usually  repeated  :  see  above 
II.  3  (a).  —  See  also  tattha,  tatha,  tada,  tadi,  etc. 

Taka  a  kind  of  medicinal  gum,  enumerated  with  two 
varieties,  viz.  takapatti  &  takapanni  under  jatuni 
bhesajjani  at  Vin  1.201. 

Takka'  [Sk.  tarka  doubt ;  science  of  logic  (Ut.  "  turning 
tic  twisting")  *treik,  cp.  Lat.  tricae,  intricare  (to 
"  trick,"  puzzle),  &  also  Sk.  tarku  bobbin,  spindle,  Lat. 
torqueo  (torture,  turn)]  doubt ;  a  doubtful  view  (often  = 
ditthi,  appl.  like  samma",  miccha-ditthi).  hair-splitting 
reasoning,  sophistry  ( =  itiMtihag  Nd^  151),  Opp.  to 
takka  (=  miccha-sankappo  Vbh  86,  356)  is  dhamma- 
takka  right  thought  ( :vuccati  samma-sankappo  Nd" 
318  ;  cp.  Dhs  7,  29S),  D  1. 10  ("pariyahata)  ;  M  1.68  (id.) ; 
Sn  209  (°g  pahaya  na  upcti  sankhag)  885  (doubt),  886  ; 
Dhs  7,  21,  298  (-(- vitakka,,trsl.  as  "  ratiocination  "  by 
Mrs.  Kh.  D.);  Vbh  86,  237  (samma°)  356;  Vism  189. 
See  also  vitakka. 

-agama  the  way  of  (right)  thought,  the  discipline  of 
correct  reasoning  Davs  v.22  ;  -Svacara  as  neg.  atakkS- 
vacarS  in  phrase  dhamma  gambhira  duddasa  a"  nipuna 
(views,  etc.)  deep,  difficult  to  know,  beyond  logic  (or 
sophistry :  i.  e.  not  accessible  to  doubt  ?),  profound 
Vin  i.4  =  D  i.i2  =  S  1. 1 36  =  M  1.487.  Gogerley  trsl.  "  un- 
attainable by  reasoning,"  Andersen  "  being  beyond  the 
sphere  of  thought  "  ;  -asaya  room  for  doubt  Sn  972  ; 
-gahana  the  thicket  of  doubt  or  sophistry  J  1.97 ; 
-vaddhana  increasing,  furthering  doubt  or  wrong  ideas 
Sn  1084  (see  Nd"  269) ;  -hetu  ground  for  doubt  (or 
reasoning  ?)  A  ii.i93  =  Nd"  151. 

Takka"  (nt.)  [Should  it  not  belong  to  the  same  root  as 
takka'  ?]  buttermilk  (with  J  water),  included  in  the 
five  products  from  a  cow  (pafica  gorasa)  at  Vin  1.244  •' 
made  by  churning  dadhi  Miln  173;  J  1.340  ;  11. 363  ; 
DhA  11.68  (takkadi-ambila). 

Takkava  (nt.)  thought,  representation  (of:  -°)  J  1.68 
(ussavabindu"). 

Takkara'  (  =  tat-kara)  a  doer  thereof  D  1.235,  M  1.68; 
Dh  19. 

Takkara"  a  robber,  a  thief  J  iv.432. 

Takka]a  (nt.)  a  bulbous  plant,  a  tuberose  J  iv.46,  371 
(bilah",  expl.  at  373  by  takkala-kanda)  =  vi.578. 

Takkari  (f)  the  tree  Sesbania  Aegyptiaca  (a  kind  of 
acacia)  Th  2,  297  (  =  daUka-latthi  ThA  226). 

Takkika  (adj.)  [fr.  takka']  doubting,  having  wrong  views, 
foolish  ;  m.  a  sophist,  a  fool  Ud  73  ;  J  1.97  ;  Miln  248. 

Takkin  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  takka']  thinking,  reasoning,  esp. 
sceptically  ;  a  sceptic  D  i.ib!=s(takki  vimagsi) ;  M  1.520  ; 
DA  1. 106  (=takketva  vitakketva  difthi-gahino  etag 
adhivacanag),  cp.  pp.  114,  115  (takki-vada). 

Takketi  [Denom.  of  tarka]  to  think,  reflect,  reason,  argue 
DA  1. 106;  DhsA  142.  —  attanag  t.  to  have  self-con- 
fidence, to  trust  oneself  J  1.273.  396.  468  ;  111.233. 

Takkotaka  [is  reading  correct  ?]  a  kind  of  insect  or  worm 
Vism  258.     Reading  at  id.  p.  KhA  58  is  kakkotaka. 

Takkola  [Sk.  kakkola  &  takkola]  BdeUium,  a  perfume 
made  from  the  beiry  of  the  kakkola  plant  J  1.291  ;  also 
as  Ni  at  Miln  359  (the  Takola  of  Ptolemy ;  perhaps= 
Sk.  kaiifota:  Trenckner,  Notes,  p.  59). 

Tagara  (nt.)  the  shrub  Tabernaemontana  coronaria,  and 
a  fragrant  powder  or  perfume  obtained  from  it,  incense 


Taggaruka 


127 


Tattika 


Vin  1.203  ;  It  68  { =  Udanavarga  p.  112,  No.  8) ;  Dh  5^, 
55,  56  (candana+ )  ;  J  iv.286  :  vi.ioo  (the  shrub)  173 
(id.);  MUn  338;  Davs  v.50  ;  DhA  1.422  (tagara-malhka 
two  kinds  of  gandha). 

TaggMuka=tad+ garuka,  see  taccarita. 

Taggha  [tad+  gha,  cp.  in-gha  ^t  Lat.  cc-ce  cgo-mct, 
Cr.  syij-yfj  affirmative  particle  ("  ckag.sena "  DA 
J. 236 ;  ekagsa-vacana  J  v. 06  ;  eka^jse  nipata  J  v. 307) : 
truly,  surely,  there  now  I  Vin  it. 126,  297;  D  1.85; 
M  1.207.  463  ;  III. 1 79  ;  J  V.65  (v.  1.  taggha) ;  Sn  p.  87. 

Taca  '&  taco  nt.)  [Vedic  tvak  ({.),  gen.  tvacah]  i.  bark.  — 
2.  skin,  hide  (similar  to  canini,!,  denoting  the  thick, 
outer  skin,  as  contrasted  with  chavi,  thin  skin,  see 
chavi  &  cp.  J  1. 146).  —  I.  bark:  M  1.T98,  434,  488; 
A  V.5.  —  2.  skin:  often  used  together  with  naharu  & 
atthi  (tendons  &  bones),  to  denote  the  outer  appear- 
ance (framework)  of  the  body,  or  that  which  is  most 
conspicuous  in  emaciation:  A  i.5'i  =  Sdhp.  46;  taca- 
magsavalepana  (4- atthi  naharusapyutta)  Sn  194  = 
J  1. 146  (where  "vilepana) ;  SnA  247;  atthi-taca-matta- 
vasesasarira  "  nothing  but  skin  &  bones  "  PvA  2P1.  — 
Of  the  cast-ort  skin  of  a  snake :  urago  va  jinnaij  tacag 
jahati  Sn  r,  same  simile  Pv  1.12'  (  =  nimmoka  PvA  63). 

—  kaiicanasannibha-taca  (adj.)  of  golden -coloured  skin 
(a  sign  of  beauty)  Sn  551;  Vv  30^=32^;  Miln  75; 
VvA  g.  —  valita-tacata  a  condition  of  wrinkled  skin 
(as  sign  of  age)  Nd^  252;^;  ;  Kh  ill.  ;  KhA  45  ;  Sdhp 
102. 

-gandha  tne  scent  of  bark  Dhs  625  ;  -paiicaka-kam- 
matthana  the  fivefold  "body  is  skin,"  etc,  subject  of 
kammatlhana-practice.  This  refers  to  the  satipat- 
thana  (kaye  kay'  anupassana  :)  see  kaya  I.  (a)  of  which 
the  first  deals  with  the  anupjissana  (viewing)  of  the 
body  a.s  consistmg  of  the  five  (dermatic)  constituents 
of  kcsa  loma  nakha  danta.  taco  (hair  of  head,  other 
hair,  nails,  teeth,  skin  or  epidermis:  see  Kli  iii.).  It 
occurs  in  formula  (inducing  a  person  to  take  up  the  life 
of  a  bhikkiui) :  tara-p  kammatthanar)  acikkhitva  taij 
pabbajesi  J  1.116;  DhA  1.243;  11.87,  '40.  242.  Cp. 
also  Vism  353;  DhA  ii.8.«  ;  SnA  246,  247;  -pariyo- 
naddha  with  wrinkled  (shrivelled)  skin  (of  Petas :  as 
sign  of  thirst)  l'v\  1 72  ;  -rasa  the  taste  of  bark  Dhs  629  , 
•sara  (a)  (even)  the  best  (bark,  i.  e.)  tree  S  1.70  =  911  = 
It  45  ;  —  (b)  a  (rope  of)  strong  fibre  J  111.204  (=venu- 
dandaka). 

Taccarita  (adj.)  in  comb"  with  tabbahula  taggaruka 
tanninna  tappona  tappabhara  freq.  as  formula,  ex- 
pressing :  converging  to  this  end,  bent  thereon,  striving 
towards  this  (aim) :  Nd*  under  tad.  The  same  comb" 
with  Nibbana-ninna,  N.-popa,  N.-pabhara  freq.  (see 
Nibbtna). 

Taccba'  [Vedic  taksan,  cp.  tastr.  to  taksati  (see  taccheti) 
Lat  textor,  Gr.  tUtmv  carpenter  (cp.  architect), 
Tf\rii  art]  a  carpenter,  usually  as  °ka :  otherwise  only 
in  cpd.  "siikaia  the  carpenter-pig  (  =  a  boar,  so  called 
from  felling  trees),  title  &  hero  of  Jataka  No.  492 
(iv.342  sq.).     Cp.  vadijhakin. 

Taccba-  (adj.)  [Der.  fr.  tatha-i- ya=  tath-ya  "as  it  is," 
Sk  tathyaj  true,  real,  justified,  usually  in  comb"  w. 
bhuta.  bhutataccha  tatha,  D  1.190  (palipada  :  the  only 
true  &  real  path)  S  v. 229  (dhamma ;  text  has  tatha, 
v.  I.  tathai)  better) ;  as  bhuta  t.  dhammika  (well  founded 
and  just)  D  1.230.  bhuta-t- taccha  :  A  11.100=  Pug  50; 
VvA  72.  —  yatha  tacthag  according  to  truth  Sn  1096 
which  is  interpreted  by  Nd^  270 :  tacchar)  vuccati 
amatar)  Nibb.lnar),  etc.  —  (nt.)  taccha  a  truth  Sn  327. 

—  ataccha  false,  unreal,  unfounded  ;  a  lie,  a  falsehood 
D  1.3  (abhuta+);  V'vA  72  (=musa). 

Tacchaka=  taccha'.  (a)  a  carpenter  Dh  80  (cp.  DhA 
11.147);   Miln  413.     magga°  a  road-builder   J   vi.348. 


—  (b)  =  taccha-sukara  J  iv.350.  —  (c)  a  class  of  Nagas 
D  11.258.  —  f.  tacchika  a  woman  of  low  social  standing 
(  =  veni,  bamboo-worker)  J  v.  106. 

Tacchati  [fr.  taccba',  cp.  taccheti]  to  build,  construct ; 
maggao  t.  to  construct  or  repair  a  road  J  vi.348. 

Taccheti  [probably  a  denom.  fr.  taccha'  =  Lat.  texo  to 
weave  (orig.  to  plait,  work  together,  work  artistically), 
cp.  Sk.  tastr  architect  =  Lat.  textor ;  Sk.  taksan,  etc., 
Gr.  rtx>'')  craft,  handiwork  (cp.  technique),  Ohg.  dehsa 
hatchet.  Cp.  also  orig.  meaning  of  karoti  &  kamma] 
to  do  wood-work,  to  square,  frame,  chip  J  1.201  ; 
Miln  372,  383. 

Tajia  [tad-l-ya,  cp.  Sk.  tadiya]  "this  like,"  belonging 
to  this,  founded  on  this  or  that ;  on  the  ground  of  this 
(or  these),  appropriate  suitable  ;  csp.  in  comb"  with 
vayama  (a  suitable  effort  as  "  causa  movens  ")  A  1.207  ; 
Miln  53.  Also  with  reference  to  sense-impressions,  etc. 
denoting  the  complemental  sensation  S  iv.215;  M  i. 
igij,  191  ;  Dhs  3-6  (cp.  DHs.  trsl.  p.  6  &  Com.  expl. 
anucchavika).  —  PvA  203  (tajjassa  papassa  katatta : 
by  the  doing  of  such  evil,  v.  1.  SS  tassajjassa,  may 
be  a  contraction  of  tadiyassa  otherwise  tadisassa). 
Note.  The  expl"  of  Kern,  Toev.  11.87  (tajja=  tad-t- ja 
"  arising  from  this  ")  is  syntactically  impossible. 

Tajjana  (f)  [from  tajjeti]  threat,  menace  J  11. 169; 
Vv  50';  VvA  212  (bhayasantajjana). 

Tajiaaiya  [grd.  of  tajjeti]  to  be  blamed  or  censured  Vism 
1 1 5  (a") ;  (n.)  censure,  blame,  scorn,  rebuke.  M  50th  Sta ; 
Miln  365.  As  t.  t.  "kamma  one  of  the  sangha-kammas : 
Vin  1.49,  53,  143  sq.,  325  ;  11.3  sq.,  226,  230  ;  A  1.99. 

Tajjita  [pp.  of  tajjeti]  threatened,  frightened,  scared ; 
spurred  or  moved  by  (-°)  D  1.141  (danda°,  bhaya") ; 
Dh  1S8  (bhaya°) ;  Pug  56.  Esp.  in  comb'  marana- 
bhaya°  moved  by  the  fear  of  death  J  1.150,  223;  PvA 
216. 

Tajjeti  [Cans,  of  tarjati.  to  frighten.  Cp.  Gr.  rapjioi;  fright, 
fear,  rapiiiM  ;  Lat.  torvus  wild,  frightful]  to  frighten, 
threaten;  curse,  rail  against  J  1.157,  158;  PvA  55. — 
Pp.  tajjita.  —  Caus.  tajjapcti  to  cause  to  threaten,  to 
accuse  PvA  23  (  =  paribhasapeti). 

Tata  [*tl,  see  tala  &  cp.  talu,  also  Lat.  tellu.s]  decUvity  or 
side  of  a  hill,  precipice ;  side  of  a  river  or  well,  a  bank 
J  1.232.  303;  n.315  (udapana  )  ;  iv.141  ;  SnA  519, 
DhA  1.73  (papata°).     See  also  talaka. 

Tatatatayati  [Onomatopoetic,  to  make  a  sound  like  tat- 
tat-  Root  *kl  (on  t  for  J  cp.  tala  for  tala)  to  grind  one's 
teeth,  to  be°in  a  frenzy.  Cp.  citicitayati.  See  note 
on  gala  and  kinakinayati]  to  rattle,  shake,  clatter;  to 
grind  or  gnash  one's  teeth  ;  to  fizz.  Usually  said  of 
people  in  frenzy  or  fury  (in  ppr.  "yanto  or  °yamana) : 
J  1.347  (rosena)  439  (kodhcna) ;  11.277  (of  ^  bhikkhu 
kodhana  "  boihng  with  rage  "  like  a  "  uddhane  pak- 
khitta-lonar)  viya ")  ;  the  latter  trope  also  at  DhA 
IV. 176;  DhA  1.370  (aggimhi  pakkhitta-lonasakkhara 
viya  rosena  t.) ;  111.328  (vatahata-talapannag  viya); 
VvA  47,  121  (of  a  kodhabhibhuto ;  v.  1.  katakataya- 
mana),  206  (4-akkosati  paribhasati),  256.  Cp.  ailso 
katakatayati  &  karakara. 

Tatt&ka  [Etym.  unknown]  a  bowl  for  holding  food,  a  flat 
bowl,  porringer,  salver  J  iii.io  (suvanija"),  97,  121,  538; 
iv.28t.  According  to  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  taken  into 
Tamil  as  tattai).  cp.  also  Av.  tasta.  Morris  (J.P.T.S. 
1884.  80)  compares  Marathi  tasta  (ewer). 

Tattika  (f)  [cp.  kataka]  a  (straw)  mat  Vin  iv.40  (Bdhgh 
on  this :  tettikai)  (sic)  nama  tfdapanijehi  va  vakehi 
va  katatattika,  p.  357);  J  1.141  (v.  1.  taddhika); 
Vism  97. 


Tandula 


128 


Tanha 


Ta^^QlA  (*Sk.  tai^^lula :  dialectical]  rice-grain,  rice  husked 
&  ready  for  boiling;  freq.  comb'  with  tila  (q.  v.)  in 
mentioning  of  offerings,  presentations,  etc. :  lonar) 
telar)  taijdulai)  khadaniyar)  sakatesu  aropetva  Vin 
1.220,  238,  243,  249;  talitanduladayo  J  111.53;  I'vA 
105.  —Vin  1.244  ;  A  1.130  ;  J  1.255  ;  "'-SS.  425  (tandu- 
lani  metri  causa) ;  vi.365  (mula"  coarse  r.,  majjhima" 
medium  r.,  kanika  the  finest  grain) ;  Sn  295  ;  Pug  32  ; 
DhA  1.395  (sali-taridula  husked  rice);  DA  i.q^.  Cp! 
ut°.  ^ 

-ammana  a  measure  (handful  ?)  of  rice  J  n.436. 
-dona  a  rice-vat  or  rice-bowl  DhA  iv.15;  -paladvara 
"  doors  (i.  e.  house)  of  the  rice-guard  "  Npl,  M  11.185  i 
-mutthi  a  handful  of  rice  PvA  131  ;  -horaa  an  oblation 
of  rice  D  i.g. 

Ta^^uleyyaka  [cp.  Sk.  tanduHya]  the  plant  Amaranthus 
polygonoides  VvA  99  (enum''  amongst  various  kinds 
of  daka). 

Tapha  (f.)  [Sk.  trsija,  besides  tarsa  (m.)  &  tfs  (f.)  =  Av 

tarsna  thirst,  Gr.  rapaia  dryness,   Goth,   {laiirsus,   Ohg. 

durst,  E.  drought  &  thirst;  to  *ters  to  be,  or  to  make 

dry  in  Gr.  ripaofiai,  Lat.  torreo   to   roast,    Goth,   ga- 

jiairsan,  Ohg.  derren. — Another  form  of  t.  is  lasina]  lit. 

drought,  thirst;  fig.  craving,  hunger  for,   excitement, 

the  fever  of  unsatisfied  longing  (c.  loc. :   kabalinkare 

ahare   "thirst"    for   solid   food   S    ii.ioi    sq  ;    civare 

pindapate  tanha  =  greed  for  Sn  339).     Opp^"  to  peace  of 

mind  (upekha,  santi).  —  A.  Literal  meaning  :  khudaya 

taijhaya  ca  khajjamana  tormented  by  hunger  &  thirst 

Pv  u.i^   (  =  pipasaya  PvA  69).  —  B.  In    its    secondary 

meaning  :  tanha  is  a  state  of  mind  that  leads  to  rebirth. 

Plato  puts  a  similar  idea  into  the  mouth  of  Socrates 

(Phasdo   458,   9).     Neither  the  Greek  nor  the  Indian 

thinker  has  thought  it  necessary  to  explain  how  this 

effect  is  produced.     In  the  Chain  of  Causation  (D  11. 

34)  we  are   told    hovi  Tanha   arises — when   the  sense 

organs  come  into  contact  with  the  outside  world  there 

follow  sensation  and  feeling,  &  these  (if,  as  elsewhere 

stated,  there  is  no  mastery  over  them)  result  in  Tanha. 

In  the  First  Proclamation  (S  v.420  ff.  ;  Vin  i.io)  it  is 

said  that  Tanha,  the  source  of  sorrow,  must  be  rooted 

out  by  the  way  there  laid  down,  that  is  by  the  Arj'an 

Path.     Only  then  can  the  idea!  life  be  lived,     just  as 

physical  thirst  arises  of  itself,  and  must  be  assuaged, 

got  rid  of,  or  the  body  dies ;  so  the  mental  "  thirst," 

arising  from  without,  becomes  a  craving  that  must  be 

rooted  out,  quite  got  rid  of,  or  there  can  be  no  Nibbana. 

The  figure  is  a  strong  one,  and  the  word  Tapha  is  found 

meiinly  in  poetry,   or  in   prose  passages  charged   with 

religious  emotion.     It  is  rarely  used  in  tlje  philosophy 

or  the  psychologj-.     Thus  in  the  long  Enumeration  of 

Qualities  (Dhs),  Tanha  occurs  in  one  only  out  of  the 

1,366  sections  (Dhs  1059),  iS  then  only  as  one  of  many 

subordinate  phases  of  lobha.     Tanha  binds  a  man  to  the 

chain  of  Sagsara,   of  being  reborn  &   dying  again  & 

again   (j'-')  until  Arahantship  or  Nibbana  is  attained, 

tanha  destroyed,  &   the  cause  ahke  of  sorrow  and  of 

future  births  removed  (2').      In  this  sense  Nibbana  is 

.  identical  with  "  sabbupadhi-patiuissaggo  tanhakkhayo 

virago      nirodho  "      (see     Nibbana).  —  i.   Systcmatna- 

lions  :  The  3  aims  of  t.  kama",  bliava",  vibhava',  that 

is  craving  for  sensuous  pleasure,  for  rebirth  (anywhere, 

but  especially  in  heaven),  or  for  no  rebirth  ;  cp.  Vibhava. 

These  three  aims  are  mentioned  already  in  the  First 

Proclamation  (S  V.42L  ;  Vin  i.io)  and  often  afterwards 

D11.61,  308;  111.216,  275;  S  111.26,  158;  It  50;  Ps  1.26, 

39;  11.147;  Vbh  101,  365;  Nett  160.     Another  group 

of  3  aims  of  tanha  is  given  as  kama°,  rupa°  &  ariipa" 

at  D  III. 2 16  ;  Vbh  395  ;  &  yet  another  as  ri5pa°,  ariipa" 

&  nirodha"  at  D  111.216.  —The  source  of  t.  is  said  to 

be  sixfold  as  founded  on  &  relating  to  the  6  bahirani 

ayatanani   (see  rupa),   objects  of  sense  or  sensations, 

viz.  sights,  sounds,  smells,  etc. ;  D  11.58 ;  Ps  1.6  sq. ; 


Nd^  271'  ;  in  threefold  aspects  (as  kama-tariha,  bhava" 
A  vibhava")  with  relation  to  the  6  senses  discussed  at 
Vism  567  sq.  ;  also  under  the  term  cha-tanha-kaya 
(sixfold  group,  see  cpds.)  M  1.51  ;  111.280;  Ps  1.26; 
elsewhere  called  chadvarika-tanha  "  arising  through  the 
O  doors  "  DhA  111.2S6.  —  18  varieties  of  t.  (comprising 
worldly  objects  of  enjoyment,  ease,  comfort  &  well- 
living  are  enum''  at  Nd^  271"'  (under  tanha-lepa). 
36  kinds:  18  referring  to  sensations  (illusions)  of  sub- 
jective origin  (ajjhattikassa  upadaya),  &  i8  to  sensa- 
tions affecting  the  individual  in  objective  quality 
(bahirassa  upadaya)  at  A  11.212;  Nett  37;  &  108 
varieties  or  specifications  of  t.  are  given  at  Nd^  27'" 
(under  Jappa)=Dhs  i059  =  Vbh  361. — Tanha  as 
"  kusa'.a  pi  akusala  pi  "  (good  &  bad)  occurs  at  Nett  87  ; 
cp.  Talaputa's  good  t.  Th  1.1091  i.  —  2.  Import  of  the 
term  :  (a)  various  characterizations  of  t.  :  maha"  Sn  114; 
ka,ma°Si  131  ;  gedha°Si.i5  ;  bhava°  D  111.274  (-1- avijja) : 
grouped  with  ditthi  (wrong  views)  Nd^  271'",  271".  T. 
fetters  the  world  &  causes  miserj* :  "  yaya  ayag  loko 
uddhasto  parix'onaddho  tantakulajato  "  A  11.211  sq. ; 
tanhaya  jayati  soko  tanhaya  jayatJ  bhayai)  tanhaya 
vippamuttassa  natthi  soko  kuto  bhayai)  Dh  216; 
tanhaya  uddito  loko  S  1.40  ;  yag  loke  piyariipai)  sata- 
rupai)  etth'  esa  tanha  .  .  .  Vbh  103  ;  it  is  the  4th  con- 
stituent of  Mara's  army  (M-sena)  Sn  436  ;  M's  daughter, 
S  1.134-  I"  comparisons:  t. -t-jalini  visattika  S  1.107; 
=  bharadanai)  (t.  ponobbhavika  nandiraga-sabagata) 
S  111.36;  V.4C2  :  ganda=kaya,  gandamulan  ti  tanhay' 
etar)  adhivacanai)  S  iv.83  ;  =  sota  S  iy.292  (and  a 
khrnasavo  =  chinnasoto) ;  manujassa  pamatta-carino  t. 
vaddhati  maluva  viya  Dh  334.  —  (b)  tanha  as  the 
inciting  factor  of  rebirth  &  incidental  cause  of  sagsara : 
kammar)  khettai)  viiinanag  bijar)  tanha  sineho  .  .  . 
evar)  ayatig  punabbhavabhinibbatti  hoti  A  1.223  '■  t. 
ca  avasesa  ca  kilesa ;  ayag  vuccati  dukkha-samudayo 
Vbh  107,  similarly  Nett  23  sq.  ;  as  ponobbhavika 
(causing  rebirth)  S  111.26;  Ps  11.147,  etc.  ;  as  a  link  in 
the  chain  of  interdependent  causation  (see  paticca- 
samuppada) :  vedana-paccaya  tanha,  tanha-paccaya 
upadanag  Vin  1.1,  5  ;  D  11.31,  33.  56,  etc.  ;  t.  &  upadhi : 
tanhaya  sati  upadhi  hoti  t.  asati  up.  na  hoti  S  11. 108  ; 
ye  tanhag  vaddhenti  te  upadhig  vaddhenti,  etc.  S  11. 109  ; 
tanhaya  niyati  loko  tanhaya  parikissati  S  1.39;  tanha 
sagyojanena  sagj'utta  satta  digharattag  sandhavanti 
sagsaranti  It  8.  See  also  t.-dutiya.  —  (c)  To  have  got 
rid  of  t.  is  Arahantship :  vigata-tanha  vigata-pipasa 
vigata-parilaha  D  iu.238 ;  S  in. 8,  107  sq.,  190; 
samulag  tanhag  abbuyha  S  1.16  =  63,  121  (Godhiko 
parinibbuto) ;  111.26  (mcchato  parinibbuto) ;  vita° 
Sn  83,  849,  1041  (+nibbuta);  tanhaya  vippahanena 
S  1.39  ("  Nibbanan  "  iti  vuccati).  40  (sabbag  chindati 
bandhanag) ;  tanhag  ma  kasi  ma  lokag  punar  agami 
Sn  339  ;  tanhag  parinnaya  .  .  .  te  nara  oghatioria  ti 
Sn  1082  ;  ucchinna-bhava-tanha  Sn  746 ;  tanhaya 
vupasama  S  111.231;  t.-nirodha  S  iv.390.  —  See  also 
M  1. 51  ;  Dh  154;  it  9  (vita"-)- anadana),  50  (°g  pahan- 
tvana);  Sn  495.  49&.  9i6;  &  cp-  °khaya.  —  3.  Kin- 
dred terms  which  in  Commentaries  are  expl""  by  one 
of  the  tanha-formuli  (cp.  Nd*  271^  &  27i»''):  (a)  t.  in 
groups  of  5  ;  (a)  with  kilesa  sagyoga  vipaka  duccarita; 
(/J)  ditthi  kilesa  duccarita  avijja  ;  (y)  ditthi  kil°  kamma 
duccarita.  —  (b)  quasi-synonyms  :  adana,  eja,  gedha, 
jappa,  nandi,  nivesana.  parilaha,  pipasa,  lepa,  loluppa, 
vana,  visattika,  sibbani.  —  In  cpds.  the  form  ta^ha 
is  represented  by  tanha  before  double  consonants,  as 
.tanhakkhaya,  etc. 

-adhipateyya  mastery  over  t.  S  111.103;  -adhipanna 
seized  by  t.  S.  1.29  ;  Sn  1123  ;  -adasa  the  mirror  of  t. 
A  11.54  :  Sbhinivesa  fuU  of  t.  PvA  267  ;  -aluka  greedy 
J  11.78  ;  -uppada  (pi.)  (four)  grounds  of  the  rise  of 
craving  (viz.  civara,  pindapata,  senasana,  itibhava- 
bhava)  A  ii.io  =  It  109;  D  111.228;  Vbh  375;  -kaya 
(pi.)  (six)  groups  of  t.  (see  above  B  i)  S  11. 3  ;  D  111.244, 
280 ;  Ps  1.26 ;  Vbh  380  ;  -kkliaya  the  destruction  of  th« 


Tanhiyati 


129 


Tatha 


excitement  of  cravings,  almost  synonymous  with 
Nibbana  (see  above  B2C) :  "rata  Dh  187  (expl"*  at  DhA 
III. 24 1  :  arabatte  c'  eva  nibbane  ca  abhirato  hoti) ;  — 
Vv  73'  (expl''  by  Nibbana  VvA  296)  :  therefore  in  the 
expositionary  formula  of  Nibbana  as  equivalent  with 
N.  Vin  1.5  ;  S  ni.133  ;  I*  8^-  ^tc.  (see  N.).  In  the  same 
sense:  sabbaiijaho  tauhakkhaye  vimutto  Vin  1.8  = 
M  l.i7i  =  Dh  353;  tanhakkhaya  viraga  nirodha  nib- 
bana A  n.34,  expl""  at  Vism  293  ;  bhiklchu  arahar)  cha 
th&nJni  adhimutto  hoti :  nekkhammddhimutto,  pavi- 
veka",  avyipajjha",  up^danakkhaya°,  tai>hakkhaya°, 
asammoha°  Vin  1.183  ;  cp.  also  Sn  70,  211,  1070,  1137  ; 
-gata  obsessed  with  excitement,  i.  e.  a  victim  of  t. 
Sn  776;  -gaddula  the  leash  of  t.  Nd'  27i"s;  ;  -cchida 
breaking  the  cravings  Sn  102 1 ,  1 10 1  ;  -jala  the  snare 
of  t.  M  1. 271  ;  Th  I,  306;  Nd'  271";  -dutiya  who  has 
the  fever  or  excitement  of  t.  as  his  companion  A  11.10  = 
It  9=iC9=Sn  740,  74i  =  Nd^  3"5  ;  cp.  Dhs.  trsl.  p. 
278  ;  -nadi  the  river  of  t.  Nd*  271"  ;  cp.  nadiya  soto  ti : 
taphay'  etar)  adhivacanai)  It  114;  -nighatana  the 
destruction  of  t.  Sn  1085  ;  -pakkha  the  party  of  t.,  all 
that  belongs  to  t.  Nett.  53.  69.  88,  160  ;  -paccaya 
caused  by  t.  Sn  p.  I4'4jl  Vism  568  ;  -mulaka  rooted  in 
t.  (dhammS :  9  items)  Ps  1.26,  130;  Vbh  390;  -lepa 
cleaving  to  t.  Nd^  271"";  (+ ditjhi-lepa) ;  -vasika 
being  in  the  power  of  t.  J  IV.3  ;  -vtcarita  a  thought  of  t. 
A  11.212  ;  -sankhaya  (complete)  destruction  of  t.  ; 
"sutta  M  1. 251  (cula°),  256  (maha°) :  "vimulti  salvation 
through  cessation  of  t.  M  1.256.  270,  &  °vimulta  (adj.) 
S  IV. 391  :  -sainudda  the  ocean  of  t.  Nd  271"  ;  -sambhuta 
produced  by  t.  (t.  ayai)  k5yo)  A  11. 145  (cp.  Sn  p.  144  ; 
yai)  kiiici  dukkhai)  sambhoti  sabbar)  tanhapaccayJ) ; 
-saijyojana  the  fetter  of  t.  (adj.)  fettered,  bound  by  t., 
in  phrase  t.-sagyojanena  sagyutta  sattj  digharattai) 
sandhavanti  sagsaranti  It  8,  &  t.-saqyojananai)  sat- 
tanat)  sandhavatai)  saijsaratar)  S  11.178  =  111.149^ 
PvA  166  ;  A  1.223  ;  -salla  the  sting  or  poisoned  arrow  of 
t.  S  1.192  (°assa  hantarat)  vande  adiccabandhunai)),  the 
extirpation  of  which  is  one  of  the  12  achievements  of  a 
mahesi  Nd-  503  ("assa  abbulhana ;  cp.  above). 

TaQhiyati  [=tanhayati,  denom.  fr.  tanha,  cp.  Sk.  tj^yati 
to  have  thirst]  to  have  thirst  for  S  11. 13  (for  v.  1.  SS. 
tuijhiyati ;  BB.  tasati)  ;  Vism  544  (+  upidiyati  ghat  - 
yati) ;  cp.  tzisati  &  pp.  tasita. 

Tata  [pp.  of  tanoti]  stretched,  extended,  spread  out  S  i 
357  (jala) :  J  IV. 484  (tantani  jalani  Text,  katani  v.  1. 
for  tatani).  Note  :  samo  tata  at  J  1.183  is  to  be  rei  I 
as  samotata  (spread  all  over). 

Tatiya  [Sk.  tftiya,  Av.  «ritya,  Gr.  rpiroc,  Lat.  tertius, 
Goth,  fridja.  E.  third]  Num.  ord.  the  third.  —  Sn  97 
(parabhavo)  ;  436  (khuppipasa  as  the  3rd  division  in  the 
army  of  Mara),  looi  ;  J  11.353  ;  Dh  309  ;  PvA  69  (tati- 
yaya  jatiya:  in  her  third  birth).  Tatiyag  (nt.  adv.) 
for  the  3rd  time  D  11. 155  ;  Sn  88,  95.  450  ,  tatiyavirai) 
id.  DhA  1. 183;  VvA  47  (=at  last);  yiva  tatiyao  id. 
Vin  II.  188;  J  1.279;  DhA  11.75;  PvA  272  (in  casting 
the  lot :  the  third  time  decides) ;  ySva  tatiyakar)  id. 
D  1.95- 

Tato  [abl.  of  pron.  base  ta°  (see  ta°  11. 4)]  i.  from  this,  in 
this  S  111.96  (tatoja) ;  J  111.281  (tato  parar)  beyond  this, 
after  this);  Nd^  664  (id.);  DA  1.212  (tatonidSna). — 
2.  thence  J  1.278;  Miln  47.  —  3.  thereupon,  further, 
afterwards  J  1.58 ;  Dh  42  ;  Miln  48 ;  PvA  21.  etc. 

Tatta'  [pp.  of  tapati]  heated,  hot,  glowing ;  of  metals : 
in  a  melted  state  (cp.  uttatta)  A  Il.i22«(tattena 
talena  osificante,  as  punishment)  ;  Dh  308  (ayogu|a) ; 
J  11.352  (id.) ;  IV. 306  (tattatapo  '''  of  red-hot  heat," 
i.  e.  in  severe  self-torture) ;  Miln  26,  45  (adv.  red-hot) ; 
PvA  22 1  (tatta-lohasecanar)  the  pouring  over  of  glowing 
copper,  one  of  the  punishments  in  Niraya). 


Tatta^  (nt.)  [tad-f-tva]  truth;  abl.  tattato  according  to 
truth;  accurately  J  11.125  (natvS) ;  111.276  (ajanitvi 
not  knowing  exactly). 

Tattaka'  [tatta  pp.  of  tappati'-i-ka]  pleasing,  agreeable, 
pleasant  Miln  238  (bhojana). 

Tattaka'^  {a-dj)  (  =  tavataka)  of  such  size,  so  large  Vism 
184  (corresponding  with  yattaka)  ;  tattakat)  kalat]  so 
long,  just  that  time,  i.  e.  the  specified  time  (may  be 
long  or  short  =  only  so  long)  DhA  1.103  (v.  1.  ettakai)) ; 
II.  16  (  =  ettaka). 

Tattha  [Sk.  tatra  adv.  of  place,  cp.  Goth.  \>a)fTO  &  also 
Sk.  atra.  yatra]  A.  i .  of  place  :  (a)  place  where= 
there,  in  that  place  Sn  1071,  1085;  Dh  58;  J  1.278; 
Pv  i.io'^;  often  with  eva:  tatth'  eva  right  there,  on 
the  (very  same)  spot  S  1.1:6;  J  II.  154;  PvA  27.  In 
this  sense  as  introduction  to  a  comment  on  a  passage : 
in  this,  here,  in  this  connection  (see  also  tatra)  Dhs 
584  ;  DhA  1.2 1  ;  PvA  7,  etc.  (b)  direction  :  there,  to  this 
place  J  11.159  (gantva)  ;  vi.368  ;  PvA  16  (tatthagama- 
nasila  able  to  go  here  &  there,  i.  e.  wherever  you  like, 
of  a  Yakkha).  —  2.  as  (loc.)  case  of  pron.  base  ta''  = 
in  this,  for  or  about  that.  etc.  Sn  11 15  (etam  abhii\- 
naya  tato  tattha  vipassati  :  SnA  tatra) ;  tattha  yo 
manku  hoti  Dh  249  (  =  tasmir)  dane  m.  DhA  111.359) ; 
tattha  ka  paridevana  Pv  1. 12''  ("  why  sorrow  for  this  ?"). 

—  3.  of  time  :  then,  for  the  time  beings  interim  (  =  ettha, 
cp.  tattaka-)  in  phrase  tattha-parinibbayin,  where 
corresp.  phrases  have  antara-parinibbayin  (A  11.238 
e.  g.aji.134:  see  under  parinibbayin)  D  1.156;  A  1.232  ; 
11.5;  IV.12  ;  S  V.357  ;  M  11.52,  etc.  The  meaning  of 
this  phrase  may  however  be  taken  in  the  sense  of  tatra 
A  3  (see  next).  —  B.  Repeated  :  tattha  tattha  here  and 
there,  in  various  places,  all  over  ;  also  corresponding 
with  yattha  yattha  wherever  .  .  .  there  It  115;  Nett 
96  (°gamini-pa!ipada) ;  VvA  297  ;  PvA  i,  2,  a,  77,  etc. 

—  See  tatra. 

Tatra  (Sk.  tatra]  =  tattha  in  all  meanings  tS.  applications, 
viz.  A.  I.  there:  Dh  375;  PvA  54.  tatrapi  D  1.81  = 
It  22a::(tatrapasir)).  tatra  pi  D  i.i  (=  DA  r.42).  tatra 
kho  Vin  l.io,  34  ;  A  v. 5  sq.  ;  354  sq.  (cp.  atha  kho).  — 
In  explanations:  PvA  19  (tatrdyar)  vittharakatha 
"here  follows  the  story  in  detail").  —  2.  in  this: 
Sn  595  (tatra  kevalino  smase)  -;  Dh  88  (tatr'  abhirati : 
enjoyment  in  this).  — -3.  a  special  application  of  tatra 
(perhaps  in  the  same  sense  to  be  explained  tattha  A  3) 
is  that  as  first  part  of  a  cpd..  where  it  is  to  be  taken  as 
generalizing  (  =  tatra  tatra):  all  kinds  of  (orig.  in  this 
&  that),  in  whatever  condition,  all-round,  complete 
(cp.  yai)  tag  under  ta"  11.2,  yena  tena  upayena) :  tatra- 
majjhattata  (complete)  equanimity  (keeping  balance 
here  A  there)  Vism  466  (cp.  tatra-majjhatt"  upekkha 
l6o);  DhsA  132.  133  (majjh*-t- tatra  majjh°)  ;  Bdhd 
157.  tatrupiyaiiftu  (  =  tatra  upayafmu)  having  all- 
round  knowledge  of  the  means  and  ways  Sn  ^z  i  (correct 
reading  at  Sn.^  330)  ;  tatrupayaya  vimarjs'iya  saman- 
nagata  endowed  with  genius  in  all  kinds  of  means  Vin 
IV.211  (or  may  it  be  taken  as  "  suitable,  corresponding, 
proportionate".'  cp.  tadupiya).  —  B.  tatra  tatra,  in 
t.-t.-abhinandini  (of  tariha)  finding  its  delight  in  this 
&  that,  here  &  there  Vin  1,10;  Ps  11.147;  Nett  72; 
Vism  506. 

Tatha  (adj.)  [an  adjectivized  tatha  out  01  comb"  tathi 
ti  "  so  it  is,"  cp.  taccha]  (being)  in  truth,  truthful ; 
true,  real  D  1.190  (-H  bhuta  taccha):  M  in.6g;  Th  i, 
347;  Sn  1 115  (=Nd'  275  taccha  bhuta,  etc.).  (nt.) 
tatha[)  =  saccai),  in  cattSri  tathani  the  4  truths  S  v. 430, 
435;  Ps  II.  104  sq.  (-(-avitathani  anaflQathini).  As 
ep.  of  Nibbina :  see  derivations  &  cp.  taccha.  abl. 
tathato  exactly  v.  I.  B  for  tattato  at  J  11.125  (s^e 
tatta').    —  yatha  tathai)  (cp.  yatha  taccbai])  according 


Tathata 


to  truth,  for  certain,  in  truth  Sn  699,  732,  1127.  — Cp 
vitatha. 

-parakkama  reaching  out  to  the  truth  J  v. 395  (  =  sac- 
canikkama) ;  -vacana  speaking  the  truth  (cp.  tatha- 
vadin)  Miln  401. 

Tathata  (£.)  [abstr.  fr.  tatha>  tatha]  state  of  being  such, 
such-hkeness,  similarity,  correspondence  Visra  518. 

Tathatta  (nt.)  [*tathatvar)]  "  the  state  of  being  so,"  the 
truth,  Nibbana ;  only  in  foil,  phrases ;  (a)  tathattaya 
patipajjati  to  be  on  the  road  to  (i.  e.  attain)  Nibbana 
D  1. 1 75,  similarly  S'ii.i99  ;  S  11.209  (patipajjitabba  being 
conducive  to  N.);  Miln  255;  Visra  214.  —  (b)  tathat- 
taya upaneti  (of  a  cittar)  bhavitai))  id.  S  iv. 294  =  5!  i. 
3CI  ;  S  V.9U,  213  sq.  —  (c)  tathattaya  cittag  upasag- 
harati  id.  M  1.468.  —  abl.  tathatta  in  truth,  really 
Sn  520  sq.  (cp.  M  Vastu  ni.397). 

Tatha  (adv.)  [Sk.  tatha,  cp.  also  kathai)]  so,  thus  (and 
not  otherwise,  opp.  aniiatha),  in  this  way,  likewise 
Sn  1052  (v.  1.  yatha) ;  J  1137,  etc.  —  Often  with  eva : 
tath'  eva  just  so,  still  the  same,  not  different  D  111.135 
(tjii)  tath'  eva  hoti  no  aniiatha) ;  J  1.263,  '1^ '•  Pv  1.8^ ; 
PvA  55 .  Corresponding  with  yatha :  tatha-y atha  so 
— that  Dh  282  ;  PvA  23  (tatha  akasi  yatha  he  made 
that  .  .  .,  cp.  Lat.  ut  consecutive) ;  yatha-tatha  as — 
so  also  Sn  504;  J  1.223;  Pv  1.12^  (yath'  agato  tatha 
gato  as  he  has  come  so  he  has  gone).  —  In  cpds.  tath' 
before  vowels. 

-fipama  such  like  (in  comparisons,  following  upon  a 
preceding  yatha  or  seyyatha)  Sn  229  (  =  tathavidha 
KhA  185),  233  ;  It  33,  90  ;  -karin  acting  so  (corresp.  w. 
yathavadin :  acting  so  as  he  speaks,  cp.  tathavUdin) 
Sn  357  ;  It  122  ;  -gata  see  sep. ;  -bhava  "  the  being  so," 
such  a  condition  J  1.279  ;  -rupa  such  a,  like  this  or  that, 
esp.  so  great,  such  Vin  1.16;  Sn  p.  107;  It  107;  DA 
1.104  ;  PvA  5,  56.  °*--  adv.  thus  PvA  14.  Cp.  evarupa  ; 
-vadin  speaking  so  (cp.  °kiirin)  Sn  430  ;  It  122  (of  the 
Tathcigata) :  -vidha  such  like,  so  (  =  tatharfipa)  Sn  772, 
818,  1073,  1 1 13;  Nd^  277  (=tadisa  tagsanthita  tap- 
pakara). 

Tathagata  [Derivation  uncertain.  Buddhaghosa  (DA 
1.59-67)  gives  eight  explanations  showing  that  thero 
was  no  fixed  tradition  on  the  point,  and  that  he  himself 
was  in  doubt].  The  context  shows  that  the  word  is 
an  epithet  of  an  Arahant,  and  that  non-Buddhists  were 
supposed  to  know  what  it  meant.  The  compilers  of 
the  Nikayas  must  therefore  have  considered  the  expres- 
sion as  pre-Buddhistic  ;  but  it  has  not  yet  been  found 
in  any  pre-Buddhistic  work.  Mrs.  Rhys  Davids 
(Dhs.tr.  1099,  quoting  Chalmers /.if. /I. S.  Jan.,  1898) 
suggests  "  he  who  has  won  through  to  the  truth."  Had 
the  early  Buddhists  invented  a  word  with  this  meaning 
it  would  probably  have  been  tathaijgata,  but  not 
necessarily,  for  we  have  upadhi-karoti  as  well  as 
upadhig  karoti.  —  D  1.12,  27,  46,  63;  11.68,  103,  108, 
115,  14G,  142  ;  111. 14,  24  sq.,  32  sq.,  115,  217,  264  sq., 
273  .sq.  ;  S  I.I  10  sq.  ;  11.222  sq.  ;  111.215  :  iv.127,  380  sq. ; 
A  1.286;  11.17,  25,  120;  III. 35,  etc.;  Sn  236,  347,  467, 
557,  1114;  It  121  sq. ;  IChA  196;  Ps  1.121  sq.  ;  Dhs 
1099,  1117.  1234  ;  Vbh  325  sq.,  340,  etc.,  etc. 

-balani  (pi.)  the  supreme  intellectual  powers  of  a 
T.  usually  enura''  as  a  set  of  ten  :  in  detail  at  A  v. 33  sq. 
=  Ps  11.174;  M  1.69;  S  11.27:  Nd2  466.  Other  sets  of 
five  at  A  HI. 9  ;  of  six  A  111.417  sq.  (see  bala) ;  -savaka 
a  disciple  of  the  T.  D  11.142  ;  -\  1.90  ;  11. 4 ;  III. 326  sq.  ; 
It  88;  Sn  p.  15. 

Tathiya  (adj.)  [Vedic  tada=taccha]  true,  Sn  882,  883. 

Tadanuiiipa  (adj.)  [cp.  ta°  i  a]  befitting,  suitable,  going 
well  with  J  VI. 366 ;  DhA  iv.15. 

Tada  (adv.)  [Vedic ;  cp.  kada]  then,  as  that  time  (either 
past  or  future)  D  n.157;  J  11.113.  '58;  Pv  i.io';  PvA 


130  Tandi 

42.  Also  used  like  an  adj. :  te  tada-mitapitaro  etarahi 
m°  ahesur)  "the  then  mother  &  father"  J  1.2 15  (cp. 
Lat.  quondam);  tada-sotapanna-upasaka  J  11. 113. 

Tadiipika  &  Tadupiya  see  ta°  I.  a. 

Tanaya  &  tanuya  [at  S  1.7,  v.  1.  tanaya,  cp.  BSk.  tanuja 
Av^  11.200]  offspring,  son  Mhvs  vii.28.  pi.  tanuya 
[=Sk.  tanayau]  son  &  daughter  S  1.9. 

Tanu  [Vedic  tanu,  f.  tanvi ;  also  n.  tanu  &  tanu  (f.)  body 
♦ten  (see  tanoti)  =  Gr.  raiv-.  Lat.  tenuis,  Ohg.  dunni,  E. 
thin]  I.  (adj.)  thin,  tender,  small,  slender  Vv  16^  (vara" 
graceful  =  uttamarapa-dhara  \'vh.  79;  perhaps  to  2); 
Pv.\  46  (of  hair:  fine -t- mudhu).  —  2.  (n.  nt.)  body 
(orig.  slender  part  of  the  body  =  waist)  \'v  53^  (kail- 
cana')  ;  Pv  1.12'  ;  Vism  79  (uju-l-  ).     Cp.  tanutara. 

-karana  making  thinner,  reducing,  diminishing 
Vin  II. 316  (Bdhgh  on  CV.  v. 9,  2):  -bhava  decrease 
Pug  17;  -bhuta  decreased,  diminished  Pug  17;  esp. 
in  phrase  °soka  with  diminished  grief,  having  one's 
grief  allayed  DhA  ni.176;  PvA  38. 

Tanuka  (adj.)  =  tanu;  little,  small  Dh  174  (=DhA  175): 
Sn  994  (soka). 

Tanntara  the  waist  (lit.  smaller  part  of  body,  cp.  body 
and  bodice)  Vin  iv.345  (sundaro  tanutaro  "  her  waist 
is  beautiful  "). 

Tanutta  (nt.)  [n. -abstr.  of  tanu]  diminution,  reduction, 
vanishing,  gradual  disappearance  A  1.160  (manussanai) 
khayo  hoti  tanuttar)  pafinayati)  ;  "144  (raga°,  dosa°, 
moha°) ;  esp.  in  phrase  (characterizing  a  sakadagamin) 
"  raga-d.-mohanag  tanutta  sakadagami  hoti  "  D  1.156  ; 
S  v. 357  sq.,  376,  406  ;  A  11.238  ;  Pug  16. 

Tanoti  [*ten;  cp.  Sk.  tanoti,  Gr.  rtn-w,  r<'»'ot,  rjrni'of ; 
Lat.  teneo,  tenuis,  tendo  (E.  ex-tend) ;  Goth,  fianjan  ; 
Ohg.  denen  ;  cp.  also  Sk.  tanti,  tana,  tantra]  to  stretch, 
extend  ;  rare  as  finite  verb,  usually  only  in  pp.  tata.  — 
Pgdp  17. 

Tanta  (nt.)  [Vedic  tantra,  to  tanoti ;  cp.  tantri  f.  string] 
a  thread,  a  string,  a  loom  J  1.356  ("vitata-tthana  the 
place  of  weaving)  ;  DhA  1.424.  At  J  iv.484  tanta  is 
to  be  corrected  to  tata  (stretched  out). 

-dkula  tangled  string,  a  tangled  skein,  in  phrase 
tantakalajata  gulagunthikajata  "  entangled  like  a  ball 
of  string  &  covered  with  blight"  S  11.92;  iv.158; 
A  II. 211;  Dpvs  X11.32.  See  gu|a ;  -avuta  weaving, 
weft,  web  S  v. 45  ;  A  1.286  ;  -bhanda  weaving  appliances 
Vin  11.135;  -rajjuka  "stringing  &  roping,"  hanging, 
execution  J  iv.87  ;  -vaya  a  weaver  J  1.356  ;  Miln  331  ; 
Vism  259;  DhA  1.424. 

Tantaka  (nt.)  "  weaving,"  a  weaving-loom  Vin  11. 135. 

Tanti  (f.)  [Vedic  tantri,  see  tanta]  i.  the  string  or  cord  of  a 
lute,  etc.  ;  thread  made  of  tendon  Vin  1.182  ;  Th  2,  390 
(cp.ThA257);  J  iv. 389  ;  DhA  1.163  ;  PvA  151.  — 2.  line, 
lineage  (-H  paveni  custom,  tradition)  J  vi.380  ;  DhA 
1.284.  -dhara  bearer  of  tradition  Vism  99  (-f  vagsa- 
nurakkhake  &  pavenipolake).  —  3.  a  sacred  text; 
a  passage  in  the  Scriptures  Vism  351  (bahu-peyyala") ; 
avimutta-tanti-magga  DA  1.2  ;  MA  1.2. 
-ssara  string  music  Vin  1.182  ;  J  111.178. 

Tantn  [Vedic  tantu,  cp..  tanta]  a  string,  cord,  wire  (of  a 
lute)  J  v. 196. 

Tandita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  tandeti=Sk.  tandrayate  &  tandate 
to  relax.  From  'ten,  see  tanoti]  weary,  lazy,  giving 
way  Miln  238  (°kata).  Usually  a°  active,  keen,  indus- 
trious, sedulous  Dh  305,  366,  375  ;  Vv  33"  ;  Miln  390  ; 
VvA  142.     Cp.  next. 

Tandi  (f.)  [Sk.  tanita]  weariness,  laziness,  sloth  S  v. 64  ; 
M  1.464:  A  1.3:  Sn  926,  942:  J  v.397  (H-alasya); 
Vbh  352  (id.). 


Tapa 


131 


Tayo 


Tapa  &  Tapo  [from  tapati,  cp.  Lat.  tepor,  heat]  i .  torment, 
punishment,  penance,  esp.  rehgious  austerity,  self- 
chastisement,  ascetic  practice.  This  was  condemned 
by  the  Buddha :  Gotamo  sabbar)  tapag  garahati 
tapassig  lukhajivir)  upavadati  D  i.i6i  =  S  iv.330 ; 
anattha-safihitar)  iiatva  yar)  kiiici  aparag  tapai)  S  1.103  ; 
J  IV. 306  (tattatapa  :  see  tatta).  —  2.  mental  devotion, 
self-control,  abstinence,  practice  of  morality  (often  = 
brahmacariya  &  sagvara) ;  in  this  sense  held  up  as  an 
ideal  by  the  Buddha.  D  111.42  sq.,  232  (attan  &  paran°), 
239  ;  S  1.38,  43  :  IV. 1 18,  180  ;  M  II. 155,  199  ;  D  11.49= 
Dh  184  (paramag  tapo),  194  (tapo  sukho) ;  Sn  77= 
S  1. 1 72  (saddha  bijai)  tapo  vutthi) ;  Sn  267  (t.  ca  brah- 
macariya ca),  655  (id.),  901  :  Pv  1.32  (instr.  tapasa  = 
brahmacariyena  PvA  15);  J  1.293;  Nett  121  (+ in- 
driyasagvara) ;  KhA  151  (papake  dhamme  tapati  ti 
tapo):  VvA  114  (instr.  tapasa) ;  PvA  98. 

-kamma  ascetic  practice  S  1.103;  -jiguccha  disgust 
for  asceticism  D  1.174  :  111.40,  42  sq.,  48  sq.  ;  A  11.200  ; 
-pakkama^  °kamma  D  1.165  sq.  (should  it  be  tap- 
opakkama=tapa-)-  upakkama,  or  tapo-kamma  ?).  -vana 
the  ascetic's  forest  Vism  58,  79,  342. 

Tapati  [Sk.  tapati,  'tep,  cp.  Lat.  tepeo  to  be  hot  or  warm. 
tepidus= tepid]  i.  to  shine,  to  be  bright,  Dh  387  (diva 
tapati  adicco,  etc.  =  virocati  DhA  iv.143);  Sn  348  (joti- 
manto  nara  tapeyyur)),  687  (suriyaii)  tapantag).  —  ger. 
tapanija :  see  sep.  —  pp.  tatta'. 

Tapana  (adj.-n.)  [to  tapati  &  tapa]  burning,  heat;  fig. 
torment,  torture,  austerity.  —  i.  (as  nt.)  PvA  98 
(kaya  "sankhato  tapo).  —  2.  (as  f.)  tapani  J  v. 201  (in 
metaphorical  play  of  word  with  aggi  &  brahmacarin  ; 
Cora,  visivana-aggittha-sankhata-tapani). 

Tapanlya'  [grd.  of  tapati]  burning :  fig.  inducing  self 
torture,  causing  remorse,  mortifying  A  1.49=  It  24, 
A  IV. 97  (Com.  tapajanaka) ;  v. 2 76  ;  J  iv.177  ;  Dhs  1305. 

Tapanlya^  (nt.)  also  tapaneyya  (J  v. 372)  &  tapatina 
(J  VI. 2 18)  [orig.  grd.  of  tapati]  shining  ;  (n.)  the  shining, 
bright  metal,  i.  e.  gold  (  =  rattasuvanna  J  v. 372  ; 
ThA  252)  Th  2.  374  ;  Vv  84";  VvA  12,  37,  340. 

Tapassin  (adj.-n.)  [tapas-f- vin  ;  see  tapati  &  tapa]  one 
devoted  to  religious  austerities,  an  ascetic  (non-Bud- 
dhist). Fig.  one  who  exercises  self-control  &  attains 
mastery  over  his  senses  Vin  1.234=  A  iv.184  (tapassi 
samano  Gotamo);  D  111.40.  42  sq..  49;  S  1.29;  iv.330. 
337  sq.  ;  M  1.77  ;  Sn  284  (isayo  pubbaka  asug  saSiiatatta 
tapassino) ;  Vv  22'°;  Pv  1.3^  ("riipa.  under  the 
appearance  of  a  "  holy  "  man  :  samai:ia-patirupaka 
PvA  15) ;  11.6'*  (=sai)varaka  PvA  98  ;  tapo  etesag  atth! 
ti  ibid.). 

Tappava  (nt.)  [Sk.  tarpai^a]  satiating,  refreshing;  a 
restorative,  in  netta°  some  sort  of  eye-wash  D  1.12  (in 
comb"  w.  kanna-tela  &  natthu-kamma). 

Tappati'  [Sk.  tapyate,  Pass,  of  tapati]  to  burn,  to  be 
tormented:  to  be  consumed  (by  remorse)  Dh  17.  136 
(t.  sehi  kammehi  dummedho=  paccati  DhA  in. 64). 

Tappati-  [Sk.  trpyate.  caus.  t«irpayati ;  *terp=Gr.  lipirio] 
(instr.)  to  be  satiated,  to  be  pleased,  to  be  satisfied 
J  1. 185  (puriso  pay^assa  t.);  11.443;  v.485=Miln  381 
(samuddo  na  t.  nadihi  the  ocean  never  has  enough  of 
all  the  rivers) ;  Vv  84>'.  —  grd.  tappiya  satiable,  in 
atappiya-vatthuni  (16)  objects  of  insatiability  J  111.342 
(in  full).  Also  tappaya  in  cpd.  dut°  hard  to-be  satis- 
fied A  ;i.87  ;  Pug  26.  —  pp.  titta.  —  Caus.  tappeti  to 
satisfy,  entertain,  regale,  feed  It  67  (annapanena) ; 
Pv  11.4*  (id.)  Miln  227  ;  —  pp.  tapptta. 

Tappara  (adj.)  [Sk.  tatpara]  quite  given  to  or  intent  upon 
(-°),  diligent,  devoted  ThA  148  (Ap.  57,  66)  (mina- 
pujana°  &  bnddhopatthana°). 


Tappetar  [n.  ag.  to  tappeti]  one  who  satisfies,  a  giver  of 
good  things  in  comb"  titto  ca  tappeta  ca  :  self-satisfied 
&  satisfying  others  A  1.87 ;  Pug  27  (of  a  Samma- 
sambuddha). 

Tab"  in  cpds.  tabbisaya,  tabbahula.  etc.  =  tag",  see  under 
ta°  I.  a. 

Tama  (nt.)  &  tamo  [Sk.  tamas,  tam  &  tim,  cp.  tamisra= 
Lat.  tenebrae ;  also  timira  dark  &  P.  tibba,  timira ; 
Ohg.  dinstar  &  finstar ;  Ags.  thimm,  E.  dim]  darkness 
(syn.  andhakara,  opp.  joti),  lit.  as  well  as  fig.  (mental 
darkness=  ignorance  or  state  of  doubt);  one  of  the 
dark  states  of  life  &  rebirth  ;  adj.  living  in  one  of  the 
dark  spheres  of  life  (cp.  kanhajata)  or  in  a  state  of 
suffering  (duggati)  Sn  248  (pecca  tamag  vajanti  ye 
patanti  satta  nirayag  avagsira),  763  (nivutanag  t.  hoti 
andhakaro  apassatag),  956  (sabbag  tamag  vinodetva) ; 
Vbh  367  (three  tamani :  in  past,  present  &  future), 
adj.  :  puggalo  tamo  tama-parayano  D  111.233  '■  -^  "85  = 
P^B  51  ;  J  n.17.  — tama  tamag  out  of  one  "  duggati  " 
into  another  Sn  278  (vinipatag  samapanno  gabbha 
gabbhag  t.  t.  .  .  .  dukkag  nigacchati),  cp.  M  Vastu 
11.225,  also  tamato  tamag  ibid.  1.27;  11. 2  15.  —  tama- 
t.-agge  beyond  the  region  of  darkness  (or  rebirth  in 
dark  spheres),  cp.  bhavagge  (&  Sk.  tamah  pare)  S  v. 

154.  163- 

-andhakara  (complete)  darkness  (of  night)  v.  1.  for 
samandha°  at  J  111.60  (Kern  :  tamondhakara)  ;  -nivuta 
enveloped  in  d.  Sn  348  ;  -nuda  (tama°  &  tamo°),  dis- 
pelling darkness,  freq.  as  Ep.  of  the  Buddha  or  other 
sages  Sn  1133,  1 136;  It  32,  io8;Nd2  28i  ;  Vv  352  (=VvA 
161);  Miln  I,  21,  etc.  ;  -parayana  (adj.)  having  a  state 
of  darkness  or  "  duggati  "  for  his  end  or  destiny  S  1.93  ; 
A  ii.85=Pug  51. 

Tamila  [Sk.  tamala]  N.  of  a  tree  (Xanthochymus  pic- 
torius)  Pv  III.  10*  (-t-uppala). 

Tamba  (nt.)  [Sk.  tamra.  orig.  adj.  =  dark  coloured,  leaden  ; 
cp.  Sk.  adj.  tagsra  id.,  to  tama]  copper  ("  the  dark 
metal  ") ;  usually  in  combinations,  signifying  colour  of  or 
made  of  (cp.  loha  bronze),  e.  g.  lakhatamba  (adj.)  Th  2, 
440  (colour  of  an  ox) ;  °akkhin  Vv  32'  (timira")  Sdhp 
286 ;  "nakhin  J  vi.290  ;  "netta  (f.)  ibid.  ;  "bhajana 
DhA  1.395;  "mattika  DhA  iv.106:  "vammika  DhA 
III. 208;  °loha  PvA  95  (=loha). 

Tambftla  (nt.)  [Sk.  tambula]  betel  or  betel-leaves  (to  chew 
after  the  meal)  J  1.266,  291  ;  11.320;  Vism  314;  DhA 
111.219.     -"pasibbaka  betel-bag  J  vi.367. 

Tajra  (nt.)  [Sk.  trayag  triad,  cp.  trayi ;  see  also  tava- 
tii)sa]  a  triad,  in  ratana-ttaya  the  triad  of  gems  (the 
Buddha,  the  Norm.  &  the  Community)  see  ratana ; 
e.  g.  PvA  I.  49,  141.  — pitaka-ttaya  the  triad  of  the 
Pitakas  SnA  328. 

Tayo  [f.  tisso,  nt.  tiiji ;  Vedic  traya,  tri  &  trini ;  Gr.  rpjJt, 
Tpta ;  Lat.  tres,  tria ;  Goth,  preis,  |>rija ;  Ohg.  dri ; 
E.  three,  etc.]  num   card,  three. 

nom.-acc.  m.  Uyo  (Sn  311),  &  tayas  (tayas  us 
dhamma  Sn  231,  see  KhA  188)  f.  tisso  (D  1.143; 
A  V.210;  It  99)  nt.  tini  (A  1.138.  etc.),  also  used  as 
absolute  form  (eka  dve  tini)  Kh  iii.  (cp.  KhA  79  & 
tipi  lakkhariS  for  lakkhariani  Sn  1019);  gen.  m.  nt. 
tinijag  (J  in. 52,  1 11,.  etc.),  f.  tissannag  ;  instr.  tihi 
(thanehi  Dh  224,  vijjahi  It  loi);  loc.  tisu  (janesu 
J  1..307  ;  vidhasu  Sn  842).  —  In  composition  &  deriva- 
tion :  ti  in  numerical  cpds.  :  tidasa  (30)  q.  v.  ;  tisata 
(3C0)  Sn  566  (brahmaria  tisata)  ;  573  (bhikkhavo 
tisata) ;  tisahassa  (3CC0)  Pv  11. 9"  (jana  °a) ;  in  numerical 
derivations  :  tii)sa  (30),  tika  (triad),  tikkhattug  (thrice) ; 
tidha  (threefold).  —  In  nominal  cpds.  :  see  ti°.  te 
(a)  in  numerical  cpds.  :  terasa  (SnA  489 ;  DhsA  333  ; 
VvA  72  ;  terasithei3thday)&  teJasa(Si.i92  Snpp.  102! 
'°3)  (>3)  [Sk-  trayodasa.  Lat.  tredecimj ;  tevisa  (23) 


Tara 


133 


Tina 


VvA  5;  tettigsa  (33)  J  1.273;  I^hA  1.267;  tesatttii  {63) 
PvA  III  (Jambudipe  tesatJhiya  nagarasahassesu). — 
(b)  in  nominal  cpds. :  see  te°. 

Tara  [see  tarati]  (n.)  crossing,  "  transit,"  passing  over 
Sn  1 1 19  (maccu°).  —  (adj.)  to  be  crossed,  passable,  in 
duttara  hard  to  cross  S  iv.157;  Sn  174,  273  (oghai)  t. 
duttarag) ;  Th  2,  10  ;  It  57.  Also  as  su-duttara  S  t. 
35;  V.24. 

-esin  wanting  to  pass  over  J  m.230 

Taranga  [tara+  ga]  a  wave  Vism  157. 

Taraccha  Tierivation  unknown.  The  Sk.  forms  are 
taraksu  &.  taraksa]  hyena  Vin  111.58;  A  iii.ioi  ;  Miln 
149,  267;  Dh  \  331  ;  Mhbv  154.  —  f.  taracchi  J  v. 71, 
406;  VI. 562. 

Taraoa  (nt.)  [see  tarati]  going  -across,  passing  over, 
traversing  Vin  iv.65  (tiriyarj") ;  Ps  1.15;  11.99.   "9. 

Tarati'  [Vedic  tarati,  *ter  (tr)  to  get  to  the  other  side,  cp. 
Lat.  termen,  terminus,  Gr.  rto^n.  rtptpoi' ;  also  Lat. 
trans=Goth.  |>airh=Ags.  )'urh=E.  through]  (lit.)  to 
go  or  get  through,  to  cross  (a  river),  pass  over,  traverse  ; 
(fig.)  to  get  beyond,  i.  e.  to  surmount,  overcome,  esp. 
oghai)  (the  great  flood  of  life,  desire,  ignorance,  etc.) 

5  1.53,  208.  214;  v. 168,  186;  Sn  173,  273,  771.  1069; 
sangai)  Sn  791  ;  visattikag  Sn  333,  857  ;  ubhayat)  (both 
worlds,  here  &  beyond)  Pv  iv.i3'  (  =  atikkameti  PvA 
278);  Nd^  28-  —  ppr.  taranto  Vin  1.191  (Aciravati, ; 
grd.  taritabba  Vin  iv.65  (nadi) ;  aor.  atari  J  111.189 
(samuddai))  cS  atari  Sn  355,  1047  (jati-maranai)),  pi. 
atarui]  Sn  1043.  —  See  also  tareti  (Caus),  tana,  tayate, 
tiro,  tiriyar),  tira,  tireti. 

Tarati'  [tvarate,  pp.  tvarita ;  also  turati,  turayati  from 
•tar  to  turn  round,  move  quickly,  perhaps  identical 
with  the  'ter  of  tarati';  cp.  Ohg.  dweran=E.  twirl; 
Gr.  T-opuMj=Lat.  trua=Ger.  quirl  twirling-stick,  also 
Lat.  torqueo  &  turba  &  perhaps  Ger.  stiiren.  zcrstoren  ; 
E.  storm,  see  Walde.  Lai.  IVtb.  under  trual  to  be  in  a 
hurry,  to  make  haste  Th  ;,  291;  ppr.  taramana  in 
°riipa  (adj.)  quickly,  hurriedly  Sn  417;  Pv  11. 6^  ;  Pv,\ 
181  (=turita)  &  ataramana  Vin  1.248;  grd.  taraniya 
Th  I,  293.  —  See  also  tura.  turita,  turiya. 

Tarahi  (adv.)  [Vedic  tarhi.  cp.  carahi  &  etarahi]  then,  at 
that  time  Vin  11. 189. 

Tari  (f.)  [from  tarati]  a  boat  Davs  iv.53. 

Taritatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  of  tarita  pp.  of  tarati']  the  fact  of 
having  traversed,  crossed,  or  passed  through  VvA  284. 

Tarn  [Perhaps  dialect,  for  dam]  tree.  PvA  1 54  (°gana),  251. 

Tarova  (adj.)  [Vedic  taruna.  cp.  Gr.  -jpi..,,  r^uij-  ;  Lat. 
tener  &  perhaps  tardus]  i .  tender,  of  tender  age,  young  ; 
new.  newly  {"-)  fresh.  Esp.  appl''  to  a  young  calf: 
M  1.459  (in  simile) ;  °vaccha,  "vacchaka.  "vacchi : 
Vin  1.193;  J  1. 191  :  DhA  11.35;  VvA  2Co.' — Vin  1.243 
(fresh  milk);  D  1.114  (Gotamo  t.  c'  eva  t.-paribbajako 
ca  "  a  young  man  and  only  lately  become  a  wanderer  ") ; 
PvA  3,  46  (°jana),  62  (°putta) ;  Bdhd  93.  121.  —  2.  (m. 

6  nt.)  the  shoot  of  a  plant,  or  a  young  plant  Vin  1.189 
(tala°) ;  M  1.432  ;  Vism  361  (taruiia-tala). 

Tala  (nt.)  [Derivation  uncertain.  Cp.  Sk.  tala  m.  &  nt.  ; 
cp.  Gr.  r.;X. .  (dice-board).  Lat.  tellus  (earth),  tabula 
(  =  table).  Oir.  talam  (earth).  Ags.  |>el  (=deal).  Ohg. 
dili=Ger.  diele]  (a)  flat  surface  (w.  ref.  to  either  top 
or  bottom:  cp.  Ger.  boden),  level,  ground,  base  J  i.eo. 
62  (pasad^°  fiat  roof);  111.60  (id.);  pathavi"  (level 
ground)  J  ii.iii.  cp.  bhumi"  PvA  176;  adasa"  surface 
of  a  mirror  Vism  450.  456,  489  ;  salila"  (surface  of  pond) 
PvA  157;  VvA  160;  hetthima"  (the  lowest  level) 
J  1.202  ;  PvA  281  ;  —  j  1.233  (base);  266  (khagga"  the 
flat  of  the  sword);    11. 102  (bheri°).  —  (b)  the  -nalm  of 


the  hand  or  the  sole  of  the  foot  J  11.223 ;  Vism  350 ; 
&  cpds.  —  See  also  tata,  tala,  talu. 

-ghataka  a  slap  with  the  palm  of  the  hand  Vin  iv.260, 
261  ;  -sattika  in  "g  uggirati  to  lift  up  the  palm  of  the 
hand  Vin  iv.147;  DhA  111.50  ;  cp.  Vin.  Texts  1.51. 

Talika  (adj.)  [from  tala]  having  a  sole,  in  eka-°upahana 
a  sandal  with  one  sole.  J  11.277;  in. 80,  81  (v.  1.  BB. 
patilika) ;  cp.  Morris,  J.P.T.S.  1887,  165. 

Tahl?)a=  taruna  DhsA  333  (cp.  Bumouf,  Lotus  573). 

Ta}aka  (nt.)  [Derivation  uncertain.  Perhaps  from  tata. 
The  Sk.  forms  are  tataka,  tajaka,  tadaga]  a  pond,  pool, 
reservoir  Vin  n.256;  J  1.4,  239;  PvA  202  ;  DA  1.273; 
Miln  I,  66=81,  24O,  296,  359. 

Tasa  (adj.)  [from  tasati^  i.  trembling,  frightened 
J  1.336=344  (vaka,  expl.  at  342  by  tasita) ;  perhaps  the 
derived  meaning  of;  —  2.  moving,  running  (cp.  to 
meaning  i  &  2  Gr.  Tf>iu>  to  flee  &  to  tremble),  always  in 
comb"  tasa-thavara  (pi.)  movable  &  immovable  beings 
[cp.  M  Vastu  1.207  jangama-sthavara ;  11. 10  calai) 
sthavara].  Metaphorically  of  people  who  are  in  fear 
&  trembling,  as  distinguished  from  a  thavara,  a  self- 
possessed  &  firm  being  (=Arahant  KhA  245).  In  this 
sense  t.  is  interpreted  by  tasati'  as  well  as  by  tasati- 
(to  have  thirst  or  worldly  cravings)  at  KhA  245 : 
tasanti  ti  tasa.  satanhinai)  sabhayanan  c'  etag  adhi- 
vacanag  ;  also  at  Nd'  479  :  tasa  ti  yesai)  tasita  (tasinS  ?) 
tanha  appahina,  etc..  6'  ye  te  santasag  apajjanti.  — 
S  1.141  ;  IV. 117,  351;  V.393 ;  Sn  146,  629;  Dh  405, 
Th  I,  876;  J  V.221  ;  Nd2  479;  DhA  iv.175. 

Tasati'  [Sk.  trsyati  =  Gr.  ripiro/im  to  dry  up,  Lat.  torreo 
(=E.  torrid,  toast).  Goth,  gaj-airsan  &  gajjaiirsnan, 
Ohg.  derren  ;  see  also  tanha  &  tanhiyati]  to  be  thirsty, 
fig.  to  crave  for  S  11.13  '•  Miln  254. —  pp.  tasita'.  Cp. 
pari° 

Tasati'  [Vedic  trasati=pr.  rpj™,  Lat.  terreo  (=  terror); 
*ters  fr.  *ter  in  Sk.  tarala.  cp.  also  Lat.  tremo  (=  tremble) 
and  trepidus]  to  tremble,  shake,  to  have  fear ;  to  be 
frightened  Sn  394  (ye  thavara  ye  ca  tasanti  loke) ; 
Nd'  479  (=santasag  apajjati) ;  KhA  245  (may  be  taken 
as  tasati',  see  tasa).  —  pp.  tasita',  cp.  also  tasa  & 
uttasati. 

Tasara  (nt.)  [\'edic  tasara,  cp.  tanta,  etc.]  a  shuttle  Sn 
215.  464,  497  ;  DhA  1.424  ;  111.172.  Cp.  Morris,  J.P.T.S. 
1886,  160. 

Tasioa  (f.)  [Diaeretic  form  of  tanha,  cp.  dosinS>  junhS, 
kasina>  krtsna,  etc.]  thirst ;  fig.  craving  (see  tanha) 
S  V.54,  58  ;  Nd'479  (to  be  read  for  tasita  ?) ;  Dh  342,  343. 

Tasita'  [pp.  of  tasati']  dried  up,  parched^  thirsty  S  li.iic, 
118  ;  Sn  980,  1014  (not  with  Fausb61I  =  tasita') ;  J  iv.20  ; 
Pv  11.9'*  (chata-H  ).  lo^  (=pipasita  PvA  143);  in. 6* 
(  =  pipasita  PvA  127,  202) ;  Miln  318  (kilanta-i-  ). 

Tasita'  [pp.  of  tasati*]  frightened,  full  of  fear  J  1.26 
(bhita-t- ),  342,  IV. 141  (id.):  Nd'  479  (or=  tasiija  ?). — 
atasita  fearless  S  111.57. 

Tassa-papiyyasika  (f)  (viz.  kiriya)  N.  of  one  of  the  adhi- 
karana-samatha :  guilt  (legal  wrong)  of  such  &  such  i 
character  Vin  1.325;  in  detail  expl.  M  11.249;  -|- tina- 
vattharaka  D  111.254 ;  A  1.99.  "kammag  karoti  to 
carry  out  proceedings  against  someone  guilty  of  a 
certain  legal  ofience  Vin  11.85,  86;  °kata  one  against 
whom  the  latter  is  carried  out  A  iv.347. 

Ta9a  (nt.)  [from  Vedic  root  tra,  variation  of  *ter  in 
tarati.  Orig.  bringing  or  seeing  through]  shelter,  pro- 
tection, refuge,  esp.  as  tt.  of  shelter  &  peace  offered  by 
the  Dhamma.  Mostly  in  comb"  with  lena  &  sarana 
(also  dipa  &  abhaya).  in  var.  contexts,  esp.  with  ref. 


Jl 


Tanata 


133 


Tala 


to  Nibbana  (see  Nd' s.  v.):  D  1.95  ("r),  etc.  gavesin 
seeking  refuge);  A  1.155;  S  iv.315  (magtana,  etc.  adj. 
protected  by  me.  in  ray  shelter).  —  S  1.2.  54,  55,  107 
("g  karoti);  iv.372  ("garni  maggo) ;  A  iv.184;  Sn  668 
("i)  upeti);  Dh  288;  J  1.412  (  =  protector,  expl''  by 
tayita  parittavita  patiUha);  Sdhp  224,  289.  Cp. 
t&tar  &  tayati.' 

Ti^ata  (f.)  fabstr.  of  tana]  protection,  sheltering  Dh  288. 

nta  [Vedic  tata.  Gf.  rara  &  Thra,  Lat.  tata,  Ger.  tate, 
E.  dad(dy) ;  onomat.]  father ;  usually  in  vor.  sg.  tata 
(and  pi.  tata)  used  as  term  of  affectionate,  friendly  or 
respectful  address  to  one  or  more  persons,  both  younger 
&  older  than  the  speaker,  superior  or  inferior.  As 
father  (perhaps  =  tata,  see  next)  at  Th  2,  423,  424 
(+amma).  tata  (sg.)  in  addr.  one:  J  ni.54 ;  iv.281 
(amma  tata  mammy  &  daddy)  DhA  11.48  (=  father); 
III. 196  (id.) ;  PvA  41  (=father).  73  (a  son),  74  (a  minis- 
ter);  J  1.179  (id.) ;  Miln  15,  16,  17  (a  bhikkhu  or  thera), 
in  addr.  several  Vin  1.249;  J  n.133;  PvA  50.  tata 
(pi.)  J  1. 166;  263;  IV. 138. 

Titar  [from  Vedic  tra,  n.  ag.  to  trayati  to  protect]  pro- 
tector, saviour,  helper  DA  1.229.  For  meaning  "  father  " 
see  tata  &  cp.  pita=  tayita  at  J  1.412. 

T&din  (adj.  n.)  (nom.  tSdl  &  tadi,  in  cpds.  tadi°)  [Vedic 
tadr^  from  tad-drs  of  such  appearance]  such,  such  like, 
of  such  (good)  qualities,  "  ecce  homo";  in  pregnant 
sense  appl.  to  the  Bhagavant  &  Arahants,  characterized 
as  "  such  "  in  5  ways :  see  Nd'  1 14  sq.  ;  SnA  202  &  cp. 
Miln  382.  tadi :  Sn  712,  803  (&  154  tadi  no  for  tadino, 
see  SnA  201  sq.) ;  tadi  Sn  488,  509,  519  sq.  ;  Dh  95  ; 
gen.  tadino  Dh  95,  96;  with  ref.  to  the  Buddha  D  11. 
I57^'(thitacittasa  tadino.  in  BSk.  sthiracittasya  tayinah 
Av6  II. 199);  Vv  18^  (expl"  VvA  95:  itthadisu  tadi- 
lakkhanasampattiya  tadino  Satthu  :  see  Nd'  114  sq), 
of  Arahant  A  11.34;  Sn  154  (or  tadi  no);  instr.  tadina 
Sn  697  ;  Miln  382  ;  ace.  tadir)  Sn  86,  219,  957  ;  :loc.  pi. 
tadisu  Pv  11.9"  (=  itthadisu  tadilakkhanappattesu 
PvA  140,  cp.  VvA  95).  — -See  tadisa*. 

-bhava  "such-ness,"  high(est)  qualification  Vism  5. 
214.  -lakkhana  the  characteristic  of  such  (a  being) 
J  III. 98  (°yoga,  cp.  nakkhatta-yoga) ;  SnA  200  (°patta)  ; 
VvA  95  ("sampatti). 

T&dina  (adj.)  [enlarged  form  of  tadin)=  tadin,  only  in  loc. 
tadine  Vv  21*  (=tadimhi  VvA  106). 

T&disa'  (adj.)  [Vedic  tadr^a  from  tad-drSa=  tad-rupa ;  a 
reduction  of  this  form  in  P.  tadin]  such  like,  of  such 
quality  or  character,  in  such  a  condition  J  1.151  ; 
III. 280  ;  Sn  112,  317,  459;  Nd^  277  (in  expl.  of  tatha- 
vidha) ;  It  68  ;  Pv  11. 9* ;  PvA  69,  72  ;  Miln  382.  Also 
correlative  tadisa-tadisa  the  one — the  other  VvA  288. 

—  f.  tadisi  [Sk.  tadrsi]  Pv  1.5'  (vanijja). 

TSdisa'  (adj.)  [tvag-l- disa.  Cp.  Sk.  tvadr^a]  like  you 
J  1. 1 67  ;  V.107. 

Tidisaka  (adj.)=tadisa',  of  such  character  Sn  278 ;  It  68. 

T&pana  (nt.)  [from  tapeti]  burning,  scorching,  roasting; 
fig.  tormenting,  torture,  self-mortification  VvA  20 
(aggimhi  t.  udake  •  va  temanag),  Cp.  a° ;  upa° ; 
pari". 

Tapasa  [from  tapa  &  tapas]  one  who  practises  tapas,  an 
ascetic  (brahmin).  Eight  kinds  are  enum''  at  DA 
1.270  &  SnA  295.  —  J  ii.ioi,  102;  V.201  ;  PvA  133; 
°pabEajja  the  life  of  an  a.  J  in.  1 19  ;  DhA  iv.29  ;  DA  1.270. 

—  f.  tapasi  a  female  ascetic  Mhvs  vii.ii,  12. 

Tipeti  [Sk.  tipayati,  Caus.  to  tapati]  to  burn  out,  scorch 
torment,  fig.  root  out,  quench  Sn  451  (attanag) ;  J  v. 
267  (janapadag);  VvA  114  (kilesag  t.  in  expl.  of 
tapassin).     Cp.  pari". 


Tama  [Sk.  tama]  desire,  longing,  greed  in  taniatamada- 
.sangha-suppahina  Th  i,  310,  an  epithet  of  frogs, 
which  perhaps  (with  Kern,  Toev.  It. 88)  is  to  be  read  as 
tama-tamata-suppahita ;  "  horribly  greedy  "  (Kern, 
gruwelijk  vraatzuchtig). 

Tayati  [Sk.  trayate  &  trate,  connected  with  *ter  in  tarati, 
orig.  to  see  through,  to  save,  cp.  tana,  etc.]  to  shelter, 
protect,  preserve,  guard  ;  bring  up,  nourish  S  iv.426 
(rupa-balag.  bhoga",  iiati°,  putta");  J  iv.387  ;  Sn  579 
(paralokato  na  pita  tayate  puttag  ftati  va  pana  uatake) ; 
PvA  7  (khettag  tayati  bijag). 

Tayitar  [n.  ag.  from  tayati]  one  who  protects,  shelters  or 
guards  J  1.412  (in  expl.  of  tana,  q.  v.). 

Tart  (f.)  [Sk.  t5ra=Gr.  am-i'ip,  ottov  (=Lat.  astrum,  in 
E.  disaster),  Lat.  Stella,  Goth,  stafrno,  Ohg.  sterro 
( :E.  star),  perhaps  loan  word  from  Semitic  sources]  a 
star,  a  planet  Sn  687  (tarasabha  the  lord,  lit.  "  the 
bull  "  of  the  stars,  i.  e.  the  Sun). 

-gana  (tara°)  the  host  of  stars  Pv  11.9"  (cando  va 
t.-gane  atirocati).  -maiiivitana  "  star-jcwel-awning  "  ; 
canopy  of  jewelled  stars  Vism  76. 

Taraka  (f)  [Sk.  taraka]  i.  a  star,  a  planet:  osadhi  viya 
taraka  like  the  morning-star  (Venus)  Vv  9'=  Pv 
II. i'";  —  J  1. 108;  taraka-rupa  the  light  (or  sparkling) 
of  the  stars  D  lit. 85,  90;  S  111.156=  It  19;  S  v.44 ; 
VvA  79;  Dhs  617.  —  2.  fig.  sparkling,  glitter,  twinkle; 
akkhi"  the  pupil  of  the  eye  M  1.80  ;  udaka°  sparkling  of 
the  water  ibid. 

Tareti'  [Caus.  of  tarati']  to  make  cross,  to  help  over,  to 
bring  through,  save,  help,  assist  Sn  319  (pare  tara- 
yetug),  321  (so  tarayc  tattha  bahu  pi  aiTfie) ;  It  123 
(tinno  tarayatag  varo  :  "  one  who  is  through  is  the  best 
of  those  who  can  help  through  ") ;  J  1.28  (v. 203).  aor. 
atarayi  Sn  539,  540  &  taresi  Sn  545. 

Tareti*  [Caus.  of  tarati*]  to  make  haste  Th  i,  293. 

Tala  [Sk.  tala,  cp.  Gr.  rnXu;  &  Tii\r6dM  (be  green,  sprout 
up)  Lat.  talea  shoot,  sprout]  i.  the  palmyra  tree  (fan 
palm),  Borassus  flabelliformis  ;  freq.  in  comparisons  & 
similes  M  1.187;  J  t.202  (°vana).  273  ("matta  as  tall 
as  a  palm) :  VvA  162  ;  PvA  too  (chinnamulo  viya  talo). 
—  2.  a  strip,  stripe,  streak  J  v,372  (  =  raji). 

-atthika  a  kernel  of  the  palm  fruit  DhA  11.53,  cp. 
60  (°atthi-khanda) ;  -kanda  a  bulbous  plant  J  iv.46 
(=kalamba) ;  -kkhandha  the  trunk  of  a  palm  J  iv.351  ; 
VvA  227  ("parimani  mukhaturida :  beaks  of  vultures  in 
Niraya) :  PvA  56 ;  -cchidda  see  tala° ;  -taruna  a  young 
shoot  of  the  p.  Vin  1.189;  -pakka  palm  fruit  It  84: 
-panna  a  palm-leaf  DhA  1. 391  ;  11.249;  in. 328;  Bdhd 
62  ;  also  used  as  a  fan  (talapattehi  kata-marKJiala- 
vijani  VvA  147)  Vv  33*-'  (Hardy  for  "vantha  of  Goon, 
ed.  p.  30) ;  VvA  147  (v.  1.  "vaijta  q.  v.) ;  Nd«  562  {+  vi- 
dhupana);  -patta  a  palm-leaf  Vin  1. 189;  VvA  147; 
-miitja  the  pith  of  a  p.  J  IV.402  ;  -vanta  [Sk.  talavtnta] 
a  fan  A  11. 130  (-1- vidhupana).  137;  J  1.265;  VvA  44, 
cp.  "panna;  -vatthu  (more  correct  taiivatthu=tala-a- 
vatthu)  in  taUvatthukata  a  palm  rendered  groundless, 
i.  e.  uprooted ;  freq.  as  simile  to  denote  complete 
destruction  or  removal  (of  passions,  faults,  etc.). 
Nearly  always  in  formula  pahina  ucchinna-mula  t° 
anabhavag-kata  "  given  up,  with  roots  cut  out.  like 
a  palm  with  its  base  destroyed,  rendered  unable  to 
sprout  again  "  (Kem,  Toev.  11.88  :  as  een  wijnpalm  die 
niet  meer  geschikt  is  om  weor  uit  te  schieten).  This 
phrase  was  misunderstood  in  BSk.  :  M  Vastu  III. 360  has 
kalavastug. — The  readings  vary:  talavatthu  e.  g.  at 
M  1.370  ;  S  1.69  ;  IV. 84  ;  A  1.135  ;  11.38  ;  J  v. 267  ;  talav" 
S  III. to;  V.327;  Th  2,  478  (ThA  286:  talassa  chindita- 
-tthana-sadisa) ;  Nd*  freq.  (see  under  pahina) ;  taia- 
vatthukata  at  Vin  iit.3.  —  In  other  comb"  talavatthu 
bhavati  Cto  be  pulled  out  by  the  roots  &  thrown  away) 

IV— 3 


Talisa 


134 


Tasaniya 


J  V.267  (=chinnamula-t51o  viya  niraye  nibbattanti 
p.  273),  cp.  M  1.250;  -vara  "palm-time"  (?)  or  is  it 
tala°  (gong-turn?)  DhA  11.49  (note:  from  tala-prati- 
?thayag  ?). 

TSUsa  (nt.)  (also  talissa  J  iv.286,  talisaka  Miln  338)  [cp. 
Sk.  tali,  talisa  &  tala^a]  the  shrub  Flacourtia  cata- 
phracta  &  a  powder  or  ointment  obtained  from  it 
Vin  1.203  (+  tagara) ;  J  iv.286  (id.) ;  Miln  338. 

Tain  [Sk.  talu.  ^ee  tala]  the  palate  Sn  716 ;  J  1.419  ;  Vism 
^  264  ("ma^haka  top  of  p.) ;  PvA  260. 

T&)a*  [ta^t  'cp-  Sk.  tala  a  blow,  or  musical  time ;  taliyaka 
cymbal]  beating,  striking,  the  thing  beaten  or  struck, 
i.  e.  a  musical  instrument  which  is  beaten,  an  instr.  of 
percussion,  as  a  cymbal,  gong,  or  tambourine  (for  tala= 
gong  cp.  thala) :  (a)  gong,  etc.  J  1.3  ;  vi.60  ;  Th  i,  893  ; 
DA  1.85;  DhsA  319  (kar)sa°).  —  (b)  music  in  general 
DhA  IV.67. 

-dvacara  musical  time  or  measure,  music,  a  musician 
D  11.159  (v.  1.  tala") ;  J  1.60  (1) ;  iv.41  ;  VvA  257  (°pari- 
vuta,  of  an  angel). 

TSla*  (nt.)  [Sk.  talaka=t5da  Avi  11.56,  ta4aka  Divy 
577]  a  key  (orig.  a  "  knocker  "  ?)  Vin  11.148  (3  kinds: 
loha°,  kattha",  visana°) ;  Bdhd  1. 

-cchiggala  a  key -hole  S  iv.290  ;  v.453 ;  Vism  500. 
-cchidda  id.  Vin  11.120,  148,  153  (all  tala") ;  111.118; 
DhA  III. 8  (1). 

T5JI  (f.)  a  strike,  a  blow,  in  urattajii)  karoti  to  strike  one's 
chest  (as  a  sign  of  grief)  PvA  39,  etc.  (see  ura). 

Ti]eti  [Sk.  tadayati,  ta4  perhaps=tud]  to  strike  a  Blow, 
flog,  beat,  esp.  freq.  in  phrase  kasahi  tajeti  to  flog  with 
whips,  etc.  (in  list  of  punishments,  see  kasa)  M  1.87 ; 
A  11.122;  Nd^  604;  PvA  4,  etc.  —  ppr.  pass,  tadda- 
mana  (for  *tadyamana)  J  vi.60  (so  read  for  tadda- 
mana;  Com  pothiyamana).  —  pp.  talita  J  vi.60  (tu- 
riya°>;  Vv  62 1  (id.) ;  Sdhp  80.     Cp.  abhi°. 

Tiva  (adv.)  [Sk.  tavat]  so  much,  so  long  ;  usually  correl. 
with  yava  how  long,  how  much  ;  in  all  meanings  to  be 
understood  out  of  elliptical  application  of  this  corre- 
lation. Thus  I.  yava-tava  as  long  as:  yava  dve  jana 
avasittha  ahesui)  tava  afiiiamanfiag  ghatayigsu  J  i. 
254  ;  yava  dukkha  niraya  idha  tattha  pi  tava  cirag 
vasitabbar)  Sn  678.  Neg.  na  tava-yava  na  not  until : 
M  1.428;  S  V.261  ;  A  i.i4i~(na  t.  kalai)  karoti  yava 
na  tai)  papakammai)  byantihoti  he  does  not  die  until 
his  evil  kamma  is  exhausted).  II.  Elliptical  :  1.  tem- 
poral: so  long  as,  for  the  time  (tavakalikar)  =  yavak°- 
tavak°  ;  see  below).  —  2.  comparative:  (such-)  as,  like, 
so,  such,  just  so,  rather,  in  such  a  degree ;  even  tava- 
bahui)  suyaijnai)  so  much  gold  Vin  1.209  ;  t.-mahanto  so 
much  J  1.207 ;  t-  madhuraphala  with  such  sweet  fruit 
J  11.105;  asitiya  tava  kimi-kulanai)  sadharana  (of  the 
body)  or  rather,  i.  e.  Vism  235  ;  vatthani  t.  devapa- 
tubhiitani  PvA  44  ;  pathamar)  t.  (even)  at  once,  right 
away  PvA  113,  132  ;  gilanaya  t.  ayag  etissa  rupasobha 
even  in  sickness  she  is  so  beautiful  VvA  76 ;  paritta- 
kassa  kusalakammassa  t.  =  quidem  PvA  51  ;  pagsuku- 
likangao  t.  in  the  first  place  Vism.  62.  ^ —  3.  concessive  : 
(a)  (absol.)  as  far  as  it  goes,  considering,  because  :  yadi 
evai)  pita  tava  purisabhave  na  rodati,  matu  nama 
hadayar)  mudukag  "  even  if  the  father  as  man  does  not 
weep,  surely,"  &c  ,  PvA  63.  —  (b)  with  imper.  in  expr. 
like  gaccha  tava  go  as  long  as  you  like  (to  go)  (  =  gaccha 
tava  yava  gaccheyyasi),  i.  e.  if  you  like,  cp.  Ger.  geh'- 
immer;  passa  tava  just  Iook  =  Lat.  licet.  Therefore 
sometimes  =  please  or  simply  an  emphatic  imper.  as 
"  do  go,"  etc.  J  11.5  (ete  t.  aguna  hontu  let  them  be 
faulty),  133  (ehi  t.),  352  (tittha  t.  leave  off  please), 
III. 53  (pato  va  t.  hotu  only  let  it  be  to-morrow,  i.  e. 
wait  til  t-m.) ;  IV.2  tar)  t.  me  detha.give  me  this  though) ; 
VvA  289  (vimarisatha  t.  just  think);  PvA  4  (t.  ayyo 


agametu  ySv^yar)  puriso  piniyai)  pivissati  may  your 
honour  wait  till  this  man  shall  have  drunk  the  water), 
13  (thera  t.  gacchantu).  With  prohibitive:  ma  tiva 
ito  aga  please  do  not  go  from  here  Pv  11.3^'.  —  4.  horta- 
tive, with  ist  pers.  fut.  equal  to  imperative-subjunctive 
or  injunctive,  cp.  3  (b) :  let  me,  well,  now,  then  (cp. 
Lat.  age  in  die  age,  etc.).  J  1.62  (puttai)  t.  passissami 
please  let  me  see  the  son),  263  (vimai)sisScLmi  t.  let  me 
think),  265  (nahayissami  t.  just  let  me  bathe). — 
III.  In  other  combinations  :  tava-na  although — yet= 
not  even  :  ajja  pi  t.  me  balag  na  passasi  not  even  to-day 
have  you  yet  seen  my  full  strength  J  1.207  •  *•  maha- 
dhanassaml  na  me  datur)  piyai)  ahu  although  lord  of 
wealth  yet  I  did  not  like  to  give  Pv  11.7°.  na-tava.  (or 
tava  in  neg.  sentence)  not  yet,  not  even,  not  so  much  as 
(  =  Lat.  ne-quidem)  Pv  11.  ii^  (na  ca  taVa  khiyati  does 
not  even  diminish  a  bit);  PvA  117  (attano  kenaci 
anabhibhavaniyatar)  eva  tava :  that  he  is  not  to  be 
overpowered,  even  by  anyone),  tava-d-eva  just  now, 
instantly,  on  the  spot,  at  once  Sn  30  ;  J  i.6i,  151; 
IV. 2  ;  Pv  II. 8»  (=tada  eva  PvA  109);  PvA  23,  46,  74, 
88,  etc.  tavade  (=  tava-d-eva)  for  all  times  Pv  iv.3^ 
(=  PvA  255). 

-Halika  (adj.)  "  as  long  as  the  time  lasts,"  i.  e.  for  the 
time  being,  temporary,  pro  tempore  Vin  11.174  '■  111-66; 
IV.286;  J  1.121,  393;  Vism  95;  ThA  288;  PvA  87 
(  =  na  sassata). 

Tavataka  (adj.)  [der.  fr.  tava]  just  so  much  or  just  so  long 
(viz.  as  the  situation  requires),  with  (or  ellipt.  without) 
a  corresp.  yavataka  Vin  1.83  (yavatake-t.  as  many  as) : 
D  11.18  (yavatakv'  assa  kayo  tavatakv'  assa  vyamo  as 
tall  as  is  his  body  so  far  can  he  stretch  his  arms :  the 
19th  sign  of  a  Mahapurisa) ;  instr.  as  adv.  tavatakena 
after  a  little  time  Miln  107;  DhA  111.61.  —  See  also 
tattaka  (contracted  of  tavataka). 

Tavata  (adv.)  [from  tava]  i.  so  long  (corr.  to  yava) 
Dpvs  IV.  1 7.  —  2.  on  that  account,  thus  D  1.104  (v.  1. 
ettavata) ;  Dh  266. 

Tavatiijsa  [tayo-t-  tigsa.  Cp.  Vedic  trayastrig^at]  No. 
33,  only  in  cpds.  denoting  the  33  gods,  whose  chief  is 
Sakka,  while  the  numeral  33  is  always  tettigsa.  This 
number  occurs  already  in  the  Vedas  with  ref.  to  the 
gods  &  is  also  found  in  Zend-Avesta  (see  Hang,  Lan- 
guage &  Wriiings,  etc.,  pp.  275,  276).  The  early  Bud- 
dhists, though  they  took  over  the  number  33,  rejected 
the  superstitious  beliefs  in  the  magical  influence  and 
mystic  meaning  of  that  &  other  simple  numbers.  And 
they  altered  the  tradition.  The  king  of  the  gods  had 
been  Indra,  of  disreputable  character  from  the  Bud- 
dhist point  of  view.  Him  they  deposed,  and  invented 
a  new  god  named  Sakka,  the  opposite  in  every  way  to 
Indra  (see  for  details  Dial.  11.294-298).  Good  Bud- 
dhists, after  death  in  this  world,  are  reborn  in  heaven 
(sagga),  by  which  is  meant  the  realm  of  the  Thirty -three 
(D  11.209).  There  they  are  welcomed  by  the  Thirty- 
three  with  a  song  of  triumph  (D  11.209,  211,  221,  227). 
The  Thirty-three  are  represented  as  being  quite  good 
Buddhists.  Sakka  their  new  chief  and  Brahma  address 
them  in  discourses  suitable  only  for  followers  of  the 
new  movement  (D  11. 213,  221).  See  further  Vin  1.12  ; 
M  1.252;  11.78;  ni.ioo;  A  111.287;  iv. 396=  VvA  18 
(cp''  with  the  people  of  Jambudipa) ;  v. 59,  331,  Vism 
225,  etc.  —  See  also  tidasa. 

-devaloka  the  god-world  of  the  33  ;  freq.  e.  g.  J  1.202  ; 
Vism  399 ;  DhA  III. 8  ;  -bhavana  the  realm  of  the  33 
gods  J  1.202  ;  Vism  207  sq.,  390,  416,  and  passim. 

Tavata  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  tava]  lit.  "  so-much-ness,"  i.  e. 
relative  extent  or  sphere,  relatively  Vism  481,  482. 

Tasa  [see  tasati*]  terror,  trembling,  fear,  fright,  anxiety 
S  111.57  :  J  1-312  ;  III- 1 77.  202  ;  Miln  24.     Cp.  san°. 

Tasaniya  (adj.)  to  be  dreaded,  dreadful,  fearful  Miln  149. 


Tahai) 


135 


Titthati 


Tahai)  contraction  of  i .  tai)  abar) :  see  ta° ;  2 .  te  abai) : 
see  tvag. 

Ti  (adv.)  [cp.  Sk.  iti]  the  apostrophe  form  of  iti,  thus. 
See  iti. 

Ti°  [Vedic  tris,  Av.  f>ris,  Gr.  rpi'i,-,  Lat.  ter  (fr.  ters>  ♦tris, 
cp.  testis>  *tristo,  trecenti>  •tricenti),  Icl.  f>risvar, 
Ohg.  driror]  base  of  numeral  three  in  comp" ;  con- 
sisting of  three,  threefold ;  in  numerical  cpds.  also= 
three  (3  times). 

-katuka  threefold  spices  (katuka-bhavd^)  VvA  186; 
-gaTuta  a  distance  of  J  of  a  league  (i.  e.  about  2 
miles),  DhA  1.108  (less  than  yojana,  more  than 
usabha),  131,  396;  n.43,  61,  64,  69;  111.202,  269; 
VvA  227;  B.  on  S  1.52  (sarira) ;  -catu  three  or  four 
DhA  1. 1 73;  -civara  (nt.)  the  3  robes  of  a  bhikkhu, 
consisting  of :  diguna  sangh^lti,  ekacciya  uttarasanga, 
ekacciya  antaravasaka  Vin  1.289,  296;  11.302.  tici- 
varena  avippavasa  Vin  1. 109  sq.  —  Vism  60,  66 ; 
DhA  :v.23.  -talamattai)  3  palm-trees  high  DhA  11.62. 
-danda  i.  a  tripod  as  ope  of  the  requisites  of  a  hermit 
to  place  the  water-pot  on  (kuijdika)  J  1.8  (tidaijda- 
kundikadike  tapasa-parikkhara),  9  (hanging  from  the 
kaja) ;  11.317  (see  tedanijika).  —  2.  part  of  a  chariot 
A  IV. 191  (v.  1.  daiida  only),  -diva  the  3  heavens  (that 
is  the Tavatii)sa heaven)  D  11.167,  272  (tidiv upapanna) ; 
S  1.96  (°g  thanaQ  upeti),  181  (akankha-mano  °r)  anut- 
tara^).  -pada  [cp.  Vedic  tripad  or  tripad,  Gr.  rpiTrouf, 
Lat.  tripes :  tripod]  consisting  of  3  feet  or  (in  prosody) 
of  3  padas  Sn  457  (w.  ref.  to  metre  Savitti) ;  -(p)pala 
threefold  Vism  339  ;  -pallattha  "  turning  in  3  ways," 
i.  e.  skilled  in  all  occupations  (Kern,  Toev.:  zeer  listig) 
J  1. 1 63  (of  miga ;  Com.  expl.  as  lying  on  3  sides  of  its 
lair) ;  -pifaka  the  3  Pitakas  Vism  62,  241  ;  DhA  1.382  ; 
-petaka=tepitaka  Miln  90;  tipefakin  at  Vin  v.3 ; 
-mandala  (nt.)  the  3  circles  (viz.  the  navel  &  the  2 
knees)  yin  11.2 13  (°g  pa^icchadento  parimandalaQ  niva- 
sento) ;  cp.  Vin.  Texts  1.155;  -yojana  a  distance  of  3 
leagues,  i.  e.  20  miles,  or  fig.  a  long  dist.  ;  Vism  392 
(tiyojanika  setacchatta) ;  DhA  11.41  ("magga) ;  VvA  75 
("mattake  viha'rar)  agamasi) ;  PvA  2 16  (sa  ca  pokkharani 
Vcsaliya  "mattake^hoti) ;  ^satika  3C0  cubits  long  J  11.3  ; 
-loka  the  3  worlds  (i.  e.  kama,  rupa,  arupa-loka)  Sdhp 
29,  276,  491  (cp.  tebhumaka) ;  -vagga  consisting  of  3 
divisions  or  books  DA  1.2  (Dighagamo  vaggato  t.  hoti) ; 
-(v)angika  having  3  angas  (of  jhana)  Dhs  161  ;  -vassika 
for  the  3  seasons  (-gandha-salibhattar)  bhuiijanta)  DhA 
11.9;  J  1.66  (id.);  -vidha  3  fold,  of  sacrifice  (yafii5a) 
D  1.128,  134,  143  ;  of  aggi  (fire)  J  1.4  &  Miln  97  ;  Vism 
147  ("kalya^ata).  -visakha  a  three-forked  frown  on 
the  forehead  S  1.118;  M  1.109;  -sandhi  consisting  of 
3  spaces  J  VI. 397  (taya  senaya  Mithila  t.-parivarita), 
expl''  as  an  army  made  up  of  elephants,  chariots,  cavalry, 
and  infantry,  with  a  space  between  each  two. 

TiQsao  (tii)sa°)  [Vedic  trigsat,  cp.  Lat.  triginta,  Oir. 
tricha]  the  number  30  D  1.8 1  «(tir)sar)  pi  jatiyo);  S  n.2 1 7 
(t.-matta  bhikkhu) ;  dat.  instr.  tigsaya  A  v. 305  (dham- 
mehi  samannagato) ;  Sn  p.  87  (pi  dadami)  PvA  281 
(vassasahassehi) :  t.-yojana-maggag  (agato)  DhA  11.76, 
79;  III.  1 72  ;  PvA  154;  "yojanika  kantara  DhA  11. 
•93  (cp-  '92);  J  V.46  (magga) ;  DhA  1.26  (vimana) ; 
t.-vassasahassani  ayuppamaijai)  (of  Konagamana 
Buddha)  D  11. 3  ;  t.-mattani  vassani  Miln  15;  t.-vassa- 
sahassani PvA  28i  =  DhA  n.io.  So  of  an  immense 
crowd :  tirjsa  bhikkhu-sahassani  D  11. 6 ;  tigsa-matta 
sukara  J  11.417;  "sahassa-bhikkhu  DliA  i.2'4. 

Tika  (adj.-n.)  [Vedic  trika]  consisting  of  3,  a  triad  S  11. 
218  (t.-bhojana)  ;DhA  iv.89  (-nipata,  the  book  of  the 
triads,  a  division  of  the  Jataka),  108  (t.-catukka-jhana 
the  3  &  the  4  jhanas) ;  Miln  12  (tika-duka-patimaridita 
dhammasangani) ;  Vism  13  sq.  ;  DhsA  39  (-duka  triad 
&  pair). 


Tikicchaka  [fr.  tikicchati]  a  physician,  a  doctor  A  v. 2  19; 
J  1.4  (adj.  cS:  vejja) ;  iv.361  ;  PvA  233. 

Tikicchati  [also  cikicchati=Sk.  cikitsati.  Dcsid.  of  cit, 
to  aim  at,  think  upon,  in  pregnant  sense  of  endeavour- 
ing  to   heal]   to   treat  medically,   to  cure  Vin   1.276; 

5  1.222;  Miln  172,  272,  302.     Cans,  tikicchapeti  J  1.4. 

Tikiccha  (f)  [from  last]  the  art  of  healing,  practice  of 
medicine  D  i.io  (daraka°  infant  healing);  Sn  927  (°r) 
mamako  na  seveyya).  —  See  also  tckiccha. 

TikkaQ  at  J  v.291  in  "  yava  majjhantika  tikkam  agami 
yeva  "  is  to  be  read  as  "  yava  majjhantik'  dtikkamm'- 
agami  yeva." 

Tikkha  (adj.)  [=tikhina]  sharp,  clever,  acute,  quick  (only 
fig.  of  the  mind),  in  tikkh-indriya  (opp.  mud-indriya) 
Nd'  235'^=Ps  1.121  =  11.195  ;  &  tikkha-paniiata  A  1.45. 

Tikkhattag  (adv.)  [Sk.  trikrtvah]  three  times  (cp.  tayo 
II.  C  2),  esp.  in  phrase  vanditva  t.  padakkhinai)  katva 
"  having  performed  the  reverent  parting  salutation 
3  times"  VvA  173.  219;  t.  savesi  he  announced  it  3 
times  J  11.352  ;  DhA  11. 4  ;  t.  paggaijhapesi  offered  3 
times  PvA  74.  See  also  J  iv.267  ;  v. 382  ;  vi.71  ;  DhA 
11.5,  42,  65,  338;  IV. 122  &  passim. 

Tikhifla  (adj.)  [Vedic  tik§iia  of  which  t.  is  the  diseretic 
form,  whereas  the  contracted  forms  are  tinha  (q.  v.) 

6  tikkha.  Cp.  also  Sk.  tikta  pp.  of  tij,  tejate.  From 
*steg  in  Gr.  (rrijuj  "  stitch  "  &  anicTur,  Lat.  instigo, 
Ohg.  stehhan,  Ger.  steckcn,  E.  stick]  pointed,  sharp, 
pungent,  acrid  ;  fig.  "  sharp,"  clever,  cunning,  acute 
(in  this  meaning  only  in  contr.  form  tikkha)  J  v. 264  ; 
DhA  11.9;  IV. 13;  PvA  152,  221  (=tippa).  (ati-j 
tikhinata  Miln  278.     See  also  tippa  &  tibba  &  cp.  tejo. 

Tittba  (adj.)  [pp.  of  tasatii]  dry,  hard,  rough  J  vi.212 
(°sela  hard  rock). 

Titthftti  [Frequentative  of  Vedic  stha,  stand  (cp.  sthana, 
Lat.  sto :  see  thana)  =  Av.  histaiti,  Gr.  'loTiifit,  Lat. 
sisto]  to  stand,  etc.  —  I.  Forms  :  pres.  ind.  titthati 
(Sn  333,  434  ;  Pv  1.5I) ;  imper.  2nd  tittha.  3rd  titthatu  ; 
ppr.  titthag,  titthanto,  titthamana ;  pot.  titthe  (Sn 
918,  968)  &  tittheyya  (Sn.  942);  fut.  thassati  (J  1.172, 
217);  aor.  atthasi  (J  1.279,  pi.  atthagsu  J  11.129)  & 
attha  (cp.  aga,  orig.  impf.)  (Sn  429;  J  1.188);  inf. 
thatug  (PvA  174);  ger.  thatva  (Sn  887);  grd.  thaniya 
(PvA  72).  —  pp.  thita,  Caus.  (hapeti.  An  apparent 
Med. -Pass,  thiyati,  as  found  in  cpd.  pati-tthiyati  is  to 
be  expf  as  Med.  of  pati-t-  sthya  (see  thina),  and  should 
be  written  pafi-tthiyati.  Sec  under  patitthiyati.  See 
also  thana  &  thiti-  —  IL  Meanings. —  i.  to  stand, 
stand  up,  to  be  standing  (see  thana  I.  i*) :  fhanakap- 
pana-vacanag  nisajjadi-patikkhepato  PvA  24 ;  opp. 
to  walking  or  lying  down  :  titthag  carag  nisinno  va 
Sn  151,  193;  tiftharaanaya  eva  c'  assa  gabbhavutth&- 
nag  ahosi  "she  was  delivered  standing  "  J  1.52  ;  ekam- 
antag  atthasi  PvA  08,  etc.  ;  cankamana-kotiyag  thatva 
PvA  79.  —  2.  to  stop,  stay,  abide;  to  last,  endure, 
be  at  rest ;  fig.  to  remain  in,  abide  by,  acquiesce 
in  (see  thana  I.  i^').  In  imper.  titthatu  it  approaches 
the  meanings  of  thapeti  viz.  leave  it  alone,  let  it  be  so, 
all  right,  yava  kayo  thassati  tava  nag  dakkhinti 
deva-manussa  (as  long  as  the  body  shall  last)  C  1.46. 
titthe  shall  he  live  on  (cp.  thana  II.''  Sn  1053.  1072 
=  Nd^  283,  tittheyya  sajthikappasahassani  to  stay  on 
indefinitely);  tittheyya  kappag  D  11. 103.  titlhanti 
anto  vimanasmig  "  remaining  inside  the  castle  "  Pv 
l.io>;  tittha  tava  "stop  please"  J  n.352  ;  titlha- 
bhadantika  one  who  bids  the  guest  stay  (comb''  w. 
ehi-bh°)  D  1.166;  M  1.342;  A  1.295;  11.206:  ovide 
thatva  (abiding  by)  J  1.153 ;  vi.367  ;  similarly  J  vi.336. 
—  Imper.  titthatu  J  iv.40  ;  Miln  14;  PvA  74.  —  3.  to 
live  (on  =  instr.),  behave,  exist,  be  (see  thana  I.  2);  to 
be  in  a  certain  condition  [gati,  cp.  thina  II.  (c)].     Often 


Tir 


136 


Tidasa 


periphrastically  lor  finite  verb  (with  ger.  :  cp.  gata  iS: 
thita)  tilthantam  eiiar)  janati  (he  knows  their  "  gati  ") 
Sn  II 14  (see  Nd-*  28j) ;  aharena  titthati  I'vA  27  (is 
supported  by,  cp.  thiti) ;  yavatayukar)  thatva  (out- 
living their  lives)  PvA  60;  karuna-thaniya  (=*karu- 
nayitabba)  deserving  pity  PvA  72  ;  ya  tvar)  titthasi 
(how  you  arc  or  look  1)  Vv  44',  etc.  —  with  ger. :  pharitva 
atthasi  (pervaded)  J  vi.367 ;  atthig  ahacca  alfhasi 
(cut  through  to  the  bone)  J  iv.415;  gehar)  sampari- 
varetva  atthagsu  (encircled  the  house)  PvA  22. 

Tips  (nt.)  [Vedic  tfija,  from  *ter  (cp.  tarati)  to  pierce, 
orig.  "  point  "  (=  blade)  ;  Goth.  J^aiirnus,  Ags.  Jiorn=E. 
thorn,  Ger.  dorn]  grass,  herb ;  weed  ;  straw  ;  thatch  ; 
hay,  htter  S  111.137  (tina,  kasa,  kusa,  babbaja,  birana) ; 
satinakatthodaka  full  of  grass,  wood  &  water  (of  an 
estate)  D  1.87,  111,  etc.  ;  sitar)  va  unhari  va  rajo  va 
tinai)  va  ussavo  va  (dust  &  weeds)  D  11.19;  A  1. 145; 
t.-f-panna  (grass  &  leaves')  A  1.183  ;  VvA  5.  —  J  1.108 
(dabba°),  295;  111.53;  Pv  1.8I  (harita  t.);  iv.i";  Vism 
353  (kuntha°);  DA  I.77  (alla°  fresh  grass);  PvA  7 
(weed),  62  (grass),  112  ;  DhA  iv.121  ;  Miln  47  (thatch), 
224  (id.). 

-andupaka  a  roll  of  grass  Vin  1.208=111.249  ;  -agara 
a  thatched  cottage  A  i.ioi  (+ nalagara) ;  -ukka  a  fire- 
brand of  dry  grass  or  hay  S  11.152;  111.185;  J  1.212, 
296;  Vism  428;  DhA  1.126;  ThA  287;  Bdhd  107; 
-karala  a  wisp  of  grass  DhA  111.38  ;  -kajaka  a  load  of  g. 
DhA  IV. 121  ;  -gahana  a  thicket  of  g.,  a  jungle  A  1.153  ; 
-cunna  crushed  &  powdered  (dry)  grass  or  herbs  Vin 
1.203 ;  VvA  100  (-rajanukinna) ;  -jati  grass-creeper 
VvA  162  ;  •daya  a  grass-jungle  S  11.152  ;  -dosa  damaged 
by  weeds  (khetta)  Dh  356 ;  PvA  7 ;  -pupphaka  (,-roga) 
sickness  caused  by  the  flowering  of  grass,  hay-fever 
Miln  216;  -purisaka  a  straw-man,  a  scarecrow  Miln 
352  ;  Vism  462  ;  DhsA  1 1 1  ;  -bhakkha  eating  grass ;  of 
animals  M  111.167  ;  of  ascetics  D  1.166  ;  Pug  55  ;  A  1.241, 
295  ;  -bhusa  chaff,  litter,  dry  grass  VvA  47 ;  -rukkha  a 
shrub ;  -vatfharaka  one  of  the  seven  Adhikaranasam- 
athas  (ways  in  which  litigation  may  be  settled).  In 
case  mutual  complaints  of  breach  of  the  rules  have 
been  brought  before  a  chapter,  then  the  chapter  may 
decline  to  go  into  the  details  and,  with  the  consent  of 
the  litigants,  declare  all  the  charges  settled.  See  Vin. 
Texts,  111.30-34.  This  is  the  "  covering  over  as  if  with 
grass  "  Vin  11.87  ('"  detail,  cp.  also  tabsapapiyyasika) ; 
D  111.254  ;  A  1.99 ;  M  11.250  ;  -santharaka  a  mat  of  grass 
Vin  1.286;  11.113,  116;  J  1.360. 

TiQava  a  sort  of  drum  A  11.117. 

Tiv^nka  sec  tinduka. 

TiQ9a  fPP-  of  tarati]  one  who  has  reached  the  other  shore 
(always  fig.)  gone  through,  overcome,  one  who  has 
attained  Nibbana.  Ogha"  gone  through  the  great 
flood  S  1.3,  142  ;  Sn  178,  823,  1082,  1101,  1145;  Dm. 
54;  Sn  21  (-1- paragata),  359  (-t- parinibbuta),  515, 
545  (tinno  tares'  imai)  pajagj;  It  123  (tinno  tarayatar) 
varo)  ;  Dh   195  (-sokapariddava) ;  Nd^  282. 

-kathankatha  (adj.)  having  overcome  doubt,  free 
from  doubt  Sn  17,  86,  367  ;  -vicikiccha  =  prec.  Vin  1.16; 
D  I.I  10  ;  11.224,  229  ;  Pug  68  ;  DA  1.21 1. 

TiQha  [see  tikhina]  sharp  (of  swords,  axes,  knives,  etc.) 
D  1.56  (sattha) ;  S  iv.160,  167  (kuthari) ;  A  iv.171  ; 
Sn  667  (°dhara),  673  (asipattavana) ;  J  1.253 ;  Sdhp 
381. 

Titikkhati  [Sk.  titiksate,  Desid.  of  tij,  cp.  tijo  &  tikhina 
to  bear,  endure,  stand  S  1.22  i  ;  Sn  623;  Dh  32  i  =  Nd^ 
475  B';;Dh  399  (titikkhissar)  =  sahrssami  DhA  IV.3) ; 
J  V.81,  368. 

Titikkha  (f.)  [sec  last]  endurance,  forgiveness,  long- 
suffering  S  1.7  ;  v,4  ;  Dh  184  ;  Nd-  203. 

Titta  [pp.  of  tappati^]  satisfied  (with=instr.)  enjoying 
(c.  gen.),  happy,  contented  A  1.87  =  Pug  26  (+  tappetar) ; 


Miln  249;  VvA  86  (  =  pinita);  PvA  46  (dibbaharassa), 
59  (=suhita),  109  (  =  pinita).  — atitta  dissatisfied,  in- 
satiate J  1.440;  111.275;  Dh  48  (kame.'in). 

Tittaka  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  tiktaka  from  tij]  sharp,  bitter  (of 
taste)  M  1.80  (°alabu),  315  (id);  PvA  47  (id.;  so  read 
for  tintaka  labu)  Dhs  629  =  Nd2  540  (tittika ;  enum'' 
between  lavana  &  katuka) ;  DhsA  320. 

Tittakatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  to  tittaka]  bitterness,  enum''  with 
lavanattar)  &  kafukattag  at  Miln  56=63  (cp.  Nd-  540). 

Titti  (f.)  [from  tappati^]  satisfaction  (in  =  loc.)  Dh  186 
=  ThA  287  (na  kahapanavassena  t.  kamesu  vijjati) ;  n' 
atthi  t.  kamanar)  Th  2,  487;  J  v. 486  (dhammesu); 
VvA  II  ;  PvA  32  (°i)  gacchati  find  s.)  55  (patilabhati), 
127. 

Tittika  in  sama°  at  D  1.244,  Vin  1.230,  brimful,  of  a 
river.  Derivation  &  meaning  doubtful.  See  the  note 
at  Buddhist  Suttas,  178,  9. 

Tittimant  (adj.)  [titti-t- mant]  satisfied,  contented,  so  read 
at  J  111.70  &  VI. 508  for  kittimant. 

Tittira  [Onomat.  cp.  Vedic  tittira  &  tittiri,  Gr.  rarvpas 
pheasant.  Lit.  teterva  heath-cock ;  Lat.  tetrinnio  to 
cackle]  partridge  J  1.218;  111.538.  -pattika  a  kind  of 
boot  Vin  1. 1 86. 

Tittiriya  (adj.)  [fr.  tittira]  belonging  to  a  partridge,  like 
a  partridge  J  1.2 19  (brahmacariya). 

Tittha  (nt.)  [Vedic  tirtha,  from  *ter,  tarate,  to  pass 
through,  orig.  passage  (through  a  river),  ford]  i.  a 
fording  place,  landing  place,  which  made  a  convenient 
bathing  place  D  11.89=  Vin  1230  (Gotania°  the  G.  ford) ; 
J  '-S.SQ.  340  (tittharana) ;  ii.iii  ;  in. 228  ("navika  ferry- 
man);  230  (nava°  a  ferry);  iv.379  ;  Pv  11.  i^";  111. 6*; 
IV. 12^  (su°) ;  Davs.  v. 59  (harbour).  Titthar)  janati  to 
know  a  "fording  place,"  i.  e.  a  means  or  a  person  to 
help  over  a  difficulty  or  doubt  M  1.223  =  A  v. 349  (neg.) 
2.  a  sect  (always  with  bad  connotation.  Promising  to 
lead  its  votaries' over  into  salvation,  it  only  leads  them 
into  error). 

-Ayatana  the  sphere  or  fold  of  a  sect  (cp.  titthiya) 
Vin  1.60,  69  ;  11.279 ;  M  1.483  ;  A  1173  ;  Pug  22  ;  Dhs 
381,  1C03  (cp.  £)As.  <rs/.  p.  101") ;  DA  I.I  18  ;  Ledi  Sadaw 
in  J.P.T.S.  1913,  1 17-1 18;  -kara  a  "ford-maker," 
founder  of  a  sect  D  1.47,  1 16  ;  M  1.198  ;  Sn  pp.  90,  92  ; 
Miln  4,  6,  etc.  ;  -fiiiuta  knowledge  of  a  ford,  in  fig. 
sense  of  titthai)  janati  (see  above)  Nett  29,  80. 

Titthika  (adj.)  [Possible  reading  in  Burmese  MSB.  for 
tittika.  But  the-  two  compound  letters  (tt  and  tth) 
are  so  difficult  to  distinguish  that  it  is  uncertain  which 
of  the  two  the  scribe  really  meant]. 

Titthiya  [from  tittha  2,  cp.  Divy  81'  ;  AvS  1.48  ;  11.20.  An 
adherent  of  another  sect  (often  as  aniia''),  an  heretic 
Vin  1.54,  84,  136,  159  ("samadana),  306  ('dhaja),  320; 
S  1.65;  IV. 37,  394;  D  111.44,  46;  Sn  381,  891;  Nd" 
38;  Ps  1.160;  Pug  49;  Vbh  247.  aiina°  e.  g.  Vin 
i.ioi  ;  Di.i75sq.  ;  Iii.i30sq.  ;  J  11.415,417.  -savaka 
a  follower  of  an  heretic  teacher  Vin  1.172  ;  J  1.95; 
Vism  17. 

Tithi  [Sk.  tithi]  a  lunar  day  DhA  1.174  ;  PvA  198. 

Tidasa  (num.)  [Vedic  tridasa]  thirty  (cp.  tigsa),  esp.  the 
thirty  deities  (pi.)  or  belonging  to  them  (adj.).  It  b 
the  round  figure  for  33,  and  is  used  as  equivalent  to 
tavatir)sa.  Nandanar)  rammar)  tidasanar)  mahavanai) 
Pv  iii.i"=Vv  iS'-";  deva  tidasa  sahindaka  Vv  30'; 
Sdhp  420. 

-4dhipati  the  Lord  of  the  30  (viz.  Sakka)  Vv  47*; 
-inda  ruler  of  the  30  Sdhp  411,  478  ;  -gana  the  company 


Tidha 


137 


Tiriyar) 


of  the  30  Sn  679  (Com.  tettirjsa) ;  Vv  41"  ;  -gatin  going 
to  the  30  (as  one  of  the  gatis)  Vv  35'-  (  =  tidasabha- 
vanar)  gata  Tavatirjsadevanikayar)  uppanna  VvA  1O4) ; 
-pura  the  city  of  the  30,  i.  e.  Heaven  Miln  291  ;  -bha- 
vana  the  state  of  the  30,  i.  e.  heavenly  existence  VvA 
164  (  =  Tavatir)sabhavana). 

Tidha  (adv.)  [ti+dha]  in  three  ways  or  parts,  threefold 
Miln  282  (-pabhinna  nagaraja). 

Tinta  (adj.)  [=timita  from  temeti]  wet,  moist  Miln  286; 
DhA  11.40  (°mukha). 

Tintaka  at  PvA  47  (°alabu)  is  to  be  read  as  tittaka°. 

Tinti^a  (nt.)  greed,  desire  ;  (adj.)  greedy.  Ep.  of  a  papa- 
bhikkhu  A  v.  149  (Com.  tintinarj  vuccati  tanha,  taya 
samannagato  asankabahulo  va) ;  Vbh  351  (tintiijai) 
tintitiayana,  etc.  =  loluppar)). 

Tintii^ti  A:  Tintiijiayati  [either=Sk.  timirayati  to  be 
obscured,  from  tim  in  timira,  or  from  stim  (Sk.  *tisti- 
mayati>  'stistim"  after  tisthati>  *stisthati  ;=  P.  titina- 
yati)  to  become  stiff,  cp.  timi,  thina  and  in  meaning 
mucchati.  The  root  tam  occurs  in  same  meaning  in 
cpd.  nitammati  (q.  v.  =  Sk.  nitamyati)  at  J  iv.284, 
expl"*  by  atikilamati]  to  become  sick,  to  swoon,  to 
(stiffen  out  in  a)  faint  J  1.243  (tintiijanto  corresp.  with 
raucchita) ;  vi.347  (tintinayamana,  v.  1.  tinay°). 

Tindnka  [Sk.  tinduka]  the  tree  Diospyros  embryopteris 
D  1. 1 78  (v.  1.  tind"  ;  J  v.99  ;  tindukani  food  in  a  her- 
mitage J  IV. 434  ;  VI. 532.  — tindukakandara  Npl.  the 
T.  cave  Vin  11.76.  —  See  also  timbaru  &  timbarusaka. 

Tipn  [cp.  Sk.  trapu,  non-Aryan  ?]  lead,  tin  Vin  1.190 
(°maya) ;  S  v.92  ;  J  11.296 ;  Miln  331  (°kara  a  worker  in 
lead,  tinsmith);  Vism  174  (°man(Jala) ;  DhA  iv.104 
(°parikha). 

Tipnaa  (nt.)  [Sk.  trapusa]  a  species  of  cucumber  J  v.37  ; 
VvA  147. 

Tippa  (adj.)  [a  variant  of  tibba=Sk.  tivra,  presumably 
from  tij  (cp.  tikhina),  but  by  Bdhgh  connected  w. 
tap  (tapati,  burn) :  tippa  ti  bahala  tapana-vasena  va 
tippa  Com.  to  Anguttara  (see  M  1.526)]  piercing,  sharp, 
acute,  fierce ;  always  &  only  with  ref.  to  pains,  esp. 
pains  suffered  in  Niraya.  In  full  comb"^  saririka 
vedana  dukkha  tippa  khara  M  i.io  ;  A  11. 116,  143,  153  ; 
ekantadukkha  t.  kafuka  ved.  M  1.74  ;  bhayanaka 
ekantatippa  Niraya  Pv  iv.i'  (=  tikhiijadukkha"  PvA 
221) ;  nerayika  satta  dukkha  t.  kafuka  ved°  vediyamana 
Miln  148. 

Tibba  (adj.)  probably  a  contamination  of  two  roots  of 
different  meaning  ;  viz.  tij  &  tim  (of  taraas)  or=stim  to 
be  motionless,  cp.  stya  under  thina]  i.  sharp,  keen, 
eager:  tibbagarava  very  devout  A  11.21  ;  Nett  112  (cp. 
tivraprasada  Av§  1.130);  t.-cchanda  D  111.252,  283. — 
2.  dense,  thick  ;  confused,  dark,  dim  :  t.-raga  Dh  349 
(^bahalaraga  DhA  iv.68) ;  A  11.149;  tibba  vanasando 
avijjaya  adhivacanar)  S  111.109;  tibbasaraga  (kamesu) 
S  111.93  =  It  90;  A  11.30;  tibbo  manussaloko  (dark, 
dense)  Miln  7  ;  "andhakara  dense  darkness  Vism  500  sq.  ; 
"kilesu  deep  blemisli  (of  character)  Vism  87. 

Timi  [Derivation  unknown.  Sk.  timi]  a  large  fish,  a 
leviathan  ;  a  fabulous  fish  ol  enormous  size.  It  occurs 
always  in  comb"  w.  timingala,  in  formula  timi  timingala 
timitimingala,  which  should  probably  be  reduced  to 
one  simple  timitimingala  (see  next). 

Timingala  [timi-t-gila,  gl,  sec  note  on  gala]  in  comb"  w. 
timi,  timitimingala.  Sk.  has  timingila  &  timingilagila : 
redupl.  in  2nd  syllable  where  P.  has  rcdupl.  in  ist;  fi.sh- 
eater,  redupl.  eis  intens.  =  greedy  or  monstrous  fish- 
eater,  a  fabulous  fish  of  enormous  size,  the  largest  lish 
in  existence  Vin  11.238=  A  iv.2co  =  Nd^  235''! ;  Ps  11, 196; 


Miln  377.  At  Ud  54  sq.  &  Miln  262  we  find  the  reading 
timi  timingala  tiinirapingala,  which  is  evidently  faulty. 
A  Sanskritizcd  form  of  t.  is  timitimingala  at  Divy  502. 
See  timiratipingala,  &  cp.  also  the  similar  Sk.  cilicima 
a  sort  of  fish. 

Timira  (adj.)  [Sk.  timira  fr.  tim=tam  (as  in  tamas),  to 
which  also  belong  tibba  2  &  tintinati.  This  is  to  be 
distinguished  from  tim  in  temeti  to  (be  or)  make  wet. 
See  tama]  dark;  nt.  darkness  Vv  32^  (t.-tamba) ; 
J  UI.189  (t.-rukkha) ;  vanatimira  a  flower  J  iv.285 ; 
V.182. 

Timiratipingala  (nt.)  a  great  ocean  lish,  DhsA  13,  v.  timin- 
gala. 

Timirayittata  (nt.)  [abstr.  to  timirayita,  pp.  of  timirayati 
to  obscure,  denom.  to  timira]  gloom,  darkness  S  111.124 
(  =  Mara). 

Timisa  (nt.)  [Vedic  tamisra=  tamas]  darkness  J  111433 
(andhakara-timissaya) ;  Pug  30  (andh°-timisaya). 

Timisika  (f.)  [timisa-i- ka]  darkness,  a  very  dark  night 
Vv  9" ;  J  iv.98  ;  Miln  283. 

Timbartl  a  certain  tree  (Strychnos  nux  vomica  or  Dios- 
pyros) J  VI. 336  ;  "tthani  (f.)  "  with  breasts  like  the  t. 
fruit"  Sn  110;  J  vi.457  (SnA  172:  tarupadarika) ; 
VvA  137  (t.-nadasadisa). 

Timbarnkkh8=  timbarusaka  J  vi.529. 

TimbarDsaKa=  timbaru     (Diospyros    or    Strychnos)    Vin 
III. 59;    Vv    33"    (  =  tindukaphala    VvA    147;    tipusa 
sadisa    eka    vallijati    timbarusakan    ti    ca    vadanti) ; 
DhA  III. 315. 

Tiraccha  (adv.)  [Vedic  tiryailc.  obliquely,  from  *ter 
(tarati).  Goth.  I'airh,  Ohg.  durh,  E.  through  ,  cp. 
tiriyai)]  across,  obliquely ;  in  "bhuta  deviating,  going 
wrong,  swerving  from  the  right  direction  DA  1.89  (see 
under  tiracchana-katha). 

Tiracchana  [for  ''gata=Sk.  tirascina  (°gata)=  tirasca ; 
"  going  horizontally,"  i.  e.  not  erect.  Cp.  tiraccha, 
tiriyar),  tiro]  an  animal  It  92  (tiracchanar)  ca  yoniyo 
for  tiracchana-yoniyo)  ;  Vbh  339  (°gamini  patipada 
leading  to  rebirth  among  beasts) ;  VvA  23  (manussa- 
tiracchana  an  animal-man,  wild  man,  "werwolf"). 

-katha  "  animal  talk  "  ;  wrong  or  childish  talk  in 
general  Vin  i.i88;D  1.7,  178;  111.54  ;  Vism  I27;expl'' 
at  DA  1.89  by  aniyanikatta  sagga-mokkha-magganai) 
tiraccha-bhuta  katha  ;  -gata  an  animal,  a  beast  Vin 
IV. 7;  S  iii.i52  =  DA  1.23;  (t.  paiia)  M  111.167  (t.  p5na 
tinabhakkha) ;  Nd*  on  Sn  72  (t.-pana) ;  J  1.459  (  =  vana- 
gocara)  ;  Vbh  412  sq.  ;  -yoni  the  realm  of  the  brute 
creation,  the  animals.  Among  the  5  gatis  (niraya  t. 
manussa  deva  pcttivisaya)  it  counts  as  an  apayagati, 
a  state  of  misery  D  1.228  ;  in. 234  ;  S  1.34  ;  111.225  sq.  ; 
IV.  168,  307  ;  A  1.60  ;  11.127,  '29  ;  Pv  IV. 1 1' ;  Vism  103, 
427  ;  PvA  27,  1O6 ;  -yonika  (&  yoniya  A  1.37)  belonging 
to  the  realm  of  the  animals  S  v. 356 ;  -vijja  a  low  art,  a 
jKSeudo-science  Vin  11.139;  D  1.9  sq. 

Tiriyag  (adv.)  [Vedic  tiryanc  (tiryak)  to  tiras,  sec  tiro 
&  cp.  perhaps  Gcr.  qucr=E.  thwart,  all  to  *ter  in 
tarati]  transversely,  obliquely,  horizontally  (as  opp. 
to  uddhar)  vertically,  above,  &  adho  beneath),  slanting, 
across,  in  comb"  uddhag  adho  tiriyar)  sabbadhi  "  in 
all  directions  whatever"  D  1.251  =  A  11.129;  similarly 
uddhaii  adho  t.  vapi  majjhe  Sn  1055  ;  with  uddhai)  & 
adho  D  1.23,  153;  Vism  176  (where  cxpl'').  —  A  11.48; 
Sn  150,  537  ;  J  1.9O;  It  1211  ;  DhA  1.40  (dvara-majjhe  t. 
across  the  dof)rway),  47  (sideways);  DA  1.312;  KhA 
248. 

-tarana  ferrying  across,  adj.  ''a  iiavS,  a  vgssel  crossing 
over,  a  trajcct  \'in  iv.b5. 


Tiriya 


138 


Tunhi 


Tiriya  (f.)  a  kind  of  grass  or  creeper  A  111.240,  242  (tiriya 
nama  tinajati ;  Com.  dabbatina). 

Tirivaccha  a  certain  tree  J  v. 46. 

Tiriya  (nt.)  the  tree  Symplocos  racemosa,  also  a  garment 
made  of  its  bark  Vin  1.306  (°ka) ;  D  i.i66=A  1.295; 
M  1.343;  Pug  51. 

Tiro  (prep.  &  adv.)  (always  "-)  [Vedic  tiras  across,  cross- 
ways,  from  *ter  of  tarati=to  go  through;  cp.  Av. 
taro,  Lat.  trans,  Cymr.  tra]  across,  beyond,  over,  outside, 
afar.     See  also  tiraccha  &  tiriyar). 

-karani  (f.)  a  curtain,  a  veil  (Ut.  "drawing  across  ") 
Vin  1.276;  11.152;  -kucchigata  having  left  the  womb 
D  II. 13;  -kudda  outside  the  fence  or  wall,  over  the 
wall  Vin  iv.265  ("kud^e  uccararj  cha(J<Jeti) ;  D  1.78  = 
A  III. 280  (in  phrase  tirobhavar)  t.  kud^lar)  t.  pakarar) 
t.-pabbatar)  asajjaman^..  gacchati  to  denote  power  of 
transplacement) ;  Pv  1.5'  ("kuddesu  tiffhanti ;  the 
Tirokudija-Sutta,  Khp  VII.) ;  Vism  176,  394  ;  DhA  1.104  ; 
PvA  23,  31  ;  -gama  a  distant  village  Vin  in. 135  ;  -chada 
"outside  the  veil,"  conspicuous  J  vi.60  ;  -janapada  a 
distant  or  foreign  country  D  1.116  ;  -pakara  beyond  or 
over  a  fence  ("pakaraoQ  or  °pakare)  Vin  rv.266 ;  see  also 
"kudda;  -bhava  (g)  beyond  existence,  out  of  existence, 
magic  power  of  going  to  a  far  away  place  or  concealment 
Vism  393  sq.  (=a-pakata-patihariya),  see  also  under 
"kudda.  -rattha  a  foreign  kingdom  D  1.161  (=para- 
rattha  DA  1.286). 

Tirokkha  i.  (adj.)  one  who  is  outside,  or  absent  Vin 
III. 185.  —  2.  (adv.)  [=  tiras-l- ka,  cp.  tiraskara  disdain, 
abuse]  in  tirokkha-vaca  one  who  speaks  abusively  or 
with  disregard  J  v.  78. 

Tila  (m.  nt.)  [Vedic  tila  m.]  the  sesame  plant  &  its  seed 
(usually  the  latter,  out  of  which  oil  is  prepared ;  see 
tela),  Sesamum  Indicum.  Often  comb"*  with  tandula, 
e.  g.  A  1. 1 30  =  Pug  32  ;  J  1.67;  III. 53.  —  Vim. 2 12  (n'ava- 
tUa);  A  IV.108;  Sn  p.  126;  J  1.392;  11.352;  Vism  489 
(ucchu°);  DhA  1.79;  PvA  47  (tilani  piletva  telava- 
nijjar)  karoti). 

-odana  rice  with  sesame  J  in. 425 ;  -kakka  sesame 
paste  Vin  1.205  ;  -tela  ses.  oil  VvA  54  (°r)  patukama) ; 
DhA  III. 29 ;  Bdhd  105  ;  -pitiiiaka  tila  seed-cake,  oil- 
cake VvA  142  ;  -pittha  sesamum-grinding,  crushed  s. 
seed  Vin  iv.341.  -mutthi  a  handful  of  ses.  J  11.278; 
-rasi  a  heap  of  t.  seeds  VvA  54  ;  -vaha  a  cartload  of  t. 
seeds  A  v.i73=Sn  p.  126;  -sangulika  a  ses.  cake  DhA 
"•75- 

Tilaka  [tila-l-  ka,  from  its  resemblance  to  a  sesame  seed] 
I.  a  spot,  stain,  mole,  freckle  M  1.88  ;  S  1.170  ;  VvA  253  ; 
DhA  IV. 1 72  (°i)  va  kalakar)  va  adisva).  —  2.  a  kind  of 
tree  Vv  6'  (  =  bandhu-jivaka-puppha-sadisa-puppha 
eka  rukkha-jati). 

Tilanchaka  at  J.  iv.364  ace.  to  Kern  {Toev.  11.91)  to  be 
read  as  nilanchaka. 

Tisata  (num.)  [ti+ sata]  three  hundred  J  vi.427  (°matta 
nava).     See  also  under  tayo. 

Tira  (nt.)  [Vedic  tiras  from  *ter,  tarati;  orig.  the  opposite 
bank,  the  farther  side  (of  a  river  or  ocean),  cp.  tittha] 
a  shore,  bank  Vin  i.i  ;  D  1.222,  244 ;  A  11.29,  5°  ;  Dh  85  ; 
Sn  672  ;  J  1.2 12,  222,  279;  ii.iii,  159;  Dhs  597;  Vbh 
71  sq.  ;  Vism  512  (orima°) ;  PvA  142,  152.  —  tira-dassin 
finding  the  shore  S  111.164;  A  111.368.  —  a-tira-dassani 
(f.)  not  seeing  the  shore  (nava  a  ship)  J  v. 75. 

Tirava  [from  tireti  2]  measurement,  judgment,  recogni- 
tion, Nd'  413  (v.  1.  tir°);  Nett  54  (+ vipassana),  82 
(ssnaija),  191;  Vism  162.  —  tiraoa  is  one  of  the  3 
pariflnas,  viz.  t°,  pahana".  fiata-parifinS.  See  under 
parinna. 


!nriya  (adj.)  [from  *tira]  dwelling  on  the  banks  of  .  .  . 

Vin  11.287. 

Tireti  [Cans,  of  tarati]  i.  to  bring  through,  to  finish,  to 
execute  (business),  to  accomplish :  karaijiyar)  Miln  7, 
PvA  203;  kiccag  PvA  278.  —  2.  to  measure,  judge, 
recognize,  always  in  formula  tuleti  tireti  vibhaveti 
(Nd*  tul°  tir°,  etc.)  as  interpretation  of  janSti ;  pp. 
tirita  (Nd^  tirita)  Ps  11.200  ;  Nd^  under  fiata  &  No.  413. 

nvara  (pi.)  N.  of  a  people  in  the  time  of  Buddha  Kaku- 
sandha  S  11. 191. 

nhai)  (adv.)  [tri+  aha]  a  period  of  three  days,  for  3  days  ; 
usually  as  cpd.  dvihatihai)  2  or  3  days  (see  dviha) 
J  11.103,  etc. 

Tu  (indecl.)  [Vedic  tu,  belonging  to  pron.  base  of  2nd  sg. 
tvar)  =  Lat.  tu ;  Gr.  rv,  roi  =  indeed,  however  (orig. 
ethical  dat,  of  <rv),  roimv,  roiyap  ;  Goth.  )>u,  etc.,  cp. 
tuvar)]  however,  but,  yet,  now,  then  (similar  in  appl.  to 
tava) ;  kin  tu  but  (=  quid  nunc).  Frequent  in  late  verse : 
ante  tu,  J.P.T.S.  1884,  5.  31,  37  etc.  J.P.T.S.  1913, 
5* ;  Ed's  Man.  1 1^^  &c.  Usually  comb"*  with  eva  :  tv 
eva  however  Sn  p.  141  ;  na  tv  eva  not  however,  but  not 
A  V.173. 

Tanga  (adj.)  [Sk.  tunga,  tun  to  stand  out,  cp.  Gr. 
ti'f^/3oc  hillock,  Lat.  tumeo  &  tumulus,  Mir.  tomm  hill] 
high,  prominent,  long  J  1.89 ;  111.433  (pabbata,  expl** 
however  by  tikhiija,  sharp,  rough) ;  Davs.  iv.30. 

-nasika  one  with  a  prominent  or  long  nose  S  11.284  • 
cp.  sa9ha-tunga-sadisi-nasika Th  2,258  ;  -Tantaka  having 
a  long  stalk  ;  N.  of  a  plant  J  vi.537. 

Tnccha  (adj.)  [Sk.  tuccha,  prob.  rel.  to  Lat.  tesqua  deserted 
place,  see  Walde,  Lat.  Wtb.  s.  v.]  empty,  vain,  deserted ; 
very  often  comb"*  with  ritta  D  1.55  ;  in. 53  ("kumbhi) ; 
M  1.207 ;  J  1-209  (°hattha,  empty-handed) ;  vi.365 ; 
Sn  883;  Pug  45,  46;  Miln  5  (-t-palapa),  10  (id.),  13; 
DhA  n.43  ;  PvA  202  ;  Sdhp  431. 

Tncchaka=  tuccha ;  always  comb''  w.  rittaka  D  1.240 ; 
S  111.141  ;  M  1.329. 

Tojjati  Pass,  of  tudati. 

Tnttbft  [PP-  °^  tussati  to  be  satisfied]  pleased,  satisfied ; 
often  comb''  w.  haftha  (q.  v.)  i.  e.  tuttha-hattha 
J  1. 19  or  hattha-tuttha  J  11.240;  cp.  tuttba-pahattha 
J  11.240.  —  Sn  683 ;  It  103 ;  J  1.62  (°manasa),  87,  266 
("citta),  308  (id.);  iv.138.  — tutthabba  (grd.)  to  be 
pleased  with  Vin  iv.259. 

Tntthi  (f)  [from  tussati]  pleasure,  joy,  enjoyment  S  1.48; 
Dh  331  (nom.  tuUbi) ;  J  i-6o,  207. 

ToD^a  (nt.)  [Sk.  tup^a,  prob.  dial,  for  tunda  which  belongs 
to  tudati]  the  bejik  of  birds,  the  mouth,  snout  S  v.  148 
(of  a  monkey) ;  J  1.222  ;  iv.210  ;  DhA  1.394. 

Tnif^aka  (nt.)=tup4a  J  1.222  ;  m.126. 

Tn^^i^a  see  ahi°. 

ToQ^iya  (adj.)  [from  tup^i]  having  a  beak;  n.  a  pecker, 
fig.  a  tax-collector  J  v.  102  (  =  adhamma-bali-sadhaka 
103)- 

ToQliikkhaka  (adj.)  [fr.  tujulrj,  see  next]  silent  J  iv.as 
(<=  kiiici  avadanto). 

Tnj^  (indecl.)  [Sk.  tu^ijii)  ace.  sg.  of  fern,  abstr.  tu?pi, 
used  adverbially,  from  tussati]  silently,  esp.  in  phrase 
tunhi  ahosi  he  remained  silent,  as  a  sign  of  consent  or 
affirmative  answer  (i.  e.  he  had  nothing  to  say  against 
it)  D  II. 155;  A  v. 194;  Dh  227;  Sn  720  (tuDhi  ySti 
mahodadhi) ;  PvA  1 1 7. 


I 


Tunhlyati 


139 


Tuvag 


-bhava  silence,  attitude  of  consent,  usually  in  form, 
adhiv^esi  tuijhi-bhavena  he  agreed  Vin  1.17;  Sn  p. 
104,  etc.  —  S  11.236,  273  (ariyot.-bhivo) ;  M  1.161  (id.); 
A  IV.153  (id.). — Miln  15  ;  PvA  17,  20,  etc. ;  -bbuta  silent 
Sn  p.  140  ;  Vv  20  ;  DhA  172,  etc. 

TnQhIyati==  taohiyati,  misspelling  at  S  11. 13. 

TaQhIra  inorganic  form  for  ttiijiira  quiver  J  v.  128,  also  as 
V.  1.  at  J  V.48. 

Tntta  (nt.)  [Sk  tottra,  from  tudati  to  prick,  push]  a 
pike  for  guiding  elephants,  a  goad  for  driving  cattle 
(cp.  tomara  &  patoda)  D  11.266  (°tomara) ;  J  iv.310; 
V.238 ;  cp.  III. 5,  2  (t.-vegahata). 

TadAti  [Vedic  tudati ;  *8tead,  enlarged  fr.  *sten,  cp. 
tAt.  tundo,  tudes  (hammer) ;  Goth,  stautan,  Ohg. 
stozan  (to  push),  E.  stutter,  Nhg.  stutzen ;  Ags.  styn- 
tan=E.  stunt]  to  strike  with  an  instrument:  to  prick, 
peck,  pierce;  to  incite,  instigate  J  in. 189  (  =  vijjhati). 
Pass,  tujjati  to  be  struck  Th  i,  780;  Vism  503  (cp. 
vitujjati);  Sdhp  279.  —  pp.  tunna.  See  also  tunica 
(beak=  pecker),  tutta  (goad),  tomara  (lance=  striker) 
&  thupa  (point). 

TadampatI  (dual)  husband  &  wife  [tu°=dial.  for  du°,  Sk. 
dve;  dampati  from  dama=domus,  Sk.  dar)pati=Gr. 
teairoTTn: ;  cp.  also  Kern,  Toev.  11.93,  who  compares 
tuvantuva  for  duvanduva].     See  under  dampati. 

ToniU'  [pp.  of  tudati]  struck  Th  2,  192  (vy5.dhimarana° 
str.  with  sickness  and  death). 

Tannk'  [from  tudati]  any  pointed  instrument  as  a  stick, 
a  goad,  a  bolt,  or  (usually)  a  needle  Vin  1.290  (+  aggala, 
means  of  fastening);  J  1.8  (id.). 

-kamma  "  needle-work,"  tailoring,  patching,  sewing 
J  rv.40  ;  VI. 366 ;  Vism  112.  -kara  (&  °ka)  a  (mending) 
tailor  J  iv.38  (v.  1.  °ka) ;  VvA  251  (°ka) ;  PvA  120); 
-▼aya  [Sk.  tunnaviya]  a  "  needle-weaver,"  a  tailor 
Vin  n.159;  J  VI. 364,  368  (°vesar)  gahetva  in  the  dis- 
guise of  a  tailor);  PvA  161  (id.);  Pv  11. 9"  (=tunna- 
kSra  PvA  120);  Miln  331,  365. 

Tama  (pron.-adj.)  [most  likely  apostrophe  form  of  Stuma 
=  atta,  Sk.  atman  self ;  cp.  also  Sk.  tman  oneself.  See 
Oldenberg,  KZ.  xxv.319.  Less  likely  =Sk.  tva  one 
or  the  other  (Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.).  Expl""  by  Com.  to 
A  III. 124  as  esa.]  oneself,  himself,  etc.  ;  every  or  any- 
body (=quisque)  yag  tumo  karissati  tumo  va  tena 
paQitayissati  (quid  quisque  faciat)  Vin  ll.i86=A  111. 124  ; 
Sn  890  (cp.  atumSnar)  v.888),  908 ;  Pv  111.2*  (=attanai) 
PvA  181). 

Tninnla  [Sk.  tumala;  to  'teu,  Lat.  tumeo,  tumulus, 
tumultus,  etc.  E.  thumb  (swelling),  cp.  tunga  & 
tala]  tumult,  uproar,  commotion  J  vi.247  (by  Com  expl"" 
as  "  andhakara,"  darkness) ;  Dpvs  xvii.ico. 

Tomba  (m.  nt.)  [possibly=Sk.  tumra  swollen  (of  shape), 
same  root  as  tumula]  i .  a  kind  of  water  vessel  (udaka° 
DA  1.202),  made  of  copper,  wood  or  a  fruit  (like  a 
calabash,  cocoanut,  etc.,  cp.  kataha,  E.  skull)  Vin 
1.205  (loha°,  kattha",  phala°) ;  11. 114  ("kataha  of 
gourd) ;  J  111.430  (udaka°) ;  iv.114  ;  DhA  11. 193  (udaka°). 
—  2.  a  measure  of  capacity,  esp.  used  for  grain  J  1.233 
(maha°),  467  (=4  na|i  p.  468) ;  Miln  102. 

Tomhidiia  (pron.-adj.)  [tumhe-t- adisa]  like  you,  of  your 
kind  Sn  459;  J  vi.528 ;  DA  1.146. 

Tnmhe  [pi.  of  pron.  2nd  pers.,  see  tuvai)]. 


Toia  (adj.)  [Vedic  tura,  cp.  tvaraija]  swift,  quick;  only 
in  composition  with  °ga,  etc.,  "  going  swiftly,"  denoting 
the  horse;  viz.  turaga  VvA  279;  turanga  VvA  281; 
Miln  192  (gaja°,  etc.),  352  (id.)  364  ;  turangama  Davs 
V.s6  !  tuTASTAmAnA  PvA  iy. 


Tarati  [=tarati^]  to  be  jn  a  hurry,  to  be  quick,  hasten 
J  VI. 229  (ma  turittho,  Prohib.).  —  pp.  turita.  Cp.  also 
tura,  etc. 

Turita  [pp.  of  turati]  hastening,  speedy,  quick ;  hastily, 
in  a  hurry  Sn  1014;  J  1.69  (turita-turita) ;  Vv  80^ 
(  =  sambhamanto    VvA    311);    DA    1.319;    PvA    181. 

—  aturita  leisurely,  with  leisure,  slow  J  1.87.  —  See  also 
tuvafai). 

Toriya  (nt.)  [Derivation  uncertain,  probably  connected 
with  tuleti,  Sk.  turya]  sometimes  turiya  (e.  g.  Vv  5*) ; 
musical  instruments  in  general,  usually  referred  to  as 
comprising  5  kinds  of  special  instruments  (pancangika 
t.  e.  g.  Vv  5*;  39';  VvA  181,  183.  210,  257),  viz. 
atata.  vitata,  atata-vitata,  ghana,  susira  (VvA  37). 
Freq.  in  phrase  nippurisehi  turiyehi  parivariyamana 
(or  paricariyamana)  "  surrounded  by  (or  entertained 
by)  heavenly  music"  Vin  t.15;  D  11. 21;  A  1.145; 
J  1.58.  —  Vv  38<  ;  4x2  ;  50",  64*  ;  Pv  III. 8' ;  DhA  111.460  ; 
VvA  92  ;  PvA  74. 

-sadda  the  sound  of  music,  music  Mhvs  vii.30.' 

Turl  a  hen  Th  2,  381  (=migi  ThA-  254)  (v.  1.  kori,  cp. 
Tamil  koli  hen). 

Tula  (adj.)  [see  tuleti]  only  in  negative  atula  incompar- 
able, not  to  be  measured,  beyond  compare  or  description 
Vv  30*  (  =  anupama  VvA  126);  Pv  11. 8*  (=appama]ja 
PvA  no);  in. 3*  (=asadisarupa  PvA  188);  Miln  343. 

Tulana  (f)  [see  tuleti]  weighing,  rating;  consideration, 
deliberation  M  1.480  ;  11. 174  ;  Nett  8,  41. 

Tnlasi  [Derivation  unknown]  basil  (common  or  sweet) 
J  V.46  ("gahana  a  thicket  of  b.  ;  v.  1.  tulasi) ;  vi.536 
(tulasi=  tulasigaccha). 

Tul&  (f)  [see  tuleti.  Vedic  tula;  Gr.  toXoc,  rdKavrov 
(balance,  weighing  &  weight=talentum),  roX/ia  ;  Lat. 
toUo  (lift) ;  Goth.  )>ulan  (to  carry  patiently,  suffer) ; 
Ger.  geduld,  etc.]  i .  a  beam  or  pole  for  lifting,  carrying 
or  supporting,  a  rafter  Vin  11. 122  ;  VvA  188  (-(-gopa- 
nasi) ;  DhsA  107.  —  2.  a  weighing  pole  or  stick,  scales, 
balance  A  1.88 ;  J  1. 112  ;  Dh  268 ;  Mihi  356  (t.  nikkhe- 
panaya).  —  3.  fig.  measure  ("  weighing,"  cp.  tulana), 
standard,  rate  S  11.236  (+  pamapa). 

-kufa  false  weighing,  false  weight  (often  comb*  with 
kaijsakuta  &  manakuta,  false  coining  &  false  measuring) 
D  i.5  =  A  ii.209!3:< ;  DA  1.79;  DhA  1.239;  -dan^a  the 
beam  or  lever  of  a  balance  J  1. 113;  -puttaka  a  gold- 
smith (using  scales)  J  v.424  (or  should  it  be  tul5- 
dhuttaka  ?). 

Tnlita  [pp.  of  tuleti]  weighed,  estimated,  compared, 
gauged,  considered  Th  2,  153  (yattakai)  esa  t.  what  she 
is  worth=lakkhaijafl5uhi  parichinna  ThA  139);  Nd' 
under  flata  (as  syn.  of  tirita) ;  PvA  52  (in  expl"  of  mita, 
measured). 

Tuliya  [Sk.  ?]  a  flying  fox  J  vi.537. 

Tnleti  [from  tula ;  Lat.  tollo,  etc.]  to  weigh,  examine, 
compare;  match,  equal  M  1.480  ;  Th  i,   107;  J  vi.283; 

—  ger.  tulayitva  M  1.480. — grd.  tuliya  &  tulya  (see 
Sep.).  —  pp.  tulita. 

Talya  &  Tuliya  (also  tuUa  J  iv.102)  (adj.)  [orig.  grd.  of 
tuleti]  to  be  weighed,  estimated,  measured  ;  matched, 
equal,  comparable  Sn  377  ;  J  in. 324  ;  PvA  87  (=  samaka). 
Mostly  in  the  negative  atulya  incomparable,  not  having 
its  equal  Sn  83,  683  ;  J  iv.i02  (atulla) ;  MUn  249  (atuliya 
guna),  343  (id.).  —  See  also  tula. 

Tavai)  4  Tyag  [Sk.  tvag  &  (Ved.)  tuaij,  cp.  also  part,  tu  ; 
Gr.  TV,  <ri ;  Lat.  tu ;  Goth.  |)u  ;  E.  thou,  etc.  ;  Oir.  tu] 
pron.  of  2nd  pers.  in  foil,  forms  &  applications : — 
L  Full  forms :   i .  sg. :  (a)  tv°,  tu°,  tuyh°  :  nom.  tvag  (in 


X 


Tuvatag 


140 


Temeti 


prose  &  verse)  Sn  179,  241,  1029,  1058;  J  1.279; 
II. 159;  Pv  1.8*.  Also  for  nom.  pi.  at  J  1.391,  395; 
VI. 576;  tuvag  (in  verse)  Sn  1064,  1102,  1121  ;  J  111.278, 
394;  Pv  1.33;  11.32;  also  £or  ace.  Sn  377;  Pv  11. 8' ; 
tuyhar)  (gen.  &  dat.)  [Sk.  tubhyar)]  Sn  983,  1030 ; 
J  1.279;  PvA  3,  60,  73.  etc.  —  (b)  ta°,  tay°,  tag  (ace.) 
M  1.487;  Sn  31,  241,  1043,  1049;  J  1,222;  n.159;  Pv 
1. 10'  ;  11.1°  ;  taya  (instr.)  Sn  335,  344  ;  J  1.222  ;  Pv  11. 3* 
(  =  bhotiya  PvA  86):  PvA  71;  tayi  (loe.)  Sn  382; 
J  1.207;  tava  (gen.)  Sn  U02,  iiio;  J  11.153;  PvA  106. 
—  2.  pi.:  tumh°  [Sk.  yusm°]  :  tumhe  (nom.  &  ace.) 
It  31  ;  J  1.22 1  (ace.);  Pv  i.n^.  Also  as  pi.  majesticus 
in  addressing  one  person  J  11. 102  ;  iv.138;  tumhag 
(gen.)  PvA  58  (for  sg.).  78  ;  tumhakag  (gen.  dat.) 
S  11.65  :  It  32  ;  J  1. 150  :  11. 102  ;  tumhesu  (loe.)  J  1.292 
(for  sg.) ;  tumhehi  (instr.)  J  11. 154  ;  Pv  1.5'^.  —  II.  En- 
clilic  forms  (in  function  of  an  ethical  dative  "  in  your 
interest,"  therefore  also  as  possessive  gen.  or  as  instru- 
mental, or  any  other  ease  of  the  interested  person 
according  to  construction),  i.  sg.  te  D  11. 127  (dat.); 
Sn  76,  120,  1099  (dat.),  1102  (dat.);  J  1.151  ;  11. 159 
(instr.);  Pv  1.2^  (dat.);  11.32  (gen.),  4"  (gen.). —  2.  pi. 
vo  S  III. 33  (instr.)  Sn  135.  172  (dat.),  331  (dat.);  J  i. 
222  (ace);  II. 133;  111.395  (gen.). 

TavataQ  (adv.)  [Sk.  tvaritar),  cp.  turata]  quickly  A  v. 342  ; 
J  1. 91  ;  II. 61  ;  VI. 519  (as  tvatag) ;  Miln  198;  Vism  305, 
313- 

TuvaHeti  (for  *Sk.  dvandvayati,  denom.  fr.  dvandva]  to 
share  (with=loe.  or  abl.)  Vin  11. 10,  124;  iv.288. 

Tavantava  (nt.)  [Sk.  dvandva,  with  dialect,  t.  (cp.  tudam- 
pati),  not  (with  Miiller,  P.  Gr.  38)  through  confusion 
with  pron.  tvag]  quarrel,  strife  M  i.iio,  410. 

Tassati  [Sk.  tusyati  to  *teiu  to  be  quiet,  contented,  happy] 
to  be  satisfied,  pleased  or  happy  J  111.280  ;  iv.138, 
Miln  2  11).  Cp.  tuttha  (pp.),  tutthi,  tunhi,  tosa,  tosana, 
toscti. 

Tussana  (nt.)  [Sk.  tosana]  satisfying,  pleasing,  in  "karana 
cause  for  satisfaction  or  delight  J  in. 448. 

Ta^ira=trinT,  Vism  251. 

TQfll  (f.)  [Sk.  •tuna  &  tuni,  to  *t|n:  sec  under  tula;  cp. 
Lat.  toUo.  On  n>l.  cp.  cikkana  &  cikkhala,  guna> 
gu|a,  kini>kili,  etc.l  a  quiver  (lit.  "carrier")  J  11.403 
(dhanug  tunifi  ca  nikkhippa) ;  v. 4  7. 

Tula  (nt.)  [Sk.  tula,  to  'ten,  Sk.  taviti,  to  swell  or  be 
bushy,  cp.  Gr.  tv\ii  swelling ;  Ags.  \>o\  peg]  a  tuft  of 
grass,  cotton  Vin  11.150  (3  kinds:  rukkha°,  lata", 
potaki") ;  Sn  591  =  J  IV.127  (vato  tular)  va  dhagsayc) ; 
DA  1.87. 

-picu  cotton-wool  Vi.sm  282,  285,  404  ;  DhA  111.202  ; 
KhA  173.  -punnika  ("  stuffwl  with  tuft  or  cotton") 
a  kind  of  shoe  Vin  1.186. 

Tiilika  (f.)  [der.  fr.  tula]  a  mattress  (consisting  of  layers  of 
grass  or  wool :  tinnar)  tuliinar)  anfiatara-punna-tnlika 
J)A  1.87)  Vin  1. 193  ;  11.151);  D  1.7  ;  A  1.181. 

Tulinl  (f.)  [Sk.  tuHni]  the  silk-cotton  tree  M  1. 128. 

Te"  [Sk.  trai\]  secondary  base  of  numeral  three  (fr.  ti) 
in  comp" :  having  a  relation  to  a  triad  of,  three- ;  in 
numerical  epds.  also  =  three  (see  under  tayo). 

-kafula  containing  3  spices  (of  yagu),  viz.  tila, 
tandiila,  mugga  Vin  1.210;  111.66;  -civarika  wearing 
three  robes  (cp.  ticivara)  Vin  1.253  :  Ud  4^  :  Pug  09  ; 
Vism  60.  -dandika  carrying  the  tripod  (see  tidanda), 
Ep.  of  a  brahmin  ascetic  A  in. 2  76  ;  J  11.316  (  =  kundikar) 
thapanattbaya  tidandag  gahetva  caranto) ;  -dhatuka 
(nt.)  the  (worlds  of  the)  threefold  composition  of  ele- 
ments =tiloka  Nett  14,  63  (tedhatuke  vimutti  = 
sabbadhi  vippamutta),  82  ;  ep.  Kvu  605  ;  -pitaka  versed 


in  the  three  pitakas  (see  pitaka),  Ep.  of  theras  & 
bhikkhus  J  iv.219;  Miln  18  sq.  ;  DhA  1.7,  384  ;  111.385  ; 
DSvs  v. 22.  Cp.  Sk.  tripifo  bhikjuh  (AvS  1. 334  & 
Index  to  Divy) ;  -bhatika  having  3  Ijrothers  DhA 
1.88,  97.  -bhumaka  belonging  to  the  3  stages  of  being 
(viz.  the  kama.  rfipa,  arupa  existences ;  cp.  °dhatuka 
&  tiloka)  DhA  1.305;  iv.72  ;  DhsA  50,  214  (°kusala), 
291  ;  -masa  (nt.)  3  months,  i.  e.  a  season  M  1.438 ;  Miln 
15;  DhA  11.192  ;  PvA20;  -vacika  pronouncing  the  three- 
fold formula  (of  the  sarana-gata)  Vin  1.18 ;  -vijja  (adj.) 
possessed  of  the  3  fold  knowledge  (i.  e.  either  the  higher 
knowledge  of  the  Brahmins,  i.  e.  the  3  Vedas  [cp.  Sk.  trayi 
vidya=  the  knowledge  of  the  Vedas]  or  of  the  Buddha  & 
Arahants,  asdefinedat  A  i.i64sq.,  viz.  ( i )  remembrance 
of  former  births,  (2)  insight  into  the  (future)  destiny 
of  all  beings,  (3)  recognition  of  the  origin  of  misery  &  of 
the  way  to  its  removal,  i.  e.  of  the  Path) :  1.  brahmanic  : 
D  1.238  ;  A  1.163  :  also  as  tevijjaka  (n.)  D  1.88,  107,  1 19. 
—  2.  buddhistic  :  Vin  11. 161  ;  M  1.482  ;  S  1.194  '•  A  1.167 
=  It  100;  Sn  594  =  VvA  10;  Pug  14;  DhA  1.138;  Sdhp 
420.     -tevijjata  (abstr.)  Vism  5. 

Tekiccha  (adj.)  [der.  f  r.  tikiccha]  curable  ;  fig.  one  who  can 
be  helped  or  pardoned.  Only  in  cpds.  a'  incurable, 
unpardonable  VvA  322  (of  a  sick  person) ;  DhA  1.25 
(id.)  ;  Miln  322  ;  of  Devadatta  w.  ref .  to  his  rebirth  in 
Niraya  Vin  11.202  =  It  85;  M  1.393;  &  sa"  pardonable 
Miln  192,  22  1,  344. 

Teja  &  Tejo  [Vedic  tejas  (nt.)  from  ti]  to  be  sharp  or  to 
pierce  =  a  (piercing}  flame.  See  tejate ;  semantically 
(sharp>  light)  cp.  Ger.  strahl  (ray  of  light)  =  Ags.  strael 
(arrow).  —  The  nt.  tejo  is  the  usual  form  ;  instr.  tejasa 
(Dh  387  ;  Sn  1097)  &  tejena  (J  m.s's),  ep.  tapa  &  tapo] 
"sharpness,"  heat,  flame,  fire,  light;  radiance,  efful- 
gence, splendour,  glory,  energy,  strength,  power 
D  11.259  (personified  as  deva,  among  the  4  Elements 
pathavi.  apo,  t.,  vayo ;  cp.  tejo-dhatu)  ;  S  iv.215; 
M  1.327;  Sn  1097  (glory  of  the  sun  comp'' with  that 
of  the  Buddha)  ;  Dh  387  (sabbag  ahorattig  Buddho 
tapati  tejasa) ;  J  in. 53  (sila'')  ;  1.93  (pufifia"  the  power 
of  merit);  Vbh  426  (id.);  Ps  1.103;  Vism  350  (def.); 
VvJ^  116. 

-kasina  fire-contemplation  for  the  purpose  of  kammaf- 
th.ina  practice  (see  kasina)  D  in. 268  ;  Dhs  203 ;  Vism 
171  ;  DhA  n.49 ;  in. 214;  Bdhd  106;  -dhatu  the  element 
of  flame  (or  fire),  the  3rd  of  the  6  Elements,  viz.  pathavi 
apo  t.  vayo  akasa  vii\nana  (cp.  Dhs.  Irsl.  p.  242)  D  in. 27, 
228,  247  ;M  1. 188,  422  ;A  1.176;  11.1O5;  Dhs  588,  648, 
964  ;  Nett  74  ;  Vism  363. 

Tejate  [Vedie  tejate  from  tij  (♦stij)  =  Lat.  in-stigo  (to 
spur),  Gr.  otH^ci,  ffnrroc,  Ohg.  stehhan,  Nhg.  stecken, 
E.  stick]  to  be  sharp  or  to  make  sharp,  to  prick,  to 
incite,  etc.  —  See  tikkha,  tikhina,  tinha,  titikkhati, 
tittaka,  teja,  etc. 

Tejana  (nt.)  [see  tejate]  the  point  or  shaft  of  an  arrow, 
an  arrow  Th  i,  29;  Dh  80,  145  ;  DhA  n.147. 

Tejavant  (adj.)  [tcjas-t- vant]  i.  splendid,  powerful, 
majestic  DhA  1.426.  —  2.  in  flames,  heated,  burning 
with  (-°)  Miln  148. 

Tejin  (adj.-n.)  [sec  tejai  having  light  or  splendour, 
shining  forth,  glorious  Sn  1097  (=Nd=  286  tejena 
samannagata). 

Tettigsa  (num.)  [tayo-l- tigsa]  thirty -three  J  1.273;  DhA 
1.2O7  sq.     See  also  under  tayo  &  tavatigsa. 

Temaoa  (nt.)  [from  temeti]  wetting,  moistening  Vism 
338  ;  VvA  20  (aggimhi  tapanag  udake  va  temanag) ; 
DhA  111.420. 

Temeti  [cp.  Divy  285  timayati ;  Caus.  of  tim  to  moisten. 
There  is  an  ancient  confusion  between  the  roots  tim, 
tamas,  etc.  (to  be  dark),  tim,  temeti  (to  be  wet),  and 


Terasa 

stim  to  be  motionless.  Cp.  tintinayati,  tinta,  tibba 
(  =  tamas).  timira]  to  make  wet.  to  moisten  Vin  1.47 
(temetabba)  ;  11.209  (temctva)  ;  DhA  1.220,  394  (id.)  ; 
J  i.88«KhA  164;  J  11.325  (temento)  ;  PvA  4O  (sute- 
mitva  for  temctva). 

Terasa  see  under  tayo. 

Xerovassika  (adj.)  [tiro+  vassa+  ika]  lasting  over  or  beyond 
a  year  (or  season),   a  year  old,   dried  up  or  decayed 

5  IV. 161  (thero  vassiko  in  text)=i85  (of  wood)  M  1.58 
(of  bones). 

Tela  (nt.)  [from  tila]  sesamum-oil  (prepared  from  tila 
seeds),  oil  in  general  (tela  =  tilateladikaDA  1.93):  used  for 
drinking,  anointing  &  burning  purposes  Vin  1.205,  -2". 
245,  etc.;  A  i.2og,  278  (sappi  va  t.  va)  ;  ii.i22~(tat- 
tena  pi  telena  osincante ;  punishment  of  pouring  over 
with  boiling  oil);  J  1.293;  11.104;  Pv  iv.i*^  (tinena 
telar)  pi  na  tvai)  adasi- :  frequent  as  gift  to  mendicants)  ; 
P"g  55  :  l^hs  646.  740,  815  ;  PvA  80  (kalebaranar)  vasa 
telaa  ca  :  fat  or  oil  in  general).  —  tila  °r)  patukama  desire 
to  drink  tila-wine  VvA  54  ;  paka-tela  oil  concoction 
VvA68  =  DhA  in. 311  ;  J  u.397  (sata'^)  ;  111372  (sahassa" 
worth  a  thousand)  ;  v. 376  (sata°  worth  a  hundred)  ; 
padabbhaujana"  oil  for  rubbing  the  feet  VvA  44  ; 
sasapa"  (mustard  seed  &  oil)  PvA  198  ;  sappi"  (butter 

6  oil)  Sn  295  ;  PvA  278  (also  +  madhu)  as  var.  objects 
of  grocery  trade  (dhaiifia). 

-kotthigara  oil  store  DhA  1.220 ;  -ghafa  oil  jar 
DA  1.144  ;  -cati  an  oil  tank  DhA  1.220  ;  -dhiipita  spiced 
or  flavoured  with  oil  (of  a  cake)  Vv  43^ ;  -nali  a  reed 
used  for  keeping  oil  in,  an  oil  tube  Vism  99  ;  DhA  11. 193 
(+ udakaturaba) ;  -pajjota  an  oil  lamp  Vin  1.16  = 
D  1.85  =  A  i.56=Sn  p.  15  ;  -padipa  an  oil  lamp  Vin  1.15  ; 
S  III. 126;  v. 319;  VvA  198;  -paka  an  oil  decoction, 
mixed  with  spirits,  oil-wine  Vin  1.205  .'  -pilotika  (pi.) 
rags  soaked  in  oil  DhA  1.22 1  ;  -makkhana  anointing  (the 
body)  with  oil  Miln  11  ;  -miiijaka  an  oil-cake  Pv.\  51  ; 
-vanijja  oil  tr£tde  PvA  47  :  -homa  an  oblation  of  oli  D  i.g 


141 


Tvatar) 


Telaka  (nt.)=tela  Vin  1.204  ("  a  small  quantity  of  oil  "); 
.  II.  107  (sittha-t.  oil  of  beeswax). 

Teliys  (adj.)  oily  J  111.522. 

Tomara  (m.  nt.)  [Sk.  tomara  from  tnd,  see  tudati]  a  pike, 
spear,  lance,  esp.  the  lance  of  an  elephant-driver 
D  n.266  (tutta-t.  a  driving  lance) ;  M  111.133  (t.  battha) ; 
Vism  235  ;  DA  1.147. 

Toya  (nt.)  [Vedic  toya  from  *tau  to  melt  away  ;  Lat.  tabeo, 
tabes  (consumption);  Ags.  |'awan=E.  dew,  Oir.  tam  = 
tabes ;  also  Gr.  njnu,  etc.]  water  (poetical  for  udaka) ; 
only  in  simile:  pundarikar)  (or  padumag)  toyena  na 
upalippati  A  ii.39=Sn  547;  Sn  71  =  213;  Th  i,  700; 
Nd^  2S7  (t.  vuccati  udakai)) ;  —  Bdhd  67,  93. 

Torava  (nt.)  [Sk.  torana,  perhaps  related  to  Gr:  rilpmc, 
7tpMi'.  =  Lat.  turris  (tower),  cp.  Hor.  Od.  1.4'  "  re- 
gumque  turris  "  =  palaces]  an  arched  gateway .- -portal ; 
Vin  II. 154;  D  11.83:  Vv  35'  (  =  dvarakotthaka-pas5- 
dassa  namag  VvA  160) ;  J  in. 428  ;  Davs  v. 48. 

Tosana  (adj.-n.)  [see  tosetu]  satisfying,  pleasing;  satis- 
faction Sn  971. 

Tosapana  (adj.)  [:=  tosana,  in  formation  of  a  2nd  causative 
tosapeti]  pleasing,  giving  satisfaction  J  lt.249. 

Toseti  [Cans,  of  tussati]  to  please,  satisfy,  make  happy 
Sn  1 127  (  =  Nd^  288):  J  IV, 2 74;  Sdhp  304.  —  pp. 
tosita  contented,  Satisfied  Sn  1 128.     Cp.  pari". 

Tya  [Sk.  tya°,  nt.  tyad  ;  perhaps  to  Gr.  (Tinitpfv  to-day, 
ffijrff  in  this  year]  base  of  demonstr.  pron.  =  ta°,  this, 
that ;  loc.  sg.  tyamhi  J  vi.292  ;  loc.  pi.  fern,  tyasu 
J  v. 368  (Com.  tasu). 

Tvai)  see  tuvag. 

Tvataq  see  tuvatai). 


Th. 


Thakana  (nt.)  [see  next]  covering,  lid  ;  closing  up  DhA 
IV. 85  (sagvara+  ). 

Thaketi  [Sk.  sthagayati,  Caus.  to  stbagati,  from  *steg  to 
cover ;  cp.  Gr.  <TTfyo)  cover,  Teyij  roof ;  Lat.  tego, 
tegula  (E.=>tile),  toga;  Oir.  tech  house;  Ohg.  decchu 
cover,  dah  roof.  On  P.  form  cp.  Trenckner,  Notes. 
p.  62]  to  cover,  cover  up,  close  (usually  of  doors  Sc 
windows)  Vin  11-134  (kannaguthakehi  kanna  thakita 
honti :  the  ears  were  closed  up),  148  (kavata  na  thaki- 
yanti,  Pass),  209  (vatapana) ;  iv.54 ;  J  iv.4  (sabbe 
apihita  dvara  ;  api-dha  =  Gr.  JTri  Hi/°,  cp.  Horn.  Od.  9,  243  : 
I'lXiiSaTov  irirpijv  tTTt9i}Ke  Ovpyaiv  the  Cyclops  covered 
the  door  with  a  polished  rock)  v.214;  DhA  iv.iito 
(thakesi,  v.  1.  thapesi) ;  VvA  222;  PvA  216  (dvara) 
Davs  IV. 33  ;  v. 25  (chiddai)  malagulena  th.). 

Thanfla  (nt.)  [see  thana]  mother's  milk  Vin  11.255  =  289 
("r)  payeti) ;  A  iv.276 ;  J  in. 165  ;  VI.3  (madhura°)  Th  2, 
496. 

ThaO^ilA  (nt.)  [Vedic  sthandila  a  levelled  piece  of  ground 
prepared  for  a  sacrifice.  Cognate  with  sthala,  level 
ground]  bare,  esp.  hard,  stony  ground  Pv  iv.y^  (  =  khara- 
kathana  bhumippadesa  PvA  265). 

-sayika  (f.)  the  act  of  lying  on  the  bare  ground  (as 
a  penance)  [BSk.  sthandila-sayika]  S  iv.118;  Dh  141 
(=DhA  III. 77  :  bhumisayana) ;  -seyya  (f.)  a  bed  on 
bare  ground  D  I.i673s(v.  1.  BB.  tandila")  Miln  351  ; 
cp.  Sk.  stharwJila^ayyS- 

Thaddha  [pp.  of  thambeti,  Sk.  stabhnili  to  make  firm, 
prop,  hold  up ;  cp.  Av.  stawra  firm.  Gr.  dore/j^Tjt, 
araipvXii:  Goth,  stafs,  Ags.  staef  =  E.  staff;  Ohg.  stab. 
See  also  khambha  &  chambheti]  i.  lit.  hard,  rigid, 
firm  J  1.293  (OPP-  muduka)  ;  Vism  351  ("lakkhana)  ; 
PvA  139  (=ujjhangala).  —  2.  fig.  (a)  hardened,  obdur- 
ate, callous,  selfish  D  1.118  (m4na°) ;  111.45  (-l-atima- 
nin) ;  A  11.26=  It  113  (kuha  th.  lapa) ;  Sn  104  (see 
gotta") ;  J  1.88  (mana°)  11.136;  Sdhp  90.  —  (b)  slow 
Miln  103  (opp.  lahuka ;  cp.  BSk.  dhandha,  on  which 
Kem,  Toev.  11.90).  —  See  thambha  &  thuna. 

-maccharin  obdurate  &  selfish,  or  very  selfish  DhA 
III. 313;  VvA  69;  PvA  45;  -hadaya  hard-hearted 
J  111.68. 

Thana  [Vedic  stana ;  cp.  Gr.  iTrt|vioi'  =  (TT^eov  (Hesychius)] 
I.  the  breast  of  a  woman  D  11.266;  J  v.205  ;  vi.483  ; 
Sdhp  360.  —  2.  the  udder  of  a  cow  M  1.343  =  Pug  5^ '■ 
DhA  11.67. 

-mukha  the  nipple  ]  iv.37.  -sita-daraka  [see  sita] 
a  child  at  the  breast,  a  suckling  Miln  364=408. 

Thanaka,  a  little  breast,  the  breast  of  a  girl  Th  2,  265 
(=ThA  212). 

Thanita  (nt.)  [pp.  of  thaneti  cp.  Vedic  (s)taaayitnu 
thunder  =  Lat.  tonitrus,  Ohg.  donar,  etc.]  thundering, 
thunder  }  1.470  ;  Th  i,  1 108  ;  Miln  377. 

Thanin  (adj.)  having  breasts,  -breasted ;  in  timbaru° 
Sn  no;  J  vi.457. — pucimanda°  J  vi.269. 

Thaneti  [Vedic  stanayati  <St  stanati  to  thunder ;  cp.  Gr. 
arivui,  aTivdZo)  to  moan,  groan,  orocov  ;  Lat.  tono ;  Ags. 


stunian ;  Ger.  stohnen]  to  roar,  to  thunder  D  11.262  ; 

5  1. 100,  154  (megho  thanayag),  154  (thaneti  devo) ; 
It  65  (megho  thanayitva).  —  pp.  thanita.  See  also 
gajjati  &  thunati. 

Thapati  [Vedic  sthapati,  to  8tha-(- pati]  i.  a  builder, 
master  carpenter  M  i.396  =  S  iv.223 ;  M  111.144. — 
2.  officer,  overseer  S  v. 348. 

Thabbha  is  to  be  read  for  ''tthambha  in  para°  J  iv.313. 

Thambha  [see  etym.  under  thaddha ;  occasionally  spelt 
thamba,  viz.  A  i.i(;o;  M  1.324;  PvA  186.  187]  i.  a 
pillar,  a  post  Vin  1.276  ;  D  1.50  (majjhimar)  °i)  nissaya) ; 
11.85  (id.);  Sn  214;  Vv  78^  (ve|uriya°,  of  the  pillars 
of  a  Vimana) ;  Pv  in. 3'  (id.);  DhA  iv.203  ;  VvA  188 
(-1- tula-gopanasi)  ;  PvA  186.  —  2.  (fig.)  in  all  meanings 
of  thaddha,  applied  to  selfishness,  obduracy,  hypocrisy 

6  deceit ;  viz.  immobility,  hardness,  stupor,  obstinacy 
(cp.  Ger.  "  verstockt ") :  thambho  ti  thaddha-bhavo 
SnA  288,  333  ;  th.  thambhana  thambhittag  kakkhaliyar) 
pharuliyari  ujucittata  (an°  ?)  amuduta  Vbh  350.  —  Often 
comb''  w.  mana  ( =arrogance),  freq.  in  set  satheyyai) 
th.  sarambho  mano,  etc.  A  i.nK).  299  =  Nd^  under 
raga  =  Miln  289;  cp.  M  1.15.  —  A  in. 430  (-(-mana); 
IV.350,  4O5  (H-satheyya);  Sn  245  (-(-mada),  326.  437 
(as  one  of  MSra's  combatants  :  makkho  th.  te  atthamo) ; 
J  1.202.  —  3.  a  clump  of  grass  M  1.324  ;  cp.  thambhaka. 

Thambhaka  (  =  thambha  3)  a  clump  of  grass -VvA  276 
( =  gumba). 

Thambhati  &  thambheti,  see  upa°,  pati". 

Thambhana  (f.)  [abstr.  to  thambha]  firmness,  rigidity, 
immobility  Dhs  636  =  718  ;  Vbh  350. 

Thambhitatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  to  thambha]  =thambha  2,  viz. 
hardness,  rigidity,  obduracy,  obstinacy  Vbh  350. 
Note.  Quite  a  late  development  of  the  term,  caused  by 
a  misinterpretation  of  chambhitatta,  is  "  fluctuation, 
unsteadiness,  inflarion  "  at  Dhs  965  (in  def.  of  vayo- 
dhatu  :  chambhittattai)  [?]  thambhitattar).  See  on  this 
Dhs.  trsl.  p.  242),  &  at  Vbh  168  (in  def.  of  vicikiccha ; 
v.l.  chambhitatta),  and  at  Asl.  338  (of  vayo).  None  of 
these  meanings  originally  belong  to  the  term  thambha. 

Thambhin  (adj.)  obsrinate  Th  i.  952. 

Tharaoa  (nt.)  [Sk.  starana  to  str]  strewing,  spreading. 
In  cpds.  like  assa°,  bhumma",  ratha°,  hattha",  etc.  the 
reading  ass-attharana,  etc.  should  be  preferred  (  =  5 
str).     See  attharana  and  cpds. 

Tharati  [Sk.  stnioti]  only  in  cpds.  a°,  ava°,  etc. 

Tharn  [Sk.  tsaru]  the  hilt  or  handle  of  a  sword  or  other 
weapons,  a  sword  A  in. 152  ;  J  in. 221  (  =  sword);  Miln 
178;  DhA  11.249  (°raula) ;  iv.66  (asi°).  —  thanismii) 
sikkhati  to  learn  the  use  of  a  sword  Vin  11. 10  ;  Miln  66. 
-ggaha  one  who  carries  a  sword-(handle)  Miln  331 
(dhanuggaha-t-  ;  not  in  corresponding  Jist  of  occupa- 
tions at  D  151);  -sippa  training  in  swordsmanship 
Ud  31. 


142 


Thala 


143 


Thina 


Thala'  (nt.)  [Vedic  sthala,  to  stha,  orig.  standing  place ; 
cp.  Gr.  ariWui,  ffroXoc ;  Ags.  steall  (place) ;  also  P. 
than^ila]  dry  ground,  viz.  high,  raised  (opp.  low)  or 
solid,  firm  (opp.  water)  S  iv.iyg.  As  plateau  opp.  to 
ninna  (low  lying  place)  at  Sn  30  (SnA  42=ukkula): 
Dh  98  ;  It  66  =S  i.ioo  (megho  thalai)  ninnafi  ca  pureti) ; 
PvA  29  (=unnatapadesa).  As  dry  land,  terra  firma 
opp.  to  jaia  at  Dh  34  ;  J  1.107,  222  ;  Pv  iv.i^'  ;  PvA  260. 
As  firm,  even  ground  or  safe  place  at  D  1.234  ;  Sn  946.  — 
Cp.  J  111.53  ;  IV. 142  ;  Vism  185. 

-gocara  living  on  land  J  n.159  ;  -ja  sprung  from  land 
(opp.  varija  Dh  34  or  udakaruha  Vv  35'  =water-plant) ; 
referring  to  plants  A  1.35  ;  J  1.5 1  ;  Vv  35°  (  =  yodhika- 
dika  VvA  162) ;  Miln  281  ;  -{tha  standing  on  firm  ground 
A  II. 241  ;  -patha  a  road  by  land  (opp.  jala°  by  water) 
J  1.I2I  ;  III. 188. 

Thala'  (nt.)  [prob.  dialect,  variant  of  tharu]  the  haft  of 
a  sword,  the  scabbard  J  111.221  (reading  uncertain). 

Thava  [see  thavati]  praise,  praising,  eulogy  Nett  161,  188, 
192. 

Thavati  [Sk.  stauti,  Av.  staviti,  cp.  Gr.  crevrat]  to  praise, 
extol;  inf.  thutur)  Sn  217  (=thometui)  SnA  272).— 
Caus.  thaveti  [Sk.  stavayati]  pp.  thavita  Miln  361. 
See  thuta,  thuti,  thoma,  thometi. 

Thavika  (f.)  [derivation  uncertain]  a  knapsack,  bag, 
purse ;  esp.  used  for  the  carrying  of  the  bhikkhu's 
strainer  Vin  1.209  (parissavanani  pi  thavikayo  pi 
puretvS).  224  (patteH- pariss°+ th.) ;  J  1.55  (pattag 
thavikaya  pakkhipitva) ;  vi.67  (pattai)  thavikaya 
osarctva) ;  VvA  40  (patta-thavikato  parissavanag 
niharitva).  Also  for  carrying  money :  sahassathavika 
a  purse  of  1,000  pieces  J  1.34,  195,  506 ;  VvA  33  ;  Anvs 
35.     See  also  Vin  11. 152,  217  ;  Vism.  91. 

Thama  (&  thamo  nt.  in  instr.  thamasa  M  1.498  ;  S  11.278  = 
Th  I,  1 165;  HI. 1 10,  see  below)  [Vedic  sthaman  & 
sthamas  nt.,  stha  cp.  Gr.  (rnj/jwv,  Lat.  stamen  (standing 
structure) ;  Goth,  stoma  foundation]  "  standing  power," 
power  of  resistance,  steadfastness,  strength,  firmness, 
vigour,  instr.  thamena  (Miln  4  ;  PvA  i93) ;  thamasa  (see 
above);  thamuna  (J  vi.22).  Often  comb''  with  bala 
J  1.63  ;  Sn  68 ;  with  bala+  Java  PvA  4 ;  with  bala+ 
viriya  Nd'  289,  651  ;  with  Java  J  1.62  ;  VvA  104  ;  with 
▼iriya  J  1.67.  —  D  iii.i  13  ;  S  1.78  ;  11.28  ;  v. 227  ;  A  1.50  ; 
11.187  sq. ;  IV. 192.  J  1.8,  265  (°sampanna) ;  11. 158 
(id.);  Dhs  13,  22;  Vism  233  (°mahatta) ;  DhA  iv.18; 
PvA  259.  —  Instr.  used  as  adv. :  thamena  hard,  very 
much  PvA  193 ;  thamasa  obstinately,  perseveringly 
M  1.257. 

-gatadit^ika  (adj.)  one  in  whom  heresy  has  become 
strong  J  1.83=  VI. 220. 

Th&maka  (adj.)  having  strength  Sn  1144  (dubbala°  with 
failing  strength);  Nd'  12  (appa°+ dubbala). 

Thamavant  (adj.)  [thama+  vant]  strong,  steadfast,  power- 
ful, persevering  S  v. 197,  225  ;  A  11.250  ;  iv.i  10,  234,  291  ; 
v. 24;  Nd'  131  ;  Vv  5'  (  =  thira  balava  VvA  35). 

Th&ra  see  vi°,  san°. 

Thala  (nt.)  [from  thala  orig.  a  flat  dish]  a  plate,  dish, 
vessel  D  1.74  ;  J  1.69  ;  Miln  282.  Kagsa°  a  gong  Miln  62  ; 
Vism  283  (in  simile).     See  also  thali. 

Th&laka  (nt.)  [thala+ka]  a  smaU  bowl,  beaker  Pv  11. i' 
(thalakassa  paniyai)),  i"  (id.);  Nett  79  (for  holding 
oil :  dipakapallika  Com.). 

Th&Iika  (f.)   =thalakaVin  1.203,  240.     See  alhaka". 

ThaU  (f.)  (thali°  in  cpds.)  [Sk.  sthali,  cp.  thala]  an  earthen 
pot,  kettle,  large  dish ;  in  -dhoyana  washing  of  the  dish 
A  1. 161  (+  sarava-dhovana) ;  -paka  an  offering  of  barley 


or  rice  cooked  in  milk  Vin  in. 15:  D  1.97  (  =  DA  1.267); 

5  11.242  ;  V.384  ;  A  1. 166  ;  J  1.186  ;  Miln  249. 

Thavara*  (adj.)  [Vedic  stha  vara,  from  stha,  cp.  sthavira, 
Gr.  ffTawpiif  post,  Lat.  re-stauro.  Goth,  stana  judgment 

6  stojan  to  judge]  "  standing  still,"  immovable  (opp. 
to  tasa)  firm,  strong  (Ep.  of  an  Arahant :  KhA  245) 
DhA  IV.  1 76.  Always  in  connection  with  tasa,  con- 
trasting or  comprising  the  movable  creation  (animal 
world)  &  the  immovable  (vegetable  world),  e.  g.  Sn  394 
("  sabbesu  bhutesu  nidhaya  dan<Jar)  ye  thavarS  ye  ca 
tasanti  loke  ") ;  It  S2  (tasag  va  thavarag  va).  See  tasa 
for  ref. 

Thivara'  (nt.)  [from  thavira  =  thera,  old]  old  age  PvA  149 
(thavari-jinna  in  expl.  of  theri,  othenwise  jara-jinija. 
Should  we  read  thavira-jiijna  ?). 

Thavariya  (nt.)  [fr.  thavara]  immobility,  firmness,  security, 
solidity,  an  undisturbed  state ;  always  in  janapada°  an 
appeased  country,  as  one  of  the  blessings  of  the  reign 
of  a  Cakkavattin.  Expl"  at  DA  1.250  as  "  janapadesu 
dhuvabhavag  thavarabhavag  va  patto  na  sakka  kenaci 
caletug."  D  1.88;  11.16,  146,  169 ;  S  i.ioo  ;  Sn  p.  106; 
It  15. 

Thayareyjra  (nt.)  [from  thavara']  the  rank  of  a  Thera. 
A  1.38  ;  11.23.  This  has  nothing  to  do  with  seniority. 
It  is  quite  clear  from  the  context  that  Thera  is  to  be 
taken  here  in  the  secondary  sense  explained  under 
Thera.  He  was  a  bhikkhu  so  eminently  useful  to  the 
community  that  his  fellow  bhikkhus  called  him  Thera. 

Thasotn"  in  thasotujana-savana  at  ThA  61  according  to 
Morris,  J.P.T.S.  1884,  81  it  is  to  be  read  thanaso  tu 
jana°. 

Thika  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  styayate  to  congeal,  form  a  (sohd) 
mass  ;  see  cognates  under  thina  &  cp.  theva]  dropping, 
forming  drops:  madhutthika  J  in. 493  ;  vi.529  (=ma- 
dhug  paggharantiyo  madhutthevasadisa  p.  530) 
"  dropping  honey." 

Thiwa  pp.  of  tharati,  only  in  cpds.  parivi",  vi°. 

Thira  (adj.)  [Vedic  sthira,  hard,  solid;  from  sthi  or  Idg. 
ster  (der.  of  sta)  to  stand  out  =  to  be  stiff ;  cp.  Gr. 
orepfoj;;  Lat-  sterilis  (sterile  =  hardened,  cp.  Sk.  stari) ; 
Ohg.  storren,  Nhg.  Starr  &  starren,  E.  stare ;  also  Lat. 
strenuus]  solid,  hard,  firm  ;  strenuous,  powerful  J  1.220  ; 
IV.106  (=da|ha) ;  Miln  194  (tliir-athira-bhava  strength 
or  weakness);  VvA  212  (id.),  35  (=thamavant) ;  Sdhp 
32'- 

Thirata  (f.)  [fr.  thira]  steadfastness,  stability  DhA  iv.176 
(thirataya  thavara  ;  so  read  for  thira°). 

ThI  (f.)  [Vedic  stri,  on  which  see  Walde,  Lat.  Wtb.  under 
sero.  This  form  thi  is  the  normal  correspondent  to 
Vedic  stri ;  the  other,  more  usual  (&  dial.)  form  is  itthi] 
a  woman  J  1.295,  3°°  ;  v. 296  (thi-pura),  397  ;  vi.238. 

Thina  (nt.)  [Sk.  styana;  orig.  pp.  of  styayate  to  become 
hard,  to  congeal ;  steia  (cp.  also  thira)  =  Gr.  <rr«jc 
grease,  talc  ;  Lat.  stipo  to  compress ;  also  Sk.  stimita 
(motionless)  =  P.  timi ;  stima  (slow),  Mhg.  stim  ;  Goth, 
etc.  stains  =  E.  stone;  Gr.  nr'i^oQ  (heap);  Lat.  stipes 
(pale)  ;  Ohg.  stif  =  E.  stiff]  stiffness,  obduracy,  stolidity, 
indifference  (cp.  thaddha  &  tandi,  closely  related  in 
meaning).  Together  with  middha  it  is  one  of  the  5 
hindrances  (nivaraijani)  to  Arahantship  (see  below). 
Def.  as  cittassa  akammai^nata,  unwieldiness  or  implia- 
bility  of  mind  (  =  immobility)  at  Nd'  290=  Dhs  1156, 
i236=Nett  86;  as  citta-gelaflflag  morbid  state  of  mind 
("psychosis")  at  DA  i.2ii.  —  Sn  942  (niddag  tandig 
sahe  thinag  pamadena  na  sagvase),  1 106 ;  Vbh  352 
(=Nd'  290  as  expl"  of  linatta) ;  Vism  262  ("sineha, 
where  p.  361  reads  patthinna"). 


Thiyati 


144 


Thera 


-middha  sloth  &  drowsiness,  stolidity  A-  torpor ;  two 
of  the  5  nivaranani  {Dhs.  trsl.  pp.  I  J".  310)  Vin  n.2011 
(vigata°);  D  1.71,  246;  in. 49.  234,  269,  278:  S  i-gq  : 
III. 106;  V.277  sq.  :  A  111.69  sq.  :  421  ;  Sn  437  (pailcaini 
sena  Marassa) :  It  27,  120;  Ps.  1.31,  45,  162;  11. 12,  169, 
179,  228;  Pug  68;  Dhs  1154,  i486:  Vism  469;  Sdhp 
459- 

Thiyati  see  patitthiyati. 

Thiyana  (f.)  &  thiyitatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  formations  from 
thina]  =thina,  in  exegesis  at  Nd^  290Si(see  thina)  ; 
Vbh  352. 

Thuta  [cp.  pp.  of  thavati]  praised  DhsA  198;  J  iv.ioi 
(sada°  =  sada  thuto  niccapasattho)  ;  Miln  278  (vannita 
th.  pasattha). 

Thuti  (f.)  [cp.  thavati]  praise  J  iv.443  (thutir)  karoti) ; 
VvA  158. 

Thunati  [see  thaneti]  i.  to  moan,  groan,  roar  S  v.  148 
(thunar)  ppr.  ;  v.  1.  thanag) ;  Vv  52'  (of  beings  in  Niraya, 
otherwise  ghosenti),  v.l.SS  thananti  (better  ?).  — 
2.  to  proclaim;  shout,  praise  (confused  with  thavati) 
Sn  884. 

Thulla  see  thula. 

Thusa  (nt.)  [Vedic  tusa  (m.)]  husk  of  grain,  chaiif  A  1.242 
(together  w.  other  qualities  of  corn) ;  J  i  v.8  ;  Vism  346. — • 
athusa  D  111.199. 

-aggi  a  fire  of  husks  Nett  23  ;  -odaka  gruel  ( =sabba- 
sambharehi  katag  sovirakag  Pug  A  232)  D  1.166  = 
A  1.295  =  Pug  55  i  -pacchi  a  bird  stuffed  with  chaff,  a 
straw-bird  J  1.242  ;  -pinda  a  lump  of  husks  Vin  11.151  ; 
-rasi  a  heap  of  h.  DhA  1.309 ;  -homa  an  oblation  of  h. 
D  1.9  (=DA  1.93  ;  v.  1.  BB  kana,  for  kaija ;  cp.  kana- 
homa  D  1.9). 

Thujja  (f.)  [Vedic  sthijna  from  stha,  standing  fast,  as 
in  thambha,  thina,  etc.  Nearest  relation  is  thavara 
(  =  thura,  on  r:  ri=l  (thijla)  :  n  see  tuni).  Cp.  Gr. 
aravpof:  (post) ;  Lat.  re.stauro  (to  prop  up  again) ; 
Gr.  (jTvXoe  pillar,  "  style  "  ;  Goth,  stojan  etc.  (see  tha- 
vara) ;  Ags.  styran  =  E.  steer,  Ger.  steuer]  a  pillar,  prop, 
support  A  11.198;  Vv  54'  (=thambha  VvA  245);  DA 
1. 1 24.  Esp.  the  sacrificial  post  in  phrase  thunupanita 
"  lead  to  sacrifice  "  (yupa-sankhatui)  thunarj  upa" 
DA  1.294):  D  i.i27S;S  i.76~'DhA  11. 7 ;  J  111.45. 
-kumbh&thuna  a  sort  of  drum  D  1.6  etc.  (see  kumbha, 
where  also  kumbha  -thunika  Vin  iv.285).  —  eka-thiinaka 
with  one  support  J  iv.79. 

Thuflira  [der.  fr.  thuna]  house-top,  gable  Th  i,  184  (  -  kan- 
nika  Com.). 

Tbupa  [Vedic  stupa,  crown  of  the  head,  top,  gable  ;  cp. 
Gr.  (TruTToc  (handle,  stalk).  Oicel.  stufr  (stump),  to 
*steud  as  in  tudati]  a  stupa  or  tope,  a  bell-shaped  pile  of 
earth,  a  mound,  tumulus,  cairn  ;  dome,  esp.  a  monument 
erected  over  the  ashes  of  an  Arahant  (otherwise  called 
dhatugabbha  =  dagaba),  or  on  spots  consecrated  as 
scenes  of  his  acts.  In  general  as  tomb :  Vin  iv.308  ; 
J  111.156  (mattika")  =  Pv  1.8*;  in  special  as  tope:  D 
11.142,  161,  164  sq.  ;  A  1.77  ;  M  11.244  ;  J  v. 39  (rajata°) ; 
VvA  156  (Kassapassa  bhagavato  dvadasayojanikarj 
kanaka");  Ud  8  ;  Pv  lu.io^.  Four  people  are  thupd- 
raha,  worthy  of  a  tope,  viz.  a  Tathagata,  a  Tathagata- 
savaka,  a  Paccekabuddha,  a  Cakkavattin  D  11.143  = 
A  11.2^5.  —  At  Dpvs  vi.65  th.  is  to  be  corrected  into 
dhiipaT). 

Thupika  (adj.)  [from  thupa.  The  ika  applies  to  the 
whole  compound]  having  domed  roofs  ("  house-tops  ") 
J  VI. 1 16  (of  a  Vimana  =  dvadasayo]anika  manimaya- 
kaiicanathupika ;  cp.  p.  117:  paiicathupai)  vimanag, 
expl""  as  pancahi  kutagSrehi  samannagatag). 


Tbupikata  (adj.)  rthupa-l-kata]  "made  a  heap."  heaped 

of  an  alms-bowl  :  so  full  that  its  contents  bulge  out  over 
the  top  Vin  iv.191. 

Thula  (a)  &  Tbulla  (b)  (the  latter  usual  in  cpds.)  (adj.) 
t  Vedic  sthula  (or  sthura)  ;  cp.  Lith.  storas  (thick)  ; 
Lat.  taurus,  Goth,  stiur,  Ags.  steor  (bull  -strung,  bulky)  ; 
Ohg.  sturi  (strong).  From  stha:  see  thina,  cp.  thuna. 
To  ul ;  uU  cp.  cuja :  cuUa]  compact,  massive  ;  coarse, 
gross ;  big,  strong,  clumsy ;  common,  low,  unrefined, 
rough  D  1.223  :  Sn  146  (anuka"),  633  (id.)  ;  Dh  31,  265, 
409;  J  1.196  (b) ;  Dhs  617;  KhA  246;  PvA  73,  74  (of 
a  cloak);  VvA  103;  Sdhp  10 1,  346. — thuUani  gajjati 
to  speak  rough  words  J  1.226  (  =  pharusavacaiiani 
vadati). 

-anga  (adj.)  hcavy-limbed  ]  1.420;  -accaya  a  grave 
offence  Vin  1.133,  '^7-  ^'^''^  ".no,  170  etc.;  \"ism  22. 
-kaccha  thick  scurf  Vin  1.202  ;  -kumari  (Vin.  v.  129)  & 
kumarika  a  stout,  fat  girl  J  ill. 147;  iv.220  (Com.  paii- 
cakamagunika-ragena  thulataya  thullak"  ti  vuccati) ; 
Vism  17.  -phusitaka  (deva)  (the  rain-god.  probably 
with  reference  to  the  big  drops  of  the  rain  cp.  DA  1.45) 
M  I  453  ;  S  111.141  ;  V.396  ;  A  1.243  ;  II. 140  (a) ;  v.i  14  sq. ; 
DhA  III. 243  ;  -vajja  a  grave  sin  Vin  n.87  (a) ;  -vattha 
a  coarse  garment  J  v. 383  ;  -sarira  (adj.)  fat,  corpulent 
J  1.420;  IV. 220  (opp.  kisa  thin);  -sataka  coarse  cloth 
DhA  1.393  (a). 

Thulata  (f)  [abstr.  to  thula]  coarseness,  roughness,  vile- 

ness  J  IV. 220. 

Theta  (adj.)  [Sk.  from  titthita,  Miiller  P.  Gr.  7=sthatr] 
firm,  reliable,  trustworthy,  true  D  1.4  (DA  1.73  :  theto 
ti  thiro ;  thita-katho  ti  attho) ;  M  1.179;  S  iv.384 ; 
A  11.209  =  Pug  57:  Nd^  623.  —  abl.  thetato  in  truth 
S  HI. 112. — attheta  J  iv.57  (=athira). 

Thena  [Vedic  stena  &  stayu,  besides  which  tayu,  the  latter 
prob.  original,  cp.  Gr.  ruraw  to  deprive ;  Oir.  taid 
thief,  to  a  root  meaning  "  conceal  "]  a  thief  adj.  steal- 
ing :  athenena  not  stealing,  not  stealthily,  openly 
D  1.4;  DA  1.72.  f.  atheni  A  in. 38.  Cp.  kumbha- 
tthena  Vin  11.256  (see  k.). 

Thenaka  [  =  prec.]  a  thief  J  vi.115. 

Tbeneti  [Denom.  fr.  thena]  to  steal,  to  conceal  J  iv.114; 

DhA  1.80. 

Theyya  (nt.)  [Vedic  steya]  theft  Vin  1.96  ;  A  1.129  ;  Sn  i  ig 
(theyya  adinnar)  adiyati) ;  242,  967  ("i)  na  kareyya)  ; 
Vv  15'  (:  theyyar)  vuccati  thenabhavo  VvA  72);  Miln 
264,  265  ;  Vism  43  ("paribhoga) ;  DA  1.71  ;  Sdhp  55.  61. 
-citta  intending  to  steal  Vin  111.58  ;  -sagvasaka  one 
who  lives  clandestinely  wath  the  bhikkhus  /'always  foil, 
by  titthiyapakkantaka)  Vin  1.86,  135,  168,  320  ;  v. 222  ; 
Miln  310  ;  -sankhatag  (adv.)  by  means  of  theft,  stealthily 
D  111.65  sq.,  133  ;  A  III. 209  ;  iv.370  sq.  ;  v. 264. 

Thera  [Vedic  sthavira.  Derivation  uncertain.  It  may 
come  from  stha  in  sense  of  standing  over,  lasting  (one 
year  or  more),  cp.  thavara  old  age,  then  "  old  =  vener 
able  "  ;  (in  meaning  to  be  compared  w.  Lat.  senior,  etc. 
from  num.  sem  "  one  "=one  year  old,  i.  e.  lasting  over 
one  and  many  more  years).  Cp.  also  vetus  =  Gr.  iro[, 
year,  E.  wether,  one  year  old  ram,  as  cpd.  w.  veteran, 
old  man.  Or  it  may  come  from  stha  in  der.  *stheua  in 
sthura  (sthula:  see  etym.  under  thula)  thus,  "  strong  = 
venerable  "]  t.t.  only  used  with  ref,  to  the  bhikkhus 
oi  Gotama  Buddha's  community.  —  (a)  (adj.)  senior, 
Vin  1.47,  290  (th.  bhikkhu  opp.  nava  bh.).  159  (th. 
bhikkhu  a  senior  bh.  opp.  to  navaka  bh.  a  novice),  187  ; 
11.16,  212.  Theranutherd  bhikkhu  seniors  cS:  those  next 
to  them  in  age  dating  not  from  birth,  but  from  admis- 
sion to  the  Order).  Three  grades  are  distinguished, 
thera  bh.,  majjhima  bh.,  nava  bh.,  at  D  1.78.  —  See  also 
A  11.23,   '47.   1^8;  V.201,  348;  D  III. 123  sq.,  218;  Dh 


Theraka 


145 


Thometi 


260,  261.  In  Sangha-thera.  used  of  Bhikkhus  not 
senior  in  the  Order,  the  word  thera  means  distinguished. 
Vin  11.212,  303.  In  Mahathera  the  meaning,  as  applied 
to  the  80  bhikkhus  so  called,  must  also  have  some 
similar  meaning  Dipv  iv.5  Psalms  of  the  Urelhren  xxxvi.  ; 
J  V.4J6.  At  A  n.22  it  is  said  that  a  bhikkhu,  however 
junior,  may  be  called  thera  on  account  o(  his  wisdom. 
It  is  added  that  four  characteristics  make  a  man  a  thera 
— high  character,  knowing  the  essential  doctrines  by 
heart,  practising  the  four  JhanEis,  and  being  conscious 
of  having  attained  freedom  through  the  destruction  of 
the  mental  intoxications.  It  is  already  clear  that  at  a 
very  early  date,  before  the  Anguttara  reached  its  extant 
shape,  a  secondary  meaning  of  thera  was  tending  to 
supplant  that  of  senior — that  is.  not  the  senior  of  the 
whole  Order,  but  the  senior  of  such  a  part  of  the  Sangha 
as  live  in  the  same  locality,  or  are  carrying  out  the  same 
function.  —  Sole,  thera  m  thero  vassiko  at  S  iv.161  is 
to  be  read  tcro-vassiko. 

-gatha  hymns  of  senior  bhikkhus,  X.  of  a  canonical 
book,  incorporated  in  the  Khuddaka-Nikaya.  Thera- 
tara.  very  senior,  opp''  to  navatnra,  novice  D  11.154 
-vada  the  doctrine  of  the  Theras,  the  original  Buddhist 
doctrine  M  1.164  '•  Dpvs  iv.6,  13. 

Theraka  (adj.)  strong  (.'),  of  clothes:  therakani  vatthani 
D  11.354  (vv.  11.  thevakani,  dhorakani,  corakani). 

Theri  ft  Therika  (f.)  [see  thera]  1.  an  old  woman  (cp. 
sthavirika  M  Vastu  111.283)  Pv  11. ri'  (^thavarijinna 
PvA  149).  —  2.  a  female  thera  (see  cpds.),  as  therika 
at  Th  2,  4  ;  Dpvs  xviii.  1 1 . 


-gatha  hymns  of  the  tberis,  following  on  the  Thera- 
gatha  (q.  v.). 

Theva  (m.  ?)  [see  etym.  under  thina.  with  which  cp.  in 
meaning  from  same  root  Gr  rrT-oi,-!?/  &  Lat.  stiria,  both  — 
drop.  Cp.  also  thika.  Not  with  Trenckner  (Notes  p.  70) 
fr.  stipl  a  drop  ;  stagnant  water  In  Vin.  only  in  phrase  : 
civaraij  .  .  .  na  acchiDne  theve  pakkamitabbar)  Vin 
'•.io,  53  =  11.227,  230;  J  VI. 530  (madhu-ttheva  a  drop 
of  honey). 

Thevati  [fr.  theva ;  orig.  "  to  be  congealed  or  thick  "]  to 
shine,  glitter,  shimmer  (like  a  drop)  J  vi.529  (=virocati 
P   ,5jo). 

Thoka  (adj.)  [for  etymology  see  under  thina]  little,  small, 
short,  insignihcant ;  nt  a  trifle.  A  iv.io;  J  vi.366 ; 
PvA  12  (kala) :  nt.  thokat]  as  adv.  =a  little  J  1.220; 
II. 103,  159;  V.198;  PvA  13.  38.  43. — thokar]  thokai]  a 
little  each  time,  graduallv,  little  by  little  Dh  121,  239  ; 
Miln  9  ;  SnA  18  ;  PvA  168. 

Thokaka  (adj.)=thoka;  fem.  thokika  Dh  310. 

Thoma  [Vedic  stoma  a  hymn  of  praise]  praise. 

Thomana  (nt.)  &  thomana  (f.)  [see  thavati]  praising, 
praise,  laudation  J  1.220  (=pasar)sa) ;  Pug  53  ;  PvA  27. 

Thometi  [denom.  fr.  thoma ;  cp.  thavati]  to  praise,  extol, 
celebrate  (often  with  vanneti)  D  1.240  ;  Sn  679,  1046 ; 
Nd^  291;  J  VI. 337;  SnA  272  (=thutui));  VvA  102; 
PvA  196.  —  pp.  thomita  J  1.9. 


D. 


-D-  euphonic  consonant  inserted  to  avoid  hiatus  :  (a)  orig. 
only  sandhi-cons.  in  forms  ending  in  t  &  d  (like  tavat, 
kocid,  etc.)  &  thus  restored  in  cpds.  where  the  simplex 
has  lost  it ;  (b)  then  also  transferred  to  &  replacing  other 
sandhi-cons.  (like  puna-d-eva  for  punar  cva).  — 
(a)  dvipa-d-uttama  Sn  995  ;  koci-d-eva  PvA  153  ;  kinci- 
d-eva  ibid.  70  ;  tava-d-eva  ib.  74  ;  yava-d-atthai]  ib. 
217;  ahu-d-eva  Miln  2?  etc.  —  (b)  puna-d-eva  Pv  11. ii' 
(v.  1.  BB) ;  DhA  11.76  ;  samma-d-eva  Sn  p.  16  ;  VvA  148  ; 
PvA  66  etc. ;  cp.  SnA  284.     bahu-d-eva  J  1.170. 

-Da  (adj.)  [Suffix  of  da,  see  dadati]  giving,  bestowing,  pre- 
senting, only  -°,  as  anna°,  bala°,  vanna°,  sukha°,  Sn 
297;  vara"  Sn  234;  kama°  J  vi.498 ;  Pv  11.13^;  ambu° 
giving  water,  i.  e.  a  cloud  Davs  v. 32  ;  amatamagga° 
Sdhp  I  ;  ujaraphala"  ib.  26 ;  mar)sa°  Pgdp  49,  etc. 

DaQSaka :  see  vi°. 

Dagseti  (for  dasseti) :  see  upa° ;  pavi°,  vi°. 

Daka  (nt.)  [=udaka,  aphaeretic  from  comb"^  like  sito- 
daka  which  was  taken  for  sito-l-daka  instead  of  sit' 
odaka]  Vin  111.112  ;  S  in. 85  ;  A  11.33  =Nd*  420  B'  ( :  the 
latter  has  udaka,  but  Nd'  14  daka). 

-asaya  (adj.)  (beings)  living  in  water  A  11.33s?;  -ja 
(adj.)  sprung  from  water,  aquatic  J  1.18  (thalaja  d 
puppha) ;  -rakkhasa  a  water-sprite  J  1.127,  170; 
VI.  469. 

Dakkha^  (adj.)  [Vedic  dak§a=Gr.  dpi-SeUeTor  &  Se^tui; ; 
dak^ati  to  be  able ;  to  please,  satisfy,  cp.  dasasyati  to 
honour,  Denom.  fr.  *dasa=Lat.  decus  honour,  skill. 
All  to  •dek  in  Lat.  decet  to  be  fit,  proper,  etc.  On  var. 
theories  of  connections  of  root  see  Walde,  Lat.  Wtb. 
under  decet.  It  may  be  that  *deks  is  an  intens.  forma- 
tion fr.  •diS  to  point  (see  disati),  then  the  original  mean- 
ing would  be  "  pointing,"  i.  e.  the  hand  use'^  for  point- 
ing. For  further  etym.  see  dakkhina]  dexterous, 
skilled,  handy,  able,  clever  D  1.45,  74,  78;  iii.igo' 
(-t-analasa)  M  1.119;  111.2  ;  S  1.65;  Nd^  141  (-(- analasa 
&  sampajana);  J  HI. 247 ;  DA  1.217  (  =  cheka);  Miln 
344  (rupadakkha  those  who  are  of  "  fit  "  appearance). 

Dakkha^  (nt.)  [dakkha' -1- ya,  see  dakkheyya]  decierity, 
ability,  skill  J  111.466. 

Dakkhati  A  Dakkhiti  see  dassati. 

Dakkhina  (adj.)  [Vedic  dak^ina,  Av.  dasino ;  adj.  forma- 
tion fr.  adv.  'deksi  =  *deksinos,  cp.  purana  fr.  pura, 
visupa  fr.  visu,  Lat.  bini  (=bisni)  fr.  bis.  From  same 
root  'deks  are  Lat.  dexter  (with  compar. -antithetic 
suffix  ter^Sk.  tara,  as  in  uttara)  &  Gr.  SeKirepdc ; 
cp.  cilso  Goth,  taihswa  (right  hand),  Ohg.  zeso  &  zesawa. 
See  dakkha  for  further  connections]  i.  right  (opp. 
vama  left),  with  a  tjnge  of  the  auspicious,  lucky  & 
prominent:  Vin  11.195  (hattha) ;  PvA  112,  132  (id.)  ; 
Ps  1. 125. hattha,  pada,  etc.  with  ref.  to  a  Tathagata's 
body) ;  J  1.50  ("passa  the  right  side) ;  PvA  178  (id.),  112 
(°bahu);  Sn  p.  106  (baha)  ;  PvA  179  ("janumandalena 
with  the  right  knee:  in  veneration).  —  2.  skilled,  well- 
trained  (=dakkha)  J  vi.512  (Com.  susikkhita).  —  3.  (of 
that  point  of  the  compass  which  is  characterized 
through  "  orientation  "  by  facing  the  rising  sun,  &  then 


li'-'S  on  one's  right:)  southern,  usually  in  comb"  with 
disa  (direction);  D  in.  180  (one  of  the  6  points,  see 
disa),  188  sq.  (id.)  ;  M  1.487  ;  11.72  ;  S  1.145,  etc. 

-avattaka  (adj.)  winding  to  the  right  D  11. 18  (of  the 
hairs  of  a  Mahapurisa,  the  14"*  of  his  characteristics 
or  auspicious  signs  ;  cp  BSk.  daksinavarta  a  precious 
shell,  i.  e.  a  shell  the  spiral  of  which  turns  to  the  right 
Av6  1.205  ;  Divy  51,  67,  116);  J  v.380  ;  -janapada  the 
southern  country  the  "  Dekkan  "  ( =dakkhlnar|)  D 
1-96.  153  (expl"*  by  Bdhgh  as  "  Gangaya  dakkhinato 
pakata-janapado  "  DA  1.265)  '■  -samudda  the  southern 
sea  J  1.202. 

DakktuQa  (f)  [Vedic  daksina  to  daks  as  in  dasasyati  to 
honour,  to  consecrate,  but  taken  as  f.  of  dakkhiija  & 
by  grammarians  expl.  as  gift  by  the  "  giving  "  (i.  e. 
the  right)  hand  with  popular  analogy  to  da  to  give 
(dadati)]  a  gift,  a  fee,  a  donation  ;  a  donation  given  to  a 
"  holy  "  person  with  ref.  to  unhappy  beings  in  the  Peta 
existence  ("Manes  "),  intended  to  induce  the  allevia- 
tion of  their  sufferings ;  an  intercessional,  expiatory 
offering,  "  don  attributif  "  (Feer)  (see  Stede,  Peta 
Vatthu,  etc.  p.  51  sq.  ;  Feer  Index  to  AvS  p.  480)  D 
1. 51  =111.66  (d.-uddhaggika),  cp.  A  11.68  (uddhagga  d.) ; 
A  HI. 43,  46,  178,  259;  iv.64  sq.,  394;  M  111.254  sq. 
(cuddasa  patipuggalika  d.  given  to  14  kinds  of  worthy 
recipients)  Sn  482.  485  ;  It  19 ;  J  1.228 ;  Pv  1.4*  (=dana 
PvA  18).  1.5'  (petanar)  d  °r)  dajja),  iv.i^';  Miln  257; 
Vism  220  ;  PvA  29,  50,  70,  1 10  (pujito  dakkhinaya). 
guru-d.  teacher's  fee  VvA  229,  230  ;  dakkhiriar)  adisati 
(otherwise  uddisati)  to  designate  a  gift  to  a  particular 
person  (with  dat.)  Vin  1.229=0  11.88. 

-araha  a  worthy  recipient  of  a  dedicatory  gift  Pv 
11.8^;  -odaka  water  to  wash  in  (orig.  water  of  dedica- 
tion, consecrated  water)  J  1.118;  iv.370  ;  DhA  1.112; 
PvA  23;  -visuddhi.  purity  of  a  gift  M  11.256  sq.  =A 
ii.8oy  sq.  =D  III. 231,  cp.  Kvu  556  sq. 

Dakkhil^eyya  (adj.-n.)  [grd. -formation  fr.  dakkhina  as 
from  a  verb  *daksinati— pujeti]  one  worthy  of  a  dak- 
^icina.  The  term  is  expl.  at  KhA  183,  &  also  (with  ref. 
t.o  brahmanic  usage)  at  Nd^  291  ;  —  S  1.142,  168,  220 ; 
M'  1.37,  236  sq. ;  446;  A  1.63,  150;  11.44;  'i'i34,  162, 
2  8 ;  IV. 13  sq. ;  D  111.5  ;  It  19  (annan  ca  datva  bahuno 
(Ja  kkhineyyesu  dakkhinag  .  .  .  saggar)  gacchanti  da- 
yak^)  •  S"  2^7'  44^  ^1-  5'-'4'  5^9;  Nd^  291  (as  one  of 
the  3  constituents  of  a  sucressfnl  sacrifice,  viz.  yaiiiia 
the  g'^t,  phala  the  fruit  of  the  gift,  d.  the  recipient  of 
the  g'ft).  Cp.  i.io^  (where  also  adj.  to  be  given,  of 
(Jan a).  Pv  iv.i^^;  VvA  120,  155  (Ep.  of  the  Sangha  = 
ujul>huta);  PvA  25,  125,  128,  262. 

-aSS'  t'^'^  (lioly)  fire  of  a  good  receiver  of  gifts;  a 
met^vphor  taken  from  the  brahmanic  rite  of  sacrifice, 
as  01 1^  of  the  7  fires  (  =  duties)  to  be  kept  up  (or  dis- 
ca.TdeA)  ^y  ^  follower  of  the  Buddha  A  iv.41,  45; 
D  III.;''/  '  -khetta  the  fruitful  soil  of  a  worthy  recipient 


of  a  Ri  ft  PvA  92  ;  -puggala  an  individual  deserving  a 
donatioi''  J  1228  ;  there  are  7  kinds  enum*"  at  D  in. 253  ; 
8  kinds  .'^^  ^  i'i-255  ;  -sampatti  the  blessing  of  finding 
a  worthy'  object  for  a  dakkhina  PvA  27,  137  sq. 

Dakkhineyya<^^  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  prec]  the  fact  of  being  a 
dakkhineyy  ^  Miln  240  (a°). 


146 


Dakkhita 


147 


Dattu 


Dakkhita  [Vedic  dik^ita  pp.  of  diks,  Intens  to  da^ayati : 
see  dakkha']  consecrated,  dedicated  J  v.  188.  Cp. 
dikkhita. 

Dakkhln  (adj.)  [fr.  dakkhati,  see  dassati]  seeing,  perceiv- 
ing ;  f.  °i  in  atira-dakkhipi  nava  a  ship  out  of  sight  of 
land  D  1.222. 

Dakkheyya  (nt.)  [cp.  dakkha']  cleverness,  skill  J  11.237 
(Com.  kusalassa-jiaoa-sampayuttai)  viriyar)) ;  111.468. 

Dtttha  [pp.  of  daiati,  see  dasati]  bitten  J  1.7 ;  Miln  302  ; 
PvA  144. 

Dattlutr  {n.  ag.  to  dassati]  one  who  sees  A  11.25. 

Datthfi  (i.)  [cp.  datha]  a  large  tooth,  tusk,  fang  Miln  150 
(°visa). 

Da^^ha  [Sk.  dagdha,  pp.  of  dahati,  see  dahati]  burnt, 
aJways  with  aggi°  consumed  by  fire  Sn  62  ;  Pv  1.7* ; 
Miln  47  ;  PvA  56  (indaggi°). 

-tthana  a  place  burnt  by  fire  J  1.2 12  ;  also  a  place  of 
cremation  (sarirassa  d.)  PvA  163  (=alahana). 

I>a44hi°  [not  with  Trenchner,  Notes  p.  65=Sk.  dardhya, 
but  with  Kern,  Toev.  ii3=Sk.  drdhi  (from  dpdha,  see 
da]ba),  as  in  comp"  dfdhi  karoti  &  bhavati  to  make  or 
become  strong]  making  firm,  strengthening,  in  kaya- 
daddhi-bahula  strengthened  by  gymnastics,  an  athlete 
J  III. 3  ID  (v.  1.  dalhi°),  IV. 2 19  (v.  1.  distorted  kadjiji- 
phahuna). 

Da94<i  [Vedic  dapcja,  dial.  =  *dal[d]ra  ;  (on  0  :  1  cp.  guna  : 
gula  etc.)  to  'del  as  in  Sk.  dala,  dalati.  Cp.  Lat.  dolare 
to  cut,  split,  work  in  wood  ;  delere  to  destroy ;  Gr. 
iaiSaXov  work  of  art ;  Mhg.  zelge  twig ;  zol  a  stick. 
Possibly  also  fr.  •dan[d]ra  (r  =  l  freq.,  n :  1  as  tula: 
tiina ;  venu :  velu,  etc.  cp.  anda,  canda),  then  it  would 
equal  Gr.  Sivipov  tree,  wood,  &  be  connected  with  Sk. 
d&ru]  I .  stem  of  a  tree,  wood,  wood  worked  into  some- 
thing, e.  g.  a  handle,  etc.  J  11. 102  ;  405  (v.  1.  dabba) ; 
Vism  313;  PvA  220  (nimbanikkhassa  dandena  [v.  1. 
dabbena]  katasula).  tidanda  a  tripod.  —  2.  a  stick, 
stafi,  rod,  to  lean  on,  &  as  support  in  walking ;  the 
walking-stick  of  a  Wanderer  Vin  11. 132  (na  sakkoti 
Vina  dandena  ahinditui)),  196;  S  1.176;  A  1.138;  206; 
Sn  688  (suvajjija°) ;  J  111.395  ;  v. 47  (loha°) ;  Sdhp  399 
(eka°,  °dvaya,  ti°).  dsiijdai)  olubbha  leaning  on  the 
St.  M.  1. 108  ;  A  III. 298  ;  Th  2,  27.  —  3.  a  stick  as  means 
of  punishment,  a  blow,  a  thrashing :  daijdehi  anna- 
maj^fiai)  upakkamanti  "  they  go  for  each  other  with 
sticks  "  M  1.86  =  Nd^  199  ;  °r)  dadati  to  give  a  thrashing 
J  IV. 382  ;  v. 442  ;  dari^ena  paharai)  dadati  to  hit  with 
a  stick  S  IV. 62  ;  brahma"  a  certain  kind  of  punishment 
D  II. 154,  cp.  Vin  11.290  &  Kern,  Manual  p.  87;  paflca 
satSui  daiji^o  a  fine  of  500  pieces  Vin  1.247  '■  panita° 
receiving  ample  p.  Pv  iv.i**;  purisa-vadha°  J  11. 417; 
r3ja-dandai)  karoti  (c.  loc.)  to  execute  the  royaJ  beating 
PvA  216.  See  also  Dh  129,  131,  310,  405  —  4.  a  stick 
as  a  weapon  in  general,  only  in  cert,  phrases  &  usually 
in  comb"  w.  sattha,  sword,  danijar)  adiyati  to  take 
up  the  stick,  to  use  violence:  attadanda  (atta=a-da) 
violent  Sn  935  ;  attadandesu  nibbuta  Dh  406  =  Sn  630  ; 
a. -I- kodhabhibhuta  S  iv.117:  adinna-danda  adinna- 
sattha  Vin  1.349  ;  opp.  dandai)  nidahati  to  lay  down 
the  stick,  to  be  peaceful !  sabbesu  bhutesu  nidhaya 
darxjlai)  Sn  35,  394.  629 ;  nihita-d.  nihita-sattha  using 
neither  stick  nor  sword,  of  the  Dhamraa  D  1.4,  63  ; 
M  1.287;  A  1.211;  11.208;  IV. 249;  v. 204.  dandai) 
nikkhipati  id.  A  1.206.  d. -sattha  paramasana  Nd'  576. 
dan^a-sattha-abbhukkirana  &  danda-sattha-abhinipi- 
tana  Nd'  576*.  Cp.  patidanda  retribution  Dh  133.  — 
5.  (fig.)  a  means  of  frightening,  frightfulness,  violence, 
teasing.  In  this  meaning  used  as  nt.  as  M  1.372  ;  tini 
daij(J5ni  papassa  kammassa  kiriyaya :  kayadan(^ai) 
vaci",  mano" ;  in  the  same  sense  as  m.  at  Nd'  293  (as 


expl**  to  Sn  35).  —  6.  a  fine,  a  penalty,  penance  in 
general :  dandena  nikkinati  to  redeem  w.  a  penalty 
J  VI. 576  (dhanar)  datva  Com.)  ;  dandar)  dhareti  to 
inflict  a  fine  Miln  171,  193  ;  da^Kjai)  paneti  id.  Dh  310 
(cp.  DhA  III. 482) ;  DhA  11.71  ;  attha-kahapario  dando 
a  fine  of  8  k.  VvA  76.  —  adanda  without  a  stick,  i.  e. 
without  force  or  violence,  usually  in  phrase  adan^ena 
asatthena  (see  above  4) :  Vin  11. 196  (ad.  as.  nago  danto 
mah'esina ;  thus  of  a  Cakkavattin  who  rules  the  world 
peacefully :  pafhavii)  ad.  as.  dhammena  abhivijiya 
ajjhavasati  D  1.89  =A  iv.89,  105,  or  dhammena-m- 
anusasati  Sn  1C02  =S  1.236. 

-Abhighata  slaying  w.  cudgels  PvA  58  ;  -&raha  (adj.) 
deserving  punishment  J  v. 442  ;  VvA  23  ;  -adana  taking 
up  a  stick  (weapon)  (cp.  above  4),  comb"*  with  satth' 
adana  M  i.iio,  113,  410;  D  111.92,  93.  289:  A  IV.4C0  ; 
Vism  326.  -kathina  k.  cloth  stretched  on  a  stick  (for 
the  purpose  of  measuring)  Vin  11. 116;  -kathalika  a 
large  kettle  with  a  handle  Vin  1.286 ;  -kamma  punish- 
ment by  beating,  penalty,  penance,  atonement  J  111.276, 
527;  V.89  ;  Miln  8  ;  °tj  karoti  to  punish,  to  inflict  a  fine 
Vin  1.75,  76,  84  ;  11.262  ;  -koti  the  tip  of  a  branch  or 
stick  DhA  1.60  ;  -dipika  a  torch  J  vi.398  ;  Vism  39 ; 
DhA  1.220,  399  ;  -ppatta  liable  to  punishment  MUn  46  ; 
-paduma  N.  of  a  plant  (cp.  Sk.  dan4otphala  =  sahadeva, 
Halayudha)  J  1.5 1  ;  -para7ana  supported  by  or  leaning 
on  a  stick  (of  old  people)  M  1.88 ;  A  1.138  ;  Miln  282  ; 
-parissavana  a  strainer  with  a  handle  Vin  11. 119; 
-pahara  a  blow  with  a  stick  D  1.144  ■  -panin  carrying  a 
stafi.  "staff  in  hand"  M  1.108;  -bali  (-adi)  fines  & 
taxes,  etc.  DhA  1.25 1  ;  -bhaya  fear  of  punishment  A 

11. 121  sq.=Nd'  470=Miln  196;  -(m)antara  among  the 
sticks  D  1. 166=  A  1.295  =11.206  =  M  '-y?.  238.  307.  342  = 
Pug  55  ;  see  note  at  Dial.  1.228  ;  -yuddha  a  club-fight 
D  1.6 ;  J  III. 541  ;  -lakkhana  fortune-telling  from  sticks 
D  1.9;  -vakara  a  net  on  a  stick,  as  a  snare,  M  1.153; 
-velupesika  a  bamboo  stick  J  iv.382  ;  -sikka  a  rope 
slung  round  the  walking-staff  Vin  11. 131  ;  -hattha  with 
a  stick  in  his  hand  J  1.59. 

Davd&kft  [Demin.  of  danda]  i.  a  (small)  stick,  a  twig;  a 
staff,  a  rod ;  a  handle  D  1.7  (a  walking  stick  carried  for 
ornament :  see  DA  1.89) ;  J  1.120  (sukkha°  a  dry  twig) ; 
11.103.;  III. 26;  DhA  III. 171  ;  Vism  353.  —  addha°  a 
(birch)  rod,  used  as  a  means  of  beating  (taleti)  A  1.47  ; 

11.122  =M  i.87  =  Nd"  6o4  =  MiIn  197;  ubhato°  two 
handled  (of  a  saw)  M  1.129  =  189;  ratha°  the  flag-staf! 
of  a  chariot  Miln  27  ;  venu°  a  jungle  rope  J  111.204.  —  See 
also  kudaiii^aka  a  twig  used  for  tying  J  in. 204.  —  2.  the 
crossbar  or  bridge  of  a  lute  J  11.252,  253. 

-dipika  a  torch  J  1.31  ;  -madhu  "  honey  in  a  branch," 
a  beehive  DhA  1.59. 

DaQdaniya  (adj.)  [grd.  formation  from  daij^a]  liable  to 
punishment  Miln  186. 

Datta'  [pp-  of  dadati]  given  (-°  by ;  often  in  Np.  as  Brah- 
madatta,  Deva-datta=Theo-dor.  etc.)  Sn  217  (para°) 
=  SnA  272  (v.  1.  dinna). 

Datta'  (adj.-n.)  [prob.  =thaddha,  with  popular  analogy  to 
datta',  see  also  dandha  &  cp.  dattu]  stupid  ;  a  silly 
fellow  M  1.383  ;  J  vi.192  (Com.  :  dandha  la|aka). 

Datti  (f.)  [from  dad5ti-l-ti]  gift,  donation,  offering  D 
1.166 ;  M  1.78.  342  ;  A  1.295  :  li-206 ;  Pug  55. 

Dattika  (adj.)  [der.  fr.  datta]  given;  J  111.221  (kula") ; 
IV.  146  (id.) ;  nt.  a  gift  D  1.103  (  =  dinnaka  DA  1.271). 

Dattiya  =  dattika.  given  as  a  present  J  11. 119  (kula°) ; 
V.281  (sakka°) ;  vi.21  (id.):  VvA  185  (maharSja"  by  the 
King). 

Dattn  (adj.  ?)  [is  it  base  of  n.  ag.  datar  ?  see  datta"] 
stupid,  in  d°-pannatta  a  doctrine  of  fools  D  1.55  =M 
1.515:  J  IV.338. 


Dada 


148 


Danta 


Dada  (-°)  (adj.-suS.)  [Sk."  dad  or  °dada,  cp  "da  &  dadati 
base  3]  giving,  to  be  given  S  1.33  (panna") ;  Kh  viii.io 
(kama°) ;  Pv  11.9'  (id.  ^dayaka  PvA  113);  u.12*  (phala" 
=dayin  PvA  157);  VvA  171  (purii)°). — duddada  hard 
to  give  S  i.i9  =  iv.65  =  J  ii.86=vi.57i. 

Dad&ti  [Redupl.  formation  da  as  in  Lat.  do,  perf.  de-di, 
Gr.  Siiuifit ;  cp.  Lat.  dos  dowry,  Gr.  Ziii- ;  Ohg.  dati ; 
Lith.  duti  to  give]  to  give,  etc.  I.  Forms.  The  foil,  bases 
form  the  Pali  verb-system  :  da,  day,  dada  &  di. — i .  Bases 
da  &  (reduced)  da.  —  (a)  da°  :  fut.  dassati  J  i.i  13,  279  ; 
III. 83  ;  A  in. 37  ;  ist  sg.  dassami  J  1.223  :  "160  I  PvA  17, 
35,  etc.  —  dammi  interpreted  by  Com.  as  fut.  is  in 
reality  a  contraction  fr  datug  ihkmi,  used  as  a  horta- 
tive or  dubitative  subjunctive  (fr.  dahami,  like  kahami 

1  am  willing  to  do  fr.  katui)  ihami)  Sn  p.  15  ("  shall  I 
give");  11. 112;  IV. 10  (varar)  te  dammi);  Pv  i.io'; 
11.3^*  (kin  t'  ahai)  dammi  what  can  I  give  thee  =dassami 
PvA  88).  —  pret.  ada  Sn  303  ;  Pv  11.2^  ( =adasi  PvA  81) ; 
Mhvs  VII. 14  ;  2nd  sg.  ado  J  iv.io  (  =  adasi  Com.) :  Miln 
384  ;  1st.  pi.  adamha  J  11. 71  ;  Miln  10  ;  2nd  pi.  adattha 
J  1.57  (ma  ad.) ;  Miln  10,  &  dattha  J  Ii.i8i  ;  — aor.  adasi 
J  1. 150,  279;  PvA  73,  etc.;  pi.  adai)su  Pv  i.ii'. — inf. 
datug  J  III. 53  ;  PvA  1 7,  48  (°kama),  etc.  &  datave 
Sn  286.  — grd.  databba  J  in.52  ;  PvA  7,  26,  88,  etc.  — 
(b)  da°:  pp.  datta  -ger.  datva  J  1.152,  290  (a°) ;  PvA 
70,  72,  etc.  &  datvana  Pv  i.ii^;  also  as  "da  (for  °daya 
or  °dana)  in  prep,  cpds.,  Uke  an-up5da,  ada,  etc.  Der. 
fr.  I.  are  Caus.  dapeti,  pp.  dapita ;  n.  ag.  datar ;  nt. 
dana.  See  also  suffix  da,°  datti,  dattika,  etc.  ;  and  pp. 
atta  (=a-d[a]ta).  —  2.  Bases  day  &  (reduced)  day, 
contracted  into  de.  (a)  day"  :  only  in  der.  daya,  dayaka, 
dayin  and  in  prep.  cpds.  a-daye  (ger.  of  adati).  — 
(b)  de°:  pres.  ind.  deti  Sn  130;  J  ii.iii,  154;  PvA  8; 
ist  sg.  demi  J  1.228,  307;  2nd  desi  J  1.279;  PvA  39. 
ist  pi.  dema  J  1.263  .'  in.126  ;  PvA  27,  75  (shall  we  give) ; 
2nd  detha^J  in. 127;  3rd  denti  Sn  244. — imper.  dehi 
Vin  1. 17;  J  1.223;  IV.  10 1  ;  PvA  43,  73;  3rd  sg.  detu 
J  1.263  ;  ni04  ;  2nd  pi.  detha  It  66  J  ni.126;  PvA  29, 
62,  76.  —  ppr.  dento  J  1.265  '•  PvA  3,  1 1  etc.  —  grd. 
deyya  Mhvs  vii.31.     B'Sk.  deya.  —  Other  der.  fr.  base 

2  are  dayati  &  daya  (q.  v.).  —  3.  Base  dada:  pres.  ind. 
dadati  S  1.18  ;  Sn  p.  87  ;  ist.  sg.  dStdami  J  1.207  :  Sn  42 1  ; 
3rd.  pi.  dadanti  J  in. 220  ;  Dh  ^9. — imper.  dadahi 
Pv  II. I*. — pot.  dadeyya  PvA  17;  MUn  28  &  dade 
Pv  11.3'^;  Vv  62';  1st.  sg.  dadeyyag  J  1.254,  265  ;  2nd. 
sg.  dadeyySsi  J  in. 276      Also  contracted  forms  dajja 

5  1. 18  (may  he  give);  Dh  224;  Pv  1.4'  (=dadeyya  PvA 
17);  11.9*";  ist  sg.  dajjar)  Vin  1.232  (daijahai)=dajjai) 
ahar)).  .Cp.  i.io' (dajjahaij) ;  J  rv.ioi  (=dammiCom.)  ; 
Pv  11.9*';  2nd.  pi.  dajjcyyjtha  Vin  1.232;  3rd  y.  daj- 
jeyya  &  3rd.  pi.  dajjui)  in  cpd.  anupa°.  —  ppr.  dadanto 
Sn  p.  87.     gen.  etc.  dadato  It.  89;  Dh  242  ;  Pv  11.9*^; 

6  dadat)  Sn  187,  487;  Pv  11.9*';  Vv  67'.  —  ppr.  med: 
dadamana  J  1.228,  11.154;  PvA  129.  —  aor.  adadai) 
Vv  34"  (  =adisii)  VvA  151) ;  proh.  2nd.  pi.  ma  dadittha 
DhA  1.396;  J  in. 171.-  -ger.  daditva  Pv  11.8'-°  (v.  1. 
BB  datva) :  contr.  into  dajja  (should  be  read  dajja) 
Pv  11.9"'  (=datva  PvA  139).  —  Der.  dada  for  °da. — 
4.  (Pcissive)  base  di  (&  di) :  pp.  dinna  pres.  diyati 
S  1. 18;  Th  2,  475;  PvA  26,  &  diyyati  VvA  75;  cp. 
adiyati ;  pret.  diyittha  DhA  1.395  ;  —  ppr.  diyamana 
PvA  8,  26,  49,  I  lo,  133,  etc. — -Der.  fr.  4  are  Desid. 
dicchati,  diti,  etc.  —  II.  Meanings  i.  (trs.)  with  ace.  to 
give,  to  present  with  :  danag  deti  (w.  dat.  &  abs.)  to  be 
liberal  (towards),  to  be  munificent,  to  make  a  present 
S  1.18;  It  89;  Pv  1.4';  Il3;  PvA  8,  27,  etc. —  (fig.) 
okasag  to  give  opportunity,  allow  J  1.265;  ovadai)  to 
give  advice  PvA  1 1  ;  jivitii)  to  spare  one's  life  J  11.154  '• 
pativacanai)  to  answer  J  1.279 ;  sad^iukaraQ  to  applaud 
J  1.223;  pafifiSar)  to  promise  PvA  76;  —  to  offer,  to 
allow:  maggai)  i.  e.  to  make  room  Vin  11.22 1  ;  J  11.4; 
maggar)  dehi  let  me  pass  J  iv.ioi  ;  —  to  grant :  varar)  a 
wish  j  IV. 10  ;  Pv  11.9*";  —  to  give  or  deal  out :  dandar) 
a  thrashing  J  iv  j82  ;  paliarar)  a  blow  S  iv.62.  —  2.  with 


ger.  to  give  out,  to  hand  over :  daruni  aharitva  aggir) 
katva  d.  to  provide  with  fire  J  11.102  ;  safake  aharitva 
to  present  w.  clothes  J  1.265  ;  dve  kotthase  vibhajitva 
d.  to  deal  out  J  1.226  ;  kutikayo  karetva  adaQSu  had 
huts  built  &  gave  them  PvA  42.  —  3.  (abs.)  with  inf. 
to  permit,  to  allow:  khaditur)  J  1.223;  nikkhamitur) 
J  n.154  '■  pavisitug  J  1.263,  etc. 

Daddabha  [onomatop.]  a  heavy,  indistinct  noise,  a  thud 
J  111.76  (of  the  falling  of  a  large  fruit),  v.  1.  duddabhaya- 
sadda  to  be  regarded  as  a  Sk.  gloss  =dundubhya- 
^abda.     See  also  dabhakka. 

Daddabbayati  [Denom.  fr.  prec]  to  make  a  heavy  noise, 
to  thud  J  111.77. 

Daddara^  [onomat.  from  the  noise,  cp.  next  &  cakora, 
with  note  on  gala]  partridge  J  lir.541. 

Daddara'  [cp.  Sk.  dardara]  a  cert,  (grinding,  crashing) 
noise  A  iv.171  ;  J  11.8 ;  in. 461  ;  N.  of  a  mountain,  expl"* 
as  named  after  this  noise  J  11.8  ;  in.  16,  461. 

Dadda)hati  [Sk.  jajvalyati,  Intens.  of  jval,  see  jalati]  to 
blaze,  to  shine  brilliantly ;  only  in  pp.  med.  daddal- 
hamana  resplendent,  blazing  forth  S  1.127  =  }  1.469; 
Vv  17^;  34';  Pv  11.12°;  111.3^;  VvA  89  (ativiya  vijjo- 
tamana) ;  PvA  157  (at.  virocamana),  189  (at.  abhija- 
lanto).  —  Spelling  daddallamana  at  J  v. 402  ;  vi.118. 

Dadda  (nt.)  [Sk.  dadru  f.  &  dardru  a  kind  of  leprosy, 
dadruna  leprous  (but  given  *by  Halayudha  in  the 
meaning  of  ringworm,  p.  234  Auf recht) ;  fr.  *der  in 
Sk.  drnati  to  tear,  chap,  spht  (see  dara  &  dala)  ;  cp. 
Lat.  derbiosus ;  Ohg.  zittaroh ;  Ags.  teter]  a  kind  of 
cutaneous  eruption  Miln  298 ;  Vism  345. 

-bandhana  in  d.-bandhanadi-bandhana  at  ThA  241 
should  be  read  danda". 

Daddnla^  a  cert,  kind  of  rice  D  1.166  ;  M  1.78,  343  ;  A  1.241, 
295;  11.206;  Pug  55. 

Daddala'  (nt.)  [Sk.  dardura  ?]  in  naharu"  (v.  1.  dala  & 
dadalla)  both  at  M  i.iSS  (kukkutapattena  pi.  n-daddu- 
lena  pi  aggir)  gavesanti)  &  A  iv.47  (kukkutapattai)  va 
n-daddular)  va  aggimhi  pakkhittai)  patiliyati)  unex- 
plained ;  perhaps  a  muscle. 

Dadhi  (nt.)  [Sk.  dadhi,  redpl.  formation  fr.  dhayati  to 
suck.  Cp.  also  dhenu  cow,  dhita,  etc.]  sour  milk,  curds, 
junket  Vin  1.244  ('"  enum"  of  5-fold  cow-produce,  cp. 
gorasa) ;  D  1.201  (id.);  M  1.316;  A  11.95;  J  11.102; 
IV.  140 ;  Miln  41,  48,  63  ;  Dhs  646,  740,  875  ;  Vism  264, 
362. 

-ghafa  a  milk  bowl  J  11.102  ;  -mandaka  whey  S  ii.iii  ; 
-mala  "  the  milk  sea,"  N.  of  an  ocean  j  iv.140 ;  -varaka 
a  pot  of  milk-curds  J  111.52. 

Danta*  [Sk.  danta  fr.  ace.  dantai)  of  dan,  gen.  datah  = 
Lat.  dentis.  Cp.  Av.-dantan,  Gr.  Mvra,  Lat.  dentem  , 
Oir.  det ;  Goth.  tunj>us,  Ohg.  zand,  Ags.  toot  (=tooth) 
&  tusc  ( =tusk) ;  orig.  ppr.  to  *ed  in  atti  to  eat  =  "  the 
biter."  Cp.  datha],  a  tooth,  a  tusk,  fang,  esp.  an 
elephant's  tusk;  ivory  Vin  11. 117  (naga-d.  a  pin  of 
ivory);  Kh  n.  (as  one  of  the  taca-paiicaka,  or  5  der- 
matic constituents  of  the  body,  viz.  ke.sa.  loma  nakha 
d.  taco,  see  detailed  description  at  KhA  43  sq.) ;  panka- 
danta  rajassira  "  with  sand  between  his  teeth  &  dust 
on  his  head  "  (of  a  wayfarer)  Sn  980  ;  J  iv.362,  371  ; 
M  1.242  ;  J  1.61  ;  n.153  ;  Vism  251  ;  VvA  104  (isa°  long 
tusks) ;  PvA  90,  152  (fang) ;  Sdhp  360. 

-ajina  ivory  M  11.71  (gloss:  dhanadhariftari) ;  -a(thika 
"  teeth-bone,"  ivory  of  teeth  i.  e.  the  tooth  as  such 
Vism  21.  -avarana  the  lip  (lit.  protector  of  teeth) 
J  iv.i88;  VI. 590  :  DhA  1.387.  -uUahakai)  (M  in. 167) 
see  ullahaka ;  -kattha  a  tooth-pick  Vin  1.46  =  11.223; 
1. 51,  fti  ;  11.138  ;  A  111.2511 ;  J  1.232  ;  11.25  ;  vi.75  ;  Miln 
15;  DhA  n.184;  Vv.\  O3  ;  -kara  an  artisan  in  ivory. 


Danta 


149 


Dameti 


ivory-worker  D  1.78;  J  1.3^0;  Miln  331;  Vism  336; 
-kuta  tooth  of  a  maimed  bullock  (?)  (thus  taking  kuta 
as  kuta',  and  equivalent  to  kSfadanta),  in  phrase  asani- 
vicakkai)  danta-kutai)  D  111.44  —  47,  which  has  also 
puzzled  the  translators  (cp.  Dial.  111.40  :  "  munching 
them  all  up  together  with  that  wheel-less  thunderbolt  of 
a  jawbone,"  with  note :  "  the  sentence  is  not  clear  "). 
-p4}i  row  of  teeth  Vism  251;  -pons  tooth-cleaner,  always 
comb"'  with  mukh'  odaka  water  for  rinsing  the  teeth 
Vin  III. 51  ;  IV. 90,  233;  J  iv.69 ;  Miln  15;  SnA  272. 
The  C.  on  PirSj.  11. 4,  17,  (Vin  in. 51)  gives  2  kinds 
of  dantapoQa,  viz.  chinna  &  acchinna.  -ratUa  the  root 
of  a  tooth;  the  gums  J  v.172  ;  -vakkalika  a  kind  of 
ascetics  (peeling  the  bark  of  trees  with  their  teeth  ?) 
DA  1.271  ;  -vanna  ivory-coloured,  ivory-white  Vv  45'°; 
-ralaya  an  iv.  bangle  DhA  1.226 ;  -vikati  a  vessel  of  iv. 
D  1.78  ;  M  II. i8  ;  J  1.320  ;  Vism  336.  -vikhadana  biting 
with  teeth,  i.  e.  chewing  Dhs  646,  740,  875  ;  -vidai)saka 
(either  =  vidassaka  or  to  be  read  °ghai)saka)  showing 
one's  teeth  (or  chattering  ?)  A  1. 261  (of  hasita,  laughter) ; 
-sampatti  splendour  of  teeth  DhA  1.390. 

Dsnta'  (adj.)  [Sk.  danta]  made  of  ivory,  or  iv.-coloured 
J  VI. 223  (y&na  =  dantamaya). 

-kasava  ivory-white  &  yellow  Vin  1.287;  -valaya  see 
danta'. 

Dtate'  [Sk.  danta,  pp.  d&myati  to  make,  or  to  be  tame, 
cp.  Gr.  ififiTOi-,  Lat.  domitus.  See  dameti]  tamed,  con- 
trolled, restrained  Vin  11. 196;  S  1.28,  65,  141  (nago  va 
danto  carati  anejo) ;  A  1.6  (cittag  dantaij) ;  It  123  (danto 
damayatai)  se(tho) ;  Sn  370,  463,  513,  624  ;  Dh  35,  142 
(— catumagga-niyamena  d.  DhA  in. 83),  321  sq.  =Nd^ 
475.     —  sudanta  well-tamed,  restrained  Sn  23  ;  Dh  159, 

323. 

-bhiinii  a  safe  place  (=Nibbana),  or  the  condition  of 
one  who  is  tamed  S  111.84  •  ^<^'  475  ('^  continuation  of 
Dh  323) ;  DhA  iv.6. 

Dantaka  a  pin  of  tooth  or  ivory ;  makara"  the  tooth  of  a 
sword-fish  Vin  11.113,  117;  iv.47.  See  details  under 
makara. 

Duidha  (adj.)  [Sk.  ?  Fausboll  refers  it  to  Sk.  tandra ; 
Trenckner  {Notes  65)  to  dr4ha ;  see  also  Miiller,  P.  Gr. 
22,  &  Liiders  Z.D.M.G.  58,  700.  A  problematic  con- 
nection is  that  with  thaddha  &  datta^  (q.  v.)]  slow ; 
slothful,  indocile;  silly,  stupid  M  1.453;  S  iv.190; 
Dh  116;  J  1. 1 16,  143  ;  11.447  ;  v.  158  ;  vi.!92  {+  la|Ska) ; 
Th  I,  293;  Miln  59,  102,  251  ;  DhA  1.94,  251  ;  in. 4. 
Vism  105,  257  (with  ref.  to  the  liver). 

-Abhiiina  sluggish  intuition  D  in.  106 ;  A  v.63 ;  Dhs 
176;  Nett  7.  24,  50,  123  sq.,  cp.  A  11.149  sq. ;  Vism  85. 

Dtndhati  (f.)  stupidity  DhA  1.250 ;  as  dandhattai]  at 
D  in.  106. 

Dandhanata  (f),  in  a°  absence  of  sluggishness  Dhs  42,  43 

Dandhayana  (f)  clumsiness  Miln  105. 

Dandhayitatta  (nt.)  [der.  fr.  dandheti]  stupidity  (— dan- 
dhata)  D  1.249  (opp.  vitthayitatta) ;  S  11.54  ;  Miln  105  ; 
DA  1.252. 

Dandheti  [Denom.  fr.  dandha]  to  be  slow,  to  tarry  Th  i, 
293  (opp.  tareti).  —  pp.  dandhayita  see  in  der.  °tta. 

DapMi  Caus.  fr.  d&'  to  clean,  see  pariyo°  ;  pp.  data  see  ava°. 

Dappa  [Sk.  darpa,  to  dg-pyati]  wantonness,  arrogance 
J  H.277  ;  Miln  361,  414:  Pgdp  50.  Cp.  ditta'. — In 
def.  of  root  gabb  at  Dhtm  289. 

Dappita  (adj.)  arrogant,  haughty  J  v.232,  301. 

Dabba*  (adj.-n.)  [Sk.  dravya,  nt.  to  dravati  (drn)]  (a)  fit 
for,  able,  worthy,  good,  S  i.i87=Th  i,  1218,  cp.  Pss. 
of  the  Brethren,   399,   n.  4   (  =  Sk.   bhavya,   cp.   Panini 


V.3,  104  dravyar)  ca  bbavyali).  —  (b)  material,  sub- 
stance, property ;  something  substantial,  a  worthy 
object  Pgdp  14. 

•jatika  of  good  material,  fit  for,  able  M  i.i  14 ;  A  1.254 
(cp.  Sk.  patrabhuta) ;  Vism  196.  -saghara  collecting 
something  substantial  PvA  114  (should  prob.  be  read 
sambhara).  -sambhara  the  collection  of  something 
substantial  or  worth  collecting,  ;  a  gift  worth  giving 
J  IV. 3 II  ;  V.48;  vi.427  ;  DhA  1.321  ;  11.114. 

Dabba^  (adj.-n.)  [Sk.  dravya,  of  dru  wood,  see  daru]  tree- 
like, wooden;  a  tree,  shrub,  wood  .J  1.108  (d.-tiija- 
gaccha  a  jungle  of  wood  &  grass);  v. 46  (d.-gahana  a 
thicket  of  shrubs  &  trees) ;  Vism  353  (°tiija). 

DabbI  (f.)  [Sk.  darvi  =  »d5ni-i  made  of  wood,  see  d5ru]  a 
(wooden)  spoon,  a  ladle;  (met.)  the  hood  of  a  snake 
(dabbimatta  phapaputaka  DhA  iv.132).  —  Dh  64; 
gen.  &  instr,  davya  J  111.2 18;  Miln  365.  —  In  cpds. 
dabbi". 

-kanna  the  tip  of  the  ladle  DhA  1.3  71  ;  -gaha  holding 
a  sp<?on,  viz.  for  the  purposes  of  offering  M  n.157  (of  a 
priest);  Pv  11.9"  (=katacchu-gahika  PvA  135); 
•mukha  a  kind  of  bird  J  vi.540  ( =ata) ;  -boma  a  spoon- 
oblation  D  1.9. 

Dabbha  [Sk.  darbha  to  drbhati,  to  plait,  interlace,  etc. 
cp.  Lith.  darbas  plaiting,  crating]  a  bunch  of  ku^a  grass 
(Poa  Cynosuroides)  D  1.141  ;  M  1.344  ;  A  11.207. 
-puppha  "  kusa-flower,"  Ep.  of  a  jackal  J  in. 334. 

Dabhakkai)  (?)  (indecl.)  =  daddabhai) ;  a  certain  noise  (of 
a  falling  fruit)  J  in. 77  (v.  I.  duddabha  — daddabha). 

Dama  (adj.-n.)  (&  of  a  nt.  damo  the  instr.  damasa)  [Ved. 
dama ;  Ags.  tam=E.  tame,  Ohg.  zam  to  *deill&  in  da- 
meti] taming,  subduing ;  self-control,  self-command, 
moderation  D  1.53  (d3nena  damena  sariyamena  =  It  15  ; 
expl.  at  DA  1.160  as  indriya-damena  uposatha-kam- 
mena)  in. 147,  229;  S  1.4,  29,  i68=Sn  463  (saccena 
danto  damasa  upeto) ;  S  iv.349  ;  A  1.151;  n.152  sq.  ; 
M  111.269  (-1- upasama) ;  Sn  189.  542  (°ppatta),  655; 
Dh  9,  25,  261;  Nett  77;  Miln  24  (sudanto  uttame 
dame),  duddama  hard  to  tame  or  control  Dh  159: 
PvA  280  ;  Sdhp  367.  —  arindama  taming  the  enemy 
(q.  v.). 

Damaka  (adj.-n.)  [  =  dama]  i.  subduing,  taming;  con- 
verting ;  one  who  practises  self-control  M  1.446  (assa") ; 
III. 2  (id.)  J  1.349  (kiila"  bhikkhu),  one  who  teaches  a  clan 
self-mastery  505  (go'',  assa°,  liatthi") ;  Th  2,  422  (-ka- 
ruiifj'aya  paresag  cittassa  damaka  ThA  268).  —  2.  one 
who  practises  self-mortification  by  living  on  the  rem- 
nants of  offered  food  (Childers)  Abhp  467. 

Damatha  [Sk  damatha]  taming,  subduing,  mastery, 
restraint,  control  M  1.235  ;  D  ni.54  (-1-  samatha) ;  Dh  35 
(cittassa  d.) ;  PvA  265  ;  Dpvs  vi.36. 

Damaiia  (adj.-nt.)  taming,  subduing,  mastery  PvA  251 
(arinar)  d°-sila  =  arindama). 

Damaya  (adj.)  [Sk.  damya,  see  damma]  to  be  tamed: 
duddamaya  difficult  to  tame  Th  i ,  5  (better  to  be  read 
damiya). 

Damita  [Sk.  dam5yita  =  danta';  cp.  Gr,  a  W/iarof ;  Lat. 
domitus]  subdued,  tamed  J  v. 36;  PvA  265. 

Dameti  [Sk.  damayati,  caus.  to  dimyati  of  *dam  to  bring 
into  the  house,  to  domesticate ;  Gr.  i5a/iriu,  ifttiriic ; 
Lat.  domare ;  Qir.  dam  (ox);  Goth.  tamjan  =  Ohg. 
zemman=Ags.  temian=£.  tame;  to  *deina  of  dama 
house,  see  dampati]  to  make  tame,  chastise,  punish, 
master,  conquer,  convert  Vin  11.196  (daijcjcna) ;  M  11. 102  ; 
Dh  80,  305  (attanar)) ;  It  123  (ppr.  [danto]  damayatai) 
settho  [santo]  samayatar)  isi) ;  Miln  14,  386;  PvA  54 
(core  d.  =  converted). 

IV— 4 


Dametar 


150 


Dasa 


Dametar  [n.-ag.  to  daraeti  -  Sk.  damayitf,  cp.  Sk.  damitr  = 
Gr.  {■!rav)laiiarwp  (iJt)Tiip  ;  Lat.  domitor]  one  who  tames 
or  subdues,  a  trainer,  in  phrase  adantanar)  dameta  "  the 
tamer  of  the  untamed  "  (of  a  Buddha)  M  11. 102  ;  Th  2, 
135- 

Dampati  [Sk.  dampati  master  of  the  house  ;  dual :  husband 
&  wife ;  cp.  also  patir  han,  *dam,  as  in  Gr.  fw,  t^ii^in  & 
C€ff-  in  ^t(r7rori)c  =  dampati,  short  base  of  *dailia  house 
=  Ved.  dama,  Gr.  fo/ior,  Lat.  domus  to  *dema  (as  also  in 
dameti  to  domesticate)  to  build,  cp.  Gr.  ^i/iw  &  ii/ias; 
Goth,  timrjan ;  Obg.  zimbar ;  E.  timber]  master  of  the 
house,  householder,  see  tudampati  &  cp.  gahapati. 

Damma  (adj.)  [Sk  dam\a,  grd.  of  damyati  see  dameti  & 
cp.  damaya  (damiya)]  to  be  tamed  or  restrained ;  esp. 
with  rcf.  to  a  young  bullock  M  1.225  (balagava  damma- 
gSva  the  bulls  &  the  young  steers) ;  It  80  ;  also  of  other 
animals:  assadamma-sarathi  a  horse-trainer  A  11.112; 
&  lig.  of  unconverted  men  likened  to  refractory  bullocks 
in  phrase  purisa-damma-sarathi  (Ep.  of  the  Buddha) 
"  the  trainer  of  the  human  steer  "  D  1.62  (misprint 
°dhamma°)  =  11.93  =111.5 ;  M  11.38;  A  111.112;  Vv  i?*^ 
(nara-vara-d.-sarathi  cp.  VvA  86. 

Dayati'=dayati  (q.  v.)  to  fly  J  iv.347  (+uppatati); 
VI. 145  (dayassu=uyyassu  Com.). 

Dayati'  =  [Ved.  day  ate  of  day  to  divide,  share,  cp.  Gr. 
Saiopai,  Salvvfii,  lairtj,  etc.  to  da  (see  dadati,  base  2), 
&  with  p.  Gr.  fa-irairi),  Lat.  daps  (see  Walde,  Lat.  Wtb. 
s.  V.)]  to  have  pity  (c.  loc),  to  sympathize,  to  be  kind 
J  VI. 445  (dayitabba),  495  (dayyasi  =  dayar)  kareyyasi). 

Daya  (f)  [Ved.  daya,  to  dayati^]  sympathy,  compassion, 
kindness  M  1.78;  Sn  117;  J  1.23;  vi.495.  Usually  as 
anuddaya ;  freq.  in  cpd.  dayapanna  showing  kindness 
D  1.4  (=dayar)  metta-cittai)  apanno  DA  1.70) ;  M  1.286  ; 
A  IV. 249  sq.  ;  Pug  57  ;  VvA  23. 

Dara  [Sk.  dara ;  see  etym.  connection  under  darl]  fear, 
terror;  sorrow,  pain  Vin  11. 156— A  1.138  (vineyya 
hadaye  darag) ;  S  ii.ioi,  103;  iv.186  sq.  ;  Th  2,  32 
(=cittakato  kilesa  patho  ThA,  38);  J  iv.61  ;  Vv  83' 
(=daratha  VvA  327);  Pv  1.8=  (=citta-daratha  PvA 
41).  — sadara  giving  pain,  fearful,  painful  M  1.464; 
A  II. n,  172  ;  S  i.ioi.     Cp.  adara  &  purindada. 

Daratha  [Sk.  daratha,  der.  fr.  dara]  anxiety,  care,  distress 
A  11.238;  M  III. 287  sq.  (kayika  &  cetasika  d.) ;  Sn  J5 
(darathaja :  the  Arahant  has  nought  in  him  bom  of 
care  C^  explains  by  parilaha  fever) ;  J  1.61  (sabba- 
kilesa-d.)  PvA  230  (id.);  DhA  11.215;  Miln  3?o  ;  PvA 
23,  41  ;  VvA  327. 

Dari  (f)  [Sk.  dari  to  dn>ati  to  cleave,  split,  tear,  rend, 
caus.  darayati  *der  =  Gr.  Hpw  to  skin,  lipfia,  fnpa 
skin) ;  Lith.  dirii  (id.)  Goth.  ga-tairan=Ags.  teran  (tear) 
=  Ohg.  zeran  (Ger.  zerren).  To  this  the  variant  (r:l) 
*del  in  dalati,  dala,  etc.  See  also  daddara,  daddu,  dara, 
avadiyati,  adinna,  uddiyati,  purindada  ( =  purag-dara)] 
a  cleavage,  cleft;  a  hole,  cave,  cavern  J  1.18  (v.  106),  462 
(musika°  mouse-hole);  11. 4 18  (=maniguha);  SnA  500 
(  =  padara). 

-cara  a  cave  dweller  (of  a  monkey)  J  v. 70  ;  -mukha 
entrance  of  a  cave  Vism  no.  -saya  a  lair  in  a  cleft 
Cp.  iii.7>. 

Dala  (nt.)  [Sk.  dala,  *del  (var.  of  'der,  see  dara)  in  dalati 
(q.  V.)  orig.  a  piece  chipped  ofE=a  chip,  piece  of  wood, 
«p.  daQ(Ja,  Mhg.  zelge  (branch) ;  Oir  delb  (figure,  form), 
deil  (stalff.  rod)]  a  blade,  leaf,  petal  (usually  -°) ;  akkhi-d. 
eyelid  ThA  259;  DA  1.194;  DhsA  378;  uppala°  Dhs 
311;  kamala°  (lotus-petal)  VvA  35,  38;  mutta°  (?) 
DA  1.252  ;  ratta-pavala"  J  1.75. 

Dalati  [Sk.  dalati,  del  to  split  off.  tear ;  Gr.  SaiiaWui,  Lat. 
dolare  &   delere.     See  dala  &   dara]   to  burst,   split. 


break. — Caus.  daleti  Sn  29  (dalayit  va  =  chinditvS 
SnA  40);  Miln  398.  —  Pass,  diyati  (Sk.  diryate)  see 
uddiyati. 

Dalidda  &  Dalidda  (adj.-n.)  [Sk.  daridra,  to  daridrati. 
Intens.  to  drati  run  (see  dava),  in  meaning  cp.  addhika 
wayfarer  =  poor]  vagrant,  strolling,  poor,  needy, 
wretched;  a  vagabond,  beggar  —  (1:)  Vin  11.159; 
S  1.^6  (opp.  a4(Jha) ;  A  11.57,  203  ;  111. 351  ;  iv.219 ;  v.43  ; 
Pug  51;  VvA  299  (J:)  M  11.73;  S  v. 100,  384,  404; 
Vv2o'  (=duggata  VvA  loi) ;  DA  1.298;  PvA  227; 
Sdhp  89,  528. 

Daliddata  (i)  [Sk.  daridrata]  poverty  VvA  63. 

Daliddiya  see  dajiddiya. 

Da]ba  (adj.)  [Sk.  drdha  to  drhyati  to  fasten,  hold  fast; 
*dhergh,  cp.  Lat.  fortis  (strong).  Gr.  rapipvi;  (thick), 
Lith.  difias  (strap).  For  further  relations  see  Walde, 
Lat.  Wtb.  under  fortis]  firm,  strong,  solid  ;  steady,  fast ; 
nt.  adv.  very  much,  hard,  strongly  —  D  1.245  ;  S  1.77  ; 
A  11.33;  Sn  321  (nava),  357,  701,  821  (°r)  karoti  to 
strengthen),  966  (id.);  Dh  112;  J  11. 3  ;  iv.io6;  DhA 
iv.48  ;  KhA  184;  VvA  212  (=thira);  PvA  94,  277. 
—  dalhar)  (adv.)  Dh  61,  313. 

-dhamma  strong  in  anything,  skilled  in  some  art, 
proficient  S  11.266  =  A  11.48  (of  an  archer);  M  1.82; 
J  VI. 77 ;  Vv  63I  ace.  to  Trenckner,  Notes  p.  60  (cp. 
also  VvA  26i)=drdha-dhanva,  from  dhanu=  having  a 
strong  bow ;  -nikkama  of  strong  exertion  Sn  68  (=Nd' 
294) ;  -parakkama  of  strong  effort,  energetic  M  11.95  ; 
A  11.250;  Dh  23;  Th  2,  160;  -pahara  a  violent  blow 
J  HI.83 ;  -pikara  (etc.)  strongly  fortified  S  iv.194; 
-bhattin  firmly  devoted  to  somebody  DhsA  350. 

Dalhi"  [f.  of  drdha>dalha  in  comp"  like  dj^hi-bhuta,  etc. ; 
cp.  daddhi]  in  kaya-dajhi-bahula  strong  in  body, 
athletic  Vin  11.76,  cp.  Com.  on  p:  313  ;  J  111.310  ;  iv.219. 
dalhikarana  steadiness,  perseverance  SnA  290  (-1-  adha- 
rapata),  398  (id).  In  cpds.  also  dajhi"  viz.  -katnma 
making  firm ;  strengthening  Vin  1.290  ;  J  v. 254 ;  Pug 
18,  22  ;  Vism  112. 

Dava^  [Sk.  dava,  to  dunoti  (q.  v.) ;  cp.  Gr.  laig  fire-brand] 
fire,  heat  J  in.260.  ■ —  See  also  dava  &  daya. 

-daha  (  =  Sk.  davagni)  conflagration  of  a  forest,  a 
jungle-fire  Vin  11.138;  M  1.306;  J  1.641;  Cp.  111.9^; 
Miln  189  ;  Vism  36. 

Dava^  [Sk.  drava  to  dravati  to  run,  flow,  etc.  *dren  besides 
•ia  (see  dalidda)  &  *dram  (  =  Gr.  Spo/ioc);  cp.  abhid- 
davati,  also  dabba=dravyar)]  running,  course,  fUght; 
quickness,  sporting,  exercise,  play  Vin  11.13;  M  1.273; 
111.2  ;  A  I.I  14  ;  11.40,  145  ;  iv.167;  Pug  2j.  25.  — dava 
(abl.)  in  sport,  in  fun  Vin  11.101  ;  davaya  (dat.)  id.  Nd' 
540;  Miln  367;  Dhs  1347,  cp.  DhsA  402.  —  davar) 
karoti  to  sport,  to  play  J  11.359,  363. 

-atthaya  in  joke,  for  fun  Vin  ii.i  13 ;  -kamyata  fond- 
ness for  joking,  Vin  iv.i  1,  354  ;  M  1.565. 

Dasa*  [Sk.  daia=Av.  dasa,  Gr.  Hxa,  Lat.  decem.  Goth, 
taihun,  Oir.  deich,  Ags,  tien,  Ohg.  zehan  fr.  *dekm,  a 
cpd.  of  dv-(-  km  =  "  two  hands  "]  the  number  ten  ;  gen. 
dasannar)  (Dh  137);  instr.  dasahi  (Kh  iii.)  &  dasabhi 
(Vin  1.38).  In  cpds.  (-°)  also  as  )asa  (sojasa  16)  & 
rasa  (terasa  13  ;  pannar"  15  ;  atfhar"  18). 

Metaphorical  meaning.  (A)  In  the  first  place  10  is 
used  for  measurement  (more  recent  &  comprehensive 
than  its  base  5) ;  it  is  the  no  of  a  set  or  comprehensive 
unity,  not  in  -a  vague  (like  3  or  5),  but  in  a  definite 
sense.  (B)  There  inheres  in  it  the  idea  of  a  fixed 
measure,  with  which  that  of  an  authoritative,  solemn 
&  auspicious  importjince  is  coupled.  This  apphes  to 
the  unit  as  well  as  its  decimal  comb"*  (100.  1000). 
Ethically  it  denote."  a  circle,  to  fulfil  all  of  which  con- 
stitutes a  high  achievement  or  power. 


Dasa 


151 


Dassati 


Application  (A)  (based  on  natural  phenomena) :  dasa 
disa  (10  points  of  the  compass  ;  see  disa) :  Sn  719,  1 122  ; 
PvA  71,  etc.;  d.  lokadhatuyo  Pv  11.9°'  (  =  10x1000; 
PvA  138);  d.  mase  (10  months  as  time  of  gestation) 
kucchiya  pariharitva  J  1.52  ;  PvA  43,  82.  —  (B)  (fig.) 
I.  a  set  :  (a)  personal  (cp.  10  people  would  have  saved 
Sodom  :  Gen.  18,  32  ;  the  10  virgins  (2  x  5)  Matt.  25,  i) : 
divase  divase  dasa  dasa  putte  vijayitva  (giving  birth 
to  10  sons  day  by  day)  Pv  1.6.  —  (b)  impersonal :  10 
commandments  (dasa  sikkhapadani  Vin  1.83),  cp.  Exod. 
34,  28  ;  10  attributes  of  perfection  of  a  Tathagata  or  an 
Arahant :  Tathagata-balani ;  with  ref.  to  the  Buddha 
see  Vin.1.38  &  cp.  Vin  Texts  1.141  sq. ;  dasah'  angehi 
samannagato  araha  ti  vuccati  (in  memorizing  of  No.  10) 
Kh  III.  dasahi  asaddhammehi  sam°  kako  J  111.127; 
—  10  heavenly  attributes  (thanani) :  ayu  etc.  D  111.146  ; 
S  V.275  ;  PvA  9,  opp.  10  afflictions  as  punishment  (cp. 
10  plagues  Exod.  7-11):  dasannai)  afiiiatarag  thanai) 
nigacchati  Dh  137  (=das.  dukkha-karananag,  enum"* 
V.  138,  139)  "afflicted  with  one  of  the  10  plagues"; 
cp.  DhA  111.70.  —  10  good  gifts  to  the  bhikkhu  (see 
deyyadhamma)  Nd^  523  ;  PvA  7  ;  10  rules  for  the  king : 
PvA  161  ;  —  dividing  the  Empire  into  to  parts:  PvA 
111,  etc.  vassa-dasa  a  decade :  das'  ev'  inia  vassa-dasa 
J  IV. 396  (enum''  under  vassa) ;  dasa-raja-dharama 
J  11.367;  das'  akkosa-vatthiini  DhA  1.212. —  See  on 
similar  sets  A  v.i-310;  D  iii.266-27'i.  —  2.  a  larger 
unity,   a   crowd,   a   vast   number   (of  time   &   space) : 

(a)  personal,  often  meaning  "  all "  (cp.  10  sons  of 
Haman  were  slain  Esth.  9,  10  ;  10  lepers  cleansed  at  one 
time  Luke  17,  12) :  dasa  bhataro  J  1.307 ;  dasa  bhatika 
PvA  111;  dasa-kaniia-sahassa-parivara  PvA  2 10  etc.  — • 

(b)  impersonal  (cp.  10  x  10  =  many  times,  S.B.E.  43,  3)  : 
dasa-yojanika  consisting  of  a  good  many  miles  DhA 
III. 291.  dasavassasahassani  dibbani  vatthani  parida- 
hanto  ("  for  ever  and  aye  ")  PvA  76,  etc. 

-kkhattug  [Sk.  °krtvah}  ten  times  DhA  1.388  ;  -pada 
(nt.)  a  draught-board  (with  10  squares  i>n  each  side) ; 
a  pre-Buddhistic  game,  played  with  men  and  dice,  on 
such  a  board  D  1.6;  Vin  11.10=111.180  (°e  kijanti) ; 
DA  1.85.  -bala,  [Sk.daSabala]  endowed  with  10  (super- 
normal) powers,  Ep.  of  the  Buddhas,  esp.  of  Kassapa 
Buddha  Vin  1.38  =  )  1.84;  S  11.27;  Vism  193.  391; 
DhA  1. 14;  VvA  148,  206,  etc.  -vidha  tenfold  i)hA 
1.398.  -sata  ten  times  a  hundred  Vin  1.38  ("parivaro) ; 
Sn  179  (yakkha) ;  DhsA  198  ("nayano).  -sahassa  ten 
times  a  thousand  (freq.) ;  "i  in  dasa-saha.ssi-lokadhatu 
Vin  1. 12  (see  lokadhatu). 

Dasa'  (-°)  [Sk.-d^a ;  cp.  dassa]  seeing,  to  be  seen,  to  be 
perceived  or  understood  D  1.18  (afuiadatthu"  sure- 
seeing,  all-perceiving  =  sabbar)  passami  ti  attho  DA 
1. 1 11);  Sn  653  (paficcasamuppada"),  733  (sammad") ; 
J  1.506  (yugamatta" ;  v.  1.  dassa).  —  duddasa  difficult 
to  be  seen  or  understood  D  1.12  (dhamma  gambhira  d.  ; 
see  gambhira) ;  M  1.167,  4''?  ;  Sn  938  ;  Dh  252  ;  also  as 
sududdasa  Dh  36. 

Dasaka  (nt.)  i.  a  decad,  decade,  a  decennial  J  iv.397 ; 
DhsA  316.  khidda"  the  decad  of  play  Vism  6 19  ;  cakkhu" 
etc.  sense-decads  Vism.  553:  Cornp.  164,  250;  kSya°, 
Vism.  588. 

Dasana  [Sk,  daiana  to  ijasati]  a  tooth  Davs  v. 3  (d.- 
dhatu,  the  tooth  relic  of  the  Buddha). 

Dasa  (f.)  4  dasa  ^nt.)  fSk.  daiia]  unwoven  thread  of  a  web 
of  cloth,  fringe,  edge  or  border  of  a  garment  D  1.7 
(digha°  long-fringed,  of  vatthani) ;  J  v.  187  ;  DhA  1.180  ; 
iv.io6  (da^ani).  —  sadasa  (nt.)  a  kind  of  seat,  a  rug 
(lit.  with  a  fringe)  Vin  iv,  1 7 1  (  =  nisTdana) ;  opp.  adasaka 
(adj.)  without  a  fringe  or  border  Vin  11.301  =307  (nisi- 
dana).  -anta  edge  of  the  border  of  a  garment  J  1.467  ; 
DhA  1. 180  sq.,  391. 

Dasika'  (adj.)  (-°)  [Sk.  dr^ika,  cp.  dassin]  to  be  seen,  to 
behold,  being  of  appearance,  only  in  dud°  or  frightful 


app.,  fierce,  ugly  Si  .94  &  id.  p.  (q.  v.  under  okoti- 
maka) ;  J  1.504  (kodha.  anger) ;  PvA  24,  90  (of  Petas). 
—  Note.  The  spelling  is  sometimes  °dassika  :  A  11.85  ; 
Pug  51  ;  PvA  91). 

Dasika^  (adj.)  ffr.  dasa]  belonging  to  a  fringe,  in  dasika 
-sutta  an  unwoven  or  loose  thread  Vin  111.241  ;  DhA 
IV.206  ("mattam  pi  not  even  a  thread,  i.  e.  nothing  at 
all,  cp.  Lat.  nihllum  =  ne-filum  not  a  thread  =  nothing). 
See  also  dasaka  under  dasa. 

Dassa  (-°)  [Sk.  -darsa  ;  cp.  dasa']  to  see  or  to  be  seen,  per- 
ceiving, perceived  Sn  1134  (appa°  of  small  sight,  not 
seeing  far.  knowing  little  =  paritta-dassa  thoka-dassa 
Nd^  69).  Cp.  akkha°  a  judge  Miln  114.  -su°  easily 
perceived  (opp.  duddasa)  Dh  252. 

•Dassati^  [Sk.  *dars  in  dadarsa  pref.  to  dfi;  caus.  dar^a- 
yati.  Cp.  Gr.  lipKniiai  to  see ;  Oir.  derc  eye ;  Ags. 
torht ;  Goth,  ga-tarhjan  to  make  conspicuous.  The 
regular  Pali  Pres.  is  dakkhiti  (younger  dakkhati),  a 
new  formation  from  the  aor.  addakkhi  =  Sk.  adraksit. 
The  Sk.  Fut.  draksyati  would  correspond  formally  to 
dakkhati,  but  the  older  dakkhiti  points  toward  deriva- 
tion from  addakkhi.  Ihis  new  Pres.  takes  the  func- 
tion of  the  Fut.  ;  whereas  the  Caus  dasseti  implies  a 
hypothetical  Pres.  *dassati.  On  dakkhati,  etc.  see  also 
Kuhn,  Beitr.  p.  116;  Trenckner,  Notes  pp.  57,  61; 
Pischel,  Prk.  Gr.  §  554]  to  see,  to  perceive. 

1.  (pres.)  base  dakkh  [Sk.  draksj :  pres.  (a)  dakkhati 
Nd'  428  (=passati),  1st  dakkhami  ibid.  (=passami), 
2nd  dakkhasi  S  1.116;  Pv  11. i"  (v.  1.  BB  adakkhi) ; 
imper.  dakkha  Nd'  428  (  =  passa).  —  (b)  dakkhiti  Sn  909 
(v.  1.  BB  dakkhati),  3rd  pi.  dakkhinti  Vin  i.i6Sr'Sn  p.  15 
(v.  1.  BB  dakkhanti)-;  D  1.46.  —  aor.  addakkhi  (Sk. 
adraksit)  Vin  11.195;  S  1.1 17;  Sn  208  (=addasa  SnA 
257),  841,  1 131  ;  It  47  ;  J  III. 189  ;  &  dakkhi  It  47;  1st 
sg.  addakkhir)  Sn  938.  Spelling  also  adakkhi  (v.  1. 
BB  at  Pv  11.1 13)  &  adakkhir)  (Nd=  423).  —  inf.  dakkhi- 
tui)  Vin  1. 1 79. — Caus.  p.p.  dakkhapita  (shown,  ex- 
hibited) Miln  119.  —  Der.  dakkhin  (q.  v.). 

2.  (pret.)  base  dass  (Sk.  dars  &  dras) :  aor.  (a)  addasa 
(Sk.  adarsat)  Sn  358,  679,  ini6  ;  J  1.222  ;  iV.2  ;  Pv  11. 3'^ 
(ma  addasa  ^addakkhig  PvA  88) ;  DhA  1.26;  PvA  73. 
I't  (older,  cp.  agama)  addasa  Vin  11. 192,  195  ;  D  1.112  ; 
II. 16  ;  Sn  41-9  (v.  1.  BB  addasa),  910  (id.) ;  Miln  24,  ist 
sg.  addasag  S  i.ioi  ;  Nd'423  &  addasag  Sn  837  (  =  adak- 
khig  Nd'  185),  ist  pi.  addasama  Sn  31.  178,  450,  3rd 
pi.  (ma)  addasug  Pv  11. 7'  (  =  ma  passigsu  PvA  102).  — 
(b)  addasasi,  1st  sg.  addasasig  Sn  937,  1145;  Vv  35^' 
(v.  1.  addasami),  3rd  pi.  addasasug  Vin  11. 195  ;  D  11.16 ; 
M  1.153.  —  (c)  shortened  forms  of  aor.  are :  adda  Th  1, 
986;  adda  J  vi.125,  126. —  inf.  dafthug  Sn  685  (datthu- 
kama)  ;  J  1.290;  Pv  iv.i^  (  =  passitug  PvA  219);  PvA 
48,  79;  VvA  75.  —  ger.  dat^hu  (=Sk.  dr?tva)  Sn  424 
(in  phrase  nekkhammag  dafthu  khemato)  =  1098  ;  681. 
Expl.  at  Nd'  292  with  expl.  of  disva=passitva,  etc.  — 
grd.  datthabba  (to  be  regarded  as)  D  11. 154  ;  PvA  8,  9, 
10,  etc.,  Vism  464;  &-  dassaniya  (see  sep.).  .'Vlso  in 
Caus.  (see  below)  &  in  datthar  (q.  v.). 

3.  (med.-pass.)  base  diss  (Sk.  dfs) :  pres.  pass,  dissati 
(to  be  seen,  to  appear)  Vin  1.16  ;  Sn  194,  441,, 688  (dis- 
sare),  956;  J  1.138;  Dh  304  ;  Pv  i.8< ;  PvA  61  (dis.sasi 
you  look,  intrs.)  ;  ppr.  dissamana  (visible)  Pv.\  71,  6 
("rupa),  162  (id.) ;  VvA  78  (°kaya) ;  Mhvs.  vii.35,  &  der. 
dissamanatta  (nt.)  (visibility)  PvA  103.  —  ger.  disva 
Sn  48,  4(  9,  687  sq.  It  76  ;  PvA  67,  68,  etc.,  &  disvana 
Vin  1.15  ;  11.195  ;  Sn  299,  415.  1017  ;  Pv  11.8",  etc.,  also  a 
ger.  form  dittha,q.  v.  under  adiftha.  — pp.  diftha  (q.  v.). 

4.  Caus.  (of  base  2)  dasseti  (Sk.  dar^ayati),  aor. 
dassesi  &  (exceptional)  dassayi,  only  in  dassayi  tumag 
showed  himself  at  Pv  111. 2«  (=attanag  uddisayi  PvA 
181)  &  III. 2'*  (=attan.ig  dassayi  dassesi  pakato  ahosi 
PvA  185).  3rd  pi.  dasscsug  ;  ger.  da,ssetva ;  inf.  das- 
setug  to  point  out,  exhibit,  explain,  intimate  Dh  83  ; 
J  1.84,  200,  263,  266;  11.128,  159;  III. 53.  82  ;  PvA  4,  8, 


Dassati 


152 


Dahati 


i6  (ovidai)  d.  give  advice),  24,  45,  73  etc.  — to  point 
to  (ace.)  PvA  151  (sunakhai)),  257  (darakai)). — to 
make  manifest,  to  make  appear,  to  show  or  prove  one- 
self :  also  intr.  to  appear  j  11. 154  (dubbalo  viya  hutva 
attanag  dassesi :  appeared  weak);  vi.116;  Pv  111.2' 
(=samraukhibhavar)  gaccbanti  PvA  181);  PvA  13 
(mitto  viya  attanai)  dassetva :  acting  like  a  friend), 
Miln  271.  Esp.  in  phrase  attanai)  dasseti  to  come  into 
appearance  (of  Petas) :  PvA  32,  47,  61,  79,  etc.  (cp. 
above  dassayi).  —  pp.  dassita. 

Dassati'  fut.  of  dadati,  q.  v. 

Dassana  (nt.)  [Sk.  dar^ana.  see  dassati*]  —  i.  Lit.  seeing, 
looking ;  noticing ;  sight  of,  appearance,  look.  Often 
equivalent  to  an  infinitive  "  to  see,"  esp.  as  dat.  dassa- 
naya  in  order  to  see.  for  the  purpose  of  seeing  (cp.  das- 
sana-k&ma=:datthu-kama) :  [Bhagavantai)]  dassanaya 
M  11.23,  46;  A  1.121  ;  III. 381  ;  Sn  325.  —  (a)  (nt.) 
"sight"  D  11.157  (visiika",  looking  on  at  spectacles); 
A  III. 202  (+  savana  hearing) ;  iv.25  sq.  (bhikkhu") ; 
Sn  207  (muni°,  may  be  taken  as,  2,  cp.  SnA  256).  266 
(=pekkhana  KhA  148);  Dh  206  (ariyanai)  d.,  cp. 
ariyanag  dassSvin),  210  (appiy§nar)),  274;  Vv  34^; 
VvA  138  (sippa"  exhibition  of  art,  competition). — 
(b)  adj.  as  (-°)  "  of  appearance  "  (cp.  °dasa)  Sn  548 
(caru°  lovely  to  behold) ;  PvA  24  (bhayanaka"  fearful 
to  look  at).  68  (bibhaccha°).  —  2.  Appld.  (power  of) 
perception,  faculty  of  apperception,  insight,  view, 
theory ;  esp.  (a)  in  comb"  Aana-dassana  either  "  know- 
ing &  seeing,'  or  perhaps  "  the  insight  arising  from 
knowledge,"  perfect  knowledge,  realization  of  the 
truth,  wisdom  (cp.  nana) :  S  1.52  ;  n.30  ;  v. 28,  422  ; 
M  1.195  sq.,  241,  482  (Gotamo  sabbaiii\u  sabba-dassavi 
aparisesar)  u-d  °g  patijanati ;  id.  11. 31);  D  111.134; 
A  1.220 ;  11.220  ;  IV. 302  sq. ;  cp.  fi-d-patilabha  A  1.43  ; 
11.44  sq. ;  III. 323  ;  fl-d-visuddhi  M  1.147  sq.  Also  with 
further  determination  as  adhideva-fi-d°  A  iv.428 ; 
alam-ariya"  S  in. 48  ;  IV.3C0  ;  v. 126  sq.  ;  M  1.68,  71,  81, 
207.  246,  440  sq.,  A  1.9;  111.64,  430;  V.88  ;  parisuddha 
A  III. 125  ;  maggimagga°  A  v.47  ;  yathSbhuta"  A  111.19, 
200;  iv.99,  336;  v. 2  sq.,  311  sq.  ;  vimutti"  S  1.139; 
V.67  ;  A  III. 12,  81,  134  ;  iv.99,  336  ;  v.130  ;  It  107,  108  ; 
Miln  338.  See  also  vimutti.  —  (b)  in  other  contexts  : 
ariyasaccana-dassana  Sn  267  ;  ujubhuta"  S  v. 384,  404  ; 
dhamma°  (the  right  doctrine)  S  v. 204,  344,  404 ;  A 
III. 263 ;  papa"  (a  sinful  view)  Pv  IV.3'* ;  viparita" 
A  III. 1 14;  IV. 226  ;  v.284  sq.  (and  a°),  293  sq.  samraa° 
(right  view)  S  III. 189;  A  in.138;  iv.290 ;  V.J99;  sabba- 
lokena  d.  S  iv.127  ;  sahetu  d.  S  v.  126  sq.  ;  suvisuddha 
d.  S  IV. 191. — S  III. 28,  49;  M  11.46;  HI. 157;  Sn  989 
(wisdom :  Jinanai)  eta  d.  corresponding  with  5A^a  in 
preceding  line) ;  Dhs  584,  1C02  (insight :  cp.  Dhs.  trsl. 
p.  256).  —  (adj.)  perceiving  or  having  a  view  (cp. 
dasseti)  S  1.181  (visuddha")  ;  Th  i,  422.  —  (c)  as  nt. 
from  the  Caus.  dasseti :  pointing  out,  showing  ;  implica- 
tion, definition,  statement  (in  Com.  style)  PvA  72  ; 
often  as  "akara-dassana :  PvA  26  (databba"),  27  (tho- 
rnana"),  35  (kata°)  Sc  in  dassanatthai)  in  order  to  point 
out,  meaning  by  this,  etc.  PvA  9,  68.  —  3.  adassana  not 
seeing  S  l.i68^Sn  459:  invisibility  J  IV.49O  (°r) 
vajjati  to  become  invisible) ;  wrong  theory  or  view 
A  v.  1 45  sq.  ;  Sn  206  ;  Pug  21. 

-anuttariya  (nt.)  the  pre-eminence  or  importance  of 
(right  or  perfect)  insight ;  as  one  of  the  3  anuttariyani, 
viz.  d",  patipada",  vimutta"  at  D  111.219,  250,  281  ; 
A  III. 284,  325  ;  -kama  (adj.)  desirous  of  seeing  A  1.150  ; 
IV. 1 15;  Miln  23;  -bhiimi  the  level  or  plane  of  insight 
Nett  8,  14,  50 ;  -sampanna  endowed  with  right  insight 
S  11.43  sq..  58. 

Dassaniya  (adj.)  [Sk.  dar^aniya;  grd.  formation  of  das- 
sana, also  as  dassaneyyaj  fair  to  behold,  beautiful, 
good-looking  (  =  dassitur)  yutta  DA  1. 141),  often  in 
formula  abhirupa  d.  pasadika  parattiaya  vannapokkha- 
rataya    samannagata    to    express    matchless    physical 


beauty;  D  1. 1 14;  S  11.279;  PvA  46  etc.  Also  with 
abhirupa  &  pisidika  alone  of  anything  fair  &  beautiful: 
D  1.47.  —  Vin  IV.18;  S  1.95;  J  III. 394  ;  Pug  52,  66; 
DA  1.281  ;  PvA  44  (=subha),  51  (=nicira). — Com- 
parative dassanlyatara  S  1.237;  Sdhp  325:  DhA  1.119. 

Dassaneyya  (adj!)=::dassaniya  J  V.203  (bhusa°). 

Dassavita  (f.)  [abstr.  to  dassavin]  seeing,  sight  (-°)  Miln 
140  (gunavisesa"). 

Dassivin  (adj.-n.)  [Sk.  *dar£avant]  full  of  insight,  seeing, 
perceiving,  taking  notice  of.  In  comb"  with  °fiu 
(knowing)  it  plays  the  part  of  an  additional  emphasis  to 
the  I  St  term  =  knowing  &  seeing  i.  e.  having  complete 
or  highest  knowledge  of,  gifted  with  "  clear  "  sight  or 
intuition  (see  janati  passati  &  cp.  flapa-dassana).  — 
(a)  As  adj.  -°  :  seeing,  being  aware  of,  realizing  ;  anicca" 
S  III.  I  ;  adinava"  S  11. 194  ;  iv.332  ;  M  1.173  ;  A  v. 181  sq. ; 
pariyanta"  A  v.50  sq. ;  bhaya"  S  v. 187 ;  It  96 ;  esp.  in 
I  phrase  anumattesu  vajjesu  bhaya°  D  1.63=11  n8  (cp. 
bhaya-dassin) ;  lokavajjabhaya"  S  1.138  ;  sabba°  (-(-sab- 
banflu)  M  1.482  (samano  Gotamo  s°  s°) ;  11.31  ;  Miln  74 
(Buddho  s°  s°) ;  cp.  M  Vastu  111.51  sarvadar^vin  ;  sara° 
Vin  11.139.  —  (b)  (n.)  one  who  sees  or  takes  notice  of, 
in  phrase  ariyanai)  dasscivi  ( +  sappuris&nai)  dass4vi  &. 
kovido)  M  1.8  ;  S  111.4  ;  opp.  adassavl  one  who  dis- 
regards the  Noble  Ones  S  111.3,  1 13  ;  M  hi. 17  ;  Dhs  1C03 
(cp.  DhsA  350). 

I 

Dassika  (-°) :  see  dasika*. 

Dassita'  [Sk.  darSita,  pp.  of  dasseti']  shown,  exhibited, 
performed  Vin  iv.365  ;  J  1.330.     Cp.  san°. 

Dassita'  at  J  vi.579  accord,  to  Kern  (Toev.  p.  ii4)  =  Sk. 
dagSita  mailed,  armed. 

Dassin  (-°)  (adj.)  [Sk.  "dar^in]  seeing,  finding,  realizing,  per- 
cei\'ing.  Only  in  cpds.,  like  attha"  Sn  385;  ananta" 
S  1.143:  adinava"  Sdhp  409;  ekanga"  Ud  69;  jatik- 
khaya"  Sn  209;  It  40;  flSna"  Sn  478  ( =  sacchikata- 
sabbai^fiUta-fiSna  SnA  411;  cp.  dassSvin) ;  tira°  S 
111.164  sq. ;  A  111.368,  cp.  tira-dakkhin ;  digha°  (=3ab- 
badassavin)  PvA  196;  bhaya°  Dh  31  ("dassiva  =  dassi 
va  ?),  317  ;  It  40  ;  DA  1. 181  (=bhaya  dassa\in) ;  viveka" 
Sn  474,  851. 

Dassimant  see  attha°. 

Dassu  [Sk.  dasyu,  cp.  d&sa]  enemy,  foe ;  robber,  in  dassu- 
khOa  robber-plague  D  1.135,  136  (=corakhila  DA 
1.296). 

Dassetar  [Sk.  dar^ayitr,  n.  agent  to  dasseti]  one  who 
shows  or  points  out.  a  guide,  instructor,  teacher  A  1.62, 
132  =It  no. 

Daaseti  Caus.  of  dassati'  (q.  v.). 

Dasso  n.  pi.  of  dasi. 

Daba  [Sk.  draha.  through  metathesis  fr.  hrada.  hUd,  see 

hiladate]  a  lake  D  1.45  (udaka") ;  J  1.50  ;  11.104  ;  v.412  ; 
Miln  259;  PvA  152;  Dpvs  1.44. 

Dahati'  (dahate)  [Sk.  dadhati  to  put  down,  set  up ; 
*dhe  =  Gr.  riyi)^!,  Lat.  facio..  Ohg.  tuon.  Ags.  d6n  = 
E.  to  do.  See  also  dhatu]  to  put.  place ;  take  for  (ace. 
or  abl.).  assume,  claim,  consider  D  1.92  (okkskai)  pitS- 
mahar)=thapetiDA  1.258) ;  S  111.113  (mittato  daheyya) ; 
A  IV. 239  (cittar)  d.  fix  the  mind  on) ;  Sn  825  (bSlai) 
dahanti  mithu  anflamai^fiai)  =passanti  dakkhanti.  etc. 
Nd'  163).  Pass  dhlyati  (q.  v.) ;  grd.  dheyya  (q.  v.).  — 
Note,  dahati  is  more  frequent  in  comb"  with  prefixes  & 
compositions  like  a°.  upa".  pari".  sad°,  san°.  sama°,  etc. 

Dahati' =  dahati  to  burn;  as  dahate  Pv  11. 9'  (  =  dahati 
vinaseti  PvA  116). 


Dahana 


153 


Danava 


D&hsna  [Sk.  dahana,  to  dahati,  orig.  "  the  burner  "]  fire 
Visra  338  ("kicca) ;  ThA  256  ;  Davs  v.6 ;  Sdhp  20. 

Daliara  (adj.)  [Sk.  dahara  &  dahra  for  dabhra  to  dabhnoti 
to  be  or  make  short  or  deficient,  to  deceive]  small,  little, 
delicate,  young;  a  young  boy,  youth,  lad  D  1.80.  115  ; 
S  1. 131  ;  11.279  (daharo  ce  pi  pafVnava) :  M  1.82  ;  11.19, 
66  ;  A  V.300  ;  Sn  216,  420  (yuv5+  ),  578  (d.  ca  mahanta 
ye  bala  ye  ca  paijdita  sabbe  maccuvasai)  yanti) ;  J  1.88 
(daharadahare  darake  ca  darikayo).  291  ("itthi  a  young 
wife) ;  II.  160,  353  ;  in. 393  ;  Dh  382  ;  Pv  iv.i"  (yuva) ; 
DhA  1.397  (samanera) ;  DA  1.197  (bhikkhu),  223 
(=taruna),  284  (id.);  PvA  148;  VvA  76;  ThA  239,  251. 
Opposed  to  mahatlaka  J  iv.482  ;  to  vuddha  Vism  100.  — 
f.  dahara  Vv  31*  (young  wife)  (+yuva  VvA  129)  & 
dahari  J  iv.35 ;  v.521  ;  Miln  48  (darika). 

D»harak8 -dahara,  young  Miln  310.  —  f.  °ika  a  young 
girl  Th  2.  464.  483. 

Dith&  (f.)  [Sk.  dar)stra  to  dasati  (q.  v.),  cp.  also  daffha] 
a  large  tooth,  fang,  tusk;  as  adj.  (-°)  having  tusks  or 
fangs  D  II.  1 8  (susukkha°) ;  J  1.505  (uddhata-datho  viya 
sappo) ;  IV. 245  (nikkhanta") ;  DhA  1.215;  PvA  152 
(kathina") ;  Sdhp  286. 

-avudha  [Sk.  daij.strayudha]  using  a  tusk  as  his 
weapon  J  v.172  ;  -danta  a  canine  tooth  KhA  44  ;  -balin 
one  whose  strength  lies  in  his  teeth  (of  a  lion)  Sn  72. 

D&tbikS  (f)  [Sk.  *dadhika  =  Prk.  for  dag^trika]  beard, 
whiskers  Vin  11. 134  (na  d.  {hapetabba.  of  the  bhikkbus)  ; 
J  1305;  V.42  (tamba°),  217  (maha°  having  great 
whiskers) ;  DA  1.263  (paru|ha-massu°  with  beard  & 
whiskers  grown  long). 

Da(hin  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  dai)?trin]  having  tusks  J  11.245  ; 
IV. 348  ;  Th  I,  p.  I  ;  Sdhp  286. 

Ditar  [Sk.  datr,  n.  ag.  of  dadati  to  give  ;  cp.  Gr.  ("wrwp  & 
Hiirlifi]  a  giver,  a  generous  person  Pgdp  50.  —  adata  one 
who  does  not  give,  a  miser  Pv  11. 8';  Otherwise  as  na 
data  (hoti)  A  11.2(13  ;  It  65. 

Ditto  (nt.)  [Sk.  datra,  to  da,  Sk.  dati,  dyati  to  cut.  divide, 
deal  out ;  cp.  Gr.  taTio/ini,  t^nidfim  &  sec  diina,  dapcti, 
dayati]  sickle,  scythe  Miln  33. 

Dana  (nt.)  [Ved.  dana,  da  as  in  dadati  to  give  &  in  dati, 
dyati  to  deal  out,  thus  :  distribution  (scil.  of  gifts) ;  cp. 
Gr.  eiivof  (present),  Lat.  damnum  (E.  damages) ;  Gr. 
Sipo);  Lat.  donum  ;  also  Ags.  tid  (  =  E.  tide,  portion,  i.  e. 
of  time),  &  tima  (  =  E.  time).  See  further  dadati, 
dayati,  datta,  dapeti.  Def"  at  Vism  60  :  danar)  vuc- 
cati  avakhandanai)]  (a)  giving,  dealing  out,  gift;  alms- 
giving, liberality,  munificence ;  esp.  a  charitable  gift  to 
a  bhikkhu  or  to  the  community  of  bhikkhus,  the  Sangha 
(cp.  deyyadhamma  &  yai\i\a).  As  such  it  constitutes  a 
meritorious  act  (punHar))  and  heads  the  list  of  these,  as 
enumerated  in  order,  danamaya  puiTilar),  sJlamaya  p., 
bhavanamaya  p.  viz.  acts  of  merit  consisting  of  muni- 
ficence, good  character  &  meditation  (D  111.218  e.  g.  ; 
cp.  caga,  punfta,  sila).  Thus  in  formula  dan.ldini  purt- 
fiani  katva  J  1. 168;  PvA  66,  105;  cp.  cpds.  under 
°maya.  —  (b)  Special  merit  &  importance  is  attached 
to  the  mahadana  the  great  gift,  i.  e.  the  great  oifering 
(of  gifts  to  the  Sangha),  in  character  the  buddhistic 
equivalent  of  the  bralimanic  mahayajfia  the  chief 
sacrifice.  On  16  Mahadanas  see  Wjlson  Hinitu  Casle 
413;  on  4  Heal.  Chinese  Texts  88.  —  A  iv.246;  J  1.50, 
74 ;  -V.383  (devasikai)  chasatasahassa-pariccAgat)  ka- 
ronto  mahadanai)  pavattesi  "  he  gave  the  great  larg&sse, 
spending  daily  6oo,(f.c  pieces  ") ;  IVA  19,  22,  75, 
127,  etc.  —  (c)  Constituents,  qualities  (fe  chamcteristics 
of  a  dana :  8  objects  suitable  for  gifts  form  a  standard 
.set  (also  cnum''  as  10),  viz.  anna  pana  vattha  yana 
nifllu  gandlia-vilepana  seyyavasatha  padipcyya  (broad, 
water,    clothes,    vehicle,    garlands,    scented    ointment. 


conveniences  for  lying  down  &  dwelling,  lighting 
facility)  A  iv.239;  cp.  Pv  11. 4*  &  see  "vatthu  &  deyya- 
dhamma. Eight  ways  of  giving  alms  at  D  111.258  = 
A  IV. 236.  five  ways,  called  sappurisa-dana  (&  asapp")  at 
A  HI. 171  sq. ;  eight  sapp°  at  A  iv.243.  Five  manners 
of  almsgiving  metaphorically  for  silas  1-5  at  A  iv. 2 46  = 
DA  1.306.  Five  characteristics  of  a  beneficial  gift  at 
A'  III. 1 72,  viz.  saddhaya  danai)  deti.  sakkaccai)  d.d., 
kalena  (cp.  kaladana  A  in. 41),  anuggahitacitto,  attanail 
ca  parai\  ca  anupahacca  d.d.  —  (d)  Various  passages 
showing  practice  &  value  of  dana :  Vin  1.236 ;  D  1.53 
(-l-dama  &  sagyama ;  cp.  It  15;  l'\K  276);  11.356  sq. 
(sakkaccai)  &  a°) ;  A  iv.392  sq.  (id);  D  in. 147  sq., 
190  sq.,  232  ;  S  1.98  (danar)  databbai)  yattha  cittaij 
pasidati) ;  A  1.91  =It  98  (amisa°  and  dhamma",  material 
&  spiritual  gifts):  A  1.161  ;  iii  41  (dane  ■  anisai)sa) ; 
iv.6o,  237  sq.  (raahapphala),  392  sq.  ("ssa  vipaka) ; 
v.269  (petanai)  upakappati) ;  J  1.8  (agga|a°) ;  11.112 
(dinna°),  111.52  (id.) ;  Sn  263,  713  (appai)  danai)  samana- 
brahmananar))  PvA  54  (agantuka"  gift  for  the  new- 
comer); Sdhp  2 1 1-2 1 3.  — adana  withholding  a  gift, 
neglect  of  liberality,  stinginess  Pv  ii.g*^ ;  Miln  279; 
PvA  25  ;  cp.  °sTla  under  cpds.  :  atidana  excessive  alms- 
giving Pv  ii.9<'  (cp.  PvA  129) ;  Miln  277. 

-agga  [Sk.  danagara,  cp.  bhattagga,  salakagga ;  see 
Trenckner,  Notes  p.  56]  a  house  where  alms  or  donations 
are  given,  a  store-house  of  gifts,  fig.  a  source  or  giver 
of  gifts,  a  horn  of  plenty  J  vi.487  ;  DhA  1.152,  189; 
Miln  2  ;  PvA  121,  124,  127,  141.  A  possible  connection 
w.  agga  =  agra  is  suggested  by  comb"  danani  maha- 
danani  aggai\fiani  A  iv.246  ;  -  adhikara  supervision  or 
charge  of  alms-distributing  PvA  124  (cp.  Pv  11. 9") ; 
-anisai)sa  praise  of  generosity  PvA  9  ;  cp.  A  in. 41  ; 
-upakarana  means  or  materials  for  a  gift  PvA  105  ; 
-upapatti  (read  uppatti  at  D  in. 258)  an  object  suitable 
for  gifts,  of  which  8  or  10  are  mentioned  (see  above  c) 
A  iv.239=D  III. 258  ;  -katha  talk  or  conversation  about 
(the  merit  &  demerit  of)  almsgiving,  one  of  the  anu- 
pubbi-katha  Vin  1.15,  18;  -dhamma  the  duty  or  meri- 
torious act  of  bestowing  gifts  of  mercy  (cp.  deyya- 
dhamma) PvA  9 ;  -pati  "  lord  of  alms,"  master  in 
liberality,  a  liberal  donor  (def.  by  Bdhgh  as :  yag 
danai)  deti  tassa  pati  hutva  deti  na  daso  na  sahayo 
DA  1.298)  D  1. 137  (H-saddho  &  dayako,  as  one  of  the 
qualifications  of  a  good  Jcing) ;  A  in. 39 ;  iv.79  sq. 
(-(-saddho) ;  Sn  487;  Pv  i.ii*  (-^  amaccharin) ;  J  1.199  ; 
Miln  279  sq.  ;  Sdhp  275,  303 ;  -^xiltRa.  the  religious 
merit  of  almsgiving  or  liberality  (see  above  a)  PvA 
73 ;  -phala  the  fruit  of  munificence  (as  accruing  to  the 
donor)  A  111.39 ;  iv.79;  Pv  n.8'  (°r)  hoti  paramhi  loke : 
is  rewarded  in  the  life  to  come,  cp.  It  19) ;  PvA  8  (cp. 
Pv  i.i) :  -maya  consisting  in  giving  alms  or  being  liberal 
(see  above  a)  D  in. 2 18  (pui\fiakiriya-vatthu) ;  Vbh  135 
(kusala-cetana),  325  (pafli^a) ;  PvA  8  (pui;i\a),  Oo  (id.), 
9  (kusala-kamma),  51,  etc.;  -vatta  alms  J  vi.333 ; 
-vatthu  that  which  constitutes  a  meritorious  gift ; 
almsgiving,  beneficence,  offering,  donation  D  111.258  = 
A  IV. 236  ;  PvA  20  (  =  annapanadika  dasavidha  datab- 
bavatthu  PvA  7) ;  -Teyyava{ika  services  rendered  at 
the  distribution  of  gifts  DhA  in. 19  ;  -sagvibhaga  liberal 
spending  of  alms  D  in. 145,  169;  A  i.is'i,  22<);  in. 53, 
31.1:  V.331  ;  It  19;  Vism  306;  freq.  with  "rata  fond  of 
giving  alms  S  v. 351,  392  ;  A  iv.6  (vigatamalamaccherena 
cetasa),  266  (id.);  -sala  a  hall,  built  for  the  distribution 
of  alms  A  donations  to  the  bhikkhus  &  wanderers 
J  1. 231,  262  :  IV. 402  (.=ix)  ;  v. 383  (id);  -sila  liberal 
disposition  I'vA  89;  usually  as  adana-sila  (adj.)  of 
.miserly  character,  neglecting  the  duty  of  giving  alms 
Sn  244  ;  Pv  II. 8'  (°a  na  saddahanti  danaphalai)  hoti 
paramhi  loke);  PvA  45  (  =  adayaka),  59  (-F  maccharin), 
68  (id.). 

Dinava  [Sk.  danava]  a  kind  of  Asuras  or  Titans,  the 
offspring  of  Danu  J  in. 527,  v. 89;  Miln  153;  Dpvs 
XVII.9S. 


Dlni 


154 


Daruka 


D&ni  (adv.)  [shortened  form  foridani,  q.  v.]  now,  Vln  1.180  ; 
II. 154;  S  1.200,  202;  II. 123;  IV. 202  ;  J  11.246;  Miln 
II,  etc. 

Dapana :  see  vo°. 

Dapita  [Sk.  dSpayita  pp.  of  dSpeti']  given,  sent  PvA  6 ; 
Mhvs  VII. 26. 

Sapeti^  [Sk.  dapayati,  dap  fr.  da  (see  dadati  &  dayati) 
=  deal  out,  spend,  etc.,  cp.  Gr.  Sdirru),  ^airari;  (expen- 
diture), itlTTi/of  (meal) ;  Lat.  daps  (id.),  damnum 
(expense  fr.  *dapnom).  See  also  datta  &  dana]  to 
induce  somebody  to  give,  to  order  to  be  given,  to  deal 
out,  send,  grant,  dedicate  J  vi.485 ;  PvA  46 ;  aor. 
dapesi  J  iv.138  ;  DhA  1.226,  393  (sent) ;  PvA  5  (id.),  31  ; 
fut.  dapessati  J  11. 3  ;  DhA  371.     Cp.  ava". 

Dapeti"  [Sk.  dravayati  &  drapayati,  Caus.  to  drn,  see 
davati]  to  cause  to  run  J  11.404. 

Dama  (nt.)  [Sk.  daman  to  dyati  to  bind  (Gr.  ^I'fij/ii).  *flS, 
as  in  Gr.  liirfta  (rope),  ^laSriita  (diadem),  inroOTjfia 
(sandal)]  a  bond,  fetter,  rope ;  chain,  wreath,  garland 
S  IV.  163  (read  damena  for  damena),  282,  (id.) ;  A  111.393 
(damena  baddho) ;  Sn  28  ( =  vacchakanar)  bandhanat- 
thaya  kata  ganthita  nandhipasayutta  rajjubandhana- 
visesa) ;  Vism  108.  Usually  -°,  viz.  anoja-puppha" 
J  1.9  ;  VI. 227  ;  olambaka"  VvA  32  ;  kusuma"  J  111.394  ; 
gandha"  J  1.178  ;  VvA  173,  198  ;  puppha"  J  1.397 ;  VvA 
198;  mala"  J  11. 104;  rajata"  J  1.50;  111.184;  iv.91  ; 
rattapuppha"  J  111.30  ;  sumana"  J  iv.455. 

Daya*  [Sk.  dava,  conflagration  of  a  forest;  wood  =  easily 
inflammable  substance ;  to  dunoti  (to  burn)  Caus. 
davayati,  cp.  Gr.  Salm  (to  bum)  &  P.  dava']  wood; 
jungle,  forest ;  a  grove  Vin  1. 10  (miga°),  15,  350  ;  11. 138  ; 
S  II. 1 52  (tina°) ;  iv.189  (bahukan(aka  d.=  jungle); 
A  V.337  (tina°) ;  J  111.274  ;  vi.278.  See  also  dava. 
-pala  a  grove  keeper  Vin  1.350  ;  M  1.205. 

Daya°  [Sk.  daya,  to  dadati,  etc.]  a  gift,  donation ;  share, 
fee  D  i.87a!(in  phrase  rajadaya  brahmadeyya,  a  king's 
grant,  cp.  rajadattiya) ;  J  iv.138;  v.363  ;  vi.346.  Cp. 
dayada  &  brahmadeyya. 

Dayaka  [Sk.  dayaka,  da  as  in  dadati  &  dana]  (adj.)  giving, 
bestowing,  distributing,  providing  (usually  -°) ;  (n.)  a 
donor,  benefactor ;  a  munificent  person  M  1.236  sq.  ; 
A  1.26,  161  ;  11.64,  80  ;  III. 32,  336  ;  iv.81  ;  Sn  p.  87  ;  It  19 
(ito~cuta  manussatta  saggarj  gacchanti  dayaka) ;  J  v.  129 
(kanda°);  Pv  i.i'  sq.  ;  i'';  4^;  5";  DA  1.298;  PvA  113 
(  =  dada);  Miln  258  (°anai)  dakkhina) ;  Sdhp  276. — f. 
dayika  Vin  11.2 16  (bhikkha"),  289  (khirassa).'  —  adayaka 
a  stingy  person,  one  who  neglects  almsgiving  (cp.  adana- 
sila)  Pv  1.118;  f.  °ika  Pv  i.g^. 

Dayajja  (nt.)  [Sk.  dayadya ;  see  dayada]  inheritance  Vin 
1.82  ;  D  111.189  ;  A  111.43  ;  J  191  ;  Vism  43  sq. ;  dowry 
J  III. 8.  —  (adj.)  one  who  inherits  Vin  111.66  (pituno  of 
the  father). 

-upasampada,  lit.  the  Upasampada  by  way  of  inh.,  a 
particular  form  of  ordination  conferred  on  Sumana  & 
Sopaka,  both  novices  seven  yrs.  old  DhA  iv.137. 

Dayati  [Sk.  dati  &  dyati  (da)  to  cut,  divide,  etc. ;  cp. 
dayati,  datta,  dana]  to  cut,  mow,  reap,  caus.  dayapeti 
to  cause  to  be  cut  or  mowed  DhA  111.285. 


flyana  (nt.)  [see  dayati]  cutting;  °agga  the  first  of  what 
has  been  cut  (on  fields)  DhA  1.98 ;  °atthat)  for  the 
purpose  of  mowing  DhA  111.285. 


Dayada  [Sk.  dayada  =  daya +a-da  receiving  the  (son's) 
portion,  same  formation  on  ground  of  same  idea  as  Lat. 
heres  =  *ghero-l-R-do  receiver  of  what  is  left :  see  Brug- 
mann.  Album  Kern  p.  29  sq.]  heir  M  i.86=Nd^  199; 
S  1.69,  90;  iv.72  ;  A  III. 72  sq.  ;         II. 181  ;  vi.151;   Kh 


VIII. 5.  Often  fig.  with  kamma°  one  who  inherits  his 
own  deeds  (see  kamma  3  A  6  &  cpds.) :  M  1.390  sq.  ;  A 
V.289  ;  &  as  dhamma°  (spiritual  heir)  opposed  to  amisa" 
(material  h.) :  M  1.12  ;  It  loi  ;  also  as  dhamma"  D  111.84  '■ 
as  brahina°  M  11.84;  ^  111.83.  — adayada  not  having 
an  heir  S  1.69  ;  J  v. 267.     See  dayajja  &  dayadaka. 

Dayadaka  [  =  dayada]  heir  M  11.73;  T^^  '.  781.  1142;  '■ 
°ika  Th  2,  327  (  =  dayaijaraha  ThA  234). 

Dayika  (adj.)  =  dayaka  PvA  157;  Sdhp  211,  229. 

-Dayin  (adj.)  [Sk.  dayin,  of  dadati]  giving,  granting, 
bestowing  PvA  121  (icchif  icchita°),  157  (  =  [kama] 
dada) ;  Sdhp  214  (danagga"). 

Dara  A  Dara  (f.)  [Sk.  dara  (m.)  &  dara  (f.),  more  freq. 
dara  (m.pl.) ;  instr.  sg.  darena  J  IV.7 ;  Pv  iv.i^,  etc.; 
instr.  pi.  darehi  Sn  108  (sehi  d.  asantutfho  not  satisfied 
with  his  own  wife),  loc.  pi.  daresu  Sn  38  (puttesu  daresu 
apekkha),  orig.  "  wives,  womenfolk,"  female  members 
of  the  household  =Gr.  ^oi'Xoc  (slave;  Hesychius : 
Sov\oc  =  i)  oi'rm  ;  cp.  also  origin  of  Germ,  frauenzimmer 
&  E.  womanhood).  Remnants  'of  pi.  use  are  seen  in 
above  passage,  fr.  Sn.]  a  young  woman,  esp.  married 
woman,  wife.  As  dara  f .  at  Nd'  295  (d.  vuccati  bhariya) 
&  It  36  ;  f.  also  dari  maiden,  young  girl  Pv  i.i  1°.  Other- 
wise as  dara  (coll-masc.) :  Dh  345;  J  1.120;  11.248; 
IV. 7;  v. 104,  288;  VvA  299  (°patiggaha).  — putta-dara 
(pi.)  wife  &  children  Sn  108,  262  ;  J  1.262  ;  cp.  saputta- 
dara  with  w.  &  ch.  Pv  IV.3'"  ;  putta  ca  dara  ca  Sn  38, 
123.  Freq.  in  definition  of  slla  No.  3  (kamesu  miccha- 
carin  or  abrahmacariya,  adultery)  as  sakena  darena 
santuftha  A  111.348  ;  v. 138;  Sn  108  (a°) ;  Pv  1'",  etc. 

—  paradara  the  wife  of  another  M  1.404  sq.  ;  Dh  246, 
309;  Sn  396  (parassa  d.)  PvA  261. 

DSraka  [Sk.  daraka,  cp.  dara  &,  Gr.  ioiiXog  (slave)]  a 
(young)  boy,  child,  youngster ;  a  young  man.  f.  darika 
girl  (see  next)  Vin  1.83  ;  J  1.88  (darake  ca  darikayo  boys 
&  girls);  11.127;  VI. 336;  Pv  1.12^  (  =  bala°  PvA  65); 
DhA  1.99  (yasa°=yasa-kulaputta) ;  Miln  8,  9 ;  PvA  176. 

—  Freq.  as  gamadaraka  (pi.)  the  village-boys,  street- 
urchins  J  11.78,  176;  III. 275. 

-tikiccha  the  art  of  infant-healing  D  1.12  (  =  koma- 
rabhacca-vejjakamma  DA  1.98). 

D&rika  (f.)  [Sk.  darika.  see  daraka]  a  young  girl,  daughter 
J  III.  1 72  ;  vi.364  ;  Miln  48,  151  ;  PvA  16  (daughter),  55, 
67,  68. 

Darn  (nt.)  [Sk.  daru,  'derego  (oak)  tree ;  cp.  Av.  dauru 
(wood)  Gr.  Sopv  (spear),  ^pv^  (oak) ;  Lat.  larix  (fr. 
•darix)=larch ;  Oir.  daur  (oak) ;  Goth,  triu,  Ags.  treo  = 
tree.  Also  Sk.  daruija,  Lat.  durus  (hard)  etc.,  Oir.  dru 
strong.  See  also  dabba',  dabbi  &  duma]  wood,  piece 
of  wood ;  pi.  woodwork,  sticks  A  i.i  12  ;  It  71  ;  Dh  80 ; 
J  II.  102  ;  111.54 ;  VI.366  ;  DhA  1.393  ;  PvA  76  (candana"), 
141. 

-kutika  a  hut,  log-house  Vin  III. 43  ;  -kkhandha  pile 
of  wood  PvA  62  ;  -gaha  a  wood  yard  Vin  in. 42  sq. ; 
-ghatika  wooden  pitcher  ThA  286.  -ciriya  "  wood- 
barked  "  Np,  DhA  11.35.  -ja  made  of  wood  S  1.77  ; 
Dh  345  ;  -daha  the  burning  of  wood  S  1.169 ;  -dhitalika 
a  wooden  doll  Vin  111.36,  126;  -patta  a  wooden  bowl 
Vin  II. 112,  143  ;  pattika  one  who  uses  a  wooden  bowl 
for  collecting  alms  D  1.157  ;  in. 22  ;  DA  1.319  ;  paduka 
a  wooden  shoe,  a  clog  Vin  11. 143;  -bhanda  wooden 
articles  Vin  11. 143  (specified),  170,  2H  ;  -man^aiika  a 
wooden  disk  DhA  in.  180;  -maya  wooden  VvA  8, 
DhA  1. 192  ;  -yanta  a  wooden  mill  Vism  595  ;  -sanghata 
(-yana)  "  a  vehicle  constructed  of  wood,"  i.  e.  a  boat 
J  v.  194  :  -samadahana  putting  pieces  of  wood  together 
S  1. 169. 

Daraka  (cp.  daru]  a  log  S  1.202  =Th  i,  62=DhA  in. 460; 
adj.  made  of  wood  Th  2.  390  ("cillaka,  a  wooden  post, 
see  ThA  257). 


Daruna 


155 


Dittha 


DCnma  (adj.)  [Ved.  d^ruqa,  to  dim  ("  strong  as  a  tree  "), 
cp.  Gr.  ipodv  =  iVxupiiv  Hesych ;  Lat.  durus ;  Oir.  dron 
(firm),  Mir.  dur  (hard)  Ags.  trum]  strong,  firm,  severe ; 
haish,  cruel,  pitiless  S  i.ioi  ;  11.226  ;  Sn  244  ;  Dh  139  ; 
J  ni.34  ;  Pv  rv.j*  (  =  ghora  PvA  251) ;  Miln  117  (vata) ; 
PvA  24,  52  (  =  ghora),  159  (sapatha  a  terrible  oath  = 
gbora),  181  (  =  kururin),  221  (°k&raoa) ;  Sdhp  5,  78,  286. 

DUua  [f.  dalati]  see  vi°, 

DUiU  tt  Dalima  [Sk.  d^Uka  the  colocynth  &  dac^ima  the 
pomegranate  tree]  in  °latthi  a  kind  of  creeper ;  equiva- 
lent to  takkari  (?)  Th  2,  297  (dalika)=ThA  226  (dalika 
&  dalima). 

Di]iddiya  (4  daliddiya)  (nt.)  [Sk.  'daridrya]  poverty 
D  in.65,  66  ;  A  111.35 1  sq. ;  J  1.228  ;  Divs  11.60  ;  Sdhp  78. 

Dileti  see  dalati. 

Diva  [Sk.  dSva,  see  dava^  &  daya']  in  °aggi  a  jungle-fire 
J  1. 213  ;  111.140  ;  Visra  470  ;  DhA  1.281. 

Divika  (adj.)  in  piijcja",  a  cert,  rank  in  the  army  (v.  1. 
piijtja-dayika)  D  1.51  =  Miln  331  (DA  1.156:  sahasika- 
mabayodha,  etc.,  with  popular  expl.  of  the  terms  pin^a 
&  davayati). 

Diia  "[Ved.  dasa;  orig.  adj.  meaning  "non-Aryan."  i.  e. 
slave  (cp.  Gr.  jiapfiapoi,  Ger.  sklave  =  slave) ;  Ay.  daha  = 
a  Scythian  tribe.  Also  connected  w.  dasyu  (see  dassu- 
khlla)]  a  slave,  often  comb'*  w.  f.  dksi.  Def.  by 
Bdhgh  as  "  antojato  "  (DA  1.300),  or  as  "  antojata- 
dhanakkita-karamarinita-samar)  dasabyar)  upagatanag 
aflfiataro  "  (ibid.  i68).  —  In  phrase  dasa  ca  kanuna- 
kara  "  slaves  &  labourers  "  Vin  1.243,  272  ;  11.154  i  as 
daso  kammakaro  "  a  slave-servzint "  D  1.60  (cp.  d.- 
kammakara).  —  Vin  1.72,  76  (daso  na  pabbajetabbo : 
the  slave  cannot  become  a  bhikkhu) ;  D  1.72  ;  M  11.68 
(fig.  taijha°) ;  J  1.200,  223;  111.343  (bought  for  7C0 
kahapanas^,  347;  Pug  56;  PvA  112. 

-kammakara  (porisa)  a  slave-servant,  an  unpaid 
labourer,  a  serf  Vin  1.240;  A  1206;  D  111.189;  DhA 
rv.i  ;  -gana  a  troop  of  slaves  Pv  iv.i** ;  -purisa  a  servant 
J  1.385;  -porisa  a  servant,  .slave  Sn  769  (cp.  Nd'  11, 
where  4  kinds  of  d.  are  mentioned) ;  -lakkhana  fortune- 
telling  from  (the  condition  of)  slaves  D  1.9. 

Diiaka  =  dasa  in  °putta  a  slave,  of  the  sons  of  the  slaves, 
mentioned  as  one  of  the  sipp'  ayatanas  at  D  1.51!* 
(expl.  by  Bdhgh  as  balavasineha-gharadasa-yodha 
DA  1.157).  — sadasaka  with  slaves,  followed  by  slaves 
Vv  32*. — f.  dastka  a  female  slave  (=dasi)  M  1.126; 
J  VI. 554- 

Diiabyati  (f.)=dasavya  Sdhp  498. 

Disavya  ft  Daaabya  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  dasya]  the  condition  of 

a  stave,  slavery,  serfdom  D  1.73  ;  M  1.275  W  '•  J  1-226 ; 
DA  1.168  (b),  213  ;  DhA  111.35  ;  PvA  112,  152. 

Dilitta  (nt.)  [Sk.  dasitva]  the  status  of  a  (female)  slave 
Miln  158. 

DIsima  a  species  of  tree  J  vi.536. 

DJbiy&  =  dasika,  a  female  slave  J  vi.554. 

Dill  (f.)  [Sk.  dasi,  cp.  dasa.  Nom.  pi.  dasso  for  dasiyo 
J  IV. 53  ;  in  cpds.  dasi°]  a  female  servant,  a  handmaiden, 
a  slave-girl  Vin  1.217,  269,  291;  11.10  (kula°),  78  = 
111.161  ;  M  1.125  ;  11-62  (iiati°);  Pv  11. 3''  (ghara") ;  PvA 
46,  61,  65. — Cp.  kumbha". 

-ga^  A  troop  of  slave-girls  J  11.127  ;  -dasa  (pi.)  maid- 
&  man-servants  DhA  1.187;  frcq-  to  cpd.  d-d-patigga- 
hatia  slave-trading  D  i.5«r(cp.  DA  1.^8) ;  -putta  the  son 
of  a  slave,  an  abusive  term  (gharadasiya  va  putto 
Dh  1.257 ;  cp.  Sk.  dasisuta)  D  1.93  (°vada) ;  -bhoga  the 
possessions  of  a  slave  Vin  111.136. 


Daha  see  daha. 

Di°  secondary  base  of  numeral  "  2,"  contracted  fr.  dvi : 
see  under  dvi  B  1.4. 

Dikkhita  [Sk.  dik^ita  "  havmg  commenced  the  prepara- 
tory rites  for  sacrifice "]  initiated,  consecrated,  cira° 
initiated  long  since  S  1.226  =  ]  v.  138,  139  (where  dak- 
khita,  q.  v.  ;  Com.  cira-pabbajita). 

Di^coha  (f.)  [=jiguccha;  Sk.  jugupsa]  disgust  DhsA  210 

(asuci°). 

Dighaccha  (f.)  [  =  jighaccha]  hunger  A  11. 117. 

Dighafifia  (adj.)  [for  jighaiina  =  Sk.  jaghanya  fr.  jangha] 
inferior,  low.  last,  hindmost  (i.  e.  westward)  J  v.24 
(where  the  Com.  seems  to  imply  a  reading  jighaccha^ 
with  meaning  of  1st  sg.  pot.  intens.  of  ghas,  but  d.  is 
evidently  the  right  reading),  402,  403  ("rattir;  at  the 
end  of  the  night). 

Dicctaati  [Sk.  ditsati,  Desid.  fr.  dadati,  base  4,  q.  v.]  to 
vrish  to  give,  to  be  desirous  of  giving  S  1.18,  20  (dicchare 
3rd  pi.) ;  J  iv.64. 

Di)a  see  under  dvi  B  1.4. 

Dittha'   [Sk.  dfsta,  pp.  of  *dassati]   I.  seen;  a"  not  seen 
D  1.222  (a°-favedita  asacchikata) ;  M  1.3  sq.  (ditthai) 
ditthato  sanjanati) ;  Sn  147  (dittha  va  ye  va  addiftha), 
995   (na  me  dittho  ito  pubbe  na  ssuto  .   .  .  Sattha) ; 
J  11.154  ;  111-278  ;  Pv  1.2^  (samai)  d.  =seen  by  yourself) ; 
3^  (id.).  —  nt.  ditthar)  a  vision  J  111. 4 16.  —  Since  sight 
is  the  principal  sense  of  perception  as  well  as  of  apper- 
ception (cp.  cakkhu),  that  which  is  seen  is  the  chief 
representation  of  any  sense-impression,  &  dif^ha  comb*" 
with  suta  (heard)  and  muta  (sensed  by  means  of  smell, 
taste  &  touch),  to  which  viiiitata  (apperceived  by  the 
mind)  is  often  joined,  gives  a  complete  analysis  of  that 
which  comprises  all  means  of  cognition  &  recognition. 
Thus   dittha -f  suta    stands   collectively  for   the  whole 
series  Sn  778,  812,  897,    1079;   Pv  iv.i';  dittha  suta 
muta   (see  Nd*  298  for  detail  &   cp.   ditthiya  sutiya 
iianena)  Sn  790,  901,  914.  1082,  1086.  1122  (na  tuyhai) 
adifthar)    asutarj    amutat)    kiflcanai)    atthi  =  you    are 
omniscient) ;   d.  suta  muta  vinitata  in  the  same  sense 
as  Sn   1122  in  "  yarj  sadevakassa  lokassa  d.  s.  m.  v. 
sabbai)    tar)    Tathagatena    abhisambuddhar)  "    of    the 
cognitive  powers  of  the  Tathagata  D  iii.i34  =  Nd^  276  = 
It  121;  D  111.232;  Sn  1086,  1 122.  —  2.  known,  under- 
stood M   1.486;   Sn    761;  dittha  pafiha  a  problem   ot 
qvTestion  solved  J  vi.532.     See  also  conclusion  of  No.  1. 
—  3.  (adj.)  visible,  determined  by  sight,  in  conn,  with 
dhamma  meaning  the  visible  order  of  things,  the  world 
of  sensation,  this  world  (opp.  samparayika  dhamma  the 
state  after  death,  the  beyond).     Usually  in  cpds.  (-°)  : 
of    this    world,    in    this   world.  —  ditthadhamma    Vin 
II. 188  ;  D  III. 222  sq.  ;  A  1.249  ;  11. 61  ;  Nd*  297  (  =  flata- 
dhamma) ;  DA  1.278  ;  Sdhp  470.  —  °ahninibbuta  attained 
toNibbanain  this  birth  A  1.142  ;  Sn  1087  (see  Nibbana) ; 
°nibbana  earthly  N.  D  1.36;  DA   1.121  ;   °sukhaviHdra 
{&  °in)  happy  condition  (or  faring  well)  in  this  world 
Vin  II. 188  ;  M  1.40,  331,  459  ;  S  11.239  ;  Dhs  577,  1283  ; 
DhsA  296 ;  °vedaniya  to  be  perceived  in  this  condition 
A  1.249,  251  ;  PvA  145.  — Freq.  in  loc.  ditthe  dhamme 
(in  this  world)  It   17  (attha,  opp.  samparayika  attha), 
or  ditthe  va  dhamme  (already  or  even  in  the  present 
existence)  D  1.156,  167.  177,  196;  111.108;  M  1.341  sq., 
485  ;  11.94,  'o.?  :  A  11155.  167  ;  111-429  :  Sn  141,  343,  1053  ; 
It   22,  23,  etc.  —  In   the  same  sense  ditthadhammika 
(adj.)  belonging  or  referring  to  this  world  or  the  present 
existence,  always  contrasted  with  samparayika  belong- 
ing to  a  future  state:   Vin   1.179;   111.21;   D   111.130; 
A  1.47,  98;  Nd*  26;  It  16;  VvA  149;  PvA  131,  etc. 

-inugati  imitation  of  what  one  sees,  emulation,  com- 
petition S  11.203;  M  1.16;  A  1.126;  III. 108,  251,  422; 


Dittha 


156 


Dinna 


P"8  33  ;  DhA  IV. 39  ;  -ayikamma  making  visible  or  clear, 
open  statement,  confession  Vin  v.183,  187  sq. ;  -kala  the 
time  of  seeing  (anybody),  opportunity  VvA  120 ; 
-ppatta  one  who  has  obtained  (Nibbana)  in  this  world 
Nett  190  ;  -pada  (pi.)  visible  signs  or  characteristics 
A  IV.  103  ;  -mangalika  (adj.)  of  puccha,  a  question  asked 
in  order  to  compare  (one's  views)  on  things  seen,  that  is 
on  ordinary  worldly  matters,  with  views  held  by  others 
fondofprying  J  IV.390  ;as  '^ika  (f.)  Np  at  J  iv.376  sq.= 
SnAiSjsq.     -sapsandana  Nd'447  =  I)hsA55. 

Oittba'  [Sk.  dvi^ta,  pp.  of  dve?ti  dvij  to  hate]  (n.)  an 
enemy  J  1.280  ;  cp.  Sk.  dvijat.  —  (adj.)  poisoned,  in 
ditthagatena  sallena  with  a  p.  arrow  S  11.230  ;  mis- 
reading for  diddh-agadena,  q.  v.  The  Cy.  has  diddha- 
gatena  with  v.  I.  dibba-gadena. 

Dittbaka  (adj.)  [=dittha']  seen,  visible,  apparent  DhA 
11.53,  90- 

Oitibi  (indecl.)  [Sk.  dj^tya,  instr.  o£  ditfhi]  exclamation 
of  joy,  hurrah  1  D  iii.73  ;  J  1.362. 

Ditthi  (f.)  [Sk.  dr?ti ;  cp.  dassana]  view,  belief,  dogma, 
theory,  speculation,  esp.  false  theory,  groundless  or 
unfounded  opinion.  —  (a)  The  latter  is  rejected  by 
the  Buddha  as  papa°  (A  iv.172)  and  papika  d,  (opp. 
bhaddika  :  A  v.2i2  sq. ;  It  26) :  Vin  1.98,  323  ;  Dh  164  ; 
Pv  IV.3'*  ;  whcSreas  the  right,  the  true,  the  best  doctrme 
is  as  samma  d.  the  first  condition  to  be  complied  with 
by  anyone  entering  the  Path.  As  such  the  samma  d. 
is  opposed  to  miccha  d.  wrong  views  or  heresy  (see  b). 
Equivalent  with  miccha  d.  is  kudiffhi  (late)  Davs 
11.58.  —  (b)  Characterized  more  especially  as :  (o) 
sanuna  dif^i  right  doctrine,  right  philosophy  Vin -i.  10  ; 
S  11.17  ;  ^'-'i.  '4.  3°  sq.,  458  sq.,  M  1.315  ;  n.12,  29,  87; 
111.72  ;  Nd^  485  ;  Vbh  104s  q.  See  magga.  —  ujuka  d. 
S  V.143,  165;  ujugaU  d.  M  1.46  sq.  —  (/3)  miccha  d. 
wrong  theory,  false  doctrine  S  1. 145;  11.153  (caused  by 
avijja) ;  M  iii.7'f :  Dh  167,  316;  Nd'  271"""'' ;  Vbh  361. 
389.  —  The  foil,  theories  are  to  be  considered  as  varieties 
of  miccha  d.,  viz.  (in  limited  enum")  akiriyavada  S 
III. 208 :  IV. 349 ;  aiiilat]  afiiiena  S  111.211  ;  antaggahika 
A  1.154;  11-240;  III. 130;  antdnantika  D  1.22  sq.  S 
111.214,  258  sq.  :assada°  Aili,447;ahetukavadaSiii.2io  ; 
ucchedavada  D  1.34,  S  11.20;  111.99;    no  sq. ;  bhava° 

5  111.93;  M  i-^S  ;  A  1.83;  sakkaya°  A  111.438;  v. 144; 
Sn  231  (cp.  KhA  188);  Nd-  271'"''  (20  fold,  as  ditthi- 
lepa) ;  sassatavada  D  1.13;  S  11.20;  ni.98,  2-13  sq., 
258  sq.  —  (c)  Various  theories  &  doctrines  are  men- 
tioned &  discussed  at:  Vin  1.115;  S  1.133;  11. 61  sq., 
75sq.,  222  ;iii.2i5sq.,  258  sq.  ;  iv.286  ;  v.448  (=01.31); 
i>  111.13  sq.,  45,  246.  267;  M  1.40;  A  1.32;  11.252  sq.  ; 
III. 132,  289,  349;  Th  2,  184,  Ps  1.135  sq.  ;  Pug  22; 
Dhs  392,  1003  (cp.  Dhs.  trsl.  pp.  257  sq.,  293,  325) ; 
Vbh  145,  245,  341,  393  sq.  ;  Sdhp  13,  333.  —  (d)  Mis- 
cellaneous: 4  ditthiyo  at  Vbh  376;  also  at  Vism  511 
(sakkaya",  uccheda°,  sassata",  akiriya") ;  5  \'bh  378 ; 

6  at  M  1.8 ;  Vbh  382  ;  7  at  Vbh  383 ;  20  see  under  sak- 
kaya° ;  62  under  diuhigata.  —  In  series  dif^i  khanti 
ruci  laddhi  characterizing  "  ditthadhamma "  at  Nd' 
299  &  passim.  Difthiya  sutiya  flaijena  in  def.  of  a 
theory  of  cognition  at  Nd'  300  as  complementing  ta^iha  . 
see  taijha  B  3.  Coupled  with  vaca  &  citta  in  formula 
(tag)  vacar)  appahaya  cittag  appahaya  ditfhir)  appa- 
tinissajjitva  .  .  .  (nikkhitto  evag  niraye)  at  S  iv.3i9  = 
D  III. 13,  15  ;  comW  with  (&  opposed  to)  sila  (as  papaka 
&  bhaddaka)  at  It  26,  27.  —  dittbig  asevati  to  hold  a 
view  M  1.323 ;  °g  bhindati  to  give  up  a  view  J  1.273  ; 
Davs  11.58 

-4nugati  a  sign  of  speculation  Vin  11.108;  S  11.203; 
Pug  33.  -inusaya  inclination  to  speculation  D  iir.254, 
282  ;  S  V.60  ;  A  IV. 9 ;  -asava  the  intoxicant  of  specu- 
lation, the  3rd  of  four  asava,  viz.  kama°,  bhava°,  d.", 
avijja"  Vin  111.5  ;  Nd'  134 ;  Dhs  1099,  ;448 ;  Vbh  273  ; 
cp.  °ogha;  -upadana  taking  up  or  adhering  to  false 
doctrines,  the  2nd  of  the  four  upadanani  or  attachments, 


viz.  kama°,  d.°,  silabbata",  attavada"  D  ni.230  ;  Dhs 
1215.  1536;  -ogha  the  flood  of  ^alsc  doctrine,  in  set  of 
four  ogha's  as  under  "asava  D  111.230,  276;  Nd'  178; 
-kantara  the  wilderness  of  groundless  speculation  Dhs 
381,    IC03,   1099,  etc.;  see  °gata ;  -ganthi  the  web  or 
tangle  of  sophisticism  VvA  297  ;  cp.  "sanghata ;  -gata 
(nt.)  "  resorting  to  views,"  theory,  groundless  opinion, 
false  doctrine,  often  followed  by  series  of  characterizing 
epithets :   d.-gahana,   "kantara,   "visuka.   "vipphandita. 
"sanuojana,  e.  g.  M  1.8;  Nd'  271""'.     Of  these  sophis- 
tical speculations  2  are  mentioned  at  It  43,  Ps  1. 129; 
6  at  Ps  1.130  ;  62  (the  usual  number,  expressing  "  great 
and  small  "  sets.  cp.  dvi  A  11.)  at  D  1.12-39  (in  detail) ; 
S  IV.286;  Ps  1.130;  Nd'  271™'';  Nett  96,   112,   160. — 
Vin  1.49  ;  D  1.162.  224,  226  ;  S  1.135,  142  ;  11.230  ;  iix.109. 
J58  sq.   (anekavihitani) ;  iv.286  (id.);  M  1.8.   176.  256 
Sq.  (papaka),  326  (id.),  426  sq.  ;  A  iv.68 ;  v. 72  sq.,  194 
(papaka)  ;  Sn  649.  834,  913  ;  Pug  15  ;  Dhs  277,  339,  392. 
505 ;  Visra  454.  —  adj.  ''gatika  adhering  to  (false)  doc- 
trine Dpvs  VI. 25  ;  -gahana  the  thicket  of  speculation 
Dhs  381,   1003;  see  "gata;  -jala  the  net  of  sophistry 
D   1.46;   DA   1.129;    -f^ana   a  tenet    of    speculative 
philosophy  D  1.16  ;  M  1.136;  A  v.198  ;  Ps  1.138  (eight) ; 
Miln  332  ;  DA  1.107  ;  -nijjhanakkhanti  forbearance  with 
wrong  views  S  11.1 15  ;  iv.139 ;  A  1.189  sq. ;  11.191  ;  Nd' 
151  ;  -nipata  a  glance  VvA  279 ;  -nissaya  the  foundation 
of  speculation  M  1.137  '■  ^  i'i37  sq. ;  -pakkha  the  side 
or  party  of  sophists  Nett  53,  88,   160  ;  -pafilabha  the 
attainment  of  speculation  M  111.46:  -pativedha  =  prec. 
D  III. 253  ;  -patta  one  who  has  formed  (a  right  or  wrong) 
view  D  111. 105,  254  ;  M  1.439 ;  A  1.74  ;  118.  iv.io  ;  v. 23  ; 
-paramasa    perversion   by   false    doctrine   Dhs    1 498 ; 
-mandala  the  circle  of  speculative  dogmatics  DhsA  109  ; 
-vipatti  failure  in  theory,  the  3rd  of  the  four  vipattiyo 
viz.  sila",  acara",  d.°.  Sjiva" ;  opp.  "sampada  Vin  v. 98 ; 
D  111.213  ;  A  1.95,  268  :  Pug  21  ;  Dhs  1362  ;  Vbh  361  ; 
-vipallasa  contortion  of  views  A  11.52  ;  -visagyoga  dis- 
connection with  false  doctrine  D  ni.230,  276  ;  -visuddhi 
beauty  of  right  theory  A  1.95  ;  M  1.147  sq.  ;  D  111.214, 
288  ;  -visuka  (nt.)  tne  discord  or  disunion  (lit.  the  going 
into  parties)  of  theories,  the  (?)  puppet-show  of  opinion 
M  1.8,  486  ;  Sn  55  (  =  dvasatthi  diubigatani),  K  6^1.44  ; 
Vv  84";  Pv  iv.i'' ;  Nd'301  (  =  visatl-vattukasakkaya- 
difthi)  ;  cp.  Nd'  25  (attanuditjhi) ;  Dhs  381  (cp.  Dhs.  trsl. 
p.  lo  I ),  1003,  1099.     See  also  "gata ;  -vyasana  failing  or 
misfortune  in  theory  (H-sila",  in  character)  D  111.235; 
Nd'  304  ;  -sagyojana  the  fetter  or  bond  of  empty  specula- 
tion (cp.  "anusaya)  D  111.254 ;  A  iv.7  sq. ;  -sanghata  the 
weft  or  tangle  of  wrong  views  (cp.  "gaothi)  Nd'  343  ; 
Nd'  503  ;  -samudaya  the  origin  of  wrong  views  A  iv.68  ; 
-sampada  success  in   tneory,   blessing  of  right  views, 
attainment  of  truth  D  111.213,  235   (opp.  "vipatti),  S 
V.30  sq.  ;  A  1.95,  269;  111.438;  IV. 238;  Pug  25;  Dhs 
1364  ;  VvA  297  ;  -sampanna  endowed  with  right  views 
S  11.43.  58.  80  ;  y.ii  ;  A  111.438  sq. ;  iv.394  ;  Vbh  366 ; 
Dialogues  iii.206,  n.  10  ;  -sarin  (adj.)  following  wrong 
views  Sn  91 1. 

Oittbika  (adj.)  (-")  seeing,  one  who  regards ;  one  who  has 
a  view  M  111.24  (agamana"  one  who  views  the  arrival, 
i.  e.  of  guests) ;  S  11.168  sq.  (samma"  &  miccha"  holding 
right  &  wrong  theories) ;  D  111.96  (vitimissa").  See 
a&Sa".  miccha".  samma". 

Ditttuta  (f)  [fr.  ditthi]  the  fact  of  having  a  (straight- 
forward) view  (uju")  Miln  257. 

IM^hin  (adj.-n.)  one  who  has  a  view,  or  theory,  a 
follower  of  such  4  such  a  doctrine  Ud  67  (evag°-l-  evag 
vidin). 

Dima  [Sk.  dirtia.  pp.  oi  dr,  dfijati,  see  darl]  broken,  split , 
undone,  torn,  as  neg.  adinna  unbroken  D  1.115  (s"  read 
for  adina-khattiya-kula ;  V.  1.  BB.  abhinna") ;  S  v.74 
(so  read  for  adina-m&naso,  v.  1.  BB.  adina  &  SS  adina"). 
Cp.  also  adinna. 


Ditta 


157 


Divilla 


Ditta^  [Sk.  dipta,  dip;  cp.  dipa]  blazing.  Divs  v.32. 
Usually  in  cpd.  Sditta. 

Oitta'  [Sk.  drpta;  cp.-dappa]  proud,  arrogant,  insolent; 
wanton  Th  i,  198;  J  11.432;  111.256  =  485;  v.17,  232; 
VI.90,  114. 

DiddtUk  [Sk.  digdha  to  dill,  see  deha]  smeared  J  v. 425 
sq.  ;  esp.  smeared  with  poison,  poisoned  J  iv.435 
(sara,  a  poisoned  arrow) ;  perhaps  to  be  read  at  It 
68  lor  duttha  (scil.  sara)  and  at  S  11.230  for  dittba. 
Cp.  san°. 

Dina  (nt.)  [Sk.  dina ;  Lat.  nun-dinae  (*noven-dinora) ; 
Oir.  denus  ;  Goth,  sin-teins  ;  cp.  divasa]  day  Sdhp  239. 
-duddinaij  darkness  Davs  v. 50  (d.  sudinai)  ahosi,  cp. 
'■49<  5>) :  <^s°  '^  ^'  duddini  Vin  1.3. 

Dindibha  [cp.  Sk.  titt'bha  ?]  a  kind  of  bird  J  vi.538. 

Dindima  (nt.)  [Sk.  dip^ima,  cp.  dundubhi]  a  musical 
instrument,  a  small  drum  J  vi.58o ;  Bu  1.32.  See  also 
deo^im^' 

Dinna  [Sk.  dinna,  pp.  of  dadati]  given,  granted,  presented 
etc.,  in  all  meanings  of  dadati  q.  v. ;  esp.  of  giving  alms 
Pv  IV.3"  (  =  mahadana  PvA  253)  &  in  phrase  adinn'- 
adana  taking  what  is  not  given,  i.  e.  stealing,  adj. 
adinnadayin  stealing,  refraining  from  which  constitutes 
the  2nd  slla  (see  under  sila).  —  dinna  :  D  i.55a<(n'  attlii 
dinnar),  the  heretic  view  of  the  uselcssness  of  alms- 
giving);  J  1.291  ;  11.128;  Sn  igi,  227,  240;  Dh  35O  ; 
PvA  68  (given  in  marriage).  Used  as  finite  tense  freq., 
e.  g.  J  1.151.  152;  VI. 366.  — adinna  :  M  1.39,  404; 
Sn  119  (thoyya  adinnar)  adiyati),  156,  395.  4C0,  633; 
PvA  33  etc. 

-adayin  taking  (only)  what  is  given  D  1.4 ;  DA  1.72  ; 
-dana  almsgiving  J  ni.52  ;  DliA  1.396;  -dayin  giving 
alms,  liberal,  munificent  D  111.191. 

Dinnaka  an  adopted  son,  in  enum"  of  four  kinds  of  sons 
(atraja,  khettaja,  antevasika,  d.)  Nd'  448;  J  M35 
(=posavanatthaya  dinna). 

Dippati  [Sk.  dipyate,  see  jndcr  dipa'  &  cp.  jotatij  to  shine, 
to  shine  forth,  to  be  illustrious  Vin  11.285.     Cp.  pa°. 

Dibba  (adj.)  [Ved.  divya  — P.  divya  iu  verse  (q.  v.),  Gr. 
i^ot  (*ciFioi:),  Lat.  dius  (•divios)  -divine.  Cp.  deva]. 
of  the  next  world,  divine,  heavenly,  celestial,  superb, 
magnificent,  fit  for  exalted  beings  higher  than  man 
(devas,  heroes,  manes  etc.),  superhuman,  opp.  manusaka 
human.  Freq.  qualifying  the  foil.  "  summa  bona  "  : 
cakkhu  the  deva-eye,  i.  c.  the  faculty  of  clairvoyance, 
attr.  in  a  marked  degree  to  the  Buddha  &  other  perfect 
beings  (see  cakkhumant)  D  1.82,  1O2  ;  11.20  (yena  sudaij 
samanta  yojanar)  pa.ssati  diva  c'  eva  rattin  ca) ;  111.2 19  ; 
S  1.196;  11.55  sq.  ;  M  11.21  ;  It  52  ;  Th  2,  70  ;  Ps  i.i  14  , 
11.175  :  Vism  434  :  Sdhp  482  ;  PvA  5  (of  Moggallana) ; 
Tikp  278  ;  Dukp  54.  sota  the  d.  car,  matching  the  d.  eye 
D  1-79.  154  ;  J  V.456  ;  also  assotadhatu  A  1.255  ;  M  "'9  : 
D  111.38,  281  ;  Visra  430.  rupa  D  1.153.  Ayu,  vanna 
etc.  (see  dasa  thanani)  A  1.115  ;  i"-33  :  iv.242  ;  PvA  9, 
89.  kama  Sn  301  ;  Dh  187  ;  It  94  ;  also  as  kamaguna 
A  v. 273.  Of  food,  drink,  dress  &  other  commodities: 
A  1. 182  ;  J  1.50,  2U2  ;  iii.i8g  ;  PvA  23,  50,  70,  76  etc.  — 
Def.  as  devaloke  sambhfita  DA  1.120;  divibhavatta 
dibba  KhA  227;  divibhavaij  devattabhava-pariya- 
panna  PvA  14.  —  See  further  e.  g.  S  1.105  ;  D  in.  146 ; 
Sn  176,  641  ;  Dh  236,  417;  Pug  60;  Vism  407  (def"), 

4^3- 

-osadha  magical  drugs  Miln  283  ;  -kama  (pi.)  heavenly 
joys  (see  above)  J  1.13S  (opp.  manusaka);  -cakkhuka 
endowed  with  the  superhuman  eye  S  11.156;  A  1.23, 
25  ;  -pannakara  (dasavidha") "  the  (tenfold)  heavenly 
gift  (viz.  ayu,  vapna  etc. :  see  tbana)  DhA  111.292  ; 
-bhava  divine  condition  or  state  PvA  i  lu  ;  -yoga  union 


with  the  gods  S  1.60  ;  -vihara  supreme  condition  of  heart 
Miln  225  ;  -sampatti  heavenly  bliss  J  IV.3  ;  DhA  111.292  ; 
PvA  16,  30. 

Dibbati  [Sk.  divyati,  pp.  dyuta  see  juta]  to  sport,  to  amuse 
oneself  VvA  18  (in  expl.  of  devi) ;  to  play  at  dice  M 
11.106  (akkhehi). 

Dirasafiflu  (adj.)  [Sk.  dara-sagjiia  .'  See  Kern,  Toev. 
p.  118]  one  who  has  little  common-sense  J  vi.206,  207, 
213.  214.  Com.  expl'  wrongly  on  p.  209  with  "one 
who  possesses  two  tongues  "  (of  Agni),  but  has  equiva- 
lent nippaiifia  on  p.  217  (text  214  :  appapanfia-t- ). 

Diva  [Sk.  diva  (nt.),  weak  beise  diu  (div)  of  strong  form 
die  (see  deva)  to  *de|euO  to  shine ;  cp.  Sk.  dyo  heaven, 
diva  adv.  by  day ;  Lat.  biduum  (bi-divom)  two  days] 
(a)  heaven  J  iv.134  ("r)  aga) ;  v. 123  (°r)  patta) ;  PvA 
74  (°r)  gata).  —  (b)  day  Sn  507  (rattindivai)  night  & 
day) ;  VvA  247  (rattindiva  one  night  &  one  day,  i.  e.  24 
hrs.) ;  DhA  11. 8  (diva-divassa  so  early  in  the  day). 
Also  in  divai)-kara,  daymaker,  ■-■-  sun,  VvA  307  ;  usually 
as  divakara  (q.  v.).     Cp.  devasika ;  see  also  ajja. 

-santatta  heated  for  a  whole  day  J  iv.  1 1 8  (cp.  divasa"). 

Divasa  (m  ;  nt.  only  in  expression  satta  divasani  7  days  or 
a  week  J  iv.139 ;  Miln  15)  [Sk.  divasa ;  see  diva]  a  day 
A  1.206  ("ri  atinameti) ;  J  in. 52  (uposatha°) ;  PvA  31 
(yava  sattadivasa  a  week  long),  74  (sattamo  divaso). 
I  'siidlly  in  oblique  cases  adverbially,  viz.  ace.  divasai] 
(during)  one  day,  for  one  day,  one  day  long  A  ill.  304  = 
1^.317;  J  1.279;  II. 2  ;  DhA  HI. 173  (tai)  d.  that  day); 
eka"  one  day  J  1.58;  in. 26;  I'vA  ^j,  67,  —  gen.  diva- 
sassa  (day)  by  day  S  11.95  (rattiya  ca  d.  ca) ;  J  v.  162  ; 
DA  1. 133.  —  instr.  divasa  day  by  day  J  iv.310;  diva- 
sena  (eka°)  on  the  same  day  J  1.59  ;  sudivasena  on  a 
lucky  day  J  iv.210.  —  loc.  divase  on  a  day:  eka" 
J  III. 391  ;  jata"  on  his  birth-day  J  111.391;  iv.138; 
dutiya"  the  next  day  PvA  12,  13,  17,  31,  80  etc. ;  puna° 
id.  J  1.278 ;  PvA  19,  38 :  sattame  d.  on  the  7th  day  Sn 
983  ;  Miln  15  ;  PvA  6  ;  ussava°  on  the  festive  d.  VvA 
109;  apara"  on  another  day  PvA  81.  Also  repeated 
divase  divase  day  after  day,  every  day  J  1.87  ;  PvA  3.  — 
abl.  divasato  from  the  day  (-°)  J  1.50  ;  DA  1.140. 

-kara  the  "  day-maker."  i.  e.  the  sun  (cp.  divSkara) 
VvA  i6g.  27!  ;  -bhaga  the  day-part  (opp.  ratti"  the 
night-part),  day-time  Miln  18  (°ena) ;  PvA  152  (°r)), 
206  (°e--div3);  -santatta  heated  the  livelong  day  S 
1. 169;  M  1.453;  A  IV. 70,  cp.  Vin  1.225;  Miln  325;  cp. 
diva". 

Diva  (adv.)  [Ved.  diva,  cp.  diva]  by  day  S  1.183  ;  M  i-'25  ; 
Dh  387;  DA  1.251  ;  PvA  43,  142,  206  ( ^divasa-bhage). 
Often  comb""  &  contrasted  with  rattit)  (or  ratto)  by 
night ;  e.  g.  divarattig  by  day  &  by  night  S  1.47 ;  diva 
c'  eva  rattin  ca  D  11.20;  rattiin  pi  diva  pi  J  n.133; 
diva  ca  ratto  ca  S  1.33  ;  Sn  223  ;  Dh  296 ;  Vv  31* ;  VvA 
128.  — divatarag  (compar.  adv.)  later  on  in  the  day 
M  1. 125;  J  III. 48.  498.  — atidiva  too  late  S  1.200; 
A  iii.i  17. 

-kara  ( =  divar)  kara)  the  day-maker,  the  sun  ThA 
■jci  (  ■  Ap.  v.  16) ;  Pv.\  155  ;  -divassa  (adv.)  early  in  the 
day.  at  suniise,  at  an  early  hour  Vin  11.190;  S  1.89,  91, 
97  ;  A  V.185  ;  M  n.ioo,  112;  J  11. i  ;  vi.31  ;  DhA  11. 8  ; 
VvA  239,  242  ;  -vihara  the  day-rest,  i.  e.  rest  during  the 
heat  of  the  day  Vin  1.28,  S  1.129,  132,  146,  i93=Th  i, 
1241  ;  Sn  679;  -saiifia  consciousness  by  day,  daily  c. 
D  111.223  =  A  11.45  ;  -seyya  =°vihara  D  i.i  12. 

Divi°  an  abstraction  fr.  divya  constructed  for  etym. 
expl"  of  dibba  as  divi-bhava  (°bhava)  of  divine  exist- 
ence or  character,  a  divine  being,  in  "  divi-bhav5ni 
divyani  ettha  atthi  ti  divya  "  SnA  2  19;  "  divi-bhavatta 
dibba  ti  "  KhA  227 ;  "  divibhavag  devattabhSvapari- 
yapanno  ti  dibbo  "  PvA  14. 

Divilla  a  musical  instrument  Dpvs  xvi.14. 


Divya 


158 


Dipa 


Divya  [Sk.  divya ;  the  verse-foira  for  the  prose-form 
dibba  (q.  v.)]  (adj.)  divine  Sn  153  (cp.  SnA  219  under 
divi°),  524  (+  manusaka) ;  J  vi.172.  —  (nt.)  the  divinity, 
a  divine  being  (  =devata)  J  vi.150  ;  SnA  219. 

Disa  [Sk.  dvisant  &  dvi§a  (-°) ;  dvesti  &  dvisati  to 
hate;  cp.  Gr.  luvvi;  (corynthic  Sfeivia,  horn.  H^fi/iti') 
fearful;  Lat.  dirus  =  E.  dire]  an  enemy  Dh  42,  162; 
J  iH-357;  IV.217;  V.453  ;  Th  1.874-6;  cp.  Pss.  Breth., 
323.  ».  I. 

Disata'  (f)  [Sk.  disata.  see  disa]  direction,  quarter,  region, 
part  of  the  world  J  iv.359  ;  Pv  11.9^'  (kig  disatar)  gato 
"  where  in  the  world  has  he  gone  ?") ;  Vv  11.3^  (sadisata 
the  circle  of  the  6  directions,  cp.  VvA  102). 

Disata^  (f.)  [Sk.  *dvisata,  see  disa]  state  of  being  an 
enemy,  a  host  of  enemies  J  iv.295  ( =  disasamuha,  v.  1. 
as  gloss :  verasamoha). 

Disati  [Ved.  disati,  *deik  to  show,  point  towards ;  cp.  Gr. 
ffitvufit  {limi  =diiaL),  Lat.  dico  (indico,  index  =  pointer, 
judex),  Goth.  gateihan=Ger.  zeigen,  Ags.  taecan  =  E. 
token]  to  point,  show ;  to  grant,  bestow  etc.  Usually 
in  comb"  with  pref.  a,  or  in  Caus.  deseti  (q.  v.).  As 
simplex  only  at  S  1.2 17  (varag  disa  to  be  read  for  disai)  ; 
cp.  Sk.  adi^at).     See  also  upa°. 

Disa  (f)  [Ved.  dis  &  disa,  to  disati  "  pointing  out,"  point ; 
cp.  Gr.  ^iVi)  =  disa]  point  of  the  compass,  region, 
quarter,  direction,  bearings.  The  4  principal  points 
usualy  enum"*  are  puratthima  (E)  pacchima  (W)  dak- 
khina    (S)    uttara    (N),    in   changing    order.     Thus    at 

5  i.ioi,  145;  II. 103;  111.84 ;  IV.  185,  296;  Nd^  302  ; 
Pv  II. 12'  (caturo  d.);  PvA  52  (catusu  disasu  mrayo 
catuhi  dvarehi  yutto),  and  passim.  —  To  these  are  often 
added  the  two  locations  '*  above  &  below  "  as  uparima 

6  hetthima  disa  (also  as  uddhag  adho  S  111.124  e.  g.  ; 
also  called  patidisa  D  111.176),  making  in  all  6  direc- 
tions :  D  III.  1 88  sq.  As  a  rule,  however,  the  circle  is 
completed  by  the  4  anudisa  (intermediate  points  ;  some- 
times as  vidisa  :  S  1.224  '•  iii-239  ;  D  in.  176  etc.),  making 
a  round  of  10  (dasa  disa)  to  denote  completeness,  wide 
range  &  all  pervading  comprehensiveness  of  states, 
activities  or  other  happening:  Sn  719,  1122  (disa 
catasso  vidisa  catasso  uddharj  adho  :  dasa  disa  imayo) ; 
Th  2,  487;  Ps  II. 131  ;  Nd^  239  (see  also  catuddisa  in 
this  sense) ;  Pvi.ii';  11. i'";  Vism  408.  sabba  (all)  is 
often  substituted  for  10  :  S  1.75  ;  D  11. 15  ;  Pv  1.2' ;  VvA 
184;  PvA  71.  — anudisa  (sg.)  is  often  used  collectively 
for  the  4  points  in  the  sense  of  "  in  between,"  so  that 
the  circle  always  implies  the  id  points.  Thus  at  S  1. 122  ; 
III.  124.  In  other  combinations  as  6  abbreviated  for  10  ; 
four  disa  plus  uddhar)  &  anudisai]  at  D  1.222  =  A  111.368  ; 
four  d. -I- uddhar)  adho  &  anudisar)  at  S  1. 122;  ill. 124; 
A  IV. 167.  In  phrase  "  mettasahagatena  cetasa  ekag 
disai)  pharitva  viharati "  (etc.  up  to  4th)  the  all- 
comprehending  range  of  universal  goodwill  is  further 
denoted  by  uddhag  adho  tiriyag  etc.,  e.  g.  D  1.250  ; 
Vbh  272  ;  see  metta.  — As  a  set  of  4  or  8  disa  is  also 
used  allegorically  ("  set,  circle  ")  for  var.  combinations, 
viz.  the  8  states  of  jhana  at  M  in. 222  ;  the  4  satipat- 
thana  etc.  at  Nett  121  ;  the  4  ahara  etc.  at  Nett  117.  — 
See  also  in  other  applications  Vin  1.50  (in  meaning  of 
"foreign  country");  11.217;  S  1.33  (abhaya)  234 
(puthu°) :  111.106;  V2i6;  D  ni.i97sq.  ;  It  103;  Th  i, 
874;  Vv  41*  (disasu  vissuta). — disar)  kurute  to  run 
away  J  v,340.  disc  disar)  (often  spelt  disodisag)  in  all 
directions  (lit.  from  region  to  region ).D  in. 200  ;  J  111.491  ; 
Th  I,  615;  Bu  n.50 ;  Pv  iii.i';  Miln  398.  But  at 
Dh  42  to  disa  (enemy),  cp.  DhA  1.324  — coro  corag.  See 
alsoJ.P.T.S.  1884,  82  on  abl.  diso  =  disatah.     Cp.  vidisa. 

-kaka  a  compass-crow,  i.  e.  a  crow  kept  on  board  ship 
in  order  to  search  for  land  (cp.  Fick,  Soc.  Gl.  p.  173; 
E.  H?rdy,  Buddha  p.  18)  J  111.126,  267;  -kusala  one 
who    knows    the    directions    Vin    11. 217;    -cakkhuka 


"  seeing  "  (i.  e.  wise)  in  all  directions  J  111.344  •  -daha 
■'  sky-glow,"  unusual  redness  of  the  horizon  as  if  on 
fire,  polar  light  (?)  or  zodiacal  light  (?)  D  i.io  ;  J  1.374  • 
VI. 476;  Miln  178;  DA  1.95;  cp.  BSk.  di^odaha  Av§ 
n.198  ;  -pati  (disampati)  a  king  S  1.86 ;  J  vi.45  ;  -pamok- 
kha  world-famed  J  1.166;  -bhaga  [Sk.  digbhaga] 
direction,  quarter  Vin  11.217;  -mujha  [Sk.  dihmu(Jha] 
one  who  has  lost  his  bearings  Dpvs  ix.15  ;  -vasika  living 
in  a  foreign  country  DhA  111.176.  -vasin  =  "vasika 
DhA  IV. 27. 

Dissati  Pass,  of  *dassati,  q.  v. 

DIgha  (adj.-n.)  [Ved.  dirgha,  cp.  Caus.  draghayati  to 
lengthen,  'dlagh  as  in  Gr.  loXtxot  (shaft),  ivSeXixHi 
(Icisting  etc.  ;  cp.  E.  entelechy) ;  Lat.  indulges ;  Goth. 
tulgus  (enduring)]  i.  (adj.)  long  D  1.17;  M  1.429;  S 
1. 104  (°g  addhanag) ;  So  146,  633  (opp.  rassa) ;  Dh  60, 
409;  Pv  1. 10"  ("g  antarag  all  the  time);  11.9**  (id.); 
Th  I,  646  (°m-antare) ;  Dhs  617;  KhA  245  ;  PvA  27,  1^8, 
33,  46.  See  def.  at  Vism  272.  — dighato  lengthways 
J  VI. 185;  dighaso  in  length  Vin  iv.279 ;  atidigha  too 
long  Vin  IV.7,  8.  — 2.  (m.)  a  snake  (cp.  M  Vastu  11.45 
dirghaka)  J  1.324  ;  11.145  ;  iv.330.  —  3.  N.  of  the  Digha 
Nikaya  ("  the  long  collection  ")  Vism  96. 

•angulin  having  long  fingers  (the  4th  of  the  marks  of 
a  Mahapurisa)  D  11. 17;  in. 143.  150;  -antara  corridor 
J  VI. 349.  -ayu  long-lived  (opp.  app'  ayu)  D  1.18; 
J  V.7I.  Also  as  °ka  D  111.150  ;  DA  1.135  ;  Sdhp  511  ; 
-avu  =  °ayu  in  the  meaning  of  ayasmant  (q.  v.)  J  v.120  ; 
-jati  (f.)  a  being  of  the  snake  kind,  a  snake  DhA  in. 322  ; 
also  as  °ka  at  J  11.145;  iii.250  ;  iv.333 ;  v.449 ;  DA 
1.252  ;  -dasa  having  long  fringes  D  1.7 ;  -dassin  [Sk. 
dirghadarsin]  far-seeing  ( =  sabba-dassavin)  PvA  196; 
-nasika  having  a  long  nose  Vism  283.  -bhanaka  a 
repeater  or  expounder  of  the  Digha  Nikaya  J  1.59; 
Vism  36,  266,  286;  DA  1.15,  131  ;  -rattag  (adv.)  [Sk. 
*dirgharatrag.  see  Indexes  to  Av6 ;  Divy  &  Lai.  V. ; 
otherwise  dirgha-kalag]  a  long  time  D  1.17,  206;  A 
V.194;  Sn  649;  It  8;  J  1. 12,  72  ;  Pv  1.4*;  n.i3>'  (°rat- 
taya  =  °rattag  PvA  165);  Pug  15;  DhA  iv.24 ;  -loma 
long-haired  Vin  in. 129  ;  also  as  °ka  at  J  1.484,  f.  °ika 
S  11.228 ;  -sotthiya  (nt.)  long  welfare  or  prosperity 
DhA  11.227. 

Dighatta  (nt.)  [Sk.  dirghatvag]  length  A  1.54. 

DIna  (adj.)  [Sk.  dina]  poor,  miserable,  wretched;  base, 
mean,  low  D  11.202  (?)  (°mana ;  v.  1.  ninnamana) ; 
J  V.448  ;  VI. 375  ;  Pv  II. 8*  (  =  adanajjhasaya  PvA  107); 
IV. 8' ;  Miln  406;  PvA  120  (=kapa9a),  260  (id.),  153; 
Sdhp  r88,  324. 

Dinatta  (nt.)  fSk.  'dinatvag]  wretchedness,  miserable 
state  Sdhp  78. 

Dipa'  [Ved.  dipa  to  Ved.  di,  dipyate;  Idg.  *deia  to  shine 
(see  dibba,  deva) ;  cp.  Gr.  oiaXuf,  Si)\ni ;  see  also  jotati] 
a  lamp  J  11.104  (°g  jaleti  to  light  a  1.);  DhA  11.49 
(id  ),  94  (id.) 

-acci  the  flame  of  a  lamp  ThA  1 54  ;  -aloka  light  of  a 
1.  J  1.266;  VI. 391  ;  DhA  1.359:  VvA  51;  —  (''g)kara 
making  light,  shining,  illuminating  Nd^  399  (  — pabhag 
kara  Sn  1 136  ;  but  cp.  Dh  236  under  dipa') ;  Vism  203. 
-tittira  a  decoy  partridge  (cp.  dipaka")  J  111.64  '■  -rukkha 
lit.  lamp-tree,  the  stand  of  a  lamp,  candlestick  DhA 
IV. 120;  -sikha  the  flame  (lit.  crest)  of  a  1.  Vism  171  ; 
DhA  11.49. 

Dipa^  (m.  &  nt.)  [Ved.  dvipa  =-  dvi-(-  ap  (*sp.)  of  apa  water, 
lit.  "  double-watered,"  between  (two)  waters]  an  island, 
continent  (maha°,  always  as  4) ;  terra  firma,  solid 
foundation,  resting-place,  shelter,  refuge  (in  this  sense 
freq.  comb''  w.  tana  lena  &  sarana  &  expl.  in  Com. 
by  patittha)  —  (a)  ht.  island:  S  v.2i9;  J  in. 187; 
VvA  19;  Mhvs  vn.7,  41. — continent:  catttaro  maba- 
dipa  S  v. 343  ;  Vv  20''  (=VvA  104) ;  VvA  19 ;  PvA  74 


Dipa 


159 


Dukkha 


etc.  Opp.  the  20CO  paritta-dipa  the  smaller  islands 
KhA  133.  —  (b)  fig.  shelter,  salvation  etc.  (see  also 
tana):  S  111.42  (atta°+ attasarana  etc.,  not  with  S 
Index  to  dipa');  v. 154,  162  (id.)  iv.3i5  (mar)°,  not  to 
d.ipa'),  372  ;  A  1.55  sq.  (+  tana  etc.) :  Sn  501  (atta"  self- 
reliant,  self-supported,  not  with  FausboU  to  dipa'), 
1092,  1094,  1145  (=Sattha);  Nd-  303;  Dh  236  (°r) 
karohi  =  patitth5  PvA  87);  Pv  iii.i'  (id.  PvA  174); 
J  V.501  =vi.375  (dipafi  ca  parayanag) ;  Miln  84.  257 
(dhamma-dipa,  Arahantship). 

-aUya  resting  place  J  vi.432  ;  -gabbhaka  same  J 
VI.459,  460. 

Dlpa^  [cp.  Sk.  dvipa  tiger's  skin]  a  car  covered  with  a 
panther's- skin  J  1.259;  v. 259  — vi. 48. 

Dlpaka'  (=dipa')  (a)  f.  dipika  a  lamp,  in  danda"  a  torch 
DhA  1.220,  399.  —  (b)  (°-)  an  image  of,  having  the 
appearance  of,  sham  etc.  ;  in  -kakkara  a  decoy  partridge 
J  11.161  ;  -tittira  same  J  111.358;  -pakkhin  a  decoy 
bird  J  V.376 ;  -miga  a  d.  antelope  J  v. 376. 

Dtpaka'  (^dipa*)  a  (little)  island  J  1.278,  279 ;  11.160. 

DIpaka''  in  vanidlpaka  PvA  i2oJor  vanibbaka  (q.  v.). 

Dipana  (adj.)  illustrating,  explaining;  f.  °i  explanation, 
commentary',  N.  of  several  Commentaries,  e.  g.  the 
Paramattha  -dipani  of  Dhammapala  on  Th  2  ;  Pv  it 
Vv.^ — Cp.  jotika  &  uddipana. 

Dipika  [fr.  dipin]  a  panther  J  111.480. 

DIpita  Tpp.  of  dipeti]  explained  Vism  33. 

DIpitar  [n.  ag.  fr.  dipeti]  one  who  illumines  Vism  211. 

DIpin  [Sk.  dvTpin]  a  panther,  leopard,  tiger  Vin  1.186 
dipicamma  a  leopard  skin  =  Sk.  dvipicarman) ;  Am.ioi  ; 
J  1.342;  :i.44,  no;  iv.475  ;  v.408 ;  vi.538.  dipi-raja 
king  of  the  panthers  Vism  270.  —  f.  dipini  Miln  363, 
368 ;  DhA  1.48. 

Dipeti  [Sk.  dipayati,  Cans,  to  flip,  see  dipa'  &  cp.  dippati] 
to  make  light,  to  kindle,  to  emit  light,  to  be  bright ;  to 
illustrate,  explain  A  v. 73  sq.  ;  Dh  363  ;  Miln  40  ;  PvA 
94,  95,  102,  104  etc. ;  Sdhp  49,  349.     Cp.  a°. 

Du°'  (&  before  vowels  dur°)  (indecl.)  [Sk.  du^i  &  dus=Gr. 
fvi:-,  Oir.  du-,  Ohg.  zur-,  zer- ;  antithetic  prefix,  gener- 
ally opposed  to  su°=Gr.  d-  etc.  Ultimately  identical 
with  du^  in  sense  of  asunder,  apart,  away  from  = 
opposite  or  wrong]  i.  syllable  of  exclamation  (  =  duh) 
"  bad,  woe  "  (beginning  the  word  du  (j)  -jivitar))  DhA 
11.6,  io=PvA  280,  cp.  J  ni.47 ;  Bdhgh's  expl"  of  the 
syllable  see  at  Vism  494.  —  2.  prefix,  implying  per- 
verseness,  difficulty,  badness  (cp.  dukkha).  Original 
form  *duh  is  preserved  at  dur-  before  vowels,  but 
assimilated  to  a  foil,  consonant  according  to  the  rules 
of  Assimilation,  i.  e.  the  cons,  is  doubled,  with  changes 
of  ▼  to  bb  <t  usual  lengthening  dii  before  r  (but  also 
du°).  For  purposes  of  convenience  all  cpds.  with  du" 
are  referred  to  the  simplex,  e.  g.  dukkaja  is  to  be  looked 
up  under  kata.  duggati  under  gati  etc. 

See :  A.  dur'".  akkhata,  accaya,  atikkama,  atta, 
adhiroha,  anta,  annaya,  abhisambhava ;  agata,  ajana. 
ayuta,  asada  ;  itthi ;  ukkhepa,  ubbaha.  —  B.  du°  : 
(k)kata,  kara ;  (g)ga,  gata,  gati,  gandha,  gahita ; 
(c)caja,  carita,  cola;  (j)jaha,  jana,  jivha,  jivita;  (t)tap- 
paya.  tara ;  (d)dama.  da-sika ;  (n)naya.  nikkhaya.  nik- 
khitta,  niggaha,  nijjhapaya,  nibbcdha,  nita ,  (p)pailfia. 
patianaya,  pafinissaggin,  patipada,  pativijjha,  fjafi- 
vedha,  pabhajja,  pamuflca,  pameyya,  parihara,  payata, 
pasu,  peyya,  posa ;  (p)phassa ;  (bb=b):  bala,  baUka, 
budha;  (bb=v):  dubbaca  =  )  vaca.  vacana,  vanna, 
vijana.  vidu,  vinivijjha,  visodha.  vutthika ;  (b)  bhaga, 
bhara,  bhasita,  bhikkha ;  (m)mati,  mana,  manku, 
mukha,     mejjha,     medha ;     (y)yittha,     yuja,     yutta ; 


(du-(-r)=^du-ratta,  ropaya   (du-fr):   du-rakkha ;     (l)la- 
bha ;  (s)saddhapaya,  sassa,  saha,  sila ;  hara. 

Da°-  in  cpds.  meaning  two" ;  see  dvi  B  II. 

Du^  (-°)  (adj.-sufl.)  [Sk.  druha,  dru\>,  see  duhana  & 
duhitika]  hurting,  injuring,  acting  perfidiously,  betray- 
ing, only  in  mitta"  deceiving  one's  friends  S  1.225  ; 
Sn  244  expl.  as  mitta-dubhaka  SnA  287,  v.  1.  B  mitta- 
dussaka ;  cp.  mitta-dubbhika  &  mitta-dubbhin. 

Daka  (nt.)  [see  dvi  B  11]  a  dyad  DhsA  36,  343,  347,  406; 
Vism  II  sq.  &  in  titles  of  books  "in  pairs,  on  pairs." 
c.  g.  Dukapatthana  ;  or  chapters,  e.  g.  J  11.  i  ("nipata). 

Duknia  [Sk.  dukula]  a  certain  (jute?)  plant;  (nt.)  [cp. 
Sk.  dukalar)  woven  silk]  very  fine  cloth,  made  of  the 
fibre  of  thed.  plant  S  111.145  ;  A  iv.393  ;  J  11.21  ;  iv.219; 
V.400 ;  vi.72  ;  Vism  257,  262;  VvA  165;  DA  1.140; 
Davs  V.  27. 

Dakkha  (adj.-n.)  [Sk.  duhkha  fr.  duh-ka,  an  adj.  forma- 
tion fr.  prefix  duh  (see  du).  According  to  others  an 
analogy  formation  after  sukha,  q.  v.  ;  Bdhgh  (at  Vism 
494)  expl^  dukkha  as  du-l-kha,  where  du  =  du'  and 
kha=akasa.  See  also  dcf.  at  Vism  461.]  A.  (adj.) 
unpleasant,  painful,  causing  misery  (opp.  sukha  pleasant) 
Vin  1.34;  Dh  117.  Lit.  of  vedana  (sensation)  M  1.59 
(°r)  vedanar)  vediyamana,  see  also  below  iii.i  e) ; 
A  ii.ii6  =  M.  1. 10  (saririkahi  vedanahi  dukkhahi). — 
Fig.  (fraught  with  pain,  entailing  sorrow  oo:  trouble)  of 
kama  D  1.36  (  =  patipilan-atthena  DA  1.121);  Dh  186 
(  =  bahudukkha  DhA  111.240) ;  of  jati  M  1.185  (cp. 
ariyasacca,  below  B  I.);  in  comb"  dukkha  patipada 
dandhabhiniia  D  ni.io6;  Dhs  176;  Nett  7,  112  sq.,  cp. 
A  II.  149  sq.  ekanta"  very  painful,  giving  much  pain 
S  II. 1 73  ;  in. 69.     dukkhag  (adv.)  with  difficulty,  hardly 

J  I.2I5- 

B.  (nt. ;  but  pi.  also  dukkha.  e.  g.  S  1.23  ;  Sn  728 : 
Dh  202.  203.  221.  Spelling  dukha  (after  sukha)  at 
Dh  83.  203).  There  is  no  word  in  English  covering  the 
same  ground  as  Dukkha  does  in  Pali.  Our  modem 
words  are  too  specialised,  too  limited,  and  usually  too 
strong.  Sukha  &  dukkha  are  ease  and  dis-ease  (but 
we  use  disease  in  another  sense) ;  or  wealth  and  ilth 
from  well  &  ill  (but  we  have  now  lost  ilth) ;  or  well- 
being  and  ill-ness  (but  illness  means  something  eke  in 
English).  We  are  forced,  therefore,  in  translation  to 
use  half  synonyms,  no  one  of  which  is  exact.  Dukkha 
is  equally  mental  &  physical.  Pam  is  too  predomi- 
nantly physical,  sorrow  too  exclusively  mental,  but  in 
some  connections  they  have  to  be  used  in  default  of  any 
more  exact  rendering.  Discomfort,  suffering,  ill,  and 
trouble  can  occasionally  be  used  in  certain  connections. 
Misery,  distress,  agony,  affliction  and  woe  are  never 
right  They  are  all  much  too  strong  &  are  only 
mental  (see  Mns.  Rh.  D.  Bud.  Psy.  83-86.  quoting  Ledi 
Sadaw). 

I.  Main  Points  in  the  Use  of  the  Word.— The  recogni- 
tion of  the  fact  of  Dukkha  stands  out  as  essential  in  early 
Buddhism.  In  the  very  first  discourse  the  four  so- 
called  Truths  or  Facts  (see  saccani)  deal  chiefly 
with  dukkha.  The  first  of  the  four  gives  certain 
universally  recognised  cases  of  it,  &  then  s\ims  them  up 
in  short.  The  five  groups  (of  physical  &  mental  quali- 
ties which  make  an  individual)  are  accompanied  by  ill 
so  far  as  those  groups  are  fraught  with  asavas  and 
grasping.  (Paiic'  upadanakkhandha  pi  dukklii ;  cp. 
S  111.47).  The  second  Sacca  gives  the  cause  of  this 
dukkha  (see  Taoha).  The  third  enjoins  the  removal  of 
this  tanha.  And  the  fourth  shows  the  way,  or  method,  of 
doing  so  (see  Magga).  These  ariyasaccani  are  found 
in  two  places  in  the  older  books  Vin  i.io=S  v.421 
(with  addition  of  soka-parideva  .  .  .  etc.  [see  below] 
in  some  MSS).  Comments  on  this  passage,  or  part 
of  it,  occur  S  III.  1 58,   159;   with  expl"  of  each  term 


Dukkha 


l6o 


Dukkha 


(+soka)  D  1. 189;  111.136,  277;  M  1. 185:  A  1.107:  Sn 
p.   140 ;  Nd^  under  sankhara ;  It  17  (with  dukkhassa 
atikkama  for  nirodha),  104,  105;  Ps  1.37;  11. 204,  147; 
Pug  15.  68  ;  Vbh  328  ;  Nett  72,  73.     It  is  referred  to  as 
dukkha,  samudaya,  nirodha.  magga  at  Vin  i.K),  it>,  ig  ; 
D   III. 227;   Nd^   304'"';    as    asavanai)    khaya-fiaija   at 
D  1.83;  Vin  111.5  ;  as  sacca  No.   t  +  paticcasamuppada 
at  A  1. 1 76  sq.  (H-soka");  in  a  slightly  diff.  version  of 
No.    I    (leaving  out  appiyehi  &   piychi,   having  soka° 
instead)   at  D   11.305  ;   and   in  the  formula  catunnar) 
ariyasaccanar)  ananubodha  etc.  at  D  11.90  =  Vin  1.230. 
II.  Characterisation  in  Detail. —  i.  A  further  specifica- 
tion of  the  3rd  of  the  Noble  Truths  is  given  in  the 
Paticcarsamuppada    (qv.).    which    analyses    the    links 
&  stages  of  the  causal  chain  in  their  interdependence  as 
building  up  (anabolic  =  samudaya)  &,  after  their  recog- 
nition as  causes,  breaking  down   (katabolic-- nirodha) 
the  dukkha-synthesis,  &  thus  constitutes  the  Metabo- 
lism of  kamma ;  discussed  e.  g.  at  Vin   i  ;  D  11.32  .sq. 
=S  II. 2  sq. ;  S  11. 17,  20,  65=  Nd^  08om  ;  S  III.  14;  M 
1.266  sq. ;  11.38;  A  1.177;  mentioned  e.  g.  at  A  1.147; 
M  1.192  sq.,  460;  It  89  (  =  dukkhassa  antakirlyu). — 
2.  Dukkha  as  one  of  the  3  quali/ications  of  the  sankhara 
(q.   v.),  viz.  anicca,  d.,  anatta,  evanescence,  ill,   non- 
soul  :  S  1.188  ;  11.53  (yad  aniccat)  tar)  dukkhag) ;  in. 112 
(id.)  111.67,  1^0.  222  ;  IV.28,  48,  129  sq.  ;  131  sq.  —  rijpe 
anicc'  Snupassi  (etc.  with  dukkh'  &  anatt')  S  111.41. 
anicca-sanna,   dukkha"  etc.  D  in. 243  ;   A  111.334,   "^P- 
IV.52    sq.  —  sabbe    sankhara    anicca    etc.    Nd^    under 
sankhara.  —  3.  Specification   of  Dukkha.  The  Niddesa 
gives  a  characteristic  description  of  all  that  comes  under 
the   term   dukkha.     It   employs   one   stereotyped   ex- 
planation   (therefore    old    &    founded    on    schcJastic 
authority)    (Nd^  304'  ),    &    one   expl"   (,304°"-)  peculiar 
to  itself  &  only  applied  to  Sn  36.     The  latter  defines  & 
illustrates  dukkha  exclusively  as  suffering  &  torment 
incurred  by  a  person  as  punishment,  inflicted  on  him 
either  by  the  king  or  (after  death)  by  the  guardians  of 
purgatory  (niraya-pala  ;  see  detail  under  niraya,  &  cp. 
below  III.  2  b). — The  first  expl"  (304')  is  similar  in 
kind  to  the  definition  of  d.  as  long  afterwards  given  in 
the   Sankhya   system    (see   Sankhya-karika-bhasya   of 
Gauiapada  to  stanza  i)  &  classifies  the  various  kinds  of 
dukkha  in  the  foil,  groups :  (a)  all  suffering  caused  by 
the  fact  of  being  born,  &  being  through  one's  kamma 
tied   to   the   consequent   states    of   transmigration ;    to 
this  is  loosely  attached  the  3  fold  division  of  d.  as 
dukkha",  sankhara",  viparinama"  (see  below  III.  1  c) ; 
—  (b)   illnesses   &   all   bodily  states   of  suffering   (cp. 
adhyatmikai)  dukkhar)  of  Sankhya  k.);  —  (c)  pain  & 
(bodily)  discomfort  through  outward  circumstances,  as 
extreme  climates,   want  of  food,   gnat-bites  etc.    (cp. 
adhibhautikar)  &  adhidaivikar)  d.  of  Sk.) ;  —  (d)  (Mental) 
distress  &  painful  states  caused  by  the  death  of  one's 
beloved   or   other  misfortunes   to  friends  or  personal 
belongings   (cp.   domanassa).  —  This  list  is  concluded 
by  a  scholastic  characterisation  of  these  var.  states  as 
conditioned  by  kamma.  implicitly  due  to  the  afflicted 
person  not  having  found  his  "  refuge,"  i.  e.  salvation 
from  these  states  in  the  8  fold  Prth  (see  abov'e  B  I.). 

III.  Genera!  Application.  &  v.rious  views  regarding 
dukkha.  — ^  i .  As  simple  sensat  on  ( :  pain)  &  related 
to  other  terms ;  (a)  principally  a  vedana,  sensation,  in 
particular  belonging  to  the  bouy  (kayika),  or  physical 
pain  (opp.  cetasika  dukkha  mental  ill :  see  domanassa). 
Thus  defined  as  kayikar)  d.  at  D  11.306  (cp.  the  dis- 
tinction between  sarirai)  &  manasag  dukkhar)  in 
Sankhya  philosophy)  M  1.302  ;  S  v.209  (in  def.  of  duk- 
khindriya) ;  A  n.143  (saririka  vedana  dukkha);  Nett 
12  (duvidhar)  d.  :  kayikar)  =  dukkhar) ;  cetasikar)  = 
domanassar)) ;  Vism  165  (twofold),  496  (dukkha  afmarj 
na  badhakai)),  499  (seven  divisions),  503  (kayika) ; 
SnA  119  (sukhar)  va  dukkhat)  va  Sn  67=kayikag  sata- 
satai)).  Bdhgh.  usually  paraphrases  d.  with  vatfa- 
dukkha,  e.  g.  at  SnA  44,  212,  377.  505.  —  (b)  Thus  to 


be  understood   as   physical   pain  in   comb"   dukkha -f- 
domanassa  "  pain  &  grief,"  where  d.  can  also  be  taken 
as  the  gen.  term  &  dom"  as  specification,  e.  g.  in  ceta- 
sikai)  dukkhar)  domanassar)  pafisagvedeti  A  1.157,  2 '6; 
IV. 406 ;  S  11.69 ;  ragajan  d  "g  dom  "g  patisagvedeti  A 
11.149;  kamupasaghitai)  d  °i)  doni  °i)  A  in. 207;  d  "g 
dom  "g  patisagvediyati  S  iv.343.     Also  as  cpd.  dukkha- 
domanassanag    atthangam.aya    A    in. 326,    &    freq.    in 
formula   soka-parideva-d"-domana.ss-upayasa    (grief   & 
sorrow,  afflictions  of  pain  it  misery,  i.  e.  all  kinds  of 
misery)  D  1.36  (arising  fr.  kama) ;  M  11.64  ;  A  v. 2 16  sq.  ; 
It  89    etc.   (see   above   B  I.  4).     Cp.  also  the  comb" 
dukkhi  dummano  "  miserable  and  dejected  "  S  11.282. 
—  (c)  dukkha  as  *'  feeling  of  pain  "  forms  one  of  the 
three    dukkhata    or    painful    states,    viz.    d.-dukkhata 
(painful  sensation  caused   by  bodily  pain),  sankhara" 
id.  having  its  origin  in  the  sankhara.  viparinama".  being 
caused  by  change  S  iv.25g  ;  v.56  ;  D  iii.2r6;  Nett  12. 
(d)  Closely  related  in  meaning  is  ahita  "  that  which  is 
not  good  or  profitable,"  usually  opposed  to  sukha  & 
hita.     It  is  freq.  in  the  ster.  cxpres.sion  "  hoti  digha- 
rattag  ahitaya  dukkhaya  "  for  a  long  time  it  is  a  source 
of  discomfort  &  pain  A  1.194  sq.  ;  M  1.332  D  111.157; 
I^uS  3,3-     Also  in  phrases  anatthaya  ahitaya  dukkhaya 
D    HI. 2 46    <%    akusalag   .  .  .  ahitay.a    dukkhaya    sag- 
vattati  A  1.58.  —  (c)   Under   vedana  as  sensation  are 
grouped  the  3  ;  sukhag  (or  sukha  vcd.)  pleasure  (plea- 
sant .sensation),  dukkhag   pain   (painful  sens),   aduk- 
kham-asukhag  indifference  (indifferent  sens.),  the  last 
of  which  is  the  ideal  state  of  the  emotional  habitus  to 
be  gained  by   the  Arahant   (cp.   upekha   &   nibbida). 
Their  role  is  clearly  indicated  in  the  4th  jhana :   su- 
khassa  pahana  dukkhassa  pahana  pubbe  va  somanassa- 
domana-ssanag  atthangaraa  adukkham-asukhag  upekha 
parisuddhig    catutthag    jhanag    upasampajja   viharati 
(see  jhana).  —  As  contents  of  vedana  :  sukhag  vediyati 
dukkhag   v.   adukkham-asukhag   v.   tasma   vedana   ti 
S   111.86,    87;    cp.   S   11.82    (vedayati).     tisso   vedana: 
sukha,    d°,    adukkham-asukha"    D    111.275;    S    11.53; 
IV. 1 14  sq.,  207,  223  sq.,  cp.  M  1.396 ;  A  1.173;  iv.442  ; 
It  46.  47.     yag  kific'  ayag  purisa-puggalo  patisagvedeti 
sukhag  va  d  °g  va  a  "g  vS  sabban  tag  pubbe  katahetu 
ti  =  one's    whole    life-experience    is    caused    by    one's 
former  kamma  A   i.i73  =  M    11.217. — The  comb"  (as 
complementary  pair)  of  sukha  +  dukkha  is  very  freq. 
for  expressing  the  varying  fortunes  of  life  &  personal 
experience  as  pleasure  &  pain,  e.  g.  n'  alara  ailBaman- 
nassa  sukhaya  va   dukkhaya  va   sukhadukkhAya  vi 
D  1.56=3  111.211.     Thus  under  the  8  "  fortunes  of  the 
world  "   (loka  dhamma)  with  labba  (&  a"),  yasa  (a°), 
pasagsA  (ninda),  sukha  (dukkha)  at  D  in. 260  ;  Nd^  55. 
Regarded  as  a  thing  to  be  avoided  in  life  :  puriso  jivitu- 
kamo  .  .  .  sukhakamo     dukkha-patikkulo     S     iv.  172, 
188.  —  In  similar  contexts  :  D  i.8i»:!;  111.51.  109.  187; 
S  11.22,  39  ;  IV. 123  sq.  ;  A  11.158  etc.  (cp.  sukha). 

2.  As  complex  ■  stale  (suffering)  &  its  valuation  in 
the  light  of  the  Doctrine :  (a)  any  worldly  sensation, 
pleasure  &  experience  may  be  a  source  of  discomfort  (see 
above,  I. ;  cp.  esp.  kama  &  bhava)  Ps  i.i  i  sq.  (specified 
as  jati  etc.):  dukkhag  =  mahabbha yag  S  1.37;  bhara- 
danag  dukkhag  loke  bhara-nikkhepanag  sukhag  (pain 
is  the  great  weight)  S  in. 26  ;  kamanag  adhivacanag 
A  111.310  ;  IV. 289;  cp.  A  111.410  sq.  (with  kama,  vedana, 
saiiiia,  asava,  kamma,  dukkhag).  —  (b)  ekanta"  (ex- 
treme pain)  refers  to  the  suffering  of  sinful  beings  in 
Niraya,  &  it  is  open  to  conjecture  whether  this  is  not 
the  first  &  orig.  meaning  of  dukkha;  e.  g.  M  1.74; 
A  11.231  (vedanag  vediyati  ekanta-d°g  seyyatha  pi 
satta  nerayika) ;  see  ekanta.  In  the  same  sense :  .  .  . 
upenti  Roruvag  ghorag  cirarattag  dukkhag  anubha- 
vamti  S  1.30  ;  niraya-dukkha  Sn  531  ;  pecca  d°g  nigac- 
chati  Sn  278,  742  ;  anubhonti  d°g  kafuka-pphalani 
Pv  i.ii'*  (=apayikag  d°g  PvA  60);  PvA  67;  maha- 
dukkhag  anubhavati  PvA  43,  68.  107  etc.  atidukkhag 
PvA   65  ;    dukkhato   pete    mocetva   PvA    8.  —  (c)   to 


Dukkha 


i6i 


Dutthulla 


suffer  pain,  to  experience  unpleasantness  etc.  is  ex- 
pressed in  foil,  terms :  diikkliat)  anubliavati  (only  w. 
rcf.  to  Niraya,  see  b) ;  anveti  Ph  i  (  — kSyikai)  cetasikari 
vipfika-diikkhar)  anugacchati  DliA  1.24).  upeti  Sn  72S  ; 
carati  S  1.2  m  ;  nigacchati  M  1.337  :  Sn  278,  7.(2  ;  palisarj- 
vcdeti  AI  I..31.'?  (sec  above);  pas.sati  S  1.132  (jato  duk- 
khfmi  passati :  whoever  is  bom  experiences  wor) ; 
va<ldheti  S  ILU'O ;  viharati  A  I.2<i2  ;  n.95  ;  111.3  ;  S  IV.7.S 
(passad<lhiy,"i  xsati  d"r)  v.  dnkkhino  cittar]  na  sama- 
dliiyati) ;  vcdayati,  vcdiyati,  vedeti  etc.  sec  above  111. 
I  e ;  sayati  A  1. 137.  —  (d)  More  specific  reference  to  the 
canse  of  suffering  A-  its  removal  by  means  of  enlighten- 
ment:  («)  Origin  (see  also  above  I.  it  II.  1):  dukkhc 
loko  patijlhito  S  1.40  ;  yai]  kinci  dukkhar)  sambhoti 
sabbar)  sankhara-paccaya  Sn  731;  ye  dnkkhar)  vad- 
dhenti  tc  na  parimiiccanti  jatiya  etc.  S  ii.ic.g;  d'ri 
ettha  bhiyyo  Sn  di,  .58.^;  yo  pathavl-dhatur)  abhinan- 
dati  dukkhai)  so  abhin"  Si  1.174;  ta...ha  d  "ssa  sam- 
udayo  etc.  Nctt  23  pq.  ;  as  result  of  sakkayaditthi  S 
IV.  147,  of  chanda  S  1.22  of  upac'hi  S  11. mt),  cp.  upadhi- 
nidana  pabhavanti  dukkha  Sn  72S  ;  d°r)  eva  hi  sambhoti 
d"r)  titthati  veti  ca  -^  i'35.  —  (/^)  Salvation  from 
Suffering  (see  above  I.) :  kathat)  dukkha  pamuccati 
Sn  170  ;  dukkha  pamuccati  S  1. 14  ;  111.41,  150  ;  iv.205  ; 
V.431  ;  na  hi  putto  pali  va  pi  piyo  d  "a  pamocayc  yatha 
saddhamma-savanar)  dukkha  moccti  paninar)  S  1,210; 
na  appatvS  lokantar)  dukkha  atthi  pamocanar)  A  11.49. 
Kai^makkhaya  .  .  .  sabbar)  d°r)  nijjinnar)  bhavissati 
iM  M.217,  cp.  1.93.  kamc  pahaya  .  .  .  d°r)  na  scvctha 
anatthasarjhitar)  S  1.12  -31;  rupar)  (etc.)  abhijanari 
bhabbo  d  -^kkhayaya  S  111.27;  iv.89  ;  d°r)  parinfiaya 
sakhettavattliur)  Jathagato  arahati  pfiralasag  Sn  473. 
pajai.ati  d°r)  Sn  789.  1056.  dukkhassa  samudayo  ca 
atthangamo  ca  S  11.72  ;  111.228  sq.  ;  iv.86,  327.  —  duk- 
khass'  antakaro  hoti  M  1.48;  A  111.400  sq.  ;  It  18; 
antakara  bhavamase  Sn  32  ;  antai)  karissanti  Satthu 
sasana-karino  A  11.26;  d  °parikkhlriar)  S  11. 133;  akifi- 
canar)  ninupatanti  dukkha  S  1.23  ;  sankharanar)  niro- 
dhcna  n'  atthi  d"assa  sambhavo  Sn  731.  —  munir) 
d''assa  parayug  S  1.195-Nd^  136';  antagu  'si  paragfi 
d'assa  Sn  539.  —  sang'  atiko  maccujaho  nirupadhi 
pahaya  d°r)  apunabbhavaya  S  iv.  158;  ucchinnag 
mfdai)  d°a.ssa,  n'  atthi  dani  punabbhavo  Vin  1.23 1  = 
D  11.91. 

-&dhivaha  bringing  or  entailing  pain  S  iv.70  ;  -anu- 
bhavana  suffering  pain  or  undergoing  punishment  (in 
Niraya)  J  IV.3  ;  -antagu  one  who  has  conquered  suffer- 
ing Sn  401  ;  -dbhikinna  beset  with  pain,  full  of  distress 
It  89 ;  -Asahanata  non-endurance  of  ills  Vism  325. 
-indriya  the  faculty  of  experiencing  pain,  painful  sen- 
sation S  V.209.  211  ;  Dhs  556,  560;  Vbh  15,  54,  71  ; 
-udraya  cau.iing  or  yielding  pain,  resulting  in  ill,  yield- 
ing distress  M  1.415  sq.  ;  A  197;  iv.43  (-fdukkha- 
vipaka) ;  v.117  (dukh").  243;  J  IV.39R ;  of  kamma : 
Ps  1.80;  11.79;  Pv  mi'"  (so  read  for  dukkhandriya, 
which  is  also  found  at  PvA  60)  ;  PhA  11.40  ("uddaya) ; 
-upadhana  causing  pain  l)h  291  ;  -upasama  the  allay 
ment  of  pain  or  alleviation  of  suffering,  only  in  phrase 
(atthangiko  uiaggo)  d-iipasama-gamino  S  iii.Rfi  ;  It  106  ; 
Sn  724— Dh  I9r  ;  —  (m)esin  wishing  ill,  malevolent 
J  iv.26  ;  -otinna  fallen  into  misery  S  m.93  ;  M  l.^Cifi  ; 
II.  10  ;  -karana  labour  or  trials  to  be  undergone  as  punish- 
ment I)li.\  111.711  (.see  Dh  138,  139  iS:  cp.  dasa'  B  i  b)  ; 
-khandha  the  aggregate  of  suffering,  all  that  is  called 
pain  or  affliction  (see  above  B  II.  1)  S  11.134;  "'9,?: 
M  1. 192  .sq.  ;  200  sq.  ;  etc.  ;  —  khaya  the  destruction  of 
pain,  the  extinction  of  ill  M  1.93;  11.217  (kamma- 
kkha  1  d-kkhayo) ;  S  111.27;  S"  ".'-■  I""rcq.  in  ])hrase 
(niyati  or  hoti)  sammS-d-kkhayaya  "  leads  to  the 
complete  extinction  of  ill,"  with  ref.  to  the  Buddha's 
teaching  or  the  higher  wisdom,  e.  g.  of  brahmacariy.^ 
S  11.24;  °'  pafifla  D  111.268;  A  111.152  sq.  ;  of  ariva 
ditthi  D  111.264— A  m  132  ;  of  sikkha  A  11.243;  of 
dhamma  M  1.72  ;  -dhamma  the  principle  f>f  pain,  a 
painful  object,   any  kind   of  suffering   (cp.   ""khandha) 


D  III. 88  ;  S  IV. 188  ("anar)  samudayan  ca  atthagamail  ca 
yathnbhutat)  pajanati) ;  It  3S  (nirodha  °anar))  ;  -nidana 
a  source  of  pain  M  11.223  '.  I^'"*  '".59.  I  '3'^'  '■  -nirodha  the 
destruction  of  pain,  the  extinction  of  suffering  (.see 
above  I!  II.  i)  M  1. 191  ;  11. in;  A  iii.411).  416;  etc.; 
-patikkula  averse  to  pain,  avoiding  unpleasantness,  in 
comb"  sukhakamo  d-p.  S  iv.172  (spelt  "kulo),  188; 
M  1.31 1  ;  -patta  being  in  pain  J  vi.330  ;  -pareta  afflicted 
by  pain  or  misery  S  111.93;  't  89  =  A  1.147;  -bhummi 
the  soil  of  distress  Ulis  983  ;  -vaca  hurtful  speech  Pv 
1.3^  (should  probably  be  road  diittha")  ;  -vipaka  (adj.) 
having  pain  as  its  fruit,  creating  misery  S  11.128; 
D  111.57,  229  ;  A  11.172  (kamma)  ;  Ps  11.79  (id.) ;  -vepakka 
=  °vip."ika  Sn  537  (kamma)  :  -saiiiia  the  consciousness  of 
pain  Nctt  27;  -samudaya  the  rise  or  origin  of  pain  or 
suffering  (opj).  "nirodha:  see  above  B  11.  i)  S  iv.37  ; 
AI  1.191  ;  11.10;  111.267;  Vbh  107  (tanha  ca  avasesa  ca 
kilcsa :  .ayaiT  vuccati  d-s);  -samphassa  contact  with 
pain  M  1.507;  Dhs  64R  ;  f.  abstr.  ta  Pug  33;  -seyya 
an  uncomfortable  couch  DhA  iv.8. 

Dukkhata  (f  )  fcp.  Sk.  duhkhata,  abstr.  to  dukkha]  state 
of  pain,  painfulness,  discomfort,  pain  (.sec  dukkha 
K  III.  I  c)  I)  111.2  16  ;  S  IV. 259  ;  v. 56  ;  Nett  12  (expl.). 

Dukkhati  [fr.  dukkha]  to  be  painful  Vism  264. 

Dukkhatta  (nt.)  [Sk.  *duhkhatvar)]  =dukkhata  D  111.106 

(-(-dandhatta). 

Dakkhapana  (nt.)  [abstr.  to  dukkhapeti]  bringing  .sorrow, 
causing  pain  Miln  275  sq.,  351. 

Dukkhapita   [pp.    of  dukkhapeti]    pained,    afflicted   Miln 

79.  180. 

Dukkhapeti  [cans,  to  dukkha]  to  cause  pain,  to  afflict 
J   IV. 452  ;  Miln  276  sq. ;   PvA  215.  —  pp.  dukkhapita. 

Dukkhita  (adj.)  [Sk.  duhkhita ;  pp.  of  'dukkhapeti] 
afflicted,  dejected,  unhappy,  grieved,  disappointed ; 
miserable,  suffering,  ailing  (opp.  sukhita)  D  1.72  (puriso 
abadhiko  d.  ba|ha-gilano) ;  11.24  :  S  1.149  ;  hi.i  1  =iv.i8o 
(sukhitesu  sukhito  dukkhitesu  dukkhito) ;  v.211;  M 
1.88  ;  11.66  ;  Vin  iv.291  ;  Sn  984,  986  ;  J  iv.452  ;  Miln  275  ; 
DhA  11.28  ;  VvA  67. 

Dakkbin  (adj.-n.)  [Sk.  duhkhin]  i.  afflicted,  grieved, 
miserable  S  1.103  sq.,  129  ..q.,  11. 282  (+dummano); 
IV. 78  ;  A  III. 57.  —  2.  a  loser  in  the  game  J  ii.i6o. 

Dukkbiyati  [Sk.  duhkhiyati  &  duhkhayati  Denom.  fr. 
dukkha ;  cp.  vediyati  &  vedayati]  to  feel  pain,  to  be 
distressed  DhA  11.28  (  =  vihaniiati). 

DogKa  [du-(-  ga]  a  difficult  road  Dh  327  ;  Pv  11.7".  dugge 
sankamanani  passages  over  difficult  roads,  usually 
comb''  with  papa  (water-shed)  S  l.ioo;  Vv  52**; 
Pv  11.9^'. 

DuHka  (adj.-n.)  [Sk.  dustha,  pp.  of  dus.sati,  q  v.]  spoilt, 
corrupt;  bad,  malignant,  wicked  Vin  111,118;  S  11.259, 
262  ;  IV.3 39  ;  A  1.124  ("aruka),  127  (id.),  157  sq.  ;  It  68 
(saro  d.,  perhaps  should  be  read  as  diddho) ;  J  1.187, 
254  ("br.'lhmana) ;  iv.391  ("candala) ;  PvA  4  (°cora  : 
rogues  of  thieves);  Sdhp  86,  367,  434.  —  aduttha  not 
evil,  good  Sn  623  ;  It  86  ;  DhA  iv.164.     Cp.  pa°. 

-gahanika    suffering    from    indigestion     Vin     1.206  ; 
-citta  evil-minded  Vin  11.192  ;  M  111.65. 

Dattkn  (adv.)  [Sk.  dusthu,  cp.  su.sthu]  badly,  wrong  DhsA 
38  (  ;  SnA  396;  VvA  337. 

DaHkulIa  (adj.)  wicked,  lewd  Vin  iv.128  ;  S  1.187  (°bhanin 
"  whose  speech  is  never  lewd,"  cp.  Th  1,  1217  padulla  - 
gahin,  expl''  as  dutthullagahin  Psalms  of  Brethren 
399  «.  3);  M  1.435;  111.159:  \ism  313.  — (nt.)  wicked- 
ness Vin  111.21  ;  icaya"  unchastity  M  in. 151  ;  Th  i,  114; 
Vism  151. 


Dutiya 


162 


Dussati 


-ddutthulla  that  which  is  wicked  &  that  which  is  not 
Vin  V.I 30;  -apatti  a  grave  transgression  of  the  Rules 
of  the  Order,  viz.  the  4  Parajika  &  the  13  Sanghadisesa 
Vin  IV. 31  (opp.  a°  Vin  iv.32). 

Ontiya  (num.  ord.)  [Sk.  dvitlya,  with  reduction  of  dvi  to 
du,  as  in  comp"  mentioned  under  dvi  B  II.  For  the 
meaning  "  companion  "  cp.  num.  ord.  for  two  in  Lat 
secundus<sequor,  i.  e.  he  who  follows,  &  Gr.  fi-vTfiiot;> 
Sevofiat  he  who  stays  behind,  also  Sk.  daviyas  farther] 
(a)  (num.)  the  second,  the  following  J  11. 102,  no; 
dutiyar)  for  the  second  time  (cp.  tatiyar)  in  series  i,  2, 
3)  Vin  11.188 ;  D  11.155.  —  (b)  (adj.  n.)  one  who  follows 
or  is  associated  with,  an  associate  of ;  accompanying  or 
accompanied  by  (-°) ;  a  companion,  friend,  partner 
Vin  :v.225  ;  S  1.25  (saddha  dutiya  purisassa  hoti  =  his 
2nd  self) ;  iv.78  (id.)  1.131  ;  It  9  ;  J  v. 400  :  Th  2,  230  (a 
husband) ;  Sn  49  (=Nd2  305,  where  two  kinds  of  asso- 
ciates or  companions  are  distinguished,  viz.  tanha"  & 
puggalo").  tanha-dutiya  either  "  connected  with 
thirst  "  or  "  having  thirst  as  one's  companion  "  (see 
tanha)  S  iv.37 ;  It  109  =A  11. 10;  bilanga"  kanajaka 
(rice  with  sour  gruel)  Vin  n.77  ;  S  i.go,  91.  — adutiya 
alone,  unaccompanied  PvA   161. 

Datiyaka  (adj.-n.)  [Demin.  of  dutiya]  (a)  the  second, 
following,  next  J  1.504  ("cittavare) ;  °r)  a  2nd  time 
M  1.83.  —  (b)  a  companion  ;  only  in  f.  dutiyaka  a  wife  or 
female  comp"  Vin  iv.230,  270  (a  bhikkhiini  as  comp" 
of  another  one) ;  Freq.  as  purana-dutiyika  one's  former 
wife  Vin  1.96 ;  111.16 ;  S  1.2C0  ;  M  11.63  ;  J  i-2io  ;  v. 152  ; 
DhA  1.77.    Cp.  M  Vastu  11.134  dvitiya  in  the^same  sense. 

Dutiyyata  (f)  companionship,  friendship,  help  J  111' 169. 

Daddabha  see  daddabha. 

Dnddha  (Sk.  dugdha,  pp.  of  duh,  see  dohati]  milked, 
drawn  Sn  18  (duddha-khIra  =  gavo  duhitva  gahita- 
khlra  SnA  27) ;  M  11.186.  — (nt.)  milk  Davs  v. 26. 

Dadrabhi  [another  form  of  dundubhi,  cp.  duddabha  & 
dundubhya]  a  kettle-drum,  in  Amata"  the  drum  of 
Nibbana  Vin  i.8=M  1.171  (dundubhi  at  the  latter 
passage) ;  PvA  189  (v.  1.  for  dundubhi). 

Dnndnbhi  (m.  &  f.)  [Sk.  dundubhi,  onomat. ;  cp.  other 
forms  under  daddabha,  dudrabhi]  a  kettle-drum,  the 
noise  of  a  drum,  a  heavy  thud,  thunder  (usually  as  deva° 
in  the  latter  meaning)  Pv  111.3^  ;  J  vi.465  ;  PvA  40,  189 
(v.  1.  dudrabhi).  —  Amata"  the  drum  of  Nibbana  M 
1.171  =Vin  '-8  (:  dudrabhi);  deva"  thunder  D  11.156; 
A  IV.311. 

•Dunoti  to  bum,  see  der,  dava,  dava  &  daya. 

Dnpatto  see  dvi  B  II. 

Dnbbawa  see  under  v^nna. 

Dobbntthika  see  under  vutthi. 

Dubbha  (&  dubha)  (adj.)  [Sk.  dambha,  see  dubbhati] 
deceiving,  hurting,  trying  to  injure  Vin  11.203  (  —  It  68 
where  dubbhe) ;  Pv  11.9^  (mitta°).  adubbha  one  who 
does  not  do  harm,  harmless  Pv  11.9*  (°panin  =  ahigsa- 
kahattha).  As  nt.  harmlessness,  frankness,  friendliness, 
good-will  Vin  1.347  (adrubhaya,  but  cp.  vv.  11.  p.  395  : 
adubbhaya  &  adrabbhavaya) ;  S  1.225  (adubbhaya 
trustily) ;  J  1.180  (id.  as  adubhaya) ;  spelt  wrongly 
adrubhaka  (for  adubbhaka,  with  v.  1.  adrabhaka  in 
expl.  of  adubbha-panin)  at  J  vi.311.  Note:  dabhaya 
(dat.)  is  also  used  in  Sk.  in  sense  of  an  adv.  or  infinitive, 
which  confirms  the  etymology  of  the  word.     Cp.  dobha. 

Dnbbhaka  (adj.)  [Sk.  dambhaka]  perfidious,  insidious, 
treacherous  Th  i,  214  (citta°).  Cp.  dubbhaya  & 
dubhaka. 


Dubbhati  {&  dubhati)  [Sk.  dabhnoti  cp.  J.P.T.S.  1889,  204  : 
dabh  (dambh).  pp.  dabdha;  idg.  'dhebh,  cp.  Gr.  arififid) 
to  deceive.  Cp.  also  Sk  drah  (so  Kern,  Toev.  p.  11, 
s.  v.  padubbhati).  See  also  dahara  &  dubha,  dubhaka, 
dfibhil  to  injure,  hurt,  deceive ;  to  be  hostile  to,  plot  or 
sin  against  (either  w.  dat.  J  v.245  ;  vi.491,  or  w.  loc. 
J  1.267;  111:2  12)  S  1.85  (ppr.  adubbhanto),  225;  It  86 
(dubbhe  =  dusseyya  Com.)  =  Vin  11.203  (where  dubbho) ; 
Th  I,  1129;  J  11.125;  IV. 261  :  v  487,  503.- — ppr.  also 
dflbhato  J  IV. 261  ;  ger.  dubbhitva  J  iv.79  ;  grd.  dub- 
bheyya  (v.  1.  dubheyya)  to  be  punished  J  v.71 .     Cp.  pa°. 

Dnbbhana  (nt.)  [Sk.  *dambhana]  hurtfulness,  treachery, 
injury  against  somebody  (c.  loc.)  PvA  114  (=anattha). 


Dubbhaya  —  dubbhaka,  S  1.107. 

Dubbhika  =  dubbhaka,      Pv      111. 
mittanar)  badhaka  Pv.'V  175). 

Dnbbhikkha  see  bhikkha. 


( =  mittadubbhjka. 


Dubbhin  (adj.-n.)  [Sk.  dambhin]  seeking  to  injure,  deceit 
ful;  a  deceiver,  hypocrite  J  iv.41  ;  Pv  11.9*  (mitta°) ; 
DhA  11.23  (mitta-dubhin).  —  f.  dubbhini  VvA  68  (so 
read  for  dubbini). 

Dnbha  (num. -adj.)  [See  dubhaya  &  cp.  dvi  B  II.]  both; 
only  in  abl.  dubhato  from  both   sides  Th  i,   1134;  Ps 
1.69  ;  11.35,  i8t  ;  Vv  46=1  ;  VvA  281  (for  Vv  64>»  duvad 
dhato). 

Dabhaya  (num.  adj.)  [a  contaminated  fonn  of  dn(ve)  & 
ubhaya ;  see  dvi  B  II.]  both  (see  ubhaya)  Sn  517,  526, 
IC07,  1 125  ;  J  111.442  ;  VI.  no. 

Dama  [Sk.  druma  =  Gr.  Spvixiig,  see  dam]  tree  A  111.43; 
J  1.87,  272  ;  n.75,  270  ;  VI. 249,  528  ;  Vv  84'* ;  Miln  278, 
347 ;  VvA  161. 

-agga  1.  the  top  of  a  tree  J  11.155.  —  2.  a  splendid 
tree  Vv  35*.  —  3.  a  tooth-pick  J  v.  156;  -inda  "king 
of  trees,"  rhe  Bodhi  tree  Dpvs  1.7 ;  -uttama  a  magni- 
ficent tree  Vv  39'  ;  -phala  fruit  of  a  tree  M  11.74  ;  Vism 
231  (in  comparison). 

Doyhati  Pass  to  dohati  (q.  v.). 

Dossa^  (nt.)  [Sk.  duria.  &  dusya]  woven  material,  cloth, 
turban  cloth;  (upper)  garment,  clothes  Vin  1.290; 
11.128,  174  ;  IV. 159.  D  1.103  ;  S  v.71  ;  M  1.215  :  "92  ; 
A  v.347  ;  Sn  679;  Pv  i.io^  (=uttariyai)  satakai]  PvA 
49);  ii.3'<;  Pug  55;  PvA  73,  75.  —  civara",  q.  v.; 
chava°  a  miserable  garment  D  1.166;  A  1.295;  11206; 
M  1.78,  308. 

-karandaka  a  clothes-chest  S  v.75  =M  1.2 15  ;  A  iv.230  ; 
-kotthagara  a  store-room  for  cloth  or  clothes  DhA  1.220, 
393  ;  -gahana  (-mangala)  (the  ceremony  of)  putting  on 
a  garment  DhA  11.87  ;  -calani  a  cloth  sieve  Vin  1.202  ; 
-patta  turban  cloth  Vin  11.266  (=^setavattha-patta 
Bdhgh.) ;  S  II.  102  ;  -phala  having  clothes  as  fruit  (of 
magic  trees,  cp.  kapparukkha)  Vv  46^  (cp.  VvA  199); 
-maya  consisting  in  clothes  Vv  46'  (cp.  VvA  199); 
-yuga  a  suit  of  garments  Vin  1.278;  M  1.215  — S  v.71  : 
Miln  31  (cp.  M  Vastu  1.61);  DhA  iv.ii  ;  -ratana  "a 
pearl  of  a  garment."  a  fine  garment  Miln  262.  -vaJti 
fringed  cotton  cloth  Vin  11.266.  -veiii  plaited  cotton 
cloth  Vin  11.266. 

Dassa~  at  J  111.54  is  usually  taken  as  =amussa  (cp.  amuka). 
C.  expl''  as  "  near  "  &  adds  "  asammussa."  Or  is  it 
Sk.  dusya  easily  spoilt  ?  See  on  this  passage  Andersen 
Pali  Reader  11. 124. 

DTissaka  =  dusaka  (q.  v.). 

Dussati  [Sk.  dusyati,  Denom.  fr.  pref.  duh  (du°) ;  pp. 
du^tha,  cans,  dusayati]  to  be  or  become  bad  or  cor 
rupted,  to  get  damaged  ;  to  ofiend  against,  to  do  wrong 


Dussana 


163 


Deddubhaka 


Vin  11.113;  S  1.13  =  164  ;  Dh  i25=PvA  116;  Dh  137; 
It  84  (dosaneyye  na  d.)  cp.  A  in.  110  (dussanlye  d.) ; 
J  VI.9;  Miln  loi,  386.  — pp.  duttha  (q.  v.).  — Caus. 
duseti  (q.  v.).     See  also  dosa'  &  dosaniya ;  &  pa°. 

Dussana  (f.)  &  Dussana  (nt.)  [Sk.  dusana,  cp.  dussati] 
defilement,  gui't  A  11.225  ;  Pug  18,  22  ;  Dhs  418.  1060  ; 
DA  1.195  (rajjana-d.  muyhana). 

Dnssanijra  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  dvesanlya,  because  of  dosa  = 
dve§a  taken  to  dns]  able  to  give  offence,  hateful,  evil 
(always  comb''  with  rajaniya,  cp.  raga  dosa  moha) 
A  iii.i  10  (dusaniye  dussati,  where  It  84  has  dosaneyye) : 
J  VI. 9  ;  Miln  386. 

Dnssassa  see  sassa. 

Dossika  a  cloth  merchant  J  VI.27O  ;  Miln  2O2,  331  sq. 

DoBSitatta  (nt.)  [Sk.  *dusitatva]  =  dussana.  Pug  18,  22. 

Dnha  (adj.-°)  [Sk.  duh  &  duha ;  see  dohati]  milking; 
yielding,  granting,  bestowing :  kama°  giving  pleasures 
J  IV.20  ;  V.33. 

Dohati  (to  milk)  see  dohati. 

Dnhana  (adj.-n.)  [Sk.  *druhana,  to  druh,  druhyati  to 
hurt,  cp.  Oir.  droch  ;  Ohg.  triogan  to  deceive,  traum  = 
dream  ;  also  Sk.  dhvarati.  For  further  connections  see 
Walde,  Lat.  H'lb.  under  fraus]  one  who  injures,  hurts  or 
deceives  ;  insidious,  infesting  ;  a  robber,  only  in  pantha" 
a  dacoit  D  1.135  ;  DA  1.296.  —  (nt.)  waylaying,  robbery 
(pantha°)  J  11. 281  (text  duhana),  388  (text:  pantha- 
dubhana,  vv.  11.  duhana  &  duhana) ;  DhsA  220.  —  Cp. 
maggadusin. 

Duhitika  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  druha,  fr.  druhyati]  infested  with 
robbers,  beset  with  dangers  S  iv.195  (niagga). — 
Note.  This  interpretation  may  Lave  to  be  abandoned  in 
favour  of  duhitika  being  another  spelling  of  dvlhitika  = 
hard  to  get  through  (q.  v.),  to  be  compared  are  the 
vv.  11.  of  the  latter  at  S  iv.323  (S.S.  duhitika  &  duhi- 
tika). 

Data'  [Ved.  duta.  prob.  to  dura  (q.  v.)  as  "  one  who  is  sent 
(far)  away,"  also  perhaps  Gr.  SnOXnij  slave.  See  Waldc, 
Lat.  WW.  under  dudum]  a  messenger,  envoy  Vin  1.16; 
11.32,  277;  D  l.isn;  S  IV. 194;  Sn  411  (raja°).  .(i?-  — 
deva°  Yama's  envoy,  Death's  messenger  A  1.138,  142  : 
M  11.75  sq.  ;  J  1. 1 38.  —  "0  paheti  to  send  a  messenger 
Miln  18.  PvA  133. 

D&ta'  (nt.)  [Sk.  dyuta,  see  juta]  play,  gaming,  gambling 
J  IV.248. 

Duteyya  (nt.)  [Sk.  dutya.  but  varying  in  meaning]  errand, 
commission,  messages  A  1V.19G;  J  111.134;  DA  1.78. — • 
"r)  gacchati  to  go  on  an  errand  Vin  11.202  ;  °i)  harati  to 
obtain  a  commission  Vin  111.87;  iv.23. 

-kamma  doing  a  messenger's  duty  Vin  1.359  ;  -pahi- 
nagamana  sending  A  going  on  messages  D  1.5  =  M 
Ml. 34  ;  A  11. 209  ;  M  11.18(1. 

Dabha  (adj.)  deceiving,  see  dubbha. 

Dabhaka'  (adj.)  fSk.  dambhaka]  deceiving,  treacherous, 
harmful  SnA  287  (mitta")  ;  f.  °ika  J  11.297. 

D&bhaka'  [Sk.  dambha,  cp.  dambholi]  a  diamond 
J  1.263=111.207. 

Dfibhana  (nt.)  deceiving,  pillaging,  robbing  etc.  at  J  11.388 
is  to  be  read  as  (pantha-)  duhana. 

Dabhin  (adj.)^dubbhin  J  11.180  (vv.  11.  dubha  &  dubbhi), 
327  ;  IV. 257  ;  DhA  11.23. 

D&bhl  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  dambha.  see  dubbhati]  perfidy,  treachery, 
J  1.412  ;  IV. 57  (v.  1.  dubhi) ;  vi.59(  =  aparadha). 


Dura  (adj.)  [Sk.  dura,  Ved  duva  (stirring,  urging  ou), 
compar.  daviyan,  Av.  duro  (far),  'dan;  cp.  Ohg. 
zawen,  Goth.  taujan  =  E.  do.  Another  form  is  *dena, 
far  in  respect  to  time,  as  in  Gr.  (i/'/r,  Stuioi',  Lat.  dudum 
(cp.  du-rare  =  en-dure).  See  also  dutiya  &  duta]  far, 
distant,  remote,  opp.  asanna  (J  11. 154)  or  santika 
(Dhs  677  :  Vism  402).  —  PvA  117.  Often  in  cpds.  (see 
below),  also  as  duri°,  e.  g.  duri-bhava  distance  Vism  71, 
377  ;  DhsA  76.  —  Cases  mostly  used  adverbially,  viz. 
ace.  durai]  far  J  11.154  ■'  DhA  1.192.  —  abl.  dOrato  from 
afar,  aloof  Vin  1.15  ;  11.195  ;  S  1.2  12  ;  Sn  511  ;  Dh  219 ; 
J  v. 78  (dura-durato) ;  Miln  23;  PvA  107.  durato 
karoti  to  keep  aloof  from  PvA  i  7. — loc.  dure  at  a  dis- 
tance, also  as  prep,  away  from,  far  from  (c.  abl.),  e.  g. 
Sn  468;  J  11.155,  449  (=ara);  111.189. — Sn  772;  Dh 
304  ;  J  VI. 364  ;  Dhs  677.  -  dure-patin  one  who  shoots 
far  [cp.  Sk.  dura-patin]  A  1.284;  11170.  202.  J  iv.494. 
See  also  akkhanavedhin.  — atidure  too  far  Vin  11.215. 
-kantana  at  Th  i,  1123:  the  correct  reading  seems 
to  be  the  v.  1.  durakantana,  see  akantana ;  -gata  gone 
far  away  Pv  11. 13*  (  =  paralokagata  Pv.^  1O4);  DhA 
111.377  (dura°).  -(g)gama  far-going,  going  here  & 
there  Dh  37  (cp.  DhA  1.304);  Pv  ii.9'<';  -ghuttha  far- 
renowned  Pv  II. 8^  ;  -vihara  (-vuttin)  living  far  away 
Sn  220. 

Durakkha  [du'-l-  rakkha]  see  rakkha  &  cp.  du'. 

Doratta  (adj.)  [du'-^ratta]  reddish  M  1.36  ("vanna). 

Dusaka  (adj.-n.)  [Sk.  dusaka]  corrupting,  disgracing,  one 
who  defiles  or  defames;  a  robber,  rebel  A  v. 71  (bhik- 
khuni") ;  J  11.270  ;  iv.495  ;  Sn  8g  (kula°  one  who  spoils 
the  reputation  of  the  clan) ;  DhA  11.23  (kuti°  an  incen- 
diary);  Miln  20  (pantha°).  As  dussaka  at  J  v. 113 
(kamma°) ;  Sn  A  2S7  (mitta°,  v.  1.  B.  for  dubhaka). 
—  panthadusaka  a  highwayman  Miln  J9r<.  —  f.  dusika 
J  III.  1 79  (also  as  dusiya  =  dosakarika) ;  a°  harmless 
Sn  312  (see  a°). 

Dusana  (nt.)  [see  duseti]  spoiling,  defiling  J  11.270;  Sdhp 
453- 

Diisita  [Sk.  dusita,  pp.  of  duseti]  depraved,  sinful,  evil 
PvA  226  ("citta). 

Dusin  (adj.-n.)  [Sk.  dujin]  =dus«ka,  in  magga"  (cp. 
pantha-dusaka)  a  highway  robber  Sn  84  sq. 

Duseti  [Sk.  dusayati,  caus.  of  dussati  (q.  v.).  Also  as 
dusseti  PvA  82]  to  spoil,  ruin;  to  injure,  hurt;  to 
defile,  pollute,  defame  Vin  1.79,  85,  86;  iv.212  (mag 
so  dusetukamo,  said  by  a  bhikkhuni),  316  (dusetui)) ; 
A  IV. 169  sq.  ;  J  1.454  :  l>-270  ;  DhA  11.22  (kuliy,  damage, 
destroy).  —  aor.  dusayi  J  11.110  (fared  ill). — pp. 
diisita.     Cp.  pa°,  pari" 

Duhana'  (nt.)  [see  duhana]  infesting,  polluting,  defaming ; 
robbing,  only  in  pantha"  (with  v.  1.  duhana)  way- 
laying j  11.281.  388;  Tikp  280. 

Duhana^  (nt.)  [Sk.  dohana,  see  dohati]  milking  {■'}.  in 
kiunbha"  filling  the  pails  with  milk,  i.  e.  giving  much 
milk  (gavo ;  cp.  Sk.  dronadugha  a  cow  which  yields 
much  milk)  Sn  309. 

D&hitika  see  duhitika. 

Dejjha  (  =  dvejjha.  see  dvi  B  1.5)  divided,  in  a"  undivided- 
ness  J  111.7  (com.  abhejja).  274=iv.258  (dhanug  a  "g 
karoti  to  get  the  bow  ready,  v.  1.  BB.  sarejjhag  ;  C. 
expl'^  jiyaya  ca  sarena  ca  saddhir)  ekam  eva  katva). 

Ded4ahha  [Sk.  dui}<jubhaj  a  water-snake ;  salamander 
J  111.16;  VI. 194  ;  Sdhp  292.     See  next. 

Deddubhaka  i.  a  sort  of  snake  (see  prec.)  J  1.361.  —  2.  a 
kind  of  girdle  (in  the  form  of  a  snake's  head)  Vin  11.136 
(expl''  by  udaka-sappi-sira-sadisa). 


Dendima 


164 


Deva 


DeQ^ima  (m  nt  )  fSk  dintlima,  cp.  dinUinia]  a  kind  of 
kcttlc-drum  D  i  71J  (v.  ].  dindima) ;  Nd''  219  ("ka,  v.  1. 
dmd°) ;  J  1.355;  (  — pataha-bheri) ;  v.322  =vi.2i7  ; 
vi.465=58o. 

Depiccha  (adj.)  [— dvepiccha,  sec  dvi  li  I.  5]  having  two 
tail-feathers  J  v. 339. 

Deyya  (adj.)  [Sk.  deya.  grd.  of  da,  see  dadati  I.  2,  b]  (a)  to 
be  given  (see  below).  —  (b)  deserving  a  gift,  worthy  of 
receiving  alms  J  111.12  (a');  Miln  87  (raja'^)  -nt.  a  gift, 
offering  Vin  1.39.S  (saddha°). 

-dhamma  a  gift,  lit.  that  which  has  the  quality  of 
being  given :  esp.  a  gift  of  mercy,  meritorious  gift 
S  1.175  ;  A  i.ijd,  166  ;  11.264  (saddha") ;  Pv  i.ii ;  11. 3''  ; 
PvA  5,  7  sq.,  2h,  92  ("bija).  103,  129;  cp.  Av6  1.308. 
The  deyyadhamma  (set  of  gifts,  that  which  it  is  or 
should  be  a  rule  to  give)  to  mendicants,  consists  of  14 
items,  which  arc  (as  enum**  at  Nd^  523  under  the  old 
Brahman's  term  yanna  "  sacrifice  ")  (l)  civara,  (2)  piii- 
dapata,  (3)  senasana,  (4)  gilana-paccaya-bhesajja-parik- 
khara,  (5)  anna,  (6)  pana,  (7)  vattha,  (8)  yana,  (9)  mala, 
(10)  gandha,  (ii)  vilcpana,  (12)  seyya,  (13)  avasatha, 
(14)  padipeyya.  A  similar  enum"  in  difE.  order  is 
found  at  Nd'  373. 

Deva  [Ved.  deva,  Idg.  *deia  to  shine  (see  dibba  &  diva), 
orig.  adj.  'deiuos  belonging  to  the  sky,  cp.  Av.  daevo 
(demon.),  Lat.  deus,  Lith.  devas ;  Ohg.  Zio ;  Ags.  Tig, 
gen.  Tlwes  (  -Tuesday);  Oir.  dia  (god).     The  popular 
etymology  refers  it  to  the  root  div  in  the  sense  of  playing, 
sporting  or  amusing  oneself :  dibbanti  ti  deva,  pancahi 
kamagunehi   ki|anti  attano  va   siriya  jotanti  ti  attho 
KhA  123]  a  god,  a  divine  being;   usually  in  pi.  deva 
the  gods.     As  title  attributed  to  any  superhuman  being 
or  beings  regarded  to  be  in  certain  respects  above  the 
human  level.     Thus  primarily  (see  i')  used  of  the  first 
of  the  next-world  devas,  Sakka,  then  also  of  subordinate 
deities,  demons  &  spirits  (devafifiatara  some  kin<l  of 
deity ;     snake-demons :      nagas,      tree-gods :     rukklia- 
devata  etc.).     Also  title  of  the  king  (3).     Always  im- 
plying splendour  (cp.  above  etyni.)  A  mobility,  beauty, 
goodness  &  light,  &  as  such  opposed  to  the  dark  powers 
of  mischief  &  destruction  (asura  :  Titans ;  pcta :  miser- 
able  ghosts ;    ncrayika   satta :    beings   in   Niraya).     A 
double  position  (dark  &  light)  is  occupied  by  Yania,  the 
god  of  the  Dead  (see  Yama  &  below  i  c).     Always  im- 
plying also  a  kinship  and  continuity  of  life  with  humanity 
and  other  beings ;  all  devas  have  been  man  and  may 
again   become   men    (cp.   D   117   sq.  ;    S   111.85),    hence 
"  gods  "  is  not  a  coincident  term.     All  devas  are  them- 
selves in  sagsara,  needing  salvation.     Many  are  found 
worshipping  saints  (Th  i.ii2-/-c) ;  Th  11  3O5).  --  The  collec- 
tive appellations  differ ;  there  are  var.  groups  of  divine 
beings,  which  ia  their  totality  (cp.   tiivatiijsa)  include 
some  or  most  of  the  well-known   Vedic  doilies.     Thus 
some  collect,  designations  are  deva  sa-indaka  (the  guds, 
includinglndraorwiththcirrulerat  tlicirliead  :  1)  li.JoH  ; 
S  111.90,  A  v.325).  sa-pajapatika  (S  111.9"),  sa-maraka 
(see  deva-manussaloka),  sa-brahmaka   (S   iii.ijn).     See 
below  I  b.     Lists  of  popular  gods  are  to  be  found,  e.  g. 
at   D   11.253;    ni.iy(. — A  current   distinction   dating 
from  the  latest  books  in  the  canon  is  that  into  j  clashes, 
viz.    sammuti-dev.'i    (conventional   gods,    gods   in    the 
public  opinion,  i.  e.  kings  i\:  princes  J  1  132  ;  DA  i.  r  74), 
visuddhi°  (beings  divine  by  purity,  i.  e.  of  great  religious 
merit   or   attainment    like    Arahants    A:    Duddhas),    A; 
upapatti"  (being  born  divine,  i.  e.  in  a  heavenly  state  as 
one  of  the  gatis,  like  bhuinma-deva  etc.).     This  division 
in    detail  at  Nd^  307;  Vbh  422;   KhA   123;  VvA   18. 
L'nder  the   3rd   category   (upapatti^)   seven  groups  are 
enumerated  in  the  foil,  order:  Catummaharajika  deva, 
Tavatirjsa  d.  (with  Sakka  as  chief),  Yama  d.,  Tusita  d., 
Nimmanarati  d.,   Paranimmita-vasavatti  d.,   Brahma- 
kayika  d.     Thus  at  1)  :  JiG  s<i.  ;  A  1.2  lo,  332  sq.  ;  Nd^ 
^07;  cp.  S  M33  &  J  1.4S.     See  also  devata. 


I.  good  etc.  —  (a)  sg.  a  god,  a  deity  or  divine  being, 
M  1.71  (d.  va  Maro  va  Brahma  va) ;  S  iv.180  =A  iv.461 
(devo  va  bhavissami  devanriataro  va  ti:  I  shall  become 
a  god  or  some  one  or  other  of  the  (subordinate  gods, 
angels) ;  Sn  1024  (ko  nu  devo  va  Brahma  va  Indo  vapi 
Sujampati) ;  Dh  105  (-1- gandhabba,  Mara,  Brahma); 
A  11.91,  92  (puggalo  devo  hoti  devaparivaro  etc.) ;  PvA 
16  (yakkho  va  devo  va).  —  (b)  pi.  deva  gods.  These 
inhabit  the  26  devalokas  one  of  which  is  under  the  rule 
of  Sakka,  as  is  implied  by  his  appellation  S.  devanag 
indo  (his  opponent  is  Vepacitti  Asur-indo  S  1.222)  S 
1. 216  sq.  ;   iv.ioi,  269;  A  1.144;  Sn  34O ;  PvA  22  etc. 

—  Var.  kinds  are  e.  g.  appaman'-abha  (opp.  paritt' 
abha)  M  in.  147;  abhassara  D  1.17;  Dh  200;  khidda- 
padosika  D  i.ig;  gandhabba-kayika  S  in. 250  sq. ; 
cattaro  maharajika  S  v. 409,  423:  Jat  1.48;  Pv  iv.ii'; 
PvA  17,  272  ;  naradeva  tidasa  S  1.5  ;  bhumnia  PvA  5  ; 
manapa-kayika  A  iv.265  sq.  ;  mano-padosika  D  1.20  ; 
valahaka-kayika  S  111.254.  —  ^'ar.  attributes  of  the 
Devas  are  e.  g.  ayuppamana  A  1.267;  ii.i-!6  sq. ; 
IV. 252  sq.  ;  dighayuka  S  in. 86  ;  A  11.33  ■  rupino  mano- 
maya  M  1.4 10,  etc.  etc.  —  See  further  in  general :  D  1.54 
(satta  deva);  11.14,  '57.  208;  S  v.475  =  A  1.37;  Sn  258 
(-1- manussa),  310  (id.);  404,  679;  Dh  30,  56,  94,  230, 
366  ;  Ps  1.83  sq. ;  11.149  ;  Vbh  86,  395,  412  sq.  ,  Nett  23  ; 
Sdhp  240.  —  (c)  deva=Yania  see  deva-dijta  (expl**  at 
J  1. 1 39:  devo  ti  maccu).  — atideva  a  pre-eminent  god, 
god  above  gods  (Ep.  of  the  Buddha)  Nd'  307 ;  DhsA 
2  etc.  ;  see  under  cpds.  —  2.  the  sky,  but  only  in  its 
rainy  aspect,  i.  e.  rain-cloud,  rainy  sky,  rain-god  (cp. 
Jupiter  Pluvius ;  K.S.  1.40,  n.  2  on  Pajjunna,  a  Catu- 
maharajika),  usually  in  phrase  deve  vassante  (when  it 
rains  etc.),  or  devo  vassati  (it  rains)  D  1.74  (:  d?vo  ti 
megho  DA  1.2 18) ;  S  1.6  ,  154  (cp.  It  66  megha) ;  Sn  18, 
30;  J  V.201  ;  DhA  11.58,  82:  PvA  139.  devo  ekam 
ekam  phusayati  the  cloud  rains  drop  by  drop,  i.  e. 
lightly  Si.  104  sq.,  154,  184  ;  iv.289.  — thuUa-phusitake 
deve  vassante  when  the  sky  was  shedding  big  drops  of 
rain  S  111. 141  ;  v. 396  ;Ai.243;ii.i40;v.ii4;  Vism  259. 

—  vigata-valahake  deve  when  the  rain-clouds  have 
passed  S  1.65;  M  11.34,  -J^- — 3-  I'i'ig.  usually  in  voc. 
deva,  king!  Vin  1.272;  111.43;  A  11.57;  J  l-'5".  3"7; 
PvA  4,  74  etc. 

devi  (f.)  I.  goddess,  of  Potis,  Yakkliinis etc.  ;  seeetym. 
expl.  at  VvA  18.  —  Pv  n.i'*;  Vv  i^  etc. — 2.  queen 
Vin  1.82  (Rahulamata),  272;  D  11.14;  A.  II-57.  202 
(Mallika)  J  1.50  (Maya);  111. 188;  PvA  19,  75. 

-acchara  a  divine  Apsara,  a  heavenly  joy-maiden 
Vism  531  ;  PvA  46.  279  ;  -afiiiatara,  in  phrase  devo  va 
d.  va,  a  god  or  one  of  the  retinue  of  a  god  S  iv.iSo  — 
A  IV. 461  ;  PvA  16;  -dtideva  god  of  gods,  i.  e.  divine 
beyond  all  divinities,  a  supcr-deva,  of  Buddha  Nd*  307 
iV  on  Sn  1 134  ;  J  iv.  158^ DhA  1.147  ;  ^^  64"  ;  VvA  18  ; 
Miln  241,  258,  368,  3S4  A  passim  ;  cp.  M  Vastu  1.106,  257, 
283,  2gi  ;  -attabhava  a  divine  condition,  state  of  a  god 
PvA  14  ;  -anubhava  divine  majesty  or  power  D  11. 12  ; 
M  111.120  ;  J  1.59  ;  -asana  a  scat  in  heaven  It  7O  ;  -^ura- 
sangama  the  light  between  the  Gods  &  the  Titans 
D  11.285  ;  ^  1.222  ;  IV. 2(1 1  ;  v. 447;  M  1.253  ;  A  iv.432  (at 
all  passages  in  identical  phr;ise) ;  -iddhi  divine  powtr 
Vv  31^  ;  VvA  7  ;  -isi  a  divine  Seer  Sn  1 1  lO ;  Nd-  310  ; 
-upapatti  rebirth  among  the  gods  PvA  6 ;  -orohana 
descent  of  the  gods  DliA  ill. .(43  ;  -kaiina  a  celestial 
maiden,  a  nymph  S  i.jio  ;  J  i.6i  ;  VvA  37,  78  ;  -kaya  a 
particular  group  of  gods  S  1.210;  It  77;  Th  2,  31; 
-kufijara  "elephant  of  the  gods."  of  Indra  J  v.158; 
•kumara  son  of  a  god  (cp.  °putta)  J  111.391  ;  -gana  a 
troop  of  gods  J  1.203;  DhA  111.441  ;  -gaha  a  temple, 
chapel  Vin  111.43  :  -carika  a  visit  to  the  gods,  journeying 
in  the  devaloka  VvA  3,  7,  165  etc.  ;  -tthana  heavenly 
seat  J  111.55;  a  temple,  sacred  place  Miln  91,  330; 
-dattika  given  or  granted  by  a-  god,  extraordinary 
PvA  145;  -dattiya  "dattika  J  111.37;  DhA  1.278; 
-daruka  a  species  of  pine  J  v.420  ;  -dundubhi  the  celestial 
drum,  i.  c.  thunder  D  1.10;  Miln  178;  DA  1.95;  -duta 


Devaka 


165 


Desana 


the  god's  (i.  e.  Yama's  see  above  i')  messenger  A  1.1.58, 
142;  M  U.75;  in. 179;  J  1. 138;  DhA  1.85  (tayo  d.)  ; 
Mhbv.  122  ("suttanta) ;  -deva  "  the  god  of  gods,"  Ep. 
of  the  Buddha  (cp.  devatideva)  Th  i,  533,  1278  (of 
Kappayana) ;  DlisA  i  ;  PvA  140  ;  -dhamma  that  which 
is  divine  or  a  god  A  111.277  (°ika)  ;  DhA  111.74  ■  -dhita  a 
female  deva  or  angel  (cp.  devaputta),  lit.  daughter  of  a 
god  J  11.57;  VvA  137.  153  (with  ref.  to  Vimanapetis) ; 
-nagara  the  city  of  the  Devas,  heaven  J  1.168.  2ri2  ; 
DhA  1.280  ;  -nikaya  a  class,  community  or  group  of 
gods,  celestial  state  or  condition  D  11. 261  (sixty  enunV') ; 

5  IV.180;  M  1. 102  sq.  ;  A  1.63  sq. ;  11.185;  111249  sq.  ; 
IV. 55  ;  V.18  ;  -paiiha  questioning  a  god,  using  an  oracle 
D  i.ii  (  =  DA  1.97  :  devadasiya  sarire  devatarj  ot.iretva 
panha-pucchanar)) ;  -parivara  a  retinue  of  gods  A  11. gi  ; 
-parisa  the  assembly  of  gods  A  11. 1 85  ;  Tikp  24 1 .  -putta 
"son  of  a  god,"  a  demi-god,  a  ministering  god  (cp.  f. 
dcva-dhita),  usually  of  Yakkhas,  but  also  appl'  to  the 
4  archangels  having  charge  of  the  higher  world  of  the 
Yama  deva  (viz.  Suyama  devaputta) ;  the  Tusita  d. 
(Santusita  d.) ;  the  Nimmanarati  d.  (Suniramita  d.) ;  & 
the  ParanimmitavasavattI  d.  (Vasavatti  d.)  D  1.2 1 7  sq.  ; 
cp.  J  1.48.  —  D  11.12,  14  ;  S  1.46  sq.  ;  216  sq.  ;  iv.280  ; 
A  1.278;  It  76  ;  J  1.59  (jara-jajjara) ;  iv.ioo  (Dhamma 
d.) ;  VI. 239  (fava  d.) ;  PvA  6,  9,  55,  92,  113  (Yakkho  ti 
dcvaputto) ;  Miln  23 ;  -pura  the  city  of  the  gods, 
heaven  S  iv.202  ;  Vv  64-"'  ( —  Sudassana- mahanagara 
VvA  285) ;  J  1V.I43  ;  -bhava  celestial  existence  PvA  1O7  ; 
-bhoga  the  wealth  of  the  gods  PvA  97 ;  -manussa 
(pi.)  gods  &  men  D  1.46,  62«(,  99  ("manuse)  ;  M  11.38, 
55;  Sn  14  (sa"),  23O  (°pujita),  521;  It  8(j  ("setthk) ; 
Kh  vni.iii;  KhA  196;  PvA  17,  31,  117;  -'-'loka  the 
world  of  gods  and  men.  It  comprises  (1)  the  world 
of  gods  proper  (Dcvas,  i.  e.  Sakka,  Mara  &  Brahma  ; 
corresp.  to  sammuti-deva.  see  above);  (2)  sanianas  & 
brahmaiias  (cp.  visuddhi-deva) ;  (3)  gods  &  men  under 
the  human  aspect  (gati,  cp.  upapatti  deva) :  Su  1047, 
K163  ;  cxpl.  at  Nd^  309  &  (with  ditf.  interpretations) 
DA  1. 1 74  sq. ;  -yana  leading  to  the  (world  of) 
the  gods,  i.  e.  the  road  to  heaven  Sn  1 39,  also  in 
°yaniya  (magga)  D  1.215  ;  -raja  king  of  the  devas,  viz. 
Sakka  Nd'  177;  J  111.392  (=devinda);  DhA  in. 441  ; 
PvA  62  ;  -nipa  divine  appearance  or  form  PvA  92  ; 
-loka  the  particular  sphere  of  any  devas,  the  seat  of  the 
devas,  heaven  ;  there  exist  26  such  spheres  or  heavens 
(see  loka) ;  when  2  are  mentioned  it  refers  to  Sakka's 

6  Brahma's  heavens.  A  seat  in  a  dcvaloka  is  in  sar)- 
sara  attained  by  extraordinary  merit:  Dh  177  ;  J  1.202, 
203  ;  IV. 273  ;  rii.\  74  ;  KhA  228  ;  PvA  5,  9,  21,  06,  81. 
89  ;  Vism  415.  etc.  ;  -vimana  the  palace  of  a  deva  J  1.58  ; 
VvA  1  73  ;  -sankhalika  a  magic  chain  J  11.12S  ;  v.92.  94  ; 
-sadda  heavenly  sound  or  talk  among  the  dcvas  It  75 
(three  such  sounds). 

Devaka  (adj.)  (-")  [devat-  ka]  belonging  or  peculiar  to  the 
devas  ;  only  in  sa°-loka  the  world  including  the  gods  in 
general  D  1.62  ;  Nd^  309  ;  Sn  80,  377,  443,  760  etc.  ; 
Miln  234.     See  also  dcvamanussa-loka. 

Devata  (adj.)  (-")  having  such  &  such  a  god  as  one's  special 
divinity,  worshipping,  a  worshipper  of,  devotee  of  Miln 
234  (15rahma°+ Brahma  (garuka). — f.  devata  in  pati° 
"  worshipping  the  husband,"  i.  e.  a  devoted  wife  J 
111.406 :  VvA  128. 

Devata  (f)  [dcva+ta,  qualitative-abstr.  suffix,  like  Lat. 
juventa,  scnecta.  Goth.  hauhi|>a,  Ohg.  fuUida  cp.  Sk. 
pfirnata,  bandhuta  etc.]  "  condition  or  state  of  a  deva." 
divinity ;  divine  being,  deity,  fairy.  The  term  com- 
prises all  beings  which  are  otherwise  styled  devas,  &  a 
list  of  them  given  at  Nd^  308  &  based  on  the  principle 
that  any  being  who  is  worshipped  (or  to  whom  an  offering 
is  made  or  a  gift  given:  dc-vata  —  yesar)  deti,  as  is 
expressed  in  the  conclusion  "  ye  yesar)  dakkhineyya  te 
tesaQ  devata  ")  is  a  devata,  comprises  5  groups  of  5 
kinds   each,    viz.    (i)    ascetics;    (2)    domestic    animals 


(elephants,  horses,  cows,  cocks,  crows) ;  (3)  physical 
forces  &  elements  (fire,  stone  etc.) ;  (4)  lower  gods 
( :  bhumma  deva)  (naga,  suvaniia,  yakkha,  asura, 
gandhabba) ;  (5)  higher  gods  ( :  inhabitants  of  the  deva- 
loka  proper)  Maharaja,  Canda,  Suriya,  Inda,  Brahma), 
to  which  are  added  the  2  aspects  of  the  sky-god  as  deva- 
devata  &  disa-devata).  —  Another  definition  at  VvA  21 
simply  states':  devata  ti  devaputto  pi  Brahma  pi  deva- 
dhita  pi  vuccati.  —  Among  the  var.  deities  the  foil,  are 
frequently  mentioned :  rukkha"  tree-gods  or  dryads 
M  1.306;  J  1. 221;  PvA  5;  vatthu"  earth  gods  (the 
four  kings)  Pv  4' ;  PvA  1 7  ;  vana°  wood-nymphs  M 
1.306;  samudda°  water-sprites  J  11. 112  etc.  etc. — 
D  i.iSo  (mahiddhika,  pi.).  192;  11.8,  87,  139,  158; 
S  I.  sq.  ;  IV. 302  ;  M  1.245  ;  11.37 ;  A  1.O4,  2 10,  311  ;  11.70 
(sapubba") ;  111.77  (bali-patiggShika),  287  (saddh.lya 
saraannagata) ;  309;  iv.302  sq.,  390  (vippatisiriniyo) ; 
v. 331  ;  Sn  45,  316,  458,  995,  1043;  Dh  99;  J  1.59.  7-. 
223,  256;  IV. 1 7,  474;  Vv  lO^;  Pv  II.  1'";  KhA  113.  117; 
PvA  44. 

-inubhava  divine  power  or  majesty  J  1. 16S  ;  -Anussati 
"  remembrance  of  the  gods."  one  of  the  6  anussati- 
tJlianani.  or  subjects  to  be  kept  in  mind  D  111.250,  280, 
cp.  A  1. 211  ;  Visra  197.  -uposatha  a  day  of  devotion 
to  the  gods  A  1.211  ;  -paribhoga  fit  to  be  enjoyed  by 
gods  J  II. 104;  -ball  an  oHering  to  the  gods  A  11.08; 
-bhava  at  PvA  1 10  read  as  devattabhava  (opp.  petatla- 
bhava). 

Devati  [divj  to  lament,  etc. ;  see  pari".  Cp.  also  parideva 
etc. 

Devatta  (nt.)  [deva+  tta]  the  state  of  being  a  deva,  divinity 
ThA  70  ;  PvA  1 10  ("bhava  as  Vakkha,  opp.  petatla 
bhava ;  so  read  for  devata-bhava). 

Devattana  (nt.)  [last]  sfate  or  condition  of  a  deva  Th  1, 
1127;  cp.  petattana  in  the  foil,  verse. 

Devara  [Sk.  dovr  it  devara  Gr.  I'lii';^)  (* Uml- ini) .  Lat.  Icvir, 
Ohg.  zeihhur.  Ags.  ticor]  husband's  brother,  brother- 
in-law  J  VI. 152  ;  Vv  ^2}^  (sa°).  popularly  cxpl''  at  VvA 
135  as  "  dutiyo  varo  ti  va  dovaro,  bhattu  kanittha 
bhata." 

Devasika  (a<lj.)  [Dcr.  fr.  divasa]  daily  J  V.3S3  ;  DA  1,296 
("bhatta-bhattavetena) ;  DhA  1.187  sq.,  -nt.  "g  as  adv. 
daily,  every  day  J  1.82.  J  1.149,  186;  VvA  67,  75; 
DhA  1.28  ;  11.41. 

Desa  [Ved.  desa.  cp.  disu]  point,  part,  place,  region,  spot, 
country.  Vin  1.4O;  11.211  ;  M  1.437;  J  1.308;  DhsA  307 
("bhiita)  ;  PvA  78  ("antara  prob.  to  be  read  dos").  153  ; 
KhA  132,  227.  — -desag  karoti  to  go  abroad  J  v. 340 
(p.  342  has  disai)).  —  kaficid-cva  desarj  pucchati  to  ask 
a  little  point  D  1.51  ;  M  1.229;  '^  v. 39,  somntimes  as 
kiricid-cva  d.  p.  S  ill. ml  ;  M  111.15;  v.  1.  at  D  1.51. 
—  desagata  panha  a  question  propounded,  lit.  come  into 
the  region  of  some  one  or  having  become  a  point  of 
discussion  Miln  202. 

Desaka  (adj.)  [Sk.  desaka]  pointing  out.  teaching,  advis- 
ing Sdhp  217.  519  —  (nt.)  advice,  instruction,  lesson 
M  1.438. 

Desana  (f)  [Sk.  desana]  1.  discourse,  instruction,  lesson 
S  v. 83.  108;  J  111. 84;  Pug  28;  Nett  38;  Vism  523  sq. 
(regarding  Paticcasamuppada) ;  PvA  i.  2.  9.  11  ;  Sdhp 
213.  2.  Preq.  in  dhamma"  moral  instruction,  exposition 
of  the  Dhamma.  preaching,  sermon  Vin  1.16;  A  1.53; 
11.182  ;  IV. 337  sij.  ;  It  33  ;  J  1.106  etc.  (a°  gamini  apatti). 
a  Parajika  or  Sanghadiscsa  offence  Vin  11.3.  87  ;  v. 187. 
Cp.  Vin.  Texts  11.33.  — 3.  (legal)  acknowledgment  Miln 
344.  —  Cp.  a°. 

-avasane  (loc.)  at  the  end  of  an  instruction  discourse 
or  sermon  DhA  111.175;  i'vA.  54;  -pariyosane -- prec. 
PvA  9.  31  etc.  -vilasa  beauty  oi  instruction  Vism 
524;  Tikapatthana  21. 

IV— 5 


Desika 


i66 


Dosa 


Degika  (adj.)  [Sk.  desika]  =desaka,  su°  one  who  points 
out  well,  a  good  teacher  Miln  195. 

Desita  [pp.  of  dcseti]  expounded,  shown,  taught  etc., 
given,  assigned,  conferred  Vin  in. 152  (marked  out); 
V.137;  D  11.154  (dhamma);  Dh  285  (nibbana) ;  PvA  4 
(magga:  indicated),  54  (given). 

Desetar  [n.  ag.  to  deseti]  one  who  instructs  or  .points  out ; 
a  guide,  instructor,  teacher  M  1.221,  249;  A  1.266; 
ni.441  ;  V.349. 

Deseti  [Sk.  de^ayati,  Caus.  of  disati,  q.  v.]  to  point  out, 
indicate,  show ;  set  forth,  preach,  teach  ;  confess.  Very 
freq.  in  phrase  dhammai)  d.  to  deliver  a  moral  discourse, 
to  preach  the  Ohamma  Vin  1.15  ;  11. 87,  188  ;  v. 125,  136  ; 
D  1.24 1,  A  n.185.  V.194  ;  It  III  ;  J  1.168 ;  111.394  ;  Pug 
57  ;  PvA  6.  —  aor.  adesesi  (S  i.i96=Th  i  1254)  &  desesi 
(PvA  2,  12,  78  etc.)  —  pp.  desita  (q.  v.). 

Dessa  &  Dessiya  (adj.)  [Sk.  d,ve5ya,  to  dvis,  see  disa]  dis- 
agreeable, odious,  detestable  J  1.46 ;  11.285  i  iv.406  ; 
VI. 570,  ThA  268,  Milo  281.. 

Dessati  [Sk.  dvisati  &  dve§ti ;  see  etym.  under  disa]  to  hate, 
dislike,  detest  SnA  168  (  =  na  piheti,  opp.  kameti). 

Desaata  (f.)  [Sk.  dvesyata]  repulsiveness  Miln  281. 

Dessin  (adj.)  [Sk.  dvesin]  hating,  detesting  Sn  93  (dham- 
ma"). 

Deha  [Sk.  deha  to  *dheigh  to  form,  knead,  heap  up  (cp. 
kaya  =  heap),  see  diddha.  So  also  in  uddehaka.  Cp. 
Kern,  Toev.  p.  75  s.  v.  sariradeha.  Cp.  Gr.  Tttxos 
(waU)  =  Sk.  dehi ;  Lat.  fingo  &  figura;  Goth,  deigan 
(knead)=Ohg.  teig  =  E.  dough]  body  A  11. 18;  PvA  10, 
122.  Usually  in  foil,  phrases :  hitva  manusai)  debar) 
S  1.60 ;  Pv  11.9** ;  pahaya  m.  d.  S  1.27,  30  ;  jahati  d. 
M  11.73 ;  °g  nikthipati  Pv  11. 6'^ ;  (muni  or  kliJijasavo) 
antJma-deha-dharin  (°dharo)  S  1.14,  53  ;  11.278  ;  Sn  471  ; 
Th  II. 7,  10  ;  It  32,  40,  50,  53.  °nikkhepana  laying  down 
the  body  Vism  236. 

Dehaka  (nt.)  =  deha;  pi.  limbs  Th  2,  392  ;  cp.  ThA  258. 

Dehin  (adj.  -n.)  that  which  has  a  body,  a  creature  Pgdp 

12,  16. 

DoQa  [Sk.  dropa  (nt.)  conn,  with  *dereQO  tree,  wood, 
wooden,  see  dabbi  &  daru  &  cp.  Sk.  druni  pail]  a  wooden 
pail,  vat,  trough ;  usually  as  measure  of  capacity  (4 
Alhaka  generally)  Pv  iv.3'''  (mitani  sukhadukkhani 
donehi  pitakehi).  tarjdula"  a  dona  of  rice  DhA  in. 264  ; 
IV.I5.  At  J  n.367  doQa  is  used  elliptically  for  doQa- 
mapaka  (see  below). 

-paka  of  which  a  d.  full  is  cooked  a  dona  measure  of 
food  S  1. 81  ;  DhA  n.8.  -mapaka  (mahamatta)  (a  higher 
official)  supervising  the  measuring  of  the  dona-revenue 
(of  rice)  J  11.367,  378,  381;  DhA  iv.88 ;  -mita  a  d. 
measure  full  D  1.54;  M  1.518. 

Do^ika  (adj.)  [fr.  do,na]  measuring  a  doi;ia  in  capacity 
Vin  1.240  (catu°  pitaka). 

DoQika  (f.)=doni',  viz.  a  hollow  wooden  vessel,  tub,  vat 
Vin  1.286  (rajana"  for  dyeing) ;  11.120  (mattika  to  hold 
clay)  220  (udaka°),  221  (vacca°  used  for  purposes  of 
defaecation).     See  also  passjva". 

DoQl^  (f.)  [Sk.  droiji,  see  dona]  i.  a  (wooden)  trough,  a 
vat,  tub  S  11.259;  A  1.253;  V.323  ;  J  1.450;  Miln  56. 
—  tela"  aitoil  vat  A  in. 58  (ayasa  made  of  iron  &  used  as 
a  sarcophagus).  —  2.  a  trough-shaped  canoe  (cp.  Marathi 
^on  "  a  long  flat-bottomed  boat  made  of  undi  wood,"  & 
Kanarese  doni  "  a  canoe  hallowed  from  a  log  "]  J  iv.163 
(  =  gambhira  mahanava  p.  164);  PvA  189. — 3.  a  hol- 
low, dug  in  the  ground  MUn  397.  —  4.  the  body  of  a 
lute,  the  sounding-board  (?)  J  1.450  ;  Miln  53  ;  VvA  281. 


DoqI'  (f.)  [Sk.  droi.ii  ?]  an  oil-giving  plant  (?)  (or  is  it  = 
doni*  meaning  a  cake  made  in  a  tub,  but  wrongly 
interpreted  by  Dhammapala  ?)  only  in  -nimminjana 
oil-cake  Pv  lio'";  as  "nimmijjani  at  V'v  33''*;  expl'' 
by  telaminjaka  at  PvA  51  &  by  tilapiflnaka  at  VvA 
147. 

Dobbhagga  (nt.)  [Sk.  daurbhagya  fr.  duh-(-  bhaga]  ill  luck, 
misfortune  Vin  iv.277;  DhA  281  (text:  "dobhagga). 

Dobha  [see  dubbha]  fraud,  cheating  D  11.243  (v.  1.  dobbha  = 
dubbha). 

Domanassa  (nt.)  [Sk.  daurmanasya,  dul.i-l- manas]  dis- 
tress, dejectedness,  melancholy,  grief.  As  mental  pain 
(cetasikar)  asataij  cet.  dukkharj  S  v.2(vy  —  Nd-  312  ;  cp. 
D  ii.3'jO  ;  Nett  12)  opp.  to  dukkha  physical  ])ain :  sec 
dukkha  B  III.  i  a).  A  synonym  of  domanassar)  is  ap- 
paccaya  (q.  v.).  For  def"  of  the  term  see  Vism  461, 
504.  The  freq.  comb"  dukkha-domanassa  refers  to  an 
unpleasant  state  of  mind  &  body  (see  dukkha  B  III. 
1  b;  e.  g.  S  IV.198  ;  V.141  ;  M  11.64  ;  A  1.157  ;  It  89  etc.). 
the  contrary  of  somanassa;]  with  which  dom"  is  comb"* 
to  denote  "  happiness  A  unhappiness,"  joy  &  dejection, 
e.  g.  D  III. 270  ;  M  11. 16  ;  A  1.163  ;  Sn  67  (see  somanassa). 
—  Vin  1.34;  D  11.278,  306;  S  IV. 104.  188;  v.349,  451  : 
M  1.48,  65,  313,  340;  II. 51  ;  III. 218;  A  1.39  (abhijjha" 
covetousness  &  dejection,  see  abhijjha) ;  11. 5,  149  sq.  ; 
111.99,  207  ;  V.2 16  sq.  ;  Sn  592,  1 106  ;  Pug  20,  59  ;  Nett  I2, 
29  (citta-sampijanag  d.)  53,  Dhs  413,  421,  1389  ;Vbh 
15,  54,  71,  138  sq.  ;  Dh  1.121. 

-indriya  the  faculty  or  disposition  to  feel  grief  D 
111.239  (+  som°) ;  S  V.209  sq.  ;  -upavicara  discrimination 
of  that  which  gives  distress  of  mind  D  in. 245  ;  -patta 
dejected,  disappointed  J  11.155. 

Doia  (f.)  [Sk.  dola,  'del  as  in  Ags.  tealtian=E.  tilt,  adj. 
tealt  unstable  =  Sk.  dula  i§taka  an  unstable  woman]  a 
swing  J  IV. 283  ;  vi.341  ;  Vism  280  (in  simile). 

Dolayati  [Denom.  of  dola]  to  swing,  to  move  to  &  fro 
J  n.385. 

Dovacassa  (nt.)  [contamination  of  Sk.  *daurvacasya  evil 
speech  iS  *daurvratya  disobedience,  defiance]  unruliness, 
indocility,  bad  conduct,  fractiousness  S  11.204  sq. 
(°karana  dhamma);  M  1.95  (id.  specified);  A  11.147; 
III. 178  ;  Nett  40,   127. 

Dovacassata  (i)  [2nd  abstr.  of  dovacassa]  unruliness,  con- 
tumacy, stubbornness,  obstinacy  A  1.83,  in.3iu,  44S  ; 
V.146  sq.  ;  D  III. 212,  274  ;  Pug  20  ;  Dhs  1326  (cp.  Dlis. 
irsl.  p.  344) ;  Vbh  359,  369,  371. 

Dovaca3siya  (nt.)  =dovacassa  Pug  20  ;  Dhs  1325. 

Dovarika  [cp.  Sk.  dauvarika,  see  dvara]  gatekeeper, 
janitor  Vin  1.269;  D  n.83  ;  111.64  sq.,  100;  S  iv.194  ; 
M  1.380  sq. ;  A  iv.107,  no  ;  v.194  ;  J  n.132:  iv.382  (two 
by  name,  viz.  Upajotiya  &  Bhanda-kucchi).  447 ; 
VI. 367  ;  Miln  234.  332  ;  Vism  281 ;  Sdhp  356. 

DoTila  (adj.)  [Sk.  ?]  being  in  the  state  of  fructification, 
budding  J  vi.529  (cp.  p.  530) ;  Miln  334. 

Dosa'  [Sk.  dosa  to  an  Idg.  *deu(s)  to  want,  to  be  inferior 
etc.  (cp.  dussati),  as  in  Gr.  Oioftai,  Sfiwftm]  corruption, 
blemish,  fault,  bad  condition,  defect ;  depravity,  cor- 
rupted state ;  usually  -°  as  khetta"  blight  of  the  field 
Miln  360  ;  tina°  spoilt  by  weeds  Dh  356 ;  PvA  7 ;  visa" 
ill  effect  of  poison  Th  i,  758,  76S ;  sneha"  blemish 
of  sensual  affection  Sn  66.  Four  kasina-dosa  at  Vism 
123  ;  eighteen  making  a  Vihara  unsuitable  at  Vism  1 18 
sq.  —  J  11.417;  111.104  ;  Miln  330  (sabba-d.-virahita 
faultless);  DA  1.37,  141.  —  pi.  dosa  the  (three)  morbid 
affections,  or  disorder  of  the  (3)  humours  Miln  43  ;  adj. 
with  disturbed  humours  Miln  172,  cp.  DA  1.133. 


Dosa 


167 


Dvara 


Dosa'  [Sk.  dvesa,  but  very  often  not  distinct  in  meaning 
from  dosa*.  On  dve?a  see  under  disa]  anger,  ill-will, 
evil  intention,  wickedness,  corruption,  malice,  hatred. 
In  most  freq.  comb"  of  either  raga  (lust)  d.  &  moha 
(delusion),  or  lobha  (greed)  d.  moha  (see  r5ga  &  lobha), 
to  denote  the  3  main  blemishes  of  character.  For  def" 
see  Vism  295  &  470.  Interpreted  at  Nd^  313  as 
"  cittassa  aghato  pafighato  patigho  .  .  .  kopo  .  .  . 
kodho  .  .  .  vySpatti."  —  The  distinction  between  dosa 
&  patigha  is  made  at  DA  1.116  as:  dosa  =  dubbala- 
kodha  ;  pafigha  =  balavakodha.  —  In  comb"  lobha  d. 
moha  e.  g.  S  1.98  ;  M  1.47,  489  ;  A  1.134,  201  ;  11. 191  ; 
111.338 ;  It  45  (tini  akusalamulani).  With  raga  & 
moha  :  Dh  20  ;  It  2  =6  ;  with  raga  &  avijja;  It  57  ;  raga 
&  mana  Sn  270,  631  etc.  —  See  for  ref. :  Vin  1.183; 
D  III. 146,  159,  182,  214,  270;  S  1. 13,  15,  70;  V.34  sq.  ; 
M  1. 15,  96  sq.,  250  sq.,  305;  A  1. 187;  11.172,  203; 
III. 181  ;  Sn  506;  It  2  (dosena  duUhase  satta  gacchanti 
duggatig) ;  Ps  1.80  sq.,  102  ;  Pug  16,  18  ;  Dhs  418,  982, 
1060;  Vbh  86,  167.  208,  362;  Nett  13,  90;  Sdhp  33, 
43.  —  Variously  characterised  as  :  8  purisa-dos&  Vbh 
387  ;  khila,  nigha.  mala  S  v. 57  ;  agati  (4  agati-gamanani : 
chanda.  d.  moha,  bhaya)  rXiii.228,  cp.  133,  182  ;  ajjhat- 
tag  A  111.357  sq.  :  its  relation  to  kamma  A  1.134  ;  in. 338  ; 
V.262  ;  to  ariyamagga  S  v.5,  8.  — sadosa  corrupted, 
depraved,  wicked  D  1.80  ;  A  i.i  12  ;  adosa  absence  of  ill- 
will,  adj.  kind,  friendly,  sympathetic  A  1.135,  195,  203  ; 
II. 192:  Vbh  169,  210;  Dhs  33  (cp.  Dhs.  trsl.  21,  99); 
VvA  14  (-1- alobha  amoha). 

-aggi  the  fire  of  anger  or  ill-will  D  111.2 17  ;  S  iv.i9  sq. ; 
It  92  (4-ragaggi  moh") ;  J  1.61  ;  -antara  (adj.)  bearing 
anger,  intending  evil  in  one's  heart  Vin  11.249  ;  D  in. 237  ; 
M  1. 123;  A  1.59;  III. 196  sq.  ;  v.8i  (opp.  metta-citta) ; 
perhaps  at  PvA  78  (for  des°) ;  -kkhaya  the  fading  away, 
dying  out  of  anger  or  malice  S  111.160,  191;  iv.250  ; 
v.8 ;  Vbh  73,  89;  -gata=dosa  (-H  patigha)  S  iv.71  ; 
-gam  full  of  anger  S  1.24  ;  -dosa  ( :  dosa')  spoilt  by  anger 
I'h  357;  -saSiiita  connected  with  ill-will  It  78;  -sama 
like  anger  Dh  202  ;  -hetuka  caused  by  evil  intention  or 
depravity  A  v. 261   (panatipata). 

Dosaniya,  Dosanlya  ft  Dosaneyya  (adj.)  [grd. -formation 
cither  to  dosa'  or  dosa-,  but  more  Ukely  =  Sk.  'dusa- 
niya=dusya  (see  dussa-  &  dussati)  influenced  by 
dvesaniyaj  corruptible ;  polluting,  defiling ;  hateful, 
sinful  S  IV.307 ;  A  II. 120;  It  84  (where  A  in. no  has 
dussaniya  in  same  context). 

Dosa  (f.)  [Sk.  dosa  &  do.sas,  cp.  Gr.  (5i.o,  ilvofini  to  set  (of 
the  sun)]  evening,  dusk.  Only  in  ace.  as  adv.  dosag 
(  — dosag)  at  night  J  vi.386. 

Dosin.  (adj.)  [to  dosa^]  angry  J  v. 452,  454. 

Dosina  (f)  [Sk.  jyotsna,  cp.  P.  junha)  a  clear  night,  moon- 
light ;  only  in  phrase  ramaniya  vata  bho  dosina  ratti 
"  lovely  is  the  moonlight  night  "  D  i.47a:rj  1.509 : 
J  v.262  ;  Miln  5,  19  etc.  Expl''  in  popular  fashion  by 
Bdhgh.  as  "  dosapagata  "  ratti  DA  1.141. 

-punnamasi  a  clear,  full  moon  night  Th  i,  306,  1 1 19  ; 
-mukha  the  face  of  a  clear  night  J  vi.223. 

Doha'  [Sk.  doha  &  dogha]  milking,  milk  J  v.63,  433. 

Doha^  (adj.)  ;;Sk.  droha]  injuring  (-")  DA  1.296. 

Dohaka  [Sk.  doha]  a  milk-pail  J  v.  105. 

Dohati  [Sk.  dogdhi,  to  which  prob.  duhitr  daughter :  sec 
under  dhlti'i  it  cp.  dhenu]  to  milk.  —  pres.  i  pi.  dohama 
it  duhama  J  v. 105;  pret.  i  pi.  duhamase  ibid.;  pot. 
duhe  J  V.211  ;  ger.  duhitva  SnA  27;  pp.  duddha  (q.  v.) 
—  Pass,  duyiiati  S  1.174  (^o  ■'^^'1  fo""  duhanti) ;  J  v. 3^7  ; 
ppr.  duyhamana  Miln  41. — Sec  also  duhana,  doha', 
dohin. 

Dohala  [Sk.  dohada  &  daurhrda,  of  du+  hrd,  sick  longing, 
sickness,  see  hadaya.  Liiders  GoUinger  Gelehrlc  Nach- 
richlen  1898,  i  derives  it  as  dvi-h  hfd]  (a)  the  longing  of  a 


pregnant  woman  J  ni.28.  333;  DhA  1.350;  n.139. 
—  (b)  intense  longing,  strong  desire,  craving  in  general 
J  ni59.  433  ;  v. 40,  41  ;  vi.263,  308;  DhA  n.86  (dham- 
mika  d.). 

Doha)ayati  [Denom.  fr.  dohala]  to  have  cravings  (of  a 
woman  in  pregnancy)  J  vi.263. 

Doha|inI  (adj.-f.)  a  woman  in  pregnancy  having  cravings ; 
a  pregnant  woman  in  general  J  n.395.  435  ;  Jli.27 ; 
rv-334 :  V.330  (  =  gabbhini):  vi.270,  326.  484;  DhA 
in.95. 

Dohin  (adj.  n.)  one  who  milks,  milking  M  1.220  sq.  =A 
v. 347  sq.  (anavasesa"  milking  out  fully). 

Drfibha  incorrect  spelling  for  dubbha  (q.  v.)  in  adrubhaya 

Vin  1.347. 

DTa°  in  numeral  composition,  meaning  two  etc.,  see  under 
dvi  B  III. 

Draya  (adj.  -n.)  [Ved.  dvaya  ;  cp.  dvi  B  I.  6]  (adj.)  (a)  two- 
fold Sn  886  (saccar)  musa  ti  dvayadhammar)) ;  Dh  384  ; 
Pv  iv.i'"  (dvayar)  vipakar)  =duvidhar)  PvA  228). 
—  advaya  single  A  v.46.  —  (b)  false,  deceitful  Vin  ni.2 1. 
- —  nt.  a  duality,  a  pair,  couple  S  11. 17  (°g  nissito  loko) ; 
J  ni.395  (gatha°);  PvA  19  (masa°) ;  Dha  11.93  (pada° 
two  lines.  "  couplet  "). 

-karin   "  doing  both,"  i.  e.  both  good  &  eviX  deeds 
(su°  &  duccaritai))  S  in. 241,  cp.  247  sq. ;  D  111.96. 

Dra  (cp.  dva°)  see  dvi  B  III. 

Dr&ra  (nt.)  [Ved.  dvar  (f.)  &  dvara  (nt.),  base  *dhrar,  cp. 
Av.  dvaram  ;  Gr.  9ipa,  Svpiiv  ;  Lat.  fores  (gate),  forum ; 
Goth,  daiir,  Ohg.  turi=Ger.  tur.  Ags.  dor  =  E.  door.] 

1.  lit.  an  outer  door,  a  gate,  entrance  Vin  1.15  ;  S  1.58, 
138,  211  ;  J  1.346;  n.63;  VI. 330;  Vbh  71  sq.  :  Pv.\  4.  67 
(village  gate),  79 ;  Sdhp  54,  356.  —  That  d.  cannot  be 
used  for  an  inner  door  see  Vin  11.215  ;  on  knocking  at  a 
d.  see  DA  1.252;  cp.  DhA  1.145  (dvarar)  akofeti) ;  to 
open  a  door :  avarati ;  to  shut :  pidahati ;  to  lock : 
tbaketi.  dvarar)  alabhamana  unable  to  get  out  Vin 
n.220.  — maha°  the  main  or  city  gate  J  1.63  ;  culla° 
J  n.114;  catu°  (adj.)  having  4  doors  (of  niraya)  Pv 
i.io'3  ;  cha°  with  6d.  (nagarar),  w.  ref.  to  the  6  doors  of 
the  senses,  see  below)  S  iv.194;  pure"  the  front  d. 
J  *''53  :  pacchima"  the  back  d.  J  vi.364  ;  uttara°  the 
E.  gate  (PvA  74) ;  nagara°  the  city  gate  (J  1.263  ;  deva" 
DhA  1.280) ;  gama"  the  village  g.  (Vin  in. 52  ;  J  ii.iio); 
ghara°  (J  iv.142  ;  PvA  38)  &  geha°  (PvA  61)  the  house 
door  ;  antepura°  the  door  of  the  inner  chamber  M  11. 100  ; 
kula°  the  doors  of  the  clan-people  Sn  288.  —  metaph.  of 
the  door  leading  to  Nibb.ina  :  amata°  S  1. 137  ;  A  v. 346.  — 

2.  (fig.)  the  doors  =in-  &  outlets  of  the  mind,  viz.  the 
sense  organs;  in  phrase  indhyesu  gutta-dvara  (adj.) 
guarding  the  doors  with  respect  to  the  senses  or  faculties 
(of  the  mind):  see  gutta  (e.  g.  S  11.218;  iv.103  &  cp. 
Dhs.  trsl.  p.  175). —  S  IV. 117,  194  (with  simile  of  the 
6  gates  of  a  city) ;  VvA  72  (kaya-vaci^).  The  nine  gates 
of  the  body  at  Vism  346.  Thus  also  in  f.  abstr.  gutta- 
dvarata  the  condition  of  well  protected  doors  (see  gutta). 

-kavata  a  door  post  J  1.63  ;  11.334  ;  ^■■444  ;  Pv.\  280  . 
-kotthaka  [cp.  Sk.  dvarakosthaka  Sp.  AvS  1.24.  31] 
gateway;  also  room  over  the  gate  I'd  52.  65  ;  J  1.290  ; 
111.2  ;  iv.63.  229;  VvA  0.  160;  DhA  1.50;  n.27.  46; 
IV.204  ;  Vism  22  ;  Miln  10.  —  bahidvarakouhakcor  °a 
outside  the  gate  M  1.382;  n.92  ;  A  111.31  ;  iv.206 ; 
-gama  a  village  outside  the  city  gates,  i.  e.  a  suburb 
(cp.  bahidvaragama  J  1. 361)  J  in. 126  ("gamaka).  188; 
IV.225  ;  DhA  11.25  (°ka);  -torana  a  gateway  J  in. 431. 
-panantara  at  J  vi.349  should  be  read  °vatap5nantara ; 
-pidahana  shutting  the  door  Vism  78.  -baha  a  door 
post  S  1. 146 ;  Pv  1.5'  ;  DhA  in. 273  ;  -bhatta  food  scat- 
tered before  the  door  Sn  286  ;  -vatapana  a  door -window 
Vin  11.211  ;  J  VI. 349;  -sala  a  hall  with  doors  M  1.382  ; 
11.61. 


Dvarika 


i68 


Dvi 


Dvarika  (-°)  (adj.)  referring  or  belonging  to  the  door  of — ; 
in  cha  °a  tanha.  craving  or  fever,  arising  through  the  6 
doors  (of  the  senses)  DhA  iv.221,  &  kaya°  -saijvara 
control  over  the  "  bodily  "  door,  i.  e.  over  action  (opp. 
speech)  PvA  10  (so  read  for  kayafi  carika"). 

Dvi  [Sk.  dvi,  dva  etc.  — Bases :  I.  dvi  =  Sk.  dvi  in  dvipad 
=  Lat.  bipcs  (fr.  duipes).  Ags.  twifetc  ;  dvklant  — bidens. 
Reduced  to  di  (sec  B  I.<)  as  in  Gr.  (^ifforf  (  — dipad),  Lat. 
dicnnium  &  pref.  dis-  (cp.  Goth,  twis  asunder,  Ogh. 
zwisk  between).  —  II.  du  (  =  dvi  in  reduced  grade,  cp. 
Lat.  du-plex,  dubius  etc.).  —  III.  dva  (A  d\a)~Sk. 
dvau,  dva,  f.  nt.  dve  (declined  as  dual,  but  the  P. 
(•plural)  inflexion  from  base  I.  see  B  I.') ;  Or.  li/'w,  Lat. 
duo ;  Oir.  dau,  da,  f .  di ;  Goth,  twai,  f.  twos  ;  Ags.  twa 
(=E.  two);  Ohg.  zwene,  zwo  zwei.  Also  in  cpd. 
num.  dva-dasa  twelve  =Gr.  ^(/)wi"fica=Lat.  duo- 
dccim.]  number  two. 

A.  Meanings — I.  Two  as  unit:  i.  with  objective 
foundation :  (a)  denoting  a  comb"  (pair,  couple)  or  a 
repetition  (twice).  In  this  conn,  frequent  both  objec- 
tive &  impersonal  in  mentioning  natural  pairs  as  well 
as  psj'chologically  contrasted  notions.  E.  g.  dvipad 
(biped),  nagassa  dve  danta  (elephants'  tusks),  cakkhnni 
(eyes) ;  dvija  (bird),  duvija  (tooth),  dijivha  (snake). 
See  also  dutiya  &  dvaya.  —  dve :  kama,  khidda,  gatiyo 
(Sn  iDOi),  danani  (It  98),  pi5'a,  phalani  (Sn  RgCt ;  It 
39),  mitti,  sineha  etc.  See  Nd'  under  dve,  cp.  A  1.47- 
ic  o  ;  D  III. 212-214.  —  (b)  denoting  a  separation  (in 
two,  twofold  etc.):  see  dvidha  A:  cpds.  —  2.  with 
symbolic,  sentimental  meaning:  (a)  nniy  two  (i.  c.  next 
to  one  or  "  next  to  nothing  "),  cp.  the  two  mites  of  the 
widow  (Mark  xii.  42).  two  sons  of  Rachel  (Gen. -311): 
dumSsiUa  not  more  than  2  months  (Vin  11. 107);  dve- 
mfisiko  gabbho  (Pv  1.6");  dvevacika  ;  duvangnia  (see 
below).  —  (b)  a  jew -more  than  one,  some,  a  couple 
(often  intermediate  between  i  A-  3,  denoting  more  than 
once,  or  a  comparatively  long,  rather  long,  but  not  like 
3  a  very  long  time) :  m.'isadvayai)  a  couple  of  montks  ; 
dvisahassa  dipu  2';(  o  islands  (=a  large  number); 
diyaddhasata  150=  very  long  etc.  ;  dvihatiha  (2  or  3  = 
a  couple  of  days)  q.  v.  ;  dvirattatiratta  (id.  of  nights) ; 
dvisu  tisu  manussesu  to  some  people  (PvA  47) ;  dvatik- 
khattug  several  times ;  cp.  dvikkhattug  (more  than 
once),  dutiyai)  (for  the  2nd  time). 

II.  Two  as  unit  in  connection  with  its  own  it  other 
dccimnls  means  a  complex  plus  a  pair,  which  amounts 
to  the  same  as  a  large  &  a  small  unit,  or  so  to  speak 
"  a  year  it  a  day."  E.  g.  12  (sometimes,  but  rarely  = 
10-1-2,  see  Sep.); — 32:  rests  usually  on  4x8,  but  as 
No.  of  the  Mahapurisa-lakkhanani  it  denotes  30+2  = 
the  great  circle  plus  the  decisive  (invisible)  pair  ;  —  62  : 
views  of  heresy  :  sec  ditthi ;  also  as  a  year  of  eternity  = 
60  kappas-1-2; — -92:  as  measufe  of  eternity  =90-1- 2 
kappas  =  a  year  &  a  day. 

III.  Number  twelve.  1.  Based  on  natural  pheno- 
mena it  denotes  the  solar  year  (dvidasamasako  sarjvac- 
charo  Vv,\  247).  —  2.  Connected  with  the  solar  cult  it 
is  used  with  human  arrangements  to  raise  them  to  the 
level  of  heavenly  ones  and  to  impart  to  them  a  superior 
significance.  Thus  :  (a)  as  denoting  a  set  (cp.  12  months 
-  companions  of  the  Sun)  it  is  the  No.  of  a  respectful, 
holy,  venerable  group  (cp.  12  sons  of  Jacob  Gen.  35,  22  ; 
cakes  as  shewbread  Lev.  25,  5  ;  stones  erected  Josh.  4. 
8  ;  apostles  Math.  10,  2  ;  patriarchs  Acts  7,  8  ;  com- 
panions of  Odysseus  Hom.  Od.  9,  193 ;  Knights  of 
Arthur  etc.):  of  theras,  accomp''  by  12  bhikkhus  PvA 
67,  141.  179  etc.;  dvadasa  kotisat'ini  Sn  677;  five 
groups  of  12  musicians  VvA  96  (cp.  5X  12  cromlechs 
in  the  outer  circle  of  Stonchenge).  —  (b)  as  measure 
of  distance  in  space  A  time  it  implies  vast  extent, 
great  importance,  a  climax,  divine  symmetry  etc. 
12  yojanas  wide  extends  the  radiance  VvA  16 ; 
12  y.  as  respectful  distance  PvA  137  (cp.  2(X)0  cubits 
in  .same  sense  at  Josh.  3,  4);   12  y.   in  extent  (height, 


breadth  &  length)  are  the  heavenly  palaces  of  the 
Vimana-petas  or  Yakkhas  Vv  55'  ;  J  vi.116;  VvA  6, 
217,  244,  291,  298  etc.  In  the  same  connection  we 
freq.  find  the  No.  i6  :  solasa-yojanikar)  kanaka-vimana^ 
Vv  67'  ;  VvA  188,  289  etc.  —  Oiyears  :  J  111.80  ;  VvA  T57 
(dvadasa- vassika ;  in  this  sense  also  16  instead  of  12: 
solasa-vassuddesika  VvA  259  etc.     See  so)asa). 

B.  Bases  &  Forms — I.  dvi;  main  base  for  numeral  & 
nominal  composition  &  derivation,  in  : 

1.  numeral  dve  (&  duve)  two:  nom.  ace.  dve  (Sn 
p.  107;  It  98;  J  i.150;  IV. 137  etc.)  &  (in  verse)  duve 
(SnS96,  looi) ;  gen.  dat.  dvinnai]  (It  39,  40.98  ;  J  11. 154) ; 
instr.  dvihi  (J  1.87:  v.  1.  dlhi;  15  r  ;  11.153);  loc.  dvisu 
(J  1.203  ;  PvA  47)  &  duvesu  (Vv  41^). 

2.  as  numeral  base:  -sahassa  2000  (see  A  I.  2'')  J 
1-57  '•  VvA  261  ;  PvA  74  ;  also  in  dvitta  and  adv.  dvik- 
khattui]  twice  &  dvidha  in  two  parts.  —  (b)  as  nominal 
base :  —  (r)avatta  [Sk.  dvih  cp.  Lat.  bis]  turning  twice 

5  1.32  ;  -ja  "  twice  born,"  i,  e.  a  bird  J  1.152  (gana) ; 
-jatin  one  who  is  born  twice,  i.  e.  a  brahmana  Th,  2,  43') 
(Th.\  269-brahmajatin) ;  -talamatta  of  the  size  of 
2  palms  DhA  11.62  ;  -pad  [Sk.  dvipad,  Lat.  bipes,  Gr. 
(Juroci,  etc.]  a  biped,  man  S  1.6  ;  -pala  twofold  Vism  339  ; 
-padaka  —  dvipad  Vin  11. no;  -bandhu  having  two 
friends  J  vi.281  ;  -rattatiratta  two  or  three  nights  Vin 
IV.16;  also  in  dviha  two  days  (q.  v.). 

3.  as  diaeretic  form  duvi°  :  -ja  (cp.  dija)  "  growing 
again  "  i.  e.  a  tooth  J  v.  156. 

4.  as  contracted  form  di°  :  -(y)addha  one  and  a  half 
(lit.  the  second  half,  cp.  Gcr.  andcrthalb)  Dh  235 ; 
J  1.72  (diyaddha-yojana-satika  150  y.  long  or  high  etc.), 
2(12;  IV.393  ("yama) ;  OhA  1.395;  DA  1.17;  Mill  243, 
272;  DhsA  12;  -guna  twofold,  double  Vin  1.289;  Sn 
714;  J  v.3()9;  Miln  84;  DhA  11.6;  VvA  63,  1211;  -ja 
(cp.  dvija,  diivija)  (a)  "  twicc-bom,"  a  bird  S  1.224  '■ 
Sn  ri34  (d.  vuccati  pakkhT  Nd^  296);  J  1.152.  203; 
11.2115  ;  IV.347  ;  V.157  '■  '^'v  11.12' ;  Vv  35"  (cp.  VvA  178) ; 
Miln  295.  —  (b)  a  brahmin  TliA.  70,  73  ;  -jivha  "  two- 
tongued,"  i.  e.  a  snake  (cp.  du")  J  in. 347 ;  -pad  (-pada 
or  -pa)  a  biped  (cp.  dvi°)  A  1.22  ;  v. 21  ;  Sn  83  ((li^xl-d- 
uttama),  995  (id.)  998;  Dh  273;  -padaka  =  °pad  Th  i. 
4.5.1  =Sn  2(15. 

5.  as  sec.  cpd.  form  (with  guna)  dve°  ^and  do") : 
-caturanga  twice  fourfold  =  eightfold  Th  i,  520  ("ga- 
min) ;  -patha  a  "  double  "  path,  a  border  path,  the 
boundary  bcr\vecn  two  villages  Vv  53"  (  —  siman- 
tika-patha  VvA  241);  -piccha  having  two  tail-feathers 
J  v. 34 1  (cp.  de°) ;  -pitika  having  two  feathers  J  v. 424  ; 
-bhava  doubling  kacc.  2 1  ;  -masika  two  months  old 
I'v  1.6'' ;  -vacika  pronouncing  (only)  two  words,  viz. 
Buddha  &  Dhamma  (cp.  tevacika,  saying  the  whole 
sarana-formula) .  Vin  1.4  ;  J  1.81  ;  -sattaratta  twice  seven 
nights,  a  fortnight  [cp.  Sk.  dvisapata]  J  vi.230.  —  See 
also  der.  fr.  nunier.  adv.  dvidha,  viz.  dvejjha  (&  dejjha), 
dvedha",  dvelhaka. 

6.  as  noun-derivation  dvaya  a  dyad  (q.  v.). 

II.  du;  reduced  base  in  numeral  and  nominal  comp" 

6  der"  : 

-(v)addhato  from  both  sides  (a  distorted  form  of 
dubhatoq.  v.)  Vv  64"  (  dubhato  VvA  281) ;  -(v)angika 
consisting  of  two  parts  Dhs  163  ;  -(v)angula  &  dvaiigula 
two  finger-breadths  or  depths,  two  inches  long,  implying 
a  minimum  measure  (see  above  A  1.2^)  Vin  11.107; 
iv.2fi2  ;  usually  in  cpds. —  kappa  the  2  inch  rule,  i.  e. 
a  rule  extending  the  allotted  time  for  the  morning  meal 
to  2  inches  of  shadow  after  mid-day  Vin  11.294,  3"^'  • 
-panna  wisdom  of  2  finger-breadths,  i.  e.  that  of  a 
woman  S  i.i29=Th  2,  60  (dvanguli",  at  ThA  66  as 
"sanna) ;  -buddhika=°pTmhi\.  VvA  96;  -jivha  two- 
tongued  (cp.  di°) ;  a  snake  J  iv.330  ;  v. 82,  425  ;  -pa^a 
"double  cloth"  (Hind,  dupatta;  Kanarcse  dupata, 
duppata ;  Tamil  tuppatfa  a  cloak  consisting  of 
two  cloths  joined  together,  see  Kern,  Toev.  1.179); 
J  I.I  19;  IV. 1 14,  379  (ratta") ;  f)hA  1.249  (suratta") ; 
III. 4 19  ("civara) ;  -matta  (.about)  2  in  mcasnre  Miln  82  ; 


Dvikkhattui) 


169 


Dvelhaka 


-masika  2  months  old  or  growing  for  2  months  (of  hair) 
Vin  II.  107;  -vagga  consisting  of  two  Vin  1.58;  -vassa 
2  years  old  Vin  1.59 ;  -vidha  t^vofold,  instr.  duvidhena 
M  III. 45  sq.  ;  etc.  —  Derivations  from  du°  see  sep.  under 
duka  (dyad),  dutiya  (the  second),  &  the  contamination 
forms  dubha  (to)  &  dubhaya  (for  ubha  &  ubhaya). 

III.  dva  (&  reduced  dva),  base  in  numeral  comp" 
only:  dvatikkhattui)  two  or  three  times  J  1.506;  DA 
1. 133,  264  ;  DhA  IV. 38  ;  dvadasa  twelve  (on  meaning  of 
this  &  foil,  numerals  see  above  A  II.  &  III.)  J  in. 80  ; 
VI. 1 16;  DliA  1.88;  111.21U;  VvA  156.  247  etc.:  °yoja- 
nika  J  1.125  ;  iv.499  :  dvavisati  (22)  VvA  139  ;  dTattirjsa 
(32)  Kh  II.  ("akara  the  32  constituents  of  the  body): 
DhA  11.88:  VvA  19  etc.;  dvacattalisa  (42)  Nd-  15; 
Vism  82  ;  dvasatthi  (Nd^  271™  &  dvatthi  (62)  D  1.54  ; 
S  III. 211;  DA  1. 162):  dvanavuti  (92)  PvA  19,  21. 
—  Note.  A  singular  case  of  dva  as  adv.  =  twice  is  in 
dvahar)  Sn  11 16. 

Dvikkhattag  (adv.)  [Sk.  *dvikrtvalj]  twice  Nd^  on  Sn  1 116 
(  =  dva) :  Nd'  296  (jayati  dijo).     See  dvi  B  I.  2". 

Dvitta  (pi.)  [Sk.  dvitra  ;  sec  dvi  B  I.  2'']  tivo  or  three  S  1.117 
(perhaps  we  should  read  tad  vittai) :  Windisch.  Mara 
&■  Buddha  108). 

DvidhS  (num.  adv.)  [Sk.  dvidha.  see  dvi  B  I.  2^  in  two 
parts,  in  two  M  1.114;  J  1.253  (karoti).  254  (chindati), 
29S  (id.);  III.  181  ;  iv.ioi  (jata  disagreeing);  VI. 368 
(hhindati).     See  also  dvcdha  A  dvelhaka. 

-gata  pone  to  pieces  J  v.  197  ;  -patha  a  twofold  way. 
a  cros.sing ;  only  fig.  doubt  S  11. 108  ;  M  1. 142.  144  ;  Ud 
cfi.     See  also  dvedhapatha. 

Dvltaa  (adv.)  [Sk.  dvis-ahnah ;  see  dvi  B  1. 2'']  two  days; 
dvihena  in  2  days  S  II.  192  ;  dvllia-mata  2  days  dead 
M  i.HS;  m.91. 

-tiha  2  or  3  days  ("ri  adv.)  (on  meaning  cp.  dvi 
A   1.2'')  D   i.iqn    ("assa  accayena  after  a  few  days); 


J  II. 316;   DhA  III. 21    ("accayena  id.,   gloss:   katipSh'- 
accayena) ;  DA  1.190  (°r))  215  ;  VvA  45. 

Dvlhika  (adj.)  every  other  day  M  1.77. 

Dvlhitika  (adj.)  [du-ihitika,  of  du' +  ihati]  to  be  gained 
or  procured  with  difficulty  (:.  e.  a  livelihood  which  is 
hardly  procurable),  only  in  phrase  "  dubbhikkha  d. 
setatthika  salakavutta,"  of  a  famine  Vin  111.6,  15,  87; 
IV. 23  ;  S  IV. 323.  On  the  term  &  its  expl"  by  Rdhgh. 
(at  Vin  III. 268  :  dujjivika  ihi  ti  .  .  .  dukkhena  ihitarj 
ettha  pavattati  ti)  see  Kern,  Toev.  1.122.  —  Note. 
Bdhgh's  expl"  is  highly  speculative,  &  leaves  the 
problem  still  unsolved.  The  case  of  du'  appearing  as 
du-  (and  not  as  dur-)  before  a  vowel  is  most  peculiar ; 
there  may  be  a  connection  with  drah  (see  duhana),  which 
is  even  suggested  by  vv.  11.  at  S  iv.223  as  duhitika  = 
duhitika  (q.  v.). 

Dye  &■  Dve"  see  dvi  B  i  &  5. 

Dvejjha  (adj.)  [Sk.  dvaidhya ;  cp.  dvi  B  I.  5]  divided,  two- 
fold, only  in  neg.  advejjha  undivided,  certain,  doubtless ; 
simple,  sincere,  uncontradictory  A  111.403;  J  iv.77 ; 
Nd"  30  (+ advelhaka) ;  Miln  141.  —  Cp.  dejjha. 

DveiJhatS  (f.)  [fr.  prec]  in  a°  undi\'idedness  J  iv.7(i. 

Dvedha  (adv.)  [Sk.  dvedha,  cp.  dvidha]  in  two  J  v. 203,  20O 
(°sira) ;  DhA  11.50  (bhijji :  broke  in  two,  broke  asunder). 

Dvedhapatha  fcp.  dvidha  &  dvi  B  1. 5]  (a)  a  aout)lc.  i.  c.  a 
branching  road;  a  cross-road  DhA  11. 192  ;  Miln  17.  — 
(b)  doubt  Dh  282  ;  Dhs  1004,  1 18  ;  Vism  313. 

Dvelhaka  (nt.)  [Sk.  'dvaidhaka  fr.  adv.  dvidha,  cp.  dvi 
B  I.  5]  doubt  Vin  111.309  ;  Dhs  1004,  \i(>\  ;  DA  i.fi8  : 
DhsA  259;  "citta  uncertain  PvA  13;  'jata  in  doubt 
Vin  111.309;  D  III. 117  sq. ;  210.  — advelhaka  (adj.) 
sure,  certain,  without  doubt  Nd'  30  (+ advejjha). 


Dh. 


Dhagsati  [Ved.  dhvarjsati  to  fall  to  dust,  sink  down,  perish  ; 
Idg,  dheaes  to  fly  like  dust.  cp.  Sk.  dhusara  "  dusky  " ; 
Ags.  dust ;  Ger.  dust  &  dunst ;  E.  dusk  &  dust ;  prob. 
also  Lat.  furo]  to  fall  from,  to  be  deprived  of  (c.  abl.). 
to  be  gone  D  111.184  (with  abl.  asma  loka  dh.)  A  n.67  ; 
V.76.  77  ;  It  1 1  ;  Th  I,  225,  610  ;  J  in. 260,  318,  441,  457  ; 
IV  .61 1  ;  V.218,  375.  — Caus.  dhaijseti  [Sk.  dhvagsayati, 
but  more  likely  =  Sk.  dharsayati  (to  infest,  molest  = 
Lat.  infestare.  On  similar  sound-change  P.  dhat)s°> 
Sk.  dhars  cp.  P.  dai)seti>Sk.  darsayati).  Caus.  of 
dhr.snoti  to  be  daring,  to  assault  cp.  Gr.  OapiroQ  auda- 
cious, bold,  Lat.  festus,  Goth.  gadars  =  E.  dare;  Ohg. 
gitar]  to  deprive  of,  to  destroy,  assault,  importune 
D  1.2  II  ;  S  111.123  ;  Sn  591  ;  J  in. 353  ;  Miln  227;  Sdhp 
357.  434.     Cp.  pa°,  pari°. 

Dhagsana  (n.-adj.)  [Sk.  dharsana]  destroying,  bringing  to 
ruin,  only  in  kula"  as  v.  1.  to  kula-gandhana  (q.  v.)  at 
It  64,  and  in  dhar|sanata  at  DhA  in. 353  in  expl"  of 
dhar)sin  (q.  v.). 

Dhagsin  (adj.-n.)  [Sk.  dharsin  to  dhy^ijoti,  see  dhagseti] 
obtrusive,  bold,  offensive  M  1.236;  A  11.1&  ;  Dh  244 
(  =  DhA  III. 353  paresar)  gunarj  dhai)sanataya  dh.). 

Dhanka  [Sk.  dhvanksa,  cp.  also  dhunk§a]  a  crow  S  1.207  ; 
11.258  ;  Sn  271  — Nd^  420  ;  J  n.208  ;  v. 107,  270  ;  vi.452  ; 
Pv  in.52  (  =  kaka  PvA  198) ;  VvA  334. 

Dhaja  [Sk.  dhvaja,  cp.  Ohg.  tuoh  "  cloth  "  (fr.  'dwoko)]  a 
flag,  banner ;  mark,  emblem,  sign,  symbol  Vin  1.306 
(titthiya" :  outward  signs  of);  11.22  (gihi") ;  S  1.42; 
n.28<)  ;  A  11.1.51  ;  in. 84  sq.  (panna°) ;  M  1.137  (id); 
A  III. 149  (dhamma  ) ;  J  1.52  {+  pataka) ;  VvA  173  (id.) ; 
J  1.65  (arahad  °  ;)Th  1.961  ;  J  v.49=Miln  221  ;  J  v. 509  ; 
VI. 499  ;  Nd'  170;  Vv  36',  64^8  (subhasita"  =  dhamma" 
VvA  2.S4) ;  Dhs  1 1 16,  1233;  Vism  469  (-)- pataka,  in 
comparison);  PvA  282;  VvA  31.  73;  Miln  21;  Sdhp 
42S,  594.     Cp.  also  panna. 

-agga  the  top  of  a  standard  S  1.2 19  ;  A  ni.89  sq.  ;  Pug 
67.  68  :  Vism  414  ("paritta).  -alu  adorned  with  flags 
Th  I,  164  =  5  "-334  ( :  dhajasampanna  Com.) ;  -ahata 
won  under  or  by  the  colours,  taken  as  booty,  captured 
Vin  III.  1 39,  140;  Vism  63.  -baddha  captured  (  =  °ahata) 
Vin  1.74  (cora). 

Dbajini  (f.)  [Sk.  dhvajini,  f.  to  adj.  dhvajin]  "  bearing  a 
standard,"  i.  e.  an  army,  legion  Sn  442  ( =sena  SnA  392). 

Dhanna'  (nt.)  [Ved.  dhanya,  der.  fr.  dhana]  grain,  com. 
rite  usual  enum"  comprises  7  sorts  of  grain,  which  is 
however  not  strictly  confined  to  grain-fruit  proper 
("  corn  ")  but  includes,  like  other  enum"',  pulse  & 
seeds.  These  7  are  sali  &  vihi  (rice-sorts),  yava  (barley), 
godhuma  (wheat),  kangu  (millet),  varaka  (beans), 
kudrusaka  (.?)  Vin  iv.264  ;  Nd^  314  ;  DA  1.78.  —  Nd=  314 
distinguishes  two  categories  of  dhaiifia :  the  natural 
(pubbanna)  &  the  prepared  (aparanna)  kinds.  To  the 
first  belong  the  7  sorts,  to  the  second  belongs  supej'ya 
(curry).  See  also  bija-bija.  —  Six  sorts  are  mentioned 
at  M  1.57,  viz.  sali,  vihi.  mugga,  masa,  tila,  tandula.  — 
D  1.5  (amaka°,  q.  v.) ;  A  11.209  (id.) ;  M  1.429  ;  A  11.32 
(-1- dhana):  Th  i,  531;  Pug  58 ;  DhA  1.173;  VvA  99 ; 
PvA  29  (dhanai]  va  dh  °r)  va),  198  (sasapa-tela-missitai)), 


278    (sappi  -  madhu  -  tela  -  dhaiiiiadJhi  vohSrar)   katva). 

—  dhaiinao  akirati  to  besprinkle  a  person  with  grain 
(for  good  luck)  Pv  111.5*  (  =  mangalar)  karoti  PvA  198, 
see  also  mangala). 

-agara  a  store  house  for  grain  Vin  1.240  ;  -pi^ka  a 
basket  full  of  grain  DhA  in. 370  ;  -rasi  a  heap  of  g. 
A  IV. 163,  170  ;  -samavapaka  grain  for  sowing,  not  more 
&  not  less  than  necessary  to  produce  grain  M  1. 451. 

Dhafifia^  (•'dj.)  [Sk.  dhanya,  adj.  to  dhana  or  dhanya. 
Semantically  cp.  ajhiya]  "  rich  in  com,"  rich  (see  dhana) ; 
happy,  fortunate,  lucky.  Often  in  comb"  dhana- 
dhaniia.  ■ — DhA  1.171  ;  111.464  (dhanfiadika  one  who 
is  rich  in  grains  etc.,  i.  e.  lucky) ;  DhsA  1 16.  —  dhaniia- 
puniia-lakkhana  a  sign  of  future  good  fortune  &  merit 
PvA  161  ;  as  adj.  endowed  with  the  mark  of  ...  J  vi.3. 
See  also  dhaniya. 

Dhata  [Sk.  dhrta,  pp.  of  dharati ;  cp.  dhara  &  dhireti] 
I.  firm,  prepared,  ready,  resolved  A  111.114  ;  D5vs  v. 52. 

—  2.  kept  in  mind,  understood,  known  by  heart  Vin 
11.95  :  A  1.36. 

Dhana  (nt.)  [Ved.  dhana  ;  usually  taken  to  dha  (see  dadhati) 
as  "  stake,  prize  at  game,  booty,"  cp.  pradhana  &  Gi. 
9ifia ;  but  more  likely  in  orig.  meaning  "  grain,  posses- 
sion of  com,  crops  etc.,"  cp.  Lith.  diina  bread,  Sk. 
dhana  pi.  grains  &  dhafifia=dhana-like,  i.  e.  com, 
grain]  wealth,  usually  wealth  of  money,  richss,  trea- 
sures. I.  Li(.  D  1.73  (sa°) ;  M  n.  180  ;  A  111.222  ;  rv.4  sq.  ; 
Nd^  135  (-(-yasa,  issariya  etc.)  Th  2,  464  (-f  issariya); 
J  1.225  (pathavigatai)  karoti :  hide  in  the  ground),  262, 
289;  II. 1 12;  IV.2  ;  Sn  60,  185,  302;  Pv  11.6'";  DhA 
1.238.  Often  in  comb°  addha  mahaddhana  mahabhoga 
to  indicate  immense  wealth  (see  addha)  PvA  3,  214  etc. 
(sec  also  below  "dhanria).  —  2.  fig.  Used  in  the  ex- 
pression sattavidha-ariya-dhana  "  the  7  fold  noble 
treasure  "  of  the  good  qualities  or  virtues,  viz.  saddha, 
caga  etc.  (see  enum"'  under  caga)  D  in.  163,  164,  251; 
VvA  113  ;  ThA  240. 

-agga  the  best  treasure  (i.  e.  the  ariya-dhana)  D 
HI.  164  ;  -atthika  wishing  for  or  desiring  wealth  Sn  987; 
-asa  craving  for  wealth ;  -kkita  bought  for  money 
DhA  II. 3  ,  -thaddha  proud  of  wealth,  snobbish  Sn  104  ; 
-dhaiina,  usually  Dvandva-cpd.  "  money  &  money's 
worth,"  but  as  adj.  (always  in  phrase  pahuta°)  it  may 
be  taken  as  Tatpurusa  "  rich  in  treasures,"  otherwise 
"  posse.ssing  money  &  money's  worth  "  cp.  pahutadhana- 
dhafinava  J  1.3.  As  n.  Pv  i.ii";  in, 10*;  PvA  60; 
Miln  2.  280  ;  as  adj.  freq.  "  pahutadhana-dhanfia  " 
Vv  63''  =  Pv  11.6"  :  PvA  97.  Thus  in  ster.  formula  of 
addha  mahaddhana  etc.  D  in. 163  sq.  ;  S  1.71  ;  A  11.86; 
-parajaya  loss  of  money,  as  adj.  appl.  to  kali:  the  dice 
marking  loss  in  game  Sn  659  ;  -lobha  "  greed  of  gold  " 
J  IV. I  ;  -lola  =  lobha  J  n.212:  -viriya  wealth  &  power 
Sn  422  ;  -hetu  for  the  sake  of  wealth  Sn  122. 

Dhanatta  (nt.)  [Sk.  *dhanatvar)]  being  bent  on  having 
money  J  v. 449. 

Dhanavant  (adj.)  [Sk.  dhanavant]  wealthy  Nd'  462  ;  J  1.3. 

Dhanayati  [Denom.  to  dhana]  to  desire  (like  money),  to 
wish  for,  strive  after  M  i.2r>'>  (perhaps  better  to  be  read 
vanayati,  see  formula  under  alUyati,  and  note  M  1.552). 


170 


Dhanika 


171 


Dhamma 


Dhanika  [Sk.  dhanika]  a  creditor,  Th  2.  443  ,  ThA.  271  ; 
PvA  276.     Cp.  dhaniya. 

Dhanita  [Sk.  dhvanita,  pp.  of  dhvan,  cp.  Ags.  dyn  noise  = 
E.  din ;  Ags.  dynnan  to  sound  loud]  sounded  ;  as  nt. 
sonant  (said  of  a  letter)  Miln  344. 

Dhaniya = dhanika  Vin  1.76. 

Dhana  (nt.)  [Sk.  dhanus,  to  Ohg.  tanna  fir-tree,  also  oak, 
orig.  tree  in  general,  cp.  daru]  a  bow  M  1.429  ;  J  1.50 ,  1 50  ; 
11.88  ;  IV. 327  ;  PvA  285. 

-kalapa  bow  &  quiver  Vin  11. 192  ;  M  1.86;  11.99; 
A  111.94;  PvA  154;  -kara  a  bow  maker  Miln  331; 
-karika  N.  of  a  tree  J  v.420  ;  -karin=prec.  J  v. 422 
(  =  °pataU);  -ggaha  an  archer  D  1.51  ;  A  11.48;  iv.107; 
J  I-58.  356  ;  11.87,  88  ;  111.220  (dhanuggaha)  J  111.322  ; 
v.i2g  (where  4  kinds  are  enum'')  ;  Vism  150  (in  simile) ; 
DA  1.156  ;  -takkari  (f.)  a  plant  J  vi.535  ;  -patali  N.  of 
a  tree  J  v.422  ;  -lakkhana  prophesying  from  marks  on  a 
bow  D  1.9. 

Dhannka  (nt.)  [Sk.  dhanuska]  a  (small)  bow  Vin  11.10; 
m.i8o;  D  1.7 ;  A  ni.75  ;  v.203  ;  J  vi.41  ;  Miln  229; 
DA  1.86. 

Dhanta  [Sk.  dhvanta  in  meaning  of  either  dhvanita  fr. 
dhvan  to  sound,  or  dhamita  fr.  dhma  to  blow,  see 
dhameti]  blown,  sounded  A  1.253  :  J  '■-'^.?.  284. 

Dhama  (-°)  (adj.)  [Sk.  dhama,  to  dhamati]  blowing,  n.  a 
blower,  player  (on  a  horn  :  sankha")  D  1.251 ;  S  iv.322. 

Dhamaka  (-°)  (adj.)  one  who  blows  Miln  31  ;  see  var)sa°, 
sankh",  singa". 

Dhamati  [Ved.  dhamati,  dhma,  pp.  dh  amita  &  dhmata,  cp. 
Ohg.  dampf  "  steam  "]  to  blow,  to  sound  (a  drum) ; 
to  kindie  (by  blovring),  melt,  smelt,  singe  A  1.254  '■ 
IV.169;  J  1.283,  284;  VI. 441  ;  Nd'  478;  Miln  262. — 
ppr.  dhamana  S  1.106;  Miln  67.  —  Caus.  dhameti  to 
blow  (an  instrument)  J  11.110  ;  Miln  31,  and  dhamapeti 
to  cause  to  blow  or  kindle  DhA  1.442.  —  pp.  dhanta  & 
dhanita  (the  latter  to  dhvan,  by  which  dhamati  is  in- 
fluenced to  a  large  extent  in  meaning.     Cp.  uddhana). 

Dhamadhamayati  [cp.  Sk.  dadhmati,  Intens.  to  dhamati] 
to  blow  frequently,  strongly  or  incessantly  Miln  1 1 7. 

Dhamani  (f)  [Sk.  dhamani,  to  dhamati,  orig.  a  tube  for 
blowing,  a  tubular  vessel,  pipe]  a  vein  Th  1,  408. 
Usually  in  cpd.  :  -santhata  strewn  with  veins,  with  veins 
showing,  i.  e.  emaciated  ( ;  nimmagsa-lohitataya  sira- 
jalehi  vitthatagatta  PvA  68)  Vin  iii.iio;  J  iv.371  ; 
v.69 ;  Dh  395  =  Th  i,  243=Pv  11. i'^;  Pv  iv.io';  DhA 
1-299.  367  ;  JV.157;  ThA  80.  So  also  in  Jain  Sk.  "  kisa 
dhamanisar|tata  "  :  Weber,  Bhagavati  p.  289  ;  cp.  Lai. 
Vist.  2«6.  —  Also  as  "santhatagatta  (adj.)  having  veins 
showing  all  over  the  body  for  lack  of  flesh  Vin  1.55  ; 
III. 146;  M  11.12  1  ;  J  1.346,  11.283  ;  ThA  80. 

Dhamma'  (m.  &  rarely  nt.)  [Ved.  dharma  &  dharman,  the 
latter  a  formation  like  karman  (see  kamma  for  expl" 
of  subj.  &  obj.  meanings);  dhr  (see  dhareti)  to  hold, 
support :  that  which  forms  a  foundation  and  upholds  = 
constitution.  Cp.  Gr.  6p6t'og,  Lat.  firmus  &  fretus ; 
Lith.  derme  (treaty),  cp.  also  Sk.  dhariman  form,  con- 
stitution, perhaps  =  Lat.  forma,  E.  form]  constitution 
etc.  A.  Defmitious  by  Commentators  :  Bdhgh  gives  a 
fourfold  meaning  of  the  word  dhamma  (at  DA  1.99  -= 
DhA  1.22),  viz.  (i)gune  (saddo),  applied  to  good  conduct ; 

(2)  desanayai),    to    preaching    &    moral    instruction; 

(3)  pariyattiyar),  to  the  9  fold  collection  of  the  Buddh. 
Scriptures  (see  navanga) ;  (4)  nissatte  (-nijjivate),  to 
cosmic  (non-animistic)  law.  —  No.  i  is  referred  to  freq. 
in  expl''  of  the  term,  e.  g.  dhammiko  ti  flayena  samcna 
pavattati  ti  DA  1.249 ;  dhaniman  ti  karanai)  n&yar) 
PvA  2 1 1  ;  as  patipatti-dhamma  at  VvA  84  ;  No.  3  e.  g. 
also  at  PvA  2.  Another  and  more  adequate  fourfold 
definition  by  Bdhgh  is  given  in  DhsA  38,  viz.  (i)  pari- 


yatti,  or  doctrine  as  formulated.  (2)  hctu,  or  condition, 
causal  antecedent,  (3)  guna,  or  moral  quality  or  action, 
(4)  nissatta-nijivata,  or  "  the  phenomenal  "  as  opposed 
to  "  the  substantial,"  "  the  noumenal,"  "  animistic 
entity."  Here  (2)  is  illustrated  by  hetumhi  naijam 
dhammapalisambhida  :  "  analytic  knowledge  in  dham- 
ma's  means  insight  into  condition,  causal  antecedent  " 
Vibh  293,  and  see  Niyama  (dhamma").  Since,  in  the 
former  fourfold  definition  (2)  and  (3)  really  constitute 
but  one  main  implication  considered  under  the  two 
aspects  of  Doctrine  as  taught  and  Doctrine  as  formu- 
lated, we  may  interpret  Dhamma  by  the  fourfold 
connotation  : — doctrine,  right,  or  righteousness,  con- 
dition, phenomenon.  —  For  other  exegetic  definitions 
see  the  Com'-  &  the  Niddesa,  e.  g.  Nd"-  94  ;  for  modem 
expl^  &  analyses  see  e.  g.  Rhys  Davids,  Buddh.  India 
pp.  292-4  ;  Mrs.  Rh.  DawiAs. BMdhism  (1912)  pp.  32  sq., 
107  sq.,  235  sq.  ;  Dhs.  /rs/..xxxiiR  sq. ;  and  most  recently 
the  exhaustive  monograph  by  M.  &  W.  Geiger,  Pali 
Dhamma,  Abhandlungen  der  Bayer.  Akademie 
xxxi.  I  ;  Munchen  1920  ;  which  reached  the  editors  too 
late  to  be  made  use  of  for  the  Dictionary. 

B.  Applications  and  Meaning. — i.  Psychologically; 
"  mentality  "  as  the  ponstitutive  element  of  cognition 
&  of  its  substratum,  the  world  of  phenomena.  It  is  that 
which  is  presented  as  "  object  "  to  the  imagination 
&  as  such  has  an  effect  of  its  own : — a  presentation 
(Vorstellung),  or  idea,  idea,  or  purely  mental  pheno- 
menon as  distinguished  from  a  psycho-physical  pheno- 
menon, or  sensation  (re-action  of  sense-organ  to  sense- 
stimulus).  The  mind  deals  with  ideas  as  the  eye  deals 
with  forms :  it  is  the  abstraction  formed  by  mano,  or 
mind  proper,  from  the  objects  of  sense  presented  by 
the  sense-organ  when  reacting  to  extreme  objects. 
Thus  cakkhu  "  faculty  of  sight "  corresponds  to  rupa 
"  relation  of  form  "  &  mano  "  faculty  of  thought  " 
(citta  &  ceto  its  organ  or  instrument  or  localisation) 
corresponds  to  dhamma  "  mentalized  "  object  or 
"  idea  "  (Mrs.  Rh.  D.  "  mental  object  in  general,"  also 
"  state  of  mind  ")  —  (a)  subjective  :  mental  attitude, 
thought,  idea,  philosophy,  truth,  &  its  recognition 
(anubodhi)  by  the  Buddha,  i.  e.  the  Dhamma  or  world- 
wisdom  =  philosophy  of  the  Buddha  as  contained  & 
expounded  in  the  Dialogues  of  the  5  Nikayas  (see 
below  C.)  —  Note.  The  idea  of  dhamma  as  the  inter- 
preted Order  of  the  World  is  carried  further  in  the 
poetical  quasi-personification  of  the  Dh.  with  the 
phrase  "  dhammaja  dh-nimmita  dh-dayada  "  (bom  of 
the  Norm,  created  by  the  Norm,  heir  of  the  Norm ;  see 
under  cpds.  and  DhammatS  ;  also  s.  v.  Niyama).  That 
which  the  Buddha  preached,  the  Dhamma  tar'  ijo^iiv, 
was  the  order  of  law  of  the  universe,  immanent,  eternal, 
uncreated,  not  as  interpreted  by  him  only,  much  less 
invented  or  decreed  by  him,  but  intelligible  to  a  mind 
of  his  range,  and  by  him  made  so  to  mankind  as  bodhi : 
revelation,  awakening.  The  Buddha  (like  every  great 
philosopher  &  other  Buddhas  preceding  Gotama:  ye 
pi  te  ahesui)  atitar)  addhanai)  Arahanto  Sammasam- 
buddha  te  pi  dhammar)  yeva  sakkatva  S  1.140)  is  a 
discoverer  of  this  order  of  the  Dhamma.  this  universal 
logic,  philosophy  or  righteousness  ("  Norm  "),  in  which 
the  rational  &  the  etlucal  elements  are  fused  into 
one.  Thus  by  recognition  of  the  truth  the  knowcr 
becomes  the  incorporation  of  the  knowable  (or  the  sense 
of  the  universe  =  Dhamma)  &  therefore  a  perfect  man, 
one  who  is  "  truly  enlightened  "  (samma-sambuddha) : 
so  Bhagava  janai)  janati  passai)  passati  cakkhu-bhuto 
naija-bhuto  dhamma"  brahma"*  &  in  this  possession  of 
the  truth  he  is  not  like  Brahma,  but  Brahmi  himself 
&  the  lord  of  the  world  as  the  "  master  of  the  Truth  "  : 
vatta  pavatta  atthassa  ninnet4  Amatassa  data  dhamnia- 
ssami  S  iv.94  ;  &  similarly  "  yo  kho  Dhammai)  passati 
so  mam  passati ;  yo  mam  passati  so  Dhammar)  passati  " 
=  he  who  sees  the  Buddha  sees  the  Truth  S  111.120.  Cp. 
with  this  also  the  dhamma-cakka  idea  (see  cpds.}.     On 


Dhamma 


172 


Dhamma 


equation  Dhamma  =  Brahman  see  esp.  Geiger,  Dhamma 
pp.  76-80,  where  is  also  discussed  the  formula  Bhagavato 
putto  etc.  (with  dhammaja  for  the  brahraanic  brah- 
maja).  —  lu  later  (Abhidharama)  literature  the  (dog- 
matic) personification  of  Dhamma  occurs.  See  e.  g. 
Tikp  A  366. 

As  6th  sense-object  "  dhamma  "  is  the  counterpart 
of  "  mano  "  :  nianasa  dhamraar)  viufiaya  "  apper- 
ceiving  presentations  with  the  mind  "  S  iv.185  etc.  (see 
formula  under  rupa) ;  mano-viiirieyya  dhamma  S  iv.73  ; 
op.  S  111.46  ;  IV. 3  sq.  ;  v. 74  ;  D  111.226,  245,  269.  Ranged 
in  the  same  category  under  the  anupassana-forraula 
(q.  V.)  "  dhanimesu  dhamm-anupassin  "  realising  the 
mentality  of  mental  objects  or  ideas,  e.  g.  D  11.95,  i^o, 
299;  A  1.39,  296;  11.256;  111.450;  IV. 301.  Also  as  one 
of  the  6  tanhas  "  desire  for  ideas  "  D  111.244,  280.  —  As 
spirituality  opposed  to  materiality  in  contrast  of  dh.  & 
amisa:  It  98  (°dana  :  a  mat.  &  a  spir.  gift).  — -  (b)  objec- 
tive :  substratum  (of  cognition),  piece,  constituent 
(=khandha),  constitution;  phenomenon,  thing, 
"  world,"  cosmic  order  (as  the  expression  of  cosmic 
sense,  as  under  a  &  2).  Thus  applied  to  the  khandhcis  : 
vedanadayo  tayo  kh.  DhA  1.35  (see  Khandha  B  3);  to 
rupa  vedana  sariua  sankhara  vinnana  S  iii.39;=san- 
khara  D  111.58,  77,  141.  Freq.  in  formula  sabbe  dhamma 
anicca  (4-  dukkha  anatta  :  see  nicca)  "  the  whole  of  the 
visible  world,  all  phenomena  are  evanescent  etc."  S 
III.  132  sq.  &  passim,  ditthe  [va]  dhamme  in  the 
phenomenal  world  (opp.  samparayika  dh.  the  world 
beyond):  see  under  dittha  (S  iv.175,  205  etc.).  —  ye 
dhamma  hetuppabhava  tesar)  hetur)  Tathagato  aha 
"  of  all  phenomena  sprung  from  a  cause  the;  Buddha  the 
cause  hath  told  "  Vin  1.40  (cp.  Isa  Upanishad  14)-.  — 
lokadhatnma  things  of  this  world  (viz.  gain,  fame, 
happiness  etc.,  see  under  labha)  D  111.26(1;  Nd^  55. — 
uttari-manussa-dh°a  transcendental,  supernormal  phe- 
nomena D  1.2 II,  cp.  D  111.4  ;  abbhuta-dh°a  wonderful 
signs,  portents  Miln  8  (tayo  acchariya  a.  dh,  patura- 
hesug);  PvA  2:  hassa-khiddha-rati-dh.-samapanna 
endowed  with  the  qualities  or  things  of  mirth,  play  & 
enjoyment  O  1.19  ;  111.31  ;  gama°  things  or  doings  of  the 
village  D  1.4  (cp.  DA  1.72). 

2.  Ratio-cthically — (a)  objective  :  "  rationality,"  any- 
thing that  is  as  it  should  be  according  to  its  reason 
&  logicality  (as  expressed  under  No.  i  a),  i.  e.  right 
property,  sound  condition,  norm,  propriety,  constitution 
as  conforming  to  No.  i  in  universal  application  i.  e. 
Satural  or  Cosmic  Law  :  yattha  namau  ca  rupag  ci 
asesara  uparujjhati,  tag  te  dhammai)  idhaflnaya 
acchidur)  bhavabandhanag  (recognising  this  law)  S 
1.35  cittacetasika  dh°  a  a  term  for  the  four  mental 
khandhas,  and  gradually  superseding  them  Dhs  1022 
(cf.  Compendium  of  Philosophy,  i);  dasadhamma-vidu 
Vin  1.38  (see  dasa) ;  with  attha,  nirutti  and  patibhana  : 
one  of  the  4  Patisanibhidas  (branches  of  analytic  know- 
ledge A  II.  160  ;  Pfs  1.84,  88  etc.  ;  Vibh.  293  f.,  Points  0/ 
Controversy,  p.  380.  In  this  sense  freq.  -°  as  adj.  : 
being  constituted,  having  the  inherent  quality  (as  based 
on  Natural  Law  or  the  rational  constitution  of  the 
Universe),  destined  to  be  .  .  .,  of  the  (natural)  pro- 
perty of  .  .  .,  like  (cp.  Gr.  -n(V/<;  or  E.  -able,  as  in 
change-able  =  liable  to  change,  also  H.  -hood,  -ly  &  P. 
-gata,  -thita),  e.  g.  khaya-dhamma  liable  to  decay 
(-1- vaya°,  viraga",  nirodha"),  with  ref.  to  the  Sankharas 
S  IV. 2  16  sq.  ;  in  the  Paticcasamuppada  S  u.bo  ;  akkhaya 
imperishable  Pv  iv.1^2  (danag  a-dh.  atthu).  cavana" 
destined  to  shift  to  another  state  of  existence  D  1.18  ; 
III. 3 1  ;  It  76  ;  VvA  54.  jati-jara-marana°  under  the  law 
of  birth,  age,  iS:  death  D  111.57  ;  A  1.147  ;  ill. 54  ;  PvA  41 
(sabbe  satta  .  .  .) ;  bhedana"  fragile  (of  kaya)  D  1.76 ; 
S  1.71  ;  PvA  41  (bhijjana°  of  sankhara).  viparinaraa" 
changeable  A  1.258;  iv.157;  PvA  60  (+ anicca).  a° 
unchanging  D  111.31  sq.  samudaya°  &  nirodha°,  in 
formula  yag  kifici  s-dh°g  sabban  tan  n-dh°g  "  anything 
that  is  destined  to  come  into  existence  must  also  cease 


to  exist  "  D  1. 1 10,  180  ;  S  iv.47  &  passim.  Cp.  further  : 
anavatti"  avinipata"  D  1.156;  111.107,  132;  A  1.232; 
11.89,  238;  IV.12;  anuppada°  D  111.270.  —  (b)  subjec- 
tive :  "  morality,"  right  behaviour,  righteousness, 
practice,  duty ;  maxim  (cp.  t^ana),  constitution  of 
character  eis  conforming  to  No.  i  in  social  application, 
i.  e.  Moral  Law.  —  Often  in  pi.  :  tenets,  convictions, 
moral  habits  ;  &  as  adj.  that  which  is  proper,  that  which 
forms  the  right  idea  ;  good,  righteous,  true  ;  opp.  adham- 
ma  false,  unjust  etc.;  evil  practice — (a)  Righteous- 
ness etc. :  S  1.86  (eko  dh.  one  principle  of  conduct ; 
11.280  (dh.  isinag  dhajo :  righteousness  is  the  banner  of 
the  Wise)  ;  kusala  dh.  D  1.224  '•  dhamme  thita  righteous 
Vv  16^  ;  nati°  duty  against  relatives  PvA  30  ;  deyya°  = 
dana  PvA  9,  70;  sad°  faith  (q.  v.)  — opp.  adhamma 
unrighteousness,  sin  A  11. 19  ;  v. 73  sq.  ;  D  111.70  (°raga-)- 
visama-lobha  &  miccha -dhamma) ;  Pv  111.9'  (°g  anu- 
vattisag  I  practised  wrong  conduct). — -  In  the  same 
sense:  dh.  asuddho  Vin  1.5  =S  1.137  (paturahosi  Maga- 
dhesu  pubbe  dh.  a.)  ;  papa"  (adj.)  of  evil  conduct  Vin 
1.3;  atthita'  unrighteous  D  iu.133;  lobha"  greedy 
quality  D  1.224,  230  ;  methuna  dh.  fornication  D  111.133. 
—  (/3)  (pi.)  Tenets,  practices  etc.  —  (aa)  good:  kusala 
dh.  D  11.223,  228;  III. 49,  56,  82,  102  etc.;  S  11.206; 
sappurisa"  A  v. 2 45,  279  ;  PvA  114;  samaija"  Wanderer's 
practice  or  observances  DhA  n.55.  brahmaijakarai.ia 
D  1.244  ;  yesag  dh°anag  Gotarao  vanijavadin  D  1.206  ; 
cp.  sTlag  samadhi  paniia  ca  vimutti  ca  anuttara :  aiiu- 
buddha  ime  dhamma  Gotamena  yasassina  D  11.123. 
dhammanag  sukusalo  perfect  in  all  (tliese)  qualities 
D  i.i8o  ;  samahite  citte  dhamma  patubhavanti  "  with 
composed  mind  appear  true  views  "  S  iv.78  ;  dhammesu 
patitthito  S  1.185;  ananussutesu  dh°esu  cakkhug 
udapadi  "  he  visualized  undiscovered  ideas  "  S  11.9.  — 
(bb)  evil :  avaraniya  S  iv.104  ;  papaka  Vin  1.8  ;  D  1.70  ; 
A  1.202  ;  akusala  D  111.56,  57,  73,  91  etc.  ;  lobha",  dosa°, 
moha°  S  1.70  =It  45  =Nd2  420  ;  S  1.43  ;  M  111.40  ;  dukldia- 
vipaka  vodaniya  sagkilesika  ponobbhavika  D  1.195; 
III. 57.  —  (cc)  various  :  gambhira  duddasa  etc.  Vin  1.4  ; 
D  1.12  ;  S  1.136;  —  Cp.  S  n.15,  26;  Nd*  320  ;  It  22.  24; 
Ps  1.5,  22,  28  ;  Vbh  105,  228,  293  sq.  etc.  etc.  —  (y)  (adj.) 
good,  pious,  virtuous  etc. :  adliaramo  nirayag  neti 
dhammo  papeti  suggatig  "  the  sinners  go  to  niraya.  the 
good  to  heaven"  Th  i,  304  =  DA  1.99 --DhsA  38  = 
DhA  1.22.  kalyana°  virtuous  A  1.74.  108 ;  n.81,  91, 
224  sq. ;  PvA  13.  Opp.  papa°  Vin  111.90;  cp.  above 
«.  — •  (<S)  (phrases).  Very  freq.  used  as  adv.  is  the  instr. 
dhammena  with  justice,  justly,  rightly,  fitly,  properly 
Vin  1.3  ;  D  1.122  ;  S  iv.331  ;  Vv  34i»  (  =  karai,iena  liayena 
va  VvA);  Pv  11.9'°  (  =  yutten'  eva  karanena  PvA  125, 
as  just  punishment);  iv. i6»  (i^anurupakaranena  PvA 
286).  lisp,  in  phrase  of  the  cakkavattin,  who  rules 
the  world  according  to  justice :  adai.njena  asatthena 
dhammena  anusasati  (or  ajjhavasati)  D  1.89;  11. 16; 
S  i.236  =  Sn  1002;  cp.  Sn  554  (dhammena  cakkag 
vattemi,  of  the  Buddha).  Opp.  adhammena  unjustly, 
unfitly,  against  the  Tule  Vin  iv.37 ;  S  1.57;  iv.331  ; 
DA  1.236.  —  dhamme  (loc.)  honourably  J  11.159. — 
dhammag  carati  to  live  righteously  Pv  11.3^' ;  see  also 
below  C  3  &  dh.-cariya. 

C.  The  Dhamma,  i.  e.  moral  philosophy,  wisdom, 
truth  as  propounded  by  Gotama  Buddha  in  his  dis- 
courses &  conversations,  collected  by  the  compilers  of 
the  5  Nikayas  (dhamma-vinayag  sangayantehi  dhamma- 
sangahakehi  ekato  katva  VvA  3  ;  cp.  mayag  dh.°g  ca 
vinayafi  ca  sangayama  Vin  11.285),  resting  on  the  deeper 
meaning  of  dhamma  as  expl"'  under  B  i  a,  &  being  in 
short  the  "  doctrinal  "  portions  of  the  Buddhist  Tipi- 
taka  in  contradiction  to  the  Vinaya,  the  portion  ex- 
pounding the  rules  of  the  Order  (see  pitaka).  Dhamma 
as  doctrine  is  also  opposed  to  Abhidhamma  "  what 
follows  on  the  Dhamma."  —  (i)  Dhamma  and  Vinaya, 
"  wisdom  &  discipline,"  as  now  found  in  the  2  great 
Pitakas  of  the  B.  Scriptures,  the  Vinaya  and  Suttanta- 
Pitaka  (but  the  expression  "  Pitako "  is  later.     See 


A  ■ 


Dhamma 


173 


Dhamma 


Pitaka).      Thus     bhikkhu     suttantika     vinaya-dhara 
dhamma  kathika,  i.  e.  '*  the  bhikkhus  who  know  the 
Suttantas,  remember  the  Vinaya  &  preach  the  Word  of 
the  Buddha"  Vin  11.75  (ail. 169),  cp.  iv.67.     Dhamma 
&  Vinaya  comW :  yo  'har)  evag  sv4kkhate  Dh-vinaye 
pabbajito  S  1.119;  bhikkhu  na  evarupii)  kathai)  katta 
hoti :  na  tvag  imai)  Dh-v°r)  ajanasi.  ahar)  imag  Dh-v°r) 
ajanami  etc.  S  in.  12  ;  imar)  Dh-v°i)  na  sakkomi  vittha- 
rena  acikkhitur)  S  1.9 ;  samara  .  .  .  imasmig  Dh-v°e 
g&dhanti  S  111.59.  — Thus  in  var.  cpds.  (see  below),  as 
Dh-dhara   (+V-dh.)  one  who  knows  both  by  heart; 
Dh-vadin  (+ V-v.)  one  who  can  recite  both,  etc.  —  See 
e.  g.  the  foil,  passages :  Vin  11.285  (dh.  ca  v.  ca  pari- 
yattay,  304;  111.19,  9°  ;  D  i-8,   176,  229;  11.124   (ayag 
Dh.  ayai)  V.  idag  Satthu-sasanag) ;  111.9,  12,  28,  1 18  sq.  ; 
S  1.9.  119,  157;  11.21,  50,  (dh-vinaye  assasa) ;  A  111.297 
(id.);  S  II. 120;  III. 91  ;  iv.43  sq.,  260;  A  1.34,  121,  185, 
266;  il.2,  26,   117,    168;  III. 8,    168  sq.  ;  IV.36,  200  sq.  ; 
V.144,    163,     192;    It     112;    Sn    p.     102;    Ud    50.-  - 
2.  Dhamma,  Buddha,  Sungha.     On  the  principle  expl'' 
in  Note  on  B  i  a  rests  the  separation  of  the  personality 
of  the  teacher  from  that  which  he  taught  (the  "  Doc- 
trine,"   the    "  Word,"    the    Wisdom    or    Truth,    cp. 
Dhamma-kiyo    Tathagatassa    adhivacanarj    D    111.84). 
A  person  becoming  a  follower  of  the  B.  would  conform 
to  his  teaching  (Dh.)  &  to  the  community  ("  Church  "  ; 
Sangha)  by  whom  his  teaching  was  handed  down.     The 
formula  of  Initiation  or  membership  is  therefore  three- 
fold, viz.  Buddhar)  saraijag  upemi  (gacchSrai),  Dh  "t) 
.  .  .,  Sanghaij  .  .  .  i.  e.  I  put  myseliE  into  the  shelter 
of  the  B.,  the  Dh.  &  the  S.   (see  further  ref.   under 
Sangha)  S  1.34  (Buddhe  pasanna  Dhamme  ca  Sanghe 
tibbagarava  :  ete  sagge  pakasenti  yattha  te  upapajjare, 
i.  e.  those  who  adore  the  B.  &  his  Church  will  shine 
in  Heaven);  D  11.152  sq.,  202  sq.,  352;  S  iv.270  sq. 
(°sarapagamana) ;    DhA    1.206 ;    PvA     i     (vande    tar) 
uttamar)  Dh  "g,  B  °i),  S  °i)).     Cp.  Satthari,  Dhamme, 
Sanghe   kanlihati,  as  3  of  the  ceto-khila  A  iii.248ai. 
— 3.  Character  of  the  Dhamma  in  var.  attributes,  general 
phraseology.  — The  praise  of  the  Dh.  is  expressed  in 
many  phrases,  of  which  only  a  few  of  the  more  frequent 
can  be  mentioned  bere.     Among  the  most  famous  is 
that    of    "  dhammai)    deseti    adi-kalyanat)    majjhe-k°, 
pariyosana-k°.  etc.  "  beautiful  in  the  beginning,  beau- 
tiful in  the  middle  &  beautiful  in  the  end,"  e.  g.  D  1.62  ; 
S  1. 105;  IV. 315;  A  11.147,  208;  111.113  sq.,   135,  262; 
D  111.96,  267  ;  Nd'  316  ;  It  79  ;  VvA  87.     It  is  welcome 
as  a  friend,  beautifully  told,  &  its  blessings  are  imme- 
diate :    sv'    okkhdta,   sandit^ika,    akalika,    ehipassika 
etc.  D  11.93  ;  "i-S.  39.  45.  '02  :  S  1.9.  117;  11.199  :  iv.271  ; 
A  III. 285  etc.     It  is  maha-dh.  S  iv.128 ;  ariya"  S  i.jo  ; 
A  v. 241,  274  ;  Sn  783  ;  samma°  S  1.129.     It  is  likened 
to  a  splendid  palace  on  a  mountain-top  Vin  1.5  =  It  33. 
or  to  a  quiet  lake  with  sila  as  its  banks  S  1.169  =  183  ; 
and  it  is  above  age  &  decay  :  satafl  ca  dharamo  na  jaram 
upeti  S  1.71.     Whoever  worships  the  Dh.  finds  in  this 
worship  the  highest  gratification  :  diyo  loke  sako  putto 
piyo   loke   sako   pati,    tato   piyatara  .  .  .  dhammassa 
maggana    S    1.2  lo ;    ye    keci    ariyadhamme    khantiya 
upetl  .   .  .  devakayat)   paripuressanti  S   1.30.     Dh   "r) 
garukaroti  D  in. 84.     Opp.  Dhamme  agarava  A  111.247, 
340  ;  IV. 84  :  the  slanderers  of  the  Dh.  receive  the  worst 
punishment  after  death  S  1.30  (upenti  Koruvai)  ghorag). 
—  Var.  phrases  :  to  find  the  truth  (i.  e.  to  realize  intui- 
tively the  Dh.)  =  dh°o  anubodhati  D  11. 1 13  ;  S  1.137,  c 
vindati  D  i.iio,  148.     To  expound  the  Dh.,  teach  the 
truth,   talk  about  problems   of  ethics  &   philosophy : 
dh°g  deseti  Vin  iv.i34  ;  S  1.210  etc.  ;  katheti  PvA  41  ; 
bhisati  Vin  i.ioi  ;  bhaiiati  Vin  1.1O9  ;  pakaseti  S  11.28  ; 
IV.I2I.     To  hear  the  Dh.,  to  listen  to  such  an  exposi- 
tion: dh°gsuoatiS  1.114.  137,  196.  210  ;  A  1.36;  111.163  ; 
DhA  111.81,  113.     To  attain  full  knowledge  of  it :  dh  °g 
pariyapuijati  A  11. 103,  185  ;  111.86,  cp.  177  &  "pariyatti. 
To  remember  the  Dh.  :  dhareti  A  111.176  (for  details  of 
the  5  stages  of  the  Dh.-accomplishment) ;    to  ponder 


over  the  Dh.,  to  study  it:  dh  °g  vicinati  S  1.34=55.  214  ; 
A  IV. 3  sq.  To  enter  a  relation  of  discipleship  with  the 
Dh. :  dh  °g  sarai.iag  gacchati  (see  above  2)  Pv  iv.3<' ; 
dhammar)  sarapatthag  upehi  Vv  53^  (cp.  VvA  232).  — 
See  further  Ps  1.34,  78,  131  ;  11.159  sq. ;  Pug  58,  66; 
Vbh  293  sq.,  329;  Nett  11,  15,  31,  83,  U2  ;  &  cp.  cpds. 
—  4.  Dhamma  and  anudhamma.  Childers  interprets 
anudhamma  with  "  lesser  or  inferior  dhamma."  but  the 
general  purport  of  the  Nikaya  passages  seems  to  be  some- 
thing like  "  in  conformity  with,  in  logical  sequence  to 
the  dhamma "  i.  e.  lawfulness,  righteousness,  rejison- 
ableness.  truth  (see  KS  11.202  ;  Geiger,  Pali  Dhamma 
pp.  115-118).  It  occurs  (always  with  Dh.)  in  the  foil, 
contexts  ■  dhammassa  c'  dnudh  "g  vyakaroti  "  to  explain 
according  to  the  truth  of  the  Dhamma"  D  1.161  ; 
III.  1 15;  Ud.  50;  dhammassa  hoti  anudhammacirin 
"  walking  in  perfect  conformity  to  the  Dh."  A  11.8 ; 
dh.-anudh  °g  acaranti  id.  D  111.154;  dh.-anudh"  pati- 
panna  "  one  who  has  reached  the  complete  righteousness 
of  the  Dh."  D  11.224  ;  iii.i  19  ;  S  111.40  sq.  ;  It  81  ;  A 
III.  176  (where  it  forms  the  highest  stage  of  theDhamma- 
knowledge,  viz.  (i)  dh  "g  sunati ;  (2)  pariyapuijati ; 
(3)  dhareti ;  (4)  atthag  upaparikkhati ;  (5)  dh-anudh  °g 
pafipajjati).  Further  in  series  bahussuta,  dhamma- 
dhara,  dh-anudh°-patipanna  D  11.104;  S  v.261  ;  A 
II. 8  ;  Ud  63  ;  also  in  dhamma-kathika,  dh-anudh'-pafi 
panna,  dittha-dhamma-nibbana-patta  S  11.18  =  114  = 
III.  163;  &  in  atthag  annaya,  dhammag  anfiaya,  dh- 
anudh°-patipanna  A  1.3O  ;  11.97. 

-akkhana  discussing  or  preaching  of  the  Dhamma 
Nd'  91  ;  -atthadesana  interpretation  of  the  Dh.  Miln  21  ; 
-4dhikarana  a  point  in  the  Dh.  S  iv.63  =  v.346  ;  -Adhipa 
Lord  of  righteousness  (-(- anudhamma-carin)  A  1.150; 
cp.    "ssami ;    nt.    abstr.    "Adhipatejrya   the  dominating 
influence  of  the  Dh.  A  1.147  sq.  ;  D  111.220;  Miln  94; 
Vism    14.     -Anudhamma   see   above   C   4  ;   -anuvattin 
acting  in  conformity  with  the  moral  law  Dh  86,  cp. 
DhA  II. 161  ;  -Anusarin  of  righteous  living  D  111.105,  254 
(-1- saddha") ;    M   1.226,    479;    A    1.74;    iv.215;    iv.23 ; 
S  v. 200  ;  Pug  15  ;  Nett  112,  189  ;  -anvaya  main  drift  of 
the   faith,   general  conclusions  of  the  Dh.,   D   11.83  = 
III.  100  :  M  11.120:  -abhisamaya  understanding  of  the 
Truth,  conversion  to  the  Dhamma  [cp.  dharmabhisa- 
maya   Divy   200]    S   11.134    (H- dh.-cakkhu-patilabha) ; 
Pug    41;    Miln    20;   DhA   1.27;   iv.64  ;    PvA   31    etc.; 
-4mata  the  nectar  of  righteousness  or  the  Dh.  Miln  22 
("meghena   lokag    abhitappayanlo),    346 ;    -ad&sa    the 
mirror  of  the  Dhamma  D  11.93  (name  of  an  aphorism) 
S  V.357  (id.);  Th  i,  395;  Th.\  179;  -ayatana  the  field 
of  objects  of  ideation  S  11.72  ;  Dhs  58,  66,  147,  397,  572, 
594  ;  Vbh  70,  72  sq.  ;  -arammana  :  dh.  as  an  object  of 
ideation  Dhs   146,  157,  365  ;  cp.  Dhs.  trsl.  2  ;  -arama 
"  one  who  has  the  Dh.  as  his  pleasure-ground,"  one  who 
rejoices  in  theDh.  A  111.43 1  '■  It  82  (+  dh-rata);  Sn  327; 
Dh  364,   cp.   DhA  iv.95 ;  -alapana  using  the   proper 
address,  a  fit  mode  of  addressing  a  person  as  followed 
by  the  right  custom.     See    Dial.  1. 193-196;   J  v.418; 
-asana  "  the  Dh-seat,"  i.  e.  flat  piece  of  sfone  or  a  mat 
on  which  a  priest  sat  while  preaching  J  1.53  ;  DhA  11.31  ; 
-uposatha  the  fast  day  prescribed  by  the  Dh.  A  1.208 ; 
-okka   the   torch   of   Righteousness   J    1.34 ;    -oja   the 
essence  or  sap  of  the  Dh.  S  v. 162  ;  DhA  iv.169  ;  -osadha 
the  medicine  of  the  Dh.  Miln  1 10,  335.     -katha  ethical 
discussion,  fit  utterance,  conversation  about  the  Dh., 
advice  D  in.  154  ;  J  1.217  ;  VvA  6  ;  PvA  50,  66  ;  -kathika 
(adj.)  one  who  converses  about  ethical  problems,  one 
who  recites  or  preaches  the  Dh.,  one  who  speaks  fitly 
or  properly.     Often  in  combn.  with  Vinaya-dhara  "  one 
who  masters  (knows  by  heart)  the  Vinaya,"  &  bahus- 
suta "  one  who  has  a  wide  knowledge  of  tradition  "  : 
Vin   IV. lo.    13,    141;   A  111.78;   DhA   n.30 ;   also  with 
suttantika   "  one   who   is   versed   in   the   Suttantas "  • 
Vin  1. 169  ;  11.75  ;  iv.67.     The  ability  to  preach  the  Dh. 
is  the  first  condition  of  one  who  wishes  to  become  per- 
fected in  righteousness  (see  dhamm -anudhamma.  above 


Dhamma 


174 


Dhamma 


C  4):   S  n.i8.   114  =  111. it>3;  M  111.40.  — A  1.25  sq. ; 
II. 138;  Pug  42;  J  1. 217;  IV. 2  (°thera).     Cp.  also  AvS 
II. 81  ;  -kathikatta  (nt.)  speaking  about  the  Dh. ;  preach- 
ing M  III. 40  ;  A  1.38  (+ vinayadhara-katta) ;  -kamma 
a  legally  valid  act,  or  procedure  in  accordance  with 
the  Rules  of   the  Order  Vin   iv.37,    136,  232  ;   A  1.74 
( +  vinaya°) ;    a°   an   illegal   act   Vin   iv.232  ;    A   1.74; 
-karaka  a  proper  or  regulation   (standard)  water-pot, 
i.  e.  a  pot  with  a  filter  for  straining  water  as  it  was  used 
by   ascetics   Vin   11. 118,    177,    301;    J    1.395;    vi.331  ; 
DhA  III. 290,  452  ;  VvA  220  (not  "karanena) ;  PvA  185  ; 
Miln  68 ;  -kama  a  lover  of  the  Dh.  D  111.267  ;  A  v. 24,  27, 
90,  201  ;  Sn  92.     -kaya  having  a  body  according  to  the 
Norm    (the    dhammata    of    bodies).     See     Bdhgh    as 
translated  in  Dial.  111.  ad  loc.  ;  having  a  normal  body 
(sic  Bdhgh,  esp.  of  the  B.  D  111.84  :  -ketu  the  standard 
of  the  Dh.,  or  Dh.  as  standard  A  1.109  =  111.149  ;  -khan- 
dha  the  (4)  main  portions  or  articles  of  the  Dh.  (sila, 
samadhi,    paniia,    virautti)    D    111.229 ;    cp.    Sp.    AvS 
"•'55  :  -gana  a  body  of  followers  of  the  Dh.  PvA  194  ; 
-gandika  (better  gan{hika,  q   v.)  a  block  of  justice,  i.  e. 
of  execution  J  1.150,  151  ;  11.124  ;  vi.176 ;  v. 303  ;  -garu 
worshipping  the  Dh.  S  iv.123;  DhA  1.17  (°ka) ;  -gariya 
a  kind  of  acrobatic  tumbler,  lit.  excellent  t.  (-f  brahma") 
Miln   191  ;  -gu  one  who  knows  the  Dh.  (analogous  to 
vedagu)  J  v. 222  ;  vi.261  ;  -gutta  protecting  the  Dh.  or 
protected  by  the  Dh.  (see  gutta)  S  1.222  ;  J  v.222  (-f  dh- 
pala) ;  -ghosaka  (-kamma)  praise  of  the  Dh.  DhA  111.81  ; 
-cakka  the  perfection  or  supreme  harmony  of  righteous- 
ness (see  details  under  cakkha),  always  in  phrase  dh- 
cakkai)   pavatteti   (of  the   Buddha)   "  to  proclaim   or 
inaugurate    the    perfect    state    or    ideal    of   universal 
righteousness"  Vin  i.8  =  M  1.171  ;  Vin  i.ii;  S  1.191  ; 
III. 86 ;  Sn  556,  693  ;  Miln  20,  343  ;  DhA  1.4  ;  VvA  165  ; 
PvA  2,  67  etc. ;  besides  this  also  in  simile  at  S  1.33  of  the 
car  of  righteousness ;  -cakkhu  "  the  eye  of  wisdom," 
perception  of  the  law  of  change.     Freq.  in  the  standing 
formula  at  the  end  of  a  conversation  with  the  Buddha 
which  leads  to  the  "  opening  of  the  eyes  "  or  conver- 
sion of  the  interlocutor,  viz.  "  virajag  vitamalai)  dh- 
cakkhui)    udapadi "    D    1.86,    no;     11.288;    S    iv.47; 
A  IV. 186;  Vin  1.1 1,   16,  40  etc.     Expl.  at  DA  1.237: 
dhammesu    va    cakkhuQ   dhammamayai)   va  cakkhurj. 
Cp.  S  II.  1 34  ("patilabha  ;  -f  dhammabliisamaya) ;  Dial. 
1. 184  ;  II. 1 76  ;  -cariya  walking  in  righteousness,  righteous 
living,  observance  of  the  Dh.,  piety  (  =  danadi-punfia- 
pajipatti   VvA    282)    S    i.ioi    (-f- samacariya    kusala- 
kiriya);  A  11.5  ;  111.448;  v. 87,  302;  Sn  263  (=kayasu- 
caritadi°  Sn  A  309),  274  (-f  brahma").     a°  evil  way  of 
living  A  1.55  (-f  visama-cariya) ;  -carin  virtuous,  dutiful 
M   1.289;    11.188;    Dh    1O8;    Miln    19    (-t- samacarin) ; 
-cetiya  a  memorial  in  honour   of   the  Dh.  M  11.124; 
-chanda  virtuous  desire  (opp.  kama°)  DhsA  370  ;  Vbh 
2C8  ;  -ja  born  of  the  Dh.  (see  above,  Note  on  B  i  a),  in 
formula  "  Bhagavato  putto  oraso  dh-jo,  dh-nimmito, 
dh.dayado "    (the   spiritual   child   of  the   Buddha)   D 
iii.84=S  11.221  ;  It  101  ;  -Jala  "  net  of  the  Dh.,"  name 
of  a  discourse  (cp.  °adasa  &  pariyaya)  D  1.46 ;  -jivin 
living  righteously  It  108  ;  Dh  24  (=dhammena  samena 
DhA  1.239);  -fliiu  one  who  knows  the  Dh.  J  VI.2O1  ; 
-ttha    standing   in    the   Law,    just,    righteous    S    1.33 
(-1-  silasampanua) ;  Sn  749  ;  J  in.334  :  iv.21 1  ;  ThA  244  , 
-tthita  =  °ttha  D  1.190  ;  -tthiti"  having  a  footing  in  the 
Dh.  S  11.60,  124,  cp.  "tthitata  :  establishing  of  causes  and 
effects  S  11.25  ; -takka  right  reasoning  Sn  1 107  (  =  samma- 
sankappa  Nd^  318) ;  -dana  gift  of;  -dayada  heir  of  the 
Dh. ;  spiritual  heir  (cp.  above  note  on  B  i  a)  D  111.84  ; 
S  11.22 1  ;Mi.i2;  111.29;  It  10 1  ;  -dipa  the  firm  ground  or 
footing  o*  the  Dh.  (usually  comb""  with  atta-dipa  :  having 
oneself  as  one's  refuge,  self-dependent)  D  ii.ico  ;  111.58, 
77  ;  S  V.154  ;  -desana  moral  instruction,  exposition  of  the 
Dh.  Vin  1.16  ;  D  i.i  10  etc.  (see  desana) ;  -dessin  a  hater 
of  the  Dh.  Sn  92  ;  -dhaja  the  banner  of  the  Dh.  A  1. 109  = 
111.149  :  Nd^i  503  ;  Miln  2 1  ;  -dhara  (adj.)  one  who  knows 
the  Dh.  (by  heart) ;  see  above  C  4.     Comb^  w.  Vinaya- 


dhara  Vin  1.127,  337  ;  11. 8  ;  A  1. 117,  &  bahussuta  (ibid). 
Sn  58  (cp.  SnA  no).  —  See  also  A  111.361  sq.,  iv.310; 
Nd^  319;  -dhatu  the  mental  object  considered  as  irre- 
ducible element  Dhs  58,  67,  147  etc.  ;  Vbh  87,  8g  (see 
above  B  i ) ;  an  ultimate  principle  of  the  Dh.,  the  cosmic 
law  D  II. 8  ;  M  1.396  ;  S  11.143  sq.  ;  Nett  64  sq. ;  Vism 
486  sq.  -dharana  knowledge  of  the  Dh.  M  11. 175; 
-nataka  a  class  of  dancing  girls  having  a  certain  duty 
J  v.27g  ;  -nimmita  see  °ja ;  -niyama  belonging  to  the 
order  of  the  Norm  D  1.190  ;  DA  on  D  11. 12  :  dhammata  ; 
(°ka) ;  -niyamata,  certainty,  or  orderliness  of  causes 
and  effects  S  11.25;  Points  of  Controversy,  387;  -netti  = 
niyama  Miln  328 ;  DA  1.31  ;  cp.  Sk.  dharmanetri 
M  Vastu  11-357  ;  111.234,  238  ;  -pajjota  the  lamp  of  the 
Dh.  Miln  2 1  ;  -pada  (nt.)  a  line  or  stanza  of  the  Dhamma, 
a  sentence  containing  an  ethical  aphorism ;  a  portion 
or  piece  of  the  Dh.  In  the  latter  meaning  given  as  4 
main  subjects,  viz.  anabhijjha,  avyapada,  samma-sati, 
samma-samadhi  D  111.229 ;  A  11.29  sq.  (in  detail) ; 
Nett  170.  —  S  1.22  (dana  ca  kho  dh-padar)  va  seyyo). 
202  (dh-padesu  chando) ;  A  11. 185;  Sn  88  (dh-pade 
sudesite  =  nibbana-dhammassa  padatta  SnA  164); 
J  III. 472  (  =  nibbana);  DhA  111.190  (ekag  dh-padag). 
As  Np.  title  of  a  canonical  book,  included  in  the  Khud 
daka  Nikaya ;  -pamana  measuring  by  the  (teaching  of' 
Dh.  Pug  53;  DhA  111.114  ("ikani  jatisatani) ;  -pariyatti 
attainment  of  or  accomplishment  in  the  Dh.,  the  collec- 
tion of  the  Dh.  in  general  A  111.86  (w.  ref.  to  the  9  angas, 
see  navanga)  ;  -pariyaya  a  short  discourse,  or  a  verse, 
or  a  poem,  with  a  moral  or  a  text ;  usually  an  exposition 
uf  a  single  point  of  doctrine  D  1.46;  11.93;  mi  16; 
M  1.445  ;  Vin  1. 40  (a  single  verse) ;  A  1.O5  ;  iv.63  (a 
poem  Sn  190-218,  where  also  it  is  called  a  dh^pariyayo)  ; 
A  v. 288,  291.  Such  a  dh°pariyaya  had  very  often  a 
special  name.  Thus  Brahmajala,  the  Wondrous  Net 
D  1.46 ;  Dhammadaso  dh°p°,  the  Mirror  of  the  Law 
D  11-93  =S  V.357 ;  Sokasallaharaua,  Sorrow's  dart  ex- 
tractor A  111.62  ;  Adittap"  dh'p",  the  Ked-hot  lancet 
S  IV.  168  ;  Loniahar)sana°  M  1.83  ;  Dhammata-dhamma" 
Miln  193,  etc.  -pala  guardian  of  the  Law  or  the  Dh. 
J  v.222.  freq.  also  as  Np.  ;  -piti  (-rasa)  the  sweetness  of 
drinking  in  the  Dh.  (pivai))  Sn  257  :  Dh  79  (  =  dharama- 
payako  dhammar)  pivanto  ti  attho  DhsA  11. 126); 
-bhandagarika  treasurer  of  the  Dh.,  an  Ep.  of  Ananda 
Th-i,  1048;  J  1.382,  501;  11.25;  l^hA  111.250;  PvA  2. 
-bhuta  having  become  the  Dh.  ;  righteousness  incor- 
porated, said  of  the  Buddhas  D  111.84.  Usually  in 
phrase  (Bhagava)  cakkhu-bhuta  .  .  .  dh-bhuta  brahma- 
bhuta  A  v. 226  sq.  (cp.  cakkhu);  Th  i,  491  ;  see  also 
above,  note  B  i  a ;  -bheri  the  drum  of  the  Dh.  Miln  2 1  ; 
-magga  the  path  of  righteousness  Sn  696 ;  Miln  2 1  ; 
-maya  made  (built)  of  the  Dh.  (pasada)  S  1.137  ;  -yanta 
the  (sugar-)  mill  of  the  Dh.  (tig.)  Miln  1O6.  -yana  the 
vehicle  of  the  Law  (the  eightfold  Noble  Path)  S  v. 5  ; 
-rakkhita  rightly  guarded  Sn  288  ;  -rata  fond  of  the  Law 
Sn  327;  Dh  364;  DhA  iv.95 ;  cp.  dh.-[gata]rati  Th 
1.742  :  Dhp.  354  ;  -rasa  taste  of  Dhp.  354  ;  -raja  king 
of  righteousness,  Ep.  of  tlie  Buddha  S  1.33=55  ;  D  1.88 
(of  a  cakkavatti) ;  A  1.109;  111.149;  Sn  554;  J  1.262; 
interpreted  by  Bdhgh  at  DA  1.249  as  "  dhanimena 
rajjai)  labhitva  raja  jato  ti"=a  king  who  gained  the 
throne  legitimately ;  -laddha  one  who  has  acquired  the 
Dh.,  holy,  pious  S  11.21;  J  111.472;  justly  acquired 
(bhoga)  Sn  p.  87 ;  -vara  the  best  of  truths  or  the  most 
excellent  Doctrine  Sn  233.  234  ;  -vadin  speaking  pro- 
perly, speaking  the  truth  or  according  to  the  Doctrine 
Vin  11.285;  '"lyS  (+ Vinaya-vadin) ;  D  111.135  (id.); 
D  1.4,  95  (of  Gotama;  DA  1.76  ;  nava-lokuttara-dhamma 
sannissitai)  katva  vadati) ;  S  iv.252  ;  A  1.75;  11. 209; 
-vicaya  investigation  of  doctrine,  religious  research 
Dhs  16,  20,  90,  309,  333,  555  ;  Vbh  106  ;  Vism  132  ; 
-vitakka  righteous  thought  A  1.254  '■  -v'dO  one  who 
understands  the  Dh.,  an  expert  in  the  Dh.  J  v.222  ; 
VI. 261  ;  -vinicchaya  righteous  decision,  discrimination 
of  the  truth  Sn  327  ;  Dh  144  ;  DhA  111.86  ;  -viharin  living 


Dbamma 


175 


Dhatu 


according  to  the  Dh.  A  in. 86  sq.  ;  -saijvibhaga  sharing 
out  or  distribution  of  the  Dh..  i.  e.  spiritual  gifts  It 
98  (opp.  amisa"  material  gifts) ;  -sangahaka  a  compiler 
of  the  sacred  scriptures,  a  SiairKinaoTiii;  \'v\  3.  169: 
-safiila  righteous  thought,  faith,  piety  PvA  3  ;  -sabha  a 
hall  for  the  discussion  of  the  Dh.,  a  chapel,  meeting- 
house J  VI. 333  ;  DhA  1. 31  ;  11. 51  ;  iv.91  ;  PvA  3S.  196; 
-samaya  a  meeting  where  the  Dh.  is  preached  S  1.26; 
-samadana  acquisition  of  the  Dh.,  which  is  fourfold  as 
discussed  at  M  1.305;  D  111.229;  -sarana  relying  on  or 
putting  one's  faith  in  the  Dh.  (see  above  C  3)  D  111.58, 
77  :  S  V.154  ;  -sarana  hearing  the  preaching  of  the  Dh., 
"  going  to  church  "  Vin  i.ioi  ;  M  n.175  ;  A  11.248,  381  ; 
IV.3O1  ;  Sn  265;  DhA  iii.igo;  -sakaccha  conversation 
about  the  Dh.  Sn  266 ;  -ssami  Lord  of  the  Truth,  Ep.  of 
the  Buddha  (see  above  l>  1  a  note)  S  iv  9.^  ;  -sara  the 
essence  of  the  Dh.  S  v. 402  ;  -sarathi  in  purisa-dh.-s°  at 
D  1.O2  misprint  for  purisa-damma-s' ;  -sarin  a  follower 
of  the  Dh.  S  1.170  ;  -sudhammata  excellency  of  the  Dh. 
S  n.199;  Th  I,  24.  220,  27.1,  2.-i6;  -senapati  "captain 
of  the  Dhamma,"  Ep.  of  Sariputta  Th  i,  K183  ;  J  1.408  , 
Miln  343  ;  DhA  111.3O5  ;  VvA  fi4,  O5.  158  ;  -sondata  thirst 
after  justice  J  v.482  ;  -sota  the  ear  of  the  Dh.  S  11.43. 

Dhamma'  (adj.)  [Sk.  *dh=irma,  cp.  dhammika]  only  in  1. 
-i  in  comb"  with  katha  :  relating  to  the  Dhamma.  viz. 
conversation  on  questions  of  Ethics,  speaking  about  the 
Dh..  preaching,  religious  discourse,  sermon.  Either  as 
dhammi  kath.^i  Vin  ii.iOi;  iv.56  &  in  instr.-abl. 
dhammiya  kathaya  (sanda,sscti  samadapeti  samuttejeti 
sagpahagseti :  ster.  formula)  S  1.114,  '55'  210,  iv.122  , 
PvA  30  etc.  ;  or  as  cpd.  dhammi-katha  D  11.  i  ;  M  1.161  ; 
Sn  3.'5;  &  dhammi-katha  S  1.155;  PvA  38. 

Dhamma^  (<i'lj)  fSk.  dhanvanl  having  a  bow  :  see  dalha°  ; 
also  as  dhammin  in  da|ha"  S  1.185  (see  dhammin). 

Dhammata  (f)  [Sk.  dharmita]  conformity  to  the  Dhamma- 
niyama  (see  niyama),  fitness,  propriety ;  a  general  rule, 
higher  law,  cosmic  law,  general  practice,  regular  pheno- 
menon, usual  liabit ;  often  used  in  the  sense  of  a  finite 
verb  :  it  is  a  rule,  it  Is  proper,  one  should  expect  S  1.140 
(Iluddhanai)  dh.  the  law  of  the  B.'s  i.  e.  as  one  is  wont 
to  expect  of  the  B.s).  215  (su°) ;  iv.216  sq.  (khaya°  etc.) ; 
D  II. 12;  A  11.36  (kusala") ;  v. 46;  Th  i,  712;  J  1.245; 
II. 128  ;  Nett  2  I,  50.  cp.  Miln  179  ;  PvA  19  ;  VvA  7.  See 
also  AvS  Index. 

Dhammatta  (f.)  [Sk.  *dharmatvag]  liability  to  be  judged 
Vin  11.55  {&  a°). 

Dhammani  only  found  in  S  1.103,  where  the  Corny,  takes 
it  as  a  locative,  and  gives,  as  the  equivalent,  "  in  a 
forest  on  dry  land  "  (araiifte  thale).  Cp.  Kindred 
Sayings  1. 129,  «.  2. 

Dbammika  (adj.)  [=Sk.  dharmya,  cp.  dhammiya]  lawful, 
according  to  the  Dh.  or  the  rule ;  proper,  fit,  right ; 
permitted,  legitimate,  justified  ;  righteous,  honourable, 
of  good  character,  just,  esp.  an  attr.  of  a  righteous  King 
(raja  cakkavatti  dhammikodhammaraja)  D  1.86  ;  11.16  ; 
A  1.109  =  111.149;  J  1.262,  263;  def.  by  Bdhgh  as 
"  dhammat)  carati  ti  dh,"  (DA  1.237)  &  "  dhammena 
carati  ti  dh.,  nayena  samena  pavattali  ti  "  (ib.  249).  — 
Vin  IV. 284  :  D  1. 103;  S  11.280  (dhammika  katha); 
111.240  (ahara) ;  iv.203  (dhammika  deva.  adh°  asura) ; 
A  1.75;  III. 277;  Sn  404;  DhA  11.86  (dohala) ;  iv.185 
("labha);  PvA  25  .(=suddha,  manohara).  Also  as 
saha-dh°  (esp.  in  conn.  w.  panha,  a  justified,  reasonable, 
proper  question :  D  1.94  ;  S  iv.299  in  detail)  Vin  iv.141  ; 
D  1. 161  ;  in. 115;  A  1.174. — a°  unjust,  illegal  etc.  Vin 
iv.285  ;  S  iv,203  ;  A  111.243. 

Dhammin*  (adj.)  [Sk.  dharmin]  only  -° :  having  the  nature 
or  quality  of,  liable  to,  consisting  in,  practising,  acting 
like,  etc.  (as  "dhamma  B  2  a),  viz.  uppada-vaya"  D 
II.  157;  raarana"  ( =marahadhamma)  A  I-147;  papa" 
Pv  1.1 1'  of  evil  nature. 


Dhammin-    (-°)  only  in  dalha-dh",  which  is  customarily 
taken  as  a  der"  from  dhanu,  bow  =  having  a  strong  bow 
(see  dhamma^) ;  although  some  passages  admit  inter 
pretation  as  "  of  strong  character  or  good  practice," 
e.  g.  S  1. 185. 

Dhammiya  (adj.)  [Sk.  dharmya ;  cp.  dhammika]  in  accord- 
ance with  the  Dhamma  PvA  242  (also  a")  •  Vism  306 
("l.-ibha). 

DhammiUa  [Sk.  dhammillal  the  braided  hair  of  women 
Davs  IV. 9. 

Dhamn^  in  "katha  see  dhamma'. 

'Dhayati  to  suck :  see  dhatl.  Caus.  dhapayati.  pp.  dhata 
(q.  v.). 

Dhara  (usually  -°,  except  at  Miln  420)  (adj.)  [Sk.  dhara, 
to  dhj.  see  dharati]  bearing,  wearing,  keeping ;  holding 
in  mind,  knowing  by  heart.  Freq.  in  phrase  dhamma- 
dhara  (knowing  the  Dhamma,  q.  v.).  vinaya",  mitikj". 
e.  g.  D  II.  1 2  ■3.  dhamma"  also  Sn  58;  Th  1,  187;  Nd* 
319;  vinaya"  Miln  344;  jatajina"  Sn  loio.  See  also 
dhara. 

Dhara^a  (adj.)  bearing,  holding,  comprising  VvA  104 
(suvannassa  paiicadasa"  nikkha  holding,  i.  e.  worth  or 
equal  to  15  parts  of  gold).  —  f,  -I  bearing,  i.  e.  pregnant 
with  Sn  26  (of  cows:  godharaniyo  paveniyo=gabbhi 
niyo  SnA  39).  As  n.  the  Earth  J  v.311  ;  vi.526 ;  Miln 
34  ;  dharani-niha  N.  of  a  tree  J  vi.482.  497  ;  Miln  376. 

Dharati  [Sk.  dharati,  dhr  as  in  Gr.  flp.n'ot ;  Lat.  firmus  & 
fretus.  See  also  dajha.  dhata,  dhamma,  dhiti.  dhuva] 
to  hold,  bear,  carry,  wear ;  to  hold  up,  support ;  to  bear 
in  mind,  know  by  heart ;  to  hold  out,  endure,  last, 
continue,  live  Sn  385  (take  to  heart,  remember) ;  DhA 
11.68; — ppr.  dharamana  living,  lasting  J  1.75  (dh'e 
yeva  suriye  while  the  sun  was  still  up) ;  11.6  ;  Miln  240, 
291  (Bhagavato  dh"-kale) ;  — grd.  dhareyya,  in  dh°- 
divasa  the  day  when  a  young  girl  is  to  be  carried  (into 
the  house  of  her  husband)  ThA,  25  ;  cp.  dhareyya  Th  2. 
472=vivaha  ThA  285. — pp.  dhata  (q.  v.) — Caus. 
dhareti  (q.  v.). 

Dhava'  [Sk.  dhava  =  madhuratvaca,  Halayudha]  the  shrub 
Grislea  Tomentosa  A  1.202,  204  ;  J  iv.209  ;  vi.528. 

Dhava'  [Sk.  dhava,  a  newly  formed  word  after  vidhava, 
widow,  q.  v.]  a  husband  ThA  121  (dh.  vuccati  samiko 
tad  abhava  vidhava  matapatika  ti  attho). 

Dhavala  (adj.)  [Sk.  dhavala,  to  dhavati.  see  dhavati  & 
dhovati]  white,  dazzling  white  VvA  252  ;  Davs  11.123; 
V.26. 

Dhavalata  (f)  whiteness  VvA  197. 

Dhata  [Sk.  'dhayita  of  dhayati  to  suck,  nourish,  pp. 
dhita]  fed,  satiated  ;  satisfied,  appeased  Vin  1.222  ;  J 
1. 1 85;  11.247,  44'' .'  V.73  :  VI. 555  ;  Pv  i.ii*  (so  read  for 
data)  =  PvA  59  ( :  suhita  titta) ;  Miln  238,  249.  —  f. 
abstr.  dhatata  satiation,  fulness,  satisfaction,  in  ati" 
J  n.293. 

Dhatl  (f)  [Sk.  dhatri  =Gr.  nOlitni  wet  nurse,  to  dhayati  suck, 
suckle  ;  Idg.  'dhSi  as  in  Gr.  OJiadui  to  milk.  Si/Xuf  feeding. 
tf/|Xi;  female  breast ;  cp.  Lat.  felare,  femina  ("  giving 
suck"),  filius  ("  suckUng ") ;  Oir.  dinu  lamb;  Goth, 
daddjan ;  Ohg.  tila  breast;  See  also  dadhi,  dhita, 
dhenu]  wet  nurse,  fostermother  D  11. 19;  M  1.395; 
11.324;  J  1.57;  111.391;  PvA  16,  176.  In  cpds.  dhati". 
viz.  -cela  swaddling  cloth,  baby's  napkin  S  1.205  = 
J  111.309. 

Dhatu  (f.)  [Sk.  dhatu  to  dadhsti.  Idg.  'dhe,  cp.  Gr.  r.eij^., 
avd-Hiiiia,  Sk.  dhaman.  dhifr  (  =  Lat.  conditor) ;  Goth, 
gadeds ;  Ohg.  tat,  tuom  (in  meaning  -°=  dhatu,  cp.  E. 
serf-dom  "  condition  of  .  .  .")  tuon=E.  to  do ;  &  with 
k-sufiix  Lat.  facio,  Gr.   (t)di/c(a),  Sk.  dbika ;  see  also 


Dhatuka 


176 


Dhareti 


dhamma]  element.  Closely  related  to  dhamma  in 
meaning  B  i'',  only  implying  a  closer  relation  to  physical 
substance.  As  to  its  gen.  connotation  cp.  Dhs.  trsl. 
p.  198.  —  I.  a  primary  element,  of  which  the  usual  set 
comprises  the  four  pathavi.  apo,  tejo,  vayo  (earth, 
water,  fire,  wind),  otherAvise  termed  cattaro  mahi- 
bhuta(ni) :  D  1.215;  11.294;  111.228  ;  S  1.15;  11. 169  sq., 
224;  IV. 175.  195;  A  II. 165:  111.243;  Vbh  14,  72;  Nett 
73.  See  discussed  at  Cpd.  254  sq.  —  A  def"  of  dhatu 
is  to  be  found  at  Vism  485.  —  Singly  or  in  other  comb"^ 
pathavi"  S  11. 174  ;  tejo"  S  1.144  ;  D  in. 227  ;  the  four  plus 
akasa  S  111.227,  plus  vinfiana  S  11.248:  111.231;  see 
below  2  b.  —  2.  (a)  natural  condition,  property,  dis- 
position;  factor,  item,  principle,  form.  In  this  mean- 
ing in  var.  comb"*  &  applications,  esp.  closely  related 
to  khandha.  Thus  mentioned  with  khandha  &  ayatana 
(sensory  element  &  element  of  sense-perception)  as 
bodily  or  physical  element,  factor  (see  khandha  B  i  d 
&  cp.  Nd^  under  dhatu)  Th  2.  472.  As  such  (physical 
substratum)  it  constitutes  one  of  the  loka  or  forms  of 
being  (khandha°  dhatu"  ayatana"  Nd^  .S50).  Freq. 
also  in  comb"  kama-dhatu,  rupa"  arupa"  "  the  elements 
or  properties  of  k.  etc."  as  preceding  A  conditioning 
bhava  in  the  respective  category  (Nd-  s.  v  ).  See  under 
d.  —  As  "set  of  conditions  or  state  of  being  (-°) " 
in  the  foU.  :  loka°  a  world,  of  which  10  are  usually 
mentioned  (equalling  lo.coo  :  PvA  138)  S  1.26  ;  v. 424  ; 
Pv  II  9"  ;  Vbh  336  ;  PvA  138  ;  KS  ii.ioi,  k.  i  ;  —  nib- 
bana°  the  state  of  N.  S  v. 8  ;  A  11. 120  ;  iv.202  ;  J  1.55  ; 
It  38  (dve :  see  under  Nibbana)  ;  Miln  312.  Also  in  the 
foil,  connections :  amata"  It  62  ;  bhu°  the  verbal  root 
bhu  DA  1.229  :  thapitaya  dhatuya  "  while  the  bodily 
element,  i.  e.  vitality  lasts"  Miln  125;  vanna"  form, 
beauty  S  1.131  ;  Pv  1.3'.  In  these  cases  it  is  so  Jar 
weakened  in  meaning,  that  it  simply  corresponds  to  K. 
abstr.  suffix  -hood  or  -ity  (cp.  °hood  =  orif;in.  "  form  "  : 
see  ketu),  so  perhaps  in  Nibbana"=  Nibbana-dom.  Cp. 
dhatuka.  —  (b)  elements  in  sense-consciousness  :  refer- 
ring to  the  6  ajjhattikani  &  6  bahirani  ayatanani  S 
11.I40  sq.  Of  these  sep.  sota°  D  1.79  ;  111.38  ;  Vbh  334  ; 
dibbasota"  S  11. 121.  212;  v. 265,  3(14;  A  1.255;  mi?. 
280  ;  v.  199  ;  cakkhu°  Vbh  71  sq.  ;  mano°  Vbh  175,  182. 
301;  mano-virinana°  Vbh  87,  8g,  175,  182  sq. — 
(c)  various:  aneka°  A  1.22  :  111.325  ;  v. 33  ;  akusala°  Vbh 
363  ;  avijja"  S  11. 132  ;  abha°  S  11. 150  ;  Arambha"  S  v. 66, 
104  sq.  ;  A  1.4  ;  11.338  ;  !hiti°S  11. 175  ;  111.231  ;  A  111.33S  ; 
dhamma"  S  11.56;  nekkhamma"  S  n.151;  A  in. 447  ; 
nissaraniya  dhatuyo  (5)  D  111.239 ;  A  in. 245,  290.  See 
further  S  1.134,  196;  11. 153,  248  (anicca) ;  in. 231  (niro- 
dha) ;  iv.67  ;  A  1.176  ;  11.164  ;  iv.385  ;  Dhs  58.  67,  121  ; 
Nett  57,  64  sq.  ;  ThA  20,  49,  285,  —  (d)  Different  sets  and 
enumerations :  as  3  under  kama°,  rupa°,  arupa  A  1.223  '• 
111.447,;  Ps  1. 137;  Vbh  86,  363,  404  sq. ;  under  rupa°, 
arupa",  nirodha"  It  45.  —  as  6  (pathavi  etc. -t- akasa" 
&  viiinana") :  D  in. 247  ;  A  1.175  sq.  ;  M  111.31,  62,  240; 
Ps  1. 136  ;  Vbh  82  sq.  —  asy  (abha  subha  etc.) :  S  11.150. 
—  18:  Ps  i.ioi,  137;  11.23(1,  Dhs  1333;  Vbh  87  sq., 
401  sq. ;  Vism  484  sq.  —  3.  a  humour  or  affection  of 
the  body  DA  1.253  (dhatusamata).  —  4.  the  remains 
of  the  body  after  cremation  PvA  76;  a  relic  VvA  165 
(sarira".  bodily  relic)  ;  Davs  v. 3  (dasana"  the  tooth- 
relic).  —  abl.  dhatuso  according  to  one's  nature  S 
II.  154  sq.  (satta  sattehi  saddhir)  sar)sandanti  etc.); 
It  70  (id.) ;  S  111.65. 

-katha  N,  of  3"'  book  of  the  Abhidhamma  Vism  96. 
-kucchi  womb  Miln  176  ;  -kusala  skilled  in  the  elements 
M  HI. 62  ;  "kusalata  proficiency  in  the  (18)  elements 
D  III. 212;  Dhs  1333;  -ghara  "house  for  a  relic,"  a 
dagoba  SnA  194.  -cetiya  a  shrine  over  a  relic  DhA 
III. 29  ;  -nanatta  diversity  of  specific  experience  D  in. 289  ; 
S  II. 143;  IV. 1 13  sq.,  284;  -vibhaga  distribution  of 
relics  VvA  297  ;  PvA  212. 

Dhatuka  (adj.)  (only  -")  having  the  nature,  by  nature, 
afiected  with,  -like  (cp.  "dhamma  B  2-') ;  often  simply  = 


first  part  of  cpd.  (cp.  E.  friend-like  =  friendly = friend) 

J  1.438  (kilittha"  miserable),  11.31  (saraa").  63  (badhira° 
deaf),  102  (panduroga"  having  jaundice),  114  (dhut- 
tika") ;  iv.137  (vamanaka"  deformed),  391  (muddha") ; 
v. 197  (avata") ;  DhA  1.89  (anattamana"). 

Dhatura  (adj.  -°)  [  =  *dhatuya]  in  cha°  consisting  of  six 
elements  (purisa)  M  in. 2 39  (where  apodhatu  omitted 
by  mistake).     See  dhatu  2  c. 

Dhana  (adj.-n.)  [Sk.  dhana.  to  dadhati ;  cp.  dhatu]  (adj.) 
holding,  containing  (-")  M  i.ii  (ahi  kantaka";  cp. 
ildhana  &  kaijtaka).  —  (n.)  nt.  a  receptacle  Dh  58 
(sankara"  dust-heap  =  thana  DhA  1.445).  f.  dhani  a 
seat  (  =thana),  in  raja"  "  the  king's  seat,"  a  royal  town. 
Often  in  comb  with  gSma  &  nigama  ^see  gama  3  a): 
Vin  in. 89;  J  VI. 397  ;  Pv  11.13*^ 

Dhaniya  (adj.)  [Sk.  dhanya,  cp.  dhanna^]  wealthy,  rich, 
abundant  in  (-")  J  in. 367  (pahutadhana" ;  v.  1.  BB 
"dharitai)) ;  (nt.)  riches,  wealth  J  v. 99,  ico. 

0hara  (adj.)  (-")  [Sk.  dhara  to  dhareti ;  cp.  dhara]  bearing, 
holding,  having  D  1.74  (udaka-rahado  sitavari") ;  M 
1. 281  (ubhato")  Sn  336  (ukka") ;  It  loi  (antimadeha"), 
108  (ukka").     See  also  dharin. 

Dharaka  (adj.-n  )  i.  bearing,  one  who  holds  or  possesses 
DhA  in  93  (sampattii)).  —  2.  one  who  knows  or 
remembers  A  11.97  CjStika) ;  iv.296  sq..  328  (id.). 

Dharana  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  dharana,  to  dhareti]  i.  wearing. 
in  mala"  (etc.)  D  1.5=  A  11.210  =  Pug  58;  KhA  37; 
civara"  A  11.104=  Pug  45.  — 2.  maintaining,  sustaining, 
keeping  up  Miln  320  (ayu"  bhojana).  —  3.  bearing  in 
mind,  remembrance  Vin  iv.305  ;  M  11. 175  (dhamma"). 

Dharanaka  [der.  fr.  dharana]  i.  a  debtor  (see  dhareti  4) 
J  n.203  ;  IV. 45.  — 2.  a  mnemonician  Miln  79. 

Dharanata  (f)  i.  wearing,  being  dressed  with  (  =  dharana 
i)  Miln  257.  —  2.  mindfulness  (  =  dharana  3)  Nd^  628  = 

Dhs  14. 

Dharana  (f)  [to  dharana]  i.  memory  Miln  79.  —  2.  the 
earth  ('"  the  upholder,"  cp.  dharani)  J  vi.180. 

Dhaia'  (f)  [Sk.  dhara,  from  dhavati  i]  torrent,  stream. 
flow,  shower  D  1.74  (samma"  an  even  or  seasonable 
shower;  DA  I.2i8  =  vut{hi) ;  11.15  (udakassa,  streams!; 
J  1.31  ;  Ps  1. 125  (udaka") ;  Pv  u.g"'  (samma") ;  VvA  4 
(hingulika")  ;  PvA  139;  DhA  iv.15  (assu")  ;  Sdhp  595 
(vassa"). 

Dhara^  (f.)  [Sk.  dhara.  from  dhavati  2.]  the  edge  of  a 
weapon  J  1.455;  vi.449  ;  DhA  317:  DA  1.37.  —  (adj.) 
(-")  having  a  (sharp)  edge  J  1.414  (khura")  Miln  105 
(sukhuma") ;  ekato°-ubhato"  single-  &  double-edged 
J  1.73  (asi) ;  IV. 12  (sattha). 

Dharin  (adj.  -°)  [Sk.  dharin,  see  dhareti  &  cp.  "dhara, 
"dhara]  holding,  wearing,  keeping ;  often  in  phrase 
antimadeha"  "  wearing  the  last  body  "  (of  an  Arahant) 
S  1. 14;  Sn  471;  It  32,  40.  —  J  1.47  (virupa-vesa") ; 
Davs  V.15.  —  f.  "ini  Pv  i.io^  (kasikuttama"). 

Dharetar  [n.  ag.  to  dhareti  3]  one  who  causes  others  to 
remember,  an  instructor,  teacher  (cp.  dharanaka)  A 
IV.  196  (sota  saveta  uggahcta  dh.). 

Dhareti  [Caus.  of  dharati,  q.  v.  for  etyra.]  to  hold,  viz. 
I .  to  carry,  bear,  wear,  possess  ;  to  put  on,  to  bring, 
give  D  I.i66si  (chavadussani  etc.) ;  Vin  i.i6  =  D  i.iio~ 
(telapajjotag) ;  D  n.19  (chattag  to  hold  a  sunshade  over 
a  person);  PvA  47  (id);  debar)  dh.  to  "  wear,"  i.  e.  to 
have  a  body  It  50.  53  (antimar)  d.) ;  J  IV.3  (padumai)) ; 
VI. 136;  Pv  1.3'  (vannar)  dh.-vahasi  PvA  14);  tassa 
kahapanar)  dandar)  dh.  "  to  inflict  a  fine  of  a  k.  on  him  " 
Miln  171.  —  2.  to  hold  back,  restrain  Vin  iv.261 
(kathai)  dharetha  how  do  you  suppress  or  conceal 
pregnancy  ?) ;  Dh  222  (kodhai)).  —  3.  to  bear  in  mind. 


Dhareyya 


177 


Dhutta 


know  by  heart,  understand  :  dhammar)  to  know  the 
Jiliamma  A  iii.iyf):  tipitakar)  buddhavacanar)  to  know 
the  3  I'ilakas  Miln  18.  —  ]")  11.2;  Pug  41  (suriati, 
bhanati.  dh. —remember).  Cp.  upadharcti. — With 
double  ace.  :  to  receive  as.  to  take  — believe,  to  take  for. 
consider  a.s,  call :  upasakar)  mar)  dharctu  Rhagava  "  call 
me  your  disciple"  Vin  1.16  &  passim;  attliajalan  ti  pi 
nar)  dhrirelii  (call  it  .  .  .)  D  1,46;  yath.l  panhaii  lilia- 
gava  vy.'ikaroti  tath.'i  nari  dhareyyasi  {believe  it)  D 
1.22J  ;  yatha  no  (atthari)  Gotamo  vyakarissati  tatha 
nar)  dharessama  D  i.J.^Ci ;  cvar)  map  dharchi  adhimutta- 
cittar)  (cnnsi<ler  as)  Sn  ii.jO  {  =upalakkhehi  Nd-  V't). 
—  4.  to  admit,  allow,  allow  for,  take  up.  siijiport  (a 
cause)  ;  to  give,  to  owe  II  i.i-'s  (may  allow),  i2(t ;  A  ii.fx) 
(na  kassa  kinci  dh,  pays  no  tribute)  :  Miln  47  (atlhar)). 

Dhareyya  (nt.)  forig.  grd.  of  dharcti  I  the  ceremony  of  being 
carried  away,  i.  e.  the  marriage  ceremony,  marri.agc 
(cp.  dhareyya  under  <lharati)'l  h  j,  47:;  (text  has  vareyya, 
but  ThA.  jS.5  e.\plains  dhareyya- vivaha). 

Dhava  fSk.  dhava]  running,  racing  M  1.446. 

Dhavati  !Sk.  dhavati  .\:  <lhavatc :  1.  to  flow,  run  etc.  ;  cp. 
Gr.  Mil.)  (both  meanings);  Ags.  di'aw  — E.  dew;  Ohg. 
tou  -Ger.  tan  ;  cp.  also  dhfiru  iS;  dhunfiti.  —  2.  to  clean 
(by  running  water)  etc.  — I',  dhovati,  q.  v.]  i.  to  run, 
run  away,  run  quickly  Sn  o.W  (cp.  Nd'  410) ;  Dh  344  ; 
J  i.v^:  VI. 332:  Md'  .^11,5  -  Nd=  304'"- :  Pv  iv.Tr>i 
-  p.aliiyati  I'vA  2S4'  ;  r)h.\  1.3S9  (opp.  gacchati) ;  PvA 
4;  Sdhp  37S.  —  2,  to  clean  etc.:  see  dhovati;  cp. 
dhavala  iV-  dhara^. 

Ohavana  (nt.)  jSk.  dhSvana]  running,  galloping  J  11.431  ; 
Miln   J5I. 

Dhavin ;  see  pa". 

Dhi'  iV  Dhi  (indccl.)  FSk.  dhik]  an  cxcl"  of  reproach  A- 
disgust :  fie  !  shame  !  woe  '  (with  ace.  or  gen.)  S  V.2J7 
(read  dhi  tai)  for  dhitarj)  ;  llh  389  (dhi-garahami 
DhA  IV.14.S);' J  1.507;  OhA  1. 179  (hao  dhi).  216  (v.  I. 
IIH  but  text  has  hagdi).  An  inorganic  r  replaces  the 
sandhi-cons.  in  dhi-r-atthu  jivitar)  Sn  440;  cp.  Th 
I.I  150  ;  dhi-r-atthu  jatiya  J  1.59. 

Dhi"  (f)  fSk.  dhih  to  didheti,  cp.  Av.  di  to  see,  Goth, 
(lilu-)  deisei  cunning.  See  also  dhira]  wisdom,  only  in 
Com.  cxi>l.  of  pafifia  :  "  dhi  vuccati  panna  "  (exegesis 
of  dhira)  at  Nd'  44  =  ]  11.140  =  111.38. 

Dhikkita  (adj.)  [Sk.  dhikkrta,  of  dhi'-f  kata]  reproached, 
reviled  ;  used  also  medially  :  blaming,  censuring,  con- 
demning J  1. 155  (=garahita  Com.);  also  in  Com. 
cxpl.  of  dhira  (=dhikkita-papa  detesting  evil)  at  Nd' 
44==J  11.140  =  111.38  (cp.  dhi^). 

Dhiti  (f.)  [Sk.  dhfti  to  dhr,  sec  dharati]  energy,  courage, 
steadfastness,  firm  character,  resolution.  S  1. 122,  215 
-Sn  iSS  (cp.  SnA  237);  J  1.266,  28(1;  in. 239  ;  vi.373  ; 
V'bh  211;  I)hs  13  {+  thama),  22,  2S9,  571  ;  Miln  23,  329  ; 
Sdhp  574.  Equivalent  to  "  wisdom  "  (cp.  juti  & 
jiitimant  i^  Sk.  dhiti)  in  expl.  of  dhira  as  "  dhitisam- 
panna  "  Nd'  44^^(566  dhi-);  PvA  131. 

Dhitimant  (adj.)  [Sk.  dhf  timant ;  cp.  also  dhlmanfl  coura- 
geous, firm,  resolute  .■^  1.25;  Sn  462,  542;  Th  1,6; 
J  II. 140;  VI. 286  (wise,  cp.  dhiti). 

Dhltar  and  Dhlta  (f.)  [Sk.  dhita,  orig.  pp.  of  dhayati  to 
suck  (cp.  Lat.  filia) :  see  dhata  &  dhati,  influenced  in 
inflection  by  Sk.  duhitf,  although  etymologically 
dilfercnt]  daughter  Th  2.  336  (in  faith);  J  1.152,  253; 
VI. 366  ;  Pv  I.I  1^' ;  DhA  111.171,  176  ;  PvA  16.  21,  61,  105. 
deva°  a  female  deva  (see  dcva)  VvA  137  etc.  ;  nattu"  a 
granddaughter  PvA  17  ;  matula"  a  niece  PvA  55  ;  raja" 
a  princess  J  1.207;  PvA  74.     In  comp"  dhitu". 

-kkama  one  who  is  desirous  of  a  daughter  J  vi.3()7 
(  dhitu  atthaya  vicarati  Com.;  v.  I.  dhitu-kama) ; 
-dhita  granddaughter  PvA   lO. 


Dbltalika  (f)  [Demin.  of  dhita  ;  cp.  dhitika  S-  pottha- 
lika]  a  doll  Vin  in. 36,  126  (d.iru'') ;  Dhs.\  321  ;  PvA  16. 

Dhitika  (f.)  [cp.  dhitalika]  a  iloll  Th  2.  374  (=-dhitalika 
ThA  252). 

Dhina  see  adhina. 

Dhiyati  [Sk.  dhtyate,  Pass,  to  dahati']  to  be  contained 
Th.\  13  (so  read  for  dhiyati) ;  PvA  71. 

Dhira  (adj.)  [combining  in  meaning  i.  Sk.  dhira  "  firm  " 
fr.  dharayati  (see  dharati  I'i-  dhiti) ;  2.  Vedic.  dhira 
"  wise  "  fr.  didheti  (see  dlii-).  The  fluctuation  of  con- 
notation is  also  seen  in  the  cxpl~  of  Com~  which  always 
give  the  foil,  three  conventional  etymologies,  viz.  dhik- 
kitapfipa.  dhiti  sampanna.  dhiya  (  — panfiaya)  saman- 
nagat.a  Nd'4|~(see  dhi^)|  c(mstant,  firm,  self-relying, 
of  character ;  wise,  possessing  the  knowledge  of 
the  Dhanima.  often  -pandita  A  ICp.  of  an  Arahant 
D  11.12S;  S  1.24  (lokapariyayai)  ann.ly.a  nibbuta  dh.), 
122,  221  ;  Sn  45,  2^fi  (nibbanti  dhira),  913  (vippamutto 
diuhigatehi  dh.),  1032  ;  It  '18  ("upasevanfi.  opp.  bala), 
122  (dh.  sabb.ag.in(ha|ianiocano)  j  Dh  23.  28.  177  (opp. 
brda)  ;  Th  1.  4;  2,  7  (<lhamm.a  —  tejussadehi  ariyamag- 
g.adhammehi  rh.\  13);  J  in. 396  ;  v.  116;  IV  n.i"; 
II. O''';  Nd'  44.  55.  4S2  ;  Nd^  ;\2.\  (  -jutimant);  Miln 
342  ;  KhA  ro).  22\.  230  ;  l)h.\  111.189  (  -pandita). 

Dhuta  («V  Dhiita)  [cp.  Sk.  dhuta  iS:  <lhrita.  pp.  of  dhunati] 
I.  shaken,  moved  Davs  v. 49  (vata").  —  2.  lit.  "  shaken 
olf,"  but  always  exjil''  in  the  commentaries  a.s  "  one 
w1io  shakes  off  "  either  evil  dispositions  (kilese),  or 
obstacles  to  s)>iritual  progress  (vara,  nivarana).  The 
word  is  rare.  In  one  constantly  repeated  p.is.s.age 
(Vin  1.45— 3i.u=n. 2  =111.21  =iv. 213)  it  is  an  adj. 
opposed  to  kosajja  lazy,  remiss ;  and  means  either 
scriii>ulous  or  punctilious.  At  11  1.5  it  is  used  of  a  pain. 
At  Sn  385  we  are  told  of  a  dhutadhamma,  meaning  a 
scrupulous  way  of  life,  first  for  a  bhikkhu,  then  for  a 
layman.  This  poem  omits  all  higher  doctrine  and 
confines  itself  to  scrupulousness  as  regards  minor, 
elementary  matters.  Cp.  Vism  61  for  a  def"  of  dhuta. 
-anga  a  set  of  practices  leading  to  the  state  of  or 
appropriate  to  a  dhuta,  that  is  to  a  scrupulous  person. 
First  occurs  in  a  title  suffixed  to  a  passage  in  the  Pari- 
v.ira  depr(?cating  such  practices.  The  passage  occur* 
twice  (Vin  v. 131,  193),  but  the  title,  prob.ably  later  than 
the  text,  is  added  only  to  the  2nd  of  the  two.  The 
passage  gives  a  list  of  13  such  practices,  each  of  them 
an  ascetic  practice  not  enjoined  in  the  Vinaya.  The 
13  are  also  discu.ssed  at  Visni  59  sq.  The  Milinda 
devotes  a  whole  book  (chap,  vi.)  to  the  glorification  of 
these  13  dhutangas,  but  there  is  no  evidence  that  they 
were  ever  widely  adopted.  Some  are  deprecated  at 
M  1.282,  &  examples  of  one  or  other  of  them  are  given 
at  Vin  III.  15;  Bu  1.59;  J  in. 342  ;  iv.8  ;  Miln  n^,  348, 
351  ;  Vism  59  (°katha),  65  (°cora).  72  (id.),  8o"(def") ; 
SnA  494;  DhA  1.68;  11.32  (dhutanga)  ;  iv.30.  Nd'  188 
says  that  8  of  them  are  desirable,  -dhara  mindful  of 
jjunctiliousness  Miln  342  (aranfiaka  dh.  jhayin).  -vata 
the  vow  to  perform  the  dhutangas  DhA  vi.165.  -vada 
one  who  inculcates  punctiliousness  S  n.  156;  A  1.23; 
Miln  380;  Vism  Hi);  ThA  6g ;  DhA  ii.3f>.  -vadin  = 
"vada  J  1. 1 30. 

Dhutatta  (nt.)  [Sk.  *dhutatvar)]  the  state  of  being  punc- 
tilious Vin  1.305  (of  going  naked). 

Dhutta  [Sk.  dhfirta,  from  dhfirvati  &  dhvarati  to  injure, 
deceive,  cp.  Lat.  fraus ;  Idg.  *dlireu.  an  enlarged  form 
of  which  is  'dreugh  in  Sk.  druhyati.  drugdha=  Ohg. 
triogan,  troum  etc.  :  see  duhana]  of  abandone<l  life,  wild, 
fast,  cunning,  crafty,  fraudulent;  wicked,  ba<l.  (m.)  a 
rogue,  cheat,  evil-minded  ]ier.son,  scoundrel,  rascal. 
There  are  three  sorts  of  a  wild  life,  viz.  akkha '  in 
g.imbling.  itthi"  with  women,  sura'    in  drink  (Sn   ki6  ; 


Dhuttaka 


178 


Dhuma 


J  IV. 255). — Vin  277  (robber,  highwayman);  A  111.38 
(a°);  IV.288  (itthi°);  J  1.49  (sura°).  290.  291;  11.416; 
III. 287;  IV. 223.  494  (sura°) ;  ThA  250  (itthi°),  260 
(°purisa),  266  ("kilesa) ;  PvA  3,  5  (itthi°,  sura°),  151.  — 
f.  dhutti  (dhutti)  J  11. 114  (°brahmani). 

Dhuttaka ^dhutta  S  1.131  ;  Th  2,  366  ( =itthi-dhntta 
ThA  250);  DhA  III. 207 ;  Dpvs  ix.19. — f.  dhuttika 
always  in  comb°  w.  chinnikk  (meretri^,  q.  v.)  Vin 
111.128;  J  II. 1 14;  Miln  122. 

Ohnnana  (nt.)  [Sk.  dhunana]  shaking,  in  °ka  (adj.)  con- 
sisting in  shaking  off,  doing  away  with,  giving  up 
(kilesa°)  SnA  373. 

Dhonati  [Sk.  dhunoti  (dhflnoti),  dhunSti  &  dhuvati. 
Caus.  dhunayati.  Idg.  'dhu  to  be  in  turbulent  motion  ; 
cp.  Gr.  01IW,  OiVui  (to  be  impetuous),  tivtWa  (storm), 
Oiltoc  "thyme";  Lat.  fumus  (smoke  =  fume),  sufiio  ; 
Lith.  duja  (dust) ;  Goth,  dauns  (smoke  &  smell) ;  Ohg. 
toum.  Connected  also  w.  dhavate  ;  see  further  dhupa. 
dhuma,  dhflsara.  dhonft  &  a  secondary  root  Idg. 
*dhenes  in  dhagsati]  to  shake,  toss  ;  to  shake  oft,  remove, 
destroy  S  1.156  (maccuno  senag);  Th  i,  256— Miln 
245  ;  dhunati  pSpake  dhamme  dumapattag  va  nialuto 
Th  1.2;  J  MI  (v.  48):  III. 44  (hatthe  dluinigsu,  wrung 
their  hands) ;  Vv  64*  (=VvA  278  misprint  dhumanti) ; 
aor.  adhosi  [  =  Sk.  adhausit]  Sn  787  (micchaditthirj  = 
pajahi  SnA  523).  pp.  dhuta  &  dhuta  (q.  v.j.  Cp. 
nis°.  0°. 

Dhnma  in  °katacchuka  =  drunia°  having  a  wooden  spoon 
(see  duma),  cp.  Mar.  dhumara  ?  (Ed.  in  note)  DhA 
11.59.      [Doubtful  reading.] 

Dhnra  (m.  &  nt.)  [Sk.  dhur  f.  &  dhura  m.J  i.  a  yoke,  a 
pole,  the  shaft  of  a  carriage  J  1.192  (purima-sakata"), 
196;  Cp.  II. 8,  4.  —  2.  (fig.)  a  burden,  load,  charge, 
office,  responsibility  Sn  256  (vahanto  porisai)  <lh  °r) 
"carrying  a  human  yoke  "=purisanucchavika  bhara 
SnA  299),  694  (asama°  one  who  has  to  bear  a  heavy 
burden  =  asamaviriya  SnA  489);  DhA  11.97  (sama°) ; 
dve  dhurani  two  burdens  (viz.  gantha"  &  vipassana, 
study  &  contemplation)  DhA  1.7 ;  iv.37 ;  asamadhura 
J  1. 193;  VI. 330.  Three  dhura  are  enum""  at  J  iv.242 
as  saddha",  sila°,  and  paniia". —  Sdhp  355  (saddha"),  392 
(+ viriya),  413  (paiiiia°)  dh  "g  nikkhipati  to  take  oft 
the  yoke,  to  put  down  a  burden,  to  give  up  a  charge  or 
renounce  a  responsibility  (see  °nikkhepa) :  nikkhitta- 
dhura  A  1.71  ;  11. 148;  111.65,  108.  179  sq.  ;  a°  S  v. 197, 
225;  Nd^  131  ;  SnA  236  ( =dhuravant).  — 3.  the  fore- 
part of  anything,  head,  top,  front ;  fig.  chief,  leader, 
leading  part,  navaya  dh.  the  forecastle  of  a  ship  J 
Iii.i27  =  iv.i42  ;  dh-vata  head  wind  J  i.ioo;  ekar) 
dh  "g  niharati  to  set  aside  a  foremost  part  DA  1.135.  — 
4.  the  far  end,  either  as  top  or  beginning  J  111.216 
(yava  dh-sopana) ;  iv.265  (dh-sopinar)  katva  making 
the  staircase  end) ;  v. 458  (magga-dhure  thatva  standing 
on  the  far  end  or  other  side  of  the  road,  i.  e.  opposite ; 
gloss  BB  maggantare) ;  VvA  44  (dh-gehassa  dvare  at 
the  door  of  the  top  house  of  the  village,  i.  e.  the  first 
or- last  house). 

-gama  a  neighbouring  village  (lit.  the  first  v.  that  one 
meets)  J  1.8,  237;  iv.243  ;  DhA  m.414;  -dhorayha  a 
yoked  ox  S  l.i73=Sn  79  (viriyam  me  dh-dh  "g) ;  SnA 
150.  -nikkhepa  the  putting  down  of  the  yoke,  the 
giving^  up  of  one's  office  J  iii  C43  ;  Vism  413.  -bhatta 
a  meal  where  a  monk  is  invited  as  leader  of  other  monks 
who  likewise  take  part  in  it  J  1.449.  v.  1.  (for  dhuva") ; 
III  .97  (v.  1.  dhuva°) ;  Vism  66.  -yotta  yoke-tie.  i  e.  the 
tie  fastening  the  yoke  to  the  neck  of  the  ox  J  1.192  ; 
VI. 253  ;  -vahana  bearing  a  burden  (cp.  dhorayha)  DhA 
III. 472  ;  -vihara  a  neighbouring  monastery  (cp.  °gama) 
J  1.23  ;  IV.243  ;  DhA  1.126  (Np.) ;  in. 224  (id.) ;  -sampag- 
gaha  "  a  solid  grip  of  the  burden  "  (Mrs.  Rh  D.)  Dhs 
13,  22  etc.  (opp.  nikkhepa) ;  -ssaha  enduring  one's  yoke 
Th  I,  659.     Cp.  dhurata. 


Dhnrata  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  dhura]  in  cpd.  anikkhitta-dh.  "  a 
state  of  unflinching  endurance"  Nd^  394,  405=Dhs 
13  etc.  =Vbh  350,  370  (-(- dhura-sampaggaha) ;  opp. 
nikkhitta-dh.  weakness  of  character,  lack  of  endurance 
(=paraada)  ibid. 

Dhnravant  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  dhuradhara]  one  who  has  or  bears 
his  yoke,  patient,  enduring  Si.2i4=Sni87(:  cetasika- 
viriya-vasena  anikkhittadhura  SnA  236). 

Dhnva  (adj.)  [Sk.  dhruva,  cp.  Lith.  drdta  firm ;  Goth. 
triggws=Ohg.  triuwi  (Gcr.  treue,  trost) ;  Ags.  trtowe  = 
E.  true,  of  Idg.  *dheru,  enlarged  form  of  *dher,  see 
dharati]  stable,  constant,  permanent;  fixed,  regular, 
certain,  sure  D  i.iS;  S  1.142  ;  iv.370  ;  A  11.33:  J  1.19; 
v.  121  ("sassatarj  inaranar)) ;  111.325;  Bu  11. 8  ;  Miln  114 
(na  ta  nadiyo  dh-salila}.  334  ("phala) ;  Vism  77  ;  DA 
I.I  12  (maranar)  apassanto  dh.),  150  (=thavara);  DhA 
111.170  (adhuvar)  jivitar)  dhuvar)  maranar));  ThA  241  ; 
Sdhp  331.  —  nt.  permanence,  stability  M  1.326,  Dh 
147.  Also  Ep.  of  Nibbana  (.see  "gamin).  —  nt.  as  adv. 
dhuvaij  continuously,  constantly,  always  J  11.24  =Miln 
172:  PvA  207;  certainly  J  1.18.  v. 1113.  —  adhuva  (ad- 
dhuva)  changing,  unstable,  impermanent  D  1.19  (anicca 
a.  appayuka) :  M  1.326;  S  iv.302  ;  J  1393:  111.19  (ad- 
dhuva-sila) ;  VvA  77. 

-gamin  leading  to  permanence,  i.  e  Nibbana  S  iv.370 
(magga) ;  -cola  (f.)  constantly  dressed,  of  a  woman 
Vin  III. 129;  -tthaniya  lasting  (of  shoes)  Vin  1.190; 
-dhamma  one  who  has  reached  a  stable  condition  DhA 
m.289 ;  -pafiiiatta  (a)  permanently  appointed  (seat) 
Vin  IV. 274 ;  -bhatta  a  constant  supply  of  food  Vin  1.25. 
243  :  11.15  ("■''a) ;  J  1-449  (where  the  v.  1.  dhura"  seems 
to  be  preferable  instead  of  dhuva",  see  dhurabhatta) ; 
cp.  niccabhatta ;  -yagu  constant  (distribution  of)  rice- 
gruel  Vin  1.292  sq. ;  -lohita  (f.)  a  woman  whose  blood  is 
stagnant  Vin  in.  129;  -ssava  always  discharging,  con- 
stantly flowing  J  1.6,  v.35. 

Dhnta  &  Dhntanga  see  dhuta. 

Dhupa  [Sk.  dhupa  of  Idg.  *dhfip,  enlarged  fr.  'dhu  in 
dhunati  (q.  v.)]  incense  J  1.5 1,  64,  290  (gandha",  dvan- 
dva,  cpd.);  ill. 144;  vi.42  ;  PvA  141  (gandhapuppha"). 
dh"g  dadati  to  incense  (a  room)  J  1.399.  Sometimes 
misspelt  dhuma,  e.  g.  VvA  173  (gandhapuppha"). 

Dhnpana  (nt.)  [Sk.  dhiipana]  incensing,  fumigation ;  per- 
fume, incense,  spice  J  111.144  ;  iv.236  ;  Pv  111.5''  (sasapa"). 

Dhnpayati  &  Dhnpayati  [Sk.  dhiipayati ;  caus.  fr.  dhupa] 
to  fumigate,  make  fragrant,  perfume  Vin  1.180;  S  1.40 
(dhupayita)=Th  i,  448 ;  A  11. 214  sq.  ;  J  1.73  ;  Miln  333 
(silagandhena  lokarj  dh.) ;  DhA  1.370  (aor.  dhupayi) ; 
III. 38  (ppr.  dhupayamana).  —  pp.  dhupita. 

Dhupita  [pp.  of  dhupayati]  fumigated,  flavoured  Vv  43^ 
^tela"  flavoured  with  oil).     Cp.  pa". 

Dhuma  [Vedic  dhuma  =Lat.  fumus;  Gr.-Ouni'ig  (mood, 
mind),  dvinaui  (fumigate) ;  Ohg.  toum  etc.  Idg.  *dhn, 
cp.  Gr.  Oi'w  (bum  incense),  diioe  (incense).  See  also 
dhunati]  smoke,  fumes  Vin  1.204  (aroma  of  drugs) ; 
M  1.220  (dh  °r)  katta) ;  A  v.352  (id.) ;  A  11.53  ;  iv.72  sq.  ; 
v. 347  sq.  ;  J  1I1.401,  422  (tumhakai)  dh-kale  at  the  time 
when  you  will  end  in  smoke,  i.  e.  at  your  cremation) ; 
DhA  1.370  (eka°  one  m^s  of  smoke);  VvA  173  (for 
dhupa,  in  gandhapuppha") ;  PvA  230  (raiccha-vitakka" 
in  expl.  of  vidhuma). 

-andha  blind  with  smoke  J  1.2 16;  -kalika  (cp.  above 
dh.-kale)  lasting  till  a  person's  cremation  Vin  11.172, 
288  ;  -ketu  fire  (lit.  whose  sign  is  smoke)  J  iv.26  ;  v. 63  ; 
-jala  a  mass  of  smoke  J  v. 497  ;  -netta  a  smoke-tube,  i.  e, 
a  surgical  instrument  for  sniffing  -up  the  smoke  of 
medical  drugs  Vin  1.204  ;  11.120;  J  iv.363  ;  ThA  14; 
-sikha  fire  (Ep.  of  Agni ;  lit.  smokc-crcstcd)  Vv  35° 
(sikha)=VvA  161  ;  Vism  416;  also  as  sikhin  J  vi.206. 


Dbumayati 


179 


Dhovana 


Dhflmayati  &  Dbfimayati  [Sk.  dbumayati,  Dunom.  fr. 
dhuma]  to  smoke,  to  smoulder,  choke ;  to  be  obscured, 
to  cloud  over  M  1.142  (v.  1.  dhupayati) ;  Pv  1.6*  (pari- 
dayhati+  dh.  hadayai)) ;  DhA  1.425  (akkhini  me  dh.  = 
I  see  almost  nothing),     pp.  dhumayita. 

Dhfimiyana  {t)  smoking,  smouldering  M  1.143;  Nett  34 
(as  V.  1.  to  dbupSyana). 

Dhflm&yitatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  to  dbumayati]  becoming  like 
smoke,  clouding  over,  obscuration  S  111. 124  (+timi- 
rayitattar)). 

Dhnsara  (adj.)  [Sk.  dbusara,  Ags.  dust  =  E.  dust  &  dusk, 
Ger.  dust ;  see  dhvagsati  &  dbunoti  &  cp.  Walde,  Lat. 
Wtb.  under  furo]  dust-coloured  VvA  335. 

Dhenn  (f)  [Sk.  dhenu,  to  dhayati  to  give  suck,  ese  dhati 
&  dhltar]  a  milcb  cow,  a  female  animal  in  general  J  1.152 
(miga°  hind);  Vv  80*;  DhA  1.170;  396;  PvA  112.  In 
simile  at  Vism  313. 

Dhenapa  [dhenu -1-  pa  from  pibati]  a  suckling  calf  M  1.79  ; 
Sn  26. 

Dheyys  (-°)  [Sk.  dhcya,  orig.  grd.  of  dhS,  sec  dahati']  i.  in 
the  realm  of,  under  the  sway  or  power  of :  anafifia" 
j  IV.  no;  kamma"  A  iv.285  ;  maccu"  (q.  v.)  S  1.22; 
Sn  358,  U04  ;  Th  2,  10  (  =  maccu  ettha  dhiyati ThA  13)  ; 
mara°  A  iv.228.  —  2.  putting  on,  assigning,  in  nanm° 
Dhs  1307. 

Dhota  [Sk.  dhauta,  pp.  of  dhavati',  see  dhovati]  washed, 
bleached,  clean  J  1.62  ("sankha  a  bleached  shell) ;  11.275  : 
PvA  73  (°vattha),  1 16  ("hattha  with  clean  hands),  274 
(id.);  Vism  224  (id.). 

Dhona  (adj.-n.)  [either  —  dhota,  Sk.  dhauta,  see  dhovati 
or  =  dhuta,  see  dhuta  &  dhunana.  Quite  a  ditf.  sug- 
gestion as  regards  etym.  is  given  by  Kern,  Toev.  1 1 7, 
who  considers  it  as  a  possible  der°  fr.  (a)dho,  after 
analogy  of  pona.  Very  doubtful]  i .  purified  M  1.386  ; 
Sn  351.  786,  813.  834  (=^dbutakilesa  SnA  542) ;  J  in. 160 
(°sakha==^patthatasakha  Com.;  v.  1.  BU  vena") ;  Nd' 
77  =  176  (:  dhona  vuccati  parifta  etc.,  dhuta  «&  dhota 
used  indiscriminately  in  exegesis  following).  —  2.  (pi.) 
the  four  requisites  of  a  bhikkhu  DhA  111.344  ( :  dhona 


vuccati  cattiro  paccayJ,  in  Com.  on  atidhonac3rin 
Dh  240  ;  gloss  K  dhovana,  cp.  Morris,  J.P.T.S.  1887. 
100). 

Dhopati  [a  variant  of  dhovati,  taken  as  Cans,  formation] 
to  wash,  cleanse  D  1.93  (dhopetha,  imper. ;  v.  1.  B. 
dhovatha),  124  (dhopeyya;  v.  1.  B.  dhoveyya). 

Dhopana  (nt.)  [a  variant  of  dhovana,  q.  v.]  1.  ceremonial 
washing  of  the  bones  of  the  dead  D  1.18  ;  atthi-dhovana 
Bdbgb  at  DA  1.84  ;  A  v. 2 16  (see  Commentary  at  364).  — 
2.  Surgical  washing  of  a  wound  J  II.  II 7.  —  3.  In  vaQsa- 
dhopana,  apparently  a  feat  by  acrobats  J  iv.390.  It 
is  possible  that  the  passage  at  D  1. 18  really  belongs  here. 
See  the  note  at  Dial.  1.9. 

Dhorayha  [for  *dhor-vayha  =  Sk.  •dhaurvabya,  abstr.  fr. 
dhurvaba ;  may  also  directly  correspond  to  the  latter] 
"  carrying  a  yoke,"  a  beast  of  burden  S  1.28;  D  ni.113 
(purisa°) ;  A  I.r62. 

-vata  (nt.)  the  practice  of  carrying  a  burden,  the 
state  of  a  beast  of  burden,  drudgery  S  1.28 ;  -slla 
accustomed  to  the  yoke,  enduring ;  patient  Dh  208 
(  =  dhuravahana-silatkya  dh.  DhA  in. 272)-  •snin  = 
°sila  J  It. 97  ( =  dhura-vahanaka-clcarena  sampcinna 
Com.). 

Dtaoreyya  (-°)  [Sk.  dhaureya,  der.  fr.  dhura]  "  to  be  yoked," 
accustomed  to  the  yoke,  carrying  a  burden,  in  kamma° 
Uiln  288. 

Dhova  (adj.-n.)  [Sk.  dhava,  see  dhovati]  washing,  cleans- 
ing Bu  11.15. 

Dhovati  [Sk.  dbavati,  see  dhavati]  to  rinse,  wash,  cleanse, 
purify  Vin  11.208,  210,  214;  Sn  p.  104  (bhajanani) : 
J  1.8  ;  v. 297.  —  dhovi  J  vi.366  ;  DhA  in. 207.  ger. 
dhovitra  J  1.266 ;  IV.2  ;  VvA  33  (pattar)),  77  (id.) ; 
PvA  75,  144.  inf.  dhovitiu)  Vin  11. 120;  iv.261.  pp. 
dhota  (q.  v.)  &  dhovita  J  1.266.  —  See  also  dhopati 
(•dhopeti). 

Dhovana  (nt.)  [Sk.  dhavana ;  see  also  dhopana]  washing 
Vin  IV. 262  ;  S  iv.316  (bbaijda") ;  A  1.132,  161,  277; 
It  III  (padanai)) ;  J  11. 129;  vi.365  (battKa") ;  MUn  ii; 
Vism  343  ;  PvA  241  (hattha-pada°) ;  DhA  11.19  (pada°) ; 
fig.  (ariyar))  A  v. 2 16. 


N. 


Na'  [Sk.  na  (in  cana)  &  na  (in  nana,  vi-na)  Idg.  pron.  base 
*no,  cp.  Gr  vi'/,  j-ai ;  Lat.  ne,  nae  surely,  also  end.  in 
ugo-ne  I*  in  question  utrumne,  nam ;  fuller  form  •eno, 
as  in  Sk.  ana  (adv.)  ancna,  anaya  (instr.  pron.  3rd) ; 
Gr.  ii'i;  "  that  day  "  ;  Lat.  enim]  expletive-emphatic 
particle,  often  used  in  comparative-indefinite  sense : 
just  so,  like  this,  as  if,  as  (see  cana  &  canarj)  J  v.339 
(Com.  ettha  na-karo  upamane).  Also  as  nag  (cp.  cana> 
canar))  Vin  11.81,  186  (kathag  nar|=kathar)  nu) ;  J 
11.416;  v.302  ;  VI. 213  (Com.  p.  216:  ettha  eko  na-karo 
pucchanattho  hoti) ;  Th  i,  1204  ;  Miln  177.  Perhaps  at 
Sn  148  (kattha-ci  nag,  v.  1.  BBna;  but  Com.  KhA247  = 
ctag).     To  this  na  belongs  na' ;  see  also  nu  &  nanu. 

Na'"  [Ved.  na  =  Idg.  *ne ;  Lat.  ne  in  n'  unquam  etc.,  Goth, 
ni ;  Sk.  na  ca  =  Lat.  neque  =  Goth.  nih.  Also  Sk.  na  = 
Idg.  *ue,  cp.  Lat.  Goth,  ne]  negative  &  adversative 
particle  "not"  (Nd^  326:  palikkhepa ;  KhA  170: 
patisedhe)  i .  often  apostr.  n'  :  n'  atthi.  n'  etag  etc.  ;  or 
contracted:  nahag,  napi  etc.,  or  with  euphonic  conso- 
nant y:  nayidag  (It  29,  J  IV.3),  nayidha  (It  36,  37), 
nayimag  (It  15)  etc.  As  double  negation  implying 
emphatic  allirmation :  na  kiuci  na  all,  everything 
J  1.295. — '^-  In  disjunctive  clauses:  na  .  .  .  na 
neither — nor,  so — or  not  so.  In  question  :  karoti  na 
karoti  ("or  not")  J  11.133.  Cp.  ma  in  same  use. — 
Often  with  added  pi  (api)  in  second  part :  na-napi 
neither — nor  ("  not — but  also  not  ")  S  11.65  ;  M  i. 246  ; 
Pv  i.ii". — -3.  In  syntactic  context  mostly  emphasized 
by  var.  negative  i.\:  adversative  particles,  viz.  napi  (see 
under2);n'  eva  indeed  not,  not  for  all  that  J  m.55;  or  not 
KhA  219;  n'  eva-na  neither — nor  D  1.33,  35  ;  M  1.4S6 ; 
A  V.193;  J  1-U7.  -79;  Vin  11185;  DhA  1.328;  11.65; 
DA  1.186,  188 ;  n'  eva-na  pana  id.  D  1.24  ;  na  kho  not 
indeed  J  u.134  ;  na  ca  but  not  (  =  this  rather  than  that) 
J  1.153;  na  tava  =  na  kho  Vv  37*'';  na  nu  (in  quest;.  = 
nounc)  is  it  not  ?  PvA  74,  136  ;  na  no  surely  not  Sn  224  ; 
na  hi  [cp.  Gr.  olixi  not  at  all ;  vaixt  certainly]  certainly 
not  Dh  5,  184  ;  Sn  660  ;  Kh  vu.O  ;  na  hi  jatu  id.  Sn  152. 

—  See  also'  nu,  nu,  no. — 4,  na  is  also  used  in  the 
function  of  the  negative  prefix  a-  (an-)  in  cases  where 
the  word-negation  was  isolated  out  of  a  sentence  nega- 
tion or  where  a  negated  verb  was  substantilied,  e.  g. 
(a)  nacira  (=acira)  short,  napparupa  abundant,  napug- 
saka  neuter,  neka  (  =  aneka)  several;  (b)  nattbi,  nat- 
thika  etc.  (q.  v.). 

Na^  [identical  with  na'J  base  of  demonstr.  pron.  3rd  pers. 
(  -  ta"),  only  in  foil,  cases :  ace.  sg.  nag  (mostly  enclit' ;). 
fuller  form  enag  him,  her,  that  one  etc.  Sn  139,  201.  385, 
418,  980,  1076 ;  It  32  ;  Dh  42,  230  ;  J  1.152,  172,  222  ; 
111.281  ;  KhA  220  ;  DhA  1.181  ;  111.173 ;  PvA  3,  68,  73. 

—  nom.  ace.  pi.  ne  them  It  1 10  (v.  1.  te) ;  Sn  223  ( =  te 
manusse  KhA  169);  J  11.417;  111.204;  v.458  ;  DhA  1.8, 
13.  61,  101.  390;  VvA  299. — gen.  dat.  pi.  nesai) 
D  1.175,  191  ;  It  63 ;  J  1.153  ;  OtA  iv.41  ;  VvA  37,  136,; 
l^A  54,  201,  207.     See  also  ena;  cp.  nava-. 

Nakula  [Ved.  nakula,  cp.  nakra  crocodile]  a  mungoose, 
Viverra  Ichneumon  A  v. 289  sq. ;  J  11.53  :  vi.538 ;  Miln 
118,  394. 

Nakkhatta  (nt.)  [Ved.  naksatra  collect,  formation  from 
naktit^  &   nakta=Gr.  vvK,  Lat.  nox,  Goth,  nahts,   E. 


night  =  the  nightly  sky,  the  heavenly  bodies  of  the  night, 
as  opposed  to  the  Sun :  adicco  tapatag  mukhag  Vin 
1.246]  the  stars  or  constellations,  a  conjunction  of  the 
moon  with  difi.  constellatiyns,  a  lunar  mansion  or  the 
constellations  of  the  lunar  zodiac,  figuring  also  as 
Names  of  months  &  determinant  factors  of  horoscopic 
and  other  astrological  observation  ;  further  a  celebra- 
tion of  the  beginning  of  a  new  month,  hence  any  kind 
of  festival  or  festivity.  —  The  recognised  number  of 
such  lunar  mansions  is  27,  the  names  of  which  as  given 
in  Sk.  sources  are  the  same  in  Pali,  with  the  exception 
of  2  variations  (Assayuja  for  Asvini,  Satabhisaja  for 
&itataraka).  Enum''  at  Abhp.  58-60  as  follows : 
Assayuja  [Sk.  Asvini]  Bharani,  Kattika,  Kohii.il,  Maga- 
sirag  [Sk.  Mrga^irsa]  Adda  [Sk.  Ardra],  I'unabbasu, 
Phussa  [Sk.  Pusya],  Asilesa,  Magha,  Pubba-phagguni 
[Sk.  Purva-phaiguni)  Uttara°,  Hattha,  Citta  [Sk. 
Chaitra],  Sati  [Svati],  Visakha,  Anuradha,  Jettha, 
Mulag,  Pubb-asalha  ['asadha],  Uttar°,  Savana,  Dhanit- 
tha,  Satabhisaja  [  Satataraka] ,  Pubba-bhaddapada, 
Uttara",  Revati.  —  It  is  to  be  pointed  out  that  the 
Niddesa  speaks  of  28  N.  instead  of  27  (Nd^  382  :  attha- 
visati  nakkhattani),  a  discrepancy  which  may  be 
accounted  by  the  fact  that  one  N.  (the  Orion)  bore  2 
names,  viz.  Mrgaslrsa  &  Agrahayani  (see  Plunkett, 
Ancient  Calendars  etc.  p.  227  sq). — Some  of  these 
Ns.  are  more  familiar  &  important  than  others,  &  are 
mentioned  more  frequently,  e.  g.  Asajha  (Asdlhi^)  J 
1.50  &  Uttarasalha  J  1.63,  82 ;  Kattika  &  Rohini  SnA 
456.  —  nakkhattag  adisati  to  augur  from  the  stars,  to 
set  the  horoscope  Nd'  382  ;  oloketi  to  read  the  stars, 
to  scan  the  constellations  J  i.io8,  253  ;  ghoseti  to  pro- 
claim (shout  out)  the  new  month  (cp.  Lat.  calandae 
f  r.  calare  to  call  out,  scil.  mensem),  and  thereby  announce 
the  festivity  to  be  celebrated  J  1.250 ;  n.  ghuttha-g 
J  15".  433;  sagghulthag  PvA  73;  ghositag  VvA  31; 
kilati  to  celebrate  a  (nakkhatta-)  festival  J  1.50,  250  ; 
VvA  63  ;  DhA  1.393  (cp.  °kila  below).  n.  ositag  the 
festival  at  an  end  J  1.433.  —  nakkhatta  (sg.)  a  con- 
stellation Sn  927;  collect,  the  stars  Vv  Si'  (cando  n- 
parivarito).  nakkhattani  (pi.)  the  stars:  nakkhatta- 
nag  mukhag  chando  (the  moon  is  the  most  prominent  of 
the  lights  of  night)  Th  11.143;  Vin  i.246=;Sn  569  (but 
cp.  expl.  at  SnA  456  :  candayogavasena  "  ajja  kattika, 
ajja  Kohiiji  "  ti  pafinanato  alokakaranato  sommabha- 
vato  ca  nakkhattanag  mukhag  cando  ti  vutto) ;  D  i.io 
(nakkhattanag  pathagamanag  &  uppatha-gamanag  a 
right  or  wrong  course,  i.  e.  a  straight  ascension  or 
deviation  of  the  stars  or  planets) ;  11.259 ;  111.85,  9°  '■ 
A  iv.86 ;  Th  2,  143  (nakkhattani  namaissanta  bala). 

-kijana  =  kila  DhA  111.46 1  ;  -kila  the  celebration  of  a 
festival,  making  merry,  taking  a  holiday  J  1.50  ;  ThA 
1 37  ;  VvA  109  ;  -ggaha  the  seizure  of  a  star  (by  a  demon  : 
see  gaha),  the  disappearance  of  a  planet  (transit  ?)  D  1. 10 
(expl.  at  DA  1.95  as  nakkhattasa  angarakadi-gahasam- 
cLyoga) ;  -patha  "  the  course  of  the  stars,"  i.  e.  the 
nocturnal  sky  Dh  208  ;  -pada  a  constellation  Vin  11.2 17  ; 
-pafhaka  an  astrologer,  soothsayer,  augur  Nd'  382 ; 
-pl]ana  the  failing  or  obscuration  of  a  star  (as  a  sign  of 
death  in  horoscopy)  DhA  1.166;  —  mala  a  garland  of 
stars  VvA  167 ;  -foga  a  conjunction  of  the  planets,  a 
constellation  in  its  meaning  for  the  horoscope  J  1.82 


180 


Nakba 


i8i 


Nati 


253;  DhA  t.174  (+ tithi-karana) :  "i)  oloketi  to  set  the 
horoscope  DhA  1.166,  °r)  ugganhiiti  id.  Pv  111.5*.  -raja 
the  king  of  the  nakkhattas  (i.  e.  the  moon)  J  111.348. 

Nakha  [Ved.  nakha,  cp.  Sk.  anghri  foot ;  Gr.  'wvi  (claw, 
nail),  Lat.  unguis  =  Oir.  inga ;  Ohg.  nagal  =  E.  nail]  a 
nail  of  finger  or  toe.  a  claw  Vin  11.133  ■  Sn  610  (na  angu- 
libi  nakhehi  va) ;  J  v. 489  (paucanakha  satta  five-nailed 
or  -toed  beings);  Kh  11.  =Miln  26,  cp.  taca  (paiica- 
tacakari) ;  KhA  43 ;  Vv.\  7  (dasa-nakhasamodhana 
putting  the  10  fingers  together);  PvA  152,  192;  Sdhp 
104. 

Nakhaka  (adj.)  belonging  to,  consisting  of  or  resembling 
a  claw,  in  hatthi°  like  elephants'  claws,  Ep.  of  a  castle 
(pasada)  Vin  11.169  (Bdhgh  on  p.  323:  hatthikumbhe 
patitthitai),  evar)  evagkatassa  kir'  etai)  naraar))  (?). 

Nakhin  (adj.)  having  nails  J  TI.290  (tamba°  with  copper- 
coloured  nails). 

Naga  [Sk.  naga  tree  &  mountain,  referred  by  Fausboll  & 
Uhlenbeck  to  na+  gacchati,  i.  e.  immovable  ( =sthavara), 
more  probably  however  with  Liden  (see  Walde  under 
navis)  to  Ohg,  nahho,  Ags.  naca  "  boat  =  tree  "  ;  seman- 
tically  mountain  =  trees,  i.  e.  forest]  mountain  S  1.195  = 
Nd^  136'  (nagassa  passe  asina,  of  the  Buddha) ;  Sn  i8o 
( =  de vapabbata  royal  mountain  SnA  216;  or  should 
it  mean  "  forest  "?) ;  Th  1,41  (°vivara),  525  ;  Pv  11. 9'' 
("muddhani  on  top  of  the  Mount,  i.  e.  Mt.  Sineru  FVA 
138  ;  the  Buddha  was  thought  to  reside  there) ;  Miln  327 
(id.) ;  Vv  16'  (°antare  in  between  the  (5)  mountains,  see 
VvA  82). 

Ragara  (nt.)  [Ved.  nagara,  Non-aryan  .'  Connection  with 
agara  is  very  problematic]  a  stronghold,  citadel,  fortress  ; 
a  (fortified)  town,  city.  As  seat  of  the  government  & 
as  important  centre  of  trade  contrasted  with  gama  & 
nigama  (village  &  market-place  or  township)  Vin  111.47 
("bandhana),  184  ;  cp.  gama  3  b.  deva°  deva-city  Ji.  3, 
i68,  202  ;  DhA  1.280  etc.  ;  cp.  yakkha"  J  11.127.  —Vin 
1.277,  342.  344  ;  11155.  184  ;  D  11.7  ;  S  n.105  sq.  ;  iv.194 
(kayassa  adhivacanar)) ;  v. 160  ;  A  1.168,  178  ;  iv.106  sq. 
(paccantima) ;  v. 194  (id.)  Dh  150  (atthlnai)) ;  Sn  414, 
1013  (Bhoga°) ;  J  1.3,  50  (Kapilavatthu°) ;  11. 5  ;  in. 188  ; 
VI. 368  etc.  ;  Pug  56 ;  DhA  iv.2  ;  PvA  3,  39,  73  ;  Dpvs 
XIV. 5 1   (-H  pura).     Cp.  nagara. 

-Qpakarika  a  town  fortified  with  a  wall  covered  with 
cement  at  its  base  D  1.105,  cp.  DA  1.274  '■  -upama  like 
a  citadel  (of  citta)  Dh  40.  cp.  DhA  1.3 17  &  Nagaropama 
sutra  Divy  34";  -katha  town-gossip  D  1.7;  -guttika 
superintendent  of  the  city  police  J  111.30.  436  ;  iv.279  ; 
MUn  345  (dhammanagare  n-g.),  DhA  iv.55.  Cp.  Kern, 
Toev.  p.  167 ;  -vara  the  noble  town  (of  Rajagaha) 
Vv  1 6",  cp.  VvA  82  ;  -vithi  a  city  street  J  11.4 1 6  ;  -sobhini 
the  city  belle,  a  town  courtesan  J  11.367  ("ana) ;  in. 435 
(Sulasa),  475  ("ani) ;  DhA  1.174  '■  ii-2oi  ;  PvA  4  (Sulasa) ; 
Miln  350. 

Nagaraka  (nt.)  a  small  city  D  1.146=  169,  quoted  J  1.391. 

Hagga  (adj.)  [Ved.  nagna  =  Lat.  nudus  (fr.  *noguedhos) 
Goth.  naqaps=Ohg.  naccot,  Ags.  nacod  =  naked;  Oir. 
nocht ;  perhaps  Gr.  ju/ivdf]  naked,  nude  Vin  11. 121  ; 
J  1.307 ;  Pv  1.6'  (=niccola  PvA  32) ;  11. i»;  8'  ;  I^A  68, 
106. 

-cariya  going  naked  Dh  141  ;  DhA  111.78;  cp.  Sk 
nagnacarya  Divy  339 ;  -bhogga  one  whose  goods  are 
nakedness,  an  Jiscetic  J  iv.i6o  ;  v. 75 ;  vi.225. 

Rantatta  (nt.)  [Sk.  nagnatva]=naggiya  nakedness  PvA 
106. 

Raggija  (nt.)  [Sk.  *nagnyar)]  naked  state,  nudity  Vin 
1.292,  305  ;  S  IV. 300  ;  Sn  249. 

Haggiyi  (adj.  f.)  [Sk.  nagnika]  ^naggS,  naked  Pv  11.3". 


Naagala  (nt.)  [Ved.  ISngala ;  nangala  by  dissimilation 
through  subsequent  n£u>al,  cp.  Milinda  >  Menandros. 
Etym.  unknown,  prob.  dialectical  (already  in  RV  iv. 
57*),  because  unconnected  with  other  Aryan  words  for 
plough.  Cp.  Baluci  nangar]  a  plough  S  1.115  ;  111.155  ; 
A  111.64 ;  Sn  77  (yuga°  yoke  &  plough);  Sn  p.  13; 
J  1.57;  Th  2,  441  (=siraThA  270);  SnA  146;  VvA  63, 
65  ;  PvA  133  (dun°  hard  to  plough) ;  DhA  1.223  (aya°) ; 
111.67  (id.). 

-isa  the  beam  of  a  plough  S  1.104  (of  an  elephant's 
trunk);  -ka^akarana  ploughing  S  v.  146  =  J  11.59; 
-phala  [mod.  Ind.  phar]  ploughshare  (to  be  under- 
stood as  Dvandva)  DhA  1.395. 

Nangalin  (adj.-n.)  having  or  using  a  plough,  ploughman, 
in  mukha"  "  using  the  mouth  as  plough  "  Th  i,  101 
(maulvergnijgt,  Neumann)  (Mrs.  Rh.  D.  harsh  of 
speech). 

Nanguttha  (nt.)  [dial,  for  *nangulya  >  'nangulhya  ?]  = 
nangula  A  11.245;  J  1.194  (o^  a  bull);  11.19  (o*f  an 
elephant);  111.16  (suci"),  480  (panther);  iv.256  (of  a 
deer) ;  DhA  1.275  (of  a  fish) ;  11.64. 

Nangala  (nt.)  [Sk.  langula  to  langa  &  lagati  (q.  v.),  cp. 
Gr.  XayyaZui,  Lat.  langueo]  a  tail  Th  i,  1 13  =601  (go°). 

Nacira  (adj.)  [Sk.  nacira  =  na+cira]  not  of  long  duration, 
short  Sn  694  ;  gen.  nacirass'  eva  after  a  short  time, 
shortly  Sn  p.  16 ;  J  iv.2,  392  ;  Miln  250. 

Nacca  (nt.)  [Ved.  nrtya  =  Anglo-Ind.  nautch,  etym.  un- 
certain, cp.  naccati  &  natati]  (pantomimic)  dancing; 
usually  comb""  with  singing  (gita,  q.  v.)  &  instrumental 
music  (vadita).  — nacca:  A  1.261  ;  D  ni.183;  J  1.61, 
207;  DA  1.77;  PvA  231.  — nacca-gita:  J  1.61;  Pv 
iv.7^  ;  DhA  IU.129  ;  VvA  131,  135.  —  nacca-gita- vadita 
{+  visukadassana) :  Vin  1.83  ;  D  1.5,  6  ;  KhA  36  ;  cp. 
Vv  81'°  (naccagite  suvadite). 

Naccaka  [Sk.  *nrtyaka,  distinguished  from  but  ultimately 
identical  with  nataka.  q.  v.]  a  dancer,  (pantomimic) 
actor  Miln  191,  331,  359  (nata°).  —  f.  naccaki  Vin  :i.i2. 

Naccati  [Ved.  nrtyati  nft,  cp.  nacca  &  natati]  to  dance,  play 
Vin  II.  10;  J  1.292;  VV50'  (=natati  VvA  2io);  64'*. — 
pp.  naccento  D  1.135;  fut.  naccissati  Vin  11.12;  aor. 
nacci  J  111.127;  'of.  naccitui)  J  1.207. — Caus.  nacca- 
peti  to  make  play  Vism  305  (so  read  for  nacch°). 

Naccana  (nt.)  [Ved.  'nrtyana,  cp.  natana]  dance,  dancing 
VvA  282,  315. 

Naijoha  [Sk.  datyuha]  a  kind  of  cock  or  hen  J  vi.528,  538. 

Nata  [Sk.  nata  dial,  f,  cp.  Prk.  nacja,  of  nrt,  see  naccati] 
a  dancer,  player,  mimic,  actor  Vin  iv.285  ;  S  iv.306  sq, ; 
DhA  IV.60  (°dhita),  65  ("karaka),  224  (°ki|a) ;  Miln  359 
("naccaka) ;  Sdhp  380.  —  Cp.  nafaka  &  nataka 

Nataka  [Sk.  nataka]  =nata  Vin  iv.285  ;  Miln  331 ;  PvA  3. 
—  f.  natika  DA  1.239. 

Natati  [Sk.  natati,  of  nft,  with  dial.  t.  cp.  naccati]  to  dance, 
play  VvA  210  (=  naccati). 

Nattha  [Sk.  na^tha,  pp.  of  nassati  (nasyati),  q.  v.]  perished, 
destroyed ;  lost  A  11.249  ;  J  1.74  ;  267. 

Natthana  (nt.)  [Der.  fr.  naftha]  destruction  Miln  180,  237, 

Natthayika  [cp.  Sk.  na?thartha.  i.  e.  na§tha-l-  artha]  bank- 
rupt Miln  131,  201. 

Nata  [Sk.  nata,  pp.  of  namati,  q.  v.]  bent  (on)  S  1. 186 
(a°);  Sn  1143;  Nd»  327. 

Nati  (f.)  [Sk.  nati  of  nam]  bending,  bent,  inclination 
S  11.67;  'V.59;  M  I.I  15. 

IV— 6 


Natta 


182 


Nandhi 


Natta  (nt.)  [Sk.  nakta,  see  nakkhatta]  night,  ace.  nattar) 
by  night,  in  nattam-ahatj  by  day  &  by  night  Sn  1070 
(v.  1.  BB  and  Nd=  rattamahar)). 

Nattar  [Sk.  naptr,  analogy-formation  after  matr  etc.  from 
Vcd.  napat ;  cp.  Lat.  uepos  ;  Ags.  nefa  =  E.  nephew; 
Ohg.  nevo]  grandson  J  1.60  (nattu,  gen.),  88;  Ud  91, 
92;  PvA  17  (nattu-dhita  great-grand-daughter),  25 
(natta  nom.). 

Natthika  (adj.-n.)  [Sk.  nastika]  one  who  professes  the 
motto  of  "  natthi,"  a  sceptic,  nihilist  S  1.96 ;  usually 
in  cpds. 

•ditthi  scepticism,  nihilistic  view,  heresy  Sn  243 
(  — micchadittlii  Com.) ;  VvA  342  ;  PvA  244  ;  -vada  one 
who  professes  a  nihilistic  doctrine  S  in. 73  ;  M  1.403  ; 
A  II. 3 1  ;  PvA  215  (-f  inicchadifthika). 

Natthita  (f.)  [Sk.  nastita,  fr.  n'  atthi]  nihilism  S  11. 17; 
J  v.uo. 

Natthibhava  [n'  atthi-bhava]  non-existence  DhA  iii.324. 

Natthn  [cp.  Sk.  nas  f.  &  nasta,  see  etym.  under  nasa] 
1.  the  nose  J  v. 166  (  =  nasa  Com.).  —  2.=°kamma, 
medical  treatment  through  the  nose  Vin  in.83  (deti). 

-kamma  nose-treatment,  consisting  in  the  application 
of  hot  oil  (DA  1.98:  telar)  yojetva  n-karaQai))  D  1.12; 
Vin  1.204  ;  M  i.gii  ;  DhA  1.12  ;  .karani  a  pockcthand- 
kerchief  Vin  1.204. 

Nadati  [Ved.  nadati,  nad  of  unknown  etym.]  to  roar,  cry, 
make  a  noise  (nadar)  nadati  freq.)  Sn  552  (siha),  684 
(id.),  1015;  J  1.50,  150;  II. 1 10;  aor.  nadi  J  ni.55.  & 
anadisug  J  iv.349.  Caus.  nadapeti  to  make  roar 
J  11.244.     See  also  nadi  &  nada,  &  cp.  onadati. 

Nadana  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  nadanu]  roaring  J  1.19  (sihanada" 
the  sound  of  a  lion's  roar). 

Nadita  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  nadita,  pp.  of  caus.  nadayati]  roar, 
noise  J  11. 1 10. 

Nadi  (f.)  [Ved.  nadi.  from  nadati  =  "  the  roaring,"  cp.  also 
nandati]  a  river ;  often  characterised  as  mahk°  in  opp. 
to  kiin°  rivulet ;  pi.  nadiyo  also  collect.  "  the  waters." 

—  D  1.244  (Aciravati  nadi);  S  11.32,  118,  135;  v.3go ; 
A  1.33,  136,  243  (maha");  11.55,  140  (maha°) ;  111.52; 
iv.ioi  (m°),  137;  Sn  425,  433,  568,  720;  Dh  251; 
J  1.296;  11.102;  111.51  ;  111.91  (Kebuka);  v. 269  (Veta- 
rani°) ;  vi.518  (Ketumati) ;  Pv  iv.3"  ;  Vism'  468  (sigha- 
sota);  PvA  256  (m°) ;  Sdhp  21,  194,  574.  —  gen.  sg. 
nadiya  J  1.278  ;  It  1 13  ;  instr.  nadiya  J  1.278  ;  PvA  46  ; 
pi.  nom.  nadiyo  Miln  114  (na  ta  n.  dhuva-salila),  najjo 
PvA  29  (maha°) ;  &  najjayo  J  vi.278  ;  gen  nadinai)  Vin 
1.246  =  Sn  5O9  (n.  sagaro  mukhai)).  —  kunnadi  a  small 
river  S  1.109;  11.32,  118;  v. 47,  63;  A  11.140;  iv.ioo; 
V.I  14  sq.  — On  n.  in  similes  see  J.P.T.S.  1906,  100. 

-kuftja  a  river  glen  DA  1.209;  -kula  the  bank  of  a 
river  cp.  111.7'  ;  -tira  =  °kula  J  1.278;  -dugga  a  difficult 
ford  in  a  river  S  II.  198;  -vidugga  =  "dugga  A  1.35  ;  111. 128. 

Naddha  [Sk.  naddha  pp.  of  nah,  see  nayhati]  tied,  bound, 
fastened,  put  on  J  1.175  (rathavarattag) ;  Bu  1.31 
(camma",  of  a  drum);  Mhvs  vii.16  (°pancayudha) ; 
Miln  117  (yuga°);  DhsA  131.     Cp.  onaddha,  vi°,  san°.' 

Nanandar  (f .)  [Sk.  nanandr  >%  nan^nda,  to  nana  "  mother  "] 
husband's  sister  J  v.269  (  =  samikassa  bhagini  p.  275). 

Nanikama  (adj.)  fna-l-nikama=anikama]  disagreeable, 
unpleasant  Dh  309  (°seyya  an  uncomfortable  bed). 

Nanu  (indecl.)  [Ved.  nanu]  i.  part,  of  affirmation  (cp.  na^) : 
surely,  certainly  Pv  11.6'  (so  to  be  read  for  nanda  ?  v.  1. 
BB  nuna) ;  Manor.  Pur.  on  A  v.  194  (Andersen  P.  R.  91). 

—  2.  part,  of  interrogation  (  =  Lat.  nonne)  "  is  it  not  " 
(cp.  na») :  J  1.151  ;  111.393  ;  DhA  1.33. 


Nautaka  (nt.)  [a  contamination  of  namataka  (Kern,  Toev. 
p.  169),  maybe  Sk.  naktaka  "  cover  for  nakedness  " 
(Trenckner,  Notes  8i*),  unless  it  be  non-Aryan]  a  shred, 
rag,  worn-out  cloth,  usually  expl''  by  jinnapilotika 
(J  111.22)  or  khandabhuta  pilotika  (PvA  185)  or  pilotika 
only  (VvA  311).  —  S  v.342  ;  A  in. 187;  iv.376  ("vasin 
as  v.  1. ;  text  has  nantikavasin) ;  Vv  80'  (anantaka) ; 
Pv  III. 2'* ;  J  111.22  ("vasin  clad  in  rags). 

Nanda  at  Pv  11.6'  used  either  as  interj.  (  =  nanu,  q.  v.)  or 
as  voc.  in  the  sense  of  "  dear  "  ;  the  first  expl"  to  be 
preferred  &  n.  probably  to  be  read  as  nanu  (v.  1.  nuna) 
or  handa  (in  which  case  nanu  would  be  gloss). 

Nandaka  (adj.)  [Sk.  nandika]  giving  plecisure,  pleasing, 
full  of  joy  ;  f.  nandika  J  iv.396  (-1-  khidda),  either  as  adj. 
or  f.  abstr.  pleasure,  rejoicing  (  =  abhindandana  Com.). 

Nandati  [Ved.  nandati,  nand  =  nad  (cp.  vind  >  vid  etc.)  orig. 
to  utter  sounds  of  joy]  to  be  glad,  to  rejoice,  find  delight 
in,  be  proud  of  (c.  instr.)  S  i.i  10  ;  A  iv.94  sq.  ;  Sn  33  ; 
Dh  18. — ^  Caus.  nandeti  to  please,  to  do  a  favour 
J  IV. 107  (nandaya  =  tosehi  Com.);  PvA  139  (  =  toseti). 
—  ppr.  nandayanto  J  vi.588.  —  Cp.  anandati. 

Nandani  (f.)  [Sk.  uandana]  rejoicing,  delight,  pleasure 
S  i.6  =  Sn  33. 

Nandi'  &  (freq.)  Nandi  (f.)  [Sk.  nandi,  but  cp.  BSk.  nandi 
Divy  37]  I.  joy,  enjoyment,  pleasure,  delight  in  (c. 
loc.)  S  1. 16,  39,  54  ;  11. 101  sq.  (ahare) ;  in. 14  (  =  upadana) ; 
IV. 36  sq.  ;  A  11.10  (kama°,  bhava",  difthi"),  111.246; 
IV. 423  sq.  (dhamma°) ;  Sn  1055  ( -f- nivesana) ;  Nd^  330 
(=tanha);  Pug  57;  Dhs  i059S::^(in  def.  of  tanha) ; 
Vbh  145,  356,  361;  DhsA  363;  ThA  65,  167.  —  For 
nandi  at  Miln  289  read  tandi.  —  2.  a  musical  instru- 
ment:  joy-drum  [Sk.  nandi]  Vin  111.108  (  =  vijayabheri). 
Cp.  5°. 

-(y)avatta  "  turning  auspiciously  "  (i.  e.  turning  to 
the  right :  see  dakkhiriavatta).  auspicious,  good  Nejt  2. 
4,  7,  113  (always  attr.  of  naya) ;  -upasecana  (ragasalla) 
sprinkled  over  with  joy,  having  joy  as  its  sauce  Nett 
116,  117;  cp.  magsdpasecana  (odana)  J  ni.i44  =  vi.24  ; 
-kkhaya  the  destruction  of  (finding)  delight  S  111.51  ; 
-(r|)jaha  giving  up  or  abandoning  joy  Sn-iioi  (-1-  okaii- 
jaha  &  kappaiijaha) ;  Nd^  331;  -bhava  existence  of 
joy,  being  full  of  joy,  in  °pdrikkhina  one  in  whom  joy 
is  extinct  (i.  e.  an  Arahant).  expl""  however  by  Com. 
as  one  who  has  rid  himself  of  the  craving  for  rebirth 
(tisu  bhavesu  parikkhinatanha  DhA  iv.i92=SnA  469) 
S  1.2.  53  ;  Sn  175.  637  =  Dh  413  ;  -mukhi  (adj.-f.)  "  joy- 
faced."  showing  a  merry  face.  Ep.  of  the  night  (esp. 
the  eve  of  the  uposatha)  Vin  1.288  (ratti)  ;  11.236  (id.); 
-raga  pleasure  &  lust,  passionate  delight  S  11.227 ; 
111.51;  IV. 142,  174,  180;  M  1. 145;  Dhs  io59;:5s,  1136; 
esp.  as  attr.  of  tanha  in  phrase  n-r-sahagata-tanha  (cp. 
M  Vastu  111.332:  nandiraga.sahagata  tfsna)  Vin  i.io; 
S  III.  158  ;  V.425  sq.  ;  Ps  111.137  ;  Nett  72  ;  -saijyojana  the 
fetter  of  finding  delight  in  anything  Sn  nog,  11 15; 
Nd^  332  ;  -samudaya  the  rise  or.  origin  of  delight 
M  111.267. 

Nandi'  —  nandhi. 

Nandin  (adj.^  [Sk.  nandin]  finding  or  giving  delight, 
delighting  in.  pleasurable,  gladdening  S  11,53  (vedana) ; 
A  11.59,  61  ;  It  112. 

Nandha  see  yuga°. 

Nandhati  [for  nayhati,  der.  fr.  naddha  after  analogy  of 
baddha  >  bandhati]  meaning  not  so  much  "to  bind" 
as  "  to  cover  "  ;  sec  apilandhati,  upanandhati,  onan- 
dhati.  pariyonandhati. 

Nandhi  (f.)  (usually  spelt  nandi)  [Sk.  naddhri  to  naddha, 
pp.  of  nah  to  bind]  a  strap,  thong  J  1.175  (rathassa 
cammaii  ca  nandifi  ca) ;  Sn  622— Dh  398  (-(- varatta); 
SnA  400;  DhA  1.44,  tv.  160. 


Napurjsaka 


183 


Nalata 


Napnosaka  (aUj.)  [Ved.  napui)saka  =  na+pui)s  "  not- 
male  "]  of  no  sex;  lit.  Vism  548.  553  ;  ThA  260  ;  Vbh 
417  ;  in  gram,  of  the  neuter  gender  Kacc.  50  ;  PvA  266 
(is  reading  correct  ?) 

Nabha  (nt.)  &  Nabhas  (in  oblique  cases)  [Sk.  nabhas ; 
Gr.  I'f^ot  &  vf^fXij,  Lat.  nebula.  Oir.  nel,  Ags.  nifol 
(darkness),  Ohg.  nebul.  See  also  abbha]  mist,  vapour, 
clouds,  sky  A  1.242  ;  11.50  (nabha) .  111.240  .  Sn  687 
(nabhasi-gama,  of  the  moon);  Vv  32',  35'  (=3kasa 
VvA  i6t),  53<  (id.  236),  63"  (id.  268);  PvA  65;  Mhvs 
vii.g  (nabhasa  instr.). 

Habbho  =  nabhiyo,  nom.  pi.  of  nabhi  (q.  v.), 

Hamataka  (nt,)  [word  &  etym.  doubtful ;  cp.  nantaka 
&  Bdhgh.  Vin  11.317:  matakan  (sic)  ti  satthaka- 
vedhanakai]  (  =  vethanakar))  pilotikakhandar;]  a  piece 
of  cloth  Vin  ii.ris  (satthaka),  123,  267  (°r)  dhareti). 

Namati  [Ved.  namati.  Idg.  •nemto  bend  ;  also  to  share  out, 
cp.  Gr.  viftui,  Goth,  niman=Ger.  nehmen.  See  cog- 
nates in  Walde  loc.  clt.  under  nemus]  to  bend,  bend 
down  (trs.  &  instr.)  direct,  apply  S  1.137  (cittai)) ; 
Sn  806;  J  1. 61  (aor,  nami,  cittag).  — Caus.  nameti  (not 
nameti,  Fsb.  to  Sn  1143  namenti,  which  is  to  be  cor- 
rected to  n'  ipenti)  to  bend,  to  wield  Dh  80  =  145  (na- 
mayati).     As  nameti  at  J  vi.349.     pp.  namita  (q.  v.). 

Namana  (nt.)  [a  philosophical  term  constructed  by  Bdhgh, 
from  nama,  cp.  ruppana — rupa]  naming,  giving  a 
name  KhA  78  ;  DhsA  52  (see  nama') ;  Vism  528. 

Hamana  (f.)  [abstr.  to  namati,  cp,  Sk.  namana  nt.]  bent, 
application,  industry  Vbh  352. 

Namassati  [Ved.  namasyati,  Denom.  fr.  namo]  to  pay 
honour  to.  to  venerate,  honour,  do  homage  to  (often 
with  pafljalika  &  afljalii)  katva)  Sn  236,  485.  598,  1058. 
1063;  Nd'  334;  J  111.83;  Pv  Ii.i2'»;  lOiA  196;  pot. 
namasseyya  It  1 10  ;  Dh  392,  ist  pi,  namassemu  Sn  995  ; 
ppr.  namassar)  Sn  344,  934  ;  namassanto  SnA  565,  & 
(usually)  namassamana  Sn  192.  1142;  Nd'  4C0 ;  J 
11.73  ;  VvA  7.  —  aor.  namassigsii  Sn  287.  —  ger.  namas* 
sitva  J  I.I,  —  grd.  (as  adj.)  namassaniya  (venerable), 
Miln  278. 

Namassana  (nt.)  (?)  veneration  J  I.I. 

Namauiya  (namassa)  (f.)  [Sk.  namasy^]  worship,  venera- 
tion Miln  140. 

Namita  [pp.  nameti]  bent  on.  disposed  to  (-°),  able  or 
capable  of  J  in. 392  (pabbajjJya-naroita-citta) ;  Miln  308 
(phalabhara°). 

Namo  (nt.)  &  Nama  (nt.)  [Ved.  namas,  cp.  Av.  namo  prayer ; 
Gr.  v€/iot,  Lat.  nemus  (see  namati)]  homage,  venera- 
tion, esp.  used  as  an  exclamation  of  adoration  at  the 
beginning  of  a  book  (namo  tassa  P.hagavato  Arahato 
Sammasambuddhzissa)  Sn  540,  544  ;  PvA  i,  67. 

Namaci  (Np.)  a  name  of  M&ra. 

Naya  (adj.-n.)  [from  nayati.  to  lead,  see  neti]  "  leading  "  ; 
usually  m:  way  (fig),  method,  plan,  manner;  infer- 
ence ;  sense,  meaning  (in  grammar) ;  behaviour,  conduct 
A  11.193 -Nd^  151  (°hetu  through  inference);  Nett  2 
(method),  4  (id.).  7,  113;  Miln  316  (nayena  =  naya- 
hctu) :  KhA  74;  VvA  112  (sense,  context,  sentence); 
PvA  1  (ways  or  conduct),  1 1 7  (meaning),  126  (id.).  136, 
280.  —  nayaij  neti  to  draw  a  conclusion,  apply  an 
inference,  judge,  behave  S  ii.58  =  Vbh  329;  J  iv.241 
(anayar)  nayati  dummedho  :  draws  a  wrong  conclusion) ; 
PvA  227  (-(-anurainati).  —  With  °adi°  N.  has  the 
function  of  continuing  or  completing  the  context  — 
"  and  similarly,"  c.  g.  "adinaya-pavatta  dealing  with 
this  &  the  following  VvA  2  ;  ,  .  ,  ti  idina  nayena  thus 
&  similarly,  iV  so  forth  J  1.8 1  ;  PvA  30.  —  Instr.  nayena 
(-")  as  adv.   in   the  way  of,  as,   according(ly) :   5gata° 


according  to  what  has  been  shown  or  said  in  .  .  . 
J  1.59 ;  VvA  3  ;  PvA  280  ;  purima"  as  before  J  1.59 ; 
I  V.I  40;  vutta°  as  said  (above)  (cp.  vutta-niyamena) 
PvA  13,  29,  36,  71,  92  etc.  — sunaya  a  sound  judg- 
ment J  IV.241  ;  dunnaya  a  wrong  principle,  method  or 
judgment,  or  as  adj. :  wrongly  inferred,  hard  to  be 
understood,  unintelligible  A  111.178  =  Nett  21  ;  J  iv.241. 

Nayati  see  neti. 

Nayana  (nt.)  [Sk.  nayana,  to  nayati  =the  leader  cp.  also 
netra  =  P.  netta]  the  eye  Th  2,  381  ;  Vv  35^ ;  Dhs  597 ; 
Vbh  71  sq.  ;  Miln  365  ;  ThA  255  ;  VvA  i6i  (  =  cakkhu); 
PvA  40  (nettani  nayanani),  152  ;  Sdhp  448,  621. 

Nayhati  [Ved.  nahyati,  Idg.  *nedh  as  in  Lat.  nodus  &  Ved. 
nahu]  to  tie,  bind ;  only  in  comp.  with  prep,  as  upanay- 
hati  (cp.  up^LhanJ  sandal),  pilandhati  etc.  ^  pp. 
naddha  (q.  v.).  See  also  nandhi,  naha ;  onayhati, 
unnahani,  pi|ayhati. 

Nayhana  (nt.)  [Sk.  nahana]  tying,  binding ;  bond,  fetter 
DhA  IV.  161, 

Nara  [Ved.  nara,  cp.  nrtu  ;  Idg.  *ner  to  be  strong  or  valiant 
=Gr.  aviip,  dy-ijcwp  (valiant),  ^pui//  {*viiii^)  ;  Lat. 
neriosus  (muscular),  Nero  (Sabinian,  cp.  Oscan  ner  — 
Lat.  vir) ;  Oir,  nert]  man  (in  poetry  esp,  a  brave,  strong, 
heroic  man),  pi.  either  "  men  "  or  "  people  "  (the 
latter  e.  g.  at  Sn  776,  1082;  Pv  i.ii").  —  A  1.13^; 
11.5;  111.53  ;  Sn  39.  96,  116,  329,  591,  676,  865  etc.; 
Dh  47,  48,  262,  309,  341  ;  J  III. 295  ;  Nd'  i2=Nd^  335 
(definition) ;  VvA  42  (popular  etymology  :  narati  neti  ti 
naro  puriso,  i.  e.  a  "  leading  "  man) :  PvA  i  i6  =  Dh  125. 
-Adhama  vilest  of  men  Sn  246  ;  -Asabha  "  man  bull," 
i.  e.  lord  of  men  Sn  684,  696 ;  -inda  "  man  lord,"  i.  c. 
king  Sn  836 ;  J  1.151  ;  -uttama  best  of  men  (Ep.  of  the 
Buddha)  S  1.23;  D  111.147;  Sn  1021;  -deva  god-man 
or  man-god  (pi.)  gods,  also  Ep.  of  the  B.  "  king  of  men  '.' 

5  1.5  ;  Pv  IV. 3" ;  -nari  (pi.)  men  &  women,  appl.  to  male 

6  female  angelic  servants  (of  the  Vakkhas)  Vv  32*,  33', 
53*;  Pv  II. 11';  -vira  a  hero  (?),  a  skilled  man  (?)  Th  1, 
736  (naravirakata  "  by  human  skill  &  wit  "  Mrs,  Rh. 
D.),     -sJha  lion  of  man  J  1.89. 

Naraka  [Sk.  naraka ;  etym.  doubtful,  problematic  whether 
to  Gr.  vipnpot  (=inferus).  Ags.  nord  =  north  as  region 
of  the  underworld]  i.  a  pit  D  1.234  I  Th  1.  869  ;  J  iv.2fi8 
(°av5ta  PvA  225).  —  2.  a  name  for  Niraya.  i.  e.  purga- 
tory ;  a  place  of  torment  for  the  deceased  (see  niraya 
&  cp.  list  of  narakas  at  Divy  67)  S  1.209  ;  Sn  706  ;  PvA 
52  ;  Sdhp  492  (sagsiraghora"),  612. 

-angara  the  ashes  of  purgatory  Sdhp  32. 

Narada  (nt.)  [Sk.  nalada,  Gr.  vapfoc,  of  Semitic  origin, 
cp.  Hebr.  nird]  nard,  ointment  J  vi.537. 

Nala  &  Naja  [Ved.  na<Ja  &  Sk.  na|a,  with  dial,  d  (|)  for 
•narda,  cp.  Gr.  vc'ipSiji]  a  species  of  reed  ;  reed  in  general 
Vin  IV.35  ;  A  11.73  :  Dh  337  ;  Nd^  680,, ;  J  1.223  ;  'v.141. 
396  (n.  va  chinno) ;  Pv  1.11°  (id.);  DhA  in.  156;  iv.43. 
See  also  naja.  na|i  1^  n3|ik&. 

-Agara  a  house  built  of  reeds  S  1.156  ;  iv.185  (+  tina- 
gara) ;  A  i.ioi  (-^  tinag.ara) ;  Nd^  4(1''  (id.),  Miln  :'45  ; 
cp.  AvS  Index  11.228  (nadagara) ;  -aggi  a  fire  of  rcc<ls 
J  vi.iro  ("vannar)  pabbatar)) ;  -kalapi  a  bundle  of  r. 
S  II. 114;  -kara  a  worker  in  reeds,  basket-maker; 
D  1.51  {+  pesakira  &  kumbliakara)  ;  J  v. 291  ;  Th.\  28  ; 
PvA  175  (-1- vilivakara) ;  DhA  1. 177;  -dandaka  a  shaft 
of  r.  J  1. 170;  -maya  made  of  r.  Vin  11. 115;  -vana  a 
thicket  of  reeds  J  iv.140;  Miln  342;  -sannibha  reed- 
coloured  J  VI. 537  (Com.  :  naja-puppha-vanna  rukkha- 
sunakha) ;  -setu  a  bridge  of  reeds  Sn  4. 

Nalapin  a  water-animal  J  vi.537, 

Nalata  (nt,)  [Ved.  Ialata  =  rarata  ;  on  n>  I  cp.  nangala]  the 
forehead  S  1.118;  J  III. 393  ;  iv.417  (nalatena  maccug 
adaya :  by  his  forelock);  Vjsm  1S5;  DhA  1253. 


Nalatika 


184 


Nahayati 


-anta  the  side  of  the  forehead  J  v'i.331  ;  -mandala  the 
round  of  the  f.  D  1.106  ;  Sn  p.  108. 

Nalatika  (f.)  [Sk.  lalatika]  "  belonging  to  the  forehead," 
a  frown  Vin  ii.io  (nalatikarj  deti  to  give  a  frown). 

Nalini  (f.)  [Sk.  nalinl]  a  pond  J  iv.90  ;  Vism  84,  17. 

Nava*  (num.)  [Ved.  navan,  Idg.  *neun,  cp.  Lat.  novem 
(*noven),  Gr.  li'i-iu,  Goth,  niun,  Oir.  rioin,  E.  nine. 
Connection  with  nava^  likely  because  in  counting  by 
tetrads  (octo  =  8  is  a  dual  !)  a  new  series  begins  with 
No.  9]  number  nine,  gen.-dat.  navannag  (Sn  p.  87) ; 
instr.-abl.  navahi  (VvA  76),  loc.  navasu. 

Meaning  and  Application  :  The  primitive-Aryan  im- 
portance of  the  "  mystic  "  nine  is  not  found  in  Buddhism 
and  can  only  be  traced  in  Pali  in  folkloristic  under- 
currents {as  fairy  tales)  &  stereotype  traditions  in  which 
9  appears  as  a  number  implying  a  higher  trinity  =  3-. 
I.  navabhumaka  pasada  (a  palace  9  stories  high  more 
freq.  satta",  7)  J  1.58  ;  nava-hiraiiiiakotihi  (w.  9  kotis  of 
gold)  VvA  188  ;  nava  yojana  DhA  11. 65.  —  2.  navanga- 
buddhasasana  "  the  9  fold  teaching  of  Buddha,"  i.  c.  the 
9  divisions  of  the  Buddh.  Scriptures  according  to  their 
form  or  style,  viz.  suttag  geyyar)  veyyakaranai)  gatha 
udanar)  itivuttakar)  jatakar)  abbhutadhammai)  vedallag 
M  1. 133  ;  A  II.  103,  178  ;  in. 86  sq.,  177  sq. ;  Pug  43  ;  Miln 
344;  Dpvs  IV. 15;  PvA  2.  Cp.  chalanga. — nava  satta- 
vasa  "  9  abodes  of  beings  "  Kh  iv.  (in  exemplifying 
No.  9),  viz.  (see  D  111.263  =  KhA  86,  87  cp.  also  A  iv.39 
sq.)  (i)  manussa.  deva,  vinipatika  ;  (2)  Brahmakayika 
deva ;  (3)  Abhassara  ;  (4)  Subhakiriha ;  (5)  Asaniia- 
satta  ;  (6)  Akasanancayatana-upaga  ;  (7)  Viriiiananan- 
cayatana" ;  (8)  Akificannayatana" ;  (9)  Nevasafiiia- 
sannayatana".  — nava  sota  (Sn  197)  or  nava  dvara 
(VvA  76 ;  v.  1.  mukha)  9  openings  of  the  body,  viz. 
(SnA  248)  2  eyes,  ears,  nostrils,  mouth,  anus  &  urethra 
(cp.  S.n.E.  39,  180;  4«,  259  sq.).  — nava  vitakka  9 
thoughts  Nd*  269  (q.  v.).  —  3.  a  trace  of  the  week  of  9 
days  is  to  be  found  in  the  expression  "  navuti-vassasa- 
tasahass-ayuka  "  giving  the  age  of  a  divinity  as  9 
million  years  (  =  a  divine  week)  VvA  345. — ■  Cp. 
navuti. 

Nava-  (adj.)  [Ved.  nava,  Idg.  *neun  (cp.  navai)=Lat. 
novus,  Gr.  itut,-  [*t>iFoij),  Lith.  navas ;  Goth,  niujis 
elc.  =  E.  new;  also  Sk.  navya  =  Gr.  if?.>(,-.  Lat.  Novius. 
May  be  related  to  na^]  i.  new,  fresh;  un.soikd,  clean; 
of  late,  lately  acquired  or  practised  (opp.  pubba  & 
purana).  Often  syn.  with  tarnna.  Sn  28,  235  (opp. 
puranai)),  944  (id.),  913  (opp.  pubba);  Pv  1.92  (of 
clothes -^costly) ;  J  iv.2()i  (opp.  purana);  Miln  132 
(salila  fresh  water).  —  2.  young,  unexperienced,  newly 
initiated  ;  a  novice  Vin  1.47  (nava  bhikkhu  the  younger 
bhs.,  opp.  thera) ;  S  1.9  (-f- acira-pabbajita) ;  11.218; 
Sn  p.  93  (Gotamo  navo  pabbajjaya  "  a  novice  in  the 
Wanderer's  life  ")  ;  DhA  1.92  (bhikkhu). 

-kamma  building  new,  making  repairs,  "doing  up," 
mending  Vin  ii.iig.  159;  iii.St  ;  J  1.92;  IV.37S;  Nd- 
385  ;  -kammika  an  expert  in  making  repairs  or  in  build- 
ing, a  builder  (cp.  vaddhaki)  Vin  11.13.  'v.- 11  :  -ghata 
fresh  ghee  J  11.433  (v.  1.  "sappi). 

Navaka  (adj.-n.)  [Sk.  navaka]  young;  a  young  man,  a 
newly  ordained  bhikkhu  (opp.  thora),  novice  (cp.  Divy 
4"4)  J  '33  (sangha) ;  Pv.\  ■;(,  (id.).  —  Freq.  in  compar. 
navakatara  a  j-ounger  one,  or  the  youngest  (opp.  thcra- 
tara)  D  11.154  ;  J  1.218  ;  Miln  24. 

Navanita  (nt.)&  nonita  [cp.  Ved.  navanita]  frcsfi  butter 
Vin  1.24-4  (cp-  gorasa)  :  D  1.201  ;  M  111. 141  ;  Pv  111.55 
(nonita) ;  Pug  69,  70  ;  Miln  4 1 ,  Dhs  646,  74(1 ;  Dh A  1.4 1  7  ; 
PvA  199. 

Navama  (num.  ord.)  [Sk.  navama^Oir.  nomad;  cp.  Lat. 
nonus ;  Gr.  ii-oroi-,  Goth,  niunda  with  <Iiff.  superl. 
suffixes]  the  ninth  Sn  109  ;  f.  °i  VvA  72. 


Naviya  (adj.)  [Sk.  navya,  either  grd.  of  navate  to  praise; 
or  =  nava,  q.  v.]  praiseworthy  Miln  389. 

Navuti  (num.)  [Ved.  navati]  number  ninety  VvA  345  &  in 
comp"  eka°  91  D  11.2  (i.  e.  92  minus  i  ;  in  expr.  eka- 
navuto  kappo,  v.  I.  ekanavuti  kappe) ;  dva°  92  (see  dvi 
A  II.  cS:  B  III.) ;  PvA  19,  2  1  ;  attha°  98  ;  Sn  31 1  (diseases 
sprung  fr.  orig.  3). 

Navutiya  (adj.)  worth  ninety  J  v. 485.     Cp.  navutika. 

Nassati  (v.  intr.)  [V'ed.  nas ;  nasyati  &  naiati,  cp.  Gr. 
vfKuc,  vficpoQ  (corpse),  pUrnp  ("  overcoming  death  " 
=  nec-|-tr,  cp.  tarati) ;  Lat.  neco,  noceo,  noxius]  to 
perish,  to  be  lost  or  destroyed,  to  disappear,  come  to  an 
end  Sn  666  (na  hi  nassati  kassaci  kammag) ;  It  90  ; 
J  1.81,  116,  150;  pret.  nassar)  (prohib.)  Sn  1120,  pi. 
anassamaM  1177  ;  aor.  nsissi  A  111.54  ("i^  nassi  prohib.) ; 
J  IV.  137  (cakkhuni  °ir|su  :  the  eyes  failed);  fut.  nassi- 
sati  J  1.5  ;  cond.  nassissa  J  II.U2.  —  Cans,  naseti  (q.  v.). 
See  also  pa°. 

Nassana  (nt  )  [cp.  Sk.  na^ana]  disappearance,  loss,  destruc- 
tion A  111.54  ("dhamma  adj.  doomed  to  perish). 

Nahata  [Sk.  snata,  see  nahayati]  one  who  has  bathed 
Vin  II. 221  ;  J  1.266;  DhA  iv.232  ("kilcsata  washed  off 
moral  stain). 

Nabataka  [Ved.  snataka,  cp.  nahata  &  nahayati]  "  one  who 
has  bathed,"  a  brahmin  who  has  finished  the  studies 
M  1.280;  A  IV. 144;  Dh  422  (expl.  at  DhA  iv.232  with 
ref.  to  perfection  in  the  Buddha's  teaching :  catusacca- 
buddhataya  buddha) ;  cp.  Sn  521  (one  who  has  washed 
away  all  sin),  646. 

Nahana  (nt.)  [Sk.  snana]  bathing,  a  bath  Vin  1.47,  51  = 
11.224;  1196  (dhuva°  constant  bathing),  197;  S  1.183; 
V.390  (fig.) ;  J  1.265  ;  PvA  50  ;  Vism  27. 

-kala  bathing  time  PvA  46 ;  -kotthaka  bath-room 
DhA  111.88 ;  -garuka  fond  of  bathing  Vin  1.196 ;  -cunna 
bath  powder  (cp.  nahaniya")  DhA  1.398;  -tittha  a 
shallow  place  for  bathing  DhA  1.3  ;  111.79. 

Nahaniya  (adj.)  belonging  to  a  bath,  bath-;  in  °cunna 
bath -powder  PvA  46. 

Nahapaka  [Sk.  snapaka,  fr.  Cans,  nahapeti ;  cp.  nahapita] 
a  barber,  bath  attendant  D  1.74;  A  111.25;  DA  1. 157 
(;-ye  nahapenti);  IVA   127  (  =  kappaka). 

Nahapana  (nt.)  bathing,  washing  (trs.)  D  1.7,  12  ;  A  1.62, 
132;  11.70;  iv.54 ;  It  HI  (ucchadana-l- ) ;  VvA  305 
(udakadana-l- ). 

Nahapita  [Sk.  only  snapaka  (see  nahapaka) ;  new  forma- 
tion fr.  Cans,  nahapeti  as  n.  ag.  with  a-  theme  instead 
of  ar-,  cp.  sallakatta  for  sallakattar]  a  barber,  who  has 
also  the  business  of  preparing  &  giving  baths  (cp.  Ger. 
"badcr")  a  bath-attendant  (see  kappaka).  Barbers 
ranked  as  a  Imv  cla.ss  socially,  and  rebirtti  in  a  barber's 
family  was  considered  unfortunate.  Vin  1.249  (^pubba 
who  had  formerly  been  a  barber);  D  1.225;  J  '-'37; 
11.5  ;  111.451  ;  IV.  1 38  (eight  kahapanas  as  a  barber's  fee) ; 
DA  1.157  (-kappak.T) ;  Vv.V  2(7  ("siila  a  barber's  shop). 

Nahapeti  [Sk.  snapayati.  Cans,  of  nahapeti]  to  wash,  to 
give  a  bath,  bathe  J  1.166  ;  PvA  49  ;  VvA  68,  305. 

Nahamin  (adj.-n.)  [^nahapaka;  Kern,  Toev.  asks:  should 
it  be  nahapin  ?]  a  barber,  a  low-class  individual  1^ 
iii.i"  (  -kappaka-jatika  PvA  176). 

Nahayati  (rarely  nhayati)  [Ved.  snati  &  snayati,  siia=Gr. 
riiX'^  (to  swim),  vopni.-,  Siipfvg  (Nereid),  I'ijmii;  (island) ; 
Lat.  nare  (to  swim) ;  cp.  also  Sk.  snauti,  Gr.  I'liu,  vim; 
Goth,  sniwau]  to  bathe  (trs.  &  intr.),  to  wa.sh,  to  per- 
form an  ablution  (osp.  at  the  end  of  religious  student- 
ship or  after  the  lapse  of  a  lustrative  period)  Vin  11.280  ; 


Naharu 


185 


Nana 


J  1.263  ;  VI. 336 ;  PvA  93.  ppr.  nahayanto  (PvA  83)  & 
nahayamana  (Vin  11. 105);  iiif.  nahayitut)  (Vin  1.47; 
PvA  144);  ger.  nahayitva  (J  1.50;  vi.367;  PvA  42)  & 
nahatva  (J  1.265;  111-277 ."  DhA  111.88;  PvA  23,  62) 
(after  mourning),  82 ;  grd.  nahiiyitabba  (Vin  11.220, 
280). 

Nahara  &  Nhani  [Sk.  snayu,  Idg.  *gne  to  sew,  cp.  Gr.  vfm, 
fiitiut,  lijfia  (thread) ;  Ohg.  najan ;  also  Gr.  ycvpor 
(  =  Lat.  nervus) ;  Ags.  sinu  (  =  sinew);  Ohg.  senawa ; 
Goth.  ne|>la  =  Ags.  nSdl  (  =  needle);  Oir.  snatha 
(thread);  Ohg.  snuor  (cord)  =  Ags.  snod]  sinew,  tendon, 
muscle.  In  the  anatomy  of  the  body  n.  occupies  the 
place  between  maQsa  (flesh,  soft  flesh)  &  a^hi  (bone), 
as  is  seen  from  ster.  sequence  chavi,  camma,  magsa, 
naharu,  atthi,  atthi-mifSja  (e.  g.  at  Vin  I.  5  ;  J  111.84). 
See  also  def"  in  detail  at  SnA  246  sq.  &  KhA  47.  — 
Vin  1.25  (nh°) ;  M  1.429  (used  for  bow  strings) ;  A  1.50  ; 
111.324;  IV. 47  sq.  ("daddula),  129;  Kh  iii.  ;  Sn  194 
(atthi°)  Nd^  97  (nh°) ;  DhA  iii.iiS-;  ThA  257  (nh^) ; 
PvA  68  (atthi-camma°).  80  (camma-mar)sa°) ;  Sdhp  46, 
103. 

Nahnta  (nt.)  [Sk.  nayuta  (m.  pi.)  of  unknown  etyta.  Is 
it  the  same  as  navuti  ?  The  corresponding  v>  y>h  is 
frequent,  as  to  meaning  cp.  nava  3]  a  vast  number,  a 
myriad  Sn  677;  J  1.25.  83;  Pv  iv.i';  DhA  1.88;  PvA 
22,  265. 

Naga  [Ved.  naga ;  etym.  of  i.  perhaps  fr.  *snagh=Ags. 
snaca  (snake)  &  snacgl  (snail) ;  of  2  uncertain,  perhaps 
a  Non-Aryan  word  distorted  by  popular  analogy  to 
naga']  i .  a  serpent  or  Naga  demon,  playing  a  prominent 
part  in  Buddh.  fairy-tales,  gifted  with  miraculous 
powers  &  great  strength.  They  often  act  as  fairies  & 
are  classed  with  other  divinities  (see  devata),  with 
whom  they  are  sometimes  friendly,  sometimes  at 
enmity  (as  with  the  Garujas)  D  1.54 ;  S  111.240  sq. ; 
V.47,  63;  Bu.  1.30  (dighayuka  mahiddhiki) ;  Miln  23. 
Often  with  supanna  (Garujas) ;  J  1.64  .  DhA  11. 4  ;  PvA 
272.  Descriptions  e.  g.  at  DhA  111.231,  242  sq. ;  see  also 
cpds.  • — 2.  an  elephant,  esp.  a  strong,  stately  animal 
(thus  in  comb"  hatthi-naga  characterising  "  a  Naga 
elephant  ")  &  freq.  as  symbol  of  strength  &  endurance 
("  heroic  ").  Thus  Ep.  of  the  Buddha  A  of  Arahants. 
Popular  etymologies  of  n.  are  based  on  the  excellency  of 
this  animal  (agug  na  karoti  — he  is  faultless,  etc.):  see 
Nd'  201  =Nd^  337;  Th  I,  593;  PvA  57.  —  (a)  the 
animal  D  1.49;  S  1.16;  11. 217,  222;  111.85  ;  v.351  ; 
A  11.116;  111.156  sq. ;  Sn  543;  Vv  5*  (  =  hatthinaga 
VvA  37) ;  Pv  i.ii^.  maha°  A  iv.  107,  no.  —  (b)  fig.  = 
hero  or  saint :  S  11.277  ;  111.83  ;  M  1.151,  245  ;  Dh  320  ; 
Sn  29,  53,  166,421,518.  Of  the  Buddha  :  Sn  522,  845, 
1058,  iioi  ;  Miln  346  (Buddha").  —  3.  The  Naga -tree 
(now  called  "  iron-wood  tree,"  the  P.  meaning  "  fairy 
tree  "),  noted  for  its  hard  wood  &  great  masses  of  red 
flowers  ( =  Sk.  nagakesara,  mesua  ferrea  Lin.) :  see  cpds. 
°ruk!:ha,  "puppha,  "lata. 

-&palokita  "  elephant-look  "  (turning  the  whole  body), 
a  mark  of  the  Biicldlias  M  1.337  :  cp.  BSk.  nagavalokita 
Divy  208  ;  -danta  an  ivory  peg  or  pin,  also  used  as  a 
hook  on  a  wall  Vin  11.  t  17  (°ka  Vin  11.114,  152) ;  J  vi.382  ; 
-nataka  sn.ikes  as  actors  DhA  iv.130;  -nasuru  (f.) 
(woman)  liaving  thighs  like  an  elephant's  trunk  J  v. 297  ; 
-puppha  iron-wood  llower  Miln  283  ;  -bala  the  strength 
of  an  elephant  J  1.365;  11.15S;  -bhavana  the  world  of 
snakes  Nd'  448;  J  111.275;  I)h.\  iv.14;  -manavaka  a 
young  serpent  J  in. 376;  f.  "ika  ib.  275;  DhA  111.232  ; 
-raja  king  of  the  Nagas,  i.  e.  serpents  J  ii.i  1 1  ;  111.275  ; 
Sn  379  (Eravana,  see  detail  SnA  368) ;  DhA  1.359 ; 
III. 231.  ^4^  sq.  (Ahicchatta) ;  iv.129  sq.  (Pannaka) ; 
-rukkha  the  iron-wood  tree  J  1.35  (cp.  M  Vastu  11.249) ; 
-lata^rukkha  J  i.So  (the  Buddha's  toothpick  made  of 
its  wood).  232;  DhA  11.211  ("dantakatfha  toothpick); 
-vatfa  habits  of  serpents  Nd'  92.  also  adj.  "ika  ibid.  89  ; 
-Tana  elephant -grove  Dh  324;  DhA  iv.15;  -vanika  el. 


hunter  M  1. 175;  in. 132  ;  -hata  one  who  strikes  the  el. 
(viz.  the  Buddha)  Vin  11. 195. 

NSgara  [Sk.  nSgara,  see  nagara]  a  citizen  J  1.150  ;  iv.404  ; 
V.385  ;  Davs  11.85  ;  VvA  31  ;  PvA  19 ;  DhA  1.41. 

Nfigarika  (adj.)  [Sk.  nagarika]  citizen-like,  urbane,  polite 
DA  1.282. 

Nataka  [Sk.  nataka;  see  naccati]  i.  (m.)  a  dancer,  actor, 
player  J  1.206;  v.373  ;  DhA  111.88;  iv.59,  130;  naja- 
kitthi  a  dancing-girl,  nautch-girl  DhA  111.166;' VvA 
131.  —  2.  (nt.)  a  play,  pantomime  J  1.59;  v. 279,  also 
used  coll.  =  dancing-woman  J  1.59  (?)  IJ.395. 

Ratha  [Ved.  natha,  nSth,  to  which  Goth.  ni|)an  (to  support), 
Ohg.  ginida  (grace)]  protector,  refuge,  help  A  v. 23,  89; 
Dh  160  (atta  hi  attano  n.),  380  ;  Sn  1 131  (Nd'hEis  naga) ; 
DhA  IV. 117;  PvA  1.  lokanatha  Saviour  of  the  world 
(Ep.  of  the  Buddha)  Sn  995  ;  PvA  42.  —  anatna 
helpless,  unprotected,  poor  J  1.6  (nathSnatha  rich  & 
poor) ;  PvA  3  (°salap  oor  house)  65.     Cp.  nadhati. 

Nada  [Sk.  nada,  see  nadati]  loud  sound,  roaring,  roar 
J  1. 19  (siha°),  50  (koi\ca°),  i5o'{mah5°).     Cp.  pa°. 

Nidi  (f.)  =  nada,  loud  sound,  thundering  (fig.)  Vv  64'°. 

Nadhati  [Sk.  nadhate  =  nathate  (see  natha),  only  in 
nadhamana,  cp.  RV  x.65,  5  ;  nadhas]  to  have  need  of, 
to  be  in  want  of  (c.  gen.)  J  v.90  (Com.  expl'  by  upatap- 
pati  milayati ;  thinking  perhaps  of  nalo  va  chinno). 

Nanatta  (nt.  m.)  [Sk.  nanatva ;  abstr.  fr.  nana]  diversity, 
variety,  manifoldness,  inultiformity,  distraction ;  all 
.sorts  of  (opp.  ekatta,  cp.  M  1.364  :  "  the  multiformity  of 
sensuous  impressions,"  M.A.).  Enum"  of  diversity  as 
nanatta,  viz.  dhatu°  phassa"  vedana"  sani\a°  sankappa" 
chanda"  parilaha"  pariyesana"  labha"  D  111.289  ;  S  11.140 
sq.,  cp.  IV. 113  sq.,  284  sq.  ;  Ps  1.87. — A  iv.385  ;  Ps 
1.63  sq.,  88  sq. ;  S  11. 115  (vedana") ;  Ps  1.91  (samapatti" 
&  vihara") ;  J  11.265.  In  composition,  substituted  some- 
times for  nana.     Cp.  Dialogues  1.14,  n.  2. 

-katha  desultory  talk,  gossip  D  1.8;  (  =  niratthaka- 
katha  DA  1,90) ;  S  v. 420  ;  -kaya  (adj.)  having  a  variety 
of  bodies  or  bodily  states  (comb''  with  or  opp.  to 
ekatta',  nanatta-saiinin,  &  ekatta-saiiiiin),  appl.  to 
manussa,  deva,  vinipatika  (cp.  nava  sattavasS)  A 
iv.39  sq.  =Nd«  570'';  D  111.253,  263,  282;  -safifia  con- 
sciousness of  diversity  (Rh.  D.  :  "  idea  of  multiformity," 
Dial.  II.  119;  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  *'  consciousness  of  the  mani- 
fold ")  M  1.3  ;  S  IV.  1 13  sq.  ;  D  111.224,  262  sq.,  282; 
A  1. 41,  267;  11.184;  III. 306;  Ps  11.172;  Dhs  265  (cp. 
trsl.  p.  72)  ;  Vbh  342,  369  ;  -safiflin  having  a  varying 
consciousness  (cp.  °kaya),  D  1.31  (cp.  DA  1.119)  183; 
111.263. 

Nanattata  (f)  [2nd  abstr.  to  nana]  =  nanatta,  diversity  (of 
states  of  mind).  Seven  sorts  at  Vbh  425  :  arammana" 
manasikara^  chanda"  panidha"  adhimokkha"  abhinihara" 
pafiiia". 

Nana  (adv.)  [Ved.  nana,  a  redupl.  na  (emphatic  particle, 
see  na')  "  so  and  .so,"  i.  e.  various,  of  all  kinds]  variously, 
differently,  i.  (abs.)  A  1.13S  (on  difierent  sides,  viz. 
right  <left);  Sn  878  (^na  ekai)  SnA  554  ;  =vividhai) 
annonnar)  puthu  na  ekag  Nd'  285),  884  sq.  —  2.  more 
frequently  in  cpds.,  as  first  part  of  adj.  or  n.  where  it 
may  be  trsl '  as  "  ditlerent.  divers,  all  kinds  of  "  etc. 
Before  a  double  cons,  the  final  a  is  shortened  :  nanagga 
(for  nana-f  agga),  nanappakara  etc.  see  below. 

-agga  (rasa)  all  the  choicest  delicacies  J  1.266  ("bho- 
jana.  of  food);  vi.366 ;  Vvh  155  ("dibbabhojana) ; 
-ftdhimuttikata  diversity  of  dispositions  DA  1  .^4  ; 
Nett  98  ;  -avudha  (pi.)  various  weapons  J  1.150  ;  -karana 
diflerence,  diversity  Vin  1.339  (sangha") ;  M  11.128; 
cp.  Divy  222  ;  -gotta  of  all  kinds  of  descent  Pv  11. 9'" ; 
-cittaof  varying  mind  J  1,295  (itthiyo);  -jana  all  kinds 


Nabhi 


i86 


Nava 


of  folk  Sn  I  lo' ;  Nd'  308  (puthu°) ;  -titthiya  of  var.  sects 
D  III.  16  sq. ;  -pakkara  various,  manifold  J  1.52  (sakuna), 
127.  278  (ptialani) ;  DAi.  148  (avudha) ;  PvA  50,  123, 
135  :  -ratta  multi-coloured  Sn  287  ;  J  vi.230  ;  -rasa  (pi.) 
all  kinds  of  dainties  Pv  11. 9I'  ;  -vada  difference  of  opinion 
D  1.236 ;  -yidha  divers,  various,  motley  PvA  53,  96, 
113,  and  passim;  -sai]vasaka  living  in  a  different  part, 
or  living  apart  Vin  1.134  sq-.  (opp.  samana"),  321  ;  11. 162. 

Nabhi  &  Nabhl  (f.)  [Vedic  nabhi,  nabhi;  Av.  naba ;  Gr. 
up0aXiij  (navel) ;  Lat.  umbo  &  umbilicus ;  Oir.  imbliu 
(navel);  Ags.  nafu  ;  Ohg.  naba  (nave),  Ger.  nabel  =  E. 
nave  &  navel]  i.  the  navel  A  111.240  ;  J  1.238  ;  DA  1.254 
(where  it  is  said  that  the  Vessa  (Vaisyas)  have  sprung 
from  the  navel  of  Brahma).  —  2.  the  nave  of  a  wheel 
Vv  64*  (pi.  nabhyo  &  nabbho  SS  =  nabhiyo  VvA  276) ; 
J  1.64  ;  IV. 277  ;  Miln  1 15. 

Rama  (nt.)  [Vedic  naman,  cp.  Gr.  ovofia  (av-wi'v^iof  without 
name) ;  Lat.  nomen  ;  Goth,  namo ;  Ags.  noma,  Ohg. 
name]  name.  —  i.  Literal,  nom.  namar)  S  1.39  ;  Sn  808  ; 
J  II.  13 1  ;  Miln  27  ;  ace.  namai)  PvA  145  (likhi :  he  wrote 
her  name).  —  namar)  karoti  to  give  a  name  Sn  344  ; 
Nd^  466  (n'  etar)  namag  matara  katai)  on  "  Bhagava")  ; 
J  1.203,  262  (w.  double  ace).  —  namai)  garihSti  to  call 
by  name,  to  enumerate  J  iv.402  ;  PvA  18  (v.  1.  BE 
namato  g.).  Definitions  at  Vin  iv.6  (two  kinds  :  hina° 
&  ukkattha")  and  at  Vism  528  (  =  namanalakkhana). 
—  2.  Specified,  nama  as  metaphysical  term  is  opposed 
to  rupa,  &  comprises  the  4  immaterial  factors  of 
an  individual  (arupino  khandhS,  viz.  vedana  saiiiia 
sankhara  vififiaija ;  see  khandha  II.  B").  These  as  the 
noetic  pripciple  comb''  with  the  material  principle 
make  up  the  individual  as  it  is  distinguished  by  "  name 
&  body"  from  other  individuals.  Thus  namarupa  = 
individuality,  individual  being.  These  two  are  in- 
separable (aiifiamaftiiupanissita  ete  dhammS,  ekato  va 
uppajjanti  Miln  49).  S  1.35  (yattha  n.  ca  rupafi  ca 
asesag  uparujjhati  tar)  te  dhammai)  idh'  aiiiiaya  acchidui) 
bhavabandhanag) ;  Sn  1036,  i  ico  ;  Nd'  435  =Nd'  339 
(nama  =  cattaro  arupino  khandha);  DhA  iv.ico  (on 
Dh  367) :  vedanadinar)  catunnag  rupakkhandhassa  ca 
ti  pancannag  khandhanag  vasena  pavattag  nJmaru- 
pag  ;  DhsA  52  ;  namarupa-duke  namakaraijafthena 
namatthena  namanatthena  ca  namag  ruppanatfhena 
rupag.  Cp.  D  1.223  :  "-32.  .14.  56,  62  ;  S  1.12  (tanhi  n- 
rupe),  23  (n-rupasmig  asajjamana) ;  11.3,  4,  66  (n- 
rupassa  avakkanti),  loi  sq.  (id.)  ;  M  1.53  ;  A  1.83,  176; 
111.4CO  ;  IV. 385  ("arammana) ;  v. 51,  56;  Sn  355,  537, 
756,  909;  Dh  367;  It  35;  Ps  1. 193;  11.72,  112  sq.  ; 
Vbh  294;  Nett  15  sq.,  28,  69;  Miln  46.  Nama-I- rupa 
form  an  elementary  pair  D  111.212  ;  Kh  iv.  Also  in  the 
Paticca-samuppada  (q.  v.),  where  it  is  said  to  be  caused 
(conditioned)  by  viniiana  &  to  cause  salayatana  (the 
6  senses).  D  11.34  ;  Vm  i.i  sq.  ;  S  II. 6  sq.  ;  Sn  872  (naman 
ca  rupafica  paficca  phassa  ;  see  in  detail  expl"*  at  Nd' 
276).  Synonymous  with  namarupa  is  namakaya : 
Sn  1074;  Nd2  338;  Ps  1. 183;  Nett  27,  41,  69,  77.— 
In  this  connection  to  be  mentioned  are  var.  definitions 
of  nama  as  the  principle  or  distinguishing  mark  ("  label  ") 
of  the  individual,  given  by  Com",  e.  g.  Nd'  109,  127; 
Kh.^  78  ;  with  which  op.  Bdhgh's  speculation  concerning 
the  connotation  of  nama  mentioned  by  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  at 
Dhs.  trsl.  p.  341.  —  3.  Use  of  Cases.  Instr.  namena  by 
name  PvA  i  (Petavatthu  ti  n);  Mhvs  vii.32  (Sirisa- 
vatthu  n.).  — •  ace.  nama  (the  older  form,  cp.  Sk.  nama) 
by  name  S  1.33.  235  (Anoma°) ;  Sn  153,  177  ;  J  1.59  (ko 
nam'  esa  "who  by  name  is  this  one  "=  what  is  his 
name),  149  (namena  Nigrodhamigaraja  n.),  203  (kigsaddo 
nama  esaj  ;  11.4;  111.1.S7;  vi.364  (ka  nama  tvag).  See 
also  evagnama,  kinnama :  &  cp.  the  foil. — 4.  nama 
(ace.)  as  adv.  is  used  as  emphatic  particle  =  just,  indeed, 
for  sure,  certainly  J  1222;  11.133,  160,  326;  lli.gn  ; 
PvA  6,  13,  63  etc.  Therefore  freq.  in  exclamation  & 
exhortation  ("  please,"  certainly)  J  VI.3G7 ;  DhA 
III. 1 71  ;    PvA   29    (n     detha  do  give);  in  comb"  with 


interr.  pron.  =now,  then  J  1. 221  (kig  n.),  266  (kathag 
n.) ;  111.55  (kii)) ;  Kh  iv.  (ekag  n.  kig);  with  neg.  =not 
at  all,  certainly  not  J  1.222  ;  11. 352  ;  111. 126  etc.  —  Often 
further  emphasised  or  emphasising  other  part.  ;  e.  g. 
pi  (— api)  nama  really,  just  so  Vin  1.16  (seyyatha  p.  n.) ; 
Sn  p.  15  (id.);  Vv.4  22  (read  nama  karo)  ;  PvA  76; 
''PP'  (  =  api)  eva  n.  thus  indeed,  forsooth  Vin  1.16; 
It  8g  =  M  1.460:  J  1. 168;  Pv  II. 2'  (=api  nama  PvA  80); 
eva  nama  in  truth  PvA  2  ;  nama  tava  certainly  DhA 
1.392,  etc. 

-kamma  giving  a  name,  naming,  denomination  Dhs 
1306;  Bdhd  83;  -karana  name-giving,  "christening" 
DhA  11.87  '■  -gahana  receiving  a  name,  "  being  chris- 
tened "  J  1.262  (°divasa)  -gotta  ancestry,  lineage  S  1.43 
(°g  na  jirati) ;  Sn  648,  Nd^  385  (matapettikag  n.) ; 
-dhe3rya  assigning  a  name,  name-giving  J  111.305 ; 
IV. 449  ;  V.496  ;  Dhs  1306.  -pada  see  pada.  -matta  a 
mere  name  Miln  25. 

Namaka  (adj.)  [fr.  nama]  i.  (-°)  by  nam.e  S  11.282  (Thera°) ; 
PvA  67,  96  (kanha°).  —  2.  consisting  of  a  mere  name, 
i.  e.  mere  talk,  nonsense,  ridiculous  D  1.240. 

Nameti  at  Sn  1143  (Fsb.)  is  to  be  read  as  napenti. 
Otherwise  see  under  namati. 

Nayaka  [BSk.  nayaka  (cp.  anayaka  without  guide  AvS 
1. 2 10);  fr.  neti;  cp.  naya]  a  leader,  guide,  lord,  mostly 
as  Ep.  of  the  Buddha  (loka°  "  Lord  of  the  World  ") 
Sn  991  (loka°) ;  Mhvs  vii.i  (id.);  Sdhp  491  (tilokassa) ; 
bala-nayaka  gang  leaders  J  1.103. 

Naraca  [Sk.  naraca ;  perhaps  for  'nadaca  &  conn,  with 
nalika,  a  kind  of  arrow,  to  nala]  an  iron  weapon,  an 
arrow  or  javelin  M  1.429  ;  J  111.322  ;  Miln  105,  244,  418. 
-valaya  an  iron  ring  or  collar  (?)  Mhvs  vii.20  (Com. 
"  vattita-assanaraca-pasa  "  =a  noose  formed  by  bend- 
ing the  ends  of  the  n.  into  a  circle). 

NSri  (f.)  [Sk.  narl  to  nara  man,  orig.  "  the  one  belonging 
to  the  man"]  woman,  wife,  female  Sn  301,  836;  Dh 
284  ;  J  1.60  ;  III. 395  ;  iv.396  ("gana) ;  Vv  6',  44"  ;  Pv  1.9' 
(=itthi  PvA  44).  pi.  nariyo  (Sn  299,  304,  703),  &. 
nSriyo  (Sn  703  v.  1.  BB ;  Pv  11. 9*').  Comb''  with  nara 
as  naranari,  male  &  female  (angels),  e.  g.  -Vv  53* ; 
Pv  II.  11'  (see  nara). 

Nala  &  Ni)a  (nt.)  [Sk.  nala,  see  nala]  a  hollow  stalk,  esp. 
that  of  the  water  lily  A  iv.169;  J  1.392  (°pana  v.  1. 
°vana) ;  VvA  43.     See  also  na|ika  &  nali. 

Nilao  (adv.)  [  =  na  alag]  not  enough,  insufficient  It  37; 
J  1. 190  ;  DA  1. 167. 

Na}ika  (f.)  [Sk.  nadika  &  nalika]  a  stalk,  shaft ;  a  tube, 
pipe  or  cylinder  ifor  holding  anything ;  a  small  measure 
of  capacity  Vin  11. 1 16  (suci°,  cp.  sucighara,  needle-case) ; 
D  1.7  (  =  bhesajja°  DA  1.89);  A  1.2 10;,  J  1.123  (taij^ula" 
a  naji  full  of  rice) ;  vi.366  (addha-n-matta) ;  Nd*  229. 
Cp.  pa°. 

-odana  a  nali  measure  of  boiled  rice  S  1.82  ;  DhA 
IV.  17:  -gabbha  an  (inner)  room  of  tubiflar  shape  Vin 
11.152. 

Na)ikera  [Sk.  n^rikera,  narikela,  nalikera,  nulikela : 
dialect,  of  uncertain  etym  ]  the  coconut  tree  Vv  44'-' ; 
J  IV.159;  V.384 ;  DA  1.83;  VvA  162. 

Nalikerika  (adj.)  belonging  to  the  coconut  tree  J  v. 417. 

Na}I  (f)  Sc  (in  cpds.)  naU  [Sk.  nadi,  see  nala]  a  hollow  stalk, 
tube,  pipe ;  also  a  measure  of  capacity  Vin  1.249 ;  A 
III. 49 ;  J  1.98  (suvanna"),  124  (tandula°),  419;  in. 220 
(kan4a°  a  quiver) ;  iv.67  ;  DhA  11. 193  (tela"),  257.  Cp. 
pa". 

-patta  a  covering  for  the  head,  a  cap  J  vi.370.  444 
(text  "vatfa) ;  -matta  as  much  as  a  tube  holds  A  11.199  ; 
PvA  283  ;  DhA  11.70  ;  J  1.4 19  (of  aja-landika). 

Nava  (f.)  [Vcd.  nauh  &  nava,  Gr.  vcivf,  Lat.  navis]  a  boat, 
ship   Vin    111.49    (q.    v.    for   definition    it    description) ; 


j\ 


Navayika 


187 


Nikarana 


S  1. 106  (eka-rukkhika) ;  in. 155  -v. 51  =A  iv.127  (sa- 
muddika  "  a  liner  ") ;  A  :i.2co  ;  ni.368  :  Sn  321,  770,  771  ; 
Dh  369  (metaphor  of  the  human  body);  J  1.239; 
II. 1 12;  III. 126;  188;  IV. 2,  21,  138;  V.75  (with  "  5C0  " 
passengers).  433;  vi.160  (  =  navya  canal?  or  read 
nalai)  ?)  ;  Vv  6^  (  =  pota  VvA  42,  with  pop.  etym.  "  satte 
net!  ti  nava  ti  vuccati  ") ;  Pv  111.3'  (=doni  PvA  189) ; 
Miln  261  (kg  cubits  long);  Davs  iv.42  ;  PvA  47,  53; 
Sdhp  321.     In  simile  Vism  690. 

-tittha  a  ferry  J  111.230  ;  -saiicarana  (a  place  for)  the 
traffic  of  boats,  a  port  Miln  359. 

Navayika  [Sk.  navaja=Gr.  vavriyoc,  cp.  Lat.  navigo]  a 
mariner,  sailor,  skipper  Miln  365. 

Navika  [Sk.  navika]  i.  a  sailor,  mariner  J  11. 103;  iv.142; 
Miln  359;  Davs  iv.43  (captain).  —  2.  a  ferryman 
J  ii.iii  ;  III. 230  (Avariya-pita.). 

Navatika  (adj.)  [fr.  navuti]  90  years  old  J  in. 395  (°a  itthi) ; 
SnA  172. 

Nasa  [Sk.  nlUa,  see  nassatij  destruction,  ruin,  death  J  1.3, 
256;  Sdhp  58,  319.  Usuadly  vi°,  also  adj.  vinasaka. 
Cp.  panassati. 

Nasana  (nt.)  [Sk.  nasana]  destruction,  abandoning,  ex- 
pulsion, in  "antika  (adj.)  a  bhikkbu  who  is  under  the 
penalty  of  expulsion  Vin  1.255. 

Ifi8&  (f.)  [Vedic  n&sk  (du.) ;  Lat.  niris,  Ohg.  nasa,  Ags. 
nasu]  I.  the  nose,  Sn  198,  608.  —  2.  the  trunk  (of  an 
elephant)  J  v. 297  (naga'-uru) ;  Sdhp  153. 

-pu\a.  "  nose-cup  "  ;  the  outside  of  the  nose,  the 
nostril  J  vi.74;  Vism  195  (nasa°),  264  (nasa°,  but  KhA 
67  nisa"),  283  (nasa°).  -yata  wind,  i.  e.  breath  from 
the  nostrils  J  111.276. 

NSsika  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  nisikya]  belonging  to  the  nose,  nasal, 
in  °sota  the  nostril  or  nose  (orig.  "  sense  of  smell  ") 
D  1. 106  ;  Sn  p.  108. 

Nilitaka  (adj.)  [see  n&sa  &  nSlseti]  one  who  is  ejected  Vin 
IV.  1 40  (of  a  bhikkhu). 

RiMti  [Sk.  niUayati,  Caus  of  nassati,  q.  v.]  i.  to  destroy, 
spoil,  ruin;  to  kill  J  1.59;  11. 105,  150;  in. 279,  418. — 
2.  to  atone  for  a  fault  (with  abl.)  Vin  1.85,  86,  1 73  etc.  — 
Cp.  vi°. 

Hftha  (nt.)  [cp.  nayhati,  naddha]  armour  J  1.358  (sabba°- 
sannaddha).     Cp.  onaha. 

Hi"  [Sk.  ni-  &  nih-,  insep.  prefixes:  (a)  ni  down=Av.  ni, 
cp.  Gr.  vfioc  lowland,  vdaros  the  lowest,  hindmost ; 
Lat.  nidus  ('ni-zdos:  place  to  sit  down  =  nest);  Ags. 
neol,  nider  =  E.  nether;  Goth.  nidar  =  Ohg.  nidar ;  also 
Sk.  nica,  nipa  etc.  —  (b)  nib  out,  prob.  fr.  'seni  &  to 
Lat.  sine  without].  Nearly  all  (ultimately  prob.  all) 
words  under  this  heading  arc  cpds.  with  the  pref.  ni.  — 
A.  Forms.  1.  Pali  ni°  combines  the  two  prefixes  ni  & 
nis  (nir).  They  are  outwardly  to  be  distinguished 
inasmuch  as  ni  is  usually  followed  by  a  single  consonant 
(except  in  forms  where  double  cons,  is  usually  restored 
in  composition,  like  ni-kkhipati  =  ni -f- ksip  ;  nissita  = 
n^-^  gri.  Sometimes  the  double  cons,  is  merely  graphic 
or  due  to  analogy,  esp.  in  words  where  ni-  is  contrasted 
with  ud-  ("  up  "),  as  nikkujja>  ukkujja,  niggilati> 
uggilati,  ninnamati>unnamati).  On  the  other  hand  a 
comp"  with  nis  is  subject  to  the  rules  of  assimilation, 
viz.  either  doubling  of  cons.  (nibbhoga  =  niK-bhoga) 
where  w  is  represented  by  bb  (nibbii>na  fr.  nir-vindati), 
or  lengthening  of  ni  to  ni  (niyadeti  as  well  as  niyy" ; 
niharati=nir-|- har),  or  single  cons,  in  the  special  cases 
of  r  &  ▼  (niroga  besides  niroga  for  nirroga,  cp.  duratta 
>durakkha;  nlvetheti  =  nibbetheti,  nivareti  =  ♦niwa- 
reti  =  nlvareti).  Before  a  vowel  the  sandhi-cons.  r  is 
restored:  nir-aya,  nir-upadhi  etc.  —  2.  Both  ni  &  nis 


are  base-prefixes  only,  &  of  stable,  well-defined  character, 
i.  e.  never  enter  comb'"  with  other  prefixes  as  first 
(modifying)  components  in  verb-function  (like  sag,  vi 
etc.),  although  nis  occurs  in  such  comb"  in  noun-cpds. 
negating  the  whole  term  :  nir-upadhi,  nis-sagsaya  etc.  — 
3.  ni  is  freq.  emphasised  by  sag  as  sagni"  (tud,  dha, 
pat,  sad) ;  nis  most  freq.  by  abhi  as  abhinis°  (nam,  pad, 
vatt,  har). 

B.  Meanings,  i.  ni  (with  secondary  derivations  like 
nica  "  low  ")  is  a  verb-pref.  only,  i.  e.  it  characterises 
action  with  respect  to  its  direction,  which  is  that  of 
(a)  a  downward  motion  (opp.  abhi  &  ud)  ;  (b)  often 
implying  the  aim  (  =  down  into,  on  to.  cp.  Lat.  sub  in 
subire,  or  pref.  ad°) ;  or  (c)  the  reverting  of  an  upward 
motion  =  back  (identical  with  b) ;  e.  g.  (a)  ni-dha  (put 
down).  °kkhip  (throw  d.),°guh  (hide  d),  "ci  (heap  up), 
"pad  (fall  d.),  "sad  (sit  d.) ;  (b)  ni-ratta  (a/-tached  to), 
°mant  (speak  to) ;  °yuj  (ap-point),  °ved  (ad-dress),  °sev 
(be  devoted  to)  etc.  ;  (c)  ni-vatt  (turn  back).  —  2.  nis 
(a)  as  verb-pref.  it  denotes  the  directional  "  out  "  with 
further  development  to  "  away  from,  opposite,  without," 
pointing  out  the  finishing,  completion  or  vanishing  of 
an  action  &  through  the  latter  idea  often  assuming  the 
meaning  of  the  reverse,  disappearance  or  contrary  of  an 
action  =  "  un  "  (Lat.  dis-),  e.  g.  nikkhamati  (to  go  out 
from)  opp.  pavisati  (to  enter  into),  °ccharati  (nis  to 
car  to  go  forth),  "ddhamati  (throw  out),  "pajjati  (result 
from),  "bbattati  (vatt  spring  out  from),  niharati  (take 
out),  nirodhati  (break  up,  destroy).  —  (b)  as  noun- 
pref .  it  denotes  "  being  without  "  or  "  not  having  "  = 
E.  -less,  e.  g.  niccola  without  clothes,  °ttanha  (without 
thirst),  "ppurisa  (without  a  man),  "pphala  (without 
fruit) ;  niccala  motion-less,  °kkaruija  (heartless),  °ddosa 
(fault"),  "magsa  (flesh"),  "sagsaya  (doubt")  nirattha 
(useless),  "bbhaya  (fear").  —  Bdhgh  evidently  takes 
ni-  in  meaning  of  nis  only,  when  defining ;  ni-saddo 
abhavag  dipeti  Vism  495. 

Nikacca  see  nikati. 

Nikattha  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  nikr;(a,  ni-f  kasati]  brought  down, 
debased,  low.  As  one  kind  of  puggala  (n-kaya-l-  n- 
citta)  A  11.137.  'oc.  nikatthe  (adv.)  near  J-  111.438  = 
ThA  105  (v.  33)  (=santike  J  in. 438). 

Nikawika  (adj.)  under  (4)  ears,  secret,  cp.  catukkavaa 
J  III. 124;  nt.  adv.  secretly  Vin  iv.270,  271. 

Nikata  (adj.)  [Sk.  nikrta.  ni-(- karoti  "done  down"] 
deceived,  cheated  M  1.5 11  ( -(- vaucita  paladdha) ;  S 
IV. 307  (-(-vancita  paluddha). 

Nikati  (f.)  [Sk.  nikrti,  see  prec.]  fraud,  deceit,  cheating 
D  1.5  (  =  DA  1.80  patirupakena  vailcanag) ;  in. 176;  Sn 
242  (  =  nirasag-karapag  SnA  286);  J  1.323;  P^  111.9* 
(-)- vaiicana) ;  Pug  19,  23,  58;  VvA  114;  PvA  211  (paji- 
rQpadassanena  paresag  vikaro).  —  instr.  nikatiyS  (metri 
causa)  J  1.223,  nikatya  J  11.183,  nikacca  S  1.24.  Cp. 
nekatika. 

Nikanta  (adj.)  [Sk.  nikrtta  &  nikrntita  (cp.  Divy  53/,  539), 
ni-t-  kantati'i  cut,  (ab-)razed  M  1.364  (of  a  fleshless 
bone). 

Nikantati  [Sk.  ni-kn^tati,  see  kantati^  to  cut  down,  to  cut 
up,  cut  off  PvA  2 10  (pitthi-magsani  the  flesh  of  the 
back,  v.  I.  SS  for  ukkant") ;  Pgdp  29. 

Nikanti  (f.)  [Sk.  nikanti,  ni-(-kamati]  desire,  craving, 
longing  for,  wish  Th  i.  20;  Ps  11.72,  101;  Dhs  1059, 
1 136  ;  Vism  239,  580  ;  DhsA  369  ;  DhA  iv.63  ;  DA  i.i  10  ; 
Davs  in. 40. 

Nikara  [Sk.  nikara,  ni-l-  karoti]  a  multitude  Davs  v.25 
(jatipuppha"). 

Nikaraoa  (f.  or  is  it  °ag  ?)=nikati  (fraud)  Pug  19,  23  (as 
syn.  of  maya). 


Nikaroti 


i88 


Nikkasava 


Nikaroti  [Sk.  nikaroti,  iii+  karoti]  to  bringdown,  humiliate, 
to  deceive,  cheat  Sn  138  (nikubbctha  Pot.  =vanceyya 
KhA  247).     pp.  nikata  (q.  v.). 

Nikasu  [Sk.  nikasa.  ni+kasati]  a  whetstone  Davs  111.87 
(°opala). 

Nikasava  (adj.)  [Sk.  nijkasaya  nis+ kasava  see  kasaya 
2'']  free  from  impurity  Vin  1.3 ;  opp.  anikkasava  (q.  v.) 
Dhgas. 

Nikama  [Vedic  nikama,  ni+  kama]  desire,  pleasure,  long- 
ing :  only  in  cpds.  ;  see  nanikama. 

-kara  read  by  Kem  (Toev.  174)  at  Th  i,  12  71  for  na 
kamakara  but  unjustified  (see  SnA  on  Sn  351)  ;  -labhin 
gaining  pleasure  S  11.278  ;  M  1.354  '•  'i'-'  'O  ;  A  11.23,  3^  ; 
Pug  II,  .12  ;  Vbh  332. 

Nikamana  (f.)  =  nikanti,  Dhs  1059. 

Nikameti  [Sk.  ni-kamayati,  ni+  kameti]  to  crave,  desire, 
strive  after,  ppr  nikamayar)  S  1.122,  &  nikamayamana 
Vin  II.  108.     Cp.  nikanta  &  nikanti. 

Nikaya  [Sk.  nikaya,  ni+kaya]  collection  ("  body  ")  assem- 
blage, class,  group ;  i .  generally  (always  -°) :  eka°  one 
class  of  beings  DhsA  66  ;  tiracchana"  the  animal  kingdom 
S  III.  1 52;  deva°  the  assembly  of  the  gods,  the  gods 
D  II. 261  (60);  M  1.102  ;  S  VI, 180;  A  111,249;  IV. 461  ; 
PvA  1 36 ;  satta°  the  world  of  beings,  the  animate 
creation,  a  class  of  living  beings  S  11. 2,  42,  44  ;  M  1.49 
(tesag  tesag  sattanar)  tamhi  tamhi  s. — nikkye  of  all 
beings  in  each  class) ;  Vbh  137;  PvA  134.  —  2.  especially 
the  coll.  of  Buddhist  Suttas,  as  tfie  5  sections  of  the 
Suttanta  Pifaka,  viz.  Digha°,  Majjhima",  Sagyutja", 
Anguttara"  (referred  to  as  D.M.S.A.  in  Dictionary- 
quotations),  Khuddaka" ;  enum''  PvA  2  ;  Anvs  p.  35  ; 
DhA  11.95  (dhammasanag  aruyha  pancahi  nikayehi 
atthaa  ca  karaoaii  ca  akaddhitva).  The  five  Nikayas 
are  enum''  also  at  Vism  711;  one  is  referred  to  at  SnA 
195  (pariyapunati  master  by  heart).  See  further 
details  under  pifaka.     Cp.  nekayika. 

Nikara  [Sk.  nikara  in  diff.  meaning,  ni-l-  kara]  service, 
humility  J  in.  120  (nikara-pakara,  prob.  to  be  read 
nipaccakara,  q.  v.). 

Nikasa  (n.-adj.)  [ni-)-ka4]  appearance;  adj.  of  appearance, 
like  J  v. 87  (-°),  corresp.  to  "avakasa. 

Nikasin  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  nika^in;  fr.  ni-{-kasati]  "  shining," 
resembling,  like  J  in. 320  (aggi-nikasina  suriyena). 

Nikiwa  (adj.)  [Sk.  *nikirna,  pp.  ni-t-kirati,  cp.  kirapa] 
"  strewn  down  into,"  hidden  away,  sheltered  J  111.529. 

NiUlita  (adj.)  [Sk.  *nikri<lita,  pp.  of  nikridayati,  ni-H 
kilati]  engrossed  in  play  J  vi.31. 

NikQitavin  (adj.)  [fr.  ni-kilati]  playful,  playing  or  dallying 
with  (c.  loc),  finding  enjoyment  in  S  1.9  (a°  kamesu) ; 
IV.  1 10  (id.). 

Nikuija  see  nikkujja,  q.  v.  also  for  nikujjita  which  is  more 
correctly  spelt  k  than  kk  (cp.  Trenckner,  Preface  to 
Majjhima  Nikaya  &  see  ni°  A  i). 

Niknjiati  [ni-l-  kujjati,  see  kujja  &  cp.  nikkujja]  to  be  bent 
down  on,  i.  e.  to  attach  importance  to,  to  lay  weight  on 
D  1.53  (as  vv.  11.  to  be  preferred  to  text  reading  nikkujj". 
cp.  nikujja)  ;  DA  i.i6o  (nikk°). 

Niknfiia  [Sk.  nikunja,  ni-l-  kufija]  a  hollow  down,  a  glen, 
thicket  Davs  iv.32. 

Nikiijati  [ni-l-kujati  "to  sing  on"]  i.  to  chirp,  warble, 
hum  Th  I,  1270  (nikujai)) :  ThA  211  (nikuji).  —  2.  to 
twang,  jingle,  rustle  J  in. 323.  —  pp.  nikujita.  —  Cp. 
abhi°. 


Nikojita  [see  nikujati]  sung  forth,  warbled  out  Th  2,  261. 

Nikuta  [ni-t-kuta  to  kufa*]  a  corner,  top,  climax  J  1.278 
(arahatt3°,  where  usually  arahattena  kutai)  etc.) ; 
DA  1.307  (id.). 

Niketa  [Sk.  niketa  settlement,  ni-(-cinati]  i.  house,  abode 
Dh  91  (=alaya  DhA  11. 170).  —  2.  (fig.)  company, 
association.  (In  this  sense  it  seems  to  be  interpreted 
as  belonging  to  ketu  "  sign,  characteristic,  mark,"  and 
niketa-sarin  would  have  to  be  taken  as  "  following  the 
banner  or  flag  of  .  .  .,"  i.  e.  belonging  or  attached  to, 
i.  e.  a  follower  of,  one  who  is  devoted  to:)  a°  not  living 
in  company,  having  no  house  Sn  207  ;  Miln  244  (-(-  nirS- 
laya). 

-vasin  (a°)  not  living  in  a  house,  not  associating  with 
anybody  Miln  201  ;  -sayana  =  °\(asin  Miln  361  ;  -sarin 
(a°)  "  wandering  homeless  "  or  "  not  living  in  company," 
i.  e.  not  associating  with,  not  a  follower  of  ...  S  111.9 
sq.  =Ndi  198;  Sn  844  =  8  111.9 ;  SnA  255=8  in. 10; 
Sn  970  (=Nd'  494  q.  v.). 

Niketavant  (adj.)  [to  niketa]  parting  company  with  Miln 

288  (kamma°). 

Niketin  (adj.)  having  an  abode,  being  housed,  living  in 
Sn  422  (kosalesu) ;  J  in. 432  (duma-s3.kha-niketini  f.). 

Nikkankha  (adj.)  [Sk.  nih^anka,  nis-l- kankha,  adj.  of 
kankha,  cp.  kankhin]  not  afraid,  fearless,  not  doubting, 
confident,  sure  J  1.58.     Cp.  nissagsaya. 

Nikkankha  (f.)  [Sk.  nih^anka,  nio-l- kankha]  fearlessness, 
state  of  confidence,  trust  (cp.  nibbicikiccha)  S  v.22i. 

Nikka44hati  [Sk.  ni^karsati,  nis-l-  kasati,  cp.  ka44'>ati]  to 
throw  out  Vin  iv.274  (Caus.  nikkadijhapeti  ibid.); 
J  I.I  16;  II. 440  ;  SnA  192.     pp.  nikkaddhita. 

Nikka44kaaa  (f)  throwing  out,  ejection  J  in. 22  (a°) ; 
V.234.  (  =  niddhamana). 

Nikka44hita  (adj.)  [Sk.  *ni$kar$ita  see  nikka4<^ati]  thrown 
out  J  II.  103  (geha) ;  PvA  179  (read  A^h.  for  4<J)- 

NikkaQt&ka  (adj.)  [Sk.  ni^kaintaka,  nisH-  kaijtaka]  free  from 
thorns  or  enemies  Miln  250  ;  cp.  akai^taka. 

Nikkaddama  (adj.)  [nis-l- kaddama]  unstained,  not  dirty, 
free  from  impunity  DA  1.226. 

Nikkama  (n.-adj.)  [Sk.  nijkrama;  nis-l- kama]  exertion, 
strength,  endurance.  The  orig.  meaning  of  "  going 
forth  "  is  quite  obliterated  by  the  fig.  meaning  (cp. 
nikkhamati  &  nekkhamma)  A  1.4;  Hi. 214;  Vv  18^ 
(=viriya  VvA  96);  Dhs  13,  22,  219,  571  ;  Vism  132; 
MUn  244  (-1-  arambha).  —  (adj.)  strong  in  (■"),  enduring, 
exerting  oneself  S  1.194  (tibba°) ;  v.66,  104  sq. ;  Sn  68 
(dalha°,  cp.  Nd^  under  padhanava),  542  (sacca°). 

Nikkamati  [Sk.  ni^kramati,  uis-l- kamati,  see  also  nikkha- 
mati &  nekkhamma]  to  go  out,  to  go  forth ;  in  fig. 
meaning :  to  leave  behind  lust,  evil  cS:  the  world,  to  get 
rid  of  "  kama  "  (craving),  to  show  right  exertion  & 
strength  Miln  .345  (-1- arabhati)-l- S  1. 156  (kkh). 

Nikkaya  [cp.  Sk.  niskraya,  nis-l-  kaya  cp.  nikkii:iati]  "  buy- 
ing oft,"  redemption  J  vi.577. 

Nikkaruva  (adj.)  [nis-l-  karu^a,  adj.  of  karupa]  without 
compassion,  heartless  Sn  244  (=sattanar)  anattha- 
kama) ;  Sdhp  508. 

Nikkarunata  (f)  =  following  Vism  314. 

Nikkara^a  (i)  [Sk.  ni^karuoata ;  nisH-  karuQa]  heartless- 
ness  PvA  55. 

Nikkaiava  see  nikasava. 


Nikkama 


189 


Nikkbepa 


Nikkama  (adj.)  [Sk.  nikkama,  nis+kama]  without  craving 
or  lust,  desireless  Sn  1131  (=akamakamin  Nd^  34"  I 
pahinakSma  SnA  605  with  v.  1. :  nikkama).     Cp.  ue.xt. 

Hikkimin  (adj.)  [iiis+kamin]=  nikkama  Sn  228  (  =  kata- 
nikkhamana  KhA   184). 

Hikk8Ta9a  (abl.  =adv.)  [Sk.  ni^karaiiia,  nis  +  karanai}] 
without  reason,  without  cause  or  purpose  Sn  75  ( i=aka- 
rana  ahetu  Nd'  341)- 

HikkSsa  is  Bdhgh's  reading  for  ikkasa  (q,  v.)  Vin  11. 151, 
with  C.  on  p.  321. 

Hikki9ati  [Sk.  ni$krinati,  ms+  kiijati]  to  buy  back,  to 
redeem  J  vi.576,  585  ;  Miln  284. 

Hikkiwa  (adj.)  [Sk.  ni^kinja,  nis+ kirioa,  see  kirana] 
spread  out,  spread  before,  ready  (for  eating)  J  vi.i82 
(  =  thapita  Com.). 

Hikkilesa  [nis+  kilesa]  freedom  fr.  moral  blemish  Nd' 
340  =Nd'  under  pucchS  Nd^  185;  as  adj.  pure,  un- 
stained DhA  iv.i92=SnA  469  (  =  anavila). 

Hikkojja  (adj.)  [ni+  kubja,  better  spelling  is  nikujja,  see 
nikkujjati]  bent  down,  i.  e.  head  forward,  lying  on  one's 
face;  upset,  thrown  over  A  1.130;  8  v.48 ;  Pv  iv.7' 
(k) ;  Pug  31.     Opp.  ukkujja. 

ffikkojjati  [for  nikujjati  (q.  v.)  through  analogy  with  opp. 
ukkujjati.  Etyra.  perhaps  to  kujja  humpback,  Sk. 
kubja,  but  better  with  Kern,  Toev.  i.  p.  175=  Sk.  ny- 
ubjati,  influenced  by  kubja  with  regard  to  k.]  to  turn 
upside  down,  to  upset  Vin  11.113  ;  A-  iv.344  (pattag).  — 
pp.  nikkujjita. 

Rikknjiita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  nikkujjati ;  often  (rightly)  spelt 
nikujjita,  q.  v.]  lying  fau;e  downward,  overturned,  upset, 
fallen  over,  stumbled  Vin  1.16  ;  D  1.85,  no  ;  147,  M  1.24 
(k.);  A  1. 173;  in. 238;  Th  2,  28,  30  (k.) ;  J  111.277; 
SnA  155  (  =  adhomukha-thapita) ;  DA  1.228. 

Hikkaha  (adj.)  [nis+  kuha]  without  deceit,  not  false 
A  11.26  =  It  113  ;  Sn  56;  Nd'  342. 

Hikkodha  (adj.)  [nis-l-  kodha]  without  anger,  free  from 
anger  J  iv.22. 

Rikkba  (m.  &  nt.)  [Vedic  nijka ;  cp.  Oir.  nasc  (ring),  Ohg. 
nusca  (bracelet)]  i.  a  golden  ornament  for  neck  or 
breast,  a  ring  J  n.444  ;  vi.jj-;.  —  2.  (already  Vedic)  a 
golden  coin  or  a  weight  of  gold  (cp.  a  "  pound  sterling  "), 
equal  to  15  suvannas  (VvA  I04=3uvarniassa  panca- 
dasa-dbaraqar)  nikkhan  ti  vadanti)  S  11.234  (suvanija° 
&  singi") ;  J  1.84  (id.);  A  iv.120  (suvanna°) ;  Vv  20*  = 
43*  (v.  1.  SS  nekkha)  J  vi.iScj;  Miln  284.  suvanna- 
nikkha-satag  (100  gold  pieces)  J  1.376;  iv.97 ;  v. 58; 
°sahassar|  (1000)  J  v. 67  ;  L)hj\  1-393.  —  See  also  nekkha. 

Rikkhanta  (adj.)  [pp.  of  nis+  kamati,  see  nikkhamati] 
gone  out,  departed  from  (c.  abl.),  gone  away;  also  med. 
going  out,  giving  up,  lig.  leaving  behind,  resigning, 
renouncing  (fusing  in  meaning  with  kanta'  of  kamyati 
=  desireless)  S  1.185  (agarasma  anagariyag) ;  Sn  991 
(Kapilavatthumha  n.  lokanayako) ;  J  1.149;  n.153; 
IV. 364  ("bhikkha,  in  sense  of  nikkhamita",  v.  1.  nik- 
khitta",  perhaps  preferable,  expl''  p.  366  nibaddha°  = 
designed  for,  given  to) ;  SnA  605  (fig.  ;  as  v.  1.  for  nik- 
kama) ;  DhA  11.39  ;  PvA  61  (bahi) ;  Nd^  under  nissita  ; 
Nd'  107  (free,  unobstructed). 

Hikktaama  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  niskrama]  going  out  from  Pv.\ 
80  (nasikaya  n.-mala).  dun°  at  ThA  72  is  to  be  read 
dunnikkhaya,  as  indicated  by  vv.  11.     See  the  latter. 

Rikkhamati  [Sk.  niskramati,  nis-f-  kamati]  to  go  forth 
from,  to  come  out  of  (c.  abl.),  .to  get  out,  issue  forth, 
depart,  fig.  to  leave  the  household  life  behind  (agara 
n.),  to  retire  from  the  world  (cp.  abhinikkhamati  etc.). 


or  to  give  up  evil  desire.  —  (a)  lit.  (often  with  bahi 
outside,  out;  opp.  pavisati  to  enter  into:  A  v. 195). 
D  II. 14  (mdtu  kucchisma) ;  J  1.52  (matukucchito). 
Imper.  nikkhama  Pv  i.io';  ppr.  nikkhamanto  J  1.52; 
II. 153;  III. 26  (mukhato) ;  PvA  90;  aor.  nikkhami 
J  IM54;  III. 188;  fut.  °issati  J  II. 154;  ger.  nikkhamma 
J  1. 51,  61  (fig.)  &  nikkhamitva  J  1.16,  138  (fig.),  265; 
111.26;  IV. 4419  (n.  pabbajissami) ;  PvA  14,  19  (fig.)  67 
(gamato),  74  (id.) ;  inf.  nikkhamitut)  J  1.61  (fig.) ;  11.104  ; 
Pv  1. 10'  (bahi  n.) ;  grd.  nikkhamitabba  Vin  1.47. — 
(b)  fig.  (see  also  nikkamati,  &  cp.  nekkhamma  &  BSk. 
niskramati  in  same  meaning,  e.  g.  Divy  68  etc.)  S  1.156 
(arabbhati+ )=Miln  245  (where  nikkamati);  J  1.51 
(agara),  61  (mahabhinikkhamanar)  "  the  great  renun- 
ciation "),  PvA  19  (id.). — pp.  nikkbaata;  caus.  nik- 
khameti  (q.  v.). 

Rikkhamana  [BSk.  ni$kramana,  to  nikkhamati]  going  out, 
departing  J  11. 153;  VvA  71  (opp.  pavesana)  ;  fig. 
renunciation  KhA  184  (kata°  as  adj.  =nikkamin).  See 
also  abhi°. 

Rikkhameti  &  Nikkhameti  [Caus.  of  nikkhamati]  to  make 
go  out  or  away,  to  bring  out  or  forth  S  11.128 ;  J  1.2O4, 
II. 1 12. — pp.  nikkhamita  J  in.99  (+ nicchuddha, 
thrown  out,  in  expl"  of  nibbapita ;  v.  1.  BB.  nika- 
(Jhapita). 

Nikkhaya  (adj.)  [Sk.  'niliksaya,  nis+khaya]  liable  to 
destruction,  able  to  be  destroyed,  in  dun°  hard  to 
destroy  J  iv.449  (=dun-nikka4dhiya  Com.) ;  also  to  be 
read  (v.  1.)  at  Th  i,  72  for  dunnikkhama.     Cp.  nikhioa. 

Nikkhitta  (adj.)  [Sk.  niksipta,  see  nikkhipati]  laid  down, 
lying ;  put  down  into,  set  in,  arranged ;  in  cpds.  (°-) 
having  laid  down  =  freed  of,  rid  of  D  11. 1 4  (mani-ratanag 
vatthe  n.  set  into);  It  13  (sagge :  put  into  heaven); 
J  1.53,  266 ;  Pv  111.6* ;  Miln  343  (agga°  put  down  as  the 
highest,  i.  e.  of  the  highest  praise ;  cp.  BSk.  agra- 
nik^ipta  Lai.  V.  167);  PvA  148  (dhana  n.  =  collected, 
V.  1.  SS.  nikkita).  nikkhitta-danda  (adj.)  not  using  a 
wpapon  (cp.  dai;i(Ja)  S  1.141  etc.;  nikkhitta-dhura  un- 
yoked, freed  of  the  yoke  A  1.71  ;  in.  108;  cp.  DhsA 
145;  — su°  well  set,  well  arranged  A  n.147  sq.  ("assa 
pada-vyanjanassa  attho  sunnayo  hoti) ;  opp.  dun° 
A  1.59  ;  Nett  21. 

Nikkhittaka  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  nikkhitta]  one  to  whose  charge 
something  has  been  committed  Dpvs  IV.5  (agga°  thera  : 
original  depositary  of  the  Faith). 

Nikkhipati  [Sk.  niksipati,  ni-(-khipati]  i.  to  lay  down 
(carefully),  to  put  down,  to  lay  (an  egg)  Vin  11.114; 
It  13,  14  (Pot.  nikkhipeyya) ;  Pug  34  ;  J  1.49  (anc^akai)). 
—  2.  to  lay  aside,  to  put  away  Vin  1.46  (patta-civarag) ; 
A  1.206  (dandag  to  discard  the  weapon  ;  see  datida) ; 
Mhvs  14,  10  (dhanu-sarag).  —  3.  to  eliminate,  get  rid 
of,  give  up  Pv  II. 6''  (dehag  to  get  rid  of  the  body) ; 
DhsA  344  (vitthara-desanag).  —  4.  to  give  in  charge, 
to  deposit,  entrust,  save  Pug  26 ;  VvA  33  (sahassa- 
thavikag).  —  aor.  nikkhipi  D  11.161  (Bhagavato  sarirag) 
J  II. 104.  Ill,  416;  fut.  "issati  D  II. 157  (samussayag)  ; 
ger.  °it»a  M  ni.156  (cittag) ;  J  11.416;  vi.366;  grd. 
°itabba  Vin  1.46.  —  pp.  nikkhitta  (q.  v.).  —  Caus.  nik- 
khipapeti  to  cause  to  be  laid  down,  to  order  to  be  put 
down  etc.  PvA  215  (gosisatthig).     Cp.  abhi°. 

Nikkhepa  [Sk.  nik^epa,  see  nikkhipati]  putting  down, 
laying  down ;  casting  off,  discarding,  elimination ; 
giving  up,  renunciation ;  abstract  or  summary  treat- 
ment DhsA  6,  344  (sec  under  matika)  ;  in  grammar: 
pada°  the  setting  of  the  verse  ;  i.  e.  rules  of  composition 
(Miln  381).  Vin  1.16  (padukanag  =  footprint,  mark, 
impression) ;  J  in. 243  (dhura"  giving  up  one's  office 
or  charge),  1.236  (sarira  °g  karesi  had  the  body  laid 
out) ;  Dpvs  xvn.109  (id.).  Vism  618  (=cuti) ;  DhA  11.98 
(sarira") ;  DA  1.50  (sutta°) ;  DhsA  344  ;  MUn  91. 


Nikkhepana 


190 


Nigghatana 


Nikkhepana  (nt.)  =  iiikkhepa  S  111.26  (bhara°  getting  rid 
of  the  load,  opp.  bhar&danai)) ;  Miln  356  (  =  comparison) ; 
Vism  236  (deha°). 

Nikhaoati  1%  Nikhaoati  [Sk.  nikhanati,  ni+  khanai]  to  dig 
into,  to  bury,  to  erect,  to  cover  up  Vin  11. 116;  111.78 
(akkhig  =  cover  the  eye,  as  a  sign);  J  v.434  =  DhA 
iv.ig;  (id.) ;  D  11. 127  (n) ;  J  1.264  ;  SnA  519  (ij,  to  bury). 
—  pp.  nikhata. 

Nikhata  [pp.  of  nikhanati]  i.  dug,  dug  out  (of  a  hole), 
buried  (of  a  body)  SnA  519.  —  2.  dug  in,  erected  (of  a 
post)  Sn  28;  DhA  11. 181  (nagara-dvare  n.  indakhila). 
See  also  a°. 

Nikhadana  (nt.)  [Sk.  'nikhadana,  iu+ khadati,  cp.  kha- 
dana]  "  eating  down,"  a  sharp  instrument,  a  spade  or 
(ace.  to  Morris,  J.P.T.S.  1884,  83)  a  chisel  Vin  111.149  ; 
IV.211  ;  J  11.405  (so  read  for  khadana) ;  iv.344 ;  v. 45. 

Nikhila  (adj.)  [Sk.  nikhila  cp.  khila]  all,  entire,  whole 
Davs  V.40  (°Ioka  v.  1.  sakala"). 

NikhUta  (adj.)  [nis+khiija]  having  or  being  lost  J  vi.499 
("patta  without  wings,  deprived  of  its  wings). 

Niga  in  gavaya-gokai:ina-nig-idinai]  DhsA  331  is  mis- 
print for  miga. 

Nigacohati  [Sk.  nigacchati,  ni+  gacchati]  to  go  down  to, 
to  "  undergo,"  incur,  enter,  come  to  ;  to  suffer  esp.  with 
ditkkhar)  &  similar  expressions  of  affliction  or  punish- 
ment S  IV. 70  (dukkhar)) ;  M  1.337  sq.  (id.);  A  1.251 
(bandhanai)) ;  Dh  69  (dukkhai)  =vindati,  patilabhati 
DhA  11.50),  137;  Nd^  199*  (maraijar) -I- maranamattam 
pi  dukkhar))  Pv  iv.7'  (pret.  nigacchittha  =  paiJuni 
PvA  266). 

NigaQtha  [BSk.  nirgrantha  (Divy  143,  262  etc.)  "  freed 
from  all  ties,"  nis-1- ganthi.  This  is  the  customary 
(correct  ?)  eiym.  Prk.  niggantha,  cp.  Weber,  Bhagavatl 
p.  165]  a  member  of  the  Jain  order  (see  M  i. 370-375, 
380  &  cp.  jatila)  Vin  1.233  (Nataputta,  the  head  of  that 
Order,  cp.  D  1.57  ;  also  S!ho  senSpati  n-s5vako) ;  S  1.78, 
82  (°bhikkha) ;  A  i.205  sq.  ("uposatha),  cp.  220;  11. 196 
(^savaka) ;  ni.276,  383;  v.  150  (dasahi  asaddhammehi 
samjinnagata) ;  Sn  381  ;  Ud  65  (jatila,  n.,  aceli,  ekasata, 
paribbajaka) ;  J  11.262  (object  to  eating  flesh) ;  DA  1.162  ; 
DhA  1.440  ;  III. 489  ;  VvA  29  (n.  nima  samaijajSti).  —  f. 
nigan^hi  D  1.54  (niganthi-gabbha). 

Nigati  (f.)  [ni+gati,  q.  v.]  destiny,  condition,  behaviour 
J  VI. 238.     See  also  niyati  &  cp.  niggatika. 

Nigama  [Sk.  nigama,  fr.  nigacchati  =  a  meeting-place  or 
market,  cp.  E.  moot -hall  =  market  hall]  a  small  town, 
market  town  (opp.  janapada) ;  often  comb''  with  gSma 
(see  gama  2)  Vin  i.iio  (°sima),  188  (°katha),  197  (Seta- 
kanijika");  D  1.7  ("katha),  loi  (°samanta),  193,  237; 
M  1.429,  488;  Pv  11.13'*;  J  VI. 330  ;  PvA  III  (Asitafi- 
jana°,  v.  1.  BB  nagara).     Cp.  negama. 

Nigamana  (nt.)  [Sk.  nigamana]  quotation,  explanation, 
illustration  Vism  427  ("vacana  quotation) ;  PvA  255 
(perhaps  we  should  read  niyamana) ;  conclusion,  e.  g. 
Patth.A  366;  VbhA  523. 

Miga)a  [Sk.  nigada,  ni-l-  gala,  cp.  gala*]  an  (iron)  chain  for 
the  feet  J  1.394  ;  11.153  :  vi.64  (here  as  "  bracelet  "). 

Nigalhika  (better  v.  1.  nigalhita)  [Sk.  nigadhita ;  ni-f 
gadhita,  see  galha^]  sunk  down  into,  immersed  in  Th  i. 
558  (guthakupe). 

Nigufba  [Sk.  nigudha,  but  BSk.  nirgudha  (Divy  256) ; 
ni-|-gu|ha]  hidden  (down),  concealed:  (n.)  a  secret 
J  1.401  ;  L>avs  111.39. 

Rigahati  [Sk.  niguhati,  ni-t-guhati]  to  cover  up,  conceal, 
hide  J  1.286 ;  111.392  ;  iv.->cj3  ;  Pv  iu.43  («pariguhami, 
v.  I.  SS  guyhami).     pp.  nigii}ha  (q.  v.). 


Niguhana  (nt.)  [Sk.  niguhana,  see  niguhati]  covering,  con- 
cealing, hiding  VvA  7 1 . 

Kiggacchati  [Sk.  nirgacchati,  nis-(- gacchati]  to  go  out  or 
away,  disappear;  to  proceed  from,  only  in  pp.  niggata 
(q.  v.) ;  at  J  vi.504  as  ni°. 

Niggavthi  (adj.)  [Sk.  nirgranthi,  nis+gaothi,  cp.  also 
nigantha]  free  from  knots  (said  of  a  sword)  Miln  105. 
See  also  nighap(Ju. 

NiggaQhati  [Sk.  nigrhnati,  ni+gaijhati]  i.  to  hold  back, 
restrain  Dh  326  ;  J  iv.97  ;  Miln  184  ;  Vism  133.  —  Opp. 
pagganhati. ' — 2.  to  rebuke,  censure  (c.  instr.)  A 
111.187;  J  III. 222  ;  Miln  9  (musavadena) ;  DhA  1.29. — 
ger.  niggayha,  pp.  niggahita  (q.  v.).     Cp.  abhi°. 

Niggata  (adj.)  [Sk.  nirgata,  see  niggacchati]  i.  going  out, 
proceeding  from  (abl.):  dahato  niggata  nadi  (a  river 
issuing  from  a  lake)  PvA  152. — 2.  (  =  nigata  ?  or  = 
nis+gata  "of  ill  fate")  ■destined,  fateful;  miserable, 
unfortunate  PvA  223  (''kamma  =  punishment  in  expl" 
of  niyassa  kamma,  v.  1.  SS.  nigaha  for  niggata ;  see  also 
niya  &  niyata) ;  Sdhp  165  (of  niraya  =  miserable),  cp. 
niggatika  &  niggamana. 

Niggatika  [Sk.  *nirgatika,  nis-f-  gati-ka]  having  a  bad 
"  gati  "  or  fate,  ill-fated,  bad,  unfortunate,  miserable 
J  111.538  (v.  1.  BB  as  gloss,  nikkaruijika) ;  iv.48  (v.  1. 
BB  nikatika). 

Niggama  (n.)  in  logic,  deduction,  conclusion,  Pts.  of 
Controversy  p.  i. 

Niggamana  [Sk.  *nirgamana,  of  niggacchati]  i.  going 
away  DA  1.94.  —  2.  result,  fate,  consequence,  outcome 
Sdhp  172,  173  (dun").  — 3,  (log.)  conclusion  Kvu  4. 

Niggayha-Tftdin  (adj.)  [see  niggaohiti]  one  who  speaks 
rebukingly,  censuring,  reproving,  resenting  Dh  76  (see 
expl"  in  detail  at  DhA  11.107  &  cp.  M  111.118). 

Niggayhati  [Sk.  nigrhyate,  ni-l-  gayhati.  Pass,  of  niggaij- 
hati]  to  be  seized  by  (?),  to  be  blamed  for  DhA  1.295 
(cittar)  dukkhena  n.,  in  expl"  of  dunniggaha). 

Niggaha  [Sk.  nigraha.  ni-l-  gaha^ ;  see  niggaijihati] 
I.  restraint,  control,  rebuke,  censure,  blame  Vin  11.196; 
A  1.98,  174  ;  V.70  ;  J  V.I  16  (opp.  paggaha) ;  vi.371  (id.) ; 
Miln  28,  45,  224.  —  dun°  hard  to  control  (citta)  Dh  35 
(cp.  expl.  at  DhA  1.295).  —  2.  (log.)  refutation  Kvu  3. 

NiggahaQa  (adj.)  [Sk.  'nirgahaija,  cp.  nirgrha  homeless ; 
nis-l-  gahapa]  without  acquisitions,  i.  e.  poor  J  n.367 
(v.  1.  BB.  as  gloss  nirihira). 

NiggahaQata  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  ni+gjh,  cp.  next]  restraint 
Vism  134  (cittassa).     Opp.  pagg°. 

Niggahita  (adj.)  [Sk.  nigrhita,  but  cp.  Divy  40 1  :  nigj-hita ; 
ni-l-  gahita]  restrained,  checked,  rebuked,  reproved 
S  111.12  ;  A  1. 175  (aniggahito  dhammo) ;  J  vi.493. 

Nigg&haka  (adj.-n.)  [ni-i-  gahaka,  see  niggarihati]  one  who 
rebukes,  oppresses,  oppressor  Sn  118  (  =  badhaka  SnA 
178,  with  V.  1.  ghataka) ;  J  iv.362  ( =  balisadhaka  Com.). 

Niggilati  (niggalati)  [Sk.  nigirati,  ni-l-  gilati]  to  swallow 
down  (opp.  uggilati  to  spit  out,  throw  up)  J  iv.392  (sic 
as  V.  1. ;  text  niggalati). 

Niggata  (adj.)  [Sk.  nirgucia,  nis+gu^a]  devoid  of  good 
qualities,  bad  Miln  180. 

Nigga94i  (*■)  [Sk.  nirgupcji,  of  obscure  etym]  a  shrub 
(Vitex  Negundo)  Miln  223  ("phala) ;  Vism  257  (°pup- 
pha). 

Niggomba  (adj.)  [Sk.  •nirgulma,  nis-f  gumba]  free  from 
bushes,  clear  J  1.187 ;  Miln  3. 

Nigghatana  (nt.)  [Sk.  nirghatana,  nis-l- ghatana,  but  cp. 
nighata]  destruction,  killing,  rooting  out  Sn  1085 
(taijhS° ;  SnA  576  =  vinSsana)  ;-Nd*  343  (v.  1.  nighatana). 


Nigghosa 


191 


Nicchaya 


Nigghosa  [Sk.  nirghosa,  nis+ghosa]  i.  "shouting  out," 
sound  ;  fame,  renown  ;  speech,  utterance,  proclamation  ; 
word  of  reproach,  blame  S  1.19(1  ;  A  iv.88  (appa°  noise- 
less, lit.  of  little  or  no  noise);  Sn  719,  818  (  =  nindava- 
cana  SnA  537),  1061  J  1.64;;  vi.83  ;  Vv  5*;  Nd*  150; 
Nd^  344;  Dhs  621;  VvA  140  (madhura") ;  334  (in 
quotation  appa-sadda,  appa°) ;  Sdhp  245. — 2.  (adj.) 
noiseless,  quiet,  still  Sn  959  (  =  appasadda  appanigghosa 
Nd»  467). 

Nigrodha  [Sk.  nyagrodha ;  Non-Aryan  ?]  the  banyan  or 
Indian  fig-tree,  Ficus  Indica,  usually  as  cpd.  °rukkha 
Vin  IV.35  ;  D  11. 4  ;  Sn  272  ;  J  111.188  (r.)  DhA  :i.i4  (t.)  ; 
PvA  5  (r.)  1 12,  244  ;  Sdhp  270  ;  -pakka  the  fruit  of  the 
fig-tree  Vism  409.  -parimandala  the  round  or  circum- 
ference of  the  banyan  D  11. 18  ;  111.144,  162. 

Nigha*  (nigha)  (adj.-n.)  is  invented  by  Com.  &  scholiasts 
to  explain  the  comb"  anigha  (anigha  sporadic,  e.  g. 
S  V.57).  But  this  should  be  divided  an-igha  instead 
of  a-nigha.  —  (m.)  rage,  trembling,  confusion,  only  in 
formula  rago  n.  doso  n.  moho  n.  explaining  the  adj. 
anigha.  Thus  at  S  iv.292=Nd'  45;  S  v.57.  —  (^^j-) 
anigha  not  trembling,  undisturbed,  calm  [see  etym. 
under  igha  =  Sk.  rgh  of  rghayati  to  tremble,  rage,  rave] 
S  1.54  ;  IV. 291  ;  J  v. 343.  Otherwise  always  comb'' 
withnirasa  :  S  1.12  =23,  141  ;  Sn  1048,  1060,  1078.  Expl*" 
correctly  at  SnA  590  by  ragadi-Igha-virahita.  Spelling 
anigha  J  ni.443  (Com.  niddukkha) ;  Pv  iv.  i'*  (-1-  nirasa  ; 
expH  by  niddukkha  PvA  230).  anigha  also  at  It  97 
(-l-chinnasar)saya) ;  Ud  76;  Dh  295  (v.  1.  aniggha ; 
expl""  by  niddukkha  DhA  in. 454). 

Nigha'  (nt.)  [prob.  ni-|-gha  =  Sk.  °gha  of  hanati  (see  also 
P.  °gha),  to  kill ;  unless  abstracted  from  anigha  as  in 
prec.  nigha'J  killing,  destruction  Th  2,  491  (  =  maraija- 
sampSpana  ThA  288). 

Nighagsa  [Sk.  nighar^a]  rubbing,  chafing  DhsA  263,  308. 

Nighagsati  [Sk.  nigharsati,  ni-f  ghagsati*]  i.  to  rub,  mb 
against,  graze,  chafe  Vin  II. 133  ;  Vism  120 ;  DhA  1.396. 
—  2.  to  polish  up,  clean  J  11.418  ;  111.75. 

Nighagsana  (nt.)  [Sk.  nighar^ana]  =nigbar)sa  Mihi  215. 

NighaQ^O  [.^^-  iiigl^^ntu,  dial,  for  nirgrantha  from  grath- 
nati  (see  garifhi  &  ghattana),  orig.  disentanglement, 
unravelling,  i.  e.  explanation ;  cp.  niggaijthi,  which  is  a 
variant  of  the  same  word.  —  BSk.  nighanta  (Divy  619  ; 
AvS  II.  19).  Prk.  nigha^tu]  an  explained  word  or  a  word 
expl°,  vocabulary,  gloss,  usually  in  ster.  formula 
marking  the  accomplishments  of  a  learned  Brahmin 
"  sanighandu-ketubhanar)  .  .  .  padako  "  (see  detail 
under  ketubha)  D  1.88  ;  A  1.163,  166  ;  in. 223  ;  Sn  p.  105  ; 
Miln  10.  Bdhgh's  expl"  is  quoted  by  Trenckner, 
Notes  p.  65. 

Nighata  [Sk.  nighata,  ni-l-  ghata]  striking  down,  sup- 
pressing, destroying,  killing  M  1.430;  Nett  189.  Cp. 
nighsti. 

Nighati  [ni-f- ghati]  "slaying  or  being  slain,"  defeat,  loss 
(opp.  ugghati)  Sn  828.     Cp.  nighata. 

Nicaya  [Sk.  nicaya,  ni4-  caya,  cp.  nicita]  heaping  up, 
accumulation ;  wealth,  provisions  S  1.93,  97 ;  Vin 
V.  172  ("sannidhi).     See  also  necayika. 

Nicita  (adj.)  [Sk.  nicita,  ni-hcita,  of  nicinati]  heaped  up, 
full,  thick,  massed,  dense  Th  2,  480  (of  hair);  PvA  221 
(ussanna  uparupari  nicita,  of  Niraya). 

Nionia  [Sk.  nicula]  a  plant  (Barringtonia  acutangnla) 
VvA  134. 

Niooa  (adj.)  [Vedic  nitya,  adj. -formation  fr.  ni,  meaning 
"  downward  "=  on  ward,  on  and  on;  according  to 
Grassmann   {fVlb.  z.   Rig    Veda)  originally  "  inwardly. 


homely"]  constant,  continuous,  permanent  D  111.31  ; 
S  1. 142;  II. 109,  198;  IV.24  sq.,  45,  63;  A  U.33,  52; 
v. 2 10  ;  Ps  11.80  ;  Vbh  335,  426.  In  chain  of  synonyms  : 
nicca  dhuva  sassata  a\  iparinamadhamma  D  1.21  ; 
S  111.144,  147;  see  below  anicca,  —  nt.  adv.  niccai) 
perpetually,  constantly,  always  (syn.  sada)  M  1.326 ; 
111.271  ;  Sn  69,  220,  336  ;  Dh  23,  109,  206,  293  ;  J  i  290 ; 
in. 26,  190  ;  Nd2  345  (-dhuvakalar)) ;  PVA32,  55,  134.  — 
Far  more  freq.  as  anicca  (adj.  ;  aniccai)  nt.  n.)  unstable, 
impermanent,  inconstant ;  (nt.)  evanescence,  incon- 
stancy, impermanence.  —  The  emphatic  assertion  of 
irapermanence  (continuous  change  of  condition)  is  a 
prominent  axiom  of  the  Dbamma,  &  the  realization  of 
the  evanescent  character  of  all  things  mental  or  material 
is  one  of  the  primary  conditions  of  attaining  right 
knowledge  ( :  anicca-sailnai)  manasikaroti  to  ponder 
over  the  idea  of  impermanence  S  11-47 ;  ni.155  ;  v. 132  ; 
Ps  11.48  sq.,  100  ;  PvA  62  etc.  —  kaye  anicc'  anupassin 
realizing  the  impermanence  of  the  body  (together  with 
vayanupaissin  &  nirodha")  S  iv.211;  v. 324,  345;  Ps 
11.37,  45  sq.,  241  sq.  See  anupassana).  In  this  import 
anicca  occurs  in  many  combinations  of  similar  terms, 
all  characterising  change,  its  consequences  &  its  meaning, 
esp.  in  the  famous  triad  "  aniccarj  dukkhag  anatta  "  (see 
dukkha  11. 2),  e.  g.  S  111.41,  67,  180;  iv.28  (sabbag),  85 
sq.,  106  sq.  ;  133  sq.  Thus  anicca  addhuva  appayuka 
cavanadhamma  D  1.21.  anicca -t- dukkha  S  11.53  (yad 
aniccar)  tag  dukkhag) ;  iv.28,  31,  v. 345  ;  A  iv.52  (anicce 
dukkhasaiiiia) ;  M  1.500  (-|-roga  etc.);  Nd'  214  (id.  cp. 
roga).  anicca  dukkha  viparinamadhamma  (of  kama) 
D  1.36.  aniccasailfii  anattasaiiiii  A  iv.353 ;  etc.  — 
Opposed  to  this  ever-fluctuating  impermanence  is 
Nibbana  (q.  v.),  which  is  therefore  marked  with  the 
attributes  of  constancy  &  stableness  (cp.  dhuva,  sassata 
amata,  viparinama).  —  See  further  for  ref.  S  11.244  sq. 
(sajayatanag  a.),  248  (dhatuyo) ;  in.  102  (rupa  etc.); 
IV. 131,  151;  A  11.33,  52;  V.187  sq.,  343  sq. ;  Sn  805, 
Ps  1.191  ;  11.28  sq.,  80,  106;  Vbh  12  (rupa  etc.),  70 
(dvadasayatanani),  319  (viiinaoa),  324  (khandha),  373; 
PvA  60  (=ittara). 

-kalag  (adv.)  constantly  Nd'  345  ;  -dana  a  perpetual 
gift  D  1. 144  (cp.  DA  1.302) ;  -bhatta  a  continuous  food- 
supply  (for  the  bhikkhus)  J  1.178;  VvA  92;  PvA  54; 
-bhattika  one  who  enjoys  a  continuous  supply  of  food 
(as  charity)  Vin  11.78;  111.237  ( =  dhu va-bhattika) ; 
IV. 271  ;  -safUia  (&  adj.  sa&Ain)  the  consciousne.ss  or  idea 
of  permanence  (adj.  having  etc.)  A  11.52  ;  111.79,  334  ; 
IV.  1 3,  145  sq. ;  Nett  27 ;  -sila  the  uninterrupted  observ- 
ance of  good  conduct  VvA  72  ;  PvA  256. 

Niocata  (f)  [abstr.  to  nicca]  continuity,  permanence, 
only  as  a°  changeableness,  impermanence  S  i.6t,  204 ; 
111.43  ;  IV.142  sq.,  216,  325. 

Nicoatta  (nt.)=niccata  Vism  509. 

Niccamina  [Sk.  niScarman,  nis-Hcamma]  without  skin, 
excoriated,  in  °g  karoti  to  flog  skinless,  to  beat  the  skin 
off  J  III. 281.  niccamma-gavi  "  a  skinless  cow,"  used 
in  a  well-known  simile  at  S  11.99,  referred  to  at  Vism 
341  4463. 

Niccala  (adj.)  [Sk.  niScala,  nis-(-cala]  motionless  J  iv.2  ; 
PvA  95. 

Niccittaka  (adj.)  [Sk.  ni^citta,  nis-l-citta  (ka)]  thoughtless 
J  11.298. 

Niooola  (adj.)  [nis-cola]  without  dress,  naked  PvA  32 
(  =  nagga). 

Rioohanda  (adj.)  [nis-t-  chanda]  without  desire  or  ex- 
citement J  1.7. 

Nioohaya  {Sk.  ni^caya,  nis-l-  caya  of  cinati]  discrimination, 
conviction,  certainty;  resolution,  determination  J  1.44 1 
("mitta   a  firpi  friend);   DhsA    133    (adhimokkha  =  its 


Niccharana 


192 


Nijjhayana 


paccupatthana) ;     SnA     60      (dajha"      adj.      of      firm 
resolution).     See  vi°. 

Niccharana  (nt.)  [fr.  niccharati]  emanation,  sending  out, 
expansion,  efflux  Vism  303. 

Niccharati  [Sk.  ni^carati,  nis+carati]  to  go  out  or  forth 
from,  to  rise,  sound  forth,  come  out  It  75  (devasadda) ; 
Vv  38^  ;  J  1.53,  176  :  DhA  1.389  ;  VvA  12,  .37  (sadda).  — 
Caus.  niccharati  to  make  come  out  from,  to  let  go  forth, 
get  rid  of,  emit,  utter,  give  out  D  1.53  (anattamana- 
vacam  a°  not  utter  a  word  of  discontent);  J  in. 127; 
V.416  (madhurassara;)) ;  Pug  33;  Miln  259  (garahai))  ; 
Davs  L28  (vacai)). 

Nicchata  [Sk.  'nibpsata,  nis+  chata]  having  no  hunger, 
being  without  cravings,  stilled,  satisfied.  Ep.  of  an 
Arahant  always  in  comb"  with  nibbuta  or  parinib- 
buta :  S  111.26  (tanhai)  abbuyha) ;  IV.204  (vedananag 
khaya) ;  M  1.341  ;  412,  A  iv.410;  v.65  (sitibhuta) ;  Sn 
707  (aniccha),  735,  758 ;  It  48  (esananai)  khaya) ;  Th  2, 
132  (abbulhasalla^.  — ^  Expl''  at  Ps  11.243  by  nekkham- 
mena  kamacchandato  t}^;  arahattamaggena  sabbaki- 
lesehi  n.  muccati. 

Nicchadeti  see  nicchodeti. 

Nicchareti  Caus.  of  niccharati,  q.  v. 

Nicchita  (adj.)  [Sk.  ni^cita,  nis+cita,  see  nicchinati] 
determined,  convinced  Mhvs  7,  19. 

Nicchinati  [Sk.  ni^cinoti,  nis+  cinati]  to  discriminate,  con- 
sider, investigate,  ascertain ;  pot.  niccheyya  Sn  785 
(expl"*  by  nicchinitva  vinicchinitva  etc.  Nd'  76) ; 
Dh  256  (gloss  K  vinicchaye).  —  pp.  nicchita. 

Nicchuddha  (adj.)  [Sk.  nihksubdha,  nis+ chuddha,  see 
nicchubhati]  thrown  out  J  11199  (  =  nibbapita,  nikkha- 
mita) ;  MUn  1.30. 

Nicchubhati  [Sk.  'niliksubhati,  nis+  khubhati  or  chu- 
bhati,  cp.  chuddha  &  khobha,  also  nicchodeti  &  upac- 
chubhati  and  see  Trenckner,  Miln  pp.  423,  424]  to  throw 
out  J  111.512  (  =  niharati  Com.;  v.  1.  nicchurati)  ;  Miln 
187.  —  pp.  nicchuddha  q.  v. 

Hicchubhana  (nt.)  [see  nicchubhati]  throwing  out,  ejection, 
being  an  outcaste  Miln  357. 

Nicchodeti  {&  v.  1.  nicchadeti)  [shows  a  confusion  of  two 
roots,  which  are  both  of  Prk.  origin,  viz.  chadd  & 
chot,  the  former  =  P.  chaddeti,  the  latter  =  Sk.  ksoda- 
yati  or  BSk.  chorayati,  Apabhrarj^a  choUai ;  with  which 
cp.  P.  chuddha]  to  shake  or  throw  about,  only  in  phrase 
odhunati  nidhunati  nicchodeti  at  S  ni.i55=M  1.230  = 
374  =  A  111.365,  where  S  has  correct  reading  (v.  1. 
"choteti) ;  M  has  "chadeti  (v.  1.  °chodeti)  ;  A  has  °chedeti 
(v.  1.  "choreti,  °chareti ;  gloss  nippofeti).  The  C.  on 
A  111.365  has :  nicchedeti  ti  bahaya  va  rukkhe  va  paha- 
rati.  —  nicchedeti  (chid)  is  pardonable  because  of  Prk. 
choUai  "  to  cut."  Cp.  also  nicchubhati  with  v.  1.  BB 
nicchurati.  For  sound  change  P.  ch  >Sk.  k?  cp.  P. 
chama>ksara,  cliarika>k?ara,  churika  >k3urika  etc. 

Nija  (adj.)  [Sk.  nija,  wth  dial.  j.  for  nitya  =  P.  nicca]  own 
Davs  11.68.     Cp.  niya. 

Nijana  (nt.)  [fr.  nij]  washing,  cleansing  Vism  342  (v.  1. 
nijj=). 

Nijigiosati  [Sk.  nijigisat-,  ni+ jigirjsati]  to  desire  ardently, 
to  covet  DA  1.92  (  =  maggeti  pariyesati). 

Nijigigsanirta  (f)  [fr.  last]  covetousness  Vism  23  sq. 
(defined),  29  (id.  =  maggana).  referring  to  Vbh  353, 
where  T  has  jigigsanata,  with  v.  1.  nijigJsanata. 

Nijigigsitar  (n.  adj.)  [n.  ag.  fr.  prec]  one  who  desires 
ardently,  covetous,  rapacious  D  1.8  (labhag)  A  iii.iii 
(id.). 


Nijjata  (adj.)  [Sk.  *nirjata,  nis+jata,  adj.  to  jata]  dis- 
entangled J  1.187;  Miln  3. 

Nijiara  (adj.)  [Sk.  nirjara  in  diff.  meaning,  P.  nis  function- 
ing as  emphatic  pref.  ;  nis+  jara]  causing  to  decay, 
destroying,  annihilating  ;  f.  °a  decay,  destruction,  death 
S  IV. 339  ;  A  1.22 1  ;  11.198  ;  v. 2 15  sq."  (dasa-n-vatthuni) ; 
Ps  1.5  (id.). 

Nijjareti  [Sk.  nir-jarayati ;  nis+jarati']  to  destroy, 
annihilate,  cause  to  cease  or  exist  M  1-9.3  ;  Th  2,  431 
(nijjaressami  =  jirapassami  vinapessami  ThA  269). 

Nijialeti  [nis-l- jaleti]  to  make  an  end  to  a  blaze,  to 
extinguish,  to  put  out  J  vi.495  (aggir)). 

Niijip^a  (adj.)  [Sk.  uirjirna,  nis+jinna]  destroyed,  over- 
come, exhausted,  finished,  dead  D  1.96;  M  11.217  = 
A  1.221  (vedanakkhaya  sabbar)  dukkhag  n.  bhavissati) ; 
M  1.93  ;  A  V.215  sq.  ;  Nett  51. 

Nijjita  (adj.)  [Sk.  nirjita,  nis-l- jita]  unvanquished  Miln 
192  ("kammasiira),  332  ("vijita-sangama) ;  Sdhp  360 

Nijjivata  (adj.)  [Sk.  nirjlvita,  nis-|-jiva*]  lifeless,  soulless 

DhsA  38  ;  Miln  413. 

Nijjhatta  (adj.)  [pp.  of  nijjhapeti,  'Sk.  nidhyapta  or 
nidhyapita]  satisfied,  pacified,  appeased  J  vi.4i4 
(=khamapita  Com.) ;  Vv  63^^  (=nijjhapita  VvA  265)  ; 
Miln  209.     See  also  pati°. 

Nijjhatti  (f.)  [abstr.  to  nijjhatta,  cp.  BSk.  nidhyapti, 
formation  like  P.  fiatti>Sk.  jiiapti]  conviction,  under- 
standing, realization ;  favourable  disposition,  satisfac- 
tion M  1.320  ;  A  1V.223  ;  Ps  11.171.  176  ;  Miln  210. 

Nijihana'  (nt.)  [*Sk.  nidhyana,  ni-l- jhana']  understanding. 
insight,  perception,  comprehension  ;  favour,  indulgence 
(  =  nijjhapana),  pleasure,  delight  J  vi.207.  Often  as 
°r)  khamati  :  to  be  pleased  with,  to  find  pleasure  in : 
S  111.225.  228  ;  M  1.133,  480  ;  Vv  84".  Thus  also  ditthi- 
nijjhana-kkhanti  delighting  in  speculation  A  1.189  sq. ; 
11.191.     Cp.  upa°. 

Nijjhana^  (nt.)  [nis-(- jhana']  conflagration,  in  anto°  = 
nijjhayana  PvA  18  (cittasantapa^l- in  expl"  of  soka). 

Nijjhapana  (nt.)  [Sk.  •nidhyapana,  ni-l- jhapana,  Caus. 
to  jhapeti]  favourable  disposition,  kindness,  indulgence 
J  IV.495  (°r)  karoti  =  khamapeti  Com.;  text  reads 
nijjhapana). 

Nijjhapaya  (adj.)  [Sk.  *ni-dhyapya,  to  nijjhapeti]  to  be 
discriminated  or  understood,  in  dun°  hard  to  .  .  . 
Miln  141  (panha). 

Nijjhapeti  [Sk.  nidhayayati.  ni-(-  jhapeti,  Caus.  to  jhayati' ; 
cp.  Sk.  nididhyasate]  to  make  favourably  disposed,  to 
win  somebody's  affection,  or  favour,  to  gain  over  Vin 
II  96;  M  1.32 1  ;  J  IV.  108;  414.  495;  VI.516;  Miln  264; 
VvA  265  (nijjhapita  =  nijjhatta). 

Nijihama  (adj.  n.)  [Sk.  nihksama,  cp.  nihksina.  nis + 
jhama  of  jhayati2  =  Sk.  k?ayati]  burning  away,  wasting 
away,  consuming  or  consumed  A  1.295 ;  Nett  77.  95 
patipada. 

-tanha  (adj.)  of  consuming  thirst,  very  thirsty  J  1.44  ; 
-tanhika  =  °tanha  denoting  a  class  of  Petas  (q.  v-) 
MUn  294,  303.  357. 

Nijjhayati'  [Sk.  nidhyayati.  ni-(- jhayati>]  to  meditate, 
reflect,  think  S  111.140  sq.  (H-passati,  cp.  janati),  157; 
M  1.334  (jhayati  n.  apajjhayati)  ;  111.14  (id.).     Cp,  upa°. 

Nijjhayati''  [ni-l-  jhayati^]  to  be  consumed  (by  sorrow),  to 
fret  Nd'  433. 

Nijjhayana  (nt.)  [Sk.  'nibk^ayana.  nis-l- jhayana  of  jha- 
yati^]  burning  away,  consumption  ;  fig.  remorse,  mor- 
tification in  anto°  J  1.168  (cp.  nijjhana^). 


Nittba 


193 


Nitthunati 


Vittlu  (adj.)  [Sk.  nistha,  ni+'tha;  cp.  nitfha']  dependent 
on.  resting  on,  intent  upon  S  111.13  (accanta") ;  Nd'  263 
(Tupa°). 

Nittha'  {f)  [Sk.  nisfha;  ni+ tha,  abstr.  of  adj.-suft. 
"(ha]  bcisis,  foundation,  familiarity  with  Sn  864  (expl. 
SnA  551  by  samiddhi,  but  see  Nd'  263). 

Nittba'  (f)  [Vedic  nistha  (nih§tha),  nia+  tha  from  °tha] 
end,  conclusion ;  perfection,  height,  summit ;  object, 
aim  Vin  1.255;  S  11.186;  A  1.279  (object):  Ps  1.161. 
nitthag  gacchati  to  come  to  an  end ;  fig.  to  reach  per- 
fection, be  completed  in  the  faith  M  :.I76;  J  ;.20i  ; 
Miln  310;  freq.  in  pp.  ni^ai)  gata  (nitthangata)  one 
who  has  attained  perfection  (  =pabbajitanai)  arahattar) 
patta)  DhA  iv.70  ;  S  111.99  (a°) ;  A  11.175;  111.450 ; 
V.I  19  sq. ;  Dh  351  ;  Ps  1.81,  161. 

Kitthati  [Sk.  nustisthati,' nis+titthati,  the  older  '.sthati 
restored  in  comp"]  to  be  at  an  end,  to  be  finished 
J  1.220;  IV. 391  ;  DhA  1.393. — pp.  nitthita,  Caus. 
nitthapeti  (q.  v.). 

Hittbana  (nt.)  [abstr.  of  nifthati]  being  finished,  carrying 
out,  execution,  performance  D  1.141;  ThA  19  (  =  ava- 
s5ya).     Cp.  san?. 

Nittiiapita  {&  nitthapita)  [pp.  of  nitthapeti]  accomplished, 
performed,  carried  out  J  t.86,  172  (°tha°),  201. 

Nitthapeti  [Caus.  to  nifthati]  to  carry  out,  perform ;  pre- 
pare, make  ready,  accomplish  J  1.86,  290 ;  vi.366 ; 
DhA  III. 1 72.— pp.  nitthapita     Cp.  pari". 

Nittbita  (adj.)  [Sk.  nisthita  (nihsthita),  nis-K  thita,  cp. 
nitthati]  brought  or  come  to  an  end,  finished,  accom- 
plished ;  (made)  ready,  prepared  (i.  e.  the  preparations 
being  finished)  Vin  1.35  ;  D  1.109  (bhattar) :  the  meal  is 
ready);  n.127  (id.);  J  1.255  (id.);  J  11.48;  111.537  (fin- 
ished); VvA  188;  PvA  81  ;  &  often  at  conclusion  of 
books  &  chapters,  anifthita  not  completed  DhA 
III.  1 72 .  —  su°  well  finished,  nicely  got  up,  accomplished 
Sn  48,  240.     Cp.  pari". 

Nitthnbbati  (&  nuttbnbhati  Vin  1.271 ;  J  1.459  ;  also  nitthn- 
bati)  [Sk.  ni§thubhati,  but  in  meaning  =  Sk.  nisthlvati, 
nis-H  'thiv,  stufih  taking  the  function  of  S(biv,  since 
stnbh  itself  is  represented  by  thavati  &  thoraeti]  to 
spit  out,  to  expectorate  Vin  1.271  (nutthuhitva) ; 
11.132  (id.);  J  11. 105,  117  (nutth°) ;  vi.367 ;  DhA  11.36 
(nitthuhitva).  pp.  nutthubhita  Sdhp  121.  —  Cp.  otthu- 
bhat). 

Nittbabbana  (nt.)  [Sk.  nisthivana,  see  nitthubhati  &  cp. 
Prk.  nifthuhana]  spitting  out,  spittle  J  1.47  ;  PvA  80 
(=khela.  v.  1.  SS  nifthuvana,  BB  nifhuna). 

Nittborin  (adj.)  [Sk.  nisthura  or  nisthura,  ni-fthura  = 
thiila ;  cp.  Prk.  niffhura]  rough,  hard,  cruel,  merciless 
Sn  952  (a°  ;  this  reading  is  mentioned  as  v.  1.  by  Bdhgh 
at  SnA  569,  dt  the  reading  anuddhari  given  ;  vv.  II. 
SS  anutthurl,  BB  anutthari,  expl''  as  anissukl. 
Nd'  440  however  has  anitthurl  with  expl"  of  nitthuriya 
as  under  issa  at  Vbh  357). 

Nittboriya  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  nisthuratva]  hardness,  harshness, 
roughness  Nd'  440  ;  Nd^  484  (in  exegesis  of  makkha)  = 
Vbh  357. 

Ni4^yatt  [Sk.  nirdati,  nis-f- dayati.  cp.  Sk.  nirdatar 
weeder]  to  cut  out,  to  weed  D  1.23 1  (niddayif) ;  It  56 
(as  v.  1.  niddata  for  ninhata,  q.  v.);  J  1.215.  Caus. 
nidda^jeti  to  cause  to  weed,  to  have  weeds  dug  up  Vin 
II. 180. 

Ni4^a  (nt.)  [Vedic  nida  resting-place  ni-l-  sad  "  sitting 
down  "]  nest,  place,  seat  Dh  148  (v.  I.  nila). 

Ni^h&ta  (adj.)  [Sk.  'nibsnata,  nis+nahata]  cleansed, 
purified  It  56  (''papaka= sinless;  with  several  w.  11. 


amongst  which  niddsta  of  niddayati  =  cleansed  of  weeds) 
=Ndi  58  (ninhata")  =Nd''  5i'4  (ninhata,  v.l.  SS  ninna- 
hata). 

Nitamba  [Sk.  nitamba ;  etym.  unknown]  the  ridge  of  a 
mountain  or  a  glen,  gully  DA  1.209. 

Nitammati  [Sk.  nitamyati,  ni-(-  tarn  as  in  tama]  to  become 
daik,  to  be  exhausted,  faint ;  to  be  in  misery  or  anxiety 
J  IV. 284  (Com.  :  atikilamati). 

Nitajeti  [Sk.  nitadayati,  ni-(- tSleti]  to  knock  down,  to 
strike  J  iv.347. 

Nitta?ha  (adj.)  [BSk.  nistr?na  (Divy  210  etc.),  nis-(-  tanha] 
free  from  thirst  or  desire,  desireless  PvA  230  (  =  nirasa). 
f.  abstr.  nitthanhata  Nett  38. 

Nittaddana  (better:  nittbaddhana)  (nt.)  [Sk.  'nistambhana, 
abstr.  fr.  ni-(- thaddha  =  making  rigid]  paralysing  D 
1. 1 1  (jivha"  =mantena  jivhaya  thaddhakarana  DA  1.96  ; 
V.  1.  (gloss)  nibandhana). 

Nittareti  see  nittharati. 

Nitti^a  (adj.)  [Sk.  nistrija,  nis-l-tina]  free  from  grass 
J  ni.23. 

Nittiuva  (pp.)  [Sk.  nistirna,  nis+tinna]  got  out  of,  having 
crossed  or  overcome  D  11.275  (-ogha  ;  v.  1.  BB  nitinna) ; 
Nd'  159  (as  v.  1.  ;  text  has  nitinna) :  Nd'  278  (t.).  Cp. 
nittharati. 

Nittudana  (nt.)  [nis-t-  tudana,  abstr.  fr.  tudati ;  cp.  Sk. 
nistoda]  pricking,  piercing  A  1.65  (text :  nittuddana) ; 
111.403  sq. 

Nitteja  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  nistejas  only  in  meaning  i  ;  nis-^ 
teja]  I.  without  energy  Vism  596.  —  2.  "put  out," 
abashed,  put  to  shame,  in  °g  karoti  to  make  blush  or 
put  to  shame  J  11.94  (lajjapeti-F  ). 

Nittbanati  &  Nittbunati  [Sk.  nisstanati  "  moan  out,"  nis 
+  thaneti  &  thunati']  to  moan,  groan :  (a)  "thanati: 
J  1.463  ;  11. 362  ;  IV, 446  ;  v.206  :  DA  1.291.  —  (b)  "thunati 
Vin  11.222;  J  V.295,  389;  Vism  311;  VvA  224.  Cp. 
nitthuna. 

Nitthanaca  (nt.)  [nis+ thanana,  abstr.  to  thaneti]  groan- 
ing, moaning  DA  1.29 1  (v.  1.  BB.  "thuna).  As  nitthu- 
nana  Vism  504. 

Nittbaraoa'  (nt.)  [3k.  nistarana,  nis-f- tarana,  cp.  nittha- 
rati] getting  across,  ferrying  over,  traversing,  over- 
coming S  1.193  (oghassa);  A  n.200  (id.);  It  1 1 1  (id.); 
M  1.134  ;  J  1.48  (loka°) ;  D5vs  11.29  (id.) ;  Vism  32  ;  Sdhp 
334  (bhava"),  619  (tiloka"). 

Nitthara^a'  (nt.)  [Sk.  nistarana,  ni+tharapa]  "strewing 
or  being  strewn  down,"  putting  down,  carrying,  bearing 
S  IV. 177  (bharassa,  of  a  load,  cp.  nikkhepa) ;  VvA  131 
(so  read  fcr  niddharana,  in  kutilmba-bharassa  n- 
samattha  =  able  to  carry  the  burden  of  a  household). 

Nittbarati  [Sk.  nistarati,  nis-f  tarati']  to  cross  over,  get 
out  of,  leave  behind,  get  over  D  1.73  (kantarao).  pp. 
nittinna  q.  v.  Caus.  nitthareti  to  bring  through,  help 
over  Nd'  630  (nittareti). 

Nittbara  [Sk.  nistara;  his-t-tara  of  tarati']  passing  over, 
rescue,  payment,  acquittance,  in  °g  vattati  to  be 
acquitted,  to  get  off  scot-free  M  1.442  (v.  1.  netth",  which 
is  the  usual  form).     See  netthara. 

Nittbana  [Sk.  'nis-stanana  &  nistava  to  thunati]  (a)  (of 
thunati')  moan,  groan  DA  1.291  (as  v.  1.  BB  for  nittha- 
nana)  —  (b)  (of  thunati*)  blame,  censure,  curse  PvA  7O 
(°Tj  karoti  to  revile  or  curse). 

Nittbanati  etc.,  see  nittbanati  etc. 


N  idassana 


194 


Niddhamana 


Nidassana  (nt.)  [Sk.  nidarsana,  ni+  dassana]  "  pointing  at  " 
evidence,  example,  comparison,  apposition,  attribute, 
characteristic  ;  sign,  term  D  1.223  («i-°  with  no  attribute) ; 
III. 217  (id.);  S  IV.370  (id.):  A  iv.305  sq.  (nila°,  pita" 
etc.) ;  Sn  137 ;  Vbh  13,  64,  70  sq.  (sa°.  a°) ;  VvA  12,  13 ; 
PvA  26,  121  (pucchanakara")  226  (paccakkhabhiitar)  n. 
"  sign,  token  "). 

Kidasiati  v.  1.  BB  at  Sn  785  for  nirassati  (q.  v.)  Nd'  76 
has  nid°  in  text,  nir°  as  v.  1.  SS ;  SnA  522  reads  niras- 
sati. 

Nidassita  (pp.)  [see  nidcisseti]  pointed  out,  defined  as, 
termed  Pv  1.5'^;  PvA  30. 

Nidasseti  [Sk.  nidar^ayati,  ni+dasseti]  to  point  out 
("  down  "),  explain,  show,  define  VvA  12,  13  ("etabba- 
vacana  the  word  to  be  compared  or  defined,  corral,  to 
nidassana-vacana).  —  pp.  nidassita  (q.  v.). 


Nidabati  [Sk.  nidadhati 
deposit ;  accumulate, 
(civarai)) ;  Miln  271 
dhannari)  &  nidhaya 
629  ;  Nd^  348  ;  pres. 
nidhessati  PvA  132. 
nidhapeti  PvA  1 30 
dhana  &  nidhi ;  also 


ni-H  dahati']  to  lay  down  or  aside, 

hoard,  bury  (a  treasure)  Vin  1.46 
:  ger.  nidahitra  PvA  97  (dhana- 
Dh  142.  405  ;  Sn  35  (dandai)),  394. 

also  nidheti  KhA  217,  219:  fut. 

Pass,  nidhiyati  KhA  217.  Caus. 
(bhoge).  See  also  nidahaka,  ni- 
upanidhaya. 


Nidagha  [Sk.  nidagha,  fr.  nidahati,  ni+  dahati^,  see  dahati] 
heat,  summer-heat,  summer,  drought  J  1.22 1  (-samaya 
dry  season) ;  n.8o  ;  Vism  259  (°samaya,  where  KhA  58 
reads  sarada-samaya) ;  PvA  174  (-kala  summer),  fig. 
J  IV. 285  ;  v. 404  ;  Davs  11.60. 

Nidana  (nt.)  [Sk.  nidana,  ni-t-  *dana  of  da,  dyati  to  bind, 
cp.  Gr.  I'taiia,  Sijfta  (fetter)  &  see  dama]  (a)  (n.)  tying 
down  to ;  ground  (lit.  or  fig.),  foundation,  occasion  ; 
source,  origin,  cause ;  reason,  reference,  subject 
("  sujet  ")  M  1.261  ;  A  1.134  ^l- •  263  sq.,  338;  11. 196; 
IV.128  sq.  ;  Dhs  1059  (dukkha°,  source  of  pain),  1136; 
Nett  3,  32  ;  Miln  272  (of  disease:  pathology,  astiology), 
344  ("pathanakusala,  of  lawyers) :  PvA  132,  253.  — 
(b)  (adj.-°)  founded  on,  caused  by,  originating  in, 
relating  to  S  v. 213  sq.  (a°  &  sa°) :  A  1.82  (id.) :  Sn  271 
(ito°),  866  (kuto°),  1050  (upadhi°=hetuka,  paccaya, 
karana  Nd^  346) :  872  (iccha°)  etc. :  VvA  117  (vimanani 
Rajagaha"  playing  at  or  referring  to  R.).  —  (c)  nidanai) 
(ace.  as  adv.)  by  means  of,  in  consequence  of,  through, 
usually  with  tato°  through  this,  yato°  through  which 
D  1.52,  73:  M  1. 112:  Pv  IV. i"  (through  whom=yai) 
nimittar)  PvA  242) ;  PvA  281  ;  ito°  by  this  Nd^  291^. 

Nidahaka  (adj.)  [fr.  nidahati]  one  who  puts  away,  one  who 
has  the  office  of  keeper  or  warder  (of  robes :  civara") 
Vin  1.283. 

Nidda  (nt.)  [nis-t-dara,  see  dari]  a  cave  Nd'  23  (Ep.  of 
kaya). 

Niddanta  [so  read  for  niddanna,  v.  1.  niddha=nidda;  cp. 
supinanta]=  nidda  J  vi.294. 

Niddaya  (adj.)  [Sk.  nirdaya,  nis+  daya  (adj.)]  merciless, 
pitiless,  cruel  Sdhp  143,  159. 

Niddara  (adj.)  [nis-(-dara]  free  from  fear,  pain  or  anguish 
Dh  205  =Sn  257  (expl""  at  DhA  111.269  by  ragadara- 
thanai)  abh&vena  n. ;  at  SnA  299  by  kilesaparijahabha- 
veoa  n.). 

Niddasa  see  niddesa. 

Nidda  (f.)  [Vedic  nidra,  ni+  dra  in  Sk.  drati,  drayate,  Idg. 
*dore;  cp.  Gr.  (hom.)  !Spa9ov,  Lat.  dormio]  sleep  A 
11.48,  50 :  111.251  :  Sn  926  (opp.  jagariya),  942  (see 
expl"  at  Nd'  423):  J  1.61,  192;  11. 128.  —  niddag 
okkamati  to  fall  asleep  Vin  1.15  (nidda?);  J  111.538; 


IV.  I ;  DhA  1.9;  VvA  65;  PvA  47;  "g  upagacchati  id. 
PvA  43,  105,  128. 

-arama  fond  of  sleep,  slothful,  sluggish  It  72  {+  kam- 
marama,  bhassarata) ;  -aramata  fondness  of  sleep, 
laziness,  sluggishness  A  iii.iiG,  293  sq.,  309  sq. ;  rv.25 
(+kamm°,  bhass") ;  v.  164;  -silin  of  drowsy  habits, 
slothful,  sleepy  Sn  96. 

Niddana  (nt.)  [Sk.  'nirdana,  nis+dana  of  dayati*,  Sk. 
dati,  cp.  datta]  cutting  oft,  mowing,  destroying  Sn  78 
(  =  chedana  lunana  uppatana  SnA  i48)=S  1.172:  K.S. 
1.3 1 9,  cp.  niddayati. 

Niddayati  [Denom.  fr.  nidda]  to  sleep  D  1.231  ;  J  1.192. 
2O6  ;  II. 103  ;  V.68,  382  ;  DhA  111.175  ;  SnA  169. 

Niddayitar  [n.  ag.  fr.  niddayati]  a  sleepy  person  Dh  325. 

Niddittha  (pp.)  [see  niddisati]  expressed,  explained,  desig- 
nated Miln  3  ;  DhsA  57  ;  Vism  528  ;  VvA  13. 

Niddisati  (&  niddissati)  [Sk.  nir-disati,  iiis+  disati,  cp. 
Lat.  distingue]  to  distinguish,  point  out,  explain, 
designate,  define,  express,  to  mean  It  122  =Nd^  276': 
Miln  123,  345:  DhsA  57:  DhA  11.59:  PvA  87,  217 
(°itva) :  aor.  niddisi  DhsA  57:  SnA  61. — grd.  niddisi- 
tabba  DhsA  56 :  Nett  96.  Psiss.  niddissiyati  PvA  163. 
—  pp.  niddittha  (q.  v.). 

Niddokkha  (adj.)  [nis-(-dukkha]  without  fault  or  evil 
J  III. 443  (in  expl"  of  anigha) :  PvA  230  (id.) :  (in  expl" 
of  marisa)  K.S.  (S.A.)  i,  2,  «.  i. 

Niddesa  [Sk.  nirdesa,  fr.  niddisati,  cp.  desa,  desaka  etc.] 
I.  description,  attribute,  distinction  PvA  7  (akkat(ha°)  ; 
"vatthu  object  of  distinction  or  praise  D  111.253  = 
A  IV.  1 5  (where  reading  is  niddasa,  which  also  as  v.  1. 
at  D  III. 253  &  Ps  1.5). — 2.  descriptive  exposition, 
analytic  explanation  by  way  of  question  &  answer, 
interpretation,  exegesis  Vin  v.  114  (sa°) :  Nett  4,  8, 
38  sq.  :  Vism  26  :  DhsA  54  :  VvA  78  ;  PvA  71,  147.  — 
3.  N.  of  an  old  commentary  (ascribed  to  Sariputta)  on 
parts  of  the  Sutta  Nipata  (Atthaka-vagga,  interpreted 
in  the  Maha-Niddesa :  Parayana-vagga  and,  as  a  sort 
of  appendix,  the  Khaggavisana-sutta,  interpreted  in  the 
CuUa-Niddesa) :  Jis  one  of  the  canonical  texts  included 
in  the  Khuddaka  Nikaya :  editions  in  P.T.S.  Quoted 
often  in  the  Visuddhimagga,  e.  g.  p.  140,  208  sq.  etc. 

Niddosa'  (adj.)  [Sk.  nirdo^a,  nis-l-  dosa']  faultless,  pure, 
undefiled  Sn  4  76  :  Dhs  A  2  ;  PvA  1 89  ( =  viraj  a) ;  DhA  i.  4 1 . 

Niddosa'  (adj.)  [Sk.  nirdve§a,  nis+  dosa^]  free  from  hatred 
J  IV.  10  (su° ;  Com.  "  adussanavasena,"  foil,  upon 
sunikkodha). 

Niddhana  (adj.)  [nis-f  dhana]  without  property,  poor 
J  V.447- 

Niddhanta  (adj.)  [pp.  of  niddhamati,  nis-l-  dhanta,  q.  v.] 
blown  off,  removed,  cleaned,  purified  A  1.254  (jatarupa 
"  loitered,"  cp.  niddhota) :  Sn  56  (°kasava-moha :  Com. 
vijahati) ;  Dh  236  (°mala,  malanar)  nibatataya  DhA 
111.336) :  Nd*  347  (  =  vanta  &  pahina) :  J  vi.218  (of  hair : 
Com.  expl''  siniddharuta,  v.  1.  BB  siniddha-anta, 
thus  meant  for  Sk.  snigdhanta). 

Niddhamati  [in  form  =  Sk.  nirdhmati,  nis-H  dhamati,  but 
in  meaning  the  verb,  as  well  as  its  derivations,  are 
influenced  by  both  meanings  of  niddhavati  (dhavati' 
&  2) :  see  niddhapeti,  niddhamana,  &  niddhovati]  to 
blow  away,  blow  off  :  to  clean,  cleanse,  purify ;  to  throw 
out,  eject,  remove  Sn  28i=Miln  414  (karandavai)) : 
Sn  282  (°itva  papicche),  962  (malar)  =pajahati  (Nd' 
478) ;  Dh  239  (id.) ;  Miln  43.  —  pp.  niddhanta). 

Niddhamana  (nt.)  [of  niddhamati  or  =  *nirdhavana  = 
"dhovana  to  dhkvati^  drainage,  drain,  canal  Vin  11. 120 
(udaka°;  dhovitug  immediately  preceding);  J  1.175, 
409,  425;  ni.415;  IV.28;  V.21  (ndaka°);  DhA  11.37. 


Niddhamana 


195 


Nipaka 


NiddhamanS  (f)  [either  to  niddhamati  or  to  niddhapeti] 
throwing  out,  ejection,  expulsion  J  v. 233  {  =  nikkad- 
^ana  Com.). 

NiddharaQa  (nt.)  not  with  Hardy  (Index  VvA)=Sk 
nirdharai^a  (estimation),  but  to  be  read  as  nittharana 
(see  nittharana'). 

Niddfaapita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  niddhapeti,  q.  v.]  thrown  out 
J  111.99  (v.  1.  for  nibbapita). 

Niddhapeti  [Sk.  nirdhavayati,  nis+dhaveti  (dhapeti), 
Caus.  of  dhavati' ;  may  also  stand  for  niddhamapeti, 
Caus.  fr.  niddhamati,  cp.  contamination  niddhamase  at 
J  IV.48,  unless  misread  for  niddhapaye,  as  v.  1.  BB 
bears  out]  to  throw  out,  chase  away,  expel  J  iv.41 
(niddhapayiQsu),  48  (?  for  niddhamase).  pp.  niddha- 
pita. 

Niddhamase  at  J  iv.48  should  probably  be  read  niddh&paye 
(as  V.  I.  BB),  q.  v. 

Niddhoaati  [Sk.  nirdhunoti.  nis+  dhunati]  to  shake  off 
S  III.  155;  A  III. 365  (odhtinati+  ;  spelt  nidhunati); 
M  1.229;  Th  I,  416;  PvA  256  (  =  odhunati). 

Niddhoniya  (?)  (nt.)  [  =  Sk.  nihnuvana  fr.  nihnute  with 
diff.  derivation]  hypocrisy  Pug  18  (  =  makkha);  cp. 
J.P.T.S.  1884.  83. 

NiddhOpana  (adj.)  [nir+ dhupanaj  anscented  J  VI.2: 
(udaka). 

Niddhota  (adj.)  [nis+dhota;  pp.  of  niddhovati]  washed, 
cleansed,  purified  Davs  v. 63  (°rupiya;  cp.  niddhanta). 

Niddhovati  [Sk.  nirdhavati,  nisH-  dhovati,  cp.  niddhamati] 
to  wash  off,  clean,  purify  A  1.253  (jatarupag,  immediately 
followed  by  niddhanta).     pp.  niddhota. 

Nidhana  (nt.)  [V61ic  nidhana,  see  nidahati]  laying  down, 
depositing,  keeping ;  receptacle ;  accumulation  (hidden) 
treasure  J  iv.280  (nidhi°) ;  PvA  7  (udaka-dSna-nlha- 
raoa-n°),  97  (n-gatadhana=hoarded,  accumulated),  132 
Cg  nidhessami  gather  a  treasure) ;  DhsA  405  (°kkhama). 

Nidhanavaot  (adj.)  forming  or  having  a  receptacle,  worth 
treasuring  or  saving  D  1.4  (=hadaye  nidhatabba-yutta- 
vica  DA  1.76). 

Nidhapeti,  Nidhiya  &  Nidhlyati,  see  nidahati. 

Nidtai  [Vedic  nidhi,  ni+dha,  see  nidahati]  i.  "setting 
down,"  receptacle;  (hidden)  treasure  Sn  285  (brahma 
n.);  Dh  76;  Kh  viii.2  (see  KhA  217  sq. :  nidhiyati  ti 
nidhi,  def.  of  n.),  9  (acorSharano  nidhi  cp.  "  treasures  in 
heaven,  where  thieves  do  not  steal  "  Matt.  6,  20) ; 
Sdhp  528,  588.  —  2.  "putting  on,"  a  cloak  J  vi.79 
(expl''  as  vakacira-nivasanar)  =  a  bark  dress).  Cp. 
sannidhi. 

-kumbhl  a  treasure-pot,  a  treasure  hidden  in  a  pot 
=  a  hidden  treasure  DhA  11. 107;  iv.208 ;  -nidhana 
laying  up  treasures,  burying  a  treasure  J  iv.280 ; 
-mukha  an  excellent  treasure  A  v. 346. 

Nidhnra  see  nidhura. 

Nidheti  see  nidahati. 

Nindati  [Sk.  nindati,  nid  as  in  Gr.  oveiSo^  (blame),  Lith. 
naids  (hatred),  Goth,  naitjan  (to  rail  or  blaspheme), 
Ohg.  neizzan  (to  plague);  cp.  Goth.  nei|'  =  Ohg."  nid 
(envy)]  to  blame,  find  fault  with,  censure  A  11. 3  ;  v.  171, 
174  ;  Sn  658  ;  J  vi.63  ;  Dh  227  ;  inf.  ninditui)  Dh  230  ; 
grd.  nindaniya  SnA  477.  pp.  nindita  (q.  v.) ;  cp.  also 
nindiya. 

Nindana  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  nindati]  blaming,  reviling,  finding 
fault  DhA  m.328. 


Ninda  (f)  [cp.  Sk.  ninda,  to  nindati]  blame,  reproach, 
fault-finding,  fault,  disgrace  S  111.73;  A  11.188;  iv.157 
sq.  ;  M  1.362;  Sn  213  (+pasar)sa  blame  &  praise); 
Dh  81  (id.);  Sn  826,  895.  928;  Dh  143,  309;  Nd»  165. 
306,  384  ;  DhA  11.148.  —  In  comp"  nindi"  see  anindi". 

Nindita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  nindati]  blamed,  reproved,  reviled; 
faulty,  blameworthy  Dh  228;  Pv  11. 3**  (a°  blameless  = 
agarahita  pasaijsa  PvA  89) ;  Sdhp  254,  361.  —  anindJta 
J  IV.  106  (°angin). 

Nindiya  (adj.)  [Sk.  nindya,  orig.  grd.  of  nindati]  blameable, 
faulty,  blameworthy  Sn  658  (  =  nindanlya  SnA  477); 
Nett  132.  pi  nindiya  at  PvA  23  is  to  be  read  as  pipi- 
tindriya. 

Ninna  (adj.-n.)  [Vedic  nimna,  der.  fr.  ni  down,  prob. 
comb''  with  °na  of  nam  to  bend,  thus  meaning  "  bent 
down,"  cp.  unna  &  panna]  i.  (adj.)  bent  down  (cp. 
ninnata),  low-lying,  deep,  low,  sunken  J  11. 3  (magga) ; 
PvA  29  (bhumibhaga),  132  (thana) ;  esp.  freq.  as  -" : 
bent  on,  inclining  to,  leading  to,  aiming  at,  flowing  into 
etc.  Often  comb"  with  similar  expressions  in  chain 
taccarita  tabbahula  taggaruka  tanninna  tappona  tap- 
pabbhara  tad&dhimutta  (with  variation  nibbana", 
viveka"  etc.  for  tad°) :  Nd*  under  tad;  J  11. 15  ;  Psii.197  ; 
—  Vin  il.237=A  iv.198  (samuddo  anupubba°  etc.); 
A  iv.224  (viveka°);  v. 175  (id.);  M  1.493  (Nibbana°). 
Similarly :  samudda°  Ganga  M  1.493 ;  nekkhamma" 
J  1.45  (v. 258);  samadhi"  Miln  38.  —  2.  ^cc.  as  adv.) 
downward :  ninnai)  pavattati  to  flow  downward  M 
1.117;  Pv  1.5';  ninnagata  running  down  Miln  259 
(udaka) ;  ninnaga  Davs  iv.28.  —  3.  (nt.)  low  land,  low 
ground,  plain  (opp.  thala  elevation,  plateau) :  usually 
with  ref.  to  a  raincloud  flooding  the  low  country  Sn  30 
(mahamegho  "g  purayar)t,o) ;  SnA  42  (  =  pallala)  ;  It  66 
(megho  °r)  pureti) ;  Pv  11.9*°  (megho  °r)  paripurayanto). 
-unnata  low  lying  &  elevated  Miln  349  (desabhaga). 

Ninnata  (adj.)  [ni-(-  nata]  bent  down,  bent  upon,  in  nin- 
natatta  (fern,  abstr.)  aim,  purpose  (?)  DhsA  39  (is  the 
reading  correct  ?). 

Ninnada  (&  Ninida  Miln,  Davs)  [Sk.  ninada,  ui4-  nada] 
sounding  forth,  sound,  tune,  melody  A  11.117  ("sadda) ; 
J  VI. 43  ;  VvA  161  ;  Miln  148  ;  Davs  v.3t. 

Ninnadin  (adj.)  [fr.  ninnada]  sounding  (loud),  resonant  (of 
a  beautiful  voice)  D  11.211  (cp.  atthanga  brahmassara 
&  bindu). 

Ninnamin  (adj.)  [fr.  ni-t-nam]  bending  downwards, 
descending  A  iv.237. 

Ninnameti  [Caus.  of  ni+namati]  to  bend  down,  put  out 
(the  tongue)  D  1.106  (jivhag  =niharati  DA  1.276); 
J  1.163,  164;  cp.  Divy  7,  71  (nirnamayati). 

Ninnlta  (adj.)  [pp.  of  ninneti]  lead  down,  lead  away ; 
drained,  purified,  free  from  (°-)  A  1.254  (niqnita-kasava 
of  gold  :  free  fr.  dross). 

Ninnetar  [n.  ag.  to  ni-nayati=Sk.  'ninayitf,  cp.  netar] 
one  who  leads  down  to,  one  who  disposes  of  (c.  gen.), 
bringer  of,  giver,  usually  in  phrase  atthassa  n.  (bringer 
of  good :  "  Heilbringer ")  of  the  Buddha  S  iv.94 ; 
M  i.in  ;  A  v.226  sq.,  256  sq.  ;  Ps  11. 194. 

Ninneti  [Sk.  ninayati,  ni-^  nayati]  to  lead  down,  lead 
away;  drain,  (udakat)),  desiccate  Vin  11. 180. — pp. 
ninnita,  q.  v. 

Ninh&ta  see  ninhAta. 

Nipa  at  J  v. 6  read  as  nipa. 

Nipaka  (adj.)  [cp.  BSk.  nipaka  chief,  fr.  Sk.  nipa,  chief, 
master]  intelligent,  clever,  prudent,  wise  S  1.13.  52,  187  ; 
M  1.339;  A  1. 165  (+jhayin);  111.24,   '38;  Sn  45WDb 


Nipakka  196 

3.>S;5::.UliA  1.62  ;  Su  2S3,  962.  1038  ;  Nd^  349  (-jatiraa) 
—  Xd'  47S;  Bu  1.49:  Vbh  426;  Miln  34.  342,  411; 
Vism  3  (def°). 


Nippitika 


Nipakka  at  Vin  1.21  <>  read  nippakka. 

Nipacc-akaia  [nipacca,  ger.  of  nipatati+  akara]  obedience, 
hiiuibleness.  service  S  1.17S;  v.233  ;  A  v.66  ;  J  1.232; 
IV. 133;  \"vA  22,  320;  PvA  12. 

Nipacca- vadin  (adj.)  [nipacca,  ger.  of  nipateti+  vadin] 
speaking  hurtfully  Sn  217  (--dayakar)  nipatetva 
appiyavacanani  vattS  SnA  272). 

Nipajjati  ^Sk.  nipadyate,  ni+  pajjati]  to  lie  down  (to  sleep) 
1)  1  24'i  A  IV. 332  ■  J  1. 150  ;  DhA  1.41J  ;  PvA  2.S0  ;  aor. 
nipajji  J  1.279  ;  11. 154  ;  m.83  :  VvA  75,  7O  ;  PvA  74,  75. 
93  :  ger.  nipajja  J  17  (v. 44  :  "tthanacankama).  —  Cans, 
nipajjapeti  to  lay  down,  deposit  J  1.50,  253,  267 ; 
III. 26,  i88 ;  DhA  1.50  ;  VvA  76  ("etva  rakkhapetha). 
Cp.  abhi°. 

Nipatati  fSk.  nipatati.  ni+patati]  i.  (instr.)  to  fall  down, 
fly  do\vn,  descend,  go  out  Vin  11. 192  (Bhagavato  padesu 
sirasa  n.  bending  his  head  at  the  feet  of  Bh.) ;  PvA  60 
(id.);  J  1.27S  ;  v. 467  (nippatissami -— nikkhamissami 
Com.)  Pv  II. 8'  (v.  1.  BB  parivisayitva)  -  nikkhamitva 
PvA  109  (cp.  nippatati).  — 2.  (trs.)  to  bring  together, 
to  convene,  in  nipatamase  (pres.  subj.)  "  shall  we  con- 
vene ?"  J  IV. 361.  See  also  nipadamase.  —  Cp.  abhi°, 
S3n°. 

Nipadamase  at  J  111.121J  is  an  old  misreading  &  is  *-o  be 
corrected  into  nipatamase  (  =  let  us  gather,  bring 
together  -dedicate),  unless  it  be  read  as  nipphadamase 
(=ido.  set  forth,  prepare,  give),  in  spite  of  Com.  expl° 
p.  121  :  nikarapakara  ( =nipaccakara.  ?)  upasagga  (upa- 
sajja  .')  damase  (da)  ti  attho ;  endorsed  by  MiiUer,  P.O. 
p.  97  &  Kern,  Toev.  p.  175.  It  cannot  be  ni+pa-f 
damase,  since  ni  is  -never  used  as  secondary  (modifying) 
verb-component  (see  ni°  A  2),  &  Bdhgh's  expl"  is 
popular  ctym.  Cp.  nipatamase  at  J  iv.361  (see  nipa- 
teti). 

Nipanna  (adj.)  [pp.  of  nipajjati]  lying  down  J  1.151.  279; 
11103  ;  111.276  (°kale  while  he  was  asleep),  iv.167  ;  PvA 
4.?.  75.  -65  (spelt  nippanna,  opp.  nikujja). 

Nipannaka  (adj.)  =  nipanna  Ps  11.209;  J  1.151. 

Nipalavita  (pp)  (Com.  reading  for  vipalavita  text).  [Sk. 
viplavita,  see  plavati]  made  to  swim,  immersed,  thrown 
into  water  J  1.326. 

Nipaka  (adj.)  [Sk.  nipaka,  ni-(- paka  (pacati)]  full  grown, 
fully  developed,  in  full  strength  J  vi.327  (of  a  tree). 

Nipata  [Sk.  nipata,  ni-)-  pata,  of  nipatati]  i .  falling  down 
Uh  121  (udabindu") ;  VvA  279  (ditthi",  a  glance); 
PvA  45  (asa°). — -2.  descending  M  1.453.  —  3.  a  par- 
ticle, the  gram,  term  for  adverbs,  conjunctions  &  inter- 
jections J  V.243  (assu) ;  PvA  11  (ma),  26  (vo),  40  (tag), 
50  (ca).  —  4.  a  section  of  a  book  (see  next).  Cp.  vi", 
san" 

Nipataka  (adj;)  [to  nipata]  divided  into  sections  or 
chapters  Dpvs  iv.16. 

Nipatana  (nt.)  [to  nipatati]  i.  falling  upon  DhA  1.295. — 
2.  going  to  bed  VvA  71  (paccha"  opp.  pubbutthana). 
Cp.  nipatin. 

Nipatin  (adj.)  [to  nipatati]  i.  falling  or  flying  down, 
chancing  upon  Dh  35,  36  (yatthakama"  cittag  —  yattha 
yattha  icchati  tattha  tatth'  eva  nipatati  DhA  1.295).  — 
2.  going  to  bed  D  i.6cj  (paccha°  going  to  bed  late).  — 
Cp.  abhi^. 

Nipateti  [ni-l-Caus.  of  patati]  to  let  fall,  throw  down  into 
(c.  loc.) ;  bring  to  fall,  injure  ;  fig.  cast  upon,  charge  with 


D  1.91  ;  M  1.453  (ayokatahe) ;  J  111.359 ;  SnA  272; 
PvA  152  (bhumiyar)).  pp.  nipatita  corrupt,  evil, 
wicked  Vin  11. 182  (caijda -|- ;  text  nippatita,  v.  1.  nip- 
phatita). 

Nipaka  (adj.)  [Sk.  nipuna,  dial,  for  niprna,  to  prnoti,  pf] 
clever,  skilful,  accomplished ;  fine,  subtle,  abstruse 
D  i.26~(h.  gambhira  dhamma),  162  (pandita -J-) ;  M 
1.487  (dhamma);  S  1.33;  iv.369 ;  A  in. 78;  Sn  1126 
(—gambhira  duddasa  etc.  Nd^  350);  Vbh  426;  Miln 
233.  276;  DA  1.117;  VvA  73  (ariyasaccesu  kusala4-), 
232  ;  PvA  I,  16.     Cp.  abhinipuna. 

Nippakara  (adj.)  [nis-t-  pakara  2]  of  no  flavour,  tasteless, 
useless  J  1.340. 

Nippakka  (adj.)  [nis-i-  pakka]  boiled,  infused  Vin  1.200. 

Nippajjati  &  Nipphajjati  [Sk.  nispadyate,  nis-l-  pajjati]  to 
be'  produced,  be  accomplished,  spring  forth,  ripen, 
result,  happen  Dh.\  11. 4  (pph)  ;  PvA  19  ( =upakappati), 
71  (phalar)  ijjhati  n.),  120  (id.),  pp.  nipphanna.  See 
also  nipphadeti  &  nipphatti  etc. ;  cp.  also  abhi°. 

Nippafina  (adj.)  [uis-t- pafma]  unwise,  foolish  PvA  40,  41 
{  =  dummati). 

Nippatati  &  Nipphatati  [nis-l- patati]  to  fall  out;  rush  out, 
come  forth,  go  out  from  (c.  abl.)  Via  11. 151  (nipphatati, 
V.  1.  nippatati);  J  v. 467  (  =  nikkhamati  Com.  ;  or  is  it 
nipatati  ?).  —  ger.  nippacca  (cp.  BSk.  nirpatya  Av6 
1.209). 

Nippatta  (adj.)  [nis-l-patta]  i.  without  wings,  plucked  (of 
a  bird)  Vin  iv.259.  — 2.  without  leaves  J  111.496  (  =  pa- 
tita-patta)  ;  SnA  117  (°puppha).  —  Note  nippatta  at 
Dhs  1035  is  to  be  read  as  nibbatta. 

Nippatti  see  nipphatti. 

Nippada  (?)  at  S  1.225  i^ead  nipphada  (q.  v.). 

Nippadesa  [Sk.  *nispradesa,  nis-H  padesa]  only  in  instr.  & 
abl.  =  separately  DhsA  2.  30,  37,  297. 

Nippanna  see  nipanna  &  nipphanna. 

Nippapanca  (adj.)  [nis-l- papanca]  free  from  diffuseness 
S  IV.370  ;  Dh  254  (Tathagata) ;  °arama  not  fond  of  delay 
M  1.65  (Neumann  trsl.  1.119:  "  dem  keine  Sonderheit 
behagt  ") ;  A  111.431  ;  iv.229  sq. ;  Miln  262. 

Nippabha  (adj.)  [nis-t- prabha]  without  splendour  J  11. 415  ; 
Miln  102. 

Nippariyaya  [nis-l-pariyaya]  I.  without  distinction  or 
difference,  absence  of  explanation  or  demonstration 
DhsA  317  (°ena  not  figuratively),  403  (°desana) ;  VvA 
320.  —  2.  unchangeable,  not  to  be  turned  Miln  113,  123, 
212. 

Nippalapa  (adj.)  [nis-l-  palapa]  free  from  prattle  or  talk,  not 
talking  A  11.183  (apalapa-l-  ;  v.  1.  "palasa). 

Nippalibodha  (adj.)  [nis-f  palibodha]  without  hindrances 
unobstructed_Miln  1 1 . 

Nippadeti  see  nipphadeti. 

Nippapa  (adj.)  [nis-l-papa]  free  from  sin  Sn  257  =Dh  205. 

Nippitika  (adj.)  [Sk.  'ni^paitrka  =  fatherless  or  *ni5pri- 
tika  ?]  a  bastard  J  1.133  (v.  1.  nippitika  q.  v.). 

Nippipasa  (adj.)  [nis-H  pipasa]  without  thirst  or  desire 
Sn  56;  Nd2  35i. 

Nippitika  (adj.)  [nis-f  piti-f  ka]  i.  free  from  (feelings  of) 
enjoyment  (characteristic  of  3rd  jhana,  q.  v.)  D  1.75 ; 
A  1.81.  —  2.  being  unloved,  a  foster  child  etc.  (.')  see 
nippitika. 


Nippijana 


197 


Nibbatteti 


HippQana  (nt.)  [nis+pilaDa]  squeezing,  pressing:  a  blow 
J  III.  160.     Cp.  abhinippilana. 

Hipplleti  [nis+pUeti]  to  squeeze,  press,  clench,  urge  J  1.O3, 
223.  Pass,  nippiliyati,  only  in  ppr.  nippiliyamana  being 
urged  Vin  11.303  ;  VvA  138  ;  PvA  31,  192.     Cp.  abhi°. 

Ifippnrisa  (adj.)  [nis+purisa]  i.  without  men  PvA  177.  — 
2.  without  men,  executed  by  females  (female  devas) 
only  (of  turiya  =  a  female  orchestra)  Vin  1.15  ;  D  11. 21  : 
J  V.506.  Cp.  M  Vastu  111.165  (nijpuru^ena  nalakena) 
&  AvS  1.32 1  (nispurujena  turyena ;  see  also  note  in 
Index  p.  229),  whereas  Divy  3  (see  Index)  has  nisparusa 
(soft),  with  V.  1.  nispuru$a. 

Nippesika  [cp.  Sk.  nispe$a  clashing  against,  bounce,  shock, 
ni5+  pis]  one  who  performs  jugglery,  a  juggler  D  1.8 
(  =  nippeso  silag  etesan  ti  DA. 1.91);  A  111. iii. 

Hippesikata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  prec]  jugglery,  trickery  (cp. 
Kern,  Toev.  p.  1 76)  Vbh  353  (expl''  at  Vism  29) ;  Miln 
383- 

Hippothana  (nt.)  [nis+  pothana  of  path  to  crush]  crushing, 
beating,  destroying  SnA  390. 

Nipphajjati  see  nippajjati. 

Hipphajjana  (nt.)  (or  °na  f.  ?)  [n.  abstr.  fr.  nipp(h)ajjati] 
resulting,  procedure,  achievement,  plot  J  iv.83. 

Nipphatti  (f-).  fcp.  Sk.  ni$patti]  result,  accomplishment, 
efiect,  end,  completion,  perfection  J  1.56,  335  (of 
dreams),  343,  456;  iv.137  (sippe) ;  vi.36 ;  VvA  138 
(sippa°) ;  DhA  11.6  (import,  meaning,  of  a  vision) ;  DhsA 
354  ;  PvA  122,  282  (sippe) ;  Nett  54.     Cp.  abhi°. 

Ripphattika  (adj.)  [fr.  nipphatti]  having  a  result  J  111.166 
(evar)°  of  such  consequence). 

Mipphanna  (adj.)  [pp.  of  nippajjati]  accomplished,  per- 
fected, brained  S  1.215  ("sobhin,  spelt  nippanna) ; 
J  IV. 39  (°sippa  master  of  the  art,  M.A.) ;  DhA  111.285 
(sasse) ;  DhsA  316;  in  phil.  determined,  conditioned 
Kvu  XI.  7  ;  XXIII. 5  ;  Vism  450  ;  Pts.  of  Controversy,  395. 
Cp.  abhi°,  pari".     See  also  Cpd.  156,  157. 

Hipphala  (adj.)  [nis+phala]  without  fruit,  barren  in  a° 
not  without  fruit,  i.  e.  amply  rewarded  (dayaka,  the 
giver  of  good  gifts)  Pv  1.4^ ;  5*,  PVA  194  ;  Sdhp  504. 

Hippbalita  (adj.)  [Sk.  nispharita,  pp.  of  nipphaleti,  nis  + 
pbaleti]  broken  out,  split  open  J  1493  (lasi  =  nikkhanta 
Com. ;  v.  I.  nipphalita). 

Ripphipitatta  (nt.)  [nis+phSriita+ tvai)]  state  of  being 
free  from  sugar  or  molasses  J  111. 409. 

Ripphadaka  (adj.)  [fr.  nipphadeti]  producing,  accomplish- 
ing DhsA  47 ;  PvA  147  (sukha  -"ij  punilai)). 

Rippbadana  (nt.)  [Sk.  nijpadana,  to  nipphadeti]  accom- 
plishment Miln  356 ;  DA  1. 195. 

Ripphadar  [n.  ag.  =Sk.  nijpadayitr  cp.  nipphaditar]  one 
who  produces  or  gains  S  1.225  (atthassa ;  read  nipphadj, 
nom.  for  nippada). 

Rippbidita  [pp.  of  nipphadeti]  (having)  produced,  pro- 
ducing (perhaps  =  nipphaditar)  VvA  113. 

Ripphaditar   [n.   ag.  to  nipphadeti,   cp.   nipphidar]   one 

who  produces  or  accomplishes   PvA  8  (read  "  so  nip 

phadlta  "    for   sS.  nipphadikS).     Cp.    nipphadita    and 
nipphadaka. 

RipphUeti  [Caus.  of  nippajjati]  to  bring  forth,  produce ; 
accomplish,  perform  J  1.185  (libhasakkSrai)) ;  v.8i  ; 
Miln  299 ;  VvA  32,  72  (grd.  nipphidetabba,  n.  of  abla- 
tive case);  Sdhp  319,  426.  —  pp.  nipphadita.  Cp. 
abhinipphiadeti. 


Nipphotana  (nt.)  [nis -l- pothana]  beating  S  iv.300  (v.  1. 
th.).     Cp.  nippothana. 

Nippho^eti  [nis-f-  potheti]  to  beat  down,  smother,  crush 
S  i.ioi,  102. 

Nibaddha  (adj.)  [ni-t-  baddha]  bound  down  to,  i.  e.  (i)  fixed, 
stable,  sure  J  iv.134  (bhattavetana) ;  Miln  398  (a°, 
unstable.  °sayana).  At  DA  1.243  two  kinds  of  carika 
(wanderings,  pilgrimages)  are  distinguished,  viz.  ni- 
baddha°  definite,  regular  and  anibaddha°  indefinite, 
irregular  pilgrimage.  —  (2)  asked,  pressed,  urged 
J  111.277.  —  (3)  nibaddharj  (nt.  as  adv.)  constantly, 
always,  continually  J  i.ioo,  150;  111.325  ;  v.95,  459; 
VI. 161  ;  PvA  267  (°vasanaka) ;  DhA  11.41,  52  sq. 

Nibandha  [Sk.  nibandha.  ni-f^  bandha]  bi'nding,  bond; 
attachment,  continuance,  continuity  S  11.17;  ^vA.  259, 
260  (perseverance),  ace.  nibandhai)  (often  misspelt  for 
nibaddharj)  continually  VvA  75.     Cp.  vi". 

Nibandbati  [ni-f  bandhati]  i.  to  bind  Miln  79.  —  2.  to 
mix,  apply,  prepare  Vin  11. 151  (anibandhanlya  unable 
to  be  applied,  not  binding) ;  J  r.201  (yagubhattag).  — 
3.  to  press,  urge,  importune  J  111.277. 

Nibandhana  (nt.)  [ni-t-  bandhana]  tying,  fastening ;  bind- 
ing, bond;  (adj.)  tied  to,  fettered  Sn  654  (kamma")  j 
Miln  78,  80. 

Nibodbati  [ni-t-  bodhati]  to  attend  to,  to  look  out  for, 
to  take  J  111.151  (  =  ganhati). — Caus.  nibodheti  to 
waken,  at  Th  3,  22  is  probaWy  to  be  read  as  vibodheti. 

Nibbatta  (PP)  [Sk.  nirvftta,  nis-l-  vatta,  pp.  of  nibbattati] 
existing,  having  existed,  being  reborn  Vin  1.2 15  (n.  bijai) 
phalai)  fruit  with  seed) ;  J  1. 168  ;  11. 1 1 1  ;  PvA  10  (niraye), 
35  (petayoniyag),  100  (pubbe  n.-fhanato  patthaya) ; 
Miln  268  (kamma°,  hetu"  &  utu").— Cp.  abhi°. 

Nibbattaka  (adj.)  [cp.  nibbatta]  producing,  yielding  PvA 
26  (phala  °g  kusalakammai]),  126  (  =  sukha"  =  sukha •• 
vaha). 

Nibbattati  [nis-t-vattati]  to  come  out  from  (cp.  E.  turn 
out),  arise,  become,  be  produced,  result,  come  into 
being,  be  reborn,  ex-ist  (=nir-vatt)Dh  338;  Pvi.i'  (nib- 
battate);  ThA  259  (  =  jayati);  DhA  ill. 173;  PvA  8 
(  =  uppajjati)  71  (id.);  ger.  nibbattit^a  J  11.158  (kapi- 
yoniyar));  PvA  68,  78;  aor.  nibbatti  J  1.221  ;  PvA  14 
(Avicimhi),  67  (petesu),  73  (amaccakule).  —  pp.  nib- 
batta (q.  v.).     Caus.  nibbatteti  (q.  v.).     Cp.  abhi°. 

Nibbattana  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  nibbattati]  growing,  coming 
forth;  (re)birth,  existence,  life  J  11.105;  PvA  5  (deva- 
loke  n-araha  deserving  rebirth  in  the  world  of  gods)  9, 
67  etc. 

Nibbattanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  nibbattana]  i.  arising,  coming 
out,  growing  ThA  259  (akkhidalesu  n.  pijika)  -  -  2.  one 
destined  to  be  reborn,  a  candidate  of  rebirth  J  111,304 
(sagge). 

Nibbattapana  (nt.)  [fr.  nibbattapeti,  see  nibbatteti]  repro- 
duction Miln  97. 

Ribbatti  (f)  [Sk.  nirvjtti,  nis-t-  vatti]  constitution,  product ; 
rebirth  J  1.47 ;  Nett  28,  79 ;  Vism  199,  649 ;  VvA  10. 
Cp.  abhi°. 

Ribbattita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  nibbatteti]  done,  produced, 
brought  forth  PvA  150  (a°kusalakamina  =  akata). 

Nibbattin  (adj.)  [fr.  nSbbatti]  arising,  having  rebirth,  in 
neg.  anibbattin  not  to  be  bom  again  J  vi.573. 

Nibbatteti  [nis+ vatteti,  Caus.  of  nibbattati]  to  produce, 
bring  forth ;  practise,  perform ;  to  bring  to  light,  find 
something  lost  (at  Miln  218)  Nd'  =  janeti  (s.  v.);  J 
1.66,   140  ;  111.396  (jhanabhiQiiai)) ;  PvA  76  (jhanani), 

IV— 7 


Nibbanka 


198 


Nibbana 


30;  Miln  200;  Sdhp  470. — pp.  nibbattita  (q.  v.); 
2nd  Caus.  nibbattapeti  to  cause  rebirth  DhA  111.484  ; 
sue  also  nibbattapaiia.  —  Cp.  abhi°. 


ISJibbanka  (adj.)  [ni^ 


vanka]  not  crooked,  straight  DhA 


l<itbbaijeti  [nis+  vajjcti]  to  throw  away,  to  do  without,  to 
avoid  Th  I,  1 105. 

Kibbana  (adj.)  i.  [Sk.  nirvana]  without  forest,  woodless 
J  H.358.  —  2.  [an  cC'str.  fr.  nibbana.  see  nibbana  I.; 
cp.  vana*. '  Frcq.  nibbana  as  v.  I.  instead  of  nibbana] 
withoui  cr.ivings  Sn  113!  (nikkamo  nibbano) ;  Dh  283 
(nibbaT.ia  p!.)  '.  ■.■  511"  {better  reading  nibbana,  in  phrase 
van.';  niLibaii.M)  agatar),"  as  found  at  A  111.346  = 
Th  :,  U):,  although  llu-  latter  has  nibbanag  in  text), 
cxr>l''  by  "  !iittanhabr.„ .  ag  nibbanam  eva  upagatar)  " 
VvA  213. 

Nibbanatha  (adj.)  fnis  4-  vanatha]  free  from  lust  or  cravings 

5  i.So,  1 80  (.so  'haij  vane  nibbanatho  visallo) ;  Th  i,  526  ; 
Dh  344  ;  Davs  1.18 

Kibbasana  (adj.)  [nis+  vasana]  no  longer  worn,  cast  off  (of 

cloth)  S  11.202,  221. 

Nibbshati  [nis+bahati]  tu  stretch  out  J  HI.185  (asJij) ;  to 
pull  out  j  V.269  (jivhar)  =jivha;i  b.il.Uena  n.  275).  See 
also  nibbaheti  &  nibbahapeti. 

Kibbati  [see  nibbuta  ctym  :  influenced  in  meaning  by  Sk. 
nirvati,  nis+  vati  to  blow,  i.  e.  to  make  cool,  see  vayati 

6  nibbapeti]  (instr.)  to  cool  off  (lit.  &  fig.;,  to  get  cold, 
to  become  passionless  Sn  235  (nibbanti  dliira  yathayag 
padipo  =  vijjhayanti ;  yathayaij  padipo  nibbuto  evag 
nibbanti  KhA  194,  195),  915  (kathag  disva  nibbati 
bliikkhu  =  r5gar)  etc.  nibbapeti  Nd'  344);  J  iv.391 
(payasag).     See  also  parinibbati  (e.  g.  Vbh  42O). 

Ribb&na  (nt.).  —  I.  Etymology  Although  nir+ va  "to 
blow  "  (cp.  liSk.  nirvo;.ia)  is  already  in  use  in  the  Vedic 
period  (see  nibbapeti),  wt-  do  not  Cnd  its  distinctive 
application  till  later  ar.d  more  cornmonlv  in  popular 
u.se,  where  va  is  fused  with  vr  in  thi.-'.  sense,  viz.  in  appli- 
cation to  the  .■;xtin(Tuisl-.ing  of" fire,  which  -s  the  prevailing 
Buddhist  conception  of  the  term  Only  it  the  older  texts 
do  we  find  references  tc  a  biiniic  c'  the  Uinnd  and  the- 
ilamc  ;  but  by  far  the  most  o-'minon  metaphcr  and  th.at 
which  governs  the  whole  idea  of  nibbana  finds  expre;  ;ion 
in  the  putting  out  of  five  by  other  means  of  extinction 
than  by  blowing,  which  latter  process  rather  tends  to 
incite  the  fire  than  to  extinguish  it.  The  going  out  of 
the  fire  may  be  due  to  covering  it  up,  or  to  depriving  it 
of  further  fuel,  by  not  feeding  it,  c  by  withdrawing  the 
cause  of  its  production.  Thus  to  the  Pali  etymologist 
the  main  reference  is  to  the  root  vf  (to  cover),  and  not 
to  va  (to  blow).  This  is  still  more  clearly  evident  in  the 
case  of  nibbuta  (q.  v.  ior  further  discussion).  In  .erbal 
compn.  nis+  va  (see  vayati)  refers  only  to  the  (non-) 
emittance  of  an  odour,  which  could  never  be  used  for  a 
meaning  of  "  being  exhausted  "  ;  moreover,  one  has  to 
bear  in  mind  that  native  commentators  thcni;:elves 
never  thought  of  explaining  nibbSna  by  anything  like 
blowing  (vata),  but  always  by  nis+  vana  (see  nibbana). 
For  Udhgh's  del"  of  nibbana  see  e.  g.  Vism  293. 
—  The  meanings  of  n.  are :  i.  the  going  out  of  a  lamp 
or  fire  (popular  meaning).  —  2.  health,  the  sense  of 
bodily  well-being  (probably,  at  first,  the  ptissing  away 
of  feverishncss,  restlessness).  —  3.  The  dying  out  in 
the  heart  of  the  threefold  fire  of  raga,  dosa  &  moha  : 
lust,  ill-will  &  stupidity  (Buddhistic  meaning).  — 
4.  the  sense  of  spiritual  well-being,  of  security,  emanci- 
pation, victory  and  peace,  salvation,  bliss. 

II.  Import  and  Hange  of  the  Term.  A.  Nibbana  is 
purely  and  solely  an  ethical  state,  to  be  reached  in  this 
birth  by  ethical  practices,  contemplation  and  insight. 


It  is  therefore  not  transcendental.  The  first  and  most 
important  way  to  reach  N.  is  by  means  of  the  eightfold 
Path,  and  all  expressions  which  deal  with  the  realisation 
of  emancipation  from  lust,  hatred  and  illusion  apply 
to  practical  habits  and  not  to  speculative  thought.  N. 
is  realised  in  one's  heart;  to  measure  it  with  a  speculative 
measure  is  to  apply  a  wrong  standard.  —  A  very  apt 
and  comprehensive  discussion  of  nibbana  is  found  in 
F.  Heiler,  "  Die  buddhistische  Versenkung  "  (Miinchen' 
1922),  pp.  36-42,  where  also  the  main  literature  on  the 
subject  is  given.  —  N.  is  the  untranslatable  expression 
of  the  Unspeakable  of  that  lor  which  in  the  Buddha's 
own  saying  there  is  no  word,  which  cannot  be  grasped 
in  terms  of  reasoning  and  cool  logic,  the  Nameless, 
Vndefinable  (cp.  the  simile  of  extinction  of  the  fiame 
which  may  be  said  to  pass  from  a  visible  state  into  a 
state  which  cannot  be  delined.  Thus  the  Saint  (Ara- 
hant)  passes  into  that  same  state,  for  which  there  is 
"no  measure"  (i.  e.  no  dimension):  "  atthangatassa 
na  pamanam  atthi  .  .  .  >ena  nag  vajju :  tag  tassa 
n'  atthi  "  Sn  1076.  The  simile  in  v.  1074  :  "  acci  yatha 
vata-vegena  khitto  atthag  paleti,  na  upeti  sankhag  : 
evag  muni  namakaya  vimutto  atthag  paleti,  na  upeti 
sankhag  ").  Yet,  it  is  a  reality,  and  its  characteristic 
features  may  be  described,  may  be  grasped  in  terms  of 
earthly  language,  in  terms  of  space  (as  this  is  the  only 
means  at  our  disposal  to  describe  abstract  notions  of 
time  and  mentality):  e.  g.  accutag  fhanag,  parag, 
amatag  padag,  amata  (&  nibbana-)  dhatu.  —  It  is  the 
speculative,  scliolastic  view  and  the  dogmatising  trend 
of  later  times,  beginning  with  the  Abhidhamma  period, 
which  has  more  and  more  developed  the  simple,  spon- 
taneous idea  into  an  exaggerated  form  either  to  the 
positive  (i.  e.  seeing  in  N.  a  definite  state  or  sphere  of 
existence)  or  the  negative  side  (i.  e  seeing  in  it  a  con- 
dition of  utter  annihilation).  Yet  its  sentimental  value 
to  the  (exuberant  optimism  of  the)  early  Buddhists 
(Rh.  Davids,  Early  Buddhism,  p.  73)  is  one  of  peace  and 
rest,  perfect  passionlessness,  and  thus  supreme  happi- 
ness. As  Heiler  ;t  the  words  of  P.  Otto  (Das  Heili^e 
etc.  1917:  quoted  \.  c.  p.  41)  describes  it,"  only  by  its 
concept  Nirvana  is  something  negative,  by  its  sentiment, 
however,  a  positive  item  in  most  pronounced  form." 
—  We  may  also  quote  Kli.  Davids'  words  :  "  One  might 
hll  columns  with  the  praises,  many  of  them  among  the 
,-.ost  beautiful  passages  in  Pali  poetry  and  prose, 
hwished  on  this  condition  of  mind,  the  state  of  the  man 
made  perfect  according  to  the  B.  faith.  Many  are  the 
pet  names,  the  poetic  epithets,  bestowed  upon  it,  each 
of  them — for  they  are  not  synonyms — emphasising  one 
or  other  phase  of  this  many-sided  conception — the 
harbour  of  refuge,  the  cool  cave,  the  island  amidst  the 
floods,  the  place  of  bliss,  emancipation,  liberation,  safety, 
the  supreme,  the  transcendental,  the  uncreated,  the 
tranquil,  the  home  of  ease,  the  calm,  the  end  of  suffer- 
ing, the  medicine  for  all  evil,  the  unshaken,  the  ambrosia, 
the  immaterial,  the  imperishable,  the  abiding,  the 
further  shore,  the  unending,  the  bliss  of  effort,  the 
supreme  joy,  the  ineffable,  the  detachment,  the  holj- 
city,  and  many  others.  Perhaps  the  most  frequent  in 
the  B.  texts  is  Arahantship,  '  the  state  of  him  who  is 
worthy  ' ;  and  the  one  exclusively  used  in  Kurope  is 
Nirvana,  the  '  dying  out,'  that  is,  the  dying  out  in  the 
heart  of  the  fell  fire  of  the  three  cardinal  sins — sen- 
suality, ill-will,  and  stupidity  (Sagyntta  iv.^sr,  261)," 
{Early  Buddhism  pp.  72.  73.)  And  Heiler  says  (p.  42 
1.  c.) :  "  Nirvana  is,  although  it  might  sound  a  parado.x, 
in  spite  of  all  conceptional  negativity  nothing  but 
'  eternal  salvation,'  after  which  the  heart  of  the  religious 
yearns  on  the  whole  earth." 

The  current  simile  is  that  of  fire,  the  consuming  fire 
of  passion  (rSg-aggi),  of  craving  for  rebirth,  which  has 
to  be  extingui-shed,  if  a  man  is  to  attain  a  condition  of 
indifference  towards  everything  worldly,  and  which  in 
thv  end,  in  its  own  good  time,  may  lead  to  freedom  from 


NibbSna 


199 


Nibbana 


rebirth  altogether,  to  certain  and  final  extinction  (pari- 
nibbana).  —  I'ire  may  be  put  out  by  water,  or  may  go 
out  of  itself  from  lack  of  fuel.  The  ethical  state  called 
Nibbana  can  only  rise  from  within.  It  is  therefore  in 
the  older  texts  compared  to  the  fire  going  out,  rather 
than  to  the  fire  being  put  out.  The  latter  point  of 
view,  though  the  word  nibbana  is  not  used,  occurs  in 
one  or  two  passages  in  later  books.  See  J  1.2 12  ;  Miln 
346,  410  ;  SnA  28 ;  Sdhp  584.  I-'or  the  older  view  see 
M  1.487  (aggt  anaharo  nibbuto,  a  fire  gone  out  through 
lack  of  fuel) ;  Sn  1094  (akiilcanai)  anadanag  etag  dipag 
anaparai)  Nibbanai)  iti) ;  S  1.236  (attadandesu  nibbuto 
sadanesu  anadano)  ;  S  11.85  (aggikkhandho  purimassa 
upadanassa  pariyadana  aiii^assa  ca  anupahara  anaharo 
nibbiyeyya,  as  a  fire  would  go  out,  bereft  of  food, 
because  the  former  supply  being  finished  no  additional 
supply  is  forthcoming) ;  sa-upjdano  devanai)  indo  na 
parinibbayati,  the  king  of  the  gods  does  not  escape 
rebirth  so  long  as  he  has  within  him  any  grasping 
S  IV.  102  ;  paragu  sabbadhammanai)  anupSdaya  nibbuto 
A  1. 162  ;  paragato  jhayi  anup°  nibbuto,  a  philosopher, 
freed,  without  any  cause,  source,  of  rebirth  A  iv.290 
(etc.,  see  nibbuta).  davaggi-nibbanai)  the  going  out 
of  the  jungle  fire  J  1.2 12  ;  aggi  nibbayeyya,  should  the 
fire  go  out  M  1.487 ;  aggikkhandho  nibbuto  hoti  the 
great  fire  has  died  out  Miln  304  ;  nibbuto  gini  my  fire 
is  out  Sn  19.  The  result  of  quenching  the  fire  (going 
out)  is  coolness  (sita) ;  and  one  who  has  attained  the 
state  of  coolness  is  sitibhuta.  sitibhuto  'smi  nibbuto 
Vin  1.8  ;  Pv  1.8' ;  sitibhuto  nirupadhi,  cooled,  with  no 
more  fuel  (to  produce  heat)  Vin  11. 156;  A  1.138;  nic- 
chato  nibbuto  sitibhuto  (cp.  nicchata)  A  n.208 ;  V.C5. 
anupadana  dipacci  viya  nibbuta  gone  out  like  the 
flame  of  a  lamp  without  supply  of  fuel  ThA  154  (Ap. 
153).  —  nibbanti  dhira  yath'  ftyai)  padipo  the  Wise  go 
out  like  the  flame  of  this  lamp  Sn  235.  This  refers  to 
the  pulling  out  of  the  wick  or  to  lack  of  oil,  not  to  a 
blowing  out;  cp.  vattii)  paticca  telapadlpo  jSleyya 
S  11.86:  Th  2,  116  (padipass'  eva  nibbanag  vimokkho 
ahu  cetaso).  The  pulling  out  of  the  wick  is  expressed 
by  78(^1]  okassayami  ( =dipavattirj  akaddhemi  ThA 
1 1 7)  cp.  on  this  passage  I'ischel,  Lehen  &  Lehre  des 
Buddha  71  :  Mrs.  Rh.  Davids.  Buddhism  176;  Neumann, 
Lieder  298).  pajjotass'  eva  nibbanai)  like  the  going  out 
of  a  lamp  S  i.i^gfsi. 

B.  Since  rebirth  is  the  result  of  wrong  desire  (kdma, 
kilesa,  asava,  raga  etc.),  the  dying  out  of  that  desire 
leads  to  freedom  &  salvation  from  rebirth  and  its  cause 
or  substratum.  Here  references  should  be  given  to: 
(i)  the  fuel  in  ethical  sense  (cp.  A  i  :  aggi) ;  (2)  the  aims 
to  be  accomplished  (for  instance,  coolness  = /)eace) : 
(3)  the  seat  of  its  realisation  (the  heart) ;  (4)  the  means 
of  achievement  (the  Path) :  (5)  the  obstacles  to  be 
removed.  —  i.  FHe/~  cause  of  rebirth  &  suffering; 
asava  (intoxications),  khinasava  jutimanto  te  loke 
parinibbuta  the  wise  who  are  rid  of  all  intoxications 
are  in  this  world  the  thoroughly  free  S  v. 29  :  savaka 
asavanag  khaya  viharanti  A  iv.83  ;  kodhag  pahatvana 
parinibbinsu  anasava  (are  completely  cooled)  A  iv.98  ; 
asavakhino  danto  parinibbuto  Sn  370  ;  saggag  sugatino 
yanti  parinibbanti  anasava  those  of  happy  fate  go  to 
heaven,  but  those  not  intoxicated  die  out  Dh  126; 
nibbanag  adhimuttanag  atthangacchanti  asava  Dh  226  : 
asavanag  khaya  bhikkhu  nicchato  parinibbuto  It  49  : 
vimutti-kusuma-sai^channo  parinibbissati  anasavo  Th 
I,  loci.  —  kama  (cravings)  nikkamo  nibbano  Nago  Sn 
1 131.  —  kilesa-(nibbana)  vice  (only  in  certain  com- 
mentaries), kilesa-nibbanass'  Api  anupada  parihibba- 
nass'  dpi  santike  OhA  1.286  :  upadanag  abhavena  anupi- 
diyitva  kilesa-nibbanena  nibbuta  DhA  iv.i94.  —  nib- 
bida  (disenchantment).  Nibbanag  ekanta-nibbidaya 
virdpaya  etc.  sagvattati  S  11.223  i  nibbijjha  sabbaso 
kame  sikkhe  nibbanag  attano  Sn  940.  —  raga  virago 
nirodho  nibbanag  S  I.I3(>;%::  dcsento  virajag  dhammag 
nibbanag  akutobhayag  S  1.192;  70  ragakkhayo  (dosa° 


.  .  .  moha°  .  .  .):  idag  vuccati  nibbanag  S  iv.2Si.  ic 
same  of  Amata  S  v. 8 ;  chandaraga-vinodanag  nibbana- 
padag  accutag  Sn  1086 ;  kusalo  ca  jahati  papakag  raga- 
dosamoha-kkhaya  parinibbuto  I'd  85:  ye  'dha  paja- 
hanti  kSmaragag  bhavaragdnusayan  ca  pahaya  parinib- 
banagata  Vv  53^'.  —  vana  sabba-sagyojan'  atitag  vana 
nibbanag  agatag  A  111.346  :  nikkhantag  vanato  ti 
nibbanag  KhA  151  ;  tanhS-sankhata-vanAbhavato 
nibbanag  SnA  253. 

2.  Aims:  khema  (tranquillity).  atapT  bhikkhu  nibba- 
naya  bhabbo  anuttarassa  yogakkhemassa  adhigamaya 
It  27;  ajarag  aniarag  khemag  pariyessarai  nibbutig 
J  1.3  :  acala  (immovable,  not  to  be  disturbed),  patto 
acalaUhanag  Vv  51* ;  accuta  (stable)  patthayag  accutag 
padag  S  111.143:  chandaraga-vinodanag  nibbanapadag 
accutag  Sn  1086.  nekkhamma  (renunciation,  dis- 
passionateness), vana  nibbanag  agatag  kamehi  nek- 
khammaratag  A  in. 346. — paragu  (victor),  paragu 
sabbadhammanag  anupada ya  nibbuto  A  1.162  (cp. 
A  IV.290  with  tinno  paragato).  —  santipada  (calm,  com- 
posure), santi  ti  nibbutig  flatia  Sn  933  :  santimaggag 
eva  bruhaya  nibbanag  sugatena  desitag  Dh  285 ; 
s.  =acala  VvA  219.  —  samatha  (allayment,  quietude), 
sabbasankharasamatho  nibbanag  S  i.i36sa.  —  sotthi 
(welfare),     saccena  suvatthi  hotu  nibbanag  Sn  235. 

3.  The  Heart :  (a)  atta  (heart,  self),  abhinibbut-atto 
Sn  456  ;  thifatto  frequent,  e.  g.  parinibbuto  th°  Sn  359  ; 
danto  parinib"  th°  Sn  370.  —  (b)  citta  (heart),  apari- 
dayhamana-citto  SnA  347  (for  abhiuibbutatto  Sn  343). 
—  (c)    hadaya     (heart)    nibbanag     hadayasmig    opiya 

5  1. 199;  matuhadayag  nibbayate  J  1.61:  nibbapehi 
me  hadaya-parilahag  (quench  the  fever  of  my  heart) 
Miln  318.  —  (d)  mano  (mind),  mano  nibbap  tavade 
J  1.27  ;  disva  mano  me  pasidi  \'v  51)'*. 

4.  The  Path  :  dhira.  lokapariyiiyag  afinaya  nibbuta 
dhira  tinna  etc.  S  1.24  :  nibbanti  dhira  .  .  .  Sn  235 
sabb&bhibhu  dhiro  sabbagantha-ppamocano  It  122  — 
Recognition  of  anicca  (transitoriness.  see  nicca).  anicca- 
safifii  .  .  .  bhikkhu  papunati  ditth'  eva  dhamme 
nibbanag  A  iv. 353.  —  pafifia.  nibbanag  ev'  ajjhaga- 
mug  sapanua  S  1.22  ;  n'  abhirato  pafli^a  S  1.38.  — ■ 
pandita  &  nipaka.  anupubbena  n''g  adhigacchanti 
pandita  A  1.162  ;  nipaka  asesag  parinibbanti  It  93.  — 
vijjai.  bhikkhu  panihitena  cittena  avijjag  bhecchati 
vijjag  uppadessati  n°g  sacchikarissati  the  bhikkhu  with 
devout  heart  will  destroy  ignorance,  gain  right  cognition 

6  realise  Nibbana  A  i.S  :  idh"  afinaya  parinibbati  ana- 
savo A  111.41  ;  sabb'  asave  parifliiaya  parinibbanti 
anasava  Vbh  426. 

5.  The  Obstacles :  gantha  (fetter),  nibbanag  adhi- 
gantabbag  sabba-g°-pamocanag  S  1.210;  It  104 ; 
similarly  It  122  (see  above),  gabbhaseyya  (rebirth), 
na  to  punam  upenti  gabbhaseyyag,  parinibbanagata  hi 
sitibhuta  Vv  53**.  —  nivarana  (obstacles),  pafica  n°. 
anibbana-sagvattanika  S  v. 97.  —  punabbhava  (rebirth), 
nibbapehi  maharagag  madayhitthopunappunag  S  1.188  ; 
vibhavau  ca  bhavafk  ca  vippahaya  vusitava  khinapu- 
nabbhavo  sa  bhikkhu  Sn  514  ;  bhava-nirodha  nibbanag 
S  n.117. — sankhara  (elements  of  life),  sabbasan- 
khara-samatho  nibbanag  S  1.136:  N. -sabbasankhara 
khayissanti  A  111.443.  —  sagyojanani  (fetters),  sabba- 
s-.ltitag  vana  Nibbanag  agatar;  A  111.34'! ;  s.  pahaya 
n'g  sacchikarissati  A  111.423:  sagyojananag  parik- 
khaya  antara-parinibbayi  hoti  S  v. 69. 

111.  Nibbana :  its  ethical  importance  and  general 
characterisation.  L  Assurance  of  N.  (nibbanass'  eva 
santike,  near  N..  sure  of  N.) :  S  1.33  (ya.<;sa  etadisag 
yanag  .  .  .  sa  etena  yancna  n.  e.  s.  :  with  the  chariot 
of  the  Dhamma  sure  of  reaching  N.) ;  iv.75  ;  A  11.39 
(abhabbo  parihanaya  n.  e.  s.  impossible  to  fail  in  the 
assurance  of  final  release,  of  one  "  catuhi  dhammehi 
sarnannagato,  viz,  sila,  indriyaguttadvarata,  bhojana- 
mattaiiiluta.  jagariya");  111.33"  ('d-  wit''  appamada- 
garu  :  ever  active  &  keen);  11. .41' -It  40  (id.  with  appa- 
mada-rato);    Sn    822.-2.  Steps   mid    Mean':   to    N.: 


Nibbana 


200 


Nibbana 


nibbana-sacchikiriya,    attainment  of  N.,   is  mangalai] 
uttamaQ  A-  to  be  achieved  by  means  of  tape,  brahma- 
cariya  and  ariyasaccana-dassanar)    Sn   267.  —  brahma- 
cariya  (a  saintly  life)  is  n.-parayana   (leading  to   N.) 
S  III. 189,  cp.  V.218  :  also  called  n.-ogadha  (with  similar 
states   of   mind,    as    nibbida,    virago,    vimutti)    ibid. ; 
A    n.26=^It    28,    cp.    It    29    (nibban'-ogadha-gaminai) 
b°i)).     The  stages  of  sanctification  are  also  discussed 
under     the     formula     "  nibbida     virago     vimutti  .  .  . 
vimuttasmir)  vimuttag  iti  i)anai}  hoti:  khina  jati  etc." 
(i.  e.  no  more  possibility  of  birth)  S  11.124  =iv.86.  - — 
dhamma :    Buddha's    teaching    as    the    way    to    N. : 
"  dhammavarar)    adesayi    n.-gamir)   paramai)   hitaya " 
Sn  233  ;    ahar)  savakanag  dhamraar)  desemi  sattanat) 
visuddhiya   .    .  .  n°assa   sacchikiriyaya   A    v.  194,    cp. 
141  ;    pubbe  dh.-thiti-nanag  paccha  nibbane  ftSncin  ti 
S  n.124.  —  magga  :  Those  practices  of  a  moral  &  good 
life  embraced  in  the  8  fold  Noble  Path  (ariyamagga). 
Sace  atthi  akammena  koci  kvaci  na  jiyati  nibbanassa 
hi  so  maggo  S  1.2 17;  ekayano  ayar)   maggo   sattanai) 
visuddhiya  .  .  .  N°assa    sacchikiriyaya    D    11.290 ;    S 
V.167,   185  ;   bhavayitva  sucimaggar)  n°  -ogadha-gami- 
nag  .  .  .  Vbh    426  ;    adimhi   silai)    dasseyya,    majjhe 
maggai]     vibhavaye,     pariyosanamhi     nibbanai)    .    .    . 
DA   1. 1 76.  —  N.-gamanai)   maggai):   tattha  me  nirato 
mano  "  my  heart  rejoices  in  the  path   to  Nibbana  " 
S   1. 186;    N.-gamini    pafipada    A    iv.83    (the    path   to 
salvation).     Cp.  §§4*7.  —  3.  The  Search  for  N.  or  the 
goal     of     earnest     endeavour,      arogya-parama     labha 
nibbanai)  paramai]   sukhar),   atthangiko    ca  magganar) 
khemar)    amata-gaminai)   "  N.   is   a  higher   bliss    than 
acquisition  of  perfect  health,  the  eightfold  Path  (alone) 
of  all  leads  to  perfect  peace,  to  ambrosia  "  M  1.508,  cp. 
Dh  2114  ("  the  fullest  gain  is  for  health  etc.  ;  N.  is  the 
highest  happiness  "   DhA   111.267).     Similarly :   khanti 
paramar)  tapo  titikkha,   n°i)  paramai)  vadanti  buddha 
D  11.49  =Dh  184;    n°r)  paramai)  sukhai) :  Dh  204  =Sn 
237  =  J  111.195  :  id. :  Dh  203  ;  jhanag  upasampajja  .  .  . 
okkamanaya  n.''assa  A  iv.iii  sq.  ;   cp.  230  sq. ;  katu- 
viyakato  bhikkhu  .  .  .  araka  hoti  N°a  A  1.281  ;    n°r) 
ajjhagamui)  sapaiifla  S  i.'j2  ;  devalokaii  ca  te  yanti  .  .  . 
anupubbena   n^g   adhigacchanti  pandita  A   1.162  ;   n°g 
abhikankhati    S    1.198;    abhipassati    A    1.147;    tinna- 
kathankatho  visallo  n.-&bhirato  Sn  86  ;  bhikkhu  bhabbo 
anuttarar)  sitibhavar)  sacchikatur)  .  .  .  panltAdhimutto 
hoti  n.-4bhirato  ca  A  111.435  ;    n.-Abhirato  .  .  .  sabba- 
dukkha  pamuccati  S  1.38;  n.-ogadhag  brahraacariyai) 
vussati  n.-parayanag  n.-pariyosanai)  S  Iii.i89=v.2i8 ; 
n°r)  gavesanto  carami  (Bodhisat,  J  1.61).     All  means  of 
conduct  &  all  ideals  of  reason  &  intellect  lead  to  one  end 
only :  Nibbana.     This  is  frequently  expressed  by  var. 
similes  in  the  phrase  n.-ninna,  °pona,  °pabbhara,  e.  g. 
S  v.75  =  134  =  137  =  19(3  ;  V.244;  A  v.75,  134,  190,  244  = 
291  ;    Vv    84*2      Saddahano    arahatar)    dhammarj    n.- 
pattiya  sussusa   labhate  pafiflai)   appamatto   S  1.214  = 
Sn  186.  cp.  S  1.4^  ;  Gotarao  n.-patisarjyuttaya  dhammiya 
kathaya  bhikkhu  sandasseti  S  1.2  14  =  192  =210  ;  Ud  80  ; 
n°0  pariyesati  A  11.247 ;    n.-pariyosana  sabbe  dhamma 
A  V.107;  n.-ponai)  me  manasar)  bhavissati,  sagyojana 
pahanar)  gacchanti  A  in. 443  ;  odhunitvS  malai)  sabbag 
patva   n.-sampadag  muccati  sabba-dukkhehi ;    sa   hoti 
sabbasampada    A    iv.239 ;    nibbijjha    sabbaso    kame 
sikkhe     n°g     attano    Sn    940,     cp      106 1.  —  4.    Some 
Epithets  of   Nibbana:    akutobhayag  A   11.24=  It   '22; 
accutag  padag  (careyya  aditta-siso  va  patthayag  a.  p.) 
S    III. 143:    Sn    K186;    patta    te   acalafthanag    yattha 
gantva  na  socare  Vv  51*;  amatag  A  11.247;   M  111.224 
(Bhagava  attha,<isa  r.ir.ncsa  a  "assa  data);  Miln  319; 
Vv  64"  (apapuranto  a  "assa  dv5rag) ;  VvA  85  (a-rasa) : 
Vv  5020  (amatogadha  maegd  =  nibb°-g5niini  patipada) ; 
asnosadhammag    Sn    7,-,t  .     kfiemag    appatibhayag    S 
IV.175  ;  S  i.i89  =  Sn  454  ;  Th  2,  350  (°t(hane  vimutta  te 
patta  te  acalag  sukhag);  iM  1.508  (+ amatagaminag) ; 
A  11.247  (yogakkliemag  anuttarag) ;  same  at  A  iii.294  : 
Tt  37;  Dh  23.  —  tanhakkhaya  Vv   73";    fhanag  dud- 


dasag  S  1. 136  (=sabba-sankhara-samatho) ;  dhuvag 
(q.  v.);  niccag  Kvu  121;  nekkhammag  A  1.147  (°g 
datfhu  khemato  .  .  .  nibbanag  abhipassanto) ;  Vv 
84*2.  sabba-gantha-pamocanag  (deliverance  from  all 
ties)  S  1.2 10;  11.278  (sabbadukkha") ;  It  222=  A  11.24; 
yathabhutag  vacanag  S  iv.195;  yathasukhag  (the 
Auspicious)  A  iv.415  sq.  ;  (chanda-)  raga  vinodanag 
Sn  1086 ;  ragakkhayo  (dosa°,  moha°)  S  v. 8 ;  raga- 
vinayo  (dosa°,  moha°)  ibid.,  santi  (calm,  peace)  Vv 
go*'  =  Sn  204  (chandaraga-viratto  bhikkhu  pai\iianava 
ajjhaga  amatag  santig  nibbanapadag  accutag) ;  VvA 
219  (  =  acala);  santimaggag  eva  bruhaya  n°g  Sugatena 
desitag  Dh  285  =Nett  36 ;  sandit^ikag  akslikag  etc.  ; 
A  1. 158;  same  bhumibhago  ramaniyo  S  iii.iog;  sassa- 
tag  Kvu  34  ;  suvatthi  Sn  235.  —  6.  N.  is  realisable  in 
this  world,  i.  e.  in  this  life  if  it  ts  mature  (difjhe  va 
dhamme) :  S  11.18  =  115=111.163  =  ^.141  (dittha-dh-n- 
patta) ;  M  11.228;  A  iv. 353  =358,  cp.  454.  —  8.  Defini- 
tions with  regard  to  the  destruction  of  the  causes  or 
substrata  of  life  (cp.  above  I.) :  taijhiya  vippahSnena 
n°g  iti  vuccati  S  1.39  =  Sn  1 109 ;  as  sabba-sankhara- 
samatho  (calming  down  of  all  vital  elements)  Vin  1.5  ; 
S  1.136;  A  11.118  =  111.164;  IV. 423  ;  V.8,  no,  320,  354; 
akii^canag  anadanag  etag  dipag  an^parag  n°g  iti  nam 
brumi  jaramaccu-parikkhayag  Sn  1094  ;  bhayanirodho 
n'g  ti  S  11.117;    A  v.9 ;    raga-kkhayo    (dosa",   moha°) 

5  IV.251  =261  ;  virago  nirodho  n°g  in  typical  &  very 
freq.  exposition  at  Nd2=S  I.i36»i.  See  also  vana  & 
cp.  the  foil. :  tanha-sankhata-vanSbhavato  n°g  SnA 
253;  nikkhantag  vanato  ti  n°g  KhA  151;  kilesa-n° 
ass'  api  anupada  parinibbanass'  Spi  santike  yeva  DhA 
1.286  (on  Dh  32).  — 7.  N.  as  perfect  wisdom  and  what 
is  conducive  to  such  a  state  (sagvattati).  The  foil, 
phrase  is  one  of  the  oldest  stereotype  phrases  in  the 
Canon  &  very  freq.  ;  it  is  used  of  all  the  highest  means 

6  attainments  of  conduct  &  meditation  &  may  be  said 
to  mark  the  goal  of  perfect  understanding  &  a  perfect 
philosophy  of  life.  It  is  given  in  2  variations,  viz.  in 
a  simple  form  as  "  upasamaya  abhiiiiiaya  sambodhaya 
nibbanaya  sagvattati,"  with  ref.  to  majjhima  pafipada 
at  Vin  i.io=S  iv.331  =v.42i  ;  of  satta  bojjhanga  at 
S  V.80  ;  and  in  a  fuller  form  as  "  ekanta-nibbidaya 
viragaya  nirodhaya  upasamaya  etc.  as  above "  at  D 
1.189  (negative)  ;  11.251  (of  brahmacariyag),  285  ; 
III. 130  (sukhallikanuyoga,  neg.)  136  (avyakatag,  neg.) ; 
S  11.223  (brahmacariya) ;  v. 82  (satta  bojjhanga),  179 
(satipatthana),  255  (iddhipada),  361  (ariyamagga),  438 
A  111.83,  326  sq.  ;  etc.  —  Cp.  n-sagvattanika  S  v.97 
(upekhasambojjhanga) ;    Nd*    281    (neg.    of   tamo). — 

8.  N.  as  the  opposite  of  raga  (passion,  lust).  Freq.  is 
the  comb"  of  viraga  nirodha  nibbana,  almost  used  as 
three  synonyms,  thus  at  S  11.18;  Vin  111.20  =  111; 
A  11. 118=111. 164  =lv.423=v.8=Nd2  under  Nibbana; 
A  11.34  =  It  88  (dbammanag  aggag  akkhayati,  mada- 
nimmadano  pipasa-vinayo  Siaya-samugghato  vatt- 
upacchedo  tanhakkhayo  virago  nirodha  nibbanag),  cp. 
Vin  111.20;:^;.  Similarly  S  1.192  (Sugatag  payirupasati 
desentag  virajag  dhammag  nibbanag  akutobhayag).  — 

9.  Various  Characterisations  &  Stmiles  (cp.  above  II. 
A  4  &  5).  sukkdbhijatiko  samino  aka^hag  asukkag 
n°g  abhijayati  D  in. 251  ;  A  in. 384  sq.  ;  anicca  sabbe 
sankhara  dukkha  "natta  ca  sankhata :  nibbanaB  c'  eva 
pafmatti  anatta  iti  nicchayS  Vin  v.86.  On  anicca  & 
anatta  in  rel.  to  N.  see  also  S  iv.133  sq. ;  A  iv.353 ; 
dukkhato  &  sukhato  n°g  samanupassati  A  111.442. 
On  comparison  with  a  lamp  see  e.  g.  S  1.159  =  D  11.157  = 
Th  I  905  (pajjotass'  eva  nibbanag  vimokkho  cetaso 
ahu),  A  IV. 3  (pajjotass'  eva  n.  vimokkho  hoti  cetaso); 
Sn  235  (  .  .  .  te  khiijablja  aviriijhichanda  nibbanti 
dhira  yath4yag  padipo). 

-abhtrata  fond  of  N.  (cp.  III.  3)  S  1.38 ;  A  111.435 ; 
Sr.  86  (visalla+  ) ;  -ogadha  merging  into  N.  (of  brah- 
macariya) S  HI. 189:  v..?i8;  A  ii.26  =  It  28;  Vbh  426. 
cp  amatogadha  A  v.107;  -gamana  (magga;  cp.  III.  2) 
leading  to  N.  D  11.223  ;  S  1.186,  217  ;  A  iv.83  ;  (dhamma;) 


Nibbapana 


201 


Nibbisati 


S  V.I  I  ;  Sn  233  ;  -dhatu  the  sphere  or  realm  of  N.  always 
in  phrase  anupadisesasaya  n.-dhatuya  parinibbayate 
Vin  11.239;  D  III. 135;  It  38,  121  ;  Ps  l.ioi  ;  cp.  raga- 
vinayo  n.-dhatuya  adbivacanar)  S  v. 8.  See  parinib- 
bayin  ;  -ninna  (+ °pona,  "pabbhara ;  cp.  III.  3)  con- 
verging into  N.  A  III. 443  ;  Vv  84*2  &  passim ;  -patisafi- 
fiuta  (dhammikatha ;  cp.  III.  2)  relating  or  referring  to 
N.  S  1.114  =  192-210;  Ud  80;  -patta  having  attained 
N.  (dittha-dhamma°,  see  above  III.  5)  S  11.18  =  114  = 
III. 163;  -patti  attainment  of  N.  S  1.48,  2i4=Sn  186; 
-pada  =  Nibbana  (see  pada  3)  Sn  204.  -pariyosana 
ending  in  N.  having  its  final  goal  in  N.  S  111.189  ;  v. 218  ; 
A  v.  107;  -saijvattanika  conducive  to  N.  ;  contributing 
toward  the  attainment  of  N.  S  v. 97  ;  Nd^  281  (a°)  ;  cp. 
above  III.  7;  -sacchikiriya  realisation  of  N.  (identical 
with  nana  and  constituting  the  highest  ideal ;  cp.  above 
III.  2)  Sn  267.  Cp.  also  D  11.290  ;  S  v. 167  ;  A  ill. 423  ; 
V.141  ;  -safiiia  perception  of  N.  A  111.443  ;  -sampatti 
successful  attainment  of  N.  Kh  vin.13;  -satnpada  the 
blessing  of  the  attainment  of  N.  A  iv.239. 

Nibbapana  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  nibbapeti]  means  of  extinguish- 
ing, extinction,  quenching  S  1.188  (cittag  pari(Jayhati : 
nibbapanari  bruhi  =  allayment  of  the  glow);  A  iv.320 
(celassa  n''aya  chandag  karoti :  try  to  put  out  the 
burning  cloth) ;  Miln  302  (jhjyamano  n^g  alabhamSno), 
318  (parilaha°). 

Nibbapita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  nibbipeti]  extinguished,  put  out, 
quenched  J  111.99  (  =  nicchuddha). 

Nibbapeti  [Sk.  ni(r)varayati,  Caus.  of  ni(r)varati,  influ- 
enced in  meaning  by  nirvapayati.  Caus.  of  nirvati  = 
make  cool  by  blowing  (e.  g.  RV  x.i6").  See  nibbuta  on 
etym.j  i.  to  extinguish,  put  out,  quench  S  1.188  (maha- 
ragar)) ;  It  93  (rig-aggir)  ;  &  nibbapetva  aggir)  nipaka 
parinibbanti) ;  cp.  aggir)  nijjaleti  J  vi.495  ;  Pv  1.8' 
(varina  viya  osincai)  sabbai)  darai)  nibbapaye) ;  Miln 
304  (aggikhandhar)  mahamegho  abhippavassitva  n), 
318  (nibbapehi  me  hadaya-parilahar)),  410  (megho 
unhar)  n.) ;  DhA  11. 241  (fire);  Sdhp  552  (bhavadukkh' 
aggir)).  —  2.  to  cleanse,  purify  (cittar).  one's  heart) 
Vism  305.  — pp.  nibbapita.     See  also  nibbapana. 

Nibbayati  [Sk.  ni-(or  nir-)vriyate.  Pass,  of  nt(r)varati, 
influenced  by  nirvayati  intrs.  to  cease  to  blow ;  see  on 
etyra.  &  Pali  derivation  nibbuta]  i.  to  be  cooled  or 
refreshed,  to  be  covered  up  =  to  be  extinguished,  go  out 
(of  fire),  to  cease  to  exist,  always  used  with  ref.  to  fire 
or  heat  or  (fig.)  burning  sensations  (see  nibbana  II.  A 
end) :  aggikikhandho  purimassa  ca  upSdanassa  puriyS- 
danS  aflfiassa  ca  anupahara  anaharo  nibbSyeyya  S  11.85 
(opp.  jaleyya)  ;  do.  of  telag  &  vat  fig  paficca  telappa- 
dipo  n.  S  II. 86  =  111. i26  =  iv. 213  =v. 319  ;  sace  te  purato 
so  aggi  nibbayeyya  janeyyasi  tvag  :  ayag  .  .  .  aggi 
nibbuto  M  1.487;  A  iv.70  (papa^ka  n.);  aggi  udake 
tinukka  viya  n.  J  1.21.1  ;  matuhadayag  n.  J  1.61  ;  aggi 
upadana-sankhaya  n.  Miln  304. — aor.  nibbayi  [Sk. 
niravarij  J  1.27  (mano  n.  :  was  refreshed)  212  (aggi  udake 
n. :  was  extinguished) ;  vi.349  (cooled  down).  —  2.  to  go 
out  (of  light)  Vism  4311  (dipa  nibbayigsu  the  lights  went 
out);  ThA  154  (dipacci  n,  nirasana :  went  out).  See 
also  pariniblnyati  il-  cp.  nibbuta,  nibbapeti,  nibbapana. 

Nibbayin  see  pari". 

Nibbihana  (adj.-n.)  ffr.  nibbahcti]  leading  out,  removing, 
saving;  (nt.)  removal,  clearance,  refuge,  way  out  Miln 
119,  198,  295,  309,  326  (°magga).  [Miln.  the  only 
references  I] 

Nibb&hati  [nis-f-  vahati]  to  lead  out,  carry  out,  save  from, 
remove  Miln  188.  —  2nd  Caus.  nibbahapeti  to  have 
brought  out,  to  unload  (a  waggon)  Vin  11.159  (hiraftiiag) ; 
111.43.     See  also  nibbihana  &  nibbuyhati. 


Nibbikappa     [nis  -1-  vikappa] 
Vism  193. 


distinction,     distinguishing 


Nibbik&ra  (adj.)  [nis-l- vikSra]  steady,  unchanged,  stead- 
fast; persevering  J  1.66;  PvA  178,  253  (-(-nicca);  Sn.\ 
189,  497  ;  Vism  311. 

Nibbicikiccha  (f.)  [nis-l-  vicikiccha]  surety,  reliance,  trust 
S  11.84  '■  V.221  ( =  nikkankha) ;  VvA  85  (=ekagsiki). 

Nibbij]hati  [nis-(- vijjhati,  vyadh]  to  pierce,  transfix, 
wound  S  V.88  ( -I- padaleti) ;  Sdhp  153  (patodchi).  ger. 
nibbijjha  Sn  940  (=pativijjhitva  Nd'  420). — pp. 
nibbiddha.     Cp.  abhi". 

Nibbittlut  (pp.)  [nis-(- vittha,  of  nibbisati]  gained,  earned 
Vin  IV.265  ;  Sn  25  ;  SnA  38. 

NibbiQ^a  (adj.)  [Sk.  nirviijna,  pp.  of  nibbindati]  ti'-ed  of. 
disgusted  with  (c.  instr.  or  loc),  wearied  of,  dissatisfied 
with,  "fed  up"  J  1.347;  vi.62;  Th  2,  478  (=viratta 
ThA  286);  DhA  1.85  ("hadaya);  VvA  207  ("rupa) ; 
PvA  159  (tattha-vasena  n-manaso  tired  of  living  there), 
272  ("rupa),  283  ("rupa,  tired  of:  purohite). 

Nibbidft  (f)  [Sk.  nirvid,  f.  (also  BSk.  e.  g.  Lai.  V.  3.10)  & 
nirveda ;  to  nibbindati]  weariness,  disgust  with  worldly 
life,  tedium,  aversion,  indifference,  disenchantment. 
N.  is  of  the  preliminary  &  conditional  states  for  the 
attainment  of  Nibbjina  (see  nibbana  II  B  i)  &  occurs 
frequently  together  with  viraga,  vimutti  &  nibbana  in 
the  formula :  etag  ekanta-nibbidaya  viragaya  niro- 
dhaya  .  .  .  sambodhSya  nibbanaya  sagvattati  "  this 
leads  to  being  thoroughly  tired  (of  the  world),  to  dis- 
passionateness, to  destruction  (of  egoism),  to  perfect 
wisdom,  to  Nibbana,"  e.  g.  at  D  1.189  ;  S  v. 82,  179,  255, 
fj6i  ;  A  III. 83  ;  iv.143  ;  v. 2 16.  —  In  other  connections  : 
Vin  1. 15  (nibbidSya  cittag  saothasi) ;  D  in.  130  sq.  ; 
S  11.30  ;  III. 40  ;  179,  189  ;  iv.86,  141  (read  nibbid.'iya  for 
nibbindiya?);  A  1.5 1,64;  in.  19,  200,  325  sq.  ;  iv.99,  336  ; 
v. 2  sq.,  31 1  sq.  ;  J  1.97  '•  iv.47'.  473  :  Sn  340  ;  Ps  1.195  ; 
11.43  sq.  :  Vbh  330  ;  Nett  27,  29  ;  Vism  650.    Cp.  abhi". 

Nibbiddha  [pp.  of  nibbijjhati]  i.  in  phrase  °pingala  (with) 
disgustingly  red  (eyes)  (perhaps  =  nibbinna  ?)  J  v.42  (of 
a  giant).  —  2.  with  ref.  to  a  road  :  broken  up.  i.  e.  much 
frequented,  busy  street  J  vi.2  76  (of  vithi,  bazaar,  in 
contrast  with  a-nibbiddha-raccha  carriage-road,  which 
is  not  a  thoroughfare.  The  reading  patatthiyo  at 
J  VI. 2  76,  for  which  nibbiddha-vithiyo  is  the  C.  expl" 
is  to  be  corrected  into  pathaddhiyo). 

Nibbindati  [nis-(-  vindati,  vid']  to  get  wearied  of  (c.  loc.)' 
to  have  enough  of,  be  satiated,  turn  away  from,  to  be 
disgusted  with.  In  two  roots  A.  vind:  prs.  nibbindati 
etc.  usually  in  comb"  with  yirajjati  &  viniuccati  (cp. 
nibbana  III.  2).  Vin  1.35  ;  S  n.94  ;  iv.86,  140  ;  A  v. 3  ; 
Dh  277  sq.  ;  It  33  ;  J  1.267  '■  Miln  235,  244  ;  Sdhp  612. 
ppr.  nibbindag  S  iv.86 ;  Pv\  36  (nibbinda-manasa) ; 
ger.  nibbindiya  J  v. 121  ("karin).  —  B  vid:  Pot.  nibbide 
(v.  I.  BB  nibbije)  J  v. 368  (  =  nibbindeyya  Com.);  ger. 
nibbijjitva  J  1.82,  &  nibbijja  Sn  448=S  1.124  (nibbij- 
japema  =  nibbijja  pakkameyya  SnA  393). — pp.  nib- 
binna.     See  also  nibbida. 

Nibbiriya  (adj.)  [nis-(- viriya]  lacking  in  strength,  indolent, 
slothful,  weak  J  iv.131  ;  PvA  175  (  =  alasa.  kusita], 

Nibbiyara  (adj.)  [nis-^  vivara]  without  holes  or  fi.'ssurcs. 
without  omissions  J  v.429 ;  VvA  275  (=ativa  sangata). 

Nibbisa  [to  nibbisati]  earning,  wages  Th  i,  606-1003  = 
Miln  45  (cp.  Manu  vi.45) ;  SnA  38. 

Nlbbisanka  (adj.)  [iris-f- visanka,  Sk.  viianka]  fearless,  not 
hesitating,  undaunted  SnA  61. 

Nibbiiati  [nis-^  visati]  to  enter  into;  to  earn,  gain,  find, 
enjoy,  only  in  pp.  anibbisag  not  finding  Th  2,  159 
( rr: avindanto  ThA  142);  J  l.70=Dh  153.  —  pp.  nib- 
bittha.     See  also  nibbisa. 


Nibbisaya 


202 


Nimantaka 


Nibbisaya  (adj.)  [nis+visaya]  having  no  residence,  ban- 
ished, driven  from  (-")  J  11.401. 

Nibbisevana  (adj.)  [nis+  visevana]  not  self-indulgent,  self- 
denying,  meek,  tame,  gentle  J  11. 2 10  (dametva  nibbise- 
vanar)  katva),  351  ;  v. 34,  381,  45O ;  vi.255 ;  PhA  1.288 
(cittar)  ujug  akutilar)  n.  karoti),  295;  VvA  284  (°bhava 
=  jitindriya) 

Nibbisesa  (adj.)  [nis-l-  visesa]  showing  no  difference,  without 
distinction,  equal,  similar  J  n.32  ;  vi.355 ;  Miln  249. 

Nibbajjhati  [ni-l- yujjhati,  yndb.  Pali  form  difficult  to 
explain:  niy°  =  niyy°  =  nivv°=nibb°]  to  wrestle,  to 
fight  with  fists  Vin  111.180.  —  pp.  nibbuddha. 

Nibhnta  (adj.)  [Nibbuta  represents  Sk.  nirvj-ta  (e.  g.  AvS 
1.48)  as  well  as  nivrta,  both  pp.  of  vr,  which  in  itself 
combines  two  meanings,  as  exhibited  in  cognate 
languages  and  in  Sk.  itself :  (a)  Idg.  uer  to  cover,  cover 
up  (Lat.  apcrio  = 'apa-verio  to  cover"up,  Sk.  varutram 
upper  garment.  "  cover  ")  and  (b)  "nel  to  resolve,  roll, 
move  (Lat.  volvo  =  revolve ;  Gr.  i'Xii,  i\t'"i  ;  Sk.  vaija 
reed  =Lat.  ulva  ;  Sk.  urmi  wave  ;  P.  valli  creeper,  valita 
wrinkled),  •ner  is  represented  in  P.  by  e.  g.  vivarati 
to  open,  nivareti  to  cover,  obstruct,  nivarana,  nivarana 
obstruction;  'ijel  by  aviita,  khandh-avara.  parivara, 
vyavaja  (busy  with  =  moving  about),  samparivareti. 
Thus  we  gain  the  two  meanings  comb''  and  used  pro- 
miscuously in  the  one  word  because  of  their  semantic 
affinity  :  (a)  *nivrta  covered  up,  extinguished,  quenched., 
and  (b)  *nirvrta  without  movement,  with  motion  finished 
(cp.  nitthita),  ceasing,  exhaustion,  both  represented,  by 
P.  nibbuta.  —  In  derivations  we  have  besides  the  root- 
form  vr  (  =  P.  bbu°)  that  with  guna  vf  (cp.  Sk.  varayati, 
vrayati)  or  vrB  =  P.*  bba°  (with  which  also  cp.  pafi- 
vana  =  *prativarana).  The  former  is  in  nibbuti  (ceas- 
ing, extinction,  with  meaning  partly  influenced  by 
nibbutthi=Sk.  nirvrjti  pouring  of  water),  the  latter  in 
instr.  nibbati  and  nibbayati  (to  cease  or  to  go  out)  and 
trs.  nibbapeti  (Cans. :  to  make  cease,  to  stop  or  cool) 
and  further  in  nibbana  (nt.  instr.  abstr.)  (the  dying 
out)]  (lit.)  extinguished  (of  fire),  cooled,  quenched  (fig.) 
desireless  (often  with  nicchata  &  sTtibhuta),  appeased, 
pleased,  happy.  —  (a)  (lit.)  aggi  anaharo  n.  M  1.487; 
Sn  19  (gini  n.  =  magga-salila-sekena  n.  SnA  28);  J 
IV. 39 1  (anibbute  payase) ;  Miln  304  (aggikkhandha),  346 
(mahameghena  n^g  pathavig);  ThA  154  (anupadana 
dip'  acci) ;  KhA  194  (padipo  n.).  —  (b)  (fig.)  comb"* 
with  sitibhuta  {&  nicchata):  Vin  1.8;  M  1.341  ;  A  n.208 
=  D  iii.233=Pug  5O.  61  ;  A  iv.410;  v.65;'Sn  593,  707; 
Pv  1.8^.  —  In  phrase  anupadaya  nibbuta:  S  u.279; 
A  1. 162;  iv.29o  =  Ph  414  ^Sn  638.  —  In  other  con- 
nections: attadandesu  n.  sadanesu  anadano  S  1.236  = 
Dh  40f)  --Sn  630  ;  afifuiya  nibbuta  dhfra  S  1.24  ;  tadanga- 
n.  S  III. 43  ;  ejanugo  anejassa  nibbutassa  anibbuto  It  91  ; 
vitatanho  n.  Sn  1041  ;  tinna-sokapariddavo  n.  Dh  196; 
rfig"  ?.ggimhi  n.  Cic  n.  mata.  pita,  nari  J  1.60  ;  n.  veyya- 
karanena  Miln  ^47;  upadananai)  abhavcna  .  .  .  kiiesa- 
nibbancna  n.  DhA  iv.ig4.  —  See  also  abhinibbuta  and 
parinibbuta. 

Nibbnti  (f)  [Sk.  nirvrtti.  abstr.  to  nibbuta]  allaymcnt, 
refreshment,  cooling,  peace,  happiness  J  1.3  (khemai) 
pariyessami  n°r));  Sn  228  (nikkamino  n°r)  bhunja- 
mana).  917.  933  (santi  ti  n"!]  natva) ;  Nd'  399  ;  Pv  i.j* 
(n^i)  n'  adhigacchami  =  quenching  of  hunger  &  thirst) ; 
KhA  185  (^patippassaddha-kilesa-daratha). 

Nibbaddha  [Sk.  niyuddha,  pp.  of  nibbujjhati]  wrestling, 
(ist-fight  D  i.O  ( =  mallayuddhai)  DA  1.85);  DhsA  403. 

Nibbayhati  [Sk.  niruhyate,  nis-t-  vuyhati.  Pass,  of  vahati. 
cp.  nibbahatij  to  be  led  out  to  (c.  ace.) :  susanat)  Th  2, 
4I18  (^upaniyati  Th.\  2S4);  to  be  led  out  of  =  to  be 
saved  S  i.i.  cp.  RV  1.117.  14;  vi.(>2.  6. 


KibbnsitattA  (nibbusitattan  ?)  [Sk.  'nir-vasit-atman  or 
•nirvasitatvar)  (nt.  abstr.),  to  nis-vasati.  cp.  nirvasana 
=  nibbisaya]  a  dislocated  or  disconcerted  mind,  unrest, 
uneasiness  D  1.17. 

NibbecikicchS  =  nibbicikiccha  (certainty,  doubtlessness) 
Nd'  185  (opp.  savicikiccha). 

Nibbejaniya  at  S  1.124  should  probably  be  read  as  nibbe- 
^aniya  (rejecting,  evading). 

Nibbethana  (nt.)  [Sk.  nirvestana,  nis-l-  vethana]  unwinding, 
fig.  explanation  Miln  28. 

Nibbethita  [pp.  of  nibbetheti]  explained,  unravelled,  made 
clear  Miln  123  (f  u°). 

Nibbetheti  [Sk.  nirvestate,  nis+  vetheti,  to  twist  round] 
I.  to  unravel,  untwist,  unwind;  to  explain,  make  clear 
D  1.54  (nibbethiyamana,  v.  1.  BB  nibbedh") ;  Pv  iv.32» 
(°ento  =  nivefhlyamana  PvA  253  v.  1.  BB  nibbedh") ; 
Miln  3;  Sdhp  153.  —  2.  to  deny,  reject  Vin  11.79; 
D  1.3  (  =  apanetabba  Com.);  S  in. 12  (v.  1.  BB  °dh°).'  — 
3.  to  give  an  evasive  answer  Vin  111.162.  —  See  also 
nibbejaniya.  —  pp.  nibbethita,  q.  v. 

Nibbedha  [nis-l-  vedha.  to  vyadh]  penetration,  insight ;  adj.  : 
penetrating,  piercing,  scrutinising,  sharp.  Freq.  in 
phrase  nibbedha-bhagiya  (sharing  the  quality  of  pene- 
tration), with  ref.  to  samadhi.  saniia  etc.  [cp.  BSk. 
nirvedha"  Divy  50;  but  also  nirbheda"  AvS  n.i8i.  of 
kusalamiilani ;  expl*"  as  lobhakkhandhassa  (etc.)  nib- 
bijjhanSni  at  Nett  274]  D  111.251.  277;  A  in. 427 ; 
Vbh  330;  Nett  21.  48.  143  sq.,  153  sq. ;  Vism  15,  88; 
DhsA  162. — Also  in  nibbedha-gamini  (paili\a)  It  35; 
&  dunnibbedha  (hard  to  penetrate,  difficult  to  solve 
Miln  155,  233  (pafiha) ;  spelt  dunnivetba  at  Miln  90). 

Nibbedhaka  (adj.)  [nis+  vedhaka,  to  vyadh]  piercing, 
sharp,  penetrating,  discriminating ;  only  in  f.  nibbe- 
dhika  (cp.  avedhika),  appl''  to  paflfla  (wisdom)  D 
in. 237,  268;  S  v. 197,  199;  M  1.356;  A  1.45;  II. 167; 
III. 152  ;  410  sq.,  416;  V.15;  Ps  11.20 1  ;  Nd'  235,  3' 
(+ tikkha-pafli\a).  415.  689;  J  11.9,  297;  iv.267.    - 

Nibbematika  (adj.)  [nis-l- vimati-(- ka]  not  disagreeing,  of 
one  accord,  unanimous  Vin  11.65  ;  DhA  1.34. 

Nibbhacceti  [Sk.  nirbhartsayati.  nis-f  bhaccheti]  to 
threaten,  revile,  scorn  J  ui.338. 

Nibbhaya  (adj.)  [nis-f-  bhaya]  free  from  fear  or  danger, 
fearless,  unafraid  J  1.274  •  mSo  ;  v.287 ;  Vism  512. 

Nibbhojati  [Sk.  ni-  or  nirbhujati.  nis4-  bhujati]  to  twist 
round,  bend.  wind,  contort  oneself  Miln  253.     Cp.  vi°. 

Nibbhoga  (adj.)  [Sk.  nirbhoga,  nis-^bhoga']  deprived  of 
enjoyment ;  deserted,  being  of  no  avail,  useless  J  vi.556  ; 
P\'  1. 12.     Cp.  vi°. 

Nibbhoga  [ni-(-  bhoga^  bending,  contortion  J  n.264 
(otlha°). 

Nibyaggha  see  nivyaggha. 

Nibha  (adj.)  [Sk.  nibha,  to  bhiiti]  shining:  like,  equal  to, 
resembling  (-°)  J  v. 372  ;  Vv  4i)» ;  Pv  iv.32 ;  VvA  122 
(vanna°=varina) ;  Nd'  608. 

Nibhata  (f)  [abstr.  to  nibha]  likeness,  appearance  VvA 

27- 

Nibha  (f.)  [to  nibha]  shine,  lustre,  splendour  VvA  179 
(nibhati  dippati  ti  nibha). 

Nibhati  [ni-nbhati]  to  shine  VvA  179  (=- dippati). 

Nimajihima  (adj.)  the  middle  one  J  v. 371. 

Nimantaka  (adj.-n.)  one  who  invites  Miln  305. 


Nimantana 


203 


Nimmadana 


Nimantana  (nt.)  [to  nimanteti]  invitation  Vin  1.58  — 
11.175;  ^  i.iOG;  M  1.77;  A  1.295;  J  l.iiO  (n).  412; 
Pug  55. 

Nimantanika  (adj.)  inviting;  (nt.)  N.  of  a  Suttanta  M 
1.331  ;  quoted  at  Vism  393. 

Nimantita  [pp.  of  nimanteti]  invited  Sn  p.  104 ;  PvA  2; 
(bhattena  to  the  meal),  86  (  =  amantita),  141. 

Nimanteti  [Sk.  nimantrayati,  ni+manteti]  to  send  a 
message,  to  call,  summon,  invite,  coax  (to  =  c.  insti.) 
Sn  981  (nimantayi  aor.,  asanena  asked  him  to  sit  down) ; 
J  VI. 365  ;  Nd^  342;  DhA  in. 171  (°ayir|su) ;  DA  1.169; 
VvA  47  (paniyena  invite  to  a  drink) ;  PvA  75,  95.  — 
pp.  nimantita,  q.  v.  —  Cp.  abhi°. 

Nimitta  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  nimitta,  to  ma,  although  etym.  un- 
certain] I.  sign;  omen,  portent,  prognostication  D  1.9 
(study  of  omens  =  n.  satthai)  DA  1.92,  q.  v.  for  detailed 
expi°) ;  J  I.I  I  (caturo  nimitte  ndddasar)) ;  Miln  79,  178. 
Esp.  as  pubba"  signs  preceding  an  event,  portents,  warn- 
ings, foreshadowiugs  S  v.  154,  278,  442  ;  It  76  (cp.  Divy 
193,  of  the  waning  of  a  god) ;  J  1.48,  50  (32  signs  before 
birth,  some  at  DA  1.61),  59;  Miln  298;  Vism  577. — 
2.  outward  appearance,  mark,  characteristic,  attribute, 
phenomenon  (opp.  essence)  D  in. 249  ;  A  1.256;  111.319, 
375  sq.  ;  IV. 33,  418  sq.  ;  J  1.420  ;  Psi.6o,  91  sq.,  164,  170  ; 
11.39,  64  ;  Vbh  193  sq.  —  Mental  reflex,  image  (with  ref. 
to  jhana)  Vism  123,  cp.  DhsA  167.  —  Specified  e.  g. 
as  foil.:  ojarika  S  v.259  ;  pasadaniya  S  v. 156;  pacca- 
vekkhana"  D  111.27S;  Vbh  334;  bahiddha-sankhara" 
Ps  1.65  sq. ;  bala°  (opp.  pandita")  M  111.163  '•  A  1.102  ; 
mukha°  (  =  face)  D  1.80;  S  111.103;  v.121;  A  v.92,  97 
sq.,  103  ;  rupa°,  sadda"  etc.  S  iii.io  ;  M  1.296  ;  Ps  1.92, 
112  ;  samatha"  D  in. 213  ;  samadhi°  etc.  A  1.256  sq.  ; 
subha°  (&  asubha")  S  v.64,  103  sq.  ;  A  1.3  sq.,  87,  200  ; 
V.I 34;  Vism  178  sq.  nimittar)  ganhati  to  make  some- 
thing the  object  of  a  thought,  to  catch  up  a  theme 
for  reflection  Vin  1.183,  cp.  S  v  150  sq.  (°r)  ugganhati) ; 
M  I.I  19  (=five  sorts  of  mental  images);  Nd*  659; 
DhsA  53  (=akara).  See  below  n-gahin  &  animitta. — 
nimittar)  parivajjeti  to  discard  the  phenomenal  S  1.188  ; 
Sn  341.  —  3.  mark,  aim :  in  nimittar)  karoti  to  pick  out 
the  aim,  to  mark  out  J  v. 436  ;  Nd^  235,  1'' ;  Miln  418.  — 
4.  sexual  organ  (cp.  lakkharia)  Vin  111.129  (n.  &  a°,  as 
term  of  abuse) ;  see  also  kaja  &  kotacika.  —  5.  ground, 
reason,  condition,  in  nimittena  (instr.)  and  nimittag 
(ace.)  as  adv.  =by  means  of,  on  account  of  DhA  111.175 
(instr.)  PvA  8.  97  (jati-nimittarj),  106  (kig  n°r|=kiBsa 
hetu),  242  (yag  n°r)  =  yato  nidanag).  gahita-nimit- 
tena  "by  means  of  being  caught"  Vism  144— DhsA 
116  (read  trsl°  154  accordingly!),  adj.  nimitta  (-°) 
caused  by,  referring  to  PvA  64  (marana-nimittag 
rodanag).  —  animitta  free  from  marks  or  attributes, 
not  contaminated  by  outward  signs  or  ajjpearancc, 
undefilcd,  unaffected,  unconditioned  (opj).  sa°)  S  1.188; 
IV. 225  (phassa),  268,  360  (samadhi) ;  M  1.296  (ceto- 
vimutti) ;  A  1.82  ;  111.292  ;  iv.78  ;  Vin  in. 129 ;  Th  i,  92  ; 
D  III. 219,  249  ;  Dh  92  ;  Sn  342  ;  Ps  1.60,  91  ;  11.36,  59  sq. 
(vimokha),  65  sq.,  99;  Dhs  530  'read  a°  1-^-  ;,=./. 
Vism  236;  DhsA  223  (absence  of  the  3  lakkhaijas) ; 
Miln  333,  413  ;  Dh.\  11.172  ;  ThA  50.  See  a.lsoCpd.  199, 
211*.     sanimitta  S  v.213  sq.  ;  A  1.82. 

-&nusarin  following  outward  signs  (  =  °gahin)  A 
111.292  ;  Nett  25  ;  -kamma  prognostication,  prophecy 
Vin  v.  I  72  ;  Vbh  353;  -karana  =  gahin  S  iv.2g7;  -gahin 
"  taking  signs,"  enticed  or  led  away  by  outward  signs, 
entranced  with  the  general  appearance,  sensuously 
attracted. D  1.70  (cp.  Dialogues  1.80) ;  111.225  ;  S  iv.  104, 
168  ;  A  II.  16  ;  111.99  ;  V.348  ;  Pug  20,  24,  58  ;  Dhs  1345  ; 
Miln  367,  403.     Cp.  Vism  151,  209. 

Niminati  [Sk.  niminoti  in  diff.  meaning,  the  P.  meaning 
being  influenced  by  ma;  ni-(-  minati,  mi  to  fix,  measure 


cp 


ng  mflucnced  by  ma;  ni-(-  minati,  mi  to  fix,  measure 
Sk.  nimaya  barter,  change]  to  turn  round,  change ; 


to  barter,  exchange  for  (c.  instr.) :  pres.  imper.  nimina 
J  V.343  ( =r parivattehi  Com.);  pres.  ist  pi.  nimimhase 
J  11.369,  pot.  nimineyya  J  in. 63  ;  fut.  nimissati  J  v.271, 
453  (devatahi  nirayag);  aor.  nimmini  J  111.63 ;  ger. 
niminitva  Milo  279. 

Nimisa  [cp.  Vedic  nimis  f.  &  nimina  nt.]  winking,  shutting 
the  eyes  ;  animisa  not  winking  Davs  v.26.  See  also 
nimesa. 

Nimisata  (f)  [abstr.  to  nimisati]  winking  J  vi.336  (a°). 

Nimisati  [Sk.  nimi.sati,  ni-l-  misati]  to  wink  D  11.20  (aninii- 
santo,  not  winking;  v.  1.  BB  animm" ;  J  111.96  (um- 
misati-H).     Cp.  nimisata. 

Nimilati  (&  Nimmilati)  [ni-l-  milati]  to  shut,  close  (the 
eyes)  J  1.279;  DhA  11. 6  (akkhini  nimmilitug  nasakkhi). 
Caus.  nim(m)i-leti  id.  M  1.120;  DhA  11.28  (paralokag  ; 
opp.  ummileti) ;  J  1.279;  Vism  292  (akkhini  ni°). 

Nimogga  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  nimagna,  pp.  of  nimujjati]  plunged, 
immersed  in,  sunk  down  or  fallen  into  (-°)  (c.  loc.) 
Vin  III. 106  (guthakupe  sasisakag  n.);  D  1.75;  J  1.4; 
lH-393  (guthakalale),  415;  Nd'  26;  Pug  71  ;  Miln  262  ; 
Sdhp  573. 

Nimujja  (nimmujja)  [Sk.  *nimajj-ya]  diving,  immersion,  in 
cpd.  umraujja-nimujja(g  karoti)  D  1.78.  See  um- 
mujja. 

Nimujjati  [Sk.  nimajjati,  ni-(-  mujjati]  to  sink  down,  plunge 
into  (with  loc),  dive  in,  be  immersed  A  iv.i  i  ;  Pug  74  ; 
J  1.66,  70;  III. 163,  393  (kamakalale) ;  iv.139;  aor. 
nimujji  J  11.293  :  PvA  47  (udake).  —  Caus.  nimujjati  (so 
read  for  nimujjati  J  v. 268)  &  nimujjapeti  to  cause  to 
sink  or  dive,  to  drown  J  111.133;  iv.142  (navag).  — pp. 
nimugga  q.  v. 

Nimujiana  (nt.)  [Sk.  nimajjana]  diving,  ducking;  bathing 
PvA  47. 

Nimesa  [  =  nimisa,  cp.  Vedic  nimesa]  winking  Miln  194. 

Nimokkha  =  vimokkha  S  1.2  (v.  1.  SS  vi",  preferable). 

Nimba  [Sk.  nimba,  non-Aryan]  the  Nimb  tree  (.Azadi- 
rachta  Indica),  bearing  a  bitter  leaf,  &  noted  for  its  hard 
wood  Vin  1.152  (°kosa).  284  (id.),  201  ("kasava) ;  A  1.32  ; 
V.212;  Vv  33-'°  (°mutthi,  a  handful  of  N.  leaves);  J 
II. 105,  106;  DhA  1.52  (°kosa) ;  DhsA  320  ("panna,  the 
leaf  of  the  N.  as  example  of  tittaka,  bitter  taste)  :  VvA 
142  Cpalasa) ;  PvA  220  ("rukkhassa  daiidena  katasfila). 

NimmaQsa  (adj.)  [nis-l-magsa]  fleshless  M  1.5S,  364; 
Pv.\  68. 

Nimmakkha  (adj.)  [nis-f  makkha,  cp.  Sk.  nirmatsara 
without  egotism,  not  false,  not  slandering  Sn  56  (cp. 
Nd^  356  niakkha  — nifthuriya ;  see  also  SnA  108.  para- 
guna-vinasana-Iakkhano  makkho). 

Nimmakkhika  (adj.)  [Sk.  ninnak^ika]  free  from  flics 
J  1.262  :  DhA  1.59. 

Nimmajjana  (Nimminjana  ?)  [*mrd-yana  ?  perhaps  non- 
Aryan]  a  kind  of  (oil-)cake  Vv  a'-'^  (niminajjani— .  tila- 
pifinaka  VvA  147);  Pv  1.10'°  ("minjana,  v.  1.  B13  "maj- 
jani) ;  PvA  47  (doni°). 

Nimmathana  (nt.)  fnis-l- mathana]  crushing  J  in. 252  ; 
Vism  234  (sattu");  DhA  111.404;  VvA  284. 

Nimmatheti  [nis-l-  matheti]  to  crush  out,  suppress,  destroy 
J  i.3.(".     Cp.  abhimatthati. 

Nimmadana  (nt.)  [to  nimmadeti]  touching,  touch,  crush- 
ing, subduing  A  11.34  (mada-nimmadana,  crushing  out 
pride;  may,  however,  be  taken  as  nis-(-  mada  of  mBd  = 
"  de-priding,"  lit.  disintoxication);  Bu  1.81  ;  Vism  293. 


Nimmadaya 


204 


Niyyatta 


Nimmadaya  (adj.)  [Sk.  nirmrdya.  grd.  of  nimmadeti] 
suppressible  D  11.243. 

Nimmaddana  (nt.)  [nis+  mrd]  touching,  crushing  Miln  270 
(na  vato  hattha-gahaijar)  va  nimmaddanai)  va  upeti : 
the  wind  cannot  be  grasped). 

Nimmanussa  (nt.)  [nis+  raanussa+  ya]  void  of  men, 
absence  of  men  J  111.148. 

Nimmata  (adj.)  [nis+mala]  free  from  impurity,  stainless, 
clean,  pure  A  iv.340 ;  Dh  243;  N.d'  586;  Vism  58; 
Sdhp  250. 

Nimmata-pitika  (adj.)  [nis-i-  mata-pitika]  one  who  has 
neither  mother  nor  father,  an  orphan  DhA  n.72. 

Nimm&tar  [Sk.  nirmStr,  n.  ag.  of  nimminati]  maker, 
builder,  creator  D  1.18,  56  (in  formula:  brahma  .  .  . 
katta  nimmata  .   .   .). 

Nimmadeti  [either  =  Sk.  nirmrdayati  (m^)  or  *nirmadayati 
to  nirmada  free  from  pride  =  nirmana]  to  crush,  subdue, 
humiliate;  insult  D  1.92  (v.  1.  °maddeti;=DA  1.257 
nimmadati  nimmane  karoti),  93,  96. 

Nimmana'  (nt.)  [Sk.  nirmaija,  see  nimminati]  measuring ; 
production,  creation,  work ;  issara-n-hetu  caused  by 
God  M  II. 122  ;  A  1.173  ;  Vbh  367.  N.-rati  deva  a  class 
of  devas,  e.  g.  at  D  1.218  :  It  94  ;  Vism  225  ;  DA  i.i  14  ; 
ThA  169  ;  VvA  149.     Cp.  (para-)  nimmita. 

Nimmana'  (adj.)  [Sk.  nirmana,  nis+mana]  free  from 
pride,  humble  DA  1.257. 

Nimmaniyati  [Pass,  to  nimmana,  of  nis-l-  mana]  te  be 
abased,  to  be  mocked  Yin  11. 183. 

Nimmita  (adj. -pp.)  [pp.  of  nimminati]  measured  out, 
planned,  laid  out ;  created  (by  supernatural  power, 
iddhi) ;  measured,  stately  D  1.18,  56  (iddhiya  pi  DA 
1.167),  219  (Su°  devaputta.  Np.),  ibid.  (Paranimmita- 
vasavatti  deva  a  class  of  devas,  lit.  "  created  by  others," 
but  also  possessed  of  great  power  :  VvA  79,  80);  also  one 
of  the  5,  or  the  3  spheres  (kamupapattiyo)  in  the 
kamaloka,  viz.  paccupatthita-kSma,  nimmanarati"  (or 
nimmita"),  paranimmita".  It  94;  Dhs  1280  (cp.  kama) ; 
D  HI. 2 18;  J  1.59,  146  (kayon'  eva  deva°  na  brahma"), 
232,  Nd'  202*,  also  ■under  puccha  ;  Pn.i^*  (su^.well  con- 
structed, i.  e.  symmetrical) ;  Vism  228  (Marena  nimmitag 
Buddharupar))  :  VvA  36  (  =  mitai)  gacchati  varaijo),  79  ; 
ThA  6g,  70 ;  Miln  i,  242.  See  also  abhinimmita. 

Nimminati  [cp.  Sk.  nirmamati  &  nirmati,  nis-l-  minati, 
ma;  cp.  niminati]  to  measure  out,  fashion,  build,  con- 
struct, form ;  make  by  miracle,  create,  compose  ; 
produce,  lay  out,  plan,  aor.  nimmini  J  1.232  ;  PvA  245  ; 
DhA  IV.67  ;  ger  nimminitva  J  1.32  ;  VvA  &.>,  &  nim- 
maya  Vv  it-'.  —  pp.  niminita  See  also  nimmatar  and 
nimmana.     Cp.  abhi°. 

Nimmlleti  see  nimilati. 

Himm&la  (adj.)  [nis-t- miila]  without  root,  rootless  J 
VI.  177. 

Nimmoka  [Sk.  nirmoka  fr.  nis-f-  moceti]  the  slough  or  cast- 
ofi  skin  of  a  snake  PvA  63. 

Niya  (adj.)  [Sk.  nija,  q.  v.]  one's  own  Sn  149  (''putta  = 
orasaputta  KhA  248) ;  niyassakamma  at  A  1.99  &  Pv 
IV. I '^  (v.  1.  Minayefi  tiyassa)  is  to  be  read  as  nissaya- 
kamma  (q.  v.). 

Niyaka  (adj.)  [  =  niya]  one's  own  Th  2,  469;  ThA  284; 
DhsA  169,  337  ;  DA  1.183  ;  Vbh  2  ;  Vism  349. 

Niyata  (adj.)  [pp.  of  ni-fyam]  restrained,  bound  to,  con- 
strained to,  sure  (as  to  the  future),  fixed  (in  its  conse- 
quences), certain,  assured,  necessary  D  11.92  (sambodhi- 
parayani),  155;  111.107;  Sn  70  (=ariyajTiaggena  niya- 
mappattaSnA  124,  cp.  Nd2  357) ;  Dh  142  (  =  catumagga- 


niyamena  n.  DhA  Hi. 83) ;  J  1.44  (bodhiya) ;  Pug  13,  16, 
63  ;  Kvu  609  sq.  ;  Dhs  1028  sq.  (micchatta"  etc. ;  cp. 
Dhs.  trsl.  266,  267),  1414,  1595:  Vbh  17,  24,  63,  319, 
324  ;  Miln  193  ;  Tikp  168  (°micchaditthi)  ;  DhA  111.170  ; 
PvA  211.  Discussed  in  Pis.  of  Contr.  (see  Index). — 
aniyata  see  separately. 

Niyati  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  niyati,  ni-f  yam]  necessity,  fate,  destiny 
D  1.53 ;  DA  1.161  ;  VvA  341  ;  PvA  254. 

Niyama  [cp.  Sk.  niyama,  ni-i-yam;  often  confused  with 
hiyama]  i.  restraint,  constraint,  training,  self-control 
Miln  116  (yama-l-);  PvA  98  (yama-|-).  —  2.  definite- 
ness,  certainty,  limitation  DhA  111.83  (catumagga",  v.  1. 
niyama);  SnA  124  (niyama);  DhsA  154;  PvA  166 
(ayai)  n.  sarjsaren'  atthi :  law,  necessity).  —  aniyama  in- 
definiteness,  choice,  generality  DhsA  57;  VvA  16  (yag 
kinci  =  aniyame,  i.  e.  in  a  general  sense),  17  (same  of  ye 
keci) ;  PvA  175  (va  saddo  aniyamattho=  indefinite). 
—  niyamena  (instr.)  adv.  by  necessity,  necessarily  PvA 
287  ;  niyamato  (abl  )  id.  DhsA  145,  304  (so  read).  — 
3.  natural  law,  cosmic  order ;  in  Commentarial  literature 
this  was  fivefold  ;  utu-,  bija-,  kamma-,  citta-,  dhamma- 
DA  on  D  li.i  I  ;  Dial.  11. 8  ;  DhsA  272  ;  trs.  360. 

Niyamana  (nt.)  [Sk.  niyamana,  to  niyameti]  fixing,  settling, 
definition,  explanation  in  detail  Miln  352  (lakkha-n° 
aiming  at  the  target) ;  VvA  22  (visesattha°) ;  231,  PvA 
255  (so  read  for  nigamana  ?). 

Niyameti  [cp.  Sk.  niyamayati,  ni-(-  yaraati]  to  tie  down,  to 
fix  ;  explain  in  detail,  exempUfy  PvA  265  ;  Vism  666.  — 
pp.  niyamita  see  a°. 

Niyateti  see  niyyadeti. 

Niyama  [Sk.  niyama  &  niyama]  way,  way  to  an  end  or 
aim,  esp.  to  salvation,  right  way  (sammatta°) ;  method, 
manner,  practice  S  1.196  ;  ill. 225  (sjunmatta") ;  A  1.122  ; 
Sn  371  (°dassin  =  sammatta-uiyamabhutassa  maggassa 
dassavin  SnA  365);  Nd'  314  (°avakkanti) ;  Nd^  358 
(=cattaro  magga) ;  Ps  11.236  sq.  (sammatta"  okka- 
mati) ;  Pug  13,  15;  Vbh  342. — niyamena  (instr.)  adv. 
in  this  way,  by  way  of,  according  to  J  1.278;  iv.139, 
414  (suta°  as  he  had  heard);  DhA  1.79  ;  11.9,  21  ;  VvA 
4  ;  PvA  260  ;  Kvu  trs.  383. — aniyamena  (see  also 
aniyaniena)  without  order,  aimlessly,  at  random  J  v.337. 

Niyamaka'  (adj.)  [either  to  niyama  or  niyama]  sure  of  or 
in,  founded  in,  or  leading  to,  completed  in  D  1.190 
(dharama-n.  paiipada,  cp.  niyamata). 

Niyamaka'  (see  niyyamaka)  ship's  captain  Vism  137 
(simile). 

Niyamata  (f.)  [abstr.  to  niyama,  influenced  in  meaning  by 
niyama]  state  of  being  settled,  certainty,  reliance, 
surety,  being  fixed  in  (-°)  S  11.25  (dhamma"  +  dham- 
matfhitata) ;  A  1.286  (id.),  J  1.113  (saddhammassa  n 
assurance  of  .  .  .) ;  Kvu  586  (accauta"  final  assurance). 

Niyameti  [Denom."  fr.  niyama  or  niyama]  to  restrain, 
control,  govern,  guide  Miln  378  (navai)). 

Niyujjati  [Pass,  of  niyunjati]  to  be  fit  for,  to  be  adapted 
to,  to  succeed,  result   ensue  PvA  49  (  =  upakappati). 

Niyntta(ka)  (adj.)  [pp.  of  niyunjati]  tied  to,  appointed  to 
(with  loc).  commissioned,  ordered  DhsA  47;  PvA  20 
(janapade).  124  (dan^dhikare),  127  (dane). 

Niyoga  [ni+yoga]  command,  order;  necessity,  abl. 
niyoga  "  strictly  .speaking  "  Dhs  1417. 

Niyojeti  [Caus.  of  niyuiijati]  to  urge,  incite  to  (with  loc.) 
Vin  11.303  ;  A  rv.32  ;  Pv  11. i*;  Miln  229. 

N!yyati= Niyati  (Pass,  of  nayati). 

Niyyatta  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  niryapa]  escape  J  1.215. 


Niyyata 


205 


N  iraya 


Nijryata  (pp.)=niyyadita  M  1.360. 

Ifiyyatana  (nt.)  [fr.  niyyati]  returning,  return  to  (-°) 
J  V.497  (saka-rattha°) ;  Vism  556;  DA  1.23^. 

HiTyatar  [n.  ag.  to  niyyama]  a  guide,  leader  M  1.523  sq. 

Hiyyati  [Sk.  niryati,  nis+yati]  to  go  out,  get  out  (esp. 
of  sagsara) ;  S  v. 6  (niyyanti  dhira  lokamha) ;  SnA  212; 
aor.  niyyasi  D  1.49,  108  ;  J  1.263  ;  Sn  417  ;  3rd  pi.  niy- 
Tiijsu  A  V.195;  fut.  niyyassati  A  v.194.  —  ^^^  ''Iso 
niyyana  &  niyyanika. 

Niyyadita  [pp.  of  niyyideti]  assigned,  presented,  given, 
dedicated  PvA  196  (dhana  ni°).   As  niyyatita  at  Vism  115. 

Niyyideti  (niyyateti,  nlyadeti)  [cp.  Sk.  ni-  or  nir-yatayati, 
Caus.  of  ni(r)yatati]  to  give  (back),  give  into  charge, 
give  over,  assign,  dedicate,  to  present,  denote  S  1.131 
(niyyatayami) ;  iv.181  (sainikanai)  gavo),  194;  J  1.30, 
66,  496  ;  II.  106,  133  :  Vv46'niyyadesi  =  sampaticchapesi, 
adasi  VvA  199);  Pv  111.2''  (niyatayigsu  =  adaijsu  I^A 
184) ;  Vism  1 15  (t) ;  DhA  1.70  ;  11.87 :  VvA  33,  67  ;  PvA 
20  (viharar)  niyadetva),  25  (  =  uddissati  dadati),  42, 
81,  276  (at  all  PvA  passages  as  ni"). — -pp.  niyyadita. 
Cp.  similarly  pafiyadeti  &  pafiyadita. 

Ifiyyana  (nt.)  [nis-t-  yana,  cp.  niyyati]  i.  going  out,  depar- 
ture D  1.9  (  =  niggamanaDAi.94).  —  2.  way  out,  release, 
deliverance  Sn  170,  172  ("  magga-saccarj  bhavento 
lokamha  niyyati"  SnA  212);  Ps  1.163,  176;  Nett  119. 
Cp.  niyyanika.  —  aniyyana  DhA  11.209. 

Niyyanika  (adj.)  [to  niyyana]  leading  out  (of  satjsara), 
leading  to  salvation,  salutary,  sanctifying,  saving, 
profitable  D  1.235,  237  ;  S  1.220  ;  v. 82,  166,  255,  379  sq.  ; 
J  1.48  (a°),  106/;  Dhs  277,  339,  505  (cp.  Dhs.  trsl.  pp.  82. 
335);  Vbh  12,  19,  56,  319.  324;  Nett  29,  31,  63,  83; 
DhA  IV.87.  —  Also  found  in  spelling  niyanika  e.  g. 
A  III.  1 32  (ariya  ditthi  n.  niyati  takkarassa  samma- 
dukkha-khayaya) ;  DA  1.89  (aniyanikattS  tiraccha- 
nabhuta  katha). 

Hiyyama(ka)  [Sk.  niy^lmaka  &  niryama(ka).  Cp.  also  P. 
niyimaka]  a  pilot,  helmsman,  master  mariner,  guide 
J  1. 107  {thala°);  iv.137,  138;  Miln  194,  378  sq.  ;  Davs 
IV.42. 

Hiyyisa  [cp.  Sk.  nirySsa,  Halayudha  5,  75]  any  exudation 
(of  plants  or  trees),  as  gum,  resin,  juice,  etc.  Vism  74 
("rukkha,  one  of  the  8  kinds  of  trees),  360  (paggharita- 
n.-rukkha).     Cp.  nivayasa. 

Niyynha  [Sk.  niryuha  (&  nirvyuha  ?),  perhaps  to  vah]  a 
pinnacle,  turret,  gate  M  1.253  :  DA  1.284  (pasada-f  ). 

Nirankaroti  (&  nir&karoti)  [Sk.  nirakaroti,  nis-f-a  kj]  to 
think  little  of,  despise,  neglect,  disregard,  repudiate ; 
throw  away,  ruin,  destroy  Th  i.  478 ;  It  83  (nirakare) ; 
J  ili.28o=v.498 ;  iv.302  ;  Pv  IH.9'  (  =  chad(Jeti  pajahati 
PvA  211);  VvA  109.  —  pp.  (a)nirakata  It  39. 

Rinwgala  (niraggala)  (adj.)  [nis-f  aggala]  unobstructed, 
free,  rich  in  result  S  i.76  =  It  21:  A  1143;  iv.151  ; 
M  1. 139;  Sn  303  ;  Nd^  284  C- ;  Vv  64"  (=VvA  285). 

HiragKika  (adj.)  [nis-l-aggi-l- ka]  without  fire  Miln  324 
("okasa). 

Hitajjati  [Pass,  of  nirajati,  nis-t- ajati.  Vedic  nirajati  to 
drive  out  cattle]  to  be  thrown  out.  to  be  expelled,  to  lose 
(with  abl.)  J  VI. 502.  503  (rattha) :  v.  1.  BB  nirajhati ; 
Com.  ni(g)gacchati ;  Th  2.  93  (aor.  nirajji  •hai)=na 
j&nim  ahai)  ThA,  go.  Kern  (wrongly)  proposes  reading 
virajjhi). 

Virata  (adj.)  [pp.  of  niramati]  fond  of,  attached  to  (-°) 
S  I.I 33;  DA  1.250;  PvA  5  (duccarita°),  89.  161  (hita- 
karaQa°). 


Niiatta'  (adj.-nt.)  [Sk.  •niratraan.  nis-h  attan)  soulless; 
view  of  souUessness  or  unsubstantiality ;  thus  inter- 
preted (in  preference  to  niratta^)  by  Com.  on  Sn  787, 
858.  919.     See  foil. 

Niiatta'  (adj.)  [Sk.  nirasta.  pp.  of  nirasyati,  see  nirassati] 
rejected,  thrown  off.  given  up  Sn  1098 ;  Nd'  359.  — 
Note.  At  Sn  787,  858,  919  the  interpretation  of  Nd*  82  = 
248  =  352  and  also  Bdhgh  assume  a  cpd.  of  nis-f-attan 
(  =  niratman):  see  niratta'. 

Nirattha  (adj.)  [nis-l-attha]  useless,  groundless,  unpro- 
ficient.  vain  (opp.  sJttha  profitable)  Sn  582  (nt.  as  adv.). 
585  (nirattha  paridevana) ;  Dh  41  ;  J  111.26;  -PvA  18 
(°bhava  uselessness),  83  (=duti). 

Niratthaka  (adj.)  =  nirattha;  VvA  324;  PvA  18.  40,  63. 
102  etc.  —  f.  °ika  ThA  258  ;  Mihi  20  ;  Sdhp  68. 

Nirantara  (adj.)  [nis-(- antara]  having  no  interval,  con- 
tinuous, uninterrupted  PvA  135.  Usually  in  nt.  as  adv. 
nirantarai)  always,  incessantly,  constantly  ;  immediately, 
at  once  DhsA  168;  PvA  52.  80.  107,  no  (  =  satatai)), 
120  ;  DhA  1. 13. 

Niraparadha  (adj.)  [nis-l- aparadha]  without  offence,  guilt- 
less, innocent  J  1.264. 

Nirapekkha  (adj.)  [nis-l- apa-l- Iks]  not  heeding,  unsus- 
pecting, disregarding,  indifferent,  reckless  VvA  27.  47 
(jivitag) ;  PvA  62  ;  DA  1177 ;  Miln  343  (jivitar)). 

Nirabbuda*  (m.  nt.)  [cp.  BSk.  nirarbuda  &  abbuda  3]  a  vast 
number;  also  N.  of  a  hell  S  i.i49=A  ii.3=v.r7i  (expl"" 
at  173  as  "  seyyatha  pi  visati  abbuda  niraya  evam  eko 
nirabbudo  nirayo  ") ;  J  111.360  (Com. :  visati  abbudani 
ekai)  nirabbudai)). 

Nirabbuda'  (adj.)  [nis^-  abbuda^]  free  from  boils  or  tumours, 
healthy  (also  fig.)  Vin  Iii.r8  (of  the  Sangha). 

Niraya  [BSk.  niraya.  nis-l-  aya  of  i  =  to  go  asunder,  to  go  to 
destruction,  to  die,  cp.  in  meaning  Vedic  nirfti.     The 
popular   etym.    given   by   Dhammapala  at    PvA  53  is 
"  n'  atthi  ettha  ayo  sukhan  ti  "  =there  is  no  good  ;  that 
given  by  Bdhgh  at   Vism  427  "  n'  atthi  ettha  assada- 
saiifiito    ayo "    (no    refreshment)]    purgatory,    hell,    a 
place  of  punishment  &  torture,  where  sin  is  atoned  (i.  e. 
kamma  ripens  =  paccati.  is  literally  boiled)  by  terrible 
ordeals   (karaijani)  similar  to  &  partly  identical  with 
those  of  Hades  &  Tartarus.     There  are  a  great  number 
of   hells,    of   which   the    most   fearful    is    the    Avici- 
mahaniraya  (see  Avici).     Names  of  other  purgatories 
occur  frequently  ir  the  Jdtaka  collection,  e.  g.  Kakola 
VI. 247 ;  Khuradhaia  v. 269  sq. ;  Dhuma-roruva  v.271  ; 
Patapana  v.266.   271,   453;    Paduraa  iv.245  ;    Roruva 
III. 299  ;  v.266  ;  VI. 237  ;  Sanghata  v.266  ;  Sanjiva  ibid. ; 
Sataporisa  v.269  ;  Sattisula  v. 143.     As  the  principal  one 
n.  is  often  mentioned  with  the  other  apayas  (states  of 
suffering),  viz.  tiracchanayoni  (animal  world)  &  pitti- 
visaya  (the  manei),  e.  g.  at  Nd'  489;  Nd'  517.  550; 
Pv  IV. 1 1  ;  ThA  282  ;  PvA  27  sq.  (see  apaya).  —  There 
is  a  great  variety  of  qfiaUfying  adjectives  connected 
with  niraya.  all  of  which  abound  in  notions  of  fearful 
pain,  awfuf  misery  &  continuous  suffering,  e.  g.  katuka, 
ghoia,    daruna.    bhayanaka,    mahabhitapa.   sattussada 
etc.  —  Descriptions  of  N.  in  glowing  terms  of  fright- 
fulness  are  freq.  found  from  the  earliest  books  down  to 
the  late  Peta-Vatthu.   Paiicagati-dipana   &  Saddham- 
mopayana.     Of    these    the   foil,    may    be    quoted    as 
characteristic  :  S  1. 152  (lO  nirayas) ;  M  in. 183  ;  A  1. 141  ; 
Sn  p.  I26  =  A  V.173;  Nd*  4O4  sq.  =Nd2  304"";  J  IV.4 
(Mittavindaka) ;  Vv  52  (Revati) ;  Pv  i.io  ;  in.  10  ;  iv.i  ; 
7;   DhA   1. 148. — See  on   the  whole  subject,   esp.   L. 
Scherman.    Matcrialen    zur   indischen    Visionsliteratur, 
Leipzig  1792  ;  &  W.  Stede.  Die  Gespenslergeschichten  des 
Peta    Vatthu,   Leipzig   1914,    pp.    33-39-  —  References: 
Vin  1.227  (apaya  duggati  vinipita  niraya) ;  D  1.82,  107 


Niravasesa 


206 


Nirupadhi 


(id.);  Vin  ii.igS  (yo  klio  sanghag  bhiudati  kappai) 
nirayamlii  paccati),  204  ;  11.2113  =It  86  ;  D  1.228  (+  tirac- 
chanayoni),  5.J  (read  nirayasatc  for  niriyasate)  :  iii.i  1 1  ; 
S  IV.  120;  V.356,  450;  M  1.73,  285,  308,  334;  11.86,  149, 
18O;  m.iuo,  203,  209;  A  IV. 405  ;  V.76.  182,  184  ;  Sn  248 
(patanti  satta  nirayag  avagsira),  333,  6O0  sq.,  677  sq.  ; 
Dh  126,  140,  3110,  311,  315  ;  Th  i,  304  (adhammo  nira- 
yag  ncti  dhammo  papeti  suggatig)  =  DhsA  38=DA  1.99 
=  DhA  1.22;  Th  2,  456;  It  12;  J  iv.463 ;  Pug  60; 
Ps  1.83  (Avici") ;  Vbh  So,  337;  Vism  102;  Miln  148; 
DhA  I.2J  ;  111.71  ;  Sdhp  7.  2S5.  —  See  also  nerayika. 

-gamin  (adj.)  leading  to  purgatory  (magga)  Sn  277; 
-dukkha  the  pain  of  H.  Sn  531  ;  -pala  a  guardian  of  P., 
a  devil  A  1.13S,  141  ;  M  111.179;  Nd'  404;  VvA  22O. 
Names  of  guardians  (after  their  complexion)  c.  g.  Kala 
(black)  \-  lipakfila  (blackish)  J  vi.248.  -bhaya  the 
fear  of  P.  J  i.ioS;  \ism  392;  -sagvattanika  conducive 
to  P.  Nd'  489. 

Niravasesa  (adj.)  [nist- avasesa]  without  remainder,  com- 
plete, inclusive  Nett  14,  15,  cp.  Miln  91,  1S2. 

Nirssana  (adj.)  [nis+  asana-]  without  food  or  subsistence, 
poor  J  IV.  1 28. 

Nirassati  [cp.  Sk.  nirasyati,  nis  +  assati,  as  to  throw]  to 
throw  off,  despise,  neglect  Sn  7.S5,  954  ;  Nd'  76  (so  read 
for  nidassati,  v.  1.  SS  nir°),  444;  SnA  522. — pp. 
niratta^. 

Nirassada  (adj.)  [nis-l-  assada]  without  task,  insipid,  dull 
Vism  135.     Cp.  nirasada. 

Niiakaroti  see  nirankaroti. 

Nirakula  (adj.)  [nis-l- akula]  unconfused,  clear,  calm,  un- 
disturbed J  1. 1  7  (v.  94). 

Niratanka  (adj.)  [nis-i-  atanka]  healthy  Miln  251  (of  paddy). 

Niradinava  (adj.)  [nis-t-  adinava]  not  beset  with  dangers, 
not  in  danger,  unimperilled  Vin  111.19. 

Nirama  (adj.)  [nis+ama,  cp.  niramaya]  healthy,  unde- 
praved,  without  sin,  virtuous  Sn  251,  252  (°gandha=i 
nikkilesayoga  SnA  293).  717  (id.  =nikkilesa  SnA 
499)- 

Niramaya  (adj.)  [nis+amaya]  not  ill,  healthy,  good, 
without  fault  PvA  164. 

Niramisa  (adj.)  [nis+amisa]  having  no  meat  or  prey; 
free  from  sensual  desires,  disinterested,  not  material 
S  1.35,  60  ;  IV. 219,  235  ;  v. 08,  332  ;  A  ill. 412  ;  D  111.278  ; 
Vbh  195  :  Vism  71  ;  Sdhp  475,  477. 

Nirarambba  (adj.)  [nis+arambha]  without  objects  (for 
the  purpose  of  sacrificing),  i.  e.  without  the  killing  of 
animals  (of  yanna)  S  1.70  ;  A  11.42  sq. 

Niralamba  (adj.)  [nis-l- alamba]  unsupported  Miln  295 
(akasa). 

Niralaya  (adj.)  [nis+alayaj  houseless,  homeless  Miln  244 
(-  aniketa).  At  DhA  iv.31  as  cxpl"  of  appossukka.  — 
f.  abstr.  niralayata  homclessness  Miln  162,  276,  420. 

Nirasa  (adj.)  [nis-f  asa]  not  hungry,  not  longing  for  any- 
thing, dcsircloss  S  1. 12,  23,  141  ;  A  1. 107  sq.  ;  Sn  1048 
(anigha-l-),  1078  (id.);  Nd^  360;  Pug  27;  Py  iv.i^a 
(=  nittanha  PvA  230).     See  also  amama. 

Niiasagsa  (adj.)  [nis-F  asagsa,  saos]  without  wishes,  ex- 
pcctatirns  or  desires,  dcsirelcss  Sn  1090  (Nd^  reading 
for  nirasaya) ;  "Sd-  30t  (cp.  DhA  iv.185  nirasjsa^^ 
'nirasaijsa,  v.  1.  for  nirasaya). 

Nirasanka  (adj.)  [nis-l- as.inka]  without  apprehension, 
unsuspicious,  not  doubting  J  1.264;  Vism  180. 


Nirasankata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  nirasanka]  the  not  hesitating 

J  VI.3J7- 

Nirasattin  (adj.)  [adj.  to  pp.  asatta'  with  nis]  not  hanging 
on  to,  not  clinging  or  attached  to  (c.  loc.)  Sn  851  (  =  nit- 
tanha  SnA  549)  ;  Nd'  221. 

Nirasaya  (adj.)  [nis-(-asaya,  fr.  sri]  without  (outward) 
support,  not  relying  on  (outward)  things,  without 
(sinful)  inclinations  Sn  50  ( :  Nd*  360  b  reads  nirisasa), 
3O9,  634,  1090  (Nd*  361  reads  nirasagsa) ;  Dh  410; 
DhA  IV. 185  (v.  1.  BB  nirasasa ;  expl''  by  nittaijha). 

Nirasava  (adj.)  [nis-l- asava]  without  intoxication,  un- 
defiled,  sinless  ThA  148. 

Nirasada  (adj.)  [nis-l- assada]  tasteless,  yielding  no  enjoy- 
ment Th  r,  710.     Cp.  nirassada. 

Nirabara  (adj.)  [nis-(- ahara]  without  food,  not  eating, 
fasting  J  IV. 225  ;  Sdhp  389. 

Nirinjana  (adj.)  [nis4-injana,  fr.  iujati]  not  moving,  stable, 

unshaken  Vism  377  (  =  acala.  aneiija). 

Nirindhana  (adj.)  [nis+ indhana]  without  fuel  (of  fire), 
ThA  148  (aggi) ;  DhA  1.44  (jataveda). 

Niriha(ka)  (adj.)  [nis-(- iha]  inactive,  motionless,  without 
impulse  ThA  148  (°ka) ;  Miln  413  (-^  nijjivata) ;  Vism 
484,  594  sq. 

iiirujjhati  [Pass,  of  nirundhati  (nirodhati)  ni+  rundhati] 
to  be  broken  up.  to  be  dissolved,  to  be  destroyed,  to 
cease,  die  Vin  i.i  ;  D  1.180  sq..  215;  11.157;  S  111.93 
(aparisesarj) ;  iv.36  sq..  60,  98,  184  sq.  ;  294, 
402;  V.213  sq.  ;  A  III. 165  sq.  (aparisesag) ;  v.i39  sq.  ; 
J  1. 1  So;  Pug  64;  Sdhp  606.  —  pp.  niruddha.  Cp. 
nirodha. 

Niruttara  (adj.)  [nis-l-  uttara]  making  no  reply  PvA  1 1 7. 

Nirutti  (f.)  [Sk.  nirnkti,  nis-t-  vac]  one  of  the  Vedangas  (see 
chalanga),  expl"  of  words,  grammaticaL  analysis, 
etymological  interpretation ;  pronunciation,  dialect, 
way  of  speaking,  expression  Vin  11. 139  (pabbajita  .  .  . 
sakaya  niruttiya  Buddhavacanag  dusenti) ;  D  1.202 
(loka°,  expression) ;  M  in. 237  (janapada") ;  S  111.71 
(tayo  n-patha) ;  A  11. 160  (°patisambhida) ;  111.20 1  ; 
Dh  352  (°padakovida=;niruttiyail  ca  sesapadesu  ca  ti 
catusu  pi  patisambhidasu  cheko  ti  attho  DhA  iv.70  ; 
i.  e.  skilled  in  the  dialect  or  the  original  language  of  the 
holy  Scriptures);  Ps  1.88  sq.  ;  n.150  ("patisamhhida) ; 
Nd-  563;  Dhs  1307;  Nett  4,  8,  33,  105;  Miln  22; 
Vism  441  ;  SnA  358 ;  PvA  97. 

Nirudaka  (adj.)  [nis-f  udaka]  without  water,  waterless 
M  1.543  ;  Nd*  630. 

Niruddha  (pp.)  [pp.  of  nirundhati,  cp.  nirujjhati]  ex- 
pelled, destroyed  ;  vanished,  ceased  S  111. 112  ;  Dhs  1038. 

Nirundhati  see  nirujjhati,  niruddha,  nirodha  &  nirodheti. 

Cp.  parirundhati. 

Nirupakara  (adj.)  [nis-l- upakara]  useless  J  11.103. 

Nirupaghata  (adj.)  [nis-l- upaghata]  not  hurt,  not  injured 
or  set  back  Miln  130. 

Nirupatapa  (adj.)  [nis-f-  upatapa]  not  harassed  (burnt)  or 
afflicted  (by  pain  or  harm)  Th  2.  512. 

Nirupaddava  (adj.)  [nis-l- upaddava]  without  affliction  or 
mishap,  harmless,  .secure,  happy  J  iv.139;  PvA  262 
(sotthi). 

Nirupadhi  (adj.)  (in  verse  always  nirupadhi)  [nis-f  upadhi, 
cp.  upadhikaj  free  from  passions  or  attachment,  desire- 
less,   controlled   Vin   n.156;   S   1.194   (vippamutta -(-) ; 


Nirupama 


207 


Nivattati 


IV.158;  A  1.80,  138  (sitibhuta.+  ) ;  Dh  418  (id.);  Th  i, 
1250;  2,  320  (vippamutta  +  ;  expl''  by  niddukkha  ThA 
233);  It  46,  50,  58,  62;  Sn  33,  34,  642  (sitibhtita +)  ; 
Pv  iv.:'^;  DhA  iv.225  (  -  nirupakkilesa) ;  PvA  230. 

Nirapama  (adj.)  [nis+  upama]  without  comparison,  in- 
comparable SnA  455  (  =  atitula). 

Rirnmbhati  [Sk.  ?  Trenckner,  Notes  p.  59  ni+radh  (?)] 
to  suppress,  hush,  silence  J  1.62  (text  nirumhitva,  v.  1. 
SS  nirumbhitvi,  cp.  san -nirumhitva  VvA  217). 

Nira)ha  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  niru(^ha,  pp.  of  niruhati]  grown, 
risen ;  usual,  customary,  common  VvA  108. 

Ninus&sa  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  nirucchvasa,  nis-1- ussasa]  breath- 
less J  IU.416;  IV. 121,  cp.  VI. 197;  VI. 82. 

Nirnssnkka  (adj.)  [nis+  ussukka],  careless,  unconcerned, 
indifierent  to  (c.  loc.)  ThA  282. 

Niroga  see  niroga. 

Niroja  (adj.)  [nis-t-  oja]  tasteless,  insipid  J  11. 304  ;  111.94  ; 
VI. 561. 

Nirodha  [BSk.  nirodha,  to  nirundhati,  cp.  nirujjhati  & 
niruddha]  oppression,  suppression  ;  destruction,  cessa- 
tion, annihilation  (of  senses,  consciousness,  feeling  & 
being  in  general :  sankhara).  Bdhgh's  expl"  of  the  word 
is :  "  ni-saddo  abhavar),  rodha-saddo  ca  cSrakai)  dipeti 
Vism  495.  —  N.  in  many  cases  is  synonymous  with 
nibbana  &  parinibbana ;  it  may  be  said  to  be  even 
a  stronger  expression  as  far  as  the  active  destruc- 
tion of  the  causes  of  life  is  concerned.  Therefore 
frequently  comb''  with  nibbana  in  formula  "  sabba- 
sankhara-samatho  .  .  .  virago  nirodho  nibbanai),"  e.  g. 
S  1.136  ;  It  88.  Nd*  s.  nibbana  (see  nibbana  111.6).  Also 
in  comb"  with  nibbida,  e.  g.  S  111.48,  223;  111.163  sq. ; 
V.438.  —  The  opposite  of  nirodha  is  samudaya,  cp. 
formula  "  yai)  kinti  samudaya-dhammar)  sabban  tar) 
nirodha-dhammar)  "  e.  g.  Nd^  under  sankhara  &  passim, 
(a)  Vin  I.I,  10;  D  11.33,  41,  57  sq.,  112;  111.130  sq., 
136  sq.,  226  sq.  ;  J  1.133  ;  119  sq.,  223  ;  111.59  sq.,  163  ; 
V.438;  M  1. 140,  263,  410;  A  1.299;  1V.456  (=asavanai) 
parikkhaya) ;  Th  2,  6  ( =  kilesanirodha  ThA  13),  158; 
It  46  =  Sn  755  (nirodhe  ye  vimuccanti  te  jana  maccu- 
hayino) ;  It62  =Sn  754  ;  Sn  731,1037  ;  Ps  1.192  ;  11.44  sq.. 
22  1  ;  Pug 68  ;  Vbh99  sq.,  229  ;  Nett  14, 16  sq.  ;  Vism  372  ; 
VvA  63  ;  PvA  220  (jivitassa).  —  (b)  (as-") :  anupubba" 
D  111.266;  A  IV. 409,  456;  abhisaiina"  D  1.180;  asesavi- 
raga°  S  11.4,  12  ;  iv.86  ;  v. 421  sq.  ;  A  1.177  ;  11.158,  161  ; 
upadana"  S  111.14  ;  kama°  A  111.410  sq.  ;  jati°  S  iv.86 ; 
tanha°  D  111.216;  dukkha"  D  111.136;  S  111.32,  60; 
IV. 4  sq.,  14,  384  ;  A  1.177  ;  nandi"  S  111.14  '■  1^.36  ;  bhava" 
(  ---nibbana)  S  11.117  ;  111. 14  ;  A  v. 9  ;  Ps  1.159  ;  sakkaya" 
P  111.240;  S  V.410;  A  11.165  sq. ;  111.246,  325  sq.  ; 
v. 238  sq. ;  saftnavedayita"  D  m.262,  266  ;  S  !V.2i7,  293 
sq. ;  V.  213  sq.  ;  A  1.41  ;  111.192  ;  IV.306  ;  V.209. 

-dhamma  subject  to  destruction,  able  to  be  destroyed, 
destructible  (usually  in  formula  of  samudaya-dhamma, 
see  above)  Vin  i.i  1  ;  D  i.i  10  ;  S  iv.47.  107,  214  ;  M  111.280  ; 
A  V.  143  sq.  ;  -dhammata  liability  to  destruction  S  iv.217  ; 
-dhatu  the  element  or  condition  of  annihilation,  one  of 
the  3  dhatus,  viz.  riipa.  arupa"  n".  I)  111. 2 15;  It  45; 
Nett  97  ;  -saiiiia  perception  or  consciousness  of  anni- 
hilation D  in. 251  sq..  283;  A  111.334;  -samapatti 
attainment  of  annihilation  Ps  1.97,  100  ;  Miln  3(xj  ; 
Vism  702. 

Nirodhlka  (adj.)  ffr.  nirodha]  obstructing,  destroying 
It  82  (pafnla"),  cp.  M  1.115. 

Nirodheti  [Denom.  fr.  nirodha]  to  oppress,  destroy  Vism 
288  (in  expl"  of  passambhcti). 

Nilaya  [fr.  ni-l-ll]  a  dwelling,  habitation,  lair,  nest  J 
111.454. 


Nilicchita  see  nillacchita. 

Nillna  (adj.)  [pp.  of  nilayati]  sitting  on  (c.  loc),  perched; 
hidden,  concealed,  lying  in  wait  J  1.135,  293;  in. 26; 
VvA  230. 

Niliyati  [ni+liyati]  to  sit  down  (esp.  for  the  purpose  of 
hiding),  to  settle,  alight ;  to  keep  oneself  hidden,  to 
lurk,  hide  J  1.222,  292:  Miln  257;  Vv.\  178.  aor. 
niliyi  J  1.158;  111.26;  Dh.\  11.56;  PvA  274. — pp. 
nilina.     Caus.  II.  niliyapeti  to  conceal,  hide  (trs.)  J  1.292. 

Nillyana  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  nillyati,  cp.  Sk,  nilayana]  hiding 
J  v.ii)3  (°tthana  hiding-place). 

Nilenaka  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  nilayana,  fr.  ni-t-  li]  settling  place, 
hiding-place,  refuge  J  v.102  (so  read  for  nillenaka; 
expl''  by  niliyanatthana  p.  Kij). 

Nillacchita  (adj.)  [Sk.  •nirlafichita,  nis-(-  lacchita  of 
nillaccheti]  castrated  Th  2,  440  ;  written  as  nilicchita 
at  J  VI. 238  (v.  1.  BB  as  gloss  nilurtcita).  expl''  by 
"  vacchakakala  .  .  .  nibbtjako  kato,  uddhatabijo  " 
(p.  239). 

Nillaccheti  [nis-l-  laccheti  of  laiich,  cp.  lakkhana]  to  deprive 
of  the  marks  or  characteristics  (of  virility),  to  castrate 
Th  2,  437  ( -  purisa-bhavassa  lacchana-bhutani  bija- 
kani  nillacchesi  nihari  ThA  270).  Sec  also  nillauchaka 
&  nillacchita. 

Nillajja  (adj.)  [nis-f  lajja]  shameless  Sdhp  3S2. 

Ni(l)laichaka  (adj.-n.)  [cp.  Sk.  nirlanchana,  of  nirlancha- 
yati  =  nis-l-  laccheti]  one  who  marks  cattle,  i.  e.  one  who 
castrates  or  deprives  of  virility  J  i  v.364  (spelt  tilaiichaka 
in  text,  but  right  in  v.  1.),  expf  as  "  tisuladi-anka- 
karanena  lanchaka  ca  lakkhanakaraka  ti  attho  "  (p. 
366).     cp.  nillacchita. 

Nillapa  (adj.)  [nis-l-  lapa]  without  deceit,  free  from  slander 
A  ii.26  =  It  113. 

Nillajeti  &  Nilloleti  [nis-l-  lul,  cp.  Sk.  ladayati  &  loc.layati] 
to  move  (the  tongue)  up  &  down  S  1.118;  M  1.109; 
DA  1.42  (pp.  nillalita-jivha) ;  DhA  iv.197  (jivhar)  nillo- 
leti ;  V.  1.  nillaleti  &  lilaicti)  ^  J  v.434  (v.  1.  nillelati  for 
°lo°). 

Nillekha  (adj.)  [nis-l- lekha]  without  scratches,  without 
edges  (?)  Vin  11. 123  (of  jantaghara). 

Nillokana  (adj.-n.)  [nis-t- lokana]  watching  out;  watchful, 
careful  J  v.43,  86  (°sila). 

Nilloketi  [nis-l- loketi]  to  watch  out,  keep  guard,  watch, 
observe  Vin  n.208. 

Nillopa    [cp.    Sk.    nirlopa,    nis-(- lup]    plundering,    plunder 


D1.52;    A  1. 154;    Nd'  144  {°<3  liarati) 
167,  280;  DA  1.1 59- 


NtP  199'  ;  Tikp 


Nillobha  (adj.)  [nis-f  lobha]  free  from  greed  J  iv.m. 

Nillolup(p)a  (adj.)  [nis-l-  loluppa]  free  from  greed  or  desires 
Sn  50  (  =  Nd^  362  nittai.iha);  J  V.35S. 

Nivatta  (pp)  [PP-  oi  nivattati]  returned,  turning  away 
from,  giving  up,  being  deprived  of,  being  without  (°-) 
Vin  II. log  (°bija) ;  J  1.203  ;  VvA  72. 

Nivattati  [Vedic  nivartati,  ni-t- vattati]  to  turn  back,  to 
return  (opp.  gacchati),  to  turn  away  from,  to  flee, 
vanish,  disappear  Vin  1.46;  D  1.118;  J  1.223;  "15.3  : 
IV. 142;  Sn  p.  80;  PVII.9'';  iv.io^;  SnA  374;  PvA  74, 
161.     aor.  nivatti  J  11.3  :  I'vA  14  i.     pp.  nivatta  (q.  v.). 

Caus.  I.  nivatteti  to  lead  back,  to  turn  from,  to  make 

go  back,  to  convert  J  1.203  ;  VvA  i  !0  ;  I'vA  204  (papato 
from  sin).  Cp.  upa°,  pati°,  vi°.  —Caus.  II.  nivattapeti 
to  send  back,  to  return  I'vA  154. 


Nivattana 


208 


Nivutta 


nivSraye) ;  iv.195  (cittai))  ;  Dh  77,  116  (pApS 
nivaraye) ;  J  1.263  ;  Pv  111.7* ;  VvA  5g  ;  PvA  79, 
)hA  1.4 1. 

Nivasa  [fr.  nivasati^  stopping,  dwelling,  resting-place, 
abode  ;  living,  sheltering  J  i.i  15  {°g  kappeti  to  put  up) ; 
II.  1 10  ;  PvA  76.  78.  Usually  in  phrase  pubbe-nivasai) 
anussarati  "  to  remember  one's  former  abode  or  place 
of  existence  (in  a  former  life),"  characterising  the 
faculty  of  remembering  one's  former  birth  D  1.13.  15.  16, 
81;  S  1. 167.  175,  196;  II. 122,  213;  V.265,  305;  A  1.25, 
164;  II. 183;  111.323.  418  sq.  ;  IV. 141  sq.  ;  v. 211,  339. 
Also  in  pubbenivasar)  vedi  It  100;  Sn  647  =  Dh  423; 
p-n-patisagyutta  dhammikatha  D  11. i  ;  p-n-anussati- 
iiana  D  ni.iio,  220,  275  ;  A  iv.177.     Cp.  nevasika. 

Nivasana'  (adj.-nt.)  [fr.  nivaseti]  dressed,  clothed ;  dress- 
ing, clothing,  undergarment  (opp.  parupana)  Vin  1.46 ; 
11.228  :  J  1. 182  (manapa"),  421  ;  in.82  ;  PvA  50,  74,  76, 
173  (pilotikakkhanda"  dressed  in  rags). 

Nivasana^  (nt.)  [fr.  nivasati']  dwelling,  abode  PvA  44 
Ctthana  place  of  abode),  76  (id.). 

Nivasika  (adj  )  [fr.  nivasa]  staying,  living,  dwelling 
J  11.435  ( =  nibaddha-vasanaka  C.). 

Nivasin  (adj.-n.)  [to  nivasati]  dwelling,  staying;  (n.)  an 
inhabitant  D5vs  v.45. 

Nivaseti  {Cans,  of  nivasati^]  to  dress  oneself,  to  put  on 
(the  undergarment),  to  get  clothed  or  dressed.  Freq. 
in  ster.  phrase  "  pubbantasamayar)  nivasetvi  patta- 
civaram  adaya  .  .  .,"  describing  the  setting  out  on  his 
round  of  the  bhikkhu ;  e.  g.  D  1.109.  178.  205.  226.  — 
Vin  1.46;  II. 137,  194;  D  II. 127;  J  1.265;  ^^S  56;  Pv 
l.io^ ;  PvA  49.  61.  75,  127  (nivasessati+ parupissati). 
147  (=parupami). — Caus.  II.  nivasapeti  to  cause  or 
order  to  be  dressed  (with  2  ace.)  J  1.50;  iv.142  ;  DhA 
1.223. 

Kivicikicoha  see  nibbicikiccha ;  M  1.260. 

Nivijjha  see  vi°. 

Nivittha  (adj.)  [pp.  of  nivisati]  settled,  established  (in) ; 
confirmed,  sure ;  fixed  on,  bent  on.  devoted  to  (loc.) 
Sn  57  ( =satta  allina  etc.  Nd'  364).  756,  774,  781  (ruciyS), 
824  (saccesu),  892  ;  Nd'  38,  65,  162  ;  It  35.  77 ;  J  1.S9, 
259  (adhammasmir)) ;  Miln  361  ;  VvA  97  ("gama.  built, 
situated) ;  DA  i.go  (su°  &  dun°  of  a  street  =  well  &  badly 
built  or  situate).     Cp.  abhi°. 

Nivisati  [ni+  visati]  to  enter,  stop,  settle  down  on  (loc.), 
to  resort  to,  establish  oneself  Vin  1.207;  J  1.309  = 
IV.217  (yasmig  mano  nivisati).  —  pp.  nivif^a  ger. 
nivissa  (q.  v.).     Caus.  niveseti. 

Nivissa-vadin  (adj.-n.)  [nivissa  (ger.  of  nivisati)-!- v5din] 
"  speaking  in  the  manner  of  being  settled  or  sure,"  a 
dogmatist  Sn  910.  913.  expl''  at  Nd'  326  as  "  sassato 
loko  idam  eva  saccai).  mogham  afinan  ti "  ;  at  SnA 
560.     As  "  janami  passami  tath'  eva  etan  ti." 

Nivnta  (adj.)  [pp.  of  nivarati  (nivareti)  cp.  nivarita]  sur- 
rounded, hemmed  in,  obstructed,  enveloped  D  1.246 ; 
S  11.24  ;  IV.  127  ;  Sn  348  (tamo°),  1032,  1082  ;  It  8  ;  Nd' 
365  (  =  ophuta,  paticchanna.  patikujjita) ;  Miln  161; 
SnA  596  (  =  pariyonaddha). 

Nivutta'  (PP)  [PP-  of  ni-t-vac]  called,  termed,  designated 
PvA  73  (dasavassa-satani,  vassa-sabassai)  n.  hoti). 

Nivutta'  (PP)  [Sk.  •nyupta.  pp.  of  vapati*  to  shear] 
shorn,  shaved,  trimmed  Sn  456  (°kesa  =  apagatakesa, 
oharitakesamassu  SnA  403). 

Nivutta^  (PP-)  [Sk.  'nyupta,  pp.  of  vapati*  to  sow]  sown, 
thrown  (of  food),  offered,  given  M  1. 152  ;  J  111.272. 


Nivattana  (nt.)  [fr.  nivattati]  i.  returning,  turning,  fig. 
turning  away  from,  giving  up.  "  conversion  "  FVA 
121  (papato).  —  2.  a  bend,  curve  (of  a  river),  nook 
J  1.324  ;  n.i  17,  158  ;  iv.256  ;  v. 162. 

Nivattanlya  (adj.)  [grd.  formation  fr.  nivattana]  only  neg. 
a°  not  liable  to  return,  not  returning  DliA  1.63. 

Nivatti  (f.)  [fr.  m+  vrt]  returning,  return  PvA  189  (gati° 
going  &  coming). 

Nivattha  (pp.)  [pp.  of  ni-(- vasati*]  clothed  in  or  with  (-' 
or  ncc),  dressed,  covered  S  1.115;  J  1.59  (su"),  307 
(safakar)) ;  PvA  47,  49  (dibbavattha°),  50. 

Nivapati  [ni-fvapati]  to  heap  up,  sow,  throw  (food)  M 
1.151  sq.  (nivapai)).  —pp.  nivutta  (q.  v.). 

Nivara^a  see  vi°. 

Nivarati  [ni-i- varati]  only  in  Caus.  nivareti  (q.  v.),  pp. 
nivuta. 

Nivasati  [ni-f-  vasati^]  to  live,  dwell,  inhabit,  stay  Vin 
II.  1 1.  — pp.  nivuttha,  cp.  also  nivasana'  &  nivasin. 

Nivaha  [fr.  ni-i-  vah]  multitude,  quantity,  heap  Davs 
IV.53;  V.I 4,  24,  62. 

Nivata*  (adj.)  [Sk.  nivata,  ni-(-  vata  "  wind-down  "]  with 
the  wind  gone  down,  i.  e.  without  wind,  sheltered  from 
the  wind,  protected,  safe,  secure  Vin  1.57,  72  ;  M  1.76  = 
A  1. 137  (kiitagara) ;  A  i.ioi  (id.) ;  It  92  (rahada) ;  Th  i, 
I  (kufika) ;  2,  376  (pasada).  —  (nt.)  a  calm  (opp.  pavata) 
Vin  11.79. 

Nivata'  [identical  with  nivata',  sheltered  from  the  wind 
=  low]  lowliness,  humbleness,  obedience,  gentleness 
M  1. 125;  Sn  265  ( =  nicavattana  KhA  144);  J  vi.252  ; 
Pv  IV. 7".  Cp.  M  Vastu  11.423.  Freq.  in  cpd.  nivata- 
vutti  (id.)  A  III. 43  ;  Sn  326  (  =  nicavutti  SnA  333); 
J  III. 262  ;  Miln  go,  207 ;  VvA  347. 

Nivataka  [fr.  nivata.']  a  sheltered  place,  a  place  of  escape, 
opportunity  (for  hiding)  J  1.289  =v.435;  cp.  Miln  205 
(where  reading  is  nimantaka,  with  v.  1.  nivataka,  see 
note  on  p.  426).     See  Com.  on  this  stanza  at  J  v. 437. 

Nivapa  [cp.  Sk.  nivapa,  ni-l-  vap,  cp.  nivapati]  food  thrown 
(for  feeding),  fodder,  bait;  gift,  portion,  ration  M 
1. 151  sq.  (Nivapa-sutta) ;  J  1.150;  ni.271  ;  DhA  1.233 
(share) ;  111.303  ;  VvA  63  (digunai)  °g  pacitva  cooking  a 
double  portion).     Cp.  nevapika. 

-tina  grass  to  eat  J  1.150;  -puttha  fed  on  grains 
Dh  325  (  =  kundakadina  sukara-bhattena  puttho  DhA 
iv.l6  =  Nett  i29  =  Th  i.  17;  -bhojana  a  meal  on  food 
given,  a  feeding  M  1.156). 

Nivayasa  (?)  oozing  of  trees.  Bdhgh's  expl°  of  ikkasa  at 
Vin  II. 321.     See  niyyasa. 

Niv&ra^a  (nt.  &  adj.)  [fr.  nivareti]  warding  off,  keeping 
back,  preventing;  refusal  Sn  1034,   1035,   1106  (  =  Nd' 
363  avarana  rakkhana  gopana) ;  DhsA  259 ;  PvA  102 
278;  Sdhp  396. 

Nivaraya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  nivareti]  in  dun°  hard  to  check  or 
keep  back  Miln  21  (-t- duravararia). 

NivSrita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  nivareti]  unobstructed,  open  PvA 
202  (  =  anavata). 

Nivaretar  [n.  agent  to  nivareti]  one  who  holds  back  or 
refuses  (entrance)  (opp.  pavesetar)  D  11.83=8  iv.i94  = 
A  v.  194  (dovariko  aiiftatanai)  nivareta  fiatanam  pave- 
seta). 

Nivareti  [Caus.  of  nivarati]  to  keep  back,  to  hold  back 
from  (c.  abl.),  to  restrain,;  to  refuse,  obstruct,  forbid, 
warn  Vin  1.46 ;  11.220  ;  S  1.7  (cittar)  nivSreyya),  14  (yato 


mano  ijiv<ii<iyc; 
cittai)  nivSraye) 
102  ;  DhA  1. 41 


Nivuttha 


209 


Nisudana 


Nivuttha  (pp.  of  nivasati)  inhabited  ;  dwelling,  living ;  see 
san°. 

Nivetha  in  paiihe  dunaivetha  at  Aliln  90  see  nibbedha. 

Nivethana  see  vi°. 

Nivetheti  see  nibbetheti. 

Rivedaka  (adj.)  [to  nivedeti]  relating^  admonishing 
J  VI.21. 

Hivedeti  [ni+  vedeti,  Cans,  of  vid.]  to  communicate,  make 
known,  tell,  report,  announce  J  1.60,  307  ;  PvA  53,  66 
(attanai)  reveal  oneself);  Davs  v. 42. 

Nivesa  fVedic  nive^a,  fr.  ni+vis]  i.  entering,  stopping, 
settling  down;  house,  abode  \'v  8^  (=nivesanani  kac- 
chantarani  VvA  50).  — •.  2 .  —  nivesana',  in  ditthi"  Sn  785 
( =  idag  -sacch&bhinivesa-sankhitani  ditjhi-uivesanani 
SnA  522). 

Nivesana  (nt.)  [Vedlc  nive^ana,  fr.  nivesati,  cp.  niviftha] 
I.  entering,  entrance,  settling  ;  settlement,  abode,  house, 
home  D  1.205,  ~26;  11. 127;  J  1.294;  ii.i6o  (°tthana) ; 
PvA  22,  81,  H2.  —  2.  (flg.)  (also  nivesana  f.  :  Nd^  366) 
settling  on,  attachment,  clinging  to  (in  ditfhi"  chnging 
to  a  view  =  dogmatism  cp.  nivissa-vadin)  Sn  1055 
(nandi+  ;  =taoha  Nd^  366);  Dh  40  (ditthi") ;  Nd'  76, 
I  ID.     See  also  nivesa. 

Nivesita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  nivesati]  settled,  arranged,  designed, 
built  VvA  82  (=sumapita). 

Hiveseti  [Caus.  of  nivesati]  to  cause  to  enter,  to  establish  ; 
to  found,  build,  fix,  settle ;  (fig.)  to  establish  in.  e.xhort 
to  (c.  loc.),  plead  for,  entreat,  admonish  D  1.206  ;  S  v.  189  ; 
Dh  158,  282  (attanag) ;  It  78  (brahmacariye) ;  Th  2,  391 
(manai));  J  v.99 ;  Pv  111.7''  (sagyame  nivesayi) ;  DA 
1.273  (gamai)) ;  PvA  206. 

Nivyaggba  (adj.)  [nis+ vyaggha]  free  from  tigers  J  n.358 
(v.  1.  nibbyaggha). 

Nisagga  (&  Nissagga)  [ni  or  nis+srj]  giving  forth,  bestow- 
ing ;  natural  state,  nature  S  1.54  (°ss°).     Cp.  nisattha. 

Nisankbiti  (f.)  [Sk.  ni-sagskfti,  ni-H  sag  I- brj  deposit  (of 
merit  or  demerit),  accumulation,  effect  (of  kanima) 
Sn  953  (  =  Nd'  442  abnisankhara). 

Hisajja  (f.)  [Sk.  'ni^adya  of  ni  sad]  sitting  down,  oppor- 
tunity for  sitting,  seat  Pv  iv.i^  (seyya-f):  J  1.217; 
PvA  24  (°adipatikkhepa-tth5na),  219  (pallankibhujan- 
adi-lakkhari5  nisajja).     Cp.  nesajjika. 

Risajjeti  [sic  MSS.  for  niss°  ;  Sk.  nihsarjayati,  nis-|-sajjeti, 
Caus.  of  Sfj]  to  spend,  bestow,  give,  give  up  PvA  105 
(danfipakarana  nisajjesi  read  better  as  "karaijani  saj- 
jesi).     See  also  nissajjati. 

Nisattba  (pp.)  [nis4-sattha  of  gyj]  given  up,  spent,  lost 
Th  2,  484  (v.  1  "ss");  ThA  286  (=pariccatta).  Cp. 
nisajjeti  &  nisagga. 

Higada  &  Niaada  (f)  [Sk.  dr^ad  f.  ;  for  n  :  d  cp.  P.  nijjuha  = 
Sk.  datyuha  etc.]  a  grindstone,  esp.  the  undcrstone  of 
a  millstone  Vin  1.201  ;  (°pota  id.) ;  Miln  149  ;  Vism  252 
Cpota.  where  KhA  at  id.  p.  reads  °putta).     Cp.  a°. 

Kisanti  (f.)  [Sk.  *ni5anti.  ni-l- iam]  careful  attention  or 
observation  A  n.97  ;  m.201  ;  iv.15  (dhamma°).  36  (id.). 
296;  v. 166  (dhamma°) ;  Dpvs  1.53  (°kara).  Cp.  nisam- 
ma  &  nisclmeti. 

Hisabha  [Sk.  nj+  r^abha.  cp.  usabha.  On  relation  of 
usabha  :  vasabha  :  nisabha  see  SnA  40]  "  bull  among 
men,"  i.  e.  prince,  leader;  "  princeps,"  best  of  men; 
Ep.  of  the  Buddha  S  1.28,  48,  91;  M  1.386;  J  v.70  : 
vi.526 :  Vv  16'  (isi°).  cp.  VvA  83  for  expl°  ;  Vv  63' 
(isi°  =  5janiya  VvA  262). 


Risamma  (adv.)  [orig.  ger.  of  nisameti.  Sk.  niSamya.  torn] 
carefully,  considerately,  observing  Sn  54;  Nd'  367  = 
481  b  (=sutva).  Esp.  in  phra<!e  n.-karin  acting  con 
siderately  Dh  24  (==Dh.\  1.238);  J  ni.io6:  vi.375 ; 
Miln  3 ;  cp.  n.  kiriyaya  Miln  59.     Cp.  msanti. 

Nisa  (f.)  [Sk.  niS  &  niSa,  prob.  with  nisltha  (midnight)  to 
ni-(- 8i  =  lying  down]  night  Vv  35^  (loc.  nise) ;  VvA  161 
(loc.  nisati,  v.  1.  nisi  =  rattiyag) ;  Miln  388  (loc.  nisaya) ; 
Davs  11. 6  ;  v. 2  (nisayag).     See  also  nisltha. 

Nisataka  in  koka°  J  vi.538,  a  certain  wild  animal;  the 
meaning  is  not  clear,  etymologically  it  is  to  be  derived 
fr.  Sk.  nisatayati  to  strike,  to  fell.  See  Kern,  Toev. 
1.  p.  152,  s.  V.  koka.  The  v.  1  is  "nisadaka.  evidently 
influenced  by  nisada. 

Nisada  [cp.  Sk.  nijada,  a  Non-Ar>'an  or  barbarian]  a 
robber  J  iv.364.     Cp.  nesada. 

Nisadika  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  ni5adin,  ni-t-sad]  fit  for  lying 
down,  suitable  for  resting  Vin  1.239  (go°). 

Nisadin  (adj.)  [fr.  ni+gad]  lying  down  D  ni.44,  47. 

Nisana  [ni  f  Sa  to  sharpen,  to  whet,  cp.  nisita]  a  hone  on 
which  to  sharpen  a  knife  Miln  282. 

Nisamaka  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  ni§amana]  observant,  listening  to, 
attending  to,  careful  of  A  v.  166,  168  (dharamanag). 

Nisameti  [ni-l-sameti]  to  attend  to,  listen  to,  observe,  be 
careful  of,  mind  J  iv.29  (anisametva  by  not  being  care- 
ful);  V.486;  DhA  1.239  (-l-upadhaneti) ;  PvA  i  (imper. 
nisamayatha).     Cp.  nisanti,  nisamma. 

Nisara  (adj.-n.)  [ni-l-sara]  full  of  sap,  excellent,  strong  (of 
a  tree)  Vv  63*  ( =  niratisaya-sarassa  nisitthasarassa  ruk- 
khassa  VvA  261). 

Nisincati  [ni-t-  siiicati]  to  besprinkle  Mhvs  vn.8. 

Nisita  (adj.)  [Sk.  nisita,  ni4-pp.  of  sa  to  whet]  sharp 
M  1. 281  (avudhajata  pita°  ?) ;  J  iv.118  (su")  ;  VvA  233  ; 
PvA  155,  192,  213. 

Nisinna  (adj.)  [Sk.  ni^anna,  pp.  of  nisidati]  sitting  down, 
seated  J  1.50,  255  ;  111. 126  ;  KhA  250  ;  PvA  1 1,  16,  39  & 
passim.  —  Often  comb^  &  contrasted  with  titthag 
(standing),  carag  (walking)  &  sayag  (sayana ;  lying 
down),  e.  g.  at  Sn  151,  193  ;  It  82. 

Nisinnaka  (adj.)=nisinna;  M  1.333:  J  1.163  ;  DhA  111.175. 

Nisltba  [Sk.  ni^itha,  see  nisa]  midnight,  night  Th  i,  3 
(aggi  yatha  pajjalito  nisithe ;  v.  1.  BB  nisive),  524 
(v.  1.  nisive)  ;  J  iv.432  ;  v.330,  331  (v.  1.  BB  nisive),  506 
( =rattibhaga  Com.). 

Nialdati  [Sk.  nisidati,  ni-(-  sidati]  to  sit  down,  to  be  seated, 
to  sit,  to  dwell  Nd^  433;  J  111.392  ;  vi.367;  Pv  11.9' 
(nisideyya  Pot);  PvA  74.  aor.  nisidi  Vin  l.i  ;  J 
11.153;  PvA  5,  23,  44;  3'"  pi.  nisidigsu  (J  1.307)  & 
nisidisug  (Mhvs  vii.40) ;  ger.  nisiditva  (J  11. 160  ;  PvA  5, 
74),  nisajja  D  11.127)  *nd  nisiditvaiia  (Sn  1031);  grd. 
nisiditabba  Vin  1.47.  pp.  nisinna  (q.  v.).  —  Caus.  II. 
nisidapeti  [cp.  Sk.  nisadayati]  to  cause  to  sit  down,  to 
make  one  be  seated,  to  invite  to  a  seat  J  111.392  ;  vi.367  ; 
PvA  17,  35  (there  asane) ;  Miln  20.     Cp.  abhi°,  san°. 

Nisldana  (nt.)  [Sk.  nijadana,  fr.  nisidati]  sitting  down, 
occasion  or  opportunity  to  sit,  a  mat  to  sit  on  Vin  1.295  ; 
11.123  (°ena  vippavasati) ;  S  v.259  (°g  ganhati).  °pac- 
cattharana  a  mat  for  sitting  on  Vin  1.47,  295 ;  11.209, 
218. 

Nisumbhati  [ni-l-sumbh  (subhnati)]  to  knock  down  Th  2, 
302  (  =pateti  ThA  227). 

Nisudana  (nt.)  [ni-l-  sod]  destroying,  slaughtering  Miln 
242. 


Nisedha 


210 


Nissara 


Nisedha  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  ni+sedh]  holding  back,  restraining; 
prevention,  prohibition  Dh  389;  DhA  iv.148;  hiri° 
restrained  by  shame  S  i.i68-.-Sn  462  ;  Dh  r.(3. 

Nisedhaka  (adj.)  [fr.  nisedha]  prohibiting,  restraining:  one 
who  prohibits,  an  obstructer  J  n.22ci. 

Nisedhanata  (f.)  [abstr.  to  nisedheti]  refusing,  refusal, 
prohibition  Miln  180  (a°). 

Nisedheti  [Cans,  of  ni+  sedh]  to  keep  off.  restrain,  prohibit, 
prevent  S  1. 121  (nisedha,  imper.) ;  J  111.83,  442;  ThA 
250;  VvA  105  (nirayupapattii)). — Cp.  nisedha. 

Nisevati  [ni+sev]  to  resort  to,  practise,  pursue,  follow, 
indulge  in  J  11. 106;  Sn  821  (=Nd'  157);  Pv  11.3" 
(  =  karoti  PvA  87)  ;  Miln  359.  —  pp.  nisevita. 

Nisevana  (nt.  also  -a  f.)  [Sk.  nisevana,  cp.  nisevati]  prac- 
tising, enjoying  ;  pursuit  Pug  20,  24  ;  Sdhp  406. 

Nisevita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  nisevati]  frequented,  practised,  en- 
joyed, indulged  in  M  1.178  ;  Sdhp  373. 

NissaQsaya  (adj.)  [nis-fsagsaya]  having  no  doubt,  free 
from  doubt  Miln  237.  —  ace.  as  arfii.  without  doubt, 
undoubtedly  Pv  iv.8' ;  DhA  1.106  ;  PvA  05- 

Nissakka  [fr.  nis+sakkati  =  sakk]  "  going  out  from,"  ttg. 
a  name  of  the  ablative  case  J  v. 498  ;  VvA  152,  154,  180, 
31 1  ;  PvA  147,  221. 

Nissakkana  (nt.)  [Sk.  *nihsarpana,  nis-(-sakk,  confused 
with  srp,  see  Trenckner,  Notes  p.  60  &  cp.  apassakkati. 
0°,  pari"]  going  out,  creeping  out ;  only  in  bilara"  at 
D  11.83  (v.  1.  BB  as  gloss  nikkhamana)+ S  iv.i94  = 
A  v.  195. 

Nissaggiya  (adj.)  [Sk.  *nihsargya  grd.  of  nis-t-  sajjeti,  not  = 
Sk.  naisargika]  to  be  given  up,  what  ought  to  be  rejected 
or  abandoned  Vin  1.196,  254  ;  in.  195  sq. 

Nissanga  (adj.)  [nis-l- sanga]  unattached,  unobstructed, 
disinterested,  unselfish  Sdhp  371,  398.  41 1  etc.  ;  Tikp  10  ; 
i.  abstr.  °ta  disinterestedness  J  1.46. 

Nissajjati  [nis-l-sajjati.  gfj.  See  also  nisajjetij  to  let 
loose,  give  up,  hand  over,  give,  pour  out  Vin  11. 188; 
ger.  nissajja  [Sk.  nihsrjya]  Sn  839  (v.  1,  nisajja)  :  Nd' 
189  (id.);  SnA  545.  pp.  nisattlia  &  nissattha  (q.  v.). 
Cp.  nissaggiya  &  pati°. 

Nissata  (adj.)  [pp.  of  nis-l- sarati,  sr]  flown  or  come  out 
from,  appeared;  let  loose,  free,  escaped  from  S  111.31  ; 
IV. 1 1  sq.  ;  A  1.260;  iv.43o  (a°) ;  v. 151  sq.  ;  J  111.530; 
VI. 269.:  Nd^  under  nissita;  Ps  11. 10  sq.  ;  Miln  95.  225 
(bhava°).     See  also  nissarana.     Cp.  abhi°. 

Nissattha  (adj.)  [pp.  of  nissajjati]  dismissed,  given  up, 
left,  granted,  handed  over,  given  Vin  in. 197  ("clvara) ; 
M  1.295  ;  n.203  ;  VvA  341.     See  also  nisattha  >.\;  pad". 

Nissatta  (adj.)  [Sk.  *nihsattva,  nis-l-  satta]  powerless, 
unsubstantial ;  f.  abstr.  °ta  absence  of  essence,  unsub- 
stantiality  (see  dhamma  A)  DhsA  38,  139,  263  ;  cp.  DIis. 
trsl.  pp.  XXXIII.  it  26. 

Nissadda  (adj.)  [nis+sadda]  noiseless,  soundless,  silent 
J  117  (v.94);  DhA  III. 173. 

Nissantapa  (adj.)  [nis+ santapa]  without  grief  or  self- 
mprtification  PvA  62. 

Nissanda  [Sk.  nisyanda  &  nisyanda,  ni-t-syand  (syad). 
see  sandati]  flowing  or  trickling  down  ;  discharge,  drop- 
ping, issue ;  result,  outcome,  esp.  effect  of  Kamma  A 
in.32  ;  J  1. 31.  205,  426  (sarira") ;  DhA  1.395;  11.36,  86; 
VvA  14  (pufina-kammassa  n-phala) ;  PvA  47  (punfia- 
kammassa).  58  (id.);  Miln  20.  117;  Pgdp  102. 

Nissama  [ni+samaj  exertion,  endeavour  J  v. 243. 


Nissaya  [Sk.  nisraya,  of  ni-t-  sri,  corresp.  in  meaning  to 
Sk.  asraya]  that  on  which  anything  depends,  support, 
help,  protection  ;  endowment,  resource,  requisite,  supply  ;. 
foundation,  reliance  on  (ncc.  or  -°)  Vin  1.58  (the  four 
resources  of  bhikkhu,  viz.  pindiyalopa-bhojanag,  pag- 
sukfila -clvar.irj.  rukkhamula  -  senasanag.  putimutta 
bhesajjag);  ri.274,  278  ;  D  in. 137,  141  ;  A  1.117  ;  in. 271  ; 
IV. 353  ;  V.73  ;  Sn  753.  877  ;  Nd'  108  (two  n.  :  tanha°  A 
ditthi'),  19(1.  cp.  Nd-  s.  v.  ;  Nd^  397.>  (the  requisites  of  a 
bhikkhu  in  diff.  enumeration);  Ps  n.49  sq.,  58  sq., 
73  sq.  ;  11.220 ;  Nett  7,  6j  ;  Vism  12,  535.  nissayar) 
karoti  to  rely  on.  to  be  founded  on,  tt)  take  one's  stand 
in  Sn  8t"i.  — Cp.  nissaya  &  nissita. 

-kamma  giving  assistance  or  help,  an  (ecclesiastical) 
act  of  help  or  protection  Vin  1.49,  I43.  325;  11.226; 
A  1.99;  Pv  IV. i>  (so  to  be  read  at  the  2  latter  passages 
for  niyassa").  -sampanna  finding  one's  strength  in 
-'^  IV.353- 

Nissayata(f.)  rabstr.  to  nissaya]  dependence,  requirement, 
resource  Sn  856  ;  Nd'  245. 

Nissayati  [Sk.  nisrayati,  but  in  meaning =asrayati,  ni-l- 
sri]  to  lean  on,  a  foumlation  on,  rely  on,  trust,  pursue, 
Sn  798  (silabbatar)  ;  Sn.A.  53<i  =abhinivisati) ;  VvA  83 
(katapunnar)).  Pass,  nissiyati  VvA  83.  pp.  nissita; 
ger.  nissaya  (q.  v.). 

Nissarana  (nt.)  [Sk.  nihsarana.  to  nis-l- sarati,  cp.  BSk. 
nissarana  giving  up  (?)  Av^  11.193]  going  out,  depar- 
ture ;  issue,  outcome,  result ;  giving  up,  leaving  behind, 
being  freed,  escape  (fr.  sagsara),  salvation  Vin  1.104; 
D  111.240,  248  sq.  ;  S  1.128,  142  ;  11.5  ;  in. 170  (catunnag 
dhltunar)) ;  IV. 7  sq.  (id.) ;  v.121  sq.  ;  A  1.258,  260  ;  11. 10 
(kamanai)  etc.);  111.245  sq.  ;  iv.76  (uttarirj) ;  v.  188; 
M  1.87  (kamanag).  326  (uttarig) ;  111.25 ;  It  37.  61; 
Ps  11.180,  244;  Vbh  247;  Vism  116;  ThA  233;  DhsA 
164  ;  Sdhp  579.     Cp.  nissata  &  nissaraniya. 

-dassin  wise  in  knowing  results,  prescient,  abl6  to 
find  a  way  to  salvation  S  iv.205  ;  -paiiiia  (adj.)  =  "dassin 
D  1.245  (a°) ;  III. 46 ;  S  n.194  ;  iv.332  ;  A  v. 178  (a°),  181 
sq.  ;  Miln  401. 

Nissaraniya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  nissarati,  with  relation  to  nis- 
sarana] connected  with  deliverance,  leading  to  salvation, 
able  to  be  freed.  The  3  n.  dhatuyo  (elements  of  de- 
liverance) are  nekkhamma  (escape  from  cravings), 
aruppa  (from  existence  with  form),  nirodha  (from  all 
existence),  in  detail  at  It  61  (kamanag  n.  nekkhammag, 
riip5nag  n.  aruppag,  yag  kinci  bhiitag  sankhatag  n. 
nirodho).  The  5  n-dh.  are  escape  fr.  kama,  vyapada, 
vihesa,  rupa,  sakkaya :  A  in. 245  ;  cp.  A  1.99 ; 
111.290. 

Note.  The  spelling  is  often  nissaraniya,  thus  at  Vin 
IV. 225  ;  D  III. 239  (the  five  n-dhatuyo),  247,  275. 

Nissarati  [nis-l-  sarati]  to  depart,  escape  from,  be  freed 
from  (c.  abl.)  A  1.260  (yasma  atthi  Joke  nissaranag 
tasma  satta  lokamha  nissaranti).  —  pp.  nissata,  grd. 
nissaraniya  (q.  v.) ;  cp.  also  nissararia  &  paji". 

Nissaya  (prep.  c.  ace.)  [ger.  of  nissayati,  Sk.  *nisraya,  BSk 
niSritya.  ni-l-sri]  leaning  on  (ip  all  fig.  meanings)  Nd' 
368  { =upanissaya,  arammanag  alambanarj  karitva). — 

1.  near,  near  by,  on.  at  J  1.167  (pasSnapitthag),  221 
(padumasarag) ;  PvA  24  (baha),  134  (tag  =with  him).  — 

2.  by  means  of,  through,  by  one's  support,  by  way  of 
J  1.140  (rajanag  :  under  the  patronage  of  the  k.) ;  iv.137 
(id.) ;  II. 154  (tumhe) ;  Miln  40  (kayag),  253  (id.) ;  PvA  27 
(ye  =  yesag  hetu),  154  (nadi"  alongside  of).  —  3.  because 
of,  on  account  of,  by  reason  of.  for  the  sake  of  J  1.203 
(amhe),  255  (dhanag),  263  (mag);  PvA  17  (kig).  67 
(namag).  130  (tag). — Cp.  nissaya.  nissita. 

Nissara  (adj.)  [nis-Fsara]  sapless,  worthless,  unsubstan- 
tial J  1.393  ;  Sdhp  51.  608,  612. 


Nissarajja 


211 


Nirasa 


Nissarajja  (adj.)  [Sk.  nih+sarada+ ya]  without  diffidence, 
not  dilVident.  confident  J  1.274  (+nibbhaya). 

Nissarapa  (nt.)  [fr.  nissarati]  going  or  driving  out,  expul- 
sion Miln  344  (osarana-n.-patisarana).  357. 

Nissita  (adj.)  [Sk.  nisrita,  pp.  of  nissayati,  corresp.  in 
meaning  to  Sk.  asrita]  hanging  on,  dependent  on,  in- 
habiting; attached  to,  supported  by,  living  by  means 
of,  relying  on,  being  founded  or  rooted  in,  bent  on. 
As  -°  often  in  sense  of  a  prep.  =  by  means  of,  on  account 
of,  through,  esp.  with  pron.  kit)"  (=why,  through  what) 
Sn  458;  tag°  (therefore,  on  acct.  of  this)  S  iv.i02. — 
For  comb°  with  var.  synonyms  see  Nd^  s.  v.  &  cp.  Nd' 
75,  106.  —  S  II. 17  (dvayar)  ;  cp.  111.134);  iv.59,  365; 
V.2  sq.,  63  sq.  ;  A  111.128  ;  Dh  339  (raga'')  ;  Sn  752,  79S, 
910  ;  J  I.I 45  ;  Nd'  283  ;  Pv  1.8^  (sokag  hadaya"  lying  in) ; 
11.6°  (pathavi°  supported  by) ;  Vbh  229  ;  Nett  39  (°citta) ; 
Miln  314  (inhabiting) ;  PvA  86  (mana°).  —  anissita  un- 
supported, not  attached,  free,  emancipated  Sn  66,  3O3, 
753.  849,  io6g  (unaided) ;  J  1.158  ;  Miln  320,  351.  —  Cp. 
apassita. 

Nissitaka  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  prec]  adherent,  supporter  (orig. 
one  who  is  supported  by),  pupil  J  1.142,  186  ;  DhA  1.54. 

Nissitatta  (nt.)  [fr.  nissita]  dependence  on,  i.  e.  interference 
by,  being  too  near,  nearness  Vism  118  (pantha°).  Cp. 
san°. 

Nissirlka  (adj.)  [nis-f  siri]  having  lost  his  (or  its)  splendour 
or  prosperity  J  vi.225  (ajivika),  456  (rajabhavana). 

Nissima  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  nihsiman  with  difi.  meanings 
("boundless"),  n  is -I- si  ma]  outside  the  boundary  Vin 
1.255  (°nha),  298  {"!)  gantuo);  11.167  (°e  thito). 

Nissata  (adj.)  [fr.  nis-l-  sru,  see  savati]  flown  out  or  away, 
vanished,  disappeared  M  1.280. 

Nisse^i  (f)  [fr.  nis-l-sri,  orig.  that  which  leans  agaiist,  or 
leads  to  something,  cp.  Sk.  sren!  a  row]  a  ladder,  a 
flight  of  stairs  D  1.194,  '9^  ;  J  i-53  :  "-S'S:  iii.5"5; 
Miln  263  ;  Vism  244,  340  (in  simile) ;  DhA  1.259. 

Nissesa  (adj.)  [nis-lsesa]  whole,  entire;  nt.  ace.  as  adv. 
nissesai)  entirely,  completely  Nd^  533. 

Nissoka  (adj.)  [nis-t-soka]  free  from  sorrow,  without  grief, 
not  mourning  PvA  62  ;  KhA  153. 

Nihata  (adj.)  [pp.  of  nihanti.  ni-l-  han]  "  slain  "  ;  put  down, 
settled ;  destroyed ;  dejected,  humiliated ;  humble 
Vin  II.  v>7  (settled) ;  J  v. 435  ("bhoga  one  whose  fortunes 
arc  destroyed). 

-mand  "  with  slain  pride,"  humiliated,  humble 
S  IV. 203  ;  Th  2,413  (  =  apanita-manaThA  267)  ;  J  11.300  ; 
VI. 367. 

Niharati  see  niharati. 

Nihita  (adj.)  [Sk.  nihita.  pp.  of  ni-Hdha,  see  dahatij  put 
down,  put  into,  applied,  settled  ;  laid  down,  given  up, 
renounced.  As  °-  tiftcn  in  the  sense  of  a  prep.  = 
without,  e.  g.  "danda  "sattha  without  stick  A-  sword  (sec 
danda  .  .  .)  D  1.70  (-Yaccamitta) ;  Pv  iv.3''"'  (su^  well 
applied)  ;  PvA  252  (bhasma-nihita  thrown  into  the 
aslies) ;  Sdhp  311. 

Nihina  (adj.)  [Sk.  nihina,  pp.  of  niliiyati  or  nih,'iyati]  lost : 
<kgraded  low.  vile,  base  :  inferior,  little,  insignificant 
S  1.12  ;  Sn  S9.1  ;  Nd'  105,  194  ;  PvA  198  (jati'  low-born) ; 
Sdhp  S().     Opp.  to  seyya  J  vi.356  sq. 

-attha  one  who  has  lost  his  fortune,  poor  l*v  iv.i''; 
-kamma  of  low  action  Sn  661  -It  43  ;  Dh  306  ;  J  11.4(7  ■ 
-citta  low-minded  PvA  107  (  =  dina);  -jatika  of  inferior 
birth  or  caste  PvA  175;  -pafliia  of  inferior  wisdom 
Sn  89")  (-:paritta-panna  Nd'  299);  -sevin  of  vile  pur- 
suit A  1.120. 


Nihinata  (f)  [abstr.  to  nihina]  lowness.  inferiority ;  vileness. 
baseness  D  1.98,  99. 

Nihiyati  [ni-(-hiyati.  Pass,  of  ha,  see  jahati]  to  be  left,  to 
come  to  ruin,  to  be  destroyed  A  1.126  =  J  111.324  (  =  vi- 
nasar)  papunati).     pp.  nihina  (q.  v.). 

Nihuhunka  (adj.)  [fr.  ni°  =nis-(- huhunkaj  one  who  does 
not  confide  in  the  sound  hiu)  Vin  1.3  (cp.  J.P.T.S.  I9"i. 
42). 

Nika  [Sk.  nyanku  ?  Doubtful  reading]  a  kind  of  deer  (or 
pig)  J  v. 406  (vv.U.  nika,  ninga). 

NIgha  (in  anigha)  see  nigha'. 

Nica  (adj.)  [Vedic  nica,  adj. -formation  fr.  adv.  ni^,  cp. 
Sk.  nyaflc  downward]  low,  inferior,  humble  (opp.  ucca 
high,  fr.  adv.  ud°)  Vin  1.46,  47;  11. 194;  D  1.109,  179, 
194  ;  A  v. 82  :  SnA  424  (nicag  karoti  to  degrade) ;  & 
passim. 

-kula  of  low  clan  J  1. 106  ;  Sn  41 1  ;  -("a)  kuUna  belong- 
ing to  low  caste  Sn  462  ;  -cittata  being  humble-hearted 
Dhs  1340  ;  DhsA  395  ;  -pithaka  a  low  stool  DhA  iv.177  ; 
-mano  humble  Sn  252  (  =  nicacitto  SnA  293) ;  -seyya  a 
low  bed  A  1.2 12  (opp.  ucc&sayana). 

Nlceyya  (adj.)  [compar.  of  nica  (for  "iya  ?),  in  function  of 
°eyya  as  "of  the  kind  of,"  sort  of,  rather]  lower, 
inferior,  rather  low  M  1.329  ;  Sn  855,  918  ;  Nd'  244.  351. 

mta  (pp.)  [pp.  of  neti]  led,  guided;  a.scertained,  inferred 
A  1.60  (°attha) ;  J  1.262  ;  11.215  (kama°) ;  Nett2i  ('attha, 
natural  meaning,  i.  e.  the  primarily  inferred  sense,  opp. 
neyyattha) ;  Sdhp  366  {dun").     Cp.  vi'. 

Nlti  (f.)  [Sk.  niti,  fr.  nita]  guidance,  practice,  conduct,  esp. 
right  conduct,  propriety  ;  statesmanship,  polity  PvA  114 
("mangala  commonsense),  129  ("sattha  science  of 
statecraft,  or  of  prudent  behaviour),  130  (°cintaka  a 
lawgiver),  131  (°naya  polity  &  law),  132  ("kusala  versed 
in  the  wisdom  of  life) ;  Miln  3  (here  meaning  the  Nyaya- 
philosophy,  cp.  Trenckner,  Notes  p.  58). 

NIdha  =  nu  idha,  see  nu. 

Nidhura  (.=  )  [Sk.  ?  Cp.  keyura]  bracelet,  bangle  J  vi.64, 
(  =  valaya  ;  v.  1.  BB  nivara).  Also  given  as  niyura  (cp. 
Prk.  neura  &  P.  nupura). 

Nipa  (adj.)  [Vedic  nipa,  contr.  fr.  ni+apa  "  low  water  "] 
lit.  lying  low.  deep,  N.  of  the  tree  Nauclea  cadamba,  a 
species  of  Asoka  tree  J  1.13  (v.  6i)  =  Bu  11. 51  ;  J  v. 6 
(so  read  for  nipa). 

Nibhata  [cp.  Sk.  nirbhrta,  pp.  of  nis-Hbhf]  bought  out 
J  111.471. 

Nlyati  [Sk.  niyati,  Pass,  of  neti]  to  be  led  or  guided,  to 
go,  to  be  moved  S  1.39  (cittena  niyati  loko) ;  Dh  175; 
Pv  Ml'  (=vahiyati  PvA  56)  ;  J  1.264  (PP''-  niyamana) ; 
PvA  4  (id.);  Dh.V  in. 177;  Sdhp  292,  302.  Also  found 
in  spelling  niyyati  aL  Sn  851;  Nd'  223  (=yayati, 
vuyhati),  395.  —  In  the  sense  of  a  Med.  in  imper. 
niyamase  (let  us  take)  Pv  ii.g'  (  =  nayissama  PvA  113). 

Niyati  see  niyyati. 

Niyadita,  Niyadeti  see  niyy". 

Nlyanika  see  niyy^ 

nraja  (adj.)  [Sk.  niraja,  nis-H  raja]  free  from  passion  Sdhp 
37"- 

NIrava  (adj.)  [Sk.  nirava.  nis-f  rava]  soundless,  noiseless, 
silent  DA  1.153  (tunhi-f-). 

NIrasa  (adj.)  [Sk.  nirasa.  nis-h  rasa]  sapless,  dried  ap, 
withered,  tasteless,  insipid  J  iii.iii. 


Niruja 


212 


Napura 


Niruja  (adj.)  [Sk.  ninija.  nis+  ruja]  ^niroga  Sdhp  496. 

Nlroga  (adj.)  [Sk.  niroga,  nis+ roga]  free  from  disease, 
healthy,  well,  unhurt  J  1.421  ;  111.26;  iv.31  ;  PvA  198 
(ni").     Cp.  niruja. 

Nila  (adj.)  [Vedic  nila,  perhaps  conn,  with  Lat.  nites  to 
shine,  see  Walde,  Lat.  Wtb.  s.  v.]  dark-blue,  blue-black, 
blue-green.  Nila  serves  as  a  general  term  to  designate 
the  "  coloured-black,"  as  opposed  to  the  "  coloured- 
white  "  (pita  yellow),  which  pairs  (nila-pita)  are  both 
set  off  against  the  "  pure  "  colour-sensations  of  red 
(lohitaka)  &  white  (odata),  besides  the  distinct  black  or 
dark  (see  kaijha).  Therefore  n.  has  a  fluctuating 
connotation  (cp.  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  Buddh.  Psych,  p.  49  & 
Dhs.  trsl.  p.  62),  its  only  standard  comb"  being  that  with 
pita,  e.  g.  in  the  enum"  of  the  ten  kasipa  practices  (see 
kasina) :  nila  pita  lohita  odata;  in  the  description  of  the 

5  colours  of  the  Buddha's  eye :  nila  pitaka  lohitaka 
kanha  odata  (Nd^  235,  P  under  cakkhuma) ;  which  goes 
even  so  far  as  to  be  used  simply  in  the  sense  of  "  black 

6  white."  e.  g.  VvA  320.  Applied  to  hair  (lomani) 
D  II. 144;  M  11. 136.  See  further  enum°  at  VvA  iii 
&  under  kanha.  —  A  in. 239;  iv.263  sq.,  305,  349; 
V.61  ;  Vism  no,  156,  173;  ThA  42  (maha°  great  blue 
lotus) ;  Dhs  617  ;  Pv  11. 2^  ;  PvA  32,  46,  158  ;  Sdhp  246, 
270,  360. 

-abbha  a  black  cloud  Pv  iv.3'.  -abhijati  a  dark 
(unfortunate)  birth  (cp.  kanh")  A  ni.383  ;  -uppala  blue 
lotus  J  III. 394  :  Vv  45*  (==kuvalaya)  ;  DhA  1384; 
-kasina  the  "  blue  "  kasiija  (q.  v.)  D  in. 248  ;  Dhs  203  ; 
(Vam  172  etc.  ;  -giva  "  blue  neck,"  a  peacock  Sn  221 
=  maiji-danda-sadisaya  givaya  n.  ti  SnA  277)  ;  -pupphi 
N.  of  plant  ("  blue-blossom  ")  J  vi.53  :  -bijaka  a  water- 
T5lant  ("blue-seed")  Bdhgh  at  Vin  111.276;  -mani  a 
sapphire  ("  blue-stone  ")  J  11. 112  ;  iv.  140  ;  DhA  iu.254  ; 
-vanna  blue  colour,  coloured  blue  or  green  J  IV.14O  (of 
the  ocean) ;  Dhs  246. 

Nllaka  (adj.)  for  nila  M  11.201  ;  see  vi°. 

Niliya  [fr.  nlli]  an  (indigo)  hair  dye  J  in.  138  (Com.  nili- 
yaka). 

inU  (f.)  [Sk.  nili]  the  indigo  plant,  indigo  colour  A  111.230, 
2.33- 

Ni}a  [Vedic  nida]  a  nest  (J  v.92) :  see  niddha :  cp.  "pacchi 
bird  cage  J  11.36 1  ;  roga°  It  37;  vadharoga"  Th 
1. 1093. 

Nivarana  (nt.  occasionally  m.)  [Sk.  ♦nivarana.  nis  -|- 
varaija  of  vj  (vrijoti),  see  nibbuta  &  cp.  nivarana]  an 
obstacle,  hindrance,  only  as  tt.  applied  to  obstacles  in 
an  ethical  .sense  &  usually  enum''  or  referred  to  in  a  set 
of  5  (as  panca  nivaranani  and  p.  avaranani),  viz.  kamac- 
chanda,  (abhijjha-)vyapada,  thina-middha,  uddhacca- 
kukkucca,  vicikiccha  i.  e.  sensuality,  ill-will,  torpor  of 
mind  or  body,  worry,  wavering  (cp.  Dhs.  l/sl.  p.  310)  : 
D  1.73  ('e,  ace.  pi),  246;  11.83,  3<'0  )  m  49  sq.,  101,  234, 
278  ;  S  11.23  ;  in. 149 ;  v.Oo,  84  sq.,  93  sq.,  145,  160,  226, 
327.  439;  M  1.60,  144,  276;  HI. 4,  295;  A  1.3,  161; 
in. 16,  63,  230  sq.  ;  380  ;  iv.457  ;  v. 16,  195,  322  ;  Sn  17  ; 
Nd»  13  ;  Nd2  379  ;  Ps  1.31,  129,  163  ;  Pug  68  ;  Dhs  1059, 
1 136,  1495;  Vbh  199,  244,  378;  Nett  II,  13,  94;  Vism 
146,  189;  DA  1. 213;  Sdhp  459,  493  and  passim. — 
Other  enum"'-  are  occasionally  found  e.  g.  10  at  S  v.i  10  ; 
8  at  M  1.360  sq. ;  6  at  Dhs  1 152. 

Nivarai^iya  (adj.)  [fr.  nivarana]  belonging  to  an  obstacle, 
forming  a  hindrance,  obstructing  Dhs  584,  11O4,  1488; 
Vbh  12,  3(p,  66,  130  etc. 

Nivara  [Sk.  nivara,  unexplained]  raw  rice,  paddy  D  1.166; 
A  1.241,  295  ;  11.206  ;  Pug  55  ;  J  ni.t44  (°yagu). 

Nihata  [pp.  of  niharati  =  Sk.  nirhfta]  thrown  out,  removed  ; 
in  f.  abstr.  °ta  ejection,  removal  [cp.  Sk.  nirhfti]  DhA 


III. 336    (malanat)    n.    the   extirpation   of  impurity   or 
removal  of  stain). 

Nlharava  (nt.)  [fr.  niharati]  taking  out,  carrying  away, 
removing  DA  1.296  ;  PvA  7. 

Niharati  [nis-l-  hr]  to  take  out,  to  throw  out,  drive  out 
J  1. 150,  157;  111.52;  VI. 336  ;  Nd2  1997  (ni°) ;  VvA  222, 
256;  PvA  73,  254;  Miln  8,  219.  aor.  nihari  D  1.92; 
J  1.293;  11154;  PvA  41,  178  (gehato  tag  n.).  grd. 
niharitabba  DhA  1.397  (opp.  pavesetabba).  —  pp.  nihata. 
—  Caus.  niharapeti  to  have  thrown  out,  to  order  to  be 
ejected  VvA  141. 

Nlhara  [cp.  Sk.  nirhara]  way,  manner  Vin  1.13;  J  1.127; 
DhA  IV. 7.  At  Vin  1.13  also  in  nihara-bhatta  (  =  nlha- 
raka) . 

Nlharaka  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  nihara,  cp.  niharana]  one  who  carries 
away  Vin  1.13  (nihara-bhatta) ;  S  v.  12,  320,  325  (piQ^a- 
pata). 

Nu  (indecl.)  [Ved.  nu,  Idg.  *nu,  orig.  adv.  of  time  =  now; 
cp.  Lat.  num  (to  nunc,  now),  see  nQna]  affirm.-indef. 
part.  "  then,  now."  —  i.  most  freq.  comb''  with  interr. 
pron.  and  followed  by  kho,  as  kin  nu  kho  J  11.159; 
kacci  J  1.279;  kaccin  nu  (for  kaccid  nu)  J  n.133; 
kathan  nu  (kho)  Vin  1.83  ;  kattha  PvA  22  ;  etc.  —  2.  as 
interr.  part.  (=Lat.  ne,  num)  in  enclitic  position  Vin 
1. 17;  J  111.52;  Sn  866,  871,  1071  ;  etc.  As  such  abo 
comb''  with  na =nanu  (Lat.  nonne),  which  begins  the  sen- 
tence :  Vin  n.303  (nanu  tvai)  vuddho  visativasso  'si  ti  ?) ; 
Pv  i.8< ;  PvA  39,  136  etc.  — Often  comb''  with  other 
emphatic  or  dubitative  particles,  like  api  nu  Vin  11.303  ; 
D  1.97  ;  nu  idha,  contr.  to  nidha  Vv  83^  or  with  sandhi 
as  nu-v-idha  D  1.108  (v.  1.  nu  khv  idha).  Cp.  na', 
niina,  no. 

Nutthubhati  see  nitthubhati.  (aor.  nu^hubhi,  e.  g.  J  11. 105). 

Nuda  (-°)  (adj.)  [Sk.  °nud  &  °nuda,  to  nudati]  expelling, 
casting  out,  dispelling ;  in  tamo"  dispelling  darkness 
Sn  1 133  ;  Vv  352  (<=viddhar)sana  VvA  161). 

Nadaka  or  Nudaka  (-°)=nuda  J  v.401  (asa-niJdaka). 

Nudati  [Vedic  nudati;  Idg.  •(s)nen  to  push,  cp.  Sk. 
navate,  Gr.  vfvw  &  vvaaut,  Lat.  nuo ;  Ags.  neosian,  Low 
Ger.  nucken]  to  push,  impel ;  expel,  drive  away,  reject 
Dh  28  ;  J  IV. 443  ;  DhA  1.259.  aor.  nudi  Nd*  281.  Cp. 
apa°,  pa°,  vi°.  —  pp.  nunna  (nucipa), 

Nunna  (nunna)  [pp.  of  nudati]  thrust,  pushed,  driven 
away,  removed  Nd^  220  (nij  =  khitta),  op.  panuQQa 
A  n.41. 

Nutana  (adj.)  [Vedic  nutana,  adj. -formation  fr.  adv.  nii, 
cp.  nuna.  In  formation  cp.  Sk.  svastana  (of  to-morrow), 
Lat.  crastinus  etc.]  "  of  now,"  i.  e.  recent,  fresh,  new 
Davs  iv.47. 

Nuna  (&  nunai)  DhsA  164)  (indecl.)  [Ved.  nunai)=Gr.  vvv, 
Lat.  nunc  (cp.  num) ;  Goth,  nu,  Ger.  nun,  cp.  E.  now. 
See  ""Iso  nu]  affirmative-dubitative  particle  with  Pot. 
or  Ind.,  viz.  i.  ^dubit.-interrog.)  is  it  then,  now,  shall 
I  etc.  (=Lat.  subjunctive,  hortative  &  dubitative) 
I-*  I- '55  (  =  Lat.  num,  cp.  nu).  Esp.  freq.  with  rel. 
pron.  yag=yaij  ntina  what  if,  shall  I,  let  me  (Lat.  age) 
Sn  p.  80  (yai)  nun'  ahai)  puccheyyar)  let  me  ask,  I  will 
ask);  J  1.150,  255;  111.393;  PvA  5  (y.  n.  ahag  imassa 
aiyassayo  bhaveyyag  —  let  me  help  him). —  2.  (affirm.) 
surely,  certainly,  indeed  Sn  1058  (api  nuna  pajahey- 
yug) ;  A  v. 194;  J  1.60;  v.90 ;  Pv  11.9^*  (nuna); 
Miln  20  ;  DhsA  164 ;  PvA  95  (nuna  £is  v.  1. ;  text  reads 
nanda). 

Niipara  [Sk.  nupura;  Non-Aryan.  Cp.  Prk.  neura  & 
nidhura  (niyura)]  an  ornament  for  the  feet,  an  anklet 
Th  2,  268;  DA  1.50. 


Ne 


213 


Nemittikata 


a 
209 ; 


He,  Vena  see  na'. 

HtkM  (adj.)  [Sk.  naika  =  Dae!ca,  cp.  aneka]  not  one,  several, 
many  Sn  308  ;  Vv  53"  ("citta  variegated  =  nanavidhacitta 
VvA  236).  64'  (id.  =  anekacitta  VvA  275) ;  Tikp  366. 

Vekatilu  (adj.)  [£r.  nikati]  deceitful,  fraudulent 
cheat  D  111.183;  Th  i,  940;  Miln  290;  PvA  : 
J  IV.  184. 

Hekiyika  (adj.)  [fr.  nik&ya]  versed  in  the  4  (or  5)  Nikayas 
Miln  22  ;  cp.  Cunningham,  Stupa  of  Bharhut  142,  52. 

Hekkha  fVedic  ni$ka ;  cp.  nikkha]  a  golden  ornament,  a 
certain  coin  of  gold  S  1.65  ;  A  1.181  ;  11.8,  29 ;  Dh  230 
(=DhA  III. 329  jambonada  nikkha);  Vism  48;  v.  1.  at 
Vv  20*,  43*. 

Hekkhamma  (nt.)  [formally  a  derivation  fr.  nikkhamma 
(ger.  of  nikkhamati)  =  Sk.  'nai^kramya,  as  shown  also 
by  its  semantic  affinity  to  nUckhanta,  in  which  the 
metaphorical  sense  has  entirely  superseded  the  literal 
one.  On  the  other  hand,  it  may  be  a  bastard  derivation 
fr.  nikk&ma  =  Sk.  *nai$kamya,  although  the  adj.  nik- 
kiima  does  not  show  the  prevailing  meaning  &  the  wide 
range  of  nikkhanta,  moreover  formally  we  should  expect 
nekkamma.  In  any  case  the  connection  with  kama 
is  pre-eminently  felt  in  the  connotation  of  n.,  as  shown 
by  var.  passages  where  a  play  of  word  exists  between  n. 
&  kima  (cp.  k&manai)  nissaraQai)  yad  idat)  nekkham- 
mag  It  61,  cp.  Vin  1.104  ;  A  111.245  ;  also  M  1.115).  The 
use  of  the  similar  term  abhinikkhsimana  further  warrants 
its  derivation  fr.  nikkhamati]  giving  up  the  world  & 
leading  a  holy  life,  renunciation  of,  or  emancipation  from 
worldliness,  freedom  from  lust,  craving  &  desires,  dis- 
passionateness, self-abnegation,  Nibbina  Vin  1.18  (°e 
anisaQsa) ;  D  i.iio  (id.),  111.239,  275,  283;  M  111.129; 
A  1.147  (  =  khema,  i.  e.  nibbana) ;  111.245;  iv.186  (Sni- 
sagsa),  439  sq.  ;  Sn  424  (°r)  datthu  khemato) ;  Dh  181  ; 
Ps  1. 107  sq.  ;  11.169  sq.  ;  Nd^  370;  Vism  116,  325; 
Jmq;  137;  VV84"  (  =  nibbana  VvA  348);  Nett  53,  87, 
106  sq. ;  Miln  285  (°r|  abhinikkhanta) ;  DhA  111.227; 
ThA  266. 

-&dhimutta  bent  on  self-abnegation  (enum""  with  5 
other  ideals  of  Arahantship :  paviveka,  avyapajjha, 
upad&nakkhaya,  tanhakkhaya,  asammoha)  Vin  1.183: 
A  111.376 ;  -Abhirata  fond  of  renunciation  A  iv.224 ; 
v.  175  ;  Ps  11. 1 73  ;  -dhatu  the  sphere  or  element  of  dis- 
passionateness S  11.152  ;  Vbh  86;  Nett  97;  Vism  487. 
-ninna  merging  into  or  bent  on  a  holy  life  S  111.233  : 
-▼itakka  a  thought  of  self-abnegation  S  11.152  ;  A  1.275  : 
11.252;  It  82;  -sankappa  =  prec.  S  11.152:  A  111.146; 
Vbh  104,  235 ;  -sita  based  or  bent  on  a  holy  life  (opp. 
geha°  q.  v.)  S  iv.232  ;  -sukha  the  joy  or  happiness  of 
Arahantship  M  111. no;  A  1.80;  Dh  267,  272;  DhA 
H1.400. 

Begama  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  nigama]  the  inhabitant  of  a  (small) 
town  ;  citizen  ;  also  collect.  =  jana,  people  Vin  1.268,  273  ; 
D  1.136,  139:  J  IV. 121  ;  VI. 493  ;  D5vs  111.3;  ^^  I-297- 
Often  comb"'  with  °janapada  (pi.)  "  townsmen  &  country- 
folk "  S  1.89;  D  111.148,  172;  J  149. 

Hecayika  (adj.)  [fr.  nicaya]  rich,  wealthy  D  1.136,  142 
(read  nevasika  cp.  naivasika  M  Vastu  111.38);  A  v. 149 
(v.  1.  BB  nerayika.  Com.  nevasiko  ti  nivasakaro). 

Retar  [Vedic  netr,  n.  ag.  of  neti]  a  leader,  guide,  fore- 
runner Sn  86,  213  ;  Nd'  446. 

Heti  (nayati)  [Vedic  nayati,  nl]  to  lead,  guide,  conduct ; 
to  take,  carry  (away) ;  fig.  to  draw,  a  conclusion,  to 
understand,  to  take  as  Dh  Sc,  145,  240,  257;  J  1.228; 
rv.241  (nayai]  n.  to  draw  a  proper  conclusion) ;  VvA  42 
(narati  =  nayati) ;  imper.  naya  Pv  ii.i  i',  &  nehi  J  11.160  ; 
PvA  147  ;  poetic  imper.  nay&hi  see  in  pati° ;  pot.  naye 
0h  256  (to  lead  a  cause  =  vinicchineyya  DhA  111.381). 


fut.  nessami  J  11.159  ;  Pv  11. 4';  aor.  nayi  J  iv.i37.  ger. 
netva  PvA  5,  6,  etc.  inf.  netug  PvA  123,  145  ("kama). 
&  netave  J  1.79  =  Dh  180.  grd.  neyya  (see  sep.),  pp. 
nita.  Pass,  niyati  (q.  v.).  Cp.  naya,  niti,  netta  etc.  ; 
also  a°,  upa°,  pati°,  vi°. 

Retta^  [Sk.  netra,  fr.  neti]  a  guide  J  iii.iii  ;  Nett.  130. 

Netta^  (nt.)  [Sk.  netra]  guidance,  anything  that  guides,  a 
conductor,  fig.  the  eye.  S  1.26  (sarathi  nettani  gabetva 
=  the  reins);  Vin  1.204  (dhuma"  for  smoke);  J  iv.363 
(id.);  D  1.12  ("tappana,  set  t.  &  cp.  DA  1.98);  Sn  550 
(pasanna°),  1120  ;  Nd^  371  (  =  cakkhu),  669;  J  vi.290 
(tamba°  with  red  eyes) ;  Pv  1.8'  (eyes  =nayanani Com.) ; 
Dhs  597  ;  Vbh  71  sq. 

Netti  (f.)  [Vedic  netri,  f.  to  netf]  a  guide,  conductor; 
support  (  =  nettika^)  It  37  (ahara'-pabhava),  38  (bhava"). 
94  (netticchinna  bhikkhu  =  Arahant).  Cp.  nettika^  & 
dhamma°,  bhava°. 

NettiQsa  [cp.  Sk.  nistrigSa,  Halayudha  2,  317;  very 
doubtful,  whether  nis-l-  trigsa  (thirty),  prob.  a  dial, 
distortion]  a  sword  J  11.77  (°vara-dharin  ;  C.  nettiijsa 
vuccanti  khagga) ;  iv.  1 1 8  (C.  gives  it  as  adj .  =  nikkai una, 
merciless  ;  &  says  "  khaggassa  namai)  ") ;  vi.188  ("vara- 
dharin). 

Nettika  (adj,-n.)  [netta -1- ika]  1.  having  as  guide  or  fore- 
runner, in  Bhagavai)°  dhamma  M  1. 310;  A  1.199; 
IV. 158,  351  ;  v. 355.  — 2.  a  conduit  for  irrigation;  one 
who  makes  conduits  for  watering  Dh  80  ( =  udakar) 
nenti  nettika),  145  ;  fig.  that  which  supplies  with  food 
or  water,  in  bhava°  ("  the  roots  of  existence,  clinging 
to  existence  ")  D  1.46  (ucchinna"  with  the  roots  of 
existence  cut) ;  sanettika  clinging  to  existence,  a  bad 
man  A  11.54.     ^P-  netti. 

Netthar  [see  nittharati ;  does  any  connection  exist  with 
Vedic  nestr  ?]  only  in  phrase  nettharai)  vattati  to 
behave  in  such  a  way  as  to  get  rid  of  blame  or  fault 
Vin  11.5;  III. 183;  M  1.442.  —  Bdhgh  on  Vin  11.5 
(P-  3"^9)  explains  :  nittharantanai)  etan  ti  nettharar)  yena 
sakka  nissarana  nittharitur)  tar)  attharasa-vidhai) 
sammavattur)  vattanti  ti  attho. 

Nepakka  (nt.)  [fr.  nipaka]  prudence,  discrimination,  care- 
fulness;  usually  as  sati°  S  v.  197  sq.  ;  M  1.356;  A  111.11  ; 
IV. 15;  Nd*  629  B;  Vbh  244,  249;  Vism  3  (  =  pailf\a); 
DhA  iv.29. 

NepuMa  (nt.)  [fr.  nipuna]  experience,  skill,  cleverness 
Pug  25,  35  ;  Dhs  16,  292  ;  DhsA  147. 

Nema  [cp.  nemi]  edge,  point ;  root  S  v. 445  ;  A  iv.404 ; 
gambhira"  (adj.)  with  deeply  rooted  point,  firmly 
established  S  v. 444  ;  A  iv.106. 

NemantaiMka  (adj.)  [fr.  nimantana]  one  who  lives  by 
invitations  M  1.3 1. 

Nemi  (f)  [Vedic  nemi,  perhaps  to  namati]  the  circum- 
ference of  a  wheel,  circumference,  rim,  edge  (cp.  nema) 
A  I.I  12;  Vv  64*;  Miln  238,  285;  Vism  198  (fig.  jara- 
maraija",  the  rim  of  old  age  &  death,  which  belongs  to 
the  wheel  of  Sagsara  of  the  chariot  of  existence,  bhava- 
ratha);  DhA  11.124  ("vatti) ;  VvA  277. 

Remitta  [Sk.  naimitta,  fr.  nimitti]  a  fortune-teller, 
astrologer  D  11.16,  19  ;  A  111.243. 

Kemittaka  &  Nemittika  [Sk.  naimittika,  fr.  nimitta]  an 
astrologer,  fortune-teller,  soothsayer  D  1.8  (i)  =  DA 
1.91  ;  A  111.11;  J  IV. 124;  Miln  19  (i),  229;  Vism  210 
(i);  DhA  11.241  (a). 

Nemittikata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  nemittika]  =  nimitta-kammag, 
i.  e.  prognostication  ;  inquisitiveness,  insinuation  Vbh 
352=  Vism  23  ;  expl"*  at  Vism  28. 

IV— 7* 


Netniya 


214 


Nharu 


Hemiya  (adj.)  [  — nemika]  (-°)  having  a  circumference  etc. 
J  VI.252. 

Neyya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  neti;  Sk.  neya]  to  be  led,  carried 
etc.  ;  fig.  to  be  instructed ;  to  be  inferred,  guessed  or 
understood  Sn  55,  803,  846,  11 13;  Nd'  114,  206;  Nd^ 
372  ;  Pug  41  ;  Nett  g  sq.,  125  ;  -atthathe  meaning  which 
is  to  be  inferred  (opp.  nitattha)  A  1.60 ;  Nett  21. 

Herayika  (adj.)  [fr.  niraya,  cp.  BSk.  nairayika  Divy  165] 
belonging  to  niraya  or  purgatory,  heUish ;  one  doomed 
to  suffering  in  purgatory  (n.  satta  =  inhabitant  of  n.) 
Vin  11.205  (Spayiko  n.  kappatfho) ;  IV.7 ;  D  111.6,  9,  12  ; 
A  1.265;  11-231  (vedanar)  vediyati  .  .  .  seyyathj  pi 
satta  nerayika) ;  ni.402  sq.  ;  Sn  664  ;  Nd'  97  (gati) ; 
Vv  52',  J  IV. 3  (satta) ;  Pug  51  ;  Vbh  412  sq. ;  Vism  415 
("satta),  424  ;  Miln  148  (satta) ;  PvA  27  (id.),  52  (°bhava), 
255;  VvA  23;  Sdhp  193,  198. 

Nerutta  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  nirutti]  based  on  etymology;  an 
etymologist  or  philologist  ThA  153  ;  Nett  8,  9,  32,  33. 

Hela  (&  Kela)  (adj.)  [na+ela  =  Sk.  anenas,  of  enas  fault, 
sin.  The  other  negated  form,  also  in  meaning  "  pure, 
clean,"  is  anela  (&  anejaka),  q.  v.  On  I :  n.  cp.  l&ngala ; 
nangala ;  tula :  tuna  etc.]  i .  without  fault  or  sin, 
blameless,  faultless ;  not  hurting,  humane,  gentle, 
merciful,  innocuous  D  1.4  (Bdhgh  explains ;  elag 
vuccati  doso ;  n'  ass3L  (i.  e.  vacaya)  elan  ti  nela ;  niddosi 
ti  attho.  "  Nelango  setapacchado  "  ti  ettha  vutta- 
nelai)  viya;  DA  1.75);  A  11.209;  v.205 ;  J  v.  156;  Vv 
50**,  63°  (  =  niddosa  VvA  262);  Pug  29,  57;  Dhs  1343 
(v&ca)  =  niddosa  DhsA  397.  —  2.  (somewhat  doubtful) 
"  clean,"  with  ref.  to  big  cats  (maha-bijara  nela- 
man^alar)  vuccati),  whereas  young  ones  are  called 
"  elephants,  cubs  "  (something  like  "  pigs  ")  (taruna 
bhinka-cchapamaij(Jalai))  J  v.418. 

-anga  of  faultless  limbs  or  parts,  of  a  chariot  (ratha) 
=  running  perfectly  S  iv.291  =Ud  76  (nelagga  text, 
nelangav.  l.)  =  DA  i.75  =  DhsA  397.  -paU  (f.)  =  ne|a- 
vati  (of  vaca)  humane,  gentle  J  vi.558  (na  elapati 
elapata-rahita  madhura  Com.). 

Neva  (indecl.)  [na+  eva]  see  na^.  —  nevasaiina-nasaflna 
(being)  neither  perception  nor  non-perception,  only  in 
cpd.  °ayatana  &  in  nevasafini-nisailflin :  see  safi&a. 

Nevapika  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  nivapa]  a  deer-feeder  M  1.150  sq. 


NevSsika  (adj.)  [fr.  nivasa,  cp.  BSk.  naiv&sika  Avi 
1.286,  287]  one  who  inhabits,  an  inmate ;' living  in  a 
place,  local  J  1.236  sq. ;  DhA  11.53  sq-     Cp.  necayika. 

Nesaijika  (adj.)  [fr.  nisajja]  being  &  remaining  in  a  sitting 
position  (as  an  ascetic  practice)  A  111.320;  Th  1,  904, 
1 120  ;  Nd2  587  ;  J  iv.8  ;  Pug  69  ;  Vism  79  ;  Miln  20,  342. 
The  n-°anga  is  one  of  the  dhotanga-precepts,  enjoining 
the  sitting  posture  also  for  sleeping,  see  Vin  v.193,  Vism 
61,  &  dhutanga. 

Neaada  [fr.  nisada;  cp.  Sk.  nisada  &  nai^ada^one  who 
lies  in  wait]  a  hunter  ;  also  a  low  caste  Vin  1V.7  {+  vepa 
&  rathakara);  S  1.93  (°kula) ;  A  1.107;  11.85;  J  n.36; 
lit. 330;  IV.397,  413;  v. 1 10,  337;  VI. 71 ;  Pug  51  ("kula); 
Miln  311  ;  DhA  111.24;  PvA  176. 

No'  (indecl.)  affirm.  &  emphatic  part.  =nu  (cp.  na*) : 
indeed,  then,  now  Sn  457,  875,  1077 ;  J  v.343  (api  no  = 
api  nu).  435  (=nipatamattar)  p.  437). 

No"  (indecl.)  [Sk.  no  =  na^-u,  a  stronger  na;  cp.  na') 
negative  &  adversative  particle  =  neither,  nor,  but  not, 
surely  not,  indeed  not.  —  (a)  in  neg.  sentences :  Sn 
852.  855,  1040  ;  It  103  (but  not) ;  Pv  11.3'^  (but  not). 
as  answer :  no  hi  etag  "  indeed  not,  no  indeed  "  Vin 
1.17;  D  1.3;  no  hi  idag  D  1.105.  —  no  ca  kho  "but 
surely  not  "  D  1.34,  36  ;  A  v.  195.  —  Often  emphasized 
by  na,  as  no  na  not  at  all  J  1.64  ;  na  no  Sn  224  (  =  "  ava- 
dharane "  KhA  170);  disjunctively  na  hi  ...  no 
neither — nor  Sn8i3;nano  .  .  .  na  neither — nor  (not — 
nor)  Sn  455.  —  (b)  in  disjunctive  questions :  "  or  not." 
as  evai)  hoti  va  .  .  .  nova  (is  it  so — or  not)  D  1.61,  227  ; 
kacci  .  .  .  no  (is  it  so — or  not ;  Lat.  ne-annon)  D  1.107 ; 
nu  kho  ...  no  udtbu  (is  it  that — or  not ;  or  rather) 
D  1.152.  —  (c)  noce  (no  ce  =  Sk.  no  ced)  if  not  (opp. 
sace)  Sn  348,  691,  840  ;  J  1.222  ;  vi.365  ;  VvA  69.  Also 
in  sense  of  "  I  hope  not  "  J  v.378. 

No'  [Sk.  nab]  enclitic  form,  gen.  dat.  ace.  pi.  of  pron.  1" 
(we)  =  amhakai),  see  vayar);  cp.  na'. 

Nodeti  [fr.  nud]  see  vi°. 

Nonlta  see  navanita. 

Nhaiu  see  nahani.    Found  e.  g.  at  Vin  1.25. 


THE    PALI    TEXT    SOCIETY'S 
PALI-ENGLISH   DICTIONARY 


EDITED  BY 


T.  W.   RHYS  DAVIDS  F.B.A    D.Sc.  Ph.D.  LL.D.  D.Litt. 
and  WILLIAM  STEDE  Ph.D. 


Part  V  (P— Ph.) 


PUBLISHED  BY 

THE  PALI  TEXT  SOCIETY 

LONDON 


First  published 

Reprinted 

Reprinted 


1923 

1949 
1952 


Pa°  (indecl.)  [Ved.  pra,  Idg.  *pro,  cp.  Gr.  Trpii,  Lat.  pro. 
Goth,  fra,  Lith.  pra,  pro.  Oir.  ro-l  directional  prefix  of 
forward  motion,  in  applied  sense  often  emphasising  the 
action  as  carried  on  in  a  marked  degree  or  even  beyond 
its  mark  (cp.  Ger.  ver-  in  its  function  of  Goth,  fra  & 
Ger.  vor).  Thus  the  sphere  of  pa-  may  be  characterised 
in  foil,  applications:  i.  forth,  forward,  out:  papatati 
fail  forward,  i.  e.  down  ;  'neti  bring  forth  (to)  ;  °ganhati 
hold  out ;  "tharati  spread  forth ;  °dhavati  run  out ; 
°bajati  go  forth  ;  "sareti  stretch  out ;  etc.  —  2.  (intensive) 
in  a  marked  degree,  more  than  ordinarily  (cp.  E.  up  in 
cut  up,  heap  up.  <i!l  up ;  thus  often  to  be  trsl"*  by 
"up,"  or  "out,"  or  "about"):  pakopeti  up-set; 
°chindati  cut  up  ;  'bhaiijati  break  up  ;  ^Yinati  heap  up  ; 
'kiijnaka  scattered  about ;  °nada  shouting  out  ;  "bhati 
shine  forth  ;  ^bhavati  grow  up,  prevail  ;  °duseti  spoil 
entirely  ;  "jahati  give  up  entirely  ;  °tapeti  make  shine 
exceedingly  (C.  ativiya  dipeti)  ;  "jalati  blaze  up  ;  °janati 
know  well.  —  In  this  meaning  often  with  adjectives  like 
patanu  very  thin  ;  "thaddha  quite  stiff  ;  "dakkhina  right 
in  pre-eminence  ;  °bala  very  strong.  —  3.  "  onward  "  : 
patthaya  from  .  .  .  onward  ;  pavattati  move  on  ;  fig. 
"  further,  later  "  :  paputta  a  later  (secondary)  son,  i.  e. 
grandson.  —  4.  "in  front  of,"  "before":  padvara, 
before  the  door.  —  5.  Sometimes  in  trs.  (reflexive)  use. 
like  pakujin  singing  out  to  (each  other,  cp  Ger.  besingen, 
an-rufen). —  The  most  frequent  combination  with  other 
(modifying)  prefixes  is  sam-ppa  ;  its  closest  relatives 
(in  meaning  2  especially)  are  a  and  pari.  The  double 
(assimilation)  p  is  restored  after  short  vowels,  like 
appadhagsiya  (a -I- pa"). 

"Pa  (adj.)  [Cp.  Ved.  "pa,  adj.  base  of  pa  to  drink,  as  °ga 
fr.  gam  or  °tha  fr.  stha]  drinking  ;  only  in  foil.  cpds.  : 
dhenu°  drinking  of  the  cow,  suckling  calf  M  1.79  ;  Sn  2b 
(  =  dhenur|pivantoSnA39)  ;  — pada°a  tree  (lit.  drinking 
with  its  feet,  cp.  expl"  at  PvA  251  "  padasadisehi  mul' 
avayavehi  udakassa  pivanato  padapo  ti  ")  Pv  iv.39  ; 
—  majja"  drinking  intoxicants  Sn  4C0  ;  Pv  iv.i''  (a°). 

PaQSU  [cp.  Ved.  parjsu]  dust,  dirt,  soil  S  v. 459  ;  .\  1.253  ; 
Pv  11.3^.  —  pagsvagaraka  playmates  S  iil.ign;  saha- 
parjsukilita  id.  (lit.  playing  together  with  mud,  making 
mud  pies)  A  11.186;  J  1.364;  PvA  30.  Cp.  BSk 
sahaparj^ukridita  MVastu  in. 450. 

-kula  rays  from  a  dust  heap  (cp.  Vin.  Texts  11.156) 
Vin  1.58  ;  M  1.78  ;  S  11.202  ;  A  1.240,  295  ;  11.206  ;  IV.231J  ; 
It  102  =A  11.26  ;  Dh  395  :  Pug  69  ;  PvA  141,  144.  A 
qudsi  definition  of  p.-k.  is  to  be  found  at  Vism  (10. 
-kulika  one  who  wears  clothes  made  of  rags  taken  from 
a  dust  heap  M  1.30  ;  S  11. 187;  A  m.187,  219,  371  sq.  ; 
Vin  III.  15;  1V.360  ;  Ud  42;  Pug  55;  DhA  iv.  157; 
"attan  (nt.  abstr.)  the  habit  of  wearing  rags  M  1.2  14; 
111.41;  A  1.38;  III. 108.  -gunthita  (vv.  11.  "kundita, 
"kuijthita)  covered  with  dust  or  dirt  S  1.197  ;  J  vi.559  ; 
Pv  II. 3''.  —  pisacaka  a  mud  sprite  (some  sort  of 
demon)  J  ni.147;  iv.380  ;  DhA  11.26.  -mutthi  a 
handful  of  soil  J  vi.  405,  -vappa  sowing  on  light  soil 
(opp.  kalalavappa  sowing  on  heavy  soil  or  mud) 
SnA  137. 


Faijsuka  (adj.)  [Epic  Sk.  pagSuka  ;  Ved.  parjsural  dusty; 
(m.)  a  dusty  robe  KhA  171  (v.  1.  pa^suknla). 

Pakatthaka  [pa-t-kattha-l-ka;  kattha  pp.  of  kfS,  cp.  Sk. 
prakarsaka  of  same  root  in  same  meaning,  but  cp.  also 
kattha^]  (adj.)  troublesome,  annoying  ;  (m.)  a  troubler, 
worrier  S  1.174  (v.  1.  pagandaka  ;  C.  rasagiddha  ;  trsl. 
"  pertinacious  "). 

Pakatthita  see  pakk". 

Pakata  [pp.  of  pa-l-kr]  done,  made;  as  -°  by  nature  (cp. 
pakati)Sn286;  J  iv.38  ;  Pv  1.6^  ;  11.3";  ill.  10'  (papai)  = 
samacaritar)  PvA  214);  Miln  218;  DhA  11. 11  (papar)) ; 
PvA  31,  35,  103  (t),  124.  —  icchapakata  covetous  by 
nature  A  in.  1 19,  2 19  sq.  ;  Pug  69  ;  Vism  24  (here  however 
takenby  Bdhghas  "  icchayaapakata  "or"  upadduta  ") ; 
issapakata  envious  by  nature  S  11.260  ;  PvA  46,  cp. 
macchariya  pakata  afflicted  with  selfishness  PvA  124. 
On  pakata  at  1 1  89  see  apakata.  — pakata tta  (pakata  + 
attan)  natural,  of  a  natural  self,  of  good  behaviour, 
incorrupt,  "integer"  Vin  11. 6,  33,  204;  J  1.236  (bhik- 
khu,  -f  silava,  etc.).  At  Vin  11.32  the  pakatatta  bhik- 
khu  as  the  regular,  ordained  monk  is  contrasted  with 
the  parivasika  bh.  or  probationer. 

Pakati  (f)  [cp.  Ved.  prakrti]  i.  original  or  natural  form, 
natural  state  or  condition  (lit.  make-up) ;  as  ^- :  primary, 
original,  real  Vin.  1.189;  11. 113  ;  J  1146  ("vesena  in  her 
usual  dress);  KhA  173  ("kammakara.  "jetthaputta)  ; 
\'vA  12  ("pabhassara),  109  ("bhaddata). — instr.  paka- 
tiya  by  nature,  ordinarily,  as  usual  Ps  11.208  ;  \'\\  78 ; 
PvA  215,  263.  —  2.  occasion,  happening,  opportunity, 
(common)  occurrence  D  1.168  (trsl.  "  common  saying  ") ; 
Pv  II. 8»  (=°pavutti  PvA  no).  —  Der.  pakatika  & 
pakatika. 

-upanissaya  sufficing  condition  in  nature:  see  Cpd. 
194  "■  1-  — gamana  natural  or  usual  walk  DhA  i  389. 
-citta  ordinary  or  normal  consciousness  Kvu  615  (cp. 
Kvu  trsl.  359  n.  5,  and  BSk.  prakrti-nirvanatva  Bodhi- 
cary.  at  Poussin  256).  -yanaka  ordinary  vehicle  Dh.^ 
1. 391.     -sila  natural  or  proper  virtue  D.\  1.290. 

Pakatika  (adj.)  [fr.  pakati]  being  by  nature,  of  a  certain 
nature  J  11.30  ;  Miln  220  ;  DA  1.198  ;  PvA  242  (=^riipa)  ; 
DhsA  404. 

Pakattheti  [pa-l-kattheti]  talk  out  against,  denounce 
J  v. 7  (ma  "katthasi ;  C.  akkosi  garahi  nindi ;  gloss  pac- 
cakkhasi).     Should  it  be  'pakaddhasi  .' 

Pakappana  (f  )  [fr.  pakappeti]  fixing  one's  attention  on, 
planning,  designing,  scheme,  arrangement  Sn  945  (cp. 
Nd'  72  186,  where  two  pakappana's,  viz.  tanha"  & 
ditthi" ;  at  Nd'  429  it  is  synonymous  with  tanha ; 
Bdhgh  has  reading  pakampana  for  °kapp°  and  expl' 
by  kampa-karana  SnA  568). 

Pakappita  [pp-  of  pakappeti]  arranged,  planned,  attended 
to,  designed,  made  Sn  648  (  -  kata  SnA  471).  784,  776 
(ditthi  "  prejudiced  view  "  FausbiJll ;  cp.  Nd'  72  and 
pakappana),  802,  838  (=kappita  abhisankhata  saijtha- 
pita  Nd'  186),  902,  910. 

V— 1 


Pakappeti 


Pakkathita 


Pakappeti  [pra  +  Caus.  of  kip,  cp.  Ved.  prakalpayitar]  to 
arrange,  fix,  settle,  prepare,  determine,  plan  S  11.65 
(ceteti  p.  anuseti) ;  Sn  886  (pakappayitva  =  takkayitva 
vitakkayitva  sagkappayitva  Nd'  295).  —  pp.  pakap- 
pita  (q.  v.). 

Pakampati  [pa+kampati.  Cp.  BSk.  prakampati  Jtra 
220  ;  Mvyutp.  151  =kampati.]  to  shake,  quake,  tremble 
J  1.47  (v.  269)  ;  PvA  199.  —  Caus.  pakampeti  S  1.107. 

Pakampana  see  pakappana. 

Pakampita  [pp.  of  pa+kamp]  shaken,  trembling  S  1.133  = 

Th  2,  200. 

Pakarana  (nt.)  [fr.  pa+kf]  i.  performance,  undertaking 
paragraph  (of  the  law)  D  1.98  ("  offence  "  .'  see  Dial. 
1.120);  S  III. 91  ;  Miln  189. —  2.  occasion  Vin  1.44; 
11.75;  111.20.  —  3.  exposition,  arrangement,  literary 
work,  composition,  book ;  usually  in  titles  only,  viz. 
Abhidhamma"  J  1.312;  Dpvs  v.37;  Kathavattiu° 
Patthana"  Miln  12  ;  Netti°  one  of  the  Canonical  books 
(see  netti). 

Pakaroti  [pa  +  kr,  Ved.  prakaroti]  to  effect,  perform, 
prepare,  make,  do  S  1.24  (pakubbati) ;  Sn  254  (id.),' 
781,  790  (ppr.  med.  pakubbamana ;  cp.  Nd'  65)  ;  It  21 
(puniiag);  SnA  169  (pakurute,  corresponding  with 
sevati).  —  pp.  pakata  (q.  v.). 

Pakara  [pa+kr,  cp.  last;  but  Sk.  prakara  "similarity  "] 
I.  make-up,  getting  up,  fixing,  arrangement,  prepara- 
tion, mode,  way.  manner  J  11.222  ;  DA  1.132  ;  PvA  26 
'09,  123,  135,  178,  199;  Sdhp94,  466.-2.  ingredient! 
flavour,  way  of  making  (a  food)  tasty  Sn  241  (kathap- 
pakaro  tava  amagandho) ;  Miln  63.  —  3.  (.")  of  a  kind, 
by  way  of.  in  nana"  (adj.)  various,  manifold  J  15' 
(sakuna).  278  (phalani) ;  PvA  50  ;  vutta°  as  said,  the 
said  Vism  42,  44  ;  PvA  136. 

Pakaraka  (-°)  (adj.)  [fr.  pakara]  of  that  kind  S  11  8i  • 
J  VI. 259. 

Pakaretj  [Denom.  fr.  pakara]  to  direct  one's  thought 
towards  (dat.)  J  vi.307. 

Pakasati  [pa  +  kas]  to  shine  forth,  to  be  visible,  to  become 
known  Sn  445,  1032  (  =  bhasati  tapati  virocati  Nd^ 
373)-  —  Cans,  pakaseti  to  show  up,  illustrate,  explain 
make  known,  give  information  about  Vin  11189' 
S  1.105;  It  111  (brahmacariyag);Dh304;Sn578,  1021  ' 
i'ug  57;  J  V1.281  (atthag  to  explain  the  meaning  or 
matter);  DhA  11.11  (id.);  PvA  1,  12  (anisaosai,)  29 
atthao  upamahi),  32  (attanai)),  40  (adhippayan)  42 
(saccani)  72  etc.  —  grd.  pakasaniya  to  be  made  known 
or  announced  in  "kamma  explanation,  information 
annunciation  Vin  11.189  (cp.  Vin.  Texts  111.2^9)  —  pp 
pakasita  (q.  v.).  '        ^^' 

Pakasana  (nt.)  [pa-l-kas,  cp.  pakasati]  explaining,  making 
known  ;  information,  evidence,  explanation,  publicity 
Ps  1.104  (dhamma°) ;  Miln  95  ;  SnA  445  ;  PvA  2  50  103 
(expl"  of  avi).  ■  J  .      J 

Pakasita  [pp.  of  pakaseti]  explained,  manifested,  made 
known  S  1.161,  171  sq.  ;  11.107  (su°) ;  PvA  53,  63. 

PakiflSti  [pa-l-  kinati]  to  deal  in  Vin  11.267  (gid.  °kinitabba). 

Pakiwaka  (adj.)  [pa-hkinna  (pp.  of  kirati)  -f  ka]  scat- 
tered_  about;  fig.  miscellaneous,  particular,  opp.  to 
sadharana  KhA  74  ;  cp.  Cpd.  13,  952  ;  vism  175  ("katha)  • 
317  sq.  (Id.).  —As  Np.  name  of  the  xiv'"  book  of  the 
J  atakas. 

Pakitteti  [pa+kitteti]  to  proclaim  J  1.17  (v.  85). 

P^irati  [pa -I- kirati]  i.to  let  down  (the  hair),  scatter  let 
fall  D„  139  =  ^48  (ger.  pakiriya) ;  J  v.203  (so  read' for 
pankati);  V..207  (aor  "kirigsu).  _  ger.  pak  ra  (=paki 


ritva)  J  VI.  ICO  (read  pakira  carl,  cp.  C  on  p.  102),  198- 
(read  p.  pari).  —  Caus.  pakireti  1.  to  throw  down, 
upset  Vin  iv.308  (thQpai)) ;  S  i.ioo  ;  It  90  (v.  1.  kirati). 
—  2.  to  scatter  S  I. ICO  =  It  66  ;  Pug  23.  —  pp.  pakinna 
(see  "ka). 

Pakiledeti  [Caus  of  pa-Hklis,  cp.  kelideti]  to  make  wet, 
moisten  (with  hot  water)  J  vi.iog  (  =  temetva  khipati 
C). 

Pakaiihati  [pa-i-krndh]  to  be  angry  S  1.221,  223  (°eyVar)). 

Pakata  (?)  [v.  1.  pakutta]  an  inner  verandah  Vin  11. 153  ; 
cp.  Vin.  Texts  in. 175.  —  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  expl''  it  as 
miswriting  for  paku^tha  (  =Sk.  prakostha  an  inner  court 
in  a  building,  Prk.  paottha,  cp.  P.  kottha'  &  kotthaka*). 
Spelling  pakuUa  at  Nd^  485  B  (for  magga,  v.  1. 
makula). 

Pakappati  [pa  +  knpj  to  be  angry  J  iv.241. 

Pakubb"  see  pakaroti. 

Pakujin  (adj.)  [pa-t-kuj]  to  sing  out  to  (each  other)  (afi- 
iiamafifiar))  J  vi.538. 

Pakopa  [pa-fkopa]  agitation,  effervescence,  anger,  fury 
Dhs  1060  ;  Vism  235,  236. 

Pakopana  (adj.)  [pa-fkopana,  of  kup]  shaking,  upsetting, 
making  turbulent  It  84  (moho  citta-pakopano). 

Pakka  (adj.)  [Ved.  pakva,  a  pp.  formation  of  pac  to  cook, 
Idg.  *pequo  =  Lat.  coquo  "cook,"  Av.  pac-,  Obulg. 
peka,  Lith.  kepu,  Gr.  rrftraio,  aproKoTrnt^  baker,  ttejtwj' 
ripe  ;  also  pp.  of  pacati  pakta  =  Gr.  Tren-nij-,  Lat.  coctus] 
I.  ripe  (opp.  ama  raw, 'as  Vedic,  ;  and  apakka)  and  also 
"cooked,  boiled,  baked"  S  1.97  (opp.  amaka) ;  iv.324 
("bhikkha) ;  Sn  576  ;  J  v. 286.  —  nt.  pakkag  that  which 
is  ripe,  i.  e.  a  fruit,  ripe  fruit  Pug  44,  45  ;  often  in  con- 
nection with  amba°  i.  e.  a  (ripe)  mango  fruit  J  11. 104, 
394;  Pv  IV. 12^;  DhA  111.207;  PvA  187.  —  apakka 
unripe  PugA  225  ;  Sdhp  102.  —  2.  ripe  for  destruction, 
overripe,  decaying,  in  phrase  "gatta  (adj.)  having  a 
decaying  body,  with  putrid  body  [BSk.  pakvagatra 
Divy  82],  comb''  with  arugatta  at  M  1.506;  S  iv.198; 
Miln  357  (cp.  Miln  trsl.  11.262),  395.  —  3.  heated,  glow- 
ing Dpvs  1.62. 

-asaya  receptacle  for  digested  food,  i.  e.  the  abdomen 
(opp.  amasaya)  Vism  260,  358  ;  KhA  59.  -odana  (adj.) 
hiving  cooked  one's  rice  Sn  18  (=siddhabhatta  SnA 
-7).  cp.  J  III. 425.  -jjhana  "  guessing  at  ripeness,"  i.  e. 
foretelling  the  number  of  years  a  man  has  yet  to  live  ; 
in  list  of  forbidden  crafts  at  D  1.9,  expl""  at  DA  1.94  as 
"  paripaka-gata-cinta."  -pakka  ripe  fruit  KhA  59. 
-puva  baked  cake  J  iii.io.  -vannin  of  ripe  appearance 
Pug  44,  45,  cp.  PugA  225.  -sadisa  ripe-like,  appearing 
ripe  PugA  225. 

Pakka^hati  [pa  h-  kathati  of  k vath]  to  cook,  boil  up ;  only 
in  Caus.  II.  pakkatthapeti  (with  unexpl''  tfh  for  (h) 
to  cause  to  be  boiled  up  J  1472  (v.  1.  pakkutth",  cp. 
J.P.T.S.  1884,  84).  —  pp.  pakkathita  (q.  v.). 

Pakkathita  (pakkathita)  [also  spelt  with  tth  instead  of  \h 
or  th,  perhaps  through  popular  etym.  pakka 4-  tthita  for 
pa  -I-  kathita.  To  kvath,  P.  kuthati  &  kathati,  appearing 
in  pp.  as  kajhita,  kuthita,  katthita  and  kutthita,  cp. 
Geiger,  P.Gr,  §  42]  cooked  up,  boiled,  boiling  hot,  hot 
Thupavagsa  48^3;  J  v.268  (pakatth"  vv.  11.  pakkudh" 
&  jakankathi);  vi.112  (°katth°),  114  (id.;  v.  1.  BB 
?kuthita)  ;  DhA  1.126  (katth°,  v.  1.  pakkanta),  179 
(^catth",  V.  1.  pakutth°) ;  11. 5  (katth°.  vv.  11.  pakutth*" 
&  pakkuth")  ;  in. 310  (i^'  passage  katth",  v.  1.  pakutth°. 
pakkutth°,  pakkuthita  ;  =pakkutthita  at  id.  p.  VvA  67  ; 
in  2'^  passage  katth°,  v.  I.  pakutth"  it  pakkuthita.  left 
out  at  id.  p.  VvA  68) ;  ThA  292  (pakkuthita). 


Pakkatthi 


Pakkhitta 


Pakkatthi  (f)  'J^-  pa+kvat,  evidently  as  abstr.  to  pak- 
katthita;  reading  uncertain]  a  boiling  (-hot)  mixture 
(of  oil?)  M  1.87,  expl''  by  C.  as  katita-  (=kath°) 
gomaya,  boiling  cow-dung,  v.  1.  chakanaka  see  p.  537. 
The  id.  p.  at  Nd^  199  reads  chakanati.  evidently  a  bona 
fide  reading.  The  interpretation  as  "  cow-dung  "  is 
more  likely  than  "  boiling  oil." 

Pakkanta  [pp.  of  pakkamati]  gone,  gone  away,  departed 
S  1.153  ;  Sn  p.  124  ;  J  1.202  (spelt  kkh)  ;  PvA  78. 

Pakkandati  [Ved.  prakrandati,  pra-|-krand]  to  cry  out, 
shout  out,  wail  Sn  310  (3rd  pret.  pakkandurj)  J  vi.55 
(id.),  188  (id.),  301  (id.). 

Pakkama  [fr.  pa-(-kram]  going  to,  undertaking,  beginning 
D  1.16S  (tapo" ;  trsl.  "  all  kinds  of  penance"). 

Pakkamati  [Ved.  prakramati,  pra  +  kram]  i  ■  to  step 
forward,  set  out, -go  on,  go  away,  go  forth  M  1. 105; 
Pug  58;  DA  1.94;  PvA  13.  —  pret.  3  sg.  pakkami 
S  1.92,  120;  Sn  pp.  93,  124;  PvA  5  (utthay'asana),  19 
(id.);  3rd  pi.  pakkamuT)  Sn  loio,  and  pakkamigsu  S 
1. 199.  —  pp.  pakkanta  (q.  v.).  —  2nd  to  go  beyond  (in 
archery),  to  overshoot  the  mark,  miss  the  aim  Miln  250. 

Pakkava  [etym.  ?]  a  kind  of  medicinal  plant  Vin  1.20 1  (cp. 
paggava). 

Pakkula  see  pakula. 

Pakkosati  [pa -h  kosati,  krus]  to  call,  summon  J  1.50; 
11.69.  252  ( =avheti) ;  v. 297  ;  vi.420  ;  DhA  1.50  ;  PvA  81 
(v.  1.  °apeti).  —  Caus.  II.  pakkosapeti  to  call,  send  for, 
order  to  come  J  1.207 ;  P^A  141,  153  ;  DhA  1.185. 

Pakkha'  [Ved.  paksa  in  meanings  i  and  3  ;  to  Lat.  pectus, 
see  Walde,  Lat.  Wtb.  s.  v.]  i.  side  of  the  body,  flank. 
wing,  feathers  (cp.  pakkhin),  in  cpds.  °bi|ala  a  flying 
fox  (sort  of  bat)  Bdhgh  on  uluka-camma  at  Vin  1.186 
(MV.  v. 2,  4  ;  cp.  I'in.  Texts  11. 16  where  read  uluka"  for 
iuka  ?) ;  J  VI. 538  ;  and  °hata  one  who  is  struck  on  (one) 
side,  i.  e.  paralysed  on  one  side,  a  cripple  (cp.  Sk. 
pak^aghata)  Vin  n.90  ;  M  in. 169;  A  111.385  ;  Pug  51 
(=hatapakkho  pithasappi  PugA  227);  Miln  245,  276 
(cp.  Miln  trsl.  11.62,  117)  —  also  as  wing  of  a  house  at 
DhsA  107  ;  and  wing  of  a  bird  at  S  n.231  ;  SnA  465  (in 
expl"  of  pakkhin). — 2.  side,  party,  faction;  adj  (-°) 
associated  with,  a  partisan,  adherent  Vin  11.299  ;  Sn 
347  (atinana"),  967  (kanhassa  p.  =Mara°  etc.,  see  Nd' 
489;  Nett  53  (tanha°  &  ditthi")  88  (id.),  160  (id.); 
DA  1.28 1  ;  DhA  1.54;  PvA  114  (patiloma").  pakkha- 
sankanta  gone  over  to  a  (schismatic)  faction  Vin  1.60  ; 
iv.23<i,  313.  —  pakkhar)  dapeti  to  give  a  side,  to  adhere 
to  (loc.)  J  1.343.  —  3.  one  half  of  the  (lunar)  month,  a 
fortnight.  The  light  or  moon-Ut  fortnight  is  called 
sukka-pakkha  (or  juijha"),  the  dark  or  moonless  one 
kala°  (or  kanha")  M  1.20  (catuddasi  paficadasi  atthami 
ca  pakkhassa  14"',  15"'  &  8*  day  of  the  fortnight)  a; 
Sn  402;  A  1. 142  (atthami  pakkhassa),  i44  =  Vv  15* 
(catuddasi  etc.  ;  cp.  VvA  71) :  A  v.123  sq.  (kala°,  junha")  ; 
Th  2,  423  (=addhamasa-mattar)  ThA'269):  Pv  11.95^ 
(bahumase  ca  pakkhe  ca=^kanha-sukka-bheda  p.  PvA 
135);  Vism  loi  (dasahar)  va  pakkhar)  va) ;  VvA  314 
(sukka°)  ;  PvA  55  (kaja°).  —  4.  alternative,  statement, 
loc.  pakkhe  (-°)  with  regard  or  reference  to  Kh.\  8f) 
(tassa  panhassa  vyakaranapakkhe) ;  SnA  168  (id.). 

Pakkha^  (adj.)  [cp.  Ved.  prakhya  clear,  &  Sk.  (-")  prakhya 
like,  of  pra-(-khya]  visible,  clear;  -°  resembling,  like 
Miln  75  (matu"  and  pitu°). 

Pakkha'  [cp.  Sk.  phakka  (?)]  a  cripple.  Cp  in. 6,  10; 
J  VI. 12  ( =pitha-sappi  C).  Note  BSk.  phakka  is 
enum''  at  Mvyut.  271'^  with  jatyanda,  kun^a  & 
pangu,  reminding  of  the  comb"  kaijo  va  kupi  va 
khanjo  va  pakkhahato  va  Vin  n.g<'>=S  1.94  =  A  n.85  ; 
111.385  =  Pug  51. 


Pakkhaka  {&  °ika)  (nt.  ?)  [fr.  pakkha>]  a  dress  made  of 
wings  or  feathers,  in  cpd.  uluka°  of  owl's  wings  (see 
uluka°)  Vin  in. 34  ('r)  nivasetva) ;  A  11.206  «  ('ika). 

Pakkhatta  (nt.)  [fr.  pakkha']  being  a  partner  of,  siding  in 
with  Visra  129,  130. 

Pakkhanta  at  DA  1.38  read  as  pakkanta. 

Pakkhandaka  (adj.)=pakkhandin  SnA  164. —  f.  pak- 
khandika  [Ved.  (?)  praskandika,  BR.  without  refs.] 
diarrhoea,  dysentery  D  n.127  (lohita°) ;  J  111.143;  v. 441 
.(lohita°);  Miln  134. 

Pakkhandati  [pa-l-khandati,  of  skand]  to  spring  forward, 
to  jump  on  to  M  1.86  ;  J  1.461  ;  Vv  S^^^  (ger.  pakkhan- 
diyana  =  pakkhanditva  anupavisitva  VvA  338);  to  be 
after  someone  in  pursuit  DhA  1.198  :  usually  fig.  to 
rejoice  in,  find  pleasure  or  satisfaction  in  (loc),  to  take 
to,  in  phrases  cittag  pakkhandati  pasidati  santitthati 
M  1. 186;  S  ni.133;  cp.  Miln  326  (nibbane)  ;  A  11. 165; 
III. 245  (avyapade)  ;  iv.442  (adukkha-m-asukhe) ;  It  43 
(dhamme) ;  and  na  me  tattha  manasag  p.  Miln  135. — 
pp.  pakkhanna  (q.  v.). 

Pakkhandana  (nt.)  [fr.  pakkhandati]  i.  leaping,  springing 
J  11.32  ;  Ps  I.  194  (pariccaga-  &  p„kkh°-  nissagga). — 
2.  attack,  assault,  chasing  DhA  1.198. 

Pakkhandin  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  pakkhandati]  i.  (adj.)  bold, 
braggart,  lit.  jumping  on  or  forth  Dh  244 ;  Sn  8g 
(  =  pakkhandaka  SnA  164). —  2.  a  military  scout,  lit. 
an  onrusher,  a  bravo  D  1. 51  (cp.  Dial.  1.68) ;  DA  1.157  : 
J  11.32,  281. 

Pakkhanna  [pp.  of  pakkhandati;  often  wrongly  spelt 
pakkhanta]  jumped  on,  fallen  on  to  or  into,  chanced 
upon,  acquired  M  1.39;  Th  i,  342  (ditthigahana°) ; 
J  v,47i  ;  Miln  144  (sar)saya°),  156,  390  (kupatha"). 

Pakkhara  [cp.  Sk.  praksara  Sc  prakhara  "  ein  Panzer  fiir 
Pferde  "  BR.]  bordering,  trimming  J  vi.223  (of  a 
carriage). 

Pakkhalati'  [pa-l-ksal]  to  wash,  cleanse  J  v.71  (ger.  pak- 
khalya  =  dhovitva  C.  p.  74).     Caus.  pakkhaleti  (q.  v.). 

Pakkhalati^  [pa-f  khalati,  of  skhal]  to  stumble,  trip, 
stagger  J  in.433  :  vi.332  :  DA  1.37  :  DhsA  334. 

Pakkhayati  [pa  +  khya,  Ved.  prakhyayate;  cp.  khayati 
&  pakkha^]  to  appear,  shine  forth,  to  be  clearly  visible 
D  II  99  (cp.  Th  1,  1034,  where  pakkhanti  for  pakkha- 
yanti  metri  causa);  M  11.32;  S  iv.144;  v.153,  162; 
.\  111.69  sq. 

Pakkhaleti  [Caus.  of  pa  +  ksal,  cp.  khalcti]  to  wash,  cleanse 
Vin  1.9  (pade)  ;  D  11.85  (id.)  ;  M  1.205  ;  S  1.107  ;  J  vi.24 
(pade)  ;  VvA  261. 

Pakkhika  (adj.)  [for  pakkhiya  =  Ved.  pak^ya  of  pakkha' 
3]  I.  belonging  or  referring  to  the  (2)  lunar  fortnights, 
fortnightly,  for  a  fortnight  or  in  the  (specified)  fort- 
night of  the  month  (cp.  Vi>i.  Texts  m.220).  As  one 
special  provision  of  food  mentioned  in  enum"  of  five 
bhojanani,  viz.  niccabhatta.  salakabhatta,  pakkhika, 
uposathika.  patipadika,  Vin  1.58  =  11.175;  iv.75  ;  J 
n.210  ;  Vism  66.  —  2.  (cp.  pakkha  2  &  pakkhin  2)  con- 
tributing to,  leading  to,  associated  with,  siding  with 
(  °)  Vism  130,  in  phrase  vigh.ita"  anibbana-sarjvatta- 
nika  associated  with  destruction,  etc.  M  1. 1  15  ;  DhsA  382. 
Also  in  miiga"  leading  to  deafness  J  1.45  (^.254).  — 
DhA  1.82  (paramattha-sac-a"). 

Pakkhitta  [pp  of  pakkhipati]  put  down  into,  thrown  into 
(loc.)  Sn  p.  15  (payaso  udake  p.);  PvA  58  (atave  p. 
na)o  is  perhaps  better  read  atape  paditto),  153  (pok 
kharaniyag  p.). 


Pakkhin 


Paggahika 


Pakkhin  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  pakkha' =pakkhanag  atthitaya 
pakkhi  ti  vuccati  SnA  465  ;  Ved.  paksin  bird]  i.  winged, 
the  winged  one,  a  bird  D  1.71  (  +  sakuna  =  pakkha- 
yutto  sakuno  DA  i.2o8)=A  11.209  =v.2o6  =  Pug  5**; 
S  11.231  ;  Sn  606  (=sakuno  SnA  465)  ;  Pv  111.5-'  (°gaP^ 
=  sakunagana  PvA  198).  —  2.  (cp.  pakkha  2)  partici- 
pating in,  contributing  to  S  v. 97  (vighata"  for  the  usual 
"pakkhika). 

Pakkhipati  [pa+ksip,  in  sense  of  putting  down  carefully 
cp.  nikkhipati  &  BSk.  praksipati  to  start  a  ship  Divy 
334]  I.  to  put  down  into  (with  loc.  of  receptacle),  place 
into,  enclose  in  (often  used  for  ceremony  of  putting  a 
corpse  into  a  shell  or  mount)  D  11. 162  (tela-doniya 
Bhagavato  sarirai)  p.)  ;  S  11.85  :  J  >i-2io  (mukhe) ;  Miln 
247  (Amaf  osadhar)) ;  PvA  41  (atthikani  thupe  p.); 
DhA  1. 71  (the  corpse  into  the  fire).  —  2.  to  throw  into, 
hurl  into,  in  Niraya-passage  at  M  iii.i83=A  1.141  = 
Nd^  304'";  cp.  nikkhipati. — 3.  (fig.)  to  include  in, 
insert,  arrange,  interpolate  Miln  13  (Abhidhamma- 
pitakai)  kusala  dhamma,  akusala  dh.,  avyakata  dh.  ti 
tisu  padesu  p.).  — Caus.  II.  pakkhipapeti  J  1.467  ;  DA 
1. 1 36.  —  pp.  pakkhitta  (q.  v.). 

Fakkhima  [  =  pakkhin]  a  bird  Th  i,  139  (read  °me  for 
°mar))  ;  J  v.339. 

Pakkhiya  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  pakkha'  2  ;  cp.  pakkhika]  siding 
witli,  associating  with  ;  m.  part,  side  ;  only  in  phrase 
(satta-tirjsa-)  bodhi-pakkhiya-dhamma  the  37  parts  of 
enlightenment  It  75  (satta  only);  J  1.275;  Vism  678 
sq.  ;  SnA  164;  VvA  95;  see  Cpd.  179  and  note  i. — 
pakkhiya  at  Th  2,  425  is  not  clear  (expl''  at  ThA  269 
by  vaccha,  v.  1.  sacca). 

Pakkhepa  (m.)  &  °na  (nt.)  [fr.  pa-l-  ksip]  throwing,  hurling  ; 
being  thrown  into  (loc.)  PvA  221  (lohakumbhi"  in 
passage  of  ordeals  in  Niraya)  ;  DhA  1.357  (nadiyari 
visa-pakkhepana). 

Pakhuma  [Ved.  paksman,  diaeretic  form  for  the  con- 
tracted form  pamha,  the  latter  prepondering  in  poetr)', 
while  pakhuma  is  mostly  found  in  prose.  Similar 
doublets  are  sukhuma  &  sanha  ;  as  regards  etym.  cp. 
Av.  pasnam  eyelid,  Gr.  Tr'tKTtn  to  comb,  Tni/eof  fleece,  Lat. 
p?cto  to  comb,  pecten  comb,  Ohg.  fahs  liair]  an  eyelash, 
uusally  as  adj.:  having  eyelashes  (-°)  D  11.18  (go°)  ; 
S  1. 1 32  ("antarikayari  between  the  lashes);  J  v. 2 16 
(visala"  for  alarapamha  T.);  ThA  255  (digha°  for 
ayatapamha  Th  2,  283)  ;  VvA  162,  279. 

Pagan^aka  see  pakatthaka. 

Pa^abbha  (adj.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  pragalbha]  bold,  daring, 
forward,  reckless  M  1.236;  S  1.201  (sup°) ;  A  111.453  ; 
Sn  89,  852  (ap°=na  pagabbha  KhA  242,  cp.  also  Nd' 
228);  Dh  244  ( =kayapagabbhiyadihi  samannagata 
DhA  111.354);  J  "-3^.  281,  359;  v.448 ;  Miln  389; 
Davs  HI. 26.  —  apagabbha  at  Vin.  111.3  is  used  in  quite 
a  di.^.  sense,  viz.  "  one  who  has  no  more  connection 
with  a  womb"  (a-h  pa-l- *garbha) 

Pagabbhata  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  pagabbha,  cp.  Sk.  pragalbhata] 
resoluteness,  boldness,  decision  J  vi.273.  See  also 
pagabbhiya. 

Pagabbhin  (adj.)  [  =  pagabbha]  bold  J  vi.238, 

Pagama  [fr.  pra-fgam]  going  forth  from  (-")  DhsA  329. 

Pagalha  [pp.  of  pagahati]  sunk  into,  immersed  in  (loc.) 
Sn  441,  772  (=ogalha  ajjhogajha  nimugga  Nd'  26). 

Pagahati  [pa -)- gahati]  to  dive  into,  sink  into  Sn  819 
(«  ajjhogaha  SnA  537  ;  =ogahati  ajjhogahati  pavisati 
Ndi  152).  —  pp.  pagalha. 

Pagiddha  (adj.)  [pa-l-giddha]  greedy  after,  clinging  to, 
finding  delight  in  (loc.)  J  v. 269  (=gadhita  mucchita 
C.  on  p.  274). 


PagUQa  (adj.)  [pa-l-guna  cp.  Sk.  praguna  straight,  der. 
"  kind  "]  learned,  full  of  knowledge,  clever,  well- 
acquainted,  familiar  D  in.  170  ;  Vv  53^  (  =  nipuna  VvA 
232);  J  11.243;  :v.i3o;  v.399  ;  Vism  95  (Majjhimo  me 
paguno  :  I  am  well  versed  in  the  M.),  242  (dve  tayo 
nikaya  paguna)  ;  DA  1.95;  SnA  195;  KhA  73.  —  pa- 
gunat)  karoti,  to  make  oneself  familiar  with,  to  learn 
by  heart,  to  master  thoroughly  J  11. 166;  111.537  (tayo 
vede)  ;  Miln   12   (Abhidhamma-pitakai)). 

-bhava  familiarly  with,  acquaintance,  efficient  state, 
cleverness  in,  experience,  knowledge  (cp.  paguiiiia) 
J  III. 537  ;  Dhs  48,  49. 

Pagunata  (f)  &  Pagunatta  (nt.)  (doubtful)  abstr.  to  paguna 
in  expl"  of  pagufinata  at  Dhs  48  &  49  (trsl.  fitness, 
competence). 

Pagumba  [pa-fgumba]  a  thicket,  bush,  clump  of  trees 
Sn  233. 

Pageva  (adv.)  [page  =  Sk.  prage4-eva,  but  BSk.  prageva] 
(how)  much  more  or  much  less,  a  fortiori,  lit.  "  right  at 
theearliest  "  J  1.354  '<  v.242  ;  Miln  91  ;  Vism  93,  259,  322  ; 
VvA  258,  PvA  115,  116,  117.  —  Compar.  pagevatarag 
M  111.145;  atippage  too  early  J  111.48 ;  atippago  id. 
M  1.84  ;  S  11. 32  ;  A  v.48. 

Pagga9hati  [pa-nganhati]  I.  to  stretch  forth,  hold  out  or 
up,  take  up  D  1.123  (sujar)  the  sacrificial  ladle),  125 
(afljalir)  stretch  out  the  hollow  hands  as  a  token  of 
respectful  greeting)  ;  S  1.141  ;  n.280  ;  J  1.89  (pavenir)); 
PvA  74  (turiyani).  ger.  paggayha  taking  up,  raising 
up,  stretching  forth  Sn  350  (-uttaretva  SnA  349); 
Dh  268  (tulari)  ;  Pv  II. 9"  (bahui));  iv.7''  (uccar)  p.); 
VvA  7  (afijaliri).  Often  in  phrase  baha  paggayha 
kandati  to  wail  or  lament  with  outstretched  arms  (a 
special  pose  of  mourning)  J  v.267 ;  vi.188;  PvA  92 
(=pasareti).  —  2.  to  take  up,  take  care  of,  favour, 
support,  befriend  (opp.  nigganhati)  J  1.511;  11. 21; 
v. 116,  369;  Miln  185,  186;  PvA  114  (sappurisa-dham- 
mag).  —  3.  to  put  to,  exert,  strain,  apply  vigorously 
(cittaij  one's  mind)  S  v. 9  ;  Ps  11.20  (pagganhanto  viri- 
yena  carati). — pp.  paggahita  (q.  v.). — Caus.  pag- 
gaheti  to  exert  Miln  390  (manasag).  —  Caus.  II.  pag- 
ganhapeti  to  cause  to  hold  up  or  out,  to  cause  to  uphold 
or  support  Miln  21  (dhamma-dhajar)) ;  J  v. 248  ;  PvA  74 
(turiyani). 

Paggalita  [pp.  of  pa -t- gal]  dripping  PvA  56  (v.  1.  for  T. 
vigalita). 

Paggava  [etym  ?]  a  medicinal  plant  with  bitter  fruit 
J  ii.ii'S  (v.  1.  pakkava). 

Paggaha  a  Paggaha  [fr.  pagganhati]  i.  exertion,  energy; 
(<i)  paggaha:  D  111.213  (v.  1.  paggaha,  also  "nimitta) ; 
Ps  II. 8  ("cariya),  20  (°ttha)  ;  DA  1.63  (viriy-indriyassa 
°lakkhana)  ;  (6)  paggaha  :  A  1.83,  256  (°nimitta)  ;  Dhs  277 
(trsl.  "grasp"),  336,  1359  ("nimitta) ;  DhsA  406. — 
2.  (paggaha)  favour,  kindness,  patronage  [same  meaning 
in  Ep.  Sk.]  Vin  iii.i45=A  111.66;  J  v. 116  (opp.  nig- 
gaha);  vi.371  (id.). 

Faggabana  (nt.)  [fr.  pa-l-grh,  cp.  pagganhati]  stretching 
forth,  lifting,  holding  out ;  of  the  hands  as  sign  of 
respectful  salutation  (cp.  afijalir)  pagganhati)  J  111.82. 
—  Abstr.  °ta  =  paggaha  i.  Vism  134. 

Paggahita  [PP-  of  pagganhati,  cp.  BSk.  pragrhita  lofty 
Divy  7,  102J  holding  up,  or  (being)  held  up  Vin  11. 131 
(chatta°  holding  up  a  parasol,)  207  (id.);  J  vi.235  ; 
Sn.\  175  (  =  Sn  p.  21). 

Paggaha  see  paggaha. 

Paggahika  (adj.)  [paggaha -l-ika]  belonging  to,  receivirg 
(or  trading  ?)  in  cpd.  °sala  a  shop  \'in  ii.2<;i  (cp.  VvJ. 
Texts  III. 383  :  "  would  he  set  up  as  a  hawker  in  cloth, 
or  would  he  open  a  shop  "). 


Paggharana 


Paccakkhati 


Fa'3;g&ard9<i  (adj.-n.)  [£r.  paggharatij  trickling,  oozing. 
dripping  J  1.146;  vi.187  (a°) ;  £.  "i  D  1.74  (  =  bindu- 
bindur)  udakag  paggharati  DA  1.218);  the  'mark'  of 
liquid  DhsA  332. 

Paggharanaka  (adj.)  fr.  paggharati]  flowing,  trickling, 
oozing  out  J  VI. 187  {app°-vela),  531  ;  DhA  1.120  (lohi- 
tar))  ;  Vism  262. 

Paggharati  [pa+gharati.  which  stands  for  ksarati.  also 
appearing  as  jharati,  cp.  Sk.  nirjhara,  Prk.  pajjharati 
Malati-M.  p.  51.  BSk.  pragharati  Divy  57,  409; 
AvS  1.282]  to  flow  forth  or  out,  to  ooze,  trickle,  drip 
S  1. 150  ;  Sn  p.  125  (pubban  ca  lohitaii  ca.  p.) ;  J  vi.328  ; 
Pv  1.6'  (gabbho  pagghari  =vissandi  PvA  34);  II. 9" 
(=vissandati  PvA  119);  11.9-^  (akkhini  p.  =vissandanti 
PvA  123,  sic  lege  !)  ;  Miln  180  ;  VvA  76  (navahi  dvarehi 
puluvaka  paggharirjsu).  —  pp.  paggharita  (q.  v.). 

Paggharita  Tpp.  of  paggharati]  flowing,  trickling  S  11.179  ; 
Th  2,  466";  PvA  198  (khira). 

Paghana  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  praghana]  a  covered  terrace  before 
a  house  V'in  11. 153  {"  paghanar)  nama  yar)  nikkhamanta 
ca  pavisanta  ca  padehi  hananti.  tassa  vihara-dvare 
ubhato  kuttar)  niharitva  katapadesass'  etar)  adhivaca- 
nar]  "  Bdhgh,  quoted   Vin.  Texts  111.175). 

Panka  'cp.  Epic  Sk.  panka,  with  k  suffix  to  root  *pene 
for  •pele.  as  in  Lat.  palus  ;  cp.  Goth,  fani  mire,  excre- 
ments, Ohg,  fenna  "  fen,"  bog  ;  also  Ital.  fango  mud, 
Ohg.  fijht  wet.  See  Walde  Lat.  Wtb.  under  palus. 
BSk.  panka,  e.  g.  Jtra  215  panka-nimagna]  mud, 
mire  ;  defilement,  impurity  S  1.35.  60  ;  iii.i  18  ;  A  111.31 1  ; 
IV.289  ;  Sn  970  ("danta  rajassira  with  dirt  between  their 
teeth  and  dust  on  their  heads,  from  travelling)  ;  111.236 
(id.);  IV. 362  (id.);  Sn  535,  845,  945,  1145  (Nd=  374: 
kama-panko  kama-kaddamo  etc.);  Dh  141.  327;  Nd' 
203;  Pv  111.3' ;  IV. 3- ;  Miln  346;  Dhs  1059,  1136. 

Panga  ^?]  only  in  cpd.  pangacira  (nt.)  at  D  1.6  "  blowing 
through  toy  pipes  made  of  leaves  "  (Dial,  i.io,  where  is 
cpd.  Sinhalese  pat-kulal  and  Marathi  pungi  after 
Morris  J.P.T.S.  1889,  205).  Bdhgh  expl""  as  "p. 
vuccati  panija-nalika  ;  tag  dhamanta  kilanti  "  DA  1.86. 

Pangn  (adj.)  [Sk.  pangu ;  etym.  ?]  lame,  crippled,  see 
pakkha^  and  next. 

Pangala  (adj.)  [fr.  pangu]  lame  J  vi.12  ;  Vism  280. 

Paeati  [Ved.  pacati,  Idg.  *peiiu6,  Av.  pac- ;  Obulg.  peka 
to  fry,  roast,  Lith,  kepu  bake,  Gr.  iriaaui  cook,  irtwuir 
ripe]  to  cook,  boil,  roast  Vin  iv.264  ;  fig.  torment  in 
purgatory  (trs.  and  intrs.) :  Niraye  pacitva  after 
roasting  in  N.  S  11.225,  PvA  10,  14. — ppr.  pacanto 
tormenting,  gen.  pacato  (-|-Caus.  pacayato)  D  1.52 
(expl''  at  L).\  1. 1 59,  where  read  pacato  for  paccato,  by 
pare  dandena  pllentassa).  —  pp.  pakka  (q.  v.). — 
Caus.  pacapeti  A  paceti  (q.  v.).  —  Pass,  paccati  to  be 
roasted  or  tormented  (q.  v.). 

Pacana  (nt.)  [fr.  pac,  su  pacati]  cooking  J  111.425  ("tha- 
lika);  V.385  ("bhajana);  ThA  29  (bhatta°) ;  DA  1.270; 
PvA  135, 

Pacarati  [pa  +  carati]  to  go  after,  walk  in  ;  fig.  practise, 
perform,  observe  Vv  32'  (v.  1.  pavarati,  cp.  VvA  136). 

Pacala  [fr.  pa  +  cal]  shaking,  trembling,  wavering  DhsA 

Pacalati  [pa  +  calati]  to  dangle  VvA  36  (v.  1.  BB  paj°). 

Pacalayati  [quasi-denom.  or  caus.  fr.  pacala,  pa  +  cal,  cp. 
dancjayati  and  pacaleti]  to  make  (the  eyelid)  waver,  to 
wink,  to  be  sleepy,  nod,  begin  to  doze  A  111.343  = 
IV. 344;  iv.85  (quot.  at  DhsA  236);  J  1.384  (°ayitur) 
arabbhi) ;  Vism  300. 


Pacalayika  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  pacalayati]  nodding,  w.ivering 
(of  the  eyelids),  blinking,  being  sleepy  Dhs  1157  (=ak- 
khidaladinar)  pacalabhavag  karoti  DhsA  378). 

Pacalita  [pp.  of  pacalati]  shaken,  wavering,  unstable 
Th  I.  260. 

Pacapeti  [Caus.  of  pacati]  to  cause  to  be  cooked,  to  cook 
Vin  IV. 264  ;  J  1.126  (aharag)  ;  11. 15  (bhattar)),  122. 

Pacareti  [pa  +  careti,  Caus.  of  car]  to  go  about  in  (ace),  to 
frequent,  to  visit  A  1.182,  183  (pacarayami,  glass 
sancarissami). 

Pacalaka  (adj.)  [fr.  pacaleti]  swinging,  shaking;  nt.  ace. 
as  adv.  in  kaya-  {Sc  bihu  )  ppacalakarj  after  the  manner 
or  in  the  style  of  swaying  the  body  (or  swinging  tha 
arms)  Vin  11. 2 13. 

Pacaleti  [pa  +  Caus.  of  cal]  to  swing,  sway,  move  bout 
Th  I,  200  (ma  pacalesi  "  sway  and  nod  "  Trsl"). 

Pacinati  [or  "cinati)  [pa+cinati,  cp,  acinati]  i.  to  pick, 
pluck,  gather,  take  up,  collect,  accumulate  S  111.89  ; 
IV. 74  (dukkhar)  =  acinati  p.  73) ;  Dh  47,  48  (pupphani  = 
ocinati  DhA  1.366) ;  J  111.22  ;  fut.  pacinissati  DhA 
1. 361. — 2.  to  pick  out  (mentally),  to  discern,  dis- 
tinguish, realise,  know  Sn  837  (ppr.  pacinai)  =pacinanto 
vicinanto  tulayanto  tirayanto  Nd^  185  ;  =pavicinati 
SnA  545) ;  fut.  pacessati  Dh  44,  45  (sic  F.  ;  MSS. 
vijessati,  &  vicessrfti  the  latter  perhaps  preferable  to 
pac";  expf  at  Dh.\  1334  by  vicinissati  upaparik- 
khissati  pativijjhissati  sacchikarissati).  — ■  Pass,  paci- 
yati  to  be  heaped  up,  to  increase,  accumulate  S  iv.74 
(opp.  khiyati). 

Pacuta  is  doubtful  reading  at  DA  1.164  (with  vv.  U. 
pamuta,  parauca,  papula)  for  D  1.54,  T.  pafuva  (vv.  11. 
pamufa,  samudda)  and  is  expl''  by  ganthika,  i.  e. 
block  or  knot.  The  whole  passage  is  corrupt ;  see  dis- 
cussed under  pavuta. 

Pacura  (adj.)  [cp.  late  Sk.  pracura]  general,  various,  any; 
abundant,  many  J  v. 40  (=bahu  salabha  C);  Miln  208 
(°jana)  Davs  iv.ii,  50;  VvA  213  (°jano  for  yadisa- 
kidiso  Vv  50'-').     See  also  pasura. 

Pacessati  see  pacinati. 

Pacca"  is  contracted  form  of  pati  before  a  ,  like  pac- 
cakampittha  pret.  fr.  patikampati. 

Paccakkosati  [pati-t-a+krus]  to  curse  in  return  S  1.162  ; 
A  11.215. 

Paccakkosana  (nt.)  [fr.  pati-|-a-(-krus]  cursing  in  return 
DhA  IV. 148  (a°). 

Paccakkha  (adj.)  [pati-(- akkha^,  cp.  Ved.  pratyaksa] 
"  before  the  eye."  perceptible  to  the  senses,  evident, 
clear,  present  DhsA  254;  PvA  125;  Sdhp  416.  Often 
in  obi.  cases,  viz.  instr.  °ena  personally  J  1.377;  ^bl. 
^ato  from  personal  experience  J  v. 45,  195,  281  ;  appac- 
cakkhaya  without  seeing  or  direct  perception,  in  expl"  of 
paccaya  at  \'isni  532  ;  also  in  phrase  paccakkhato  fiatva 
having  seen  or  found  out  for  himself,  knowing  personally 
J  1.2O2  ;  III. 168. 

-kamma  making  clear,  i.  e.  demonstration,  realisa- 
tion, only  neg.  a°  not  realising  etc.  S  ni.262  ;  Dhs  390 
(trsl.  "  inability  to  demonstrate  "  ;  cp.  DhsA  254). 

Paccakkhata  [pp.  of  paccakkhati]  rejected,  given  up, 
abandoned,  repudiated  Vin  11.244,  245  (sikkha) ;  in. 25 
(id.)  ;  J  IV.  108  ;  DhA  1.12.     Cp.   I'm.  Texts  1.275. 

Paccakkhati  [pati-f  akkhati  =  a-l-khya]  lit.  to  speak 
against,  i.  e.  to  reject,  refuse,  disavow,  abandon,  give 
up,  usually  in  connection  with  Buddhaij,  dhanimar), 
sikkhar)  or  similar  terms  of  a  religious-moral  nature 
Vin   III. 25;    S   II. 231,    271;    A    IV. 372.  —  ger.    paccak- 


Paccakkhana 


Paccaya 


khaya,  in  foil,  conn*  acariyar)  J  iv.200  ;  sikkhai)  Vin 
111.23,  34  (a°);  S  11.231;  1V.190;  Pug  66,  67;  sabbar) 
S  IV.  15  ;  ariyasaccar)  S  v. 428.  paccakkhasi  at  J  v. 8  is 
gloss  for  pakatthasi. — pp.  paccakkhata  (q.  v.). — 
Intens.  paccacikkhati  (q.  v.). 

Paccakkhana  (nt.)  [fr.  pati  +  a+khya]  rejection,  refusal 
J  VI. 422. 

Paccagu  (adj.-n.)  [a  difficult  word,  composed  of  pacca  + 
gu,  the  latter  a  by-form  of  °ga,  as  in  patthagu,  vedagu 
paragu.  pacca  may  be  pratya,  an  adv.  form"  of  prep, 
prati,  and  pattha  its  doublet.  It  is  not  certain  whether 
we  should  read  patthagu  here  as  well  (see  patthagu). 
The  form  may  also  be  expl''  as  a  substantivised  pi. 
3rd  pret.  of  prati-|-gacchati=paccagug]  "one  who 
goes  toward,"  a  pupil  S  1.104  (Marassa)  ;  vv.  11.  bad- 
dhabhu,  patthagu.  Windisch,  Mara  &■  Buddha  trsl' 
"  unter  M's  Herrschaft,"  and  refers  patthagu  to  Sk., 
patyagah.  Bdhgh  (see  Kindred  Sayings,  1,  p.  319)  reads 
baddhagii  and  expl"*  by  bandhavara  sissa  antevasika. 

Paccaggala  (adj.)  [pratyak  +  ga)a]  in  phrase  paccaggale 
atthasi  "  stuck  in  his  throat  "  M  1.333. 

Paccaggha  (adj.)  [pati+aggha,  cp.  Sk.  pratyagra  of  diff. 
derivation]  recent,  new,  beautiful,  quite  costly  Vin  1.4  ; 
J  1.80;  11.435;  Pv  ii-s'"  (=abhinava  mahaggha  va 
PvA  87);  iii.ioS  (  =  abhinava  PvA  214);  Davs  v.25  ; 
PvA  44. 

Paccanga  (nt.)  [pati+anga]  lit.  "by-limb,"  small  limb, 
only  in  corap''  angapaccangani  limbs  great,  and  small, 
all  limbs  :  see  anga. 

Paccanjana  (nt.)  [pati-l-anjana]  anointing,  ointment, 
unction  D  i.i2=M  1.511  ;  DA  1.98  ( =  bhavaniya-sitala- 
bhessajj'  aiijanar)). 

Paccati  [Pass,  of  pacati,  cp.  BSk.  pacyate  Divy  422]  to  be 
boiled,  fig.  to  be  formented  or  vexed,  to  suffer.  Nearly 
always  applied  to  the  torture  of  boiling  in  Niraya,  where 
it  is  meant  literally.  —  S  1.92  ;  v. 344  (kalena  paccanti 
read  for  kale  na  p.) ;  A  1.141  (phenuddehakat)  p.  niraye) ; 
Sn  670,  671  ;  Dh  69,  119,  120  (papag  suffer  for  sin,  cp. 
DhA  111.14) ;  J  V.268  ;  Pv  IV. i»  ( =dukkhar)  papunanti 
PvA  228);  iv.3^'  (niraye  paccare  jana  =paccanti  PvA 
255) ;  DhA  III. 64  (expl"  for  tappati). 

Paccatta  (adj.)  [pati-l-  attan]  separate,  individual ;  usually 
ace.  °g  adv.  separately,  individually,  singly,  by  himself, 
in  his  own  heart  D  1.24  (yeva  nibbuti  vidita) ;  DA  on 
D  11.77  =  attano  attano  abbhantare ;  M  1.25 1,  337 
("vedaniya  N.  of  a  purgatory),  422;  S  11. 199;  III. 54 
sq.,  IV. 23,  41  sq.,  168,  539;  Sn  611.  906;  Dh  165; 
Pv  III. 10*  ("vedana  separate  sufferings,  =visui)  visui) 
attana  anubhuyamana  mahadukkhavedana  PvA  214); 
Dhs  1044  (ajjhatta-l-  ;  trsl"  "self  referable");  Miln 
96  (°purisa-kara) ;  DhsA  169  ;  VvA  9,  13  ;  PvA  232. 

-vacana  expression  of  separate  relation,  i.  e.  case  of 
reference,  or  of  the  direct  object,  reflexive  case,  N.  of 
the  ace.  case  SnA  303  ;  VvA  281  ;  PvA  30,  35  ;  KhA  213, 
236 ;  in  lieu  of  karaija  KhA  213,  of  samin  SnA  594. 

Paccatthata  [pp.  of  gati -f  a -f  str]  spread  out  D  11.21 1. 

Paccattharana  (nt.)  [pati-t-a-i-str,  cp.  BSk.  pratyasta- 
rana  Divy  19]  something  spread  against,  i.  e.  under  or 
over,  a  cover,  spread,  rug,  cushion  or  carpet  to  sit  on. 
bedding  of  a  couch  (nisidana")  Vin  1.47,  295,  296; 
H.208,  218;  D  1.7  (kadali-miga-pavara",  cp.  DA  1.87); 
A  1. 137  (id.);  111.50  (id.);  J  1.126;  iv.353  (unnamaya)  ; 
PvA  141.  137. 

Paccatthika  (adj.  n.)  [pafi-t-attha-t-ka,  lit.  opposite  to 
useful,  cp.  Sk.  pratyanika  &  pratyarthin]  an  opponent, 
adversary,  enemy  Vin  11.94  sq.  (atta°  personal  enemy) ; 
A  V.71  (id.  ;  T.  attha°) ;  D  1.50,  70,  137  ;  It  83  ;  PvA  62. 
Cp.  paccamitta. 


Paccana  (nt.)  [fr.  paccati,  cp.  pacana]  being  boiled,  boiling. 
torture,  torment  J  v. 270;  SnA  476  (°okasa). 

Paccanika,  Paccaniya  (adj.  n.)  [cp.  Sk.  pratyanika  &  see 
paccatthika]  i.  contrary,  adverse,  opposed  ;  (i)  m. 
enemy,  adversary,  opponent  M  1.378  ;  S  1.179  ;  iv.i27  = 
Sn76i  ;  Ps  11.67  sq.  :  SnA  288.  Cp.  vi.°  —  2.  (in  method) 
reverse,  negative,  opp.  to  anuloma.  Tikp  71  passim; 
cp.  patiloma. 

-gatha    response,    responding    verse   (cp.   patigatha) 
SnA  39. 

Paccanubhasati  [pati-fanubhasati,  cp.  BSk.  pratyava- 
bhasate  to  call  to  Divy  9]  to  speak  out  or  mention 
correspondingly,  to  enumerate  KhA-  78,  79  sq. 

Paccanubhoti  [pati-i-anu-i- bhu,  BSk.  pratyanubhavati 
Divy  54.  262  etc.]  to  experience,  undergo,  realise 
M  1.295  ;  S  V.218,  264  sq..  286  sq.  353  ;  A  111.425  sq.  ;  It 
38  ;  PvA  26,  44,  107  (dukkhai)).  —  fut.  paccanubhossati 
D  II. 213  ;  S  1. 133.  227  ;  Pv  111.5°.  —  Pass,  paccanubha- 
viyati  PvA  146  (for  upalabbhati). — pp.  paccanu- 
bhiita  M  11.32  ;  S  11. 178  ;  It  15. 

Paccannsittha  [pati+anusittha]  advised,  admonished 
D  11.209=225. 

Paccanta  (adj.  n.)  [pati-fanta,  cp.  Sk.  pratyanta]  adj. 
adjoining,  bordering  on,  neighbouring,  adjacent  Dh 
315;  J  MI  (v. 47.  "desa),  377  ("vasika)  ;  PvA  201 
("nagara);  DhA  in. 488  (id.);  Sdhp  11  ("visaya). — 
(m.)  the  border,  outskirts,  neighbourhood  Vin  1.73  ; 
J  1. 126  (vihara'') ;  11.37  :  Mi'n  314  (°e  kupite  in  a  border 
disturbance);  DhA  i.ioi  (id.);  PvA  20  (id.).  °t\ 
vupasameti  to  appease  the  border  PvA  20.  —  P.  in  sense 
of  "  heathen  "  at  Vism  121. 

Paccantima  (adj.)  [fr.  paccanta,  cp.  BSk.  pratyantima 
frontier  Divy  21,  426]  bordering,  adjoining,  next  to 
Vin.  II.  166  ;  Sdhp  5. 

PaccabhJMaQa  (nt.)  [pati-f  abhi+flana]  recognition  DhsA 

1 10. 

Paccaya  [fr.  pati-f-i,  cp.  Ved.  pratyaya  &  P.  pacceti. 
paticca]  lit.  resting  on.  falling  back  on,  foundation  ; 
cause,  motive  etc.  See  on  term  as  t.t.  of  philosophy 
Tikapatthana  I,  foreword;  J.P.T.S.  1916.  2  i  f .  ;  Cpd. 
42  sq.  &  esp.  259  sq.  —  i.  (lit.)  support,  requisite, 
means,  stay.  Usually  with  ref.  to  the  4  necessaries  of 
the  bhikkhu's  daily  life.  viz.  civara.  pindapata,  senasana, 
(gilanapaccaya-)  bhesajja,  i.  e.  clothing,  food  as  alms, 
a  dwelling-place,  medicine :  see  under  civara.  Sn  339 
(paccaya  =  gilanapaccaya  SnA  342)  ;  Miln  336  ;  Mhvs  3, 
15.  —  2.  (appl'')  reason,  cause,  ground,  motive,  means, 
condition  M  1.259  (yag  yad  eva  paccayai)  paticca  by 
whatever  cause  or  by  whichever  means) ;  S  11.65  ■  Nett 
78  sq.  ;  DA  1.125;  PvA  104.  The  fourfold  cause 
(catubbidho  paccayo)  of  rupa  (material  form)  consists 
of  kamma^  citta,  utu,  ahara  :  Vism  6to.  Var.  paccayas 
discussed  at  VbhA  166  sq.  (twofold,  with  ref.  to  pati- 
sandhi),  183  (eightfold),  202,  205  sq,  254  (4).  sappac- 
caya  founded,  having  a  reason  or  cause  S  v. 2 13  sq.  ; 
A  1.82;  Nd^  mula  ;  Dhs  1084,  1437.- — yatha  paccayag 
karoti  do  as  he  likes  Nd^  p.  280  =S  iii.  33.  Often  coupled 
with  hetu,  e.  g.  at  S  iv.68  sq.j  A.  1.66;  iv.151  sq.  ; 
D  III. 284  ;  Nd^  under  mula  ;  Ps  11. 1 16  sq.,  paccaya  came 
to  be  distinguished  from  hetu  as  the  genus  of  which  lietu 
was  the  typical,  chief  species.  I.  e.  paccaya  became 
synonymous  with  our  "  relation,"  understood  in  a 
causal  sense,  hetu  meaning  condition,  causal  ante- 
cedent, and  23  other  relations  being  added  as  special 
modes  of  causality.  Later  still  these  24  were  held 
reducible  to  4  Tikp  i  f.  (and  foreword) ;  Cpd.  197. 
Cp.  Patthana.  —  Abl.  paccaya  as  adv.  by  means  of. 
through,  by  reason  of,  caused  by  D  1.45  (vedana  "^tanha 
etc.,   see  paficca-samuppada) ;   M   1.261    (jatippaccaya 


Paccayata 


Paccupatthahati 


jararaaranar)) ;  Pv  1.5^  (kamma°) ;  iv.i^"  (tap°) ;  PvA 
147  (kamma°).  —  3.  ground  for,  belief,  confidence, 
trust,  reliance  J  1.118.  169;  apara°  without  relying  on 
anyone  else  S  111.83.  135;  A  iv.186.  210;  PvA  226. 

-akara  the  niode  of  causes,  i.  e.  the  Pajiccasamup- 
pada  DhsA  2,  3  ;  VbhA  130  sq.  (cp.  Vism  522  sq.). 

Paccayata  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  paccaya]  the  fact  of  having  a 
cause,  causation,  causal  relation,  in  phrase  idappac- 
cayata  (adv.)  from  an  ascertained  cause,  by  way  of 
cause  Vin  1.5  ;  D  1.185  ;  S  1. 136  ;  11.25. 

Paccayika  (adj.)  [fr.  paccaya]  trustworthy  D  1.4  ;  S  1.150  ; 
A  11.209;  J  VI. 384  (paccayika);  Pug  57;  DA  1.73; 
SnA  475. 

Paccaladdhaosa  see  patilabhati. 

Paccavidhug  &  Paccavyadhig  see  pativijjhati. 

Paccavekkhati  [pati+avekkhati]  to  look  upon,  consider, 
review,  realise,  contemplate,  see  M  1.415;  S  ill.  103; 
151  sq.,  iv.iii,  236  sq. ;  J  v.302  ;  Vbh  193,  194  (cp. 
A  III. 323) ;  Miln  16  ;  PvA  62,  277  ;  VvA  6,  48. 

Paccavekkhana  (nt.)  &  °na  (f.)  [pati  +  avekkhana,  cp.  late 
Sk.  pratyaveksana  &  °na]  looking  at,  consideration, 
regard,  attention,  reflection,  contemplation,  reviewing 
(cp.  Cpd.  58)  M  1. 415  ;  D  III. 278  ;  A  111.27  ;  Pug  21  (a°) ; 
Dhs  39o(a°  =dhammanai)  sabhavai)  pati  na  apekkhatl 
DhsA  254,  trsl.  "inability  to  consider");  Miln  388; 
Nett  85  ;  VbhA  140  ;  Vism  43  (twofold) ;  Sdhp  413. 

Paccavekkha  (f)  [cp.  late  Sk.  pratyavek§a]  imagination 
Mbhv  27. 

Paccasari  see  patisarati. 

Paccassosi  see  patissunati. 

Paccakata  [pp.  of  pati+a  +  kr]  rejected,  disappointed 
Vin  IV. 237,  238. 

Paccakotita  [pp.  of  pati+akoteti]  flattened  or  smoothed 
out,  pressed,  ironed  (akotita+of  the  robes)  M  1.385; 
S  11.281  ;  DhA  1.37. 

Paccagacchati  [pati  +  agacchati]  to  fall  back  on,  return 
again,  to  go  back  to  (ace),  withdraw,  slide  back  from 
(°  to)  Vin  1. 184;  M  1.265;  III. 114;  Nd'  108,  312  ;  Kvu 
624  (spelt  wrongly  paccha") ;  PvA  14,  109,  250.  Cp. 
pacceti. 

Paccagata  [pp.  of  paccagacchati]  gone  back,  withdrawn 
J  V.I 20  ;  Miln  125. 

Paocagamana  (nt.)  [fr.  pati+a  +  gam]  return,  going  back, 
backsliding  Miln  246. 

Paccacamati  [pati+a  +  camati;  often  spelt  "vamati,  but 
see  Trenckner,  Miln  425]  to  swallow  up,  resorb  S  v. 48  = 
A  V.337  ;  J  1. 31 1  ;  Miln  150  ;  Cans,  "camapeti  Miln  150. 

Paocacikkhati  [Intens.  of  paccakkhati,  pati+a  +  cikkhati 
of  khya]  to  reject,  repudiate,  disallow  D  111.3  ;  M  1.245; 
428  ;  Vin  IV. 235. 

Paccajata  [pp.  of  paccajayati]  reborn,  come  to  a  new 
existence  D  1.62  ;  111.264  ;  M  1.93  ;  Pug  51. 

Paccajayati  [pati  +  a  +  jayati]  to  be  reborn  in  a  new 
existence  M  111.169;  S  11.263;  v. 466,  474.  —  pp.  pac- 
cajata (q.  v.). 

Paccaneti  [pati+a+neti]  to  lead  back  to  (ace.)  Pv  11. 11' 
(=punar  aneti  C). 

Pacoamitta  [pacca  =  Sk.  pratyak,  adv.  ;  +  mitta,  cp.  Ep. 
Sk.  pratyamitra] .lit.  "  back-friend,"  adversary,  enemy 
D  i.7t);  A  IV.I06;  J  1.488;  DA  1. 182  ;  PvA  155. 


Pacoabhattha  [pp.  of  paccabhasati]  recited,  explained 
J  11.48. 

Paccabhasati  [pati-(-abhasati]  to  retort,  recite,  explain, 
relate  PvA  57  (sic  lege  for  paccha°).  —  pp.  paccabhattha. 

Paccaropeti  [pati+aropeti]  to  show  in  return,  retort, 
explain  M  1.96;  A  iv.  193.     Cp.  paccabhasati. 

Paccasati  [fr.  pa{i-(-a^a  or  =  paccasar)sati  or  °sii)sati  ?]  to 
ask,  beg,  pray  Pv  IV.5*  (°anto  for  "asarjsanto  ?  C. 
expln"*  by  asigsanto). 

Paccasanne  (adv.)  [pati+asanne]  near  by  PvA  216=280. 

Paocasa  f.  [pati-i-a^a,  cp.  Sk.  pratyaSa]  expectation  Vin 

1V.286. 

Paccasareti  [pati-(-a-l-s5reti.  Cans,  of  sr]  to  make  go  (or 
turn)  backward  M  i.i24=A  in. 28  ( =-'patinivatteti  C.) ; 
Vism  308  (sareti  pi  p.  pi). 

Paccasigsati  [pati-l-asir)sati]  to  expect,  wait  for,  desire, 
hope  for,  ask  D  11. 100  ;  A  in. 124  ;  J  1.346,  483  ;  in. 176  ; 
V.214  :  DhA  1. 14;  n.84;  DA  1.318;  VvA  336,  346;  PvA 
22,  25,  63,  260. 

Paccaharati  [pati-l-aharati]  to  bring  back,  take  back 
Vin  11.265  :  in. 140  ;  J  iv.304. 

Paccukka44hati  [pati-t-ukkaddhati]  to  draw  out  again 
Vin  11.99. 

Paccakka44bana  (nt.)  [fr.  preceding]  drawing  out  again 
Vin  v. 222. 

Paccuggaochati  [pati-f  ud+gam]  to  go  out,  set  out,  go 
out  to  meet  Vin  11.2 10  ;  M  1.206  ;  Sn  442  (  =  abhimukho 
upari  gacchati  SnA  392). 

Paccttggata  [pp-  of  paccuggacchati]  illustrious  J  vi.280. 

Paccuggamana  (nt.)  [fr.  preceding]  going  out  to,  meeting, 
receiving  J  iv.321  ;  PvA  61,  141  (°i)  karoti). 

Paccatthapana  (f)  [pati-t-ud  +  Caus.  of  stha]  putting 
against,  resistance,  opposition  Sn  245  (  =  paccanikaf - 
thapana  SnA  228). 

PaccuUbati  rpati-l-ud-fstha]  to  rise,  reappear,  to  rise 
from  one's  seat  as  a  token  of  respect ;  always  comb'' 
with  abhivadati  D  t.6i  (Pot.  "uttheyya),  no  (Fut. 
"utthassati). 

Paccattbana  (nt.)  [fr.  preceding]  rising  from  one's  seat, 
reverence  D  1.125. 

Paccuttarati  [pati+uttarati,  but  cp.  BSk.  pratyavatarati 
to  disembark  Divy  229]  to  go  out  again,  to  withdraw 
S  1.8;  A  III.  190.     Cp.  paccupadissati. 

Paccndavattati  [pati+ud-l-a-l- vattati]  to  return  again  to 
(ace.)  S  1.224  :  I'. 104  ;  A  v.337. 

Paccudavattana  (nt.)  [fr.  preceding]  coming  back,  return 

DhsA  389. 

Paccadaharati  [pati+  ud-(-  a+  br]  recite  in  reply  Th  2,  40. 

Paccadeti  [pati-f- ud+i]  go  out  towards  J  vi.559. 

Paccnddbarati  [pati -t- uddharati]  to  wipe  off  or  down 
(with  a  cloth,  colakena)  Vin  11.122  (udakapuflchanii)  ; 
trsl.  Vin.  Texts  n.152  "to  wear  out  a  robe  "),  151 
(gerukag  ;  trsl.   Vin.  Texts  11. 151  "  to  wipe  down  "). 

Paccuddbara  [pati-l-uddhara]  taking  up,  casting  (the  lot) 
again  Vin  iv.  12  i. 

Pacoupattbahati  [pati-l-upa-l-stbal  "  to  stand  up  before," 
to  be  present ;  only  in  pp.  paccupatthita  and  in  Caus. 
paccupatthapeti  (q.  v.). 


Paccupatthana 


Paccha 


PaccupaUhana  (nt.)  [fr.  pati  +  upa  +  stha;  cp.  Cpd.  13  & 
L/akkhana]  i.  (re)appearance,  happening,  coming  on. 
phenomenon  J  ni.524  ;  Nett  28  ;  SnA  509  ;  DhsA  332  ; 
ThA  288.  2.  tending  D  111.191.   3.  vv.  II.  gilanupaUhana. 

Paccupatthapeti  [Caus.  of  paccupatthahati]  i.  to  bring 
before  or  about,  to  arrange,  provide,  instal,  fix  S  iv.  12  i  ; 
J  III. 45  ;  IV. 105;  V.211.  2.  to  minister  to,  wait  upon 
D  III.  1 89  sq. 

Paccupatthita  [pp.  of  paccupatthahati ;  cp.  BSk.  pratyu- 
pasthita,  Divy  Index]  (re)presented,  offered,  at  one's 
disposal,  imminent,  ready,  present  D  111.218  (°kama) ; 
It  95  (id.)  ;  Sn  p.  105  ;  It  1 11  ;  Kvu  157,  2S0  ;  Miln  123. 

Paccupadissati  [reading  uncertain  ;  either  pati  +  upadissati, 
or  fut.  of  pati  +  upadisati,  cp.  upadagseti.  It  is  not  to 
be  derived  fr.  °upadadati]  to  accept,  receive ;  or :  to 
show,  point  out  J  v. 22 1  (v.  1.  paccuttarissati  to  go 
through,  perhaps  preferable;  C.  on  p.  225  expl*  by 
sampaticchissati). 

Paccopalakkha^a  (f.)  [pati+upalakkhana]  differentiation 
S  III. 261  {a°)  Dhs  i6  =  Pug  25  ;  Dhs  292,  555,  1057. 

Pacoupekkha?a  (f.)=paccavekkhana  S  111.262  (a°). 

Paccupeti  [pati  +  upeti]  to  go  up  or  near  to.  to  approach, 
serve,  beset  J  111.214.  fut.  ^upessati  J  iv.362  (gloss 
upasevati). 

PaCCnppanna  [pp.  of  pati  +  uppajjati,  cp.  Sk.pratyutpanna] 
what  has  arisen  (just  now),  existing,  present  (as  opposed 
to  atita  past  &  anagata  future)  M  1.307,  310  ;  in.  188  ; 
190,  196 ;  S  1.5  ;  1V.97  ;  A  1.264  :  111151.  400  ;  D  iii.ico, 
220,  275  ;  It  53  ;  Nd'  340  ;  Pv  iv.62 ;  Dhs  1040,  1043  ; 
VbhA  157  sq. ;   PvA  100.     See  also  atita. 

Paccayyati  [pati+ud  +  ya]  to  go  out  against,  to  go  to 
meet  somebody  S  1.82,  216. 

Paccusa"  [pati+ Ved.  usas  f.  ;  later  Sk.  pratyusa  nt.]  "  the 
time  towards  dawn,"  morning,  dawn  ;  always  in  comp" 
with  either  "kale  (loc.)  at  morning  DhA  iv.61  ;  DA 
1. 168  ;  or  "velayag  (loc.)  id.  VvA  105,  118,  165  ;  PvA  61  ; 
or°samaye  (loc.)  id.  S  1.107  ;  J  1.81,217  ;  SnA  80  ;  PvA  38. 

Pacciiha  [cp.  late  Sk.  pratyuha,  prati  +  vah]  an  impedi- 
ment, obstacle  S  1.201  (bahu  hi  sadda  paccuha,  trsl. 
"  Ay  there  is  busy  to-and-fro  of  words."  C.  expl*  by 
patiloma-sadda)  ;  J  vi.571, 

Pacceka  (adj.)  [pati+eka,  cp.  BSk.  pratyeka  Divy  335, 
336]  each  one,  single,  by  oneself,  separate,  various, 
several  D  1.49  (itthi)  ;  11. 261  ("vasavattin,  of  the  10 
issaras);  S  1.26  (°gatha  a  stanza  each),  146  ("brahraa 
an  independent  Brahma);  A  11.41  (°sacca) ;  v. 29  (id.); 
Sn  824  (id.),  1009  ("ganino  each  one  having  followers  =- 
visur)  visur)ganavantoSnA583);  J  iv.i  14  ("bodhiiiana)  ; 
Nd'  58  (°muni);  DA  1.148  (pacceka  itthiyo) ;  SnA  52 
("bodhisatta  one  destined  to  become  a  Paccekabuddha), 
67  (id.).  73  (°sambodhi),  476  (niraya  a  separate  or 
special  purgatory);  PvA  251  (id.);  S'dhp  589  (°bodhi). 
—  paccekar)  (adv.)  singly,  individually,  to  each  one  VvA 
282.     See  also  patekka. 

-buddha  one  enlightened  by  himself,  i.  e.  one  who  has 
attained  to  the  supreme  and  perfect  insight,  but  dies 
without  proclaiming  the  truth  to  the  world.  M  111.86  ; 
S  1.92  ("Silent  Buddha"  trsl");  J  111.470;  iv.114; 
Ud  50  (P.  Tagarasikhi) ;  Nett  190;  KhA  178,  199  J 
SnA  47,  58,  63;  DhA  1.80.  171,  224,  230;  iv.201  ;  PvA 
144,  263,  265  (=isi),  272,  283. 

Pacceti  [pati+i]  to  come  on  to,  come  back  to,  fig.  fall 
back  on,  realise,  find  one's  hold  in  D  1.186  ("  take  for 
granted,"  cp.  note  Dial.  1.252);  M  1.309  (kag  hetur)), 
445  (id.);  S  1.182  ("believe  in,"  C.  icchati  pattheti)  ; 
Sn  662,  788,  800,  803,  840=908;  Dh  12 ■;  (  =  patieti 
DhA    in. 34);    Nd'    85,     108    (  =  paccagacchati),     114  ; 


Pv  11.3^°  (  =  avagacchati  PvA  87);  Nett  93;  Miln  125, 
313;  PvA  116  (balai)).  241  (agree  to  =  patijanati). — 
ger.  paticca  (q.  v.).  Cp.  paccagacchati  —  pp.  patita 
(q.  v.).  ■ 

Paccodijita  [pati  +  oddita]  laid  in  return  (of  a  snare)  J 
11.1S3  (v.  1.  paccottita). 

Paccora  (adj.)  [pati  +  avara,  cp.  Sk.  pratyavara]  lower,  i  t. 
lower  part,  hindquarter,  bottom  (?)  A  iv.130;  DhA 
1. 189. 

Paccorohani  (f  )  [fr.  paccorohati]  the  ceremony  of  coming 
down  again  (?),  approaching  or  descending  to  (ace), 
esp.  the  holy  fire  A  v. 2^4  sq..  249  sq.,  v.  251.  Cp. 
orohana  &  Sk.  pratyavarohana  "  descent,"  N.  of  a  cert. 
Grhya  celebration  (BR.). 

Paccorohati  [pati+orohati]  to  come  down  again,  descend 
D  1.5(1  ;  11.73;  A  V.65,  234. 

Paccosakkati  [pati 4-  osakkati  which  is  either  ava-l-  sakkati 
(of  svask  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  28-  or  srp  Trenckner  Notes  60), 
or  apa-(- sakkati]  to  withdraw,  retreat,  go  away  again 
D  1.230  ;  J  1.383  ;  Mhvs  25,  84. 

Paccosakkana  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  paccosakkati]  withdrawal 
retreat,  going  back,  shrinking  from  DhsA  151. 

Paccha44ana  (nt.)  [pa+chaddana]  vomiting,  throwing 
out  Sdhp  137. 

Pacchato  (adv.)  [abl.  formation  fr.  ♦paccha  =  Ved.  pasca 
&  pascat,  fr.  Idg.  *pos  as  in  Lith.  pas  near  by,  pastaras 
the  last ;  cp.  Av.  pasca  behind,  Lat.  post,  after]  behind, 
after  Dh  348  (  =  anagatesu  khandhesu  DhA  iv.63  ;  opp. 
pure)  ;  PvA  56,  74  ;  DhA  in.  197  (°vatti).  Often  doubled 
pacchato  pacchato,  i.  e.  always  or  close  behind,  J  11. 123 
(opp.  purato  purato).  —  Cp.  paccha  &  pacchima. 

Pacchada  [fr.  pa  +  chad,  cp.  Sk.  pracchada]  a  cover, 
wrapper;  girdle  Th  2,  378  (  =  uracchada  ThA253) ; 
DhsA  397  (v.  1.  for  °cchada). 

Pacchanna  [pa  +  channa,  of  chad]  covered,  wrapped, 
hidden  Th  i,  299;  J  in. 129. 

Paccha  (adv.)  [\'edic  paSca  &  pascat  see  pacchato]  behind, 
aft,  after,  afterwards,  back  ;  westward  D  1.205  ;  Sn  645, 
773.  949;  Nd'  33  (  =  paccha  vuccati  anagatag,  pure 
vuccati  atitari) ;  Nd^  395;  Dh  172,  314,  421  ;  Pv  i.ii', 
11^  (opp.  purato);  11.9'  (=aparabhage  PvA  116); 
PvA  4,  50,  88;  VvA  71. 

-dnutappati  [fr.  Snutapa]  to  feel  remorse  Pv  11.7'^; 
J  v.  1 1 7. — anutapa  [cp.  Sk.  pascattapa]  remorse, 
repentance  Sdhp  288.  -asa  (nt.)  [asa^]  "  eating  after- 
wards." i.  e.  aftermath  S  1.74  —  gacchati  at  Kvu  624 
see  pacca".  -gataka  going  or  coming  behind  J  vi.30. 
-jata  (paccaya),  nth  of  the  24  paccayas,  q.  v.  causal 
relation  of  posteriority  in  time,  -nipatin  one  who 
retires  to  rest  later  than  another  (opp.  pubb'  utthayin 
getting  up  before  others)  D  1.60;  ill. 191;  A  III. 37  ; 
IV. 265,  267  sq.  ;  DA  1.168.  —  bahag  "arm  behind," 
i.  e.  with  arms  (tied)  behind  one's  back  D  1.245  ;  J 
1.264  '■  DhA  n.39.  —  bhatta  "  after-meal,"  i.  e.  after  the 
midday  meal,  either  as  "g  (ace. -adv.)  in  the  afternoon, 
after  the  main  meal,  usually  comb''  with  pindapata. 
patikkanta  "  returning  from  the  alms-round  after 
dinner"  A  in. 320 ;  PvA  11,  16,  38  and  passim  (cp. 
BSk.  paScadbhakta-pindapata-pratikranta,  see  Indexes 
to  AvS.  &  Divy),  or  as  ^kicca  the  duties  after  the 
midday  meal  (opp.  purebhatta")  DA  1.47  (in  detail); 
SnA  133.  134.  -bhattika  one  who  eats  afterwards,  i.  e. 
afternoon,  when  it  is  improper  to  eat  A  in. 220  (khalu°, 
q.  v.).  -bhaga  hind  or  after  part  J  11.91  ;  PvA  114. 
-bhasati  see  pacca".  -bhuma  belonging  to  the  western 
country  S  in. 5.  -bhumaka  id.  S  iv.3i2=A  v. 263. 
-mukha  looking  westward  M  111. 5  ;  D  n.207  ;  Th  i,  529  ; 


Pacchada 


Pajjati 


DhA  III.  155  (opp.  pacina  eastern).  —  vamanaka  dwarfed 
in  his  hind  part  J  iv.137.  —  samana  [BSk.  pascacchra- 
mana  &  opp.  purahsramana  AvS  11.67,  '5"  ;  r):vy  154, 
330,  494]  a  junior  Wanderer  or  bhikkhu  (Thera)  who 
walks  behind  a  senior  (Thera)  on  his  rounds.  The  one 
accompanying  Gotama  Buddha  is  Ananda  Vin  1.46  ; 
HI. 10  (Ananda);  iv.78  (id.);  Ud  90  (Nagasamala)  ; 
J  IV.  123  ;  Miln  15  (Nagasena)  ;  PvA  38,  93  (Ananda). 

Pacchada  [pa  +  chada]  cover,  covering,  wrapper,  in  phrase 
nelango  setappacchado  S  iv.29i=Ud  76  =  DA  1.75  = 
DhsA  397. 

Pacchanntaptiati  sec  under  paccha. 

Pacchaya  (f.)  [pa+chaya]  a  place  in  the  shade,  shaded 
part  Vin  1.180;  II. 193;  D  1.152  (==chaya  DA  1.310); 
ii.2c'5  ;  A  III. 320. 

Pacchaliyao  at  A  111.76  is  of  uncertain  reading  &  meaning  ; 
in  phrase  p.  khipanti :  either  "  throw  into  the  lap  "  (?) 
or  (better)  read  pacchiyag,  loc.  of  pacchi  "  into  the 
basket  "  (of  the  girls  &  women). 

Pacchasa  [cp.  pacchali  ?  perhaps  fr.  paccha  +  a^]  after- 
math S  1.74. 

Pacchi  (f.)  [etym.  doubtful]  a  basket  J  1.9,  243  ;  11.68  ; 
III. 2 1  ;  VI. 369  (panna°),  560  (phala°) ;  DhA  II. 3  ;  IV. 205 
("pasibbaka). 

Pacohijiati  [pa+chijjati,  Pass,  of  chid]  to  be  cut  short, 
to  be  interrupted  J  1.503  (lohitai)  p.). 

Pacchijjana  (nt.)  [fr.  last]  stopping,  interruption  J  111.214 
(read  assu-pacchijjana-divaso  ?  passage  corrupt.). 

Pacchita  [pa+chita,  Sk.  pracchita,  pp.  of  cha,  only  in 
comb"  with  prefixes]  cut  off,  skinned  J  vi.249. 

Pacchindati  [pa  +  chindati]  i.  to  break  up,  cut  short,  put 
an  end  to  Vin  iv.272  ;  J  1.119  (kathar)  "itva),  148 
(kathai)  °itur))  ;  iv.59  ;  PvA  78  (danavidhir)  °i).  —  2.  to 
bring  up  (food),  to  vomit  DhA  1.183  (aharar)). 

Paochima  (adj.)  [Sk.  pa^cima,  superl.  formation  fr.  *pasca, 
cp.  pacchato  &  paccha]  i.  hindmost,  hind-,  back-,  last 
(opp.  purima),  latest  D  1.239  ;  M  1.23  (  yama  the  last 
night  watch) ;  DA  1.45  sq.  (id.  "kicca  duties  or  perform- 
ances in  the  3"' watch,  corresp.  to  purima" (Smajjhima'')  ; 
Sn  352  ;  J  IV.  137  (^pada) ;  vi.364  (Mvara)  ;  PvA  5,  75. 
—  2.  western  (opp.  purima  or  puratthima)  D  1.153 
(disa) ;  S  1.145.  —  3.  lowest,  meanest  Vin  n.io8; 
M  1.23  ;  S  11.203. 

Pacchimaka  (adj.)  [fr.  pacchima]  i.  last,  latest  (opp. 
purimaka)  Vin  11. 9  ;  Nd^  284  D.  =Th  i,  202  ;  DhsA  262  ; 
J  VI. 151,  —  2.  lowest,  meanest  J  1.285  (pacchimaka 
itthiyo). 

Pacchedaoa  (nt.)  [fr.  pa 4- chid]  breaking,  cutting  DA  1.141. 

Paiagghati  [pa-t-jagghati]  to  laugh  out  loud  J  vi.475. 

Paiappati  [pa-l- jappeti]  to  yearn  for,  crave,  to  be  greedy 
after  S  15  =  J  vi.25  (anagatar)  =pattheti  C). 

Pajappa  (f.)  [pa+jappa]  desire,  greed  for,  longing  J  vi.25 
(anagata°) ;  Sn  592  ;  Dhs  1059,  11 36. 

Pajappita  [pp.  of  pajappeti]  desired,  longed  for  S  1.181  ; 
J  VI.359. 

Pajaha  (adj.)  [pa-l-jaha,  pres.  base  of  jahati]  only  neg. 
a°  not  giving  anything  up,  greedy  A  111.76. 

Palahati  (°jahati)  [pa-)- jahati  of  ha]  to  give  up,  renounce, 
forsake,  abandon,  eliminate,  let  go,  get  rid  of;  freq. 
as  synonym  of  jahati  (see  Nd*  under  jahati  with  all 
forms).  Its  wide  range  of  application  with  reference 
to  all  evils  of  Buddhist  ethics  is  seen  from  exhaustive 


Index  at  S  vi.57  (Index  vol.).  —  Pres.  pajahati  S  1.187  ; 
III. 33  =Nd^  680,  Q  3  (yai)  na  tumhakai)  taip  pajahatha) ; 
It  32  (kit)  appahinari  kii)  pajahama)  ;  i  17  ;  A  iv.109  sq. 
(akusalag,  savajjarj)  ;  Sn  789  (dukkhai)),  1056.  1058 ; 
Ps  1.63;  11.244.  Ppr-  pajahag  S  in. 27;  fut.  pahassat) 
(cp.  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  151')  M  ll.ioo.  —  aor.  pajahi  & 
pahasi  Vin  1.36  ;  S  1.12  =23  (sankhai))  ;  Sn  1057.  —  ger. 
pahaya  S  1.12  (kame),  23  (vicikicchai)),  188  (nivara- 
nani),  Sn  17,  209.  520  &  passim  ;  Nd-  430  ;  PvA  16,  122 
(  =  hitva),  211  ;  pahatvana  Sn  639,  and  pajahitva.  fut. 
pajahissati  S  11.226.  —  grd.  pahatabba  M  1.7;  Sn  558; 
VvA  73,  &  pajahitabba  —  pp.  pahina  (q.  v.).  —  Pass, 
pahiyati  (q.  v.). 

Paja  (f.)  [Ved.  praja,  pra-l-  jan]  progeny,  offspring,  genera- 
tion, beings,  men,  world  (of  men),  mankind  (cp.  use  of 
Bibl.  Gr.  yivyt)na  in  same  meaning)  D  11.55  i  S  v. 346, 
362  sq.  ;  A  11.75  sq.  ;  iv.290  ;  v.232  sq.,  253  sq.  ;  Sn  298, 
545.  654,  684,  776,  936,  1 104  ( =  satta  Nd^  377)  ;  Dh  28, 
^5.  254,  343  (  =  satta  DhA  iv.49) ;  Nd'  47,  292;  Pv 
II. 11';  IV. 3^*;  Pug  57;  Vism  223  (  =  pajayana-vasena 
satta)  ;  DhA  1. 174;  PvA  150,  161.^  Very  freq.  in 
formula  sassamana-brahmani  paja  "  this  world  with  its 
samanas  and  brahmans  "  D  1.250;  S  1.160,  J68,  207; 
II. 170  ;  111.28,  59  ;  IV. 158  ;  v. 204,  352  ;  A  II. 130  ;  v.204  ; 
Sn  p.  15  ;  It  121  etc. 

Pajanana  (f)  [fr.  pajanati]  knowledge,  understanding, 
discernment ;  used  in  exegetical  literature  as  syn.  of 
paniia  Nd^  380  =  Dhs  16,  20,  555;  Pug  25;  Nett  28, 
54.     As  nt.  °a  at  Vism  436. 

Pajinati  [pa-l-janati]  to  know,  find  out,  come  to  know, 
understand,  distinguish  D  1.45  (yathabhutar)  really, 
truly),  79  (ceto  paricca),  162,  249  ;  Sn  626,  726  sq.,  987  ; 
It  12  (ceto  paricca);  Dh  402  ;  Pv  Mi'*  (  =  janati  PvA 
60) ;  J  v.445  ;  Pug  64.  —  ppr.  pajanai]  Sn  884,  1050. 
1 104  (see  expl"  at  Nd'  292=Nd2  378);  It  98;  Pv 
iv.i'<;  and  pajananto  Sn  1051.  —  ger.  paiiriaya  (q.  v.) 
—  Cans,  paiinapeti ;  pp.  paiinatta ;  Pass,  pai^iiayati  & 
pp.  paiifiata  (q.  v.).     Cp.  sampajana. 

Pajapati  (°i)  i.  (m.)  [Ved.  prajapati,  praja  +  pati 
Lord  of  all  created  beings.  Lord  of  Creation]  Prajapati 
(Np.),  the  supreme  Lord  of  men,  only  mentioned  in 
one  formula  together  with  Inda  &  Brahma,  viz. 
deva  saindaka  sabrahmaka  sapajapatika  in  sense  of 
foil.  Also  at  VbhA  497  with  Krahma. — 2.  prajapati 
(f.)  [of  Ved.  prajavant,  adj.-n.  fr.  praja  "  having 
(or  rich  in)  progeny,"  with  p  for  v,  as  pointed  out  by 
Trenckner  Notes  62'*]  "  one  who  has  offspring,"  a  chief 
wife  of  a  man  of  the  higher  class  (like  a  king,  in  which 
case  =  "  chief  queen")  or  a  gahapati,  in  which  case 
simply  "wife";  cp.  BSk.  prajapati  "lady"  Divy  2, 
98. — Vin  1.23;  111.25;  IV. 18,  258;  S  11.243;  A  1. 137 
(catasso  °iyo) ;  iv.210,  214;  Vv  41°  ( =  one  of  the 
16,000  chief  queens  of  Sakka  VvA  183);  DhA  1.73; 
PvA  21,  31.  sapajapatika  (adj.)  together  with  his 
wife  Vin  1.23,  342  ;  iv.62  ;  J  1.345  ;  PvA  20. 

Pajayati  [pa  +  jayati]  to  be  born  or  produced  J  v.386  ;  VI.  14. 

Pajayana  (nt.)  [fr.  pa -f  jan]  being  born  Vism  223. 

Paija'  [cp.  Sk.  padya]  a  path,  road  Sn  514  ;  DA  1.262. 

Pajja^  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  padya  &  p5dya  belonging  to  the  feet, 
Lat.  acupedius  swift-footed  ;  Gr.  irrXoc  foot-soldier, 
see  also  pattika']  foot-oil,  foot-salve  Vin  1.205  :  D  11.240  ; 
J  III. 120;  IV. 396  ;  v. 376  (  =  padabbhaiijana  C). 

Pajjati  [pad,  Vedic  padyate  only  in  meaning  "  to  come 
to  fall,"  later  Sk.  also  "  to  go  to  "]  to  go,  go  to  ;  usually 
not  in  simplex,  but  only  in  comp"  with  prefixes ;  as 
apajjati,  uppajjati,  nipajjati  etc.  —  Alone  only  in  one 
doubtful  passage,  viz.  A  iv.362  (vv.  11.  paccati,  pabbati, 
gacchati.). — pp.  panna  (q.  v.). 


Pajjalati 


lo 


Panca 


Pajjalati  [pa+ jalati  of  jval]  to  burn  (forth),  blaze  up,  fO 
into  flame  Vin  1.180  ;  Sn  687  (sikhi  pajjalanto) ;  J  1.215  ; 
ThA  62  ;  PvA  38.  —  pp.  pajjalita  (q.  v.). 

Pajjalita  [pp.  of  pajjalati]  in  flames,  burning,  blazing 
S  1. 133  ;  Sn  p.  21  (aggi) ;  Dh  146  ;  PvA  43  (sataka). 

Pajjanna  [Ved.  parjanya,  for  etym.  see  Walde,  Lai.  Wtb. 
under  quercus  &  spargo]  rain-cloud  J  1.332  (p.  vuccati 
megho) ;  iv.253.  Otherwise  only  as  Np.  of  the  Rain 
God  D  11.260  ;  S  1.29  ;  J  1.33 1. 

Pajjota  [cp.  Ved.  pradyota,  pra  +  dyut]  light,  lustre, 
splendour,  a  lamp  S  1.15,  47  ;  A  11.140  ;  Sn  349  ;  Pug  25  ; 
Sdhp  590.  —  telapajjota  an  oil  lamp  Vin  i.i6  =  D  1.85  = 
A  1.56  ay  ;  Sn  p.  15.  —  dhammapaj jota  the  lamp  of  the 
Dhamma  Miln  2 1 .  panna-paj  jota  the  torch  of  knowledge 
Dhs  16,  20,  292,  555;  VbhA  115.  pajjotassa  nibbanar) 
the  extinguishing  of  the  lamp  D  11. 157  ;  S  1.159  ;  A  IV.3. 

Pajjhayati  [pa-l-  jhayati*]  to  be  in  flames,  to  waste,  decay, 
dry  up  ;  fig.  to  be  consumed  or  overcome  with  grief, 
disappointment  or  remorse  Vin  111.19;  IV.5  ;  A  11.214, 
216;  III. 57;  J  HI. 534  (pajjhati  metri  causa;  C=anuso- 
cati)=  Miln  5.  —  ppr-  pajjhayanto  downcast,  in  formula 
tunhibhiito  mankubhuto  pattakkhandho  adhomiikho 
p.  M  1. 132,  258  and  passim. 

Panca  (adj. -num.)  [Ved.  panca,  Idg.  *penque ;  cp.  Gr. 
TrivTt,  Lat.  quinque,  Goth,  fimf,  Lith.  penki,  Oir.  coic] 
number  5. — Cases:  gen.  dat.  panpannag,  instr.  abl. 
paficahi,  loc.  pancasu  ;  often  used  in  compositional  form 
paiica"  (cp.  Ved.  pancara  with  5  spokes  1.164'';  Gr. 
fff/imi/joXof,  Lat.  quinqu-ennis  etc.).  —  i.  Characteris- 
tics of  No.  5  in  its  use,  with  ref ,  to  lit.  &  fig.  application. 
"  Five  "  is  the  number  of  "  comprehensive  and  yet 
simple"  unity  or  a  set;  it  is  applied  in  all  cases  of  a 
natural  and  handy  comprehension  of  several  items  into 
a  group,  after  the  5  fingers  of  the  hand,  which  latter  lies 
at  the  bottom  of  all  primitive  expressions  of  No.  5  (see 
also  below  pane'  angulika.  The  word  for  5  itself  in  its 
original  form  is  identical  with  the  word  for  hand  'praq, 
cp.  Lat.  com",  decem,  centum  etc.)  — 

A.  Nj.  5,  appl''  (a)  with  ref.  to  time:  catupaiicahar) 

4  or  5  days  J  11. 114  (cp.  quinque  diebus  Horace  Sat 
1.3'*) ;  maranar)  tuyhai)  orar)  masehi  paiicahi  after  5 
months  Vv  63^",   p.   mase  vasitva  DA   1.319   (cp.   qu. 
menses    Hor.    Sat.    u.t,^^').  —  (b)    of   space :    "yojana- 
tfhana  J  ill. 504  ;  °yojan-ubbedho  gajavaro  VvA  33: 
"bhumako  pasado  J  1.58  (cp.  the  house  of  Death  as  5 
stories  high  in  Grimm,  Marchen  No.  42  ed.  Reclam). 
—  (c)  of  a  group,  set,  company,  etc.  (cp.  5  peoples  RV 
ni.37»;  vi.ii<;  viii.92  etc.  ;  gods  x.55' ;  priests  11.34'* 
111.7' ;  leaders  of  the  Greek  ships  Horn.  Iliad  16,  171 
ambassadors  Genesis  47^  ;  quinque  viri  Hor.  Sat.  11.5^ 
Epist.  ii.i2<);  p.  jana  J  v.230  ;  p.  amacca  J  v. 231  ;  p 
hatthino  DhA  1.164  ;  paiica  nariyo  agamigsu  Vv  32' 
p.    puttani   khadami   Pv   1.6^.  —  Note.  No.    5   in   this 
appl"  is  not  so  frequent  in  Pali  as  in  older  literature 
(Vedas  e.  g.) ;  instead  of  the  simple  5  we  find  more  freq. 
the  higher  decimals  50  and  500.     See  also  below  §§3.4. 

B.  No.  15  in  two  forms  :  paiicadasa  (f.  °I  the  15th  day 
of  the  month  Vv  I5*  =  A  1.144  ;  Sn  402)  VvA  67  (°ka- 
hapana-sahassani  dapesi),  and  pannarasa  (also  as  f. 
i  of  the  15th  or  full-moon  day  Pv  111.3' ;  DhA  1.198; 
III. 92  ;  IV. 202  ;  VvA  314;  SnA  78)  Sn  153  (pannarafo 
uposatho) ;  Vv  64^  (pannarase  va  cando  ;  expl''  as  pan- 
narasiyar)  VvA  276) ;  DhA  1.388  (of  age,  15  or  16  years) ; 
DA  1. 1 7  ("bhedo  Khuddaka-nikayo) ;  SnA  357  (panna- 
rasahi  bhikkhu-satehi  =  1 500,  instead  of  the  usual  500) ; 
PvA  154  (°yojana).     The  appl"  is  much  the  same  as 

5  and  50  (see  below),  although  more  rare,  e.  g.  as  measure 
of  space:  "yojana  DhA  1.17  (next  in  sequence  to  pan- 
ijasa-yojana) ;  J  1.315;  PvA  154  (cp.  15  furlongs  from 
Jerusalem  to  Bethany  John  11,  i8  ;  15  cubits  above  the 
mountains  rose  the  flood  Gen.  7.  20). 

C.  No.  25  in  two  forms :  paiicavisati  (the  usual)  e.  g. 


DhsA  185  sq.  ;  Miln  289  (citta-dubbali-karana  dhamma) ; 
panna-Tisati,  e.  g.  J  iv.352  (nariyo)  ;  Th  2,  67,  and 
pannuvisag  (only  at  J  in. 138).  Similarly  to  15  and  25 
the  number  45  (panca-cattalisa)  is  favoured  in  giving 
distances  with  "yojana,  e.  g.  at  J  1.147,  34^  ^  DhA 
1.367. — Application  :  of  25:  (i)  time:  years  J  in. 138; 
DhA  1.4;  (2)  space:  miles  high  and  wide  DhA  11.64 
(ahipeto) ;  VvA  236  (yojanani  pharitva  pabha). 

2.  Remarks  on  the  use  of  50  and  500  (50CO).  Both  50 
and  5t;o  are  found  in  stereotyped  and  always  recurring 
combinations  (not  in  Buddhist  literature  alone,  but  all 
over  the  Ancient  World),  and  applied  to  any  situation 
indiscriminately.  They  have  thus  lost  their  original 
numerical  significance  and  their  value  equals  an  expres- 
sion likeour  "thousands,"  cp.  the  use  of  Lat.  mille  and 
600,  also  similarly  many  other  high  numerals  in  Pali 
literature,  as  mentioned  under  respective  units  (4,  6,  8 
e.  g.  in  14,  16,  18,  etc.).  Psychologically  5C0  is  to  be  expl'' 
as  "  a  great  hand,"  i.  e.  the  5  fingers  magnified  to  the  2°'' 
decade,  and  is  equivalent  to  an  expression  like  "  a  lot  " 
(originally  "  only  one,"  cp.  casting  the  lot,  then  the  one 
as  a  mass  or  collection),  or  like  heaps,  tons,  a  great 
many,  etc.  —  Thus  50  (and  5C0)  as  the  numbers  of 
"  comm-union "  are  especially  freq.  in  recording  a 
company  of  men,  a  host  of  servants,  animals  in  a  herd, 
etc.,  wherever  the  single  constituents  form  a  larger 
(mostly  impressive,  important)  whole,  as  an  army,  the 
king's  retinue,  etc.  —  A.  No.  50  (paiinasa  ;  the  by-form 
pannasa  only  at  DhA  ni.207),  in  foil,  appl"^ :  (a)  of 
time  :  does  not  occur,  but  see  below  under  55.  —  (b)  of 
space  (cp.  50  cubits  the  breadth  of  Noah's  ark 
Gen.  6.  15;  the  height  of  the  gallows  (Esther  5.  14; 
7-  9)  J  '-359  (yojanani) ;  DhA  111.207  ("hattho  ubbe- 
dhena  rukkho)  ;  Vism  417  (paripunna  °yojana  suriya- 
mandala) ;  DhA  1.17  ("yojana). —  (c)  of  a  company  or 
group  (cp.  50  horses  RV  11.18'  ;  v.i8°  ;  wives 
vin. 19^;  men  at  the  oars  Hom.  II.  2.  719;  16.  170, 
servants  Hom.  Od.  7,  103,  22,  421)  J  111.220  (cora) ; 
V.161  (pallanka),  421  (dijakannayo)  ;  Sn  p.  87; 
SnA  57  (bhikkhu).  —  Note.  55  (paflcapanflasa)  is 
used  instead  of  50  in  time  expressions  (years), 
e.  g.  atDhAi.125  ;  11.57;  PvA  99,  142  ;  also  in  gro«/>s.- 
DhA  1.99  (jana).  —  B.  No.  500  (paiicasata°,  paiicasa- 
ta.  paflcasatani).  —  (a)  of  time  :  years  (as  Peta 
or  Peti)  Vv  S^^* ;  Pv  ii.i';  PvA  152  (vrith  addi- 
tional 50).  (b)  of  space:  miles  high  Pv  IV.3'' ; 
J  1.204  (°yojana-satika) ;  Visra  72  (°dhanu-satika.  5C0 
bows  in  distance).  —  (C)  of  groups  of  men.  servants,  or 
a  herd.  etc.  (cp.  500  horses  RV  x.93'* ;  witnesses  of 
the  rising  of  Christ  i  Cor.  15-6  ;  men  armed  Vergil  Aen. 
10.  204 ;  men  as  representatives  Hom.  Od.  3.  7  ;  500 
knights  or  warriors  very  frequently  in  Nibelungenlied, 
where  it  is  only  meant  to  denote  a  "  goodly  company, 
500  or  more ")  Arahants  KhA  98 ;  Bhikkhus  very 
frequent,  e.  g.  D  i.i  ;  Vin  11.199;  J  11 16.  227;  DhA 
n.109,  153;  111.262.  295;  JV.184.  186;  Savakas  J  1.95; 
Upasakas  J  11.95;  PvA  151;  Paccekabuddhas  DhA 
IV.201  ;  PvA  76 ;  VighasSda  J  n.95  ;  DhA  11. 154  ;  Sons 
PvA  75  ;  Thieves  DhA  11.204  :  PvA  54  ;  Relatives  PvA 
179;  Women-servants  (parivarika  itthiyo)  Pv  11. 12*; 
VvA  69.  78.  187;  PvA  152  ;  Oxen  A  iv.41  ;  Monkeys 
J  i"-355  ;  Horses  Vin  ni.6.  —  Money  etc.  as  present, 
reward  or  fine  representing  a  "  round-sum  "  (cp.  Nibe- 
lungen  314:  horses  with  gold.  317:  mark;  dollars  as 
reward  Grimm  No.  7  ;  drachms  as  pay  Hor.  Sat.  11.7*'') 
kahapanas  Sn  980.  982  ;  PvA  273  ;  blows  with  stick  as 
fine  Vin  1.247.  —  Various  :  a  caravan  usually  consists 
of  500  loaded  wagons,  e.  g.  J  i.ioi  ;  DhA  11.79;  PvA 
100,  112;  chariots  VvA  78;  ploughs  Sn  p.  13.  Cp. 
S  1. 148  (vyagghi-nisa)  ;  Vin  n.285  (iina-paficasatani) ; 
J  11.93  (acchara) ;  v. 75  (vanija) ;  DhA  1.89  (suvaijna- 
sivika).  352  (raja-satani) ;  iv.182  (jati°)  KhA  176 
(paritta-dipa).  Also  BSk.  paii'opasthayika-^atani  Divy 
529 ;  pafica-matrani  stri-Satani  Divy  533.  • —  Note. 
When  Gotama  said  that  his  "  religion  "  would  last  500 


■^i 


Panca 


II 


Panca 


years  he  meant  that  it  would  last  a  very  long  time,  prac- 
tically for  ever.  The  later  change  of  500  to  5,000  is 
immaterial  to  the  meaning  of  the  expression,  it  only 
indicates  a  later  period  (cp.  5,000  in  Nibelungeniled 
for  500,  also  5,000  men  in  ambush  Joshua  8.  12  ;  con- 
verted by  Peter  Acts  4.  4  ;  fed  by  Christ  with  5  loaves 
Matthew  14.  21).  Still  more  impressive  than  500  is  the 
expression  5  Kotis  (5  times  loo.coo  or  lo  million),  which 
belongs  to  a  comparatively  later  period,  e.  g.  at  DhA 
1.62  (ariya-savaka-kotiyo),  256  ("matta-ariyasivaka) ; 
IV.  190  (p.  koti-matta  ariya-savaka). 

3.  Typical  sets  of  5  in  the  Pali  Canon,  "aggag  first 
fruits  of  5  (kinds),  viz.  khett°,  ras°,  kotth",  kumbhi", 
bhojan"  i.  e.  of  the  standing  crop,  the  threshing  floor, 
the  granary,  the  pottery,  the  larder  SnA  2yo.  °anga  5 
gentlemanly  qualities  (of  king  or  brahmin):  sujata,  ajjha- 
yaka,  abhirupa,  silava,  pandita  (see  anga ;  on  another 
comb"  with  anga  see  below).  The  phrase  pane'  anga- 
samannagata  &  "vippahina  (S  i.gg  ;  A  v.  16)  refers  to 
the  5  nivaranani :  see  expH  at  Vism  146.  "angikaturiya 
5  kinds  of  music :  atata,  vitata,  atata-vitata,  ghana, 
susira.  "abhiiiiia  5  psychic  powers  (see  Cpd.  209). 
°anantarika-kammani  5  acts  that  have  immediate 
retribution  (Miln  25),  either  5  of  the  6  abhithanas  (q.  v.) 
or  (usually)  murder,  theft,  impurity,  lying,  intemper- 
ance (the  5  Silas)  cp.  Dhs  trsl.  267.  "indriyani  5 
faculties,  viz.  saddha,  viriya,  sati,  samadhi,  paiina  (see 
indriya  B.  15-19).  "vidhar)  (raja-)  kakudhabhandag, 
insignia  regis  viz.  valavijani,  unhisa,  khagga,  chatta, 
paduka.  "kalyanani,  beauty-marks :  kesa°,  mai)sa°, 
atthi°,  chavi",  vaya°.  "kamaguna  pleasures  of  the  5 
senses  ( =  taggocarani  pane' ayatanani  gahitani  honti 
SnA  211).  "gorasa  5  products  of  the  cow  :  khira,  dadlii, 
takka,  navanita,  sappi.  "cakkhuni,  sorts  of  vision  (of 
a  Buddha)  :  marjsa''  dibba°  parina"  buddha"  samanta". 
"tanha  cravings,  specified  in  4  sets  of  5  each  :  see  Nd^ 
271^.  "nikaya  5  collections  (of  Suttantas)  in  the 
Buddh.  Canon,  viz.  Digha"  Majjhima"  Sagyutta",  An- 
guttara"  Khuddaka",  e.  g.  Vin  11.287.  "nivaranani  or 
obstacles :  kamacchanda.  abhijjha-vyapada,  thina- 
middha,  uddhacca-kukkucca,  vicikiccha.  °patitthitag 
5  fold  prostration  or  veneration,  viz.  with  forehead, 
waist,  elbows,  knees,  feet  (Childers)  in  phrase  °ena 
vandati  (sometimes  "g  vandati,  e.  g.  SnA  78,  267) 
J  V.502  ;  SnA  267,  271,  293,  328,  436;  VvA  6;  DhA 
1. 197;  IV.  178,  etc.  °bandhana  either  5  ways  of  binding 
or  pinioning  or  5  fold  bondage  J  1V.3  (as  "  ure  pancan- 
gika-bandhanar)  "  cp.  kanthe  paiicamehi  bandhanehi 
bandhitva  S  iv.201)  ;  Nd*  304™  b2  (raja  bandhapeti 
andhu-bandhanena  va  rajju",  sankhalika",  lata",  parik- 
khepa°),  with  which  cp.  Siksasamucc.  165  :  rajiia  paii- 
capasakena  bandhanena  baddhah.  — ■  There  is  a  diff. 
kind  of  bandhana  which  has  nothing  to  do  with  binding, 
but  which  is  the  5  fold  ordeal  (obligation :  pancavidha- 
bandhana-karanar))  in  Niraya.  and  consists  of  the 
piercing  of  a  red  hot  iron  stake  through  both  hands, 
both  feet  and  the  chest ;  it  is  a  sort  of  crucifixion.  We 
may  conjecture  that  this  "  bandhana"  is  a  corruption 
of  "  vaddhana  "  (of  vyadh.  or  viddhana  ?),  and  that 
the  expression  originally  was  pancaviddhana-karaiia 
(instead  of  paiica-vidha-bandhana-k°).  See  passages 
under  bandhana  &  cp.  M  in.  182  ;  A  r.141  ;  Kvu  597  ; 
SnA  479.  "balani  5  forces:  saddha"  viriya"  sati" 
samadhi"  paiiiia"  D  11. 120;  M  11. 12;  S  111.96  ;  A  Iii.i2 
(see  also  bala).  "bhojanani  5  kinds  of  food  :  odana, 
kummasa,  sattu,  maccha,  mar)sa  Vin  iv.176.  °mac- 
chariyani  5  kinds  of  selfishness :  avasa"  kula"  labha" 
vanija"  dhamma".  "rajani  defilements :  rupa",  sadda" 
etc.  (of  the  5  senses)  Nd'  505  ;  SnA  574.  "vanna  5 
colours  (see  ref.  for  colours  under  pita  and  others),  viz. 
nila,  pitaka,  lohitaka,  kaijha,  odata  (of  B's  eye)  Nd' 
235"  :  others  with  ref.  to  paduma-pun(Jarika  VvA  41  ;  to 
pad'uma  DhA  in. 443  ;  to  kusumani  DA  1.140;  DhA 
IV. 203.  "vanna  in  another  meaning  (fivefold)  in  con- 
nection with  piti  (q.  v.).     "saQyojanani  fetters  (q.  v.). 


"sanga  impurities,  viz.  raga,  dosa,  moha,  mana,  ditt^i 
(cp.  tanha)  DhA  iv.109.  "sila  the  5  moral  precepts, 
as  sub-division  of  the  10  (see  dasasila  and  Nd^  under 
sila  on  p.  277). 

4.  Other  {not  detailed)  passages  with  5  :  Sn  660 
(abbudani),  677  (nahutani  kotiyo  panca) ;  Th  2,  503 
(°katuka  =  paiicakamaguna-rasa  ThA  291);  DhA  11.25 
("mahanidhi) ;  Sn.\  39  ("pakara-gomandala-punija- 
bhava).  Cp.  further:  guna  Miln  249;  pannani 
Vin  1.20 1  (nimba",  kutaja",  patola",  sulasi",  kappasi- 
ka°) :  Pandu-raja-putta  J  v. 426  ;  pabbaganthiyo  Miln 
103  ;  puccha  Dhs.\  55  ;  maha-pariccaga  DhA  in. 441  ; 
maha-vilokanani  DhA  1.84;  vatthuni  Vin  11. 196  sq.  ; 
vahanani  (of  King  Pajjota)  DhA  1.196;  suddhavasa 
Dhs  .\  14.     In  general  see  Vin  V. 128-133  (var.  setsof  5). 

-anga  five  (bad)  qualities  (see  anga  3  and  above  3),  in 
phrase  vippahina  free  from  the  5  sins  D  in. 269  ;  Nd* 
284  C;  cp.  BSk.  paiicanga-viprahina.  Ep.  of  the 
Buddha  Divy  95,  264  &  "samannagata  endowed  with 
the  5  good  qualities  A  v.15  (of  senasana,  expl""  at  Vism 
122):  see  also  above,  -angika  consisting  of  5  parts, 
fivefold,  in  foil.  comb°» :  "jhana  (viz.  vitakka,  vicara, 
piti,  sukha,  cittass'  ekaggata)  Dhs  83  ;  "turiya  orchestra 
S  1. 131  ;  Th  I,  398;  2,  139;  Vv  36*;  DhA  1.274.  394: 
"bandhana  bond  J  1V.3.  -angula  =  "angulika  J  iv.153 
(gandha") ;  SnA  39  (usabhag  nahapetva  bhojetva  "g 
datva  malai)  bandhitva).  -angulika  (also  °aka)  the 
5  finger-mark,  palm-mark,  the  magic  mark  of  the  spread 
hand  with  the  fingers  extended  (made  after  the  hand  & 
5  fingers  have  been  immersed  in  some  liquid,  preferably 
a  solution  of  sandal  wood,  gandha  ;  but  also  blood). 
See  Vogel,  the  5  finger-token  in  Pali  Literature,  Amster- 
dam Akademie  1919  (with  plates  showing  ornaments  on 
Bharhut  Tope),  cp.  also  j.P.T.S.  1884.  84  sq.  It  is 
supposed  to  provide  magical  protection  (esp.  against 
the  Evil  Eye).  Vin  11. 123  (cp.  Vin.  Texts  n.116); 
J  i.i66,  192;  II. 104  (gandha  "g  deti),  256  (gandha", 
applJ  to  a  cetiya)  ;  in. 23,  160  (lohita") ;  Vv  33'*  (gandha- 
°i)  adasig  Kassapassa  thupasraig) ;  Mhvs32.  4  (see  trsl. 
p.  220);  DhA  in. 374  (gonanar)  gandha-"ani  datva); 
SnA  137  (setamalahi  sabba-gandha-sugandhehi  p'akehi 
ca  alankata  paripunna-angapaccanga,  of  oxen).  Cp. 
MVastu  1.269  (stupesu  paiicangulani ;  see  note  on  p. 
579).  Quotations  of  similar  use  in  brahmanical  litera- 
ture see  at  Vogel  p.  6  sq.  -avudha  (ayudha)  set  of  5 
weapons  (sword,  spear,  bow,  battle-axe,  shield,  after 
Childers)  Miln  339  (see  Miln  trsl.  11.227),  cp.  p°  san- 
naddha  J  111.436,  467;  iv.283,  437;  v.431  ;  vi.75  ; 
sannaddha-p°  J  iv.i6o  (of  sailors).  They  seem  to  be 
different  ones  at  diff.  passages,  -ahai)  5  days  Vin 
IV. 281  ;  J  II.  1 14.  -cuUka  with  5  topknots  J  v. 250  (of 
a  boy),  -nakha  with  5  claws,  N.  of  a  five-toed  animal 
J  V.489  (so  read  for  panca  na  kha,  misunderstood  by 
C).  -patthika  at  Vin  11.117,  121,  152;  is  not  clear 
(v.  1.  patika).  Vin.  Texts  in. 97  trsl.  "  cupboards  "  and 
connect  it  with  Sk.  pattika,  as  celapattikai)  Vin  11. 128 
undoubtedly  is  ("  strip  of  cloth  laid  down  for  ceremonial 
purposes,"  trsl.  in. 128).  It  also  occurs  at  Vin  iv.47. 
-patika  (f.)  having  had  5  husbands  J  v. 424.  427.  -malin 
of  a  wild  animal  J  vi.497  ( ^  pancangika-turiya-saddo 
viya  C. ,  not  clear),  -masakamattag  a  sum  of  5  masakas 
DhA  11.29.  -vaggiya  (or  "ika  SnA  198)  belonging  to  a 
group  of  five.  The  5  brahmins  who  accompanied 
Gotama  when  he  became  an  ascetic  are  called  p.  bhik- 
khu.  Their  names  are  Aflnakondaniia,  Bhaddiya. 
Vappa,  Assaji,  Mahanama.  M  1.170;  11.94;  S  in. 66; 
PvA  21  (°e  adig  katva)  ;  SnA  351  ;  cp.  chabbaggiya. 
-vidha  fivefold  J  1.204  ("a  abhirakkha)  ;  vi.341  (°pa- 
duma),  "bandhana  :  see  this,  -sadharana-bhava  fivefold 
connection  J  1V.7.  -settha  (Bhagava)  "  the  most 
excellent  m  the  five"  Sn  355  (  =  paiicannag  pafhama- 
sissanag  paficavaggiySnag  settho,  paiicahi  va  saddha- 
dihi  indriyehi  siladihi  va  dhamma-khandhehi  ativisij- 
thehi  cakkhuhi  ca  set  (ho  SnA  351).  -hattha  having  5 
hands  J  v.431. 


Paiicaka 


12 


Panna 


Pancaka  (adj.)  [fr.  paiica]  fivefold,  consisting  of  five 
J  I.ii6  ("kammatthana) ;  Dhs.  chapters  167-175  ("naya 
fivefold  system  of  jhana,  cp.  Dhs.  Irsl"  52);  SnA  318 
(°nipata  of  Anguttara).  —  nt.  paficakag  a  pentad,  five 
Vin  1.255  (the  5  parts  of  the  kathina  robe,  see  Vin. 
Texts  II.  155),  cp.  p.  287  ;  pi.  paiicaka  sets  of  five  Vism 
242.  The  32  akaras  or  constituents  of  the  human  body 
are  divided  into  4  paiicaka's  (i.  e.  sets  of  5  more  closely 
related  parts),  viz.  taca°  "  skin-pentad,"  the  5  derma- 
toid  constituents :  kosa,  loma,  nakha,  danta,  taco ; 
vakka°  the  next  five,  ending  with  the  kidneys  ;  pap- 
phasa'  1.  ending  with  the  lungs  ct  comprising  the  inner 
organs  proper  ;  matthalunga"  id.  ending  with  the  brain, 
and  2  chakka's  (sets  of  6),  viz.  meda°  &  mutta'.  See 
e.  g.  VbhA  249,  258. 

Pancakkbattug  (adv.)  five  times. 

Pancadha  (adv.)  in  five  ways,  fivefold  DhsA  351. 

Pancama  (adj.)  [compar.-superl.  formation  fr.  paiica,  with 
°ma  as  in  Lat.  supremus,  for  the  usual  "to  as  in  Gr. 
Trf/nrror,  Lat.  quintus,  also  Sk.  paficathah]  num.  ord. 
the  fifth  D  1.88  ;  Sn  84,  gg,  10 1  ;  VvA  102  ;  PvA  52  (°e 
mase  in  the  5"'  month  the  Peti  has  to  die)  ;  DhA  111.195 
("e  sattahe  in  the  5'''  week).  —  f.  paficama  PvA  78  (ito 
°aya  jatiya)  and  paiicami  Sn  437  (sena) ;  PvA  79  (jati). 

Pancamaka  (adj.)=pancama  J  1.55. 

Pancaso  (adv.)  by  fives. 

Panja  [is  it  to  be  piiflja  ?]  heap,  pile  A  11.75  (meaning 
different  ?) ;  Cp.  i.io*'. 

Panjara  (m.  &  nt.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  pafijara,  which  probably 
belongs  to  Lat.  pango,  q.  v.  Walde,  Lat.  Wtb.  s.  v.]  a 
cage,  J  1.436:  II. 141  ;  in. 305  (siha°) ;  iv.213;  v. 232 
(siha),  365;  VI. 385  (siha°),  391;  Miln  23  ("antaragata 
gone  into  the  c.) ;  27  ;  DhA  1.164  (nakha°),  where  mean- 
ing is  "  frame  "  ;  VbhA  238. 

Pailjali  (adj.)  [pa  +  afijali.  Cp.  Ep.  Sk.  prafijali]  with 
outstretched  hands,  as  token  of  reverence  Sn  103 1  ;  in 
cpd.  paiijali-kata  (cp.  afijalikata;  aiijali-f- pp.  of  kr) 
raising  one's  folded  hands  Sn  566,  573;  Th  i,  460'; 
J  VI. 501.    Cp.  BSk.praiijalikrtaMVastu  11.257,  287,  301'. 

Panjalika  (adj.)  [fr.  panjali]  holding  up  the  clasped  hands 
as  token  of  respectful  salutation  S  1.226  ;  Sn  485,  598. 

Panjasa  (adj.)  [pa4-afijasa]  in  the  right  order,  straight 
A  n.15. 

Panna  (-°)  (adj.)  [the  adj.  form  of  pailna]  of  wisdom,  en- 
dowed with  knowledge  or  insight,  possessed  of  the 
highest  cognition,  in  foil.  cpds.  :  anissarana"  D  1.245  ; 
S  II.  194  ;iv.332  ;  anoma"  Sn  343  ;appa°Si.i98  ;  J  11.166  ; 
111.223,  263;  avakujja"  A  1.130;  gambhlra°  S  i.igr.)  ■ 
javana"  S  1.63  ;  Nd^  235  ;  tikkha"  ;  dup°  D  111.252,  282  ; 
S  1.78,  191  ;  II. 159  sq.  ;  M  in. 25  ;  A  11.187  sq-  ;  Dh  in! 
140  ;  Pug  13  ;  DhA  11.255  ;  nibbedhika"  S  1.63  ;  A  11. 178  ■ 
Nd2  235  ;  puthu"  ibid.  ;  bliavita"  S  iv.iii  ;  A  v.42  sq.  '; 
bhuri"  S  III. 143;  iv.205  ;  manda°  Vbh.A.  239;  maha'' 
S  1.63,  121  ;  11.155;  A  1.23,  25;  II. 178  sq.  ;  Nd^  235; 
SnA  347;  sap"  S  1.13,22,  212  ;  iv.210  ;  Aiv.245  ■  Pv  i  s'^ '■ 
ii=;  PvA  60  (  =  pandita),  131  (-1- buddhimant) ;  suvi- 
mutta"  A  v.29  sq.  ;  hasa°  S  i.6:j,  191  ;  V.S76  ;  Nd^  235 
By  itself  (i.  e.  not  in  cpd.)  only  at  Dh  208  '(  =  lokiya- 
lokuttara-pannaya  sampanna  DhA  111.172)  and  ^75 
(  =  panditaDhA  IV.  1 1 1).  '    ' 

Pannata  (f.)  [secondary  abstract  formation  fr.  panfia,  in 
meanmg  equal  to  paiinana]  having  sense,  wisdom 
A  III. 42  I  (dup"  =  foolishness)  v.  159  (id.) ;  maha",  puthu" 
vipula°  A  1.45.     See  also  pafiriattai) . 

Paniatta'  [pp.  of  paiifiapeti,  cp.  BSk.  prajnapta]  pointed 
out,   made  known,   ordered,   designed,   appointed,   or- 


dained S  II. 218;  A  1.98,  151;  IV. 16,  19;  V.74  sq.  ;  Pv 
iv.i''^;  r)hA  1.274;  VvA  9  (su"  manca-pTtha),  92  (nic- 
cabhatta) ;  PvA  78.  Esp.  freq.  in  ster.  formula  pafi- 
iiatte  asane  nisidi  he  sat  down  on  the  appointed  (i.  e. 
special)  chair  (scat)  D  1.109,  125,  148  ;  S  1.212  ;  Dh  148  ; 
SnA  267  ;  PvA  16,  23.  61. 

Pannatta'  (nt. )  [abstr.  fr.  pafiiia]  wisdom,  sense  etc.  S 
V.4I2  (v.  1.  pannata).     See  also  paiiiiata. 

Pannatti  (f)  [fr.  paiiiiapeti,  cp.  paiiiiattai]  making  known, 
manifestation,  description,  designation,  name,  idea, 
notion,  concept.  On  term  see  Cpd.  3  sq.,  198,  199  ; 
Ki  u  trsl"  I  ;  Dhs  trsl"  340.  —  M  111.68  ;  S  in. 71  ;  iv.38 
(mara°),  39  (satta°,  dukkha",  loka°) ;  A  11.17;  v.190  ; 
Ps  II.  1 71,  176  ;  Pug  I  ;  Dhs  1.309  ;  Nett  i  sq.,  38,  188 ; 
KhA  102,  107;  .DA  1. 139;  SnA  445,  470;  PvA  200. 
The  spelling  also  occurs  as  pannatti,  e.  g.  at  J  11.65 
("vahara)  ;  Miln  173  (loka°) ;  KhA  28;  adj.  pannattika 
(q.  v.). 

Panna  vant  (adj.)  [paiifia-t- vant,  with  reduction  of  a  to  a  see 
Gciger,  P.Gr.  §  23]  possessed  of  insight,  wise,  intelligent, 
sensible  Vin  i.6<j  ;  D  111.237,  252,  265,  282,  287  ;  M  1.292  ; 
in. 23  ;  S  1.53,  79  ;  11.159  sq.,  207,  279  (daharo  ce  pi  p.) ; 
IV. 243  ;  v. 100,  igg,  392,  401  ;  A  11.76,  187,  230  ;  111.2  sq., 
127,  183  ;  IV. 85,  2 17,  271,  357  ;  V.25,  124  sq.  ;  Sn  174  ; 
Nd2  25g;  Dh  84  ;  J  i.i  16  ;  Pug  13  ;  DhA  11.255  ;  KhA  54  ; 
VbhA  23g,  278  ;  PvA  40.     Cp.  paiinaijavant. 

Panna  (f.)  [cp.  Vedic  prajfia,  pa-t-jna]  intelligence,  com- 
prising all  the  higher  faculties  of  cognition,  "  intellect 
as  conversant  with  general  truths"  {Dial.  11.68),  reason, 
wisdom,  insight,  knowledge,  recognition.  See  on  term 
Mrs.  Rh.  D.  "Buddhism  "  (1914)  pp.  g4,  130,  201  ;  also 
Cpd.  40,  41,  102  and  discussion  of  term  at  Dhs.  Irsl.  17, 
339,  cp.  scholastic  definition  with  all  the  synonyms  of 
intellectual  attainment  at  Nd-  38o=Dhs  16  (panria 
pajanana  vicayo  etc.).  As  tt.  in  Buddhist  Psych. 
Ethics  it  comprises  the  highest  and  last  stage  as  3rd 
division  in  the  standard  "  Code  of  religious  practice" 
which  leads  to  Arahantship  or  Final  Emancipation. 
These  3  stages  are:  (1)  sila-kkhandlia  (or  ^sampada), 
code  of  moral  duties;  (2)  samadhi-kkhandha  (or  citta- 
sampada)  code  of  emotional  duties  or  practice  of  con 
centration  &  meditation ;  (3)  pafina-kkhandha  (or 
"sampada)  code  of  intellectual  duties  or  practice  of  the 
attainment  of  highest  knowledge.  (See  also  jhana'.) 
They  are  referred  to  in  almost  every  Suttanta  of  Digha  i 
(given  in  extenso  at  D  1.62-85)  and  frequently  mentioned 
elsewhere,  cp.  D  11.81,  84,  91  (see  khandha,  citta  & 
sila).  —  D  1.26=162  (°gatena  caranti  ditthigatani), 
174  (°vada),  195  ("paripurin) ;  11.122  (ariya)  ;  111. loi. 
158,  164,  183,  230,  237,  242,  284  sq.  ;  S  1.13  =  165  (sila. 
citta,  pafiiia),  17,  34,  55;  11. 185  (samma°),  277;  v. 222 
(ariya):  M  1.144- (id.);  in. 99  (id.),  245  (parama),  272 
(samma°) ;  A  1.61,  216;  11. i  (ariya);  iv.105  (id.); 
111.106  (sila,  citta,  p.),  352  (kusalesu  dhammesu) ;  iv.ii 
(id.):  V.123  sq.  :  It  35,  40  ("uttara),  51  (sila'samadhi 
p.  ca),  112  (ariya") ;  Sn  77,  329,  432,  881,  1036  and 
passim;  Dh  38.  152,  372;  Nd'  77;  Nd^  380;  Ps  1.53, 
64  sq.,  71  sq..  102  sq.,  119:  11.150  sq.,  162,  185  sq.  ; 
Pug  25,  35,  54  (°sampada) ;  Dhs  16,  20,  555  ;  Nett  8,  15, 
17,  28.54,  191.'  VbhA  140,  396  ;  PvA  40  (paiinayaabha- 
vato  for  lack  of  reason) ;  Sdhp  343.  On  pannaya  see 
Sep.  article.  See  also  adhipanna  (adhislla.  adhicitta-|- ). 
-adhipateyya  the  supremacy  of  wisdom  A  ii.i37. 
-indriya  the  faculty  of  reason  (with  sati°  &  samadhi°) 
D  111.239,  278:  Dhs  16,  20  etc.;  Nett.  7,  15  sq  ;  191. 
-obhasa  the  lustre  of  wisdom  Ps  1.119  ;  Dhs  16,  20  etc. 
-kkhandha  the  Code  of  cognition  (see  above)  Vin  1.62  ; 
D  in. 229,  279  ;  It  51  ;  Nd'  2  i  :  Nett  70,  90,  128.  It  is 
always  comb''  with  sila"  &  samadhi-kkhandha.  -cakkhu 
the  eye  of  wisdom  (one  of  the  5  kinds  of  extraordinary 
sight  of  a  Buddha;  see  under  cakkhumant)  D  111.219  : 
S  v. 467  ;  It  52  ;  Nd*  354  ;  Nd-  235.     -dada  giving  or 


Pannana 


13 


Pati 


bestowing  wisdom  S  1.33  ;  Sn  177.  -dhana  the  treasure 
of  perfect  knowledge  (one  of  the  7  treasures,  see  dhana) 
D  III.  163,  251  ;  A  111.53;  V^'A.  113.  -nirodhika  tending 
to  the  destruction  of  reason  S  v.97 ;  It  82.  -patilabha 
acquisition  of  wisdom  S  v. 411;  A  1.45;  Ps  ii.iSg. 
-pasada  the  stronghold  of  supreme  knowledge  Dh  28 
(  =dibba-cakkhug  sankhjitar)  "g).  -bala  the  power  of 
reason  or  insight,  one  of  the  5  powers  D  111.229,  253  ; 
M  III. 72  ;  A  IV. 363  ;  Sn  212;  Dhs  16,  20  etc.  ;  Nett  54, 
191  ;  VvA  7.  -bahulla  wealth  or  plenty  of  wisdom 
S  V.41 1  ;  A  1.45.  -bhiimi  ground  or  stage  of  wisdom  ;  a 
name  given  to  the  Paticca-samuppada  by  Bdhgh  at 
Vism  xvii,  pp.  517  sq.  ("niddesa).  -ratana  the  gem  of 
reason  or  knowledge  Dhs  16,  20  etc.  -vimutta  freed 
by  reason  D  11.70;  in. 105,  254;  M  1.35,  477;  A  1.61  ; 
II. 6  ;  IV. 452  ;  Sn  847;  Nd'  207;  Kvu  58;  Nett  igg. 
-vimutti  emancipation  through  insight  or  knowledge 
(always  paired  with  ceto-vimutti)  D  1.156,  167;  in. 78, 
102,  108,  132,  281  ;  It  75,  gi  ;  Sn  725,  727;  Nett  7,  40, 
81,  127;  DA  1. 313;  VbhA  464.  -visuddhi  purity  of 
insight  D  in. 288.  -vuddhi  increase  of  knowledge  S 
v.97,  4'  I  ;  A  1.15,  45  ;  11.245.  -sampada  the  blessing  of 
higher  knowledge  (see  above)  A  i.bj  ;  11.66;  in. 12  sq., 
182  sq.  ;  IV. 284,  322.  -sila  conduct  and  (higher)  in- 
telligence Dh  229  (°samahita  =  lokuttarapannaya  c'  eva 
parisuddhisilena  ca  samannagata  DhA  in. 329) ;  Vv 
34^^  id.  =ariyaya  ditthiya  ariyena  silena  ca  samannagata 
VvA  155).  Often  used  with  yathabhutar)  q.  v.  Cp. 
paniiaya. 

Pannana  (nt.)  [pa+iiana,  cp.  Vedic  prajiiano  in  both 
meanings  &  paiina]  i.  wisdom,  knowledge,  intelligence 
D  1. 124  (sila+ ) ;  S  1.41  ;  A  iv.342  ;  Sn  96,  1136;  DA 
1. 171,  290,  —  2.  mark,  sign,  token  J  v.195. 

Pannana vant  (adj.)  [paii!iana+ vant]  reasonable,  sensible, 
wise  Sn  202,  1090  ;  J  v. 222  ;  vi.36i  ;  Nd^  382. 

Pannata  [pp.  of  pajanati]  known,  renowned  DA  M43; 
ap"  unknown,  defamed  Vin  iv.23r  ;  S  iv.46  ;  A  in. 134 
(where  also  der.  appaiinatika). 

Pannapaka  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  pafinapeti]  one  who  advises, 
assigns  or  appoints  Vin  11.305  (asana°). 

Pannapana  (nt.)  [fr.  paiinapeti]  disclosure,  discovering 
M  111.1-;  S  in.59  ;  declaration  DhsA  11. 

Pannapetar  [n.  ag.  of  pannapeti]  one  who  imparts  know- 
ledge, discloser  of  truths,  discoverer  D  11.223. 

Pannapeti  [Caus.  of  pajanati]  i.  to  make  known,  declare, 
point  out,  appoint,  a.ssign,  recognise,  define  D  l.iig 
(brahmana  brahmanar)),  180,  185,  237;  It  98  (tevijjai) 
brahmanar)).  Pug  37,  38  ;  PvA  61  (asanai)).  —  2.  to  lay 
down,  fold  out,  spread  PvA  43  (sanghatii)).  —  pp. 
parifiatta  (q.  v.).  — Caus.  II.  panriapapeti  J  in. 371. 

Pannaya  (indecl.)  [ger.  of  pajanati,  in  relation  °naya : 
natva  as  utthaya  :  thatva  ;  socxpl"!  b\-  P.  Commentators, 
whereas  modern  interpreters  have  taken  it  as  instr.  of 
pafifia]  understanding  fully,  knowing  well,  realising,  in 
full  recognition,  in  thorough  realisation  or  understand- 
ing. Used  most  frequently  with  yathabhutaij  (q.  v.) 
S  1. 1 3  (bhaveti),  44  (lokasniiii  pajjoto),  214  (parisuj- 
jhati)  ;  11.7  sq.  (uppajjati),  68  (suppatividdho)  ;  in. 6 
(id.);  V.324  (ajjhupckkhati)  ;  A  1.125  (anuggahissati) ; 
III. 44  (vac^dhati);  iv.13  sq.  (pariyogahamana) ;  v. 39 
(disva)  Sn  1035  (see  Nd^  380")  ;  It  93  (moh'aggirj,  v.  I. 
safmaya)  ;  PvA  60  (upaparikkhitva,  as  expl"  of  iiatva), 
140=  viceyya. 

Pannayati  [Pass,  of  pajanati]  to  be  (well)  known,  to  be 
clear  or  evident,  to  be  perceived,  seen  or  taken  for.  to 
appear  It  89  ;  Dh,\  1,14,  95  (fut  paiiiiayissatha  you  will 
be  well  known):  n.75;  PvA  S3  (pAlito  eva),  166  (dis- 
sati-l- ) ;  ppr.  pafiiiayamana  DhA  1.29  ;  PvA  96  (=per- 
ceivable).  — aor.  paiinayi  PvA  172  (paccakkhato). 


Panha  [V'ed.  praiua,  for  details  of  etyni.  see  pucchati] 
mode  of  asking,  inquiry,  investigation,  question  D  i.ii 
(deva°)  M  1.83;  ni.30  ;  A  1.103,  288;  in. 81,  191  sq., 
419  sq.  ;  V.50  sq.  ;  Sn  512,  957,  1005.  1024,  1148  etc., 
Nd'  464  ;  Miln  28,  340  ;  DA  1.97.  paiihar)  pucchati  to 
ask  a  question  Nd^  under  puccha  (q.  v.). 

-patibhana  an  answer  to  a  question  M  1.83  ;  Miln  28. 
-vimagsaka  one  who  tests  a  question  Sn  827  ;  Nd'  166  ; 
SnA  538.  -vyakarana  mode  of  answering  questions,  of 
which  there  are  4,  viz.  ekagsa  "  direct,"  vibhajja 
"  qualified."  patipuccha  "  after  further  questioning," 
thapaniya  "  not  to  be  answered  or  left  undecided,"  thus 
enum''  at  D  in. 229  ;  A  1.197  ^1-  '•  "-46  ;  Mil"  339- 

Pata  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  pata,  etym.  unknown,  prob.  dialec- 
tical] cloth;  cloak,  garment  S  11. 2  19  ("pilotika)  ;  Th  i, 
1092  (bhinna-patan-dhara  "  wearing  the  patchwork 
cloak"  trsl);  J  iv.494  ;  KhA  45,  58  (°tantu)  ;  DA  1.198: 
DhA  11.45  (puppha") ;  in. 295  "kaiicuka,  v.  1.  katak") ; 
Vism  16  (bhinna-pata-dhara  in  def  of  bhikkhu)  ;  VbhA 
327  (id.)  ;  DhsA  8 1  (pata-pata  sadda) ;  VvA  73,  201; 
PvA  185.     Cp.  patika  &  patalika  ;  also  kappata. 

Pataggi  [pati4-aggi]  counter-fire  Vin  11.138;  J  1.212; 
kacc.  31. 

Patanga  [cp.  *Sk.  phadinga,  but  influenced  by  Sk.  pataga 
a  winged  animal,  bird]  a  grasshopper  Sn  602  ;  J  vi.234, 
50b  ;  Miln  272,  407  ;  DhA  iv.58  ;  PvA  67  ;  Pgdp  59. 

Pataccarin  (adj.)  [pata-l-carin  but  cp.  Sk.  pataccara  a 
shoplifter  Halajudha  2,  185]  poor  (lit.  dressed  in  old 
clothes) :  so  read  perhaps  at  J  vi.227  (vv.  11  pajaccari  & 
paticcari). 

Patala  (nt.)  [connected  with  pata,  cp.  Sk.  patala  in 
meaning  "  section  "  Vedic,  in  all  other  meanings  later 
Sk.l  I.  a  covering,  membrane,  lining,  envelope,  skin, 
film  Vism  257  (mar|sa°  of  the  liver,  where  Kh.\  54  reads 
magsa-pinda),  359  (phana') ;  DhsA  307  (7  akkhi"  mem- 
branes of  the  eye) ;  KhA  21  (samuppatana),  55  (udara° 
mucous  membrane  of  the  stomach),  61  (id.)  ;  DhsA  330 
(id.);  Sn.\  248  (id.);  Pv.\  186  (eka°  upahana,  single- 
lined,  cp.  patalika  &  palasika  cS:  see  Morris  J .P.T-S.  i8S-j, 
165);  Vism  446  (kappasa"  film  of  cotton  seed);  Bdhd 
66  (id.).  —  2.  roof,  ceiling  Pv.\  52  (ayo°  of  iron). — 
3.  a  heap,  mass  (esp.  of  clouds)  J  1.73  (megha")  ;  DhsA 
239  (abbha").  — madhu"  honey  comb  J  1.262  ;  DhA 
1.59  ;  III. 323.  —  4.  cataract  of  the  eye  Davs  v.27. 

Patalika  (adj.)  [fr.  patala]  belonging  to  a  cover  or  lining, 
having  or  forming  a  cover  or  lining,  as  adj.  said  of 
sandals  (eka°  with  single  lining)  J  11.277  (v-  '■  for  eka- 
talika)  ;  111.80,  81  (id.).  —  as  n.  f.  patalika  a  woven 
cloth,  a  woollen  coverlet  (embroidered  with  flowers), 
usually  comb'  with  patika  Vin  1.192  ;  n.162;  D  1.7 
( =  ghana-puppho  unnamayo  attharako.  So  amilaka- 
patto  ti  pi  vuccati  DA  1.87) ;  A  1.137,  181  ;  in. 50,  iv.94, 
231.  394- 

Pataha  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  pataha,  dial.]  a  kettle-drum,  war 
drum,  one  of  the  2  kinds  of  drums  (bheri)  mentioned  at 
DhsA  319.  viz.  maha-bheri  &  p. -bheri ;  J  1.355;  Dpvs 
16,  14  ;  PvA  4. 

Pataka  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  pataka.  connected  with  pata]  a  flag 
M  1.379  ;  Miln  87  ;  Vism  469  ;  ThA  70. 

Patani  at  Vin  iv.46  (patani  dinna  hoti)  is  not  clear,  it  is 
e.xpl''  by  Bdhgh  as  "  mancapidhanaij  (for  "pithanai)) 
padasikhasu  aiii  dinno  hoti."  At  DA  1.77  wc  find  the 
foil.  :  "  visukar)  patani  (sic.)  -bhiitai)  dassanan  ti  visuka- 
dassanar),"  and  at  DhsA  393  :  "  patani-gahaijai)  gahetva 
ekapaden'  eva  tai)  nissaddar)  akasig." 

Pati  (indecl.)  [Ven.  prati,  to  Idg.  *preti  as  in  Lat.  pre- 
tium  (fr.  *pretios)  "  price  "  (cp.  precious),  i.  e.  equiva- 
lent ;     Gr.    Trpii  (aeol),  irpori,  trpis  against]    directional 


Pati-aneti 


14 


Patikujjati 


prefix  in  well-defined  meaning  of  "  back  (to),  against, 
towards,  in  opposition  to,  opposite."  As  preposition 
(with  ace.  and  usually  postponed)  towards,  near  by,  at ; 
usually  spelt  pati  (cp.  sampati  &  sampatika)  Sn  291 
(.'),  425  (Neranjaram  (pati)  ;  Th  i,  628  (suriyass'  ugga- 
manam  p.);  2,  258  (abhiyobbanam  p.),  306  (Neran- 
jaram p.) ;  J  1.457  (pati  suriyar)  thatva  standing  facing 
the  sufi) ;  iv.g3  ;  vi.491  ;  Pv  11. 9*'  (suriy'  uggamanam 
p.) ;  Miln  1 16  (danam  p.) ;  PvA  154  (pati  Gangat)  against 
the  G.). — Most  freq.  comb"'  are:  pati-(-a  (patiya°), 
patisai)"  ;  vi-)-pati°,  sampaji".  The  composition  (as- 
similation-) form  before  vowels  is  pace"  (b.  v.). — Mean- 
ings. I.  (lit.)  "  back,"  in  the  sense  of:  (i)  against,  in 
opposition  (opp.  anu,  see  below  III.),  contrary :  viz. 
(a)  often  with  the  implication  of  a  hostile  attack  (anti-. 
against) :  "kantaka,  °kosati  (re-ject),  °kula,  "khipati 
(re-fuse,  op-pose),  °gha,  "codeti  (re-prove),  thambhati, 
°disa,  "deseti,  "pakkha,  °patha,  "pigsati,  "pljita,  °niagga, 
°manteti,  "yodha  (at-tack),  °vacana  (re-ply),  °vadati, 
"vedeti,  "sattu  (enemy),  "sunati,  °hata ;  —  (b)  warding 
ofi,  protecting  against  (counter-,  anti-) :  °kara  (anti- 
dote), "sedhati  (ward-ofi).  —  (c)  putting  against,  setting 
ofi  in  a  comparison  (counter-,  rival) :  "puggala  (one's 
equal),  "purisa  (rival),  °bala  (adequate),  "bimba 
(counterpart),  "bhaga  (id.)  ;  °malla  (rival  wrestler), 
°sama,  "sasana,  °sura,  "settha ;  —  (d)  close  contact 
(against,  be-)  :  "kujjita  (covered),  °gadha,  "channa 
("  be-deckt  ")  "vijjhana.  —  (2)  in  return,  in  exchange 
(in  revenge)  "akkosati,  "aneti,  "katheti,  "karoti,  "kuta^, 
"kkamati,  "khamapeti,  °gati  (sing  in  response),  "gita, 
°dai)da  (retribution),  "dadati,  °dana,  "nivasana,  "parina 
(in  reply),  "pasagsati,  "pinda,  "pucchati  (ask  in  return), 
"mareti  (kill  in  revenge),  "bhanda  (goods  in  exchange), 
°bhan(Jati  (abuse  in  return)  "rodana,  °roseti,  "vera 
(revenge),  "sammodeti,  ^satheyya.  —  (3)  (temporal) 
again,  a  second  time  (re-) :  "dasseti  (re-appear),  °nij- 
jhatta,  °nivattati,  "pavesati,  "pakatika  (re-stored), 
"bujjhati,  "vinicchinati,  "saiijivita  (re-suscitated). 
"sandhi  (re-incarnation),  "sammajjati. —  (4)  away  from, 
back  to  (esp.  in  comp"  pativi°) :  °kutati  (shrink  back), 
°ghata  (repulsion),  "dhavati,  °neti,  "panameti  (send 
away),  "bandhati  (hold  back),  °bahati  (id.),  "vijacchati, 
"vineti,  "vinodeti  (drive  out),  "virata,  °sat)harati,  °sal- 
lina,  °sutta,  "sumbhita.  • —  II.  (applied,  in  reflexive 
sense) :  (i)  to,  on  to,  up  to.  towards,  at- :  "olok-eti  (look 
at),  "gijjha  (hankering  after)  °ggaha,  °janati  "pujeti, 
"peseti  (send  out  to),  "baddha  (bound  to),  °bhaya, 
"yatta,  °rupa,  "laddha,  "labhati  (at.-tain),  "labha, 
"lobheti,  "sameti,  °sevati  (go  after),  "ssata.  (2)  to- 
gether (con-,  com-),  esp.  comb"!  with  °sai)°  ;  "sagyujati ; 
"passaddha,  "mandita,  "sankharoti,  "santhara.  —  (3) 
asunder,  apart  ("  up ") :  "kopeti  (shake  up),  °vir)sa 
(part),  "vibhatta  (divided  up).  (4)  secondary,  com- 
plementary, by-,  sham  (developed  out  of  meaning  I. 
I  c.)  :  °nasika  (a  false  nose),  "sisaka  (sham  top  knot)  : 
esp.  freq.  in  redupl.  (iterative)  cpds.,  like  anga-paccanga 
(limb  &  by-limb,  i.  e.  all  kinds  of  limbs),  vata-palivatta 
(duties  &  secondary  duties,  all  duties).  In  the  latter 
application  pati  resembles  the  use  of  a,  which  is  more 
frequent  (see  a°).  —  III.  The  opposite  of  pati  in  direc- 
tional meaning  is  anu,  with  which  it  is  freq.  comb"* 
either  (a)  in  neg.  contrast  or  (b)  in  positive  emphasis, 
e,  g.  (a)  anuvatar)  pativatar)  with  and  against  the  wind  ; 
anuloma-l- patiloraa  with  and  against  the  grain  ;  °sotar| 
w.  &  against  the  stream  ;  (b)  anumasati  patimasati  to 
touch  cloesly  (lit.  up  &  down).  —  Note.  The  spelling 
pati  for  pati  occurs  frequently  without  discrimination  ; 
it  is  established  in  the  comb"  with  stha  (as  patitthati, 
patitthita  etc.).  All  cases  are  enum'  under  the  respec- 
tive form  of  pati",  with  the  exception  of  patitth". 

Pati-aneti  [pati -t- a -ml]  to  lead  or  bring  back,  in  dup- 
pati-anaya  difficult  to  bring  back  J  iv.43. 

Pati-orohati  [pati-t-ava-i-ruh]  to  descend  from  DA  1.25 1 
('itva). 


Patikankhati  [pati-t-kanks]  to  wash  for,  long  for  S  1.227. 
adj.  'kankhin  M  1.2 1.     See  also  patikankhin. 

Patikacca  (indecl.)  [so  read  for  "gacca  as  given  at  all 
passages  mentioned,  see  Trenckner  Miln  p.  421,  & 
Geiger  Pr.  §  38'. — ger.  fr.  patikaroti  (q.v.),  cp.  Sk. 
pratlkara  in  same  meaning  "  caution,  remedy  "]  i.  pre- 
viously (lit.  as  cautioned)  Vin  iv.44  ;  Miln  48  (v.  I. 
°kacca)  usually  as  patigacc'  eva,  e.g.Vin  i  .342  ;  D  ii.i  18. 
—  (2I  providing  for  (the  future),  preparing  for,  with 
caution,  cautiously  Vin  n.256  ;  S  1.57  ;  v.  162  ;  A  11.25  i 
D  II. 144  ;  Th  I,  547  ;  J  in. 208  ;  iv.166  (in  expl"  of  pati- 
kata  &  patikaroti) ;  v. 235. 

Patikaptaka  [pati-l-kantaka^]  an  enemy,  adversary, 
robber,  highwayman  J  1.186;  11.239;  DhA  111.45O  (v.  1. 
"karidaka). 

Pa^ikata  [pp  of  patikaroti]  "  done  against,"  i.  e.  provided 
or  guarded  against  J  iv.166. 

Patikatheti  [pati-i-katheti]  to  answer,  reply  J  vi.224  ; 
DA  1.263. 

Palikampati  [pati-l-kampati]  to  shake;  pret.  paccakam- 
pittha  J  V.340 

Patikamma  (nt.)  [pati-l-kamma,  cp.  patikaroti]  redress, 
atonement  A  1.2  i  (sa°  &  a'  apatti)  Miln  28  ;  DA  1.96. 

Patikara  [fr.  pati-l-kr]  counteracting;  requital,  compensa- 
tion Vin  IV.21S  (a°) ;  D  1.137  (ovada°  giving  advice  or 
providing  for  '  v.  1.  pari") ;  111,154. 

Patikaroti  [pati-l- karoti)  i.  to  redress,  repair,  make 
amends  for  a  sin.  expiate  (apatti]g)  Vin  1.98,  164  ;  n.259  ; 
IV.19  ;  S  11.128  =  205  ;  A.  v. 324  ;  DhA  1.54.  —  2.  to  act 
against,  provide  for,  beware,  be  cautious  J  iv.  166. — 
3.  to  imitate  J  11.406.  —  ger.  patikacca  (q.  v.).  —  pp. 
patikata  (q.  v.). 

Patikassaua  (nt.)  [pati-l-k|rs]  drawing  back,  in  phrase 
mOlaya  p.  "  throwing  back  to  the  beginning,  causing  to 
begin  over  &  over  again  "  Vin  11. 7,  162  ;  A  1.99. 

Patikassati  [pati-l-kassati]  to  draw  back,  remove,  throw 
back  Vin  1.320  (mulaya) ;  11. 7  (id.). 

Patika  (f)  [Sk.  patika  dial.  fr.  pata  cloth]  a  (white) 
woollen  cloth  (  :  unnamayo  set'  attharako  DA  1.86) 
D  1.7  ;  A  1. 137,  181  ;  ni.50  ;  iv.94,  231,  394  ;  Davs  v.36. 
See  also  patiya. 

Patikara  [pati-t-ky]  counteraction,  remedy,  requital  Sdhp 
201,  498;  usually  neg.  app°  adj.  not  making  good  or 
which  cannot  be  made  good,  which  cannot  be  helped 
Vin  1V.218  (  =  anosarita  p.  219);  PvA  274  (marana) 
Cp.  foil. 

Patikarika  (adj.)  [fr.  preceding]  of  the  nature  of  an  amend- 
ment ;  app°  not  making  amends,  not  making  good 
J  V.418. 

Patikittha  inferior,  low,  vile  A  1.286=  Dh  1. 144  ;  in  meaning 
"  miserable  "  at  DhA  11.3  is  perhaps  better  to  be  read 
with  V.  1.  as  pakkilittha,  or  should  it  be  patikuttha  ? 

Patikibbisa  (nt.)  [pati -1- kibbisa]  wrong  doing  in  return, 
retaliation  J  111.135. 

Patikirati  [pati+kirati]  to  strew  about,  to  sprawl  Pv 
iv.iqS  (uttana  patikirama=  vikiriyaman'anga  viya 
vattama  PvA  271). 

Patikilittha  (adj.)  [pati-l-kihttha]  very  miserable  PvA  268 
(v.  1.) ;  and  perhaps  at  DhA  11. 3  for  patikittha  (q.  v.). 

Patikujjati  [pati -I- kubj,  see  kujja  &  cp.patikutati]  to  bend 
over,  in  or  against,  to  cover  over,  to  enclose  D  11.162  ; 
M  1.30  ;  A  III. 58.  Caus.  °eti  J  1.50;  69.  —  pp.  pati- 
kujjati (q.  v.). 


Patikujjaoa 


15 


Patigganhati 


Patikuiianik  (nt.)  [fr.  pati+kabj]  covering,  in  °phalaka 
covering  board,  seat  KhA  62  (vacca-kuJiyS). 

Patikajjita  [pp-  of  patikujjeti]  covered  over,  enclosed 
A  1. 14 1  ;  Th  I,  681  ;  J  1.50,  69  ;  v.266  ;  Pv  i.io'*  (=upari 
pidahita  PvA  52):  DhsA  349. 

Pa^ajjhati  [pati+kmdh]  to  be  angry  in  return  S  1.162  = 
Th  I,  442. 

Patikatati  [pati+kat  as  in  kutila,  cp.  knc  &  patikujjati] 
to  turn  in  or  over,  to  bend,  cramp  or  get  cramped  ;  fig. 
to  shrink  from,  to  refuse  A  iv.47  sq.  (v.  1.  °kujjati) : 
Miln  297  (pati°  ;  cp.  Miln  trsl°  11. 156);  Vism  347  (v.  1. 
BB;  T.  °kuttati) ;  DhA  1.71  ;  11.42.  — Cans,  patikotteti 
(q.  v.).  —  pp.  patikutita  (q.  v.).     See  also  patiliyati. 

Pa(ikatita  [pp.  of  patikutati]  bent  back,  turned  over  (?) 
Vin  n.195  (reading  uncertain,  vv.  U.  patikuttiya  & 
patikutiya). 

Patikattha  [pp.  of  pati+kros.  see  patikkosati  &  cp.  BSk. 
pratikrusta  poor  Divy  500]  scolded,  scorned,  defamed, 
blameworthy,  miserable,  vile  Vin  1.317;  PvA  268  (v.  1. 
patikUittha) ;  as  neg.  app°  blameless,  faultless  S  111.71- 
73  ;  A  IV. 246  ;  Kvu  141.  341.     See  also  patikitfha. 

Patikiudka  (adj.)  [for  °kutita  ?]  bent,  crooked  PvA  123 
(v   1.  kunita  &  kundita). 

Patika9(hita  [cp.  kunthita]  =  parigunthita  (q.  v.) ;  covered, 
surrounded  J  vi.89. 

Patiknttaka  [or  uncertain  etym.  ;  pati+kuttaka  ?]  a  sort 
of  bird  J  VI. 538. 

Patiknbbara  [pati+kubbara]  the  part  of  the  carriage-pole 
nearest  to  the  horse(  ? )  A  i v.  1 9 1 . 

Pa(ikalyata  (f)  [fr.  patikula,  perhaps  better  to  write  patik- 
kulyata]  reluctance,  loathsomeness  M  1.30  ;  A  v. 64. 
Other  forms  are  patikulata,  patikkulyata,  &  patikulya 
(q.  v.). 

Patikiita  (nt.)  [pati  +  kuta']  cheating  in  return  J  11. 183. 

Patikulata  (f)  [fr.  patikkula]  disgustiveness  Vism  343  sq. 

Pa^ikelana  see  parikejana ;  i.  e.  counter-playing  Dh  1.286. 

Patikotteti  [pati-t-  kotteti  as  Caus.  of  kutati]  to  bend  away, 
to  make  refrain  from  M  1.115:  S  11.265  (<^P-  'd.  p.  A 
IV.47  with  trs.  "kutati  &  v.  1.  "kujjati  which  may  be  a 
legitimate  variant).     The  T.  prints  pati". 

Patikopeti  [pati-l-kopeti]  to  shake,  disturb,  break  (fig) 
J  V.I  73  (uposathari). 

Patikkanta  [pp.  of  patikkamati]  gone  back  from  (-°), 
returned  (opp.  abhi°)  D  1.70  (abhikkanta-l- )  :  A  11.104, 
106  sq.,  210;  Pv  iv.i'3  (cp.  PvA  240);  DA  1.183  (=ni- 
vattana) ;  VvA  6  (opp.  abhi°)  PvA  1 1  (pindapata"),  16 
(id.).  For  opp.  of  patikkanta  in  conn,  with  pindaya 
see  pavittha. 

Patikkantaka  [fr.  last]  one  who  has  come  or  is  coming 
back  DhA  1.307. 

Patikkama  [fr.  pati-t-kram]  going  back  Pv  IV.  1^  (abhik- 
kama-f  "  going  forward  and  backward  "  ;  cp.  PvA  219). 

Patikkamati  [pati-l-kram]  to  step  backwards,  to  return 
(opp.  abhi°)  Vin  11.  no,  208;  M  1.78;  S  i.2fi),  226; 
11.282;  Sn  388  (ger.  °kkamma=  nivattitva  SnA  374): 
SnA  53.  —  Caus.  patikkamapeti  to  cause  to  retreat 
J  1. 214  Miln  121.  —  pp.  patikkanta  (q.  v.). 

Patikkamana  (nt.)  [fr.  patikkamati]  returning,  retiring, 
going  back  Dh  1.95  ;  in  °sala  meaning  "  a  hall  with 
seats  of  distinction  "  SnA  53. 


Patikkala  (adj.)  [pati-t- kola]  lit.  against  the  slope  ;  averse 
objectionable,  contrary,  disagreeable  Vin  1.58  (°kula) 
D  HI. 112,  1 13;  M  1. 341  (dukkha");  S  iv.172  (id) 
J  1.393  ;  VvA  92  (K.) :  PvA  77  ;  VbhA  250  sq.  —  app" 
without  objection,  pleasant,  agreeable  Vv  53^  (K.); 
Vism  70  (k).  —  nt.  °r)  loathsomeness,  impurity  VvA 
232.     See  also  abstr.  patikkulyata  (pati°). 

-gahita  as  neg.  a°  "  refraining  from  contradiction  " 
(Dhs  trsl')  Pug  24  (k);  Dhs  1327  (k.).  -manasikara 
realisation  of  the  impurity  of  the  body  DhA  11.87 
(°kkula)  ;  VbhA  251.  -saiiiia  (Share)  the  consciousness  of 
the  impurity  of  material  food  D  111.289.  291  ;  S  v.132  ; 
A  IV, 49  ;  adj.  "sanfiin  S  1.227  ;  v.  11 9,  317  ;  A  111.169. 

Patikkosati  [pati-l-krus]  to  blame,  reject,  revile,  scorn 
Vin  1. 115;  11.93;  M  III. 29  ;  D  1.53  (=patibahati  DA 
1. 160);  S  IV.  1 18  (-l-apavadati);  Sn  878;  Dh  164  ;  J 
iv.i63;  Miln  131.  256;  DhA  in. 194  (opp.  abhinandati). 
—  pp.  patikuttha  (q.  v.). 

Patikkosana  (nt.)  &  "a  (f.)  [fr.  patikkosati]  protest  Vin 

1. 321  ;  II. 102  (a°). 

Patikkhati  [pati+  iks]  to  look  forward  to,  to  expect  Sn  697 
(patikkhai)  sic  ppr.  =  agamayana  SnA  490). 

Patikkhitta  [pp  of  patikkhipati]  refused,  rejected  D  1. 142  ; 
M  1.78,  93  ;  A  1.296  ;  11.206  ;  J  11.436  ;  Nett  161,  185  sq.  ; 
DhA  11.71. 

Patikkhipati  [pati-l- khipati]  to  reject,  refuse,  object  to, 
oppose  J  1.67  ;  IV.  105  ;  Miln  295  ;  DA  1.291"  ;  DhA  1.45  ; 
11.75;  PvA  73,  114,  151,  214  (aor.  ''khipi=  varesi). 
— appatikkhippa  (grd.)  not  to  be  rejected  J  11.370.  — 
Contrasted  to  samadiyati  Vism  62,  64  &  passim. 

Patikkhepa  ^fr.  pati-t- ksip]  opposition,  negation,  contrary 
SnA  228  for  "  na"),'302  ;  PvA  189  ("vacana  the  opp. 
expression).  °to  (abl.)  in  opposition  or  contrast  to 
PvA  24. 

Patikhamapita  [pp.  of  pati-t-  khamapeti.Caus.  of  khamati] 
forgiven  DhA  11.78. 

Pati^acca  see  patikacca. 

Patigacchati  to  give  up,  leave  behind  J  iv.482  (gehag) ;  cp. 
paccagu. 

Patigandhiya  only  as  neg.  appati°  (q.  v.). 

PatUatha  (f)  [pati-t- gatha]  counter-stanza,  response 
SnA  340.     Cp.  paccanlkagatha. 

Patigadha  [pati-fgadha^]  a  firm  stand  or  foothold  A 
III. 297  sq.  ;  Pug  72  =  Kvu  389. 

Patigayati  (°gati)  [pati-t-  gayati]  to  sing  in  response,  to  reply 
by  a  song  J  iv.395  (imper.  °gahi). 

Patigijjha  (adj.)  [pati-t- gijjha.  a  doublet  of  giddha,  see 
gijjha^J  greedy ;  hankering  after  Sn  675  (SnA  482  reads 
"giddha  and  expl"^  by  mahagijjha). 

Patigita  (nt.)  [pati-l-  gita]  a  song  in  response,  counter  song 
J  1V.393- 

Patignhati  ("guhati)  [pati-l- guhati]  to  concert,  keep  back 

Cp.  i.g'S. 

Patiggaflhanaka  (adj.-n.)  [pafigganhana  (=patiggahaua) 
-I- ka    receiving,  receiver  PvA   175. 

Patigganhati  (patiganhati)  [pafi-t-gaijhati]  to  receive, 
accept,  take  (up)  D  i.iio  (vatthag),  142;  Vin  i.2f)0  ; 
II. 109,  116  (a  sewing-needle);  S  iv.326  (jatarupa-raja- 
tar)) ;  Sn  479,  689,  690  ;  Dh  220  ;  J  1.56,  65  ;  DA  1.236  ; 
PvA  47.  In  special  phrase  accayar)  patigganhati  to 
accept  (the  confession  of)  a  sin,  to  pardon  a  sin  Vin 
11.192;  D  1.85;  M  1.438:  J  V.379.  —  pp.  patiggahiU 
(q.  v.). —Caus.  °ggaheti  Vin  11. 2  13;  M  1.32. 


Patiggaha 


i6 


Paticca- samu  ppada 


PatiSgaha  [fr.  patigganhati]  i.  receiving,  acceptance;  one 
who  receives,  recipient  J.1.146;  11. 9  ;  vi.474;  Pv  iii.i^'. 
—  2.  friendly  reception  J  vi.526.  —  3.  receptacle  (for 
water  etc.)  Vin  11. 11 5,  213  (udaka").  —  4.  a  thimble 
Vin  II.  1 16. 

Patiggaha^a  (nt.)  [fr.  patigganhati]  acceptance,  receiving, 
taking  M  111.34  ;  S  v. 472  ;  SnA  34 1.  — accaya"  accept 
ance  of  a  sin,  i.  e.  pardon,  absolution  J  v.380. 

Patiggahita  [pp-  of  patigganhati]  received,  got,  accepted, 
appropriated,  taken  Vin  1.206,  214;  J  vi.231.  —  As 
appatiggahitaka  (nt.)  "  that  which  is  not  received  "  at 
\'in  IV. 90. 

Patiggahitar  [n.  ag.  of  patigganhati]  one  who  receives, 
recipient  D  i.8g. 

Patiggaha  see  patitthaha. 

Patiggahaka  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  patigganhati]  receiving,  accept- 
ing; one  who  receives,  recipient  Vin  11. 213;  D  1.138; 
A  1. 161  ;  11.80  sq.  ;  111.42,  336  ;  J  1.56  ;  PvA  7,  128,  175 
(opp.  dayaka) ;  VvA  195  ;  Sdhp  268. 

PatiggahaQa  (nt.)  [fr.  patigganhati]  reception,  taking  in 
J  VI. 52  7. 

Patigha  (m.  &  nt.)  [pati+gha,  adj.  suffix  of  ghan=haii, 
lit.  striking  against]  i.  (ethically)  repulsion,  repugnance, 
anger  D  1.25,  34;  111.254,  -8-:  S  1.13;  iv.71,  195,  205, 
208  sq.  ;  V.315  ;  A  1.3,  87,  200  ;  Sn  371,  536  ;  Dhs  1060  ; 
Miln  44;  DA  1.22.  —  2.  (psychologically)  sensory  re- 
action D  111.224,  253,  262;  S  1. 165,  186;  A  1. 41,  267; 
II. 184  ;  Dhs  265,  501,  513,  579  ;  VbhA  19.  See  on  term 
Dhs  trsl"  72,  204,  276  and  passim.  — -appatigha  see 
separately  s.  v.  Note.  How  shall  we  read  pafighattha 
nanigharjso  at  DhsA  308  ?  (patigha-tthana-nighagso, 
or  patighattana-nigharjso  ?) 

Patighavant  (adj.)  [fr.  pafigha]  full  of  repugnance,  showing 
anger  S  iv.208,  209. 

Patigbata  [pati-l-ghata,  of  same  root  as  patigha]  i.  (lit.) 
warding  off,  staying,  repulsion,  beating  off  D  in.  130; 
M  1. 10;  A  1.98;  IV.  106  sq.  ;  J  1.344;  Vism  31  (  =  pati- 
hanana) ;  Miln  121;  DhA  11. 8;  PvA  33.  —  2.  (psych.) 
resentment  Dhs  106(1,  cp.  Dhs  trsl.  282. 

Patighosa  [pati-l-ghosa]  echo  Vism  554. 

Paticamma  in  "gatag  sallai)  at  J  vi.78  to  be  expl"'  not  with 
C.  as  from  pati-(- camati  (cam  to  wash.  cp.  acamati), 
which  does  not  agree  with  the  actual  meaning,  but 
according  to  Kern,  Toev.  11.29,  s.  v.  as  elliptical  for 
patibhinna-camma,  i.  e.  piercing  the  skin  so  as  to  go 
right  through  (to  the  opp.  side)  which  falls  in  with  the 
C.  expl"  "  vamapassena  pavisitva  dakkhinapassena 
viniggatan  ti." 

Paticaya  &  (paticcaya)  [pati-)-caya]  adding  to,  heaping 
up,  accumulation,  increase  Vin  11.74;  I'i-t5**  (pati')  ; 
S  111.169  ;  A  III. 376  sq.  (v.  I.  pati°) ;  iv.355  ;  v. 336  sq.  ; 
Th  I,  642  ;  Ud  35  (pati°);  Miln  138. 

Paticarati  [pati-l-carati)  i.  to  wander  about,  to  deal  with 
Miln  94.  —  2.  to  go  about  or  evade  (a  question),  to 
obscure  a  matter  of  discussion,  in  phrase  afiiiena  afifiar) 
p.  "  to  be  saved  by  another  in  another  way,"  or  to  from 
one  (thing)  to  another,  i.  e.  to  receive  a  diff,  answer  to 
what  is  asked  D  1.94  ;  Vin  iv.35  ;  M  1.96,  250,  442  ; 
A  IV.  168  (v.  1.  pativadati)  ;  expH  at  DA  1.264  by  ajjhot- 
tharati  paticchadeti  "  to  cover  over,"  i.  e.  to  conceal 
(a  question).     See  on  expression  Dialogues  1.116. 

Paticaleti  [Caus.  of  paticalati]  to  nudge  J  v.434. 

Paticara  [fr.  pati-t-car]  intercourse,  visit,  dealing  with  Miln 
94- 


fr.  paticodeti]  rebuking,  scolding 


Paticodana  (nt.)  [abstr. 

(back)  DhsA  393. 

Paticodeti  [pati-l- codeti]  to  blame,  reprove  M  1.72;  Vin 
IV. 217  ;  Ud  45. 

Paticca  [ger.  of  pacceti,  pati-l- i;  cp.  BSk.  pratitya] 
grounded  on,  on  account  of,  concerning,  because  (with 
ace.)  M  1.265  (etar)  on  these  grounds);  S  iil.93  =  It  89 
(atthavasar))  ;  J  11.386  (=  abhisandhaya)  ;  Sn  680,  784, 
872,  1046  ;  SnA  357  ;  DhA  1.4  ;  PvA  64  (maranar)),  164, 
181  (kammar)),  207  (anuddayar)).  See  also  foil, 
-vinita  trained  to  look  for  causality  M  in.  19. 

Paticca-samuppaniia  [p.  -1-  samuppana]  evolved  by  reason 
of  the  law  of  causation  D  in. 2  75  ;  M  1.5CO  ;  S  11.26  ;  A 
V.187;  Ps  1,51  sq.,  76  sq.  :  Vbh  340,  362.  Cp.  BSk. 
pratitya  samutpanna  MVastu  in. 61. 

Paticca-samappada      [p.-Fsamuppada,      BSk.      pratitya- 

samutpada,  e.  g.  Divy  300,  547]  "  arising  on  the  grounds 
of  (a  preceding  cause)  "  happening  by  way  of  cause, 
working  of  cause  &  effect,  causal  chain  of  causation  ; 
causal  genesis,  dependent  origination,  theory  of  the 
twelve  causes.  —  See  on  this  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  in  Buddhism 
90  f.,  Ency.  Rel.  &■  Ethics,  s.  v.  &  KS  11.,  preface. 
Cpd.  p.  260  sq.  with  diagram  of  the  "Wheel  of  Life"  ; 
Pts.  of  Controversy,  390  f.  —  The  general  formula  runs 
thus :  Imasmir)  sati,  idar)  hoti,  imass'  uppada,  idar) 
uppajjati ;  imasmir)  asati,  idar)  na  hoti ;  imassa 
nirodha,  idag  nirujjhati.  This  being,  that  becomes  ; 
from  the  arising  of  this,  that  arises ;  this  not 
becoming,  that  does  not  become :  from  the  ceasing 
of  this,  that  ceases  M  11.32  ;  S  11.28  etc.  The  term 
usually  occurs  applied  to  dukkha  in  a  famous  formula 
which  expresses  the  Buddhist  doctrine  of  evolution,  the 
respective  stages  of  which  are  conditioned  by  a  pre- 
ceding cause  &  constitute  themselves  the  cause  of 
resulting  effect,  as  working  out  the  next  state  of  the 
evolving  (shall  we  say)  "  individual  "  or  "  being,"  in 
short  the  bearer  of  evolution.  The  respective  links  in 
this  chain  which  to  study  &  learn  is  the  first  condition 
for  a  "  Buddhist  "  to  an  understanding  of  life,  and  the 
cause  of  life,  and  which  to  know  forward  and  backward 
(anuloma-patilomar)  manas'  akasi  Vin  i.i)  is  indis- 
pensable for  the  student,  are  as  follows.  The  root  of  all, 
primary  cause  of  all  existence,  is  avijja  ignorance ;  this 
produces  sankhara:  karma,  dimly  conscious  elements, 
capacity  of  impression  or  predisposition  (will,  action, 
Cpd.  ;  synergies  Mrs.  Rh.  D.),  which  in  their  turn  give 
rise  to  vinfiana  thinking  substance  (consciousness, 
Cpd.  ;  cognition  Mrs.  Rh.  D.),  then  follow  in  succession 
the  foil,  stages :  namarupa  individuality  (mind  &  body, 
animated  organism  Cpd.  ;  name  &  form  Mrs.  Rh.  D.), 
salayatana  the  senses  (6  organs  of  sense  Cpd.  ;  the 
sixfold  sphere  Mrs.  Rh.  D.),  phassa  contact,  vedana 
feeling,  tanha  thirst  for  life  (craving),  upadana  clinging 
to  existence  or  attachment  (dominant  idea  Cpd.  ;  grasp- 
ing Mrs.  Rh.  D.),  bhava  (action  or  character  Cpd.  ;  re- 
newed existence  Mrs.  Rh.  D.),  jati  birth  (rebirth  con- 
ception Cpd.),  jaramarana  (-t-soka-parideva-dukkha- 
domanass'  upayasa)  old  age  &  death  ( -I- tribulation, 
grief,  sorrow,  distress  &  despair).  The  BSk.  form 
is  pratitya-samutpada,  e.  g.  at  Divy  300,  547. 

The  Paticca-samuppada  is  also  called  the  Nidana 
("  basis,"  or  "  ground,"  i.  e.  cause)  doctrine,  or  the 
Paccay'  akara  ("  related-condition  "),  and  is  referred  to 
in  the  Suttas  as  Ariya-iiaya  ("  the  noble  method  or 
system  ").  The  term  paccay'  akara  is  late  and  occurs 
onlv  in  Abhidhamma-literature. — The  oldest  account 
is  found  in  the  Mahapadana  Suttanta  of  the  Digha 
Nikaya  (D  11.30  sq.  ;  cp.  Dial.  11.24  sq).  where  10  items 
form  the  constituents  of  the  chain,  and  are  given  in 
backward  order,  reasoning  from  the  appearance  of 
dukkha  in  this  world  of  old  age  and  death  towards  the 
original  cause  of  it  in  vifiiiana.     The  same  chain  occurs 


Paticchaka 


17 


Patinandati 


again  at  S  11. 104  sq.  —  A  later  development  shows  12 
links,  viz.  avijja  and  sankhara  added  to  precede  vin- 
nana  (as  above).  Thus  at  S  11. 5  sq.  —  A  detailed  ex- 
position of  the  P.-s.  in  Abhidhamma  literature  is  the 
exegesis  given  by  Bdhgh  at  Vism  xvii.  (pp.  517-586, 
under  the  title  of  Paiiiia-bhumi-niddesa),  and  at  VbhA 
130-213  under  the  title  of  Paccayakara-vibhanga. — 
Some  passages  selected  for  ref.  :  Vin  i.i  sq.  ;  M  1. 190, 
257  ;  S  1. 136  ;  II. I  sq.,  26  sq.,  42  sq.,  70,  92  sq.,  1 13  sq.  ; 
A1.177;  V.  184:  Sn.  653;  Ud  I  sq. ;  Ps  1.50  sq.  ;  144; 
Nett  22.  24,  32,  64  sq.  :  DA  1.125,  126. 

-kusala  skilled  in  tae  (knowledge  of  the)  chain  of 
causation  M  111.63  ;  Nd'  171;  f.  abstr.  "kusalata  D 
III. 2  12. 

Paticchaka  (adj.)  [fr.  paticchati)  receiving  J  vi.287. 

Paticcbati  'pati+  icchati  of  15'  ;  cp.  BSk.  praticchati  Divy 
238  and  sampaticchati]  to  accept,  receive,  take  A 
III. 243  (udakai)) ;  Vin  iv.iS  ;  Th  2,  42  i  ;  J  1.233  ;  11.432  ; 
111.171;  1V.137;  V.197;  DhA  III. 271.  —  pp.  faticchita 
(q.  v.).  Caus.  II.  paticchapeti  to  entrust,  dedicate,  give 
J  1.64,  143,  159,  383,  506  ;  II. 133  ;  PvA  81. 

Patiochanna  [pp.  of  paticchadeti]  covered,  concealed, 
hidden  Vin  11.40;  A  1.282;  Sn  126,  194;  Pv  i.io^ 
(kesehi=paticchadita  PvA  48);  11. 10^  (kesehi)  ;  DA 
1.276,  228;  SnA  155;  KhA  53;  VbhA  94  (°dukkha) ; 
PvA  43,  103.  -appaticchanna  unconcealed,  open,  un- 
restrained Vin  11.38;  J  1.207. 

-kammanta  of  secret  doing,  one  who  acts  underhand 
or  conceals  his  actions  A  11.239  ;  Sn  127. 

Paticchavi  in  appaticchavi  at  Pv  n.i^'  read  with  v.  I.  as- 
sampatitacchavi. 

Paticchada  [fr.  pati-l-chad]  i.  covering,  clothes,  clothing 
Pv  ti.i'^  (=vattha  PvA  76).  —  2.  deceiving,  hiding; 
concealment,  deception  Sn  232. 

Paticchadaka=prec.  DhsA  51. 

Paticchadana  (nt.)  [fr.  paticchadeti]  covering,  hiding, 
concealment  M  i.io  ;  A  111.352  ;  Vbh  357  =  SnA  180. 

Paticchadaniya  (nt.)  [fr.  paticchadeti]  the  flavour  of  meat, 
flavouring,  meat  broth  or  gravy  Vin  1.206,  217;  Miln 
291. 

Paticchadita  [pp.  of  paticchadeti,  cp.  paticchanna] 
covered,  concealed,  hidden  J  vi.23  (=patisanthata) 
PvA  48. 

Paticchadi  (f.)  [fr.  paticchadeti]  i.  covering,  protection 
Vin  II. 122.  —  2.  antidote,  remedy,  medicine  (or  a  cloth 
to  protect  the  itch)  Vin  1.296  ;  iv.171. 

Paticchadeti  [pati-t-chadeti,  Caus.  of  chad]  i.  to  cover 
over,  conceal,  hide  S  1.70,  161  ;  DA  1.264  ;  VvA  65 
(dhanai)) ;  KhA  191;  PvA  76,  88,  142  (kesehi),  194 
(=pariguhati).  —  2.  to  clothe  oneself  Vin  1.46.  —  3.  to 
dress  (surgically),  to  treat  (a  wound)  M  1.220.  — 4.  to 
conceal  or  evade  (a  question)  DA  1.264.  —  pp.  patic- 
chadita  &  paticchanna  (q.  v.). 

Paticchita  [pp-  of  paticchati]  accepted,  taken  up  Sn  803 
(pi.  "tase,  cp.  Nd>  113  cS:  SnA  531). 

Patijaggaka  (adj.)  [fr.  pafijaggati]  fostering,  nursing,  taking 
care  of  J  v.i 1 1. 

Patijaggati  [pati-l-jaggati,  cp.  BSk.  pratijagarti  Divy 
124,  306]  lit.  to  watch  over,  i.  e.  to  nourish,  tend,  feed, 
look  after,  take  care  of,  nurse  Dh  157;  J  1.235,  375; 
n.132,  200,  436  ;  Vism  1 19  ;  DhA  1.8,  45,  99,  392  ;  iv.154  ; 
PvA  10,  43.  —  pp.  patijaggita  (q.  v.).  — Caus.  "jaggapeti. 

Patijaggana  (nt.)  [fr.  patijaggati]  rearing,  fostering, 
tending;  attention,  care  J  1.148;  Miln  366;  DhA  1.27; 
11.06. 


Patijagganaka  (adj.)  [fr.  patijaggana]  to  be  reared  or 
brought  up  J  VI. 73  (putta). 

Patijaggapeti  [Caus.  II.  of  patijaggati]  to  make  look  after 

or  tend  \'ism  74. 

Patijaggita  [pp.  of  patijaggati]  reared,  cared  for,  looked 
after,  brought  up  J  v. 274,  331. 

Patijaggiya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  patijaggati]  to  be  nursed  DhA 

■■319- 

Patijanati  [pati-f-  janati]  to  acknowledge,  agree  to,  approve, 
promise,  consent  D  1.3,  192  ;  S  1.68,  172  ;  11. 170  ;  in. 28  ; 
v  204,  423;  Sn  76,  135,  555,  601,  1 148;  J  1. 169;  DhA 
1. 21;  PvA  223  (pot.  patinneyya),  226  (id.),  241;  ger. 
pafiniiaya  Vin  11.83  (a°).  —  pp.  patififiata  (q.  v.). 

Patijivan  (-°)  in  phrase  jiva-patijivar)  at  J  11. 15  is  to  be 
taken  as  a  sort  of  redupl.  cpd.  of  jiva,  the  imper.  of 
jivati  "live,"  as  greeting.  We  might  translate  "the 
greeting  with  '  jiva  '  and  reciprocating  it." 

Pati&na  (adj.)  [=patiiiiia]  acknowledged;  making  belief, 
quasi- ;  in  phrase  samana"  a  quasi-Samana,  pretending 
to  be  a  Samana  A  1.126;  IT.239  ;  cp.  Sakyaputtiya"  S 
11.272  ;  sacca°  J  iv.384,  463  ;  v.499. 

Patifina  (f.)  [fr.  pati-H  jna;  cp.  later  Sk.  pratijna]  acknow- 
ledgment, agreement,  promise,  vow,  consent,  permission 
D  III. 254  ;  J  1.153  ;  Pv  1V.112,  i44  ■  Miln  y  .  ohA  11.93  : 
PvA  76,  123  ;  SnA  397,  539. — patiniiar)  moceti  to  keep 
one's  promise  DhA  1.93. 

Patin&ata  [pp.  of  patijanati]  agreed,  acknowledged,  pro- 
mised Vin  11.83,  102  ;  D  1.88  ;  A  1.99  ;  iv.144  ;  PvA  55. 

Patita  (adj.)  satisfied,  happy  DhA  11.269  ("acara) 

Patititthati  (patitthahati)  etc.  see  pati°. 

Patitittha  (nt.)  [pati-t- tittha]  opposite  bank  (of  a  river) 
J  V.443- 

Patitthambhati  [pati-fthambhati]  to  stand  firm  (against) 
Miln  372. 

Patidavda  [pafi-t-danda]  retribution  Dh  133,  cp.  DhA 
111.57,  58. 

Patidadati  [pati-t- dadati]  to  give  back,  to  restore  J  1.177; 
IV. 41 1  ("diyyare) ;  PvA  276  (ger.  "datva). 

Patidasseti  [pati-l-dasseti]  to  show  oneself  or  to  appear 
again,  to  reappear  Pv  111.2^. 

Patidana  (nt.)  [pati-l- dana]  reward,  restitution,  gift  PvA 
80. 

Patidisa  (f)  [pati-H  disa]  an  oppo.site  (counter-)  point  of 
the  compass,  opposite  quarter  D  in.  176  (disa  ca  p.  ca 
vidisa  ca). 

Patidissati  [pati  +  dissati;  usually  spelt  pati°]  to  be  seen, 
to  appear  J  in.47  =  PvA  281  ;  Sn  123;  J  iv.139;  SnA 

172. 

Patidukkhapanata  (f.)  [pati-H  abstr.  of  dukkhapeti.  Caus. 
-Denom.  fr.  dukkha]  the  fact  of  being  afflicted  again 
with  suffering  Miln  180. 

Patideseti  [pati-fdeseti]  to  confess  Vin  11. 102.  See  also 
patidesaniya. 

Patidhavati  [pafi-l-  dhavati]  to  run  backto(acc.)  M  1.265  ~ 
S  11.26  (pubbantai)  ;  opp.  aparantar)  adhSvati  M,  upa- 
dhavati  S) ;  Sdhp  167. 

Patinandati  fpati-t-nandati]  to  accept  gladly,  to  greet  in 
return  S  1.189. 


V— 2 


Patinandita 


i8 


Patipasaqsati 


Patinandita  [pp.  of  pafi+nand]  rejoicing  or  rejoiced; 
greeted,  welcomed  Sn  452  (pati") ;  J  vi.14.  412. 

Patinasika  (f)  [pati+nasika]  a  false  nose  J  1.455,  457. 

Patinijjhatta  (adj.)  [pati+ nijjhatta]  appeased  again 
J  VI. 414. 

Pa(iniddesa  [pati+niddesa]  coming  back  upon  a  subject 
Nett  5. 

Patinivattati  [pati+  nivattati]  to  turn  back  again  Vin 
1. 2 16;  J  1.225;  Milr'  120,  152  (of  disease),  246;  PvA 
100,  126. — Caus.  "nivatteti  to  make  turn  back  PvA 
141  ;  C.  on  A  111.28  (see  paccasareti). 

Patinivasana  (nt.)  [pati4-nivasanai]  a  dress  given  in 
return  Vin  1.46=11.223. 

Patinissagga  [pati+nissagga  of  nissajjati,  nis+srj,  Cp. 
BSk.  pratinisarga  AvS  11. 118,  pratinihsarga  ib.  11. 194; 
ilVastu  11.549;  pratinissngga  MVastu  ill. 314,  322] 
giving  up,  forsaking  ;  rejection,  renunciation  Vin  iii.  1 73  ; 

5  III. 13;  v. 311,  421  sq.  ;  A  i.ioo,  299;  iv.148,  350; 
Ps  1. 194  (two  p.,  viz.  pariccaga"  and  pakkhandana") ; 
Pug  19,  21,  22. — adana"  S  v.24  ;  A  v.233,  253 
sq.  ;  upadhi"  It  46,  62;  sabbupadhi"  S  1.136;  111.133; 
v. 226 ;  A  1.49 ;  V.8,  100,  320  sq. ;  °anupassana 
Ps  11.44  sq.  ;  "anupassin  M  in.83  ;  S  iv.2ii;  v.329  ; 
A  IV. 88,  146  sq.  ;  v.112,  359. 

Patinissaggin  (adj.)  [fr.  patinissagga]  giving  up,  renounc- 
ing, or  being  given  up,  to  be  renounced,  only  in  cpd. 
duppati"  (sup°)  hard  (easy)  to  renounce  D  111.45 ; 
M  1.96;  A  III. 335  ;  V.150. 

Patinissaijati  [pati4-  nissajjati,  cp.  BSk.  pratinisf  jati 
Av^  II.  190]  to  give  up,  renounce,  forsake  Vin  in.  1 73  sq.  ; 
IV.294  ;  S  ii.iio  ;  A  v.  191  sq.  —  ger.  patinissajja  S  1.179  ; 
A  iv.374  sq. ;  Sn  745,  946  (cp.  Nd'  430).  —  pp.  patinis- 
sattha  (q.  v.). 

Patinissattha  [pp.  of  patinissajjati,  BSk.  pratinihsrsfa 
Divy  44  and  "i^isrsta  Divy  275]  given  up,  forsaken  (act. 

6  pass.),  renouncing  or  having  renounced  Vin  111.95  ; 
IV.27,  137 ;  M  1.37  ;  S  11.283  ;  A  11. 41  ;  It  49  ;  Nd'  430, 
431  (vanta  pahina  p.) ;  PvA  256. 

Patinissaiati  [pati  +  nissarati]  to  depart,  escape  from,  to 
be  freed  from  Nett  113  {=  niyyati  vimuccati  C). 

Patineti  [pati+  neti]  to  lead  back  to  (ace.)  Vv  52" ;  Th  2, 
419  ;  Pv  II. 12^'  (imper.  °nayahi) ;  PvA  145,  160. 

Patipakkha  (adj.-n.)  [pati+pakkha]  opposed,  opposite; 
(m.)  an  enemy,  opponent  (cp.  pratipaksa  obstacle  Divy 
352)  Ndi  397;  J  1.4,  224;  Nett  3,  112,  124;  Vism  4; 
DhA  1.92  ;  SnA  12,  21,  65,  168,  234,  257,  545  ;  PvA  98  ; 
DhsA  1 64  ;  Sdhp  211,  452 . 

Patipakkhika  (adj.)  [fr.  patipakkha]  opposed,  inimical 
Sdhp  2  16. 

Patipajjati  [pati+pad,.  cp.  BSk.  pratipadyate]  to  enter 
upon  (a  path),  to  go  along,  follow  out  (a  way  or  plan), 
to  go  by  ;  fig.  to  take  a  line  of  action,  to  follow  a  method, 
to  be  intent  on,  to  regulate  one's  life  D  1.70  (sagvaraya). 
175  (tathattaya)  ;  S  11.98  (kantaramaggag) ;  iv.63 
(dhammass'  anudhammarj) ;  v. 346  (id.);  iv.194  (mag- 
gag)  ;  A  1.36  (dhammanudhammai)) ;  11. 4  ;  Sn  317,  323, 
706,  815,  1129  (cp.  Nd2  384);  Dh274  (maggai)) ;  Pug  20 
(sagvaraya)  ;  PvA  43  (maggag),  44  (ummaggag),  196 
(dhanag);  Sdhp  30.  —  3rd  sg..aor.  paccapadi  J  iv.314. 
—  ger.  pajjitabba  to  be  followed  PvA  126  (vidhi),  131 
(id.),  281.  —  pp.  patipanna  (q.  v.). — Caus.  patipa- 
deti  (q.  v.). 

Patipajjana  (nt.)  [fr.  patipajjati]  a  way  or  plan  to  be 
followed,  procedure,  in  "vidhi  method,  line  of  action 
PvA  131  (v.  1.  BB).  133. 


Patipavameti  [pati-l-  pa-t-  Caus.  of  nam]  to  make  turn  back, 
to  send  back,  ward  off,  chase  away  M  1.327  (sirig) ; 
S  IV.  152  (abadhag) ;  Miln  17  (sakatani). 

Patipavna  (nt.)  [pati-l-panna]  a  letter  in  return,  a  written 
reply  J  1.409. 

Patipatti  (f.)  [fr.  pati-l-pad]  "way,"  method,  conduct, 
practice,  performance,  behaviour,  example  A  1.69 ; 
V.126  (dhammanudhamma°),  136;  Ps  11.15  ;  Nd^  143  ; 
Nd^  s.  v.  ;  Miln  131,  242  ;  DhA  n.30  ;  DhA  iv.34  (samma° 
good  or  proper  behaviour) ;  PvA  16  (parahita"),  54,  67  ; 
DA  1.270  ;  Sdhp  28,  29,  37,  40,  213.  52  i. 

Patipatha  [pati-l-patha]  a  confronting  road,  opposite  way 
Vin  II. 193  (°g  gacchati  to  go  to  meet) ;  111.131  ;  iv.268  ; 
Miln  9  ;  Vism  92  ;  DhA  11.88. 

Patipada  (f)  [fr.  pati+pad]  means  of  reaching  a  goal  or 
destination,  path,  way.  means,  method,  mode  of 
progress  (cp.  Dhs.trsl"  53,  82.  92,  143),  course,  practice 
(cp.  BSk.  pratipad  in  meaning  of  pratipatti  "  line  of 
conduct"  Av^ii.140  with  note)  D  1.54  (dvatti  p.),  249 
(way  to);  S  11. 81  (nirodhasaruppa-gamini  p.);  iv.251 
(bhaddika),  330  (majjhima)  v. 304  (sabbattha-gamini), 
361  (udaya-gamini  sotapatti"),  421  ;  D  in. 288  (iiana- 
dassana-visuddhi")  ;  A  1.113,  168  (punna°)  11.76,  79,  152 
(akkhama)  ;  Vbh  99,   104  sq.,  211  sq.,  229  sq.,  331  sq. 

—  In  pregnant  sense  The  path  (of  the  Buddha),  leading 
to  the  destruction  of  all  ill  &  to  the  bliss  of  Nibbana 
(see  specified  under  magga,  ariyamagga,  sacca).  thus  a 
quasi  synonym  of  magga  with  which  freq.  combi^  (e.g. 
D  1. 156)  Vin  1. 10;  D  1. 157;  III. 219  (anuttariya)  ;  M 
II. 11;  III. 251,  284;  S  1.24  (dajha  yaya  dhira  pamuc- 
canti) ;  A  1.295  sq.  (agalha  nijjhama  majjhima) ;  Sn  714 
(cp.  SnA  497),  921  ;  Ps  11.147  (majjhima) ;  Nett  95  sq. ; 
Pug  15,  68  ;  VvA  84  ("sankhata  ariyamagga).  Specified 
in  various  waj^s  as  follows  :  asava-nirodha-gamini  p. 
D  1.84;  dukkha-nirodha-g°.  D  1.84,  189;  111.136;  S 
V.426  sq.  ;  A  1. 1 77;  Ps  1.86,  119;  Dhs  1057;  loka- 
nirodha-g"  A  11.23;  It  121  ;  with  the  epithets  samma° 
anuIoma°  apaccanika"  anvattha"  dhammanudhamma" 
Nd'  32,  143,  365  ;  Nd''  384  etc.  (see  detail  under  samma°). 

—  There  are  several  groups  of  4  patipada  mentioned,  viz. 
(a)  dukkha  dandhabhiiiiia,  sukha  &  khippabhiiiiia 
dandh°  cS:  khipp",  i.  e.  painful  practice  resulting  in 
knowledge  slowly  acquired  &  quickly  acquired,  plea- 
sant practice  resulting  in  the  same  way  D  in.  106;  A 
II. 149  sq..  154;  v.63  ;  SnA  497;  (b)  akkhama.  khama. 
dama  &  sama  p.  i.  e.  want  of  endurance,  endurance, 
self-control,  equanimity. 

Patipanna  [pp.  of  patipajjati]  (having)  followed  or  follow- 
ing up,  reaching,  going  along  or  by  (i.  e.  practising), 
entering  on,  obtaining  S  11.69  ;  iv.252  ;  A  1.120  (arahat- 
taya) ;  iv.292  sq.(id.),  372  sq.  ;  It  81  (dhammanudham- 
ma°) ;  Sn  736;  Dh  275  (maggag)  ;  Vv  34^^  (=maggat- 
tha  one  who  has  entered  the  path  VvA  154)=  Pv  iv.3<'; 
Pug  63  ;  Miln  17  ;  DA  1.26  ;  PvA  78,  112  (maggag),  130, 
174  (samma°),  242  ;  (dhammiyag  patipadag) ;  DhA  1.233 
(magga"  on  the  road,  wandering). 

Patipannaka  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  patipanna]  one  who  has  entered 
upon  the  Path  (ariyamagga)  Pug  13  (=  maggatthaka, 
phalatthaya  patipannatta  p.  nama  PugA  186)  ;  Miln  342, 
344  ;  Nett  50  ;  DhsA  164.    See  also  Miln  Irsl.  11. 231,  237. 

Patiparivatteti  [pati-l- p.]  to  turn  back  or  round  once  more 
M  1. 1 33. 

Patipavittha  [pp.  of  patipavisati]  gone  inside  again  Sn  979. 

Patipavisati  [pati-l-pavisati]  to  go  in(to)  again;  Caus. 
"paveseti  to  make  go  in  again,  to  put  back  (inside) 
again  Vin  1.276.  —  pp.  patipavittha  (q.  v.). 

Patipasaijsati  [pati-fpasagsati]  to  praise  back  or  in  return 
J  "■439. 


Patipaharati 


19 


Patibodha 


Patipaharati  [pati+ paharati]  to  strike  in  return  DhA  1.5 1. 

Patipabiljiati  [pati+pahinati]  to  send  back  (in  return) 
DhA  1.2  16. 

Patipakatika  (adj.)  [pati+pakatika]  restored,  set  right 
again,  safe  and  sound  J  111.167  (  =  pakatika  at  PvA  66) ; 
IV.407;  VI. 372  ;  PvA  123,  284. 

Patipati  (f.)  [pati+pati]  order,  succession  Vin  1.248 
(bhatta°) ;  Vism  411  (khandha°) ;  usually  in  abl.  pati- 
pafiya  adv.  successively,  in  succession,  alongside  of,  in 
order  Vism  343  =  J  v. 253  (ghara°  from  house  to  house) ; 
ThA  80  (magga°) ;  DhA  1.156;  n.89  ;  111.361  ;  SnA  23, 
506  ;  PvA  54  ;  VvA  76,  137. 

Patipatika  (adj.)  [fr.  last]  being  in  conformity  with  the 
(right)  order  ThA  41. 

Patipadaka  [fr.  pati  +  pad]  the  supporter  (of  a  bed)  Vin 
1.48  ;  11.208. 

Patipadeti  [Caus.  of  patipajjati,  cp.  BSk.  pratipadayati  in 
same  meaning  AvS  1.262,  315]  to  impart,  bring  into. 
give  to,  offer,  present  M  1.339  ;  J  v.453,  497  ;  Pv  11. 8' 
(vittar)). 

Patipiosati  [pati  +  pigsati]  to  beat  against  S  11.98  (ure) ; 
J  VI. 87  ;  Vism  504  (urani). 

Patipivda  'pati+pinda]  alms  in  return  J  11.307;  v. 390 
(pinda^  giving  &  taking  of  alms) ;  Miln  370. 

Patipita  in  asuci°  at  A  ni,226  is  not  clear  (v.  1.  "pilita 
perhaps  to  be  preferred). 

Patipi}ana  (nt.)  [fr.  patipUeti]  oppression  Miln  313,  352. 

PatipQita  (adj.)  [pati+pp.  of  pi4]  pressed  against, 
oppressed,  hard  pressed  Miln  262,  354. 

Patipoggala  [pati+puggala]  a  person  equal  to  another, 
compeer,  match,  rival  M  i.i7i=Miln  235;  S  1.158;  Sn 
544;  It  123  (natthi  te  patipuggala). — •  appatipuggala 
without  a  rival,  unrivalled,  without  compare  S  1.158; 
III. 80  ;  Th  2,  185  ;  J  1.40  ;  Miln  239  (cp.  Milntrsl.  11.43). 

Patipuggalika  (adj.)  [fr.  pajipuggala]  belonging  to  one's 
equal,  individual  Dhs  1044.     Perhaps  read  pafi"  (q.  v.). 

Patipacctaati  [pati+pucchati]  to  ask  (in  return),  to  put  a 
question  to,  to  inquire  D  1.60  ;  M  1.27  ;  S  III. 2  ;  Sn  p.  92  ; 
J  1. 170;  IV.194;  PvA  32,  56,  81;  A  1. 197;  11.46;  also 
neg.  appatipuccha  (abl.  adv.)  without  inquiry  Vin  1..325. 

PatipQCCha  (f . )  [pati  +  puccha]  a  question  in  return,  inquiry  ; 
only  ^-  (as  abl.)  by  question,  by  inquiry,  by  means  of 
question  &  answer  in  foil.  cpds.  ;  "karaniya  Vin  1.325  ; 
°vinita  A  1.72  ;  "vyakaraniya  (panha)  D  111.229. 

Patiparisa  [pati+purisa]  a  rival,  opponent  Nd'  172. 

Patipujana  (nt.)  or  °a  (f.)  [fr.  pati+  puj]  worship,  reverence, 
honour  Miln  241. 

Patipojeti  [pati  +  pujeti]  to  honour,  worship,  revere  Sn 
12S;  Pv  i.i3;  Miln  241. 

Patipeseti  [pati  +  peseti]  to  send  out  to  PvA  20. 

PatippaQameti  [pafi+panameti]  to  bend  (back),  stretch 
out  Dhs.\  324. 

Patippassaddha  [pp.  of  patippassambhati]  allayed,  calmed, 
quieted,  subsided  S  iv.217,  294;  v. 2 72;  A  1.254; 
11.41  ;  J  111.37,  148 ;  1V.430  ;  Ps  ri.2  ;  Pug  27  ;  KhA  185  ; 
PvA  23,  245,  274.  Note.  The  BSk.  form  is  prati- 
prasrabdha  Divy  265. 

Patippassaddlu  (f.)  [fr.  patippassaddha]  subsidence,  calm- 
ing,   allaying,   quieting   down,    repose,    complete   ease 


Vin  1.331  (kammassa  suppression  of  an  act);  Ps  11.3, 
71,  180;  Nett  89;  Dhs  40,  41,  320;  SnA  9.  Esp. 
frequent  in  the  Niddesas  in  stock  phrase  expressing  the 
complete  calm  attained  to  in  emancipation,  viz.  vu- 
pasama  patinissagga  p.  amata  nibbana,  e.  g.  Nd^  429. 

Patippassambhati  [pati  +  ppa  +  sambhati  of  srambh.  Note 
however  that  the  BSk.  is  "prairambhyati  as  well  as 
°srambhyati,  e.  g.  MVastu  1.253,  254  ;  Divy  68,  138, 
494,  549,  56S]  to  subside,  to  be  eased,  calmed,  or  abated, 
to  pass  away,  to  be  allayed  S  1.21 1  ;  v. 51  ;  aor.  "ssambhi 
DhA  11.86  (dohajo) ;  iv.133  (abadho).  —  pp.  patippas- 
saddha (q.  v.). — Caus.  patippassambhati  to  quiet 
down,  hush  up,  suppress,  bring  to  a  standstill,  put  to 
rest,  appease  Vin  1.49  (kammarj),  144  (id.),  331  (id.); 
II. 5  (id.),  226  (id.) ;  M  1.76 ;  J  in. 28  (dohajai)). 

Patipassambhana  (f.)  &  °ppassambhitatta  (nt.)  are  exe- 
getical  (philosophical)  synonyms  of  patippassaddhi  at 
Dhs  40,  41.  320. 

Patippharati  [pati+pharati]  to  eftulge.  shine  forth,  stream 
out,  emit.  fig.  splurtout,  bring  against,  objectM  1.91  sq.  ; 
A  IV. 193  (codakar)) ;  J  1.123,  163  ;  Nd^  196  (vadai)  start 
a  word-fight) ;  Miln  3.72  ;  DhA  IV.4  (vacanag). 

Patibaddha  (adj.)  [pati+baddha.  pp.  of  bandb]  bound  to, 
in  fetters  or  bonds,  attracted  to  or  bv,  dependent  on 
D  1.76;  Vin  IV.302  (kaya°);  A  v.87  (para°)  ;  Dh  284; 
Miln  102  (avajjana") ;  PvA  134  ("jivika  dependent  on 
him  for  a  living).  —  Freq.  in  cpd.  °citta  affected, 
enamoured,  one's  heart  bound  in  love  Vin  in. 128; 
iv.iS;  Sn  37  (see  Nd^  385),  65;  PvA  46,  145  (°ta  f. 
abstr.),  151,  159  (rafino  with  the  king). 

Patibandha  (adj.)  [pati  +  bandha]  bound  to,  connected 
with,  referring  to  Ps  1.172,  184. 

Patibandhati  [pati+bandhati]  to  hold  back,  refuse 
J  IV.  134  (vetanai)  na  p.  =  aparihapetva  dadati). 

Patibandhu  [pafi+bandhu]  a  connection,  a  relation, 
relative  Dhs  1059,  1136,  1230  ;  DhsA  365. 

Patibala  (adj.)  [pati+bala]  able,  adequate,  competent 
Vin  1.56,  342  ;  11.103.  3°°  :  111.158  ;  A  v. 71  ;  Miln  6. 

Patibalha  [pp.  of  patibahati,  though  more  likely  to  pati-(- 
vah^]  (op)pressed,  forced,  urged  Vbh  338  =  Miln  301. 

Patibahaka  [of  pati+badh]  antidote  Miln  335;  repelling, 
preventing  J  vi.571. 

Patibahati  [patu-  *bah  of  bahis  adv.  outside]  toward  off. 
keep  off.  shut  out.  hold  back,  refuse,  withhold,  keep 
out,  evade  Vin  1.356;  11.162,  166  sq.,  274;  iv.288 ; 
J  1.64,  217  ;  DhA  II. 2  (ranno  anag),  89  (sitar))  ;  VvA  68  ; 
PvA  96  (maranar)),  252,  286  (grd.  appatibahaniya). 
Caus.  "baheti  in  same  meaning  J  iv.194;  DhA  11.71; 
PvA  54.  —  pp.  patibalha  (q.  v.). 

Patibahana  exclusion,  warding  off.  prevention  Miln  81  : 
Vism  244. 

Patibahiya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  patibahati]  to  be  kept  off  or 
averted,  neg.  ap°  J  iv.152. 

Patibahira  (adj.)  [pati+bahira]  outside,  excluded  Vin 
11.168. 

Patibimba  (nt.)  [pati  +  bimba]  counterpart,  image,  reflec 
tion  Vism  190  ;  VvA  50  ;  VbhA  164. 

Patibujihati  [pati+bujjhati]  to  wake  up,  to  understand, 
know.  A  111.105  sq.  ;  ThA  74;  PvA  43,  128.  — pp. 
patibuddha  (q.  v.). 

Patibuddha  [pp-  of  patibujjhati]  awakened,  awake  Sn  807. 

Patibodha  [fr.  pati+badh.  cp.  patibujjhati]  awaking, 
waking  up  Vv  50^* 


Patibhajati 


20 


Patiraja 


Patibhajati  [pati  +  bhaj]  to  divide  M  111.91. 

Patibhan4a  [pati  +  bhanda,  cp.  BSk.  pratipanya  Divy  173, 
-/'■   5t'4]   merchandise  in   exchange,    barter   J    1.377; 

PvA  .77. 

Patibhan^ati  [pati  +  bhandati]  to  abuse  in  return  S  1.162 
(bhandantar)  p.)  ;  A  n.215  (id.) ;  Nd'  397  (id.). 

Patibhaya  [pati+bhaya]  fear,  terror,  fright  S  iv.195; 
PvA  90  ;  Davs  iv.35.  Freq.  in  cpd.  ap°  &  sap°,  e.  g. 
Vin  IV. 63  ;  M  1.134  ;  III. 61. 

Patibhaga  [pati+bhaga]  i.  counterpart,  hkeness,  resem- 
blance Nd^  s.  V.  ;  Vism  125  ("nimitta.  imitative  mental 
reflex,  memory-image);  SnA  65,  76,  83,  114,  265  ;  PvA 
46,  178,  279.  —  2.  rejoinder  J  vi.341  (panha^).  —  3. 
counterpart,  opposite,  contrary  Mi.  304. — appatibhaga 
(adj.)  unequalled,  incomparable,  matchless  Miln  357 
(-H  appatisettha)  ;  DhA  1.423  (=anuttara). 

Patibhati  [pati-l-bha]  to  appear,  to  be  evident,  to  come 
into  one's  mind,  to  occur  to  one,  to  be  clear  (cp.  Vin. 
Texts  11.36)  S  1. 155  (°tu  tar)  dhammikatha) ;  v. 153  (T. 
reads  patibbati)  ;  Sn  450  (p.  mag  =  mama  bhago 
pakasati  SnA  399)  ;  Nd^  234=  Nd^  386  (also  fut.  °bha- 
yissati)  ;  J  v. 410  ;  VvA  78=  159  (mat)  p.  ekag  paiihar) 
pucchitur)  "  I  should  like  to  ask  a  question  "). 

Patibhana  (nt.)  [pati-l-bhana.  Cp.  late  Sk.  pratibhana. 
fr.  Pali]  understanding,  illumination,  intelligence ; 
readiness  or  confidence  of  speech,  promptitude,  wit  (see 
on  term  Vin.  Te.vts  111.13,  i  72  ;  Pts.  ofControversv,  378  f.) 
D  1. 16,  21,  23;  S  1. 187;  A  11. 135,  177,  230;  III. 42  ; 
IV.163  ;  V.96  ;  Ps  n.150,  157;  J  VI. 150;  Pug  42  ;  A'bh 
293  sq.  ;  VbhA  338,  394,  467;  Miln  21;  D.\  1.106. 
— -appatibhana  (adj.)  bewildered,  not  confident,  cowed 
down  \'in  11.78=111.162;  M  1.258;  A  111.57  ;  J  v. 238, 
369  ;  VI. 362. 

Patibhana vant  (adj.)  [fr.  patibhana]  possessed  of  intelli- 
gence or  ready  wit  A  1.24  ;  Sn  58,  853,  1 147  ;  Nd'  234  = 
Nd2  386  ;  SnA  1 1 1  (pariyatti"  &  pativedha°). 

Patibhaneyyaka  (adj.)  [ger.  formation -l-ka  fr.  patibhana] 
=  patibhanavant  Vin  1.249  (cp.  Vin.  Texts  ir.140); 
A  I-25. 

Patibhasati  [pati-l-bhas]  to  address  in  return  or  in  reply 
S  1.134  ;  Sn  1024. 

Patimagsa  (adj.)  [for  patimassa=Sk.  *pratimrsya.  ger.  of 
prati -I- mrs,  cp.  in  consonants  harjsa  for  harsa  etc.]  as 
neg.  app°  not  to  be  touched,  untouched  ;  faultless  Vin 
11.248  (acchidda-t- )  ;  A  v. 79. 

Patimagga  [pati -1- magga,  cp.  similarly  patipatha]  the 
way  against,  a  confronting  road  ;  °r)  gacchati  to  go  to 
meet  somebody  J  iv.133;  vi.127. 

PatimaQ^ita  [pp.  of  pati-t-maij^]  decorated,  adorned  with 
J  1.8,  41,  509;  PvA  3,  66,  211. 

Patimantaka  [fr.  pati-l-mant]  one  who  speaks  to  or  who 
is  spoken  to,  i.  e.  (i)  an  interlocutor  J  iv.18  (  =  pativa- 
cana-dayaka  C);  —  (2)  an  amiable  person  (cp.  Lat. 
af{abilis=  affable)  M  1.386. 

Patimanteti  [pati-l-manteti]  to  discuss  in  argument,  to 
reply  to,  answer,  refute;  as  pati°  at  Vin  11. i  ;  D  1.93 
(vacane),  94  ;  Dh  1.263  :  J  vi.82,  294. 

Fatimalla  [pati-t-malla]  a  rival  wrestler  S  i.iio  ;  Nd^  172. 

Patimasati  [pati+masati  of  mrs,  cp.  patimagsa]  to  touch 
(at)  D  1. 106;  Sn  p.  108  (anumasati-H ).  —  Cans,  pati- 
maseti  (q.  v.). 

Patima  (f)  [fr.  pati-l-ma]  counterpart,  image,  figure 
J  VI. 125;  Davs  V.27;  VvA  168  (  =  bimba);  DhsA  334. 


— appatima    (adj.)    without  a   counterpart,   matchless, 
incomparable  Th  i,  614  ;  Miln  239. 

Patimanita  [pp.  of  patimaneti]  honoured,  revered,  served 
PvA  18. 

Patimaneti  [pati-l-Caus.  of  man]  to  wait  on.  or  wait  for, 
look  after,  honour,  serve  Vin  11. 169;  1V.112;  D  1.106; 
J  IV. 2,  203  ;  v. 314  ;  Miln  7  ;  PvA  12  ;  DA  1.280.  —  pp. 
patimanita  (q.  v.). 

Patimareti  [pati-t-Caus.  of  mr]  to  kill  in  revenge  J  in. 135. 

Patimaseti  [Cans,  of  patimasati]  to  hold  on  to,  to  restrain, 
keep  under  control ;  imper.  patimase  (for  °masaya) 
I^h  379  (opp.  codaya  ;  expl''  by  °parivimar)se  "  watch  " 

DhA  IV. II 7). 

Patimukka  (adj.)  [pp.  of  patimuncati ;  cp.  also  patimutta 
&  ummukka.  see  Geiger.  P.Gr.  §  197]  fastened  on,  tied 
to,  wound  round,  clothed  in  S  iv.91  ;  M  1.383;  It  56; 
Th  2,  500  (?  V.  1.  paripunna.  cp.  ThA  290)  ;  J  1.384  ; 
VI. 64  ;  Miln  390  ;  Dh.A  1.394  (sise)  ;  VvA  167  (so  read  for 
"mukkha),  296. 

Patimnkha  (adj.)  [pati-l-mukha]  facing,  opposite;  nt.  "rj 
adv.  opposite  SnA  399  (gacchati). 

Patimuncati  [pati-t-mnc]  i.  to  fasten,  to  bind  (in  lit.  as 
well  as  applii  sense),  to  tie,  put  on  Vin  1.46  ;  S  1.24 
(verari  "rauricati  for  °muccati  I)  ;  J  1.384  ;  11.22,  88,  197  ; 
IV.  380  (ger.  °mucca,  v.  1.  °munca),  395  ;  v. 25  (attain), 
49  ;  VI. 525  ;  DhA  in. 295.  —  Pass,  patimuccati  to  be 
fastened,  aior.  "mucci  J  in. 239  ;  vi.176.  —  2.  to  attain, 
obtain,  find  J  iv.2S5  =  vi.148. 

Patimutta  (&  °ka)  (adj.)  [pp.  of  patimuiicati,  cp.  pati- 
mukka] in  sup°  well  purified,  cleansed,  pure  J  iv.18 
(°kambu  =  patimutta-suvann'  alankaraC);  V.400  ;  Pv 
IV  j33  ("ka-sutthu  patimuttabhanin  PvA  230). 

Patimokkha  [fr.  pati-t-  muc]  i .  a  sort  of  remedy,  purgative 
D  1. 12  osadhinag  p.  expl'^  at  DA  1.98  as  "  kharadini 
datva  tad-anurupo  khane  gate  tesar)  apanayanar) , "  Cp . 
Dial.  26.  —  2.  binding,  obligatory  J  v. 25  (sangarai)  p. 
a  binding  promise).     Cp.  patimokkha. 

Patiya  (nt.)  [  =  patika]  a  white  woollen  counterpane  J 
IV. 352  (  =  unnamaya-paccattharanani  setakambalani  pi 
vadanti  yeva  C). 

Patiyatta  [pp.  of  pati-l-yat]  prepared,  got  ready,  made, 
dressed  Vin  iv.i8  (alankata") :  J  iv.380  (C.  for  pakata), 
PvA  25  (C.  for  upatthita),  75  (alankata°).  135  (id.).  232 
(id.),  279  (id.);  KhA  118  (alankata"). 

Patiyati  [pati-l-ya,  cp.  pacceti]  to  go  back  to.  reach  J 
VI, 149  (C.  for  patimuncati). 

Patiyadita  [pp.  of  patiyadeti]  given,  prepared,  arranged, 
dedicated  Miln  9  ;  DhA  11.75. 

Patiyadeti  [for  *patiyateti=Sk.  pratiyatayati,  Cans,  of 
pati+yat,  like  P.  niyyadeti  =  Sk.  niryatayati]  to  pre- 
pare, arrange,  give,  dedicate  SnA  447.  —  pp.  patiyadita 
(q.  v.).  —  Cans. II.  patiyadapeti  to  cause  to  be  presented 
or  got  ready,  to  assign,  advise,  give  over  Vin  1.249 
(yaguri)  ;  Sn  p.  1 10  (bhojaniyar)) ;  PvA  22,  141. 

Pati-y-alokao  gacchati  "  to  go  to  the  South  "  Vin  iv.131, 

I  (11 . 

Patiyodha  [pati-Fyodha]  counterfight  J  in. 3. 

Patiyoloketi  (T.  pati-oloketi)  [pati-(-oloketi]  to  look  at, 
to  keep  an  eye  on,  observe  J  11.406. 

Patirava  [pati-l-rava]  shouting  out,  roar  Davs  iv.52. 

Patiraja  [pati -f  raja]  hostile  king,  royal  adversary  J  vi.472  ; 
DhA  1. 193. 


I 


Patiruddha 


21 


Pativinicchinati 


Patiruddha  [pp.  pati  +  rudh]  obstructed,  hindered,  held 
back,  caged  J  IV.4  (oruddha-patiruddha  sic). 

Patiriipa  (adj.)  [pati+rupa]  fit,  proper,  suitable,  befitting, 
seeming  D  1.91  ;  Vin  11. 166  (seyya) ;  M  1.123  ;  S  1.214  ; 
11.194  (ap°) :  Th  2,  341;  Pv  Ii.i2'6;  J  v.gg  ;  Pug  27; 
DhA  111.142;  PvA  26,  122  (  =  yutta),  124.  -°desa- 
vasa  living  in  a  suitable  region  D  iii.276  =  A  11.32  ;  Nett 
-9.  5"-  —  Spelt  pati"  at  Dh  158;  Sn  89,  1S7,  667; 
SnA  390.     Cp.  patirupika. 

Patiriipaka  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  patirupa]  like,  resembling,  dis- 
guised as,  in  the  appearance  of,  having  the  form  of 
S  1.230;  DhA  1.29  (putta") ;  PvA  15  (samana").  As 
pati°  at  SnA  302,  348,  390.  —  nt.  an  optical  delusion 
DhA  111.56. 

Patirupata  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  patirupa]  likeness,  semblance, 
appearance,  pretence  PvA  268  (  =  vanna). 

Patirodati  [pati+rodati  of  rud]  to  cry  in  return,  to  reply 
by  crying  J  in. So  ;  pp.  pa'tirodita  =  patirodana. 

Patirodana  (nt.)  [pati+ rodana]  replving  through  crying 
J  III. 80. 

Patiiodeti  [pati  +  Caus.  of  rud]  to  scold  back  S  1.162. 

Patirosati  [pati  +  rosati]  to  annoy  in  return,  to  tease  back 
S  1.162  ;  A  11.215  ;  Nd'  397. 

Patiladdha  [pp.  of  patilabhati]  received,  got,  obtained 
PvA  15  (  =  laddha),  88. 

Patilabhati  [pati  +  labhati]  to  obtain,  receive,  get  It  77; 
J  1. 91  ;  y!d^  427  (pariyesati  p.  paribhunjati)  ;  Pug  57; 
VvA  1 1.5;  PvA  6,  7,  16,  50,  60,  67  etc.  —  pret.  3'''  pi. 
paccaladdhat)su  S  1.48  (so  v.  1.  &  C.  T.  °latthar)su), 
cxpl<i  by  patilabhigsu  cp.  K.  S.  319.  —  aor.  i'-'  sg. 
patilacchig  J  v.71.  —  Caus.  patilabheti  to  cause  to  take 
or  get,  to  rob  J  v. 76  (patilabhayanti  nar}  "  rob  me  of 
him  "). 

Patilabha  [fr.  pati+labh]  obtaining,  receiving,  taking  up, 
acquisition,  assumption,  attainment  D  1.195;  M  i-S"  ; 
A  11.93,  143  ;  Ps  11.182,  189  ;  Nd'  262  ;  Dh  333  ;  Pug  57  ; 
\"vA  113;  PvA  50,  73,  74. — attabhava"^  obtaining  a 
reincarnation,  coming  into  existence  S  11.256;  111.144; 
A  11.159.  188  ;  111.122  sq.  —  See  also  paribhoga. 

Patilika  v.  1.  BI3  together  with  patalika  for  talika  at 
J  111.80  (cp.  A  III  36  ?). 

Patilina  [pp.  of  patiliyati]  having  withdrawn,  keeping 
away  S  1.48  ("nisabha  "  expert  to  eliminate  "  ;  reading 
pati°) ;  with  reading  pati  also  ;  A  11.41  ;  iv.449  ;  Sn  810, 
852  ;  Nd'  130,  224  (ragassa  etc.  pahinatta  patilino). 

Patiliyati  [pati  +  Uyati  of  li]  to  withdraw,  draw  back,  keep 
away  from,  not  to  stick  to  A  iv.47  =  Miln  297  (-fpati- 
kutati  pativattati ;  Miln  &  id.  p.  at  S  11.265  print  pati°)  ; 
Vism  347  (  + patikuttati  pativattati).  —  pp.  patilina  ; 
Caus.  patileneti  (q.  v.). 

Patileneti  [Sec.  der"  fr.  pp.  patilina  in  sense  of  Caus.  ;  cp. 
Sk.  ^lapayati  of  U]  to  withdraw,  to  make  keep  away, 
not  to  touch  S  11.265  (pati°,  as  at  Miln  297  patiliyati). 

Patilobheti  [pati  +  Caus.  of  lubh]  to  fill  with  desire,  to 
entice  J  v. 96. 

Patiloma  (adj.)  fpati  +  loma]  "  against  the  hair,"  in  reverse 
order,  opposite,  contrary,  backward  ;  usually  comb'' 
withanuloma  i.  e.  forward  &  backward  Vin  l.i  ;  A  iv.448  ; 
etc  (see  paticcasamuppada)  ;  J  11.307.  -"pakkha  oppo- 
sition PvA  114  (cp.  patipakkha). 

Pativacana  (nt.)  [pati-l- vacana]  answer,  reply,  rejoinder 
J  IV. 18  ;  Miln  120  ;  PvA  83  (opp.  vacana)  ;  ThA  285. 


Pativattati  (&  ^vattati)  Lpati+Vftj  (intrs.)  to  roll  or  move 
back,  to  turn  away  from  A  iv. 47  =  Miln  297  (patiliyati 
patikutati  p.)  ;  Caus.  pativatteti  in  same  meaning  trs. 
(but  cp.  Childers  s.  v.  "  to  knock,  strike  ")  S  11.265  (T. 
spells  pati°,  as  also  at  Miln  297).  —  grd.  pativattiya  only 
in  neg.  ap°  (q.  v.).  —  pp.  pativatta  (q.  v.). 

Pativatta  (nt.)  [pp.  of  pativattati]  moving  backwards,  1  nly 
in  cpd.  vatta-pativatta-karana  "  moving  forth  or  back- 
wards," performance  of  different  kinds  of  duties  ;  doing 
this,  that  &  the  other  DhA  1.157. 

Pativattar  [pati-l- vattar,  n.  ag.  of  vac]  one  who  contra- 
dicts S  1.222. 

Pativadati  [pati-t- vadati]  to  answer,  reply  A  iv.ibS  (v.  1. 
for  paticarati) ;  Sn  932  ;  Dh  133  ;  Nd'  397  ;  PvA  39. 

Pativasati  [pati-Hvasati]  to  live,  dwell  (at)  D  1.129;  Vin 
11.299  ;  S  1.177  ;  J  I.202  ;  SnA  462  ;  PvA  42,  67. 

Pativaija,  Pativanita,  Pativai;ii  etc.  occur  only  in  neg.  form 
app°,  q.  V. 

Pativatat)  (adv.)  [pati-l- vatag,  ace.  cp.  Sk.  prativata  & 
prativatar)]  against  the  wind  (opp.  anuvatar))  Vin  11.218  ; 
S  1.13  :  Sn  622  ;  Dh  54,  125  ;  PvA  116;  Sdhp  425. 

Pativada  [pati+ vada]  retort,  recrimination  Miln  18  (vada° 
talk  and  counter-talk). 

Pstivapeti  [Caus.  of  pati+ vap]  to  turn  away  from,  to  free 
from,  cleanse  M  1.435  =  A  iv.423  ;  DhsA  407. 

Pativameti  [pati-)-Caus.  vam]  to  throw  out  again  Dh  1.39. 

Pativir|sa  [pati-agsa  with  euphonic  consonant  v  instead 
of  y  (pali-y-agsa)  and  assimilation  of  a  to  i  (patiyir)sa> 
pativigsa)]  lit.  "  divided  part,"  sub-part,  share,  bit, 
portion,  part  Vin  1.28  ;  111.60  (T.  reads  pativisa) ;  J  11.286; 
DhsA  135  ;  DhA  1.189  ;  111.304  ;  VvA  Oi  ("visa),  64  (v.  1. 
"visa),   120  (id.). 

Pativiosaka  [prec.-f  ka]  part  share,  portion  DhA  11.85. 

Pativigacchati  [pati-l- vi-l-gacchati]  to  go  apart  again,  to 
go  away  or  asunder  A  111.243  ;  Miln  51. 

Pativijanati  [pati-l- vi-t- janati]  to  recognise  Vin  111.130; 
Nd''  378  (ajanati  vijanati  p.  pativijjhati) ;  Miln  299. 

Pativijjba  (adj.)  [grd.  of  pativijjhati]  in  cpd.  dup"  hard  to 
penetrate  (lit.  &  fig.)  S  v. 454. 

Pativijjhati  [pati+ vijjhati  of  vyadh]  to  pierce  through, 
penetrate  (lit.  &  fig.),  intuit,  to  acquire,  master,  com- 
prehend Vin  1.183;  S  11.56;  v. 1 19,  278,  387,  454;  A 
IV. 228,  469;  Nd^  378;  J  1.67,  75;  Ps  i.iSo  sq.  ;  Miln 
344;  DhA  1.334.  —  ^°''-  pativijjha  Sn  90  (=aiiiiasi  sac- 
chakasi  SnA  166),  and  paccavyadhi  Th  i,  26=1161 
(°byadhi) ;  also  3rd  pi.  paccavidhur)  A  iv.228.  —  pp. 
patividdha  (q.  v.).  On  phrase  uttarir)  appativijjhanto. 
See  uttari. 

•  Pativijjhanaka  (adj.)  [pafi-l- vijjhana-l- ka.of  vyadh]  only 
in  neg.  ap°  impenetrable  DhA  iv.194. 

Patividita  [pp.  of  pati-t-vid]  known,  ascertained  D  1.2; 
Ps  1. 188. 

Patividdha  [pp.  of  pativijjhati]  being  or  having  penetrated 
or  pierced ;  having  acquired,  mastering,  knowing 
M  1.438  ;  S  11.56  (sup") ;  Ps  11.19,  20  ;  J  1.214  :  VvA  73 
("catusacca  =  saccanai)  kovida).  —  appatividdha  not 
pierced,  not  hurt  J  vi.446. 

Pativinaya  [pati-t-  vi-l-  ni]  repression,  subdual,  only  in  cpd. 
aghata"  D  111.262,  289  ;  A  111.185  sq.     See  aghata. 

Pativinicchinati  [pati-l-  vinicchinati]  to  try  or  judge  a  case 
again,  to  reconsider  J  11. 187. 


Pativinita 


22 


Patisankhati 


Pativinita  [pp.  of  pativineti]  removed,  dispelled,  subdued 
S  11.283;  V.76,  315. 

Pativineti  pati+vi+ni]  to  drive  out,  keep  away,  repress, 
subdues  1.228;  M1.13  ;  A  111.185  sq.  )  J  V1.551  ;  PvA  104 
(pipasag).  Cp.  BSk.  prativineti  MVastu  11. 121.  —  pp. 
pativinita  (q.  v.). 

Pativinodana  (nt.)  [fr.  pativinodeti]  removal,  driving  out. 
explusion  A  n.48,  50  :  Miln  320. 

Pativinodaya  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  pativinodeti]  dispelling,  sub- 
duing, riddance,  removal ;  dup°  hard  to  dispel  A 
111.184  sq. 

Pativinodeti  [pati+ vif  Cans,  of  nud,  Cp.  BSk.  prativinu- 
dati  Divy  34,  371  etc.]  to  remove,  dispel,  drive  out,  get 
rid  of  D  1. 138  ;  M  1.48  ;  Pv  111.58 ;  Pug  64  ;  VvA  305  ; 
PvA  60. 

Pativibhajati  [pati+ vibhajati]  to  divide  off, to  divide  into 
(equal)  parts  M  1.58  (cp.  111.91  ;  patibliaj"  &  v.  1. 
vibhaj"). 

Pativibhatta  (adj.)  [pati+ vibhatta]  (equally)  divided 
M  1.372;  A  IV.211;  VvA  50.  On  neg.  ap°  in  cpd. 
°bhogin  see  appati vibhatta. 

Pativirata  (adj.)  [pp.  of  pativiramati.  cp.  BSk.  prativi- 
ramati  Divy  11,  302,  585]  abstaining  from,  shrinking 
from  (with  abl.)  D  1.5  ;  M  in. 23  ;  S  v. 468  ;  It  63  ;  Pug  39, 
58  ;  DA  1.70  ;  PvA  28,  260.  —  app°  not  abstaining  from 
Vin  11.296  ;  S  v. 468  ;  It  64. 

Pativirati  (f.)  [fr.  pativirata]  abstinence  from  Dhs  299  ; 
M  111.74  ;  PvA  206. 

Pativiramati  [pati+ viramati]  to  abstain  from  M  1.152. 

Pativirujjhati  [pati+ vi+rudh]  to  act  hostile,  to  fall  out 
with  somebody,  to  quarrel  (saddhig)  J  iv.104.  —  pp. 
pativiruddha  (q.  v.). 

Pativiruddha  [pp.  of  pativirujjhati,  cp.  BSk.  prativiruddha 
rebellious  Divy  445]  obstructed  or  obstructing,  an 
adversary,  opponent  J  vi.12  ;  DA  1.51  ("a  satta=pare)  ; 
Miln  203,  403. 

Pativiruhati  [pati  + viruhati]  to  grow  again  Vism  419. 

Pativirodha  [pati-l- virodha]  hostility,  enmity,  opposition 
Dhs  418,  1060  ;  Pug  18  ;  Miln  203. 

Pativisittha  [pati+ visittha]  peculiar  M  1.372. 

Pativisesa  [pati  +  visesa]  sub-discrimination  J  11. 9. 

Pativissaka  (adj.)  [fr.  pati-l- *vesman  or  *vesya]  dwelling 
near,  neighbouring  M  1.126;  J  1. 114,  483;  111.163; 
IV.49  ;  V.434  ;  DhA  1.47  (°itthi),  155,  235  ("daraka). 

Pativutta  (pati-l- vutta,  pp.  of  vac]  said  against,  replied 
Vin  III. 131,  274. 

Pativekkhiya  see  ap°. 

Pativedeti  [pati-f  vedeti,  Caus.  of  vid]  to  make  known, 
declare,  announce  Vin  1.180  ;  S  l.ioi,  234  ;  Sn  415  (aor. 
"vedayi);  DA  1.227;  PvA  6  (pitisomanassarj). 

Pativedlia  [fr.  pati4- vyadhi  cp.  pativijjhati  &  BSk.  prati- 
vedha  MVastu  1.86]  lit.  piercing,  i.  e.  penetration, 
comprehension,  attainment,  insight,  knowledge  A  1.22, 
44;  D  111.253  ;  Ps  1.105;  11.50,  57,  105,  112,  148,  182; 
Vbh  330;  Miln  18;  SnA  no,  m  ;  Sdhp  65.  —  appati- 
vedha  non-intelligence,  ignorance  Vin  1.230  ;  S  11.92  ; 
111.261  ;  v. 431  ;  A  II. I  ;  Dhs  390,  1061,  1162  ;  Pug  21. 
—  duppativedha  (adj.)  hard  to  pierce  or  penetrate;  fig. 
difficult  to  master  Miln  250.  — raaggaphala"  realisation 
of  the  fruit  of  the  Path  DhA  i.iio. 


Pativera  [pafi-l- vera]  revenge  DhA  1.50. 

Pativellati  [pafi-l- vellati]  to  embrace,  cling  to  J  v.449. 

Pativyaharati  [pati+vyaharati]  to  desist  from,  aor.  pacca- 
vyahasi  D  11.232. 

Pativyubati   (pati°)   [pati-l- vyuhati]   to  heap  up  against 

(?)  SnA  554- 

Patisatjyamati  [pati-fsagyamati]  to  restrain,  to  exercise 
self-control  J  iv.396. 

Patisagyujati  [pati-l-sar)-l-yuj]  to  connect  with,  fig.  to 
start,  begin  (vadai)  a  discussion  or  argument)  S  1.22 1 
(balena  patisar)yuje=patipphareyya  C.  ;  "  engage  him- 
self to  bandy  with  a  fool  "  K.S.  284) ;  Sn  843  (vadar)  p.= 
pafipphareyya  kalahag  kareyya  Nd'  196).  — pp.  pati- 
sarjyutta  (q.  v.). 

PatisaQyutta  [pp.  of  patisagyujati]  connected  with, 
coupled,  belonging  to  Vin  iv.6  ;  S  1.2 10  (nibbana  °dham- 
mikatha) ;  Th  i,  598  ;  It  73  ;  VvA  6,  87  ;  PvA  12. 

Patisatjvidita  [pp.  of  pati-f  sag-)- vid  same  (prati)  at 
MVastu  III. 256]  apperceived,  known,  recognised,  in 
phrase  "  pubbe  appatisagvidita  paiiho  "  S  1154. 

Patisagvedin  (adj.)  [fr.  patisagvedeti ;  BSk.  pratisag- 
vedin  Divy  567]  experiencing,  feeling,  enjoying  or 
suffering  M  1.56;  S  1.196;  11. 122;  IV.41  ;  v. 310  sq.  ; 
A  1. 164  (sukhadukkha°) ;  iv.303  (id.) ;  v. 35  (id.) ;  It99  ; 
Ps  1.95,  1 14  (evagsukhadukkha"),  184,  186  sq.  ;  Pug  57, 
58. 

Patisagvedeti  [pati-l- sag -t- vedeti,  Caus.  of  vid]  to  feel, 
experience,  undergo,  perceive  D  1.43,  45;  A  1.157 
(domanassag)  ;  iv.406  (id.)  ;  Pug  59  ;  PvA  192  (maha- 
dukkhag).  There  is  also  a  by-form,  viz.  patisag- 
vediyati  S  11. 18,  75.  256  (attabhava-patilabhag) ;  It  38 
(sukkha-dukkhag  ;  v.  1.  "vedeti). 

Patisaghara9a  (nt.)  [fr.  patisagharati]  removing  Nett  27, 
41. 

Patisagbarati  [pati-t-sag-t-hf,  cp.  BSk.  pratisagharati 
MVastu  1.82]  to  draw  back,  withdraw,  remove,  take 
away,  give  up  Vin  11. 185  (sakavannag) ;  D  1.96  ;  S  v.156  ; 
PvA  92  (devarupag). 

Patisakkati  [pati -1- sakkati^]  to  run  back  Vin  11.195; 
A  IV.  190. 

Patisankhayanto  is  ppr.  of  pati-l-sag-l-ksi,  to  be  pacified 
Th  I,  371. 

Patisankharoti  [pati-l-sag-l-kr]  to  restore,  repair,  mend 
Vin  II. 160;  A  11.249;  J  III. 159  (nagarag).  Caus.  II. 
patisankharapeti  to  cause  to  repair  or  build  up  again 
M  111.7  ;  J  VI. 390  (gehani). 

Patisankha  (f)  [pati-l-sankha  of  khya]  reflection,  judg- 
ment, consideration  Vin  1.213;  S  IV. 104  (°yoniso) ; 
Ps  1.33.  45.  57.  60,  64;  Pug  25,  57;  Dhs  1349.  appa- 
tisankha  (see  also  °sankhati)  want  of  judgment,  incon- 
sideration  Ps  1.33,  45;  Dhs  1346  =  Pug  21.  —  Note.  In 
comb"  patisankha  yoniso  "  carefully,  with  proper  care 
or  intention  "  p.  is  to  be  taken  as  ger.  of  patisankhati 
(q.  v.).  This  connection  is  frequent,  e.  g.  S  IV. 104; 
A  II. 40  ;  Nd'  496  ;  Nd'  540. 

Patisankhati  [pati4-sag-)-khya]  to  be  careful,  to  think 
over,  reflect,  discriminate,  consider ;  only  in  ger.  pati- 
sankha (as  adv.)  carefully,  intently,  with  discrimination 
Vin  1. 213  ;  M  1.273  ;  in. 2  ;  J  1.304  ;  Nd-  540  ;  Pug  25  ; 
cp.  patisankha  ( -I- yoniso);  also  ger.  patisankhaya 
Sddp  394.  —  Opp.  appatisankha  inconsiderately,  in 
phrase  sahasa  app°  rashly  &  without  a  thought  M  1.94  ; 
S  II. 1 10,  219.  —  Cp.  patisa&cikkhati. 


Patisankhana 


23 


Patisaraniya 


Patisankhana  (nt.)  [fr.  patisankhati]  carefulness,  mind- 
fulness, consideration  J  1.502;  VvA  327;  DhsA  402 
(°panna) ;  Sdhp  397.  -°bala  power  of  computation 
A  1.52,  94  ;  II. 142  ;  D  111.213,  244  ;  Ps  11. 169,  176 ;  Dhs 
1354  (cp.  Dhs  trsl'  354);  Nett  15,  16,  38. 

Patisankharika  &  °ya  (adj.)  [fr.  patisankharoti]  serving 
for  repair  Vin  in. 43  (daruni) ;  PvA  141  (id.  ;  °ya). 

Patisancikkhati  [pati+sari  +  cikkhati  of  khya ;  cp.  pati- 
sankhati &  BSk.  pratisanciksati  MVastu  11. 314]  to 
think  over,  to  discriminate,  consider,  reflect  Vin  1.5  ; 
D  1.63  ;  M  1.267,  469  ;  III-33  ;  S  1.137  '■  A  1.205  ;  Pug  25  ; 
Vism  283. 

Patisanjlvita  [pp.  of  pati-t-sag-t- jiv]  revived,  resurrected 
M  1.333. 

Patisatena  (adv.)  [pati-l-instr.  of  satar)]  by  the  hundred, 
i.  e.  in  front  of  a  hundred  (people)  Vin  1.269. 

Patisatta  [pati -1- sattu]  an  enemy  (in  retaliation)  J  11.406  ; 
Nd'  172,   173  ;  Miln  293. 

Patisanthata  [pp.  of  patisantharati]  kindly  received 
(covered,  concealed  ?  C.)  J  vi.23  (  =  paticchaditar) 
guttai)  paripunijar)  va  C). 

Patisantharati  [pati-t-  sarj  -(-  tharati  of  stf]  to  receive  kindly, 
to  welcome,  Miln  409  ;  DhsA  397.  ger.  "santhaya 
J  VI. 351. — j»p.  pa^isanthata  (q.  v.). 

Patisanthara  [fr.  pati -f- sag  +  sty]  lit.  spreading  before,  i.  e. 
friendly  welcome,  kind  reception,  honour,  goodwill, 
favour,  friendship  D  111.213,  244;  A  1.93;  111.303  sq.  ; 
IV. 28,  120;  V.166,  168  (°aka  adj.  one  who  welcomes); 
J  II. 5  J ;  Dh  376  (expH  as  amisa"  and  dhamma"  at  DhA 
iv.iii,  see  also  DhsA  397  sq.  &  Dhs  trsl.  350)  ;  Dhs  1344  ; 
Vbh  360  ;  Miln  409.  patisantharar)  karoti  to  make 
friends,  to  receive  friendly  PvA  12,  44,  141,  187. 

Pafisandahati  [pati-l-sandahati]  to  undergo  reunion  (see 
next)  Miln  32. 

Patisandhi  [fr.  pati -1- sag -l-dha]  reunion  (of  vital  principle 
with  a  body),  reincarnation,  metempsychosis  Ps  i.i  i  .sq., 
52,  59  sq.  ;  11.72  sq.  ;  Nett  79,  80  ;  Miln  140  ;  DhA  11.85  ; 
VvA  53  ;  PvA  8,  79,  136,  168.  A  detailed  discussion  of 
p.  is  to  be  found  at  VbhA  155-160.  — appatisandhika 
see  Sep. 

Patisama  (adj.)  [pati-l-sama]  equal,  forming,  a  counter- 
part Miln  205  (raja°)  ;  neg.  appatisama  not  having  one's 
equal,  incomparable  J  1.94;  Miln  331. 

Patisambhida  (f)  [pati -1- sag -1- bhid  ;  the  BSk.  pratisagvid 
is  a  new  formation  resting  on  confusion  between  bhid 
&  vid,  favoured  by  use  &  meaning  of  latter  root  in  P. 
patisagvidita.  In  BSk.  we  find  pratisagvid  in  same 
application  as  in  P.,  viz.  as  fourfold  artha°  dharma" 
nirukti"  pratibhana"  (?)  MVastu  111.321]  lit.  "  resolving 
continuous  breaking  up,"  i.  e.  analysis,  analytic  insight, 
discriminating  knowledge.  See  full  discussion  & 
expl"  of  term  at  Kvu  trsl"  377-382.  Always  referred  to 
as  "  the  four  branches  of  logical  analysis  "  (catasso  or 
catupatisambhida),  viz.  attha°  analysis  of  meanings 
"  in  extension  "  ;  dhamma''  of  reasons,  conditions,  or 
causal  relations;  nirutti"  of  [meanings  "  in  intension  " 
as  given  in]  definitions  patibhana"  or  intellect  to  which 
things  knowable  by  the  foregoing  processes  are  pre- 
sented (after  Kvu  trsl").  In  detail  at  A  11. 160  ;  111.113. 
120  ;  Ps  1.88,  iig;ii.i50,  157,  185,  193  ;  Vbh  293-305  ; 
VbhA  386  sq.  (cp.  Vism  440  sq.),  391  sq.  —  See  further 
A  1.22  ;  IV.31  ;  Nd^  386  under  patibhanavant ;  Ps  1.84. 
132,  134;  11.32,  56,  116,  189:  Miln  22  (attha-dh°- 
nirutti-patibhana-paramippatta),  359  ;  VvA  2  ;  DhA 
IV. 70  (catusu  p-°  asu  cheka).  p°-patta  one  who  has 
attained  mastership  in  analysis  A  1.24;  111.120;  Ps 
11.202.  —  Often  included  in  the  attainment  of  Arahant- 


ship,    in    formula    "  saha    patisambhidahi    arahattag 
papunati,"  viz.  Miln  18;  DhA  11.58,  78,  93. 

Patisammajjati  [pati-l-sammajjati]  to  sweep  over  again 
Miln  15. 

Patisammodeti  [pati-l-  sag-f  Caus.  of  mad]  to  greet  friendly 
in  return  J  vi.224  (=sammodaniya-kathaya  patikatheti 
C). 

Patisarana  (nt.)  [pati-l-  sarana^]  refuge  in  (-°),  shelter,  help, 
protection  M  1.295  (mano  as  p.  of  the  other  5  senses) ; 
111.9  ;  S  IV.221  ;  v. 218;  A  1.199  (Bhagavag") ;  11. 148 
(sa°  able  to  be  restored);  in. 186  (kamma°)  ;  iv.1.58. 
35':  V.355  ;  J  1. 213;  VI. 398. — appatisarana  (adj.) 
without  shelter,  unprotected  Vin  11. 153  (so  read  for 
appatiss").  —  Note.  In  meaning  "  restoration  "  the 
derivation  is  prob.  fr.  pati+sf  to  move  (Sk.  sarana  and 
not  sarana  protection).     Cp.  patisaraniya. 

Patisarati^  [pati-l-  sr]  to  run  back,  stay  back,  lag  behind 
Sn  8  sq.  (opp.  atisarati ;  aor.  paccasari  expl"*  by  ohiyyi 
SnA  21). 

Patisarati^  [pati-(-smr]  to  think  back  upon,  to  mention 
DA  1.267. 

Patisallana  (&  °ana,  e.  g.  S  v. 320)  (nt.)  [for  *patisallayana, 
fr.  pati-(-sag-(- li,  cp.  patilina  &  patiliyati,  also  BSk. 
pratisaglayana  Divy  156,  194,  494]  retirement  for  the 
purpose  of  meditation,  solitude,  privacy,  seciusion 
D  in. 252  ;  M  1.526;  S  1.77;  111.15;  iv.8o,  144;  v. 12, 
398,  414;  A  11.51,  176;  III. 86  sq.,  116  sq.,  195;  IV. 15, 
36.  88;  v.166,  168  ;  Sn  69  (cp.  Nd^s.  v.)  ;  J  11.77  (pati°) ; 
Vbh  244,  252  ;  Miln  138,  412. 

-arama  fond(ness)  of  solitude  or  seclusion  (also  °rata) 
A  III. 261  sq.  ;  It  39  ;  Nd^  433.  -saruppa  very  suitable 
for  seclusion  Vism  90. 

-Patisalliyati  (°llyati)  [fr.pati-fsag-l-li,cp.  patiliyati]  to  be 
in  seclusion  (for  the  purpose  of  meditation)  Vin  111.39 
(inf.  "salliyitug)  ;  D  11.237;  S  v. 12  (id.),  320,  325; 
Miln  139.  —  pp.  patisallina  (q.  v.). 

Patisallina  [pp.  of  patisalliyati ;  cp.  BSk.  pratisaglina 
Divy  196,  291.]  secluded,  retired,  gone  into  solitude, 
abstracted,  plunged  in  meditation,  separated  Vin  i.ioi 
(rahogata+);  D  1.134,  151  ;  S  1.71,  146  sq.  (divaviha- 
ragata-l-),  225:  11.74  (rahogata-H ) ;  iv.80,  90,  144; 
v. 415  ;  A  11.20  ;  SnA  346  (pati") ;  J  1.349  ;  Miln  10,  138 
sq.  ;  VvA  3  ;  DA  1.309  (pati°). 

Patisa^heyya  (nt.)  [pati-t-satheyya]  a  deceit  in  return  (cp. 
patikuta)  J  11. 183. 

Patisamita  [pp.  of  patisameti]  arranged,  got  ready  Vism  9 1 . 

Patisameti  [pati-l- Caus.  of  iam,  samati  to  make  ready; 
cp.  BSk.  pratisamayati  Divy  passim]  to  set  in  order, 
arrange,  get  ready  Vin  11.113,  211,  216;  M  1.456; 
J  III. 72  ;  Miln  15  (pattacivarag) ;  VvA  118  (v.  1.  °yapeti), 
157  (v.  1.  °nameti). 

Pa(isayati  [pati-l-  sayati]  to  taste,  eat,  partake  of  food 
Vin  II. 177. 

Patisara  [pati  +  smr]  see  vi°. 

Patisarana  (nt.)  [fr.  pati-t-saveti]  act  of  protection,  expia- 
tion, atonement  Miln  344  (in  law) ;  appl^  fig.  in  psy- 
chology M  1.295  =  S  V.218. 

Patisaraniya  (adj.  nt.)  [a  grd.  formation  fr.  pati-l- sareti, 
Caus.  of  sr  to  move]  only  as  t.t.  in  comb"  with  kamma 
(official  act,  chapter),  i.  e.  a  formal  proceeding  by  which 
a  bhikkhu  expiates  an  offence  which  he  has  committed 
against  someone,  reconciliation  (cp.  Vi«.  Texts  11.364) 
Vin  1.49  (one  of  the  5  Sangha-kammas,  viz.  tajjaniya", 
nissaya",  pabbajaniya",  p.°,  ukkhepaniya"),  143  (id.), 
326 ;  11.15-20,  295  ;  A  1.99  ;  iv.346  ;  DhA  11.75. 


Patisarin 


24 


Patta 


Patisarin  (adj.)  [fr.  pati  +  sr,  cp.  patisaraniya  &  patisarana 
Note]  falling  back  upon,  going  back  to,  trusting  in, 
leaning  on  (-°)  D  1.99  (gotta°)  :  S  1. 153  (id.)  ;  u.284  (id.). 

Patisasana  (nt.)  [pati+sasana]  counter-message,  reply 
DhA  1.392. 

Patisibbita  [pp-  of  pati+sibbati]  sewn,  embroidered  VvA 

167  (pati=). 

Pa(i3isaka  [pati+slsaka]  a  false  top-knot,  "chignon" 
(?)  J  U.197  (°r)  patimuricitva) ;  v. 49  (id.);  Miln  9<j 
(mundaka"). 

Patisutta  [pp.  of  pati-f  svap]  sunk  into  sleep  Th  i,  203. 

Patisnmbhita  [pp.  of  pati-i-sumbh]  fallen  down  Pv  iii.i* 
(  =  patita  PvA  174). 

Pa^isura  [pati-l-sura]  a  rival  hero  or  fighter,  an  opponent 
in  fight  Sn  831  (  =  patipurisa  patisattu  patimalla  Nd' 
172);  Ndi  173  (id.). 

Patisettha  (adj.)  [pati-l-settha]  having  a  superior;  neg. 
app°  incomparable,  unsurpassed  Miln  357  (appati- 
bhaga-(- ). 

Patisedha  [fr.  pati+sidhS  sedhati  drive  off]  warding  off, 
prohibition  Miln  314  ("  resubjugation ")  ;  SnA  402 
(with  ref.  to  part  "  na ") ;  KhA  170  (id.);  PvA  11 
(°nipata="  ma  ") ;  VvA  224. 

Patisedhaka  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  patisedha]  warding  off,  one  who 
prevents  or  puts  a  stop  to  S  1.22 1  ;  Miln  344. 

Patisedhati  &  (Cans.)  ^sedheti  [pati-l-  sedhati]  to  ward  off, 
prohibit,  prevent,  refuse  S  iv.341  ;  PvA  n. 

Patisedhana  (nt.)  [cp.  patisedha]  warding  off,  refusal, 
prohibition,  stopping  S  1. 221,  223;  PvA  II,  25;  Sdhp 
397- 

Patisedhitar  [n.  ag.  fr.  patisedhati]  one  who  prohibits  or 
refuses  J  11. 123.  =  v. 91. 

Pa(isena  [pati+sena.  of  either  si  or  gri,  cp.  usseneti] 
repulsion,  opposition,  enmity,  retaliation ;  only  in 
comp"  with  kr  as  ^senikaroti  to  make  opposition,  to 
oppose,  retaliate  Sn  932,  cp.  Nd^  397  ;  -"senikattar  (n. 
ag.),  one  who  repulses,  fighter,  retaliator,  arguer  Sn  832, 
cp.  Nd^  173. 

Patiseneti  [pati-l-seneti,  see  usseneti]  to  repel,  push  away. 
be  inimical  towards,  retaliate  (opp.  usseneti)  A  11. 2 15 
(patisseneti) ;  Sn  390  ("seniyati). 

Patisevati  [pati-l-sevati.  cp.  BSk.  pratisevate  Divy  25S 
in  same  meaning]  to  follow,  pursue,  indulge  in  (ace), 
practise  Vin  11.296  (methunar)  dhammai)) ;  M  1. 10;  A 
11.54  (methunai)) ;  J  1.437  ;  vi.73.  505  ;  Dh  67  ;  Nd'  496  ; 
Pug  62  ;  Miln  224 ;  DhA  11.40  ;  PvA  130  ;  Sdhp  39b.  — 
Note,  patisevati  is  spelt  pati°  at  Dh  67.  t/S  ;  J  111.275, 
278. 

Patisevana  (nt.)  [fr.  patisevati]  going  after,  indulging  in, 
practice  M  i.io. 

Patisevitar  [n.  ag.  of  patisevati]  one  who  practises,  pur- 
sues or  indulges  in  (ace.)  A  111.143  sq.  (bhesajjag). 

Patisotan  (adv.)  [pati-l-sotar),  ace.  of  sota]  against  the 
stream  (opp.  anusotar))  It  114;  J  1.70;  PvA  154. — 
patisotagamin  going  against  the  stream,  toiling,  doing 
hard  work  S  1.136  ;  A  11.6  (opp.  anu°),  214  sq. 

Patissata[pati-l-sata,  pp.of  smr]  recollecting,  thoughtful, 
mindful,  minding  Sn  283=  Miln  411  ;  Dh  144  (t) ;  Vv 
21'°  :  and  with  spelling  pati°  at  S  III.  1 43  ;  iv.74,  322,  351  ; 
A  III. 24  ;  It  10,  21,  81  ;  Sn  283,  413. 

Patissati  (f.)  [pati-l-  sati  of  smr]  mindfulness,  remembrance, 
memory  M  1.36  sq.  ;  Dhs'23  ;  Pug  25.  app°  lapse  of 
memory  Dhs  1349- 


Pa(issatika  (adj.)  [fr.  pafissati]  mindful,  thoughtful  Th  i. 

42. 

Pa^issava  [fr.  pati-Hirn]  assent,  promise,  obedience  J 
VI. 220  ;  VvA  351  (cp.  patissava  VvA  347). 

Patissavata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  patissava]  obedience;  neg. 
appatissavata  want  of  deference  Dhs  1325  =  Pug  20. 

Patissa  &  Patissa  (f.)  [pati-l-§m.  cp.  patissunati  &  patis- 
savin  ;  in  BSk.  we  find  pratisa  which  if  legitimate  would 
refer  the  word  to  a  basis  different  than  sru.  The  form 
occurs  in  cpd.  sapratisa  respectful  Di\'y  ;  also  MVastu 
1. 516;  11.258;  besides  as  sapratisa  MVastu  in. 345] 
deference,  obedience,  only  in  cpd.  sappatissa  (q.  v.) 
obedient,  deferential  It  10  (sappatissa) ;  Vv  84*'  (cp. 
VvA  347),  &  appatissa  disobedient,  not  attached  to 
S  1. 139;  11.224  sq.  ;  A  11.20;  III. 7.  247,  439;  J  11.352 
("vasa  anarchy ;  reading  t)  ;  PvA  89. 

Patissavin  (adj.)  [fr.  pati-l- srn]  assenting,  ready,  obedient, 
willing  D  1.60  ;  S  in.  113  (kinkara-pati°). 

PatissUQati  [pati-l-sru]  to  assent,  promise,  agree  aor. 
paccassosi  Vin  1.73  ;  D  1.236  ;  S  1.147,  155  ;  Sn  p.  50,  and 
patisuni  SnA  314;  ger.  "sunitva  freq.  in  formula 
"  sadhu  ti  patissunitva  "  asserting  his  agreement,  saying 
yes  S  1.119  ;  PvA  13,  54.  55  ;  &  passim  ;  also  patissutva 
S  1. 155.  —  f.  abstr.  patissutavata  SnA  314. 

Patisseneti  see  patiseneti. 

PatibaQsati  [for  ghagsati  ?]  to  beat,  knock  against  PvA 
271  (for  ghatfeti  Pv  iv.io^;  v.  1.  patipisati), 

Patihankhati  [fut.  of  patihanti]  only  in  one  stock  phrase 
viz.  huranaii  ca  vedanai)  patihankhami  navan  ca 
vedanai)  na  uppadessami  "  I  shall  destroy  any  old 
feeling  and  not  produce  any  new  "  S  iv.  i04  =  A  11.40  = 
:n.388  =  iv.i67  =  Ndi  496  =  Nd^  540^;  Vism  32,  33. 

Patibata  [pp.  of  patihanti]  stricken,  smitten,  corrupted 
Pvin.7»;  PvA  20  (°citta),  207  (id.). —  app°  unobstructed 
DhA  II. 8  ;  VvA  .14. 

Patihanana   (nt.)   [fr.  pati-t-han]    repulsion,  warding  off 

Vism  3 1 . 

Patibananaka  (adj.)  [fr.  pati-l-han]  one  who  offers  resist- 
ance DhA  1.2 1 7. 

Patibanti  [pati+ban]  to  strike  against,  ward  off.  keep 
away,  destroy  M  1.273;  Miln  367;  ppr.  patihanamana 
meeting,  impinging  on.  striking  against  Vism  343.  — 
ger.  patihacca  S  v. 69,  237,  285  ;  fut.  patihankhati ;  pp. 
patihata  (q.  v.).  —  Pass,  patihaiiiiati  It  103;  J  1.7; 
DhsA  72. 

Patibarati  [pati-l-hr]  to  strike  in  return  Vin  n.265  ; 
D  1.142  ;  S  IV. 299.  —  Caus.  patihareti  to  repel,  avoid 
J  VI. 256,  295.  —  Cp.  patihariya  etc. 

Patu  (adj.)  [cp.  Epic.  Sk.  paju]  sharp,  pungent;  fig.  keen, 
wise,  clever,  skilful  Vism  337  (°saiinakicca),  538.  Cp. 
paddha^  &  patava. 

Patuppadana  (nt.)  [pata  (?)  -1- upp°]  subtraction  (opp. 
sankalana)  D.A.  1.95.  The  word  is  not  clear  (cp.  Dial. 
1.22). 

Patnva  at  D  1.54  is  read  as  pacuta  by  Bdhgh.  &  trsl°  (see 
Dial.  1.72).     See  under  pavuta. 

Patola  [dial.  ?]  a  kind  of  cucumber,  Trichosanthes  Dioeca 
Vin  1.20 1  (°panna). 

I   Patta  [cp.  late  Sk.  patta,  doubtful  etym]  i.  slab,  tablet, 

I        plate,  in  cpds.  ayo°  iron  plate  A  iv.130.   131  ;    J  IV.7 

(suvanna")  ;    PvA   43    (ayomaya°)  ;   loha°   brass   plate 

I        PvA  44  ;  sila°  stone  slab  J  1.50  etc      When  written  on. 


I 


Pattaka 


25 


Panama 


it  is  placed  into  a  casket  (maiijusa)  J  11.36;  iv.335.  — 
2.  a  bandage,  strip  (of  cloth)  Vv  a*^  (ayoga°)=VvA 
14J.  —  3.  fine  cloth,  woven  silk,  cotton  cloth,  turban 
(-cloth)  Vin  11.266  (dussa°=setavattha-patta  Bdhgh, 
see  Vin.  Texts  111.341);  S  11. 102  (id.)  J  1.62  (sumana° 
cloth  with  a  jasmine  pattern);  vi.iqi  (°sataka),  370 
(nali°) ;  KhA  51  ("bandhana) ;  DA  1.87  (amilaka) ;  DhA 
1395  ("vattha)  ;  11.42  (rajata").  — dupatta  "  double  " 
cloth,  see  under  dvi  B  11 

Pattaka  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  patta]  made  of  or  forming  a  strip  of 
cloth;  a  bandage,  strip  (of  cloth),  girdle  Vin  11. 136 
(pattika);  A  1.254  (=pattika  C.)  ;  J  v.339  (aya°  an 
iron  girdle),  YbhA  230  (pattika). 

Pattana  (nt.)  [*Sk.  pattana]  a  place,  city,  port  J  1.121  ; 
IV.  16,  137,  V.75  ;  PvA  53.  —  °ka  a  sort  of  village  J 
VI.456. 

Pattika  see  pattaka. 

Pattoli  in  yana°  at  Vism  328  is  doubtful.  It  might  be  read 
as  yana-kajopi  (on  account  of  comb"  with  kumbhi- 
mukha),  or  (preferably)  as  putoli  (with  v.  1.  BB),  which 
is  a  regular  variant  for  mutoji.  The  trsl"  would  be 
"  provision  bag  for  a  carriage."  See  further  discussed 
under  mutoli. 

Patthft  (adj)  [fr.  pa+stha,  see  patthahati]  "standing 
out,"  setting  out  or  forth,  undertaking,  able  (clever  ?) 
Vin  III. 2 10  (dhammir)  kathai)  katug)  ;  iv.60  (civara- 
kammai)  katug),  254  (dhammirj  kathag  katui))  285, 
290  ;  Nd'  p.  46  (for  Sn  prose  part  puttha  ;  v.  1.  settha)  ; 
Nd^  no.  38S  (in  expl"  of  patthagu  Sn  11)95  '.  i^ere  it 
clearly  means  "  being  near,  attending  on,  a  pupil  or 
follower  of  ").     See  also  paddha'  and  paddhagu. 

Pattbapita  [pp-  of  patthahati ;  cp.  BSk.  prasthapita  Divy 
514]  established,  or  given  PvA  119  (cp.  patitthapitatta). 

Pattbahati  [pa  +  stha  =  P.  titthati,  with  short  base  *ttha 
for  ♦tittha  in  trs.  meaning,  see  patitthahati]  to  put 
down,  set  down,  provide;  ppr.  patthayamana  PvA  128 
(varamana+  ;  v.  1.  patthap") ;  aor.  patthayi  Pv  11. g^* 
(danag  ;  v.  1.  patthapayi,  expH  by  patthapesi  PvA  126). 
ger.  patthaya  see  sep. — Cans.  II.  patthapeti  to  put 
out  or  up,  to  furnish,  establish,  give  S  11.25  ;  Pv  11.9^* 
(fut.  "ayissati  danag,  v.  1.  patthayissati ;  expl''  by 
pavattessati  PvA  123);  J  1.117;  PvA  54  (bhattag),  126 
(danag).  —  pp.  pafthapita  (q.  v.). 

Patthana  (nt.)  [fr.  pa  +  stha,  cp.  patthahati]  setting  forth, 
putting  forward  ;  only  in  cpd.  sati°  setting  up  of  mind- 
fulness (q.  V.  and  see  discussion  of  term  at  Dial  11.324). 
Besides  in  later  lit.  meaning  "  origin,"  starting  point, 
cause,  in  title  of  the  7th  book  of  the  Abhidhamma,  also 
called  Mahapakarana.  See  I^edi,  J.F.T.S.  1915-16, 
p.  26  ;  Mrs.  Rh.  D..  Tika  p.  i,  vi.  —  At  Sdhp  32  i  it  has 
the  Sk.  meaning  of  "  setting  out  "  (?). 

Patthaya  (indecl.)  [ger.  fr.  patthahati]  putting  down, 
starting  out  from,  used  as  prep,  (with  abl.)  from  .  .  . 
onward,  beginning  with,  henceforth,  from  the  time  of, 
e.  g.  ajjato  p.  from  to-day  VvA  246  ;  ito  p.  from  here, 
henceforth  J  1.60,  63,  1511;  cp.  J  1.52  (mulato)  ;  vi.336 
(sisato)  ;  PvA  11  (galato),  13  (gihikalato).  patthaya- 
yava  (with  ace.)  from — up  to  Vism  374. 

Patthika  in  panca°  see  under  pai^ca. 

Pathati  [path  to  read,  Sk.  pathati]  to  read  (of  a  text)  VvA 
72  ;  PvA  58,  59,  70  etc.  ;  see  also  patha. 

Pathana  (nt.)  [fr.  pathati]  reading  (textual)  Miln  344. 

Pathama  (adj.)  [Ved.  prathama,  cp.  Av.  fratsma ;  also 
Ved.  pratarag  further,  Gr.  irpbripoi  superl.  formation 
fr.  prep,  ♦pro,  Sk.  pra  etc.  see  pa°]  num.  ord.  "  the 
first,"  in  foil,  meanings:  (i)  the  first,  foremost,  former 


Sn  93,  436,  1031  ;  J  II.  no;  KhA  1.192  ;  DhA  in. 5,  19b 
(°vaya,  contrasted  with  majjhima  &  pacchima) ;  PvA 
5.  13,  56.  nt.  ace.  pathamag  at  first,  for  the  first  time 
Vin  1.16  ;  D  11. 14  ;  Dh  158  ;  J  1.222  ;  11.103,  153  ;  often 
as  first  part  of  cpd.  "-,  meaning  either  "  first  "  or 
"recently,  newly,  just"  Vin  i.i  ("abhisambuddha 
having  just  attained  Buddhaship) ;  D  iii.253(  "abhinib- 
batta),  Sn  420  ("uppattika  "  in  his  first  youth ") ; 
J  '"-394  (°uggata  newly  sprung  up).  —  A  second  corn- 
par,  formation  is  pathamatara,  only  as  adv.  °g  at  the 
(very)  first,  as  early  as  possible,  first  of  all  Vin  1.30  ; 
J  VI.510  ;  DhA  1. 138  ;  VvA  230  ;  PvA  93. 

Pathavatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  pathavi]  earthliness  M  1.329. 

Patbavant  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  pathavi]  a  wayfarer  S  1.37. 

Patbavl  (f.)  [Ved.  prthivi,  doublets  in  Pali  pathavi,  puthavi, 
puthuvi.  puthuvi,  see  Geigcr,  I'.Gr.  §§  12*,  i;».  To  ad., 
prthu  :  see  puthu,  prath  to  expand,  thus  lit.  the  broad 
one,  breadth,  expansion.  Not  (as  Bdhgh  at  Vism  364  : 
patthatatta  pathavi,  cp.  Cpd.  155  even  modern  lin- 
guists !)  to  be  derived  fr.  pattharati]  the  earth.  Ace. 
to  Nd^  389  syn.  with  jagati.  It  figures  as  the  first 
element  in  enum°  of  the  4  elements  (see  dhatu  i),  viz. 
p.,  apo,  tejo,  vayo  (earth,  water,  fire,  wind  or  the 
elements  of  the  extension,  cohesion,  heat  and  motion  : 
Cpd.  155).  At  D  III. 87  sq.  a*  Vism  418  rasa"  is  opposed 
to  bhumi-pappataka.  Otherwise  it  is  very  frequent  in 
representing  the  earth  as  solid,  firm,  spacious  ground. 
See  D  II. 14.  lO;  M  1.327  sq.  ;  S  1.113  (p.  udriyati), 
119  (id.),  186;  11. 133,  169  sq.  ;  V.45,  78,  246,  456  sq.  ; 
A  11.50;  IV.89,  374,  V.263  sq.  ;  Sn  307,  IC97  ;  It  2 1  ; 
Dh  41,  44,  178  (pathavya) ;  Pv  11. 6*  ;  Miln  418;  PvA 
57,75,174.  — maha°M  1.127  ;  S  11.179,  263  ;  111.150; 
J  1.25,  74;  III. 42  ;  Miln  187;  aya°  iron  soil  (of  Avici) 
DhA  1. 1 48.     In  comp"  both  pathavi"  &  pathavi". 

-oja  (pathavoja)  sap  or  essence  of  the  earth  DhA 
11,154.  -kampa  shaking  the  earth,  an  earthquake 
DA  1. 130.  -kampana  -kampa  J  1.47.  -kasina  the 
earth  artifice  (see  Dhs  trsl  43)  D  in. 286.  -dhatu  the 
earth  element  (see  above)  D  1.2  15  ;  11.294  ■  111.228,  247  ; 
M  1.185;  421  ;  S  n.170;  Dhs  588,  648.  962  (cp.  Dhs. 
Irsl"  241)  ;  Nett  73,  74  ;  VbhA  55  ;  -mandala  the  circle 
of  the  E.  D  1. 1 34  ;  S  1. 10 1  ;  A  iv.gn.  -rasa  taste  of  earth 
S  1. 134  ;  SnA  5.  -lekha  writing  on  (or  in)  earth  A  1.283  ; 
Pug  32.  -saiiiia  earth  consciousness  M.  11.105;  A 
IV. 312  ;  v. 7  sq..  318  sq.  353  sq.  -sama  like  the  earth 
M  1. 127,  423  ;  Dh  95. 

Pa^ayhati  v.  1.  at  PvA  60  for  T.  paridayhati. 

PaQa  [in  this  meaning  unknown  in  Sk  ;  only  in  one  faulty 
var.  lect.  as  "  house  "  ;  see  BR  s.  v.  pana.  Usual 
meaning  "  wager  "]  a  shop  J  iv.488  [v.  1.  pana]. 

PaQaka  see  pannaka.     — panaka  (comb)  see  phanaka. 

Panati  [cp.  Sk.  panati]  to  sell,  barter,  bargain,  risk,  bet 
J  v. 24  (=voharati  attanag  vikkinati  C). — See  also 
panitaka  &  paniya. 

Fa^amati  [pa -1- nam]  to  bend,  to  be  bent  or  inclined  Ps 
1. 165,  167  ;  —  pp.  panata  ibid.  —  Cans,  panameti  (q.  v.). 

Pavaya  [classical  Sk.  pranaya,  fr  pra-t-ni]  affection 
J  VI. 102. 

Pavava  [cp.  Ep.  Sk.  panava,  dial ;  accord,  to  BR  a  cor- 
ruption of  pranava]  a  small  drum  or  cymbal  D  1.79  ; 
S  II.  128  ;  IV. 344  ;  A  ill  17,  241  ;  J  111.59  (of  an  execu- 
tioner ;  PvA  4  in  id.  p.  has  pataha)  ;  Th  i,  467  ;  Bu  1.32  • 
Vv8i'»;  Dhs62i  (°sadda);  DhA  1.18. 

Papama  [fr.  pa -(-nam, see  panamati]  bending,  salutation, 
obeisance  (cp.  panameti  1)  VvA  321  ("g  karoti  =aiijalig 
karoti).  —  As  panamana  nt.  at  J  iv.307. 


Panamita 


26 


Pandu 


PaQamita  [pp-  of  panameti]  i.  (=panaraeti  1)  raised,  bent 
or  stretched  out  Sn  352  (aiijali  sup°).  —  2.  (  =panameti 
3)  dismissed,  given  leave  Vin  1.54  ;  M  1.457  (bhikkhu- 
sangho) ;  Miln  209  (id.),  187. 

Panameti  [Caus.  of  panamati]  i.  to  bend  forth  or  over, 
stretch  out,  raise,  in  phrase  anjaliQ  p.  to  raise  the  hands 
in  respectful  salutation  Vin  n.i88  ;  D  1.118  ;  Sn  p.  79.  — 

2.  to  bend  to  or  over,  to  shut,  in  kavatag  p.  to  shut 
the  door  Vin  1.87;  11. 114,  207;  pattar)  Vin  11. 2  16. — 

3.  to  make  go  away,  to  turn  someone  away,  give  leave, 
dismiss  Vin  1.54  ;  11.303  ;  S  1.7  ;  Th  i,  51 1,  557  ;  J  v. 314  ; 
Miln  187  (parisai)) ;  Pass,  panamiyati  (ibid.) — pp. 
panamita  (q.  v.). 

Pa^itaka  (adj.  nt.)  [fr.  panita  —  pp.  of  panati]  staked, 
wagered,  bet,  wager,  stake  at  play  J  vi.192  (so  read 
for  panita"). 

Paijidahati  [pa+ni  +  dha]  to  put  forth,  put  down  to, 
apply,  direct,  intend  ;  aspire  to,  long  for,  pray  for  S 
V.  156     (atthaya    cittar)     panidahii)).     ger.     panidhaya 

5  1.42  =Sn  660  (vacarf  manaii  ca  papakar))  ;  S  1.170 
(ujui)  kayar)) ;  A  in. 249  (deva-nikayaij  p.) ;  iv.461  sq. 
(id.);  Vbh  244  (ujur)  kayar)  p.)  =  DA  1. 210.  Also  lit. 
(as  prep,  with  ace.)  "  in  the  direction  of,  towards  " 
M  1.74  (angara-kasur)). — pp.  panihita  (q.  v.). 

Pa9idhana  (nt.)  [fr.  panidahati ;  cp.  philosophical  literature 

6  BSk.  pranidhana]  aspiration,  longing,  prayer  VvA 
270  ;  Sdhp  344. 

Pa^idhi  (f)  [fr.  panidahati;  cp.  BSk.  prariidhi  Divy  102, 
134,  in  same  meaning.  The  usual  Sk.  meaning  is 
"  spy "]  aspiration,  request,  prayer,  resolve  D  n;.29, 
276;  S  11.99,  154;  III. 256  (ceto°)  ;  IV. 303 ;  A  11.32; 
iv.239sq.  (ceto°) ;  v.212  sq.  ;  Sn  8or  ;  VV47";  Nd'  109  ; 
Dhs  1059,  1126;  SnA  132  (  =  panidhana) ;  DhA  n.172  ; 
DhsA  222  (raga-dosa-moha"). 

-kamma  (in  deva  cult)  payment  of  a  vow  D  1.12. 
cp.  DA  1.97  (which  Kern,  however,  Toev.  s.  v.,  inter- 
prets as  "  application  of  an  enema,"  comparing  Sk. 
pranidheya  to  be  injected  as  a  clyster). 

Pa^ipatati  [pa+ni  +  pat]  to  fall  down  before  Th  i,  375. 

Pavipata   [fr.   pa+ni  +  pat]   prostration,    adoration   Davs 

V.53- 

Panipatika  (adj.)  [fr.  panipata]  consisting  of  a  football, 
humbling  or  humble,  devotional  SnA  157. 

Pa^iya  (adj.)  [ger.  formation  fr.  pari,  see  panati  &  cp. 
BSk.  panya  in  tara-panya  fare  A\i  1.148]  to  be  sold 
or  bought,  vendible,  nt.  article  of  trade,  ware  A  11. 199  ; 
Vv  84'  (  =  bhanda  VvA  337);  J  iv.363  (=bhanda  c! 
366). 

PaQihita  [pp.  of  panidahati]  applied,  directed,  intent,  bent 
on,  well  directed,  controlled  S  iv.3n9  (dup°) ;  A  1.8  ; 
V.87  ;  Dh  43  ;  (samma  °g  cittari)  ;  Sn  154  (su°  mano  = 
sutthu  thapito  acalo  SnA  2(  o) ;  Ps  11. 41  (vimokkha) ; 
Miln  204.  333;  413.  — appanihita  in  connection  with 
samadhi  &  vimokkha  .seems  to  mean  "  free  from  all 
longings,"  see  Vin  111.93^^.25;  S  iv.295,  309.  360; 
Ps  11.43  sq.,  ico;  Miln  337. 

Pa^ama  [fr.  pa  +  nam,  see  panamati]  bowing,  bow,  obei- 
sance Th  2.  4r>7  (°i)  karoti). 

Pa?ita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  pa+neti  in  same  application  BSk.  ; 
cp.  Divy  385]  I.  (Ut.)  brought  out  or  to,  applied, 
executed ;  used  with  ref.  to  punishment  (see  paneti 
dandar))  Pv  iv.i^  ("danda  receiving  punishment  = 
thapita-sarlra-danda  PvA  242).  —  2.  (appl'')  brought  out 
or  forth,  (made)  high,  raised,  exalted,  lofty,  excellent ; 
with  ref.  to  food  (very  often  used  in  this  sense)  "  heaped 
up,  plentiful,  abundant."  Synonymous  with  uttajna 
(DA  1. 109,  171),  ulara  (PvA  25,  228),  atula  (PvA  no) 


opp.  hina  (D  10.215;  A  in. 349 ;  v.140;  Vism  11), 
lukha  (S  II.  153;  VvA  64).  —  D  1. 12  (dhamma  gam- 
bhira  .  .  .  panita  .  .  .),  log  (khadaniya) ;  11.127  (id.) 
III. 2  15  (with  hina  &  majjhima-dhatu) ;  S  1.136  (dhammo 
gambhiro  etc.);  11. 153  (dhatu),  154  (panidhi)  ;  111.47  ; 
IV. 360  ;  V.66  (dhamma),  226  (etai)  padai)),  266  (satta)  ; 
A  1.284;  ".171.  190;  IV. 10,  332,  423;  v. 8,  36  and 
passim;  Sn  240,  389;  It  44;  Pv  1.5^;  iv.i^';  Pug  28 
("adhimutta  having  high  aspirations),  30,  60  ;  Dhs  269, 
1027,  1411;  PvA  12,  35  (ahara),  42  (id.);  DhA  11. 154 
(bhojana).  Compar.  panltatara,  often  comb"'  with 
abhikkantatara,  e.  g.  D  1.62,  74,  21C;  S  1.80;  A  1.119, 
171  ;  v.37,  140,  203  sq. 

Panltaka  [perhaps  =Sk.  panita,  or  pa^  (see  pana),  as  P. 
formation  it  may  be  taken  as  pa+nita+ka,  viz.  that 
which  has  been  produced]  a  gambler's  stake  J  vi.192. 
See  panitaka. 

PaQodati,  Papunna  see  panudati  etc. 

Paoeti  [pa  +  nl]  to  lead  on  to,  bring  out,  adduce,  apply, 
fig.  decree  (a  fine  or  punishment),  only  used  in  phrase 
dandar)  paneti  to  give  a  punishment  D  11.339  =Miln  1 10  ; 
M  11.88  ;  Dh  310  ;  J  11.207  ;  m  441  ;  iv.192  ;  Miln  29 ; 
DhA  III. 482.  — pp.  panita  (q.  v.). 

PaQ^a  see  bhandati. 

Pa^^&kA  [cp  late  (dial.)  Sk.  panda  &  paiidaka ;  for  etym. 
see  Walde,  Lat.  Wtb.  under  pello]  a  eunuch,  weakling 
Vin  1.86,  135,  168,  320;  iv.20,  269;  A  III. 128;  V.71  ; 
Sdhp  79.  —  With  ref.  to  the  female  sex  as  pandika  at 
Vin  11.27 1  (itthi"). 

Pa^^ua  (adj)  [Ved.  pandara ;  cp.  pandu,  q.  v.  for  etym.] 
white,  pale,  yellowish  J  11.365  ;  v.  340  ;  Nd'  3  ;  Dhs  6  = 
Vbh  88  (DAs  trsl.  "that  which  is  clear"?  in  def.  of 
citta  &  mano)  Dhs  17,  293,  597;  Miln  226;  DhA  iv.8 ; 
VvA  40  ;  PvA  56  ( =seta) ;  Sdhp  430. 

Pav^icca  (nt.)  [fr.  pandita]  erudition,  cleverness,  skill, 
wisdom  J  1.383  ;  Psii.185  ;  Pug  25  ;  Dhs  16  (  — panditassa 
bhavo  DhsA  147),  292,  555.     As  pandicciya  J  VI.4. 

Pa^4ita  (adj.)  [cp.  Ved.  pandita]  wise,  clever,  skilled, 
circumspect,  intelligent  Vin  11. 190  (  + buddhimanto) ; 
D  1. 1 2  ("vedaniya  comprehensible  only  by  the  wise), 
120  (opp.  duppaiina) ;  111.192  ;  M  1.423  ;  111.61,  105,  178  ; 
S1V.375  (  + viyattamedhavin)  ;  v.igi  (+ vyattakusala) ; 
A  1.59,  68,  84,  loi  sq.,  162  (pandita  nibbanar)  adhigac- 
chanti) ;  11.3  sq.,  118,  178,  228;  iii.48=It  16;  Sn  115, 
2*4.  335.  523,  721,  820,  IC07,  1 125  (Ep.  of  Jatukanni); 
It  86;  Dh  22,  28,  63  (°manin),  79,  88,  157,  186,  238, 
289;  J  111.52  (sasa")  ;  Nd'  124;  Pv  iv.}^^  (opp.  bala ; 
=  sappai^iia  PvA  254) ;  Dhs  1302  ;  Miln  3,  22  ;  DA  i.i  17  ; 
DhA  IV. Ill  ;  VvA  257;  PvA  39,  41,  60  (=pariiia),  93, 
99. 

Paijl^itaka  (adj.)  [pandita  +  ka]  a  pedant  D  1.107. 

Pavdu  (adj.)  [cp,  Ved.  pandu,  palita,  patala  (pale-red) ; 
Or.  TreXiTi-iis,  «-eXXas,  TriiXios  (grey)  ;  Lat.  palleo  (to  be 
pale),  pullus  (grey) ;  Lith.  patvas  (pale-yellow),  pilkas 
(grey) ;  Ohg.  falo  (pale,  yellowish,  withered) ;  E.  pale] 
pale-red  or  yellow,  reddish,  light  yellow,  grey  ;  only  at 
Th  2,  79  (kisa  pandu  vivanna),  where  pandu  represents 
the  usual  up-pand'-uppanduka-jata  :  '  thin,  pale  and 
colourless  "  see  ThA  80).  Otherwise  only  in  cpds., 
e.  g. 

-kambala  a  light  red  blanket,  orange-coloured  cloth 
S  1.64  (=ratta-kambala  C.) ;  A  1.181  ;  Sn  689  (=ratta° 
SnA  487) ;  also  a  kind  of  ornamental  stone,  Sakka's 
throne  (p.-k.-sila)  is  made  of  if  J  1330  ;  n.93  ;  11.53, 
("silasana)  ;  v. 92  (id.);  Pv  11. g*"  (''sila  =  p.-k-namaka 
.silasana  PvA  138);  VvA  no  (id.);  KhA  122  (°vara- 
sana)  ;  DhA  1. 17  ("silasana).  -palasa  a  withered  leaf 
Vin  1.96  =111.47  ;  IV. 2  17  ;  Dh  235  ;  VbhA  244  ;  KhA  62  ; 
on  °palasika  (DA  1.270)  seey. P.T.S.  1893,37.     -mattika 


1 


Panduka 


27 


Patapeti 


yeliow  loam,  clay  soil  KhA  59.  -roga  jaundice  Vin 
1.206  ("abadha)  276  (id.);  J  1.431  :  11. 102;  DhA  1.25. 
-rogin  suffering  from  jaundice  J  11.285;  111.401.  -vina 
yellow  flute  (of  Pancasikha)  :  see  beluva.  -siha  j'ellow 
lion,  one  of  the  ,i  kinds  SnA  125  (cp.  Manor.-pur.  on 
A  11.33).     -sutta  orange-coloured  string  D  1.76. 

Pa^doka  (-roga)  perhaps  to  be  read  with  v.  1.  at  M  11. 121 
for  bandhuka°. 

Fa^na  (nt.)  [Ved.  parna,  cp.  Ags.  fearn,  E.  fern]  i.  a  leaf 
(esp.  betel  leaf)  Vin  1.20 1  (5  kinds  of  leaves  recommended 
for  medicinal  purposes,  viz.  nimba°  Azadirachta  Indica, 
kutaja"  Wrightia  antidysenterica,  patola"  Tricho- 
tanthes  dioeca,  sulasi°  or  tulasi"  basil,  kappasika° 
cotton,  see  Vin.  Texts  11.46)  A  1.183  (tina+j  Sn  811 
(p.  vuccati  paduma-pattar)  Nd^  '35):  J  1. 167;  11.105 
(nimba)" ;  KhA  46  (khitta-p.-kosa-santhana) ;  PvA  115 
(=patta)  talapanna  a  fan  of  palm  leaves  Vv  33*^ 
( =  talapattehi  kata-mandala-vijani  VvA  147);  hari- 
tapanna  greens,  vegetable  Sn.\  283 ;  supeyyapanna 
curry  leaf  J  i  98.  —  2.  a  leaf  for  writing  upon,  written 
leaf,  letter ;  donation,  bequest  (see  below  pannakara) 
J  1.409  (cp.  patipaijna) ;  11.104;  'v.151  (ucchangato  p. 
°g  niharati)  ;  DhA  1.180  ;  PvA  20  (hkha°  written  mes- 
sage), pannai)  aropeti  to  send  a  letter  J  1.227  •  pahinati 
id.  J  IV.  145  ;  V.458  ;  peseti  id.  J  1.178  ;  iv.  169.  paijnai) 
likhati  to  write  a  letter  J  11.  174  ;  vi.369  (panne  wrote 
on  a  leaf),  385  ina"  a  promissory  note  J  1.230  ;  iv.256. 
—  p.  as  ticket  or  label  at  DhsA  110. — 3.  a  feather, 
wing  see  su°. 

-akara  "  state  or  condition  of  writing"  (see  akara  1), 
i.  e.  object  of  writing ;  that  which  is  connected  or  sent 
with  a  letter,  a  special  message,  donation,  present,  gift 
J  1.377  ;  II.I66  ;  111.10  ;  iv.316,  368  ;  vi.  68,  390  ;  SnA  78  ; 
DhA  .184326,  392,339  :  11.80  ;  111.292  (dasavidhadibba°, 
viz.  ayu  etc.  :  see  thana) ;  iv. 1 1.  -kuti  a  hut  of  leaves 
D  111.94  ;  S  1.226  ;  J  11.44  :  Pv  111.2-"  ;  DA  1.318.  -chatta 
a  fan  of  leaves  J  11.2  77.  -chattaka  a  leaf-awning  S  1.90, 
92.  -dhara  a  holder  made  of  leaves  J  v.205.  -pacchi 
leaf-basket,  a  b.  for  greens  J  vi.369.  -pufa  a  palm-leaf 
basket  PvA  168.  -sai^fia  a  mark  of  leaves  (tied  up  to 
mark  the  boundary  of  a  field)  J  1.153.  -santhara  a 
spreading  leaf,  leaf  cover,  adj.  spread  with  leaves 
A  1.136;  J  VI. 24.  -sala  a  hut  of  leaves,  a  hermitage 
J  1.6,  7,  138;  11.101  sq.  ;  vi.30,  318  (nala-bhittikag  °r) 
katva)  ;  vi.24.  -susa  (&  sosa)  drying  the  leaves  (said 
of  the  wind)  KhA  15. 

Pawaka  [panna-t-ka]  i.  green  leaves  (collectively), 
vegetable,  greens  J  vi.24  (kara°  vegetable  as  homage  or 
oblation)  ;  Pv  111.3^  (panko  pannako  ca,  expl"*  as  "  kad- 
damo  va  udakacchikkhalo  va  "  PvA  189,  but  evidently 
misunderstood  for  "  withered  leaves  ")  ;  PvA  256  (tina- 
kattha-pannaka-sala,  is  reading  correct?).  —  2.  N.  of 
a  water  plant,  most  likely  a  kind  of  fern  (see  Kern, 
Toev.  p.  16  s.  v.).  Often  comb''  with  sevala  (Blyxa 
Octandra),  e.  g.  at  J  11.324  ;  v.  3  7.  —  The  spelling  is  also 
panaka,  even  more  frequent  than  pannaka  and  also 
comb"*  with  sevala.  e.  g.  Vin  111.177  ('"  comb"  sankha 
-sevala",  where  Bdhgh  explains  "  sankho  ti  dJghamu- 
lako  pannasevalo  vuccati,  sevalo  ti  nilasevalo,  avaseso 
udaka-pappataka-nila-bijak'  ad'  Abbo  'ti  panako  ti 
sankhar)  gacchati ")  ;  S  v. 122;  A  111.187,  232,  235; 
J  IV.71  (sevala");  Miln  35  (sankha-sevala-p.  which  the 
Manor-pur  expl"''  by  udaka-pappataka,  and  also  as 
"  nilamandukapitthivannena  udakapitthii)  chadetva 
nibattapanakar)  "  see  Trenckner,  Miln  421  and  cp. 
Miln.  trsl'  1.302),  210  (suvanna"),  401  (cakkavako 
sevala  panaka-bhakkho) ;  KhA  61  (sevala";  cp.  Schu- 
bring's  kalpasutra  p.  46  sq.). — 3.  (see  pariiia  2)  a 
written  leaf,  a  ticket  DhsA  1 10. 

PanQatti  see  paAflatti. 

Pa^attika  (adj.)  [fr.  pani:iatti]  having  a  manifestation  or 
name,  in  a"-bhava  state  without  designation,  state  of 


non-manifestation,  indefinite  or  unknown  state  (with  ref. 
to  the  passing  nature  of  the  phenomenal  world)  DhA 
1.89  ;  II.  163. 

Pawarasa  &  Pawavisati  see  paiica  i.  B,  &  C. 

Pawasa  see  pafica  2 .  A. 

Pawi  (f.)  [  =  panoa]  a  leaf  Vin  1.202  (taka°). 

PaQljdka  [panna-(-ika]  one  who  deals  with  greens,  a  florist 
or  greengrocer  J  1.41 1  ;  11.180  ;  111.21  ("dhita) ;  Miln  331. 

Pannika  (f.)  [to  panriaka ;  cp.  Sk.  parnika  ;  meaning  un- 
certain, cp.  Kern,  Toev.  p.  17  s.  v.]  greens,  green  leaves', 
vegetable  Vin  11.267  ("^  haritaka  "g  pakinitabb^ir), 
trsl.  at  Vin.  Texts  111.343  by  "  carry  on  the  business  of 
florist  and  seedsman,"  thus  taken  as  pannika,  cp.  also 
Vin.  Texts  iii.i  12) ;  J  1.445  (paijmkaya  sanflar)  adasi  is 
faulty  ;  reading  should  be  sannikaya  "  with  the  goad." 
of  sari(n)ika=Sk.  sr^i  elephant-driver's  hook). 

Panhi  (m.  &  f.)  [Ved.  parsni,  A  v.  pa§na,  Lat.  perna,  Gr. 
-irTipva.  Goth,  fairzna,  Ohg.  fersana  =  Ger.  ferse]  the 
heel  Vin  11.280  ("samphassa) ;  J  11.240;  v.145;  Sdhp 
'47.  153-     See  next. 

PaQhika  (f.)  [fr.  panhi]  the  heel  J  1.49 1  ;  KhA  49  ("atthi) ; 
Vism  253  (id.) ;  PvA  185. 

Pa^hin  (adj.)  [fr.  panhi]  having  heels  D  11. 17  (ayata" 
having  projecting  heels,  the  3""  of  the  32  characteristics 
of  a  Mahapurisa). 

Patati  [Ved.  patati,  Idg.  'pet  "  to  fly  "  as  weU  as  "  to 
fall."  Cp.  Av.  pataiti  fly,  hurry;  Gr.  irironai  fly,  latv- 
iren/t  quick,  irtTrno  fall ;  Lat.  praepes  quick,  peto  to  go 
for,  impetus,  attack  etc.]  to  fall,  jump,  fall  down  on  (loc., 
ace.  &  instr.),  to  alight  J  1.278  (dipake)  ;  Sn  248  (nira- 
yag)  ;  Pv  iv.io^  (ist  pi.  patamase)  ;  Milo  187  ;  PvA  45, 
ppr.  patanto  J  1.263  (asaniya) ;  111.188  (navaya) ;  fut. 
patissati  J  111.277;  aor.  pati  Sn  1027  (sirast) ;  J  111.55; 
Pv  i.-f;  ger.  patitra  J  1.291  ;  111.26;  PvA  16;  DhA 
III.  196  (vv.  11.  papata  &  papata  the  latter  aor.  of  papa- 
tati,  q.  v.);  ger.  patitva  J  1.291;  111.26 ;  PvA  16. — 
pp.  patita  (q.  v.).  — Cans,  pateti  (q.  v.).  Pass.  (Cans.) 
patiyati  is  brought  to  fall  also  intrs.  rush  away  J  iv.415 
(=palayatiC.);  Miln  187. 

Patatthi  at  J  vi.276  is  misprint  for  pathaddhi  (q.  v.). 

Patana  (nt.  adj.)  [fr.  patati]  falling,  falling  out,  ruin, 
destruction  J  1.293  (akkhini) ;  11.154;  111188  (geha°) ; 
VI. 85  (usu°  range  of  his  arrow). 

Patanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  patana]  on  the  point  of  falling,  going 
to  fall,  falling  J  vi.358. 

Patana  (adj.)  [pa-l-tanu]  very  thin  J  vi.578  (°kesa) ; 
Dhs  362  (°bhava)=DhsA  238;  Kvu  299  (id). 

Patara  [Vedic  pradara,  pa-(-df,  with  t.  for  d. ;  see 
Trenckner,  Notes  62'* ;  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  39,  4]  a  split, 
a  slit  J  IV.32. 

Patarati  [pa-l-tarati]  i.  to  go  through  or  forth,  to  run  out, 
to  cross  over  D  1.248;  J  111.91  (aor.  patari).  —  2.  to 
■overflow,  boil  over  (of  water)  Miln  260.  —  Caus. 
patareti  (q.  v.). 

Pataka  (f)  [cp.  later  Sk.  pataka]  a  flag,  banner  (cp.  dhaja) 
J  1.52  ;  VvA  31,  173. 

Patapa  [fr.  pa -f  tap]  splendour,  majesty  Vv  40^  (  =  tejas, 
anubhavo  VvA  180). 

Patapavant  (adj.)  [fr.  patapa]  splendid,  majestic  Sn  550 
(  =  jutimantataya  p.  SnA  453);  Th  1,  820. 

Patapeti  [pa-l-tapeti,  Caus.  of  tap]  scorch,  burn  fiercely 
Vv  79^  ( =ativiya  dipeti  VvA  307).  Sdhp  573. 


Patayati 


28 


Patta 


Patayati  [in  form  =pa  +  tayati,  diff.  in  meaning;  not 
sufficiently  expl'',  see  Kern,  Tocv.  p.  29  s.  v.  It  is 
probably  a  distorted  *sphatayati :  see  under  pharati, 
phalaka  and  phateti]  to  be  spread  out,  intrs.  to  spread 
(?)  A  IV. 97  (kodho  p.,  as  if  fr.  pat) ;  J  in. 283  (C.  nik- 
khamati,  as  if  fr.  tr,  Kern,  trsl"  "  to  be  for  sale  "). 

Patareti  [Caus.  of  patarati]  to  make  go  forth,  to  bring 
over  or  through  M  1.225  :  A  in. 432  (v.  1.  M.  pakarot:). 

—  aor.  patarayi  in  meaning  "strive"  at  J  in. 2 10 
{=patarati  vayamati  C.  but  Rhys  Davids,  "to  get 
away  from  ")  ;  as  "  assert  "  at  J  v.  1 1 7. 

Pati'  [Ved.  pati,  Av.  paitis  lord,  husband ;  Gr.  Triimc 
husband,  Lat.  potis,  potens,  possum,  hos-pes ;  Goth. 
bru)>-fa}'s  bridegroom,  hunda  fa[is  centurion,  Lith.  pats 
husband]  lord,  master,  owner,  leader. —  i.  in  general 
D  in. 93  (khettanar)  p.  gloss  adhipati).  Mostly  -°  ;  see 
under  gavam',  gaha°,  dana°,  yutha",  sena°.  —  2.  hus- 
band S  1.2  10  ;  Sn  314  ;  J  111.138  ;  PvA  161.  See  also 
sapatika  (with  her  husband),  patibbata  &  patika. 

-kula  her  husband's  clan  ThA  283  ;  VvA  206  ;  -devata 
a  devoted  wife  J  111.406  ;  VvA  128. 

Pati^  (indecl.)  [Vedic  prati  etc.)  a  doublet  of  pati;  both 
often  found  side  by  side ;  pati  alone  always  as  prep, 
(with  ace.)  and  as  prefix  with  stha  (patitthati,  patit- 
thita  etc.).  All  cases  are  referred  to  the  form  with 
pati°,  except  in  the  case  of  patitth".  The  more 
frequent  cases  are  the  foil.  :  patikara,  °kutati,  °caya, 
"dissati,  "nandati,  'manteti,  °manet'i,  "ruddha,  "riipa, 
°Jina,  "sallana,  etc.  "sibbati,  "sevati,  °ssata,  °ssaya, 
"ssava. 

Patika  (adj.)  [only  f.  patika  and  only  as  -"']  ha\ing'  a 
husband  in  mata"  "  with  husband  dead,"  a  widow 
Th  2,  221  (=vidhuva  ThA  179);  J  v.  103  (ap°  without 
husband,  v.  1.  for  appatita,  C.  expl""  by  assamika). 
pavuttha"  (a  woman)  whose  husband  lives  abroad 
Vin  n.268;  111.S3;  Miln  205  (pavuttha°).  See  also 
pancapatika  &  sapatika. 

Patika  at  Vism  28  is  to  be  read  patika  (vessel,  bowl, 
dish). 

Patitthahati  (&  Patitthati)  [pati  +  stha]  to  stand  fast  or 
firmly,  to  find  a  support  in  (loc),  to  be  established 
(intrs.),  to  fix  oneself,  to  be  set  up,  to  stay ;  aor.  patit- 
thahi  DhA  ni.175  (sotapattiphale),  PvA  42  (id.),  (>6 
(id.)  ;  VvA  69  (sakadagamiphale) ;  and  patitthasi  Miln 
16.  —  fut.  "tthahissati  J  v. 458  (°hessati) ;  DhA  in. 171. 

—  ger.  patitthaya  Sn  506;  J  11. 2  (rajje)  ;  111.52  ;  v. 458 
(rajje);  Miln  a;  PvA  142.  — pp.  patitthita  (q.  v.). — 
Caus.  patitthapeti  (q.  v.). 

Patittha  (f.)  [fr,  pati  +  stha.  Cp.  Ved.  pratistha  support, 
foundation]  support,  resting  place,  stay,  ground,  help, 
also  (spiritual)  helper,  support  for  salvation  S  i.i  (ap°)  ; 
n.65  ;  III. 53;  Sn  173;  Dh  332;  J  1.149;  iv.20  ;  Miln 
302;  DhsA  261;  VvA  138;  PvA  53,  60  (  =  dipa),  87 
(=dipa),  141  (su°),  174  (su°=drpa). 

Patitthana  (nt.)  [fr.  pati  4- stha  cp.  late  Sk.  pratisthana] 
lixing,  setting  up,  support,  help,  ground  (for  salvation) 
Sn  101 1  ;  PvA  123. 

Patitthapita  [pp.  of  patitthapeti]  put  down,  set  down, 
established  PvA  139. 

Patitthapitar  [n.  ag.  of  patitthapeti]  one  who  establishes 

A  v. 66. 

Patitthapeti  [Caus.  of  patifthahati,  cp.  BSk.  pratistha- 
payati  Jtm  224]  to  establish,  set  up,  fix.  put  into,'instal 
D  1.206;  S  1.90;  J  1. 152;  168,  349  (sotapatti-phale)  ; 
PvA  22  (id.),  38  (id.)  50  (saranesu  ca  silesu  ca).  223 
(id.),  76  (cetiyai)),  78  (upasakabhave),  131,  132  (hatthe). 

—  aor.  patitthapesi  J  1.138,  —  pp.  patitthapita  (q.  v.). 


Patitthaba  [fr.  patitthahati]  having  one's  footing  in, 
hold  on,  tenacity  Dhs  381  =Nd^  27i"'-:DhsA  253. 
The  V.  1.  at  Nd^  is  patiggaha  which  is  also  read  by  Dhs. 

Patitthita  [pp.  of  patitthahati]  established  in  (loc), 
settled,  fixed,  arrayed,  stayed,  standing,  supported, 
founded  in  D  iii.ioi  (supatitthita-citta) ;  M  1.448  ;  S  1.40, 
45.  185  (dhammesu) ;  It  77;  Sn  409.  453;  J  1.51  (kuc- 
chimhi),  262  (rajje);  Pv  1.4*;  11.9^'  (dussilesu)  ;  Miln 
282  ;  VvA  1 10  f  gabbha),  259  ("saddha) ;  PvA  34  (jata+  ). 

—  nt.  °g  arrangement,  setthng,  in  pafica°  the  fivefold 
array,  a  form  of  respectful  greeting,  see  under  panca. 

Patitthiyati  [only  apparently  (Pass.)  to  patitthahati,  of 
stha,  but  in  reality  =Sk.  prati-sthyayate,  of  sthya,  see 
thina.  Ought  to  be  patitthiyati ;  but  was  by  popular 
analogy  with  patitthaya  changed  to  patitthiyati]  to  be 
obdurate,  to  olfer  resistance  A  1. 124  ;  11.203  ;  in.  181  sq.  ; 
J  IV. 22  (aor.  "tthiya) ;  Pug  36  ;  KhA  226. 

Patita  [pp.  of  patati]  fallen  Dh  68,  ^lu  ;  J  1.167  ;  Miln  187  ; 
PvA  31  (read  patita),  56. 

Patitaka  (adj.)  [fr.  last]  thrown  or  fallen  into  (loc), 
dropped  Vism  62. 

Patititthati  [pati-(- titthati]  to  stand  up  again  Th  i,  173. 

Patittha  [pa -t- tittha]  a  bank  of  a  river  or  lake,  su°  (adj.) 
with  beautiful  banks  S  1.90;  Pv  11. i'"'  (  =  sundara- 
tittha  PvA  77). 

Patibbata  (f.)  [pati+ vata]  a  devoted  wife  (cp.  patidevata) 
J  11. 12 1  ;  VI. 533  ;  VvA  56,  no. 

Patissata  see  pati". 

Patita  [pp.  of  pacceti]  pleased,  delighted  Dh  68  ;  Sn  379, 
679;  Vv  84!"  (=pahattha  VvA  337).  —  neg.  appatita 
displeased  M  1.27  ;  J  v.  103  (v.  1.  appatika,  C.  expl"-  by 
assamika,  i.  e.  without  husband). 

Patiyati  see  patati. 

Pateyya  in  phrase  alam-pateyya  at  D  in. 71  (kumarika 
alam-pateyya),  75  (id.)  means  "  surely  fit  to  have 
husbands,  ripe  for  marriage  "  (?) 

Patoda  [fr.  pa  +  tud  cp.  Ved.  pratoda]  a  goad,  driving 
stick,  prick,  spur  M  1.124;  111.97;  S  iv.176;  A  11. 114; 
III. 28  ;  IV.91  ;  V.324  ;  Th  i,  210;  J  1.57,  192;  Dhs  16, 
20,  292  ;  Pug  25  ;  SnA  147 ;  ThA  174  ;  Sdhp  367. 

-latthi  a  driver's  stick,  goad-stick  [cp.  BSk.  prato- 
dayasti  Divy  7,  76,  463,  465]  D  1. 105,  126;  J  vi.249  ; 
Miln  27;  DhA  1.302;  11.38;  iv.216;  VvA  64.  As 
"yatthi  at  Dpvs  xi.30. 

Patodaka  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  pa-l-tudj  lit.  pushing,  spurring;  only 
in  phrase  angnli^'  nudging  with  one's  fingers  Vin  in. 84 
=  IV. 1 10  (here  to  be  taken  as  "  tickling");  D  1.91  (cp. 
Dial.  1. 1 1 3)  ;  A  iv.343. 

Patta'  (nt.)  [Ved.  patra,  to  *pet  as  in  patati  (q.  v.  &  see 
also  panna) ;  cp.  Gr.  Trrfpor  wing,  Trripvt  id.  ;  Lat. 
penna  feather  =  Ger.  fittig. ;  acci-piter  ;  Ohg.  fedara  =  E. 
feather  etc.]  i.  the  wing  of  a  bird,  a  feather  Vin  iv.259  ; 
D  1.71.     kukkuta"  a  hen's  quill  (for  sewing)  Vin  11. 215. 

—  2.  a  leaf  M  1.429;  Sn  44=64  (saiichinna°,  see  Nd^ 
625);  625  (pokkhara"  lotus  1.);  Dh  401  (id.);  Nd'  135 
(paduma°)  ;  Pv  11.9'  (=panna  PvA  15);  VvA  147 
(tala°) ;  ThA  71  ;  PvA  283  (nigrodha°).  asi-patta-vana 
"sword-leaf-forest"  (a  forest  in  Niraya)  Sn  673; 
Pv.\  221.  —  3.  a  small  thin  strip  of  metal  at  the  lute 
MUn  53  ;  VvA  281. 

-ajhalka  a  toy  measure  made  of  palm-leaves  Vin  11. 10  ; 
in. 180;  D  1.6  (cp.  DA  1.86);  M  1.266;  A  v.203  ;  Miln 
229.  -gandha  odour  of  leaves  Dhs  625.  -nali  rib  of 
a  feather  DhA  1.394.  -phala  leaf-fruit,  a  leaf  and  fruit, 
vegetables   Sn   239    (  =  yar)    kinci   harita-paqnag    SnA 


Patta 


29 


Pattin 


283) ;  PvA  86.  -yana  having  wings  as  vehicle,  "  wing- 
goer,"  i.  e.  a  bird  Sn  606  (=pattehi  yanti  ti  pattayana 
SnA  465) ;  J  11.443.  -rasa  teiste  of  leaves  Dhs  629  ; 
juice  of  leaves  Vin  1.246  (  +  puppharasa  &  ucchurasa). 
-salaka  leaf-ticket  DhA  iv.65. 

Patta^  (ra.  &  nt.)  [Ved.  patra,  fr.  Idg.  *p6tlora  =Lat.  pocu- 
lum  beaker,  Oir.  61.  See  pana  &  pibati]  a  bowl,  esp. 
the  alms-bowl  of  a  bhikkhu  Vin  1.46,  50,  51,  61,  224 
(patte  puresur)) ;  ii.iii,  126,  224,  269;  S  1.112;  A 
IV. 344  ;  Sn  413.  443  ;  J  1.52,  55  (pattar)  thavikaya  pak- 
khipati),  69 ;  111.535  (punna  "i)  deti  to  give  a  full 
bowl,  i.  e.  plenty)  ;  v.389  (pi.  pattani)  ;  Vism  108  (aiji- 
gaijthik'  ahato  ayopatto) ;  DhA  iv.220  (°g  pureti) ; 
PvA  35,  61,  76,  88.  141. — -Two  kinds  of  bowls  are 
mentioned  at  Vin  243,  viz.  ayo"  of  iron  &  mattika°  of 
clay,  daru"  a  wooden  bowl  Vin  11. 112,  143.  uda°  a 
bowl  of  water  or  a  water-bowl  M  i.ioo;  S  v.  121  ;  A 
III. 230  sq.  cp.  odapattakini.  — pattassa  mukhavatti 
J  v. 38.  — fut.  pati  (q.  v.). 

-adharaka  bowl  support,  bowl-hold  Vin  n.113. 
-kandolika  a  wicker-work  stand  for  a  bowl  Vin  11. 114 
(cp.  Vin.  Texts  111.86).  -gata  gone  into  the  bowl, 
alms  given  Th  i,  155;  Pv  IV.7*.  -gahapaka  one  who 
is  going  to  take  a  bowl,  a  receiver  of  a  b.  Vin  11. 177 
(-l-satiya°  etc.)  ;  A  111.275.  -civara  bowl  and  robe  (see 
note  in  Dial  11. 162)  Vin  1.46  ;  11.78,  194  ;  S  1.76  ;  J  111.379  ; 
Pv  II. 13'*;  DA  1.45,  186;  PvA  61.  -tthavika  a  bag 
to  carry  a  bowl  in  Vin  11. 114;  J  111,364;  VvA  40,  63; 
KhA  45.  -dhovana  "  bowl- washing,"  (the  water  used 
for)  washing  the  bowl  Vin  n.214.  -panin  hand  on 
bowl,  bowl  in  hand  Sn  713;  It  89=8  111.93?*;  onita° 
removing  the  hand  from  the  bowl :  see  onita.  -pindika 
"  eating  from  one  vessel  only  "  A  111.220.  -mandala  a 
circular  artificial  bottom  of  a  bowl  Vin  11. 1 12.  -majaka 
a  raised  parapet  (?)  on  which  to  put  the  bowl  Vin  ii.i  14 
(cp.  Vin.  Texts  111.86).  -miila  the  bottom  of  the  bowl 
Vin  11.269.  -'"atti  the  brim  of  a  bowl  S  iv.168.  -saii- 
fiin  pajdng  attention  to  one's  bowl  Vin  11. 2 14. 

Patta^  [pp.  of  papunati]  obtained,  attained,  got,  reached 
(pass.  &  med.)  Sn  55,  138,  478,  517,  542,  992  ;  Dh  134 
(nibbanar))  423  ;  J  1.255  (vinasar))  ;  iv.  139  (samuddag) ; 
PvA  4  (anayavyasanag),  5  (sisacchedar)),  71  (manus- 
sabhavag).  Very  frequent  as  -°  and  in  meaning  equal 
to  finite  verb  or  other  phrase,  when  spelling  "ppatta  is 
restored  (Sk,  prapta),  e.  g.  ummadappatta  out  of  mind 
PvA  6  :  jara°  old  J  111,394  ;  dukkha°  afflicted  with  pain 
J  VI. 336  ;  domanassa"  dejected  J  n.155  ;  patti'  attained 
one's  (possible)  share  It  32  ;  bala°  (become)  strong 
D  II. 157;  vaya°  (become)  old,  come  of  age  J  11. 421 
(-t- sojasa-vassa-kale) ;  PvA  68;  somanassa°  pleased 
J  111.74;  haritu"  covered  with  green  M  1.343;  J  ■•5'^'. 
399.  Also  as  "-,  but  less  frequent,  meaning  often  equal 
to  prep.  "  with,"  "  after,"  etc,  as  pattabhiseka  after 
consecration  DhA  iv.84  ;  SnA  484  ;  pattunna  with  wool 
SnA  263;  "dhamma  mastering  the  Dh.  Vin  1.16;  the 
same  at  DhA  iv.200  in  meaning  of  patti°,  i.  e.  "  merit 
attained  "  ;  °manasa  (?)  It  76  (v.  1.  satta")  ;  "sambodhi 
It  97  (v.  1.  satta").  — Opp.  appatta  not  obtained  (see  also 
patti  2),  i.  e.  without  Dh  272  (cp.  DhA  111.58)  ;  Pug  51 
("panabhojana,  so  read  for  appanna").  —  Cp.  sam°. 

Patta*  at  Dpvs  XI.  18  for  pattin  or  pattika,  foot-man, 
infantry. 

Patta-kkhandha  [perhaps  patta^ -f  khandha.  thus  "leaf- 
shouldered,"  i.  e.  with  shoulders  drooping  like  leaves  ;  the 
Commentators  explain  patta  as  contracted  form  of 
patita  fallen,  thus  "  with  shoulders  falling."  We  may 
have  to  deal  with  an  old  misspelling  for  panna  (  =  pa-(- 
nam  bent  down,  put  down),  which  expl"  would  suit  the 
sense  better  than  any  other]  downcast,  dejected,  dis- 
appointed Vin  11.77  =  111.162  (trsl''  "  with  fallen  hearts," 
expl''  as  patita,  see  Vin.  Texts  111.13) ;  S  1.124  ;  M  1.132, 
258  ;  111.298  ;  A  111.57  ;  J  V.17  ;  Miln  5. 


Pattaka  (nt.)  [fr.  patta^]  a  (little)  bowl  Th  2,  28. 

Pattatta  (nt.)  (-"j  [abstr.  fr.  patta']  the  fact  of  being 
furnished  or  possessed  with  Visra  524. 

Pattabba  (adj.)  [grd.  of  papunati]  to  be  gained  or  attained  ; 
nt.  that  which  can  be  attained  or  won  SnA  443.  See 
also  pattiya^. 

Pattali  C^li)  (f.)  [according  to  Kern,  Toeu.  s.  v.  to  be  read 
as  either  sattali  or  sattalaj  plantain  Th  2,  260  (  =  kadali 
ThA  211). 

Patti'  [Ved.  patti,  *pad  (of  pada)-fti]  on  foot,  one  who  is 
on  foot,  a  foot-soldier  Vin  iv.105  (as  one  of  the  4  con- 
stituents of  a  sena  or  army,  viz.  hatthi  elephants,  assa, 
horses,  ratha  chariots,  patti  infantry);  J  iv.494  (hatthi, 
assa,  rathS,  patti)  ;  463  (hatthi  assa  ratha,  patti  sena 
padissate  maha)  ;  Visra  19.     Cp.  pattika'. 

-kaya  a  body  of  foot  soldiers,  infantry  S  1.72  (cp. 
BSk.  same,  at  Jtm  215  with  hasty-asva-ratha°).  -ka- 
rika  (for  ^karika,  of  prec.)  a  foot  soldier,  lit.  one  of  a 
body  of  infantry  J  iv.134;  v. 100;  vi.15  (hattharuha 
anikattha  rathika  pattikarika),  21,  463  (hatthi  assa 
rathika  p.). 

Patti''  (f.)  [Classical  Sk.  prapti  fr.  pa -Hap,  cp.  patta'] 
1.  (-°)  obtaining,  acquiring,  getting,  entering  into,  state 
of  S  i.i89=Th  I,  1230  (nibbana") ;  Sn  68  (paramattha"), 
186  (nibbana")  ;  PvA  5  (vyasana),  112  (id.);  Sdhp 
379. — 2.  attainment,  acquisition  S  11.29  (aggassa)  ; 
Sn  425  (yogakkheraassa) ;  Nd-  390  (  =  labha  patilabha 
adhigamo  phusanag  sacchikiriya)  ;  esp.  in  phrase  apat- 
tassa  patti  "  att'  of  the  unattained  "  D  111.255  = 
A  I  v. 332  ;  S  1.2 1 7  ;  11.29  ;  A  11.148  ;  iii.  179  ;  Kvu  581.  — 
3.  gaining,  gain,  profit,  advantage  S  I.i6g  (brahma" 
"  best  vantage  ground  ").  —  4.  merit,  profit,  in  special 
sense  of  a  gift  given  for  the  benefit  of  someone  else  (as 
a  "  dakkhina  "),  accrediting,  advising,  transference  of 
merit,  a  gift  of  merit  J  11.423,  425  (  =  dakkhina) ;  iv.21  ; 
DhA  1.270  (opp.  to  inula  price)  ;  11. 4  ;  iv.200  sq.  (opp.  to 
mula).  See  also  cpds.  °dana  &  "dhamma.  —  5.  that 
which  obtains  (as  a  rule),  occasion,  happening,  state, 
place,  as  gram.  t.  t.  loc.  pattiyag  or  pattiya  {-°)  in  lieu 
of  SnA  310.  317.  —  See  sam°. 

-dana  an  assigned  or  accredited  gift,  giving  of  merit 
(as  permanent  acquisition),  transference  of  merit  VvA 
188,  190  ;  PvA  9  ("vasena  danadharama-pariccago),  49 
(  =  dakkhina)  88  (id.);  Sdhp  229.  -dhamma  the  prac- 
tice of  transferred  merit,  see  Kvii  trsl"  161'.  170,  &  cp. 
pattadhamma.  -patta,  one  who  has  obtained  what  can 
be  obtained,  or  the  highest  gain  (i.  e.  Nibbana)  Sn  536 
(=pattabbag  patto  pattabbag  arahattag  patto  ti 
vuttag  hoti  SnA  433).  537.  540. 

Patti'  (f.)  [for  patta'  ?]  leaf,  leafy  part  of  a  plant  Vin 
1. 201  (taka.  taka-patti.  taka-paijiji). 

Pattika'  [fr.  patti'  cp.  pajja^]  on  foot,  a  pedestrian  or 
soldier  on  foot.  D  1.50,  89,  106,  108;  11.73;  A  11.117 
(hatth'-aruha.  assaruha,  rathika,  p.);  J  vi.145;  Vism 
396  (manussa  pattika  gacchanti)  ;  Sn  418;  448  (hat- 
tharuha anikattha  rathike  pattikarika) ;  DhA  1.385. 

Pattilta'  [fr.  patti^]  having  a  share,  gain  or  profit ;  a 
partner,  donor  DhA  1.270,  271. 

Pattika'  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  patta^]  in  daru°  (collecting  alms) 
with  a  wooden  bowl,  man  with  a  wooden  bowl  D  1.157 
(cp.  DA  1.319). 

Pattika  (f)  [fr.  patta'  or  patti']  a  leaf,  in  tala"  palm-leaf 
S  11.217,  222. 

Pattin  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  patta',  Sk.  *praptinl  attaining,  one 
who  obtains  or  gains  Sn  513  (kig°  =  kig  patta,  adhigata 
SnA  425). 


Pattiya 


30 


Pada 


Pattiya*  (adj.  n.)  [for  *pratyaya=paccaya,  cp.  Trenckner, 
Noles  -f,  9]  believing,  trusting,  relying  J  v. 414  (para") ; 
(m.)  belief,  trust  J  v. 231  (parapattiyena  by  relying  on 
others).  233  (id.),  414  (id.). 

Pattiya'  (adj.)  [grd.  of  papunati ;  cp.  pattabba]  to  be 
attained,  to  be  shared  or  profited  Pv  11.9^'  {para°  pro- 
fitable to  others,  see  expl"  at  PvA  125). 

Pattiyayati  [denom.  fr.  pattiya']  to  believe,  trust,  rely  on 
J  1.426;  V.403;  DA  1.73. 

Pattiyayana  (nt.)  [fr.  pattiyayati]  belief  J  v.402. 

Pattlyati  [denom.  fr.  patti^  to  gain,  to  profit  from  (ace.) 
Miln  240  (attanag  na  p.  does  not  profit  from  himself). 

Pattha*  [fr.  pa+stha.  Cp.  Epic  Sk.  prastha  plateau]  a 
lonely  place,  in  cpd.  vana°  D  1.71  ;  Pug  59  etc.,  a  wilder- 
ness in  the  forest,  expl''  by  Bdhgh  as  "  gamantai)  atik- 
kamitva  manussanag  anupacara-tthanai)  yattha  na 
kasanti  na  vapanti "  DA  1.2 10;  Ud  43  (patthan  ca 
sayan'  asanari.  ed.  ;  but  better  with  id.  p.  Dh  185  as 
pantaii,  which  is  expl''  at  DhA  111.238  by  "  vivittag," 
i,  e.  separately).  Cp.  with  this  Sk.  vana-prastha  a 
forest  situated  on  elevated  land. 

Pattha'  [cp.  late  Sk.  prastha]  a  Prastha  (certain  measure 
of  capacity)  =-J  of  an  Ajhaka ;  a  cooking  utensil  con- 
taining one  Prastha  DhA  n.154;  SnA  476  (cattaro 
pattha  alhakai)]. 

Patthata  [pp.  of  pattheirati]  stretched,  spread  out  J  1.336 ; 
Vism  364  ;  DA  1.311. 

PatthaQ^ila  [pa-l-thandila]  hermitage  M  11.155. 

Patthaddha  [pa-l-thaddha]  (quite)  stiff  Vin  11. 192  ;  Th  i. 
1074. 

Patthana  (f.)  [of  ap-l-  arth,  cp.  Sk.  prarthayati  &  prarthana 
nt.,  prarthana  f]  aiming  at,  wish,  desire,  request, 
aspiration,  prayer  S  n.99,  154  ;  A  1.224 .'  'ii-47 ."  v.212  ; 
Nd'  316,  337  (p.  vuccati  taijha) ;  Nd'  1 12  ;  Nett  18,  27  ; 
Dhs  1Q59  ;  MUn  3  ;  SnA  47,  50  ;  DhA  11.36 ;  PvA  47. 

—  patthanag  karoti  to  make  a  wish  J  1.68  ;  DhA  1.48  ; 
°r)  thapeti  id.  DhA  1.47  ;  11.83  '•  iv.200. 

Patthara  [cp.  late  Sk.  prastara.  The  ord.  meaning  of  Sk. 
pr.  is  "  stramentum  "]  :.  stone,  rock  S  1.32.  —  2.  stone- 
ware MUn  2. 

Pattharati  [pa-l-tharati]  to  spread,  spread  out,  extend 
J  1.62;  IV.212;  VI. 279;  DhA  1.26;  111.61  (so  read  at 
J  VI. 549  in  cpd  "pada  with  spreading  feet,  v.  1.  patthata"). 

—  pp.  patthafa  (q.  v.).  —  Caus.  pattharati  with  pp. 
pattharita  probably  also  to  be  read  at  Th  i,  842  for 
padharita. 

Pattharika  [fr.  patthara]  a  merchant  Vin  11. 135  (kagsa"). 

Patthita  [pp.  of  pattheti]  wished  for,  desired,  requested, 
sought  after  Sn  836;  Miln  227,  361;  DhA  iv.201  ; 
PvA  47  (°akara  of  the  desired  kind,  as  wished  for)  ; 
Sdhp  79  {a°} 

Patthlna  [pa+thina]  stiflE  D  "-335  :  DhsA  307.  Also  as 
patthinna  at  Vin  1.286  (=atirajitatta  thaddha  Bdhgh, 
on  p.  391);  Vism  361  (=thina  p.  262);  VbhA  67 
("sneha). 

Pattheti  [pa-l-  arth,  cp.  Sk.  prarthayati]  to  wish  for,  desire, 
pray  for,  request,  long  for  S  iv.125;  v.145;  Sn  114, 
899  ;  Th  2,  341  ;  Nd'  312,  316 ;  PugA  208  (asai)sati+ )  ; 
PvA  148;  Sdhp  66,  319;  ppr.  patthento  PvA  107; 
patthayanto  J  1.66  (paramSbhisagbodhig) ;  patthayag 
Sn  70  (  =  iochanto  patthayanto  abhijappanto  Nd^  392) ; 
patthayamana  M  1.4;  Sn  902;  J  1.259;  DhA  111.193; 
PvA  226  (=&sii)samana) ;  &  patthayano  Sn  900  ;  It  67, 


115.  —  grd.  patthetabba  PvA  96,  patthayitabba  PvA 
95,  and  patthiya  which  only  occurs  in  neg.  form  apat- 
thiya  what  ought  not  to  be  wished  J  iv.6i  ;  Pv  11. 6' 
(=apatthayitabbag  PvA  95);  DhA  1.29;  also  as  na- 
patthiya  (med.)  one  who  does  not  wish  for  himself  Sn 
914  (cp.  Nd2  337).  —  pp.  patthita  (q.  v.). 

Patva  see  papunati. 

Patha  [of  path,  Ved.  pathi  with  the  3  bases  pathi,  path" 
and  panth°,  of  which  only  the  last  two  have  formed 
independent  nouns,  viz.  patha  and  pantha  (q.  v.)]  i. 
path,  road,  way  D  1.63  ;  Sn  176  (loc.  pathe),  385,  540, 
868 ;  Nd'  485  B  (-1- pantha,  in  expl"  of  magga)  ;  J  1.308 
(loc.  pathe) ;  n.39  ;  vi.525  (abl.  patha) ;  Th  i,  64  ;  Pug 
22,  57;  Mhvs  21,  24  (pathe);  36,  93  (loc.  pathi,  see 
Geiger,  Gr.  §  89);  Sdhp  241. — 2.  Very  frequent  as 
-°,  where  it  is  sometimes  pleonastic,  and  acts  in  the 
function  of  an  abstract  formation  in  °ia  or  °Uaij  (cp. 
similar  use  of  anta  :  see  anta'  5  ;  and  pada :  see  pada 
3),  e.  g.  anila"  (air)  J  iv.119;  anupariyaya"  A  iv.107: 
adicca"  (path  of  the  sun,  sky)  DhA  ni.177  ;  ummagga° 
S  1.193  ;  kamma"  DhA  1.36  ;  ganana°  (range  of)  calcu- 
lation MUn  20;  cakkhu'^  J  IV.403  (=cakkhunag  etag 
namag  C.) ;  catummaha"  A  111.28,  42,  394;  dve°  Vv 
53"  ;  nakkhatta"  Dh  208  ;  yanna°  (=yanfia)  Nd'  524  ; 
yogga°  A  III. 122  ;  raja°  S  11. 219;  raga°  (sensuality) 
S  IV. 70  ;  vacana"  (way  of  saying,  speech)  Vv  63" 
(  =  vacana  VvA  262),  etc.  See  also  cakkhu'^,  neyya", 
dvejha",  manussa",  yanna",  vada°,  sagga",  hattha° ; 
der.  patheyya.  —  See  also  byappatha.  — apatha  where 
there  is  no  way  or  road,  wrong  way  J  11.287  '•  ThA  255  ; 
VvA  337. 

-addhan  "  the  journey  or  stretch  of  the  path  "  :  see 
under  addhan.  -addhi  (?)  so  perhaps  to  be  read  for 
patatthi.  according  to  FausboU  J  vi.276.  Unclear  in 
meaning,  expl''  by  nibbiddha  vithi  (frequented  road  ?) 
-gamana  "  going  on  their  course,"  of  the  stars  D  i.io 
(see  Dial.  1.20  :  "  their  usual  course  "). 

Pathabya  [fr.  pathavi=  patha vi]  belonging  to  the  earth, 
ruler  of  the  earth  (?)  A  iv.90  (reading  uncertain). 

Pathavi  see  pathavi. 

Pathavin  [fr.  patha]  a  traveller  Vin  iv.108  ;  J  vi.65  ;  DA 
1.298. 

Pada  (nt.)  [Ved.  pad,  pad  (m.)  foot,  and  also  pada ;  pada 
(nt.)  step.  Cp.  Gr.  ttwc,'  (iropf)  =Lat.  pes,  Goth,  fotus 
=  Ohg  fuoz=E.  foot;  further  Arm.  het  track,  Gr. 
■nita  after,  n'thov  field,  :reJ6e  on  foot,  etc.  ;  Lith.  peda 
track;  Ags.  fetvan=E.  fetch.. —  The  decl.  in  Pali  is 
vocalic  (a),  viz.  pada ;  a  trace  of  the  consonant  (root) 
decl.  is  instr.  sg.  pada  (Th  i,  457 ;  Sn  768),  of  cons,  (s) 
decl.  instr.  padasa  with  the  foot,  on  foot  (D  1.107;  J 
111.371  ;  DhA  1.391).  —  Gender  is  nt.,  but  nom.  pi.  is 
frequently  found  as  pada,  e.  g.  at  Dh  273  ;  Nett  192 
(mula°)]  1.  foot  Dh  273=SnA  366  (?  saccanag  caturo 
pada) ;  DA  1.85  ;  usuaUy  -°,  like  hatthipadag  elephant's 
foot  M  1.176,  184  ;  S  1.86  ;  v. 43,  231  ;  and  with  numerals 
dvi°  &  di°,  catup",  attha°  (q.  v.).  In  attha°  also  mean- 
ing "  square  of  a  chessboard."  —  2.  step,  footstep, 
track  Dh  179  (of  a  Buddha,  cp.  DhA  111.194  ^  '97) 
J  1. 1 70  (footmark)  11. 154;  in  redupl. -iterative  forma- 
tion padapadag  step  by  step  Sn  446  (v.  1.  padanupa- 
dag),  and  pade  padag  Sn  p.  107  (cp.  SnA  451).  —  3. 
(Often  synonymous  with  "patha  i.  e.  way.  kind,  &  some- 
times untranslatable)  (a)  lit.  way,  path,  position,  place 
Vin  it.217  (nakkhatta"  consteUation)  ;  J  1.3 15  (assama" 
=  assama);  v. 75  (id.).  321  (id.);  vi.76  (id.);  vi.iSo 
(v.  I.  patha;  C.  raahamagga)  ;  mantapada  =  manta  D 
1.104  (cp.  DA  1.273).  See  also  janapada,  saggapada. 
—  (b)  in  appl''  meaning  (modal) :  case,  lot,  principle, 
part,  constituent,  characteristic,  ingredient,  item,  thing, 
element   M    i.r76    (cattari    padani   4    characteristics); 


Padaka 


31 


PadSrana 


S  1.7  (pade  pade  "  now  in  this  thing,  now  in  that  " 
C.  arammarie  arammane),  212  (amatai)  p.  =nibbana); 
11.280  (id.);  A  H.51  (id.).  It  39  (p.  asankhatag  =nib- 
bana)  ;  Sn  88  (dhamraapade  sudesite  ;  expH  as  nibbana- 
dhamma  SnA  164;  dhammapada  =  Dhamma),  ibid, 
(anavajja-padani  sevamana  =  principles),  700  (money- 
yar)  uttamag  padag.  thing;  but  SnA  491  expl'  as 
uttama-patipadar)),  765:  Dh  21,  93,  114  (amatar)), 
254.  368  (santag  =nibbanass'  etai)  namar),  santa- 
kotthasar)  DhA  IV.108)  ;  Pv  iv.3"  (amatai))  ;  Nett  2  = 
192  (nava  padani  kusalani)  ;  SnA  397  (namadi  p.) ; 
Sdhp  47  (accutag  santai)  p.),  615  (paramar)).  See 
further  dhamma",  nibbana",  santi",  sikkha".  —  4.  a 
word,  verse  (or  a  quarter  of  a  verse),  stanza,  line,  sen- 
tence S  11.36  (ekena  padena  sabbo  attho  vutto) ;  S 
IV.379=A  V.320  (agga°)  ;  A  n.182  (+vyaiijana  & 
desana) ;  189  (attha°  text,  motto) ;  in. 356  (id.) ;  Sn  252 
(=dhamma-desana  SnA  293),  374;  Dh  273;  J  1.72 
(atireka-pada-satena) ;  Nett  4  (akkharag  padag  vyan- 
janag,  cp.  namadihi  padehi  at  SnA  397,  which  is  to  be 
understood  as  nama,  pada  &  vyafijana,  i.  e.  word,  sen- 
tence &  letter,  cp.  Mvyutp.  104,  74-76);  Miln  148 
(ahacca°) ;  KhA  169;  SnA  409  (ubhaya"),  444;  VvA 
3,  13;  PvA  10,  26.  117  (word,  term),  abl.  padaso 
(adv.)  sentence  by  s""  or  word  by  word  Vin  iv.  14 
(dhammar)  vaceti  =  anupadar)  C.  ;  cp.  KhA  190  p. 
°dhamma).  At  MA  1.2  pada  (sentence  or  division  of  a 
sentence)  is  contrasted  with  akkhara  (word),  when  it  is 
said  that  the  Majjhima  Nikaya  consists  of  80,523  padas 
and  740,053  akkharas.  —  Neg.  apada  (i)  without  feet, 
footless  A  :v.434  (Mara ;  v.  1.  apara) ;  It  87  (satta,  + 
dvipada  etc.).  —  (2)  trackless,  leaving  no  footprint,  fig. 
having  no  desires  (i.  e.  signs  of  worldliness)  Dh  1 79 
(raga,  etc.,  as  padani  DhA  in.  197,  but  cp.  also  p.  194.) 
-attha  meaning  of  a  word  KhA  81,  84;  SnA  91. 
-Anupadai]  (adv.)  on  the  track  DhA  11.38.  -inupadika 
following  one's  footsteps  J  n.78  ;  DhA  11.94  (theranai)) ; 
nt.  adv.  °Tj  close  behind  DhA  1.290.  -anupubbata  (or 
°ta)  succession  of  words  Nd'  140  (in  expl"  of  "  iti "  ; 
cp.  SnA  28);  Nd^  137  (id.;  reading  "ka).  -uddhara 
synopsis  of  a  verse  SnA  237  (atthuddhara-l- ).  -kusala 
clever  at  following  a  trail  J  111.501,  505.  -carika  a 
female  (foot-)  servant  J  iv.35.  -cetiya  "  step-shrine,"  a 
holy  footprint,  a  miraculous  footprint  left  on  the  ground 
by  a  holy  man  DhA  m.  194.  -ccheda  separation  of  words, 
parsing  SnA  150.  -jata  (nt.)  pedal  character  S  1.86. 
-^hana  [cp.  Sk.  padasthana  footprint]  "  proximate 
cause"  (Cpd.  13,  23)  Nett  1  sq.,  27  sq.,  40  sq.,  104; 
Vism  84.  -dvaya  twofold  part  (of  a  phrase),  i.  e.  ante- 
cedent and  subsequent  DhsA  164.  -parama  one  whose 
highest  attainment  is  the  word  (of  the  text,  and  not  the 
sense  of  it)  A  n.135,  J  vi.131  ;  Pug  41  ("  vyaiijana- 
padam  eva  paramai)  assa  ti "  PugA  223.  -paripiiri 
(f.)  expletive  particle  Nd^  137  ;  SnA  28.  -purana  filling 
out  a  verse ;  as  tt.  g.  expletive  particle  SnA  590  (a), 
139  (kho),  137  (kho  pana),  378  (tato),  536  (pi),  230  (su), 
416  (ha),  377  (hi);  KhA  219  (tam),  188  (su) ;  VvA  10 
(maya).  -bhajana  dividing  of  words,  i.  e.  treating  each 
word  (of  a  phrase)  separately  DhsA  234.  -bhajaniya 
division  of  a  phrase  DhsA  54  -bhana  reciting  or 
preaching  (the  words  of  the  Scrpitures)  DhA  11.95  : 
in.345  ;  IV.  1 8.  -vannana  expl"  of  a  pada  or  single  verse 
SnA  65,  237;  KhA  125,  132,  228.  -valafija  a  foot- 
print, track  J  VI. 560  ;  DhA  11.38;  in.  194.  -viggaha 
separation  of  words,  resolution  of  a  compound  into  its 
components  VvA  326.  -vibhaga  separation  of  words, 
parsing  SnA  269  ;  PvA  34.  -sagsagga  contact  of  words 
Nd'  139  ;  Nd'  137  ;  SnA  28.  -sadda  sound  of  footsteps 
Sn  p.  80  ;  J  IV.409.  -sandhi  euphonic  combination  of 
words  Nd*  445  ;  Nd'  137  ;  KhA  155,  224  ;  SnA  28,  40, 
157  etc.  ;  PvA  52.  -sila  a  stone  for  stepping  on,  flag 
Vin  II. 121  =  154. 

Padaka'  {'^A])  [ir.  pada*]  one  who  knows  the  padas  (words 
or  lines),  versed  in  the  padapatha  of  the  Veda  (Ep.  of 


an  educated  Brahmin)  D  :.88  =  Sn  p.  105  (where  AvS 
II.  19  in  id.  p.  has  padaso  =  P.  padaso  word  by  word,  but 
Divy  620  reads  padako ;  ajjheti  vedeti  ca  ti  padako) ; 
M  1.386 ;  A  1. 163,  166  ;  Sn  595  ;  Miln  lo,  236. 

Padaka-  (nt.)=pada3,  viz.  basis,  principle  or  pada  4,  viz. 
stanza,  line  J  v.  116  (  =  karana-padani  C). 

Padaka^  (nt.)  [fr.  pada']  in  cpd.  attha°  an  "  eight-foot," 
i.  e.  a  small  inset  square  (cp,  attha-pada  chess-board), 
a  patch  (?)  Vin  1.297.     See  also  padika. 

Padakkhi^a  (adj.)  [pa-)-dakkhina]  i.  "to  the  right,"  in 
phrase  padakkhinarg  karoti  (with  ace.  of  object)  to  hold 
(a  person,  etc.)  to  one's  right  side,  i.  e.  to  go  round  so 
as  to  keep  the  right  side  turned  to  a  person,  a  mode  of 
reverential  salutation  Vin  1.17;  S  1.138;  A  1.294; 
n.2i,  182;  III. 198;  Sn  loio  ;  J  1.50,  60;  in. 392. — 
2.  "  (prominent)  with  the  right,"  i.  e.  skilful,  clever, 
quick  in  learning  J  iv.469  (  =susikkhita  C).  —  3.  lucky, 
auspicious,  turning  out  well  or  favourable  J  v. 353 
( =sukha-nipphattin  vuddhi-yutta  C). 

-ggahin  "  right-handed,"  i.  e.  cleverly  taking  up 
(what  is  taught),  good  at  grasping  or  understanding 
A  in. 79,  180.  v. 24  sq.,  90,  338;  DhA  11. 105. — Opp. 
appadakkhinaggahin  "  left-handed,"  unskilled,  un- 
trained (cp.  Ger.  "  linkisch  ")  S  n.204  sq.  ;  J  in. 483. 
-ggahita  skilfulness,  quick  grasp,  cleverness  KhA  148. 

Padatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  pada]  being  or  constituting  a  lot, 
part  or  element  SnA  164. 

Padara   (nt.)   [pa-t-dara  of  dr,  cp.   dabba,   darati,   daru] 

1.  a  cleft,  split,  fissure,  crevice  M  1.469  ;  S  11.32  ;  Sn  720 
( =dari  SnA  500) ;  comb^  with  kandara  at  Miln  36,  296, 
411  ;  PvA  29.  — 2.  a  board,  plank  J  11  10  91  ("sakata) 
112;  in. 181;  V.47  sq.  ;  vi.432  ("cchanna) ;  SnA  330 
(dabba"  oar),  355  ;  DhA  11.55  ;  in.296.  —  3.  Wrong 
spelling  for  badara  at  J  iv.363  (beluva  p^ani  ca)  & 
VI.529. 

-saflcita  filled  with  clefts  (?)  Vin  iv.46.  -samacara 
refractiousness,  disobedience  (?)  M  1.469. 

Padahati  [pa-l-dha]  i.  to  strive,  exert  D  III. 22 1  (cittar) 
pagganhati  p.)  ;  PvA  31  (yoniso  p.).  — 2,  to  confront, 
take  up,  fight  against,  stand  J  vi.508  (usirag  munja- 
pubbajai)  urasa  padahessami  "  I  shall  stand  against  the 
grasses  with  my  chest "  ;  C.  expl'^  by  dvedha  katva 
purato  gamissami,  i.  e.  break  and  go  forward).  — 
Note,  padahasi  at  J  iv.383  read  pade  hasi  (see  Windisch, 
Mara  &■  B.  p.  124  &  Morris,  J.P.T.S.  1893,  51.  Win- 
disch takes  padahasi  as  pa-l-dah  to  burn,  &  translates 
"  du  willst  das  Feuer  brennen,"  i.  e.  you  attempt  some- 
thing impossible,  because  the  fire  will  burn  you).  —  pp. 
pahita  (q.  v.). 

Padahana  see  padhana. 

Padatar  [n.  ag.  of  padati]  extravagant,  a  squanderer 
Pdgp.  65,  68. 

Padati  (padadati,  padeti)  [pa-(-da]  i.  to  give,  bestow 
Pv  1. 1 1'  (ger.  padatva,  perhaps  better  to  read  ca  datva, 
as  V.  1.  BB)  ;    J  in.279-(fut.  padassati) ;  v. 394  (id.). — ■ 

2.  to  acquire,  take,  get  J  1. 190  (inf.  padatave,  C.  gahe- 
tug).  —  Pass  padiyati  (q.  v.). 

Pad&na  (nt.)  [fr.  pa-t-dS]  giving,  bestowing;  but  appears 
to  have  also  the  meaning  of  "  attainment,  characteristic, 
attribute  "  A  1.102  (bala°  &  paudita") :  J  1.97  (.sotapatti- 
magg'  adi°) ;  PvA  71  (anubala")  ;  ThA  35  (anupatti- 
dhammata°).  —  At  Th  i,  47  Kern  (Toev.  11.138)  pro- 
poses to  read  tuyhag  padane  for  T.  tuyh'  apadSne,  and 
translates  padana  by  "  footstep,  footprint."  See  also 
sapadana  &  sampadana. 

Pad&rava  (nt.)  [pa-t-dfl  splitting,  tearing  Th  1,  752. 


Padalana 


32 


Pad  u  set  i 


Padalana  (nt.)  [fr.  padaleti]  cleaving,  bursting  open, 
breaking  Nett  61,  112  (mohajala") ;  ThA  34  (moha- 
kkhandha"). 

Padalita  [pp-  of  padaleti]  broken,  pierced,  destroyed  S 
1. 130;  III. 83  ;  A  V.88  (appadalita-pubbai)  lobhakkhan- 
dhai)) ;  Sn  546  (asava  te  p.  ;  quoted  at  VvA  9) ;  ThA  34 
(as  A.  v.88  with  moha°). 

Padalitatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  padalita]  the  fact  of  having 
(med.)  or  being  (pass.)  pierced  or  broken,  abl.  padalitatta 
on  account  of  having  broken  Miln  287. 

Padaletar  [n.  ag.  to  padaleti]  one  who  pierces  or  destroys, 
a  destroyer,  breaker,  in  phrase  mahato  kayassa  padaleta 
the  destroyer  of  a  great  body  (or  bulk)  A  1.284  ^Q-  ('" 
sequence  dure-patin,  akkhanavedhin,  m.  k.  p.);  11.170 
sq.,  202  ;  cp.  padaleti'. 

Padaleti  [Caus.  of  pa+dal]  '■  to  cleave,  break,  pierce, 
destroy,  in  comb"  "khandhai)  padaleti  to  destroy  the 
great  mass  of  .  .  .,  e.  g.  tamo°  It  8  (padalayurj) ;  Th  2, 
28  (ger.  padaliya  =  moha°  padalitva  ThA  34);  lobha" 
S  v.88;  avijja°  A  1.285.  —  2.  to  break,  break  down, 
tear  down,  burst  open  J  1.73  (pabbata-kutani)  ;  iv.  173 
(matthakar)  p°etva  utthita-singa) ;  v. 68  (silaya  mat- 
thakari) ;  Miln  332  (ditthi-jalar)) ;  DA  1.37  (Sinerui)). 
See  also  sam°» — pp.  padalita  (q.  v.). 

Padika  (adj.)  [fr.  pada  i  ;  cp.  padaka^]  consisting  of  feet 
or  parts,  -fold;  dvadasa"  twelve  fold  J  1.75  (paccay- 
akara). 

Paditta  [pp.  of  pa  +  dip,  cp.  Sk.  pradlpta]  kindled,  set  on 
fire,  blazing  S  iii.93S£  (chav*  alatar)  ubhato  padittar))  ; 
J  VI.  108;  Sdhp  208  ("angarakasur)). 

Padippati  [pa+dippati]  to  flame  forth,  to  blaze  Cp  ni  9' 
(davadaho  p.),  —  pp.  paditta  (q.  v.).  —  Caus.  padipeti 
(q.  v.). 

Padissa  (adj.)  [grd.  of  padissati]  being  seen,  to  be  seen, 
appearing  D  11.205  (upasantappa"). 

Padissati  [pa+dissati.  Pass,  of  drs]  to  be  seen  Sn  108 
(doubtful;  V.  1.  padussati ;  expH  at  SnA  172  by  pati- 
dissati,  v.  1.  padussati,  cp.  p.  192);  Cp  i.io^;  J  vi.89 ; 
Sdhp  427. 

Padipa  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  pradipa]  i.  a  light  Dh  146; 
Vv  462  (jalati  blazes) ;  Tikp  14  ;  Miln  40  ;  VvA  51  (padi- 
pai)  ujjaletva  lighting  a  lamp,  making  a  light)  ;  PvA  38  ; 
Sdhp  250.  —  2.  a  lamp  Sn  235  (nibbanti  dhira  yath' 
ayai)  p.)  ;  DhA  11.163  (anupadano  viya  p.).  °g  karoti 
to  make  a  light,  to  light  up  Vin  i.i  18  ;  °i)  ujjaleti  see 
under  i.  Usually  as  tela-padipa  an  oil  lamp  Vin  1.15  ; 
S  11.86  (telan  ca  vattiii  ca  telapadlpo  jhayati)  =iv.2i3  ; 
V.319;  A  1.137;  VvA  198.  — appadipa  where  there  is 
no  light,  obscure  Vin  iv.268. 
-kala  lighting  time  Vv  9'. 

Padlpita  [pp-  of  padipeti]  lit,  burning,  shining  Miln  40. 

Padlpiya  &  Padlpeyya  (nt.)  [padipa +(i)  ya]  that  which  is 
connected  with  lighting,  material  for  lighting  a  lamp, 
lamps  &  accessories  ;  one  of  the  gifts  forming  the  stock 
of  requisites  of  a  Buddhist  mendicant  (see  Nd^  523: 
yaiiiia  as  deyyadhamma).  The  form  in  °eyya  is  the 
older  and  more  usual  one,  thus  at  A  11.85,  203  ;  iv.239  ; 
It  65  ;  Pug  51  ;  VvA  51.  —  The  form  in  °iya  at  Vv  22*, 
26«,  37«  ;  J  VI.315  ;  VvA  295. 

Padipeti  [Caus.  of  padippati]  to  light  a  light  or  a  lamp 
Vin  I.I  18  (padlpeyya,  padipetabba)  ;  Miln  40  ;  ThA  72 
(Ap.  V.  46) ;  Sdhp  63,  332,  428.  —  pp.  padipiU  (q.  v.). 

Padlyati  [Pass,  of  padati]  to  be  given  out  or  presented  ; 
Pv  11.9'* ;  Sdhp  502.  523. 


Paduttha  [pp.  of  padussati]  made  bad,  spoilt,  corrupt, 
wicked,  bad  (opp.  pasanna,  e.  g.  at  A  r.8  ;  It  12,  13) 
D  111,32  ("citta);  M  111.49;  A  11. 311  ;  Sn  662;  Dh  i; 
J  11.401  ;  DhA  1.23  (opp.  pasanna);  PvA  34,  43  (°ma- 
nasa).  — appaduttha  good,  not  corrupt  D  1.20  ;  in. 32  ; 
M  III. 50  ;  S  1.13  ;  Pv  IV. 710. 

Padubbhati  [pa+dubbhati]  to  do  wrong,  offend,  plot 
against  J  1.262  (ger.  "dubbhitva). 

Padnma  (nt.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  padma,  not  in  RV.]  the  lotus 
Nelumbium  speciosum.  It  is  usually  mentioned  in  two 
varieties,  viz.  ratta"  and  seta",  i.  e.  red  and  white  lotus, 
so  at  J  v.37  ;  SnA  125  ;  as  ratta°  at  VvA  191  ;  PvA  157. 
The  latter  seems  to  be  the  more  prominent  variety  ;  but 
paduma  also  includes  the  3  other  colours  (blue,  yellow, 
pink  .'),  since  it  frequently  has  the  designation  of  paii- 
cavanna-paduma  (the  5  colours  however  are  nowhere 
specified),  e.  g.  at  J  1.222  ;  v.337;  vi.341  ;  VvA  41.  It 
is  further  classified  as  satapatta  and  sahassapatta-p.,  viz. 
lotus  with  loo  &  with  1,000  leaves:  VvA  191.  Com- 
pared with  other  species  at  J  v.37,  where  7  kinds  are 
enum''  as  uppala  (blue,  red  &  white),  paduma  (red  & 
white),  kumuda  (white)  and  kallahara.  See  further 
kamala  and  kuvalaya.  —  (i)  the  lotus  or  lotus  flower 
M  111.93  :  S  1. 138,  204  ;  A  1. 145  ;  11.86  sq.  ;  111.26,  239  ; 
Sn  71,  213  ;  J  1. 51  (danda°  N.  of  a  plant,  cp.  Sk.  dandot- 
phala),  76  (khandha",  lata",  dandaka",  olambaka") ; 
IV.3  ;  VI. 564  :  Dh  458;  Nd'  135;  Vv  35*  (=pundarika 
VvA  161);  44*2  (nana-paduma-saiichanna) ;  Pv  11. i™ 
(id.) ;  II.  12^  (id.) ;  Pug  63  ;  Vism  256  (ratta°) ;  DA  1.2 19  ; 
KhA  53  ;  SnA  97  ;  Sdhp  359.  —  (2)  N.  of  a  purgatory 
(°niraya)  S  1.151-152  ;  Sn  677  ;  p.  126 ;  SnA  475  sq. 

-acchara  (heavenly)  lotus-maiden  SnA  469.  -uttara 
N.  of  Buddha  SnA  341,  455  etc.  -kannika  a  peak  in 
the  shape  of  a  lotus  VvA  181.  -kalapa  a  bunch  of 
lotuses  VvA  191.  -gabbha  the  calyx  of  a  1.  ThA  68 
(°vanna).  -patta  a  1.  leaf  Nd'  135  (=pokkhara)  ;  DhA 
IV.  1 66  (=pokkhara-patta).  -puiija  a  1.  cluster  J 
111.55.  -puppha  a  lotus  flower  Nd^  393  ;  SnA  78.  -raga 
"lotus  hued,"  a  ruby  VvA  276.  -vyuha  one  of  the 
3  kinds  of  fighting,  viz.  p.°,  cakka°,  sakata"  J  11.406  = 
'^•343  ("^P-  Sk.  p.-vyuha-samadhi  a  kind  of  concentra 
tion,  &  see  J  trsl"  11.275).  -sara  a  lotus  pond  J  1.22 1  ; 
v.337  :  SnA  141. 

Padamaka  [fr.  paduma]  i.  the  Paduma  purgatory  S 1. 152. 
—  2.  a  lotus  J  11.325. 

Padamin  (adj.-n.)  [cp.  Sk.  padmin,  spotted  elephant] 
having  a  lotus,  belonging  to  a  lotus,  lotus-like  ;  N.  of  (the 
spotted)  elephant  Sn  53  (expl''  at  SnA  103  as  "  paduma- 
sadisa-gattataya  va  Padumakule  uppannataya  va 
padumi,"  cp.  Nd^  p.  164).  —  f.  padumini  [cp.  Sk. 
padmini  lotus  plant]  i.  a  lotus  pond  or  pool  of  lotuses 
D  1.75  ;  11.38  ;  M  111.93  ;  S  1.138  ;  A  111.26.  ^-  2.  the  lotus 
plant  Nelumbium  speciosum  J  1.128  (°panna) ;  iv.419 
(°patta) ;  SnA  369  ;  KhA  67  ("patta) ;  PvA  189. 

PaduUa  [?]  in  cpd.  padulla-gahin  is  perhaps  misreading ; 
trsl.  "  clutching  at  blown  straws  (of  vain  opinion)," 
expl''  by  C.  as  dutthuUagahin  ;  at  id.  p.  S  1.187  we  find 
dufthullabhanin  "  whose  speech  is  never  lewd  "  (see 
Psalms  0/ Brethren  399,  n.  3). 

Padussati  [pa-ndussati]  to  do  wrong,  offend  against  (with 
loc),  make  bad,  corrupt  DA  1.2 11  (see  padosa) ;  Sn  108 
(v.  1.  for  padissati);  aor.  padussi  J  11.125,  401. — pp. 
paduttha ;  Caus.  paduseti  (q.  v.). 

Padiisita  [pp.  of  paduseti]  made  bad,  corrupted,  spoilt 
It  13  (v.  I.  padussita). 

Padiiseti  &  Padoseti  [Caus.  of  padussati,  but  the  latter 
probably  Denom.  fr.  padosa^]  to  defile,  pollute,  spoil, 
make  bad  or  corrupt  [cp.  BSk.  pradusyati  cittarj  Divy 
197,  286]  D  1.20  ;  M  1. 129  ;  It  86  ;  DA  1.2 11  (see  padosa') ; 


Padesa 


33 


Padharita 


ThA  72  (Ap.  V.  40  :  to  be  read  for  paduse,  Pot.  =pado- 
seyya) ;  J  v,273  (manarj  p.,  for  upahacca).  — padusseti 
read  also  at  A  iv.97  for  padasseti  (dummanku  'yam 
padusseti  dhum'  aggimhi  va  pavako).  —  As  padoseti  at 
PvA  212  (cittani  padosetva)  and  in  stock  phrase  maiiag 
padosaye  (Pot.)  in  sense  of  "  to  set  upon  anger  "  (cp. 
padosa^)  S  1.149  ("  sets  his  heart  at  enmity  ")  =  A  11.3  ; 
V.171,  i74=Sn  659  (  =  manar)  padoseyya  SnA  477)  = 
Nett  132;  S  IV.70  ;  SnA  11  (mano  padoseyya).  —  pp. 
padusita  (q.  v.). 

Padesa  [fr.  pa+dis,  cp.  late  Sk.  pradesa]  indication,  loca- 
tion, range,  district;  region,  spot,  place  S  11.227,  254; 
V.201  ;  A  11.167  (cattaro  maha")  ;  Dh  127  (jagati"),  303  ; 
J  II. 3,  158  (Hiraavanta")  ;  in. 25  (id.),  191  (jati-gotta- 
kula°) ;  SnA  355  ;  PvA  29,  33  (hadaya"),  36  (so  read  for 
padase),  43,  47  ;  Sdhp  252. 

-karin  effecting  a  limited  extent  S  v.201.  -fiana 
knowledge  within  a  certain  range,  limited  knowledge 
S  V.457.  -bodhisatta  a  limited  Bodhisatta  Kvu  283 
(cp.  Kvtt  Irsl'  139',  166^).  -rajja  principaUty  over  a 
district,  local  government  It  15  ;  ThA  26  (Ap.  v.  10). 
-raja  a  local  or  sub-king  Vism  301  (cakkavatti-l- ).  -lak- 
khana  regional  or  limited  characteristics  Kvu  283. 
-vassin  raining  or  shedding  rain  only  locally  or  over  a 
(limited)  district  It  64-6O. 

Fadesika  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  padesa]  belonging  to  a  place  of 
indication,  indicating,  regional,  reaching  the  index  of, 
only  with  numerals  in  reference  to  age  (usually  sojasa- 
vassa°  at  the  time  of  16  years)  J  1.259  (id.)  262  (id.)  ; 
11.277  (id.).  —  See  also  uddesika  in  same  application. 

Padosa'  [pa-t-dosa^,  Sk.  pradosa]  defect,  fault,  blemish, 
badness,  corruption,  sin  D  1.71  (  =  padussati  parar)  va 
padiiseti  vinaseti  ti  padoso  DA  1.211) ;  M  111.3  ;  S  iv.322 
(vyapada°)  ;  A  1.8  (ceto°) ;  in. 92  (vyapada) ;  It  12; 
J  V.99  ;  Pug  59,  68  ;  Dhs  1060.  —  Nole.  At  ThA  72  we 
find  reading  "  apace  paduse  (padose  ?)  pi  ca  "  as  un- 
certain conjecture  for  v.  1.  BB  "  amacce  manase  pi 
ca." 

Padosa'  [pa-l-dosa^,  Sk.  pradvesa,  see  remarks  to  dosa'] 
anger,    hatred,    ill-will ;    always   as   mano"    "  anger  in  . 
mind"  M  1377;  Sn  328   (  =  khanu-kantak'  adimhi  p. 
Sn.\  334),  702  ;  J  IV. 29  ;  Miln  130  ;  Vism  304  ;  SnA  477. 

Padosika  (adj.)  [fr.  padosa^]  sinful,  spoiling  or  spoilt,  full 
of  fault  or  corruption,  only  in  2  phrases,  viz.  khidda'" 
"debauched  by  pleasure"  D  1.19;  and  mano^  "de- 
bauched in  mind  "  D  1.20,  21. 

Padosin  (adj.)  [fr.  padosa']  abusing,  damaging,  spoiling, 
injuring  S  1.13  (appaduttha°)  ;  Pv  IV.7"'. 

Padoseti  see  padiiseti. 

Paddha'  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  pradhva  (?)  in  diff.  meaning  "  being 
on  a  journey,"  but  rather  prahva]  i.  expert  in  (loc.) 
J  VI. 476  (v.  1.  patha  =  pattha  ;  C.  cheko  patibalo). — 
2.  subject  to,  serving,  attending  J  iv.35  (p.  carami,  so 
read  for  baddha,  see  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  ;  C.  padacarika). 

Faddha-  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  prardha]  half  (?)  J  111.95  (probably 
=  paddha',  but  C.  expl"*  as  addha  upaddha). 

PaddhagU  (adj.  n.)  [cp.  Sk.  pradhvaga]  i.  going,  walking 
J  III. 95  (T.  na  p'  addhagui),  but  C.  reads  paddhagur)). 
—  2.  humble,  ready  to  serve,  servant,  attendant,  slave 
S  1. 104  (so  read  for  paccagu) ;  Sn  1095  (T.  for  patthagu. 
q.  v.  —  Nd^  reads  pafthagu  but  SnA  597  paddhagu  and 
expl"'  by  paddhacara  paricarika) ;  J  vi.380  (hadayassa) ; 
Th  I,  632. 

Paddhacara  (adj.-n.)  [paddha'-l-cara,  cp.  Sk.  pradhva 
and  prahva  humble]  ready  to  serve,  subject  to, 
ministering;  a  servant  S  1.144  (T.  baddhacara,  v.  1. 
pattha"  ;  trsl.  "  pupil  ")  ;  J  iv.35  (read  paddhacara  'smi 


tuyhar)  for  T.  baddha  carami  t.,  as  pointed  out  by  Kern, 
Toev.  s.  V.  baddha.  The  Cy.  misunderstood  the  wrong 
text  reading  and  e.xpl''  as  "  tuyhag  baddha  carami," 
but  adds  "  veyyavaccakarika  padacarika  ")  ;  v. 327  (as 
baddhancara ;  C.  veyyavacca-kara) ;  vi.268  (°a  female 
servant  =  C.  pada-paricarika) ;  Nd'  464  (-(-paricarika); 
SnA  597  (-f-paricaraka,  for  paddhagu). 

Padma  see  paduma. 

Padmaka  (m.  &  nt.)  [Sk.  padmaka]  N.  of  a  tree,  Costus 
speciosus  or  arabicus  J  v. 405,  420  ;  vi.497  (reading 
uncertain),  537. 

Padvara  (nt.)  [pa-l-dvara]  a  place  before  a  door  or  gate 
J  V.433;  VI. 327. 

-gama  suburb  Davs  v.  3. 

Padhai|sa  see  appadhaijsa. 

Padhagsati  [pa-l-dharjsati]  to  fall  from  (abl.),  to  be  de- 
prived of  Vin  11.205  (yogakkhema  p.  ;  so  read  for 
paddh").  —  Caus.  padhagseti  to  destroy,  assault,  violate, 
offend  J  IV. 494.  (  =  jivitakkhayarj  papeti)  ;  PvA  117.  — 
grd.  padhagsiya  in  cpds.  su°  &  dup"  easily  (or  with 
difficulty)  overwhelmed  or  assaulted  Vin  11.256  = 
S  11.264.  -^Iso  neg.  appadhagsiya  (&  "ka)  (q.  v.).  — ■ 
pp.  padhagsita  (q.  v.). 

Padbansita  [pp.  of  padhagseti]  offended,  assaulted  J 
11.422.     See  also  app°. 

Padhana  (nt.)  [fr.  pa-hdha,  cp.  padahati]  exertion,  ener- 
getic, effort,  striving,  concentration  of  mind  D  in. 30, 
77,  104,  108,  214,  238;  M  II.  1 74,  218;  S  1.47;  11.268; 
IV.360  ;  V.244  sq.  ;  A  III. 65-67  (5  samaya  and  5  asama3'a 
for  padhana),  249;  iv.355  ;  v.17  sq.  ;  Sn  424,  428; 
It  30;  Dh  141  ;  J  1.90;  Nd*  394  (=viriya);  Vbh  218 
(citta-samadhi  p°  etc.)  ;  Nett  16  ;  DA  1.104  ;  DhA  1.85 
(maha-padhanai)  padahitva)  ;  ThA  174;  PvA  134. 
Padhana  is  fourfold,  viz.  sar)vara°,  pahana°,  bhavana", 
anurakkhana"  or  exertion  consisting  in  the  restraint  of 
one's  senses,  the  abandonment  of  sinful  thoughts,  prac- 
tice of  meditation  &  guarding  one's  character.     These 

4  are  mentioned  at  D  in. 225  ;  A  11. 16  ;  Ps  1.84  ;  n.14  sq., 
56,  86.  166,  174;  Ud  34;  Nd'  45,  340;  Sdhp  594  — 
Very  frequently  termed  sammappadhana  [cp.  BSk. 
samyak-pradhana  JIVastu  ni.121);  but  also  samyak- 
prahana,  e.  g.  Divy  208]  or  "  right  exertion,"  thus  at 
Vin  1.22  ;  S  1.105  ;  ni.96  (the  four)  ;  A  n.15  (id.)  ;  in. 12  ; 
IV. 125;  Nd'  14;  Ps  1.2 1,  85,  90,  161;  SnA  124;  PvA 
98.  —  As  padahana  at  Ps  1.17,  21,  181. 

Padhanavant  (adj.)  [fr.  padhana]  gifted  \vith  energy,  full 
of  strength  (of  meditation  etc.),  rightly  concentrated 

5  1. 1 88.  1 97  ;  Sn  70  (cp.  Nd^  394).  53 1  ■ 

Padhanika  (adj.)  [fr.  padhana]  making  efforts,  exerting 
oneself  in  meditation,  practising  "  padhana  "  DA  1. 251. 

Padhaniya  (adj.)  [fr.  padhana]  belonging  to  or  connected 
with  exertion,  worthy  of  being  pursued  in  cpd.  °anga 
(nt.)  a  quality  to  be  striven  after,  of  which  there  are  5, 
expressed  in  the  attributes  of  one  who  attains  them  as 
saddho,  appabadho,  asafho,  araddha-viriyo,  paniiava 
D  ui.237=M  n.95,  128=  A  in.65  ;  referred  to  at  Miln 
trsl'  1. 1 88.  Besides  these  there  is  the  set  called  pari- 
suddhi-padhaniy'  angani  and  consisting  either  of  4 
qualities  (sila°,  citta",  ditthi",  vimutti")  A  II. 194.  or  of 
9  (the  four-l-kankha-vitarana°,  maggamagga-nana°. 
patipadafla^ia-dassana",  flaoa-dassana",  paniia°)  D 
111.288;  Psi.28. 

Padharita  ("  born  in  mind  ")  read  pattharita  at  Th  i,  842 
(see  pattharati).  —  padharehi  (v.  1.  F. )  at  Sn  1 1 49  read 
dharehi.  —  padharita  in  meaning  of "  considered,  under- 
stood "  in  cpd.  su°  at  S  111.6  ;  v. 2  78. 

V— 3 


Padhavati 


34 


Panna 


Padhavati  [pa+dhavati]  to  run  out  or  forth  Pv  m.i' 
(ger.  °itva  =  upadhavitva  PvA  i  73). 

Padhavin  (adj.)  [fr.  padhavati]  rushing  or  running  out  or 
forth  M  11. 98. " 

Padhiipati  (  =  padhupayati)  [pa  +  dhupayati]  to  blow 
forth  smolce  or  flames  Vin  1.25  (aor.  padhupasi) ;  iv.  109 
(id.)  ;  Vism  400  (id.),  (so  read  for  padhumasi  T.,  v.  1. 
SS  padhupayi  &   padhumayi).  —  pp.  padhupita  (q.  v.). 

Padhupita  [pa  +  dhupita,  latter  only  in  meaning  "in- 
censed," cp.  dhupa  etc.]  fumigated,  reeking,  smoked  out 
S  1.133  (trsl""  "  racked  [wrapt]  in  flames  "  ;  C.  santapita) ; 
VvA  237  (so  read  with  v.  I.  SS.  forX.  pavusita  ;  meaning  : 
scented,  filled  with  scent). 

Padhota  (adj.)  [pa+dhota]  cleansed,  in  cpd.  sup"  well 
cleansed  D  11.324. 

Pana  (indecl.)  [doublet  of  Sk.  puna(h)  with  diff.  meaning 
(see  puna),  cp.  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  34]  adversative  cS:  inter- 
rogative particle,  sometimes  (originally,  cp.  puna 
"again,  further")  merely  connecting  &  continuing 
the  story.  —  (i)  (adversative)  but.  on  the  contrary 
J  1.222  ;  11.159;  VvA  79  (correl.  with  tava).  ca  pana 
"but"  J  1.152;  atha  ca  pana  "  and  yet"  D  1.139; 
J  1.279  ;  na  kho  pana  "  certainly  not  "  J  1.151  ;  va  pana 
"or  else"  Vin  1.83;  Dh  42;  Sn  376,  829.  —  (2)  (in 
questions)  then,  now  J  11. 4  (kir|  p.),  159  (kahag  p.); 
VvA  21  (kena  p.);  PvA  27  (katamar)  p.).  —  (3)  (con- 
clusive or  copulative)  and,  and  now,  further,  moreover 
D  1. 139  (siya  kho  p.  be  it  now  that  .  .  .)  ;  Sn  23,  393, 
396,  670  ;  J  1.278  ;  PvA  3. 

Panaccati  [pa-l- naccati]  to  dance  (forth),  to  dance  ThA 
257  (ppr.  panaccanto).  —  pp.  panaccita  (q.  v.). 

Panaccita  [pp.  of  panaccati]  dancing,  made  to  dance  Th 
2,  390. 

Panasa  [cp.  late  Sk.  panasa,  Lat.  penus  stores,  Lith.  penas 
fodder,  perhaps  Goth,  fenea]  the  Jack  or  bread-fruit  tree 
(Artocarpus  integrifolia)  and  its  fruit  J  1.450;  11. 160; 
V.205,  465;  Vv  44";  KhA  49,  50,  58  Cphala,  where 
Vism  258  reads  panasa-taca) ;  SnA  475  ;  ^'vA  147. 

Panassati  [pa-l-nassati,  cp.  also  BSk  pranasa  Divy  626] 
to  be  lost,  to  disappear,  to  go  to  ruin,  to  cease  to  be 
M  1.177  ;  S  11.272  (read  panassissati  with  BB) ;  J  v.401  ; 
VI.239  ;  Th  I,  143. 

Panada  [pa-(-nada]  shouting  out,  shrieks  of  joy  J  vi.282. 

Panadeti  [Cans,  of  pa4-  nad]  to  shout  out,  to  utter  a  sound 
Th  I,  310. 

Pana]ika  (f.)  [fr.  panaji]  a  pipe,  tube,  channel,  water 
course  DA  1.244. 

Panali  (f)  [pa-l-nali]  a  tube,  pipe  A  iv.171  (udapana"). 

Panigghosa  in  cpd.  appanigghosa  is  wrongly  registered  as 
such  in  A  Index  (for  A  iv.88)  ;  it  is  to  be  separated 
appa  -I-  nigghosa  (see  nigghosa). 

Panudati  [pa-t-  nudati]  to  dispel,  repel,  remove,  push  away 
S  1,167  sq.,  173  ;  Dh  383  ;  Sn  8i.  928  (pot.  panudeyya 
or  metri  causa  panudeyya  =  pajaheyya  etc.  Nd'  385); 
J  VI. 491  (r.  pi.  panudamase). — ger.  panuditva  SnA 
591.  &  panujja  Sn  359,  535,  1055  (expl''  at  Nd^  395  as 
imper.  pres.  =pajaha,  cp.  SnA  591  =panudehi)  ;  J 
111.14;  V.198  (=patetva  C).  —  Put.  panudahissati 
Th  I,  27,  233.  —  Pass,  panujjati.  ppr.  panujjamana  in 
phrase  "  api  panujjamanena  pi  "  even  if  repulsed  M 
1. 108,  cp.  A  IV. 32  &  Nett  164  (v.  1.  to  be  substituted  for 
T.  pamajjamanena).  —  pp.  panunna  &  panudita  (q.  v.). 

Panudita  [pp.  of  panudati]  dispelled,  driven  out  Sn  483 
(panudita  metri  causa,  v.  1.  panudita).    See  also  panunna. 


Panunna  (Pa9unna  &  Pannwa)  [PP-  <^{  panudati]  (med. 

&  pass.)  put  away,  rejected  or  rejecting,  dispelled, 
driven  away,  sent  A  11.29;  v.31  ;  Sn  469  (°kodha) ; 
J  VI. 247.  285  ;  Kvu  597  (ito  p.,  trsl*"  "  ending  here  "). 

-paccekasacca  one  who  has  rejected  each  of  the 
four  false  truths  (the  5"'  of  the  10  noble  states, 
ariyavasa  :  see  Vin.  Tejris  1.141)  D  111.269,270;  A  11. 41  ; 
V.29  sq. 

Paniidana  (nt.)  [fr.  panudati]  removal,  dispelling,  rejection 
Sn  252  (sabba-dukkhapanudana  SnA  293  should  be  read 
as  sabba-dukkha-apanudana,  as  at  Vin  11.148  =  }  1.94), 
1 106  (=pahanar|  etc.  Nd-  396). 

Panta  (adj.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  pranta  edge,  margin,  border, 
pra-l-anta;  also  BSk.  pranta  in  meaning  of  Pali,  e.  g. 
MVastu  111.200  ;  Divy  312  (pranta-sayan-asana-sevin)] 
distant,  remote,  solitary,  secluded ;  only  in  phrase 
pantai)  senasanar)  (sayanasanar))  or  pantani  senasanani 
"solitary  bed  &  chair"  M  1.17,  30;  A  1.60;  11.137; 
III.  103  ;  V.  10,  202  ;  Sn  72  (cp.  Nd-  93),  338,  960  (°amhi 
sayanasane),  969  (sayanamhi  pante)  ;  Dh  185  (  =  vivitta 
DhA  III. 238)  ;  Ud  43  (so  read  for  patthaii) ;  J  111.524 
(°amhi  sayanasane)  ;  Vism  73  (panta-senasane  rata)  ; 
SnA  263  (v.  1.  pattha). 

-sena  (adj.)  one  who  has  his  resting  place  far  away 
from  men,  JJp.  of  the  Buddha  M  1.386. 

Panti  (f.)  [Ved.  pankti  set  or  row  of  five,  group  in  general] 
a  row,  range,  line  Vism  392  (tisso  sopana-pantiyo)  ; 
DhA  III. 2 19  (uddhana")  ;  ThA  72  (satta  pantiyo) ; 
VvA  igS  (amba°). 

Pantha  [base  panthan°,  Ved.  panthah,  with  bases  path" 
panth°  and  pathi.  Same  as  patha  (q.  v.).  For  etym. 
cp.  Gr.  TToiTof  sea(-path).  ttutoi;  path,  Av.  panta",  also 
Goth,  finfian  =E.  find,  of  Idg  *pent  to  come  or  go  (by)] 
a  road,  roadway,  path  J  !.i8  (gen.  pi.  panthanai)  = 
kantaramagga  C;  "jungle  road"  trsl.)  ;  Sn  121  (loc. 
panthasmig)  ;  Nd^  485  B  (-(-patha  in  expl"  of  magga), 
Miln  157  (see  panthar)). 

-gii  a  traveller  (lit.  going  by  road)  S  1.2 12  (v.  1. 
addhagu,  as  at  id.  p.  Th  2,  55)  ;  J  in. 95  (v.  I.),  -ghata 
highway  robbery  J  1.253;  iv.  184.  -duhana  waylaying, 
robbery;  m.  a  robber  D  1.135  (see  DA  1.296)  ;  J  11.281, 
388  ;  D  III. 68,  and  Tikp  280  (^duhana).  -diibhin  a  high- 
wayman J  11.327.  -diisaka  a  robber  Miln  20.  -devata  a 
way  spirit,  a  spirit  presiding  over  a  road,  road-goddess 
J  VI. 52  7.  -makkataka  a  (road)  spider  Miln  364,  407. 
-sakuna  a  "  road-bird,"  i.  e.  a  bird  offered  (as  a  sacri- 
fice) to  the  goddess  presiding  over  the  roads,  propitia- 
tion ;  it  is  here  to  be  understood  as  a  human  sacrifice 
J  vi.527  (vv.  11.  pattha"  &  bandha"). 

Panthika  [fr.  pantha,  formation  panthika :  panthan  = 
addhika  :  addhan]  a  traveller  Miln  20. 

Panna  [pp.  of  pajjati  but  not  satisfactorily  expl^  as  such, 
for  pajjati  &  panna  never  occur  by  themselves,  but 
only  in  cpds.  like  apajjati,  apanna,  upp°,  upa°,  sam°, 
etc.  Besides,  the  word  is  only  given  in  lexic.  litera- 
ture as  pp.  of  pajjati,  although  a  tendency  prevails  to 
regard  it  as  pp.  of  patati.  The  meaning  points  more 
to  the  latter,  but  in  form  it  cannot  belong  to  pat.  A 
more  satisfactory  expl°  (in  meaning  and  form)  is  to 
regard  panna  as  pp.  of  pa -I- nam,  with  der.  fr.  short 
base.  Thus  panna  would  stand  for  panata  (panata), 
as  unna  for  unnata.  ninna  for  ninnata,  the  double 
nn  to  be  accounted  for  on  analogy.  The  meaning 
would  thus  be  "  bent  down,  laid  down,"  as  panna-ga  = 
going  bent,  panna-dhaja  =  fiag  bent  or  laid  down, 
etc.  Perhaps  patta  of  patta-kkhandha  should  belong 
here  as  panna"]  fallen,  gone,  gone  down  ;  also  :  creeping, 
only  in  foil.  cpds. : 

-ga  a  snake  Th  i,  429  (°inda  chief  of  snake-demons) ; 
J   V166;    Miln   23.      -gandha   with   gone   down    (i.  e. 


Pannaka 


35 


Papupphaka 


deteriorated)  smell,  ill-smelling,  or  having  lost  its 
smell  J  V.198  (=thokar)  duggandha  C).  -dhaja  one 
whose  flag  gone  or  is  lost.  i.  e.  whose  fight  is  over  (Ep. 
of  the  Buddha),  cp.  BSk.  prapatito  mana-dhvajah 
Lai.  V.  448  (with  derivation  from  pat  instead  of  pad, 
cp.  papatana)  M  1.137  sq.,  386:  A  111.S4  sq.  :  in  eulogy 
on  the  Buddha  (see  exegesis  to  mahesi  Nd'  343  ;  Nd^ 
503)  reference  is  made  to  manadhaja  ("papatanar)) 
which  is  opposed  to  dhamma-dhaja  (-ussapana)  :  thus 
we  should  explain  as  "  one  who  has  put  down  the 
flag  of  pride."  -bhara  one  who  has  put  down  his 
burden,  one  whose  load  has  gone,  who  is  delivered  or 
saved  M  1.139:  A  iir.84 ;  S  1.233;  Dh  402  (=ohita- 
khandha-bhara  Dh.A  iv.168) ;  Sn  626,  914  (cp.  Nd^  334)  ; 
Th  I,  1021.  -bhiimi  state  of  one  who  has  fallen  DA 
1. 163  (opp.  to  jina-bhumi,  one  of  the  8  purisa-bhumiyo. 

—  cp.  D  1.54  &  Dial.  1.722).  -loma  one  whose  hairs 
have  fallen  or  are  put  down  (flat,  i.  e.  do  not  stand 
erect  in  con.sequence  of  excitement),  subdued,  pacified 
(opp.  hattha  loma)  Vin  11. 184  (cp.  Vin  11. 5  &  Bdhgh  on 
p.  309  lomar)  pateti,  Bdhgh  padeti ;  also  Vin.  Tcrts 
11.339);  111.2O6;  M  i.45'i;  J  I-377-  Another  form  is 
palloma  (q.  v.  &  cp.  J.P.T.S.  1889,  206).  See  also 
remarks  on  parada-vutta. 

Pannaka  (adj.)  ^fr.  panna]  silent  (?)  DA  1.163. 

Panuarasa  (adj.  num.)  [see  paticadasa  &  pannarasa  under 
panca^  fifteen  (and  fifteenth),  usually  referring  to  the 
15th  day  of  the  lunar  month,  i.  e.  the  full-moon  day 
Sn  153  (pannaraso  uposatho) ;  pannarase  on  the  15"' 
day  S  1.191  =Th  i,  1234;  M  111.20  ;  Sn  502,  toi6; 
f.  loc.  pannarasaya  id.  S  1.233.     See  also  pannarasa. 

Pannarasama  (num.  ord.)  [fr.  pannarasa]  the  15"'  Sn.\ 
3O6  (gatha). 

Pannarasika  (adj.)  [fr.  pannarasa]  belonging  to  the  15"' 
day  (of  the  lunar  month)  \'in  iv.315. 

Papa  (nt.)  [see  pibati.  paniya  etc.  of  pa]  water  J  1.109 
(apar)  papag  mahodakan  ti  attho).  The  word  is 
evidently  an  etym.  construction.     See  also  papa. 

Papaccati  [Pass,  of  pa-l-pacati]  to  be  cooked,  to  become 
ripe  Pv.\  55  (°itva). 

Papaiica  in  its  P.  meaning  uncertain  whether  identical 
with  Sk.  prapafica  (pra-)-paiic  to  spread  out;  meaning 
"  expansion,  diff useness,  manifoldedness "' ;  cp.  papafi- 
ceti  &  papanca  3)  more  likely,  as  suggested  by  etym. 
&  meaning  of  Lat.  im-ped-iment-um,  connected  with 
pada,  thus  perhaps  originally  "  pa-pad-ya,"  i.  e.  what 
is  in  front  of  (i.  e.  in  the  way  of)  the  feet  (as  an  obstacle)] 
I.  obstacle,  impediment,  a  burden  which  causes  delay, 
hindrance,  delay  Dh.\  1. 18;  II. 91  (katha^).  °r)  karoti 
to  delay,  to  tarry  J  iv.145;  °r)  akatva  without  delay 
J  1.260  ;  VI. 392.  —  ati°  too  great  a  delay  J  i  64  ;  11.92. 

—  2.  illusion,  ob.session,  hindrance  to  spiritual  progress 
M  1.65;  S  l.iuo;  IV. 52,  71  ;  A  11. 161  sq.  ;  in.393  sq.  ; 
Sn  530  ( =tanha-ditthi-manabheda-p.  Sn.\  431;  and 
generally  in  Commentaries  so  resolved,  without  verbal 
analysis);  Ud  77  (as  f.  papaiica);  Th  i,  519,  902,  989 
(cp.  Brethren  344,  345  &  J.R.A.S.  1906,  246  sq.  ;  Neu- 
mann trsl'  "  Sonderheit,"  see  Lieder  p.  210,  211  & 
Mititere  Sammlung  l.i  19  in  trsl.  of  M  1.65  nippapaiica)  ; 
Dh  195.  254  (°abhirata  paja,  nippapaiica  Tathagata  : 
=  tanhadisu  p°  esu  abhirata  Dh.\  111.378) ;  J  1.9; 
Pv  IV. 1"  (  =  tanh'-adi-p.  PvA  230);  Nett  37.  38;  SnA 
495  (gihi).  —  nippapaiica  (q.  v.)  without  obsession.  — 
3.  diliuseness.  copiousness  SnA  40. 

-sankha  sign  or  characteristic  of  obsession  Sn  874 
(cp.  SnA  553;  =tanha°  ditthi'  and  mana°  Nd' 
28c)),  916  (=avijjadayo  kilesa  mular)  SnA  562). 
-saniia  ('.sankha)  idea  of  obsession,  idee  fixe,  illusion 
P  11.277  (cp-  Dial  n.312);  M  1. 109,  112,  271,  383;  S 
IV. 71. 


Papancita  [pp.  of  papaiiceti]  obsessed,  illusioned  Sn.A  495 
(a"  gihipapaii-cena).  — nt.  obsession,  vain  imagination, 
illusion  S  iv.203  a  Vbh  390. 

Papanceti  [Denom.  fr.  papafica]  i.  to  have  illusions,  to 
imagine,  to  be  obsessed  M  1.112;  Dh.\  1.198  (tesar) 
suvanna-lobhena  papaiiccntanar)).  —  2.  to  be  profuse,  to 
talk  much,  to  delay  on  Sn.\  130.  — pp.  papaficita. 

Papata  (papata)  (f.)  [fr.  papata  .'  Cp.  papatika]  a 
broken-otf  piece,  splinter,  fragment ;  also  proclivity, 
precipice,  pit  (?)  S  11.227  (papata  ti  kho  labha-sak- 
kara-silokass'  etag  adhivacanai)  :  cp.  S  iii.  log:  sobbho 
papato  kodh'  upayasass'  etag  adhivacanag)  ;  So  665 
( =  sobbha  SnA  4  79  ;  gloss  papada).     See  also  pappataka. 

Papatika  (f)  [cp.  Sk.  prapatika  (lexic.  &  gram.)  young 
shoot,  sprout;  and  parpharika  (RV.)  one  who  tears  to 
pieces;  also  Sk.  parpata  N.  of  a  plant]  i.  a  splinter, 
piece,  fragment,  chip  Vin  11. 193  (read  tato  pap.°) ; 
A  IV. 70  sq.  (of  ayophala) ;  J  v. 333  (same  as  Vin  pas- 
sage) ;  Miln  179.  — 2.  the  outer  dry  bark  or  crust  of  a 
tree,  falling  off  in  shreads :  also  shoots,  sprouts  M  1.78, 
192  sq..  488;  A  1. 152  ;  III. 19  sq.,  44,  200,  3O0  ;  IV.99, 
336  ;  V.4  sq.,  314  sq.  ;  J  111.491.     Cp.  pheggu. 

Papatati  fpa -t- patati]  to  fall  forward,  to  fall  down,  off 
or  from,  to  fall  into  (ace.)  Vin  11.284;  ^I  '-79.  8"; 
S  1.48  (visame  magge).  1S7  (  =  Th  i,  1220  patanti) ; 
KM),  II. 1 14;  V.47  ;  Dh  i^b;  J  v. 31  ;  Pv  i.lo'-  (nirayag 
papatiss'  aharj.  cp.  PvA  52  ;  v.  1.  SS  niray'  iipapatiss' 
ahar)). — aor.  papata  \'in  111.17,  cp.  11.12O;  J  vi.566. 
See  also  patati. 

Papatana  (nt.)  [fr.  pa+pat]  falling  down  Sn  576  =  J 
IV.  1 27  (abl.  papatana  papatanato  C). 

Papada  (or  Papada  ?)  [pa -f  pada]  tip  of  the  foot,  toes  ;  but 
in  diff.  meaning  (for  papata  or  papata  to  pat)  "  falling 
down,  abyss,  pit"  at  Sn  665  (gloss  for  papata;  expl'' 
at  SnA  479  by  "  mahaniraya  "). 

Papa  (f.)  [Ved.  prapa.  pa-)-  pa]  a  place  for  supplying  water, 
a  shed  by  the  roadside  to  provide  travellers  with  water, 
■  a  well,  cistern  D  111.185;  S  i.33  =  Kvu  345  (  =  panjya- 
dana-sala  SA)  ;  S  i.ioo  (read  papaii  ca  vivanc) ;  J  1.109  ; 
Dh.-^  III. 349  =  J  1.302  (  =  paniya-cati  C);  Vv  52'-- 
( -I- udapana)  ;  Pv  11. 7'  (n.  pi.  papayo  =  pamya-sala 
PvA  102);  11.9^  (-f  udapana). 

Papata  [cp.  Epic.  Sk.  prapata.  of  pra  +  patj  i.  falling  down, 
a  fall  Vin  11.2S4  (chinna-papatar)  papatanti) ;  S  v.47.  — 
2.  a  cliff,  precipice,  steep  rock  M  i.ii  ;  S  III.  109  (sobbho 
p.  kodh'  upayasass'  etag  adhivacanag  ;  cp.  papata) ; 
.■\  III. 389  (sobbho  p.) ;  J  111. 5  :  53"  :  v. 70  ;  vi.300,  3119  ; 
Vism  116;  PvA  174;  Sdhp  208.  282,  353.  —  adj.  falling 
off  steeply,  having  an  abrupt  end  Vin  11.237  =A  iv.198, 
2r:o  (sarauddo  na  ayatakena  p.). 

-lata  a  rocky  or  steep  declivity  Dh.\  1.73. 

Papatin  (adj.)  [fr.  papatati]  falling  or  flying  forward, 
rtying  up  J  III. 484  (ucca'  flying  away). 

Papitamaha  [pa-t-pitamaha]  a  paternal  great-grandfather 
l^avs  HI. 29. 

Papiyana  (nt.)  [fr.  pa,  ger.  pa-piya]  drinkable,  to  be  drunk, 
drinking  J  1.109  (udakag  papiyana-bhavena  papa  ti). 

Papilita  'pa-(-pilita]  worn  out.  rubbed  through  (of  the 
sole  of  sandals)  J  11.223. 

Paputta  [pa-(-putta.  cp.  Sk.  praputra  (BR.  :  "  doubtful  ") 
Inscr]  a  grandson  j  vi.477. 

Papupphaka  (adj.)  [pa-f pupphaka]  "with  flowers  in 
front,"  flower-tipped  (of  the  arrows  of  Mara)  Dh  46  (but 
expl"*  at  Dh.\  1.337  "is  "  P°  sankhatani  tebhiimakani 
vattani,"  i.  e.  existence  in  the  3  st.igcs  of  being). 


Pappataka 


36 


Pabbata 


Pappataka  [etym.  uncertain]  i.  a  broken  bit.  splinter, 
small  stone  (?)  (Rh.  D.  in  Dial.  111.83  "outgrowth") 
D  ,111.87  (bhumi  "r)  paribhutijati)  ;  Vism  418  (as). 
Nett  227  (Com.)  (°ojar)  khadapento). — 2.  awaterplant: 
see  pannaka  2  ;  cp,  also  papatika-  &  Sk.  parpata  N.  of 
medicinal  plant. 

Pappotbeti  [pa+potheti;  sometimes  spelt  papphoteti]  to 
strike,  knock,  beat,  flap  (of  wings)  \'in  1.48  ;  11.208,  217; 
M  1.333  (papph°)  ;  J  11. 153  (pakkhe)  ;  in.  175  (papoth°  ■- 
saiicunneti  C.) ;  Miln  368  (papph°) ;  DA  1.7;  Vism  283 
(pph). 

Pappoti  [the  contracted  form  of  papunati,  Sk.  prapnoti] 
to  obtain,  get.  gain,  receive,  attain  D  m.159,  165; 
Sn  185.  187,  584;  Dh  27;  DhA  1.395.  —  Pot.  i^'  pi. 
pappomu  J  V.57  (=papune}-yama  C).  —  ger.  pap- 
puyya  S  1.48  ;  Sn  482  (or  pot  ?).  593,  829  (  =papunitva 
Nd'  170).  —  For  further  ref.  see  papunati. 

Papphasa  (nt.)  [fr.  sound-root*  phu,  not  corresponding 
directly  to  Sk.  pupphusa  (cp.  Geiger.  P.Gr.  §  34),  to 
which  it  stands  in  a  similar  relation  as  *ghur  (P)  to 
*ghar  (Sk.)  or  phurati>pharati.  From  same  root  Gr. 
iji'CTfiw  to  blow  and  Lat.  pustula  bubble,  blister ;  see 
Walde  under  pustula]  the  lungs  D  11.293  :  M  i'85.  421  ; 
III. 90  :  Sn  195  =  J  1. 146  ;  Kh  iii.  (cp.  KhA  56) ;  Miln  26. 

Pabandhl  (adj.)  (°-)  [pa+bandha]  continuous  Vism  32. 

Pabala  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  prabala]  very  strong,  mighty  Sdhp 
75- 

Pabalha'  '^pp.  of  pabahati]  pulled  out.  drawn  forth  D  1.77 
(T.  reads  pavajha).     See  pava|ha. 

Pabalha'"  (adj.)  [pa+balha]  strong,  sharp  (of  pain)  D 
II.  1 28;  J  V.422,  Miln  174. 

Pabahati  [pa+  brh  to  pull,  see  abbahati]  to  pull  out,  draw 
forth  D  1.77  (T.  reads  pavahati,  v.  1.  pabbalhati.  evi- 
dently fr.  pabalha) ;  cp.  Satapatha-brahmana  IV.3.  3, 
16.  — pp.  pabalha'  (q.  v.). 

Pabujjhati  [pa-t-bujjhati]  to  wake  up  (intrs.),  awake 
S  1.4,  209  ;  Dh  296  sq.  ;  It  41  (sutta  p.) ;  J  1.61  ;  11. 103  ; 
IV.431  (opp.  niddayati) ;  DA  1. 140.  —  pp.  pabuddha 
(q-v.). 

Pabuddha  [pp.  of  pabujjhati]  awakened  S  1.143  (sutta° 
from  sleep  awakened).  J  1.50  ;  VvA  65. 

Pabodhati  [pa  +  bodhati]  to  awake,  also  trs.  awaken,  stir 
up,  give  rise  to  (or:  to  recognise,  realise?);  only  in 
one  phrase  (perhaps  corrupt),  viz.  yo  nindar)  appabo- 
dhati  S  1.7  =Dh  143  (  =  nindar)  apaharanto  bujjhati 
DhA  III. 86  ;  trsl.  KS  13  "  forestalleth  blame"). — 
Caus.  pabodheti  (i)  to  enlighten,  instruct,  give  a  sign 
J  1.142  ;  111.511.  —  (2)  to  set  going,  arouse  J  1.298; 
V.390.  —  (3)  to  render  oneself  conspicuous  J  v. 8. 

Pabodhana  (adj.-nt.)  [fr.  pabodhati]  i.  (nt.)  awakening, 
waking,  arising  DhA  1.232  ("codana-kamma).  —  2.  (adj.) 
arousing  (or  realising?)  Vv  64^-  ( =kata-piti-pabo- 
dhano  VvA  282) ;  awaking  Th  i,  893  (samma-taja"). 

Pabba  (nt.)  [Ved.  parvan]  i.  a  knot  (of  a  stalk),  joint, 
section  Vin  iv.35  ;  M  1.80  ;  J  1.245  (velu°)  ;  Vism  358 
(id.  ;   but   nalika  p.   260)  ;   VbhA  63   (id.)  ;   Th   i,   243. 

—  angula"  finger  joint  Vin  iv.262,  M  1.187;  DA  1.285. 

—  pabba-pabbar]  knot  for  knot  DhsA  11.  —  2.  the 
elbow  S  IV. 171.  —  3.  section,  division,  part  Vism  240 
(14  sections  of  contemplation  of  the  body  or  kayagata- 
sati);  VbhA  275,  286. 

-ganthi  a  knot  Miln  103.     -valli  a  species  of  Diirva  J 
v.6g  ;  -vata  intermittent  ague  Vin  1.205. 

Pabbaja  [Sk.  balbaja,  cp.  Geiger  P.Gr.  §  39.  6]  a  species 
of  reed,  bulrush  Vin  i.igo  (T.  reads  babbaja) ;  S  1.77; 


11.92;  111.137  (v.  1.  babbaja),  155  ("layaka)  ;  Th  i,  27; 
J  II. 140,  141  ;  V.202  ;  VI. 508.  For  further  refs.  see 
babbaja. 

Pabbajati  [cp.  Sk.  pravrajati.  pra-l-vraj]  to  go  forth,  to 
leave  home  and  wander  about  as  a  mendicant,  to  give 
up  the  world,  to  take  up  the  ascetic  life  (as  bhikkhu, 
samana.  tapassin.  isi  etc.).  S  1.140,  141  ;  Sn  157,  1003  ; 
imper.  pabbaja  DhA  1.133.  Pot-  pabbajeyya  J  1.56; 
P"g  57  — Fut  pabbajissati  Sn  564;  DhA  1.133; 
IV. 55.  Aor.  pabbaji  M  in.33  ;  S  l.i96=Th  i,  1255; 
Sn  405;  Vv  82^;  PvA  76;  ger.  pabbajitva  J  1303; 
PvA  21  and  °vana  Sn  407.  —  (agarasma)  anagariyaij 
pabbajati  to  go  forth  into  the  homeless  state  Vin  in.  12  ; 
M  111.33;  S  1. 196;  A  v.204  ;  Pv  11.131^.  sasane  p.  to 
become  an  ascetic  in  (Buddhas)  religion,  to  embrace 
the  religion  (&  practice)  of  the  Buddha  J  1.56  ;  PvA  12. 
pabbajjar)  pabbajati  to  go  into  the  holy  life  (of  an 
ascetic  friar,  wanderer  etc.):  see  pabbajja. — Caus. 
pabbajeti  (q.  v.). — pp.  pabbajita. 

Pabbajana  (nt.)  [fr.  pabbajati]  going  into  an  ascetic  life 
J  ni.393  (a°). 

Pabbajita  [pp  of  pabbajati.  cp.  BSk.  pravrajita  Divy 
236]  one  who  has  gone  out  from  home,  one  who  has 
given  up  worldly  life  &  undertaken  the  life  of  a  bhikkhu 
recluse  or  ascetic,  (one)  ordained  (as  a  Buddhist  friar), 
gone  forth  (into  the  holy  life  or  pabbajja)  Vin  111.40 
(vuddha-pabbajito  bhikkhu);  iv.159;  D  1.131  (aga- 
rasma anagariyar)  p.),  157;  III. 31  sq.,  147  sq.  ;  M  1.200, 
2O7,  345,  459;  11.66,  181  ;  111.261  ;  S  1.119  (dhamma- 
vinaye  p.);  iv.260,  330;  v. 118  sq.,  421  ;  A  1.69,  107, 
147,  168;  11.78,  143;  111.33,  78  (vuddha°),  244,  403 
(acira°) ;  iv.2i  (cira°)  ;  v. 82,  348  sq.  ;  Sn  43  (see  Nd^ 
397),  274,  385,  423;  Dh  74,  174,  388;  J  1.56;  Pv  11.81 
(=samana  PvA  106);  11.  ii'  (bhikkhu  =kamadi- 
malanai)  pabbajitatta  paramatthato  pabbajito  PvA 
146);  11.13"  (=pa-bbajjag  upagata  PvA  167);  Miln 
1 1  ;  DA  1.270  ;  DhA  1.133  :  PvA  5,  55. 

Pabbajja  (f  )  [fr.  pa-l-vraj,  cp.  pabbajati,  Epic  &  BSk. 
pravrajya]  leaving  the  world,  adopting  the  ascetic  life  ; 
state  of  being  a  Buddhist  friar,  taking  the  (yellow)  robe, 
ordination.  —  (1)  ordination  or  admission  into  the 
Buddha's  Order  in  particular:  Vin  111. 13;  S  1.161  etc. 
— ■  samanera°  ordination  of  a  Novice,  described  in  full 
at  Vin  1.82.  — pabbajjar)  yacati  to  beg  admission  Vin 
IV.  129;  labhati  to  gain  admission  to  the  Order  Vin 
1.12,  17,  32  ;  D  I.I  76  ;  S  IV. 181.  —  (2)  ascetic  or  home- 
less life  in  general  D  111.147  sq.  ;  M  in. 33  (abbhokaso 
p.) ;  S  V.350  (id.  ;  read  pabbajja)  ;  A  v.204  (id.)  ;  S 
11. 128  (read  °jja  for  °ja) ;  iv.260  ;  A  1.151.  168;  iv.274 
sq.  ;  Sn  405,  406,  567 ;  It  75  (pabbajjaya  ceteti) ; 
Miln  1 9  (dhamma-cariya-samacariy'  attha  p.);  DhA 
1.6;  Sn.A  49.  327,  423  ;  ThA25i.  — pabbajjar)  upagata. 
gone  into  the  homeless  state  PvA  167  (for  pabbajita) ; 
agarasma  anagariyar)  p.  the  going  forth  from  home 
into  the  homeless  state  Vin  11.253  ;  M  11.56  ;  pabbajjar) 
pabbajati  to  undertake  or  go  into  the  ascetic  life,  in 
foil,  varieties  :  isi"  of  a  Saint  or  Sage  J  1.298,  303  ; 
DhA  iv.55  ;  PvA  162  (of  the  Buddha);  tapasa°  of  a 
Hermit  J  in.  119  ;  DA  1.270  (described  in  detail)  ;  DhA 
iv.29  ;  PvA  21  ;  samana"  of  a  Wanderer  PvA  76. — 
Nole.  The  ceremony  of  admission  to  the  priesthood  is 
called  pabbajja  (or  pabbajana).  if  viewed  as  the  act 
of  the  candidate  of  orders,  and  pabbajana  (q.  v.), 
if  viewed  as  the  act  of  the  priest  conferring  orders  ;  the 
latter  term  however  does  not  occur  in  this  meaning  in 
the  Canon. 

Pabbata  [Vedic  parvata.  fr.  parvan,  orig.  knotty,  rugged, 
massive]  (i)  a  mountain  (-range),  hill,  rock  S  i.ioi, 
102,  127,  137  ;  n.32,  185,  190  ;  A  1.243  ;  11.140  ;  iv.102 
(dhupayati)  ;  Sn  413,  417,  543.  958,  1014;  Nd'  466; 
Dh  8,   127  (°anar)  vivaro)=PvA   104;  Dh   188  (n.  pi. 


*l 


Pabbataka 


37 


Pabha 


"ani),  304;  DA  i.Jng  ;  Mill!  340  (dhamma°)  ;  PvA  221 
(angara°)  Sdhp  352,  545.  574. — The  7  mountains 
round  Vejuvana  are  enum''  at  J  v. 38.  —  Names  of  some 
(real  or  fictitious)  mountains,  as  found  in  the  Jataka 
Uterature:  Cakkava|a  J  vi.282  ;  Candorana  J  iv.90  ; 
Canda  J  iv.283  :  v. 38.  162  ;  Dandaka-hiraiina  J  11  33  ; 
Daddara  J  II. 8  ;  ni.i6:  Nemindhara  J  vi.i25;  Neru 
J  111.247;  V.425  ;  Pandava  Sn  417;  SnA  382  sq.  ;  Ma- 
haneru  J  iv.462  ;  Mahindhara  Vv  321"  (cp.  VvA  136)  ; 
Meru  J  1.25;  IV. 498  ;  Yugandhara  PvA  137;  Rajata 
J  1.50;  Vipula  J  VI.518;  Sineru  S  11. 139:  J  1.48  & 
passim;  Suvanna  J  1.50;  vi.514  ("giritila).  — (2)  [cp. 
Sk.  parvata  mountainous]  a  mountaineer  Miln  191. 

-utu  the  time  (aspect)  of  the  mountain  (in  prognos- 
tications as  to  horoscope)  DhA  1.165  (raegha-utu,  p.- 
utu.  aruna-utu).  -kaccha  a  mountain  meadow  (opp. 
nadi-kaccha)  SnA  33.  -kandara  a  m.  cave  S  n.32  ; 
V.396,  457  sq.  ;  A  v.j  14  sq.  ;  -kuta  m.  peak  Vin  11.193  : 
J  ^-Vi-  -gahana  m.  thicket  or  jungle  PvA  5.  -ttha 
standing  on  a  ra.  Dh  28.  -pada  the  foot  of  a  m.  J 
III. 51  ;  DhA  IV. 187;  PvA  10.  -muddha  mountain  top 
Vin  1.5.  -rattha  m. -kingdom  SnA  26.  -raja  "  king  of 
the  mountain,"  Ep.  of  Himava  S  i.n6  ;  11. 137  sq.,  276  ; 
III. 149;  v.47,  63,  148;  A  1.152  ;  III. 240  ;  IV.  102  ;  PvA 
143.  -sankhepa  top  of  a  m.  D  1.84  (  =  p.  -matthaka 
DA  1.226).  -sanu  ra.-glen  Vv  32^"  (cp.  VvA  136). 
-sikhara  mountain-crest  J  v.421. 

Pabbataka  [fr.  pabbata]  a  mountain  J  1.303. 

Pabbateyya  (adj.)  [fr.  pabbata]  belonging  to  mountains, 
mountain-born  (of  a  river)  A  in. 64  (nadi  p°a  sighasota 
haraharini) ;  iv.137  (id.);  Visra  231  (id.),  285  (nadI). 

Pabbaniya  (adj.)  [fr.  pabba]  forming  a  division  or  section, 
consisting  of,  belonging  to  KhA  114  (khaya°)  (?). 

Pabbajana  (nt.)  [fr.  pa-f  Caus.  of  vraj,  see  pabbajati  & 
pabbajeti]  keeping  out  or  away,  removing,  banishment, 
exiling  D  1.135;  ni.93  ;  Miln  357;  Dh  1.296  (=niha- 
rana) ;  DhA  iv.145. 

Pabbajaoiya  (adj.)  [fr.  pabbajana]  belonging  to  banish- 
ment, deserving  to-be  exiled  Miln  186;  also  in  cpd. 
"kamma  excommunication,  one  of  the  5  ecclesiastical 
acts  enum""  at  Vin  1.49,  143.  See  also  A  1.79;  DhA 
II. 109. 

Pabbajita  [pp  of  pabbajeti]  taken  into  the  order,  made  a 
bhikkhu  M  11.62. 

Pabbajeti  [Caus.  of  pabbajati]  i.  to  make  go  out  or  away, 
drive  out,  banish,  exile  D  1.92  (ratthasraa  out  of  the 
kingdom  ;  =niharati  DA  1.258);  M  11. 122  ;  Dh  388 
(attano  malag  pabbajayag,  tasmapabbajito  ti  vuccati)  ; 
DhA  IV.  1 45  (expl"'  as  "  attano  ragadimalag  pabba- 
jento  vinodento")  J  1.262  (raUha)  ;  in.  168  (id.); 
VI. 350,  351  ;  DhA  II. 41  ;  PvA  54  (core).  — 2.  to  make 
go  forth  (into  the  homeless  state),  to  make  somebody 
take  up  the  life  of  an  ascetic  or  a  bhikkhu,  to  take  into 
the  (Buddha's)  order,  to  ordain  Vin  1.82  (description  of 
ordination  of  a  novice),  97;  in.  12  ;  iv.129;  DhA  1.19, 
133.  — pp.  pabbajita  (q.  v.). 

Pabbedha  [pa-fvedha  of  vyadh,  cp.  BSk.  pravedha  in 
same  phrase  at  Divy  56,  viz.  ^odasa-pravedho]  piercing 
through  (measuring)  an  arrow  shot  Th  i,  164  =  J  11334 
(solasa° —solasa-kanda  pata-vittharo  C).  —  Note,  pab- 
bedha owes  its  bb  to  analogy  with  ubbedha.  It  also 
corresponds  to  the  latter  in  meaning  :  whereas  ubbedha 
refers  to  the  height,  pabbedha  is  applied  to  the  breadth 
or  width. 

Pabbhamati  [pa-t-bhamati]  to  roam  forth  or  about  J 
V.106  (=bhamati  C). 

Pabbhara  [cp.  BSk.  prag-bhara  Divy  80  etc.]  i.  (m.)  a 
decline,  incline,  slope  J  1.348  ;  adj.  (usually  -°)  bending, 


inclining,  sloping  ;  tig.  tending  or  leading  to  (cp.  E. 
"bearing  on")  M  1.493  (samudda") ;  S  i.iio  (id.); 
V.38,  216,  219;  A  1V.198  (anupubba"),  224  .(viveka")  ; 
Miln  38  (samadhi").  Very  frequent  in  comb"  with 
similar  expressions,  e.  g.  ninna,  pona  (cp.  PvA  ninna- 
poija-pabbharar)  cittag) :  see  further  ref.  under  ninna; 
with  adhimutta  &  garuka  at  Vism  117  (Nibbana"). 
— -apabbhara  (sic.)  not  slanting  or  sloping  J  v.405 
(=samatittha  C).  — 2.  (m.  &  nt.)  a  cave  in  a  moun- 
tain Miln  151  ;  J  v.440  ;  DhA  11.59  (nt),  98. 

-tthana  a  slope  J  1348;  DhsA  261.  -dasaka  the 
decade  (period)  of  decline  (in  life),  which  in  the  enum° 
of  the  10  decades  (vassadasa)  at  J  iv.397  is  given  as  the 
seventh. 

Pabha  is  adj.  form  (-°)  of  pabha  (q.  v.). 

Pabhagsana  (adj.-nt.)  [fr.  pa -1- bhraijs,  cp.  nava-pra- 
bhrarjsana  Npl.  A.V.]  causing  to  fall  or  disappear, 
depriving,  taking  away,  theft,  in  mani°  jewel-theft 
J  VI. 383.  (Rh.  D.  "  polishing"  ?)  Kern  in  Toev.  s.  v. 
takes  pabharjsana  as  a  der.  fr.  pa -I-  bhras  to  shine,  i.  e. 
making  bright,  polishing  (as  Rh.  D.). 

Pabhagga  [pp.  of  pabhafijati,  cp.  Sk  prabhagna]  broken 
up,  destroyed,  defeated  Vin  in.  108. 

Pabhankara  [pabhag,  ace.  of  pabha,  +  kara]  one  who 
makes  light,  one  who  lights  up,  light-bringer  (often  as 
Ep.  of  the  Buddha)  S  1.51  (quoted  at  VvA  116),  210; 
A  II. 5 1  sq.  ;  It  80  ;  J  in.  128  ;  Sn  991,  1136  (  =  alokakara 
obhasakara  etc.  Nd^  399)  ;  Vv  21*  {=naij'  obhasa-kara 
VvA  106);  34^  (  =  lokassa  nan'  aloka-kara  VvA  115). 

Pabhanga  [fr.  pa-l-bhanj]  destruction,  breaking  up, 
brittleness  Ps  11.238  (calato  pabhangato  addhuvato) ; 
but  id.  p.  at  Nd^  214"  and  Miln  418  read  "calato 
pabhanguto  addhuvato." 

Pabhangu,  Pabhangtuna  &  °gura   (adj.)  [fr.  pa-t-bhanj, 

cp.  BSk.  prabhangunata  destruction,  perishableness 
MVastu  111.33S]  brittle,  easily  destroyed,  perishable, 
frail,  (a)  pabhangu  :  S  in. 32  ;  v. 92  ;  A  1.254,  -57  sq.  ; 
HI. 16;  DhsA  380;  Sdhp  51,  553.  —  (b)  °guna :  It  37; 
J  '-393  (ittara  addhuva  pabhanguno  calita ;  reading 
may  be  pabhanguna)  ;  Dh  139  (as  n.  ;  =^pabhangu- 
bhava,  putibhava,  DhA  in. 71),  148  (=putikaya  ibid. 
III). —  (c)  °gura  Dh  148  (v.  1.);  ThA  95;  Sdhp  562, 
605.  —  See  also  pabhanga. 

Pabhafijati  [pa-nbhanj]  to  break  up,  destroy  J  iv.494.  — 
pp.  pabhagga  (q.  v.). 

Pabhava  (m.  &  nt.)  [fr.  pa-l-bhu,  cp.  Ved.  prabhava] 
production,  origin,  source,  cause  M  1.67  ;  S  1.181  ;  11.12  ; 
It  37  (ahara-netti")  ;  Sn  728,  1050;  Nd^  under  mula 
(with  syn.  of  sambhava  &  samufthana  etc.) ;  J  in. 402  = 
VI.518. 

Pabhavati  see  pahoti. 

Pabhassati  [pa-f-bhrao^;  cp.  Sk.  prabhrasyate]  to  fall 
down  or  off  ''  ■.  Hi^appear  Vin  11. 135  (pret.  pabhas- 
sittha)  ;  iv.159  (id.).  —  Cp.  pabhagsana. 

Pabhassara  (adj.)  [fr.  bhas]  shining,  very  bright,  resplen- 
dent S  1. 145;  V.92,  283;  A  I. Id,  254,  257  sq.,  111,16; 
Sn  48  (  =  parisuddha  pariyodata  Nd-  402);  J  v.202, 
170  ;  Vv  17I  (rucira-)-) ;  Pv  in. 3'  (rucira-l-)  ;  Vism  223  ; 
377  ;  DhA  1.28  ;  VvA  12  (pakati°  bright  by  nature). 

Pabha  (f)  [fr.  pa-l-bha,  cp.  Epic  Sk.  prabha]  light,  radi- 
ance, shine  A  11. 139  ;  v,22  ;  It  19,  20  ;  PvA  56  (sarira°), 
137  (id.),  71,  176;  Sdhp  250.  —  canda-ppabha  moon- 
shine It  20;  DhsA  14.  —  adj.  pabha  {-'),  radiating, 
lucid,  in  cpd.  sayam°  self-lucid  or  self-radiant  D  1.17 
(=  attano  attano  va  tesag  pabha  ti  DA  i.iio);  A 
v.6<) ;  Sn  4('4. 


Pabhanin 


38 


Pamana 


Pabbavin  at  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  is  wrongly  given  with  quot. 
J  V.421  (in  meaning  "speaking")  where  it  should  be 
read  manapa-bhanin,  and  not  mana-p°. 

Pabhata  [pp-  of  pabhati]  become  clear  or  light,  shining, 
dawning  Sn  178  (sup°)  ;  esp.  in  phrase  pabhataya 
rattiya  when  night  had  become  light,  i.e.  given  way  to 
dawn,  at  daybreak  J  1.81,  500.  —  (nt.)  daybreak, 
morning  S  1.211;  SnA  519  (pabhate)  ;  atipabhate  in 
broad  daylight  J  I.436. 

Pabhati  [pa+bha]  to  shine  forth,  to  become  light,  gleam, 
glitter  J  v.igg  (said  of  a  river;  =pavattati  C).  — pp. 
pabhata. 

Pabhava  [fr.  pa  +  bhu]  might,  power,  strength,  majesty, 
dignity  J  v. 36  :  vi.449. 

Pabhavita  [pp-  of  pabhaveti]  increased,  furthered,  pro- 
moted Th  I,  767  (bhava-netti°)  :  expf  by  samutthita  C. 

Pabhaveti  [Caus.  of  pabhavati]  to  increase,  augment, 
foster  Pv  ii.g"=DhA  111.220  (dakkhineyyai]). — pp. 
pabhavita. 

Fabhasa  [fr.  pa+bhas]  shining,  splendour,  beauty  S 
1.67  ;  sap°  with  beauty  S  v. 263  ;  Miln  22^  ;  ap°  without 
beauty  Miln  299. 

Pabhasati  [pa+bhas]  to  tell,  declare,  talk  Th  i.  5S2. 

Pabhaseti  [Caus.  of  pa+bhas]  to  illumine,  pervade  with 
light,  enhghten  Dh  172  (  =  obhaseti  DhA  in.  169),  382 
{  =  obhaseti  ekalokag  karoti  DhA  iv.137);  J  '-S? : 
Pv  1. 10"  (so  read  for  ca  bh°)  ;  11.  i'- ;  Ps  1.174  ;  Miln  336  ; 
PvA  10  (=obhaseti). 

Pabhindati  [pa  +  bhindati]  to  split  asunder  (trs.),  break, 
destroy  Sn  973  (=bhindati  sambhindati  Nd'  503); 
ger.  pabhijja  S  i.i93=Th  i,  1242. — Pass,  pabhijjati 
to  be  broken,  to  burst  (open),  to  split  asunder  (intrs.), 
to  open  S  1. 150  (aor.  pabhijjirjsu)  ;  Sn  p.  125  (id.); 
Vv  41^  (break  forth  =  pabhedag  gacchanti  VvA  183; 
gloss  pavajjare  for  pabhijjare)  ;  SnA  475  (=bhijjati). 
Also  "  to  open,  to  be  developed  "  (like  a  flower)  Miln 
93  (buddhi  p.).  —  pp.  pabhinna. 

Pabhinna  [pp-  of  pabhindati]  i.  to  burst  open,  broken 
(like  a  flower  or  fruit),  flowing  with  juice;  usually 
appl'"  to  an  elephant  in  rut,  mad,  furious  M  1.236 
(hatthi°);  Dh  326  (hatthi"  =  mattahatthi  DhA  iv.24)  = 
Th  I,  77;  J  1V.494  ;  VI. 488;  Pv  1. 11^  (read  chinna- 
pabhinna-gatta)  ;  Miln  261,  312  (hatthinagar)  tidha- 
pabhinnar)) ;  DA  1.37  (°madar|  canda-hatthig).  —  2. 
developed,  growing  Miln  go  ("buddhi). 

Pabhuti  (adj.)  (-°)  [Vedic  prabhrti]  beginning,  in  meaning 
of :  since,  after,  subsequently  ;  tato  p.  from  that  time, 
henceforth  VvA  158. 

Pabhutika  (adj.)  [fr.  pabhuti]  dating  from,  derived  or 
coming  from  (abl.)  D  1.94  (kuto  p.). 

Pabhu  [fr.  pa+  bhvi]  lord,  master,  ruler,  owner  DA  1.250. 

Pabheda  [fr.  pa+bhid,  cp.  pabhindati]  breaking  or  split- 
ting up,  breaking,  opening  VvA  183  ;  akkhara°  break- 
ing up  of  letters,  word-analysis,  phonology  D  1.88 
(=sikkha  ca  nirutti  ca  DA  1.247  =  SnA  447)-  —  ^'^i- 
(-")  breaking  up  into,  i.  e.  consisting  of,  comprising,  of 
various  kinds  J  1.84;  PvA  8  (patisandhi-adi°),  130 
(saviiinanak'  aviniianaka"). 

Pabhedana  (nt.)  [cp.  pabheda]  breaking  up,  destruction 
Sn  1 105  (avijiaya°=bhedanar|  pahanar)  etc.  Nd^  403). 

Pabhoti  etc.  see  pahoti. 

Pamaijati'  [pa -I- mad]  i.  to  become  intoxicated  S  1.73. 
—  2.  to   be   careless,    slothful,    negligent;    to    neglect, 


waste  one's  time  S  iv.125,  133;  Sn  676,  925,  933;  cp. 
Nd'  376  &  Nd-  70;  Dh  168,  172,  259;  J  III. 264  (with 
ace);  IV. 396  (with  gen.);  Pv  i.ii'^  (dane  na  p.);  iv.  13 
(jagaratha  ma  p.);  Sdhp  16,  620.  —  aor.  2  pi.  pama- 
dattha  M  1.46;  A  111.87 ;  iv.i39.  Other  noteworthy 
forms  are  aor.  or  precative  (ma)  pamado  S  iv.2b3  ; 
Th  I,  119  ;  Dh  371  (see  Geiger  P-Gy.  §  161  b),  and  cond. 
or  aor.  pamadassag  M  111.179  ;  A  i.i3g  (see  Geiger  1.  c. 
170  &  Trenckner  Notes  75-).  — appamajjanto  (ppr.) 
diligent,  eager,  zealous  PvA  7.  —  pp.  pamatta  (q.  v.). 

Pamajjati-  [pa-t-mrj]  i.  to  wipe  off,  rub  off,  sweep,  scour 
Vin  1.47  ;  ii.2(.9  (bhumi°  itabba)  ;  M  1.383.  —  2.  to  rub 
along,  stroke,  grope,  feel  along  (with  one's  hands)  Vin 
11.209  (civara-rajjur)  °itva  ;  cp.  Vin.  Texts  111.279). — 
Note,  pamajjamana  in  phrase  gale  pi  p°  anena  at  Nctt 
164  is  after  the  example  of  similar  passages  M  1. 108  and 
A  IV. 32  and  as  indicated  by  v.  1.  preferably  to  be  read 
as  "  api  panujjamancna  pi"  (see  panudati). 

Pamajjana  (f)  &  "itatta  (nt.)  are  abstr.  formations  fr. 
pa 4- mad,  in  the  sense  of  pamada  carelessness  etc.,  & 
occur  as  philological  synonvms  in  exegesis  of  pamada 
at  Vbh  350=Ndi  423";  Nd-  405.  Also  at  DhA  1.22S 
(^bhava  =  pamada). 

Pamanna  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  pamana,  for  *pamanya,  grd.  form, 
of  pa -I- ma  for  the  usual  pameyya]  only  neg.  ap°  im- 
measurableness  Vbh  272  sq.  (catasso  appamaiiiiayo, 
viz.  metta,  karuna,  mudita,  upekha).  See  appa- 
maiiiia. 

Pamatta  in  cpd.  luiicita-pamatta  kapoti  viya  (simile  for 
a  w'oman  who  has  lust  all  her  hair)  at  Pv.\  47  is  doubtful, 
it  should  probably  be  read  as  luficita-pakkhika  k.  viya 
i.  e.  like  a  pigeon  whose  feathers  have  been  pulled  out 
(v.  1.  "patthaka). 

Pamatta  [pp.  of  pamajjati]  slothful,  indolent,  indifferent, 
careless,  negligent  D  111.190;  S  1.61=204;  ^  '■"•  '39  •' 
IV.319  ;  V.146  ;  Sn  57,  70,  329  sq.,  399,  1 121  ;  Dh  19,  21, 
29,  292,  309  ( =sati-vossaggena  samannagata  DhA 
III. 482),  371  ;  Nd^  404;  PvA  276  (quot.  °g  ativattati). 
appamatta  diligent,  careful,  eager,  mindful  S  1.4,  140, 
157  :  A  V.148  ;  Th  I,  1245  ;  Pv  iv.i^s  .  PvA  66  (danar) 
detha  etc.),  219.  278.     See  also  appamatta^. 

-carin  acting  carelessly  Dh  334  ( =sati-vossagga-lak- 
khanena  paraadena  p.-c.  DhA  iv.43).  -bandhu  friend 
of  the  careless  (Ep.  of  Mara)  S  1.123,  128;  Sn  430; 
Nd'^  507. 

Pamattaka  (adj.)  =  pamatta,  only  in  neg.  form  ap°  careful, 
mindful  PvA  201. 

Pamathita  [pp.  of  pa4-mathati  to  crush]  crushed,  only  in 
cpd.  sam°  (q.  v.). 

Pamada  (f)  [Classical  Sk.  pramada,  fr.  pra-l-mad,  cp. 
pamada]  a  young  (wanton)  woman,  a  woman  Sn  156, 
157  (gloss  for  pamada  cp.  SnA  203);  J  ui.442  (mara- 
pamadanar)  issaro  ;  v.  1.  samudda),  530  (v.  1.  pamuda, 
pamoda). 

Pamaddati  [pa-t-mrd]  to  crush  down,  destroy,  overcome, 
defeat;  pp.  pamaddita  J  vi.iSg  (malutena  p.  corre- 
sponding with  vata  pahata). 

Pamaddana  (adj.  nt.)  [fr.  pamaddati]  crushing,  defeating, 
overcoming  D  i.8g  (°parasena°) ;  Sn  p.  106  (id.=mad- 
ditur)  samattho  SnA  450)  ;  Sn  561  (Marasena")  ;  DA 
1.230. 

Pamaddin  (adj.)  [fr.  pa-l-mrd]  crushing,  able  to  crush, 
powerful,  mighty  J  iv.26  ( =maddana-samattha  C). 

Pamana  (nt.)  [of  pa-l-ma,  Vedic  pramana]  i.  measure, 
size,  amount  S  11.235  '■  A  1.88  ;  III. 52,  356  sq.  ;  V.I40  sq.  ; 
Miln   285   (cp.  irsl.   11. 133,   n.    2);   SnA    137;   VvA    16; 


PamSnavant 


39 


Pamuyhati 


PvA  55  (ghata°),  70  (ekahattha°),  99  (talakkhandha°), 
268  (sila°).  —  2.  measure  of  time,  compass,  length, 
duration  PvA  136  (jivita^  paricchinna  ''ri) ;  esp.  in 
cpd.  ayu°  age  S  1.151  :  A  1.213  ;  11. 126  sq.  and  passim 
(cp.  ayu).  —  3.  age  (often  by  Com.  taken  as  "  worldly 
characteristic,"  see  below  rupa°  and  cp.  Nd^  406  on 
Sn  1076)  :  DhA  1.38.  —  4.  limit  PvA  123,  130  (dha- 
nassa).  —  5.  (appl''  meaning)  standard,  definition, 
description,  dimension  S  iv.i58ssSn  1076  (perhaps 
("  age ").  pamanar)  karoti  set  an  example  DhA 
III. 300  (mai)  p.  katva).  —  adj.  (-°)  of  characteristic, 
of  the  character  of,  measuring  or  measured  by,  taking 
the  standard  of,  only  in  cpd.  rupa°  measuring  by 
(appearance  or)  form,  or  held  in  the  sphere  of  form 
(defined  or  Pug  A  229  as  "  rupa-ppaman'  adisu  sampat- 
tiyuttar)  rupar)  pamanai)  karoti  ti  ")  A  11.71  =Pug  53  ; 
Nd^  406.  —  appamana  without  a  measure,  unlimited, 
immeasurable,  incomparable  D  1.3 1  ;  II.  12  (+ulara); 
M  III. 145  (ceto-vimutti)  ;  A  1. 183,  192;  II.73  ;  111.52  ; 
V.299  sq.,  344  sq.  ;  Sn  507  ;  PvA  1 10  ( =atula).  See  also 
appamana. 

-kata  taken  as  standard,  set  as  example,  being  the 
measure,  in  phrase  p.-katag  kammar)  D  1.25 1  ;  S  iv.322. 

Pamai^avant  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  pamana]  having  a  measure, 
finite  ;  or  :  to  be  described,  able  to  be  defined  Vin  11. 1 10  : 
A  11.73- 

Pamai;iika  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  pamana]  i.  forming  or  taking  a 
measure  or  standard,  measuring  by  (-")  DhA  111.113 
(rupa°  etc.,  see  A  11. 71);  (n.)  one  who  measures,  a 
critic,  judge  A  in. 349  sq.  ;  V.140  ;  Sdhp  441  (as  pama- 
naka).  —  2.  according  to  measure,  by  measure  Vin 
III.  149  ;  IV.279. 

Pamada  [cp.  Vedic  pramada,  pa  +  mad]  carelessness,  negli- 
gence, indolence,  remissness  D  1.6  (juta^,  see  DA  1.85)  ; 
III. 42  sq..  236;  M  1. 151  ;  S  1.18,  20,  25,  146,  216;  11. 43, 
193;  IV. 78,  263;  V.170,  397;  A  1.212  (surameraya- 
majja'')  =  S  11.69;  A  1.16  sq.  ;  11.40  ;  in. 6,  421,  449; 
IV.195,  294,  350  ;  V.310,  361  ;  Sn  156,  157  (gloss  pamada, 
cp.  SnA  203),  334.  942.  1033  ;  Dh  21,  30  sq  .  167  (=.sa- 
tiossagga-lakkhana  p.  DhA  in. 163),  241,  371  ;  Th  i, 
1245  =S  1. 193  ;  It  86;  Ndi  423=Nd2  405  ;  Ps  11.8  sq., 
169  sq.,  197  ;  Pug  II,  12  ;  Nett  13,  41  ;  Miln  289  (mana 
atimana  mada+);  SnA  339  ( =sati-vippavasa) ;  DhA 
1.228;  PvA  16  (pamadena  out  of  carelessness);  Sdhp 
600.  - —  appamada  earnestness,  vigilance,  zeal  D 
111.236;  S  1.158;  11.29;  Dh  21. 

-patha    careless  reading  (in  the  text)  Nett   T.    (sec 
introd.  xi.  n.  1)  ;  KhA  207 ;  PvA  25. 

Pamadavata  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  pamada+vant,  adj.]  remiss- 
ness A  1.139. 

Pamadin  (adj.)  [fr.  pamada]  infatuating,  exciting,  in 
phrase  citta"  Th  2,  357  (trsl°  "  leading  to  ferment  of  the 
mind  "  ;  vv.  11.  "pamaddin  &  "pamathin,  thus  "  crush- 
ing the  heart,"  cp.  ThA  243). 

Pamaya'  [ger.  of  paminati  i.  e.  pa -I-  ma]  having  measured, 
measuring  Sn  894  (sayai)  p.  =paminitva  Nd'  303); 
J  111. 1 14. 

Pamaya^  [ger.  of  paminali  i.  e.  pa-l-mr,  Sk.  pramarya  of 
pramrnati]  crushing,  destroying  Sn  209  (bijag  ;  = 
higsitva  vadhitva  SnA  257).  See  on  this  passage 
Morris,  J.P.T.S.  1885,  45. 

Pamayin  (adj.)  [fr.  pa-(-ma]  measuring,  estimating,  defin- 
ing S  1.148  (appameyyan  p.  "who  to  th'  illimitable 
limit  lays  "  trsl.  ;  corresponds  with  paminanto). 

Pamareti  [pa-l-  mareti,  Caus.  of  mr,  marati  to  die]  to  strike 
dead,  maltreat,  hurt  DhA  111.172. 

Paminati  [pa-f-minati  to  ma  with  pres.  formation  fr.  mi, 
after    Sk.    minoti  ;    see    also    anuminati]    to    measure, 


estimate,  define  A  in. 349,  351  ;  v.140,   143  ;  Sdhp  537. 

—  ppr.  paminanto  S  1.1 48;  inf.  paminitui)  V'vA  134; 
ger.  paminitva  Nd'  303,  and  pamaya  (q.  v.);  grd. 
paminitabba  VvA  278;  aor.  3/  sq.  pamesi  J  v.299, 
3"*  pi.  pamigsu  A  11.71  ;  Th  1,  469  (pamigsu). 

Pamilata  [pp.  of  pa-l-mla]  faded,  withered,  languished 
Miln  303. 

Pamnkha^  (adj.)  [pa-l-mukha,  cp.  late  Sk.  pramukha]  lit. 
"  in  front  of  the  face,"  fore-part,  first,  foremost,  chief, 
prominent  S  1.334,  235;  Sn  791  (v.  1.  BB  and  Nd'  92 
for  pamuiica) ;  J  v.5,  169.  loc.  pamukhe  as  adv.  or 
prep,  "before"  S  1.227  (asurindassa  p.;  v.  1.  sam- 
raukhe)  ;  Vism  120.  As  -°  having  as  chief,  headed  by, 
with  NN  at  the  head  D  n.97  ;  S  1.79  (Pasenadi°  rajano) ; 
PvA  74  (setacchatta°  rajakakudhabhanda) ;  freq.  in 
phrase  Buddha"  bhikkhusangha,  e.  g.  Vin  1.213  ;  Sn  p. 
Ill  ;  PvA  19,  20.     Cp.  pamokkha. 

Pamukha"  (nt.)  [identical  with  pamukha',  lit.  "  in  front 
of  the  face,"  i.  e.  frontside,  front]  i.  eyebrow  (?)  only  in 
phrase  alara"  with  thick  eyebrows  or  lashes  J  vi.503 
(but  expl""  by  C.  as  "  visal'  akkhiganda)  ;  PvA  189  (for 
alara-pamha  Pv  111.3^).  Perhaps  we  should  read 
pakhuma  instead. 

Famuccati  Pass,  of  pamuficati  (q.  v.). 

Pamucchita  [pa -1- mucchita]  1.  swooning,  in  a  faint, 
fainting  (with  hunger)  Pv  in.i*  ( =  khuppipasadi- 
dukkhena  sanjata-muccha  PvA  174);  iv.io*.  —  2.  in- 
fatuated S  1. 187  (v.  1.;  T.  samucchita)  =Th  i,  1219; 
J  111.441. 

Pamonca  [fr.  pa-l-muc]  loosening,  setting  free  or  loose,  in 
cpd.  °kara  deliverer  S  i.i93=Th  i,  1242  (bandhana"). 

—  adj.  dup°  difficult  to  be  freed  S  1.7;  Sn  773;  Dh 
346;  J  II.  140. 

Pamuficati  [pa-l-muncati  of  muc]  I.  to  let  loose,  give  out, 
emit  Sn  973  (vacar)  ;  =sampamuiicati  Nd'  504); 
J  1.2  16  (aggir)).  —  2.  to  shake  off,  give  up,  shed  Dh  377 
(pupphani).  Perhaps  also  in  phrase  saddhag  p.  to 
renounce  one's  faith,  although  the  interpretation  is 
doubtful  (see  Morris,  J.P.T.S.  1885,  46  sq.  &  cp. 
Dial,  n.33)  Vin  i.7  =  D  11.39  =-S  1.138  (C.  vissajjati,  as 
quoted  KS  p.  174).  —  3.  to  deliver,  free  Sn  1063 
(kathan  kathahi  =  mocehi  uddhara  etc.  Nd^  407*),  11 46 
(pamuncassu  =okappehi  etc.  Nd^  ^oy^).  —  Pass,  pa- 
muccati  to  be  delivered  or  freed  S  1.24,  173;  Sn  8n, 
170  sq.  (dukkha) ;  Dh  189  (sabbadukkha),  276  (fut. 
pamokkhati),  291  (dukkha),  361.  —  pp.  pamutta  (q.  v.). 

—  Caus.  pamoceti  to  remove,  liberate,  deliver,  set  free 
S  1.143,  154.  210  ;  Th  2.  157  (dukkha)  ;  cp.  11.7'  ;  in.K  ' 
sq.  Caus.  II.  pamuiicapeti  to  cause  to  get  loose  DA 
1.138. 

PamuUha  [pp.  of  pamussati]  being  or  having  forgotten 
\'in  1.213:  Ps  1. 1 73  (a");  J  111.511  (T.  spells  pamm°) ; 
IV. 307  (id.)  ;  Miln  77.     Cp.  parimu^tha. 

Pamutta  [pp.  of  pamuficati]  i.  let  loose,  hurled  J  vi.360 
(papatasmirj).  —  2.  liberated,  set  free  S  1.154;  Sn  465, 
5^4  sq. 

Pamutti  (f.)  [fr.  pa -f  muc]  setting  free,  release  S  1.209; 
Th  2.  248;  J  IV. 478;  Nett  131  (  =  S  1.209;  but  read 
pamutty'  atthi) ;  PvA  103  (dukkhato). 

Pamndita  (&  °modita)  [pp.  of  pamodati]  greatly  delighted. 
very  pleased  M  1.37;  S  1.64;  A  in. 21  sq.  ;  Sn  512; 
J  111.55;  DA  1. 217,  ThA  71;  PvA  77,  132. — Spelt 
pamodita  at  Sn  681.  J  1.75  ;  v. 45  (amodita-t- ). 

Pamuyhati  [pa  +  muyhati  of  muh]  to  become  bewildered  or 
infatuated  J  vi.73.  —  pp.  pamulha  (q.  v.). 


Pamussati 


40 


Payoga 


Pamussati  [pa+mrs,  Sk.  mrsyati  =  P.  *mussati]  to  forget 
J  iii.i  p,  ::64  (pamajjati+ )  ;  iv. 147,  251.  —  pamuttha 
(q.  v.)/ 

Painu}ha  [pp-  of  pamuyhati]  bewildered,  infatuated  Sn 
774;  Ndl  36  (  =  sammulha),  193  (  +  saminulha). 

Pameyya  (-°)  (adj.)  [grd.  of  paminati,  like  Epic  Sk.  pra- 
mej'a]  to  be  measured,  measurable,  only  in  foil.  cpd.  : 
appameyya  not  to  be  measured,  illimitable,  unfathom- 
able S  1. 148;  V.4C0  ;  M  111.71,  127;  A  1.266;  Vv  34" 
(=paminitur|  asakkhuneyya  VvA  154);  37'  (expl*  as 
before  at  VvA  1C9) ;  duppa.neyya  hard  to  be  gauged  or 
measured  A  1.266  ;  Pug  35  ;  opp.  suppameyya  ibid. 

Pamokkha  [fr.  pa+muc,  see  pamuiicati]  i.  discharging, 
launching,  letting  loose,  gushing  out ;  in  phrases  iti- 
vada°  pouring  out,  gossip  M  1. 133;  S  v.73  ;  A  11.26; 
DA  1.21  :  and  caravada"  id.  S  111.12;  v.419.  —  2.  re- 
lease, deliverance  S  1.2;  PvA  103  (pamutti-l- )  ;  abl. 
pamokkha  for  the  release  of,  i.  e.  instead  of  (gen.) 
J  V.30  (pituno  p.  =  pamokkha-hetu  C). 

Famocana  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  pa+muc]  loosening,  setting  free; 
deliverance,  emancipation  S  l.i72=Sn  78;  A  11.24,  .^7' 
49  sq. ;  Sn  166  (maccupasa,  abl.  =  from),  1064  (pamo- 
canaya  dat.  =pamocetur)  Nd-)  ;  It  104  (Nibbanar) 
sabbagantha  °g).  At  Dh  274  we  should  read  pamo- 
hanar)  for  pamocanar). 

Pamoceti  Caus.  of  pamuficati  (q.  v.). 

Pamoda  [fr.  pa -1- mud,  cp.  Vedic  pramoda]  joy,  delight 
Sdhp  528,  563.     See  also  pamojja. 

Pamodati  [pa  +  mud]  to  rejoice,  enjoy,  to  be  dehghted,  to 
be  glad  or  satisfied  S  1.182  ;  A  in. 34  (so  read  for  ca 
modati)  :  Dh  16,  22  ;  Pv  i.i  i^,  1 1'  ;  VvA  278  (  =amodati). 
—  Caus.  pamodeti  id.  Sdhp  248.  —  pp.  pamudita  (& 
pamodita)  (q.  v.).     Cp.  abhippamodati. 

Pamodana  (f.)  [fr.  pa -f  mud]  delight,  joy,  satisfaction 
Dhs  9,  86,  285  (amodana-H  ). 

Pamoha  [pa-l-muh,  cp.  Epic  Sk.  pramoha]  bewilderment, 
infatuation,  frscination  Sn  841  (v.  1.  Nd'  sammoha)  ; 
Nd'  193  (-(-sammoha  andhakara) ;  J  vi.358  ;  J  vi.358  ; 
Pug  21  ;  Dhs  390,  106 1. 

Pamohana  [fr.  pa-l-muh]  deceiving,  deception,  delusion 
Dh  274  (T.  reads  pamocana ;  DhA  in. 4113  expl'  by 
vancana). 

Pampaka  [etym  ?  Cp.  Sk.  pampa  N.  of  a  river  (or  lake), 
but  cp.  ref.  in  BR.  under  pampa  varan-SdPj  a  loris 
(Abhp.  618)  i.  e.  an  ape  ;  butprobably  meant  for  a  kind 
of  bird  (cp.  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.)  J  vi.538  (C.  reads  pam- 
puka  &  expl*-  by  pampataka). 

Pamha  (nt.)  [the  syncope  form  of  pakhuma  ---Sk.  paksman 
used  in  poetry  and  always  expl''  in  C.  by  pakhuma] 
eye-lash,  usually  in  cpd.  alara"  having  thick  eyelashes, 
e.  g.  at  J  V.215;  Vv  33';  64";  Pv  111.3^;  asayata°  at 
Th  2,  384. 

Pamhayati  [pa-l-smi,  Sk.  prasmaj^ate]  to  laugh;  Caus. 
pamhapeti  to  make  somebody  laugh  J  v. 297  (=pari- 
haseti  C),  where  it  is  syn.  with  the  preceding  um- 
hapeti. 

Paya  (nt.)  [Ved.  payas,  nt,  of  pi]  milk,  juice  J  1.204 ; 
VI.  5  72. 

Payacchati  [pa-fyacchati  of  yam]  to  offer,  present,  give 
Dpvs  XI. 28;  Pgdp  63,  72,  77  sq.  — pp.  payata  (q.  v.). 

Payata  [pp.  of  payacchati]  restrained,  composed,  purified, 
pure  D  1. 103  ( =  abhiharitva  dinna)  ;  A  III. 313;  Th  i, 
348,  359  (°atta)  ;  It  loi  ("panin)  =  Miln  215;  Sn  240 
(  =  sakkara-karanena  p.  alankata  SnA  284);  Vism  224 
(°pai.iin  =parisuddha-hattha) ;  Sdhp  100. 


Payatana  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  prayatna,  of  yat]  striving  after, 
effort,  endeavour  KhA  108. 

Payatta  [pp.  of  pa -1- yat]  making  effort,  taking  care,  being 
on  one's  guard,  careful  Miln  373. 

Payata  [pp.  of  payati]  gone  forth,  set  out,  proceeded 
Pv  IV.5'  (  =  gantur)  araddha  PvA  260);  J  III. 188,  190. 
Strange  is  "  evarj  nanappayatamhi  "  at  Th  i,  945  (Mrs. 
Rh.  D.  "  thus  when  so  much  is  fallen  away  "  ;  Neumann 
"in  solcher  Drangsal,  solcher  Not").  —  duppayata 
going  or  gone  wrong,  straj'ed  Vv  84°  {  =  dutthu  payatha 
apathe  gata  VvA  337). 

Payati  [pa-l-ya]  to  go  forward,  set  out,  proceed,  step  out, 
advance,  only  aor  payasi  J  1.146,  223,  255;  3""  pi. 
payirjsu  J  1.253  and  payesug  J  iv.220. — pp.  payata, 
(q.  v.).     See  also  payati. 

Payirudaharati  [pari  -1-  ud  4-  aharati  with  metathesis  payir° 
for  pariy°]  to  speak  out,  to  proclaim  aor  payirudahasi 
D  11.222  (vanne)  ;  J  1.454  (vyaiijanar)). 

Payirupasati  [pari  4- upa -l- as,  with  metathesis  as  in  payi- 
rudaharati] I.  "to  sit  close  round,"  i.  e.  to  attend  on 
(ace),  to  honour,  pay  homage,  worship  D  1.47  ;  11257  ; 
M  11.117  ;  S  1.146  ;  A  1.124,  126,  142  ;  iv.337 ;  Dh  64, 
65  ;  Th  I,  1236  ;  J  vi.222  (imper.  "upasaya)  ;  Pv  11. 9"  ; 
Pug  26,  33  ;  SnA  401  ;  VbhA  457  (here  dei'^  by  Bdhgh 
as  "  punappunai)  upasankamati  "). — ppr.  °upasanto 
S  v.67  =  It  107;  PvA  44;  and  upasamana  DhA  11.32. 

—  aor.  °upasir)  A  iv.213  (Bhagavantarj) ;  PvA  50. — 
ger.  "upasiya  D  11.287.  —  2.  to  visit  Vin  1.214  (ger. 
"upasitva) ;  IV. 98.  —  pp.  payirupasita  (q.  v.). 

Payiiupasana  (nt.)  &  °a  (f.)  [fr.  payirupasati]  attending 
to,  worshipping:  worship,  homage  M  11.176;  S  v. 67  = 
It  107  ;  DA  1. 142  ;  PvA  138. 

Payirupasika  [fr.  payirupasati]  a  worshipper  ThA  200. 

Payirupasita  [pp.  of  payirupasati]  worshipped  PvA   116 

(  =  upaUhita),  205  ( =purakkhata). 

Payunjati  [pa-<-yuj]  to  harness,  yoke,  employ,  apply; 
1  Pass,  payujjati  to  be  applied  to  Sdhp  400  (ppr.  °mana). 
I        —  pp.  payutta  (q.  v.).  —  Caus.  payojeti  (q.  v.) 

'  Payuta  [pp.  of  pa-l-yu,  cp.  Sk.  pra-)-}'uta  united,  fastened 
I        to,  increased]   (wrongly)  applied,  at  random,  careless : 

"misdirected"  A  1.199;  Sn  711  (°g  vacag  =  obhasa- 
j  parikatha-nimitta-viiinatti-payuttari  ghasesana-vacari 
'  SnA  497).  930  {— civaradihi  sampayutta  tadatthag  va 
j        payojita   SnA   565  ;   Nd'   389    however   reads   payutta 

and  expl*  as  "  civarapayutta  "  etc.). 

Payutta  [pp  of  payuiijati]  i.  yoked  Sn  p.  13  {=yottehi 
yojita  SnA  137).  —  2.  applied,  intent  on,  devoted  to, 
busy  in  (ace,  loc.,  or  -°)  J  v.  121  (ajjhattar)) ;  Pv  in. 7'° 
fsasane) ;  SnA  497  (viiliiatti°).  —  3.  applicable  (either 
rightly  or  wrongly)  ;  as  su°  well-behaved,  acting  well 
Miln  328  ;  by  itself  (in  bad  sense),  wrongly  applied, 
wasted  (cp.  payuta)  A  11. 81  sq.  ;  Sn  930  (see  Nd'  389). 

—  4.  planned,  schemed,  undertaken  Vin  11.194  (Deva 
dattena  Bhagavato  vadho  p.). 

Payuttaka  (adj.  n.)  [payutta+ka]  one  who  is  applied  or 
put  to  a  (bad)  task,  as  spy,  hireling ;  bribed  J  1.262 
(°cora),  291  (°dhutta). 

Payoga  [Vedic  prayoga,  fr.  pa-t-yuj,  see  payufijati]  i. 
means,  instrument  J  vi.116  (=karana);  SnA  7;  DhsA 
215  (sa°). — 2.  preparation,  undertaking,  occupation, 
exercise,  business,  action,  practice  Vin  1V.2  78  ;  Ps 
n.213  (samma°) ;  Miln  328  (samma°)  ;  KhA  23,  29  sq.  ; 
PvA  8  (vapana").  96  (manta°).  103,  146  (vinnatti° ; 
cp.  payutta  2),  285  (sakkhara-kkhipana").  payogag 
karoti  to  exert  oneself,  to  undertake,  to  try  PvA  184 
( -^parakkainati). 


Payogata 


41 


Para 


-karana  exertion,  pursuit,  occupation  DhA  in. 238 
-vipatti  failure  of  means,  wrong  application  PvA  117, 
136.  -sampatti  success  of  means  VvA  30,  32.  -suddhi 
excellency  of  means,  purity  in  application  DhsA  165  ; 
VvA  61  >.  -hina  deficient  in  exertion  or  application 
Miln  288. 

Payogata  (f.)  [fr.  payoga]  application  (to)  Vism  131 
(majjhatta°). 

Payojana  (nt.)  [fr.  pa  +  yuj]  i-  undertaking,  business 
PvA  201. — 2.  appointment  J  1.143. — 3.  prescript, 
injunction  DhsA  403.  —  4.  purpose,  application,  use 
Sdhp  395. 

Payojita  [pp.  of  payojeti]  I.  connected  with,  directed  to. 
applied  SnA  565.  — 2.  instigated,  directed  Miln  3. 

Payojeti  [Caus.  of  payufijati]  i.  to  undertake,  engage  in. 
begin  D  1.71  (kammante  "set  a  business  on  foot"); 
A  11.82  (kammantar)) ;  Sn  404  (vanijjag) ;  J  i.Oi  ; 
PvA  130  (kammag). — 2.  to  prepare,  apply,  use,  put 
to,  employ  PvA  46  (bhesajjai)  cunnena  saddhig).  — 
3.  to  engage,  take  into  service,  set  to,  hire  J  1.173; 
11.417. — 4.  to  engage  with,  come  to  close  quarters 
J  II.  10.  —  5.  to  put  out  at  interest  (vaddhiya)  DA 
1.270.  —  pp.  payojita  (q.  v.). 

Payyaka  fpa  +  ayyaka]  (paternal)  great-grandfather  J  1.2 
(ayyaka°) ;  PvA  107  (id.). 

Para  (adv. -adj.)  [fr.  Idg.  *per,  'peri  (cp.  pari);  Ved. 
para,  para,  parag  ;  Lat.  per  through,  Gr.  nipti  &  Tiipav 
beyond  ;  see  Walde,  Lat.  Wtb.  under  per  &  also  pari, 
pubba,  pura,  purana]  i.  (adv.  &  prep.)  beyond,  on  the 
further  side  of  (with  abl.  or  loc),  over  PvA  168  (para 
Gangaya,  v.  1.  °ayar)).  See  in  same  meaning  &  appli- 
cation parar),  paro  and  para  &  cp.  cpds.  like  paraloka. 
—  2.  (adj.)  para  follows  the  pron.  declension;  cases: 
sg.  nom.  paro  Sn  879,  ace.  parai)  Sn  132,  185,  gen.  dat. 
parassa  Sn  634;  Pv  11.9",  instr.  parena  PvA  116,  loc. 
paramhi  Sn  634,  and  pare  Pv  11.9" ;  pi.  nom.  pare  Dh 
6.  ace.  pare  Dh  257  ;  PvA  15,  gen.  dat.  paresag  D  1.3  ; 
Th  I,  743  ;  J  1.256  :  Sn  818,  instr.  parehi  Sn  240,  255  ; 
PvA  17.  —  Meanings:  (a)  beyond,  i.  e.  "higher"  in 
space  (like  Ved.  para  as  opp.  to  avara  lower),  as  well  as 
"  further  "  in  time  (i.  e.  future,  to  come,  or  also  remote, 
past :  see  loc.  pare  under  c).  freq.  in  phrase  paro  loko 
the  world  beyond,  the  world  (i.  e.  life)  to  come,  the 
beyond  or  future  life  (opp.  ayar)  loko)  Sn  185  (asma 
loka  parar)  lokar)  na  socati),  634  (asmirj  loke  paramhi 
ca) ;  Dh  168  (paramhi  loke);  Pv  11.8'  (id.  =paraIoke 
PvA  11)7) ;  but  also  in  other  comb",  like  santi-para  (adj.) 
higher  than  calm  Dh  202.  Cp.  paraloka,  paraij  and 
paro.  —  (b)  another,  other,  adj.  as  well  as  n.,  pi.  others 
Sn  396  (parassa  darag  natikkameyya),  818  (paresar). 
cp.  Nd'  150)  ;  Dh  160  (ko  paro  who  else),  257  (pare 
others)  ;  Pv  11. 9"  (parassa  danag) ;  11. 9"  (pare,  loc.  =  j 
paramhi  parassa  Pv.\  130)  ;  DhA  iv.i8>  (gen.  pi.) ;  PvA 
15,  60  (paresar)  dat.),  103,  116.  253  (parassa  purisassa 
&  parar)  purisag).  Often  contrasted  with  and  opposed 
to  attano  (one's  own,  oneself),  e.  g.  at  M  i.2i  o  (parar) 
vambheti  attanag  ukkagseti) ;  Sn  132  (attanag  samuk- 
kagse  parag  avajanati) ;  J  1.256  (paresag,  opp.  attana)  ; 
Nd*  26  (att-attha  opp.  par-attha.  see  cpds.  °ajjhasa- 
ya  &  "attha).  —  paro  .  .  .  paro  "  the  one  .  .  .  the 
other  "  D  1.224  (kig  hi  paro  parassa  karissati)  ;  paro 
parag  one  another  Sn  148  (paro  parag  nikubbetha).  — 
In  a  special  sense  we  find  pare  pi.  in  the  meaning  of 
"  the  others,"  i.  e.  outsiders,  aliens  (to  the  religion  of 
the  Buddha),  enemies,  opponents  (like  Vedic  pare) 
D  1.2  (=pativiruddha  satta  DA  1.51);  Vin  1.349;  Dh 
6.  —  (c)  some  oblique  cases  in  special  meaning  and  used 
as  adv.  :  parag  ace.  sg.  m.  see  under  cpds.,  like  paran- 
tapa ;  as  nt.  adv.  see  sep.  In  phrase  puna  ca  parag 
would  be  better  read  puna  c'  aparag  (see  apara). 
— parena  (instr.)  later  on,  afterwards  J  111.395  ( =  aparena 


samayena  C).  — pare  (loc);  cp.  Gr.  Trofini  at;  Lat. 
prae  before;  Goth.  faura  =  E.  for,  old  dat.  of  *per)  in 
the  past,  before,  yet  earlier  J  11.2  79  (where  it  continues 
ajja  and  hiyyo,  i.  e.  to-day  and  yesterday,  and  refers 
to  the  day  before  yesterday.  Similarly  at  Vin  iv.63 
pare  is  contrasted  with  ajja  &  hiyyo  and  may  mean 
"  in  future,"  or  "  the  day  before  yesterday."  It  is  of 
interest  to  notice  the  Ved.  use  of  pare  as  "  in  the  future  " 
opp.  to  adya  &  svas) ;  J  111.423  (the  day  before  yester- 
day). At  DhA  1.253  (sve  va  pare  va)  and  iv.  i  70  in  the 
sense  of  "on  the  day  after  tomorrow."  — para  (only 
apparently  abl.,  in  reality  either  para-(-a°  which 
represents  the  vocalic  beginning  of  the  second  part  of 
the  cpd.,  or  para -I- a  which  is  the  directional  prefix  a, 
emphasizing  para.  The  latter  expl"  is  more  in  the 
spirit  of  the  Pali  language)  :  see  separately,  -paro 
(old  abl.  as  adv.  =  Sk.  paras)  beyond  further :  see  sep. 
— parato  (abl.)  in  a  variety  of  expressions  and  shades 
of  meaning,  viz.  (i)  from  another,  as  regards  others 
A  III. 337  (attano  parato  ca)  ;  Nett  8  (ghosa),  50  (id.). 
—  (2)  from  the  point  of  view  of  "  otherness,"  i.  e.  as 
strange  or  something  alien,  as  an  enemy  M  1.435  (in 
"  anicca  "-passage)  ;  A  iv.423  ;  Nd-  214";  Ps  11.238; 
Kvu  4C0  ;  Miln  418  and  passim;  in  phrase  parato 
disva  "  seen  as  not  myself  "  Th  i,  1 160  ;  2,  loi  ;  S  1.188 
(sankhare  parato  passa,  dukkhato  ma  ca  attato).  — • 
(3)  on  the  other  side  of,  away  from,  beyond  J  11. 128  ; 
PvA  24  (kuddanag).  —  (4)  further,  afterwards,  later  on 
S  1.34;  J  1.255;  1V.139;  SnA  119,  482.  —  Nole.  The 
compounds  with  para^  are  combinations  either  with 
para  i  (adv.  prep),  or  para  2  (adj.  n).  Those  con- 
taining para  in  form  para  and  in  meaning  "  further  on 
to  "  see  separately  under  para°.  See  also  para,  parima 
etc. 

-ajjhasaya  intent  on  others  (opp.  att°)  SnA  46. 
-attha  (parattha,  to  be  distinguished  from  adv.  parattha. 
q.  V.  sep.)  the  profit  or  welfare  of  amther  (opp.  at- 
tattha)  S  n.29;  A  in.63  ;  Dh  166;  Nd*  26.  -adhina 
dependent  on  others  D  1.72  (  —  parpsu  adhino  parass'  eva 
ruciya  pavattati  DA  1.2  12) ;  J  vi.99  ;  Th.\  15  (°vuttika) ; 
VvA  23  ("vutti,  paresag  bharag  vahanto).  -iipakkama 
aggression  of  an  enemy,  violence  Vin  11. 194.  -upa- 
ghata  injuring  others,  cruelty  Vv  84*0.  -upaghatin 
killing  others  Dh  184  (=parag  upahananto  p.  DhA 
111.2^7).  -upavada  reproaching  others  Sn  389.  -kata  see 
parankata.  -kamma  service  of  others,  "karin  serving 
others  Vv  33".  -kara  see  below  uniier  parankara.  -kula 
clan  of  another,  strange  or  alien  clan  Sn  128  ;  Dh  73. 
-kkanta  [para°  or  para°  *kranta  ?]  walked  (by  another  ? 
or  gone  over  ?)  J  vi.559  (better  to  be  read  with  v.  1. 
on  p.  560  as  pada°  i.  e.  walked  by  feet,  footprint), 
-kkama  (para -(- kram]  exertion,  endeavour,  effort, 
strife  D  1.53;  111.113;  S  1.166  (da|ha°) ;  n.28  (purisa°) ; 
V.66.  104  sq.  ;  A  1.4,  50  (purisa°)  ;  iv.190;  Sn  293; 
Dh  313  ;  Nd'487;  J  1.256;  11. 153  ;  Dhs  13.  12.  289.  571  ; 
Miln  244  ;  DhA  iv.139  ;  Sdhp  253  ;  adj.  (-°)  sacca°  one 
who  strives  after  the  truth  J  iv.383.  -kkamati  ['para- 
kramati]  to  advance,  go  forward,  exert  oneself,  under- 
take, show  courage  Sn  966  (ger.  parakkamma) ;  Dh  383 
(id.);  Pv  III. 2"  (imper.  parakkama.  v.  1.  parakkama) ; 
Pug  19.  23;  PvA  184  (=payogag  karoti) ;  Sdhp  439. 
-kkaroti  [either  for  para-l-kr  or  more  likely  paras -t-kr, 
cp.  paro]  lit.  "  to  put  on  the  opposite  side."  i.  e.  to 
remove,  do  away  with  J  iv.26  (corresponding  to  apa- 
neti.  C.  expl°"  as  "  parato  kareti."  taking  parato  in  the 
sense  of  para  2  c  3).  404  (ma  parakari  =ma  pariccaji  C). 
-gatta  alien  body,  trsl.  "limbs  that  are  not  thou" 
Th  I.  1 150.  -gavacanda  violent  against  the  cows  of 
another  A  ii.i09=Pug  47  (opp.  sakagavacanda,  cp. 
PugA  226:  yo  attano  goganag  ghatteti,  paragogane 
pana  so  rato  sukhasilo  hoti  etc.).  -(n)kata  made  by 
something  or  somebody  else,  extra-self,  extraneous,  ahen 
S  1.134  (nayidag  attakatag  bimbag  nayidag  parakatag 
aghag);  with  ref.  to  loka  &  dukkha  and  opposed  to 
sayankata  D  111.137  sq.  ;  S  11. 19  sq.,   33  sq..   38  sq.  ; 


Parai) 


42 


Parama 


Ud  69  sq.  -(n)kara  condition  of  otherness,  other 
people,  alienity  Ud  70  (opp.  ahankara  selfhood),  -citta 
the  mind  or  heart  of  others  A  v.  160.  -jana  a  stranger, 
enemy,  demon,  fig.  devil  (cp.  Sk.  itarajana)  M  1.153,  »'o- 
-tthaddha  rpara  + tthaddha]  propped  against,  founded 
on,  relying  on  (with  loc.)  J  vi.181  (  =  upatthadda  C). 
-tthabbha  is  to  be  read  for  "tthambha  at  J  iv.313,  in 
meaning  =°tthaddha  (kismirj).  -dattOpajivin  living  on 
what  is  given  by  others,  dependent  on  another's  gift 
Sn  2 1  7  ;  Miln  294.  -davutta  see  sep.  under  parada  -I'ara 
the  wife  of  another,  somebody  else's  wife  M  1.87  ;  A  11. 71, 
191  ;  Sn  108,  242  ("sevana)  ;  Dh  246,  309  ("upa.sevin.  cp. 
DhA  III. 482)  ;  J  VI. 240  ;  DhA  in. 481  (°kamma).  -darika 
(better  to  be  read  as  para")  an  adulterer  S  11. i88,  259  ; 
J  111.43.  -dhammika  "  of  someone  else's  norm,"  one 
who  follows  the  teaching  of  another,  i.  e.  of  an  heretic 
teacher  Sn  965  (Nd'  485  :  p°  a  vuccanti  satta  saha- 
dhammika  thapetva  ye  keci  Buddhe  appasanna. 
dhamme  appasanna,  sanghe  appasanna).  -nitthita 
made  ready  by  others  S  1.236.  -niininita  "  created  by 
another,"  in  "vasavailin  having  power  under  control  of 
another,  N.  of  a  class  of  Devas  (see  deva)  D  1.2 16  sq.  ; 
A  1.2 10  ;  It  94  ;  Pug  51  ;  DA  1.114,  121  ;  KhA  128  ; 
VvA  79.  -ne3rya  to  be  led  by  another,  under  another's 
rule  Sn  907  Nd^  321  (=parapattiya  parapaccaya). 
-(n)tapa  worrying  or  molesting  another  person  (opp. 
attantapa)  D  111.232;  M  1.341,  411;  11.159;  Pug  56. 
-paccaya  resting,  relying,  or  dependent  on  someone  else 
Nd'  32  I  ;  usually  neg.  a°  independent  of  another  Vin 
1. 12,  181  and  passim.  -pattiya=prec.  Nd^  321.  -pana 
other  living  beings  Sn  220.  -puggala  other  people 
D  111.108.  -putta  somebody  else's  son  A  v.  169  ;  Sn  43. 
-pessa  serving  others,  being  a  servant  Sn  615  (  =  paresar) 
veyyavacca  SnA  466).  -pessiya  a  female  servant  or 
messenger,  lit.  to  be  sent  by  others  J  111.4I3  (  =  parehi 
pesitabba  pesanakarika  C).  -ppavada  [cp.  BSk.  para- 
pravadin  "  false  teacher"  Divy  202]  disputation  with 
another,  challenge,  opposition  in  teaching  (appH  to 
Non-Buddhistic  systems)  S  v. 261  ;  A  11.238  ;  Miln  170, 
175.  -bhaga  outer  part,  precinct  part  beyond  PvA  24. 
-bhuta  [Sk.  parabhrta]  the  Indian  cuckoo  (lit.  brought 
up  by  another)  J  v. 4 16  (so  read  for  parabhuta).  -bho- 
jana  food  given  by  others  Sn  366  (  =  parehi  dinnar) 
sadilhadeyyag  SnA  364).  -loka  [cpd.  either  with 
para  i.  or  para  2.  It  is  hardly  justified  to  assume  a 
metaphysical  sense,  or  to  take  para  as  temporal  in  the 
sense  of  parai)  (cp.  parar)marana  after  death),  i.  e.  the 
future  world  or  the  world  to  come]  the  other  world,  the 
world  beyond  (opp.  agar]  loko  this  world  or  idhaloka 
the  world  here,  see  on  term  Stede,  Peta  Vatthu  p.  29  sq.) 
D  1.27,  58,  187;  II. 319:  S  1.72,  138  ;  Sn  579,  666,  1117  ; 
Nd'  60  ;  Nd^  2 14  (t.  1.  for  paloka  in  anicca-passage)  410 
( =- manussalokai)  thapetva  sabbo  paraloko)  ;  Ps  1.121  ; 
Vv  84*  (  =  narakar)  hi  sattanar)  ekantanatthataya  para- 
bhuto  patisattubhiito  loko  ti  visesato  paraloko  ti  VvA 
335):  PvA  5,  60  (  ^  pettivisaya  parattha),  64,  107,  253 
(idhalokato  p.  natthi) ;  SnA  478  (=  parattha);  Sdhp 
316,  326,  327.  -vambhita  contempt  of  others  M  1.19 
(a°).  -vambhin  contempting  others  M  1.19,  527. 
-vasatta  power  (over  others)  Days  iv.19.  -vada  (1) 
talk  of  others,  public  rumour  S  1.4  ;  Sn8i9  (cp.  Nd'  151) ; 
Sn.\  475.  (2)  opposition  Miln  94  sq.  -vadin  opponent 
Miln  348.  -visaya  the  other  world,  realm  of  the  Dead. 
Hades  Pv  iv.8'  (  =  pettivisaya  PvA  268).  -vediya  to 
be  known  by  others,  i.  e.  heterodox  D  11. 241  ;  Sn  474 
(=parehi  iiapetabba  SnA  410).  -satta  (pi.)  -other 
beings  A  1.255=111.17  ( +  parapuggala).  -save  on  the 
day  after  tomorrow  DhA  iv.170  (v.  1.  SS  for  pare,  see 
para  2  c).  -sena  a  hostile  army  D  1.89  =  11.16  = 
ni.59=Sn  p.  106  sk  (cp.  DA  1.250=  SnA  450).  -hattha 
the  hand  of  the  enemy  J  1.179.  -higsa  hurting 
others  Pv  lu.-j^.  -hita  the  good  or  welfare  of  others 
(opp.  attahita)  D  111.233  ;  PvA  16,  163.  -hetu  on 
account  of  others,  through  others  Sn  122  (attahetu-l- )  ; 
P»g  54 


Parar)  (param°)  (adv.)  [orig.  nt.  of  para]  further,  away 
(from) ;  as  prep.  (w.  abl.)  after,  beyond  ;  absolute  only 
in  phrase  ito  parar)  from  here,  after  this,  further  e.  g. 
KhA  131;  SnA  160,  178,  412,  512,  549;  PvA  83,  90; 
also  in  tato  parar)  J  in.  281. 

-para  (f.)  [adv.  converted  into  a  noun  parai)  +  abl.  of 
para]  lit.  "  after  the  other,"  i.  e.  succession,  series 
Vin  II. 1 10;  IV. 77,  78  (parampara-bhojana  "taking 
food  in  succession,"  successive  feeding,  see  under 
bhojana,  and  cp.  C.  at  Vin  iv.77,  78  and  Vin  Texts 
1.38);  D  1.239;  M  1.520;  A  11. 191  (paramparaya  in 
phrase  anussavena  p.  itikiraya,  as  at  Nd^  151);  Bu 
1.79  ;  J  1.194  ;  IV. 35  (expl''  by  C.  as  purisa",  viz.  a  series 
of  husbands,  but  probably  misunderstood,  Kern,  Toev. 
s.  V.  interperts  as  "  defamation,  ravishing  ")  ;  Nett  79 
(°parahetu) ;  Miln  191,  276;  DhsA  314;  SnA  352; 
DhA  1.49  (sisa°).  -marana  (adv.)  after  death  ;  usually 
in  comb"  with  kayassa  bheda  p.  after  the  dissolution  of 
the  body,  i.  e.  after  death  S  1.231  ;  D  1.245;  PvA  27, 
133  ;  absolutely  only  in  phrase  hoti  Tathagato  p.  D  1.188, 
192  ;  A  v. 193.  -mukha  (adv.)  in  one's  absence,  lit. 
with  face  turned  away  (opp.  sammukhd  in  presence,  thus 
at  J  III. 263  where  parammukha  corresponds  to  raho 
and  sam°  to  ivi ;  PvA  13)  D  1.330  (parammukhin  ?) ; 
DhA  II.  109. 

Parajihati  see  parajeti. 

Parattha  (adv.)  [Vedic  parastat  beyond]  elsewhere, 
hereafter,  in  the  Beyond,  in  the  other  world  S  1.20  ; 
Sn  661  =It  42=Dh  306;  Dh  177;  J  11.417;  Pv  i.ii*" 
(  =  paraloke  PvA  60);  iii.i-"  (  =  samparaye  PvA  177); 
SnA  478  (  =  paraloke). 

Parada  (adj.)  [for  uparada  (?)  =  uparata,  pp.  of  upa+ 
ram]  finding  pleasure  in,  fond  of,  only  in  two  (doubtful) 
cpds.  viz.  "vutta  [unexpH,  perhaps  v  for  y,  as  daya> 
dava  through  influence  of  d  in  parada"  ;  thus  =  parata  + 
yutta  ?]  "  fond  of  being  prepared,"  adapted,  apt,  active, 
alert ;  only  in  one  stock  phrase  (which  points  to  this  form 
as  being  archaic  and  probably  popular  etymology,  thus 
distorting  its  real  derivation),  viz.  appossukka  pannaloma 
-l-Vin  II. 184  (I'/h.  Texts  in. 232  trsl.  "  secure,"  cp.  Vin 
n.363)  ;  M  1.450;  II. 121  (v.  1.  BB  paradatta"),  —  and 
"samacara  living  a  good  (active)  life  M  1.469. 

Parama  (adj.)  [\'edic  parama;  superl.  formation  of  para. 
lit.  "  farthest,"  cp.  similarly,  although  fr.  difl.  base, 
Lat.  primus]  highest,  most  excellent,  superior,  best ; 
paraphrased  by  agga  settha  visittha  at  Nd-  502  A  = 
Nd'  84,  102  (the  latter  reading  visettha  for  visittha)  ;  by 
uttama  at  DhA  in. 237;  VvA  78. — D  1.124  (ettaka°)  ; 
M  II. 120  ("nipacca) ;  S  1. 166;  11.277;  v.230  ;  A  v  64 
(°dittha-dhamma-nibbana)  ;  Sn  138  (yasar)  paramar) 
patto),  296  (°a  mitta),  788  (suddhar)  °r)  arogar)),  1071 
(saiinavimokhe  °e  vimutto) ;  Dh  184  (nibbanai)  °i) 
vadanti  Buddha), "  203,  243;  Vv  16'  (°alankata  = 
paramar)  ativiya  visesato  VvA  78)  Pv  11.9'"  ("iddhi) ; 
Pug  15,  16,  66;  SnA  453  ("issara) ;  PvA  12  ("nipacca), 
15  ("duggandha),  46.  —  At  the  end  of  a  cpd.  (-°)  "  at 
the  outmost,  at  the  highest,  at  most ;  as  a  minimum, 
at  least  "  Vin  iv.263  (dvangula-pabba") ;  esp.  freq.  in 
phrase  sattakkhattu"  one  who  will  be  reborn  seven 
times  at  the  outmost,  i.  e.  at  the  end  of  the  7  rebirth- 
interval  S  II. 185  (sa") ;  v.205  ;  A  1.233;  iv.381  ;  V.120; 
It  18  ;  Kvu  46.9.     See  parami  &  paramita. 

-attha  [cp.  class.  Sk.  paramartha]  the  highest  good, 
ideal ;  truth  in  the  ultimate  sense,  philosophical  truth 
{cip.  Kvu  trsl.  180  ;  J. P.T.S.  1914.  129  sq  ;  Cpii.  6,  81) ; 
Arahantship  Sn  68  (=vuccati  Araatar)  Nibbanar)  etc. 
Nd^  409),  219  (°dassin)  ;  Nd^  26  ;  Miln  19,  31  ;  °dipani 
Exposition  of  the  Highest  Truth,  N.  of  the  Commen- 
tary on  Th,  Vv  and  Pv  ;  mentioned  e.  g.  at  PvA  71  : 
"jotika  id.,  N.  of  the  C.  on  Kh  and  Sn,  mentioned  e.  g. 
at  KhA  II.  —  As  °-.  in  instr.  and  abl.  used  adverbially 
in    meaning    of    "  in    the    highest    sense,    absolutely. 


Paramata 


43 


Parayin 


Kar'  ih'X'l''.  primarily,  ideally,  in  an  absolute  sense." 
like  °parami  Bu  1.77  'visuddhi  A  v. 64  ;  ■'safinita  Th  z. 
210  ;  "suniia  Ps  11.184  '•  °suddhi  SnA  52S  ;  abl.  paramat- 
thato  Miln  28  ;  VvA  24  (manusso),  30  (bhikkhu),  72 
(jivitindriyar)) ;  PvA  146  (pabbajito,  corresponding  to 
anavasesato),  253  (na  koci  kiiici  hanati  =  not  at  all); 
instr.  paramatthena  Jliln  71  (vedagu),  2O8  (sattu- 
paladdhi).  -gati  the  liighest  or  best  course  of  life  or 
future  exsitence  \'v  35'-  (  =  anup5discsa-nibbana  VvA 
1O4). 

Paramata  (f.)  [fr.  parama,  Vedic  paramata  highest  posi- 
tion] the  highest  quantity,  measure  on  the  outside, 
minimum  or  maximum  D  1.60  (ghasa-cchadana-para- 
mataya  santuttho  contexted  with  a  minimum  of  food 
&.  clothing:  DA  1.169  expl''  by  uttamataya)  ;  M  i.io 
(abyabajjha°)  ;  S  1.S2  (najik'  odana-paramataya  on  a 
na|i  of  boiled  rice  at  the  most) ;  freq.  in  phrase 
sattakkhattui)  p.  interval  of  seven  rebirths  at  the 
outside  (cp.  parama),  being  reborn  seven  times  at 
the  most  S  n.134  sq.  :  v. 458  ;  Kvu  469  (cp.  Kvu  Irsl. 
2683). 

Parasupahara  at  S  v. 441  is  to  be  corrected  to  pharasu". 

Para"  (prefix)  [para+a,  not  instr.  of  para:  see  para  2  c; 
in  some  cases  it  may  also  correspond  to  parar)"]  prep, 
meaning  "  on  to,"  "  over  "  (with  the  idea  of  mastering), 
also  "  through,  throughout."  The  a  is  shortened  before 
double  consonant,  like  para-l-kr  =  parakkaroti,  para-|- 
kram  =  parakkamati  (see  under  cpds.  of  para). 

Parakaroti  see  parakkaroti  (parar)°  .'  or  para  ?). 

Parajaya  [para  +  ji,  opp.  of  jaya]  i.  defeat  D  i.io;  J 
VI. 209  ;  VvA  139.  —  2.  defeat  in  game,  loss,  losing  at 
play  S  1. 149  (dhana°)=A  v.i7i=Sn  659:  J  vi.234 
(°gaha  sustainment  of  a  loss). 

Parajita  [pp.  of  parajeti]  defeated,  having  suffered  a  loss 
Vin  IV, 5  ;  S  1.224;  ^  ^^'Ai^ '■  Sn  440,  681;  Dh  201 
(  =  parena  parajito  Dh.\  111.259,  where  Bdhgh  takes  it 
evidently  as  instr.  of  para=para)  ;  J  1.293  :  11160  (sa- 
hassari),  403. 

Parajeti  [para  +  jeti  of  ji,  cp.  jayati]  to  defeat,  conquer; 
in  gambling:  to  make  lose,  beat  PvA  151  (sahassag  p. 
by  i.f<«)  coins).  —  aor.  paraji  in  3^^  pi.  °jir)su,  only  in 
one  stock  phrase  referring  to  the  battle  of  the  Gods  & 
Titans,  viz.  at  D  11.285  =M  1.253  ("jinir|su)  =S  1.221  = 
224  (v.  1.  °jinir|su)=A  iv.432  ("jiyirisu,  with  v.  1. 
°jinir)su),  where  a  Pass,  is  required  ("  were  defeated, 
lost  ")  in  opp.  to  jinigsu,  and  the  reading  ^jiyiijsu  as 
aor.  pass,  is  to  be  preferred.  —  Pass,  jiyati  to  be 
defeated,  to  suffer  defeat  S  1.22  i  (Pot.  parajeyya,  but 
form  is  Active)  ;  J  1.290  ;  and  parajjhati  (r'  pi.  paraj- 
jhama)  J  11.403  ;  aor.  parajiyi :  see  above  paraji.  —  pp. 
parajita  (q.  v.). 

Farabbava  [fr.  para  +  bhu  Vedic  parabhava]  defeat, 
destruction,  ruin,  disgrace  S  11. 241  ;  A  11.73;  iv.26 ; 
Sn  92,  1 15  ;  J  III. 331  ;  SnA  167. 

Parabhavati  [para  +  bhii]  i.  to  go  to  ruin  Sn  91  (  =  pari- 
hayati  vinassati). — 2.  to  win  through,  to  surpass 
Th  I,  1 144  (cp.  trsl.  381*). — pp.  parabhuta  (q.  v.). 
See  also  parabhetva. 

Parabhnta  [pp.  of  parabhavati]  ruined,  fallen  into  dis- 
grace M  II. 210  (avabhuta-l- ).  —  Nole.  parabhuta  at 
J  V.416  is  to  be  read  parabhuta  (q.  v.). 

Parabhetva  at  J  v.  153  is  not  clear  (C.  :  hadayar)  bhinditva 
olokento  viya  .  .  .)  ;  perhaps  we  have  here  a  reading 
parabh"  for  parag°  (as  bhenduka  wrongly  for  gcnduka), 
which  in  its  turn  stands  for  paradhetva  (cp.  similarly 
BSk.  arageti  for  aradheti),  thus  meaning  "  propitiating." 


Paramattha  [pp.  of  paramasati]  touched,  grasped,  usually 
in  bad  sense:  succumbing  to,  dehled,  corrupted  D  1.17  ; 
for  a  different,  commentarial  interpretation  see  Para- 
masa  (cvar)°  so  acquired  or  taken  up:  cp.  DA  1.107: 
nirasanka-cittatSya  punappuna  amattha)  :  S  11. 94  '■ 
Nd-  152  (gahita  p.  abhinivittha :  cp.  gahessasi  No. 
227)  :  Dhs  584.  1177,  15CO  ;  Sdhp  ^i2.  — dup"  wrongly 
grasped,  misused  S  1.49.  — apparamattha  [cp.  BSk. 
aparamrsta  not  affected  Mvyutp.  p.  84]  untarnished, 
incorrupt  D  11.80  (cp.  Dial  11.85) .'  l"-245  ;  S  11.70  ; 
A  III. 36. 

Paramasa  [para -l- mrs,  but  see  paramasa]  touching, 
seizing,  taking  hold  of  M  1.130  (v.  1.  °masa  which  read- 
ing is  probably  to  be  preferred,  cp.  Trenckner  on  p.  54 1 ) ; 
S  III. 46  (v.  1.  °masa).  —  neg.  aparamasa  not  leading 
astray,  not  enticing  D  1.17  (°to),  202.  —  Perhaps  we 
should  read  paramasa  altogether. 

Paramasati  [para-(-masati  of  mrs]  to  touch,  hold  on  to, 
deal  with,  take  up,  to  be  attached  or  fall  a  victim  to 
(ace.)  Vin  11.47,  195,  209;  D  1.17:  M  1.257;  S  in. no; 
J  IV.  1 38;  in  comb"  with  ganhati  &  nandati  (abhini- 
veseti)  at  Nd^  227. — ger.  paramassa  D  11.282;  M 
1. 1 30,  498  (but  cp.  p.  541) ;  grd.  paramasitabba  J  1.188. 
—  pp.  paramattha  (q.  v.). 

Paramasana  (nt.)  [fr.  paramasati]  touching,  seizing, 
taking  up  Nd-  576  (danda-sattha°)  ;  DhsA  239  (anga- 
paccanga") ;  PvA  159  (kiriya"). 

Paramasa  [para -1- mrs,  cp.  Epic  Sk.  paramarsa  being 
affected  by  ;  as  p'hilos.  term  "  reflection  "]  touching, 
contact,  being  attached  to,  hanging  on,  being  under  the 
influence  of,  contagion  (DAs./;-s/.  316).  In  Asl.  49,  Bdhgh 
analyses  as  paratoamasantiti  paramasa  :  p.  means  "  they 
handle  dhamma's  as  other"  (than  what  they  really  are, 
e.  g.  they  transgress  the  real  meaning  of  anicca  etc. 
and  say  nicca).  Hence  the  renderings  in  Asl.  trs. 
"  Reversion,"  in  Dialogues  111.28,  43,  etc.  "  perverted  " 
(paramasami  paramattha)  —  S  111.46,  no;  A  11.42 
(sacca")  ;iii.377(silabbata°),438(id.);v.i50(sanditthi°); 
D  III. 48 ;  Th  I,  342:  It  48  (itisacca".  cp.  idarjsacca- 
bhinivesa  under  kayagantha) ;  Pug  22  ;  Dhs  381,  1CO3, 
1 1 75  (ditthi"  contagion  of  speculative  opinion),  1 498  (id.). 
It  is  almost  synonymous  with  abhinivesa  ;  see  kaya- 
gantha  (under  gantha),  and  cp.  Nd^  227  (gaha  p. 
abhinivesa)  and  Nd-  under  tanha  in.  1  C. — See  also 
paramasa. 

Paramasin  (adj.)  [fr.  paramasa]  grasping,  seizing,  pervert- 
ing D  III. 48  :  M  1.43,  96  (sanditthi"). 

Parayana  (Paraya^a)  (nt.)  [fr.  para-l-i,  cp.  Vedic  para- 
yaria  highest  instance,  also  BSk.  parayana  e.  g.  Divy 
57.  327]  I-  (n-)  final  end,  i.  e.  support,  rest,  relief  S  1.38  ; 
A  1. 155,  156  (tana  lena  dipa  etc.);  J  v.50i=vi.375 
(dipan  ca  p.).  —  2.  (adj.  -°)  (a)  going  through  to,  ending 
in,  aiming  at,  given  to,  attached  to,  having  one's  end 
or  goal  in  ;  also :  finding  one's  support  in  (as  danda° 
leaning  on  a  stick  M  1.88  ;  A  1.138),  in  foil,  phrases  pre- 
valent:  Amata°  S  v.217  sq.  ;  tama"  Pug  51  ;  Nibbana" 
S  IV. 373  ;  v. 218;  brahmacariya"  S  1.234;  Maccu"  S 
V.217;  sambodhi"  D  1. 156;  11.155;  I*"g  '<>•  Cp.  also 
Sn  IU4  (tap°  =  tad°,  see  Nd*  41 1);  Nfiln  148  (ekanta- 
soka°) ;  DhA  1.28  (rodana.  i.  e.  constantly  weeping).  — 
(b)  destined  to,  having  one's  next  birth  in.,  e.  g.  Avici" 
J  111.454  ;  IV.  1 59  ;  duggati^  PvA  32  ;  dcvaloka"  J  1.2  18  ; 
brahmaloka"  J  111.396;  Miln  234;  sagga"  J  vi.329; 
PvA  42,  160  ;  sugati"  PvA  89  similarly  nilamaiica"  Pv 
II. 2*.     See  also  parayana. 

Parayika  see  sam°. 

Parayin  (adj.)  [fr.  parayana]  having  one's  refuge  or  resort 
(in),  being  supported,  only  neg.  aparayini  (f.)  without 
support  J  111.386. 


Pari 


44 


Parikirana 


Pari"  (indecl.)  [Idg.  •pen  to  verbal  root  *per,  denoting 
completion  of  a  forward  movement  (as  in  Sk.  pr", 
piparti.  to  bring  across,  promote ;  cp.  Vedic  pre  to 
satisfy,  prnati  to  fill,  fulfill.  See  also  P.  para). '  Cp. 
Vedic  pari,  Av.  pairi,  Gr.  Tripi,  Lat.  per  (also  in  adj. 
per-magnus  very  great)  ;  Obulg.  pariy  round  about, 
Lith.  pef  through,  Oir  er-  (intensifying  prefix),  Goth, 
fair,  Ohg.  fir,  far  =  Ger.  ver-]  prefix,  signifying  (lit.) 
around,  round  about;  (fig.)  all  round,  i.  e.  completely, 
altogether.  The  use  as  prep,  (with  ace.  =  against,  w. 
abl.  =from)  has  entirely  disappeared  in  Pali  (but  see 
below  I  a).  As  adv.  "  all  round  "  it  is  only  found  at 
J  VI. It  ~  (pari  metri  causa  ;  comb""  with  samantato).  — 
The  composition  form  before  vowels  is  pariy°,  which 
in  comb"  with  ud  and  upa  undergoes  metathesis,  scil. 
payir".  Frequent  comb'"'  with  other  preps,  are  pari 
+  a  (pariya°)  and  pari  +  ava  (pariyo°) ;  sampari". 
Close  affinities  of  p.  are  the  preps,  adhi  (cp.  ajjhesati> 
pariyesati,  ajjhogahati  >  pariyogahati)  and  abhi  (cp. 
abhiradheti  >  paritoseti,  abhitapa  >  paritapa,  abhipi- 
lita  >  pari",  abhipureti  >  pari°.  abhirakkhati  >  pari"),  cp. 
also  its  relation  to  a  in  var.  comb'". — Meanings.  I.  (lit.) 
(a)  away  from,  off  (cp.  Vedic  pari  as  prep.  c.  abl. :) 
"kaddhati  to  draw  over,  seduce,  "cheda  cutting  off, 
restriction,  "punchati  wipe  off.  —  (b)  all  round,  round 
(expl''  by  samantato,  e.  g.  at  Vism  271  in  pallanka) : 
°anta  surrounded,  "esati  search  round,  "kinna  covered 
all  round  (i.  e.  completely,  cp.  expl"  as  "  samantato 
akinna  "),  "carati  move  round,  °jana  surrounding  people, 
"dhavati  run  about,  "dhovati  wash  all  round,  "paleti 
watch  all  round,  fig.  guard  carefully,  "bhamati  roam 
about,  "mandala  circular  (round),  °sa  assembly  (ht. 
sitting  round,  of  sad).  —  2.  (fig.)  (a)  quite,  completely, 
very  much,  Kar'  fKox>i>'  '■  "adana  consummation,  "apanna 
gone  completely  into,  "odata  very  pure,  "osana  com- 
plete end,  "guhati  to  hide  well,  "toseti  satisfy  very  much, 
"pureti  fulfil,  "bhutta  thoroughly  enjoyed,  "yaiiiia 
supreme  sacrifice,  "suddha  extremely  clean.  —  (b)  too 
much,  excessively  (cp.  ati°  and  adhi°) :  "tapeti  torment 
excessively,  "pakka  over-ripe.  —  A  derivation  (adv.) 
from  pari  is  parito  (q.  v.).  On  its  relation  to  Sk.  pari? 
see  parikkhara.  A  frequently  occurring  dialectical 
variant  of  pari"  is  pali"  (q.  v.).  —  Note.  The  expl"  of  P. 
Commentators  as  regards  pari  is  "  pariggahattho " 
Ps  1. 1 76;  "  paricca  "  SnA  88;  "parito"  VvA  316; 
PvA  33. 

Parika^dhati  [pari-l-k°,  cp.  BSk.  parikaddhati  MVastu 
11.235]  to  draw  over  or  towards  oneself,  to  win  over, 
seduce  D  11.283  (purisar)) ;  Miln  143  (janapadai)).  Cp. 
parikassati  and  samparikaddhati. 

Parika44bana  (nt.)  [fr.  prec]  drawing,  dragging  along 
J  11.78  ;  Miln  154. 

Parikati  ['parikrii  of  kr  (?)]  arrangement,  preparation, 
getting  up  J  V.203. 

Parikatta  [pp.  of  pari-l-kantati^;  corresponds  to  Sk. 
krtta,  which  is  usually  represented  in  P.  by  kanta^  cut 
round,  cut  off  Miln  188. 

Parikatha  (f.)  [pari-l-katha,  cp.  BSk.  parikatha  Divy 
2^5.  235]  I.  "  round-about  tale,"  exposition,  story,  esp. 
religious  tale  D  11. 204  ;  Vism  41  ( =pariyaya-katha). 
—  2.  talk  about,  remark,  hint  Vin  1.254  (cp-  '•''«• 
Texts  II. 154);  Vbh  353=Vism  23  (with  obhasa  & 
nimitta) ;  SnA  497.  • —  3.  continuous  or  excessive  talk 
Vism  29. 

Parikanta'  [pari-l-kanta^  of  kantati^]  cut  open  Vin  111.89 
(kucchi  p.).  See  also  parikatta  &  cp.  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v. 
(misreading  for  "katta  ?).  —  Note.  Reading  parikantai) 
upahanag  at  J  vi.51  is  with  v.  1.  to  be  changed  to  pari- 
yantar). 

Parikanta*  at  Vin  11.80  (bhasita")  is  probably  to  be  read 
as  parikata  [pp.  of  parikaroti].     Bdhgh  expl"^  as  parik- 


kametva  kata,  but  it  is  difficult  to  derive  it  fr.  parik- 
kamati.  Vin.  Texts  in.  18  trsl.  "  as  well  in  speech  as 
in  act  "  and  identify  it  with  parikanta',  hardly  justified. 
Cp.  also  Kern.  Toev.  s.  v.  The  passage  is  evidently 
faulty. 

Parikantati'  [pari-f  kantati']  to  wind  round,  twist  J 
III.  185  (paso  padar)  p.  ;  but  taken  by  C.  as  parikantati^, 
expl'^  as  "  cammadini  chindanto  samanta  kantati  "). 

Parikantati'^  [pari -(- kantati^  to  cut  (round),  cut  through, 
pierce  M  1.244  (vata  kucchir)  p.);  J  111.185  (see  pari- 
kantati'). 

Parikappa  [fr.  pari-l-kalp]  i-  preparation,  intention. strata- 
gem 'ih  I,  940. — 2.  assumption,  supposition,  surmise 
A  1. 197 ;  V.271  ;  DhsA  308. 

Parikappita    [pp.    of   parikappati]    inclined,    determined, 

decided,  fixed  upon  Sdhp.  362,  602. 

Parikamma  (nt.)  [pari-l-kamma]  "doing  round,"  i.  e. 
doing  up,  viz  i.  arrangement,  getting  up,  preparation 
Vin  II.  106  (°r)  karapeti),  117  (geruka"  plastering  with 
red  chalk)  151  (id.),  parikammag  karoti  to  make  (the 
necessary)  preparation,  to  set  to  work  \'ism  395  and 
passim  (with  ref.  to  iddhi).  Usually  in  form  parikam- 
makata  arranged,  prepared  Vin  11.175  (bhumi),  as  -° 
"  with,"  viz.  geruka"  plastered  with  red  chalk  Vin  1.48  ; 
11.209  ;  lakha"  J  111.183  ;  iv.256  ;  su°  beautifully  arranged 
or  prepared,  fitful,  well  worked  Miln  62  (daru),  282 
(maniratana) ;  VvA  188.  In  special  sense  used  with 
ref.  to  jhana,  as  kasina"  processes  whereby  jhana  is 
introduced,  preparations  for  meditation  J  1.141  ; 
IV.30O  ;  v. 162,  193  ;  DhsA  168  ;  cp.  Cpii.  54  ;  DhA  1. 105. 
—  2.  service,  attention,  attending  Vin  1.47  ;  11. 106,  220  ; 
S  1.76;  Th  2,  376  (=veyyavacca  ThA  253);  Pug  56; 
DhA  1.96,  333,  chiefly  by  way  of  administering  ointments 
etc.  to  a  person,  cp.  J  v. 89  ;  DhA  1.250.  sarira"  attend- 
ing the  body  DA  1.45,  186  ;  SnA  52. 

-karaka  one  who  ministers  to  or  looks  after  a  person, 
attendant;  one  who  makes  preparations  Th  2,  411  (f. 
-ika  =  paricarika  ThA  267) ,  J  1.232. 

Parikara  [fr.  pari  -l-  kr ;  a  similar  formation  belonging  to 
same  root,  but  with  fig.  meaning  is  to  be  found  in 
parikkhara,  which  is  also  expl''  by  parivara  cp.  pari- 
karoti =  parivareti]  "doing  round,"  i.  e.  girdle,  loin- 
cloth J  1V.149;  DhA  1.352.^ — In  cpd.  ovada"  it  is 
v.  1.  SS  at  D  1.137  f*""  patikara  (q.  v.). 

Parikaroti  [pari-t-kr]  to  surround,  serve,  wait  upon,  do 
service  for  J.  iv.4b5  (=parivareti  C.) ;  v.  353  (id.),  381  ; 
VI. 592.     Cp.  parikara  &  parikkhara. 

Parikassati  [pari-l-krs,  cp  BSk.  parikarsayati  to  carry 
about  Divy  475,  and  parikaddhati]  i.  to  drag  about 
S  1.44,  cp.  Dhs.\  68. — 2.  sweep  away,  carry  away 
DhA  11.275  (mah'  ogho  viya  parikassamano,  v.  1.  "ka^- 
dhamano).  —  Pass,  parikissati  (q.  v.). 

Pariki:p^a  [pp-  of  parikirati]  scattered  or  strewn  about, 
surrounded  J  iv.400  ;  VI. 89,  559  ;  Pv  1.6'  (makkhika°  = 
samantato  akinna  PvA  32);  Miln  168,  285;  DA  1.45 
(spelt  parikkhinna).     Cp.  sampari". 

Parikittita  [pp.  of  parikutteti]  declared,  announced,  made 
public  Sdhp  601. 

Parikitteti  [pari  -l-  kitteti]  to  declare,  praise,  make  public 
Miln  131,  141,  230,  383.  —  pp.  parikittita  (q.  v.). 

Parikirati  [pari4-kirati]  to  strew  or  scatter  about,  to 
!  surround  S  l.i85=Th  i,  1210;  aor.  parikiri  J  vi.592 
!       (v.  1.  for  parikari,  see  parikaroti).  —  pp.  parikinna  (q.  v.). 

ParikiraQa  [fr-  pari -l- kirati]  strewing  about,  trsl''  "con- 
secrating sites"  D  1. 12  (vatthu-kammaH- vatthu" ;  v.  1. 
pati"  ;  expl''  at  DA  1.98  as  "  idaii  c'  idaii  ca  aharatha  ti 


Parikilanta 


45 


Parikkhitta 


vatva  tattha  balikarama-karanar)  ").  The  BSk.  form 
appears  to  be  pariksa,  as  seen  in  phrase  vatthupariksa 
at  Divy  3  &  16.     See  under  parikkha. 

Parikilanta    [pp.    of   parikilamati]    tired    out,    exhausted 

Miln  303. 

Parikilamati  [pari  f  kilamati]  to  get  tired  out,  fatigued  or 
exhausted  J  v.417,  421. — pp.  parikilanta  (q.  v.). 

Parikilissati  [pari+kilissati]  to  get  stained  or  soiled;  fig. 
get  into  trouble  or  miserj'  (?)  see  parikissati. — pp. 
parikilittha  see  parikkilittha. 

Parikilesa  [pari  +  kilesa]  misery,  calamity,  punishment 
Th.\  241  (for  °klesa,  q.  v.). 

Parikissati  [most  likely  Pass,  of  parikassati ;  maybe  Pass, 
of  kisa  (=Sk.  kfsa)  to  become  emaciated.  Mrs.  Rh.  D. 
at  K.S.  319  takes  it  as  contracted  form  of  kilissati]  to 
be  dragged  about  or  worried,  to  be  harassed,  to  get  into 
trouble  S  1.39  (trsl.  "plagues  itself");  A  11. 177; 
IV.  1 86 ;  Sn  820  (v.  1.  Nd'  "kilissati ;  expl""  at  Nd'  154  as 
kissati  parikissati  parikilissati,  with  vv.  11.  kilissati 
pakirissati). 

Parikujati  at  Sdhp  145,  meaning  ?     Cp.  palikujjati. 

Pariknpita  [pp.  of  pari  +  kup]  greatly  excited,  very  much 
agitated  A  11. 75  ;  Miln  253. 

Parikelana  (f)  [pari  +  ke|ana]  adornment,  adorning  one- 
self, being  fond  of  ornaments  Nd^  585-  (v.  1.  parile- 
pana)  ;  DA  1.286  has  patikelana  instead,  but  Vbh  id. 
p.  351  parikelana  with  v.  1.  parikelasana. 

Paiikopeti  [Caus.  of  pari  +  kup]  to  excite  violently  Miln 

Parikkamana  (nt.)  [pari  +  kram]  walking  about  M  1.43, 
44  ;  adj.  sa°  having  (opportunity  for)  walking  about, 
i.  e.  accessible,  good  for  rambling  in,  pleasant,  said  of 
the  Dharama  A  v. 262  (opp.  a°). 

Parikkita  at  J  v.  74  is  probably  to  be  read  parikkhita 
(pari+ukj):  see  okkhita  "sprinkled,  strewn,"  unless 
it  is  misreading  for  parikinna. 

Parikkilittha  [pp.  of  parikihssati]  soiled,  stained  \'in 
II. 290  (for  parikilittha,  cp.  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.) ;  id.  p., 
at  A  11.56  has  patikilittha,  cp.  upakkilittha  Vin  11.295. 

Parikkha  (-°)  see  parikkha. 

Parikkhaka  (adj.)  [fr.  parikkhati]  investigating,  examin- 
ing, experienced,  shrewd  PvA  131  (lokiya"  experienced 
in  the  ways  of  the  world,  for  agarahita). 

Parikkhaka  (nt.)  [fr  parikkhati ;  cp.  Class.  Sk.  parikja^a] 
putting  to  the  test,  trying  Sdhp  403  (sarira",  or  should 
we  read  parirakkhana  .'     Cp.  parirakkhati). 

Parikkhata'  [pp.  of  pari-l-ksan]  wounded,  hurt,  grazed 
J  111.431  ;  PvA  272  (a°). 

Parikkhata-  [pp.  of  *parikkharoti ;  cp.  Sk.  parijkrta]  made 
up,  prepared,  endowed  with,  equipped,  adorned  D 
II. 217;  M  III. 71  ;  Miln  328. 

Parikkhatata  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  parikkhata^  "  making  up," 
pretence,  posing,  sham  Pug  19  (23)=  Vbh  351  (358). 

Parikkhati  [pari  +  Iks]  to  look  round,  to  inspect,  investi- 
gate, examine  A  1.162  (vannai)  pariklchare  3"^  pi.). 
See  also  parikkhaka.  parikkhavant  &  parikkha. 

Parikkhattiya  read  pari"  (=  parikkhatata)  q.  v. 

'Parikkharoti  [paris  +  kr]  lit.  to  do  all  round,  i.  e.  to  make 
up,  equip,  adorn  (cp.  parikaroti) ;  pp.  parikkhata^ 
(q.  V.) ;  see  also  parikkhara. 


I  Parikkhaya  [fr.  pari  +  ksi^,  cp.  Epic  Sk.  pariksaya]  ex- 
haustion, waste,  diminution,  decay,  loss,  end  D  1.156; 
M  1.453  ;  III. 37  sq.  ;  S  1.2,  90,  152  ;  v. 461  ;  A  i.ioo,  299  ; 
11.68;  III. 46  (bhoga  °r)  gacchanti)  ;  iv.148,  350;  Th  i, 
929;  Sn  374.  749,  1094  (=pahanag  etc.  Nd^  412);  Dh 
139  ;  J  1.290  ;  Pv  II. 61'  ;  Pug  16,  17,  63  ;  Miln  102  ;  DhA 
IV.  1 40  (°r|  gacchati  to  come  to  waste,  to  disappear - 
atthai)  gacchati  of  Dh  384) ;  ThA  285  ;  PvA  3  (dhana- 
sannicayo  °g  na  gamissati).  In  the  latter  phrase  freq. 
comb''  with  pariyadana  (q.  v.). 

Parikkhavant  (adj.)  [fr.  parikkhati]  circumspect,  clever, 
experienced  J  III.  11 4. 

Parikkha  (f.)  [fr.  pari -t- Iks,  cp.  BSk.  pariksa  Divy  3  &  16 
in  vastu",  ratna°  etc.  with  which  cp.  P.  vatthu-pari- 
kirapa]  examination,  investigation,  circumspection, 
prudence  J  111.115;  Nett  3,  4,  126  (cp.  Index  p.  276); 
Sdhp.  532  (attha°). 

Parikkhara  [fr.  *parikkharoti,  cp.  late  Sk.  pariskara]  "  all 
that  belongs  to  anything,"  make-up,  adornment  (so 
Nd*  585  bahira  p.  of  the  body).  —  (a)  requisite,  acces- 
sory, equipment,  utensil,  apparatus  Vin  1.50,  296 
("colaka  cloth  required  for  water-strainers  &  bags.  cp. 
Vin.  Texts  11.229);  II. 150  (senasana^-dussa  cloth- 
requirement  of  seat  &  bed);  iv.249  sq.,  284;  D  1.128, 
137  (yannassap.  =parivaraDA  1.297)  ;  M  1.104  (jivita") ; 
III.  1 1  ;  S  11.29;  A  IV. 62  (citf  alankarar)  citta-parikkhar' 
atthar)  danar)),  236  (id.) ;  J  in. 470  (sabba°-sampannar) 
danar)  with  all  that  belongs  to  it);  v.232  ;  Sn  307; 
Nd*  585  ;  Nett  i  sq.  ;  4,  108  ;  DA  1.294,  ^99  ;  DhA  1.38, 
240  (geha°),  352  (v.  1.  for  parikara) ;  PvA  81  (sabba°). 
— saparikkhara  together  with  the  (other)  requisites,  i.  e. 
full  of  resources;  used  with  reference  to  the  samadhi- 
parikkhara  (see  below)  D  11. 217;  M  111. 71.  —  (b)  In  a 
special  sense  and  in  very  early  use  it  refers  to  the  "  set 
of  necessaries  "  of  a  Buddhist  monk  &  comprises  the 
4  indispensable  instruments  of  a  mendicant,  enum""  :n 
stock  phrase  "civara-piijdapata-senasana-gilanapaccay  a- 
bhesajja-p."  i.  e.  robe,  alms-bowl,  seat  &  bed, 
medicine  as  help  in  illness.  Thus  freq.  found  in  Canon, 
e.  g.  at  Vin  111.132  ;  D  111.268  ;  S  iv.288,  291  ;  Nd''  523 
(as  r'  part  of  "  yaiina");  also  unspecified,  but  to  be 
understood  as  these  4  (different  Vin  Texts  111.343  which 
take  it  to  mean  the  8  requisites  :  see  below)  at  Vin 
11.267.  —  Later  we  find  another  set  of  mendicants' 
requisites  designated  as  "  attha  parikkhara,"  the  8 
requirements.  They  are  enum"'  in  verse  at  J  1.65  = 
DA  1.206,  viz.  ticivarai),  patto,  vasi,  suci,  (kaya-) 
bandhanag,  parissavana,  i.  e.  the  3  robes,  the  bowl,  a 
razor,  a  needle,  the  girdle,  a  water-strainer.  They  are 
expl""  in  detail  DA  1.206  sq.  Cp.  also  J  iv.342  (attha- 
parikkhara-dhara) ;  v.254  (kayabandhana-parissavana- 
suci-vasi-satthakani ;  the  last-named  article  being 
"  scissors  "  instead  of  a  razor)  ;  DhA  11. 61  ("dhara 
thera).  . —  (c)  In  other  comb'":  satta  nagara°  A  iv.  100 
sq.  (cp.  nagarupakarika  D  1.105);  satta  samadhi° 
D  II. 2  16;  M  III. 71  ;  A  iv.40  ;  solasa"  (adj.)  of  yafiiia : 
having  sixteen  accessories  D  1.134  (cp.  Dial.  1.174,  177), 
bahu°  having  a  full  equipment,  i.  e.  being  well-off 
Vin  111.138  ;  J  1. 126.  —  Note.  A  set  of  12  requisites  (1-8 
as  under  b  and  4  additional)  see  detailed  at  DA  1.207. 

Parikkharika  (-°)  (adj.)  [fr.  parikkhara]  one  who  has  the 
parikkharas  (of  the  mendicant).  Usually  the  8  p.  are 
understood,  but  occasionally  12  are  given  as  in  the 
detailed  enum"  of  p.  at  DA  1.204-207. 

Parikkhin^a  at  DA  1.45  is  to  be  read  parikinna  (q.  v.). 

Parikkhitta  [pp.  of  parikkhipatij  thrown  round,  over- 
spread, overlaid,  cnclo.scd,  fenced  in,  encircling,  sur- 
rounded by  (-°)  M  III. 46  ;  A  iv.)o6  (su°) ;  S  1.331  (read 
valligahana'') ;  Pv  IV.3"  (v.  1.  for  pariyanta  as  in  i.io") ; 
Vism  71  (of  gama) ;  ThA  7<j  ;  DhA  1.42  (pakara°) ;  PvA 
32  (=panyanta  i.io"),  283  (saai-pakara") ;  Sdhp  596. 


Parikkhipati 


46 


Paricarika 


Parikkhipati  [pari  +  ksiFl  to  throw  round,  encircle,  sur- 
round Vin  11. 154;  j  1.52  (sai.iir)).  63,  150,  166;  11.104; 
III. 371  ;  DhA  1.73.  —  pp.  parikkhitta  (q.  v.)  — Caus. 
II.  parikkhipapeti  J  1.148  (sanir))  ;  11.88  (sani-paka- 
rai]). 

Farikkhina  [pp.  "f  parikkhiyati]  exhausted,  wasted, 
decayed;  extinct  Vin  iv.258  ;  M  in. 80  ;  S  1.92  ;  11.24  : 
V.145,  461;  D  III. 97,  133  ('bhava-sagyojana)  ;  It  79 
(id.) ;  A  IV.418,  434  (asava) ;  Sn  175,  639,  640  ;  Dh  93  ; 
Pug  II,  14;  Miln  23  (°ayuka)  ;  PvA  112  ("tinodak'- 
ahara). 

Farikkhi];iatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  of  parikkhina]  the  fact  of  being 
exhausted,  exhaustion,  extinction,  destruction  DA 
1. 128  (jivitassa)  ;  PvA  63  (kammassa),  148  (id.). 

Parikkhiyati  [pari  +  khlyati  of  ksi^]  to  go  to  ruin,  to  be 
wasted  or  exhausted  Th  2,  347  (  ^parikkhayag  gacchati 
ThA  242).  —  pp.  parikkhina  (q.  v.). 

Parikkhepa  [fr.  pari4-ksip]  i.  closing  round,  surrounding, 
neighbourhood,  enclosure  Vin  iv.304  ;  J  1.338;  iv.266; 
SnA  29  (°daru  etc.).  —  2.  circumference  J  1.89;  v.37  ; 
Vism  205  ;  KhA  133  ;  SnA  194.  —  3.  "  closing  in  on," 
i.  e.  fight,  quarrel  It  11,  12. 

Pariklesa  [pari  +  klesa]  hardship,  misery,  calamity  S  1. 132 
=  Th  2,  191  ;  Th  2,  345  (=parikilesa  ThA  241). 

Parikha  (f.)  [fr.  pari+khan,  cp.  Epic  Sk.  parikha]  a  ditch, 
trench,  moat  Vin  11. 154  ;  D  i.ioj  (ukkinna-parikha  adj. 
with  trenches  dug  deep,  comb''  with  nkkhittapaligha  ; 
expH  by  khata-parikha  thapita-paligha  at  DA  1.274); 
M  1. 1 39  (sankinna"  adj.  with  trenches  filled,  Ep.  of  an 
Arahant,  comb''  with  nkkhittapaligha)  =  A  in. 84  sq.  = 
Nd^  284  C  (spelt  kkh)  ;  A  iv.106  (nagara°)  ;  J  1.240,  490  ; 
IV. 106  (ukkinn'  antaraparikha)  ;  vi.276,  432;  Cp  II. i' 
(spelt  kkh)  ;  Miln  i  (gambhira°) ;  SnA  519  (°tata)  ;  PvA 
201  ("pitthe),  261  (id.),  278  (id.,  v.  1.  °parikkhata-tire). 

Pariganhana  (nt.)  [fr.  pariganhati]  comprehension  J  11.7 
("pafiila  comprehensive  wisdom). 

Pariganhati  (&  Pariggaheti  Caus.)  [pari  +  grh]  i.  to  em- 
brace, seize,  take  possession  of,  hold,  take  up  M  i.So, 
137;  J  III. 189;  DA  1.45.  —  2.  to  catch,  grasp  DhA 
1.68.  —  3.  to  go  all  round  DhA  1.9 1  (sakala-jambudi- 
par)).  — Caus.  "ggaheti  (aor.  "esi,  ger.  ^etva,  inf.  °etur)) 
I.  to  embrace,  comprehend,  fig.  master  Vin  11.213; 
J  11.28;  III. 332  ;  SnA  549  (mantaya) ;  DhA  111.242; 
PvA  68  (hattesu),  93;  VvA  75.  —  2.  to  explore,  ex- 
amine, find  out,  search  J  1.162  ;  n.3  ;  in. 85,  268  ("gga- 
hetur)),  533;  V.93,  loi  ;  DhA  11.56. — Caus.  II.  pari- 
ganhapeti  J  1.290.  —  3.  to  comprise,  summarise  KhA 
166,   167. — pp.  pariggahita  (q.  v.). 

Parigalati  [pari -t- galati,  see  gajati]  to  sink  down,  slip  or 
glide  oft  J  IV. 229,  250  ;  v.68. 

Parigilati  [pari -f  gilati]  to  swallow  J  1.346. 

Pariguhati  [pari-l-guhati]  to  hide,  conceal  A  1149  ;  iv.io, 
31  ;  Pv  111.4^  (=paticchadeti  PvA  194). 

Pariguhana  (f.)  [fr-  patiguhati]  hiding,  concealment, 
deception  Pug  19,  23. 

Pariggaha  [fr.  pari-l-grh]  i.  wrapping  round,  enclosing 
Th  I,  419  (?  cp.  Brethren  217  n.  6). — 2.  taking  up, 
seizing  on,  acquiring,  acquisition,  also  in  bad  sense  of 
"grasping"  Sn  779  (=tanha  and  ditthi°  Nd^  57); 
Ps  1. 1 72;  11.182  (nekkhamma°  etc.);  Nd'  11  (itthi° 
acquiring  a  wife)  ;  J  vi.239  ;  Miln  244  (ahara°  absti- 
nence in  food),  313  (id.).  —  3.  belongings,  property, 
possessions  D  11.58  ;  111.289  =A  iv.4f  o  ;  M  1.137  (quoted 
at  Nd^  122);  S  1.93  ;  Sn  805  ;  J  iv.371  ;  vi.259  ;  PvA  76 
(°bhuta  belonging  to,  the  property  of);  VvA  213,  321. 
sa°  with  all  (its)  belongings  S  1.32.  —  d.  a  wife  ThA 


271  ;  PvA  161  (kata°  we  Idcd),  282  ;  Th.\  271.  saparig- 
gaha  >  apariggaha  married  >  unmarried  (in  general, 
with  ref.  to  the  man  as  well  as  the  woman)  D  1.247  ; 
J  IV.  190  ;  vi,348,  3G4.  —  5.  grace,  favour  DA  1.241 
(amisa°  material  grace). 

Pariggahita  [pp.  of  pariganhati]  taken,  seized,  taken  up, 
haunted,  occupied  Vin  111.51  (manu.ssanaij  p.  by  men); 
IV. 31,  278;  DhA  1. 13  (amanussa"  by  ghosts);  PvA  87, 
133  ;  5dhp  64.  —  f.  abstr,  'ta  being  possessed  (Vism  12  i 
(amanussa°). 

Pariggahaka  (adj.)  [fr.  pariggaha]  including,  occupying 
Nett  79  (  =  upathambhaka  C.  as  quoted  in  Index 
p.  276). 

Parigha  [Vedic  parigha,  of  which  the  usual  P.  representa- 
tive is  paligha  (q.  v.)]  a  cross-bar  ThA  211  (°danda). 

Parigharjsati  [pari-(-ghar)satii]  to  rub  (too)  hard,  scrub, 
scratch,  only  in  ppr.  aparighaijsanto  Vin  1.46  ;  11.208. 

Paricakkhitar  [n.  ag.  fr.  pari-f  caks,  cp.  akkhi  &  cakkhu] 
one  who  looks  round  or  enquires,  neg.  a,"  J  v.  77. 

Paricaya  [fr.  pari-l-ei]  familiarity,  acquaintance  J  vi.337; 
Vism  153  ;  PvA  74.  —  adj.  {-"}  acquainted  with,  versed 
in  (loc.)  J  11.249  (jata°),  VvA  24  (kata°)  ;  PvA  4  (id.), 
129  (id.). 

Paricarana  (nt.)  [fr.  pari -i- car]  i.  going  about,  mode  of 
life  DhA  1.382  (gihinar)  "tthanar),  v.  1.  for  vicarana").  — 
2.  attending  to,  looking  after,  worshipping  DhA  1.199 
(aggi-p°-tthana  fire-place).  —  3.  enjoyment,  pleasure  (in- 
driyanag)  PvA  16.     See  also  paricarana. 

Paricaranaka  [fr.  paricarana]  servant,  attendant  DA  1.269. 

Paricarati  [pari -l- carati]  to  move  about,  in  var.  senses, 
viz.  I.  to  go  about,  look  after  A  11194  (upatthahati-H  ) 
J  V.421  ;  PvA  175.  —  2.  to  worship  (only  in  connection 
aggin  p.  to  worship  the  fire)  D  i.ioi  ;  S  1.166  ;  Dh  107  ; 
J  1.494;  Sn  p.  79  ( =payirupasati  SnA  401). — 3.  to 
roam  about,  to  feast  one's  senses,  to  amuse  oneself, 
play,  sport  PvA  77  (indriyani  =  kilami  Pv  ii.i^^).  — We 
often  find  reading  pariharati  for  paricarati.  e.  g.  at 
Dh.\  11.232;  cp.  paricareti  for  °hareti  PvA  175;  pari- 
carana for  "harana  Pv.\  219.  —  pp.  paricinna  ;  Caus. 
paricareti  (q.  v.). 

Paricariya  (f.)  [fr.  paricarati]  going  about,  service,  minis- 
tration, worship  S  1.182  ;  A  1.132  ;  DhA  11.232  (aggi°). 
Occurs  also  as  paricariya  (q.  v.),  e.  g.  at  J  v. 154.  See 
also  paricarika. 

Paricara  fr.  [paricareti]  serving,  attendance;  (m.)  servant, 
attendant  Th  i,  632  (C.  on  this  stanza  for  paddhagu). 

Paricaraka  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  paricareti]  attending,  serving 
honouring;  (m.)  attendant,  worshipper,  follower  (cp. 
BSk.  paricaraka  attendant  Av^  1170  ;  n.167]  D  i.ioi  ; 
11.200;  Th  I,  475;  Sn  p.  218  (Nd'''  reads  °carika) ; 
J  1.84;  IV. 362  ;  Pv  IV. 8'  (not  "varaka) ;  DA  1.137,  269. 
See  also  paricarika. 

Paricarana  (f.)  [fr.  paricareti]  care,  attention,  loking  after; 
pleasure,  feasting,  satisfaction  Pv  11.  i^  (gloss  for  °cari- 
ka)  ;  PvA  219. 

Paricarika  (adj.-n.)  =paricaraka  (servant,  attendant) 
A  v. 263  (aggi°  fire-worshipper)  ;  Pv  11. b^"  (amacca° 
minister  &  attendant) ;  ThA  267  ;  SnA  597.  —  f.  "carika 
(1)  a  maid-servant,  handmaiden,  nurse,  (personal) 
attendant  M  1.253;  cp-  S  1.125;  J  1.204  (pada°),  291  ; 
11.395  ;  IV. 35  (veyyavacca-karika  p.),  79  ;  v. 420  ;  Pv 
11.12'  (  =  veyyavacca-karini  PvA  157);  PvA  46.  —  (2) 
care,  attention  ;  pleasure,  pastime  (so  here,  probably 
another  form  of  paricariya)  Pv  iv.i''  ( =indriyanar) 
pariharana  PvA  219;  gloss  °carana). 


Paricarita 


47 


Parjjinna 


Paricarita  [pp  of  paricareti]  served  by.  delighted  by, 
indulging  in  M  1.504. 

Paricaiin  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  paricareti]  serving,  attending,  f.  a 
maidservant  J  11. 395. 

Paricareti  [Cans,  of  paricarati]  i .  to  serve,  wait  on,  attend 
upon,  honour,  worship  [cp.  BSk.  paricarayati  Divy 
114  sq.,  421]  S  1. 124  (pade) ;  DhA  111.196  (id.);  J  1. 81 
("caritabba-tthana  place  of  worship);  iv.274;  v. 9. — 
Pass,  paricariyati,  ppr.  "iyamana  M  1.46,  504  ;  J  1.58. 
In  this  sense  it  may  also  be  taken  as  "  being  delighted 
or  entertained  by."  —  2.  to  amuse  oneself,  gratify  one's 
senses,  to  have  recreation,  find  pleasure  [cp.  BSk. 
paricarayati  Divy  i,  and  freq.  phrase  pancahi  kama- 
gunehi  samarpita  samangibhuta  p.  e.  g.  MVastu  1.32] 
Vin  11.290  ;  III. 72  (paficahi  kamagunehi  samappita  etc.)  : 
D  1.36  (id.).  104  (id.)  ;  iM  1.51  4  (id.)  ;  Th  i,  96  (saggesu)  ; 
Pv  1. 11'  (  =  yatha  sukkhag  carenti  indriyani  PvA  58)  ; 
iv.i^  (read  'carayanti  for  "varayanti,  cp.  PvA  228 
indriyani  p.).  —  pp.  paricarita  q.  v.  See  also  pariva- 
reti. 

Paricinna  [pari  +  cinna.  pp.  of  carati]  i.  surrounded, 
attended  J  v.90.  —  2.  worshipped  M  1.497;  S  iv.57 
(me  Sattha  p.),  cp.  Th  i,  178  (Sattha  ca  p.  me)  &  891 
(p.  maya  Sattha).  —  3.  practised,  performed  Miln  360. 

Paricita^  [pp.  oj  pari  +  ci,  cinoti,  P.  cinati]  gathered,  accu- 
mulated, collected,  increased,  augmented  M  111.97  ; 
S  I.I  16;  11.264;  IV.2CO  ;  A  11.67  SQ-'  '^5:  'il^S.  152; 
IV. 282,  3ro  ;  V.23  ;  Th  I,  647  ;  Ps  t.172  (expl'')  ;  PvA  67  ; 
Sdhp  409. 

Paricita''  [pp.  of  pari  +  ci,  ciketi,  P.  cinati;  but  perhaps 
identical  with  paricita*]  known,  scrutinized,  accus- 
tomed, acquainted  or  familiar  with,  constantly  prac- 
tised Vin  11.95  (vacasa  p.),  109  (aggi°  etc.  read  aggi- 
parijita)  ;  ThA  52;  Miln  140  (iddhipada  p.);  DaVs 
IV.  19.     — aparicita  unfamiliar  DhA  1.71. 

Paiicumbati  [pari-l-cumbati]  to  kiss  (all  round,  i.  e.  from 
all  sides),  to  cover  with  kisses  M  11. 120  ;  S  1.178,  193  ; 
A  IV. 438  ;  DhA  1.330. 

Paricca  (indecl.)  [ger.  of  pari+i,  cp.  Sk.  (Gr.)  paritya  & 
P.  pariyeti]  lit.  "  going  round,"  i.  e.  having  encircled, 
grasped,  understood  ;  grasping,  finding  out,  perceiving  ;  . 
freq.  in  phrase  cetasa  ceto  paricca  (pajanati)  grasping  1 
fully  with  one's  mind.  e.  g.  at  D  1.79  ;  M  1.445  ;  111.12  ;  ! 
S  II. 121,  233;  It  12;  Vbh  329;  Vism  409  (  =  paric-  I 
chinditva)..    See  pariyeti. 

Pariccajati  [pari-l-cajati  of  tyaj]  to  give  up,  abandon,  leave 
behind,  reject  S  1.44;  It  94  ;  J  11.335;  vi.259  (=chad- 
deti)  Miln  207;  DhA  iv.2i)4  ;  Pv.\  121,  132,  221  (read 
jivitag  pariccajati  for  parivajjati ;  cp.  BSk.  jivitar) 
parityaksyami  Av^  1.2 10)  ;  Sdhp  539.  —  pp.  pariccatta 
(q.  v.). 

Pariccajana  (nt.)  &  °na  (f.)  [fr.  pariccajati]  i.  giving  up 
rejection,  leaving  It  11,  12. — 2.  giving  out.  bestowing, 
giving  a  donation  PvA  124. 

Pariccajanaka  [fr.  prec]  one  who  gives  (up)  or  spends,  a 
giver,  donor  PvA  7. 

Pariccatta  [pp.  of  pariccajati ;  cp.  BSk.  parityakta  in 
meaning  "  given  to  the  poor "  Avi  1.3]  given  up, 
abandoned,  thrown  out,  left  behind  J  1.69,  174,  477; 
Miln  280  ;  PvA  178,  219  (  =  viradhita) ;  Sdhp  374. 

Pariccaga  [fr.  pariccajati]  i.  giving  up,  abandonment, 
sacrifice,  renunciation  A  1.92  (amisa^  &  dhamma^ 
material  &  spiritual);  Ps  11.98;  J  1.12  (jivita") ;  DhA 
III. 44 1  (paiica  mahapariccaga  the  five  great  sacrifices, 
i.  e.  the  giving  up  of  the  most  valuable  treasures  of  wife, 
of  children,  of  kingdom,  of  life  and  limb).  —  2.  expense   j 


DhA  11.231  (sahassa°  expenditure  of  a  thousand  coins). 
—  3.  giving  (to  the  poor),  liberality  DhsA  157;  SnA 
295  (maha°,  corresponding  to  mahadana) ;  PvA  7  sq.  ; 
27,   120  sq.,   124. 

Paricchada  [fr.  pari -i- chad]  a  cover,  covering  J  1.34 1,  466. 

Paricchanna  [pari-l-channa,  pp.  of  chad]  enveloped, 
covered,  wrapped  round  Vin  IV.  17. 

Paricchata  [pari-l-chata]  very  much  seared,  scorched  (?) 
Sdhp  102  (°odara-ttaca). 

Paricchadana  (f.)  [fr.  pari -1- chad]  covering,  hiding,  con- 
cealing Pug  19 -23=  Vbh  358. 

Paricchindati  [pari  +  chindati]  i.  to  mark  out  VvA  291 
(vasana-tthanai)).  —  2.  to  determine,  to  fix  accur- 
ately, to  decide  J  1.170  (padag  the  track),  194  (nivasa- 
vetanar)) ;  ui.371  ;  iv.77 ;  Miln  272;  Vism  184,  409; 
SnA  434  (paiiiiaya  p.).  —  3.  to  limit,  restrict,  define 
Miln  131  ;  DA  1.132.  — pp.  paricchinna  (q.  v.). 

Paricchindana  (nt.)  [fr.  paricchindati]  "  cutting  up," 
definition,  analysis  VvA  1 14. 

Paricchindanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  pari -h  chind]  marking  out, 
defining,  analysing,  DhsA  157  (nana). 

Paricchinna  [pp.  of  paricchindati]  i.  restricted,  limited, 
small  DhA  1.58;  PvA  136  ("ppamana). — 2.  divided, 
measured  Vism  184;  PvA  185  (  =  mita). 

Pariccheda  [fr.  pari -t- chid:  late  Sk.  (philos.)  in  same 
meaning]  i.  exact  determination,  circumscription, 
range,  definition,  connotation,  measure  J  in. 371  ;  Vism 
184  (as  one  of  the  nimittas  of  the  body),  236  (referring 
to  the  5  nimittas  of  the  life-principle);  SnA  160,  229, 
23'.  376.  408,  503  ;  KhA  182  (ganana") ;  VvA  194  (id.) ; 
DhsA  3;  Dh.\  11.73  (avadhi")  ;  PvA  254  (kala°),  255 
(ayuno  p.);  VbhA  417  (citta°,  for  citta-paricce  nana 
Vbh  33")  — 2.  limit,  boundary  Miln  131,  405;  J 
III. 504  (°nadi-tira).  —  3.  limitation,  restriction  DhA 
11.88,  98  ;  PvA  20  (°r)  karoti  to  restrict).  —  4.  division 
(of  time),  in  ratti"  &  diva",  night-  &  day-division  Vism 
416.  —  5.   (town)-planning.   designing  VbhA   331. 

Paricchedaka  (adj.).  [fr.  pariccheda]  determining,  fixing 
\'bli.\  346  (utthana-vela  °a  sanna). 

Parijana  [pari-l-jana]  "the  people  round,"  i.  e.  atten- 
dants, servants,  retinue,  suite  Vin  1.15;  J  1.72.  90; 
Dh.\  III.  188  ;  VvA  63  ;  PvA  58,  62.  — saparijana  with 
one's  servants  Cp  11. 8^  (T.  saparijjana  metri  causa). 

Parijapati  [pari-l- japati,  cp.  BSk.  parijapta  enchanted 
Divy  397]  to  mutter  (spells),  to  practise  divination 
j  111.53"  :  Miln  21.0  (vijjar)). 

Parijapana  (nt.)  [fr.  parijapati]  mumbling,  uttering  spells 
Miln  356  (mantag). 

Parijanana  (f)  Tpari-I- janana  =  janana]  cognition,  recog- 
nition, knowledge  Nett  20  (as  paraphra.se  of  parinna). 

Parijanati  [pari-f- janati]  to  know  accurately  or  for 
cert.iin,  to  comprehend,  to  recognise,  find  out  M  1.293  ; 
S  I. II,  24;  11.45,  99,  111.26,  40.  159;  IV. 5"  ;  V.52,  422; 
A  111.4CO  sq.  ;  Sn  202.  254,  943;  Nd'  426;  J  iv.174; 
Th  I,  226  ;  Miln  69  ;  DhA  iv.233  "janitva).  —  ppr.  pari- 
janar)  S  111.27;  'v.Sg ;  It  3  sq.  — pp.  pariiti^ata  (q.  v.). 
ger.  pariiifiaya  see  under  parinfia'. 

Parijiwa  [pp.  of  pari -1- jar,  i.  e.  decayed;  Kern  Toev. 
s.  V.  proposes  reading  °  jina  of  ji,  i.  e.  wasted,  see  pari- 
jiyati]  worn  out,  gone  down,  decayed,  reduced  J  i.iri 
(setttii-ku'aO  P) :  ^' W-  i"^'  (bhoga°) ;  vi.364  ;  Dh  148; 
DhA  11.272  (°kula). 


Parijita 


48 


Paritassati 


Parijita  [pp-  of  pari  + ji,  jayati ;  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  proposes 
reading  parijita,  Sk.  form  of  P.  parijina.  pp.  of  pari  + 
jiyati,  but  hardly  necessary,  see  also  Vin.  Texts  111.75] 
overpowered,  injured,  damaged  \'in  ii.iug  (so  read 
for  paricita). 

Paiijiyati  [pari  +  jiyati]  to  become  worn  out.  to  decay, 
fade,  S  1. 186  ;  J  iv.i  11.  Speit  "jijryati  at  Th  ',  1215.  • — 
pp.  parijina  (see  parijiijna). 

Parijeguccha  (f.)  [pari  +  jeguccha]  intense  dislike  of, 
disgust  with  (-°)  D  1.25,  cp.  DA  1.115. 

Parijiana  is  doubtful  reading  at  A  111.38  (v.  1.  parivajjana) 
=  iv.266  (T.  reads  parijjana,  cp.  parijana ;  vv.  U. 
parivajjana  &  parijana);  meaning  ?. 

Parinia(-°)[theadj.formof  parinna,cp.  abhinna]  knowing, 
recognising,  understanding  It  44  (bhiita''  so,  or  should 
we  read  bhutapariiiiiaya  ?) ;  also  in  cpd.  pariiiiiacarin 
(to  be  exp ''  as  shortened  gr.  parinfia  ?)  Sn  537  (  =  paii- 
iiaya  paricchinditva  caranto  living  in  full  knowledge, 
i.  e.  rightly  determining) ;  also  (abstr.)  pariiitiattha;]  at 
It  29  (abhiiiiiatthar)  + ),  cp.  S  iv.253. 

Pariflna'  (f)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  parijiiana;  the  form  parijiia 
given  by  BR  only  with  the  one  ref.  Vyutp.  160  ;  fr. 
pari  +  jiia]  accurate  or  exact  knowledge,  comprehension, 
full  understanding  M  1.66,  84  ;  S  111.26  (yo  ragakkhayo 
dosa"  moha°  ayarj  vuccati  p.),  159  sq.,  191  ;  iv.16,  51, 
138,  206.  253  sq.  ;  V.21,  55  sq.,  145,  236,  251,  292  ;  A 
1.277  (kamanar)  rupanai)  vedananai)),  299  ;  v. 64  ; 
Pug  37;  Nett  19,  20,  31;  KhA  87;  SnA  251.  —  In 
exegetical  literature  three  pariiiQas  are  distinguished, 
viz.  iiata",  tirana°  pahana",  which  are  differently  inter- 
preted &  applied  according  to  the  various  contexts. 
See  e.  g.  the  detailed  interpretation  at  Nd'  52  sq. ; 
Nd^  413  ;  J  VI. 259  (where  riana°  for  fiata")  ;  DhA  11. 172 
(in  ref.  to  food) ;  mentioned  at  SnA  517.  —  adj.  parifina. 
—  The  form  pariiifiaya  is  an  apparent  instr.,  but  in 
reality  (in  form  &  meaning  1  the  ger.  of  parijanati  (like 
abhiiiiiaya  >  abhijanitva)  f  .r  the  usual  parijanitva. 
It  is  freq.  found  in  poetry  &  in  formulas  (like  yatha- 
bhutar)  p.);  its  meaning  is  "knowing  well  in  right 
knowledge"  :  S  v.182  ;  Sn  455,  737,  778  (=parijanitva 
Nd'  51  sq.),  1082  (corresp.  with  pahaya,  cp.  similar 
phrase  pahaya  parijanitva  DhA  iv.232) ;  It  62  ;  J  vi.259. 

Parinna^  (indecl.)  [ger.  of  parijanati  for  *parijiiaya,  cp. 
same  short  forms  of  ada  &  abhiiiiia]  having  full  know- 
ledge or  understanding  of  Sn  779  (  =  parijanitva  Nd' 
56  &  SnA  518) ;  It  4  (perhaps  to  be  read  parifinaya  for 
parifiiia  so). 

Parinnata  [pp.  of  parijanati]  well  understood,  thoroughly 
known  Th  2,  106  ;  M  i.i  sq.  ;  S  11.99  ;  v.182  ;  PvA  i,  287. 
With  ref.  to  food  (°bhojana  &  °ahara)  it  means  food 
understood  according  to  the  three  pariniias  (q.  v.)  ; 
Dh  92  ("bhojano  adj.  one  who  lives  on  recognised  food 
or  takes  the  right  view  of  the  food  he  eats,  cp.  DhA 
11.172);  Miln  352  ("aharo) ;  contrasted  with  bhavita : 
consciousness  is  to  be  well  studied,  insight  is  to  be 
made  to  grow  M  1.293. 

Parinfiatatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  parinnata]  the  fact  of  having 
full  or  e.xact  knowledge  S  v.182. 

Parinnatavin  (adj.)  [fr.  pariflnata]  one  who  has  correct 
knowledge  S  ni.159  sq.,  igi  (puggala). 

Parinneyya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  parijanati]  knowable,  perceivable, 
to  be  known  (accurately)  M  1.4  ;  S  III. 26  ;  iv.29  ;  DhA 
IV. 233  (cp.  Nd"  under  abhiniieyya). 

Pari^abati  [pari-t-dadati]  to  burn:  Pass,  paridayhati  to  be 
burnt  or  scorched  M  1.422;  S  i.i88=Th  i,  1224;  A 
1.137  ;  111.95,  98  ;  Sn  63  ;  Ps  1.128  (1)  ;  Pv  1.6*  (=parito 
jhayati  PvA  33) ;  Miln  303  ;  PvA  60.     Cp.  pari|aha. 


PariQata  [pp.  of  parinamati]  i.  bent  down,  crooked  VvA 
222  ("datha  fangs,  or  does  it  mean  "long"  ?).  —  2. 
changed  S  in. 40.  —  3.  ripened,  matured,  hatched,  ripe 
J  III.  1 74,  286,  431,  VvA  288;  DhA  1.47  (gabbha). 

Parinamati  [pari-l-namati]  i.  to  change  (trs.  &  intrs.), 
lit.  to  bend  round,  to  turn  (round),  to  be  transformed 
into  (ace.)  S  111.3  (reading  parinamati  once,  at  other 
passages  vi°,  cp.  p.  40)  ;  Miln  136  (bhojanai)  visamai)  p. 
food  changes,  i.  e.  turns  bad),  277  (id.) ;  VvA  13  ;  PvA 
144  (for  parivattati  Pv  11. 10'),  194  (id.  in. 4*).  —  2.  to 
change  into  a  diff.  state,  to  ripen,  mature  (often  said 
of  the  fcetus)  Miln  93,  358.  —  pp.  parinata  (q.  v.).  — 
Caus.  parinameti  (q.  v.). 

Parinama  [fr.  pari -1- nam,  cp.  class  Sk.  parinama  in  all 
meanings]  "  bending  round,"  i.  e.  i.  change,  alteration, 
in  utu°  (sudden)  change  of  season,  unseasonable 
weather,  with  ref.  to  illnesses  caused  by  such  (°ja 
abadha)  =  illness  arising  from  the  change  of  season 
A  11.87;  i"'3i  ;  V.I  10;  Nd^  304';  Miln  112,  135  sq., 
304;  Vism  31.  —  2.  alteration  of  food,  digestion,  in 
phrase  samma-parinamai)  gacchati  M  1.188;  S  1.168; 
A  in.30  ;  cp.  MVastu  1.2  11.  —  3.  ripening  Miln  93. — 
4.  course,  development,  fulfilment,  in  special  sense : 
dispensation,  destiny  J  v.  171  ;  Pv  iv.3^  ;  PvA  252,  254. 

—  Cp.  vi°. 

Parinamana  (nt.)  [fr.  parinamati]  diverting  to  somebody's 
use  Vin  iv.157. 

Pari^amita  [pp.  of  parinameti]  i.  bent  down  J  vi^269  (of 
trees,  overladen  with  fruit,  C.  expl'  as  "  entangled  "). 

—  2.  issued,  apportioned,  destined  J  v.171;  PvA  254. 

Parinamitar  [n.  ag.  of  parinameti]  one  who  destines  or 
makes  develop,  fate,  destiny  J  vi.189. 


'  Parinamin   (adj.)   [fr.   parinamal   ending  in,   resulting  in 
(-■')  M  i.ii,  526;  ni.88. 

Parinameti  [Caus.  of  parinamati]  to  bend  to,  to  change 
into,  to  turn  to  use  for  somebody,  to  procure  for,  obtain, 
appropriate  D  1.92  ;  Vin  in. 259  (puttassa  rajjar)  p.  for 
his  son);  iv.156;  PvA  281. — ppr.  °namayamana 
J  v. 424.     See  also  avajjeti.  —  pp.  parinamita  (q.  v.). 

PariQayaka  [fr.  pari-t-ni,  cp.  parineti]  a  leader,  guide, 
adviser ;  one  of  the  7  treasures  (ratanani)  of  a  great 
king  or  Cakkavattin  (according  to  Bdhgh  on  D  11. 177  ; 
the  eldest  son  ;  in  the  Lai.  Vist.  a  general  cp.  Divy  211, 
217;  Senart,  Lig.  de  Buddha  p.  42),  i.  e.  a  wonderful 
Adviser  D  1.89  ;  11.17,  177 ;  M  1.220  ;  n.175  ;  A  in. 151  ; 
Sn  p.  106  (cp.  SnA  450  =DA  1.250);  J  1.155;  iv.93  ; 
Miln  38,  314.  —  f.  parinayika.  Ep.  of  wisdom,  synony- 
mous with  panfla,  i.  e.  insight,  cleverness  Dhs  1057  ; 
Pug  25  ;  Vism  3  ;  DhsA  148. 

Parinaha  [fr.  pari-l-nahj  compass,  circumference,  breadth, 
extent,  girth  S  11.206  (of  the  moon)  =A  V.19  ;  J  in.  192, 
-77.  370;  V.299;  Pug  53:  Miln  282,  311;  SnA  382 
(aroha-l- ). 

Parineti  [pari -1- neti]  to  lead  round  or  about  S  11.128. 

Paritajjita  [pari-l-tajjita]  scared  (exceedingly),  frightened 
Sdhp  147. 

Paritatta  [pp.  of  paritappati]  tormented,  worried,  vexed, 
grieved  Miln  313. 

Paritappati  [Pass,  of  pari -f  tap]  to  be  vexed,  to  grieve, 
worrj',  sorrow  Th  2,  313  (=santappati  ThA  233); 
Miln  3ri3.  — pp.  paritatta  (q.  v.). 

Paritasita  (nt.)  [pari -(- tasita'  or  tasita'']  worry,  excite- 
ment D  1.40  (v.  I.  °tassita,  cp.  Dial  1.53). 

Paritassati  ("tasati)  [pari-l- tasati',  in  form  clearly  =  Sk. 
paritj-syati,  but  freq.  confused  with  tasati",  cp.  tasa. 


Paritassana 


49 


Paridevati 


Sn  924  is  the  only  example  of  paritasati  representing 
tasati^  to  be  excited,  to  be  tormented,  to  show  a 
longing  after,  to  be  worried  D  11.68;  M  1.36,  67,  151  ; 
S  11.82,  194  ;  ■'■  43.  55  ;  'V.23,  65.  168  ;  A  11.27  :  '"'33 
sq.  ;  Sn  62  I  (  =  tanhaya  na  bhayati  SnA  467,  thus  com- 
bining tasati'  &  tasati^),  924  (Pot.  parittase.  inter- 
preted by  Nd'  373  as  taseyya,  uttaseyya,  bhayeyya. 
thus  taken  as  tasati^):  Miln  253,  4ro  ;  Dh  397  ( =  tan- 
haya  na  bhayati  DhA  iv.159);  Sdhp  470.  —  ppr. 
aparitassar)  D  11.68;  M  1.67;  S  11.82;  111.55  ;  It  94. — 
pp.  paritasita  (q.  v.). 

Paritassana  (f.)  [fr.  paritassati,  q.  v.  for  meaning]  trem- 
bling, fear ;  nervousness,  worry ;  excitement,  longing 
D  1. 1  7  (  =  ubbijjana  phandana  etc.  DA  1. 1 1 1 ) ;  M  1. 1 36  ; 
111.227;   S   in. 15   sq..    133;    Miln   253,    4<(i. — neg.   a° 

5  HI. 15  ;  M  1. 136. 

Paritassin  (adj.)  [fr.  paritassati]  trembling,  excited, 
worrying,  only  neg.  a°  A  IV.108,   lii,  230  sq. 

Paritapa-foU.  Miln  313  (atapa-l-). 

Paritapana  (nt.)  [pari-t-tapana,  of  tap]  tormenting,  torture, 
affliction,  mortification  M  1.78,  341-344;  A  1.151,  296; 
11.205  sq.  (atta"  self-mortification,  opp.  para") ;  Pug  55. 
56,  61  ;  PvA  18  (atta°),  30  (id.).  Often  comb''  with 
atapana  (q.  v.). 

Paritapeti  [pari -1- tapeti]  to  bum,  scorch,  molest,  trouble, 
torture,  torment  M  1.341  (atapeti-l- ),  506;  S  iv.337 ; 
A  III. 54,  380  :  J  V.420  (ma  paritapi). 

Paritaleti  [pari-t-tuleti]  to  weigh,  consider,  estimate,  think 
Vism  522.  —  VbhA  130. 

Panto  (adv.)  [fr.  pan,  cp.  Sk.  paritahj  round  about, 
around,  on  every  side,  everywhere,  wholly  Vin  11.194  ■ 
SnA  393  ;  VvA  316  ;  PvA  33. 

Paritoseti  [pari-l-toseti]  to  please,  appease,  satisfy,  make 
happy  J  1.262;  III. 386  ;  v.216;  PvA  213  (v.  1.  SS-I- 
asincati). 

Paritta'  (adj.)  [BSk.  paritta,  pari -I- pp.  of  da  in  short  form 
•tta,  like  atta  for  adatta.  The  development  of  mean- 
ing however  causes  difficulties,  paridatta  meaning 
given  up.  transmitted,  cp.  Divy  388,  whereas  P.  paritta  i 
means  trifling.  The  BSk.  form  paritta  (e.  g.  Divy  2C4, 
498,  504  ;  AvS  1.329  ;  II. 1 37)  may  be  a  re-translation  of  ] 
P.  paritta.  which  may  correspond  to  Sk,  prarikta,  pp.  | 
of  pra-f  ric,  meaning  "  that  which  is  exceeded,"  i.  e.  left 
(over  or  behind)]  small,  little,  inferior,  insignificant, 
limited,  of  no  account,  trifling  Vin  1.270  ;  D  1.45  ; 
M  III.  148  (°abha  of  limited  splendour,  opp.  appaman'- 
abha) ;  S  11.98;  iv.160  (opp.  adhimatta)  ;  A  iv.241  ; 
v. 63  ;  It  71  ;  Sn  61,  390  (°paiiiia  of  inferior  wisdom,  cp. 
Nd*  415).  1097  (id.) ;  J  1.221  ;  Dhs  181.  584,  ioi8,  1034 
(cp.  Dhs  trsl.  265,  269)  ;  DA  1.119  ;  KhA  133  ("dipa  the 
2,000  inferior  islands).  176  (5C0  do);  PvA  198:  Sdhp 
251,  261.  Synonyms:  appaka,  omaka,  lamaka,  dukkha 
Nd'  414;  catukka  Nd^  415  (opp.  maha) ;  appaka  PvA 
48,  60  ;  appamattaka  PvA  262  ;  ittara  PvA  60  ;  oma 
SnA  347  ;  oraka  SnA  489  ;  lamaka  SnA  347. 

Paritta'  (nt.)  &  Paritta  (f)  [fr.  pari-t-tra,  cp.  tana,  tayati 

6  also  parittana]  protection,  safeguard  ;  (protective) 
charm,  palliative,  amulet  Vin  11.  no  (atta°  f.  personal 
protection)  iv.305  (gutf  atthaya  "g  pariyapunati) ;  A 
11.73  (rakkha -t- paritta)  ;  J  1.200  (manto -(- parittar) -I- 
vaddhir)),  396  (paccekabuddhehi  "r)  karapeti  makes 
them  find  a  safeguard  through  the  P.)  ;  iv.31  (osadhai) 
va  °r)  va) ;  Miln  150  (f.  &  nt.).  — Var.  parittas  in  the 
way  of  Suttantas  are  mentioned  at  Vism  4 1 4  (Khandha°  ; 
Dhajagga"  :  S  1.218  sq.  ;  Atanatiya°  :  D  in. 195  sq.  ; 
Mora°  :  J  1133).     Cf.  Dialogues  111.185. 

-valika  sand  worn  on  the  head  as  an  amulet  J  1.396. 
399.  -suttaka  a  thread  worn  round  the  head  as  a 
charm  J  1.396,  399. 


Parittaka  rparitta' -f  ka]  small,  insignificant,  little  Nd* 
306  (for  appaka  etc.  as  at  Nd-  414) ;  Pv  i.io"  ;  11.9" ; 
Miln  121  (a°),  253;  DA  i.i  70  (for  appa)  ;  PvA  51; 
Sdhp  42.  —  f.  parittika  Th  i.  377. 

Parittaka  (nt.)  [pari-t-tana.  Cp.  Epic  Sk.  paritrana]  pro- 
tection, shelter,  refuge,  safeguard,  safety  D  1.9  (sara° 
from  an  arrow,  i.  e.  a  shield);  111.189;  J  vi.455  ;  PvA 
284  ;  Sdhp  396. 

-kitika  a  protecting  arrangement  Vin  11. 152,  cp.  Vin. 
Texts  III.  174. 

Parittayaka  (adj.)  [fr.  pari -1- tayati]  safeguarding  against, 
sheltering  against,  keeping  away  from  Vism  376 
(angara-vassar)  p.  thero). 

Parittasin  (adj.)  [pari-f  tasiri,  fr.  tasa  of  tasati^]  being  in 
dread  of  (-°)  S  1.20 1. 

Parida^^a  (adj.)  [pari-l-danda]  "  with  a  stick  around."  i.  e. 
surrounded  by  a  stick ;  only  in  one  phrase  viz.  "  sapa- 
ridanda  itthi  "  a  woman  protected  by  a  stick,  or  liable 
to  punishment  (?),  in  stock  phrase  enumerating  10 
kinds  of  women  M  1.386  =  111.46  =  \in  111.139  ^A  v.264  = 
VvA  73. 

Faridamana  (nt.)  [pari-l-damana]  controlling,  taming 
Vism  375. 

Paridameti  [pari-l-dameti]  to  control,  tame,  keep  under 
Vism  376. 

Paridahati  [pari-l-dahati.  of  dha]  to  put  round,  put  on, 
clothe  Dh  9  (fut.  °dahessati> ;  J  11. 197;  v. 434  (ger. 
"dahitva)  ;  VI.5C0  ;  Pv  11. i'*;  PvA  76  (vatthani),  77, 
127  ("dahissati  for  paridhassati  Pv  11.9",  which  read 
for  T.  parivassati).  ger  also  paridayha  J  v. 400  (  =  niva- 
setva  cp  parupitva  ca  C).  —  pp.  paridahita  (q.  v.). — • 
Cans.  II.  paridahapeti  to  cause  to  be  clothed  PvA  49 
( =acchadeti). 

Paridahita  [pp-  of  paridahati]  put  round,  put  on  (of 
clothing)  PvA  43. 

Paridipaka  (adj  )  [fr.  paridipeti,  cp,  dipaka']  illuminating, 
explaining,  e.xplanatory  SnA  41). 

Paridipana  (nt.)  [pari-f  dipana]  illuminating,  elucidating, 
explanation  Miln  31S;  KhA  ill  ;  SnA  394  sq. 

Paridipana  (f)  [fr.  pariuipeti,  cp.  paridipana]  explanation, 
illustration  Miln   131. 

Paridipita  [pp  of  paridipeti]  i.  in  flames,  set  ablaze  Th  2, 
2CO  (  =  punappunai)  adipitataya  p.  ThA  170), — 2.  ex- 
plained, made  clear,  illuminated  Vism  58;  K^  uA  8; 
Sdhp  305. 

Paridipeti  [pari-f- dipeti]  to  make  bright,  to  illustrate,  to 
explain  Miln  131  ;  Sdhp  491  . —  pp.  paridipita  (q.  v.). 

ParidOseti  [pari-f  duseti]  to  spoil  altogether,  to  ruin, 
corrupt,  defile  Sdhp  409. 

Parideva  [pari  -t-  deva  of  div,  devati ;  only  in  one  passage 
of  Epic  Sk.  (Mbhar.  vii.3014);  otherwise  paridevana 
nt.]  lamentation,  wailing  M  1.2C0  ;  S  11.  i  ;  111.3  sq  ; 
A  1. 144;  11195;  Sn  328,  592.  811,  923,  969;  J  1.146; 
VI,  188,  498;  Nd'  128,  134,  370,  492;  Ps  Ml  sq.,  38, 
59.  65  ;  Vbh  100,  137  ;  Nett  29.  It  is  exegetically  para- 
phrased at  D  11.306  =  Nd'  416  (under  pariddava)  with 
synonyms  adeva  p.  adevana  paridevana  adevitattai) 
paridevitattai)  ;  often  comlv"  with  soka  grief,  e.  g.  at 
D  1.36  ;  Sn  862  ;  It  89  ;  PvA  39,  61.  —  Bdhgh  at  DA 
1.12 1  expr'^itas  "  sokag  nissita-lalappana-lakkhano  p." 

Paridevati  [pari-f  devati,  div]  to  wail,  lament  D  11. 158  (ma 
socittha  ma  paridevittha) ;  Sn  582,  774  =  Nd'  38  (as 
°devayati).  166;  J  vi.188,  498  ;  PvA  18  (socati-f )  ;  ger. 

V— 4 


Paridevana 


50 


Parinibbayin 


"devamana  S  1.199,  208  ;  J  v.  106  ;  PvA  38,  &  °devaya- 
mana  Sn  583.  —  grd.  "devaniya  Nd'  492  ;  SnA  573,  & 
"devaneyya  Sn  970  (=adevaneyya  Nd'  493)- — PP- 
paridevita  (q.  v.). 

Paridevana  (£.)=parideva,  Sn  585;  Nd'  416  (see  under 


parideva)   Pv 
PvA  41. 


.4'  ( =  vaca-vippalapa  PvA   18);   1.12'; 


Paridevita  (nt.)  [pp.  of  paridevati]  lamentation,  wailing 
Sn  590  ;  Pv  1. 1 2'  (  =rudit?  .  i  v .  •  "^3) ;  Miln  148  (kandita- 
p.°-lalappita-mukha). 


vita]  lamentation  etc.  ; 
expl"  of   parideva  at 


Paridevitatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  pan. 
only  exegetical  construction   ir 
D  11.306  =Nd2  416. 

Pariddava  [according  to  Trenckner  M  1.532  (on  M  1.56, 
where  SS  read  p.,  whereas  BB  have  parideva)  the 
metrical  substitute  for  parideva;  therefore  not  =  Sk. 
paridrava,  which  is  only  a  late  re-translation  of  the  P. 
word]  =  parideva  M  1.56  (soka°) ;  A  1.221  ;  Th  2,  345 
(soka°) ;  Sn  1052,  cp.  Nd*  416  (see  parideva). 

Paridhagsaka  (adj.)  [fr.  paridhagsati]  destructive,  ruinous 
PvA  15  ("vacano  speaking  destructively,  scandal- 
monger). 

ParidhaQSati  [pari-t-dhagsati]  to  be  deprived,  to  lose,  to 
come  to  ruin  It  90  ;  Miln  249.  265.  — Caus.  paridhagseti 
in  same  meaning  at  Nd'  5.  It  is  almost  synonymous 
with  paripatati  &  parihayati. 

Paridhavati  [pari-l-dhavati]  to  run  about  J  1.127  (adha- 
vati+),  134  (id.),  158  (id.);  11.68  (id.)=ThA  54;  v.106. 

Paridhota  [pp.  of  paridhovati]  washed,  rinsed,  cleansed, 
purified  D  1.124. 

Paridhovati  [pari-l-dhovati]  to  wash  (all  round),  cleanse, 
clean  Vin  1.302.  —  pp.  paridhota. 

Parinitthana  (nt.)  [pari-l-nitthana]  i.  end  PvA  287. — 
2.  accomplishment  J  v. 400. 

PariniUbapeti  [pari-l-  nitthapeti]  to  bring  to  an  end,  attain, 
accomplish  DhsA  363. 

Parinitthita  (adj.)  [pari-t-nitthita]  accomplished  M  111.53; 
Th  2,  283  ;  DhA  11.78. 

Parininna  (adj.)  [pari -t- ninna]  deeply  hollowed,  sunken 
Sdhp  103. 

Parinipphanna  (adj.)  [pari-i-nipphanna]  predetermined 
Kvu  459  (v.  1.  °nibbana),  626  (a°) ;  cp.  Kvu  trsl.  261' 
368I. 

Parinibbana  (nt.)  [pari -1- nibbana]  "complete  Nibbana  " 
in  two  meanings:  i.  complete  extinction  of  khandha- 
life ;  i.  e.  all  possibility  of  such  life  &  its  rebirth,  final 
release  from  (the  misery  of)  rebirth  and  transmigration, 
death  (after  the  last  life-span  of  an  Arahant).  This  is 
the  so-called  "  an-upadi-sesa  Parinibbana,"  or  "  ex- 
tinction with  no  rebirth-substratum  left."  —  2.  release 
from  cravings  &  attachment  to  life,  emancipation  (in 
this  life)  with  the  assurance  of  final  death  ;  freedom  of 
spirit,  calm,  perfect  well-being  or  peace  of  soul.  This  is 
the  so-called  "  sa-upadisesa-P.,"  or  "  extinction  (of 
passion)  with  some  substratum  left."  —  The  two  kinds 
are  distinguished  by  Bdhgh  at  DhA  11. 163  as  follows: 
"  arahatta-pattito  patthaya  kilesa-vattassa  khepitatta 
sa-upadi- sesena,  carima-citta- nirodhena  khandha- 
vattassa  khepitatta  an-upadi-sesena  ca  ti  dvihi  pi 
parinibbanehi  parinibbuta,  an-upadano  viya  padipo 
apannattika-bhavar)  gata."  —  i.  D  11.72  sq.  (the 
fartious  Maha-parinibbana-suttanta  or  "  Book  of  the 
Great  Decease");  M  in. 127,  128;  A  11.79  ("samaye) ; 
111.409  (°dhamma,  contrasted  with  apayika  nerayika. 


cp.  DhA  IV.42) ;  Mhvs  7,  i  ("maiicamhi  nipanna)  ;  VvA 
158  ;  PvA  244.  —  2.  D  111.55  ;  A  v. 64  ;  Sn  514  (°gata-l- 
vitinna-kankho)  ;  Vv  53^  (°gata-(-sitibhuta).  This 
state  of  final  emancipation  (during  life)  has  also  received 
the  determination  of  anupada-parinibbana,  i.  e.  eman- 
cipation without  ground,  for  further  clinging  (lit. 
without  fuel),  which  corresponds  to  Bdhgh's  term"  kile- 
savattassa  khepitatta  sa-upadi-sesa  p."  (see  above)  ; 
thus  at  M  1.148  ;  S  iv.48  ;  v. 29  ;  A  1.44  ;  v. 65  (nicchato 
nibbuto  sitibhuto  etc).;  A  v.233=253  =  Dh  89  (-(-khi- 
nasava). 

Parinibbanika  (adj.)  [fr.  parinibbana]  one  who  is  destined 
to  or  that  which  leads  to  complete  extinction  D  111.264  ; 
265  (opasamika-h ). 

Parinibbapana  (nt.)  [pari -l- nibbapana]  refreshing,  cooling, 
quenching;  controlling,  subduing,  training  Ps  1.174 
(atta-damatha,  atta-samatha,  atta-p.). 

Parinibbapetar  [n.  ag.  fr.  parinibbapeti]  one  who  pacifies, 
a  calmer,  trainer  M  11. 102  (dametar  sametar  p.). 

Parinibbapeti  [pari-i-nibbapeti]  to  bring  to  complete 
coolness,  or  training  (see  next),  emancipation  or  cessa- 
tion of  the  life-impulse,  to  make  calm,  lead  to  Nibbana, 
to  exercise  self-control,  to  extinguish  fever  of  craving, 
or  fire  of  raga,  dosa.  moha.  Always  coupled  with  the 
qu&si  synonyms  sameti  &  dameti  (cp.  damatha  samatha 
parinibbapana)  D  111.61  =A  111.46  (attanar)  dameti,  sa- 
meti, p.) ;  M  1.45  (fut.  "bbapessati) ;  A  n.68  (attanar) 
d.  s.  p.).  — pp.  parinibbuta  (see  p.  No.  3)  &  parinibba- 
pita  (only  in  n.  ag.  "apetar,  q.  v.). 

Parinibbayati  (&  °nibbati)  [pari -l- nibb"  cp.  BSk.  pari- 
nirvati  Divy  150  (Buddha  Bhagavantah  parinirvanti) 
&  ger.  parinirvatavya  ibid.  402]  i.  to  be  completed,  per 
fected,  in  any  work  or  art,  e.  g.  of  a  trained  horse, 
M  1.446.  Cp.  TtXetoio.  —  2.  to  die  without  being  reborn, 
to  reach  complete  extinction  of  existence  Vin  II.  194 
(Tathagatha  "ayanti) ;  M  111.128  (aor  °nibbayi) ;  S 
V.152  (°nibbayeyyar|),  261  ("nibbayissami) ;  A  11.120 
fanupadisesaya  nibbana-dhatuya  p.);  iv.202  (id.),  313 
(id.) ;  Miln  175  (id.) ;  J  1.28  (id.).  55  (id.) ;  VvA  158  (fut. 
°nibbayissami) ;  PvA  21,  283  (of  a  Paccekabuddha).  — 
2.  to  become  emancipated  from  all  desire  of  life  D 
11.68  (cp.  Dial.  11.65  &  Brethren  417);  S  iv.102  (ditth' 
eva  dhamme),  ibid,  (sa-upadano  devanag  indo  na 
parinibbayati),  168;  A  ni.41  =Vin  11. 148,  164  (pari- 
nibbati  anasavo)  ;  A  iv.98  (aor.  "nibbigsu  anasava) 
Th  I,  100  (fut.  "nibbissati  anasavo),  364  ;  It  93  (°nib- 
banti),  cp.  95  ;  Dh  126  ("nibbanti  anasava  perhaps 
better  taken  to  No.  i  !) ;  Vbh  426  (sabbasave  parin- 
flaya  parinibbanti  anasava) ;  Sdhp  584  (°nibbanti 
mahoghen'  eva  aggino). — pp.  parinibbuto  (q.  v.). — 
Caus.  parinibbapeti  (q.  v.). 

Parinibbayana  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  parinibbayin]  passing  away, 
see  parinibbayin  2  b. 

Parinibbayin  [fr.  parinibbayati]  one  who  attains  Pari- 
nibbana. Of  the  2  meanings  registered  under  pari- 
nibbana we  find  No.  i  only  in  a  very  restricted  use, 
when  taken  in  both  senses  of  sa-  and  an-  upadisesa 
parinibbana  ;  e.  g.  at  A  n.155  sq.,  where  the  distinction 
is  made  between  a  sa-sankhara  p.  and  an  a-sankhara 
p.,  as  these  two  terms  also  occur  in  the  fivefold  classi- 
fication of  "  Never-returners  "  (i.  e.  those  who  are  not 
reborn)  viz.  antara-parinibbayin,  upahacca",  sasan- 
khara",  uddhagsota,  akanitthagamin.  Thus  at  D 
III. 237  ;  S  V.20I,  237  ;  A  1.233  '■  IV.T4,  71  sq.,  146,  380  ; 
V.120;  Pug  16,  17. — 2.  In  the  sense  of  Parinibbana 
No.  2  (i.  e.  sa-upadisesa  p.)  we  find  parinibbayin  almost 
as  an  equivalent  of  arahant  in  two  cpmbn*,  viz.  (a) 
tattha°  (always  comb""  with  opapatika,  i.  e.  above  the 
ordinary  cause  of  birth)  [cp.  BSk.  tatra-parinirvayin 
anagamin  Divy  533].     It  is  also  invariably  comb''  with 


Parinibbuta 


51 


Paripunna 


anavattidhamma,  e.  g.  at  D  1.156;  in.108,  132;  M 
11.56,  146;  A  1.232;  245,  290;  II. 5,  89,  238;  IV.  12,  399, 
423  ;  V.343  ;  S  V.346  (cp.  406).  357  ;  Pug  16,  62,  83.  See 
also  Kvu  Irsl.  74^.  —  (b)  antara"  [cp.  BSk.  antara- 
parinirvayin  WVastu  1.33]  one  who  passes  away  in  the 
middle  of  his  term  of  life  in  a  particular  heaven  ;  an 
Anagamin  (cp.  Bdhgh's  expl"  at  PugA  198  as  "  ayu- 
vemajjhassa  antara  yeva  parinibbayanato  a.  p.") 
S  v.69=A  IV.70  ;  S  v.201  =204,  237,  285,  314,  378; 
A  11.134  ;  Ps  1. 161  ;  Pug  16 ;  Nett  190  (cp.  A  iv.380). 

Parinibbuta  (adj.)  [pari+nibbuta]  completely  calmed, 
at  peace,  at  rest  (as  to  the  distinction  of  the  twofold 
application  see  parinibbana  and  cp.  Mrs.  Rh.D.  Bud- 
dhism p.  191  ;  Cpd.  p.  168),  viz.  —  I.  gone  out,  or  passed 
away  without  any  remaining  cause  of  rebirth  anywhere, 
completely  extinct,  finally  released  (fr.  rebirth  &  trans 
migration),  quite  dead  or  at  rest  [cp.  BSk.  parinirvfta 
Divy  79].  It  is  usually  applied  to  the  Buddha,  or  the 
Tathagatha,  but  also  to  Theras  &  Arahants  who  have 
by  means  of  moral  &  intellectual  perfection  destroyed 
all  germs  of  further  existence.  With  ref.  to  Gotama 
Buddha:  Vin  11.284  (atikkhippai)  Bhagava  p.),  294 
(vassasata"  e  Bhagavati)  ;  v.  [  19,  120  ;  D  1.204  (acira-°e 
Bhagavati) ;  S  1.158  (Tathagato  p.  11. 191);  v. 172  (°e 
Tathagate) ;  Vv  111.9'  (°e  Gotame  =  anupadisesaya 
nibbana-dhatuya  parinibbuto  VvA  169);  PvA  140 
(Satthari  p.).  212  (Bhagavati).  Of  others  :  S  1.121,  122 
(Godhika) ;  111.124  (Vakkali)  ;  iv.63  (Punna) ;  Sn  p.  59. 
60  (a  Thera)  ;  Miln  3911  (Arahant) ;  VvA  158 ;  PvA  76  ; 
DhA  II.  1 63;  IV.42.  —  2.  emancipated,  quite  free  (from 
earthly  bonds),  calm,  serene,  at  peace,  perfected  Vin 
n.i56=A  1. 138  "  spiritually  free  "  Vin.  Texts  in. 182); 
D  11.123  (cp.  Dial.  II. 132);  III. 55  ;  M  1.235;  11102; 
S  I.I  (4-tinno  loke  visattikag).  7=iv.i79  (ahefha- 
yano+);  1.54  (  +  tirino  loke  visattikag) ;  187  (p.  kan- 
khati  kalag) ;  Sn  359  (  +  thitatta),  370  (id.),  467  (p. 
udaka-rahado  va  sito) ;  Th  i,  5  (cp.  Brethren  11'');  J 
IV.303,  453  ;  Ud  85  (raga-dosa-moha-kkhaya  p.) ;  Miln 
50  (°atta),  Freq.  in  comb"  with  kindred  terms  like 
sitibhuta  (cooled),  e.  g.  Vin  ii.i56=A  1.138;  Vv  53^; 
or  nicchata  (without  hunger),  e.  g.  S  111.26  ;  iv.204  — 
It  46  ;  Sn  735  sq.  ;  It  48  (esananar)  khaya),  49  (asavanag 
khaya).  —  3.  (to  be  understood  as  pp.  of  parinibba- 
peti)  calmed,  well  trained,  domesticated  M  1.446  (of 
a  horse). 

Parinimmita  at  Dhs  1280  read  para°. 

Paripakka  (adj.)  [pari  +  pakka]  i.  (quite)  ripe,  ripened, 
matured,  developed  D  1.54;  S  iv.i05=DA  1.50;  A 
IV.357  ;  Dh  260  ;  J  1.91,  231  ;  vi.i  (ap°) ;  Ud  36  (id.)  ; 
Miln  194,  288  ;  DhA  in.338  ;  KhA  56  ;  ThA  273  ;  PvA 
274  (su°). — 2.  overripe,  rotten  Miln  223. 

Paripakkata  [pp.  of  pari  +  pakkirati]  scattered  Th  2,  391 
(reading  doubtful). 

Paripaccati  [pari+paccati]  to  become  ripe,  to  heal  (of  a 
wound)  Miln  112. 

Paripaccana  (nt.)  [pari  +  paccana]  ripening,  healing  (of  a 
wound)  Miln  112. 

Paripafihati  [denom.  fr.  pari  +  panhal  to  question  A  v.  16. 

Paripatati  [doublet  of  paripatati]  to  go  to  ruin,  to  come 
to  fall,  to  come  to  naught  Miln  g^i  (opp.  sambhavati)  ; 
comb"'  with  paridhatjsati  at  Nd'  5  ;  Miln  249,  265. 

Paripatati  [pari+patati,  cp.  nipatati]  to  fall  down,  to  fall 
ofi  from  (abl.)  Vin  11.152  sq.  ;  J  V.417I  420;  Pv  IV.5' 
(bhumiyai))  DA  1.132;  PvA  37.  47,  55,  62. — Caus. 
paripateti  (q.  v.).  —  See  also  paripatati. 

Paripantha  [pari  +  pantha]  i .  "  way  round,"  edge,  border  ; 
paripanthe  in  ambush  (near  a  road)  M  1.87  :  J  111.65.  — 
2.  obstacle,  hindrance,  danger.     It  refers  esp.  to  danger 


arising  out  of  mishaps  to  or  bad  conditions  of  roads  in  the 
forests.  D  1.52;  S  1.43;  A  1.153;  111.252  ;  v.  136;  Ps 
1. 162  ;  J  1.395  ;  111.268  ;  iv.17  ;  vi.57  (n.  pi.  °ayo  =  kilesa- 
paripantha  C),  75  ;  DhA  1.14  (magga°),  i6  (id.).  51,  69  ; 
miganari  p.  danger  to  the  crops  from  (the  nuisance  of) 
deer  J  1.143,  i54- — saparipantha  full  of  danger  DhA 
1.63.     See  also  palipatha. 

Paripanthika  (adj.)  [fr.  paripantha]  forming  or  causing  an 
obstacle  A  1.161.     The  usual  form  is  pari"  (q.  v.). 

Paripanna  see  palipanna. 

Paripaka  [fr.  pari  +  pac]  i-  ripeness,  maturity,  develop- 
ment, perfection  D  1.9  (cp.  DA  1.94) ;  Ud  36  (paiica 
dhamma  paripakaya  sagVattanti)  ;  J  1.142,  148; 
VI.236  ;  Miln  288  ;  Vism  1 16  (bodhi"),  199  ;  DhA  1.89 
("gatatta  nt.  state  of  perfection);  ThA  79;  PvA  276. 
—  2.  overripeness,  decay,  collapse,  only  in  phrase 
"  indriyanar)  p.,"  i.  e.  decay  of  the  (mental)  faculties, 
in  formula  defining  jara  (old  age)  at  D  11.305  ;  M  1.49  : 
S  II. 2,  42  sq.  ;  A  v. 203  ;  Nd^  252  ;  Dhs  644  ;  cp.  BSk. 
indriyaparipaka  Av5  11.  no. 

Paripacana  (nt.)  [pari  +  pacana^]  ripening,  maturing, 
digestion  Vims  351,  363,  365. 

Paiipacaniya  (adj.)  [fr.  paripacana]  bringing  to  maturity, 
leading  to  perfection,  accomplishing,  only  in  phrase 
vimuttiparipacaniya  dhamma  (5)  things  achieving 
emancipation  (see  Ud  36)  S  iv.i05=DA  1.50  ;  ThA  273. 

Paripaceti  [pari  +  paceti,  Caus.  of  pacati]  to  bring  to 
maturity,  to  cause  to  ripen,  to  develop,  prepare  J 
VI.373  (atthar)  p.  "acayitva  =vaddhetva  C.) ;  Miln  232, 
285,  288,  296.  — pp.  paripacita  Vism  365. 

Paripatita  [pp.  of  paripateti]  attacked,  pursued,  brought 
into  difi5culty  VvA  336. 

Paripateti  (or  °pateti)  [Caus.  of  paripatati.  Cp.  BSk.  pari- 
patayati  to  destroy  Divy  417]  to  cause  to  fall  down,  to 
bring  to  ruin,  to  attack,  pursue  Vin  iv.ii5;  J  11.208; 
III. 380  ;  Miln  279,  367;  KhA  73  (see  App.  II.  p.  353 
n.  9).  — pp.  paripatita  (q.  v.). 

Parip&lita  [pp.  of  paripaleti]  guarded  Vism  74. 

Paripaleti  [pari+paleti]  to  watch,  guard  (carefully)  PvA 
130  (  =  rakkhati). — pp.  paripalita  (q.  v.). — Pass, 
"paliyati  Nett  105  ( =  rakkhitar)). 

Paripita  (adj.)  [pari  +  pita]  very  dear,  highly  valued  Sdhp 
57I- 

Paripqita  (adj.)  [pari+pilita,  pp.  of  pI4]  oppressed,  vexed, 
injured  Miln  97  (aggi-santapa-parilaha°),  303  jighac- 
chaya). 

Paripuochaka  (adj.)  [fr.  pari  +  prch]  asking  a  question, 
enquiring  Nd'  234  =Nd''  386  ;'  Sdhp  90.  —  f.  abstr. 
paripucchakata  questioning  Vism  132  (one  of  the  7 
constituents  of  dhamma-vicaya-sambojjhanga). 

Paripucchati  [pari4-  pucchati]  to  ask  a  question,  to  interro- 
gate, inquire  Vin  1.47=224;  11. 125;  S  1.98;  A  v. 16; 
Sn  380,  696  ("lyana  ger.),  1025  ;  Pug  41  ;  Miln  257,  408  ; 

SnA  III. 

Paripuccha  (f)  [pari -1- puccha]  question,  interrogation 
Vin  1.190  (uddesa-(-);  11. 219  (id);  A  1.285;  Nd^  234 
^Nd*  386  (cp.  SnA  III).     See  also  uddesa. 

Paripunchati  [pari-l-punchati]  to  wipe  ofi,  stroke  down 
Vin  III.  14  (panina  gattani  p.). 

ParipiUWa  (adj.)  [pp.  of  paripurati]  i.  (quite)  full,  fulfilled, 
complete,  finished,  satisfied  M  1.200  (°sankappa).  111. 11  ; 
S  II. 28^;  1V.104;  V.315  ;  Ps  1.172  (=pariggah' atthena 


Paripunnata 


52 


Paribbhamati 


parivar'  atthena,  paripur'  atthena  p.,  i.  e.  acquiring, 
keeping,  fulfilling);  Sn  889  (°manin  =  saniatta-manin 
Nd'  298),  904;  It  40  (°sekha)  ;  Pv  iv.i6^;  Vism  4.^ 
(°sankappa) :  PvA  13,  54  ("vassa  whose  years  are  com- 
pleted, i.  e.  old  enough  for  ordination),  68  ("gabbha 
ready  to  be  delivered),  77  (varina).  — 2,  complete,  i.  e. 
not  defective,  perfect,  sound,  healthy  Sn  548  (°kaya  = 
lakkhanehi  punnataya  ahin'  anga-paccangataya  ca  pari- 
punna-sariro  SnA  452) ;  Miln  249. 

Paripunnata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  paripunna]  fullness,  complete- 
ness SnA  452. 

Paripura  (adj.)  [pari-l-pr]  full,  complete,  perfected,  accom- 
plished D  1.75;  1.133;  '11-94  i  S  11.32;  IV. 247;  V.269 
(f.  °i) ;  A  11.77 ;  V-io  sq.  ;  Sn  205,  1017 ;  Ps  1.15,  1.8,  49, 
172;  II  122  ;  Pug  35,  36.  -aparipiira  not  completed, 
imperfect,  incomplete  A  !i.77;  iv.314  sq.  ;  v. 10  sq.  ; 
It  107;  Pug  35,  36. 

-karita  completion  M  1.64,  66  sq.  -karin  completing, 
fulfilling,  making  complete,  doing  to  thefuU  M  1.33  sq., 
64  ;  S  V.201  ;  A  II. 136 ;  in. 215  ;  iv.380  ;  v. 131  sq.  ;  Pug 
37  ;  Miln  243. 

Paripuraka  (adj.{  (-°)  one  who  fills,  filling  Vism  300  (ni- 
raya°). 

Paripiiia9a  (nt.)  [fr.  paripijreti]  fulfilment,  completion 
Vism  3  (sila°).     See  paripurana. 

Parip.urati  [pari-f  purati]  to  become  full  or  perfect  Dh  38  ; 
J  IV. 2 73  (devaloko  p.);  Miln  395  (samaniiar|)  ;  fut. 
paripurissati  DhA  1.309.  —  Pass,  paripuriyati  to  be 
fi^filled  or  perfected  DhA  1.309.  —  pp.  paripunna 
(q.  v.).  —  Cans,    paripiireti  (q.  v.). 

Paripjiratta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  paripura]  fullness,  complete- 
ness, completion  S  v.2CO  sq.  (-(-samatta). 

Paripiirita  [pp.  of  paripiireti]  filled  (to  overflowing),  full 
PvA  216. 

Paripuri  (f)  [fr.  paripura,  but  better  spelt  paripuri,  q.  v.] 
fulfilment,  completion  S  1.139. 

Paripuieti  [Caus.  of  paripurati]  to  fulfil ;  to  fill  (up),  make 
more  full,  supplement,  fill  out.  add  to  D  1.74  (pari- 
sandeti  p.  parippharati ;  DA  1.2 17  expl""  as  "  vayuna 
bhastar)  viya  pureti  ") ;  11.22 1  ;  M  in. 92  ;  S  1.27  (deva- 
kayai))  =30  ;  11.29,  32  ;  iii-93  (samaiiiiatthari)  =  A  11.95  = 
It  90  ;  Pv  II. 9"  (ppr.  "ayanto) ;  Pug  31,  35  ;  Miln  349 
(lekhag)  ;  PvA  29  (sagararj),  30  (natidhammo  °pure- 
tabbo),  136  (vassasahassani) ;  Sdhp  371.  —  ppr.  raed- 
"puramana  D  1.103.  — pp.  paripiirita  (q.  v.). 

Paripothita  tpp-  of  paripotheti]  beaten,  whipped  Miln  188 

(lagulehi). 

Parippharati  [pari -f  sphur]  to  pervade  D  1.74  (  =  samantato 
phusati  DA  1.2  i  7)  ;  M  111.92  sq.  See  also  paripiireti  — 
pp.  paripphuta  &  "pphuttha  (q.  v.). 

Paripphut^ha  [pp.  of  parippharati]  filled,  pervaded  D 
1.75;  M  111.94  (spelt  here  paripphuta).  Cp.  BSk.  pari- 
sphuta  MVastu  11.349;  m.274;  Lai.  Vist.  jj^,  385. 

ParippbosakaQ  (adv.)  [either  with  Kern,  Toev,  s.  v.  ger. 
of  paripphoseti  (i.e.  paripphosa)  -I-  kar|  or  preferably  with 
Trenckner,  Motes  80  absolutive  in  °aka  (i.  e.  nt.  forma- 
tion fr.  adj.  paripphosa,  as  phenuddeha-l-  kag  etc.).  Cp. 
also  Geiger  P.Gr.  §  62.  i]  sprinkled  all  round  D  1.74  ; 
M  1.276  ;  II. 15  ;  111.92  ;  expH  as  "  siiicitva  "  at  DA  1.218. 

Paripphosita  [pp.  of  paripphoseti]  sprinkled  all  round 
J  VI. 51,  481  (candana  sara"). 

Paripphoseti  [pari -h  Caus.  of  prus]  to  sprinkle  over,  Vin 
11.209  (udakena  "pphositva ;  so  read  for  "ppositva)  ; 
A  1.257;  J  VI. 566;  Pv  iii.io^  (°itva=asiiicitva  PvA 
23')-  — PP-  paripphosita  (q.  v.). 


Pariplava  [fr.  pari -t- pin]  unsteady,  wavering,  swerving 
about  Dh  38  (=upplavana  DhA  1.309). 

Pariplavati  [pari  +  plu]  to  quiver,  roam  about,  swerve 
J  ni.4.S4  (ppr.  pariplavanto  =  upplavamana  C.  —  pp. 
paripluta  (q.  v.). 

Paripluta  [pp.  of  pariplavati]  immersed,  drenched  J 
VI. 78  (  =  nimugga  C.) ;  Davs  in. 34. 

Pariphandati  [pari -t- spand]  to  tremble,  quiver,  throb, 
waver  Sn  776  (cp.  Nd'  46  sq.),  1145;  Dh  34  (=santha- 
tur)  na  sakkoti  DhA  1.289);  J  IV.93  ;  Miln  91,  249. — 
pp.  pariphandita  (q.v  .). 

Pariphandita  [pp.  of  pariphandati]  wavered,  trembled, 
quivered  J  111.24. 

Paribandha  at  ThA  242  is  C.  reading  for  paripantha  at 
Th  2,  352  ;  also  at  Vism  147,  152. 

Paribadheti  [pari-l-badh]  to  oppress,  attack  PvA  193 
( =  hir|sati). 

Paribahati  [pari-f  bahati  or  preferably  baheti :  see  bahati'] 
to  keep  out,  keep  away  from,  hinder  J  1.204  (ger. 
"bahiya)  ;  PvA  214  (°bahire). 

Paribahira  (adj.)  [pari -1- bahira]  external,  alien  to;  an 
outsider  Vin  n. 140;  iv.283  ;  S  1.126;  J  1.482;  in. 213; 
Nd'  144  ;  (parimussati  p.  hoti,  in  expl°  of  mussati) 
Vism  54  ;  PvA  131  ;  ThA  209 ;  DA  1.30. 

Paribbajati  [pari-Fvraj]  to  wander  about  (as  a  religious 
mendicant)  Sn  74,  639  ;  It  109  ;  Dh  346,  415  ;  J  iv.452. 

Paribbaya  [pari-l-vaya,  i.  e.  *vyaya]  i.  earned  money, 
earnings,  wages  J  1. 156  (°g  datva),  296  (id),  433; 
IV.  1 70  ;  DhA  IV.  196.  —  2,  expense,  expenditure  J  11.2 13, 
(nivasa"  expense  for  a  lodging),  249,  368  ;  in. 287  (°r) 
karoti  to  invest)  ;  vi.383  ;  VvA  75  ;  PvA  3  (sahassag 
sahassai)  °g  karoti),  97  (nicca°) ;  Davs  v.66. 

Paribbasana  (adj.)  [ppr.  med.  of  pari-l-vas]  abiding, 
staying  by  Sn  796  (=vasamana  SnA  529;  sakaya 
difthiya  vasanti  Nd'  102),  878,  880,  895. 

Paribbaja  =  paribbajaka  S  1.49;  Sn  134;  Dh  313;  DhA 
III. 485.     °vata  the  vow  of  a  p.  ThA  73. 

Paribbajaka  [fr.  pari-l- vraj]  a  wandering  man,  a  Wanderer, 
wandering  religious  mendicant,  not  necessarily  Bud- 
dhist (cp.  Muir,  J.R.A.S.  1866,  321  ;  Lassen,  Ind.  All 
11.114,  277,  468;  Vin.  Texls  1.41)  Vin  1.342;  IV.2S5 
(bhikkhuii  ca  samaneraii  ca  thapetva  yo  koci  parib- 
bajaka-samapanno) ;  D  1.157;  "'■■  sq.,  35  sq.,  53  sq., 
130  sq.  ;  M  1.64,  84  ;  S  1.78  ;  11.22,  1 19,  139  ;  in. 257  sq. ; 
IV. 230,  251,  391  sq.  ;  A  1.115,  157,  185,  215;  n.29  sq., 
176  ;  'V-35  sq..  338.  378  :  V.48  sq. ;  Sn  537,  553  ;  J  1.85  ; 
Ud  14,  65;  DA  1.35;  PvA  31.  —  f.  paribbajika  Vin 
IV. 285  ;  M  1.305  ;  S  111.238  sq. ;  Ud  13,  43  sq. 

Paribbajana  (nt.)  [fr.  paribbajati]  wandering  about  or 
practising  the  customs  of  a  mendicant  SnA  434. 

Paribbajayitar  [n.  ag.  of  paribbajati]  one  who  indulges  in 
the  practice  of  a  Wanderer,  fig  one -who  leads  a  virtuous 
ascetic  life  Sn  537  (T.  °vajjayita)>  Perhaps  we  should 
read   "bajayitva    for    °bajayita,    cp.    SnA   434    nikkha- 

met[v]a  niddhamet[v]a. 

Paribbiilha  (adj.)  [pp.  of  paribruhati]  encompassed,  pro- 
vided with,  surrounded  A  111.34;  Sn  301  (=parikinija 
SnA  320) ;  J  IV. 120  ;  v. 68,  322,  417  ;  VI. 452. 

Paribbhamati  [pari  -f  bharaati]  1 .  to  walk  or  roam  about 
PvA  6,  47  (ito  c'  ito),  63  (saijsare),  ico.  166  (sagsare).  — 
2.  to  reel  about  J  111.288;  iv.407. — Caus.  "bbhameti 
to  make  reel  round  J  vi.155. 


I 


Paribyattata 


53 


Parimajjati 


Paribyattata  (f.)  [pari  +  vyatta+ ta]  great  distinction, 
clearness ;  wide  experience,  learnedjiess  Miln  349. 

Paribrataava  (nt.)  [to  brh,  see  paribriJhati  &  cp.  late  Sk. 
paribarhana]  growth,  increase,  promotion  Th  i,  p.  2°. 
Cp.  paribruhana. 

Paribriihati  [pari+bruhati  of  brh^]  to  augment,  increase, 
do  with  zest  VvA  115.  —  Caus.  °briiheti  [cp.  Sk.  pari- 
brnhayati]  to  make  strong,  increase  J  v.  36 1  (apari- 
bruhayi  aor.  med.  with  a°  neg.,  i.  e.  was  weakened,  lost 
his  strength  ;  but  expl''  by  C.  as  "  atibruhesi  maha- 
saddai)  niccharesi,"  thus  taking  it  to  brfl  to  speak, 
which  is  evidently  a  confusion).  —  pp.  paribbujha  & 
paribruhita  (q.  v.). 

Paribiuhana  (nt.)  [fr.  paribruhati,  cp.  upabruhana] 
augmentation,  increase  Nett  79. 

Paribriihita  [pp..  of  paribruheti]  increased,  furthered, 
strengthened  ThA  245. 

Paribhattha'  [pp.  of  paribhassati  of  bhras]  fallen,  dropped 
J  1.482  ;  Th  I,  p.  12". 

Paribhattha'  [pp.  of  paribhasati]  abused,  censured,  scolded 

J  VI. 187. 

Paribhan^a  [for  paribandha,  dialectical,  see  Kern.  Toev. 
1.36,  who  compares  Tamil  panda  "  a  surrounding  wall  " 
=  P.  bandha.  The  meaning  is  rather  uncertain,  cp. 
notes  in  Vin.  Texts  n.154;  111.85,  213]  i.  a  binding 
along  the  back  Vin  1.254,  297;  11. 116;  J  v. 254  (v.  1. 
°danda). — 2.  a  girdle,  belt  J  vi,i25;  DhA  n.174. — 
3.  a  plastered  flooring  Vin  11. 113,  172,  220;  J  111.384  ; 
IV. 92  ;  V.437,  44(1.  —  4.  slough  of  a  serpent  (?)  J  vi.339. 
—  5.  (°-)  adj.  encircling,  comprehensive,  in  "nana 
Vism  429, 

Paribhata  [pp.  of  pari  +  bhr]  nurtured,  nourished  M  11.36 
(sukha°).     Also  in  expl"  of  paribhatyata  (q.  v.). 

Paribbava  [pari  +  bhii]  contempt,  disrespect  Vin  iv.241  ; 
.\  III.  19 1  ;  J  V.436  ;  VI.  104  ;  Vbh  353  sq.  ;  PvA  257. 

Paribhavana  (nt.)  =  paribhava  DA  1.255. 

Paribhavati  [pari  +  bhu],  also  paribhoti  to  treat  with 
contempt,  to  neglect,  despise  S  1.69;  A  111.174  sq. 
(-bhoti)  ;  J  III. 10;  V.442  ;  Miln  23,  259;  PvA  266. — 
grd.  paribhotabba  S  1.69;  Sn  p.  93.  ( =  paribhavi- 
tabba  SnA  424). — Caus.  paribhaveti  ;  pp.  paribhuta 
(q.  v.). 

Paribhavana  (f.)  [fr.  paribhaveti]  permeation,  penetration 
DhsA  163  (=vasana). 

Paribhavita  [pp.  of  paribhaveti]  i.  penetrated,  supplied, 
filled  with,  trained,  set  D  11. 81  (saddha-p.  cittar),  sila° 
etc.  ;  trsl.  "  set  round  with,"  cp.  Dial.  11.86),  cp.  S 
V.369  ;  Sn  2i  (cittag  p.  ;  SnA  37  sagvasiya)  ;  Miln  361  ; 
PvA  139  (°aya  bhavanaya  codito).  —  2.  compounded 
of,  mixed  with  J  1.380,  cp.  iv.407  ;  PvA  191.  —  3.  fos- 
tered, treated,  practised  Miln  394  (bhesajjena  kayai)) ; 
PvA  257.  —  4.  sat  on  (said  of  eggs),  being  hatched 
M  1.104  ;  S  III. 153  ;  A  IV. 125  sq.,  176. 

Paribhaveti  [Caus.  of  paribhavati]  to  cause  to  be  per- 
vaded or  penetrated,  to  treat,  supply  Vin  1.279  (uppala- 
hatthani  bhesajjehi  p.);  J  iv.407.  —  pp.  paribhavita 
(q.  v.). 

Paribhasa  [fr.  pari-l-bhas]  censure,  abuse,  blame  J  v. 373  ; 

PvA  I  75. 

Paribhasaka  (adj.)  [fr.  paribhasa.  cp.  BSk.  paribhasaka 
Divy  38]  reviling,  abusing,  abusive  S  1.34;  A  iv.79; 
Pv  i.ii«  (=akkosaka  PvA  58);  iv.8* ;  VvA  69.  See 
also  akkosaka. 


Paribhasati  [pari -1- bhas,  cp.  BSk.  paribhasate  Divy  38] 
to  abuse,  scold,  revile,  censure,  defame  S  1.221  ;  iv.61  ; 
Vin  iv.265  ;  Sn  134,  663  ;  J  i.i  12,  384  (for  °hasir)su)  469  ; 
111.421;  IV. 2  85  (read  paribhasenti  for  aribhasenti) ; 
V.294  ;  V-5-3  :  Pv  II. 10';  Pug  37;  Miln   186;  PvA  43. 

—  aor.  °bhasissai)  Pv  iv.8*,  pi.  "bhasimhase  Pv  iii.i". 
grd.  "bhasaniya  Miln  186.  —  Very  frequently  comb'' 
with  akkosati  (-fp.),  e.  g.  at  Vin  11.14,  296;  Ud  44; 
Pv  1.9';  PvA  10. — pp.  paribhattha*  (q.  v.). — Caus. 
II.  "bhasapeti  id.  Pv  1.6'. 

Paribhindati  [pari -l- bhid]  i.  to  break  up,  split,  create  dis- 
sension, to  set  at  variance  J  1.439;  iv.196;  v.229 ; 
VI. 368  ;  PvA  13.  —  2.  to  break  (see  °bhinna).  —  pp. 
paribhinna. 

Paribhinna  [pp.  of  paribhindati]  i.  broken,  broken  up 
M  i.igo  (a');  VvA  184  ("vaijna  of  broken  up  appear- 
ance, i.  e.  crumbly).  —  2.  set  at  variance,  disconcerted, 
split  \'in  III.  161  ;  J  n.193  ;  DhsA  308  ;  PvA  13.  — Cp.  vi°. 

Paribhanjati  [pari -1- bhuj]  i.  to  enjoy,  to  use,  to  enjoy  the 
use  of  Vin  11.109;  M  1.153  (nivapar)  p.),  207,  S  1129; 
Sn  240,  241,  423;  Pv  i.i^;  1.9*;  IV.52  (  =  khaditur)  PvA 
259);  Nd^  427  (pariyesati  patilabhati  paribhuiijati)  ; 
Miln  366,  395  (alopai)  "bhuiijisar)) ;  Pv  3,  5  (modake 
eat  up),  8,  13,  23,  47;  Sdhp  394. — grd.  "bhurijiya 
J  1.243  (dup°) ;  &  °bhunjitabba  PvA  71  (with  nt.  abstr. 
"tabbatta).  —  Pass,  "bhunjiyati,  ppr.  "iyamana  S  1.90. 

—  2.  [see  bhuiijati^]  to  purify,  clean,  cleanse  M  1.25; 
J  VI. 75.  —  pp.  paribhutta  (q.  v.). 

Paribhunjana  (nt.)  [fr.  paribhuiijati]  eating  PvA  35. 

Paribhutta  [pp.  of  paribhunjati,  cp.  BSk.  paribhukta  Divy 
277]  used,  employed,  made  use  of  Vin  11. 109  (su°) ; 
J  III. 257  (a°) ;  DA  1.261  (sayag  "bhesajja)  ;  SnA  19. 

Paribhata  [pp.  of  paribhavati]  treated  with  contempt, 
disregarded,  despised  Vin  iv.6  ;  S  11.279  ;  Milo  229,  288. 

Paribheda  [fr.  pari -l- bhid,  see  paribhindati]  i.  breaking, 
breaking  up,  falling  to  pieces  Dhs  738,  874.  —  2.  burst- 
ing, breaking  open  PvA  55. 

Faribhedaka  (adj.)  [fr.  paribheda  in  sense  of  paribhindati] 
breaking;  a  disturber  of  peace,  breedbate  J  11. 173; 
III. 168  ;  V.245  ;  VI. 437. 

Paribhoga  [fr.  pari -1- bhuj]  i.  material  for  enjoyment, 
food,  feeding  J  1.243  ;  11.432  ;  Miln  156,  403  ;  DhA  11.66  ; 
SnA  342.  —  2.  enjoyment,  use  Vin  iv.267 ;  S  1.90; 
Nd'  262  ;  Vism  33  (with  pariyesana  &  patiggahana)  ; 
DhA  1.60  ;  PvA  25,  26,  220.  —  Four  paribhogas  are 
distinguished  at  J  v. 253  and  at  Vism  43.  viz.  theyya", 
ina,°  dayajja",  sami".  Paribhoga  discussed  in  relation 
to  patilabha  at  Vism  43. 

-cetiya  a  tree,  shrine  etc.,  used  by  the  Buddha,  & 
consequently  sacred  KhA  222.  -dhatu  a  relic  consist- 
ing of  something  used  by  the  dead  Saint  (opp.  sarira- 
dhatu,  remains  of  the  body)  Mhvs  15,  163.  (cp.  pari- 
bhogika-dhatu) ;  SnA  579. 

Paribhojaniys  (or  °iya)  (nt.)  [orig.  grd.  of  paribhunjati  2] 
that  which  is  used  for  cleaning,  water  for  washing 
Vin  11.76,  208,  216  Cghata),  226  (cp.  Vin.  Texts 
III. 8);  III. 1 19  (paniyag) ;  J  1.416;  vi.75  ;  DhA  1.58. 

Parima  =  parama  (cp.  Geiger  P.Gr  19')  M  in. 112. 

Parimajjaka  (adj.)  [fr.  pari-i-marj]  touching,  reaching 
(up  to)  Miln  343  (candasuriya°,  cp.  M\'astu  II.  candra- 
masurya-parimarjako  maharddhiko  etc.). 

Parimajjati  [pari-l-majjati]  i.  to  wipe  away,  wipe  off  or 
out  M  1.78.  —  2.  to  touch,  stroke  D  1.78;  M  in. 12; 
S  II.  12  I  ;  Dh  394;  J  1. 192,  305;  11.395  (pifthir)).  —  3.  to 
rub,  polish,  groom  (a  horse)  A  v,i66,  168.  — pp.  pari- 
mattha  (q.  v.). 


Parimajjana 


54 


Pariyatti 


Parimajjana  (nt.)  [fr.  parimajjati]  i.  wiping  off  or  out 
P"g  33  (ukkhali°).  —  2.  rubbing,  grooming  (a  iiorse) 
A  v.i66,  i68  (ajaniya°). 

Parimattha  [pp-  of  parimajjati]  rubbed,  stroked,  polished, 
in  su°  well  polished  S  11.102.     See  also  palimattha. 

ParimaQ^&la  (^dj.)  [pari  +  mandala]  i.  round,  circular 
J  1. 441  ;  II. 406  (avata) ;  vi.42  ;  Pv  iv.3^  (gula°)  ;  Dhs 
617  (expl""  at  DhsA  317  as  "  egg-shaped,"  kukkut-anda- 
santhana).  —  nt.  as  adv.  in  phrase  "g  nivaseti  to  dress 
or  cover  oneself  all  round  Vin  1.46;  11.213;  iv.i85(  = 
nabhimandalar)  janu-mandalar)  paticchadentena  C.  ;  cp. 
timari^ala).  —  2.  rounded  off,  i.  e.  complete,  correct, 
pleasant,  in  phrase  °ani  padavyanjanani  well  sounding 
words  and  letters,  correct  speech  Vin  11. 316;  M  1.216; 
A  1. 103  ;  DA  1.282  ;  SnA  177,  370. 

Paiimaddati  [pari4-inrd]  i.  to  rub,  crush,  rub  oft,  treat, 
shampoo,  massage  J  iv.137  (sarirarj  examine  the  body 
&  put  it  right);  Miln  241. — Of  leather  (i.  e.  treat) 
M  1. 128. — 2.  to  go  together  with,  to  frequent  DhA 
1.90  (samayar)  p.).  —  pp.  parimaddita  (q.  v.). 

Parimaddana  (nt.)  [fr.  pari+mrd]  rubbing,  kneading, 
shampooing,  massage  ;  usually  in  stock  phrase  (kayo) 
anicc'-ucchadana-  parimaddana-  bhedana  -  viddhagsana- 
dhammo  D  1.76  (cp.  DA  1.88,  but  trsl'i  at  Duil.  1.87  as 
"  subject  to  erasion,  abrasion,  dissolution  and  disin- 
tegration ")  ;  M  1.500;  S  IV.83  ;  J  1. 416.  See  further 
D  1.7  ;  A  1.62  ;  iv.54  (ucchadana-p.-nahapana-samba- 
hana) ;  Miln  241  (ucchadana") ;  Sdhp  578. 

Parimaddita  [pp.  of  parimaddati]  crushed,  rubbed,  treated 
M  1. 129  (su°  well-treated). 

Parimaddhita  [pp.  of  pari+maddheti,  Cans,  of  mrdh  to 
neglect]  brought  to  an  end  or  standstill,  destroyed 
J  1. 145  (°sankhara). 

Parimasati  [pari-t-mrs]  to  touch,  stroke,  grasp  (usually 
combJ  with  parimajjati),  D  1.78;  11. 17;  M  1,34,  80; 
III. 12  ;  S  II. 121;  IV. 173;  A  111.711.  —  pp.  parimajtha 
(same  as  pp.  of  parimajjati),  q.  v. 

ParimaQa  (nt.)  [of  pari -I- ma]  measure,  extent,  limit,  as 
adj.  (-°)  measuring,  extending  over,  comprising  J  1.45  ; 
SnA  I  (pariyatti");  PvA  113  (yojana").  102  (aneka- 
bhara°).  —  neg.  aparimana  without  limit,  immeasur- 
able, very  great  Vin  11.62,  70;  S  v.430 ;  A  11. 182  ; 
KhA  248;  DA  1.288  (°vanna);  PvA  no,  129. 

Paiimarita  [pp.  of  pari-t- mareti,  Caus.  of  mr]  mortified, 
only  in  phrase  "indriya  J  1.361  ;  111.515;  IV.9,  306; 
V.152  ;  Davs  1.16. 

Parimita  [pp.  of  pariminatij  measured,  restricted,  limited, 
only  in  neg.  a°  measureless  Pv  11.8^' ;  Miln  287,  343. 

Parimitatta  (nt.)  [fr.  parimita]  the  condition  of  being 
measured  PvA  254. 

Pariminati   [pari -1- ma]    to   measure,  mete   out.   estimate, 

limit,   restrict;   inf.   °metug   Miln  192;   ThA  26;   and 

"minitug    Miln  316;   grd.   "meyya  (q.   v.).- — pp.   pari- 
mita (q.  v.). 

Parimeyya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  pariminati]  to  be  measured,  neg. 
a°  countless,  immeasurable  Miln  331,  388;  PvA  212. 

Parimukha  (adj.)  [pari-f  mukha]  facing,  in  front;  only  as 
nt.  adv.  °r)  in  front,  before,  in  phrase  parimukhar) 
satir)  upatthapeti  "  set  up  his  memory  in  front  "  (i.  e. 
of  the  object  of  thought),  to  set  one's  mindfulness  alert 
Vin  1.24;  D  II. 291  ;  M  1.56,  421;  S  1.170;  A  111.92  ; 
It  80;  Ps  1. 1 76  (expl'')  ;  Pug  68;  DA  1.2 10.  Also  in 
phrase  °r)  karapeti  (of  hair)  Vin  n.134  "  to  cut  off  (?) 
the  hair  in  front  "  (i.  e.  on  the  breast )  Vin.  Texts  111.138, 
where  is  quoted  Bdhgh's  expl"  "  ure  loma-saghara^ag." 


Parimuccati  [Pass,  of  pari-l-muc]  to  be  released,  to  be  set 
free,  to  escape  Vin  11.87  '■  ^^  '-^  '■  S  i.8S,  208  ;  11. 24,  109  ; 
111.40,  150,  179;  Miln  213,  335  (jatiya  etc.)  aor.  "mucci 
M  1. 153.  —  pp.  parimutta  ;  Caus.  parimoceti  (q.  v.). 

Parimut{;ha  [pari-l-muttha,  pp.  of  mussati,  cp.  pamuttha] 
forgetful,  bewildered  Vin  1.349  =  }  111.488  (  =  muttha- 
ssati  C.)  ;  cp.  Vin.  Texts  n.yj-j. 

Parimutta  [pp.  of  parimuccati]  released,  set  free,  delivered 
S  111.31. 

Parimutti  (f.)  [fr.  pari-f-muc]  release  J  1.4  (v.  20);  Miln 
1 12,  227  ;  PvA  109. 

Parimussati  [pari -1- mussati]  to  become  bewildered  or 
disturbed,  to  vanish,  fall  off  Nd'  144. 

Parimoceti  [Caus.  of  parimuccati]  to  set  free,  deHver, 
release  D  1.96;  J  1.28  (v.  203);  Miln  334;  DA  1.263; 
DhA  1.39. 

Parimohita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  pari -(-Caus.  of  muh]  very  con- 
fused, muddled,  dulled,  bewildered,  infatuated  Sdhp  206. 

Pariya  [either  short  form  of  pariyaya,  or  ger.  of  pari  4- i 
substantivised  (for  the  regular  form  paricca)  repre- 
senting an  ending  -ya  instead  of  -tya.  —  Bdhgh  at  Vism 
409  takes  pariya  as  nt.,  but  seems  to  mix  it  with  the 
idea  of  a  ppr.  by  defining  it  as  "  pariyati  ti  pariyai). 
paricchindati  ti  attho  "]  encompassing,  fathoming,  com- 
prehending (as  ger.)  ;  penetration,  understanding  (as  n.). 
Only  in  phrase  ceto-pariya-fiana  knowledge  encom- 
passing heart  or  mind  (cp.  phrase  cetasa  ceto  paricca) 
D  11.82  sq.  (v.  1.  °aya)  ;  ui.ioo  (v.  1.  °aye)  ;  DA  1.223 
(corresp.  with  pubbe-nivasa-ilana)  ;  with  which  alter- 
nates the  phrase  indriya-paro-pariya-nana  in  same 
meaning  (see  indriya  cpds.  &  remark  on  paropariya) 
J  1.78.  —  See  also  pariyatta'  pariyatti,  pariyaya  3, 
and  cpds.  of  ceto. 

Pariyanna  [pari-t-yanna]  supreme  or  extraordinary  offer- 
ing or  sacrifice  SnA  321,  322. 

Pariyatta^  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  pariya  (pari-fi)  but  confused 
with  pariyatta^  &  pariyatti  fr.  pari-f  ap]  learning, 
understanding,  comprehension,  only  in  phrase  indriya- 
paro  pariyatta  (-nana)  (knowledge  of)  what  goes  on  in 
the  intentions  of  others  A  v. 34,  38;  Ps  1. 121  sq.  ;  Vbh 
340- 

Pariyatta"  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  paryapta,  pp.  of  pari-l-ap,  see 

papunati]  (a)  capable  of,  mastered,  kept  in  mind, 
learned  by  heart ;  only  in  phrase  dhammo  ca  vinayo  ca 
p.  Vin  11.285  =  KhA  92;  D  111.241  sq.  (yatha  sutar) 
yatha  p°r)  dhammarj).  —  (b)  sufficient,  enough  PvA 
33  (  =  alar)). 

Pariyatti  (f.)  [fr.  pari-t-ap,  cp.  Epic  Sk.  paryapti  &  P. 
pariyapunati]  adequacy,  accomplishment,  sufficiency, 
capability,  competency  ;  indriya-paro°  efficiency  in  the 
(knowledge  of)  thoughts  of  others  S  v.205 ;  Nett  loi. 
Three  accomplishments  are  distinguished  at  DA  1.2  i  sq., 
viz.  alagadd-upama  (like  a  serpent),  nissaranattha  (on 
account  of  salvation)  and  bhandagarika"  (of  a  treasurer), 
apaiiyatti-kara  bringing  no  advantage  DhA  1.71.- — 2. 
accomplishment  in  the  Scriptures,  study  (learning  by 
heart)  of  the  holy  texts  Vism  95.  Also  the  Scriptures 
themselves  as  a  body  which  is  handed  down  through 
oral  tradition.  In  this  meaning  the  word  is  only  found  in 
later,  dogmatic  literature  ;  -tisu  pitakesu  tividho  pari- 
yatti-bhedo  DA  1.2 1.  At  SnA  494  it  is  classed  with 
paccaya  dhutanga  &  adhigama;  as  a  part  of  patibhana 
at  Nd^  234  =  Nd2  386.  pariyattig  ugganhati  to  under- 
take the  learning  (of  the  Scriptures)  DhA  11.30  ;  cp. 
KhA  91  (tipitaka-sabba-p.-pabheda-dhara) ;  J  11.48 
(°g  thapetva  leaving  the  learning  aside) ;  Miln  115,  215, 
345,  411   (agama").  —  abl.  pariyattito  through  learning 


4; 


Pariyanta 


55 


Pariyapunati 


by  heart  SnA  195  (opp.  to  atthato  according  to  the 
meaning). 

-dhamma  that  which  belongs  to  the  holy  study,  part 
or  contents  of  the  Scriptures,  the  Tipitaka  comprising 
the  nine  divisions  (see  navanga  Buddha-sasana)  KhA 
191,  193;  SnA  328;  PvA  2;  cp.  "sasana.  -dhara 
knowing  the  Scriptures  by  heart  Miin  21.  -dhura 
(  =  ganthadhura)  :  see  vasadhura.  -patibhanavant 
possessed  of  intelHgence  as  regards  learning  the  Scrip- 
tures SnA  III.  -parimana  extent  of  study  SnA  i,  6f  8. 
-bahula  clever  in  the  study  of  the  Dhamma  A  in. 86. 
-bahussuta  versed  in  the  Scriptures  SnA  1 10.  -sasana 
object,  instruction  of  the  Scriptures,  code  of  the  holy 
Texts  (cp.  "dhamma)  Nd'  143  ;  DhA  iv.39. 

Pariyanta  [pari+anta,  cp.  Sk.  paryanta]  i.  limit,  end, 
climax,  border  S  1.80  (manapa"  "  limit-point  in  enjoy- 
ment "  ;  cp.  C.  nipphattikar)  kotikar)  K.S.  320)  ; 
J  1. 149  (hattha-pada°  hoofs),  221  (udaka°),  223  (sara°) ; 
n.2oo  (angana")  ;  Pv  11. 13'^;  DhA  111.172  (parisa°). — 

2.  limit,  boundary,  restriction,  limitation  Vin  11.59,  ("> 
(apatti°) ;  Nd'  483  (distinguishes  between  4  pariyanta 
with  ref.  to  one's  character,  viz.  silasaijvara"  indriya- 
sai)vara°,    bhojane   mattailfluta",    jagariyanuyoga").  — 

3.  (adj.-°)  bounded  by,  limited  by,  surrounded,  ending 
in  Vin  iv.31  ;  M  in.90  ;  S  11. 122  (ayu°) ;  A  1.164  (id.)  ; 
Sn  577  (bhedana") ;  Pv  i.io''  (parikkhitta  PvA  52). 
— apariyanta  (adj.)  boundless,  limitless  PvA  58,  166. 

-kata  restricted,  limited,  bounded  Nd"  tanha™  (with 
simakata  &  odhikata  ;  v.  1.  pariyanti",  cp.  BSk.  paryan- 
tikrta  "  finished  "  Divy  97,  236).  -carin  living  in  self- 
restriction  Sn  964  (cp.  Nd'  483).  -dassavin  seeing  the 
limit  A  V.50.     -rahita  without  limits  DhA  in. 252. 

Pariyantavant  (adj.)  [fr.  pariyanta]  having  a  limit,  having 
a  set  or  well-defined  purpose  ;  f.  "vati  (vaca)  discriminat- 
ing speech  D  i.4  =  M  iii.49  =  Pug  58;  expl''  as  "  paric- 
chedai)  dassetva  yatha  'ssa  paricchedo  paiiiiayati,  evar) 
bhasati  ti  attho  "  D.\  i.76  =  PugA  238. 

Pariyantika  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  pariyanta]  ending  in,  bounded 
or  limited  by  S  11.83=  A  n.198  (kaya-p.  "a  &  jivita-p. 
°a  vedana)  ;  Vism  69  (bhojana",  udaka°,  asana°) ; 
Sdhp  440  (kala°  sila). 

Pariyaya  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  paryaya,  pari -Hi;  the  usual  P. 
form  is  pariyaya,  but  at  the  foil,  passages  the  short  a  is 
required  metri  causa]  revolution,  lapse  of  time,  period, 
term  J  111.460  ( =  kalapariyaya  C.)  ;  v. 367  (kala°). 

Pariyi  (f.)  [fr.  pari-l-ya]  winding  round,  turning  round; 
of  a  tree,  branch  J  vi.528  (duma"  ;  read  "pariyasu  with 
V.  1.  instead  of  T.  pariyayesu  ;  C.  expl'  by  sakha). 

Pariyagata  [pari -t- a -l- gata]  having  come  to,  reached, 
attained  J  vi.237  (phalar)  ;  C  —  upagata),  238  (kusalai)  ; 
C.  =pariyayena  attano  varena  agata). 

Pariyagara  (adj.)  [pari-Hagara]  having  the  house  all 
round,  entirely  surrounded  by  the  house  Vin  111.119  (of 
gabbha). 

Pariyati  [pari  +  ya]  i.  to  go  round  (ace.)  J  1.307.  —  2.  to 
come  near  J  11. 440. 

Pariyadati  [pari  -f  adati]  to  take  up  in  an  excessive  degree, 
to  exhaust.  Only  in  secondary  forms  of  med-pass. 
adiyati,  pp.  °adinna,  ger.  adaya  (q.  v.). 

Pariyadana  (nt.)  [pari-(-adana,  opp.  upadana]  "  taking  up 
completely,"  i.  e.  using  up,  consummation,  consump- 
tion, finishing,  end  M  1.487  (kattha",  opp.  to  upadana) ; 
S  1. 152  ;  III.  16  sq.  (cetaso  p.,  cp.  pariyadaya  &  °dinna)  ; 
IV. 33  (sabb'  upadana")  A  n.139;  J  v.  186.  Cp.  BSk. 
paryadana  Divy  4,  55,  100.  —  Esp.  in  foil,  phrases  : 
asava"  &  jivita"  D  1.46  (jivita-pariyadana  abl.,  expl'' 
at  Dh  1. 128  as  "  jivitassa  sabbaso  pariyadinnatta 
parikkhinatta  puna  appatisandhika-bhava  ti  attho  ")  ; 


S  n.83=A  II. 198;  S  111.126;  IV. 213;  A  iv.13,  146; 
Pug  13  ;  Miln  397  ;  and  comb''  with  parikkhaya  in  °g 
gacchati  to  be  exhausted  or  consummated  A  v.  173  = 
Sn  p.  126;  Miln  102;  PvA  147,  cp.  BSk.  pariksayag 
paryadanar)  gacchati  Divy  567;  Av§  1.48;  11. 193. 

Pariyadaya  (indecl.)  [ger.  of  pariyadati]  i.  taking  all 
round,  summing  up,  completely  Nd"  533  (in  expl°  of 
ye  keci,  as  sj'nonymous  with  sabbato,  i.  e.  for  com- 
pleteness, exhaustively).  —  2.  exhausting,  overpower- 
ing, enticing,  taking  hold  of,  as  cittag  p.  "  taking  hold 
of  the  mind"  M  1.91  ;  It  19;  DhA  1.15.  —  3.  losing 
control  over,  giving  out  (cittatj)  S  111.16;  iv.125.  In 
absolute  sense  perhaps  at  S  v.51  =  A  iv.  127  (with  vv.  11. 
pariyenaya  cS:  pariyaya). 

Pariyadinna  [often  spelt  °dinna,  e.  g.  in  vv.  11.  at  D  11. 8  ; 

M  II. 172;  III. 118.  —  pp.  of  pariyadiyati]  1.  (Pass.) 
exhausted,  finished,  put  an  end  to,  consummated  Vin 
1.25  (tejo)  ;  D  II.8=M  111.118;  S  11.133  sq.  (dukkhar)  ; 
parikkhinai] -(- )  ;  v. 461  sq.  —  neg.  apariyadinna  not 
finished,  not  exhausted  M  1.79  (muttakarisai)  °adin- 
nar)),  83  (dhammadesana  adinna) ;  S  11. 178  sq. — 2. 
(Med.)  having  exhausted,  lost  control  over,  being  over- 
come (usually  "citta  adj.)  Vin  11. 185  ;  M  11. 172  ;  S  11. 228  ; 
Nd"  32  ;  PvA  279. 

Pariyadinnatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  pariyadinna]  exhaustion, 
consummation  DA  1.128. 

Pariyadiyati  [sometimes  spelt  "diyyati,  e.  g.  Nd"  s.  v.  ; 
pari -I- adiyati,  q.  v.  for  etym.  ref.]  i.  to  put  an  end  to, 
exhaust,  overpower,  destroy,  master,  control  S  111.155 
(ragar))  ;  Nd"  under  parisahati.  —  Pot.  "adiyeyyag 
Vin  1.25  (tejag).  —  ger.  "adiyitva  Vin  1.25  (tejar)) ; 
IV. 109  (id.) ;  S  1.84  (trsl.  "  confiscate  ").  —  2.  to  become 
exhausted,  give  out  J  v.  186  (udakag)  ;  Miln  297  (cittar) 
p.  ;  opp.  to  parivaddhati).  — pp.  pariyadinna  (q.  v.). 

Pariyapajjati  [pari-l-apajjati]  to  be  finished  A  iv.339. — 
pp.  pariyapanna  (q.  v.). — Cans,  pariyapadeti  (q.  v.). 

Pariyapadana  (nt.)  [pari-l-apadana,  the  latter  for  ava". 
and  metrical  lengthening  of  a]  good  advice,  application, 
trick,  artfulness,  artifice  J  v. 361,  369.  (C.  expln*  as 
parisuddha  after  v.  1.  pariyodata  which  was  prob. 
misread  for  pariyodana),  370. 

Pariyapanna  [pari-l-apanna,  cp.  adhipanna]  i.  "gone 
completely  into,"  included  in,  belonging  to,  got  into 
Vin  1.46  (patta°  that  which  has  been  put  into  the 
bowl);  D  1.45  (=abaddha  DA  1.127);  SnA  397  (mila- 
kkhabhasa°  etc.);  KhA  136  (vinaya"),  191  (sangha°)  ; 
DhA  1. 1 58  (idhaloka-paraloka°) ;  PvA  14,  33.  59,  129 
(devaloka"),  150.  —  2.  accomplished  (i.  e.  gone  into 
the  matter),  thorough,  mastering  (said  of  vaca)  S  11.280 
=  A  11.51.  —  3.  (°a  dhamma)  the  Included,  viz.  all 
that  is  contained  in  the  threefold  cycle  of  existence  (i.  e. 
the  worlds  of  sense,  form  &  formless)  Dhs  1268; 
Vbh  12,  15,  19  &  passim;  DhsA  50.  Opp.  apariya- 
panna  (dhamma)  the  I'nincluded  (viz.  all  that  is 
exempt  from  this  cycle)  Ps  i.ioi  ;  Dhs  583  (cp.  Dks 
trsl"  165,  254,  329,  332),  992,  1242  ;  Kvu  507. 

Paiiyapannatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  pariyapanna]  includedness 

SnA  I  74. 

Pariyapadeti  [Caus.  of  pariyapajjati]  to  finish  off,  i.  e. 
put  to  death  completely  S  IV.308  sq.  —A  111.94. 

FariyapUQana  (nt.)  [abstr.  form°  fr.  pariyapunati]  mastery 
over,    accomplishment   in    (gen.)    Vism   442    (Buddha- 

vacanassa). 

Pariyapupati  [pari-l-ap,  cp.  BSk.  paryavapnoti  Divy  613] 
I.  to  learn  (by  heart),  to  master,  to  gain  mastership 
over,  to  learn  thoroughly  Vin  iv.305  (parittai)  a  charm) ; 
D  1. 1 1  7  (  =  janati  DA  1. 1 1 7) ;  A  in. 86  (dhammag) ;  fut. 


Pariyaputa 


56 


Pariyogaya 


pariyapunissati  DhA  1.382  (dhammar))  ;  ger.  pariya- 
punitva  S  1.176  :  11. 120  ;  SnA  195  (nikayai)).  —  2.  (with 
inf.)  to  know  (to  do  something),  to  be  able  to  \'in 
II. 109  (aor.  °ir)su),  121.  —  pp.  pariyaputa  and  pari- 
yatta  (q.  v.). 

Pariyaputa  [pp.  of  pariyapunati]  i.  learned  by  heart, 
known  Nd'  234  =Nd^  386  (Buddhavacana).  —  2. 
learned,   accomplished  DA  1.2  i.  —  See  also  pariyatta'^. 

Pariyaya  [fr.  pari+i,  cp.  Class.  Sk.  paryaya  in  all  mean- 
ings, already  Vedic  in  meaning  of  "  formula,"  in 
liturgy,  cp.  below  4]  lit.  "  going  round  "  analysed  by 
Bdhgh  in  3  diff.  meanings,  viz.  vara  (turn,  course), 
desana  (instruction,  presentation),  and  karana  (cause, 
reason,  also  case,  matter),  see  DA  1.36  and  cp.  Kindred 
Sayings  1.320.  —  i.  arrangement,  disposition,  in  phrase 
°r|  karoti  to  arrange  D  1.179  (trsl°  takes  it  literally 
"  departure."  i.  e.  going  out  of  one's  way,  detour;  or 
change  of  habit,  see  Dial  1245);  M  1.252,  326;  in. 7, 
62;  S  1. 1 42  (trsl.  "make  occasion"  [for  coming]). — 
2.  order,  succession,  turn,  course  (=vara)  D  1.166  fa 
(°bhatta  i.  e.  feeding  in  turn  or  at  regular  intervals ; 
expH  as  vara-bhatta  PugA  232)  ;  M  1.78,  206,  4S1  ; 
S  11.51  sq.  ;  A  11.206  ;  J  v.  153  (  =  vara)  ;  PvA  242  (apara°). 
—  3.  what  goes  on,  way,  habit,  quality,  property 
S  1. 1 46  (ceto°  habits  of  mind,  thoughts,  but  see  also 
pariya)  ;  A  v.  160  (citta",  see  ceto).  —  4.  discussion, 
instruction,  method  (of  teaching),  discourse  on  (-"), 
representation  of  (-")  (  =  desana);  thus  aditta""  (of  Vin 
1.34)  DhA  1.88  ;  esp.  in  cpd.  dhamma"  disquisition  on 
the  Dhamma  D  1.46  ;  n.93  ;  M  1.83  ;  111.67  ;  S  n.74  ; 
v. 357;  A  III. 62  ;  IV. 166,  381  ;  Sn  p.  218;  also  in  foil.: 
vitakka"  M  1.122  ;  deva°  A  in. 402  sq.  ;  peta"  PvA  92  ; 
cp.  Vism  41  (°katha).  —  5.  in  Abhidhamma  termin- 
ology, specifically :  pariyayena,  the  mode  of  teaching 
in  the  Suttanta,  ad  hominem,  discursively,  applied 
method,  illustrated  discourse,  figurative  language  as 
opposed  to  the  abstract,  general  statements  of  Abhi- 
dhamma =nippariyayena,  nippariyayato,  Vism  473, 
499;  cp.  DhsA  317  (figuratively). — 6.  mode,  manner, 
reason,  cause,  way  (=karana)  D  1.185  (imina  °ena),  186 
(id.)  ;  11.339  (ayag  p.  yena  'ena)  ;  DA  1. 106  (tena  tena 
"ena  in  some  way  or  other)  ;  DhsA  366  (imina  °ena  for 
this  reason)  ;  esp.  in  phrase  aneka-pariyayena  in  many 
(or  various)  ways  Vin  1.16,  45  ;  D  i.i  (cp.  DA  1.36),  174  ; 
M  1.24;  A  1.56;  Sn  p.  15.  —  7.  winding  round  (of  a 
tree:  branch),  in  doubtful  reading  at  J  vi.528  (see 
pariya).  —  See  also  nippariyaya. 

Pariyahata  [pari -f  ahata]  struck  out,  affected  with  (-°), 
only  in  phrase  takka°  "  beaten  out  by  argumenta- 
tions"  D  1. 16  (cp.  DA  1. 106);  M  1.520. 

Pariyahanana  (nt.)  [fr.  pari -(- ii -1- han]  striking,  beating 
Vism  142  (ahanana"  in  exposition  of  vitakka)  =Dhs.\ 
114  ("  circumimpinging  "  Expos.  151). 

Pariyittha  [pp.  of  pariyesati]  sought,  desired,  looked  for 
S  IV.62  (a°) ;  Miln  134  ;  Vism  344  (°ahara). 

Pariyitthi  =  pariyetthi  Sn  289  (SnA  316  reads  pariyetthi). 
Perhaps  we  should  read  pariyetthur)  (see  pariyesati). 

Pariyokkhanthati  [pari+ukkanthati]  to  have  great 
longing,  to  be  distressed  J  v. 41 7,  421  (ma  "kanthi). 

Pariyutthati  [pari-futthati]  to  arise,  pervade;  intrs.  to 
become  prepossessed,  to  be  pervaded  DhsA  366  (cittar) 
p.  ;  cora  magge  pariyutthigsu).  —  pp.  pariyutthita 
(q.  v.). 

PariyuUhana  (nt.)  [pari4-utthana,  it  is  doubtful  whether 
this  connection  is  correct,  in  this  case  the  meaning 
would  be  "  over-exertion."  BSk.  paryavasthana 
points  to  another  connection,  see  Divy  185]  state  of 
being  possessed   (or  hindered)   by   (-"),   prepossession. 


bias,  outburst  M  1.18,  Kvu  xiv.6  (thinamiddha°),  136; 
A  1.66  (°ajjhosana)  ;  v.  198  (adhitthana-°samutthana) ; 
Nd*  under  tanha"  (=Dhs  1059,  where  trsl"  is  "per- 
vading," based  on  expl°  at  DhsA  366:  uppajjamana 
[scil.  tanha]  cittar)  pariyutthati,  and  allegorical  inter- 
pretation ibid.  :  the  heart  becomes  possessed  by  lust 
as  a  road  by  highwaymen)  ;  Pug  2  i  (avijja") ;  Vbh  383 
(where  7  pariyutthana  [sic  !  pi.  m.]  are  enum""  in  the 
same  set  as  under  headings  of  anusaya  &  saijyojana, 
thus  placing  p.  into  the  same  category  as  these  two) ; 
Dhs  390,  1061  (avijja"),  1162  (id.);  Nett  13,  14,  18,  37, 
79  sq.  ;  DhsA  238  ;  ThA  80  ;  Vism  5  (with  vitikkama 
&  anusaya).     Cp.  also  adhitthana. 

Pariyutthita  [pari-l-utthita,  with  V.  1.  at  D  11. 104  pari- 
vutthita  and  BSk.  rendering  paryavasthita :  see  re- 
marks on  pariyutthana  and  Dial,  ii.iii]  possessed  by 
(the  C.  expl"  as  given  K.S.  320  is  "  abhibhuta "), 
biassed,  taken  up  by,  full  of  (-*)  M  1.18;  111.14; 
S  IV.240  (maccheramala°  ceto);  A  1.281  ;  11.58;  It  43 
(ditthigatehi) ;  Kvu  1.91  (kama-raga°) ;  ThA  78 ; 
Sdhp  581. 

-citta  whose  heart  is  possessed  by  (-°)  D  n.104  (Ma- 
rena) ;  PvA  142  (maccheramala"),  195  (id.),  279  (kilesa- 
samudacarena).  -tthayin  being  rooted  in  preposses- 
sion, affected  by  bias,  S  in. 3  sq.  (so  read  for  pariyuttha- 
tthayin  ?). 

PariyudJharati   [pari-l-udaharati]    to   utter   solemnly,    to 

proclaim  aloud  DhsA  i    (aor.  °ahasi). 

Pariyetthi  [pari-l-etthi  of  esati,  a-l-is]  search  for  D  1.222  ; 
A  1.93  (amisa°  &  dhamma");  in. 416;  Sn  289  (vijja- 
carana^)  J  1.14  ;  Nett  1,5;  DA  1.271. 

Pariyeti  [pari-i-i]  to  go  about,  to  go  round,  encircle, 
encompass  ;  ger.  paricca  (q.  v.).  The  pp.  is  represented 
by  pareta,  see  also  pareti  which  seems  to  stand  for 
pari}'eti. 

Pariyena  [fr.  pari-l-i,  cp.  Sk.  *paryayana]  going  round, 
walking  round  ;  of  a  ship  :  sailing  round,  tour,  voyage 
S  V.51  (pariyenaya,  v.  1.  pariyadaya)  =  A  iv.127  (reads 
pariyadaya  v.  1.  pariyaya).     Reading  is  doubtful. 

Pariyesati  [pari -1- esati,  cp.  BSk.  paryesate  to  investigate 
AvS  1.339.  The  P.  word  shows  confusion  between 
esati  &  icchati,  as  shown  by  double  forms  "itthui)  etc. 
See  also  anvesati]  to  seek  for,  look,  search,  desire  D 
1.223  ("esamana  ppr.)  ;  Sn  482  (id.);  S  1.177.  181; 
IV.62  ;  A  11.23.  -5.  247;  Nd'  262;  Nd*  427  (-fpati- 
labhati  and  paribhunjati) ;  J  1.3.  138;  Miln  109,  313; 
DhA  III. 263  (ppr.  "esanto) ;  PvA  31  ;  Sdhp  506.  —  grd. 
"esitabba  S  11.130;  inf.  °esitur|  SnA  316;  and  "elfhur) 
(conj.  "itthuri  ?)  Sn  289  (cp.  SnA  316  which  gives 
reading  °etthur|  as  gloss);  ger.  "esitva  SnA  317,  414; 
—  pp.  pariyesita  &  pariyittha  (q.  v.).  Cp.  for  similar 
formation  &  meaning  ajjhesati  with  pp.  ajjhesita  & 
ajjhittha.  —  Cp.  vi°. 

Pariyesana  (f)  &  "na  (nt.)  [fr.  pariyesati]  search,  quest, 
inquiry  (a)  (°na)  D  11.58,  5i,  280  (twofold,  viz.  sevi- 
tabba  and  asevitabba) ;  in. 289  ;  M  1.161  (twofold,  viz. 
ariya  &  anariya)  ;  A  11.247  (id.);  S  1.143;  11.144,  171; 
111.29  ;  IV. 8  sq.  (assada°  &  adinava") ;  A  1.68  j(kama°), 
93.  —  (b)  (°na)  Ndi  262  (°chanda. -Hpatilabha"  &  pari- 
bhoga°) ;  DhA  in. 256  (kamagune  "ussukka).  With 
patiggahana  &  paribhoga  at  DhA  1.75. 

Pariyesita  [pp.  of  pariyesati]  searched,  sought  for,  desired 
It  121.     See  also  pariyittha. 

Pariyoga  [fr.  pari-l-yuij  cauldron  (see  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.) 
Miln  iiS. 

Pariyogaya  at  M  1.480  is  contracted  form  (ger.)  of  pari- 
yogahitva  (so  expl''  by  C). 


Pariyogajha 


57 


Parivaddhati 


Pariyogalba  [PP-  of  pariyogahati.  see  also  ogadha']  dived 

into,    penetrated   into,    immersed   in    (loc.)    Yin    1.181  ; 

U  1. 1  111  ;  M  I.  jSu  ;  S  11.58  ;  iv.  528  ;  Vbh  3J9  ;  Miln  J83. 

-dhamma  one  who  has  penetrated  into  the  Dhamma 

Yin  i.io  ;  A  IV.18O,  210  ;  Ud  49. 

Pariyogaha  [pari+ogaha]  diving  into,  penetration; 
only  in  cpd.  dup°  hard  to  penetrate,  unfathomable 
S  IV. 376  ;  Miln  70. 

Pariyogahati  &  °gaheti  [pari+ogahati]  to  penetrate, 
fathom,  scrutinise  A  11.84;  '^.13,  145  sq.  (paiiiiaya) ; 
J  1.34 1  ;  Pug  33  (a°).  48  sq.     Cp.  ajjhogahati. 

Pariyogahana  (nt.)  &  a  (f.)  [pari  +  ogahana]  plunging 
into,  penetration  Ps  1.106,  112;  11,183;  Dhs  390  (a°), 
425  (a°);  Pug2i  (a°);  DhsA  26<i. 

Pariyottharati  [pari  +  ottharati]  to  spread  all  over  (intrs.) 
Miln  197. 

Pariyodapana  (nt.)  &  a  (f.)  [fr.  pariyodapeti] ,  cleansing, 
purification  A  i.2i>y  (cittassa)  ;  Dh  183  (  =  vodapana 
DhA  III  237)  ;  Nett  44.  In  BSk.  distorted  to  paryada- 
pana  MN'astu  111.12  ( -  Dh  183). 

Pariyodapita  [pp-  of  pariyodapeti]  cleansed,  purified  Nett 

44  (cittar)). 

Pariyodapeti  fpari+odapeti.  of  Caus.  of  da''  to  clean]  to 
cleanse,  purify  M  1.25;  Dh  68  (=vodapeti  parisodheti) 
DhA  II.  162  ;  >fett  44;  ThA  237  (indriyani).  — pp.  pari- 
yodata  &  pariyodapita  (q.  v.). 

Pariyodata  (adj.)  [pari  +  odSta,  cp.  pariyodapeti]  i.  very 
clean,  pure,  cleansed,  mostly  comb""  with  parisuddha 
(+)  r)  1.75,  76  (+);  M  l.-r,;  S  1.198;  111.235  (+); 
V.301  ;  A  HI. 27  (+);  IV.120  sq.  ;  J  v. 369  (+  ;  see  pari- 
yapadana)  ;  Pug  60;  DA  1.219;  DhA  iv.72  {+);  Y\A 
138.  —  2.  very  clever,  accomplished,  excellent  [cp. 
BSk.  parj'avadata  in  same  meaning  at  Divy  ino] 
J  111.281  ("sippa)  ;  Yism  136  (id). 

Pariyodapaka  (adj.)  [fr.  pariyodapeti]  cleansing,  purifying 
Yism  149  (nana). 

Pariyodha  [pari  +  yodha]  defence  A  1.154. 

Pariyonaddha  [pp-  of  pariyonandhati,  cp.  onaddha  & 
BSk.  paryavanaddha  "  overgrown  "  Divy,  120,  125] 
covered  over,  enveloped  D  1.246  ;  ill. 223  (a") ;  M  1.25  , 
S  v. 263  ;  A  11.2  1 1  (uddhasta+  ) ;  iv.86  ;  J  1.31)  ;  Miln  161  ; 
SnA  596  (  ^  nivuta)  ;  DhA  in.  199  ;  Pv.\  i  72  (taca^). 

Pariyonandhati  rpari+  avanandhati]  to  tie  down,  put  over, 
envelop,  cover  up  Yin  11. 137;  S  v. 122  ;  J  111.398  ;  Dh.\ 
III. 153.  —  pp.  pariyonaddha  (q.  v.). 

Pariyonandhana  (nt.)  [fr.  above]  covering  DA  1. 135; 
DhA  III  198. 

Pariyonaha  [pari+onaha]  enveloping,  covering  D  1.246 
(     nivarana) ;  Dhs  i  157  (cp.  D/ix  trsl.  311);  Miln  yi'. 

Pariyosana  (nt  )  [pari  +  osana  of  ava+sa]  i.  end,  finish, 
conclusion  J  1.106  (sacca°  =desana°) ;  PvA  9  (desana" 
and  passim).  136  (.'lyfiha'"),  162  (id),  281  (^anta). 
Often  contracted  with  adi  beginning  A:  majjha  middle 
(see  e.  g.  Sn,\  327).  csp  in  phrase  adi-kalyana  majjhe 
kalyana  "kalyana  with  reference  to  the  Dhamma  (expl'" 
as  "  ekag.\tha  pi  hi  samanta-bhaddakatta  dhammassa 
pafhamapadena  adik°  dutiyatatiya-padehi  majjhe  k' 
pacchima-padena  pariyosanak°  "  etc.  at  SnA  444).  e.  g. 
D  1.62  ;  It  1 1 1  &  passim.  —  2.  end,  i.  e.  perfection,  ideal, 
Arahantship  (see  on  these  fig.  meanings  and  its  appi" 
to  Nibbana  DA  1.175.  176)  D  1.203  (brahmacariya  +)  ; 
11.283  (cp-  Dial.  11.316);  111.55  (brahmacariyaH- ) ; 
S  v  230  ;  A  111.363  (nibbana"),  376  (brahmacariya"); 
Yism  5. 


Pariyosapeti  [Caus.  of  pari  +  ava+sa,  Sk.  syati,  of  which 
pp.  pariyosita  cp.  osapeti]  i.  to  make  fulfil  Yin  in. 155  ; 
DA  1. 241  ;  ThA  159  (for  khepeti  Th  2,  168). —  2.  to  bring 
to  an  end,  to  finish  Yism  244. 

Pariyosita  i.  [pp.  of  pari  +  ava+sa]  finished,  concluded, 
satHsfied,  D  11.224;  M  '•■-  (paripunna+ ).  —  2.  [pp.  of 
pari  +  a va  +  iri,  cp.  ajjhosita]  fixed    on,  bent   on    Miln 

140  ("sankappa). 

Parirakkhava  (nt.)  [fr.  pari  +  rak?]  guarding,  preserving, 
keeping  Miln  356,  402  ;  PvA  130. 

Parirakkhati  [pari+rak?.  cp.  abhirakkhati]  to  guard, 
protect ;  preserve,  maintain  Sn  678  (pot.  "rakkhe) ; 
Aliln  410  ;  Sdhp  413,  553  (silar)). 

Pariranjita  [pari  +  ranjita]  dyed,  coloured  ;  fig.  marked  or 
distinguished  by  (instr.)  Miln  75. 

Parilaha  [pari  +  daha  of  dah,  cp.  paridahati.  On  change 
of  d  and  )  see  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  42']  burning,  fever ;  fig. 
fever  of  passion,  consumption,  distress,  pain  D  111.238 
(avigata"),  289  (°nanatta) ;  M  i.mi  (kame)  ;  S  11143  sq. 
("nanatta).  151  (kama°  ;  vyapada",  vihigsa") ;  111.7  sq. 
(tanha,  pipasa,  p.).  190  (vigata°)  ;  iv.387  ;  v.156  (kaya- 
smir)),  451  (jati°,  jara°) ;  A  1.68  (kama°).  137  (ragaja, 
mohaja  etc.);  11.197  (vighata) ;  in. 3.  245  sq.,  388  sq.  ; 
IV. 461  sq.  ;  Sn  715  (— ragajo  va  dosajo  va  appamattako 
pi  p.  SnA  498);  Dh  90  (cp.  Dh.\  11. 166:  duvidho  p. 
kayiko  cetasiko  ca) ;  Nd^  374  (kama°) ;  J  11.220;  Miln 
97.  165,  318  ;  ThA  41,  292  ;  VvA  44  ;  PvA  230. 

Parillaka  [cp.  Sk.  pirili,  pirilli  Brh.  Sai)h.  86,  44]  N.  of  a 
bird  C  on  Th  1,  49. 

Parivaccha  (nt.)  [formation  from  ger.  of  pari+  vrt,  corresp. 
to  *parivrtyar)  (?)]  being  active,  preparation,  outfit 
J  v.46 ;  VI. 2 1  (gamana") ;  DhA  1.207  (gloss  &  v.  1. 
gamana-parisajja),  395  (v.  1.  parisajja). 

Mole.  According  to  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  parivaccha  is 
wrong  spelling  for  parivacca  which  is  abstr.  from 
pariyatta  (*pariyatya),  with  va  for  ya  as  in  pavacchati, 
pavccchati  =Sk.  prayacchati. 

Parivajjana    (nt.)     [fr.     pari  +  vfj]     avoiding,     avoidance 
M.   1.7.   10;  A  111.387,  389;  Miln  408;  Yism  33.     As  f. 
a  at  \'ism  132,  and  ibid,  as  abstr.  parivaj Janata. 

Parivajjeti  [pari+ vajjeti,  Caus.  of  vfj]  to  shun,  avoid, 
keep  away  from  (ace.)  M  1.10;  S  1.69,  102,  188,  224; 
Sn  57  (=vivajjeti  Nd^  419),  395  sq.,  768  (kame,  cp. 
Nd'  6),  771  ;  It  71  ;  Dh  123  (papani),  269;  J  IV.37S 
(fut.  "essati)  ;  Pv  iv.i*'  (nivesanai))  ;  iv.i"  (loke  adin- 
nar)  °ayassu) ;  Miln  91  (grd.  °ajjayitabba),  300,  408; 
PvA  150  (v.  1.  "ajjati),  221  (jivitarj.  for  vijahati,  better 
read  with  v.  1.  pariccajati). 

Parivatuma  (?)  (adj.)  [doubtful  spelling  &  expl";  perhaps 
"  parivattin  ?]  forming  a  circle,  circular  D  1.22  (trsl''  "  a 
path  could  be  traced  round  it  "  Dial.  1.36).  Can  it  be 
misspelling  for  pariyanta  ?  Kern.  Toei\  s.  v.  equals  it 
to  Sk.  pari  vartman,  and  adds  reference  kata  "  bounded  " 
(syn.  paricchinna)  Miln  132. 

Parivatta  [fr.  pari  +  vft,  cp.  parivattana]  round,  circle, 
siKcessicm,  mainly  in  two  phrases,  viz.  catu°  fourfold 
circle  M  111.67;  S  in. 59  (paficupadana-kkhandhe,  cp. 
attha-parivalta-adhideva-naiiadassana  A  iv.304)  ;  and 
nati^  circle  of  relatives  D  1.6 1  (  iiati  DA  1.1 70;  cp. 
expl°  abandhan'  atthena  nati  yeva  iiati  parivatto 
DA  1.181  -PugA  236)  ;  11.241  ;  M  111.33  ;  P"g  57  ;  ThA 
68;  YvA  87.  —  See  further  at  DA  1.143  ('ija"),  283 
(id.,  but  spelt  °vatta) ;  SnA  210. 

Parivaddbati  [pari  +  vydh]  to  increase,  to  be  happy  or  pros- 
perous Miln  297  (cittar)  p.  ;  opp.  pariyadiyati). 


Parivannita 


58 


Parivitakkita 


(  =parinamati  PvA   144);   111.4* 
I  78.  —  Caus.  parivatteti  (q.  v.). 


Parivannita  [pp-  of  parivanneti]  extolled,  praised  Sdhp  557. 

Parivanneti  [pari+ vanneti]  to  describe,  praise,  extol 
J  VI.211  (ppr.  "vannayanto). — pp.  "vannita. 

Parivatta  (adj.)  [fr.  pari  +  vrt]  changing  round,  twisting, 
turning  ;  f.  pi.  ayo  J  v.431. 

Parivattaka  [fr.  parivatta]  circle  (lit.  turning  round) 
J  i.ioi  ;  cp.  parivattika  in  phrase  paligha"  (q.  v.). 

Parivattati  [pari+vrt]  i-  to  turn  round,  twist  (trs.  & 
intrs.),  go  about  Vin  11.220  ;  J  v.431  (singag) ;  Pv  IV.5' 
( =  pariyati  PvA  260) ;  Miln  118;  DA  1.265.  —  -■  (intrs.) 
to    change    about,    move,    change,    turn    to    Pv    n.io^ 

(id.   194) ;  in. 6^  ;  PvA 
Cp.  vipari°. 

Parivattana  (nt.)  [fr.  parivattati]  setting  going,  keeping 
up,  propounding  J  1.200  (°manta  adj.  one  who  knows 
a  charm)  ;  Nett  i  sq.,  106. 

Parivattita  [pp-  of  parivatteti]  i .  turned  round,  twisted 
J  1V.384.  —  2.  recited  Vism  96. 

Parivatteti  [Caus.  of  parivattati]  i.  to  turn  round  (trs.), 
to  turn  over  J  1.202  ;  11.275  (sarlrarj) ;  v. 2  i  7  ;  DA  1.244. 
—  2.  to  deal  with,  handle,  set  going,  put  forth,  recite 
Vism  96,  in  phrase  mantag  p.  to  recite,  practise  a  charm 
J  I.2CO,  253;  Pv  II. 6'^  (  =  sajjhayati  vaceti  PvA  97); 
cp.  mantag  pavatteti  &  pavattar  ;  sarat)  p.  to  make  a 
sound  J  1.405  ;  adhippayag  speak  out,  propound,  dis- 
cuss PvA  131.  —  3.  to  change,  exchange  \'in  11. 174: 
J  III. 437.  —  pp.  parivattita  (q.  v.). 

Parivadentika  (f)  [pari+ vadento+ika :  vadento  Being 
ppr.  Caus.  of  vad]  making  resound,  resounding,  in  cpd. 
godha°  "  string-resounding,"  i.  e.  a  string  instrument, 
lute  J  VI. 580  (cp.  Sk  *parivada  an  instrument  with 
which  the  lute  is  played).  —  Another  parivadentika 
we  find  at  J  vi.540  (C.  reading  for  T.  "vadantika,  with 
v.  1.  "devantika)  denoting  a  kind  of  bird  (eka  sakuna- 
jati). 

Parivasati  [pari -1- vas^]  to  stay,  dwell,  to  live  under  pro- 
bation Vin  in.iSb  (grd.  °vatthabba)  ;  iv.30,  127;  D 
1. 1  76;  M  1. 391  ;  S  II. 2  I  ;  Sn  697  (=pabbajitva  tapasa- 
vesena  vasati  SnA  490).  —  ppr.  med.  paribbasana  ;  pp. 
parivuttha  &  parivuttha  (q.  v.). 

Parivassati  at  Pv  11.9^*  is  to  be  read  as  paridhassati  (see 
paridahati). 

Parivabati  [pari4- vahati]  to  carry  about  Th  2,  439  (da- 
rake). 

Parivata  (-°)  [pp.  of  pari-i-va]  blown  round  or  through, 
i.  e.  tilled  with,  stirred  by  Miln  19  (isi-vata°). 

Parivadini  (f)  [fr.  pari -t- vad,  late  Sk.  the  same]  a  lute  of 
seven  strings  Abhp.  13S.  —  Sec  parivadentika. 

Parivara  [fr.  pari+vr]  i.  surrounding,  suite,  retinue, 
followers,  entourage,  pomp  J  1.151  ;  iv.38  ;  vi.75  ;  Pv,\ 
21,  30  (°caga-cetana,  read  pariccaga-cetana  ?)  ;  usually 
as  adj.  -°  surrounded  by,  in  company  of  Vin  1.3S  (dasa- 
sata°) :  A  11. 91  (deva°  &  asura°) ;  J  1.92  (maha-bhikkhu- 
sangha")  ;  Pug  52  (pheggu  sara°  ;  with  expl°  PugA  229  : 
rukkho  sayag-pheggu  hoti,  parivara-rukkha  pan'  assa 
sara  honti) ;  Miln  285  (dvisahassa-paritta-dipa-p°  a, 
cattaro  maha  dipa) ;  Vism  37  ;  DhA  in. 262  (paficasata- 
bhikkhu°)  ;  PvA  53  (acchara-sahassa°),  74  (dvisahassa- 
dipa°) ;  sa°  with  a  retinue  (of  .  .  .)  J  1.49  (cattaro  dipe)  ; 
PvA  20.  —  2.  followers,  accompaniment  or  possession 
as  a  sign  of  honour,  and  therefore  meaning  "respect," 
attendance,  homage,  fame  (cp.  paricara)  A  1.38  °sam- 
pada)  Ps  1. 1 72  (pariggaha.  p.,  paripura) ;  DhA  11.77: 
ThA24i  (dhana+  ,  riches  and  fame)  ;VbhA466  ;  PvA  137 
(sampatti=yaso) ;  VvA    122   (=yaso). — j.   ingredient. 


accessories  (pi),  requisite  J  1.266  (paiica-sugandhika°) ; 
Miln  290  (sa°  dana) ;  DA  1.297  ( =parikkhara).  —  4.  as 
N.  it  is  the  name  of  the  last  book  of  the  Vinaya  Pitaka 
("  The  Accessory  "),  the  Appendix  a  sort  of  resume  and 
index  of  the  preceding  books  SnA  97  (sa-parivaraka 
Vinaya-pitaka) ;  VbhA  432. 

Parivaraka  (adj.)  [parivara+ka]  accompanying,  forming 
a  retinue  J  v. 234.     See  also  parivara  4  and  paricaraka. 

Farivara);ia  (nt.)  [fr.  pari-f  vi]  i.  covering,  drapery  (so 
trsl.  at  K.S.  p.  45)  S  1.33.  —  2.  (adj.)  (-")  surrounded  by 
J  V.195  (=parikkhitta  C). 

Parivarita  [pp.  of  parivareti]  surrounded,  fig.  honoured 
S  1. 166,  192  =Th  1235;  J  11.48;  purakkhata+ )  ;  DhA 
IV.49  (=purakkhata  Dh  343);  DhsA  i  (devanag  ga- 
nena) ;  Davs  1.16  (v.  1.  for  parimarita). 

Parivareti  [Caus.  of  pari 4-  vf]  to  cover,  encompass,  sur- 
round J  1. 181  (nagarag  °ayigsu) ;  11. 102  (fut.  °essati) ; 
III. 371  (rukkhag)  ;  iv.405  (for  parikaroti) ;  vi.179. — 
ger.  parivaretva  used  as  prep,  "round"  J  1.172  (pok- 
kharanig).  —  In  meaning  "  to  serve,  attend  upon,"  also 
"  to  attend  upon  oneself,  to  amuse  oneself,"  parivareti 
is  often  erroneously  read  for  paricareti,  e.  g.  at  D  11.13  ; 
Pv  IV. i^'  (v.  1.  °careti) ;  PvA  228;  in  ppr.  med.  °vari- 
yamana  (with  v.  1.  ^cariyamana)  at  D  11. 21  ;  A  1.145; 
J  1.58  ;  VvA  92.  —  See  also  anuparivareti.  —  pp.  pari- 
varita (q.  v.). 

Parivasa  [fr.  pari4-vas'',  cp.  Epic  Sk.  .parivasa  only  in 
meaning  i]  i.  sojourn,  stay,  in  phrase  vipassana"  DhA 
III.  1 18  ;  DhsA  215.  —  2.  period  under  probation,  (living 
under)  probation  Vin  in.  186  (°g  vasati,  cp.  parivuttha) ; 
IV. 30  ;  S  n.2i  (°g  vasati).  °g  deti  to  allow  probation 
Vin  1.49;  II. 7;  IV. 30,  127;  °g  yacati  to  ask  for  proba- 
tion Vin  IV. 30,  127.  — samodhana'^  inclusive  probation 
Vin  11.48  sq.  ;  suddhanta"  probation  of  complete  puri- 
fication Vin  11.59  sq.  —  3.  period,  time  (lit.  staj'), 
interi'al,  duration  Ud  7  (eka-ratti°). 
-dana  the  allowance  of  probation  A  1.99. 

Pariv&sika  (adj.)  [fr.  pari-l- vas^,  see  parivasati]  i.  "  stay- 
ing," i.  e.  usual,  accustomed,  common  SnA  35  ("bhatta  ; 
or  is  it  "  fermented,"  and  thus  to  be  taken  to  No.  3  ?) ; 
a°  unusual,  new,  uncommon  J  11.435  (where  it  is  comb'' 
with  abhinava,  which  should  be  substituted  for  readings 
accunha,  abbhunha  &  abhinha  according  to  similar 
expl"  of  paccaggha  at  PvA  87),  with  v.  1.  samparivasita 
(well-seasoned?).  —  2.  a  probationer  Vin  11. 162.  In 
this  meaning  usually  spelt  pari"  (q.  v.).  —  3.  in  comb" 
cira"  (with  ref.  to  food)  it  may  be  interpreted  either  as 
"  staying  long,  being  in  use  for  a  long  time,"  i.  e.  stale  ; 
or  it  may  be  derived  fr.  vasa'  (odour,  perfume  or 
seasoning)  and  translated  (so  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  in  Expositor 
63,  64)  "  (ong-ferrnented  "  (better  "  seasoned  "?)  DhsA 
48  ("vasika  &  vasiya)  ;  ThA  29. 

Parivasita  (adj.)  [x^ixi+^p.  of  vaseti  fr.  vasa']  perfumed 
(all  round)  J  1.51  (v.  1  °varita)  ;  cp.  samparivasita  (well- 
seasoned  ?),  which  is  perhaps  to  be  read  at  J  11.435  for 
aparivasika. 

Parivitakka  [pari-f-  vitakka.  cp.  BSk.  parivitarka  Divy  291] 
reflection,  meditation,  thought,  consideration  M  11. 170 
(akara°),  Vin  n.74  ;  S  11.115  (id.);  A  11.193  (id.);  Miln 
13  ;  DhA  11.62  ;  DhsA  74  ;  VvA  3  ;  PvA  282  (vutta-°e 
nipata  in  expl"  of  niina).  Usually  in  phrase  cetasa 
ceto-parivitakka  mental  reflection,  e.  g.  D  l.i  17  ;  11.218  ; 
S  1. 121,  178;  111.96;  V.294  ;  A  III. 374  ;  and  cetaso- 
parivitakka,  e.  g.  D  1.134;  ^  ^1^.  103,  ^39;  11.273; 
in. 96,   103;  IV.  105;  v.  167;  A  11.20. 

Parivitakkita  [pp.  of  parivitakketi]  reflected,  meditated, 
thought  over  M  1.32  ;  S  1.193.  —  nt.  "g  reflection,  think- 
ing over  PvA  123  ("e  with  ref.  to  nuna,  i.  e.  particle  of 
reflection). 


I 
« 

II 


Parivitakketi 


59 


Parisa 


Parivitakketi  [pari+ vitakketi]  to  consider,  reflect,  medi- 
tate upon  J  III. 277.  — pp.  "vitakkita  (q.  v.). 

ParivitthiQ9a  [pari-l- vitthinna,  Sk.  vistlrna,  pp.,  of  vi-H 
sty]  spread  out  wide  Miln  99. 

Paririsaka  (adj.)  [fr.  parisati]  providing,  serving  food 
Vism  108. 

Paririsati  [pari  +  vis,  vivesti ;  same  use  of  parivise  (inf.) 
in  R.V.  x.bi'"]  to  serve  (with  food  =  instr.),  wait  upon, 
present,  offer  V'in  1.240  (bhattena) ;  11.77  (kanajakena 
bilangadutiyena) ;  D  11. 127;  J  1.87,  90;  11.277;  iv.116; 
Pv  11.8*  (  =  bhoieti  PvA  107) ;  ii.8»  (id.  109)  :  Vism  108. 
150  (sudo  bhattarar)  p.) ;  VvA  6 ;  PvA  42,  78. 

Parivlmagsati  [pari-l- vimarjsati,  Desid.  of  pari  +  man, 
cp.  vimagsa  for  mimar|sa]  to  think  over,  consider  thor- 
oughly, examine,  search  S  11.80  sq.  ;  It  42  =Sn  975  (ppr. 
dhammar)  "vimagsamana,  cp.  Nd'  508);  DA  1.134; 
DhA  IV.117  (attanarj). 

ParivImaQsa  (f)  [pari-l- vimagsa]  complete  inquiry, 
thorough  search  or  examination  M  111.85  ;  S  111.331  ;  v.68  ; 
SnA  173. 

Parirattha  &  °vuttha  [pp.  of  parivasati]  staying  (a  period), 
living  (for  a  time),  spending  (or  having  spent)  one's 
probation  (cp.  BSk.  paryusita-parivasa  AvS  1-259) 
Vin  111.186  (tth);  S  11.21  (tfh). 

Parivnta  [pp.  of  pari-(-vi]  surrounded  by  {-"  or  instr.) 
S  1.177;  J  1. 152  (miga-gana°),  203  (devaganena) ;  11.127 
(dasi-gan^°)  ;  III. 371  (maha-jana°)  ;  vi.75 ;  Vv  16' 
(  =  samantato  p.  VvA  81);  PvA  3  (dhutta-jana°),  62 
(parijana"),  140  (deva-gana°). 

Parivethita  [pp.  of  pari-(-ve?t]  enveloped,  covered  Miln 
22.     Opp.  nibbetthita  (q.  v.). 

Parive^a  (nt.)  [etym.  ?]  I.  all  that  belongs  to  a  castle, 
a  mansion  and  its  constituents  Vv  84"  (expl''  at  VvA 
351  as  follows:  veniyato  pekkhitabbato  parivenar) 
pasada-kutagara-ratti-tthan'  adisampannarj  pakara- 
parikkhittar)  dvarakotthaka-yuttar)  avasai))  ;  DhA  1.260 
(pasada°).  —  2.  a  cell  or  private  chamber  for  a  bhikkhu 
(cp.  Vin.  Texts  111.109,  203)  Vin  1.49  =  11.210  (p.  kot- 
thaka  upatthana-sala) ;  1.2 16  (viharena  viharag  pari- 
venena  parivenar)  upasankamitva),  247  (id.);  11. 167 
(vihara-t-);  111.69,  119  (susammatthar)) ;  iv.52,  252 
(°vasika)  ;  J  1. 126;  Miln  15  (°r)  sammajjati),  19;  Vism 
go  ;  DhA  11. 179  (°dvara).;  iv.204 ;  VbhA  13. 

PariveQi  (f)  =pariveria  2  ;  Vin  1.80  (anu  pariveniyag  each 
in  their  own  cell),  106  (id.). 

Parivesaka  (adj.)  [fr.  pari-l-vi?]  waiting,  serving  up  meals 
Vism  109.  —  f.  °ika  ThA  i  7. 

Parivesana  (f)  [fr.  pari-)- vis]  distribution  of  food,  feeding, 
serving  meals  Vin  1.229;  S  l.i  72  ;  Sn  p.  13  (  =  bhatta- 
vissagga  SnA  140) ;  Miln  247,  249  ;  DhA  iv.162  ;  PvA  leg 
("tthana),  135  (id.). 

Parivyatta  (adj.)  [pari 4-  vyatta]  quite  conspicuous  or  clear 
Vism  162. 

Parisagsibbita  [pari -1- pp.  of  sagsibbati]  sewn  together,  en- 
twined DhA  III. 198  (v.  1.  for  sar)sibbita-)- ). 

Paiisakkati  [pari-t-sakkati]  to  go  about  to  (with  inf.  or 
dat),  to  endeavour,  undertake,  try  Vin  li.i8  =  A  iv.345 
(alabhaya) ;  J  1.173  (vadhaya) ;  n.394  ;  Pv  iv.52  (  =  payo- 
gar)  karoti  PvA  259). 

Parisankati  [pari-l-sankati]  to  suspect,  fear,  have  appre- 
hension J  iii.2in,  541  ;  DhA  1. 81.  —  pp.  "sankita  (q.  v.). 
Cp.  asankati. 

Parisanka  (f)  [fr.  pari -1- sank]  suspicion,  misgiving  Vin 
IV. 314;  D  III. 218.     Cp.  asanka. 


Parisankita  [pp.  of  parisankati]  suspecting  or  suspected, 
having  apprehensions,  fearing  Vin  11243  (di{tha-suta°) ; 
A  III.  1 28;  J  IV.214;  v.80  ;  Miln  372;  DhA  1.223  (asan- 
kita°).  —  Cp.  asankita  &  ussankita. 

Parisanka  in  °patha  the  region  round  the  path  of  stakes 
&  sticks,  N.  of  a  path  leading  up  to  Gijjha-pabbata  (see 
expl"  at  J  111.485)  J  III. 484. 

Parisangahapeti  [pari -1- Cans,  of  sanganhati]  to  induce 
someone  to  mention  or  relate  something  J  vi.328. 

Parisa^ba  (adj.)  [pariH-satha]  very  fraudulent  or  crafty 
Pug  23  (.satha-(- ). 

Parisa^thati  [pari-l-santhati]  to  return  into  the  former 
state,  to  be  restored  ;  aor.  °santhasi  J  111.341. 

Pari8a^ha  (adj,.)  [pari-l-sanha]  very  smooth  or  soft  Miln 
198. 

Parisandeti  [pari  4- Cans,  of  syad]  to  make  flow  round,  to 
make  overflow,  to  fill,  in  phrase  kayag  abhisandeti  p. 
D  1.75,  214;  M  111.92  sq.  etc.  expl"*  as  "  samantato 
sandeti  "  at  DA  1.2 1 7.  —  pp.  parisanna  (q.  v.). 

Parisanna  [pp.  of  parisandati,  cp.  parisandeti]  surrounded 
or  filled  with  water,  drenched,  well-watered  D  1.75  = 
M  III. 94. 

Parisappati  [pari-t-sn"]  to  run  about,  crawl  about,  to  be 
frightened  Dh  342,  343  (=sar)sappati  bhayati  DhA 
iv.49). 

Parisappana  (f.)  [fr.  parisappati]  running  about,  fear, 
hesitation,  doubt,  always  comb""  with  asappana  and 
only  found  with  ref.  to  the  exegesU  of  "  doubt  "  (vici- 
kiccha  or  kankha)  Nd^  i  ;  Dhs  425  (cp.  Dhs  trsl.  116 
and  DhsA  260) ;  DA  1.69. 

Parisamantato  (adv.)  [pari 4- samantato]  from  all  sides 
VvA  236. 

Parisambahati  [parin-sambahati]  to  stroke,  to  rub  from 
all  sides  M  11. 120  ;  S  1. 178,  194  ;  A  v. 65. 

Parisarati  [pari-t-smr,  but  according  to  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v. 
pari  here  fr.  Prk.  padi  =  Sk.  prati,  thus  for  pratismarati] 
to  remember,  recollect  J  vi.199  (read  parissarar)). 

Parisahati  [pari-l-sahati]  to  overcome,  conquer,  master, 
get  the  better  of  S  IV.112;  exegetically  in  formula 
sahati  p.  abhibhavati  ajjhottharati  etc.  Nd'  12,  361 
=  Nd''  420. 

Parisa  (f)  [cp.  Vedic  parisad ;  in  R.V.  also  parisad  as  adj. 
surrounding,  lit.  "sitting  round,"  fr.  pari-l-sad.  —  In 
Pali  the  cons,  stem  has  passed  into  a  vocalic  a-stem, 
with  the  only  preservation  of  cons.  loc.  sg.  parisati 
Vin  IV. 285  ;  A  11.181)  (i)  ;  J  v. 61  ;  DA  1.141  and  parisatig 
M  1.68  ;  A  II. 180  (v.  1.) ;  J  v. 332,  besides  the  regular  forms 
parisayag  (loc.  sg.)  Vin  11.296;  A  v.70  ;  and  parisasu 
(loc.  pi.)  S  11.27;  It  ^4]  surrounding  people,  group, 
collection,  company,  assembly,  association,  multitude. 
Var.  typical  sets  of  a.ssemblies  are  found  in  the  Canon, 
viz  ,  eight  assemblies  (khattiya°,  brahmana",  gahapati", 
samana°,  Catummaharajika°,  Tavatigsa",  Mara°,  Brah- 
ma", or  the  assemblies  of  nobles,  brahmins,  house- 
holders, wanderers,  of  the  angel  hosts  of  the  Guardian 
Kings,  of  the  Great  Thirty-Three,  of  the  Maras,  and  of 
the  Brahmas)  D  11.IC9;  111.260;  M  1.72;  A  iv.307. — 
fnur  assemblies  (the  fir.st  four  of  the  above)  at  D  111.236  ; 
Nd'  163  ;  other  four,  representing  the  Buddha's  Order 
(bhikkhu",  bhikkhuni",  upasaka",  upasika",  or  the  ass. 
of  bhikkhus,  nuns,  laymen  and  female  devotees ;  cp. 
same  enuAi"  at  Divy  299)  S  11.218  ;  A  v.io  ;  cp.  J  1.40 
(catu-parisa-majjhc),  85  (id.),  I48(id.).  — <aio  assemblies 
(viz.  Brahma",  Mara")  af  D  in. 260  ;  allegorically  two 
groups  of  people  (viz.  saratta-ratta  &  asaratta-ratta) 


Parisincati 


60 


Parihata 


M  II. 160  >=A  1.70  sq.  —  For  var.  uses  of  the  word  see  the 
foil,  passages:  Vin  11. 188,  jg6  (rajaparisa)  ;  111.12 
(Bhagava  mahatiya  parisaya  parivuto  surrounded  by  a 
great  multitude)  ;  iv.153  (gen.  parisaya)  ;  M  1.153  (neva- 
pika°);  11.160;  111.47;  S  1.155  (brahma"),  162  sarajika 
p.),  177;  A  1.25  (maha°),  70  (uttana  p.).  71  (ariya°),  242 
(tisso  p.);  11.19  ("aya  mando),  133,  1S3,  1S5  (deva°)  ; 
III. 253  (khattiya")  ;  iv.80.  114;  It  64  (upasaka  °sasu 
virocare)  ;  Sn  3.(9,  825  sq.  ;  J  1.151,  2G4  ;  vi.224  (omis- 
saka°) ;  Pv  iii.9«  ;  Miln  187,  249,  359  {38  rajaparisa,  or 
divisions  of  the  royal  retinue)  ;  PvA  2.  6,  12,  21,  78  and 
passim  ;  Sdhp  277.  saparisa  together  with  the  assembly 
Vin  IV.  7 1  ;  adv.  °g  ThA  69.  —  Note.  The  form  of  parisa 
as  first  part  of  a  cpd.  is  parisa°  (  =  *parisad.  which  latter 
is  restored  in  cpd.  parisaggata  =  *parisad-gata).  —  See 
also  parisagga. 

-antare  within  the  assembly  J  111.61.  -4vacara  one 
who  moves  in  the  society,  i.  e.  the  Brotherhood  of  the 
Bhikkhus  A  !V.3i4  ;  v. 10.  -gata  (ggata)  having  entered 
a  company  Sn  397  (  =puga-majjha-gata  SnA  377) ;  Pug 
29.  -finu  knowing  the  assembly  A  111.148;  iv.113 
(4-kalaiififi  puggalaiiiiu),  cp.  1)  111.252.  -dussana 
defilement  of  the  Assembly  A  11.225  (opP-  "sobhana). 
-pariyanta  the  outer  circle  of  the  congregation  DhA  1.67  ; 
111.17;.  -majjhe  in  the  midst  of  the  assembly  J  1.367; 
"•352  ;  PvA  1 1 .  -sarajja  being  afraid  of  the  a.  Miln 
196  =Nd^  470  (so  read  for  parisarajja). 

Parisincati  [pari  +  siiicati]   to  sprinkle  all  over,  to  bathe 
M  1.161  ;  S  1.8  (gattani) ;  Sdhp  595. 

Parisibbita   [pp.   of  pari  +  sibbati]   sewn  round,  bordered 
Vin  1.186  ;  J  v. 377. 

Paiisukkha    (adj.)    [pari  +  sukkha]    dried    up,    very    dry 
J   1.2 15   (of  fields);  Miln  302   (of  the  heart);  PvA  64 

(°sarira). 


Intens.  of  su?]  dried  up, 


Parisukkhita  [pp.  of  pari+suk?. 
withered  Miln  303  (°hadaya). 

Parisujjhati  [Pass,  of  pari4-  sudh]  to  become  clear  or  clean, 
to  be  purified  S  1.214;  Sn  183,  184.  —  pp.  parisuddha 
(q.  v.). 

Parisuddha  (adj.)  [pari4-pp.  of  sudh]  clean,  clear,  pure, 
perfect  Vin  11.237;  M  i-26  ;  iii.ii  ;  S  11  199  ("dhamma- 
desana) ;  111.235  ;  V.301,  354  ;  A  111.125  (°nana-dassana) ; 
IV.  120  sq.  ;  J  1.265  ;  Vism  2  (accanta") ;  Pug  68  (sama- 
hite  citte  parisuddha);  Miln  106;  DA  1.177,  219;  SnA 
445  (apanetabbassa  abhavato  niddosa-bhavcna  p.)  ; 
PvA  44,  70.  Very  freq.  comb"!  with  pariyodata  (q.  v.). 
—  aparisuddha  unclean  \'in  11.236,  M  1.17. 

-ajiva  (adj.)  of  pure  livelihood  D  1.63  (see  DA  1.181)  ; 
A  111.124  (tp-  parisuddhi). 

Parisuddhatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  parisuddha]  purity,  clean- 
liness, perfection  M  1.36  ;  Miln  103  sq.  ;  Vism  168.  —  As 
f.  pari-suddhata  at  Vism  30. 

Parisuddhi  (f.)  [fr.  pari+  sudh]  purity,  purification  S  1.165. 
The  usual  spelling  is  parisuddhi  (q.  v.). 

Parisumbhati  [pai;i4-sumbhati]  to  strike,  hit,  throw  down 
J  iH-347  (=paharati  C.) ;  vi.370,  376  (id.  C). 

Parisumbhana  (nt.)  [fr.  pari4-sumbh]  throwing  down 
J  VI. 508  (bhumiya  p.). 

Parisussati  [parL4- sussati]  to  dry  quite  up,  waste  quite 
away  J  11.5,  339.  437.  _  Caus.  parisoseti  (q.  v.). 

Parisussana  (nt.)  [fr.  pari4-su?]  drying  up  completely, 
withering  J  v,97. 

Parisedita  [pp.  of  pari4-Caus.  of  svid,  Sk.  parisvedita  in 
slightly  diff.  use]  heated,  hatched,  made  ripe  M  1.104 
(bijani) ;  S  in.153  ;  Vin  111,3  ;  Aiv.  125  (aij(Jani),.  1 76. 


Parisesa  [pari  +  sesa]  remnant,  remainder,  rest;  only  neg. 
aparisesa  (adj.)  without  remainder,  complete,  entire 
M  1.92,  110;  A  111.  166  =  Pug  64;  A  IV. 428  ("ilanadas- 
sana). 

Parisoka  [pari+soka]  great  grief,  severe  mourning  Ps  1.38 
(anto°  in  def.  of  soka). 


parisodheti]  cleansing,  purification 


Parisodhana  (nt.)  [fr. 
Miln  215. 

Parisodhita  [pp.  of  parisodheti]  cleaned,  cleansed,  purified 
Miln  415  ;  Sdhp  414, 

Parisodheti  [pari+Caus.  of  sudh]  to  cleanse,  clean,  purify 
M  111,3.  35  (aor.  "sodhesi)  ;  Sn  407  (aor.  "sodhayi) ; 
DhA  11.162  (vodapeti+).  —  Freq.  in  phrase  cittar)  p. 
to  cleanse  one's  heart  (from  =  abl.)  D  111.49;  S  iv.104  ; 
A  11.2 1 1  ;  III. 92  ;  Nd'  484;  Pug  68. — pp.  parisodhita 
(q.  v.). 

Parisosa  [fr.  pari-h  su?]  becoming  dried  up,  dryness,  wither- 
ing away  S  1.91 . 

Farisosita  [pp.  of  parisoseti]  dried  up,  withered  away 
Sdhp  g. 

Parisoseti  [Caus.  of  parisussati]  to  make  dry  up,  to  ex- 
haust, make  evaporate  (water)  Miln  389. — pp.  pari- 
sosita  (q.  v.). 

Parissahjati  ("ssajati  ?)  [pari -l- svaj]  to  embrace,  enfold, 
J  1.466  ;  VI. 156  (°itva,  v.  1.  "ssajitva  &  palisajjitva). 

Parissanta  [pp.  of  parissamati]  tired,  fatigued,  exhausted 
Pv  11.9^  ;  VvA  305  ;  Sdhp  9,  101. 

Parissama  [fr.  pari-t-sram]  fatigue,  toil,  exhaustion,  VvA 
-89,  305  (addhana°  from  journeying);  PvA  3,  43,  113, 
127. 

Parissaya  (m.  &  nt.)  [fr.  pari-(-sri?  Etym.  doubtful,  cp. 
Weber,  Inii.  Streifen  111.395  and  Andersen,  Pali  Reader 
11.167,  't>S]  danger,  risk,  trouble  M  i.io  (utu°) ;  A  111.388 
(id.);  Sn  42,  45,  770,  921,  960  sq.  ;  Dh  328  (°ayani  = 
siha-vyaggh'-adayo  pakata-parissaye,  raga-bhaj'a-dosa- 
bhay'  adayo  paticchanna-paiissaye  DhA  iv.29) ;  Nd' 
12  =Nd'-  42U  (where  same  division  into  pakata"  &  patic- 
channa") ;  Nd'  360,  365;  J  1.418;  11.405;  v. 315,  441 
(antaramagga  p.  cp.  paripantha  in  same  use) ;  Vism  34 
(utu°) ;  SnA  88  (expl''  as  paricca  sayanti  ti  p.) ;  DhA 
111.199  (°mocana) ;  PvA2i6,  DhsA  330. 

Parissavana  (nt.)  [fr.  pari 4- Caus.  of  sru]  a  water  strainer, 
filter  (one  of  the  requisites  of  a  bhikkhu)  Vin  1.209, 
II. 1 19  and  passim;  J  1.198;  111.377;  Nd'  226;  DhA 
in. 260  (udaka°) ;  VvA  40,  63  ;  Sdhp  593. 

Parissavanaka  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  parissavana]  only  neg.  a° : 
1.  one  who  has  no  strainer  Vin  11. 1 19  ;  J  1. 198. — 3.  not 
to  be  filtered,  i.  e.  so  that  there  is  nothing  left  to  be 
filtered  J  1.400  (so  read  for  "ssavanaka).  Or  is  it  "  not 
overflowing  "  ? 

Parissavita  [pp.  of  parissaveti]  strained,  filtered  J  1.198 
(udaka). 

Parissaveti  [Caus.  of  pari  4- sru]  to  strain  or  filter  J  1.198 
(paniyar)) ;  DA  1.206  (udakag) ;  111.207  (paniyar)).  —  pp. 
parissavita  (q.  v.). 

Parissuta  [pp.  of  pari -1- sru]  overflowing  J  vi.328  (=ati- 
punnatta  pagliaramana). 

Parihata  (°hata)  [pp.  of  pariharati]  surrounded  by  (-") 
encircled;  only  in  phrase  sukha-parihata  (-l-sukhe 
thita)  steeped  in  good  fortune  Vin  ill.  13  (corr.  sukhedhita 
accordingly!);  J  11. 190  (pariharaka  v.  1.  BB) ;  vi.219 
(  =  sukhe  thita). 


Parihattha 


6l 


Pareta 


Parihaitha  [pp  of  pari  l-hj?]  gladdened,  very  pleased 
PvA  i  i. 

Pariharaka  (adj.  n.)  [(r.  pari+hf]  i.  surrounding  or  sur- 
rounded, having  on  one's  hands  J  ii.igo  (sukha",  v.  1. 
for  "parihata)  —  2.  an  armlet,  bracelet  VvA  167  (v.  I. 
•-'harana  ;  expl''  as  hatthdlankara.)     See  also  pariharaka. 

PariharaQa  (nt.)  [fr.  pari^  hf]  i.  protection,  care  V'isin  500 
(gabbha°) ;  KhA  235;  DA  1.J117  (kaya°) ;  DhA  11.179 
(kayassa).  —  2.  keeping  up,  preservation,  keeping  in 
existence;  in  phrase  khandha°  DhA  111.261,  405.  Cp. 
foil. 

Pariharana  (f.)  [  — pariharana]  i.  keeping  up,  preserving, 
care,  attention,  pleasure  PvA  219  (with  v.  1.  "caraija  ; 
for  paricarika  Pv  iv.i-).  —  2.  keeping  secret,  guarding, 
hiding,  deceiving  \'bh  338=Pug  2J. 

Pariharati  [pari+  hr]  1.  to  take  care  of,  to  attend  to  (ace), 
shelter,  protect,  keep  up,  preserve,  look  after  Vin  1.42  ; 
II.  188  ;  D  II.  too  (sanghar)) ;  D  11.14  (gabbhag  kucchina) ; 
M  1.124,  459;  S  iii.i  ;  A  III. 123;  J  1.52  (kucchiyil).  143, 
170  ;  Miln  392,  41(1  (attanar))  418  ;  SnA  78  ;  Dh.\  11.232 
(aggirj,  v.  1.  paricarati,  which  is  the  usual) ;  PvA  63 
(kucchiya).  177.  Cp.  BSk.  pariharati  in  same  meaning 
e.  g.  Avi  M93,  205.  —  2.  to  carry  about  D  11.19 
(ankena) ;  M  1.83  ;  Sn  44(1  (mufijar)  parihare,  i  sg.  pres. 
raed.  ;  SnA  390  takes  it  as  parihareyya)  ;  Miln  418 
(alakag  p.).  —  3.  (intrs.)  to  move  round,  go  round, 
circle,  revolve  M  1.328;  A  1.277  (candima-suriya  p.; 
cp.  A  v.59)=Vism  205;  J  1.395:  iv.378  ;  vi.519;  DA 
1.85  ;  PvA  204.  —  4.  to  conceal  Vin  111.52  (sunkag).  — 
5.  to  set  out,  take  up,  put  forward,  propose,  only  in 
phrase  (Com.  style)  uttan'  atthani  padani  p.  to  take  up 
the  words  in  more  explicit  meaning  SnA  178,  419,  437, 
462. — pp.  parihata.  Pass,  parihirati  (q.  v.). — See 
also  anupariharati. 

Pariharitabbatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  grd.  of  pariharati]  neces- 
sity of  guarding  Vism  98. 

Parihasati  [pari -1- has]  to  laugh  at,  mock,  deride  J  1.457.  — 
Caus.  parihaseti  to  make  laugh  J  v. 297. 

Parihana  (nt.)  [fr.  pari -1- ha]  diminution,  decrease,  wasting 
away,  decay  S  11.21  6  sq.  ;  A  11.411  (abhabbo  parihrinaya), 
111.173.  3"9.  i-9  sq.,  4"4  sq.  (°dhamma)  ;  v. 103  (id), 
156  sq.  ;  It  71  (°aya  saijvattati)  ;  Dh  ^2  (abhabbo  p. 
"ayo)  ;  Pug  12,  14. 

Parihani  (f)  [fr.  pari -l- ha]  loss,  diminution  (opp.  vuddhi) 
S  11.206;  IV. 76,  79;  V.143,  173;  A  1.15;  111.76  sq.  ; 
IV. 288;  V.19  sq.,  96,  124  sq.  ;  J  11.233;  I^l'A  111.335; 
IV. 185. 

Parihaniya  (adj.)  [parihana -H  yaj  connected  with  or 
causing  decay  or  loss  D  11.75  »<!■  (°a  dhamma  conditions 
leading  to  ruin)  ;  A  iv.i6  sq.  ;  Vbh  381  ;  VbhA  507  sq. 
—  a°S  v. 85. 

Parihapeti  [Caus.  of  parihayati]  1 .  to  let  fall  away,  to 
lose,  to  waste  S  11.29;  J  IV. 2 14  (vegag)  ;  Miln  244 
(cittag  to  lose  heart,  to  despair)  ;  PvA  78.  —  2.  to  set 
aside,  abandon,  neglect,  omit  Vin  1.72  (rajakiccag)  ; 
J  11.438;  IV. 132  (vattag)  ;  v  46  ;  Miln  4114  (mulakam- 
maij).  —  Neg.  ger.  aparihapetva  without  omission 
DhsA  168  ;  ppr.  aparihapento  not  slackening  or  neglect- 
ing Vism  122. 

Parihayati  [pari  +  ha]  to  decay,  dwindle  or  waste  away, 
come  to  ruin  ;  to  decrease,  fall  away  from,  lack  ;  to  be 
inferior,  deteriorate  Vin  1.5  ;  M  111.46  sq.  (opp.  abhi- 
vaddhati) ;  S  1.120,  137;  111.125;  iv.76  sq.  ;  A  111.252; 
Dh  364  ;  Sn  767  ;  J  11.197  :  'V.  108  ;  Nd' 5  (paridhar)sati-(- ) 
Miln  249  (id):  Pug  12  (read  "hayeyya  for  °h5reyya) ; 
SnA  167  (-H  vinassati) ;  PugA  181  (nassati-l- ) ;  PvA  5, 
76  (v.  1.),  125  ("hayeyyug).  —  pp.  parihina,  Pass,  pari- 
hiyyati,  Caus.  parihapeti  (q.  v.). 


Parihara  [fr.  pari-fhf,  cp.  pariharati]  i.  attention,  care 
(esp.  -°),  in  cpds.  like  gabbha"  care  of  the  ftetus  DhA 
1.4  ;  daraka°  care  of  the  infant  J  11.20  ;  kumara°  looking 
after  the  prince  J  i.  14S,  11.48  ;  DhA  1346  ;  dup"  hard  to 
protect  J  1.437  :  ^  ism  95  (Majjhimo  d.  hard  to  study  .') 
—  2.  honour,  privilege,  dignity  Vin  1.71;  J  iv.306 
(garava°).  —  3.  surrounding  (lit),  circuit  of  land 
J  IV. 461.  —  4.  surrounding  (tig),  attack:  in  cpd. 
visama"  being  attacked  by  adversities  A  11.87  :  Nd" 
304"=;  Miln  112.  135. — 5.  avoidance,  keeping  away 
from  J  1. 186. 

-patha  "circle  road."  i.  e.  (i)  a  roundabout  way 
DhA  11.  (92.  (2)  encircling  game  D  1.6  =\in  11.  ic  (expl  ■• 
as  "  bhiimiyag  nanapathag  mandalag  katva  tattha 
pariharitabbag  pariharantanag  kijanag  "  DA  1.85  ; 
trsW  as  "keeping  going  over  diagrams"  Dial,  i.io, 
with  remark  "  a  kind  of  primitive  hop-scotch  "). 

Pariharaka  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  pari-t-hy]  surrounding,  encircling; 
a  guard  A  11.180. 

Pariharika  [fr.  parihara]  keeping,  preserving,  protecting, 
sustaining  D  1.71  (ka)'a°  civara,  kucchi'^  pindapata  ;  e-xpl"" 
as  kaya-pariharaija-mattakena  &  kucchi°  at  DA  l.2(  7  ; 
correct  reading  accordingly) ;  M  1.180  ;  III. 34  ;  Pug  58  ; 
Vism  65  (kaya°.  of  avara). 

Pariharin  (adj.)  [fr.  parihara]  taking  care  of.  (worth) 
keeping  S  iv.316  (udaka-maijika). 

Parihasa  [fr.  pari-t-  has,  cp.  parihasati]  laughter,  laughing 
at,  mockery  J  1.116  (°keli),  377;  DhA  1.244. 

Parihasigsu  at  J  1.384  is  to  be  read  "  bhasigsu. 

Parihiyyati  [Pass,  of  parihayati,  Sk.  °hiyatc]  to  be  left, 
to  be  deserted,  to  come  to  ruin  (  =  dhagsati)  J  m.260. 

Parihina  [pp.  of  parihayati]  fallen  away  from,  decayed ; 
deficient,  wanting;  dejected,  destitute  S  1.121;  A 
III. 123;  Sn  827,  881  Cpanna) ;  J  1.112,  242;  iv.200  ; 
Nd'  166,  289;  Miln  249,  281  (a°) ;  PvA  220  (:^nihina). 

Parihinaka  (adj.)  [parihina -l-ka]  one  who  has  fallen  short 
of,  neglected  in,  done  out  of  (abl.  or  instr.)  D  1. 103. 

Parihirati  [l^^iss.  of  pariharati,  Sk.  parihriyate  in  develop- 
ment °hriyate>*hiriyati>*hiyirati>°hirati]  to  be 
carried  about  (or  better  "  taken  care  of."  according  to 
Bdhgh's  expl"  SnA  253  ;  see  also  Brethren  220)  Sn  205 
=  Th  1,  453. 

Parita  see  vi". 

Parupa°  as  para-t-upa^  (in  parupakkama,  parupaghata 
etc.)  see  under  para. 

Pariilha  (adj.)  [pp.  of  pa  +  ruh,  cp.  BSk.  prarijdha  (-sma- 
sru)  Jtm  2111]  grown,  grown  long,  mostly  in  phrase 
"kaccha-nakha-loma  having  long  nails,  &  long  hair  in 
the  armpit,  e.  g.  at  S  1.78  ;  L'd  65  ;  J  iv.362,  371  ;  vi.488  ; 
Miln  163  (so  read  for  p.-kaccha-loma)  ;  Sdhp  104. — 
Kern,  Tuev.  11. 1 39  s.  v.  points  out  awkwardness  of  this 
phrase  and  suspects  a  distortion  of  kaccha  either  from 
kesa  or  kaca,  i.  e.  with  long  hairs  (of  the  head),  nails 
&  other  hair.  —  Further  in  foil,  phrases :  mukliag  p. 
bearded  face  J  iv.387;  °kcsa-nakha-loma  J  1.303; 
^kesa-massu  with  hair  &  beard  grown  long  J  iv.  159; 
■'kaccha  with  long  grass  J  vi.ioo;  °massu-dathika 
having  grown  a  beard  and  tooth  DA  1.263. 

Pare  (adv.)  see  para  2  c. 

Pareta  [pp.  of  pareti,  more  likely  para -I- i  than  pari+i, 
although  BSk.  correspondent  is  parita,  c.  g.  soka- 
parita  Jtm  31"]  gone  on  to,  affected  with,  overcome  by 
(-°),  syn.  with  abhibhijta  (e.  g.  PvA  41,  80).  Very 
frequent  in  comb"  with  terms  of  suffering,  misadven- 
ture and  passion,  e.  g.  khuda",  ghamma",  jighacch&°, 


Pareti 


62 


Palayati 


dukkha°,  dosa°,  raga°,  soka°,  sneha",  Vin  1.5  ;  D  11.36  ; 
M  1. 13,  114,  364,  460;  111.14,  92;  S  II. no;  III. 93  ; 
IV.28  ;  A  I.i47=lt  8g  ;  A  111.25,  9^  i  Sn  449,  736,  818 
(=samohita  samannagata  pihita  Nd'  149)  1092,  1123; 
J  111.157  ;  P^  '-8*  ;  "'2*  '•  ^''°  24^  •  P'vA  61,  93. 

Pareti  [in  form  =  para +i  but  more  likely  pari+i,  thus  = 
pariyeti]  to  set  out  for,  go  on  to,  come  to  (ace.)  S  11.20  ; 
A  V.2,  139  sq.,  312  ;  J  v. 401  ( =pakkhandati  C).  pp. 
pareta  (q.  v.). 

Paro  (adv J  [cp.  Vedic  paras;  to  para]  beyond,  further, 
above,  more  than,  upwards  of  ;  only  °-  in  connection  with 
numerals  (cp.  Vedic  use  of  paras  with  ace.  of  numerals), 
e.g.  paropafinasa  more  than  50  D  n.93  ;  parosatat]  more 
than  100  J  V.203.  497  ;  parosahassar)  over  i,oco  D  11. 16  ; 
S  i.i92=Th  I,  1238;  Sn  p.  106  ( =atireka-sahassar) 
SnA  45").     See  also  parakkaroti. 

Parokkha  (adj.)  [paro +akkha  =  Vedic  paroksa  (parah  + 
aksa)]  beyond  the  eye,  out  of  sight,  invisible,  im- 
perceptible, Miln  291.  —  abl.  parokkha  (adv.)  behmd 
one's  back,  in  the  absence  of  J  111.89  (parammukha 
C.  ;  opp.  sammukha). 

Parodati  [pa  +  rud]  to  cry  out  (for)  J  1.166;  PvA  16,  257. 

Paiopariya  (°iiana)  see  under  indriya".  The  form  is  paro 
+  pariya,  paro  here  taking  the  place  of  para.  Yet  it 
would  be  more  reasonable  to  explain  the  word  as  para+ 
apara  (upara?)  +  ya,  i.  e.  that  which  belongs  to  this 
world  &  the  beyond,  or  everything  that  comes  within  , 
the  range  of  the  faculties.     Cp.  parovara. 

Parovara  (adj.-n.)  [para+avara,  sometimes  through- sub- 
stitution of  apa  for  ava  also  paropara.  We  should 
expect  a  form  'parora  as  result  of  contraction  :  see 
Nd*  p.  13]  high  &  low,  far  &  near ;  pi.  in  sense  of  "  all 
kinds  "  (cp.  uccavaca).  The  word  is  found  only  in  the 
Sutta  Nipata,  viz.  Sn  353  (v.  1.  BB  varavarag,  varo- 
varag  ;  expl"*  as  "  lokuttara-lokiya-vasena  siindar" 
asundarar)  dure-santikar)  va "  SnA  350),  475  (°a 
dhamma ;  v.  1.  BB  paropara ;  expl"*  as  "  paravara 
sundar'  asundara,  para  va  bahira  apara  ajjhattika  " 
SnA  410),  704  (kame  parovare ;  v.  1.  BB  paropare ; 
expl''  as  sundare  ca  asundare  ca  panca  kamagune  " 
SnA  493),  1048  (reading  paroparani  Nd^ ;  see  expl" 
Nd*  422'' ;  expl''  as  "  parani  ca  orani  ca,  par'  atta- 
bhava-sak'  attabhav'  idini  parani  ca  orani  ca  "  SnA 
590),  1 148  (paroparar)  Nd^ ;  see  Nd*  422*;  expl""  as 
"  hina-ppanitai)  "  SnA  607).  —  Note.  Already  in  RV. 
we  find  para  contrasted  with  avara  or  upara ;  paTa 
denoting  the  farther,  higher  or  heavenly  sphere,  avara 
or  upcira  the  lower  or  earthly  sphere:  see  e.  g.  RV. 
1. 128,  3;  1. 164,  12.  —  On  paropara  see  further  Wac- 
kernagel,  AUind.  Gr.  11. 121  d. 

Pala  (-°)  [classical  Sk.  pala]  a  certain  weight  (or  measure), 
spelt  also  phala  (see  phala^),  only  in  cpd.  sata"  a  hundred 
(carat)  in  weight  Th  i,  97  (of  kagsa)  ;  J  vi.510  (sata- 
phala  kagsa  =phalasatena  kata  kaiicana-pati  C).  Also 
in  comb"  catuppala  -  tippala  -  dvipala  -  ekapala  -  satika 
Visra  339. 

Palaka  [cp.  late  Sk.  pala,  flesh,  meat]  a  species  of  plant 
J  VI. 564. 

Palagav^a  [cp.  Sk.  palaganda  Halayudha  11.436 ;  BSk. 
palagan^a  AvS  1.339;  Astas.  Par.  231;  Avad.  Kalp. 
II. 113]  a  mason,  bricklayer,  plasterer  M  1.119  ;  S  ni.154 
(the  reading  phala"  is  authentic,  see  Geiger,  P.G.  §  40) ; 

A  v. 127. 

Palavdoka  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  palaijdu,  pala  (white)  +  andu 
(  =  anda?  egg)]  an  onion  Vin  iv.259. 

Paladdha  [pp-  oi  pa+labh]  taken  over,  "had,"  overcome, 
deceived  M  1.511  (nikata  vaficita  p.  where  v.  1.  and  id. 


p.  S  IV. 307  however  reads  paluddha);  j  111.260  (dava°  = 
abhibhuta  C). 

Palapati  [pa+lapati]  to  talk  nonsense  J  11.322.     Cp.  vi°. 

Palambati  [pa+lambati]  to  hang  down  ThA  210;  Sdhp 
1 10.  —  pp.  palambita  (q.  v.).     See  also  abhi°. 

Palambita  [pp.  of  palambati]  hanging  down  Th  2,  256, 
259  ;  Th.\  211. 

Palambheti  [pa+lambheti]  to  deceive  D  1.50,  cp.  DA 
1.151. 

Pala{ita  [pa  +  Ialita]  led  astray  S  iv.197  (v.  1.  "lajita). 
At  A  III. 5  we  read  palalita,  in  phrase  kamesu  p.  ("  sport- 
ing in  pleasures"?     Or  should  we  read  palolita  ?). 

Palavati  [Vedic  plavati,  plu]  to  float,  swim  Vin  iv.  112; 
Dh  334;  Th  I,  399;  J  in.i9t'. 

Palasata  [according  to  Trenckner.  Notes  p.  59,  possibly  fr. 
Sk.  parasvant]  a  rhinoceros  J  vi.277  (v.  1.  phalasata ; 
expl''  as  "  khagga-miga,"  with  gloss  "balasata");  as 
phalasata  at  J  vi.454  (expl''  as  phalasata-camma  C). 
See  palasata. 

Palabati  [pa -l- lahati]  to  lick  Pv  111.5'^  =PvA  198. 

Palata  [contracted  form  of  palayita,  pp.  of  palayati,  cp. 
Prk.  palaa  (  =  *palata)  Pischel,  Prk.  Gr.  §  567]  run  away 
J  VI. 369  ;  Vism  326 ;  VvA  ico  ;  DhA  11.21. 

Palatatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  palata]  running  away,  escape 
J  I-7-'- 

Palapa^  [\'edic  palava,  cp.  Lat.  palea,  Russ  peleva ;  see 
also  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  39*,  where  pralava  is  to  be  corr.  to 
palava]  chaff  of  corn,  pollard  A  iv.169  (yava°) ;  J. 
1.467,  468;  iv.34 ;  SnA  165  (in  exegesis  of  palapa* ; 
v.  1.  BB  palasa),  312  (id);  J  iv.34,  35  (perhaps  better 
to  read  kula-palaso  &  palasa-bhuta  for  palapa). 

Palapa''  [Vedic  pralapa,  pa-(-lap;  taken  by  P.  Com.  as 
identical  with  palapa',  their  example  followed  by 
Trenckner,  Notes  63,  cp.  also  Miln.  trsl.  11.363  "  chaff 
as  frivolous  talk"]  prattling,  prattle,  nonsense;  adj. 
talking  idly,  chaffing,  idle,  void  M  ni.8o  (a°) ;  S  1. 166 
(not  palapar)),  192  =Th  i,  1237;  A  iv.169  (samana° 
in  allegory  with  yava°  of  palapa')  ;  Sn  89  (mayavin 
asagyata  palapa  =  palapa-.sadisatta  SnA  165),  282  = 
Miln  414  (here  also  expl''  as  palapa'  by  SnA  312); 
VbhA  104.  In  phrase  tuccha  palapa  empty  and  void 
at  Miln  5,  10. 

Palapin  in  apalapin  "  not  neglectful "  see  piJasin. 

Palapeti'  [Caus.  of  palayati]  to  cause  to  run  away,  to 
put  to  flight,  drive  away  J  11.433;  DhA  1.164,  192; 
III. 206. 

Palapeti^  [Caus.  of  pa-(-  lap>  cp.  palapa  to  which  it  may  be 
referred  as  Denom.]  to  prattle,  talk  J  1.73,  195. 

Paliyati  [cp.  Vedic  palayati,  pal&y]  to  run  (away)  Vin 
III. 145  (ubbijjati  uttasati  p.);  A  11.33  (yena  va  tena 
va  palayanti) ;  Sn  120  ;  J  11. 10  ;  DhA  1.193  ;  PvA  253, 
284  (  =  dhavati). — ppr.  palayanto  S  i.209=Th  2,  248 
=  Pv  ii.7"=Nett  131  =DhA  iv.21  ;  aor.  palayi  S  1.2 19 ; 
J  1.208  ;  11.209,  219,  257  ;  IV. 420  :  DhA  111.208  ;  DA  1. 142  ; 
PvA  4,  274;  ger.  palayitva  J  1174;  PvA  154;  inf. 
palayitur)  J  1.202;  vi.420.  —  Contracted  forms  are: 
pres.  paleti  (see  also  the  analogy-form  paleti  under 
paleti,  to  guard)  D  1.54  (spelt  phaleti,  expl''  DA  1.165 
by  gacchati)  ;  Sn  1074,  1144  (=vajati  gacchati  Nd* 
423) ;  Dh49  ;  Nd'  1  72  ;  J  v.173,  241  ;  Vv  84"  (  =  gacchati 
VvA  345);  Pv  i.ii'  (gacchati  PvA  56);  aor.  palittha 
J  v. 255;  fut.  palehiti  Th  i,  307;  imper.  palehi  Sn  831 
(^gaccha  SnA  542)  — pp.  palata  &  palayita;  Cans, 
palapeti'  (q.  v.). 


Palayana 


63 


Palippati 


Palayana  (nt.)  [fr.  palay]  running  away  DhA  1.1O4.  See 
also  palana. 

Palayanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  palayj  running  away  J  11.2  10  {"ij 
karoti  to  put  to  flight). 

Palayin  (adj.)  rfr.  palay]  running  away,  taking  to  flight 
S  1. 221  =223.  —  Usually  neg.  apalayin  S  1.185,  and  in 
phrase  abhiru  anutrasin  apalayin  S  1.99;  Th  i,  864; 
J  IV.296  and  passim.     See  apalayin  &  apalasin. 

Palala  (m.  &  nt.)  [cp.  Ved.  &  Epic  Sk.  palala]  straw  J 
1.488  :  DhA  1.69. 

-channaka  a  roof  of  thatch  Th  i,  208.  -pinda  a 
bundle  of  straw  Vism  257  =  KhA  56.  -pithaka  "  straw 
foot-stool,"  a  kind  of  punishment  or  torture  M  1.87  = 
A  ll.i22=Miln  197  (see  Mtln  trsl.  1.277  "  Straw  Seat," 
i.  e.  being  so  beaten  with  clubs,  that  the  bones  are 
broken,  and  the  body  becomes  like  a  heap  of  straw) ; 
Nd'  154;  Nd^  604;  J  V.273.  -pufija  a  heap  of  straw 
D  1. 71  ;  M  in. 3;  A  1.241  ;  11. 210;  Pug  68;  VbhA  367. 
-putijaka  same  as  punja  Miln  342, 

Palajita  see  palalita. 

Falasa*  (m.  &  nt.)  [Vedic  palasa]  i.  the  tree  Butea  fron 
dosa  or  Judas  tree  J  in. 23  (in  Palasa  Jataka).  —  2.  a 
leaf;  collectively  (nt.)  foliage,  pi.  (nt.)  leaves  S  11. 178; 
J  I.120  (nt.);  III. 210,  344;  PvA  63  ("antare  ;  so  read 
for  pas'  antare).  113  (ghana°),  191  (sali°).  puppha° 
blossoms  &  leaves  DhA  1.75  ;  sakha"  branches  it  leaves 
M  Mil  ;  J  1. 164;  Miln  254;  pandu^  a  scar  leaf  Vin 
1.96;  in.47  ;  IV.217;  bahala"  (adj.)  thick  with  leaves 
J  1.57.  — 'palasani  (pi.)  leaves  J  in. 185  (=palasa- 
panriani  C.) ;  PvA  192  (=bhusani). 

Palasa'  &  (more  commonly)  Pa|asa  [according toTrenckner, 
Notes  83,  from  ras,  but  BSk.  pradaSa  points  to  pa  + 
dasa  =  d&8a  "  enemy  "  this  form  evidently  a  Sanskritisa- 
tion]  unmercifulness,  malice,  spite.  Its  nearest  synonym 
is  yuga-ggaha  (so  Vbh  357;  Pug  18,  where  yuddhag- 
gaha  is  read;  J  111.259;  VvA  71);  it  is  often  comb'' 
with  macchera  (Vv  15')  and  makkha  (Miln  289). — 
M  1. 15,  36,  488;  A  1.79;  J  II. 198;  Vbh  357;  Pug  18 
(H-palasayana,  etc.).     — apa|asa  mercifulness  M  1.44. 

Palasata  [so  read  for  palasata  &  palasada;  cp.  Vedic 
parasvant  given  by  BR.  in  meaning  "  a  certain  large 
animal,  perhaps  the  wild  ass  "]  a  rhinoceros  J  v. 206, 
408  ;  VI. 2  77. 

Palasika  (adj.)  [fr.  palasa']  i.  in  cpd.  pandu°  one  who 
lives  by  eating  withered  leaves  DA  1.270.  271. — 2.  in 
cpd.  eka°  (upahana)  (a  shoe)  with  one  lining  (i.  e.  of 
leaves)  Vin  1.185  (=eka  pafala  Bdhgh  ;  see  V'm.  Texts 
II.I3). 

Palasin  (palasin)  (adj.)  [fr.  palasa^  spiteful,  unmerciful, 
malicious  M  1.43  sq.,  96;  A  iil.iii  ;  comb''  with  mak- 
khin  at  Vin  11.89  (cp-  Vin  Texts  in. 38) ;  J  in. 259. 
apajasin  D  in. 47  (amakkhin+ )  ;  M  1.43;  A  iii.iii; 
Pug  22  ;  see  also  separately. 

Pali°  [a  variant  of  pari",  to  be  referred  to  the  Magadhi 
dialect  in  which  it  is  found  most  frequently,  esp.  in  the 
older  language,  see  Pischel,  Pfk.  Gr.  §  257  ;  Geiger, 
P.Gr.  §  44]  round,  around  (  =  pari)  only  as  prefix  in  cpds. 
(q.  v.).  Often  we  find  both  pari"  &  pali°  in  the  same 
word. 

Paliknijati  [pali+kujjati]  to  bend  oneself  over,  to  go 
crooked  M  1.387. 

Paliklllilthita  [a  var.  of  paligunthita,  q.  v.  &  cp.  Geiger, 
P.Gr.  §  39']  covered,  enveloped,  smeared  with  J  11,92 
(lohita"). 

Palikha  [a  variant  of  paligha  on  kh  for  gh  see  Geiger. 
P.Gr.  §  39*]  a  bar  J  vi.276  (with  paligha  as  gloss). 


PalikhaQati  [pali  +  kha?,  cp.  parikha]  to  dig  up,  root  out 

S  1. 1 23;  II. 88  (so  read  for  palir)=  iV  phali")  =  A  1.21.4; 
ger.  palikhafina  Sn  9O8  (^uddhantva  Nd'  49");  pali- 
khaya  S  1.123  (cp.  KS  320);  &  palikhanitva  S  11.88; 
SnA  573.  —  pp.  palikhata  (q.  v.). 

Palikhata  [pp.  of  palikhanati]  dug  round  or  out  S  iv.83 
(so  read  with  v.  1.  for  T.  palikhita). 

Palikhati  [pa+likhj  to  scratch,  in  phra.se  otthag  p.  to 
bite  one's  lip  J  v.434=DhA  iv.  197. 

Palikhadati  [pah-t-  khadati]  to  bite  all  round,  to  gnaw  or 
peck  off  M  1.364  (kukkuro  afthikankalar)  p.). 

Paligijjhati  [pali+gijjhati]   to  be  greedy  Nd^   77   (abhi- 

gijjhati+). 

Paligunthita  [pali+gunthita,  variant  palikunthita,  as 
kunthita  &  gundhita  are  found]  entangled,  covered, 
enveloped  Sn  131  (mohena ;  v.  1.  BB  "kunthita); 
J  n.i50=DhA  1.144  (v-  1-  °kunth°) ;  iv.56 ;  Miln  11. 
Expl""  by  pariyonaddha  J  11.15".  by  paticchadita  J 
IV. 56.     Cp.  paligunthima, 

Paligedha  [pali+gedha  but  ace.  to  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  10  = 
parigrddha]  greed,  conceit,  selfishness  A  1.66 ;  Nd- 
tanha  11  (gedha-l-);  Dhs  1059,  1136. 

Paligedhin  (adj.)  [fr.  paligedha,  but  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  10 
takes  it  as  •parigrddhin,  cp.  giddhjn]  conceited,  greedy, 
selfish  A  III. 265. 

Paligha  [pari  +  gha  of  (g)han,  cp.  P.  &  Sk.  parigha]  i.  a 
cross-bar  Vin  11.154;  Th  2,  263  (vatta°  =parigha- 
danda  ThA  211);  J  11.95;  vi.276.  —  2.  an  obstacle, 
hindrance  D  11.254  =S  12 ?■  —  (adj  )  (-°)  in  two  phrases  : 
okkhitta"  with  cross-bars  erected  or  put  up  D  1.105 
(  =  thapita°  DA  1.274),  OPP-  ukkhitta"  with  cross-bars 
(i.  e.  obstacles)  withdrawn  or  removed  M  1.139  =A 
iii.84=Nd2  284  C.  ;  Su  622  ( =avijja-palighassa  uk 
khittatta  SnA  467) ;  cp.  parikha. 

-parivattika  turning  round  of  the  bar  the  "  Bar 
Turn,"  a  kind  of  puni.shment  or  torture  (consisting  in 
"  a  spike  being  driven  from  ear  to  ear  he  is  pinned  to 
the  ground"  Hardy,  E.M.  32,  cp.  Miln  trsl.  1.277) 
M  1.87  =A  i.47=ii.i22=Ndi  i54=Nd2  604  B  (reads 
palingha,  v.  1.  paligha)  =  Miln  197. 

Palita  (adj.)  [cp.  Vedic  palita ;  Gr.  m\iTV»Q,  freXiiii- 
black-grey;  Lith.  pilkas  grey;  Ags.  fealu^Ohg.  falo, 
E.  fallow,  Ger.  fahl ;  also  Sk.  pandu  whitish  ;  P.  pandu, 
patala  pink]  grey,  in  cpd.  °kesa  with  grey  (i.  e.  white) 
hair  M  1.88  (f.  °kesi)  ;  A  1.138  ;  J  1.59.  79  I  abs.  only  at 
J  VI. 524.  The  spelling  phalita  also  occurs  (e.  g.  PvA 
153).  —  Der.  palicca. 

Palitta  [pp.  o'  palippati]  smeared  Th  2,  467  (  =  upalitta 
ThA  284). 

Palipa  fr.  [pa -I- lip]  sloppiness,  mud,  marsh  M  1.45  ;  Th  i, 
89;  2,  291  (  =  panka  ThA  224);  J  in. 241  (read  palipo, 
cp.  C.  =mahakaddamo  ibid.)  =iv. 480. 

Palipatha  [for  paripatha  =  °pantha  (q.  v.),  the  bases  path° 
&  panth°  frequently  interchanging.  Trcnckner  (Notes 
80)  derives  it  fr.  pa -I- lip]  danger,  obstacle  (or  is  it 
"mud,  mire  "=  palipa  ?)  A  iv.290  ;  Sn  34=638  (  = 
raga°  SnA  469)  =  Dh  414  (=raga°  DhA  I  v.  194). 

Palipadaka  see  pali". 

Palipanna  [for  paripanna,  pp.  of  paripajjati]  fallen,  got 
or  sunk  into  {-°  or  loc.)  Vin  i.^oi  (muttakarise) ;  D 
11.24  (id.) ;  M  1.45  (palipa")  =Nd2  651  B  ;  M  1.88  ;  J  vi.8  ; 
Vism  49  (muttakarise). 

Palippati  [Med. -Pass,  of  pa -flip;  often  spelt  palimpati]  to 
be  smeared;  to  stick,  to  adhere  to  Pv  iv.!!*  (°amana 
read  for  palimpamana).  —  pp.  palitta  (q.  v.). 


Palibujjhati 


64 


Pallala 


Palibujjhati  see  palibuddhati. 

Palibujjhana    (nt.)    [£r.    palibujjhati]    obstruction    DliA 

111.258. 

Pahbuddha  [pp-  of  palibujjhati]  obstructed,  hindered, 
stopped  ;  being  kept  back  or  delayed,  tarrying  J  11.4 1  7  ; 
Nd'  107  {palivethita+ ) ;  Miln  388  (akaso  a°)  404 ; 
DhA  HI. 198.  Often  in  phrase  lagga  laggita  p.  Nd^  88, 
107.  332.  596.  597.  657- 

Palibaddhati  [the  etym.  offered  by  Andersen,  Pali  Reader 
s.  V.  palibuddha,  viz.  dissimilation  for  pari+ruddhati 
(rudh)  is  most  plausible,  other  expl""  like  Trenck  ler's 
{Notes  66  for  pari+badh,  med-pass.  bajjhati  =  *ba- 
dhyate.  seemingly  contrmed  by  v.  1.  Nd'  74  &  77 
"bajjhati  for  °bujjhati)  and  Kern's  {Toev.  s.  v.  =Ogh. 
firbiotan,  Ger.  verbieten)  are  semantically  not  satis- 
factory. Cp.  avaruddhati  &  avaruddha]  i.  to  obstruct, 
refuse,  keep  back,  hinder,  withhold  Vin  11.1O6;  iv.42, 
131  :  J  I.2i7(cp.  patibahatiibid.)  ;  in.  138  (aor.  "buddhi.) : 
IV. 159  :  Miln  263.  —  2.  to  delay  Miln  404  (or  should  we 
read  °bujjhati  i.  e.  sticks,  tarries,  is  prevented  ?).  — 
Pass,  palibujjhati  [this  word  occurs  only  in  Commen- 
tary style  &  late  works.  In  the  Niddesa  the  nearest 
synonym  is  lag,  as  seen  from  the  freq.  comb"  pali- 
buddha-t- lagga,  palibodha-flaggana :  see  Nd^  p.  188 
under  nissita]  to  be  obstructed  or  hindered,  to  be  kept 
by  (instr.  or  loc.)  to  stick  or  adhere  to,  to  trouble  about, 
attend  to  Nd-  74,  77  (paligijjhati-(- ),  88,  107,  597.  657; 
Miln  263.  —  pp.  palibuddha  (q.  v.). 

Palibodha  [see  palibuddhati]  obstruction,  hindrance, 
obstacle,  impediment,  drawback  J  1.148;  111.24.1  (a° 
non-obstruction),  381  (id.)  :  NettSo  ;  also  invar,  phrases, 
viz.  kama°  Nd^  374  ( -H  kamaparilaha)  ;  kula°  civara" 
Nd^  68,  cp.  Miln  388  (kule  p.)  ;  ghar'avasa",  putta-daro 
etc.  Nd'  136  ;  Nd^  172^  B.  205.  cp.  J  11.95  (ghara°) ;  KhA 
39  (enum''  as  set  of  dasa  palibodha  which  are  also  given 
and  expl""  in  detail  at  Vism  9  sq.) ;  cp.  Dhs.\  168,  and 
in  comb"  laggana  bandhana  p.  Nd'  332,  620.  Two 
palibodhas  are  referred  to  at  Vin  1.265,  ^'z-  avasa' 
and  civara"  (cp.  !"/«.  Texts  11.157)  'i"d  sixteen  at  Miln 
II.  Cp.  Cpd.  53.  —  The  minor  obstacles  (to  the 
practice  of  kammatthana)  are  described  as  khuddaka° 
at  Vism  122  iS;  referred  to  at  DhsA  168. — See  also 
sam°. 

Palibhanjana  (nt.)  [pari-l-bhaiijana]  breaking  up  Nd'  576 
(sambhaujana-t-  ;  v.  1.  pari").  See  also  sam°  The 
spelling  phali°  occurs  at  ThA  288. 

Palimattha  [pp.  of  pari-f-mrj]  polished  J  v. 4.  Cp.  pari- 
mattha.     See  also  sam° 

Palivethana  (adj.  nt.)  [fr.  pari-t-vertl  wrapping,  surround- 
ing, encircling,  encumbrance  J  iv.436  ;  Pug  34  :  Vism 
353  (°camma) ;  DhsA  366. 

Palivethita  [pp.  of.palivetheti]  wrapped  round,  entwined, 
encircled,  fettered  Nd-  107  (°vetth',  comb"*  with  laggita 
&  palibuddha);  J  iv.436  ;  vi.89.     Cp.  sam'. 

Palive^heti  [pari+ve?t]  to  wrap  up.  cover,  entwine, 
encircle  M  1.134;  J  1.192;  11.95;  Dh.\  1.269;  DhsA 
366.  —  Pass,  palivethiyati  Miln  74.  —  pp.  palivethita 
(q.  v.).     See  also  sam° 

Palisajiati  [pari-l-srj]  to  loosen,  make  loose  S  11.89  (mu- 
lani). 

Palissajati  [pari-l-svaj]  to  embrace  D  11.266;  J  v.158 
(aor.  palissaji  =  alingi  C),  204,  215;  VI.325. 

Palissuta  [pp.  of  pari-(-gru]  flowing  over  J  vi.328. 

Palugga  [pp.  of  palujjati,  Sk.  •pranigna]  broken  up, 
crushed,  crumbled  Bu  11.24;  Miln  217. 


Palujiati  [Pass,  of  palujati  =  pa-l-rnj]  to  break  (intrs.)  to 
fall  down,  crumble,  to  be  dissolved  Vin  11. 284  ;  D  11.181  ; 
M  1.488;  S  II. 2  18;  III. 137;  iv.52=Nd'-  55'j  (in  exegesis 
of  "  loka  ")  ;  Miln  8  ;  Vism  416.  —  pp.  palugga  (q.  v.). 
Cp.  BSk.  pralujyati  MVastu  ii.37<'. 

Palojiana  (nt.)  [fr.  palujjati]  breaking,  up.  destruction 
SnA  506. 

Paladdha  [pp.  of  pa-l-  labb]  seduced,  enticed  S  iv.307 
(where  id.  p.  M  1. 51 1  reads  paladdha)  ;  J  1.158  ;  vi.255, 
262.     See  also  palobheti  &  paJobhita. 

Palumpati  [pa-l-lup]  to  rob,  plunder,  deprive  of  A  1.48. 

Paleti  see  palayati. 

Palepa  [fr.  pa -1- lip]  smearing;  plaster,  mortar  Th  2,  270  ; 
ThA  213. 

Palepana  (nt.)  [fr.  pa -1- lip]  .smearing,  anointing;  adj. 
(-°)  smeared  or  coated  with  M  1.429  (galha"  thickly 
smearedl. 

Paloka  [fr.  pa-l- *luj  =rui,  thus  standing  for  ♦paloga,  cp. 
roga]  breaking  off  or  in  two,  dissolution,  decay  Vin 
11.284;  M  1-435  =Miln  418  (in  formula  aniccato  duk 
khato  rogato  etc..  with  freq.  v.  1.  paralokato ;  cp. 
A  IV. 423  ;  Nd'  214;  Ps  11.238);  S  111.167  (id.)  iv.53  ; 
V.  163. 

Palokin  (adj.)  [fr.  paloka]  destined  for  decay  or  destruc- 
tion S  iv.205=Sn  539  (ace.  palokinarj  =jara-maranehi 
palujjana-dhamma  SnA  5(16);  Th  2,  loi  (ace.  pi. 
palokine,  see  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  95'). 

Palobha  rfr.  pa-t-lubh]  desire,  greed  PvA  265. 

Palobhana  (nt.)  =  paIobha  J  1.196,  210;  11.183;  Miln  286. 

Palobhita  [pp.  of  palobheti]  desired  PvA  154. 

Palobheti  [Caus.  of  pa-l-lubh]  to  desire,  to  be  greedy 
Sn  703  ;  J  1.79.  157,  298  ;  VI.2  15  ;  SnA  492  ;  DhA  1.123, 
125  ;  PvA  55.  —  pp.  palobhita  (q.  v.). 

Pallanka  [pary-t-anka.  cp.  Class  Sk.  palyanka  &  Magadhi 
paliyanka]  i.  sitting  cross-legged,  in  instr.  pallankena 
upon  the  hams  S  1. 124.  144;  and  in  phrase  pallankat) 
abhujati  "to  bend  (the  legs)  in  crosswise"  D  1.71  ; 
M  1.56  ;  A  111.320  ;  J  1.17,  71  ;  Ps  1.176  ;  Pug  68  ;  Miln 
289;  DhA  11.201.  —  This  phrase  is  expl''  at  Vism  271 
and  VbhA  368  as  "  samantato  uru-baddh'  asanai) 
bandhati."  —  2.  a  divan,  sofa,  couch  Vin  11. 163,  170 
(cp.  Vin.  Texts  111.209,  whicli  is  to  be  corrected  after 
Dial.  1.1*5);  D  1.7;  S  1.95;  J  1.268;  iv.396  ;  v.161  ;  Vv 
31'  ;  Pv  11.12'  ;  111.3';  DhA  1.19  ;  PvA  189,  219. 

Pallati  (pallate),  is  guarded  or  kept,  contracted  (poetical) 
form  of  palayate  (so  Cy.)  J  v. 242. 

Pallattha  [Sk.  *pan,'asta.  pari -I- pp.  of  as  to  throw,  cp. 
Prk  pallattha  Pischel,  Prk.  Gr.  §  285]  the  posture  of 
sitting  or  squatting  or  lolling  J  1.163  (here  in  expl"  of 
tipallattha :  pallatthag  vuccati  sayanar),  ubhohi  pas- 
sehi  ujukam  eva  ca  go-nisinnaka-vasena  ti  tih'akarehi 
pallatthar)  etc.  ;  see  under  ti°).     Cp.  ti",  vi^. 

Pallatthika  (f  )  [fr.  pallattha]  same  meaning  as  pallattha 
Vin  11. 213;  111.162  (cp.  Vin.  Texts  1.62;  111.141);  Vism 
79  (dussa°). 

Pallatthita  [doubtful,  perhaps  we  should  read  paliyattha, 
see  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.]  perverse  J  v. 79. 

Pallala  (nt.)  [cp.  Class  Sk.  palvala-Lat.  palus ;  Ohg. 
felawa  Ger.  felber  willow  ;  Lith.  pelk^  moor  ;  BSk.  also 
palvala,  e.  g.  Divy  56]  i.  marshy  ground  M  1.117; 
S  III.  108  sq.  —  2.  a  small  pond  or  lake  Vin  i..i3C  = 
D  11.89;  J  II.  129;  V.346. 


Pallava 


65 


Pavayha 


Pallava  (nt.)  [cp.  Class  Sk.  pallaka]  a  sprout  J  1.250  ; 
II.  161.     See  also  phallava. 

Pallavita  (adj.)  [fr.  pallaval  having  sprouts,  burgeoning, 
budding  Miln  151  ;  VvA  28S  (sa"  full  of  sprouts). 

Pallasa  see  vi". 

Palloma  [a  contraction  of  pannaloma,  see  J.P.T.S.  1889, 
J06]  security,  confidence  D  I.g6  ;  M  1.17  ;  cp.  DA  1.266 
"  loma-hagsa-mattam  pi  'ssa  na  bhavissati." 

Pavakkhati  [fut.  of  pa+vac]  only  in  i^'  sq.  pavakkhami 
"I  will  declare  or  explain"  Sn  701,  963  =  1050  (cp. 
Nd'  482  &  Nd2  under  brumi). 

Pavacchati  [Sk.  prayacchati]  see  anu°,  &  cp.  pavecchati. 

Pavajati  [pa+vraj]  to  wander  forth,  go  about,  peram- 
bulate ;  ppr.  pavajamana  S  1.42  (but  may  be  pavajja- 
mana  "  being  predicated  "  in  play  of  word  with  act. 
pavadanto  in  same  verse). 

Pavajjati  [Pass,  of  pavadati]  to  sound  forth,  to  be  played 
(of  music)  J  1.64  (pavajjayigsu,  f^  pi.  aor.)  ;  VvA  96 
(pavajjamana  ppr.  med.). 

Pavajjana  (nt.)  [fr.  pavajjati.  Pass,  of  pavadati]  sounding, 
playing  of  music  VvA  2  10. 

Pava44ba  [pp.  of  pavaddhati]  grown  up.  increased,  big. 
strong  J  V.340  (°kaya  of  huge  stature;  so  read  for 
pavaddha"  ;  expl"*  as  vaddhita-kaya). 

Pava44hati  [pa+vidh]  to  grow  up.  to  increase  M  1.7; 
S  11.84,  9-  '■  Sn  306  (3'"'  sg.  praet.  °atha);  Dh  282,  335. 
349 ;  Pug  64 ;  PvA  8  (punfiar)).  —  pp.  pavaddha  & 
pavuddha. 

Pavati^  [pa+ va]  to  blow  forth,  to  yield  a  scent  Th  i,  528 
(=gandhar)  vissajjati  C).     See  pavati. 

Pavati-  [of  plu,  cp.  Vedic  plavate  to  swim  &  Epic  Sk. 
pravate  to  jump]  to  hurry  on,  to  rush  VvA  42  (but 
better  read  with  v.  1.  patati  as  syn.  of  gacchati). 

Pavatta  (adj.)  [pp.  of  pavattati]  i.  (adj.)  happening, 
going  on,  procedure,  resulting  Th  2,  220  (assu  ca  pa- 
vattai),  taken  by  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  as  "  tears  shed  ") ;  TliA 
179  ;  PvA  35,  83  (gathayo),  120.  esp.  with  ref.  to  natural 
products  as  "  that  which  comes,"  i.  e.  normal,  natural, 
raw  ;  °phala  ready  or  natural,  wild  fruit  (gained  without 
exertion  of  picking),  in  cpds.  °phalika  SnA  295  sq.  ; 
"bhojana  (adj.)  J  1.6;  111.365  ;  Vism  422,  and  °bhojin 
one  who  lives  on  wild  fruit  (a  certain  class  of  ascetics, 
tapasa)  D  l.ioi  ;  M  1.78,  344;  A  1.24 1  ;  n.206  ;  cp. 
DA  1.269  sq.  &  SnA  295,  296.  °mat)sa  fresh  or  raw 
meat  (flesh)  Vin  1.217  (cp.  Vin.  Texts  11. 81).  —  2.  (nt.) 
"  that  which  goes  on,"  i.  e.  the  circle  or  whirl  of  exist- 
ence Miln  197,  326  (cp.  Miln  trsl"  11.200  "  starting 
afresh  in  innumerable  births,"  quot.  fr.  C),  opp. 
appavatta  freedom  from  Sarjsara,  i.  e.  Nibbana  ibid. 
—  3.  founded  on,  dealing  with,  relating  to,  being  in 
S  IV.  1 15  (kuraraghare  p.  pabbata)  ;  DA  1.92  (adi- 
naya°),  217  (°piti-sukha  being  in  a  state  of  happiness). 

Pavattati  [pa+vattati,  yjt]  (intrs.)  i.  to  move  on,  go 
forward,  proceed  Pv  1,5';  PvA  8,  131  ;  of  water:  to 
flow  S  II. 31  ;  J  11.104  '■  P'vA.  143.  154,  198.  —  2.  to  exist, 
to  be,  continue  in  existence  J  1.64  ;  PvA  130  (opp. 
ucchijjati).  —  3.  to  result,  to  go  on  PvA  45  (phalar)), 
60  (vippatisar'  aggi).  —  pp.  pavatta;  Caus.  pavatteti 
(q.  v.). 

Pavattana  (adj.  nt.)  [fr.  pavattati]  i.  moving  forward, 
doing  good,  beneficial,  useful;  f.  °i  M  1.2 14;  Pug  35 
(spelt  pavattini  in  T.  as  well  as  Pug  A  2  18).  —  2.  execu- 
tion, performance,  carrying  out  Miln  277  (afla,"  cp. 
pavatti). 


Pavattayitar  [n.  ag.  to  pavatteti]  one  who  sets  into  motion 
or  keeps  up  DA  1.273  (see  foil). 

Pavattar  [n.  ag.  of  either  pa-(-vac  or  pa-f-v^t,  the  latter 
more  probable  considering  similar  use  of  parivatteti. 
The  P.  commentators  take  it  as  either]  one  who  keeps 
up  or  keeps  going,  one  who  hands  on  (the  tradition), 
an  expounder,  teacher  D  1.104  (mantanar)  p.  =pavat- 
tayitar  DA  1273)  ;  S  iv.g4  ;  Dh  76  (nidhinai)  p.  =acik- 
khitar  DhA  11. 107). 

Pavattapanatta  (nt.)  [fr.  Caus.  II.  of  pavatteti  =pavatta- 
peti]  making  continue,  keeping  going,  preservation, 
upkeep  Vism  32  (T.  °attha). 

Pavatti  (f.)  [fr.  pa  +  Vft]  i.  manifestation,  wielding,  exe- 
cution, giving,  in  ana°  royal  authority  J  111.504 ; 
IV. 145;  ThA  283.  —  2.  happening,  incident,  news 
J  1. 125,  150;  II. 416;  Vism  91;  PvA  6,  17,  29,  35, 
92.  15-.  242,  etc.;  DhA  i.Sc^  (v.  1.  pavutti).  Cp. 
pavutti. 

Pavattita  [pp.  of  pavatteti]  set  gbing,  inaugurated, 
established  Vin  i.ii  (dhammacakka) ;  M  111.29,  77; 
S  1. 191  ;  Sn  556,  557  (dhammacakka):  PvA  67  (id.). 
140  (sangiti) ;  SnA  454. 

Pavattin  (adj.)  [fr.  pa-t-vyt]  i.  advancing,  moving  for- 
ward, proceeding,  effective,  beneficial ;  only  in  phrase 
dhamma  pavattino  A  1.279:  DA  1.4  — P\-A  2  :  and  in 
suppavattin  (good-flowing,  i.  e.  well-recited  ?)  A  iv.140 
(of  p.itimokkha ;  trs'''  as  "  thoroughly  mastered " 
J.P.T.S.  1909.  igg  V.71  (id.).  —  2.  going  on.  pro- 
cedure (in  f.  °ini)  Vin  11. 271  sq.,  277. 

Pavatteti  [Caus.  of  pavattati]  (trs.)  i.  to  send  forth,  set 
going  Vin  1.87  (assuni)  ;  S  11.282  (id.)  J  1.147  (selagu- 
lar)  pavatt") ;  esp.  in  phrase  dhammacakkai)  p.  to 
inaugurate  the  reign  of  righteousness  Vin  1.8.  11; 
M  1. 171  ;  S  III. 86;  Sn  693;  Miln  20.  343;  VvA  165; 
PvA  21.  etc.  —  2.  to  cau.te.  produce,  make  arise 
J  II.  102  (mah'  oghar)) :  Miln  219.  —  3.  to  give  forth, 
bestow,  give  (danag  a  gift)  \'in  IV.5  (spelt  tt) ;  PvA  ig, 
123,  139.  —  4.  to  continue,  keep  on,  practise,  go  on 
with  DhA  1.257  ;  PvA  2g  (attabhavai)),  42  (kammante) 

—  5.  to  move  about,  behave,  linger  DhA  1.14  (tt). — 
6.  to  display,  execute,  wield,  enforce  Miln  189  (anar)  ; 
cp.  anapavatti).  —  pp.  pavattita  (q.  v.). 

Pavadati  [pa-l-vad]  to  speak  out,  speak  to,  talk,  dispute; 
ppr.  pavadanto  S  1.42    (trsl.  "predicate");  Nd'  293. 

—  aor.  pavadi  ThA  71.  —  Cp.  pavadati. 

Pavana*  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  pavana  &  pavana,  of  pfl]  winnowing 
of  grain  Miln  201  (read  pavanena  tthayiko  who  earned 
his  living  by  winnowing  grain). 

Pavana'  (nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  pravana ;  not  with  Miiller,  P.Gr. 
24  =  upavana;  perhaps  =  Lat.  pronus  "prone"]  side  of 
a  mountain,  declivity  D  11.254  .'  H  11 17  ;  S  1.26  ;  11.95, 
105  ;  Th  I,  1092  ;  J  1.28  ;  II. 180  ;  VI. 513  ;  Cp.  I.l',  io>  ; 
111.13I;  Miln  gi,  198  sq.,  364,  408;  Vism  345.  Cp. 
Pavananagara  SnA  583  (v.  1.  BB  for  Tumbava- 
nagara  =  Vanasavhaya).  Note.  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v. 
defends  MiiUer's  (after  Subhuti)  interpretation  as 
"  wood,  woodland,"  and  compares  BSk.  pavana 
MVastu  11.272,  382, 

Pavana^  at  Vin  n.136  in  cpd.  pav*an-anta  refers  to  the 
end  of  the  girdle  (kayabandhana),  where  it  is  tied  into 
a  loop  or  knot.  Bdhgh  on  p.  319  (on  C.V.  v.29,  2) 
expl"-  it  by  pas'  anta. 

Pavapati  [pa-i-  vap]  to  sow  out  Th  2,  112. 

Pavayha  (adv.)  [ger.  of  pavahati]  carrying  on,  pressing, 
urgently,  constantly,  always  repeated  as  pavayha 
pavayha  M  i:i.ii8=DhA  11.108;  M  1.442.  444. 

V— 5 


Pavara 


66 


Paviloketi 


Pavara  (adj.)  [pa+vara]  most  excellent,  noble,  distin- 
guished S  III. 264  ;  Sn  83,  646,  698  (muni°) ;  Dh  422  ; 
Pug  69  ;  Miln  246  ;  PvA  2  (°dhamma-cakka),  67  (id.), 
39  ("buddh'a.sana) ;  Sdhp  421. 

Pavasati  [pa+vas]  to  "  live  forth,"  i.  e.  to  be  away  from 
home,  to  dwell  abroad  Sn  Sgg  ;  J  11. 123  (=pavasar) 
gacchati) ;  v. 91. — pp.  pavuttha  (q.  v.).     Cp.  vi°. 

Pavassati  [pa+  vt?1  to  "  rain  forth,"  to  begin  to  rain,  shed 
rain  S  i.ioo;  Sn  18  sq.  (imper.  pavassa).  353  (v.  1.) : 
J  V1.510  ("  cry  "),  5S7  (aor.  pavassi).  —  pp.  pavattha  & 
pavuttha :  see  abhi'. 

Pavassana  (nt.)  [fr.  pa  +  vrjT  beginning  to  rain,  raining 
.Miln   12(1. 

Pav&ta  (nt.)  [pa+vata,  cp.  \'edic  pravata]  a  draught  of 
air,  breeze  Vin  11.79  (opp.  nivata). 

Pavati  [pa+va]  to  diffuse  a  scent  Dh  54;  Th  i,  528; 
J  v.()  5  (disa  bhati  p.  ca).     See  also  pavayati. 

Pavada  ;^pa+ vad,  cp.  Kpic  Sk.  pravada  talk,  saying]  talk, 
disputation,  discussion  D  1.2ft.  ift2  ;  M  1.63;  Sn  538. 

Pavadaka  (adj.)  [fr.  pavada]  1.  belonging  to  a  discussion, 
intended  for  disputation  D  1.78  (samaya"  "debating 
hall").  —  2.  fond  of  discussing  Miln  4  (bhassa°  "fond 
of  wordy  disputation  ").     Cp.  pavadiya. 

Pavadiya  (adj.)  ffr.  pavada,  cp.  pavadaka]  belonging  to  a 
disputation,  disputing,  arguing,  talking  Sn.S85  (n.  pi. 
"ase,  taken  by  Nd'  293  as  pavadanti,  by  SnA  555  as 
vadino). 

Pavayati  [paH- val  to  blow  forth,  to  permeate  (of  a  scent), 
to  diff\ise  J  i.tS  (dibba-gandho  p.)  ;  Vism  58  (dasa  disa 
sila-gandho  p.).     Cp.  pavati. 

Pavarana  (f.)  [pa+vr,  cp.  BSk.  pravarana  Divy  91, 
93  ;  whereas  Epic  Sk.  pravarana,  nt..  only  in  sense  of 
"satisfaction"]  i.  the  Pavarana,  a  ceremonj'  at  the 
termination  of  the  Vassa  Vin  1.155,  ifto  (where  2  kinds  : 
catuddasika  &  pannarasika).  n.32.  167;  D  11.220; 
S  1. 190.  pavaranag  thapeti  to  fix  or  determine  the 
(date  of)  P.  Vin  n.32.  276.  Later  two  kinds  of  this 
ceremony  (festival)  are  distinguished,  viz.  maha"  the 
great  P.  and  "sangaha,  an  abridged  P.  (see  DA  1.24 1) 
J  1.29.  82.  193  (maha")  :  Vism  391  (id.);  SnA  57  (id.); 
VvA  07  (id.)  ;  PvA  140  (id.) ;  —  2.   satisfaction  Vism  71. 

Favarita  [pp.  of  pavareti]  i.  satisfied  M  1.12  (  +  pari- 
punna  pariyosita)  ;  Miln  231;  Vism  71. — 2.  having 
come  to  the  end  of  the  rainy  season  Vin  1. 175.  —  Freq. 
in  formula  bhuttavin  pavarita  having  eaten  &  being 
satisfied  \in  1.2  n  (cp.  Vin.  Texts  1.19);  ii.v>o;  iv.82  ■ 
PvA  23. 

Pavareti  [Caus.  of  pa  +  vr,  cp.  RSk.  pravarayati  Divy  i  16, 
283.  etc.]  I.  to  invite,  offer,  present,  sati.sfy  S  1. 1911; 
A  IV. 79  ;  J  111.352.  —  2.  to  celebrate  the  Pavarana  (i.  e. 
to  come  to  the  end  of  the  Vassa)  \'in  i.ioo  sq.  ;  11.255  ; 
DhA  1.87;  J  1.29,  215;  IV. 243  (vuttha-vassa  p.);  Vism 
9<) ;  Sn,\  57.  —  pp.  pavarita  (q.  v.)     See  also  sam°. 

Pavala  &  Pavaja  (m.  &  nt.)  [cp.  Class  Sk.  prabala.  pra- 
vada it  pravala]  i.  coral  J  1.394  (°ratta-kambala)  ; 
11.88;  IV. 143  ;  Miln  267  (with  other  jewels),  380  (id.); 
SnA  117;  VvA  112  (^ratana).  —  2.  a  sprout,  young 
branch,  shoot  J  111.389,  395  (kala-valli^) ;  v.207:  Nett 
14  ("ankura)  ;  SnA  91   (id.). 

Pava)ha  [apparently  pp.  of  pavahati  (pavaheti),  but  in 
reality  pp.  of  pa-H  brh',  corresp.  to  Sk.  prabfdha  (pra- 
vrdha).  cp.  abbulha  &  ubbahati  (ud+brh').  but  cp. 
also  ubbalha  which  is  pp.  of  ud-t-badh.  At  D  1.77 
(where  v.  1.  pabbalha  -pabujha,  unexpH  by  Bdhgh) 
it  is  synonymous  with  uddharati  =  ubbahati]  1 .  carried 


away  (?),  turned  away,  distracted,  dismissed  S  111.91 
(bhikkhu-sangho  p.).  —  2.  drawn  forth,  pulled  out. 
taken  out  D  1.77  =  Ps  11.211=  Vism  406  (muiijamha 
isika  p.) ;  J  VI. 67  (muiija  v'isika  p.). 

Pav&sa  [fr.  pa-f  vas,  cp.  Vedic  pravasa  in  same  meaning] 
sojourning  abroad,  being  away  from  home  J  11. 123; 
V.434  ;  VI.  1 50;  Miln  314. — Cp.  vi°. 

i  Pavasita  i.  (perhaps  we  should  read  pavarita?)  given 
as  present,  honoured  J  v. 377  (-^pesita  C).  —  2.  (so 
perhaps  to  be  read  for  pavusita  T.)  scented,  permeated 
with  scent  [pp.  of  pavaseti]  VvA  237  (v.  1.  padhupita 
preferable). 

Pavasin  (adj.)  [fr.  pavasa]  living  abroad  or  from  home, 
in  cira"  long  absent  Dh  219  ( —  cirappavuttha  DhA 
in. 293). 

Pavahaka  (adj.)  [fr.  pa  l-vahl  carrying  or  driving  away 
Th  I,  75S. 

Pavahena  (adj.  &  nt.)  [fr.  pa-l-  vah]  i.  carrying  off.  putting 
away,  Th  i,  751.  —  2.  wiping  off  J  ni.29fi. 

Pavahitatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  pavahita,  pp.  of  pavaheti]  the 
fact  of  being  removed  or  cleansed  J  v.  134. 

Pavahati  [Cans.  fr.  pa  1-  vah]  I .  to  cause  to  be  carried 
away,  to  remove  ;  freq.  with  ref.  to  water  :  to  wash  away, 
cleanse  M  1.39;  S  1.79,  183  (papakammag  nahanena) ; 
11.88;  Th  7,  349;  J  1.24;  Iii.i7(),  225,  289;  IV. 3(17; 
v. 134  ;  VI. 197  ;  588  ;  Miln  247  ;  Davs  11.59  ;  PvA  250.  — 
2.  to  pull  out,  draw  out  D  1.77  (better  to  be  read  as 
pabahati). 

Pavikattbita  ipp.  of  pa-l- vi+ katthati]  boasted  J  1.359. 

Pavicaya  [fr.  pa-f  vicinati]  investigation  Sn  mji  ;  Th  i. 
593  ;  Pug  -^5  ;  Nett  3,  87. 

Pavicarati  [pa-t- vicarati]  to  investigate  thoroughly 
M  III. 85  ;  S  v. 08. 

Pavicinati  [pa-(- vicinati]  to  investigate,  to  examine 
M  111.85;  S  v. 68,  262  ;  Nett  21  ;  SnA  545.  grd.  pavi- 
cesrya  J  iv.164,  &  pavicetabba  Nett  21. 

Pavijjhati  '^pa-F  vyadh]  to  throw  forth  or  down  Vin  11. 193 
(silar)  cp.  J  1.173  &  v.333)  ;  111.82,  178,  415;  DA  1.138, 
154.  — pp.  paviddha  (q.  v.). 

Pavijjhana  (nt.)  [fr.  pavijjhati]  hurling,  throwing  J  v.f)7 
(Devadattassa  sila°.  cp.  Vin  11.193)  '■  J  ■■'73  ;  v.333. 

Pavitiha  [pp.  of  pavisati]  entered,  gone  into  (ace),  visited 
S  1. 197  ;  11.19  ;  Dh  373  ;  DA  1.288  ;  PvA  12,  13. 

Pavitakka  [pa -H  vitakka]  scepticism,  .speculation,  con- 
troversy Sn  834  ;  Nd^  17ft. 

Pavidarjseti  [pa--l- vi-l-Caus.  of  drs;  dagseti  — dasscti^  to 
make  clear,  to  reveal  J  v.32ft  (aor.  pavidagsayi). 

Paviddha  [pp.  of  pavijjhati]  thrown  down.  fig.  given  up, 
abandoned  Th  i ,  350  ("gocara). 

Pavineti  [pan- vineti]  to  lead  or  drive  away,  expel  Sn 
507- J  V.I 48. 

Pavibhajati  [pan- vi+bhaj.  Cp.  Class  Sk.  pravibhaga 
division,  distribution]  to  distribute,  to  apportion  S  1. 193 
("bhajjar).  ppr.,  with  jj  metri  causa) -Th  i,  1242 
("bhajja  ger.). 

Paviliyati  [pa  +  vi-l-ll]  to  be  dissolved,  to  melt  or  fade 
away  S  iv.28g  (paviliyamanena  kaycna  with  their 
body  melting  from  heat ;  so  read  for  paveliyamanena). 

Paviloketi  [pa -t- viloketi]  to  look  forward  or  ahead  J 
VI.559- 


Pavivitta 


67 


Pavesana 


Pavivitta  [pp.  of  pa  +  vi+vicj  separated,  detached, 
secluded,  singled  M  1.14,  77.  38b;  11. 0;  S  11.^9:  Vism 
73;  PvA  1 27  DhA  11.77.  Often  in  phrase  appiccha 
santuttha  pavivitta  referring  to  an  ascetic  enjoying  the 
satisfaction  of  seclusion  Nd-  225  ^Nd'  342'"=^  Vism 
25  ;  J  1.107 ;  Miln  244,  358,  371  {with  appa-sadda  appa- 
nigghosa). 

Paviveka  [fr.  pa+vi+vic]  retirement,  solitude,  seclusion 
Vin  1. 104;  11.258  (appicchata  santutthi4-  ;  cp.  pavi- 
vitta); D  1.60;  M  1.14  sq. ;  S  11.202;  v.398  ;  A  1.240; 
Sn  257;  Dh  205  ("rasa,  cp.  DhA  111.268);  Th  i,  597; 
J  1.9  ;  Ps  11.244  ;  Vism  41.  73  (°sukha-rasa) ;  Sdhp  476  ; 
DA  1. 1 69. 

Pavivekata  {(■)  [abstr.  fr.  paviveka]  =  paviveka  Vism  81 
(appicchata  etc.  in  enum"  of  the  5  dhutadhammas). 

Pavivekiya  (adj.)  [fr.  paviveka]  springing  from  solitude 
Th  I,  009. 

Pavisati  [pa+vis]  to  go  in,  to  enter  (ace.)  Sn  668,  O73  ; 
DhA  11.72  (opp.  nikkhamati) ;  PvA  4,  12,  47  (naga- 
rag).  Pot.  "vise  Sn  387  imper.  pavisa  M  1.383  ;  S  1.2  13  ; 
fut.  pavisissati  Vin  1.87  ;  J  111.86  ;  pavissati  (cp.  Geiger 
P.Gr.  §  63-)  J  11.68  ;  Cp.  1.9^*,  and  pavekkhati  S  iv.199  ; 
J  VI. 76  (nago  bhiiniiyag  p.) ;  Davs  in. 26  ;  aor.  pavisi 
Vin  11.79  (viharar)) ;  M  1.381  ;  J  1.76  (3"*  pi.  pavisur)), 
213  ;  J  11.238  ;  \'ism  42  (garaar))  PvA  22,  42,  161.  256  ; 
and  pavisi  J  11.238  ;  PvA  12,  35  ;  ger.  pavisitva  S  1.107  ; 
J  1.9  (aranfiari)  ;  Vism  22  ;  PvA  4,  12,  46,  79  &  pavissa 
S  1.200;  Dh  i27  =  PvA  104.  —  pp.  pavittha  (q.  v.). — 
Caus.  paveseti  (q.  v.). 

Pavisana  (nt.)  [fr.  pa+vis]  going  in,  entering,  entrance 
J  1.294;  11.416;  VI. 383  ;  DhA  1.83.     Cp.  pavesana. 

Paviljia  (adj.)  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  pravina]  clever,  skilful  Davs 
^'■M  :  VvA  168  (v.  1.  kusala). 

Pavinati  [pa+ Vi  to  seek,  Sk.  veti,  but  with  dilf.  formation 
in  P.  cp.  Trenckner  Notes  78  (who  derives  it  fr.  ven)  A; 
apavinati.  The  form  is  doubtful ;  probably  we  should 
read  pacinatij  to  look  up  to,  respect,  honour  J  111.387 
(T.  reading  sure,  but  v.  1.  C.  pavirati). 

Pavihi  [pa  +  villi]  in  pi.  ditf.  kinds  of  rice  J  v.405  (^naiiap- 
pak.ira  vihayo). 

Pavuccati  [Pass,  of  pavacati]  to  be  called,  said,  or  pro- 
nounced Sn  43O,  513,  6i  I  &  passim  ;  Dh  257  ;  Pv  IV.3*'  ; 
PvA  102.  The  form  pavuccate  also  occurs,  e.  g.  at 
Sn  519  sq.  —  pp.  pavutta'  (q.  v.). 

Pavuta  at  M  1.518  is  unexplained.  The  reading  of  this 
word  is  e.xtremely  doubtful  at  all  passages.  The  vv. 
11.  at  M  1.5  18  are  pavudha,  pavuja,  patuva,  *phuta.  and 
the  C.  expl°  is  pavuta  -ganthika  (knot  or  block  ?).  The 
identical  passage  at  D  1.54  reads  patuva  (q.  v.),  with 
vv,  II.  pamuta.  pamuvuca,  while  DA  1. 164  expl"  pacuta 
=  gai.Uhika  (vv.  11.  paraula.  pamuca.  paputa).  Dial. 
1.72  reads  pacuta,  but  leaves  the  word  untranslated; 
Franke,  Dif;ha.  p.  58  ditto. 

PavuHba  (pavattha)  [pp.  of  pavassati]  see  abhi°. 

Pavutta'  I  pp.  of  pa  I- vac,  but  sometimes  confounded  with 
pavatta,  pp.  of  pa+ Vft,  cp.  pavutti]  said,  declared,  pro- 
nounced D  1.1114  (mantapada  p.  ;  v.l.  "vatta  which  is 
more  likely:  but  DA  1.273  expl^  by  vutta  &  vacita) ; 
S  1.52;  Sn  383  (su°=sudesita  SnA  373),  868  (  acik- 
khita  desita,  etc.  Nd'  271). 

Pavutta'  [pp.  of  pa+vap]  scattered  forth,  strewn,  sown 
S  1.227. 

Pavutti  [fr.  pa-l-vTt,  cp.  Class.  Sk.  pravrtti]  happening, 
proceeding,  fate,  event  PvA  31  (v.  1.  pavatti),  46,  53, 
61,  78.  81  and  passim  (perhaps  should  be  read  pavatti  at 
all  passages). 


Pavuttlia  [pp.  of  pavasatil  dwelling  or  living  abroad, 
staying  away  from  home  D  11.261  ("jati  one  who  dwells 
away  from  his  caste,  i.  e.  who  no  longer  belongs  to  any 
caste) ;  J  v.434  ;  DhA  111.293.  Freq.  in  phrase  pavuttha- 
patika  itthi  a  woman  whose  husband  dwells  abroad 
Vin  11.26S  ;  111.83  :  Mi'n  2(15. 

Pavosita  at  VvA  237  is  misreading  either  for  pavasita 
or  (more  likely)  for  padhiipita  (as  v.  I.  SS.),  in  meaning 
"  blown  "  i.  e.  scented,  tilled  with  scent. 

Pavekkhati  is  fut.  pavisati. 

Pavecchati  [most  likely  (as  suggested  by  Trenckner, 
Notes  61)  a  distortion  of  payacchati  (pa  +  yam)  by  way 
of  *payecchati>  pavecchati  (cp.  sa-yatha  >  scyyatha). 
Not  with  Morris,  J.P.T.S.  1885,  43  fr.  pa4-VT?,  nor 
with  Muller  P.Gr.  120  fr.  pa-t-vij  (who  with  this  deri- 
vation follows  the  P.  Commentators,  c.  g.  J  111.12 
pavesati.  deti ;  SnA  407  (pavesati  patipadeti) ;  Geiger 
P.Gr.  §  152.  note  3  suggests  (doubtfully)  a  Fut.  stem 
(of  vis  ?)]  to  give,  bestow  S  1.18  ;  Sn  463  sq.,  490  sq.  ; 
Th2,  272  ;  J  1.28;  in. 12  (v.  1.  pavacchati),  172  ;  iv.3()3  ; 
VI. 502,  587  (vutthi-dharar)  pavecchanto  devo  pavassi 
tavade  ;  v.l.  pavattento)  ;  Pv  11. 9"  (=deti  PvA  130); 
11.9™  (=pavatteti  ibid.  139);  ii.io'(=deti  ibid.  144); 
Miln  375. 

Paveni  (f.)  [pa+veni;  cp.  late  Sk.  praveni  in  meanings 
I  ii  2]  I.  a  braid  of  hair,  i.  e.  the  hair  twisted  tk.  un- 
adorned A  m.56  —  2.  a  mat,  cover  D  1.7  ;:^  (see 
ajina").  —  3.  custom,  usage,  wont,  tradition  J  i.8g ; 
11.353  ;  V.2S5  ;  VI. 381  (kula-tanti,  kula-paveni)  ;  Dpvs 
xvili.i  ;  Miln  134  (^upaccheda  break  of  tradition), 
190,  226  (+var)sa),  227;  DhA  1.284  (tanti-|-);  PvA 
131.  —  4.  succession,  lineage,  breed,  race  Sn  26  (cp. 
SnA  39)  ;  DhA  i.i  74. 

-palaka  guanlian  of  tradition  Vism  99  (tanti  -dhara, 
vagsanurakkhaka-f  )  ;  DhA  111.386. 

Pavedana  (nt.)  [fr.  pa+vid]  making  known,  telling,  proc- 
lamation, announcement  only  in  stanza  "  nisid' 
ambavane  ramme  yava  kalappavedana."  until  the 
announcement  ol  the  time  (of  death)  Th  1,  563  (trsl" 
"until  the  hour  should  be  revealed")- J  1.118— \ism 
38g=DhA  1.24S. 

Pavedita  [pp.  of  pavedeti]  made  known,  declared,  taught 
M  1.67  (su"  A:  du");  S  1.231  ;  Dh  79.  281  ;  Sn  171,  i^u, 
838;  Nd'  186. 

Pavedeti  [Caus.  of  pa4  vidj  to  make  known,  to  declare, 
communicate,  relate  S  1.24  ;  IV.34S;  Dh  151  ;  Sn  p.  103 
(  -  bodheti  iiapeti  SnA  444);  PvA  33.  58.  68  (attanai) 
make  oneself  known),  120.  —  jip.  pavedita  (q.  v.). 

Pavedhati  (pa+vyath,  cp.  pavyatheti]  to  be  atfiictcd,  to 
be  frightenetl,  to  be  agitated,  quiver,  tremble,  fear 
Sn  928  (-itasati  etc.  Nd'  384):  Vism  i8(j  (reads  pave- 
dheti)  ThA  20 j  (allavatthari  allakesar)  pavedhanto, 
misreading  for  pavesento)  ;  DhA  11.249.  —  F'req  in 
ppr.  med.  pavedhamana  trembling  M  1.88 ;  Pv  111.5' 
( ^^pakampamana  Pv.\  199);  J  1.58;  III. 395. — pp. 
pavedhita  A  pavyadhita  (q.  v.). 

Pavellati  [pa  +  veil]  to  shake,  move  to  &  fro.  undulate 
S  IV. 289  (paveliyamanena  kayena)  ;  J  iii  395. — pp. 
pavellita  (q.  v.). 

Pavellita  I  pp.  of  pavellati]  shaken  about,  moving  to  &  fro, 
swinging,  trembling  J  vi.456. 

Pavesa  (-°)  [fr.  pan  vis]  entrance  ThA  66  (Rajagaha") ; 
DhA  IV. 150. 

Pavesana  (nt.)  [fr.  paveseti]  I.  going  in.  entering,  entrance 
J  1. 142  ;  PvA  79  (v.  1.  for  T.  °vesa).  217.  221  (asipatta- 
vana").  —  2.  beginning  VvA  71  (opp.  nikkhamana). — 
j.  puttingin,  application  J  II.  1112  (daiide  p.).  —  4.  means 
of  entry,  as  adj.  able  to  enter  J  V1.J83. 


Pavesetar 


68 


Pasakha 


Pavesetar  [n.  ag.  of  pavcseti]  one  who  lets  in  or  allows  to 
enter,  an  usher  in  S  iv.ig4  ;  A  v. 195. 

Paveseti  [Cans,  of  pavisati]  i .  to  make  enter,  allow  to 
enter,  usher  in  M  1.79:  J  1.150  (miga-ganar)  uyyanar)), 
291;  VI. 1 79;  Vism  39;  PvA  38,  44,  61  (gehar)),  141 
(id.);  DhA  1.397.  —  2.  to  furnish,  provide,  introduce, 
procure,  apply  to  (ace.  or  loc.)  J  111.52  (rajjukaggivaya) ; 
VI. 383  (sirig)  ;  Miln  39  (gehe  padlpai)),  360  (udakag) ; 
DA  1.2 iS.  Perhaps  at  ThA  203  for  pavedheti. — 
Cans.  II.  pavesapeti  J  1.294  (matugamai)  aggig). 

Pavyatheti  [Cans,  of  pa+  vyath]  to  cause  to  tremble,  to 
shake  J  v.409.  Cp.  pavedhati.  —  pp.  pavyadhita 
(q.  v.). 

Pavyadhita  [pp  of  pa  + vyath;  the  dh  through  analogy 
with  pavedhita]  afflicted,  frightened,  afraid  J  vi.61, 
166. 


pasagsati]    flatterer   M   1.327;    J    11.439; 


Pasagsaka  [fr. 
Sdhp  565. 

Pasagsati  [pa+saos]  to  speak  out,  praise,  commend,  agree 
D   1. 163;    S   1.1(12,    149,    161;    J    1. 143;    n.439;    V.331 
It   16;   Sn  47,    163,   390,   558,   906;   Dh  30;   Pv  II. 9'' 
DA  1.149;  PvA  25.  131  (  =  vaijneti). — pp.  pasattha  iX 
pasarjsita  (q.  v.).     Cp.  patipasar)sita. 

Pasagsana  (nt.)  [fr.  pa  +  Sags]  praising,  commendation 
Pug  53  ;  Sdhp  213  ;  PvA  30. 

Pasagsa  (f.)  [fr.  pa  +  iags;  cp.  Vedic  pra^arjsa]  praise, 
applause  D  111.260  ;  S  1.202;  Th  i,  609;  Sn  213,  826, 
895  ;  Miln  377  ;  SnA  155.  In  composition  the  form  is 
pasat)sa°,  e.  g.  "avahana  bringing  applause  Sn  -256  ; 
"kama  desirous  of  praise  Sn  825.  cp.  Nd'  163  ;  °labha 
gain  of  praise  Sn  828.  As  adj.  pasagsa  "laudable, 
praiseworthy"  it  is  better  taken  as  grd.  of  pasarjsati 
( =pasar)siya)  ;  thus  at  Pv  iv.y^'  (pasai)sa  Minayeff ) ; 
PvA  8,  89  (=anindita). 

Pasagsita  [pp.  of  pasagsati,  cp.  pasattha]  praised  S  1.232  ; 
Sn  829,  928  ;  Dh  228,  230  ;  Nd'  i6g  ;  PvA  1 16  ( =  van- 
nita)  130. 


Pasagsiya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  pasagsati,  cp.  Vedic  prasarjsia] 
laudable,  praiseworthy  S  1.149  ;  111.83  ;  A  11.19  .'  Sn  658  ; 

T    T    .>n  ?   ■    (^Hhri    cf\i  Pn     nacanca 


Pasakkati  [pa+sakkati]  to  go  forth  or  out  to ;  ger.  pasak- 
kiya  S  i . 1 99  =  Th  !,  119;  Th  i,  125. 

Pasakkhita  at  J  iv.365  is  doubtful ;  perhaps  we  should 
read  pasakkita  (pp.  of  pasakkati)  ;  the  C.  expl*'  as 
"  lying  down  "  (nipanna  acchati,  p.  367)  ;  Kern,  Toev. 
s.  V.  proposes  change  to  pamakkhita  on  ground  of 
vv.  11.  vamakkhita  &  malakita. 

Pasankanta  [pp.  of  pa+sankamati,  of  kram]  gone  out  to, 
gone  forth  PvA  22. 

Pasankamati  [pa+ sag  +  kram]  to  go  out  or  forth  to  (ace.) 

Sdhp  2  77.  —  pp.  pasankanta. 

Pasanga  [fr.  pa  +  sanj.  Class  Sk.  prasanga  in  both 
meanings]  i.  hanging  on,  inclination,  attachment  to 
KhA  18;  PvA  130.  —  2.  occasion,  event;  loc.  pasange 
at  the  occasion  of  (-°),  instead  of  KhA  .2 1-3  (karana- 
vacana°,  where  PvA  30  in  id.  p.  reads  karan'  atthe). 

Paaajati  [pa  +  sij]  to  let  loose,  produce  ;  to  be  attached  to 
Sn  390  (=alliyati  SnA  375). 

Pasata  [pp.  of  pa  +  srj]  let  out,  produced  1>  111.167; 
Sn.\  1119  (conj.  for  pasava  in  expl"  of  pasuta). 

Pasata^  (adj.)  [Vedic  prsant.  f.  prsati]  spotted,  only  in 
cpd.  "rniga  spotted  antelope  J  v.418  (v.  1.  pasada°). 
The  more  freq.  P.  form  is  pasada°,  e.  g.  S  11.279  (gloss 
pasata°) ;  J  v. 24,  416  ;  vi.537  ;  SnA  82. 


Pasata^  (nt.)  [etym.  ?  Late  Sk.  prsnt  or  pr.sad  a  drop; 
cp.  phusita'  rain -drop  =  prsata  :  BK.  under  prsant  = 
pasata^,  but  probably  dialectical  &  Non-Aryan]  a  small 
measure  of  capacity,  a  handful  (seems  to  be  applied 
to  water  only)  J  i.ioi  (°mattar)  udakag) ;  iv.201  (uda- 
ka°)  ;  v. 382  (°mattar)  paniyar)).  Often  redupl.  pasa- 
tag  pasatag  "by  handfuls "  M  1.245,  J  v.164.  At 
DA  1.298  it  is  closely  connected  with  sarava  (cup),  as 
denoting  the  amount  of  a  small  gift. 

Pasattha  {&  Pasattha)  [pp.  of  pasagsati]  praised,  extolled, 
commended  S  1.169  ;  J  in. 2 34  ;  Vv  44^"  ;  Miln  212,  361. 
As  pasattha  at  Pv  11. 9'^  (so  to  be  read  for  pasettha) ; 
IV. 1*2  (=vannita  PvA  241);  DhsA  124. 

Pasada.     See  pasata^ 

Pasanna'  (adj.)  [pp.  of  pasldati]  i.  clear,  bright  Sn  550 
("netta) ;  KhA  64  &  65  ("tilatelavanna,  where  Vism 
262  reads  vippasanna") ;  Vism  409  (id.).  —  2.  happy, 
gladdened,  reconciled,  pleased  J  1.151,  307;  Vism  129 
(muddha").  —  3.  pleased  in  one's  conscience,  recon- 
ciled, believing,  trusting  in  (loc),  pious,  good,  virtuous 
A  III. 35  (Satthari,  dhamme  sanghe) ;  S  1.34  (Buddhe) ; 
V.374  ;  Vv  5* ;  Sn  O98 ;  Dh  368  (Buddha-sasane)  ; 
J  ii.iii;  DhA  1.60  (Satthari).  Often  comb''  with 
saddha  (having  faith)  Vin  11. 190  ;  PvA  20,  42  (a°).  and 
in  cpd.  "citta  devotion  in  one's  heart  Vin  1.16;  A 
vi.2og  ;  Sn  316,  403,  6go  ;  Pv  II. 1'  ;  SnA  490  ;  PvA  129  ; 
or  "manasa  Sn  402  ;  VvA  39 ;  PvA  67 ;  cp.  pasannena 
manasa  S  1.206;  Dh  2.  See  also  abhippasanna  & 
vippasanna. 

Pasanna''  [pp.  of  pa-l-  syad]  flowing  out,  streaming,  issuing 
forth  ;  in  assu-pasannag  shedding  of  tears  S  11.179. 

Pasanna  (f)  [late  Sk.  prasanna]  a  kind  of  spirituous  hquor 
(made  from  rice)  J  1.360. 

Pasammati  [pa-l-^ram]  to  become  allayed,  to  cease,  to 
fade  away  Th  i,  702. 

Pasayha  is  ger.  of  pasahati  (q.  v.). 

Pasaraijia  (nt.)  [fr.  pa-t-sf]  stretching,  spreading,  being 
stretched  out  PvA  219  (pifthi").     See  also  pasarana. 

Pasava  [fr.  pa+Su]  bringing  forth,  offspring  S  1.69. 

Pasavati  [pa-l-su]  to  bring  forth,  give  birth  to.  beget, 
produce ;  mostly  fig.  in  comb"  with  the  foil,  nouns : 
kibbisag  to  commit  sin  Vin  n.204  ;  A  v. 75  ;  papag  id. 
Pv  IV. I**;  punnag  to  produce  merit  S  1.182,  213; 
A  V.76;  PvA  121  ;  opp.  apufinag  Vin  11.26;  S  1.114; 
verag  to  beget  hatred  S  11.68  ;  Dh  20 1.  —  Cans,  pasaveti 
in  same  meaning  J  vi.ioo  (papag)  —  pp.  pasiita  (q.  v.). 

Pasavana  (nt.)  [fr.  pa-t-su]  l.  giving  birth  PvA  35. — 
2.  producing,  generating,  effecting  PvA  31   (pufiiia"). 

Pasaha  [fr.  pa-l-sah]  overcoming,  mastering,  in  dup° 
(adj.)  hard  to  overcome  J  11.219  ;  Miln  21. 

Pasahati  [pa-fsah]  to  use  force,  subdue,  oppress,  over- 
come M  11.99  ;  Sn  443  ;  Dh  7,  128  :  DhA  in. 46  ;  J  iv.i26, 
494;  V.27.  —  ger.  pasayha  using  force,  forcibly,  by 
force  D  u.74  (okkassa-l- )  ;  A  iv.16  (id.)  ;  S  1.143  ;  Sn  72  ; 
J  1. 143;  Pv  II. 9- ;  11.9'";  (read  appasayha  for  suppa- 
sayha) ;  Miln  210  (okassa-f  ;  for  okkassa  .').  Also  in 
cpd.  pasayha-karin  using  force  J  iv.309  ;  v. 425. 

Pasakha(m.  &  nt.)  [pa-l-sakha;  Epic  Sk.  prasakha  branch] 
I.  a  smaller  branch  J  vi.324  (sakha°).  —  2.  branch-like 
wood,  i.  e.  hard  wood  Th  i,  72.  —  3.  the  body  where  it 
branches  off  from  the  trunk,  i.  e.  abdomen  &  thighs ; 
the  lower  part  of  the  body  Vin  iv.316  (=adho-nabhi 
ubbha-janu-mandalag  C).  Cp.  Susruta  11. 31,  10. — 
4.  the  extremities  (being  the  5""  stage  in  the  formation 
of  the  embryo)  S  i,.2o6. 


Pasada 

Pasada  [fr.  pa  +  sad,  cp.  Vedic  prasada]  i .  clearness, 
brightness,  purity ;  referring  to  the  colours  ("  visi- 
bility")  of  the  eye  J  1.319  (akkhini  mariigula-sadisani 
pafiuayamana  pailca-ppasadani  ahesur)) ;  SnA  453 
(pasanna-netto  i.  e.  paiica-vanna-ppasada-sampattiya). 
In  this  sense  also,  in  Abhidhamma.  with  ref.  to  the  eye 
in  function  of  "sentient  organ,  sense  agency"  sensi- 
tive surface  (so  Mrs  Rh.  D.  in  Dhs.  tsrl.  174)  at  DhsA 
306,  307.  —  2.  joy,  satisfaction,  happy  or  good  mind, 
virtue,  faith  M  1.64  (Satthari) ;  S  1.202  ;  A  1.98,  222 
(Buddhe  etc.);  11.84;  111-270  (puggala") ;  iv.346  ;  SnA 
155,  PvA  5,  35.  —  3.  repose,  composure,  allayment, 
serenity  Nett  28,  50  ;  Vism  107,  135  ;  ThA  258.  —  Note. 
pasada  at  Th  2,  41 1  is  to  be  read  pasaka  (see  J.P.T.S. 
1893  pp.  45,  46).     Cp.  abhi°. 

Pasadaka  (adj.)  [fr.  pasada]  I.  making  bright  Miln  35 
(udaka^  mani).  —  2.  worthy,  good,  pious  PvA  129 
(a°).     Cp.  pasadika. 

Fasadana  (nt.)  [fr.  pa+sad]  i.  happy  state,  reconcilia- 
tion, purity  PvA  132.  —  2.  granting  graces,  gratifica- 
tion Dh.\  111.3  (brahmano  mama  p.°tthane  pasidati 
he  is  gracious  instead  of  me  giving  graces).  —  Cp.  sara". 

Pasadaniya  (adj.)  [fr.  pasada]  inspiring  confidence,  giving 
faith  S  V.15O  ;  Pug  49,  50  ;  VbhA  282  (°suttanta) ;  Sdhp 
543  :  the  10  pasadaniya  dhamma  at  M  iii.  1 1  sq.   Cp.  sam°. 

Pasadiya  at  J  vi.530  is  doubtful ;  it  is  expl""  in  C.  together 
with  sagsadiya  (a  certain  kind  of  rice :  sukara-sali),  yet 
the  C.  seems  to  take  it  as  "  bhumiyag  patita  "  ;  v.  I. 
pasariya.  Kern,  Toep.  s.  v.  takes  it  as  rice  plant  & 
compares  Sk.  *prasatika. 

Pasadeti  [Caus.  of  pa -1- sad,  see  pasidati]  to  render  calm, 
appease,  make  peaceful,  reconcile,  gladden,  incline  one's 
heart  (cittag)  towards  (loc.)  D  i.iio,  139;  S  1.149; 
A  V.71  ;  Pv  II. 9^-  (cittar))  ;  Miln  210;  PvA  50,  123 
(khamapento  p.).  —  Cp.  vi°. 

Pasadhana  (nt.)  [fr.  pa-t-sadh:  cp.  Class.  Sk.  prasadhana 
in  same  meaning]  ornament,  decoration,  parure  J  ii.iSO 
(ranno  sisa  "kappaka  King's  headdress-maker  i.  e. 
barber):  in. 437;  iv.3  (ura-cchada'^) ;  DhA  1.227  Cpf^li- 
ka),  342  ("kappaka),  393;  ThA  267;  VvA  165,  187; 
PvA  155. 

Pasadhita  [pp.  of  pasadheti]  adorned,  arrayed  with 
ornaments,  embellished,  dressed  up  J  1.489  (mandita")  ; 
11.48  (id.);  IV. 2  19  (id.);  v. 510  (nahata°). 

Pasadheti  [Caus.  of  pa-l-sadh]  to  adorn,  decorate,  array 
Mhvs  VII. 38;  DhA  1.398.  —  pp.  pasadhita  (q.  v.). 

Pasarapa  (nt.)  [fr.  pa-t-sf,  cp.  pasarana]  stretching  out 
!i)\  1.19O  (opp.  sammiiijana)  ;  DhA  1.29S  (hattha°). 

Pasarita  [pp.  of  pasareti]  i.  stretched  out,  usually  in 
contrast  with  sammitijita,  e.  g.  at  D  1.222  ;  Vin  r.230  ; 
M  III. 35,  9fi  ;  S  1.137  :  Vism  19  ;  VvA  6.  —  2.  put  forth, 
laid  out,  offered  for  sale  Miln  1.336. 

Pasareti  [Caus.  of  pa-l-sr]  l.  to  cause  to  move  forwards, 
to  let  or  make  go,  to  give  up  J  vi.58  (pasaraya,  imper.). 
—  Pass,  pasariyati  Vism  318  ;  PvA  240  (are  turned  out 
of  doors).  —  2.  to  stretch  out,  hold  out  or  forth,  usually 
with  ref.  to  either  arm  (bahug,  bahag,  baha)  S  1.137 
(opp.  sammifljeti) ;  DA  1.196;  PvA  112,  121  ;  or  hand 
(hatthag)  J  v.4i  ;  vi.282  ;  PvA  113;  or  feet  (pade, 
padag)  Th  2,  44,  49,  cp.  ThA  52  ;  DhsA  324  (  =  sandhiyo 
patippanameti).  —  3.  to  lay  out,  put  forth,  otfer  for 
sale  Vin  11.291;  DhA  11.89.  —  PP-  pasarita  (q.  v.). 
Cp.  abhi". 

Pasasati  Jia  +  sas]  i.  to  teach,  instruct  S  I.38  ;  J  III. 367, 
443-  —  2.  to  rule,  reign,  govern  D  11.257;  Cp.  in.  14'; 
PvA  287. 


69  Passati 

Pasasana  (nt.)  [fr.  pa  +  sas]  teaching,  instruction  j  111.3O7. 

Pasibbaka  (m.  nt.)  [fr.  pa-l-siv,  late  Sk.  prasevaka> 
P.  pasebbaka>pasibbaka,  cp.  Geiger.  P. Or.  15^]  a 
sack,  Vin  in. 17;  J  1.112.  351  ;  11.88,  154;  iii.U),  ii(>. 
343  (camma"  leather  bag);  iv.52,  361  ;  v. 46  (pupa°), 
483;  VI. 432  (spelling  pasippaka)  ;  DA  1.41  ;  DhA 
iv.205. 

Pasibbita  [pp.  of  pa-fsiv)  sewn  up  enveloped  by  (-°) 
Th  I,  1 150  (magsa-naharu°). 

Pasidati  [pa -H  sad]  i.  to  become  bright,  to  brighten  up 
PvA  132  (mukha-vanno  p.).  —  2.  to  be  purified,  recon- 
ciled or  pleased  ;  to  be  clear  &  calm,  to  become  of  peace- 
ful heart  (mano  or  cittag  p.)  ;  to  find  one's  satisfaction 
in  (loc),  to  have  faith  D  11.2112  ;  S  1.98;  11. 199  (sutva 
dhammag  p.);  A  in. 248  ;  Sn  350,  434,  563;  Nd-  426 
(=saddahati,  adhimuccati  okappeti)  ;  Vv  50'*  (mano 
me  pasidi,  aor.) ;  Vism  129  ;  Miln  9  ;  DhA  in. 3  (  =  he  is 
gracious,  i.  e.  good)  ;  VvA  6  (better  v.  1.  passitva) ; 
PvA  141.  —  pp.  pasanna  (q.  v.).  See  also  pasadeti  & 
vippasidati. 

Pasidana  (nt.)  [fr.  pasidati]  calming,  happiness,  purifica- 
tion Ps  II.  12  I  (SS  passadana). 

Pasn  [Vedic  pasu.  cp.  Lat.  pecu  &  pecunia,  Gr.  ttsicoj 
fleece,  Goth,  vieh,  E.  fee]  cattle  M  1.79;  J  v. 105;  Pv 
II. 13"'  (°yoni) ;  Miln  100;  PvA  1O6  (°bhava) ;  n.  pi. 
pasavo  S  1.69;  Sn  858;  gen.  pi.  pasiinag  Sn  311  ;  Pv 
II. 2'.  —  dupasu  bad  cattle  Th  i ,  446. 

Pasuka=pasu  Vin  n.154  (ajaka-l- ). 

Pasnta  [pp.  of  pa-t-sa  or  si,  Sk.  prasita,  on  change  of  i  to 
u  see  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  19-'.  In  meaning  confounded  with 
pasavate  of  pa-l-su]  attached  to  (ace.  or  loc),  intent 
upon  (-°),  pursuing,  doing  D  1.135  (kamma°)  ;  Sn  57 
(see  Nd*  427).  7' 9.  774.  94(1,  Dh  1O6,  181  ;  Vism  135 
(doing  a  hundred  &  one  things :  aneka-kicca")  ;  DhA 
in.  I  bo  ;  PvA  151  (puniia-kammesu),  175  (ki|anaka°), 
195,  228  (papa°). 

Pasura  (adj.)  [reading  doubtful]  many,  abundant  J  vi.134 
(=rasi,  heap  C).  We  should  probably  read  pacura, 
as  at  J  V.40  (  =  bahu  C). 

Pasjita  [pp.  of  pasavati]  produced  ;  having  born,  delivered 
PvA  80. 

Pasuti  (f.)  [fr.  pa-hsu]  bringing  forth,  birth,  in  ghnTi 
lying-in  chamber  Nd^  120  ;  Vism  235  ;  KhA  58  (where 
Vism  259  reads  sutighara). 

Pasettha  at  Pv  11.9"  is  to  be  read  pasatflia  (see  pasattha). 

Pasodheti  [pa -1- Caus.  of  iudh]  to  cleanse,  clean,  purity 
D  1. 71  (cittag). 

Passa'  [cp.  Sk.  pasya,  fr.  passati]  seeing,  one  who  sees 
Th  I,  Oi  (see  Morris,  in  J.P.T.S.  1885,  48). 

Passa*  (m.  &  nt.)  [Vedic  parsva  to  parsu  &  prsti  rib, 
perhaps  also  connected  with  parsni  side  of  leg,  see  under 
paijhi]  I.  side,  flank  M  1.102:  111.3  ;  A  v.i8;  Sn  422; 
J  1.264  ;  III. 26.  Pleonastic  in  pitthi"  (cp.  E.  back- 
side) the  back.  loc.  behind  J  1.292  ;  PvA  55.  —  2.  (moun- 
tain) slope,  in  Himavanta°  J  1.218;  v. 396  (loc. 
pasmani  =  passe  C). 

Passati  [Vedic  pa^yati  &  *spaSati  (aor.  aspa.sta,  Caus. 
spasayati  etc.);  cp.  Av.  spasyciti,  Gr.  (rrfirro/iai,  (E. 
"scepsis");  Lat.  species  etc.;  Ohg.  spehon  =.^ Ger. 
spahen  (K.  spy).  —  The  paradigm  pass",  which  in 
literary  Sk.  is  restricted  to  the  pres.  stem  (pa^)  inter- 
changes with  the  paradigm  dakkh"  &  dass"  (drs) :  see 
dassati']  1.  to  see — Pres.  passati  Vin  1.322;  S  1.69, 
132,  198;  11.29;  Sn  313,  O47,  953,  1063,  1 142  (cp.  Nd* 


Passaddha 


70 


Pahasita 


4J8) ,  Pv  1.2?;  Miln  21S;  PvA  11,  iiu  ;  r'  pi.  passama 
Sn  7b,  153,  164;  Pv  no'  (as  future);  imper.  sg.  passa 
^n  435.  5*'.  S'^'S.  750  :  J  1.223;  '1159;  I'v  in",  i'»; 
PvA  j8  ;  pi.  passatha  S  11.25;  Sn  176  sq.,  777,  &  pas- 
savho  (cp.  Sk.  pasyadhvag)  Sn  998.  —  ppr.  passai] 
(see  Geiger,  P.Gr.  gf^)  M  11.9  ;  Sn  739,  837.  909  ;  & 
passanto  J  111.52  ;  PvA  5,  6 ;  f.  passant!  S  1.199.  —  grd. 
passitabba  J  iv.390  (a°).  —  fut.  passissati  Pv  11. 4' ; 
Pv,\  o.  —  aor.  passi  J  n.103,  iii;  111.278,  341.  —  2.  to 
recognise,  realise,  know :  only  in  comb"  with  janati 
(pres.  janati  passati ;  ppr.  janari  passag)  :  see  janati 
II.  —  3.  to  find  Sn  11 18  (=vindati  patilabhati  Nd^ 
428'') :  J  111.55  ;  Pv  11.9*.  —  Cp.  vi°. 

Passaddha  [pp  of  passambhati,  cp.  BSk.  prasrabdha 
Divy  48]  calmed  down,  allayed,  quieted,  composed,  at 
ease.  Almost  exclusively  with  re£.  to  the  body  (kaya), 
e.  g.  at  Vin  1.294  '■  D  111.241,  288  ;  M  1.37  ;  in. 86  ;  S  1.126  ; 
IV. 125  ;  A  1. 148  ;  v. 30  ;  Vism  134;  VbhA  283  (°kaya- 
puggala).  —  In  lit.  appl°  "ratha  when  the  car  had  slowed 
down  J  HI. 239.     See  also  pati°. 

Passaddhata  (1)  'abstr.  fr.  passaddha]  calmness,  repose 
Nd»  166. 

Passaddhi  (f.)  (fr.  pa4-srambh]  calmness,  tranquillity, 
repose,  serenity  M  in. 86  ;  S  11.30  ;  iv.78  ;  v. 66  ;  A  iv.455 
sq.  ;  Ps  11.244;  iJhs  40  (kaya°),  41  (citta*^),  cp.  Dhs. 
trsl.  23  ;  Vism  129  ;  VbhA  314  (kaya°,  citta") ;  DhsA  150 
(  — samass-asa-ppatta).  Often  comb""  with  pamujja  A: 
piti,  e.  g.  D  1.72,  73,  196  ;  Nett  29,  66.  Six  passaddhis 
at  S  IV.217  (with  ref.  to  vaca,  vitakka-Vicara,  piti, 
assasa-passasa,  safina-vedana.  raga-dosa-moha,  through 
the  4  jhanas  etc.).  Passaddhi  is  one  of  the  7  sam- 
bojjhangas  (constituents  of  enlightenment):  see' this 
&  cp.  M  111.86;  Vism  130,  i34=VbhA  282  (where  7 
conditions  of  this  state  are  enum''). 

Passana  see  anu°,  vi*^. 

Passambhati   ipa  +  srambh]    to   calm   down,    to   be  quiet 

Vin  1.294  (fut  'i.ssati)  ;  D  1.73  ;  RI  in. 86  ;  S  v. 333  ; 
A   III.2I.  —  pp.   passaddha;  Cans,  passambheti  (q,  v.). 

Passambhana  (f.)  [fr.  passambhati]  allay ment,  calmness, 
composure  Dhs  40,  41,  320. 

Passambhati  [Caus.  of  passambhati]  to  calm  down,  quiet, 
allay  M  1.56,  425;  S  III. 125;  Vism  288  ( =  nirodheti). 
I>|ir.  passambhayai]  .M  1.56;  111.82,  8g. 

Passaya  |fr.  pa  +  sri,  cp.  Class.  Sk.  prasraya  reverence] 
refuge  Cp.  in.  id*.  —  Note,  "passaya  in  kantakapassaya 
J  III.  74,  &  kantakapassayika  D  1.167  (kanth")  ;  J  iv.29g 
(kanlaka°)  is  to  be  read  as  "apassaya  (apa4-sri). 

Passavati  [pa  +  sru]  to  flow  fortli,  to  pour  out  Miln  180. 

Passasati  (pa  +  svas]  to  breathe  in  D  11. 291  ;  M  1.56; 
III. 82  ;  J  III. 296;  v.43  ;  Vism  271;  DhA  1.215.  See 
also  assasati  &  remarks  under  a'  3. 

Passava  [fr.  passavati]  urine  (lit.  flowing  out)  Vin  n.141  ; 
IV. 266  (p.  muttar)  vuccati)  ;  D  1.70  (uccara+);  M 
III. 3,  90;  J  1. 164  (uccara-passavag  vissajjeti),  338; 
V.164,  389;  Vism  235  (uccara"). 

-donika  a  trough  for  urine  Vin  11.22 1  ;  Vism  235. 

Passasa  [fr.  pa4-svas]  inhaled  breath,  inhalation  S  1.1116, 
159  :  Ps  1.95,  164  sq.,  182  sq.  Usually  in  comb"  assasa- 
passasa  (q.  v.).  At  Vism  272  passasa  is  expl'  as 
"  ingoing  wind  "  and  assasa  as  "  outgoing  wind." 

Passasin  (adj.)  [fr,  passasa]  breathing;  in  ghuru-ghuru" 
snoring  S  l.i  17. 

Passika  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  imper.  passa  of  passati,  +  ka]  only 
in  cpd.  ehipassika  (q.  v.). 

Passupati  [pa  +  svap]  to  sleep,  rest,  aor.  passupi ;  fut. 
passupissati  J  v.  70.  71. 


Paha'  (nt.)  [?]  night  of  steps  from  which  to  step  down 
into  the  water,  a  ghat  {  =  tittha  Bdhgh)  D  1.223.  The 
meaning  is  uncertain,  it  is  trsl''  as  "  accessible "  at 
Dial.  1.283  (q-  V.  for  further  detail).  Neumann  (Alaj- 
jhima  trsl'  1.513)  trsl^  "  ganz  und  gar  erloschcn  " 
(pabha  ?).  It  is  not  at  all  improbable  to  take  pahag 
as  ppr.  of  pajahati  (as  contracted  fr.  pajaharj  like  pahat- 
vana  for  pajahitvana  at  Sn  639),  thus  meaning  "  giving 
up  entirely."  The  same  form  in  the  latter  meaning 
occurs  at  ThA  69  (Ap.  v.  3). 

Paha'^  (adj.)=pahu,  i.  e.  able  to  (with  inf.)  J  v.  198  (C. 
pahu  samattho). 

Pahatjsati'  [pa4-har)sati' ^gharjsati',  of  ghr?  to  rub, 
grind]  to  strike,  beat  (a  metal),  rub,  sharpen  (a  cutting 
in.strument,  as  knife,  hatchet,  razor  etc.)  J  1.2  78; 
II.  102  (pharasug) ;  DhA  1.253  (khurag  pahagsi  Sharp- 
ened the  razor;  corresponds  to  ghatteti  in  preceding 
context). — pp.  pahattha'  &  pahagsita'  (q.  v.). 

Pahagsati"  [pa  +  har)sati-=hassati,  of  hy?  to  be  glad,  cp. 
gharjsati^]  to  be  pleased,  to  rejoice  ;  only  in  pp.  pahattha- 
&  pahaijsita'-  (q.  v.),  and  in  Pass,  pahagsiyati  to  be 
gladdened,  to  exult  Miln  326  (+ kuhiyati).  See  also 
sam°. 

Pahatjsita'  [pp.  of  pahagsati]  struck,  beaten  (of  metal), 
retineU  J  vi.218  (ukka-mukha°),  574  (id.). 

Pahagsita-  [pp.  of  pahaijsati-]  gladdened,  delighted, 
happy  DhA  1.230  (°mukha) ;  VvA  279  ("mukha  SS 
pahasita  at  Miln  297  is  better  to  be  taken  as  pp.  of 
pahasati,  because  of  comb"  hattha  pahattha  hasita 
pahasita. 

Pahata  [pp.  of  paharati]  assailed,  struck,  beaten  (of 
musical  instruments)  J  11. 102,  182;  vi.189;  VvA  i6i 
(so  for  pahata)  ;  PvA  253.  Of  a  ball :  driven,  im- 
pelled Vism  143  ("citra-genduka)  =;DhsA  116  (so  read 
for  pahattha-citta-bheiiduka  and  correct  Expositor  153 
accordingly).  The  reading  pahata  at  PvA  4  is  to  be 
corrected  to  pataha. 

Pahattha'  [pp.  of  pahagsati']  struck,  beaten  (of  metal) 
J  VI.  J  I  7  (suvanna). 

Pahattha"  [pp.  of  paharjsati^]  gladdened,  happy,  cheerful, 
delighted  Vin  111.14;  J  1.278  (twice;  once  as  ''manasa, 
which  is  wrongly  taken  by  C.  as  pahattha'),  443 ; 
11.240  (tuttha°);  Vism  346  (hattha");  DhA  1.230 
(tuttha')  ;  VvA  337.  In  its  original  sense  of  "  bristling" 
(with  excitement  Or  joy),  with  ref.  to  ear  tS:  hair  of  an 
elephant  in  phrase  pahattha-kanna-vala  at  \'in  11.195^ 
J  V.335  (cp.  Sk.  prahrsla-roman,  N.  of  an  Asura  at 
Kathasaritsagara  47,  31'). 

Pahata  [pp.  of  pa+hanl  killed,  overcome  M  111.46 ;  S 
n.54;  J  VI.512. 

Paharana  (nt.)  [fr.  paharati]  striking,  beating  SnA  224; 
PvA  2S5. 

Pahaianaka  (adj.)  [fr.  paharana]  striking,  hitting  J  1.418. 

Paharati  [pa  +  hf]  to  strike,  hit,  beat  J  111.26,  347;  vi.376; 
VvA  65  ;  PvA  4  ;  freq.  in  phrase  accharag  p.  to  snap 
one's  linger,  e.  g.  J  11  447  ;  see  acchara'.  aor.  pahasi 
(cp.  pariyudahasi)  Vv  29'  {— pahari  VvA  123).  —  pp. 
pahata  (q.  v.).  Caus.  paharapeti. —  1.  to  cause  to 
be  assailed  J  iv.150.  —  2.  to  put  on  or  join  on  to 
J  VI. 32  ("harapesi). 

Pahasati  [pa  +  has]  to  laugh,  giggle  J  V.452  (uhasati+). 
See  also  pahassati  &  pahasati.  —  pp.  pahasita  (q.  v.). 

Pahasita  [pp.  of  pahasati  or  "hassati]  laughing,  smiling, 
joyful,  pleased  Miln  297;  J  1.411  (nicca°  mukha) ; 
II.  I  79. 


Pahassati 


71 


Paka 


PahSLSSati  [pa  +  has,  perhaps  pa  +  hp?,  Sk.  harsati,  cp. 
pahagsati"  to  laugh,  be  joyful  or  cheerful  Sn  8S7 
(=hattha  pahattha  Nd^  291)  ;  cp.  SnA  555  hasajata). 
The  pp.  pahasita  (q.  v.)  is  derived  fr.  pres.  pahasati, 
which  makes  the  equation  pahassati  =  paharjsati-  all 
the  more  likely. 

Pahana  (nt.)  [fr.  pa  +  ha.  see  pajahati]  giving  up.  leaving, 
abandoning,  rejection  M  i.(x>,  111.4.  1- '•  S  1.1.I,  i,?2 
(dukkha");  11. 170;  111.33;  IV.7  sq.  ;  D  111.225,  246; 
A  1.82.  134;  11.20,  232  (kanhassa  kammassa  "aya)  ; 
III. 431  ;  Sn  374,  1 106  (=vupasama  patinissagga  etc. 
Xd-  429)  ;  Dh  331  ;  J  1.79  ;  Ps  1.26  ;  11.98,  156  ;  Pug  ib  ; 
Dhs  16,5,  174,  339;  Nett  15  sq..  24,  192;  Vism  194 
{nivarana-santapa")  ;  DhsA  166,  345  ;  VvA  73.  -°pa- 
rinfia  see  parifina  :  -°vinaya  avoidance  consisting  in 
giving  up  (coupled  with  sar)vara-vinaya  avoidance  by 
protection,  prophylaxis),  based  on  the  5  iiualities 
tadanga-pahana.  vikkhambhana  ,  samucchcda  ,  patip- 
passaddhi".  nissarana^"  DhsA  351  ;  SnA  8. 

Pahaya  is  ger.  of  pajahati  (q.  v.). 

Pahayin  (adj.)  [fr.  pa  +  ha.  see  pajahati]  giving  up.  aban- 
doning Sn  1 1 13,  1 132,  cp.  Nd-  431  ;  Sdhp  3(10. 

Pahara  [fr.  pa  +  hy.  Class.  Sk.  prahara,  see  paharati]  i.  a 
blow,  stroke,  hit  D  1.144  (danda")  ;  M  1. 123,  126:  Pv 
IV.  i(>'  (salittaka")  ;  M  i.  :  OhA  111.48  ("dana-sikkhapada 
the  precepts  concerning  those  guilty  of  giving  blows, 
cp.  Vin  IV.  1 4(1)  ;  Pv.\  4  (ekappaharena  with  one  stroke). 
5(>  (muggara"),  66  (id.)  233.  —  ekappaharena  at  Vism 
41S  2S  adv.  "  all  at  once."  paharar)  dcti  to  give  a  blow 
Vin  IV.146;  S  iv.62  ;  \  111.121;  Vism  314  (pahara- 
satani)  ;  I'vA  igi  (sise).  —  2.  a  wound  J  iv.89  ;  v. 459 
(  niukha). 

Paharapa  sec  abhi". 

Paharin  (adj.)  [fr.  paharati]  striking,  assaulting  J  11.211. 

Pahasa  '^fr.  pa  +  has,  cp.  Class.  Sk.  prahasa]  laughing, 
mirth  Dhs  g.  86,  283  ;  VvA  132  ;  Sdhp  223. 

Pahasati  in  pahasanto  saparisai)  at  ThA  69  should  pre- 
ferably be  read  as  pahasayanto  parisar),  thus  taken  as 
Caus.  of  pa -I- has,  i.  e.  making  one  smile,  gladdening. 

Paha°i  is  3^^  sg.  aor.  of  paharati ;  found  at  Vv  29^  (musa- 
!ena  =  pahari  \"vA  1 13) ;  and  also  3rd  sg.  aor  of  pajahati, 
e.  g.  at  Sn  1037  (=pajahi  Nd^  under  jahati) 

Pahaseti  [Caus.  of  pahasatil  to  make  laugh,  to  gladden,  to 
make  joyful  \'ism  289  (cittar)  pamodeti  haseti  paha- 
seti). 

Pahi^a  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  pa-l-hi]  sending;  being  sent;  a 
messenger,  in  °gamana  going  as  messenger,  doing 
messages  D  1.5  ;  M  1.343  ;  J  11.82  ;  Miln  370  ;  DA  1.78. 
See  also  pahana. 

Pahqiaka  (nt.)  [fr.  pahinati  ?1  a  sweetmeat  A  m.76  (v.  1. 
pahenaka).  See  also  pahenaka.  The  (late)  Sk.  form 
is  prahelaka. 

PabiQati  [pa-l-hi,  Sk.  hinoti]  to  send;  Pres.  pahinati 
Vin  111.140  sq.  ;  iv.iS;  DhA  11243;  aor.  pahini  J  i.oo 
(sasanag) ;  v. 458  (pannani)  ;  VvA  67;  Dh.\  1.72; 
11.5b,  243;  ger.  pahinitva  VvA  65. — pp.  pahita- 
(q.  v.).  There  is  another  aor.  pahesi  (Sk.  prahaisit)  in 
analogy  to  which  a  new  pres.  paheti  has  been  formed,  so 
that  pahesi  is  now  felt  to  be  a  der.  fr.  paheti  &  accord- 
ingly is  grouped  with  the  latter.  All  other  forms  with 
he°  (pahetuT)  e.  g.)  are  to  be  found  under  paheti. 

Pahipana  (nt.)  [fr.  pahinati]  sending,  dispatch  DhA 
11.243. 

Pahital  [pp.  of  padahati]  resolute,  intent,  energetic  ;  onlv 
in  cpd.  pahitatta  of  resolute  will  (cp.  BSk.  prahitatman 


Divy  37)  M  1.114;  S  1.53  (expl''  by  Bdhgh  with  wrong 
derivation  fr.  peseti  as  "  pesit-atta  "  thus  identifying 
pahita>  &  pahita'',  see  A'.S.  320) ;  11.21,  239  ;  111.73  sq.  ; 
IV. 60,  145,  V.187,  A  11.14,  111-21.  IV.302  sq.  ;  v.84  ; 
Sn  425,  432  sq.,  961  ;  It  71  ;  Nd^  477  ;  Th  2,  161  (expl 
at  ThA  143.  with  the  same  mistake  as  above,  as  pesita 
citta)  ;  Nd'  477  (id.  ;  pesit-atta);  Miln  338,  366,  406. 

Fahita-  [pp-  of  pahinati]  sent  J  1.86  (sasana)  ;  DhA  11.242  ; 
111.191  (interchanging  with  pesita). 

Pahlna  [pp-  of  pajahati]  given  up,  abandoned,  left, 
eliminated  Vin  111.97  =  ^.27;  S  11.24;  '"-33;  iv-3"5  ; 
Sn  351  (°jati-marana),  370.  564,  1132  (°mala-moha) ; 
It  32  ;  NM2  s.  V.  ;  Ps  1.63  ;  11.244  ;  Pug  12,  22. 

Pahiyati   [Pass,   of  pajahati]   to  be  abandoned,   to  pass 
away,  vanish  M  1.7;  S  1.219  (fut.  "issati)  ;  11. 196  (ppr. 
iyamana) ;  v.152  ;  Sn  806  :  Nd'  124  ;  VbhA  271.     Spelt 
pahiyyati  at  S  v.  150. 

Pahu  (adj.)  [cp.  Vedic  prabhu.  fr.  pa-l-bhu]  able  Sn  98; 
J  V.I 98;  Nd=  613^ 

Pahfita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  pa-t-bhii,  cp.  Vedic  prabhuta] 
.sufficient,  abundant,  much,  considerable  Sn  428.  862  sq.  ; 
Pv  1.5-  (=anappaka.  bahu.  yavadattha  C.  ;  Dhp  at 
PvA  23  gives  bahuka  as  inferior  variant) ;  i.ri'  (  =  apa- 
rivanta.  ulara  ;  v.  1.  bahu);  11.7'  (v.  1.  bahfita)  ;  PvA 
145  (dhana;  v.  1.  bahuta)  ;  SnA  204  (id.).  321  (id.). 
See  also  bahuta. 

-jivha  large  tongued  D  n.iS;  111.144.  '73-  -jivhata 
the  characteristic  of  a  large  tongue  Sn  p.  107.  -dhafina 
having  manv  riches  ]  iv.309.  -dhana  id.  Th  2.  4116 
(C.  reading  for  T.  bahuta-ratana).  -patina  rich  in 
wisdom  So  359,  3.39,  996.  -bhakkha  eating  much,  said 
of  the  fire  S  1.69!  -vitta  =  "dhanna  D  1.134;  Sn  102: 
PvA  3. 

Pahutika  (adj.)=pahuta  PvA  133  (v.  1.  BR  bahuta:  in 
expl"  of  bahu). 

Pahenaka  (nt.)  [cp.  BSk.  prahenaka  in  sense  of  "  sweet- 
meat "  at  Divy  13,  238  ;  the  *Sk.  form  is  prahelaka]  a 
present  J  vi.369  (so  here,  whereas  the  same  word  as 
pahinaka  at  \  111.76  clearly  means  "  sweetmeat  "). 

Pahena  (nt.)  [pahena  .'!  same  as  pahina  in  "gamana  going 
on  errands  J  11.82. 

Pahoti  &  (in  verse)  pabhavati  [pa-(-bhn,  cp.  Vedic  pra- 
bhavati  in  meaning  "to  be  helpful"]  i.  to  proceed 
from  (with  gen.),  rise,  originate  D  11.217;  ^  111.76; 
S  11.184  :  as  pabhavati  at  Sn  728  =  1050  (cp.  Nd^  401)  ; 
(perf.  med.)  pahottha  it  has  arisen  from  (gen.),  i.  c.  it 
was  the  fault  of  J  v.  102.  —  2.  to  be  sufficient,  adequate 
or  able  (with  inf.)  D  1.240  ;  M  1.94  ;  S  1.102  ;  Sn  36.  867  ; 
J  V.305;  DA  1.192;  111.254  (fut.  pahossati)  ;  VvA  73; 
Davs  IV.  1 8.  Neg.  both  with  na^  &  a°  viz.  nappahoti 
J  vt.204  ;  DhA  III. 408  ;  nappahosi  J  1.84  ;  appahoti 
nh.\  IV,  1 77;  appabhonto  PvA  73;  in  verse  app^- 
bhavag  J  111.373  (  =  appahontoC.).  —  pp.  pahuta  (q.  \.). 

Pahona  in  °kala  at  J  111.17  ^^^^  ^^  pahonaka". 

Pahonaka  (adj.)  [fr.  pahoti]  sufficient,  enough  J  1.34O ; 
II. 122  ;  III. 17  (so  read  for  pahona") ;  iv.277  ;  Vism  404  ; 
DhA  1.78,  219;  VvA  264;  Pv.\  81. 

Paka  [Vedic  paka.  see  pacatil  that  which  is  cooked,  cook- 
ing, quantity  cooked  J  vi.161  (tihi  p-ikehi  pacitva)  ; 
VvA  186.  Ksp.  in  foil,  comb"  tela"  "  oil  cooking."  an 
oil  decoction  Vin  11.103:  thali°  a  th.  full  of  cooking 
J  1. 186;  dona°  a  d.  full  S  1.81  ;  DhA  11.8;  sosana" 
Dhatumanjusa  132  (under  kafh).  On  paka  in  appl* 
meaning  of  "  effect,  result  "  sec  Cpd.  88-i.  —  As  nt.  in 
stanza  "  pakar)  pakassa  paccayo ;  apakar)  avipa- 
kassa  "  at  VbhA  173.  —  Cp.  vi°. 


Pakata 


72 


Patikulya 


-tela  an  oil  concoction  or  mixture;  used  for  rubbing 
tlie  body  ;  usually  given  with  its  price  worth  100  or 
1,000  pieces,  e.  g.  sata°  J  n.397 ;  v.376 ;  VvA  68  — 
DhA  III. 311;  sahassa"  J  111.372.  -vatta  subsistence, 
livelihood,  maintenance  Mhvs  35,  120  ;  DhA  11.29  I 
VvA  220.  -hatjsa  a  species  of  water  bird  J  v.356  ; 
VI. 539  ;  SnA  277. 

Pakata  (adj.)  [=pakata;  on  a  for  a  see  Geiger,  P.Gr. 
§  33*-  Cp.  Sk.  prakata  Halayudha.  The  spelling  is 
sometimes  pakata]  i.  common,  vulgar,  uncontrolled, 
in  phrase  pakat-indriya  of  uncontrolled  mind  S  1.61 
{=sar)varabhavena  giuikale  viya  vivata-indriya  K.S. 
320),  204  ;  111.93  ;  v.269  ;  A  1.70.  266.  280  ;  111.355,  391  ; 
Th  I,  109  (C.  asagvuta,  see  Brethren  99) ;  Pug  35.  — At 
Miln  251  pakata  is  to  be  read  papaka.  • — 2.  open, 
common,  unconcealed  J  1.262  (pakato  jato  was  found 
out)  ;  Sn  A  343  ;  PvA  103  (for  avi).  —  3.  commonly 
known,  familiar  V'ism  279  ;  PvA  17  (deva),  23,  78  (su°), 
128  ;  VvA  109  (  +  paiifiata)  ;  °r)  karoti  to  make  manifest 
Vism  287  ;  "bhava  being  known  DhsA  243  ;  PvA  103. 
—  4.  renowned,  well-known  DA  1.143;  PvA  107. 

Pakatika  (adj.)  [fr.  pakati,  cp.  BSk.  prakftaka  (loka) 
Bodhicaryavatara  v.  3,  ed.  Poussin]  natural,  in  its 
original  or  natural  state  J  v.274;  Miln  218  (mani- 
ratana) ;  DhA  1.20  ;  VvA  288  ;  Pv.A.  66  (where  id.  p. 
J  III.  1 67  reads  patipakatika),  206;  pakatikag  karoti  to 
restore  to  its  former  condition,  to  repair,  rebuild 
J  1.354,  ^'so  fig-  t°  restore  a  dismissed  officer,  to  rein- 
state J  V.I 34. 

Pak&ra  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  prakara,  pa-f  a-l-kr]  an  encircling 
wall,  put  up  for  obstruction  and  protection,  a  fence, 
rampart  Vin  11. 121  (3  kinds:  made  of  bricks,  of  stone, 
or  of  wood,  viz.  itthaka",  sila,  daru°) ;  iv.266  (id.) ; 
M  III. 1 1  ;  S  IV.194  ("torana)  ;  Aiv.107;  v. 195;  J  1.63; 
11.50;  VI. 330  (maha°),  341  (-l-parikha  &  attala)  ;  Pv 
i.io'^  (ayo°) ;  Miln  i  ;  Vism  394  ( =parikkhepa-pakara)  ; 
DhA  III. 441  (tinnar)  pakaranag  antare) ;  PvA  24,  52; 
sani°  screen-fencing  J  11.88  ;  Pv.V  283. 

-itthaka  brick  or  tile  of  a  wall  J  111.446  (T.  itthika). 
-parikkhitta  surrounded  by  a  wall  DA  1.42.  -parik- 
khepa  a  fencing  Vism  74. 

Pakasiya  (adj.)  [fr.  pa-l-a-l-kai,  cp.  pakasati  &  Class. 
Sk.  prakasya]  evident,  manifest,  open,  clear  J  vi.230 
(opp.  guyha ;  C.  pakasika). 

Pakula  (adj.)  [pa-l-akula]  read  at  Ud  5  in  comb"  akkula- 
pakkula  (  =  akula-pakula)  "in  great  confusion";  read 
also  in  gatha  7  pakula  for  bakkula.  Cp.  Morris, 
J.P.T.S.  1886.  94  sq. 

Pagabbhiya  (nt.)  [fr.  pagabbha]  boldness,  impudence, 
forwardness  Sn  930  ;  Nd'  228  sq.  (3  kinds,  viz.  kayika, 
vacasika,  cetasika),  390  sq.  ;  J  11.32  ;  v. 449  (pagab- 
bhiya) ;  Sn.\  165;  KhA  242;  DhA  HI. 354  (pa°) ; 
VvA  121. 

Pagonnata  (f)  [abstr.  of  pagunna,  which  is  der.  fr.  paguna] 
being  familiar  with,  experience  Dhs  48,  49  ;  Vism  463  sq., 
466. 

Pagusa  [cp.  Sk.  vagusa,  a  sort  of  large  fish  Halayudha  3, 
37]  a  certain  kind  of  fish  J  iv.70  (as  glo-ss,  T.  reads 
pavusa.  SS  putusa,  BB  patusa  &  pavuma;  C.  expl" 
as  maha-mukha-maccha). 

Pacaka  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  pac,  cp.  paceti]  one  who  cooks,  a 
cook  ;  f.  "ika  J  1.318. 

Pacana'  (nt.)  [fr.  pac.  Cans,  paceti]  bringing  to  boil, 
cooking  J  1.3 1 8  (yagu°).     Cp.  pari". 

P&cana'  (nt.)  [for  pajana,  cp.  paceti^  &  SnA  147]  a  goad, 
stick  S  1.172  ;  Sn  p.  13  ;  v. 77  ;  J  111.281  ;  IV.310. 
-yatthi  driving  stick,  goad  stick  S  1.115. 


Pacariya  (-°)  [pa-l-acariya]  only  as  2"^  part  of  a  (redupl.) 
compound  acariya-pacariya  in  the  nature  of  comb°' 
mentioned  under  a'  3b:  "  teacher  upon  teacher " 
(expl*  by  C*  as  "  teacher  of  teachers ")  D  1.90  (cp. 
DA  1254) ;  11.237,  ste-  (see  acariya). 

Pacittiya  (adj.)  [most  likely  prak-f  citta-)-ika,  i.  e.  of  the 
nature  of  directing  one's  mind  upon,  cp.  pabbhara  = 
♦prag-t-bhara.  So  expl''  also  by  S.  L^vi  J. As.  x.20, 
p.  506.  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  27,  n.  i  inclines  to  etym. 
prayas -f  cittaka]  requiring  expiation,  expiatory  Vin 
1. 172,  176;  11.242,  306  sq.  ;  IV. I  sq.,  258  sq.  ;  A  11. 242 
(dhamma)  ;  Vism  22.  —  It  is  also  the  name  of  one  of 
the  books  of  the  Vinaya  (ed.  Oldenberg,  vol.  iv.).  See 
on  term  Vin.  Texts  1.18,  32,  245. 

Paclna  (adj.)  [Vedic  pracina.  fr.  adv.  pr5c  bent  forward] 
eastern  i.  e.  facing  the  (rising)  sun  (opp.  paccha)  J  1.50 
("sisaka,  of  Mayadevi's  couch),  212  (°lokadhatu)  ; 
Miln  6;  DA  1.3 11  ("mukha  facing  east);  DhA  III.  155 
(id.)  ;  VvA  190  ;  PvA  74,  256.  The  opposite  apacina 
(e.  g.  S  III. 84)  is  only  apparently  a  neg.  pacina,  in 
reality  a  der.  fr.  apa  (apa-l-ac).  as  pacina  is  a  der.  fr. 
pra-l-ac.     See  apacina. 

Paceti*  [Cans,  of  pacati]  to  cause  to  boil,  fig.  to  cause  to 
torment  D  1.52  (ppr.  pacayato,  gen.,  also  pacento). 
Cp.  vi°. 

Paceti^  [for  pajeti,  with  c.  for  j  (see  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  39^) ; 
pra-l-aj:  see  aja]  to  drive,  urge  on  Dh  135  (ayui)  p.  - 
gopalako  viya  .  .  .  peseti  DhA  111.60), 

Pajana  (nt.)  [fr.  pa-)-aj,  cp.  pacana']  a  good  SnA  147. 

Pajapeti  [Cans,  of  pajeti]  to  cause  to  drive  or  go  on  J 
11.296  (sakatani)  ;  ni.51  (so  read  for  pajapeti;  BB 
paceti  &  pajeti) 

Pajeti  [Caus.  of  pa-l-aj,  cp.  aja]  i.  to  drive  (cp.  paceti') 
J  II. 122,  143,  III. 51  (BB  for  T.  pajapeti)  ;  v. 443  (navar)) ; 
VI. 32  (yoggai)) ;  SnA  147;  DhA  iv.160  (gone).  —  2.  to 
throw  (the  dice)  J  vi.281. — Caus.  II.  pajapeti  (q.  v.). 

P&tankl  (f.)  "  sedan  chair  "  (?)  in  phrase  sivikag  patankii] 
at  Vin  1.192  (MV  v.  10,  3)  is  not  clear.  The  vv.  11. 
(p.  380)  are  patangin,  patangan  patakan.  Perhaps 
pallankar)  ? 

PStala  (adj.)  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  patala,  to  same  root  as  palita 
&  pandu  :  see  Walde,  Lat.  Wtb.  under  palleo  &  cp. 
pandu]  pale  red,  pink  J  iv.i  14. 

Patau  (f.)  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  patali,  to  patala]  the  trumpet 
flower,  Bignonia  Suaveolens  D  11.4  (Vipassi  pataliya 
mule  abhisambuddho) ;  Vv  35*  ;  J  1.41  ("rukkha  as  the 
Bodhi  tree);  11.162  (patali-bhaddaka  sic.  v.  1.  for 
phalibhaddaka) ;  iv.440  ;  v. 189;  vi.537;  Miln  338; 
VvA  42,  164  ;  ThA  211,  226. 

Pa^ava  (nt.)  [cp.  late  Sk.  patava,  fr.  patu]  skill  KhA  156. 

Pa^ikankha  (adj.)  [grd.  of  patikankhati,  Sk.  ♦pr^tikank- 
sya]  to  be  desired  or  exjiected  M  1.25  ;  111.97  ;  S  1.88  ; 
II. 152  ;  A  iii.i43=Sn  p.  140  (  =  icchitabba  SnA  504); 
Ud  36 ;  DhA  IV.2  (gati  °a) ;  PvA  63  (id.). 

Patikankhin  (-°)  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  pati-f  kanks,  cp.  patikan- 
khin]  hoping  for,  one  who  expects  or  desires  D  1.4 ; 
M  HI. 33  ;  A  ii.aog  ;  J  in. 409. 

Patika  (f)  [etym.  unknown  ;  with  patiya  cp.  Sk.  pasya  ?] 
half-moon  stone,  the  semicircular  slab  under  the  stair- 
case Vin  1. 180  (cp.  Vin.  Texts  11. 3).  As  patiya  at 
J  VI. 278  (=pitthi-pasana  C). 

PatikalyS  (f  )  [fr.  pati(k)kula]  =patikkulyata  (perhaps  to 
be  read  as  such)  J  v. 253  (nava,  cp.  Vism  341  sq.). 


Patikkulyata 


73 


Pana 


Patikkulyata  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  patikkula]  loathsomeness, 
objectionableness  A  111.32  ;  iv.47  sq.  ;  v.64.  Cp.  pati- 
kulyata,  patikulata  &  patikulya. 

Patidesanlya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  patideseti  with  pati  for  pati 
in  der.]  belonging  to  confession,  (a  sin)  which  ought  to 
be  confessed  Vin  1.172  ;  11.242  ;  A  11.243  {as  "dcsani- 
yaka). 

Patipada'  (adj.)  [the  adj.  form  of  patipada]  following  the 
(right)  Path  M  1.354  =  11  80  (  +  sikha). 

Patipada-  [fr.  pati  +  pad,  see  patipajjati  &  cp.  patipada] 
lit.  "  entering,  beginning  "  ;  the  first  day  of  the  lunar 
fortnight  Vin  1.132  ;  J  iv.ioo  ;  VvA  72  ("sattami). 

Patipadaka  (adj.)  [fr.  patipada^]  belonging  to  the  i^'  day 
of  the  lunar  fortnight ;  only  with  ref.  to  bhatta  (food) 
&  in  comb"  with  pakkhika  &  uposathika,  i.  e.  food 
given  on  the  half-moon  days,  on  the  7"'  day  of  the 
week  &  on  the  first  day  of  the  fortnight  Vin  1.58  = 
II.  1 75;  IV. 75,  78. 

Patipaggalika  (adj.)  [fr.  patipuggala]  belonging  to  one's 
equal  M  III. 254  sq.  (dakkhina). 

Pa(ibhoga  [forpatibhoga  (?)  ;  difficult  to  explain,  we  should 
suspect  a  ger.  formation  *prati-bhogya  for  *bhujya 
i.  e.  "  counter-enjoyable,"  i.  e.  one  who  has  to  be  made 
use  of  in  place  of  someone  else ;  cp.  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  24] 
a  sponsor  A  11. 172;  Ud  17;  It  i  sq.  ;  J  n.93  ;  Vism 
555  sq.  ;  DhA  1.398  ;  VbhA  165. 

Patimokkha  (pati)°  (nt.)  [with  Childers  plausibly  as  pati-l- 
mokkha,  grd.  of  muc  (Caus.  rooks")  with  lengthening  of 
pati  as  in  other  grd.  like  patidesaniya.  Thus  in  reality 
the  same  as  patimokkha  2  in  sense  of  binding,  obliga- 
tory, obligation,  cp.  J  v. 2 5.  The  spelling  is  freq.  pati° 
(BB  pati").  The  Sk.  pratimoksa  is  a  wrong  adaptation 
fr.  P.  patimokkha,  it  should  really  be  pratimoksya 
"  that  which  should  be  made  binding."  An  expl"  of 
the  word  after  the  style  of  a  popular  etym.  is  to  be 
found  at  Vism  16]  a  name  given  to  a  collection  of 
various  precepts  contained  in  the  Vinaya  (forming  the 
foundation  of  the  Suttavibhanga,  Vin  vols,  in  &  iv., 
ed.  Oldenberg),  as  they  were  recited  on  Uposatha  days 
for  the  purpose  of  confession.  See  Geiger,  P.  Lit. 
c.  7,  where  literature  is  given  ;  &  cp.  Vin.  Texts  1.27  sq.  ; 
Franke,  Dighanikaya  p.  66  sq.  ;  — patimokkhat)  uddisati 
to  recite  the  P.  Vin  1.102,  112,  175;  11.259;  iii.8  ; 
IV.  143  ;  Ud  51  ;  opp.  °ij  thapeti  to  suspend  the  (recital 
of  the)  P.  Vin  11.240  sq.  —  See  Vin  1.65,  68;  11. 95. 
240  sq.  249 ;  S  v. 187 ;  Sn  340  ;  Dh  185,  375  ;  Nd'  365  ; 
Vism  7,  II,  16  sq.,  36,  292  ;  DhA  ni.237  (=jetthaka- 
sila) ;  iv.iii  (id.);  Sdhp  342,  355,  449.  -uddesa  reci- 
tation of  the  P.  Vin  1.102  ;  D  11.46  ;  M  11. 8  ;  SnA  199. 
-uddesaka  one  who  recites  the  P.  Vin  1.115,  cp.  Vin. 
Texts  1.242.  -thapana  suspension  of  the  P.  Vin  11.24 1 
sq.  ;  A  V.70.  -.saQvara  "  restraint  that  is  binding  on  a 
recluse"  (Dial.  1.79),  moral  control  under  the  P. 
Vin  IV. 51  ;  D  1.62  ;  11.279  ;  in. 77,  266,  285  ;  A  iii.i  13, 
'35.  15'  ;  IV.  140  ;  V.71,  198  ;  It  96,  118;  Ud  36  ;  Vism  16 
(where  expli"  in  detail);  VbhA  323;  cp.  sagvuta-pati- 
mokkha  (adj.)  Pv  iv.i'*. 

Pfttiyekka  see  pafekka. 

P&(irapika  (adj.)  [fr.  patirupa,  cp.  pafirupaka]  assuming  a 
disguise,  deceitful,  false  Sn  246. 

Pitihara  [  =  patihara,  with  pati  after  analogy  of  paji- 
hariya]  striking,  that  which  strikes  (with  ref.  to  mark- 
ing the  time)  J  I.i2i,  122  (v.  1.  SS  patihariya). 

Patiharika  [=-patihariya  or  der.  fr.  pStihara  in  meaning 
of  "hariya]  special,  extraordinary  ;  only  in  cpd.  "pakkha 
an  extra  holiday  A  1.144;  Vv  15'  (cp.  VvA  71,  109)  ; 
ThA  38. 


Patihaiiya  (adj.)  [grd.  formation  fr.  pati-t-hf  (patihara) 
with  usual  lengthening  of  pati  to  pati,  as  in  "desaniya. 
"mokkha  etc.  Cp.  patihira  ;  BSk.  pratiharj'a]  striking, 
surprising,  extraordinary,  special  ;  nt.  wonder,  miracle. 
Usually  in  stock  phrase  iddhi",  adesana",  anusasani"  as 
the  3  marvels  which  characterise  a  Buddha  with  regard 
to  his  teaching  (i.  e.  superhuman  power,  mind  reading, 
giving  instruction)  D  1.212  ;  111.3  sq.  ;  S  iv.290  ;  A  1. 170  ; 
v,327;  Ps  11.227.  —  Further:  Vin  1.34  (addhuddha° 
sahassani)  ;  Vism  378,  390  (yaraaka")  ;  VvA  158  (id.); 
PvA  137  (id.).  For  yamaka-patihariya  (or  "hira)  see 
yamaka.  —  Two  kinds  of  p.  are  given  at  Vism  393, 
viz.  pakata"  and  apakata".  — sappatihariya  (with  ref. 
to  the  Dhamma)  wonderful,  extraordinary,  sublime, 
as  opposed  to  appati"  plain,  ordinary,  stupid  M  11. 9 
(where  Neumann,  Majjhima  Nikdva  11.3 18  trsl^  sa° 
"  intelligible  "  and  a°  "  incomprehensible,"  referring  to 
Chandogyopanisat  i.i  i,  i) ;  D  11.104  ;  cp.  also  Windisch, 
Mara  7 1 . 

-pakkha  an  extra  holiday,  an  ancient  festival,  not 
now  kept  S  1.208  (cp.  Th  2,  31)  ;  Sn  402  (cp.  expl"  at 
SnA  378,  where  var.  opinions  are  given)  ;  J  IV. 320  ; 
VI.  1 18.  See  also  Kern's  discussion  of  the  term  at 
Toev.  11. 30. 

Patihira  (adj.)  [contracted  form  of  patihariya  via  meta- 
thesis ♦patihariya>*patihera>patihira]  wonderful; 
nt.  a  wonderful  thing,  marvel,  miracle  Ps  1.125  (ya- 
maka") ;  II.  158  (id.) ;  Mhvs  5,  118;  Miln  106  ;  Davs  1.50  ; 
DhA  111.213.  — appatihirakatha  stupid  talk  D  1.193, 
239;  Kvu  561  (diff.  Kern.  Toev.  11.30)  ;  opp.  sa°  ibid. 

Pati  (f.)  [?1  at  VvA  321  in  phrase  sukka-pakkha-patiyar) 
"  in  the  moonlight  half  "  is  doubtful.  Hardy  in  Index 
registers  it  as  "  part,  half-,"  but  pakkha  already  means 
"  half"  and  is  enough  by  itself.  We  should  probably 
read  patipatiyai)  "  successively."  Note  that  the 
similar  passage  VvA  314  reads  sukka-pakkhe  panna- 
rasiyar). 

Patuka  &  Patubha  only  neg.  a"  (q.  v.). 

Patukamyata :  see  patu". 

Patekka  (P&tiy^^i^)  ('^'^j)  [pati-l-eka;  the  diaeretic  form 
of  pacceka :  see  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  24]  several,  distinct, 
single  Vin  1.134;  iv.15;  J  1.92  (T.  patiekka,  SS  pati- 
yekka) ;  Vism  249  (patiyekka,  SS  patiekka),  353,  356. 
44.3.  473;  DhA  IV. 7  (patiy"  SS  patieka).  —  nt.  °g 
(adv.)  singly,  separately,  individually  Vism  4<  9  (patiy") ; 
VvA  141. 

Pateti  [Caus.  of  pat]  to  remove;  Pass,  patiyati  Pv  iv.  i" 
(turned  out  of  doors) ;  v.  1.  patayati  (bring  to  fall). 
Prob,  in  sense  of  Med.  at  Miln  152  in  phrase  visag 
patiyamano  (doubtful,  cp.  Kern,  Toev.  11. 139,  &  Morris, 
J.P.T.S.  1884,  87). 

Patha  [fr.  path]  reading,  text-reading  ;  passage  of  a  text, 
text.  Very  freq.  in  Commentaries  with  phrase  "  ti  pi 
patho,"  i.  e.  "  so  is  another  reading,"  e.  g.  KhA  78, 
223;  SnA  43  (°g  vikappeti),  178,  192,  477;  PvA  25 
(pamada"  careless  text),  48,  58,  86  and  passim. 

Pathaka  (-°)  [fr.  patha]  reciter ;  one  who  knows,  expert 
Nd'  382  (nakkhatta") ;  J  1.455  (asi-lakkhana") ;  11. 21 
(angavijja°),  250  (id.);  v.2  1 1  (lakkhana°  fortune-teller, 
wise  man). 

Pathlna  [cp.  Sk.  pathina  Manu  5,  16  ;  Halayudha  3.  36] 
the  fish  Silurus  Boalis,  a  kind  of  shad  J  iv.70  (C : 
patbina-namakai)  pasaija-macchai)) ;  v.405  ;  vi.449. 

Pava  [fr.  pa-l-  an,  cp.  Vedic  pr&oa  breath  of  life ;  P. 
apana,  etc.]  living  being,  life,  creature  D  in. 48,  63,  133  ; 
S  1.209,  224  ;  v.43,  227,  441  (maha-samudde) ;  A  1.161  ; 
n.73,  176,  192  ;  Sn  1 17,  247,  394,  704  ;  Dh  246  ;  DA  1.69, 
i6i;  KhA  26;  ThA  253;  PvA  9,  28,  35;  VvA  72; 
DhA  II. 19.  — pi.  also  panani,  e.  g.  Sn  117;  Dh  270.  — 


Panaka 


74 


Patheyya 


Bdhgh's  del"  of  pana  is  "  pananataya  pana ;   assasa- 
passas'  ayatta-vuttitaya  ti  attho  "  Vism  310. 

-Stipata  destruction  of  life,  murder  Vin  1.83  (in  "  dasa 
sikkhapadani,"  see  also  sila),  85,  193  ;  D  111.68,  70,  149, 
18:!,  235  ;M  1.361  ;  111.23  :  Sn  242  ;  It  63  ;  J  in. 181  ; 
Pug  39  sq.  ;  Nett  2  7  ;  VbhA  383  (var.  degrees  of  murder)  ; 
DhA  n.19;  111.355;  DA  1.69;  PvA  27.  -4tipatin  one 
who  takes  the  life  of  a  living  being,  destroying  life 
D  ni.82  ;  M  ni.22  ;  S  11. 167  ;  It  92  ;  DhA  11. 19.  -upeta 
possessed  or  endowed  with  Ufe,  alive  [cp.  BSk.  prano- 
peta  Divy  72,  462  etc.]  S  1.173;  Sn  157;  DA  1.236. 
-ghata  slaying  Ufe,  kilhng,  murder  DA  1.69;  -ghatin  = 
4tipatin  DhA  11. 19.  -bhu  a  living  being  J  iv.4g4. 
-bhuta  =  °bhu  M  111.5  ;  A  11.210;  in.92  ;  iv.249  sq.  ; 
J  1V.498.  -vadha  =atipata  DA  1.69.  -sama  equal  to 
or  as  dear  as  life  J  11.343  :  Dpvs  xi.26  ;  DhA  1.5.  -hara 
taking  away  life,  destructive  M  1.10  =  111.97;  S  iv.21  6  ; 
A  II.  1 16,  143,  153  ;  in. 1 63. 

Paoaka  (adj.-n.)  (usually  -°)  [fr.  pana]  a  living  being, 
endowed  with  (the  breath  of)  life  S  iv.igS  (chap^)  ; 
DhA  1.20  (v.  1.  BB  mata°)  ;  sap°  with  life,  containing 
living  creatures  J  1.198  (udaka)  ;  ap°  without  living 
beings,  lifeless  Vin  11. 2  16  ;  M  1.13,  243  ;  S  I.i6g  ;  Sn  p.  15 
(udaka) ;  J  1.67  (jhana). 

Pavana  (nt.)  [fr.  pana]  breathing  Vism  310  (see  pana); 
Dhatupatha  273  ("  bala  "  panane). 

Pa^i  [Vedic  pani,  cp.  Av.  pargna  hand,  with  n-suffix. 
where  we  find  m-suffix  in  Gr.  iraXaftri,  Lat.  palma,  Oir 
lam,  Ohg.  folma=Ags.  folm]  the  hand  Vin  in.  14  (pa-  [ 
nina  paripuiichati) ;  M  1.78  (panina  parimajjati)  ; 
S  1. 178,  194;  Sn  713;  Dh  124;  J  1. 126  (°r)  paharati)  ; 
PugA  249  (id.);  PvA  56;  Sdhp  147,  238.  As' adj. 
(-°)  "  handed,"  with  a  hand,  e.  g.  alia"  with  clean  hand 
Pv  II. 9'  ;  payata°  with  outstretched  hand,  open-handed, 
liberal  S  v. 351  ;  A  in. 287;  iv.266  sq.  ;  v.331. 

-tala  the  palm  of  the  hand  D  11. 1 7.  -bhaga  hand- 
share,  division  by  hands  VvA  96.  -matta  of  the  size  of  a 
hand,  a  handful  PvA  70,  116,  119.  -ssara  hand-sound, 
hand  music,  a  cert,  kind  of  musical  instrument  D  1.6  ; 
III. 183;  DA  1.84  (cp.  Dial  1.8),  231  ;  J  v. 390,  506;  cp. 
BSk.  panisvara  MVastu  11.52.  Also  adj.  one  who  plays 
this  instrument  J  VI. 276;  cp.  BSk.  panisvarika  MVastu 
III. 113. 

Panika  (f)  [fr.  pani ;  Sk.  *panika]  a  sort  of  spoon  Vin 
II.  1 51.     Cp.  puthu-panika  ("paniya  ?)  Vin  Ii.ic6. 

PaQin  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  pana]  having  life,  a  living  being  S  1.2 10, 
226  ;  Sn  220  (ace.  pi.  panine,  cp.  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  95^), 
587  (id.),  201,  575  ;  PvA  287  ;  DhA  II. 19. 

Pata  (-°)  [fr.  pat]  i.  faU  DA  1.95  (ukka°) ;  PvA  45  {asani°). 
The  reading  "  anatthato  patato  rakkhito  "  at  PvA  61 
is  faulty  we  should  prefer  to  read  apagato  (apayato  ?) 
rakkhito.  —  2.  throwing,  a  throw  Sn  987  (muddha°)  ; 
PvA  57  (akkhi°).     See  also  pinda. 

Patana  (nt.)  [fr.  pateti]  bringing  to  fall,  destrojdng,  killing, 
only  in  gabbha°  destroying  the  foetus,  abortion  (q.  v.) 
DhA  1.47  and  passim. 

Patar  (adv.)  [Vedic  pratar,  der.  fr.  *pr6,  *pra,  cp.  Lat. 
prandium  (fr.  pram-ediom  =-patar-asa) ;  Gr.  Trfjo/i  early  ; 
Ohg.  fruo  =  Ger.  fruh]  early  in  the  morning,  in  foil, 
forms:  (i)  patar  (before  vowels),  only  in  cpd.  °asa 
morning  meal,  breakfast  [cp.  BSk.  pratar-asana  Divy 
631]  D  111.94  ;  Sn  387  ;  J  1.232  ;  VvA  294,  308  ;  SnA  374 
(pato  asitabbo  ti  patar-aso  pinda-patass'  etag  namar)). 
—  katapatarasa  (adj.)  after  breakfast  J  1.227;  VI. 349 
(°bhetta) ;  Vism  391.  —  (2)  pato  (abs.)  D  111.94  ;  DhA 
11.60;  PvA  54,  126,  128:  pato  va  right  early  J  1.226; 
VI. 180.  —  (3)  patai)  S  1. 183;  11.242;  Th  2,  407. — 
Note.  Should  pinda-pata  belong  here,  as  suggested  by 
Bdhgh  at  SnA  374  (see  above)?  See  detail  under 
pinda. 


Patavyata  (f  )  [fr.  pat,  see  pateti]  downfall,  bringing  to  fall. 

feUing  M  1.305  ;  A  '.26(1  ;  Vin  iv.34  (°by°) ;  VbhA  499. 

Patapeti  [Cans.  II.  of  pateti]  to  cause  to  fall,  to  cause  an 
abortus  Vin  11. 108  ;  DA  1.134. 

Patala  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  patala  an  underground  cave]  pro- 
clivity, cliff,  abyss  S  1.32,  127,  197  ;  IV.206  ;  Th  I,  1104 
(see  Brethren  418  for  fuller  expl") ;  J  ni.530  (here 
expH  as  a  cliff  in  the  ocean). 

Pati  [Vedic  pati  of  pa,  cp.  Gr.  vuiu  herd,  ttoi/iIji'  shepherd, 
Lat.  pasco  to  tend  sheep]  to  watch,  keep  watch,  keep 
J  III. 95  (to  keep  the  eyes  open.  C.  ummisati ;  opp. 
nimisati) ;  Vism  16  (=rakkhati  in  def.  of  patimokkha). 

Patika=pati,  read  at  Vism  28  for  patika. 

Patita  [pp.  of  pateti]  brought  to  fall,  felled,  destroyed  Sn 
631  ;  Dh  407 ;  J  in.  176 ;  PvA  31  (so  read  for  patita). 

Patin  (-°)  (adj.)  rfr.  pata]  throwing,  shooting,  only  in  cpd. 
dure"  throwing  far  A  1.284  ;  n.170.    See  akkhana-vedhin. 

Patimokkha  see  pati°. 

Pati  &  Pati  (f.)  [the  former  of  patta,  which  is  Vedic  patra 
(nt.)  ;  to  this  the  f.  Ved.  patri]  a  bowl,  vessel,  dish 
Vin  1. 157  (avakkara"),  352  (id.);  11.216  (id.);  M  1.25 
(kar)sa°),  207;  S  11.233;  A  iv.393  (suvanna",  riipiya", 
karjsa")  ;  J  1.347.  5°' i  H-Qo  ;  v.377  (suvanna")  vi.510 
(kancana") ;  VvA  65  ;  PvA  274. 

Patukamyata  is  frequent  V.  1.  for  catu-kamyata,  which  is 
probably  the  correct  reading  (see  this).  The  meaning 
(according  to  Vism  27=  VbhA  483)  is  "putting  oneself 
low,"  i.  e.  flattery,  "fawning"  {Vism  trsl.  32).  A  still 
more  explicit  def"  is  found  at  VbhA  338.  The  ArS.. 
spellings  are  as  follows:  catukamyata  Vism  17,  27; 
KhA  236  ;  VbhA  338,  483  ;  catukammata  Miln  370  ; 
patukamyata  Vbh  246 ;  patukamyata  Nd^  39.  See 
standing  phrase  under  mugga-supyata. 

Patoi  (-°)  (°patu)  (indecl.)  [cp.  Vedic  praduh  in  pradur-l- 
bhu ;  on  t  for  d  see  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  39*.  As  regards 
etym.  Monier  Williams  suggests  pra  =  pra-l-dur,  door, 
thus  "  before  the  door,  openly  "  ;  cp.  dvara]  visible, 
open,  manifest ;  only  in  comp°  with  kf  and  bhti,  and 
with  the  rule  that  patu"  appears  before  cons.,  whereas 
patur°  stands  before  vowels,  (i)  with  kr  (to  make 
appear);  pres.  patukaroti  Sn  316;  J  IV.7 ;  Pug  30; 
SnA  423 ;  aor.  patvakasi  S  11.254  '•  DhA  11.64  ;  pp. 
patukata  Vv  84*'.  —  (2)  with  bhu  (to  become  manifest, 
to  appear) :  pres.  patubhavati  D  1.220  ;  D  11. 12,  15,  20, 
226  ;  M  1.445  ;  S  TV  78  ;  Pv  11. 9*'  (pot.  "bhaveyyug) ; 
aor.  paturahosi  [cp.  BSk.  pradurabhut  Jtm.  211] 
Vin  1.5  ;  D  1.2  15  ;  11.20  ;  S  1.137  ;  Pv  11. 8*  ;  Miln  10,  18  ; 
VvA  188;  pi.  paturahagsu  J  i.ii,  &  "ahigsu  J  1.54. — 
pp.  patubhuta  S  in. 39  ;  Dhs  1035  ;  PvA  44. 

-kamma  making  visible,  manifestation  S  11.254; 
DhA  IV.  198.  -bhava  appearance,  coming  into  mani- 
festation M  1.50  ;  S  II. 3  ;  IV. 78  ;  A  1.266  ;  11. 130  ;  Sn  56", 
998  ;  J  1.63  ;  Nd^  s.  v.  ;  Vism  437. 

Pateti  [Cans,  of  pat]  i.  to  make  fall,  drop,  throw  off 
S  1.197  (sakuno  rajarj)  ;  J  1.93  (udakag) ;  Miln  305 
(sarar)).  —  2.  to  bring  to  fall  J  v.  198  ;  Miln  187.  —  3.  to 
kill,  destroy,  cut  off  (the  head)  J  1.393  ;  mi  77  ;  PvA  31, 
115.  —  pp.  patita.  Caus.  II.  patapeti  (q.  v.). — Cp. 
abhi".  Note.  In  meaning  3  it  would  be  better  to 
assume  confusion  with  pateti  (for  phateti  =  Sk.  spha- 
tayati  to  split  [sphut  =  (s)phal].  see  phaleti  &  phateti 
In  the  same  sense  we  find  the  phrase  katthat)  pateti  to 
split  firewood  M  1. 21   (M.\  ereti).  besides  phaleti. 

Patheyya  (nt.)  [grd.  form.  fr.  patha]  "what  is  necessary 
for  the  road,"  provisions  for  a  journey,  viaticum  Vin 
1.244:  S  1.44;  Dh  235,  237;  J  V.46,  241;  DA  1.288; 
DhA  1.180  ;  111.335  ;  PvA  5,  154. 


Patheyyaka 


75 


Papanika 


Patheyyaka  (nt.)  =patheyya  PvA  126. 

Pada  [Vedic  pada.  see  etym.  under  pada]  i.  the  foot, 
usually  pi.  pada  both  feet.  e.  g.  \'in  i.g,  34.  188  ;  It  1 1 1  ; 
Sn  309,  547,  768,  835,  1028;  J  II. 1 14;  IV.137:  DhA 
III. 196;  PvA  4,  10,  40,  68;  VvA  105.  In  sg.  scarce, 
and  then  specified  as  eka"  &  dutiya",  e.  g.  at  Nd^  304"" ; 
J  VI. 354.  —  2.  foot  or  base  of  a  mountain  Vism  399 
(Sineru°)  ;  DhA  1.108  (pabbata°).  —  3.  the  fourth 
part  ("  foot")  of  a  verse  (cp.  pada  4)  SnA  239,  273, 
343.  3*'3 :  ThA  23.  —  4.  a  coin  Vin  111.47;  VvA  77 
(worth  here  J  of  a  kahapana  and  double  the  value  of 
masaka  ;  see  also  kakanika). 

-anguttha  a  toe  M  I-337.  -angutthaka  same  J  11. 447  ; 
Vism  233.  -anguli  same  PvA  125  (opp.  to  hatth' 
anguli  finger),  -atthika  bone  of  the  foot  M  1.58,  89  ; 
III. 92  ;  KhA  49.  -dpacca  offspring  fr.  the  foot  (of 
Brahma) :  see  bandhu.  -udara  "  (using)  the  belly  as 
feet,"  i.  e.  a  snake  Sn  604.  -odaka  water  for  washing 
the  feet  Vin  1.9.  -kathalika  (°iya)  ace.  to  Bdhgh  either 
a  foot  stool  or  a  towel  (adhota-pada-thapanakag 
pada-ghagsanag  va,  see  Vin.  Texts  1.92  ;  11.373)  Vin 
1.9,  46;  11.22;  1V.310  ;  Kvu  440;  VvA  8;  DhA  1.321. 
-kudarika  holding  the  feet  like  an  axe  (?)  Pv  iv.i^'  (expl* 
at  PvA  240  by  padasankhata  kudarika;  does  k.  here 
represent  kutharika  ?  The  reading  &  meaning  is 
uncertain),  -khila  a  corn  in  the  foot  Vin  1.188  (as 
"aladha,  cp.  Vin  Texts  11. 19).  -ghagsani  a  towel  for 
rubbing  the  feet  (dry)  Vin  11. 130.  -cara  moving  about 
on  feet  J  iv.104.  -tala  the  sole  of  the  foot  Vin  1.179  ; 
M  111.90  ;  D  HI. 143,  148;  PvA  74.  -dhovana  cleaning 
or  washing  one's  feet  DhA  11.9.  -pa  "  drinking  with 
the  foot,"  N.  for  tree  I'v  1V.3'  (cp.  PvA  251) ;  Miln  1 17, 
376;Vism533  ;VvA2i2  ;Sdhp270.  -paricarika  "  serv- 
ing on  one's  feet,"  i.  e.  a  wife  (cp.  S  1,125)  J  111.95; 
VI.268  ;  DhA  III. 194.  -pitha  a  foot-stool  Vin  1.9  (cp. 
Vin.  Texts  1.92) ;  iv.310  ;  DhA  in. 120  =  186  ;  VvA  291 . 
-puiichana(ka)  wiping  one's  feet  (with  a  towel)  Vism 
358  ("rajju-mandalaka,  in  comparison  =  VbhA  62); 
VbhA  285  ("cojaka)  ;  KhA  144;  SnA  333;  DhA  1.415 
(°ka).  -punchani  a  towel  for  the  feet  Vin  11174. 
-bbhanjana  ointment  for  the  feet,  foot-salve  Vin  1.205  ; 
J  V.197,  376:  PvA  44,  78:  anointing  the  feet  VvA  44 
("tela),  295  (id.).  -mSla  the  sole  of  the  foot,  the  foot 
J  IV. 131.  Cp.  miila.  -miilika  "one  who  sits  at  one's 
feet,"  a  foot-servant,  lackey  J  1.122,  438;  11.300  sq. 
(Gamanicanda) ;  111.417;  v.  128;  vi.30.  -lola  loafing 
about,  one  who  lingers  after  a  thing,  a  greedy  person 
Sn  63,  972  ;  Nd^  374 ;  Nd^  433  ;  abstr.  f.  °lolata  SnA  36, 
&  "loliya  Nd^  433.  -visana  "  a  horn  on  the  foot,"  i.  e. 
an  impossibility  J  vi.340.  -sambahana  massaging  the 
feet  DhA  1.38. 

Padaka  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  pada]  i.  having  a  foot  or  basis  Vin 
II. 1 10  (a");  Sn  205;  ThA  78. — 2.  fundamental; 
padakai}  karoti  to  take  as  a  base  or  foundation  Vism 
667.  —  3.  (nt.)  basis,  foundation,  base  PvA  167. — 
padaka-jjhana  meditation  forming  a  basis  (for  further 
introspective  development)  Vism  390,  397.  412  sq.,  428, 
667.  —  Cp.  ahacca°. 

Padasi  is  aor.  of  padati. 

Padaka  [  =  padaka]  a  Uttle  foot  J  vi.554. 

Paduka  (f.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  paduka  &  paduka]  a  shoe,  slipper, 
clog  Vin  1. 190;  II. 142.  222;  J  111.327;  IV. 129,  379; 
V.298  ;  VI. 23  ;  Miln  330  ;  DA  1.136  ;  DhA  in. 451  (muiija°). 
— -At  Vin  II.  143  (according  to  Rh.  D.)  paduka  (daru°)  is 
a  kind  of  stool  or  stand  in  a  privy. 

Pana  [\'edic  pana,  fr.  pa,  pibati=Lat.  bibo.  pp.  pita, 
Idg.  *po[i],  cp.  Gr.  iriiw  to  drink,  Tromt  drink  ;  Obulg. 
piti  to  drink,  pivo  drink  ;  Lith.  penas  milk  ;  Lat.  potus 
drink,  poculum  drinking  vessel  (  =  Sk.  patra,  P.  patta)] 
drink,  including  water  as  well  as  any  other  liquid. 
Often    comb''    with   anna°    (food),   e.  g.   Sn  485,   487 ; 


Pv  1.5^^;  and  "bhojana  (id.)  e.  g.  Dh  249 ;  J  1.204.  Two 
sets  of  8  drinks  are  given  in  detail  at  Nd'  372.  —  Vin 
1.245,  249  (yagu°);  S  v. 375  (majja°) ;  Sn  82,  398,  924; 
J  1.202  (dibba°) ;  Pug  51  ;  PvA  7,  8,  50. 

-4gara  a  drinking  booth,  a  tavern  Vin  11.267  ;  m-iSi  ; 
J  1.302  (  =  sura-geha  C.)  ;  Vbh  247  ;  VbhA  339. 

Panaka  (nt.)  [fr.  pana]  a  drink  J  11.285  ;  iv.30  ;  Davs  v.2  ; 
DhA  III. 207  (amba°) ;  VvA  99,  291.  —  Der.  panakatta 
(abstr.  nt.)  being  provided  with  drink  J  v.243  (a°). 

Panada  in  cpd.  panad'  upama  at  J  11.223  's  faulty.  The 
meaning  is  "  a  badly  made  sandal,"  and  the  reading 
should  probably  be  (with  v.  1.  &  C.)  "  dupahan'  upama," 
i.  e.  du(h)-l- upahana.  The  C.  expl"  as  "  dukkat- 
upahan'  upama." 

Paniya  (adj.  nt.)  [V'edic  panlya.  fr.  pana]  i.  drinkable 
S  ii.iii. — 2.  drink,  beverage,  usually  water  for 
drinking  Vin  11.207;  IV.263  ;  J  1.198,  450;  111.491  ; 
v. 106,  382  ;  Pv  1. 10';  II. i",  7"*;  PvA  4,  5.  A  reduced 
form  paniya  (cp.  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  23)  is  also  found,  e.  g. 
Vin  II. 153  ;  D  1.148  ;  Pv  11. lo^. 

-ghata  a  pot  for  drinking  water  Vin  11. 2  16  ;  J  vi.76, 
85.  -catika  drinking  vessel  DhA  iv.129.  -cati  id. 
J  1.302.  -thalika  drinking  cup  Vin  11.214;  iv.263. 
-bhajana  id.  Vin  11. 153.  -mandapa  water  reservoir 
(BSk.  id.  e.  g.  AvS  n.86)  Vin' 11.153.  -majaka  (?) 
J  VI. 85  (Hardy:  Flacourtia  cataphracta).  -sala  a 
hall  where  drinking  water  is  given  Vin  11. 153  ;  PvA  102  ; 
cp.  papa. 

Panndi  see  panudati. 

Papa  (adj.  nt.)  [Vedic  papa,  cp.  Lat.  patiorsaE.  passion 
etc.  ;  Gr.  Trtifia  suffering,  evil ;  TaXaimupog  suffering 
evil]  I.  (adj.)  evil,  bad,  wicked,  sinful  A  11.222  sq.  (and 
compar.  papatara)  ;  Sn  57;  Dh  119  (opp.  bhadra). 
Other  compar-superl.  forms  are  papittha  S  v.96 ; 
papitthatara  Vin  11.5  ;  papiyyasika  D  III. 254.  See 
papiya.  —  2.  unfertile  (of  soil)  S  iv.315.  —  3.  (nt  ) 
evil,  wrongdoing,  sin  Sn  23,  662  ;  Dh  1 17  (opp.  punfia), 
183;  Pv  1.6';  11^;  IV. i";  DhA  ii.ii.  —  pp.  papani 
Sn  399,  452.  674;  Dh  119,  265. 

-iccha  having  bad  wishes  or  intentions  Vin  1.97 ; 
D  III. 246 ;  S  1.50  ;  II. 156 ;  A  iii.i  19,  191,  219  sq.  ;  iv.i, 
22,  155;  V.123  sq.  ;  Sn  133,  280;  It  85;  Nd=  342; 
Vism  24  (def.) ;  VbhA  476;  -icchata  evil  intention 
A  IV. 160,  165  ;  DhA  11.77.  -kamma  evil  doing,  wicked- 
ness, sin,  crime  D  111.182;  It  86;  Sn  407;  Dh  127; 
Vism  502;  VbhA  440  sq.  ;  PvA  II,  25.  ^2,  51,  84. 
-katninanta  evil-doer,  villain  S  1.97.  -kammin  id. 
M  1.39  Dh  126.  -kara  id.  Sn  674.  -karin  id.  Dh  15, 
17.     -dassana  sinful  view  Pv  IV. 3^*.     -dhamma  wicked - 

,  ness,  evil  habit  Dh  248,  307;  Pug  37;  DhA  111.4  ; 
PvA  98;  as  adj.  at  PvA  58.  -dhammin  one  of  evil 
character  or  habits  Pv  i.u'.  -parikkhaya  decay  or 
destruction  of  demerit  (opp.  puiiiia")  Pv  11. 6>'.  -mitta 
an  evil  associate,  a  bad  companion  (opp.  kalyana") 
M  1.43,  470;  D  III. 182.  -mittata  bad  company,  asso- 
ciation with  wicked  people  A  1.13  sq.,  83  ;  iv.160,  165  ; 
D  III. 212  ;  Dhs  13,  27;  Vbh  359,  369,  371.  -sankappa 
evil  thought  Sn  280.  -sUa  bad  morals  Sn  246.  -supina 
an  evil  dream  (opp.  bhaddaka)  Vism  312  ;  DhA  111.4. 

Papaka  (adj.)  [fr.  papa]  bad,  wicked,  wretched,  sinful 
Vin  1.8  ;  S  1.149,  207  ;  v. 418  (p.  akusala  citta)  ;  Sn  127, 
215,  664;  Dh  66,  78,  211,  242  ;  J  1. 1 28;  Pv  ii.7'«  (=la- 
maka  C.) ;  II. 9'  ;  Pug  19  ;  Dhs  30,  loi  ;  Miln  204  (opp. 
kalvaija) ;  Vism  268  (=lamaka).  312  (of  dreams,  opp. 
bhaddaka).  —  f.  papika  Dh  164,  310;  a"  without  sin, 
innocent,  of  a  young  maiden  (dahara)  Th  2,  370  ; 
Vv  3i«;  32«  (so  expl'"  by  VvA.  but  ThA  expl"  as 
faultless,  i.  e.  beautiful). 

PapaQika  (adj.  n.)  [pa-t-apaija-l-ika]  belonging  to  a  shop, 
i.  e.   1.  a  shopkeeper  A  1.115  sq.  —  2.  laid  out  in  the 


Papika 


76 


Paramita 


shop   (of  civara)   Vin  1.255;   Visra  62    (  =  apana-dvare 
patitaka).     See  also  Vin.  Texts  11. 156. 

Papika  =  papaka  D  1.90  (cp.  DA  1.256) ;  A  iv.197. 

Papita  [pp.  of  papeti',  in  meaning  =  papika]  one  who  has 
done  wrong,  sinful,  evil  M  11.43  (where  D  i.go  at  id.  p. 
has  papika)  ;  DA  1.256  (for  papika,  v.  1.  vapita). 

Papimant  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  papa,  cp.  Vedic  papman]  sinful ;  a 
sinner,  esp.  used  as  Ep.  of  Mara,  i.  e.  the  Evil,  the 
wicked  me  S  1.103;  A  iv.434 ;  Ud  64;  Sn  430;  Th  i, 
12 13  ;  Miln  155  sq.  ;  DhA  iv.32. 

Papiyo  (adj.)  [compar.  of  papa,  cp.  Sk.  paplyas]  worse, 
more  evil  or  wicked  S  1.162,  202  ;  Sn  275  ;  Dh  42,  76; 
J  1. 158  ;  IV. 303  ;  Miln  155  ;  DhA  11. 108. 

Papunana  (nt.)  [fr.  papunati]  attainment  J  iv.306. 

Papunati  [pa+ap;  cp.  Sk.  prapnoti]  to  reach,  attain, 
arrive  at,  obtain,  get  to  learn.  —  pres.  papunati  Vin 
11.208;  J  iv.285  ;  VI.  1 49;  Pug  70;  DA  21  ;  PvA  74,  98, 
125,  195  ;  and  pappoti  S  1.25  ;  Dh  27  ;  Vism  501  ;  DhA 
1.395  ;  pot.  papune  Sn  324  ;  Dh  138  ;  J  v.57  (ist  pi. 
papuneyyama  for  T.  pappomu)  ;  DhA  iv.auo.  aor. 
apapuni  ThA  64,  and  papuni  J  11.229.  pret.  apattha 
J  V.391  (proh.  ma  a.),  fut.  papunissati  J  1.260.  ger. 
papunitva  S  11.28  ;  patva  Sn  347,  575,  and  pappuyya 
S  1.7  (cp.  Vin  11.56;  A  1. 138),  181,  212.  inf.  pappotug 
Si.  i2g=Th  2,  60,  and  papunitut)  VbhA  223.  —  grd. 
pattabba  S  1.129;  11.28;  SnA  433.  —  pp.  patta ;  Cans, 
papeti^  (q.  v.). 

Papurava  (nt.)  [through  *pavurana  fr.  pra+vy,  cp.  Sk. 
pravarana]  cover,  dress,  cloak  S  1175  ;  Miln  279  ;  DhA 
in. I.     See  also  parupana. 

Paparati  [fr.  pa  +  a+vy,  cp.  Vedic  pravrnoti]  to  cover, 
veil ;  shut,  hide  ;  only  neg.  a°  and  only  in  phrase  apa- 
purati  Amatassa  dvarat]  to  open  the  door  of  Nibbana 
Vin  1.5  ;  Vv  64"  (  =  vivarati  VvA  284), 

Papeti'  [Denom.  fr.  papa]  to  make  bad,  bring  into  dis- 
grace Vin  IV. 5.  —  pp.  papita. 

Papeti'  [Cans,  of  papunati]  to  make  attain,  to  let  go  to, 
to  cause  to  reach,  to  bring  to  J  iv.494  ;  v.205,  260  ; 
DA  1. 136.  iraper.  papaya  S  1.2 17,  and  papayassu 
J  IV.20.     fut.  papessati  J  i.260,  and  papayissati  J  v. 8. 

Pabhati  (nt.)  [para+a+pp.  of  bhi]  "  that  which  has  been 
brought  here,"  viz.  i.  a  present,  bribe  DA  1.262. — 
2.  money,  price  J  1.122  ;  v.401,  452.  — katha"  "a  tale 
brought,"  occasion  for  something  to  tell,  news,  story 
J  1.252,  364.  378;  SnA  356. 

Pamanga  (nt.)  [etym.  ?]  a  band  or  chain  Vin  11. 106; 
111.48;  Mhvs  II,  28;  Dpvs  XII. I  ;  DhA  iv.216.  See  on 
this  Vin.  Texts  in. 69  &  Mhvs  trsl.  79'. 

Pamujja  (nt.)  [grd.  form.  fr.  pa+mud,  see  similar  forms 
under  pamokkha]  delight,  joy,  happiness  ;  often  comb"" 
with  piti.  —  D  1.72,  196;  S  III. 134  ;  IV. 78=351  ;  v. 156, 
398;  A  ni.2i  ;  v.  I  sq.,  311  sq.,  339,  349  ;  Sn  256;  Nett 
29;  DA  1.2 17;  Sdhp  167.     See  also  pamojja. 

Pamokkha  (adj.)  [a  grd.  form.  fr.  pamukha,  with  length- 
ening of  a  as  frequently  in  similar  form'  like  patidesa- 
nlya.  patimokkha,  pamojja]  i .  chief,  first,  excellent, 
eminent,  (m.)  a  leader.  —  A  11. 168  (sanga  sa°)  ;  Pug  69, 
70 ;  Miln  75  (hatthi°  state  elephant).  disa°  world- 
famed  J  1. 166,  285;  11.278;  VI. 347.  —  Freq.  in  series 
agga  settha  pamokkha  uttama,  in  exegesis  of  maha 
(at  Nd^  502  A  e.  g.,  when  A  11.95  reads  mokkha 
for  p.).  See  maha.  Def*  as  "  pamukhe  sadhu  ti  "  at 
VbhA  332.  —  2.  facing  east  Pv  IV.3"  ( =pacma-dis' 
abhimukha). 


Pamojja  =  pamujja  [Cp.  BSk.  pramodya  Divy  13,  82 
239]  D  11.214;  III. 288;  M  1.37,  98;  S  1.203;  11.30 
V.157;  Dh  376,  381;  Ps  1.177;  Dhs  9,  86;  Miln  84 
Vism  2,  107,  177  (T.  pa°);  DhA  iv.iii  (°bahula). 

Faya  [fr.  pa-l-a-f  ya]  setting  out,  starting  S  11.218  (nava° 
newly  setting  out) ;  instr.  payena  (adv.)  for  the  most 
part,  commonly,  usually  J  v. 490  ;  DA  1.275  (so  read 
for  pathena). 

Payaka  (-°)  [fr.  pa  to  drink]  drinking  J  1.252  (varuiji") 

Payata  [pp.  of  payati]  gone  forth,  set  out,  started  J  1. 146. 

Payati  [pra-t-a+ya]  to  set  out,  start,  go  forth  DhA  11.42  ; 
aor.  3'='  sg.  payasi  D  11.73;  J  '-64.  2-i\  iii-333  ;  VvA 
64;  VvA  272;  3"i  pi.  payesug  J  iv.220,  and  payitjsu 
D  11.96;  J  1.253;  DhA  III. 257.  —  pp.  payata  (q.  v.). 
See  also  the  quasi  synonymous  abhiyati. 

Payasa    [cp.    Class.    Sk.    payasa]    rice    boiled    in    milk, 
milk-rice,  rice  porridge  S  1.166  ;  Sn  p.   15  ;  J  1.50,  68 
IV.391  ;  v. 21 1  ;  Vism  41  ;  SnA  151  ;  DhA  1.171  ;  11.88 
VvA  32. 

Payin  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  pa,  see  pivati]  drinking  J  111.338. 

Payeti  [Caus.  fr.  pa,  see  pibati]  i.  to  give  to  drink,  to 
make  drink  D  11. 19;  Sn  398  (Pot.  payaye)  ;  Miln  43, 
229;  DhA  1.87  (amatar)) ;  VvA  75  (yagug) ;  PvA  63; 
aor.  apayesi  S  1. 143  ;  ger.  payetva  J  1.202  (dibba-panai)) ; 
II. 115  (lohitar))  ;  111.372  (pha^iif  odakar))  ;  iv,30  (pana- 
kar|)  ;  vi.392  (surag).  —  2.  to  irrigate  J  1.2 15.  —  ppr. 
f.  payamana  a  woman  giving  suck,  a  nursing  woman 
D  1. 166;  M  1.77;  A  1.295;  11.206;  III. 227;  Pug  55; 
DhA  1.49.  — Caus.  II.  payapeti  J  v.422. 

Para  (adj.-nt.)  [fr.  para]  i.  as  adv.  (°-)  beyond,  over, 
across,  used  as  prep,  with  abl.,  e.  g.  para-Gangaya 
beyond  the  G.  S  1.207,  ^'4  '■  ^^A  228.     See  under  cpds. 

—  2.  as  nt.  the  other  side,  the  opposite  shore  S  1.169, 
183  ;  Sn  1059  ;  Nd'  20  (  =  amatar|  nibbanag) ;  Dh  385  ; 
DhA  IV.  1 41  apara  pararj  gacchati  to  go  from  this  side 
to  the  other  (used  with  ref.  to  this  world  &  the  world 
beyond)  S  iv.174;  A  v.4 ;  Sn  11 30;  parai)  gavesino 
M  ii.64=Th  I,  771-3.  Cases  adverbially:  ace.  parai) 
see  sep.  ;  abl.  parato  from  the  other  side   Vin  11.209. 

—  3.  the  guna  form  of  para,  another  :  see  cpds.  : 
-atthika    (par')   wishing   to   cross   beyond    D    1.244. 

-ga  "  going  beyond,"  traversing,  crossing,  surmount- 
ing S  IV. 71  (jatimaranassa) ;  Sn  32,  997.  -gata  one 
who  has  reached  the  opposite  shore  S  1.34;  11.277; 
IV. 157;  A1V.411;  Sn  21,  210,  359;  Dh  414;  Vv  53I 
(cp.  VvA  231) ;  one  who  has  gone  over  to  another  party 
Th  I,  209.  -gavesin  looking  for  the  other  shore  Dh 
355;  DhA  IV. 80.  -gamin  =  gata  S  1.123;  A  v.232  sq., 
253  sq.  ;  DhA  II. 160.  -gu  (a)  gone  beyond,  i.  e.  passed, 
transcended,  crossed  S  i.i95=Nd*  136*  (dukkhassa), 
IV.210  (bhavassa) ;  A  n.9  (id.)  ;  111.223  ;  It  33  (jaraya) ; 
Dh  348.  (b)  gone  to  the  end  of  (gen.  or.  -°),  reached 
perfection  in,  well-versed  in,  familiar  with,  an  authority 
on  Sn  992  (sabbadhammanar)),  1 105  (cp.  Nd*  435): 
D  1.88  (tinnai)  vedanar))  ;  DhA  III. 361  (id.),  -darika 
an  adulterer,  lit.  one  of  another's  wife  S  JI.259  ;  J  in. 43 
(so  read  for  para") ;  DhA  II.  10. 

Parag  (adv. -prep.)  [ace.  of  para]  beyond,  to  the  other  side 
D  1.244;  ^  1135:  Sn  1146  (Maccu-dheyya",  vv.  11. 
"dheyassa  &  °dheyya°),  expl*  by  Nd*  487  as  amatag 
nibbanar)  ;  VvA  42. 

-gata  (cp.  paragata)  gone  to  the  other  side,  gone 
beyond,  traversed,  transcended  M  1.135;  S  11.277; 
Sn  803  ;  Nd'  114  ;  ^d*  435  ;  Pug  72  ;  Vism  234.  -ga- 
mana  crossing  over,  going  beyond  S  v.24,  81  ;  A  v.4, 
313;  Sn  1130. 

Paramita  (f)  [parami-l-ta]  =parami  Nett  87. 


\ 


Parami 


77 


Palaka 


Parami  (f  )  [abstr.  fr.  parama.  cp.  BSk.  mantranag  para- 
mig  gata  Divy  637]  completeness,  perfection,  highest 
state  Sn  1018,  1020  ;  Pug  70  ;  DhA  1.5  ;  VvA  2  (savaka- 
nana°) ;  PvA  139;  Sdhp  328.  In  later  literature  there 
is  mentioned  a  group  of  10  perfections  (dasa  paramiyo) 
as  the  perfect  exercise  of  the  10  principal  virtues  by  a 
Bodhisatta,  viz.  dana°,  sila°,  nekkhamma°.  paiii"ia°. 
viriya",  khanti°,  sacca",  adhitthana",  metta",  upekha° 
J  1.73;  DhA  1.84. 

-ppatta    (parami^)    having    attained    perfection    M 
111.28  ;  Nd-  435  ;  Miln  21,  22  ;  cp.  Miln  trsl.  1.34. 

Parajika  [etym.  doubtful;  suggested  are  para+aj  (Bur- 
nouf) ;  para+ji;  paracika  (S.  L6vi,  see  Geiger,  P.Gr. 
§38,  n.  3  ;  also  Childers  s.  v.)]  one  who  has  committed 
a  grave  transgression  of  the  rules  for  bhikkhus  ;  one 
who  merits  expulsion  (see  on  term  Vin.  Texts  1.3 ; 
Miln  trsl' 1.268;  n.78)  Vin  1.172  ;  ii.ioi,  242  ;  A  11. 241  ; 
III. 252  ;  V.70  ;  J  VI. 70,  112  ;  Miln  255  ;  Vism  22  ;  KhA 
97,  phA  1.76  (as  one  of  the  divisions  of  the  Sutta- 
vibhanga,  see  also  Vin  m.i  sq.). 

Parapata  [Epic  Sk.  paravata]  a  dove,  pigeon  J  1.242  ; 
v. 215;  VvA  167  (^akkhi)  ;  Pgdp  45.  See  the  doublet 
parevata. 

Parayana  (nt.)  [late  Sk.  parayana,  the  metric  form  of 
parayana]  the  highest  (farthest)  point,  final  aim,  chief 
object,  ideal ;  title  of  the  last  Vagga  of  the  Sutta 
Nipata  A  111.401  ;  Sn  1130;  Nd^  438;  SnA  163,  370, 
604. 

Parikkhattiya=parikkhattata,  Pug  i9=VbhA  358. 

Paricariya  (f.)  same  as  paricariya  serving,  waiting  on, 
service,  ministration,  honour  (for=loc.)  D  111.189,  250, 
281;  M  n.177;  S  IV. 239;  A  11.70;  111.284,  325,  328; 
J  III. 408  ;  iv.490  ;  V.154,  158  (kilesa°) ;  PvA  7,  58,  128. 
Cp.  BSk.  paricarya  MVastu  11.225. 

Paricchatta  =  paricchattaka,  Sn  64  (°ka  Nd^  439;  expl"" 
as  kovijara)  ;  J  v. 393. 

Paricchattaka  [Epic  Sk.  parijata,  but  P.  fr.  pari+chatta 
+  ka,  in  pop.  etym.  "  shading  all  round  "]  the  coral 
tree  Erythmia  Indica,  a  tree  in  Indra's  heaven  Vin 
1.30;  A  IV.117  sq.  ;  Vv  38*  (expl""  as  Magadhism  at 
VvA  174  for  parijata,  which  is  also  the  BSk.  form); 
J  1.40  ;  11.20  ;  KhA  1.122  ;  SnA  485  ;  DhA  1.273  ;  III. 21 1  ; 
DhsA  I  ;  VvA  12,  1 10  ;  PvA  137. 

Parijata  =  paricchattaka,  VvA  174. 

Paiijunaa  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  parijunna,  pp.  of  pari  +  jur] 
I.  decay,  loss  M  11.66;  DhA  1.238;  VvA  lOi  (bhoga°). 
—  2.  loss  of  property,  poverty  PvA  3. 

Paripanthika  [fr.  paripantha]  i.  highwayman,  robber 
S  II. 188;  J  v. 253.  —  2.  connected  with  danger,  threat- 
ening, dangerous  to  (-°)  Vism  152  ;  PugA  181  (samadhi", 
vipassana'). 

Paripuri  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  pari  +  pur,  cp.  BSk.  paripuri 
Av^  11.107I  fulfilm"nt.  completion,  consummation  S 
I.I 39  ;  A  v.i  14  sq.  ;Sn  1016  ;  J  vi.298  ;  Nd^  137  (pada")  ; 
SnA  28  (id.)  ;  Pug  53  ;  Dhs  1367  ;  DhA  1.36  ;  PvA  132, 
133  I  VbhA  468  (°mada  conceit  of  perfection). 

Parima  (adj.)  [superl.  form.  fr.  para]  yonder,  farther,  only 
comtyi  with  °tira  the  farther  shore  D  1.244;  ^  l'34' 
135;  S  IV.  174;  Miln  269;  DhA  11. 100.  Cp.  BSk. 
parimar)  tirai)  AvS  1.148. 

Paribhatya  (nt.)  (&  der.)  [fr.  pari  +  tjhr]  "petting  (or 
spoiling)  the  children  "  {Milii  trsl.  11.287)  but  perhaps 
more  likely  "  fondness  of  being  petted  "  or  "  nurture  " 
(as  Vism  trsl.  32)  (being  carried  about  like  on  the  lap 
or  the  back  of  a  nurse,  as  expl°  at  Vism  28  =  VbhA  483). 
The  readings  are  different,  thus  we  find  °bhatyata  at 


Vbh  246;  VbhA  33S,  483;  "bhatyata  at  Vism  17,  23. 
27  (w.  11.  "bhattata  &  "bbhattata) ;  'bhattakata  at 
Miln  370  ;  °bhattata  at  Vbh  352  ;  KhA  236  ;  Nd'  39. 
The  more  det.  expl"  at  VbhA  338  is  "  alankara-karan' 
adihi  daraka-kilapanai)  etar)  adhivacanai)."  —  See 
stock  phrase  under  mugga-supyata. 

Paribhogika  (adj.)  [fr.  parlbhoga]  belonging  to  use  or 
enjoyment,  with  ref.  to  relics  of  personal  use  J  iv.228 
(one  of  the  3  cetiyas,  viz.  saririka,  paribhogika,  udde- 
sika) ;  Miln  341  (id.). 

Parivattaka  (adj.)=pari°;  changing,  turning  round  (of 
civara)  Vin  iv.59.  60. 

Parivasika  =  pari°  (a  probationer),  Vin  1.136;  11. 31  sq  . 
where  distinguished  from  a  pakatatta  bhikkhu,  a 
regular,  ordained  bh.  to  whom  a  parivasika  is  inferior 
in  rank. 

Parisajja  [fr.  parisa]  belonging  to  an  assembly,  pi-  the 
members  of  an  assembly,  esp.  those  who  sit  in  council, 
councillors  (cp.  BSk.  pari?adya  councillor  Divy  291) 
Vin  1.348  ;  D  1.136  ;  111.64,  ^5  :  M  1.326  ;  S  1.145,  222  ; 
A  1. 142  :  Miln  234 ;  DA  1.297. 

Parisnddhi  (i.)  [fr.  parisuddha]  purity  Vin  1.102,  136 
(cp.  Vin.  Texts  1.242,  280);  M  111.4 ;  A  11.194  sq.  (°pa- 
dhaniy'  angani,  the  four,  viz.  silaparisuddhi,  citta", 
ditthi",  vimutti°);  Nd>  475;  Ps  1.42  (°sila)  ;  Dhs  165; 
Miln  336  (ajiva°,  and  in  4""  jhana) ;  Vism  30  (  =  pari- 
suddhata),  46  ("sila),  278;  DhA  111.399  (catu°  -sila) ; 
iv.iii  (ajiva°) ;  Sdhp  342. 

Paribariya  (adj.)  [fr.  parihara]  connected  with  preserva- 
tion or  attention,  fostering,  keeping  Vism  3  (°paiiiia), 
98  (°kammatthana) ;  SnA  54  (id.). 

Paruta  [pp.  of  parapati]  covered,  dressed  S  1.167,  '75; 
Th  I,  153  ;  J  1.59,  347;  SnA  401  ;  PvA  48,  161.  — dup- 
paruta  not  properly  dressed  (without  the  upper  robe) 
Vin  1.44;  11.212;  S  II. 231,  271.  See  also  abhiparuta. 
Note.  The  form  aparuta  is  apparently  only  a  neg.  paruta, 
in  reality  it  is  apa  +  a+  vita. 

Parapati  [metathesis  fr.  papurati  =  Sk.  pravrijoti,  pra-H 
Vt;  see  also  papurati  etc.]  to  cover,  dress,  hide,  veil 
D  1.246  ;  Vin  iv.283  ;  M  111.94  :  S  11.281  ;  J  11  24,  109  ; 
Pv  II. 11^  (  =  nivaseti  PvA  147) ;  Mhvs  22,  67  ;  Vism  18  ; 
Dh.\  111.525;  VvA  44.  127;  PvA  73,  74.  77— PP- 
paruta  (q.  v.). 

Parupana  (nt.)  [fr.  parupati]  covering,  clothing ;  dress 
J  1.126,  378  ;  III. 82  ;  Miln  279  ;  DhA  1.70,  164  ;  PvA  74, 
76. 

Pareti  [Denom.  fr.  para;  cp.  Lat.  portare]  to  make  go 
through,  to  bore  through,  pierce,  break  (?)  J  111.185 
(reading  uncertain). 

Parevata  [the  Prk.  form  (cp.  Magadhi  parevaya)  of  the 
Sk.  parapata,  which  appears  also  as  such  in  P.]  i.  a 
dove,  pigeon  A  1.162  (dove-coloured) ;  Vv  36'  ("akkhi  = 
parapat'  akkhi  VvA  167);  J  vi.456.  —  2.  a  species  of 
tree,  Diospyros  erabryopteris  J  vi.529,  539. 

Paroha  [fr.  pra-)-ruh,  cp.  Sk.  *praroha]  i.  a  small  (side) 
branch,  new  twig  (of  a  Nigrodha  tree)  J  v. 8,  38,  472  ; 
VI. 199  ;  SnA  304  ;  PvA  1 13.  —  2.  a  shoot,  sprout  (from 
the  root  of  a  tree,  tillering)  S  1.69  (see  C.  expl°  at  K.S. 
320) ;  J  VI. 15  ;  DhA  11.70  ;  VbhA  475  ;  476. 

Pala  (-°)  [fr.  pa,  see  paleti]  a  guard,  keeper,  guardian, 
protector  S  1.185  (vihara°) ;  J  v.222  (dhamma°) ;  VvA 
288  (arama°) ;  Sdhp  285.     See  also  go",  loka°. 

Palaka  (-°)  [fr.  pa]  a  guardian,  herdsman  M  1.79  ;  S  in.  i  'j4  ; 
A  IV. 127  ;  ]  111.444. 


Palana 


78 


Pasada 


Palana  (nt.)  (&  palana  ?)  [fr.  paleti  2,  to  all  likelihood  for 
palayana  through  *palana,  with  false  analogy]  moving, 
running,  keeping  going,  living,  in  phrase  vutti  palana 
yapcina  etc.  at  Vism  145;  DhsA  149.  167;  also  in  del" 
of  bhufijati*  as  "  palan'  ajjhoharesu "  by  eating  & 
drinking  for  purposes  of  living,  at  Dhtp  379.  As 
palana  at  the  Dhs  passages  of  same  context  as  above 
(see  under  yapana). 

Palana  (f)  [fr.  paleti  cp.  Ep.  Sk.  palana  nt.]  guarding, 
keeping  J  1. 158  ;  Dhs  19,  84,  295. 

Pali  (Pa}i)  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  pall  a  causeway,  bridge  Halayudha 
III. 54]  I.  a  line,  row  Davs  111.61  ;  IV.3  ;  Vism  242  (dvat- 
tir)s'  akara").  251  (danta°) ;  SnA  87.  —  2.  a  line,  norm, 
thus  the  canon  of  Buddhist  writings  ;  the  text  of  the 
Pali  Canon,  i.  e.  the  original  text  {opp.  to  the  Com- 
mentary ;  thus  "  paliyar)  "  is  opposed  to  "  atthakatha- 
yag  "  at  Vism  107,  450,  etc).  It  is  the  literary  language 
of  the  early  Buddhists,  closely  related  to  Magadhi.  See 
Grierson,  The  Home  of  Lit.  Pali  (Bhandarkar  Com- 
memoration vol.  p.  117  sq.),  and  literature  given  by 
Winternitz,  Gesch-  d.  Ind.  Litt.,  n.io  ;  111.606,  635.  The 
word  is  only  found  in  Commentaries,  not  in  the  Pitaka. 
See  also  Hardy,  Introd.  to  Netl.  p.  xi.  —  J  iv.447  (°na- 
yena  accord,  to  the  Pali  Text)  ;  Vism  376  (°nay'  anusa- 
rena  id.),  394,  401,  565  ("anusarato  accord,  to  the  text 
of  the  Canon)  ;  607,  630,  660  sq.,  693,  712  ;  KhA  41  ; 
SnA  333,  424,  519,  604;  DhsA  157,  168;  DhA  iv.93  ; 
VvA  117,  203  (palito-(-atthuppattito)  ;  PvA  83,  87,  92, 
287  ;  and  freq.  elsewhere. 

-vannana  is  explanation  of  the  text  (as  regards 
meaning  of  words),  purely  textual  criticism,  as  opposed 
to  vinicchaya-katha  analysis,  exegesis,  interpretartion 
of  sense  Vbh  291  ;  Vism  240  (contrasted  to  bhavana- 
niddesa). 

Paligunthima  (adj.)  [doubtful,  fr.  pali-l-gimth,  see  pali- 
gunthita ;  hapax  legomenon]  covered  round  (of  sandals) 
Vin  1. 186  (Vin.  Texts  n.15:  laced  boots);  v.  1.  BB 
"gunthika. 

Palicca  (nt.)  [fr.  palita]  greyness  of  hair  M  1.49  ;  S  11. 2,  42  ; 
A  III.  196;  Dhs  644,  736,  869;  VbhA  98. 

Palibhaddaka  [fr.  palibhadda  =  pari-l-bhadda,  very  aus- 
picious] the  tree  Butea  frondosa  J  iv.205  ;  Nd^  eSoA"  ; 
Vism  256  (°atthi) ;  VbhA  239  (id.)  ;  KhA  4b,  53  ;  DhsA 
14  ;  DhA  1.383.  As  phalibhaddaka  (-vana).at  J  11. 162 
(v.  1.  patali°). 

Paleti  [cp.  (Epic)  Sk.  palayati,  fr.  pa]  i-  to  protect,  guard, 
watch,  keep  Sn  585;  J  1.55;  iv.i27;  vi.589  ;  Miln  4 
(pathavi  lokag  paleti,  perhaps  in  meaning  "  keeps, 
holds,  encircles,"  similar  to  meaning  2);  Sdhp  33. — 
2.  (lit.  perhaps  "to  see  through  safely";  for  pala- 
yati by  false  analogy)  to  go  on,  to  move,  to  keep  going, 
in  def"  of  carati  as  viharati,  iriyati,  vattati,  paleti, 
yapeti,  yapeti  at  Nd^  237;  Vbh  252  ;  DhsA  167.  Cp. 
palana.  So  also  in  phrase  atthar)  paleti  (so  read  for 
paleti?)  "to  come  home"  i.  e.  to  disappear  Sn  1074 
(see  expl''  Nd*  28).  See  other  refs.  under  palayati.  — 
pp.  palita.  See  also  abhi°  &  pari".  A  contracted 
(poetical)  form  is  found  as  pallate  at  J  v. 242,  expl'' 
by  C.  as  palayati  (palayate).  used  as  Med. -Pass. 

Pavaka  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  pn,  Vedic  pavaka]  i.  (adj.)  pure, 
bright,  clear,  shining  J  v. 419.  —  2.  (m.)  the  fire  S  1.69  ; 
A  IV.97  ;  Dh  71,  I4'i  ;  J  iv.26;  v. 63  (  =kanha-vattanin) 
VI. 2 36  (=aggi  C.) ;  Pv  1.8^;  Vism  170  (  =  aggi). 

Pavacana  (nt.)  [pa-l- vacana,  with  lengthening  of  first  a 
(see  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §33')]  a  word,  esp.  the  word  of  the 
Buddha  D  i,88  ;  S  11.259  ;  Th  i,  587  ;  2,  457. 

Pavadati  [  =  pavadati]  to  speak  out,  to  tell,  show  J  11.439  ; 
Pv  iv.i**;  PvA  118. 


Pavassi  see  pavassati. 

Pavara  [fr.  pa-l-vj]  i.  a  cloak,  mantle  Vin  1.281  ;  J  v.409 
(expl*"  as  pavara-dibba-vattha  !). —  2.  the  mango  tree 
KhA  58  ("puppha ;  Vism  258  at  id.  p.  has  pavaraka"). 

Pavarika  [fr.  pavara]  a  cloak-seller  (?)  Vin  iv.250. 

Pavala  [see  pavaja]  hair  ;  only  in  cpd.  "nipphotana  pulling 
out  one's  hair  S  iv.300. 

Pavisa  &  Pavekkhi  see  pavisati. 

Pavurana  (nt.)  [fr.  pa-l-a-l-vr,  see  papurana  Sc  parupana] 
cloak,  mantle  M  1.359  ;  Vin  iv.255,  289  ;  ThA  22. 

Pavusa  [pa-(-vr?,  cp.  Vedic  pravrsa  &  pravarsa]  i.  rain, 
the  rainy  season  (its  first  2  months)  Th  i,  597  ;  J  v. 202, 
206.  —  2.  a  sort  of  fish  J  iv.70  (gloss  pagusa,  q.  v.). 

Pavussaka  (adj.)  [fr.  pavusa]  raining,  shedding  rain 
M.  1.306  ;  S  v. 51  ;  A  iv.127 ;  J  1.95,  96 ;  Miln  114. 

Pasa*  [Vedic  pasa]  a  sling,  snare,  tie,  fetter  S  1. 105,  III  ; 
A  II. 182;  IV. 197;  Vin  IV. 153  (?  hattha°) ;  Sn  166; 
It  36  (Mara°) ;  J  111.184;  iv.414  ;  PvA  206.  On  its 
frequent  use  in  similes  see  J.P.T.S.  1907,  in. 

Pasa^  [Class.  Sk.  prasa  fr.  pra-l-  as]  a  spear,  a  throw  Sn  303  ; 
A  IV.  I  71  (kuthari°  throw  of  an  axe).  — asi°  a  class  of 
deities  Miln  191. 

Pasa^  (a  stone  ?)  at  PvA  63  (pas'  antare)  is  probably  a 
misreading  and  to  be  corrected  to  palasa  (palas'  antare. 
similarly  to  rukkh'  antare,  katth'-  and  mul'  antare), 
foliage. 

Pasagsa  (adj.)  [grd.  fr.  pasagsati  with  pa  for  pa  as  in 
similar  formations  (see  pamokkha)  ]  to  be  praised, 
praiseworthy  M  1.5,  404;  11.227  (dasa  "tthanani) ; 
A  v. 129  (id.);   J   III. 493  ;   Pv  iv.7"  ;  Nett  52. 

Pasaka'  [fr.  pasa^]  a  bow,  for  the  dress  Vin  11. 136;  for 
the  hair  Th  2,  411  (if  Morris,  J.P.T.S.  1893,  45,  46,  is 
right  to  be  corr.  fr.  pasada). 

Pasaka*  [fr.  pasa-]  a  throw,  a  die  J  vi.281. 

Pasaka^  lintel  Vin  11.120  =  148  (see  Vin.  Texts  in. 144). 

Pasan^a  [cp.  late  Sk.  pasanda]  heresy,  sect  S  11 33; 
A  11.466  ;  Th  2,  183  Miln  359  ;  ThA  164.  -°ika  heretic, 
sectarian  Vin  iv.74. 


[Epic  Sk.  pasaija]  a  rock,  stone  A  1.283  ;  Sn  447  ; 
J  1. 109,  199;  v.295  ;  Vism  28,  182,  183:  VbhA  64  (its 
size  as  cp''  with  pabbata) ;  DhA  111.151  ;  DhsA  389; 
VvA  157;  Sdhp  328. 

-gula  a  ball  of  (soft)  stone,  used  for  washing  (pumice 
stone  ?)  A  11.200  (sala-latthii)  .  .  .  taccheyya  .  .  . 
likheyya  .  .  .  pasanagu|ena  dhopeyya  .  .  .  nadir)  pa- 
tireyya),  cp.  M  1.233  •  'intl  Vism  28  "  bhajane  thapitai) 
gulapindar)  viya  pasanar)."  -cetiya  a  stone  Caitya 
DhA  III. 253.  -tala  a  natural  plateau  J  1.207.  -pitthe 
at  the  back  of  a  rock  Vism  1 16.  -pokkharani  a  natural 
tank  Vism  1 19.  -phalaka  a  slab  of  stone  J  iv.328. 
-macchaka  a  kind  of  fish  (stone-fish)  J  iv.70;  vi.450. 
-lekha  writing  on  a  stone  Pug  32.  -sakkhara  a  little 
stone,  fragment  of  rock  S  11. 137;  A  iv.237.  -sevala 
stone  Vallisneria  J  v. 462.     -vassa  rain  of  stones  SnA  224. 

Pasanaka  =  pasana  Vin  11.211.  ; 

Pasada  [pa  +  a -l- sad,  cp.  Class.  Sk.  prasada]  a  lofty  plat-  ^^ 
form,  a  building  on  high  foundations,  a  terrace,  palace 
Vin  1.58,  96,  107,  239;  II. 128,  146,  236  (cp.  Vtn.  Texts 
1.174  ;  III- 1  78) ;  D  II. 2 1  ;  S  1.137  ;  A  '-64  '•  Sn  409  ;  It  33  ; 
Pv  11.12';  J  11.447;  IV. 153  (pillars);  v. 217;  Vism  339 
(°tala) ;  DhsA  107  ;  SnA  502  ;  ThA  253,  286  ;  VvA  197  ; 
PvA  23,  75,  279  (cp.  upari") ;  Sdhp  299.     — satta-bhii- 


■> 


Pasadika 


79 


Pitaka 


maka°  a  tower  with  7  platforms  J  1.227,  34^  I  iv.323, 
378;  V.426,  577.  The  Buddha's  3  castles  at  D  11. 21  ; 
A  1. 145;  J  VI. 289.  See  also  J.P.T.S.  1907,  112  (p.  in 
similes). 

Pasadika  (adj.)  rfr.  pasada]  i.  pleasing,  pleasant,  lovely, 
amiable  Vin  iv.18  ;  D  111.141  ;  S  1.95  :  11.279  ;  A  11.104  sq., 
203  ;  m.255  sq.  ;  DhA  i.i  19  ;  ThA  266.  281  ;  DA  1. 141. 
281  ;  VvAO;  PvA  46,  186,  187,261.  — samanta"  lovely 
throughout  A  1.24;  v.  11. — 2.  comfortable  Vism  105. 

Pasavin  (adj.)  [fr.  pasavati]  bringing  forth  S  v.  170;  J 
I-394- 

Pasoka  [for  the  usual  phasuka]  a  rib  Vin  11.266.  (loop  ? 
Rh.D.). 

Pasula  [for  phasuKa]  a  rib  Vin  111.105. 

Passati  fat.  of  pibati  (for  pivissati). 

Pahana  (m.  nt.)  [fr.  pa  +  a+hn,  see  also  ahuna  &  der.] 
I.  (m.)  a  guest  A  III. 260  ;  J  VI. 24,  516.  —  2.  (nt.)  meal 
for  a  guest  D  i.97  =  M  11. 154  :  Vism  220  ;  DA  1.267. 

Pahanaka  (m.-nt.)  [fr.  pahuna]  I.  (m.)  a  guest  J  1.197; 
IV. 2 74  ;  Miln  107  ;  DA  1.267,  288  ;  DhA  11. 17.  —  2.  (nt.) 
meal  for  a  guest  S  1.114. 

Pahimeyya  (adj.)  [fr.  pahuna,  see  also  ahuneyya]  worthy 
of  hospitality,  deserving  to  be  a  guest  D  111.5 ;  S  1.220  ; 
11.70;  A  n.56 ;  III. 36,  134,  248,  387;  IV.13  sq.  ;  v.67, 
198  ;  It  88  ;  Vism  220. 

Pahuneyyaka  =  pahune>Ta  J  111.440. 

Paheti  [secondary  form,  after  aor.  pahesi  fr.  pahinati]  to 
send  J  1.447  ;  Miln  8  ;  PvA  133. 

Pi  (indecl.)  [the  enclitic  form  of  api  (cp.  api  2a)  ;  on  simi- 
larities in  Prk.  see  Pischel,  PcA.  Gr.  §  143]  emphatic 
particle,  as  prefix  only  in  pidahati  and  pilandhati, 
where  api°  also  is  found  (cp.  api  ib).  —  i.  also,  and 
also,  even  so  D  1. 1  ;  Vin  iv.  1 39  (cara  pi  re  get  away  with 
you:  see  re);  J  1.151,  278.  —  2.  even,  just  so;  with 
numbers  or  num.  expressions  "  altogether,  in  all,  just 
that  many"  J  1.151  ;  in.275  ;  iv.142.  —  cattaro  pi 
J  III. 51  ;  ubho  pi  J  1.223  ;  sabbe  pi  Sn  52  ;  J  1.280.  — 
3.  but.  however,  on  the  other  hand,  now  (continuing  a 
story)  J  1.208;  iv.2.  —  4.  although,  even  if  J  ii.iio 
(ciram  pi  kho  .  .  .  ca  although  for  a  long  time  .  .  . 
yet).  —  5.  perhaps,  it  is  time  that,  probably  Sn  43  ; 
J  1.151  ;  II.  103. — 6.  pi  ...  pi  in  correlation  (like 
api  .  .  .  api) :  (a)  both  .  .  .  and ;  very  often  un- 
translatable Sn  681  (yada  pi  .  .  .  tada  pi  when  .  .  . 
then),  808  (dittha  pi  suta  pi) ;  J  1.222  (jale  pi  thale  pi) ; 
(b)  either  .  .  .  or  J  1. 150  ;  11. 102. 

PiQSa  [pp.  of  pigsati^]  crushed,  ground,  pounded  DhA 
III.  1 84  (v.  1.  pittha.  perhaps  preferable). 

Pigsati*  [pii  or  pigs,  cp.  Vedic  pigsati,  with  two  bases  viz. 
Idg.  *peig,  as  in  P.  pinjara  &  pingala ;  Lat.  pingo  to 
paint,  embroider  ;  and  *peik,  as  in  Sk.  pigsati,  pesah  ; 
Av.  paes-  to  embellish ;  Gr.  ttoi/cMoc  many-coloured  ; 
Goth.  feh.  Ags.  fah  id.  See  detail  in  Walde,  Lai. 
WW.  under  pingo]  to  adorn,  form,  embellish  ;  orig.  to 
prick,  cut.  Perhaps  pigsare  (3.  pi.  med.)  J  v. 202 
belongs  here,  in  meaning  "tinkle,  sound"  (lit.  prick), 
expl*  in  C.  by  viravati.  Other  der.  see  under  pingala. 
pinjara.  pesakara. 

Pigsati'  [pi4  or  pigs,  Vedic  pinasti,  cp.  Lat.  pinso  to  grind, 
pila  =  pestle,  pistillum —pistil  ;  Lith.  pais^ti  to  pound 
barley;  Gr.  Ti-Tiaaw  id.;  Ohg.  fesa  =  Nhg.  fese]  i.  to 
grind,  crush,  pound  J  1.452  ;  11.363  ;  IV.3  (matthakar)), 
440  (akaluii  candanan  ca  silaya  p.);  Miln  43;  Dh.^ 
III.  184  (gandhe  pigsissati ;  BB  pisissati).  —  2.  to 
knock  against  each  other,  make  a  sound  J  v. 202  :  see 
pigsati'.  —  pp.  pigsa  &  pittha'.     See  alsopisati  and  pafi". 


Pinka  [for  pinga  yellow,  brownish,  tawny]  a  young  shoot, 
sprout  J  HI. 389  (v.  1.  singa.  which  also  points  to  pinga; 
expl*  by  pavala). 

Pinga  see  pinka. 

Pingala  (adj.)  [see  pigsati',  cp.  Vedic  pingala]  i.  reddish- 
yellow,  brown,  tawny  S  1.170;  J  vi.199  (=pingiya). — 
2.  red-eyed,  as  sign  of  ugliness  J  iv.245  (as  Np.  ; 
comb*  with  nikkhanta-datha) ;  v. 42  (tamba-dathika 
nibbiddha-pingala) ;  Pv  11. 4'  (-"locana  PvA  90; 
+  kajara-danta). 

-kipillaka  the  red  ant  DhA  111.21  6.  -cakkhuta  red- 
eyedness  PvA  250.  -makkhika  the  gadfly  J  111.263 
(=dagsa)  Nd*  268  =  SnA  u>i  (id.);  SnA  33  (where  a 
distinction  is  made  between  kana-makkhika  and 
pingala"),  572  (=dagsa). 

Pingiya  (adj.)  [fr.  Vedic  pinga]  reddish-brown,  yellow 
J  VI.  199. 

Pingala  (f.)  [a  var.  of  Sk.  pingala,  a  kind  of  owl]  a  species 
of  bird  J  VI. 538. 

Pica'  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  picu]  cotton  Vin  1.2  71  ;  usually  in 
cpds,  either  as  kappasa"  S  v.284,  443,  or  tiila"  S  v.284, 
351  (T.  thula°),  443  ;  J  v.480  (T.  tula"). 

-patala  membrane  or  film  of  cotton  Vism  445. 
-manda  the  Nimb  or  Neera  tree  Azadizachta  Indica 
Pv  IV. i'  (cp.  PvA  220);  the  usual  P.  form  is  puci- 
manda  (q.  v.). 

Picu^  [etym.  unknown,  prob.  Non-Aryan]  a  wild  animal, 
said  to  be  a  kind  of  monkey  J  vi.537. 

Piccha  (nt.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  piccha  &  puccha  tail,  to  Lat. 
pinna,  E.  fin.  Ger.  finne]  tail-feather,  esp.  of  the  pea- 
cock Vin  1. 186  (mora°).  —  dve°  (&  de°)  Ifaving  two 
tail-feathers  J  v.339,  341  (perhaps  to  be  taken  as 
"wing"  here,  cp.  Halayudha  2,  84=paksa).  Cp. 
pincha  &  pinja. 

Picchita  in  su°  J  v.  197  is  not  clear,  C.  expl''  by  suphassita, 
i.  e.  pleasing,  beautiful,  desirable,  thus  dividing  su-p- 
icch°. 

PiCChila  (adj.)  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  picchila]  slippery  Vism  264  ; 
I       VbhA  247  (lasika  =  p-kunapai)) ;  DhA  in. 4  (°magga). 

Pincha  =  piccha,  i.  e.  tail-feather,  tail  Vin  11. 130  (mora"). 
Cp.  pinja. 

Pinja  (nt.)  [  =  piccha]  a  (peacock's)  tail-feather  J  i  38 
(mora"  kalapa),  207  (  =  pekkhuna)  ;  111.226  (BB  piccha 
&  miccha) ;  DA  1. 41  (mora");  DhA  1.394  (id.);  VvA 
147  (mayura"  ;  BB  piflcha,  SS  pakkha) ;  PvA  142 
(mora"  kalapa). 

Pinjara  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  piiijara ;  for  etym.  see  pigsati']  of 
a  reddish  colour,  tawny  J  1.93;  Da  i  215;  VvA  165, 
288. 

-odaka  fruit  of  the  esculent  water  plant  Trapa  Bis- 
pinosa  J  vi.563  (v.  1.  cificarodaka),  expH  by  singhataka. 

Pinjita  (adj.)  [fr.  pigsati  ,  cp.  Sk.  piiijana]  tinged,  died 
Miln  24(1.     On  expression  see  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v. 

Pinnaka  (nt.)  [to  pigsati^,  cp.  Class.  Sk.  piijyaka]  ground 
sesamum,   flour  of  oil-seeds  M  1.78,   342;   Vin  iv.341 
(p.    nama   tilapitthag   vuccati) ;    VvA    142    (tila°   seed 
cake)  ;  PvA  48. 

-bhakkha  feeding  on  flour  of  oil-seeds  D  1.166; 
A  1. 241,  295  ;  11.206 ;  Nd'  417;  Pug  55. 

Pi(aka  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  pifaka,  etym.  not  clear.  See  also 
P.  pela  &  pelika]  i.  basket  Vin  1225  (ghata  p.  uc- 
changa),  240  (catudonika  p.)  ;  Pv  iv.3'^  ;  Vism  28  (pitake 
nikkhitta-lona-maccha-phala-sadisag  phanag)  ;  dhanna" 
a  grain-basket  DhA  ill. 370  ;  vihi"  a  rice  basket  Dh.\ 
III. 374.     Usually   in   comb"  kuddala-pifaka  "  hoe  and 


Pittha 


80 


Pinda 


basket,"  wherever  the  act  of  digging  is  referred  to, 
e.  g.  Vin  m.47  ;  D  i.ioi  ;  M  1.127;  S  11.88;  v.53  ;  A 
1.204  ;  II. 199;  J  1.225,  336;  DA  1.269.  —  2.  (fig.)  t.t. 
for  the  3  main  divisions  of  the  Pali  Canon  "  the  three 
baskets  (basket  as  container  of  tradition  Wintemitz, 
Ind.  Lit.  n  8  ;  cp.  peja  2)  of  oral  tradition,"  viz.  Vinaya°, 
Suttanta°,  Abhidhamma" ;  thus  mentioned  by  name 
at  PvA  2;  referred  to  as  "  tayo  pitaka  "  at  J  1.118; 
Vism  96  (panca-nikaya-mandale  tini  pitakani  pari- 
vatteti),  384  (tinnar)  Vedanar)  uggahanar),  tinnar) 
Pitakanai)  uggahanag) ;  SnA  1 10,  403  ;  DhA  in. 262  ; 
IV.38  ;  cp.  Divy  18,  253,  488.  With  ref.  to  the  Vinaya 
mentioned  at  Viu  v.  3. — Pitaka  is  a  later  collective 
appellation  of  the  Scriptures  ;  the  first  division  of  the 
Canon  (based  on  oral  tradition  entirely)  being  into 
Sutta  and  Vinaya  (i.  e.  the  stock  paragraphs  learnt  by 
heart,  and  the  rules  of  the  Order).  Thus  described  at 
D  II.  124;  cp.  the  expression  bhikkhu  suttantika  vina- 
yadhara  Vin  11.75  (earlier  than  tepitaka  or  pitakadhara). 
Independently  of  this  division  we  find  the  designation 
"  Dhamma "  applied  to  the  doctrinal  portions;  and 
out  of  this  developed  the  3""  Pitaka,  the  Abhidhamma- 
p.  See  also  Dhamma  C.  i.  —  The  Canon  as  we  have 
it  comes  very  near  in  language  and  contents  to  the  canon 
as  established  at  the  3""  Council  in  the  time  of  King 
Asoka.  The  latter  was  in  Magadhi.  —  The  knowledge 
of  the  3  Pitakas  as  an  accomplishment  of  the  bhikkhu 
is  stated  in  the  term  tepitaka  "  one  who  is  familiar  with 
the  3  P."  (thus  at  MUn  18  ;  Davs  v.22  ;  KhA  41  with 
V.  1.  ti° ;  SnA  306  id.  ;  DhA  in. 385).  tipetaki  (Vin  v.3 
KhemanJma  t.),  tipe^ka  (Miln  90),  and  tipifaka-dhara 
KhA  91.  See  also  below  "ttaya.  In  BSk.  we  find  the 
term  trepitaka  in  early  inscriptions  ( i*'  century  a.d.^  see 
e.  g.  Vogel,  Epigraphical  discoveries  at  Sarnath,  Epi- 
graphia  Indica  vni.  p.  173,  196;  Bloch,  /.  As.  Soc. 
Bengal  1*898,  274,  280)  ;  the  term  tripitaka  in  literar>- 
documents  (e.  g.  Divy  54),  as  also  tripita  (e.  g.  Avi 
1.334  •  Divy  261,  505).  —  On  the  Pitakas  in  general  & 
the  origin  of  the  P.  Canon  see  Oldenberg,  in  ed.  of  Vin 
1;  and  Wintemitz,  Gesch.  d.  Ind.  Litt.  1913,  11. i  sq.  ; 
III. 606,  635.  —  Cp.  petaka. 

-ttaya  the  triad  of  the  Pifakas  or  holy  Scriptures 
SnA  328.  -dhara  one  who  knows  (either  one  or  two 
or  all  three)  the  Pitaka  by  heart,  as  eka°,  dvi°,  ti°  at 
Vism  62,  99.  -sampadaya  according  to  the  P.  tradition 
or  on  the  ground  of  the  authority  of  the  P.  M  1.520 
(itihitiha  etc.);  11.169  (id.);  and  in  exegesis  of  itikira 
(hearsay-tradition)  at  A  1. 189  =11.191  =Nd^  151. 

Pitthft'  (°t.)  [pp.  of  pirjsati^,  cp.  Sk.  pista]  what  is  ground, 
grindings,  crushed  seeds,  flour  Vin  1.201,  203;  iv.261, 
341   (tila''=pinflaka) ;    J  11.244   (masa°).     As  pitthi  at 

J  1-347- 

-khadaniya  "  flour-eatables,"  i.  e.  pastry  Vin  1.248 
(cp.  Vin.  Texts  11.139).  -dhitalika  a  flour-doll,  i.  e. 
made  of  paste  or  a  lump  of  flour  PvA  16,  19  (cp.  uddana 
to  the  r'  vagga  p.  67  piuhi  &  reading  pinda°  on  p.  i  7). 
-pindi  a  lump  of  flour  Vism  500  (in  comp.).  -madda 
flour  paste  Vin  11. 151  (expl''  in  C.  by  pittha-khali  ;  cp. 
pitthi-madda  J  in. 226,  which  would  correspond  to 
pi§ti)-  -sura  (intoxicating)  extract  or  spirits  of  flour 
VvA  73. 

Pittha'  (nt.)  [identical  in  form  with  pittha'']  a  lintel  (of  a 
door)  Vin  1.47  (kavata") ;  n.120  ("sanghata,  cp,  Vin. 
Texts  III.  105),  148,  207. 

Pittha^  ("t.)  [cp.  Vedic  prstha,  expl'*  by  Grassmann  as 
pra-stha,  i.  e.  what  stands  out]  back,  hind  part ;  also 
surface,  top  J  1.167  (pasana°  top  of  a  rock).  Usually 
in  oblique  cases  as  adv.,  viz.  instr.  pitthena  along,  over, 
beside,  by  way  of,  on  J  11. 1 11  (udaka°) ;  1V.3  (samudda"), 
loc.  pitthe  by  the  side  of,  near,  at :  parikha"  at  a  ditch 
PvA  201  ;  on,  on  top  of,  on  the  back  of  (animals): 
ammanassa  p.  J  vi.381  (cp.  pitthiyar)) ;  tina°  J  iv.444  ; 
panka"  J  1.223  •  samudda"  J  1.202.  —  assa"  on  horseback 


D  1. 103  ;  similarly  :  varaijassa  p.  J  1.358  ;  siha°  J  n.244  ; 
hatthi°  J  11.244  ;  III-392.     See  also  following. 

Pitthi  &  Pitthi  (f.)  [  =  pittha3,  of  which  it  has  taken  over 
the  main  function  as  noun.  On  relation  pittha  > 
pitthi  cp.  Trenckner,  Notes  55  ;  Franke,  Bezzenberger's 
BeitrUge  xx.287.  Cp.  also  the  Prk.  forms  pittha, 
pitthi  &  pisti,  all  representing  Sk.  prstha :  Pischel, 
Prk.  Gram.  §53]  i.  the  back  Vin  11.2CO  (pitthi)  ;  M  1.354  ■ 
J  1.207;  11159.  279.  pitthig  (paccamittassa)  passati 
to  see  the  (enemy's)  back,  i.  e.  to  see  the  last  of  some- 
body J  1.296,  488  ;  iv.2c8.  pitthi  as  opposed  to  ura 
(breast)  at  Vin  11.105  ;  Sn  609;  as  opposed  to  tala 
(palm)  with  ref.  to  hand  &  foot :  hattha  (or  pada-)  tala 
&  "pitthi:  J  IV, 1 88;  Vism  361.  —  abl.  pitthito  as  adv. 
(from)  behind,  at  the  back  of  Sn  412  (-1- anubandhati 
to  follow  closely) ;  VvA  256  ;  PvA  78  (geha°).  pitthito 
karoti  to  leave  behind,  to  turn  one's  back  on  J  1.71 
(cp.  prsthato-mukha  Divy  333).  pitthito  pitthito 
right  on  one's  heels,  ven,'  closely  Vin  1.47  ;  D  i.i,  226. 
—  2.  top,  upper  side  (in  which  meaning  usually  pittha^), 
only  in  cpd.  "pasana  and  loc.  pitthiyat]  as  adv.  on  top 
of  J  v. 297  (ammana°).  pitthi  at  VvA  10 1  is  evidentlj' 
faulty  reading. 

-apariya  teacher's  understudy,  pupil-teacher,  tutor 
J  II.  100  ;  v. 458,  473,  501.  -kantaka  spina  dorsi,  back- 
bone M  1.58,  80,  89;  in.92  ;  \ism  271;  VbhA  243; 
KhA  49  sq.  ;  Sdhp  102.  -kotthaka  an  upper  room 
(bath  room  ?)  DhA  n.19,  20.  -gata  following  behind, 
foU.  one's  example  Vism  47.  -pannasala  a  leaf-hut  at 
the  back  J  vi.545.  -parikamma  treating  one's  back 
(by  rubbing)  Vin  11. 106.  -passe  (loc.)  at  the  back  of, 
behind  J  1.292  ;  PvA  55,  83,  106.  -pada  the  back  of 
the  foot,  lit.  foot-back,  i.  e.  the  heel  Vism  251  ;  KhA  51. 
Catthika)  ;  DA  1.254.  -pasana  a  fiat  stone  or  rock, 
plateau,  ridge  J  1.278;  11.352;  vi.279;  DhA  11.58; 
VbhA  5,  266.  -baha  the  back  of  the  arm,  i.  e.  elbow 
(cp.  °pada)  KhA  49,  50  (°atthi)  :  -magsa  the  flesh  of  the 
back  PvA  210;  SnA  287.  -magsika  backbiting,  one 
who  talks  behind  a  person's  back  Sn  244  (  =  °mai)sa- 
khadaka  C);  J  11. 186  (of  an  unfair  judge);  v.i  ;  Pv 
III. 9'  (BB  ;  T.  °aka).  As  "maijsiya  at  J  v.  10.  -mag- 
sikata  backbiting  Nd^  39.  -roga  back-ache  SnA  in. 
-vagsa  back  bone,  a  certain  beam  in  a  building  DhA 
1.52. 

Pitthika  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  pittbi]  having  a  back,  in  digha° 
with  a  long  back  or  ridge  Sn  604  ;  mudu°  having  a 
flexible  back  Vin  ni.35. 

Pitthika  (f.)=pitthi;  loc.  pitthikaya  at  the  back  of, 
behind  J  1.456  (raandala"). 

Pitthimant  (adj.)  [fr.  pitthi]  having  a  back,  in  f.  pitthi- 
mati  (sena)  (an  army)  having  troops  on  (horse-  or, 
elephant-)  back  J  vi.396. 

Pithara  (m.  &  nt.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  pithara]  a  pot,  a  pan 
Miln  107  (spelt  pithara).  As  pitharaka  [cp.  BSk. 
pitharika  Divy  496  ;  so  read  for  T.  piparika]  at  KhA  54 
to  be  read  for  T.  pivaraka  according  to  -■Vpp-  SnA  869. 

Pio4<^  [cp.  Vedic  pinda  ;  probably  connected  with  pi;  i.  e. 
crush,  grind,  make  into  a  lump  ;  Grassmann  compares 
pi4  to  press ;  on  other  attempts  at  etym.  see  Walde, 
Lat.  Wtb.  s.  V.  puis]  i.  a  lump,  ball,  thick  (&  round) 
mass  S  1.206  (attbiyaka") ;  Pv  111.5'  (nonita") ;  VvA  62 
(kummasa"),  65  ;  Sdhp  529  (ayo°).  —  2.  a  lump  of  food, 
esp.  of  alms,  alms  given  as  food  S  1.76;  Sn  217,  388, 
391  ;  J  1.7  (nibbuta"  cooled)  ;  Miln  243  (para  °g  ajjhu- 
pagata  living  on  food  given  by  others),  pindaya  (dat.) 
for  alms,  freq.  in  comb"  with  carati,  patikkamati, 
(gamag)  pavisati,  e.  g.  Vin  11. 195;  in. 15;  M  in. 157; 
Sn  386 ;  SnA  141,  175  ;  PvA  12,  13,  16,  47,  81,  136  and 
passifa.  —  3.  a  conglomeration,  accumulation,  com- 
pressed form,  heap,  in  akkhara°  sequence  of  letters  or 
syllables,  context  DhA  iv.70. 


Pindaka 


8i 


Pitta 


-attha  condensed  meaning,  resume  J  1.233,  275.  306; 
KhA  124.  192.  Cp.  sampindanattha.  -ukkhepakai) 
in  the  manner  of  taking  up  lumps  (of  food),  a  forbidden 
way  of  eating  Vin  11.214  =iv.i95,  cp.  Vin.  Texts  1.64 
(=pindar|  pindarj  ukkhipitva  C).  -ganana  counting 
in  a  lump,  summing  up  DA  1.95.  -cara  alms-round, 
wandering  for  alms  Sn  414.  -carika  one  who  goes  for 
alms,  begging  Vin  11. 215;  111.34,  80;  iv.79;  J  1.116; 
VvA  6.  -dayika  (&  "davika)  one  who  deals  out  food 
(as  occupation  of  a  certain  class  of  soldiers)  D  1.5 1 
(°davika) ;  A  iv.ioy  (v.  1.  °dayaka) ;  Miln  331;  cp. 
DA  1. 1 56.  See  also  Geiger,  P.Gr.  46,  i  ;  Rh.  D.  Dial. 
1.68  (trsl.  "camp-follower");  Franke,  Dlgha  trsl.  53' 
trsl.  "  Vorkampfer "  but  recommends  trsl.  "  Kloss- 
verteiler  "  as  well),  -dhitalika  a  doll  made  of  a  lump 
of  dough,  or  of  pastry  Pv.\  17;  cp.  pittha°.  -pati- 
pinda  (kamma)  giving  lump  after  lump,  alms  for  alms, 
i.  e.  reciprocatory  begging  J  11.82  (pipda-patipindena 
jivikar)  kappesug),  307  (pindapata-patipindena  jivikar) 
kappenti)  ;  v. 391)  (mayar)  pinda-patipinda-kammari 
na  karoma).  -pata  food  received  in  the  alms-bowl  (of 
the  bhikkhu),  alms-gathering  (on  term  see  Vism  31  yo 
hi  koci  aharo  bhikkhuno  pindolyena  patte  patitatta 
pindapato  ti  vuccati,  and  cp.  BSk.  pindapata-pra- 
vistha  Av§  1-359;  pindapatra-nirharaka  Divy  239) 
Vin  1.46  ;  11. 32  (°r)  niharapeti).  77,  198,  223  ;  111.80,  99  ; 
IV. 66  sq.,  77  ;  M  in. 297  ;  S  1.76,  92  ;  A  1.240  ;  11.27,  '43  '■ 
III. 109,  145  sq.  ;  v.ioo;  Sn  339;  J  1.7,  149,  212,  233; 
Pug  59;  Visra  31,  60;  VbhA  279  ("apacayana) ;  SnA 
374  ;  PvA  1 1  sq.,  16.  38,  240.  -patika  one  who  eats  only 
food  received  in  the  alms-bowl ;  °anga  is  one  of  the 
dhutanga  ordinances  (see  dhutanga)  Vin  1.253  i  11.32 
("anga),  299  (-1- parjsukulika) ;  in.  15  (id.);  M  1.30; 
III. 41  ;  A  in. 391  ;  Pug  59.  69:  SnA  57  ("dhutanga). 
-pindapStika  bhikkhu  a  bh.  on  his  alms-round  Vism 
246  (in  simile);  VbhA  229  (id.).  Cp.  BSk.  pindapatika 
AvS  1.248.  -patikatta  (abstr.  to  prec.)  the  state  of 
eating  alms-food,  a  characteristic  of  the  Buddhist 
bhikkhu  M  in. 41  ;  S  n.202,  208  sq. ;  A  1.38;  in.  109. 

Pin4^&  [f""-  P'Oda]  (alms)-food  A  iv.185  (SS  pindapata)  ; 
in  phrase  na  pindakena  kilamati  not  go  short  of  food 
Vin  in.  15,  87  ;  iv.23,  in  ukka-pindaka  meaning  a  cluster 
of  insects  or  vermin  Vin  1.2  1 1  =239  (v.  1.  pinduka). 

PiQ4>  i^)  [<^P-  pi?>da  &  Sk.  pindi]  a  lump,  round  mass,  ball, 
cluster  D  1.74  =A  in. 25  (nahaniya"  ball  of  fragrant 
soap;  DA  1.2 18:  pinda) ;  M  ni.92  ;  J  1.76  (phala°) ; 
11.393;  in. 53  (amba°) ;  Miln  107;  Vism  500  (pittha") ; 
DhA  in. 207  (amba°). 

Pill^ika  (-°)  in  chatta''-vivara  is  a  little  doubtful,  the 
phrase  prob.  means  "  a  crevice  in  the  covering  (i.  e.  the 
round  mass)  of  the  canopy  or  sunshade  "  J  vi.370.  — 
Dutoit  (/.  trsl'  VI. 457)  translates  "  opening  at  the  back 
of  the  sunshade,"  thus  evidently  reading  "  pitthika." 

Pi^^ito  (adj.)  [pp.  of  pindeti,  cp.  BSk.  pinditamulya 
lump-sum  Divy  500]  i.  made  into  a  lump,  massed 
together,  conglomerated,  thick  Th  2,  395.  —  2.  "ball- 
like," close,  compact :  of  sound  :  J  11.439  ;  vi.519. 

Pindiyalopa  [pindi -(- alopa]  a  morsel  of  food  Vin  1.58 
("bhojana),  96  (id.);  A  n.27;   It  102. 

Pi^^eti  [Denom.  fr.  pinda]  to  ball  together,  mix,  put 
together  Pv  1I/9'-  ( =pisana-vasena  yojeti  PvA  135).  — 
pp.  pindita. 

PiQ^ola  [etyra.  unclear]  one  who  seeks  alms  S  111.93  = 
It  89;  cp.  Np.  "bharadvaja  SnA  346,  514,  570. 

Piq^Olya  (nt.)  [fr.  pindola]  asking  for  alms,  alms-round 
S  in. 93=  It  89;  Vism  31. 

Fitar  [Vedic  pitr,  pitar- ;  cp.  Gr.  irartip  ;  Lat.  pater,  Jup- 
piter,  Dies^iter  =  Z(i'c  irnTtip  ;  Goth.  fadar  =  Ger.  vater  - 
E    father ;   Oir.  athir  etc.  to  onomat.  syllable  •pa-pa. 


cp.  tata  &  raata]  father.  — Cases  :  sg.  nom.  pit4  S  1.182  ; 
Dh  43;  J  v.379  ;  SnA  423;  ace.  pitarat)  Dh  294;  & 
pitui]  Cp.  II. 9' ;  instr.  pitara  J  in. 37,  pituna,  petya 
J  V.214;  dat.  gen.  pitu  M  in. 176;  J  iv.137;  vi.365, 
589;  &  pituno  Vin  1.17  (cp.  Prk.  piuno) ;  abl.  pitara 
J  v.214:  loc.  pitari.  —  pi.  nom.  pitaro  Sn  404;  J  iV.i  ; 
PvA  38,  54  (mata°) ;  ace.  pitaro  PvA  17.  pitare,  & 
pitu  Th  2,  433  ;  instr.  pitarehi  &  pituhi;  dat.  gen. 
pitunnag  J  111.83  ;  (m5ta°) ;  vi.389  (id);  Pv  ii.8« ; 
pitunai]  It  no;  loc.  pitusu  Th  2,  499;  J  1.152  (mats"); 
and  pitusu  PvA  3  (mata°).  Further  .•  abl.  sg.  pitito 
by  the  father's  side  D  1.113  (-l-matito);  A  in. 151  ; 
J  v.214.  —  A.  1.62,  132,  138  sq.  ;  Sn  296,  579  (para- 
lokatonapita  tayateputtar)) ;  Nd^  441  (  =yo  so  janako) ; 
J  1.412  (=tata)  ;  v. 20  ;  VbhA  108  (where  pretty  popular 
etym.  is  given  with"piyayati  ti  pita  "),  154  (in  simile). — 
Of  BraAma  .Di.iS,  cp.  DA  i.l  12  ;  oilnda  J  v.  153.  There 
is  sometimes  a  distinction  made  between  the  father  as 
such  and  the  grandfather  (or  ancestors  in  gen.)  with 
culla°  (cula°),  i.  e.  little  and  maha°  i.  e.  grand-father, 
e.  g.  at  J  1. 115  (H-ayyaka);  PvA  107.  The  collective 
term  for  "  parents  "  is  matapitaro  (pi.  not  dual),  e.  g. 
Sn  404  ;  J  1.152  ;  111.83  ;  iv.i;  PvA  107.  On  similes 
of  father  and  son  cp.  J.P.T.S.  1907,  112.  In  cpds. 
there  are  the  3  bases  pita,  piti°  &  pitu°.  (a)  pita" : 
°putta  father  &  son  J  1.253  ;  P'-  °putta  fathers  &  sons, 
or  parents  &  children  J  iv  115;  vi.84.  °inaha  grand- 
father Pv  II. 8<;  J  11.263;  DA  1.281  ;  PvA  41  ;  °maha- 
yuga  age  of  a  grandfather  (i.  e.  a  generation  of  ancestors) 
D  I.I  13  (see  det.  expl"  DA  1.281  =SnA  462)  :  Sn  p.  1 15  ; 
KhA  141  ;  petti-pita-maha  great-grandfathers,  all 
kinds  of  ancestors  J  n.48  (— pitu-vita  maha  C). — 
(b.)  piti° :  "kicca  duty  of  a  father  J  v. 153;  °ghata 
parricide  J  iv.45  (BB  pitu") ;  °pakkha  father's  side 
DhA  1.4  ;  "pitamaha  (pi)  fathers  &  grandfathers, 
ancestors  J  v. 383  ;  "vadha  parricide  DA  1.135.  — (c)pitu°  : 
°ja  originating  from  the  father  J  VI. 589  (-Hmatuja); 
"ghataka  parricide  (-1- matughataka)  Vin  1.88,  136, 
168,  320  ;  "natna  fathers  name  SnA  423  ;  "pitamaha 
(pi.)  ancestors  (cp.  piti°)  A  iv.61  ;  J  1.2  ;  n.48.  °rak- 
khita  guarded  by  a  father  M  111.46.  "santaka  father's 
possession  J  1.2.     °hadaya  father's  heart  J  1.61. 

Pitika  (-°)  (adj.)  [fr.  pita]  one  who  has  a  father,  having  a 
father  VvA  68  (sa°  together  with  the  f.) ;  PvA  38 
(mata°  whose  f.  was  dead) :  cp.  dve°  with  2  fathers 
J  V.424. 

Pitacchi  (f.)  [pitu -f  svasa,  cp.  Sk.  pitf-svasf]  father's 
sister,  aunt ;  decl.  similarly  to  pita  &  mata  DhA  1.37 ; 
ace.  sg.  pitucchasai)  [Sk.  ♦svasag  instead  of  *svasa- 
rar)]  J  iv.184. 

-dhita  aunt's  daughter,  i.  e.  (girl)  cousin  DhA  1.85. 
-putta  aunt's  son,  i.  e.  ("boy)  cousin  S  11.282  (Tisso 
Bhagavato  p.);  in. 106  (id.);  J  11.119,  324. 

Pitta  (nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  pitta]  1.  the  bile,  gall ;  the  bile  also 
as  seat  of  the  bilious  temperament,  excitement  or 
anger.  Two  kinds  are  distinguished  at  KhA  60  = 
Vism  260,  viz.  baddha°  &  abaddha",  bile  as  organ  & 
bile  as  fluid.  See  also  in  detail  Vism  359  ;  VbhA  65, 
243.  —  In  enumerations  of  the  parts  or  affections  of 
the  body  pitta  is  as  a  rule  comM  with  semha  (cp. 
Vin  n.137;  Kh  in;  Vism  260,  344;  Miln  298).  —  Vin 
II.  137;  M  111.90  ;  S  IV. 230,  231  (H- semha);  A  11.87; 
in.ioi,  131  ;  Sn  198  (-(-semha),  434  (id.,  expl""  as  the 
two  kinds  at  SnA  388);  Nd'  370;  J  1.146  (-(-semha); 
n.114  (pittan  te  kupitai)  your  bile  is  upset  or  out  of 
order,  i.  e.  you  are  in  a  bad  mood) ;  Miln  112  (vata-pitta- 
semha  .  .  .),  304  (roga, -(- semha),  382  (-(-semha); 
DhsA  190  (as  blue-green);  DhA  111.15  (cittag  n'  atthi 
pittai)  n'  atthi  has  no  heart  and  no  bile,  i.  e.  does  not 
feel  &  get  excited;  vv.  11.  vitta  &  nimitta).  —  2.  [ac- 
cording to  Morris,  J.P.T.S.  1893,  4  for  *phitta  =  phita, 
Sk.  sphita]  swelling,  a  gathering  Vin  11.188  {Vin.  Texts 
III. 237  "a  burst  gall,  i.  e.  bladder");  S  11.242.     The 


V— 6 


Pittika 


82 


Piyayita 


passage  is  not  clear,  in  C.  on  Ud  1.7  we  read  cittar),  sec 
Morris  loc.  cit.     May  the  meaning  be  "  muzzle  "  ? 
-kosaka  gall-bladder  KhA  61  ;  Vism  263  ;  VbhA  246. 

Pittika  (adj.)  [fr.  pitta]  one  who  has  bile  or  a  bilious 
humour,  bilious  Miln  298  (-t-semhika). 

Pittivlsaya  [Sporadic  reading  for  the  usual  petti"]  the 
realm  of  the  departed  spirits  M  1.73  ;  J  1.51  ;  Nd'  489. 

Pittivisayika  (adj.)  [fr.  pittivisaya]  belonging  to  the  realm 
of  the  departed  Nd'  97  (gati ;  v.  1.  petti°). 

Pithiyati  (pithiyyati)  [Pass,  of  pidahati.  cp.  api-dahati, 
Sk.  apidhiyate]  to  be  covered,  obscured  or  obstructed  ; 
to  close,  shut  M  11. 104;  111.184;  Sn  1034,  1035;  Nd^ 
442  (BB  pidhiyyati ;  expH  by  pacchijjati) ,  Th  i,  872  ; 
Dh  173:  J  1.279  (akkhini  pithlyigsu  the  eyes  shut); 
II. 158  (=paticchadiyati)  ;  vi.432.  The  spelling  of  the 
BB  manuscripts  is  pidhiyati  (cp.  Trenckner,  Notes  62). 

Pidalaka  [etym.  ?  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  suggests  diminutive- 
formation  fr.  Sk.  bidala  split  bamboo]  a  small  stick, 
skewer  Vin  11. 116,  cp.  Bdhgh  on  p.  317:  "  danda- 
kathina-ppamanena  katasarakassa  pariyante  patisai)- 
haritva  duguna-karana."     See  also  Vin  Texts  in. 94. 

Pidahati  [api  -1-  dha,  cp.  apidahati  &  Prk.  pinidhattae  = 
Sk.  apinidhatave]  to  cover,  to  close,  conceal,  shut 
M  I.  II 7,  380  (dvarar))  ;  J  1.292  ;  111.26  ;  v.389  ;  Miln  139 
(vajjao)  ;  DhA  1.396  ;  11. 4,  85  ;  iv.197  (urug) ;  Sdhp  321  ; 
aor.  pidahi  J  iv.308  (kanne)  ;  ger.  pidahitva  Pv  11. 7* 
(dvarar))  ;  Vism  182  (nasai)) ;  DA  1.136.  pidhatva  Th  2, 
480,  &  pidhaya  J  1.150  (dvarar)),  243  (id.);  ThA  286; 
DhA  11.199  (dvarani).  —  Pass,  pithiyati;  pp.  ,pihita 
(q.  v.).     The  opp.  of  p.  is  vivarati. 

Pidahana  (nt.)  [fr.  api -1- dha,  cp.  apidahana]  covering  up, 
shutting,  closing  Vism  20;  DhA  iv.85  (--thakana). 

Pidhara  [fr.  api-l-dhy]  a  stick  (or  rag?)  for  scraping  (or 
wiping?)  Vin  11. 141  (avalekhana°),  221  (id.).  Meaning 
doubtful. 

Pidhana  (nt.)  [=pidahana]  cover  J  vi.349.  -°phalaka 
covering  board  Vism  261  (where  KhA  in  same  passage 
reads  patikujjana-phalaka)  =VbhA  244. 

Pinasa  [cp.  Sk.  pinasa]  cold  in  the  head,  catarrh,  in  enum" 
of  illnesses  under  dukkha,  at  Nd^  304'  si  (kasa,  sasa, 
pinasa,  etc.). 

Pipati  [dial,  form  for  pibati,  pivati,  usually  restricted  to 
Gatha  Dial.,  cp.  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  132]  to  drink,  only 
in  imper.  pres.  pipa  M  1.316;  S  1459,  and  ppr.  pipai] 
J  V-255.  gen.  pi.  pipatao  Sn  398. 

Pipasa  (f.)  [DesicJ.  form.  fr.  pa,  pibati  >pipati,  lit.  desire 
to  drink]  I .  thirst  Nd"  443  (  =  udaka-pipasa) ;  Miln  318; 
VbhA  196  (in  comparison);  PvA  23,  33,  67  sq.  ;  Sdhp 
288.  Often  comb""  with  khuda  (hunger)  e.  g.  Sn  52, 
436  (khup°)  ;  PvA  67  ;  or  jighaccha  (id),  e.  g.  M  i.io  ; 
S  1.18  ;  A  II. 143.  153  ;  Miln  304.  —  2.  longing  (for  food), 
hunger  J  n.319.  —  3.  desire,  craving,  longing  D  ni.238 
(avigata") ;  S  in. 7.  108.  190;  iv.387  ;  A  n.34  (pipasa- 
vinaya  ;  expl""  at  Vism  293) ;  iv.461  sq. 

Pipasita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  pipasati.  Desid.  fr.  pa,  cp.  pipasa] 
thirsty  Si.  1 43  ;ii.i  10  (sura°) ;  J  vi.399  ;  Miln  318  (kilanta- 
tasita-p.) ;  Vism  262  ;  PvA  127;  Sdhp  131. 

PipikSiil  (adj.)  [fr.  pipasa]  thirsty  D  11.265. 

Pipi  (adj.)  [fr.  pa,  see  pivati]  drinking  (?)  in  su°  good  to 
drink  (?)  J  vi.326  (v.  1.  BB  sucimant).  Or  is  it  "  flow- 
ing "  (cp.  Vedic  pipisvat  overflowing)  ? 

Pipllika  (f.)  &  pipillika  [cp.  Vedic  pipilika.  pipilaka  & 
pipilika  ;  BSk.  pipilaka  Av6  11. 130  (kunta°).  See  also 
kipillika]  ant  J  in. 276  (BB  kipilhka) ;  Sdhp  23;  as 
pipillika  at  J  1.202. 


Pippala  [for  the  usual  P.  pipphali,  Sk.  pippali]  pepper 
Vin  1.20 1,  cp.  Vin.  Texts  11.46. 

Pipphala  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  pippala,  on  ph  for  p  see  pipphali] 
the  fruit  of  Ficus  religiosa,  the  holy  fig  tree  J  vi.518 
(Kern's  reading,  Tocv.  s.  v.  for  T.  maddhu-vipphala, 
C.  reads  madhuvipphala  &  expl™  by  madhuraphala). 

Pipphalaka  (nt.?)  [etym.  ?  BR  give  Sk.  *pippalaka  in 
meaning  "  thread  for  sewing  "]  scissors  (?  so  ed.)  DA 
1.70. 

Pipphali  (f.)  [with  aspirate  ph  for  p,  as  in  Sk.  pippali, 
see  Geiger.  P.Gr.  §  62.  See  also  pippala.  Etym.  loan 
words  are  Gr.  Trsn-tpi  =Lat.  piper  =  E.  pepper.  Ger. 
pfeffer]  long  pepper  S  v.79  ;  J  111.85  ;  Vv  43";  DhA 
1.258  ("guhii  Npl.);  iv.155. 

Piya'  (adj.)  [Vedic  priya.  pri,  cp.  Gr.  Trpoirpcuiv ;  Goth, 
frijon  to  love,  frijonds  loving  =  E.  friend;  Ger.  frei. 
freund  ;  Ohg.  Fria  — Sk.  priya.  E.  Friday,  etc.]  dear,  in 
two  applications  (as  stated  Nd*  133  =Nd"  444,  viz. 
dve  piyii :  satta  va  piya  sankhara  va  piya,  with  ref.  to 
living  beings,  to  sensations)  :  i.  dear,  beloved  (as  father, 
mother,  husband,  etc.)  S  1.2 10  (also  compar.  °tara) ; 
Dh  130,  157,  220  ;  Vism  296,  314  sq.  ;  often  comb""  with 
manapa  (pleasing,  also  in  2),  e.  g.  D  n.19;  in. 167; 
J  n.155;  IV. 132.  —  2.  pleasant,  agreeable,  liked  Sn 
452.  863:  Dh  77.  211  ;  often  comb''  (contrasted)  with 
appiya,  e.  g.  Sn  363,  450  (see  also  below),  nt.  piyag 
a  pleasant  thing,  pleasantry,  pleasure  S  1. 189  ;  Sn  450, 
811;  DhA  III. 275.  — appiya  unpleasant  M  1.86;  Kh 
vni.5.  appiyata  unpleasantness  J  iv.32.  See  also 
piti  &  pema. 

-4paya  separation  from  what  is  dear  to  one,  absence 
of  the  beloved  A  in.57  ;  Dh  211.  -Sppiya  pleasant  & 
unpleasant  D  n.277  (origin  of  it)  ;  Dh  211.  -kamya 
friendly  disposition  Vin  IV.  12.  -ggahin  grasping  after 
pleasure  Dh  209.  cp.  DhA  in. 275.  -cakkhu  a  loving 
eye  D  in. 167.  -dassana  lovely  to  behold,  good- 
looking  D  III.  167.  -bhanin  speaking  pleasantly,  flat- 
tering J  v. 348.  -manapata  belovedness  M  1.66.  -rupa 
pleasant  form,  an  enticing  object  of  sight  D  1.152 
(cp.  DA  1. 31 1)  ;  S  n.109  sq.  ;  A  n.54  ;  It  95.  114;  Sn 
337,  1086  (cp.  Nd"  445);  Vbh  103;  Nett  27.  -vacana 
term  of  endearment  or  esteem,  used  with  ref.  to  ayasma 
Nd"  130;  SnA  536.  etc.;  or  marisa  SnA  536.  —  vaca 
pleasant  speech  S  1.1S9;  Sn  452.  -vadin  speaking 
pleasantly,  affable  D  1.60  (manapacarin+ )  ;  A  in. 37; 
IV.265  sq.  -vippayoga  separation  from  the  beloved 
object  Sn  41  (cp.  Nd"  444)  ;  PvA  161  (here  with  ref. 
to  the  husband)  ;  syn.  with  appiya-sampayoga.  e.  g. 
at  Vism  504  sq. 

Piya"  [sporadic  for  phiya,  q.  v.]  oar ;  usually  so  in  cpd. 
piy4ritta  (nt.)  oar  A  rudder  S  1.103  ;  A  11.201  ;  J  iv.164. 

Piyaka  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  priyaka]  a  plant  going  under  various 
names,  viz.  Nauclea  cadamba  ;  Terminalia  tomentosa  ; 
Vitex  trifolia  J  v. 420  (=setapuppha  C.)  ;  vi.269. 

PiyangU  (f)  [cp.  Vedic  priyangu]  i.  panic  seed,  Panicum 
Italicum  Vv  53'  ;  J  1.39  ;  PvA  283.  Mixed  with  water 
and  made  into  a  kind  of  gruel  (piyangudaka)  it  is  used 
as  an  emetic  J  1.4 1 9.  See  also  kangu.  —  2.  a  medicinal 
plant,  Priyangu  J  v. 420. 

Piyatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  piya']  belovedness.  pleasantness 
A  V.164  sq.  ;  Sdhp  66. 

Piyayati  [Denom.  fr.  piya']  to  hold  dear,  to  like,  to  b.e 
fond  of  (ace),  to  be  devoted  to  S  1.2  10  ;  J  1.156  ;  11.246  ; 
VI. 5  ;  VbhA  108  (in  etym.  of  pita,  q.  v.)  ;  DhA  iv.125  ; 
SnA  78;  VvA  349;  PvA  71.  —  pp.  piyayita.  Note.  A 
ppr.  piyar)  is  found  at  SnA  169  for  Sn  94  adj.  piya,  and 
is  expl''  by  piyamana  tussamana  modamana. 

Piyayana  (f)  [fr.  piyayati]  love,  fondness  for  (loc.) 
S  1.2111. 

Piyayita  [pp.  of  piyayati]  held  dear,  fondled,  loved,  liked 
Sn  807  ;  Nd'  126. 


'4 

i 


Piyala 


83 


Pisuna 


Piyala  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  priyala]  the  Piyal  tree,  Buchanania 
latifolia  J  v.415.  —  (nt.)  the  fruit  of  this  tree,  used  as 
food  J  IV.344  ;  V.324. 

Pire  at  Vin  IV.  139  is  to  be  separated  (cara  pi  re  get  away 
with  you),  both  pi  and  re  acting  as  part,  of  exclama- 
tion. The  C.  expl"  (p.  362)  by  "pire  (voc.  ?)=para, 
amamaka  "  is  an  artificial  construction. 

Pilaka  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  pidaka]  a  boil  Sn  p.  124  (pijaka, 
V.  1.  pilaka)  :  Vism  35  (pllaka) ;  DhA  1.319  (v.  1.  pilaka). — 
See  also  pilaka. 

Pilakkha  [cp.  Vedic  plak.sa]  the  wave-leaved  fig  tree, 
Ficus  infectoria  Vin  iv.35 ;  DA  1.81.  As  pilakkhu 
[cp.  Prk.  pilakkhu  Pischel,  Prk.  Gr.  §  105]  at  S  v. 96 ; 
J  in.24,  398. 

Pilandha  (adj.)  {-")  [fr.  pilandhatij  adorning  or  adorned 
Miln  336,  337.     Cp.  apilandha. 

Pilandhati  [see  apilandhati,  api-f-nah]  to  adorn,  put  on, 
bedeck    Miln    337;    J    v. 400.      Caus.    II.    pilandhapeti 

J  1.3S6. 

Pilandhana  &  Pi]andliaiia  (nt.)  [=apilandhana]  putting  on 
ornaments,  embellishment,  ornament,  trinkets  A  1.254, 
257  ;  in. 16  :  Th  2,  74  ;  Vv  64"  (|)  ;  J  1.386  (J)  ;  v.205  ; 
VbhA  230  ("vikati;  1);  VvA  157  (j),  167  (1);  PvA  (1) ; 
Sdhp  243. 

Pilava  &  Plava  [fr.  plu,  cp.  Vedic  plava  boat,  Russ.  plov 
ship]  I.  swimming,  flowing,  floating  J  v. 408  (su- 
plav-atthar)  in  order  to  swim  through  well  =  plavana 
C).  —  2.  a  kind  of  duck  [so  Epic  Sk.]  Vv  35*  (cp. 
VvA  163) ;  J  V.420. 

Pilavati  &  Plavati  [cp.  Vedic  plavati :  plu,  as  in  Lat.  pluo 
to  rain,  pluvius  rain,  Gr.  jrAJiu  swim,  irXvvui  wash  ;  Ohg. 
flouwen  etc.  to  rinse  — E.  flow]  to  move  quickly  (of 
water),  to  swim,  float,  sway  to  &  fro  Th  i,  104  ;  Miln 
377  ;  VvA  163  ;  DhsA  76.  As  plavati  at  J  1.336  (verse) ; 
Dh  334  (v.  1.  SS  ;  T.  palavati).  As  palavati  at  Th  i, 
399.  —  See  also  uppalavati  (uppluta),  opilapeti,  pari- 
palavati. 

Pilavana  cS:  Palavana  (nt.)  [fr.  plu]  swimming,  plunging 
J  v.4"9  (pl°). 

Pilapanata  (f.)  [fr.  plu,  see  pilavati]  superficiality 
Dhs  1349.  cp.  DhsA  405. 

Pilala  at  J  1.382  (°pinda-Hmattika-pinda)  is  doubtful. 
FausboII  suggests  mistake  for  palala  straw,  so  also 
Ed.  MuUer.  P.Gr.  6. 

Pilotika  (f.)rcp.  Class.  Sk.  plota  (BR  =  prota),  Susr.1.15,  3  ; 
16,  7  &  passim]  a  small  piece  of  cloth,  a  rag,  a  bandage 
Vin  1.255,  -^96  (khoma°  cp.  Vin.  Texts  11.156);  M  1. 141 
(chinna-°o-dhammo  laid  bare  or  open) ;  S  11.28  (id.), 
219  (pata°) ;  J  1.220  ;  11. 145  ;  111.22  (jinna°),  51 1  ;  vi.383  ; 
Miln  282  ;  Vism  328;  KhA  55:  DhA  1.22  i  (tela°  rags 
dipped  in  oil)  ;  VvA  5  ;  PvA  185  ;  —  As  m.  at  J  iv.365. 
The  BSk.  forms  vary ;  we  read  chinna-pilotika  at  Av§ 
1.198;  MVastu  III. 63  ;  pilotika  (or  °ka)  at  MVastu 
III. 50,  54.  Besides  we  have  ploti  in  karmaploti  (pur- 
vika  k.)  Divy  150  etc.  Av§  1.42  i. 

-khandaapieceof  ragDhAiv.  1 15.,;  ThA2  69  ;  PvA  171. 

Pillaka  [cp.  Sk.  *pillaka]  tlie  young  of  an  animal,  some- 
times used  as  term  for  a  child  J  11.406  (sukara") ;  DhA 
IV.  1 34  (as  an  abusive  term  ;  vv.  11.  SS  kipillaka  ;  gloss  K 
pituculaka,  BB  cu|akanittha) ;  Sdhp  164,  165. — As 
pillika  at  J  1.487  (godha°.  v.  1.  BB  godha-kippillika). 

Pilaka  (f.)  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  pidaka]  i.  a  small  boil,  pustule, 
pimple  Vin  1.202;  S  1.150;  J  v.207.  303;  Nd'  370; 
Miln  298;  DA  1. 1 38.  —  2.  knob  (of  a  sword)  J  vi.218. 
—  Cp.  pilaka. 

Pilayhati  [api-fnayhati,  cp.  Sk.  pinahyate]  to  fasten  on, 
put  on,  cover,  dress,  adorn  J  v. 393  (pijayhatha  3"^  sg. 
imper.  =pi]andhatu  C). 


Pi|haka  (v.  1.  milhaka)  at  S  II  228  is  to  be  read  as  milhaka 
"  cesspool  "  (q.  v.).  The  C.  quoted  on  p.  228  expl" 
incorrectly  by  "  karjsalak'  adi  guthapanaka,"  which 
would  mean  "a  low  insect  breeding  in  excrements" 
(thus  perhaps  =  patanga  ?).  The  trsl.  (A'. 5.  n.155)  has 
"  dung-beetle." 

Pivati  &  Pibati  [Vedic  pati  &  pibati,  redupl.  pres.  to  root 
Idg.  •poi  &  pi,  cp.  Lat.  bibo  (for  •  pibo) ;  Gr.  iriiw  to 
drink,  jtot'  c  drink ;  Obulg.  piti  to  drink,  also  Lat. 
potus  drink,  poculum  beaker  (=patra,  P.  patta).  See 
also  payeti  to  give  drink,  pana.  paniya  drink,  pita  having 
drunk]  to  drink.  —  pres.  pivati  D  1.166;  111.184; 
J  IV. 380  ;  v.106;  PvA  55.  —  I*'  pi.  pivama  Pv  i.ii"; 
2°''  pi.  pivatha  PvA  78  &  pivatha  Pv  i.i  i^  ;  3"'  pi.  med. 
pijryare  J  iv.380.  —  imper.  piva  PvA  39.  &  pivatu 
Vin  IV. 109.  —  ppr.  pivag  Sn  257;  Dh  205.  &  pivanto 
SnA  39.  —  fut.  pivissati  J  vi.365  ;  PvA  5.  59  ;  pissami 
J  111.432;  passati  J  iv.527.  —  aor.  pivi  J  1.198;  apivi 
Mhvs  6.  21  ;  pivasig  Ud  42  ;  apayii]ha  J  1.362  (or 
°sir)ha  ?) ;  apagsu  A  1.205.  —  Z^^-  pivitva  J  1.419; 
III. 491  ;  VI. 518;  PvA  5,  2};  pitva  Sn  257;  Dh  205; 
J  1.297  '■  pitvana  J  11. 71  ;  pitva  Pv  i.i  1*.  —  grd.  patabba 
Vin  11.208;  peyya  ;  see  kaka."  —  inf.  patui]  J  11. 2 10; 
Pv  1.6*. — pp.  pita  (q.  v.).  —  Of  forms  with  p  for  v 
we  mention  the  foil.  :  pipati  M  1.32  ;  DhsA  403  (as  v.  I.) ; 
imper.  pipa  J  1.459  ;  ppr.  pipar)  M  1.316.  317.  — Caus. 
payeti  &  payapeti  (q.  v.). 

Pivana  (nt.)  [fr.  pivati]  drinking  PvA  251. 

Pivaraka  see  pitharaka. 

Pisati  [  =  pir)sati]  to  grind,  crush,  destroy;  Pass,  pisiyati 
to  perish  VvA  335  (-H  vinaseti).  —  pp.  pisita. 

Pisana  (nt.)  [fr.  pigsati  ?]  grinding,  powder,  see  upa°. 

Pisaca  [cp.  Sk.  pisaca  &  Vedic  pisaci ;  to  same  root  as 
pisuna  =  Vedic  pisuna,  &  Lat.  piget,  Ohg.  fehida 
enmity  =Ags.  faehp  ("feud"),  connected  with  root  of 
Goth,  fijan  to  hate;  thus  pisaca  =  fiend]  i.  a  demon, 
goblin,  sprite  D  1.54  (T.  pesaca,  v.  1.  pisaca,  expl* 
at  DA  1. 164  as  "pisaca  mahanta-mahanta  satta  ti 
vadati  "),  93  ;  S  1.209  ;  A  111.69  :  I'd  5  :  J  1235  ;  iv.495 
(yakkha  p.  peta) ;  Miln  2i  ;  VvA  335  ;  PvA  198  ;  Sdhp 
^13  — f.  pisaci  J  V.442.  —  2.  [like  pisaca-loha  refer- 
ring to  the  Paisaca  district,  hailing  from  that  tribe,  cp. 
the  term  malla  in  same  meaning  and  origin]  a  sort  of 
acrobat,  as  pi.  pisaca  "  tumblers  "  Miln  191. 

-nagara  town  of  goblins  (cp.  yakkha-nagara)  Vism 
531.  -loha  [connected  with  the  tribe  of  the  Paisaca's ; 
Mhbh  VII. 4819  ;  cp.  Paisaci  as  one  of  the  Prakrit  dia- 
lects :  Pischel,  Prk.  Gr.  §  3]  a  kind  of  copper  VbhA  63 
(eight  varieties). 

Pisacaka  =^ pisaca,  onlv  in  cpd.  pai)su°  mud-sprite  J  iv.380, 
496;  DA  1.287:  DhA  11.26. 

Pisacin  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  pisaca,  lit.  haying  a  demon]  only  f. 
pisacini  a  witch  (=pisaci)  Th  i,  1151. 

Pisacillika  (f)  [fr.  pisaca]  a  tree-goblin  Vin  1.152  ;  11. 115. 
134  ;  SnA  357  ;  cp.   Vin.  Texts  1.318. 

Pista  [pp.  of  pisati]  crushed,  ground  Vism  260  (=pittha 
KhA  id.  p.) ;  VbhA  243, 

Pisiyati  Pass,  of  pisati  (q.  v.). 

Pislla  (nt.)  [Sk.  pisala]  a  dial,  expression  for  pati  or  patta 
"bowl"  M  111235  (passage  quite  misunderstood  by 
Neumann  in  his  trsl°  111.414). 

PisuQa  (adj.)  [Vedic  piSuija,  see  etym.  under  pisaca]  back- 
biting, calumnious,  malicious  M  in. 33.  49  ;  J  1.297  '■ 
P"g  57:  PvA  15,  16.  Usually  comb''  with  vaca  mali- 
cious speech,  slander,  pisunavaca  and  pisunavaca  D  1.4. 
13S;  111.70  sq..  171.  232.  269;  M  1.362;  111.23;  ^dj. 
pisunavaca  &  M  in. 22,  48;  S  11. 167;  Pug  39.  —  Cp. 
pesuna. 

V— 6* 


Pisodara 


84 


Pisodara  rprsa.  i.  e.  prsant+udara.  see  pasata']  having  a    I 
spotted  belly  KhA  107  (ed.  compares  prsodaradi  Fanini 
VI.3,  109). 

Pihaka  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  plihanaka  &  pllhan  (also  Vedic 
plasi')  Av.  sparaian;  Gr.  (rrrX.)!',  (TTrXnyx""  entrails, 
Lat.  iicn  spleen]  the  spleen  M  111.9"  ;  Sn  195  ;  J  v.49. 
In  detail  at  Vism  257  ;  VbhA  240. 

Pihana  (nt.)  &  °a  (f.)  [fr.  piheti]  envying  Dhs  1059;  SnA 
459  (°sila). 

Pihayati  &  Piheti  [cp.  Vedic  sprhayati,  spfh]  i.  to  desire, 
lone  for  (with  ace.)  Vin  11.187;  S  11.242  (pihayittha 
2°i  pi  aor.);  J  1.401  ;  iv.198  (pattheti+);  TK  2,  454; 
Vv  8416  ( =pivayati  VvA  349).  —  2.  to  envy  (with  gen. 
of  person  &  object),  covet  M  1.504  1  S  1.202  236  ;  Th  i, 
62  ;  Sn  823,  947  i  1*  3^  ;  Dh  94  (  =pattheti  DhA  1 77).  >8i 
(id  III  227),  365  (ppr.  pihayao=labhar)  patthento 
DhA  IV.97) ;  J  1.197  (aor.  ma  pihayi) ;  Miln  336.  —  pp. 
pihayita. 

Pihayita  Fpp  "f  pihayatil  desired,  envied,  always  combi 
with  patthita  Miln  182,  351. 

Piha  (f  )  [fr.  sprh,  cp.  Sk.  sprha]  envy,  desire  M  1.304  ; 
J  1. 197  ;  Vism  ^92  (Bhagavantai)  disva  Buddha-bhavaya 
pihag  anuppadetva  thita-satto  nama  n'  atthi).  —  adj. 
apiha  without  desire  S  1.181. 


Pihayana  (f.)=pihana  Nett  18. 

Pihaitt  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  sprhalu,  fr.  spTh,  but  perhaps  =.Ved. 
piyaru  malevolent.  On  y>h  cp.  P.  patthayati  for 
patthahati]  covetous,  only  neg.  a"  S  i.i87=Th  i,  1218; 
Sn  852  ;  Nd'  227. 

Pihita  [pp.  of  pidahati]  covered,  closed,  shut,  obstructed 
(opp.  vivata)Mi.ii8;  in. 61  ;  S  1.40  ;  A  11.104  ;  Nd^  149; 
J  1.266;  Miln  102  (dvara),  161  ;  Vism  185;  DA  1.182 
(°dvara). 

Pitha  (nt.)  [cp.  Lpic  Sk,  pitha]  a  seat,  chair,  stool,  bench. 

^.  kinds  are  given  at  Vin  iv.40  =  168,  viz.  masaraka, 

bundikabaddha,  kulirapadaka,  ahaccapadaka  (same 
categories  as  given  under  mafica).  —  Vin  1.47,  180; 
II. 1 14,  149,  225;  A  III. 51  (manca°,  Dvandva) ;  iv.133 
(ayo°) ;  Ps  1.176  ;  Vv  i^  (see  discussed  in  detail  at  VvA 
8);  VvA  295  (manca°).  —  pada°  footstool  J  iv.378 ; 
VvA  291  ;  bhadda°  state-chair,  throne  J  m.410. 

-sappin  "  one  who  crawls  by  means  of  a  chair  or 
bench,"  i.  e.  one  who  walks  on  a  sort  of  crutch  or 
support,  a  cripple  (pItha  here  in  sense  of  "hatthena 
gahana-yogga  "  VvA  8  ;  exlp''  by  Bdhgh  as  "  chinn'  iri- 
yapatha  "  Vin.  Texts  1.225)  J  1.76,  418  ;  v.426  (khujja+  ) 
VI. 4,  10  ;  Miln  205,  245,  276  ;  Vism  596  (&  jaccandha,  in 
simile);  DhA  1.194;  "-69;  PugA  227;  PvA  282. 

Pithaka  [fr.  pltha]  a  chair,  stool  VvA  8,  124.  See  also 
palala°. 

Pithika  (f.)  ffr.  pitha]  a  bench,  stool  Vin  11.149  ("  cushioned 
chair"  Bdhgh;  see  Vin.  Texts  111.165);  J  iv.349  ;  DA 
1. 41  ;  VvA  8. 

Pi?ana  (nt.)  [fr.  pri,  cp.  piti]  1.  gladdening,  thrill,  satis- 
faction Vism  i43.-DhsA  115. —  2.  embellishment 
Vism  32  (=mandana). 

Pinita  fpp.  of  pineti]  pleased,  gladdened,  satisfied  Vv  16" 
(=tuttha  VvA  84);  Miln  238,  249,  361;  usually  in 
phrase  pinitindriya  with  satisfied  senses,  with  joyful 
heart  M  11.121  ;  PvA  46,  70. 

Pilteti  [cp.  Vedic  prinati,  pri,  see  piya.  The  meaning  in 
Pali  however  has  been  partly  confused  with  p!,  pinvati 
(see  pina),  as  suggested  by  Bdhgh  in  DA  1.157:  "  P'- 
nenti  ti  pinitai)  thama-bal'  upetag  karonti "]  to  gladden, 
please,  satisfy,  cheer ;  to  invigorate,  make  strong,  often 


Piti 

in  phrase  (attanar))  sukheti  pineti  "  makes  happy  and 
pleases"  D  1.51  ;  "ii.V  «).  ;  S  ly  ;  iv.33i  ;  PvA  283; 
cp    DhsA  403   (sariraij  p.).     It  also  occurs  in  def.  of 
piti  (pinayati  ti  piti)  at  Vism   i43=DhsA   115— PP- 
pinita. 
Pitai   Fpp    of  pivati]    i.  having  drunk  or  (pred.)  being 
drunk  (as  liquid)  S  1.212   (madhu") ;   J  1/98  ;  PvA  25 
(with    asita,    khayita    &    sayita    as    fourfold    food). — 
2    soaked  or  saturated  with  (-=),  in  kasayarasa"  J  11.98 
(or  =  pita2?)  and  visapita  (of  an  arrow)  J  v.36  ;  Vism 
303    381  ■  which  may  however  be  read  (on  acct.  of  v.  1. 
visappita)  as  visappita  "  poison-applied  "  (see  appita). 
Does  M  1.2  8 1   pita-nisita    belong    here   (=  visapita)  ?  — 
3.  (nt.)  drink  M  1.220  sq.  =A  v.347  sq.  ;  A  v.359  ;  Th  i, 
503;  Pv  ii.?!";  Nett  29,  80. 
Plta^  (adi.)  [Epic  Sk.  pita,  etym.  unclear]  yellow,  golden- 
coloured   Vin   1.2 1 7   (virecana);   D   1.76   (nila  p.   lohita 
odata)  ■  111.268  ("kasina)  ;  M  1.28 1  (pita-nisita,  belonging 
here   or   under   pita^  ?),    cp.    3S5    (below);    A   111.239; 
IV -63    305,  349;  V.61  ;  ]  VI. 185  (nila  p.  lohita  odata 
manjetthaica),    449    (''alankara,    "vasana    "uttara     cp. 
503)-   Dhs  203   ("kasina),   246,   247   (nila  p.   lohitaka, 
odata);    Vism    173   ("kasina).  —  pita  is  prominent   (in 
the  sense  of  golden)  in  the  description  of  Vimanas  or 
other  heavenly  abodes.     A  typical  example  is  Vv  47 
(Htavimana  v.i  &  2),  where  everything  is  characterised 
as  pita   viz   vattha,  dhaja,  alankara,  candana,  uppala, 
pasada',   asana,   bhojana,   chatta,   ratha,   assa,   bijani ; 
the  C.  expl-  of  pita  at  this  passage  is  "  suvanna     ;  cp. 
Vv    36I    (=parisuddha,    hemaraaya    VvA    166);    78 
(=suvannamava  C.  304). 

-anUra  a  yellow  dress  or  mantle  Vv  36  (  =  pitavarina 
uttariya.  C.  166).  -aruna  yellowish  red  Th  2,  479- 
-ivalepana  "  golden-daubed  "  M  1385. 

Pitaka  (adj.)  [fr.  pita]  yellow  Vin  !V^59  :  ^h  2.  261  .J 
n.274;  Pv  iii.i'  (=suvannavanna  PvA  170);  Dhs  617 
(nila  p.  lohitaka  odata  kalaka  maiijetthaka)  ; 
-pitaka  (f.)  saffron,  turmeric  M  1.36. 


;  ThA  211. 


Piti   (f  )   [cp.   Class.   Sk.   priti  &   Vedic  prita  pp.  of  p«, 
see    pineti   &   piya]     emotion     of   joy.    delight,     zest, 
exuberance.     On  term  see  Dhs.  Irsl.   11   and  Lpd.  243. 
Classed      under     sankharakkhandha,      not      vedana  . 
—  D  1.37,  75  ;  111.241,  265,  288  ;  M  1.37  ;  S  11.30  ;  iv.236  ; 
A  111.26,  285  sq.  ;  IV.411,  450;  v.i  sq..   135.  3ii   sq.. 
333  sq.  ;  Sn  257,  687,  695.  969.   II43   (  =  Bhagavantai) 
arabbha  p.  pamujjar)  modana  pamodana  citti-odagyai) 
etc.  Nd2  446)  ;  Nd>  3.  491  ;  Pug  68  ;  Dhs  9.  62,  86,  172 
584   999;  Nett  29;  Vism   145  {&  sukha  in  contrasted 
relation)    212,  287  (in  detail);  DA  1.53  (characterised 
bv  ananda)  ;  DhA  1.32  ;  Sdhp  247,  461.     On  relation  to 
ihana  see  the  latter.     In  series  piti  passaddhi  samadhi 
upekkha  under  sambojjhanga  (with  eleven  means  of 
cultivation:    see    Vism    132    &    VbhA    282). -Phrase 
pitiya  sarirag  pharati  "  to  pervade  or  thrill   the  body 
with  jov"  (aor.  phari),  at  J  1.33:  v.4g4  ;  DhA  ii.i  18  ; 
IV  ic      all  passages  refer  to  piti  as  the  fivefold  piti, 
paiicavanna  piti,  or  joy  of  the  5  grades  (see  Dhs.  trsl. 
II,    12,   and  Cpd.   56),   viz.   khuddika   (slight  sense  of 
interest),  khanika  (momentary  joy),  okkantika  (oscillat- 
ing interest,    flood   of   joy),  ubbega  (ecstasy,  thrilling 
emotion),    and    pharana   piti    (interest   amounting   to 
rapture,  suffusing  joy).     Thus  given  at  DhsA   115  & 
Vism  143,  referred  to  at  DhsA  166.  —  piti   as  niramisa 
(pure)  and  samisa  (material)  at  M  111.85  ;  S  iv.235. 

-gamaniya  pleasant  or  enjoyable  to  walk  M  1.117- 
-paraoija  joy  and  gladness  A  111.181.  307  (°pamujja) ; 
Dh  374;  DhA  IV.  110  ;  KhA  82.  -pharanata  state  of  being 
pervaded  with  joy,  joyous  rapture,  ecstasy  D  111.277; 
Ps  I  48  ■  Vbh  334 ;  Nett  89.  -bhakkha  feeding  on 
iov  (Ep.'of  theAbhassaraDevas)D  1.17;  ni.28,  84.  90; 
A  v6o-  Dh  200;  A  I.iio;  DhA  ni.258;  Sdhp  255. 
-mana  'joyfu'-hearted.  exhilarated,  glad  of  heart 
or  mind  M  1.37  ;  ni.86  ;  S  1.181  ;  A  111.21  ;  v.3  ;  Sn  766 ; 


PItika 


85 


Pucchatt 


Nd'  3  ;  J  III. 41 1  ;  \'bh  JJ7.  -rasa  taste  or  emotion  of 
joy  VvA  86.  -sambojjhanga  the  joy-constituent  of 
enlightenment  M  :n.86 ;  D  iii.ioG,  22b.  252,  282. 
Eleven  results  of  such  a  state  are  enum"'  at  DhsA  75, 
.viz.  the  6  anussatis,  upam*  anussati.  lukhapuggala- 
parivajjanata,  siniddha-pug. -sevanata,  pasadaniya - 
suttanta-paccavekkhanata,  tadadhimuttata  (cp.  Vism 
132  &  V'bhA  2S2).  -sahagata  followed  or  accompanied 
by  joy,  bringing  joy  Dhs  1578  (dhamma,  various  things 
or  states) ;  Vism  86  (saraadhi).  -sukha  zest  and  happi- 
ness, intrinsic  joy  (cp.  Cpd.  56,  243)  S  1.203  :  R  111.131, 
222  ;  Dhs  160  ;  Vism  158  ;  ThA  160.  According  to  DhsA 
166  "rapture and  h\iss,"  c-p.  Expositor  222.  -somanassa 
joy  and  satisfaction  J  v. 371  ;  Sn  512  ;  PvA  6,  27,  132. 

Pitika  (-°)  (adj.)  [fr.  piti]  belonging  to  joy;  only  as  sappi- 
tika  &  nippitika  bringing  joy  &  devoid  of  joy,  with  & 
without  exuberance  (of  sukha)  A  in.26;  iv.3no,  441. 

Pitin  (adj.)  [fr.  pita')  drinking,  only  at  Dh  79  in  cpd. 
dhanuna°  drinking  in  the  Truth,  expl*  as  dhamma- 
payako,  dhammar)  pivanto  at  DhA  11.126. 

Pina  (adj.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  pina  of  pi  to  swell  up  (with  fat)  ; 
to  which  also  Vedic  pivan  &  pivara  fat,  Gr.  iri/ieXi;  & 
Tr'iot:  fat,  Lat.  opimus  fat,  Ger.  feist  &  fett=E.  fat]  fat, 
swollen  Th  2,  265  (of  breasts). 

Pi}aka  [fr.  pid  ?]  a  (sort  of)  boil  Vism  35 ;  see  pilaka. 

PQana  (nt. )  [fr.  pi^,  cp.  plja]  oppression,  injury,  suffering 
(from  dukkha)  Vism  212=494;  also  in  nakkhatta° 
harm  to  a  constellation,  i.  e.  occultation  DhA  1.1O6  sq. 

Pfla  (f.)  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  pida  fr.  pi4]  i.  pain,  suffering 
J  1.42  I  ;  Miln  278  ;  Vism  42.  — 2.  oppression,  damage, 
injury  SnA  353;  DA  1.259. 

Pilikolika  (f.)  [reading  not  quite  sure,  cp.  kojika]  eye- 
secretion  Th  2,  395  ( =akkhiguthaka  ThA  259,  q.  v.  for 
fuller  cxpl°;  see  also  J.P.T.S.  1884,  68). 

Pi|ita  [pp.  of  pijeti]  crushed,  oppressed,  molested,  harassed 
Vm  IV.261  ;  Vism  415  (dubbhikkha") ;  DhA  iv.70  ; 
ThA  271.     Cp.  abhi°,  pa°. 

PHeti  [cp.  Vedic  pidayati,  pi4,  cp.  Gr.  jrifjiu  (*7ri(TK"jio  ?) 
to  press,  oppress  (lit.  sit  upon  ?)]  i.  to  press,  press 
down  Vin  11.225  (cojakai)).  —  2.  to  weigh  down  heavily 
J  1.25  (ppr.  piliyamana),  138.  —  3.  to  press,  clench 
Miln  41S  (mutthir)  pijayati)  ;  DhA  iv.69  (anguliya 
piliyamanaya).  —  4.  to  crush,  keep  under,  subjugate 
Miln  277  (janag).  —  5.  to  molest  VvA  348  (pijanto  ppr. 
for  pijcnto  ?).  —  pp.  pilita. 

Put)  as  a  term  for  Purgatory  (niraya) :  see  Bdhgh's  etym. 
of  puggala  Vism  310,  as  quoted  under  puggala. 

Pugs  [Vedic  pugs  (weak  base)  and  pumarjs  (strong  base), 
often  opp.  to  stri  (woman,  female)  ;  cp.  putra  &  potaka]. 
Of  the  simplex  no  forms  are  found  in  Pali  proper.  The 
■base  pug  occurs  in  pukusa  (?),  puggala  (?),  pungava, 
puUinga :  pugs  in  napugsaka  (cp.  Prk.  napugsaveya 
Pischcl.  Gram.  §  412).  The  role  of  pugs  as  contrast  to 
itthi  has  in  Pali  been  taken  over  by  purisa,  except  in 
itthi-puma  at  the  old  passage  D  ni.85.  The  strong 
base  is  in  P.  puman  (q.  v.).     See  also  posa'. 

Pukkasa  [non-Aryan  ;  cp.  Epic  Sk.  pukkusa,  pukkasa 
pulkasa.  The  "  Paulkasa  "  are  mentioned  as  a  mixed 
caste  at  Vajasaneya  Saghita  30,  i  7  (cp.  Zimmer,  Altind. 
Leben  2  i  7)]  N.  of  a  (Non-Aryan)  tribe,  hence  designation 
of  a  low  social  class,  the  members  of  which  are  said  (in 
the  Jatakas)  to  earn  their  living  by  means  of  refuse- 
clearing.  On  the  subject  see  Fick,  Sociale  Gliederung 
206,  207.  —  Found  in  foil,  enumerations:  khattiya 
brahmana  vessa  sudda  candala-pukkusa  A  1.162  = 
111.214;  J  '■■■>94  (expl''  by  C.  chava-chaddaka-candala 
ca  puppha-chaijdaka-pukkusa  ca)  ;   iv.303  ;   Pv  11. 6'* ; 


Miln  5.  Further  as  pukkusakula  as  the  last  one  of  the 
despised  clans  (candalakula,  nesada",  vena",  ratha- 
kara°,  p.")  at  M  in.  169;  S  1.94;  A  11.85;  Vin  iv.6 ; 
Pug  51.     With  nesada  at  PvA  176.  —  Cp.  M  111.169. 

Puggala  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  pudgala,  etym.  connected  with 
pugs,  although  the  fantastic  expl"  of  native  Commen- 
tators refers  it  to  pug  "  a  hell"  and  gal;  so  at  Vism 
310  :  "  pun  ti  vuccati  nirayo,  tasmig  galanti  ti  puggala  "] 

1 .  an  individual,  as  opposed  to  a  group  (sangha  or 
parisa),  person,  man ;  in  later  philosophical  (Abhi- 
dhamma)  literature  =  character,  soul  ( =  attan).  — 
D  1.176  ;  M  111.58  ;  S  1.93  sq.  ;  111.25  ;  A  1.8,  197  ;  11.126 
sq.  ;  Sn  544,  685  ;  Dh  344  ;  Ps  1.180  sq.  ;  11. 1  sq.,  52  ; 
Pv  11.325  (cp.  PvA  88);  11.9';  PvA  4(1,  132.  — pi.  pug- 
gala people  VvA  86  (=satta),  149.  —  para-puggala 
another    man    D    1. 213;    S    II. 121;    v.265  ;    Vism    409. 

— punsa-puggala  individual  man,  being,  person  S  11.206  ; 
iv.307  ;  A  1.173  =M  11.217.  Characterised  as  an  in- 
dividual in  var.  ways,  e.  g.  as  agga°  Sdhp  92,  558; 
abhabba"  J  1. 106  ;  ariya"  Vin  v.  1 1 7  ;  asura-parivara" 
A  11.91  ;  kodhagaru°  A  11.46  ;  gutha",  puppha"  madhu- 
bhaiji"  A  1.128  ;  dakkhineyya"  VvA  5  ;  ditthisampanna' 
A  1.26  sq.  ;  111.439  sq.  ;  iv.136  ;  nibbiriyakusita"  J  iv.131  ; 
pasanalekh'  upama^  etc.  A  1.283  '■  valahak'  upama 
A  11.102  sq.  ;  saddha,  asaddha  Ps  1.121  ;  11.33  '■  sivathik' 
upama  A  111.268  ;  suppameyya  etc.  A  1.266  sq.  [a]sevi- 
tabba  A  iv.365  ;  V.K12,  247,  281  ;  hina  majjhima  pa- 
nita  S  11.154.  —  Groups  of  characters:  (2)  A  1.76,  87;" 
(3)  gilan'  upama  etc.  A  1.121  sq.  ;  avutthika-sama 
padesa-vassin,  sabbatth'  abhivassin  It  64  sq.  ;  satthar, 
savaka,  sekha  It  78  ;  sekha  asekha  n'  eva-sekha-nasekha 
D  IU.218  :  (4)  D  111.232,  233  ;  S  1.93  ;  J  iv.131  ;  (5)  Nett 
191  ;  (6)  raga-carita,  dosa°,  moha°,  saddha",  buddha", 
vitakka"  Vism  102  ;  (7)  ubhato-bhaga-vimutta,  paiina- 
vimutta  etc.  D  in. 105  ;  (8)  A  111.212  ;  S  v. 343  (19)  Nett 
190;    (26)   Nett    189,    190.  —  See  also  patipuggala. — 

2.  (in  general)  being,  creature  Miln  310  (including  Petas 
&  animals). 

-fiu  knowing  individuals  D  111.252,  283.  -pafifiatti 
descriptions  of  persons,  classification  of  individuals 
D  111.105  (cp.  Dial,  ili.ioi);  also  N.  of  one  of  the 
canonical  books  of  the  Abhidhamma-pitaka.  -vemat- 
tata  difference  between  individuals  S  11.2 1  ;  v.2(./u  ; 
Sn  p.  1112  (=''nanatta  SnA  436). 

Puggalika  (adj.)  [fr.  puggala]  belonging  to  a  single  person, 
individual,  separate  Vin  1.250;  11.270.  The  BSk. 
paudgalika  at  Div)'  342  is  used  in  a  sense  similar  to  the 
Vin  passages.  Divy  Index  gives,  not  quite  correctly. 
"  selfish." 

Pnnkha  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  punkha.  etym.  pug  (base  of  pugs)-l- 
kha  (of  khan),  thus  "  man-digging  ".']  the  feathered  part 
of  an  arrow  J  u.89.     Cp.  ponkha. 

Pungava  [pug-l-gava  (see  go),  cp.  Class.  Sk.  pungava  in 
both  meanings]  a  bull,  lit  "male-cow."  A  1. 162  ;  11.75 
sq.  ;  Sn  690;  J  111.81.  in;  \.222.  242,  259,  433;  SnA 
523.  As  -°  in  meaning  "  best,  chief  "  Vism  78  (muni°)  ; 
ThA  69  (Ap  v.5)  (nara"). 

Pucimanda  [fr.  picuraanda]  the  Nimba  tree.  Azadirachta 
Indica  J  111.34:  iv.205  ;  vi.269  ("thanl,  of  a  woman  = 
nimba-phala-santhana-thana-yuggala  C). 

Pucca^dt^ta  (f.)  [puti-(-an<Ja-(- ta,  via  •putyandata]  state 
of  a  rotten  egg  M  1357. 

Pnccha  (nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  puccha  (belonging  with  punar  to 
Lat.  puppis)  &  P.  piccha]  a  tail  DhsA  365  (dog's  tail). 
See  puricikata. 

j  Pucchaka  (adj.)  [fr.  pfch]  asking,  questioning  DhsA  2,  3 
(panha"). 

Pucchati  [pfcch.  cp.  Vedic  pfCchati  =  Lat.  posco,  postulo, 
with  which  connected  also  Lat.  prccor  =  Goth.  fraihnan  ; 


Pucchana 


86 


Punna 


Ohg.  f  ragon  ;  Vedic  prasna  =  P.  panha]  i .  tu  ask.  to 
question  S  1.207,  214  ;  Vin  11.207  ;  Sn  995  ;  Nd'  341  etc. 
—  Pres.  1''  sg.  pucchami  Sn  83.  241,  682,  1043,  1049; 
Nd^  447;  Pv  11. i'^.  —  i"  pi.  pucchama  Sn  1052; 
Imper.  puccha  Sn  460  ;  DA  1.155  ;  pucchatha  D  11. 154  ; 
pucchassu  Sn  189,  993;  Pot.  puccheyyami  D  1.51; 
puccheyya  A  1.199;  PvA  6;  ppr.  pucchanto  Sn 
1 126;  aor.  i"  sg.  apucchissarj  Sn  11 16,  pucchisai) 
Vv  30",  apucchir)  VvA  127;  2°*  sg.  apucchasi 
Sn  1050  ;  3"^  sg.  apucchi  Sn  1037,  apucchasi 
Nd'  447;  pucchi  Sn  981,  1031  ;  PvA  6,  39,  68;  i'"'  pi. 
apucchatha  Sn  1017;  3"^  pi.  pucchigsu  J  1.221  ;  puc- 
chisui]  Mhvs  10,  2.  Fut  pucchissami  J  vi.364.  Inf. 
pucchitug  Vin  1.93;  Sn  510;  putthug  Sn  1096,  mo; 
pucchitaye  J  v.  137.  Grd.  pucchavho  Sn  1030;  Pass. 
pucchiyati  DhA  i.iu. — Caus.  II.  pucchapeti  Mhvs  10, 
75-  —  PP-  puttha  &  pucchita  (q.  v.).  —  2.  to  invite  to 
(instr.),  to  offer,  to  present  to  somebody  (ace),  lit.  to 
ask  with  Vin  11.208,  210  (paniyena) ;  111.161  (odanena, 
siipena  etc.) ;  D  11.240.  —  See  also  anu°,  abhi°,  sam°. 

Pucchana  (nt.)  &  °a  (f.)  [fr.  pfch]  asking,  enquiring, 
questioning  Sn  504  (a)  ;  PvA  121,  223. 

Puccha  (f.)  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  prccha  =  Ohg.  forsca  question]  a 
question  Sn  1023  ;  SnA  46.  200,  230.  A  system  of 
questions  ("questionnaire")  is  given  in  the  Niddesa 
(and  Commentaries),  consisting  of  :2  groups  of  three 
questions  each.  In  full  at  Nd'  339,  340  =Nd''  under 
puccha  (p.  208).  The  first  group  comprises  the  three 
adittha-jotana  puccha,  dittha-samsandana  p.,  viniati- 
cchedana  p.  These  three  with  addition  of  anumati  p. 
and  kathetu-kamyata  p.  also  at  DA  i.08=DhsA  55. 
The  complete  list  is  referred  to  at  SnA  159.  — apuccha 
(adj.)  that  which  is  not  a  question,  i.  e.  that  which  should 
not  be  asked  Miln  316.  — puccha- vissajjana  question 
and  answer  PvA  2.  —  At  Nett  18  p.  occurs  as  quasi 
synonym  of  iccha  and  patthana. 

Pucchita  [pp.  of  pucchati]  asked  Sn  76,  126,  383,  988, 
1005;  Ndi  211  ;  KhA  125  ("katha) ;  PvA  2,  13,  51. — 
Cp.  puftha. 

Pucchitar  [n.  ag.  to  pucchita]  one  who  asks,  a  questioner 
M  1.472  ;  S  III. 6  sq.  ;  Sn  p.  140. 

Pujja  (adj.)  [grd.  of  puj,  cp.  Sk.  piijya]  to  be  honoured 
M  III. 38  sq..  77  sq.  ;  A  111.78  (v.  1.);  Nett  52.  56 
(  =  puianiya  C).  Compar.  pujjatara  M  1.13;  &  see 
puja. 

Puncikata  is  wrong  reading  at  Dhs  1059  in  tanha  para- 
phrase (pattern  1  Nd-  tanha)  for  mucchancikata.  The 
readings  of  id.  p.  are  puncikata  Dhs  1136,  1230;  Vbh 
351.  361  (v.  1.  pucchanji°)  ;  mucchafici"  at  Nd*  8  (v.  1. 
BB  mucchanji",  SS  suvanci")  ;  Nd^  p.  152  (v.  1.  BB 
pucchifici",  SS  pupaiici")  ;  pucchafijikata  VbhA  477. 
The  translation  of  Dhs  gives  "  agitation  "  as  meaning. 
The  C.  (DhsA  365)  reads  puiicikata  (vv.  11.  puiicag 
vikata  ;  pucancikaka  ;  pucchakata)  and  connects  it  with 
pucchag  caleti  (wagging  of  a  dog's  tail,  hence  "  agita- 
tion ")  ;  Expositor  11.470  gives  "  fluster."  The  C.  on 
Vbh  (VbhA  477)  expl^  as  "  labhan'  aiabhanaka-tthane 
vedhana  kampana  nicavuttata,"  thus  "  agitation." 

Pufichati  [cp.  Sk.  *pronchati,  but  BSk.  poficchate  (v.  1. 
pufichati  &  pocchate)  Divy  491  ;  upanahan  mulac  ca 
p.]  to  wipe  off,  clean  Vin  11.208  (upahana),  2 10  ;  A 
IV. 376  (rajoharanag  sucig  p.,  asucig  p.  etc.)  ;  J  1.392 
(akkhini)  ;  Vism  63  (gabbha-malag),  4i5  =  KhA  120  = 
J  1.47  (assuni  hatthehi  p.)  ;  KhA  136  (pagsukag).  The 
reading  punjati  occurs  at  J  1. 318  (akkhini);  V.182; 
VI. 514,  also  as  v.  1.  at  A  iv.376  (v.  1.  also  muficati :  cp. 
puiicikata).  —  Caus.  II.  puiichapeti  Vism  63.  Cp. 
pari". 

Pnfichana  (adj.  nt.)  [fr.  pronch]  wiping  Vin  1.297  (mukha°- 
colaka)  ;  11.208  (upahana°-colaka),  210.     Cp.  puiichani. 


Punchani  (f. )  [see  punchana]  a  cloth  for  wiping,  a  towel 
Vin  11.122  ;  Th  1,  560  (pada°  napkin  for  the  feet).  See 
Vtn.  Texts  m.i  14. 

Punja  (usually  -°)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  punja]  a  heap,  pile,  mass, 
multitude  Vin  11.211  ;  J  1.14O  (sabba-roganag).  As  -° 
in  foil.  cpds.  :  atthi"  It  17  (-1- atthikandala)  ;  kattha" 
A  III. 408  ;  iv.72  ;  J  11. 327;  gutha°  J  11.211  ;  tina°  A 
1114(8;  palala°  D  1.71;  M  111. 3  ;  A  1.241;  11.210; 
magsa°  U  1.52  ;  valika"  J  vi.56.1  ;  sankhara"  S  1. 135. 

-kata  (&  ^kita)  for  puiijikata ;  cf.  Sk.  punjikrta. 
with  i  for  a  in  comp"  with  kr  &  bhn  heaped  up,  heaped 
together  Vin  11.208  (punjakita) ;  M  1.58,  89  (id.  but  id. 
p.  M  III. 92  punjakajata)  ;  A  111.324  (punjakata ;  v.  1. 
puiijakita  &  purijanika)  ;  J  11.408  (punjakata,  v.  1. 
pancalikata) ;  vi.iii  (id.,  v.  1.  pufica"). 

Punjaka  =punja  M  111.92  ("jatani  atthikani,  where  M  1.89 
at  id.  p.  reads  punjakitani) ;  Miln  342  (palala°). 

Punjati  is  a  variant  of  puflchati  (q.  v.). 

Punna   (nt.)   [cp.    (late)   Vedic  punya   favourable,   good ; 
etym.   not  clear,   it  may  be  dialectical.     The  word   is 
expl""  by  Dhammapala  as  "  santanag  punati  visodheti," 
i.   e.   cleaning  the  continuation   (of  life)  VvA    19,   thus 
taken  to  pu.     The  expl"   is   of   course  fanciful]   merit, 
meritorious     action,     virtue.     Always    represented     as 
foundation    and    condition    of    heavenly    rebirth   &   a 
future   blissful   state,    the   enjoyment    (&   duration)   of 
which  depends  on  the  amount  of  merit  accumulated  in 
a  former   existence.     With   ref.    to   this   life   there   are 
esp.   3  qualities  contributing  to  merit,  viz.,  dana,  sila 
&  bhavana  or  liberality,  good  conduct  &  contemplation. 
These     are     the     puiiiia-kiriya-vatthiini.    (see     below). 
Another  set  of  ten  consists  of  these  3  and  apaciti,  vey- 
yavacca,  patti-anuppadana,   abbhanumodana,    desana. 
savana.    ditth'    ujjuka-kamma.     The  opp.  of  punna  is 
either  apuiiria  (D  ill.  1 19  ;  S  1.1 14  ;  n. 82  ;Ai.  154  ;  111.412  ; 
Sdhp  54.  75)  or  papa  (Sn  320  ;  Dh  39  ;  Nett  96  ;  PvA  5). 
The  true  Arahant  is  above  both   (Pv  11.6").     See  on 
term    also    Kvu   trsl.    201.  —  (a)    Passages    {selected): 
D   111.58,    120;   M   1.404;   II. 191,    199;   S   1.72;   11.82; 
IV. 190  ;  IV. 190  ;  v.53  ;  A  1.151,  155  sq.  ;  ill. 412  ;  Sn  427 
sq..  547.  S^iQi  79*^'  •  Dh  18.   116  sq.,   196,  220,  267.  331, 
412  ;  Nd'  go;   Pv  i.' ;  1.5'*;  Pug  55;  Vism  541    (pun- 
nanag   paccayo  duvidha)  ;   DhA  iv.34  ;   PvA  6.   8.   30. 
69  sq.  ;   Sdhp  4,    19  sq.  —  (b)    Var.  phrases  &■  charac- 
terisations :   Merit   is   represented    as  great    (u|ara    DA 
1.110;    PvA    5;    anappaka    Pv    1.5'°)    or   little    (paritta 
DA  1. 110;  appa  S  11.229);  as  adj.  (-°)  maha°  S  1.191. 
Opp.    appa°   M   11.5.     punna   is   defined   at   Nd'   go    as 
follows :     "  pufinag     vuccati     yag     kinci     tedhatukag 
kusal'    abhisankharag  ;   apunnag   vuccati  sabbag   aku- 
salag."     It   is   defined   as   "  dana-sTl'-adi-pabheda "   & 
"  sucaritag  kusala-kammag  "  at  VvA   19  ;  considered 
as  leading  to  future  happiness:  Vv   1^;  PvA  58;  con- 
sisting mainly  in  dana  (danamayag  p.)  PvA  8,  51.  60, 
66.   73,   but  also  in  vandana  PvA   1.     To   do  good  = 
puiifiag  (punnani)  karoti  D  1.137;  S  iv.331  ;  A  v.  177; 
Pv  i.ii»;  or  pasavati  S  1.182,  213;  A  1.89;  11. 3  sq.  ; 
ni.244  ;    V.249,    282;    PvA    121,    cp.    pufinag    pasutag 
Pv    1.5'^;    VvA    289.     Other    phrases:    °g    akankhati 
S  1.18,  20  ;  pavaddhati  S  1.33  ;  corehi  duharag  S  1.36  ; 
puiinanag    vipako    A    iv.89 ;    agamo  S  111.209   iv.349; 
opadhikag  S  1.233  i  It  7^  ;  puranag  &  navag  S  1.92  ; 
sayar)  katani  puiiiiani  S  1.37  ;  puiiiiassa  dhara  S  i.ioo  ; 
V.400. 

-atthika  desirous  of  merit  Sn  487  sq.  -inubhava  the 
majesty  of  merit  PvA  58.  -&bhisankhara  accumula- 
tion of  merit  D  111.217;  ^  11.82  ;  Nd'  90,  206,  442; 
Vism  557  sq.,  571  ;  VbhA  142  sq.,  166,  184.  -dbhisanda 
(-(- kusal4bhisanda)  meritorious  results  A  11.54  sq.  ; 
111.51.  337;  IV. 245.  -assaya  seat  of  merit  DA  1.67. 
-iddhi  the  magic  power  of  m.  PvA  117.  -kata  one  who 
has  done  a  deed  of  m.  A  11.32.     -kamma  good  works. 


Punnavant 


87 


Punna 


righteousness,  merit  S  1.97,  143;  DA  i.io  ;  VvA  32; 
PvA  54,  87;  Sdhp  3J.  -kama  (adj.)  desirous  of  doing 
good  works  S  v. 462.  -kiriya  a  good  or  meritorious 
action  S  1.87  (°kriya),  loi  ;  PvA  54;  usually.as  °kiriya- 
vallhu  item  of  m.  action  (of  which  3  are  usually  enum''  : 
see  above)  D  111.218;  A  iv.241  ;  It  51  ;  Nett  50,  128. 
-kkhandha  mass  of  merit  (only  as  maha°)  S  v.4f  o  ; 
A  111.337.  -kkhaya  decay  (or  waning  of  the  eSecf)  of 
merit  D  1.18  (cp.  aj'ukkhaya  &  DA  i.iio).  -kkhetta 
field  of  m.,  Ep.  of  the  Sangha  or  any  holy  personalities, 
doing  good  (lit.  planting  seeds  of  merit)  to  whom  is  a 
source  of  future  compensation  to  the  benefactor. 
Usually  with  adj.  anuttara  unsurpassed  field  of  m.  (see 
also  sangha)  D  in. 5.  227  ;  M  1.446  ;  iii.8<j  ;  S  1.167,  220  ; 
V.343.  363.  382  :  A  1.244  ;  "-St  sq.,  56,  113  ;  111.158.  248. 
279  sq.,  387;  IV. 10  sq.,  292  ;  It  8S  ;  Sn  486;  Vv  50^1 
(cp.  VvA  216);  Pv  iv.i'5  (of  a  bhikkhu) ;  Vism  220; 
VvA  286:  PvA  I  (ariyasangha),  5  (Moggallana),  6 
(arahanto),  132.  140,  214  and  passim.  Cp.  BSk. 
punyaksetra  Divy  63,  395  (4-udara).  -patipada  the 
meritorious  path,  path  of  m.  A  1.1O8  ;  Nett  96.  -pasa- 
vana  creation  of  m.  PvA  31.  -pekkha  looking  for 
merit  (i.  e.  reward),  intent  upon  m.  S  1.167  ;  Sn  463  sq., 
487  sq.  ;  Dh  108  (cp.  DhA  11.234).  -phala  the  fruit  (or 
resuH)  of  m.  action  S  1.217  ;  Pug  51  ;  DhA  11. 4  ;  PvA  8, 
50,  52.  -bala  the  power  of  m.  PvA  195.  -bhaga  taking 
part  in  meritorious  action  S  1. 154.  -bhagiya  having 
share  in  m.  M  in. 72  sq.  ;  Nett  48.  -maya  =  purina 
J  IV.232  ("iddhi) ;  cp.  BSk.  punyamaya  Av^  1.183. 

Punnavant  (adj.)  [fr.  punna]  possessing  merit,  meritorious, 
virtuous  Ps  11.213  ;  \'ism  382  ;  DhA  1.340  ;  PvA  75. 

Puta  [ctym.  unknown,  prob.  dialectical,  as  shown  by  N. 
of  Pataliputta,  where  putta  =  puta  since  unfamiliar  in 
origin]  orig.  meaning  "  tube."  container,  hollow, 
pocket.  —  I .  a  container,  usually  made  of  leaves  (cp. 
J  IV.436  ;  V.441  ;  VI. 236),  to  carry  fruit  or  other  viands, 
a  pocket,  basket :  ucchu"  basket  for  sugar  J  iv.363  ; 
panna"  leaf-basket  PvA  168  ;  phala°  fruit  basket 
J  IV.436  =  VI. 236  ;  phanita(ssa)''  basket  of  molasses, 
sugar-basket  S  1.175  (A'S.  :  jar)  ;  J  iv.366  ;  DhA  iv.232  ; 
mala"  basket  for  garlands  or  flowers  DhA  111.212 
(baddha  made,  lit.  bound).  In  puta-baddha-kummasa 
VvA  308  perhaps  meaning  "cup."  —  2.  a  bag  or 
sack,  usually  referring  to  food  carried  for  a  journey,  thus 
"knapsack"  (or  directly  "provisions,"  taking  the 
container  for  what  it  contains  DA  1.288  puts  putagsa  = 
patheyya),  in  bhatta"  bag  with  provisions  J  11. 82  (with 
bandhati),  203  ;  111.200  ;  DA  1.270.  Also  at  J  iv.375 
"bag"  (tamba-kipillaka").  See  below  °ar)sa  ^ 
"bhatta,  —  3.  a  tube,  hollow,  in  nasa°  (nasa°)  nostril 
J  VI.74 ;  Vism  195,  263.  362;  KhA  65;  hattha°  the 
hollow  of  the  hand  Miln  87  ;  vatthi°  bladder(-bag) 
Vism  264  :  sippi  puta  oyster  shell  J  v.  197,  206.  putai) 
karoti  to  form  a  hollow  Vbh.\  34.  —  4.  box,  container, 
see  "bheda  &  ^bhedana,  in  patali-puta  seed  box  for  the 
P.  flower. 

-aijsa  "bag-shoulder"  (for  "shoulder-bag,"  cp. 
agsaputa  (assaputa)  &  Ger.  rucksack  =  knapsack. 
Rightly  expl""  by  Bdhgh  at  DA  1.288),  a  bag  carrying 
provisions  on  journeys,  hence  "provision."  in  phrase 
putar]sena  with  provisions  (v.  1.  at  all  places  putosena) 
D  1. 117;  M  111.80;  A  II. 183:  cp.  Dialogues  1.150  ;  see 
also  mutoji.  -paka  something  cooked  in  a  bag  (like  a 
meal-pudding)  Vism  500.  -baddha  kind  of  moccasins 
Vin  1. 186,  see  Vin.  Texts  11. 15.  Spelt  puta-bandhn  at 
Vism  251  =VbhA  234.  -bhatta  "  bag-food["  viaticum, 
provisions  for  journey  J  11.423  ;  KhA  46.  -bheda  the 
breaking  of  the  container  (i.  e.  seed  boxes  of  the  Sirisn 
plant)  VvA  344  (in  vatthu  where  Sirisa  refers  to  Pata- 
liputta, cp.  Vv  84*2. 53).  -bhedana  breaking  of  the 
(seed-)  boxes  of  the  Patali  plant,  referring  primarily  to 
the  N.  of  Pataliputta,  where  putta  represents  a  secon- 
dary Palisation  of  Sk.  "putra  which  again  represents  P. 


(or  Non-Aryan)  puta  (see  Pischel.  Prh.  Gr.  §  238  & 
292).  Through  popular  etym.  a  wrong  conception  of 
the  expression  arose,  which  took  puta  in  the  sense  of 
"  wares,  provisions,  merchandise  "  (perhaps  influenced 
by  putarjsa)  and,  based  on  C.  on  Ud  88  (bhandakanarj 
mocana-tthanar)  vuttag  hoti)  gave  rise  to  the  (wrong) 
trsl"  Dial.  11.92  "  a  centre  for  interchange  of  all  kinds 
of  wares."  See  also  Miln  trsl'  1.2  ;  Buddh.  Sulfas  xvi. 
—  Vin  1.229  =  D  11.87  =-Ud  ****■  After  the  example  of 
Pataliputta  applied  to  the  city  of  Sagala  at  Miln  i 
(nana -puta- bhedanar)  S°  nagarai)).  Here  clearly 
meant  for  "  merchandise."  —  Rh.  D.  in  a  note  on  puta- 
bhedana  gives  expl"  "  a  town  at  the  confluence  or  bend  of 
a  river  "  (cp.  Jaina  Sutras  2,  451). 

Putaka  (nt.)  [fr.  puta]  a  bag.  pocket,  knapsack  or  basket 
J  11.83  ("bhatta  =  provisions) ;  DA  1.263;  DhA  11.82 
(v.  1.  pitaka  &  kutaka)  ;  iv.132  (pockets  of  a  serpent's 
hood).     Cp.  bhatta. 

PuUha'  [PP-  ol  puj  (see  poseti),  Vedic  pusta]  nourished, 
fed,  strengthened,  brought  up  Sn  831  ;  J  in. 467. 

Puttha^  [pp.  of  pucchati,  Vedic  prsta]  asked  S  11.36; 
Sn  84,  122,  510  sq..  1036  ;  DhA  iv.132  ;  PvA  10  (after  = 
ace.)  68,  72  with  samano  A  1.197.     See  also  pucchita. 

Put^ha''  see  phuttha  [  =  Sk.  sprsta,  cp.  Pischel,  Prk.  Gr. 
§3"]- 

Puttbatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  puttha"']  the  fact  of  being  fed 
or  brought  up  by  J  11. 405  (vaddhakina  "a). 

PuUhavant  [fr.  puttha',  cp.  same  form  in  Prk.  AMg. 
putthavar)  —  Sk.  sprstavan  :  Pischel,  Prk.  Gr.  §  569]  one 
who  has  touched  or  come  in  direct  contact  with  ThA 

284. 

Pu94&l'l<i^  (nt.)  [Non-Aryan  (?).  Cp.  Vedic  pundarika] 
the  white  lotus  D  1.75^ A  in. 26  (in  sequence  uppala, 
paduma,  p.)  ;  D  11. 4  (Sikhi  pundarikassa  mule  abhisam- 
buddho)  ;  M  ni.93  ;  S  1.138,  204  =  ]  III. 309  ;  A  1.145 
(uppala  paduma  ^.) ;  11. 86  sq.  (samana"  adj.) ;  Sn  547  ; 
J  V.45,  215  ("ttac"  angi  =ratta-paduma-patta-vanna- 
sarira)  ;  Vv  44'-  ( -  seta-kamala  VvA  191);  Pv  11.12^; 
111.3^  (pokkharani  bahu  "a);  Pug  63;  DA  1.2 19,  284 
(sankho  elo  uppalo  pundariko  ti  cattaro  nidhayo).  N. 
of  a  hell  S  1.152  ;  Sn  p.  126  (here  in  sq.  Uppalaka.  Pund°, 
Paduma). 

Puv^srikini  (f)  [adj.  pundarikin,  of  pundarika]  a  pool  or 
ponil  of  white  lotuses  D  l.75ja;(M  in. 93  ;  S  1.138). 

Punna  [pp.  of  pr,  Vedic  prnati.  Pass,  puryate,  *pele  to 
fill ;  cp.  Sk.  prana  &  purna  =  Av.  parana  ;  Lith.  pilnas  ; 
Lat.  plenus;  Goth  fulls  =  E.  full  =  Ger  voU]  full, 
seldom  by  itself  (only  passage  so  far  pannarase  pun- 
naya  punnamaya  rattiya  D  1.47  =  Sn  p.  139).  nor  -' 
(only  Sn  835  muttakarisa').  usually  in  cpds..  and  there 
mostly  restricted  to  phrases  relating  to  the  full  moon, 
-ghata  a  full  pitcher  (for  feeding  the  bhikkhus,  as 
offering  on  festive  days,  cp.  J.P.T.S.  1884)  DhA  1.147  ; 
KhA  1 18  (v.  1.  suvannaghata)  ;  DA  1.140  ('patimandita 
ghara).  -canda  the  full  moon  J  1.149,  267;  v.215. 
-patta  a  full  bowl  (a.s  gift,  °t)  deti  to  give  an  ample  gift) 
J  ■"•.535-  -baddha  at  Miln  iqi  should  be  read  as 
"bhadda.  -bala  at  DA  1. 1  lu  read  punfia-bala.  -bhadda 
worshipper  oi  Punnabhadda.  perhaps  a  Vakkha  (father 
of  the  Yakkha  Harikesa)  Nd'  92  (Vasuvadeva.  Bala- 
deva.  P.  and  Manibhadda.  cp.  p.  89)  ;  Miln  191  (pisaca 
manibhadda  p.).  -ma  the  full  moon  (night)  D  1.47 
(komudiya  catumasiniya  punnaya  punnamaya  rattiya. 
cp.  DA  1. 140)  ;  Sn  p.  139  (similar)  ;  ^I  111.2  i  ;  J  v. 2  15  (dve 
p-mayo)  ;  Vism  292  (punna-m-uposatha  =  punna-ma- 
uposatha).  418  (Phagguna-punnama-divase)  ;  VvA  66 
(asajhi  p.);  PvA  137  (id);  DA  1.140;  DhA  in. 461 
(komudi).     -masa  ^"ma  only  in  loc.  puiinamase  Vv  81' 


Punnata 


88 


Puthujjana 


( =punna-masiyar)  sukka-pakkhe  pannarasiyai)  VvA 
314;  the  similar  pass,  at  VvA  321  reads,  prob.  by 
mistake,  sukka-pakkha-patiyar)  :  see  pati) ;  J  v.215 
(=punna  candaya  rattiya  C).  -masi  (f.  ;  fr.  -masa)  = 
ma  J  1.86  (Pliagguni  p.);  VvA  314;  cp.  BSk.  purna- 
masi  Av^  1.182. 

Pimnata  (f)  [abstr.  to  punna]  fulness  DA  1.140  (masa° 
full-moon). 

Poijmatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  ro  punna]  fulness  SnA  502. 

Pntoli  see  mutoli. 

Putta  [Vedic  putra,  Idg.  *putlo  =  Lat.  puUus  (*putslos) 
young  of  an  animal,  fr.  pou,  cp.  Gr.  ttoO*,-,  jraif  child, 
Lat.  puer,  pubes,  Av.  pufra,  Lith.  putytis  (young 
animal  or  bird),  Cymr.  wyr  grandchild  ;  also  Sk.  pota(ka) 
young  animal  and  base  pu-  in  pumarjs,  pur)s  "  man  "] 
I.  a  son  S  1. 210;  Sn  35,  38,  60,  557,  858;  Dh  62,  84, 
228,  345  ;  J  IV. 309  ;  Vism  645  (simile  of  3  sons)  ;  PvA 
-5.  63.  73  sq.  ;  DA  1. 157  (dasaka").  Four  kinds  of  sons 
are  distinguished  in  the  old  Cy.  viz.  atraja  p.,  khettaja, 
dinnaka,  antevasika,  or  born  of  oneself,  born  on  one'.s 
land,  given  to  one,  i.  e.  adopted,  one  living  with  one 
as  a  pupil.  Thus  at  Nd'  247  ;  Nd^  448  ;  J  1.135.  Good 
and  bad  sons  in  regard  to  lineage  are  represented  at 
J  VI. 380.  —  Metaph.  "  sons  of  the  Buddha  "  S  1.192  = 
Th  I,  1237  (sabbe  Bhagavato  putta);  It  loi  (me 
tumhe  putta  orasa  mukhato  jata  dhammaja),  J  111.211. 
—  The  parable  of  a  woman  eating  her  sons  is  given  as  a 
punishment  in  the  Peta  condition  at  Pv  1.6  (&  7).  — 
pi.  puttani  Pv  1.6^.  —  aputta-bhavai)  karoti  to  disin- 
herit formally  J  v. 468.  —  2.  (in  general)  child,  descen- 
dant, sometimes  pleonastic  like  E.  "man,  °son  in  narnes  : 
see  putta-dara  ;  so  esp.  in  later  literature,  like  ludda" 
hunter's  son=hunter  J  11. 154:  ayya°=ayya,  i.  e. 
gentleman,  loid  J  v. 94  ;  PvA  66.  See  also  raja°.  —  Of 
a  girl  Th  2.  464.  —  matuccha'  &  matula"  cousin  (from 
mother's  side),  pituccha"  id  (fr.  father's  side).  On 
putta  in  N.  PataU"  see  puta.  —  f.  putti  see  raja". 

-jiva  N.  of  a  tree:  Putranjiva  Roxburghii  J  vi.53. '. 
-dara  child  &  wife  (i.  e.  wife  &  children,  family)  D  ni.Ofa, 
i8g,  192  ;  S  1.92  ;  A  11.67  '•  P^'  1^.3''*  (sa"  together  with 
his  family) ;  J  in.467  (kig  °ena  what  shall  I  do  with  a 
family  ?)  ;  v.478.  They  are  hindrances  to  the  develop- 
ment of  spiritual  life:  see  Nd''.  under  asirjsanti  &  pali- 
bodha.  -phala  a  son  as  fruit  (of  the  womb)  J  v. 330. 
-mai}sa  the  flesh  of  one's  children  (sons)  a  metaphor 
probably  distorted  fr.  puta"  rotten  flesh.  The  metaphor 
is  often  alluded  to  in  the  kasina-kammatthana,  and 
usually  coupled  with  the  akkha-bbhafijana  (&  vana- 
paticchadana)-simile,  e.  g.  Vism  32,  45  ;  DhA  1.375  ; 
SnA  58,  342.  Besides  at  S  11.98  "(in  full);  Th  i,  445 
("upama) ;  2.  22  i .  -mata  a  woman  whose  sons  (children) 
are  dead  M  1.324. 

Puttaka  [fr.  putta]  I.  a  little  son  S  1.209,  2  10.  —  2.  a  little 
child  Til  2,  462  (of  a  girl).  —  3.  a  voung  bird  (^potaka) 
Jn.134. 

Puttatta  (nt.)  [fr.  putta]  sonship  DhA  1.89. 

Puttavant  (adj.)  [fr.  putta]  having  sons  S  iv.249.  Trenck- 
ner,  \oles  02"  gives  a  f.  *puttapati  for  puttavati,  but 
without  ref. 

Puttimant  (adj.)  [fr.  '•puttamant]  having  sons  S  1.6  ;  Sn  33. 

Puttiya  (--)  in  Sakya"  is  compound  Sakyaputta+iya 
"  belonging  to  the  son  of  the  Sakyas  "  (i.  e.  to  the 
Sakya  prince)  PvA  43.  —  asakyaputtiya  dhamma 
Yin  11.297. 

Puthavi  &  Puthuvi  (f.)  [doublets  of  pathavi]  the  earth; 
as  puthavi  at  S  1.186  ;  J  1.14  (v.  1.  puthuvi)  ;  iv.233,  A 
in  cpds.  ^nabhi  the  navel  of  the  earth  (of  the  bodhi- 
maijda,    the    Buddha's   seat   under   the   hoI>'   fig    tree) 


J  IV.232  ;  "mandala  the  round  of  the  earth  Sn  990. 
—  As  puthuvi  at  A  11.21,  and  in  cpd.  puthuvi-agga 
SnA  353. 

Puthu  (adj.)  [both  Vedic  prthak  &  prthu,  lit.  spread  out, 
far  &  wide,  flat,  of  Idg.  *plet  broad,  Sk.  prath  to  expand, 
prthah  palm  of  hand  Av.  frajiah  breadth,  cp.  Gr. 
TrXnn'ii,'  broad,  TrXuravoc  plane  tree,  Lith.  platiis  broad, 
Lat.  planta  sole  of  foot,  Ohg.  flado  pancake,  Ags.  flet 
ground,  E.  flat]  i.  (=prthak)  separated,  individual, 
adv.  separated,  individual,  adv.  separately,  each  (also 
given  as  puthag  eva  Kacc.  29)  S  1.75  (puthu  atta  in- 
dividual self);  Th  i,  86;  J  iv.346  (=visur)  visug  C); 
Miln  4.  See  further  under  cpds.  —  2.  (  =  prthu). 
The  forms  (pi.)  are  both  puther  &  puthu.  both  as  adj. 
&  n. ;  puthu  more  freq.  found  in  metre.  —  numerous, 
various,  several,  more,  many,  most  D  1. 185  (puthu 
saniiagga  ;  opp.  ekai)) ;  S  i.iS^  (puthu),  207  (id.);  Sn 
769  (puthu  kame  =  bahu  Nd'  11);  1043,  1044  (puthii  = 
bahuka  Nd^  449'');  Th  2,  344  (puthu  =  puthu  satta 
ThA  241) ;  J  VI. 205  (puthu).  nt.  adv.  puthu  &  puthur) 
greatly,  much,  in  many  ways  Sn  5S0  (  =  aneka-ppakarag 
SnA  460);  Vv  62'"  (=mahantar|  VvA  258). 

-gumba  experienced  in  many  crafts  J  vi.448 
(  =aneka-sippa-nfiu  C).  -jja  (puthu  i,  but  see  remarks 
on  puthujjana)  common,  ordinary  Sn  897,  911  (=pH- 
thujjanehi  janita  Nd'  308).  -titthakara  a  common 
sectarian  D  1.116  (thus  to  puthu  i,  but  DA  1.287  = 
bahii  t.)  -ddisa  (puthu  i)  each  separate  quarter  "all 
the  diverse  quarters"  S  1.234.  -pafifia  (adj.)  of  wide 
wisdom  (p.  2)  A  1. 130;  11.67  (v-  1-  hasa").  -pantiata 
wide  wisdom  A  1.45.  -paniya  ordinary  (p.  i)  mode  of 
shampooing  with  the  hand  Vin  Ii.ic6  (Bdhgh  on  p.  316 
cxpl"*  pudhu-panikan  ti  hattha  parikamniar)  vuccati 
"  manual  performance,"  thus  not  identical  with  panika 
on  p.  151).  -bhuta  (p.  2)  widely  spread  S  11.107  ;  but 
cp.  BSk  prthag  bhavati  to  be  peculiar  to  Divy  58,  icc. 
-mati  wide  understanding  S  1.236.  -loma  "  flat  fin," 
N,  of  a  fish  "  the  finny  carp  "  (Mrs.  Rh.  D.)  Vv  44" 
(=dibba-maccha  Vv.\  191);  Th  2,  508  (  =  so-called 
fish  ThA  292) ;  J  iv.466.  -vacana  "  speaking  in  many 
(bad)  ways,"  or  "  people  of  various  speech  "  (so  expH 
Nd'  397)  Sn  932  (prob.  better  "  speaking  ordinary 
talk"=puthu  i).  -satta  (pi.)  =puthujjana,  common 
people,  the  masses  S  1.44  ;  Pv  111.7'. 

Puthaka  [fr.  puthu,  cp.  (late)  Vedic  prthuka  "  flat  corn," 
also  "  young  of  an  animal,"  with  which  cp.  perhaps  Gr. 
Trnp9froQ  :  see  W'alde,  Lat.  ]\'tb.  under  virgo]  rice  in  the 
car  Dli.\  1.98  ("agga  as  first  gift  of  the  field). 

Pnthujjana  [*prthag-jana,  thus  puthu  i  +  jana,  but  from 
the  point  of  Pali  identical  in  form  and  meaning  with 
puthu  2,  as  shown  by  use  of  puthu  in  similar  cpds.  and 
by  C.  expl"".  One  may  even  say  that  puthu  i  —  prthak 
is  not  felt  at  all  in  the  P.  word.  Trenckner  {Xotes  76) 
already  hinted  at  this  by  saying  "  puthujjana,  partly 
confounded  with  puthu "  ;  a  connection  which  also 
underlies  its  expl"  as  "  one-of-the-many-folk  "  at  A'lii 
trsi"  811'  &  291^.  It  is  felt  to  belong  to  puthu  2  in  the 
same  sense  as  Ger.  "die  breite  Masse,"  or  Gr.  oi  ttoXXoi. 
The  expl"  at  Nd'  308  =  328  is  puthu-nana-jana.  A  long 
and  detailed  etvm. -speculation  expl"  of  the  term  is  found 
at  DA  1.59,  trsld  at  Dhs  Irsl"  258.  The  BSk.  form  is 
prthagjana  Divy  133  etc.]  an  ordinary,  average  person 
(4  cla  .ses  of  ordinan,' people  are  discussed  at  Cf  rf.  49,  5(.), 
a  common  worldling,  a  man  of  the  people,  an  ordinary 
man  Mm,  7,  135,  239,  323  ;  111.64,227;  Si. 148  ;  11.94  sq. 
(assutava),  151  (id.);  111.46,  108,  162;  iv.157,  '9*'.  201 
(assutava),  206  sq.  ;  v. 362  (opp.  to  sotapanna) ;  A  1.27, 
147  (marana-dhammin),  178.  267;  11.129,  163;  III-54 ; 
IV.68,  97,  157.  372  ;  Sn  351,  455,  706.  816,  859  ;  Dh  59. 
272;  Vv  82*  (  =  anariya  VvA  32 1 , -I- anavabodha) ; 
Nd'  146,  248;  Ps  1. 61  sq.,  143.  156;  11.27;  I^tis  1003 
(cp.  DhsA  248  sq.) ;  Vism  311  (  =  anariya);  VbhA  133 
(avijj'  abhikhuta,  bhava-tanh'  abhibhuta),  186  (ummat- 


Puthujjanata 


89 


Pupphaka 


taka,  opposed  to  upabrfihita-nana-purisa,  exemplifying 
upadana  and  kanima)  ;  DhA  1.5  (opp.  ariyasavaka),  445  ; 
Sdhp  363. 

-kalyanaka  (cp.  BSk.  prthagjana-kalyanaka  Divy 
419,  429)  an  ordinary  man  striving  after  his  spiritual 
good  Nd'  477:  Ps  1. 1 76;  II.  190,  193.  -bhikkhu  a  bh. 
of  the  common  sort  DA  1.269 ;  VbhA  383.  -sukha 
ordinary  happiness  M  1.454- 

Puthuijanata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  puthujjana]  common-place 
character  S  i.i87=Th  i,  12 17. 

Pnthajjanika  (adj.)  ffr.  puthujjana]  common,  ordinary 
J  1.360  (of  iddhi). 

Fathntta  (Patbattaj  (nt.)  [fr.  puthu,  cp.  Sk.  *prthutva  ; 
not  with  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.=Sk.  prthaktva,  speciality, 
peculiarity]  being  at  variance,  diversity  S  11.77  (opp. 
ekatta  ;  v.  1.  SS  puthatta).  At  A  iv.97  we  have  to 
read  puth'  attansr)  for  puthuttanar)  which  has  nothing 
to  do  with  puthutta,  but  is  puthu  +  attanai)  as  borne 
out  by  V.  1.  puthuji'  attanai),  and  by  AA :  puthu 
nanakaranehi  attanag  hanti. 

Pathala  (adj.)  [fr.  puthu]  broad,  large,  flat  J  111.16  (°sisa 
flat-headed) ;  vi.171  (°antarar)sa  flat-chested)  ;  Miln  121 
(of  a  river);  VvA  301  (°gambhira).  —  abl.  puthulato 
(as  adv.)  across  DhA  1.396. 

Pnthnso  (adv.)  [abl.  of  puthu]  broaaly,  i.  e.  diversely,  at 
variance  Sn  891,  892  (  =  puthu-ditthi-gata  Nd^  301). 

Pudava  (poddava  ?)  see  gama"  (Vin  11. 105  with  Bdhgh 
note  on  p.  315). 

Puna  (indecl.)  [cp.  Vedic  punar,  punah,  to  base  *pii 
(related  to  *apo :  see  apa),  as  in  puccha  tail,  Lat. 
puppis,  poop,  Gr,  TTv/iaTut;  the  last ;  orig.  meaning 
"  behind  "]  again.  There  are  several  forms  of  this 
adv.,  but  puna  has  to  be  considered  as  the  orig.  Pali 
form.  The  form  puno  is  doubtful ;  if  authentic,  a 
Sanskritisation  ;  only  found  at  ThA  71  (Ap.  v.  38  ;  v.  1. 
puna)  &  72  (Ap.  V.  41,  v.  1.  puna).  The  sandhi  r  is  pre- 
served only  in  metre  and  in  comp".  That  it  is  out  of 
fashion  even  in  metre  is  shown  by  a  form  puna  where 
a  is  the  regular  metrical  lengthening  instead  of  ar 
(J  III. 437  :  na  hi  dani  puna  atthi ;  v.  1.  puna).  Besides 
this  the  r  is  apparent  in  the  doubling  of  the  first  con- 
sonants of  cpds.  (punappunar),  punabbhava) ;  it  is 
quite  lost  in  the  enclitic  form  pana.  —  We  find  r  in 
punar  agami  Sn  339;  punar  agato  J  1.403  (=puna 
agato  I  1. 403  (=puna  agato,  ra-karo  sandhivasena 
vutto  C.) ;  in  cpds.  :  punar-abhiseka  see  J.P.T.S.  18S5, 
49  ;  a-punar-avattita  the  fact  of  not  turning  back 
Miln  276  (cp.  Prk.  apunar-avatti  Pischel,  §  343).  Other- 
wise r  stands  on  the  same  level  as  other  sandhi  (eu- 
phonic) consonants  (like  m.  &  d.,  see  below),  as  in 
puna-r-eva  Dh  338;  Pv  11.8' ;  11. 11*.  We  have  m  in 
puna-m-upagamui)  Sn  306 ;  puna  by  itself  is  rarely 
found,  it  is  usually  comW  with  other  emphatic  part, 
like  eva  and  api.  The  meaning  is  "  again,"  but  in 
enclitic  function  (puna  still  found  Sn  677,  876,  other- 
wise pana) ;  it  represents  "  however,  but,  now  "  (cp. 
same  relation  in  Ger.  abermals  :  abcr),  similar  to  the 
development  in  Prk.  puno  vi  &  punar  avi  "  again  "  : 
puna  "  now  "  (Pischel  Gr.  §  342).  —  puna  by  itself  at 
SnA  597  ;  PvA  3,  45  ;  Mhvs  14,  12.  doubled  as  punap- 
punag  S  1.174  ■'  Th  i,  531,  532  ;  Sn  728,  1051  ;  Dh  1 1  7, 
1 18,  325,  337  ;  J  V.208  ;  SnA  107  ;  PvA  45,  47  ;  punap- 
puna  at  DhA  11.75;  ^s  puna-d-eva  at  D  1.60,  142; 
Pv  11. 11^  (v.  1);  Vism  163;  DhA  11.76;  puna-m-eva 
Pv  ii.ii';  puna  pi  once  more  J  1.279;  PvA  67,  74; 
puna-p-pi  J  v.2()8.  The  phrase  puna  c'  aparai]  "  and 
again  something  else"  stands  on  the  same  level  as  the 
phrase  aparo  pi  (apare  pi),  with  which  one  may  com- 
pare the  parallel  expressions  puua-divase :  apara- 
divase,  all  of  which  show  the  close  relation  between  pi. 


puna,  apara,  but  we  ..ever  find  para  in  these  connec- 
tions. Trenckner's  (&  following  him  Oldenberg  in  Vin. 
and  Hardy  in  A  etc.)  way  of  writing  puna  ca  parag 
(e.  g.  Miln  201,  388,  418  etc.)  is  to  be  corrected  to  puna 
c'  aparag,  cp.  pundpara  Sn  1C04  ;  Cp  in. 6'. 

-agamana  coming  again,  return  S  1.22  (a°).  -avasa 
rebirth  S  1.200.  -divase  on  the  following  day  J  1.278; 
PvA  19,  38.  -nivattati  to  turn  back  again  S  1.177. 
-bbhava  renewed  existence,  new  birth  D  11.15  ;  S  1.133  ; 
It  62  ;  S  IV. 201  (ayati°) ;  Sn  162,  273,  502,  514,  733; 
Nd-  s.  v.  ;  Nett  28,  79  sq.  ;  PvA  63,  200  ;  cp.  ponobha- 
vika  ;  a°  no  more  rebirth  S  1.174,  208 ;  Nd-  64  ;  °4bhi- 
nibbatti  birth  in  a  new  existence  M  1.294;  S  11.65; 
A  1.223  ;  Vin  in. 3  ;  PvA  35.  -vacana  repetition  SnA 
487.     -vara  (loo.)  another  time  J  v.21. 

Punati  [cp.  Vedic  pavate,  punati,  pu  to  cleanse,  as  in  Lat. 
purus  clean,  purgo,  Ohg.  fowen  to  sift  also  Gr.  rvp 
(cp.  P.  pavaka)=Ohg.  fuir  =  E.  fire,  Armen.  hur,  lit. 
"cleansing,"  see  also  puiltia]  i.  to  clean,  cleanse 
VvA  19  (-1- visodheti,  in  def.  of  puiiiia).  —  2.  to  sift 
J  VI.  108  (angarar)  p.  =attano  sise  angare  p.  okirati  C.  ; 
so  read  with  v.  1.  for  phunati  T.)  ;  DA  1.268  (bhusar) 
pumanto  viya  like  sifting  the  chaff,  winnowing).  Cp. 
puneti. 

Poneti  [Cans.  fr.  puna  ?  or  =  punati  ?]  to  experience  (over 
&  over)  again  :  in  this  meaning  at  It  i  sq.  &  Nd'  202  = 
Nd*  337  (kilese  na  p.  na  paeceti  etc.) ;  perhaps  also  at 
Th  I,  533  (sattayugai)),  although  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  takes 
it=punati  and  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  translates  "  lifts  to  lustrous 
purity." 

Pannaga  [dial.  ?]  a  species  of  tree  J  1.9  (°puppha) ;  vi.530  ; 
KhA  50  (aggacchinna°-phala),  53  (id.). 

Puppha'  (nt.)  [Vedic  puspa  according  to  Grassraann  for 
*puska  fr.  pu?  (?)  see  poseti]  a  flower  Vin  11. 123; 
S  1.204  =  J  III. 308  ;  Sn  2,  5  ;  Dh  47  sq.  ;  377  ;  Vism  430  ; 
SnA  78  (paduma")  ;  VvA  73;  PvA  127;  Sdhp  550. 
—  pupphani  (pi.)  VbhA  255  (of  ^2  colours,  in  simile), 
292  sq.  (for  Cetiya-worship).  — adj.  °puppha  in  ghana° 
thick  with  flowers  DA  1.87.  —  Cp.  pokkharata. 

-4bhikinna  decked  with  flowers  Vv  64^';  Pv  11. 11*. 
-adhana  "  a  ledge  (on  a  Tope)  where  offerings  of  flowers 
are  laid  down  "  (Geiger.  Mhvs  p.  355  ;  cp.  Mhvs  Irsl. 
p.  202*)  Mhvs  30,  51,  56,  60  ;  33,  22  Reading  uncertain. 
-avela  flower-garland  VvA  125.  -asava  wine  made 
from  flowers,  flower-liquor  J  iv.117  ;  KhA  26.  -gandha 
odour  of  flowers  Dh  54  ;  Dhs  625.  -cumbataka  a  fl. 
cushion,  -chaddaka  a  remover  of  (dead)  flowers,  a 
rubbish-remover,  a  low  occupation,  including  cleaning 
of  privies  &  bins  etc.  Vin  iv.6 ;  Th  i,  620;  J  v. 449 
(=vacca-tthana-sodhaka  C.) ;  Miln  331  ;  Vism  194  (in 
simile).  Cp.  J.P.T.S.  1884,  89  and  Miln  Irsl.  11. 2 11. 
-cchatta  a  parasol  with  flowers  DhA  i.iio.  -dana 
offering  of  flowers  VbhA  336.  -dama  a  wreath  or 
garland  of  fls.  J  1397;  VvA  198.  -dhara  bearing 
flowers  Pv  11.12*  (so  read  forT.  °dada).  -panjara  a  cage 
(ornamented)  with  flowers  J  v. 365.  -pata  a  cloth 
(embroidered)  with  flowers  J  iv.283  ;  DhA  11.45. 
-palasa  a  fl.  heap  DhA  1.75.  -bhanin  "  speaking 
flowers,"  i.  e.  speaking  the  truth  Pug  29.  -mala  gar- 
land of  fls.  SnA  78.  -mufthi  a  handful  of  fl.  Vism  432  (in 
simile),  -rasa  (wine-)  juice  made  of  fls.,  flower-liquor 
Vin  1.246  ;  taste  of  fls.  Dhs  629.     -rasiaheapof  fls.  Dh53. 

Puppha'  (nt.)  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  puspa  "  les  fleurs  "  in  stri° 
the  menses  Am.  Ko^a  3,  4,  30,  233  and  Mark.  Pur.  51, 
42.  Similarly  phala  is  used  in  the  sense  of  "  menstrua- 
tion "  :  see  BR  s.  v.  phala  12]  blood  :  see  pupphaka  & 
pupphavati.     With  ref.  to  the  menses  at  J  v.331. 

Pupphaka  (nt.)  [fr.  puppha']  blood  J  111.541  (v.  1.  pubbaka ; 
C.  =  lohita);  Miln  216  (tiija^-roga,  a  disease,  Kern, 
"hay-fever").  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  trsl'-  the  J  passage 
with  "  vuil,  uitwerpsel." 


Pupphati 


90 


Pubba 


Pupphati  [pufp]  to  flower  J  1.76  (aor.  °ir)su) ;  PvA  185 
(  =phalati).  ^  pp.  pupphita. 

PapphavatI  (f.)  [fr.  puppha*.  but  cp.  Vedic  puspavat 
flowering]  a  menstruous  woman  Miln  126. 

Pupphita  [pp.  of  pupphati]  flowering,  in  blossom  S  1.131  = 
Th  2,  230  (su°);  Vv  35*;  J  1.18;  Miln  347;  ThA  69 
(Ap.  V.  12) ;  DhA  1.280  ;  11.250  (su°). 

Pupphin  (adj.)  [fr.  puppha^  cp.  Vedic  puspin]  bearing 
flowers;  in  nilapupphl  (f.)  N.  of  a  plant  ("with  blue 
flowers  ")  J  VI. 53. 

Pubba^  [Vedic  puya>*puva>*puvva>pubba  (Geiger, 
P.Gr.  §  46^);  cp.  puyati  to  smell  rotten,  Lat.  pus  =  E. 
pus,  Gr.  TTiiSw  to  rot.  jn'ov  matter ;  Vedic  puti  smelling 
foul;  Goth.  fuls=E.  foul]  pus,  matter,  corruption 
M  1.57;  III. 90  ;  S  1.150;  II. 157;  A  1.34;  J  II. 18;  Miln 
382  ;  PvA  80.  —  In  detail  discussed  (as  one  of  the  32 
akaras)  at  Vism  261 ,  360  ;  KhA  62  ;  VbhA  244.  —  Often 
in  comb"  pubba-lohita  matter  &  blood,  e.  g.  Sn  p.  125  ; 
Sn  671  ;  J  V.71  ;  DhA  1.319  ;  as  food  of  the  Petas  Pv 
l.6»;  1.9^  (lohita-pubba) ;  i.i  i^ ;  11, 2«,  pubba-vatti  a 
lump  of  matter  DhA  in.  1 1 7. 

Pubba^  (adj.)  [Vedic  purva.  to  Idg.  *per,  see  pari  &  cp. 
Goth.  fram=from;  Gr.  Trpnftoc  first,  Goth.  fruma  =  As. 
formo  first,  Av.  pourvo,  also  Sk.  purvya  =  Goth.  frauja 
=  Ohg.  fro  Lord,  frouwa  =  Ger.  frau.  See  also  Lat. 
prandium,  provincia]  previous,  former,  before.  The 
adj.  never  occurs  in  abs.  forms  by  itself  (for  which  see 
pubbaka),  it  is  found  either  as  -"  or  °-  or  in  cases  as 
adv.  The  phrase  pubbam  antam  anissita  Sn  849  is 
poetical  for  pubbantam.  —  i.  (-°)  having  been  before 
J  III. 200  ;  na  dittha°  not  seen  before  Nd'  445  ;  mata- 
bhuta"  formerly  (been)  his  mother  PvA  79  ;  vuttha° 
(gama)  formerly  inhabited  DhA  1.15;  as  adv.  bhuta- 
pubbar)  before  any  beings  (existed)  Vin  1.342  ;  DhA 
1.102  and  passim  (see  bhuta).  —  2.  (neg.)  apubba  (nt.) 
what  has  not  been  before,  something  new  VvA  117,  287. 
ace.  ixs  adv.  in  phrase  apubbat]  acarimar)  not  earlier, 
not  after,  i.  e.  simultaneously  M  in. 65  ;  Pug  13  (  =  apure 
apaccha,  ekappaharen'  evati  attho  PugA  186). — 
3.  (cases  adverbially)  instr.  pubbena  in  °apara  gradual 
M  in. 79;  ace.  pubbai)  see  i,  2,  with  abl.  as  prep.  = 
before  SnA  549  (=pura);  loc.  pubbe  in  earher  times 
(also  referring  to  previous  births,  cp.  pure),  in  the  past, 
before  S  iv.307  ;  Sn  831,  949  (with  paccha  &  majjhe, 
i.  e.  future  &  present);  Pv  1.3I ;  11. 2* ;  SnA  290,  385, 
453  ;  PvA  4,  10,  39,  40,  100.  With  abl.  as  prep.  = 
before  S  11.104.  In  comp"  with  °nivasa  see  sep.  An 
old  ace.  f.  *purvir)  (cp.  Prk.  puvvir)  Pischel,  Gr.  §  103) 
we  find  in  Cpd.  anupubbikatha  (q.  v.).  The  compar. 
pubbatara  ("quite  early")  occurs  abs.  at  S  iv.  117 
as  nom.  pi.  "ancestors"  (cp.  Gr.  01  jrporfpm),  as 
loc.  adv.  at  S  1.22. 

-angin  in  f.  °angi  (caru°)  at  J  v.4  &  vi.481  read 
sabbangin.  -anna  "  first  grain,"  a  name  given  to  the 
7  kinds  of  grain,  as  distinguished  from  aparamia,  the 
7  sorts  of  vegetables,  with  which  it  is  usually  com- 
bined ;  Vin  III. 151  ;  iv.267  ;  Nd'  248  (where  the  7  are 
enum");  Nd^  314;  J  11. 185;  Miln  106;  DA  1.78,  270; 
DhA  IV. 8 1  etc.  (see  aparanna).  See  also  bija-bija. 
-anha  the  former  part  of  the  day,  forenoon,  morning  (as 
contrasted  with  majjhanha  &  sayanha)  D  1.109,  22O  ; 
A  1.294;  '"-344;  S  1.76  (°samayar))  ;  SnA  139  (id.)  ; 
DhA  111.98;  PvA  61,  216.  The  speUing  pubbanha 
M  1.528  (cp.  Trenckner,  Notes  80).  -anta  (i)  the  East 
J  1.98  ("ato  aparantar)  aparantato  pubbantai)  gacchati 
from  E.  to  W.  from  W.  to  E.) ;  v.471.  —  (2)  the  Past 
(opp.  aparanta  the  Future)  D  1.12  sq.  ;  S  11.26  ;  Nd'  212  ; 
Dhs  1004.  pubbam  antag  for  pubbantai)  is  poetical 
at  Sn  849.  -"dnuditthi  theory  concerning  the  past  or 
the  beginning  of  things  D  1.13  (cp.  DA  1.103)  ;  M  11.2^3  ; 
S  111.45  ;  Dhs  1320.     -a!ha(ka)  (alhaka)  at  Th  2,  395  is 


doubtful.  T.  reads  bubbujaka,  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  translates 
"  bubble  of  film  "  ;  ThA  259  expl°"  by  "  thita-jala- 
pubbalha-sadisa."  -acariya  (i)  an  ancient  teacher,  a 
scholar  of  previous  times  A  1.132  ;  11.70  ;  It  iio  ;  Vism 
523=  VbhA  130;  KhA  11,  64,  65.  —  (2)  a  former 
teacher  SnA  318.  -acinna  (-vasena)  by  way  of  former 
practice,  from  habit  SnA  413.  -4para  (i)  what  pre- 
cedes and  what  follows,  what  comes  first  and  what  last 
(with  ref.  to  the  successive  order  of  syllables  and  words 
in  the  text  of  the  Scriptures)  A  111.201  (°kusala)  ; 
Dh  352  ;  Nett  3  (°anusandhi)  ;  cp.  BSk.  purvaparena 
vyakhyanar)  karoti  "  expl"*  in  due  order"  Av§  11.20. 
—  (2)  "rattarj  "as  in  the  former,  so  in  the  foil,  night," 
i.  e.  without  ceasing,  continuous  Th  i,  413.  cp.  pub- 
baratt-aparattai)  DhA  iv.129.  -dpariya  former  & 
future,  first  &  last  Ud  61  (°vivesa)  ;  -abhoga  previous 
rsflection  ThA  30.  -arama  "  Eastern  Park,"  N.  of  a 
locality  east  of  Savatthi  A  111.344;  Sn  p.  139  (cp.  Sn 
A  502).  -asava  former  intoxication  Sn  913,  cp.  Nd' 
331.  -u^hana  getting  up  before  (someone  else)  either 
applied  to  a  servant  getting  up  before  the  master,  or 
to  a  wife  rising  before  her  husband  VvA  71,  136.  -ut- 
thayin  "  getting  up  earlier  "  (with  complementary  Ep. 
paccha-nipatin  "  lying  down  later  "),  see  above  D  1.60  ; 
III. 191  ;  A  111.37;  IV. 265  sq.  ;  DA  1.168.  ■ — abstr.  °««Ad- 
yita  J  111.406  ("adihi  pancahi  kalyana  dhammehi 
samannagata  patidevata)  =  v.88 ;  KhA  173.  -uttara 
(i)  preceding  and  following  Kacc.  44,  47.  —  (2)  "  east- 
northern,"  i.  e.  north-eastern  J  v. 38  (°kanna  N.E. 
corner);  vi.519  (id.),  -kamma  a  former  deed,  a  deed 
done  in  a  former  existence  Cp.  in.  11^.  -karin  "doing 
before,"  i.  e.  looking  after,  obliging,  doing  a  favour 
A  1.87;  Pug  26  (=pathamar)  eva  karaka  PugA  204); 
PvA  114.  -kicca  preliminary  function  Vin  v.  12  7 
(cattaro  pubbakicca) ;  cp.  Cpd.  53.  -kotthaka  "  Eastern 
Barn,"  Npl.  A  111.345.  -(n)gama  (i)  going  before, 
preceding  A  in. 108  (okkamane  p.);  M  in. 71  sq. — 
(2)  "  allowing  to  go  before  "  ;  controlled  or  directed  by, 
giving  precedence  Dh  2  (mano°  dhamma  =  tena  pafha- 
nja-gamina  hutva  samannagata  DhA  135);  Nd-  318; 
Pug  15  (panfia°  ariyamagga=paniiar)  pure-carikai) 
katva  PugA  194) ;  Sdhp  547  (paiiiia°).  Cp.  BSk. 
piirvangama  Divy  333  ("  obedient  "  Index),  -carita 
former  life  SnA  382,  385.  -ja  born  earlier,  i.  e.  pre- 
ceding in  age  PvA  57  (=jetthaka).  -iiati  former 
relative  PvA  24.  -deva  a  former  god,  a  god  of  old,  pi. 
the  ancient  gods  (viz.  the  Asuras)  S  1.224.  -devata  an 
ancient  deity  A  11.70;  It  no  (v.  1.  °deva).  -nimitta 
"  previous  sign,"  a  foregoing  sign,  prognostic,  portent, 
forecast  It  76  (the  5  signs  of  decay  of  a  god)  ;  J  i.n 
(the  32  signs  at  the  conception  of  a  Buddha,  given  in 
detail  on  p.  51),  48;  Miln  298  (of  prophetic  dreams, 
cp.  Cpd.  p.  48)  ;  VbhA  407  (in  dreams) ;  DhA  11.85. 
-pada  the  former,  or  antecedent,  part  (of  a  phrase) 
DhsA  164.  -parikamma  a  former  action  SnA  284 
(opp.  to  paccha-parikamma).  -purisa  ancestor  D 
■■93.  94-  -peta  a  deceased  spirit,  a  ghost  (=peta) 
D  1.8  ('katha,  cp.  DA  1.90  &  Dial.  1.14).  pubbe  pete  is 
poetical  at  Pv  1.4*  for  pubbapete.  Cp.  BSk.  purva- 
preta  Av6  1.149  (see  Index  p.  230);  Divy  47,  97. 
-bhaga  "  former  part,"  i.  e.  previous  PvA  133  (°cetana 
opp.  apara-bhaga-cetana.  SS  omit  bhaga).  -bhasin 
speaking  obligingly  (cp.  pubbakarin)  D  1. 116  (trsl. 
"  not  backward  in  conversation  "),  DA  1.287  (bhasanto 
va  pathamatarag  bhasati  etc.).  -yoga  "  former  con- 
nection," i.  e.  connection  with  a  former  body  or  deed, 
former  action  (and  its  result)  J  v.4 76  ;  vi.480  ;  Miln  2 
(pubbayogo  ti  tesar)  pubba-kammai)).  Kern,  Toev. 
s.  v.  remarks  that  it  is  frequent  in  BSk.  as  purvayoga 
(yoga  =  yuga;  syn.  with  purvakalpa),  e.  g.  Saddh.  Pund. 
ch.  vii.  ;  MVastu  11.287;  ni.175;  and  refers  to  Ind. 
Studien  16,  298;  J.R.A.S.  1875,  5.  -rattiparattar)  the 
past  and  future  time,  the  whole  time,  always  A 
III. 70  ;  DhA  IV.  129.  -vasana  an  impression  re- 
maining in    the   mind    from   former  actions  Sn  1009 ; 


Pubbaka 


91 


Purindada 


ThA  31  (Ap.  V.  8).  -videha  Eastern  Videha  KhA  123, 
176;  SnA  443.  -sadisa  an  old  (former)  friend  DhA 
I-57- 

Pabbaka  (adj.)  [fr.  pubba*]  I.  former,  ancient,  living  in 
former  times  D  1.104  (isayo),  238  (id.);  Sn  284  (id.); 
S  II. 105;  IV.307  (acariya-pacariya) ;  Th  i,  947. — 
2.  (-°  ;  cp.  pubba*  i)  having  formerly  been,  previous 
J  1. 182  (suvannakara°  bhikkhu),  cp.  BSk.  "purvaka  in 
same  use  at  AvS  1259,  296,  322.  —  3.  (-°)  accom- 
panied or  preceded  by  ThA  74  (gun'  abhitthavana" 
udana) ;  PvA  122  (punnanumodana"  maggacikkhana) ; 
cp.  aSvasana-purvaka  Jtm  210. 

Pabbapeti  [Denom.  fr.  pubba^]  occurs  only  in  one  phrase 
(gattani  pubbapayamano)  at  M  1.161  &  A  111.345  as  402 
in  meaning  "  drying  again  "  ;  at  both  A  pass,  the  vv.  11. 
(glosses)  are  "  sukkhapayamano  "  and  "  pubba-sadi- 
sani  kurumano  "  ;  to  the  M.  pass.  cp.  Trenckner's  notes 
on  p.  543,  with  the  BB  expl"  of  the  word  (=pubba- 
bhavai)  gamayamano),  also  Neumann,  Majjh-  trs!" 
1.260.  The  similar  passage  at  S  1.8,  10  has  "  gattani 
sukkhapayamano"  as  T.  reading  and  "pubbapaya- 
mano "  as  V.  1.  BB. 

Pabbe  (°-)  [loc.  of  pubba-,  see  pubba-  3]  in  cpds.  ;  "  in  a 
former  existence":  °kata  (nt.)  deeds  done  in  a  past 
life  M  II. 2  1 7  =  A  1. 1  73  (°hetu) ;  J  v. 228  ("vadin  fatalist)  ; 
Nett  29  ("punnata).  "nivasa  [cp.  BSk.  purve-nivasa- 
sarjprayuktar)  MVastu  111.224.  otherwise  as  purva- 
nivasa  Divy  619]  abode  in  a  former  life,  one's  former 
state  of  existence  D  11. i,  2  ;  111.31  sq.,  50  sq.,  108  sq  , 
230,  281  ;  M  1.278  ;  II. 2  I  ;  111.12  ;  S  1.167 ;  A  1.164  sq.  ; 
It  100  ;  Sn  647  ;  Dh  423  ;  Pug  61  ;  Vism  41 1  (remem- 
bered by  6  classes  of  individuals) ;  ThA  74,  197.  — - 
pubbe-nivas'  dnussati  (-iiana)  (knowledge  of)  remem- 
brance of  one's  former  state  of  existence,  one  of  the 
faculties  of  an  Arahant  (cp.  A  1.164  sq.,  and  Cpd.  64) 
D  III. no,  220;  M  1.35,  182,  248,  278.  496;  Dhs  1367; 
Nett  28,  103;  Vism  433;  VbhA  373  sq.,  401,  422; 
Tikp.  32 1 .  —  See  also  under  nivasa  and  cp.  Vism 
ch.  XIII,  pp.  410  sq. 

Pamati  [onomat.  *pn  to  blow,  cp.  Gr.  <pv<ra  blowing, 
bubble,  (pvaaio  blow,  Lat.  pustula  =  pustule,  Sk.  *pup- 
phusa  =  P.  papphasa  lung,  phutkaroti  blow,  etc.,  see 
Uhlenbeck  Ai.  IVtb.  s.  v.  pupphusa]  to  blow,  aor.  pumi 
J  1.171  ;  ger.  pumitva  J  1.172.  See  J.P.T.S.  1889, 
207  (?). 

Puman  (Puma)  [see  pugs]  a  male,  a  man.  nom  sg.  pumo 
D  11.273;  Cp.  II. 6^*;  instr.  pumuna  J  vi.550.  nom.  pi. 
puma  D  111.85  (itthi-puma  men  &  women  ;  v.  1.  K. 
"purisa)  ;  J  111.459  ;  ace.  sg.  pumar)  J  v. 154  (gata,  cp. 
purisantara-gata).  —  On  decl.  cp.  Miiller,  P.Gr.  p.  79  ; 
Greiger,  P.Gr.  §  93'. 

*Pata  [on  etym.  see  pura,  purana,  pure]  base  of  adv.  & 
prep,  denoting  "before";  abl.  purato  (adv.  &  prep.) 
in  front  of  (with  gen),  before  (only  local)  Yin  1.179; 
n.32  ;  D  II. 14  (matu)  ;  S  1.137;  Pv  i.n',  11'  (opp. 
paccha)  ;  11.8'  (janadhipassa) ;  DA  1. 152;  PvA  5  (puri- 
sassa),  22,  39  (tassa).  Often  repeated  (distributively) 
purato  purato  each  time  in  front,  or  in  front  of  each,  or 
continuously  in  front  Vin  11.213;  Vism  18;  cp.  pac- 
chato  pacchato.  —  Otherwise  *pura  occurs  only  in  foil, 
der.  :  (i)  adverbial :  *purah  in  purakkharoti.  purek- 
khara,  purohita ;  pura,  pure,  puratthar).  puratthato. — 
(2)  adiectival :  puraija,  puratthima,  purima. 

Para  (nt.)  [Vedic  pur.  f.,  later  Sk.  purai)  nt.  &  puri  f.] 
I.  a  town,  fortress,  city  Vin  1.8  =  M  1.17T  (Kasinar) 
purag)  ;  J  1. 196,  2  15  ;  Sn  976,  991,  1012  (°uttaraa),ii)i3  ; 
J  VI. 276  (=nagara  C)  ;  Mhvs  14.  29.  — avapure  below 
thefortressMl.68.  — devapura  city  of  the  Gods  Siv. 202  ; 
Vv  64*  ( =  Sudassana-maha-nagara  VvA  285).  See 
also  purindada.  —  2.  dwelling,  house  or  (divided)  part 


of -a  house  (=antepura).  a  meaning  restricted  to  the 
Jatakas,  e.  g.  v. 65  ( =  nivesana  C.) ;  vi.25i,  492  (=ante- 
pura).  Cp.  thipura  lady's  room,  harem,  also  "  lady  " 
J  v. 296,  and  antepura.  —  3.  the  body  [cp.  Sk.  pura 
body  as  given  by  Halayudha  2,  355,  see  Aufrecht 
p.  273]  Th  I,  273,  1150  (so  read  for  pura,  cp.  Kern, 
Toev.  s.  V.  &  under  sarlradeha).  —  Cp.  porin. 

Purakkhata  [pp.  of  purakkharoti]  honoured,  esteemed, 
preferred  D  1.50;  M  1.85;  S  1.192,  200;  Sn  199,  421, 
1015;  Nd'  154;  Dh  343  (=parivarita  DhA  iv.49) ; 
J  11.48  Cparivarita) ;  Pv  111. 7'  ( =  payirupasita  PvA 
205);  DA  1. 1 52  (  =  purato  nisinna) ;  ThA  170.  Cp. 
purakkhata. 

Purakkharoti  [fr.  purah,  cp.  Ved.  puras-karoti,  see  pure] 
to  put  in  front,  to  revere,  follow,  honour  ;  only  in  foil, 
sporadic  forms :  ppr.  purakkharana  holding  before 
oneself,  i.  e.  looking  at  S  111.9  sq.  ;  aor.  3"'  pi.  purak- 
kharut)  Miln  22;  ger.  purakkhatva  M  1.28;  Sn  969; 
Nd'  491  ;  J  V.45  ( =  purato  katva  C.) ;  PvA  21,  141.  — 
purakkhata  pp.  (q.  v.).     See  also  purekkhara. 

Piiratthao  (adv.)  [for  Vedic  purastat,  fr.  purah.  see 
*pura]  I.  before  S  1.141  (na  paccha  na  puratthar)  =no 
after,  no  before).  — -2.  east  D  1.50  ("abhimukha  looking 
eastward.) 

Puratthato  (adv.)  [fr.  puratthar),  cp.  BSk.  purastatalj 
MVastu  11.198]  in  front,  coram  Sn  416  (sic,  v.  1.  BB 
purakkhato)  ;  J  vi.242. 

Puratthima  (adj.)  [fr.  *pura,  cp.  Prk.  (AMg.)  puratthima. 
ace.  to  Pischel,  Gr.  §  602  a  der.  fr.  purastat  (=P. 
puratthar))  as  *purastima,  like  *pratyastima  {=pac- 
catthima)  fr.  '*pratyastari]  eastern  D  1. 153;  S  1.144; 
J  1.71  (°abhimukha :  Gotama  facing  E.  under  the  Bo 
tree). 

Pura  (indecl.)  [Vedic  pura  ;  to  Idg.  *per,  cp.  Goth.  faur  = 
Ags.  for  =  E.  (be)  fore;  also  Lat.  prae  =  Gr.  7rnp«r=Sk. 
pare]  prep.  c.  abl.  "  before  "  (only  temporal)  Vin  iv.17 
(puraruna  =  pura  aruna  before  dawn);  Sn  849  (pura 
bheda  before  dissolution  (of  the  body),  after  which  the 
Suttanta  is  named  Purabhedasutta,  cp.  Nd'  2  10  sq.  ; 
expH  by  sarira-bheda  pubbai)  at  SnA  549). 

Purava  (adj.)  [Venic  purana.  fr.  'per,  cp.  Sk.  parut  in 
former  years,  Gr.  irt'pi'm  =Lith.  pernai,  Goth,  fairneis, 
Ohg.  firni=Ger.  firn  (last  year's  snow),  forn  formerly, 
ferro  far]  i.  ancient,  past  Sn  312,  944  (  =Nd' 428  atitat), 
opp.  nava  =  paccuppannai))  ;  Dh  156  (=pubbe  katani 
C.)  ;  with  ref.  to  former  births  or  previous  existences: 
p.  kammar)  S  11.64  =Ndi  437  =  ^^2  68<j  Q.  2  ;  puniiai) 
S  1.92. — -2.  old  (of  age),  worn  out,  used  (opp.  nava 
recent)  D  1.224  (bandhanag,  opp.  navag);  Vin  11. 123 
(udakai)  p.°r)  stale  water);  S  11.106  (magga)  ;  Sn  I 
(tacar)) ;  J  11. 1 14  (f.  purani,  of  an  old  bow  string,  applied 
jokingly  to  a  former  wife)  ;  iv.201  ("panna  old  leaf,  opp. 
nava) ;  v. 202  (a°  not  old,  of  years)  ;  vi.45  (apuranag 
adv.  recently) ;  VbhA  363  (udaka  stale  water).  — 
3.  former,  late,  old  in  cpds.  as  °dutiyika  the  former 
wife  (of  a  bhikkhu)  Vin  1. 18,  96  ;  iv.263  ;  S  1.200  ;  L'd  5  ; 
J  1.2  [11  ;  "rajorodha  former  lady  of  the  harem  Vin  iv.261  ; 
"salohita  former  blood -relation  Sn  p.  91  ;  Ud  7  ;  DhA 
II. 2  10.     Cp.  porana. 

Puratana  (adj.)  [fr.  pura,  cp.  sanatana  in  formation] 
belonging  to  the  past,  former,  old  Nett  A  194. 

Porindada  [distorted  fr.  Vedic  purarj-dara,  pura-fdf  to 
break,  see  dari,  thus  "breaker  of  fortresses,"  Ep.  of 
Indra  (&  Agni).  The  P.  Commentator  (VvA  171)  of 
course  takes  it  popularly  as  "  pure  danag  dadati  ti 
Purindado  ti  vuccati,"  thus  pure-(-da;  see  also 
Trenckner,  Notes  59'  :  Geiger.  P.Gr.  §  44']  "  town- 
breaker,"  a  name  of  Sakka  (Indra)  D  11.260  ;  S  1.230  ; 
Vv  37*,  62';  PvA  247. 


Purima 


92 


Pure 


Purima  (adj.)  [compar.-superl.  formation  fr.  *pura,  cp. 
Sk.  purima]  preceding,  former,  earlier,  before  (opp. 
pacchima)  D  1.179  ;  Sn  773,  791,  10 11  ;  Nd'  91  ;  J  i.iio  ; 
SnA  149  (°dhura) ;  PvA  i,  26.  In  sequence  p.  maj- 
jhima  pacchima  ;  past,  present,  future  (or  first,  second, 
last)  D  1.239  sq.  ;  DA  1.45  sq.  and  passim.  —  purimatara 
=  purima  J  1.345  ("divase  the  day  before). 

-attabhava  a  former  existence  VvA  78  ;_PvA  83,  103, 
119.     -jati  a  previous  birth  PvA  45,  62,  79,  90. 

Porimaka  (adj.)  [fr.  purima]  previous,  first  Vin  n.167 
(opp.  pacchimaka).     f.  "ika  Vin  1.153. 

Porisa  [according  to  Geiger,  Gr.  §  30^  the  base  is  *pursa, 
from  which  the  Vedic  form  purusa,  and  the  Prk.-P.  form 
purisa.  The  further  contraction  *pussa  *possa  yielded 
posa  (q.  v.).  From  the  Prk.  form  pulisa  (Magadhi)  we 
get  puUa]  man  (as  representative  of  the  male  sex,  con- 
trasted to  itthi  woman,  e.  g.  at  A  111.209;  iv.i97; 
J  1.90;  V.72  ;  PvA  51).  Definitions  of  the  C.  are 
"  puriso  nama  manussa-puriso  na  yakkho  na  peto 
etc."  (i.  e.  man  kut'  i£.iix>l'']  Vin  iv.269  (the  same  expl" 
for  purisa-puggala  at  Vin  iv.214)  ;  "  setth'  atthena  puri 
seti  ti  puriso  ti  satto  vuccati"  VvA  42.  —  i.  man 
D  1. 61  (p.  kassaka  "  free  man  ") ;  11. 13  ;  S  1.225  i  A  1.28, 
126;  H.115;  III. 156;  Sn  102,  :i2,  316,  740,  806  and 
passim;  Dh  117,  152,  248;  Nd^  124:  PvA  3,  4,  165, 
187;  VvA  13  (majjhima°,  pathama",  as  t.t.  g.  ?). 
uttama"  S  11.278;  111.61,  166;  iv.380  ;  It  97;  maha" 
S  V.I 58  ;  A  11.35  ;  111.223  :  iv.229  (see  also  under  maha) ; 
sappurisa  (q.  v.).  Var.  epithets  of  the  Buddha  e.  g. 
at  S.  1.28  sq.  —  Kapurisa  a  contemptible  man  ;  kimpurisa 
a  wild  man  of  the  woods  ("  whatever  man  ").  f.  kim- 
puhsi  J  v. 2 15.  — purisa  as  "  a  man,  some  one,  some- 
body "  as  character  or  hero  in  var.  similes,  e.  g.  angara- 
kasuyai)  khipanaka"  Vism  489  ;  asucimhi  patita  Vism 
465  ;  agantuka"  VbhA  23  ;  dubbala  Vism  533  ;  papate 
patanto  VbhA  23  (cannot  be  a  help  to  others;  simi- 
larly with  patita  at  VbhA  i70=Vism  559);  bhikkhu- 
sanghar)  disva  Vism  m  ;  raandapa-lagga  Vism  339  sq.  ; 
lakuntaka-pada  &  dighapada  VbhA  26  ;  cp.  the  foil.  : 
of  a  man  pleasing  the  king  VbhA  442  sq.  ;  a  man  wishing 
to  perform  a  long  journey  in  one  day  Vism  244  ;  a  man 
breathing  when  exhausted  Vism  274.  Frequently  else- 
where.—  2.  an  attendant,  servant,  waiter  Vin  11.297; 
D  1.60  (dasa-l-),  72  (id.);  J  1.385  (dasa°) ;  vi.462.  Cp. 
porisa.  posa. 

-atthika  one  who  seeks  a  servant  Vin  11.297.  -anta  = 
purisadhama  Sn  664  (anta  =  Sk.  antya ;  Sn  A  479 
expl""-  by  antimapurisa).  -antaragata  touched  by  a 
man  (lit.  gone  in  by  .  .  .),  a  woman  who  has  sexual 
intercourse,  a  woman  in  intercourse  with  a  man  D  1.166 
(cp.  Dial.  1.228)  ;  M  1.77  ;  A  1.295  ;  11.206 ;  Vin  iv.322  ; 
Pug  55  (  =h6  does  not  accept  food,  lest  their  intercourse 
should  be  broken  :  rati  antarayo  hoti  PugA  231)  ;  DA 
1.79  (=itthi,  as  opp.  to  kumarika).  Cp.  pumar)  gata, 
J  V.I 54.  -allu  (&  alu)  N.  of  certain  monstrous  beings, 
living  in  the  wilderness  J  v.416  ( =;valava-mukha- 
yakkhini,  a  y.  with  the  face  of  a  mare),  418;  vi.537 
(°alu=valava-m.-pekkhi  C).  -ajaniia  "a  noble  steed 
of  a  man,"  a  thorough-bred  or  remarkable  man  S  111.91  ; 
A  V.325  sq.,  Sn  544  ;  Dh  193  ;  as  -djdneyya  at  DhA  1.310  ; 
•  Sjdniya  at  A  1.290;  11. 115;  iv.397  sq.  ;  v. 324.  -ada 
a  bad  man  ("  man-eater ")  a  wild  man,  cannibal 
J  v.z^  (cp.  purusada  Jtm  31*^) ;  "ddaka  J  v. 30.  -adhama 
a  wicked  man  Dh  78  ;  J  v.268.  -indriya  male  faculty, 
masculinity  S  v. 204  ;  A  iv.57 ;  Dhs  634,  715,  839,  972  ; 
Vism  447,  492.  -uttama  "  the  highest  of  men,"  an 
excellent  man  A  v.ifa,  325  sq.  ;  Sn  544;  Dh  78;  DhA 
II. 188.  -usabha  (purisusabha)  "a  bull  of  a  man,"  a 
very  strong  man  Vin  111.39.  -katha  talk  about  men 
O  1.8.  -kara  manliness  D  1.53  (cp.  DA  I.i6i) ;  Miln  96. 
-thama  manly  strength  D  1.53;  S  11.28;  A  11. 118; 
IV. 190.  -dammasarathi  guide  of  men  who  have  to  be 
restrained,  Ep.  of  the  Buddha  [cp.  BSk.  purusa-damya- 
sarathi  Divy  54  and  passim]  S  ii.Og  ;  A  1.168,  207; 


11.56,  1 12,  147  ;  Sn  p.  103  (=vicitrehi  vinayan'  upayehi 
purisadamme  sareti  ti  SnA  443) ;  It  79  ;  Pug  57  ;  Vism 
207  ;  ThA  178.  -dosa  (pi.)  faults  or  defects  in  a  man  ; 
eight  are  discussed  in  detail  at  A  iv.  190  sq.  ;  Ps  1.130  ; 
eighteen  at  J  VI. 542,  548.  -dhorayha  a  human  beast 
of  burden  S  1.29.  -parakkama  manly  energy  D  1.53  ; 
S  11.28.  -puggala  a  man,  a  human  character  D  111.5, 
227  (eight);  S  1.220  (8);  11.69,  82,  206;  iv.272  sq.  = 
It  88  (8)  (expl-i  at  Vism  219);  A  1.32,  130,  173,  189; 
11.34,  56;  III-36.  349;  1V.407  (8);  V.139,  183  (8),  330 
(8);  Vin  iv.212  sq.  (=male);  VbhA  497;  -bhava  state 
of  being  a  man,  manhood,  virility  J  in. 124;  Dhs  634, 
415.  839;  PvA  63.  -bhumi  man's  stage,  as  "eight 
stages  of  a  prophet's  existence  "  (Dial.  1.72)  at  D  1.54, 
in  detail  at  DA  1.162,  163.  -medha  man-sacrifice, 
human  sacrifice  S  1.76  ;  A  11.42  ;  iv.151  ;  It  21  ;  Sn  303. 
-yugani  (pi.)  (4)  pairs  of  men  S  iv.272  sq.  ;  A  1.208; 
11.34,  56  '•  "'^^  ;  IV. 407  ;  V.330  ;  D  111.5,  227  ;  It  88  ;  in 
verse  Vv  44^^  ;  expl'^  Vism  219  (see  under  yuga).  -lak- 
khana  (lucky)  marks  on  a  man  D  1.9.  -linga  (see  also 
puUinga)  a  man's  characteristic,  membrum  virile  Vin 
III. 35  ;  Dhs  634,  715,  839  ;  Tikp  50  ;  Vism  184.  -viriya 
manly  vigour  S  11.28.  -vyanjana  the  membrum  virile 
(=°linga)  Vin  11.269. 

Porisaka  (n.-adj.)  [fr.  purisa]  i.  a  (little)  man,  only  in 
°tina  doll  effigy  made  of  grass  (straw),  scarecrow  Miln 
352;  Vism  462;  DhsA  111.  —  2.  (adj.)  having  a  man, 
f.  °ika  in  eka°  (a  woman)  having  intercourse  with  only 
one  man  J  i.29(j. 

Poiisatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  purisa]  manhood,  virility  Dhs 
634.  715.  839- 

Puiisattana  (nt.)  [  =  purisatta,  cp.  Trenckner,  Notes  70''] 
manhood  Miln  171. 

Pure  (indecl.)  [is  the  genuine  representative  (with  Ma- 
gadhi e)  of  Vedic  purah,  which  also  appears  as  *puro 
in  purohita,  as  *pura  in  purakkharoti.  It  belongs  to 
base  Idg.  *per  (cp.  pari),  as  in  Cr.  Trnpoj  before,  earlier, 
vpiuiSv^  "  preceding  in  life,"  i.  e.  older  ;  Ohg.  first]  before 
(both  local  &  temporal),  thus  either  "  before,  in  front  " 
or  "  before,  formerly,  earlier."  In  both  meanings  the 
opp.  is  paccha — (a)  local  S  1.176  (pure  hoti  to  lead); 
J  n.153  (opp.  pacchima)  —  (b)  temporal  S  1.200; 
Sn  289,  311,  541,  645,  773  (  =  atitai)  Nd'  33;  opp. 
paccha)  ;  Dh  348  (opp.  pacchato) ;  J  1.50  (with  abl.  pure 
punnamaya).  Often  meaning  "  in  a  former  life," 
e.  g.  Vv  34^,  34'^;  Pv  1.2'  (=pubbe  atitajatiyar)  PvA 
10);  11.3''  (cp.  purima);  11.4^;  11.7*  (=atitabhave  PvA 
101);  11.9'''.  —  apure  apaccha  neither  before  nor  after, 
i.  e.  simultaneously  PugA  186  (see  apubbar))r — pure- 
tarar)  (adv.)  first,  ahead,  before  any  one  else  DhA  1.13, 
40.  —  (c)  modal,  meaning  "  lest  "  DA  1.4  ;  cp.  pura  in 
same  sense  Jtm.  28. 

-carika  going  before,  guiding,  leading,  only  in  phrase 
°n  katvd  putting  before  everything  else,  taking  as  a  guide 
or  ideal  J  1.176  (metta-bhavanai))  ;  in. 45  (id.),  180 
(khantin  ca  mettafi  ca) ;  VI. 127  (Indarj) ;  PugA  194 
(paniiar)).  -Java  fcp.  BSk.  purojava  attendant  Divy 
211,  214,  379;  also  Vedic  puroyava  preceding]  pre- 
ceding, preceded  by,  controlled  by  ( =pubbangama) 
S  1.33  (sammaditthi")  ;  Sn  1107  (dhamma-takka°,  cp. 
Nd-  318).  -jata  happening  before,  as  logical  category 
Cpaccaya)  "antecedence";  Vism  537  (elevenfold)  = 
Tikp.  17;  freq.  in  Dukp.  &  Tikp.  (as  arammana"  & 
vatthu").  cp.  VbhA  403  ("arammana  &  "vatthuka). 
-dvara  front  door  J  11. 153.  -bhatta  the  early  meal, 
morning  meal,  breakfast  [cp.  BSk.  purobhaktaka  Divy 
307]  VvA  120  ;  PvA  109  ;  "g  in  the  morning  VvA  51  ; 
PvA  78 ;  "kicca  duties  after  the  morning  meal  DA 
1.45  sq. ;  SnA  131  sq.  -bhava  "being  in  front,"  i.  e. 
superior  DA  1.75  (in  exegesis  of  pori).  -samana  one 
who  wanders  ahead  of  someone  else  Vin  11.32  (opp. 
paccha"). 


; 


Purekkhata 


93 


Pupa 


Purekkhata  =  purakkhata  Sn  849,  859,  (a°) ;  Nd^  73,  214. 

Porekkharoti  [for  purakkharoti,  pure  =  Sk.  purah]  to 
honour  etc.  Sn  794  =  803;  ppr.  purekkharana  Sn  844, 
910. 

Porekkbara  [for  purakkhara,  purah +  kl.  see  pure]  defer- 
ence, devotion,  honour;  usually  -"  (adj.)  devoted  to, 
honouring  D  i.i  15  ;  Vin  111.130  ;  IV.2,  277  ;  Nd'  73,  214  ; 


Dh    73    (=parivara    DhA    11. 


Vv    34X    (attha° 


hitesin  VvA  152) ;  VbhA  466  (°mada) ;  VvA  72. 

Puiekkharata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  purekkhara]  deference  to 
(-°)  DhA  1V.181  (attha"). 

Purohita  [purah  +  pp.  of  dha,  ch.  Vedic  purohita]  i.  placed 
in  front,  i.  e.  foremost  or  at  the  top.  in  phrase  deva 
Inda-purohita  the  gods  with  Inda  at  their  head  J  vi.i27 
{  =Indar)  pure-carikar)  katva  C).  —  2.  the  king's  head- 
priest  (brahmanic),  or  domestic  chaplain,  acting  at  the 
same  time  as  a  sort  of  Prime  Minister  D  1.138  ;  J  1.2 10  ; 
V.127  (his  wife  as  brahmani) ;  Pug  56  (brahmana  p.); 
Milu  241,  343  (dhamma-nagare  p.);  PvA  74. 

Polaka  [cp.  Sk.  pulaka.  Halayudha  5,  43  ;  not  Sk.  pulaka, 
as  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  for  which  see  also  Walde,  Lai.  W'tb. 
s.  v.  pilus]  shrivelled  grain  Miln  232  (sukka-yava°  of 
dried  barley);  DhA  n.154  (SS ;  T.  reads  mulakai], 
which  is  expl''  by  Bdhgh  as  "  nitthusarj  katva  usse- 
detva  gahita-yava-tandula  vuccanti "  ibid).  Here 
belongs  pulasa-patta  of  J  111.478  (vv.  11.  pula°.  mula°, 
mula°  ;  expl"'  by  C.  as  "  sanhani  pulasa-gaccha-pannani," 
thus  taking  pulasa  as  a  kind  of  shrub,  prob.  because 
the  word  was  not  properly  understood). 

Pajava  [etym.  ?  dial ;  cp.  Class.  Sk.  pulaka  erection  of  the 
hairs  of  the  body,  also  given  by  lexicographers  (Hema- 
chandra  1202)  in  meaning  "vermin"]  a  worm,  maggot 
M  111.168;  Sn  672;  J  III. 177;  VI.73  ;  Miln  331,  357; 
Vism  179  (  =  kirai)  DhA  ill. 106,  411.     See  next. 

Palavaka  (BB  puluvaka)=pulava  DhA  :v.46  ;  VvA  76; 
PvA  14.  One  of  the  (asubha)  kammatthanas  is  called 
p.  "  the  contemplation  ("safina  idea)  of  the  worm- 
infested  corpse"  S  v.  131  ;  Dhs  264;  Vism  1 10,  179 
(pulu°).  194  ('<!•  I  as  asubha-lakkhana)  ;  DhA  iv.47. 
See  also  asubha. 

Palasa  see  pulaka. 

Palina  {&  Palina)  (nt.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  pulina,  also  Hala- 
yudha 3.  48]  I.  a  sandy  bank  or  mound  in  the  middle 
of  a  river  J  11.366  (valika°)  ;  111.389  (id.);  v. 414;  Miln 
297  (1) ;  Davs  iv.29  ;  Vism  2O3  (nadi°) ;  VvA  40  (pan- 
dara°).  —  2.  a  grain  of  sand  Miln  i8u  (|). 

Pulla  [a  contracted  form  of  purisa  (q.  v.)]  man,  only  in 
cpd.  pullinga  ( =purisa-linga)  membrum  virile,  penis 
J  v. 143  (where  expl''  by  C.  as  unha-charika  pi.  "hot 
embers  "  ;  the  pass,  is  evidently  misunderstood  ;  v.  1. 
BB  phuil"). 

Pu8sa°  at  Nd'  90  in  cpds.  °tila,  "tela,  dantakattha,  mat- 
tika,  etc.  is  probably  to  be  read  with  v.  1.  phussa'; 
meaning  not  quite  clear  ("  natural,  raw  "  ?). 

Passaka  at  A  1.188  is  to  be  read  as  phussaka  (see  phussa') 
cuckoo. 

Passaratha  at  J  vi.39  read  phussa°  (q.  v.). 

Piiga'  (nt.)  [etym.  ?  cp.  Vedic  puga  in  meaning  of  both 
piiga'  &  puga''^  heap,  quantity  ;  either  as  n.  with  gen 
or  as  adj.  =  many,  a  lot  Sn  1073  (pugar)  vassanar)  = 
bahuni  vassani  Nd^  452);  Pv  IV.7'  (pugani  vassani) ; 
VbhA  2  (khandhattha,  pind°.  pug°). 

Pciga^  (m.)  [see  preceding]  corporation,  guild  Vin  11.109, 
212  ;  IV.30,  78.  226.  252  ;  M  III. 48  ;  A  111.300  ;  Ud  71  ; 
Pug  29  (=seiji  PugA  2i<>). 


-ayatana  guild's  property  J  vi.ioS  (=puga-santaka 
dhana  C).  -gamanika  superintendant  of  a  guild, 
guildmaster  A  in.  76.  -majjhagata  gone  into  a  guild 
A  1.128  =Pug  29  ;  SnA  377. 

Poga^  [Class.  Sk.  puga]  the  betel-palm,  betel  nut  tree 
J  V.37  ("rukkha-ppamanag  ucchu-vanag). 

Puja  (adj.)  [Epic  Sk.  pujya.  cp.  pujja]  to  be  honoured, 
honourable  A  111.78  (v.  1.  ;  T.  pujja);  J  in. 83  (apuja  = 
apiijaniya  C.)  ;  pujarj  karoti  to  do  homage  Vism  312.  — 
See  also  pujiya. 

Pujana  (f)  [fr.  pujeti]  veneration,  worship  A  11.203  sq.  ; 
Dh  106,  107;  Pug  19;  Dhs  1121  ;  Miln  162. 

Piijaneyya  A  Pujaniya  [grd.  of  pujeti]  to  be  honoured, 
entitled  to  homage  S  11 75;  SnA  277;  -iya  J  111.83 ; 
Sdhp  230,  551. 

Puja  (f.)  [fr.  puj,  see  pujeti]  honour,  worship,  devotional 
attention  A  1.93  (amisa°,  dhamma") ;  v.347  sq.  ;  Sn  906  ; 
Dh  73.  104  ;  Pv  1.5'  ;  1.5'* ;  Dpvs  vn.12  (cetiya°) ;  SnA 
350  ;  PvA  8;  Sdhp  213,  230,  542,  551. 

-&raha  worthy  of  veneration,  deserving  attention 
Dh  194;  DhA  III. 251.  -karana  doing  service,  paying 
homage  PvA  30.     -kara=karana  DhA  1144. 

Pajita  [pp.  of  pujeti]  honoured,  revered,  done  a  service 
S  1.175.  178  ;  ii.i  ig  ;  Th  i.  186  ;  Sn  316  ;  Ud  73  (sakkata 
manita  p.  apacita) ;  Pv  1.4^  ( =patimanita  C.) ;  11.8'". 

Pfijiya  [  =  puja,  Sk.  pujya]  worthy  to  be  honoured  Sn  527  ; 
J  V.405;  Sdhp  542, 

Pujetar  [n.  ag.  fr.  pujeti]  one  who  shows  attention  or  care 
A  v.347  sq..  350  sq. 

Pfljeti  [puj,  occurring  in  Rigveda  only  in  sacipujana 
RV  VIII.  1 6,  12]  to  honour,  respect,  worship,  revere 
Sn  316  (Pot.  pujayeyya).  485  (imper.  pijjetha) ;  Dh  106, 
195;  DA  1.256;  PvA  54  (aor.  sakkarigsu  garukkarigsu 
manesui)  pujesug)  ;  Sdhp  538.  — pp.  piijita  (q.  v.). 

Puti  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  puti.  puyati  to  fester  ;  Gr.  jrvdui,  vvov  = 
pus;  Lat.  putidus  putrid;  Goth.  fuls=Ger.  faul,  E. 
foul]  putrid,  stinking,  rotten,  fetid  D  11.353  (khandani 
putini)  ;  M  1.73,  89  =  111.92  (auhikani  putini) ;  Vin 
111.236  (anto°) ;  S  in.54  ;  Pv  1.3";  1.6'  {  =  kunapa- 
gandha  PvA  32) ;  Vism  261  (=putika  at  KhA  61).  645 
(°paja  itthi.  in  simile) ;  PvA  67  ;  Sdhp  258.  —  See  also 
puccandata. 

-kaya  foul  body,  mass  of  corruption,  Ep.  of  the 
human  body  M  11.65;  S  1.131  ;  111.120;  Th  2.  466; 
ThA  283;  SnA  40;  DhA  iii.iii.  -kummasa  rotten 
junket  Vism  343.  -gandha  bad  smell,  ill-smelling 
Pv  1.3'  (=kunapa°  PvA  15);  J  v. 72.  -dadhi  rancid 
curds  Vism  362  ;  VbhA  68  ;  cp.  pijti-takka  Vism  108. 
-deha  =  'kaya  S  1.236.  -maccha  stinking  fish  M  III. 168 
(-(-"kupapa  &  "kummasa);  in  simile  at  It  68  =  J  iv,435 
=  vi.236  =  KhA  127.  -mukha  having  a  putrid  mouth 
SnA  458  (asivisa)  ;  PvA  12,  14.  -mutta  strong-smelling 
urine,  usually  urine  of  cattle  used  as  medicine  by  the 
bhikkhu  Vin  1.58=96  (^bhesajja) ;  M  1. 316;  It  103; 
VvA  5  (°haritaka).  -mula  having  fetid  roots  M  1.80. 
-lata  "  stinking  creeper."  a  sort  of  creeper  or  shrub 
(Coccolus  cordifohus,  otherwise  galoci)  Sn  29  =  Miln 
369  ;  Vism  36.  183  ;  KhA  47  (°santhana) ;  DhA  iii.i  10. 
1 1 1  (taruna  galoci-lata  putilata  ti  vuccati).  -lohitaka 
with  putrid  blood  Pv  1.78  (  =  kupapa°  PvA  37).  -san- 
deha='kaya  Dh  148. 

Putika  (adj.)=puti  M  1.449:  S  v. 51  ;  A  1.261  ;  J  1.164; 
11.275  ;  Miln  252  ;  DhA  1.321  ;  iii.iii  ;  VvA  76.  — apu- 
tika  not  rotten,  fresh  M  1.449  ;  A  1.261  ;  J  v.  198  ;  Miln 
252- 

Pupa  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  pupa  ;  "  a  rich  cake  of  wheaten  flour  " 
Halayudha.  2.  164;  and  BSk.  pupalika  Av.S  11.116]  a 


Pflra 


94 


Peta 


special  kind  of  cake,  baked  or  boiled  in  a  bag  J  v. 46 
("pasibbaka  cake-bag);  DhA  1.319  (jala°  net-cake; 
V.  1.  puva).     See  also  puva. 

Poro  (adj.)  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  pura  ;  fr.  pf,  see  pureti]  full; 
full  of  (with  gen.)  D  1.244  (nadi) ;  M  1.215;  111.90,  96; 
A  IV. 230  ;  Sn  195,  721;  Ud  90  (nadi) ;  J  1.146;  Pv 
IV.3I'  (=panlyena  punna  PvA  251);  Pug  45,  46;  PvA 
29.  — dup°  diificult  to  fill  J  V.425. — ptirat)  {-")  nt.  as 
adv.  in  kucchi-purag  to  his  belly's  fill  J  111.268 ;  Vism 
108   (udara-pura-mattar)). 

PQiaka  (adj.)  [  =  para-t-ka]  filling  (-°)  Vism  106  (mukha"). 

Para^a  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  pureti]  i.  (adj.)  filling  Sn  312  (?  better 
read  purana  with  SnA  324)  ;  PvA  70  (eka-thalaka°), 
77  (id.).  As  Np.  in  Purana  Kassapa,  which  however 
seems  to  be  distorted  from  Purana  K.  (D  1.47;  Sn  p. 
92.  cp.  KhA  126,  175;  SnA  200,  237.  372).  The  expl" 
(popular  etym.)  of  the  name  at  DA  1.142  refers  it  to 
pureti  ("  kulassa  ekunar)  dasa-satar)  purayamano 
jato  "  i.  e.  making  the  hundred  of  servants  full).  — 
2.  (nt.)  an  expletive  particle  (pada"  "  verse-filler"),  so 
in  C.  style  of  "  a  "  SnA  590  ;  "  kho  "  ib.  139  ;  "  kho 
pana  "  ib.  137;  "tar)"  KhA  219;  "  tato  "  SnA  378; 
"  pi  "  ib.  536  ;  "  su  "  ib.  230  ;  "  ha  "  ib.  416  ;  "  hi  "  ib. 
377.     See  pada". 

Poratta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  pura]  getting  or  being  full,  fulness 
Vin  11.239  (opp.  unattai)). 

Piiralasa  [cp.  Vedic  purodasa]  sacrificial  cake  (brahmanic), 
oblation  Sn  459  (  =  carukail  ca  puvari  ca  SnA  405),  467, 
479  (  =  havyasesa  C),  486. 

Piirita  [pp.  of  pureti]  filled  with  (-"),  full  Pv  11.  i^  (=pari- 
punna  PvA  77);  PvA  134. 

Pureti  [Caus.  of  py,  prnati  to  fill,  intrs.  puryate,  cp.  Lat. 
pleo ;  Gr.  tti^-ttXt/^^  ttX^^w,  7roX?''c  much,  Goth,  filu  = 
Ger.  viel ;  Ohg.  folc  =  folk]  i.  to  fill  (with=gen.  or 
instr.)  S  1.173;  Sn  30,  305;  J  1.50  (payasassa).  347; 
II. 112  (pret.  purayittha) ;  iv.272  (sagga-padar)  pura- 
yigsu  filled  with  deva  world)  ;  DhA  11.82  (sakatani 
ratanehi) ;  iv.200  (pattag)  ;  PvA  100  (bhandassa),  145 
(suvanijassa).  —  2.  to  fulfil  DhA  1.68. — -3.  (Caus.)  to 
make  fill  Vism  137  (lakarar)).  —  pp.  punna.  See  also 
pari°.  Caus.  II.  purapeti  to  cause  to  fill  S  11.259; 
J  1-99 

Puva  [cp.  Sk.  pupa  ;  with  v  for  p]  a  cake,  baked  in  a  pan 
(kapalla)  A  111.76;  J  1.345  (kapalla"  pan-cake),  347; 
III. 10  (pakka°)  ;  Vv  13':  29'  ( =kapalla-puva  VvA 
123);  Pv  IV.3I3  (=khajjaka  PvA  251);  Vism  io8  (jala° 
net-cake,  cp.  jala-pupa),  359  (puvag  vyapetva,  in 
comp.)  ;  VbhA  65.  255  (simile  of  woman  going  to  bake 
a  cake)  ;  KhA  56  ;  DA  1.142  ;  VvA  67,  73  ("sura,  one  of 
the  5  kinds  of  intoxication  liquors,  see  sura) ;  PvA  244. 
See  also  Vin.  Texts  1.39  (sweetmeats,  sent  as  presents). 

Piivika  [fr.  puva]  a  cake-seller,  confectioner  Miln  331. 

Peis  abbreviation  of  peyyala  (q.  v.)  ;  cp.  la. 

Pekkha'  (adj.)  (-°)  [cp.  Sk.  prek^a  f.  &  preksaka  adj.  ;  fr. 
pa  +  iks]  looking  out  for,  i.  e.  intent  upon,  wishing; 
usually  in  pufina"  desirous  of  merit  S  1.167;  Dh  108 
(=punnar)  icchanto  DhA  11.234):  Vv  34^'  (=puniia- 
phalar)  akankhanto  VvA   154);  PvA  134. 

Pekkha'  (adj.)  [grd.  of  pekkhati,  Sk.  preksya]  to  be  looked 
for,  to  be  expected,  desirable  J  vi.2i3. 

Pekkbaka  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  pekkha']  seeing,  looking  at; 
wishing   to    see   ThA   73   (Ap.   v. 59),    f.      °ika    S  1. 185 

(vihara^). 

PekkhaQa  (nt.)  [fr.  pa-l-ik?]  seeing,  sight,  look  DA  1. 185, 
193;  KhA  148  (  =  dassana). 


Pekkhati  [pa-(-ik?]  to  behold,  regard,  observe,  look  at 
D  11.20;  S  IV.291  ;  J  VI. 420. — ppr.  pekkhamana  Vin 
1. 180;  Sn  36  sq.  (=dakkhamana  Nd'^  453),  1070,  1 104  ; 
Pv  II. 3'  ;  Vism  19  (disa-vidisar)).  gen.  pi.  pekkhataQ 
Sn  580  (cp.  SnA  460). — Caus.  pekkheti  to  cause  one 
to  behold,  to  make  one  see  or  consider  Vin  11. 73^ 
A  v.ji.  —  Cp.  anu°. 

Pek(k)havant  [fr.  pekkha]  desirous  of  (loc.)  J  v.403. 

Pek(k)hd  (f.)  [fr.  pa-l-ik?]  i.  consideration,  view  Vbh  325, 
328.  —  2.  desire  J  v.403  (p.  vuccati  tanha).  —  3.  (or 
(pekkhag  ?)  show  at  a  fair  D  1.6  (  =  nata-samajja 
DA  1.84) ;  see  Dial.  1.7,  n.  4  and  cp.  J.R.A.S.  1903,  186. 

Pekkhin  (adj.)  [fr.  pekkhati]  looking  (in  front),  in  phrase 
yugamattar)  p.  "  looking  only  the  distance  of  a  plough  " 
Miln  398. 

Pekhofa  (pekkh°)  (nt.)  [not  with  Childers  fr.  *paksman, 
but  with  Pischel,  Gr.  §  8g  fr.  Sk.  prenkhana  a  swing, 
Vedic  prenkha,  fr.  pra-(-inkh,  that  which  swings, 
through  *prenkhuna  >  prekhuna  >  pekhuna]  i .  a  wing 
Th  I,  211  (su°  with  beautifulfeathers),  1136;  J  1.207. 
—  2.  a  peacock's  tail-feathers  J  vi.218  (  =  morapiiija 
C),  497  (citrapekkhunar)  morag). 

Pecca  [ger.  of  pa-t-i,  cp.  BSk.  pretya  Jtm  31^*]  "after 
having  gone  past,"  i.  e.  after  death,  having  departed 
S  1. 182  ;  111.98  ;  A  II. 174  sq.  ;  111.34,  46,  78  ;  Sn  185,  188, 
248,  598,  661;  It  hi;  Dh  15,  131  (=paraloke  DhA 
III. 51);  J  I.i6g;  V.489,  Pv  1. 11*;  ill. 7*  (v.  1.  pacca). 
The  form  peccai)  under  influence  of  Prk.  (AMg.)  pecca 
(see  Pischel.  Prk.  Gr.  587)  at  J  vi.360. 

Petaka  (adj.)  [fr.  pitaka]  "  what  belongs  to  the  Pitaka,"  as 
title  of  a  non-canonical  book  for  the  usual  Petak'  opadesa 
"  instruction  in  the  Pitaka,"  dating  from  the  beginning 
of  our  era  (cp.  Geiger,  P.Gr.  p.  18).  mentioned  at  Vism 
141  =DhsA  165.     Cp.  tipetaka,  see  also  pitaka. 

Pevahika  (f)  [dial.  ;  etym.  uncertain]  a  species  of  bird 
(crane  ?)  Miln  364,  402  ;  shortened  to  penahi  at  Miln 
407  (in  the  uddana).     Cp.  Mihi  trsl.  n  343. 

Pe^^akata  is  v.  1.  for  pannakata  Npl.  at  Vv  45'  sq.  (see 
VvA   197). 

Peta  [pp  of  pa-l-i,  lit.  gone  past,  gone  before]  dead, 
departed,  the  departed  spirit.  The  Buddhistic  peta 
represents  the  Vedic  pitara^i  (manes,  cp.  pitfyajiia),  as 
well  as  the  Brahmanic  preta.  The  first  are  souls  of 
the  "  fathers,"  the  second  ghosts,  leading  usually  a 
miserable  existence  as  the  result  (kammaphala)  or 
punishment  of  some  former  misdeed  (usually  avarice). 
They  may  be  raised  in  this  existence  by  means  of  the 
dakkhina  (sacrificial  gift)  to  a  higher  category  of 
mahiddhika  peta  (alias  yakkhas),  or  after  their  period 
of  expiation  shift  into  another  form  of  existence 
(manussa,  deva,  tiracchana).  The  punishment  in  the 
Nirayas  is  included  in  the  peta  existence.  Modes  of 
suffering  are  given  S  11.255  ;  cp  K.S.  ii,  170  p.  On  the 
whole  subject  see  Stede,  Die  Gespenstergeschichten  des 
Peta  Vatthu,  Leipzig  1914  ;  in  the  Peta  Vatthu  the  un- 
happy ghosts  are  represented,  whereas  the  Vimana 
Vatthu  deals  with  the  happy  ones.  —  i.  (souls  of  the 
departed,  manes)  D  111.189  (petanar)  kalakatanag 
dakkhinar)  anupadassati) ;  A  111.43  (id-);  i'55  ^l- ! 
V.132  (p,  iiatisalohita) ;  M  1.33;  S  1.61=204;  Sn  585, 
590,  807  (peta-kalakata  =mata  Nd'  126);  J  v.7 
(=mata  C.)  ;  Pv  1.5';  1.12';  11.6'°.  As  pubba-peta 
("  deceased-before ")  at  A  11.68;  111.45;  iv.244 ;  J 
11.360.  —  2.  (unhappy  ghosts)  S  11.255  sq.  ;  Vin  iv.269 
(contrasted  with  purisa.  yakkha  &  tiracchana-gata) ; 
A  v. 269  (danai)  petanar)  upakappati) ;  J  iv.495  sq. 
(yakkha  pisaca  peta,  cp.  preta-pisacayoh  MBhar.  13, 
732) ;  Vbh  412  sq.  ;  Sdhp96sq.  — manussapeta  a  ghost 
j  in  human  form  J  111.72  ;  v. 68  ;  VvA  23.  The  later 
1       tradition  on  Petas  in  their  var.  classes  and  states  is 


Petattana 


95 


Pesakara 


reflected  in  Miln  294  (4  classes ;  vantasika,  khuppipasa, 
nijjhama-tanhika,  paradatt'  upajivino)  &  357  (appear- 
ance and  fate)  ;  Vism  501  =VbhA  97  (as  state  of  suf- 
fering, with  naraka,  tiraccha,  asura)  ;  VbhA  455  (as 
nijjhamatanhika.  khuppipasika.  paradatt'  upajivino).  — 
3.  (happy  ghosts)  mahiddhika  peti  Pv  i.io';  yakkha 
raahiddhika  Pv  iv.i'*;  Vimanapeta  mahiddhika  PvA 
145;  peta  mahiddhika  PvA  217.  [Cp.  BSk.  preta- 
mahardhika  Divy  14]. — f.  peti  Vin  !v.20  ;  J  1.240; 
Pv  1.6*  ;  PvA  67  and  pa.ssim.  Vimanapeti  PvA  47,  50, 
53  and  in  Vimana-vatthu  passim. 

-upapattika  born  as  a  peta  PvA  1 19.  -katha  (pubba°) 
tales  (or  talk)  about  the  dead  (not  considered  orthodox) 
D  1.8.  cp.  DA  1.90  ;  A  v.  128.  -kicca  duty  towards  the 
deceased  (i.  e.  death-rites)  J  11. 5  ;  DhA  1.328.  -raja 
king  of  the  Petas  (i.  e.  Yama)  J  v. 453  ('visayai)  na 
muiicati  "  does  not  leave  behind  the  realm  of  the  Peta- 
king  ")  ;  C.  expl*  by  petayoni  and  divides  the  realm 
into  petavisaya  and  kalakafijaka-asura-visaya.  -yoni 
the  peta  realm  PvA  9,  35,  55,  68,  103  and  passim. 
-loka  the  peta  world  Sdhp  96.  -vatthu  a  peta  or 
ghost-story ;  N.  of  one  (perhaps  the  latest)  of  the 
canonical  books  belonging  to  the  Suttanta-Pitaka 
KhA  12  ;  DA  1.178  (Ankura"). 

Petattana  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  peta]  state  or  condition  of  a 
Peta  Th  i,  1128. 

Pettanika  [fr.  pitar]  one  who  lives  on  the  fortune  or  power 
inherited  from  his  father  A  111.76  =  300. 

Pettapiya  [for  pettaviya  (Epic  Sk.  pitrvya),  cp.  Trenckner, 
Notes  62",  75]  father's  brother,  paternal  uncle  A  111.348  ; 
V.I 38  (gloss  pitamaho). 

Pettika  (adj.)  [fr.  pitar,  for  petika,  cp.  Epic  Sk.  paitrka 
cS:  P.  petteyya]  paternal  Vin  ni.i6;  iv.223  ;  D  11.232; 
S  v.i46  =  Miln  368  (p.  gocara)  ;  (sake  p.  visaye  'your 
own  home-grounds')  D  111.58  ;  Sv.146;  J  11.59;  vi.193 
(ina).  Also  in  cpd.  mata-pettika  maternal  &  paternal 
D  1.34,  92  ;  J  1. 1 46. 

Pettivisaya  (&  Pitt'")  [Sk.  'paitrya-visaya  &  *pitrya- 
visaya,  der.  fr.  pitar,  but  influenced  by  peta]  the  world 
of  the  manes,  the  realm  of  the  petas  (synonymous  with 
petavisaya  &  petayoni)  D  111.234;  It  93  ;  J  v. 186; 
Pv  II. 2*;  11.7';  Miln  310;  DhA  1.102  ;  iv.226  ;  Vism 
427;  VbhA  4,  455;  PvA  25  sq.,  29,  59  sq.,  214,  268; 
Sdhp  9. 

Petteyya  (adj.)  [fr.  pitar;  cp.  Vedic  pitrya]  father-loving, 
showing  filial  piety  towards  one's  father  D  111.72,  74  ; 
S  V.467  ;  A  1.138  ;  J  III. 456  ;  v. 35  ;  Pv  11. 7'*.  See  also 
matteyya. 

Petteyyata  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  petteyya]  reverence  towards  one's 
father  D  111.70  (a°),  145,  169;  Dh  332  (=pitari  samma- 
patipatta  DhA  iv.34) ;  Nd^  294.     Cp.  matteyyata. 

Petya  (adv.)  [fr.  pitar,  for  Sk.  pitra ;  cp.  Trenckner, 
Notes  56*]  from  the  father's  side  J  v.214  (  =  pitito). 

Pema  (nt.)  [fr.  pri,  see  pineti  &  piya  &  cp.  BSk.  prema 
Jtm  221;  Vedic  preman  cons,  stem]  love,  affection 
D  1.50  ;  III. 284  sq.  ;  M  l.ioi  sq.  ;  S  III. 122  ;  iv.72,  329  ; 
V.89,  379  ;  A  11.213;  111.326  sq.  ;  Sn  41  ;  Dh  32  i  ;  DA 
1.75.  -(a)vigata-pema  with(out)  love  or  affection 
D  III. 238,  252  ;  S  III. 7  sq..  107  sq.,  170  ;  iv.387  ;  A  11. 174 
sq.  ;  IV.15.  36,  461  sq. 

Pemaka  (m.  or  nt.)  [fr.  pema]  =pema  J  iv.371. 

Pemanlya  (adj.)  [fr.  pema  as  grd.  formation,  cp.  )3Sk., 
premaoiya  MVastu  111.343]  affectionate,  kind,  loving, 
amiable,  agreeable  D  1.4  (cp.  DA  1.75);  11.20  (°ssara) ; 
A  11.209  ;  Pug  57  ;  J  IV. 470. 

Peyya*  [grd.  of  pibati]  to  be  drunk,  drinkable,  only  in 
comp"  or  neg.  apeyya  undrinkable  A  in.  188  ;  J  iv.205, 
213  (apo  apeyyo).     manda°  to  be  drunk  like  cream,  i.  e. 


of  the  best  quality  S  11.29.  manapika°  sweet  to  drink 
Miln  313.  duppeyya  difficult  to  drink  Sdhp  158.  See 
also  kakapeyya. 

Peyya^  =  piya,  only  in  cpds.  vajja"  [*priya-vadya]  kindness 
of  language,  kind  speech,  one  of  the  4  sangaha-vatthus 
(grounds  of  popularity)  A  11.32,  248;  iv.219,  364; 
D  III. 190,  192,  232;  J  V.330.  Cp.  BSk.  priya-vadya 
MVastu  1.3;  and  °vaca  kind  language  D  111.152  ;  Vv 
84^*  (  =  piyavacana  VvA  345).  —  It  is  doubtful  whether 
vaca-peyya  at  Sn  303  (Ep.  of  sacrifice)  is  the  same  as 
°vaca  (as  adj.),  or  whether  it  represents  vaja-peyya 
[Vedic  vaja  sacrificial  food]  as  Bdhgh  expl*  it  at  SnA 
322  (  =  vajam  ettha  pivanti ;  v.  1.  vaja°),  thus  peyya  = 
peyya'. 

Peyyala  (nt.  ?)  [a  Magadhism  for  pariyaya,  so  Kern, 
Toev.  s.  V.  after  Trenckner,  cp.  BSk.  piyala  and  peyala 
MVastu  III.2C.2,  219]  repetition,  succession,  formula; 
way  of  saying,  phrase  (  =  pariyaya  5)  Vism  46  ("mukha 
beginning  of  discourse),  351  (id.  and  bahu°-tanti  having 
many  discourses  or  repetitions),  411  (°pa|i  a  row  of 
successions  or  etceteras) ;  VvA  1 1  7  (pa|i°  vasena  "  be- 
cause of  the  successive  Pali  text  ").  —  Very  freq.  in 
abridged  form,  where  we  would  say  "  etc.,"  to  indicate 
that  a  passage  has  be  to  repeated  (either  from  preceding 
context,  or  to  be  supplied  from  memory,  if  well  known). 
The  literal  meaning  would  be  "  here  (follows)  the 
formula  (pariyaya)."  We  often  find  pa  for  pe,  e.  g. 
A  V.242,  270,  338,  339,  355  ;  sometimes  pa-(-pe  comb"", 
e.  g.  S  v. 466.  —  As  pe  is  the  first  syllable  of  peyyala  so 
la  is  the  last  and  is  used  in  the  same  sense  ;  the  variance 
is  according  to  predilection  of  certain  MSS.  ;  la  is  found 
e.  g.  S  V.448,  267  sq.  ;  or  as  v.  1.  of  pe:  A  v.242,  243, 
354  ;  or  la-t-pe  comly' :  S  v. 464,  466.  —  On  syllable  pe 
Trenckner,  Notes  66,  says :  "  The  sign  of  abridgment. 
pe,  or  as  it  is  written  in  Burmese  copies,  pa,  means 
peyyala  which  is  not  an  imperative  '  insert,  fill  up  the 
gap,'  but  a  substantive,  peyyalo  or  peyyalai),  signi- 
fying a  phrase  to  be  repeated  over  &  over  again.  I 
consider  it  a  popular  corruption  of  the  synonymous 
pariyaya,  passing  through  *payyaya,  with  -eyy-  for 
-ayy-,  like  seyya,  Sk.  Sayya."  See  also  Vin.  Texts 
1. 291  ;  Oldenberg,  K.Z.  35,  324. 

Perita  is  Kern's  {Toev.  s.  v.)  proposed  reading  for  what  he 
considered  a  faulty  spelling  in  bhaya-merita  (p  for  m) 
J  IV. 424  =  v. 359.  This,  however  is  bhaya-merita  with 
the  hiatus-m,  and  to  supplant  perita  (  =  Sk.  prerita)  is 
unjustified. 

Pelaka  [etym.  ?]  a  hare  J  vi.538  (  =  sasa  C). 

Pe}a  [a  Prk.  form  for  pinda,  cp.  Pischel,  Prk.  Gr.  §  122 
pedhala]  a  lump,  only  in  yaka°  the  liver  (-lump)  Sn  195 
( =  yakana-pin4a  SnA  247)  =  }  1.146. 

Peja  [cp.  Class.  &  B.  Sk.  pefa,  f.  peti  &  pefa,  pe^a  Divy 
251,  365;  and  the  BSk.  var.  phela  Divy  503;  MVastu 
11.465]  I.  a  (large)  basket  J  iv.458  ;  vi.185;  Cp.  ii.2»  ; 
Miln  23,  282  ;  Vism  304  ;  KhA  46  (pejaghata,  wrong 
reading,  see  p.  68  App.) ;  ThA  29.  —  2.  a  chest  (for 
holding  jewelry  etc.)  Pv  iv.i"  ;  Mhvs  36,  20  ;  DhsA  242 
(pel-opama,  of  the  4  treasure-boxes).  — •  Cp.  pi^aka. 

Pelika  (f)  [cp.  pe|a]  a  basket  DhA  1.227  (pasadhana", 
v.  I.  pelaka). 

Pesa  is  spurious  spelling  for  pessa  (q.  v.). 

Pesaka  [fr.  pa-l-if,  cp.  Vedic  pre?a  order,  command] 
employer,  controller,  one  who  attends  or  looks  after 
Vin  II.  I  77  (iramika"  etc.) ;  A  111.275  (id), 

Pesak&ra  [pesa -1- kSra,  epsa  =  Vedic  pe^af),  fr.  pii;  see 
pigsati']  weaver  D  1.52;  Vin  111.259;  IV.7;  J  iv.475  ; 
DhA  1.424  (°vithi);  in. 170  sq  ;  VbhA  294  sq.  (°dhit5 
the  weaver's  daughter  ;  story  of  -)  PvA  42  sq.,  67. 


Pesana 


96 


Pota 


Pesana  (nt.)  [fr.  pa+i?,  see  peseti]  sending  out,  message  ; 
service  J  iv.362  (pesanani  gacchanti) ;  v.  17  (pesane 
pesiyanto.) 

-karaka  a  servant  J  vi.448  ;  VvA  349.  -karika  (a 
girl)  doing  service,  a  messenger,  servant  J  111414; 
DhA  1.227. 

Pesanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  pesana]  "  message  sender,"  employing 
for  service,  in  °cora  robbers  making  (others)  servants 
J  I-253- 

Pesanika  ,°iya)  (adj.)  [fr.  pesana]  connected  with  mes- 
sages, going  messages,  only  in  phrase  jangha"  messenger 
on  foot  Vin  m.185  ;  J  11.82  ;  Miln  370  (°iya). 

Pesala  (adj.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  pesala ;  Bdhgh's  pop.  etym.  at 
SnA  475  is  "  piya-sila  "]  lovable,  pleasant,  well-behaved, 
amiable  S  1.149  ;  11.387  ;  A  iv.22  ;  v.170  ;  Sn  678  ;  Sn  p. 
124;  Miln  373;  Sdhp  621.  Often  as  Ep.  of  a  good 
bhikkhu,  e.  g.  at  S  1.187;  Vin  1.170  ;  11. 241  ;  J  iv.70  ; 
VvA  206;  PvA  13,  268. 

Pesaca  is  reading  at  D  1.54  for  pisaca  (so  v.  1.). 

Pesi  (pesi)  (f.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  peSi]  i.  a  lump,  usually  a 
mass  of  flesh  J  111.223  =  DhA  iv.67  (pesi  =  mar|sapesi  j 
C).  Thus  at  marjsapesi  at  Vin  n.2  5;«  (magsapes' 
upama  kama) ;  III. 105;  M  1. 143,  364;  S  n.256  ;  iv.193 
(in  characteristic  of  lohitaka)  ;  Vism  356;  PvA  199. — 
2 ,  the  f cetus  in  the  third  stage  after  conception  (between 
abbuda  &  ghana)  S  1.206  ;  J  iv.496  ;  Nd'  120  ;  Miln  40  ; 
Vism    236.  —  3.  a    piece,    bit    (for    pesika),    in    velu" 

J  IV.205. 

PeBika  (f.)  (-°)  [cp.  Sk.  *pe^ika]  rind,  shell  (of  fruit)  only 
in  cpds.  amba°  Vin  11. 109;  vagsa"  J  1.352;  velu"  (a 
bit  of  bamboo)  D  11.324  ;  J  11.267,  279  ;  111.276 ;  iv.382. 

Pesita  [pp.  of  peseti]  i.  sent  out  or  forth  Sn  412  (raja- 
duta  p.)  Vv  21'  (  =  uyyojita  VvA  108);  DhA  111.191. 
pesit-atta  is  the  C.  expl°  at  S  1.53  (as  given  at  K.S. 
320)  of  pahit-atta  {trsl"  "  puts  forth  all  his  strength  ")  ; 
Bdhgh  incorrectly  taking  pahita  as  pp.  of  pahinati  to 
send  whereas  it  is  pp.  of  padahati.  —  2.  ordered,  what 
has  been  ordered,  in  pesit-Spesitag  order  and  pro- 
hibition Vin  11.177. 

Pesuna  (nt.)  [fr.  pisuna,  cp.  Epic  Sk.  paisuna]  =pesunfia 
S  1.240;  Sn  362,  389,  862  sq.,  941  ;  J  v.397  ;  Pv  1.3''; 
PvA  16;  Sdhp  55,  66.  81. 

-karaka  one  who  incites  to  slander  J  1.2CO,  267. 

Pesunika  (adj.)  [fr.  pesuna]  slanderous,  calumnious  PvA 
12,   13. 

Pesupiya  &  Pesuneyya  (nt.)  =  pesunna ;  i.  (pesuniya) 
Sn  663,  928;  Pv  1.3''.  —  2.  (pesuneyya)  S  1.228,  230; 
Sn  852  ;  Ndi  232. 

Pesunfia  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  pisuna,  cp.  £pic  Sk.  paisunya. 
The  other  (diaeretic)  forms  are  pesuniya  &  pesuneyya] 
backbiting,  calumny,  slander  M  i.iio;  D  111.69;  A 
IV. 401  ;  Vin  1V.12  ;  Nd*  232,  260  ;  PvA  12,  15. 

Peseti  [pa+i?  to  send]  to  send  forth  or  out,  esp.  on  a 
message  or  to  a  special  purpose,  i.  e.  to  employ  as  a 
servant  or  (intrs.)  to  do  service  (so  in  many  derivations) 
I.  to  send  out  J  1.86,  178.  253;  iv.169  (pannar))  ; 
V.399  ;  VI. 448  ;  Mhvs  14,  29  (rathag) ;  DhA  111.190; 
PvA  4,  20,  53.  —  2.  to  employ  or  order  (cp.  pesaka), 
in  Pass,  pesiyati  to  be  ordered  or  to  be  in  service 
Vin  11.177  (PP''-  pesiyamana)  ;  J  v. 17  (ppr.  pesiyanto). 
—  pp.  pesita.     See  also  pessa  &  derivations. 

Pessa  [grd.  form"  fr.  peseti,  Vedic  presya,  f.  presya.  This 
is  the  contracted  form,  whilst  the  diaeretic  form  is 
pesiya,  for  which  also  pesika]  a  messenger,  a  ser- 
vant, often  in  comb"  dasa  ti  va  pessa  ti  va  kamma- 
kara  ti   va,  e.  g.  D   1.141  ;  S  1.76,  93  (slightly  diff.  in 


verse);  A  ii.2c8  (spelt  pesa)  ;  iv.45  ;  DhA  11. 7.  See 
also  A  111.37 ;  IV.266,  270  ;  J  v.351  ;  Pug  56  ;  DA  1.3CO. 
At  Sn  615  pessa  is  used  in  the  sense  of  an  abstr.  n.  = 
pessita  service  (  =  veyyavacca  SnA  466).  So  also  in 
cpds. 

-kamma  service  J  vi.374  ;  -kara  a  servant  J  vi.356. 

Pessita  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  pessa,  Sk.  *presyata]  being  a  servant, 
doing  service  J  vi.208  (para°  to  someone  else). 

Pessiya  &  "ka  [see  pessa]  servant ;  m.  either  pessiya  Vv 
84*'  (spelt  pesiya,  expW  by  pesana-karaka,  veyya- 
vaccakara  VvA  349) ;  J  vi.448  (=  pesana-karaka  C).  or 
pessika  Sn  615,  651  ;  J  vi.552  ;  f,  either  pessiya  (para°) 
Vv  1 8'  (spelt  pesiya.  but  v.  1.  SS  pessiya,  expH  as 
pesaniya  paresag  veyyavacca-kari  VvA  94);  J  111413 
(=parehi  pesitabba  pesana-karika  C.  414),  or  pessika 
J  VI.65. 

Pehi  is  imper.  2"^  sg.  of  pa-l-i,  "  go  on,"  said  to  a  horse 
A  IV. 190  sq.,  cp.  S  1. 123. 

Pokkhara  (nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  puskara,  fr.  pus,  though  a 
certain  relation  to  puspa  seems  to  exist,  cp.  Sk.  puspa- 
pattra  a  kind  of  arrow  (lit.  lotus-leaf)  Halayudha  2, 
314,  and  P.  pokkhara-patta]  i.  a  lotus  plant,  primarily 
the  leaf  of  it,  figuring  in  poetry  and  metaphor  as  not 
being  able  to  be  wetted  by  water  Sn  392.  812  (vuccati 
paduma-pattar)  Nd'  135);  Dh  336;  It  84.-2.  the  skin 
of  a  drum  (from  its  resemblance  to  the  lotus-leaf) 
S  11.267  ;  M'ln  -61  (bheri°).  As  Np.  of  an  angel  (Gan- 
dhabba)  "  Drum  "  at  Vv  iS*.  —  3.  a  species  of  water- 
bird  (crane)  :  see  cpd.  "sataka. 

-ttha  standing  in  water  (.?)  Vin  1.215  (vanattha-f ), 
238"(id.).  -pattaalotusleaf  Sn62  5  ;  Dh40i  (  =  paduma 
-patta  DhA  iv.166) ;  Miln  250.  -madhu  the  honey  sap 
of  Costus  speciosus  (a  lotus)  J  v. 39,  466.  -vassa 
"  lotus-leaf  rain,"  a  portentous  shower  of  rain,  serving 
as  special  kind  of  test  shower  in  which  certain  objects 
are  wetted,  but  those  showing  a  disinclination 
towards  moisture  are  left  untouched,  like  a  lotus-leaf 
J  1.88;  VI. 586;  IvhA  164;  DhA  III. 163.  -sataka  a 
species  of  crane,  Ardea  Siberica  J  vi.539  (kottha-l- ) ; 
SnA  359.  Cp.  Np.  Pokkharasati  Sn  594;  Sn  p.  115; 
SnA  372. 

PokkharanI  (f.)  [fr.  *puskara  lotus;  Vedic  puskarini, 
BSk.  has  puskirini,  e.  g.  AvS  1.76;  11.201  sq.]  a  lotus- 
pond,  an  artificial  pool  or  small  lake  for  water-plants 
(see  note  in  Dial.  11.210)  Vin  1.140.  268  ;  H.123  ;  D  11.178 
sq.  ;  S  1.123.  204;  11.106;  V.460  ;  A  1.35.  145;  in. 187. 
238;  J  11.126;  V.374  (Khemi).  388  (Dona);  Pv  111.3'; 
IV.  1 2'  ;  SnA  354  (here  in  meaning  of  a  dry  pit  or  dug- 
out) ;  VvA  160;  PvA  23,  77,  152-  pokkharanna  gen. 
Pv  II. li';  instr.  S  1.233;  '"C.  Vin  11.123.  pokkharani- 
yayag  loc.  A  111.309.  —  pi.  pokkharaniyo  Vin  1.268; 
VvA  191;  PvA  77;  metric  pokkharanflo  Vv  44"; 
Pv  ii.i'»;  u.f. 

Pokkharata  (f.)  [is  it  fr.  pokkhara  lotus  (cp.  Sk.  pauskara). 
thus  "  lotus-ness,"  or  founded  on  Vedic  puspa  blossom  ? 
The  BSk.  puskalata  (Av§  11.201)  is  certainly  a  mis- 
construction, if  it  is  constructed  fr.  the  Pali]  splendid- 
ness, "  flower-likeness,"  only  in  cpd.  vanna-pokkharata 
beauty  of  complexion  D  1.114;  Vin  1.268;  S  i  95 ; 
11.279;  A  1.38,  86;  11.203  ;  iii.9fJ  ;  DA  1.282  ;  KhA  179; 
VvA  14;  PvA  46.  The  BSk.  passage  at  AvS  11.202 
reads  "  ^obhar)  varnar)  puskalatai)  ca." 

Ponkha  [increment  form  of  punkha]  arrow,  only  in 
redupl.  (iterative)  cpd.  ponkh'  dnuponkhag  (adv.) 
arrow  after  arrow,  shot  after  shot,  i.  e.  constantly, 
continuously  S  v.453,  454;  Nd^  631  (in  def.  of  sada) ; 
DA  1.188  ;  VvAh  351.     The  expl"  is  problematic. 

Pota  [fr.  sphut]  a  bubble  J  iv.457  (v.  1.  potha).  See  also 
phota. 


Potaki 


97 


Porin 


Potaki  (°i  ?)  (m.  f.  ?)  [etym.  uncertain,  prob.  Non-Aryan] 
a  kind  of  grass,  in  °tiiia  a  kind  of  cotton,  "  grass-tuft," 
thistle-down  (?)  Vinii.150  ;  iv.170  (id.,  3  kinds  of  cotton, 
spelt  potaki  here). 

Potakila  [etym.  unknown,  cp.  potaki  &  (lexic.)  Sk.  pota- 
gala  a  kind  of  reed  ;  the  variant  is  potagala]  a  kind  of 
grass.  Saccharum  spontaneum  Th  i.  27  =  233  ;  J  vi.508 
(  =p.''-tinar)  nama  C). 

Potthabba  is  spurious  reading  for  photthabba  (q.  v.). 

Potha  [fr.  puth,  cp.  pothana  &  potheti]  is  anguli°  snap- 
ping of  one's  fingers  (as  sign  of  applause)  J  v.67.  Cp. 
pothana  &  photeti. 

Pothana  (&  Pothana)  (nt.)  [fr.  potheti]  i.  striking,  beating 
J  11.169  (tajjana°)  ;  v.72  (udaka°) ;  vi.41  (kappasa°- 
dhanuka).  At  all  J  passages  th.  —  2.  (th)  snapping 
one's  fingers  J  1.394  (anguli°,  +  celukkhepa)  :  ThA 
76  (anguli°,  for  acchara-sanghata  Th  2,  67).  Cp. 
nippothana. 

Pothita  (&  Pothita)  [pp.  of  potheti]  beaten,  struck  Miln 
240  (of  cloth,  see  Kern.  Toev.  s.  potheti)  ;  J  iir.423 
(maiica;  v.  1.  BB  pappot")  KhA  173  (°tulapicu  cotton 
beaten  seven  times,  i.  e.  very  soft ;  v.  1.  pothita,  see 
App.  p.  877);  DhA  1.48  (su°) ;  PvA  174.  —  Cp.  pari- 
pothita. 

Potheti  (&  Potheti)  [fr.  puth  =  sputh]  i.  to  beat,  strike 
Sn  682  (bhujani  =  appotheti  SnA  485);  J  1.188,  483 
(th)  11.394:  VI. 548  (=akoteti);  DhA  1.48;  n.27  (th), 
67  (th)  :  VvA  68  (th) ;  P\-A  65  (th).  —  2.  to  snap  one's 
fingers  as  a  token  of  annoyance  D  11.96  ;  or  of  pleasure 
J  III. 285  (anguliyo  pothesi).  —  pp.  pothita.  —  Caus.  II. 
pothapeti  (poth°)  to  cause  to  be  beaten  or  flogged  Miln 
221  ;  DhA  1.399.  —  Cp.  pappotheti. 

Pa^a^  (nt.)  [=pona*?]  only  in  cpd.  danta°  a  tooth  pick 
Vin  iv.go ;  J  iv.69 ;  Miln  15;  SnA  272.  As  danta- 
ponaka  at  Davs  1.57.  —  kQta-pona  at  Vism  268  read 
°gona. 

PoQa^  ('idj.)  [fr.  pa -(- ava -)- nam,  cp.  ninna  &  Vedic  pra- 
vana]  i.  sloping  down,  prone,  in  anupubba"  gradually 
sloping  (of  the  ocean)  Vin  11.237  =A  iv.198  sq.=Ud  53. 
—  2.  (-°)  sloping  towards,  going  to.  converging  or 
leading  to  Nibbana ;  besides  in  var.  phrases,  in  general 
as  tanninna  tappona  tappabbhara,  "  leading  to  that 
end."  As  nibbana°  e.  g.  at  M  1.493  ;  S  v. 38  sq.  :  A 
III. 443 ;  cp.  Vv  84^^  (nekkhamma°-nibl5ana-ninna 
VvA  348);  tag°  Ps  11. 197;  thane  PvA  190;  viveka° 
A  iv.224,  233;  V.175;  samadhi"  Miln  38;  kig° 
M  1.302. 

Pojjika  (adj.)  [fr.  pona^]  that  which  is  prone,  going  prone  ; 
DA  1.23  where  the  passage  is  "  tiracchana-gata-pana- 
poijika-nikayo  cikkhallika-nikayo  ti,"  quoted  from  S 
III.  152,  where  it  runs  thus:  "  tiracchana-gata  pana  te 
pi  bhikkhave  tiracchanagata  pana  citten'  eva  cittata." 
The  passage  is  referred  to  with  ponika  at  KhA  12, 
where  we  read  "  tiracchana-gata  pana  ponika-nikayo 
cikkhallika-nikayo  ti."  Thus  we  may  take  ponika- 
nikaya  as  "  the  kingdom  of  those  which  go  prone  " 
(i.  e.  the  animals). 

Pota^  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  pota,  see  putta  for  etym.]  the  young 
of  an  animal  J  H.406  (°sukara) ;  Cp.  i.io*  (udda°)  : 
SnA  125  (siha°). 

Pota^  [Epic  Sk.  pota  :  dial,  form  for  plota  (?),  of  pla]  a 
boat  Davs  v.58  ;  VvA  42. 

l?ota''  [etym.  ?]  a  millstone,  grindstone,  only  as  nisada° 
Vin  1.20 1  ;  Vism  252. 

Pfltaka  {-")  [fr.  pota^]  I.  the  voung  of  an  animal  M  1.104 
(kukkuta°);   J   1.202   (supanna"),  218  (hatthi°)  :  11.288 


(assa°  colt);  in.  174  (sakuna") ;  PvA  152  (gaja°).  —  f. 
potika  J  1.207  (har)sa°)  :  iv.188  (miisika").  —  2.  a  small 
branch,  offshoot,  twig :  in  amba°  young  mango  sprout 
DhA  III. 206  sq.  ;  arani"  small  firewood  Miln  53. 

Pottha*  [?]  poor,  indigent,  miserable  J  n.432  (=potthaka- 
pilotikaya  nivatthata  pottho  C.  :  v.  1.  potha).  See  also 
*ponti,  with  which  ultimately  identical. 

Pottha^  [later  Sk.  pusta.  etym.  uncertain  ;  loan-word  ?] 
modelling,  only  in  cpd.  °kamma  plastering  (i.  e.  using 
a  mixture  of  earth,  lime,  cowdung  &  water  as  mortar) 
J  VI. 459  :  carving  DhsA  334  :  and  °kara  a  modeller  in 
clay  J  1.71.     Cp.  potthaka'. 

Potthaka^  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  pustaka]  i.  a  book  J  1.2  (aya° 
ledger);  in. 235,  292  ;  iv.299.  487;  VvA  117.  —  2.  any- 
thing made  or  modelled  in  clay  (or  wood  etc.).  in  rupa° 
a  modelled  figure  J  vi.342  ;  ThA  257  ;  DA  1.198  ;  Sdhp 
363.  383.     Cp.  pottha^ 

Potthaka'  (nt.)  [etym.  ?]  cloth  made  of  makaci  fibre 
Vin  1.306  (cp.  Vin.  Texts  11.247)  '■  ^  1.246  sq.  ;  J  iv.25i 
(=ghana-sataka  C.  ;  v.  1.  sana°) ;  Pug  33. 

Potthanika  (f.)  [fr.  puth?]  a  dagger  (=potthani)  Vin 
II.  190  =DA  1. 1 35  (so  read  here  with  v.  1.  for  T.  °iya). 

Potthani  (f.)  ^fr.  puth  ?]  a  butcher's  knife  J  vi.86  (magsa- 
kotthana°).   iii   (id.). 

Pothujjanika  (adj.)  [fr.  puthujjana]  belonging  to  ordinary 
man,  common,  ordinal^,  in  2  comb""  viz.  (i)  phrase 
hina  gamma  p.  anariya  Vin  i.io;  S  iv.330  ;  A  v. 2 16; 
(2)  with  ref.  to  iddhi  Vin  11. 183  ;  J  1.360  ;  Vism  97.  — 
Cp.  Vin.  Texts  111.230.  The  BSk.  forms  are  either 
parthag-janika  Lai.  Vist  540,  or  prathub-janika  MVastu 
in. 331. 

Pothetva  at  J  11. 404  (ummukkani  p.)  is  doubtful.  The 
vv.  11.  are  yodhetira  &  sodhetva  (the  latter  a  preferable 
reading). 

Poddava  see  gama°. 

Ponobhavika  (adj.)  [fr.  punabbhava,  with  preservation  of 
the  second  o  (puno>punah)  see  puna]  leading  to 
rebirth  M  1.48,  299,  464,  532  ;  S  in. 26  ;  iv.186  ;  D  in. 57  ; 
A  II.  1 1  sq.,  172;  III. 84,  86;  v.88  ;  Nett  72;  Vism  506; 
VbhA  no. 

Ponti  (vv.  II.  pothi.  sonti)  Th  2.  422,  423  is  doubtful ;  the 
expl"  at  ThA  269  is  "  pilotikakkanda,"  thus  "  rags  (of 
an  ascetic),"  cp.  J.P.T.S.  1884.  See  also  pottha\  with 
which  evidently  identical,  though  misread. 

Poiava  (adj.)  [=puraiia,  cp.  Epic  Sk.  paurana]  old, 
ancient,  former  D  1.71.  238  ;  S  11.267  :  Sn  313  ;  Dh  227 
(cp.  DhA  in. 328)  :  J  11.15  ("kale  in  the  past);  VbhA  i 
fatthakatha),  523  (id.);  KhA  247  (°patha)  ;  SnA  131 
(id.);  DhA  1.17;  PvA  i  (°atthakatha),  63.  —  Porana 
(pi.)  the  ancients,  ancient  authorities  or  writers  Vism 
passim  esp.  Note,  764  ;  KhA  123,  158  ;  SnA  291,  352, 
604  ;  VbhA  130,  254,  299,  397,  5I3- 

Pora^aka  (adj.)  [fr.  porana]  i.  ancient,  former,  of  old 
(cp.  purana  i)  J  in. 16  (°pandita)  ;  PvA  93  (id.).  99 
(id.);  DhA  1.346  (kula-santaka).  —  2.  old,  worn,  much 
used  (cp.  purana  2)  J  iv.471  (magga). 

Porin  (adj.)  [fr.  pora  =  Epic  Sk.  paura  citizen,  see  pura. 
Semantically  cp.  urbane>urbanus>urbs ;  poIite  = 
7roAiri|i>m'iXtf.  For  pop.  etym.  see  DA  1.73  &  282] 
belonging  to  a  citizen,  i.  e.  citizenlike,  urbane,  polite, 
usually  in  phrase  pori  vaca  polite  speech  D  1.4,  114; 
S  1.189  ;  11.280=  A  11.5 1  ;  A  in.i  14  ;  Pug  57  ;  Dhs  1344  ; 
DA  1.75,  282  ;  DhsA  397.  Cp.  BSk.  pauri  vaca  MVastu 
in. 322. 


Porisa 


98 


Poseti 


Porisa^  (adj.-n.)  [abstr.  fr.  purisa.  for  'paurusa  or  *puru- 
sya)]  I.  (adj.)  human,  fit  for  a  man  Sn  256  (porisa 
dhura),  cp.  porisiya  &  poroseyya.  —  2.  (m.)=  purisa, 
esp.  in  sense  of  purisa  2,  i.  e.  servant,  used  collectively 
(abstract  form"  like  Ger.  dienerschaft,  E.  service  = 
servants)  "servants"  esp.  in  phrase  dasa-kammakara- 
porisa  Vin  1.240;  A  1. 145,  206;  n.78  ;  in. 45,  76,  260; 
DhA  :v.  I  ;  dasa°  a  servant  Sn  769  (three  kinds  mentioned 
at  Nd'  II.  viz.  bhataka  kamraakara  upajivino) ;  raja° 
king's  service,  servant  of  the  king  D  1. 135:  A  iv.286, 
322  ;  sata°  a  hundred  servants  Vism  121.  For  purisa  in 
uttama°  ( =mahapurisa)  DD  97  (cp.  DhA  11. 188).  Cp. 
posa. 

Porisa''  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  purisa,  *paurusyai3,  cp.  porisiya 
and  poroseyya]  i .  business,  doing  of  a  man  (or  servant, 
cp.  purisa  2),  service,  occupation  ;  human  doing,  activity 
M  1.85  (raja°) ;  Vv  63"  ( =purisa-kicca  VvA  263);  Pv 
IV.3''*  (utthana°  =  purisa-viriya,  purisa-kara  PvA  252). 
—  2.   height  of  a  man  M.  1.74,  187,  365. 

Porisata  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  porisa],  only  in  neg.  a°  inhuman  or 
superhuman  state,  or :  not  served  by  any  men  (or 
servants)  VvA  275.     The  reading  is  uncertain. 

Porisada  [fr.  purisa+  ad  to  eat]  man-eater,  cannibal 
J  V.34  sq.,  471  sq.,  486,  488  sq.,  499,  510. 

Porisadaka  =  porisada  J  v. 489.     Cp.  purisadaka  J  v.91. 

Porisiya  (adj.)  [fr.  purisa,  cp.  porisa  &  poroseyya]  i.  of 
human  nature,  human  J  iv.213.  —  2.  Of  the  height  of 
man  Vin  11. 138. 

Poroseyya  =  porisiya  (cp.  porisa'  i)  fit  for  man,  human 
M  1.366.  The  word  is  somewhat  doubtful,  but  itf  all 
likelihood  it  is  a  derivation  fr.  pura  (cp.  porin  ;  Sk. 
•paura),  thus  to  be  understood  as  *paurasya>*porasya 
>  *poraseyya  >  *poroseyya  with  assimilation.  The 
meaning  is  clearly  "  very  fine,  urbane,  fashionable  "  ; 
thus  nol  derived  from  purisa,  although  C.  expl'^  by 
"  puris'  anucchavikar)  yanar)  "  (M.  1. 561).  The  passage 
runs  "yanar)  poroseyyar)  pavara-mani-kundalai)  "  ; 
with  vv.  11.  voropeyya  &  oropeyya.  Neumann  accepts 
oropeyya  as  reading  &  translates  (wrongly)  "  beltide  "  : 
see  Mittl.  Slg-  ^1921  ;  vol.  11.  pp.  45  &  666.  The  reading 
poroseyya  seems  to  be  established  as  lectio  difiicilior. 
On  form  see  also  Trenckner,  Notes  75. 

Porohita  =  purohita;  DhA  1.174  i'^-  '•  BB  pur°). 

Porohacca  (nt.)  [fr.  purohita]  the  character  or  office  of  a 
family  priest  D  11.243.  As  porohicca  at  Sn  618  (  =  puro- 
hita-kamma  SnA  466).     Cp.  Trenckner,  Notes  75. 


Posa'  [contraction  of  purisa  fr.  •pursa>*pussa>*possa> 
posa.  So  Geiger,  P.Gr.  30^]  ==  purisa,  man  (poetical 
form,  only  found  in  verse)  Vin  1.230;  S  1.13,  205  = 
J  III. 309  ;  A  IV. 266  ;  Sn  no,  662;  Dh  104,  125  icp. 
DhA  III. 34)  ;  J  V.306  ;  vi.246,  361.  —  peso  at  J  in. 331  is 
gen.  sg.  of  pur)S  =  Sk.  pugsah. 

Po;a'  (adj.)  [  =  *po?ya,  grd.  of  poseti,  pu?]  to  be  fed  or 
nourished,  only  in  dup°  difficult  to  nourish  S  1.61. 

Posaka  (adj.)  [fr.  posa^j  nourishing,  feeding  A  1.62,  132  = 
It  no  (apadaka-l-)  ;  f.  °ika  a  nurse,  a  female  attendant 
Vin  11.289  (apadika-l- ). 


.  in  su°  &  dup°  easy  & 


Fosata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  posa"]  only 
difficult  support  Vin  11. 2. 

Posatha  =  uposatha  [cp.  BSk.  posadha  Divy  116,  121,  and 
Prk.  posaha  (posahiya=posathika)  Pischel,  Prh.  Gr. 
§  141]  J  1V.329;  VI. 119. 

Posathika  =  uposathika  J  iv.329.  Cp.  anuposathika  & 
an  vaddhamasar) . 

Posana  (nt.)  [fr.  pu?]  nourishing,  feeding,  support  VvA 
137- 

Posapeti  &  Posaveti  [Cans.  II.  fr.  poseti]  to  have -brought 
up,  to  give  into  the  care  of,  to  cause  to  be  nourished 
Vin  1.269  (PP-  posapita) »:!  DA  1.133  (posavita,  v.  1. 
posap"). 

Posavanika  &  °ya  (adj.-nt.)  [fr.  posavana  =  posapana  of 
Caus.  posapeti]  i.  (adj.)  to  be  brought  up,  being  reared, 
fed  Vin  1.272;  J  in.  134,  432.  -°iya  DhA  111.35  ; 
J  111-35  :  J  111.429  (&°iyaka).  —  2.  (nt.)  fee  for  bringing 
somebody  up,  allowance,  money  for  food,  sustenance 
J  n.289;  DhA  1V.40  ;  VvA  158  (°mula).  -°iya 
J  I-191- 

Posita  [pp.  of  poseti]  nourished,  fed  Cp.  111.3';  VvA  173 
(udaka°). 

Positng  at  Vin  11. 151  stands  for  phusitur)  "  to  sprinkle," 
cp.  Vin.  Texts  III. \b<i.     See  phusati". 

Posin  (-°)  (adj.)  [fr.  poseti]  thriving  (on),  nourished  by 
Vin  1.6  ;  D  1.75  ;  S  1.138  ;  Sn  65  (anafifia"  cp.  Nd'  39), 
220  (dara°) ;  DA  1.2 19. 

Poseti  [pn?]  to  nourish,  support,  look  after,  bring  up,  take 
care  of,  feed,  keep  Vin  1.269  ;  S  1.181  ;  A  i.i  17  ;  J  1.134  ; 
111.467  ;  Nd'  36  ;  Vism  305  ;  VvA  138,  299.  —  pp.  posita. 
—  Caus.  posapeti. 


CORRIGENDA 

CORRECTIONS   AND   ADDITIONS 

TO  PART  I. 

Page    X,  under  ih  add :  Sammoha-Vinodani,  P.T.S.  1923  (VbhA). 
„      xi,       „       3     ,,       Path  of  Purity,  P.T.S.  trsl.  1923,  istpt,  (Vism.  Trsl.). 
xii,       ,,  B,  I     ,,       VbhA  =  Sammoha-Vinodani  ...   ib. 
Vism.  Trsl.  =  Path  of  Purity  ...  3. 
„     17,  column  I,  under  addha-ratta  change  J  1.164  into  1.264. 
,,      27,       ,,        2,       ,,     adhikarana  ceai  unrfee  yatva°  ■  yato+adhi/or  yat+adhi. 

76,       ,,        I,       ,,     arana^  cross  out  No.  i  be/ore  (adj.). 
>>      76,       „        2,       ,,     arani  read  sadisa-vanna /oc  sadi-savai>ija. 
,,     91,       „        2,       ,,     ahai)  read  "  The  end.  form  in  the  sg." 

TO  PART  II. 

Page  103,  column  2,  under  abhata  add  .-  see  under  yatha-bhata. 
,,      123,       „         2,      „      isi  read  Bharadvaja/or  Bhara"  ;  and  insert  ref.  Vin.  1.245. 

155,  ,,         2,       „      ura  read  urasa/oc  urusa. 

TO  PART  III. 

Page  12,  column  2,  after  kathapeti  insert :  kathalika  (f.)  [fr.  knth,  to  boil]  kettle,  cooking  pot ;  in  danda°  (a  pot 

with  a  handle)  Vin  1.286  (v.  1.  kathalaka).  and  meda°  A  iv.377;  DhA  11. 179. 
„       31,       „  I,  under  kata-ko^cika  correct  1889  to  89. 

TO  PART  IV. 

37-38,  transfer  kara,  bottom  of  p.  37  to  />.  38,  col.  1,  line  3,  fr.  b. 

127,  after  tajjaniya  insert :  tajjari  a  linear  measure,  equal  to  36  anu's  and  of  which  36  form  one  rathaxe^u 

Vbh  343  ;  cp.  Abhp  194  (tajjari). 
150,  column  I,  under  dari  read  musika" /or  musika". 
154,       ..        2.      ,.      dam  read  daru-yanta  a  wooden  machine  (not  mill). 

156,  ,,        I,      ,,      dittha-mangalika  (of  puccha)  put  in  the  simple  trsl":  "  a  question  concerning  visible 
omina." 

190,       ,,        I,      „      nikhaoati  read  khanati/or  khanai. 


THE    PALI    TEXT    SOCIETY'S 
PALI-ENGLISH   DICTIONARY 


EDITED  BY 


T.  W.   RHYS  DAVIDS  F.B.A.  D.Sc.  Ph.D.  LL.D.  D.Litt. 
and  WILllAM  STEDE  Ph.D. 


Part  VI  (Ph.— M) 


PUBLISHED  BY 

THE  PALI  TEXT  SOCIETY 

LONDON 


First  published 

Reprinted 

Reprinted 


1924 
1948 
1952 


Ph. 


Phagga  [in  form=Vedic  phalgu  (small,  feeble),  but  in 
meaning  different]  a  special  period  of  fasting  M  1.39  = 
DA  1. 1 39.     See  also  pheggu. 

PhaggU^a  &  Phagguni  (f.)  [cp.  Vedic  phalguna  &  °i]  N. 
of  a  month  (Feb.  i,5"'-March  15"'),  marking  the  begin- 
ning of  Spring  ;  always  with  ref .  to  the  spring  full 
moon,  as  phagguna-punnama  at  Vism  418  ;  phagguni*^ 
J  1.86. 

Pha^a  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  phana]  the  hood  of  a  snake  Vin  1.9 1  1 

("hatthaka,  with  hands  like  a  snake's  hood) ;  J  111.347  ' 

(patthata°)  ;    DhA    111.231     (°r)    ukkhipitva) ;     iv.133.  1 

Freq.  as  phanai]   katva   (only  thus,  in  ger.)  raising  or  i 
spreading  its  hood,  with  spread  hood  J  11.2  74;  vi.6 ; 

Vism  399  ;  DhA  11.257.  j 

Phanaka  [fr.  phana]  an  instrument  shaped  like  a  snake's  i 

hood,  used  to  smooth  the  hair  Vin  11.107.  ' 

! 

PhaQijjaka  [etym.  ?]  a  kind  of  plant,  which  is  enum''  at  ' 

Vin  iv.35=DA  1.81  as  one  of  the  aggabija,  i.  e.  plants  1 
propagated  by  slips  or  cuttings,  together  with  ajjuka 

&  hirivera.     At    J    vi.536  the  C.  gives  bhutanaka  as  j 
expl".     According  to  Childers  it  is  the  plant  Samirana. 

Phandati  [spand,  cp.  Gr.  (r^ataiu  to  twitch,  atpoSpos 
violent ;  Lat.  pendeo  "  pend  "  i.  e.  hang  down,  cp. 
pendulum;  Ags.  finta  tail,  lit.  mover,  throbber]  i.  to 
throb,  palpitate  D  1.52  =M  1.404,  cp.  DA  1.159  ;  Nd'  46. 
—  2.  to  twitch,  tremble,  move,  stir  J  11.234;  vi.113 
(of  fish  wriggling  when  thrown  on  land). — Caus.  II. 
phandapeti  to  make  throb  D  1,52  =M  1.404.  —  pp 
phandita  (q.  v.).  Cp.  pari",  vi°,  sam".  The  nearest 
synonym  is  calati. 

Phandana  [fr.  phandati,  cp.  Sk.  spandana]  i.  (adj.) 
throbbing,  trembling,  wavering  Dh  33  (phandanaQ 
capalai)  cittag) ;  J  vi.528  ("maluva  trembling  creeper)  ; 
DhA  1.50  (issa°  throbbing  with  envy).  —  2.  (m.)  N.  of 
a  tree  Dalbergia  (aspen  ?)  A  1.202  ;■  J  iv.208  sq.  ;  Miln 
173.  —  3.  (nt.)  throb,  trembling,  agitation,  quivering 
J  VI. 7  ("mattar)  not  even  one  throb ;  cp.  phandita)  ; 
Nd'  46  (tanha  etc.). 

Phandana  (f  )  [fr.  phandati]  throbbing,  agitation,  move- 
ment, motion  SnA245  (calanaH-) ;  DA  i.i  1 1  ;  Nett  88  C.  ; 
cp.  injana. 

Phandita  (nt.)  [pp.  of  phandati]  throbbing,  flashing; 
throb  M  11.24  (°matta  "  by  his  throbbings  only  ")  ;  pi. 
phanditani  "  vapourings,"  imaginings  Vbh  390  (where 
VbhA  513  only  says  "  phandanato  phanditai)  ")  cp. 
Brelhrer,  344. 

Phanditatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  phandita]  =  phandana  S  v. 315 
( =ii^jitatta). 

Pharava  (adj.-nt.)  [fr.  pharati]  i.  (adj.)  pervading, 
suffused  (with),  quite  full  (of)  Miln  345.  —  2.  (nt.) 
pervasion,  suffusion,  thrill  J  1.82  ("samattha  metta- 
citta) ;  Nett  89  (piti°  etc.,  as  m.,  cp.  pharanata) ;  DhsA 


166  (°plti  all-pervading  rapture,  permeating  zest;  cp. 
piti  pharanata).  —  Cp.  anu°. 

Pharanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  pharana]  thrilling,  suffusing,  pervad- 
ing, filling  with  rapture  VvA  16  (dvadasa  yojanani 
"pabho  sarira-vanno). 

Pharanata  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  pharaija]  suffusion,  state  of  being 
pervaded  (with),  only  -°  in  set  of  4-fold  suffusion,  viz. 
piti°  of  rapture,  sukha°  of  restful  bliss,  ceto°  of  [tele- 
pathic] consciousnss,  aloka°  of  light,  D  111.2  77  ;  Ps  1.48  ; 
Vbh  334  ;  Nett  89. 

Pharati  [sphur  &  sphar,  same  root  as  in  Gr.  airnipui  to 
twitch;  Lat.  sperno  "spurn"  lit.  kick  away;  Ags. 
speornan  to  kick;  spurnan  =spur]  i.  (trs.)  to  pervade, 
permeate,  fill,  suffuse  Pv  i.io'<  (=vyapetva  titthati 
PvA  52)  ;  J  III. 371  (sakala-sarirar)) ;  v. 64  (C.  forpavati)  ; 
PvA  14  (okasag).  276  (obhasar)).  To  excite  or  stimu- 
late the  nerves  J  v. 293  (rasa-haraniyo  khobhetva 
phari :  see  under  rasa).  —  Often  in  standard  phrase 
metta-sahagatena  cetasa  ekai)  (dutiyar)  etc.)  disag 
pharitva  viharati  D  11. 186;  S  v.115  and  passim, 
where  pharitva  at  Vism  3o8=VbhA  377  is  expl"*  by 
phusitva  arammanar)  katva.  Cp.  BSk.  ekarj  disag 
spharitvopasampadya  viharati  MVastu  111.213.  Also 
in  phrase  pitiya  sarirag  pharati  (aor.  phari)  to  thrill 
the  body  with  rapture,  e.  g.  J  1.33  ;  v. 494  ;  DhA  ii.i  18  ; 
IV.  102.  —  2.  [in  this  meaning  better  to  be  derived  from 
sphar  to  spread,  expand,  cp.  pharita  &  phalita]  to  spread, 
make  expand  J  1.82  (metta-cittag  phari).  —  3.  [prob. 
of  quite  a  diff.  origin  and  only  taken  to  pharati  by  pop. 
analogy,  perhaps  to  phal  =  sphat  to  split;  thus  katth'- 
atthag  pharati  =  to  be  split  up  for  fuel]  to  serve  as,  only 
with  "atthag  in  phrases  aharatthag  ph.  (after  next 
phrase)  to  serve  as  food  Miln  152  ;  katthatthag  ph.  to 
serve  as  fuel  A  11.95=5  iii.93  =  It  90=]  1.482;  kha- 
daniyatthag  &  bhojaniyatthag  ph.  to. serve  as  eatables 
Vin  1.2(11  (so  to  be  read  in  preference  to  °attag).  —  pp. 
pharita,  phurita  &  phuta  ;  cp.  also  phuttha  ;  see  further 
anu°.  pari°. 

Pharasu  Fcp.  Vedic  para^u  =  Gr.  iriXiKvs ;  on  p>ph  cp. 
Prk.  pharasu  &  parasu,  Pischel  Gr.  §  208  ;  Geiger,  Gr. 
§  40]  hatchet,  axe  A  111.162;  J  1.199.  399;  11.409; 
v.500 ;  DhA  11.204;  PvA  277.  The  spelling  parasu 
occurs  at  S  v. 441  &  J  111.179. 

Pharita  [pp.  of  pharati]  i.  being  pervaded  or  permeated 
(by)  VvA  68  (mettaya).  —  2.  spread  (out)  J  vi.284 
(kittisaddo  sakala-loke  ph.).  —  Cp.  phuttha  &  phalita. 

Pharusa  (adj.)  [cp.  Vedic  parusa,  on  ph.>p  see  pharasu, 
on  attempt  at  etym.  cp.  Walde,  Lat.  Wlb.  s.  v.  fario] 
I.  (lit.)  rough  Pv  II. 4'.  —  2.  (fig.)  harsh,  unkind,  rough 
(of  speech)  Vin  11.290  (canda-l-);  Pv  11.3*  ;  111.5' ; 
J  v.296 ;  Kvu  619.  In  comb"  with  vaca  we  find 
both  pharusa-vaca  and  pharusa-vaca  D  1.4,  138;  111.69 
sq.,  173,  232  ;  M  1.42  (on  this  and  the  same  uncertainty 
as  regards  pisuoa-vaca  see  Trenckner,  at  M  1.530). 
pharusa  vacana  rough  speech  PvA  15,  55,  83.  —  3.  cruel 
Pv  IV. 7«  (kamnia     daruna  PvA  265). 


99 


VI— I 


Phala 


100 


Phalina 


Phala'  (nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  phala,  to  phal  [sphall  to  burst,  thus 
lit.  "bursting,"  i.  e.  ripe  fruit;  see  plialati]  i.  (lit.) 
fruit  (of  trees  etc.)  Vv  84!^  (dumfi  nicca-phal'  upapanna, 
not  to  phalu,  as  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  phalu) ;  Vism  120. 
— amba°  mango-fruit  PvA  J73  sq.  ;  dussa"  (adj.)  having 
clothes  as  their  fruit  (of  magic  trees)  Vv  46^  (cp.  VvA 
199)  :  patta"  leaves  &  fruits,  vegetables  Sn  239  ;  PvA  86 
pavatta"  wild  fruit  D  i.ioi  ;  puppha"  flower  &  fruit 
J  III. 40.  rukkha''-upama  Th  i,  490  (in  simile  of  kama. 
taken  fr.  M  1.130)  lit.  "like  the  fruit  of  trees" 
is  expl''  by  ThA  28S  as  "  anga-paccanganai)  p(h)ali- 
bhanjan'  atthena,  and  trsl'*  according  to  this  interpre- 
tation by  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  as  "  fruit  that  brings  tlie  climber 
to  a  fall."  —  Seven  kinds  of  medicinal  fruits  are  given 
at  Vin  1.20 1  scil.  vilanga,  pippala.  marica,  haritaka, 
vibhitaka,  amalaka,  gothaphala.  At  Miln  333  a  set  of 
7  fruits  is  u.sed  metaphorically  in  .simile  of  the  buddha's 
fruit-shop,  viz.  sotapatti^,  sakadagami",  anagami", 
arahatta",  sunnata°  samapatti  (cp.  Cpd.  70),  ani- 
mitta°  samapatti,  appanihita"  samapatti.  —  2 .  a  testicle 
J  111.124  (dantehi  °r)  chindati  =purisabhavar)  naseti  to 
castrate);  vi.237  (uddhita-pphalo,  adj.,  =uddhata-bijo 
C),  238  (dantehi  phalani  uppateti,  like  above). — 
?>■  (fig-)  fruit,  result,  consequence,  fruition,  blessing. 
As  t.t.  with  ref.  to  the  Path  and  the  progressive  attain- 
ment (enjoyment,  fruition)  of  Arahantship  it  is  used  to 
denote  the  realization  of  having  attained  each  stage  of 
the  sotapatti,  sakadagami  etc.  (see  the  Miln  quot. 
under  i  and  cp.  Cpd.  45,  116).  So  freq.  in  exegetical 
literature  magga,  phala,  nibbana,  e.  g.  Tikp  155,  158; 
VbhA  43  &  passim.  —  In  general  it  immediately  pre- 
cedes Nibbana  (see  Nd^  no  645''  and  under  satipatthana), 
and  as  agga-phala  it  is  almost  identical  with  Araliant- 
ship.  Frequently  it  is  comb''  with  vipaka  to  denote 
the  stringent  conception  of  "  consequence,"  e.  g.  at 
E)  1.27,  58;  III. 160.  Almost  synonymous  in  the  sense 
of  "fruition,  benefit,  profit"  is  anisar)sa  D  ni.132  ; 
phala  at  Pv  1.126  =anisar|sa  PvA  64  —  Vin  1.293 
(anagami°);  11.240  (id.);  111.73  (arahatta°)  ;  D  1.51, 
57  sq.  (samafina") ;  III. 147.  170  (sucaritassa)  ;  M  1.477 
(appamada") ;  S  1.173  (Amata°)  ;  Pv  i.ii'"  (katuka")  ; 
11.83  (dana°);  iv.iSS  (mahap°  &  agga")  ;  Vism  345  (of 
food,  being  digested)  ;  PvA  8  (pufina°  &  dana°),  22 
(sotapatti"),  24  (issa-macchariya"). 

-atthika  one  who  is  looking  for  fruit  Vism  120. 
-apana  fruit  shop  Miln  333.  -4phala  [phala-l-aphala, 
see  a<  ;  but  cp.  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  33']  all  sorts  of  fruit,  lit. 
what  is  not  (i.  e.  unripe),  fruit  without  discrimina- 
tion ;  a  phrase  very  freq.  in  Jataka  style,  e.  g.  J  1.416  ; 
II. 160;  III. 127;  IV. 220  ;  307,  449,  V.313;  VI. 520  ;  DhA 
1. 106.  -asava  extract  of  fruit  VvA  73.  -uppatti 
ripening  PvA  29.  -esin  yielding  fruit  J  l.87=Th  i,  527, 
cp.  phalesin  MVastu  in. 93.  -ganda  see  palaganda. 
-ttha  "stationed  in  fruition,"  i.  e.  enjoving  the  result  or 
fruition  of  the  Path  (cp.  Cpd.  50)  Miln  342.  -dana  gift 
of  fruit  VbhA  337.  -dayin  giver  of  fruit  Vv  bf. 
-pacchi  fruit-basket  J  vi.560.  -paficaka  fivefold  fruit 
Vism  580;  VbhA  191.  -puta  fruit-basket  J  vi.236. 
-bhajana  one  who  distributes  fruit,  an  official  terra  in 
the  vihara  Vin  iv.38,  cp.  BSk.  phalacaraka.  -maya  see 
Sep.  -ruha  fruit  tree  Mbvs  82.     -sata  see  palasata. 

Phala-  is  spelling  for  pala  (a  certain  weight)  at  J  vi.510. 
See  pala  &  cp.  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  40. 

Phala^  [etym.  ?  Sk.  *phala]  the  point  of  a  spear  or  sword 
S  11.265  (tinha°).     Cp.  phala'-. 

Phalaka  [fr.  phal  =  *sphal  or  *sphat  (see  phalati),  lit.  that 
which  IS  split  or  cut  off  (cp.  in  same  meaning  "slab")  ;  cp. 
Sk.  sphatika  rock-crystal ;  on  Prk.  forms  see  Pischel, 
Prk.  Gr.  §206.  Ved.  phalaka  board,  phala  ploughshare  ; 
Gr.  amraXoi;  mroKiQ,  ^a\i<;  scissors  ;  Lat.  pellis  & 
spolium;  Ohg.  spaltan  =  split,  Goth,  spilda  writing 
board,  tablet;  Oicel.  spjald  board]  i.  a  flat  piece  of 
wood,  a  slab,  board,  plank  J  1.45 1    (a  writing  board. 


school  slate);  v.  155  (akkhassa  ph.  axle  board);  vi.281 
(dice-board),  pidhana"  covering  board  VbhA  244  = 
Vism  261  ;  sopana"  staircase,  landing  J  1.330  (mani°) ; 
Vism  313  ;  cp.  MVastu  1.249  ;  "asana  a  bench  J  i.igg  ; 
°kaya  a  great  mass  of  planks  J  11.91.  "atthara-sayana 
a  bed  covered  with  a  board  (instead  of  a  mattress) 
J  1.304,  317  ;  11.68.  °seyya  id.  D  1.167  ("  plank-bed  "). 
—  2.  a  shield  ]  111.237,  271  ;  Miln  355;  DhA  11. 2. — 
3.  a  slip  of  wood  or  bark,  used  for  making  an  ascetic's 
dress  (°cira)  D  1.167,  cp.  Vin  1.305.  ditto  for  a  weight 
to  hang  on  the  robe  Vin  11. 136.  —  4.  a  post  M  111.95 
(aggala"  doorpost) ;  ThA  70  (Ap.  v.  17). 

Phalaganda  is  spurious  writing  for  palaganda  (q.  v.). 

Phalata  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  phala]  the  fact  or  condition  of 
bearing  fruit  PvA  139  (appa°). 

Phalati  [phal  to  split,  break  open  =  *sphal  or  *sphat,  cp. 

phateti.  On  etym.  see  also  Liiders,  K.Z.  XLii,  198  sq.] 
I.  to  split,  burst  open  (intrs.)  A  1.77  (asaniya  phalan- 
tiya)  ;  usually  in  phrase  "  muddha  sattadha  phaleyya," 
a.s  a  formula  of  threat  or  warning  "  your  (or  my)  head 
shall  split  into  7  pieces,"  e.  g.  D  1.95  ;  S  1.50  ;  Sn  983  ; 
J  1.54;  IV. 320  (me);  v. 92  (=bhijjetha  C.) ;  Miln  157 
(satadha  for  satta") ;  DhA  1.41  (m.  te  phalatu  s.) ; 
VvA  68  ;  whereas  a  similar  phrase  in  Sn  988  sq.  has 
adhipateti  (for  *adhiphateti  =  phalati).  —  Caus.  phaleti 
(&  phateti).  —  pp.  phalita  &  phulla.  —  2.  to  become 
ripe,  to  ripen  Vin  11.108  ;  J  111.251  ;  PvA  185. 

Phalamaya  stands  in  all  probability  for  phalika-maya, 
made  of  crystal,  as  is  suggested  by  context,  which  gives 
it  in  line  with  kattha-maya  &  loha-maya  (&  atthi", 
danta°,  velu°  etc.).  It  occurs  in  same  phrase  at  all 
passages  mentioned,  and  refers  to  material  of  which 
boxes,  vessels,  holders  etc.  are  made.  Thus  at  Vin 
1.203  (of  afijani,  box),  205  (tumba,  vessel);  11. 115 
(sattha-danda,  scissors-handle),  136  (ganthika,  block 
at  dress).  The  trsl°  "  made  of  fruits  "  seems  out  of 
place  (so  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.),  one  should  rather  expect 
"  made  of  crystal  "  by  the  side  of  made  of  wood,  copper, 
bone,  ivory,  etc. 

Phalavant  (adj.)  [fr.  phala]  bearing  or  having  fruit  J 
III. 251. 

Phalasata  see  palasata. — At  J  vi.510  it  means  "gold- 
bronze"  (as  material  of  which  a  "  sovanna-kagsa"  is 
made). 

Phalika'  [fr.  phala]  a  fruit  vendor  Miln  331. 

Phalika-  &  °ka  (f)  [also  spelt  with  I;  cp.  Sk.  sphatika; 
on  change  f  >1  see  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  38'.  The  Prk.  forms 
are  phaliha  &  phaliya,  see  Pischel,  Gr.  §  206]  crystal, 
quartz  Vin  11. 112;  J  VI.119  (°ka  =pha]ika-bhittiyo 
C.)  ;  Vv  35'  ( =phalika-mani-maya  bhittiyo  VvA  160); 
78^  (°ka) ;  Miln  267  (1),  380  (1). 

Phalita'  (adj.)  [sporadic  spelling  for  palita]  grey-haired 
PvA  153. 

Phalita^  [PP-  of  phal  to  burst,  for  the  usual  phulla,  after 
analogy  with  phalita']  broken,  only  in  phrase  hadayag 
phalitag  his  heart  broke  DhA  1. 173;  hadayena  phali- 
tena  with  broken  heart  J  1.65. 

Phalita'  [PP-  of  phal  to  bear  fruit]  fruit  bearing,  having 
fruit,  covered  with  fruit  (of  trees)  Vin  ii.icS;  J  i  18; 
Miln  107,  280. 

Phalln  (adj.)  [fr.  phala]  bearing  fruit  J  v.242. 

Phalina  (adj.)  [fr.  phala,  phalin  ?]  at  J  v.92  is  of  doubtful 
meaning.  It  cannot  very  well  mean  "  bearing  fruit," 
since  it  is  used  as  Ep.  of  a  bird  ("sakuni).  The  Cy. 
expl°  is  sakuna-potakanag  phalinatta  (being  a  source 
of  nourishment  ?)  phaUna-sakuni."  The  v.  1.  SS  is 
phalina  &  palina. 


Phalima 


lOI 


Phalima 


Phalima  (adj.)  [fr.  phala]  bearing  fruit,  full  of  fruit 
J  III-493- 

Phaln  [cp.  Vedic  paru]  a  knot  or  joint  in  a  reed,  only  in 
cpd.  °bija  (plants)  springing  (or  propagated)  from  a 
joint  D  1.5  ;  Vin  iv.34,  35. 

Fhaleti  at  D  1.54  is  spurious  reading  for  paleti  (see  pala- 
yati),  expl''  by  gacchati  DA  1.165  ;  meaning  "  runs." 
not  with  trsl°  "  spreads  out  "  [to  sphar]. 

Phallava  is  spelling  for  pallava  sprout,  at  J  111.40. 

Phassa*  [cp.  Ved.  sparsa,  of  sprs :  see  phusati]  contact, 
touch  (as  sense  or  sense-impression,  for  which  usually 
photthabbai) ) .  It  is  the  fundamental  fact  in  a  sense- 
irapresgion,  and  consists  of  a  combination  of  the  sense, 
the  object,  and  perception,  as  expl""  at  M  i.iii  :  tinnar) 
(i.  e.  cakkhu,  rupa,  cakkhu-viiiiiana)  sangati  phasso ; 
and  gives  rise  to  feeling  :  phassa-paccaya  vedana.  (See 
paticca-samuppada  &  for  expl"  Vism  567;  VbhA  178 
sq.).  —  Cp.  D  1.42  sq.  ;  111.22S,  272,  276;  Vism  463 
(phusati  ti  phasso) ;  Sn  737,  778  (as  fundamental  of 
attachment,  cp.  SnA  517)  ;  J  v.441  (raja  dibba-phassena 
puttho  touched  bj'  the  divine  touch,  i.  e.  fascinated  by 
her  beauty  ;  puttho  =  phutto) ;  VbhA  i  77  sq.  (in  detail), 
193.  265  ;  PvA  86  (dup°  of  bad  touch,  bad  to  the  touch, 
i.  e.  rough,  unpleasant) ;  poet,  for  trouble  Th  i,  783. 
See  on  phassa :  Dhs.  trsl.  5  &  introd.  (Iv.)  bciii.  ;  Cpd. 
12.  14,  94. 

-ayatana  organ  of  contact  (6,  referring  to  the  several 
senses)  PvA  52.  -ahara  "touch-food,"  acquisition  by 
touch,  nutriment  of  contact,  one  of  the  3  aharas,  viz. 
phass",  mano-sancetana"  (n.  of  representative  cogita- 
tion) and  virifian°  (of  intellection)  Dhs  71-73  ;  one  of 
the  4  kinds  of  ahara,  or  "  food,"  with  ref.  to  the  3 
vedanas  Vism  341.  -kaya  (6)  groups  of  touch  or  con- 
tact viz.  cakkhu-samphasso,  sota°,  ghana",  kaya°, 
mano°  D  111.243.  -sampanna  endowed  with  (lovely) 
touch,  soft,  beautiful  to  feel  J  v.441  (cp.  phassita). 

Phassa'  (adj.)  [grd.  fr.  phusati,  corresp.  to  Sk.  spjsya]  to 
be  felt,  esp.  as  a  pleasing  sensation  ;  pleasant,  beautiful 
J  IV. 450  (gandhehi  ph.). 

Phassati  stands  for  phusati  at  Vism  52  7  in  def .  of  phassa 
("  phassati  ti  phasso  "). 

Phassana  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  phassa]  touch,  contact  with 
DhsA  167  (jhanassa  labho  .  .  .  patti  .  .  .  phassana 
sacchikiriya). 

Phassita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  phasseti=Sk.  sparsayati  to  bring 
into  contact]  made  to  touch,  brought  into  contact,  only 
in  cpd.  suphassita  of  pleasant  contact,  beautiful  to  the 
touch,  pleasant,  perfect,  symmetrical  J  1.220  (civara). 
394  (danta) ;  iv.188  (danf  avaranar));  v.197  (°^  the 
membrum  muliebre),  206  (read  "phassita  for  "phussita). 
21O  ("cheka-karana) ;  VvA  275  (as  e.xpl"  of  ativa 
sangata  Vv  64*).  —  Note.  Another  (doubtful)  phassita 
is  found  at  J  v. 252  (dhammophassito  ;  touched,  attained) 
where  vv.  11.  give  passita  &  phussita. 

Phasseti  [Caus.  of  phusati']  to  touch,  attain  J  v. 251  (raja 
dhammar)  phassayai)  =C.  phassayanto ;  vv.  11.  pa"  & 
phu°) ;  Miln  338  (amatai),  cp.  phusati),  340  (phassa- 
yeyya  Pot.).  —  Pass,  phassiyati  Vin  11. 148  (kavata  na 
ph.  ;  V.  1.  phussiy").  —  pp.  phassita  &  phussita-". 

'Phateti  is  conjectured  reading  for  pateti  in  phrase 
katthai)  pateti  M  1.2 1,  and  in  adhipateti  to  split  (see 
adhipata  &  vipata).  The  derivation  of  these  expres- 
sions from  pat  is  out  of  place,  where  close  relation  to 
phaleti  (phalati)  is  evident,  and  a  derivation  from 
phat=sphat,  as  in  Sk.  sphatayati  to  split,  is  the  only 
right  expl°  of  meaning.  In  that  case  we  should  put 
phal  =  8phat,  where  l  =  t,  as  in  many  Pali  words,  cp. 
phalika<  sphatika  (see  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  38').  The  Prk. 
correspondent  is  pha<Jei  (Pischel,  Cr.  §  2i'8). 


Phanita  (nt.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  phanita]  i.  juice  of  the  sugar 

cane,  raw  sugar,  molasses  (ucchu-rasEii)  gahetva  kata- 
phanitai)  VvA  180)  Vin  11. 177;  D  1.141  ;  Vv  35=8;  40*; 
J  1.33,  120,  227;  Miln  107;  DhA  11.57.  phanitassa 
putar)  a  basket  of  sugar  S  1.175  ;  J  iv.366  ;  DhA  iv.232. 
—  2.  (by  confusion  or  rightly?)  salt  J  ni.409  (in 
expl"  of  aIonika=phanita-virahita). 

-odaka  sugar  water  J   in. 372.     -puta  sugar  basket 
J  IV. 363- 

Phati  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  sphati,  fr.  sphay,  sphayate  to  swell, 
increase  (Idg.  *spe(i),  as  in  Lat.  spatium,  Ohg.  spuot, 
Ags.  sped  =  E.  speed  ;  see  Walde,  Lat.  Wtb.  s.  v.  spatium), 
pp.  sphita  =  P.  phita]  swelling,  increase  J  11.426  (=vad- 
dhi)  ;  Vism  271  (vuddhi-l-).  Usually  comb'i  with  kf, 
as  phati-kamma  increase,  profit,  advantage  Vin  11. 174  ; 
VbhA  334  &  phati-karoti  to  make  fat,  to  increase,  to 
use  to  advantage  M  1.220  =A  v. 347  ;  A  111.432. 

Pharaka  (adj.)  at  VvA  288  is  not  clear;  meaning  some- 
thing like  "bitter,"  comb*  with  kasata ;  v.  1.  paru'. 
Probably  =pharusaka. 

Pharnliya  at  Vbh  350  (in  thambha-exegesis)  is  faulty 
spelling  for  pharusiya  (nt.)  harshness,  unkindness,  as 
evidence  of  id.  passage  at  VbhA  469  shows  (with  expl° 
"  pharusassa  puggalassa  bhavo  pharusiyar)  "). 

Pharusaka  [fr.  pharusa,  cp.  Sk.  *parusaka  Mvy-ut  103,  143] 

1.  a  certain  flower,  the  (bitter)  fruit  of  which  is  used 
for  making  a  drink  Vin  1.246;  Vv  3321  =DhA  in. 316. — 

2.  N.  of  one  of  Indra's  groves  J  vi.278,  similarly  Vism 
424  ;  VbhA  439. 

Phala'  (m.  &  nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  phala]  ploughshare  S  1.169; 
Sn  p.  13  &  V.77  (expH  as  "phaleti  ti  ph."  SnA  147); 
J  1.94;  IV. 118  ;  V.104;  Ud  69  (as  m.) ;  DhA  1.395. 

Phala^  [to  phala^]  an  (iron)  board,  slab  (or  ball  ?),  maybe 
spear  or  rod.     The  word  is  of  doubtful  origin  &  mean- 
ing, it  occurs  always  in  the  same  context  of  a  heated 
:        iron  instrument,  several   times   in   correlation  with  an 
I       iron  ball  (ayogula).     It  has  been  misunderstood  at  an 
j       early  time,  as  is  shown  by  kapala  A  iv.70  for  phala. 
Kern  comments  on  the  word  at  Toev.  n.139.     See  Vin 
t       1.225  (phalo  divasantatto,  so  read;  v.  1.  balo  corr.  to 
balo ;    corresp.   with   gula)  ;    A    iv.70    (divasa-santatte 
ayokapale,  gloss  ayogule) ;  J  v.268  ;  v.  109  (phale  cira- 
ratta-tapite.  v.  1.  pale,  hale,  thale ;  corresp.  with  pakat- 
thita   ayogula),    id.    v.113    (ayomayehi   phalehi   pi|eti. 
v.  1.  valehi). 

Phala'  in  lona-maccha°  a  string  (?)  or  cluster  of  salted 
fish  Vism  28. 

Phalaka  (adj.)  [fr.  phaleti]  splitting;  one  who  splits  Vism 

413  (kattha°). 

Phalana  (nt.)  [fr.  phaleti]  splitting  J  1.432  (daru") ;  Vism 
500  (vijjhana°). 

Phalita  [=Sk.  spharita,  spharl  I.  made  open,  expanded, 
spread  J  in. 320  (-(- vikasita).  —  2.  split  (fr.  phaleti 
phal],  split  open  Vism  262  =VbhA  245  ("haliddi-vaniia). 

Pbaliphulla  [either  Intensive  of  phuUa,  or  Der.  fr.  pari- 
phulla  in  form  phaliphuUa]  in  full  blossom  M  1.218; 

:     J  1.52. 

I   Phalibhaddaka  is  spurious  spelling  for  pali°  at  J   11.162 
*        (v.  1.  patali-bhaddaka).     Cp.  Prk.  phalihadda  (  =  pari- 
bhadra  Pischel,  Gr.  §  208). 

Phalima  (adj.)  [either  fr.  Caus.  of  phal'  (phaleti).  or  fr. 
sphar  (cp.  pharita,  i.  e.  expanded),  or  fr.  sphay  (swell, 
increase,  cp.  sphara  &  spharl  bhavati  to  open,  expand)] 
expanding,  opening  blossoming  in  cpd.  aggi-nikasi-pha- 
lima  paduma  ]  in. 320  (where  Cy.  expl'"  by  phalita 
vikasita). 


Phaleti 


102 


Phusati 


Phaleti  [Caus.  of  phalati,  phal ;  a  variant  is  phateti  fr. 
sphati  which  is  identical  with  *(s)phal]  to  split,  break, 
chop,  in  phrases  i .  katthai)  phaleti  to  chop  sticks 
(for  firewood)  Vin  1.3 1  ;  J  11. 1 44  ;  P\- 11. g^^,  besides  which 
the  phrase  katthag  *phateti.  2.  sisar)  (muddha) 
sattadha  phaleti  (cp.  adhipateti  &  phalati)  DhA  1.17 
(perhaps  better  with  v.  1.  phal"),  134.  —  3.  (various;) 
A  1.204=5  11.88;  J  11.398;  Nd-  483;  Vism  379  (kuc- 
chig  ;  DhA  IV. 133  (hadayar)).  — pp.  phalita.  Caus.  II. 
phalapeti  to  cause  to  split  open  J  iii.i  j  i  ;  Miln  157  (v.  1. 
phalap^). 

Fhasu  (adj.)  [etym.  ?  Trenckner,  Notes  82  (on  Miln  14": 
corr.  J.P.T.S.  1908,  136  which  refers  it  to  Miln  13'*) 
suggests  connection  with  Vedic  prasu  enjoying,  one 
who  enjoys,  i.e.  a  guest,  but  this  etym.  is  doubtful ;  cp. 
phasuka.  A  key  to  its  etym.  may  be  found  in  the  fact 
that  it  never  occurs  by  itself  in  form  phasu,  but  either 
in  composition  or  as  °ka]  pleasant,  comfortable  ;  only 
neg.  a°  in  phrase  aphasu-karoti  to  cause  discomfort  to 
(dat.)  Vin  1V.29Q  ;  and  in  cpds.  'kama  anxious  for 
comfort,  desirous  of  (others)  welfare  D  111.1(14  ;  "vihara 
comfort,  ease  Vin  II. 127  ;  D  1.204  ;  Dhs  i348=Miln  367 
(cp.  DhsA  404)  ;  Miln  14  ;  Vism  33  ;  VbhA  270  ;  PvA  12. 

Phasu  at  Miln  146  (cp.  p.  425)  "  bhagga  phasu  "  is  un- 
certain reading,  it  is  not  phasuka  ;  it  may  represent  a 
(lasa  snare,  sling.  The  likeness  with  phasuka  bhagga 
(lit.)  of  J  1.493  is  only  accidental. 

Phasuka  (adj.)  [fr.  phasu.  Cp.  Prk.  phasuya ;  ace.  to 
Pischel,  Prk,  Gr.  §  208  Jain  Sk.  prasuka  is  a  distortion 
of  P.  phasuka.  Perhaps  phasu  is  abstracted  from 
phasuka]  pleasant,  convenient,  comfortable  J  in<343  ; 
iv.30  ;  DhA  11.92;  PvA  42.  — aphasuka  unpleasant, 
uncomfortable,  not  well  J  11.275,  395  ;  DhA  1.28  ;  11. 21. 
—  Note.  It  seems  probable  that  phasuka  represents  a 
Sk.  *sparsuka  (cp.  Pischel  §  62),  which  would  be  a  der. 
fr.  sprs  in  same  meaning  as  phassa^  ("  lovely  ").  This 
would  confirm  the  suggestion  of  phasu  being  a  secondary 
formation. 

Phasuka  (f)  [cp.  Sk  *parsuka  &  Ved.  parsva,  see  passa-] 
a  rib,  only  in  pi.  phasuka  Vin  1.74  (upaddha°  bhaii- 
jitabba),  in  phrase  sabba  te  phasuka  bhagga  J  1.493 
(lit.),  which  is  fig.  applied  at  Dh  154  (expl""  as  "  sabba 
avasesa-kilesa-phasuka  bhagga"  at  DhA  111.128),  with 
which  cp.  bhagga  phasu  at  Miln  146;  both  the  latter 
phrases  prob.  of  diff.  origin.  —  (adj.)  (-°)  in  phrase 
maha'passa  the  flank  (lit.  the  side  of  the  great  ribs) 
J  1. 164,  179;  III. 273  ;  abs.  maha°  with  great  ribs 
J  V.42  ;  uggata"  with  prominent  ribs  PvA  68  (for 
upphasulika  adj.  Pv  II. 1').  —  in  cpds.  as  phasuka",  e.  g. 
"atthini  the  rib-bones  (of  which  there  a'e  24)  Vism  254 
(v.  1.  pasuka")  ;  Vbh.\  237  ;  ^dvaya  pair  of  ribs  Vism  252  ; 
VbhA  235.  — See  also  pasuka,  pasula  &  the  foil. 

Phasulika  (f.)  [fr.  phasuji]  rib,  only  in  cpd.  upphasulika 
(adj.)  Pv  II. i^. 

Phasula  [for  phasuka]  rib  S  11.255  (phasu)-antarika). 

Phasu}!  [cp.  phasuka  &.  phasuja]  a  rib  M  1.80. 

Phiya  [etym.  unknown]  oar  Sn  321  (-t-aritta  rudder; 
expl"*  by  dabbi-padara  SnA  330);  J  iv.21  (°arittar)). 
See  also  piya^  which  is  the  more  freq.  spelling  of  phiya. 

Phlta  [pp.  of  sphay,  cp.  Sk.  sphita  &  see  phati]  opulent, 
prosperous,  rich  ;  in  the  older  texts  only  in  stock  phrase 
iddha  ph.  bahujana  (rich  &  prosperous  &  well-popu- 
lated) D  1. 21 1  (of  the  town  Nalanda)  ;  11. 146  (of  Kusa- 
vati)  ;  M  1.377  '■  (of  N'alanda)  11. 71  (of  country)  ;  S  11. 107 
(fig.  of  brahmacariyar)  ;  with  bahujafina  for  °jana) ; 
A  III. 2 15  (of  town).  By  itself  &  in  other  comb"  in  the 
Jatakas,  e.  g.  J  iv.135  (=samiddha);  vi.355  (v.  I.  pita). 
With  iddha  &  detailed  description  of  all  classes  of  the 
population  (instead  of  bahujana)  of  a  town  Miln  330. 


Phuta*  [pp.  of  pharati]  i.  (cp.  pharati^)  pervaded,  per- 
meated, thrilled  (cp.  pari")  D  1.73,  74  (pitisukhena ; 
T.  prints  phuta  ;  v.  1.  phuta  ;  v.  1.  at  DA  1.2 1  7  p(h)uttha) ; 
M  1.276  ;  J  1.33  (sarlrar)  pitiya  ph.) ;  DhA  11. 1 18  (pitiya 
phuta-sariro) ;  SnA  107  (referring  to  the  nerves  of 
taste).  —  2.  (cp.  pharati-)  expanded,  spread  out,  spread 
with  (instr.)  Vin  1.182  (lohitena) ;  J  v. 266  (in  niraya- 
passage  T.  reads  bhumi  yojana-satai)  phuta  titthanti, 
i.  e.  the  beings  fill  or  are  spread  out  over  such  a 
space;  C.  272  expl""  by  "  ettakai)  thanai)  anupharitva 
titthanti."  The  id.  p.  at  Nd^  405  =Nd^  304""'  reads 
bh.  yojana-satar)  pharitva  (intrs.  :  expanding,  wide) 
titthati,  which  is  the  more  correct  reading).  —  See  also 
ophuta  &  cp.  phuta^. 

Phu^a-  [pp.  of  sputh  to  expand,  blossom]  blossoming  out, 
opened,  in  full  bloom  Davs  iv.49  (°kumuda).  Cp. 
phutita. 

Phuta^  at  M  1.377  (sabba-vari',  in  sequence  with  varita. 
yuta,  dhuta)  is  unnecessarily  changed  by  Kern,  Toev. 
s.  V.  into  puta.  The  meaning  is  "  filled  with,  spread 
with,"  thus  =  phuta^,  cp.  sequence  under  ophuta.  The 
V.  1.  at  M  1.377  i^  puttha.  On  miswriting  of  phutta  & 
puttha  for  phuta  cp.  remark  by  Trenckner.  M  1.553. 
A  similar  meaning  ("  full  of,  occupied  by,  overflowing 
with  ")  is  attached  to  phuta  in  Avici  passage  A  1.159 
(Avici  maiifiephutoahosi),  cp.  Anagata  Vagsa  (J.P.T.S. 
1886,  v. 39)  &  remarks  of  Morris's  J.P.T.S-  1887,  165. 
—  The  same  passage  as  M  1.377  's  found  at  D  1.57, 
where  T.  reads  phutta  (as  also  at  DA  1.168),  with  vv.  11. 
puttha  it  phuta. 

Phutita  [for  photita,  pp.  of  *sphotayati,  sphnt]  i.  shaken, 
tossed  about,  burst,  rent  asunder,  abstr.  nt.  phuti- 
tattat)  being  tossed  about  Miln  116  (v.  1.  put  °). — 
2.  cracked  open,  chapped,  torn  (of  feet)  Th  2,  269  (so 
read  for  T.  phutika,  ThA  212  expl""  by  bahita  & 
has  v.  1.  niphutita). 

Phuttha  [pp.  of  phusati']  touched,  affected  by,  influenced 
by;  in  specific  sense  (cp.  phusati'  2)  "thrilled,  per- 
meated" Vin  1.200  (abadhena) ;  A  11. 174  (rogena) ; 
J  1.82  (mettacittena.  v.  1.  puttha);  v.441  (dibba- 
phassena)  ;  Vism  31  (°samphassa  contact  by  touch),  49 
(byadhina)  ;  VvA  6  (in  both  meanings,  scil.  pitiya  & 
rogena).     On  phuttha  at  D  1.57  see  phuta^.     Cp.  sam°. 

Phunati  [?]  to  shake,  sprinkle,  of  doubtful  spelling,  at 
J  VI.  108  (angarakasur)  ph.  ;  v.  1.  punanti  perhaps- 
better;  C.  expl""  by  vidhunati  &  okirati).  Perhaps 
we  should  read  dhunati. 

Phulaka  ( =pulaka)  a  kind  of  gem  VvA  1 1 1 . 

Phulla'  [pp.  of  phalati,  or  root  formation  fr.  phuU,  cp. 
phalita^]  blossoming,  in  blossom  J  v. 203.  Also  as 
Intensive  phaliphulla  "  one  mass  of  flowers"  M  1.218; 
J  1.52.     Note.  phuUa'  may  stand  for  phuta-. 

Phulla-  [pp.  of  phalati,  cp.  phalita']  broken,  in  phrase 
akhanda-phulla  unbroken  (q.  v.),  Pv  iv.  i"  and  passim. 

Phullita  [pp.  of  phuUati]  in  flower,  blossoming  J  v.214 
(for  phita=rich),  216  (su°-vana). 

Phusati'  [sprs,  fr.  which  sparsa  =  phassa  ;  cp.  also  phas- 
sati]  I.  (lit.)  to  touch  Vism  463  (phusati  ti  phasso) ; 
DA  1. 61  (aor.  phusl  =  metri  causa  for  phusi)  ;  Miln  157 
(grd.  aphusa  not  to  be  touched).  —  2.  (fig.)  [see  on  this 
term  of  Buddhist  ecstatic  phraseology  Cpd.  133'.  In 
this  meaning  it  is  very  closely  related  to  pharati,  as 
appears  e.  g.  from  the  foil,  expl""  of  Cys.  :  D  1.74 
parippharati  =samantato  phusati  DA  1.2 17  ;  D  Il.i86w 
pharitva  =phusitva  arammanar)  katva  Vism  308]  to 
attain,  to  reach,  only  in  specific  sense  of  attaining  to 
the  highest  ideal  of  religious  aspiration,  in  foil,  phrases  : 
ceto-samadhi;)  ph.  D  1.13=111.30,    108  etc.;   nirodhag 


Phusati 


103 


Phoseti 


D  1. 1 84;  samatha-samadhir)  Vv  i6*  (reads  aphusig  but 
should  prob.  be  aphusirj  as  VvA  84.  expH  by  adhi- 
gacchir)) ;  phalar)  aphussayi  (aor.  med.)  Pv  iv.i'*;  cp. 
PvA  243  ;  amatag  padag  Pv  iv.j*^  ;  amatat)  Miln  338 
(but  T.  reads  khippuii  phdsseti  a.)  ;  in  bad  sense  kappat- 
thitikai]  kammag  Miln  108  (of  Devadatta).  —  pp. 
phuttha.     Cp.  upa°. 

Phasati'  this  is  a  specific  Pali  form  and  represents  two 
Sk.  roots,  which  are  closely  related  to  each  other  and 
go  back  to  the  foil.  2  Idg.  roots  :  i.  Idg.  *sp(h)rj,  burst 
out,  burst  (forth),  spring,  sprinkle,  as  in  Sk.  sphurjati 
burst  forth,  parjanya  rain  cloud  ;  Gr.  (r^'ipnyfw  ;  Ags. 
spearca  =  E.  spark.  E.  spring,  sprinkle.  This  is  an 
enlargement  of  sphuT  (cp.  pharati,  phuttha,  phuta).  — 
2.  Idg.  *sprk  to  sprinkle,  speckle,  as  in  Sk.  pra$,  prsni 
speckled,  prsan,  prsati  spotted  antelope,  prsata  rain- 
drop;  Gr.  wiftKvoij  of  dark  (lit.  spotted)  colour;  Lat. 
spargere  =  Ger.  sprcngen.  To  this  root  belong  P. 
pasata,  phoseti,  paripphosaka,  phussa,  phusita.  — •  Inf. 
phusitur),  conjectured  reading  at  Vin  1.205  fo''  f. 
phositur)  (vv.  U.  positur)  &  dhovitut)),  &  Vin  11. 151  for 
T.  positug  ;  Vin.  Texts  111.169  translate  "  bespatter." 

Phasana  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  phusati'  i]  touch  ^'ism  463. 

Phusana  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  phusati'  2]  attainment,  gaining, 
reaching  Vism  278  ( =phuttha-tthana) ;  DhA  1.230 
(flaija°);  VvA  85  (samadhi°). 

Phasayati  [Caus.  of  pra?,  but  formed  fr.  P.  phusati-]  to 
sprinkle  (rain),  to  rain  gently,  drizzle  S  1.104  sq.,  154, 
184  (devo  ekag  ekag  ph.  "  drop  by  drop  ").  See  also 
anuphusayati  (so  read  for  "phusiyati). 

Phusita'  (nt.)  [either  pp.  of  phusati-  or  direct  correspon- 
dent of  Sk.  prsata  (see  pasata-)]  rain-drop  M  111.300  ; 
S  n.135  :  DhA  111.243.  The  Prk.  equivalent  is  phusiya 
(Pischel,  Gr.  §  208),  cp.  Ger.  sprenkeln>E.  sprinkle. 

Phusita-  [pp.  of  phusati^  2.  i.  e.  pru?,  cp.  Sk.  prusita 
sprinkled,  prsati  spotted  antelope]  spotted,  coloured, 
variegated  (with  flowers)  Sn  233  (°agga=supupphit' 
agga-sakha  KhA  192). 

Phns(s)ita''  [  =  phassita-,  Kern.  Toev.  s.  v.  takes  it  as  pp. 
of  'pugsayati]  touched,  put  on,  in  "aggaja  with  fastened 
(clinched)  bolts  (or  better:  door-wings)  M  1.76  (reads 
phassit"  ;  cp.  v.  1.  on  p.  535  phussit") ;  A  i.ioi  ;  Th  i,  385  ; 
J  VI. 5 10. 

Phositaka  (adj.)  (-")  [fr.  phusita')  having  raindrops,  only 
in  phrase  thulla°  deva  (the  sky)  shedding  big  drops  of 
rain  S  11.32  (reads  phuUa-phusitaka) ;  111.141  ;  A  1.243  ; 
11.140  ;  V.I  14  ;  Vism  259. 

Phussa'  [fr.  pu9  to  blossom,  nourish,  etc.  cp.  Ved.  pusya] 
I.  see  phussa^  2. — 2.  N.  of  a  month  (Dec. -Jan.) 
J  1.86.  N.  of  a  lunar  mansion  or  constellation  Vv  53* 
(=phussa-taraka  VvA  236).  —  Frequent  as  Np.,  cp. 
Vism  422,  and  comb"  like  °deva,  °mitta. 

Phussa^  [ger.  of  phusati']  touching,  feeling,  realising ; 
doubled  at  D  1.45,  54. 

Phussa^  (adj.-n.)  [grd.  formation  fr.  phusati^  2  ;  scarcely 
fr.  Sk.  pusya  (to  puj  nourish,  cp.  poseti),  but  meaning 
rather  "  speckled  "  in  all  senses.  The  Sk.  pu^ya- 
ratha  is  Sanskritisation  of  P.  phussa"]  i.  speckled, 
gaily-coloured,  "kokila  the  spotted  cuckoo  [Kern, 
Toev.  s.  v.  phussa  however  takes  it  as  "  male-cuckoo." 
Sk.  pugs-kokila]  J  v.419,  423  ;  VvA  57.  —  As  phussaka 
at  A  1. 188  (so  read  for  pussaka).  —  2.  in  sense  of 
"clear,  excellent,  exquisite"  (or  it  is  pusya  in  .sense 
of  "  substance,  essence  "  of  anything,  as  Geiger,  /'.  Cr. 


§  40  la  ?)  in  °ratha  [cp.  Sk.  puspa°,  but  prob.  to  be  read 
pusya"  ?]  a  wonderful  state  carriage  running  of  its  own 
accord  J  11.39  ;  in. 238  ;  iv.34  ,  v. 248  ;  vi.39  sq.)  v.  1. 
pussa") ;  PvA  74.  -raga  [cp.  Sk.  puspa-raga]  topaz 
Miln  118;  VvA  III.  — At  Nd'  90  as  v.  1.  to  be 
preferred  to  pussa°  in  °tila,  "tela,  "dantakattha,  etc. 
with  ref.  to  their  use  by  Brahmins. 

PheggU  [cp.  Vedic  phalgu  &  P.  phaggu  in  form]  acces- 
sory wood,  wood  surrounding  the  pith  of  a  tree,  always 
with  ref.  to  trees  (freq.  in  similes),  in  sequence  mula, 
sara,  pheggu,  taca,  papatika  etc.  It  is  represented  as 
next  to  the  pith,  but  inferior  and  worthless.  At  all 
passages  contrasted  with  sara  (pith,  substance).  Thus 
at  M  1. 192  sq.,  488  ;  D  in.51  ;  S  iv.168  ;  A  1.152  (pheggu -H 
sara,  v.  1.  phaggu) ;  11. 1 10  =Pug  52  ;  A  HI. 20  ;  J  ill. 431 
(opp.  sara);  Miln  267,  413  (tacchako  pheggug  apaha- 
ritva  sarag  adiyati). 

Phegguka  (-")  (adj.)  [fr  pheggu]  having  worthless  wood, 
weak,  inferior  M  1.488  (apagata",  where  "ka  belongs 
to  the  whole  cpd.) ;  J  III. 318  (a°-(-saramaya). 

Phegguta  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  pheggu]  state  of  dry  wood  ;  lack  of 
substance,  worthlessness  Pug  A  229. 

Phei^a  [cp.  Vedic  phena,  with  *ph  fr.  sp",  connected  with 
Lat.  spuma,  scum,  Ags.  fam=Ger.  feim=E.  foam] 
scum,  foam,  froth,  only  in  cpds.  viz.  : 

-uddehakag  (adv.)  (paccamana,  boiling)  with  scum 
on  top,  throwing  up  foam  M  111.167;  A  1.141  ;  Nd- 
304"'<';  J  III. 46 ;  Miln  357.  -patala  a  film  of  scum 
Vism  359  ;  VbhA  O5.  -pinda  a  lump  or  heap  of  foam 
S  III.  1 40  sq.  =Vism  479  (in  simile  of  rupa)  ;  Nd-  680  A"  ; 
Vism  40  (in  comp)  ;  VbhA  32  sq.  bubbulaka  a  bubble 
of  scum  Vism  171,  259,  345;  VbhA  242.  -mala  a 
wreath  or  garland  of  scum  Miln  117.  -malin  with 
a  wreath  of  scum  Miln  260.  -missa  mixed  with  froth 
Vism  263.     -vanna  colour  of  scum  Vism  263. 

Pheflaka  =  phena  Vism  254  ;  VbhA  237. 

Phota  [fr.  sphut,  cp.  Sk.  sphota]  swelling,  boil,  blister 
J  'V.457 ;  VI. 8  (v.  1.  pota  &  potha) ;  cp.  pota  bubble. 

Photaka=phota  Vism  258;  VbhA  242. 

Photana  "  applause,"  in  brahma-pphotana  at  DhA  111. 2  10 
should  be  taken  as  a-1-photana  (=apphotana). 

Phoseti  [Caus.  of  sphuti  'f  correct.  Maybe  mixed  with 
sphiirj.  The  form  apphotesi  seems  to  be  a-l-photeti  = 
Sk.  asphotayati]  to  shake,  toss  (or  thunder  ?)  only  at 
two  places  in  similar  formula,  viz.  devata  sadhukarar) 
adagsu,  brahmano  apphotesug  (v.  1.  appoth")  Miln  13, 
18;  Sakko  devaraja  appothesi  (v.  1.  appotesi),  Maha- 
brahma  sadhukarag  adasi  J  vi.486.  Perhaps  we 
should  read  potheti  (q.  v.),  to  snap  one's  fingers  (clap 
hands)  as  sign  of  applause.  At  DhA  in. 2  10  we  read 
fut.  apphotessami  (i.  e.  a-l-phot). 

Photthabba  (nt.)  [grd.  of  phusati]  tangible,  touch,  con- 
tact :  it  is  synonymous  with  phassa.  which  it  replaces 
in  psychol.  terminology.  Photthabbag  is  the  sense- 
object  of  kaya  (or  taca)  touch  ("  kayena  photthabbag 
phusitva  "  D  in. 226,  250,  269  ;  Nd^  p.  238  under  rupa). 
See  also  ayatana.  —  D  111.102  (in  list  of  ajjhattika- 
bahirani  ayatanani :  kayo  c' eva  photthabba  ca ;  with 
pi,  like  m.) ;  VbhA  79  ("dhatu). 

Phosita  [pp.  of  phoseti,  cp.  Sk.  prusita]  sprinkled  J  vi.47 
(candana",  v.  I.  pusita). 

Phoseti  [Caus.  of  phusati'^,  cp.  Sk.  prusayati-P.  phusa- 
yati]  to  sprinkle  (over)  Vin  11.205  ('"*•  phositug).  — 
pp.  phosita.     Cp.  pari". 


B. 


Ba  (indecl.)  the  sound  (&  letter)  b,  often  substituted  for 
or  replaced  byp  {&  ph) :  so  is  e.  g.  in  Bdhgh's  viewpahuta 
the  word  bahuta,  with  p  for  b  (KhA  207),  cp.  bakkula, 
badara,  badalata,  baddhacara,  bandhuka  2,  bala,  bali- 
yati,  bahuka,  bahuta,  billa,  bella;  also  paribandha  for 
paripantha ;  phala^.  Also  substituted  for  v,  cp.  bajja- 
yitva  v.l.  vajjetva  DAI,  4,  and  see  under  Nibb-. 

Baka  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  baka]  i.  a  crane,  heron  Cp.  iii.io^; 
J  1.205  (°sunika),  221,  476;  11.234;  111.252.  —  2.  N.  of 
a  dweller  in  the  Brahma  world  M  1.326 ;  S  1.142. 

Bakola  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  bakula,  N.  of  the  tree  Mimusops 
elengi,  and  its  (fragrant)  flower]  in  milata°-puppha  is 
V.  1.  KhA  60  (see  App.  p.  870  Pj.)  for  °akuli°,  which 
latter  is  also  read  at  Vism  260. 

Bakkula  [=vyakula?  Morris,  J.P.T.S.  :886,  94]  a  demon, 
uttering  horrible  cries,  a  form  assumed  by  the  Yakkha 
Ajakalapaka,  to  terrify  the  Buddha  Ud  5  (see  also 
akuli,  where  pakula  is  proposed  for  bakkula). 

Baijha  see  bandhati. 

Bajjhati  Pass,  of  bandhati  (q.  v.). 

Battigsa  (num.  card.)  [for  dvat-tigsa]  thirty -two  J  m.207. 

Badara  (m.  &  nt.)  [cp.  Ved.  badara  &  badarl]  the  fruit  of 
the  jujube  tree  (Zizyphus  jujuba),  not  unlike  a  crab- 
apple  in  appearance  &  taste,  very  astringent,  used  for 
medicine  A  1.130=  Pug  32  ;  A  111.76  ;  Vin  iv.76  ;  J  111.21  ; 
DhsA  320  (cited  among  examples  of  acrid  flavours) ; 
VvA  186.  SpeUing  padara  for  b"  ata  J  ^.363  ;  vi.529. 
-atthi  kernel  of  the  j.  SnA  247.  -pandu  light  yellow 
(fresh)  jujube-fruit  A  1.181  (so  read  for  bhadara"). 
-missa  mixture  or  addition  of  the  juice  of  jujube-fruits 
Vin  IV. 76.     -yusa  juice  of  the  j.  fruit  VvA  185. 

Badari  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  badari]  the  jujube  tree  J  11.260. 

Badalata  (f  )  [etym.  uncertain,  may  it  be  *padalata,  pa-f 
n.  ag.  of  dal  Caus.,  lit.  "  destroyer"?]  a  creeper  (with 
thorns  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.)  D  iii.87=Vism  418;  Bdhgh 
says  (see  Dial.  111.84)  "  a  beautiful  creeper  of  sweet 
taste." 

Baddha'  [pp.  of  bandhati]  i.  bound,  in  bondage  M  1.275  ; 
S  1. 133;  1V.91  ;  Sn  957  (interpreted  as  "baddhacara" 
by  Ndi  464);  Dh  324.  —  2.  snared,  trapped  J  n.153; 
III. 184;  IV. 251,  414.  —  3.  made  firm,  settled,  fastened, 
bound  (to  a  cert,  place)  KhA  60  ("pitta,  opp.  abaddha"). 

—  4.  contracted,  acquired  Vin  ill. 96.  —  5.  bound  to, 
addicted  or  attached  to  Sn  773  (bhavasata",  cp.  Nd^  30). 

—  6.  put  together,  kneaded,  made  into  cakes  (of  meal) 
J  III. 343  ;  v.46  ;  VI. 524.  —  7.  bound  together,  linked, 
clustered  DhA  1.304  kannika°  (of  thoughts).  —  9.  set, 
made  up  (of  the  mind)  DhA  i.ii  (manasag  te  b.). — 
Cp.  ati°,  anu°,  a°,  ni^  pati°,  vini°,  sam°. 

-aiijalika  keeping  the  hands  reverently  extended 
Davs  III. 30.  -rava  the  cry  of  the  bound  (or  trapped) 
J  IV. 279, 415  (v.  1.  bandhana").  -vera  having  contracted 
an  enmity,  hostile,  bearing  a  grudge  DhA  1.324. 


Baddha*  (nt.)  [fr.  bandhati]  a  leather  strap,  a  thong  Vin 
1.287  (T-  bandha  perhaps  right,  cp.  abandhana  3) ; 
PvA  127. 

Baddhacara  see  paddhacara. 

Badhira  (adj.)  [cp.  Vedic  badhira,  on  etym.  see  Walde, 

Lat.  Wtb.  s.  v.  fatuus,  comparing  Goth,  bau^s  and  M. 

Irish  bodar]  deaf  Vin  1.91,  322  ;  Th  i,  501  =  Miln  367; 

J  1.76  (jati°) ;  V.387  ;  VI.7  ;  DhA  1.312.     See  also  miiga. 

-dhatuka  deaf  by  nature  J  11.63  :  iv.146;  DhA  1.346. 

Bandha  (adj.)  [cp.  Vedic  bandha,  fr.  bandh]  i.  bond, 
fetter  It  56  (abandho  Marassa,  not  a  victim  of  M.) ; 
Ndi  328  (tanha°,  ditthi");  ThA  241.  —  2.  one  who 
binds  or  ties  together,  in  assa°  horsekeeper,  groom 
J  11.98  ;  V.441,  449  ;  DhA  1.392.  —  3.3  sort  of  binding  : 
mandala°  with  a  circular  b.  (parasol)  Vin  iv.338, 
salaka°  with  a  notched  b.  ibid.  —  4.  a  halter,  tether 
Dpvs  1.76.  —  Cp.  vinibandha. 

Bandhaka  as  v.  1.  of  vattaka  see  agsa°. 

Bandhaki  (f)  [fr.  bandhaka,  cp.  Epic  Sp.  bandhuki  a  low 
woman  =par)suka  &  svairini  Halay  2,  341]  an  unchaste 
woman  (lit.  binder)  Vin  iv.224  (pi.  bandhakiniyo),  265 
(id.);  J  v.425.  431  (va°). 

Bandhati  [Vedic  badhnati,  later  Sk.  bandhati,  Idg. 
*bhendb,  cp.  Lat.  offendimentum  i.  e.  band ;  Goth. 
bindan=Ohg,  bintan,  E.  bind;  Sk.  bandhu  relation; 
Gr.  Trfi'fopof;  father-in-law,  mlafia  bond,  etc.]  to  bind 
etc. —  I.  Forms:  Imper.  bandha  D  11.350;  pi.  ban- 
dhantu  J  1153.  Pot.  bandheyya  S  iv.198  ;  Vin  in. 45  ; 
Fut.  bandhayissati  Mhvs  24.  6  ;  Aor.  abandhi  J  111.232, 
&  bandhi  J  1.292;  DhA  1.182.  Ger.  bandhitva  Vin 
1.46  ;  S  IV. 200  ;  J  1.253,  428,  &  bandhiya  Th  2,  81.  Inf. 
bandhitug  Th  2,  299.  Caus.  bandheti  (see  above  Fut.) 
&  bandhapeti  (see  below).  — II.  Meanings — 1.  to  bind 
S  IV. 200  (rajjuya).  fig.  combine,  unite  DhA  11. 189 
(gharavasena  b.  to  give  in  marriage).  —  2.  to  tie  on, 
bind  or  put  on  to  (loc.)  Dhai.182  (dasante).  fig.  to 
apply  to,  put  to,  settle  on  DhA  11. 1 2  (mana.sai)  paradare). 
—  3.  to  fix,  prepare,  get  up,  put  together  J  iv.290 
(ukka) ;  also  in  phrase  caick'  iticakkai]  mane'  4timaiicaij 
b.  to  put  wheels  upon  wheels  &  couches  upon  couches 
J  11.331  ;  IV. 81  ;  DhA  iv.6i.  fig.  to  start,  undertake, 
begin,  make,  in  phrases  aghatag  b.  to  bear  malice 
DhA  11.21  ;  and  verag  b.  to  make  enmity  against  (loc.) 
J  11.352.  —  4.  to  acquire,  get  J  111.232  (atthai)  b.  = 
nibbatteti  C).  —  5.  to  compose  Miln  272  (suttag) ; 
J  11.33;  v. 39.  —  Caus.  II.  bandhapeti  to  cause  to  be 
bound  (or  fettered)  Vin  iv.224,  316  (opp.  mocapeti) ; 
Nd^  304™"  (bandhanena) ;  PvA  4,  113.  —  Pass,  baj- 
jhati Nd2  74  (for  bujjhati,  as  in  palabujjhati  to  be 
obstructed:  see  palibuddhati).  1.  Forms  Ind.  3"*  pi- 
bajjhare  Th  i,  137;  pret.  3^*  pi.  abajjhare  J  1428. 
Imper.  bajjhantu  S  iv.309  ;  A  v.284.  Pot.  bajjheyya 
S  1.228.  Aor.  bajjhi  J  11-37;  iv.414.  Ger.  bajjha  J 
IV.441,  498,  &  bajjhitva  J  11. 153;  iv.259  ;  v.442. -- 
II.  Meanings. —  i.  to  be  bound,  to  be  imprisoned  Sn  508 


104 


Bandhana 


105 


Bala 


(cp.  SnA  418);  J  1V.278.  —  2.  to  be  caught  (in  a  sling 
or  trap)  J  111.330;  iv.414.  —  3.  to  incur  a  penalty 
(with  loc  ,  e.  g.  bahudande)  J  iv.116.  —  4.  to  be  cap- 
tivated by,  struck  or  taken  by,  either  with  loc.  J  1.368 
(bajjhitva  &  bandhitva  in  Pass,  sense) ;  v.465  ;  or  with 
inslr.  J  1.428  :  IV. 259.  —  pp.  baddha  (q.  v.).  —  Cp.  ati°, 
anu",  a,  0°,  pati°,  sara°. 

Bandhana  (nt.)  [fr.  bandh,  cp.  Vedic  bandhana]  i.  bind- 
ing, bond,  fetter  Vin  1.2 1  ;  D  1.226,  245  (paiica  kama- 
guna) ;  111.176;  M  11.44;  S  1.8,  24  (Mara°),  35,  40; 
IV.201  sq.  (5  fold)  to  bind  the  king  of  the  Devas  or 
Asuras,  291  ;  Sn  532,  948;  Th  i,  414;  2,  356  (Mara°) 
Dh  345  sq.  ;  J  11. 139,  140  ;  in.59  =  PvA  4  ;  v. 285  ;  Nd^ 
304°'"  (var.  bonds,  andhu",  rajju°  etc.  cp.  Nd'  433); 
DA  1. 12 1  (with  ref.  to  kama).  —  2.  binding,  tying, 
band,  ligature ;  tie  (also  fig.)  Vin  1.204  (°suttaka  thread 
for  tying)  11. 135  (kaya°  waistband);  11. 117  ("rajju  for 
robes) ;  S  111.155  (vetta°  ligatures  of  bamboo  ;  cp.  v.51)  ; 
Sn  44  (gihi°,  cp.  Nd^  228  :  putta  ca  dasi  ca) ;  DhA 
1.4  (ghara°  tie  of  the  house)  ;  Kh.\  51  (patja").  —  3.  hold- 
ing together,  composition,  constitution  Vin  1.96  (sarira"), 
cp.  in. 28.  —  fig.  composition  (of  literature)  J  11.224 
(gatha*^).  —  4.  joining  together,  union,  company  DhA 
II. 160  (gana°  joining  in  companies).  —  5.  handle  Vin 
II. 135.  —  6.  piecing  together  Vin  1.254  ("mattena  when 
it,  i.  e.  the  stuff,  has  only  been  pieced  together,  see 
Vin.  Texts  11. 153  n.).  —  7.  strap  (?)  doubtful  reading  in 
at)sa°  (q.  V.)  Vv  33'°,  where  we  should  prefer  to  read 
with  V.  1.  "vattaka.  —  8.  doubtful  in  meaning  in  cpd. 
pagca-vidha-bandhana  "  the  fivefold  fixing,"  as  one 
of  the  torments  in  Niraya.  It  is  a  sort  of  crucifixion 
(see  for  detail  panca  3)  Nd^  304'"-  "  =  Nd'  404  ;  J  1. 174  : 
PvA  221  ;  VbhA  278.  In  this  connection  it  may  mean 
"  set,"  cp.  mula°.  —  On  use  of  bandhana  in  similes  see 
J.P.T.S.  1907,  115.     Cp.  vini°. 

-dgara  "  fetter -house,"  prison  D  1.72  ;  M  1.75  ;  Vin 
III. 151  ;  J  III. 326;  DhA  II. 152  ;  VvA  66;  PvA  153. 
-Agarika  prison-keeper,  head-jailer  A  11.207. 

Bandhaniya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  bandhati]  i.  to  be  bound  or 
fettered  Miln  186.  —  2.  apt  to  bind,  binding,  con- 
straining D  11.337  (cp.  Dial.  II. 361) ;  Th  2,  356. 

Bandhava  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  bandhava]  i.  kinsman,  member 
of  a  clan  or  family,  relative  A  111.44;  Sn  60  (pi.  ban- 
dhavani  in  poetry  ;  cp.  Nd2455) ;  Dh  288  (pi.  bandhava)  ; 
J  II. 316;  V.81  ;  DA  1.243.  —  2.  (-°)  one  who  is  con- 
nected with  or  belongs  to  Sn  140  (manta°,  well- 
acquainted  with  Mantras;  cp.  SnA  192;  vedabandhu 
veda-patisarana  ti  vuttar)  hoti)  ;  J  v. 335  (bodhaneyya°) ; 
cp.  bandhu  3. 

Bandhn  [Vedic  bandhu,  see  bandhati  &  cp.  bandhava] 
I.  a  relation,  relative,  kinsman;  pi.  bandhu  J  iv.301  ; 
PvA  86  (  =  fiati)  &  bandhavo  Nd^  455  (where  Nd>  1 1  in 
id.  p.  reads  bandhu).  —  Adicca°  kinsman  of  the  Sun, 
an  Ep.  of  the  Buddha  Vin  11.296  ;  A  11. 17 ;  Sn  54,  915, 
1 128,  cp.  Nd2  152";  Vv  24";  78'",  cp.  VvA  u6. — 
Four  kinds  of  relations  enum""  at  Nd'  11.  viz.  i\ati°, 
gotta°,  manta"  (where  Nd^  455  reads  mitta"),  sippa". 
—  2.  Ep.  of  Brahma,  as  ancestor  of  the  brahmins 
DA  1.254:  see  below  °pada. — 3.  (°-)  connected  with. 
related  to,  dealing  with  [cp.  Vedic  amfta-bandhu 
RV  X.72']  S  1. 123  (pamatta°);  128;  Sn  241,  315, 
430,  911;  J  IV. 525  ;  Miln  65  (kamma°)  ;  SnA  192 
(veda°).  —  f.  bandhuni  J  vi.47  (said  of  the  town  of 
Mithila(raja°)  ;  expl''byC.as"raja-fiatakeh'evapunna"). 
pada  the  foot  of  Brahma,  from  which  the  Sudras 
are  said  to  have  originated  (cp.  Sk.  padaja),  in  cpd. 
bandhupad'apacca  "  offering  from  the  foot  of  the 
kinsman,"  applied  as  contemptuous  epithet  to  the 
Samanas  by  a  Brahmin  D  1.90  ;  M  1.334  •  S  iv.117. 

Bandhaka  (adj.)  [fr.  bandhu]  I.  the  plant  Pentapetes 
phcEnicea  J  iv.279  ("puppha,  evidently  only  a  con- 
traction    of     bandhu-jivaka,     cp.     C.     bandhujivaka- 


puppha ;  although  Sk.  bandhuka  is  given  as  syn.  of 
bandhujiva  at  Halayudha  2,  53).  —  2.  in  bandhuka- 
roga  M  II.  12  I  prob.  to  be  read  panduka",  as  v.  1.  BB  ; 
see  panduroga. 

Bandhujivaka  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  bandhujiva]  the  plant 
Pentapetes  phoenicea  M  11.14  ("puppha)  ;  D  ii.iii  (id.); 
J  IV.279;  Vism  174;  DhsA  14;  \vA  43,  161. 

Bandbnmant  (adj.)  [fr.  bandhu,  cp.  Vedic  bandhumant] 
having  relatives,  rich  in  kinsmen ;  only  as  Np.  m 
bandhuma  N.  of  father  of  the  Buddha  Vipassin  D 
n.ii  =Vism  433;  f.  bandhumati  N.  of  mother  of  the 
Buddha  Vipassin  ibid.  ;  also  N.  of  a  town  D  11. 12 
(capital  of  king  Bandhuma);  SnA  190  =  J  iv.388 
(where  the  latter  has  Vettavati),  and  a  river  SnA  190  = 
J  iv.388  ( :  Vettavati). 

Bandhavant  (adj.)  [bandhu #)- vant]  .having  relatives,  rich 
in  relatives  J  vi.357. 

Babbaja  [cp.  Vedic  balbaja,  doubtful  whether  it  belongs 
to  Lat.  bulbus ;  for  the  initial  b.  very  often  p.  is  found  ; 
see  pabbaja]  a  sort  of  coarse  grass  or  reed,  used  to 
make  slippers,  etc.  Vin  1.190  ;  D  11.55  •  S  II. 92  ;  in,  137  ; 
IV.  158  ;  A  II. 21 1  ;  Dh  345  ;  DhA  iv.55. 

-paduka    a    slipper    out    of    b.    grass    DhA    111.451. 
-layaka  cutter  or  reaper  of  grass  S  in.  155  ;  A  in. 365. 

Babbu  (&  °ka)  Epic  [Sk.  babhruka  a  kind  of  ichneumon ; 
Vedic  babhru  brown,  cp.  Lat.  fiber  =  beaver,  further 
connection  "  bear,"  see  Walde,  Lat.  iVtb.  s.  v.  fiber]  a 
cat  J  1.480  (  =  biiara  C.)=DhA  n.152. 

Babbhara  [onomat.,  cp.  Sk.  balbala-karoti  to  stammer  or 
stutter,  barbara  =  Gr.  /3ap/3npof  stuttering,  people  of  an 
unknown  tongue,  balbutha  Np.  "  stammerer "  ;  also 
Lat.  balbas,  Ger.  plappern,  E.  blab ;  babbhara  is  a 
redupl.  formation  fr.  *bhara-bhara  =  barbara,  cp. 
J.P.T.S.  18S9,  209;  Geiger,  P.Cr.  §  20]  imitation  of  a 
confused  rumbling  noise  M  1.128.  —  Cp.  also  P.  mam- 
mana  and  sarasara. 

Barihin  [cp.  Sk.  barhin]  a  peacock  ]  iv.497. 

Barihisa  (nt.)  [Vedic  barhis]  the  sacrificial  grass  D  1.141  ; 
M  1.344  ;  A  11.207  ;  Pug  56. 

Bala'  (nt.)  [Vedic  bala,  most  likely  to  Lat.  de-bilis  "  with- 
out strength  "  (cp.  E.  debility,  P.  dubbala).  and  Gr. 
fifXuiTTai  (superl.)=Sk.  balistha  the  strongest.  The 
Dhatupatha  (273)  defines  b.  with  panane.  At  DhsA 
124  bala  is  understood  as  "  na  kampati "]  i.  strength, 
power,  force  D  11.73  ;  A  1.244  ;  Th  i,  188  ;  Dh  109  (one 
of  the  4  blessings,  viz.  ayu,  vanna,  sukha,  bala ;  cp. 
DhA  11.239);  Pv  1.5'"  (=kaya-bala  PvA  30);  i.>«; 
VvA  4  (iddhi°) ;  PvA  71  (id),  82  (kamma°).  —  Of  cases 
used  as  adv.  balasa  (instr.)  is  mentioned  by  Trenckner 
at  Miln  430  (notes),  cp.  Prk.  balasa  (Pischel,  Gr.  §  364). 
yatha  balar)  according  to  one's  power,  i.  e.  as  much  as 
possible  PvA  i,  54.  The  comp"  form  of  bala  in  conn, 
with  kl  is  bali°,  e.  g.  dubbalikarana  making  weak 
M  111.4  :  P"g  59.  SS  ;  "karanin  id.  D  in.  183.  —  adj.  bala 
strong  J  v. 268,  abala  weak  Sn  770,  1120,  dubbala  id. 
S  1.222;  J  II. 154;  Nd'  12;  PvA  55;  compar.  °tara 
M  1.244,  ^^-  °-  abalag  weakness  S  1.222.  —  2.  an  army, 
military  force  Mhvs  25,  57  ;  SnA  357.  See  cpds.  below. 
— -Eight  balani  or  strong  points  are  i.  of  young 
children  (runna-balar)).-2.  of  womanhood  (kodha"). 
-3.  of  robbers  (avudha°).-4.  of  kings  (issariya°), 
-5.  of  fools  (ujjhatti"). -6.  of  wise  men  (nijjhatti°). 
-  7.  of  the  deeply  learned  (patisankh5na°).  -  8.  of 
samanas  &  brahmanas  (khanti°)  A  iv.223  (where  used  as 
adj.  -°  strong  in  .  .  .) :  cp.  Sn  212,  623.  —  Five  balani 
of  women  are :  riipabalar),  bhoga°,  fiati°,  putta°,  sila° 
S  iv.246-8.  The  five-fold  force  (balag  pailca-vidhai)) 
of  a  king  J  v.  120,  121  consists  of  bahabalar)  strength  of 


Bala 


io6 


Balisa 


arms,  bhoga°  of  wealth,  araacca"  of  counsellors,  abhi- 
jacca"  of  high  birth,  panna"  the  force  of  wisdom  ;  in  the 
religious  sense  five  balani  or  powers  are  commonly 
enura"*  :  saddhabalat),  viriya",  sati%  samadhi°,  paniia" 
A  III. 12;  D  II. 120;  M  II. 12,  111.296;  S  III. 96,  153; 
IV. 366,  V.219,  249;  Ps  11.56,  86,  166,  174,  223;  11.84, 
133,  168  etc.  They  correspond  to  the  5  indriyani  and 
are  developed  with  them.  S  v. 2  19,  220  ;  Nett  31  ;  they 
are  cultivated  to  destroy  the  five  uddhambhagiyani 
sagyojanani  S  v. 251.  They  are  freq.  referred  to  in 
instructions  of  the  Buddha  about  the  constituents  of 
the  "  Dhamma,"  culminating  in  the  eightfold  Path,  viz. 
cattaro  satipatthana,  samappadhana,  cattaro  iddhi- 
pada,  paiicindriyani,  p.  balani,  sattabojjhangani,  ariyo 
atthangiko  maggo  e.  g.  S  111.96  ;  Ps  11.56  ;  Nd^  13  =360 
=  Nd2  420;  Nd- s.  V.  satipatthana;  and  passim.  [Cp. 
BSk.  catvara  rddhipadah  paiic'  endriyani  p.  balani, 
sapta  bodhyangani  etc.  Divy  208. J  Two  balani  are 
specially  mentioned  A  1.52  (patisankhanabalar)  and 
bhavana"),  also  D  111.213,  followed  here  by  the  other 
"  pair  "  satibalag  and  samadhi".  There  are  four  balani 
of  the  ariyasavaka,  by  which  he  overcomes  the  five 
fears  (pafica  bhayani  q.  v.);  the  four  are  paiiiiabalar), 
viriya",  anavajja°  sangaha"  A  iv.363  sq.,  as  given  at 
A  II. 141,  also  the  foil.  3  groups  of  cattari  balani: — 
(i)  saddhabalar),  viriya\  sati",  samadhi",  cp.  D  111.229. 
—  (2)  sati°  samadhi,  anavajja",  sangaha".  (3)  pati- 
sankhana",  bhavana'^,  anavajja",  sangaha".  —  For  4 
balani  see  also  D  111.229  note,  and  for  patisankhana- 
bala  (power  of  computation)  see  Dhs.  trsl.  1353.  The 
ten  balani  of  the  Tathagata  consist  of  his  perfect  com- 
prehension in  ten  fields  of  knowledge  A  v. 32  sq.  ; 
M  1.69;  Nd2  466;  Miln  105,  285;  \'bhA  397.  — In  a 
similar  setting  10  powers  are  given  as  consisting  ifi  the 
knowledge  of  the  Paticcasamuppada  at  S  11.27,  28. — 
The  balani  of  the  savaka  are  distinct  from  those  of  the 
Tathagatha :  Kvu  228  sq.  —  There  are  seven  balani 
D  III. 253,  and  seven  khinasava-balani  283  i.  e.  saddha- 
balat), viriya"  sati°,  samadhi",  panfia",  hiri°  and  ottappa". 
The  same  group  is  repeated  in  the  Abhidhamma  ;  Dhs 
58,  95,  102  ;  DhsA  126.  The  Ps.  also  enumerates  seven 
khinasavabalani  1.35  ;  and  sixty-eight  balani  11. 168  sq. 
-agga  front  of  an  army,  troops  in  array  D  1.6  ;  Vin 
IV. 107,  cp.  DA  1.85.  -4nika  (adj.)  with  strong  array 
Sn  623;  Dh  399  (cp.  DhA  iv.164).  -kaya  a  body  of 
troops,  an  army  cp.  Fick,  Sociale  Gliederung  p.  52  note  ; 
(also  in  BSk.  e.  g.  Divy  63,  315)  A  1.109  ;  iv.107,  1 10  ; 
S  1.58  ;  J  1.437  (°r)  sarjharati  to  draw  up  troops) ;  11.76  ; 
III. 319;  V.124;  VI. 224,  451;  DhA  1.393;  PugA  249. 
-kotthaka  fortress,  camp  J  1.179  ;  Mhvs25,  29.  -(k)kara 
application  of  force,  violence  J  1.476;  11. 421;  in. 447  ; 
instr.  "ena  by  force  PvA  68,  113.  -gumba  a  serried 
troop  J  11.406.  -cakka  wheel  of  power,  of  sovereignty 
Dpvs  VI. 2.  -ttha  a  military  official,  palace  guard, 
royal  messenger  Miln  234,  241,  264,  314;  Mhvs  34,  17. 
-da  strength-giving  S  1.32  ;  Sn  297.  -dayin  id.  A  11.64. 
-deva  "  God  of  strength  "  N.  of  the  elder  brother  of 
Kanha  J  iv.82  ;  Nd'  89,  92  (Vasudeva4- ) ;  Vism  233 
(id),  -(p)patta  grown-strong  DhsA  118  (v.  1.  phala'). 
-vahana  troops,  an  army  J  11. 319,  iv.iyo,  433; 
VI. 391,  458.  -vira  a  hero  in  strength  Vv  53',  cp. 
VvA  231.  -sata  for  palasata,  q.  v.  (cp.  J.P.T.S.  1908, 
:o8  note). 

Bala'  [cp.  *Sk.  bala:  Halayudha  5,  23;  &  P.  balaka]  a 
species  of  carrion  crow  J  v. 268  ;  also  in  cpd.  bal'anka- 
pada  having  crow's  feet,  i.  e.  spreading  feet  (perhaps 
for  balaka"  ?)  J  vi.548  (C.  expl°'-  by  pattharita-pada, 
read  pattharita"). 

Balaka  (adj.)  [fr.  bala]  strong;  only  in  kisa"  of  meagre 
strength,  weakly  M  1.226;  and  dub°  weak  M  1.435. 
Cp.  balika. 

Balata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  bala]  strength,  lit.  strength-quality 
M  1.325. 


Balati  [fr.  bal,  as  in  bala]  to  live  KhA  124  (in  def.  of  bala 
as  "  balanti  ananti  ti  bala  "). 

Balatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  bala,  cp.  balata]  strength,  only  in 
cpd.  dubbalatta  weakness  J  11. 154. 

Balavata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  balavant;  cp.  Epic  Sk.  balavatta] 
strength,  force  (also  in  military  sense)  J  11.369  (arak- 
khassa  b.) ;  Miln  loi  (kusalassa  &  akusalassa  kammassa 
b.). 

Balavant  (adj.)  [fr.  bala]  strong,  powerful,  sturdy  M  1.244 
(purisa)  S  1.222  ;  J  ii.4<,6  ;  DhA  11.208  ;  VvA  35  ;  PvA 
94.  Comparative  balavatara  Miln  131  ;  f.  °a(n)tari 
Sdhp  452.  In  conip"  balava",  e.  g.  °gava  sturdy  oxen 
M  1.226;  "vippatisara  deep  remorse  PvA  14,  °balava 
very  strong  J  ii.4Ci6.  -balavar)  as  nt.  adv.  "  exceed- 
ingly," in  cpd.  balav'  Sbalavai)  very  (loud  and)  strong 
Vin  II. I  (=sutthu  balavar)  C),  and  "pacciise  very  early 
in  the  morning  Vism  93,  and  "pacciisa-samaye  id  J  1.92  ; 
DhA  1.26. 

Balasata  see  palasata. 

Balaka  (f.)  [cp.  Vedic  balaka,  perhaps  to  Lat.  fulica.  Or. 
faXupii;  a  water  fowl,  Ohg.  pelicha  =  Ger.  belche]  a 
crane  Th  i,  307;  J  11.363:  111.226 ;  Miln  128  (°anar| 
megha-saddena  gabbhavakkanti  hoti)  ;  Vism  126  (in 
simile,  megha-mukhe  b.  viya) ;  DA  1.91  (v.  1.  baka). 

Bali  [cp.  Vedic  bali ;  regarding  etym.  Grassmann  connects 
it  with  bhr]  I.  rehgious  offering,  oblation  D  11. 74 
(dhammika) ;  A  iv.17,  19;  Sn  223;  Mhvs  36,  88  (par- 
ticularly to  subordinate  divinities,  cp.  Mhvs.  trsl"  263)  ; 
DhAn.14  (v.  1.  "kamma).  — parica"  the  fivefold  offering, 
i.  e.  nati°,  atithi",  pubbapeta",  raja",  devata°,  offering 
to  kinsfolk,  guests,  the  departed,  the  king,  the  gods ; 
A  11.68;  ni.45. — 2.  tax,  revenue  (cp.  Zimmer, 
A  Hind.  Leben  166  &  Fick,  Sociale  Gliederung  75) 
D  1. 135,  142  :  J  1. 199  (danda°  fines  &  taxes),  339  ;  DhA 
1. 251  (danda°).  —  3.  Np.  of  an  Asura  D  11.259. 

-kamma  offering  of  food  to  bhiitas,  devas  &  others 
J  1. 169,  260:  II. 149,  215;  IV. 246  (offering  to  tutelary 
genii  of  a  city.  In  this  passage  the  sacrifice  of  a  human 
being  is  recommended) ;  v. 99,  473  ;  SnA  138  ;  Mhbv  28. 
-karana  oblation,  offering  of  food  PvA  81  ;  VvA  8 
("pitha,  reading  doubtful,  v.  1.  valli").  -karaka  offering 
oblations  J  1.384.  -°nkata  one  who  offers  (the  five) 
oblations  A  11.68.  -patiggahaka  receiving  offerings, 
worthy  of  oblations  J  11. 17  (yakkha ;  interpreted  by 
Fick,  Sociale  Gliederung  79  as  "  tax-collector,"  hardly 
justified);  f.  ''ika  A  in. 77  (devata),  260  (id.),  cp.  BSk. 
balipratigrahika  devata  Divy  i .  -piUta  crushed  with 
taxes  J  V.98.  -puttha  a  crow  (cp.  Sk.  balipustha  "  fed 
by  oblations")  Abhp  638.  -vadda  (cp.  Sk.  balivarda, 
after  the  Pali  ?)  an  ox,  esp.  an  ox  yoked  to  the  plough 
or  used  in  ploughing  (on  similes  with  b.  see  J.P.T.S. 
1907,  349)  S  1. 1 15,  170  ;  IV. 163  sq.,  282  sq.  ;  A  11. 108  sq.  ; 
Sn  p.  13  (cp.  SnA  137)  ;  Dh  152  =Th  i,  1025  ;  J  1.57 ; 
V.104  (Saliyo  b.  phalena  pahato) ;  Vism  284  (in  simile 
of  their  escape  from  the  ploughman) ;  DhA  1.24  (dhurai) 
vahanto  balivaddassa,  v.  1.  balibaddassa) ;  VvA  258 
(vv.  11.  "baddha  &  "bandha).  The  spelling  balibadda 
occurs  at  Vin  iv.312.  -sadhaka  tax  collector,  tax 
gatherer  J  iv.366  ;  v.  103  sq.  -harana  taking  oblations 
A  v.  79  (°vanasanda). 

Balika  (adj.)  [fr.  bala]  strong;  only  in  der.  balikatarat] 
(compar.)  adv.  in  a  stronger  degree,  more  intensely, 
more  Miln  84  ;  &  dubbalika  weak  ThA  211.  Cp. 
balaka. 

Balin  (adj.)  [fr.  bala]  strong  Th  i,  12  (paiiiia")  ;  Vv  64'; 
Dh  280  ;  J  111.484  ;  vi.147. 

Balisa  &  Ba)isa  (m.  &  nt.)  fcp.  Sk.  badisa]  a  fish-hook 
S   ii.226  =  iv.i58   (amisa-gatag   b.) ;   Nd^  374    (kama°, 


Ball 


107 


Bahu 


V.  1.  palisa)  ;  J  1.482  sq.  ;  in. 283  ;  iv.195  ;  v. 273  sq., 
389:  VI. 416;  Miln  412  ;  SnA  114  (in  expl°  of  ga|a  Sn 
61);  ThA  280,  292;  VbhA  196  (in  comparison);  Sdhp 
610.     On  use  in  similes  cp.  J.P.T.S.  1907,  1 15. 

-magsika  (f.)  "  flesh-hooking,"  a  kind  of  torture 
M  1.87;  III. 164;  A  1.47;  II. 122  ;  Nd>  154;  Nd2  604  ; 
Miln  197.     -yatthi  angling  rod  DhA  111.397. 

Bair  =  bala°  in  comb"  with  bhu  &  kr,  see  bala. 

Ballyati  [Denora.  fr.  bala,  cp.  BSk.  baliyati  MVastu  1.275] 
to  have  strength,  to  grow  strong,  to  gain  power,  to 
overpower  Sn  770  (=sahati  parisahati  abhibhavati 
Nd*  12,  cp.  361)  ;  J  IV.84  (vv.  11.  khall"  &  paUyy"  ;  C. 
expl''  by  avattharati)  =  Pv  11. 6'  (  =  balavanto  honti 
vaddhanti  abhibhavanti  PvA  94)  ;  J  vi.224  (3'''  pi. 
baliyare ;  C.  abhibhavati,  kuppati,  of  the  border 
provinces) ;  Nett  6  (vv.  11.  bali°,  pali''  ;  C.  abhibhavati). 

Balya^  (nt.)  [der.  fr.  bala]  belonging  to  strength,  only  in 
cpd.  dub°  weakness  M  1.364  ;  Pug  66  ;  also  spelt  dub- 
balla  M  1.13.  —  abl.  dubbalya  as  adv.  groundlessly. 
without  strong  evidence  Vin  iv.241  (cp.  J.P.T.S.  1886, 
129). 

Balya^  [fr.  bala,  cp.  P.  &  Sk.  balya]  foolishness,  stupidity 
Dh  63  (v.  1.  balya)  ;  J  111.278  (C.  balya)  ;  DhA  11.30. 

Ba)ava  (f)  [cp.  Vedic  vadava]  a  mare,  only  in  cpd. 
°mukha  the  mare's  mouth,  i.  e.  an  entrance  to  Niraya 
fcp.  Vedic  vadavagni  &  vadavamukha)  Th  i,  11 04 
(trsl.  "abyss-discharged  mouth,"  cp.  Brethren,  p.  418). 

Ba|Iyakkba  [etym.  ?]  a  species  of  birds  J  vi.539. 

Bahati'  [bXh^]  to  pull,  see  ab°,  ub°,  nib",  &  cp.  udabbahe, 
pavalha. 

Bahati^  [bagh  doublet  of  byh^]  to  strengthen,  increase,  see 
bruhana  (upa°) ;  otherwise  only  in  pp.  balha  (q.  v.). 
The  Dhtp  (344,  cp.  Dhtm  506)  expl"-  "  baha  braha 
bruha :  vuddhiyag." 

Bahati^  [a  Pali  root,  to  be  postulated  as  der.  fr.  bahi  in 
sense  of  "  to  keep  out"]  only  in  Caus.  formations:  to 
keep  outside,  lit.  to  make  stay  outside  or  away.  See 
baha  2  ;  baheti.  paribahati. 

Bahala  (adj.)  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  bahala  &  Ved.  bahula]  dense. 
thick  Vin  11. 112;  J  1.467  (°palapa-tumba  a  measure 
thickly  filled  with  chaff);  1191  ;  Miln  282;  Vism  257 
(°puva.  where  KhA  56  omits  bahala),  263  (opp.  tanuka) ; 
KhA  62  ("kuthita-lakha  thickly  boiled,  where  in  id.  p. 
Vism  261  has  accha-lakha,  i.  c.  clear)  ;  DhA  iv.68  ; 
VvA  162  (=alara).  — subahala  very  thick  Miln  258 
(rajojalla). 

Bahalatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  above]  thickness,  swollen  con- 
dition, swelling  J  1.147. 

Bahi  (adv.)  [cp.  Vedic  bahis  &  bahir  ;  the  s(h)  is  restored 
in  doubling  of  cons,  in  comp°  like  bahig-gata  Vv  50'^,  in 
bahiddha  and  in  lengthening  of  i  as  bahi  J  v. 65]  outside  : 

1.  (adv.)  J  1.36 1  (°dvare-gama  a  village  outside  the 
city   gates);    Pv   i.io^;    DhA    Iii.ri8;    PvA   24,   61. — 

2.  (prep.)  with  ace.  (direction  to)  J  1.298  (^gamar))  ; 
with  loc.  (place  where)  "dvara-kotthake  outside  the  gate 
M  11.92  ;  A  III. 3 1  ;  "nagare  outside  the  city  J  11. 2  ;  PvA 
39.  47  ;  °vihare  outside  the  monastery  DhA  1. 315. 

-gata  gone  outside  (i.  e.  into  worldly  affairs,  or  accord- 
ing to  VvA  213  engaged  with  the  bahiddh'  aramma- 
j)ani)  Vv  50''  (abahiggata-manasa  with  his  mind  not 
gone  outside  himself),  -nikkhamana  going  outside  of 
(abl.),  leaving  Vism  500  (raitukucchito  bahinikkha- 
raanar)  mulakag  dukkhai)). 

Bahiddha  (adv.)  [fr.  bahi,  cp.  Vedic  bahirdha,  formation 
in  °dha,  like  ekadha,  sattadha  etc.  of  numerals]  out- 
side (adv.  &  prep.)  D  1.16  ;  ii.iio  ;  S  1169  ;  111.47,  103  ; 


IV. 205  ;  V.157;  Vin  III. 1 13  (°rupa  opp.  ajjhatta-riipa) ; 
Sn  203  ;  VbhA  260  (kaye) ;  DhA  1.2  1 1  (c.  gen)  ;  111.378 
(sasanato  b.) ;  DhsA  i8g.  — ajjhatta"  inside  &  outside, 
personal-external  see  ajjhatta.  —  The  bahiddh'  aram- 
manani  (objects  of  thought  concerning  that  which  is 
external)  are  the  outward  sense-objects  in  the  same 
meaning  as  bahirani  ayatanani  are  distinguished  fr. 
ajjhattikani  ayatanani  (see  ayatana  3  and  arammana 
3).  They  are  discussed  at  Vism  430  sq.  ;  cp.  Dhs  1049. 
—  The  phrase  "  ito  bahiddha  "  refers  to  those  outside 
the  teaching  of  the  Buddha  ("  outside  this  our  doc- 
trine ").  e.  g.  at  D  1. 1 57  ;  S  11 33  ;  A  iv.25  :  Dhs  1CC5. 

Baha  (adj.)  [Vedic  bahu,  doubtful  whether  to  Gr.  Trax't' : 
fr.  brh"  to  strengthen,  cp.  upabruhana,  paribbii|ha] 
much.  many,  large,  abundant ;  plenty  ;  in  comp°  also : 
very,  greatly  (°-)  instr.  sg.  bahuna  Dh  166;  nom.  pi. 
bahavo  Vin  111.90  ;  Dh  307.  &  bahii  Dh  53  ;  J  iv.366  ; 
V.40  ;  VI. 472  ;  Bu  2,  47  ;  Pv  iv.i"  ;  Mhvs  35,  98  ;  PvA 
67  ;  nt.  pi.  bahuni  Sn  665,  885  ;  gen.  dat.  bahunnag 
S  1. 196;  Sn  503,  957,  &  bahunag  J  v.446  ;  Kvu  528 
(where  id.  p.  M  1.447  reads  bahunnag) ;  instr.  bahiihi 
PvA  241  ;  loc.  bahusu  PvA  58.  —  nt.  nom.  bahu  Dh 
258  ;  bahug  PvA  166,  &  bahud  in  comp"  bahud-eva  (d 
may  be  euphonic)  J  1.170  ;  Bu  20,  32.  As  nt.  n.  bahug 
a  large  quantity  A  11. 183  (opp.  appag)  ;  abl.  bahutnha 
J  v. 387.  As  adv.  bahu  so  much  Pv  11. 13'*.  —  Compar. 
bahutara  greater,  more,  in  greater  number  A  1.36  (pi. 
bahutara,  opp.  appaka)  ;  11.183  ;  S  v. 457.  466  ;  J  11.293  ; 
VI. 4 72  ;  Pv  II. i";  Miln  84;  PvA  38.  76.  —  In  composi- 
tion with  words  beginning  with  a  vowel  (in  sandhi) 
bahu  as  a  rule  appears  as  bavh°  (for  bahv°.  see  Geiger, 
P.Gr.  §  49.  i).  but  the  hiatus  form  bahu  is  also  found, 
as  in  bahu-itthiyo  J  1.398  (besides  bahutthika)  ;  bahu- 
amacca  J  1.125  ;  bahu-ayasa  (see  below).  Besides  we 
have  the  contracted  form  bahu  as  in  bahflpakara,  etc.). 
-abadha  (bavh°)  great  suffering  or  illness,  adj.  full 
of  sickness,  ailing  much  M  11  94  ;  A  1. 107;  n.75,  85; 
Miln  65  ;  Sdhp  89  (cp.  77).  -ayasa  (bahu")  great  trouble 
Th  2.  343. — (i)tthika  (bahutthika)  having  many 
women  Vin  11.256  ;  S  11.264.  -udaka  containing  much 
water  J  in. 430  (f.  bahudika  &  bahodika).  -upakara  of 
great  service,  very  helpful,  very  useful  S  iv.295  ;  v. 32  ; 
M  111.253  :  It  9  ;  Vin  v.191  ;  J  1.121  ;  Pv  iv.  i*" ;  PvA 
114.  -odaka  (bavh°)  =°(jdaka  Th  i,  390.  -kata  (a.) 
benevolent,  doing  service  Vin  iv.37,  212.  (b)  much 
moved  or  impressed  by  (instr.),  paying  much  attention 
to  Vin  1.247.  -karaniya  having  much  to  do.  busy 
D  11.76  ;  Vin  1.71  ;  S  11. 2  15  ;  A  iii.i  16  ;  DA  1.237.  -kara 
(a)  favour  Davs  iv.39  (b)  doing  much,  of  great  service, 
very  helpful  M  1.43,  170  ;  A  1123.  132  ;  11. 126  ;  S  v. 67  ; 
Pv  II. 12";  J  IV. 422  :  Miln  264.  -karatta  service,  use- 
fulness KhA  91.  -kicca  having  many  duties,  very  busy 
Vin  1. 7 1  ;  D  1.106  ;  11.76  ;  S  11.2  15  ;  A  iil.i  16  ;  DA  1.237. 
-khara  a  kind  of  alkali  (product  of  vegetable  ash) 
J  VI. 454.  -jcuiiia  see  bahu°.  -jana  a  mass  of  people, 
a  great  multitude,  a  crowd,  a  great  many  people  D  1.4  ; 
It  78;  J  VI. 358;  Pug  30,  57;  Pv  11.77 ;  PvA  30.  At 
some  passages  interpreted  by  Bdhgh  as  "  the  uncon- 
verted, the  masses,"  e.  g.  D  1.47,  expH  at  DA  1.143  by 
"  assutava  andha-bala  puthujjana";  Dh  320  (bahuj- 
jana),  expl''  at  DhA  1V.3  by  "  lokiya-mahajana." 
-jagara  very  watchful  Dh  29  (  =  mahante  sativepullc 
jagariye  thita  DhA  1.262)  ;  Sn  972  (cp.  Nd'  501).  -jata 
growing  much,  abundant  J  vi.536.  -fhana  (-cintin)  of 
far-reaching  knowledge,  whose  thoughts  embrace  many 
subjects  J  111.306;  IV. 467  ;  v.  176.  -dhana  with  many 
riches  PvA  97.  -patta  having  obtained  much,  loaded 
with  gifts  Vin  IV. 243.  -pada  many-footed,  a  certain 
order  of  creatures,  such  as  centipedes,  etc.  Vin  11.  no  ; 
111.52  :  A  11.34  ;  1'  ^7-  -(p)pha!a  rich  in  fruit  Sn  1134, 
cp.  Nd''  456.  -(b)bihi  t.t  g..  name  of  cpds.  with  adj. 
sense,  indicating  possession,  -bhanda  having  an  abund- 
ance of  goods,  well-to-do  Vin  in. 138  ;  KhA  241.  -bha- 
nika  =  "bhaiiin  PvA  283.     -bhanita  garrulousness  PvA 


r 


Bahuka 


io8 


Bala 


283.  -bhaningarrulous  A  111.254,  257  ;  Dh  227.  -bhava 
largeness,  richness,  abundance  DhA  11. 175.  -bherava 
very  terrible  A  11.55.  -maccha  rich  in  fish  J  111.430. 
-mata  much  esteemed,  venerable  Cp.  VI.7;  PvA  117. 
-manta  very  tricky  DhA  11. 4  (v.  1.  maya).  -mana 
respect,  esteem,  veneration  J  1.90;  PvA  50,  155,  274. 
-maya  full  of  deceit,  full  of  tricks  J  v. 35 7  (cp.  ''manta). 
-vacana  (tt.g.)  the  plural  number  J  iv.173;  PvA  163. 
-varaka  the  tree  Cordia  myxa  Abhp  558.  -vighata 
fraught  with  great  pain  Th  2,  450.  -vidha  various, 
multiform  Cp.  xv.7 ;  Pgdp  37.  -sacca  see  bahu°. 
-(s)suta  having  great  knowledge,  very  learned,  well- 
taught  D  1.93,  137;  III. 252,  282;  J  M99  ;  IV. 244  ; 
A  1.24;  11.22,  147,  170.  178;  111.114;  Sn  58  (see  Nd^ 
457) ;  It  60,  80  ;  Th  i,  1026  ;  Dh  208  ;  Vin  11.95  :  J  1-93  ; 
Miln  19;  ThA  274,  281  ;  SnA  109,  no.  -(s)sutaka  of 
great  knowledge  (ironical)  D  1.107  (see  Dial.  1.132). 

Bahuka  (adj.)  [fr.  bahu]  great,  much,  many,  abundant 
J  in.3ti8  (b.  jano  most  people,  the  majority  of  p.)  ; 
v. 388  ;  iv.536  ;  Mhvs  36,  49  ;  PvA  25  (gloss  for  pahuta 
Pv  1.52)  ;  DhA  II. 1 75.  —  nt.  bahukag  plenty,  abundance 
A  ii.7=Pug  63;  Vism  403  (opp.  thokag).  Compar. 
bahukatarag  more  J  11.88  (v.  1.  bahutarar)). 

Bahakkhattug  (adv.)  [bahu+khattug,  like  sattakkhat- 
tur),  ti°  etc.]  many  times  Miln  215. 

Bahutta  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  bahutvar)]  multiplicity,  mani- 
foldedness  VbhA  320  (cetana"). 

Bahndha  (adv.)  [fr.  bahu,  cp.  Vedic  bahudha]  in  many 
ways  or  forms  S  v. 264  (hoti  he  becomes  many),  288  ; 
M1.34  ;  Sn966;  Pviv.i^^  (  =  bahiihipakarehi  PvA  241); 
Mhvs  31,  73  ;  Davs  v. 68. 

Bahula  (adj.)  [usually  -°,  as  °-  only  in  cpd.  "ajlva]  much, 
abundant,  nt.  abundance  ("-) ;  full  of,  rich  in,  fig.  given 
to,  intent  on,  devoted  to  D  11.73  ;  S  1.199,  202  ;  A  111.86 
(pariyatti°),  432  (aloka°) ;  iv.35 ;  It  27.  30';  J  iv.5 
(vinasa"),  22  ;  PvA  80  (charik'  angara").  — sayana"  as 
much  as  "  particular  in  one's  choice  of  resting  place  " 
Miln  365  nt.  bahulag  (-")  in  the  fullness  of,  full  of 
S  III. 40  (nibbida").  The  comp"  form  with  karoti  (& 
kamma)  is  bahuli"  (q.  v.).     Cp.  bahulla. 

-ajiva  living   in   abundance    (opp.    lukh'    ajivin)    D 
III. 44,  47. 

Bahala  (nt.)  [  =  preceding]  N.  of  a  lucky  die  J  vi.281. 

BahaU°  [rare  in  Ep.  Sk.  ;  when  found,  diff .  in  meaning]  in 
comp°  with  kar  =  bahula  (adj.)+kar,  lit.  -"to  make 
much  of,"  i.  e.  to  practise,  in  foil,  words:  °kata  (pp.) 
practised  (frequently),  usually  comb""  with  bhavita 
S  n.264  ;  IV.200,  322  ;  V.259  ;  A  1.6  ;  Vism  267  (=punap- 
punar)  kata) ;  "katatta  (nt.)  practice  D  11. 2  14  ;  "kamma 
continuous  practice,  an  act  often  repeated  M  1.30 1  ; 
DhsA  4C6  (=punappuna-karana);  "karoti  to  take  up 
seriously,  to  practise,  devote  oneself  to  (ace.)  M  i  454  ; 
A  1.275;  III-79;  S  iv.322  ;  DhA  111.356  (sevati-(- )  ; 
VbhA  291  ;  °kara  zealous  exercise,  practice  M  111  25  sq 
(tab-bahuli°  to  this  end). 

Bahnso  (adv.)  [cp.  Sk.  bahu^ah]  repeatedly  PvA  107. 

Babuta  (adj.)  [for  pahuta  =  Sk.  prabhuta]  abundant, 
much  Th  2,  406  ("ratana,  so  read  for  bahuta"),  435  (for 
bahutadhana) ;  J  111.425  (bahutam  ajjag  "  plenty  of 
food  "  ;  ajja  =Sk.  adya,  with  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  bahuta  for 
T.  bahutaraajja,  which  introd.  story  takes  as  bahutar) 
=  balar)  ajja,  with  ajja  metri  caus5.  C.  expl*  however 
as  mataka-bhattag) ;  vi.173  ("tagara  mahi) ;  Pv  11. 7' 
(v.  1.  for  pahuta,  cp.  pahutika). 

Bahotaso   (adv.)   [der.   fr.   bahuta,  cp.  Sk.  prabhutasah] 
m  abundance  J  111.484  (where  C.  expl"  with  bahutaso 
is    faulty    and    should    perhaps    be   read    pahutaso) 
VI.538. 


Bakuci  (f)  [cp.  *Sk.  bakuci]  the  plant  Vernonia  anthel- 
minthica  Abhp  586. 

Bana  [cp.  Vedic  bana]  an  arrow  Mbhv  19. 

Badha  [fr.  badh]  lit.  pressing  (together),  oppression,  hin- 
drance, annoyance  J  vi.224.     Cp.  sam°. 

Badhaka  (adj.)  [fr.  badh]  oppressing,  harassing,  injurious 
Vism  496  (dukkha  aniiar)  na  °r)) ;  VvA  214  ;  PvA  175. 

Badhakatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  badhaka]  the  fact  of  being 
oppressive  or  injurious  Vism  496. 

Badhati  [Vedic  badhate,  badh ;  Idg.  *l!heidh  to  force,  cp. 
Goth,  baidjan,  Ohg.  beitten.  See  Walde,  Lat.  Wtb. 
s.  V.  fido.  In  Pali  there  seems  to  have  taken  place  a 
confusion  of  roots  badh  and  bandh,  see  badheti  &  other 
derivations]  to  press,  weigh  on ;  oppress,  hinder, 
afflict,  harm  D  11. 19;  J  1.2 11;  iv.124;  Vism  4C0  ; 
DhA  1.24.  grd.  badhitabba  ThA  65  ;  Pass,  badhiyati 
to  be  afflicted,  to  become  sore,  to  suffer  SnA  481  ;  ThA 
282  ;  ppr.  badhiyamana  PvA  33  (so  read  for  °ayamana), 
69.  —  Cans,  badheti;  pp.  badhita  (q.  v.).     Cp.  vi". 

Badhana  (nt.)  [fr.  badh]  i.  snaring,  catching  (of  animals 
etc.)  S  v. 148;  J  1. 211.  —  2.  hindrance  DA  1.132. — 
3.  affliction,  injury,  hurting  Vism  495  ;  PvA  116. 

Badhita  [pp.  of  badhati]  oppressed,  pressed  hard,  harassed 
Dh  342  (but  taken  by  C.  as  "  trapped,  snared,"  baddha 
DhA  iv.49);  ThA  65. 

Badhin  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  badh]  (lit.  oppressing),  snaring;  as 
n.  a  trainer  Vin  11.26  (Arittha  gaddha^-pubba) ;  iv.218 
(id.). 

Badheti  [Caus.  of  badhati ;  the  confusion  with  bandhati 
is  even  more  pronounced  in  the  Caus.  According  to 
Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  we  find  badhayati  for  bandhayati  in 
Sk.  as  well]  i.  to  oppress,  afflict,  hurt,  injure  J  vi.224  ; 
PvA  198  (badheyya  =  hethayeyya).  grd.  badhaniya 
PvA  175.  Cp.  paribadheti  in  same  sense.  —  2.  to 
bind,  catch,  snare  Th  i,  454;  2,  299;  J  11. 51  (aor. 
badhayirjsu) ;  iv.342  ;  v. 295,  445  (pot.  badhaye  = 
badheyya  C.  on  p.  447 ;  vv.  11.  baddh°,  bandh°).  grd. 
badhetabba  S  iv.298. 

Baranaseyyaka  (adj.)  [fr.  Baranasi]  of  Benares,  coming 
fr.  B.  (a  kind  of  muslin)  D  11. no;  111.260. 

Bala^  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  bala  (rarely  Vedic,  more  freq.  in  Ep. 
&  Class.  Sk.)  ;  its  orig.  meaning  is  "  young,  unable  to 
speak,"  cp.  Lat.  infans,  hence  "  like  a  child,  childish, 
infantile"]  i.  ignorant  (often  with  ref.  to  ignorance  in 
a  moral  sense,  of  the  common  people,  the  puthujjana), 
foolish  (as  contrasted  with  pandita  cp.  the  Bala- 
paijdita-sutta  M  1:1.163  sq.  ;  D  11.305  sq.  ;  Vism  499, 
and  contrasts  at  Sn  578;  Dh  63,  64  ;  Pv  iv.3^2.  phs 
1300),  lacking  in  reason,  devoid  of  the  power  to  think 
&  act  right.  In  the  latter  sense  sometimes  coupled 
with  andha  (spiritually  bUnd),  as  andhabala  stupid  & 
ignorant,  mentally  dull,  e.  g.  at  DhA  1.143  ;  11.89  ;  PvA 
254.  —  A  fanciful  etym.  of  b.  at  KhA  124  is  "  balanti 
ananti  ti  bala."  Other  refs.  :  D  1.59,  108;  S  1.23; 
A  1,59,  68,  84;  II. 51,  180;  Sn  199,  259,  318,  578,  879; 
It  68  ;  Dh  28,  60  sq.,  71  sq.,  206  sq.,  330  ;  J  1.124  (lola° 
greedy — foolish) ;  v. 366  (balo  amaka-pakkar)  va) ;  Vv 
83';  Pv  1.8^";  IV. I ^";  Pug  33;  Nd'  163,  286  sq.,  290; 
SnA  509  (  =  aviddasu);  PvA  193.  Compar.  balatara 
J  III. 2  78,  279;  VvA  326.  —  2.  young,  new;  newly  risen 
(of  the  sun):  ''atapa  the  morning  sun  DA  1.287;  DhA 
1. 164;  Mhbv  25;  "vasanta  "early  spring"  (=Citra- 
masa),  N.  of  the  first  one  of  the  4  winter  months 
(gimha-masa)  KhA  192  ;  -suriya  the  newly  risen  sun 
J  v.284  ;  PvA  137,  211.  —  3.  a  child  ;  in  wider  appUca- 
tion  meaning  a  youth  under  16  years  of  age  (cp.  Abhp 
251)  DA  1. 134.     Cp.  balaka. 


Bala 


109 


Bahujanna 


-nakkhatta  N.  of  a  certain  "  feast  of  fools,"  i.  e. 
carnival  DhA  1.256.  -sangatacarin  one  who  keeps 
company  with  a  fool  Dh  207. 

Bala-  [for  vala]  the  hair  of  the  head  PvA  285  (°koti- 
matta  not  even  one  tip  of  the  hair  ;  gloss  BB  valagga"). 

Balaka  [fr.  bala]  I.  boy,  child,  youth  S  1.176;  ThA  146 
(Ap.  V.44  :  spelt  "akka)  ;  Sdhp  351.  —  f.  balika  young 
girl  ThA  54  {Ap.  v.  i).  —  2.  fool  DhsA  51  ("rata  fond 
of  fools). 

Balakin  (adj.)  [fr.  balaka]  having  fools,  consisting  of 
fools;  f.  °ini  M  1.373  (parisa). 

Balata  (f)  [abstr.  to  bala]  foolishness  J  i.ioi,  223. 

Balisika  [fr.  balisa]  a  fisherman  S  n.226  ;  iv.158  ;  J  1.482  ; 
III. 52  (cp.  Fick.  Sociale  Gliederung  p.  194)  ;  Miln  364, 
412  ;  DhA  III. 397. 

Balya  (nt.)  [fr.  bala]  i.  childhood,  youth  S  iii.i. — 2.  ignor- 
ance, folly  Dh  63;  J  11.220  (  =  bala-bhava) ;  in. 278 
(balya) ;  PvA  40.  Also  used  as  adj.  in  compar.  balya- 
tara  more  foolish,  extremely  foolish  Vv  83'  sq.=DhA 
1.30  (  =  balatara,  atisayena  bala  VvA  326).  —  3.  weak- 
ness (?)  J  VI. 295  (balya,  but  C.  balya  =:dubbala-bhava). 

Balha  (adj.)  [Vedic  badha,  orig.  pp.  of  bahati^]  strong; 
only  cis  adv.  °i)  and  "-.  viz.  —  i.  bajhai)  strongly,  very 
much,  excessively,  too  much,  to  satiety  J  11.293  ; 
VI. 29 1  (i.  e.  too  often.  C.  punappunag)  ;  Miln  407  ; 
PvA  274.  Comparative  balhatarag  in  a  higher  degree, 
even  more,  too  much  Vin  11.270,  276;  Miln  125.  —  2. 
{"-)  in  bajha-gilana  very  ill,  grievously  sick  D  1.72  ; 
A  II. 144  ;  S  V.303  ;  DA  1.212. 

Ba}hika  (adj.)  [fr.  balha],  only  in  su°  having  excess  of 
good  things,  very  prosperous  J  v. 2 14  (C.  expl'  by 
sulfhu  addha). 

Bavisati  (num.)  [ba  =  dva,  -I- visati]  twenty -two  Kvu  218  ; 
Miln  419  ;  DhsA  2. 

Bahati  see  baheti. 

Baha  (f  )  [a  specific  Pali  doublet  of  bahu,  q.  v.  It  is  on 
the  whole  restricted  to  certain  phrases,  but  occurs  side 
by  side  of  bahu  in  others,  like  paccha-bahai)  &  °bahur), 
bahai)  &  bahur)  pasareti]  i.  the  arm  A  11.67  =  111.45 
(°bala) ;  Vin  11. 105;  J  111.62  ;  v. 215  ("mudu).  pac- 
cha-bahat)  arm(s)  behind  (his  back)  D  1.245  (gajha- 
bandhanar)  baddha).  bahat)  pasareti  to  stretch  out  the 
arm  D  1.222  =M  1.252  !V.  bahayag  gahe^tva  taking  (him 
or  her)  by  the  arm  D  1.22 1  sq.  ;  M  1.365  (nana-bahasu 
g.) ;  PvA  148.  baha  paggayha  reaching  or  stretching 
out  one's  arms  (as  sign  of  supplication)  D  11.139; 
J  V.267  ;  PvA  92  and  passim.  —  2.  not  quite  certain, 
whether  "  post"  of  a  door  or  a  "  screen  "  (from  bahati'), 
the  former  more  likely.  Only  -°  in  alambana°  post  to 
hold  on  to,  a  balustrade  Vin  11. 120,  152  ;  dvara°  door- 
post D  II.  190  ;  Pv  1.5I.     Cp.  bahitika. 

-afthi  (bah°)  arm-bone  KhA  50.  -paramparaya  arm 
in  arm  Vin  in. 126. 

Bahika  (adj.)  [  =  bahiya]  foreign  in  °rattha-vasin  living  in 
a  foreign  country  J  in. 432  (or  is  it  N. .'     Cp.  J  vii.  p.  94). 

Bahitatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  bahita]  keeping  out,  exclusion 
Nd^  464  (in  expl°  of  word  brahmana). 

Bahitika  (f)  [fr.  bahita,  pp.  of  baheti']  a  mantle,  wrapper 
(lit.  "  that  which  keeps  out,"  i.  e.  the  cold  or  wind) 
M  II.  1 16,  1 17. 

Bahiteyya  [unclear ;  grd.  of  baheti',  but  formed  fr.  pp.  ?] 
to  be  kept  out  (?)  M  1.328.  The  reading  seems  to  be 
corrupt ;  meaning  is  very  doubtful ;  Neumann  trsl^ 
"  musst  (mir)  weichen." 


Bahiya  (adj.)  [fr.  bahi,  cp.  bahira  and  Vedic  bahya] 
foreign  J  1.42 1  ;  in. 432. 

Bahira  (adj.)  [fr.  bahi,  as  Sk.  bahya  fr.  bahis,  cp.  also 
bahiya]  i.  external,  outside  (opp.  abbhantara  inside), 
outer,  foreign  D  11.75  ;  A  iv.i6  ;  Dh  394  (fig.  in  meaning 
of  2);  J  1. 125  (antara°  inside  &.  outside);  337  (out  of 
office,  out  of  favour,  of  ministers) ;  vi.384  (bahirag 
karoti  to  turn  out.  turn  inside  out) ;  Pv  iv.i'  (nagarassa 
b.);  Miln  281  ("abbhantara  dhana) ;  VvA  68  ("kitti- 
bhava  fact  of  becoming  known  outside).  — santara° 
(adj.)  [=sa-antara]  including  the  inward  &  outward 
parts  D  1.74  ;  A  in. 25  ;  Th  i,  172  ;  J  1.125.  —  2.  external 
to  the  individual,  objective  (opp.  ajjhattika  subjective) 
M  III. 274  (cha  ayatana)  ;  J  iv.402  ("vatthuri  ayacitva 
ajjhattikassa  namar)  ganhati)  ;  Dhs  674  (cp.  trsl.  p.  207) ; 
Vbh  13;  Miln  215;  Vism  450.  —  3.  heretical,  outsider 
in  religious  sense,  non-Buddhist,  freq.  applied  to  the 
Brahmanic  religion  &  their  practice  (samaya)  Kvu  251 
(-1- puthujjana-pakkhe  thita) ;  DhA  in. 378  (  =  mana, 
i.  e.  Bhagavato  sasanato  bahiddha;.  —  Cases  as  adv. 
bahirato  from  outside,  from  a  foreign  country  J  1.121  ; 
bahire  outside  (the  Buddhist  order)  Dh  254. 

-assada   finding   his   enjoyment   in    outward    things 

A  1.280  (Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  suggests  "  inclined  towards 

heretic  views"),     -asa  one  whose  wishes  are  directed 

outwards,  whose  desires  are  turned  to  things  external 

Th    I,    634.     -katha    non-religious    discourse,    profane 

story  Miln  24  (applied  to  the  introductory  chapter,  thus 

"  outside  story"  may  be  translated),     -tittha  doctrine 

of  outsiders  J  in. 473.     -dana  gift  of  externals,  gift  of 

j       property  as  opposed  to  gift  of  the  person  J   iv.401  ; 

'       VI. 486  ;  Davs  111.33.     -pabbajja  the  ascetic  life  outside 

I       the  community  of  the  Buddha ;  Brahmanic  saintly  life 

j       (thus  equal  to  isi-pabbajja.  cp.  bahiraka").     J  in.352  ; 

!       IV. 305.     -bhanda    property,    material    things,    objects 

J     IV. 40 1,     -manta    ritualistic    texts    (or    charms)    of 

religions  other  than  the  Buddha's  J   111.2  7.     -rakkha 

protection  of  external  means  S  1.73.     -lomi  with  the 

i       fleece  outside  (of  a  rug)  Vin  n.io8.     -samaya  doctrine 

of  the  outsiders,  i.  e.  Brahmins  DhA  in. 392. 

Bahiraka  (adj.)  [  =  bahira,  but  specialised  in  meaning 
bahira  3]  outsider,  non-religious,  non-Buddhist,  heretic, 
profane  S  n.267 ;  A  1.73;  in. 107;  Kvu  172  (isayo) ; 
VvA  67  (itthi). 

-katha  unreligious  discussion,  profane  story  KhA  118 
(cp.bahirakatha).  -tapa  =  foll.  J  1.390.  -pabbajja  the 
ascetic  life  as  led  by  disciples  of  other  teachers  than  the 
Buddha,  esp.  Brahmanic  (cp.  bahira"  and  BSk.  bahirako 
margah,  e.  g.  MVastu  1.284;  "-zio;  ".223)  J  in. 364  ; 
DhA  1.311. 

Bahiratta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  bahira]  being  outside  (of  the 
individual),  externality  Vism  450. 

Bahilima  (adj.)  [fr.  bahira,  compar. -adversative  formation] 
outer,  external,  outside  Vin  in. 149  (b.  mana  external 
measure ;  opp.  abbhantarima) ;  J  v. 38  (opp.  abbhan- 
tarima). 

Bahu  [cp.  Vedic  bahu,  prob.  to  bahati^ ;  cp.  Gr.  irnxvt  in 
same  meaning,  Ohg.  buoc.  It  seems  that  bahu  is  more 
frequent  in  later  literature,  whereas  the  by -form  baha 
belongs  to  the  older  period]  the  arm  J  111.271  (bahuma 
bahui)  pUenta  shoulder  to  shoulder);  Vism  192.  -°t) 
pasareti  to  stretch  out  the  arm  (cp.  bahar))  PvA  112  ; 
paccha-bahuo  (cp.  bahai))  PvA  4  (galha-bandhanai) 
bandhapetva). 

-(p)pacalakai]  (adv.)  after  the  manner  of  one  who 
swings  his  arms  about  Vin  11.213  (see  expl"  at  Vin 
IV.188). 

Bahnjaiina  (adj.)  [fr.  bahu-(-jana,  cp.  samafiiia  fr.  sa- 
mana]  belonging  to  the  mass  of  people,  property  of 
many  people  or  of  the  masses  D  11.106,  219  ;  S  11.107  = 
v,262  ;  J  1.29  (V.212).  Note.  The  expression  occurs  only 
in  stock  phrase  iddha  phita  vittharika  bahujaiifia. 


Bahulya 


1 10 


Bahulya  (nt.)  [fr.  bahula,  the  Sk.  form  for  P.  bahuUa] 
abundance  Sdhp  77. 

BahuUa  (nt.)  [fr.  bahula]  i.  abundance,  superfluity,  great 
quantity  M  1.171  ;  A  iv.87  (°katha)  A  iv.87  ;  Ps  1M97  ; 
J  1. 81.  — 2.  luxurious  living,  swaggering,  puffed  up 
frame  of  mind  Vin  i.g,  59,  209;  11.197;  ni.251.  — See 
also  bahulya  &  bahuUika. 

BahuUika  (adj.)  [fr.  bahuUa]  living  in  abundance,  swagger- 
ing luxurious,  spendthrift  Vin  1.9  (+ padhana-vib- 
bhanto,  as  also  J  1.68,  with  which  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v. 
compares  MVastu  11.241  &  111.329)  :  "-'97;  m-^So  ; 
M  1. 14  ;  ni.6  ;  A  1.71  ;  in. 108,  179  sq. ;  ]  i&»  ;  ni.sbs- 
The  reading  is  often  bahulika. 

Bahusacca  (nt.)  [fr.  bahu+  sacca,  which  latter  corresponds 
to  a  Sk.  srautva  fr.  sru,  thus  b.  is  the  abstract  to  bahus- 
suta.  See  on  expl°  of  word  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.]  great 
learning,  profound  knowledge  M  1.445  ;  A  1.38  (so  read 
for  bahu°) ;  11.2  18  ;  Vin  111.10  ;  Dh  271  ;  Vv  63'. 

Baheti'  [Caus.  of  bahati^  or  Denom.  fr,  bahi]  to  keep  awaj , 
to  keep  outside,  to  ward  off  ;  only  with  ref.  to  papa 
(papaka)  to  keep  away  (from)  sin  S  1.141  (b^^^^t:;j| 
papani);  Sn  519 -Nd^  464'  (bahetva  papakani)  ;  Dh 
'O7  ■  a  popular  etymology  of  brahmana  (papag  ba- 
henti)  D  111.94  (bahitva,  better  bahetva,  cxpld  by 
panuditva  DhA  111.393;  v.  1.  K  vah°).  — pp.  bahita 
(q.  v.).     See  also  nib°,  pari". 

Baheti-  [Caus.  of  bahati*.  cp.  Sk.  vahayati]  to  carry,  see 
sam°  (sambahana,  meaning  rubbing,  stroking).  Whether 
atibaheti  belongs  here,  is  doubtful. 

Bidala  (adj.  n.)  [cp.  Sk.  vidala  in  same  meaning,  fr. 
vi+dal]  1.  akindof  pulse,  split  pea  J  IV. 353  (  =  mugga), 
in  °supa  haricot  soup  J  iv.352.  — 2.  a  split  bamboo 
cane,  in  "maficaka  a  bedstead  made  of  laths  of  split 
bamboo,  the  use  of  which  is  given  as  one  of  the  charac- 
teristic features  of  the  ascetic  life  Vin  11.149;  J  1-9; 
DhA  I.I35- 

Bindu  [cp.  Vedic  bindu  &  vindu]  1 .  a  drop,  usually  a  drop 
ofwaterSn392,8i2  (uda°)  ;  J  i.ico  ;  Vism  531  (madhu°)  ; 
ThA  281;  PvA  98  (udaka°).  —  2.  a  spot  (cp.  SBE 
XVII. 155)  Vism  222  ("vicitva  gavl  a  spotted  cow). — 
'3.  (as  adj.)  one  of  the  eight  quaUties  of  perfect  sound 
(brahma-ssara,  with  ref.  to  the  voice  of  Brahma  and  of 
Buddha,  cp.  atthanga),  which  are  given  at  D  11.211  = 
227  as  (saro  hoti)  vissattho  ca  viiifieyyo  ca  manju  ca 
savaniyo  ca  bindu  [vv.  11.  bandu  &  bhindu]  ca  avisarl 
oa  gambhiro  ca  ninnadi  ca.  We  may  translate  by 
"full,  close,  compact"  (Dial.  11.245  "continuous"). 
See  also  below  "ssara. 

-tthan!  having  breasts  round  as  a  bubble  J  v. 2 15. 
-bindu(r))  drop  .by  drop  DA  1.2  18.  -mati  (f)  Np.  of  a 
courtesan  of  Pataliputta  in  the  time  of  Asoka  Miln 
121  sq.  -matta  measuring  a  drop,  even  a  drop  PvA 
100,  104  (eka  °r)).  -sara  Np.  of  king  of  India,  father  of 
Asoka  Dpvs  v.ioi  ;  vi.15;  Mhvs  v.i8,  19.  -ssara  a 
full  rounded  voice  Sn  350  (referred  by  SnA  to  a  Maha- 
purisa) ;  adj.  having  a  full  voice  (see  above  bindu  3) 
Pv  III. 3*  (T.  vindu",  BB  bindu"  ;  PvA  expl"-  by  avis- 
sattha-ssara  sampiiidita-ssara,  i.  e.  "continuous"); 
J  ii.439  (  =  bindhuna  avisatena  pinditena  sarenasaman- 
nagata  C.) ;  v. 204,  299  (  =  sampindita-ghana-ssara) ; 
VI. 518=581  (  =  pindita-ssara  C). 

Bimba  (nt.)  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  bimba]  i.  shape,  image  (=pa- 
tiraaVvA  168)  Si.  134  (trsl.  "  puppet");  v.217  (vimba) ; 
J  V.452.  In  phrase  cittakatag  bimbag  it  refers  to  the 
human  body  ("  the  tricked-out  puppet-shape  "  Brethren 
303):  M  11.64  =Th  I,  769  =  Dh  i47=VvA  47,  cp. 
DhA  HI. 109  (  =  attabhava).  —  2.  the  red  fruit  of 
Momordica  monadelpha,  a  species  of  Amaranth  [cp.  Sk. 
bimba  &  bimbl.  a  kind  of  gourd]  J  in. 478  ;  vi.457,  591  ; 


Bilk 

Vv  368  (kancana°-vanna  of  the  colour  of  the  golden 
Bimba  Dhp.  at  VvA  lO,^  takes  it  as  bimbai  =patima ; 
DhA  1.387  (°phala,  with  ref.  to  red  lips),  bimbottha 
(f  °i)  (having)  red  lips  J  ill. 477;  vi.590  (nigrodha- 
patta-bimb'  otthi)  ThA  133  (Ap-  v.57).  The  Sk.  vimbi 
according  to  Halayudha  2.  48  is  equal  to  osthi,  a  plant 
(Bryonia  grandis?). 

-otthi  see  above  2.  -ohana  [second  part  either  = 
*uhana  vahana  "  carrying,"  or  contracted  form  of 
odahana  fr.  ava-l-  dha,  i.  e.  *odhana  *ohana  "  putting 
down  "  or  still  more  likelv  for  uhana  as  seen  in  uha- 
nati2'2  fr.  ud+hy  raising,  lifting  up]  a  pillow  Vin  1^47 
Ibhisi")  ■  II  76,  150,  2c8,  2cc,  218;  111.90,  119  (bhisi  ); 
IV  279  •  's  11.268  ;  A  III. 240  ;  VbhA  365  ;  Vism  79-  See 
also  bhisii.  -jala  [BR.  himbaja  ?]  the  Bimba  tree, 
Momordica  monadelpha  (lit.  net  of  b.  fruits)  J  1.39; 
VI  497  (cp  p.  498  ratf  ankura-rukkhar)  probably  with 
v.  1.  to  be  read  ratta-kuravaka",  see  bimbi-jala)  ; 
Bu  XVI. 19. 
Bimbaka  =  bimba  2  ;  VvA  1O8. 

Bimbi  (or  bimbi)  [  =  Sk.  bimbi,  sec  bimba]  gold,  of  golden 
colour  DA  1.280  =SnA  448  (in  Bdhgh's  fanciful  etym. 
of  king  Bimbisara,  viz.  bimbi  ti  suvannar),  sara- 
suvanna-sadisa-vannataya  B.). 

-jala  the  red  amaranth  tree,  the  Bodhi  tree  of  the 
former  Buddha  Dhammadassin  J  1.39;  v.155.  At 
J  VI. 497,  498  the  form  is  bimbajala.  The  C.  expl" 
gives  ratta-kuravaka  as  a  synonym. 

Bila'  (nt.)  [Vedic  bila,  perhaps  fr.  bhid  to  break,  cp. 
KZ  12,  123.  Thus  already  expH  by  Dhtp  489:  bila 
bhedane]  a  hole,  den,  cave  A  11.33  =  S  111.85  ;  Th  i,  189  ; 
Nd'  ^62  •  J  1.480;  11.5^;  VI.574  (  =  guhaC.);  Miln  151  ; 
Sdhp  M  — kanna"  orifice  of  the  ear  Vism  195  ;  'am- 
rnika"  anfs  nest  J  iv.30  ;  sota°  =  kanna°  DhsA  3i"- 

-asaya  (adj.)  living  in  holes,  a  cave-dweller,  one  o 
the  four  classes  of  animals  (bil°,  dak°,  van",  rukkh  ) 
S  111.85  =A  11.33  ;  Nd'  362  ;  Bu  11.97  ;  J  "iS- 

Bila^  (nt.)  [identical  with  bila^]  a  part,  bit  J  vi.153  (°satai) 
'  ico  pieces)  ;  abl.  bilaso  (adv.)  bit  by  bit  M  1.58  =  111.91 
(V  1  vilaso).  At  J  v.90  in  cpd.  migabilar)  (magsag) 
it  is  doubtful  whether  we  should  read  mig'abUag  (thus, 
as  we  have  done,  taking  abila  =  avila),  or  miga-bilag 
with  a  lengthened  metri  causa,  as  the  C.  seems  to  take 
it  (mieehi  khadita-marjsato  atirittar)  kotthasay). 

-kata  cut  into  pieces,  made  into  bits  J  v.260  (read 
maccha  bilakata  yatha  for  macchabhila  kata  y.).  Ihe 
C  here  (p.  272)  expl^  as  AoWAasa -kata ;  at  J  vi.iii 
however  the  same  phrase  is  interpreted  as />««/a-kata, 
i  e  thrown  into  a  heap  (like  fish  caught  by  a  fisherman 
in  nets).  Both  passages  are  applied  to  fish  and  refer 
to  tortures  in  Niraya. 
Bila'  [cp.  Sk.  vida]  a  kind  of  salt  Vin  1.202  ;  M  11.178,  181. 

Bilanga  [etym.  doubtful ;  one  compares  both  Sk.  viijanga 
the  plant  Embelia  ribes,  and  vilanga  the  plant  Erycibe 
paniculata]  sour  gruel  J  vi.365  (  =  kaii]iya),  usually  in 
stock  phrase  kanajaka  bilanga-dutiya  (seed-cake?) 
accompanied  by  sour  gruel  Vin  11.77.  7^  ^  ^  1.90  ;  A 
IMS-  1V.S92;  J  1228;  III. 299;  SnA  94;  DhA  iii.io 
(V.  1  pilanka-°akar,);  iv.77;  VvA  222,  298  (b.lanka  ).__ 
-thalika  a  certain  torture,  called  "  gr^^l-.P"*  ^ 
(should  there  be  any  relation  to  bila-kata  under  bila  ?) 
A  1.47  ;  11.122  ;  Nd^  604  (v.  1.  khil°) ;  Miln  197.  290,  358 
(all  passages  in  standard  setting). 

Bilangika  (adj.)  living  on  sour  gruel;  N.  of  a  class  of 
brahman  as  at  Rajagaha  S  1.164. 

Billa  [cp.  Ved.  bilva]  fruit  of  the  Bilva  tree,  Aegle  raar- 
melos  or  Bengal  quince,  only  in  o«e  stock  phrase  where 
its  size  is  compared  with  sizes  of  smaller  fruits,  ana 
where  it  is  preceded   by  araalaka  S   1.150=  A  iv.170 


Bilara 


III 


Buddha 


(vv.  11.  villa,  bila.  beju,  bilala)=Sn  p.  125  (vv.  11.  pilla 
billa,  billa ;  T.  reading  after  SS  billi).  Cp.  derivations 
bella  &  beluva. 

Bi]aia  [etym.  uncertain,  prob.  a  loan-word  ;  cp.  late  Sk. 
bidala  &  see  also  P.  bilala.  The  Prk.  forms  are  birala 
&  virala,  f.  birali]  a  cat  D  11. 8j  ;  M  1.128,  3  J4  ;  S  11.270  ; 
A  111.122  (vijara) ;  v.202,  289;  Th  1,  1138;  J  1.461  (as 
representing  deceit),  480;  v. 406,  416,  418;  Miln  118; 
DhA  II.  152;  PugA  225.  On  bijara  in  similes  cp. 
J.P.T.S.  1907,  116. 

-nissakkana  (-matta)  (large  enough)  for  a  cat  to  creep 
through  A  v.  195.  -bhasta  (a  bag  of)  catskin  M  1.128 
(expl*  by  Bdhgh  as  "  bi|ara-camma-pasibbako  ") ;  Th  i, 
1138.     At  both  passages  in  similes. 

Bilarika  (f)  [cp.  Sk.  bidalikaj  a  she-cat  J  111.2O5. 

Bi}ala'  [see  bijara]  a  cat  J  i.iio  ;  11.244 :  ^1.593.  pakkha" 
a  flying  fox  J  vi.538. 

B4ala-  [see  bila']  a  kind  of  salt  Abhp  461. 

Bijali  (f)  [f.  of  bijala  =  bijara,  cp.  Sk.  bidali,  also  N.  of  a 
plant,  see  on  Prk.  chira-birali  ^  Sk.  ksira-bidali  Pischel 
Gr.  §  241]  a  bulbous  plant,  a  tuber  J  iv.46  (=°valli- 
kanda,  cp.  gloss  latatanta  on  kalamba),  371  (  =  °kanda 
Com.  p.  373);  VI. 578.     Cp.  takkaja. 

Bi}ibilika  (f)  [onomat.  cp.  E.  babble]  tittle-tattle  S  i.2co  = 
Th'i.  119.  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  {Brethren  106  n.)  trsi-  "  fingle- 
fangle,"  noting  the  commentator's  paraphrase  "  vili- 
vilikriya  "  (lit.  sticky-sticky-action  ?). 

Bija  (nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  bija]  i.  seed,  germ,  semen,  spawn. 
Used  very  frequently  in  figurative  sense :  see  on  similes 
J.P.T.S.  19(17,  ii6-  —  D  1.135  (°bhatta  seed-corn  & 
food);  111.44  (the  live  kinds:  see  below  under  °gama) ; 
M  1.457:  S  1-21,  134.  172.  227:  III. 54.  91;  IV. 315; 
A  1.32  (ucchu°),  135,  223,  229,  239:  111.404;  1V.237; 
V.213  (ucchu°) ;  Sn  77  (saddha  bijar)  tapo  vunhi.  cp. 
SnA  142  sq.,  where  a  detailed  discussion  on  bija  is 
found),  209,  235  (khina°  adj.  fig.)  ;  J  1.242  (tina°-adini 
grass  and  other  seeds),  281;  Pv  i.i';  Vism  555  (in 
simile);  KhA  194  (on  Sn  235,  in  another  comparison) ; 
Sdhp  24,  270  sq.,  318.  nibbatta"  (or  nivatta")  (adj.)  that 
which  has  dropped  its  seed  (hence  a  lawful  food)  Via 
1. 215,  cp.  11.109;  IV. 35.  —  2.  element,  in  udaka°  whose 
element  is  the  water  J  vm6o. 

-gama  seed-group,  seed-kingdom,  seed-creation  (opp. 
bhuta-gama).  There  are  5  kinds  of  seeds  usually 
enum"",  e.  g.  at  D  1.5  (expl''  at  DA  1.77,  trsl"  at  Dial. 
1.6  and  passim),  viz.  mula",  khandha",  phalu",  agga°, 
bija",  or  plants  propagated  by  roots,  cuttings,  joints, 
buddings,  shoots,  seeds  (Dial.  111.40 :  tubers,  shoots, 
berries,  joints,  seeds).  The  same  set  occurs  at  D  111.44, 
47  ;  Vin  IV. 34  ;  SnA  144.  —  Without  ref.  to  the  5  kinds 
at  M  111.34  ;  S  V.46  ;  Miln  33.  -jata  species  of  seed 
S  III. 54.  -bija  one  of  the  5  groups  of  edible  or  useful 
plants,  falling  under  bijagama.  It  is  expl""  at  Vin 
IV.35  &  DA  1.8 1  by  the  terms  pubbanna  (i.  e.  the  seven 
dhaiinani  or  grains,  sali,  vihi,  yava,  godhuma,  kangu. 
varaka,  kudrijsa)  and  aparanna  (i.  e.  beans  and  other 
leguminous  plants,  and  gourds  such  as  mugga,  masa. 
tila,  kulattha,  alabu,  kumbhanda).  -sakata  a  cart 
(-load)  of  seeds  SnA  137. 

Bijaka[fr.  bija]  scion,  offspring  Viniii. 18.  — nila^'a  water- 
plant  Vin  111.276  (C.  on  Vin  111.177). 

Bijati  &  Bijaai  are  by-forms  of  vijati  &  vijani  (q.  v.). 

Bijin  (-°)  (adj.)  [fr.  bija]  having  seed,  only  in  cpd.  eka" 
having  one  seed  (for  only  one  future  life)  left  A  1.233  : 
S  v.205  ;  Nett  189,  cp.  A.  iv.380  ;  Kvu  11.471.  see  also 
KvuA  in  J.P.T.S.  1889,  137. 

BIbhaccha  (adj.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  bibhatsa,  bibhatsate  to 
foel  disgust.     Not  a  des.  fr.  badhate :  see  Waldc,  Lai. 


IF/6,  s.  V.  fastidium]  disgusting,  awful,  horrible,  dreadful 
J  11.276;  IV, 71  ("vanna),  Sdhp  603.  "dassana  a  dis- 
gusting sight,  horrible  to  behold  J  1.171  ;  PvA  32,  56, 
68,  99  ( :  all  with  ref.  to  Petas).  —  The  spelling  bhi- 
bhaccha  (after  bhi)  is  sometimes  found,  e.  g.  at  J  i.Oi  ; 
IV. 491  ;  V.42. 

Birala  [cp.  Sk.  virana  c\:  virani-inula  =  usira  Halayudha 
2,  467]  a  fragrant  grass,  Andropogon  muricatum 
S  III. 137;  (here  represented  as  larger  than  the  kusa  & 
babbaja  grasses,  smaller  than  a  tree). 

Bajjhaka  (adj.)  [fr.  badh]  intelligent,  prudent,  judicious, 
in  a°  Dpvs  ix.17,  foolish,  imprudent,  unmindful  of  their 
own  interest  (trsl°  suggested  by  E.  Hardy  as  preferable 
to  Oldcnberg's  "  unnoticed  ").  'Morris,  J.P.T.S.  1893, 
69  suggests  "  not  fighting,"  thus  making  abujjhaka  = 
avujjh°  =ayujjh''  (of  yadh). 

Baijhati  [budh,  y-formation,  corresp.  to  Sk.  budhyate  for 
the  usual  bodhate.  The  sense  is  that  of  a  Med.,  but  is 
also  used  as  Act.  with  ace.  of  object,  e.  g.  saccani 
bujjhi  he  recognised  the  truths  Vism  209.  —  The  Dhtp 
(414)  and  Dhtm  (652)  explain  budh  by  "  avagamane  " 
(understanding,  sec  ogamana).  Dhtm  (242)  also  by 
"  bodhane "  (awakening).  Bdhgh's  expl"  of  the 
meaning  is  "  kilesa-santana-niddaya  utthahati  cattari 
va  ariyasaccani  pativijjhati  Nibbanam  eva  va  sacchi- 
karoti  "  DhsA  2 1 7,  cp.  trsl"  at  Expos.  294  "to  rise  from 
the  slumber  of  the  continuum  of  the  lower  nature,  or 
a  penetrating  the  Ariyan  Truths,  or  a  realizing  Nib- 
bana "]  to  be  awake,  to  be  enlightened  in  (ace),  to 
perceive,  to  know,  recognise,  understand  D  11.249 ; 
S  1.74,  198;  Dh  136,  286;  Th  1,  146;  J  111.331;  iv.49, 
425;  Miln  165,  348  (pot.  bujjheyya) ;  Dpvs  1.14  (with 
gen.)  K1l.\  219  (so  attho  sukhai)  b.).  3"^  pi.  bujjhare 
Th  2,  453;  Bu  11.183.  imper.  bujjhassu  Bu  11.183. — 
fut.  bujjhissati  Bu  11.65;  ^o^-  abujjhi  Bu  11.2 11,  and 
bujjhi  J  IV. 425  ;  Vism  209  ;  pret.  j,"'  sg.  abujjhatha 
Bu  VII. 22.  —  ppr.  bujjhamana  Sn  395;  Bu  vii.22  ; 
DhA  1.93.  —  pp.  buddha  (q.  v.).  —  Cans.  I.  bodheti 
(q.  v.). — Caus.  II.  bujjhapeti  to  lead  to  knowledge  or 
recognition  J  1.407.  Two  infinitives  formed  fr.  bodh, 
but  belonging  to  budh  are  bodhur)  J  v.341,  and  bod- 
dhut)  Th  1.  167. 

Bajjhana  (nt.)  [fr.  budh]  awakening,  attaining  to  know- 
ledge, recognition  Ps  1.18;  Miln  194;  DA  1.51. 

Bajjhanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  bujjhana]  endowed  with  know- 
ledge, having  the  elements  of  bodhi,  being  enlightened 
DhsA  217. 

Bujjhitar  [n.  ag.  of  bujjhati]  one  who  becomes  enlight- 
ened or  recognises  Nd'  457  =Ps  1.174=  Vism  209 
(bujjhita  saccani,  of  the  Buddha). 

Ba441l&  [fo""  vuddha,  pp.  of  vrdh,  see  vaddhati]  aged,  old 
D  11.162  ;  J  1.164  ("pabbajita  one  who  has  become  an 
ascetic  in  his  old  age).  Corapar.  buddhatara  DhA 
11.239  (v.  I.  K.B.S.  vud^hatara). 

Buddha'  (adj.)  [med.-pass.  pp.  of  bujjhati,  cp.  Epic  Sk. 
buddha]  (a)  understood  S  1.35=60  (su-dub-buddha 
very  difficult  to  understand).  —  (b)  having  attained 
enlightenment,  wise  A  iv.449  ;  PvA  16  (buddh'  adayo), 
60  (=ariya).  Usually  appH  to  the  Bhagavant  (Go- 
tama)  M  1.386  (one  of  the  adj.  describing  Gotama  to 
Nigantha  Nathaputta) ;  Sn  993.  The  true  brahmaija 
is  buddha.  e.  g.  Sn  622.  643,  646. 

Buddha-  I  buddha']  A.  one  who  has  attained  enlighten- 
ment ;  a  rrian  superior  to  all  other  beings,  human  & 
divine,  by  his  knowledge  of  the  truth,  a  Buddha.  At 
A  11.38  the  Buddha  declares  himself  to  be  neither  a 
god  (deva)  nor  a  Gandharva.  nor  a  Yaksa  nor  a  man. — 
The  word  Buddha  is  an  appellative,  not  a  proper  name 
(na  matara   katar)   etc.,   vimokkh'  antikai)  etar)   bud- 


Buddha 


112 


Buddha 


dhanar)  Bhagavantanai)  bodhiya  mule  .  .  .  paiiiSatti) 
Nd^  458  &  Ps  1. 1 74.  —  There  are  2  sorts  of  B's,  viz. 
Pacceka-buddhas  or  Buddhas  who  attain  to  complete 
enlightenment,  but  do  not  preach  the  way  of  deliver- 
ance to  the  world,  and  Sammasambuddhas,  who  are 
omniscient  and  endowed  with  the  10  powers  (see  bala), 
and  whose  mission  is  to  proclaim  the  saving  truth  to 
all  beings  (cp.  Miln  106).  In  this  function  the  B's  are 
Sattharo  or  teachers.  Masters.  In  his  role  of  a  pre- 
eminent man  a  Buddha  is  styled  Bhagava  or  Lord  : 
Buddho  so  Bhagava  M  1.235;  Pv  ii.9*'  =  DhA  III. 219. 

—  Besides  the  18  dhamma  and  the  10  balani  they  are 
gifted  with  the  4  vesarajjani  (A  11.9,  cp.  Miln  106). 
These  teachers  appear  upon  the  earth  from  time  to 
time;  the  approach  of  the  birth  of  a  B.  (buddh'-up- 
pada)  is  hailed  by  the  acclamation  of  the  worlds,  they  live 
the  houseless  life  and  found  an  Order  (Buddha-pamukha 
bhikkhu-sangha  Sn  p.  in  ;  Sn  81,  386;  Miln  212  ;  DA 
1.242  ;  PvA  19).  The  news  that  a  B.  has  appeared 
upon  earth  is  a  cause  of  the  greatest  rejoicing  :  oppor- 
tunity to  see  him  is  eagerly  sought  (Vin  n.  15,5  ;  S  1.2  10  ; 
DA  1.248).  The  B.  is  always  born  in  a  brahmana  or 
khattiya  family.  It  is  impossible  here  to  give  all  the 
references  for  the  Buddhas  or  Buddhahood  in  general ; 
see  e.  g.  Vin  111.24  sq.  ;  Dh  182  sq.,  194.  195  (=samma 
sambuddha  DhA  in. 252).  387;  J  1.51  ;  111.128;  Vism 
442  (pubba-buddha) ;  PvA  20.  —  The  remembrance  of 
former  births  a  B.  shares  with  other  classes  of  privileged 
beings,  only  in  a  different  (higher)  degree.  This  faculty, 
(in  an  ascending  scade)  is  possessed  by  the  foil.  6  classes  : 
titthiya,  pakati-savaka,  maha-savaka,  agga-savaka, 
pacceka-buddha,  buddha  (see  Vism  411).  —  B.  The 
word  Buddha  is  specially  apphed  to  the  Buddha  pf  the 
present  world-age,  Gotc^ma  by  family-name.  He  is 
said  to  be  the  25""  of  the  series  of  former  Buddhas 
(pubba  buddha)  S  1.109,  140  ;  iv.52.  —  Seven  Buddhas 
are  mentioned  in  the  earlier  texts  &  frequently  referred 
to  (cp.  the  7  Rishis  of  the  Vedic  period,  see  also  under 
satta,  No.  7).  They  are  Vipassi,  Sikhi,  Vessabhii, 
Kakusandha,  Konagamana,  Kassapa  and  Gotama 
(D  II. 5-7  ;  S  11.5-11  ;  cp.  Th  i,  491  ;  J  n.147).  They  are 
also  mentioned  in  an  old  formula  against  snake-bites 
(Vin  II.  1 10).  The  (allegorical)  names  of  the  predecessors 
of  these  in  former  ages  are  Dipankara,  Kondailna,  Man- 
gala,  Sumana,  Revata,  Sobhita,  Anomadassi,  Paduma, 
Narada,  Padumuttara,  Sumedha,  Sujata,  PiyadassI, 
Atthadassi,  Dhammadassi,  Siddhattha,  Tissa,  Phussa. 

—  The  typical  career  of  a  Buddha  is  illustrated  in 
the  life  of  Gotama  and  the  legends  connected  with  his 
birth,  as  they  appear  in  later  tradition.  Before  his  last 
existence  he  practised  the  10  perfections  (paramita, 
q.  V.)  for  many  ages,  &  finally  descended  from  the 
Tusita  Heaven  (see  Buddhavagsa).  He  was  born  in  a 
khattiya  family  and  was  distinguished  by  the  32  signs 
of  a  great  man  (Mahapurisa-lakkhanani  see  D  11. 17  sq. 
and  similar  passages ;  cp.  Ud  48).  His  mother  Maya 
bore  him  painlessly  and  died  seven  days  after  his  birth 
M  HI.118  sq.  —  The  story  of  each  of  the  25  Buddhas  is 
given  in  the  Buddhavagsa,  quoted  in  the  introductory 
chapters  of  the  Jatak'  atthakatha.  —  Convinced  that 
asceticism  was  not  the  way  to  enlightenment,  he 
renounced  austerities.  He  became  enlightened  when 
seated  in  meditation  under  an  Assattha  tree  (Ficus 
religiosa,  hence  called  Bodhi  or  Bo  tree).  At  the 
supreme  moment  he  was  tempted  by  Mara,  but  van- 
quished the  evil  one.  He  was  then  ready  to  depart, 
but  resolved  to  remain  in  the  world  and  preach  the 
truth  (M  I.  i6g  :  Vin  1.6  ;  a  rather  diff.  account  A  11.20). 
That  day  he  knew  and  proclaimed  himself  to  be  the 
Buddha  and  his  career  as  a  teacher  began  (M  1.171  ; 
Vin  1.9;  Sn  558). —  Like  all  the  other  Samma-sam 
buddhas  he  founded  an  Order,  converting  and  gladden- 
ing men  by  his  discourses.  After  a  long  life  of  teach- 
ing he  attained  Nibbana  (nibbanar)  adhigacchi),  and 
passed  utterly  away:  S  1.2 10;  D  11. 156;  Sn  83,  513, 


1 133  sq.  ;  Miln  96.  —  The  Epithets  attributed  to  all  the 
Buddhas  are  naturally  assigned  also  to  Gotama  Buddha. 
Out  of  the  almost  endless  series  of  these  we  only  give 
a  few.  He  is  adored  as  the  highest  and  holiest  of  men 
(S  1.47 ;  III. 84 :  loke  anuttaro,  lokassa  aggo ;  Miln  70). 
He  is  the  supremely  wise,  the  conqueror  of  the  powers 
of  darkness,  the  teacher  of  gods  (devas  and  yakkhas) 
and  men  S  1.50,  132,  206.  301  ;  A  1.142  ;  11. 33  ;  111.65  ; 
Sn  157  sq.  He  is  the  adicca-bandhu  kinsman  of  the 
sun  S  1. 1 86;  and  compared  to  a  universal  monarch 
(raja  cakkavatti)  A  1.76  ;  in. 150  and  to  the  lion  (siha), 
the  king  of  the  animals  A  in. 122.  He  is  buddha-vira 
Th  I,  47 ;  the  refuge  of  all  beings  M  11.305  ;  DA  1.233  '■ 
Miln  95;  further  appatipuggala  S  11 34;  his  teaching 
leads  to  enlightenment,  to  self-conquest,  to  security  & 
deliverance  M  1.235;  Sn  454,  993;  DA  1.230.  He 
himself  is  not  to  be  reborn  (antima-sariro  with  his  last 
body)  S  1.2 10  ;  he  is  vimutto,  freed  &  has  come  to  the 
end  of  sorrow  A  iv.258  ;  S  111.65  '•  f""  o^  compassion  for 
all  beings  S  1.25,  51  ;  _M  11. 100;  he  is  bhisakko  the 
physician  A  IV.34O  ;  magga-ntiu,  magga-vidu,  magga- 
kovidoS  111.66.  —  Under  Buddh' anussati  (Vism  198  sq.) 
we  find  the  famous  formula  Bhagava  Arahar)  Samma- 
sambuddho  vijja-carana-sampanno  sugato  lokavidu 
anuttaro  purisa-damma-sarathi  Sattha  devamanussanai) 
buddho  Bhagava  (D  i.49j=£(),  analysed  &  exegetically 
discussed.  Here  (p.  209)  "  Buddha  "  is  expH  with  the 
formula  as  found  at  Ps  l.i  74  ;  Nd'  457.  More  explicitly 
with  var.  epithets  at  the  latter  passage.  This  formula 
is  one  of  the  highest  &  most  comprehensive  characteri- 
sations of  a  Buddha,  &  occurs  frequently  in  the  Canon, 
e.  g.  M  1. 179;  S  11.69;  V.343.  —  A  khattiya  by  birth  he 
is  called  a  brahmana  because  he  carries  on  the  sacred 
tradition,  and  because  he  excels  in  wisdom,  self-control 
and  virtue  Miln  225. 

-inubuddha  enlightened  after  the  Enlightened  one 
Th  I,  679,  124b  (trsl""  "  who  next  to  our  Great  Waked 
one  was  awoke").  -4nubhava  the  majestic  power  of 
the  B.  PvA  38,  171.  -Snussati  mindfulness  of  the 
B.,  one  of  the  6  anussatis  (B.-,  dhamma°,  sangha",  s!la°, 
caga°,  devata")  D  in. 250.  280  ;  Vism  132  (where  followed 
by  upasamanussati  and  4  other  qualities  making  up  the 
piti-sambojjh'anga ;  see  anussati),  197  sq.  (the  10,  as 
mentioned  under  anussati).  -ankura  a  nascent  (lit. 
sprouting)  Buddha,  one  who  is  destined  to  be  a  B. 
DhA  1.83.  -antara  a  Buddha-interval,  the  period 
between  the  appearance  of  one  Buddha  &  the  next 
Miln  3  ;  DhA  1.201  (the  4  last  ones)  ;  iv.201  ;  PvA  10,  14, 
21,  47,  191.  -arammana  having  its  foundation  or  cause 
in  the  B.,  in  "piti  joy,  caused  by  contemplation  of  a  B. 
J  111.405  ;  Vism  143  (here  as  ubbega-piti).  -upatthana 
B. -worship  DhA  i.ioi  ;  PvA  93.  -uppada  the  coming 
into  existence  of  a  Buddha,  time  or  age  in  which  a  B. 
was  born  (opp.  buddh'  antara),  a. Buddha-period  J  1.59; 
Mhbv  12;  VbhA  50;  ThA  28.  -kara  making  a  B., 
bringing  about  Buddhahood  J  1.20.  -karaka  =  ''kara 
Mhbv  g.  -kala  the  time  of  a  B.  Vism  91  (Buddhakalo 
viya  pavattati  it  is  like  the  time  of  the  B.)  -kula 
Buddha-clan  SnA  532  (B.-pita,  °mata  ibid.),  -kola- 
hala  the  announcement  of  a  Buddha,  one  of  the  5 
kolahalas  (q.  v.)  KhA  121,  cp.  J  1.48.  -khetta  field  or 
region  of  (or  for  the  existence  of)  a  Buddha  Vism  414 
(divided  into  3  spheres :  jatikkhetta,  anakkhetta, 
visayakkhetta,  see  khetta).  -gata  directed  or  referring 
to  the  B.  S  1.2  1 1  (sati)  ;  Dh  296.  -guna  quality  of  a 
B.,  virtue,  character  of  a  Buddha  J  1.27;  11147; 
Bu  II. 177;  Mbhv  80;  KhA  121  (cp.  App.).  -cakkhu 
the  eye  of  a  Buddha,  i.  e.  an  eye  (or  the  faculty)  of 
complete  intuition  Vin  1.6 ;  ThA  2  ;  see  discussed  in 
detail  at  Nd^  359  =Nd''  235*;  cp.  cakkhu.  -fiana 
knowledge  of  a  B..  which  is  boundless  (cp.  Saddh.  73, 
J.P.T.S.  1887,  40)  Bu  1.64  (appameyya) ;  x.5  (cuddasa). 
-dhamma  Buddhahood  Miln  276;  pi.  condition  or 
attributes  pf  a  B.  J  1.20  ;  referred  to  as  6  at  Nd'  143  = 
Nd^  466  (bhagi  channai)  "anan  ti  Bhagava),  as  18  at 


Buddbaka 


"3 


Bojjhanga 


Miln  105,  285.  Kern  {Manual  &■  Grundriss  111.8,  p.  63) 
gives  (after  Lai.  Vist.  183,  343)  the  foil.  18  avenika- 
(Iharmas  ("  extraordinary  qualities  ")  as  such  :  (i )  seeing 
all  things  past,  (2)  present,  {3)  future,  (4)  propriety  of 
actions  of  the  body,  (5)  of  speech,  (6)  of  thought,  (7) 
firmness  of  intuition,  (8)  of  memory,  (9)  of  samadhi, 
(lo)  of  energy,  (11)  of  emancipation,  (12)  of  wisdom, 
(13)  freedom  from  fickleness,  (14)  noisiness,  (15)  con- 
fusedness,  (16)  hastiness,  (17)  heedlessness,  (18)  incon- 
siderateness.  -panha  the  name  given  to  one  question 
asked  by  Sariputta,  which  the  paribbajika  Kundala- 
kesi  was  unable  to  answer  DhA  11.225.  -pasanna  finding 
one's  happiness,  or  believing  in  the  B.  Vin  iv.39.  -putta 
son  of  the  B.  said  of  bhikkhus  or  arahants  Miln  143, 
cp.  S  III. 83  :  putta  Buddhassa  orasa.  -bala  the  force 
of  a  B.  (iddibala  &  paniia")  Bu  1.3.  -bijankura  a  future 
B.  Bu  11.71.  -bhava  condition  of  a  B.  enlightenment 
J  1.14,  147  (abuddhabhava  un-buddhahood.  of  Deva- 
datta) :  MA  i.i.  -bhiimi  the  ground  of  Buddhahood 
Bu  II  173.  -manta  mystic  verses  of  a  B.  DA  1.248. 
-mamaka  devotedly  attached  to  the  B.  DhA  i.2(.6 
(+Dhamma°,  Sangha^).  -rakkhita  saved  by  the  B. 
(Np.)  SnA  534  (+Dhamnia").  -rasmi  (pi.  ^iyo)  rays 
shining  forth  from  the  person  of  the  Buddha ;  they  are 
of  6  colours  J  1. 501  ;  SnA  132  ;  Mhbv  6,  15,  38  ;  VvA 
207  ;  DhsA  13.  -rupa  form  or  figure  of  the  B.  Vism  228 
(Marena  nimmita,  cp.  Divy  162,  166:  Buddha-nirmana 
the  magic  figure  of  the  B.).  -lilha  (A  'lilha)  deport- 
ment, ease,  grace  of  a  Buddha  J  1.54  ;  Mhbv  39;  DhA 
1.33  ;  11.41.  -vacana  the  word  (teaching)  of  the  Buddha 
Miln  17;  KhA  13;  SnA  274,  331.  -visaya  the  sphere 
(of  wonder),  the  range,  scope  or  power  of  a  Buddha 
(cp.  buddha-khetta)  DhA  1.33;  11. 199;  SnA  154,  228. 
-veneyya  one  able  to  be  led  to  enlightenment,  accessible 
to  Buddha's  teaching  Sn.\  15,  331.  -sasana  the 
teaching  (instructions)  of  the  B.  Dh  368,  381. 
-sukumala  delicate,  sensitive  (to  fatigue),  as  Buddhas 
are  Dh.\  i  5. 

Baddhaka  (-")  (adj.)  [fr.  buddha]  in  cpd.  dvangula-bud- 
dhika  (f.)  posse.ssing  insight  as  much  as  2  finger-breadths 
VvA  96.  —  The  °ka  belongs  to  the  whole  cpd. 

Baddhata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  buddha]  enlightenment,  wisdom 
DhA  IV. 228  ;  ThA  4  (Buddha-subuddhata).  —  Cp.  bud- 
dhatta. 

Baddhati  to  obstruct,  withhold  etc.  :  see  pali°. 

Buddhatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  buddha]  state  of  (perfect) 
enlightenment,  (attainment  of)  Buddhahood  J  iii  363 
(sabbadhammanari  b.) ;  Vism  209  (buddhatta  Buddho) ; 
Mhbv  12.     Cp.  buddhata  and  abhisambuddhatta. 

Buddhi  (f.)  rfr.  budh;  cp.  Class.  Sk.  buddhi]  wisdom,  in- 
telligence D  III.  165  (in  sequence  saddha  sila  suta  b. 
ciga  etc.) ;  J  in. 369  ;  v. 257  ;  Miln  349  ;  Sdhp  263.  The 
ref.  Vism  439  .should  be  read  vuddhi  for  b°. 

-carita  one  whose  behaviour  or  character  is  wisdom 
Vism  104  (=pannava).  -sampanna  endowed  with 
(highest)  wisdom  PvA  39. 

Baddilika  (adj.)  r.°)  [fr.  buddhi]  intelligent,  in  cpds  a." 
unintelligent  &  sa°  possessed  of  wisdom  Miln  76. 

Bjddhimant  (adj.)  [fr.  buddhi]  possessing  insight,  full  of 
right  knowledge  Vin  11. 195;  J  v. 257;  Miln  21,  294; 
PvA   131   (pandita.  b  ,  sappanila-jatika). 

Bunda  [Vedic  budhna]  the  root  of  a  tree  Abhp  549. 

Bundika  in  cpd.  °abaddha  is  of  uncertain  origin ;  the 
whole  means  a  sort  of  seat  or  bedstead  (fixed  up  or  tied 
together  with  slats?)  Vin  11. 149;  iv.40,  357. 

Bubbuja  (&  Bubbula)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  budbuda]  a  bubble. 
On  similes  cp./. f.r.S.  1907,  1 17.  —  Usually  of  a  water- 
bubble  udaka"  S  111.141  ;  A  iv.137  ;  J  v.216;  Miln  117  ; 


Vism  109  ;  DhA  111.209  ;  VbhA  33  (as  unsubstantial  to 
which  vedana  are  likened).  In  other  connection  at 
J  1.68  (of  cooking  gruel). 

Babbnlaka  =  bubbula,  viz.  i.  a  bubble  DhA  in. 166;  Miln 
118.  — 2.  the  iris  of  the  eye  Th  2,  395  (cp.  Morris,  in 
J.P.T.S.  1884,  89,  but  according  to  ThA  259  the  reading 
pubbajhaka  is  to  be  preferred.) 

Bubhukkhita  [pp.  of  bubhukkhati,  Desid.  of  bhuiijati] 
wishing  to  eat,  hungry  J  11. 14;  v. 70;  Miln  66;  Davs 
III. 32. 

Ba}ha  [for  vulha,  cp.  Sk.  vyudha  for  the  usual  vyuha, 
q.  v.]  array  of  troops  J  1.387. 

Buha  see  vyuha. 

Belava  &  Belnva  [the  guna-form  of  billa.  in  like  meaning. 
It  is  the  diaeretic  form  of  Sk.  'bailva  or  *vailva,  of 
which  the  contracted  form  is  P.  bella]  i .  the  Vilva  tree, 
Aegle  marmelos  M  1.108;  11. 6  ;  J  iv.363.  368:  vi.525, 
560.  —  2.  wood  of  the  Vilva  tree  S  1.22;  D  11.264; 
Mhbv  31 

-pakka  ripe  fruit  of  the  Vilva  J  v. 74.  -pandu(-vina) 
a  yellow  flute  made  of  Vilva  wood,  representing  a  kind 
of  magic  flute  which  according  to  SnA  393  first  belonged 
to  Mara,  and  was  then  given  to  Paficasikha,  one  of  the 
Heavenly  Musicians,  by  Sakka.  See  Vism  392  (attri- 
buted to  Pailcasikha) ;  DhA  1.433  (of  Mara  ;  v.  1.  veluva- 
danda-vina)  ;  111.225  (of  P.)  ;  SnA  393  (v.  1.  veluva°). 
-latthi  a  young  sprout  of  the  Vilva  tree  KhA  118. 
-salatuka  the  unripe  fruit  of  the  Vilva,  next  in  size  to 
the  smaller  kola,  surpassed  in  size  by  the  ripe  billa  or 
billi  S  i.i50=A  iv.i70=Sn  p.  125. 

Bella  (m.  &  nt.)  [  =  beluva,  q.  v.]  the  fruit  of  the  Vilva  tree 
(a  kind  of  citron  ?)  J  III. 77  (C.  beluva) ;  vi.578.  Also 
in  doubtful  passage  at  J  111.319  (v.  1.  mella,  phella). 

Boijha  (nt.)  [orig.  grd.  of  bujjhati  or  bodheti]  a  matter  to 
be  known  or  understood,  subject  of  knowledge  or  under- 
standing Nett  20. 

Bojjhanga  [bodhi-t- anga;  cp.  BSk.  bodhyanga,  e.  g.  Lai. 
Vist.  37,  where  the  7  are  given  at  Divy  2c8]  a  factor 
or  constituent  of  knowledge  or  wisdom.  There  are  7 
bojjhangas  usually  referred  to  or  understood  from  the 
context.  There  are  enum''  at  several  places,  e.  g.  at 
D  III.  106,  where  they  are  mentioned  in  a  list  of  qualities 
(dhamma)  which  contribute  to  the  greatest  happiness 
of  gods  and  man.  viz.  the  4  satipatthana,  4  samma- 
padhana,  4  iddhipada,  5  indnyani,  5  balani  &  the  7 
bojjhangas  and  ariya  atthangika  magga,  37  in  all. 
The  same  list  we  find  at  Divy  208.  —  The  7  b.  (frequently 
also  called  sambojjhanga)  are  sati,  dhamma-vicaya, 
viriya,  piti,  passaddhi,  samadhi,  upekha  or  mindfulness, 
investigation  of  the  Law,  energy,  rapture,  repose,  con- 
centration and  equanimity  (DhsA  217,  cp.  Expositor 
11.294).  —  D  11.79,  83,  120,  303;  iii.ioi,  128,  284; 
M  I.I  I.  61  ;  II. 12  ;  III. 85,  275  ;  S  1.54  ;  v. 82,  1 10  ;  A  1.14  ; 
1V.23  ;  Nd'  14,  45,  171  Ckusala),  341  ;  Kvu  1.158  ;  Dhs 
358,  528.  1354;  Vbh  199  sq.,  227  sq.  ;  Vism  160;  Miln 
340;  DhA  1.230;  VbhA  120,  310;  ThA  27,  50,  160. 
They  are  counted  among  the  37  constituents  of  Ara- 
hantship,  viz.  the  30  above-mentioned  qualities  (count- 
ing magga  as  one),  with  addition  of  silesu  paripuri- 
karita,  indriyesu  gutta-dvarata,  bhojane  mattaiinuta, 
jagariy'  anuyoga,  sati-sampajafinar)  (see  e.  g.  Nd'  14; 
Nd-  s.  v.  satipatthana  &  sila);  cp.  Th  i,  161,  162; 
Th  2,  21  (magga  nibbana-pattiya) ;  DhsA  217  (bodhaya 
sarjvattanti  ti  bojjhanga  etc.  ;  also  def.  as  "  bodhissa 
ango  ti  pi  bojjhango  sen'  angarath'  ang'  adayo  viya). 
They  are  also  called  the  paribhoga-bhandani  or  "  in- 
signia "  of  the  Buddha  Miln  330. 

-kosalla  proficiency  in  the  constituents  of  wisdom 
Vism  248. 


Bodha 


114 


Bya 


Bodha'  [fr.  budh;  the  usual]  form  is  sambodha  =  bodhi, 
viz.  knowledge,  wisdom,  enlightenment,  Buddhaship 
D  111.54  (v.  1.  sam°) ;  DhsA  217;  in  phrase  bodhaya 
maggo  J  1.67  ;  Miln  244,  289  ;  and  in  bodha-pakkhiya- 
dhamma  (for  which  usually  bodhi°)  SnA  164  (where 
given  as  37) ;  complementary  to  santi  (arousing, 
soothing)  Th  i,  342.  bodhangama  leading  to  enlighten- 
ment (dhamma)  Nett  31,  83  (v.  1.  bojjh°). 

Bodha~  see  pali". 

Bodhana   (nt.)    [fr.   bodheti]    i.  knowing   Miln    168    (cp. 

S   V.83).  —  2.   (adj.)   enlightening,   teaching   Bu   26,   22 

(pacchima-jana°). 

Bodhaniya  (adj.)  [grd.  fr.  bodheti]  capable  of  being  en- 
lightened, worthy  to  be  taught  Bu  5,  31.  See  also 
bodhaneyya. 

Bodhaneyya  (adj.)  [fr.  bodheti,  see  bodhaniya]  capable  of 
being  enlightened,  to  be  taught  the  truth  Bu  2,  195 
(jana)  ;  Miln  169  (vena  yogena  bodhaneyya  satta 
bujjhanti  tcna  y.  bodheti) ;  otherwise  in  comb"  bo- 
dhaneyya-bandhavo  the  (Buddha's)  relations  (or  fellow- 
men)  who  are  able  to  be  enlightened  J  1.345  =DhA 
1-367;  J  V.335. 

Bodhi'  (f.)  [fr.  budh,  cp.  Vedic  bodhin-manas  having  an 
attentive  mind;  R\'  v. 75,  5;  vin.82,  18]  (supreme) 
knowledge,  enlightenment,  the  knowledge  possessed  by 
a  Buddha  (see  also  sambodhi  &  samma-sambodhi)  M 
1.356;  11.95  =D  111-.37  (saddho  hoti,  saddahati  Tatha- 
gatassa  bodhir)) ;  D  111.159  (anuttarai]  pappoti  bodhir)), 
165  (id.);  S  1.103,  196;  V.197  sq.  ;  A  11.66;  VbhA  310 
(def.).  Bodhi  consists  of  7  elements  called  bojjhanga  or 
sambojjhanga,  and  is  attained  by  the  accomplisjiment 
of  the  perfections  called  bodhi-pacana  dhamma  (see 
under  cpds.  &  cp.  bodhi-pakkhiya-dhamma).  The 
Buddha  is  said  to  have  found  the  Path  followed  by  former 
Buddhas,  who  "  catusu  satipatthanesu  supatitthita- 
citta  satta-bojjhange  yathabhutar)  bhavetva  anuttarai) 
sammi-sambodhir]  abhisambujjhigsu  "  S  v. 160.  The 
moment  of  supreme  enlightenment  is  the  moment  when 
the  Four  Truths  (ariya-saccani)  are  grasped  S  v. 423. 
Bodhi  is  used  to  express  the  lofty  knowledge  of  an 
ascetic  (Bodhi-paribbajaka  Np.  J  v. 229  sq.),  and  the 
stage  of  enlightenment  of  the  Paccekabuddha  (pacceka- 
bodhi  J  ni.348  ;  pacceka-bodhi-nana  J  iv.i  14  ;  pacceka- 
sambodhi  SnA  73),  as  distinguished  from  samma- 
sambodhi. 

-tthana  the  state  of  Bodhi,  state  of  enlightenment. 
Dpvs  25.  -pakkhika  =  pakkhiya  {&  pakkhika,  e.  g. 
A  111.70=300;  Th  I.  900;  cp.  bodha")  belonging  to 
enlightenment,  usually  referred  to  as  the  37  bodhi- 
pakkhiya  dhamma  qualities  or  items  constituting  or 
contributing  to  Bodhi,  which  are  the  same  as  enum'' 
under  bojjhanga  (q.  v.).  They  are  enum''  &  discussed 
at  Vism  678  sq.  and  mentioned  at  many  other  passages 
of  the  Abhidhamma.  e.  g.  Vbh  244.  249  ;  Nett  31,  197. 
240.  261  ;  and  in  the  Commentaries,  e.  g.  J  1.275  ; 
111.290  ;  v. 483  ;  DhA  1.230.  When  they  are  increased  to 
43  they  include  the  above  with  the  addition  of  anicca- 
safina ;  dukkha",  anatta",  pahana",  viraga",  nirodha- 
sanfia,  thus  at  Nett  112.  237.  In  the  older  texts  we 
do  not  find  any  numbered  lists  of  the  b. -p. -dhamma. 
At  A  111.70  only  indriyesu  guttadvarata,  bhojane 
mattannuta  and  jagariy'  anuyoga  are  mentioned  in 
connection  with  bodhipakkhikii  dhamma  in  general. 
At  S  V.227.  239  sq.  (so  read  in  Vbh  preface  xiv.  for  327, 
.V??!)  the  term  is  £tpplied  to  the  5  indriyas :  saddh' 
indriyai).  viriy".  sati°,  samadhi^,  pafin°.  A  more 
detailed  discussion  of  the  bodhi-p-dhamma  and  their 
mention  in  the  Pitakas  is  found  in  Mrs.  Rh.  D.'s  preface 
to  the  Vbh  edition,  pp.  xiv.-xvi.  Of  BSk.  passage  may 
be  mentioned  Divy  350  (saptatrigsad-bodhi-paksan 
dharman  -  amukhl  -  kftya  pratyekar|  bodhir)  saksat- 
krtavantah)  &  616  (bodhipak.sags  tan  dharman  Bha- 
gavan   sagprakasayati   sma).     -paripaka  the  maturing 


of  enlightenment  Vism  116.  -pacana  ripening  of 
knowledge  (of  a  Buddha) ;  adj.  leading  to  enlightenment 
Bu  n.  121  sq.  ;  Cp  i.i'  (cp.  J  1.22).  It  is  a  late  term 
The  b.  dhamma  are  the  10  perfections  (paramiyo),  i.  e. 
dana°.  sila°,  nekkhamma",  panna".  viriya"\  khanti°. 
sacca",  adhitthana".  metta°,  upekha°.  -satta  (i)  a 
"  bodhi-being."  i.  e.  a  being  destined  to  attain  fullest 
enlightenment  or  Buddhaship.  A  Bodhisatta  passes 
through  many  existences  &  many  stages  of  progress 
before  the  last  birth  in  which  he  fulfils  his  great  destiny. 
The  "  amhakai)  Bodhisatto."  or  "  our  Bodhisatta  "  of 
the  Buddhist  Texts  (e.  g.  Vism  419  (imasmir)  kappe 
ayam  eva  Bhagava  Bodhisatta-bhiito) ;  DA  1.259) 
refers  to  Gotama.  whose  previous  existences  are  related 
in  the  Jataka  collection.  These  tales  illustrate  the 
wisdom  &  goodness  of  the  future  Buddha,  whether  as 
an  animal,  a  god.  or  a  human  being.  In  his  last  exist- 
ence before  attaining  Buddhahood  he  is  a  man.  Refer- 
ence is  made  to  a  Bodhisatta  or  the  B.  at  very  many 
places  throughout  the  Canon.  See  e.  g.  M  1.17,  163, 
240;  S  11.5;  111.27;  IV. 233  ;  V.263,  281,  317;  A  II. 130; 
111.240;  IV. 302,  439;  Vism  15,  116,  499;  SnA  52  (pac- 
ceka°),  67,  72.  —  (2)  N.  of  the  author  of  a  Pali  grammar, 
used  by  Kaccayana  (not  extant)  :  see  Windisch.  Pro- 
ceedings of  XI  V"'  Or.  Congress,  Vol.  1.290.  -sambhara 
(pi.)  conditions  (lit.  materials)  necessary  for  the  attain- 
ment of  bodhi  J  I.I  ;  vi.595  ;  Mbvs  12. 

Bodhi^  [  =  bohhi']  the  tree  of  wisdom,  the  sacred  Bo  tree, 
the  fig  tree  (Assattha,  Ficus  religiosa)  under  which 
Gotama  Buddha  arrived  at  perfect  knowledge.  The 
tree  is  near  the  spot  where  Buddhagaya  is  now,  about 
60  miles  fr.  Patna.  It  is  regarded  by  pilgrims  as  the 
centre  of  the  world  (cp.  pathavi-nabhi  maha-bodhi- 
mando  Mbvs  79).  It  is  also  spoken  of  as  Mahabodhi 
(e.  g.  J  IV. 228;  Vism  403).  —  Vism  72,  299,  342; 
DhA  1. 105  ;  ThA  62  ;  VbhA  473. 

-angana  the  courtyard  in  which  the  Bo  tree  stands 
DA  1. 191  ;  Vism  18S  (^vatta) ;  VbhA  349.  -tala"Bodhi- 
foundation,"  i.  e.  the  place  or  ground  of  the  B.  tree, 
otherwise  bodhi-manda  J  1.105  ;  Mhbv  9;  DhA  1.117. 
-pakka  fruit  of  the  Bo  tree  J  iv.229.  -padapa  the 
Bodhi  tree  Mbhv  i.  -piija  veneration  of.  or  offerings 
to  the  Bo  tree  Mhbv  81.  -manda  (for  °mandala)  the 
ground  under  the  Bodhi  tree,  hence  the  spot  (or 
"throne"),  on  which  the  Buddha  was  seated  at  the 
time  of  attaining  highest  enlightenment.  The  term 
is  only  found  in  very  late  canonical  and  post-canonical 
literature.  Bu  11.65,  183  ;  Vism  203  ;  J  iv.228,  232  ; 
Mhbv  79;  SnA  2,  30,  225,  258,  281,  340,  391,  441; 
DhA  1.80  ;  11.69 ;  iv.72  ;  ThA  2.  Cp.  BSk.  bodhimanda 
Divy  392.  -maha  feast  in  honour  of  the  Bo  tree  J  iv.229. 
-mula  the  root  or  foot  of  the  Bo  tree  SnA  32,  391  ;  cp. 
Bodhiya  mule  Nd'  172,  458=- Ps  1.174.  -rukkha  the 
Bodhi  tree  Vin  i.i. 

Bodhetar  [n.  ag.  fr.  bodheti]  awakener,  enlightener  Nd' 
457  ;  Ps  1.174  ;  Vism  209. 

Bodheti  rCaus.  of  bujjhati]  i.  to  awaken  to  the  truth, 
to  enlighten  S  1.170  ;  Bu  11. 195.  aor.  bodhesi  Vism  209. 
abodhayi  Bu  11. 196  &  bodhayi  Bu  v. 31  ;  xxv.6  inf. 
bodhui)  :  see  bujjhati,  &  bodhetui)  J  iv.393.  grd. 
bodhabba  D  11.246;  A  iv.136.  —  2.  to  make  aware 
(of),  to  make  known  J  vi.412  ;  SnA  444. 

Bondi  [etym.  doubtful,  one  proposed  by  Morris.  J.P.T  S. 
i88g,  207  derives  it  fr.  baildh  =  bundh  to  bind,  which 
is  an  erroneous  comparison  ;  on  his  hint  "  probably 
cognate  with  E.  body  "  cp.  Walde,  Lai.  1176.  under 
fidelia.  The  orig.  meaning  may  have  been,  as  Morris 
suggests.  "  trunk."  It  certainly  is  a  dial,  word]  body 
Pviv.3^-;  J  1.503;  II. 160;  III. 117;  PvA  254. 

Bya°  etc.  (bya°,  byu")  words  not  found  under  these  initials 
are  to  be  looked  up  under  vya°  etc. 


Byaga 


"5 


Brahma 


Byaga  y^  sg.  aor.  of  vi+  gam,  to  depart,  to  be  lost,  perish 

Th  I,  170. 

Byaggha  [cp.  Sk.  vyaghra]  a  tiger  J  11. 1 10  ;  Sdhp  388.  f. 
byagghini  Miln  67, 

Byanjana  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  vyaiijana]  i.  sign,  mark:  see 
vyanjana.  —  2.  the  letter,  as  compared  with  attha, 
the  spirit  or  meaning;  thus  in  phrase  atthato  byafi- 
janato  ca  according  to  the  meaning  &  the  letter  Miln 
18,  345  ;  Nett  23.  As  vyanjana  is  the  more  usual  (& 
classical)  form,  other  refs.  will  be  found  under  vyan- 
jana. 

Byatta  (adj.)  [cp.  P.  vyatta ;  Sk.  vyakta]  experienced, 
learned  Miln  21. 

Byattata  (f)  [fr.  byatta]  experience,  learning  Miln  349. 
See  also  pari". 

Byailti°  in  "bhavati,  bhava  etc.  see  vyanti". 

Byapagata  [  — vy-apa-gata]  departed,  dispelled  Miln  225. 

Byappatha  [so  for  byappattha ;  according  to  Kern,  Toev. 
s.  V.  the  word  is  a  distortion  fr.  *vyaprta  (for  which 
usually  P.  vyavata)  of  vy-l-  a+  pr-',  prnoti  to  be  busy  or 
active]  busy,  active.  Thus  Kern,  but  the  trsl"  is  not 
satisfactory.  It  occurs  only  at  2  passages:  Vin  IV.2, 
where  comb''  with  vaca,  gira,  vacibheda,  and  meaning 
"mode  of  speech,"  and  at  Sn  961,  where  it  has  the 
same  meaning  &  is  referred  by  Nd^  472  to  a  mode  of 
speech  &  expl''  by  SnA  572  by  vacana.  Thus  the 
derivation  fr.  pf  with  vya°  can  hardly  be  claimed  to  be 
correct  for  Bdhgh's  conception  of  the  word  ;  to  him  it 
sounded  more  likely  like  vy+a+patha  (cp.  cpds. 
vacana-patha  &  vada-patha),  thus  "  way  of  speaking." 

Byamha  [cp.  vyamha]  a  celestial  mansion,  a  Vimana 
Vv  52^.     As  vyamha  at  J  iv.464. 

Byasana  see  vyasana. 

Bya  (indecl.)  [distorted  fr.  iva  =  eva,  with  metathesis  & 
diaeresis  'veyya  >*veyya>*vya>bya]  intensive  par- 
ticle: just  so,  certainly,  indeed  only  in  phrase  "  evarj 
bya  kho  "  Vin  11.26;  iv.i34=DA  1.27;  M  1.130  (evag 
vya  kho  ti  evar)  viya  kho  C),  257. 

Byadhi  [cp.  Sk.  vyadhi;  lit.  "upset"  fr.  vy-|- a-)- dha] 
sickness,  disease  A  1.146;  Kvu  11.457;  Miln  351. 

Byadhita  [pp.  fr.  byadheti]  afflicted  with  disease  Th  i ,  73  ; 
Miln  168. 

Byadheti  [Caus.  fr.  byadhi]  to  cause  to  waver,  unsettle, 
agitate,  trouble  S  1.120;  Th  i,  46,  1211.  Pass,  bya- 
dhiyati  Kvu  11. 457  (aor.  byadhiyigsu).  —  pp.  bya- 
dhita. 

Byapajjha  [fr.  vy-a-pad]  i.  trouble,  opp.  a°  relief  M  i.io. 
—  2.  malevolei.ee;  neg.  a"  benevolence  Vin  1.3;  M 
1.38  ;  cp.  avyapajjha  S  iv.296,  371. 

BySpanna  [fr.  vyapajjati]  malevolent  Sdhp  70  ;  otherwise 
vy°,  e.  g.  S  11.168  ("citta). 

Byapada   [fr.    vy-l-a-t-pad]    ill-will,    malevolence,    one   of 
the  5   "obstructions"    (avaranani,   see  e.   g.   S   v. 94 
Xd'  379);   and  of  the  4   "bonds"    (kaya-gantha  see 
e.  g.  Nd'  98).  —  M  1.434  ;  S  1.99  ;  It  1 19  ;  Ps  1.31  ;  11.12 
Nd'  149,  207,  386. 

-vitakka   a   malevolent   or   angry   thought   M   i.ii 
S  1.203  ;  II.  15 1  ;  1 11.93  ;  V.417  ;  Nd'  501  ;  Kvu  113. 

Byabadha  [ vy -(-  a-l-  badh]  evil,  wrong,  hurt ;  usually  referred 
to  as  3  fold  :  atta°,  para",  ubhaya",  or  against  oneself, 
against  others,  &  both  —  M  1.416;  S  iv.159  (vya°).  339. 

Byabadheti  [Denom.  fr.  byabadha]  to  injure,  hurt,  oppress 
S  V.393  (na  kinci  byabadhemi  tasai)  va  thavarai)  va). 


Byabhangi  (f.)  [vy-i- a-(- bhanj]  i  a  pole  for  carrying 
burdens  Th  1,  623.  —  2.   a  flail  S  iv.201. 

Byama  [cp.  Vedic  &  P.  vyama  cp.  6atap.  Br.  1.2,  5,  14 
a  fathom,  measured  by  both  hands  being  extended  to 
their  full  length,  only  in  phrase  "ppabha  a  halo  extending 
for  a  fathom  around  the  Buddha  J   1.12,  gf)  ;  Bu  1.45  ; 
Miln  75  ;  VvA  213. 

Byaruddha  rpp.  of  vy4-a+rundh;  reading  by"  in  Nd' ; 
vy-  in  Sn  &  SnA  ;  v.  1.  BB]  obstructed,  opposed,  hin- 
dered Sn  936  (annam-annehi  b.  in  enmity  with  each 
other;  =pativiruddha  Nd'  408),  938  (412  id.;  Sn.\ 
566  =ahata-citta). 

Byavata  [vy-l-a-l- vj]  covered,  adorned  with  VvA  213 
(rupakaya  byavata  jana  ;  v.  1.  byagata). 

Byasatta  [pp.  of  vy-i-a-fsani,  cp.  asatta']  attached  to, 
clinging  to,  in  cpd.  "manasa  possessed  with  longing 
Dh  47  (=sampatte  va  asampatte  va  lagga-manasa 
DhA  1.361),  287  (cp.  DhA  111.433;  lagganataya  satta- 
raanasa). 

Byuha  [cp.  Sk.  &  P.  vyuha  fr.  vi4- vah]  i.  the  array  or 
arrangement  of  troops  in  particular  positions,  order  of 
parade  or  battle  DA  1.85.  Three  formations  of  troops 
are  mentioned  at  J  11.404  &  406,  viz.  paduma-vyuha 
(lotus  formation),  cakka"  (wheel  form"),  sakata^  (cart 
form°).  —  2.  a  heap,  collection,  in  byuhar)  karoti  to 
put  into  a  (well-arranged)  heap  Miln  2  (kacavarag).  — 
3.  a  (blind)  alley,  cul-de-sac  Vin  iv.271  (byuhan  nama 
yen'  eva  pavisanti  ten'  eva  nikkhamanti). 

Byuhati  [Denom.  fr.  byuha]  to  stand  in  array  (like  a 
troop)  VvA  104  (byuhanto,  v.  1.  brahmanto). 

Brahant  (adj.)  [cp.  Vedic  brhant,  of  byh^  to  increase,  to 
be  great  or  strong ;  paribfdha  solid  (cp.  bruha,  pari- 
brahana  &  paribruhana),  Av.  barasat  high  ;  Arm.  barjr 
high ;  Oir.  bri,  Cymr.  bre  mountain ;  Goth,  baurgs 
"  borough,"  Ohg.  etc.  burg  "  burgh,"  i.  e.  fortress  ; 
Ger.  berg  mountain.  —  The  fundamental  notion  is  that 
of  an  increase  above  normal  or  the  ordinary :  vuddhi 
(of  vrdh)  is  used  in  expl""  of  the  term  ;  thus  Dhtp  344 
(Dhtm  506)  baha  braha  bruha  =  vuddhiyar)  ;  VvA  278 
braha  =  vuddha.  Its  use  is  almost  entirely  restricted 
to  poetry]  very  great,  vast,  high,  lofty,  gigantic;  nom. 
sg.  braha  Sn  410,  550;  Th  i,  31  ;  J  111. 117  (  =  dlgha 
C.)  ;  iv.iii  (su");  64';  Pv  1V.3"'  (of  a  huge  tree),  ace. 
sg.  brahantao  A  111.346;  VvA  182;  nom.  pi.  also 
brahanta  Vv  52*  (=mahanta  VvA  224;  of  the 
Vama-duta  or  Death's  giant  messengers).  —  f.  brahati 
J  v.215  (=ulara  C.) ;  also  given  as  N.  of  a  plant 
Abhp  588.  —  Superl.  brahattha  (  =  Sk.  barhistha ;  on 
inversion  bar>  bra  cp.  Sk.  paribarhana>  P.  paribra- 
hana)  in  "puppha  a  large  or  fully  developed  blossom 
J  V.416. 

-araniia  woodlands,  vast  forest  A  1.187.  -vana  the 
wild  wood,  immense  forest  A  1.152;  111.44;  ^'v  63'; 
J  v.215.  -sukha  (-vivara-jjhana-jhayin)  (a  thinker 
enjoying  his  meditations  in)  immense  happiness  Miln 
226  (in  characterisation  of  the  term  "  brahmana"). 

Brahma  &  Brahma  [fr.  byh,  see  brahant.  Perhaps  less 
with  regard  to  the  greatness  of  the  divine  principle, 
than  with  ref.  to  the  greatness  or  power  of  prayer  or  the 
ecstatic  mind  (i.  e.  holy  enthusiasm).  On  etym.  see 
Osthoff,  "Bezzenberger's  Beitrd^e"  xxiv.142  sq.  (  =  Mir. 
bricht  charm,  spell:  Oicel.  bragr  poetry)]  —  I.  Brah- 
man (nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  brahman  nt.  prayer;  nom.  sg. 
brahma]  i .  the  supreme  good  ;  as  a  buddhistic  term 
used  in  a  sense  different  from  the  brahmanic  (save  in 
controversy  with  Brahmans)  ;  a  state  like  that  of 
Brahma  (or  Brahman)  A  11. 184  (brahmappatta).  In 
cpds.  brahma".  —  2.  Vedic  text,  mystic  formula, 
prayer  DA  1.244  (brahmai)  anati  ti  brahmapo). 

VI— 2 


Brahma 


ii6 


Brahma 


II.  Brahma  [cp.  Vedic  brahman,  m.,  one  who  prays  or 
chants  hymns,  nom.  sg.  Brahma]  i.  the  god  Brahma 
chief  of  the  gods,  often  represented  as  the  creator  of 
the  Universe  (vasavatti  issaro  katta  nimmata)  D  1.18; 
III. 30,  also  called  Mahabrahma  (D  1.235  sq.,  244  sq.  ; 
III. 30  ;  It  15  ;  Vism  578;  DhA  11.60);  and  Sahampati 
(Vin  1.5  ;  D  u.157  ;  S  1.136  sq.  ;  Vism  201  ;  KhA  171  ; 
SnA  56)  and  Sanagkumara  (D  11.226 ;  in. 97).  The 
duration  of  his  life  is  given  as  being  i  kalpa  (see  Kvu 
207,  208).  —  nom.  Brahma  Vin  1.5  ;  D  11.46  ;  J  vi.486  ; 
Miln  224  ;  Vism  2  (brahmanar)  atibrahma,  Ep.  of 
Buddha  Bhagava) ;  SnA  229  (B.  mahanubhavo) ;  gen. 
abl.  Brahmano  D  11.209;  Vism  205;  SnA  177;  instr. 
Brahmana  D  1.252  ;  11.239  ;  Dh  105,  230  ;  Vism  48,  405  ; 
DhA  11.60;  ace.  Brahmanar)  D  11.37;  voc.  Brahme 
S  1. 138.  —  2.  a  brahma  god,  a  happy  &  blameless 
celestial  being,  an  inhabitant  of  the  higher  heavens 
(brahma-loka  ;  in  which  to  be  reborn  is  a  reward  of 
great  merit);  nom.  sq.  brahma  S  1.142  (Baka  br.)  ; 
M  1.327  (id.);  A  IV. 83  ;  PvA  138  ("devata  for  brahma°  ?)  ; 
gen.  abl.  brahmuno  S  1.142,  155;  instr.  brahmuna 
D  III. 147,  150  &  brahmana  PvA  98;  voc.  sq.  brahme 
M  1.328.  pi.  nom.  brahmano  Miln  13,  18  (where  J 
VI.486  has  Maha-brahma  in  id.  p.)  ;  DhsA  195  ;  gen. 
brahmanar)  Vism  2  ;  Mhbv  151.  — paccekabrahma  a 
br.  by  himself  S  1. 1 49  (of  the  name  of  Tudu  ;  cp.  pacceka- 
buddha).  — sabrahmaka  (adj.)  including  the  brahma 
gods  D  1.62  ;  A  11.70  ;  Vin  i.ii  ;  DA  1. 174. 

III.  brahma  (adj.-n.)  [cp.  brahma  II.  2  ;  Vedic 
brahma"  &  Sk.  brahma]  i.  holy,  pious,  brahmanic ; 
(m.)  a  holy  person,  a  brahmin  —  (adj. J  J  11.14  (br. 
vanna=settha  vanna  C.) ;  KhA  151  (brahma-cariyag  = 
brahmar)  cariyag).  —  (m.)  ace.  brahmag  Sn  285  ;  voc. 
brahme  (frequent)  Sn  1065  (=brahma  ti  settha- 
vacanag  SnA  592);  J  11.346;  iv.288  ;  vi.524,  532; 
Pv  1. 1 2'  (  =  brahmana  PvA  66).  —  2.  divine,  as  incor- 
porating the  highest  &  best  qualities,  sublime,  ideal, 
best,  very  great  (see  esp.  in  cpds.),  A  1.132  (brahma  ti 
matapitaro  etc.),  182  ;  iv.76.  —  3.  holy,  sacred,  divinely 
inspired  (of  the  rites,  charms,  hymns  etc.)  D  1.96 
(brahme  mante  adhiyitva) ;  Pv  11. 6'^  (mantag  brahma- 
cintitag)  =brahmananag  atthaya  brahmana  cintitag) 
PvA  97,  98).  —  Mole.  The  comp°  form  of  all  specified 
bases  (I.  II.  III.)  is  brahma",  and  with  regard  to 
meaning  it  is  often  not  to  be  decided  to  which  of  the 
3  categories  the  cpd.  in  question  belongs. 

-attabhava  existence  as  a  brahma  god  DhA  111.210. 
-ujjugatta  having  the  most  divinely  straight  limbs  (one 
of  the  32  marks  of  a  Great  Man)  D  11. 18  ;  in. 144,  155. 
-uttama  sublime  DhsA  192.  -uppatti  birth  in  the 
brahma  heaven  S  1.143.  -Oposatha  the  highest  reli- 
gious observance  with  meditation  on  the  Buddha  & 
practice  of  the  uposatha  abstinence  A  1.207.  -kappa 
like  Brahmi  Th  i,  909.  -kaya  divine  body  D  111.84  ; 
J  1.95.  -kayika  belonging  to  the  company  of  Brah- 
ma, N  of  a  high  order  of  Devas  in  the  retinue  of  Br. 
(cp.  Kirfel,  Kosmographie  pp.  191,  193,  197)  D  1.220; 
11.69  ;  A  III. 287,  314  ;  IV. 40,  76,  240,  401  ;  Th  i,  1082  ; 
Vism  225,  559  ;  KhA  86.  -kutta  a  work  of  Brahma 
D  in. 28,  30  (cp.  similarly  yag  mama,  pitra  krtag  deva- 
krtag  na  tu  brahmakrtag  tat  Divy  22).  See  also  under 
kutta.  -giriya  (pi.)  name  of  a  certain  class  of  beings, 
possibly  those  seated  on  Brahmagiri  (or  is  it  a  certain 
class  of  performers,  actors  or  dancers?)  Miln  191. 
-ghata  (=ghata2)  company  or  assembly  of  Brahmans 
J  VI. 99.  -cakka  the  excellent  wheel,  i.  e.  the  doctrine 
of  the  Buddha  M  1.69  ;  A  11.9,  24  ;  in. 417  ;  v. 33  ;  It  123  ; 
Ps  11.174;  VbhA  399  (in  detail);  -cariya  see  separate 
article,  -carin  leading  a  holy  or  pure  Ufa,  chaste,  pious 
Vin  n.236;  in. 44;  S  1.5,  60;  11. 210;  in. 13;  iv.93,  A 
n.44;  M  ni.117;  Sn  695,  973;  J  V.107,  382;  Vv  34" 
(ace.  pi.  brahmaearaye  for  °earino) ;  Dh  142  ;  Miln  75  ; 
DA  1.72  (brahmag  setthag  acarag  carati  ti  br.  c.)  ; 
DhA  III. 83  ;  a°  S  iv.  181  ;  Pug  27,  36.  -cintita  divinelv 
inspired  Pvi  1.6^3  =  Vv  63i«  (of  manta) ;  expl"at  PvA  97, 


as  given  above  III. 3,  differs  from  that  at  VvA  265, 
where  it  runs  :  brahmehi  Atthak'  adihi  cintitag  pafiiia- 
cakkhuna  ditthag,  i.  e.  thought  out  by  the  divine  (seer) 
Atthaka  and  the  others  (viz.  composers  of  the  Vedic 
hymns :  v.  s.  brahmana',  seen  with  insight).  —  ja 
sprung  from  Brahma  (said  of  the  Brahmanas)  D  111.81, 
83;  M  II. 148.  Cp.  dhammaja.  -jacca  belonging  to  a 
brahman  family  Th  i,  689.  -jala  divine,  excellent  net, 
N.  of  a  Suttanta  (D  No.  i)  Vism  30  ;  VbhA  432,  516  ; 
KhA  12,  36,97;  SnA  362,  434.  -danda  "the  highest 
penalty,"  a  kind  of  severe  punishment  (temporary  death- 
sentence  ?)  Vin  11.290  ;  D  11. 154  ;  DhA  11. 112  ;  cp.  Kern, 
Manual  p.  87.  -dayada  kinsman  or  heir  of  Brahma  D 
in. 81,  83.  -dejrya  a  most  excellent  gift,  a  royal  gift,  a 
gift  given  with  full  powers  (said  of  land  granted  by  the 
King)  D  1.87  (=settha-deyyag  DA  1.246  ;  cp.  Dta/.  1. 108 
note :  the  first  part  of  the  cpd.  (brahma)  has  always 
been  interpreted  by  Brahmans  as  referring  to  them- 
selves. But  brahma  as  the  first  part  of  a  cpd.  never 
has  that  meaning  in  Pali ;  and  the  word  in  our  passage 
means  literally  "a  full  gift."  —  Cp.  id.  p.  Divy  62'c), 
where  it  does  not  need  to  mean  "  gift  to  brahmans,"  as 
Index  suggests);  D  1. 114;  J  ii.i66=DhA  ni.125  (here 
a  gift  to  a  br.,  it  is  true,  but  not  with  that  meaning)  ; 
J  VI. 486  (sudinnag -I- )  ;  Mhbv  123.  We  tnink  that 
both  Kern  (who  at  Toev.  s.  v.  unjustly  remarks  of 
Bdhgh's  expl"  as  "  unjust  ")  and  Pick  (who  at  "  Sociale 
Glieaeyung  "  p.  126  trsl'  it  as  "  gift  to  a  Brahman  ")  are 
wrong,  at  least  their  (and  others')  interpretation  is 
doubtful,  -devata  a  deity  of  the  Brahmaloka  PvA  138 
(so  read  for  brahma").  -nimantanika  "  addressing  an 
invitation  to  a  brahma-god,"  title  of  a  Suttanta  M 
1.326  sq..  quoted  at  Vism  393.  -nimmita  created  by 
Brahma  D  111.81,  83.  -patta  arrived  at  the  highest 
state,  above  the  devas,  a  state  like  the  Br.  gods  M  1.386  ; 
A  n.  1 84.  -patti  attainment  of  the  highest  good  S  1. 169, 
i8t  ;  IV. 1 18.  -patha  the  way  to  the  Br.  world  or  the 
way  to  the  highest  good  S  1.141  ;  A  in. 346  ;  Th  i,  689. 
Cp.  Geiger,  Dhamma  77.  -parayana  devoted  to 
Brahma  Miln  234.  -parisa  an  assembly  of  the  Brahma 
gods  D  111.260  ;  M  1.330  ;  S  1.155  ;  A  iv.307.  -parisajja 
belonging  to  the  retinue  of  Br.,  N.  of  the  gods  of  the 
lowest  Rupa-brahmaloka  S  1.145,  155;  M  1.330;  Kvu 
207;  cp.  Kirfel,  Kosmographie  191,  194.  -purohita 
minister  or  priest  to  Mahabrahma ;  °deva  gods  in- 
habiting the  next  heaven  above  the  Br.-parisajja  deva 
(cp.  Kirfel  loc.  cit.)  Kvu  207  (read  "purohita  for  "paro- 
hita  !).  -pphotana  [a-pphotana ;  a-t-ph.]  a  Brahma- 
applause,  divine  or  greatest  applause  DhA  111.2  10  (cp. 
Miln  13  ;  J  vi.486).  -bandhu  "  brahma-kinsman,"  a 
brahmana  in  descent,  or  by  name ;  but  in  reality  an 
unworthy  brahman,  Th  2,  251;  T  vi.532  ;  ThA  206: 
cp.  Pick,  Sociale  Gliederung  -p.  140.  -bhakkha  ideal  or 
divine  food  S  1.141.  -bhatta  a  worshipper  of  Br. 
J  'V.377  sq.  -bhavana  Br. -world  or  abode  of  Br.  Nd' 
448.  -bhuta  divine'being,  most  excellent  being,  said  of 
the  Buddha  D  in.84  ;  M  i.iii;  111.195,  224;  S  iv.94  ; 
A  V.226  ;  It  57  ;  said  of  Arahants  A  n.206  ;  S  in. 83. 
-yana  way  of  the  highest  good,  path  of  goodness  (cp. 
brahma-patha)  S  v. 5  ;  J  vi.57  (C  ariyabhumi :  so  read 
for  araya").  -yaniya  leading  to  Brahma  D  1.220. 
-loka  the  Br.  world,  the  highest  world,  the  world  of  the 
Celestials  (which  is  like  all  other  creation  subject  to 
change  &  destruction:  see  e.  g.  Vism  415  =  KhA  121), 
the  abode  of  the  Br.  devas  ;  Heaven.  —  It  consists  of  20 
heavens,  sixteen  being  worlds  of  form  (^-iipa -brahma- 
loka) and  fouy,  inhabited  by  devas  who  are  incor- 
poreal {arupa").  The  devas  of  the  Br.  1.  are  free  from 
kama  or  sensual  desires.  Rebirth  in  this  heaven  is  the 
reward  of  great  virtue  accompanied  with  meditation 
(jhana)  A  1.227  sq.  ;  v.59  (as  included  in  the  sphere  called 
sahassi  eulanika  lokadhatu).  —  The  brahmas  like  other 
gods  are  not  necessarily  sotapanna  or  on  the  way  to  full 
knowledge  (sambodhi-parayana) ;  their  attainments 
depend   on   the  degree  of  their  faith   in   the   Buddha, 


Brahmaka 


117 


Brahmana 


Dhamma,  &  Sangha,  and  their  observance  of  the  pre- 
cepts.—  See  e.  g.  D  in. 112;  S  1.141,  155,  282;  A 
III. 332  ;  IV. 75,  103;  Sn  508,  1 1 17;  J  11.61  ;  Ps  1.84; 
Pv  II. 13";  Dhs  1282  ;  Vbh  421  ;  Vism  199,  314,  367, 
372,  390,  401,  405,  408.  415  sq.,  421.  557;  Mhbv  54, 
83,  103  sq.,  160;  VbA  68;  PvA  76;  VbhA  167,  433. 
437,  510.  See  also  C^rf.  57,  141  sq. ;  Kirfel,  Kosmo- 
graphie  26,  191,  197,  207,  and  cp.  in  BSk.  literature 
Lai.  Vist.  171.  The  Br.-l.  is  said  to  be  the  one  place 
where  there  are  no  women  :  DhA  1.270.  — yava  Brah- 
maloka  pi  even  unto  Br.'s  heaven,  expression  like  "  as 
far  as  the  end  of  the  world  "  M  1.34  ;  S  v. 265,  288. 
-°upai;a  attaining  to  the  highest  heaven  D  11. 196; 
A  V.342  ;  Sn  139;  J  11.61  ;  Kvu  114.  -°upapatti 
rebirth  in  Heaven  Sr  139.  -°parayana  the  Br.-loka  as 
ultimate  goal  J  11. 61  ;  111.396.  -°sahavvald  the  com- 
pany of  the  Br.  gods  A  iv.135  sq.  -yana  the  best 
vehicle  S  v. 5  (+  dhammayana).  -vaccasin  with  a  body 
like  that  of  Mahabrahma,  comb''  with  -vannin  of  most 
excellent  complexion,  in  ster.  passage  at  D  1.114,  115; 
M  II.  1 67,  cp.  DA  1.282  :  °vaccasi  ti  Mahabrahmuno 
sarira-sadisena  sarirena  samannagato  ;  "vanni  ti  settha- 
vanni.  -vada  most  excellent  speech  Vin  1.3.  -vitnana 
a  palace  of  Brahma  in  the  highest  heaven  D  in. 28,  29  ; 
It  15;  Vism  108.  -vihara  sublime  or  divine  state  of 
mind,  blissful  meditation  (exercises  on  a,  altruistic  con- 
cepts ;  6,  equanimity ;  see  on  these  meditations  Dial 
1.298).  There  are  4  such  "  divine  states,"  viz.  metta, 
karuna,  mudita,  upekkha  (see  Vism  iii  ;  DhsA  192; 
and  cp.  Expositor  258  ;  Dhs  trsl.  65  ;  BSk.  same,  e.  g. 
Divy  224);  D  11.196  ;  111.220  (one  of  the  3  vihara's  : 
dibba",  brahma",  ariya") ;  Th  i,  649;  J  1.139  ("vihare 
bhavetva  .  .  .  brahmalok'  upaga).  11. 61  ;  Dhs  262  ; 
Vism  295  sq.  ("niddesa),  319.  -vethana  the  head-dress 
of  a  brahmin  SnA  138  (one  of  the  rare  passages  where 
brahma"  =brahmaIII.  i).  -sama  like  Brahma  Sn  508  ; 
SnA  318,  325;  DhsA  195.  -ssara  "heavenly  sound," 
a  divine  voice,  a  beautiful  and  deep  voice  (with  8  fine 
qualities:  see  enum^  under  bindu)  D  11.211=227; 
J  1-96  ;  V.336. 

Brahmaka  (adj.)  only  in  cpd.  sa°  with  Brahma  (or  the 
Br.  world),  q.  v. 

Brahmacariya  (nt.)  [brahma-l-cariya]  a  term  (not  in  the 
strictlj'  Buddhist  sense)  for  observance  of  vows  of 
holiness,  particularly  of  chastity  :  good  &  moral  living 
(brahmag  cariyag  brahmaijar)  va  cariyag  =brahma- 
cariyar)  KhA  151);  esp.  in  Buddh.  sense  the  moral 
life,  holy  life,  religious  hfe,  as  way  to  end  suffering, 
Vin  1. 12,  19,  renouncing  the  world,  study  of  the 
Dhamma  D  1.84,  155  ;  11. 106  ;  111.122  sq.,  21 1  ;  M  1.77, 
147,  193,  205,  426,  463,  492,  514;  11.38:  III. 36,  116; 
S  1.38.  43,  87.  105,  154,  209;  11.24.  29,  120,  219,  278, 
284  ("pariyosana)  ;  111.83,  189;  iv.51,  104,  no,  126, 
136  sq.,  163,  253,  v.7  sq..  15  sq.,  26  sq.,  54  sq.,  233, 
262.  272,  352;  A  1.50,  168,  225;  11.26.  44.  185;  711.250, 
346;  IV. 311;  v.i8,  71,  136;  Sn  267,  274  (vas-uttama), 
566.  655,  1 128;  Th  I,  1027,  1079:  It  28,  48,  78,  III  ; 
Dh  155,  156,  312;  J  III. 396  ;  IV.52  ;  Pv  II. 9";  DhA 
iv.42  (vasuttamar))  ;  VbhA  504.  — brahmacariyar)  vus- 
sati  to  live  the  religious  life  A  1.115  (cp.  "g  vusitag  in 
formula  under  Arahant  II.  A)  ;  ^assa  kevalin  wholly 
given  up  to  a  good  life  A  1. 162  ;  °r)  santanetuij  to  con- 
tinue the  good  life  A  111.90;  Dh.\  11 19;  komara"  the 
religious  training  of  a  well-bred  youth  A  111.224  i  Sn 
289.  — abrahmacariya  unchastity,  an  immoral  life, 
sinful  living  M  1.514  ;  D  1.4  ;  Sn  396  ;  KhA  26. 

-antaraya  raping  DhA  n.52.  -Inuggaha  a  help  to 
purity  A  1.167;  iv.167;  Dhs  1348.  -upaddava  a 
disaster  to  religious  life,  succumbing  to  worldly  desires 
M  III. 1 16.  -vasa  state  of  chastity,  holy  &  pure  life; 
adj.  living  a  pure  life  A  1253  ;  J  111.393  ;  Kvu  93  ; 
DhA  t.225. 


Brahmacariyaka  (adj.)  [fr.  brahmacariya]  only  in  phrase 
adi-  leading  to  the  highest  puritv  of  life  D  1.189.  191  ; 
111.284  ;  A  IV. 166. 

Brahmacariyavant  (adj.)  it.  brahmacariya]  leading  the 
religious  life,  pure,  chaste  S  1.1S2  ;  Dh  267. 

Brahmanna  (adj.)  [fr.  brahmana]  brahman,  of  the  brah- 
man rank  ;  brahmanhood,  of  higher  conduct,  leading  a 
pure  life  D  1.115  (at  which  passage  DA  1.286  includes 
Sariputta,  Moggallana  iS:  Mahakassapa  in  this  rank) ; 
M  II.  167  ;  A  1. 143.  —  abstr.  der.  brahmanna  (nt.)  higher 
or  holy  state,  excellency  of  a  virtuous  life  D  1.166  ;  Vin 
in. 44  ;  J  IV. 362  (  =  brahmaria  dhamma  C.)  ;  brahmanna 
(nt.)  D  11.248  ;  brahmaniia  (f.)  D  in. 72,  74  ;  A  1.142  ;  & 
brahmafmattha  (nt.)  S  in. 192  ;  v. 25  sq.,  195;  A  1.260 
(brahmaiinattha). 

Brahmannata  (&  brah")  [fr.  brahma  or  brahmana]  state 
of  a  brahman  D  in. 145,  169;  Dh  332,  cp.  DhA  iv.33. 
—  Neg.  a°  D  111.70.  71. 

Brabmannattha  see  brahmanna. 

Brahmatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  brahma]  state  of  a  Brahma 
god,  existence  in  the  Br.  world  Vbh  337;  Vism  301  ; 
VbhA  437  ;  DhA  i.iio.  brahmattabhava  is  to  be  read 
as  brahm'  attabhava  (see  under  brahma). 

Brahmattara  at  J  in.207  (of  a  castle)  is  probably  to  be 
read  brahmuttara  "  even  higher  than  Brahma,"  i.  e. 
unsurpassed,  magnificent.  C.  expl"'-  by  suvanna- 
pasada. 

Brahmavant  (adj.)  [fr.  brahma]  "having  Brahma," 
possessed  or  full  of  Brahma  ;  f.  brahmavati  Np.  Vism. 
434- 

Brahmanna.  brahmaiiiiata  &  brahmanriattha  see  brahman". 

Brahmaijia*  [fr.  brahma ;  cp.  Vedic  brahmana,  der.  fr. 
brahman]  a  member  of  the  Brahman  caste ;  a  Br. 
teacher.  In  the  Buddhist  terminology  also  used  for 
a  man  leading  a  pure,  sinless  &  ascetic  life,  often  even 
syn.  with  arahant.  —  On  brahmanas  as  a  caste  &  their 
representation  in  the  Jataka  collection  see  lick, 
Sociale  Gliederung ;  esp.  ch.  8,  pp.  117-162.  —  Var. 
fanciful  etymologies,  consisting  of  a  word-play,  in  P. 
definitions  are  e.  g.  "  sattannag  dhammanar)  bahi- 
tatta  br."  (like  def.  of  bhikkhu)  Nd'  86  =  Nd2  464'^  (cp. 
Sn  519);  ye  keci  bho-vadika  Nd'  249=Nd2  464''; 
braha -sukhavihara  -  jhana  -  jhayin  Miln  226;  papar) 
bahesui)  D  in.94  ;  bahita-papatta  br.  Dh.^  11184; 
ariya  bahita-papatta  br.  DA  1.244.  —  P'-  brahmanase 
Sn  1079  sq.  —  Var.  ref~  in  the  Canon  to  all  meanings 
of  the  term:  D  1.90,  94,  104,  119  sq.,  136  (mahasala), 
150  (°duta),  247;  III. 44  sq.,  61,  83  sq.,  94' sq.  (origin  of), 
147,  170.  258  ("mahasala),  270;  M  1.271  (°karana 
dhamma),  280;  11.84.  '48.  177;  111.60,  270  (a  bhikkhu 
addressed  as  br.) ;  S  1.47,  54,  94  sq.,  99  (^kumara),  117, 
125,  160  sq.  ;  11.77,  259 ;  1V.157  ;  v. 194  ;  A  1.66,  1 10.  163 
(tevijja) ;  166;  11. 176;  in. 221  sq.  (brahmana-vagga)  ; 
It  57  sq.,  60,  98.  loi  :  J  III. 194;  IV. 9  ;  VI. 52  I  sq.  ;  Vbh 
393  sq.  For  br.  with  the  meaning  "arahant"  see 
also:  Vin  1.3;  11.156  (br.  parinibbuta) ;  Th  i,  140.  221 
(brahma-bandhu  pure  asii),  idani  kho  'mhi  brahmano) ; 
Dh  383  sq.  ;  Sn  passim  (e.g.  v.  142  kammana  hoti 
brahmano;  284  sq.) ;  J  IV. 302  sq.  ;  Miln  22  s-  Ten 
kinds  of  Br.  are  pronounced  to  be  apeta  brahmaniia 
degraded  fr.  brahmanship  J  iv.361  sq.  Ditf.  schools 
of  br.  teachers  are  enum''  at  D  1.237  sq.  (Tevijja 
Sutta).  — brahmananari  pubbaka  isayo  mantanar)  kat- 
taro  "  the  ten  inspired  Seers  of  old  times,  who  com- 
posed the  Vedic  hymns";  their  names  are  Atthaka, 
Vamaka,  Vamadeva,  Vessamitta,  Yamataggi,  Angirasa, 
Bharadvaja,  Vasettha.  Kassapa,  Bhagu  Vin  1.245  ; 
D  1. 104  ;  A  111.224  ;  iv.61  ;  cp.  VvA  265.  —  f.  brahmani 


Brahmana 


Ii8 


Bruheti 


(n.  or  adj.)  the  wife  of  a  brahmana  D  1.193  ;  J  v. 127  (of 
a  purohita  or  high  priest)  ;  DhA  1.33  ;  iv.176;  PvA  55, 
61,  64.  Freq.  in  comb"  brahmani  paja  this  generation 
of  brahmanas,  e.  g.  D  1.249  :  A  i.jbo  ;  11. -!3  (see  paja). 

-jbbha  Brahmins  &  Vaisyas  J  VI.J28  sq.  -kuma- 
rika  a  brahmin  young  girl  J  in. 93.  -kula  a  br.  clan  or 
family  J  11.85,  394.  4iii  111.147.  352;  PvA  21,  Oi. 
-gahapatika  priests  &  laymen  (".clerk  &  yeoman " 
Rh.  D.  in  S.B.E.  xi.258)  D  11.178  ;  111.148,  153,  ijo  sq.  ; 
S  1.59,  184;  A  I. no;  Vin  1.35;  J  1.83.  -gama  a  br. 
village  Vin  1.197  ;  D  1.87,  127  ;  S  i.i  1 1  ;  J  11.368  ;  111.293  ; 
IV. 2  76.  -dhamma  duty  of  a  br.  ;  see  on  contrast  be- 
tween Brahmanic  &  Buddhist  view  J  iv.30i  sq.,  cp. 
also  SnA  312-325  (br.-dhammika-suta)  &  Pick.  1.  c.  124. 
-putta  son  of  a  br.  PvA  62.  -bhojana  giving  food 
(alms)  to  brahmans  Vin  1.44.  -manava  a  young  brahmin 
J  IV. 391.  -rijpa  (in)  form  of  a  br.  i'vA  03.  -vaddhaki 
a  br.  carpenter  J  iv.207.  -vannin  having  the  appear- 
ance of  a  brahmin  Cp  x.io.  -vacanaka  a  br.  dispu- 
tation, some  sort  of  elocution  show  J  1.318;  iv.391. 
-vataka  circle  of  brahmins  DhA  iv.177  (v.  1.  °vadaka). 
-vanija  a  br.  merchant  PvA  113.  -sacca  a  brahmanic 
(i.  e.  standard,  holy)  truth  A  11.176  (where  the  Buddha 
sets  forth  4  such  br.  -saccani,  diff.  from  the  usual  4 
ariyasaccani). 

Brahmana'  (nt.)  [for  brahmanna]  state  of  a  true  brahman, 
"  holiness  supreme  "  Th  i,  631. 

Bruti  [bru,  Sk.  bravUi,  Med.  brute ;  cp.  Geiger,  P.Gr. 
§  141^-  Expl''  by  Dhtp  366  as  "  vacane,"  by  Dhtm 
593  as  "  vacayar),  viyattiyai)  "]  to  say,  tell,  call ;  show, 
explain  D  1.95  ;  Sn  308  sq.  ;  Dh  3S3  sq.  ;  Cp.  vi.8  ;  Miln 
314,  327.  —  Constructed  with  double  ace.  or  with  dat. 


of  person  &  ace.  of  thing  said  (cp.  Miln  233).  —  Forms  : 
Pres.  P'  sg.  brumi  It  a.  40  ;  S  1033,  1042  sq.  (expl""  as 
acikkhami  desemi   pannapemi  etc.   by   Nd.);    Pv   1.2' 


(=kathemi  PvA  1 1) ;  Th  i,  214  ;  2" 
1032,  1081  ;  J  11.48;  Th  2.  58;  3"^ 
imper.  briihi  Th  i.  1266;  Sn  10 18, 
318.  —  pret.   abravi  Sn  981;   Th    i. 


»  sg.  brusi  Sn  457, 
sg.  bruti  Sn  122  ; 
1034,  1043  ;  Miln 
1275;    J   VI. 269; 


Pv  II. 9**  (v.  1.  abruvi) ;  PvA  264  ;  abruvi  J  111.62,  and 
bravi  J  v. 204  ;  y^  sg.  med.  bravittha  Vv  53'°  (  =  kathesi 
VvA  240) ;  i"  sg.  also  abravig  Cp.  11. 6';  3"*  pi.  abravug 
J  V.112. 

Brumeti  [possible  Cans.  fr.  bruti,  but  as  Geiger,  P.Gr. 
141 -,  rightly  remarks  "not  critically  sound"]  to  say 
D  1.95  (expl"!  as  "  brumetu  ti  vadatu  "  DA  1.265). 

Bruhana  (nt.)  Ifr.  bruheti]  expansion,  increasing,  spread- 
ing; cultivation,  development  (trs.  &  intrs.)  Miln  313 
(Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  "  amusement  ")  ;  DhsA  332  ;  VvA  20 
(sukha^).     Cp.  upa°. 

Bruhetar  [n.  ag.  of  bruheti]  increaser  ;  one  who  practises,  is 
devoted  to  ;  in  phrase  bruheta  sufifjagaranag  frequenter 
of  solitary  places  ;  given  up  to  solitary  meditation  M 
1-33.  213- 

Bruheti  [cp.  Sk  brghayati ;  fr.  brh^  to  increase  ;  Dhtp  346 
&  Dhtm  505  :  vuddhiyar).  Cp.  brahant]  to  cause  to 
grow,  increase  ;  hence  :  to  promote,  develop,  practise,  to 
put  or  devote  oneself  to  ;  to  look  after,  to  foster,  make 
enjoy;  practically  syn.  with  sevati;  S  1. 198  (saddhai)) ; 
Sn  324  (kammani) ;  Dh  285  (imper.  bruhaya  =  vaddhaya 
DhA  III. 429)  ;  Ud  72;  J  1.289;  Miln  313  (saddena 
sotag  br.)  ;  PvA  16S  (vaddheti-1- ,  for  abhaveti). — Cp. 
anu°,  pari". 


Bh. 


Bha  (indecl.)  the  letter  or  sound  (syllable)  bh  :  figuring 
in  Bdhgh's  exegesis  of  the  X.  Bhagava  as  representing 
bhnva,  whereas  ga  stands  for  gamana,  va  for  vantu 
KhA  loy. — Like  ba°  we  often  find  bha°  mixed  up 
with  pa  ;  — see  e.  g.  bhanda  bhandati  ;  bh  represents 
b.  in  bhasta  =  Sk.  basta.  bhisa  =  Sk.  bisa.  bhusa=Sk. 
busa.  — bha-kara  the  sound  (or  ending)  bha,  which 
at  Vin  IV.-  is  given  as  implying  contempt  or  abuse, 
among  other  low  terms  (hina  akkosa).  This  refers  also 
to  the  sound  (ending)  'ya  (see  ya-kara).  The  expl" 
for  this  probably  is  that  °bha  is  abstracted  from  words 
ending  thus,  where  the  word  itself  meant  something 
inferior  or  contemptible,  and  this  shade  of  meaning  was 
regarded  as  inhering  in  the  ending,  not  in  the  root  of 
the  word,  as  e.  g.  in  ibbha  (menial). 

Bhakati  (f)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  bhrakuti  from  older  bhrkuti, 
bhrukuti  or  bhrukutij  superciliousness  Sn  483.  J 
III. 99  ;  Visra  j6  ("karana)  ;  SnA  412.  Der.  bhakutika 
(q.  v.).     See  also  bhukuti. 

Bhakkha  {-°)  (adj.)  [fr.  bhak;]  i.  eating,  feeding  on  D 
111.41  (saka^  etc.);  S  1.69  (pahiita"  voracious,  of  fire), 
238  (kodha°) ;  Pv  1.9I  (lohita-pubba') ;  Pug  55  (tina") ; 
Sdhp  388  (tina°).  —  2.  eatable,  to  be  eaten;  nt.  'g 
food,  prey,  in  cpd.  appa-bhakkha  ottering  no  food 
Vv  84^  (appodaka+  ).  —  pi.  also  bhakkha  (eatables) 
J  II. 14;  IV. 241  (similar  context;  =bhojana  C.)  ;  Pv 
11.9*'  (=ahara  PvA  129).  It  is  to  be  pointed  out  that 
bhakkha  occurs  in  poetry,  in  stock  phrase  "  dibba 
bhakkha  patubhavanti  "  ;  cp.  Vedic  bhaksa  (m)  feeding, 
partaking  of  food,  esp.  drink  (of  Soma),  thus  something 
extraordinary. 

Bbakkhati  [bhak;  fr.  bhaj,  cp.  Sk.  bhaksati  \-  bhaksayati ; 
Dhtp  17  c^  537  expl"  by  "  adana  "]  to  eat,  to  feed 
upon  Pv  II. 2*  (pubba-lohitar))  ;  Dh.\  11.57  (vatar)). — - 
inf.  bhakkhitug  J  11.14. — Cans,  bhakkheti  in  same 
meaning  J  iv.349  (aor.  bhakkhesug)  ;  cp.  BSk.  bhak- 
§ayati  Divy  276. 

Bhaga  [Vedic  bhaga,  bhaj,  see  bhagavant  etc.]  luck,  lot, 
fortun".  only  in  cpd.  dub°  (adj.)  unhappy,  unpleasant, 
uncomfortable  It  90  ;  DA  1.96  ('karana).  — bhaga  (in 
verse  "  bhagehi  ca  vibhattava "  in  exegesis  of  word 
"  Bhagava")  at  DA  1.34  read  bhava,  as  read  at  id.  p. 
Vism  210. 

Bhagandala  (&  a)  [cp.  late  Sk.  bhagandara]  an  ulcer,  fistula 
Vin  1.2  i6r  272  :  Ndi  370.  Has  expl°  at  Dhtm  204 
"  bhaganda  secane  hoti  "  ("  comes  from  sprinkling  ") 
anything  to  do  with  our  word  ? 

Bha(;alavant  [of  uncertain  origin]  N.  of  a  mountain  SnA 
197  (loc.  Bhagalavati  pabbate).  Occurs  also  as  an 
assembly-hall  under  the  N.  of  Bhagalavati  at  D  111.201. 
Cp.  Kirfel,  Kosmographie  196. 

Bhagavant  (adj.  n.)  [cp.  Vedic  bhagavant,  fr.  bhaga] 
fortunate,  illustrious,  sublime,  as  Ep.  and  title 
"Lord."  Thus  applied  to  the  Buddha  (amhakar)  Bh.) 
and  his  predecessors.     Occurs  with  extreme  frequency  ; 


of  fanciful  exegetic  expl""  of  the  terra  iv:  its  meaning  we 
mention  e.  g.  those  at  Nd'  142  =Nd2  400  ;  Vism  210  sq.  ; 
DA  1.33  sq.     Usual  trs.  Blessed  One,  Exalted  One. 

Bhagini  (f.)  [Epic  Sk.  bhagini]  a  sister  J  vi.32.  The 
popular  etym.  of  bh.  as  given  at  VbhA  108  is  the  same 
as  that  for  bhatar,  viz.  "  bhagati  ti  bh." — Cpd. 
bhagini-mala  a  "  sister  garland  "  (?)  N.  of  a  tree  J 
VI. 270  ( =upari-bhaddaka). 

Bhagga'  ]ip.  of  bhanj,  Sk.  bhagna]  broken,  in  phrases 
"  sabba  te  phasuka  bhagga  "  J  1.493,  which  is  applied 
metaphorically  at  Dh  154  (phasuka  =papaka  ?),  expl* 
DIiA  111.12S  (artificially)  by  "  avasesa-kilesa-phasuka 
bhagga  "  ;  further  "  bhagga  papaka  dhamma  "  Vism 
211;  bhagga  kilesa  Miln  44  ;  and  bhagga-raga,  °dosa 
etc.  (in  def.  of  Bhagava)  at  Nd'  142  =Nd-  466  B,  quoted 
at  Vism  211, 

Bhagga-  (nt.)  [fr.  bhaga;  cp.  Sk.  &  P.  bhagya]  fortune, 
good  luck,  welfare,  happiness  Visra  210  (akasi  °i)  ti 
garu  ti  Bhagyava  etc.). 

Bhaggava  cp.  Sk.  *bhargava,  a  der.  fr.  bhrgu,  &  bhargah, 
of  same  root  as  Lat.  fulgur  lightning  ;  Gr.  ^Xit  light  ; 
Ger.  blitzen,  blank  ;  Ags.  blanca  white  horse,  all  of  the 
idea  of  "  shining,  bright,  radiant."  —  How  the  meaning 
"  potter  "  is  connected  with  this  meaning,  is  still  a 
problem,  perhaps  we  have  to  take  the  word  merely  as 
an  Epithet  at  the  one  passage  where  it  occurs,  which 
happens  to  be  in  the  Kumbhakara-jataka,  v.  6,  7.  i.  e. 
the  "  Jataka  of  the  potter"]  potter  (?)  J  in. 381,  382, 
in  voc.  bhaggava  (m.)  iS;  bhaggavi  (f.).  The  terms  are 
not  expl""  in  C,  evidently  because  somewhat  obscure. 
According  to  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  the  Sk.  form  in  this 
meaning  occurs  at  MBh.  1.190,  47;  Saddhp.  191  sq., 
MVastu  111.347. 

Bhaggavant  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  bhagga-,  cp.  Sk.  &  P.  bhagya- 
vant]  having  good  luck  or  auspices,  fortunate  ;  in  def. 
of  "Bhagava"  at  Vism  2io=DA  1.34  ("bhagyava 
bhaggava  yutto")  ;  with  ref.  to  the  4  qualities  implied 
in  the  word  "  bhagava,"  which  passage  is  alluded  to 
at  \'vA  231  by  remark  "  bhagyavantat'  adihi  catuhi 
karaijehi  Bhagava." 

Bhanga'  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  bhanga,  which  occurs  already 
Atharva-veda  xi.  0.  15  (see  Zimmer.  Altind.  Leben  68), 
also  Av.  bagha,  Polish  pienka  hemp.  On  its  possible 
etym.  connection  with  Vedic  sana  (Ath.  Veda  11.  4.  5) 
=  P.  Sana  &.  Sana  hemp  (=Gr.  Kuvvajiii;,  Ger.  hanf, 
E.  hemp)  see  Walde,  I.at.  1176.  s.  v.  cannabis]  hemp ; 
coarse  hempen  cloth  Vin  1.58  (where  comb''  with  sana). 

Bhanga-  (nt.)  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  bhanga.  fr.  bhanj :  see  bhan- 
jati]  I.  (lit.)  breaking,  breaking  olf,  in  sakha"  a  layer 
of  broken-off  branches  J  111.407.  —  2.  (fig.)  breaking 
up,  dissolution,  disruption  (see  on  form  Cpil.  23.  00) 
Ps  1.57  sq.  ('anupassana  insight  into  disruption),  quoted 
&  expl""  at  Vism  O40  sq.  ;  \'bh.\  27  (^khana)  ;  Sdhp  48, 
78  (asa°).     Cp.  vi". 


119 


Bhangana 


120 


Bhan^ati 


Bhangana  &  Bhangaloka  [to  bhanga'  ?]  are  vv.  U.  of 
^■pl.  at  Nd'  135  lor  Gangana  &  Anganeka  respectively. 
With  misspelling  bh>g,  cp.  bhendaka>gendaka. 

Bhacca  (adj.)  [grd.  fr.  bhf,  cp.  Sk.  bhrtya]  to  be  carried, 
kept  or  sustained  A  111.46  (  =  a  dependant)  J  iv.301 
(C.  bharitabba).  As  Kern.  Toev.  s.  v.  bhacca  points 
out  this  gatha  "  bhacca  mata  pita  bandhu,  yena  jato  sa 
yeva  so  "  is  a  distortion  of  MBh  1.74,  1 10,  where  it  runs 
"  bhastrd  mata,  pituh  putro,  yena  jato  sa  eva  sah  " 
(or  is  it  bhrasld  ?). 

Bhajati  [bhaj  to  divide,  partake  etc.  :  see  Caus.  bhajeti 
&  cp.  vi°]  to  associate  with  (ace),  keep  companionship 
with,  follow,  resort  to  ;  to  be  attached  to  (ace),  to  love. 
Freq.  syn.  of  sevati.  The  Dhtp  &  Dhtm  mark  the 
fig.  meaning  (bhaj-)  by  sevayar)  (Dhtp  61),  seva- 
puthakkare  (Dhtm  523)  &  saijsevane  (ib.  76),  whilst 
the  lit.  (bhaji)  is  expressed  by  vibhajane.  —  Sn  958 
(bhajato  rittai)  asanar)  ;  gen.  sq.  ppr.  =sevato  etc. 
Nd'  466);  Dh  76,  303;  Pug  2O,  33;  J  1.216=111.510 
(disa  bh.)  vi.358;  Sdhp  275. —  Pot.  bhaje  Dh  76,  78, 
and  bhajetha  Dh  78  ( =payirupasetha),  208  in  sense 
of  imper.  ;  hence  2°''  sg.  formed  like  Caus.  as  bhajehi 
J  III. 148  (C.  bhajeyyasi ;  cp.  Geiger,  P.Qr.  139'^). — 
—  grd.  bhajitabba  Nd-  s.  v.  kamaguna  B  (sevitabba, 
bh.,  bhavetabba). 

Bhajana  (f.)  [fer.  bhaj]  resorting  to,  familiarity  with 
Pug  20  =Dhs  1326,  cp.  sam°  &  Dhs  trsl.  345. 

Bbftjin  (adj.)  [fr.  bhajati]  loving,  attached  to,  worshipping 
Nd'  142  (in  expl"  of  "  Bhagava  "). 

Bhajjati  [Vedic  bhrjjati,  cp.  Gr.  ippvyui  to  roast,  (ppi>yavov 
dry  wood  ;  Lat.  frigo  to  make  dry]  to  roast,  toast  Vin 
IV. 264:  Dhtp  79  &  Dhtm  94,  expl'^  by  "pake."  — 
Caus.  bhajjapeti  to  have,  or  get  roasted  Vin  iv.264  ; 
DhA  1.224  (^'-  1-  K.  paccapeti). 

Bhanjaka  (adj.)  [fr.  bhaiijati]  breaking,  spoiling,  destroy- 
ing (attha°-visar)vada ;  cp.  bhafijanaka)  J  ui.499. 

Bhanjati  [bhafij,  cp.  Vedic  bhaiijati  &  bhanakti,  roots  with 
&  without  r,  as  Lat.  frango=Goth.  brikan=Ohg. 
brehhan,  E.  break,  Sk.  giri-bhraj  breaking  forth  from 
the  mountain;  and  Sk.  bhanga,  bhaiiji  wave.  —  The 
Dhtp.  68  paraphrases  by  "  omaddana,"  Dhtm  73  by 
"  avamaddana "]  i.  (trs.  &  intrs.)  to  break  Vin  1.74 
(phasuka  bhanjitabba  ribs  to  be  broken)  ;  Dh  337  (ma 
bhanji  =  ma  bhanjatu  C).  Pv  11.9^  (sakhai)  bhafijeyya 
=  chindeyya  PvA  114);  PvA  277  (akkho  bhaiiji  the 
axle  broke,  intrs.).  —  2.  to  fold  or  furl  (the  lip): 
otthao  bh.  J  11.264.  —  3.  (fig.)  to  break  up,  spoil, 
destroy,  in  atthag  bh.  to  destroy  the  good  S  iv.347  (cp. 
bhafijanaka).  —  pp.  bhagga'  (q.  v.). 

Bhanjana^  (nt.)  [fr.  bhaiijati]  breakage,  breaking  down, 
break,  onlv  in  cpd.  akkha"  break  of  the  axle  Vism  32, 
45;  DhA  i.375;   PvA  277. 

Bhanjana-  (nt.)  [for  byaiijana,  in  composition;  maybe 
graphical  mistake]  anointing,  smearing,  oiling,  in  gatta" 
and  pada°-bbharijana-tela  oil  for  rubbing  the  body  and 
the  feet  Vism  100  ;  VvA  295. 

Bhanjanaka  (nt.)  [fr.  bhafljana']  destroying,  hurting, 
spoiling,  in  phrase  attha"  destroying  the  welfare  (with 
ref.  to  the  telling  of  lies)  DhA  111.356  ;  VvA  72  ;  cp. 
bhanjaka. 

Bhanjanin  (adj.)  [fr.  bhanj]  breaking,  destroying,  in  cakka° 
breaking  the  wheel,  fig.  breaking  the  state  of  harmony 

J  v. 1 12. 

Bhannam  (J  v.317)  see  bha. 

Bhata  [cp.  Epic  &  Class.  Sk.  bhata,  fr,  dial,  bhat  to  hire ; 
originally  the  same  as  bhrtya  fr.  bhfta  &  bhrti  of  bhy 


Dhtp  94,  Dhtm  114.  -bhata  =  bhatyag  i.  e.  bhj-tyar|] 
servant,  hireling,  soldier  Miln  240  ;  VvA  305  (bhatta- 
vetana°).  As  to  suggestion  of  bhata  occurring  in 
phrase  yatha-bhatar)  (Kern.  Toev.  s.  v.  yathabhatar)) 
see  discussion  under  yatha  bhatatj. 

-patha  service,  employment,  salary  \'in  iv.265  ; 
SnA  542. 

Bhattha^  [pp.  of  bhratjs,  see  bhassati]  dropped,  fallen 
down  J  1.482  ;  iv.222,  382  ;  v.444.     Cp.  pari". 

Bha^tha^  [pp.  of  bhan,  for  bhaijita]  spoken,  said  Vv  63"' 
(su°  =subhasita  VvA  265).  See  also  pacca"  &  pari"; 
cp.  also  next. 

Bhattha^  (?)  [perhaps  for  bhatta  ?]  wages,  tip,  donation 
J  IV. 26 1  (by  C.  expl''  as  kathita,  thus  same  as  bhattha^). 
v.  1.  bhatta.  Cp.  Sk.  bhata  &  BSk.  bhataka  MVastu 
111.37. 

Bba9ati  [bha^;  cp.  Sk.  bhanati;  Ohg.  ban  =  E.  ban  etc. 
"  proclamation."  See  connections  in  Walde,  Lat. 
1176.  under  fabula.  —  Expli"  by  Dhtp  1 1 1  as  "  bhanana," 
by  Dhtm  162  as  "  bhasana  "]  to  speak,  tell,  proclaim 
(the  nearest  synonym  is  katheti :  see  Nd^  s.  v.  katheti) 
Dh  264;  Pug  33,  56;  DhA  11.95.  —  ppr-  bhananto  Sn 
397.  Pot.  bhane  Sn  1131  (=bhaneyya  Nd-  469);  Dh 
224  (saccar)  ;  =dipeyya  vohareyya  DhA  ill. 316).  Also 
bhaneyya  Sn  397.  An  old  subjunctive  form  is  bhana- 
mase  S  1.209  (cp-  Geiger,  P.Qr-  §  126).  Prohib.  ma 
bhani.     A  Caus.  form  is  bhanaye  (Pot.)  Sn  397. 

Bhanana  (nt.)  [fr.  bhanati]  telling,  speaking  DhA  iv.93 
("sila,  adj.  wont  to  speak) ;  Dhtp  1 1 1. 

Bhaijie  (indecl.)  [orig.  1*'  sg.  pres.  Med.  of  bhanati]  "  I 
say,"  used  as  an  interjection  of  emphasis,  like  "  to  be 
sure,"  "  look  here."  It  is  a  familiar  term  of  address, 
often  used  by  a  king  to  his  subjects  Vin  1.240  (amhakai) 
kira  bhane  vijite  Bhaddiya-nagare),  241  (gaccha  bhane 
janahi  .  .  .)  Miln  21  (atthi  bhane  anno  koci  pandito 
.  .  .). 

Bhanga  (nt.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  bhanda]  i.  stock  in  trade; 
collectively  goods,  wares,  property,  possessions,  also 
"object"  S  1.43  (itthi  bhandanar)  uttamar)  woman  is 
the  highest  property),  Nd-  38  ;  J  111.353  (yacita"  object 
asked,  =yaca)  ;  ThA  288  (id.);  Vism  22.  — bhandag 
kinatito  buy  goods  VbhA  165.  — bhandai)  vikkinati  to 
sell  goods  J  1.377  (-1- patibhandari  dapeti  to  receive 
goods  in  return) ;  vikkiijiya-bh.  goods  for  sale 
DhA  1.390.  — assamika"  ownerless  goods,  unclaimed 
property  J  vi.348  ;  abharana"  trinkets,  jewelry  J 
111.221;  piya"  best  goods,  treasure  J  111.279;  bahu'' 
having  many  goods,  rich  in  possessions  Vin  111.138; 
KhA  241  (of  a  bhikkhu) ;  vara"  best  property  or  be- 
longings Vin  IV. 225.  —  2.  implement,  article,  instru- 
ment Vin  II. 142,  143  (where  3  kinds  are  distinguished; 
of  wood,  copper,  &  of  earthenware),  170  (id.);  Davs 
i  IV. 50  (turiya").  —  In  assa(hatthi°)-bhanda  Vin  1.85  sq?, 
I  the  meaning  "horse  (elephant-)  trader  (or  owner)" 
does  not  seem  clear ;  should  we  read  pandaka  ? 
Cp.  bhanda  =  panda  under  bhandati. 

-4gara  store  house,  warehouse,  only  in  der.  -dgarika 
keeper  of  stores  Vin  1.284;  n-'/^i  surveyor  of  the 
(royal)  warehouses,  royal  treasurer  (a  higher  court 
office;  cp.  Pick.  Sociale  Gliederung  loi  sq.)  J  111.293  ; 
1V.43  ;  V.117;  Miln  37;  DA  1.21  ;  PvA  2,  20.  -aharaka 
(trader)  taking  up  goods  DhA  iv.6o. 

Bhaijl^t^t^  (adj.  in  sense  of  collect,  nt.)  [fr.  bhanda]  i. 
article,  implement;  kila"  toys  J  vi.6.  —  2.  belongings, 
property  Vin  iv.225.  —  3.  trappings,  in  assa°  horse- 
trappings  J  11. 113. 

Bhandati  [bha94>  cp-  "  pancja  bhanda  paribhase  "  Dhtp 
568;  Dhtm  798]  to  quarrel,  abuse  Vin  1.76  (saddhig); 
IV. 277  ;  Th  I.  933  ;  SnA  357  (aiiiiamai'iiar)). 


Bhan^ana 


121 


Bhadda 


BhaQ^^na  (nt.)  [fr.  bhai^4>  cp.  BSk.  bhandana  Divy  164]  1 
quarrel,  quarrelling,  strife  It  1 1  ;  J  111.149;  Nd'  196;  | 
DhA  1.55.  64-  I 

BhaQ^i  [?]  a  certain  plant  or  flower  J  v. 420.  Reading  | 
uncertain.  I 

I 

Bha^^ika  (f.)   [fr-   bhandaka.   in   collect,  sense]  collection   ! 
of  goods,  heap,  bundle ;  bhandikar)  karoti  to  make  into 
a  heap  J   111.221.  437;    or  bhandikar)   bandhati  to  tie  1 
into  a  bundle  DhA  11.254  '■  VvA  187.     sahassa"  a  heap 
of    i.oco    kahapanas    J    11.424;      111.60  ;    IV.2. — Note. 
bhandika  is  v.  1.  at  J  111.41  for  gandika. 

BhaQ4a  (adj.)  [etym.  uncertain,  dialectical  or  =  pandu  .'] 
bald-headed,  close  shaven  Vin  1.71  (^kamma  shaving),  76 
(kammara°)  ;  J  111.22  ;  vi,538  (-(-tittira)  ;  Miln  11,  128. 

Bhata  (adj.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  bhrta]  i.  supported,  fed, 
reared,  maintained  A  111.46  (bhata  bhacca  "  maintained 
are  ray  dependents");  J  v. 330  (kiccha  bh.),  given  by 
Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  in  meaning  "  full  "  v'ith  wrong  ref. 
T  VI.  14.     Cp.  bharita. 

Bhataka  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  bhrtaka]  a  hired  servant,  hireling, 
servant  Th  i,  606,  685,  IC03  ;  J  111.446;  Miln  379; 
DhA  1,119,  233  ("vlthi  servant  street).  See  also  Fick. 
Sociale  Gliederung  158,  195,  196. 

Bhati  (f.)  [cp.  Vedic  bhfti,  fr.  bhf]  wages,  fee,  pay  J  1.475  ; 
111.325,  446;  DhA  1.21,  70;  Dhtp  94  (in  expl°  of  root 
bhat,  see  bhata). 

Bhatika  (f.)  [fr.  bhati]  fee  J  iv.184. 

Bhatta  (nt.)  [cp.  Epic  &  Class.  Sk.  bhakta,  orig.  pp.  of 
bhajati]  feeding,  food,  nourishment,  meal  Dh  185  ;  Pug 
28,  55;  J  11.15;  V.170  (bhatta-manufina-rupar)  for 
bhattai)-) ;  Vism  66  (where  14  kinds  enum'',  i.  e.  sangha'', 
uddesa°  etc.);  Sdhp  118.  — ucchittha"  food  thrown 
away  PvA  173;  uddesa"  special  food  \'in  1.58=96,  cp. 
11.175;  devasika"  daily  food  (as  fee  or  wages)  DA 
1.296  ( —  bhatta-vetana)  ;  dhura"  a  meal  to  which  a 
bhikkhu  is  invited  as  leader  of  others,  i.  e.  a  responsible 
meal  J  1.449;  in. 97  (v.  1.  dhuva") ;  dhuva"  constant 
supply  of  food  Vin  1.25,  243. 

-agga  [cp.  BSk.  bhaktagra  Divy  335  ;  MVastu  11.478] 
a  refectory  Vin  144  ;  M  1.28;  J  v.334.  -ammana  food 
trough  J  VI. 38 1,  -abhihara  gift  of  food  S  1.S2.  -udde- 
saka  (thera)  (an  elder)  who  supervises  the  distribution 
of  food,  a  superintendent  of  meals  Vism  388,  DhA 
1.244.  -karaka  one  who  prepares  the  meal  or  food,  a 
cook,  butler  J  1.150  sq.  ;  v.296  ;  vi.349  ;  DA  1. 1 57. 
-kicca  "  meal-performance,"  meal  (cp.  BSk.  bhakta- 
kftya  Divy  185)  J  1.87;  Miln  9;  Vism  278  (kata°  after 
the  meal,  cp.  kata  11.  i.  a) ;  PvA  76.  -kilamatha  fatigue 
after  eating  SnA  58  (cp.  "sammada).  -gama  a  village 
giving  tribute  or  service  DhA  1.398.  -dana  gift  of  a 
meal  PvA  54.  -puta  a  bag  with  food  J  11.82,  203  ; 
111.200  ;  DA  1.270.  Cp.  putabhatta.  -putaka  same 
KhA  44  ;  VbhA  234  ;  Vism  251.  -bhoga  enjoyment  of 
food  S  1.92.  -randhaka  a  cook  J  iv.431.  -vissagga 
serving  a  meal,  meal-function,  participation  at  a  meal 
Vin  IV.2O3  ;  Pv  111.2"  (so  read  for  vissatta  ;  expl''  at 
Pv.\  184  by  bhattakicca  &  bhufijana)  ;  Miln  9  ;  SnA  19. 
140.  -vetana  service  for  food,  food  as  wages  (cp. 
bhakta-ilasa  a  slave  working  for  food  Manu  viii.415, 
see  Fick.  Sociale  Glieileniiig  p.  197),  in  general  "  hire, 
wages,"  also  "professional  fee"  D  111. 191  ;  Vin  111.222 
(ranno  bh-v.-aharo  "  in  the  King's  pay  ") ;  J  iv.132  sq., 
Miln  379  ;  DhA  1.25  (to  a  physician)  ;  VvA  305.  -vela 
meal-time  SnA  1 1 1 .  -sammada  drowsiness  after  a 
meal  S  1.7;  J  vi.57  ;  Vbh  352;  X'ism  27S,  295.  -sala 
hall  for  meals,  refectory  Vism  72. 

Bhattar  [Vedic  bhartr  to  bhr]  a  husband  ;  nom.  sq. 
bhatta  Th  2,413;  J  v.  104.  260  (here  in  meaning  "  sup- 
porter"), VI. 492  ;  gen.  bhattu  J  v. 169,  170;  ace. 
bhattarag  Th  2,  412. 


Bhattavant  (adj.)  [fr.  *bhakta,  pp.  of  bhajati]  possessing 
reverence  or  worship(pers),  worshipful,  adored ;  in  a 
(late)  verse  analysing  fancifully  the  word  "  Bhagavant," 
at  DA  1.34=  Vism  210  sq.  ExpH  at  Vism  212  by 
"  bhaji-sevi-bahulai)  karoti." 

Bhatti  (f.)  [cp.  Vedic  &  Class.  Sk.  bhakti.  fr.  bhaj  :  see 

bhajati]  1.  devotion,  attachment,  fondness  Pug  20  = 
Dhs  1326  (cp.  Dhs  trsl.  345)  ;  Pug  65  ;  J  v. 340  ( =  sineha 
C.) ;  VI. 349  ;  VvA  353,  354. — 2.  in  bhatti-kata  Th  2, 
413  it  means  "service,"  thus  "doing  service"  (or 
"  rendered  a  servant  "?).  —  3.  of  uncertain  meaning  in 
bhatti-kamma,  probably  "  making  lines,  decoration, 
ornamentation"  Vin  11.113  (°kamma-kata  decorated), 
151.  The  reading  is  uncertain,  may  be  bhati°  (?  Kern, 
Toev.  s.  V.  trsb  "  patchwork  "  ?).     Cp.  vi°. 

Bhattika  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  bhatta]  in  dhuva"  being  in 
constant  supply  of  food,  being  a  regular  attendant 
(servant)  or  adviser  Vin  11.15.  Also  at  ThA  267  in 
meaning  "  being  a  servant,  working  for  food  "  in  expl" 
of  bhattikata  ( =  kata-sami-bhattika),  said  of  a  toiling 
housewife. 

Bhattimant  (adj.)  [from  bhatti]  1.  devoted  ?  2.  dis- 
cerning, analytical,  perspicacious?  Th  1,  370;  ThA 
has:  yathanusitthar)  patipattiya  tattha  bhattima 
nama. 

Bhadanta  (Bhaddanta)  [a  secondary  adj.  formation  from 
address  bhaddai]  (=bhadrar))  te  "hail  to  thee,"  cp. 
"  bhaddai)  vo  "  under  bhadda  i]  venerable,  reverend, 
mostly  in  voc.  as  address  "Sir,  holy  father"  etc.,  to 
men  of  the  Order,  voc.  sg.  bhadante  S  1.2 16  (v.  1. 
bhaddante)  ;  voc.  pi.  bhadanta  DhA  111.414.  —  A  con- 
tracted form  of  bhadante  is  bhante  (q.  v.).  Mote.  In 
case  of  bhadanta  being  the  corresp.  of  Sk.  *bhavanta 
(for  bhavan)  we  would  suppose  the  change  v  >d  and 
account  for  dd  on  grounds  of  pop.  analogy  after  bhadda. 
See  bhante.  The  pi.  nom.  from  bhadanta  is  formed 
after  bhadante,  which  was  felt  as  a  voc.  of  an  a  -stem 
with  -e  for  -a  as  in  I'rk.  Magadhi. 

Bhadantika  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  bhadanta]  only  in  cpd.  ehi°,  lit. 
"  one  belonging  to  the  (greeting)  '  come  hail  to  thee,' " 
i.  e.  one  who  accepts  an  invitation  D  111.40,  M  11. 161  ; 
A  1.295  ;  11.206  ;  Pug  55.     See  also  under  ehi. 

Bhadara  in  "pandu  at  A  1.181  is  to  be  read  as  badara°. 

Bhadda'a)  &  Bhadra'i>i  (adj.)  [cp.  Vedic  bhadra,  on  diff. 
forms  see  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  53^.  Dhtp  143,  589  expl" 
bhadd  by  "  kalyane  "  ;  whereas  Dhtm  205  &  823  gives 
bhad  (bhadd)  with  expl"  "  kalyana  kammani "]  i.  au- 
spicious, lucky,  high,  lofty,  august,  of  good  omen, 
reverend  (in  address  to  people  of  esteem),  good,  happy, 
fortunate  D  11.951a);  S  1.117II));  Dh  143  sq.lb)  (of  a 
good,  well-trained  horse),  380(b)  (id.);  J  V1.281II))  (24 
bhadra  pasaka  or  lucky  throws  of  the  dice)  ;  DhA 
1-33'*'  (voc.  bhadde  =  ayyc).  — bhadrag  (nt.)  some- 
thing bringing  luck,  a  good  state,  welfare ;  a  good  deed 
(=kalyanag)  Dh  120  ( =bhadra-kamma,  viz.  kaya- 
sucarita  etc.  DhA  ill. 14);  PvA  116  (-itlharj).  Also 
as  form  of  address  "  hail  to  thee,"  bhaddag  vo  J  v. 260. 
--2.  a  kind  of  arrow  (cp.  Sk.  bhalla)  J  11.275  (v.  1. 
bhadra  ;  so  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  ;  hut  C.  takes  it  as  bhadda 
lucky,  in  neg.  sense  "  unlucky,  sinister,"  &  expl"  by 
l)ibhaccha  =  awful).  —  3.  bull  (cp.  Sk.  bhadra.  Hala- 
yiidha  5,  2  i )  Th  i,  16,  173,  659. 

-mukha  one  whose  face  brings  blessings,  a  compli- 
mentary address,  like  "my  noble  &c  friend!"  (cp. 
HSk.  bhadramukha  ;  Divy  frecjuent :  see  Index]  M  11.53  ; 
S  1.74  (cp.  K.S.  i.ii  o")  J  ii.2()i  (v.  I.  bhadda")  ;  Vism  92 
(v.  1.  SS  bhadda").  -muttaka  [cp.  Sk.  bhadramustaj  a 
kind  of  fragrant  grass  (Cyperus  rotundus)  DA  1.8 1  ; 
Ablip  599.  -yuga  a  noble  pair  DhA  i.95  (Kolita  & 
Upatissa),  -vahana  the  auspicious  (royal)  vehicle  (or 
carriage)  Miln  .). 


Bhaddaka 


122 


Bharu 


Bhaddakafa)    &    Bhadraka<b)    [fr.    bhadda]    i.  good,    of 

good  quality  (opp.  papaka)  A  iv.  109(a).  —  2.  honoured, 
of  high  repute  J  111.269(a)  (  =sambhavita  C).  • — 3.  (m. 
nt.)  a  good  thing,  lucky  or  auspicious  possession,  a 
valuable.  Applii  to  the  8  requisites  (parikkhara)  of  a 
Samana  at  J  v. 254(b).  —  On  upari-bhaddaka  (N.  of  a 
tree  J  vi.269  ;C.  =bhagini-mala)  seeupari.  — At  A  i  v. 2  55 
bhaddaka  is  given  as  one  of  the  eight  ingredients  of  the 
sun  &  moon  ;  it  may  be  gold  {?  cp.  Kirfel,  Kosmographie 
190),  or  simply  a  term  for  a  very  valuable  quality. 

Bhanta  [pp.  of  bham]  swerving,  swaying,  staggering, 
deviating ;  always  used  of  an  uncontrolled  car  (ratha 
or  yana)  Dh  222  (ratha  =  ativegena  dhavanta  DhA 
HI. 301);  (yana  =  adanta  akarita  avinita  Xd^  i45)  : 
DhsA  260  (°yana).     Cp.  vi°. 

Bhantatta  (nt.)  [fr.  bhanta]  turmoil,  confusion  Dhs  429 
(  =  vibhanti-bhava  DhsA  260,  so  read  for  vibhatti°)  ; 
cp.  Dhs  Irsl.  120. 

Bhante  [would  correspond  either  to  Sk.  *bhavantah  (with 
ending  °e  as  Magadhism  for  'ah)=bhavan,  or  to  P. 
bhadanta.  In  both  cases  we  have  a  contraction.  The 
expl"-  bhante  =bhadante  (bhadantah)  is  advocated  by 
Pischel,  Prk.  Or.  §§  165,  366".  intimated  also  by  Weber, 
Bhagavatl  156  n.  3  (unable  to  explain  -e) ;  the  expl" 
bhante  =  bhavantah  (see  bhavar))  by  Geiger,  PGr.  98^; 
hinted  at  by  Weber  loc.  cit.  (bhavantah  =bhagavantah)] 
voc.  of  polite  address :  Sir,  venerable  Sir,  used  like 
bhadanta.  Either  abs.  as  voc.  :  Vin  1.76  ;  D  11. 154,  283  ; 
J  ii.iii  ;  III. 46  ;  Miln  19;  or  with  another  voc:  Miln 
25  ;  or  with  other  oblique  cases,  as  with  nom.  D  1.179  ; 
DhA  1.62.  with  gen.  D  1.179. 

Bhabba  (adj.)  [grd  of  bhu,  Sk.  bhavya]  i.  able,  capable, 
fit  for  (-"  or  with  dat.  or  inf.)  ;  abhabba  unfit,  incapable  ; 
Vin  I.I  7;  S  III. 27  (dukkha-kkhayaya) ;  iv.89  (id.); 
Pug  12,  13;  Vism  116  (bhikkhu),  neg.  It  106  (anta- 
kiriyaya).  1 17  (phutthui)  sambodhig)  ;  J  1.106  ("puggala 
a  person  unfit  for  the  higher  truths  &  salvation). 
bhabbdbhabba  fit  &  unfit  people  Nd^  235^  =  Vism  205, 
expH  at  Vbh  341,  342  by  "  bhabba  niyamai)  okkamitui) 
kusalesu  dhammesu  sammattarj."  —  2.  possible  (& 
abhabba  impossible)  M  111.215  (kammar)  bhabba- 
abhasa  apparently  possible).  —  See  also  abhabba. 

Bhabbata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  bhabba]  possibility;  neg.  a"  im- 
possibility Sn  232  ;  KhA  191  ;  VvA  208. 

Bhamati  [bhram;  on  etym.  see  K.Z.  iv.443 ;  vi.152. 
Expl''  at  Dhtp  219  by  "  anavatthane,"  i.  e.  unsettled- 
ness]  to  spin  (of  a  wheel),  to  whirl  about,  toroamDh37i 
(ma  te  kamagune  bhamassu  cittarj) ;  J  1.4 14  ;  111.206  = 
IV. 4  (cakkag  matthake) ;  iv.6  (kumbha-kara-cakkai) 
iva  bh);  v. 478.  —  pp.  bhanta.  —  Caus.  bhameti  to 
make  whirl  Vism  142  (cakkai)). 

Bhamara  [cp.  Epic  &  Class.  Sk.  bhramara ;  either  to 
bhram  (semantically  quick,  unsteady  motion  =  confused 
noise),  cp.  Gr.  ipuptiifl  zither ;  or  perhaps  for  *bramara 
to  Ohg.  bremo  =  Ger.  bremse  gadfly,  bremen  =  brum- 
men  to  hum ;  Gr.  /3^o/i.)f  thunder,  Lat.  fermo  to  growl, 
roar:  see  Walde,  Lat.  Wtb.  s.  v.  fermo]  i.  a  bee  J  v. 205 
(°vanna  bee-coloured,  i.  e.  of  black  colour,  in  expl"  of 
kanha) ;  Th  11,  252.  Usually  in  similes,  e.  g.  at  Dh  49 
(cp.  DhA  1.374  sq.);  Vism  142,  152;  SnA  139.  —  2.  in 
bhamara-tanti  "  the  string  that  sounds,"  one  of  the 
seven  strings  of  the  lute  J  n.253,  cp.  VvA  140. 

Bhamarika  (f.)  [fr.  bhamara]  a  humming  top  J  v. 478. 

Bhamn  (f.)  [secondary  formation  after  bhamuka]  eyebrow 
J  VI. 476  (thita^),  482  (nila°). 

Bhamuka  (&  Bhamukha)  (f.)  [cp.  Vedic  bhru  ;  the  Pali 
word  is  possibly  a  comp"  of  bhru  -1-  mukha  with  dissimila- 


tion of  first  u  to  a]  eyebrow  Th  11,  232  =S  1132  pamukh- ; 
J  IV. 18  (in  expl"  of  su-bbhu  =su-bhamukha  in  C.  ; 
Fausboll  puts  "bhamuka"?  Kern  on  this  passage 
quotes  BSk.  bhrumukha,  see  Toev.  s.  v.) ;  vi.503 
(alara°  for  pamukha)  ;  DhA  111.102;  iv.90,  i97  =  J 
v. 434  ;  SnA  285. 

Bhaya  (nt.)  [fr.  bhi,  cp.  Vedic  bhaya,  P.  bhayati]  fear, 
fright,  dread  A  11. 15  (jati-marana°)  ;  D  111.148,  182; 
Dh  39,  123,  212  sq.,  283  ;  Nd'  371,  409  ;  Pug  56  ;  Vism 
512  ;  KhA  108  ;  SnA  155  ;  DhA  111.23.  There  are  some 
lengthy  enum°^  of  objects  causing  fear  (sometimes 
under  terra  mahabbhaya,  maha-bhaya),  e.  g.  one  of 
17  at  Miln  196,  one  of  16  (four  times  four)  at  A  11.121  sq., 
the  same  in  essence,  but  in  different  order  at  Nd^  470, 
and  at  VbhA  502  ;  one  of  16  (with  remark  "  adi,"  and 
so  on)  at  Vism  645.  Shorter  comb"^  are  to  be  found 
at  Sn  964  (5,  viz.  dar)sa,  adhipata,  sirirjsapa,  manussa- 
phassa,  catuppada) :  Vbh  379  (5,  viz.  ajivika",  asiloka", 
parisa-sarajja",  marana",  duggati",  expH  at  VbhA 
505  sq.),  376  (4 :  jati°,  jara°,  vyadhi",  marana")  367 
(3  :  jati°,  jara°,  maran°)  ;  Nd'  402  (2  :  dittha-dham- 
mikar)  &  samparayikar)  bh.).  — abhaya  absence  of  fear, 
safety  \'in  1.75  (abhay-uvara  for  abhaya-vara  ?) ; 
Dh  317;  J  1.150;  DhA  111.491. 

-.'iana  insight  into  what  is  to  be  feared :  see  Cpd.  66. 
-dassavin  seeing  or  realising  an  object  of  fear,  i.  e.  danger 
Vbh  244,  247  and  passim,  -dassin  id.  Dh  31,  317. 
-bherava  fear  &  dismay  M  1.17  (=citt'  uttrasassa  ca 
bhayanak'  araramanassa  adhivacanar)  MA  113),  N.  of 
Suttanta  No.  4  in  Majjhima  (pp.  16  sq.),  quoted  at 
Vism  202  ;  SnA  206. 

Bhayanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  bhaya,  cp.  Epic  Sk.  bhayanaka] 
frightful,  horrible  J  111.428;  MA  113;  PvA  24  (as 
°ika) ;  Sdhp  7,  208.  —  nt.  °g  something  awful  Nd*  470 
(in  def.  of  bhaya). 

Bhara-bhara,  a  word  imitating  a  confused  sound  M  1.128  ; 
otherwise  contracted  to  babbhara  (q.  v.). 

Bhaia  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  bhr]  "  bearing  "  in  act.  &  pass, 
meaning,  i.  e.  supporting  or  being  supported  ;  only  in 
cpd.  dubbhara  hard  to  support  A  v.  159,  161  (v.  1. 
dubhara),  and  subhara  easy  to  support  Th  i,  926 
(trsl.  "  of  frugal  ways  "). 

Bhaia^a  (nt.)  [fr.  bhr.  Epic  Sk.  bharana]  bearing,  sup- 
porting, maintenance  Dhtm  346  (in  expl"  of  bhf) ; 
Abhp  1053. 

Bharata  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  bhara]  only  in  cpd.  dub°  difficulty 
to  support,  state  of  being  hard  to  maintain,  synonymous 
with  kosajja  at  A  iv.280,  and  kuhana  at  A  v.  159,  161. 
—  opp.  subharata  A  iv.280. 

Bharati  [bhr,  cp.  Lat.  fero,  Gr.  (pifia,  Av.  baraiti,  Oir. 
berim.  Goth.  bairan=to  bear,  Ger.  gebaren.  Dhtm 
expl*  simply  by  "  bharena "]  to  bear,  support,  feed, 
maintain  J  v. 260  (mama  bharatha,  ahai)  bhatta  bha- 
vami  vo;  C.  expl"'  as  "  mar)  icchatha").  —  pp.  bhata. 
See  also  bhata,  bhara.  bharita,  and  Der.  fr.  bhar°.  A 
curious  Passive  form  is  anu-bhiramana  (ppr.)  M  111.123 
(chatta :  a  parasol  being  spread  out),  on  which  see 
Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  52,  5  ;  I75  "■  3.  i9i. 

Bharita  (adj.)  [lit.  made  to  bear,  i.  e.  heavy  with  etc. 
Cp.  formations  bhar°,  fr.  bharati]  filled  with  (-°)  J  1.2 
(suvanna-rajata"  gabbha)  ;  iv.489  (udaka°) ;  v.275 
(kimi°)  ;  SnA  494  (vata°)  ;  ThA  283  (kunapa°). 

Bhariya  (f)  [fr-  bh?,  Vedic  bharya]  a  wife  (lit.  one  who  isj 
supported)  D  111.190  ;  It  36  ;  J  111.51 1  ;  DhA  1.329. 

Bharu  [a  dial,  (inscription)  word,  cp.  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.J 
sea,  in  two  names  for  a  town  and  a  kingdom  viz.  Bharu- 
kaccha  Nd'  155;  J  11. 188;  iv.137,  and  Bharu-rattha 
J   11.169  sq.,   a  kingdom  which  is  said  to  have  been 


Bhallaka 


123 


Bhavati 


swallowed  up  by  the  sea.  —  Also  in  N.  of  the  King  of 
that  country  Bharu-raja  J  11. 171  (v.  1.  Kuru°).  —  l3er. 
Bharukacchaka  an  inhabitant  of  Bharukaccha  DhsA 
305  (so  read  at  Expos.  11.40 1). 

Bhallaka  [lit.  from  the  Bhalla  people]  a  kind  of  copper, 
enum''  under  the  eight  pisaca-lohani,  or  copper  coming 
from  the  Pisaca  country  VbhA  63  (is  reading  correct  ?). 
It  is  doubtful  whether  we  should  not  read  mallaka,  cp. 
malla. 

Bhalla(aka  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  bhallataka]  the  marking  nut  plant 
Semicarpus  anacardium  J  vi.578. 

Bbava  [cp.  Sk.  bhava,  as  philosophical  term  late,  but  as 
X.  of  a  deity  Vedic  ;  of  bhu,  see  bhavati]  "  becoming," 
(form  of)  rebirth,  (state  of)  existence,  a  "  life."  There  are 
3  states  of  existence  conventionally  enum''  as  kama°, 
nipa°,  arijpa°  or  sensual  existence,  deva-corporeal,  & 
formless  existence  (cp.  rupa)  D  11.57;  111.216;  S  11. 3  ; 
IV.258  ;  A  11.223  ;  tii.444  ;  Nd'  48  ;  Nd^  s.  v.  dhatu  B.  ; 
Vism2lo  =  DA  1.34;  Vism  529;  VbhA  204.  —  Another 
view  is  represented  by  the  division  of  bhava  into 
kamma"  and  upapatti"  (uppatti"),  or  the  active 
functioning  of  a  life  in  relation  to  the  fruitional,  or 
resultant  way  of  the  next  life  (cp.  Cpd.  43)  Vbh  137; 
Vism  571  ;  VbhA  183  ;  also  in  def.  of  bhava  at  Nd"  47: 
(kamma°  and  patisandhika  punabbhava).  —  In  the 
"causal  chain"  (Paticca-samuppada,  q.  v.)  bhava  is 
represented  as  condition  of  birth  (jati),  or  resultant 
force  for  new  birth.  — See  Sn  361,  514,  742,  839,  923, 
1055,  1 133;  Dh  348;  Nd'  274;  Vbh  294,  358:  Vism 
55O  sq.  ;  DhA  iv.22 1  ;  Sdhp  33,  333,  335.  —  6a  itibhav'- 
dbhava  see  iti,  and  add  ref.  Vbh  375.  —  A  remarkable 
use  of  bhava  as  nt.  (obstr.)  to  bhu  (in  cpd.)  is  to  be  noted 
in  the  def.  given  by  Bdhgh.  of  divya=divi  bhavar)  (for 
divi-bhu)  KhA  227;  SnA  199;  and  manasai)  =manasi 
bhavar)  (for  manasi-bhii)  KhA  248,  cp.  Panini  iv.3,  53. 
Similarly  aroga  bhava  health  DhA  1.328  for  "bhava. 
—  Cp.  anu°,  vi°,  sam°. 

-agga  the  best  (state  of)  existence,  the  highest  point 
of  existence  (among  the  gods)  J  in. 84  ;  Vbh  426  ;  Miln 
132  ;  KhA  179,  249;  SnA  17,  41,  507;  often  as  highest, 
"  heaven  "  as  opposed  to  Avici,  the  lowest  hell ;  thus 
at  J  IV. 182  ;  VI. 354  ;  Miln  336.  -anga  constituent  of 
becoming,  function  of  being,  functional  state  of  sub- 
consciousness, i.  e.  subliminal  consciousness  or  sub- 
conscious life-continuum,  the  vital  continuum  in  the 
absence  of  any  process  [of  mind,  or  attention]  (thus  Mrs 
Rh.  D.  in  Expos.  185  n.),  subconscious  individual  life. 
See  on  term  Cpd.  26  sq.,  265-267  ;  &  cp.  Dhs  trsl.  134. 
■ —  J  VI. 82  ;  Miln  299  sq.  ;  Vism  164,  676  ;  DhsA  72,  14", 
269  ;  DhA  1.23  ;  VbhA  81,  156  sq.,  406.  -antaga  "  gone 
to  the  ends  of  existence,"  past  existence,  Ep.  of  the 
Bhagavan  Buddha  Vism  210.  -antara  an  existence 
interval,  i.  e.  transition  fr.  one  life  to  another,  a  pre- 
vious or  subsequent  life  Vism  553  sq.  -&bhava  this  or 
that  life,  any  form  of  existence  some  sort  of  existence 
Sn  1060,  1068;  Ndi  48,  109,  284;  Nd2  472,  664  A; 
Th  I,  784  (ThA  mahantamahanta  bh.)  ThA  71  (Ap.  v. 
30)  ;  VbhA  501.  -asava  the  intoxicant  of  existence  D 
III. 216;  Vbh  364,  373.  -uppatti  coming  into  (a  new) 
ex.  —  Four  such  bh.-uppattis  lead  to  rebirth  among 
the  foil,  gods:  the  paritt'-abha  deva.  the  appaman'- 
abha  d.,  the  sankilitth'-abha  d.,  the  parisuddh'-abha  d. 
-M  111.147.  -esana  longing  for  rebirth  D  in. 216,  270. 
-ogha  the  flood  of  rebirth  (see  ogha)  Nd'  57,  159; 
Msm  480.  -cakka  the  wheel  or  round  of  rcbirt)!, 
equivalent  to  the  Paticca-samuppada  Vism  529, 
576  sq.  ;  in  the  same  context  at  VbhA  138,  194  sq. 
-carimaka  the  last  rebirth  Vism  291.  -tanha  craving 
for  rebirth  I)  III. 2  12,  2i6,  274;  S  v. 432  ;  Sn  746;  Vbh 
ic.i,  358,  365;  Th  2,  458;  ThA  282;  VbhA  ill. 133. 
-netti  [cp.  BSk.  bhava-netri  M.Vastu  11. 307  ;  "netrika 
I  1.337]  leader  to  renewed  ex.,  guide  to  ex.  Vin  1. 231  ; 
It  38  ,  Dhs  I059ss(cp.  DhsA  364  -  bhava-rajju).  -sai)yo- 
jana  the  fetter  of  rebirth  :  seearahant  II.  C.     -salla  the 


sting  or  dart  of  rebirth  Dh  351  (  =  sabbani  bhava- 
gamini  sallani  DhA  iv.70).  -sata  (pi.  satani)  the 
pleasures  of  ex.,  variously  enum''  in  sets  of  from  one  to 
six  at  Nd'  30.  -ssita  at  J  v. 371  read  with  v.  1.  as 
ghata-ssita. 

Bhavati  [bhu  to  become,  cp.  Sk.  bhumi  earth  ;  Gr.  ipiaic 
nature  (physical),  (ploft.ji  to  grow  ;  Lat.  fui  I  have  been, 
futurus  =  future  ;  Oir.  buith  to  be;  Ags.  buan  =  Goth. 
bauan  to  live,  Ger.  bauen,  also  Ags.  byldan  —to  build  ; 
Lith.  biiti  to  be,  butas  house  Dhtp  i  :  bhu  sattayaQ] 
to  become,  to  be,  exist,  behave  etc.  (cp.  Nd^  474  = 
sambhavati  jayati  nibbattati  patu-bhavati).  —  I. 
Forms.  There  are  two  bases  used  side  by  side,  viz. 
bhav"  and  (contracted)  ho°,  the  latter  especially  in  the 
(later)  Gatha  style  and  poetry  in  general,  also  as 
archaic  in  prose,  whereas  bhav°  forms  are  older.  On 
compounds  with  prepositions,  as  regards  inflection,  see 
Geiger,  P.Gr.  §§  131-,  151';  and  cp.  anubhavati,  abhi- 
bhavati,  abhisar)'',  pa°  (also  pahoti,  pahiita),  pari", 
vi",  sar)°.  —  i.  Pres.  ind.  bhavami  Sn  511  &  homi 
J  111.260;  2°"'  bhavasi  &  hosi  M  111.140;  Vv  84™;  3"' 
bhavati  freq.  ;  Sn  36  (where  Nd^  474  with  v.  I.  BB  of 
Sn  reads  bhavanti  ;  Divy  p.  294  also  reads  bhavanti 
snehah  as  conjecture  of  Cowell's  for  MSS.  bhavati) ; 
Dh  249.  375;  &  hoti  freq.;  i'''  pi.  homa  Pv  i.n'; 
2°"'  hotha  J  1.307  ;  3"*  bhavanti  &  honti  freq.  —  imper. 
1"*  sg.  bhava  Sn  337,  340,  701  ;  Dh  236;  Th  2,  8; 
bhavahi  Sn  510  ;  hohi  Sn  31  ;  M  111.134  ;  J  1.32  ;  PvA  89. 
3""  sg.  hotu  Sn  224;  J  III.  150;  PvA  13;  Miln  18.  pi. 
i'^'  med.  bhavamase  Th  i,  1128;  Sn  32  ;  2°"'  pi  bha- 
vatha  J  11.218,  bhavatha  Sn  692  ;  Dh  144  ;  hotha  Dh 
243  '  Dh  11. 141  :  J  11.302  ;  DhA  1.57  ;  3"'  pi.  bhavantu 
Sn  145  ;  hontu  J  11. 4.  Pot.  i"  sg.  bhaveyyat)  J  vi.364  ; 
2°''  bhaveyyasi  Ud  91  ;  PvA  11  ;  3"'  bhave  Sn  716, 
bhaveyya  J  11. 159;  DhA  1.329,  &  hupeyya  Vin  1.8  (for 
huveyya :  see  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  39'  &  131-);  pi.  P' 
bhaveyyama;  2"''  bhavetha  Sn  1073.  3"'  bhaveyyug 
Sn  906.  —  ppr.  bhavar)  Sn  92,  &  bhavanto  Sn  968;  f. 
honti  PvA  79.  —  (ut.  !■•■  sg.  bhavissami  PvA  49, 
hessami  Th  2,  460  (ThA  283  reads  bhavissami),  & 
hessar)  Th  i,  iico;  J  in. 224  ;  Pv  i.io*;  2'"'  bhavissasi 
FvA  10,  hohisi  Pv  1.3';  3"'  bhavissati  Dh  228,  264; 
DhA  11.82,  hessati  J  111.279  &  med.  hessate  Mhvs  25, 
97,  hehiti  Bu  n.io=A  1.4;  Vv  63^-;  &  hossati  (in 
pahossati  fr.  pahoti  DhA  111.254);  '''  P'-  bhavissama 
Dh  2CO  ;   2""'  hessatha  S   iv.179;   3"^  bbavissanti  freq. 

—  Cond.  I"  sg.  abhavissar)  J  1.470;  2'"'  abhavissa 
J  ii.i  1  ;  III. 30  ;  3"'  abhavissa  It  37  ;  Vin  1.13  ;  D  11.57  '• 
M  111.163  ;  J  1.267;  II.I  12  (na  bhavissa  =  nabhavissa  ?)  ; 
3"'  pi.  abhavissagsu  Vin  1.13.  i"  aor.  (orig.  pret.  of 
*liuvati,  cp.  hupeyya  Pot.  ;  see  Geiger  P.Gr.  131'-,  162-)  : 
P'  sg.  ahuva  S  1.36,  with  by-form  (see  aor.)  ahuvasii] 
Vv  820;  2°''  ahuva  ibid.,  3'"  ahuva  Vv  81";  J  11.  n  <.  ; 
III. 131  ;  P'  pi.  ahuvama  M  1.93;  11. 214  &  ahuvamha 
ibid.;  2"''  ahuvattha  S  iv.112,  M  1445;  DhA  1.57. — 
2"''  aor.  (simple  aor.,  with  pret.  endings):  p'  sg.  ahur) 
Pv  11.32  (v.  1.  BB  ahu)  (-anosir)  PvA  83)  ;  2°'i  ahu  (.sk. 
abhuh)  Pv  11. 3';  3"*  ahij  iSk.  abhut)  Sn  139,  312,  5i'4 
and  pa.ssim  ;  Pv  1.2',  i,  ahu  Pv  i.g^ ;  iir';  A  bhavi 
DhA  1.329  (patubhavi)  :  !'•'  pi.  ahumha  (Sk.  abhuma) 
Pv  Ml",  &  ahumha  J  1362;  DhA  1.57.  —  y^  aor.  (see 
aor.)  p'  sg.  ahosig  Th  i,  620;  J  1.106;  VvA  321: 
PvA  10  (  — asig)  ;  2°''  ahosi  J  1. 107  ;  3"'  ahosi  Sn  S35  ; 
Vin  1.23  ;  P'  pi.  ahesumha  M  1.265  :  .3"'  ahesur)  D 
II. 5  ;  Vv  74<  ;  J  1.149:  Dh.\  1.327;  &  bhavii)su  (Sk. 
abhavisuh)  DhA  iv.13.  Of  medial  forms  we  mention 
the  P'  pi.  pres.  bhavamahe  Mhvs  1.65.  and  the  3"'  sg. 
pret.  ahuvattha  VvA  iO(.  —  Inf.  bhavitur)  Sn  552',  & 
hetuye  I'.u  11.10.  —  ger.  bhavitva  Sn  5I),  hutva  Sn  43, 
&  hutvana  Sn  281.  —  grd.  bhavitabba  J  1.440;  vi.368  ; 
hotabba  Vin  1.46 ;  bhabba  (Sk.  bhavya) :  sec  sop.  ; 
bhuyya  see  cp<i.  abhibhuyya        Cans,  bhaveti  see  sep. 

—  pp.  bhiita.  Note.  In  ci>mp'' with  nouns  or  adjectives 
the  final  vowelof  these  is  changed  into  I,  as  in  comb"  of 


Bhavatta 


124 


Bhaga 


the  same  with  the  root  kf,  e.  g-  bhasmibhavati  to  be  I 
reduced  to  ashes,  cp.  bhasmi-karana  s.  v.  bhasma,  etc. 
—  II.  Meanings.  In  general  the  meaning  "  to  become,  ! 
to  get "  prevails,  but  many  shades  of  it  are  possible 
according  to  context  &  combinations.  It  is  impossible 
&  unnecessary  to  enumerate  all  shades  of  meaning,  only 
a  few  idiomatic  uses  may  be  pointed  out. —  i.  to 
happen,  to  occur,  to  befall  J  vi.368.  —  2.  The  fut. 
bhavissati  "is  certainly,"  "must  be"  DhA  111.171 
(satthika  desana  bh.) ;  Miln  40  (raata  ti  pi  na  bh.).  — 
3.  Imper.  hotu  as  adv.  "very  well"  Miln  18  (hotu 
bhante  very  well,  sir). — 4.  aor.  in  meaning  and  as 
substitute  of  asig,  pret.  of  as  to  be ;  etad  ahosi  this 
occurred  to  him  DhA  1.399  (assa  etad  ahosi  "  this 
thought  struck  her  "). 

Bhavatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  bhii]  the  fact  of  being,  state,  con- 
dition KhA  227. 

Bhavana  (nt.)  [fr.  bhu]  dwelling,  sphere,  world,  realm 
S  1.206,  Sn  810  (see  expl°  Nd^  132  :  nerayikanai)  nirayo 
bh.  etc.  &  SnA  534  :  niray'  adi-bhede  bhavane)  ;  Nd' 
448  (Inda°  the  realm  of  Indra)  ;  J  111.275  (naga°  the 
world  of  the  Nagas). 

Bhavant  [cp.  Sk.  (&  Vedic)  bhavant,  used  as  pron.  of  the 
2"^ ;  but  constructed  with  3"'  person  of  the  verb. 
Probably  a  contraction  fr.  bhagavarit,  see  Whitney, 
Altind.  Gr.  456]  pron.  of  polite  address  "  Sir,  Lord," 
or  "venerable,  honourable,"  or  simply  "you."  Cases 
as  follows  (after  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  98^) :  sg.  nom.  bhavar) 
Sn  486;  D  1.249;  M  1.484.  nt.  bhavat)  M  111.172. 
ace.  bhavantai]  Sn  597;  D  11.23 1  \  'nstr.  bhota  D  1.93, 
no;  S  IV. 120.  gen.  bhoto  Sn  56.");  M  1.486 ;  'voc. 
bhavai)  D  1.93  &  bho  D  1.93  ;  M  1.484  ;  J  11.26.  See 
bho  also  sep.  —  pi.  nom.  bhavanto  Sn  p.  107  (only  as 
v.  1.  ;  T.  bhagavanto),  &  bhonto  ibid.  ;  M  11. 2  ;  Miln  25  ; 
ace.  bhavante  M  11. 3  ;  instr.  bhavantehi  M  in.  13  ;  gen. 
bhavatai)  M  11. 3  ;  voc.  bhonto  Th  i,  832  ;  M  11. 2  ;  —  f. 
bhoti :  sg.  nom.  bhoti  Sn  988;  J  111.95;  ace.  bhotit) 
J  VI. 523  ;  loc.  bhotiya  ibid.  voc.  bhoti  ibid. ;  D  11.249. 

—  On  form  bhante  see  this. 

Bhaveyya  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  bhavya]  a  sort  of  tree,  perhaps 
Averrhoa  carambola  J  vi.529. 

Bhasati  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  bhasate]  to  bark  (of  dogs)  J  iv.182 
(aor.  bhasi ;  so  read  for  T.  bhusi).  —  pp.  bhasitai]  (as 
n.)  bark  ibid,  (maha-bhasitai)  bhasi,  read  for  bhusita). 
See  also  bhusati. 

Bhasita  i.  see  bhasati.  —  2.  pp.  of  bhas  "crumbled  to 
ashes  "  see  bhasma. 

Bhasta  [cp.  Vedic  basta]  a  he-goat  J  111.278. 

Bhasta  (f.)  &  bhasta  (nt.)  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  bhastra  (also  one 
MBh.  passage),  orig.  n.  ag.  fr.  bhas  (to  bark  ?),  lit. 
bellower,  blower]  i,  a  bellows  Th  i,  1134;  J  vi.12 
(vata-punna-bhasta-camma,  skin  of  bellows  full  of 
wind);  SnA  171  (vata-purita-bhastra  viya),  494  (vata- 
bharita°) ;  DhA  1.442  (bhastar)  dhamapeti) ;  Vism  287. 

—  2.  a  sack  Th  i,  1151  ;  2,  466  (T.  reads  gatta,  but 
ThA  283  reads  bhasta  &  expl^  as  "  camma-pasibbaka  ")  ; 
J  III. 346  (sattu°  =sattu  pasibbaka  flour  sack);  v.45  ; 
ThA  212  (udaka°).  bilara-bhasta  a  bag  of  catskin 
M  1.128  (  =  bilara -camma-pasibbaka  Bdhgh)  ;  Th  i, 
1 138. 

Bhasma(n)  (nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  bhasman  (adj.) ;  Sk.  bhasman 
(n.),  originally  ppr.  of  bhas  to  chew  &  thus  n-stem.  It 
has  passed  into  the  a-decl.  in  Pali,  except  in  the  loc. 
bhasmani  (S  1.169).  Etyraologically  &  semantically 
bhasman  is  either  "chewing"  or  "anything  chewed 
(small)."  thus  meaning  particle,  dust,  sand,  etc. ; 
and  bhas  is  another  form  of  psa  (cp.  Sk.  psa 
morsel    of    food,    psata     hungry  =  P.     chata).      Idg. 


*bhsa  &  *bhsam,  represented  in  Gr.  if/w^^w  to  grind, 
i/zflfi/joe  &  il/iixof  sand ;  Lat.  sabulum  sand.  The 
Dhtp  326  &  Dhtm  452  explain  bhas  by  bhasmi- 
karana  "  reduce  to  ashes,"  a  pp.  of  it  is  bhasita  ;  it  also 
occurs  in  Sk.  loc.  bhasi]  ashes  S  i.i69=Nd^  576  (loc. 
bhasmani)  ;  Vv  84''* ;  J  111.426 ;  Vism  469  (in  com- 
parison). 

-antahuti  (bhasm'  ant'  ahuti)  "  whose  sacrifice  ends 
in  ashes"  D  1.55  (so  read  for  bhassant",  according  to 
DA  1. 166,  &  cp.  Franke,  Dlgha  Nikaya  p.  60) ;  M  1.515  ; 
S  III. 207.  -4cchanna  covered  by  ashes  Dh  71  (  =  chari- 
kaya  patichanna  DhA  11.68) ;  J  VI.236  (.  .  .  vapavaka). 
-puta  a  sack  for  ashes  DA  1.267  [^^  expl°  for  assa-puta 
of  D.  1.98  ;  fanciful ;  see  assa').  -bhava  "  ashy  "  state, 
state  of  being  crumbled  to  dust  VvA  348. 

Bhassa  (nt.)  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  bhasya,  of  bha;]  speech,  con- 
versation, way  of  talking,  disputation  Sn  328  (v.  1.  for 
hassa) ;  It  71  ;  Miln  90  ;  Vism  127  (grouped  into  fit  talk, 
as  the  10  katha-vatthus,  and  unfit  talk  or  gossip,  as  the 
32  tiracchana-katha). 

-karaka  one  who  makes  talk,  i.  e.  invites  disputation, 
or  one  who  gossips  Vin  i.i  ;  Nd'  142  ;  f.  "karika  Vin 
IV. 230.  -pavadaka  one  who  proposes  disputation, 
one  who  is  fond  of  debate  &  discussions  M  1.161,  227 
(°ika) ;  Miln  4.  -pavedin  one  experienced  in  debating 
Miln  90.  -samacara  (good)  conduct  in  speech,  pro- 
ficiency in  disputation  D  in.  106.  -samussaya  grandi- 
loquence, proud  talk  Sn  245  (cp.  SnA  288  =  att'ukkar)- 
sanata  ti  vuttai]  hoti). 

Bhassati  [bhians,  Sk.  bhraSyate]  to  fall  down,  drop,  to 
droop  (Dhtp  455  &  Dhtm  695  :  adho-patane  &  adho- 
pate)  J  IV. 223  ;  vi.530.  ppr.  bhassamana  Miln  82  ; 
pret.  3"i  sg.  bhassittha  J  11.274  (''P-  pabhassittha  Vin 
II. 135),  &  abhassittha  S  1.122  (so  read  for  abhassatha). 
—  pp.  bhattha'. 

Bhassara  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  bhas]  i.  (adj.)  shining,  resplendent 
J  V.169  (C.  pabhassara).  —  2.  N.  of  a  bird  J  vi.538 
(=sata-har|sa  C). — Cp.  a°,  pa°. 

Bha  (f.)  [cp.  Vedic  bha  &  bhah  nt.]  light,  splendour  ;  given 
as  name  of  a  jewel  at  an  extremely  doubtful  passage 
J  ^-317'  3'8>  where  T.  reads  "vara  tai)  bhan  iiam 
icchasi,"  &  C.  expl=.  :  "  bha  ti  ratanass'  etai) 
namar)."  The  v.  1.  for  bhaiiilari  is  bhuiijar)  ;  the  passage 
may  be  corrupt  from  "  varatu  bhavar)  yam  icchasi." 

Bhakutika  (adj.)  [fr.  bhakuti]  knitting  the  eyebrows, 
frowning,  only  in  redupl.  cpd.  bhakutika-bhakutiko 
frowning  continually,  supercilious  Vin  11.11=111.181 
(manda-mando-l-  )  ;  Nd''  342  (korajika-korajiko-)-  ) ; 
Vism  26  (id.).  —  f.  bhakutika  a  frown,  frowning,  super- 
ciliousness, def.  at  Vism  26  as  "  padhana-parimathita- 
bhava-dassanena  bhakuti  [read  bhakuti]  -karanai) 
mukha-sankoco  ti  vuttar)  hoti."  It  occurs  in  stock 
phrase  bhakutika  bhakutiyai)  kuhana  kuhayana  in 
def.  of  kuhana  at  Vbh  352  =Vism  2^.  25  (cp.  Nd'  225), 
and  at  Nd^  342  D.  See  also  VbhA  482  (bhakuti- 
karanai)  silam  assa  ti  bhakutiko).  The  form  bhaku- 
tiyar)  (nt.)  is  originally  the  same  as  bhakutika,  only 
differentiated  in  C. -style.  The  def.  at  Vism  26  is 
"  bhakutikassa  bhavo  bhakutiyar)."  The  v.  1.  ibid,  is 
bhakutita.  — bhakutikai)  karoti  to  make  a  frowning 
face,  to  act  superciliously  Vism  105  (as  a  quality  of  one 
"dosa-carita  "). 

Bhaga  [cp.  Vedic  bhaga,  fr.  bhaj,  bhajati]  i.  part,  portion, 
fraction,  share  Vin  1.285  ;  Sn  427  (sahassa-bhago  mara- 
nassa  =  sahassari  bhaganar)  assa  ti  SnA  387  ;  a  thousand 
times  a  share  of  death,  i.  e.  very  near  death,  almost  quite 
dead),  702  (v.  1.  SnA  492  for  Sn  samana-bhava,  even- 
ness, proportionate-ness) ;  Vv  14'  (  =  kummasa-kotthasa 
VvA  62)  ;  Pv  I.I  i'  (addhi°  one  half)  ;  Vin  iv.264.  —  Cp. 
vi°.  — bhagaso  (abl.-adv.)  in  parts,  by  parts,  by  portions, 
esp.  in  even  portions,  i.  e  evenly,  in  proportion  S  1.193 


Bhagavant 


125 


Bhatika 


(according  to  each  one's  share;  cp.  Th  i,  1242);  M 
III. 183;  Vv  7-;  Miln  330,  415  (aneka°  hundredfold  or 
more),  bhagaso  mita  (of  cities  or  dwelling-places  etc.) 
evenly  planned,  well  laid  out,  i.  e.  in  squares  Sn  300.  305 
(nivesanani  suvibhattani  bhagaso) ;  J  v. 266  (cp.  C.  on 
p.  J72)=Nd2  ,04™  ■>:  Pv  1. 10"  (  =  bhagato  mita  PvA 
52).  — bhagabhatta  apportioned  food,  ration  DhA 
1. 134.  —  Cp.  dobbhagga  "  disproportionateness."  i.  e. 
bad  luck.  —  2.  apportioned  share  (of  money),  fee, 
remuneration,  always  in  term  acariya"  (acariyassa)  the 
teacher's  fee  (usually  consisting  in  i.cco  kahapanas) 
J  1.273:  V.457;  VI. 1 78;  Miln  10;  DhA  1.253.  —  3-  divi- 
sion of  space,  quarter,  side,  place,  region  :  disa°  quarter 
of  the  compass  Vin  11.217  :  para^  outside  part  KhA  206 
=  PvA  24  (kuddanar)  parabhaga  =  tiro-kudda) ;  paccha- 
bhagat)  (ace.  adv.)  at  the  back  part,  behind  PvA  114. 
—  fig.  way,  respect,  in  ubhato-bhaga-vimutta  "  free  in 
both  ways"  D  n.71  ;  M  1.477  (^^^  ^Dia/  11.70;  i.  e.  free 
both  by  insight  and  by  the  intellectual  disciphne  of  the 
8  stages  of  Deliverance,  the  attha  vimokkha).  —  4.  divi- 
sion of  time,  time,  always  -°,  e.  g.  pubba°  the  past, 
apara°  the  future  PvA  133  ;  obi.  cases  adverbially  ;  tena 
divasa-bhagena  (-l-ratti  bhagena)  at  that  day  (&  that 
very  night)  Miln  18 ;  apara-bhage  (loc.)  in  future 
J  1.34  ;  PvA  116. 

Bhaguvant  (adj.)  [fr.  bhaga,  equal  to  bhagin]  sharing  in, 
partaking  of  (gen.)  Dh  19,  20  (samaiiiiassa). 


Bhagin   (adj.)   [fr.  bhaga 
partaking  of  (with  gen.) 
A  11.80  ;  III. 42  (ayussa 
Miln  18  (samaniiassa) ; 
VbhA  418  sq.  (panna 
&  nibbedha").  —  Also 
l42=Nd2    466=Vism 
(dukkhassa) ;      PvA 
bhagavant,  bhagimant, 


Cp.  Vedic  bhagin]  sharing  in, 
,  endowed  with  ;  getting,  receiving 
vannassa  etc.)  ;  J  1.87  (rasanar))  ; 
Vism  150  (labhassa) ;  DliA  11.91)  ; 

as   hana-bhagini,    thiti",   visesa° 
in  def.  of  terra  Bhagava  at  Nd' 

210. — pi.    bhagino     Pv     mi '2 
18      (danaphalassa),     175. 
,  bhagiya. 


iii.i' 
-Cp. 


Bhagineyya  [fr.  bhagini,  Cp.  Epic  Sk.  bhagineya]  sister's 
son,  nephew  Sn  695;   J  1.207;   II-237;  DhA  1.14;  PvA 

215- 

Bhagimant  (adj.)  [a  double  adj.  formation  bhagin -(- 
mant]  partaking  in,  sharing,  possessing  (with  gen.) 
Th  2,  204  (dukkhassa) ;  ThA  171  (=bhagin). 

Bhagiya  (adj.)  (-")  [fr.  bhaga,  cp.  bhagin]  connected  with, 
conducive  to,  procuring  ;  in  foil,  philos.  terms :  kusala" 
A  l.ii;  hana°,  visesa"  D  111.274  sq. ;  hana°,  thiti°, 
visesa°,  nibbedha"  ^'ism  15  (in  verse),  88  =  Ps  1.35. — 
Cp.  BSk.  moksa  bhagiya,  nirvedha"  Divy  50  ;  moksa" 
ibid.  363. 

Bhagya  (nt.)  [cp.  Epic  &  Class.  Sk.  bhagya ;  fr.  bhaga, 
see  also  contracted  form  bhagga^  good  luck,  fortune 
J  v.484. 

Bhagyavant  (adj.)  [same  as  bhaggavant,  only  differen- 
tiated as  being  the  Sk.  form  and  thus  distinguished  as 
Sep.  word  by  Con^^ men Lators]  having  good  luck,  au- 
spicious, fortunate,  in  def.  of  term  "  Bhagava "  at 
DA  i.34=Vism  210;  also  at  VvA  231,  where  the 
abstr.  bhagyavantata  is  formed  as  expl"  of  the  term. 
bhagyavata  (f.)  at  Vism  211. 

Bhajaka  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  bhajeti]  distributing,  one  who 
distributes  or  one  charged  with  the  office  of  distributing 
clothes,  food  etc.  among  the  Bhikkhus  Vin  1.285 
(civara") ;  A  111.275  (civara",  phala",  khajjaka"). 

Bhaiana^  (nt.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  bhajana,  fr.  bhaj]  a  bowl, 
vessel,  dish,  usually  earthenware,  but  also  of  other 
metal,  e.  g.  gold  (suvanna")  DA  1.295  '■  copper  (tamba") 
DhA  1.395;  bronze  (kar)sa°)  Vism  142  (in  simile). — 
Vin  1.46;  Sn  577  (pi.  mattika-bhajana) ;  J  11.272 
(bhikkha°);    in.366   (id.),   471;    v  293   (bhatta°) ;    Miln 


107;  VvA  40.  292  (v.  1.  bhojana) :  PvA  104.  145,  251  ; 
Sdhp  571. 

-vikati  a  special  bowl  J  v. 292  (so  read  for  T.  bhojana") ; 
Vism  376. 

Bhajana'  (nt.)  [fr.  bhaj]  division,  dividing  up,  in  pada" 
dividing  of  words,  treating  of  words  separately  DhsA 
343  ;  similarly  bhajaniyar)  that  which  should  be  classed 
or  divided  DhsA  2.  also  in  pada°  division  of  a  phrase 
DhsA  54. 

Bhajita  [pp.  of  bhajeti]  divided,  distributed  ;  nt.  that  which 
has  been  dealt  out  or  allotted,  in  cpd.  bhajit-4bhajita 
A  111.275. 

Bhajeti  [Caus.  of  bhajati,  but  to  be  taken  as  root  by 
itself;  cp.  Dhtm  777  bhaja -puthakkare]  to  divide,  dis- 
tribute, deal  out  Vin  iv.223  (ppr.  bhajiyamana) ;  J 
1.265  ;  DhsA  4  (fut.  bhajessati)  grd.  bhajetabba  Vin 
1.285.  —  pp.  bhajita. 

Bhapa  [fr.  bhanati]  reciting  or  preaching,  in  pada°  reciting 
I        the  verses  of  the  Scriptures  DhA  11.95  {''■'■  '•  patibhana) ; 

!      III. 345  ;  1V.18. 

-vara  a  section  of  the  Scriptures,  divided  into  such 
for  purposes  of  recitation,  "  a  recital  "  Vin  1.14  ;  11.247  '■ 
DA  13  ;  MA  2  (concerning  the  Bh.  of  Majjhima  Nikaya)  ; 
SnA  2  (of  Sutta  Nipata),  608  (id.)  ;  DhsA  6  (of 
Dhammasangani.  cp.  Expos.  8  n.  3),  and  frequently 
in  other  Commentaries  &  Expositionary  Works. 

Bhanaka'  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  bhanati]  speaking:  (n.)  a  reciter, 
repeater,  preacher  (of  sections  of  the  Scriptures),  like 
Anguttara°  Vism  74  sq.  ;  Digha"  D.\  1.15,  131  ;  J  1.59; 
Vism  36,  266;  Jataka"  etc.  Miln  341  sq.  ;  Majjhima" 
Vism  95  (Revatthera),  275,  286,  431  ;  Sagyutta^  \ism 
313  (Cuja-Sivatthera).  Unspecified  at  SnA  70  (Kalya- 
naviharavasi-bhanaka-dahara-bhikkhu  ;  reading  doubt- 
ful).—  f.  bhanika  \'in  1V.2S5  (Thullananda  baliussuta 
bhanika) ;  also  in  cpd.  maiiju-bhanika  sweet-voiced, 
uttering  sweet  words  J  vi.422. 

Bhavaka^  [cp.  Sk.  bhandaka  a  small  box  :  Kathasarits.  24, 
163  ;  &  seeMuller,  P.Gr.  p.  48]  a  jar  Vin  11.170  (loha°) ; 
111.90. 

Bhanin  (adj.)  (-")  [fr.  bhanati]  speaking,  reciting  Sn  850 
(manta°  a  reciter  of  the  Mantras,  one  who  knows  the 
M.  and  speaks  accordingly,  i.  e.  speaking  wisely,  expH 
by  SnA  549  as  "  mantaya  pariggahetva  vacar)  bha- 
sita  ") ;  Dh  363  (id.  ;  expl*  as  "  manta  vuccati  panna, 
taya  pana  bhanana-silo "  DhA  iv.93).  — ativela" 
speaking  for  an  excessively  long  time,  talking  in  excess 
J  IV.247.  248. 

Bhajeti  Caus.  of  bhanati  (q.  v.)  with  3''  praet.  bhani 
&  pot.  bhanaye. 

Bhatar  [cp.  Vedic  bhratar  =  .\v.  bratar,  Gr.  ippuTujp,  Lat. 
frater,  Goth.  brojiarsOhg.  bruoder,  E.  brother] 
brother,  nom.  sg.  bhata  Sn  296;  J  1.307;  PvA  54,  64; 
gen.  sg.  bhatuno  ThA  71  (Ap.  v. 36),  &  bhatussa  Mhvs 
8,  9;  instr.  bhatara  J  1.308;  ace.  bhatarag  Sn  125; 
J  1.307;  loc.  bhatari  J  in. 5''.  —  nom.  pi.  bhataro  J 
1.307,  &  bhatuno  Th  2,  408  ;  i>-c.  bhate  Dpvs  vi.21. — 
In  cpds.  both  bhati"  (  :  bhatisadisa  like  a  brother  J 
v. 263),  and  bhatu"  ( :  bhatu-jaya  brother's  wife,  sister- 
in-law  J  v. 288  ;  Vism  95).  Cp.  bhatika  &  bhatuka. 
On  pop.  etym.  see  bhagini. 

Bhati  jbha  Dhtp  367,  Dhtm  594:  dittiyag  ;  Idg.  *bhe, 
cp.  Sk.  bhah  nt.  splendour,  radiance,  bhasati  to  shine 
forth  ;  Gr.  ipdos  light,  ^iii'i'ui  to  show  etc.  ;  Ags.  bonian 
to  polish  =Ger.  bohnen  ;  also  Sk.  bhala  shine,  splendour, 
-Ags.  bael  funeral  pile]  to  shine  (forth),  to  appear 
D  11.205;  Vv  35";  J  11.313.  — pp.  bhata:  see  vi". 

Bhatika  (&  Bhatiya)  [fr.  bhatar.  cp.  Class.  Sk.  bhratfka] 
lit.  brotherly,  i.  e.  a  brother,  often  °- :  "  brother  "  —  (a) 


Bhatuka 


126 


Bhava 


bhatika:  J  1.253  (jetthaka°) ;  vi.32  ;  DhA  1.14  (°thera 
my  Thera-brother  or  br.-thera),  loi,  245;  PvA  75. — 
(b)  bhatiya :  Vism  292  (dve  "thera  two  Th.  brothers). 
—  Cp.  bhatuka. 

Bhataka  [  =  bhatika,  fr.  Sk.  bhratrka]  brother,  usually 
-°.  viz.  pati°  brother-in-law,  husband's  brother  J  vi.152  ; 
putta"  son  &  brother  DhA  1.3 14  ;  sa°  with  the  brother 
Th.\  71  (Ap.  V.36). 

Bhana  (adj.)  [cp.  Vedic  bhanu  (m.)  shine,  light,  ray ; 
Epic  Sk.  also  "  sun  "]  light,  bright  red  J  111.62  (of  the 
kanavera  flower);  VvA  175  (°rai)si). 

Bhanumant  (adj.)  [(r.  bhanu,  ray  of  light  Vedic  bhanu- 
mant.  Ep.  of  Agni ;  also  Epic  Sk.  the  sun]  luminous, 
brilliant;  mostly  of  the  sun;  noni.  bhanuma  S  1.196  = 
Th  I,  1252  ;  Vv  64",  78'  (=adicca  \'vA  304);  J  1.183. 
ace.  bhanumar)  Sn  1016. — The  spelling  is  sometimes 
bhanuma. 

Bhayati  [cp.  Sk.  bhayate,  bhi,  pres.  redupl.  bibheti ;  Idg. 
*bhei,  cp.  Av.  bayente  they  frighten  ;  Lith.  bijotis  to 
be  afraid  ;  Ohg.  biben=Ger.  bebcn.  Nearest  synonym 
is  tras]  to  be  afraid.  Pres,  Ind.  !'■'  sg.  bhayami  Th  i, 
21  ;  Sn  p.  48;  2'"'  sg.  bhayasi  Th  2,  348;  i>'  pi.  bha- 
yama  J  11. 21  ;  3"'  pi.  bhayanto  Dh  129  ;  Imper.  2'"'  pi. 
bhayatha  Ud  51  ;  J  111.4  ;  Pot.  3"*  sg.  bhaye  Sn  964  & 
bhayeyya  Miln  208 ;  3""  pi.  bhayejryug  Miln  208.  — 
Aor.  i>'  sg.  bhayii)  DhA  1 11. 187;  2""'  sg.  bhayi  Th  i. 
764;  DhA  111.187;  ^  usually  in  Prohib.  ma  bhayi  do 
not  be  afraid  S  v.369 ;  J  1.222;  DhA  1.253.  —  grd. 
bhayitabba  Nd^  s.v.  kamaguna  B;  DhA  111.23. — 
Caus.  1.  bhayayate  to  frighten  J  in. 99  (C.  :  utraseti) ; 
Caus.  II.  bhayapeti  J  111.99,  -'"■  —  PP-  bhita. 

Bhayitabbaka  (adj.)  [grd.  of  bhayati -t- ka]  to  be  feared, 
dreadful,  fearful,  Sdhp  95. 

Bhara  [fr.  bhr,  Vedic  bhara  ;  cp.  bhara]  i .  anything  to 
carry,  a  load  Vin  111.278  (Bdhgh  ;  daru°  a  load  of  wood), 
bharat)  vahati  to  carry  a  load  A  1.84  ;  VvA  23.  — garu° 
a  heavy  load,  as  "  adj."  "  carrying  a  heavy  load  " 
J  V.439  (of  a  woman,  =  pregnant).  — bharatara  (adj.- 
compar.)  forming  a  heavier  load  Miln  155.  —  Cp.  ati°, 
sam".  —  2.  a  load,  cartload  (as  measure  of  quantity) 
Vv.A.  12  (satthi-sakata°-parimana) ;  PvA  102  (aneka"- 
parimana).  —  3.  (fig.)  a  difficult  thing,  a  burden  or  duty, 
i.  e.  a  charge,  business,  office,  task,  affair  Vism.  375; 
J  1.292;  11. 399  ;  IV. 427;  VI. 4  13;  DhA  1.6,  III.  Several 
bhara  or  great  tasks  are  mentioned  exemplifying  the 
meaning  of  "  gambhira  "  ct  "  duddasa  "  (saccani)  at 
VbfiA  141,  viz.  maha-samuddar)  manthetva  ojaya 
niharanai)  ;  Sineru-padato  valikaya  uddharanar)  ;  pab- 
batar)  pi|etva  rasassa  niharanar).  —  4.  (fig.)  in  meta- 
phors for  the  burden  of  (the  factors  of  renewed)  exist- 
ence (the  khandhas  and  similar  agents).  Esp.  in  phrase 
panna-bhara  "  one  whose  load  (or  burden)  has  been 
laid  down."  one  who  has  attained  Arahantship  M  1. 139  ; 
A  III. 84  ;  S  1.233;  Dh  402  (  =  ohita-khandha-bhara 
DhA  1V.168);  Sn  626  (same  expl"  at  SnA  467),  914 
(expl"'  as  patita-bhara,  oropita",  nikkhitta"  Nd^  334, 
where  3  bharas  in  this  sense  are  distinguished,  viz. 
khandha",  kilesa",  abhisankhara")  ;  Th  i,  1021.  So  at 
Vism  512  with  ref.  to  the  ariya-saccani,  viz.  bharo  = 
dukkha-saccar),  bhar'  adanar)  =samuda-saccar).  bhara- 
nikkhepanai)  =  nirodha-s.,  bhara-nikkhcpan'upaya  = 
magga-s.  —  On  bhara  in  similes  see  J.P.T.S.  1907,  118. 
-adana  the  taking  up  of  a  burden  S  111.25. 
-(m)oropana  "  laying  down  the  load,"  i.  e.  delivery  of  a 
pregnant  woman  Bu  11. 115.  -ttha  contained  in  a  load, 
carried  as  a  burden  Vin  111.47.  -nikkhepana  the  laying 
down  or  taking  off  of  a  burden  S  111.25.  -mocana 
delivery  (of  a  pregnant  woman)  J  1.19.  -vahin  "  burden- 
bearer,"  one  who  carries  an  office  or  has  a  responsibility 
A  IV.24  (said  of  a  bhikkhu).  -hara  load-carrier,  burden- 
bearer  S  III. 25  sq. 


Bharaka  (-°)  [fr.  bhara]  a  load,  only  in  cpd.  gadrabha°  a 
donkey-load  (of  goods)  J  11. 109;  DhA  1.123. 

Bharataka  [ir.  bhara]  "  the  petty  descendants  of  Bharata  " 
or  :  load-carrier,  porter  (?)  S  iv.  1 1 7  (indignantly  applied 
to  apprentices  and  other  low  class  young  men  who 
honour  the  Maha-Kaccana). 

Bharika  (adj.)  [fr.  bhara]  i.  loaded,  heavy  J  v.84,  477; 
Miln  261.  —  2.  full  of,  loaded  down  with  (-")  VvA  314 
(sineha°  hadaya).  —  3.  grievous,  serious,  sorrowful 
PvA  82  (hadaya).  —  4.  important  Miln  240,  311.  —  See 
bhariya. 

Bharin  (adj.)  [fr.  bhr,  cp.  bhara]  carrying,  wearing,  only  in 
cpd.  inala°  (mala^).  wearing  a  garland  (of  flowers) 
J  IV. 60,  82  ;  v. 45  ;  where  it  interchanges  with  "dharin 
(e.  g.  Vv.32^;  V.  1.  at  PvA  211;  cp.  BSk.  "dharin 
MVastu  1. 124).  —  f.  "bharini  J  in. 530  ;  VvA  12;  and 
"bhari  Th  i,  459  (as  v.  1.  ;  T.  "dhari).  See  also  under 
mala. 

Bhariya  (adj.)  [fr.  bhilra  Vedic  bharya  to  be  nourished  or 
supported ;  bharya  wife]  i .  heavy,  weighty,  grave, 
serious  ;  always  fig.  with  ref.  to  a  serious  offence,  either 
as  bhariyar)  papag  a  terrible  sin  PvA  195,  or  bh. 
kammag  a  grave  deed,  a  sin  DhA  1.298,  329 ;  11.56  ; 
III.  1 20  ;  VvA  68  ;  or  bhariyai)  alone  (as  nt.),  something 
grave,  a  sin  DhA  1.O4.  Similarly  with  ati"  as  atibha- 
riyar)  kammai)  a  very  grave  deed  DhA  1.70,  or  atibha- 
riyai)  id.  Dh.\  1.18O.  —  2.  bhariya  (=bharika.  f.  of 
bharaka)  carrying,  fetching,  bringing  J  vi.563  (phala°). 

Bharukacchaka  see  bharu". 

Bhava  [fr.  bhu,  cp.  Vedic  bhava]  i .  being,  becoming, 
condition,  nature  ;  very  rarely  by  itself  (only  in  later 
&  C.  literature,  as  e.  g.  J  1.295  thinai)  bhavo,  perhaps 
best  to  be  translated  as  "  women's  character,"  taking 
bhava  =  attabhava)  ;  usually  -°,  denoting  state  or  con- 
dition of,  and  representing  an  abstr.  der.  from  the  first 
part  of  the  cpd.  e.  g.  gadrabha^  '  asininity  '  J  11. 109. 
Thus  in  connection  with  (a)  adjectives  :  atthika"  state  of 
need  PvA  1 20  ;  iina°  depletion  SnA  463  ;  eki"  loneliness 
Vism  34  ;  sithilf  (for  sithila"  in  conn,  with  kr  & 
bhu)  relaxation  Vism  502.  —  (b)  adverbs.  upari°  high 
condition  M  1.45  ;  patu°  appearance  Sn  560 ;  vina° 
difference  Sn  588.  (c)  nouns  &  noun-derivations  :  atta" 
individual  state,  life,  character  Sn  388  (  =  cittaSnA374) ; 
asarana"  state  of  not  remembering  DhA  in.  121  ;sainana° 
condition  of  a  recluse  Sn  551.  —  (d)  forms  of  verbs: 
nibbatta"  fact  of  being  reborn  DhA  in.  121;  magg' 
arujha"  the  condition  of  having  started  on  one's  way 
VvA  64  ;  baddha°  that  he  was  bound ;  suhita"  that 
they  were  well  J  iv.2  7g.  The  translation  can  give 
either  a  full  sentence  with  "  that  it  was  "  etc.  (\'vA  64  : 
"  that  he  had  started  on  his  way"),  or  a  phrase  like 
"  the  fact  or  state  of,"  or  use  as  an  English  abstract 
noun  ending  in  -ness  (atthika-bhava  needfulness,  eki° 
loneliness),  -ion  (una°  depiction.  patu°  manifestation). 
-hood  (atta°  selfhood),  or  -ship  (s^mana°  recluseship).  — 
Similarly  in  Com.  style:  sampayutta-bhavo  (m.)  DhA 
111.94,  ^°^  *sampayuttattar)  (abstr.) ;  bhakutikassa 
bhavo  =bhakutiyar)  Vism  26;  sovacassassa  bhavo  = 
sovacassata  Kh.\  148  ;  mittassa  bh.  =  mattar)  KhA  248. 
Here  sometimes  bhava  for  bhava.  —  2.  (in  pregnant, 
specifically  Burfrf/i/s/if  sense)  cultivation  or  production 
by  thought,  mental  condition,  esp.  a  set  mental  condition 
(see  der.  bhavana).  Sometimes  (restricted  to  Vin  & 
J)  in  sense  "  thinking  of  someone."  i.  e.  affection,  love, 
sentiment.  —  (a)  in  comb°  khanti,  ditthi,  ruci,  bhava 
at  Vin  n.205  ;  in. 93  ;  1V.3,  4.  —  (b)  in  Jataka  passages: 
J  v. 237;  VI. 293  (bhavai)  karoti,  with  loc,  to  love). 
— abhava  (late,  only  in  C.  style)  not  being,  absence, 
want  Pv.\  25  ;  abl.  abhavato  through  not  being,  in  want 
of  PvA  9,  17.     — sabhava  (sva+ bhava)  see  sep. 


Bhavana 


127 


Bhiijsika 


Bhavana  (f.)  [fr.  bhaveti,  or  fr.  bhava  in  meaning  of 
bhava  2,  cp.  Class.  Sk.  bhavana]  producing,  dwelling  on 
something,  putting  one's  thoughts  to,  application, 
developing  by  means  of  thought  or  meditation,  culti- 
vation by  mind,  culture. —  See  on  term  Dhs  Irst  261 
(=-240);  Expos.  1.2 1 7  (=DhsA  163) ;  Cpd.  207  n.  2.  — 
Cp.  pari°,  vi°,  sam°.  —  Vin  1.294  (indriya^) ;  D  111.219 
(three:  kaya°,  citta",  panna"),  221,  225,  285,  291  ;  S  1.48  ; 
Dh  73,  301;  J  1. 196  (metta'');  111.45  (id.);  Ndi  143 
(saniSa°) ;  Nett  91  (samatha-vipassanar)) ;  Vbh  12, 
16  sq.,  199.  325;  Vism  130  (karana,  bhavana,  rak- 
khana  ;  here  bh.=  bringing  out.  keeping  in  existence), 
314  (karuna"),  317  (upekkha°)  ;  Miln  25  ("g  anuyuii- 
jati)  ;  Sdhp  15,  216,  233,  451. 

-inuyoga  application  to  meditation  Vbh  244,  249. 
-arama  joy  of  or  pleasure  in  self  culture  A  11.28.  -bala 
power  to  increase  the  effect  of  meditation,  power  of 
self-culture  A  1.52  ;  D  in. 2 13.  -maya  accomplished  by 
culture  practice  ;  brought  into  existence  by  practice  (of 
cultured  thought),  cp.  Cpd.  207.  D  in. 218,  219; 
Nett  8;  with  ddnamaya  &  siiimaya  at  It  19,  51  ;  Vbh 
135.  i-5-  -vidhana  arrangement  of  process  of  culture 
DhsA  i68  =  Vism  122. 

Bhavaniya  (adj.)  [grd.  fr.  bhaveti,  but  taken  by  Bdhgh  as 
grd.  formation  fr.  bhavana]  "  being  as  ought  to  be," 
to  be  cultivated,  to  be  respected,  in  a  self-composed 
state  (cp.  bhavitatta)  M  1.33  (garu-(-  ;  expl""  by  Bdhgh 
as  "  addha  'yam  ayasma  janar)  janati  passar) 
passati  ti  evai)  sambhavaniyo "  MA  156);  S  v.  164; 
A  III.  1 10;  Miln  373;  PvA  9.  See  also  under  mano- 
bhavaniya. 

Bhavita  [pp.  of  bhaveti]  developed,  made  to  become  by 
means  of  thought,  cultured,  well-balanced  A  v. 299 
(cittai)  parittar)  abhavitar)  ;  opp.  cittag  appamanai) 
subhavitai)) ;  Sn  516,  558. 

Bhavitatta'  (adj.)  [bha%-ita-|-  attan]  one  whose  attan 
(atman)  is  bhavita,  i.  e.  well  trained  or  composed. 
Attan  here  =  citta  (as  PvA  139),  thus  "self-composed, 
well-balanced"  A  iv.26  ;  Sn  277,  322,  1049;  Dh  106, 
107;  Nd''  142;  Nd^  475  B  (indriyani  bh.)  ;  J  11. 112 
('bhavanaya  when  the  training  of  thought  is  perfect)  ; 
Vism  185  ("bhavana,  adj.  one  of  well-trained  character), 
267,  400  (-)- bahuli-kata)  ;  DhA  1.122  (a°) ;  ThA  164 
(indriya°).     See  foil. 

Bhavitatta-  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  bhavita  =  *bhavitattvar)]  only 
neg.  a°  the  fact  of  not  developing  or  cultivating  S  iii.  153, 
475  ;  Pv  II. 9". 

Bhavin  (adj.)  [fr.  bhava.  Epic  Sk.  bhavin  "imminent"] 
"  having  a  being,"  going  to  be,  as  -°  in  avassa°  sure 
to  come  to  pass,  inevitable  J  1.19.  —  f.  bhavini  future 
VvA  314  (or  is  it  bhavaniya  ?  cp.  v.  1.  S  bhavaniya). 

Bhaveti  [Cans,  of  bhu,  bhavati]  to  beget,  produce,  in- 
crease, cultivate,  develop  (by  means  of  thought  & 
meditation).  The  Buddhist  equivalent  for  mind-work 
as  creative  in  idea,  M  1.293  ;  cp.B.Psv  p.  '32.  —  D  11.79  ; 
M  n.ri  (cattaro  sammappadhane  &  iddhipade) ;  S  1.188 
(cittar)  ekaggai)),Th  i,  83,  i66(ppr.  bhavayanto) ;  Sn34i 
(cittar)  ekaggar)),  507  (ppr.  bhavayar)),  558  (grd.  bhavc- 
tabba),  1130  (ppr.  bhavento  =  asevanto  bahull-karonto 
Nd*  476)  ;  Dh  87,  350,  370  ;  J  1.264  (mettar)),  415,  11.22  ; 
Nd*  s.  V.  kamaguna  (p.  121)  (where  grd.  in  sequence 
"sevitabba,  bhajitabba,  bhavetabba,  bahuli-katabba")  ; 
Pug  15,  DhA  III.  1 71;  Sdhp  48,  495.  —  Pass.  ppr. 
bhaviyamana  A  11.140;  KhA  148.  —  pp.  bhavita. 

Bhasa  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  bhasa]  -sakuna  a  bird  of  prey,  a 
vulture  [Abhp.  645,  1049]  ;  as  one  of  the  lucky  omens 
enum"'  (under  the  so-called  mangala-katha)  at  KhA 
118  (with  V.  1.  SS.  cata"  &  vaca°,  BB  caba°)  =  Nd' 
87  (on  Sn  790)  (T.  reads  vata°  ;  v.  1.  SS  vapa°,  BB 
chapa"). 


Bhasaka  (adj.)  (-")  [fr.  bha?]  speaking  DA  1.52  (avanna° 
uttering  words  of  blame). 

Bhasati*  [bha$;  Dhtp  317:  vacane;  Dhtm  407;  vacaya] 
to  speak,  to  say,  to  speak  to,  to  call  M  1.227,  Sn  158, 
562,  722  ;  Dh  I,  246,  258  ;  also  bhasate  Sn  452.  — Pot. 
bhasesrya  Vin  11.189  ;  Sn  431,  930  ;  SnA  468  (for  udiraye 
Dh  408)  ;  bhase  Dh  102  ;  Sn  4C0  ;  &  bhasaye  A  11.51  = 
J  v. 509  (with  gloss  katheyya  for  joteyya  =  bhaseyya). 
—  Aor.  abhasi  ^  in  iv.54  ;  PvA  6,  17,  23,  69;  1"  sg. 
also  abhasissai)  (Cond.)  Pv  1.6^  (  =  abhasii)  PvA  34); 
imper.  pres.  bhasa  Sn  346;  ppr.  bhasamane  A  11.51  = 
J  v. 509  ;  Sn  426  :  Dh  19  ;  J  iv.281  (perha'ps  better  with 
V.  1.  as  hasamana) ;  v.63  ;  &  bhasanto  Sn  543.  —  grd. 
bhasitabba  A  iv.iis;  Vism  127.  —  Med.  ind.  pres. 
2'^  sg.  bhasase  Vv  34^;  imper.  pres.  2°''  sg.  bhasassu 
M  11.199.  — An  apparent  ger.  form  abhasiya  It  59,  60 
(miccha  vacar)  abhasiya)  is  problematic.  It  may  be 
an  old  misspelling  for  ca  bhasiya,  as  a  positive  form  is 
required  by  the  sense.  The  w.  11.  however  do  not 
suggest  anything  else  but  abhasiya;  the  editor  of  It 
suggests  pa".  —  Cp.  anu,  0°,  samanu". 

Bhasati'  [bhas  Dhtm  467 :  dittiyar)]  to  shine,  shine  forth, 
fill  with  splendour  Sn  719  (2'"'  sg.  fut.  bhasihi  =  bha- 
sissasi  pakasessasi  SnA  499).  Usually  with  prep, 
prefix  pa°  (so  read  at  Pv  i.io*  for  ca  bh.).     Cp.  0°,  vi°. 

Bhasana  (nt.)  [fr.  bha;]  speaking,  speech  Dhtm  162  ; 
Sdhp  68. 

Bhasa  (f.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  bhasa]  speech,  language,  esp. 
vernacular,  dialect  J  iv.279  (manussa"  human  speech), 
392  (candala") ;  KhA  10 1  (saka-saka°-anurupa) ;  SnA 
397  (Milakkha°)  ;  DA  1.176  (Kirata-Yavanadi-Millak- 
khanai)  bhasa)  ;  MAi.i  (Sihaja°)  ;  VbhA  388  (18  dialects, 
of  which  5  are  mentioned ;  besides  the  Magadha- 
bhasa). 

Bhasita  [pp.  of  bhasati']  spoken,  said,  uttered  A  v.  194; 
Miln  28  ;  DhA  iv.93.  —  (nt.)  speech,  word  Dh  363  ; 
M  1.432.  Usually  as  su°  &  dub°  (both  adj.  &  nt.)  well 
&  badly  spoken,  or  good  &  bad  speech  Vin  1.172; 
M  11.250  ;  A  1. 102  ;  11. 51  {su°  ;  read  bhasita  for  basita)  ; 
VI. 226 ;  Sn  252,  451,  657;  J  IV. 247,  281  (su",  well 
spoken  or  good  words) ;  Pv  11.6^  (su°) ;  PvA  83  (dub°). 

Bhasitar  [n.  ag.  fr.  bhaf]  one  who  speaks,  utters  ;  a  speaker 
S  1. 1 56  ;  Pug  56  ;  SnA  549. 

Bhasin  (adj.)  (-°)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  bha§in]  speaking  A  1.102 
(dubbhasita-bhasin). 

Bhasora  (adj.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  bhasura  fr.  bhas]  bright, 
shining,  resplendent  ThA  139,  212  ;  VvA  12. 

Bhigsa  (adj.)  [=Vedic  bhisma,  of  which  there  are  4  P. 
forms,  viz.  the  metathetic  bhigsa,  the  shortened 
bhisma,  the  lengthened  bhesma,  and  the  contracted 
bhisa  (see  bhisana).  Cp.  also  Sk.-P.  bhlma ;  all 
of  bhn  terrible;  only  in  cpd.  °riipa  (nt.  &  adj.)  an 
awful  sight;  (of)  terrific  appearance,  terrible,  awful 
J  111.242.  339;  iv.271,  494. 

Bhiosana  &  °ka  (adj.)  [the  form  with  °ka  is  the  canonic 
form,  whereas  bhirjsana  is  younger.  See  bhigsa  on 
connections]  horrible,  dreadful,  awe-inspiring,  causing 
fear,  (a)  bhigsanaka  (usually  comb''  with  lomahagsa) 
D  ii.io6  =  A  IV. 311;  D  II. 157:  Vin  ni.8 ;  PvA  22; 
ThA  242  (''sabhava  =  bhimarupa) ;  J  v. 43.  —  (b)  bhig- 
sana  Pv  iv.3^  (-f  lomahagsa). 

Bhiijsa  (f.)  [fr.  bhigsa]  terror,  fright;  maha-bhigsa  (adj.) 
inspiring  great  terror  D  11.259.     Cp.  bhisma. 

BhiQSika  (f  )  [fr.  bhigsa]  frightful  thing,  terror,  terrifying 
omen  Mhvs  12,  12  (vividha  bhiijsika  kari  he  brought 
divers  terrors  topass) 


Bhikkhaka 


128 


Bhittika 


Bhikkhaka  [It.  bhikkhu,  Cp.  Epic  Sk.  bhikbuka  &  f. 
bhiksuki]  a  beggar,  mendicant  S  1.182  (bh.  brahmana)  ; 
J  vi.'59  (v.  1.  BB.  °uka) ;  VbhA  327. 

Bhikkhati  [cp.  Vedic  bhiksate,  old  desid.  to  bhaj ;  def. 
Dhtp   13  "  yacane "]  to  beg  alms,   to  beg,  to  ask  for 

5  1. 176,  182  (so  read  for  T.  bhikkhavo) ;  Dh  266; 
VbhA  327.  —  ppr.  med.  bhikkhamana  Th  2,  123. 

Bhikkha  (f)  [cp.  Epic  &  Class.  Sk.  bhaiksa  of  bhikf,  adj. 

6  nt.]  begged  food,  alms,  alms-begging ;  food  Vin 
IV.94  ;  Cp  I.I*;  Vv  70*  (ekaha  bh.  food  for  one  day); 
Miln  16  ;  PvA  3,  75,  131  (katacchu") ;  bhikkhaya  carati 
to  go  out  begging  food  [cp.  Sk.  bhaiksai)  carati]  J  ni.82  ; 
V.75  ;  PvA  51  &  passim.  — subhikkha  (nt.)  abundance 
of  food  D  I.I  I.  dubbhikkha  (nt.)  (&  °a  f.)  scantiness 
of  alms,  famine,  scarcity  of  food,  adj.  famine-stricken 
(cp.  Sk.  durbhiksag)  Vin  11. 175;  in. 87  (adj.);  iv.23 
(adj.);  S  IV. 323,  324  (dvihitikai)) ;  A  1.160;  111.41; 
J  II. 149,  367  ;  V.193  ;  VI.487  ;  Cp  1.33  (adj.) ;  Vism  415 
("pijita),  512  (f.  in  simile);  KhA  218;  DhA  1.169; 
11.153  {Q.  "i^a?  fbhaya). 

-ahara  food  received  by  a  mendicant  J  1.237  (=bhik- 
khu-ahara?).  -cariya  going  about  for  alms,  begging 
round  Sn  700;  PvA  146.  -cara  =  °cariya  Mhbv  28. 
-paiiiiatti  declaration  of  alms,  announcement  that 
food  is  to  be  given  to  the  Sangha,  a  dedication  of  food 
Vin  1309. 

Bhikkhu  [cp.  later  Sk.  bhiksu,  fr.  bhikf]  an  almsman,  a 
mendicant,  a  Buddhist  monk  or  priest,  a  bhikkhu. — 
nom.  sg.  bhikkhu  freq.  passim ;  Vin  111.40  (vuddha- 
pabbajita) ;  A  1.78  (thera  bh.,  ah  elder  bh.  ;  and  nava 
bh.  a  young  bh.)  ;  111.299  (id.)  ;  iv.25  (id.)  ;  Sn  276. '360, 
411  sq.,  915  sq.,  1041,  1 104  ;  Dh  31,  266  sq.,  364  sq,, 
378;  Vv  80^:  ace.  bhikkhui]  Vin  in. 174;  Dh  362,  & 
bhikkhunar)  Sn  87,  88,  513;  gen.  dat.  bhikkhuno 
A  1.274  ;  Sn  221,  810,  961  ;  Dh  373  ;  Pv  mqI";  &  bhik- 
khussa  A  1.230  ;  Vin  in.  175  ;  instr.  bhikkhuna  Sn  389. 
pi.  nom.  bhikkhu  Vin  11. 150;  in. 175;  D  in. 123;  Vism 
152  (in  sim.)  ;  VbhA  305  (compared  with  amacca- 
putta)  &  bhikkhavo  Sn  384,  573  ;  Dh  243,  283  ;  ace. 
bhikkhu  Sn  p.  78  ;  M  1.84  ;  Vv  22"';  &  bhikkhavo  Sn 
384,  573  ;  gen.  dat.  bhikkhunai)  Vin  in. 285  ;  D  111.264  ; 
Sn  1015  ;  Pv  11. i'  ;  &  bhikkhunar|  S  1.190  ;  Th  l,  1231  ; 
instr.  bhikkhuhi  Vin  in. 175;  loc.  bhikkhusu  A  iv.25, 
&  bhikkhusu  Th  i,  241,  1207;  Dh  73  ;  voc.  bhikkhave 
(a  MagadhI  form  of  nom.  bhikkhavah)  Vin  in.  175  ;  Sn 
p.  78  ;  VvA  127  ;  PvA  8,  39,  166  ;  &  bhikkhavo  Sn  280, 

385- 

There  are  several  allegorical  etymologies  (definitions) 
of  the  word  bhikkhu,  which  occur  frequently  in  the 
commentaries.  All  are  fanciful  interpretations  of  the 
idea  of  what  a  bhikkhu  is  or  should  be,  and  these 
qualities  were  sought  and  found  in  the  word  itself. 
Thus  we  mention  here  the  foil,  (a)  bhikkhu  =bhinna- 
kilesa  ("  one  who  has  broken  the  stains  "  i.  e.  of  bad 
character)  VbhA  328;  VvA  29.  114,  310;  PvA  51. — 
(b)  Another  more  explicit  expl"  is  "  sattannar)  dham- 
manai)  bhinnatta  bhikkhu  "  (because  of  the  breaking 
or  destroying  of  7  things,  viz.  the  7  bad  qualities, 
leading  to  rebirth,  consisting  of  sakkayaditthi,  vici- 
kiccha,  silabbata-paramasa,  raga,  dosa,  moha,  mana). 
This  def.  at  Nd^  70=Nd2  477a.  _  (c)  Whereas  in 
a  &  b  the  first  syllable  6A((-kkhu)  i$  referred  to 
bhid,  in  this  def.  it  is  referred  to  bhi  (to  fear),  with 
the  further  reference  of  (bh-)  iAAA(u)  to  ikf  (to  see), 
and,  bhikkhu  defined  as  "  sagsare  bhayai)  ikkhati 
ti  bh."  Vism  3,  16  (sagsare  bhayag  ikkhanataya  va 
bhinna-pata-dharaditaya  va).  —  A  very  comprehensive 
def.  of  the  term  is  found  at  Vbh  245-246,  where 
bhikkhu-ship  is  established  on  the  ground  of  18  quali- 
ties (beginning  with  samannaya  bhikkhu,  patiniiaya 
bh.,  bhikkhati  ti  bh.,  bhikkhako  ti  bh.,  bhikkhacariyag 
ajjhupagato  ti  bh.,  bhinna-pafa-dharo  ti  bh..  bhindati 
papake  dhamrae  ti  bh.,  bhinnatta  papakana;)  dham- 


manan  ti  bh.  etc.  etc.).  —  This  passage  is  expl^  in 
detail  at  VbhA  327,  328.  —  Two  kinds  of  bhikkhus 
are  distinguished  at  Ps  1.176;  Nd'  465=Nd2  477''.  viz. 
kalyana[-ka-]puthujjana  (a  layman  of  good  character) 
and  sekkha  (one  in  training),  for  which  latter  the  term 
patilinacara  (one  who  lives  in  elimination,  i.  e.  in 
keeping  away  from  the  dangers  of  worldly  life)  is 
given  at  Nd'  130  (on  Sn  810). 

-gatika  a  person  who  associates  with  the  bhikkhus 
(in  the  Vihara)  Vin  1.148.  -bhava  state  of  being  a 
monk,  monkhood,  bhikkhuship  D  1.176;  Sn  p.  102; 
-sangha  the  community  of  bhikkhus,  the  Order  of 
friars  D  in. 208 ;  Sn  403,  1015;  Sn  p.  loi.  102;  Miln 
2og ;  PvA  19  sq.  &  passim. 

Bhikkhllka  (-")  (adj.)  [fr.  bhikkhu]  belonging  to  a  Buddhist 
mendicant,  a  bhikkhu-,  a  monk's,  or  of  monks,  in 
£a^  with  monks,  inhabited  by  bhikkhus  Vin  iv.307,  308  ; 
opp.  a°  without  bhikkhus,  ibid. 

Bhikkhuni  (f.)  [fr.  bhikkhu,  cp.  BSk.  bhiksuni,  but 
classical  Sk.  bhiksuki]  an  almswoman,  a  female  mendi- 
cant, a  Buddhist  nun  D  in. 123  sq..  148.  168  sq..  264; 
Vin  IV. 224  sq.,  258  sq.  ("sangha);  S  1.128;  11. 215  sq.. 
IV. 159  sq.  ;  A  1.88,  113,  279;  11.132  ("parisa),  144; 
III.  109  ;  IV. 75  ;  Miln  28  ;  VbhA  498  (dahara",  story  of) ; 
VvA  77. 

Bhinka  [cp.  Vedic  bhrnga  large  bee]  the  young  of  an 
animal,  esp.  of  an  elephant,  in  its  property  of  being 
dirty  (cp.  pigs)  Vin  ii.20i=S  11.269  (bhinka-cchapa)  ; 
J  v. 418  (with  ref.  to  young  cats:  "  maha-bijara  nela- 
mandalar)  vuccati  taruna  bhinka-cchapa-mandalar)," 
T.  "cchaca",  vv.  11.  bhiiijaka-cchaca ;  taruna-bhiga 
-cchapa  ;  bhinga-cchaja). 

Bhinkara*  (&  °gara)  [cp.  late  Sk.  bhyngara]  a  water 
jar,  a  (nearly  always  golden)  vase,  ceremonial  vessel 
(in  donations)  Vin  1.39  (sovanna-maya)  ;  D  11. 172; 
A  IV. 210=214  (T.  °gara.  v.  1.  °kara) ;  Cp.  1.3*;  J  1.85. 
93;  II. 371  ;  III.  10  (suvanna") ;  Dpvs  xi.32  ;  PvA  75; 
KhA  175  (suvanna°  ;  v.  1.  BB  °gara).  Sdhp  513  (sonija°). 

Bhinkara^  [?]  cheers,  cries  of  delight  (?)  Bu  1.35  (-1-  sadhu 
kara). 

Bhinkara^  [cp.  Sk.  bhrnga  bee,  bhfngaka  &  bhrnga-raja] 
a  bird  :  Lanius  caerulescens  J  v.416. 

Bhijjati  [Pass,  of  bhindati,  cp.  Sk.  bhidyate]  to  be  broken, 
to  be  destroyed;  to  break  (instr);  pres.  bhijjati  Dh 
148,  ppr.  bhijjamana :  see  phrase  abhijjamane  udake 
under  abhijj°,  with  which  cp.  phrase  abhejjantya 
pathavya  J  vi.508,  which  is  difficult  to  explain  (not 
breaking  ?  for  abhijjanti  after  abhejja  &  abhedi,  and 
*abhijjanto  for  abhijjamana,  intrs.  ?).  imper.  bhij- 
jatu  Th  I,  312.  —  praet.  2°''  pi.  bhijjittha  J  1.468; 
aor.  abhedi  Ud  93  (abhedi  kayo).  —  fut.  bhijjhissati 
DA  1.266  ;  grd.  bhijjitabba  J  in. 56  ;  on  grd.  °bhijja 
see  pabhindati;  grd.  bhejja  in  abhejja  not  to  be  broken 
(q.  v.). 

Bhijjana  (nt.)  [fr.  bhijjati]  breaking  up.  splitting,  perish- 
ing;  destruction  J  1.392;  v.284  ;  vi.ii;  DhA  1.257 
(kanna  bhijjan'  akara-patta) ;  ThA  43  (bhijjana-sabhava 
of  perishable  nature  ;  expl"  of  bhidura  Th  2,  35) ;  PvA 
41  ("dharama  destructible,  of  sankhara).  —  Der.  a- 
bhijjanaka  see  sep. 

Bhitti  (f.)  [fr.  bhid,  cp.  *Sk.  bhitta  fragment,  &  Class. 
Sk.  bhittiwall]  a  wall  Vin  1.48  ;  D  11.85  ;Sn.i03  ;  iv.183  ; 
v. 218;  J  1. 491  ;  Vism  354=VbhA  58  (in  comparison); 
ThA  258;  VvA  42,   160.  271.  302  ;  PvA  24. 

-khila  a  hin  (peg)  in  the  wall  Vin  11. 114.  152.  -pada 
the  support  or  lower  part  of  a  wall  J  iv.318. 

Bhittika  (adj.)  [fr.  bhitti]  having  a  waH  or  walls  J  iv.318 
(nala  °a  pa^nasala) ;  vi.io  (catu°  with  4  walls). 


Bhidura 


129 


Bhukka 


Bhidura   (adj.)    [fr.    bhid]    fragile,    perishable,    transitory 
Th  2,  35  (  =  bhijjana-sabhava  ThA  43). 

Bhindati  [bhid,  Sk.  bhinatti ;  cp.  Lat.  findo  to  split,  Goth. 
beitan  =  Ger.  beissen.  Def.  at  Dhtp  381,  405  by 
"  vidarane "  i.  e.  splitting]  to  split,  break,  sever,  [ 
destroy,  ruin.  In  two  bases  :  *bhid  (with  der.  *bhed)  & 
♦bhind.  —  (a)  *bhid :  aor.  3'"  sg.  abhida  (  =  Sk. 
abhidat)  D  11. 107;  J  in. 29  (see  also  under  abhida); 
abbhida  J  1247;  11. 163.  164.  —  fut.  bhecchati  (Sk. 
bhetsyati)  A  1.8.  —  ger.  bhetva  (Sk.  bhittva)  Th  i.  753  ; 
Sn  62  (v.  1.  BB  bhitva).  —  grd.  bhejja :  only  neg. 
abhejja  (q.  v.).  See  also  der.  bheda,  bhedana.  —  pp. 
bhinna  &  Pass,  bhijjati.  —  (b)  *bhind :  pres.  bhindati 
Nd'  503  ;  DhA  1.125  (kathar)  bh.  to  break  a  promise)  ; 
Sdhp  47.  —  ppr.  bhindanto  Mhvs  5,  185.  —  Pot. 
bhinde  Vism  36  (silasar)  varan).  —  fut.  bhindissati 
Vin  II.  198.  —  aor.  bhindi  J  1467  (mitta-bhavar)),  cS: 
abhindi  A  iv.312  (atta-sambhavai)).  —  ger.  bhinditva 
J  1.425.  490  ;  PvA  12  ;  also  in  phrase  indriyani  bhinditva 
breaking  in  one's  senses,  i.  e.  mastering,  controlling 
them  J  11.274;  IV.104.  114,  190. — Caus.  I.  bhedeti : 
see  vi°.  Caus.  II.  bhindapeti  to  cause  to  be  broken 
J  1.290  (silar)) ;  vi.345  (pokkharanir))  and  bhedapeti 
Vin  III. 42.  —  See  also  bhindana. 

Bhindana  (adj.)  [fr.  bhindati]  breaking  up,  brittle,  falling 
into  ruin  S  1.131  (kaya). 

Bhindivala  [Non-Aryan  ;  Epic  Sk.  bhindipala  spear,  but 
cp  .Prk  bhindi-mala  &  °vala,  Pischel,  Prk.  Gr.  §  248  ; 
see  also  Geiger,  P.Qr.  §  38]  a  sort  of  spear  J  vi.105,  248  ; 
Abhp  394. 

Bhinna  [pp-  of  bhindati]  I.  broken,  broken  up  (lit.  &  fig.) 
Sn  770  (nava) ;  J  1.98  (abhinna  magga  an  unbroken 
path);  III. 167  (uda-kumbha) ;  PvA  72  ("sarira-cchavi). 
—  2.  (fig.)  split,  fallen  into  dissension,  not  agreeing 
D  III.  1 17  =  2  10,  171.  —  Usually  in  cpds.,  &  often  to  be 
translated  by  prep,  "without,"  e.g.  bhinnahirottappa 
without  shame.  —  Cp.  sam°. 

-ajiva  without  subsistence,  one  who  has  little 
means  to  live  on,  one  who  leads  a  poor  mode  of  living 
Miln  229  sq.  (opp.  parisuddh'  ajiva) ;  Vism  306. 
-nava  ship-wrecked  J  iv.159.  -pata  a  torn  cloth,  in 
cpd.  "dhara  "  wearing  a  patchwork  cloth,"  i.  e.  a 
bhikkhu  (see  also  s.  v.  bhikkhu)  Th  i,  1092.  -plava 
ship-wrecked  J  in.  158.  -manta  disobeying  (i.  e. 
breaking)  a  counsel  J  vi.437.  -sira  with  a  broken 
head  J  iv.251.  -sima  (f.)  one  who  has  broken  the 
bounds  (of  decency)  Miln  122.  -sila  one  who  has 
broken  the  norm  of  good  conduct  Vism  36.  -hirottappa 
without  shame,  shameless  J  1.207. 

Bhinnatta  (nt.)  [fr.  bhinna]  state  of  being  broken  or 
destroyed,  destruction  A  iv.144. 

Bhiyyo  (Bhiyo,  Bhlyyo)  [Vedic  bhuyas,  compar.  form  fr. 
bhn,  functioning  as  compar.  to  bhuri.  On  relation  Sk. 
bhuyah  :  P.  bhiyyo  cp.  Sk.  jugupsate :  P.  jigucchati] 
I.  (adj.)  more  Sn  61  (dukkham  ettha  bhiyyo),  584  (id), 
306  (bh.  tanha  pavaddhatha)  ;  Dh  313  (bh.  rajan 
akirate),  349  (bh.  tanha  pavaddhati).  —  2.  (adv.)  in  a 
higher  degree,  more,  repeatedly,  further  S  1.108  (appar) 
va  bhiyo  less  or  more) ;  Sn  434  (bh.  cittar)  pasidati) ; 
Dh  18  (bh.  nandati=ativiya  n.  C.) ;  Miln  40.  —  See 
also  bhiyyoso,  yebhuyyena. 

-kamyata  desire  for  more,  greed  Vin  11.214.  -bhava 
getting  more,  increase,  multiplication  D  in. 221;  Vin 
III. 45  ;  S  v. 9,  198,  244  ;  A  i.gS  ;  v. 70  ;  VbhA  289. 

Bhiyyoso  (adv.)  [abl.  formation  fr.  bhiyyo  i]  still  more, 
more  and  more,  only  in  cpd.  °mattaya  [cp.  BSk.  bhu- 
yasya  raatraya  MVastu  11.345  ;  Divy  263  &  passim] 
exceedingly,  abundantly  A  i.i24=Pug  30  (expl*  at 
PugA  212  by  "  bhiyyoso-mattaya  uddhumayana-bhavo 
datthabbo");  J  1.61  ;  PvA  50. 


Bhisa  (nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  bisa,  with  bh  for  b:  see  Geiger, 
P.Gr.  §  40  I  a]  the  sprout  (fr.  the  root)  of  a  lotus, 
the  lotus  fibres,  lotus  plant  S  1.204;  11.268;  J  i.ico; 
IV.308  ; 

-puppha  the  lotus  flower  Sn  2  (  =  paduma-puppha 
SnA  16).  -mujala  fibres  &  stalk  of  the  lotus  J  v  39  ; 
Vism  361. 

Bhisakka  [cp.  Vedic  bhisaj  physician,  P.  bhesajja  medicine 
&  see  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  63']  a  physician  M  1.429  ;  A  in. 238  ; 
IV. 340  ;  It  10 1  ;  Miln  169,  215,  229,  247  sq.,  302  ;  Vism 
598  (in  simile) ;  DA  1.67,  255. 

Bhisi'  (f.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  brsi  &  brsi,  with  bh  for  b,  as  in 
Prk.  bhisi,  cp.  Pischel,  Prk.  Gr.  §  209]  a  bolster,  cushion, 
pad,  roll  Vin  1.287  sq.  (civara°  a  robe  rolled  up)  ;  11.150, 
170;  III. 90  ;  IV. 279.  Five  kinds  are  allowed  in  a 
Vihara,  viz.  unna-bhisi,  cola",  vaka°,  tinu°,  panna°,  i.  e. 
bolsters  stuffed  with  wool,  cotton-cloth,  bark,  grass, 
or  talipot  leaves,  Vin  11.150=  VbhA  365  (tina°). 

-bimbohana  bolster  &  pillow  Vin  1.47;  n.208  ;  DhA 
1. 416  ;  VbhA  365. 

Bhisi'  [etym.  ?]  a  raft  Sn  21.  —  Andersen,  Pali  Reader. 
Glossary  s.  v.  identifies  it  with  bhisi'  and  asks  :  "  Could 
it  also  mean  a  sort  of  cushion,  made  of  twisted  grass, 
used  instead  of  a  swimming  girdle  ?" 

Bhisika  (f)  [fr.  bhisi']  a  small  bolster  Vin  11. 148  (vata- 
pana°  a  roll  to  keep  out  draughts) ;  KhA  50  (tapasa", 
v.  1.  K''  kapala-bhitti,  see  Appendix  to  Indexes  on  Sutta 
Nipata  &  Pj.). 

Bhisma  (f)  [  =  bhir)sa]  terror,  fright  D  11. 261  (°kaya  adj. 
terrific). 

Bhita  [pp.  of  bhayati]  frightened,  terrified,  afraid  Dh  310  ; 
J  1. 168  (niraya-bhaya") ;  n.iio  (marana-bhaya"),  129; 
IV. 141  (-l-tasita);  PvA  154,  280  (-|-tasita).     Cp.  sam°. 

Bhibbaccha  see  bibhaccha. 

Bhima  (adj.)  [fr.  bhi,  cp.  Vedic  bhima]  dreadfuj,  horrible, 
cruel,  awful  J  iv.26  ;  Miln  275. 

-kaya  of  horrible  body,  terrific  J  v.  165.  -rupa  of 
terrifying  appearance  Th  2,  353.  -sena  having  a 
terrifying  army  J  iv.26  ;  vi.201.  Also  Np.  of  one  of 
the  5  sons  of  King  Pandu  J  v. 426 ;  Vism  233. 

Bhimala  (adj.)  [fr.  bhima]  terrifying,  horrible,  awful 
J  V.43  (T.  bhimula,  but  read  bhimala;  C.  expl*  by 
bhii)sanaka-mahasadda) . 

Bhirati  Pass,  to  bharati,  only  in  cpd.  ppr.  anubhiramana 
M  III.  123  (chatta  :  being  brought  up  or  :  carried  behind). 
Neumann,  M.  trsl.'  in. 248  translates  "fiber  ihm 
schwebt,"  &  proposes  reading  (on  p.  563)  anu-hira- 
mana  (fr.  hf).  This  reading  is  to  be  preferred,  &  is  also 
found  at  D  n.15. 

Bhirn  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  bhi;  cp.  Vedic  bhiru]  i.  fearful,  i.  e. 
having  fear,  timid,  afraid,  shy,  cowardly  Sdhp  207 
(dukkha°)  ;  usually  in  neg.  abhini  not  afraid,  without 
fear,  comb""  with  anutrasin :  see  utrasin.  —  2.  fearful, 
i.  e.  causing  fear,  awful,  dreadful,  terrible  Pv  11.4' 
("dassana  terrible  to  look  at).  —  3.  (m.)  fear,  cowardice 
Sn  437  (  =  utrasa  SnA  390). 

-ttana  refuge  for  the  fearful,  adj.  one  who  protects, 
those  who  are  in  fear  A  n.  1 74  ;  It  25  ;  Sdhp  300. 

Bhlroka  (adj.)  [fr.  bhiru]  afraid,  shy,  cowardly,  shunning 
(-°)  Vism  7  (papa°),  645  (jivitu-kama  bniruka-purisa). 

Bhisana  (adj.)  =bhir)sana  (q.  v.)  Pv  IV.3'  (v.  1.  in  PvA 
251),  expl''  by  bhayajanana  PvA  251,  where  C.  reading 
also  bhisana. 

Bhokka  (adj.)  [fr.  onomat.  root  *bhakk,  dialectical,  cp. 
Prk.   bhukkai    to  bark,   bhukkiya  barking,   bbukkana 


Bhunkarana 


130 


Bhumma 


dog  (Pischel,  Prk.  Gr.  §  209) ;  the  root  bhnkk  (bnkk)  is 
given  by  Hemacandra  4,  98  in  meaning  "  garjati  " 
(see  P.  gajjati),  cp.  also  Prk.  bukkana  crow]  barking,  n. 
a  barker,  i.  e.  dog ;  only  in  redupl.  intens.  formation 
bho-bhu-kka  (cp.  E.  bow-wow),  lit.  bhu-bhu-maker 
( :  kka  fr.  kr  ?)  J  VI. 354  (C.  :  bhun-karana).  See  also 
bhussati. 

Bhunkarana  (adj.-nt.)  [bhu+kr,  see  bhukka]  making 
"  bhu,"'i.  e.  bow-wow,  barking  J  vi.355  ("sunakha)  ; 
V.  1.  bhu-bhukka-sadda-karana. 

Bhacca  (adj.)  [ger.  of  bhu  in  composition,  corresponding 
to  *bhutya>  *bhutya,  like  pecca  (*pretya)  fr.  pra+  i. 
In  function  equal  to  bhuta]  only  in  cpd.  yatha-bhuccag 
(nt.  adv.)  as  it  is,  that  which  really  is,  really  (=yatha 
bhutar))  Th  2,  143.     See  under  yatha. 

Bhaja'  (m.  &  nt.)  [cp.  Epic  &  Class.  Sk.  bhuja  m.  & 
bhuja  ;  bhuj,  bhujate  to  bend,  lit.  "  the  bender  "  ;  the 
root  is  expl""  by  kotilya  (kotilla)  at  Dhtp  470  (Dhtm 
521).  See  also  bhuja^.  Idg.  *bheng,  fr.  which  also 
Lat.  fugio  to  flee=Gr.  <pn'iyM.  Lat.  fuga  flight  =  Sk. 
bhoga  ring.  Ohg.  bouc  ;  Goth,  biugan  to  bend  =  Ger. 
beugen  &  biegen  ;  Ohg.  bogo  =  E.  bow.  Semantically 
cp.  Lat.  lacertus  the  arm,  i.  e.  the  bend,  fr.  *leq  to  bend, 
to  which  P.  lagula  a  club  (q.  v.  for  etym.),  with  which 
cp.  Lat.  lacerta  =  lizard,  similar  in  connotation  to  P. 
bhujaga  snake]  the  arm  Sn  48  (expH  by  iSfd^  478  as 
hattha,  hand);  682  (pi.  bhujani) ;  J  v.91.  309;  vi.64  ; 
Bu  1.36  ;  Vv  64I8. 

Bhaja^  [fr.  bhufijati^]  clean,  pure,  bright,  beautiful 
J  VI. 88  ("dassana  beautiful  to  look  at;  C.  expl"''  by 
kalyana  dassana). 

Bhuja'  (adj.)  [fr.  bhuj  to  bend]  bending,  crooked,  in 
bhuja-latthi  betel-pepper  tree  _J  vi.456  (C. :  bhujanga- 
lata,  perhaps  identical  with  bhujaka  ?),  also  in  cpd. 
bhuja-ga  going  crooked,  i.  e.  snake  MUn  420  (bhujag- 
inda  king  of  snakes,  the  cobra);  Davs.  2,  17;  also  as 
bhujanga  Davs  2,  56,  &  in  der.  bhujanga-lata  "  snake- 
creeper,"  i.  e.  name  of  the  betel-pepper  J  vi.457  ;  and 
bhujangama  S  1.69.  —  Cp.  bhogin^. 

Bhujaka  [fr.  bhuj,  as  in  bhunjati^ ;  or  does  it  belong  to 
bhuja'  and  equal  to  bhuja-latthi  ?]  a  fragrant  tree, 
growing  (according  to  Dhpala)  only  in  the  Gandha- 
madana  grove  of  the  Devaloka  Vv  35^;  VvA  162. 

Bhnjissa  [cp.  BSk.  bhujisya  Divy  302.  according  to 
Mhvyut  §  84  meaning  "  clean  "  ;  thus  fr.  bhuj  (see 
bhuiijati-)  to  purify,  sort  out]  i.  (n.  m.)  a  freed  slave, 
freeman  ;  a  servant  as  distinguished  from  a  slave  Vin 
1.93;  J  11.313;  PvA  112.  — bhujissar)  karoti  to  grant 
freedom  to  a  slave  J  v. 313;  vi.389,  546;  DhA  i.ig; 
ThA  2CO.  —  f.  bhujissa  Vin  11. 2  71  (in  same  sequence 
as  bhujissa  at  Vin  1.93).  —  2.  (adj.)  freeing  fr.  slavery, 
productive  of  freedom  D  11.80  (cp.  Dial.  11.80) ;  in. 245  ; 
S  11.70;  iv.272  ;  A  III. 36,  132,  213;  Vism  222  (with 
exegesis).     Cp.  bhoja  &  bhojaka. 

-bhava   state    of   being   freed    fr.    slavery,    freedom 
ThA  2GO. 

Bhuiijaka  (adj.)  [fr.  bhunjati']  eating,  one  who  eats  or 
enjoys,  in  "sammuti  definition  of  "  eater,"  speaking  of 
an  eater,  declaration  or  statement  of  eating  VbhA  164. 

Bhnnjati'  [bhuj  to  Lat.  fruor,  frux=E.  fruit,  frugal  etc.  ; 
Goth.  brukjan=As.  brukan  =  Ger.  brauchen.  The 
Dhtp  379  (&  Dhtm  613)  expl'^''  bhuj  by  "  palan' 
ajjhoharesu,"  i.  e.  eating  &  drinking  for  the  purpose  of 
living]  to  eat  (in  general),  to  enjoy,  make  use  of,  take 
advantage  of,  use  Sn  102,  24"^,  259,  619 ;  Dh  324  ; 
Pug  55.  Pot.  bhufijeyya  Sn  4C0 ;  Dh  308,  2""'  pi. 
bhuiijetha  Dh  70;  Mhvs  25,  113.  Imper.  2°<'  med. 
bhuAjassa  S  v.53  ;  3"'  act.  bhuiijatu  S  1.141  ;  Sn  479; 
bhunjassu  Sn  421  ;  ppr.  bhuiijanto  J  111.277  :  bhufija- 


tnana  Th  i.  12  ;  Sn  240.  Put.  i"  sg.  bhokkhar)  [Sk. 
bhoksyami]  J  iv.117.  Aor.  1^'  sg.  bhufijig  Miln  47; 
3'"*  sg.  bhuiiji  J  iv.370  ;  3"*  pi.  abhunjigsu  Th  i,  922  ; 
abhufijisut)  Mhvs  7,  25.  Ger.  bhutva  J  111.53  (  =  bhun 
jitva  C.)  ;  DhA  1.182  ;  bhutvana  Sn  128.  Grd. 
bhunjitabba  Mhvs  5,  127.  Inf.  bhottufi :  see  ava°. — 
pp.  bhutta. — Cans,  bhojeti  (q.  v.).  Cp.  bhoga, 
bhojana.  bhojanlya.  bhojja  ;  also  Desid.  pp.  bubbhuk- 
khita ;  &  abhunjati. 

Bhunjati^  [bhuj  to  purify,  cleanse,  sift,  not  given  in  this 
meaning  by  the  Dhatupatha.  Cp.  Av.  buxti  purifica- 
tion buj  to  clean,  also  Lat.  fungor  (to  get  through  or 
rid  of,  cp.  E.  function),  Goth,  us-baugjan  to  sweep;  P. 
paribhuiijati  2.  paribhojaniya  &  vinibbhujati.  See 
Kern,  Toev.  p.  104,  s.  v.  bhujissa]  to  clean,  purify, 
cleanse :  see  bhuja^  and  bhujissa,  also  bhoja  &  bhojaka. 

Bhunjana  (nt.)  [fr.  bhufijati']  taking  food,  act  of  eating, 
feasting  J  iv.371  (°karana) ;  PvA  184. 
-kala  meal-time  DhA  1.346. 

Bhutta  [pp.  of  bhuiijati';  Sk.  bhukta]  i.  (Pass.)  eaten, 
being  eaten  Sn  p.  15  ;  Dh  31  8  ;  impers.  eating  Vin  iv.82 
(bhuttar)  hoti).  Also  °geha  eating  house  J  v.290,  and 
in  phrase  yatha-bhuttag  bhuiijatha  "  eat  according  to 
eating,"  i.  e.  as  ought  to  be  eaten,  eating  in  moderation 
D  II. 173  (where  Rh.  D.,  Dial.  11.203.  trsP  "ye  shall 
eat  as  ye  have  eaten  ")  =111.62,  63  (where  Rh.  D.,  Dial. 
III. 64  trsl*  "  enjoy  your  possessions  as  you  have  been 
wont  to  do";  see  note  ibid.).  We  should  favour  a 
translation  in  the  first  sense.   — dubbhuttar),  indigestible. 

—  2.  (Med.  cp.  bhuttar)  having  eaten,  one  who  has 
eaten  MUn  370  (sace  bhutto  bhaveyy'  ahag) ;  also  in 
phrase  bhutta-patar-asa  after  having  eaten  breakfast 
J  11.273  ;  DhA  IV. 226. 

-dvasesa  the  remainder  of  a  meal  Vin  11. 2 16. 

Bhuttar  [n.  ag.  fr.  bhuj,  cp.  Sk.  bhoktr  already  Vedic  & 
Epic]  one  who  eats  or  has  eaten,  or  enjoys  (cp.  bhutta 
2)  J  V.465  (ahag  bhutta  bhakkhag  ras'  uttamag). 

Bhuttavant  (adj.)  [bhutta-f  vant]  having  eaten,  one  who 
has  eaten  J  v.  170  ( =kata-bhatta-kicca) ;  VvA  244. 

Bhnttavin  (adj.)  [bhutta-t- suffix  °avin,  corresponding  to 
Vedic  °ayin]  having  eaten,  one  who  has  had  a  meal ; 
nom.  sg.  bhuttavi  Vin  iv.82  ;  Miln  15  (-1- onita-patta- 
pani) ;  PvA  23  (-)-  pavarita) ;  SnA  58  ;  instr.  bhuttavina 
Vin  IV. 82  ;  gen.  dat.  bhuttavissa  D  11. 195.  ace.  bhut- 
tivig  Vin  1.213;  Sn  p:  11 1  (-1- onita-pattapanig) ; 
J  V.170;  nom.  pi.  bhuttavi  Vin  iv.81,  &  bhuttavino 
S  iv.289. 

Bhumma  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  bhumi,  Vedic  bhumya]  i.  belong- 
ing to  the  earth,  earthly,  terrestrial ;  nt.  soil,  ground, 
floor  Sn  222  (bhutani  bhummani  earthly  creatures, 
contrasted  with  creatures  in  the  air,  antalikkhe),  236 
(id.) ;  Sdhp  420  (sabba-bhumma  khattiya).  pi.  bhumma 
the  earthly  ones,  i.  e.  the  gods  inhabiting  the  earth,  esp. 
tree  gods  (Yakkhas)  Vv  84-  (  =bhumma-deva  VvA  334). 

—  nt.  ground:  Pv  11. lo^  (yava  bhumma  down  to  the 
ground);  v.  1.  BB  bhum(i).  —  2.  the  locative  case 
KhA  106,  III,  224  ;  SnA  140,  210,  321,  433  ;  PvA  33. 

-attharana  "  earth-spread,"  a  ground  covering,  mat, 
carpet  Vin  1.48;  11.208;  iv.279.  -antara  "earth-occa- 
sion," i.  e.  (i)  sphere  of  the  earth,  plane  of  existence 
Miln  163;  DhsA  296.  —  (2)  in  "pariccheda  discussion 
concerning  the  earth,  i.  e.  cosmogony  DhsA  3.  -anta- 
likkha  earthly  and  celestial,  over  earth  &  sky  (of 
portents)  Miln  178.  The  form  would  correspond  to 
Sk.  *bhaum-antariksa.  -jala  "  terrestrial  net  (of  in- 
sight) gift  of  clear  sight  extending  over  the  globe 
(perhaps  to  find  hidden  treasures)  SnA  353  (term  of  a 
vijja,  science  or  magic  art).  Cp.  bhurikamma  & 
bhurivijja.  -ttha  (a)  put  into  the  earth,  being  in  the 
earth,   found   on   or   in   the   earth,    earthly   Vin   111.47. 


Bhumtni 


131 


Bhutanaka 


(b)  standing  on  the  earth  Dh  28.  —  (c)  resting  on  the 
earth  Miln  181.  Also  as  °ka  living  on  earth,  earthly 
(of  gods)  J  III. 87.  -deva  a  terrestrial  deva  or  fairy 
A  iv.iiS;  Ps  11.149;  VbhA  12;  DhA  M56;  VvA  334; 
PvA  5.  43,  55,  215,  277.  -devata=°deva  J  iv.287 
(  =  yakkha);  KhA  120. 

Bhummi'  (f.)  ffr.  bhumma]  that  which  belongs  to  the 
ground,  i.  e.  a  plane  (of  existence),  soil,  stage  (as  t.t.  in 
philosophy)  DhsA  277  (=y-apatti),  339  (id.),  985  (duk- 
kha"),  1368.  1374  sq.  (see  Dhs  Irsl.-  2^1). 

Bhummi^  [old  voc.  of  bhumma]  a  voc.  of  friendly  address 
"my  (dear)  man"  (lit.  terrestrial)  Vin  11.104  (  =  piya- 
vacanaij  Bdhgh). 

Bhuyya  the  regular  P.  representative  of  Sk.  bhuyas 
(compar.) ;  for  which  usually  bhiyya  (q.  v.).  Only  in 
cpd.  yebhuyyena  (q.  v.). 

Bhuvi  see  bhu. 

Bhusa*  [cp.  Vedic  busa  (nt.)  &  buia  (m.)]  chaff,  husks 
.\  1. 241  ('agara  chaff-house);  Dh  352  (opunati  bhusar) 
to  sift  husks) ;  I'd  78  ;  Pv  111.4' ;  in.  10'  ;  VvA  47  (tina° 
litter). 

Bhusa'  (adj.)  [cp.  Vedic  bhrsa]  strong,  mighty,  great 
l^h  339  (tanha  =  balava  DhA  iv.48)  ;  J  v. 361  (danda  ;  = 
dajha,  balava  C).  —  nt.  bhusai]  (adv.)  much,  exceed- 
ingly, greatly,  vehemently.  In  cpds.  bhusar)"  &  bhusa". 
—  S  1.69;  J  III. 441  ;  IV.  1 1  ;  V.203  (bhusa-dassaneyya)  : 
VI. 192  ;  Vv  6';  Pv  3^8.  iv.7';  Miln  346;  SnA  107 
("  verbum  intensivum  ")  ;  Sdhp  289. 

Bhasati,  Bhussati  [perhaps  a  legitimate  form  for  Sk. 
bhasate  (see  P.  bhasati),  with  u  for  a,  so  that  the 
suggested  correction  of  bhusati  to  bhasati  (see  under 
bhasati)  is  unfounded]  to  bark  DA  1.3 17  (bhusati; 
vv.  11.  bhussati  &  bhusati) ;  DhA  1.171,  172.  —  See  also 
bhasati  &  bhukka;  —  pp.  bhusita. 

Bhnsika  (f.)  [fr.  bhusa']  chaff  A  1.242  ;  Vin  11. 181. 

Bhtuita  [pp.  of  bhusati]  barking  J  iv.182  (°sadda,  barking, 
noise).     See  also  bhasita. 

Bhnseti  [Denom.  fr.  bhusa^  =  *bhrsayati ;  but  not  certain, 
may  have  to  be  read  bhuseti,  to  endeavour,  cp.  Sk. 
bhQsati]  to  make  strong,  to  cause  to  grow  (?)  J  v.218 
(C.  expl""  by  "  bhusar)  karoti,  vaddheti "  p.  224). 

Bhfi*  [fr.  bhu]  (adj.)  being,  (n.)  creature,  living  being  in 
pana-bhu  a  living  being  (a  breathing  being)  J  v.  79 
(  =  pana-bhuta  C). 

Bhfi^  (f.)  [fr.  bhu,  otherwise  bhumi]  the  earth ;  loc.  bhuvi 
according  to  Kaccayana ;  otherwise  bhuvi  is  aor.  3"'  sg.  ; 
of  bhu:  see  Pischel,  Prk.  Gr.  §  516;  Geiger,  Pali  Gr. 
§  86'. 

Bhttkufi  (f)  [a  different  spelling  of  bhakuti,  q.  v.  —  Cp. 
Sk.  bhrkuti  &  bhrukuti]  frown,  anger,  superciliousness 
M  1. 125  (v.  1.  bhakuti  &  bha°) ;  J  v.296. 

Bhuja  [cp.  late  Sk.  bhiirja,  with  which  related  Lat. 
fraxinus  ash,  Ags.  beorc  =  E.  birch,  Ger.  birke]  the 
Bhurjatree,  i.  e.  a  kind  of  willow  J  v.  195,  405  (in  both 
places  =  abhuji),  420. 

Bhnta  [pp.  of  bhavati,  Vedic  etc.  bhuta]  grown,  become ; 
born,  produced;  nature  as  the  result  of  becoming. — 
The  (exegetical)  definition  by  Bdhgh  of  the  word  bhuta 
is  interesting.  He  (at  MA  1.3 1)  distinguishes  the  foil.  7 
meanings  of  the  term  :  (i)  animate  Nature  as  principle, 
or  the  vital  aggregates  (the  5  Khandhas),  with  ref.  M 
1.260  ;  (2)  ghosts  (amanussa)  Sn  222  ;  (3)  inanimate 
Nature  as  principle,  or  the  Elements  (the  4  dhatus) 
S   in.  10 1    (mahabhuta) ;    (4)   all   that   exists,   physical 


existence  in  general  (vijjamanai))  Vin  iv.25  (bhutar)); 
(5)  what  we  should  call  a  simple  predicative  use,  is 
exemplified  by  a  typical  dogmatic  example,  viz.  "  kala- 
ghaso  bhiilo,"  where  bhuta  is  given  as  meaning  khhia- 
sava  (Arahant)  J  n.260  ;  (6)  all  beings  or  specified 
existence,  animal  kingdom  (satta)  D  n.157;  (7)  the 
vegetable  kingdom,  plants,  vegetation  (rukkh'  adayo) 
Vin  IV. 34  (as  bhuta-gama).  —  Meanings  :  i .  bhiita  & 
bhutani  (pi.)  beings,  living  beings,  animate  Nature 
Sn  35  (expl""  at  Nd-  479  as  2  kinds,  viz.  tasa  &  thavara, 
movable  &  immovable;  S.  11.47  [K.S.  n.36)  mind  and 
body  as  come-to-be ;  Dh  131  (bhutani),  405;  M  i.j  sq. 
(pathavl,  apo  etc.,  bhuta.  deva,  Pajapati  etc.),  4; 
MA  1.32.  The  pi.  nt.  bhiitani  is  used  as  pi.  to  meaning 
2  ;  viz.  inanimate  Nature,  elements,  usually  enum'' 
under  term  maha-bhutani.  —  2.  (nt.)  nature,  creation, 
world  M  1.2  (bhute  bhutato  sanjanati  recognises  the 
beings  from  nature,  i.  e.  from  the  fact  of  being  nature) ; 
DhsA  312  (°pasada-lakkhana,  see  Expos.  409).  See 
cpds.  °gama,  "pubba  (?).  —  3.  (nt.  adj.)  that  which  is, 
i.  e.  natural,  genuine,  true ;  nt.  truth  ;  neg.  abhuta 
falsehood,  lie  Sn  387 ;  PvA  34.  See  cpds.  "bhava, 
"vacana,  °vada.  —  4.  a  supernatural  being,  ghost, 
demon,  Yakkha ;  pi.  bhiita  guardian  genii  (of  a  city) 
J  IV. 245.  See  cpds.  °vijja,  "vejja.  —  5.  (-°)  pp.  in 
predicative  use  (cp.  on  this  meaning  Bdhgh's  meaning 
No.  5,  above) :  (a)  what  has  been  or  happened  ;  viz. 
matu-bhuta  having  been  his  mother  PvA  78  ;  abhuta- 
pubbai)  bhutai)  what  has  never  happened  before  hap- 
pened (now)  DA  1.43  (in  expl°  of  abbhuta)  ;  —  (b) 
having  become  such  &  such,  being  like,  acting  as,  being, 
quasi  (as  it  were),  consisting  of,  e.  g.  andha°  blind,  as 
it  were  J  vi.139;  aru°  consisting  of  wounds  DhA 
11M09  ;  udapana"  being  a  well,  a  well  so  to  speak 
PvA  78;  opana°  acting  as  a  spring  A  iv.185;  hetu" 
as  reason,  being  the  reason  PvA  58  ;  cp.  cakkhu°  having 
become  an  eye  of  wisdom.  Sometimes  bhiita  in  this 
use  hardly  needs  to  be  translated  at  all. 

-kaya  body  of  truth  DhA  1. 1 1 .  -gama  vegetation,  as 
trees,  plants,  grass,  etc.  Under  bhiitagama  Bdhgh 
understands  the  5  bija-jatani  (5  groups  of  plants 
springing  from  a  germinative  power:  see  bija),  viz. 
mula-bijar),  khandha",  phala°,  agga°,  bija°.  Thus  in 
C.  on  Vin  iv.34  (the  so-called  bhutagama-sikkhapada, 
quoted  at  DhA  in. 302  &  SnA  3) ;  cp.  M  in. 34  ;  J  v. 46  ; 
Miln  3.  244.  -gaha  possession  by  a  demon  Miln  168 
(cp.  Divy  235).  -tthana  place  of  a  ghost  KhA  170. 
-pati  (a)  lord  of  beings  J  v.  11 3  (of  Inda) ;  vi.362  (id.); 
Vv  64'  (id.),  (b)  lord  of  ghosts,  or  Yakkhas  J  vi.269 
(of  Kuvera).  -pubba  (a)  as  adj.  (-°)  having  formerly 
been  so  &  so,  as  mata  bhijtapubbo  satto,  pita  etc.,  in 
untraced  quotation  at  Vism  305  ;  also  at  SnA  359 
(Bhagava  kunala-raja  bhutapubbo).  —  (b)  as  adv. 
(bhutapubbar))  meaning:  before  all  happening,  before 
creation,  at  a  very  remote  stage  of  the  world,  in  old 
times,  formerly  Vin  n.201  ;  D  1.92;  11. 167,  285,  337; 
M  1.253;  in. 176;  S  1. 216,  222,  227;  IV.201  ;  V.447  ; 
A  iv.i36=Vism  237;  A  iv.432  ;  J  1.394;  DhA  1.56. 
-bhavya  past  and  future  D  1.18.  -bhava  truthful 
character,  neg.  a"  PvA  14.  -vacana  statement  of 
reality  or  of  the  truth  SnA  336.  -vadin  truthful, 
speaking  the  truth  M  1.180;  D  ni.175;  Pug  58;  a° 
untruthful  Dh  306  ;  J  11.416.  -vikara  a  natural  blemish, 
fault  of  growth,  deformity  SnA  189  (opp.  nibbikara). 
-vijja  knowledge  of  demons,  exorcism  D  1.9  ;  Dh  1.93, 
cp.  Dial.  1. 1 7).  -vejja  a  healer  of  harm  caused  by 
demons,  an  exorcist  Vin  iv.84  ;  J  11. 215;  111.511; 
Miln  23. 

Bhutatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  bhuta]  the  fact  of  having  grown, 
become  or  being  created  (i.  e.  being  creatures  or  part 
of  creation)  Vism  310  (in  def.  of  bhuta) ;  MA  1.32  (id.). 

Bhutanaka  [cp.  'Sk.  bhutrija]  a  fragrant  grass ;  Andro- 
pogon  schoenanthus  J  vi.36  (  =  phanijjaka) ;  Vism  543 
(so  v.  1.  for  T.  bhutinaka). 

VI— 3 


Bhutika 


132 


Bhendu 


Bhutika  (adj.)  (-°)  in  cpd.  catummaha°  belongs  to  the 
whole  expression,  viz.  composed  of  the  4  great  elements 
M  1.5 1 5. 

Bhvinaha  [difficult  to  expl" ;  is  it  an  old  misspelling  for 
bhuta+  gha  ?  The  latter  of  han  ?]  a  destroyer  of 
beings  Sn  664  (voc.  bhunahu,  expl'*  by  SnA  479  as 
"  bhuti-hanaka  vuddhi-nasaka  "  ;  vv.  11.  bhunahata, 
bhunahota,  bhiihata,  all  showing  the  difficulty  of  the 
archaic  word)  ;  J  v. 266  (pi.  bhiinahuno,  expl''  by  C. 
272  as  "  isinar)  ativattaro  attano  vaddhiya  hatatta 
bh.").  Cp.  M  1.502  ("puritanical"  suggested  by  Lord 
Chalmers) . 

Bhuma  (-°)  [  =  bhumi]  i.  (lit.)  ground,  country,  district 
S  III. 5  (paccha"  the  western  district).  —  2.  (fig) 
ground,  reason  for.  occasion ;  stage,  step  Sn  896  (avi- 
vada°  ground  of  harmony;  according  to  SnA  557 
Ep.  of  Nibbana). 

Bhiimaka  (&  °ika)  (adj.)  (only  -°)  [from  bhuma,  or 
bhumi]  I.  having  floors  or  stories  (of  buildings)  as  dve° 
pasada  DhA  1.414 ;  pafica"  pasada  a  palace  with  5 
stories  J  1.58,  89  ;  satta°  with  7  stories  (pasada)  DhA 
II. I,  260.  The  form  °ika  at  DhA  1.1S2  (dve°  geha).  — 
2.  belonging  to  a  place  or  district,  as  jati°  from  the 
land  of  (their)  birth  M  1.147  ;  paccha^  from  the  western 
country  S  iv.312  (brahmana).  —  3.  being  on  a  certain 
plane  or  in  a  certain  state,  as  paritta°  &  maha°  Vbh 
340  te°  in  3  planes  SnA  4  (of  the  5  Khandhas),  510 
(°vatta) ;  DhA  1.36  (kusala),  305  (°vatta) ;  iv.69  (tebhu- 
maka-vatta-sankhatar)Mara-bandhanai)),72  (dhamma) ; 
catu°  in  4  planes  DhsA  296  (kusala) ;  DhA  1.35  (citta). 
The  form  °ika  at  DhA  1.288  (with  ref.  to  citta).     , 

Bhumi  (f.)  [cp.  Vedic  bhumi,  Av.  bumis  soil,  ground,  to 
bhu,  as  in  bhavati,  cp.  Gr.  ^vais  etc.  See  bhavati] 
I.  (lit.)  ground,  soil,  earth  Vin  11. 175;  Sn  418  (yana° 
carriage  road)  ;  Pv  1.10^*  fsi  ;  SnA  353  (hettha-bhumiyar) 
under  the  earth) ;  DhA  1.414  (id.,  opp.  upari-bhumiyar)). 
—  2.  place,  quarter,  district,  region  M  1.145  (jati° 
district  of  one's  birth) ;  Sn  830  (vighata") ;  Nd-  475 
(danta°);  DhA  1.2 13  (apana°) ;  PvA  80  (susana"). 
— uyyana"  garden  (-place  or  locality  )Vv  64'*;  Pv  11. 12'; 
J  1.58.  —  3.  (fig.)  ground,  plane,  stage,  level;  state  of 
consciousness,  Vin.  1.17;  Vbh  322  sq. ;  Vism  126,  442 
(with  ref.  to  the  4  Patisambhida,  as  sekha-bhumi  & 
asekha-bhumi),  517  (paiifia°-niddesa).  Usually  -° : 
indriya"  Nett  192  ;  dassana°  plane  of  insight  Nett  8,  14, 
50 ;  sukha"  ground  for  happiness  Dhs  984  (cp. 
DhsA  214).  — bhiimi-ttaya  the  3  stages,  viz. 
kamavacara,  rupavacara,  lokuttara  Vism  493.  —  pi. 
bhiiniiyo  Ps  11.205  =Vism  384  (appH  to  the  4  jhanas) ; 
purisa°  (attha  p.  bh.  eight  stages  of  the  individual; 
viz.  manda-bhumi,  khidda°,  vimar|sana°.  ujugata". 
sekha",  saraana",  jina°,  panna°,  'or  as  trsH  by  Rh.  D. 
in  Dial.  1.72,  under  "  eight  stages  of  a  prophet's  exist- 
ence "  ;  babyhood,  playtime,  trial  time,  erect  time, 
learning  time,  ascetic  time,  prophet  time  &  prostrate 
time.  Cp.  the  10  decades  of  man's  life,  as  given  by 
Bdhgh  at  Vism  619).  —  Bdhgh,  when  defining  the  2 
meanings  of  bhumi  as  "  maha-pathavi "  and  as  "  citt- 
uppada"  (rise  of  thought)  had  in  view  the  distinction 
between  its  literal  &  figurative  meaning.  But  this  def . 
(at  DhsA  214)  is  vague  &  only  popular.  —  An  old  loc. 
of  bhumi  is  bhumya,  e.  g.  J  1.507  ;  v.84.  Another  form 
of  bhumi  at  end  of  cpds.  is  bhiinia  (q.  v.). 

-kampa  shaking  of  the  ground,  earthquake  Wiln  178. 
-gata  "  gone  into  the  soil,"  i.  e.  hiding,  stored  away 
J  I-375-  -ghana  thick  soil  SnA  149,  cp.  pathavi-ghana 
ibid.  146.  -tala  ground  (-surface)  PvA  186.  -padesa 
place  or  region  upon  the  earth  J  vi.95.  -pappataka 
outgrovrths  in  the  soil  D  111.87  =  Vism  418.  -pothana 
beating  the  ground  DhA  1.171.  -bhaga  division  of  the 
earth,  district  J  l.icg;  v.200  ;  VvA  125;  PvA  29,  154. 
-laddh  (uppanna)  acquired  on  a  certain  stage  of  existence 
SnA  4.     -saya  lying  or  sleeping  on  the  ground  Dh.V  11.61 . 


Bhuri'  (f.)  [cp.  late  Sk.  bhur]  the  earth  ;  given  as  name  for 
the  earth  (pathavi)  at  Ps  11. 197  ;  see  also  def.  at  DhsA 
147.  Besides  these  only  in  2  doubtful  cpds.,  both 
resting  on  demonology,  viz.  bhurikamma  D  1.12,  expl'' 
as  "  practices  to  be  observed  by  one  living  in  a  bhuri- 
ghara  or  earth-house"  (?)  DA  1.97,  but  cp.  Vedic 
bhuri-karman  "  much  effecting "  ;  and  bhurivijja 
D  1.9.  expH  as  "  knowledge  of  charms  to  be  pronounced 
by  one  living  in  an  earth-house"  (?)  DA  1.93.  See 
Dial.  1.18,  25.  The  meaning  of  the  terms  is  obscure; 
there  may  have  been  (as  Kern  rightly  suggests :  see 
Toev.  s.  V.)  quite  a  diff.  popular  practice  behind  them, 
which  was  unknown  to  the  later  Commentator.  Kern 
suggests  that  bhiiri-vijja  might  be  a  secret  science  to 
find  gold  (digging  for  it :  science  of  hidden  treasures), 
and  °kamma  might  be  "  making  gold "  (alchemistic 
science).  Perhaps  the  term  bhumma-jala  is  to  be 
connected  with  these  two. 

Bhuri'  (adj.)  [cp.  Vedic  bhuri]  wide,  extensive,  much, 
abundant,  DhsA  147  (in  def.  of  the  term  bhuri',  i.  e. 
earth);  otherwise  only  in  cpds.:  °pantia  (adj.)  of  ex- 
tensive wisdom,  verj-  wise  S  iv.205  ;  Sn  346,  792,  1097, 
1 143;  Pv  111.5^;  Ps  11. 197  ("  pathavi-samaya  vittha- 
taya  vipulaya  pafinaya  samannagato  ti  bhuripaiiiio," 
with  other  definitions) ;  Nd'  95  (same  expl"  as  under 
Ps  11.197);  Nd^  415  C.  (id.),  "pafinana  (adj.)  same  as 
°pafifia  Sn  1 136  ;^  (cp.  Nd^48o).  "medhasa  (adj.)  very 
intelligent  S  1.42,  174  ;  III. 143  ;  A  iv.449  ;  Sn  1131,  1 136  ; 
Th  I,  1266  ;  Pv  111.7'. 

Bhiiri  (f.)  [is  it  original  ?  Cp.  BSk.  bhuri  in  same  sense 
at  Lai.  V.  444,  541  ;  MVastu  111.332]  knowledge,  under- 
standing, intelligence  Dh  282,  quoted  at  DhsA  76 
(expli*  as  termed  so  because  it  is  as  widespread  as  the 
earth  ;  Dhs  16  ;  DhA  111.421  ;  same  expl"  at  DhsA  148)  ; 
J  VI.415. 

Bhiisana  (nt.)  [fr.  bhii$]  ornament,  decoration  Vism  10 
(yatino-sila-bhusana-bhiisita  contrasted  torajano  mutta- 

mani-vibhusita). 

Bhiisa  (f.)  [fr.  bhu?]  ornament,  decoration,  only  in  cpd. 
bhusa-  (read  bhiisa-)dassaneyya  beautiful  as  an 
ornament  Pv  111.3^ 

Bhuseti  [Caus.  of  bhii$,  to  be  busy  ;  in  meaning  "  to  adorn  " 
etc.  Expl""  at  Dhtp.  315,  623  by  "  alankara "]  to 
adorn,  embellish,  beautify.  Only  in  pp.  bhusita 
adorned  with  (-°)  Pv  11.9'^  12'  ;  111.3°  :  J  vi.53.     Cp.  vi". 

Bheka  [cp.  Vedic  bheka,  onomat.]  a  frog  Th  i,  310; 
J  III. 430  ;  IV. 247  ;  VI. 208. 

Bhecchati  is  fut.  of  bhindati  (q.  v.). 

Bhejja  (adj.)  'grd.  of  bhindati]  to  be  split,  only  in  neg. 
form  abhejja  not  to  be  split  or  sundered  Sn  255 ; 
J  1.263  ;  III. 318  ;  Pug  30  ;  Miln  160,  199. 

Bhejjanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  bhejja]  breakable;  like  bhejja  only 
in  neg.  form  abhejjanaka  indestructible  J  1.393. 

Bhe];i4i  [perhaps  indentical  with  &  only  wrong  spelling 
for  bhendu  =  kandu-]  a  kind  of  missile  used  as  a  weapon, 
arrow  Vin  111.77  (where  enum''  with  asi,  satti  &  laguja 
in  expl"  of  upanikkhipana). 

Bhendu  [with  v.  1.  gendu,  of  uncertain  reading  &  meaning. 
Pischel.  Prk.  Gr.  §  107  gives  gindu  &  remarks  that  this 
cannot  be  derived  fr.  kanduka  (although  kandu  may 
be  considered  as  gloss  of  bhendu  at  Th  i,  164:  see 
kandu^),  but  belongs  with  Prk.  gendui  play  &  P. 
genduka  and  the  originally  Sk.  words  genduka,  ginduka, 
gendu,  genduka  to  a  root  gid,  gi^,  Prk.  gindai  to  play. 
Morris,  J.P.T.S.  1884,  90  says  :  "  I  am  inclined  to  read 
gendu  in  all  cases  &  to  compare  it  with  geduka  &  genduka  U 
a  ball"]  a  ball,  bead  ;  also  a  ball-shaped  ornament  or  I 
turret,  cupola  Th  i,  164  (see  kandu^)  J  1.386  (also  °maya 
ball-shaped) ;  in.  184  (v.  1.  gendu). 


Bhenduka 


133 


Bhogavant 


Bhenduka*  [in  all  probability  misreading  for  genduka. 
The  V.  1.  is  found  at  all  passages.  Besides  this  occur 
the  vv.  11.  kenduka  (  =  kanduka?)  &  kundika]  a  ball 
for  playing  J  iv.30.  256;  v. 196;  vi.471  ;  DhsA  116. 
See  also  genduka. 

BheQ^aka^  [fr.  bhendu,  identical  with  bhenduka^]  a  knob, 
cupola,  round  tower  J  1.2  (maha-bh°-pamana). 

Bhettar  [n.  ag.  fr.  bhid]  a  breaker,  divider  A  v. 283. 

Bheda  [fr.  bhid,  cp.  Ved.  &  Class.  Sk.  bheda  in  same 
meanings]  i .  breaking,  rending,  breach,  disunion,  dis- 
sension Vism  64  sq.  (contrasted  with  anisagsa),  572  sq. 
(with  ref.  to  upadana  &  bhava) ;  VbhA  185  (id.)  ;  Sdhp 
66,  457,  463.  — mithu"  breaking  of  alliance  D  n.76  ; 
J  IV. 1 84  ;  Kvu  314.  — vaci°  breaking  of  [the  rule  as  to] 
speech  Miln  231.  — sangha°  disunion  in  the  Sangha 
Vin  11.203.  — sila°  breach  of  morality  J  v.  163.  —  abl. 
bheda  after  the  destruction  or  dissolution  in  phrase 
kayassa  bheda  param  marana,  i.  e.  after  the  breaking 
up  of  the  body  &  after  death :  see  kaya  I.  e.  &  cp.  D 
III. 52,  146  sq.,  258;  Dh  140  ;  Pug  51.  —  2.  (-")  sort, 
kind,  as  adj.  consisting  of,  like  J  11.438;  VI.3  (katuk' 
adi°) ;  DhA  111.14  (kaya-sucarit'-adi°-bhadra-kammani) ; 
SnA  290  (Avici-adi-°  niraya). 

-kara  causing  division  or  dissension  Vin  11. 7  ;  111. 173  ; 
V.93  (cp.  Vin  1.354  &  Vin.  Texts  in. 343  for  the  18 
errors  in  which  the  Sangha  is  brought  into  division  by 
bhikkhus  who  are  in  the  wrong)  ;  DhsA  29  (attharasa 
bheda-kara-vatthuni  the  18  causes  of  dissension). 

Bhedaka  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  bheda]  breaking,  dividing,  causing 
disunion  ;  (m.)  divider  Vin  11. 205  ;  J  vi.382.  —  nt.  adv. 
bhedakar),  as  in  °nakha  in  such  a  way  as  to  break  a 
nail  DA  1.37. 

Bhedana  (nt.)  [fr.  bhid,  as  in  Cans,  bhedeti]  i.  breaking 
(open),  in  puta°  breaking  of  the  seed-boxes  (of  the 
Patali  plant),  idiomatic  for  "  merchandise  "  Miln  i . 
See  under  puta. — -2.  (fig)  breach,  division,  destruc- 
tion A  IV. 247  ;  Dh  138  ;  Bu  11. 7 ;  J  1467  (mittabhava'). 
-dhamma  subject  to  destruction,  fragile,  perishable 
A  1V.386  ;  J  1. 146,  392  ;  ThA  254.  -sagvattanika  lead- 
ing to  division  or  dissension  Vin  in.  173. 

Bhedapeti  >.'«:  Bhedeti  are  Causatives  of  bhindati  (q.  v.). 

BheraQd<^fcS  [cp.  *Sk.  bherunda]  a  jackal  J  v.2ju;  the 
nam.  probably  formed  after  the  ace.  in  phrase  bheran- 
dakaQ  nadati  to  cry  after  the  fashion  of,  or  like  a 
jackal  A  1.187. 

Bherava  (adj.)  [fr.  bhiru,  cp.  Epic  Sk.  bhairava]  fearful, 
terrible,  frightful  Th  i,  189  ;  Sn  959,  965.  984  :  Nd'  370, 
467;  J  VI. 520  ;  Dpvs  17,  100;  Pgdp  26,  31.  — bahu*^ 
very  terrible  A  in. 52  ;  stricken  with  terror  J  vi.587. 
—  (n)  terror,  comb''  with  bhaya  fear  &  dismay  M  1.17  , 
A  IV. 29 1  ;  V.132  ;  Th  i,  367,  1059.  — pahina-bhaya- 
bherava  having  left  behind  (i.  e.  free  from)  fear  & 
terror  S  111.83. 

-rava  cry  of  terror  Miln  254. 

Bheri  (f)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  bheri]  a  kettle-drum  (of  large  size  : 
DhsA  319  distinguishes  2  kinds:  maha'^  &  pataha") 
D  1.79;  A  11.1.S5;  Vv  SiiO;  J  VI. 405;  Dh.\  1.391);  Sdhp 
429.  — issara'  the  drum  of  the  ruler  or  lord  J  i.j8  ;  ; 
pataha"  kettle-drum  Dpvs  16.  14;  Dhs.A.  319;  PvA  4  ; 
yama°  (-velaya)  (at  the  time)  when  the  drum  sounds 
the  watch  J  v. 459.  — bherir)  vadeti  to  sound  the  drum 
J  1.283.  — bheriyo  vadenta  (pi.)  beating  (lit.  making 
sound)  the  drums  J  11. 1 10.  bherin  carapeti  to  make  the 
drum  go  round,  i.  e.  to  proclaim  by  beat  of  drum 
J  v. 41  ;  VI. 10. 

-carana  the  carrying  round  of  the  drum  (in  proc- 
lamations), in  cpds.  "magga  the  proclamation  road 
DhA  n.43  ;  &  °vithi  id.  DhA  11.45.     -tala  the  head  of 


the  drum  Vism  489  (in  comparison)  ;  VbhA  80  (id.), 
-panava  drum  &  tabor  (in  battle)  A  11. 117.  -vada 
drum-sound,  fig.  for  a  loud  voice  PvA  89  (bherivadena 
akkosati  rails  like  drum),  -vadaka  a  drummer  J  1.283. 
-sanna  sign  of  the  drum  DhA  1.396.  -sadda  sound  of 
the  drum  J  1.283. 

Bhesajja  (nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  bhaisajya  =  bhesaja,  fr.  bhisaj  ; 
see  also  P.  bhisakka]  a  remedy,  medicament,  medicine 
Vin  1.278  ;  D  11.266  ;  M  1.30  ;  SnA  154,  446  ;  Sdhp  393. 
— bhesajjar)  karoti  to  treat  with  a  medicine  DhA  1.25  ; 
mula-bhesajjani  the  principal  medicines  Miln  43  ;  paiica 
bhesajjani  the  5  remedies  (allowed  to  bhikkhus)  DhA 

I-5- 

-kapalaka  medicine  bowl  VbhA  361.  -sikkhapada 
the  medicine  precepts  VbhA  69. 

Bhesma  (adj.)  [cp.  Vedic  bhisma  of  which  the  regular  P. 
form  is  bhigsa,  of  bhi;  bhesma  would  correspond  to 
a  form  *bhaisma]  terrible,  awful  Vin  11.203=  It  86 
("  bhesma  hi  udadhi  maha,"  so  read  for  Vin.  bhasma, 
with  V.  1.  bhesma.  and  for  It  tasma,  with  v.  1.  BE 
bhesma,  misunderstood  by  ed.  —  Bdhgh  Vin  11.325 
on  Vin.  passage  expl-  by  bhayanaka) ;  J  v.266  ;  vi.133 
(v.  1.  bhasma). 

Bho  (indecl.)  [voc.  of  bhavant,  cp.  Sk.  bholj  which  is  the 
shortened  voc.  bhagoh  of  Vedic  bhagavant ;  cp.  as  to 
form  P.  avuso>Sk.  ayusmah  of  ayusmant]  a  familiar 
term  of  address  (in  speaking  to  equals  or  inferiors) :  sir, 
friend,  you,  my  dear;  pi.  sirs  D  1.8S,  90,  93.  iii  ;  M 
1.484  ;  Sn  427,  457,  487  ;  with  voc.  of  noun  :  bho  purisa 
my  dear  man  J  1.423  ;  bho  brahmana  oh  ye  brahmans 
J  11.369.     Double  bho  bho  DhA  iv.158. 

-vadika  =  °vadin  Nd'  249.  -vadin  a  brahman,  i.  e. 
one  who  addresses  others  with  the  word  "  bho,"  im- 
plying some  superiority  of  the  speaker ;  name  given  to 
the  brahman,  as  proud  of  his  birth,  in  contrast  to 
brahmana,  the  true  brahman  Sn  620  ;  Dh  396  ;  J  vi.2H, 
214 ;  DhA  IV.158. 

Bhokkhag  is  fut.  of  bhufijati  (q.  v.). 

Bhokkhi  at  VbhA  424,  in  phrase  sucikamo  bh.  brahmano 
is  a  kind  of  Desider.  formation  fr.  bhuj"  (bhufij).  appear- 
ing as  *bhuks  =  bhokkh  (cp.  bhokkhar)),  with  ending 
"in  ;  meaning  "  wishing  to  eat."  It  corresponds  to  Sk. 
bhoktu-kama.  Cp.  also  n.  ag.  bhoktr  of  *bhuks, 
enjoyer,  eater.  P.  bhokkhi  might  be  Sk.  bhoktrl,  if 
it  was  not  for  the  latter  being  f.     The  word  is  a  curiosity. 

Bhoga'  [fr.  bhunj  :  see  bhufijati]  1.  enjoyment  A  iv.392 
(kamaguijesu  bh.).  —  2.  possession,  wealth  D  111.77; 
Sn  301,  421  ;  Dh  139,  355  ;  Pug  30,  57;  Sdhp  86,  228, 
264.     — appa°  little  or  no  possession  Sn  114. 

-khandha  a  mass  of  wealth,  great  possessions  D  11.86 
(one  of  the  5  profits  accruing  from  virtue),  -gama 
"  village  of  revenue,"  a  tributary  village,  i.  e.  a 
village  which  has  to  pay  tribute  or  contributions  (in 
food  etc.)  to  the  owner  of  its  ground.  The  latter  is 
called  gamabhojaka  or  gamapati  "landlord"  J  11. 135. 
Cp.  Pick,  Sociale  Gliederung  71,  112.  -cagin  giving 
riches,  liberal  A  111.128.  -parijuiiAa  loss  of  property  or 
possessions  VvA  10 1 .  -mada  pride  or  conceit  of  wealth 
VbhA  466.  -vasin,  as  f.  vasini  "  living  in  property," 
i.  e.  to  be  enjoyed  or  made  use  of  occasionally,  one  of 
the  M)  kinds  of  wives:  a  kept  woman  Vin  111.139.  140  ; 
cp.  M  1.286. 

Bhoga'  [fr.  bhuj  to  bend,  cp.  bhuja'  cS:  Sk.  bhoga  id.  Hala- 
yudha  3,  20]  the  coil  of  a  snake  J  111.58.     See  also  nib°. 

Bhogata  (-°)  (f  )  [abstr.  fr.  bhoga]  condition  of  prosperity, 
having  wealth   or   riches,    in   ulara°    being  very  rich, 

M  111.38. 

Bhogavant  (adj.)  [fr.  bhoga]  one  who  has  possessions  or 
supplies,  wealthy  J  v.399  ;  Mhvs  10,  20;  Sdhp  511. 


Bhogika 


134 


Bhobhukka 


Bhogika  (-°)  (adj.)  [fr.  bhoga]  having  wealth  or  power,  in 
antara°  an  intermediate  aristocrat  Vin  111.47. 

Bhogin^  (•°)  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  bhoga]  enjoying,  owning,  abound- 
ing in,  partaking  in  or  devoted  to  (e.  g.  to  pleasure. 
kama°)  D  11.80  ;  111.124  ;  S  1.78  ;  iv.331,  333  ;  A  111.289 ; 
V.I  77.  —  m.  owner,  wealthy  man  M  1.3O6. 

Bhogin^  (adj.)  [fr.  bhuj,  see  bhuja^]  having  coils,  of  a 
snake  J  111.57;  ^1.317. 

Bhogiya  is  diaeretic  form  of  Sk.  bhogya  =  P.  bhogga- 
with  which  identical  in  meaning  2,  similar  also  to 
bhogika. 

Bhogga'  (adj.)  [fr.  bhuj  to  bend,  pp.  corresp.  to  Sk. 
bhugna]  bent,  crooked  M  1.88;  D  11.22;  A  1.138;  J 
III-395- 

Bhogga-  (adj.)  [grd.  of  bhunj  to  enjoy,  thus=Sk.  bhogya] 

I.  to  be  enjoyed  or  possessed,  n.  property,  possession, 
in  cpd.  raja"  (of  an  elephant)  to  be  possessed  by  a 
king,  serviceable  to  a  king,  royal  D  1.87  ;  A  1.244,  284  ; 

II.  1 13.  170;  J  11.370;  DhA  1.3 1 3  (royal  possessions  in 
general) ;  DA  1.245.  Cp.  BSk.  rajabhogya  MVastu 
1.287.  See  in  detail  under  raja-bhogga.  — nagga- 
bhogga  one  who  possesses  nothing  but  nakedness,  i.  e. 
an  ascetic  J  iv.160:  v.75  ;  vi.225. — 2.  (identical  with 
bhogika  &  bhogiya  &  similar  in  meaning  to  bhoja- 
raja)  royal,  of  royal  power,  entitled  to  the  throne,  as  a 
designation  of  "  class  "  at  Vin  111.221  in  sequence  raja 
raja-bhogga  brahmana,  etc.,  where  it  takes  the  place  of 
the  usual  khattiya  "  royal  noble." 

Bhoja  [lit.  grd.  of  bhunjati-,  to  be  sorted  out,  to  be  raised 
from  slavery;  thus  also  meaning  "dependence," 
"  training,"  from  bhuj,  to  which  belongs  bhujissa]  one 
w-ho  is  getting  trained,  dependent,  a  freed  slave,  villager, 
subject.  Only  in  cpds.  like  bhojisiyai)  [bhoja+ isi-l- 
ya  =  issariya]  mastery  over  dependence,  i.  e.  indepen- 
dence S  1.44.  45  ;  bhojajaniya  a  well-trained  horse,  a 
thoroughbred  J  1.178,  179  ;  bhojaputta  son  of  a  villager 
J  V.165  :  bhojaraja  head  of  a  village  (-district)  a  sub- 
ordinate king  Sn  553  =  Th  i,  823.  —  In  the  latter  phrase 
however  it  may  mean  "  wealthy  "  kings,  or  "  titled  " 
kings  (khattiya  bh-r.,  who  are  next  in  power  to  and 
serve  on  a  raja  cakkavatti).  The  phrase  is  best  taken 
as  one,  viz.  "  the  nobles,  royal  kings."  It  may  be  a 
term  for  "  vice-kings  "  or  substitute-kings,  or  those  who 
are  successors  of  the  king.  The  expl"  at  SnA  45  ^  takes 
the  three  words  as  three  diff.  terms  and  places  bhoja  = 
bhogiya  as  a  designation  of  a  class  or  rank  (=bhogga). 
Neumann  in  his  trsl"  of  Sn  has  "  Konigstanime,  kiihn 
and  stolz,"  free  but  according  to  the  sen.se.  The  phrase 
may  in  bhoja  contain  a  local  designation  of  the  bhoja 
princes  (N.  of  a  tribe),  which  was  then  taken  as  a  special 
name  for  "  king  "  (cp.  Kaiser  >  Caesar,  or  Gr.  /SairiXeixj). 
With  the  wording  "  khattiya  bhoja-rajano  anuyutta 
bhavanti  te "  cp.  M  111.173:  "  patirajano  te  ranno 
cakkavattissa  anuyutta  bhavanti."  and  A  v.22  :  "  kudda- 
rajano  "  in  same  phrase.  —  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  at  Brethren. 
p.  311,  trsh  "  nobles  and  wealthy  lords." 

Bhojan  is  ppr.  of  bhojeti,  feeding  J  vi.207. 

Bhojaka  [fr.  bhuj,  bhojeti]  i.  one  who  provides  food, 
attendant  at  meals  J  v.4r3.  — 2.  (is  this  from  blmfi- 
jati-  &  bhujissa  ?)  one  who  draws  the  benefit  of  some- 
thing, owner,  holder,  in  gama°  landholder,  village  head 
man  (see  Dial.  i.ioS  n.  &  luck.  Sociale  GUederung 
u>4  sq.)  J  1. 199,  354,  483;  II. 135  (=gamapati,  ganuv 
jetthaka) ;  v.413  ;  DhA  1.69.     Cp.  bhojanaka. 

Bhojana  (nt.)  [fr.  bhuiijati]  food,  meal,  nourishment  in 
general  J  11.218;  iv.103,  173;  J  1. 178;  IV.223  ;  Sn  102, 


128,  242,  366,  667;  Dh  7,  70;  Pug  21,  55;  Miln  370; 
Vism  69,  106;  Sdhp  52,  388,  407.  Some  similes  with 
bhojana  see  J.P.T.S.  1907,  119.  — tika°  food  allowed 
for  a  triad  (of  reasons)  Vin  11. 196.  dub°  having  little 
or  bad  food  J  11.368 ;  DhA  iv.8.  panita°  choice  & 
plentiful  meals  Vin  iv.88.  sabhojane  kule  in  the  family 
in  which  a  bhikkhu  has  received  food  Vin  iv.94.  — bho- 
jane  mattafifiu(ta)  knowing  proper  measure  in  eating 
(&  abstr.);  eating  within  bounds,  one  of  the  4  restric- 
tions of  moral  life  S  11. 218;   A   1.113   sq. ;   Nd'  483.  — 

5  bhojanani  or  meals  are  given  at  Vin  iv.75,  viz. 
niccabhatta",  salakabhatta°,  pakkhikarj,  uposathikar), 
patipadikar).  — -As  part  of  the  regulations  concerning 
food,  hours  of  eating  etc.  in  the  Sangha  there  is  a 
distinction  ascribed  to  the  Buddha  between  gana- 
bhojanar],  parampara-bhojanar),  atirittabhojanar),  anati- 
rittabhojanat)  mentioned  at  Kvu  11.552  ;  see  Vin  iv.71, 
77.  All  these  ways  of  taking  food  are  forbidden  under 
ordinary  circumstances,  but  allowed  in  the  case  of 
illness  (gilana-samaye),  when  robes  are  given  to  the 
Bhikkhus  (clvarasamaye)  and  several  other  occasions, 
as  enum''  at  Vin  iv.74.  — The  distinction  is  made  as 
follows :  ganabhojanag  said  when  4  bhikkhus  are 
invited  to  partake  together  of  one  of  the  five  foods  ;  or 
food  prepared  as  a  joint  meal  Vin  iv.74;  cp.  11. 196; 
v. 128,  135;  paramparabhojanar)  said  when  a  bhikkhu, 
invited  to  partake  of  one  of  the  5  foods,  first  takes  one 
and  then  another  Vin  iv.78;  atirittabhojanar)  is  food 
left  over  from  that  provided  for  a  sick  person,  or  too 
great  a  quantity  offered  on  one  occasion  to  bhikkhus 
(in  this  case  permitted  to  be  eaten)  Vin  iv.82  ;  anati- 
rittabhojanai)  is  food  that  is  not  left  over  &  is  accepted 

6  eaten  by  a  bhikkhu  without  inquiry  Vin  iv.84. 
-aggadana  gift  of  the  best  of  food  SnA  270.     -atthika 

in  need  of  food,  hungry  Pv  11. 9-'.  -pariyantika  restrict- 
ing one's  feeding  Vism  69.  -vikati  at  J  v. 292  is  to 
be  read  as  bhajana"  (q.  v.). 

Bhojanaka  =  bhojaka,  in  "gama  owner  or  headman  of  the 
village  J  II. 134. 

Bhojaniya,  Bhojaniya,  Bhojaneyya  [grd.  of  bhuj,  Caus. 

bhojeti.  Cp.  bhufijitabba]  what  may  be  eaten,  eatable, 
food  ;  fit  or  proper  to  eat.  — bhojaniya  :  food  Vin  iv.92 
(five  foods :  odana  rice,  kummasa  gruel,  sattu  meal, 
flour,  maccha  fish,  raar)sa  meat).  Soft  food,  as  dis- 
tinguished from  khadaniya  hard  food  J  1.90.  See  also 
khadaniya.  bhojaniya:  eatable  S  1.167,  cp.  pari",  bho- 
janeyya :  fit  to  eat  DA  1.28  ;  a.°  unfit  to  be  eaten  Sn  81  ; 
J  V.15. 

Bhojin  (-°)  (adj.)  [fr.  bhuj]  feeding  on,  enjoying  A  III. 43  ; 
M  1.343  ;  Sn  47 ;  J  11.150  ;  Pug  55. 

Bhojeti  [Caus.  of  bhunjati]  to  cause  to  eat,  to  feed,  enter- 
tain, treat,  regale  Vin  1.243;  iv.71  ;  J  vi.577 ;  Dh.\ 
l.IOI  . 

Bhojja  (aflj.)  Igrd.  of  bhunjati]  to  be  eaten,  eatable; 
khajja°  what  can  be  chewed  &  eaten  DA  1.85.  °yagu 
"  eatable  rice-gruel,"  i.  e.  soft  gruel,  prepared  in  a  certain 
way  Vin  1.223,  224. 

Bhojjba  a  good  horse,  a  Sindh  horse  J  1.180. 

Bhoti  f.  of  bhavant  (q.  v.)  DhA  111.194. 

Bhottabba  iV  Bhottug  are  grd.  &  inf.  of  bhunjati  (q.  v.)  ; 
bhottabba  to   be    eaten    J    v. 252,    253  ;    bhottug   to  eat 

J   1114- 

Bhobhukka  [intens-redupl.  of  bhukk=bukk,  to  bark:  see 
bhukka  &  cp.  Sk.  bukkati,  bukkana]  one  making  a 
barking  sound,  barker,  i.  e.  dog  J  vi.345  (=bhunka- 
rana  C). 


M. 


-M-fuphonic  consonant  inserted  between  two  vowels  to 
avoid  hiatus,  as  agga-m-agga  the  best  of  all  Vin  iv.232  ; 
anga-m-angani  limb  by  limb  Vin  111.119;  Vv  38^,  etc. 
See  also  S  111-254  (yena-m-idh'  ekacco) ;  Dh  54  (oka-m- 
okata  ubbhato) ;  Sn  765  (anriatra-m-ariyehi)  ;  Nd'  26q 
(dvaye-m-eva)  ;  J  1.29  (asiti-hattha-m-ubbedha.  for 
hatth'  ubbedha) ;  111.387  (katattho-m-anubujjhati) ;  v. 72 
(orena-m-agama)  ;  vi.266  (paccha-m-anutappati)  ;  SnA 
309  (rag'  adi-m-anekappakarar)).  — On  wrong  syllable 
division  through  Sandhi-m-,  and  thus  origin  of  specific 
Pali  forms  see  masati. 

Ha  (-kara)  the  letter  or  sound  m  J  111.273  (sandhi-vasena 
vutta  put  in  for  the  sake  of  euphony) ;  v. 3 75  (ma-karo 
sandhikaro) ;  KhA  155,  224;  SnA  181,  383,  404. 

Magsa  (nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  magsa,  fr.  Idg.  *memsro-,  as  in  Gr. 
fiiipiii:  thigh,  Lat.  membrum  limb  ("  inember");  Goth, 
mims  flesh ;  Oir  mir  bite,  bit  (of  flesh)]  flesh,  meat 
S  11.97  (putta°)  ;  Dh  152  ;  J  111.184  ;  Pug  55  ;  Vism  258, 
357  (in  compar.) ;  DhA  1.375  (putta°)  ;  11. 51  (alia"  living 
flesh) ;  VbliA  58,  61  (pilotika-palivethita).  Described 
and  defined  in  detail  as  one  of  the  32  akaras  or  con- 
stituents of  the  human  body  at  Vism  252,  354  ;  KhA  46  ; 
VbhA  235. 

-upasecana  sauce  for  meat  J  111.144  =vi.24  ;  DhA 
1.344.  -kalyana  beauty  of  flesh,  one  of  the  5  beauties 
of  a  girl  (see  kalyana)  J  1.394  ;  DhA  1.387.  -khadaka 
flesh-eater  J  vi.530.  -cakkhu  the  bodily  eye,  one  of 
the  5  kinds  of  the  sense  of  sight  (see  cakkhu  III)  D 
in. 2 19  :  Nd^  100,  354.  -dhovani  odaka  water  for  washing 
meat  KhA  54.  -pindika  a  meat-ball,  lump  of  flesh 
Vism  256.  -pufija  a  heap  of  flesh  Vism  361  (in  comp.) ; 
VbhA  67.  -pesi  a  piece  of  flesh  or  meat  (see  on  simile 
J.P.T.S.  19117,  122)  Vin  11.25  ;  11T.105  (°r)  vehasar) 
gacchantir)  addasag)  ;  M  1.143;  A  iir.97 :  Miln  280; 
Vism  195,  252,  468;  DhA  1.164  ;  VbhA  235;  -lohita 
flesh  &  blood  Dh  150. 

Hafjsi  (f)  [cp.  Sk.  raagsi]  a  certain  plant  Nardostychus 
jatamansi  J  vi.535. 

Hagsika  [fr.  marjsa ;  cp.  *Sk.  marjsika]  1.  a  dealer  in 
meat,  meat-seller  Miln  331.  — 2.  in  pitthi"  the  °ka 
belongs  to  the  whole  cpd.,  thus:  one  who  is  a  back- 
biter, a  slanderer  Sn  244  (  =pitthi-mar|sa-khadaka  SnA 
287).     Similarly  pitthi-magsikata  (q.  v.)  Nd-  39'. 

Hakaci  [etym.  ?]  a  kind  of  cloth,  material,  fibre  DhA 
111.68  (vakakhanda). 

-pilotika  rougli  cloth  (used  for  straining)  J  11.96 ; 
DhA  II. 155.  Cp.  makkhi-vala.  -vaka  m.  bark  Vism 
249  ( -I- akkavaka) ;  VbhA  232. 

Makara  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  makara]  a  mythical  fish  or  sea 
monster.  Leviathan  (cp.  Zimmer,  Altind.  Leben  97) 
J  n.442  ;  III. 188  ;  Miln  131,  377  ;  ThA  204.  —  f.  maka- 
rini  Miln  67. 

-dantaka  the  tooth  of  a  sword  fish,  used  as  a  pin 
Vin  II. 113,  cp.  p.  315. —  as  a  design  in  painting 
or    carving    Vin    11.117.     121,     152;    iv.47.      In   these 


latter  passages  it  occurs  comb''  with  latakamraa 
&  paiicapatthika  (q.  v.).  The  meaning  is  not  quite 
clear. 

Makaranda  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  makaranda]  the  nectar  of  a 
flower  J  VI. 530. 

Makasa  [f r.  Vedic  masaka  via  *masaka  >  makasa :  sec 
Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  47^]  mosquito  Vin  11. 119;  S  1.52  (a°  free 
from  ra.)  ;  A  11.117  ;  Sn  20  ;  J  1.246  ;  Sdhp  50.  See  also 
cpd.  dar)sa°. 

-kutika  mosquito  net  or  curtain  Vin  ii.iig,  130. 
-Tijani  mosquito  fan  Vin  11.130. 

Makuta  (f.)  [cp.  BSk.  makuta  Divy  41 1]  a  crest  Abhp  283 
(kirita+ ,  i.  e.  adornment). 

Makula  [cp.  Sk.  makula]  i.  a  bud  (Hardy  in  Index  to 
VvA  gives  "  Mimusops  elengi  "  after  BR)  Th  2,  260  ; 
Vv  45^*;  J  1.273;  11.33;  IV. 333  ;  v.207  (makula),  416: 
Vism  230  (1);  256  (paduma°)  ;  VvA  177  (kanavira"), 
194  (makula),  197  (id.) ;  VbhA  228,  239  (where  Vism 
256  has  makulita,  &  KhA  53  mukulita).  ^  2.  a  knob 
J  1.3 1  :  11.90  ;  Vism  253  (kandala").  —  3.  v.  1.  at  Nd^  485 
B  for  pakuUa  (  =  pakuta). 

Hakka^a  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  markata]  i.  a  monkey  J  1.385  ; 
11.267  ;  DhA  11.22  ;  VbhA  408  (°nidda,  a  m.'s  sleep,  said 
to  be  quickly  changing)  ;  KhA  73  (in  simile)  ;  SnA  522 
(cp.  Sn  791).  Names  of  monkeys  famous  in  Jataka 
tales :  Salaka  J  11.268  ;  Kalabahu  J  111.98  sq.  ;  on  the 
monkey  as  a  figure  in  similes  see  J.P.T.S.  1907.  1 19.  to 
which  add  VbhA  228  &  259  (talavana"),  cp.  Vism  245. 
—  2 .  a  spider  :  see  °sutta. 

-chapaka  the  young  of  a  monkey  M  1385:  J  1.2  18. 
-sutta  spider's  thread  J  v. 47;  Vism  136  (in  simile); 
DhA  1.304. 

Makkataka  [cp.  Sk.  markataka;  der.  fr.  markata  =  mak- 
kata]  a  spider  (see  on  similes  J.P.T.S  1907,  1 19)  Dh  347 
(cp.  DhA  IV. 58)  ;  J  11.147  (  =  unnanabhi)  ;  iv.484  (aptly 
called  Unnanabhi)  ;  v. 47.  469,  Miln  364,  407  (pantha" 
road  spider,  at  both  passages).  -°sutta  spider's  thread 
Vism  285. 

Makka(iya  (nt.)  [fr.  makkhata-l- ya]  monkey  grimace 
J  11.448  (mukha").  The  same  as  mukha-makkatika  at 
J  11-7". 

Hakka(I  (f)  [of  makkala]  a  female  monkey  Vin  111.33. 
34;  J  1-385;  DhA  1.119- 

Makkha'  [fr.  mrk;,  lit.  smearing  over.  Cp.  BSk.  mrak^a 
Siks  19&.  8,  in  cpd.  mana-mada-mraksa-paridaha  etc.] 
hypocrisy  ;  usually  comb''  with  palasa  (see  also  palasa) 
M  1. 15;  A  1.95.  100,  299;  IV. 148,  456;  V.39,  156,  209, 
31U,  361  ;  It  3  ;  Sn  56,  437,  631,  1132  (cp.  Nd^  484  = 
makkhayana  makkhayitattar)  nitthuriya-kammar),  i.  e. 
hardness,  mercilessaess)  ;  Dh  150,  407;  J  v.141  ;  Vbh 
357.  380,  389  ;  Pug  18,  2i  ;  Miln  289,  380  ;  DhA  iii.i  18  ; 
VI. 181. 

-vinaya  restraining  £r.  hypocrisy  S  11.282  ;  A  v.  165  sq. 


135 


Makkha 


136 


Maggika 


Olakkha^  [probably  =  makkhai,  but  BSk.  difierentiates 
with  mraksya  Divy  622,  trsl.  Index  "ill-feeling"? 
Bbhtlingk-Roth  have  :  mraksya  "  wohlgefiihl  "]  anger, 
rage  Vin  1.25. 

Makkhaiia  (nt.)  [fr.  mrks.  cp.  *Sk.  mraksana]  smearing, 
oil  J  III. 120  ;  Miln  11  (tela°)  ;  Dhtp  538. 

Makkhayana  (f-)  &  Makkhayitatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  makkha] 
the  fact  of  concealment,  hypocrisy :  in  exegesis  of 
makkha  at  Nd'^  484  ;  Pug  18,  22. 

Makkhika  (f.)  [cp.  Vedic  maksika  &  maksika]  a  fly  M 
HI. 148;  Nd'  484;  J  11.275  (nila")  ;  111.263  (pingala" 
gadfly),  402  ;  SnA  33  (pingala°).  572  (id.)  ;  DhA  iv.58  ; 
Sdhp  396,  529. 

Makkhita  [pp.  of  makkheti]  smeared  with  (-''),  soiled ; 
anointed  M  1.364  (lohita°) ;  J  1.158  (madhu°) ;  in. 226 
(pitthi-maddena)  ;  v. 71  (ruhira°)  ;  vi.391. 

Makkhin  (adj.)  [fr.  makkha]  concealing,  hypocritical; 
harsh,  merciless ;  often  comb''  with  palasin  (e.  g.  at 
Vin  11.89;  J  III. 259)  D  III. 45,  246.  a°  ( +  apalasin) 
D  111.47  ;  A  iii.iii  ;  Sn  116 ;  Pug  22. 

Makkhi-vala  [cp.  makaci-pilotika]  a  cloth  of  hair  for 
straining  J  11.97. 

Makkheti  [Caus.  of  mrk?;  Dhtp  538  :  makkharia]  to  smear, 
paste,  soil,  anoint  J '111.225,  314;  Pug  36;  Miln  258; 
Vism  344 ;  DhA  11.65.  —  Pa-ss  makkhiyati  Miln  74.  — ■ 
Caus.  II.  makkhapeti  to  cause  to  be  anointed  J  1.486  ; 
DhA  1.400.  —  pp.  makkhita. 

Maga  [another  form  of  miga=Sk.  mrga,  cp.  Geiger, 
P. Or.  12^]  I.  animal  for  hunting,  deer,  antelope  M 
1.173  (in  simile) ;  S  1.199  (id.)  ;  A  1.70  ;  11.23  ;  Th  i,  958, 
989;  Sn  275,  763,  880;  J  V.267. — 2.  a  stupid  person 
J  VI. 206,  371. 

Magga  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  marga.  fr.  mrg  to  track,  trace]  i.  a 
road  (usually  high  road),  way,  foot-path  Vism  708 
(maggai)  agata-pubba-purisa,  simile  of) ;  VbhA  256 
(tiyojana",  simile  of  a  man  travelling) ;  DhA  1.229. 
—  addhana"  high  road  Vin  iv.62  ;  M  in.  158  ;  see  under 
addhana ;  antara-magge  on  the  road  Miln  16;  ujuka° 
a  straight  way  S  1.33  ;  DhA  i.iS  ;  ummagga  (a)  a  con- 
duit ;  (b)  a  devious  way :  see  ummagga,  to  which  add 
refs.  J  V.260  ;  Th  2,  94  ;  kummagga  a  wrong  path :  see 
kum°,  to  which,  add  S  iv.ig5;  Th  i,  1174.  passava" 
&  vacca°  place  for  defecation  &  urination  Vin  in.  12  7, 
visama"  a  bad  road  S  1.48.  — 2.  the  road  of -moral  & 
good  living,  the  path  of  righteousness,  with  ref.  to  the 
moral  standard  (cp.  the  10  commandments)  &  the  way 
to  salvation.  The  exegetic  (edifying)  etym.  of  magga 
in  this  meaning  is  "  nibban'  atthikehi  maggiyati  (traced 
by  those  who  are  looking  for  N.),  nibbanar]  va  maggeti, 
kilese  va  marento  gacchati  ti  maggo  "  (VbhA  114).  — 
Usually  designated  (a)  the  "  ariya  atthangika  magga  " 
or  the  "  Noble  Eightfold  Path  "  (see  atthangika).  It  is 
mentioned  at  many  places,  &  forms  the  corner-stone 
of  the  Buddha's  teaching  as  to  the  means  of  escaping 
"  dukkha  "  or  the  ills  of  life.  It  consists  of  8  con- 
siitnenis,  viz.  samma-ditthi,  samma-sankappa,  °vaca, 
^kammanta,  °ajiva,  "vayama,  °sati,  "samadhi,  or  right 
views,  right  aspirations,  right  speech,  right  conduct, 
right  livelihood,  right  effort,  right  mindfulness,  right 
rapture.  The  7  first  constituents  are  at  D  11.2 16  & 
M  III. 71  enum"*  as  requisites  for  samma-samadhi.  The 
name  of  this  table  of  ethical  injunctions  is  given  as 
"  maggam  uttamag  "  at  Sn  IT30,  i.  e.  the  Highest 
Path.  See  for  ref.  e.  g.  Vin  111.93  ;  iv.26 ;  D  11.353  : 
111.102,  128,  284,  286;  It  18;  Ndi  292;  Nd2  485;  Vbh 
104  sq.  235  sq.,  VbhA  1 14  sq.  (its  constituents  in  detail), 
121,  216;  Vism  509  sq.  (where  the  8  constituents  are 
discussed).  —  (b)  as  ariya  magga:  M  111.72  ;  Pug  17; 
DA  1. 176  sq.,  225  sq.,  233  ;  VbhA  373  sq. ;  ThA  205.  — 


(c)  as  paficangika  or  the  Path  of  5  constituents  (the 
above  first  2  and  last  3) :  Dhs  89  ;  Vbh  1 10  sq.,  237  sq. 
—  (d)  other  expressions  of  same  import :  dhamma° 
Miln  21;  magga  alone;  S  1.191  (Bhagava  maggassa 
uppadeta  etc.)  =  M  111. 9  =  S  111.66  ;  Sn  429,  441,  724  sq.. 
1 130;  Dh  57,  273  sq..  It  106;  VbhA  53.  73.  As  the 
first  condition  &  initial  stage  to  the  attainment  of 
Arahantship  (Nibbana)  it  is  often  found  in  sequence  of 
either  magga-phala-nirodha  (e.  g.  Vism  217,  cp.  Nd- 
under  dukkha  II.  p.  168).  or  magga,  phala,  nibbana 
(e.  g.  Tikp.  155  sq.,  158;  VbhA  43,  316,  488).  — magga 
as  entrance  to  Arahantship  is  the  final  stage  in  the 
recognition  (iiana,  parifina,  paiiiia)  of  the  truth  of  the 
causal  chain,  which  realises  the  origin  of  "  ill,"  the 
possibility  of  its  removal  &  the  "  way  "  to  the  removal. 
These  stages  are  described  as  dukkhe  iianar),  samudaye 
ilanar)  nirodhe  iianar)  and  magge  iianai)  at  D  111.227, 
Ps  1.118.  At  the  latter  passage  the  foil,  chapter  (1.49) 
gives  dukkha-nirodha  gamini  patipada  as  identical  with 
magga.  — Note.  On  the  term  see  C^d.  41  sq.,66sq.,  175, 
186  ;  Dhstrsl^  ^S,  299  sq.,  362  sq. ;  Expos.  216.  354°.  On 
passages  with  atthangika  magga  &  others  where  magga  is 
used  in  similes  see  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  in  J.P.T.S.  1907,  pp.  119. 
120.  —  3.  Stage  of  righteousness,  with  ref.  to  the  var. 
conditions  of  Arahantship  divided  into  4  stages,  viz. 
sotapatti-magga,  sakadagami",  anagami°,  arahatta",  or 
the  stage  of  entering  the  stream  (of  salvation),  that  of 
returning  once,  that  of  the  never-returner,  that  of 
Arahantship.  —  At  DhA  i.iio  magga-phala  "  the  fruit 
of  the  Path  "  (i.  e.  the  attainment  of  the  foundation  or 
first  step  of  Arahantship)  is  identical  with  sotapatti- 
phala  on  p.  113  (a)  iu  general:  arahatta"  S  1.78;  A 
111.3Q1  ;  DA  1.224. — •  (b)  in  particular  as  the  4  paths: 
Nd2'6i2  A;  Vbh  322  sq.,  328,  335;  Vism  453,  672- 
678  ;  DhA  IV. 30  ;  VbhA  301.  —  4.  In  the  Tikapatthana 
(under  magga-paccaya-niddesa  p.  52)  12  constituents 
of  magga  are  enum'* ;  viz.  panna,  vitakka,  samma- 
vaca,  s-kammanta.  s-ajlva,  viriya,  sati,  samadhi, 
miccha-ditthi,  miccha-vaca,  m-kammanta,  m-ajiva. 

-angani  the  constituents  of  the  Ariyan  Path  VbhA 
120.  -4magga  which  is  the  (right)  road  and  which  is 
not  M  1.147;  Vism  ch.  xx  ("ssa  kovida)  =  Sn  627; 
S  iii.igS  (id.);  DhA  iv.169  (id.);  A  v. 47  ("ssa  flana- 
dassana)  ;  Dh  403.  -udaka  water  found  on  the  road 
Vism  338  (simile),  -kilanta  wearied  by  the  road  J 
1. 129.  -kusala  one  who  is  clever  as  regards  the  road, 
one  who  knows  the  road  well  S  111.108;  Nd'  171; 
VbhA  332  (in  simile)  ;  KhA  70,  126.  -kovida=  "kusala 
Ndi  446.  -kkhayin  (should  be  °akkhayin)  one  who 
tells  the  (right)  way  M  in. 5  ;  Nd'  33.  -jina  Conqueror 
of  the  paths  Sn  84  sq.  -jivin  who  lives  in  the  right 
path  Sn  88.  -jjhayin  reflecting  over  the  Path  Sn  85. 
-fiana  knowledge  of  the  Path  VbhA  416.  -nnu  knows 
the  Path  Nd^  446.  -tthana  one  who  stands  in  the 
Path,  attains  the  P.  see  Cpd.  23,  50.  -ttaya  the  triad 
of  the  paths  (i.  e.  the  first  3  of  the  4  Paths  as  given 
above  under  3)  DhA  iv.109.  -dusin  highway  robber  Sn 
84.  -desaka  one  who  points  out  the  way,  a  guide  Sn  84  ; 
J  iv.257  ;  as  "desika  at  DhA  11.246.  -desin=  "desaka 
Sn  87.  -dhamma  the  rule  of  the  Path,  i.  e.  righteous 
living  Sn  763.  -dhira  wise  as  regards  the  Path  Nd'  45. 
-patipanna — i.  one  on  the  road,  i.  e.  wandering,  tramp- 
ing DhA  1.233.  — 2.  one  who  has  entered  the  Path  Pv 
IV. 3^'.  -parissaya  danger  of  the  road  VvA  200.  -bha- 
vana  cultivation  of  the  Path  (i.  e.  righteousness)  Nd' 
323.  -mulha  one  who  has  lost  the  way  VvA  332 
-vanna  praise  of  the  Path  DhA  1.115.  -vidu  one  who 
knows  the  Path  Nd'  446.  -sacca  the  truth  concerning 
the  Path  VbhA  1 14,  124.     -sira  N.  of  a  month  DA  1.24 1. 

Maggana  (nt.)  &  maggana  (f.)  [fr.  magg]  tracking,  search 
for,  covetousness  Vism  29  (syn.  for  nijigigsanata  & 
gavetthi) ;  Dhtp  298  (&  gavesana). 

Maggika  [fr.  magga]  wayfarer,  tramp  DhA  1.233. 


Maggati 


137 


Maccha 


Maggati  &  (spurious)  mageti  [Denom.  fr.  magga,  cp.  Sk. 
marga^'ati.  The  Dhtp.  gives  both  mag  &  magg  in 
meaning  "  anvesana,"  i.  e.  tracking,  following  up  ;  see 
Dhtp  Nos.  21.  540,  541]  to  track,  hunt  for,  trace  out, 
follow,  seek  M  1.334  (ppr.  magayamana) ;  S  11.370  (pp. 
maggayamana) ;  Th  2,  384  (cp.  ThA  2  55  =  pattheti)  ; 
J  V.102  (where  T.  reads  maggheyya,  which  is  expl''  by 
C.  as  vijjheyya  to  pierce,  hurt,  &  which  is  doubtful  in 
meaning,  although  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  defends  it.  The 
V.  1.  reads  rnagg".  Same  on  p.  265  where  one  ought  to 
read  phasseyya  in  C.  instead  of  passeyya.  The  form 
pp.  magga  (?)  on  p.  102  must  belong  to  the  same  root) ; 
DhsA  162  (  =  gavesati).  —  Caus.  II.  maggapeti  PvA 
112.  —  Pass,  maggiyati  VbhA  114. 

Magghati  see  maggeti. 

Maghavaat  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  maghava,  on  etym.  see  Walde. 
Lat.  M'th.  s.  V.  Maia]  N.  of  Indra,  or  another  angel 
(devaputta)  S  1.22 1  (voc.  maghava ;  so  read  for  ma- 
thava),  229 ;  Dh  30.     Cp.  magha. 

Uagha  (f.)  [cp.  *Sk.  magha]  N.  of  a  nakkhatta,  in  cpd. 
°deva  SnA  352  (cp.  M  11.74,  "•  ('•  where  spelling  Makka- 
deva ;  we  also  find  Makhadeva  at  Satapatha-brahmana 
XIV.   I.    i). 

Hankati  is  given  as  root  mank  (aor.  maki)  at  Dhtm  13,  in 
meaning  mandana,  i.  e.  adornment.  It  is  meant  to  be 
an  expl">  of  mankato  ? 

Hankato  (adv.)  [for  Sk.  mat-krte,  Cp.  E.  Mijller,  P.Gr. 
12]  on  my  account,  for  me  Miln  384. 

Manku  (adj.)  [cp.  Vedic  manku  ;  see  on  meaning  Hardy 
in  preface  to  Anguttara  v.  p.  vi]  staggering,  confused, 
troubled,  discontented  Vin  11. 118;  S  v.74 ;  Dh  249; 
Nd^  150;  DhA  III. 41,  359  (with  loc). — f.  pi.  manku 
Vin  1.93.  — dummanku  "  staggering  in  a  disagreeable 
manner,"  evil-minded  A  1.98 ;  iv.97  (read  line  as 
"  dummanku'  yar)  padusseti  dhum'  aggamhi  va  pa- 
vako  "  he,  staggering  badly,  is  spoilt  like  the  fire  on  the 
crest  of  smoke);  v.70  ;  Vin  11. 196;  111.21;  iv.213; 
S  11.218  ;  Nett  50. 

-bhava  discontent,  moral  weakness  J  iv.49 ;  Miln 
227 ;  DhA  in.359.  -bhuta  discontented,  troubled, 
confused  Vin  11. 19  ;  D  11.85  ;  A  1.186  ;  Dh  263  ;  J  v.311  ; 
VI. 362  ;  DhA  11.76  ;  a°  self-possessed  A  111.40  ;  Miln  21, 
339- 

Mankuna  (&  °na)  [cp.  late  Sk.  matkuna,  see  Geiger, 
P.Gr.  §  6']  an  insect,  bug  or  flea  J  i.io  ;  111.423  ;  Vism 
109  (where  klla-mankula  ought  to  be  read  as  klta- 
mankuna) ;  DhA  11. 12. 

Mangala  (adj.)  [cp.  Vedic  mangala.  Expli"  by  Dhtp  24 
with  root  mang,  i.  e.  lucky  ;  see  also  maiiju]  auspicious, 
jirosperous,  lucky,  festive  Nd^  87,  88;  KhA  n8  sq.  ; 
SnA  273,  595;  Sdhp  551.  —  nt.  mangalag  good  omen, 
auspices,  festivity  Sn  258;  Vin  11.129;  PvA  17.  A 
curious  popular  etymology  is  put  forth  by  Bdhgh  at 
KhA  123,  viz.  "  mag  galanti  imehi  satta  ti"  mangalani. 
—  mangalag  karoti  lit.  to  make  an  auspicious  ceremony, 
i.  e.  to  besprinkle  with  grains  etc.  for  luck  (see  on  this 
PvA  198),  to  get  married  DhA  1.182  ;  mangalai]  vadati 
to  bless  one  J  iv.299  ;  DhA  1.115.  Three  (au.spicious) 
wedding-ceremonies  at  Dh.\  1.115  viz.  abhiseka"  con- 
secration, geha-ppavesana°  entering  the  house,  vivaha" 
wedding.  —  Certain  other  general  signs  of  good  luck 
or  omina  xar'  iioxfiv  are  given  at  J  iv.72,  73  and  KhA 
118  sq.  (see  also  mangalika).  —  Several  ceremonious 
festivities  are  mentioned  at  DhA  11.87  with  regard  to 
tlie  bringing  up  of  a  child,  viz.  nama-karana-mangala 
the  ceremony  of  giving  a  name ;  ahara-paribhoga"  of 
taking  solid  food  ;  kanna-vijjhana°  of  piercing  the  ears  ; 
dussa-gahana"  of  taking  up  the  robe :  cu|a-karai)a°  of 

'    making  the  top-knot.  —  Cp.  abhi°. 


-usabha  an  auspicious  bull  SnA  323.  -chana  a  merry 
time,  fair  J  11.48  ;  DhA  1.392.  -kicca  auspicious  func- 
tion, festivity  SnA  175,  323.  -kiriya  festivity,  wedding 
SnA  69;  finding  good  omens  J  iv.72.  -kolahala  the 
lucky,  or  most  auspicious,  foreboding,  one  of  the  5 
kolahalas  (q.  v.)  KhA  121.  -paiiha  see  mangalika. 
-divasa  a  lucky  day  J  iv.210;  DhA  111.467.  -vappa 
ploughing  festival  SnA  137.  Cp.  vappa-mangala. 
-sindhava  state  horse  J  1.59.  -silapatta  auspicious  slab 
(of  stone)  J  1.59  ;  vi.37  ;  PvA  74.  -supina  lucky  dream 
J  VI. 330.  -hatthi  state  elephant  Mhvs  ^5,  21;  DhA 
1.389. 

Mangalika  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  mangala]  i.  one  who  is  feasting 
in,  one  whose  auspices  are  such  &  such  ;  fond  of  ;  only 
in  kotijhala'  fond  of  excitement  J  1.372  ;  Miln  94  (apa- 
gata°,  without  passion  for  excitement).  —  2.  super- 
stitious, looking  out  for  lucky  signs  Vin  n.129  (gihi), 
140  (id.).  At  J  iv.72,  73;  three  sets  of  people  are 
exemplified,  who  believe  in  omina  as  either  ditthag 
(seen)  or  sutag  (heard)  or  mutag  (sensed)  ;  they  are 
called  dittha-mangalika,  suta^  &  muta°  respectively. 
The  same  group  is  more  explicitly  dealt  with  in  the 
Mangala-sutta  Kh.\  118  sq.  (cp.  Nd'  89);  dittha- 
mangalika  paiiha  "  a  question  concerning  visible 
omina"  J  iv.73  (correct  meaning  given  under  dittha', 
vol.  ir.  156'  !),  390  (?).  The  Np.  dittha-mangalika  at 
J  IV.  3  76  sq. 

Mangalya  (nt.)  [fr.  mangala]  auspiciousness,  good  luck, 
fortune  Dhtp  24. 

Mangura  (adj.)  [etym.?  or  =  mangula?  See  J.R.A.S. 
1903,  186]  golden;  in  cpd.  "cchavi  of  golden  colour,  f. 
cchavi  D  1.193,  242  ;  M  1.246,  429  ;  11.33  ;  Vism  184. 

Mangula  (adj.)  [cp.  mangura]  sallow;  f.  manguli  woman 
of  sallow  complexion  S  11.260  =  Vin  111.107  ;  Vin  in. 100. 

Macca  (adj.-n.)  [orig.  grd.  of  marati,  my  corresponding  to 
Sk.  martya.  A  diaeretic  form  exists  in  P.  matiya  (q.  v. )] 
mortal;  (m.)  man,  a  mortal  S  1.55;  Sn  249,  577,  580, 
766  ;  J  111.154;  IV. 248  ;  V.393  ;  Dh  53,  141,  182  ;  Vv  63^2  . 
Kvu  351.  —  See  also  refs.  under  jata. 

Maccu  [in  forra  =  Vedic  mrtyu,  fr.  mr;  in  meaning  differ- 
entiated, the  Ved.-Sk.  meaning  "  death  "  onlv]  the 
God  of  Death,  the  Buddhist  Mara,  or  sometimes  equiva- 
lent to  Yama  S  1.156  ;  Sn  357  (gen.  maccuno),  581  (instr. 
maccuna),  587;  Th  i,  411;  Dh  21,  47,  128,  135,  150, 
287  ;  VbhA  roo  ;  SnA  397  ;  DhA  111.49  ;  Sdhp  295,  304. 
-tara  one  who  crosses  or  overcomes  death  Sn  119 
(  =  maranag  tareyya  Nd^  486).  -dheyya  the  realm  of 
Mara,  the  sphere  of  Death  S  1.4  ;  adj.  belonging  to 
death  or  subject  to  death  (  =  Maradheyya,  marana- 
dheyya  Nd^  487'').  —  Sn  358,  1104  (with  expl"  "  m. 
vuccanti  kilesa  ca  khandha  ca  abhisankhara  ca " 
Nd-  487"),  1 146  Cpara-raaccudheyyassa  parag  vuccati 
amatag  nibbanag  Nd-  487);  Th  2,  10  (  =  maccu  ettha 
dhiyati  ThA  13);  Dh  86;  DhA  11. 161.  -parayana  sur- 
mounting death  Sn  578;  pareta  id.  Sn  579.  -pasa  the 
sling  or  snare  of  Mara  Sn  166  ;  J  v. 367.  -bhayathe  fear  of 
death  Mhvs  32,  68.  -marana  dying  in  death  M  1.49  (cp.  C. 
on  p.  532  :  maccu-maranan  ti  maccu-sankhatag  mara- 
nag  tena  samuccheda-maran'  adini  nisedheti.  —  See  also 
def.  of  maraija  s.v.).  -mukha  the  mouth  of  death 
Sn  776  ;  Nd'  48.  -raja  the  king  of  death  Sn  332,  1 1 18 
(  =  Maro  pi  Maccuraja  maranag  pi  Nd^  488);  Dh  46, 
170;  KhA  83.  -vasa  the  power  of  death  3  1.52  ;  Sn 
587,  1 100  (where  maccu  is  expli"  by  marana  &  Mara). 
-hayin  leaving  death  behind,  victorious  over  death 
It  46=Sn  755  ;  Th  i,  129. 

Uacoha  [cp.  Vedic  matsya]  fish  A  111.301  ;  Sn  605,  777, 
936;  J  1. 210,  211  ;  V.266  (in  simile);  vi.113  (phandanti 
maccha,  on  dry  land);  Pug  55;  Sdhp  610.  — maccha 
is  given  at  Nd^  91  as  syn.  of  ambucarin.     — puti°  rotten 


Macchara 


138 


Majjharu 


fish  M  ni.i68;  &  in  simile  at  It  68=  J  iv.435  =  vi.236 
=  KhA  127.  Cp.  J.P.T.S.  1906,  201.  bahu°  rich  in 
fish  J  III. 430.  lona°  salt  fish  Vism  2S.  rohita°  the 
species  Cyprinus  rohita  J  11.433;  ni.333  ;  DhAii.132. 
On  maccha  in  simile  see  J.P.T.S.  1907,  121.  Of  names 
of  fishes  several  are  given  in  the  Jataka  tales  ;  viz.Ananda 
(as  the  king  of  the  fishes  or  a  Leviathan)  J  1.207  ; 
11.332  ;  V.462  :  Timanda  &  Timirapingala  J  v. 462  ; 
Mitacintin  J  1.427;  Bahucintin  J  1.427. 

-magsa  the  flesh  of  fishes  Sn  249.  -bandha  one  who 
sets  net  to  catch  fish,  a  fisherman  A  111.301  ;  Vism  379. 
-bhatta  food  for  fishes,  devoured  by  fishes  J  v. 75. 
-valaka  a  garment  made  in  a  particular  fashion  (for- 
bidden to  bhikkhus)  Vin  11. 137.  -sakalika  "a  bit  of 
fish"  (fish-bone?)  in  de.scription  of  constitution  of  the 
finger  nails  at  Vism  250=KhA  43  =  VbhA  233. 

Macchara  (adj.)  [Vedic  matsara  &  matsarin  enjoyable; 
later  period  also  "  envious,"  cp.  maccharin]  niggardly, 
envious,  selfish  Pgdp  11. 19.  — macchararj  (nt.)  avarice, 
envy  A  iv.285  ;  Sn  8ii,  862,  954  (vita-macchara,  adj.). 

Haccbarayati  [Demon,  fr.  macchariya]  to  be  selfish,  greedy 
or  envious  J  vi.334  :  DhA  11.45,  89. 

Maccharayana  (f)  &  Maccharayitatta  (nt.)  the  condition 
of  selfishness,  both  expressions  in  def"  of  macchariya 
at  Dhs  1 122  ;  Pug  19,  2^  ;  DhsA  375. 

Maccharin  (adj.)  [cp.  Vedic  matsarin,  fr.  mat-l-sf,  i.  e. 
"  reflecting  to  me  "]  selfish,  envious,  greedy  (cp.  Dhs 
trsl.'^  p.  320) ;  A  11.82  ;  m.139,  258,  265  ;  D  in. 45,  246 ; 
Dh  263  ;  Sn  136,  663  ;  Nd'  36  ;  J  1.345  ;  v. 391  ;  Vv  5.^2^  ; 
Pug  20  ;  DhsA  394  ;  DhA  n.89  ;  Sdhp  89.  97,  —  a° 
unselfish  D  in. 47  ;  A  iv.2  ;  Sn  852,  860  ;  It  102. 

Macchariya  &  Macchera  (nt.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  matsarya] 
avarice,  stinginess,  selfishness,  envy  ;  one  of  the  principal 
evil  passions  &  the  main  cause  of  rebirth  in  the  Peta- 
loka.  —  I.  macchariya  :  A  1.95,  299  ;  in. 2 72  ;  Dh  in. 4 4 
(issa°),  289  ;  Sn  863  (°yutta),  92S  ;  Pug  19,  23  ;  Vbh 
.357.  389,  391.  —  Five  sorts  of  selfishness  are  mentioned  : 
avasa",  kula°,  labha",  vanna°,  dhamma"  D  in. 234  ; 
Nd'  118,  227;  A  IV. 456;  Dhs  1 122  (cp.  Dhsisrl.^p.  276); 
Vism  683;  DhsA  373,  374.  Selfishness  is  one  of  the 
evil  conditions  which  have  to  be  renounced  as  habits 
of  mind  by  force  of  intelligence  A  v. 40,  209  ;  Miln  289  ; 
PvA  87,  124. — 2.  macchera  A  1.105  (°mala),  281; 
Dh  242  ;  It  18  ;  Nd'  260  ;  Sdhp  313,  510.  At  A  n.58 
and  elsewhere  the  state  called  vigata-mala-macchera 
"  with  the  stain  of  avarice  vanished,"  is  freq.  mentioned 
as  a  feature  of  the  blameless  life  and  a  preparation  for 
Arahantship.  —  Note.  The  (etym.)  expl"  of  maccha- 
riya at  VbhA  513  is  rather  interesting:  "  idai)  accha- 
riyari  mayhag  eva  hotu,  ma  aiinassa  acchariyai)  hotu 
ti  pavattatta  macchariyan  ti  vuccati"  (from  the  Pura- 
nas  ?). 

Macchika  [fr.  maccha]  a  fish-catcher,  fisherman  A  in. 301  ; 
J  V.270  ;  vi.iii  ;  Miln  331. 

MacchI  (f.)  [of  maccha]  a  female  fish  J  11. 178. 

Macchera  see  macchariya. 

Majja  (nt.)  [fr.  mad,  cp.  Vedic  mada  &  madya]  i.  intoxi-   \ 
cant,    intoxicating   drink,    wine,    spirits  Vin  1.205  ;   D   \ 
III. 62,    63;    Sn    398     (-Hpana=maiiapana) ;    VvA    73 
(  =  sura  ca  merayan  ca) ;  Sdhp  267.  —  2.  drinking  place 
J  IV. 223  (  =  pan'  agara). 

-pa  one  who  drinks  strong  drink,  a  drunkard  A  iv.261  ; 
Sn  400:  Pv  iv.i'6  (a°);  ThA  38.  -pana  drinking  of 
intoxicating  liquors  Vv  15*  ;  VvA  73  ;  Sdhp  87.  -paya- 
ka=majjapa  J  11. 192  (a°).  -payin=  °payaka  Sdhp  88. 
-vikkaya  sale  of  spirits  J  iv.115. 

Majjati^  [majj  to  immerse,  submerge,  cp.  Lat.  mergo]  is 
represented  in  Pali  by  mujjati,  as  found  esp.  in  cpds. 
ummujjati  &  nimujjati. 


Majjati^  [myj  to  clean,  polish ;  connected  with  either  Lat. 
mergo  (cp.  Gr.  aii:pyuj)  or  Lat.  mulgeo  to  wipe,  stroke, 
milk  (cp.  Gr.  riujXyw,  Mir.  mlich=milk  etc.)  — Dhtp 
71  gives  root  majj  with  meaning  "  sagsuddhiyar)  "]  to 
wipe,  polish,  clean  VvA  165.  Cp.  sam°.  —  pp.  majjita 
&  mattha. 

Majjati^  [mad  Sk.  madyati ;  \'edic  madati ;  see  mada 
for  etym.]  to  be  intoxicated  ;  to  be  exultant,  to  be 
immensely  enjoyed  or  elated  S  1.73,  203;  A  iv.294  ; 
Sn  366  (Pot.  majje=majjeyya  Sn.A  364),  676  (id.,  T. 
reads  na  ca  majje,  SnA  4S2  reads  na  pamajje) ;  J  11.97  '• 
in. 87  (majjeyya).  aor.  majji  in  cpd.  pamajji  Mhvs  17, 
'5-  —  PP-  matta. 

Majjara  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  marjara ;  dialectical]  a  cat  Miln  23. 

—  f.  majjari  (majjari°)  Vin  1.186  (°camma  cat's  skin): 
DhA  1.48  ;  Pgdp  49. 

Majjika  [fr.  majja]  a  dealer  in  strong  drink,  a  tavern- 
keeper  Miln  33 1 . 

Majjita  [pp.  of  majjati^]  cleaned,  polished  Vv.A  340 
(sutthu  m.  for  sumattha  Vv  84").     See  also  mattha. 

Majjha  (adj.)  [\^edic  madhya,  cp.  Lat.  medius,  Gr.  ^fffinr, 
Goth.  midjis=Ohg.  mitti.  E.  middle]  middle,  viz. 
I.  of  space:  of  moderate  height  D  1.243  (contrasted 
with  ucca  &  nica).  —  2.  of  time  :  of  middle  age  Sn  2  16 
(contrasted  with  dahara  young  &  thera  old).  —  3.  often 
used  adv.  in  loc.  majjhe  in  the  middle ;  i.  e.  (a)  as  prep, 
in  between,  among  (-"  or  with  gen.)  Pv  i.ii',  11*; 
J  1.207  (sakunanai)) ;  DhA  1.182  (vasana-gamassa) ; 
PvA  u  (parisa°).  majjhe  chetva  cutting  in  half 
J  V.387.  —  (b)  in  special  dogmatic  sense  "  in  the 
present  state  of  existence,"  contrasted  with  past  & 
future  existences  (the  latter  comb"*  as  "  ubho  anta  "  at 
Sn  1040).  The  expl°  of  majjhe  in  this  sense  is  at 
Nd^  434 :  "  raajjhar)  vuccati  paccuppanna  rupa  "  etc. 
(similarly  at  Nd-  490).  —  Sn  949  (in  sequence  pubbe 
majjhe  paccha),  1099  (id.) ;  Dh  348  (pure  majjhe 
pacchato ;  i.  e.  paccuppannesu  khandhesu  DhA  iv.63). 

—  4.   (nt.)  majjhag  the  middle  DhA  1.184  (tassa  ura- 
majjhar)  ghagsenti). 

Majjhaka  (adj.)  (--)  [fr.  majjha]  lying  or  being  in  the 
midst  of  .  .  .,  in  pacina-yava°  (dakkhina",  pacchima°, 
uttara°)  nigama,  a  market-place  lying  in  the  midst  of 
the  eastern  corn-fields  (the  southern  etc.) :  designation 
of  4  nigamas  situated  near  Mithila  J  vi.330. 

Majjhatta  (adj.-n.)  [for  majjha-ttha,  which  we  find  in 
Prk.  as  majjhattha :  Pischel,  Prk.  Gr.  §  214;  majjha-l- 
stha]  I.  (adj.)  "standing  in  the  middle,"  umpire, 
neutral,  impartial,  indifierent  J  1.300  ;  11.359  (parama", 
-I-  upekkha-parami)  ;  vi.8  ;  Miln  403  ;  Vism  230  ;  Mhvs 
21,  14.  —  2.  indifference,  balance  of  mind,  equanimity  ; 
almost  synonymous  with  upekkha  :  Vism  134,  296; 
VbhA  283  ("payogata)  ;  DhA  11.214  ("upekkha);  PvA 
38  (so  read  for  majjhattha).  See  also  following.  — 
Note.  A  similar  term  is  found  in  BSk.  as  mrdu-madhya 
ksanti  "  state  of  spiritual  calm  "  Divy  271  ;  see  Yoga 
Sutra  11.34. 

Majjhattata  (f)  [abstr.  from  prec]  impartiality,  indifler- 
ence,  balance  of  mind  Nd*  166  (in  expl°  of  upekkha. 
with  syn.  passaddhata) ;  Vbh  230  ;  Vism  134  ;  VbhA  285 
(satta°  &  sankhara"),  317  (def.) ;  DhsA  133. 

Majjhantika  [majjha-i-  anta-i-  ika]  midday,  noon ;  used 
either  absolutely  Vin  iv.273;  S  iv.240  ;  J  v. 213  (yava 
upakattha -majjhantika)  ;  v. 291  (read  majjhantik' 
atikamm'  agami) ;  Vism  236  ;  Miln  3  ;  or  as  apposition 
with  kSla  &  samaya  S  1.7  (kala) ;  Pv  iv.32  (id.) ;  Nd^  97' 
(samaya)  ;  DA  1.251  (id.). 

Majjharu  [etym.  doubtful]  a  certain  kind  of  plant  Vin 
1. 1 96  (v.  1.  majjaru) ;  doubtful  whether  designation  (like 
Sk.  marjara)  of  Plumbago  rosea. 


Majjhima 


139 


Matahaka 


Hajjhima  (adj.)  [Vedic  madhyama,  with  sound  change 
^ama>°ima  after  Geiger,  P.Gr.  ig',  or  after  analogy 
with  pacchima.  with  which  often  contrasted]  1.  middle, 
medium,  mediocre,  secondary,  moderate.  —  AppHed 
almost  exclusively  in  contrast  pairs  with  terms  of 
more  or  less,  in  triplets  like  "  small-medium-big,"  or 
"  first-middlc-last  "  (cp.  majjha  3b) ;  viz.  (a)  of  degree  : 
hina-m-panita  D  111.215  (tisso  dhatuyo) ;  Dhs  r2o5- 
1027  (dhamma)  ;  Vism  11  (silar)) ;  h.  m.  ukkattha  Vism 
308;  omaka  m.  ukkattha  Vin  iv.243;  khuddaka  m. 
maha  Vism  100;  lamaka  m.  panita  (i.  o.  lokuttara) 
DhsA  45  (dhamma)  ;  paritta-m-ulara  Sdhp  2(10.  — 
(b)  of  time :  pathame  yame  majjhima"  pacchima"  J 
1.75;  id.  with  vaye  Pv.A^  5.  —  2.  (nt.)  majjhimar)  the 
waist,  in  cpd.  .~u-majjhima  (f.)  a  woman  with  beautiful 
waist  I  v. 4. 

Manca  [cp.  Kpic  Sk.  manca  stand,  scatTolding.  platform] 
a  couch,  bed  Vin  iv.39  40  (where  4  kinds  are  mentioned, 
which  also  apply  to  the  def"  of  pitha,  viz.  masaraka, 
bundikabaddha,  kulira-padaka,  ahacca-padaka ;  same 
def"  at  VbhA  365);  Sn  401  ;  J  111.423  ;  DhA  1.89  ("i) 
bandhati  to  tie  a  bed  or  two  together),  130;  iv.  16; 
VbhA  20  ;  V'vA  291  ;  PvA  93.  — hettha  mance  under- 
neath the  bed  J  1.197  (as  place  where  the  domestic  lies) ; 
II. 419  (id.);  11.273  (where  a  love-sick  youth  lies  dowji 
in  the  park). 

-atimafica  bed  upon  bed.  i.  e.  beds  placed  on  top  of 
each  other  serving  as  grand  stands  at  a  fair  or  festival 
J  III. 456 ;  VI. 277  ;  DhA  iv.59.  -parayana  ending  in 
bed,  kept  in  bed  Pv  11. 2^  (nila°.  fig.  for  being  buried) ; 
DhA  1. 1 83  (with  v.  1.  maccu".  just  as  likely,  but  see 
maccuparayana).  -pitha  couch  and  chair  Vin  11.270 
sq.  ;  A  III. 51  ;  VvA  g,  220,  295.  -vana  stuffing  of  a 
couch  DhA  1234. 

Maiicska  [fr.  manca]  bed,  couch,  bedstead  Vin  1.271  ; 
S  1. 12 1  =  111.123  ;  J  '.91  ;  III. 42 3  ;  Th  2,  115;  Miln  10  ; 
DhA  11.53. 

Hafijari  (f.)  [cp.  Epic  &  Class.  Sk.  mafijari]  a  branching 
flower-stalk,  a  sprout  J  v. 400,  416. 

Hanjarika  (f.)  =  manjari,  Vin  111.180. 

Manjarita  (adj.)  [fr.  mafijari]  with  (full-grown)  pedicles, 
i.  e.  in  open  flower  Miln  308  (°patta  in  full  bloom). 

Manjira  [cp.  late  Sk.  manjira  nt.]  an  anklet,  foot-bangle 
Abhp  228. 

Mafiju  (adj.)  rep.  Class  Sk.  manju,  also  mangala,  cp.  Gr. 
Iiayyavov  means  of  deceiving,  Lat.  mango  a  dealer 
making  up  his  wares  for  sale.  See  further  cognates  at 
Walde,  Lai.  Wtb.  s.  v.  mango]  pleasant,  charming, 
sweet,  lovely  (only  with  ref.  to  the  voice)  D  11. 2  11,  227 
(one  of  the  8  characteristics  of  Brahma's  &  the  Bud- 
dha's voice:  see  bindu  &  atfhanga)  ;  J  11. 150.  —  (nt.) 
a  sweet  note  J  vi.5gi  (of  the  deer  in  the  forest) ;  VvA 
2ig  (karavika  ruta°). 

-bhanaka  sweet-voiced,  speaking  sweetly  J  11.150  = 
DhA  1. 144;  f.  bhanika  J  vi.4i8,  420.  -bhanin  id. 
J  ii.i5<>- 

Manjoka  (adj.)  [maiiju-l-ka]  sweet  voiced  Vin  1.249; 
J  11.35";  III. 266  ;  VI. 412,  496. 

Mafijusaka  (-rukkha)  [fr.  maiijiisa]  N.  of  a  celestial  tree, 
famed  for  its  fragrancy  Vv  38';  SnA  52,  66,  95,  98; 

VvA  175. 

MafijQsa  (f.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  manju$a]  a  casket;  used  for 
keeping  important  documents  in  J  11.36  (suvanna- 
pattar)  mafijusaya  nikkhipapesi)  ;  iv.335  (suvanna- 
pattar)  sara-maiijiisayai)  thapetva  kalam  akasi). 

I  Hafijet^ha  (adj.)  [cp.  *Sk.  maiijistha  Indian  madder]  light 
(bright)  red,  crimson,  usually  enum''  in  set  of  5  principal 


colours  with  nila,  pita,  lohitaka,  odata ;  e.  g.  at  Vin 
1.25  ;  S  ii.ioi  (f.  manjettha) ;  Vv  22'  (Hardy  in  T.  reads 
manjattha,  as  twice  at  VvA  i  1 1,  with  vv.  11.  "jittha  & 
'jettha,  cp.  Corrections  &  Add"'  on  p.  372) ;  Miln  61. 

Manjetthaka  (adj.)  [fr.  mafijettha,  after  lohita-)-ka] 
crimson,  bright  red.  fig.  shining  Vv  39'  (cp.  def"  at 
VvA  177:  like  the  tree  \'itex  negundo,  sindhavara,  or 
the  colour  of  the  Kanavira-bud  ;  same  def°  at  DhsA 
317,  with  Sinduviira  for  Sindha")  ;  usually  in  sequence 
nila,  pita,  marijetthaka,  lohitaka,  odata  as  the  5 
fundamental   colours:   M   i.5'>g   (has   "elthika  in  T.  but 


V.   1.   °etthaka):    J    vi.185;    Dhs  (,i- 


f.  mafijetthika 


a  disease  of  sugar  cane  Vin  11.256. 
Manjetthi  (f.)  [=Sk.  mafijisthaj  Bengal  madder  DA  1.85. 

Mannati  man,  Vedic  manyate  &  manute,  Av.  mainyeite  ; 
Idg.  *men,  cp.  Gr.  /isrof  mood,  anger  =  Sk.  manah 
mind ;  ii'^^nva  to  think  of,  wish  to,  Lat.  memini  to 
think  of,  mens>mind,  meneo  ;  Goth,  munan  to  think, 
muns  opinion  ;  Oisl.  man.  Ags.  mon  ;  Ohg.  minna  love. 
Ags,  myne  intention.  Dhtp  427:  mail=nane,  524  = 
hodhane]  i.  to  think,  to  be  of  opinion,  to  imagine,  to 
deem  Sn  199  (sisai)  .  .  .  subhato  naij  maiinati  bale). 
588  (yena  yena  hi  mannanti,  tato  tar)  hoti  aiinatha)  ; 
J  11.258  (manuami  cirar)  carissati :  1  imagine  he  will 
have  to  wander  a  long  time).  —  With  (double)  ace.  :  to 
take  for,  to  consider  as  ;  na  tar)  maiinami  manusir)  I 
deem  you  are  not  human  Pv  11. 4'  ;  yassa  dani  kaltiii 
mannati  for  this  now  may  he  think  it  time  (in  a  phrase 
of  departure),  let  him  do  what  he  thinks  fit,  we  wait 
the  Buddha's  pleasure,  i.  e.  let  it  be  time  to  go  [so  also 
BSk.  manyate  kalar),  e.  g.  Divy  50.  64  etc.]  D  1.189.  — 
Esp.  in  phrase  tag  kirj  mafiiiasi  (maniiatha  2.  pi.)  what 
do  you  think  of  this  ?  (the  foil.),  what  is  your  opinion 
about  this?  D  i.Oo  ;  S  111.104  cS:  passim.  —  Pot.  i-'  sg. 
maiiiieyyai)  1  should  think  PvA  40  ;  3""  sg.  maririesrya 
S  111.103.  and  maiiiie  Sn  206.  The  short  form  V  sg. 
mafifie  is  used  like  an  adv.  as  affirmative  particle  & 
is  inserted  without  influencing  the  grammatical  or 
syntactical  construction  of  the  sentence ;  meaning : 
methinks.  for  certain,  surely,  indeed.  I  guess,  pre- 
sumably. E.  g.  D  1. 1 37  (patapati  m.  paccatthike 
yasasa) ;  S  1.181  (m.  'hag);  iv.28g  (paveliyamanena  m. 
kayena)  ;  J  11.275;  Miln  21  ;  Vism  go,  g2  (mato  mem. 
putto) ;  DhA  1. 107  ;  11. 5 1  ;  PvA  40  (m.  gono  samutthahe), 
65  (tasma  m.  sumutta).  — na  maiiiie  surely  not  Dh.\ 
11.84;  PvA  75  (n.  m.  punnava  raja).  —  2.  to  know,  to 
be  convinced,  to  be  sure  Sn  840  (  =  janati  Nd'  192), 
1049,  1 142;  Nd-  491  t  =  janati);  DhA  1.29  (mannami 
tuvag  marissasi).  —  3.  to  imagine,  to  be  proud  (of), 
to  be  conceited,  to  boast  Sn  382  (ppr.  mannamana), 
806.  813,  855  (marinate);  J  111.530  (aor.  mai'ii"ii  'hag, 
perhaps  mani'ie  'hag  ?  C.  expl°"  by  mai'ifiami).  —  pp. 
mata.  —  Note.  Another  Present  form  is  munati  (q.  v.). 
of  which  the  pp.  is  muta. 

Mannana  (f.)  "fr.  man]  conceit  Nd»  124  (taijha°,  ditthi°. 
mana°,  kilesa°  etc.);  Dhs  11 16  1233;  Nett  24;  Vism 
265  (for  mancana?). 

Mannita  (nt.)  [pp.  of  mai'iiiati]  illusion,  imagination 
M  1.486.  Nine  mai'iriitani  (the  same  list  is  applied  to 
the  phanditani.  the  papai'icitani  &  sankhatani)  at  Vbh 
390  :  asmi,  ayam  aham  asmi,  bhavissag.  na  bhavissag. 
rupi  bhavissag.  arupi  bh.,  sanni  bh.,  asaiiiii  bh.,  neva- 
safii"ii-nasafint-bh. 

Mainitatta  (nt.)  [fr.  maiii'iita]  self-conceit,  pride  Dhs  1 1 16  ; 
Dhs.\  372. 

Mataja  (nt.)  rdoubtful]  a  certain  weapon  M  1.28 1  (°g 
nama  avudhajatag  ;  Neumann  trsl^  "  Mordwaffe  "). 

Hatahaka  (adj.)  [doubtful  spelling  &  meaning]  short  (?) 
Vin  II. 138  (ati°  =  atikhuddaka  C). 


Matta 


140 


Mandala 


Matta  &  Mattha  [pp-  of  myj,  see  majjati-]  wiped,  polished, 
clean,  pure.  —  (a)  matta:  D  n.133  (yugar)  mattar) 
dharaniyar)  :  "  pair  of  robes  of  burnished  cloth  o£  gold 
and  ready  for  wear  "  trsl.)  ;  Vism  258  (v.  1.  mattha). 
Cp.  sara.°  — (b)  mattha:  Vv  84"  (su°)  ;  Miln  248; 
DhA  1.25  ("kundali  having  burnished  earrings) ;  VvA 
6  ("vattha).     Cp'.  vi°. 

-sataka  a  tunic  of  fine  cloth  J  1.304  ;  11.274  ;  in. 498  ; 
Vism '2 84  (tth). 

Mani  [cp.  Vedic  mani.  The  connection  with  Lat.  monile 
(pendant),  proposed  by  Fick  &  Grassraann,  is  doubted 
by  Walde,  Lat.  Wlb.  s.  v.  monile,  where  see  other  sug- 
gestions. For  further  characterisation  of  mani  cp. 
Zimmer,  Altindisches  Leben  pp.  53,  263]  i.  a  gera,  jewel. 
At  several  places  one  may  interpret  as  "  crystal."  — 
D  1.7  (as  ornament)  ;  Dh  161  ;  J  vi.265  (agghiya,  pre- 
cious). In  simile  at  D  1.76  (mani  vejuriyo).  On 
mani  in  similes  see  J.P.T.S.  1907,  121.  — udaka-pasa- 
daka  mani  a  precious  stone  (crystal  ?)  having  the 
.property  of  making  water  clear  Miln  35  (cp.  below 
Vism  366  passage)  ;  cinta°  a  "  thought-jewel,"  magic 
stone  (crystal?)  J  111.504 ;  VvA  32;  cuja"  a  jewelled 
crest  or  diadem,  the  crown-jewel  J  v. 441  sq.  ;  jati°  a 
genuine  precious  stona  J  11. 417;  Vism  216  (in  com- 
parison) ;  tara"  (-vitana)  (canopy)  of  jewelled  stars 
Vism  76;  nila°  a  dark  blue  jewel  J  11. 112;  iv.140; 
DhA  111.254.  The  passage  "  amanirj  udakar)  manir) 
katva"  at  Vism  366  (-t- asuvannar)  leddug  suvannar) 
katva)  refers  clearly  to  meaning  "  jewel  "  (that  the 
water  is  without  a  jewel  or  crystal,  but  is  made  as  clear 
as  crystal ;  a  conjuror's  trick,  cp.  Miln  35).  Whether 
meaning  "  waterpot  "  (as  given  at  Abhp  11 13  &  found 
in  der.  manika)  is  referred  to  here,  is  not  to  be  decided. 
—  2.  a  crystal  used  as  burning-glass  Miln  54. 

-kara  a  jeweller  Miln  331  ;  DhA  11. 152.  -kundala  a 
jewelled  earring,  adj.  wearing  an  (ear)  ornament  of 
jewels  Vin  11. 156  (amutta°  adorned  with  .  .  .)  ;  Vv 
208  (id.);  438  (id.);  Pv  11.9"  (id.);  Th  1.187;  Dh  345 
(mani-kundalesu  =  manisu  ca  kundalesu  ca  mani- 
cittesu  va  kundalesu,  i.  e.  with  gem-studded  earrings 
DhA  IV. 56).  -kuttima  at  VvA  188  is  probably  to  be 
read  as  "kundala  (v.  1.  "kundima).  -khandha  "  jewel- 
bulk,"  i.  e.  a  tremendous  jewel,  large  gem,  functioning 
in  tales  almost  like  a  magic  jewel  J  111.187;  v. 37 
("vannar)  udakar)  water  as  clear  as  a  large  block  of 
crystal),  183  (°pilandhana).  -guha  a  jewelled  cave, 
cave  of  crystal  J  11.417  (where  pigs  live)  ;  SnA  66  (one 
of  three,  viz.  suvanna-guha,  m.°,  rajata°.  At  the 
entrance  of  it  there  grows  the  Manj Osaka  tree),  -canda 
"  the  jewelled  moon."  i.  e.  with  a  crest  like  the  (glittering) 
moon  Vv  64*  (  =  mani-maya-mandaianuviddha-canda- 
mandala-sadisa  mani  VbA  277).  -cchaya  reflection 
of  a  jewel  J  vi.345.  -thuna,  a  jewelled  pillar,  adj.  with 
jewelled  pillars  Vv  54^,  67^.  -pabbata  mountain  of 
gems  SnA  358.  -pallanka  a  jewelled  pallanquin  DhA 
1.274.  -bandha  (place  for)  binding  the  jewi,l(led) 
bracelet,  the  wrist  Vism  255  =  VbhA  238=  KhA  50 
(°atthi).  -bhadda  N.  of  one  of  20  classes  of  people 
mentioned  Miln  191  ;  trsli^  by  Rh.  D.  Miln  trsl.  1.266 
by  "  tumblers."  The  term  occurs  also  at  Nd'  89  & 
92.  Cp.  Sk.  Manibhadra.  N.  of  a  brother  of  Kuvera 
&  prince  of  the  Yaksas.  -maya  made  of,  consisting  of, 
or  caused  by  jewels  Pv  11. 6* ;  VvA  280;  DhA  1.29. 
-ratana  a  precious  stone  or  mineral,  which  is  a  gem 
(jewel)  ;  i.  e.  mani  as  a  kind  of  ratana,  of  which  there 
are  seven  Vism  189  (in  sim.)  ;  Miln  218.  -rupaka  a 
jewelled  image  DhA  1.370 ;  -lakkhana  fortune-telling 
from  jewels  D  1.9  ;  SnA  564. 

-vanna  the  colour  or  appearance  of  crystal ;  i.  e.  as 
clear  as  crystal  (of  water)  J  11.304  (pasanna-l-  ).  -sappa 
a  kind  of  poisonous  snake  (i.  e.  a  mysterious,  magic 
snake)  DA  1. 197. 

Manika  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  manika]  a  waterpot  M  11.39. 
Usually  in  cpd.  udaka"  Vin  1.277:  M  1.354;  S  iv.316; 


A  111.27;  Miln  28;  DhA  1.79.  Whether  this  is  an 
original  meaning  of  the  word  remains  doubtful ;  the 
connection  with  mani  jewel  must  have  been  prevalent 
at  one  time. 

Manika  (f.)  [f.  of  manika,  adj.  fr.  mani]  N.  of  a  charm, 
the  Jewel-charm,  by  means  of  which  one  can  read  other 
people's  minds  D  1.214  (m.  iddhi-vijja),  cp.  Dial.  1.278, 
n.  3-)- 

Manila  [cp.  *Sk.  manila  dewlap  ?]  a  kind  of  tree  Vism  313. 

Man^a  [later  Sk.  manda,  perhaps  dial,  from  *mranda,  cp. 
Sk.  vi-mradati  to  soften.  Attempts  at  etym.  see 
Walde,  Lat.  Wlb.  s.  v.  mollis.  Cp.  also  mattika]  the 
top  part,  best  part  of  milk  or  butter,  etc.  i.  e.  cream, 
scum  ;  fig.  essence  of,  the  pick  of,  finest  part  of  any- 
thing. parisa°  the  cream  of  a  gathering,  the  pick  of 
the  congregation,  excellent  congregation  A  1.72  (or  for 
"mandala  ?)  ;  bodhi"  essence  of  enlightenment,  highest 
state  of  enlightenment ;  in  later  literature  objectively 
"  the  best  place  of  enlightenment,  the  Throne  of  En- 
lightenment or  of  the  Buddha  "  (does  it  stand  for  "man- 
dala in  this  meaning  ?)  J  iv.233  (cp.  puthavi-manda 
ibid.  &  puthavi-mandala  Sn  990) ;  DhA  1.86 ;  11.69 ; 
IV. 72.  sappi"  "  cream  of  butter,"  the  finest  ghee  (cp. 
AvS  MS"*  sarpimanda)  D  1.201  :  A  11.95;  Pug  70; 
Miln  322.  — mandai)  karoti  to  put  into  the  best  con- 
dition, to  make  pleasant  SnA  81.  — manda  at  DhsA 
100  is  to  be  read  baddha  (v.  1.  BB).  Cp.  Expos.  132°. 
-khetta  best  soil,  fertile  ground  Miln  255.  -peyya 
to  be  drunk  like  cream,  i.  e.  of  the  finest  quality, 
first-class  S  11.20  ("rj  idai)  brahmacariyar)). 

Man^aka  [fr.  manda]  I.  the  cream  of  the  milk,  whey,  in 
dadhi"  whey  S  ii.i  11.  —  2.  the  scum  of  stagnant  water, 
i.  e.  anything  that  floats  on  the  surface  &  dirties  the 
water,  water-weeds,  moss  etc.  J  11.304  (gloss  sevala). 

Man4ana  (nt.)  [fr.  man^]  ornament,  adornment,  finery 
D  1.5,  7;  J  V1.64  ;  Pug  21,  58;  Vbh  351  ;  VbhA  477; 
Dhtm  13.     See  under  mada. 

-anuyoga  practice  of  ornamenting,  fondness  of  finery 
Vin  i.igo.  -jatika  of  an  ornament  (-loving)  nature, 
fond  of  dressing  D  1.80=  Vin  11.255  =M  11. 19,  32. 

Man^apa  [cp.  late  Sk.  mandapa]  a  temporary  shed  or  hall 
erected  on  special  or  festive  occasions,  an  awning,  tent 
Vin  1.125  ;  Vism  96,  300  (dhamma-savana"),  339  sq. 
(in  simile);  DhA  1.112;  11.45;  111.206  ("karaka) ;  PvA 
74,  171,  194  ;  VvA  173. 

Mandala  ^cp.  Vedic  mandala]  i.  circle  D  1.134  (pathavi", 
cp.  puthavi"  Sn  990)  ;  Vism  143  (°g  karoti  to  draw  a 
circle,  in  simile),  174  (tipu"  &  rajata"  lead-  &  silver 
circle,  in  kasina  practice);  VvA  147  (of  a  fan=tala- 
pattehi  kata°-vijani).  —  2.  the  disk  of  the  sun  or 
moon ;  suriya"  VvA  224,  271  (divasa-kara°)  ;  canda" 
Vism  174;  PvA  65. — 3.  a  round,  flat  surface,  e.  g. 
janu"  the  disk  of  the  knee,  i.  e.  the  knee  PvA  179; 
nalata"  the  (whole  of  the)  forehead  D  1.106;  Sn  p.  108. 
—  4.  an  enclosed  part  of  space  in  which  something 
happens,  a  circus  ring ;  e.  g.  M  1.446  (circus,  race-ring) ; 
assa"  horse-circus,  raceground,  Vism  308 ;  apana" 
drinking  circle,  i.  e.  hall ;  kila"  play-circle,  i.  e.  games 
J  VI. 332,  333;  DhA  III. 146;  keli"  dice  board  (?)  J 
1379:  g^°  Th  1.1143,  cp.  trs.  ib.  n.  3;  go"  ox-round 
Sn  301  ;  juta"  dicing  table  J  1.293  ;  yuddha"  fighting- 
ring  Vism  190;  ranga"  play-house  VvA  139;  vata" 
tornado  J  1.73.  —  5.  anything  comprised  within  certain 
limits  or  boundaries,  a  group  J  v.418  (chapa"  litter  of 
young  animals). — 6.  border  as  part  of  a  bhikkhu's 
dress,  hem,  gusset  Vin  1.287  ;  11. 177. 

-agga  [cp.  Sk.  mandai'  agra  Halayudha  2,  317  at 
Aufrecht  p.  301]  a  circular  sword  or  sabre  Miln  339- 
-mala  (sometimes  mala)  a  circular  hall  with  a  peaked 
roof,  a  pavilion  D  1.2,  50  (l) ;  Miln  16  (1);  Sn  p.  104; 
SnA  132  (Npl.);  VvA  175. 


Mandalika 


141 


Mattika 


HaQlJ^UkA  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  matidala,  cp.  maridalaka-raja  "  the 
king  of  a  small  country  "  Mvyut  94]  a  district  officer, 
king's  deputy  Vin  111.47  ;  f.  mandalika  =  mandala  4. 
i.  e.  circus,  ring,  round,  in  assa°  race  court  Vin  in. 6. 

Man^Iin  (adj.)  [fr.  mandala]  i.  circular  Th  i,  863 
(mandali-pakara). — 2.  having  a  disk,  orbed  (of  the 
sun)  S  1.51  =VvA  116. 

Man^ita  [pp.  of  mandeti]  adorned,  embellished,  dressed 
up  Sdhp  244,  540.  In  cpd.  °pasadhita  beautifully 
adorned  at  J  1.489;  11.48;  vi.219. — Cp.  abhi". 

Ma9(}aka  'Vedic  manduka]  a  frog  Vv  51^;  J  iv.247 ; 
V.307  ;  VI. 164:  KhA  46:  VvA  217,  218;  Sdhp  292. 
f.  manduki  J  1.34 1.  — Mandiika  is  the  name  of  an  angel 
(devaputta)  at  Vism  208. 

-chapi  a  young  (female)  frog  J  vi.ig2.  -bhakkha 
eating  frogs,  frog  eater  (i.  e.  a  snake)  J  111.16. 

Maiji^^ti  [ina94  to  adorn,  related  to  Lat.  mundus  world, 
cp.  in  meaning  Gr.  «o(t;ioc  =  ornament  Dhtp  103: 
bhiisane.  566 :  bhusayar)]  to  adorn,  embellish,  beautify 
J  III. 1 38  ;  DhA  11.86.  —  pp.  mandita. 

Mata'  [pp.  of  maiinatij  thought,  understood,  considered 
(as  =  -°),  only  late  in  use  Vbh  2  (hina"  panita",  doubtful 
reading) :  Sdhp  55  ;  Mhvs  25,  55  (tassa  matena  according 
to  her  opinion) ;  25,  1 10  (pasu-sama  raata,  pi.  considered 
like  beasts).  Cp.  sam°.  —  Note.  Does  mata-sayika  at 
Th  I,  501  (=Miln  367)  belong  under  this  mata  ?  Then 
mata  would  have  to  be  taken  as  nt.  meaning  "  thought, 
thinking."  but  the  phrase  is  not  without  objection 
both  semantically  &  syntactically.  Mrs.  Rh.  D. 
(Brethren,  p.  240)  trsl^  "  nesting-place  of  thought." 

Mata'  [pp.  of  marati,  mr]  dead  M  1.88  (ekaha°  dead  one 
day) ;  in.  159  (matam  eyya  would  go  to  die) ;  Sn200,  440  , 
J  V.480.  Neg.  amata  see  separate  article.  —  Note. 
mata  at  PvA  1 10  is  to  be  corrected  into  cuta. 

-kicca  duty  towards  the  dead,  rites  for  the  dead 
PvA  274. 

Hataka  [fr.  mata-]  dead,  one  who  is  dead  DhA  11.274. 

-akara  condition  of  one  who  is  dead  J  1.164  (°tj 
dassati  pretends  to  be  dead),  -bhatta  a  meal  for  the 
dead,  food  offered  to  the  manes  J  iv.151  ;  DhA  1.326 
(=petakicca  p.  328):  111.25. 

Hati  (f.)  [Vedic  mati,  fr.  man :  cp.  Av.  maitis,  Lat.  mens, 
mentem  (cp.  E.  mental)  ;  Goth,  ga-munds,  gamin|'i, 
Ohg.  gi-munt.  E.  mind]  mind,  opinion,  thought : 
thinking  of,  hankering  after,  love  or  wish  for  Vin  in.  138 
(purisa"  thought  of  a  man) ;  Mhvs  3.  42  (padipa  lamp 
of  knowledge) ;  15,  214  (amala°  pure-minded)  ;  PvA  151 
(kama-l- ).  — su"  (adj.)  wise,  clever  Mhvs  15.  214  ;  opp.  ] 
du°  (adj.)  foolish  J  in.83  (=duppaiiiia  C.) ;  Pv  1.8=  ! 
(=nippanna  PvA  40);  Sdhp  292.  ] 

Matikata  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  mati-krta,  fr.  matya.  nt.,  harrow  i 
=  Lat.    mateola.    Ohg.     medela    plough]    in    su^    well- 
harrowed  (field)  A  1.229.  239  (khetta). 

Matimant  (adj.)  [mati-l- mant]  sensible,  intelligent,  wise, 
raetri  causa  as  matiml  (fr.  matimanto,  pi.)  at  Sn  881 
(=matima  paiidita  Nd'  289). 

Matta*  (-")  (adj.)  [i.  e.  matta  used  as  adj.]  "  by  measure." 
measured,  as  far  as  the  measure  goes.  i.  e.  —  (i)  con- 
sisting of,  measuring  (with  numerals  or  similar  expres- 
sions) :  appamatto  kali  Sn  659  ;  paficamatta  sata  500 
DA  1.35;  satthimatte  satthiraatte  katva  SnA  510; 
masamattai)  PvA  55  ;  ekadasa"  ib.  20  :  dvadasa"  42  ; 
satta"  47;  tirjsamattehi  bhikkhuhi  saddhir)  53.  —  (2) 
(negative)  as  much  as,  i.  e.  only,  a  mere,  even  as  little 
as.  the  mere  fact  (of),  not  even  (one),  not  any :  anu- 
raattena  pi  pufiiiena  Sn  431  ;  ka^acchumattar)  (not) 
even  a  spoonful  Miln  8  ;  ekapanoa°  PvA  115  ;  citta  "r) 
pi  (not)  even  as  much  as  one  thought  ib.  3  ;  nama°  a 


mere  name  Miln  25  ;  phandana  °r)  not  even  one  throb 
J  V1.7  ;  phandita°  the  mere  fact  of  ...  M  11.24  ;  bindu" 
only  one  drop  PvA  100  ;  rodita"  M  11.24.  —  (3)  (positive) 
as  much  as,  so  much,  some,  enough  (of) ;  vibhava° 
riches  enough  J  v.40  ,  ka  pi  assasa-matta  laddha  found 
some  rehef  ?  PvA  104  (may  be=matta.  f.).  —  (4)  like, 
just  as,  what  is  called,  one  may  say  (often  untranslate- 
able) :  sita'-karana  just  because  he  smiled  VvA  68 ; 
bhesajja-nratta  pita  I  have  taken  medicine  D  1.205 
(=  matta  f.  ?)  okasa  -°o  (nt.)  permission  Sn  p,  94; 
putta"  Uke  children  A  11. 124;  raarana"  (almost)  dead 
M  1.86  :  attano  nattumatte  vandanto  DhA  iv.  1 78.  f. 
matti  (=mattin?)  see  matu°.  —  (5)  as  adv.  (usually 
in  oblique  cases) :  even  at,  as  soon  as,  because  of.  often 
with  other  particles,  like  api.  eva,  pi.  yeva :  vuttamatte 
eva  as  soon  as  said  DhA  1.330  ;  cintitamatte  at  the 
mere  thought  DhA  1.326 ;  nag  jatamattai)  yeva  as 
soon  as  he  was  bom  PvA  195  ;  anumodana-mattena 
because  of  being  pleased  PvA  121  ;  upanitamattam  eva 
as  soon  as  it  was  bought  PvA  192  ;  nimujjana-matte 
yeva  as  soon  as  she  ducked  her  head  under  PvA  47. 
— na  mattena  .  .  .  eva  not  only  .  .  .  but  even  PvA 
18  (n.  m.  nipphala.  attano  danaphalassa  bhagino  eva 
honti). 

Matta-  [pp.  of  madati]  intoxicated  (with),  full  of  joy  about 
(-°).  proud  of.  conceited  Sn  889  (manena  m.) :  J  IV.4 
(vedana°.  full  of  pain,  perhaps  better  with  v.  1.  "patta 
for  °raatta) ;  VvA  158  (hatthi  matto  elephant  in  rut) ; 
DhA  1V.24  (id.) ;  PvA  47  (sura°).  86  (mana-mada°),  280 
(bhoga-mada°). 

-kasini  see  matthak'  asini. 

Mattaka  (adj.)  [fr.  matta']  i.  of  the  size  of  Sdhp  238 
(pani°).  —  2.  only  as  much  as.  mere  D  1.12  (appa°, 
ora".  sila°);  J  iv.228  (mana°) ;  DhA  iv.178  (pitu- 
mattakar)  gahetva). 

Mattatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  matta]  (the  fact  of)  consisting  of, 
or  being  only  .  .   .  PvA  199  (magsa-pesi'^). 

Matta  (f.)  [Vedic  matra,  of  ma]  measure,  quantity,  right 
measure,  moderation  Sn  971  (mattar)  so  janfia) ;  Dh  1.35 
(matta  ti  pamanar)  vuccati).  —  Abl.  mattaso  in  °karin 
doing  in  moderation,  doing  moderately  Pug  37  (  =pama- 
nena  padesa-mattam  eva  karonti  ti).  —  In  cpds. 
shortened  to  matta". 

-atthiya  (mattatthiya  =  °atthika)  desirous  of  modera- 
tion, moderate  Th  i.  922.  -fifiu  knowing  the  right 
measure,  moderate,  temperate  (bhojane  or  bhojanamhi 
in  eating)  A  11.40  :  Sn  338  ;  Pug  25  ;  Dh  8.  Cp.  jaga- 
riya.  -iifiuta  moderation  (in  eating)  D  111.2 13;  Nd' 
483  ;  Dh  185  ;  Pug  25  ;  Vbh  249.  360  ;  Dhs  1348 ;  DhA 
11.238.  -sukha  (metri  causi :  matta  sukha)  measured 
happiness,  i.  e.  small  happiness  Dh  290  (cp.  DhA 
111.449). 

Matti  (-sambhava)  [for  *mati°  =  matu^  =  *matr,  after 
pitti°=pitu°  =  *pitr]  born  (from  a  mother)  Sn  620 
(  =  matari  sambhuta  SnA  466)  =  Dh  396  (=matu 
santike  udarasmii)  sambhuta  DhA  iv.158). 

Mattika  (adj.)  (°-)  [fr.  mattika]  made  of  clay,  clay- ;  only 
in  cpds.  : 

-kundala  clay  earring  S  1.79  (v.  1.  mattika").  -bha- 
jana  clay  or  earthenware  vessel  Sn  577  ;  Vism  231  (in 
comparison);  DhA  1.130.  -7aka  clay  fibre  DhsA  321 
(v.  1.  °takka,  perhaps  gloss  =  takku  spindle,  see  takka^). 

Mattika  (f)  [cp-  Vedic  mrttika,  der.  fr.  Vedic  mrt  (mrd) 
soil,  earth,  clay  ;  with  P.  mancja,  Sk,  vimradati.  Gr. 
^XaSapos  soft,  Osil.  mylsna  dust,  Goth,  mulda,  Ags. 
molde  (E.  mould,  mole  =  mouIdwarp).  to  same  root 
mid  as  in  Sk.  mrdu  =  Lat.  mollis  soft.  Gr.  afiaXivvui  to 
weaken.  Sk.  mardati  &  mrdnati  to  crush,  powder.  Cans, 
mardayati ;  also  in  cognate  °m)d  as  appearing  in  Gr. 
/ifXiu     to    melt  =  Ags    meltan,    Ohg.    smelzan]   'i.  clay 


Matte)rya 


142 


Maddava 


J  V1.372  ;  Mhvs  29,  5  sq.  — tamba°  red  clay  DhA 
IV.  106;  PvA  191.  mattika  pi.  kinds  of  clay  (used  in 
cosmetics,  like  Fuller's  earth)  J  v. 89  (nana-cunnani-f 
mattika;  see  also  cunna). — 2.  loam,  mud  M  111.9 1 
(alla°  fresh  loam  or  mud);  Vism  123  (aruija-vanna)  ; 
KhA  59  (pandu) ;  VvA  65  ;  PvA  216  (aruna-vanna). 

-thala  bowl  of  clay  DhA  iv.67.  -pinda  a  lump  of 
clay  or  loam  DA  1.289  ;  same  trope  at  PvA  175. 

Matteyya  (&  metteyya)  (adj.)  [fr.  mata,  *matreyya> 
*matteyya]  reverential  towards  one's  mother,  mother- 
loving  D  III. 74;  Pv  ii.7'8  (=matu  hita  PvA  104; 
v.  1.  mett°).  Spelling  at  D  in. 72  is  metteyya.  It  is 
difficult  to  decide  about  correct  spelling,  as  metteyya 
is  no  doubt  influenced  by  the  foil,  petteyya,  with  which 
it  is  always  combined. 

Matteyyata  (&  mett°)  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  matteyya]  filial  love 
towards  one's  mother ;  always  comb''  with  pettesryata 
D  III. 145  (v.  1.  metf);  Nd^  294  (mett°),  Dh  332; 
DhA  iv.33. 

Uattha  [cp.  Vedic  masta(ka)  skull,  head,  Vedic  mastiska 
brains ;  perhaps  to  Lat.  mentum  chin,  Cymr.  mant 
jawbone ;  indirectly  also  to  Lat.  mons  mountain]  the 
head,  etc.  Only  in  cpd.  mattha-lunga  [cp.  Sk.  mastu- 
lunga]  the  brain  Vin  1.274  '■  Sn  199  ;  Kh  in.  ;  J  1.493  ; 
KhA  234  ;  Vism  260  (in  detail)  264,  359  ;  VbhA  63,  243, 
249  ;  DhA  11.68  ;  PvA  78,  80.  —  See  also  matthaka. 

Matthaka  [cp.  mattha]  the  head.  fig.  top,  summit  J  111.206 
=  iv.4;  IV.173,  457;  V.478;  DA  1.226  (pabbata");  Pv 
IV. 16';  DhA  1. 184.  matthaka-matthakena  (from  end 
to  end)  J  1,202  ;  m.304.  Loc.  matthake  as  adv.-  (i)  at 
the  head  DhA  1.109;  {2)  at  the  distance  of  (-°)  DhA 
1-367;  (3)  on  top  of  (-°)  J  v.  1 63  (vammika°);  Mhvs 
23,  80  (sisa°);  Yugandhara"  Miln  6;  DhA  11. 3  (uddha- 
na°). 

-asin  sitting  on  top  (of  the  mountain)  J  vi.497  ( =  pab- 
bata-matthake  nisinna  C. ;  gloss  matta-kasin  i.  e. 
wildly  in  love,  expH  by  kama-mada-raatta).  The 
reading  is  not  clear,  -tela  oil  for  the  head  KhA  64 
(=muddhani  tela  Vism  262). 

Hathati  [Vedic  math,  manth  to  twirl,  shake  about,  stir 
etc.  ;  cp.  Lat.  mamphur  part  of  the  lathe  =  Ger.  mandel 
("mangle"),  E.  mandrel:  Lith.  menturis  churning 
stick,  Gr.  ftoOog  tumult  ^oBovpa  shaft  of  rudder.  — 
The  Dhtp  (126)  gives  both  roots  (math  &  manth)  and 
expl^  by  "  vilolana,"  as  does  Dhtm  (183)  by  "  vilo- 
tana  "]  to  churn,  to  shake,  disturb,  upset.  Only  in 
Cans,  matheti  to  agitate,  crush,  harass,  upset  (cittai)) 
S  IV.2IO;  Sn  50  (  =  taseti  hapeti  Nd^  492);  Pv  IV.7' 
(kammanar)  vipako  mathaye  manar)  ;  C  261:  abhi- 
bhaveyya) ;  Miln  385  (vayu  padapc  mathayati ;  .  .  . 
kilesa  mathayitabba).  —  pp.  mathita.  See  also  abhi- 
matthati  (sic)  cS:  nimmatheti. 

Mathana  (adj.  nt.)  [fr.  math]  shaking  up,  crushing, 
harassing,  confusing  Miln  21  (+  maddana) ;  DhA  1.3 12  ; 
PvA  265. 

Mathita  [pp.  of  matheti]  i.  (churned)  buttermilk  Vin 
11.30 1  (amathita-kappa). — 2.  upset,  mentally  un- 
balanced state,  disturbance  of  mind  through  passion, 
conceit,  etc.  M  1.486  (maniiita-|- ).  Neumann  trsl- 
"  Vermutung  "  i.  e.  speculation,  guessing  (v.  1.  matth"). 

Hada  [Vedic  raada,  mad  (see  majjati),  Idg.  *mad,  as  in 
Av.  mata  intoxication,  drink,  mad,  to  get  intoxicated 
orig.  meaning  "  drip,  be  full  of  liquid  or  fat  "  ;  cp.  Gr. 
fialda  dissolve,  /jaaTog  breast  (/ja?(;e>  Amazone),  Lat. 
madeo  to  be  wet,  Ohg.  mast  fattening.  Sk.  meda  grease, 
fat,  Gr.  /If  Jea  ;  fiiaroi;  full ;  Goth,  mats  eatables,  Ags. 
mos,  Ohg.  muos  =  gemuse,  etc.  Perhaps  connected  with 
*med  in  Lat.  medeor  to  heal.  For  further  relations 
see  Walde,  Lat.  Wtb.  s.  v.  madeo.  —  The  Dhtp  (412)  & 


Dhtm  (642)  explain  mad  by  "  ummade  "  Dlitm  210 
also  by  "  muda,  mada  =  santose "]  i.  intoxication, 
sensual  excess,  in  formula  davaya  madaya  mandanaya 
(for  purposes  of  sport,  excess,  personal  charm  etc.) 
M  i.355=A  11.40=  Ndi  496=Nd2  5^o  =  Pug  2i=Dhs 
1346,  1348.  The  commentator's  expl"  bearing  directly 
or  indirectly  on  this  passage  distinguish  several  kinds 
of  mada,  viz.  mana-mada  &  purisa-raada  (at  DhsA  403  ; 
Vism  293).  or  mutthika-mall'  adayo  viya  madatthar) 
bala-mada-nimittar)  porisa-mada-nimittari  ca  ti  vuttar) 
(at  Vism  31).  Sn  218  (mada-pamada  on  which  passage 
SnA  273  comments  on  mada  with  jati-mad'  adi-bheda 
mada).  —  2.  (as  mental  state  or  habit)  pride,  conceit 
Miln  289  (mana,  m.,  pamada) ;  Vbh  345  (where  27  such 
states  are  given,  beginning  with  jati^,  gotta",  arogya°, 
yobbana°,  jivita-mada),  350  (where  mada  is  para- 
phrased by  majjana  majjitattai)  mano  .  .  .  unnati 
.  .  .  dhajo  sampaggaho  ketukamyata  cittassa :  same 
formula,  as  concluding  exegesis  of  mana  at  Nd''  505  & 
Dhs  1 1 16):  sometimes  more  def.  characterised  with 
phrase  mada-matta  elated  with  the  pride  or  intoxi- 
cation of  .  .  .  {-").  e.  g.  A  1.147  (yobbana",  arogya", 
jivita°);  PvA  86  (mana°),  280  (bhoga°).  —  The  tradi- 
tional exegesis  distinguishes  only  3  mada's,  viz.  arogya- 
mada  the  pride  of  health,  yobbana°  of  youth,  jivita°  of 
life:  D  in. 220  ;  A  1.146. 

-nimmadana  "  disintoxication  from  intoxication," 
freedom  from  pride  or  conceit  A  11.34  '■  ^"  '-^^  '•  Vism 
293- 

Madana  (nt.)  [fr.  mad]  lit.  making  drunk,  intoxication 
Nd-  540  C.  (in  formula  davaya  madaya  madanaya, 
instead  of  mandanaya:  see  under  mada  i);  in  cpd. 
°yuta  intoxicated,  a  name  for  the  Yakkhas  J  1.204.  — 
Cp.  nimmadana. 

Madaniya  (adj.  nt.)  [orig.  grd.  of  madati]  i.  intoxicating 
D  n.185  (sadda  vaggu  rajaniya  kamaniya  m.).  — -2.  ift- 
toxication  VvA  73. 

Hadira  (f.)  [of  adj.  Vedic  madira  intoxicating]  intoxicat- 
ing drink,  spirit  J  v.425  ;  DhsA  48. 

Madda  i .  [fr.  mrd,  Sk.  marda]  crushing  etc. ;  kneading, 
paste,  in  pittha  paste  of  flower  Vin  11. 151  ;  J  ni.226 
(pitthi"). — 2.  [dialectical,  cp.  Sk.  madra]  N.  of  a 
country  &  its  inhabitants,  in  "rattha  SnA  68  sq. ; 
"rajakula  KhA  73. 

-vina  a  sort  of  girdle  Vin  11.136. 

Maddati  [cp.  Vedic  myd  to  crush  ;  see  etym.  under  mat- 
tika] I.  to  tread  on,  trample  on  (ace),  crush  J  in. 245, 
372  (ppr.  maddamana)  ;  DhA  n.66.  —  2.  to  defeat, 
destroy  Sn  770  ( =  abhibhavati  Nd'  12);  Nd*  85  (mad- 
ditva  =  abhibhuyya)  ;  SnA  450;  Mhvs  i,  41. — fig.  to 
crush  a  heresy  :  vadai)  m.  Mhvs  36,  41.  —  3.  to  neglect 
(an  advice),  spurn  J  ni.211  (ovadar)).  —  4.  to  mix  up, 
knead,  jumble  together  DhA  n.155.  —  5.  to  thresh 
J  1. 215. — 6.  to  break  down,  upset  J  1.500  (vatir),  a 
fence).  — ■  7.  to  draw  together  (a  net)  J  1.208.  — Caus.  L 
maddeti  to  cause  to  be  trampled  on  Mhvs  29.  4  (aor. 
maddayi). — Caus.  IL  maddapeti  to  cause  to  be 
threshed  Vin  n.i8o.  — pp.  maddita.     See  also  pari". 

Haddana  (nt.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  mardana,  fr.  mrd]  i.  crushing, 
grinding,  destroying  J  iv.26  ;  Miln  2  i  (adj.,-|-  mathana) ; 
Sdhp  449;  Dhtp  156.  —  2.  threshing  Miln  360. — See 
also  nimmaddana,  pamaddana,  parimaddana. 

Maddari  (i.)  [?]  a  species  of  bird,  in  cpd.  ambaka"  A  1.188. 

Maddava  (adj.  nt.)  [fr.  mrdu,  cp.  Epic  Sk.  mardava] 
t.  mild,  gentle,  soft,  suave  Dhs  1340;  Vbh  339;  Miln 
229  (cittai)  mudukai)  m.  siniddhag),  313  (mudu°),  361 
(among  the  30  best  virtues,  with  siniddha  &  mudu).  — 
2.  (fr.  madda)  as  Np.  name  of  a  king,  reigning  in 
Sagala,   the  capital  of  Madda. — 3.  withered  Dh  377 


Maddavata 


143 


Manunna 


(  =  milata  DhA  iv.112). — nt.  maddavag  mildness, 
softness,  gentleness  Sn  250  (ajjava+  ),  292  (id.)  ;  J 
111.274  (as  one  of  the  10  raja-dhamma) ;  v.347  (  =  metta- 
cittari)  ;  DhsA  151. 

Maddavata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  maddava]  gentleness,  softness, 
suavity  Dhs  44.  1340;  DhsA  151. 

Haddalaka  [etym.  ?]  a  kind  of  bird  J  vi.538. 

Maddita  [pp.  of  maddeti,  see  maddati]  i.  kneaded,  mixed, 
in  su"  Vism  124. — 2.  crushed,  defeated,  in  su"  Miln 
284.  — Cp.  pa",  pari". 

Maddin  (adj . )  [f r.  mrd,  cp.  Sk.  mardin  =  mardana]  crushing, 
destroying  Sdhp  218.     Cp.  pamaddin. 

Haddhita  [of  mrdh]  see  pari". 

Madhu  [cp.  Vedic  madhu,  Gr.  fiiOv  wine.  Lith.  medus 
honey,  midus  wme.  Ohg.  metu  =  Ger.  met  wine.  Mcst 
likely  to  root  *med  to  be  full  of  juice  :  see  under  madatil 
honey  J  1.157  sq.  ;  IV.117;  Dh  6g  (madhu  va  read  as 
madhuva)  ;  Mhvs  5,  53;  DhsA  320;  DhA  11. 197  (alia" 
fresh  honey).  —  pi.  madhuni  Mhvs  5.  31.  — The  Abhp 
(533)  also  gives  "  wine  from  the  blossom  of  Bassia 
latifolia  "  as  meaning.  —  On  madhu  in  similes  see 
J.P.T.S.  1907,  121. 

-atthika  (madh°)  at  J  111.493  is  with  v.  1.  to  be  read 
madhu-tthika  (q.  v.  below).  The  proposal  of  Kern's 
(Toev.  s.  V.)  to  read  madh'  atthika  "  with  sweet  kernels  " 
cannot  be  accepted.  The  C.  expl°*  rightly  by  "  ma- 
dhura-phalesu  pakkhitta  madhu  viya,  madhura-phalo 
hutva."  -atthika  (madhu")  desirous  of  honey,  seeking 
honey  J  iv.205  ;  Mhvs  5,  50.  -apana  (madhv")  honey 
shop  Mhvs  5.  52.  -asava  (madhv°)  honey  extract, 
wine  from  the  flower  of  Bassia  latifolia  VvA  73  (as 
one  of  the  5  kinds  of  intoxicating  liquors),  -kara 
"honey-maker,"  bee  J  iv.265  ;  Vism  136  (in  simile); 
DhA  1.374.  -ganda  honey-comb  Mhvs  22,  42  ;  34,  52. 
-tthika  [madhu -t- thika,  which  latter  stands  for  thiya. 
fr.  stya  to  congeal,  drip  ;  see  thika,  thina,  thiya  and 
theva]  dripping  with  honey,  full  of  honey  J  111.493  (so 
read  for  madh-atthika)  ;  vi.529  (  =  madhui)  paggha- 
ranto  C).  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  unnecessarily  reads  as 
°aUhika  which  he  t^kes  =  ''atthika.  -da  giving  honey, 
liberal  Mhvs  5,  60  (Asoka).  -patala  honey-comb 
J  1.262  ;  DhA  1.59  ;  111.323.  -pindika  a  ball  of  honey 
(to  eat),  honey-food,  a  meal  with  honey  Vin  1.4  ;  M 
I.I  14.  -pita  having  drunk  honey,  drunk  with  honey 
S  1.2 1 2.  -(b)bata  "  courting  honey,"  a  bee  Davs  111.65. 
-bindu  a  drop  of  honey  Vism  531  ;  Vbh.\  146  ("giddha, 
in  comparison),  -makkhika  smeared  with  honey  J 
1. 158.  -madhuka  dripping  with  honey,  full  of  honey 
J  VI. 529.  -mehika  referring  to  a  particular  disease 
madhumeha  ("  honey-urine,"  diabetes  ?)  Vin  iv.8. 
-latthika  liquorice  (no  ref.  ?) ;  cp.  Latthi-madhuka- 
vana  J  1,68.  -laja  sweet  corn  J  iv.214.  281.  -vanija 
honey  seller  Mhvs  5,  49.  -ssava  flowing  with  honev 
Pv  11.9". 

Hadhnka  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  madhu]  connected  with  honey. 
I.  (n.)  the  tree  Bassia  latifolia  (lit.  honey  tree)  Vin 
1.246  ;  J  v. 324,  405  ;  VI. 529  ;  Miln  165.  —  2.  the  fruit  of 
that  tree  J  iv.434.  —  3.  (adj.)  {-")  full  of  honey  J 
VI. 529  (madhu"  containing  honey). — 4.  connected 
with  an  intoxicating  drink,  given  to  the  drink  of  (-°) 
J  IV.117  (sura-meraya°). 

-atthika  the  kernel  (of  the  fruit)  of  Bassia  latifolia 
Vism  353  =  KhA  43  (which  latter  reads  madhuka- 
phal'  atthi ;  in  the  description  of  the  finger  nails). 
-puppha  the  flower  of  Bassia  latifolia  from  which  honey 
is  extracted  for  liquor  Vin  1.246  ("rasa  liquorice  juice) : 
J  I-430- 

Hadhnka  (f.)  [fr.  madhuka]  honey  drink,  sweet  drink, 
liquor  Mhvs  5,  52. 


Madhara  (adj.)  [fr.  madhu]  i.  sweet  Sn  50  ;  J  111.493 ; 
V.324  ;  Pv  11.67:  PvA  119,  147.^2.  of  intoxicating 
sweetness,  liquor-like,  intoxicating  J  iv.  117.  —  3.  (nt.) 
sweetness,  sweet  drink  Dh  363  ;  J  1.271  (catu°  the  4 
sweet  drinks,  used  as  cure  after  poison) ;  Dhs  629 ; 
DhsA  320.  —  4.  (nt.)  flattery,  praise  SnA  287  (opp. 
avanna). 

-rasa  sweet  (i.  e.  honey-)  juice,  sweet  liquor  DhA 
11.50;  PvA  119.  -ssara  sweet-sounding  VvA  57; 
Pv.\  151  ;  Mhvs  5,  32. 

Madhoiaka  (adj.)  [fr.  madhura,  cp.  similarly  madhuka  > 
madhu]  full  of  sweet  drink,  intoxicated,  in  phrase 
madhuraka-jatokayo  viya  "  like  an  intoxicated  body," 
i.  e.  without  control,  weak.  The  usual  translation  has 
been  "  become  languid  or  weak  "  ("  erschlafft  "  Ger.). 
Franke,  Digha  Ubs.  202  (where  more  literature)  trans- 
lates :  "  Ich  fuhlte  mich  schwach,  wie  ein  zartes  Pfldnz- 
chen,"  hardly  justifiable.  —  D  11.99  ;  M  1.334  •  S  111.106  , 
A  III. 69.  The  description  refers  to  a  state  of  swooning, 
like  one  in  a  condition  of  losing  consciousness  through 
intoxication.  Rh.  D.  (Dial.  11. 107)  translates  "  my 
body  became  weak  as  a  creeper,"  hardly  correct. 

Madhorata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  madhura]  sweetness  J  1.68. 

Madhuratta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  madhura]  sweetness  Mhvs  2,  13. 

Manag  (adv.)  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  manak^  "  a  little  (of  some- 
thing) "  prob.  derived  from  Vedic  mana  f.  a.  gold  weight 
=  Gr.  fiva]  "  by  a  certain  weight,"  i.  e.  a  little,  some- 
what, almost,  well-nigh,  nearly.  Comb''  with  vata  in 
exclamation:  M  11.123  ("i-  v.  bho  anassama) ;  DhA 
III.  147  (m.  V.  then  nasita).  Often  in  phrase  man' 
amhi  (with  pp.).  "  I  nearly  was  so  &  so,"  e.  g. 
Vin  1.109  (vulho) ;  J  1.405  (upakulito) ;  111.435  (mata), 
531  (marapito).  Cp.  BSk.  manasmi  khadita  MVastu 
11.450. 

Manata  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  mano]  mentality  DhsA  143  (in 
expl°  of  attamanata). 

Manasa  (adj.)  [the  -°  form  of  mano,  an  enlarged  form,  for 
which  usually  either  °mana  or  "manasa]  having  a  mind, 
with  such  &  such  a  mind  Sn  942  (nibbana"  "  a  nibbana 
mind,"  one  who  is  intent  upon  N.,  cp.  expl°  at  SnA 
567);  Pv  1.6'  (paduttha-manasa  f.,  maybe  "manasa; 
but  PvA  34  expl"'  "  paduttha-citta  padutthena  va 
manasa).     See  also  adhimanasa  under  adhimana. 

Manassa  (nt.)  ['*manasyar),  abstr.  der.  fr.  mana(s)]  of  a 
mind,  only  in  cpds.  do"  &  so"  (q.    v.). 

Manati  [cp.  Sk.  ramati,  nqr^  to  crush,  destroy;  only  in 
Commentator's  fanciful  etymological  analysis  of  vera- 
mani  at  DhsA  218  (verag  manati  (sic.)  vinasetl  ti  v.) 
and  KhA  24  (verai)  mariati  ti  v.,  verai)  pajahati  vino- 
deti  etc.). 

Manapa  (adj.)  [cp.  BSk.  manapa]  pleasing,  pleasant, 
charming  Sn  22.  759;  Dh  339  ("ssavana) ;  VvA  71; 
PvA  3,  9.  Often  in  comb°  piya  manapa,  e.  g.  D  11.19  ; 
III. 167  ;  J  11.155  :  IV. 132.  —  Opp.  a",  e.  g.  Pug  32. 

Manapika  =  manapa,  Vbh  380  ;  Miln  362. 

Hanuja  [manu-t-ja,  i.  e.  sprung  from  Manu,  cp.  etym.  of 
manussa  s.  v.]  human  being;  man  A  iv.159;  Sn  458, 
661,  1043  sq.  ;  Dh  306,  334.  Nd*  496  (expl"'  as  "  ma- 
nussa "  &  "  satta  "). 

-ddhipa  lord  of  men  Mhvs  19,  32.     -inda  king  of  men, 
great  king  Sn  553  ;  J  vi.98. 

HanoMa  (adj.)  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  manojfia]  pleasing,  delight- 
ful, beautiful  Vv  84"  (  =  manorama  VvA  340) ;  J  1.207  • 
11.33 1  :  Pv  11.12^;  1V.12';  Miln  175,  398;  VvA  11,  36; 
PvA  251  ;  adv.  °g  pleasantly,  delightfully  J  iv.252. — 
Opp.  a"  unpleasant  J  vi.207. 


Manute 


144 


Mano 


Manute  [Med.  form  of  mannati]  to  think,  discern,  under- 
stand DhsA  123, 

Manussa  [fr.  manus,  cp.  Vedic  manujya.  Connected 
etym.  with  Goth,  manna  =  man]  a  human  being,  man. 
The  popular  etym.  connects  m.  with  Manu(s),  the 
ancestor  of  men,  e.  g.  KhA  123  :  ".Manuno  apacca  ti 
manussa,  porana  pana  bhananti  '  mana-ussannataya 
manussa  '  ;  te  Jambudipaka,  Aparagoyanika,  Uttara- 
kuruka,  Pubbavidehaka  ti  catubbidha."  Similarly 
with  the  other  view  of  connecting  it  with  "  mind  " 
VvA  18:  "  manassa  ussannataya  manussa"  etc.  Cp. 
also  VvA  23,  where  manussa-nerayika,  °peta.  °tirac- 
chana  are  distinguished.  — Sn  75,  307,  333  sq.,  611  sq.  ; 
Dh  85,  188,  195  sq.,  321  ;  Nd'  97  (as  gati),  340,  484 
("phassa  of  Sn  964)  ;  Vism  312  ;  VbhA  455  (var.  clans)  ; 
DhA  1.364.  — amanussa  not  human,  a  deva,  a  ghost, 
a  spirit;  in  cpds.  "haunted."  ilke  "kantara  J  1.395, 
"tthana  Vv  84^  (cp.  VvA  334  where  expl"') ;  °sadda  DhA 
1.315.     See  also  separately  amanussa. 

-attabhava  human  existence  PvA  71,  87,  122.  -itthi 
a  human  woman  PvA  48,  154.  -inda  lord  of  men  S 
1.69 ;  Mhvs  19,  33.  -khadaka  man  eater,  cannibal 
(usually  appl'^  to  Yakkhas)  VbhA  ^51.  -deva  (a)  "  god 
of  men,"  i.  e.  king  Pv  11. S'^ ;  (b)  men  &  gods  (?)  VvA  32  i 
(Hardy,  in  note  takes  it  as  "  gods  of  men,"  i.  e.  brah- 
mana).  -dhamma  condition  of  man,  human  state 
VvA  24.  See  also  uttari-manussa  dhamma.  -bhiita  as 
a  human,  in  human  form  Pv  i.ii^;  11. i'".  -loka  the 
world  of  men  Sn  683. 

Manussatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr,  manussa]  human  existence, 
state  of  men  It  19;  Vv  34'*;  SnA  48,  51  ;  Sdhpa?  sq. 

Manussika  (adj.)  [fr.  manussa]  see  under  a". 

Manesika  (f)  [mano+esika^]  "mind-searching."  i.  e. 
guessing  the  thoughts  of  others,  mind-reading ;  a 
practice  forbidden  to  bhikkhus  D  1.7  (  =  m.  nama 
manasa  cintita-janana-kila  DA  1.86);  Vin  11. lo. 

Mano  &  Mana(s)  (nt.)  [Vedic  manah,  see  etym.  under 
maniiati]  I.  Declension.  Like  all  other  nouns  of  old 
s-stems  mano  has  partly  retained  the  s  forms  (cp. 
cetah  >  ceto)  &  partly  follows  the  a-declension.  The 
form  mano  is  found  throughout  in  cpds.  as  mano°,  the 
other  mana  at  the  end  of  cpds.  as  "mana.  From  stem 
manas  an  adj.  manasa  is  formed  and  the  der.  manasa 
&  manassa  (-°).  —  nom.  mano  freq.  ;  &  manag  Dh  96  ; 
ace.  mano  Sn  270,  388 ;  SnA  11,  and  freq.  ;  also  manai) 
Sn  659  =  A  11.3;  v.i7i=Nett  132;  Sn  678;  Cp  i.S^ ; 
Vism  466 ;  gen.  dat.  manaso  Sn  470,  967 ;  Dh  390 
(manaso  piya) ;  Pv  11.  i^'  (manaso  piya  =  manasa  piya 
PvA  71) ;  instr.  manasa  Sn  330,  365,  834  (m.  cintayanto), 
1030;  M  III. 179;  Dh  I  ;  Pv  11.9'  (m.  pi  cetaye) ;  also 
manena  DhA  1.42  ;  DhsA  72  ;  abl.  manato  S  iv.65  ; 
DhA  1.23  ;  Vism  466  ;  loc.  manasmig  S  iv.65  ;  manamhi 
Vism  466  ;  also  mane  DhA  1.23,  &  manasi  (see  this 
in  comp"  manasi  karoti,  below).  — •  II.  Meaning  :  mind, 
thought  D  Iii.q6,  102,  206,  226,  244,  269,  281  ;  S  1.16, 
172  ;  11.94  '■  ^I  m-55  '■  A  ni.4?t3  ;  v.171  ;  Sn  77,  424,  829. 
873  ;  Dh  1 16,  300  ;  Sdhp  369.  —  i.  Mano  represents  the 
intellectual  functioning  of  consciousness,  while  viiinana 
represents  the  field  of  sense  and  sense-reaction  ("  per- 
ception "),  and  citta  the  subjective  aspect  of  con- 
sciousness (cp.  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  Buddhist  Psychology  p.  19) 
—  The  rendering  with  "mind"  covers  most  of  the 
connotation  ;  sometimes  it  may  be  translated  "  thought." 
As  "  mind  "  it  embodies  the  rational  faculty  of  man, 
which,  as  the  subjective  side  in  our  relation  to  the 
objective  world,  may  be  regarded  as  a  special  sense, 
acting  on  the  world,  a  sense  adapted  to  the  rationahty 
(reasonableness,  dhamma)  of  the  phenomena,  as  our 
eye  is  adapted  to  the  visibUity  of  the  latter.  Thus  it 
ranges  as  the  6""  sense  in  the  classification  of  the  senses 
and  their  respective  spheres  (the  ayatanani  or  relation^ 


of  subject  and  object,  the  ajjhattikani  &  the  bahirani : 
see  ayatana  3).  These  are:  (i)  cakkhu  (eye)  which 
deals  with  the  sight  of  form  (rupa) ;  (2)  sola  (ear) 
deaUng  with  the  hearing  of  sound  (sadda) ;  (3)  ghana 
(nose)  with  the  smelUng  of  smells  (gandha) ;  (4 )  jivha 
(tongue),  with  the  tasting  of  tastes  (rasa)  ;  (5)  kaya 
(touch),  with  the  touching  of  tangible  objects  (phot- 
thabba) ;  (6)  mano,  with  the  sensing  (viiinaya)  of 
rational  objects  or  cognisables  (dhamma).  Thus  it  is 
the  sensus  communis  (Mrs.  Rh.  D.  Buddh.  Psych.  140, 
163)  which  recognises  the  world  as  a  "  mundus  sensi- 
bilis "  (dhamma).  Both  sides  are  an  inseparable 
unity  :  the  mind  fits  the  world  as  the  eye  fits  the  light, 
or  in  other  words  :  mano  is  the  counterpart  of  dhamma, 
the  subjective  dh.  Dhamma  in  this  sense  is  the 
rationality  or  lawfulness  of  the  Universe  (see  dhamma 
B.  i).  Cosmic  Order,  Natural  Law.  It  may  even  be 
taken  quite  generally  as  the  "  empirical  world "  (as 
Geiger.  e.  g.  interprets  it  in  his  Pali  Dhamma  p.  80-82, 
pointing  out  the  substitution  of  vatthu  for  dhamma  at 
Kvu  126  sq.  i.  e.  the  material  world),  as  the  world  of 
"  things,"  of  phenomena  in  general  without  specifica- 
tion as  regards  sound,  sight,  smell,  etc.  —  Dhamma  as 
counterpart  of  mano  is  rather  an  abstract  (pluralistic) 
representation  of  the  world,  i.  e.  the  phenomena  as  such 
with  a  certain  inherent  rationality  ;  manas  is  the  receiver 
of  these  phenomena  in  their  abstract  meaning,  it  is 
the  abstract  sense,  so  to  speak.  Of  course,  to  explain 
manas  and  its  function  one  has  to  resort  to  terms  of 
materiality,  and  thus  it  happens  that  the  term  vijanati, 
used  of  manas,  is  also  used  of  the  5"'  sense,  that  of 
touch  (to  which  mano  is  closely  related,  cp.  our  E. 
expressions  of  touch  as  denoting  rational,  abstract 
processes :  warm  &  cold  used  figuratively ;  to  grasp 
anything  ;  texxoT-stricken ;  deeply  moved  feeling  >  Lat. 
palpare  to  palpitate,  etc.).  We  might  say  of  the  mind 
"  sensing,"  that  manas  "  senses  "  (as  a  refined  sense 
of  touch)  the  "  sensibility  "  (dhamma)  of  the  objects,  or 
as  Cpd.  183  expresses  it  "  cognizable  objects."  See  also 
kaya  II.  ;  and  phassa.  —  2.  In  Buddhist  Psychological 
Logic  the  concept  mano  is  often  more  definitely  cir- 
cumscribed by  the  addition  of  the  terms  (raan-)ayatana, 
(man-)indriya  and  (mano-)dhatu,  which  are  practically 
all  the  same  as  mano  (and  its  objective  correspondent 
dhamma).  Cp.  also  below  No.  3.  The  additional 
terms  try  to  give  it  the  rank  of  a  category  of  thought. 
On  mano-dhatu  and  m-ayatana  see  also  the  discourse 
by  S.  Z.  Aung.  Cpd.  256-59.  with  Mrs.  Rh.  D.'s  apt 
remarks  on  p.  259.  —  The  position  of  manas  among  the 
6  ayatanas  (or  indriyas)  is  one  of  control  over  the  other 
5  (pure  and  simple  senses).  This  is  expressed  e.  g.  at 
M  1.295  (commented  on  at  DhsA  72)  and  S  v.217  (mano 
nesar)  gocara-visayag  paccanubhoti :  mano  enjoys  the 
function-spheres  of  the  other  senses ;  cp.  Geiger, 
Dhamma  81;  as  in  the  Sankhya :  Garbe,  Sankhya 
Philosophic  252  sq.).  Cp.  Vin  1.36  ;  "  ettha  ca  te  mano 
na  ramittha  rupesu  saddesu  atho  rasesu."  —  3.  As 
regards  the  relation  of  manas  to  citta,  it  may  be  stated, 
that  citta  is  more  substantial  (as  indicated  by  transla- 
tion "  heart  ").  more  elemental  as  the  seat  of  emotion, 
whereas  manas  is  the  finer  element,  a  subtler  feeling  or 
thinking  as  such.  See  also  citta^  I.,  and  on  rel.  to 
viiinana  &  citta  see  citta^  IV.  2''.  In  the  more  popular 
opinion  and  general  phraseology  however  manas  is 
almost  synonymous  with  citta  as  opposed  to  body, 
cittag  iti  pi  mano  iti  pis  11.94.  So  in  the  triad  "  thought 
(i.  e.  intention)  speech  and  action  "  manas  interchanges 
with  citta:  see  kaya  III. — The  formula  runs  kayena 
vacaya  manasa,  e.  g.  M  111.178  (sucaritag  caritva) ; 
Dh  391  (natthi  dukkatag),  cp.  Dh  96:  santag  tassa 
manag.  santa  vaca  ca  kamma  ca.  Besides  with  citta: 
kayena  vacaya  uda  cetasa  S  1.93,  102  ;  A  1.63.  rakkhi- 
tena  k.  vacaya  cittena  S  11.231  ;  iv.112.  —  It  is  further 
comb""  with  citta  in  the  scholastic  (popular)  definition 
of  manas,  found  in  identical  words  at  all  Cy.  passages : 


Mano 


145 


Mano 


"  mano  "  is  "  cittag  mano  manasarj  hadayar),  pandarai), 
man-ayatanar)  .  .  .  mano-viiinana-dhatu  "  (mind  sen- 
sibility). Thus  e.  g.  at  Nd'  3  (for  mano),  176  (id.); 
Nd-  494  (which  however  leaves  out  cittat)  in  exegesis 
of  Sn  1142,  1413,  but  has  it  in  No.  495  in  exegesis  of 
Sn  1039)  :  Dhs  6  (in  def"  of  citta),  17  (of  man'  indriyai)), 
65  (of  nian-ayatanar)),  68  (of  mano-viniiana-dhatu).  — 
The  close  relation  between  the  two  appears  further 
from  their  comb"  in  the  formula  of  the  adesana-pati- 
hariyar)  (wonder  of  manifestation,  i.  e  the  discovery  of 
other  peoples'  thoughts  &  intentions),  viz.  evam  pi  te 
mano  ittham  pi  te  mano  iti  pi  te  cittar)  :  "  so  &  so  is  in 
your  mind  .  .  .  so  &  so  are  your  emotions  ";  D  r.-;  13  = 
iii.i03  =  .\  1.170.  —  At  S  1.53  both  are  mutually  in- 
fluenced in  their  state  of  unsteadiness  and  fear  :  niccai) 
utrastag  idag  cittar)  (heart),  niccar)  ubbiggag  idar) 
mano  (mind).  The  same  relation  (citta  as  instrument 
or  manifestation  of  mano)  is  evident  from  J  1.36,  where 
the  passage  runs :  siho  cittar)  pasadesi.  Sattha  tassa 
manar)  oloketva  vyakasi  ...  At  PvA  264  mano  (of  j 
Pv  IV. 7')  is  expl""  by  cittar);  piti  mano  of  Sn  766  (glad 
of  heart)  expl""  at  SnA  512  by  santuttha-citto  ;  nibbana- 
manaso  of  Sn  942  at  SnA  567  by  nibbana-ninna-citto. 
In  the  phrase  yatha-manena  "  from  his  heart,"  i.  e. 
sincerely,  voluntarily  Dh.\  1.42,  mano  clearly  acts  as 
citta.  —  4.  Phrases  :  manag  uppadeti  to  make  up  one's 
mind,  to  resolve  DhA  11. 140  (cp.  citt'  uppada)  ;  manag 
karoti :  (a)  to  fix  one's  mind  upon,  to  give  thought  to, 
find  pleasure  or  to  delight  in  (loc.)  J  iv.223  (rupe  na 
manag  kare  =  itthi-rupe  nimittag  na  ganheyyasi  C. 
Cp.  the  similar  &  usual  manasi-karoti  in  same  sense) ; 
VI. 45  (Pass,  gite  karute  mano)  ;  (b)  to  make  up  one's 
mind  DhA  11.87;  manag  gaghati  to  "take  the  mind," 
take  the  fancy,  to  please,  to  win  approval  J  iv.  132; 
DhA  11.48.  —  III.  °mana:  dhamm-uddhacca-viggahita' 
A  II. 157  (read  °mano  for  °mana) ;  sankilittha-mana 
nara  Th  2,  344  ;  atta°  pleased  ;  gedhita^  greedy  Pv  11.8'^ ; 
dum'  depressed  in  mind,  sad  or  sick  at  heart  D  n.148  ; 
S  1.103  :  Vin  1.21  ;  A  11.59.  6'.  198 ;  Th  2,  484  ;  J  1.189  ; 
opp.  sumana  elated,  joyful  Pv  11. g''^  (  =  somanassa- 
jata  PvA  132);  plti°  glad  or  joyful  of  heart  Sn  jM) 
(expH  by  tuttha-mano,  hattha-mano.  attamano  etc. 
at  Nd'  3  ;  by  santuttha-citto  at  SnA  512).  —  IV.  ma- 
nasi-karoti (etc.)  to  fix  the  mind  intently,  to  bear  in 
mind,  take  to  heart,  ponder,  think  upon,  consider, 
recognise.  —  i.  (v.)  pres.  i'-'  pi.  "karoma  Vin  1.103; 
imper.  2°""  sg.  "karohi,  often  in  formula  "sunahi  sadhukag 
m.-k."  "  harken  and  pay  attention  "  D  1.124,  157,  249  ; 
cp.  M,  1.7;  A  1.227;  pi.  2'"i  "karotha  A  1.171  ;  D  T.214 
(-H  vitakketha) ;  Pot.  ^kareyyatha  D  1.90  (tag  atthag 
sadhukag  k.) ;  ppr.  "karonto  DhsA  207 ;  ger.  °katva 
A  II. 116  (atthikatva-l-  .  .  .  ohitasoto  sunati)  ;  Pv 
III. 2*  (a°  =  anavajjetva  PvA  181);  VvA  87,  92;  PvA 
62;  grd.  °katabba  Vism  244,  27S;  DhsA  205;  aor. 
manas-dkati  M  11.61  ;  2"''  pi.  (Prohib.)  (ma)  mana- 
sikattha  D  1.2  14  ;  A  i.i  71.  Pass,  manasi-karlyati  Visni 
284.  —  2.  (n.)  manasikara  attention,  pondering,  fixed 
thought  (cp.  Cpd.  12,  28,  40,  282)  D  III. 104,  108  sq  . 
112,  227  (yoniso).  273  (ayoniso) ;  M  1.296;  S  11.3  (cetana 
phasso  m.)  ;  iv.297  (sabba-nimittanag  a°  inattention  to 
all  outward  signs  of  allurement)  ;  Nd'  501  (ayoniso)  ; 
Vbh  320,  325,  373  (j'oniso),  425  ;  Vism  241  (patikula")  ; 
VbhA  14S  (ayoniso),  248  sq.  (as  regards  the  32  akaras), 
251  (patikkfila"),  235  (n'atisighato  etc.),  270  (ayoniso), 
5(K)  ;  DhA  11.87  (patikkula")  ;  Dhs.\  133.  — samma 
manasikarag  anvaya  by  careful  pondering  D  1.13,  18  w. 
As  adj.  (thoughtful)  at  Th.\  273.  —  The  def°  of  m.  at 
Vism  466  runs  as  follows  :  "  kiriya-karo.  manamhi  karo 
m.  purima-manato  visadisag  manag  karoti  ti  pi  m. 
Svayag  :  arammana-patipadako  vithi-patipadako  ja- 
vana-p.'^jr^  ti-ppakaro."  —  Cpds.  :  -kiisalatS  profici- 
ency in  4iJ'^-ntion  D  111.211  ;  -kosalla  id.  VbhA  56  (in 
detail),  224,  226  sq.  ;  Vism  241  (tenfold),  243  (id.,  viz. 
anupubbato,  natisighato,  natisanikato  etc.)  ;  PvA  63 
(yoniso") ;    -vidliiina    arrangement   of   attention    Vbh.4 


69.  71  ;  -vidhi  rule  or  form  of  attention  Vism  278  (eight- 
fold, viz.  ganana,  anubandhana,  phusana,  thapana, 
sallakhana,  vivattana,  parisuddhi,  tesaii  ca  patipas- 
sana  ti).  —  The  composition  form  of  manas  is  mano°, 
except  before  vowels,  when  man'  takes  its  place  (as 
man-ayatana  VbhA  46  sq.). 

-angana  (man°)  sphere  of  ideation  (Dhs.  trsl.  §  58) 
D  III. 243,  280  and  passim,  -avajjana  representative 
cognition :  Cpi.  59.  -indriya  (man")  mind-faculty, 
category  of  mind,  faculty  of  ideation  (cp.  Dhs.  trs. 
§  17;  Cpd.  pp.  183,  184)  D  1.70  (with  other  senses 
cakkh-undriyag  etc.)  in. 226,  and  passim,  -kamma 
work  of  the  mind,  mental  action,  associated  with  kaya- 
kamma  (bodily  action)  and  vaci°  (vocal  action)  A  1.32, 
104  ;  Pug  41  ;  Dhs  981  (where  omitted  in  text),  -java 
[cp.  Vedic  manojava]  swift  as  thought  Vv  63™ ;  PvA 
216  (assajaniya).  -danda  "mind-punishment"  (?) 
corresponding  to  kaya"  &  vacl-dajida,  M  1.372  sq. 
(Neumann,  trsb  "  Streich  in  Gedanken  ").  -duccarita 
sin  of  the  mind  or  thoughts  Dh  233  ;  Nd'  386  ;  Pug  G<>. 
-dosa  blemish  of  mind  A  1.112.  -dvara  door  of  the 
mind,  threshold  of  consciousness  VbhA  41  ;  DhsA  425, 
cp.  Dhs.  trsl.  3  (^p.  2)  ;  Cpd.  10.  -dhatu  element  of 
apprehension,  the  ideational  faculty  (cp.  Dhs.  trsl.  129, 
-p.  119,  120;  and  p.  ^Ixxxv  sq.)  Dhs  457  sq.  ;  Vbh 
14,  71,  87  sq.,  144,  302  ;  Vism  488;  VbhA  80,  81,  239 
(phj'siological  foundation),  405 ;  DhsA  263,  425 ; 
KhA  53.  -padosa  anger  in  mind,  ill-will  D  111.72  ; 
M  1.377;  ^n  ^^2  ;  J  IV.29  ;  Dhs  1060  (cp.  DhsA  367: 
manag  padussayamano  uppajjati  ti.  i.  e.  to  set  one's 
heart  at  anger),  -padosika  (adj.)  debauched  in  mind 
(by  envy  &  ill-will),  N.  of  a  class  of  gods  D  1.20  ;  Vbh.\ 
498,  519.  Cp.  Kirfel,  Kosmographie.  p.  193  &  Kern 
(Toev.  1. 163),  slightly  different:  from  looking  at  each 
other  too  long,  -pasada  tranquillity  of  the  mind, 
devotional  feeling  (towards  the  Buddha)  Dh.\  1.28. 
-pubbangama  directed  by  mind,  dominated  by  thought 
(see  pubba^)  Dh  i,  2  ;  cp.  DhA  1.2 1,  35.  -bhavaniya  of 
right  mind-culture,  self-composed  S  iii.i  ;  M  111.261  ; 
Vv  34'^  (cp.  VvA  152  :  mana-vaddhanaka) ;  Miln  129. 
Kern,  Toev.  1.163  trsl'^  "to  be  kept  in  mind  with 
honour."  -mattaka,  in  phrase  mana-mattakena  (adv.) 
"  by  mere  mind,"  consisting  of  mind  only,  i-  e.  memorial, 
as  a  matter  of  mind  J  iv.228.  -maya  made  of  mind, 
consisting  of  mind,  i.  e.  formed  by  the  magic  power  of 
the  mind,  magically  formed,  expl""  at  Vism  405  as 
"  adhitthana-manena  nimmitatta  m."  ;  at  DA  1.120 
as  "  jhana-manena  nibbatta  "  ;  at  DhA  1.23  as  "  ma- 
nato  nipphanna  "  ;  at  VvA  10  as  "  bahirena  paccaycna 
vina  manasa  va  nibbatta."  —  Dh  i,  2  ;  J  vi.265  (mano- 
mayag  sindhavag  abhiruyha) ;  Sdhp  259  ;  as  quality  of 
iddhi  :  Vism  379,  406.  —  Sometimes  a  body  of  this 
matter  can  be  created  by  great  holiness  or  knowledge ; 
human  beings  or  gods  may  be  endowed  with  this 
power  D  1.17  (-t- pitibhakkha,  of  the  Abhassaras),  34 
(atta  dibbo  rupi  in.  sabbanga-paccangi  etc.),  77  (id.), 
186  (id.);  Vin  n.185  (Koliya-putto  kalag  kato  anna- 
tarag  mano-mayag  kayag  upapanno) ;  M  1.4 10  (deva 
rupino  m.) ;  S  iv.71  ;  A  1.24;  111.122,  192;  iv.235  ; 
v.6().  -ratha  desired  object  (lit.  what  pleases  the 
mind),  wish  Vism  506  (°vighata-(-  iccha-vighata) ;  °g 
pureti  to  fulfil  one's  wish  Mhvs  8,  27  (punna-sabba- 
manoratha).  Manoratha-purani  (f.)  "  the  wish  ful- 
filler  "  is  the  name  of  the  Commentary  on  the  Anguttara 
Nikaya.  -rama  pleasing  to  the  mind,  lovely,  delightful 
Sn  50,  337,  1013  ;  Dh  58  ;  Pv  11. 9'''  (photthabba),  Mhvs 
18,  48;  VvA  340.  -viiifiana  representative  cognition, 
rationality  Vism  489;  Vbh.\  150  (22  fold);  Dhs.\  304, 
cp.  Dhs.  trsl.  170  (-p.  157)  ;  -dhatu  (element  of)  represen- 
tative intellection,  mind  cognition,  the  6"'  of  the  vinna- 
nadhatus  or  series  of  cognitional  elements  corresponding 
to  and  based  on  the  12  simple  dhatus,  which  are  the 
external  &.  internal  sense-relations  (  =  ayatanani)  Dhs 
58;  Vbh  14,  71,  87,  89,  144,  176  and  passim.  See  also 
above  II.  3  and  discussions  at  Dhs.  trsl.  132  (-p.  122)  & 


Manta 


146 


Manteti 


introd.'p.  53  sq.  ;  Cpa.  1232.  184.  -vinfieyya  to  be  compre- 
hended by  the  mind  (cp.  Dialogues  11.281°)  D  H.281  ; 
M  in. 55.  57;  J  IV. 195.  -vitakka  a  thought  (of  mind) 
S  i.207  =  Sn  270  (mano  is  in  C.  on  this  passage  c.xpl"' 
as  "  kusala-citta  "  SnA  303).  -sancetan'  ahara  "  nutri- 
ment   of    representative    cogitation"     (Dhs.    trsl.    31) 

5  II. II,  13,  99  ;  Dhs  72  ;  Vism  341.  -satta  "  with  mind 
attached,"  N.  of  certain  gods,  among  whom  are  reborn 
those  who  died  with  minds  absorbed  in  some  attach- 
ment M  1.376.  -samacara  conduct,  observance,  habit 
of  thought  or  mind  (associated  with  kaya°  &  vaci°) 
M  II. 114:  III. 45,  49.  -sila  (cp.  Sk.  manah  sila)  red 
arsenic,  often  used  as  a  powder  for  dying  and  other 
purposes  ;  the  red  colour  is  frequently  found  in  later 
(Cy.)  literature,  e.  g.  J  v.416  (4-haritala  yellow  oint- 
ment) ;  Vism  485  ;  DhA  iv.113  (id.  as  cunna) :  ThA  70 
(Ap.  V.20) ;  Mhvs  29,  12  ;  SnA  59  ("pinda  in  simile) ; 
DhA  11.43  (°rasa)  ;  VvA  288  ("cunna-piiijara-vanna, 
of  ripe  mango  fruit)  ;  Pv.\  274  ("vannani  ambaphalani) ; 
-tala  a  flat  rock,  platform  (  =  silatala)  SnA  93,  104;  as 
the  platform  on  which  the  seat  of  the  Buddha  is  placed 

6  whence  he  sends  forth  the  lion's  roar:  J  11. 219; 
VI. 399 ;  VvA  217;  as  a  district  of  the  Himavant : 
J  VI. 432  ;  SnA  358.  -hara  charming,  captivating, 
beautiful  jVIhvs  18,  49  ;  N.  of  a  special  gem  (the  wishing 
gem  ?)  Miln  118,  354. 

Manta   [cp.   Vedic   mantra,   fr.   mantray]    orig.   a  divine 
saying   or   decision,    hence   a   secret   plan    [cp.    def.    of 
mant    at    Dhtp    578    by    "  gutta-bhasane "],    counsel; 
hence  magic  charm,  spell.     In  particular  a  secret  reli- 
gious code  or  doctrine,  esp.  the  Brahmailic  texts  or  the 
Vedas,  regarded  as  such  (i.  e.  as  the  code  of  a  sect)  by 
the  Buddhists.  —  i .  with  ref .  to  the   Vedas  usually  in 
the  pi.  manta  (the  Scriptures,  Hymns,  Incantations) : 
D    1.96;    M   II. 166    (brahme   mante   adhiyitva ;    mante 
vaceti) ;  Sn249  (  =  devaSnA  291),  302  (mante  ganthetva, 
criticised   by   Bdhgh   as    brahmanic    ( :  heretic)     work 
in    contrast    with    the    ancient    Vedas     as     follows : 
"  vede  bhinditva  dhammayutte  porana-mante  nasetva 
adhamma-yutte    kuta-mante    ganthetva "    SnA    320), 
1000   (with  ref.  to  the  32  signs  of  a  Mahapurisa),  1018  ; 
Dh  I41    (holy  studies);   J   11. 100;  111.28   (maybe  to  be 
classed    under   2),    537.  —  Sometimes   in    sg.:    mantar) 
parivattenti    brahma-cintitar)    Pv   11.6"   (  =  veda   Pv.\ 
97)  =  Vv  63'"  {  =  veda  VvA  265) ;  —  n.  pi.  also  mantani, 
meaning  "  Vedas  "  :   Miln   10.  —  2   (doubtful,   perhaps 
as  sub  group  to  No.  3)  holy  scriptures  in  general,  sacred 
text,    secret   doctrine   S    1.37    (manta   dhira    "  firm    in 
doctrine  "  K.S.  thus  taking  manta  as  instr.  ;   it   may 
better  be  taken  as  mantar)  ;  Sn  1042  (where  Nd^  497 
exp^    as    pailiia    etc.)  ;    JIhvs    5.    log    (Buddha"    the 
"  mantra  "  of  the  B.),   147  (id.).  —  3.   divine  utterance, 
a  word  with  supernatural  power,  a  charm,  spell,  magic 
rat,  witchcraft  Miln  11  (see  about  manta  in  the  ]ata- 
kas  :   Pick.   Sociale  Gliederung  152,    153).     At  PvA  117 
m.  is  combined  with  yoga  and  ascribed  to  the  devas, 
while   y.   is   referred    to   men.  —  J    1.200    (-l-paritta); 
111.511   (°r)  karoti  to  utter  a  charm,  cast  a  spell) ;  Dh.i^ 
IV. 227.     There   are   several   special   charms   mentioned 
at  var.  places  of  the  Jatakas,  e.  g.  one  called  Vedabbha. 
by  means  of  which  under  a  certain  constellation  one 
is  able  to  produce  a  shower  of  gems  from  the  air  J  1^253 
(nakkhatta-yoge     laddhe      tag      mantar)     parivattetva 
akase  uUoki,  tato  akasato  satta-ratana-vassar)  vassati). 
Others  are  :  pathavi-jaya  m.   (by  means  of  which  one 
conquers   the  earth)   J   11.243  ;   sabba-rava-janana°  (of 
knowing  all  sounds,  of  animals)  111.415;  nidhi-uddha- 
rana^  (of  finding  secret  treasures)  111.116;  catukanna" 
(four-cornered)  vi.392,  etc.  —  4.   advice,  counsel,  plan, 
design  Vin  iv.308  ("r)  sagharati  to  foil  a  plan) ;  J  vi.438. 
—  5.   (adj.)  (-°)  parivattjma'  a  charm  that  can  be  said, 
an  effective  charm  J  1.21,0  ;  bahu'  knowing  many  charms, 
very  tricky  DhA  11. 4  ;  bhinna^  one  who  has  neglected 
an  advice  J  vi.437,  43S. 


-ajjhayaka  one  who  studies  the  Mantras  or  Holy 
Scriptures  (of  the  Brahmins)  J  1.167;  DhA  111.361 
(tinnai)  vedanar)  paragu  m.-a.  brahmano).  -ajjhena 
study  of  the  Vedas  SnA  314.  -pada=  manta  i.  D 
1.104  (=  veda-sankhata  m.  DA  1.273.  -paraga  one  who 
masters  the  Vedas  ;  in  buddh.  sense  :  one  who  excels  in 
wisdom  Sn  997.  manta  in  this  sense  is  by  the  Cys. 
always  expli"  by  paniid.  e.  g.,  Nd^  497  (as  manta  f.) ; 
DhA  iv.93  (id.),  SnA  549  (mantaya  pariggahetva). 
-paragu  one  who  is  accomplished  in  the  Vedas  Sn  251 
(  =  vedaparagu  SnA  293).  690  (=vedanar|  paragata 
SnA  488),  976.  -bandhava  one  acquainted  with  the 
Mantras  Sn  140  (=vedabandhu  SnA  192);  Nd'  11 
(where  Nd^  455  in  same  connection  reads  mitta°  for 
manta" :  see  under  bandhu).  -bhanin  reciter  of  the 
Holy  Texts  (or  charms)  Th  11.281  ;  fig.  a  clever  speaker 
Sn  850  (but  Nd'  2  ig  reads  manta"  ;  see  mantar)  Dh  363 
(cp.  Dh,\  1V.93  ;  pannaya  bhanana-sila)  Th  i,  2. 
-yuddka  a  weird  light,  a  bewitched  battle  Mhvs  25,  49 
("cunningly  planned  b."  trsl.  Geiger ;  "diplomatic 
stratagem,"  Turnout). 

Hantanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  mantana]  plotting  J  v.437. 

Mantana  f.  (&  "na)  [fr.  mant]  counsel,  consultation,  de- 
liberation, advice,  command  D  1.104;  A  1.199;  Vin 
v. 164;  J  VI.437,  438;  Miln  3  (n)  ;  D.\  1.273. 

Mantar  [n.  ag.  of  mant,  cp.  Sk.  *mantr  a  thinker]  a  sage, 
seer,  wise  man,  usually  appositionally  nom.  manta 
"  as  a  sage."  "  like  a  thinker,"  a  form  which  looks  like 
a  fern,  and  is  mostly  expl"*  as  such  by  the  Commen- 
taries. Manta  has  also  erroneously  been  taken  as 
instr.  of  manta,  or  as  a  so-called  ger.  of  manteti,  in 
which  latter  two  functions  it  has  been  expl''  at  "  jani- 
tva."  The  form  has  evidently  puzzled  the  old  commen- 
tators, as  early  as  the  Niddesa  ;  through  the  Abhp  (153. 
979)  it  has  come  down  at  manta  "  wisdom  "  to  Childers. 
Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  hesitates  and  onlj'  comes  half  near  the 
truth.  The  Index  to  Pj.  marks  the  word  with  ?  — 
S  1.57  (-1-  dhira  ;  trsl°  "  firm  in  doctrine  ");  Sn  159  ("  in 
truth,"  opp.  to  musa  ;  SnA  204  expl°'  m.  =  paiiiia  ;  taya 
paricchinditva  bhasati),  916  (manta  asmi  ti,  expl''  at 
SnA  562  by  "mantaya"),  1040=1042  (  =  Nd-  497 
manta  vuccati  paniia  etc.) ;  Vv  63"  (expl''  as  janitva 
paiiiiaya  paricchinditva  VvA  262).  —  Besides  this  form 
we  have  a  shortened  manta  (nom.)  at  Sn  455  (akin- 
cano-H  ).  which  is  expl''  at  SnA  402  as  manta  janitva. 
It  is  to  be  noted  that  for  manta  bhanin  at  Sn  850  the 
Nd'  219  reads  manta  and  expl  customarily  by  "  man- 
taya pariggahetva  vacai)  bhasati." 

Mantita  [pp.  of  manteti]  i .  considered  Th  i,  9;  Miln  gi. 
—  2.  advised,  given  as  counsel  J  vi.438  ;  DA  1.273. 

Mantin  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  manta]  i.  (adj.)  giving  or  observing 
counsel  S  1.236.^2.  (n.)  counspUor,  minister  J  vi.437 
(pandita  m.). 

Manteti  [cp.  Vedic  mantrayati;  mant  is  given  at  Dhtp 
in  meaning  of  gutta-bhasana,  i.  e.  "secret  talk  "J  to 
pronounce  in  an  important  (because  secret)  manner 
(like  a  mantra),  i.  e.  i.  to  take  counsel  (with  =  instr.  or 
saddhii))  D  1.94,  104  (mantanar)  manteyya  to  discuss) 
122  (2'"'  pi.  imper.  mantavho,  as  compared  with 
mantayavho  J  11.107  besides  mantavho  ibid.  Cp. 
Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  126);  11.87,  239;  Vin  iv.308  (mantesurj 
aor.  ;  perhaps  "  plotted  ") ;  Sn  p.  107  (  =  talk  privately 
to);  Sn  379;  J  1144;  vi.525  (mantayitvana  ger.); 
V)\  1.263  (imper.  mantayatha) ;  PvA  74  (aor.  mantayig- 
su).  —  2.  to  consider,  to  think  over,  to  be  of  opinion 
A  i.igg  (Pot.  mantaye)  ;  Miln  gi  (grd.  mantayitabba 
&  inf.  mantayitug).  —  3-  t"  announce,  advise ;  pro- 
nounce, advise  Sn  126;  Pv  iv.i™  (  =  kathemi  kittayami 
PvA  225);  Sn.\  169. — pp.  mantita. — Cp.  a". 


Mantha 


147 


Maya 


Mantha  [fr.  math]  a  churning  stick,  a  sort  of  rice-cake 
(  =  satthu)  Vin  1.4.  [cp.  Vedic  mantha  "  Riihrtrank  " — 
homeric  k-i'Cfwv  "  Gerstenmehl  in  Milch  verriihrt," 
Zimmer,  Altind.  Leben  268]. 

Manda  (adj.)  [cp.  late-Vedic  &  Epic  manda]  i.  slow, 
lazy,  indolent ;  mostly  with  ref.  to  the  intellectual 
faculties,  therefore  :  dull,  stupid,  slow  of  grasp,  ignorant, 
foolish  M  1.520  (-l-momuha);  Sn  666,  820  (=momriha 
Nd'  153),  K151  (=moha  avidva  etc.  Nd-  498)  ;  Dh  325 
(  =  amanasikararaanda-pafma  DhA  1V.7)  ■  Jiv.221  ,  Pug 
65,  69;  KhA  53,  54.  —  2.  slow,  yielding  little  result, 
unprofitable  (of  udaka,  water,  with  respect  to  lish  ;  and 
gocara,  feeding  on  fishes)  J  1.22 1.  —  3.  [in  this  meaning 
probably  =  Vedic  mandra  "pleasant,  pleasing,"  al- 
though Halayudha  gives  mandaksa  as  "bashful"! 
soft,  tender  (with  ref.  to  eyes),  lovely,  in  cpds.  "akkhin 
having  lovely  (soft)  eyes  J  111.190;  and  °locana  id. 
Th  2,  375  (kinnari-manda°  =  manda-puthu-vilocana 
ThA  253);  Pv  1. 11^  (miga-manda°  =  migl  viya  mand' 
akkhi  PvA  57);  Vv  64"  (miga-m''  =  miga-cchapikanar| 
viya  mudu  siniddha-ditthi-nipata).  —  4.  In  cpd.  picu 
(or  puci')  manda  the  Nimb  tree,  it  means  "  tree  "  (?) 
see  picu-manda  &.  puci-manda.  —  5.  In  composition 
with  bhu  it  assumes  the  form  mandi',  e.  g.  mandi- 
bhuta  slowed  down,  enfeebled,  diminished  J  1.22S; 
VbhA  157. 

-valahaka  a  class  of  fairies  or  demi-gods  D  11.259 
("  fragile  spirits  of  the  clouds  "  trsl.). 

Mandaka  [?]  according  to  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.=  *mandra  (of 
sound  :  deep,  bass)  -I-  ka  ;  a  sort  of  drum  J  vi.580. 

Mandata  (f.)  =  mandatta  Sdhp  19. 

Handatta  (nt.)  [fr.  manda]  stupidity  M  1.520  ;  Pug  69. 

Handakini  (f.)  N.  of  one  of  the  seven  great  lakes  in  the 
Himavant,  enum''  at  A  iv.ioi  ;  J  v. 415;  Vism  416; 
SnA  407  ;  DA  1.164.  (Halayudha  3,  51  gives  m.  as  a 
name  for  the  Ganges.) 

Mandamukhi  (i)  [dialectical  ?  reading  a  little  doubtful] 
a  coal-pan,  a  vessel  for  holding  embers  for  the  sake  of 
heating  Vin  1.32  (  =  aggi-bhaiana  C.) ;  VvA  147  (manda- 
mukhi, stands  for  angara-kapalla  p.  142  in  expl°  of 
hattha-patapaka  Vv  33-'^). 

Handarava  'cp.  Sk.  mandara]  the  coral  tree,  Erythrina 
fulgens  (considered  also  as  one  of  the  5  celestial  trees). 
The  blossoms  mentioned  D  11.137  fall  from  the  next 
world.  —  D  II. 137;  Vv  22^  (cp.  VvA  iii);  ]  1.13,  39; 
Miln  13,  18  (dibbani  m.-pupphani  abhippavassirjsuj. 

Handalaka  [etym.  ?]  a  water-plant  (kind  of  lotus)  ] 
IV. 539  ;  V1.47,  279,  564. 

Mandiya  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  mandya]  i.  laziness,  slackness 
S  1. 1 10.  —  2.  dullness  of  mind,  stupidity  J  in. 38 
(  =  manda-bhava). 

Handirs  (nt.)  [cp.  late  Sk.  mandira]  a  house,  edifice, 
palace  Sn  996,  10 12  ;  J  V.480  ;  vi.26g,  270  ;  Davs  11.67 
(dhatu"  shrine). 

Mandl"  see  manda  5. 

Mama  gen.  dat.  of  pers.  pron.  ahat)  (q.  v.)  used  quasi 
independently  (as  substitute  for  our  "self-")  in  phrase 
mama-y-idar|  Sn  806  thought  of  "this  is  mine,"  cp. 
S  1.14,  i.  e.  egoism,  belief  in  a  real  personal  entity, 
expl''  at  Nd'  124  by  maiifiana  conceit,  illusion.  Also 
in  var.  phrases  with  kr  in  form  mamag",  viz.  maman- 
kara  etc.  —  As  adj.  "self-like,  selfish"  only  nog. 
amama  unselfish  Sn  220  (  =  mamatta-virahita  Sn.\ 
276);  Pv  IV. i'*  (  =  mamankara-virahita  l'v.\  230); 
J  IV. 372  ;  vr.259.     See  also  amama,  cp.  mamaka. 


Mamankara  [mamari  (=mama)-f  kara,  cp.  ahag-fkaiaj 
selfish  attachment,  self-interest,  selfishness  PvA  230. 
In  canonic  books  only  in  comb"  with  ahankara  Sc 
man'  dnusaya  (belief  in  an  ego  and  bias  of  conceit), 
e.  g.  at  M  III. 18,  32  ;  S  111.80,  103,  136,  i6g  ;  iv.41,  197, 
202  ;  A  1. 1 32  sq. ;  111.444.     See  also  maminkara. 

Mamankarana  (nt.)  ^fr.  mamar)-(-  kr]  treating  with  tender- 
ness, solicitude,  fondness  J  v. 331. 

Mamatta  (nt.)  [fr.  mama]  selfishness,  self-love,  egoism; 
conceit,  pride  in  (-").  attachment  to  (-').  Sn  806.  871, 
---      Th   1,   717;  Nd'  49  (two:  tanha  &  ditthi°)  :  Nd^ 


951 
499 


(id.  but  as  masc.) ;  SnA  276;  DhsA  199;  PvA  19. 

Mamayati  [Denom.  fr.  mama,  cp.  Sk.  mamayate  in  same 
meaning  (not  with  Bohtlingk  &  Roth  :  envy)  at  MBli 
XII. 8051  and  .\stas  Prajna  Paramita  254]  to  be  attached 
to.  to  be  fond  of,  to  cherish,  tend,  foster,  love  M  1.260  ; 
S  111.190;  Th  I,  1 150;  Sn  922  (mamayetha) ;  Nd'  125 
(Bhagavantari) ;  J  IV. 359  (  =  piyayati  C.) ;  Miln  73; 
VbhA  107  (mamayati  ti  mata  :  in  pop.  etym.  of  mata) ; 
Dh.\  I.I  I  ;  SnA  534;  Mhvs  20.  4.  —  pp.  mamayita. 

Mamayana  (f.)  =  mamatta  (selfishness)  J  vi.259  (°tanha- 
rahita  in  expl°  of  amama). 

Mamayita  'pp.  of  mamayati]  cherished,  beloved  ;  as  n. 
nt.  attachment,  fondness  of,  pride.  —  (adj.  or  pp.) 
S  11.94  (^tar)  ajjhositai),  m.,  paramatthaij)  ;  Sn  119; 
DhA  I. II.  —  (nt.  :)  Sn  466,  777,  805,  950  =  Dh  367 
(expl*  as  :  yassa  "  ahan  "  ti  va  "  maman  "  ti  va  gaho 
n'  atthi  DhA  iv.ioo);  Sn  1056  (cp.  Nd^  499). 

Maminkaioti  [mama(g)-l-kr  "to  make  one's  own"]  to 
be  fond  of,  to  cherish,  tend,  foster  J  v. 330. 

Maminkara  [for  maman",  cp.  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  19]  self-love, 
self-interest,  egoism  M  1.486 ;  in. 32  (at  both  places 
also  ahinkara  for  ahankara). 

Mamma  (nt.)  [Vedic  marman,  fr.  mrd]  soft  spot  of  the 
body,  a  vital  spot  (in  the  Vedas  chiefly  between  the 
ribs  near  the  heart),  joint.  A  popular  etym.  and 
expl"  of  the  word  is  given  at  Expos.  132°^  (on  DhsA 
I,  o).  —  J  11.228  ;  III. 209  ;  Dhs.\  396. 

-ghattana  hitting  a  vital  spot  (of  speech,  i.  e.  back- 
biting. Cp.  pitthi-mar|sika)  Dh.\  iv.182.  -chedaka 
breaking  the  joints  (or  ribs),  violent  (fig.  of  hard  speech) 
DhA  1.75  ;  DhsA  ico. 

Mammana  (adj.)  [onomat.  cp.  babbhara.  With  Sk. 
marmara  rustling  to  Lat.  fremo  to  roar=Gr.  jifiifiii  to 
thud,  /3poiT)(  thunder,  Ger.  brummen.  Cp.  also  Sk. 
murmura  =  P.  mummura  &  muramura,  Lat.  murmur] 
stammering,  stuttering  Vin  11.90  (one  of  the  properties 
of  bad  or  faulty  speech,  comb''  with  dubbaca  &  clagala- 
vaca). 

Maya  (adj.)  (-'  only)  [Vedic  niaya]  made  of,  consisting  of. 
—  An  interesting  analysis  (interesting  for  judging  the 
views  and  sense  of  etymology  of  an  ancient  commen- 
tator) of  maya  is  given  by  Dhammapala  at  VvA  10, 
where  he  distinguishes  6  meanings  of  the  word,  viz. 
I.  asma-d-atthe,  i.  e.  "myself"  (as  representing 
mayar)  !).  —  2.paiinatti  "regulation"  (same  as  i. 
according  to  example  given,  but  constructed  syntec- 
tically  quite  ditf.  by  Dhp.).  —  3.  nibbatti  "  origin  " 
(arising  from,  with  example  mano-maya  "  produced  by 
mind"). —4.  manomaya  "spiritually"    (same  as   3). 

^.  vikar'   atthe  "  alUration  "   (?  more  like  product, 

consistency,  substance),  with  example  "  sabbe-mattika- 
maya-kutika."  —  6.  pada-piirana  matte  to  make  up  a 
foot  of  the  verse  (or  add  a  syllabic  for  the  sake  of  com- 
pleteness, with  example  "  danamaya,  silamaya " 
(  =  dana;  sila).— 1.  made  of:  atthi°  of  bone  Vin 
11.115;  ayo°  of  iron  Sn  669;  Pv  i.io«;  J  iv.492  ;  udum- 


Mayaq 


148 


Mala 


bara"  of  Vd.  wood  Mhvs  23,  87;  daru°  of  wood,  VvA 
8 ;  loha"  of  copper  Sn  670  ;  vejuriya"  of  jewels  Vv  2^. 
—  2 .  consisting  in  :  dana°  giving  alms  PvA  8,  9  ;  dussa" 
clothes  Vv  46';  dhamma"  righteousness  S  11 3  7.  —  3- 
(more  as  apposition,  in  the  sense  as  given  by  Dhp. 
above  under  6)  something  like,  a  likeness  of,  i.  e.  ingre- 
dient, substance,  stuff ;  in  ahara°  food-stuff,  food 
J  III. 523  ;  utu°  something  like  a  (change  in)  season 
Vism  395  ;  sila°  character,  having  sila  as  substance  (or 
simply-consisting  of)  It  51  (dana°,  sila°,  bhavana°). 

Mayai]  [i"  pi.  of  ahari,  for  vayar)  after  maya  etc.  See 
ahar)]  we  Vin  11.270  ;  Sn  31,  91,  167  ;  Dh  6  ;  KhA  210. 

Mayukha  [Vedic  mayukha  in  difl.  meaning,  viz.  a  peg 
for  fastening  a  weft  etc.,  Zimmer  Altind.  Leben  254]  a 
ray  of  light  Abhp.  64 ;  Dhp.  A  426  (old  citation, 
unverified). 

Mayiira  [Vedic  mayura]  a  peacock  D  in. 201  ;  S  11279; 
Th  I,  1113;  J  II. 144,  150  (°giva)  =  DhA  1.144;  J  iv.211 
("nacca) ;  v. 304  ;  vi.172,  272,  483  ;  Vv  ii^,  35'  (=sikhan- 
din  VvA  163);  VvA  27  (°giva-vanna) ;  Sdhp  92. — 
The  form  mayura  occurs  nearlj'  alwaj'S  in  the  Gathas 
and  is  the  older  form  of  the  two  m.  and  mora.  The 
latter  contracted  form  is  found  in  Prose  only  and  is 
often  used  to  explain  the  old  form,  e,  g.  at  VvA  57.  See 
also  mora. 

Mara  (adj.)  [fr.  mr]  dying  ;  only  neg.  amara  not  dying, 
immortal,  in  phrase  ajararaara  free  from  decay  & 
death  Th  11.512  ;  Pv  11. 6".     See  also  amara. 

Maiana  (nt.)  [fr.  mr"  death,  as  ending  this  (visible)  exist- 
ence, physical  death,  in  a  narrower  meaning  than'kala- 
kiriya;  dying,  in  cpds.  death.  —  The  customary  stock 
definition  of  marana  runs ;  yar)  tesar)  tesai]  sattanar) 
tamha  tamha  satta-nikaya  cuti  cavanata  bhedo  anta- 
radhanai).  maccu  maranai)  kalakiriya,  khandhanar) 
bhedo,  kajebarassa  nikkhepo  M  1.49;  Nd^  123,  124 
(adds  "  jivit'  indriyass'  upacchedo  ").  Cp.  similar 
def"''  of  birth  and  old  age  under  jati  and  jara.  —  S 
1.121  :  D  III. 52,  III  sq.,  135  sq..  14O  sq.,  235.  258  sq. ; 
Sn  32.  318,  426  sq.,  575  sq.,  742,  806  ;  Nd-254  (=  maccu) ; 
Pug  60  ;  Vbh  99  sq.  ;  VbhA  100  (def°  and  exegesis  in 
det.,  cp.  Vism  502),  10 1  (var.  kinds  of,  cp.  Vism  229), 
156  (lahuka),  157;  DhA  111.434;  PvA  5,  18,  54,  64,  76, 

96  ;  Sdhp  292,  293.  — kala°  timely  death  (opp.  akala") ; 
khanika'  sudden  death  Vism  229. 

-anta  having  death  as  its  end  (of  jivita)  Dh  148  (cp. 
DhA  11.366 :  marana -sankhato  antako).  -anussati 
mindfulness  of  death  Vism  197,  230  sq.  (under  8  aspects). 
-cetana  intention  of  death  Dh.\  1.20.  -dhamma  subject 
to  death  Pv.\  41.  -pariyosana  ending  in  death  (of 
jivita,  life)  DhA  iii.iii.  170.  -para  "the  other  side 
of  death,"  Np.  at  Nd^  154  (vv.  U.  BB  purapurag  ;  SS 
parammukhai)).  -bhaya  the  fear  of  death  J  1.203  ; 
VI. 398  ;  Vbh  367.  -bhojana  food  given  before  death, 
the  last  meal  J  1.197  ;  11.420.  -maiica  death-bed  Vism 
47.  549  i  'ka  J  IV. 1 32.     -mukha  the  mouth  of  d.  Pv.\ 

97  (or  should  we  read  "dukkha  ?).  -sati  the  thought 
(or  mindfulness)  of  death,  meditation  on  death  SnA 
54;  Dh.\  III.  1 71  ;  PvA  61,  66.  -samaya  the  time  of 
death  VbhA  157-159  (in  var.  conditions  as  regards 
patisandhi). 

Marati  [mr=Idg.  *nier,  Vedic  mriyate  &  marate  ;  cp.  Av. 
miryeite,  Sk.  marta  =  Gr.  /-(pordf  mortal,  man;  mara 
death;  Goth.  maur|ir=Ags.  mort=Ger.  mord  ;  Lith. 
mifti  to  die  ;  Lat.  morior  to  die,  mors  death.  The  root 
is  identical  with  that  of  mrnati  to  crush  :  see  manati, 
and  mrdnati  (mardati)  same  :  see  mattika.  —  The  Dhtp 
(No.  245)  defines  mr  by  "  pana-cage,"  i.  e.  giving  up 
breathing]  to  die.  —  pres.  marati  Mhvs  v.  spur,  after 
5,  27;  36,  83;  Pot.  mareyyag  J  vi.498  ;  2"''  mareyyasi 
J  III. 276.     ppr.  maramana  Mhvs  36,  7O.  —  aor.  amara 


J  III  389  (  =  mataC. ;  with  gloss  amari).  — amari  Mhvs 
36,  96.  —  Put.  marissati  J  in. 214.  —  ppr.  (  =  fut.) 
marissar)  J  in. 2 14  (for  'marisyanta).  —  Inf.  maritug 
D  11.330  (amaritu-kama  not  willing  to  die)  ;  Vism  297 
(id.)  ;  VvA  207  (positive)  ;  and  marituye  Th  2,  426.  — 
The  form  mijryati  (miyati)  see  separately.  —  Caus  I. 
mareti  to  kill,  murder  Mhvs  37,  27;  PvA  4.  Pass, 
mariyati  PvA  5  (ppr.  mariyamana)  ;  Sdhp  139  (read 
mar°  for  mariy").  —  Caus.  II.  marapeti  to  cause  to  be 
killed  J  III. 178;  Mhvs  37,  28.     Cp.  pamareti. 

Harioa  (nt.)  [cp.  scientific  Sk.  marica]  black  pepper 
Vin  1.20 1  (allowed  as  medicine  to  the  bhikkhus)  ;  Miln 

63- 

-gaccha  the  M. -shrub  J  v.12.  -cunna  powdered 
pepper,  fine  pepper  J  1.455. 

Mariyada  (f)  [cp.  Vedic  maryada  ;  perhaps  related  to  Lat. 
mare  sea  ;  s.  Walde,  La(.  11 '/6.  under  mare]  i.  boundary, 
limit,  shore,  embankment  Vin  in. 50  ;  A  in. 227  (brahma- 
ijanar));  D  111.92  =  Vism  419;  J  v.325  ;  vi.536  (tira°) ; 
Mhvs  34,  70;  36,  59  (vapi°) ;  Miln  416.  —  2.  strictly 
defined  relation,  rule,  control  J  11.215;  Vism  15.  —  adj. 
keeping  to  the  lines  (or  boundaries),  observing  strict 
rules  A  in. 22  7  (quoted  SnA  318,  323).  °bandha 
keeping  in  control  Vin  1.287. — Cp.  vimariyadi. 

Marici  (f.)  [Vedic  marici ;  cp.  Gr.  fiapptaipui  to  shimmer, 
glitter,  fta'ipa  dog  star,  a/iapi'i-raw  sparkle ;  Lat.  merus 
clear,  pure  ;  perhaps  also  mariyada  to  be  taken  here] 
I.  a  ray  of  light  VvA  166.  —  2.  a  mirage  J  vi.209 ; 
Vism  496  ;  VbhA  34,  85  ;  often  comb'*  with  maya  (q.  v.), 
e.  g.  Nd^  6Sn  A"  ;  J  11.330. 

-kammatthana  the  "  mirage  "  station  of  exercise 
DhA  111.165.  -dhamma  like  a  mirage,  unsubstantial 
J  VI. 206  ;  Dh  46  ;  Dh.\  1.337. 

Maricika  (f.)  =  manci  2  ;  S  in. 141  ;  Vism  479  (in  comp.) ; 

Dh  170  (  =  maya  Dh.\  in. 166). 

Mam'  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  maru]  a  region  destitute  of  water,  a 
desert.  Always  comb""  with  ^kantara :  Nd'  155  (as 
Name);  J  1.107;  VbhA  6;  VvA  332;  PvA  99,   112. 

Maru^  [Vedic  marut,  always  in  pi.  marutah,  the  gods  of 
the  thunder-storm]  i .  pi.  maru  the  genii,  spirits  of  the 
air  Sn  6S1,  688;  Miln  278  (naga-yakkha-nara-maru ; 
perhaps  in  meaning  2 ) ;  Mhvs  5,27.  —  2 .  gods  in  general 
(°-)  Mhvs  15,  211  (°gana  hosts  of  gods);  18,  68  (°nara 
gods  and  men).  —  Cp.  maruta  &  maluta. 

Marumba  [etym.  ?]  a  sort  of  (sweet-scented)  earth  or  sand 
Vin  11.12  I,  142,  153  (at  these  pas.sages  used  for  besprink- 
ling a  damp  living-cell) ;  iv.33  (pasana,  sakkhara, 
kathala,  marumba,  valika) ;  Mhvs  29,  8;  Dpvs  19,  2, 
Miln  197  (pasana,  sakkhara,  khara,  m.). 

Maruta  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  murva,  perhaps  connected  with  Lat. 
malva]  a  species  of  hemp  (Sanseveria  roxburghiana) 
M  1.429.  .\t  J  ii.iij  we  find  reading  marudva  & 
marucavaka  (C),  of  uncertain  meaning  ? 

Mala  (nt.)  [Vedic  mala,  see  etym.  under  nialina.  The 
Dhtm  (395)  only  knows  of  one  root  mal  or  mall  in 
meaning  "  dharana  "  supporting,  thus  thinking  of 
malaka]  anything  impure,  stain  (lit.  &  fig.),  dirt.  In 
the  Canon  mostly  fig.  of  impurities.  On  mala  in 
similes  see  J.P.T.S.,  1907,  122. — -S  1.38  (itthi  malar) 
brahmacariyassa),  43  (id.);  A  1. 105  (issa°) ;  Sn  378. 
469,  962,  1132  (  =  rago  malar)  etc.  Nd^  5*50)  ;  Nd'  15, 
478  sq.  ;  Dh  239  sq.  ;  Vbh  368  (tini  malani),  389  (nava 
purisa-malani) ;  Pv  11.3^*  (macchera°) ;  PvA  45  (id.), 
8(1  (id.),  17  (citta°) ;  Sdhp  220.  —  Compar.  malatara  a 
greater  stain  A  iv.i95  =  Dh  243.  —  See  also  mala. 

-abhibhu  overcoming  one's  sordidness  S  i.iS;  J 
IV. 64.  -majjana  "  dirt  wiper,"  a  barber  Vin  iv.308 
(kasavata  m.  niliinajacca)  ;  J  in. 452  ;  iv.365. 


Malina 


149 


Mahant 


Ualina  (adj . )  [fr.  mal,  'mel  to  make  dirty,  to  which  belongs 
mala.  —  Cp.  Lat.  mulleus  reddish,  purple ;  Gr.  fiiXag 
black,  fioXruij  to  stain,  fiikrog  reddish  ;  Lith.  mulvas 
yellowish,  melynas  blue  ;  Ohg.  mal  stain]  dirty,  stained. 
impure,  usually  lit.  —  J  1.467  ;  Miln  324  ;  DhA  1.233  ; 
VvA  156;  PvA  226;  VbhA  498. 

Maliaaka  (adj.)  [malina+ka]  dirty;  with  ref.  to  loha,  a 
kind  of  copper,  in  the  group  of  copper  belonging  to 
Pisaca  VbhA  63. 

Malya  (nt.)  [for  *malya,  fr.  mala]  flower,  garland  of 
flowers  Vv  i'  (-dhara) ;  2';  J  v. 188  (puppha°),  420. — 
The  reading  at  Pv  111.3^  (pahuta°,  adj.  having  many 
rows  of  flowers)  is  malya. 

Malla  [cp.  Sk.  malla,  perhaps  a  local  term,  cp.  Canura] 
a  wrestler  Vin  u.105  ("mutthika)  J  iv.81  (two,  named 
Canura  and  Mutthika  "  fister") ;  Vism  31  (mutthika+  , 
i.  e.  boxing  &  wrestling  as  amusements:  see  mada  i). 
Perhaps  as  "  porter  "  Bdhgh  on  CV  v. 29.  5  (see  Vin 
11.319).  At  Miln  191  the  malla  are  mentioned  as  a 
group  or  company ;  their  designation  might  here  refer 
to  the  Mallas,  a  tribe,  as  other  tribes  are  given  at  the 
same  passage  (e.  g.  Atona,  Pisaca).     Cp.  Bhallaka. 

-gana  troop  of  professional  wrestlers  Miln  331. 
-mutthika  boxer  Vin  n.105.  -yuddha  wrestling  contest 
Miln  232;  DhA  11. 154;  DA  1.85.  -yuddhaka  a  pro- 
fessional wrestler  J  iv.81. 

Hallaka  [cp.  Sk.  mallaka  &  mallika]  i.  a  bowl,  a 
vessel  (.')  used  in  bathing  Vin  11.106  (mallakena  naha- 
yati ;  or  is  it  a  kind  of  scrubber  ?  Bdhgh's  exlp°  of 
this  passage  (CV  v.  1.4)  on  p.  315  is  not  quite  clear; 
mallakar)  nama  makara-dantihe  chinditvd  muUaka- 
mula-santhanena  kata-mallakag  vuccati ;  akata°  danta 
achinditva  katar)).  It  may  bear  some  ref.  to  malla  on 
p.  105  (see  malla)  &  to  mallika-makula  (see  below 
mallika).  —  2.  a  cup,  drinking  vessel  A  1.250  (udaka°). 

—  3.  a  bowl  J  III. 21  (kai)sa°  =  tatfaka).  —  4.  in  kheja" 
a  spittoon  Vin  1.48;  11. 175.  —  Note.  W.  Printz  in 
"BhSsa's  Prakrit."  p.  45,  compares  Sauraseni  mallaa, 
Hindi  mall(a)  "  cup,"  maliya  "  a  small  vessel  (of  wood 
or  cocoanut-shell)  for  holding  the  oil  used  in  unction," 
mala  "  cocoanut-shell,"  and  adds  :  probably  a  Dra- 
vidian  word. 

Mallika  (f)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  mallika,  Halayudha  2,  51  ; 
Dandin  2,  214]  Arabian  jasmine  Dh  54  (tagara°) ; 
J  1.62  ;  III. 291  ;  V.420  ;  Miln  333,  338  ;  DhsA  14  ;  KhA 
44.  mallika-makula  opening  bud  of  the  jasmine  Vism 
251=  VbhA  234  ("santhana,  in  descr.  of  shape  of  the 
4  canine  teeth).  — See  also  malika. 

Maloiika  (f)  [prob.  dialectical  for  malaka  :  cp.  mallaka] 
a  stand,  (tripod)  for  a  bowl,  formed  of  sticks  Vin  11. 124 
(  =  dand'  adharaka  Bdhgh  on  p.  318). 

Hasa  in  line  "  asadaii  ca  masaii  jatar)  "  at  J  vi.328  is  to 
be  comb''  with  ca,  and  read  as  camasan,  i.  e.  a  ladle  for 
sacrificing  (C. :  aggi-dahanar)). 

Hasati  [mfS]  to  touch  :  only  in  cpd.  amasati.  The  root 
is  expl""  at  Dhtp  305  as  "  amasana."  Another  root 
masu  [mjh  ?]  is  at  Dhtm  444  given  in  meaning  "  raac- 
chera."  Does  this  refer  to  Sk.  mrja  (  =  P.  miccha)  ? 
Cp.  masati,  masana  etc. 

Masapa  (nt.)  [etym.  ?  prob.  provincial  &  local]  a  coarse 
cloth  of  interwoven  hemp  and  other  materials  D  1.166  ; 
M  1.308,  345  ;  A  1. 241,  295  ;  Pug  55.  At  all  passages  as 
a  dress  worn  by  certain  ascetics. 

Masaraka  [fr.  masara  ?]  a  kind  of  couch  (maiica)  or  long- 
chair  ;  enum''  under  the  4  kinds  of  maiica  at  Vin  iv.40. 

—  See  also  Vin  11. 149  ;  iv.357  (where  expl'*  as  :  maiica- 
pade  vijjhitva  tattha  attaniyo  pavesetva  kato  :  made 
by  boring  a  hole  into  the  feet  of  the  bed  &  putting 
through  a  notched  end) ;  VvA  8.  9. 


Hasaragalla  (m.  &  nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  masara  emerald  +  galva 
crystal  &  musaragalva]  a  precious  stone,  cat's  eye  ;  also 
called  kabara-mani  (e.  g.  VvA  304).  It  occurs  in 
stereotyped  enum"  of  gems  at  Vin  11.238  (where  it  is 
said  to  be  found  in  the  Ocean)  =  Miln  267  ;  and  at  Miln 
118,  where  it  always  stands  next  to  lohitanka.  The 
same  comb"  (with  lohit.)  is  found  at  Vv  36^  ;  78'  =  8i'  ; 
84". 

Masi  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  maji  &  masi]  i.  the  fine  particles  of 
ashes,  in  angara°  charcoal-dust  VvA  67=  DhA  in. 309 ; 
(aggina)  masii]  karoti  to  reduce  to  powder  (by  fire),  to 
bum  to  ashes,  turn  to  dust  S  11.88=  iv. 197  =  A  1.204  = 
II. 199.  — 2.  soot  J  1.483  (ukkhali°  soot  on  a  pot). 

Masuraka  [connected  with  masaraka]  a  bolster  J  iv.87; 
VI. 185. 

Massu  [Vedic  smasru]  the  beard  D  11.42  ;  Pug  55  ;  J  iv.159. 
-parulha"  with  long-grown  beard  DA  1.263 ;  bahala" 
thick-bearded  J  v. 42. 

-kamma  beard-dressing  J  111.114;  DhA  1253.  -ka- 
rana  shaving  DhA  1.253;  DA  i  137.  -kutti  [m.-l- 
♦kipti]  beard-trimming  J  in. 314  (C.  =  °kiriya). 

Massaka  (adj.)  [fr.  massu]  bearded;  a°  beardless  (of  a 
woman)  J  11.185. 

Uaha  (m.  &  nt.)  [fr.  mah,  see  mahati  &  cp.  Vedic  nt. 
mahas]  i.  worthiness,  venerableness  Miln  357. — 2.  a 
(religious)  festival  (in  honour  of  a  Saint,  as  an  act  of 
worship)  Mhvs  33,  26  (viharassa  mahamhi,  loc.)  ;  Vv.\ 
170  (thupe  ca  mahe  kate),  200  (id.).  maha°  a  great 
festival  Mhvs  5,  94.  bodhi"  festival  of  the  Bo  tree 
J  IV. 229.  vihara"  festival  held  on  the  building  of  a 
monastery  J  1.94;  VvA  188.  hatthi"  a  festival  called 
the  elephant  f.  J  iv.95. 

Mahati  [mah;  expl''  by  Dhtp  331  as  "  piijayai)  "]  to 
honour,  revere  Vv  47"  (pot.  med.  i  pi.  mahemase,  cp. 
Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  129  ;  expl^  as  "  mahamase  pujamase  " 
at  VvA  203).  Caus.  mahayati  in  same  sense  :  ger. 
mahayitvana  (poetical)  J  iv.236.  —  Pass,  mahiyati 
Vv  62I  (  =  pujiyati  VvA  258);  64"  (ppr.  mahiyaraana  = 
pujiyamana  VvA  282).     pp.  mahita. 

Mahatta  (nt.)  [fr.  mahat"  cp.  Sk.  mahattva]  greatness 
J  V.331  (  =  setthatta  C.) ;  Vism  132,  232  sq.  ;  VbhA 
278  (Satthu°.  jati°,  sabrahmacari")  ;DA  1.35  ;  VvA  191. 

Mahant  (adj.)  [Vedic  mahant,  which  by  Grassmann  is 
taken  as  ppr.  to  mah,  but  in  all  probability  the  n  is  au 
original  suffix.  —  cp.  Av.  mazant,  Sk.  compar.  mahlyan  ; 
Gr.  fiiytiQ  (compar.  /ip(s'ui'),  Lat.  magnus,  Goth. 
mikils  =  Ohg.  mihhil=E.  much]  great,  extensive,  big; 
important,  venerable.  —  nom.  maha  Sn  1008  ;  Mhvs 
22,  27.  Shortened  to  maha  in  cpd.  pitamaha  (following 
a-  decl.)  (paternal)  grandfather  PvA  41  ;  &  matamaha 
(maternal)  grandfather  (q.  v.).  —  instr.  mahata  Sn  1027. 
—  pi.  nom.  mahanta  Sn  578  (opp.  dahara). — loc. 
mahati  Miln  254. — f.  mahi — i.  one  of  the  5  great 
rivers  (Np.). — 2.  the  earth.  See  separately.  —  nt. 
mahantag  used  as  adv.,  meaning  "  very  much,  greatly  " 
J  V.I  70;  DhA  IV. 232.  Also  in  cpd.  mahantabhava 
greatness,  loftiness,  sublimity  DhsA  44.  —  Compar. 
mahantatara  DhA  11. 63,  and  with  dimin.  suffix  °ka 
J  III. 237.  —  The  regular  paraphrase  of  maha  in  the 
Niddesa  is  "  agga,  settha,  visitjha,  pamokkha,  uttama, 
pa  vara,"  see  Nd*  502. 

Note  on  maha  &  cpds.  —  A.  In  certain  cpds.  the 
comb"  with  maha  (mah°)  has  become  so  established 
&  customary  (often  through  politeness  in  using  maha° 
for  the  simple  term),  that  the  cpd.  is  felt  as  an 
inseparable  unity  and  a  sort  of  "  antique  "  word,  in 
which  the  2'"'  part  either  does  not  occur  any  more  by 
itself  or  only  very  rarely,  as  mah'  annava,  which  is  more 
freq.  than  aijnava ;  mah'  Abhisakka,  where  abhisakka 
does  not  occur  by  itself  ;  cp.  mah&nubhava,  mahiddhika, 

VI— 4* 


Mahant 


150 


Mahant 


mahaggha;  or  is  obscured  in  its  derivation  through 
constant  use  with  maha,  like  mahesi  [mah+esi,  or  isi], 
mahesakkha  [raah+ esakkha]  ;  mahallaka  [mah+*ari- 
yaka]  ;  mahamatta.  Cp.  E.  great-coat,  Gr.  dpx'  in 
apX-'uTpoc  =  GeT.  arzt.  Only  a  limited  selection  of 
cpd. -words  is  given,  consisting  of  more  frequent  or 
idiomatic  terms.  Practically  any  word  may  be  enlarged 
&  emphasized  in  meaning  by  prefixing  maha.  Some- 
times a  maha"  lends  to  special  events  a  standard  (his- 
torical) significance,  so  changing  the  common  word  into 
a  noun  proper,  e.  g.  Mah-abhinikkhammana,  Maha- 
pavarana.  —  B.  Maha  occurs  in  cpds.  in  (a)  an  elided 
form  mah  before  a  &  i ;  (b)  shortened  to  maha°  before  g,  d, 
p,  b  with  doubling  of  these  consonants  ;  (c)  in  the  regular 
form  maha^:  usually  before  consonants,  sometimes  before 
vowels.  This  form  is  contracted  with  foil,  i  to  e  and 
foil,  u  to  o.  In  the  foil,  list  of  cpds.  we  have  arranged 
the  material  according  to  these  bases. 

inah° :  -aggha  very  costly,  precious  Pug  34  ;  Mhvs 
27.  35;  PvA  77,  87;  Sdhp  18.  -agghata  costliness, 
great  value  Pug  34,  Sdhp  26.  -annava  the  (great) 
ocean  Mhvs  19,  17.  -atthiya  (for  °atthika)  of  great 
importance  or  use,  very  useful,  profitable  J  111.368. 
-andhakara  deep  darkness  Vism  417.  -assasin  fully 
refreshed,  very  comfortable  S  1.8 1. 

maha' : -ggata  "  become  great,"  enlarged,  extensive, 
fig.  lofty,  very  great  M  1.263:  11. 122  ;  A  11.63,  184; 
III. 1 8  ;  VvA  155  ;  J  v.i  13  ;  Dhs  1020  (trsl"  :  "  having  a 
wider  scope  ")  Vbh  16,  24,  62,  74.  126,  270,  326  ;  Tikp. 
45  ;  Vism  410,  430  sq.  ("arammana)  ;  VbhA  154  (id.). 
159  (°citta)  ;  DhsA  44.  See  on  term  Cpd.  4,  12,  55, 
10 1*  ;  [cp.  BSk.  mahadgata  Divy  22 7J.  -gghasa  eating 
much,  greedy,  gluttonous  .\  iv.92  ;  P  iii.i"  (  =  bahu- 
bhojana  PvA  175)  ;  Miln  288  ;  Dh  325  (cp.  DhA  iv.i6). 
-ddhana  having  great  riches  (often  comb"'  with  maha- 
bhoga)  Dh  123  ;  J  iv.ij,  22.  -pphala  much  fruit;  adj. 
bearing  much  fruit,  rich  in  result  A  iv.5o,  237  sq.  ; 
Sn  191,  486  ;  Dh  312.  356  sq.  -bbala  (a)  a  strong  force, 
a  great  army  JNIhvs  10,  68  (v.  1.,  T.  has  maha-bala) ; 
(b)  of  great  strength,  mighty,  powerful  J  111.114  ;  Mhvs 
23,  92  ;  25,  9.  -bbhaya  great  fear,  terror  S  1.37  ;  Sn  753, 
1032,  1092,  cp.  Nd^  501. 

mahl":  -anas  kitchen  Mhvs  5,  27  (spurious  stanza). 
-anasa  kitchen  J  11. 361  ;  111.314  ;  v.368 ;  vi.349;  DhA 
III. 309  ;  ThA  5.  -anila  a  gale  Mhvs  3,  42.  -anisagsa 
deserving  great  praise  (see  s.  v.),  [cp.  BSk.  mahanu^agsa 
MVastu  111.22 1].  -anubhava  majesty,  adj.  wonderful, 
splendid  J  1.194;  J  vi.331  ;  Pv  111.3';  PvA  117,  136, 
145.  272.  -aparadhika  very  guilty  J  1.114.  -abhi- 
nikkhamana  the  great  renunciation  DhA  1.85.  -abhi- 
sakka  [abhi+sak]  very  powerful  Th  i,  mi.  -amacca 
chief  minister  Mhvs  19,  12.  -araha  costly  Mhvs  3,  21  ; 
5.  75  :  27,  39;  PvA  77,  141,  160. 

maha^ :  -alasa  great  sloth  DhA  in. 410.  -avici  the 
great  Purgatory  Avici,  freq.  -isi  in  poetry  for  mahesi 
at  J  V.321.  -upatthana  great  state  room  (of  a  king) 
SnA  84.  -upasika  a  great  female  follower  (of  the 
Buddha)  VvA  5.  -karuna  great  compassion  DhA  1.106, 
367.  -kaya  a  great  body  Miln  16.  -gana  a  great 
crowd  or  community  DhA  1.154.  -ganda  a  large 
tumour  VbhA  104.  -gedha  great  greed  Sn  819;  Nd' 
151.  -caga  great  liberality,  adj.  munificent  Mhvs  27, 
47.  As  "paricaga  at  SnA  295  (  =  mahadana).  -jana  a 
great  crowd,  collectively  for  "  the  people,"  a  multitude 
PvA  6,  19,  78  ;  Mhvs  3,  13.  -tanha  (adj.)  very  thirsty 
J  II. 441.  -tala  "  great  surface,"  the  large  flat  roof  on 
the  cop  of  a  palace  (=  upari-pasada-tala)  J  vi.40.  -dana 
(see  under  dana)  the  great  gift  (to  the  bhikkhus)  a 
special  great  offering  of  food  &  presents  given  by  laymen 
to  the  Buddha  &  his  followers  as  a  meritorious  deed, 
usually  lasting  for  a  week  or  more  Mhvs  27.  46  ;  PvA 
III,  112.  -dhana  (having)  great  wealth  PvA  3,  78. 
-naraka  (a)  great  Hell,  see  naraka.  -naga  a  great 
elephant  Dh  312  ;  DhA  1V.4.  -nama  N.  of  a  plant 
Vin     1. 185  ;     11. 267.      -nidda     deep     sleep     PvA     47. 


-nibbana  the  great  X.  DhA  iv.iio.  -niraya  (a)  great 
hell  SnA  309,  480  ;  PvA  52.  See  Niraya  &  cp.  Kirfel. 
Kosmographie  199.  2co.  -nila  sapphire  VvA  in. 
-paiifia  very  wise  D  in. 158  ;  A  111.244  ;  Dh  352  ;  DhA 
IV. 71.  -patha  high  road  D  1.102;  Sn  139;  Dh  58; 
Vism  235  ;  Dh.\  1.443.  -paduma  a  great  lotus  J  v. 39 ; 
also  a  vast  number  &  hence  a  name  of  a  purgatory,  cp. 
Divy  67  ;  Kirfel,  Kosmographie  205.  -pita  grandfather 
PvA  107.  -purisa  a  great  man,  a  hero,  a  man  born  to 
greatness,  a  man  destined  b^"  fate  to  be  a  Ruler  or  a 
Saviour  of  the  World.  A  being  thus  favoured  by  fate 
possesses  (32)  marks  (lakkhanani)  by  which  people 
recognise  his  vocation  or  prophesy  his  greatness.  A 
detailed  list  of  these  32  marks  (which  probably  date 
back  to  mythological  origin  &  were  originally  attributed 
to  Devas)  is  found  at  D  11. 17,  19,  passim.  —  D  111.287; 
Sn  1040  sq.  ;  Dh  352  ;  Miln  10  ;  SnA  184,  187  sq.,  223, 


258,  357,  384  sq.  ;   "lakkhaiidni :  D  1.8 


lib;   Sn 


549,  1000  sq.  ;  Vism  234  ;  VvA  315  ;  DhA  11. 41.  -bhiita 
usually  in  pi.  "bhiita(ni)  (cattaro  &  catta)  the  4  great 
elements  (see  bhuta),  being  pathavi,  apo,  tejo,  vayo, 
D  1.76  ;  Nd'  266  ;  Vbh  13,  70  sq.  ;  Vism  366  sq. ;  Tikp 
39,  56  sq.,  74  sq.,  248  sq. ;  VbhA  42,  169,  253.  — See 
Cpd.  154,  268  sq.,  &  cp.  dhatu  i.  -bhoga  great  wealth, 
adj.  wealthy  PvA  3.  78.  -maccha  a  great  fish,  sea- 
monster  J  1.483.  -mati  very  wise,  clever  Mhvs  14,  22  ; 
ig,  84  (f.  °i) ;  33.  ICO  (pi.  °i).  -matta  [cp.  Sk.  maha- 
matra]  a  king's  chief  minister,  alias  Prime  Minister,  "who 
was  the  highest  Officer-of -State  and  real  Head  of  the 
Executive"  (Banerjea,  Public  Administration  in  Ancient 
India,  1916).  His  position  is  of  such  importance,  that 
he  even  ranges  as  a  raja  or  king  :  Vin  in. 47  (raja  .  .  . 
akkhadassa  mahamatta  ye  va  pana  chejjabhejjar) 
anusasanti  ete  rajano  nama). — Note.  An  ace.  sg. 
maha-mattanar)  we  find  at  A  1.154  (formed  after  the 
prec.  rajanar)).  —  Vin  1.74  (where  two  ranks  are  given  : 
sena-nayaka  m. -matta  the  m.  of  defence,  and  voharika 
m.-m.  those  of  law);  D  1.7;  111.88  ;  in. 64  (here  with 
Ep.  khattiya) ;  A  1. 154,  252,  279;  in. 128;  Vin  iv.224; 
Vism  121  ;  VbhA  312  (in  simile  of  two  m.),  340  ;  PvA 
169.  Cp.  pick.  Sociale  Gliederung  92,  99,  loi.  -muni 
great  seer  Sn  31.  -megha  a  big  cloud,  thunder  cloud 
M  II. 117;  Sn  30  ;  Vism  417.  -yaiiiia  the  great  sacrifice 
D  1. 138  sq.,  141  (cp.  A  11.207SK).  -yasa  great  fame 
Vv  21*;  Mhvs  5,  22.  -ranga  [cp.  Sk.  m.-rajana], 
safflower,  used  for  dyeing  Vin  1.185  (sandals);  11267 
(cloaks),  -raja  great  king,  king,  very  freq.  :  see  raja, 
-rukkha  a  great  tree  Vism  413  (literally) ;  Miln  254  (id.), 
otherivise  the  plant  euphorbia  tortilis  (cp.  Ziramer, 
Allind.  Leben  129).  -lata  (-pasadhana)  a  lady's  parure 
called  "  great  creeper  "  DhA  1.392;  VvA  165  (-pilan- 
dhana) ;  same  SnA  520.  -vatapana  main  window  DhA 
IV. 203.  -Vina  a  great  lute  Vism  354  ;  VbhA  58.  -vira 
(great)  hero  Sn  543,  562.  -satta  "the  great  being" 
or  a  Bodhisatta  VvA  137  (v.  1.  SS.  bodhisatta).  [Cp. 
BSk.  mahasattva,  e.  g.  Jtm  32].  -samudda  the  sea, 
the  ocean  Mhvs  19,  18  ;  Vism  403  ;  SnA  30,  371  ;  PvA 
47.  -sara  a  great  lake;  usually  as  satta-mahasara  the 
7  great  lakes  of  the  Himavant  (see  sara).  enum"*  e.  g. 
at  Vism  416.  -sara  (of)  great  sap.  i.  e.  great  wealth, 
adj.  very  rich  J  1.463  (°kula,  perhaps  to  be  read  maha- 
sala-kula).  -sala  (adj.)  having  great  halls,  Ep.  of  rich 
people  (especially  brahmanas)  D  1.136,  235  ;  in. 16,  20  ; 
J  11.272  (°kula):  iv.237  (id.),  325  (id.);  v.227  (id.); 
Pug  56;  VbhA  519;  DhA  in. 193.  -savaka  [cp.  BSk. 
mahasravaka  Divy  489]  a  great  disciple  Vism  98  (asiti 
°a)  ;  DhA  n.93.  -senagutta  title  of  a  high  official 
(Chancellor  of  the  Exchequer  ?)  J  v.115  ;  vi.2.  -hatthi 
a  large  elephant  M  1.184  (°pada  elephant's  foot,  as  the 
largest  of  all  animal  feet),  referred  to  as  simile  (°opama) 
at  Vism  243,  347,  348. 

mahi°  [mah'  i°]  :  -iccha  full  of  desire,  lustful,  greedy 
A  iv.229;  Th  I,  898;  It  91  ;  J  1.8;  II. 441.  -icchata 
arrogance,  ostentatiousness  A  iv.280 ;  VbhA  472. 
-iddhika    Fmaha -|- iddhi  4- ka]    of   great   power,    always 


Mahantata 


151 


Matar 


comb''  with  mah-dnubhava  to  denote  great  influence, 
high  position  &  majesty  Vin  1.31;  11. 193;  iii.ioi  ; 
D  1.78,  180  (devata),  213;  S  1.145  sq.  ;  11. 155,  274  sq., 
284  sq.  ;  IV. 323  ;  v. 265,  271  sq..  288  sq.  ;  A  v. 129; 
J  VI. 483  (said  of  the  Ocean);  PvA  6,  136,  145.  -inda 
(ghosa)  lit.  the  roar  of  the  Great  Indra.  Indra  here  to 
be  taken  in  his  function  as  sky  (rain)  god,  thus:  the 
thunder  of  the  rain-god  Th  i,  1 108.  [Cp.  BSk.  mah- 
endra  in  °bhavana  "  the  abode  of  the  Great  Indra."  and 
varsa  "  the  rain  of  the  Gr.  I."  (here  as  rain-god),  both 
at  AvS  1.2 10].  -issisa  [Sk.  mahesvasa]  great  in  the 
art  of  the  bow,  a  great  archer  S  1.185  ;  DhA  1.358. 

inahe°  [maha-l-i];  -esakkha  [maha-l- isa+ khyag  ; 
fr.  is]  possessing  great  power  or  authority  A  11.204  ; 
UI.244;  Nd2  5032;  Vism  419;  Sdhp  511.  The  BSk. 
form  is  mahejakhya  evidently  differing  in  its  etymology. 
The  P.  etym.  rests  on  the  same  grounds  as  esitatta  in 
mahesi  DhA  iv.232.  -esi  [maha -f  isi ;  Sk.  maharsi]  a 
great  Sage  A  11.26;  Sn  208,  481.  646,  915,  1057,  1061  ; 
Th  I,  1132  ;  2,  149;  Dh  422  (expl''  at  DhA  iv.232  as 
"  mahantar)  slla-kkhandh'  adinar)  esitatta  m."  cp.  the 
similar  expl"  at  Nd^  503) ;  Nd'  343  ;  Vism  505  ;  VbhA 
1 10  ;  PvA  I.  -esiya  =  mahesi  J  vi.483.  -esi  [in  P.  to 
be  taken  as  mah-|-is,  as  f.  to  isa,  but  in  Sk.  (V'edic)  as 
f.  of  mahisa,  buffalo]  chief  queen,  king's  tirst  wife,  king's 
consort ;  also  the  wife  of  a  great  personage  J  11.410  ; 
V.45  ;  VI. 425  ;  Pug  56;  Mhvs  2,  22  (pi.  mahesiyo) ; 
VvA  184  (sixteen).  Usually  as  agga-mahesi,  e.  g. 
J  1.2G2  ;  III. 187,  393;  V.88.  -esitta  state  of  chief 
consort,  queenship  J  v.443  ;  Pv  ii.i3i'' ;  ThA  37;  VvA 
102.     -eseyya  =  "esitta  J  v.91. 

-maho  [maha 4- u,  or 4-0]  :  -ogha  the  great  flood  (see 
ogha)  Sn  4,  945  ;  Dh  47,  287  ;  DhA  in. 433.  -odadhi  the 
(great)  ocean,  the  sea  Sn  720,  1134;  Miln  224;  Mhvs 
18,  8.  -odara  big  belly  J  vi.358  (addressing  a  king's 
minister),  -odika  full  of  water,  having  much  water  ; 
deep,  full  (of  a  river)  Sn  319;  J  H.159;  Miln  346. 
-oraga  [ra4-uraga]  a  great  snake  J  v. 165. 

Mahantata  (f.)  [fr.  mahant"]  greatness  DhA  11.62.  At 
M  III. 24  the  spelling  is  mahattata  (tt  misread  for  nt  ?), 
at  M  I.I 84  however  mahantatta  (nt.). 

Hahallaka  (adj.  n.)  [a  distorted  mah-ariyaka>ayyaka> 
allaka ;  cp.  ayyaka]  old,  venerable,  of  great  age ; 
an  old  man  D  i.go  (opp.  taruna),  94,  114,  247; 
Sn  313,  603  ;  Nd''  261  (vuddha  m.  andhagata  etc.) 
•J  IV. 482  (opp.  dahara  young);  Vv  46'  (  =  mahanto 
VvA  199)  ;  Dh.\  1.7,  278  ;  11. 4,  55,  91  ;  SnA  313.  Com- 
par.  mahallakatara  DhA  11. 18.  —  f.  mahallika  an  old 
woman  Miln  16;  Mhvs  21,  27;  VvA  105;  PvA  149 
(  =  addhagata). — .[The  BSk.  form  is  mahalla,  e.  g. 
Divy  329,  520.] 

Mahika  (f)  [cp.  *Sk.  mahika]  fog,  frost,  cold  (=:himar) 
DhsA  317)  Vin  11.295  =  Miln  273;  Sn  6O9 ;  Miln  299; 
VvA  134  (fog).  —  As  mahiya  at  A  11.53. 

Hahita  [pp.  of  mahati  or  mahiyati]  honoured,  revered 
M  II. 1 10  ;  Miln  278  ;  Sdhp  276. 

Mahanlya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  mahati]  praiseworthy  VvA  97. 

Mahila  (f)  [♦Sk.  mahila]  woman,  female  Vin  11. 281  (°titthe 
at  the  women's  bathing  place);   J   1.188;  Dpvs  1X.4  ; 

ThA  271. 

Mahisa,  Mahisa,  Mahigsa  [cp.  Vedic  mahika,  an  enlarged 
form  of  maha  ;  the  P.  etym.  evidently  to  be  connected 
with  maha4-  is,  because  of  mahisa  >mahir)sa]  a  buffalo. 
— mahisa:  D  1.6  ("yuddha  b. -tight),  9;  J  111.26  (vana° 
wild  b.)  ;  Mhvs  25,  36  (T.  mahisar)).  — mahisa  J  vi.i  10. 
— mahigsa  Vism  191,  &  in  Np.  Mahigsaka-mandala  the 
Andhra  country  J  1.356,  cp.  Mahigsaka-rajtha  VbhA 
4;   as  Mahisa-mandala   at   Mhvs   12,   29.  —  Note.  The 


P.  pop.  etym.  is  propounded  by  Bdhgh  as  "  mahiyar) 
set;  ti  mahiso  "  (he  lies  on  the  ground,  that  is  why  he 
is  a  buffalo)  DhsA  62. 

Mahi  (f.)  [f.  of  mab,  base  of  mahant,  Vedic  mahij  the  earth 
(lit.  Great  One)  Mhvs  5,  266  ;  Sdhp  424,  472  ;  loc. 
mahiya  Miln  128  ;  mahiyai)  DhsA  62.  —  Sole.  As  mahi 
is  only  found  in  very  late  P.  literature,  it  must  have 
been  re-introduced  from  Sk.  sources,  and  is  not  a  direct 
correspondent  of  Vedic  mahi. 

-tala  the  ground  (of  the  earth)  Mhvs  5,  54.  -dhara 
mountain  Miln  343  ;  Mhvs  14,  3  ;  28,  22  (v.  1.  mahin"). 
-pa  king  (of  the  earth)  Mhvs  14,  22.  -pati  king  Mhvs  5, 
48  ;  33.  32.  -pala  king  Mhvs  4,  38  ;  5,  265.  -ruha  tree 
("  growing  out  of  the  earth  ")  Mhvs  14,   18,   18,   19. 

Ma  (indecl.)  [cp.  Vedic  ma,  Gr.  /i/)]  prohibition  particle : 
not,  do  not,  let  us  hope  not,  I  wish  that  .  .  .  not  [cp. 
Lat.  utinam  &  ne].  Constructed  with  various  tenses, 
e.  g.  I.  with  aor.  (prohibitive  tense)  :  ma  evag  akattha 
do  not  thus  DhA  1.7  ;  m\  abhani  speak  not  Pv  1.3^  ;  ma 
cintayittha  do  not  worry  DhA  1.12  ;  ma  parihayi  I  hope 
he  will  not  go  short  (or  be  deprived)  of  ...  M  1.444  ; 
ma  bhayi  fear  not  J  11. 159;  ma  marigsu  I  hope  they 
will  not  die  J  111.55  ;  ml  (te)  rucci  may  it  not  please 
(you),  i.  e.  please  do  not  Vin  11. 198  ;  ma  evag  ruccittha 
id.  DhA  1. 13. — 2.  with  imper.  :  ma  gaccha  J  1152; 
ma  detha  J  in. 275.  ma  ghita  do  not  kill  :  see  mighata. 
—  3.  with  pot.  :  mi  anuyuiijetha  Dh  27  ;  ma  bhuiijetha 
let  him  not  eat  Mhvs  25,  113;  ma  vadetha  J  vi.364.  — 
4.  with  indie,  pres.  :  ma  patilabhati  A  v.  194.  —  A 
peculiar  use  is  found  in  phrase  anemi  ma  anemi  shall 
I  bring  it  or  not?  J  vi.334.  —  5.  ma,=  na  (simple  negation) 
in  masakkhimha  we  could  not  Vin  in. 23. 

-Ma  [the  short  form  of  masa,  direct  der"  fr.  ma :  see 
minati]  see  punna-ma. 

Magadha  [fr.  Magadha]  scent-seller,  (lit.  "  from  Magadha  ") 
Pv  II. 9"  (  =  gandhin  PvA  127). 

Magadhaka  (nt.)  [magadha -l-ka,  lit.  "from  Magadha"] 
garlic  Vin  iv.259  (lasunai)  nama  magadhakar)  vuccati). 

Magavika  [guna-  form  to  •mrga=P.  miga ;  Sk.  marga- 
vika]  a  deerstalker,  huntsman  A  11.207  ;  Pug  56  ;  Miln 
364,  412  ;  PvA  207. 

Maghata  (nt.)  [lit.  ma  ghata  "  kill  not  "]  the  injunction 
not  to  kill,  non-killing  order  (with  ref.  to  the  killing  of 
animals  J  in. 428  ("bheri,  the  drum  announcing  this 
order);  iv.iis;  vi.346  (uposatha"). 

Mangalya  (adj.)  [fr.  mangala]  auspicious,  fortunate, 
bringing  about  fulfilment  of  wishes  J  vi.i79. 

Maqiava  [cp.  *Sk.  manava]  a  youth,  young  man,  esp.  a 
young  Brahmin  Sn  1022,  1027.  1028;  J  iv.391  (brah- 
mana°) ;  DA  1.36  =satto  pi  coro  pi  taruno  pi ;  DhA  1.89. 
pi.  manava  menTh  2,  1 12.  — The  spelling  manava  occurs 
at  Sn  456,  589,  &  Pv  1.8^  {  =  men  Th  11.112  ;  kumara 
PvA  41). 

Ma];tavaka  [fr.  manava]  a  young  man,  youth  a  Brahmin 
Miln  10 1  ;  in  general :  young,  e.  g.  naga"  a  young  serpent 
J  III. 276;  f.  "ika  a  Brahmin  girl  J  1.290;  Miln  loi  ; 
naga°  a  young  female  serpent  J  in. 275;  DhA  in. 232. 

Matanga  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  matanga,  dial.]  an  elephant  Dh 
329,  330  (here  as  Ep.  of  naga)  ;  J  111.389  ;  vi.47  ;  Vv 
43*;  Miln  368.  —  2.  a  man  of  a  low  class  [cp.  BSk. 
matangi  Divy  397]  SnA  185  sq.  (as  Np.). 

Matar  (f)  [Vedic  mata,  stem  matar",  Av.  matar-,  Gr. 
l''n>H>  (Doric  ttdnii))  Lat.  mater,  Oir.  mathir,  Ohg. 
rauoter,  Ags.  modor=  mother ;  Cp.  further  Gr.  /ii';rpo 
uterus,  Lat.  matrix  id.,  Sk.  matrka  mother,  grand- 
mother, Ger.  mieder  corset.  From  Idg.  *ma,  onomat. 
part.,    cp.    "mamma"]    mother. — Ca.'ses :    nom.    sg. 


-Matika 


152 


Manatta 


mata  Sn  296  ;  Dh  43  ;  J  iv.463  ;  v.8 j  ;  vi.  1 1  7  ;  Nd^  504 
(dcf.  as  janika) ;  gen.  matu  Th  i,  473  ;  Via  1.17  ;  J  1.52  ; 
matuya  J  1.53;  Mhvs  10,  80;  PvA  31;  and  mataya 
J  1.O2  ;  dat.  matu  Mhvs  g.  19  ;  ace.  matarag  Sn  60.  124  ; 
Dh  294;  instr.  matara  Th  2,  212  ;  loc.  matari  Dh  284 

—  pi.  does  not  occur.  In  comb"  with  pita  father,  mata 
always  precedes  the  former,  thus  mata-pitaro  (pi.) 
"mother  &  father"  (see  below).  — matito  (abl.-adv.) 
from  the  mother's  side  (cp.  pitito)  D  1.113;  A  111.151  ; 
PvA  29.  —  On  mata  in  simile  see  J.P.T.S.  1907,  122  ; 
cp.  Vism  321  (simile  of  a  mother's  solicitude  for  her 
children).  Similarly  the  pop.  etym.  of  raata  is  given, 
with  "  mamayati  ti  mata"  at  VbhA  107.  —  The  4 
bases  of  m.  in  comp"  are :  mata^,  mati",  matu°,  & 
matti°. —  I.  mata°  :  -pitaro  mother  &  father  D  in. 66, 
i88  sq. ;  Sn  404;  Miln  12.  See  also  pita,  -pitika 
having  mother  &  father  DhA  11. 2.  -pititthana  place  of 
m.  &  f.  DhA  11.95.  -pettika  having  m.  iS:  f.,  of  m.  & 
I.  Xd^  385  (nama-gotta).  -petti-bhara  supporting  one's 
m.  &  f.  S  1.228;  J  1.202;  VI. 498.  -maha  maternal 
grandfather  J  iv.146;  DhA  1.346.  —  2.  mati°  :  -devata 
protector  or  guardian  of  one's  mother  J  111.422  (gloss  : 
matu-devata  viya).  -pakkha  the  mother's  side  DhA 
1.4  (+ pitipakkha).  -posaka  supporting  one's  m. 
J  111.422  (v.  1.  matu").  —  3.  matu°  :  -upatthana  (spelt 
matupatth")  reverence  towards  one's  m.  DhA  iv.14. 
-kucchi  ra's  womb  D  11. 1 2  ;  Vism  560  ("gata)  ;  VbhA  96  ; 
DhA  r.127.  -gama  "  grex  feminarum,"  womanfolk, 
women  (collectively  cp.  Gcr,  frauen-zimmer)  A  11.126; 
Vin  IV.175;  J  1.201;  111.90;  A  11.126;  Vin  iv.175; 
J  1.201  ;  111.90,  530  (pi.  "gamap.  531)  ;  Pug  68  ;  SnA  355  ; 
PvA  271  ;  VvA  77.  -ghata  &  (usually)  °ka  a  matricide 
(+pitu-ghataka  ;  see  abhithana)  Vin  1.168,  320;  Miln 
310  ;  Tikp  167  sq.  ;  Vbh.\  425.  -ghatikamma  matricide 
Tikp.  281.  -bhuta  having  been  his  mother  PvA  78. 
-mattin  (see  matta'  4)  whatever  is  a  mother  S  iv.iio 
(°isu  matucittar)  upatthapeti  foster  the  thought  of 
mother  towards  whatever  is  a  mother,  where  in  se- 
quence with  bhagini-mattin  &  dhitumattin).  -hadaya 
a  mother's  heart  PvA  63.  —  4.  matti°  :  see  matti-sam- 
bhava. 

-Matika  (adj.)  [fr.  mata,  Sk.  matrka]  -mother;  in  mata" 
one  whose  mother  is  dead,  lit.  a  "  dead-mother-ed," 
J  11. 131  ;  111.213.  Also  neg.  amatika  without  a  mother 
J  V.251. 

Matika  (f)  [*Sk.  matrka]  i.  a  water  course  Vism  554 
(°atikkamaka) ;  Mhvs  35,  96;  37,  50;  SnA  500  (  =  sob- 
bha) ;  DhA  11. 141  (its  purpose:  "  ito  c'  ito  ca  udakai) 
haritva  attano  sassa-kammag  sampadenti  ") ;  VvA  301. 

—  2 .  tabulation,  register,  tabulated  summary,  con- 
densed contents,  esp.  of  philosophical  parts  of  the 
Canonical  books  in  the  Abhidhamraa  ;  used  in  Vinaya  in 
place  of  Abhidharama  Pitaka  ;  probably  the  original 
form  of  that  (later)  Pitaka  Vin  1.1  ig,  337;  11.8  [cp. 
semantically  in  similar  sense  Lat.  matrix=E.  matric, 
i.  e.  register.  In  BSk.  matrika  Divy  18,  333]  A  1.117 
(Dhamma-dhara,  Vinaya-dhara,  Matika-dhara ;  here 
equivalent  to  Abhidhamma) ;  Vism  312  (so  panca- 
vasso  hutva  dve  matika  pagunag  katva  pavaretva) ; 
SnA  15;  Kh.\  37,  gg,   117. 

-nikkhepa  putting  down  of  a  summary,  tabulation 
Vism  536.  540.  The  summary  itself  is  sometimes  called 
nikkhepa,  e.  g.  the  4"'  part  of  the  Atthasalini  (DhsA 
pp.  343-409)  is  called  nikkhepa-kanda  or  chapter  of  the 
summary;  similarly  m.-nikkhepa  vara  at  Tikp.  11. 

Matiya  (adj.  n.)  [the  diaeretic  form  of  macca,  used  in  verse, 
cp.  Sk.  martya  &  Vedic  (poetical)  raartia]  (a)  mortal 
J  VI. 100  (C.  macca;  gloss  manava). 

Mata°  see  mata. 

Mituka(nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  matrka,  fr.  matr  =  matar]  "  genetrix," 
matrix,  origin,  cause  Th  1,  612. 


Matuccha  (f)  [Sk.  matr-svasa]  mother's  sister,  maternal 
aunt  Vin  11.254,  256;  J  iv.3go  ;  Miln  240.  -"putta 
aunt's  son.  male  first  cousin  (from  mother's  sister's  side) 

5  11.281  ;  Ud  24;  DhA  i.iig.     Cp.  matula-dhita. 

Matala  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  matula  &  semantically  Lat.  matruus, 
i.  e.  one  who  belongs  to  the  mother]  a  mother's  brother, 
an  uncle  J  1.225  :  DhA  1.15  ;  PvA  58,  60. 

-dhita  (the  complement  of  matuccha-putta)  uncle's 
daughter,  female  first  cousin  (from  mother's  brother's 
side)  J  11.119;  DhA  111.290  ;  PvA  55. 

Matalaka=  matula  DhA  1.182. 

Matulani  (f)  [Sk.  matulani,  semantically  cp.  Lat.  mater 
tera]  a  mother's  brother's  wife,  an  aunt  J  1.387  ;  iv.184  ; 
PvA  55.  58. 

Matulunga  (nt.)  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  matulunga;  dialectical  ?] 
a  citron  J  111.319  (=mella;  v.  1.  bella). 

Madisa  (adj.)  [Epic  &  Class.  Sk.  madrs  &  madrsa,  mag-l- 
drs]  one  like  me  Sn  482  ;  Mhvs  5,  193  ;  VvA  207  ;  DhA 

1.284  ;  PvA  76,  123. 

Mana  [late  Vedic  &  Epic  Sk.  mana,  fr.  man,  orig.  meaning 
perhaps  "  high  opinions  "  (i.  e.  No.  2) ;  hence  "pride" 
(No.  i).  Def.  of  root  see  partly  under  maneti,  partly 
under  minati]  i.  pride,  conceit,  arrogance  (cittassa 
unnati  Nd'  80  ;  Vbh  350).  Mana  is  one  of  the  Saniio- 
janas.  It  is  one  of  the  principle  obstacles  to  Arahant- 
ship.  A  detailed  analysis  of  mana  in  tenfold  aspect  is 
given  at  Nd^  8o  =  Nd^  505;  ending  with  def"  "  mano 
mafinana  .  .  .  ketukamyata  "  etc.  (cp.  Vbh  350  &  see 
under  mada).  On  term  see  also  Dhs  §  1 1 16  ;  Dhs  trsl. 
298  (  =  2  275)  sq.  —  D  111.234 ;  S  1.4  ;  Sn  132,  370  ;  469, 
537,  786,  88g,  g43,  Dh  74,  150,  407  ;  Nd'  2g8  ;  Pug  18  ; 
Vbh  345  sq.,  353  sq.,  383  (7  fold),  38g  (9  fold) ;  VbhA 
486  sq.  ("  seyyo  'ham  asm!  ti  "  etc.);  Tikp  166,  278; 
DhA  111.  1 18,  252  ;  Sdhp500,  539.  — asmi°  pride  of  self, 
as  real  egoism  D  111.273. — -2.  honour,  respect  J  v. 331 
(-l-puja).  Usually  in  cpd.  bahumana  great  respect 
Mhvs  20,  46;  PvA  50.  Also  as  mani°  in  comp"  with 
karoti :  see  manikata.     Cp.  vi°,  sam°. 

-citimana  pride  &  conceit,  very  great  (self-)  pride. 
or  all  kinds  of  conceit  (see  10  fold  mana  at  Nd'  80  = 
Nd2  505)  D  111.86;  Sn  245,  830,  862;  Nd'  170,  257. 
-atthe  at  Th  i,  214  read  mcinatthe=ma  anatthe. 
rdnusaya  the  predisposition  or  bad  tendency  of  pride 
M  1.486;  D  111.254,  282;  Sn  342.  Cp.  mamankara. 
-dbhisamaya  full  grasp  (i.  e.  understanding)  of  pride 
(with  sainma")  M  1.122  (which  Kern.  Toev.  s.  v.  inter- 
prets wrongly  as  "  waanvoorstelling  ") ;  S  iv.205  sq., 
3gg ;  Sn  342  (  =  manassa  abhisamayo  khayo  vayo 
pahanai)  SnA  344).  -jatika  proud  by  nature  J  1.88. 
-thaddha  stubborn  in  pride,  stiff-necked  J  1.88,  224. 
-da  inspiring  respect  Mhvs  33,  82.  -mada  (-matta) 
(drunk  with)  the  intoxicating  draught  of  pride  J  11.259  ; 
PvA  86.  -saiinojana  the  fetter  of  pride  or  arrogance 
D  111.254;  Dhs  1116=1233.  See  under  saiinojana  & 
cp.  formulae  under  mada  2.  -satta  cleaving  to  conceit 
Sn  473.  -salla  the  sting  or  dart  of  pride  Nd'  5g  (one 
of  the  7  sallani,  viz.  raga,  dosa,  moha  etc.,  expl^  in 
detail  on  p.  413.     See  other  series  with  similar  terms 

6  mana  at  Nd^  p.  237  s.  v.  raga). 

Hana^  (nt.)  [fr.  ma:  see  minati ;  Vedic  mana  has  2  mean- 
ings, viz.  "  measure,"  and  "  building  "  (cp.  mapeti)] 
1.  measure  Vin  in.  149  (abbhantarima  inner,  bahirima 
outer);  DA  1.140.  -°kuta  cheating  in  measure,  false 
measure  Pug  58;  PvA  278.  —  2.  a  certain  measure,  a 
Mana  (cp.  manika  &  manar))  J  1.468  (addlia"  half  a  M., 
according  to  C.  equal  to  8  najis). 

Manatta  (nt.)  [a  doubtful  word,  prob.  corrupted  out  of 
something  else,  maybe  omanatta,  if  taken  as  der.  fr. 
mana^.     If  however  taken  as  belonging  to  mana''  as 


Manana 


153 


Mayavin 


an  abstr.  der.,  it  might  be  expl''  as  "  measuring,  taking 
measures,"  which  suits  the  context  letter.  The  BSk. 
form  is  still  more  puzzling,  viz.  manapya  "  something 
pleasant  "  :  Mvyut  §  265]  a  sort  of  penance,  attached 
to  the  commission  of  a  sanghadisesa  offence  DhsA  399 
(+parivasa).  °r)  deti  to  inflict  penance  on  somebody 
Vin  n.7  (+parivasar)  deti);  iv.225.  manatt'  iraha 
deserving  penance  Vin  11.55,162  (parivasika+ ).  See 
on  term   Vin.  Texts  11.397. 


Manana  (nt.)  &  Manana  (f.)  [fr.  mana^]  paying  honour  or 
respect;  reverence,  respect  S  1.66  ;  J  11. 138  ;  Pug  19,  22  ; 
Miln  377  (with  sakkara,  vandana,  pujana  &  apaciti) ; 
Dhs  1121  ;  DhsA  373.  — Cp.  vi°,  sam°. 


Manava  see  Manava. 


Manavant  (adj.)  [fr.  mana']  possessed  of  pride,  full  of 
conceit;  neg.  a°  not  proud  Th  i,  1222. 

Manasa  (nt.)  [a  secondary  formation  fr.  manas  =  mano, 
already  Vedic  lit.  "  belonging  to  mind  "]  intention, 
purpose,  mind  (as  active  force),  mental  action.  Almost 
equivalent  to  mano  Dhs  §  6.  In  later  language  manasa 
is  quite  synonymous  with  hadaya.  The  word,  used 
absolutely,  is  more  a  t.  t.  in  philosophy  than  a  living 
part  of  the  language.  It  is  more  frequent  as  -"  in  adj. 
use,  where  its  connection  with  mano  is  still  more  felt. 
Its  absolute  use  probably  originated  from  the  latter 
use.  —  DhsA  140  (  =  mano);  Vbh  144  sq.  (in  definition 
of  viiiila.na  as  cittar),  mano,  manasar),  hadayar)  etc.  : 
see  mano  113);  DhA  11. 12  (paradare  manasaij  na 
bandhissami  "  shall  have  no  intention  towards  another's 
wife,"  i.  e.  shall  not  desire  another's  wife)  ;  Mhvs  4,  6 
(sabbesar)  hita-manasa  with  the  intention  of  common 
welfare)  ;  32,  56  (raiino  hasesi  manasar)  gladdened  the 
heart  of  the  king).  —  As  adj.  {-")  :  being  of  such  &  such 
a  mind,  having  a  .  .  .  mind,  with  a  .  .  .  heart;  like: 
adina'  with  his  mind  in  danger  S  v. 74  (+ apatitthita- 
citta)  ;  uggata'  lofty-minded  VvA  217;  pasanna"  with 
settled  (peaceful)  mind  Sn  402  and  frequently  ;  mulha" 
infatuated  llhvs  5,  239  ;  rata^  PvA  19  ;  sancodita°  urged 
(in  her  heart)  PvA  6.S ;  soka-santatta°  with  a  heart 
burning  with  grief  PvA  38. 

Manasana  (adj.)  fr.  manasa,  secondary  formation]  = 
manasa  in  adj.  use  Sn  63  (rakkhita'). 

Manassin  (adj.  n.)  "prob.  fr.  manassin  (*manasvin)  under 
influence  of  mana.  Cp.  similar  formation  manavant] 
proud  Vin  11. 183  (expH  by  Bdhgh  in  a  popular  way  as 
"  raana-ssayino  mina-nissita ").  The  corresponding 
passage  at  J  1.88  reads  muna-jatika  mana-tthaddha. 

Manikata  'pp.  of  a  verb  mani-karoti,  which  stands  for 
mana-karoti,  and  is  substituted  for  manita  after  analogy 
of  purakkhata,  of  same  meaning]  lit.  "  held  in  high 
opinion,"  i.  e.  honoured,  worshipped  S  11. 119  (garukata 
m.  pujita). 

Manika  (f)  [cp.  mana^  2]  a  weight,  equal  to  4  Donas 
Sn.\  476  (catudonar)  manika).  Cp.  BSk.  manika,  e.  g. 
Divy  293  sq. 

Manita  [pp.  of  maneti]  revered,  honoured  Ud  73  (sakkata 
m.  pujita  apacita).  —  A  rather  singular  by-form  is 
manikata  (q.  v.). 

Manin  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  mana']  proud  (of)  Sn  282  (samaria"), 
889  (paripunna") ;  Dh  63  (pandita"  proud  of  his  clever- 
ness, cp.  DhA  11.30) ;  J  1.454  (atireka°) ;  111.357 
(paijdita°) ;  Sdhp  389.  417.  —  f.  manini  Mhvs  20,  4 
(rupa°  proud  of  her  beauty). 

Manasa  (adj.  n.)  [cp.  Vedic  manusa  ;  fr.  same  base  (man\is) 
as  manussa]  i.  (adj.)  human  Sn  301  (bhoga)  ;  It  94 
(kama  dibba  ca  manusa) ;  Pv  11.9^'  (m.  deha) ;  9''  (id  ). 
— amanusa  divine  Vv  35'  ;  Pv  11.122"  .  ghostly  (  =  super- 
human)   Pv  IV.3"  ;  f.  amanusi  Pv  111.7.* — 2.   (n.  m.)  a 


human  being,  a  man  Mhvs  15,  64  ;  f.  minus!  a  (human) 
woman  J  iv.231  ;  Pv  11. 4'.  — amanusa  a  superhuman 
being  Pv  iv.i^'.  —  pi.  manusa  men  Sn  361.  644;  Pv 
II. ii'.  As  nt.  in  collective  sense^mankind  Pv  11. 11^ 
(v.  1.  manussar)  ;  C.  =  manussaloka). 

Manusaka=  manusa,  viz.  1.  (adj.)  human:  A  1.2 13 
(sukhar))  ;  Sn  5-'4  (brahma-khettai))  ;  Dh  417  (yogai)  = 
m.  kayar)  DhA  iv.225) ;  Vv  35';  J  1. 138  (kama).  —  f. 
manusika  Vism  407. — 2.  a  human  being,  man  Pv 
IV.  1".  Also  nt.  (collectively)  pi.  manusakani  human 
beings,  men  DhA  1.233. 

Maneti  [Cans,  of  man,  cp.  Sk.  manayati,  Lat.  moneo  to 
admonish.  Ger.  mahnen,  Ags.  manian.  The  Dhtp  593 
gives  root  as  man  in  meaning  "  pSja "]  to  honour, 
revere,  think  highly  of  PvA  54  (aor.  manesur),  -I-  garu- 
karii)su-l- pujesur)).  — pp.  manita. 

Mapaka  (-')  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  mapeti]  one  who  measures,  only 
in  dona"  (a  minister)  measuring  the  d.  revenue  (of  rice) 
J  II-3&7.  381  ;  DhA  IV.88  ;  and  in  dhafifia"  measuring 
corn  or  grain  J  III. 542  ("karama,  the  process  of  .  .  .)  ; 
Vism  278  (in  comparison). 

Mapeti  [Cuas.  of  ma,  see  minati.  The  simplex  mimite  has 
the  meaning  of  "  erect,  build  "  already  in  Vedic  Sk.] 
I.  to  build,  construct  S  11. 106  (nagarai)) ;  Mhvs  6,  35 
(id.);  Vv  84*';  VvA  260.  — 2.  to  create,  bring  about, 
make  or  cause  to  appear  by  supernatural  power  (in 
folkloristic  literature,  cp.  nimminati  in  same  sense) 
J  ii.iii  (sarirag  navai)  katva  mapesi  transformed  into 
a  ship)  ;  iv.274  ;  Mhvs  28,  31  (maggar)  caused  a  road  to 
appear). — 3.  to  measure  out  (?),  to  declare  (?),  in  a 
doubtful  passage  J  iv.302,  where  a  misreading  is  prob- 
able, as  indicated  by  v.  1.  BB  (samapassii)su  for  T. 
tena  amapayigsu).  Perhaps  we  should  read  tena-m- 
asayigsu. 

Mamaka  (adj.)  [fr.  mama]  lit.  "mine,"  one  who  shows 
affection  (not  only  for  himself),  making  one's  own.  i.e. 
devoted  to,  loving  Sn  8u6  (=  Buddha",  Dhamma", 
Sangha"  Nd'  125;  =mamayamana  SnA  534),  927 
(same  expl"  at  Nd'  382);  Miln  184  (ahigsayar)  parai) 
loke  piyo  hohisi  mamako  ti).  —  Buddha"  devoted  to 
the  B.  J  1.299:  DhA  1.206.  f.  "mamika  J  111.182.^ 
In  voc.  f.  mamika  at  Th  2,  207  (cp.  ThA  172)  "  mother," 
we  may  perhaps  have  an  allusion  to  ma  "  mother  " 
[cp.  Sk.  mama  uncle,  Lat.  mamma  mother,  and  mata]. 
■ — amamaka  see  .sep.  ;  this  may  also  be  taken  as  "  not 
loving." 

Maya  (f.)  [cp.  Vedic  maya.  Suggestions  as  to  etym.  see 
Walde,  Lat.  Wtb.  s.  v.  manticulor]  i.  deceptive  appear- 
ance, fraud,  deceit,  hypocrisy  Sn  245,  328  ("kata 
deceit),  469,  537,  786,  941  (:  maya  vuccati  vaiicanika 
cariya  Nd'  422) ;  Vbh  357,  361,  3S9  ;  Miln  289  ;  Vism  106 
(-1- satheyya,  mana,  papicchata  etc.),  479  (maya  viya 
viiinanar))  ;  VbhA  34  (in  detail),  85,  493  (def.).  Is  not 
used  in  Pali  Abhidhamma  in  a  philosophical  .sense.  — 
2.  mystic  formula,  magic,  trick  M  1.381  (avattani  m.). 
khattiya"  the  mystic  formula  of  a  kh.  J  vi.375  ;  Miln 
190;  DhA  1. 166.  In  the  sense  of  "illusion"  often 
comb''  with  marici,  e.  g.  at  J  11.330  ;  v.367  ;  Nd^  680*". 
-^3-  jugglery,  conjuring  Miln  3.  —  On  maya  in  similes 
see/.f  .r.S.  1907,  122  ;  on  term  in  general  Dhs  trsl.'^  255 
("illusion  ")  ;  Expos,  m.  468'>.  —  As  adj.  in  amaya  (q.  v.) 
1%  in  bahu-maye  rich  in  deceit  SnA  351.  —  Note.  In  the 
word  mar)  at  KhA  123  (in  pop.  etym.  of  man-gala)  the 
ed.  of  the  text  sees  an  ace.  of  ma  which  he  takes  to 
be  a  contracted  form  of  maya  (  =  iddhi). 

-kara  a  conjurer,  magician  S  111.142  ;  Vism  366  (in 
comparison) ;  VbhA  196. 

Mayavin  (adj.)  [fr.  maya,  cp.  Vedic  mayavin]  deceitful, 
hypocritical  D  III. 45,  246;  Sn  89,  116,  357;  Pug  19, 
23  ;  PvA  13.     See  also  amayavin. 


Mayu 


154 


Malin 


Mayu  [*Sk.  mayu]  bile,  gall  Abhp  281. 

Mara  [fr.  mr,  later  Vedic,  mara  killing,  destroying, 
bringing  death,  pestilence,  cp.  Lat.  mors  death,  morbus 
illness.  Lith.  maras  death,  pestilence]  death  ;  usually 
personified  as  Np.  Death,  the  Evil  one,  the  Tempter 
(the  Buddhist  Devil  or  Principle  of  Destruction). 
Sometimes  the  term  mara  is  applied  to  the  whole  of  the 
worldly  existence,  or  the  realm  of  rebirth,  as  opposed 
to  Nibbana.  Thus  the  def°  of  m.  at  Nd-  506  gives 
"  kammabhisankhara-vasena  patisandhiko  khandha- 
maro.  dhatu",  ayatana".  —  Other  general  epithets  of  M. 
(quasi  twin-embodiments)  are  given  with  Kanha, 
Adhipati,  Antaka,  Namuci,  Pamattabandhu  at  Nd' 
489  =  Nd^  507  ;  the  two  last  ones  also  at  Nd'  455.  The 
usual  standing  epithet  is  papima  "  the  evil  one,"  e.  g. 

5  1. 103  sq.  (the  famous  Mara-Sagyutta :  see  Windisch, 
Mara  &■  Buddha)  ;  Nd'  439;   DhA  iv.71   (Maravatthu) 

6  freq.  —  See  e.  g.  Sn  32,  422,  429  sq.,  1095,  M  103  ; 
Dh  7,  40,  46,  57,  105,  175,  274  ;  Nd'  475  ;  Vism  79,  228, 
376;  KhA  105  ;  SnA  37,  44  sq.,  225.  350  sq.,  386  sq.  ; 
Sdhp  318,  449,  609.  Further  refs.  &  details  see  under 
Proper  Names. 

-Sbhibhii  overcoming  M.  or  death  Sn  545  =  571- 
-kayika  a  class  of  gods  Miln  285  ;  KvuA  54.  -dhitaro 
the  daughters  of  M.  SnA  544.  -dheyya  being  under 
the  sway  of  M.  ;  the  realm  or  kingdom  of  Mara  A  iv.228  ; 
Sn  764  ;  Dh  34  (  =  kilesa-vatta  DhA  1.289).  -bandhana 
the  fetter  of  death  Dh  37,  276,  350  (=  tebhumaka-vatta- 
sankhatai)  DhA  iv.69).  -sena  the  army  of  M.  Sn  561. 
563  ;  SnA  528. 

Maraka  (-°)  [fr.  mareti]  one  who  kills  or  destroys,  as 
manussa"  man-killer  J  11. 182  ;  hatthi"  elephant -killer 
DhA  1.80.  —  m.  in  phrase  samaraka  (where  the  -ka 
belongs  to  the  whole  cpd.)  see  under  samaraka. 

MaraQa  (nt.)  [fr.  Caus.  mareti]  killing,  slaughter,  death 
D  11.128;  Sdhp  295,  569. 

Maratta  (nt.)  [*Mara-tvar)]  state  of,  or  existence  as  a 
Mara  god,  Maraship  Vbh  337. 

Marapita  [pp.  of  marapeti]  killed  J  n.417;  in. 531. 

Marapitatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  marapita]  being  incited 
to  kill  DhA  1.141. 

Marapeti  [Caus.  II.  of  mr]  :  see  marati.  — pp.  marapita. 

Marita  [pp.  of  mareti]  killed  S  1.66;  Vin  in. 72  ;  J  11. 41  7 
(anfiehi  m.-bhavai)  janatha). 

Marisa  (adj.)  [perhaps  identical  with  madisa]  only  in  voc- 
as  respectful  term  of  address,  something  like  "  Sir,"  pi. 
"  Sirs."  In  sg.  marisa  M  1.327  ;  A  111.332  ;  Sn  814,  1036, 
1038,  1045  etc.  ;  Nd'  i40  =  Nd^  508  (here  e:x.y\^  by  same 
formula  as  ayasma,  viz.  piya-vacanai)  garu-vacanar) 
etc.);  J  V.140;  Pv  11.13^;  Mhvs  i,  27.  —  pi.  marisa 
Sn  682;  J  1.47,  49;  Vism  415;  PvA  75.  Explained 
by  Buddhaghosa  to  mean  niddukkha  K.S.  1.2  n. 

Maiuta  [for  the  usual  maluta]  the  wind  S  1.127  ;  Mhbv  8. 

Maretar  [n.  ag.  to  mareti]  one  who  kills,  slayer,  destroyer 
S  III. 189. 

Hareti  [Caus.  of  my]  to  kill :  see  under  marati.  —  pp. 
marita. 

Mala  (mala)  [?]  i.  mud  [is  it  mis-spelling  of  mala  ?],  in 
pakka-m°-kalala  (boiling  mud)  J  vi.400.  Kern,  Toev. 
s.  V.  believes  to  see  the  same  word  in  phrase  mala-kaca- 
vara  at  J  n.416  (but  very  doubtful).  —  2.  perhaps  = 
froth,  dirty  surface,  in  phena°  Miln  117  (cp.  malin  2). 
where  it  may  however  be  mala  ("  wreaths  of  foam  ").  — 
3.  in  asi°  the  interpretation  given  under  asi  (as  "dirt  " 
see  vol.  I.  p.  88)  is  to  be  changed  into  "  sword-garland," 
thus  taking  it  as  mala. 


Malaka  (Ma}aka)  [fr.  mala  or  mala]  a  circular  (conse- 
crated) enclosure,  round,  yard  (cp.  Geiger,  Mhvs.  Irsl. 
99  :  "  m.  is  a  space  marked  off  and  usually  terraced, 
within  which  sacred  functions  were  carried  out.  In 
the  Mahavihara  (Tiss'  arama)  at  Anuradhapura  there 
were  32  rnalakas ;  Dpvs  xiv.78  ;  Mhvs  15,  192.  The 
sacred  Bodhi-tree  e.  g.  was  surrounded  by  a  malaka  "). 
—  The  word  is  peculiar  to  the  late  (Jataka-)  literature, 
&  is  not  found  in  the  older  texts.  —  J  1.449  (vikkama°) ; 
IV. 306 ;  V.49  (visala"),  138  (id.,  spelling  malaka); 
Mhvs  15,  36  (Maha-mucala°)  ;  16,  15  ;  32,  58  (sanghassa 
kamma",  end.  for  ceremonial  acts  of  the  S.,  cp.  15,  29) ; 
DhA  IV. 1 15  (°siraa) ;  Vism  342  (vitakka"). 

Malati  (f)  [fr.  mala]  the  great-flowered  jasmine  Abhp  576. 
Cp.  malika. 

Mala  (f-)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  mala]  garland,  wreath,  chaplet ; 
collectively=  flowers ;  fig.  row,  line  Sn  401;  Pug  56; 
Vism  265  (in  simile)  ;  Pv  11.3'*  (gandha,  m.,  vilepana, 
as  a  "  lady's  "  toilet  outfit) ;  11.4'  (as  one  of  the  8  or  10 
standard  gifts  to  a  bhikkhu  :  see  dana,  deyyadhamma 
&  yaiiiia) ;  PvA  4  =  J  in. 59  (ratta-kanavera°  a  wreath  of 
red  K.  flowers  on  his  head  :  apparel  of  a  criminal  to  be 
executed.  Cp.  ratta-mala-dhara  wearing  a  red  gar- 
land J  III. 179,  an  ensign  of  the  executioner)  ;  PvA  51, 
62 .  — asi  °-kamma  the  sword -garland  torture  (so  correct 
under  asi!)  J  in. 178;  Davs  111.35  ;  dipa°  festoons  of 
lamps  Mhvs  5,  181  ;  34,  77  ("samujjota)  ;  nakkhatta"  the 
garland  of  stars  VvA  167  ;  puppha"  a  garland  or  wreath 
of  flowers  Mhvs  5,  181.  —  On  mala  in  similes  see 
J.P.T.S.  1907,  123.  In  comp"  mala"  sometimes  stands 
for  mala". 

-kamma  garland-work,  ■  garlands,  festoons  VvA  188. 
-kara  garland-maker,  florist,  gardener  (cp.  Fick.  Sociale 
Gleiderung  38,  182)  J  v. 292  ;  Miln  331  ;  DhA  1.208,  334  ; 
VvA  170,  253  (°vithi).  -kita  adorned  with  garlands, 
wreathed  Vin  1.208.  -guna  "  garland-string,"  gar- 
lands, a  cluster  of  garlands  Dh  53  ( =  mala-nikati  "  make- 
up "  garlands  DhA  1.419  ;  i.  e.  a  whole  line  of  garlands 
made  as  "  ekato-vantika-mala  "  and  "  ubhato-v.-m.," 
one  &  two  stalked  g.,  cp.  Vin  m.iSo).  mala  guna- 
parikkhitta  one  adorned  with  a  string  of  gs.,  i.  e.  a 
marriageable  woman  or  a  courtesan  M  1.2 86  =  A  v.264. 
-gula  a  cluster  of  gs.,  a  bouquet  Vin  in.  139 ;  SnA  224  ; 
VvA  32,  III  (v.  1.  guna).  -cumbataka  a  cushion  of 
garlands,  a  chaplet  of  flowers  DhA  i.  72 .  -dama  a  wreath 
of  flowers  J  II.  104.  -dhara  wearing  a  wreath  J  111.179 
(ratta°,  see  also  above),  -dharin  wearing  a  garland 
or  wreath  (on  the  head)  Pv  iii.i'  (kusuma°  ;  v.  1.  BB 
"bharin) ;  PvA  169  (v.  1.  °bharin)  ;  f.  dharini  Vv  32^ 
(uppala",  of  a  Peti.  See  also  bharin).  -puta  a  basket 
for  flowers  DhA  in. 2 12.  -bharin  wearing  a  wreath 
(chaplet)  [the  reading  changes  between  °bharin  & 
"dharin;  the  BSk.  prefers  "dharin,  e.  g.  MVastu  1.124 
&'  "dhara  at  Divy  218]  J  iv.60,  82;  v.45  ;  PvA  211 
(v.  1.  "dharin) ;  f.  "bharini  J  111.530  ;  VvA  12  ;  &  bhari 
Th  I,  459  (as  V.  1.  ;  T.  reads  "dharl).  Cp.  "dharin. 
-vaccha  [vaccha  here  =  *vrksa]  a  small  flowering  tree 
or  plant,,  an  ornamental  plant  Vin  11.12  ;  in. 179  ;  Vism 
172  (v.  1.  "gaccha) ;  DhA  n.  109  (q.  v.  for  expl°  :  taruna- 
rukkha-puppha). 

Malika'  (nt.)  [fr.  mala  or  mala  ?]  name  of  a  dice  J  vi.  281 . 

Malika'  [fr.  mala]  a  gardener,  florist  Abhp  507. 

Malika  (f  )  [fr.  mala]  double  jasmine  Davs  5,  49. 

Malin  (adj.)  [fr.  mala]  i.  wearing  a  garland  (or  row)  of 
flowers  (etc.)  Pv  111.9'  (  =  malabharin  PvA  211);  f. 
malini  Vv  36-  (nana-ratana°)  ;  Mhvs  18.  30  (vividha- 
dhaja"  mahabodhi).  —  2.  (perhaps  to  mala)  bearing  a 
stain  of,  muddy,  in  phena"  with  a  surface  (or  is  it  gar- 
land ?)  of  scum  Miln  260.  —  3.  what  does  it  mean  in 
paiica",  said  at  J  vi.497  of  a  wild  animal  ?  (C.  not  clear 
with  expl"  "  paiicangika-turiya-saddo  viya  "). 


Malulca 


155 


Masiya 


Malaka  (n\.  or  f.  ?)  [of  uncertain  origin]  a  kind  of  vessel, 
only  in  camma"  leather  bag  (?)  J  vi.431  (where  v.  1. 
reads  carama-pasibbakahi  valukadihi),  432  (gloss  c- 
pasibbaka). 

Maluta  the  proper  Pali  form  for  maruta.  the  a-stem  form 
of  maru^  =  Vedic  marut  or  maruta]  wind.  air.  breeze 
S  iv.2i8;  Th  1.2;  n.372  ;  J  1.167;  iv.222  ;  v. 328; 
VI. 189;  Miln  319;  Vism  172  (  =  vayu);  \'vA  174,  178. 

-irita  (contracted  to  maluterita)  moved  by  the  wind, 
fanned  by  the  breeze  Th  r.  754  ;  11.372  ;  Vv  44'-=  81'  , 
Pv  II.  1 2'.     See  similar  expressions  under  Trita. 

Maluva  (f.)  [cp.  BSk.  malu]  a  (long)  creeper  M  1.306  ; 
S  1.207  ;  A  1.202  sq. ;  Sn  272  ;  Dh  162,  334  ;  J  III. 389  ; 
V.205,  215,  389;  V.205,  215,  389;  VI. 528  (phandana")  ; 
DhA  III. 152  ;  IV. 43.  —  On  maluva  in  similes  see  J.P.T.S. 
1907,  123. 

Malura  [late  Sk.J  the  tree  Aegle  marmelos  Abhp  556. 

Malya  see  malya. 

Ma]a  (&  Mala)  "Non-Aryan,  cp.  Tamil  madam  house, 
hallj  a  sort  of  pavilion,  a  hall  D  1.2  (mandala",  same 
at  Sn  p.  104,  which  passage  SnA  447  expl°^  as  "  savi- 
tanai)  mandapar) ")  ;  Vin  1.140  (atta,  mala,  pasada ; 
expf  at  Vin  in. 201.  In  the  same  sequence  of  Vbh 
251  expl""  at  VbhA  366  as  "  bhojana-sala-sadiso  man- 
dala-majo ;  Vinay'  attha-kathayar)  pana  eka-kuta- 
sangahito  caturassa-pasado  ti  vuttag  ")  ;  Miln  46,  47. 
—  Cp.  malaka. —  [The  BSk.  form  is  either  mala,  e.  g. 
MVastu  11.274,  o''  mada,  e.  g.  Mvyut  226,  43.] 

Ha]aka  [a  Non-Aryan  word,  although  the  Dhtm  395  gives 
roots  mal  &  mall  in  meaning  "  dharana  "  (see  under 
mala).  Cp.  malorika]  a  stand,  viz.  for  alms-bowl 
(patta°)  Vin  11. 114,  or  for  drinking  vessel  (paniya°) 
J  V1.85. 

Hasa^  [cp.  Vedic  masa,  &  mas ;  Gr.  fti/v  (Ionic  ^fi'c) ; 
.\v.  mah  (moon  &  month) ;  Lat.  mensis ;  Oir.  ml ; 
Goth.  mena  =  moon;  Ohg.  mano,  raanot  month.  Fr. 
•mo  to  measure:  see  rainati]  a  month,  as  the  12"'  part 
of  the  year.  The  12  months  are  (beginning  with  what 
chronologically  corresponds  to  our  middle  of  March)  : 
Citta  (Citra),  Vesakha.  Jettha,  Asalha,  Savana.  Pottha- 
pada,  Assayuja,  Kattika,  Magasira,  Phussa,  Magha. 
Phagguna.  As  to  the  names  cp.  nakkhatta.  Usually 
in  ace,  used  adverbially  ;  nora.  rare,  e.  g.  addha-maso 
half-month  VvA  66;  Asajhi-masa  VvA  307  (  =  gimhi- 
nar)  pacchima  masa) ;  pi.  dve  masa  PvA  34  (read  mase) ; 
cattaro  gimhana-masa  KhA  192  (of  which  the  P'  is 
Citra,  otherwise  called  Pathama-gimha  "  i^'  winter  " 
and  Bala-vasanta  "premature  spring").  —  Instr.  pi. 
catuhi  masehi  Miln.  82  ;  PvA  i.io'^.  — ace.  pi.  as  adv.  : 
dasamase  10  months  J  1.52  ;  bahu-mase  PvA  135  ;  also 
nt.  chammasani  6  months  S  iii.ij.'j.  Freq.  ace.  sg.  collec- 
tively :  a  period  of  .  .  .,  e.  g.  temasai]  3  months  DhsA 
15  ;  PvA  20  ;  catu"  DA  1.83  ;  PvA  96  ;  satta'  PvA  20  ; 
dasa°  PvA  63;  addha°  a  fortnight  Vin  iv.117.  —  On 
masa  {&  f.  masi),  as  well  as  shortened  form  °ma  see 
punna. 

-punnata  fullness  or  completion  of  the  month  DA 
1.140;  -mattai)  (adv.)  for  the  duration  of  a  month 
PvA  19- 

Hasa'  'Vedic  masa,  Phaseolus  indica,  closely  related  to 
another  species :  mudga  Phaseolus  mungo]  a  bean 
(Phaseolus  indica  or  radiata)  ;  usually  comb""  with 
mugga,  e.  g.  Vin  in. 64  ;  Miln  267,  341  ;  DA  1.83.  Also 
used  as  a  weight  (or  measure  ?)  in  dhanfla-masa,  which 
is  said  to  be  equal  to  7  lice:  VbhA  343. — pi.  mase 
Vv  80'  (  =  masa-sassani  VvA  310). 

-odaka  bean-water  KhA  237.  -khetta  a  Held  of 
beans  Vv  80^  ;  VvA  308.  -bija  bean-seed  DhA  ni.212. 
-vana  plantation  J  v. 37  (-f  mugga^). 


Masa'  [identical  with  masa"]  a  small  coin  (=masaka) 
J  11.425  (satta  raasa=s.  masaka  C). 

Masaka  fr.  masa^-i- ka=raasa']  lit.  a  small  bean,  used 
as  a  standard  of  weight  &  value ;  hence  a  small  coin  of 
very  low  value.  Of  copper,  wood  &  lac  (DhsA  318; 
cp.  KhA  37  ;  iatu°,  daru°,  loha') ;  the  suvanna"  (golden 
m.)  at  J  IV.  107  reminds  of  the  "  gold  "  in  fairy  tales. 
That  its  worth  is  next  to  nothing  is  seen  from  the 
descending  progression  of  coins  at  DhA  in.ic8  =  Vv.\ 
77,  which,  beginning  with  kahapana,  addha-pada,  places 
masaka  &  kahanika  next  to  mudha  "  gratis."  It  only 
"  counts  "  when  it  amounts  to  5  misakas.  —  Vin  111.47, 
67;  IV. 226  (panca°);  J  1.112  (addha-misakar)  na 
agghati  is  worth  nothing);  iv.107;  v.135  (first  a  rain 
of  flowers,  then  of  raasakas,  then  kahapanas) ;  Dh.\ 
11.29  (pafica-m.-mattar)  a  sum  of  5  m.)  ;  PvA  282 
(m-l-addha°  half-pennies  &  farthings,  as  children's 
pocket-money). 

Masakkhimhaat  Vin  in. 2 3  is  for  ma  asakkhimha  "  we  could 
not  "  ;  ma  here  stands  for  na. 

Masati,  Masana,  Masin  [fr.  mr?,  for  massati  etc. ;  see 
masati'  touch,  touching,  etc.  in  .sense  of  eating  or 
taking  in.  So  is  probably  to  be  read  for  asati  etc.  in 
the  foil,  passages,  where  m  precedes  this  a  in  all  cases. 
Otherwise  we  have  to  refer  them  to  a  root  as=as  (to 
eat)  and  consider  the  m  as  partly  euphonic,  ^duma- 
pakkani-masita  J  n.446  (C  reads  masita  &  expl"-  by 
asita,  dhata) ;  visa-masita  Milo  302  (T.  reads  visam- 
asita)  having  taken  in  poison ;  visa-masan-iipatapa 
(id.)  Vism  166  ;  tina-masin  eating  grass  J  vi.354  (=tina- 
khadaka  C).  —  A  similar  case  where  Sandhi-ra-  has 
led  to  a  wrong  partition  of  syllables  and  has  thus  been 
lost  through  syncope  may  be  P.  elaka^  as  comp''  with 
Sk.  methi  (cp.'  Prk.  medhi),  pillar,  post. 

Masaia  [reading  uncertain]  only  instr.  masaluna  Miln  292  ; 
Trenckner  says  (note  p.  428) :  "  m.  is  otherwise  un- 
known, it  must  mean  a  period  shorter  than  5  months. 
Cp.  Sk.  masaia."  —  Rh.  D.  (trsl.  n.148)  translates 
"  got  in  a  month,"  following  the  Sinhalese  gloss.  — 
The  period  seems  to  be  only  a  tillle  shorter  than  5 
months ;  there  may  be  a  connection  with  catu  in  the 
word. 

Masacita  'misa'-l-acita]  filled  by  the  (say  6  or  more) 
month(s),  i.  e.  heavy  (alluding  to  the  womb  in  advanced 
pregnancy),  heaped  full  M  1.332  (kucchi  garu-garu  viya 
misacitar)  raaniie  ti ;  Neumann  trsl-  "  wie  ein  Sack 
voU  Bohnen."  thus  taking  m.  =  mlsa2,  and  acita  as 
"  heap  "  which  however  is  not  justified).  This  passage 
has  given  rise  to  a  gloss  at  Vbh  386,  where  misacitai) 
maiiiie  was  added  to  kayo  garuko  akammaniio.  in 
meaning  "  heavy,  languid."  The  other  enum"-  of  the 
8  kusita-vatthuni  (A  iv.332  ;  D  in. 255)  do  not  give 
m.  m.  It  may  be  that  the  re.semblance  between  akam- 
maiifio  and  maiine  has  played  a  part  in  reminding  the 
Commentator  of  this  phrase.  The  fact  that  Bdhgh 
comments  on  this  passage  in  the  VbhA  (p.  510)  shows, 
that  the  reading  of  Vbh  386  is  a  very  old  one.  Bdhgh. 
takes  masa  in  the  sense  of  misa*  &  expl"  masacita  as 
"  wet  bean  "  (tinta  maso),  thus  omitting  expl»  of  acita. 
The  passage  at  Vbh.\  510  runs  :  "  ettha  pana  misacitaij 
nama  tintamaso,  yatha  tintamiso  garuko  hoti,  evaij 
garuko  ti  adhippayo." 

Masika  (adj.)  [fr.  masa']  i.  of  a  month,  i.  e.  a  month  old 
Miln  ^o2.  — 2.  of  a  month,  i.  e.  consisting  of  months, 
so  many  months  (old)  (-°).  as  addha°  at  intervals  of  half 
a  month  D  1.166;  M  1.238,  343;  Pug  55;  dve"  two 
months  old  Pv  i.o'.  —  3.  monthly,  i.  e.  once  a  month 
Th  I,  283  (bhatta). — Cp-  masiya. 

Masiya  (adj.)  [  =  masika]  consisting  of  months  D  11.327 
(dvadasa"  sarjvacchara  the  year'of  12  months). 


Miga 


156 


Mithu 


Miga  [Vedic  mrga,  to  mrj,  cp.  magga,  meaning,  when 
characterised  by  another  attribute  "  wild  animal  "  in 
general,  animal  of  the  forest ;  when  uncharacterised 
usually  antelope]  i.  a  wild  animal,  an  animal  in  its 
natural  state  {see  cpds.).  — 2.  a  deer,  antelope,  gazelle. 
Various  kinds  are  mentioned  at  J  v. 4 16  ;  two  are  given 
at  Nd^  509,  viz.  eni  (antelope)  &  sarabha  (red  deer) : 
see  under  eiji  &  sarabha.  —  Sn  39,  72  ;  J  1.154  ;  in. 2 70 
(called  Nandiya)  ;  PvA  62,  157.  On  miga  in  similes  see 
J.P.T.S.  1907,  123,  where  more  refs.  are  given. 

-cldhibhu  king  of  beasts  (i.  e.  the  lion)  Sn  684.  -inda 
king  of  beasts  (id.)  Sdhp  593.  -chapaka  young  of  a 
deer  VvA  279.  -daya  deer  park  J  iv.430  (Madda- 
kucchi) ;  VvA  86  (Isipatana).  -dhenu  a  hind  J  1.152  ; 
DhA  III. 1 48.  -bhijta  (having  become)  like  a  wild 
animal,  M  1.450  ("bhutena  cetasa).  -mandalocana  the 
soft  eye  of  the  deer  Vv  64"  ;  Pv  i.i  i'.  See  under  manda. 
-raja  king  of  the  beasts  (the  lion)  D  111.23  sq.  -luddaka 
deer-hunter  J  1372  ;  111.49,  184  ;  DhA  11.82  ;  VbhA  266 
(in  simile),  -vadha  deer-slaying  J  1.149.  -vittaka, 
amateur  of  hunting  J  iv.267.  -visana  a  deer's  horn 
Pug  56.     -vithi  deer-road  J  1.372. 

Migava  (f.)  [  =  Sk.  mrgaya,  cp.  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  46^]  hunt, 
hunting,  deer-stalking  PvA  154  ("padesa).  Usually  in 
devasikar)  migavar)  gacchati  to  go  out  for  a  day's 
hunting  J  iv.267  ;  or  as  pp.  ekadivasar)  migavar)  gata 
VvA  260  ;  ekahar)  m.  g.  Mhvs  5,  154. 

Higi  (f.)  [f.  of  miga,  cp.  Epic  Sk.  mrgi]  a  doe  Th  i,  109 ; 
J  V.215;  VI. 549;  DhA  1.48. 

Micchatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  miccha]  item  of  wrong,  wrong- 
ness.  There  are  8  items  of  wrong,  viz.  the  8  wrong 
qualities  as  enum''  under  (an-)  ariya-magga  (see  mic,cha), 
forming  the  contrary  to  the  sammatta  or  righteousness 
of  the  Ariyan  Path.  These  8  at  D  11.353;  i'i-254; 
A  11.22 1  ;  iv.237;  Vbh  387;  Vism  683.  Besides  these 
there  is  a  set  of  10,  consisting  of  the  above  8  plus 
miccha-iiana  and  °vimutti  wrong  knowledge  &  wrong 
emancipation  :  D  111.290  ;  Vbh  391  ;  Vism  683  (where 
"nana  &  "viratti  for  vimutti).  —  See  further  D  in. 2 1 7 
("niyata)  ;  Pug  22;  Dhs  1028  (cp.  Dhs.  irsl.  §1028); 
Vbh  145  ;  Tikp.  32  (°niyata-citta),  325  (°tika),  354  (id.). 

Miccha  (adv.)  [Sk  mithya,  cp.  Vedic  mithah  interchanging, 
separate,  opposite,  contrary  (opp.  samyak  together  :  sec 
samma) ;  mithu  wrongly  ;  see  also  mithu]  wrongly,  in  a 
wrong  way,  wrong-,  false  Sn  438  (laddho  yaso),  815 
(patipajjati  leads  a  wrong  course  of  life,  almost  syn. 
with  anariyar).  Illustrated  by  "  panai)  hanati,  adinnar) 
adiyati,  sandhii)  chindati,  nillopar)  harati,  ekagarikar) 
karoti,  paripanthe  titthati,  paradarag  gacchati,  musa 
bhanati "  at  Nd^  144);  Vbh.\  513  (°nana,  "vimutti). 
-miccha"  often  in  same  comb"*  as  samma",  with  which 
contrasted,  e.  g.  with  the  8  parts  of  (an-)  ariya-magga, 
viz.  "ditthi  (wrong)  views  (D  in. 52.  70  sq.,  76,  iii, 
246,  269,  287,  290.  Dh  167,  316  sq. ;  Pug  39  ;  Vism  469 
(def.)  PvA  27,  42,  54,-  67  ;  cp.  "ka  one  who  holds  wrong 
views  D  III. 45,  48,  264  ;  Vism  426)  ;  "sankappa  aspira- 
tion (D  III. 254,  287,  290  sq.,  Dh  II);  "vaca  speech 
(ibid.);  "kammanta  conduct  (ibid.);  "ajiva  living  (D 
III. 176  sq.,  254,  290  ;  A  n.53,  240,  270,  IV, 82)  ;  "vayama 
effort  (D  in. 254,  287,  290  sq.) ;  "sati  mindfulness  (ibid.)  ; 
"samadhi  concentration  (ibid.) ;  see  magga  2,  and  cp. 
the  following  : 

-gahana  wrong  conception,  mistake  J  in. 304.  -cara 
wrong  behaviour  Pug  39  {&  adj.  carin) ;  VbhA  383  (var. 
degrees),  -patipada  wrong  path  (of  life)  Pug  49  (& 
adj.:  "patipanna,  living  wrongly),  -panihita  (citta) 
wrongly  directed  mind  Dh  42  =  Ud  39  [cp.  BSk.  mithya- 
pranidhana  Divy  14].  -patha  wrong  road,  wrong 
course  Vbh  145  (lit.  &  fig.  ;  in  exegesis  of  ditthi,  cp. 
Nd^  tanha  in.  ;  Dhs  381  ;  DhsA  253). 

Minja  (nt.)  &  minja  (f.)  [Vedic  majjan  (fr.  majj  ?) ;  on 
form   see   Geiger.   P.Gf.   §   9',    &   cp.    Pischel,   Prk.   Gr. 


§§  74,  loi]  marrow,  pith,  kernel  Vin  1.25  (in  sequence 
chavi,  camma,  mar)sa,  naharu,  atthi,  miiija)  ;  Vism 
235  (id.)  ;  Kh  in.  (atthi",  f.  cp.  KhA  52,  nt.) ;  J  iv.402 
(tala"  pith  of  the  palm);  Mhvs  28,  28  (panasa",  f., 
kernels  of  the  seeds  of  the  jak-fruit). 

-rasi  heap  of  marrow  Vism  260  (  =  matthalunga). 

Minjaka=mifija,  only  in  tela"  inner  kernels  of  tila-seed, 
made  into  a  cake  PvA  51.     See  doni^. 

Mita  [Vedic  mita,  pp.  of  ma,  minati,  to  measure ;  also  in 
meaning  "  moderate,  measured,"  cp.  in  same  sense  Gr. 
/lirpiog]  measured,  in  measure  D  1.54  (dona"  a  dona 
measure  full) ;  Sn  300  (bhagaso  m.  measured  in  har- 
monious proportions,  i.  e.  stately);  Pv  i.iqI'  (id.); 
J  III. 541.  — amita  unlimited,  without  measure,  bound- 
less, in  Ep.  amit-abha  of  boundless  lustre  Sdhp  255. 
Also  N.  of  a  Buddha. 

-ahara  measured,  i.  e.  limited  food  Sn  707.  -bhanin 
speaking  measuredly,  i.  e.  in  moderation  Dh  227;  J 
iv.252. 

Mitta  (m.  nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  mitra,  m.  &  nt.,  friend  ;  Av. 
mH>ro,  friend]  friend.  Usually  m.,  although  nt.  occurs 
in  meaning  "  friend,"  in  sg.  (Nett  164)  &  pi.  (Sn  185, 
187);  in  meaning  "friendship"  at  J  vi.375  (  =  mitta- 
bhava  C).  The  half-scientific,  half-popular  etym.  of 
mitta,  as  given  at  VbhA  108,  is  "  mettayanti  ti  mitta, 
minanti  ti  va  m.  ;  sabba-guyhesu  anto  pakkhipanti  ti 
attho  "  (the  latter  :  "  they  enclose  in  all  that  is  hidden  "). 
—  Two  kinds  of  friends  are  distinguished  at  Xd-  510 
(in  exegesis  of  Sn  37  &  75),  viz.  agarika"  (a  house-  or 
lay-friend)  and  anagarika"  (a  homeless-  or  clerical- 
friend).  The  former  is  possessed  of  all  ordinary  qualities 
of  kindness  and  love,  the  latter  of  special  virtues  of 
mind  &  heart.  —  A  friend  who  acts  as  a  sort  of  Mentor, 
or  spiritual  adviser,  is  called  a  kalyana-mitta  (see  under 
kalyana).  —  Mitta  is  often  comb*"  with  similar  terms, 
devoting  relationship  or  friendship,  e.  g.  with  amacca 
colleagues  and  fiati-salohita"  blood-relations,  in  ster. 
phrase  at  Vin  11.126  ;  A  1.222  ;  Sn  p.  104 ;  PvA  28  ;  cp. 
nati-mitta  relatives  &  friends  Pv  1.5' ;  suhada  ("  dear 
heart")  D  in. 187  (four  types,  cp.  m.  patirupaka) ; 
suhajja  one  who  is  dear  to  one's  heart  PvA  191  ;  sahaya 
companion  PvA  86.  The  neut.  form  occurs  for  kind 
things  D  III. 188;  S  1.37.  —  Opp.  sapatta  enemy  Pv.\ 
13  ;  amitta  a  sham  friend  or  enemy  Sn  561  (  =  pac- 
catthika  SnA  455);  D  in. 185.  papa-mitta  bad  friend 
PvA  5.  —  For  refs.  see  e.  g.  Sn  58,  255.  296,  338;  Dh 

78.  37.5- 

-ibhiradhin  one  who  pleases  his  friends  J  iv.274 
(  =  mittesu  adubbhamanoC.) -ddu  [cp.  Sk.  mitra-druha] 
one  who  injures  or  betrays  his  friends  S  1.225  ;  Sn  244  ; 
J  IV. 260  ;  also  in  foil,  forms;  "dubbha  Pv  11.9'  (same 
passage  at  J  iv.352  ;  v.240 ;  vi.310,  375);  "dubha  J 
IV. 352  ;  VI. 310;  "diibhin  [cp.  Sk.  "drohin]  J  iv.257; 
V.97  ("kamma)  ;  vi.375  ;  DhA  11.23.  -patirupaka  a  false 
friend,  one  pretending  to  be  a  friend  D  in.  185  (four 
types :  anna-d-atthu-hara,  vaci-parama,  anuppiya- 
bhanin,  apaya-sahaya,  i.  e.  one  who  takes  anything, 
one  who  is  a  great  talker,  one  who  flatters,  one  who 
is  a  spendthrift  companion.)  -bandhava  a  relation  in 
friendship,  one  who  is  one's  relative  as  a  friend  Nd^  455 
(where  Nd'  1 1  has  manta-bandhava).  -bheda  see 
mithu-bheda.  -vanna  pretence  of  friendship,  a  sham 
friendship  Pv  iv.8'  {  =  mitta-rupa,  m.-patirupata  PvA 
268). 

Mittata  (f)  -(")  [abstr.  fr.  mitta]  state  of  being  a  friend, 
friendship,  in  kalyana"  being  a  good  friend,  friendship 
as  a  helper  (see  kalyana)  D  in. 2 74  ;  Vism  107. 

Mitti(f.)  [a  by-form  of  metti]  friendship  J  1.46S  (=mettiC.). 

Mithu  (adv.)  [cp.  Vedic  mithu  &  P.  miccha;  mith,  cp. 
mithah  alternately,  Av.  miflo  wrongly ;  Goth,  misso  one 
another,  missa-leiks  different ;  Ger.  E.  prefix  mis-  i.  e. 


Middha 


157 


Missaka 


wrongly:  Ger.  missetat  wrong  doing  =  misdeed  ;  Lat. 
muto  to  change,  mutuus  reciprocal;  Goth,  maibms 
present  =  Ags.  majjum ;  mith  in  Vedic  Sk.  is  "to  be 
opposed  to  each  other,"  whereas  in  Vedic  mithuna  the 
notion  of  "  pair  "  prevails.  See  also  methuna]  opposite, 
reciprocally,  contrary  Sn  825,  882  (taken  by  Nd'  163  & 
290.  on  both  passages  identically,  as  n.  pi.  of  adj.  instead 
of  adv.,  &  expl""  by  "  dve  jana  dve  kalaha-karaka  "  etc.). 
-bheda  ^evidently  in  meaning  of  mi«a-bheda  "  break 
of  friendship."  although  mithu  means  "  adversary," 
thus  perhaps  "  breaking,  so  as  to  cause  opposition  "] 
breaking  of  alliance,  enmity  D  11.76;  J  iv.184  (here 
with  V.  1.  mitta') ;  Kvu  314. 

Hiddlia  (nt.)  [orig.  pp.  perhaps  to  Vedic  mid  (?)  to  be 
fat=niedll,  as  DhsA  378  gives  "  medhati  ti  middhag." 
—  More  likely  however  connected  with  Sk.  methi 
(pillar  =  Lat.  mcta),  cp.  Prk.  medhi.  The  meaning  is 
more  to  the  point  too,  viz.  "  stiff."  Thus  scmantically 
identical  with  thina.  —  BSk.  also  middha,  e.  g.  Divy 
555]  torpor,  stupidity,  sluggishness  D  1.71  (thina°)  : 
Sn  437;  A  V.18;  Dhs  1157;  Miln  299,  412  (appa°  not 
slothful,  i.  e.  diligent,  alert) ;  \"ism  450  (°rupa ;  +  roga- 
riipa,  jatirupa,  etc.,  in  def.  of  rupa) ;  DA  1.2 11  (expl'' 
as  cetasika  gelaiina  :  see  on  this  passage  Dhs  trsl.  §1 155) ; 
Sdhp  459.  —  See  thina. 

Middhin  (adj.)  [fr.  middha^  torpid,  drowsy,  sluggish  Dh 
325  ( =  thinamiddh'  abhibhuta  Dh.\  iv.16). 

Midha  [does  it  refer  to  mP  as  in  minati-,  or  to  middha  ?^ 
is  given  as  root  in  meaning  "  hirjsana,"  to  hurt  at 
Dhtm  536  (with  var.  v.v  11.),  not  sure. 

Minana  (nt.)  [fr.  mi  to  measure,  fix,  construct]  measuring, 
surveying  DA  1,79  ;  Dhs.\  123. 

Minati'  [roots  (Vedic)  ma  &  mi;  pres.  minute  &  minoti ; 
Idg.  *me,  cp.  Sk.  matra  measure,  mana ;  Av,  ma-, 
mitih  measure ;  Gr.  fic'iTiov  small  measure,  /ivrif 
counsel  Lat.;  raetior,  mensis,  modus;  Goth,  mela 
bushel;  Ags.  maed  measure  (cp.  E.  mete,  meet  = 
fitting);  Lith.  metas  year. — ^The  Dhtm  726  gives  mi 
in  meaning  "  pamana "]  to  measure  VbhA  108  (see 
etym.  of  mitta) ;  Pot.  mine  J  v. 468  (  =  mineyya  C.) ; 
fut.  minissati  Sdhp  585.  ger.  minitva  Vism  72  ;  grd. 
minitabba  J  v.90. — Pass,  miyati :  see  anu". — pp. 
mita. — Cp.  anu",  abhi",  ni°,  pa°,  vi°.  Caus.  mapeti 
(q.  v.). 

Minati^  [\^edic  minati,  mi  (or  mi),  to  diminish ;  cp.  Gr. 
/iivi'w  diminish;  Lat.  minor=E.  minor;  Goth,  mins 
(little),  compar,  minniza,  superl.  minnists  =  Ger. 
mindest.  — The  Dhtp  502  gives  mi  %vith  "  higsa,"  the 
Dhtm  725  with  "  hirjsana."  It  applies  the  same  inter- 
pretation to  a  root  midh  (Dhtm  536).  which  is  probably 
abstracted  fr.  Pass,  miyati]  to  diminish  ;  also  :  to  hurt, 
injure.  Very  rare,  only  in  some  prep.  comb"\  —  See 
also  miyati. 

Hiyyati  (&  Miyati)  [corresponding  to  Vedic  mriyate,  fr. 
mr,  via.  *miryate>mij'yati.  See  marati]  to  die.  —  (a) 
miyyati  :  Sn  804:  Nett  23.  med.  3"'  pi.  miyyare  Sn 
575  ;  pot.  miyye  J  vi.498  ;  ppr.  miyyamana  M  in. 246  ; 
Vism  49  ?  fut.  miyyissati  M  111.24O.  —  (b)  miyati 
(influenced  in  form  by  jiyati  &  miyati  of  minati-) : 
M  III. 168  (jayati  jiyati  miyati);  J  in. 189;  Dh  21; 
pot.  miyetha  D  11.63.  PPr-  miyamana  S  1.96.  —  pp. 
mata. 

Milakkha  [cp.  Ved.  Sk.  mleccha  barbarian,  root  mlecch, 
onomat.  after  the  strange  sounds  of  a  foreign  tongue, 
cp.  babbhara  &  mammana]  a  barbarian,  foreigner,  out- 
caste,  hillman  S  v.466 ;  J  vi.207 ;  DA  1.176;  SnA  236 
("mahatissa-thera  Np.),  397  (°bhasa  foreign  dialect). 
The  word  occurs  also  in  form  milakkhu  (q.  v.). 


Milakkha  [the  Prk.  form  (A-MagadhI,  cp.  Pischel,  Prk. 
Gr.  105,  zii)  for  P.  milakkha]  a  non-Aryan  D  in. 264  ; 
Th  I,  965  ("rajana  "  of  foreign  dye  "  trsl.  ;  Kern,  Toev. 
s.  v.  translates  "  vermiljoen  kleurig  ").  As  milakkhuka 
at  Vin  III. 28,  where  Bdhgh  expl*  by  "  Andha-Damil'  adi." 

Milaca  [by-form  to  milakkha,  via  *milaccha>*milacca> 
milaca  :  Geiger,  P.Gr.  62-  ;  Kern.  Toev.  s.  v.]  a  wild  man 
of  4;he  woods,  non-Aryan,  barbarian  J  iv.291  (not  with 
C.  =  janapada),  cp.  ludda  m.  ibid.,  and  milaca-putta 
J  V.I 65  (where  C.  also  expb  by  bhojaputta,  i.  e.  son  of 
a  villager). 

Milata  [pp.  of  milayati]  faded,  withered,  dried  up  J  1.479  ; 
V.473  ;  Vism  254  (°sappa-pitthi,  where  KhA  49  in  same 
passage  reads  "milata-dham(m)ani-pitthi")  ;  DhA  1.335  ; 
iv.8  (sarira),  112  ;  Sn.\  69  ("mala,  in  simile) ;  Mhvs  22, 
46  (a°);  Sdhp  161. 

Milatata  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  milata]  only  neg.  a."  the  (fact  of) 
not  being  withered  J  v.  156. 

MUayati  [Vedic  mla,  to  become  soft ;  Idg.  *mela  &  *mlei, 
as  in  Gr.  ,i\a%,  liXnKfvw  to  languish  ;  Lat.  flaccus  withered 
(  =  flaccid);  Lith.  blaka  weak  spot;  also  Gr.  /JXi/xpoi.- 
weak.  —  Dhtp  44')  :  "  mila  =  gatta-vimane  "  (i.  e.  from 
the  bent  limbs) ;  Dhtm  679  id.]  to  relax,  languish,  fade, 
wither  S  1.126;  It  76  ;  J  1.329;  v.90. — Caus.  milapeti 
[Sk.  mlapayati]  to  make  dry,  to  cause  to  wither  J  1.340 
(sassai)) ;  fig.  to  assuage,  suppress,  stifle  J  111.414 
(tanhag). — pp.  milata. 

Millika  at  PvA  144  in  passage  pagsukulai)  dhovitv-abhi- 
siiicimillikaii  ca  katva  adasi  is  to  be  read  either  as 
"  abhisiiici  cimillikaii  ca  k."  or  "  abhisincitva  mudukaii 
ca  k." 

Hilhaka  at  S  u.228  is  to  be  read  milhaka  (q.  v.). 

Misati  [mi?,  Vedic  misati.  root  given  as  misa  at  Dhtm  479. 
with  expl°  "  mllane  "]  to  wink  (one's  eyes) :  see  ni". 

Missa  (adj.)  [orig.  pp.  of  mis,  cp.  Vedic  misra.  Sk.  misra- 
j'ati,  meksayati ;  Gr.  /liyvw/ii  &  /iiffyw ;  Lat.  misceo, 
mixtus ;  Ags.  miscian=mix;  Ohg.  miskan.  —  Dhtp 
631  "sammissa"]  i.  mi.xed  (with:  -°) ;  various  Vin 
1.33  (kesa°,  jata°  etc.^a  mixture  of,  various);  Th  i, 
143  ;  J  III. 95,  144  (udaka-panna°  yagu) ;  Pv  1.9=  (missa 
kitaka).  nt.  missag  as  adv.  "  in  a  mixed  way  "  Vism 
552  =  VbhA  i&i  (4-dvidha). — 2.  accompanied  by 
(-°),  having  company  or  a  retinue,  a  title  of  honour  in 
names,  also  as  polite  address  [cp.  Sk.  misra  &  arya 
misra]  J  v.  153  (voc.  f.  misse),  154  (f.  missa).  --  3.  missa" 
is  changed  to  missi  in  comp"  with  kr  and  bhu  (hke  Sk  ). 
thus  in  missi-bhava  (sexual)  intercourse,  lit.  mixed 
state,  union  J  11.330;  iv.471  ;  v.86  ;  VbhA  107;  and 
missi-bhuta  mixed,  coupled,  united  J  v.86  (  =  hatthena 
hatthai)  gahetva  kaya-missibhavai)  upagata  C).  Cp. 
sam.° 

-kesi  (f.)  "  mixed  hair,"  Ep.  of  a  heavenly  maiden  or 
Apsaras  Vv  60"  (expH  at  VvA  280  as  "  ratta-miladlhi 
missita-kesavatti  ")•  The  m.  missa-kesa  occurs  as  a 
term  for  ascetics  (with  munda)  at  Vism  389. 

Missaka  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  missa]  i.  mixed,  combined  J  11. 8 
(phalika°  rajata-pabbata  mountain  of  silver  mixed 
with  crystal) ;  Vbh.\  16  (lokiya-lokuttara°)  ;  usually 
°-,  like  "ahara  mixed  food  DhA  il.ioi  ;  "uppada  mixed 
portents,  a  main  chapter  of  the  art  of  prognosticating 
(cp.  Brhat-Saghita  ch.  86  :  raisrak'  adhyaya)  Miln  1 78  ; 
"bhatta  =  °ahara  SnA  97  ;  Mhbv  27.-2.  (m.)  an  atten- 
dant, follower;  f.  missika  Dh.\  1.2 11  (Samavati"). — 
T,.  (nt.)  N.  of  a  plea-sure  grove  in  heaven  (lit.  the  grove 
of  bodily  union),  one  of  the  3  :  Nandana,  M  ,  Pharusaka 
J  VI. 2  78  ;  Vism  424.  —  4.  (pi.  missaka)  a  group  of  devas, 
mentioned  at  D  11.260  in  list  of  popular  gods  (cp.  raissa 
2  and  missakesi). 


Missakatta 


158 


Mugga 


Missakatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  missaka]  mixing,  mixture, 
combination  with  {-")  Tikp  291. 

Missana  (nt.)  [fr.  misseti]  mixing  Dhtp  338. 

Missita    [pp.    of   misseti]    mixed,    intermingled    Sn    J43  ; 
.      J   V.460  ;    PvA   198   (dlianna  sasapa-tela°) ;    VvA  280 
(see  under  missa-kesi). 

Misseti  [Caus.  of  mis,  Vedic  misrayati]  i.  to  mix  Miln  126 
(mayai)  missayissama)  ;  PvA  191  (palase  sallhi  sad- 
dhig).  — 2.  to  bring  together  in  cohabitation,  to  couple 
J  ^'-154  (C-  :  kilesana  misseti).  — pp.  missita. 

Mihati  is  given  as  root  mih  in  2  meanings  at  Dhtp,  viz. 
(i)  Isa-hasana  (No.  328),  i.  e.  a  kind  of  laugh,  for  smi, 
as  in  mihita.     (2)  secana  (No.  342). 

Mihita  (nt.)  [pp.  of  smi;  this  is  the  inverted-diaeretic 
(Pall)  form  (smita>*hmita>  *mhita>  mihita)  for  the 
other  (Sk.)  form  smita  (q.  v.).  The  Dhtp  (328)  puts 
root  down  as  mih]  a  smile  J  111.419;  v.452  ;  vi.504. 
— mihita-pubba  with  smiles  Th  i,  460  (spelt  mhita")  ; 
J  VI, 221  (  =  sita  C). — Cp.  virahaya,  vimhapaka, 
vimhita. 

Miyati  see  miyyati  (Pass,  of  marati). 

Milati  [mil,  given  at  Dhtp  267  &  614  with  "  nimilane  "] 
to  wink,  only  in  cpd.  nimilati  to  close  the  eyes  (opp, 
um"). 

Milha  [pp.  of  mih,  Vedic  mehati  to  excrete  water,  i.  e. 
urine,  only  with  ref.  to  the  liquid  ;  Sk.  mIdha=Lat.  mic- 
tus,  pp.  of  mingo,  to  urinate.  Cp.  Av.  maes-iiti  to  uri- 
nate, mes  urine  ;  Gr.  u^uxeh'  &  o/(ixM«  id-  ;  Ags.  migan 
to  ur. ;  in  Ohg.  mist  &  Ags.  miox  the  notion  refers  more 
to  the  solid  excrement,  as  in  Pali.  —  A  related  root 
*meigh  to  shed  water  is  found  in  megha,  cloud  (water- 
shedder),  q.  v.  for  further  cognates]  excrement  M  1.454 
=  111.236  ("sukhar)  vile  pleasure)  ;  A  in. 241,  242  ;  Th  i, 
1152  ;  J  ii.ii  ;  VI. 1 12  ;  Vv  52"  (with  ref.  to  the  gutha- 
niraya);  Pv  111.45  (  =  gutha  PvA  194);  DhA  11.53  {°d 
khaditur)). 

-kupa  pit  of  excr.,  cesspool  Pgdp  22. 

Milhaka  (f.)  [fr.  milha;  cp.  BSk.  midha-ghata]  cesspool 
S  11.228  (so  read  for  T.  pilhaka  ;  v.  1.  BB  milhaka). 
Sec  also  pilhaka.  The  trsl.  {K.S.  11. 155)  gives  "  dung- 
beetle." 

Mukula  I  cp.  Sk.  mukula]  a  bud  ;  see  makula  (where  also 
see  mukulita).  —  Abhp  811,  1 1 16. 

Mukka  [pp.  of  muc,  Sk.  mukta,  for  the  usual  P.  mutta  ; 
cp.  Prk.  mukka,  Pischel,  Pc/c.  Gy.  §  566]  only  in  um° 
A:  pati°  (q.  v.),  and  as  v.  1.  at  M  iii.Oi. 

Mukkhakaat  J  1.44 1  should  be  read  as  mokkhaka,  mean- 
ing "  fust,  principal,  foremost  "  ;  cp.  mokkha-. 

Mukha  (nt.)  [Vedic  mukha,  fr.  fdg.  *mu,  onomat.,  cp. 
Lat.  mu  facere,  Gr.  ^ivKuofuti,  Mhg.  mugen,  Lat.  raugio 
to  moo  (of  cows),  to  make  the  sound  "  moo  "  ;  Ohg. 
mawen  to  cry,  muckazzcn  to  talk  softlv  ;  also  Gr.  iivBoq 
word,  "myth";  Ohg.  muIa=Ger.  niaul ;  Ags.  mule 
snout,  etc.  Vedic  muka  silent,  dumb=Lat.  mutus=E. 
mute]  I.  the  mouth  Sn  608,  1022  (with  ref.  to  the  long 
tongue,  pahiita-jivha.  of  the  Buddha  or  Mahapurisa)  ; 
J  II. 7;  DA  1.287  (uttana"  clear  mouthed,  i..e.  easy  to 
understand,  cp.  D  1.116);  PvA  11,  12  (puti°),  264 
(mukhena).  — -2.  the  face  J  V1.21S  (unnaja  m.)  ;  PvA 
74.  75.  77  ;  "O  karoti  to  make  a  face  (i.  e.  grimace) 
^'■s™  343-  — adho°  face  downward  Vin  11.78-  opp 
upari°  (q.  v.)  ;  assu'^  with  tearful  face  Dh  67  •  PvA  39  ■ 
see  assu.  — dum^  (adj.)  sad  or  unfriendly  looking 
J  n.pi:  VI. 343;  scurrilous  J  v.78 ;  bhadra"  bright- 
faced  PvA  149;  ruda"  crying  Pv  1.1,2.-3.  entrance, 
mouth    (of  a  river)  Mhvs   8,    12  ;   aya°   entrance   (lit 


opening),  i.  e.  cause  or  means  of  income  DA  1.218; 
ukka°  the  opening  of  a  furnace,  a  goldsmith's  smelting 
pot  A  1.257;  Sn  686;  J  vi.217;  574.  ubhato-mukha 
having  2  openings  M  1.57.  sandhi"  opening  of  the 
cleft  PvA  4.  Hence:  — 4.  cause,  ways,  means, 
reason,  byway  of  J  111.55  byway  of  a  gift  (danamukhe) ; 
IV. 266  (bahuhi  mukhehi).  — apaya"  cause  of  ruin  or 
loss  A  II. 166;  IV. 283. — 5.  front  part,  front,  top.  in 
isa°  of  the  carriage  pole  S  1.224=}  1.203.  Hence: 
—  6.  the  top  of  anything,  front,  head,  best  part;  adj. 
topmo.st,  foremost  Sn  568  (aggihutta-mukha  yanna), 
569  (nakkhattanar)  mukhar)  cando ;  cp.  Vin  1.246) ; 
Vbh.\  },^^2  (  =  uttamar),  mukha-bhutag  va).  —  Der.  adj. 
mokkha  &  pamokkha  (q.  v.).  Note.  A  poetical  instr. 
sg.  mukhasa  is  found  at  Pv  1.2^  &  1.3'-,  as  if  the  nom. 
were  mukho  (s-stem).  —  The  abl.  mukha  is  used  as 
adv.  "  in  front  of,  before,"  in  cpd.  sam°  &  param",  e.  g. 
PvA  13.     See  each  sep. 

-adhana  (i)  the  bit  of  a  bridle  M  1.446  ;  (2)  setting  of 
the  mouth,  i.  e.  mouth-enclosure,  rim  of  the  m.  ;  in  m. 
silitthar)  a  well-connected,  well-deftned  mouth-contour 
DhsA  15  (not  with  trsl.  "  opens  lightly,"  but  better 
with  note  "  is  well  adjusted."  see  Expos.  19,  where 
write  °adhana  for  °adana).  -asiya  (?  cp.  asita')  to  be 
eaten  by  the  mouth  DhsA  330  (mukhena  asitabba). 
-ullokana  looking  into  a  person's  face,  i.  e.  cheerful, 
bright,  perhaps  also  flattering  DhA  11.193  (^-s  "olokana). 
-uUokika  flattering  (cp.  above)  Nd'  249  (puthu  Sattha- 
ranar)  m.  puthujjana)  ;  PvA  219.  -odaka  water  for 
rinsing  the  mouth  Nd^  39'  =  Miln  370;  VvA  65;  DhA 
11.19;  IV. 28.  -ja  born  in  (or  from)  the  mouth,  i.  e.  a 
tooth  J  VI. 2 19.  -tunda  a  beak  VvA  227  [cp.  BSk. 
mukhatundaka  Divy  387].  -dugga  one  whose  mouth 
is  a  difficult  road,  i.  e.  one  who  uses  his  mouth  (speech) 
badly  Sn  664  (v.  I.  "dukkha).  -dusi  blemishes  of  the 
face,  a  rash  on  the  face  DA  1.223  (m.-dosa  ibid.). 
-dvara  mouth  opening  PvA  180.  -dhovana-tthana 
place  for  rinsing  the  mouth,  "lavatory"  DhA  11.184. 
-puiichana  wiping  one's  mouth  Vin  1.297.  -piira  filling 
the  mouth,  a  mouthful,  i.  e.  as  much  as  to  fill  the 
mouth  J  VI. 350.  -puraka  mouth-filUng  Vism  106. 
-bheri  a  musical  instrument,  "  mouth-drum,"  mouth- 
organ  (?)  Nd^  2  19  B;  SnA  86.  -makkatika  a  grimace 
(like  that  of  a  monkey)  of  the  face  J  11.70,  448  (T. 
makkatiya).  -vatti  "  opening-circumference,"  i.  e. 
brim,  edge,  rim  DhA  11. 5  (of  the  Lohakumbhi  purgatory, 
cp.  J  111.43  lohakumbha-mukhavatti) ;  DhA  111.58  (of 
a  gong),  -vanna  the  features  PvA  122,  124.  -vikara 
contortion  of  the  mouth  J  11.448.  -vikiina  (  =  vikara) 
grimace  SnA  30.  -sankocana  distortion  or  contraction 
of  the  mouth,  as  a  sign  of  displeasure  DhA  11.270; 
cp.  mukha-sankoca  Vism  26.  -saiinata  controlling 
one's  mouth  (i.  e.  speech)  Dh  363,  cp.  DhA  iv.93. 

Mukhara  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  mukhara;  fr.  mukha]  garrulous, 
noisy,  scurrilous  S  1.203;  v.269  ;  A  1.70;  111.199,  355; 
Th  I.  955  ;  Sn  275  ;  J  111.103  ;  DhA  11.70  (ati")  ;  PvA  ii. 
—  opp.  amukhara  M  1.470;  Th  i,  926;  Pug  35;  Miln 
414. 

Mllkharata  (f.)  [fr.  mukhara]  talkativeness,  garrulousness, 
noisiness  DhA  11.70. 

Mugga  [Vedic  mudga,  cp.  Zimmer,  .4ltind.  Leben  240]  a 
kind  of  kidney-bean,  Phaseolus  mungo,  freq.  comb'' 
with  misa-  (q.  v.).  On  its  size  (larger  than  sasapa, 
smaller  than  kalaya)  see  A  v.  170  &  cp.  kalaya. — D 
11.293  ;  M  1.57  (-hmasa)  ;  S  1.150;  J  1.274,  429;  111.55; 
vi-355  (°raasa)  ;  Miln  2O7,  341  ;  SnA  283. 

-supa  bean-soup  Vism  27.  -supyata  "bean-soup- 
character,"  or  as  Vism  trsl.  32  has  it  "  bean-curry- 
talk  "  ;  fig.  denoting  a  faulty  character,  i.  e.  a  man  who 
behaves  like  bean-soup.  The  metaphor  is  not  quite 
transparent :  it  is  expH  by  Bdhgh  as  meaning  a  man 
speaking  half-truths,  as  in  a  soup  of  beans  some  are 
only  half-boiled.     The  expl"  is  forced,  &  is  stereotype, 


Muggatiya 


159 


Muncati 


as  well  as  is  the  comb"  in  which  it  occurs.  Its  origin 
remains  to  be  elucidated.  Anyhow  it  refers  to  an 
unevenness  in  character,  a  flaw  of  character.  The 
passage  (with  var.  spellings)  is  always  the  foil.  ;  catu- 
kamyata  (patu°  Nd^ ;  "kammata  Miln  ;  patu°  Vbh) 
mugga-siipyata  ("supata  Nd^  ;  °suppata  Miln  &  KhA 
236  ;  "supata  and  suppata  Vbh  &  VbhA  jjS  ;  supyati 
Vism)  paribhattata  ("bhatvata  Visra.  ;  "bhattakati 
Miln;  "bhatyat'a'  &  "bbhattata  Vbh).  At  Nd^  39'  it  is 
used  to  explain  savajja-bhogin,  at  Vism  17  &  Vbh  246 
anacara;  at  Vbh  352  lapana;  at  Miln  370  it  is  used 
generally  (cp.  Miln  trsl.  11.287).  The  C.  expl°  of  the 
Vbh  passage,  as  given  at  (VbhA  483  &)  Vism  i  7  runs  as 
follows :  "  mugga-supa-samanaya  sacc'  alikena  jivita 
kappanatay'  etar)  adhivacanar).  Yatha  hi  muggasupe 
paccante  bahii  mugga  pakag  gacchanti,  thoka  na 
gacchanti,  evam  eva  sacc&likena  jivitakappake  puggale 
bahur)  alikar)  hoti,  appakar)  saccar)."  The  text  at 
VbhA  483  is  slightly  different,  although  the  sense  is  the 
same.     Similarly  at  Vism  27. 

Muggatiya  (nt.?)  [fr.  mugga  ?]  a  plant,  according  to  C. 
a  species  of  bean  J  vi.536. 

Hoggara  [cp.  Sk.  mudgara]  a  club,  hammer,  mallet  J 
I.I  1 3  ;  II.  1 96.  382  ;  V.47  ;  vi.358  ;  Miln  351  ;  Vism  231  ; 
DhA  1. 126;  II. 21  ;  PvA  4,  55  (ayo°),  56  (°pahara),  66, 
192.  The  word  is  specifically  peculiar  to  the  so-called 
Jataka  style. 

Macala  occurs  as  simplex  only  in  Np.  Mahii-mucala-malaka 
Mhvs  15,  36.  It  refers  to  the  tree  mucalinda,  of  which 
it  may  be  a  short  form.  On  the  other  hand  mucal-inda 
appears  to  the  speaker  of  Pali  a  cp.  noun,  viz.  king  of 
the  mucala(s)  (trees).  Its  (late  ?)  Sk.  correspondent  is 
mucilinda,  of  which  the  P.  form  may  be  the  regular 
representative  (cp.  Geiger  P.Gr.  §  34).  —  i.  the  tree 
Barringtonia  acutangula  (Nicula*,  of  which  it  may  be 
a  dialectical  distortion;  *Abhp  563  nicula >*mucula> 
*mucala)  Vin  1.3  ;  J  v. 405  ("ketaka,  Dvandva) ;  vi.269 
(id.).  —  2.  N.  of  a  naga  (serpent)  king  Vin  1.3.  —  3.  N. 
of  a  great  lake  J  vi.534,  535- 

Maccbati  [march,  an  enlargement  of  Vedic  mur  to  get 
stiff  (as  in  mura  stupid,  dull,  cp.  Gr.  fiuipdj  ;  Sk.  murakha 
foolish).  Used  in  2  senses,  viz.  (a)  to  become  stiff  & 
(b)  (Caus.)  to  harden,  increase  in  tone,  make  louder. 
From  (a)  a  fig.  meaning  is  derived  in  the  sense  of  to 
become  dulled  or  stupid,  viz.  infatuated,  possessed.  — 
See  also  Liiders  in  K.Z.  XLn.194  a.  How  far  we  are 
justified  to  connect  Dhtp  216  mii  &  503  mu  ("  ban- 
dhane  ")  with  this  root  is  a  different  question.  These  2 
roots  seem  to  be  without  connections.  —  miiich  itself 
is  at  Dhtp  50  defined  with  "  mohe  "]  i.  (spelt  muccati) 
to  become  stiff,  congeal,  coagulate,  curdle  Dh  71  ;  Dh.\ 
n.67.  —  2.  to  become  infatuated  D  111.43  (majjati-f- )■ 
—  3.  only  in  Caus.  muccheti  to  make  sound,  to  increase 
in  tone  J  11249  (vinai))  ;  in.  188  (id.). — pp.  mucchita. 

Hncchana  (f)  [fr.  mucchati  2]  swelling  or  rising  in  tone, 
increase  of  sound  J  11.249  (viijar)  uttama-mucchanaya 
mucchetva  vadesi). 

Hncchancikata  (°aiiji°)  is  probably  the  correct  reading 
for  puficikata.  —  We  find  puiicikata  at  Dhs  1 136,  1230  ; 
Vbh  351,  361  (v.  1.  pucchaftji°) ;  DhsA  365  ;  mucchaiici' 
at  Nd'  8  &  Nd^  p.  152  :  pucchanji^  at  VbhA  477.  The 
meaning  is  '■  agitation,"  as  seen  from  expl"  of  term  at 
Dhs.A  365  ("  wagging  of  a  dog's  tail."  pucchar)  caleti), 
and  VbhA  477  ("  labhaii'  alabhanaka-thane  vedhana 
kampana  nicavuttata  ").  — ■  The  etym.  expl"  is  difficult : 
we  may  take  it  as  a  (misunderstood)  corruption  oi 
*mucch-angi-kata  i.  e.  muccha-l- anga-l- kf  "being 
made  stiff -of-limbs,"  or  "  swoon."  Psychologically  we 
may  take  "  swoon  "  as  the  climax  of  agitation,  almost 
like  "  hysterics."  A  similar  case  of  a  similar  term  of 
swooning  being  interpreted  by  Hdhgh  as  "  wavering  " 


(cal)  is  chambhitatta  "  paralysis,"  expl""  as  "  sakala- 
sarira  calanat]  "  at  DA  1.50. — The  expression  muc- 
chaAcikata  reminds  us  of  the  terra  katukaticukata. 

Unccha  [fr.  march^  i-  fainting,  swoon  PvA  174.  — 2.  in- 
fatuation A  II. 10  (ka,ma°).  Sn  328;  Dhs  1059. 

Uacchita  [pp.  of  mucchatij  I.  fainted,  swooning,  in  a 
faint  J  1.243  ;  DhA  11.112  ;  PvA  62,  174,  258.  —2.  dis- 
traught, infatuated  S  1.61,  204  ;  A  1.274  ;  D  in. 46  (a°)  ; 
It  92  ;  J  III. 432  ;  V.274  (C.  for  pagiddha  &  gadhita).  — 
Cp.  pa°. 

Mujjati  [The  P.  form  of  the  Sk.  majj]  to  sink,  dive,  be 
submerged  Dhtp  70  (mujja  =  mujiana).  Only  in  cpds. 
um°  &  ni°. 

Uuncati  [Vedic  muncati ;  muc,  to  release,  loosen  ;  with 
orig.  meaning  "  strip  off,  get  rid  of,"  hence  also  "  glide  " 
as  in  Lith.  miikti  to  escape,  Ags.  smugan  to  creep, 
Ger.  schmiegen  to  rub  against.  See  further  connec- 
tions in  Walde,  Lat.  Wtb.,  s.  v.  emungo.  The  Dhtp  376 
expl'  by  mocane,  Dhtm  609  id.;  631:  moce ;  765: 
pamocane]  I.  Forms.  The  2  bases  muric°  &  mucc°  are 
differentiated  in  such  a  way,  that  mufic°  is  the  active 
base,  and  mucc°  the  passive.  There  are  however  cases 
where  the  active  forms  (munc')  are  used  for  the  passive 
ones  (mucc°),  which  may  be  due  simply  to  a  misspelling, 
uc  &  cc  being  very  similar.  —  A.  Active,  pres.  muncati 
J  1.^75;  IV. 272  ;  v.453  ;  Vv  64'*  ;  pot.  muiicetha  Dh 
389;  imper.  muiica  Dh  348;  ppr.  muficanto  Sn  791; 
aor,  mufici  J  v. 289  ;  Mhvs  19.  44  ;  pi.  muficigsu  J  iv.142  ; 
ger.  muiiciya  Mhvs  25,  67  ;  mutva  J  1.375  ;  &  muiicitTa 
ibid.:  PvA  43;  inf.  muncitug  D  1.96. — Caus.  II. 
muiicapetiD  1.148.  —  B.  Passive,  pres.  muccati  Sn  508  ; 
ppr.  muccanto  J  1.118;  imper,  sg.  muccassu  Th  2,  2; 
pi.  muccatha  DhA  11.92  ;  pot.  muficeyya  Pv  11. 2' ; 
PvA  104;  Dh  127;  fut.  muccissati  J  1434  (where  also 
muncissati  in  same  sense) ;  DhA  1.105  ;  ill. 242  ;  PvA  53, 
105;  also  mokkhasi  Vin  i.2i  =  S  i.iii;  pi.  mokkhanti 
Dh  H7;  aor.  mucci(r)su)  S  111.132  ;  iv.20  ;  J  11.66;  inf. 
muccitug  Th  i,  253;  DhA  1.297. —Caus.  moceti  & 
mocapeti  (q.  v.). —pp.  mutta.  —  II.  Meanings,  i.  to 
release,  deliver  (from  =  abl.),  set  free  (opp.  bandhati) 
Sn  508  (sujjhati,  m.,  bajjhati)  ;  S  111.132  (cittani  muc- 
cigsu  their  hearts  were  cleansed),  Th  2,  2  (muccassu); 
Dh  127  (papakamma,  quoted  at  PvA  104);  Pv  11.2''; 
PvA  53  (niray'  upapaltito  muccissati),  105  ;  DhA  1.297 
(dukkha  muccitu-kama  desirous  of  being  delivered 
from  unpleasantness  ;  v.  1.  muiic'') ;  11.92  (dukkha). 
2.  to  send  off.  let  loose,  drop,  give  J  iv.272  (sarag  an 
arrow);  Vism  313  (dhenu  vacchakassa  khir^-dharar) 
m.);  Mhvs  25,  63  (phalakag).  —  3.  to  let  out  of  the 
yoke,  to  unharness,  set  free  D  1.148  (satta  usabha- 
satani  muncapeti) ;  PvA  43  (yoggani  muficitva).  — 
4.  to  let  go.  emit,  send  forth  (light)  J  v.289  (obhasag 
muiici);  Mhvs  19,  44  (rasmiyo).  —  5.  to  send  forth 
(sound) ;  to  utter,  emit  (words  etc.)  J  1.375  (vacag)  ; 
Vv  64I8  (mala  m.  ghosar)  =  vissajjenti  VvA  281). — 
6.  (from  4  &  5  in  general)  to  undertake,  to  bestow,  send 
forth,  let  loose  on  Dh  389  ;  "  na  brahmanassa  paha- 
reyya  nassa  muiicetha  brahmano,"  where  DhA  iv.148 
supplements  vemn  na  muficetha  (i.  e.  kopag  na  kareyya). 
In  this  case  verag  muncati  would  be  the  same  as  the 
usual  verag  bandh'tti.  thus  opposite  notions  bemg 
used  complementarily.  The  interpretation  "  give  up  " 
(enmity)  instead  of  "  undertake  "  is  possible  from  a 
mere  grammatical  point  of  view.  L.  v.  Schroeder 
(iVorte  der  Wahrheit)  trsl*  "  noch  sturzt  der  Priester  auf 
den  Feind"!  — 7.  to  abandon,  give  up,  leave  behind 
Dh  348  (munca,  viz.  tanhag  DhA  iv.63) ;  J  v.453 
(peta-rSja-visayag).  — 8.  An  idfomatic  (late)  use  of  the 
ger.  muiiciya  (with  ace.)  is  in  the  sense  of  an  adv.  (of 
prep.),  meaning  "  except,  beside^,"  e.  g.  mag  ra. 
Mhvs  25,  67  ;  iraag  m.  (besides  this  Mhvs  14.  17).  — Cp. 


Muncana 


i6o 


Mutinga 


pa°,  pafi",  vi°.  Note.  At  Dh  71  muccati  stands  for 
muccheti  (  =  Sk.  murchati)  to  become  stiff,  coagulate, 
curdle;  cp.  DhA  11.67. 

Muncana  &  Muccana  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  muc]  i.  release, 
being  freed,  deliverance  J  iv.478  (mucc^)  ;  "akara 
(muiic°)  means  of  deliverance  (dukkhato  from  ill)  DhA 
1.267 ;  °kala  time  of  release  (dukkha  from  suffering) 
DhA  II.  II  (mucc°,  v.  1.  muiic"). — 2.  letting  loose, 
emitting,  giving,  bestowing  VbhA  249  (speaking, 
shouting  out ;  Vism  reading  p.  265  is  to  be  corrected  fr. 
maflcana  !) ;  PvA  132  (v.  1.  dana). 

Muncanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  muricana]  sending  out  or  forth, 
emitting  VvA  303  (pabha°). 

Munja  [Vedic  munja,  cp.  Zimraer,  Altind.  Leben  72]  i.  a 
sort  of  grass  (reed)  Saccharum  munja  Roxb.  Sn  440. 
°kesa  having  a  dark  mane  (like  m.  grass)  D  11.174. 
"paduka  slipper  made  of  m.  grass  DhA  in. 451.  °maya 
made  of  m.  gra.ss  Sn  28. — The  reed  itself  is  called 
isika  (q.  v.).  —  2.  a  sort  of  fish  J  iv.70  (+  rohita,  taken 
as  Dvandva  by  C.) ;  vi.278  (id.). 

Mut;a  see  mutoli.     Otherwise  occurring  in  Np.  Muta-siva 

at  Mhvs  11,4. 

Muttha  [pp.  of  mussati,  mr?]  having  forgotten,  one  who 
forgets;  only  in  t\*o  cpds.,  viz.  ^sacca  [der.  fr.  foil.: 
muttha+sati+ ya]  forgetfulness,  lit.  forgotten-minded- 
ness,  usually  comb''  with  asampajanna,  D  111.213  ; 
A  V.i4g;  Pug  21;  Dhs  1349  (where  read:  ya  asati 
ananussati  .  .  .  adharanata  pilapanata  sammussanata)  ; 
Vbh  360,  373;  Vism  21  ;  DhA  iv.85  ;  &  °sati(n)  (adj.) 
"  forgetful  in  mindfulness."  i.  e.  forgetful,  carejess, 
bewildered  [cp.  BSk.  amusitasmrti  Lai.  V.  562,  to  all 
appearance  (wrongly)  derived  from  P.  musati  to  rob, 
mus,  musnati]  D  in. 252,  282  ;  S  i.6i  (+ asampajana) ; 
Pug  21,  35  (neither  passage  expl"*  in  PugA  !) ;  J  111.488  ; 
VbhA  275.  As  "satika  at  Miln  59.  —  Note,  muttha- 
sati  with  var.  (unsuccessful)  etym.  is  discussed  in  detail 
also  by  Morris,  J.P.T.S.   1884,  pp.  92-94. 

Mut^hi  (f.)  [Vedic  musti,  m.  f.  Does  def"  "  niut=raad- 
dane  "  at  Dhtm  125  refer  to  mutthi  ?]  the  fist  VvA  206. 
mutthi  katva  ganhati  to  take  by  making  a  fist,  i.  e. 
clutch  tightly,  clenching  one's  fist  J  VI. 33 1.  — mutthit) 
akasihe  made  a  fist  (assign)  J  vi.364.  As  -°  often  mean- 
ing "  handful."  — acariya-mutthi  close-fistedness  in 
teaching,  keeping  things  back  from  the  pupil  D  11. 100  ; 
S  V.153  ;  J  11.22  I,  250  ;  VvA  138;  SnA  i8u,  368.  kun- 
daka°  handful  of  rice  powder  VvA  5 ; .  DhA  1.425. 
tandula"  handful  of  rice  PvA  131.  tila°  do.  of  tila- 
secds  J  11.278.  pagsu°  do.  of  soil  J  vi.405.  ritta^ 
an  empty  fist  SnA  306=  DhA  iv.38  ("sadisa  alluding  to 
ignorance). 

-yuddha  fist-fight,  boxing  D  i.6.  -sammunjani"  fist- 
broom"  a  short  broom  DhA  11. 184. 

Mutthika  [fr.  mutthi]  i.  a  fist-fighter,  wrestler,  boxer 
Vin  11. 1(^5  (malla°) ;  J  iv.81  (Np.) ;  vi.277:  Vism  31 
(+  malla).  —  2.  a  sort  of  hammer  J  v. 45. 

JHuQ^il  (adj.)  [cp.  BSk.  munda]  bald,  shaven  ;  a  shaven, 
(bald-headed)  ascetic,  either  a  samana,  or  a  bhikkhu  or 
(f.)  bhikkhuni  S  1.175  (m.  sanghati-paruta) ;  Vin  iv.265 
(f.) ;  Sn  p.  80  (  =  mundita-sisa  SnA  4'i2).  — kanna"  with 
cropped  or  shorn  ears  (appl'^  to  a  dog)  Pv  11.12I",  cp. 
mundaka. 

-pabbataka  a  bare  mountain  J  1.303  (Hatthimatta) ; 
VvA  302  (v.  1.  for  T.  mundika-pabbata).  -vattin 
"  shaven  hireling  "  (?),  a  king's  servant,  probably  porter 
Vin  II. 137.  The  expl"  given  by  Bdhgh  on  p.  319  (on 
CV.  V.  29.  5)  is  twofold,  viz.  malla-karamakar'  adayo 
viyakacchari  banditva  nivasenti ;  and  munda-vetthi  {sic) 
ti  yatha  raiiiio  kuhinci  gacchanto  parikkhara-bhanda- 
vahana-manussa  ti  adhippayo.  Maybe  that  reading 
veti  is  more  correct      -sira  shaven  head  Dh.\  n.125. 


Mu9^aka==  munda;  cp.  BSk.  muiidaka  Divy  13.  —  Sn 
p.  80;  Dh  264  (  =  sisa-mundana-matta  DhA  ill. 391, 
qualification  of  a  shaveling)  ;  VvA  67  ("samaria,  Dvan- 
dva). — addha°  shaven  over  one  half  the  head  (sign 
of  loss  of  freedom)  Mhvs  6,  42.  — kanna"  "  with  blunt 
corners,"  N.  of  one  of  the  7  great  lakes  :  see  under 
karina.  -patisisaka  the  chignon  of  a  shaveling,  in 
phrase :  kasayar)  nivasetva  mundaka-patisisakat)  sise 
patimuncitva  fastening  the  (imitation)  top-knot  of  a 
shaveling  to  his  head  Miln  90  ;  cp.  J  11.197  (pacceka- 
buddha-vesar)  ganhitva  patisisakai]  patimuncitva), 
similarly  J  v.49. 

Mundatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  munda]  the  fact  of  being  shaven 
or  shorn  PvA  106. 

Muncana  (nt.)  [fr.  munda]  shaving,  tonsure  DhA  111.391 

Mun^ika  (pabbata)  bare  (mountain),  uncertain  T.  reading 
at  VvA  302  for  v.  1.  SS  munda-pabbata  (q.  v.). 

Mun^ita  [pp.  of  mundeti]  shaven  SnA  402  (°sisa). 

Mun^iya  [abstr.  fr.  munda]  baldness,  shaven  condition  (of 
ascetics  &  bhikkhus)  M  1.515;  Sn  249;  Kvu  1.95; 
Sdhp  374. 

Mundeti  [Denom.  —  Cans,  from  munda]  to  shave  Mhbv 
103.  —  pp.  mundita. — The  BSk.  has  only  Cans.  II. 
mundapayati,  at  Divy  261.  Should  Dhtp  106  "  raund  = 
kliandha  "  be  the  def"  of  raundati  ?  — At  J  111.368  we 
find  mundati  for  mundeti  (kuntha-satthena  mundanto 
viya),  which  should  prob.  be  read  mundento. 

Muta  [for  mata,  cp.  Geiger.  P.Qr.  §  18]  thought,  supposed, 
imagined  (i.  e.  received  by  other  vaguer  sense  impres- 
sions than  by  sight  &  hearing)  M  1.3  ;  Sn  714  (  =  phu- 
san'  arahar)  SnA  498),  812;  J  v. 398  (  =  anumata  C.) ; 
Vbh  14,  429  sq.  —  Often  in  set  dittha  suta  muta  what 
is  seen,  heard  &  thought  (?  more  likely  "  felt,"  cp. 
Nd-  298:  dittha  =  cakkhuna  d.,  sutar)  =  sotena  s., 
mutai)  =  ghanena  ghayitag,  jivhaya  sayitar),  kayena 
phuttar),  and  viiinatai)  =  manasa  v.;  so  that  from  the 
interpretation  it  follows  that  d.  s.  m.  v.  refer  to  the 
action  (perception)  of  the  6  senses,  where  muta  covers 
the  3  of  taste,  smell  &  touch,  and  viiifiata  the  function 
of  the  manas)  S  1.186  (K.S.  1.237  note);  iv.73  ;  Th 
1. 12 16.  Similarly  the  psychol.  analysis  of  the  senses  at 
Dhs  961:  rup'  ayatanar)  ditthar)  ;  sadd-ayat.  sutag ; 
gandh",  ras°,  photthabb"  mutai) ;  sabbag  rupag 
manasa  vinnatag.  See  on  this  passage  Dhs  trsl.  §  961 
note.  In  the  same  sense  DhsA  388  (see  Expositor, 
11.439).  —  D  111.232  ;  Sn  790  (cp.  Nd'  87  sq.  in  extenso) 
793.  798,  812,  887,  901,  914,  1086,  1122.  Thus  quite 
a  main  tenet  of  the  old  (popular)  psychology. 

-mangalika  one  who  prophesies  from,  or  derives  lucky 
auspices  from  impressions  (of  sense ;  as  comp''  with 
dittha-mangalika  visiblc-omen-hunter,  and  suta-m.- 
sound-augur)  J  iv.73  (where  C.  clearly  expl'-  by 
"touch");  KhA  119  (the  same  expl"  more  in  detail). 
-visuddhika  of  great  purity,  i.  e.  orthodox,  successful,  in 
matters  of  touch  Nd'  89,  90.  -suddhi  purity  in  matter 
of  touch  Nd'  104,  105. 

Muti  (f.)  [for  raati,  cp.  muta]  sense-perception,  experience, 
understanding,  intelligence  Sn  864 ;  Nd'  205  (on  Sn 
846  =  hearsay,  what  is  thought);  Vbh  325  (ditthi,  ruci, 
muti,  where  muti  is  expl""  at  VbhA  412  as  "  mudatl  ti 
muti"!)  328;  Sdhp  221.     Cp.  sam'. 

Mutinga  [Sk.  mrdanga  on  d>t.  cp.  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  ^i]  a 
small  drum,  tabour  D  1.79;  Vin  1.15;  S  11.266  sq.  (a 
famous  mythological  drum,  called  Anaka ;  same  also 
at  J  11.344);  J  IV. 395  (bheri-1-);  KhA  49.  Spelling 
mudinga  at  S  11.266  ;  J  iv.395  ;  Vism  250  ;  VbhA  232  ; 
VvA  210  (v.  1.  SS  mutinga),  340  (id.). 

-sadda  sound  of  the  drum  J  1.3  (one  of  the  lu  sounds, 
hatthi",  assa"  etc.). 


I 


a 


Mutimant 


i6i 


Muduta 


Mutimant  (adj.)  [fr.  muti]  sensible,  intelligent,  wise 
Sn  539;  as  mutima  at  Sn  61,  321,  385;  pi.  881; 
J  IV. 76  (as  mutima  &  mutima):  Nd^  511=259.  Cp. 
matimant. 

Mutoli  [?]  a  doubtful  word  occurring  only  in  one  stock 
phrase,  viz.  "  ubhato-mukha  m.  pura  nana-vihitassa 
dhaiinassa  "  at  M  1.57  (vv.  11.  putoli,  mutoli)  =  111. go 
(mutoli)=n  11.293  (T.  mutoli,  v.  1.  mutoli;  gloss  K 
putoli).  The  Dial.  11.330  trsl.  "  sample  bag  "  (see  note 
on  this  passage  ;  with  remark  "  spelling  uncertain  "). 
Neumann.  Miitlcre  Sammlung  i.ioi  trsl'  "Sack."  — 
Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  mutoli  tries  to  connect  it  with  BSk. 
mota  (Hindi  moth),  bundle,  which  (with  vv.  11.  raudha, 
muta,  muta)  occurs  only  in  one  stock  phrase  "  bharaih 
motaih  pitakaih  "  at  Divy  5,  332,  501,  524.  The  more 
likely  solution,  however,  is  that  mutoli  is  a  distortion 
of  putosa  (putosa),  which  is  found  as  v.  1.  to  putat]sa 
at  all  passages  concerned  (see  putagsa).  Thus  the 
meaning  is  "  bag,  provision -bag."  The  BSk.  mota 
(muta)  remains  to  be  elucidated.  The  same  meaning 
"  provision-bag  "  fits  at  Vism  328  in  cpd.  yana°,  where 
spelling  is  T.  pattoli,  v.  1.  BB  °puio|i,  but  which  is 
clearly  identical  with  our  term.  We  should  thus  prefer 
to  read  yana-putosi  "  carriage-bag  for  provisions." 

Mutta^  "^pp.  of  muncati :  Sk.  mukta]  i.  released,  set  free, 
freed  ;  as  -°  free  from  Sn  687  (abbha°  free  from  the  stain 
of  a  cloud);  Dh  172  (id.),  382  (id.).  —  Dh  344;  Pv 
lv.i'-»;  PvA  65  (su°).  —  2.  given  up  or  out,  emitted, 
sacrificed  Vin  111.97=  iv.27  (catta,  vanta,  m.)  A  111.50 
(catta-l- ).  Cp.  vi'-.  —  3.  unsystematised.  Com/j.  9.  137 
(vithi°). 

-araca  of  loose  habits  D  1.166=  iii.40  =  Pug  55  (where 
expH  at  PugA  231,  as  follows :  vissatth'  acaro.  Uccara- 
kamm'  adisu  lokiya-kulaputt'  acarena  virahito  thitako 
va  uccarari  karoti  passavar)  karoti  khadati  bhuiijati). 
-patibhana  of  loose  intelligence,  or  immoderate  prompti- 
tude (opp.  yutta°),  quick-tempered  Pug  42  (cp.  PugA 
223) ;  SnA  1 10,  III;  -saddha  given  up  to  iaith  Sn  1 146 
(  =  saddhadhimutta  Nd''  512).  -sira  (pi.)  with  loose 
(i.  e.  confused)  heads  KhA  i20  =  Vism  415. 

Matta'  (nt.)  [cp.  'Vedic  mutra ;  Idg.  *ineud  to  be  wet,  as 
in  Gr.  ftit^m  to  suck,  ftvcau  to  be  wet ;  Mhg.  smuz  (  =  Ger. 
schmutz),  E.  smut  &  mud,  Oir.  muad  cloud  (  =  Sk. 
mudira  cloud) ;  Av.  mut>rem  impurity,  Mir.  mun  urine  ; 
Gr.  ^I'lti'u  to  make  dirty]  urine  Vin  iv.266  (passavo 
muttar)  vuccati)  ;  Pv  1.9^  (guthan  ca  m.) ;  PvA  43,  78. 
Enum""  under  the  32  constituents  of  the  body  (the 
dvattigs-akarar))  at  Kh  in.  (cp.  KhA  68  in  detail  on 
mutta ;  do.  Vism  264,  362;  VbhA  68,  225.  248  sq.) 
=  M  111.90  =  D  11.293  etc. 

-acara  see  mutta'.  -karana  "  urine-making,"  i.  e. 
pudendum  muliebre,  cunnus  Vin  iv.260.  -karisa 
urine  &  faeces,  i.  e.  excrements  Vin  1.30 1  ;  S  111.85; 
A  11.33;  Sn  835;  Ndi  181;  J  vi.iii;  Vism  259,  305, 
342,  418  (origin  of),  -gata  what  has  become  urine 
DhsA  247  (gutha'-t-).     -vatthi  the  bladder  Vism  345. 

Mnttaka  (adj.)  Jmutta'-f-  ka]  only  in  cpd.  antara°  one  who 

is  released  in  the  meantime  Vin  11.167. 
Mattaka  (f.)  =  mutta  ;  "maya  made  of  pearls  Mhvs  27,  33. 
Mottata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  mutta']  state  of   being  liberated. 

freedom  J  v. 480. 

Hntta  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  mukta]  a  pearl  Vv  37^  (°acita) ;  Pv 
II. 7*  (-fveluriya);  Mhvs  30.  66.  Eight  sorts  of  pearls 
are  enum''  at  Mhvs.  11,  14,  viz.  haya-gaja-rath'  amalaka 
valay'anguli-vethaka  kakudha-phala-pakatika,  i.e. 
horse-,  elephant-,  waggon-,  myrobalan-,  bracelet-,  ring  , 
kakudha  fruit-,  and  common  pearls. 

-ahara  a  string  or  necklace  of  pearls  J  1.383  ;  vi.489 : 
DhA  1.85  ;  SnA  78  (simile);  Vism  312.  -Jala  a  string 
(net)  of  pearls  J  iv.120  ;  Mhvs  27,  31  ;  VvA  198.  -dama 
garland  or  wreath  of  p.  Mhvs  30,  67  (so  T.  for  v.  1. 
"maya).  -vali  string  of  pearls  VvA  169.  -sikka 
string  of  pearls  VvA  244. 


Mutti  (f.)  [fr.  mac,  cp.  Sk.  mukti]  release,  freedom, 
emancipation  Sn  344  (muty-apekho) ;  Nd'  88,  89 
(-f-  vimutti  &  parimutti) ;  PvA  35,  46  ;  Sdhp  492.  — Cp. 
vi". 

Mattika  [fr.  mutta]  a  pearl  vendor,  dealer  in  pearls  Miln 
262. 

Madati  [for  modati  ?]  in  exegetical  expl°  of  "  muti  "  at 
>'bhA  412  :  mudati  ti  muti.     See  muti. 

M  adayanti  (f)  [cp.  Sk.  modayanti]  a  certain  plant,  perhaps 
Ptychotis  ajowan  J  vi.536. 

Mnda  (f.)  [fr.  mnd,  see  modati]  joy,  pleasure  D  11. 2 14  (v.  1. 
pamuda) ;  Sdhp  306,  308. 

Madinga  see  mutinga. 

Madita  [pp.  of  mud,  modati]  pleased,  glad,  satisfied,  only 
in  cpd.  °mana  (adj.)  with  gladdened  heart,  pleased  in 
mind  Sn  680  (-(-udagga);  Vv  83"  (-f  pasanna-citta). 
Cp.  pa°. 

Mudita  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  mudu,  for  the  usual  muduta,  which 
in  P.  is  only  used  in  ord.  sense,  whilst  mudita  is  in 
pregnant  sense.  Its  semantic  relation  to  mudita  (pp. 
of  mud)  has  led  to  an  etym.  relation  in  the  same  sense 
in  the  opinion  of  P.  Commentators  and  the  feeling  of 
the  Buddhist  teachers.  That  is  why  Childers  also 
derivers  it  from  mud,  as  does  Bdhgh.  —  BSk.  after  the 
Pali :  mudita  Divy  483]  soft-heartedness,  kindliness, 
sympathy.  Often  in  triad  metta  ("  active  love  "  SnA 
128),  karuna  ("  preventive  love,"  ibid.),  mudita  ("  dis- 
interested love "  :  modanti  vata  bho  satta  modanti 
sadhu  sutthu  ti  adina  mayena  hita-sukh'  avippayoga- 
kamata  mudita  SnA  128);  e.  g.  at  D  1.251  ;  S  v.ii8; 
A  1.196  etc.  (see  karuija).  —  Cp.  also  Sn  73  ;  D  111.50, 
224,  248;  Miln  332  ("saiiiia  ; -I- metta°,  karuna");  Vism 
318  (where  defined  as  "  modanti  taya,  tag-samangino, 
sayar)  va  modati  etc.")  ;  DhsA  192.  See  on  term  Dhs 
trsl.  §25  I  (where  equalled  to  miyxaipocm'ii) ;  Cpd.  24  (called 
sympathetic  &  appreciative),  97  (called  "  congratulatory 
&  benevolent  attitude ")  ;  Expos.  200  (interpretation 
here  refers  to  muduta  DhsA  151  "  plasticity  "). 

Uudu  (adj.)  [Vedic  rardu,  fr.  mrd:  see  maddati ;  cp.  Lat. 
mollis  (fr.  *molduis) ;  Gr.  anuXcnvui  to  weaken,  Cymr. 
blydd  soft]  soft,  mild,  weak,  tender  D  11.17=111.143 
{-(-taluna)  ;  A  11. 151  (pailcindriyani  muduni,  soft,  blunt, 
weak :  opp.  tikkha)  ;  S  11.268  (°taluna-hatthapada) ; 
Sn  447  (=muduka  SnA  393);  Th  i,  460  (  =  loving); 
Pv  1.92 ;  Vism  64;  PvA  46,  230.  Compar.  mudutara 
S  V.201. 

-indriya  (mud°)  weak,  slow  minded,  of  dull  senses 
Ps  1.121  =  11.195  ;  Vism  87.  -citta  a  tender  heart  PvA 
54.  -cittata  kind  (soft)  heartedness  DhA  1.234.  -P't- 
thika  having  a  soft  (i.  e.  pliable)  back  Vin  111.35. 
-bhuta  supple,  malleable  D  1.76  (-f  kammaniya) ;  Pug 
68.  -maddava  soft  &  tender  (said  of  food  taken  by 
young  women  to  preserve  their  good  looks)  DhsA  403. 
-hadaya  tender-hearted  DhA  11. 5. 

Mudoka  (adj.)  [fr.  mudu]  =  mudu.  —  i.  flexible,  pliable, 
soft  S  11.221  (sanghati)  ;  Vism  66  (giving  in  easily,  cpd. 
with  ukkattha  &  majjhima)  ;  KhA  49  ("atthikani  soft 
bones) ;  Mhvs 25,  102  (sayana) ;  bhumi  Miln  34.  —  2.  soft, 
mild,  gentle,  kindly,  tender-hearted  J  v. 83  (m.  hadaya), 
155  ;  Miln  229  (cittar)  m.) ;  SnA  84  ("jatika),  393  ;  DhA 
1.249  (citta) ;  PvA  243.  —  3.  soft,  weak,  pampered, 
spoilt  S  11.268  (of  the  Licchavi  princes).  —  See  also 
maddava,  &  cp.  ati°. 

Muduta  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  mrduta ;  abstr.  fr.  mudu.  See  also 
mudita]  softness,  impressibility,  plasticity  A  1.9 ;  D 
111.153  (trsl°  "loveliness");  Dhs  44  (-H  maddavata) ; 
1340  (id.);  Vism  463  sq. ;  DhsA  151  (=mudubhava)  ; 
cp.  Dhs.  trsl.  §1340. 


Mudda 


162 


Muni 


Hndda  (f.)  [cp.  (late  ?)  Sk.  mudra]  i.  a  seal,  stamp, 
impression  ;  — raja°  the  royal  seal  Dh A  1.2 1 .  Also  with 
ref.  to  the  State  Seal  at  Miln  280,  281  in  cpds.  mudda- 
kama  (amacca)  &  mudda-patilabha.  —  2.  the  art  of 
calculation  mentioned  as  a  noble  craft  (ukkatthar) 
sippar))  at  Vin  1V.7  (with  ganana  &  lekha),  as  the  first 
of  the  sippani  (with  ganana)  at  M  1.85  =  Nd''  199. 
Further  at  Miln  3,  59.  78  sq.,  178.  Cp.  BSk.  mudra 
in  same  sense  (e.  g.  at  Divy  3.  26,  58  in  set  lipya,  san- 
khya.  ganana,  m.).  Bdhgh's  expl"  of  mudda  D  i.ii 
m.+  ganana  (see  DA  1.95)  as  "  hattha-mudda-ganana  " 
is  doubtful  ;  since  at  Miln  78  sq.  mudda  &  ganana  are 
two  quite  difi.  things.  See  also  Franke,  Dtgha  trsl. 
p.  18,  with  note  (he  marks  mudda  "  Finger-Rechnen  " 
with  ?);  and  cp.  Kern,  Toev.  1.166  s.  v.  mudda.  The 
Dial.  1.2 1  trsl.  "  counting  on  the  fingers  "  (see  Dial.  1.2 1, 
22  with  literature  &  more  refs.).  — hattha°  is  sign- 
language,  gesture  (lit.  hand-arithmetic),  a  means  of 
communicating  (question  &  answer)  by  signs,  as  clearly 
evident  fr.  J  vi.364  (hattha-muddaya  nag  pucchissami 
.  .  .  mutthir)  akasi.  sa  "  ayar)  me  .  .  .  pucchati  "  ti 
iiatva  hatthar)  vikasesi,  so  fiatva  .  .  . ;  he  then  asks 
by  word  of  mouth).  — hattha-muddai)  karoti  to  make 
a  sign,  to  beckon  J  111.528  ;  cp.  Vin  v. 163  :  na  hattha- 
vikaro  katabbo,  na  hattha-mudda  dassetabba. 

-ctdhikarana  the  otfice  of  the  keeper  of  the  Privy  Seal, 
Chancellorship  Miln  281. 

Mnddika  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  mudda]  one  who  practises  mudda 
(i.  e.  knowledge  of  signs)  D  1.5 1  (in  list  of  occupations, 
comb"'  with  ganaka  &  trsl"!  Dial.  1.68  by  "  accountant'"  ; 
cp.  Franke,  Digha  p.  53,  "  Finger-rechner  "  .')  Vin  iv.8 
(m.,  ganaka,  lekhaka)  ;  S  iv.376  (ganaka,  m.,  sankha- 
yaka). 

Muddika^  (f.)  [fr.  mudda]  a  seal  ring,  signet-ring,  finger- 
ring  J  1. 134;  HI. 416;  IV. 439  ;  DhA  1.394;  11. 4  (a  ring 
given  by  the  king  to  the  keeper  of  the  city  gates  as  a 
sign  of  authority,  and  withdrawn  when  the  gates  are 
closed  at  night);  iv.222.  anguli°  finger-ring,  signet- 
ring  Vin  11.106;  J  IV. 498  ;  v. 467.  —  Similarly  as  at 
DhA  II. 4  (muddikag  aharapeti)  muddika  is  fig.  used  in 
meaning  of  "  authority,"  command  ;  in  phrase  muddi- 
kar)  deti  to  give  the  order,  to  command  Miln  379  (with 
ref.  to  the  captain  of  a  ship). 

Mnddika^  (f.)  [fr.  mudu,  cp.  *Sk.  mrdvika]  a  vine  or 
bunch  of  grapes,  grape,  grape  wine  Vin  1.246  (°pana) ; 
J  VI. 529;  DhA  II. 155. 

Maddha^  [pp.  of  muh,  for  the  usual  mu)ha,  corresp.  to 
Sk.  mugdha.  Not  =  mrddha  (of  mrdh  to  neglect) 
which  in  P.  is  maddhita  :  see  pari";  nor=mrdhra  dis- 
dained] infatuated,  bewildered,  foolish  J  v.436. 

-dhatuka  bewildered  in  one's  nature,  foolish(ly) 
J  IV. 391  (v.  1.  luddha") ;  DhA  111.120  (v.  1.  danta"  & 
mula°). 

Muddha^  &  Mnddha  [Vedic  murdhan,  the  P.  word  shows 
a  mixture  of  a-  and  n-  stem]  the  head  ;  top,  summit. — 
m.  sg.  muddha  Sn  983,  1026,  &  muddhag  Sn  989  ;  ace 
muddhai)  D  1.95  ;  Sn  987  sq.,  IC04,  1025  ;  Dh  72  (  =  paii- 
nay'  etag  namai)  DhA  11. 73):  &  muddhanat)  M  1.243; 
111.259  =  8  1V.56  ;  instr.  muddhana  Mhvs  19,  30;  loc. 
muddhani  Sn  68g,  987;  M  1.168;  Vism  262  ;  Mhvs  36, 
66.  in  meaning  "  on  the  top  of  (a  mountain)  "  :  Vin  1.5 
(here  spelt  pabbata-muddhini)  =  S  1137;  J  iv.265 
(Vugandhara") ;  Pv  u.g^^  (Naga°  =  Sineru"  PvA  138); 
Vism  304  (vammika°  on  top  of  an  ant-hill). — Freq. 
in  phrase  muddha  {me,  or  no,  or  te)  sattadha  phaleyya, 
as  an  oath  or  exclam"  of  desecration  or  warning : 
"  (your)  head  shall  split  into  7  pieces,"  intrs.  spelt  both 
phal°  &  phaP  at  J  v.g2  (te  s.  phal°) ;  Miln  157  ;  DhA  1,17 
(me  .  .  .  phal°).  41  (te  phalatu  s.),  42  (acariyassa  m. 
s.  phalissari) ;  iv.125  (no  .  .  .  phaleyya);  VvA  68 
(me  s.  phal°).  —  In  comp"  muddha^. 


-(n)atthi  (muddhan-atthi)  bone  of  the  head  KhA  51. 
-Sdhipata  head-splitting,  battering  of  the  head  Sn  988 
sq.,  IL.04,  iri25  ;  -adhipatin  head-splitting  (adj.)  Sn 
1026.  -4ra  head  (top)  spoke  KhA  172.  -4vasitta 
"  head-anointed  "  a  properly  anointed  or  crowned  king 
D  III. 60  sq.,  6g  ;  Pug  56  ;  Miln  234.     -pata  =  ^adhipata. 

Muddhata  (f)  [fr.  muddha']  foolishness,  stupidity,  infatua- 
tion J  V.433  (v.  1.  muthata,  muddata). 

Hadha  (adv.)  [Class.  Sk.  mudha]  for  nothing,  gratis  VvA 

77- 

Manana  (nt.)  [fr.  munati,  almost  equal  to  mona]  fathom- 
ing, recognising,  knowing  ;  a  C.  word  to  explain  "  muni," 
used  by  Dhpala  at  VvA  114  (maha-isibhutar)  .  .  . 
mahanten'  eva  iianena  munanato  paricchindanato  maha 
munii)),  &  231  (anavasesassa  fieyyassa  munanato  muni). 

Manati  [=manyate,  prob.  corresponding  to  Sk.  med. 
manute,  with  inversion  *munati  and  analogy  formation 
after  janati  as  munati,  may  be  in  allusion  to  Sk.  mrnati 
of  my  to  crush,  or  also  ma  minati  to  measure  out  or 
fathom.  The  Dhtm  589  gives  as  root  mun  in  meaning. 
"  liana."  The  word  is  more  a  Com.  word  than  anything 
else,  formed  from  muni  &  in  order  to  explain  it]  to  be 
a  wise  man  or  muni,  to  think,  ponder,  to  know  Dh  269 
(yo  munati  ubho  loke  muni  tena  pavuccati),  which  is 
expH  at  DhA  in. 396  as  follows  :  "  yo  puggalo  .  .  . 
tular)  aropetva  minanto  viya  ime  ajjhattika  khandha 
ime  bahira  ti  adina  nayena  ime  ubho  pi  atthe  minati 
muni  tena  pavuccati."  Note.  The  word  occurs  also  in 
Magadhi  (Prk.)  as  munai  which  as  Pischel  {Prk.  Gr. 
§  489)  remarks,  is  usually  taken  to  man,  but  against  this 
speaks  its  meaning  "  to  know  "  &  Pali  munati.  He 
compares  manai  with  Vedic  miita  in  kama-muta  (driven 
by  kama ;  muta  =  pp.  of  ma=miv)  and  Sk.  muni.  Cp. 
animo  movere. 

Hani  [cp.  Vedic  muni,  originally  one  who  has  made  the 
vow  of  silence.  Cp.  Chh.  Up.  V111.5,  2  ;  Pss.  of  the  Br.  132 
note.  Connected  with  muka :  see  under  mukha.  This 
etym.  preferred  by  Aufrecht :  Halayudha  p.  311. 
Another,  as  favoured  by  Pischel  (see  under  munati)  is 
"  inspired,  moved  by  the  spirit."  Pali  expl"^  (popular 
etym.)  are  given  by  Dhammapala  at  VvA  114  &  231  : 
see  munana]  a  holy  man.  a  sage,  wise  man.  1.  The 
term  which  was  specialised  in  Brahmanism  has  acquired 
a  general  meaning  in  Buddhism  &  is  applied  by  the 
Buddha  to  any  man  attaining  perfection  in  self-restraint 
and  insight.  So  the  word  is  capable  of  many-sided 
application  and  occurs  frequently  in  the  oldest  poetic 
anthologies,  e.  g.  Sn  207-221  (the  famous  Muni-sutta, 
mentioned  Divy  20,  35  ;  SnA  518  ;  expl''  SnA  254-277), 
414,  462,  523  sq.,  708  sq.,  811  sq.,  838,  844  sq.,  912  sq., 
946,  1074  &  passim  (see  Pj.  Index  p.  749) ;  Dh  49,  225, 
268  sq.,  423. — Cp.  general  passages  &  expl'"^  at  Pv 
11. i";  11. 13'  (expl""  at  PvA  163  by  "  attahitaii  ca  para- 
hitafi  ca  munati  janati  ti  muni  ") ;  Miln  90  (munibhava 
"  munihood,"  meditation,  self-denial,  abrogation) ; 
DhA  III. 52 1  (raunayo=moneyya-patipadaya  magga- 
phalar)  patta  asekha-munayo),  395  (here  expH  with 
ref.  to  orig.  meaning  tunhibhava  "  state  of  silence " 
=  mona).  —  11.  The  Com.  &  Abhidhamma  literature 
have  produced  several  schedules  of  muni-qualities,  esp. 
based  on  the  3  fold  division  of  character  as  revealed  in 
action,  speech  &  thought  (kaya°,  vaci",  mano°).  Just 
as  these  3  are  in  general  exhibited  in  good  or  bad  ways 
of  living  ("sucaritai)  &  °duccaritai)),  they  are  applied  to 
a  deeper  quality  of  saintship  in  kaya-moneyya,  vaci- 
moneyya,  mano-moneyya ;  or  Muni-hood  in  action, 
speech  &  thought ;  and  the  nvuni  himself  is  character- 
ised as  a  kaya-muni,  vaci°  &  mano°.  Thus  runs  the 
long  exegesis  of  muni  at  Nd^  5i4*  =  Nd'  57.  Besides 
this  the  same  chapter  (514")  gives  a  division  of  6  munis, 
viz.    agara-muni,    anagara°    (the    bhikkhus),    sekha°, 


Mummura 


163 


Mula 


asekha"  (the  Arahants),  pacceka'  (the  Paccekabuddhas), 
muni°  (the  Tathagatas).  —  The  parallel  passage  to 
Nd-  514*  at  A  1.273  gives  a  muni  as  kjya-muni.  vaca° 
&  ceto°  (under  the  3  moneyyani). 

Mammora  ;*Sk.  murmura.  lit.  crackling,  rustling ;  cp. 
Lat.  murmur=E.  murmur,  Gr.  /lo^/^/yw  to  rustle.  Ohg. 
murmuron  &  murmuI6n  =  Ger.  raurmeln ;  all  to  Idg. 
*mrein,  to  which  Sk.  marmara :  see  P.  mammara  &  cp. 
murumura]  crackling  fire,  hot  ashes,  burning  chaff 
J  III34- 

Hayhati  [Vedic  rauhyati,  muh;  def"  Dhtp  343  :  muccha- 
yar)  ;  460  :  vecitte ;  cp.  moha  &  momuha]  to  get  be- 
wildered, to  be  infatuated,  to  become  dull  in  one's 
senses,  to  be  stupified.  Just  as  raga,  dosa  &  moha 
form  a  set,  so  do  the  verbs  rajjati,  dussati,  mujhati,  e.  g. 
Miln  386  (rajjasi  rajjaniyesu,  dussaniyesu  dussasi, 
muyhase  mohaniyesu).  Otherwise  rare  as  finite  verb; 
only  DhsA  254  (in  def"  of  moha)  &  Sdhp  282,  605  (.so 
read  for  mayh^te). — pp.  miilha  &  muddha^. 

Muyhana  (nt.)  [fr.  muyhati]  bewilderment,  stupefaction, 
infatuation  DA  1.195  (rajjana-dussana-ra.). 

Huiaja  [cp.  Epic.  &  Class.  Sk.  muraja,  Prk.  raurava : 
Pischel,  Prk.  Gr.  §  254]  i.  a  small  drum,  tambourine 
J  V.390  ;  Vv  35'  (  =  bheri  VvA  161);  8418  (  =  mudinga 
VvA  340) ;  SnA  370.  — 2.  a  kind  of  girdle  Vin  11. 136. 

Horamnra  (indecl.)  [onomat.  to  sound  root  my,  see 
mammara  cS:  mummura]  the  grinding,  crackling  sound 
of  the  teeth  when  biting  bones,  "  crack  "  ;  in  phrase  m. 
ti  khadati  to  eat  or  bite  up  to  bits  J  1.342  ;  v. 2  1  (of  a 
Yakkhinl.  eating  a  baby). 

Murumttrapeti=murumurayati  J  11. 127 ;  111.134;  v.190 
(°etva  khadati). 

Moramorayati  [Denom.  fr.  murumura]  to  munch,  chew, 
bite  up  with  a  cracking  sound  J  iv.49i. 

Mulala  &  Mulali  (f)  [cp.  Vedic  mulalin.  Zimmer,  Allind. 
Leben  70  mentions  Bisa,  ^aluka  &  Mulalin  as  edible 
roots  of  lotus  kinds.  —  Geiger,  P.G>'.  12  &  43  puts  mulala 
=  Sk.  mrnala]  the  stalk  of  the  lotus:  mulali  Vin  1.2  15 
(bhisa-l- )  ;  mujali  J  vi.530  (  =  mulalaka  C.) ;  mulalika 
Vin  1.2  15  (bhisa+  ) ;  bhisa-mulalai)  (nt.)  (collective  cpd.) 
fibre  &  stalks  Vin  ii.20i  =  S  11.269;  iv.94 ;  v.39  ;  Vism 
361  ;  VbhA  66.     — mulali-puppha  a  lotus  Th  i,  1089. 

Mosati  [in  this  connection  =  my?  in  an  active  sense,  as 
quasi  Denom.  fr.  musa.  Not  to  mu?  to  steal,  which  is 
given  at  Dhtp  491  with  "  theyya  "]  to  betray,  beguile, 
bewilder,  dazzle,  in  cakkhuni  m.  D  11. 183  (but 
trsl"  "destructive  to  the  eyes");  musati  'va  nayanai) 
Vv  35'  (cp.  VvA  161). 

Mosala  (m.  nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  musala.  The  etym.  is  probably 
to  be  connected  with  mrd  (see  maddati)]  i.  a  pestle 
(whilst  udukkhala  is  "  mortar,"  cp.  J  11.428  &  see 
udukkhala)  D  i.i66  =  Pug  55  ;  DhA  11. 131  (+  suppa).  — 
2.  a  club  A  II. 241  ;  VvA  121.  —  3.  a  crowbar  J  1.199; 
PvA  258  ("danda). 

Hnsalaka  (nt.)  [fr.  musala]  a  little  pestle,  a  toy  for  little 
girls  DhsA  32 1 . 

Husalika  only  in  cpd.  danta°  (an  ascetic)  who  uses  his 
teeth  as  a  pestle  J  iv  8  (an  aggi-pakkar)  khadati,  eats 
food  uncooked,  only  crushed  by  his  teeth). 

Masa  (adv.)  [Vedic  mrsi,  fr.  mr?,  lit.  "  neglectfully  "] 
falsely,  wrongly ;  usually  with  verbs  vadati,  bhanati, 
bhasati  &  briiti  to  speak  falsely,  to  tell  a  lie.  —  .V  11  49 
(opp.  saccar));  Sn  122,  158.  397,  400,  757,  883,  967, 
1131;  Nd'  291  ;  Pv  1.3'  ;  VvA  72  (  =  abhutar)  atacchar))  ; 
Sn.\  19  ;  PvA  16,  152. 


-vada  lying,  a  falsehood,  a  lie  D  1.4.  25  ;  111.68  sq.  ; 
92  sq.,  106,  170,  195,  232,  269:  M  1. 414;  Sn  129.  242 
(cp.  D  11.174);  Dh  246;  Pug  57;  Ndi  268;  Vv  158; 
Pv  1.68;  VbhA  383  (var.  degrees);  PvA  16;  Sdhp  65; 
explicitly  at  Nd'  152,  394;  Nd'  515.  Cp.  mosavajja. 
-vadin  speaking  falsely,  lying  D  1.138;  m.15,  82  ;  Dh 
176;  Pug  29,  38. 

Mnssati  [=inr§,  mrsyati ;  to  which  musa  "wrongly," 
quite  diff.  in  origin  fr.  miccha :  mrsa>mithya.  Dhtm 
437  defines  by  "  sammose."  i.  e.  forgetfulness]  v.  intrs.  ; 
to  forget,  to  pass  into  oblivion,  to  become  bewildered, 
to  become  careless  D  1.19  (sati  ra.) ;  J  v. 369  (id.);  Sn 
815  (=nassati  Sn.\  536  ;  =parimussati.  paribahiro  hoti 
Nd'  144).  — pp.  muttha.     Cpp-  pa°,  pari". 

Uuhutta  (m.  &  nt.)  [Vedic  muhurta.  fr.  muhur  suddenly] 
a  moment,  a  very  short  period  of  time,  an  inkling,  as  we 
should  say  "a  second."  —  Its  duration  may  be  seen 
from  descending  series  of  time-connotations  at  Pv.\  198 
(under  jatakamma,  prophesy  by  astrologers  at  the  birth 
of  a  child)  :  rasi.  nakkhatta,  tithi,  m.  ;  and  from  def" 
at  Nd^  516  by  "  khanar),  layar),  vassar),  atthag."  — 
Usually  in  oblique  cases  :  muhuttena  in  a  short  time, 
in  a  twinkling  of  an  eye  Pv.\  55  :  muhuttag  (ace.)  a 
moment,  even  a  second  Sn  1 13S  (m.  api)  ;  Dh  65  (id.), 
106 ;  PvA  43. 

Muhuttika  (adj.)  [fr.  muhutta]  only  for  a  moment ;  °a 
(f.)  a  temporary  wife,  in  enum"  of  several  kinds  of  wives 
at  Vin  111.139  &  VvA  73.     Syn.  tan-khanika. 

Mu  is  given  as  root  as  Dhtp  2  16  in  meaning  "  bandhana." 

Muga  (adj.)  [Vedic  muka ;  see  etym.  under  mukha]  dumb 
Vin  1. 91  (andha,  m.,  badhira)  ;  Sn  713;  DhA  11.102 
(andha,  m..  badhira);  Su.\  51  (in  simile);  Sdhp  12. 
Freq.  comb''  with  ela,  deaf  (q.  v.). 

Mula  (nt.)  [Vedic  raura  &  mula.  The  root  is  given  as 
mul  in  2  meanings,  viz.  lit.  "  rohane  "  Dhtm  S59,  and 
fig.  "  patitthayar)  "  Dhtm  391]  i.  (lit.)  root  A  11.200  = 
M  1.233;  DhA  1.270;  IV. 200  (opp.  patti)  ;  Vism  270 
(rukkha°  =  rukkha-samTpar))  ;  Pv  n.9*  (sa°  with  the 
root) ;  Pv.\  43  (rukkhassamuleat  the  foot  of).  —  2.  foot, 
bottom  Vin  11.269  (patta") ;  Pv.\  73  (pada°),  76  (id.), 
rukkha"  foot  of  a  tree:  see  under  rukkha  for  special 
meaning.  —  3.  (appli*)  ground  for,  reason,  cause,  con- 
dition, def''  as  "  hetu,  nidana,  sambhava  "  etc.  at  Xd' 
s.  v.  ;  Sn  14=  369  (akusala  mula  n.  pl.  =  akaraor  patittha 
SnA  23) ;  Pv  ti.3^  (sa°  with  its  cause)  ;  Dukp  272,  297, 
312,  320  ;  Miln  12  (&  khandha-yamaka,  with  ref.  to  the 
Yamaka).  Very  freq.  in  this  sense  as  referring  to  the 
three  lobha,  dosa,  moha  as  conditioning  akusala  (& 
absence  of  them  =  kusala),  e.  g.  at  D  111.214,  275;  .\ 
1. 201,  203  ;  Vbh  106  sq.,  169,  361  ;  Yam  i.i  ;  Vism  454  ; 
cp.  Nd'  517  ;  Vbh.\  382.  —  4.  origin,  source,  foundation, 
root  (fig.)  Vin  1.231  =  D  11. 91  (dukkhassa)  ;  Vin  n.304; 
Sn  916,  968  (cp.  Nd'  344,  490);  Th  i,  1027  (brahma- 
cariyassa) ;  Dh  247,  337.  Freq.  in  formula  (may  be 
taken  to  no.  i)  [pahina]  ucchinna-mula  talSvatthukata 
etc.  with  ref.  to  the  origin  of  sagsara.  e.  g.  at  S  11.02,  88  ; 
III. 10,  27,  161.  193;  IV. 253,  292,  376.  See  Nd'  p.  205 
s.  V.  pahina,  in  extenso.  —  5.  beginning,  base,  in  mula- 
divasa  the  initial  day  D.\  1.311  ;  also  in  phrase  miila- 
kiranato  right  from  the  beginning  Vv.\  132  (cp.  BSk. 
miliar)  kramatas  ca  id.  Divy  491). — 6.  "substance," 
foundation,  i.  e.  worth,  money,  capital,  price,  remunera- 
tion Miln  334  (kamma°) ;  Dh.\  1.270  (?) ;  PvA  273; 
Mhvs  27,  23.  amula  unpaid  Mhvs  30,  17  (kamma 
labour).     — ina'^  borrowed  capital  D  1.71. 

-kanda  eatable  tuber  Dli.V  111.130;  1V.7S  (mfilaka'^). 
See  al.so  kanda  -kammatthana  fundamental  k.  or  k. 
of  causes  Sn.\  54.  -ghacca  radically  extirpated  Dh 
250,  263.  -ttha  one  who  is  the  cause  of  something,  an 
instigator  Vin  in. 75.     -dissayin  knowing  the  cause  or 


Mulaka 


164 


Metta 


reason  Sn  1043,  cp.  Nd^  517.  -phala  (eatable)  fruit, 
consisting  of  roots;  roots  as  fruit  Sn  239.  -bandhana 
fundamental  bond  (?)  or  set  of  causes  (?)  Sn  524  sq., 
530  sq.,  cp.  SnA  429-431.  -bija  having  seeds  in  roots, 
i.  e.  propagated  by  roots,  one  of  the  classes  of  plants 
enum''  under  bijagama  (q.  v.).  -rasa  taste  of  roots,  or 
juice  made  fr.  roots  VbhA  69  ;  see  under  rasa. 

Halaka  (adj.  nt.)  [fr.  mula]  i.  (adj.)  (a)  (-°)  being  caused 
by,  having  its  reason  through  or  from,  conditioned  by, 
originating  in  Vbh  390  (tanha°  dhamma) ;  Tikp.  233  sq., 
252  sq.,  288  sq.  &  passim;  VbhA  2CO  sq.,  207  sq. 
(sankhara°,  avijja°  etc.  with  ref.  to  the  constituents 
of  the  Paticca-samuppada) ;  PvA  19.  —  (b)  having  a 
certain  worth,  price,  being  paid  so  much,  dear  Mhvs 
27,  23  (a  °r)  kammar)  unpaid  labour);  DhA  1398 
(nahana-cunna  °t)  catu-pannasa-koti  dhanar),  as  price) ; 
11.154  (pattha-pattha-mulaka  bhikkha) ;  in. 296  (kir) 
mfilakar)  how  dear?).  —  2.  (nt.)  =  mula,  i.  e.  root^ 
bulb,  radish,  cnly  in  cpd.  miilaka-kanda  radish  (-root) 
J  IV. 88,  491  ;  DhA  iv.78.  —  See  also  pulaka. 

MQlika  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  mula]  i.  (m.)  root-vendor  Miln  331. 
—  2.  (adj.  -°)  belonging  to  the  feet  (pada°),  a  footman, 
lackey  J  1.122,  43S  ;  11.300  sq.  (N.  of  the  king  of  Jana- 
sandha,  Gamani-canda)  ;  111.417;  v.128;  vi.30. — 3.  in 
rukkha°  one  who  lives  at  the  foot  of  a  tree :  see  under 
rukkha,  where  also  "miilikatta. 

Ma{ha  'Vedic  mudha,  pp.  of  mah;  cp.  also  muddhai  = 
^'edic  mugdha]  i .  gone  astray,  erring,  having  lost  one's 
way  (magga°)  D  1.85  a<  (°ssa  maggag  acikkhati) ;  Pv 
IV. 1*8  (id.  with  pavadati) ;  PvA  1 12  (magga°).  —  2.  con- 
fused, infatuated,  blinded,  erring,  foolish  D  1.59  ;  'Pv 
IV.3"  (sa°,  better  to  be  written  sam"). 

-gabbha  (f.)  a  woman  whose  "foetus  in  utero  "  has 
gone  astray,  i.  e.  cannot  be  delivered  properly,  a  woman 
difficult  to  be  delivered  J  i.407=DhA  iv.192  ;  Miln  i6g  ; 
VbhA  96.     -rupa  foolish  Dh  268  ;  DhA  111.395. 

Miisika  (m.)  &  musika  (f.)  [Vedic  mQsika,  fr.  mils]  a 
mouse  D  ii.i07=Pug  43  (f.) ;  Vism  109  (m.),  252  = 
KhA  46  (m.) :  Mhvs  5,  30  (m.) ;  VbhA  235. 

-cchinna  (auguries  from  the  marks  on  cloth  (gnawed 
by  mice)  D  1.9  (miisika";  DA  1.92  mQsika"  =  undura- 
khayitar)  ;  cp.  Dial.  1.17).  -dari  a  mouse-hole  J  1.462 
(musika°,  so  read  for  musika°).  -patha  "  Mouse- 
road  "  N.  of  a  road  Nd^  155,  415  (here  rausika"). 
-potika  the  young  of  a  mouse  J  iv.  1 88  (miisika°).  -vij ja 
mouse  craft  D  1.9  (cp.  DA  1.93). 

Mtisi  (f.)  [Venic  mus  &  muh  mouse  or  rat ;  cp.  Lat.  raus 
Gr.  fuiQ,  Ohg.  mus  =  E.  mouse.  Not  to  mu?  to  steal, 
but  to  same  root  as  Lat.  moveo,  to  move]  a  mouse 
S  11.270  (mudu°  a  tender,  little  m.). 

Me  is  enclitic  form  of  ahar)  in  var.  cases  of  the  sg.  See 
under  ahar). 

Mekhala  (f)  [cp.  Vedic  mekhala]  a  girdle  J  v. 202,  294 
(su°,  adj.);  vi.456 ;  ThA  35;  KhA  109;  DhA  1.39; 
PvA  46. 

Mekhalika  (f.)  [fr.  mekhala]  a  girdle  Vin  11. 185  (ahi°, 
consisting  of  a  snake). 

Megha  [Vedic  megha ;  not  to  mih,  mehati  (see  mijha), 
but  to  Idg.  *meigh-,  fog.  rain  ;  cp.  Sk.  mih  mist ;  Av. 
maega  cloud  ;  Gr.  o/ii'xX';  fog.  Lith.  migha  fog.  Dutch 
miggelen  to  drizzle,  also  Ags.  mist  =  Oicel  mistr 
"  mist  "]  a  cloud  Pv  11. 9*^  ;  Vism  126  ;  esp.  a  thunder- 
cloud, storm.  S  I. ICO  (thaneti),  154  ;  Th  1.307  (as  kala) ; 
It  66 ;  J  1.332  (pajjunna  vuccati  megha);  DhA  1.19; 
SnA  27  ("thanita-sadda).  In  this  capacity  often 
called  maha-megha,  e.  g.  Sn  30  ;  DhA  1.165  ;  KhA  2  i  ; 
PvA  132.  —  On  megha  in  similes  see  J.P.T.S.  1907, 
124,  125. 


-natha  having  clouds  as  protectors  (said  with  ref.  to 
grass-eating  animals)  J  iv.253.  -mandala  cloud-circle, 
a  circle  of  clouds  SnA  27.  -vanna  cloud-coloured 
J  V.321  (C.  for  megha-sannibha) :  °pis5na  a  sort  of 
ornamental  building  stone  Mhvs  30,  59  (v.  1.,  T.  meda°  ; 
trsl.  fat-coloured  stones).     See  meda". 

Mecaka  (adj.)  [cp.  Vedic  mecaka]  black,  dark  blue  Dhs.\  13. 

Mejjati  [cp.  Vedic  midyati,  to  mid,  see  meda  Dhtp  160. 
413  &  Dhtm  641  give  mid  with  meaning  "  snehane  "]  to 
be  fat,  to  be  full  of  fat ;  fig.  to  be  in  love  with  or  attracted 
by,  to  feel  affection  (this  meaning  only  as  a  "  petitio 
principii "  to  explain  metta)  DhsA  192  (v.  1.  mijjati ; 
=  siniyhati). 

Mejjha  (adj.-nt.)  [*medhya ;  fr.  medha]  i.  (adj.)  [to 
medha^]  fit  for  sacrifice,  pure  ;  neg.  a°  impure  Sdhp  363. 
2.  (nt.)  [to  medha^  &  medhavin]  in  dum"  foolishness 
Pug  2i  =  Dhs  390  (expl'*  at  DhsA  254  by  "  yag  .  .  . 
citta-santanar)  mejjharj  bhaveyya  suci-vodanar)  tag 
dutthar)  mejjhag  imina  ti  dummejjhag  "). 

MeQ4&  [dial.,  cp.  Prk.  mfintha  &  mintha  :  Pischel,  Prk.  Gr. 
§  293.  The  Dhtm  (156)  gives  a  root  mend  (med)  in 
meaning  of  "  kotilla,"  i.  e.  crookedness.  The  Ved. 
(Sk.)  word  for  ram  is  mesa]  i.  a  ram  D  1.9  ;  J  iv.250, 
353  ("visana-dhanu.  a  bow  consisting  of  a  ram's  horn). 
-°patha  Npl.  "ram's  road"  Nd^  155  =  415.  -"yuddha 
ram  fight  D  1.6.  — 2.  a  groom,  elephant-driver  in  cpd. 
hatthi°  elephants'  keeper  J  111.431  ;  v.287;  vi.489. 

Mev^i^^'^  (adj.)  [fr.  meijda]  i.  made  of  ram(s)  horn,  said 
of  a  (very  strong)  bow  J  n.88  (°dhanu) ;  v.128  ("singa- 
dhanu). — 2.  belonging  to  a  ram,  in  mendaka-paiiha 
"  question  about  the  ram  "  Miln  90  alluding  to  the  story 
of  a  ram  in  the  Ummagga-jataka  (J  vi. 353-55).  which  is 
told  in  form  of  a  question,  so  difficult  &  puzzUng  that 
nobody  "  from  hell  to  heaven  "  (J  vi.354)  can  answer 
it  except  the  Bodhisatta.  Cp.  Trenckner's  remark 
Miln  422. 

Hetta  (adj.  nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  maitra  "  belonging  to  Mitra  "  ; 
Epic  Sk.  maitra  "  friendly,"  fr.  mitra]  friendly,  benevo- 
lent, kind  as  adj.  at  D  in. 191  (mettena  kaya-kam- 
mena  etc.),  245  ("g  vaci-kammag) ;  as  nt.  for  metta  in 
cpds.  of  metta  (cp.  mettagsa)  and  by  itself  at  D  1.227 
(mettag-h  cittag),  perhaps  also  at  Sn  507. 

Hetta  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  mitra  =  nutta,  cp.  Vedic  maitrag. 
According  to  Asl.  192  (cp.  Expos.  258)  derived  fr.  mid 
to  love,  to  be  fat :  "  mejjati  metta  siniyhati  ti  attho  "] 
love,  amity,  sympathy,  friendUness,  active  interest  in 
others.  There  are  var.  def"^  &  expl"^  of  metta :  the 
stereotype  "  metti  mettayana  mettayitattag  metta  ceto- 
vimutti  "  Vbh  86  =  272  ;  occurring  as  "  metti  mettayana 
mettayitattag  anuda  anudayana  anuda\'itattag  hit- 
esita  anukampa  abyapado  .  .  .  kusalamiilag  "  at  Nd' 
488  &  Dhs  1056 .  (where  T.  mettag  for  metti,  but  see 
Dhs  trsl.^  253).  By  Bdhgh  at  Sn.\  128  expH  in  dis- 
tinction fr.  karuna  (which  is  "  ahita-dukkh-apanaya- 
kamata  ")  as  "  hita-sukh-upanaya-kamata."  i.  e.  desire 
of  bringing  welfare  &  good  to  one's  fellow-men.  Cp. 
def"  of  metta  at  Vism  317.  —  Sn  73  (see  Nd^  p.  232). 
967:  D  III. 247  sq..  279;  Vism  in.  321  sq.  ;  SnA  54; 
PvA  66  (khanti,  m..  anudaya)  ;  Sdhp  484.  487.  — 
Phrases  occurring  frequently :  metta  ceto-vimutti  D 
1. 251  ;  S  11.265  ;  A  IV. 150  ;  It  20  ;  Vbh  86  and  passim, 
metta-sahagatena  cetasa  with  a  heart  full  of  love 
D  1.250  ;  II. 186  ;  III. 49  sq.,  78,  223  sq.  ;  S  v.i  15  ;  A  1.138  ; 
II. 129  ;  1V.390  ;  V.299,  344  ;  expl*  in  detail  at  Vism  308. 
mettag  karoti  (loc.)  to  be  friendly  or  sympathize  with 
Mhvs  12,23.  —  I"  cpds.  usually  metta".  but  shortened 
to  metta"  in  metta-cittag  kindly  thought,  a  heart  full 
of  love  D  1. 167;  III. 237;  Sn  507;  Pv  11. 13'^;  J  vi.7i  ; 
and  metta-jhana  love-meditation,  ais  e-xpl°  of  m.-citta 
at  SnA  417;  PvA  167. 


4 


Mettayati 


165 


Mokkhacika 


-aQsa  (mettai)sa)  sympathetic,  showing  love  towards 
It  22  (v.  1.  °asa) :  J  iv'.yi  (  =  metta-kotthasa  metta- 
citta  C).  -kammatthana  the  k.  of  sympathy  DhA 
IV.  108.  -bhavana  cultivation  or  development  of 
friendliness  (towards  all  living  beings)  J  1.176;  111.45; 
Miln  199;  Vism  295.  -viharin  abiding  in  kindliness 
Dh  368  ;  DhA  iv.108  ;  Nett  25  ;  Vism  324  ;  PvA  230. 

Mettay&ti  [Denom.  fr.  metta]  to  feel  friendly,  to  show  love 
to  be  benevolent  A  iv.151  ;  DhsA  194  :  VbhA  75.  With 
loc.  to  show  friendship  or  be  affectionate  towards  J 
1.365  ;  III. 96  ;  Davs  111.34. 

Mettayans  (f  )  &  Mettayitatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  formations  fr. 
metta]  :  see  def°  of  metta. 

Uetti  &  Metti  (f.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  maitrl]  love,  friendship 
J  III. 79  ;  V.208  ;  VbhA  75.     See  also  def°  of  metta. 

Ketteyyatta  (f)is  occasional  spelling  for  matteyyata  (q.  v.). 
in  analogy  to  petteyyata;  e.  g.  Nd*  294. 

Methnna  (adj.-nt.)  [fr.  Vedic  mithuna  pair,  der.  fr.  mithu. 
Cp.  miccha]  i.  (adj.)  relating  to  sexual  intercourse, 
sexual,  usually  with  dhamma,  sex  intercourse,  in  phrase 
"ri  dhammai]  patisevati  to  cohabit  Vin  1.96;  D  11.133  ■ 
Sn  291,  704 ;  Nd^  139  ;  Vism  418  ;  SnA  536.  —  (m.)  an 
sissociate  J  vi.294  (na  raja  hoti  methuno). — 2.  (nt.) 
sexual  intercourse  fS'edic  maithuna]  D  1.4  ;  111.9,  88  sq. 
133  ;  Sn  400,  609,  814,  835  =  DhA  1.202  ;  Nd'  139,  145  ; 
Pug  67  ;  Vism  51. 

Methunaka  [fr.  methuna]  i.  one  concerned  with  (illicit) 
sexual  intercourse,  a  fornicator  Nd'  139  (in  a  wider 
sense). — 2.  an  associate  Vin  111.66. — 3.  (nt.)  coitu? 
J  11.360  (  =  methuna-dhamma  C). 

Meda  fVedic  medas  (nt.)  fr.  mid,  see  etym.  under  mada 
fat  S  1. 1 24;  Sn  196;  J  III. 484  (ajakarar)  medar)  =  aja- 
kara-medar)  C.) ;  Kh  iii.  (expl''  at  Vism  262  as  "  thina- 
sineha  "  thick  or  coagulated  fluid  or  gelatine) ;  Vism  361  : 
VbhA  66,  225,  245,  249. 

-kathalika  a  cooking  pot  or  saucepan  for  frying  fat 
A  IV. 377  (in  simile  with  kaya)  ;  Dh.A  11. 179  (similar); 
Vism  195  (in  compar.).  -ganthi  (as  medo-ganthi,  Sk. 
influence  !)  an  abscess  of  fat,  fatty  knot  or  tumour, 
mentioned  as  a  disease  at  Miln  149.  -vanna  fat- 
coloured  ;  in  cpd.  °pasana  a  stone  of  the  (golden)  colour 
of  fat  found  in  the  Himalaya  mountains  Sn  44 7  ( =  meda- 
pinda-sadisa  SnA  393);  Mhvs  i,  39;  30,  57  sq.,  96; 
31,  121  ;  see  Geiger's  note  Mhvs  (P.T.S.  ed.)  p.  355,  who 
puts  it  beyond  doubt,  that  meda"  is  the  correct  reading 
for  the  V.  1.  megha°  at  all  places. 

Hedaka  [meda+  ka]  in  go"  a  precious  stone  of  light-red 
(or  golden)  colour  (cp.  meda-vanna-pasana)  VvA  1 1 1 . 

Mediai  (f)  [of  adj.  medin,  fr.  meda  fat.  but  cp.  Vedic 
medin  an  associate  or  companion  fr.  mid  in  meaning  t( 
be  friendly]  the  earth  (also  later  Sk.)  Mhvs  5,  185  ;  15. 
47;  Vism  125. 

Medeti  [Denom.  fr.  meda]  to  become  fat  M  1.238. 

Hedha  [Vedic  medha,  in  asva.  go='.  purusa"  etc.]  sacrifice 
only  in  assa'  horse-sacrifice  &  purisa"  human  s.  (q.  v.). 
eg  .  at  A  IV. 151  ;  Sn  303.  — Cp.  mejjha. 

Medhaga  (&  °ka)  [cp.  Sk.  methana  abusive  speech  ;  Vedic 
methati  fr.  mith  to  scold]  quarrel,  strife  Vin  11.88  ('ka) ; 
Th  2,  344;  Sn  893,  894  (=kalaha.  bhandana,  viggaha 
vivada  Nd'  yj2,  303),  935  (T.  "ka  ;  Nd»  42  &  406  °ga 
with  V.  1.  SS  °ka);  Dh  6  ;  J  111.334  (°ka  ;  C.  =  kalaha), 
488  Cga  ;  C.  °ka  expl"  kalaha) ;  Dh.\  1.65. 

Medhasa  (adj)  [=  Vedic  medhas,  as  a-base]  having 
wisdom  or  intelligence,  wise,  only  in  cpds.  bhiiri"  of 
great  wisdom  Sn   1131;   &  su°  [Ved.  sumedhas]   very 


wise  Vv22*  (  =  sundara-paiifia  VvA  m) ;  Pv  111.7'  (both 
comb""  as  bhuri-su-raedhasa,  hardly  correct ;  v.  1.  M. 
bhiirimedhasa  PvA  205). 

Medha  (f)  [Vedic  medha  &  medhas,  perhap.s  to  Gr.  /nfl" 
in  ftavOdvu  ("  mathematics ")]  wisdom,  intelligence, 
sagacity  Nd'  s.  v.  (m.  vuccati  pauiia)  ;  Pug  25  ;  Dhs  16, 
DhsA  148;  PvA  40  (  =  paiina). — adj.  sumedha  vise, 
clever,  intelligent  Sn  177;  opp.  dum"  stupid  Pv  1.8*. 
— -khina-medha  one  whose  intelligence  has  been  impaired, 
stupefied  J  vi.295  (  =  khina-panria). 

Medhavita  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  medhavin]  cleverness,  intelligence 
VvA  229. 

Medhavin  (adj.)  [medha -l- in  =*medhayin  >  medhavin  ; 
already  Vedic,  cp.  medhasa]  intelligent,  wise,  often 
comb""  with  pandita  &  bahussuta :  D  1.120;  S  iv.375; 
A  iv.244  ;  Vin  iv.io,  13,  141  ;  Sn  323  (ace.  medhavinai) 
-f  bahussutag)  627,  1008  (Ep.  of  Mogharaja),  1125  (id.) ; 
Nd*  259  (s.  V.  jatima,  with  var.  other  synonyms)  ; 
Dh  36 ;  J  VI.294;  Miln  21  ;  DhA  1.257 ;  11. 108 ;  iv.169  ; 
VvA  131;  PvA  4 1 . 

Medhi  (f  )  [Vedic  methi  pillar,  post  (to  bind  cattle  to)  ; 
BSk.  medhi  Divy  244;  Prk.  medhi  Pischel  Gr.  §  221. 
See  for  etym.  Walde,  Lat.  Wtb.  s.  v.  raeta]  pillar,  part 
of  a  stupa  [not  in  the  Canon  ?]. 

Medhin  (adj. -n.)  =  medha  in  adj.  use;  only  in  cpd.  dum- 
medhin  (  =  dum-medha)  foolish,  ignorant  Dh  26  (bala 
dummedhino  jana  ;   =nippanna  Dh.\  1.237). 

Meraya  (nt.)  [Epic  Sk.  maireya,  cp.  Halayudha  2,  175 
(Aufrecht  p.  314)  ;  prob.  dial.]  a  sort  of  intoxicating 
liquor,  spirits,  rum,  usually  comb"*  with  sura.  D  1.146- 
166;  M  1.238:  Pug  55;  Dh  247;  J  1V.117  (pupph- 
asav-adi,  i.  e.  made  fr.  flowers,  cp.  def"  dhatakl-puspa- 
guda-dhany-amla-sanskrtag  by  Madhava,  Halay.  p. 
314),  Five  kinds  are  given  by  Dhpala  at  VvA  73, 
viz.  pupph-asava,  phal'  asava,  madhv".  gul",  sambhara- 
sagyutta. 

Merita  in  bhayamerita  J  1v.424sv.359  is  to  be  read  as 
bhaya-m-erita  driven  by  fear ;  there  is  no  need  to 
change  it  with  Kern,  Toev.  to  perita. 

Mella  [dial,  or  uncertain  reading?]  citron  (  =  matulunga) 
J  III. 3 19  (gloss  bella). 

Mokkha'  [late  Vedic  &  Epic  Sk,  moksa.  fr,  mac,  see 
mui\cati.  Dhtp  539  mokkha  =  mocana ;  Dhtm  731  = 
moca]  I.  (lit.)  release,  freedom  from,  in  bandhana  m. 
D  i.73  =  M  1.276.  — 2.  (fig.)  release,  deliverance,  salva- 
tion Vbh  426  (jara-marana°  from  old  age  &  death) ; 
DhA  1.4  ("magga-Fsagga-magga,  the  way  to  heaven 
&  salvation),  89,  90  ("dhamma  =  salvation)  Mhvs  5,  61. 
—  3.  (lit.)  (act.)  letting  loose,  emission,  uttering  (of 
speech)  J  1.375. — 4.  it  may  (&  prob.  ought  to)  be 
taken  as  adj.  (=*moksya,  grd.  of  Cans,  of  muc)  at 
Sn  773  (ariiia".  either=i,  as  "deliverance  for  others," 
or  =  4,  as  "to  be  delivered  by  others."  Udhgh  at  Sn.\ 
516  gives  both  cxpl"^ :  aiine  mocctui]  (na)  sakkonti. 
karan^i-vacanay  va  ctag  :  aiiiiena  mocetabba  (na)  honti). 

Mokkha^  (adj.)  [fr.  mukha  6;  Vrddhi  form=  •maukhya" 
the  headmost,  first,  foremost,  in  series  aggo  seffho  m. 
utlamn  .\  11.95,  where  the  customary  tradition  reads 
pamokkha  (see  under  maha  &  cp.  Nd''  502A). 

Mokkhaka  =  mokkha- ;  thus  we  should  read  at  J  1.441  for 
mukkhaka. 

Mokkhacika  (m,  or  °a  f.)  [see  on  attempt  at  etym.  Morris 
in  J. P.T.S.  1885,  49  who  takes  mokkha  as  fr.  muc 
■■tumbling"  cS:  cika  =  "  turning  "  fr.  cak  =  cik.  The 
word  remains  obscure,  it  must  be  a  dialectical  e.xpres- 
sion,   distorted  by  popular  analogy  &   taken   perhaps 


Mokkhati 


i66 


Morini 


from  a  designation  of  a  place  where  these  feats  or  toys 
had  their  origin.  More  probable  than  Morris'  etynt. 
is  an  analysis  of  the  word  (if  it  is  Aryan)  as  mokkha  = 
mokkha^,  in  meaning  "  head,  top,"  so  that  it  may  mean 
"  head  over."  top-first  "  &  we  have  to  separate  *mok- 
khac-ika  the  °ika  representing  °iya  "  in  the  manner  of, 
like  "  &  -ac  being  the  adv.  of  direction  as  contained  in 
Sk.  praiic=  pra-anc]  tumbling,  turning  somersaults,  an 
acrobatic  feat ;  in  list  of  forbidden  amusements  at 
D  1.6  (op.  DA  1.86  ;  samparivattaka-kilanar|,  i.  e.  playing 
with  something  that  rolls  along,  continuously  turning  ? 
The  foil,  sentence  however  seems  to  imply  turning 
head  over  heels  :  "  akase  va  dandar)  gahetva  bhumiyar) 
va  sisar)  thapetva  hetth-upariya  (so  read!)  -bhivena 
parivattana-kilanai)  "  ;  i.  e.  trapeze-performing.  Cp. 
Dial.  I. ID  &  Vin.  Texts  11.184).  The  list  re-occurs  at 
Vin  11. 10  (°aya  :  f.  !  kilanti)  ;  iii.iSo;  M  1.266  SS  and  A 
V.J03  (with  important  v.  1.  mokkhatika,  which  would 
'mply  mokkha  &  ending  tiy^,  and  not  °cika  at  all. 
The  Cy.  on  this  passage  expl*  as  ;  dandakar)  gahetva 
hetth-uppariya  {sic.  as  DA  1.86;  correct  to  upariya  ?) 
-bhavena  parivattana-kilanar)).  The  word  is  found  also 
at  Vin  1.275,  where  the  boy  of  a  Setthi  in  Baranasi 
contracts  injuries  to  his  intestines  by  "  mokkha- 
cikaya  kilanto,"  playing  (with  a)  m.  —  According  to  its 
use  with  kilati  &  in  instr.  mokkhacikena  (Nd^  219) 
may  be  either  a  sort  of  game  or  an  instrument  (toy), 
with  which  children  play. 

Mokkhati  see  under  muficati. 

Mogha  (adj.)  [the  Vedic  mogha  for  the  later  Sk.  moha, 
which  is  the  P.  noun  moha ;  fr.  muh.  BSk.  moha- 
purusa  e.  g.  at  Av§  11. 177  ;  MVastu  111.440]  empty,  vain, 
useless,  stupid,  foolish  D  1.187  (opp.  to  sacca),  199; 
Sn  354 ;  Dh  260  ("jinna  grown  old  in  vain ;  C.  expl'  as 
tuccha-jinna  DhA  in. 388) ;  DhA  i.iio  (patthana  a 
futile  wish);  PvA  194.  —  Opp.  amogha  S  1.232; 
J  VI. 26  ;  DhA  11.34  (°0  ta-ssa  jivitar)  ;  not  in  vain), 
-purisa  a  stupid  or  dense  fellow  Vin  iv.126,  144. 

Moca^  [cp.  *Sk.  moca  &  moca]  the  plantain  or  banana  tree' 
Musa  sapientum  Vin  1.246  (°pana  drink  made  fr.  M.  s.  ; 
one  of  the  8  permitted  drinks) ;  J  iv.iSi  ;  v. 405,  465. 

Hoca^  [root-noun  of  moc,  Caus.  of  muc]  delivery,  setting 
free  Dhtm  631,  751,  where  Dhtp  in  same  context  reads 
mocana. 

Mocana  (nt.)  [fr.  moceti]  i.  setting  free,  delivering  DhA 
III. 199  (parissaya°) ;  Dhtp  376,  539  ;  Dhtm  609.  Cp. 
moca''.  —  2.  letting  loose,  discharging,  in  assu°  shed- 
ding tears  PvA  18.     Cp.  vi". 

Mocaya  (adj.)  [quasi  grd.  formation  fr.  moceti]  to  be 
freed,  able  to  escape,  in  dum°  difficult  to  obtain  freedom 
J  V1.234. 

Mocapana  (nt.)  [fr.  Caus.  II.  mocapeti]  causing  one's 
freedom,  deliverance  J  vi.134. 

Mocetar  [M.  ag.  fr.  moceti]  one  who  sets  free,  a  deliverer 
Ndi  32. 

Moceti  [Caus.  of  muilcati]  i.  to  deliver,  set  free,  release 
cause  one's  release  or  deliverance  from  (abl.).  imper. 
praes.  mocehi  Pv  11.  i'  (duggatiya) ;  PvA  12  ;  aor.  mocesi 
PvA  112  (dasavyato)  ;  ger.  mocetva  PvA  8,  77;  inf. 
mocetui)  PvA  45  (petalokato). — 2.  to  discharge,  emit 
(semen  in  coitu)  Vin  111.36,  39  (as  Caus  II.),  i  lo.  —  3.  to 
let  loose,  set  into  motion,  stir  :  padar]  m.  to  run  J  in. 33. 
—  4.  to  discharge,  fulfil  :  patifiiiar)  one's  promise  DhA 
1.93.  —  5.  to  unharness  DhA  1.67. — 6.  to  detach 
S  1.44.  —  Caus.  II.  mocapeti  to  cause  to  be  freed,  to 
give  freedom,  to  let  loose  Vin  iv.316  (opp.  bandliapeti). 

Mota  [BSk.  mota,  Prk.  mrda :  Pischel  §  166,  238]  see 
mutoli. 


Motar  [n.  ag.  fr.  munati,  more  likely  direct  der.  fr.  muta, 
pp.  of  man,  q.  v.]  one  who  feels  (or  senses)  that  which 
can  be  felt  (or  sensed),  in  phrase  "  mutar)  na  maiiiiati 
motabbag  (so  read)  na  mafmati  motarag  "  he  does  not 
identify  what  is  sensed  with  that  which  is  not  sensed, 
nor  with  what  is  to  be  sensed  (motabba)  nor  with  him 
who  senses  A  11.25  ;  where  motar  &  motabba  corre- 
spond to  sotar  &  sotabba  &  datthar  &  datthabba.  The 
word  does  not  occur  in  the  similar  passage  M  1.3. 

Modaka  [cp.  Epic.  Sk.  modaka  in  meaning  i]  i.  a  sort  of 
sweetmeat  S  1.148  ;  A  1.130  ;  in. 76  ;  Pug  32  ;  PvA  4.  — ■ 
2.  receptacle  for  a  letter,  an  envelope,  wrapper  or  such 
like  J  VI. 385  (pannar)  "assa  anto  pakkhipitva).  May, 
however,  be  same  as  i . 

Uodati  [mud,  cp.  Vedic  moda  joy  Dhtp  146:  tose]  to 
rejoice,  to  enjoy  oneself,  to  be  happy  A  in. 40  ;  Sn  561  ; 
Pv  1.5^;  II. i^'. — pp.  mudita  (q.  v.).  For  mohaya- 
mana  at  DhA  1.275  the  better  reading  is  modayamana 
rejoicing,  a  ppr.  med. 

Modana  (nt.)  [fr.  mud]  satisfaction,  rejoicing  Sdhp  229. 
Cp.  sam". 

Modana  (f.)  [fr.  mud]  blending  (?) ;  Cy.  expl"  at  DhsA  143 
of  term  amodana. 

Modara:  In  modara  at  J  v.54  (of  elephant's  teeth)  Kern, 
Toev.  s.  V.  sees  a  miswriting  for  medura  (full  of,  beset 
with),  which  however  does  not  occur  in  Pali.  The  C. 
expl°  is  "  samantato  obhasento,"  i.  e.  shining. 

Mona  (nt.)  [fr.  muni,  equal  to  *maunya  taken  by  Nd  as 
root  of  moneyya]  wisdom,  character,  self-possession  Sn 
540  (°patha=  iiana-patha  SnA  435),  718,  723;  Nd'  57; 
Nd^  514  A  (  =  nana  &  panha)  ;  Th  i,  168  (what  is 
monissar)  ?  fut.  i"'  sg.  of    ?). 

Moneyya  (nt.)  [fr.  muni,  cp.  Vedic  moneya]  state  of  a 
muni,  muni-hood ;  good  character,  moral  perfection. 
This  is  always  represented  as  3  fold,  viz.  kaya",  vaci°, 
mano°  (see  under  muni),  e.  g.  at  D  in. 220  ;  A  1.273; 
Nd'  57  ;  Nd-  514  A  (where  also  used  as  adj. :  moneyya 
dhamraa  properties  of  a  perfect  character).  Cp.  also 
Sn  484,  698,  700  sq.  On  moneyya-kolahala  (fore- 
bodings of  the  highest  wisdom)  see  the  latter. 

Momuha  (adj.)  [intens.-redupl.  formation  fr.  moha  & 
muh]  dull,  silly,  stupid,  infatuated,  bewildered  (cp. 
Cpd.  83')  D  1.27;  A  in. 164  sq.  ;  Sn  840,  841,  1120; 
Nd^  153  (  =  manda),  192;  Nd^  521  (  =  avidva  etc.); 
Pug  65. 

Momuhatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  nomiiha]  silliness,  foolishness, 
bewilderment  of  the  mind  M  1.520  ;  A  ni.ii9,  191,  219 
(=  mandatta) ;  Pug  69. 

Mora  [the  contracted,  regular  P.  form  of  *Sk.  maj'ura, 
via  *ma-ura>mora.  See  also  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  27  & 
Pischel,  Prk.  Gr.  §  166.  —  Vedic  only  mayuri  f.  pea-hen] 
a  peacock  J  n.275  ("upasevin,  see  C.  on  this  passage); 
VI. 218,  497;  PvA  142;  DhA  1.394.  A  peacock's  tail 
(sometimes  used  as  a  fan)  is  denoted  in  var.  terms  in 
cpds.,  as  mora-kalapa  DhA  1.387;  -piccha  Vin  1.186; 
-pincha  Vin  11.130;  -pinja  PvA  142,  176;  VvA  147; 
-sikali  (?)  KhA  49;  -hattha  Vv  33"  (  =  mayura-piujehi 
kataij  makasa-vijanir))  ;  Pv  111.1^'.  Perhaps  also  as 
morakkha  "  a  peacock's  eye "  at  VbhA  63  (morak- 
khaka  loha,  a  kind  of  copper,  grouped  with  pisaca- 
loha).  It  is  more  likely  however  that  morakkha  is 
distorted  fr.  "mauryaka,  patronymic  of  mura,  a  local 
(tribal)  designation  (cp.  murala),  then  by  pop.  etyra. 
connected  with  mora  peacock.  With  this  cp.  Sk. 
moraka  "  a  kind  of  steel  "  BR. 

MoragU  [cp.  (scientific)  Sk.  mayuraka]  a  tender  grass 
(Achyranthes  aspera)  Vin  1.196. 

Morini  (f.)  [fr.  mora]  a  peahen  Miln  67. 


Moli 


167 


Mohet 


Moli  (m  iV  i)  cp.  Epic  Sk.  mauli.  fr.  mula]  a  chignon  ; 
crest,  turban  J  1.64;  v. 431  ;  Mhvs  11.  28;  DA  1.136 
(v.  1.  moli)-  Also  found  (as  molin.  adj.  ?)  in  Np. 
Yama-moli :  see  under  yakkha  5. 

-galla  (?)  fat  Vin  1.83  (expl""  by  thula-sarira ;  vv.  11. 
moli°  &  mukalla) .  -baddha  one  who  has  his  hair  tied 
into  a  top-knot  128.  243.  348. 

Mosa  (°-)  (adj.-nt.)  [the  guna  (comp°)  form  of  musaJ 
belonging  to  or  untruth,  false- ;  only  in  cpds.  -dhamma 
of  a  deceitful  nature,  false.  A  v. 84  (kama)  ;  Sn  739.  757  ; 
&   -Tajja   [fr.   musa-vada]   false-speaking,   lie.   untruth 

5  1.169;  Sn  819,  866.  943;  Nd>  152,  265;  Nd*  515; 
Vv   I2«. 

Mosalla  (adj.)  [fr.  musala]  worthy  of  being  slain  (with 
clubs),  punishable  A  11.24 1. 

Moha  [fr.  mah,  see  muyhati ;  cp.  Sk.  moha  &  Vedic 
mogha]  stupidity,  dullness  of  mind  &  soul,  delusion, 
bewilderment,  infatuation  1")  in. 146.  175,  182.  214,  270  ; 
Vin  IV. 144,  145  ;  Sn  56.  74,  160,  638,  847  ;  Vbh  208.  341. 
391,  402;  Pug  16;  Tikp  108,  122,  259.  ^-Def''  as 
"  dukkhe  aiifianar)  etc..  moha  pamoha,  sammoha, 
avijj'  ogha  etc,"  by  Nd-  99  &  Vbh  362  ;  as  "  muyhanti 
tena,  sayar)  va  muyhati.  muyhana-mattar)  eva  va  tan 
ti  moho  "  and  "  cittassa  andha-bhava-lakkhano.  anfiana- 
lakkhano  va  "  at  Vism  468.  —  Often  coupled  with  raga 

6  dosa  as  one  of  the  3  cardinal  affects  of  citta,  making 
a  man  unable  to  grasp  the  higher  truths  and  to  enter 
the  Path  :  see  under  raga  (&  Nd-  p.  237,  s.  v.  raga 
where  the  wide  range  of  application  of  this  set  is  to 
be  seen).  Cp  the  3  fires  :  rag-aggi,  dos-aggi,  moh-aggi 
It  92  ;  D  111.217  also  raga-kkhaya,  dosa°,  moha"  VbhA 
31  sq.  — On  comb"  with  raga,  lobha  &  dosa  see  dosa* 
and  lobha.  — On  term  see  also  Dhs  trsl.  §§  a,  362,  441  ; 
Cpd  16.  18,  41.  113,  14G. — See  further  D  i.8')  (sa- 
moha-cittar)) ;  Nd'  15,  16  (with  lobha  &  dosa)  ;  VvA  14  ; 
PvA  3.  — amoha  absence  of  bewilderment  Vbh  2 10 
{+  alobha,  adosa  :  as  the  3  kusala-raulani :  cp.  mula  3), 
402  (id.,  as  kusala-hctu).  — Cp.  pa°,  sam°. 


-antara  (personal)  quality  of  bewilderment  (lit. 
having  m.  inside)  Sn  478  (taken  by  C  as  "  cause  of 
m.."  i.  e.  ''kirana,  "paccaya  Sn.\  411  ;  cp.  antara  = 
karana  under  antara  1  2  b).  -ussada  quality  of  dull- 
ness Nd'  72,  413.  -kkhaya  destruction  of  infatuation 
Vbh  73  :  VbhA  51.  -carita  one  whose  habit  is  infatua- 
tion Nett  90  ( -(- ragacarita  &  dosacarita).  -tama  the 
darkness  of  bewilderment  MA  i.  -dhamma  anything 
that  is  bewildering  or  infatuating  Sn  270  -paruta 
covered  or  obstructed  by  delusion  Pv  iv.3^'.  -magga 
being  on  the  road  of  infatuation  Sn  347.  -salla  the 
sting  of  bewilderment  Nd'  59. 

Mohatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  moha]  infatuation,  bewilderment 
A  n.i2()  ;  in. 376. 

Hohana  (nt.)  [fr.  mah  as  Caus.  form"]  making  dull  or 
stupid,  infatuation,  enticement,  allurement  Sn  399,  772 
(  =  mohana  vuccanti  paiica  kamaguna  Nd'  26).  The 
Sk.  meaning  is  also  "  sexual  intercourse  "  (cp.  Halayudha 
P-  3' 5).  which  may  apply  to  the  Sn  passages  SnA  517 
(on  Sn  772)  expl''  "  mohanag  vuccati  kamaguna,  ettha 
hi  deva-manussa  muyhanti." 

Hohanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  mohanal  leading  astray,  bewildering, 
leading  into  error  \in  iv.144. 

Hohaneyya  &  Hohanlya  (adj.)  [grd.  form"  fr.  mohaj 
leading  to  infatuation  A  Ii.i2i)  ;  in. 110  ;  J  hi. 499. 

Moheti  [Caus.  fr.  mnll,  see  muyhati  &  cp.  mohaJ  to 
deceive,  to  befool,  to  take  in.  surprise,  delude,  aor. 
2"''  sg.  amohayi  Sn  352  ;  3""  sg.  amohayi  S  iv.i58  = 
It  58  (maccu-rajan  ;  vv.  11.  asamohayi  &  asamohari)  ; 
reading  somewhat  doubtful,  cp.  similar  context  Sn 
1076  with  "  sabbesu  dhammesu  samiihatesu "  (v.  1. 
samoha°).  — •  3'*  sg.  (poet.)  also  amohayittha  Sn  332 
(ma  vo  pamatte  viiiflaya  maccuraja  amohayittha  vasa- 
nuge.  cp.  Sn  ed.  p.  58).  — On  mohayamana  Dh.\  1.273 
see  modati. 


ERRATUM, 

Part  \  I,  p.  21*:   Pativameti.     Frx-  Dh  1.39  read  DA  1.39.     Cp.  J.P.TS.   1886,  p.   160, 
suggesting  pativadh".  or  pajibadhayamano,  and  referring  to  Th  i,  7^4. 


VI- 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

VOLUME  I. 
Page  X,  under  i a.  add  Apa.dana  P  T  S.  1925  (Ap). 

lb  ,,     Manoratha-purani  P.T.S.    1924   (AA) ;    Samanta-pasadika   P.T.S.    1924   (Sam.   Pas.   or 
Vin  A).  ' 

,,     xi,    ,,      3     ,,     Human  Types,  P.T.S.  trsl.  1924  (Pug  trsl.)  and  insert  accordingly  on  p.  xii  under  B  1. 
4,  column  2,  under  aggala  insert  1.  (better :)  the  wing  of  a  door  (see  phusita^). 
17,      ,.         I,      ,,      addha-telasa  rea<f  12J /oc  13J. 
,,     102,      ,,         I,      ,,       apaga  read  Davs  1.32 /or  52. 

VOLUME  II. 

Page    14,  column  1,  under  kantita':  at  Miln  240  better  as  kantita^,  i.e.  "  spun." 

93,  ,,  I       ,,       camu  last  line  to  be  read  camupati  a  general  Mhvs  10,  65  ;  23,  4 ;  Davs'1.3 

100,  ,.  \.  insert   Adissa*  (adj.)  blameworthy  M  1. 12  ;  MA  =  garayha. 

no,  ,.  2,  under  \a.\&  handle  of  an  adze  {instead  of  " razor"). 

112,  „  2,  insert  jaluka  leech  DA  1.117. 

166,  .,  I,  under  dessin  read  Sn  92  [for  93),  and  :  better  desin,  cp.  viddesin 

196,  „  1,      .,       nipatati  r«a<f  intrs. /or  instr.  

209,  „  I,  nivesa  read  nivesana  2 /or  nivesana'. 

VOLUME  III. 

Page      3.  column  i,  under  pakkamati  read  2.  for  2nd. 

paficaka  (taca°)  read  kesa  for  kosa. 
pafijara  add  in  comb"  siha"  meaning  "  window." 
palaganda  read  A  1V.127 /or  v.127. 
bottom,  read  pahita'  for  pahital. 
under  pifijita  read  "  dyed  "  for  died, 
line  3  fr.  bottom,  read  S  11.228  for  1.228. 
,  read  bya  for  bya. 


3  coll 

imn  I, 

12. 

12,      „ 

62,      ., 

71.      .. 

79.      ., 

2, 

104.      „ 

2, 

'■5.     .. 

I 

THE    PALI    TEXT    SOCIETY'S 
PALI-ENGLISH   DICTIONARY 


EDITED  BY 


T.  W.  RHYS  DAVIDS  F.B.A    D.Sc.  Ph.D.  LL.D.  D.Litt 
and  WILLIAM  STEDE  Ph.D. 


Part  VII  (Y— Vibh) 


PUBLISHED  BY 

THE  PALI  TEXT  SOCIETY 

LONDON 


First  published  -  -  -  1924 
Reprinted  -  -  -  -  1948 
Reprinted        -     -     -     -     1952 


M 


Y. 


-Y-  comb"  consonant  (sandhi),  inserted  (euphonically) 
between  2  vowels  for  the  avoidance  of  hiatus.  It  has 
arisen  purely  phonetically  from  (  as  a  sort  of  "  gliding  " 
or  semi-vowel  within  a  word,  where  the  syllable  division 
was  in  regular  speech  more  openly  felt  than  in  the 
written  language,  e.  g.  pari-y-apanna  (Pali)  corre- 
sponds to  Sk.  pary-apanna,  similarly  pari-y-osana  =  Sk. 
paryosana.  Thus  inserted  after  a  before  i  or  e :  cha- 
y-ima  disa.  D  111.188;  ta-y-idai)  Sn  1077;  Pv  1.3'; 
tava-y-idar)  Sn  352;  na-y-idarj  S  11.278;  maraa-y-idai) 
Sn  806  ;  na-y-idha  Sn  790  ;  ma-y-idha  Vin  1.54  ;  yassa- 
y-etadisi  paja  D  11.267  (v-  1-  ^^  ^°^  T  yassa-s-etadisi) ; 
satiya-y-etar)  adhivacanar)  M  11.260;  na-y-imassa 
Pv  IV.  I*.  —  After  i  before  a  :  pavisi-y-assamar)  J  v. 405  ; 
khaiji-y-asmani  J  in. 433  ;  ya-y-aiiiiar)  J  1.429  (where 
C.  expl'' :  ya-karo  patisandhi-karo).  —  Cp.  yeva  for 
eva.  — Note.  At  J  vi.io6  ya-y-irae  jane  is  to  be  taken 
as  ye  ime  jane ;  the  spelling  ay  for  e  being  found  else- 
where as  well.     Cp.  the  following  ta-y-ime  jane. 

Ya°  [pron.  rel.  base:  Vedic  yah  =  Gr.  iif  who;  cp.  Goth, 
jabai  if,  -ei  rel.  part.  An  amplification  of  the  dem. 
pron.  base  *i-,  *ei-  (cp.  ayag).  See  on  detail  Brug- 
mann,  "  Die  indogerm.  Pronomina  "  in  Ber.  d.  sachs. 
Ges.  LX.  41  sq.]  I.  Forms.  (See  inflection  also  at 
Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  no.)  The  decl.  is  similar  to  that  of  ta°  ; 
among  the  more  rarely  found  forms  we  only  mention 
the  foil.  :  sg.  nom.  m.  yo  with  by-form  (in  hiatus)  3rv-, 
as  yv'4yar)  =  yo  ayag  M  1.258  ;  3rv'4ssa=yo  assa  M  1.137. 
Notice  the  lengthening  of  the  subsequent  vowel.  — 
An  unsettled  ya  is  to  be  found  at  J  v. 424  (FausboU 
remarks  "  for  yassa  "  .'  ;  perhaps  to  be  comb''  with 
preceding  pancapatika ;  C.  on  p.  427  expl''  ya-karo 
nipatamatto)  —  abl.  yasma  in  adv.  use  ;  yamha  Dh 
392. — loc.  yamhi  Dh  261,  372,  393. — f.  loc.  yassai) 
A  III.  151  (see  below).  See  further  adv.  use  of  cases 
(below  II. 5). — At  Pv  in'  yahi  is  doubtful  (perhaps 
imper.  =  yajahi,  of  yajati ;  C.  leaves  it  unexpl""). 

Special  mention  must  be  made  of  the  nt.  n.  ace.  sg. , 
where  both  yag  and  yad  are  found.  The  (Vedic)  form 
yad  (Ved.  yat)  has  been  felt  more  like  ya -f  expletive 
(Sandhi-)  d,  and  is  principally  found  in  adv.  use  and 
certain  archaic  phrases,  whereas  yar)  represents  the 
usual  (Pali)  form  (like  tad  and  tag).  See  more  under 
II.  —  A  Magadhized  form  is  ye  (after  se  =  tar)),  found 
at  D  11.278  (see  Geiger  §  105*  &  no'.  Cp.  Trenckner, 
Notes  75.).  The  expression  ye-bhuyyena  may  belong 
under  this  category,  if  we  explain  it  as  yad -I-  bhuyyena 
(bhuyyena  equivalent  to  bhiyyoso).  It  would  then 
correspond  to  seyyathd  (  =  sadH-yatha,  cp.  sayatha, 
sace,  tagyatha).  See  refs.  under  yebhuyyena.  — •  The 
expression  yevapanaka  is  an  adj.  form"  from  the  phrase 
ye-va-pana  (=yar)  va  pana  "  whatever  else  there  is  "). 
i.  e.  belonging  to  something  of  the  same  kind,  i.  e. 
corresponding,  reciprocal,  as  far  as  concerned,  respec- 
tive. (See  s.  v.)  —  In  adv.  use  it  often  corresponds  to 
E.  as;  see  e.  g-  yad-icchakar),  yad-idag  (under  11. 2  b; 
11.4  b.). 

II.  Meaning  :  "  which,"  in  correspondence  to  a 
following  demonstr.  pron.   (ta'') ;  whichever  (generaliz- 


ing) ;  nt.  what,  whatever.  In  immediate  comb"  with 
the  demonstr.  pron.  it  is  qualifying  and  specifying  the 
person,  thing  or  subject  in  discussion  or  question  (see 
below  4). 

1.  Regular  use  as  correl.  pron.,  whfcn  ya"  (-t-noun)  is 
followed  by  ta°  ( -I-  noun).  Sometimes  (in  poetry)  the 
reverse  is  the  case,  e.  g.  at  It  84  where  ta"  (m.  sa)  is 
elUptically  omitted  :  atthar)  na  janati  yarj  lobho  sahate 
narar)  "  he  does  not  know  good,  whom  greed  overcomes." 
—  Otherwise  regular,  e.  g.  :  yassa  jataruparajatag 
kappati  panca  pi  tassa  kamaguria  kappanti  S  iv.326. 
In  a  generalizing  sense  (cp.  below  11. 3):  yo  va  so  va 
"  der  erste  beste,"  some  or  other,  v/hoever,  any  J  iv.38  ; 
v.  362  ;  yar)  va  tar)  va  karotu  let  her  do  whatever  she 
likes  VvA  208  ;  yasmig  va  tasmig  va  on  every  occasion 
S  1. 160  na  yo  va  so  va  yakkho  not  this  or  that  yakkha 
i.  e.  not  any  (ordinary)  kind  of  Yakkha  (but  Inda) 
DA  1.264.  —  The  same  use  (ordinary  correlative)  applies 
to  the  nt.  forms  yag  &  yad  in  correl.  to  tag  and  tad. 
(See  Sep.  under  II.  2.) 

2.  Use  of  nt.  forms.  —  (a)  nt.  yag   (a)  as  pronoun : 

5  III. 44  (yag  dukkhag  .  .  .  tad  anatta) ;  It  78  (yaii 
c'  afinag  whatever  else) ;  VbhA  54  (yag  labbhati  yan 
ca  na  labbhati  tag  sabbag  pucchitva).  See  also  under 
3  a  (yag  kiiici,  yag  yag).  —  (b)  as  adj.  adv.  :  yag- 
mukha  facing  what,  turned  where  (?)  J  v. 475  (but  C. 
reads  &  expl*  sammukhal);  yag-vipaka  having  what 
or  which  kind  of  fruit  D  11.209.  yag  va  .  .  .  yag  va 
whether  ...  or  S  11. 1 79 ;  yag  no  .  .  .  na  tv'  eva 
neither  .  .  .  nor  S  11.179-180. — yag  with  pot.:  "so 
that,"  that  (corresp.  to  Lat.  ut  consecutivum)  S  ill. 4 1 
(yag  rupe  anatt'  anupassi  vihareyya).  J  v. 339  (n'  esa 
dhammo  yag  tag  jahe  that  I  should  leave  you).  — In 
the  function  of  other  conjunctions  e.  g.  as  lemporal  = 
when,  since,  after:  J  iv.319  (yag  mag  Suruci-m-anayi 
that,  or  since,  S.  married  me).  As  conditional  or  causal 
=  if,  even  if,  because:  Vin  1.276  (yag  te  sakka  .  .  . 
arogag  katug,  tag  karohi  if  it  is  possible  .  .  .  do  it ;  or 
may  be  taken  in  sense  of  "in  whatever  way  you  can 
do  it,  do");  J  iii.206  =  iv.4  (yag  me  sirasmig  lihacca 
cakkag  bhamati  matthake=  because ;  C:  yena  pa- 
pena).  —  (c)  as  adv.  deictive  "  so,"  in  comb"  with  var. 
other  (emphatic)  particles  as  e.  g.  (yag  nuna  used  in 
an  exhortative  sense  "  well,  now  "  ;  or  "  rather,  let  me  "  ; 
or  "  so  now,"  always  in  phrase  yag  nun'  clhag  "  now 
then  let  me  "  (do  this  or  that)  very  freq.,  either  with 
foil,  pot.,  e.  g.  "  y.  n.  Shag  araiiilag  paviseyyag  " 
DhA  if.91.  "  y.  n.  a.  katakammag  puccheyyag  " 
VvA  132  ;  dasseyyag  VvA  138  ;  pabbajjeyyag  M  n.55  ; 
aneyyag  DhA  1.46,  vihareyyag  ibid.  56;  etc.  cp.  J  1.14, 
'5°.  255;  III. 393  ;  DhA  1.91  ;  PvA  5  (avassayo  bha- 
veyyag).  — Similarly  yaii  hi  "  well  then,  now  then  " 
(with  Pot.)  S  II. 210,  221  (tag  vadeyya).  Cp.  yagghe. 
yafl  ca  &  yaii  ce  [Sk.  yac  ca,  or  cet.  ca  here  — ce  see  ca. 

6  cp.  sace  =  sa-l-ce]  (rather)  than  that:  yaS  ca  Th  2, 
80  :  J  1.2 10  ;  yaiice  (with  Pot.)S  1.176:  It  43;  Th  i,  666. 
sangame  me  matag  scyyo  yaii  ce  jive  parajito  (than 
that  I  live  vanquished)  Sn  440  (cp.  the  intricate  expl"- 
at  SnA  390);  similarly  J  iv.495  :  me  maranag  seyyo 
yaii  ce  jive  taya  vina.  —  (b)  nt.  yad :  (a)  as  pron    in 

v;t-i 


Yakkha 


regular  relative  use  e.  g.  S  111.44  (yad  aniccai)  tag 
dukkha^);  It  59  (yad  eva  diuhar)  tad  ev'  ahar) 
vadami).  (b)  as  adv.,  e.  g.  yad-agge  (loc.)  from  what 
on,  i.  8.  from  which  time,  since  what  time  D  1.152 
( ■=  mflladivasato  paffhaya  yai)  divasar)  aggai)  patva 
DA  1.311);  Vv  84»3  (  =  yato  pafthaya  VvA  344). 
Also  as  yad-aggena  (instr.)  Vin  11.257  (y.  Mahapa- 
japati-gotamiya  attha  garudhammS  pafiggahiti  tad 
eva  sa  upasampanna) ;  VbhA  387. — yad-atthai] 
for  what,  why  Th  2,  163.  yad-atthiya  as  much  as 
necessary,  as  required,  sufficient,  proper  Th  i,  12  ; 
1274  ("  which,  for  the  goal  desirous,  he  led  "  trsl.  ; 
refers  to  brahmacariyag).  The  same  verse  occurs 
at  Sn  354.  The  latter  passage  is  mentioned  in  P.D. 
under  atthiya  with  meaning  "  on  account  of  what  " 
(cp.  kim-atthiyag  S  in.  189).  The  Sn  passage  is  not 
expl""  in  SnA.  —  yad-icchakat)  whatever  is  pleasant, 
i.  e.  according  to  liking,  as  he  pleases  A  111.28  ;  Pug  11, 
12  ;  J  1. 141  (y.  bhutta  eaten  heartily) ;  Vism  154  (  +  ya- 
vadicchaka) ;  VvA  341.   Cp.  yen'  icchakag  below  II.  5. 

—  yad-icchita  see  under  yatha-icchita  1  —  yadidag  ;  see 
below  II.  4  b. 

3.  Generalizing  (or  distributive)  use  of  ya :  There  are 
two  modes  of  generalization,  viz.  (a)  fry  repeating  ya° : 
yassa  yass'  eva  salassa  mule  tittbasi.  so  so  muflcati 
pupphani ;  "  at  the  foot  of  whichever  tree  you  stand, 
he  (in  all  cases  concerned)  sheds  flowers  "  Vv  39' ;  yag 
yar)  hi  manaso  piyag  "  whatever  is  pleasant  to  the 
senses"  Pv  11. i^';  yag  yag  passati  tag  tag  pucchati 
"  whomsoever  he  sees,  him  he  asks  "  J  in.  155  ;  yassag 
yassag  disayag  viharati,  sakasmir)  yeva  vijite  viha- 
rati  "  in  whichever  region  he  lives,  he  lives  in  his  own 
realm  "  A  111.151  ;  yo  yo  yag  yag  icchati  tassa  tassa 
adasi  "  whatever  anybody  wished  he  gave  to  him  " 
PvA  113;  yag  yag  padesag  bhajati  tattha  tatth'  eva 
assa  labhasakkaro  nibbattati  "  whichever  region  he 
visits,  there  (in  each)  will  he  have  success  "  DhA  11.82. 

—  (b)  by  combination  with  ko-ci  (cp.  the  identical  Lat. 
qui-cun-que) ;  yassa  kassaci  rago  pahino  ayag  vuccati 
..."  the  lust  of  whosoever  is  abandoned  he  is  called 
so  &  so  "  It  56.  yani  kanici  vatthuni  .  .  .  sabbani 
tani  ...  It  19  ;  ye  keci  arabbha  "  with  ref.  to  who- 
soever "  PvA  17 ;  yag  kiiSci  whatever  Pv  1.4*. 

4.  Dependent  &•  ellipUc  use  of  ya  (with  p^on. 
demonstr. ).  This  represents  a  sort  of  deictic  (em- 
phatic) use,  with  ref.  to  what  is  coming  next  or  what 
forms  the  necessary  compliment  to  what  is  just  being 
said.  Thus  it  introduces  a  general  truth  or  definition, 
as  we  would  say  "  just  this,  namely,  i.  e,"  or  Ger.  "  so 
wie,  und  zwar."  —  (a)  The  usual  comb''^  are  those  of 
ya-(-sa  (nt.  tag)  and  of  ya  +  ayag  (nt.  idag),  but  such 
with  amu  (nt.  adug)  also  occur :  yag  adug  khettag 
aggag  evam  eva  mayhag  bhikkhu-bhikkhuniyo  "  as 
there  is  one  field  which  is  the  best,  thus  to  me  the  bh. 
&  bhikkhunis  "  S  iv.315.  Cp.  the  foil.:  ya-|-sa  e.  g. 
at  M.  1.366  (yo  so  puriso  pafhamag  rukkhag  arulho 
sace  so  na  khippam  eva  oroheyya  "  just  that  man,  who 
climbed  up  the  tree  first,  if  he  does  not  come  down 
very  quickly");  J  11.159  (yena  tena  upayena  with 
every  possible  means) ;  Pv  1.9'  (ya  ta  [so  read  for  ya  ca  I] 
"  just  she  over  there  ;  who  .is  such,  i.  e.  such  as  she  is  ") ; 
cp.  also  the  foil.  :  ya  si  sima  .  .  .  tag  simag  Vin  1. 109  ; 
ye  te  dhamma  adikalyaija  etc.  .  .  .  satthag  brahma- 
cariyag  abhivadanti  tatha  rupa  'ssa  dhamma  honti  .  .  . 
M  iil.ii;  yani  etani  yanani  (just)  these  DhA  iv.6. 
— ya  +  ayag  e.  g.  at  M  1.258  (yv'  ayag  vado  vedeyyo  tatra 
tatra  .  .  .  vipakag  patisagvedeti) ;  It  35  =  93  (nibba- 
penti  moh'aggig  pai5iiaya  yS  'yag  nibbedha-gamini : 
"as  it  is  also  penetrating,  which  as  such,  or  in  this 
quality,  or  as  we  know,  is  penetrating");  Vin  iv.  134 
(ye  'me  antarayika  dhamma  vutta  .  .  .  te  patisevato 
a'  alag  antarayaya  "  just  those  which,  or  whichever  "). 
Th  I,  124  (panko  ti  hi  nag  avedayug  yayag  vandana- 
pujana;  here  =  ya  ayag);  Dh  56  (appamatto  ayag 
gandho   j'Syag    tagara-candani ;    here=yo    ayag);    M 


11.220  (yag  idag  kammag  .  .  .  tag).  —  (b)  nt.  yad- 
idag  lit.  "  as  that,"  which  is  this  (i.  e.  the  following), 
may  be  translated  by  "  viz.,"  that  is,  "  i.  e."  in  other 
words,  so  to  speak,  just  this,  "  I  mean  "  ;  e.  g,  kama- 
nag  etag  nissaraijag  yad  idag  nekkhammag  "  there  is 
an  escape  from  the  lusts,  viz.  lustlessness  "  ;  or :  "  this 
is  the  abandoning  of  lusts,  in  other  words  lustlessness  " 
It  6i  ;  dve  danani  amisa°  dhamm",  etad  aggag  imesag 
yad  idag  dhamma"  "  this  is  the  best  of  them,  I  mean 
dh-d."  It  98=100;  supatipanno  savaka-sangho,  y.  i. 
cattari  purisa-yugani  etc.  M  1.37.  Instead  of  yadidag 
we  also  find  yavafi  c'  idag.  See  also  examples  given 
under  yavata. 

5.  Cases  used  adverbially :  Either  locally  or  modally; 
with  regards  to  the  local  adverbs  it  is  to  be  remarked 
that  their  connotation  is  fluctuating,  inasmuch  as 
direction  and  place  (where)  are  not  adways  distinguished 
(cp.  E.  where  both  meanings  =  where  &  where-to),  but 
must  be  guessed  from  the  context,  (a)  instr.  yena  :  (local) 
where  (i.  e.  at  which  place)  D  i.  7 1  (yena  yena  wherever), 
220  (yattha  yena  yahig=  whence,  where,  whither;  not 
with  trsl"  Dial.  I.  281 :  where,  why,  whence!),  238  (id.) ; 
yenatena  where  (he  was) — there  (he  went)  D  1.88,  106, 
112  &  passim;  cp.  D  11. 85  (yena  dvasath'  dgarag  ten' 
upasankami) ;  A  11.33  (yena  va  tena  va  here  &  there  or 
"hither  &  thither  ").  — (modal)  Dh  326  (yen'  icchakag 
II.  2  b,);  Pv  1. 11'  (kig  akattha  papag  yena  pivatha 
lohitag  ;  so  that). — loc.  yahig  where  (or  whither)  Vv  84'" 
(yahig  yahig  gacchati  tahig  tahig  modati) ;  &  yasmig  : 
yasmig  va  tasmig  va  on  every  occasion  S  1.160.  —  abl. 
yasma  (only  modal)  because  A  1.260  ;  It  37  (corresp.  to 
tasma).     On  yasmj-t-iha  see  Geiger,  P.Gr.  73'. 

Takana  (nt.)  [fr.  gen.  yaknati  or  sec.  stem  yakan-  of  Vedic 
yakrt ;  cp.  Av.  yakars ;  Gr.  tiirap,  Lat.  jecur.  In  forma- 
tion cp.  P.  chakana  fr.  Ved.  §akrt.]  the  liver  Kh  iii. ; 
M  1.57,  421  ;  D  11.293;  A  v.  109;  Miln  26;  Vism  257, 
356  ;  VbhA  60,  240.  The  old  n-stem  is  to  be  seen  in  cpd. 
yaka-pela  (q.  v.). 

Yaka-pe)a  [see  peja]  the  lump  of  the  liver  Sn  195  (  =  ya- 
kana-piijda  SnA  247)=}  1. 146.  Dines  Andersen  siig 
gests :  "  Could  y-p.  possibly  be  an  old  error  for  saka- 
pela,  cp.  Sk.  Saka-piiDda  &  ^akrt-piv^^  i"'  ^P-  pataU 
(ref.  Vism  257). 

Ta-kara  [ya-t-kara]  i.  the  letter  (or  sound)  y:  J  1.430 
(padasandhikara) ;  in.  433  (vyanjana -sandhi-vasena 
gahita).  —  2.  the  letier  (or  syllable)  ya :  J  v.4i7 
(ttipata.-matta).  It  is  referred  to  at  Vin  IV.7  as  an 
ending  implying  ridiciling  or  insult,  together  with  the 
ending  °bha.  The  Cy.  means  words  like  dasiya, 
gumbiya,  baiya  etc.  where  -ya  either  denotes  descend- 
ency  or  property,  or  stands  for  -Jca  as  diminutive  (i.  e. 
(disparaging)  ending.  The  same  applies  to  °bha. 
Here  at  Vin  1V.7  this  way  of  calling  a  person  by  means 
of  adding  -ya-  or  -bha  to  his  name  (cp.  E.  -y  in  kid> 
kiddy  etc.)  is  grouped  with  a  series  of  other  terms  of 
insult  (hiiia  akkosa). 

Takkha  [Vedic  yak?a,  quick  ray  of  light,  but  also  "  ghost "; 
fr.  yakf  to  move  quickly ;  perhaps :  swift  creatures, 
changing  their  abode  quickly  and  at  will.  —  The  cus- 
tomary (popular)  etym.  of  Pali  Commentators  is  y.  as 
quasi  grd.  of  yaj,  to  sacrifice,  thus :  a  being  to  whom  a 
sacrifice  (of  expiation  or  propitiation)  is  given.  See 
e.  g.  VvA  224 :  yajanti  tattha  balig  upaharanti  ti 
yakkha ;  or  VvA  333  ;  pujaniya-bhavato  yakkho  ti 
vuccati.  —  The  term  yak^a  as  attendants  of  Kubera 
occurs  already  in  the  Upanishads.]  i.  name  of  certain 
non-human  beings,  as  spirits,  ogres,  dryads,  ghosts, 
spooks.  Their  usual  epithet  and  category  of  being  is 
amanussa,  i.  e.  not  a  human  being  (but  not  a  sublime 
god  either) ;  a  being  half  deified  and  of  great  power  as 
regards  influencing  people  (partly  helping,  partly 
hurting).     They    range    in    appearance    immediately 


Yakkha 


Yakkha 


above  the  Petas ;  many  "  successful  "  or  happy  Petas 
are  in  fact  Yakkhas  (see  also  below).  They  correspond 
to  our  "  genii  "  or  fairies  of  the  fairy-tales  and  show 
all  their  qualities.  In  many  respects  they  correspond 
to  the  Vedic  Piiacas,  though  different  in  many  others, 
and  of  diff.  origin.  Historically  they  are  remnants  of 
an  ancient  demonology  and  of  considerable  folkloristic 
interest,  as  in  them  old  animistic  beliefs  are  incor- 
porated and  as  they  represent  creatures  of  the  wilds  and 
forests,  some  of  them  based  on  ethnological  features. 
See  on  term  e.  g.  Dial.  in.i88;  on  their  history  and 
identity  Stede,  Gespenstergeschichten  des  Pela  Vatthu 
chap.  V.  ;  pp.  39-44.  —  They  are  sometimes  called 
devata :  S  1.205;  or  devaputta :  PvA  113.  139.  A 
female  Yakkha  is  called  yakkhini  (q.  v.). 

2.  Their  usual  capacity  is  one  of  kindness  to  men 
(op.  Ger.  Rubezahl).  They  are  also  interested  in  the 
spiritual  welfare  of  those  humans  with  whom  they 
come  into  contact,  and  are  something  like  "  tutelary 
genii "  or  even  "  angels "  (i.  e.  messengers  from 
another  world)  who  will  save  prospective  sinners  from 
doing  evil  (cp.  Pv  iv.  i ).  They  also  act  as  guides  in  the 
"  inferno  "  :  Pv  iv.  1 1,  cp.  IV.3.  A  somewhat  dangerous 
"  Mentor "  is  represented  at  D  1.95,  where  the  y. 
Vajirapani  threatens  to  slay  Ambaftha  with  an  iron 
hammer,  if  he  does  not  answer  the  Bhagava.  He  is 
represented  as  hovering  in  the  air ;  Bdhgh.  (DA  i.'264) 
says  on  this :  na  yo  va  so  va  yakkho.  Sakko  devaraja  ti 
vedjtabbo  ;  it  is  to  be  understood  not  as  this  or  that  y., 
but  as  Sakka  the  king  of  devas.  —  Whole  cities  stand 
under  the  protection  of,  or  are  inhabited  by  yakkhas ; 
D  n.  147  (akinija-yakkha  full  of  y.  ;  thus  Alakamanda 
may  here  mean  all  kinds  of  supra-mundane  beings),  cp. 
Lanka  (Ceylon)  as  inhabited  by  y.  :  Mhvs  7,  33.  —  Often, 
however,  they  are  cruel  and  dangerous.  The  female 
yakkhas  seem  on  the  whole  more  fearful  and  evil- 
natured  than  the  male  (see  under  yakkhini).  They  eat 
flesh  and  blood  :  J  iv.549  ;  devour  even  men  :  t)  11.346  ; 
J  11.15-17,  or  corpses:  J  1.265;  mentioned  under  the 
5  adinava  (dangers)  at  A  111.256.  A  yakkha  wants  to 
kill  Sariputta  :  Ud  4. 

3.  Var.  classes  of  y.  are  enum'"  at  D  11.256,  257  ;  in  a 
progressive  order  they  rank  between  manussa  and 
gandhabba  at  A  n.38  ;  they  are  mentioned  with  devas, 
rakkhasas,  danavas,  gandhabbas,  kinnaras  and  mah'- 
oragas  at  J  v.  420.  According  to  VvA  333  Sakka,  the 
4  great  kings  (lokapala),  the  followers  of  Vessavana 
(alias  Yama,  the  yakkhas  proper)  and  men  (see  below 
7)  go  by  the  name  of  yakkha.  —  Sakka,  the  king  of  the 
devas,  is  often  named  yakkha:  J  iv.4 ;  DA  1.264. 
Some  are  spirits  of  trees  (rukkha-devata) :  J  in. 309 
345  ;  Pv  1.9  ;  11.9  ;  PvA  5  ;  are  also  called  bhumma-deva 
(earthly  deities)  PvA  45,  55.  Their  cult  seems  to 
originate  primarily  from  the  woods  (thus  in  trees : 
Pv  II. 9;  IV.3),  and  secondarily  from  the  legends  of 
sea-faring  merchants  (cp.  the  story  of  the  flying- 
Dutchman).  To  the  latter  origin  point  the  original 
descriptions  of  a  Vimana  or  fairy-palace,  which  is  due 
to  a  sort  of  mirage.  These  are  usually  found  in  or  at 
the  sea,  or  in  the  neighbourhood  of  silent  lakes,  where 
the  sense  of  hauntedness  has  given  rise  to  the  fear  of 
demons  or  supernatural  witchcraft.  Cp.  the  entrances 
to  a  Vimana  by  means  of  a  dried-up  river  bed  (Pv  1.9  ; 
II.  12)  and  the  many  descriptions  of  the  VimSnas  in  the 
Lake-districts  of  the  Himavant  in  Vv.  (See  Stede, 
Peta   Vatthu  trsl"  p.  104  sq.) 

4.  Their  names  too  give  us  a  clue  as  to  their  origin 
and  function.  These  are  taken  from  (a)  their  bodily 
appearance,  which  possesses  many  of  the  attributes  of 
Petas,  e.  g.  Khara  "  Rough-skin  "  or  "  Shaggy  "  Sn 
p.  48  ( =  khara-samphassar)  cammai)  SnA  302),  also  as 
Khara-loma  "  Rough-hair  "  Vism  208  ;  Khara-da^hika 
"Rough-tooth"  J  131.  Citta  "Speckled"  Mhvs  9. 
22;  10,  4;  also  as  Citta-raja  J  "  372  ;  Mhvs  10,  84. 
Silesa-loma  "  Sticky-hair  "  J  1.273.     Siici-loma  "  Needle- 


hair  "  Sn  p.  47,  48  ;  S  1.207 ;  Vism  208  ;  SnA  302.  — (b) 
places  of  inhabitance,  attributes  of  their  realm,  animals 
and  plants,  e.  g.  Ajakalapaka  "Goat-bundle"  Ud  i. 
Ajavaka  "Forest-dweller"  J  iv.  180;  vi.329;  Mhvs 
30,  84:  Vism  208.  Uppala  "Lotus"  DhA  iv.209. 
Kakudha  "  K.-tree "  (Terminalia  arjuna)  S  154. 
Kumbhira  "Crocodile"  J  vi.272.  Gumbiya  either 
"  One  of  a  troop  "  (soldier  of  Yama)  or  "  Thicket-er  " 
(fr.  gumba  thicket)  J  in. 200,  201.  Disamukha  "  Sky- 
facer  "  DhA  IV.209.  Yamamoli  "  Yamachignon  " 
DhA  IV. 208.  Vajira  "Thunderbolt"  DhA  iv.209; 
alias  Vajira-pani  D  1.95,  or  Vajira-bahu  DhA  iv.209. 
Satagira  "  Pleasant-mount  "  D  11.256  ;  Sn  153  ;  J  iv.314  ; 
VI. 440.  Serisaka  "Acacia-dweller"  VvA  341  (the 
messenger  of  Vessavana).  — •  (c)  qualities  of  character, 
e.  g.  Adhamma  "  Unrighteous  "  Miln  202  (formerly 
Devadatta).  Katattha  "  Well-wisher  "  DhA  iv.209. 
Dhamma  "Righteous"  Miln  202  (=  Bodhisatta). 
Punnaka  "  Full(-moon  ?)  "  J  vi.255  sq.  (a  leader  of 
soldiers,  nephew  of  Vessavana).  Mara  the  "  Tempter  " 
Sn  449;  S  1. 122;  M  1338.  Sakata  "  Waggon4oad  " 
(of  riches)  DhA  iv.209 — (d)  embodiments  of  former 
persons,  e.  g.  Janavasabha  "  Lord  of  men  "  D  11.205. 
Digha  M  1.2 10.  Naradeva  J  vi.383,  387.  Pandaka 
"  Eunuch  "  Mhvs  12,  2t.  Sivaka  S  i.24i=Vin  11.156. 
Seri  "  Self-willed"  S  1.57.  —  Cp.  the  similar  names  of 
yakkhinls. 

5.  They  stand  in  a  close  relationship  to  and  under  the 
authority  of  Vessavana  (Kuvera),  one  of  the  4  loka- 
palas.  They  are  often  the  direct  servants  (messengers) 
of  Yama  himself,  the  Lord  of  the  Underworld  (and  the 
Peta-realm  especially).  Cp.  D  11.257;  111.194  sq.  ; 
J  IV. 492  (yakkhini  fetches  water  for  Vessavana); 
VI. 255  sq.  (Punnaka.  the  nephew  of  V.);  VvA  341 
(Serisaka,  his  messenger).  In  relation  to  Yama :  dve 
yakkha  Yamassa  duta  Vv  52' ;  cp.  Np.  Yamamoli 
DhA  IV.  208.  —  In  harmony  with  tradition  they  share 
the  role  of  their  master  Kuyera  as  lord  of  riches  (cp.  ' 
Pv  II. 9")  and  are  the  keepers  (and  liberal  spenders)  of 
underground  riches,  hidden  treasures  etc..  with  which 
they  delight  men  :  see  e.  g.  the  frame  story  to  Pv  11. 1 1 
(PvA  145).  and  to  iv,i2  (PvA  274).  They  enjoy 
every  kind  of  splendour  &  enjoyment,  hence  their 
attribute  kama-kamin  Pv  1.3*.  Hence  they  possess 
supernatural  powers,  can  transfer  themselves  to  any 
place  with  their  palaces  and  work  miracles ;  a  frequent 
attribute  of  theirs  is  mah'  iddhlka  (Pv  11.9'°  ;  J  vi.  118). 
Their  appearance  is  splendid,  as  a  result  of  former 
merit:  cp.  Pv  1.2  ;  1.9;  ii.ii  ;  IV.3".  At  the  same  time 
they  are  possessed  of  odd  qualities  (as  result  of  former 
demerit) ;  they  are  shy,  and  afraid  of  palmyra  leaf 
&  iron  :  J  iv.492  ;  their  eyes  are  red  &  do  not  wink  : 
J  V.  34  ;  VI. 336,  337.  — •  Their  abode  is  their  self-created 
palace  (Vimana),  which  is  anywhere  in  the  air,  or  in 
trees  etc.  (see  under  vimana).  Sometimes  we  find  a 
communion  of  yakkhas  grouped  in  a  town,  e.  g.  Ala- 
kamanda D  II.  147:  Sirisa-vatthu  (in  Ceylon)  Mhvs.  7. 

32- 

6.  Their  essential  human  character  is  evident  also 
from  their  attitude  towards  the  "  Dhamma."  In  this 
respect  many  of  them  are  "  fallen  angels  "  and  take 
up  the  word  of  the  Buddha,  thus  being  converted  and 
able  to  rise  to  a  higher  sphere  of  existence  in  sar)sara. 
Cp.  D  III. 194,  195;  J  1117:  VvA  333:  Pv  iiS'"  (where 
"  yakkha  "  is  expl''  by  Dhpala  as  "  pet-attabhSvato 
cuto  (so  read  for  mato  I)  yakkho  atar)  jito  dev-atta- 
bhavar)  patto  "  PvA  no);  SnA  301  (both  Suciloma  & 
Khara  converted).  —  See  in  general  also  the  foil, 
passages:  Sn  153,  179.  273,  449;  S  1,206-15;  A  1. 160; 
Vism  366  (in  simile) ;  Miln  23. 

7.  Exceptionally  the  term  "  yakkha  "  is  used  as  a 
philosophical  term  denoting  the  "  individual  soul " 
[cp.  similar  Vedic  meaning  "  das  lebendige  Ding " 
(BR.)  at  several  AV.  passages]  ;  hence  probably  the  old 
phrase :     ettavata    yakkhassa    suddhi    (purification    of 


Yakkhatta 


Yanna 


heart)  Sn  478.  quoted  VvA  333  (ettavaf  aggai) 
no  vadanti  h'  eke  yakkhassa  sudhir)  idha  panditase). 
Sn  875  (cp.  Nd'  282  :  yakkha=satta,  nara,  puggala, 
manussa). 

-Anubhava  the  potency  o£  a  yakkha  J  1.240.  -avit- 
tha  possessed  by  a  y.  J  vi.586.  -iddhi  (yakkh°)  magic 
power  of  a  y.  PvA  117,  241.  -gana  the  multitude 
of  ys.  J  VI. 287.  -gaha=  following  DhA  111.362.  -gaha 
"  yakkha-grip,"  being  seized  by  a  y.  S  1.208;  PvA  144- 
-{thana  the  dwelling-place  of  a  y.  -dasi  "  a  female 
temple  slave,"  or  perhaps  "possessed  by  a  demon" 
(?)  J  VI  501  (v.  1.  BB  devata-pavittha  cp.  p.  586  : 
yakkh'  avitfha.)  -nagara  city  of  ys.  J  11. 127  (  =  Siri- 
savatthu);  cp.  pisaca-nagara.  -pura  id.  Mhvs.  7.32. 
-bbavana  the  realm  or  abode  of  the  y.  Nd'  448.  -bhuta 
a  yakkha-being,  a  ghost  Pv  111.5^  (  =  pisaca-bhuta  va 
yakkha-bh.  va  PvA  198);  iv.i^*.  -niahiddhi=°iddhi ; 
Pv  IV.  I**,  -yoni  the  y. -world,  realm  of  the  y.  SnA  301. 
-samagama  meeting  of  the  y.  PvA  55  (where  also 
devaputta  join),  -sukara  a  y.  in  the  form  of  a  pig 
VbhA  494.  -sena  army  of  ys.  D  in.  194;  SnA  209. 
-senapatt  chief-commander  of  the  yakkha-army  J 
IV. 478  ;  SnA  197. 

Yakkhatta  (nt. )  [fr.  yakkha]  condition  of  a  higher  demon 
or  yakkha  D  11.57  :  A  11.39  ;  PvA  117. 

Takkhinl  (f)  [fr.  yakkha,  perhaps  corresponding  directly 
to  Vedic  yak$ini,  f.  of  yaksinl  adj.  persecuting,  taking 
vengeance,  appl""  to  Varuna  at  RV.  vii.88*]  a  female 
yakkha,  a  vampire.  Their  character  is  usually  fierce 
&  full  of  spite  &  vengeance,  addicted  to  man-  &  beast- 
murder  (cp.  yakkha  2).  They  are  very  much  like 
Petis  in  habits.  With  their  names  cp.  those  of  the 
yakkhas,  as  enum''  under  yakkha  4. — Vin  in. 37; 
IV.  20  (where  sexual  intercourse  with  y.  is  forbidden  to 
the  bhikkhus) ;  S  1.209  (Piyankara-mata) ;  J  1.240  (as 
a  goat),  395  sq.  ;  11. 127;  111.511;  v.21  (eating  a  baby), 
209  (eaten  by  a  y.) ;  V1.336  (desirous  of  eating  a  child) ; 
Vism  121  (singing),  382  (four:  Piyankara-mata,  Uttara- 
mata,  Phussa-mitta,  Dhammagutta),  665  (in  simile) ; 
Mhvs  7,  II  (Kuvanna,  i.  e.  bad-coloured);  10,  53 
(Cetiya);  12,  21  (Harita  "Charming"  or  fr.  harita 
"  green  "  (?)) ;  DhA  1.47  ;  11.35,  36  (a  y.  in  the  form  af  a 
cow,  eating  4  people  in  successive  births).  Note.  A 
by-form  of  yakkhini  is  yakkhi. 

-bhava  the  state  of  being  a  yakkhini  J  1.240;  n.128 
(yakkhini"). 

Yakkhi  (f . )  [direct  formation  fr.  yakkha,  like  peti  fr.  peta  ; 
form  older  than  yakkhini  (?)]  =  yakkhini  S  i.ii;  Vin 
III.  121  ;  IV.20  ;  J  IV.492  ;  Mhvs  7,  26. 

Yagghe  (fndecl.)  [similar  in  formation  &  meaning  to 
tagghe  (q.  v.).  It  is  yar)  (yad)-(-gha,  the  latter  in  a 
Magadhised  form  ghe,  whereas  taggha  (  =  tad-|-gha) 
only  occurs  as  such]  hortative  part,  used  in  addressing 
a  (superior)  person  in  the  voc,  followed  by  Pot.  of 
janati,  either  2"'"  janeyyasi,  or  3"^  sg.  janeyya;  to  be 
trsli*  somewhat  like  "  look  here,  don't  you  know," 
surely,  you  ought  to  know ;  now  then ;  similarly  to 
part,  yar)  nu,  yag  ntina  &  yag  hi.  The  part,  is  found 
in  the  language  of  the  Nikayas  only,  thus  indicating 
part  of  the  oldest  &  original  dialect.  E.  g.  :  y.  bhante 
janeyyasi  Vin  1.237;  yagghe  deva  janeyyasi  yo  te 
puriso  daso  .  .  .  so  .  .  .  pabbajito  do  you  know.  Oh 
king  D  1.60  (trsl.  :  "  if  it  please  your  majesty,  do  you 
know  .  .  ."  ;  DA  1. 169  expl*  as  "  codan'  at  the  nipato  ") ; 
y.  ayye  janeyyasi  M  11.62  ;  maharaja  j.  M  11.71  ;  id. 
S  i.ioi;  y.  bhavar)  janeyya  S  i.i8o.  —  The  passage 
M  II.  1 57  is  somewhat  doubtful  where  we  find  y.  with 
the  ind.  and  in  var.  forms  (see  v.  1. )  of  yagghi  &  taggha  ; 
"  jananti  pana  bhonto  yagghe  .  .  .,"  with  reply  "  na 
janama  yagghe  .  .  ."  Perhaps  the  reading  taggha 
would  be  preferable. 


Yajati    [yaj,    cp.    Vedic   yajati,    yajus,    Yajur-veda.     To 

Av.  ya*aite  to  sacrifice,  Gr.  ii^ofiai  to  revere,  worship. 
On  etym.  cp.  also  Walde,  Lat.  Wtb.  s.  v.  aestimo.  — The 
Dhtp  (62)  defines  root  by  "  deva-pflja,  sangati-karaija, 
danesu,"  i.  e.  "  said  of  deva-worship,  of  assembling, 
and  of  gifts."  Similarly  Dhtm  79]  to  sacrifice,  to  make 
an  offering  (yafiiiar)) ;  to  give  alms  or  gifts  —  In  the 
P.  literature  it  refers  (with  yaiifia,  sacrifice)  either 
(when  critical)  to  the  Brahmanic  rites  of  sacrificing  to 
the  gods  according  to  the  rules  initiated  in  the  Vedas 
&  Vedic  literature ;  or  (when  dogmatical)  to  the  giving 
of  alms  to  the  bhikkhu.  In  the  latter  sense  it  implies 
liberal  donation  of  all  the  necessities  of  a  bhikkhu  (see 
enum''  under  yafina).  The  latter  use  is  by  far  the 
more  frequent.  —  The  construction  is  with  the  ace.  of 
the  deity  honoured  and  the  instr.  of  the  gift.  —  Pres. 
yajati  D  1.139;  A  1.168;  11.43,  44;  Sn  505,  509;  DA 
1. 160.  — ppr.  yajanto  D  152  ;  M  1404;  Miln  21  ;  gen. 
pi.  yajatat)  Sn  569  (  =  Vin  1.246,  where  reading  is 
jayatar)). — ppr.  med.  yajamana  D  1. 138  (maha- 
yanfiar));  Sn  506;  S  1233;  J  vi.502,  505. — imper. 
3"*  sg.  yajatu  DA  1.297:  med.  yajatat)  D  1.138  (  =  detu 
bhavai)  DA  1.300).  2°<>  sg.  yajahi  J  111.519 ;  PvA  280, 
and  perhaps  at  Pv  11.  i'  (for  T.  yahi) .  2"^  med.  yajassu 
Sn  302,  506;  J  v. 488  (yafinarj),  490  (id.)  —  Pot.  i«  sg. 
yajeyyag  D  1134;  3"*  pl-  yajeyyug  J  vi.211,  215; 
3"*  sg.  med.  yajetha  Dh  106  (mase  mase  sahassena  yo 
y.  =  danag  dadeyya  DhA  11. 231),   108;  It  98  ;  A  11.43; 


Sn    463.  —  Put.    2° 


sg- 


yajissasi    J    111.5 15  ;    i^'   sg. 


yajissami  J  vi.527  (pantha-sakunar)  tuyhar)  marjsena) ; 
3""  pi.  yajissanti  J  iv.:84  ;  !"■'  pi.  yajissama  J  vi.132.  — 
aor.  i«  sg.  yajir)  Th  i,  341  ;  3"'  sg.  ayaji  It  102  ;  yaji 
Miln  219,  221. — inf.  yajitur)  Miln  220;  yitthug  D 
1. 138  (yitthu-kama  wishing  to  sacrifice),  and  yatthug 
in  "kama  D  11.244;  Sn  461.  —  ger.  yajitva  D  1143; 
A  11.44;  Sn  509;  J  VI. 137  (puttehi),  202;  Pv  iLg"" 
(datva-l-,  i.  e.  spending  liberally;  cp.  PvA  136);  yaji- 
tvana  Sn  303,  979. — grd.  yajitabba  J  vi.  133  (sabba- 
catukkena). — pp.  yajita  &  yittha. — Cans.  I.  yajeti; 
Cans.  II.  yajapeti  (q.  v.). 

Yajana  (nt.)  [late  formation  fr.  yaj,  yajati,  for  the  earlier 
yanna]  the  act  of  sacrificing  J  111.518  ;  vi.133  ;  Cp.  I.  7'; 
Vism  224  ;  PvA  135. 

Yajanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  yajana]  one  who  sacrifices  J  vi.133. 

Yajapeti  [Cans.  II.  of  yajati]  to  cause  a  sacrifice  to  be 
held  A  1. 168  (yajati -t-). 

Yajita  [pp.  of  yajati]  sacrificed  Miln  219;  J  iv.i9. 

Yajnbbeda  [fr.  Vedic  yajus  the  sacrificial  formula,  +  veda] 
the  Yajurveda,  the  2"'*  of  the  Vedas,  dealing  with 
sacrifice  Miln  178;  DA  1.247;  SnA  447.  As  yajuveda 
at  Dpvs  v.  62.  where  the  3  Vedas  are  enura'^  as  iruveda, 
yaju"  and  sama°. 

Yaflna  [Vedic  yajna,  fr.  yaj :  see  yajati.  The  metric 
reading  in  the  Veda  is  sometimes  yajana,  which  we  are 
inclined  to  look  upon  as  not  being  the  source  of  the 
P.  yajana]  i.  a  brahmanic  sacrifice. — 2.  almsgiving, 
charity,  a  gift  to  the  Sangha  or  a  bhikkhu.  The 
brahmanic  ritual  of  Vedic  times  has  been  given  a 
changed  and  deeper  meaning.  Buddhism  has  discarded 
the  outward  and  cruel  form  and  has  widened  its  sphere 
by  changing  its  participant,  its  object  as  well  as  the 
means  and  ways  of  "  offering,"  so  that  the  yaniia  now 
consists  entirely  in  a  worthy  application  of  a  worthy 
gift  to  a  worthy  applicant.  Thus  the  direct  and  as  it 
were  self-understood  definition  of  yafina  is  at  Nd^  523 
given  with  "  yaniio  vuccati  deyyadhammo, "  and  as 
this  the  14  constituents  of  the  latter  are  enum*;  con- 
sisting of  the  4  paccayas,  and  of  anna,  pana,  vattha. 
yina.  mala,  gandha,  vilepana,  seyya,  avasatha,  padi- 
peyya.     Cp.  Nd*  373.  —  The  term  parikkhara,  which 


Yanna 


Yato 


refers  to  the  requisites  of  the  bhikkhu  as  well  (see  DA 
1.204-207),  is  also  used  in  the  meaning  of  "  accessory- 
instrument  "  concerning  the  brahmanic  sacrifice:  see 
D  1. 129  sq.,  137  sq.  They  are  there  given  as  16  parik- 
kharas,  as  follows :  (4)  cattaro  anumati-pakkha  viz. 
the  4  groups  khattiyas,  ministers,  brahmans  and 
householders,  as  colleagues  by  consent ;  (8)  atthangani 
of  a  king-sacrificer  ;  (4)  cattar'  angani  of  a  purohita.  — 
The  terra  mahayaiifia  refers  to  the  brahmanic  ritual 
(so  at  M  11. 204  ;  DhsA  145,  cp.  Expositor  193);  its 
equivalent  in  Buddhist  literature  is  mahadana.  for 
which  yanna  is  also  used  at  Pv  11.9^°  (cp.  PvA  134).  — 
The  Jatakas  are  full  of  passages  referring  to  the  in- 
effectiveness and  cruelty  of  the  Brahmanic  sacrifice, 
e.  g.  J  III. 518  sq.  ;  vi.211  sq.,  &  cp.  Fick,  Sociale  Cliede- 
rung,  p.  146  sq.  One  special  kind  of  sacrifice  is  the 
sabba-catukkayaiitia  or  the  sacrifice  of  tetrads,  where 
four  of  each  kind  of  gifts,  as  elephants,  horses,  bulls, 
and  even  men  were  offered  :  J  1335  ;  111.44.  45  ;  PvA 
280.  The  number  4  here  has  the  meaning  of  evenness, 
completeness,  or  harmony,  as  we  find  it  freq.,  in  the 
notion  of  the  square  with  ref.  to  Vimanas  &  lotus  ponds 
(in  J.,  Vv  &  Pv  etc.)  ;  often  also  implying  awfulness  cS: 
magic,  as  attached  e.  g.  to  cross-roads.  Cp.  the  Ep. 
of  niraya  (Purgatory)  "  catu-dvara  "  (esp.  at  Pv  i.io). 
See  cpds.  of  catur.  —  It  may  also  refer  to  the  4  quarters 
of  the  sky.  as  belonging  to  the  4  Guardians  of  the  World 
(lokapala)  who  were  specially  worth  offering  to,  as 
their  influence  was  demonic  (cp.  Pv  1.4). 

The  prevailing  meaning  of  yaiina  in  the  Sutta- 
pitaka  is  that  of  "  gift,  oblation  to  the  bhikkhu,  alms- 
giving." Cp.  Sn  295,  461,  484,  1043.  At  Vv  34^' the 
epithets  "  su-dinna,  su-huta,  su-yittha  "  are  attributed 
to  dana.  —  The  3  constituents  which  occur  under  dana 
&  deyyadhamma  as  the  gift,  the  giver  and  the  recipient 
of  the  gift  (i.  e.  the  Sangha :  cp.  opening  stanza  Pv  i') 
are  similarly  enura''  under  yaiifia  (or  yaiinapatha)  as 
"  ye  yafiaai)  (viz.  civarar)  etc.)  esanti  "  those  who  wish 
for  a  gift,  "  ye  yaiifiai)  abhisankharonti  "  those  who  get 
it  ready,  and  "  ye  yafiiiar)  denti  "  those  who  give  it,  at 
Nd*  70  (under  appamatta).  Similarly  we  find  the 
threefold  division  of  "  yafiiia  "  (  =  civara  etc.),  "  yaiifla- 
yajaka  "  (  =  khattiya,  brahmana  etc..  including  all 
8  classes  of  men  :  see  Nd*  p.  129  s.  v.  khattiya,  quoted 
under  jana''),  and  "  dakkhineyya  "  (the  recipient  of  the 
gift,  viz.  samana-brahmana,  kapan'addhika  vanib- 
baka,  yacaka)  at  Nd^  449*'  (under  puthu). — Cp.  the 
foil,  (mixed)  passages:  D  1.97,  128-144  (brahmanic 
criticised):  11.353,  354  (profitable  and  unprofitable, 
criticised);  M  182  (brahm.);  S  1.76,  160;  11.42  sq.,  63, 
207;  III. 337 :  IV. 41  ;  A  1. 166;  11.43  (nirarambhar) 
yaBflari  upasankamanti  arahanto,  cp.  DhsA  145) ;  Sn 
308  (brahm.).  568  (aggihutta-mukha  yafina :  the 
sacrifices  to  Agni  are  the  best;  brahm.);  Th  i,  341  ; 
J  '-83,  343:  111-517  (°i)  yajati ;  brahm^) ;  iv.66 ;  v.491. 
492;  VI.  200  (yaiifia-karaka-brahmaija),  211  sq.  ;  DA 
1.267  :  DhA  11.6. 

-&gara  a  hall  for  sacrifices  Pug  56  ( =  yafifia-sala 
PugA  233).  -ava^a  the  sacrificial  pit  D  1.142,  148; 
J  i-SSS  :  '11-45.  517:  VI. 215  (where  reading  yaiiiiavata, 
cp.  yaiifiavataka  at  Cp.  17*).  It  has  been  suggested 
by  Kern,  Toev,  s.  v.,  and  it  seems  more  to  the  sense, 
to  read  yaflfla-vata  for  yanfl'  avata,  i.  e.  enclosed  place 
for  sacrifice.  Thus  at  all  passages  for  "avata.  -kala 
a  suitable  (or  the  proper)  time  for  sacrifice  D  1.137; 
Sn  458,  482;  DA  1.297.  -upanita  one  who  has  been 
brought  to  the  sacrifice  S  1. 168  (trsl.  KS.  211  not  quite 
to  the  point:  "the  oblation  is  brought."  Reading  is 
ancertain ;  v.  1.  °opanita  which  may  be  read  as  opavita 
"wearing  the  sacrificial  cord":  see  foil.),  -opavita 
(?)  [see  upavita]  in  phrase  yaflft'  opavita-kantha  "  having 
the  (sacrificial,  i.  e. )  alms-cord  wound  round  their 
necks  "  SnA  92  (v.  1.  BB  yafifl-opacita-kamma).  Cp. 
yaiSfla-suttaka.  -patha  [cp.  patha*]  (way  of)  sacri- 
ficing, sacrifice  Sn  1045  ;  Nd'  524  (yaflflo  y'  eva  vnccati 


yanna-patho) ;  J  vi.212,  215.  -vanna  praise  of  sacrifice 
J  VI.  200.  -vidhana  the  arrangement  or  celebration  of 
a  sacrifice  J  vi.202.  -sampada  success  of  the  sacrifice 
D  1.128  sq.  (in  its  threefold  mode),  134,  143,  144;  Sn 
505.  509.  -samin  lord  or  giver  of  a  sacrifice  D  1.143. 
-suttaka  "  sacrificial  string,"  i.  e.  alms-cord  (the  sign 
of  a  mendicant)  DhA  n.59.     Cp.  above:  "opavita. 

Tanfiata  (f  )  [abstr.  fr.  yaiina]  "  sacrificiality, "  the  function 
or  ceremony  of  a  sacrifice  J  vi.202  (  =  yani^a-vidh5na 
C). 

Tattbi  (f)  [cp.  Vedic  yasti.     Another  Pali  form  is  latthi] 

1.  a  staff,  stick,  pole  M  111133  (tomara°  goad);  S  1.115 
(pacana°  driving  stick,  goad);  Miln  2;  DhA  111.140 
(kattara°  a  mendicant's  staff);  PvA  241;  VbhA  241 
(yantacakka°) ;  Mhvs  11,   10  (velu"  a  bamboo  pole).  — 

2.  a  stem,  stalk  (of  a  plant),  cane  in  ucchu"  sugar- 
stick,  sugar-cane  DhA  111315  (  =  ucchu-khan(Jika  at 
Vv  33*°);  IV.  199. — 3.  a  measure  of  length  (=7  ra- 
tanas)  VbhA  343. 

-koti  the  end  of  the  stick  or  staff  DhA  1.15.  -ma- 
dhuka  ("  cane-sweetness  ")  liquorice  Mhvs  32,  46. 
-luddaka  "  stick-hunter  "  at  J  iv.392  means  a  hunter 
with  a  lasso. 

Yata  [pp.  of  yam]  held,  checked,  controlled,  restrained, 
careful  S  11. 15,  50  ;  Sn  78,  220,  1079  (  =  }'atta,  patiyatta. 
gutta  etc,  Nd'  525) ;  J  vi.294  (C.  appamatta ;  Kern, 
Toev.  s.  V.  proposes  reading  yatta  for  yata  Vism  201 
(?).  Esp.  in  two  phrases:  yat-atta  (yata-f  attan)  self- 
controlled,  one  whose  heart  is  kept  down  D  1.57  (cp. 
Dial.  1.75);  Sn  216,  490,  723;  DA  1.168.  — yata-carin 
living  in  self-restraint,  living  or  behaving  carefully 
Sn  971  (  =  yatta  pafiyatta  gutta  etc.  Nd'  498);  Miln 
300  ( -)- samahita'-citta,  where  Kern.  Toev.  s.  v.  proposes 
to  read  yatta-carin  for  yata°).  A  similar  passage  at 
Th  I,  981  reads  yathi-carin  (q.  v.  for  further  expl»).  — 
Cp.  saQyata  &  see  also  yatta. 

Yatati'  [yat,  given  by  Dhtp  121  in  meaning  "  yatana,"  by 
Dhtm  175  as  "  patiyatana  "]  to  exert  oneself,  strive, 
endeavour,  to  be  cautious  or  careful ;  ppr.  yatai)  It  120 
(care,  tifthe,  acche  etc.  ;  SeidenstQcker  trsl*  "  gezu- 
gelt,"  thus  taking  it  in  meaning  of  yata).  —  pp.  yatta. 

Yatati'  [unidentified,  perhaps  as  expl"  of  yati  ?]  is  given 
in  meaning  of  "  lead  out  "  (?)  at  Dhtp  580  ("  niyyS- 
tane")  and  Dhtm  813  (id.). 

Yatana  (nt.)  [fr.  yat,  cp.  Epic  Sk.  yatna]  endeavour,  under- 
taking J  v. 346  (C.  expl"  samosarana-tthSna  ?) ;  Dhtp 
121  (in  expl»  of  yatati*). 

Yati  [fr.  yam,  cp.  Vedic  yati  leader,  guide]  a  Buddhist 
monk  Mhvs  5,  37  (racchagatar)  yatirj) ;  25,  4  ;  30,  26 
(mattika-dayakar)  yatig) ;  32,  32  (khiijasaveissa  yatino) ; 
Davs  IV. 33  (yati);  Vism  79  (vikampeti  Marassa  hada- 
yai)  yati) ;  PvA  287  (instr.  muni-vara-yatina). 

Yato  (adv.)  [the  abl.  case  of  ya°,  used  as  conjunction, 
Cp.  Vedic  yatalj  wherefrom,  by  which,  out  of  which] 
1.  (local)  from  where  D  i  340  (uggacchanti  candima 
-suriya  ;  opp.  yattha  where).  —  2.  (temporal)  whence, 
since,  when,  from  which  time  VvA  344  (yato  pat- 
thSya).  —  3.  (modal)  from  which,  out  of  what  cause, 
because,  in  as  far  as  D  1.36  sq.  (yato  .  .  .  ettivata 
because  .  .  .  therefore):  Sn  p.  113  (id.)  Dh  374,  390 
(doubled  =  from  whichever  source).  —  Freq.  in  two 
comb"  :  yatrftdhi-karanai)  (yato-t-adhikaraijar))  be- 
cause (lit.  by  reason  of  which  ;  cp.  kim-adhikaranai),  see 
adhik.)  T  1.70  ;  D  1. 1 13  ;  M  1.269  ;  Dhs  1346  ;  cp.  simi- 
larly BSk.  yato  adhikaranai)  MVastu  in. 52  ;  and 
yato-nidanai)  on  account  of  which,  from  which  (or 
what)  re;  son.  because  M  1.109;  Sn  273.  869;  Pv  iv.  i" 
(cp.  PvA  242).  —  Note,  yaticchita  at  PvA  265  is  to  be 
read  yadicchita. 


Yatta 


Yatha 


Yatta  [pp-  of  yatati']  strenuous,  making  an  effort,  watchful 
Nd^  525  (  +  patiyatta,  in  exegesis  of  yata) ;  J  iv.2.22 
(  +  patiyatta) :  vi.294  (Kern's  reading  for  yata;  vv.  11. 
sagyata  &  sata.  thus  warranting  yata) ;  Miln  373 
(°payatta).  378  (id.  =  in  keen  effort).  — Note.  Kern, 
Toev.  s.  V.  would  like  to  equal  yatta  =  Sk.  yatna  effort. 

Yattaka  (adj.)  [fr.  yavant,  a  late  formation  ;  cp.  Trenckner, 
Notes,  80]  however  much,  whatever,  as  many  (in  corre- 
lation with  ta°  or  tattaka)  J  v. 74  (  =  yavant) ;  Vism  184 
(yattakar)  thanar)  ganhati  .  .  .  tattakar)  .  .  .).  293 
(yattaka  =  yavata)  ;  DA  1.118  (yattaka  .  .  .  tattaka 
as  long  as) ;  DhA  11. 50  ("r)  kalar)  as  long),  128 ; 
VbhA  73  (yattakai)  thanai)  .  .  .  tattakag),  391 
(yattakani  kusala-cittani  .  .  .  tesar)  sabbesan) ;  VvA 
1 75  (yattakani  .  .  .  tani  as  many  ...  so  many,  i.  e. 
whatever),  285  (yattaka  ahuneyya  nama  .  .  .  tesu 
sabbesu  .  .  .). — instr.  yattakena  as  adv.  "because, 
on  account  of  "  DhA  111.383,  393. 

Yattha  (adv.)  [the  regular  P.  form  of  Ved.  yatra.  See 
also  P.  yatra]  rel.  adv.  of  place  "  where,"  at  which  spot ; 
occasionally  "  at  which  time,"  when  ;  with  verbs  of 
motion  ="  whereto." — D  1.240  (whither);  Sn  79,  170 
(here  closely  resemWing  yatra  in  meaning="  so  that  "), 
191,  313,  445,  995,  1037;  Dh  87,  127  (yattha  thita,  cp. 
PvA  104)  150,  171,  193,  PvA  27.  — yattha  va  tattha  va 
wherever  (or  whenever)  DhA  iv.  162;  similarly  yattha 
yattha  wherever  (he  likes)  A  11.64.  yattha  kamaij 
(cp.  yathakamari  in  same  meaning)  where  to  one's 
liking,  i.  e.  wherever  Dh  35  (=iyattha  katthaci  or 
yattha  yattha  icchati  DhA  1.295,  299),  326.  Similarly 
we  find  yatth-icchakar),  almost  identical  (originally 
variant  ?)  with  yadicchakar)  and  yaradicchakar)  at 
Vism  154. 

Yatra  (adv.)  [the  (older  ?)  reconstituted  Sk.  form  of  P. 
yattha,  cp.  Vedic  yatra  in  which,  where.  The  P.  form 
is  younger  than  the  Vedic,  as  the  P.  meaning  is  doubtful 
for  the  V.  period.  It  is  merely  a  differentiation  of 
forms  to  mark  a  special  meaning  in  the  sense  of  a 
causal  coijjunction,  whereas  yattha  is  adv.  (of  place  or 
time)  only]  in  which,  where,  since ;  only  in  phrase 
yatra  hi  nama  (in  emphatic  exclamations)  with  Fut.  ; 
"  as  indeed,  inasmuch  as,  that  "  S  11.255  (fianabhuta 
vata  savaka  y.  h.  n.  savako  fiassati  etc.);  J  1.59  (dhi- 
r-atthu  vata  bho  jatiya  y.  h.  n.  jatassa  jara  paiiiia- 
yissati  "  woe  to  birth  that  old  age  is  to  be  noticed  in 
that  which  is  born  I");  Miln  13  (acchariyar)  vata  bho 
.  .  .  y.  h.  n.  me  upajjhayo  ceto-parivitakkar)  janissati). 

Yatha  (adv.)  [fr.  ya° ;  Vedic  yatha;  cp.  katha,  tatha] 
as,  like,  in  relation  to,  after  (the  manner  of).  —  As 
prep,  (with  ace):  according  (to  some  condition,  norm 
or  rule) :  yatha  kamat]  (already  Vedic)  according  to  his 
desire,  after  his  liking  PvA  113,  136';  y.  kalag  in  time, 
timely  PvA  78  ;  matir]  to  his  own  mind  or  intention 
Pv  IV.  i";  ruciij  to  his  satisf iction,  amply,  satisfac- 
torily PvA  88,  126,  242  ;  vibhavat)  ace.  to  their  wealth, 
i.  e.  plentifully  PvA  53  ;  sukhai)  as  they  liked  or  pleased 
PvA  133.  Sometimes  with  loc.  :  yatha  padese  "  accord- 
ing to  place,"  in  the  right  place  J  in. 391.  Or  instr.  : 
y.  sattiya  as  much  as  you  can  DhA  1.92  ;  y.  manena 
from  his  heart,  sincerely,  voluntarily  DhA  1.42.  —  Also 
with  ger.  yatha  haritva  according  to  his  taking  (or 
reward:  see  under  cpd.  °bhata)  It  14  (y.  h.  nikkhi- 
peyya,  which  Seidenstucker,  not  doing  justice  to 
context  translates  "  so  wie  man  etwas  nimmt  und 
dann  wegwirft  ").  With  foil.  adj.  expressing  some- 
thing like  "  as  it  were  "  and  often  untranslateable  (see 
cpds.)  —  As  conjunction:  "as  if,"  or  "so  that": 
yatha  mata  like  dead  Dh  21  ;  yatha  na  "  in  order  that 
not  "  :  Vism  31  (y.  sarire  abadhar)  na  uppadeti,  evar) 
tassa  vinodan'  atthag) ;  DhA  1.311  (y.  assa  patitat- 
thanai)  na  passami,  tatha  nai)  chaddessami :  so  that 
I  shall  not  see  .  .  .,  thus  shall  I  throw  him).  — As 
adv.  just,  as,  so.  even ;  in  comb"  with  other  particles : 


yatha  kathai]  pana  how  so  then,  how  is  it  then  that 
S  11.283  (cp.  yatha  tathar)  under  cpds.)  ;  yatha  kig  viya 
somewhat  like  this  Miln  91  ;  yatha  pana  like  as  DhA 
1. 158  ;  yatha-r-i7a  (for  yatha-iva)  just  as  D  1.90  ;  yatha 
pi  .  .  .  evai)  just  as  ...  so  Dh  51-52.  — yatha-y- 
idar)    (for  yatha-idar))   positive:   "as  just  this,"   "so 


that,' 


■  e.  g.,"  "  like."  "  i.  e."  ;  after  negation  "  but  ' 


It  8,  9  (na  afifiar)  .  .  .  yathayidar)) ;  Sn  1092  (tvan  ca 
me  dipam  akkhahi,  yathayidaij  n'  aparag  siya  "  so  that 
there  be  no  further  ill  "  ;  cp.  SnA  597).  See  also  the 
enlarged  forms  seyyatha  &  seyyathidag.  —  In  corre- 
lation with  tatha :  the  same  ...  as,  like  ...  as,  as 
.  .  .  so  ;  Pv  1. 1 2^  (yath'  agato  tatha-gato  as  he  has  come 
so  has  he  gone).  Often  elliptically  in  direct  juxtaposi- 
tion :  yatha  tatha  in  whatever  way,  in  such  &  such  a 
manner  ;  so  and  so,  according  to  the  occasion ;  also 
"  correctly,  truly,  in  reality  "  Sn  504  (tvatj  h'  ettha 
janasi  y.  t.  idag) ;  PvA  199  (y.  t.  vyakasi).  See  yatha- 
tathar)  under  cpds.  About  phrase  yatha  tag  see 
yathatar).  —  For  further  refs.  on  the  use  of  yatha  see 
Indexes  to  Sagyutta  (S  vi.81  s.  v.  yathabhutarj) ; 
Anguttara  (A.  vi.91  ibid.) ;  Sutta-Nipata  (Index  p.  751) ; 
&  Dhammapada. 

-dnudhammar)  according  to  the  rules  (leading  to  en- 
lightenment) Sn  963,  cp.  Nd^  481.  -dnurupa  suitable, 
proper  Mhvs  28,  42.  -dnusitthag  in  accordance  with 
what  has  been  taught  DhA  1.158.  -4bhirantar]  (adv. 
nt.  of  ppr.)  to  (their)  heart's  content,  as  much  (or  as 
long)  as  one  likes  Vin  in.  145;  Sn  53;  DhA  1.385; 
VvA  181.  -araddha  [=alabdha]  as  much  as  was  to 
be  had,  sufficient  Vin  iii.  160.  -ftrahat)  (nt.  adv.)  as 
is  fit  or  proper,  seeming,  fitful,  appropriately,  duly  (cp. 
Cpd.  Ill'-,  Ii82)  S  1.226;  Sn  403;  Pv  n.923;  PvA  78, 
132  (yatha  codanar)  v.  1.  SS),  287;  VvA  139.  So  to 
be  read  at  all  Pv  &  PvA  passages  for  T.  yatha  rahar). 
Very  freq.  in  Mhvs.  e.  g.  3,  27;  5,  148;  7,  70;  14,  54; 
20,  8  ;  22,  58.  -dlankata  dressed  as  he  was,  in  full 
(state-)  dress  DhA  in. 79.  -4vajjag  "  as  if  to  be 
blamed,"  i.  e.  (imitating)  whatever  is  faulty,  mimicry 
of  deformities  (as  a  forbidden  pastime)  D  1.7  (=kapa- 
kuni-khanj'  adinar)  yar)  yarj  vajjag  tar)  tar)  payojetva 
dassana-kila  DA  1.86);  Vin  11. 10.  -icchitat]  according 
to  one's  wish,  as  he  liked,  after  his  heart's  content 
J  1.27  (v.  i88)  =  Bu  II. 179;  is  preferably  to  be  read  as 
yad-icchitar)  at  all  PvA  passages,  e.  g.  PvA  3  (°g  dento), 
no  ("thana  whichever  place  I  like),  265  (where  T.  has 
yat°).  The  ed.  of  Mhvs  however  reads  yath°  through- 
out ;  e.  g.  7,  22  ;  22,  50.  -odhi  as  far  as  the  limit,  final, 
utmost  M  1.37  ;  J  in. 302.  -odhika  to  (its  or  their)  full 
extent,  altogether,  only  in  phrase  yathodhikdni  kdmani 
Sn  60  (cp.  Nd^  526) ;  J  in. 381  (C.  not  quite  to  the  point 
with  expl°  "  attano  odhivasena  thitani,"  giving  variant 
yatodhikdni,  with  expl"  "  yato  uparato  odhi  etesan  ti 
yatodhikani  uparata-kotthasani  ") ;  iv.487  (with  better 
C.  expl°  :  "  yena  yena  odhina  thitani  tena  tena  thitan' 
eva  jahissami,  na  kifice  avasissami  ti  attho");  v.392 
(C.  :  "  yathathita-kotthasani  ").  -kamma  (g)  accord- 
ing to  one's  karma  or  action  J  1.57,  109;  iv.  i.  Freq. 
in  phrase  yatha-kamm-iipage  satte  (pajanati)  "(he 
recognises)  the  beings  passing  away  (or  undergoing 
future  retribution)  ace.  to  their  deeds  "  D  1.82  ;  M  1.482  ; 
II. 21  ;  111.178  ;  S  11.122  ;  A  iv.141,  178,  422  ;  v.35  ;  Sn 
587  ;  It  99  ;  and  yatha-kamm-fipaga-fiana  "  the  know- 
ledge of  specific  retribution  "  Vism  433  sq.  ;  Tikp  321  ; 
VbhA  373  sq.  ("catuttha).  -kamag  according  to  wish, 
at  random  (see  above) ;  °  -karaniya  to  be  done  or  dealt 
with  ad  lib.,  i.  e.  a  victim,  prey  S  11.226;  iv.91,  159; 
It  56.  -karin  as  he  does  It  122  (corresp.  to  tatha- 
vadin).  -kalag  according  to  time,  in  one  time  Mhvs  5, 
180.  -kkamag  ace.  to  order,  in  one  order  or  succession 
Mhvs  4,  54  ;  Sdhp  269.  -carin  virtuous  (for  the  usual 
yatacarin  as  indicated  by  C.  expl"  yata  kayadihi  sanyati : 
see  Brethren,  p.  342  !)  Th  i,  981  (trsl.  "  Whoso  according 
to  his  powers  is  virtuous"),  -fhita  so-being,  such  & 
such,  as  they  are,   as  they  were  J   v.392  ;  VvA  256. 


Yatha 


Yada 


-tathat]  according  to  truth,  true  &  real  (corresponding 
to  yatha  tatha  adv.  :  see  above)  It  123  (here  as  nom.  sg.  : 
as  be  is  in  one  respect,  so  in  the  other,  i.  e.  perfect) ; 
Sn  :i27  (=yatha  acikkhitabbag  tatha  acikkhi  Nd' 
527) ;  Th  I,  708  (ditthe  dhamme  yathatathe  :  is  reading 
correct  ?  perhaps  better  as  yathatatha,  cp.  trsl'  Brethren 
292  :  "  the  truths  are  seen  e'en  as  they  really  are  "); 
Dpvs  III. 2  (so  read  for  yatha-kathag  ;  v.  1.  has  °tathar)) ; 
V.64  (paahai)  byakarohiyathatathar)).  -dhamma  (used 
as  adj.  &  adv.  °r|)  "  one  according  to  the  law,"  i.  e.  as 
the  rule  prescribes  ;  nt.  according  to  the  rule  put  down. 
See  Viti.  Texts  1.203  ;  Geiger,  Dhamma,  p.  19,  67.  — 
Vin  1. 1 35  (yo  uddiseyya,  yatha-dhammo  karetabbo), 
168  (yo  pavareyya,  y.-dhammo  karetabbo),  igi  (yo 
mare)'ya  y.-dh.  k.);  11.67  (ubho  pi  yathadhanunai] 
karipetabba),  132  (yo  ajjhohareyya,  y.-dhammo 
kclretabbo) ;  iv.126  (yo  janai)  (i.  e.  knowing)  yatha- 
dhammai)  nihat'  adhikaraijai)  punakammaya  ukko- 
teyya.  pacittiyan  ti  i.  e.  a  dispute  settled  in  proper 
form  ;  with  expl"  :  y.-dhammar)  nama  dhammena  vina- 
yena  satthu  sasanena  katai)),  144  (na  tassa  .  .  . 
mutti  atthi  yafl  ca  tattha  apattig  apanno  tan  ca  yathJi- 
dhammo  karetabbo,  uttari  c'  assa  moho  aropetabbo). 
Cp.  the  foil,  passages;  as  adj.  :  Vin  1.205;  11. 132,  142, 
263;  M  III.  10;  Miln  195;  as  adv.  :  with  patikaroti  (to 
atone,  make  amends)  Vin  1.173,  315;  11.126;  iv.19; 
D  1.85;  III. 55  ;  M  111.247;  S  II. 128,  205;  A  1. 103,  238; 
II. 146 ;  IV.377  ;  cp.  yathadhammag  patigaijhati  S  1.239 ; 
A  1.59,  103.  At  S  III. 171  yathadhammar)  is  used  in 
the  sense  of  "  according  to  the  truth,  or  reality,"  where 
yatha-bhutar)  takes  its  place;  similarly  at  Th  i,  188. 
-dhota  as  if  it  were  washed  (so  to  speak),  clean,  un- 
soiled  DhA  1.196;  cp.  MVastu  1.301  yatha-dhauta. 
-pasadhanai]  according  to  a  clear  state  of  mind,  to  one's 
gratification  Dh  249  (  =  attano  pasad'  anurupag 
DhA  111.359).  -puggalag  according  to  the  individual, 
individually  Pv  111.5'  (read  yathapu°).  -purita  as  full 
as  could  be,  quite  full  J  i.ioi.  -phasuka  comfortable, 
pleasant  DhA  1.8.  -balar)  according  to  one's  power  or 
means  DhA  1.107  (v.  1.  °satti) ;  Sdhp  97;  Mhvs  5,  180. 
-buddha  see  "vuddha.  -bhatai)  is  an  unexpl*  liiral 
Myoiiivov,  difl5cult  of  analysis  because  occurring  in 
only  one  star,  phrase,  viz.  yatha  bhatag  nikkhitto  CTari 
niraye  (&  sagge)  at  M  1.71  ;  S  iv.325  (where  T.  has 
yathahatar),  v.  1.  bhatag) ;  A  1.8,  105,  292,  297  ;  11.71, 
83 ;  It  12,  14,  26.  We  have  analyzed  it  as  y.  bhatag  in 
Corr.  to  pt.  3;  vol.  11. 100  ("  according  to  his  upbring- 
ing "),  but  we  should  rather  deviate  from  this  expl" 
because  the  P.  usage  in  this  case  would  prefer  the  nom. 
instead  of  the  (adv.)  ax;c.  nt.  It  remains  doubtful 
whether  we  should  separate  yatha  or  yath'  abhatag. 
Suggestions  of  a  trsl"  are  the  foil,  (i)  "as  soon  as 
brought  or  taken"  (see  Diet.  s.  v.  abhata) ;  (2)  "  as  one 
has  brought  "  (merit  or  demerit) ;  thus  taking  abhatag 
as  irregular  ger.  of  a-Hbhu,  trsl"  suggested  by  the 
reading  aharitva  (yathaharit\'a)  in  the  complementary 
stanzas  at  It  12  &  14;  (3)  "according  to  merit  or 
reward,"  after  Kern's  suggestion.  Toev.  s.  v.  to  read 
yatha  bhatag,  the  difficulty  being  that  bhafa  is  nowhere 
found  as  v.  1.  of  bhata  in  this  phrase ;  nor  that  bhata 
occurs  in  the  meaning  of  "reward." — There  is  a 
strong  likelihood  of  (a)bhata  resembling  Ihata  (ahata  ?) 
in  meaning  "  as  brought,"  on  account  of.  cp.  It  context 
and  reading  at  S  iv.325  ;  still  the  phrase  remains  not 
sufficiently  clejired  up.  —  Seidenstucker's  trsl"  has 
been  referred  to  above  (under  haritva)  as  unbefitting. 
—  The  suspicion  of  yathabhatag  being  a  veiled  (cor- 
rupted) yathabhutag  has  presented  itself  to  us  before 
(see  vol.  I.  under  abhata).  The  meaning  may  suggest 
something  like  the  latter,  in  as  far  as  "  in  truth," 
"  surely  "  is  not  far  ofE  the  point.  Anyhow  we  shall 
have  to  settle  on  a  meaning  like  "  according  to  merit," 
without  being  able  to  elucidate  the  phrase  in  all  its 
details.  —  There  is  another  yathabhatag  in  passage 
.  .  .  ussavo   hoti.    yathabhatag   lasupag   parikkhayag 


agamasi  "the  garlic  diminished  as  soon  as  it  -was 
brought  "  Vin  iv.258.  Here  abhata  stands  in  rel.  to 
harapeti  (to  have  it  fetched  &  brought)  and  is  clearly 
pp.  of  abharatL  -bhucca  as  is  the  case,  i.  e.  as  one 
might  expect,  evident,  real,  in  conformity  with  the 
truth  D  1.12;  11.222  ;  Miln  183,  351  ;  Th  2,  159  (  =  yatha- 
bhutag  ThA  142);  PvA  30,  31  (°gu;ia).  -bhutta  see 
bhutta.  -bhuta(g)  in  reality,  in  truth,  really,  definitely, 
absolutely  ;  as  ought  to  be,  truthfully,  in  its  real  essence. 
Very  freq.  in  var.  combn"  which  see  collected  &  classi- 
fied as  regards  Sagyutta  &  Anguttara-Nikayas  in  Index 
vols  to  these  texts.  E.  g.  S  iv.195  (vacanag,  Ep.  of  Nib- 
bana) ;  v.440  (abhisamaya) ;  Sn  194,  202.  653  ;  Dh  203  ; 
PvA  215  (guoa).  yathdbhutaT)  pajanati  he  knows  as 
an  absolute  truth  or  in  reality  D  1.83.  162  ;  S  iv.188; 
V.304  &  passim;  ditto  yathabhutaij  janati  passati 
Ps  11.62.  Similarly  with  noun  :  yatha bhula-naria  abso- 
lute knowledge  S  v.  144  ;  Ps  11.63  =  Vism  605  (H-samma- 
dassana);  Vism  438,  629,  695;  VbhA  459  (=magga- 
flaija) ;  also  as  °ndva-dassana  in  same  meaning :  A 
III.  19,  200  ;  iv.99,  336  ;  v.2  sq..  311  sq.  ;  Ps  1.33.  43  sq.  ; 
II.  1 1  sq.  ;  Nett  29.  -mano  according  to  (his)  mind 
Sn  829;  Nd'  170  (expl*  as  nom.  =  yathacitto,  yatha- 
sankappo,  yathavififiaijo).  -rucig  according  to  pleasure 
or  liking  Mhvs  4,  43  (ruci  T. ;  rucig  v.  1. ;  thus  generally 
in  Mhvs.);  5,  230  (°ruci) ;  22,  58  (°ruci).  -vadin  as 
speaking,  as  he  speaks  (followed  by  tatha-kdrin  so 
doing)  D  11.224,  229;  Sn  357;  It  122.  -vidhi(g)  duly, 
fitly  Mhvs  10,  79.  -yihita  as  appointed  or  arranged 
Mhvs  10,  93.  -vuddhag  according  to  seniority  Vin 
11.221  ;  Mhbv  90  (T.' "reads  °bu(J(Jhag).  -vutta(g)  as  is 
said.  i.  e.  as  mentioned,  aforesaid,  of  this  kind  Mhvs 
34,  57;  PvA  45,  116  (°o  puggalo).  -saka(g)  each  his 
own.  according  to  his  (or  her)  own.  respective(ly)  Vism 
525  ;  SnA  8,  9  ;  VvA  7  ;  Mhvs  5,  230  (here  simply  "  their 
own  ").  -sata  saintly  (?),  mindful  Th  i,  981  (cp.  yatha 
carin  &  Brethren  p.  342).  -satti(g)  according  to  one's 
power  S  IV.348  (  +  yathabalag);  DhA  1.107  (v.  1.  for 
°balag) ;  Sdhp  97.  -satthag  according  to  the  precepts, 
as  law  ordains  M  in.  10  (perhaps  an  error  for  yatha- 
saddha  ?).  -saddhag  ace.  to  faith,  as  is  one's  faith 
Dh  249.  -santhatika  accepting  whatever  seat  is  ofiered 
D  1.167  ;  A  111.220  ;  Pug  69 ;  Th  i.  854.  -"anga  one  of 
the  13  dhutangas  Miln  342.  359  ;  Vism  61.  78.  -sukhag 
according  to  ease,  at  ease,  at  will  Th  i.  77 ;  Dh  326. 

Yathatag  (adv.)  [yatha+tag]  as  it  is,  as,  as  if  Vin  111.5  ; 
S  1.124  ;  M  1.253.  The  spelling  in  our  books  is  yatha 
tag  (in  two  words). 

Tathava  (adj.)  [der.  fr.  yatha.  as  yatha-(-vant.  after 
analogy  of  yavant.  but  following  the  a-decl..  cp.  Epic 
Sk.  yathavat]  having  the  character  of  being  in  accord- 
ance with  (the  truth  or  the  occasion),  real,  true,  just 
It  44  (santag  papitag  yathavag.  nt.);  Th  i.  188.  422 
("aloka-dassana  seeing  the  real  light);  Miln  171  (°lak- 
khana  true  characteristics);  Vism  588  (as  yathava- 
sarasa).  639  (id. ).  —  abl.  yathavato  (also  found  as 
yathavato,  probably  more  correctly,  being  felt  as  a  der. 
fr.  yatha)  according  to  fitness,  fitfully,  duly,  truly, 
sufficiently  PvA  60  (so  read  for  yatha  vato).  128  {all 
MSS.  yathavato  I) ;  ThA  256  (ya° ;  the  expl"  given  by 
Morris.  J.P.T.S.  1889,  208  is  not  correct). 

Tath&vaka  (adj.)  [fr.  yathava]  being  according  to  reality 
or  sufficiency,  essential,  true.  real,  sufficient  Th  1,  347; 
VbhA  409  (°vatthu,  referring  to  the  "  raana  "-division 
of  the  Khuddaka-vatthu  Vbh  353  sq.,  cp.  Nd»  505«) 
Should  we  read  yathavaka"  ? 

Yad,  Tad-idag  etc..  see  ya°  4''. 

Yadi  (adv.)  [Vedic  yada:  old  instr.  of  ya°]  when  Sn  200 
(y.  ca  so  mato  seti).  681.  696  (here  as  yada.  expl*  as 
yada),  923  ;  Dh  28,  6g.  277  sq.,  325,  384.  390 ;  It  77  (V- 
devo  devakaya  cavati) ;  PvA  54.  ^7-     Cp.  kada  &  tada. 


Yadi 


8 


Yamati 


Tadi  (indecl.)  [adv.  formation,  orig.  loc.,  fr.  ya";  cp. 
Vedic  yadi]  i.  as  conjunction:  if;  constructed  either 
with  pres.  indie.,  as:  Sn  189;  "yadi  bodhii)  pattug 
icchasi  "  J  1.24  (v.  167) ;  "  yadi  dayako  danar)  deti  .  .  . 
etag  bijag  hoti  "  PvA  8  ;  or  pot.  ;  or  with  a  participle, 
as :  "  yadi  evag  sante  "  that  being  so,  if  this  is  so 
D  1.61  ;  "  gahito  yadi  siho  te  "  if  the  lion  is  caught  by 
you  Mhvs  6,  27.  — -With  other  particles,  e.  g.  yadi 
asanamattag  pi  even  if  only  a  seat  VvA  39 ;  yadi  .  •  . 
atha  kasma  if  .  .  .  how  then  Miln  4.  yadi  evag  .  .  . 
(tu)  even  if  .  .  .  yet  (but)  PvA  63  (y.  e.  pita  na  rodati, 
matu  nama  hadayag  mudukarj).  — -yadi  va  "  or  "  (cp. 
Vedic  yadi  va  "or  be  it  that")  Dh  195  (  =  yadi  va 
athava  DhA  111.252).  So  yadi  va  at  J  I.i8  (v.  97  :  lata 
va  yadi  va  rukkha  etc.  Sn  119  (game  va  yadi  varanne). 
—  2.  as  a  strong  particle  of  exhortation  :  yadi  evag  if 
so.  in  that  case,  'et  it  be  that,  alright,  now  then 
PvA  54  (y.  e.  yag  mayhag  desitag  ekassa  bhikkhuno 
dehi),  217  (y.  e.  yavadatthag  ganhahi :  take  as  much 
as  you  like)., 

Yanta  (nt.)  [Vedic  yantra,  a  kind  of  n.  ag.  formation  fr. 
yam  to  hold  by  means  of  a  string  or  bridle,  etc.  Idg. 
♦em  &  *iem,  as  in  Lat.  emo  to  take  &  red-imio.]  a 
means  for  holding,  contrivance,  artifice,  instrument, 
machine,  mechanism ;  fig.  instrumentality  (as  perhaps 
in.  kamma"  at  Th  passages).  ^  Referring  to  the 
machinery  (outfit)  of  a  ship  (as  oars,  helm,  etc.)  J 
IV.  163  (sabbayanf  upapanna  =  piy'-aritta  etc.  C.) ;  Miln 
379.  To  mechanism  in  general  (mechanical  force) 
J  V.333  (°vegena  =  with  the  swiftness  of  machinery). 
To  a  sugar-mill  MUn  166;  usually  as  ucchu-yanta  J 
1-25.  339  ("yante  garithika),  cp.  ucchunag  yanta  DhA 
IV.  199.  — tela-yanta  (-cakka)  (the  wheel  of)  an  oil 
mill  J  1.25.  — daru-yanta  a  wooden  machine  -(i.  e.  a 
mechanical  man  with  hands  &  feet  moved  by  pulling 
of  strings)  DA  1. 197;  Vism  595  (quoted  as  simile). 
— kamma-yanta  the  machinery  of  Kamma  Th  i,  419 
(i.  e.  its  instrumentality,  not,  as  trsl"  "  car  "  ;  cp. 
Brethren  217:  "it  breaks  in  pieces  K's  living  car," 
evidently  influenced  by  C.  expl"  "  attabhava-yanta  "), 
754  (similarly :  see  discussed  under  yantita).  Note. 
yantani  at  Nd*  529  (on  Sn  48  sanghatta-yantart)  is 
expl*  as  "  dhuvarani."  The  spelling  &  meaning  of 
the  latter  is  not  clear.  It  must  refer  to  bracelets.  — 
Cp.  SnA  96  valayani. 

-akaddhana  pulling  the  machine  Vism  258  =  VbhA 
241 .  -cakkha-yatthi  the  stick  of  the  wheel  of  a  (sugar-) 
mill  VbhA  60.  -nali  a  mechanical  tube  DhA  111.215. 
-pasana  an  aerolite  (?)  J  in. 258  (read  °pasano).  -pha- 
lakani  the  boards  of  a  machine  Vism  258.  -yutta  com- 
bined by  machinery  J  vi.432.  -sutta  the  string  of  a 
machine  (or  mill).  Vism  258  (as  °ka)  =  VbhA  241. 
-hatthi  a  mechanical  (automatic)  elephant  DhA  1.192 
(of  King  Caijda-pajjota ;  cp.  the  horse  of  Troy). 

Tantaka  (nt.)  [fr.  yanta]  a  bolt  Vin  11. 148  (vihara  agutta 
honti  .  .  .  anujanami  yantakag  sucikan  ti),  cp.  Vin. 
Texts  III.  162  ;  DA  1.200  (kuncika-l- ) ;  DhA  1.220  (yanta- 
kag deti  to  put  the  bolt  to,  to  lock  up). 

Yanti  is  3">  pi.  pres.  of  ya:  see  yati.  —  Note.  At  D  11.269 
we  should  combine  yanti  with  preceding  visama  & 
sambadha,  thus  forming  denom.  verbs :  visamayanti 
"  become  uneven  "  and  sarabadhayanti  "  become  op- 
pressed or  tight."  The  trsl">  Dial  11.305  gives  just  the 
opposite  by  reading  incorrectly. 

Yantita  [pp.  of  yanteti]  made  to  go,  set  into  motion,  im- 
pelled Th  I,  574  :  evayag  vattati  kayo  kamma-yantena 
yantito  "  impelled  by  the  machinery  of  Karma "  ; 
ttsi.'^  Brethren  261  not  quite  to  the  point  "  carried  about 
on  Karma's  car."  Kern,  Toev.  s,  v.  quite  out  of  place 
with  "  fettered,  held,  restrained,"  in  analogy  to  his 
trsl"  of  yanta  id.  loc.  with  "  fetter."  He  may  have 
been  misled  by  Dhtm  def"  of  yant  as  "  sankocana  " 
(see  yanteti). 


Yanteti  [denom.  fr.  yanta.  Dhtm  809  gives  a  root  yant 
in  meaning  of  "  sankocane,"  i.  e.  contraction]  to  set  into 
motion,  to  make  go,  impel,  hurl  J  1.418  (sakkharag 
anguliya  yantetva) ;  pp.  yantita. 

Yannona  se«  ya°  2^. 

Yapana  see  yapana. 

Yapeti  see  yapeti. 

Yabhati  [one  passage  in  Atharva  Veda ;  cp.  Gr.  oi^w 
"  futuo,"  Lat.  ibex  (see  Walde,  Lat.  Wtb.  s.  v.)]  to 
cohabit,  futuere,  only  given  as  root  yabh  with  def" 
"  methune  "  at  Dhtp  215  &  Dhtm  308. 

Yama^  [fr.  yam]  restraint  PvA  98  (-fniyama). 

Yama'  [Vedic  Yama]  the  ruler  of  the  kingdom  of  the  dead. 
See  details  in  Dicty.  of  Names.  In  cpds.  often  in 
general  sense  of  "death"  or  "manes,"  or  "  peta  "  ; 
e.  g. 

-diita  Death's  messenger  Sdhp  287;  cp.  Yamassa 
duta  Vv  52^  (see  VvA  224),  or  deva-diita  A  1.138  (see 
under  duta),  alias  niraya-pala  A  1.138  and  passim, 
-purisa  (a)=°duta  Dh  235  (cp.  DhA  111.335) ;  VvA  223  ; 
(b)  °purisd  Yama-people,  i.  e.  Petas  Pv  1V.3'  (cp.  PvA 
251).  -loka  the  yama-world  or  world  of  the  Petas 
Dh  44,  45;  PvA  107  &  freq.  -visaya  =  °loka  Pv  11. 8* 
&  passim,  -sadana  Y's  kingdom,  or  the  realm  of  the 
dead  J  vi.267,  304;  vi.457,  505. 

Yama^  (m.  nt.)  [Vedic  yama  =  yama^ ;  fr.  yam  in  meaning 
"  to  combine,"  cp.  Av.  yama  twin,  Mir.  emuin  id.]  (nt.) 
a  pair,  (m.)  a  twin  Abhp  628.     See  der.  yamaka. 

Yamaka  [fr.  yama^]  i.  (adj.)  double,  twin;  only  in  foil, 
comb"^ :  "patihariya  (&  °hira)  the  miracle  of  the  double 
appearances,  a  miracle  performed  by  the  Buddha  in 
Savatthi  to  refute  the  heretical  teachers  (cp.  Vin  111.332, 
Samanta-pasadika ;  and  in  detail  DA  1.57).  It  con- 
sisted in  the  appearance  of  phenomena  of  opposite  ^ 
character  in  pairs,  as  e.  g.  streaming  forth  of  fire  &  " 
vater.  (Cp.  Mhvs  trsl'  120).  The  miracle  was  re- 
peatedly performed  by  the  Buddha  &  is  often  referred 
to,  e.  g.  at  Ps  1. 125  ("hira) ;  J  1.77,  88,  193;  Miln  10& 
(°hirag),  349  (°hariyag);  Mhvs  17,  44,  50;  30,  82;  31. 
99;  Davs  1.50  (°hirag);  DhA  111.213  (id.);  SnA  36; 
Vism  390  ;  PvA  137.  -sala  the  pair  of  Sal  willows  in 
between  of  which  the  Buddha  passed  away  VvA  165; 
PvA  212.  —  2.  (adj.  or  m.)  a  twin,  twin  child  Mhvs  6,  ( 
9  (yamake  duve  puttag  ca  dhitarag  janesi),  37  (sola- 
sakkhattug  yamake  duve  duve  putte  janayi) ;  DhA 
1.353  (same,  with  vijayi).  —  3.  (nt.)  a  pair,  couple, 
N.  of  one  of  the  Abhidhamma  canonical  books,  also 
called  Yamaka-ippakaraija ;  Tikp  8.  —  The  Yamaka- 
sutta  refers  to  the  conversion  of  the  bhikkhu  Yamaka 
and  is  given  at  S  in.  109  sq.  ;  mentioned  at  Vism  479 
&  VbhA  32.  The  phrase  yamakato  sammasana  at 
Vism  626  may  mean  "  in  pairs  "  (like  kalapato  "  in  a 
bundle  "  ibid.),  or  may  refer  to  the  Yamaka-sutta  with 
its  discussion  of  anicca,  dukkha,  anatta. 

Yamatag  at  S  1.14  (sa  vitivatto  yamatag  sumedho)  we 
should  read  (with  Mrs.  Rh.  D.'s  emendation  K.S. 
p.  320)  as  yag  matag  (Cy.  :  manflanag  ;  trsl.  "  he  rich 
in  wisdom  hath  escaped  beyond  conceits  and  deemings 
of  the  errant  mind  "). 

Yamati  [yam,  given  in  meaning  "  uparame  "  i.  e.  cessa- 
tion, quieting  at  Dhtp  226  &  Dhtm  322,  at  the 
latter  with  additional  "  nase."  On  etym.  see 
Walde,  Lat.  Wtb.  s.  v.  redimio  and  emo :  cp.  yanta] 
to  restrain,  suppress,  to  become  tranquU ;  only  in 
stanza  Dh  6  =  Th  1.275  =  !  111.488  as  i^'  pi.  med. 
yamamase  in  imper.  sense ;  "  pare  ca  na  vijananti 
mayag  ettha  yamamase,"  which  is  expl""  both  at 
DhA    1.65,   Th  I  A,    &    J    III. 489  in    connection    with 


Yamala 


Yaca 


yama,*  viz.  "  yamamase  :  uparamama  nassama  satatai) 
samitai)  maccu-santikarj  gacchama  ti  na  jananti."  i.  e. 
let  us  go  continually  into  the  presence  of  death.  A 
little  further  at  DhA  1.66  the  expl"  of  it  is  "  bhaijd'- 
adinai)  vuddhiya  vayamama  ti  na  vijananti."  The 
meaning  is  "to  control  oneself."  cp.  sai)yamamase 
S  1.209.  Leop.  V.  Schroeder  howevej  trsls.  "  Und 
mancher  Mann  bedenket  nicht :  wir  alle  miissen  sterben 
hier  "  {IVorie  der  Wahrheii,  p.  2.). — yameyyatha  at 
S  1.2 1 7  is  wrongly  separated  from  the  preceding  va, 
which  ought  to  be  read  as  vayameyyatha  (so  K.S. 
1.281). 

Yamala  [fr.  yama*]  a  pair  Abhp  628.  —  yamali  occurs  in 
BSk.  only  as  a  kind  of  dress,  at  Divy  276  ;  Av^  1.265. 

Tava  [\'edic  yava,  corn;  see  Zinimer,  Altind.  Leben  239. 
Cp.  Gr.  ?ea  spelt ;  Lith.  javai  com ;  Oir.  eorna  barley] 
corn  (in  general),  barley  (in  particular)  Vin  iv.264 ; 
S  IV. 220  ;  A  IV.  169. 

-karana  the  preparation  of  com  A  iv.  169.  -kalapi 
(or  "ini)  a  sheaf  of  barley  S  iv.201.  -karandava  chafi 
of  com  (or  barley)  A  rv.  169.  -kummasa  barley-gruel 
VvA  62.  -khetta  corn-field  Vin  iv.47,  266 ;  VvA  294. 
-diisiii  spoiling  the  com  A  rv.  169.  -majjbaka  lying  in 
the  midst  of  a  corn-field,  in  pdcina°  of  the  c.-f.  on  the 
E.  side  (-i-dakkhiwa"  S.  ;  pacchima"  W.  ;  uttara°  N.) ; 
names  of  4  market-places  near  Mithila  J  vi.330.  -siika 
the  awn  or  beard  of  com  (barley)  A  1.8 ;  S  v.  10,  48. 

Tavaka  (nt.)  [yava -(-collect,  ending  °ka]  in  cpd.  sali" 
(whatever  there  is  of)  rice  &  com  (i.  e.  rice-  and  corn- 
fields C.)  J  IV.  1 72.     Cp.  yavaka. 

Tavasa  (nt.)  [fr.  yava;  Vedic  yavasa]  grass,  hay,  fodder 
J  1-338- 

Yrniamrin  (adj.)  [Vedic  ya^asvin]  glorious,  famous, renowned, 
having  all  endowments  or  comforts  of  life  (as  expH  at 
Nd^  530  :  yasappatta,  sakkata, labhi etc. )  D  1.48  (ftata-l- ) 
A  11.34;  Sn  179,  298,  343,  1117;  Pv  1.4';  lu.i";  111.3' 
HI.  10';  Vv  15*  (  =  kittimant  parivaravant  VvA  73) 
DA  1. 143;  PvA  10;  Sdhp  420.  —  f.  yasassini  shining, 
resplendent  J  v.  64.  | 

Yatassimant    (adj.)    [double   adj.    ending;    yasas -i- vin -(- 
mant]    splendid,    glorious,    full    of    splendour    J    v. 63    . 
(pSvako  yasassima=teja-sampattiya  yasassinihi  accihi 
yutto  C).  I 

Yasavant    (adj.)    [cp.    Vedic   yalasvat]    famous,    having  j 

renown  A  11.64  (dighajni -(- ). 

I 

Yago  &  Yasa  (nt.)  [Vedic  yaia^  (nt).     The  word  follows 
the  a°  declension,  but  preserves  &  favours  the  instr. 
yasasa  after  the  s°  decl.  (like  mano,  ceto  etc,),  e.  g.  at  | 
J  1. 134.  — In  the  nom.  &  ace.  sg.  both  forms  yaso  &   j 
ya8a(i))  occur;   in  cpds.   the  form  yasa°  is  the  usual;   | 
yaso  as  tnasc.  is  found  at  Sn  438)  glory,  fame,  repute, 
success,  high  position.     On  term  as  used  with  ref.  to  \ 
the  brahmin  see   Fick,  Sociale  Gliederung  128,   129 —   1 
The  prevailing  idea  of  Dhammapila  is  that  yaso  con-   I 
sists  of  a  great  retinue,  &  company  of  servants,  followers   [ 
etc.     This  idea  is  already  to  be  found  at  D  1. 1 18=  126   1 
where  y.  is  founded  on  parisa  (cp.  DA  1.143  on  D  1.48  ;    I 
DA  1.298 :  yasasci  ti  aija-thapana-samatthataya).     See   j 
e.   g.  VvA   122   (yaso=parivara) ;  PvA   137   (yasasa=    ! 
mahati  parivara-sampattiya) ;  cp.  J  1.134  (raja  mahan- 
tena  yasena  uppanau)  gsu;chati).  —  D  1. 1 37  (as  quality  of 
a  king) ;  111.260,  286  ;  J  tv.275  sq.  (dibba  y.  as  one  of 
the   10  quaUties  of  greatness,  viz.   divine  duration  of 
life,   complexion,   happiness,   fame,   power,   and  the   5 
sense-objects  rupa,   sadda,   gandha.   rasa,  photthabba. 
The  same  10  are  found  at  Pv  n.9"'");  A  1.15;  11.32, 
66,    188;   III. 31,   47  sq.  ;   iv.95,    195   sq.  ;   Dh   24,    303 
(-l-bhoga);    Thi,  554;  Nd^  147  ;  Pv  111.3' (  =  dev' iddhi 
PvA  189) ;  Vv  29' ;  J  1. 134 ;  vi.468  ;  Miln  291  (bhoga-(- ) ; 


Vism  393  ;  Sdhp  306,  518.  — yasai]  deti  to  give  credit 
J  1.180.  maha-yaso  great  fame  J  1.46  (v.  266),  cp. 
yas-agga  the  highest  (of)  fame  J  1.5 1,  where  coupled 
with  labh-agga  the  greatest  gain.  The  latter  comb"  is 
stereotype  in  the  Niddesa  (see  e.  g.  Nd*  55),  where  the 

4  worldly  ideals  are  given  in  sequence  labha,  yaso, 
pasarjsi,  sukha.  — -With  kitti  we  find  yaso  at  Sn  817 
(see  def°  &  exegesis  at  Nd'  147). — Opp.  ayasa  D 
111.260,  286  :  A  II.  188  ;  IV.  157  sq. 

-dayika  giving  (or  a  giver  of)  repute  J  vi,285.  -mada 
pride  of  fame  VbhA  467.  -mahatta  greatness  of  fame 
Vism  233.  -labha  the  gain  of  fame  J  111.516  (-(-dhana- 
labha). 

Yahig  (adv.)  [after  kuhig]  where,  wherever  Mhvs  15,  209 
(corresp.  to  yattha  in  v.  210). 

Yaga  [fr.  yaj,  'Sk.  yaga,  cp.  yaSfia  &  yaja]  i.  a  {brah- 
manic)  sacrifice,  known  otherwise  as  mahayaga  (or  pi. 
°yaga),  and  consisting  of  the  4 :  assamedha,  puri- 
samedha,  sammapasa,  vaja-peyya.     Thus  mentioned  at 

5  1.76  &  Sn  303.  — 2.  In  Buddhistic  sense:  gift,  alms- 
giving, charity ;  expense  or  expenditure  of  giving 
(almost  syn.  with  caga)  A  1.91  (here  given  in  line  with 
dana  &  caga,  with  distinction  of  aniisa°  &  dhanuna°, 
i.  e.  the  material  sacrifice,  as  under  i,  and  the  spiritual 
sacrifice  or  help) ;  with  the  same  contrast  of  a"  &  dh.° 
at  D  III. 155;  It  98,  102;  J  v.57,  65;  DhA  1.27. — J 
IV.66  (sahassena  yagag  yajanto) ;  Miln  21  (dhamma°) ; 
VvA  155  ;  PvA  135  (maha°-saflflita  yaiina),  136  (maha°). 
—  su}ri^ha  yaga  sampada  "  well-given  is  the  perfection 
of  charity  "  ThA  40  (Ap.  v.  7)=  230  (id.). 

-pin^a  the  sacrificial  oblation  consisting  in  a  ball  of 
meat  or  flour  (cp.  pijjcJa-pitT-yajfla)  J  vi.522  (with 
v.  1.  yagu"). 

YSgin  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  yaga]  sacrificing,  giving,  spending 
S  J.  1 9=  J  IV.66  (sahassa"  giving  the  worth  of  a  thousand 
pieces). 

Yiga\i.)  [cp.  Vedic yavagii ;  on f orm see Geiger,  P.Gr.  \  27*] 
rice-gruel,  rice-milk  (to  drink).  See  Vin.  Texts  11.89.  — 
Vin  1.46  =  11.223  (sace  yagu  hoti,  bhajanai)  dhovitva 
yagu  upanametabba ;  yagur)  pitassa  udakag  datva  .  .  .). 
51  (id.),  61  (id.),  84,  210  (Bhagavato  udara-vat-abadho 
tekatulaya  yaguya  dhuva-yagug  datug  ;  i.  e.  a  constant 
supply  of  rice-gruel),  339  (na  mayar)  imina  bhikkhuna 
saddhir)  yagupane  nisidissama) ;  iv.311;  A  111.250 
(anisagsa :  5  good  qualities  :  it  is  good  for  hunger,  for 
thirst,  allays  wind,  cleans  the  bladder,  helps  to  digest 
any  undigested  food);  J  1.186;  11. 128  (for  drink); 
PvA  12,  23,  274. — Often  comb""  (and  eaten)  with 
cakes  (khajjaka)  &  other  soft  food  (bhojja),  e.  g.  yigu- 
khajjaka  J  1.270;  ni.20  ;  DhA  iv.20 ;  Mhvs  14,  55 
(°khajja-bhojja) ;  36,  100  (H-khajja-bhojja). 

-pana  a  drink  of  rice-milk  Vin  1.84.  -pinda  see 
yaga".  -bhajaka  one  who  distributes  the  rice-gruel 
Vin  II.  1 76  (paiicah'  angehi  samannagatai) ;  together 
with  civarabhajaka,  phala-bhajaka  &  khajja-bhajaka) ; 
IV. 38  (yagu°,  phaia°,  khajja"),  155  (id.);  A  in. 275. 

Y&ca  (nt.)  [fr.  yac]  anything  asked  for,  donation,  alms, 
begging  J  in.353  :  v.233,  234. 

-yoga  (y.  +  *yogga ;  perhaps  yaja"  the  original.  The 
variant  yajayoga  is  old  &  well  established :  cp.  Vism 
224)  accessible  to  begging,  one  ready  to  comply  with 
another's  request,  devoted  to  liberality,  open-handed. 
Freq.  in  ster.  phrase  mutta-caga  payata-paiji  vossagga- 
rata  yaca-yoga  dana-sar)vibhaga-rata  to  denote  great 
love  of  liberality,  e.  g.  at  A  1.226;  11.66;  111.313.  See 
also  A  111.53,  3i3  =  Vism  223,  224  (where  expl*  as 
follows  :  yar)  yar)  pare  yacanti  tassa  tassa  danato  yaca- 
nayogo  ti  attho  ;  yajayogo  ti  pi  pajho  ;  yajana-sankha- 
tena  yajena  yutto  ti  attho) ;  A  iv.6,  266  sq.,  271,  284  ; 
V.331,  336;  Sn  p.  87  (cp.  expl"  SnA  414:  "  yacitui) 
yutto,  yo  hi  yacake  disva  bhakutig    katva    pharusa- 


Yacaka 


10 


Yathava 


vacan'  adini  bhaijati,  so  na  yacayogo  hoti "  etc.); 
Sn  487,  488,  489,  509;  J  in.307  (expl"  in  C.  as 
"  yar)  yag  agantuka  yacanti  tassa  tassa  yutto  anuccha- 
viko  bhavitva,  sabbarj  tehi  yacita-yacitar)  dadamano 
ti  attho");  iv.274  ("  yacitabba-yuttaka  "  C.) ;  vi.98 
(  =  yacana-yuttaka  or  yanna-yuttaka ;  "  ubhayath'  a.pi 
dayakass'  ev'  etag  uama  "  C);  Miln  215,  225. — The 
form  yajayoga  at  Sn  1046  (expl""  at  Nd"  531  as  "  yaje 
yutta");  and  mentioned  at  Vism  224  (see  above). — 
On  difi.  meaning  of  yacayoga  see  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v. 
with  unidentified  ref.     Cp.  also  Mvyut.  140,  4. 

T&oaka  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  yaca,  cp.  Epic  &  later  Sk.  yacaka] 
requesting,  one  who  begs,  a  recipient  of  alms,  a  beggar 
J  III. 353;  Pv  11.9^";  PvA  78,  102  (  =  yacanaka);  Sdhp 
324,  331.  Freq.  in  comb"  with  similar  terms  of  way- 
faring people  in  phrase  samana-brahmana-kapan' 
iddhika-vanibbaka-yacaka  e.  g.  at  D  1.137  ;  It  64.  See 
single  terms.  — yacaka  at  Sn  618  (as  Fick,  Soc.  Gliede- 
rung  144  quotes  yacaka)  is  to  be  read  yajaka. 

Yacati  [Vedic  yacati ;  yac,  with  which  cp.  Lat.  jocus  (dial. 
juca  "  prayer  ") ;  Ohg.  jehan  to  confess,  etc.  :  see  Walde, 
Lat.  Wtb.  s.  V.  jocus.  —  Dhtp  (38)  only  expl^  yaca  = 
yacane]  to  beg,  ask  for,  entreat  Vin  iv.129  (pabbajjar)) : 
Sn  566,  980,  983  ;  J  111.49,  353  :  V.233,  404.  —  aor.  3«» 
pi.  yacigsu  PvA  13,  20,  42  ;  ayacisur)  Mhvs  33,  76  (v.  1. 
ayacayur)). — inf.  yacitug  PvA  29,  120. — ger.  yaciya 
Sn  295;  yacitra  M  1.365;  yacitvana  Mhvs  17,  58. — 
pp.  yacita. 

Taoana  (dt.)  [fr.  yac]  begging,  asking,  entreaty  J  111.353  ; 
SnA  161  (ingha  ti  yacan'  atthe  nipato)  551  (id.) ;  PvA 
113  (  =  sadhuka). 

-jivana  living  by  begging  J  111.353- 

Yacanaka  [cp.  BSk.  yacanaka  Divy  470,  585  ]  =  yacaka 
A  111.136  (ati°);  Pv  11.7';  9'':  9*';  J  i"-49  ;  DA  1.298. 

Yacana  (f.)  =  yacana;  J  in.354  =  Miln  230;  J  v.233,  404. 

Yacita  [pp.  of  yacati]  begged,  entreated,  asked  (for) 
A  III. 33  ;  Dh  224  ;  J  III. 307  ;  PvA  39.  —  Cp.  yacitaka. 

Yacitaka  (adj.)  [yacita  +  diminutive  (disparaging)  ending 
°ka]  asked,  begged,  borrowed  M  1.365  (°r)  bhogag) ; 
J  iv.358  =  vi.i27  (°r)  yanag  and  °r)  dhanag,  alluding  to 
M  1.365-366),  with  expl"  J  iv.358  :  "  yar|  parena  dinnat- 
ta  labbhati  tag  yacita-sadisam  eva  hoti."  —  (nt. )  any- 
thing borrowed,  borrowed  goods  :  yacitak'  upama  kama 
(in  app'  assada  kama  passage)  "  the  pleasures  of  the 
senses  are  like  borrowed  goods"  Vin  ii.25  =  M  1.130  = 
A  iii.g7  =  Th  2,  490  =  Nd*  71  (correct  yacitan') ;  expl* 
in  detail  at  M  1.365.  —  See  also  DhA  1.403  (ye  y.  gahetva 
na  patidenti) ;  ThA  288  (kama=yacitaka-bhapda- 
sadisa  tavakalik'  atthena). 

Yaja  [fr.  yaj;  cp.  yaja  &  yajeti]  sacrificing,  giving  alms, 
liberality  (felt  as  synonymous  with  caga,  thus  influenced 
by  tyaj,  cp.  Sk.  tyajana):  see  yacayoga; — Nd*  531 
(yaye  yutta) ;  Vism  224. 

Yajaka  (adj.)  [fr.  yaj  in  its  Caus.  form  yajeti]  sacrificing, 
one  who  sacrifices,  a  priest  Sn  312,  313  (  =  yanna-yajino 
jana  SnA  324),  618  (of  a  purohita ;  v.  1.  BB  yacaka). 

Yajana  (nt)  =  yaja;  Vism  224:  see  yacayoga. 

Yajin  (adj.)  [fr.  yaja]  sacrificing  SnA  324  (yailfia°). 

Yajetar  [n.  ag.  to  yajeti]  one  who  superintends  a  sacrifice 
or  causes  it  to  be  performed  D  1.143. 

Yajeti  [Caus.  I.  of  yajati]  to  cause  to  sacrifice,  to  make  a 
priest  give  an  offering  (to  the  gods  or  otherwise)  J 
VI. 211,  215  ;  ppr,  yajento  M  1.404;  Pot.  2""'  sg.  yajeyya 
J  J11.515  ;  3'*pl.  yajeyyug  J  vi.215  (annar)  brahmanar)); 
also  yajayeyyug  J  vi.211.  — ger.  yajetva  D  1.143. 


Yata  [pp.  of  yati]  going,  gone,  proceeded ;  habit,  custom ; 
only  in  cpd.  yat'inuyayin  going  on  according  to  what 
(or  as  it)  has  gone,  i.  e.  following  old  habits  J  vi.309, 
310  ;  expH  by  C.  as  "  pubba-karina  yatassa  puggalassa 
anuyayi,  pathamag  karonto  yati  nama  paccha  karonto 
anuyayati."  The  usual  Sk.  phrase  is  gat-dnugatika. 
Cp.  yatra,  yanikata. 

Yati   [Vedic  yati,   or   ya,  which    represents  Idg   »i8,  an 
amplified  *e  as  in  eti  (q.  v.).     Cp.  Lat.  janua  door  & 
the  Np.  Janus  (=  January) ;  Lith.  j6ti  to  ride,  Mir.  ath 
ford.  —  The  Dhtp  368  expl=  ya  more  in  appl""  meaning 
as  "  papunane,"  cp.  Dhtm  596  :  papune]  to  go,  go  on, 
to   proceed,    to   go   away ;  —  pres.    i*'   yami   Pv   11. 8* 
(  =  gacchami  PvA  107),  Mhvs  10,  3;  2"">  yasi  J  1.291  ; 
Mhvs   10,   2   (kuhig   yasi  ?);  3"'  yati  Sn  720  (tuphi  y. 
mahodadhi);  Dh  29,  179,  294,  295;  J  vi.311  ;  Mhvs  5, 
47;  DhA  1. 18;   I"'   pi.   yama  Mhvs  6,    12   (kig  na  y.. 
V.  1.  kig  nu-y.);  2""'  yatha  =  imper.  ;  3^*  yanti  Sn  179. 
578,  714;  Dh  126,  175,  225  (see  also  note  s.  v.  yanti); 
Pv    11.9"    (  =  gacchanti    PvA    120). — imper.    2"*    sg. 
yahi  Pv  11. i«  (read  yajahi  ?) ;  Mhvs  13,  15  ;  3^^  sg.  yatu 
Mhvs  29,   17;  2""'  pi.  yatha  Mhvs  14.  29;  DhA  1.93.  — 
ppr.  yanto  Mhvs  36,  60  (paccha  y.  walking  behiad)' 
gen.    yantassa    Mhvs    22,    57    (assavegena    y.). — inf. 
yatave  Sn  834.  —  Another  formation  fr.  ya  is  yayati 
(see  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  138),  in  an  intensive  meaning  of 
"  to  drive,  to  move  on  quickly  or  by  special  means," 
e.   g.  in  phrase  yanena  yayati   to  drive  in  a  carriage 
Vin  1. 191  (Pot.  yayeyya) ;  11.276  ;  Sn  654  (ppr.  :  rathass' 
ani  va  yayato)  418   (ger.  :  yanabhumii)  yayitva  yina 
oruyha) ;    J   vi.125.     As   "march"    at   J    vi.449.     In 
special  meaning  "  to  drive,"   i.   e.   "  to  be  driven  or 
affected  by  "  in  expl»  of  the  ending  of  ppr.  med  kama- 
yamdneSn  767  (or  kama-yawa)  at  Nd^  4,  viz.  "  tarihaya 
yayati    niyyati    vuyhati    saghariyati."     Cp.    yana    as 
ending. — pp.  yata.     Caus.  yapeti  &  yapeti  (q.  v.). — 
See  also  anupari",  a°,  upa°,  uy°,  pa°  (aor.  payasi)  pac- 
cuy°,  pari"  ;  and  anuyayati. 

Yatra  (f)  [fr-  ya,  Class.  Sk.  yatra,  a  n.  ag.  formation  like 
netti,   meaning  something  like  "  vehicle,"  that  which 
.keeps    going]    i.  travel,    going    on,    proceeding,    good 
habit  (like  yata  ;  cp.  yatra=anu-vrtti  Halayudha  5,  33) 
S    1.33:     S    1.16  =  63    (trsl"    K.S.,    perhaps    wrongly, 
"  egress  "  :  it  is  more  a  question  of  going  on  through 
life  !).     Perhaps  to  be  classed  under  foil,  meaning  as 
well.  —  2.  going  on,  livelihood,  support  of  life,  main- 
tenance in  stock  phrase  occurring  at  many  places  of  the 
Canon,   viz.   "  puranag  vedanag  patihankhami,  navaQ 
ca  vedanag  na  uppadessami,   yatra  ca  me  bhavissati 
etc."  where   DhsA   404  explains  yatra  by  yapana,  as 
may  be  inferred  also  from  context.     Thus  at  M  i.io 
(where  Neumann  translates  :  "  ein  Fortkommen  haben," 
i.  e.  progress),  355  ;  S  iv.  104  ;  A  11.40  ;  111.388  ;  Nd'  496  ; 
Nd^  540   (correct  devanag   into  vedanag  !) ;   Pug  25 ; 
Dhs  1348  :  Miln  367  :  all  passages  identical.     The  whole 
passage  is  expl""  in  detail  at  Vism  31  sq.  where  yatri 
is    given    with    "  cira-kala-gamana-sankhata    yatra," 
Bdhgh.  thus  taking  it  as  "keeping  going,"  or  "con- 
tinued subsistence"   (longevity  trsl").  ^  In  one  other 
passage  yatra  is  conjectured  for  satra,  viz.  at  SnA  322 
in  reading  y.  -yaga  for  satra  yaga,  where  meaning  y. 
might  be  taken  as  "  customary."     The  ed.  compares 
Sk.  yatsattra,  a  certain  ceremony. 

Yathava  (adj.)  [see  yathava.  It  is  a  comb"  of  a  guija- 
der.  fr.  yatha  and  an  adj.-der.  of  °vant]  sufficient  (lit. 
"  just  as  much  "  ;  i.  e.  such  as  it  is),  sufiSciently  founded, 
logical,  consistent,  exact,  definite,  true  Nd'  275  (where 
tatha  is  expl'*  by  taccha,  bhuta,  yathava,  aviparita) ; 
DhsA  248  (where  miccha-ditthi  is  expH  as  incorrect 
or  illogical  view.  — yathavato  (abl.)  exactly,  truly, 
consistently  DA  1.65  ;  ThA  256 ;  VvA  232.  See  also 
yathavato.  —  The  nearest   synonyms   of  yathava  are 


Yadicchakai) 


II 


Yapeti 


aviparita   (i.   e.  definite)   and   yathabhutai].      See   also 
jathava  and  yathavaka. 

-nama  having  the  name  of  exactitude  PvA  231 
(  +  aviparita-nama).  -mana  pride  of  sufficiency  or 
consistency  VbhA  487  sq.  (and  a°).  -lakkhana  possess- 
ing the  characteristic  of  definiteness  or  logic  Miln  171  ; 
Nett  27  (where  avijja  is  called  "  sabba  dhamma- 
yathiva-asampativedha-lakkhana ").  -vacana  exact, 
logical  or  true  speech  Miln  214  (taccha-vacana,  yathava- 
V.,  aviparlta-v.).  -sarasa  logical  and  with  its  essential 
(sa  +  rasa)  properties  Vism  588,  639. 

Tadicchakag  at  VvA  341  read  as  yadicchakai)  (see  ya°). 

Y&disa  (adj.)  [Vedic  ySdrS  &  yadrta,  yad  +  drsa]  which 
like,  what  like,  whichever,  how  much  ;  in  neg.  sentence  : 
any,  whatever  little.  —  Pv.  11. i"  (  =  yava  mahanto 
PvA  77).  —  Often  comb""  with  kidisa  in  meaning  "  any 
one,  this  or  that,  whoever,"  e.  g.  Vv  50'*  (  =  yo  va  so 
va  pacura-jano  ti  attho  VvA  213).  As  adj.:  yadisi 
(sic  !  =  Sk.  yadrii)  -kidisa  jivika  (no  livelihood,  whatever 
little)  J  VI. 584  (v. 728;  Trenckner,  Miln  p.  423  gives 
V.  732  I),  expl'^by  C  as  "  ya  vasava,  lamaka  ti  attho  "  ; 
yadisai]  kidisarj  danai)  a  gift  of  whatever  kind  Miln, 2 78. 
So  also  with  tadisa :  yadisa  va  tadisa  va  (viz.  kama) 
of  whichever  kind  A  111.5. 

yadisaka= yadisa;  in  correlation  (generalising  sense) 
jadisaka-tadisaka  whatsoever  .  .  .  such,  any  what- 
soever A  IV.  308  ;  S  V.96. 

Yana  (nt.)  [fr.  ya,  as  in  yati.  Cp.  Vedic  yana  and  Lat. 
Janus]  I.  going,  proceeding  J  vi.415  (-l-ayana,  opposed 
to  thana).  —  2.  means  of  motion,  carriage,  vehicle. 
Diflerent  kinds  of  carriages  are  enum^  at  Nd'  145  (on 
Sn  816)  with  hatthi°  (elephant-),  go°  (cow-),  aja° 
(goat-),  mendaka"  (ram-).  ottha°  (camel-?),  khara° 
(donkey-).  Cp.  Miln  276.  — yana  is  one  of  the  requisites 
(carriage  or  other  means  of  locomotion)  of  the  bhikkhu 
&  as  such  included  in  the  deyya-dhamma  or  74  gifts 
(see  yafina  &  deyya-dh.).  Thus  mentioned  with  anna 
pana  vattha  etc.  at  S  1.94 :  A  11.85  ;  Pug  51.  —  Cp.  the 
def°  &  application  of  the  term  yana  as  given  below 
under  yana-sannidhi.  —  See  e.  g.  the  foil,  passages : 
Vin  1.191  (bhikkhu  yanena  yayanti  .  .  .  na  bhikkhave 
yinena  yayitabbag  ;'yo  yayeyya  etc.  :  here  a  "  carriage  " 
is  expressly  forbidden  to  the  bhikkhu  !),  231  (Ambapali 
bhadrani-bhadrani  yinani  yojapetva  bhadrag  yanai) 
abhiriihitva  .  .  .),  242  (same  phrase  with  Mencjaka 
gahapati);  D  1.7,  89,  106;  M  1.366  (yanag  poroseyyai) 
pavara-mani-kuijdalar),  where  w.  11.  on  p.  561  read 
voropeyya  and  oropeyya,  which  Neumann  (unwar- 
rantedly)  adopts  in  his  trsl" :  Miitl.  Sammlung^  1921, 
11.666;  the  C.  accepts  reading  poroseyya  with  expl" 
"  puris-anucchavikai)  yanag");  Dh  323  (  =  hatthiyana- 
dini  DhA  iv.6) ;  J  111.525  sq.  ;  v. 59;  vi.223  (  =  ratha); 
Kvu  599  (Eravano  hatthinago  sahassa-yuttai)  dibbag 
yanar)  ;  trsl""  as  "the  wondrous  elephant  E..  the 
thousand-wise  yoked  celestial  mount."  trsl.  p.  347  (lit. 
vehicle)  Pv  in. 2"  (  =  ratha  or  vayha  etc.  PvA  186); 
PvA  113.  —  iddhi-yana  carriage  of  magic  power  Miln 
276  ;  deva°  godly  carriage  Miln  276  ;  applied  to  the  8  fold 
Aryan  Path  at  Sn  139  (=devalokai)  yapetug  samat- 
thata  .  .  .  attha-samapatti-yanai)  SnA  184).  Simi- 
larly of  the  Path  :  magg'  atthangika-yana  (-yayini)  Th 
2,  389  (=attbangika-magga-sankhata  ariya-yana  ThA 
257);  and  brahma-yana  dhamma-yana  "  the  very  best 
&  excellent  carriage  "  as  Ep.  of  magga  S  v.  5,  cp.  J  iv.  100. 
Cp.  the  later  terms  maha  and  hina-yana.  See  also 
yanikata. 

-ugghate  shaking  or  jolting  of  the  carriage  Vin  11.276  ; 
DhA  111.283.  -gata  having  ascended  the  carriage 
D  1. 1 26.  -putosa  CputoU)  provision  bag  on  a  carriage 
(provision  for  the  journey  ?)  Vism  328  (so  read  for 
pattoU).  -bhumi  carriage-ground,  i.  e.  the  road  as  far 
as  accessible  to  a  carriage  D  1.89;  Sn  418.     -sanmdhi 


storing  up  of  carriages  or  means  of  locomotion  D  1.6 
(with  expl"  at  DA  1.82  as  follows :  yanai)  nama  vayhag 
ratho  sakatag  sandamanika  patanki  ti.  Na  pan'  etar) 
pabbajitassa  yanag,  upahana  yanar)  pana) ;  Sn  924 
(=anna-pana-vattha-yana-sannidhi  Nd'  372).  -sukha 
pleasures  of  riding  and  driving  Kvu  209 ;  cp.  Kvu  trsl. 
127. 

Yanaka  (nt.)  [fr.  yana]  a  (smaU)  cart,  carriage,  waggon, 
vehicle  J  in.49  (°g  piiretva,  or  a  hunter's  cart) ;  iv.45  ; 
DhA  1.325  (sukha°),  391  (pakati°,  an  ordinary  waggon). 
-°0  pajeti  to  drive  a  cart  J  11. 112,  143  ;  111.51. 

-upatthambha(na)  waggon-prop  KhA  44  (°ni  v.  1., 
see  Appendix  to  Index  Pj.);  VbhA  234  ("nika ;  illus- 
trating the  shape  of  the  teeth). 

Yanika  &  Yaniya  (adj.)  (-")  [fr.  yana]  i.  (lit.)  leading  to, 
conducive  to,  as  °yaniya  in  deva°  magga  D  1.2 15,  & 
Brahma"  magga  the  way  leading  to  the  Brahma-world 
D  1.220.  —  2.  (in  appl""  meaning,  cp.  yanikata)  °yanika 
one  who  has  become  used  to,  whose  habit  it  is  .  .  .,  in 
vipassana"  &  samatha"  at  Vism  588. 

Yanikata  [yana-l-kata,  with  i  for  a  in  comp"  with  kf, 
perhaps  also  in  analogy  with  bahuli-kata]  made  a  habit 
of,  indulged  in,  acquired,  mastered  (cp.  expl"  Ps  1.172  : 
"yattha  yattha  akankhati  tattha  tattha  vasippatto 
hoti  balappatto  etc.").  The  expression  is  to  be  com- 
pared with  yatinuyagin  &  yatra,  similarly  to  which  it 
is  used  only  in  one  stock  phrase.  It  comes  very  near 
yatra  in  meaning  "  that  which  keeps  one  going,"  i.  e. 
an  acquired  &  thoroughly  mastered  habit,  an  "  altera 
natura."  It  is  not  quite  to  the  point  when  Dial  ii.i  10 
(following  ChUders  ?)  translate  as  "  to  use  as  a  vehicle." 

Occurring  with  identical  phraseology,   viz.   bahuli- 

kate  yani-kata  vatthu-kate  anutthita  paricita  susa- 
maraddha  in  application  to  the  4  iddhipada  at  D  11. 103  ; 
A  IV.309;  S  V.260;  Miln  140;  to  metta  at  M  111.97; 
S  1.116;  11.264;  1V.200;  V.259;  A  V.342  ;  J  11.61  ;  Miln 
198.     Expl""  at  Ps  1. 172,  cp.  II. 122,  130. 

Y&nin  (adj.)  [fr.  yana]  one  who  drives  in  a  carriage  J 
iii.525  =  iv.223  (where  read  yani  va  for  yan  iva).  At 
the  latter  passage  the  C.  somewhat  obscurely  expl*  as 
"  sappi-tela-yanena  gacchanto  viya  "  ;  at  111.526  the 
expl"  is  simply  "  yanena  gacchanto  viya." 

YSpana  (&  yapana)  (nt.)  [fr.  yapeti.  Cp.  Epic  &  Class. 
Sk  yapana]  keeping  going,  sustenance,  feeding,  nourish- 
ment, existence,  living.  Esp.  in  one  standing  comb" 
respecting  the  feeding  and  keeping  of  the  body  "  ka- 
yassa  thitiya  yapanaya  etc."  (for  the  maintenance  of 
the  body)  in  yatra  passage  :  see  yatra  2  ;  in  which  it  is 
expl*  at  Vism  32  by  "  pavattiya  avicched'  atthag. 
cira-kala-tthif  atthag  "  i.  e.  for  the  preservation  of 
life.—  Further  at  J  1.66  (alam  me  ettakag  yapanaya); 
v  387  (thokag  mama  yapana-mattag  eva) ;  DhA  iv.210 
(yapana-mattag  dhanag);  PvA  28.  —  Used  more  freq. 
together  with  shortened  form  yapana;  in  standard 
phrase  vutti  palana,  yapana  yapana  cara  (cp.  yapeti) 
at  Vism  145;  DhsA  149,  167.  Or  similarly  as  f .  with 
spelling  yapana  &  yapana;  yapana  yapana  iriyana 
vattana  palana  at  Dhs  19,  82,  295,  3_8o,_44i,  716-  At 
DhsA  404  yapana  is  used  as  syn.  of  yatra. 

Yapanlya  (adj.)  [grd.  formation  fr.  yapeti]  fit  or  sufficient 
for  supporting  one's  life  Vin  1.59,  212,  253.  —  Cp.  BSk. 
yapaniyatara  a  more  healthy  state  Divy  1 10. 

Yapeti  (&  yapeU)  [Caus.  of  yati]  i  ('jt)- (»)  i°  ^fj:" 
intensive  as  well  as  intrs.  sense ;  in  the  latter  also  with 
short  a  as  yapeti  and  then  comb"  with  yapeti.  m  stock 
phrase  defining  carati  "  to  go,"  "  to  be  "  (or  viharati) 
with  synonyms  iriyati  vattati  paleti  yapeti  yapeti  at 
Nd»  237  ■  Vbh  252  ;  DhsA  167.  Besides  singly  (yapeti) 
at  DhsA  149.  —  (b)  to  cause  to  go,  to  make  someone 


Yapya 


12 


Yava 


go  (to),  to  bring  to,  lead  to  (ace.)  J  vi.458  (sasenava- 
hanai)  yapesi) ;  SnA  184  (devalokar)  yapetui)  samattha 
fit  to  bring  one  to  the  d-world).  —  (c)  to  get  on,  move, 
to  be  active  DhA  i.io  (sarire  yapente) ;  iv.17  (iriya- 
pathena). — -2.  (fig.)  to  keep  going  (both  irs.  &  intrs.), 
to  keep  up,  esp.  to  keep  oneself  going  or  alive,  to  live 
by  (instr.)  [cp.  BSk.  yapayati  Divy  93,  150,  196,  292, 
293,  471,  488;  Av^  1.209]  D  1. 166  (ekissa  dattiya 
on  only  one  alms);  Pug  56;  J  11.204;  111.67;  IV.125; 
VI.532- (uflchena) ;  Pv  1.5'  (ito  dinnena  yapenti  peta) ; 
1. 11';  in. 2*  (tava  dinnena  yapessanti  kurflrino) ;  PvA 
27,  29  (  =  attabhavar)  yapeti  =  upajivati). 

Yapya  (adj.)  [shortened  grd. -format  ion  foryapaniya.  'Sk. 
yapya  in  slightly  diff.  meaning]  i.  (lit.)  fit  for  move- 
ment or  locomotion  :  in  "yana  sedan-chair,  palanquin 
Abhp.  373. — 2.  (fig.)  concerning  the  preservation  of 
life,  vital,  in  °rogin  one  who  suffers  from  a  vital  disease, 
lit.  a  disease  concerning  the  upkeep  of  the  body  Vism 
33  (trsl"  Path  of  Purity  39  :  "  patient  of  long-suffering," 
from  a  different  point  of  view,  viz.  of  time  only,  like 
Bdhgh.). 

Yama  [fr.  yam  in  both  meanings  of  yamati  &  yama'] 
I.  restraint,  only  as  cpd.  catu-yama  4-fold  restraint 
D  1.57;  111.48;  S  1.66;  M  1.377;  Vism  416.  Cp.  Dial. 
1.75'.  — •  2.  a  watch  of  the  night.  There  are  3  watches, 
given  as  pafhama,  majjhima  &  pacchima  (first,  middle 
&  last)  Nd'  377  sq.  ;  or  purima,  m.  &  pacchima  Nd^  631 
(under  sada).  —  A  1.114;  iv.168;  Dh  157  (one  of  the 
3;  interpreted  as  the  3  vayas  at  DhA  111.138);  J  1.243 
(tisu  yamesu  ekasmir)  yame) ;  Mhvs  21,  33;  PvA  217, 
280.  —  3.  (usually  pi.  Yama  deva)  one  who  belongs  to 
Yama  or  theruler  of  the  Underworld  ;  a  subject  of, Yama  ; 
the  realm  of  Yama; — pi.  inhabitants  of  Yamaloka 
A  1. 210  (yama  deva);  SnA  244  ("bhavana  the  abode 
of  the  Y.);  KhA  166  (Yamato  yava  Akanitthar)  from 
the  Underworld  to  the  Highest  Heaven) ;  Vism  225 
(Yama);  VbhA  519  (Yama);  VvA  246  (id.);  ThA  169 
(Y.  deva). 

-kalika  of  a  restricted  time,  for  a  (relatively)  short 
period  (lit.)  only  for  one  watch  of  the  night,  but  longer 
than  yava-kalika  temporary.  It  is  one  of  the  three 
regulation -terms  for  specified  food,  viz.  y.-k.,  sattaha- 
kalika  &  yavajivika,  or  short  period,  of  a  week's  dura- 
tion, and  life-long  food  Vin  :v.83,  86,  176,  311  ;  to  which 
is  added  yava-kalika,  temporary  at  Vin  1.251  (where 
mutual  relations  of  the  4  are  discussed),  -gandika(g) 
kotteti  to  beat  the  block  of  restraint  (?),  i.  e.  exercise 
self-control  (?)  (or  does  it  belong  to  yama  3  ?)  KhA 
233- 

Yayati  see  yati. 

Yayin  (adj.)  (-=)  [fr.  ya,  see  yati]  going,  going  on  to;  in 
yana  yayini  (f.)  Th  2,  389  (maggatthangika"  having 
ascended  the  carriage  of  the  8-fold  Path ;  expl""  by 
"  ariya-yayena  nibbana-purai)  yayini  upagata "  ThA 
257)- 

Yava  (abv.)  [Vedic  yavat  as  nt.  of  yavant  used  as  adv.  in 
meanings  i  &  2.  The  final  t  is  lost  in  Pali,  but  restored 
as  d  in  certain  combinations  :  see  below  2.  —  Cp.  tava  & 
kiva].  I  (as  prep.)  up  to  (a  point),  as  far  as,  how  far, 
so  far  that  (cp.  tava  I),  both  temporal  and  local,  used 
either  with  absolute  form  of  noun  or  adj.  (base),  or  nam., 
or  abl.  or  ace.  —  (a)  absolute  :  y.  sahassa  up  to  1000. 

PvA  21;  y.    sattama  up  to  the  seventh   D   1.238. 

(b)  nom.  :  y.  deva-bhava-sampatti  up  to  the  attain- 
ment of  a  deva  existence  PvA  167;  y.  satta  divasj  up 
to  7  days,  as  long  as  7  days  PvA  31.  (c)  with  abl. :  y. 
brahmaloka  up  to  the  highest  heaven  A  111.17;  Y- 
mekhala  down  to  her  girdle  PvA  46 ;  yava  ayu-pariyo- 
sana  up  to  the  end  of  life  PvA  200  ;  y.  ajjadivasa  till 
the  present  day  Mhvs  32,  23  ;  y.  kapp'  avasana  up  to 
the  end  of  the  world  Vism  688  (where  SnA  5  in  same 


passage    reads    ace.    °avasanar));    y.    kala-ppavedana 
J    i.ii8-|-DhA  1.248;   y.   mukhasma  up  to  the  brim 
Miln  238  ;  yava  bhumm'  avalambare  hang  down  to  the 
ground  Pv  11. lo^.  —  (d)  with  ace.  y.  Bodhiman^ai)  as 
far  as  the  Bodhimanda  Mhvs  30,  88 ;  y.  tatiyakar)  for 
the  3""  time   (i.  e.  the   last   time;    ascending  scale!) 
D  1.95;  y.  tatiyag  id.  Vin  iv.236  samanubhasitabba) ; 
Sn  iu6  ;  J  :v.i26.  —  Freq.  in  phrase  yava  jlvag  (see under 
cpds).      Sattamasar)  cha  panca  cattaro  ti  vatva  ySva 
temasar)  yacigsu  "  after  having  said  7,  6,  5,  4,  months 
they  begged  <fo!£/n  <o  3  months"  PvA  20.  — With  starting- 
point,  local:  padatalato  .  .  .  yavakesaggai)  from  the 
sole  of  the  foot  to  the  tip  of  the  hair  ("  from  tip  to 
toe")  DhA  1.70;   (in  modal  sense:)  pajhavi-kasinato 
pa^thaya   yava   odata-kasinag   "  from  the  one  to  the 
other  "  Vism  374.     Similarly  in  correlation  yava-tava 
(see  tava  I.)  as  far— so  far,  until — so  long  :  y.  raja  agac- 
chati  tava  ubho  ramissama  J  iv.190;  hettha  pi  yava 
Avici  upari  yava   Akanittha-bhavanar),   tava   addasa 
Vism  392  ;  yava  nai)  anemi  tava  idh'  eva  tittha  DhA 
III. 194.  —  2.  (as  adv.)  how,   how  much,   to  which  or 
what  extent,  as  great  or  as  much  (as)  (cp.  tava  11. 2), 
usually  in  comb"  yava  maha  (mahantar)),  e.  g.  yava 
mahantai)  how  big  PvA  77  (  =  yadisai)  of  Pv  11. i"); 
VvA  325  =  DhA  1.29  (yava  mahantag).     Also  in  other 
comb"^  like  yava  dukkha  niraya  how  (or   as)   many 
painful  purgatories  Sn  678 ;  yava  dukkha  tiracchana- 
yoni  M  111.169;  yava  papo  ayai)  Devadatto  alakkhiko 
.  .  .  "how    very    wicked    is    this    D."     Vin    11. 196 
Further  in  comb"  with  attha(r)),  and  eva,  in  which  cases 
the  final  d  is  restored,  or  may  be  regarded  as  euphonic. 
Thus  yavad-atthai)  as  far  as  need  be,  as  much  as  you  like 
(with  imper.)  Pv  IV.5'  (khadassu  y.) ;  UbhA  504  (  =  yat- 
takag  icchati  tattakar));  J  v.338  ;  PvA  217  (gaijhahi). 
Cp.  Vin  III. 37  (yavadatthar)  katva  "  pleasing  herself  "). 
—  As  adj.  sufficient,  plenty   M   1.12    (paripunna  .  .  . 
suhita  y.);    PvA   24    (  =  pahuta).     yavad-eva  [cp.  the 
similar  tava -d. -eva]  "  as  much  as  it  is  (in  extent)  "  i.  e. 
with  limitation  as  far  as  is  necessary,  up  to  (i.  e.  not 
further   or   more   than),    ever   so   much,  as   much   as 
you  like,  at  least ;  (then  :)  as  far  as,  in  short,  altogether, 
indeed. — The   same    idea    as    our    def"    is    conveyed 
by  Bdhgh's  at  SnA   503   (on   Sn  p.   140)  "  paricched' 
avadharana-vacanar),"    and    at    DhA    11.73    "  avadhi- 
paricchedana  "  :  giving  a  limitation,  or  saying  up  to  the 
limit.     S  11.2  76  ;  Sn  p.  140  ;  Dh  72  ;  and  in  stock  phrase 
"  n'eva  davaya  .  .  .  yavad  eva  imassa  kayassa  fhitiya 
.  .  ."   ("  in  short  ") ;  see  passages  under  yatra.     The 
expl"  of  yavad  eva  in  this  phrase  as  given  at  DhsA  403 
runs  :  "  ahar'  aharaije  payojanassa  pariccheda-niyama- 
dassanar),"  of  which  the  trsl"  Expos.  11.512   is  "  so  as 
to  suflSce  signifies  the  limit  of  the  result  of  taking  food." 
Neumann's  trsl»  at  M  i.io  is  "but  only."  —  Note.  In 
the  stock  phrase  of  the  Buddha's  refusal  to  die  until  his 
teaching  has  been  fully  proclaimed  (Mahaparinibbana- 
sutta)  "among  gods  and  men"  D  11. 106  (=114,  219; 
HI. 122;   A   IV. 311)  "  yava-deva-manussehi  suppakasi- 
tag  "  (trsl"  Dial,  ii.i  13  :  "  until,  in  a  word,  it  shall  have 
been  well  proclaimed  among  men")  we  are  inclined 
to  consider  the  reading  yava   deva°  as  original  and 
better  than  yavad-eva,  although  Rhys   Davids  {Dial. 
11.236)  is  in  favour  of  the  latter  being  the  original.     Cf. 
K.S.  11.75  «■     The  phrase  seems  to  require  yava  only 
as  continuation  of  the  preceding  yava's ;  moreover  the 
spirit  of  the  message  is  for  the  whole  of  the  worlds. 
Cp.  BSk.  yavad-deva  manusyebhalj  Divy  20i.     It  is 
not  a  restriction  or  special  definition  of  meaning  at  this 
passage.     But  may  it  not  be  taken  as  a  summing  up  = 
"in  short"?     It  is  left  doubtful.     If  it  is  =  yava,  then 
we  should  expect  yava  na,  as  in  the  preceding  sentence, 
if  it  is  yavad  eva  the  meaning  "  not  more  than  made 
known  by  men  "  seems  out  of  place ;  in  this  case  the 
meaning  "  at  least  "  is  preferable.     A  similar  case  of 
insertion  of  a  euphonic  consonant  m  (or  is  it  the  a-  stem 
nt  in  °i)  instead  of  °t  as  in  yavat  ?)  we  find  in  the  phrase 


Yavaka 


13 


Yittha 


yavam  pi  at  J  v.508  (with  Pot.  titthejrya ;  see  below  3  ; 
C.  expl""  by  yattakag  kalar)).  — The  form  yavade  (for 
yavad  eva)  also  occurs  (like  tavade  for  tavad  eva)  at 
M  11.207.  —  For  yad-idag  we  find  yavan  c'  idag  at  A 
III. 34  ;  M  III. 169, — ^The  latter  form  (yavar),  as  above 
J  v.508)  is  better  to  be  grouped  directly  under  yavant, 
where  more  cS:  similar  cases  are  given.  • — 3.  (as  conj.) 
so  long  as,  whilst,  until  (cp.  tava  11. 3,  4;  in.);  either 
with  Fut.  or  Pot.  or  Prohibitive.  E.g.  'S  1.202  (ahu 
pure  dhammapadesu  chando  y.  viragena  samagamimha  ; 
trsl"  "  until  I  met  with  that  Pure  thing  and  Holy  ") ; 
J  VI.266  (y.  amantaye) ;  PvA  4  {tdva  ayyo  agametu 
ySva  ayar)  puriso  .  .  .  paniyaij  pivissati  or  :  "  you  shall 
wait  please,  until  he  shall  drink").  Neg.  yava  .  .  . 
na  not  until,  unless,  as  long  as  not  D  11. 106  (na  parib- 
bayissami  .  .  .  yava  .  .  .  na  bhavissati) ;  S  1.47  (y. 
na  gadhag  labhati) ;  Dh  69  (yattakag  kalai)  na  .  .  . 
DhA  11.50). 

-kalika  (cp.  tava  11. i)  "  as  far  as  the  time  or  occasion 
goes,"  occasional,  temporary,  at  Vin  1.251  in  foil, 
context  (cp.  yamakalika) :  "  kappati  .  .  .  yavaka- 
likena,  yamakalikai)  na  kappati,  kappati  yavakalikena 
sattaha  kalikai)  na  k.  etc.  with  foil,  yavajivikai)  &  the 
same  with  kappati  yama-kalikena,  sattaha-kalikena- 
na  k. ;  kappati  satt",  yavajiv,  na  k."  The  reply  of  the 
Buddha  is  :  yavakalikena  yamakalikai)  tadahu  patigga- 
hitai)  kale  kappati  vikale  na  kappati  (same  with  satta- 
hakalikar)  &  yavajivikai]);  followed  by  yamakalikena 
.  .  .  sattahakalikai)  &  yavajivikai)  ;  sattahakalikena 
.  .  .  javajivikar)."  -jivar)  (adv.)  for  the  length  of  one's 
life,  life-long,  all  one's  life,  for  life  (-time)  Vin  1.80 ; 
11.197  ;  111.23  ;  It  78  ;  Dh  64,  284  ;  Vism  94  ;  DhA  1.45  ; 
PvA  76,  110  (  =  satatar)).  Cp.  BSk.  yavajlva-sukhya 
Avi  11.37.  -tajjani  (-vinita)  led  only  as  long  as  kept 
under  a  threat  A  1.285  (o"^  of  the  3  parisa's ;  so  read 
with  v.l.  for  T.  yavatajjha").  -tatiyaka  "  as  much  as 
3  times,"  name  of  the  last  4  Sanghadisesa  offences, 
because  before  the  punishment  is  inflicted  warning  must 
have  been  given  3  times:  see  passage  of  Vin  111.186 
under  yava  t-ihai).  -tihai]  (read  as  yavat-ihai),  the 
latter  =  aha^  day)  as  many  days  as  .  .  . ;  in  foil,  pas- 
sage:  uddittha  .  .  .  terasa  sanghadisesa  dhamma,  nava 
patham-apattika  cattaro  yavatatiyaka,  yesar)  bhikkhu 
aafiatarari  va  aiinatarar)  va  apajjitva  yavatihai]  janag 
paticchadeti  tavatihai)  tena  bhikkhuna  akama  pari- 
vatthabbai)  (for  as  many  days  as  he  knowingly  conceals 
his  sin,  for  so  many  days  .  .  .),  parivuttha-parivasena 
bhikkhuna  uttarir;  charattai)  bhikkhumanattaya  pati- 
pajjitabbai).     Vin  111. 186. 

Yavaka  [  =  yavaka]  a  dish  prepared  of  barley  J  vi.373 
(  =  yavata5dula-bhatta  C). 

7&vataka  (adj.)  [fr.  yava,  as  tavataka  fr.  tava]  as  much 
as,  as  many  as,  as  far  as,  whatever ;  usually  in  correl. 
with  tavataka  e.g.  Vin  1.83  (yavataka  .  .  .  t.);  D 
11.18  (y.  kayo  t.  vyamo) ;  Nd^  235'  (y  °g  fleyyai)  t  °r) 
iiai;iai)) ;  or  similarly  M  1.397  (y.  katha-sallapo  .  .  . 
sabbai)  tag  .  .  .);  PvA  103  (yavataka=yavanto). — • 
f.  yavatika:  yavatika  gati  tavatikai)  gantva  A  1.112  ; 
y.  nagassa  bhumi  as  far  as  there  was  ground  for  the 
elephant  D  1.50 ;  similarly :  y.  yanassa  bh.  as  far  as 
the  carriage-road  D  1.89,  106,  108 ;  y.  fiavassa  bh. 
Nett  25. 

Tivati  (indecl.)  [abl.  of  yavant  in  adv.  use  cp.  tavata) 
as  far  as,  like  as,  in  comparison  with,  regarding,  because 
Dh  258  (na  tena  paijdito  hoti  y.  bahu  bhasati  =  yatta- 
kena  karaijena  DhA  111.383),  259,  266  (similarly,  C.= 
yattakena) ;  Sn  759  (yavaf  atthi  ti  vuccati ;  expl*  at 
SnA  509  as  "  yivata  ete  cha  arammapa  '  atthi '  ti  vuc- 
canti,  vacana-vyattayo  veditabbo");  yavata  ariyag 
paramai)  silar),  nihai)  tattha  attano  sama-samai) 
samanupassami  kuto  bhiyyo  "  compared  with  this  sila 
I  do  not  see  anyone  quite  equal  to  myself,  much  less 


greater."  D  1.74  yavata  ariyai)  ayatanag  yavata 
vanippatho  idag  agga-nagarag  bhavissati  Pataliputtar) 
puta-bhedanar)  Vin  1.229  =  Ud  88  =  D  11.87  (concerning 
a  most  splendid  site,  and  a  condition  for  trade,  this  Pat. 
will  be  the  greatest  town ;  trsl"  Dial,  as  far  as  Aryan 
people  resort,  as  far  as  merchants  travel  .  .  .).  yavata 
satt'  avasa  yavata  bhavaggag  ete  agga  ete  sattha  [read 
settha]  lokasmii)  yad  idam  arahanto  "  as  far  as  the 
abodes  of  beings,  as  far  as  heaven,  these  are  the  highest, 
these  are  the  best.  I  mean  the  Arahants."  S  111.84. 
yavata  dhamma  sankhata  va  asankhata  va  virago  .  .  . 
aggam  akkhaj^ati,  yad-idag  mada-nimmadano  .  .  . 
A  ii.34  =  It  88  ;  "  of  all  the  things  definite  or  indefinite  : 
passionlessness  deserves  the  highest  praise,  I  mean  the 
disintoxication  of  pride  etc."  The  expl"  at  Vism  293 
takes  yavata  (grammatically  incorrectly)  as  n.  pl.= 
yattaka.  -yavata  jagato  gati  as  far  as  (like  as)  the 
course  of  the  world  It  120. 

Yavant  (pron.  rel.)  [cp.  Sk.  yavant ;  same  formation  as 
demonstr.  pron.  tavant,  of  which  the  P.  uses  the  adv.  nt. 
tava  (t)  form  more  frequently  than  the  adj.  tavant. 
The  only  case  so  far  ascertained  where  tavant  occurs 
as  adj.  is  J  V. 72  (see  below)]  i.  yavant  as  a rf;. .•  as  many 
(as)  Dh  337  (yavant'  ettha  samagata  as  many  as  are 
assembled  here) ;  J  v. 72  (yavanto  uda-bindiini  .  .  . 
tavanto  gandii  jayetha;  C.  on  p.  74  expl'  by  yatta- 
kani ;  yavata  pi.  as  many  as  Pv  11. i"  ;  yavanto  Pv  11.7" 
(  =  yavataka  PvA  103);  J  v. 376  (detha  vatthani  .  .  . 
yavanto  eva  icchati  as  many  as  he  wants).  —  2.  yavat 
(nt.)  used  adverbially.  The  examples  and  meanings 
given  here  are  really  to  be  combined  with  those  given 
under  yava*  (yavad°).  It  is  hardly  possible  to  dis- 
tinguish clearly  between  the  2  categories ;  the  t  may 
well  have  been  reduced  to  d  or  been  replaced  by  another 
sandhi  consonant.  However,  the  specific  Pali  use  of 
yava  (like  tava)  justifies  a  separate  treatment  of  yava 
in  that  form  only.  —  yavat  occurs  only  in  comb"  with 
ca  (where  we  may  assume  either  a  peculiar  nt.  form 
yavar)  :  see  yava  2  ;  or  an  assimilation  of  t  to  ii  before 
c.  —  The  form  yava  mahantai)  may  originally  have 
been  a  yavar)  m.)  as  yavari  ca  "  and  that,"  "  i.  e.,"  how 
much,  however  much,  so  great  S  1.149  (passa  yavan  ca 
te  idai)  aparaddhai)  :  see  how  great  a  mistake  you  have 
made  in  this);  It  91,  92  (passa  yavaii  ca  araka  & 
santike  :  see  how  far  and  near),  yavan  c'  idag  stands 
for  yad-idai)  (see  ya°  4)  in  peculiar  use  of  restriction 
at  M.  III.  169;  S  II. 1 78;  A  111.34.  —  3-  The  nt.  form 
yavat  further  occurs  in  foil.  cpds.  :  "ajrukag  (better  as 
yavat"  than  yavata")  as  long  as  life  lasts,  for  a  lifetime 
Mhvs  3,  41  ;  VvA  196  (as  adj.  °ayuka  dibba-sampatti) ; 
PvA  66,  73,  133  ;  °icchakai]  as  much  as  is  desired,  ac- 
cording to  one's  wishes  Pug  12,  25;  Vism  154  (here 
spelt  yavad-icchakarj) ;  "ihag  see  under  yava  (cpds.). 
— •  instr.  yavata :  see  sep. 

Yavetaddhi  at  M  11.47  is  an  obscure  expression.  The 
reading  is  established ;  otherwise  one  might  think  of  a 
corrupted  yav(a)  etad  ahos!(pi)  or  yava-d-ev'-ahosi 
"  was  it  really  so  ?"  or  :  "  did  you  really  have  that 
thought?"  Neumann,  Mittl.  Sammlung^  1921,  11.381, 
trsl''  "  gar  so  sehr  drangt  es  dich  "  (are  you  in  such  a 
hurry?),  and  proposes  reading  (on  p.  686,  note)  yav' 
etado  hi  pi,  leaving  us  wondering  what  etado  might  be. 

—  Could  it  be  a  distorted  yayetar  (n.  ag.  of  yayeti, 
Caus.  yi)? 

Yittba  [pp.  of  yajati  with  a  petrified  sandhi  y.  ;  Vedic  isfa] 
med.:  having  sacrificed  D  1.138  (maha-yai\iiar)  y.  raja). 

—  pats.:  sacrificed,  (nt.)  sacrifice  D  1.55  (dinna,  y. 
huta);  expl*  at  DA  1.165  by  "mahayaga"  Vbh  328. 
(id.);  J  1.83  (y.-)-huta);  iv.19  (  =  yajita  C);  v.49 ; 
VI. 527.  —  duyyittha  not  properly  sacrificed,  a  sacrifice 
not  according  to  rites  J  vi.522.  In  specific  Buddhistic 
sense  "  given,  offered  as  alms,  spent  as  liberal  gift  " 
Vin  1.36;  J  1. 168  =  A  11.44;  M  1.82.     Dh  108  (yar)  kiflci 


Yidha 


14 


Yuta 


yitthai)  va  hutar)  va  ;  DhA  11.234  =  yebhuyyena  raangala- 
kiriya-divasesu  dinna-danag).  —  suyittha  well  given  or 
spent  A  11.44;  ThA  40;  Vv  34*'  (in  both  senses;  VvA 
155  expl''  "  maha-yaga-vasena  yitthar)"). 

yidha  in  ma  yidha  at  Vin  1.54  is  to  be  read  ma-y-idha,  the 
y  being  an  euphonic  consonant  (see  y.). 

Yoga  (nt.)  [fr.  ynj;  Vedic  yuga  (to  which  also  yoga)  = 
Gr.  hryiiv  ;  Lat.  jugum^Goth.  juk  ;  Ohg.  juh  ;  E.  yoke  ; 
Lith.  jiingas]  i.  the  yoke  of  a  plough  (usually)  or  a 
carriage  DhA  1.24  (yugarj  givar)  badhati  presses  on  the 
neck);  PvA  127  (ratha°);  Sdhp  468  (of  a  carriage). 
Also  at  Sn  834  in  phrase  dhonena  yugag  samagama 
which  Bdhgh.  (SnA  542)  expl''  as  " dhuta-kilesena  bud- 
dhena  saddhig  yugaggahar)  samapanno,"  i.  e.  having 
attained  mastery  together  with  the  pure  Buddha.  Neu- 
mann, Sn  trsl'  not  exactly :  "  weil  abgeschuttelt  ist 
das  Joch "  (but  dhona  means  "  pure ").  See  also 
below  "nangyila.  —  2 .  (what  is  yoked  or  fits  under  one 
yoke)  a  pait,  couple ;  appl*  to  objects,  as  -"  :  dussa"  a 
pair  of  robes  S  v. 71. ;  DhA  iv.ii  ;  PvA  53 ;  sataka"  id. 
J  1.8.  9;  PvA  46;  vattha"  id.  J  iv.172.  — tapassi°  a 
pair  of  ascetics  Vv  22'";  diita°  a  pair  of  messengers 
S  IV. 194;  savaka°  of  disciples  D  11. 4;  S  1.155;  n.191  ; 
V.164;  in  general:  purisa"  (cattari  p.-yugani)  (4)  pairs 
of  men  S  iv.272  sq.  =  It  88  ;  in  verse  at  Vv  44^1  and  53'  ; 
expl''  at  VJsm  219  as  follows :  yugala-vasena  pathama- 
magga-ttho  phala-tfho  ti  idam  ekag  yugalan  ti  evag 
cattari  purisa-yugajani  honti.  Practically  the  same  as 
"  attha  purisa-puggala."  Referring  to  "  pairs  of  sins  " 
(so  the  C.)  in  a  somewhat  doubtful  passage  at  J  1.374  : 
sa  mangala-dosa-vitivatto  yuga -yog'  adhigato  narjatum 
eti ;  where  C.  expP  yuga  as  kilesa  mentioned  in  pairs 
(like  kodho  ca  upanaho,  or  makkho  ca  palaso),  and 
yoga  as  the  4  yojanas  or  yogas  (oghas  ?),  viz.  kama°. 
bhava",  ditthi°,  avi)ja°.  —  Also  used  like  an  adj.  num. 
in  meaning  "  two,"  e.  g.  yugag  va  navai)  two  boats 
Dpvs  1.76.  —  3.  (connected  by  descent)  generation,  an 
age  D  :.ii3  (yava  sattama  pitamaha-yuga  "back 
through  seven  generations."  Cp.  DA  1.281  ;  ayu- 
ppamaija);  KhA  141  (id.);  J  1.345  (purisa").  There 
are  also  5  ages  (or  stages)  in  the  [life  of  the]  sa^ana 
(see  Brethren,  p.  339) :  vimutti.  samadhi,  sila,  suta, 
dana. 

<anta  (-vata)  (storm  at)  the  end  of  an  age  (of  men  or 
the  world),  whirlwind  J  1.26.  -adhana  putting  the 
yoke  on,  harnessing  M  1.446.  -ggaha  "  holding  the 
yoke,"  i.  e.  control,  dominance,  domineering,  im- 
periousness;  used  as  syn.  for  palasa  at  Vbh  357=  Pug 
19  (so  read  for  yuddha"),  expl*  by  sama-dhura-gga- 
haijai)  "  taking  the  leadership  altogether  "  at  VbhA 
492.  See  further  Nd^  177;  VvA  71  (yugaggaha-lak- 
khano  palaso) ;  SnA  542  ;  DhA  in. 57  (°katha=sarambha- 
katha).  -°j;  ganhali  to  take  the  lead,  to  play  the 
usurper  or  lord  J  in. 259  (C.  for  T.  palasin) ;  DhA  111.346. 
-ggahin  trying  to  outdo  somebody  else,  domineering, 
imperious  VvA  140.  -cchidda  the  hole  of  a  yoke  Th 
2,  500  (in  famous  simile  of  blind  turtle),  -nangalayoke 
and  plough  (so  taken  by  Bdhgh.  at  SnA  135)  Sn  77  = 
S  1.172  ("plough  fitted  with  yoke"  Mrs.  Rh.D.). 
-nandha  (with  v.  1.  "naddha,  e.  g.  at  Ps  n.92  sq.  ;  KhA  2  7 
in  T.)  putting  a  yoke  on,  yoking  together  ;  as  adj.  con- 
gruous, harmonious;  as  nt.  congruity,  association, 
common  cause  Ps  11.98  =  Vism  682  ;  Ps  11.92  sq.  ("vagga 
ft  °katha);  KhA  27  (nt.) ;  Vism  149  ("dhamma  things 
fitting  under  one  yoke,  integral  parts,  constituents), 
-mattai)  (adv.)  "  only  the  distance  of  a  plough,"  i.  e. 
only  a  little  (viz.  the  most  necessary)  distance  ahead, 
with  expressions  of  sight :  pekkhati  Sn  410  ("  no  more 
than  a  fathom's  length  "  Rh.D.  in  Early  Buddhism  32) ; 
pekkhin  Miln  398  ;  "dassavin  Vism  19  (okkhitta-cak- 
khu-(-)  pekkhamdna  SnA  116  (as  expl"  of  okkhitta- 
cakkhu).  -sataka  (  =  s.-yuga)  a  pair  of  robes,  two  robes 
Dpvs  VI. 82. 


Yagala  &  Yogala  (nt.)  [Class.  Sk.  yugala ;  in  relation  to 
yuga  the  same  as  Lat.  jugulum  ("  yoke-bone ")  to 
jugum.  Cp.  also  Or.  ZtvyXi)  yoking  strap]  a  pair, 
couple  J  1. 1 2  (yugala-yugaja-bhuta  in  pairs),  500 
(bahu°) ;  vi.270  (thana°  the  2  breasts);  Vism  2 19;  VbhA 
51  (yugajato  jointly,  in  pairs) ;  the  six  "  pairs  of  adapt- 
abilities "  or  "words,"  Yog.  18-23,  Mystic  30  sq. ; 
cp.  Dhs  40  sq.  Also  used  as  adj.  (like  y'uga)  in  phrase 
yugalar)  karoti  to  couple,  join,  unite  Dpvs  1.77  ;  VvA  2  33. 

Yagalaka  (nt.)  [fr.  yugala]  a  pair  Tikp  66 ;  VbhA  73. 

Ynja  (adj.)  (-°)  [either  a  direct  root-derivation  fr.  ynj, 
corresponding  to  Sk.  yuj  (or  yuk,  cp.  Lat.  con-jux 
"conjugal,"  Gr.  o^o-?i'J  companion,  (Tv-Si>|=conjux; 
Goth,  ga-juka  companion) ;  or  a  simplified  form  of  the 
grd.  *yujya>*yujja>yuja]  yoked  or  to  be  yoked, 
applicable,  to  be  studied,  only  in  cpd.  duyyuja  hard 
to  be  mastered,  difficult  J  v. 368  (atthe  yuiijati  duyyuje 
he  engages  in  a  difficult  matter ;  C.  reads  duyyuiija). 

Yujjha  (adj.)  [grd,  cf  yujjhati]  to  be  fought ;  neg.  a"  not 
to  be  fought,  invincible  M  11.24  i^°  '^^^'^  ^°^  ^yojilia). 

Yujjhati  [cp.  Vedic  yudhyate,  yudh,  given  in  meaning 
"  sampahara  "  at  Dhtp  415.  —  Etymologically  to  Idg. 
•ieudh  to  shake,  fr.  which  in  var.  meanings  Lat.  jubeo 
to  command,  juba  horse's  mane ;  Gr.  vir/ii'vi)  battle. 
Lith.  jundu,  jiidra  whirlwind ;  cp.  also  Av.  yaosti 
agility]  to  fight,  make  war.  Rare  in  older  literature ; 
our  refs.  only  from  the  Mahavagsa ;  e.  g.  22,  82  (fut. 
yujjhissama,  with  instr.  :  Dami|ehi) ;  25,  23  (aor. 
ayujjhi) ;  25,  58  (ppr.  yujjhamana) ;  33,  41  (aor.  yujjhi). 
To  which  add  DhA  11. 154  (mallayiiddhag  yujjhanto); 
111.259  (Ajatasattunasaddhir)  yujjhanto).  —  pp.  yuddha. 
—  Caus.  yodheti  (q.  v.). 


Yojjhana  (nt. 
82. 


[fr.  yujjhati]  fighting,  making  war  J  ni.6. 


Yojjhapana  (nt.)  [fr.  yujjhati  Caus.]   making  somebody 
fight,  inciting  to  war  Miln  1 78. 

Yofijati  [Vedic  ynnakti,  yunjati  &  yufikte,  yuj;  cp.  Gr. 
ttvywiu,  Lat,  jungo  to  unite,  put  together  (pp. 
junctus  =  Sk.  yukta,  cp.  E.  junct-ion) ;  Lith.  jiingin. 
The  Idg.  root  *ieug  is  an  enlarged  form  of  ♦ieue  "  to 
unite,"  as  in  Sk.  yanti,  yuvati,  pp.  yuta ;  f .  yuti,  to 
which  also  Lat.  jus  =  P.  yiisa.  The  Dhtp  gives  several 
(lit.  &  fig.)  meanings  of  yuj,  viz.  "  yoge  "  (No.  378), 
"  samadhimhi  "  (399),  "  sarjgamane  "  (550)]  (lit.)  to 
yoke;  (fig.)  to  join  with  (instr.  or  loc),  to  engage  in 
(loc),  to  exert  oneself,  to  endeavour.  All  our  passages 
show  the  applied  meaning,  while  the  lit.  meaning  is  only 
found  in  the  Caus.  yojeti.  —  Often  expl'^  by  and  coupled 
with  the  syn.  gha^ati  &  vayamati,  e.g.  at  J  iv.131; 
v. 369;  DhA  IV. 137.  —  Forms:  pres.  yuiijati  Dh  382; 
J  v. 369;  2'">  pi.  yunjatha  Th  2,  346  (kamesu  ;  =  niyo- 
jetha  ThA  241 ) ;  ppr.  yuiijanto  J  iv.  1 3 1  (kammafthane) ; 
imper.  yufija  S  1.52  (sasane);  ThA  12;  med.  imper. 
yufljassu  Th  2,  5.  —  Pass,  yujjati  (in  grammar  or  logic) 
is  constructed  or  applied,  fits  (in),  is  meant  KhA  168 ; 
SnA  148,  403,  456.  —  Caus.  I.  yojeti  &  II.  yojapeti 
(q.v.).  —  pp.  yutta. 

Yuta  [pp.  of  yu,  yauti  to  fasten  but  Dhtp  338  :  "  missane  "] 
fastened  to  (loc),  attracted  by,  bent  on,  engaged  in 
D.  1.57  (sabba-vari°);  Sn  842  (pesuney>-e ;  Nd'  233 
reads  yutta  in  exegesis,  do.  at  p.  234,  with  further  expl" 
ayutta,  payuttaetc),  853  (atimane) ;  Davs  v.i8  (dhiti°). 

Note,  yuta   is    doubtful    in    phrase    tejasa-yuta   in 

Niraya  passage  at  A  i.i42  =  M  iii.i83  =  Nd'  405=  Nd* 
304"=  J  V.266.  The  more  likely  reading  is  either 
tejas'  ayuta  (so  BSk.  M.Vastu  9),  or  tejasa  jrutta  (so 
Nd^  &  PvA  52),  i.  e.  endowed  with,  furnished  with, 
full  of  heat. — We  find  a  similar  confusion  between 
uyyuta  &  uyyutta. 


Yutta 


15 


Yebhujryasika 


Tatta  [pp.  of  yunjati ;  Vedic  >'ukta.  cp.  Lat.  junctus,  Gr. 
iivKTog,  Lith.  junktas]  i.  (lit.)  yoked,  harnessed  (to= 
loc.)  Pv  I.I  I*  (catubbhi  >-utta  ratha) ;  Mhvs  35,  42 
(gopa  rathe  yatta) ;  DhA  1.24  (dhure  yutta  balivadda). 

—  2.  coupled;  connected  with;  (appH)  devoted  to, 
applied  to,  given  to,  engaged  in  {-°,  instr.  or  loc.)  Sn 
820  (methune),  863  (macchiriya°).  1 144  (tena,  cp.  Nd* 
532) ;  It  93  (Buddha-sasane) ;  J  vi.206  (yoga°).  —  3.  fur- 
nished ;  fixed,  prepared,  in  order,  ready  9n  442  (Mara  ; 
=  uyyutta  SnA  392);  PvA  53.  —  4.  able,  fit  (to  or 
for  =  inf.),  suitable,  sufficient  Sn  826  (cp.  Nd^  164); 
J  V.219;  DA  1. 141  (dassitur)  yutta  =  dassaniya) ;  VvA 
igi    (=alag);    PvA   74.  —  5.  proper,   right   PvA    159. 

—  6.  due  to  (-°.  with  a  grd.,  apparently  superfluous) 
J  111.208  (asankitabba°) ;  cp.  yuttaka.  —  7.  (nt.)  con- 
janctlon,  i.  e.  of  the  moon  with  one  or  other  constella- 
tion Vin  II. 217.  — ayutta  not  fit,  not  right,  improper 
PvA  6  (perhaps  dele!),  64.  — suyutta  well  fit,  right 
proper,  opp.  duyutta  unbefitting,  in  phrase  suyuttar) 
duyuttai)  acikkhati  J  1.296  (here  perhaps  for  dur-utta  ?). 
du°  also  lit.  "  badly  fixed,  not  in  proper  condition,  in  a 
bad  state  "  at  J  iv.245  (of  a  gate). 

-kara  acting  properly  PvA  66.  -karin  acting  rightly 
Miln  49.  -pa^ibhana  knowledge  of  fitness  Pug  42  (cp. 
PugA  223).  -pajrutta  intent  on  etc.  PvA  150.  -rupa 
one  who  is  able  or  fit  (to  =  inf.)  J  1.64.  -vaha  justified 
VvA  15. 

Tattaka  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  yutta]  proper,  fit  (for) ;  nt.  what  is 
proper,  fitness :  dhamma-yuttakar)  katheti  to  speak, 
righteous  speech  J  iv.356.  — •  Usually  comb*  with  a 
grd.,  seemingly  pleonastically  (like  yutta),  e.  g.  katabba° 
what  had  to  be  done  PvA  81  ;  DhA  1.13  (as  kattabba") ; 
apucchitabba°  fit  to  be  asked  DhA  1.6. 

Yatti  [cp.  Vedic  yukti  connection,  fr.  yuj]  "  fitting,"  i.  e. 
I.  application,  use  Miln  3  (opamma°). — 2.  fitness, 
vada".  KVA  37;  in  instr.  yuttiya  in  accordance  with 
Mhvs  10,  66  (vacana°) ;  Sdhp  340  (sutti") ;  and  abl. 
yuttito  Sdhp  505.  —  3.  (logical)  fitness,  right  construc- 
tion, correctness  of  meaning;  one  of  the  16  categories 
(hara),  appl*  to  the  exposition  of  texts,  enum''  in  the 
ist  section  of  the  Netti ;  e.  g.  at  Nett  1-3,  103;  KhA 
18  ;  SnA  551,  552.  Thus  abl.  yuttito  byway  of  correct- 
ness or  fitness  (contrasted  to  suttato)  VbhA  i73  =  Vism 
562  ;  and  yutti-vasena  by  means  of  correctness  (of 
meaning)  SnA  103  (contrasted  to  anussava).  —  4.  trick, 
device,  practice  J  vi.215. 

-kata  combined  with  ;  (nt.)  union,  alloy  VvA  13. 

Yoddha  (nt.)  [orig.  pp.  of  yujjhati ;  cp.  Vedic  yuddha 
(pp.)  and  yudh  (f.)  the  fight]  war,  battle,  fight  D  1.6 
(da^uja"  fighting  with  sticks  or  weapons) ;  J  in. 541  (id.) ; 
Sn  442  (dat.  yuddhaya) ;  J  vi.222  ;  Miln  245  (kilesa", 
as  pp.  :  one  who  fights  sin) ;  Mhvs  10,  45  ("atthar)  for 
the  sake  of  fighting) ;  10,  69  (yuddhaya  in  order  to  fight) ; 
25,  52  (yuddhay'  agata) ;  32,  12  (yuddhag  yujjhati); 
32,  13  (maccu°  fight  with  death);  33,  42;  DhA  n.154 
(malla"  fist-fight).  —  The  form  yudhaya  at  Sn  831  is 
to  be  taken  as  (archaic)  dat.  of  Vedic  yudh  (f.),  used 
in  sense  of  an  inf.  &  equal  to  yuddhaya.  Nd'  1 72  expl^ 
as  "  yuddh'  atthaya." 

-kala  time  for  the  battle  Mhvs  10,  63.  -ttha  engaged 
in  war  S  1. 100  (so  read  for  °ttha).  -mandala  fighting- 
ring,  arena  J  iv.81  ;  Vism  190  ;  VbhA  356  (in  compari- 
son). 

Yaddhaka  [fr.  yuddha,  for  the  usual  yodha  (ka)]  a  fighter, 
in  malla°  fist -fighter,  pugilist  J  iv.81. 

Yodhika  (f.)  [doubtful]  N.  of  a  tree  J  v.422  (for  T.  yodhi, 
which  appears  as  yodhika  in  C.  reading).  The  legiti- 
mate reading  is  yuthika  (q.  v.),  as  is  also  given  in 
vv.ll. 

Ynvan  [Vedic  yuvan  ;  cp.  Av.  yavan  =  Lat.  juvenis,  Lith. 
jaunas  young  ;  Lat.  juvencus  "  calf  "  ;  juventus  youth; 


Goth,  junda,  Ohg.  jugund  &  jung,  E.  young.  —  The 
n.-stem  is  the  usual,  but  later  Pali  shows  also  decl. 
after  a-stem,  e.  g.  gen.  yuvassa  Mhvs  18,  28]  a  youth. 
—  nom.  sg.  yuva  D  i.8o  =  yobbanena  samannagata  DA 
1.223;  Sn  420;  Dh  280  (c=pathama-yobbane  {hita 
DhA  III. 409) ;  Pv  111.7"^  (  =  taruna  PvA  205). — Cp. 
yava,  yuvin  &  yobbana. 

Yavin  (adj.-n.)  [  =  j'uvan  with  diff -adj.  ending]  young 
J  1V.I06,  222. 

Yntha  (nt.)  [Vedic  yutha]  a  flock,  herd  of  animals  Sn  53 
(of  elephants);  J  1.170  (monkeys),  280  (id.);  SnA  322 
(go°,  of  oxen). 

-pa  the  leader  of  a  herd  Th  2,  437  (elephants),     -pati 
same  J  in. 174  (elephant);  DhA  1.81  (id.). 

Yfithika  (f.)  [cp.  later  Sk.  yiithika]  a  kind  of  jasmine, 
Jasminum  auriculatum  J  vi.537 ;  Miln  338.  So  is  also 
to  be  read  at  J  v. 420  (for  yodhi)  &  422  (yodhika  & 
yudhika).     See  also  yodhika. 

Yfipa  [\'edic  yupa]  i.  a  sacrificial  post  D  1.141  ;  A  iv.41  ; 

J  IV.302  ;  VI.211  ;  Miln  21   (dhamma°) ;  SnA  321,  322  ; 

DA  1.294.  —  2.  a  pasada,  or  palace  Th  i,  i63  =  Jii.334. 

-ussapana  the  erection  of  the  sacr.  post  DhsA   145 

(cp.  Miln  21). 

Yfisa  [Vedic  yujan,  later  Sk.  yu§a ;  fr.  base  Idg.  *iijs,  cp. 
Lat.  jiis  soup,  Gr.  Kvfit)  yeast,  ferment,  ZuifioQ  soup ; 
Obulg.  jucha  =  Ger.  jauche  manure  ;  Swedish  ost  cheese  ; 
an  enlargement  of  base  'ien  to  mix,  as  in  Sk.  yu  to 
mix :  see  yuta,  to  which  further  *iene,  as  in  yunjati] 
I.  juice  Vin  1.206  (akata"  natural  juice);  Mhvs  28,  26; 
VvA  185  (badara°  of  the  jujube);  Vism  195  (seda° 
sweaty  fluid).  —  2.  soup,  broth.  Four  kinds  of  broths 
are  enum''  at  M  1.245,  viz.  mugga°  bean  soup,  kuJattha" 
of  vetch  (also  at  Vism  256),  kalaya°  (chick-)  pea  soup, 
harenuka°  pea  soup ;  Miln  63  (ranfio  sudo  yusai)  va 
rasar)  va  kareyya). 

Yebhuyya  (adj.)  [ye  =  yad  in  Magadhi  form;  thus  yad 
bhuya  =  yad  bhiyya  "  what  is  more  or  most(ly)"] 
abundant,  numerous,  most.  Not  found  as  adj.  by 
itself,  except  in  phrase  yebhuyya-vasena  mostly,  as  a 
rule  ThA  51  and  PvA  136,  which  is  identical  with  the 
usual  instr.  yebhuyyena  occurring  as  adv.  "  as  according 
to  most,"  i.  e.  (i)  almost  all,  altogether,  practically  (as 
in  our  phrase  "practically  dead"),  mostly  D  1. 105 
(addasa  dvattigsa  lakkhanani  y.  thapetva  dve :  all 
except  two)=i09;  Vin  in. 29  sq. ;  J  1.246  (gamako  y. 
andha-bala-manussehi  yeva  ussanno  the  village  was 
peopled  by  mostly  foolish  folk);  v. 335  (y.  asiti-maha- 
thera,  altogether).  —  (2)  as  it  happens  (or  happened), 
usually,  occasionally,  as  a  rule,  ordinarily  D  1.17 
(sagvattamane  loke  y.  [as  a  rule]  satta  Abhassara- 
sagvaftanika  honti ;  cxpl""  by  half  allegorical,  half 
popular  etym.  at  DA  i.iio  as  follows:  "ye  upari 
Brahma-lokesu  va  Aruppesu  va  nibbattanti,  tad- 
avasese  sandhaya  vuttai)");  D  11.139;  yebhuyj'ena 
dasasu  loka-dhatusu  devata  sannipatita  (as  a  rule) ; 
Sn  p.  107  (  =  bahukani  SnA  451);  Miln  6  (y.  Hima- 
vantam  eva  gacchanti :  usually) ;  DA  1.280  (ordinarily) ; 
VvA  234  (occasionally),  246  (pihita-dvaram  eva  hoti : 
usually) ;  PvA  2  (Sattari  tattha  tattha  viharante  y. 
taya  taya  atth'  uppattiya),  46  (tassa  kesa-sobharj  disva 
taruna-jana  y.  tattha  patibaddha-citta  adesur)  :  in- 
variably). —  na  yebhuyyena  not  as  a  rule,  usually  not 
(at  all) :  ndpi  y.  ruditena  kaci  attha-siddhi  VvA  63. 

Yebhayyasika  (f)  [formation  fr.  yebhuj-ya  like  tassa- 
pSpiyya-sika.  Originally  adj.,  with  kiriya  to  be  under- 
stood] lit.  "  according  to  the  majority,"  i.  e.  a  vote  of 
majority  of  the  Chapter  ;  name  of  one  of  the  adhika- 
rana-samathas,  or  means  of  settling  a  dispute.  —  Vin. 
11.84  (anujanami  bh.  adhikara^ai)  yebhuyj'asikSya 
vupasametui]),    93    (vivad'    ddhikaiapag   dvihi   sama- 


Yeva 


lb 


Yogin 


thehi  sammati :  sammukha-vinayena  ca  yebhuyyasi- 
kaya  ca).  As  one  of  the  7  methods  of  settling  a  dispute 
mentioned  at  Vin  iv, 207.=  351  (the  seven  are:  sam- 
mukha-vinaya,  sati-vinaya,  amujha°,  patinna,  yebhuy- 
yasika,  tassa-papiyyasika,  tin'  avattharaka).  Expl'' 
in  detail  at  M  11.247  :  if  the  bhikkhus  cannot  settle  a 
dispute  in  their  abode,  they  have  to  go  to  a  place  where 
there  are  more  bh.,  in  order  to  come  to  a  vote  by 
majority.  Cp.  D  111.254  (the  seven  enum"") ;  A  1.99; 
IV.144. 

Yeva  (indecl.)  [=eva  with  accrudescent  y  from  Sandhi. 
On  form  and  relation  between  eva  &  yeva  cp.  Geiger, 
P.Gr.  §  66,  I.  See  also  eva  2. — The  same  form  in 
Prakrit :  Pischel,  Prk.  Gr.  §  336]  emphatic  particle, 
meaning  "  even,  just,  also  "  ;  occurring  most  frequently 
(for  eva)  after  palatal  sounds,  as  g:  Sn  580  (pekkhatag 
yeva),  822  (vivekag) ;  DhA  11.20  (saddhir)) ;  PvA  3 
(tasmii)),  4  (imasmiri),  13  (tumhakar)) ;  — further  after 
o:  PvA  39  (apanito  yeva) ;  — after  a:  Sn  1004  (manasa 
yeva); — after  i:  S  11.206  (vuddhi  yena) ;  PvA  11 
(ahosi);  —  after  e:  J  1.82  (vihare  yeva;  pubbai;ihe 
y.) ;  VbhA  135  (na  kevalar)  ete  yeva,  anne  pi  "  not  only 
these,  but  also  others  ").  Cp.  Mhvs  22,  56 ;  VvA  222  ; 
PvA  47. 

Yevapaiia(ka)  (adj.)  [not  connected  with  yeva,  but  an 
adj.  formation  from  phrase  ye  va  pana;  ye  here  standing 
(as  Magadhism)  for  yag:  cp.  yebhuyya]  corresponding, 
reciprocal,  respective,  in  corresponding  proportion,  as 
far  as  concerned  ;  lit.  "  whatever  else."  The  expression 
is  peculiar  to  exegetical  (logical)  literature  on  the 
Abhidhamma.  See  e.  g.  DhsA  152  (yevapana,  pi.  and 
°ka) ;  Vism  468,  271  sq. ;  VbhA  63,  70  sq. ;  cp.  Dhs. 
trsl}  p.  5  and  introd.  p.  56.  —  Note.  The  expression 
occurring  as  phrase  shows  ye  as  nom.  pi.,  e.  g.  Dhs  j, 
58,  151-161  &  passim:  ye  v5  pana  tasmig  samaye  anne 
pi  dhamma  ;  but  cp.  in  §  i  :  yar)  yag  va  pan'  arabbha.  in 
same  sense. 

Yoga  [Vedic  yoga,  see  etym.  under  yuga  &  yunjati. 
Usually  m. ;  pi.  nt.  yogani  occurs  at  D  n.274  in  meaning 
"  bonds  "]  lit.  "  yoking,  or  being  yoked,"  i.  e.  connec- 
tion, bond,  means ;  fig.  application,  endeavour,  device. 

—  I.  yoke,  yoking  (rare?)  J  vi.206  (meant  here  the 
yoke  of  the  churning-sticks ;  cp.  J  vi.209).  —  2.  con- 
nection with  (-"),  application  to  ;  (natural)  relation  (i.  e. 
body,  living  connection),  association ;  also  conjunction 
(of  stars),  manusaka  yoga  the  relation  to  the  world  of 
men  (the  human  body),  opp.  dibba  yoga:  S  1.35  =  60; 
Sn  641  ;  Dh  417;  expl""  at  DhA  iv.225  as  "  kaya."  — 
association  with:  D  111.176;  application:  Vism  520 
(-l-uppada).  yogato  (abl.)  from  being  connected  with, 
by  association  with  PvA  40  (balya°),  98  (sammappa- 
dhana°).  —  pubba°  connection  with  a  former  body,  one's 
former  action  or  life-history  J  v.476;  vi.480  ;  Miln  2. 
See  pubbe^.  — addhayoga  a  "  half -connected  "  build- 
ing, i.  e.  a  half-roofed  monastery  Vin  1.239;  Vism  34. 

—  nakkhatta"  a  conjunction  of  planets,  peculiar  con- 
stellation (in  astrology)  J  1.82,  253  (dhana-vassapanaka 
suitable  for  a  shower  of  wealth);  111.98;  DhA  1.174; 
DhsA  232  (in  simile).  —  3.  (fig.)  bond,  tie  ;  attachment 
(to  the  world  and  its  lusts),  or  what  yokes  to  rebirth 
(Cpd.  171^).  There  are  4  yogas,  which  are  identical 
with  the  4  oghas  viz.  kama°,  bhava",  ditthi",  avijja°, 
or  the  bonds  of  craving,  existence,  false  views,  and 
ignorance  ;  enum''  in  detail  at  A  11. 10  ;  D  ui.230,  276  ; 
J  1.374;  '-P-  Ps  I.i2g  (catuhi  yogehi  yutto  lokasanni- 
vaso  catu-yoga-yojito) ;  VbhA  35.  Mentioned  or 
referred  to  at  S  v. 59;  Dhs  1059  (ogha-t-,  in  def"  of 
tanha),  cp,  Dhs  trsl"  308;  Nett  31  (with  ogha),  114 
(id.) ;  as  sabba-  (or  sabbe)  yoga  at  Th  2,4;  75  ;  S  1.2 13  ; 
DhA  III. 233  ;  severally  at  It  95  (bhava-yoga-yutta 
agami  hoti,  +kama°);  ogha -I- yoga:  Pug  21  (avijja") ; 
Vism  2  11,  684;  cp.  also  D  11.274  (papima-yogani  the 


ties  of  the  EvU  one) ;  It  80  (yoga  pamocenti  bahujanajg). 
—  4.  application,  endeavour,  undertaking,  effort  DhA 
III. 233,  234  (  =  saniina-ppadhana).  yoga;]  karoti  to 
make  an  eSort,  to  strive  after  (dat.)  S  11,131  ;  A  11.93 
(asavanag  khayaya  y.  karaiiiya);  Miln  35.  yogag 
apajjati   to   show    (earnest)   endeavour,   to   be   active 

5  HI.  1 1  sq. ;  Vbh  356  (attana).  —  dhanima°  one  who  is 
devoted  to  the  Dhamma  A  111.355  ;  yutta°  (bent  on,  i.  e.) 
earnest  in  endeavour  J  1.65 ;  yaca°  given  to  making 
offerings  :  see  yaca.  —  5.  pondering  (over),  concen- 
tration, devotion  M  1.472  ;  Dh  209  (  =  yoniso  manasikara 
DhA  III. 2 75),  282  (same  expl"  at  DhA  111.421);  Miln  3  ; 
Vbh  324  (yoga-vihitesu  kamm'  &  sipp'-ayatanesu ; 
VbhA  410  expl' :  y.  vuccati  paniia; — perhaps  better 
to  above  4?). — 6.  (magic)  power,  influence,  device, 
scheme  J  vi.212  (yoga-yogena  practice  of  spells  etc. 
=  taya  taya  yuttiya  C.) ;  PvA  117  (comb*  with  manta, 
ascribed  to  devas).  —  7.  means,  instrument,  remedy 
J  1.380  (vamana°  an  emetic) ;  vi.74  (ekar)  yogag  datva; 
but  we  better  read  bhesajjag  tassa  datva  for  vatva, 
and  ekag  yogag  vatva  for  datva ;  taking  yoga  in  meaning 
of  "charm,  incantation");  Miln  109  (yena  yogena 
sattanar)  guija-va^^hi  .  .  .  tena  hitag  upadahati). 

-4tiga  one  who  has  conquered  the  yoke,  i.  e.  bond  of 
the  body  or  rebirth  It  6l  (muni),  81  (id.).  .4tigamin  = 
"atiga ;  A  11. 12  (same  as  sabba-yoga-visagjiitta). 
-dvacara  "  one  at  home  in  endeavour,"  or  in  spiritual 
(esp.  jhana-)  exercises  ;  one  who  practises  "  yoga  "  ; 
an  earnest  student.  The  term  is  peculiar  to  the  Abhi- 
dhamma literature.  —  J  1.303,  394,  400  ;  111.241  (sagsara- 
sagarag  taranto  y.) ;  Ps  11.26  ;  Kvu  229  ;  Miln  33  sq.,  43, 
366.  378  sq.  ;  Vism  245  (as  hunter)  246  (as  begging 
bhikkhu),  375  (iddhi-study),  587,  637,  666,  708;  DhA 
II. 12  (padhanag  padahanto  y.);  in. 241  (°bhikkhu); 
DhsA  187  (adhikammika),  246  (°kulayutta) ;  VbhA 
115,  220,  228  (as  bhikkhu  on  alms-round),  229  (as 
hunter),  258,  331;  KhA  74;  SnA  20,  374.  -kkhema 
[already  Vedic  yoga-kjema  exertion  <t  rest,  acquisition 

6  possession]  rest  from  work  or  exertion,  or  fig.  in 
scholastic  interpretation  "  peace  from  bondage,"  i.  e. 
perfect  peace  or  "uttermost  safety"  {K.S.  11.132);  a 
freq.  epithet  of  nibbana  [same  in  BSk.  :  yogak^ema, 
e.  g.  Divy  98,  123,  303,  498]  M  1.117  (°kama),  349,  357, 
(anuttara);  S  1.173  (°adhiv5hana) ;  11.195  (anuttara), 
226;  in. 1 12  (°kama,  neg.);  iv.125;  v. 130  sq. ;  A  1.50 
(anuttara);  11.40,  52  (a°),  87,  247;  111.21,  294  sq.,  353; 
D  III. 123.  125,  164  (°kama);  Vin  ii.205  =  It  11  ("ato 
dhagsati,  whereas  Vin  °a  padhagsati) ;  It  9,  27  (abhabbo 
°ssa  adhigamaya) ;  Th  2,  6  ;  Sn  79  ("adhivahana),  425  ; 
Dh  23  (anuttara,  cp.  DhA  1.231);  Ps  1.39;  11.81  ;  Vbh 
247  (kulani  y-kh-kam5ni,  which  VbhA  341  expl» : 
catuhi  yogehi  khemag  nibbhayag  icchanti) ;  ThA  13. 
-kkhemin  finding  one's  rest,  peace,  or  salvation  ;  eman- 
cipated, free,  an  Arahant  S  111.13  (accanta°);  iv.85 ; 
A  II. 12  ;  IV.310  (patta°) ;  v.326  (accanta") ;  DhA  111.233, 
234  (  =  sabba -yoga-visagyutta) ;  neg.  a°  not  finding 
one's  salvation  A  11.52  (in  verse)  =  Ps  ll.So ;  It  50. 
-nnu  knowing  the  (right)  means  Miln  169  sq.  -bahula 
strong  in  exertion  A  111.432.  -yutta  (Marassa)  one  who 
is  tied  in  the  bonds  (of  Mara)  A  11.52  (so  read  for  °gutta  ; 
the  verse  also  at  Ps  11.80,  81,  and  It  50).  -vibhaga 
dividing  (division)  of  the  relation  (in  grammar  :  to 
yoga  2)  SnA  266. 

Yoganlya  (adj.)  [fr.  yoga;  grd.  formation]  of  the  nature 
of  trying,  acting  as  a  bond,  fetter-ish  Dhs  584 ;  DhsA  49 
(cp.  Dhs.  trsl.  301).  The  spelling  is  also  yoganiya,  cp. 
oghaniya. 

Yogin  (adj.-n.)"  [fr.  yoga,  cp.  Class.  Sk.  yogin]  i.  (-°) 
applying  oneself  (to),  working  (by  means  of),  using 
Vism  70  (hattha°  &  patta"  using  the  hand  or  the  bowl ; 
but  trsl"  p.  80  :  "  hand-ascetic  "  &  "  bowl-ascetic  ").  — 
2.  one  who  devotes  himself  to  spiritual  things,  an 
earnest  student,  one  who  shows  effort  (in  contempla- 


Yogga 


17 


Yoni 


tion),  a  philosopher,  wise  man.  The  word  does  not 
occur  in  the  four  NikSyas.  In  the  older  verses  it  is 
nearly  synonymous  with  muni.  The  oldest  ref.  is 
Th  I,  947  (pubbake  yogi  "  Saints  of  other  days  "  Mrs. 
Rh.  D.).  Freq.  in  Miln,  e.  g,  pp.  2.  356  (yogi-jana) ; 
at  pp.  366,  393,  404,  417,  418  in  old  verses.  Comb'' 
with  yogAvacara  Miln  366,  404.  —  Further  passages  are 
Nett  3,  10,  61 ;  Vism  2,  14,  66,  71  (in  verse),  150,  320, 
373,  509,  620,  651,  696;  DhsA  195,  327. 

Yoggk^  (tit.)  [Vedic  yogya ;  a  grd.  formation  fr.  yoga  in 
meaning  of  yoga  i]  "  what  may  be  yoked,"  i.  e.  i.  a 
coach,  carriage,  waggon  (usually  large  &  covered,  drawn 
by  bullocks)  J  vi.31  sq.  (paticchanna),  368  (maha°); 
DhA  It.xsi  (maha°  &  paticchanna).  —  2.  a  draught- 
bullock,  ox  Vv  84';  Pv  II. 9^*  (=:ratha-)aiga-vShana 
PvA  127) ;  J  VI. 22 1 .  yoggani  muficati  to  unharness  the 
oxen  PvA  43,  100. 

Togga'  (nt.  &  adj.)  [same  as  last,  in  meaning  of  yoga  7] 

1.  (nt.)  a  contrivance  J  iv.269  (yoggag  karoti,  may  be 
in  meaning  "training,  practice"  here:  see  yogga); 
VvA  8  (gaha^a°).  — 2.  (adj.)  fit  for  (  =  yutta),  adapted 
to,  suitable;  either  -°  or  with  inf. :  VvA  291  ;  PvA  25 
(here  spelt  yogya),  135  (bhojana°),  152  (kamma-vipak' 
anubhavana"),  154  (gamana"  passable,  v.  1.  yogya),  228 
(anubhavana°). 

Tocnri  (f)  [Vedic  and  Epic  Sk.  yogyi ;  same  as  yogga*, 
fr.  yoga]  training,  practice  J  11. 165  (yoggai)  karoti  to 
practise);  iv.269  (id.);  DhA  1.52  (lakkha-yoggai)  karoti 
to  practise  shooting). — adj.  (-°)  katayogga  well- 
practised,  trained  S  1.62,  98  (neg.).  Only  at  these 
passages,  missing  at  the  other  da}ha-dhamina-passages, 
e.  g.  at  S  11.266 ;  M  1.82  ;  A  11.48. 

-acariya  a  groom,  trainer  S  iv.i76=M  1.124 ;  M  111.97. 
222  ;  Th  I,  1 140;  J  1.505. 

Tojans  (nt.)  [Vedic  yojana]  i.  the  yoke  of  a  carriage 
J  VI. 38,  42  (=ratha-yuga). — 2.  a  measure  of  length: 
as  much  as  can  be  travelled  with  one  yoke  (of  oxen), 
a  distance  of  about  7  miles,  which  is  given  by  Bdhgh. 
as  equal  to  4  gavutas  (DhA  11. 13).  It  occurs  in  descend- 
ing scale  of  yojana-tigavuta-usabha  at  DhA  1.108.  — 
Dh  60 ;  J  v.37  (yojana-yojana-vitthata  each  a  mile 
square) ;  SnA  194.  More  favoured  comb"  of  yojana 
with  numbers  are  the  foil.  :  i  (addha°) :  DA  1.35  ;  DhsA 
142.  — 3:   DhA  II. 41.  —  4:    PvA    113.  —  S:    VvA    33. 

—  15:  DhA  1. 17;  J  1. 315  ;  PvA  154-  —  '8:  J  1.81.  348. 

—  20:  DhA  IV. 1 12  (20x110,  of  a  wilderness).  —  25: 
VvA  236.-45:  J  1. 147,  348;  DhA  1.367. —50:  Vism 
417.  — •  100:  D  I.I  17  ;  It  91  ;  Pv  1. 10**.  —  500:  J  1. 204. 

—  1,000:  J  1.203.  — Cp.  yojanika. 

Tojani  (f.)  [*Sk.  yojana,  fr.  yojeti]  (grammatical)  con- 
struction ;  exegesis,  interpretation  ;  meaning  KhA  156, 
218,  243;  SnA  20,  90,  122  sq.,  131  sq.,  148,  166,  177, 
248.  255,  313;  PvA  45,  50.  69,  73.  139  (attha°),  and 
passim  in  Commentaries. 

Tojanika  (adj.)  [fr.  yojana]  a  yojana  in  extent  J  1.92 
(vih&ra) :  Dpvs  17,  108  (arama) ;  DhA  1.274  (mapi- 
pallanka). 

Toiita  [pp.  of  yojeti]  yoked,  tied,  bound  Ps  1.129  (catu- 
yoga"  fettered  by  the  four  bonds);  SnA  137  (yottehi 

y.). 

Tolitaka  (adj.)  [fr.  yojita]  connected  with,  mixed ; 
neg.  »*  not  mixed  (with  poison),  unadulterated 
J  '-269. 

Tolati  [Caus.  of  yuajati]  i.  to  yoke,  harness,  tie,  bind 
Pv  ii.9*»  (v&hana,  the  draught -bullock) ;  Mhvs  35,  40 
(yojayi  aor. ;  v.  I.  for  yojipayi) ;  PvA  74  (sindhave). — 

2.  to  furnish  (with),  combine,  unite,  mix,  apply  J  1.252 
(sorar)),  269  (id.) ;  Mhvs  22,  4  (ambar)  visena  y.  to  poison 


a  mango);  36,  71  (visai)  phalesu  poison  the  fruit). — 
3.  to  prepare,  provide,  set  in  order,  arrange,  fix,  fit  up 
Mhvs  30,  39  (pade  upSnahi  fitted  the  feet  with  slippers) ; 
dvarag  to  put  a  door  right,  to  fix  it  properly  J  1.201  ; 
IV.  245  (cp.  yojSpeti).  —  4.  to  engage,  incite,  urge, 
commission,  put  up  to,  admonish  Mhvs  1 7,  38  (manusse) ; 
37.  9  (vihSrar)  nSsetur)  y.  incited  to  destroy  the  v.); 
PvA  69.  —  5.  to  construct,  understand,  interpret,  take 
a  meaning  SnA  148  (yojetabba);  PvA  98  (id.),  278 
(id.). — Caus.  II.  yojipeti  to  cause  some  one  to  yoke 
etc.  :  D  11.95  (ySnini,  to  harness) ;_  J  1.150  (dvarar),  to 
set  right) ;  Mhvs  35,  40  (rathe,  to  harness).  —  Pass, 
yojiyati  to  become  yoked  or  harnessed  J  1.57  (nangala- 
sahassar)  y.). — ^pp.  yojita. 

Tojjhain  a°  M  11.24  ^^^^  7ujjl>a  (of  yadh). 

Yotta  (nt.)  [Vedic  yoktra,  cp.  Lat.  junctor,  Gr.  ZtvvrTJpfc 
yoke-straps  ;  Epic  Sk.  yoktr  one  who  yokes]  the  tie  of 
the  yoke  of  a  plough  or  cart  S  i.i72  =  Sn  77 ;  S  iv.163, 
282;  J  1.464;  11.247  (camma°) ;  iv.82  ;  v. 45  (camma- 
y.-varatta),  47;  Vism  269;  DhA  1.205;  SnA  137.  As 
dhura-yotta  at  J  1.192  ;  vi.253. 

Yottaka(nt.)  [yatta-t-ka]  a  tie,  band,  halter,  rope  J  vi.252  ; 
Miln  53  ;  Vism  254.  255  ;  DhA  ni.208. 

Todha  [cp.  Vedic  yodha ;  fr.  yndh]  a  warrior,  soldier, 
fighter,  champion  Vin  1.73  (yodha  yuddh'  abhinandino 
.  .   .  pabbajjai)  yacigsu) ;  J  1.180;  Miln  293. 

-ajiva  one  who  lives  by  battle  or  war,  a  soldier  S 
IV. 308  =  A  111.94;  A  1.284;  II. 170,  202  ;  III. 89  sq.  (five 
kinds):  Sn  617,  652;  Pug  65,  69.  •hatthin  a  war 
elephant  DhA  1.168. 

Yodhi=yodhika  j  v. 420. 

Yodhikfi  (f.)  [a  var.  reading  of  yuthika  (q.v.)]  a  special 
kind  of  jasmine  Vv  35*  ;  J  iv.440  (yoth°),  442  ;  v. 422  ; 
VvA  162  (as  thalaja  and  a  tree). 

Todhin  [  =  yodha]  a  warrior  ;  camma°  a  warrior  in  cuirass, 
a  certain  army  grade  D  1.51  ;  A  iv.107. 

Yodheti  [Caus.  of  yujjhati]  to  attack,  to  fight  against 
(ace.)  Dh  40  (yodhetha  =  pcihareyya  DhA  1.317); 
J  V.183. 

Yoni  (f.)  [Vedic  yoni]  1.  the  womb.  —  2.  origin,  way  of 
birth,  place  of  birth,  realm  of  existence  ;  nature,  matrix. 
There  are  four  yonis  or  ways  of  being  born  or  generation, 
viz.  andaja  oviparous  creation,  jalabuja  viviparous, 
sagsedaja  moisture-sprung,  opapatika  spontaneous : 
M  1.73;  D  111.230;  MUn  146;  Vism  552,  557  sq. ;  cp. 
VbhA  203  sq.  —  Freq.  in  foil,  comb""  :  tiracchSna°  the 
class  of  animals,  the  brute  creation  A  1.37,  60 ;  v.269  ; 
It  92  ;  Pv  IV. 11'  ;  Vism  103,  427 ;  PvA  27,  166 ;  nfiga° 
birth  among  the  Nagas  S  in. 240  sq.  (in  ref.  to  which  the 
4  kinds  of  birth,  as  mentioned  above,  are  also  applied) ; 
Vism  102  (niraya-naga-yoni) ;  pasu°  =  tiracchana''  Pv 
II. 13";  pisaca"  world  of  the  Pisacas  S  1.209;  peta° 
the  realm  of  the  Petas  FVA  68  (cp.  peta).  — kamma° 
K.  as  origin  A  in. 186.  — yoni  upaparikkhitabba  (  =  kir)- 
jatika  etc.)  S  111.42.  — ayoni  unclean  origin  Th  i,  219. 
—  3.  thoroughness,  knowledge,  insight  Nett  40.  — ayoni 
superficiality  in  thought  S  1.203  ("  muddled  ways  " 
Mrs.  Rh.  D.).  — yoniso  (abl.)  "  down  to  its  origin  01 
foundation,"  i.  e.  thoroughly,  orderly,  wisely,  properly, 
judiciously  S  1.203  ("  in  ordered  governance "  K.S. 
1.259);  D  1. 1 18  (wisely);  It  30  (araddha  asavanai) 
khayaya) ;  Pug  25  ;  Vism  30,  132,  599  ;  PpA  31.  Opp. 
ayoniso  disorderly  improperly  Pug  21;  DhA  1.327; 
PvA  113,  278.  —  Esp.  frequent  in  phrase  yoniio  mana- 
sikara  "  fixing  one's  attention  with  a  purpose  or 
thoroughly,"  proper  attention,  "  having  thorough 
method  in  one's  thought  "  {K.S.  1.259)  Psi.85sq. ;  It  9; 
J  I.I  16;  Miln  32  ;  Nett  8,  40,  50,  127;  Vism  132  ;  PvA 

V)l    2 


Yobbana 


i8 


RakkhS 


63.  See  also  manasikira.  —  0pp.  ayoniso  manasik&ra 
disorderly  or  distracted  attention  D  111.2  73  ;  VbhA  148  ; 
ThA  79.  In  BSk.  the  same  phrase  :  yoni^o  manasi- 
kara^  Divy  488;  AvS  1.122  ;  11. 112  (Speyer  :  "the 
right  &  true  insight,  as  the  object  of  consideration 
really  is").  See  further  on  term  Dial.  111.218 
("  systematized  attention  ");  K.S.  1.131  ;  11. 6  ("radical 
grasp  "). 


-ja  born  from  the  womb  Sn  620  ;  Dh  396.     -pamukha 
principal  sort  of  birth  D  1.54  ;  M  1.517. 

Yobbana  (nt.)  [cp.  late  Vedic  &  Epic  Sk.  yauvana,  fr. 
yuvan]  youth  D  1.115;  A  1.68;  111.5,  66,  103;  Dh  155, 
156;  Sn  98,  no,  218;  Pv  i.7«;  DhA  111.409;  PvA  3. 

-mada  pride  of  youth  D  in. 220;  A  1.146;  111.72; 
VbhA  466. 


R. 


-Rr  the  letter  (or  sound)  r,  used  as  euphonic  consonant  to 
avoid  hiatus.  The  sandhi  -r-  originates  from  the  final 
r  of  nouns  in  °ir  &  °ur  of  the  Vedic  period.  In  Pali 
it  is  felt  as  euphonic  consonant  only,  like  other  sandhi 
consonants  (y  for  instance)  which  in  the  older  language 
were  part  of  the  noun  itself.  Thus  r  even  where  it  is 
legitimate  in  a  word  may  interchange  with  other 
sandhi-consonants  in  the  same  word,  as  we  find  puna- 
m-eva  and  puna-d-eva  besides  the  original  puna-r-eva 
(  =  Vedic  punar  eva).  At  J  1.403  we  read  "  punar 
agata,"  where  the  C.  expl*  "  puna  agata,  ra-karo 
sandhivasena  vutto."  Similarly:  Sn  81  (vutti-r-es5), 
214  (thambho-r.-iva),  625  =  Dh  401  (aragge-r-iva),  679 
(ati-r-iva),  687  (sarada-r-iva),  H34  (hagsa-r-iva) ; 
Vv  64"  (Vajir'  avudho-r-iva) ;  Pv  11.8'  (puna-r-eva) 
II. II*  (id.);  PvA  77  (su-r-abhigandha).  In  the  latter 
cause  the  r  has  no  historical  origin,  as  little  as  in  the 
phrase  dhir  atthu  (for  'dhig-atthu)  Sn  440  ;  J  1.59. 

RaDSi  &  Rasmi  [Vedic  ra§mi.  The  form  ragsi  is  the 
proper  Pali  form,  originating  fr.  raSmi  through  meta- 
thesis like  amhi  for  asmi,  tamha  for  tasma  etc.  Cp. 
Geiger  P.Gr.  §  50*.  The  form  rasmi  is  a  Sanskritism 
and  later]  a  rein,  a  ray.  —  i.  In  meaning  "rein" 
only  as  rasmi,  viz.  at  M  1.124;  Dh  222  ;  J  1.57;  iv.149. 
—  2.  In  meaning  "ray"  both  rarjsi  and  rasmi:  (a) 
ragsi  (in  poetry)  Sn  1016  (vita°  .'  perhaps  pita°  ?  See 
note  in  P.T.S.  ed.);  Vv  53*  (pi.  ragsi  =  rasmiyo  VvA 
236);  63"  (sahassa"  having  a  thousand  rays;=suriya 
VvA  268);  Sdhp  124.  Also  in  cpd.  ragsi-jala  a  blaze 
of  rays  J  1.89;  PvA  154;  VvA  12  ("sammujjala), 
14  (id.),  166  (id.).  —  (b)  rasmi  (in  prose,  late)  DhA  1.27 
(°r)  vissajjesi) ;  DhsA  13  (nila-rasmiyo) ;  VvA  125 
(candima-suriya°).  Also  in  cpd.  buddha-rasmi  the 
ray  of  enlightenment,  the  halo  around  a  Buddha,  con- 
sisting of  6  colours  (chabbaoiiia)  J  1.444,  501  ("rasmiyo 
vissajjento) ;  SnA  132;  VvA  207,  234,  323;  Mhbv  6, 
15.  38. 

Bagiika  (adj.)  [rai)si+  ka]  havingrays,  radiant,  in  sahassa° 
having  1000  rays  Vv  64'  (=::suriya-mai>da'l3'  viya  VvA 
277)- 

RaQSimant  (adj.)  [fr.  ragsi]  having  rays,  radiant;  n.  sg. 
ragsima  the  sun  Vv  8i»  (  =  suriya  VvA  314). 

Rakkha  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  base  rakU]  guarding  or  to  be 
guarded  ; — (a)  act. :  dhanima°  guardian  of  righteousness 
or  truth  Miln  344.  —  (b)  pass. :  in  cpd.  du°,  v.  I.  du° 
hard  to  guard  DhA  1.295.  °katha,  s.  1.  rukkha-", 
warding  talk  ThA  i,  in  Brethren,  185,  cp.  note  416. 


Rakkhaka  (^dj.  n.)  [fr.  rakkha]  i.  guarding,  protecting, 
watching,  taking  care  PvA  7 ;  f.  °ika  (dasi)  DhA  iv.103 
(a  servant  watching  the  house).  —  2 .  observing,  keeping 
J  1.205  (sila°).  —  3.  a  cultivator  J  11.110. — 4.  a  sentry 
J  I-332- 

Rakkhati  [Vedic  raksati,  rakf  to  Idg.  *ark  (cp.  Lat. 
arceo  etc.)  in  enlarged  form  *ale(i=Gr.  aXiiu  to  protect 
(Alexander!);  oXjc^  strength;  Ags.  ealgian  to  protect. 
Goth.  alhs  =  Ags.  ealh  temple.  Cp.  also  base  *area 
in  P.  aggala.  The  Dhtp  18  expl'  rakkfa  by  "  palana  "] 
I.  to  protect,  shelter,  save,  preserve  Sn  220;  J  iv.255 
(mai)  rakkheyyatha) ;.  vi.589  (  =  paleti) ;  Pv  11. 9**  (dha- 
nag) ;  Miln  166  (ruklchai)),  280  (attinai)  rakkheyya  save 
himself) ;  PvA  7.  —  grd.  rakkhiya  to  be  protected 
Mhvs  33,  45.  Neg.  arakkhiya  &  arakkheyya  (in  mean- 
ing 3)  see  separately.  —  Pass.  ppr.  rakkhiyamina 
J  1.140. — 2.  to  observe,  guard,  take  care  of,  contiul 
(with  ref.  to  cittat}  the  heart,  and  sllai]  good  character 
or  morals)  It  67  (silar));  DhA  1.295  (cittag  sakkha, 
equivalent  with  cittag  dama).  397  (acarag) ;  J  iv.255 
(vacag);  VvA  59  (silani  rakkhi) ;  PvA  66  (silag  rak- 
khatha,  uposathag  karotha).  —  3.  to  keep  (a)  secret,  to 
put  away,  to  guard  against  (i.  e.  to  keep  away  from) 
Sn  702  (mano-padosag  rakkheyya) ;  Miln  1 70  (vaci- 
duccaritag  rakkheyya).  —  pp.  rakkhita.  See  also  pafl- 
paleti  &  parirakkhati. 

Rakkhana  (nt.)  [fr.  rakkh]  i.  keeping,  protection,  guard- 
ing Nett  41  ;  Mhvs  35,  72  (rahassa°-atthaya  so  that 
he  should  keep  the  secret);  PvA  7.  —  2.  observance, 
keeping  VvA  71  (uposatha-sila°) ;  PvA  102  (sila°),  210 
(uposatha°). 

Rakkhanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  rakkhana]  observing,  keeping; 
one  who  observes  J  1.228  (pafica-sila" ;  so  read  for  rak- 
khanaka). 

Rakkhasa  [cp.  Vedic  rak$a,  either  fr^  rakf  to  injure,  or 
more  likely  fr.  rakf  to  protect  or  ward  og  (see  details 
at  Macdonell,  Vedic  Mythology  pp.  162-164)]  a  kind  of 
harmful  (nocturnal)  demon,  usually  making  the  water 
its  haunt  and  devouring  men  Th  i ,  93 1  ;  Sn  3 10  ( Asura°) ; 
J  1. 127  (daka°  =  udaka''),  170  (id.);  vi.469  (id.);  DhA 
1.367  (°pariggahita-pokkharaiji) ;  111.74  (udaka°) ;  Sdhp 
189,  313,  366.  —  f.  rakkhasi  J  111.147  (r.  paj4);  Mhvs 
12,  45  (rudda°,  coming  out  of  the  ocean). 

Rakkhi  (f)  [verb-noun  fr.  rakkh]  shelter,  protection,  care 
A  11.73  (-f-paritta);  Mhvs  25.  3  ;  J  1.140  (bahubi  rak- 
khahi    rakkhiyamana) ;    PvA    198    (°g    sagvidahati). 


Rakkhita 


19 


Rajaniya 


Often  in  comb"  rakkha+avarana  (  +  gutti)  shelter  & 
defence,  e.  g.  at  Vin  11. 194:  D  1.61  (dhammikai)  r.-v.- 
guttii)  sar)vidahe5->ama) ;  M  ii.ioi  ;  J  iv.292. — Cp. 
gorakkha.  —  fJote.  rakkha  at  J  ni.144  is  an  old  mis- 
reading for  nikkha. 

Eakkhita  [pp.  of  rakkhati]  guarded,  protected,  saved 
S  IV. 1 12  (rakkhitena  kayena,  rakkhitaya  vacaya  etc.); 
A  1.7  (cittai)  r.);  Sn  288  (dhamraa"),  315  (gotta") ; 
VvA  72  (matu",  pitu°  etc.);  PvA  61,  130.  —  Note. 
rakkhitat)  karoti  at  Mhvs  28,  43  Childers  trsl"  "  take 
under  protection,"  but  Geiger  reads  rakkhike  and  trsl^ 
"  appoint  as  watchers." 

-atta  one  who  guards  his  character  S  1.154  ;  J  1.412  ; 
SnA  324.  -indriya  guarding  one's  senses  Sn  697. 
-manasana  guarding  one's  mind  Sn  63  (  =  gopita- 
manasano-rakkhita-citto  Nd*  535). 

Ranga^  [fr.  raj',  rajati,  to  be  coloured  or  to  have  colour] 
colour,  paint  Miln  1 1  (°palibodha). 

-kara  dyer  Miln  331.  -jata  colour  M  1.385;  VbhA 
331.     -ratta  dyed  crimson  Vin  1.185  =  306. 

Ranga'  [fr.  raj',  irajyati,  to  straighten,  order,  direct  etc.  : 
see  uju.  The  Dhtp  (27)  only  gives  one  raj  in  meaning 
"  gamana  "]  a  stage,  theatre,  dancing  place,  play- 
house Vv  33*  ;  J  11.252.  — rangai]  karoti  to  play  theatre 
DhA  IV.62.  — rangamajjha  the  stage,  the  theatre, 
usually  in  loc.  °majjhe,  on  the  stage,  S  iv.306  ;  J  iv.495  ; 
DhA  III. 78  ;  same  with  °mandale  J  11.253. 

Racati  [rac,  later  Sk.]  to  arrange,  prepare,  compose.  The 
root  is  defined  at  Dhtp  546  by  "  patiyattane  "  (with 
V.  1.  car),  and  given  at  No.  542  as  v.  1.  of  pac  in  meaning 
"  vitthare."  — pp.  racita. 

Racani  (f.)  [fr.  rac]  i.  arrangement  (of  flowers  in  a  gar- 
land) VvA  354.  —  2.  composition  (of  a  book)  Sdhp  619. 

Racita  [pp.  of  racati]  i.  arranged  J  v. 157  (su°  in  C.  for 
samocita ;  v.  1.  sucarita). — 2.  strung  (of  flowers) 
Mhvs  34,  54.  —  Cp.  vi°. 

Raochi  (f.)  [Sk.  rathya.  This  the  contracted  form.  The 
diaeretic  forms  are  rathiya  &  rathika  (q.v.)]  a  carriage 
road  Vin  11.194;  "l'S' ;  iv.271  (  =  rathiya);  v. 205 
(raccha-gata) ;  J  1.425  ;  v. 335  ;  vi.276  (in  its  relation  to 
vithi) ;  Davs  v.48  ;  PvA  24  (koija°). 

Rajaka  [fr.  rajati]  a  dyer  (&  "  washerman  "  in  the  same 
function),  more  correctly  "  bleacher."  See  remarks  of 
Kern's  at  Toev.  n.45  on  distinction  of  washerman  & 
dyer.  —  D   1.51    (in   list   of  occupations);   Vin   111.45  ; 

5  11.101  =  111.152  (in  simile;  comb*  with  cittakara,  here 
perhaps  "painter"?);  S  in. 131  ;  J  v. 186;  VbhA  331 
(in  simile). 

Rajakkha  (-°)  (adj.)  [rajo-t- ending  ka,  in  comb»  'rajas-ka 
=rajakldia,  like  •puras-kata  =  purakkhata.  The  °ka 
belongs  to  the  whole  cpd.]  only  in  comb"  with  appa° 
and  maha°  i.  e.  having  little  (or  no)  and  much  defile- 
ment (or  blemish  of  character)  M  1.169;  S  1.137  (here 
further  comb""  with  "jatika ;  cp.  BSk.  alpa-rajaska- 
jatiya  MVastu  in. 322);  Vin  1.5  (id.);  Ps  1.121  ;  11.33, 
195  ;  Ndi  358  ;  Nd«  235  No.  3  p*  ;  Vbh  341  ;  Miln  263  ; 
Vism  205  ;  VbhA  458. 

Rajakkhati  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  rajakkha]  is  Kern's  (proble- 
matic) proposed  reading  {Toev.  s.  v.)  for  rajakhada  at 
Sn  831  (rajakhadaya  phuttho).  which  is  however  un- 
justified, as  the  original  reading  is  well-attested  and 
expl*  in  the  Niddesa  as  such.  The  term  as  proposed 
would  not  occur  by  itself  either  (like  rajakkha,  only  -°). 

Rajata  (nt.)  [Vedic  rajata;  see  etym.  under  rajati]  silver 
D  1.5  (expH  at  DA  1.78  as  a  general  name  for  all  coins 
except  gold  :  kahapanas  etc.) ;  S  1.92  :  Sn  962  (in  simile  ; 
expl*  at  Nd'  478  as  jatarupa),  J  v. 50  ;  416  (hema"  gold 

6  silver);  Vv  35I  (°hema-jala) ;  DhA  11.42  (°paUa  silver 


tablet  or  salver);  iv.105  (°gabbha  silver  money  box  or 
cabinet  for  silver,  alongside  of  kahapapa-gabbha  and 
suvapna") ;  VbhA  64  (exp\'  as  "  kahapaija  ") ;  PvA  95 
(for  rupiya). 

Rajati  [raj  &  raiij  to  shine,  to  be  coloured  or  light  (-red) ; 
to  Idg.  *areg  to  be  bright,  as  in  Lat.  argus,  Gr.  apyric 
&  apyoi  light ;  Sk.  arjuna  (see  ajjuna) ;  to  which  also 
rajati  silver  =  Lat.  argentum.  Gr.  dpyvpog :  Gallic 
Argento-ratum  (N.  of  Strassburg) ;  Oir  argat.]  usually 
intrs.  rajjati  (q.v.).  As  rajitabba  (grd.)  in  meaning 
"to  be  bleached"  (dhovitabba -(- )  only  in  meaning 
"  bleach  "  (as  compared  with  dhovati  clean,  &  vija$eti 
to  disentangle,  smoothe)  Vin  in.235  (ppr.  fr.  pi.  dho- 
vantiyo  rajantiyo  etc.);  J  1.8  (rajitabba,  grd.;  dhovi- 
tabba-(-). —  Somehow  it  is  difficult  to  distinguish 
between  the  meanings  "  bleach  "  and  "  dye  "  (cp. 
rajaka),  in  some  comb""  with  dhovati  it  clearly  means 
"dye,"  as  at  Vin  1.50  (forms:  rajati,  rajitabba.  raji- 
yetha  3  sg.  Pot.  Med.);  Vism  65  (forms:  rajitva,  raji- 
tabba. rajitur)).  —  Another  grd.  rajaniya  in  difi.  meaning 
(see  Sep.).  Caus.  rajeti  to  paint,  colour  Th  i,  1 155  (inf. 
rajetave  :  (see  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  204,  i.  a).  Caus.  also 
rafljeti  (see  under  rafljati).  Med.  Pass,  rajjati  (q.  v.). 
—  Caus.  II.  rajapeti  to  cause  to  be  bleached  Vin  in. 206 
(dhovapeyya  rajapeyya  akotapeyya),  235  (dhovapeti 
r.  vijatapeti);  J  11. 197  (ovaJtikai)  sibbapetva  raja- 
petva). 

Rajana  (nt.)  [fr.  raj]  colouring,  dye  D  i.iio  (suddhag 
vatthar)  .  .  .  sammadeva  rajanai)  pafigaijheyya) ;  Vin 
1.50  =  53  11.227;  Vin  1.286  (6  dyes  allowed  to  the  bhik- 
khus  :  mula°,  khandha°,  taca",  patta",  puppha",  phala", 
or  made  of  the  root,  the  trunk,  bark,  leaf,  flower,  fruit 
of  trees)  Th  i,  965  ;  S  ii.ioi  (here  either  as  f.  or  adj.); 
J  1.220  (washing  ?). 

-kamma  (the  job  of )  dyeing  J  1 . 1 1 8  ;  Vism  65 .  -pacana 
boiling  the  dye  Vism  389  (cp.  rajana-pakka  Vm.  Texts 
11.49).  -bhajana  dye-vessel  Vin  1.286.  -sila  colouring- 
workshop,  dyeing-hall  Vism  65. 

RajanI  (f)  [fr.  raj,  cp.  rajaniya  2]  the  night  Davs  1.39; 
Abhp  69 ;  PvA  205. 

Rajaniya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  rajati]  of  the  nature  of  rajas, 
i.  e.  leading  to  lust,  apt  to  rouse  excitement,  enticing, 
lustful. —  I.  As  Ep.  of  rupa  (vedana  saiiiia  etc.)  S 
in. 79;  also  at  D  1.152  sq.  (dibbani  rupani  passami 
piya-rupani  kam'  flpasaghitani  rajaniyani ;  &  the  same 
with  sadddni).  In  another  formula  (relating  to  the 
5  kamagui^a):  rupa  (sadda  etc.)  itthS  kanta  manapa 
piyarupa  kam'  iipasaghita  rajaniya  D  1.245;  M  1.85. 
The  expl»  of  this  passage  at  DA  1.3 n  is;  r.  =  raga- 
janaka. — The  expression  rajaniya  dhamma  "things 
(or  thoughts)  causing  excitement  "  is  contrasted  with 
Timocaniya  dh.  "  that  which  leads  to  emancipation  " 
at  A  11.196.  The  same  takes  the  places  of  lobhaniya 
dhamma  in  comb»  with  dosaniya  &  mohaniya  dh.  at 
S  IV..307  ;  A  II. 120  ;  III. 169.  Another  pair  is  mentioned 
at  Nett  18,  viz.  r.  dhamma  and  pariyut^haniya  dh. — 
2.  In  dig.  connections  it  means  simp^ly  "delightful, 
lovely  "  and  is  e.  g.  an  Ep.  of  the  night.  So  at  Pv 
111.7I.  where  the  passage  runs  "  yuva  rajaniye  kama- 
gupehi  sobhasi "  :  youthful  thou  shinest  with  the 
qualities  of  enjoyment  in  the  enjoyable  (night),  which 
at  PvA  205  is  expl*  in  a  twofold  manner  viz.  first  as 
"  rama^uyehi  raguppatti-hetu-bhutehi  "  (viz.  kama- 
gu^iehi),  referring  to  a  v.  1.  rajaniyehi,  and  then  as 
"  rajani  ti  va  rattisu,  ye  ti  nipatamattar)  "  and  "  viro- 
casi  rattiyarj."  Thus  rajani  is  here  taken  directly  as 
"  night  "  (cp.  Abhp  69).  —  At  Pv  iv.6«  the  passage  runs 
"  pamatta  rajaniyesu  kam'  assad'  abhinandhino  "  i,  e. 
not  heeding  the  enjoyment  of  the  taste  of  craving  at 
nights  :  here  as  m.  &  not  (.  —  The  meaning  "  lovely  " 
is  appl*  to  sounds  at  Th  i.  1233  (sarena  rajaniyena) ; 
VvA  37  (r.  nigghosa). 


Rajo 


20 


Rana 


Eajo  (rajas)  &  Raja  (nt.)  [raj,  see  rajati  &  raajati.  Vedic 
rajajj  meaning :  (a)  space,  as  region  of  mist  &  cloud, 
similar  to  antarik|a,  (b)  a  kind  of  (shiny)  metal  (op. 
rajata);  see  Zimmer,  AUind.  Leben  55].  A  Forms. 
Both  rajo  &  rajai)  occur  as  noun  &  ace.  sg.,  e.  g.  rajo 
at  D  II. 19;  Sn  207,  334;  Dhs  617;  rajag  at  Sn  275; 
It  83;  once  (in  verse)  rajo  occurs  as  m,  viz.  Sn  662. 
The  other  cases  are  formed  from  the  a-stem  only,  e.  g. 
rajassa  Sn  406;  pi.  rajani  Sn  5:7.  974.  In  comp»  we 
find  both  forms,  viz.  (i)  rajas  either  in  visarga  form 
rajah,  as  (a)  rajo-,  (b)  raja-  and  (c)  raja-  (stressed),  or 
in  s-form  (d)  rajas-;  (2) raja-,  appearing  apostrophied 
as  (e)  raj-.  B  Meanings,  (i)  (lit.)  dust,  dirt;  usually 
wet,  staining  dust  D  11.19  (tipa+ ) ;  Sn  662  =  PvA  116 
(sukhumo  rajo  pativitag  khitto) ;  It  83;  Dhs  617 
(dhiimo+).  adj.  raja°  :  in  sa°  &  a."  vata  Vin  n.209; 
Vism  31.  The  meaning  "  pollen  "  [Sk.  raja,  m.]  may 
be  seen  in  "  raja-missakai)  rasar)  "  at  DhA  1.375.  — 
2.  (fig.)  stain,  dirt,  defile  gent,  impurity.  Thus  taken 
conventionally  by  the  P.  commentators  as  the  3-fold 
blemish  of  man's  character  :  raga,  dosa,  moha,  e.  g. 
Ndi  505;  SnA  255;  DhA  111.485  ;  or  as  kilesa-raja  at 
SnA  479.  —  Sn  207  (niketa  jayate  rajo),  334,  665  (rajag 
akirasi,  metaph.),  974  (paftca  rajani  loke,  viz.  the  excite- 
ment caused  by  the  5  bahirani  ayatanani  Nd^  505. 
Also  in  stanza  rago  rajo  na  ca  pana  renu  vuccati  (with 
dosa  &  moha  the  same)  Nd'  505  =  Nd'  590  (slightly 
diff.)  =  J  i.ii7  =  Vism  388,  cp.  Divy  491  with  interesting 
variation.  —  adj.  raja°  in  two  phrases  apagata°  VvA 
236  &  vigata"  Ndi  505  «#  free  from  defilement.  —  On 
raja  in  similes  see  J.P.T.S.  1907.  126.  Cp.  vi°.  ^C. 
Compounds,  (a)  rajo-:  "jalla  dust  and  (wet)  dirt,  muddy 
dirt  D  n.i8  ;  Vin  111.70  ;  J  iv.322  ;  v.241  ;  Miln  1,33,  195, 
258,  410  ;  SnA  248,  291.  -jallika  living  in  dirty  mud, 
designation  of  a  class  of  ascetics  M  1.281  ;  J  1.390. 
-dhatu  "  dust -element  "  (doubtful  trsl»)  D  1.54,  which 
DA  1.163  expl"'  as  "  raja-okiijija-tthanani,"  i.  e.  dusty 
places.  Dial.  trsl.  "  places  where  dust  accumulates," 
Franke,  Digha  p.  57  as  "  Staubiges  "  but  rightly  sees  a 
deeper,  speculative  meaning  in  the  expression  (San- 
khya  doctrine  of  rajas  ?).  -mala  dust  &  dirt  J  1.24. 
-vajalla  [this  expression  is  difficult  to  explain.  It  may 
simply  be  a  condensed  phrase  rajo  'va  jalla,  or  a  redupl. 
cpd.  rajo-t-avajalla,  which  was  spelt  raj-ovajalla  for 
ava°  because  of  rajo,  or  represents  a  contamination  of 
raj-avajalla  and  raj-ojalla,  or  it  is  a  metric  diaeresis  of 
rajo-jalla]  dust  and  dirt  Dh  141  (  =  kaddama-limpan' 
akarena  sarire  sannicita-rajo  DhA  111.77).  -harana 
dirt -taking,  cleaning ;  wet  rag,  floor-cloth,  duster  Vin 
11.291  ;  A  IV.376;  J  I.I  17;  DhA  1.245.  —  (b)  raja-: 
-renu  dirt  and  dust  J  iv.362  ;  -va^^hana  indulgence  in  or 
increase  of  defilement  Th  2,  343  ("  fleshly  lusts  "  trsl.) ; 
ThA  240  (  =  raga-raj'  adi-sar)vaddhana).  —  (c)  raja-: 
°patha  dusty  place,  dustiness,  dust-hole  D  1.62,  250  ;  S 
II. 2 19;  DA  1. 180  (here  taken  metaphorically:  raga-raj' 
adinai]  utthana-Uhanar)).  —  (d)  rajas-:  °sira  with  dusty 
head  Sn98o  ;  J  iv.184,  362,  371.  Seepankadanta.  —  (e) 
raj-:  -°agga  a  heap  of  dust,  dirt  J  v. 187  (  =  raja- 
kkhandha  C.) ;  fig.  =  kilesa  Pug  65.  68  (here  perhaps  nt. 
of  a  distorted  rajakkha  ?  So  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.).  -°upa- 
vahana  taking  away  the  dust  (or  dirt)  Sn  391,  392. 

Bajja  (nt.)  [Sk.  rajya,  fr.  raj]  kingship,  royalty,  kingdom, 
empire;  reign,  throne;  (fig.)  sovereignty  A  111.300  (°r) 
kareti);  Sn  114,  553  (°r)  kareti  to  reign);  J  1.57;  64 
(ekarattena  tipi  rajjani  atikkamma ;  3  kingdoms) ; 
III. 170  (°r)  amaccanai)  niyyadetva),  199  (dukkhasey- 
yai)  api  rajjar)  pi  karaye) ;  iv.96,  105,  393  (nava  rajja 
new  kingship,  newly  (or  lately)  crowned  king) ;  VI.4 
(rajjato  me  sussitva  mara^am  eva  seyyo  :  death  by 
withering  is  better  than  kingship);  VvA  314  (=J  1.64 
as  above) ;  PvA  73  sq.  ;  Mhvs  10,  52  (raja  rajjar)  aka- 
rayi).  — cakkavatti°  rule  of  a  universal  king  DhA 
111.191  ;  deva°  reign  amongst  gods  KhA  227;  padesa° 
local  sovereignty  It  15  ;  Kh  viii.12  (cp.  KhA  227). 


-siri-diyika  (devata)  (goddess)  giving  success  to  the 
empire  DhA  II.  1 7.    -sima  border  of  the  empire  Vism  121. 

Rajjati  [cp.  Sk.  rajyati,  raj  or  raaj,  Med.  of  rajati]  to  be 
excited,  attached  to  (loc),  to  find  pleasure  in  S  iv.74 
(na  so  rajjati  rupesu  ;  .=  viratta-citta) ;  Sn  160,  813 
(contrasted  with  virajjati)  ;  Ps  1.58,  77  sq.,  130,  178; 
Nd'  138;  Miln  386  (rajjasi  rajaniyesu  etc.:  in  comb» 
with  dosa  &  moha  or  derivations,  representing  raga  or 
lobha,  cp.  lobhaniya);  VbhA  11. — ppr.  rajjamana 
PvA  3;  Pot.  rajjeyya  Miln  280  (kampeyya-(- ) ;  grd. 
rajjitabba  Miln  386  (rajaniyesu  r. ;  with  dussaniyesu 
and  muyhanlyesu ;  followed  by  kampitabba) ;  fut. 
rajjissati  DhsA  194;  aor.  araftji  Vin  1.36  =  J  1.83  (na 
yitthe  na  hute  araftjii)).  — pp.  ratta. 

Rajjana  (nt.)  [fr.  rajjati]  defilement  DA  1.195.  Cp. 
muyhana. 

Rajja  (f.)  [Vedic  rajju,  cp.  Lat.  restis  rope,  Lith.  reigis 
wicker,  basket]  a  cord,  line,  rope  S  11. 128;  Vin  11. 120, 
148  (avinchana") ;  Nd'  304 ;  J  1.464,  483  (fisherman's 
line);  v.173;  Mhvs  10,  61;  DhA  iv.54;  VbhA  163; 
KhA  57;  VvA  207;  Sdhp  148,  153. 

-kara  rope-maker  Miln  331.  -gahaka  "  rope-holder," 
(king's)  land-surveyor  J  ii.367  =  DhA  iv.88  (see  Fick, 
Sociale  Gliederung  97). 

Rajjuka  [rajju -t-ka]  i.  a  rope,  line  J  1.164  (bandhana°)  ; 
ThA    257. — •2.=rajjugahaka,     king's    land    surveyor 

Rafijati  [raflj  =  raj:  see  rajati  &  rajjati  —  Dhtp  66  & 
398  defines  raflja  =  rage]  i.  to  colour,  dye  J  1.220. — 
2.  (  =  rajjati)  to  find  delight  in,  to  be  excited  Sn  424 
(ettha  me  r.  mano ;  v.  1.  BB  rajjati).  —  Caus.  rafijeti  to 
delight  or  make  glad  D  111.93  (in  etym.  of  raja  (q.  v.).  L 
—  pp.  raiijita. — Caus.  II.  rafijapeti  to  cause  to  be  B 
coloured  or  dyed  DhA  iv.106  (v.  1.  raj").  ' 

Rafijana  (nt.)  [fr.  rafijati]  delighting,  finding  pleasure,  j. 
excitement  DhsA  363  (rafijan'  atthena  rago ;  v.  1.  ■ 
rajano°  ;  perhaps  better  to  be  read  rajjana").  r 

Rafijita  [pp.  of  raajeti]  coloured,  soiled,  in  raja°  affected 
with  stain,  defiled  J  i.i  17.  —  See  also  anu°  &  pari°. 

Ratati  [raj;  Dhtp  86  :  "  paribhasane  "]  to  yeU,  cry;  shout 
(at),  scold,  revile  :  not  found  in  the  texts. 

Rattha  (nt.)  [Vedic  raffs']  reign,  kingdom,  empire;  II 
country,  realm  Sn  46  (expl''  at  Nd'  536  as  "  ratthafi  ca  1 
janapadaa  ca  kotth&gSJ'aii  ca  .  .  .  nagarafi  ca  "),  287, 
444,  619;  J  IV.389  (°g  arattfiai)  karoti) ;  PvA  19  (°g 
kareti  to  reign,  govern).  Pabbata"  mountain -kingdom 
SnA  26 ;  Magadha°  the  kingdom  of  Magadha  PvA  67. 
-pin^a  the  country's  alms-food  (°i)  bhudjati)  Dh  308 
(saddhaya  dinnag);  A  1. 10;  S  11.221  ;  M  111.127;  Th  2, 
1 10  ;  It  43,  90.  -vasin  inhabitant  of  the  realm,  subject 
DhA  III. 48 1. 

Ratthaka  (adj.)  [Sk.  ra^traka]  belonging  to  the  kingdom, 
royal,  sovereign  J  iv.91  (senavahana).  — Cp.  ratthik*- 

Ratthavant  (adj.)  [ratfha-l-vant]  possessing  a  kingdom  or 
kingship  Pv  11. 6''  (°nto  khattiya). 

Ratthika  [fr.  rattha,  cp.  Sk.  ra§trika]  i .  one  belonging  to 
a  kingdom,  subject  in  general,  inhabitant  J  11.241  (brih- 
maija-gahapati-r.-dovarik'  adayo).  —  2.  an  official  of 
the  kingdom  [cp.  Sk.  ra?triya  a  pretender ;  also  king's 
brother-in-law]  A  111.76=300  (r.  pettanika  senaya 
senapatika). 

Rapa  [Vedic  raija,  both  "enjoyment,"  and"  battle."    The     , 
Dhtp  (115)  only  knows  of  rap  as  a  sound-base  sadd- 
attha  (  =  Sk.  ran'  to  tinkle)]   i.  fight,  battle;  only  in 
Th   2,    360   (raoar)   karitva  kimanai)) :   see  discussed 


Rata 


21 


Rati 


below ;  also  late  at  Mhvs  35,  69  (Subhar&jag  ra^e 
hantvi).  —  2.  intoxication,  desire,  sin,  fault.  This 
meaning  is  the  Buddhist  development  of  Vedic  rai)a  = 
enjoyment.  Various  influences  have  played  a  part  in 
determining  the  meaning  &  its  expl'  in  the  scholastic 
terms  of  the  dogmatists  and  exegetics.  It  is  often 
expl^  as  papa  or  raga.  The  Tiki  on  DhsA  50  (see 
Expos.  67)  gives  the  foil,  expl""  (late  &' speculative) : 
(a)  =  reQU,  dust  or  mist  of  lust  etc. ;  (b)  fight,  war  (against 
the  Paths) ;  (c)  pain,  anguish  &  distress.  —  The  trsl» 
(Expos.  67)  takes  raija  as  "  cause  of  grief,"  or  "  harm," 
hence  arana  "  harmless  "  and  sarana  "  harmful  "  (the 
latter  trsl""  as  "  concomitant  with  war  "  by  Dks.  Irsl.  of 
Dhs  1294 ;  and  asarana  as  opp.  "  not  concomitant  "  ; 
doubtful).  At  S  1. 148  (rupe  raQai)  disv&)  it  is  almost 
syn.  with  raja.  Bdhgh.  expl^  this  passage  (see  K.S. 
320)  as  "  rupamhi  j&ti-jari-bhanga-sankh&tai)  dosar)," 
trsl*  {K.S.  186):  "  discerning  canker  in  visible  objects 
material." 

The  term  is  not  sufl&ciently  cleared  yet.  At  Th  2, 
358  we  read  "(kamil)  appassJdi  ranakar&  sukka- 
pakkha-visosana,"  and  v.  360  reads  "  rai^Lar)  karitvi 
kamanai)."  ThA  244  expl=  v.  358  by  "  rig'  adi  sam- 
bandhanato"  ;  v.  360  by  "  kimanar)  rapar)  te  ca  may  a 
katabbai)  ariyamaggag  sampaharai)  katva."  The  first 
is  evidently  "  grief,"  the  second  "  fight,"  but  the  trsl« 
{Sisters  145)  gives  "  stirring  strife  "  for  v.  358,  and 
"  fight  with  worldly  lusts  "  for  v.  360  ;  whereas  Kern, 
Toev.  a.  v.  raiiiakara  gives  "  causing  sinful  desire  "  as 
trsl  . 

The  word  arana  (see  arapa')  was  regarded  as  neg. 
of  rava  in  both  meanings  (i  &  2 ) ;  thus  either  "  freedom 
fr.  passion  "  or  "  not  fighting."  The  trsl»  of  DhsA  50 
{Expos.  67)  takes  it  in  a  slightly  difi.  sense  as  "  harm- 
less "  (i.  e.  having  no  grievous  causes).  — At  M  111.235 
ara^a  is  a  quasi  summing  up  of  "  adukkha  an-upaghata 
anupayasa  etc.,"  and  sarana  of  their  positives.  Here 
a  meaning  like  "  harmfuiness  "  &  "  harmlessness  " 
seems  to  be  fitting.  Other  passages  of  arana  see  under 
arana. 

-jaha  (raijaiijaha)  giving  up  desires  or  sin,  leaving 
causes  of  harmfuiness  behind.  The  expression  is 
old  and  stereotype.  It  has  caused  trouble  among 
interpreters  :  Trenckner  would  like  to  read  ranafljaya 
"  victorious  in  battle  "  {Motes  83).  It  is  abo  BSk., 
e.  g.  Lai.  Vist.  50  ;  Av6  H.131  (see  Speyer's  note  3  on 
this  page.  He  justifies  trsl*  "  pacifier,  peace-maker  "). 
At  foil,  passages  :  S  1.52  (trsl*  "  quitting  corruption  ") ; 
It  io8  (Seidenstucker  trsl' :  "  dem  Kampfgewiihl  ent- 
ronnen  ");  Miln  21  ;  Nett  54;  Sdbp  493,  569. 

RfttA  [pp.  of  ramati]  delighting  in  (loc.  or  -"),  intent  on. 
devoted  to  S  iv.117  (dhamme  jh&ne),  389  sq.  (bhava° 
etc.);  Sn  54  (sangapika°)  212,  250,  327,  330  (dhamme), 
461  (yaiiiie),  737  (upasame);  Mhvs.  i,  44  (mahaka- 
nijjiko  Satthasabba-loka-hiterato) ;  32,  84  (ratopuflfle) ; 
PvA  3,  13,  19  ("manasa). 

Batana*  (nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  ratna,  gift;  the  BSk.  form  is 
ratna  (Divy  26)  as  well  as  ratana  {Avi  n.i99)]  '•  (•>*■) 
a  gem,  jewel  VvA  321  (not  =  ratana',  as  Hardy  in  Index) ; 
PvA  53  (nanavidhani). — The  7  ratanas  are  enumi" 
under  vejuriya  (Miln  267).  They  are  (the  precious 
minerals)  suvaona,  rajata,  uiutta,  maiji.  vejuriya, 
vajjra,  pavala.  (So  at  Abhp  490.)  These  7  are  said 
to  be  used  in  the  outfit  of  a  ship  to  give  it  more  splen- 
dour :  J  II. 1 12.  The  7  (unspecified)  are  mentioned  at 
Th  2.  487  (satta  ratanani  vasseyya  vutthima  "  all  seven 
kinds  of  gems  ") ;  and  at  DhA  1.274,  where  it  is  said  of 
a  ratana-manijapa  that  in  it  there  were  raised  flags 
"  sattaratana-maya."  On  ratana  in  similes  see  J.P.T.S. 
1909,  127.  —  2.  (fig.)  treasure,  gem  of  (-°)  Sn  836 
(etadisai)  r.  =  dibb'  itthi-ratana  SnA  544);  Miln  262 
(dussa°  3  very  fine  garment).  —  Usually  as  a  set  of  7 
valuables,  belonging  to  the  throne  (the  empire)  of  a 


(world-)  king.  Thus  at  D  11.16  sq. ;  of  Maha-Sudassana 
D  11.172  sq.  They  are  enum*  singly  as  follows:  the 
wheel  (cakka)  D  11.172  sq.,  the  elephant  (hatthi,  called 
Uposatha)  D  11.174,  187,  197;  the  horse  (assa,  Vali- 
haka)  ibid. ;  the  gem  (mai^i)  D  ii.i  75,  187 ;  the  woman 
(itthi)  ibid.;  the  treasurer  (gahapati)  D  11.176,  188; 
the  adviser  (pari^ayaka)  ibid.  The  same  7  are  enum"" 
at  D  1.89 ;  Sn  p.  106 ;  DA  1.250  ;  also  at  J  iv.232,  where 
their  origins  (homes)  are  given  as  :  cakka°  out  of  Cakka- 
daha ;  hatthi  from  the  Upasatha-race  ;  assa°  from  the 
clan  of  Valfthassaraja.  ma^i"  from  VepuUa,  and  the  last 
3  without  specification.  See  also  remarks  on  gaha- 
pati. Kern,  Toev.  8.  v.  ratana  suspects  the  latter  to 
be  originally  "  major  domus  "  (cp.  his  attributes  as 
"  wealthy  "  at  MVastu  1.108).  As  to  the  exact  meaning 
of  pario&yaka  he  is  doubtful,  which  mythical  tradition 
has  obscured. — The  7  (moral)  ratanas  at  S  11.217  & 
111.83  are  probably  the  same  as  are  given  in  detail  at 
Miln  336,  viz.  the  5  :  sUa°,  samadhi°,  paflfia",  vimutti", 
vimutti-fiaQadassana  (also  given  under  the  collective 
name  sila-kkhandha  or  dhamma-kkhandha),  to  which 
are  added  the  2  :  pafisambhida"  &  bojjhanga°.  These 
7  are  probably  meant  at  PvA  66,  where  it  is  said  that 
Sakka  "  endowed  their  house  with  the  7  jewels  "  (satta- 
r.-bharitag  katva).  —  Very  frequent  is  a  Triad  of  Gems 
(ratana-ttaya),  consisting  of  Dhamma,  Sangha,  Buddha, 
or  the  Doctrine,  the  Church  and  the  Buddha  [cp.  BSk. 
ratna-traya  Divy  481],  e.  g.  Mhvs  5,  81  ;  VbhA  384; 
VvA  123  ;  PvA  I,  49.  141. 

-ikara  a  pearl-mine,  a  mine  of  precious  metals  Th  i, 
1049;  J  II. 414;  VI.459;  Dpvs  1.18.  -kuta  a  jewelled 
top  DhA  1.159.  -palivethana  a  wrapper  for  a  gem  or 
jewel  Pug  34.  -vara  the  best  of  gems  Sn  683  (  =  vara- 
ratana-bhflta  SnA  486).  -wtta  the  Suttanta  of  the 
(3)  Treasures  (viz.  Dhamma,  Sangha,  Buddha),  repre- 
senting Sutta  Nipata  11. i  (P.T.S.  ed.  pp.  39-42).  men- 
tioned as  a  paritti  at  Vism  414  (with  4  others)  and  at 
Miln  150  (with  5  others),  cp.  KhA  63  ;  SnA  201. 

Ratana*  [most  likely  =Sk.  aratni :  see  ratani]  a  linear 
measure  (which  Abhp  p.  23  gives  as  equal  to  12  angula, 
or  7  ratanas=l  yatthi :  see  Kirfel,  Kosmographie, 
P-  335-  The  same  is  given  by  Bdhgh.  at  VbhA  343  : 
dve  vidatthiyo  ratanag  ;  satta  r.  yatthi)  J  v. 36  (visag- 
r-satai)) ;  vi.401  (°mattai)) ;  VvA  32 1  (so  given  by  Hardy 
in  Index  as  "  measure  of  length,"  but  to  be  taken  as 
ratana',  as  indicated  clearly  by  context  &  C);  Miln 
282  (satta-patitthito  attha-ratan'  ubbedho  nava-ratan' 
ayama-paripaho  pasadiko  dassaniyo  Uposatho  naga- 
raja  :  alluding  to  ratana'  2  I). 

Ratanaka  (-°)  (adj.)  [ratana-l-ka,  the  ending  belonging 
to  the  whole  cpd.]  characteristic  of  a  gem,  or  a  king's 
treasure ;  in  phrase  aniggata-ratanake  "  When  the 
treasure  has  not  gone  out  "  Vin  iv.160.  where  the  chief 
queen  is  meant  with  "  treasure." 

Ratani  [Sk.  aratni  "  elbow  "  with  apocope  and  diaeresis ; 
given  at  Halayudha  2,  381  as  "  a  cubit,  or  measure 
from  the  elbow  to  the  tip  of  the  little  finger."  The 
form  ratni  also  occurs  in  Sk.  The  etym.  is  fr.  Idg. 
•ole  (to  bend),  cp.  Av.  ar9|>na  elbow;  Sk.  arala  bent; 
of  which  enlarged  bases  *olen  in  Lat.  ulna,  ond  •oleq 
in  Lat.  lacertus,  Sk.  lakutab  =  P.  laguja.  See  cognates 
in  Walde.  Lat.  Wlb.  s,  v.  lacertus]  a  cubit  Miln  83  (attha 
rataniyo). 

Ratanika  (adj.)  [fr.  ratana]  a  ratana  in  length  J  1.7 
(a^^ha");  Miln  312  (attha°). 

Rati  (f.)  [Classic 'Sk.  rati,  fr.  ram]  love,  attachment, 
pleasure,  liking  for  (loc.),  fondness  of  S  1.IJ3  (°g  pac- 
canubhavati),  207;  iu.256 ;  Sn  41  ( =  anukkhanthit' 
adhivacanag  Nd*  537).  59  ('d.).  270,  642,  956  (  =  nek- 
khamma-rati  paviveka",  upasama°  Nd'  457);  J  111.377 
(kilesa°) ;  DhA  iv.225  ;  PvA  77.    — arati  dislike,  aversion 


Ratin 


22 


Ratha 


S  1.7,  54,  128,  180,  197;  V.64 ;  Sn  270  (  +  rati),  642 
(id.) :  Dh  418  (rati+  ) ;  Th  2,  339  ;  DhsA  193  ;  PvA  64  ; 
Sdhp  476.  — ratii)  karoti  to  delight  in,  to  make  love 
Vism  195  (purisa  itthisu). 

Batin  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  rati]  fond  of,  devoted  to,  keen  on, 
fostering ;  f.  ratini  J  iv.320  (ahigsa°). 

Batta*  [pp.  of  rafijati,  cp.  Sk.  rakta]  i.  dyed,  coloured 
M  1.36  (duratta-vanna  difficult  to  dye  or  badly  dyed  ; 
MA  167  reads  duratta  and  expl^  as  duranjita-vaijna ; 
opp.  suratta  ibid.);  Sn  287  (nana-rattehi  vatthehi); 
Vism  4 1 5  (°vattha-nivattha,  as  sign  of  mourning)  ; 
DhA  IV. 226  (°vattha). — 2.  red.  This  is  used  of  a 
high  red  colour,  more  like  crimson.  Sometimes  it 
comes  near  a  meaning  like  "  shiny,  shining,  glittering  " 
(as  in  ratta-suvaijija  the  glittering  gold),  cp.  etym.  & 
meaning  of  rajati  and  rajana.  It  may  also  be  taken 
as  "  bleached  "  in  ratta-kambala.  In  ratta-phalika 
(crystal)  it  approaches  the  meaning  of  "  white,"  as  also 
in  expl"  of  puncjlarika  at  J  v.216  with  ratta-paduma 
"  white  lotus."  —  It  is  most  commonly  found  in  foil, 
comb^  at  foil,  passages:  Miln  191  (°lohita-candana) ; 
Vism  172  ("kambala),  174  ("koraij^aka),  191  (°pataka) ; 
J  1-394  (pavala-ratta-kambala) ;  in. 30  (°puppha-dama) ; 
V.37  (°salivana),  216  (°paduma) ;  372  (°suvaijija) ; 
DhA  1.393  (id.),  248  (°kambala) ;  iv.189  ("candana- 
rukkha  red-sandal  tree);  SnA  125  (where  paduma  is 
given  as  "  ratta-set'  adivasena");  VvA  4  ("dupaffa), 
65  (°suvanna),  177  (°phalika) ;  PvA  4  (°virala-mala ; 
garland  of  red  flowers  for  the  convict  to  be  executed, 
cp.  pick,  Sociale  Gliederung  104),  157  ("paduma),  191 
(°sali) ;  Mhvs  30,  36  (°kambala) ;  36,  82  (rattani  akkhini 
bloodshot  eyes).  With  the  latter  cp.  cpd.  rattakkha 
"  with  red  eyes  "  (fr.  crying)  at  PvA  39  (v.  1.  BB.).'and 
Np.  rattakkhin  "  Red-eye "  (Ep.  of  a  Yakkha).  — 
3.  (fig.)  excited,  infatuated,  impassioned  S  iv.339 ; 
Sn  795  (viraga") ;  It  92  (macca  ratta) ;  Miln  220.  Also 
in  comb"  ratta  dut^ha  mulha:  see  Nd*  s.  v.  chanda  ;  cp. 
bhava-raga-ratta. 

Batta'  (nt.)  &  (poet.)  ratta  (f.)  [Epic  Sk.  ratra ;  Vedic 
ratra  only  in  cpd.  aho-ratrai).  Semantically  an  abstr. 
formation  in  collect,  meaning  "  the  space  of  a  night's 
time,"  hence  "  interval  of  time  "  in  general.  Other- 
wise ratri :  see  under  ratti]  (rarely)  night ;  (usually) 
time  in  general.  Occurs  only  -°,  with  expressions  giving 
a  definite  time.  Independently  (besides  cpds.  mentioned 
below)  only  at  one  (doubtful)  passage,  via.  Sn  1071, 
where  BB  MSS.  read  rattam-aha  for  rattar)  aho,  which 
corresponds  to  the  Vedic  phrase  aho-ratrarj  (  =  P.  aho- 
rattai))  The  P.T.S.  ed.  reads  nattat] ;  SnA  593  reads 
nattar),  but  expl'  as  rattin-divar),  whereas  Nd'  538 
reads  rattag  &  expl* :  "  rattag  vuccati  ratti,  aha  (sic 
lege  !)  ti  divaso,  rattiii  ca  divafl  ca."  — •  Otherwise  only 
in  foil.  adv.  expressions  (meaning  either  "  time  "  or 
"  night  ") :  instr.  eka-rattena  in  one  night  J  1.64  ;  satta° 
after  one  week  (lit.  a  seven-night)  Sn  570. — ace.  sg. 
cira-rattag  a  long  time  Sn  665  ;  digha"  id.  [cp.  BSk. 
dirgha-ratrag  freq.]  Sn  22  ;  M  1.445  ;  a<J(Jha°  at  "  half- 
night,"  i.  e.  midnight  A  111.407;  pubba-ratt'  dpara- 
rattag  one  night  after  the  other  (lit.  the  last  one  and 
the  next)  DhA  iv.129. — ace.  pi.  cira  rattani  a  long 
time  J  v. 268.  —  loc.  in  var.  forms,  viz.  vassa-ratte  in 
the  rainy  season  J  v. 38  (Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  gives  wrongly 
111.37,  143;  aij^lia-ratte  at  midnight  PvA  152  ;  a<Jdha- 
rattiyag  at  midnight  Vv  81"  ( =  adcjharattiyag  VvA 
315);  diva  ca  ratto  ca  day  &  night  Vv  31'  (  =  rattiyag 
VvA  130);  cira-rattaya  a  long  time  J  v.267 ;  Pv  1.9*. 

-andhakara  the  dark  of  night,  nightly  darkness  Vin 
IV.268  (oggate  suriye) ;  M  1.448.  -fiparata  abstaining 
from  food  at  night  D  1.5  (cp.  DA  1.77).  -flfiu  of  long 
standing,  recognised  D  1.48  (in  phrase  :  r.  cira-pabba- 
jito  addhagato  etc.;  expl*  at  DA  1.143  as  "  pabbaj- 
jato  patthaya  atikkanta  bahu  rattiyo  janati  ti  r."); 
A  11.27  (here  the  pi.  rattaflfia.  as  if  fr.  sg.  ratta-iSfla) ; 


Sn  p.  92  (thera  r.  cira-pabbajita ;  the  expl"  at  SnA  423 
is  rather  fanciful  with  the  choice  of  either  =  ratana-nnu, 
i.  e.  knowing  the  gem  of  Nibbana,  or  =  bahu-ratti-vidu, 
i.  e.  knowing  many  nights);  ThA  141.  A  f.  abstr. 
°Afluta  "  recognition  "  is  found  at  M  1.445  (spelt  ratail- 
fluta.  but  V.  1.  °uta).  -samaye  (loc,  adv.)  at  the  time 
of  (night)  J  1.63  (addha-ratta°  at  midnight),  264  (id.) ; 
IV. 74  (vassa°  in  the  rainy  season) ;  PvA  216  (addha"), 

Ratti  (f .)  [Vedic  ratri  &  later  Sk.  ratri.  —  Idg  *Iadh  as 
in  Gr.  \i)9id  =  Lat.  lateo  to  hide  ;  Sk  rahu  dark  demon  ; 
also  Gr.  Aijrii  (  =  Lat.  Latona)  Goddess  of  night  ;  Mhg. 
luoder  insidiousness ;  cp.  further  Gr.  \av9ai'ui  to  be 
hidden,  X^fli)  oblivion  (E.  lethargy).  —  The  by-form  of 
ratti  is  ratta*]  night  D  1.47  (dosina).  gen.  sg.  ratya  (for 
•rattiya)  Th  i,  517;  Sn  710  (vivasane  =  ratti-samatik- 
kame  SnA  496);  J  vi.491.  abl.  sg.  rattiya  in  phrases 
abhikkantaya  r.  at  the  waning  of  night  D  11.220  ;  Vin 
1.26  ;  S  1. 16  ;  M  1. 143  ;  &  pabhataya  r.  when  night  grew 
light,  i.  e.  dawn  J  1.81,  500.  instr.  pi.  rattisu  Vin  1.288 
(hemantikasu  r.).  A  loc.  ratya  (for  ♦ratryam)  and  a 
nora.  pi.  ratyo  (for  *ratryah)  is  given  by  Geiger,  P.Gr. 
§  58'.  —  Very  often  comb'*  with  and  opp.  to  diva  in 
foil,  comb"*:  rattin-^iva  [cp.  BSk.  ratrindiva  =  Gr. 
rvx^Vf^po"'  Av^  1.274,  278;  II. 176;  Divy  124]  a  day 
&  a  night  (something  like  our  "  24  hours  "),  in  phrase 
dasa  rattindiva  a  decade  of  n.  &  d.  (i.  e.  a  10-day  week) 
A  V.85  sq. ;  adverbially  satta-rattin-divag  a  week 
DhA  1. 108.  As  adv.  in  ace.  sg.  :  rattin-divag  night  and 
day  A  111.57 ;  Sn  507,  1142;  It  93  ;  J  1.30 ;  or  rattiil  ca 
divafl  ca  Nd*  538,  or  rattig  opposed  to  adv.  diva  by 
night — by  day  M  1.143  ;  PvA  43.  —  Other  cases  as  adv. : 
ace.  eka  rattig  one  night  J  1.62  ;  Pv  11. 9'  ;  PvA  42  ;  tag 
rattig  that  night  Mhvs  4,  38  ;  imag  r.  this  night  M  1.143  ; 
yaficar.  .  .  .  yancar.  .  .  .  etasmig  antare  in  between 
yon  night  and  yon  night  It  121  ;  rattig  at  night  Miln 
42  ;  rattig  rattig  night  after  night  Mhvs  30,  16. — gen. 
rattiya  ca  divasassa  ca  by  n.  &  by  day  S  11.95.  —  '<"^- 
rattiyafi  by  night  VvA  130,  315  (addha°  at  midnight); 
PvA  22  ;  and  ratto  in  phrase  diva  ca  ratto  ca  Sn  223  ; 
Th  2,  312  ;  Dh  296;  Vv  31^;  8432  ;  s  1.33. 

-khaya  the  wane  of  night  J  1.19.  -cara  (sabba°)  all- 
night  wandering  S  1.201  (trsl.  "festival"),  -cheda 
interruption  of  the  probationary  period  (t.  t.)  Vin  11.34 
(three  such  :  sahavasa,  vippavasa,  anarocana).  -dhii- 
mayana  smouldering  at  night  Vism  107  (v.  1.  dhup°), 
comb*  with  diva-pajjalana,  cp.  M  1.143:  ayag  vam- 
miko  rattig  dhumayati  diva  pajjalati.  -pariyanta 
limitation  of  the  probationary  period  (t.  t.)  Vin  11.59. 
-bhaga  night-time  J  111.43  (°bhage) ;  Miln  18  (°bha- 
gena).  -bhojana  eating  at  night  M  1.473  ;  DA  1.77. 
-samaya  night-time,  only  in  loc.  ad(Jha-ratti-samaye 
at  midnight  VvA  255  ;  PvA  155. 

Batha^  [Vedic  ratha,  Av.  rajia,  Lat.  rota  wheel,  rotundus 
("  rotund  "  &  round),  Oir.  roth  =  Ohg  rad  wheel,  Lith. 
ratas  id.]  a  two-wheeled  carriage,  chariot  (for  riding, 
driving  or  fighting  S  1.33  (ethically) ;  A  iv.191  (horse  & 
cart;  diif.  parts  of  a  ratha);  M  1.396;  Sn  300,  654; 
Vism  593  (in  its  comp"  of  akkha,  cakka,  pafljara,  Tsa 
etc.);  J  in. 239  (passaddha"  carriage  slowing  up);  Th 
2,  229  (caturassag  rathag,  i.  e.  aVimana);  Mhvs  35,  42 
(gopa  rathe  yutta);  VvA  78  (500),  104,  267  (  =  Vimana), 
PvA  74.  — assatari"  a  chariot  drawn  by  a  she-mule 
Vv2o8  =  43>;  Pv  Ml';  J  VI. 355.  —  Phussa-ratha  state 
carriage  J  111,238;  vi.30  sq.  See  under  ph. — On 
ratha  in  similes  see  J. P.T.S.  i<^T.  127, 

-atthara  (rathatthara)  a  rug  for  a  chariot  D  1.7; 
Vin  1. 192  ;  II.  163.  -anika  array  of  chariots  Vin  iv.ioS. 
-isa  carriage  pole  A  iv.191.  -upatthara  chariot  or 
carriage  cover  D  1.103;  DA  1.273.  -esabha  (ratha-(- 
rjabha,  Sk.  rathar?abha)  lord  of  charioteers.  Ratha 
here  in  meaning  of  "  charioteer  "  ;  Childers  sees  rathin 
in  this  cpd.  ;  Trenckner,  Notes  59,  suggests  distortion 
from  rathe  £ubha.     Dhpala  at  PvA  163  clearly  under- 


Ratha 


23 


Rava 


stands  it  as  ratha- =  charioteer  explaining  "  rathesu 
usabha-sadiso  maha-ratho  ti  attho";  as  does  Bdhgh. 
at  SnA  321  (on  Sn  303):  "  maha-rathesu  khattiyesu 
akampiy'  atthena  usabha-sadiso."  —  Sn  303-308,  552  ; 
Pv  Ii.i3>  ;  Mhvs  5,  246  ;  15,  1 1  ;  29.  12.  -kara  carriage- 
builder,  chariot-maker,  considered  as  a  class  of  very 
low  social  standing,  rebirth  in  which  is  a  punishment 
(cp.  Fick,  Sociale  Gliederung  56,  207,  209  sq.)  S  1.93  ; 
Vin  IV. 9  (as  term  of  abuse,  enumi"  with  other  low 
grades:  caruj^la  vena  nesada  r.  pukkusa),  12  (°j5ti) ; 
M  11.152,  183  f.  :  as  karin  at  Pv  iii.i"  (expl*  as  camma- 
karin  PvA  175).  As  Npl.  name  of  one  of  the  7  Great 
Lakes  in  the  Himalaya  (RathakSradaha),  e.  g.  at 
Vism  416;  SnA  407.  -cakka  wheel  of  a  chariot  or 
carriage  Vism  238  (in  simile,  concerning  its  circumfer- 
ence);  PvA  65.  -pafijara  the  body  (lit,  "cage"  or 
"  frame  ")  of  a  carriage  Vv  83^  (  =  rath'  iipattha  VvA 
326);  J  11.172  ;  IV. 60  ;  DhA  1.28.  rjuga  a  chariot  yoke 
J  VI. 42.  -renu  "  chariot -dust,"  a  very  minute  quantity 
(as  a  measure),  a  mite.  Childers  compares  Sk.  trasa- 
renu  a  mote  of  dust,  atom.  It  is  said  to  consist  of  36 
tajjari's,  and  36  ratha-renu's  are  equal  to  one  likkhi  : 
\'i)hA  343.  -yinita  "  led  by  a  chariot,"  a  chariot -drive 
(Neumann,  "  Eilpost  ").  name  of  the  24""  Suttanta  of 
Majjhima  (M  1.145  sq.),  quoted  at  Vism  93,  671  and 
SnA  446.     -sala  chariot  shed  DhA  111.121. 

Ratha'  [fr.  ram,  cp.  Sk.  ratha]  pleasure,  joy,  delight :  see 
mano°. 

Bathaka^  (nt.)  [fr.  ratha,  cp.  Sk.  rathaka  m.]  a  little 
carriage,  a  toy  cart  D  1.6  (cp.  DA  1.86  :  khuddaka- 
rathai));  Vin  n.io  ;  iii.iSo  ;  M  1.226;  Miln  229. 

Rathaka'  (adj.)  [ratha -i-ka]  having  a  chariot,  neg.  a° 
without  a  chariot  J  vi.515. 

Rathika  [fr.  ratha]  fighter  fr.  a  chariot,  charioteer  M  1. 397 
(saflflato  kusalo  rathassa  anga-paccanganar)) ;  D  1. 51 
(in  list  of  var.  occupations,  cp.  DA  1.156);  J  VI. 15 
(H-patti-karika),  463  (id.). 

Rathika  &  Rathiya  (f)  [Vedic  rathya  belonging  to  the 
chariot,  later  Sk.  rathyi  road.  See  also  raccha]  a 
carriage-road.  —  (a)  rathika:  Vin  11.268;  Vism  60; 
PvA  4,  67.  —  (b)  rathiya:  D  1.83 ;  Vin  1.237,  344 : 
M  II. 108;  III. 163;  S  1.201  ;  II. 128;  IV. 344.  In  comp" 
rathiya",  e.  g.  rathiya-coja  "  street-rag "  Vism  62 
(expl''  as  rathikaya  chadcjita-cojaka). 

Radaat  ThA257  in  cpd.  "  sannivesa-visittha-rada-visesa- 
yutta  "  is  not  quite  clear  ("  splitting  "?). 

Radati  [rad:  see  etym.  at  Walde,  Lat.  Wtb.  s.  v.  rado 
("rase").  Given  in  meaning  "  vilekhana  "  at  Dhtp 
159  &  Dhtm  220.  Besides  this  it  is  given  at  Dhtm 
224  in  meaning  "  bhakkhana "]  to  scratch  Dhtp  159; 
cp.  rada  &  radana  tooth  Abhp  261. 

Randha^  [for  Sk.  raddha,  pp.  of  randhati  2]  cooked 
J  V.505  ;  vi.24  ;  Miln  107. 

Randba'  [Sk.  randhra,  fr.  randhati  i  ;  the  P.  form  vid 
*randdha  :  see  Geiger.  P.Gr.  §  58']  opening,  cleft,  open 
spot;  flaw,  defect,  weak  spot  A  iv.25 ;  Sn  255,  826 
randhamesin  looking  for  somebody's  weak  spot ; 
cp.  Nd'  165  ("  virandham"  aparandham°  khalitam° 
galitam"  vivaram-esi  ti");  J  n.53  ;  111.192  ;  SnA  393 
(-l-vivara);  DhA  111.376,  377  (°gavesita). 

Randhaka  (-°)  ladj.)  [fr.  randhati  2]  one  who  cooks, 
cooking,  a  cook  J  iv.43i  (bhatta°). 

Randhati  [radh  or  randh,  differentiated  in  Pali  to  2  mean- 
ings &  2  verbs  according  to  Dhtm  :  "  hii)sayai)  "  (148), 
and  "pike"  (827).  In  the  former  sense  given  as  rau4.  in 
the  latter  randh.  The  root  is  freq.  in  the  Vedas,  in 
meaning    i.     It   belongs   perhaps  to   Ags.  rendan   to 


rend  :  see  Walde,  Lat.  Wtb.  s,  v.  lumbus]  to  be  or  make 
subject  to,  (intrs.)  to  be  in  one's  power  ;  (trs.)  to  harass, 
oppress,  vex.  hurt  (mostly  Caus.  randheti^Sk.  ran- 
dhayati).  Only  in  Imper.  randhehi  J  1.332,  and  in 
Prohib.  ma  randhayi  J  v. 121,  and  pi.  mi  randhayug 
Dh  248  (  =  ma  randhantu  mi  mathantu  DhA  111.357). 
See  also  randha*. — 2.  to  cook  (cp.  Sk.  randhi  & 
randhana)  Miln  107  (bhojanar)  randheyya). — pp. 
randha^. 

Rapati  [rap]  to  chatter,  whisper  Dhtp  187  ("  vacane  ") ; 
Dhtm  266  ("  akkose  ").     See  also  lapati. 

Rabhasa  [rabb=labh,  which  sec  for  etym.  Cp.  also  Lat 
rabies.  —  Dhtp  205  expl'  rabh  (correctly)  by  Srarabha 
&  Dhtm  301  by  rabhassa]  wild,  terrible,  violent  D  1.91. 
expl^  by  "  bahu-bhanin  "  at  DA  1.256.  There  are 
several  w.  11.  at  this  passage. 

Rama  (-°)  (adj.)  [fr.  ram]  delighting,  enjoyable;  only  in 
cpd.  dii°  (  =  duli)  difficult  to  enjoy,  not  fit  for  pleasures  ; 
as  nt.  absence  of  enjoyment  Dh  87  =  8  v.24  ;  and  mano° 
gladdening  the  mind  (q.  v.). 

Ramaqa  (adj.)  [fr.  ramati ;  cp.  Sk.  ramana]  pleasing, 
charming,  delightful  DhA  11.202  (°ttb5na). 

Ramavaka  (ad j.)= ramana  J  111.207. 

RamaQlya  (&  °nlya)  (adj.)  [grd.  of  ramati]  delightful, 
pleasing,  charming,  pleasant,  beautiful  D  1.47  (°?iya 
dosina  ratti,  cp.  DA  1.141) ;  Sn  1013  ;  Mhvs  15,  69  (u) ; 
PvA  42,  51  (expl"  for  rucira).  As  ramaneyya  at  S 
1.233.     Cp.  ramaneyya(ka). 

Ramati  [ram;  def*  by  Dhtp  224  &  Dhtm  318  by  "  kiia- 
yag  "]  i.  to  enjoy  oneself,  to  delight  in  ;  to  sport,  find 
amusement  in  (loc.)  S  1.179  ;  Vin  197  (ariyo  na  r.  pape) ; 
Sn  985  (jhane) ;  Dh  79  (ariya-ppavedite  dhamme  sada 
r.  pandito);  subj.  i"  pi.  ramimase  Th  2,  370  (cp. 
Geiger,  P.Gr.  126);  med.  i«  sg.  rame  J  v.363  ;  imper. 
rama  Pv  11. 12"'  (r.  deva  maya  saha ;  better  with  v.  1. 
as  ramma) ; — fut.  ramissati  PvA  153.  —  ger.  ramma 
Pv  II. 12*'  (v.  1.  for  rama).  grd.  ramma  &  ramanlya 
(q.  v.).  — pp.  rata.  — Caus.  1.  rameti  to  give  pleasure 
to.  to  please,  to  fondle  Th  i.  13;  J  v.204  ;  vi.3  (pp. 
ramayamana) ;  Miln  313.  — pp.  ramita  (q.  v.). — 
Caus.  II.  ramapeti  to  enjoy  oneself  J  vi.114. 

Ramita  [pp.  of  rameti]  having  enjoyed,  enjoying,  taking 
delight  in,  amusing  oneself  with  (loc.  or  saha)  Sn  709 
(vanante  r.  siya) ;  Dh  305  (id.  =  abhirata  DhA  in. 472); 
Pv  II. 1 2"  ('mhi  taya  saha). 

Rambati  (&  lambati)  [lamb]  to  hang  down.  Both  forms 
are  given  with  meaning  "  avasagsane  "  at  Dhtp  198  and 
Dhtm  283. 

RambhS  (f.)  [Sk.  rambha]  a  plantain  or  banana  tree 
Abhp  589. 

Ramma  (adj.)  [grd.  of  ramati]  enjoyable,  charming,  beau- 
tiful Sn  305;  ThA  71  (v.  30);  Mhvs  i,  73;  14,  47; 
Sdhp  248,  512. 

Rammaka  (adj.)  [Sk  ramyaka]  N.  of  the  month  Chaitra 
J  V.63. 

Raya  [fr.  ri,  riijati  to  let  loose  or  flow,  which  is  taken  as 
ray  at  Dhtp  234,  def  as  "  gamana,"  and  at  Dhtm  336 
as  "  gati."  The  root  ri  itself  is  given  at  Dhtm  351  in 
meaning  "  santati,"  i.  e.  continuation.  —  On  etym,  cp. 
Vedic  retah;  Lat.  rivus  river  =  Gall.  Rgnos  "  Rhine." 
See  Walde.  Lai.  Wtb.  s.  v.  rivus]  speed,  lit.  current 
Abhp  40.     See  raya'. 

Raya'  [for  raya,  with  v.  for  y  as  freq.  in  Pali,  Dhtm  35a  : 
ru  "  gate  "]  speed,  exceeding  swiftness,  galloping,  in 
comb»  with  daya  running  at  Vin  li.ioi  ;  IV.4 ;  M  1.446 


Rava 


24 


Rasa 


(better  reading  here  dav'  atthe  rav'  atthe  for  dhive 
ra^atthe,  cp,  w.  11.  on  p.  567  &  Neumann,  Mittl. 
Sammlg.  11.672  n.  49).  Noie.  At  the  Vin  passages  it 
refers  to  speaking  &  making  blunders  by  over-hurrying 
oneself  in  speaking.  — The  Dhtm  (No.  871)  gives  rava 
as  a  synonym  of  rasa  (with  ass3.da  &  sneha).  It  is  not 
clear  what  the  connection  is  between  these  two  mean- 
ings. 

Rava*  [fr.  ru,  cp.  Vedic  rava]  loud  sound,  roar,  shout, 
cry;  any  noise  uttered  by  animals  J  11. 1 10;  ni.277; 
DhA  1.232  (sabba-rava-&fiu  knowing  all  sounds  of 
animals) ;  Miln  357  (karufiAa°).  See  also  r&va  & 
nita. 

BaTaka=rava,  in  go°  a  cow's  bellowing  M  1.225. 

Bavaoa  (adj.-nt.)  [fr.  ravati]  roaring,  howling,  singing, 
only  in  cpd.  °gha^  a  certain  kind  of  pitcher,  where 
meaning  of  ravana  is  uncertain.  Only  at  identical 
passages  (in  illustration)  Vism  264=362  =  KhA  68 
(reading  pel^-ghata,  but  see  App.  p.  870  ravana'')  = 
VbhA  68  (where  v.  1.  yavana°,  with  ?). 

Bavati  [ru :  Idg.  're  &  *rea,  cp.  Lat.  ravus  "  raw,  hoarse," 
raucus,  rumor  "  rumour  "  ;  Gr.  upvo/iai  to  shout, 
iipviov  roaring,  etc.  ;  Dhtp  240  :  rn  "  sadde  "]  to  shout, 
cry,  make  a  (loud)  noise  Miln  254.  —  aor.  ravi  J  1.162 
(baddha-rSvai)  ravi);  11. no;  111.102  ;  PvA  100;  aravi 
Mhvs  10,  69  (maha-ravar)) ;  and  aravi  Mhvs  32,  79.  — 
pp.  ravita  &  ruta.  —  Cp.  abhi°,  vi°. 

Bavi  [cp.  Sk.  ravi]  the  sun  J  11.375  (taruija°-vaiHja- 
ratha). 

-inda  "  king  of  the  sun,"  N.  of  the  lotus  D5vs  in. 37. 
-hai)sa  "  sun-swan,"  N.  of  a  bird  J  vi.539. 

Bavita  [pp.  of  ravati]  shouted,  cried,  uttered  Miln  178 
(sakuija-ruta°). 

Basa^  [Vedic  rasa;  with  Lat.  ros  "  dew,"  Lith.  rasi  id., 
and  Av  RailhJ  N.  of  a  river,  to  Idg.  *eres  to  flow,  as  in 
Sk.  arjati,  Gr.  dii^oppot  (to  plu);  also  Sk.  r?abha :  see 
usabha*.  —  Dhtp  325  defines  as  "  assadane  "  629  as 
"  assada-snehanesu  " ;  Dhtm  451  as  "  assSde." — The 
decl.  is  usually  as  regular  a-stem,  but  a  secondary  instr. 
fr.  an  s-stem  is  to  be  found  in  rasasa  by  taste  A  11.63  ; 
J  111.328]  that  which  is  connected  with  the  sense  of 
taste.  The  def"  given  at  Vism  447  is  as  follows: 
"  jivh3.-patihanana-iakkhai;io  raso,  jivha-vifinaijassa 
visaya-bhavo  raso,  tass'  eva  gocara-paccupafjhano, 
miSla-raso  khandha-raso  ti  adinj  nayena  anekavidho," 
i.  e.  rasa  is  physiologically  &  psychologically  peculiar 
to  the  tongue  (sense-object  &  sense-perception),  and 
also  consists  as  a  manifold  object  in  extractions  from 
roots,  trunk  etc,  (see  next). — The  conventional  en- 
cyclopaedic def"  of  rasa  at  Nd'  240 ;  Nd*  540,  Dhs  629 
gives  taste  according  to  :  (a)  the  6-fold  objective  source 
as  miila-Tasa,  khandha°,  taca°,  patta°,  puppha°,  pha]a°, 
or  taste  (i.  e.  juice,  liquid)  of  root,  trunk,  bark,  leaf, 
flower  &  fruit ;  and  —  (b)  the  12 -fold  subjective  (physio- 
logical) sense-perception  as  ambila,  madhura,  tittika, 
kafuka  lonika,  kharika,  lambila  (Miln  56 :  ambila), 
kas&Ta  ;  sadu,  asadu,  sita,  unha,  or  sour,  sweet,  bitter, 
pungent,  salt,  alkaline,  sour,  astringent ;  pleasant,  un- 
pleasant, cold  &  hot,  Miln  56  has  the  foil. :  ambila, 
lavana,  tittaka,  kafuka,  kasjya,  madhura.  — -  i.  juice 
[as  applied  in  the  Veda  to  the  Soma  juice],  e.g.  in  the 
foil.  comb»« :  ucchu°  of  sugar  cane,  extract  of  sugar, 
cane  syrup  Vin  1.246  ;  VvA  180  ;  patta°  &  puppha°  of 
leaf  &  flower  Vin  1.246  ;  madhura°  of  honey  PvA  1 19. 
—  2.  taste  as  (objective)  quality,  the  sense-object  of 
taste  (cp.  above  defM).  In  the  list  of  the  ayatanas, 
or  senses  with  their  complementary  sense-objects 
(sentient  and  sensed)  rasa  occupies  the  4"'  place, 
following  upon  gandha.  It  is  stated  that  one  tastes  (or 
"  senses ' ' )  taste  with  the  tongue  (no  reference  to  palate) : 


jivhaya  rtisai)  siyitva  (or  vififleyya).  See  also  Syatana 
3  and  rupa.  —  M  111.55  (jivhS-vifSfteyya  r.),  267 ; 
D  111.244,  250;  Sn  387;  Dhs  609;  PvA  50  (vai^iia- 
gandha-rasa-sampanna  bhojana :  see  below  5).  —  3. 
sense  of  taste,  as  quality  &  personal  accomplishment. 
Thus  in  the  list  of  senses  marking  superiority  (the  10 
adhipateyyas  or  th&i^as),  similar  to  rasa  as  special  dis- 
tinction of  the  Mahapnrisa  (see  cpd.  ras-agga)  S  iv.275 
=  Pv  ii.g** ;  A  IV. 242.  —  4.  object  or  act  of  enjoyment, 
sensual  stimulus,  material  enjoyment,  pleasure  (usnally 
in  pi.)  Sn  65  (rzisesn  gedha,  see  materialistic  exegesis 
at  Nd'  540),  854  (rase  na  anagijjhati ;  perhaps  better 
rasesu,  as  SnA) ;  A  111.237  (pnriso  agga'-parititto : 
perhaps  to  No.  2 ).  —  5.  flavour  and  its  substance  (or 
substratum),  e.  g.  soup  VvA  243  (kakkataka°  crab- 
soup),  cp.  S  V.I 49,  where  8  soup  flavours  are  given 
(ambila.  tittaka,  katuka,  madhura,  kharika,  akh&rika, 
loQika,  aloijika) ;  Pv  11. i"  (aneka-rasa-vyaSjana  "with 
exceptionally  flavoured  sauce");  J  v.459.  465.  go- 
rasa  "  flavour  of  cow,  i.  e.  produce  of  cow :  see  under 
go.  Also  metaphorically  :  "  flavour,  relish,  pleasure  "  : 
Sn  257  (pariveka",  dhamma-piti",  cp.  SnA  299  "  assid' 
attbena  "  i.  e.  tastiness) ;  PvA  287  (vimutti"  relish  of 
salvation).  So  also  as  attha°,  dhamma°,  vimutti" 
Ps  11.89.  — 6.  (in  grammar  &  style)  essential  property, 
elegance,  brightness ;  in  dramatic  art  "  sentiment  " 
(flavour)  (see  Childers  s.  v.  natya-rasa)  Miln  340  (with 
opamma  and  lakkhai^a :  perhaps  to  No.  7) ;  PvA  122 
(°rasa  as  ending  in  Np.  Angirasa,  expl*  as  jntiyS  adhi- 
vacanag,"  i.  e.  brightness,  excellency).  —  7.  at  t.  t.  in 
philosophy  "  essential  property  "  (Expos.  84),  comb* 
with  lakkhana  etc.  (cp.  Cpd.  13,  213),  either  kicca" 
function  or  sampatti°  property  DhsA  63,  249 ;  Vism  8, 
448;  Miln  148.  —  8.  fine  substance,  semi-solid  semi- 
liquid  substance,  extract,  delicacy,  fineness,  dust. 
Thus  in  pathavl"  "essence  of  earth,"  humus  S  1.134 
(trsl»  "  taste  of  earth,"  rather  abstract) ;  or  rasa- 
pathavi  earth  as  dust  or  in  great  fineness,  "  primitive 
earth  "  (before  taking  solid  shape)  D  111.86  sq.  (trsl. 
"  savoury   earth,"    not   quite   clear),    opp.   to   bhQmi-  1 

pappataka;  Vism  418  ;  pabbata-rasa  mountain  extract, 
rock-substance  J  in. 55  ;  suvjinna°  gold  dust  J  1.93.  — 
9.  (adj,  -°)  tasting  Vv  16*1  (AmatarasS  f.  =  nibb4na- 
rasivini  VvA  85). 

-agga  finest  quality  (of  taste),  only  in  further  comp» 
with  °aggita  (ras-agga-s-aggita)  njost  delicate  sense 
trsl»  Dial.)  D  111.167,  and  "aggin  (ras-agga-s-aggin,  cp. 
MVastu  n.306  :  rasa-ras'  Agrin)  of  the  best  quality  (of 
taste,  cp.  above  2),  said  of  the  Mahapurisa  D  11.18  = 
111.144  ('^P-  trsl"  Dial.  11. 15  "his  taste  is  supremely 
acute  "),  The  phrase  &  its  wording  are  still  a  little 
doubtful.  Childers  gives  etym.  of  rasaggas-aggin  as 
rasa-ggas-aggin,  ggas  representing  gras  to  swallow  (not 
otherwise  found  in  P5li  I),  and  expl"  the  BSk.  ras'- 
dgrin  as  a  distortion  of  the  P.  form,  -aitjana  a  sort  of 
ointment  (among  5  kinds),  "  vitriol "  (Rh.  D.)  Vin 
1.203.  -Ada  enjoying  the  objects  of  taste  M  in. 168. 
-ayatana  the  sphere  of  taste  D  111.243,  290  ;  Dhs  629, 
653.  H95  (insert  after  gandha°,  see  Dhs.  trsl.  319). 
-arammana  object  of  taste  Dhs  12,  147,  157.  -asa 
craving  for  tastes  Dhs  1059.  -garuka  bent  on  enjoy- 
ment SnA  107.  -tanha  thirst  for  taste,  lust  of  sensual 
enjoyment  D  111,244,  280;  J  v,293  ;  Dhs  1059;  DhA 
IV.196.  -saiUia  perception  of  tastes  D  in. 244  (where 
also  °saflcetan5).  -haranl  (f)  [ph.  "haraniyo,  in  comp» 
harapi"]  taste-conductor,  taste-receiver ;  the  salivary 
canals  of  the  mouth  or  the  nerves  of  sensation ;  these 
are  in  later  literature  given  as  numbering  7000,  e.  g.  at 
J  V.293  (khobhetva  phari) ;  DhA  1.134  (anuphari) ; 
KhA  51  (only  as  7  I) ;  SnA  107  (pathama-kabaje  mukhe 
pakkhitta-matte  satta  rasa-harani-sahassani  amaten' 
eva  phutani  ahesur)).  Older  passages  are  ;  Vin  n.  137  ;  L 
D  III. 167  (referring  to  the  Mahapurisa  :  "  sampajjasa  m 
r-haraiji  susajjthita,"  trsl":  erect  taste-bearers  planted 
well  [in  throat]). 


25 


Raga 


Rasa'  {-°)  is  a  dial,  form  of  °dasa  ten,  and  occurs  in 
Classic  Pali  only  in  the  numerals  for  13  (terasa),  15 
(paijna-rasa,  pannarasa),  17  (sattarasa)  &  18  (ajtha- 
rasa,  late).  The  Prk.  has  gone  further  :  see  Pischel, 
Prk.Gr.  §  245. 

Rasaka  [fr.  rasa,  cp.  Classic  Sk.  rasaka]  a  cook  J  v. 46b, 
461.  507- 

Rasati  [ras]  to  shout,  howl  J  11.407  (w.  U.  rayati,  vasati ; 
C.  expl'  as  "  nadati  ")=iv.346  (v.  1.  sarati). 

Raiatta  (nt.)  [fr.  rasa]  taste,  sweetness  SnA  299. 

RasavatI  (f.)  [rasa  +  vant]  "possessing  flavours"  i.  e.  a 
kitchen  Vin  1.140. 

Ras&vin  (adj.  [fr.  rasa]  tasting  VvA  85  (nibbana"). 

Raslyati  [Pass. -Demon. -formation  fr.  rasa]  to  find  taste 
or  satisfaction  in  (gen.),  to  delight  in,  to  be  pleased  A 
IV.387  (bhasitassa),  388  (C. :  tussati,  see  p.  470). 

Rasmi  see  ra^jsi. 

Rassa  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  hrasva  :  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  49*.  The  Prk. 
forms  are  rahassa  &  hassa :  Pischel  §  354]  short  (opp. 
digha)  D  1.193  (digha  v5  r.  va  majjhima  ti  va),  223  (in 
contrast  with  d.) ;  Sn  633  ;  Dh  409  ;  J  1.356  ;  Dhs  617  ; 
Vism  2  72  (def . ) ;  DhA  : v.  1 84.  —  Cp.  ati°. 

-adesa  reduction  of  the  determination  (here  of  vowel 
in  ending)  J  111.489.  -sarira  (adj.)  dwarfish,  stunted 
J  1.356. 

Bassatta  (nt.)  [fr.  rassa]  shortness,  reduction  (of  vowel) 
DhsA  149. 

Rahati  [rah,  def*  at  Dhtp  339  &  632  by  "  caga,"  giving  up, 
also  at  Dhtm  490  by  "  cagasmir),"  876  by  caga  and 
gata]  to  leave,  desert :  see  pp.  rahita  &  der.  rahas, 
rahassa. 

Rahada  [Vedic  hrada,  with  diseresis  &  metathesis  *harada 
>rahada  ;  the  other  metathetic  form  of  the  same  hrada 
is  •draha>daha]  a  (deep)  pond,  a  lake  D  1.50  (°r)  iva 
vippasannar)  udanarj):  S  1.169=183  (dhammo  rahado 
sila-tittho) ;  Sn  72 1  =  Miln  4 1 4  (rahado  puro  va  pandito) ; 
It  92  (rahado  va  nivato),  114  (r.  sa-ummi  savatfo 
sagaho) ;  DhA  11. 152.  — As  udaka°  at  D  1.74,  84;  A 
III. 25  (ubbhid-odako) ;  Pug  47.  —  On  r.  in  similes  see 
J.P.T.S.  1907,  127. 

Rahas  &  Raho  (nt.)  [Vedic  rahas.  The  Pali  word  is 
restricted  to  the  forms  raho  and  raha°  (=*rahalj);  a 
loc.  rahasi  is  mentioned  by  Childers,  but  not  found  in 
the  Canon.  —  To  rahati]  lonely  place,  solitude,  lone- 
liness ;  secrecy,  privacy.  —  i .  raho  :  occurring  only 
as  adv.  "  secretly,  lonely,  in  secret,"  either  absolutely, 
e.  g.  S  1.46 ;  Sn  388 ;  Pv  11.7"  (opp.  avi  openly) ;  iv.!** 
(raho  nisinna) ;  Vism  201  (na  raho  karoti  papani : 
arahai)  tena  vuccati) ;  or  in  cpds.  e.  g.  °gata  being  in 
private,  being  alone  D  1.134  (-(-patisalllna) ;  Sn  p.  60. 
See  also  under  patisallina  ;  °gania  "  secret  convention, 
secret  intercourse,"  fig.  a  secret  adviser  J  vi.369  (after 
Kern,  not  found!);  °vada  secret  talk  M  111.230.  See 
also  anu°.  — 2.  raha°,  only  in  cpd.  raha-bhava  secrecy, 
in  def"  of  araihant  at  DA  i .  1 46  =  Vism  20 1  (rahabhavena 
ten'  esa  arahan  ti).  See  also  der.  raha-seyyaka.  Note. 
Hardy's  reading  yatha  rahat]  at  Pv  ii.g^  &  PvA  78 
is  not  correct,  it  should  be  yath'  arahar)  (cp.  similarly 
puj-iraha).  In  the  same  sense  we  would  preferably 
read  agg'  asan'  adi-arahanai)  "  of  those  who  merit  the 
first  seat  etc."  at  J  1.2 17.  although  all  MSS.  have  agga- 
sanadi-rahanar),  thus  postulating  a  form  raha  =  araha. 

Rahassa  (adj.  nt.)  [Sk.  rahasya]  secret,  private  ;  nt.  secrecy, 
secret  Mhvs  35,  64  (vatva  rahassai));  instr.  rahassena 
(as  adv.)  secretly  Mhvs  36,  80;  ace.  rahassag  id.  Pv 
IV.  i«. 

-katha  secret  speech,  whispered  words  J  1.411  ;  11.6. 


Rahassaka  (adj.)  [fr.  rahassa]  secret  Miln  91  (guyhai)  na 
katabbai)  na  rahassakai)). 

Rahayati  [Denom.  fr.  rahas ;  not  corresponding  to  Sk. 
rahayati,  C.  of  rahati  to  cause  to  leave]  to  be  lonely,  to 
wish  to  be  alone  M  11. 119. 

Rahita  [pp.  of  rah]  i.  lonely,  forsaken  Th  2,  373  (gantum 
icchasi  rahitai)  bhiijsanakat)  mahavanar)). — 2.  de- 
prived of,  without  (-°)  J  III. 369  (buddhiya  rahita 
satta);  DA  1.36  (avaijna") ;  PvA  63  (bhoga°),  67 
(acara°),  77  (gandha°).  Note,  samantarahita  is  to  be 
divided  as  sam-antarahita. 

RSga  [cp.  Sk.  raga,  fr.  ra] :  see  rajati]  i .  colour,  hne  ; 
colouring,  dye  Vin  11. 107  (anga°  "  rougeing  "  the  body  : 
bhikkhu  angaragai)  karonti) ;  ThA  78 ;  SnA  315  (nana- 
vidha°)  —  2  (as  t.  t  in  philosophy  &  ethics)  excite- 
ment, passion  ;  seldom  by  itself,  mostly  in  comb*  with 
dosa,  &  moha,  as  the  three  fundamental  blemishes  of 
character  :  passion  or  lust  (uncontrolled  excitement), 
ill-will  (anger)  and  infatuation  (bewilderment) ;  see  dosa* 
&  moha ;  cp.  saraga.  —  These  three  again  appear  in 
manifold  comb"  with  similar  terms,  all  giving  var. 
shades  of  the  "  craving  for  existence  "  or  "  lust  of  life  " 
(tanha  etc.),  or  all  that  which  is  an  obstacle  to  nibbana. 
Therefore  the  giving  up  of  raga  is  one  of  the  steps 
towards  attaining  the  desired  goal  of  emancipation 
(vimutti).  —  Some  of  the  comb"  are  e.  g.  the  3  (r.  d. 
m.)-(-  kilesa  ;  -(-  kodha  ;  very  often  fourfold  r.  d.  m.  with 
mana,  these  again  with  ditthi :  see  in  full  Nd'  3.  v.  raga 
(p.  237).  cp.  below  ussada.  —  Of  the  many  passages 
illustrating  the  contrast  raga>nibbina  the  foil,  may 
be  mentioned :  chandaraga  vinodanag  nibbanapadai) 
accutai)  Sn  1086;  yo  ragakkhayo  (etc.):  idag  vuccati 
amatar)  S  v.8 ;  yo  ragakkhayo  (etc.) :  idar)  vuccati 
nibbanai)  S  iv.251  ;  ye  'dha  pajahanti  kamaragag 
bhavararaganu-sayaflcapahaya  .  .  .  parinibbana-gata 
Vv  53" ;  kusalo  jahati  papakar)  .  .  .  raga  dosa-moha- 
kkhaya  parinibbuto  Ud  85.  —  Personified,  Raga  (v.  1. 
Raga),  Tanha  &  Arati  are  called  the  "  daughters 
of  Mara" '(Maradhita):  Sn  835;  DhA  in. 199;  Nd' 
,81.  —  For  further  detail  of  meaning  &  application 
see  e.  g.  —  (i)  with  dosa  &  moha:  D  1.79,  156; 
III. 107,  108,  132;  S  1. 184;  IV.139,  195,  250,  305; 
V.84,  357  sq. ;  M  II. 138  (rasa°  the  excitement  of  taste) ; 
A  1.52,  156  sq.,  230  sq. ;  11.256;  ill. 169,  451  sq.  ; 
IV.144;  It  56,  57;  Vism  421;  VbhA  268,  269  (sa" 
&  vita").  —  (2)  in  other  connection  :  D  in. 70.  74,  146, 
1.75,  217,  234  (arupa°),  249  (cittag  pariyadaya  titthati) ; 
S  11.231=271  (cittag  anuddhagseti) ;  in. 10;  iv.72,  329; 
V.74  (na  ragag  janeti  etc.);  A  11.149  (tibba-raga-jatiko 
ragajag  dukkhag  patisagvedeti) ;  111.233,  371  (kamesu 
vita°);  IV. 423  (dh4mma°) ;  Sn  2,  74,  139,  270  =  8  1.207 
(  +  dosa);  Sn  361,  493,  764,  974,  io46;Dh349  (tibbao  = 
bahala-raga  DhA  iv.68) ;  Ps  1.80  sq.  ;  n.37  (rupa"),  95 
(id.);  Vbh  145  sq.  (  =  taijha),  368  (  =  kiflcana),  390; 
Tikp  155,  167;  DA  1.116.  —  Opp.  viraga. 

-aggi  the  fire  of  passion  D  111.217;  S  iv.19;  It  92  (r. 
dahati  macce  ratte  kamesu  mucchite ;  -l-dosaggi  & 
mohaggi);  J  1.6 1  (°imhi  nibbute  nibbutag  nama  hoti). 
-Anusaya  latent  bias  of  passion  (for  =  dat.)  S  iv.205  (the 
3  anusayas  ;  raga°,  patigha°,  avijja°)  ;  It  80  (yo  su- 
bhaya  dhatuya  rago  so  paduyati).  -ussada  conceit  of 
lust,  one  of  the  7  ussadas  (r.  d.  m.,  mana,  ditthi,  kilesa, 
;  kanima)  Nd'  72.  -kkhaya  the  decay  (waning)  of  p. 
S  111.51,  160:  IV. 142.  250,  261:  v.8,  16,  25;  VbhA 
51  sq.  -carita  one  whose  habit  is  passion,  of  passionate 
behaviour  Miln  92  ;  Vism  105  sq.  (in  det.),  114  (H-dosa", 
I  moha°),  193  ;  KhA  54  (colour  of  the  blood  of  his  heart, 
cp.  Vism  409)  -t^hiniya  founded  on  passion  A  1.264  ; 
AA  32.  -patha  way  of  lust,  lustfulness,  passion,  sen- 
suality S  IV. 70  ;  Sn  370,  476  (with  expl"  "  rago  pi  hi 
duggatinag  pathatta  ragapatho  ti  vuccati  "  SnA  4 10). 
-rati  passionate  or  lustful  delight  DhA  in. 112  ;  -ratta 


Ragin 


26 


Raja 


affected  with  passion  S  1.136;   Sn  795  (as  "ragin,  cp. 
Nd^  ioo  =  kama-gunesu  ratta). 

Ragin  (-°)  [fr.  raga]  one  who  shows  passion  for,  possessed 
of  lust,  affected  with  passion  Sn  795  (cp.  Nd^  lOo) ; 
S  1. 136;  Visra  193,  194  (with  var.  characterisations). 

Rajaka  (adj.)  (-°)  [raja  +  ka,  the  ending  belonging  to  the 
whole  cpd.]  characteristic  of  the  king,  king- ;  in  cpds. 
arajaka  without  a  king  J  vi.39  (rafthe) ;  sarajaka  in- 
cluding the  king  Tikp  26  ;  f.  sarajika  Vin  1.209  (parisa). 
Also  in  phrase  anikkhanta-rajake  (loc.  abs.)  when  the 
king  has  not  gone  out  Vin  iv.160. 

Rajanfia  [fr.  raja,  cp,  Vedic  rajanya]  "  royalty  "  ;  a  high 
courtier,  a  khattiya  (  =  rajabhogga,  cp.  Fick,  Sociale 
Gliederung  100)  D  1.103  (Pasenadi  raja  .  .  .  uggehi 
va  rajaniyehi  va  kaficid  eva  mantanar)  manteyya) ; 
DA  1.273  (  =  anabhisitta  kumara,  i.  e.  uncrowned 
princes) ;  Miln  234  ;  VvA  297  (Payasi  r.). 

Rajata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  raja]  state  of  being  a  king,  kingship, 
sovereignty  J  1.119  (anuttara-dhamma°  being  a  most 
righteous  king). 

Rajati  [raj,  cp.  rajati  &  ranjati]  to  shine  VvA  134  (  =  vij- 
jotati).     Cp.  vi°. 

Raja  (Rajan)  [cp.  Vedic  raja,  n-stem.  To  root  ♦reg, 
as  in  Lat.  rego  (to  lead,  di-rect,  cp.  in  meaning  Gr. 
iiyifiiliv) :  see  etym.  under  uju.  Cp.  Oir.  ri  king,  Gallic 
Catu-rix  battle  king,  Goth  reiks  =  Ohg.  rihhi  =  rich  or 
Ger.  reich.  Besides  we  have  *reig  in  Ags.  rScean  = 
reach;  Ger.  reichen. — The  Dhtp  only  knows  of  one 
root  raj  in  meaning  "  ditti "  i.  e.  splendour]  king,  a 
ruling  potentate.  The  def"  at  Vin  111.222  is  "  yo  Tcoci 
rajjai)  kSreti."  The  fanciful  etym.  at  D  111.93  = 
Vism  419  is  "  dhammena  pare  ranjeti  ti  raja"  i.  e.  he 
gladdens  others  with  his  righteousness.  —  At  the  latter 
passage  the  origin  of  kingly  government  is  given  as  the 
third  stage  in  the  constitution  of  a  people,  the  2  pre- 
ceding being  maha-sammata  (general  consent)  and 
khattiya  (the  land-aristocrats). — Cases.  We  find  3 
systems  of  cases  for  the  original  Sk.  forms,  viz.  the 
contracted,  the  diaeretic  and  (in  the  pi.)  a  new  forma- 
tion with  -U-.  Thus  gen.  &  dat.  sg.  rafifio  [Sk.  rajnah] 
Vin  III. 107  ;  IV. 157  ;  J  11.378  ;  111.5  ;  Vv  74*  ;  and  rajino 
Sn  299,  415  ;  Th  2,  463  ;  J  iv.495  ;  Mhvs  2,  14  ;  instr.  sg. 
ratifia  Vin  111.43  ;  J  v. 444  ;  DhA  1.164  ;  PvA  22  ;  VbhA 
106 ;  and  rajina  [Sk.  rajfia]  Mhvs  6,  2  ;  ace.  sg.  rajanaQ 
Vin  IV. 157;  loc.  la-iiRe  PvA  76;  voc.  raja  Sn  422,  423. 
pi.  nom.  rajano  A  1.68  ;  gen.  dat.  rafifiag  [Sk.  rajfiai)] 
D  11.87;  Mhvs  18,  32;  and  rajunat)  Vin  1.228;  Ud  11; 
J  II. 104;  III. 487;  SnA  484;  PvA  loi,  133;  instr.  rafi- 
fiahi  A  1.279  rajiihi  Ud  41  ;  M  11. 120  ;  J  1.179 ;  111.45  ; 
Mhvs  5,  80  ;  8,  21  ;  and  rajubhi  D  11.258.  Cp.  Geiger, 
P.Gr.  §  92'.  —  I.  raja  is  a  term  of  sovereignship.  The 
term  raja  as  used  in  Buddhist  India  does  not  admit  of 
a  uniform  interpretation  and  translation.  It  is  pri- 
marily an  appellative  (or  title)  of  a  khattiya,  and  often 
the  two  are  used  promiscuously.  Besides,  it  has  a  far 
wider  sphere  of  meaning  than  we  convey  by  any  trsl' 
like  "  king  "  or  even  "  sovereign,"  or  "  prince."  We 
find  it  used  as  a  desigfnation  of  "  king  "  in  the  sense  of 
an  elected  or  successory  (crowned)  monarch,  but  also 
in  the  meaning  of  a  distinguished  nobleman,  or  a  local 
chieftain,  or  a  prince  with  var.  attributes  characterizing 
his  position  according  to  special  functions.  From  this 
we  get  the  foil,  scheme :  (a)  [based  on  mythological 
views:  the  king  as  representing  the  deity,  cp.  deva  = 
king.  Note  that  raja  never  takes  the  place  of  deva 
in  the  meaning  king,  but  that  maharaja  is  used  in  voc. 
equivalent  to  deva]  a  world-king,  over-lord,  a  so-called 
cakkavatti  raja.  This  is  an  office  (as  "  Universal 
King")  peculiar  to  the  Mahapurisa  or  the  (mythol.) 
"  Great  Man,"  who  may  become  either  the  Saviour  of 
men  in  the  religious  sense,  a  Sarama-sarabuddha,  or  a 


just  Ruler  of  the  earth  in  the  worldly  sense,  a  King  of 
Righteousness.  These  are  the  2  gatis  of  such  a  being, 
as  described  at  var.  places  of  the  Canon  (e.  g.  Sn  p.  106  ; 
Sn  1002,  1003;  D  III. 142  ;  A  1.76).  His  power  is 
absolute,  and  is  described  in  the  standard  phrase  "  c. 
dhammiko  dhatnma-raja  caturanto  vijitavi  janapada- 
tthavariya-ppatto  satta-ratana-samannagato,"  e.  g. 
D  III. 59.  Dhammapala  gives  the  dignity  of  a  C.  as 
the  first  "human  sovereign  powers"  (PvA  117). — 
The  four  iddhi's  of  a  C.  are  given  (quite  crudely)  at 
M  III.  1 76  :  he  is  beautiful,  lives  longer  than  others,  is  of 
a  healthier  constitution  than  others,  he  is  beloved  by 
the  brahmins  and  householders.  Other  qualities  :  how 
his  remains  should  be  treated  =  D  11. 141  ;  deserves  a 
thupa  D  II. 142  sq.  ;  his  four  qualities  D  11. 145  (the  4 
assemblies  of  khattiyas,  brahmanas,  gahapatis  & 
samanas  are  pleased  with  him).  See  under  cakkavatti 
&  ratana.  —  In  a  similar  sense  the  term  dhatnina-raja 
is  used  as  Ep.  of  the  Buddha  Sn  554  (raj'  5.ham  asmi 
dh-.r.  anuttaro) ;  J  1.262  ;  and  a  reflection  of  the  higher 
sphere  is  seen  in  the  title  of  politeness  (only  used  in 
voc.)  maharaja,  e.  g.  Sn  416  (addressed  to  Bimbisara) 
PvA  22  (id.) ;  J  VI. 515.  —  (b)  [in  a  larger  constitutional 
state]  the  crowned  (muddhS,vasitta)  monarch  (i.  e. 
khattiya)  as  the  head  of  the  principality  or  kingdom. 
The  def"  of  this  (general)  raja,  at  Nd^  542  is  significant 
of  the  idea  of  a  king  prevalent  in  early  Buddhist  times. 
It  is  :  "  khattiyo  muddh'  abhisitto  vijita-sangamo 
nihata-paccamitto  laddh'  adhippayo  paripuijna-kot- 
thagaro,"  i.  e.  "  a  crowned  noble,  victorious  in  battle, 
slaying  his  foes,  fulfilling  his  desires,  having  his  store- 
houses full."  This  king  is  "  the  top  of  men  "  (mukhai) 
manussanai))  Vin  1.246  =  Sn  568.  Cp.  D  1.7;  Sn  46 
(ratthai)  vijitam  pahaya) ;  J  v. 448  and  passim.  See 
also  below  3,  4  &  6.  — In  similes:  see  J.P.T.S.  1907, 
128;  &  cp.  Vism  152  (r.  va  saddh'  antagato),  336 
(wishing  to  become  an  artisan).  Here  belongs  the  title 
of  the  king  of  the  devas  (Sakka)  "  deva-raja,"  e.  g. 
DhA  III. 269,  441  ;  PvA  62.  —  (c)  [in  an  oligarchic  sense] 
member  of  a  kula  of  khattiyas,  e.  g.  the  kumaras  of  the 
Sakiyans  and  Koliyans  are  all  called  rajano  of  the  raja- 
kulanai)  in  J.  v. 413  sq.,  or  at  least  the  heads  of  those 
kulas.  Cp.jB.  Ind.  p.  ig.  —  (d)  [in  a  smaller,  autocratic 
state]  a  chieftain,  prince,  ruler ;  usually  (collectively) 
as  a  group  :  rajano,  thus  indicating  their  lesser  import- 
ance, e.  g.  A  V.22  (ku(Jda-rajano  rafifio  cakkavattissa 
anuyutta  bhavanti :  so  read  for  anuyanta) ;  Sn  553 
(bhoja°  similar  to  raja-bhogga  or  bhogiya  as  given  at 
SnA  453);  A  11.74  sq-  (dhammika  &  a°) ;  J  iv.495. 
Similarly  at  Vin  1.228  we  find  the  division  into  the  3 
ranks  :  mahesakkha  rajano,  majjhima  r.,  nica  r.  Here 
also  belongs  the  designation  of  the  4  lokapala  (or 
Guardians  of  the  World)  at  cattaro  maha-rajano,  the 
maha"  being  added  for  sake  of  politeness  (cp.  Note  A 
on  maha),  e.  g.  A  iv.242.  See  also  patiraja  &  cp.  below 
4  c.  —  (e)  A  wider  range  of  meaning  is  attached  to 
several  sub-divisions  (with  raja  or  without) :  officials 
and  men  who  occasionally  take  the  place  of  the  king 
(royal  functionaries),  but  are  by  public  opinion  con- 
sidered almost  equal  to  the  king.  Here  belongs  the 
def»  of  what  is  termed  "rajano"  (pi.  like  d)  at  Vin 
in. 47,  viz.  raja,  padesa-raja,  mapij^lika,  antara- 
bhogika,  akkhadassa,  mahamatta,  ye  va  pana  chejja- 
bhejjag  anusasanti  (i.  e.  those  who  have  juridical 
power).  See  also  below  4  b,  and  °putta,  "bhogga  [& 
other  cpds.].  — 2.  It  would  fill  a  separate  book,  if  we 
were  to  give  a  full  monograph  of  kingship  in  and  after 
the  Buddha's  time  ;  we  therefore  content  ourselves  with 
a  few  principal  remarks.  The  office  of  king  was  heredi- 
tary :  kula-santakar)  rajjai)  J  1.395;  ii.ii6;  iv.124; 
but  we  sometimes  read  of  a  king  being  elected  with 
great  pomp  :  J  1.470  ;  PvA  74.  He  had  the  political 
and  military  power  in  his  hand,  also  the  jurisdiction, 
although  in  this  he  is  often  represented  by  the  maha- 
matta, the  active  head  of  the  state.     His  10  duties  are 


Raja 


27 


Raja 


mentioned  at  several  places  (see  below  under  °dhamma). 
Others  are  mentioned  e.  g.  at  D  1.135,  where  it  is  said 
he  gives  food  and  seed-corn  to  the  farmer,  capital  to  the 
trader,  wages  to  the  people  in  government  service.  His 
qualifications  are  8  fold  (see  D  1.137) :  well-born  ("  gen- 
tleman," khattiya),  handsome,  wealthy,  powerful  (with 
his  army),  a  believer,  learned,  clever,  intelligent.  — 
His  wealth  is  proverbial  and  is  characterized  in  a  stock 
phrase,  which  is  also  used  of  other  ranks,'  like  setthi's 
&  brahmana's,  viz.  "  addha  mahaddhana  mahabhoga 
pahuta-jatarupa-rajata  pahuta-vitt'  upakarana  pahuta- 
dhana-dhaflna  paripuiina-kosa-kotthagara,"  e.  g.  D 
1. 1 34.  For  a  late  description  of  a  king's  quality 
and  distinction  see  Miln  226,  227. — His  disciplinary 
authority  is  emphasized ;.  he  spares  no  tortures  in 
punishing  adversaries  or  malefactors,  esp.  the  cora 
(see  below  4  c).  A  summary  example  of  these 
punishments  inflicted  on  criminals  is  the  long  passage 
illustrating  dukkha  (bodily  pain)  at  Nd*  304™ ; 
cp.  M  lit. 163  (here  also  on  a  cora).  —  3.  The  king 
(raja  or  khattiya)  in  the  popular  opinion,  as  reflected 
in  language,  heads  several  lists,  which  have  often  been 
taken  as  enumerating  '*  castes,"  but  which  are  simply 
inclusive  statements  of  var.  prominent  ranks  as  playing 
a  role  in  the  social  life  of  the  state,  and  which  were  formu- 
lated according  to  diff.  occasions.  Thus  some  show  a 
more  political,  some  a  more  religious  aspect.  E.  g. 
khattiya  amacca  brahmaiia  gahapati  D  1.136;  rdjd 
brahmai;ia  gahapatika  A  1.68,  where  another  formula 
has  khattiya  br.  g.  A  1.66;  J  1.217;  and  the  foil,  with 
an  intermediate  "  rank  "  (something  like  "  royalty," 
"the  royal  household")  between  the  king  and  the 
brahmins :  raja  rdjaputid  brahmana  gahapatika  ne- 
gama-janapada  K  II-74  sq.  ;  rajano  rdja-mahdmattd 
khattiya  br.,  gah.,  titthiya  D  in. 44  (trsl"  Dialogues  too 
weak  "rajas  &  their  officials");  raja  rdjabhogga  br., 
gah.  Vin  111.221.  —  4.  Var.  aspects  illustrating  the 
position  of  the  king  in  relation  to  other  prominent 
groups  of  the  court  or  populace  :  (a)  raja  &  khattiya. 
All  kings  were  khattiyas.  The  kh.  is  a  noble  Kar't^oxliv 
(cp.  Gr.  I'lyiftuiv)  as  seen  fr.  def"  jati-khattiya  at  SnA 
453  and  var.  contexts.  Already  in  the  Rig  Veda  the 
ksatriya  is  a  person  belonging  to  a  royal  family  (RV 
X.109.  3),  and  rajcuiya  is  an  Ep.  of  ksatriya  (see  Zimmer, 
Altindisches  Leben  213).  — raja  khattiyo  muddha- 
vassito  "a  crowned  king"  D  1.69;  111.61  sq.  ;  Vin 
IV.160  ;  A  1.106  sq.  ;  11.207  (contrasted  with  brahmana 
mahasala) ;  in. 2 99  (if  lazy,  he  is  not  liked  by  the  people) ; 
M  III. 1 72  sq.  (how  he  becomes  a  cakkavatti  through  the 
appearance  of  the  cakka-ratana). —Without  mud- 
dhivasitta :  rajano  khattiya  Dh  294  =  Nett  165.  Cp. 
khattiya  bhoja-rajano  the  khattiyas,  the  (noble  or 
lesser  ?)  kings  (as  followers  of  the  cakkavatti)  Sn  553 
(see  bhoja).  At  J  vi.515.  rajano  corresponds  directly 
to  khattiya  on  p.  517  (satthisahassa°) ;  cp.  expression 
khattiya-kula  J  1.2 17  as  equivalent  to  raja-kula. 
(b)  raja  &  mahamatta.  The  latter  occupies  the 
position  of  "  Premier,"  but  is  a  rank  equal  to  the  king, 
hence  often  called  raja  himself:  Vin  111.47  where  styled 
"  akkhadassa  mahamatta."  Otherwise  he  is  always 
termed  raja-mahamatta  "  royal  minister,"  or  "  H.R.H. 
the  Premier,"  e.  g.  Vin  1.172  ;  A  1.279  ;  Vin  1.228  (also 
as  Magadha-mahamatta),  and  called  himself  a  khattiya 
D  111.44.  • — •  (c)  raja  &  cora.  A  prominent  figure  in  the 
afiairs  of  State  is  the  "  robber-chief "  (maha-cora). 
The  contrast -pair  rajano  (so  always  pi.)  &  cora  is  very 
frequent,  and  in  this  connection  we  have  to  think  of 
rajano  as  either  smaller  kings,  knights  or  royals  (royal- 
ists), i.  e.  officers  of  the  kings  or  "  the  king's  Guards." 
Thus  at  J  111.34  tl^6  C.  expl"  as  raja-purisa.  It  is  here 
used  as  a  term  of  warning  or  frightening  "  get  up, 
robber,  so  that  the  kings  (alias  '  policeman  ')  won't 
catch  you  "  :  utthehi  cora  ma  tai)  gahesur)  rajano. 
Other  passages  are  e.  g.  :  D  1.7  (raja-katha  &  cora- 
katha)  =  Vin   1.188;   M  in. 163   (rajano  corag   agucarii) 


gahetva);  A  1.68,  154;  It  89  (raj'  abhinita-|-cor°) ;  & 
in  sequence  rajano  cora  dhutta  (as  being  dangerous 
to  the  bhikkhus)  at  Vin  1.150.  161.  —  5.  On  the 
question  of  kingship  in  Ancient  India  see  Zimmer, 
Altind.  Leben  pp.  162-175,  212  sq. ;  Macdonell  &  Keith, 
Vedtc  Index  11.210  sq. ;  Pick,  Soc.  G/.  63-90  ;  Foy,  Die 
Konigl.  Gewalt  nach  den  altind.  Rechtsbiichern  (Leipzig 
1895);  Rh.  Davids,  B«rf(//}is/  India  pp.  i-i6;  Hopkins, 
E.  W.,  The  social  and  military  position  of  the  ruling 
caste  in  A.  I.  in  J.A.O.S.  13,  179  sq.  ;  Banerjea. 
Public  Administration  in  A.  I.  1916,  pp.  63-93.  —  6. 
Kings  mentioned  by  name  [a  very  limited  &  casual 
list  only,  for  detailed  refs.  see  Dict'y  of  Names]  : 
Ajatasattu  ;  Udena  (DhA  1.185);  Okkaka ;  DIghl  (of 
Kosala ;  Vin  1.342);  Parantapa  (of  Kosambi-;  DhA 
1.164;)  Pasenadi  (of  Kosala;  D  1.87,103;  Vin  iv.112, 
157) ;  Bimbisara  (of  Magadha  ;  Vin  iv.i  16  sq.  ;  Sn  419) ; 
Bhaddiya  ;  etc.  —  7.  (fig.)  king  as  sign  of  distinction 
("  princeps "),  as  the  lion  is  called  raja  miganag 
Sn  72  ;  Vism  650 ;  the  Himavant  is  pabbata-raja 
A  1.152;  III. 44 ;  and  Gotama's  horse  Kanlhaka  is 
called  assa-raja  J  1.62  =  VvA  314.  —  Note.  The  comp" 
form  of  raja  is  raja°. 

-dgara  a  king's  (garden-  or  pleasure-)  house  D  1.7 
(°ka) ;  DA  1.42.  -anga  royal  mark,  characteristic  or 
qualification;  king's  property  Vin  1.219  (rajangar) 
hatthi :  the  elephants  belong  to  the  king),  cp.  A  1.244  : 
assajaniyo  ranno  angan  t'  eva  sankhai)  gacchati  is  called 
king's  property,  -angana  royal  court  PvA  74.  -anatti 
king's  permission  Tikp  26  (in  simile),  -ana  (i)  the 
king's  command  J  in.  180  ;  cp.  PvA  217  "ranno  ana"  ; 
(2)  the  king's  fine  or  punishment,  i.  e.  a  punishment 
inflicted  by  the  king  (cp.  Fick,  Soc.  Gl.  74),  synonymous 
with  raja-danda  :  J  1.369,  433  (rajanar)  karoti  to  inflict) ; 
11.197  ;  III. 18.  232,  351  ;  iv.42  ;  VI. 18  ;  PvA  242.  -4nu- 
bhava  king's  power,  majesty,  authority,  pomp  J  iv.247  ; 
PvA  279.  -antepura  the  royal  harem  A  v. 81,  82  (the 
10  risks  which  a  bhikkhu  is  running  when  visiting  it 
for  alms),  -abhinita  brought  by  a  king  It  89  (-t-cor- 
abhinlta).  -abhiraja  "  king  of  kings  "  Sn  553  ;  DhsA 
20.  -amacca  royal  minister  J  v. 444  ("majjhe).  -aya- 
tana  N.  of  a  tree  :  "  Kingstead  tree,"  the  royal  tree 
(as  residence  of  a  king  of  fairies),  Buchanania  latifolia 
Vin  1.3  sq.  (where  MVastu  111.303  reads  kslrika,  i.  e. 
milk-giving  tree) ;  J  1.80  ;  iv.361  sq.  ;  DhsA  35  ;  VbhA 
433  (°cetiya).  -iddhi  royal  power  PvA  279.  -isi  a 
royal  seer,  a  king  who  gives  up  his  throne  &  becomes 
an  ascetic  (cp.  Sk.  rajarsi.  freq.  in  Mhbharata  &  Rama 
yana)  Th  i,  1127  fread  raja-d-isi) ;  It  2  i  (rajisayo,  with 
var  vv.  11.  not  quite  the  same  meaning) ;  J  vi.i  16,  124, 
127,  518  ;  DhA  IV. 29.  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  proposes  reading 
rajisi.  -upatthana  attendance  on  the  king,  royal 
audience  Vin  1.269;  J  1.269,  349;  in. 119.  299;  iv  63. 
-upabhoga  fit  for  use  by  the  king  Miln  252.  -uyyana 
royal  garden  or  pleasure  ground  J  in.  1 43  ;  Mhvs  15,  2. 
-orodha  a  lady  from  the  king's  harem,  a  royal  concubine 
Vin  IV. 261.  -kakudha-bhanda  an  ensign  of  royalty 
(5  :  khagga,  chatta,  unhisa,  paduka,  valavijani)  DhA 
1.356.  See  under  kakudha.  -katha  talk  about  kings 
(as  tiracchanakatha  in  disgrace),  comb*  with  corakatha 
(see  above  4  c)  D  1.7  ;  111.36,  54  ;  Vin  1.188.  -kammika 
a  royal  official,  one  employed  by  the  king  J  1.439; 
IV.  169.  -kutumba  the  king's  property  J  1.439.  -kunda 
a  "  crook  of  a  king  "  DhA  111.56.  -kumara  a  (royal) 
prince  (cp.  khattiya-kumara)  Vin  1.269;  J  in.  122; 
VbhA  196  (in  comparison),  -kumbhakara  a  "  royal 
potter,"  i.  e.  a  potter  being  "purveyor  to  the  king" 
J  V.290.  -kula  the  king's  court  or  palace  A  1.128; 
11.205;  Vin  iv.265  ;  J  11.301;  DhA  11.44.  46;  111.124. 
-khadaya  phuttha  at  Sn  831  is  according  to  Kern, 
Toev.  to  be  read  as  rajakkhataya  ph.  (fr.  rajakkha). 
The  old  Niddesa.  however,  reads  "khadSya  &  expl""  the 
word  (Nd^  171)  by  rajabhojaniyena,  i.  e.  the  king's 
food,  which  is  alright  without  being  changed,  -guna 
"  virtue  of  a  king"  M  1.446  (trick  of  a  circus  horse; 


Raja 


28 


Rasi 


+  raja-vagsa).  -dan^a  punishment  ordered  by  the.king 
PvA  216,  217.  -daya  a  royal  gift  D  1.127;  DA  1.246. 
-duta  king's  messenger  Sn  411,  412;  in  meaning  of 
"  message,"  i.  e.  calling  somebody  to  court,  summons 
at  J  II.  10 1,  305.  -dhamma  "  king's  rule,"  i.  e.  rule  of 
governing,  norm  of  kingship  ;  usually  given  as  a  set  of 
10,  which  are  enum*  at  J  111.274  as  "  dana,  slla,  paric- 
caga,  ajjava,  maddava,  tapo,  akkodha,  avihir|sa,  khanti, 
avirodhana,"  i.  e.  alms-giving,  morality,  liberality, 
straightness,  gentleness,  self-restriction,  non-anger, 
non-hurtfulness,  forbearance,  non-opposition.  These 
are  referred  to  as  dasa  rdjadhammd  at  J  1.260,  399  ; 
11.400;  111.320;  V.119,  378;  usually  in  phrase  "dasa 
rija-dhamme  akopetva  dhammena  rajjan  karesi "  : 
he  ruled  in  righteousness,  not  shaking  the  tenfold  code 
of  the  king.  Another  set  of  3  are  mentioned  at  J 
V.I  12,  viz.  "  vitathar)  kodhai)  hasai)  nivaraye  "  (expl* 
as  giving  up  musava.da,  kodha  &  adhamma-hasa). 
-dhani  a  royal  city  (usually  comb*  with  gama  &  nigama) 
A  1.159;  U-33  I  in. 108;  Vin  in. 89;  J  v.453  ;  Pv  13". 
-dhltS  king!s  daughter,  princess  J  1.207;  PvA  74. 
•nivesana  the  king's  abode,  i.  e.  palace  DhA  iv.92. 
-parisa  royal  assembly  Vin  11.296.  -pila  (?)  DhA  1.323. 
-putta  lit.  "  king's  son,"  prince,  one  belonging  to  the 
royal  clan  (cp.  similarly  kulaputta),  one  of  royal 
descent,  Rajput  Sn  455  ;  Miln  331  ;  VbhA  312,  319  (in 
simile);  PvA  20.  f.  "putti  princess  J  iv.108;  v.94. 
-purisa  "  king's  man,"  only  in  pi.  °purisa  the  men  of  the 
lung,  those  in  the  king's  service  (as  soldiers,  body-guard, 
policeman  etc.)  J  111.34 ;  \'bhA  80  (°anubandha-cora), 
109.  -porisa  (m.  &  nt.)  servant  of  the  king,  collec- 
tively :  king's  service,  those  who  devote  themselves  to 
Govt,  service  D  1.135  ;  M  i.85  =  Nd*  199  ;  A  iv.281,  286. 
See  also  porisa.  -bali  royal  tax  J  1.354.  -bha{a  king's 
hireling  or  soldier  Vin  1.74,  88;  SnA  38  (in  simile) 
-bhaya  fear  of  the  kingj's  punishment)  Vism  121. 
-bhiga  the  king's  share  J  11.378.  -bhogga  i.  royal, 
in  the  service  of  the  king,  in  foil,  phrases  :  rija-bhoggar) 
rafi&a  dinnag  raja-dayai)  brahma-deyyag  T>  1.87,  of 
a  flourishing  place.  Dial.  1.108  trsl»  "with  power' 
over  it  as  if  he  were  king,"  and  expl»  with  :  "  where 
the  king  has  proprietary  rights."  The  C.  rather  un- 
meaningly expl"  as  "  raja-laddha  "  (DA  1.245).  The 
BSk.  has  a  curious  version  of  this  phrase  :  "  rajfia-a^m- 
dattena  brahmadeyyag  dattai)  "  (given  by  the  king 
in  the  place  of  agni  ?)  Divy  620.  —  Further  at  Vin 
111.221  in  sequence  raja  r-bhogga,  brahmaria,  gahapa- 
tika,  where  the  C.  expl"  (on  p.  222)  as  "  yo  koci  raflflo 
bhatta-vetan'  aharo."  (We  should  be  inclined  to  take 
this  as  No.  2.)  —  Thirdly,  in  stock  phrase  "  raj&raha 
Tijabhogga  rafino  angan  t'  eva  sankhar)  gacchati,"  i.  e. 
worthy  of  a  king,  imperial,  he  justifies  the  royal  quali- 
fication, said  of  a  thoroughbred  horse  at  A  1.244  = 
II. 113  ;  of  a  soldier  (yodh'  ajiva)  at  A  1.284  ;  of  an  ele- 
phant at  J  11.370  (where  it  is  expli*  as  "  raja  paribhoga  "). 
Also  as  "  royal  possessions  "  in  general  at  DhA  1.3 12. 
13.  —  Fick,  Soc.  Gl.  99  does  not  help  much,  he  takes 
it  as  "  king's  official."  — 2.  royal,  of  royal  power,  one 
entitled  to  the  throne.  Either  as  bhogga,  bhogiya 
(SnA  453)  or  (khattiya)  bhoja-rajano  (Sn  553).  Thus 
at  Vin  III. 22 1,  where  it  takes  the  place  of  the  usual 
khattiya  "  royal  noble  "  &  Sn  553,  where  it  is  comb"" 
(as  bhoja  rajano)  with  khattiya.  See  also  bhoja  &  cp. 
(antara)  bhogika  and  rajafifia.  -mahamatta  king's 
prime  minister  (see  above  4  b,  to  which  add :) 
D  111.44  ;  A  1. 154,  252,  279;  III. 128;  VbhA  312  (simile 
of  2),  340.  -malakira  royal  gardener  J  v.292. 
-mudda  the  royal  seal  DhA  1.2 1.  •muddika  id.  SnA 
577.  -ratha  the  king's  chariot  DhA  ni.122.  -rukkha 
"  royal  tree,"  Cathartocarpus  fistula  VvA  43.  -vara 
the  best  king,  famous  king  Vv  32'  (  =  Sakka  VvA  134). 
-vallabha  the  king's  favourite,  or  overseer  Mhvs 
37.  10  ;  VbhA  501  (in  shnUe).  -vibhuti  royal  splendour 
or  dignity  PvA  2 16,  279.  -hai)sa  "  royal  swan,"  a  sort 
of  swan  or  flamingo  Vism  650  (suvani>a°,  in  simile). 


Biji*  [cp.  Sk.  raji]  a  streak,  line,  row  Sn  p.  107  (nfla-vana" 
=  dark  line  of  trees,  expl*  as  nila-vana  rukkha-panti 
SnA  451);  Vv  64*  (nabhyo  sata-raji-cittita  "coloured 
with  100  streaks";  VvA  =  Iekha);  64*  (vejuriya"); 
pabbata°  a  mountain  range  J  11. 417;  digha°  (adj.)  of 
long  lineage  PvA  68  ;  dvangula°  a  band  2  inches  broad 
Davs  V.49;  roma''  a  row  of  hair  (on  the  body)  J  v. 430. 

R&ji'  [fr.  raga  ?]  dissension,  quarrel,  in  phrase  sangha° 
(H-sanghabheda)  Vin  11.203  (quoted  at  VbhA  428); 
IV.217. 

Bijiki  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  rajika]  a  certain  (gold)  weight  (a  seed- 
corn  of  Sinapis  ramosa)  Th  i,  97  =  862  (kagsa  sata° 
100  mustard  seeds  in  weight,  i.  e.  very  costly) ;  J  vi.510 
(kagse  sova^Qe  satarajike). 

Rijita:  see  vi°. 

Bajin  (adj.)  [fr.  raji]  having  streaks  or  stripes,  in  ud- 
dhagga°  having  prominent  stripes  (of  a  lion)  J  iv.345. 

Bajimant  (adj.)  [fr.  raji']  having  streaks  or  stripes;  f. 
rajimati  shining,  radiant  Vv  32'  (v.  1.  rajaputti),  expl* 
at  VvA  134  as  follows  :  "  rajati  vijjotati  ti  raji :  raji  ti 
mata  paiifiata  rajiiriati  "  (thus  connecting  °mant  with 
man). 

S&jala  [cp.  Sk.  rajila]  a  certain  reptile  Abhp  651. 

Biti  [Sk.  rS  to  give,  bestow ;  given  at  Dhtp  369  &  Dhtm 
597  in  meaning  "  adane,"  with  doublet  1&]  to  take  up : 
no  refs. 

Radheti'  [Caus.  of  r&dh  to  succeed,  radhyate.  The  root 
is  given  at  Dhtp  420  &  Dhtm  656  in  meaning  "  saT)sid- 
dhiyag,"  i.  e.  of  success.  See  etym.  at  Walde,  ImI. 
Wtb.  s.  v.  reor.]  to  please :  see  cpds.  abhi"  apa°,  a°, 
vi°. 

Ridheti'  [ridh  P  Given  at  Dhtp  42  4  &  Dhtm  656  in  mean- 
ing "  higsayai),"  i.  e.  of  hurting]  no  refs. 

Bama  [fr.  ram;  cp.  Vedic  rama]  pleasure,  sport,  amuse- 
ment ;  °kara  having  pleasure,  sporting,  making  love 
J  V.448. 

Bamaoeyyaka  (adj.  nt.)  [orig.  grd.  of  rameti,  ram,  cp. 
Sk.  ramaijlya.  On  e  for  i  see  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  10]  plea- 
sant, agreeable,  lovely  A  1.35,  37;  Dh  98  (=ramaijiya 
DhA  III. 195);  nt.  delightfulness,  lovely  scenery  M 
1.365  (four  seen  in  a  dream  :  arama°,  vana°,  bhumi" 
pokkhara^i") . 

B&va  [fr.  ravati,  cp.  rava]  crying,  howling ;  shout,  noise 
J  1. 162  (baddha°  the  cry  of  one  who  is  caught) ;  iv.415 
(id.);  VI. 475  (of  the  cries  of  animals,  known  to  an 
expert);  Miln  254  (bherava-ravag  abhiravati) ;  Mhvs 
10,  69  (maha-ravai)  aravi). 

BSsi  [Vedic  ratii]  i .  heap,  quantity,  mass  It  1 7 ;  usually 
-°,  e.  g.  angara°  heap  of  cinders  J  1.107;  kanikara- 
puppha°  of  k.  flowers  VvA  65 ;  kahapana°  of  money 
PvA  162  ;  tila"  of  seeds  VvA  54 ;  dhaflfla"  of  corn 
A  IV.163,  J  70  ;  etc.  — rasig  karoti  to  make  a  heap,  to 
pile  up  Mhvs  29,  28  ;  VvA  157.  —  2.  (store  of)  wealth, 
riches ;  in  °agga-dana  gift  of  the  best  treasures  (of  one's 
property),  one  of  the  5  "  donations  of  the  best,"  viz. 
khett",  ras°,  kofth",  kumbhi",  bhojan" :  SnA  270. 
See  also  °vaddhaka.  —  3.  a  sign  of  the  Zodiac  (the  12, 
as  given  at  Abhp  61  are;  mesa,  usabha,  methuna, 
kakkata.  siha,  kailfia,  tula,  vicchika,  dhanu,  makara, 
kumbha,  mina  ;  or  the  ram,  bull,  twins,  crab,  lion,  virgin, 
balance,  scorpion,  bow,  Capricorn,  waterpot,  fish)  PvA 
198.  —  4.  (fig.)  at  t.  t.  in  logic:  group,  aggregate, 
category,  congery ;  freq.  in  /)6At({^mma -literature, 
where  3  "  accumulations  "  are  spoken  of,  viz.  mic- 
chatta-niyato  rasi,  sammatta-niyato  r.,  aniyato  r.  or 
"  wrong  doing  entailing  immutable  evil  results,  that  of 


Rasika 


29 


Rukkba 


well-doing  entailing  immutable  good  results,  and  that 
of  everything  not  so  determined"  {Dialogues  111.210); 
D  111.217;  Kvu  611  ;  Nett  96;  cp.  Kvu  Irsl.  356  Dhs 
trsl.  26,  253.  In  the  5  factors  of  individuality  (body 
and  mind)  khandhj  are  explained  as  meaning  rasi, 
e.  g.  Asl.  141;  B.  Psy.  42.  In  other  connections: 
S  V.146  (kusala",  akusala°),  186;  A  111.65  (akusala") ; 
Tikp  45.  —  Note.  In  BSk.  we  find  only  2  of  the  3 
categories  mentioned  at  MVastu  1.175,  viz.  mithyStva- 
niyato  &  aniyato  ra^ih. 

-▼addhaka  one  who  increases  wealth,  i.  e.  a  treasurer 
D  1. 61  (trsl"  :  "  increases  the  king's  wealth  "  ;  DA  1.170 
simply  defines  "  dhaflfla-rSsiS  ca  dhana-risiil  ca  va(j- 
(Jheti  ti  r.  v.") ;  J  1.2  ;  Mhbv  78. 

BUka  (nt.)  [fr.  risi]  revenue,  fisc  D  1.135. 

Bahateyyaka  (adj.)  [rahas+seyya+ka  or  raha  (for 
raha°)  +  seyyaka]  "  having  one's  bed  in  loneliness," 
living  in  seclusion  or  secrecy,  in  manussa°  "  fit  to  lie 
undisturbed  by  men  "  Vin  1.39  (  +  patisallana-s2Lruppa) ; 
Mil. 118. 

B&ha  [Vedic  rJlhu]  N.  of  an  Asura :  see  under  Proper 
Names.  — r&humukha  "mouth  of  R&hu,"  designation 
of  a  certain  punishment  for  criminals  (M  1.87;  111.164  ; 
Nd'  154  (in  list  of  tortures)=Nd'  6o4=rMiln  197. 

Bip&ti  see  under  raya. 

Bifioati  [ric,  in  Vedic  &  Sk.  rinakti ;  cp.  Av.  irinaxti  to 
leave ;  Gr.  XciVw  id.,  \<uw6(  left ;  Lat.  linquo  id.  ; 
Goth.  leih'an  =  Ohg.  lihan  to  lend;  Ags  lSn  =  loan, 
cp.  E.  leave  etc.  —  The  def*  of  the  root  at  Dhtp  is  given  I 
in  two  forms,  viz.  rie  as  "  virecane  "  (No.  396  ;  cp. 
Dhtm  517  "  kharape,"  i.  e.  flowing;  610  "recane"), 
and  rific  as  "  rificane  "  (No.  44)]  to  leave,  abandon, 
leave  behind,  give  up,  neglect  Vin  1.190  (also  fut. 
rijicissati) ;  M  1.155  (rificissati),  403  ;  S  iv.206  ;  A  ni.86 
sq.,  108  sq.,  343  sq.,  366  sq.,  437;  Th  i,  1052  ;  Sn  156; 
Miln  419  ;  J  v. 403.  —  ppr.  med.  with  neg.  :  arificamana 
Sn  69  ;  ger.  rificitva  (for  Sk.  riktva)  Th  2,  93.  —  pp.  ritta. 
—  Pass,  riccati  [Sk.  ricyate]  to  be  left :  see  ati°. 

Biftoana  (nt.)  [fr.  rific]  leaving  behind,  giving  up  Dhtp  44. 

Bitta  [pp.  of  riiicati ;  cp.  atireka]  devoid,  empty,  free, 
rid  (of)  M  1.207  (-i-tuccha),  414;  Vin  1.157=11.216; 
Sn  823  (emancipated:  ritto  muni  =  vivitta  etc.  Nd' 
158),  844  (opp.  to  aritta) ;  Th  2,  265  (see  rindi) ;  J  1.29 
(v.  222);  111.492  ;  Miln  383. 

-assada  finding  one's  taste  in  empty  things  A  1.280 
(  +  bahir-assada.  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  reads  rittasa  and 
trsl*  "  impure  (of  food),"  not  according  to  the  sense  at 
all),  -asana  an  empty  seat  Sn  963  (expl*  at  Nd'  481  as 
"  opportunity  for  sitting  down  which  is  free  from  un- 
befitting sights"),  -pesuna  free  fr.  slander  Sn  941 
(expl'*  at  Nd'  422  :  "  yassa  pesuSfiai]  pahinai)  "  etc.), 
-mu^thi  an  empty  fist  ("sadisa  :  comparing  someone  as 
regards  ignorance)  SnA  306  =  DhA  iv.38.  -hattha 
(adj.)  empty-handed  J  v. 46  ;  Sdhp  309. 

Bittaka  (adj.)  [ritta -nka]  empty,  void,  without  reality 
Th  1 ,  4 1  ;  2 ,  394  ( =  tucchaka  anto-s§ra-rahita  ThA  258); 
Pv  in.6*  (of  a  river  =  tuccha  PvA  202);  PvA  139 
(  =  suiUia,  virahita).  Usually  in  comb»  with  tucchaka 
as  a  standing  phrase  denoting  absolute  emptiness  & 
worthlessness,  e.  g.  at  D  1.240;  M  1.329;  S  111.141. 

Bindl  at  Xh  2,  265  is  doubtful.  The  T.  reading  is  "  te 
rindi  va  lambante  'nodaka,"  said  of  breasts  hanging 
down  in  old  age.  The  C,  compares  them  with  leather 
water  bottles  without  water  (udaka-bhasta  viya).  We 
have  to  read  either  with  Morris,  J.P.T.S.  1884.  94 
"  ritti  ya  "  (  =  ritta  iva),  "  as  it  were,  empty,"  or  (pre- 
ferably) with  ThA  212  "  therl  ti  va  "  ("like  an  old 
woman  ").     The   trsl"    {Sisttrs,   p.    124)   takes   the   C. 


expl"  of  udaha-bhasta  as  equivalent  to  T.  reading  rindi. 
in  saying  "  shrunken  as  skins  without  water  "  ;  but 
rindi  is  altogether  doubtful  &  it  is  better  to  read  theri 
which  is  according  to  the  context.  We  find  the  same 
meaning  of  theri  ("  old  woman  ")  at  Pv  11. 1 1*. 

Bissati  [Vedic  rif,  ri?yati]  to  be  hurt,  to  suffer  harm 
M  1.85  (dai)sa-makasa-vat'  atapa-sirigsapa-samphassehi 
rissamano ;  where  Nd*  199  in  same  passage  reads  sam- 
phassamana). 

Boka  in  cpd.  a44ha°  at  Vin  11.134,  referring  to  the  shape 
of  a  beard,  is  doubtful.  The  v.  1.  is  "  duka."  Could 
it  correspond  to  Vedic  ruktna  (a  certain  ornament  worn 
on  the  chest)  ? 

Bukkha  [Vedic  vrk§a.  See  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  13,  with  note. 
Pischel,  Prk.  Gr.  §  320  puts  rukkha  to  Sk.  ruksa  (shining 
which  as  Pischel,  following  Roth,  says  has  also  the 
meaning  "  tree  "  in  Rgveda).  The  Prk.  form  is  rukkha. 
Cp.  Wackemagel,  AUind.  Gr.  i,  §  184  b.  We  find  a  by- 
form  rakkha  at  J  111.144.  Cp.  Brethren,  pp.  185,  416, 
where  the  B»  MS.  has  rukkha  katha  the  meaning  being 
rakkha°]  a  tree.  In  the  rukkha-mulik'  anga  (see  below) 
Bdhgh  at  Vism  74  gives  a  list  of  trees  which  are  not  to 
be  selected  for  the  practice  of  "  living  at  the  root  of  a 
tree."  These  are  simantarika-rukkha,  cetiya°,  niyyasa", 
phala",  vagguli",  susira°,  vihara-majjhe  thita°,  or  a  tree 
standing  right  on  the  border,  a  sacred  tree,  a  resinous 
tree,  a  fruit  t.,  a  tree  on  which  bats  live,  a  hollow  tree, 
a  tree  growing  in  the  middle  of  a  monastery.  The  only 
one  which  is  to  be  chosen  is  a  tree  "  vihara-paccante 
thita,"  or  one  standing  on  the  outskirt  of  the  Vihara. 
He  then  gives  further  advice  as  to  the  condition  of  the 
tree.  —  Various  kinds  of  trees  are  given  in  the  def" 
of  r.  at  Vism  183,  viz.  assattha,  nigrodha,  kacchaka, 
kapitthaka ;  ucca,  nica,  khuddaka,  mahanto ;  kaja, 
seta.  —  A  very  complete  list  of  trees  mentioned  in  the 
Sagyutta  NikSya  is  to  be  found  in  the  Index  to  that 
Nikaya  (vol.  vi.  p.  84,  85).  On  rukkha  in  similes  see 
J.P.T.S.  1907,  pp.  128-130.  —  See  also  the  foil.  refs.  : 
A  1.137;  II. 109,  207;  III. 19,  200,  360;  IV. 99,  336; 
v. 4  sq.,  314  sq.  ;  Sn  603,  712  ;  J  1.35  (naga°) ;  Vism  688 
(in  simile :  maharukkhe  yava  kapp'  avasana  bija- 
paramparaya  rukkha -pa  veijig  santayamane  thite) '. 
VbhA  165  =  Vism  555  (rukkha  phalita);  VbhA  196  (in 
comp" :  jatassa  avassai)  jara-mara^ar),  uppannassa 
rukkhassa  patanai)  viya),  334  sq.  (as  garu-bhaij^a) ; 
SnA  5  ("  pathavi-ras'  adim  iva  rukkhe":  with  same 
simile  as  at  Vism  688,  with  reading  kappdvasdnay  and 
sanidnente) ;  DhA  in. 207  (amba°) ;  VvA  43  (raja°),  198 
(amba°) ;  DhA  iv.120  (dipa°) ;  PvA  43. 

-antara  the  inside  of  a  tree  PvA  63.  -ko^^aka  (-sa- 
kuna)  the  wood-pecker  J  in. 327  (  =  java  sakupa). 
-gahana  tree-thicket  or  entanglement  A  1.154  (so  ^o"" 
°gahana).  -devata  a  tree  spirit,  dryad,  a  yakkha 
inhabiting  a  tree  (rukkhe  adhivattha  d.  Vin  iv.34 ; 
J  11.385  ;  kakudhe  adhivattha  d.  Vin  1.28)  J  1.168,  322  ; 
H.405,  438  sq.  (erap<Ja°),  445  ;  in. 23  ;  iv.308  (vana- 
jetthaka-rukkbe  nibbatta-devata) ;  DhA  11.16;  PvA 
5  (in  a  Nigrodha  tree),  43  (in  the  Vindhya  forest).  — 
They  live  in  a  Nigrodha  tree  at  the  entrance  of  the 
village  (J  1.169),  where  they  receive  offerings  at  the 
foot  of  the  tree  (cp.  iv.474),  and  occasionally  one 
threatens  them  with  discontinuance  of  the  offerings  if 
they  do  not  fulfil  one's  request.  The  trees  are  their 
vimanas  (J  1.328,  442  ;  iv.154),  occasionally  they  live 
in  hollow  trees  (J  1.405  ;  in. 343)  or  in  tree  tops  (J  1.423). 
They  have  to  rely  on  the  food  given  to  them  (ibid.); 
for  which  they  help  the  people  (J  111.24  ;  v. 51 1).  They 
assume  various  "forms  when  they  appear  to  the  people 
(J  1.423;  11.357.  439;  III. 23);  they  also  have  children 
(Vin  IV. 34  ;  J  1.442).  -paveni  lineage  of  the  tree  Vism 
688.  -p&nika  a  wooden  spoon  Vism  124  (opp.  to 
pasaQa°).     -mula  the  foot  of  a  tree  (taken  as  a  dwelling 


Ruca 


30 


Runna 


by  the  ascetics  for  meditation  :  D  i.y\,  where  several 
such  lonely  places  are  recommended,  as  aranna,  r-m., 
pabbata,  kandara,  etc.  —  DA  1.209  specifies  as  "  yai) 
kifici  sanda-cchayar)  vivittai)  rukkha-mulai)  ") ;  A  11.38  ; 
IV.I39,  392;  S  1. 199  (°gahana) ;  It  102;  Sn  708,  958; 
Nd'  466;  Pug  68;  PvA  100  (v.  1.  sukkha-nadi),  137 
(Gandamba°,  with  ref.  to  the  Buddha).  -"gala  one 
who  undertakes  living  at  the  foot  of  a  tree  (as  an 
ascetic)  A  in. 353  ;  v. 109  sq.,  207,  323  sq.  ;  Pug  68. 
-°sendsana  having  one's  bed  &  seat  at  the  foot  of  a 
tree  for  meditative  practices  as  a  recluse  Vin  1.58  (as 
one  of  the  4  nissayas :  pindiy'  alopa-bhojana.  pagsu- 
kula-civara,  r.-m.  s.,  puti-mutta  bhesajja),  96  (id); 
A  IV.231.  -mulika  (a)  one  who  lives  at  the  foot  of  a 
tree,  an  open  air  recluse  M  1.282;  111.41  ;  A  in. 219; 
J  IV. 8  (aranfiaka,  pannasalar)  akatva  r.,  abbhokasika) ; 
(b)  belonging  to  the  practice  of  a  recluse  living  under 
a  tree  "tree  rootman's  practice"  (Vism  trsl"  84);  as 
°anga  one  of  the  (13)  dhutanga-practices  ;  i.  e.  practices 
for  a  scrupulous  way  of  living  Vism  59,  74,  75  (men- 
tioned between  the  drannik'  anga  &  the  abbhokdsik' - 
anga).  -mulikatta  the  practice  of  living  (alone)  under 
a  tree  M  111.41  (mentioned  with  par)sukulikatta  & 
piridapatikatta) ;  A  111.109  (id.),  -sunakha  "  tree  dog," 
a  cert,  animal  J  vi.538  (C.  in  expl"  of  nala-sannibha 
"  reed-coloured  ").     -susira  a  hollow  tree  PvA  62. 

Rnca  (-rukkha)  &  Raca  (f.)  [fr.  rue]  N.  of  a  plant,  or  tree, 
alias  "  mukkhaka  "  (read  mokkhaka)  "  principal  " 
J  1. 441,  443  (gloss  mangala-rukkha). 

Bacaka  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  rucaka  a  golden  ornament]  (gold) 
sand  Vv  35' ;  VvA  160  (  =  suvaijija-valika). 

Raci  (f.)  [fr.  rue,  cp.  Vedic  rue  (f.)  light,  Classic  Sk.  ruci 
in  meaning  "  pleasure  "]  i.  splendour,  light,  brightness 
Sn  548  (su°  very  splendid;  SnA  453  =  sundara-sarira- 
ppabha).  —  2.  inclination  liking,  pleasure  PvA  59 
(°i)  uppadeti  to  find  pleasure,  to  be  satisfied).  — aruci 
aversion,  dislike  Th  2,  472.  — ruci  object  of  pleasure 
J  V.37I.  — ruciya  (abl.)  in  the  pleasure  (of),  by  the 
liking  (of)  (cp.  No.  3),  in  phrases  attano  ruciya  (attano 
citta-ruciya :  so  read  for  "ruciyag  !) ;  as  one  pleases,  by 
one's  own  free  will,  ad  lib.  J  1.106;  iv.281  ;  PvA  59; 
parassa  r.  pavattati  to  live  by  the  pleasure  (gratia)  of 
somebody  else,  i.  e.  to  be  dependent  on  others  DA 
1.2 12.  — yatha  rucig  according  to  liking  or  satisfaction, 
fully,  amply  Mhvs  4,  43  ;  5,  230  ;  PvA  88,  126,  242.  — 
3.  In  dogmatic  language  used  in  the  sense  of  "  will  "  or 
"  influence  "  in  comb"  ditthi,  khanti,  ruci  one's  views, 
indulgence  &  pleasure  (  =  will),  i.  e.  one's  intellectual, 
emotional  &  volitional  sphere,  e.  g.  Vin  1.70  ;  Sn  781 
(without  khanti,  but  see  def»  at  Nd^  65) ;  also  with 
saddha,  anussavo,  akaraparivitakke,  ditthinijjhana- 
khanti  M  11.170,  218;  234;  contrasted  with  dhamma 
D  111.40  ;  Vbh  245  (in  def"  of  "  idha  "  :  cp.  same  at 
Ps  1.176  and  Nd*  145).  325,  328.  aAfiatra  ruciya  under 
the  influence  of  someone  else's  will  S  11.115;  iv.138. 
See  also  bhava  2». 

Rncika  (-°)  (adj.)  [fr.  ruci  3]  belonging  to  the  pleasure  (of) ; 
only  In  phrase  aA{ia°  being  dependent  on  someone  else's 
will  or  under  another's  influence,  together  with  afina- 
dit^hika  and  afiAa-khantika  characterizing  the  various 
sides  of  personality  (see  ruci  3)  with  ref.  to  one's  intellect, 
feeling  &  will  D  i.i87=M  1.487.  Rhys  Davids  {Dial. 
1.254)  trsl> :  "holding  different  views,  other  things 
approving  themselves  to  you,  setting  difi.  aims  before 
yourself  "  ;  thus  differing  in  interpretation  of  aiiiia, 
taking  it  subjectively.  Neumann  (Majjhima  Vbs. 
11.250)  quite  wrongly:  "  ohne  Deutung,  ohne  Geduld, 
ohne  Hingabe  "  (without  explanation,  patience,  devo- 
tion). 

Baciia  (adj.)  [fr.  ruc,  cp.  Sk.  rucira]  brilliant,  beautiful, 
pleasant,    agreeable    Pv    i,io»    (  =  ramaniya    dassanlva 


PvA  51);  J  1.207;  V.299 ;  Vv  40''  (so  read  for  rurira) ; 
Mhvs  11,  11;  18,  68;  Davs  iv,29 ;  Miln  2,  398;  DhA 
'•383  (=sobhana);  VvA  12;  PvA  156  (  =  vaggu). 

Raccati  [*rucyati  Med.  of  ruc :  see  rocati.     Same  in  Prk. 

—  Originally  Cans,  formation  like  Epic  Sk.  rocyate  for 
rocayate]  to  find  delight  or  pleasure  in  (loc),  to  please, 
to  indulge  in,  set  one's  mind  on  Sn  565  (etan  ce  r.  bhoto 
buddha-sasanar)) ;  with  khamati  to  be  pleased  and  to 
approve  of,  M  11.132  ;  often  used  by  Bdhgh  in  C.  style  : 
yatha  r.  tatha  pathitabbai)  KhA  78;  "  yai)  r.  tag 
gahetabbar)  SnA  23,  43,  136,  378  "  "  to  take,  whichever 
one  pleases  "  (in  giving  the  choice  of  2  readings  or 
interpretations).  —  ger.  ruccitva  VvA  282  (r.  puresi 
"  to  find  thorough  delight  in,"  expl"  for  abhirocesi).  — 
pret.  i"  pi,  ruccadimhase  Pv  in*  (  =  ruccama  rucii) 
uppadema,  tar)  attano  ruciya  pivissama  ti  attho 
PvA  59).  —  Prohibitive  ma  rucci  (pi.  ma  rucittha)  as 
an  entreaty  not  to  pursue  an  aim  (=please  do  not  do 
that,  please  don't)  Vin  11. 198  (alarj  Devadatta  ma  te 
rucci  sangha-bhedo) ;  DhA  1.13  (ma  vo  avuso  evag 
ruccittha). 

Rnccana  (&  a°  f.)  (nt.)  [fr.  ruccati]  choice,  pleasure  DhA 
1.387  (tava  "tthane  according  to  your  own  liking) ; 
DA  I.I06  (°a). 

Rnccanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  ruccana,  cp.  Sk.  rucya]  pleasing, 
satisfying;  nt.  satisfaction  J  1.2 11  (°maccha  the  fish 
you  like);  11. 182  (tava  °tj  karosi  you  do  whatever  you 
like).  a°  unpleasant,  distasteful  DhA  1.251  (attano 
aruccanakar)  kinci  kammai)  adisva). 

Rnjaka[fr.  rnj  ?]  a  lute-player  J  vi.51,  52,  given  by  Kern, 
Toev.  s.  v.  as  conjecture  (vinar))  va  rujaka  for  virujaka. 
The  conjecture  is  based  on  C.  reading  "  rujaka  =  vlija- 
vadaka." 

Rujati  [ruj,  representing  an  Idg.  *leilg,  as  in  Gr.  XivyaXtoe, 
Xvypot  sad,  awful ;  Lat.  lugeo  to  mourn  ;  Lith.  luzti  to 
break  ;  German  lucke,  loch  etc.  —  A  specific  Pali  1-form 
is  lujjati.  A  der.  fr.  ruj  is  roga  illness.  —  The  Dhtp 
(469)  defines  rnj  by  "  bhanga  "  i.  e.  breaking]  to  break, 
crush ;  lit.  to  (cause)  pain,  to  afflict,  hurt  (trs.  &  intrs.) 
J  1.7  (padarujanti),  396  (padamerujanti  my  feet  ache) ; 
IV.208  (khandhena  rujantena  with  hurting  back);  vi  3 
(uru  rujanti) ;  Mhvs  10,15  (pada  me  r.) ;  Miln  26  (pada 
r.);  DhA  1. 10,  21  (akkhini  me  rujiijsu);  11.3.  —  fut. 
rucchiti  [cp.  Sk.  roksyate]  J  vi.8o  (v.  I.  B.B.  rujjati ;  C. 
takes  wrongly  as  "  rodissati,"  of  rodati).  —  pp.  lugga. 

—  Cp.  lujjati  &  comb"^. 

Rujana  (nt.)  [fr.  ruj.  cp.  ruja]  hurting,  feeling  pain  J 
11.437  (roga  =  rujana-sabhavattar)) ;  J  iv.147  (yava 
pifthi^a  rujana-ppamaijar)  until  his  back  ached). 

Rojanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  rujana]  aching,  hurting  DhA  iv.69 

(anguli). 

Ruja  (f.)  [fr.  ruj,  see  rujati;  cp.  Sk.  ruja]  disease,  pain 
Miln  172  (rujag  na  karoti);  Vism  69;  DhA  iv.163 
(accha°  a  bad  pain). 

Rujjhati  [Pass,  of  rundhati]  to  be  broken  up,  to  be 
destroyed  J  111.181  (pana  rujjhanti;  C.  expl'  by  niruj- 
jhati).     Cp.  upa°,  vi°. 

Ruttba  [pp.  of  ru?;  Sk.  ru§ta]  vexed,  cross,  enraged 
J  IV. 358  (opp.  to  tuttha  v.  1.  atuttba^  v.211  (gloss 
kuddha);  Davs  in. 37. 

Ru^hati  see  lu^hati  &  cp.  rudda. 

Rap  a  sound-particle,  denoting  a  heavy  fall,  something 
like  "  thud  "  J  1.418. 

RuWi^  &  Roppa  [pp.  of  rudati  for  Sk.  rudita,  after  analogy 
of  other  roots  in  -d,  as  tud>tunna,  pad>panna,  nud> 
nunna.     The    BSk.    forms    are    both    runda    (MVastu 


Ruta 


31 


Rumma 


II. 218,  224)  and  ninna  (MVastu  111.116);  Prk,  ruppa 
(Pischel  §  566).  See  rudati  &  cp.  aruijna]  i.  (pp.) 
crying,  in  comb"  runna-mukha  with  tearful  face  J  vi.525 
(C.  rudam°);  Miln  148. — 2.  (nt.)  weeping,  crying, 
lamentation  Th  i,  554;  A  1.261  ;  Sn  584  (  +  soka);  Pv 
1.4'  ;  Milo  357.  As  ronna  at  A  iv.197,  223 ;  Th  i,  555  ; 
J  III.  166. 

Rata  (nt.)  [pp.  of  ravati :  see  rava  &  ravati]  noise,  sound- 
(ing);  cry,  singing  Th  i,  1 103  ;  J  1.207  (T.  reading  ruda 
is  expl""  in  C.  as  ruta  with  °da  for  °ta  :  ta-karassa  da- 
karo  kato) ;  111.276  (sabba-ruta-janana-manta  :  spell  of 
knowing  all  animal-sounds ;  T.  reads  ruta  ;  cp.  sabba- 
rava-janana  J  in. 415);  vi.475  (rudaiiiiu  =  ruta-jna  C. ; 
same  meaning);  Miln  178  (sakuna-ruta-ravita) ;  VvA 
(karavika"). 

Ratta  in  du°  &  su°  at  DhsA  396  is  to  be  read  as  dur-  and 
su(r)-utta  (see  utta). 

Rada  stands  for  ruta  (cry)  at  2  Jataka  passages,  viz. 
J  1.207;  VI.475  (ruda-fifiu  knowing  the  cries  of  all 
animals,  expl*  as  "  ruta-jna,  sabba-ravai)  janati"  C). 

Radati  &  Rodati  [rad,  the  usual  Sk.  pres.  being  rodati,  but 
forms  fr.  base  rud°  are  Vedic  and  are  later  found  also 
in  Prk.  (cp.  Pischel  Prk.  Gr.  §  495) :  ruyai  besides  royai 
&rodasi.  —  The  Idg.  root  is  'rend,  being  an  enlargement 
of  *r«U,  as  in  ravati  (q.  v.).  Cp.  cognates  Lat.  rudo  to 
cry,  shout,  bray;  Lith.  raud^  wailing;  Ohg.  riozan  = 
Ags.  reotan.  —  The  Dhtp  expl"  rnd  by  "  rodane  "  (144), 
the  Dhtm  by  "  assu-vimocane  "  (206)]  to  cry,  lament, 
weep,  wail.  —  Forms  I.  rud°  (the  older  form):  pres. 
rudati  (not  yet  found);  ppr.  rudanto  D  1.115;  Sn  675, 
691  ;  rudamana  M  1.341  ;  A  11.95  :  P"g  62  ;  Mi'n  275 ; 
Sdhp  281  ;  and  rudag  Pv  i.8«  ;  also  in  cpd.  rudam-mukha 
with  weeping  face  J  vi.518  (assu-netta-l- ) ;  Pv  i.ii*; 
ger.  ruditvana  Mhvs  35,  24  ;  fut.  rucchati  J  v.366  and 
rucchiti  J  vi.550  (  =  rodissati  C;  see  also  nijati). — 
II.  rod°  (the  younger  form  &  the  one  peculiar  to  prose) : 
pres.  rodati  J  1.55  ;  111.169  (socati+  ) ;  Pv  1.8'  (socati+  ) ; 
1.12*;  PvA  17,  18;  Pot.  rode  Pv  1.8'  (  =  rodeyyag  PvA 
64);  ppr.  rodanto  J  1.65;  f.  rodanti  PvA  16;  med. 
rodamana  PvA  6  ;  DA  1.284.  —  aor.  rodi  J  1.167 ;  DhA 
11.17  (+hasi);  fut.  rodissati  J  vi.550  ;  ger.  roditva 
Mhvs  9,  7;  inf.  roditur)  J  1.55.  —  Caus.  11.  rodapeti  to 
make  someone  cry  DhA  11.86.  —  pp.  runna,  rudita  & 
rodita. 

Rudita  (nt.)  [pp.  of  rudati,  equivalent  to  runna]  crying, 
weeping  PvA  i8  (H-assu-mocana,  in  expl"  of  ruppa),  63 
(=paridevita). 

Radda  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  raudra  &  Vedic  rudra  (a  keTCe  demon 
or  storm-deity ;  "  the  red  one,"  with  Pischel  from  rud 
to  be  ruddy.  See  Macdonell,  Vedic  Mythology  74-77). 
The  usual  Pali  form  is  ludda.  At  Dhtp  473  &  Dhtm 
135  a  root  ruth  (or  luth)  is  given  in  meaning  "  upa- 
ghate  "  i.  e.  killing,  which  may  represent  this  rnd:  see 
luthati]  fierce,  awful,  terrible  J  iv.416  (so  luddako 
rudda-rupo ;  v.  1.  ludda") ;  v. 425,  431  (su-ruddho, 
spelling  for  su-ruddo,  very  fierce,  expl*  as  su-Iuddo  su- 
pharuso) ;  Mhvs  12,  45  (rudda-rakkhasi,  prob.  with  ref. 
to  the  demon  Rudra  ;  trsl"  "  fearsome  female  demon  "  ; 
vv.  11.  ruda°,  ruddha",  dudda"). 

Ruddha  [pp-  ol  rundhati]  1.  obstructed,  disturbed  Davs 
4,  46.  —  2.  at  J  v.425  &  431  in  cpd.  su-ruddha  it  stands 
for  nidda  (q.  v.).  —  Cp.  upa",  ni°,  pafi"  pativi°.  vi". 

Radhira  (nt.)  [late  Vedic  rudhira.  Etym.  connected  with 
Lat.  ruber  red  ;  Gr.  epuOpog  red  ;  Oicel.  rodra  blood, 
Goth.  rau|>s  =  Ger.  rot  =  E.  red]  blood  DhA  1.140; 
PvA  34  (for  lohita ;  v.  1.  ruhira).  See  the  more  freq. 
words  rohita  &  lohita ;  a  form  ruhira  (q.  v.)  occurs  e.  g. 
at  Pv  1.9*. 


Rundhati  [rnndh  or  rudh,  both  roots  in  Vedic  Sk.  —  Dhtp 
(375,  425)  expl=^  by  "  avarane  "  ;  id.  Dhtm  (608,  662).] 
I.  to  restrain,  hinder,  prevent,  obstruct,  keep  out 
Cp.  III. 10';  Miln  313  (-t-upa").  —  2.  to  conceal,  hide, 
cover  up  Th  2,  238  (ppr.  rundhanto) ;  PvA  88  (ppr. 
rundhamana).  —  3.  in  phrase  nagarai]  r.  to  surround 
or  besiege  a  town  J  1.409  (aor.  rundhi);  111.159  (°itva) ; 
IV.230  (°ir)su).  —  Pass  rujjhati  ;  pp.  ruddha  &  rtilha.  — 
See  also  upa",  pafi"  pafiva,  vi°.  Note.  The  roots  rndh 
&  rnndh  are  also  found  in  Prk.  (see  Pischel  §  507) ; 
besides  we  have  a  by-form  rabh  in  Prk.  as  well  as  in 
Pali :  see  Pischel,  §  266,  507,  and  P.  rumbhati. 

Rnppa  in  ruppa-rupakag  (nt.)  Th  2,  394  is  not  clear.  It 
refers  to  something  which  is  not  rupa,  yet  pretends  to 
be  rupa,  i.  e.  a  sham  performance  or  show.  Thus  ruppa 
may  correspond  to  'rupya  &  with  rupaka  mean  "  having 
the  form  (i.  e.  the  appearance)  of  form,  i.  e.  substan- 
tiality." TheCy.  (ThA  2  59)  interprets  as  "  rupiya-rupa- 
sadisar)  sarar)  sarai)  upatthahantar)  asaran  ti  attho  "  ; 
and  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  {Sisters,  p.  154)  trsl':  "deluded  by 
puppet  shows  (seen  in  the  midst  of  the  crowd)." 

Rnppati  [rap=Iap,  one  of  the  rare  cases  of  P.  r.  represent- 
ing a  Sk.  1.,  whereas  the  opposite  is  frequent.  The 
same  sound  change  Idg.,  as  Lat.  rumpo  to.break  corre- 
sponds to  Sk.  lumpati.  Besides  we  find  the  Sk.  form 
ropayati  to  break  off.  —  The  root  has  nothing  to  do  with 
rupa,  although  the  P.  Commentators  combine  these  two. 

—  Cp.  also  Sk.  ropa  hole;  Ags.  reofan  to  break,  reaf 
(theft)=  Ger.  raub,  rauben,  and  many  other  cognates 
(see  Walde  s.  v.  rumpo). — The  root  rup  is  def*  at 
Dhtm  by  nas,  i.  e.  to  destroy ;  another  rnp  is  given  at 
Dhtm  837  in  meaning"  ropana  "]  to  be  vexed,  oppressed, 
hurt,  molested  (always  with  ref.  to  an  illness  or  pain) 
Sn  767  (salla-viddho  va  r.)  1121;  Nd'  5  (  =  kuppati, 
ghaftij'ati,  pijiyati);  Nd*  543  (  =  kuppati  pijayati 
ghatayati).  —  ppr.  gen.  ruppato  S  1.198  (salla-vid- 
dhassa  r.  ;  expl*  at  K.S.  320  by  "  ghaffan-atthena  ")  = 
Sn  331  (reads  salla-viddhana  ruppatarj,  i.  e.  pi.  instead 
of  sg.) ;  Th  I,  967  (salla-viddhassa  ruppato  (C.  sarira- 
vikarag  apajjato.  Brethren,  338);  J  11.437  (C-  ghattiya- 
mana  piliyamana)  =  Vism  49  (dukkhitassa  r.) ;  J  111.169 
(salla-viddhassa  T.  =  ghat{iyamana  C).  — ruppati  to 
Pali  exegesis  with  its  fondness  of  allegorical  ("  ortho- 
dox ")  interpretation,  is  the  etym.  base  of  rupa,  thus  at 
S  111.86:  "ruppati  ti  tasma  rupan  ti  vuccati  kena  r.? 
sitena,  unhena  etc.  (all  kinds  of  material  dukkha : 
dukkha  11. 3'')  ruppati."  — Or  at  Sn  1121  (ruppanti 
rupena),  &  at  other  passages  given  under  rupa  (A). 
See  also  ruppana. 

Ruppana  (nt.)  [fr.  rnp)  molestation,  vexation,  trouble 
J  III. 368  (  =  ghattana  dusana  kuppana  C).  Frequent 
in  allegorical  exegesis  of  rupa,  e.  g.  at  DhsA  52  (naman' 
atthena  namai)  ruppan'  afthena  ruparj),  303  (rup'  adihi 
ruppana-bhava-dipana) ;  VbhA  4  (ruppan*  atfhena 
rupai)  ;  in  expl"  of  passage  S  111.86  (mentioned  under 
ruppati) ;  KhA  78,  79  (ruppan'  atthena  .  .  .  rupag 
rupag  ti  vuccati). 

Rumbhati  [so  read  for  nimhati  (Trenckner,  Notes  59*  ;  the 
root  is  another  form  of  rndh  (as  in  Prk.) :  see  rundhati. 
The  Dhtm  (547)  defines  by  "  uppi|ana  "]  to  obstruct, 
surround,  besiege  (=rundhati  3)  J  vi.391  (where  spell- 
ing rumhati  ;  in  phrase  nagarai)  r.).     See  also  ni",  sanni°. 

—  pp.  riilha. 

Ranuna(adj.)  [put  down  (rightly)  by  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  53  as 
different  fr.  Sk.  rukma  (shining) ;  Morris,  J.P.T.S.  1893. 
12  tried  the  etym.  rumma  =  Sk.  rumra  "tawny,"  Of 
rukma  (rukmin)  shiny.  It  is  still  an  unsolved  problem. 
It  may  not  be  far  off  to  trace  a  relation  (by  miswriting. 
dissimilation  or  false  analogy)  to  ruppa  in  sense  of 
ruppati,  or  to  rnj,  or  even  rudda.  The  C.  expl"  of  all 
the  rumma-    fc    rummin    passages    is    anaiijita,    i.  e. 


Rummin 


32 


RQpa 


ankempt]  miserable,  dirty,  poorly,  in  cpds.  °rupin 
J  IV. 387  (  =  lukhavesa  C),  with  v.  1.  duma° ;  and  "vasin 
poorly  dressed  J  iv.380. 

Rammin^nunma  (dirty-soiled)  J  iv.322  (v.  1.  dummi) ; 
VI. 1 94  (do.). 

Bamhaniyaat  M  1.480  is  doubtful  in  spelling.  The  mean- 
ing is  clearly  "  furthering  growth,  making  or  being 
prosperous,  bringing  luck  "  (comb''  with  ojavant),  as 
also  indicated  by  v.  1.  ru}h°.  Thus  it  cannot  belong  to 
minbh,  but  must  represent  either  rup,  as  given  under 
nippati  in  meaning  "  ropana  "  (Dhtm  837),  or  rnh  (see 
ruhati).  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  trsl*  "  tot  groei  geschikt  " 
(i.  e.  able  to  grow),  Neumann.  "  erquickend  "  (i.  e. 
refreshing). 

Boyhati  is  Med.  of  ruhati  (rohati),  q.  v. 

Borira  at  Vv  40'  is  misprint  for  rucira. 

Barn  [Vedic  ruru  :  RV  vi.75,  15]  a  sort  of  deer,  a  stag ; 
usually  called  ruru-miga  J  iv.256,  261  ;  v. 406  (pi. 
rohita  ruru),  416.     Cp.  ruruva. 

Rosita  [pp.  of  ni?  to  be  vexed.  The  Dhtp  defines  by 
"  rose  "  (306,  450),  "  parusiye  "  (626) ;  Dhtm  has  2 
roots  viz.  one  with  "  alepe "  (442),  the  other  with 
"  hii)sayai)  "  (443)]  annoyed,  irritated,  offended  Sn 
932,  971  (expl*  by  Nd'  498  as  "  khugsita,  vambhita, 
ghattita  "  etc.).     See  rosa,  roseti  etc. 

Bnasati  at  SnA  121  for  dussati. 

Boha'  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  ruh:  see  ruhati]  growing,  a  tree,  in 
cpds.  :  jagati",  dharani",  mahi",  etc. 

Bnha'  [poetical  for  ruhira  (rohita)=lohita]  blood,  in  cpd. 
ruhagghasa  blood -eater,  a  name  for  panther  J  111.481 
(  =  ruhira-bhakkha  lohita-payin  C). 

Bohira  (nt.)  [fr.  rudhira]  blood  M  111.122;  Th  i,  568; 
Vin  11.193  ;  Miln  125,  220  ;  Sdhp  38. 

-akkhita  (ruhir'  akkhita)  "  besmeared  with  blood  " 
J  IV. 33 1,  is  to  be  read  as  ruhir'  ukkhita  of  uk?). 

Bfitaat  J  III. 276  read  ruta  (q.  v.). 

Bftpa(nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  rupa,  connected  etymologically  with 
varpa  (Grassmann).  —  The  nom.  pi.  is  rupa  &  rupani] 
form,  figure,  appearance,  principle  of  form,  etc.  —  A. 
Definitions.  According  to  P.  expositors  rupa  takes  its 
designation  fr.  ruppati,  e.  g.  "  ruppanato  rupai)  "  Vism 
588;  "  ruppan'  atthena  r."  VbhA  3;  "  rupa-rupai)  = 
ruppana  sabh^vena  yuttag  "  Cpd.  156'  (where  ruppati 
is,  not  quite  correctly,  given  as  "  change  "),  "  ruppati 
ti :  tasma  rupan  ti  vuccati  "  S  111.86;  other  def"  are 
"  rupayati  ti  rupai)  "  (with  cakkbu  &  the  other  10 
ayatanas)  VbhA  45;  and  more  scientifically  :  "  paresu 
rup'  adisu  cakkhu-pafihanana  lakkhaijai)  rupai)  " 
Vism  446.  —  Of  modern  interpretations  &  discussions 
see  e.  g.  Dhs.  trsl.  introd.  ch.  vi.  (pp.  41-63,  or  '48-71) ; 
Dial.  11.244;  Expos.  67";  Cpd.  270  sq.  (where  objec- 
tions are  raised  to  trsl"  "  form,"  and  as  better  (philo- 
sophical) terms  "matter,"  "material  quality"  are 
recommended).  See  also  loka  for  similar  etym.  —  B. 
(lit.)  appearance,  form,  figure  Dhs  597  sq.  (=form  either 
contrasted  with  what  is  unseen,  or  taken  for  both  seen 
and  unseen),  751  ;  Mhvs  27,  30  (sfha-vyagghadirupani 
representations  of  lions,  tigers  etc.);  30.  68  (ravi- 
canda-tara -rupani  id.);  36,  31  (loha°  bronze  statue); 
ThA  257.  —  Esp.  beautiful  form,  beauty  S  iv.275  = 
Pv  II. 9**  (as  one  of  the  10  attributes,  with  sadda  etc., 
of  distinction  :  see  also  below  D  ii.a) ;  Miln  285  ;  Mhvs 
20,  4  (rupa-manini  proud  of  her  beauty) ;  PvA  89. 
— surupa  very  beautiful  ThA  72  ;  durupa  of  evil  form, 
ugly  A  1.203  sq.  (dubbai)pa-(- ).  —  In  phrase  rupai) 
sikkhati  Vin  i.77  =  iv.i29  the  meaning  is  doubtful;  it 
may  be  "  to  study  drawing,  or  arts  &  craft,"  or  (with 
Mrs.   Rh.  D.)  "  weights  &  measures,"  or  (w.  Hardy) 


"  money  changing."  It  is  said  that  through  this 
occupation  the  eyes  become  bad  ;  it  is  opposed  to  ganana. 
—  C.  (-°)  of  such  &  such  a  form,  like,  kind,  of  a  certain 
condition  or  appearance.  In  this  appl"  very  frequent 
&  similar  to  E.  -hood,  or  Ger.  -heit,  i.  e.  an  abstract  for- 
mation. Often  untranslatable  because  of  the  latter 
character.  It  is  similar  to  kaya  (cp,  expl"  of  atura- 
rupa  Vv  83'*  by  abhitunna-kaya  VvA  328),  but  not  so 
much  with  ref.  to  life  &  feeling  as  to  appearance  and 
looks.  E.  g.  aneka"  Sn  1079  (=anekavidha  Nd'  54); 
adissamana"  invisible  PvA  6  (lit.  with  invisible  form); 
ummatta"  as  if  mad,  under  the  appearance  of  madness, 
like  a  madman  Pv  1.8^ ;  11.6'  ;  eva''  in  such  a  condition 
Pv  II. i';  tapassi"  appearing  to  be  an  ascetic  Pv  1.3'; 
taraka"  the  (shapes  of  the)  stars  Dhs  617;  deva"  as  a 
deva  PvA  92.  Pleonastically  e.  g.  in  :  anupatta°  attain- 
ing Pv  IV. i";  taramana°  quickly  Pv  11.6*;  yutta"  fit 
FVA  157;  sucitta"  variegated  Pv  i.io*. — -Cases  ad 
verbially :  citta-riipai]  according  to  intention  Vin  in.  161  ; 
IV.  1 77  ;  cetabba-rupar)  fit  to  be  thought  upon  J  iv.157. 
(=°yuttakar)  C).  — atta-rupena  on  my  own  account 
S  IV. 97;  godha-rupena  as  an  iguana  Mhvs  28,  9.  —  D. 
(as  philos.  1. 1.)  principle  of  (material)  form,  materiality, 
visibility.  —  There  are  var.  groups  of  psychological 
and  metaphysical  systematizations,  in  which  rupa 
functions  as  the  material,  gross  factor,  by  the  side  of 
other,  more  subtle  factors.  In  all  these  representations 
of  rupa  we  find  that  an  element  of  moral  psychology 
overshadows  the  purely  philosophical  &  speculative 
aspect.  A  detailed  (Abhidhammatic)  discussion  of 
rupa  in  var.  aspects  is  to  be  found  at  Dhs  §  585-980.  — 

1.  rupa  as  ayatana  or  sense  object.  It  is  the  object  of 
the  activity  or  sphere  of  the  organ  of  sight  (cakkhu). 
As  such  it  heads  the  list  of  the  6  bahirani  ayatanani 
(see  e.  g.  Nd*  p.  238  A-E  &  ayatana')  with  "  cakkhuna 
rupar)  disva  "  (the others  :  sota>sadda,  ghana>gandha, 
jivha>rasa,  kaya>photthabba,  mano>dhamma),  cp. 
cakkhu-vififieyyariipaitthakantaetc.  D  1.245  ;  M  1.266  ; 
cakkhuna  rupar)  passati  ittba-rupai)  kanta-rupai)  etc. 
S  IV. 126;  —  see  further:  Vin  1.34  (sabbai)  adittai) : 
cakkhui)  adittai),  rupa  aditta  etc.  with  sequence  of  other 
ayatanas);  D  11.308  sq.,  336  sq. ;  M  in. 18  (yag  kho 
rupai)  paiicca  uppajjati  sukhai)  somanassai),  ayai)  rupe 
assado ;  cp.  Ps  11. 109  sq.).  291  (ye  te  cakkhu -viflfley- 
yesu  rupesu  avita-raga  etc.) ;  Ps  1.79  ;  11.38  (rupi  rupSni 
passati  ti  vimokkho);  Dhs  617.  653,  878;  Tikp  28. — 

2.  (metaphysically)  as  the  representative  of  sensory  or 
material  existence  :  (a)  universally  as  forming  the  cor- 
poreal stratum  in  the  world  of  appearance  or  form  (rupa- 
bhava)  as  compared  with  the  incorporeal  (aiupa-bhava), 
being  itself  above,  and  yet  including  the  kama-bhava. 
(The  kamabhava  is  a  subdivision  of  rupabhava,  which 
has  got  raised  into  a  third  main  division.)  This  triad 
is  als^  found  in  comb°^  with  loka  or  dhatu  (see  dhatu 
2  a  &  d),  or  avacara.  See  e.  g.  D  1.17  ;  111.215  ("dhatu), 
2 16  (°bhava) ;  Kvu  370  sq.  (°dhatu) ;  Dhs  499  (°avacara), 
585  ("dhatu);  Vbh  17  ("avacara),  25  (as  garu-pariqama 
a  dandha-nirodha  comp'  with  arupa).  A  similar 
sequence  rupa  arupa  &  nirodha  (i.  e.  nibbana)  in  old  ^ 
verses  at  Sn  755  ;  It  45,  62  (rupehi  arupa  santatara.  I 
arflpehi  nirodho  santataro).     On  indriya-rupa  "  faculty 

as  form  "  see  indriya  B.  —  (b)  individually  in  the  sphere 
of  saQsara  as  one  (i.  e.  the  material  quality)  of  the 
substrata  of  sensory  individual  existence  or  the  khan- 
dhas.  They  are  the  5  :  rupa-kkhandha.  vedana", 
saf&fla",  sankhara",  vififlaija'' ;  otherwise  called  rup' 
fipadana-kkhandha  etc.  (e.  g.  D  in. 223,  278  ;  Vism  443).  , 
See  khandha  11.  B.  —  In  this  property  rupa  consists  of 
28  subdivisions,  viz.  the  4  (great)  dhatus  (mahabhiitani 
or  else  bhuta-rupa  primary  matter)  and  24  apadft- 
rupani  (i.  e.  derivative  forms  or  accidentals).  These 
are  given  in  extenso  in  the  rupakkhandha  section  of  the 
Vism  (pp.  443-450),  also  at  Dhs  585  ;  the  24  consist  of : 
cakkhu,  sota,  ghana,  jivha,  kaya,  rupa.  sadda,  gandha. 
rasa,    itthindriya.    purisindriya,    jivitindriya,    hadaya- 


Rupak. 


33 


Rulhi 


vatthu,   kaya-viflflatti,   vaci  -  vinflatti.    akasa-dhatu, 
(rupassa)  lahuta  rauduta  kamraannata.  upacaya  santati 
jarata  aniccata,   kabajinkar'-ahara  ;    cp.  def"  at  Nett 
73  :    catu-mahabhutikar)    rupar)    catunnag    ca    maha- 
bhutanai)     upadaya     rupassa    pafinatti.       The     rupa- 
kkhandha    shares    with!  the    others    the    qualities    of 
soutlessness,     evanescence     and     ill     (anatta,     anicca, 
dukkha) ;   e.  g.  rupaii  ca  h'  idag  atta  abhavissa,   na 
y'    idai)    rupag    abadhaya   sagvatteyya   Vin    1.13,    cp. 
similarly  M  in. 282  sq.  ;  S  111.66;  quoted  and  expl""  in 
detail  at  Vism  610;  rupag  aniccag  Vin  1.14;  M  1.228; 
III. 18  (also  expl*  at  Vism  610);  S  111.48,  66,  88;  rupe 
anicc'  anupassana  Ps  11.186  sq.  —  See  also  D  11. 301  ; 
III. 233;    Ps   1.23,    53.    104;    11.96,    102,    109    (rupassa 
adinavo);  Vbh  I.  sq.,   12  sq.  (in  detail);  Kvu  11  sq.  ; 
Vism  443  sq. ;  Tikp  33;  VbhA  2,  3,  32  sq.  =  S   111.142 
(with  var.  similes) ;  DhA  iv.ioo.  —  (c)  in  the  making  up 
of  the   individuality  as   such    (nama-rupa),   where   in 
contrast  with  nama  (as  abstract,  logical,  invisible  or 
mind-factor)    rupa    represents    the    visible    (material) 
factor,  resembling  kaya  (cp.  phrase  nama-kaya  in  same 
sense).      The    foil,    are    current    def"*    of    nama-rupa: 
naina-(kaya)  =  vedana,   sanfla,   cetana,   phassa,   mana- 
sikara  (otherwise  citta-sankhara),  rupa(-kaya)  =  cattaro 
maha-bhuta    catunnag    m-bhutanai)    upadaya    rupai) 
(otherwise  kaya-sankhara)  S  11.4;  111.59  sq. ;  Ps  1.183; 
with  expl"  at  Vism  558  &  VbhA  169.     Defined  at  Nett 
15:    "ye   phassa-pancamaka   dhamma:    idai)    namai), 
yani  paftc'  indriyani  rupani :  idag  rupai),  tad  ubhayag 
namariipai)  viflflaiia-sampayuttar),"    Discussed  in  detail 
also  at   Vism   562    (  =  VbhA    173,    174),    587-597;   cp. 
DhsA  392  {Expos.  500,  where  "  mind-matter  "   is  given 
as  corresp.  couple  in  trsl",  do.  Cpd.  271  sq.  "  mind  and 
body").     See     also     under     paticca-samuppada.  —  3. 
various  references:  D   111.102,   212,   225,   244,   273;    M 
1.84  (Gotamo  kSmanai)  pariflfiar)  paflflapeti,  rupanar), 
vedananai]);    S  11.198;   in. 11   (evag-riipo  siyag,   evar) 
vedano  etc.),  101  (id.,  &  the  Uiandhas);  Sn  867,  874, 
943.  1037.  1121  ;  Nd^  425;  Tikp  36,  38,  54,  262  ;  Vism 
625  (uppajjanaka°). 

-aranunana  a  visible  thing  as  object  Dhs  146,  365  ; 
DhsA  310  (cp.  Expos.  407).  -avacara  world  of  form,  . 
Sphere  of  matter  (cp.  Expos.  67,  216°.  264)  PvA  163. 
-fipaga  (satta)  (a  being)  living  in  (bodily)  form  It  62  ;  | 
Sn  754.  -upajivini  f.  a  woman  living  on  her  beauty, 
i.  e.  a  harlot  PvA  46,  201.  -fiiiu  knowing  (var.)  bodily  i 
forms  M  i.220  =  A  v. 347.  -tanha  craving  after  form 
D  n. 309;  111.216,  244.  280  ;  VbhA  179  (in  det.).  -dakkha 
one  clever  in  forms,  viz.  an  artist  (accountant?)  Miln 
344  (in  the  Dhamma-nagara).  -dhatu  the  element  of 
form,  material  element  Vism  486;  Nett  32,  97.  See 
above  D  2.  -nimitta  sign  of  form  Ps  1.92.  -patta 
beautiful  J  1.61.  -pamanika  measuring  by  forrp  (out- 
ward appearance),  one  of  the  4  kinds  of  measurements 
which  the  world  takes  of  the  Tathagata  (see  A  11. 71  & 
P"8  53).  viz.  rupa°,  ghosa°,  lukha°,  dhamma"  DhA  | 
111.113;  the  same  four  similarly  at  SnA  242.  -patu- 
bhava  appearance  of  form  (also  as  °antara°  intermediate 
form)  SnA  245.  -bhava  material  existence  :  see  above 
D  2.  -raga  lust  after  rebirth  in  rupa  D  in.234  (-(-aru- 
pa°);  Nett  28  (paiic'  indriyani  rupini  rupa-ragassa 
padatthanag.  -rupa  material  form  (mutable  material 
quality?)  Cpd.  156,  doubtful  trsl"  &  expl°  -saiUa  per- 
ception of  material  qualities,  notion  of  form  D  1.34  ; 
11.112  (expl''  in  det.  at  Vism  328);  111.224,  244,  253;  ' 
Nd*  545 ;  DhsA  200  (cp.  Expos.  269).  -saflfiin  per- 
ceiving form  D  111.260;  Ps  11.38;  Sn  11 13.  -santati  . 
duration  of  material  form  Vism  431  ;  VbhA  2  1.  -samus- 
saya  accumulation  of  form,  complex  form  ThA  98. 
-samapatti  attainment  of  beauty  J  1.406.  -sampatti 
beauty  J  111.187.     -siri  personal  splendour  J  i.6o. 

R&paka  (nt.)  [fr.  rupa]  form,  figure ;  likeness  of,  image 
(-°) ;  representation  Vin  n.i  13  (rupak'  okiDpSni  pattani, 
of  painted  bowls);  Th  2,  394  (see  ruppa°);  DhA  1.370 


(mani°  jewelled  image) ;  11.69  (assa"  toy  horse) ;  Mhvs 
I  25,  26  (raja°) ;  27,  30  (devata°  shape  of  devas) ;  VVA213. 
!       -dtirupaka  of  squalid  appearance  J  11.167;  cp-  durupa. 

Rfipata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  rupa]  (being)  shape(d),  appearance  ; 
accordance,  conformity,  in  phrase  bhavya-rupataya 
"  by  appearance  of  likelihood  "  A  11.191  (in  hearsay 
formula,  where  it  is  missing  in  id.  passage  at  Nd*  151). 

Rupatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  rupa]  lit.  "form-hood,"  i.  e. 
I  shaping  (being)  shape(d)  S  111.87  (rupai)  riipattaya 
I       sankhatag). 

j  Rftpsvant  (adj.)  [rOpa-i- vant]  i.  having  bodily  form 
S  III. 16  &  passim  (in  formula  of  sakkaya-difthi) ;  Dhs 
1003. — 2.  having  the  form  of  (-")  Mhvs  14,  3  (go- 
kaijna").  —  3.  beautiful  Mhvs  10,  30  (f .  rupavati). 

Rnpika  (adj.)  [fr.  riipa]  having  shape;  neg.  a°  formless 
Sdhp  236  (rup'  arupika). 

'  RSpin  (adj.)  [fr.  rupa]  1.  having  material  qualities, 
I  possessed  of  form  or  shape  or  body  or  matter,  belonging 
j  to  the  realm  of  form,  rupi  is  nearly  always  comb''  & 
contrasted  with  arupi  formless,  incorporeal  (see  rupa 
D  2  a),  cp.  comb"  rupi  arupi  safifii  asaiini  nevasaflfli- 
nSsanni  Nd*  617  and  similarly  It  87  =  Miln  217.  —  D 
1.34  (atta  dibbo  rQpi),  77  (kayo  r.  manomayo),  186 
(atta  etc.),  195  (attapatilabho  r.  manomayo);  111.111, 
139  ;  M  11.229  :  S  111.46  (r.  arupi  safliil  etc.) ;  iv.202,  402  ; 
A  11.34;  Nd'  97,  137;  Ps  11.38  (rupi  rupani  passati); 
Dhs  635,  1091,  1444  ;  Vbh  123,  342  (read  rupi) ;  Nett  28 
(paflc'  indriyani  rupini),  69  (five  rupini  indriyani  &  five 
arupini) ;  DA  1.1 19  (atta) ;  DhsA  304  (rupino  dhamma) ; 
VbhA  511  sq.  (atta).  —  2.  (-°)  having  the  appearance 
of,  resembling  :  see  rununa°. 

Rflpiya'  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  rOpya,  lit.  of  splendid  appearance, 
cp.  name  for  gold  jatarupa]  silver  Vin  111.239  (here 
collectively  for  any  transactions  in  "  specie,"  as  expl* 
by  C.  p.  240  :  rupiyag  nama  satthu-vanno  kahapano 
lohamasako  darumasako  jatumasako ;  i.  e.  copper, 
wood  &  lac) ;  S  1.104  (suddhag  r.) ;  11.233  ;  Dhs  584. 

-maya  made  of  silver  Vin  11. 112  ;  S  in.  144  (sovanija- 
maya-i- ) ;  Pv  11. 6*  (where  in  sequence  sovaijija".  mani°, 
loha"  r. ;  expl""  as  "  rajatamaya  "  PvA  95) ;  DhA  1.29. 

RQpiya'  see  ruppa. 

Rapeti  [Caus.  Denom.  fr.  rupa]  i.  to  put  into  shape,  to 
make  appear,  to  make  grow  (?)  SnA  132,  143  (v.  1. 
ropeti).  —  2.  to  be  formed,  to  appear,  to  come  to  notice, 
in  def"  of  rQpa  at  VbhA  45  :  "  rupayati  ti  rupag." 

RBJa  [doubtful  spelling ;  perhaps  for  rulha,  evidently 
identical  with  rudda,  as  Trenckner  suggests  in  Notes 
63"]  awful,  terrible  Miln  275  (synonymous  with  bhima). 

Rfi|ha'  [pp.  of  rohati ;  of  rnh;  Sk.  rudha]  i.  grown  Sn  20 
("tiija).  —  2.  (see  rOhati)  healed  up  Miln  291  ("vaija  one 
whose  wound  has  healed) :  cp.  ruhana. 

Ra)ha'  at  Miln  217  &  218  is  a  by -form  of  ruddha,  pp.  of 
rundhati  (rumbhati)  to  obstruct ;  thus  meaning  "  ob- 
structed, difficult  "  (of  a  road,  together  with  lugga 
palugga).  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  trsl'  (as  rulha')  by 
"  overgrown." 

R&Uli  (f.)  [fr.  rulha,  pp.  of  rohati,  cp.  Sk.  ru<Jhi]  lit.  ascent, 
growth  sec  vi°.  —  fig.  what  has  grown  by  custom, 
tradition,  popular  meaning  of  a  word  (°sadda).  The 
fig.  meaning  is  the  one  usually  found  in  Paii,  esp.  in 
Abhidhamma  and  Commentary  literature  ;  e.  g.  ruj- 
hiyag  by  tradition,  usually,  commonly,  VbhA  i  (as 
category  with  the  3  other :  rJsi,  gupa,  pannatti) ; 
rujhito  id.  VbhA  2  ;  ru]hiya  id.  SnA  430  ;  PvA  163  ;  also 
ruihi-vasena  VvA  42  ;  or  with  sadda :  rujhi-sadda  usual 
meaning  Vism  333  ;   DhsA   205  ;   °saddena  in  popular 

VI.1  -  3 


Ruhati 


34 


Rodhana 


language,  in  ordinary  speech,  customarily,  commonly 
speaking  Tilcp  253  ;  Vism  310  ;  DA  1.239,  ^94  :  SnA  135, 
400. 

Bohati'  [the  specific  P.  form  of  the  usual  Sk.  P.  rohati 
(q.  v.).  The  root  ruh  is  given  at  Dhtp  334  with  mean- 
ing "  janana  "  i.  e.  causing,  which  refers  more  to  the 
compounds  with  prefixes]  i.  to  grow,  spread  It  67; 
J  IV. 408  (akkhini  ruhiijsu ;  also  ppr.  med.  ruyhamana) ; 
V.368;  VI. 360.  —  2.  to  heal  (of  a  wound),  close  up 
Vin  1.206  (vai)0  na  ruhati) ;  —  3.  to  have  efiect  in 
(loc),  to  be  effective  Vin  11.203  =  1%  87  (vado  tamhi  na 
ruhati).  —  pp.  rujha*.  See  also  ruhita  (pp.  of  Cans. 
ruheti=roheti). 

Bfihati'  [for  mndh  (mmbh,  nidh)  or  Pass,  rnjjh" ;  see  also 
rumbhati  &  ropeti*]  to  be  broken  or  (fig.)  to  be  sus- 
pended Vin  11.55  (dhammatta  ruhati  the  liability  is 
cancelled).  —  pp.  riilha^. 

Bfihana  (f)  [cp.  Sk.  roha^la,  fr.  roh:  ruhati*]  i.  growth 
J  11.322  (virii^ana  C).  —  2.  healing  (of  a  wound)  Miln 
112. 

Bfthita  (nt.)  [fr.  ruhati']  a  boil,  a  diseased  growth  (lit. 
"healed")  Vin  iv.316  (expl*  as  "  yag  kiiSci  vaijo  "  ; 
V.  1.  rudhita). 

Be  (indecl.)  [shortened  for  are,  q.  v.]  a  part,  of  exclama- 
tion, mostly  implying  contempt,  or  deprecation, 
(DA  i.276)  "  hijanavasena  amantanai]  "  i.  e.  address  of 
disdain:  heigh,  go  on,  get  away,  hallo. — D  1.96,  107; 
J  III. 184  (C.  =  amanta9e  nipato) ;  often  comb""  with 
similar  particles  of  exhortation,  like  cara  pi  re  get  away 
with  you  !  M  11. 108;  Vin  iv,i39  (so  read  for  cara  pire 
which  the  C.  takes  as  "  para,"  amamaka) ;  or  ehi  re 
come  on  then  I  J  1.225  ;  ha  re  look  out  !  here  they  are  ! 
PvA  4  ;  aho  vata  re  wish  I  would  !  Pv  ii.g*^  (re  ti  ala- 
panai)  PvA  131);  noca  vata  re  vattabbe  but  indeed, 
good  sir  .  .  .  (Kvu  i). 

Bekha  (f.)  [fr.  tikh,  for  which  the  Pali  form  is  likh,  cp. 
Sk.  rekha.  Lat.  rima.  Ohg.  riga  row]  line,  streak  Abhp 
539.     See  lekha. 

Becana  (nt.)  [fr.  no]  letting  loose,  emissioa  Dhtm  610. 
Cp.  Ti". 

BeQU  [cp.  Vedic  rcflu]  i.  dust ;  pi.  renu  particles  of  dust. 
—  Vin  1.32  (°hata  bhumi) ;  Vism  338  =  Nd'  505=  J  1.117 
(rago  rajo  na  ca  pana  reiju  vuccati) ;  J  iv.362  (okinnS 
raja-reouhi;  G.  expl"  by  "pagsuhi");  Miln  274  (pi); 
SnA  132  (renug  vQpasarheti  allays).  —  2.  pollen  (in  this 
meaning  found  only  in  the  so-called  Jataka-style) 
J  1.233  (maha-tumba-matta.),  349  (pupphato  renui) 
ganhati);  111.320 ;  v. 39  (puppha°);  vi.530  (paduma- 
kinjakkha") ;  DhA  iv.203  (°vatthi). 

Beroka  [etym.  ?  Probably  dialectical]  "  elephant's 
tooth,"  ivory  J  11.230  (=hatthi-danta  C). 

Boga  [Vedio  roga  ;  rnj  (see  rujati).  cp.  Sk.  ruja  breakage, 
illness]  illness,  disease. — The  def  of  roga  at  J  11.437 
is  "  roga  rujana-sabhavattai)."  There  are  many  diff. 
enumerations  of  rogas  and  sets  of  standard  comb"",  of 
which  the  foil,  may  be  mentioned.  At  Sn  311  (cp. 
D  111.75)  it  is  said  that  in  old  times  there  were  only  3 
diseases,  viz.  iccha,  anasanat),  jara,  which  gradually, 
through  slaughtering  of  animals,  increased  to  98. 
Bdhgh  at  SnA  324  hints  at  these  98  with  "  cakkhu-rog' 
adina-bhedena."  Beginning  with  this  (cakkhuroga 
affection  of  the  eye)  we  have  a  list  of  34  rogas  at  Nd'  13 
(under  pakata-parissaya  or  open  dangers  =  Nd'  360  = 
Nd*  420)  &  Nd«  304'  B.  viz.  cakkhu°  &  the  other  4 
senses.  sisa°,  kaiji>a°,  mukha°,  danta" ;  kJsa,  sasa, 
pinasa,  daha,  jara ;  kucchiroga,  muccha.  pakkhandika. 
sola,  visucika;  kutthag,  gando.  kilaso.  soso.  apamaro ; 
daddu.   kao^lu.   kacchu.    rakhasa.    vitacchika,    lohita- 


pittag.  madhumeho.  agsa,  pilaka,  bhagandala.  This 
list  is  followed  by  list  of  10  abadhas  &  under  "  dukkha  " 
goes  on  with  var.  other  "  ills."  which  however  do  not 
make  up  the  number  98.  The  same  list  is  found 
at  A  V.I  10.  The  10  abadhas  (Nd^  304'  C.)  occur  at 
A  11.87  &  Miln  308  (as  agantuka-roga).  The  4  "  rogas  " 
of  the  Sun  (Miln  273.  cp.  Vin  11,295)  are  '■  abbha.  mahika, 
megha.  Rahu.  —  Another  mention  of  roga  together  with 
plagues  which  attack  the  corn  in  the  field  is  given  at  J 
V.40 1 ,  viz.  visa-vata  ;  musika-salabha-suka-papaka  ; 
setatfhika-roga  etc..  i.  e.  hurtful  winds,  mice,  moths  & 
parrots,  mijdew.  —  The  comb"  roga,  ganda,  salla  is  some- 
times found,  e.  g.  M  11.230  ;  Vism  335.  Of  other  single 
rogas  we  mention:  kucchi"  (stomach-ache)  J  1.243; 
ahivataka"  Vin  1.78;  J  TI.79;  iv.200 ;  DhA  1.231  ; 
pari(Ju°  jaundice  Vin  1.206;  J  11.102  ;  DhA  1.25;  tina- 
pupphaka"  hay-fever  Miln  216.  —  See  also  atanka  & 
abadha.  On  roga  in  similes  see  J.P.T.S.  1907,  130. — 
D  I.I  I,  73  ;  III. 182  ;  S  III. 32  ;  iv.64  ;  A  11. 128,  142  sq. ; 
IV. 289, ;  Nd'  486  ;  Vism  236  (as  cause  of  death),  512  (in 
simile) ;  VbhA  88  (in  sim.  of  dukkha  etc.) ;  ThA  288  ; 
VvA  6  (rogena  phuftha).  75  (sarire  r.  uppajji) ;  PvA  86 
(kacchu").  212  (rogena  abhibhfita).  —  Opp.  aroga 
health  :  see  sep. 

-atanka  affliction  by  illness  A  11. 174  sq.  ;  v. 169.  318. 
-niddha  the  nest  or  seat  of  disease  Dh  148  (cp.  DhA 
iii.no);  as  "nija  at  It  37.  -mula  the  root  of  disease 
Sn  530.  -vyasana  distress  or  misfortune  of  disease 
D  111.235  (one  of  the  5  vyasanani :  flati",  bhoga",  roga°, 
sila°,  ditthi");  Miln  196  (id.). 

Bogin  (adj.)  [fr  roga]  having  a  disease,  suffering  from  (-°) ; 
one  who  has  a  disease  Vism  194  (ussanna-vyadhi  duk- 
khassa) ;  Sdhp  86.  — pandu°  one  who  has  the  jaundice 
J  11.285  ;  III. 401. 

Bocati  [Vedic  rocate.  ruc,  Idg.  *leaq,  as  in  Lat.  luceo  to  be 
bright  (cp.  lux  light,  lumen,  luna  etc.);  Sk.  rocana 
splendid,  ruci  light,  roka  &  ruk$a  light ;  Av.  raocant- 
shining ;  Gr,  n/ipt-Xirj;  twi-light,  \ivic6g  white ;  also 
with  1 ;  Sk.  loka  world,  locate  to  perceive,  locana  eye  ; 
Lith.  laukti  to  await;  Goth.  liuhaf>  light  =  Ohg.  lioht. 
E.  light ;  Oir  loche  lightning.  —  The  Dhtp  (&  Dhtm) 
gives  2  roots  ruc,  viz.  the  one  with  meaning  "  ditti " 
(Dhtp  37).  the  other  as  "rocana"  (Dhtp  395).  both 
signifying  "light"  or  "splendour."  but  the  second 
probably  to  be  taken  in  sense  of  "pleasing"]  i.  to 
please,  i.  e.  it  pleases  (with  dat.  of  person)  Th  2,  415 
(rocate) ;  Mhvs  15.  9  (nivasorocatu).  Cp.  BSk.  rocyate 
AvS  II. 158.  —  2.  to  find  pleasure  in  (loc.)  Miln  338 
(bhave).  —  Caus.  rocetj:  i.  to  be  pleased,  to  give  one's 
consent  DhA  1.387  (gloss  K  rucitha  ruceyyatha). — 
2.  (with  ace.  of  object)  to  find  pleasing,  to  find  delight 
in.  to  be  attached  to.  to  approve  of.  to  choose  S  1.4I 
(vadhai));  J  1.142  (Devadattassa  laddhig  r.);  v.  178 
(pabbajjag  roc'  ahar|  =  rocemi  C).  226  (kammag). — 
Freq.  with  dhammag  to  approve  of  a  doctrine  or  scheme, 
e.  g.  at  Vin  11.199  (Devadattassa  dhammag);  S  1.133; 
Sn  94  (asatag  dh.),  398  (dhammag  imag  rocaye) ; 
J  IV. 53  (dh.  asatag  na  rocayama).  — Cp.  abhj°,  a°,  Ti°. 

B099&  s^^  runna. 

Bodati  see  rudati. 

Bodana  (nt.)  [fr.  rnd]  crying,  weeping  DhA  1.28  ;  PvA  63. 
64;  Dhtp  144. 

Bodha'  [fr.  radhj  obstruction,  stopping,  in  cpd.  para- 
pana°  stopping  the  life  of  somebody  else  ;  life-slaughter, 
murder  Sn  220  ;  J  n.450.     Cp.  anu°,  ni°,  Ti°. 

Bodha'  (nt.)  [fr.  radh]  bank,  dam  A  111.128  (where  id.  p. 
at  A.  1. 154  reads  gedha,  cave ;  v.  1.  also  gedha.  cp.  v.  1. 
rodhi"  for  gedhi°  at  Nd«  585). 

Bodhana  (nt.)  [fr.  rudh]  obstructing  J  v.346;  Sdhp  57. 


Kopa 


35 


tlohita 


Ropa  {-")  [fr.  rop=Caus.  of  rah]  plantation;  in  vana°  &    '< 
arama"  S  1.33. 

Ropaka  [ropa+ka]  sapling  J  11.346  (rukkha°). 

Ropana  (nt.)  &  ropana  (f.)  [fr.  ropeti']  1 .  planting  PvA  151 
(arama°) ;  Mhvs  15.  41.  —  2.  healing  S  iv.177  (vana°). 

—  3.  furthering,  making  grow  Ps  11. 115  (buddhi°). —  1 
4.   (f.)  accusation  Vin  iv.36.  ! 

Ropaya  (adj.)  {-")  [for  'ropya,  fr.  ropeti']  to  be  healed, 
only  in  cpd,  du°  hard  to  heal  (of  a  wound)  Vin  1.216 
(va^a). 

RopSpCti  see  ropeti'. 

Ropita  [pp.  of  ropeti']  i.  planted  Pv  n.7*.  —  2.  growing 
up  Pv  9™  (read  "  pi  ropitar)  "  for  viropitar)).  —  3.  fur- 
nished with,  powdered  with  (-°)  Vv  64"  (Ed.  vosita  ; 
VvA   280   expl'  by   uUitta,    vicchurita). — -4.  accused,   i 
brought  forward  (of  a  charge)  Vin  iv.36.  ' 

Ropima  (nt.)  [fr.  ropeti']   i.  what  has  been  planted  Vin  i 
IV.267.  — 2.  a  kind  of  arrow  M  1.429  (contrasted  with 
kaccha  ;  Neumann  trsl^  ropima  by  "  aus  Binsen  "). — 
3.  (adj.)  at  Vv  44"  aropima  ("  not  planted  "?)  is  an 
attribute  of  trees'.     It  is  not  expl*  in  VvA. 

Ropeti' [Caus.  of  ruhati']  i.  toplantor  sow  J  1.150  (nivapa- 
tinag);  Mhvs  15,  42  (amb'  atthikar));  19,  56;  DhA 
II. 109. — 2.  to  put  up,  fix  J  1. 143  (sulani).  —  3.  to 
further,  increase,  make  grow  Sn  208  (Pot.  ropayeyya). 

—  4.  (fig.)  to  fix,  direct  towards,  bring  up  against :  see 
ropeti^  2.  —  pp.  ropita.  Caus.  II.  ropapeti  to  cause  to 
be  planted  D  11. 179;  J  vi.333  ;  Mhvs  34,  40  ;  DhA  11.109. 

—  Cp.  abhi°,  abhini°,  a°. 

Ropeti*  [Caus.  of  ruhati^.  See  lumpati]  to  cause  to 
break  off,  to  cause  to  suspend  or  cancel :  to  pass  off, 
refuse  Vin  11. 261  (bhikkhuhi  bhikkhuninar)  kammai) 
ropetva  bhikkhuninar)  niyyadetur),  i.  e.  by  the  bhikkhus 
is  an  act  of  the  nuns  to  be  passed  off  and  to  be  referred 
to  the  nuns).  —  2,  to  make  confess  or  accuse  of  (ace.  : 
apattig  a  guilt)  Vin  11. 2  (first  codeti,  then  sareti,  then 
ropeti  &  lastly  (sanghag)  iSapeti),  85  (id.) ;  iv.36  (aflfla- 
vadakai)  ropeti  to  bring  the  charge  of  heresy  against 
someone).  No.  2  perhaps  better  to  ropeti'.  Cp.  Vin. 
Texts  11.334.  —  To  ropeti^  belong  the  cpds.  oropeti 
(cut  off)  &  voropeti  (deprive).  They  are  better  to  be 
taken  here  than  to  ava  +  ruh. 

Roma  (nt.)  [Vedic  roman  ;  the  usual  P.  form  is  loma  (q.  v.)] 
the  hair  of  the  body  J  v. 430  (where  in  roma-rajiya 
maijdita-udara  as  expl"  of  loma-sundari) ;  Sdhp  119 
(°kiipa), 

Roinaka(adj.)  [fr.  roma]  feathered  (?)  J  11.383  (C.  wrong  !). 

Roma&ca  (?)  [fr.  roma,  cp.  Vedic  roraa^]  hairy  (?)  Davs 
V.I 4  ("kancuka). 

Romanthaka  (adj.)  [fr.  romanthati]  chewing  the  cud, 
ruminating  Vin  11. 132. 

Romanthati  &  Romantheti  [to  romantha  ;  cp.  Lat.  rumen 
&  ruminare=  E.  ruminate]  to  chew  the  cud,  to  ruminate 
Vin  11.132  (°ati);  J  iv.392  ("eti). 


Romanthana  (nt.)  [fr.  romanthati]  ruminating  Vin  11.32 1. 

Rorava  [fr.  rn,  cp.  Sk.  raurava,  N.  of  a  purgatory]  i.  a 
sort  of  hart  (i.  e.  ruru)  M  1.429.  —  2.  N.  of  a 
naraka  (purgatory) :  see  Dictionary  of  Names.  E.g. 
J  III. 299;  Davs  III. 12  ;  Sdhp  195.  Cp.  BSk.  raurava 
Divy  67. 

Rosa[cp.  Sk.  rosa,  of  ruj]  I.  anger,  angry  feeling  M' 1.360. 

—  2.  quarrel  J  iv.316. 

Rosaka  (adj.)  [fr.  rosa  ;  cp.  BSk.  rosaka  Divy  38]  angry, 
wrathful  S  1.85,  96;  Sn  133;  Vv  52^  (=paresar)  ros' 
uppadanena  r.  VvA  226);  J  11.270. 

Rosana  (f .)  [abstr.  fr.  rosati]  making  angry,  causing  anger, 
being  angry  Vbh  86  (hir|sana-(- ),  expl""  at  VbhA  75  by 
ghattana.     Cp.  BSk.  rosaiji  Av^  1.178. 

Rosaneyya  (adj.)  [grd.  formation  fr.  rosa]  apt  to  be  angry 
or  cause  anger ;  neg.  a°  not  to  be  angered,  not  irritable 
Sn  216. 

Rosita  [pp.  of  nis,  to  smear  :  Sk.  rusita ;  given  as  root  ruS 
at  Dhtm  442  with  meaning  "  alepa  "]  smeared  (with), 
anointed  J  iv.440  (=vilitta  C). 

Roseti  [Caus.  of  rosati,  rn?!  see  rusita]  to  make  angry,  to 
annoy,  to  irritate  S  1.162  ;  A  11. 215  (so  read  for  rosati) ; 
III. 38  ;  Sn  125,  130,  216;  J  t.432  ;  iv.491. 

Rohafifia  (adj.)  [fr.  roha=rohita]  red  J  v. 259  (rohaiiiia 
pungav'usabha;  C.  expl*  by  ratta-vanna)  Kern. 
Toev.  s.  V.  proposes  rohiiifio=  •rohinyah,  (cp.  pokkha- 
rapi  for  °ini)  red  cows. 

Rohati:  for  the  Sk.  rohati  of  ruh  to  grow  we  find  the 
regular  P.  correspondent  nihati:  see  ruhati'.  The 
Caus.  of  this  verb  is  ropeti  (to  make  grow) :  see  ropeti  ! 

—  Another  root,  restricted  to  the  Pali,  is  seen  in 
riihati*  (with  pp.  rujha)  and  is  equal  to  rondh  (rudh, 
rumbh)  to  break.  The  Caus.  of  this  root  (ropeti^) 
is  either  an  indirect  formation  from  it  or  (more 
likely)  a  direct  representative  of  rap  =  lap  as  in  P. 
lumpati.  To  the  latter  belong  the  prej,.  cpds.  oropeti 
&  voropeti. 

Rohicca  [fr.  rohita,  perhaps  directly  fr.  Vedic  rohit  a  ewe, 
lit.  the  red  one]  a  kind  of  deer  J  vi.537  (°sarabha 
miga). 

Rohi^i  (f.)  [cp.  Vedic  rohini  red  cow  or  mare]  i .  a  red  cow 
A  1.162  =  111.214.. —  2.  N.  of  a  nakkhatta  or  constella- 
tion ("  red  cow  ")  SnA  456  ;  Mhvs  19,  47.  —  3.  N.  of  a 
river  SnA  357. 

Rohita  (adj.)  [Vedic  rohita  ;  cp.  the  usual  P.  word  lohita 
red  &  blood.  See  also  rudhira  &  ruhira]  red,  as 
attribute  of  fishes  at  J  v. 405  (i.  e.  a  special  kind  of 
fish),  and  of  deer  at  J  v. 406  in  same  passage  (i.  e.  a 
special  kind  of  deer).  Otherwise  only  in  standin  g 
term  rohita-maccha  the  "  red  fish,"  viz.  Cyprinus 
Rohita,  which  is  freq.  mentioned  in  the  "  Jataka  " 
literature,  e.  g.  J  11.433;  in. 333  ;  DhA  11  132  (four), 
140;  KhA  118. 


L. 


La  syllable  of  abbreviation,  corresponding  to  our  "  etc."  : 
see  peyyala. 

Lak-a(thika  at  VvA  222  is  doubtful ;  atthika 
means  "  kernel,"  Iak°  may  be  a  misspelling  for 
labujak"  (?). 

Lakanaka  (nt.  ?)  [£r.  lag,  with  k  for  g,  as  lakuia  :  lagula 
etc.  Would  correspond  to  Sk.  'lagnaka,  cp.  Trenckner. 
Notes  62  ;  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  39^]  ship's  anchor  (nava°) 
Miln  377  (v.  1.  lagganaka),  378.  1 

Lakaia   [for   alankara,   lit.   "  fitting   up."   cp.    Hindi   & 
Marathi   langara,  Tamil   ilankaran]    a   sail    J    11. 112;   i 
Miln  378 ;  Davs  iv.42  ;  Vism  137  (v.  1.  BB.  lankara).       ; 

Laknta  [see  lagula  for  etym.]  a  club,  cudgel  Miln  255  (in   1 
sequence  dapda-leddu-lakuta-muggara),  301,  367,   368. 
See  also  lagula.  -  t 

Laknfltaka  [dialectical]  a  dwarf  Mhvs  23,  50  (°sariratta) ; 
VbhA  26  (°pada-purisa,  cpd.  with  arupa) ;  PugA 
227  ;  C.  on  S  1.237. 

Lakoi^takatta  (nt.)  [fr.  lakuntaka]  dwarfishness  J  vi  337.  , 

Laketi  [for  laggeti,  see  lakanaka]  to  hold  fast  (lit.  to  make 
adhere)  Miln  377. 

Lakkha  (nt.)  [fr.  lakf  (see  lakkhana),  or  (after  Grassmann)   [ 
lag  "  to  fix,"  i.  e.  to  mark.     Cp.  Vedic  lak§a  price  at   ' 
gambling    (Zimmer,    Altind.    Leben    287)]    i.  a    mark  ' 
Miln   102.  —  2.  a  target  Miln  418;  DhA  1.52   (°yogga 
target  practice,  i.  e.  shooting).  —  3.  a  stake  at  gambling 
J  VI.271. — -4.  a  high  numeral,  a  lac  or  100,000  (but  | 
cp.  PvA  255,  where  lakkha  of  Pv  iv.3^  is  taken  as  a 
"  period  of  time,"  equal  to  100  kotis) ;  Davs  v.66. 

Lakkhafifia  (adj.)  [fr.  lakkhaija,  cp.  BSk.  lakjanya  diviner 
Divy  474]  connected  with  auspices,  auspicious,  in  phrase 
"  lakkhaiifla  vata  bho  dosina  ratti  "  (how  grand  a  sign, 
friends,  is  the  moonlight  night!  trsl")  D  1.47=}  1.509 
(expH  at  DA  1.141  as  "  divasa-mas'-adinar)  lakkhaijar) 
bhavitui)  yutta");  J  v. 370  ("sammata  considered 
auspicious). 

Lakkhaija  (nt.)  [Vedic  laksman  nt.  sign;  adj.  lak?maija ; 
later  Sk.  laksmana  nt.  In  the  def"  of  grammarians  syn. 
with  anka  brand,  e.  g.  Dhtp  536  "  anka  lakkhane 
lakkha  dassane,"  or  Dhtm  748  "  lakkha  =  dassana-  1 
anke  "  ;  cp.  J  1.451  lakkhaijena  anketi  to  brand.  — 
The  Sk.  Np.  Lak?maija  appears  also  in  Prk.  as  Lak- 
kharia :  Pischel,  Prk.  Gr.  §  312]  i.  sign,  characteristic.  I 
mark  ;  esp.  a  sign  as  implying  something  extraordinary  ] 
or  pointing  to  the  future,  therefore  a  prognosticative 
mark  (cp.  talisman),  a  distinguishing  mark  or  salient 
feature,  property,  quality  (as  Rh.  D.  in  Dial.  1.19 
somewhat  lengthily,  after  Bdhgh,  trsl*  lakkhana  by 
"  signs  of  good  &  bad  qualities  in  the  foil,  things  and 
of  the  marks  in  them  denoting  the  health  or  luck  of  their 
owners  ")  D  1.9  (a  long  list,  as  forbidden  practice  of 
fortune-telling,   like  mani°  from  jewels,   danda"   from 


sticks.  asi°  from  marks  on  swords  etc.);  Sn  360  (pi. 
lakkhaija,  here  as  fortune-telling  together  with  supina 
telling  fr.  dreams,  cp.  SnA  362  :  daij(Ja°,  vattha"  etc. 
referring  to  D  1.9),  927  (with  Athabbana,  supina  & 
nakkhatta,  all  kinds  of  secret  sciences ;  expli*  at  SnA 
564  as  "  mani-lakkhanadi  ")  1018  (gottag  bruhi  sa° 
"with  its  distinguishing  marks");  J  vi.364  (sign  of 
beauty);  Miln  171  (yathava"  just  characterization); 
Mhvs  35,  109  (itthi°  auspicious  signs  in  women) ;  PvA 
161,  219;  SnA  386.  A  long  enum"  of  all  sorts  of 
(perfect)  marks  (tatha-lakkhanani)  is  found  at  DA 
1.62  sq.  Cp.  tadi-lakkhana  marks  of  such  (a  being), 
with  ref.  to  good  luck  etc.  J  111.98 ;  SnA  200 ;  VvA  95. 
—  2.  mark  on  the  body,  esp.  when  serving  a  def. 
purpose,  e.  g.  as  the  branding  (of  slaves),  or  the  marks 
of  a  fortunate  being,  pointing  towards  his  future  great- 
ness :  (a)  brand  J  1.451,  cp.  cpd.  °ahata.  —  (b)  the  (32) 
marks  of  a  maha-purisa  or  a  great  being,  either  destined 
to  be  a  raja  cakkavalti,  or  a  sammd-satnbuddha.  These 
are  given  at  Sn  1019  (pi.  lakkhana).  1021,  1022  as  only 
3  (viz.  mukhar)  jivhaya  chadeti,  uijn'  assa  bhamuk' 
antare,  kos'  ohitai)  vattha-guyhag  with  ref.  to  his 
tongue,  the  hair  between  the  eyebrows  &  the  sexual 
organ) ;  more  completely  as  32  at  D  11. i6  sq.  ;  in. 142  sq. 
(the  Lakkhana  Suttanta) ;  referred  to  at  D  1.88,  105  ; 
J  1.56;  Mhvs  5,  91  ;  cp.  paripunna-kaya  Sn  548  (with 
expl'  lakkhanehi  punnataya  at  SnA  452).  —  3.  (in 
spec,  sense:)  pudendum  J  v. 197  (subha°,  the  male 
member),  366.  —  4.  (adj.)  (-°)  having  the  marks  (of), 
characterized  by,  of  such  &  such  character  A  1.102 
(kamma° ;  bala"  &  pandita",  together  with  bala-  & 
parwjitanimitta) ;  Miln  1 1 1  (sata-punna°,  of  the 
Buddha);  VvA  71  (para-sampatti-usuyya-lakkhaija 
issa) ;  PvA  17,  120.-5.  (as  t.  t.  in  philosophy) 
specific  attribute,  characteristic  (mark).  In  contrast 
to  nimitta  more  a  substantial  attribute  or  primary 
characteristic  (cp.  VbhA  261).  Compared  with  other 
terms  of  definition  we  get  the  foil.  :  rasa  essential 
property,  paccupatthdna  recurring  phenomenon,  padat- 
thdna  immediate  occasion  DhsA  63  (trsl"  Expos.  1.84). 
cp.  Cpd.  13  (where  padatthdna  is  trsl'^  as  "  proximate 
cause  ").  —  Psi.54sq.  (kliandhanar)) ;  11. 108  (saccanar)) , 
VbhA  85.  136  (with  ref.  to  the  Paticcasamuppada,  cp. 
Vism  528),  261  (fourfold,  of  kesa  etc.) ;  Vism  278  (with 
ref.  to  kammatthana)  351  (4.  of  the  dhatus :  thaddha", 
abandhana".  paripacana".  vitthambhana").  363  sq. 
(id.).  495  (ariya-saccanar)) ;  VvA  38  (comp*  with  aram- 
maijia  with  ref.  to  jhana).  —  The  3  properties  (tilak- 
khanar))  of  existing  things  or  of  the  phenomenal  world 
are  anicca,  dukkha,  anatta,  or  impermanence,  suffering, 
unreality:  thus  at  J  1.48  (dhamma-desana  ti-l-°mutt5), 
275  ;  in. 377  (through  contemplating  them  arises  vipas- 
sana  &  pacceka-bodhi-flaija).  —  abl.  lakkhanato  "  by  or 
qua  characteristic,"  "  in  its  essential  qualification,"  often 
found  in  exegetical  analysis  in  Commentary  style 
comb''  with  var.  similar  terms  (atthato,  kamato,  ni- 
mittato  etc.),  e.  g.  Vism  351,  363,  495,  528;  VbhA  46, 
76.  83,  131,  261  (where  Vism  351  has  paripacana  for 
u^ihatta) ;  SnA  343.  —  Cp.  upa",  vi°,  sa°. 


36 


Lakkhika 


37 


Lajjati 


-ahata  affected  with  a  mark  (of  punishment  or  dis- 
grace), branded  Vin  1.76;  VvA  66.  -kusala  clever  at 
interpreting  bodily  marks  or  at  fortune-telling  from 
signs  (cp.  nemittaka)  M  1.220;  J  1.272.  -kusalata 
cleverness  at  (telling  people's  fortune  by)  signs  VvA 
138.  -patiggahaka  one  who  reads  the  signs,  a  sooth- 
sayer, wise  man  J  1.56.  -pathaka  an  expert  in  (inter- 
preting) signs,  fortune-teller  J  1.455;  11.194;  v. 211. 
-manta  the  secret  science  of  (bodily)  marks  Sn  690  (but 
expl''  at  SnA  488  as  "  lakkha^cini  ca  veda  ca,"  thus 
taking  it  as  Dvandva) ;  DhA  in. 194.  -sampatti  ex-  j 
cellency  of  marks  J  1.54.  -sampanna  endowed  with 
(auspicious)  signs  Sn  409 ;  J  1.455. 

Lakkhika  &  °ya  (adj.)  [fr.  lakkhi]  belonging  to  auspices, 
favoured  by  good  luck  Sdhp  105  (°ya) ;  usually  neg. 
alakkhika  unlucky,  unfortunate,  ill-fated ;  either  with 
appa-pufifia  of  no  merit,  e.  g.  S  v.  146=  J  11.59;  Vv  50^ 
(=nissirika,  kSlakan^i  VvA  212);  or  pSpa  wicked  Vin 
11.192  (of  Devadatta). 

Lakkllita  [pp.  of  lakkheti]  see  abhi°. 

Lakkhi  (f.)  [Sk.  laksmi]  i.  luck,  good  fortune,  success, 
personal  welfare  J  in. 443  (comb""  with  siri  splendour ; 
expl""  by  parivara-sampatti  &  panfia  respectively) ; 
IV.281  (expl*  as  "  siri  pi  puflnara  pi  panna  pi  ").  — 
2.  splendour,  power  Davs  1.6  (rajja°  royal  splendour); 
IV. 38  (id.). — -3.  prosperity  Davs  v. 35  ("nidhana  Anu- 
radhapura). 

Lakkheti  [Denom.  fr.  lakkha]  to  mark,  distinguish, 
characterize  Nett  30.  —  pp.  lakkhita.  —  Cp.  upa°. 

Lagati  &  Laggati  [with  variant  langati ;  the  spelling  with 
gg  is  the  usual  one.  Root  lag,  as  in  Vedic  lak?a  etc.  ; 
Sk.  lagati,  pp.  lagna  (from  the  pp.  lagga  the  double  g  has 
been  generalized  in  P.:  but  see  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  136); 
perhaps  to  Lat.  langueo,  E.  languid,  from  meaning  "  to 
lag,"  but  doubtful :  seeWalde,  La(.  Wtb.  s.  v.  langueo.  — • 
The  Dhtp  23  gives  lag  in  meaning  "  sanga,"  which  is 
the  customary  syn.  in  the  commentaries.  Cp.  langi]  to 
adhere  to,  stick  (fast)  to  (loc),  to  hang  from  Vin  1.202  ; 
J  III. 120  ;  DhA  1.131;  111.298  (ppr.  alaggaraana) ;  DA 
1.257  (for  abhisajjati) ;  aor.  laggi  PvA  153  (tire);  ger. 
laggitva  J  111.19  ;  DhA  iv.25  ;  PvA  280  (but  better  to  be 
read  laggetva  making  f ast ;  as  v .  1 . ) .  —  pp .  lagga  &  laggi ta. 
—  Caus.  laggeti  to  make  stick  to,  to  fasten,  tie,  hang 
up  Vin  1.209 ;  11.117,  152  ;  J  111.107;  v.  164,  175  ;  Mhvs 
7,  9  (suttafl  ca  tesag  hatthesu  laggetva) ;  DhA  1.138.  — 
Caus.  II.  laggapeti  to  cause  to  fasten  or  stick,  to  make 
stick,  to  obstruct  J  111.241  ;  Mhvs  33,  11  ;  34,  48  (kala- 
pag) ;  DhA  iv.183.  — Cp.  alaggeti. 

Lagana  &  Laggana  (nt.)  [fr.  lag]  1.  adhering  J  1.46  (g.; 
V.281)  ;  with  gg:  J  111.202  (  =  sanga);  Nd*  p.  188  (s.  v. 
nissita,  in  sequence  1.,  bandhana,  palibodha) ;  Miln  105  ; 
DhA  111.433.  —  2.  slinging  round,  making  fast  VvA  212. 

Laga}a  [cp.  Sk.  laguda,  MarathI  lakuda,  Hindi  lakufa 
stick.  The  word  is  really  a  dialect  word  (Prk.)  and  as 
such  takenmto  3k.  where  it  ought  to  be  •lakrta  =  lakuta. 
Other  etym.  connections  are  Lat.  lacertus  (arm).  Gr. 
Xixpava,  Xa?  ;  Old  Prussian  alkunis  elbow  ;  and  distantly 
related  E.  leg.  See  Walde,  Lai.  Wtb.  s.  v.  lacertus. 
Cp.  P.  bhuja'  &  ratana]  a  club,  cudgel  Vin  111.77  (enum'' 
with  var.  weapons  of  murder,  like  asi,  satti,  bheijdi, 
pastija  etc.) ;  Miln  152,  351  (kodaijda-lagula-muggara), 
355  (kilesa");  J  vi.394;  Vism  525  ("abhighata). 

Lana  (adj.)  [pp.  of  lag(g)ati]  sticking;  stuck,  attached  ; 
obstructed,  hindered  Nd*  107;  Miln  346  (laggag  disva 
mahir));DhsA  127  (alagga-bhava) ;  DhA  i. 361  ("manasa). 
Neg.  alagga  unobstructed  (lit.  not  sticking  or  being 
stuck  to),  in  phrase  akaso  alaggo  asatto  apatitthito 
apalibuddho  Miln  388  and  elsewhere.  — Cp.  olagga. 


Laggapana  (nt.)  [fr.  laggapeti:  see  lagati]  making  stick, 
causing  obstruction  J  111.241. 

Laggita  [pp.  of  lag(g)ati]  stuck,  adhering ;  obstructed 
J  iv.ii.  Often  in  exegetical  style  in  sequence  l£kgga, 
laggita,  palibuddha,  e.  g.  Nd*  p.  188  (s.  v.  nissita), 
cp.  No.  107. 

Laghima  (langhima)  in  phrase  anima-Iaghim'  adikatj  is 
doubtful  in  reading  &  meaning  at  KhA  108  =  Vism  211 
(spelt  langh"  here). 

Lankara  see  lakara. 

Langl  {i)  [fr-  lag]  bolt,  bar,  barrier,  obstruction,  only 
metaphorically  with  ref.  to  avijja  M  1.142,  144;  Png2i ; 
Dhs  390  ;  VbhA  141. 

Langnla  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  langula  &  langula  ;  also  the  ordinary 
P.  forms  nangula  &  nanguttha,  to  lag]  the  tail  of  an 
animal  Mhvs  6,  6  (lajento  langulai)  ;  v.  1.  nangularj). 
See  also  nangula  &  (concerning  l>n)  landhati  (  =  nan- 
dhati) ;  nalafa  (for  lalata). 

Langhaka  [fr.  langh]  a  jumper,  tumbler,  acrobat  J  11.142  ; 
Miln  34,  191,  331.  f.  langhika  Vin  iv.285  (with  nataka 
&  sokajjhayika). 

Langhati  [langh,  a  by-form  of  lagh,  as  in  laghu  (see  lahu) 
light,  quick;  Idg.  *legh  &  *lengh,  with  meanings  of 
both  "quick"  &  "light"  (or  "little")  from  the 
movement  of  jumping.  Here  belong  Gr.  eXaj^c  little, 
iXaippus  quick;  Lat.  levis  (fr.  *leghuis),  Goth.  leihto  = 
E.  light ;  Ohg.  lungar  quick,  Ger.  ge-lingen  to  succeed. 
Further  Lat.  limen  threshold.  Perhaps  also  the  words 
for  "  lungs,"  viz.  Ger.  lunge,  E,  lights  etc.  — The  Dhtp 
33  defines  lagh  (langh)  by  "  gati-sosanesu  "]  1.  to  jump 
over  (ace),  step  over,  to  hop  J  111.272  ;  v. 472  (langha- 
mano  yati) ;  Miln  85.  —  2.  to  make  light  of,  disregard, 
neglect,  transgress  PvA  15;  VvA  138.  —  Cp,  abhi- 
langhati,  ullanghati.  —  Caus.  langheti  (  =  langhati)  to 
jump  over  (ace),  lit.  to  make  jump  J  v. 472  (vatig) ; 
Th  2,  384  (Merur)  langhetug  icchasi) ;  Miln  85.  —  ger. 
langhayitva  ThA  255,  &  (poet.)  langhayitvana  J  1.451 
(=attanar)  langhitva  C.)  ;  Mhvs  25,  44  (pakarag). — 
Cp.  olangheti. 

Langhana  (nt.)  [fr.  langh]  jumping,  hopping  J  1.430 
(°nataka  a  tumbler,  jumper,  acrobat,  cp.  Fick,  Soc. 
Gliederung  188,  190,  192);  11.363,  431.  Cp.  ullanghana, 
olanghana. 

Langhamaya  (pi.)  at  J  v. 408  is  problematic  We  shou'd 
expect  something  like  langhiyo  or  langhimaya  in 
meaning  "  deer,"  as  it  is  comb*  with  eneyyaka.  The 
C.  reads  langhimaya  ("  like  deer;  jumping"?)  &  expl' 
by  nana-ratana-maya  "  made  of  var.  jewels,"  rather 
strange. 

Langhapana  (nt.)  [fr.  Caus.  of  langh]  making  jump,  raisin«;, 

lifting  Vism  143  ("  launching  "). 

Langhi  (Langhi)  (f.)  [fr.  langh]  1.  a  kind  of  deer  (?)  J 
VI.537-  —  2.  doubtful  of  meaning  &  origin  in  phrase 
langhi-pitamaha  at  J  11.363  =  111.226:  "whose  grand- 
father was  a  deer,  or  a  juniper  "  (?) ;  used  in  disparag- 
ingly addressing  a  crane.  The  C.  to  J  11.363  expl' 
rather  strangely  as  follows :  langhi  yuccati  akase 
langhanato  megho  "  (a)  jumping  deer  is  called  the  cloud 
because  of  its  jumping  in  the  air,"  balaka  ca  nima 
megha-saddena  gabbhag  ganhanti  ti  "  the  cranes 
conceive  by  the  sound  of  the  cloud,"  meghasaddo  bali- 
kanag  pita  megho  pitimaho  ti  "  the  sound  of  the 
cloud  is  the  father  of  the  cranes  &  the  cloud  the  grand- 
father." 

Lajiati  [lajj;  Dhtp  72:  lajjane]  i.  to  be  ashamed  or 
abashed,  to  be  modest  or  bashful  PvA  48  (for  harayati)  ; 


Lajjana 


38 


Laddba 


ppr.  lajjamana  DhA  1.188;  PvA  88;  fut.  lajjissati 
J  111.218;  inf.  lajjitur)  DhA  1.72  ;  ger.  lajjitva  J  1.208; 
grd.  lajjitabba  (nt.)  what  one  has  to  be  ashamed  of, 
something  disgraceful  J  vi.sgs;  also  (an  odd  form) 
lajjitaya  (so  read :  see  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  203  against 
Trenckner,  Notes,  66")  Dh  316.  —  2.  to  have  regard  of 
(gen.),  to  consider,  to  respect  J  iv.128.  —  Caus.  II. 
lajjapeti  to  cause  to  be  ashamed,  to  put  to  the  blush 
J  111.137;  V.296. — pp.  lajjita. 

Lajjana  (nt.)  [fr.  lajj]  being  ashamed  Dhtp  72. 

Lajjanaka  (nt.)  [fr.  lajjana]  causing  shame,  humiliating, 
disgraceful  J  vi.395. 

Lajjava  (nt.)  [fr.  lajj]  shamefacedness  D  in. 2 13  (where 
Dhs  1340  has  maddava);  cp.  A  1.94. 

Lajja  (f.)  [fr.  lajj]  shame,  bashfulness,  modesty  M  1.414  ; 
DA  1.70;  DhA  11.90;  instr.  lajjaya  out  of  shame  PvA 
47,  112,  283.     Cp.  nillajja. 

Lajjapanika  (f.)  [fr.  lajjapeti,  Caus.  II.  of  lajjati]  making 
ashamed,  putting  to  shame,  disgracing  J  v.284  (kula° 
bringing  disgrace  on  the  clan). 

Lajjita  [pp.  of  lajjati]  ashamed,  bashful  Sdhp  35.  —  f. 
lajjita  as  n.  abstr.  "  bashfulness  "  DhA  1.188. 

Lajjitabbaka  (nt.)  [grd.  of  lajjati+ka]  something  to  be 
ashamed  of,  a  cause  of  shame,  disgrace  J  vi.395. 

Lajjin  (adj.)  [fr.  lajj]  feeling  shame,  modest,  afraid,  shy, 
conscientious  (expl""  as  "  one  who  has  hiri  &  ottappa  " 
by  C.  on  S  1.73:  see  K.S.  320  &  cp.  Dhs.  irstf  p.  i8) 
D  1.4,  63  ;  111.15  ;  S  1.73  ;  A  11.208  ;  iv.249  sq.  ;  Pug  57 ; 
Pv  11.9'*  (expl*  as  one  who  is  afraid  of  sin) ;  Miln  373  ; 
DA  1.70.  ■ — ^pl.  lajjino  Vin  1.44. 

-dhatnma  (lajji°)  modesty,  feeling  of  shame  Vin 
11.53  sq. 

Lacchati  fut.  of  labhati  (q.  v.). 

Lafica  [cp.  Sk.  lanca]  a  present,  a  bribe  J  1.201  ;  11.186; 
V.184;  VI. 408  (gahita,  bribes  received) ;  DhA  1.269  {°X) 
adasi) ;  iv.i  ;  PvA  209.  The  word  is  a  word  peculiar 
to  the  "  Jataka  "  literature. 

-khadaka  "  eater  of  bribes,"  one  who  feeds  on  bribes 
J  11.196;  V.7.  -ggaha  taking  of  bribes  J  v. 109.  -dan- 
daka  a  staff  given  as  a  present  (?)  J  vi.450  (v.  1.  volan- 
janaka°).  -dana  gift  of  bribes,  bribery  J  111.205. 
-vittaka  one  who  gets  rich  through  bribes  J  1.339. 

Lancaka:  Hardy  in  ed.  of  Netti,  p.  278  suggests  writing 
lafijaka  &  trsl''  "  making  known,"  "  exposition  "  (cp. 
Sk.  lanj  to  declare],  found  only  at  Miln  137  &  217  in 
cpd.  Sagyutta-nikaya-vara-lancaka  (trl°  Rh.  D.  : 
"most  excellent");  at  Miln  242  &  258  in  Majjhima- 
nikaya  vara"  ;  at  Miln  362  in  Ekuttara-nikaya-vara°  ; 
and  at  Nett  2  in  cpd.  nayalaiijaka.  Trenckner  (Miln 
ed.  p.  424)  translates  it  as  "  excellent  gift  (to  mankind)." 

Lancana  in  "  karapesi  tilaficanai}  "  at  Dpvs  20,  10  is  not 
clear.  We  may  have  to  correct  reading  into  laiichanai) 
or  lafichakat].  Oldenberg  in  his  trsl"  (p.  211)  leaves  the 
word  out  and  remarks :  "  Probably  this  passage  refers 
to  the  three  pupphaydna  mentioned  in  the  Mahavar)sa 
{33,  22,  where  Geiger  reads  "  pupphadhanani  tini," 
with  trsl"  "  3  stone  terraces  for  offerings  of  flowers  "), 
though  I  do  not  know  how  to  explain  or  to  correct  the 
word  used  here  (tilancanai))." 

Laficha  [fr.  lafich]  a  mark,  an  imprint  J  11.425 ;  VbhA  52. 

Laiichaka  [fr.  lailcha ;  doubtful]  one  who  makes  marks 
(expl'' by  Cy.  as"  lakkhana-karaka")  J  iv.364,  366  (ti°, 
so  expl""  by  Cy.  v.  1.  ni°).  See  nillanchaka  &  cp. 
laficana  (ti°). 


Lanchati  [lanch  Dhtp  54  "  lakkhane  "]  to  stamp,  to  seal 
DhA  1.35  (sasanar)  raja-muddaya  laiichanto). — Caus. 
laficheti. —  i.  to  seal  J  1.452  (spelt  lanjetva) ;  11.326; 
VI. 385  ;  SnA  577  (raja-muddikaya) ;  DhA  1.21.  —  2.  to 
mark,  paint,  smear  Vin  11.107  =  266  (mukhar)), — 
Caus.  II.  larichapeti  to  have  marked  or  sealed  (by 
king's  command)  Visra  38  ("  had  his  seal  put  to  this 
order  "  ;  trsl.).  —  Cp.  nillaccheti. 

Lanchana  (nt.)  [f  .  lanch]  i.  stamp,  mark,  imprint  VvA 
89  (sasa°,  of  the  moon);  Davs  11.23  (pada°).  —  2.  the 
seal  (of  a  letter  or  edict)  SnA  172.  —  Cp.  lancana. 

Lanchita  [pp.  of  laficheti]  sealed  J  1.227  (pihita-lanchita 
va  loha-catiyo). 

Lanjaka  [see  laiicaka]  in  dipa°  stands  as  equivalent  of 

dipavagsa   thus   "story  of   the  island"    Dpvs    18,  2. 

Oldenberg    (trsl''    p.    204)    translates    "  the    island  of 
Lanhd." 

Lanjeti  see  lafichati  and  valaiijeti. 

La(nkika  (f.)  [Dimin.  fr.  latvaka ;  dial]  the  Indian  quail, 
Perdix  chinensis  D  1.91  ;  M  1.449  (1.  sakunika) ;  J  111.44, 
174  sq.  (quoted  at  SnA  358  &  DhA  1.55);  v. 121  ;  Miln 
202  ;  DA  1.257.  —  Cp.  Cunningham,  Bharhut  Tope,  p.  58. 

Latthaka  (adj.)  [Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  compares  Sk.  lataha, 
ladaha,  dialectical]  beautiful,  auspicious,  lovely  J  ui.464, 
493  ;  IV.I,  477;  DA  1.284. 

Latthi  (f)  [Sk.  ya§ti.  with  1  for  y  ;  also  in  Prk.  see  Pischel, 
Prk.  Gr.  §  255  &  cp.  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  46'.  The  doublet 
yatthi  also  in  Pali]  i.  a  staff,  stick  D  1.105  (patoda° 
goad),  126  (id.);  VvA  64  (id.);  J  iv.310  (latthi  hata  = 
latthiya  hata  C.);  v.280  ;  Miln  27.  —  2.  stick  of  sugar 
cane  (ucchu°)  PvA  257.  —  3.  sprout  of  a  plant,  offshoot 
J  III. 161  (in  simile) ;  usually  -°,  asin  anga°  sprout  ThA 
226  ;  dalika°  of  the  d.  creeper  Th  2,  297  ;  beluva"  of  the 
Vilva  tree  KhA  118;  sala°  of  the  Sal  tree  A  11.200. 
Found  also  in  names  of  places,  as  Latthivana  (J  1.83 
etc.). 

-madhu(ka)  "cane-honey,"  i.  e.  liquorice  J  iv,537; 
DhA  IV. 171  ("ka). 

Latthika  (f.)=latthi,  only  in  Npl.  as  -°  (cp.  latthi  3),  e.  g. 
Amba°  the  grove  of  mango  sprouts  DA  1.41. 

Lan4a(nt.)  [cp.Sk.landa  (dial.).  The  Dhtm  under  No.  155 
gives  a  root  la4  in  meaning  "  jigucchana,"  i.  e.  disgust] 
excrement,  dung  of  animals,  dirt ;  mostly  used  with  ref. 
to  elephants  (hatthi"),  e.  g.  at  J  11. 19;  DhA  1.163,  192  ; 
IV. 1 56  (here  also  as  assa°  horse  dung.)     Cp.  landika. 

LaQ^ika  (f.)  [fr.  landa],  only  in  aja°  goat's  dirt,  pellet  of 
goat's  dung  J  1.419;  PvA  283. 

Lata  (f .)  [cp.  Sk.  lata,  connected  with  Lat.  lentus  flexible ; 
Ohg.  lindi  soft,  E.  lithe ;  also  Ohg.  lintea  lime  tree  ;  Gr. 
iXart)  fir  tree]  1.  a  slender  tree,  a  creeping  plant, 
creeper  A  1.202  (maluva°) ;  Vv  35'  (  =  valli  VvA  162); 
47*  (kosataki  1.);  J  1.464  (rukkha",  here  perhaps  better 
"  branch  ") ;  DhA  1.392  ("pasadhana  :  see  under  maha°) ; 
Miln  253,  351  ;  VvA  12  (kappa") ;  PvA  51,  12 1  ;  Vism 
183  (where  the  foil,  kinds  are  given  :  labu,  kumbhaodi, 
saraa,  kalavalli,  putilata).  — naga°  the  iron  wood  tree  : 
see  under  naga  ;  puti°  a  sort  of  creeper  (q.  v.).  On 
lata  in  similes  see  J.P.T.S.  1907,  130.  —  2.  (fig.)  an 
epithet  of  taijha  (greed),  as  much  as  it  strangles  its 
victim  Dhs  1059,  1 136;  Nett  24,  121.  —  3.  (fig.)  streak, 
flash,  in  vijjul-lata  flash  of  lightning  J  1.103. 

-kanuna    creeper-work    (comb''    with    mala-kamma) 
Vin  II. 117,  152. 

Laddha  [pp.  of  labhati]  (having)  obtained,  taken,  received 
Sn  106,  239;  J  v. 1 71  ;  Mhvs  5,  133  (kinci  laddhag);  10, 
37  (kanna  laddha) ;  PvA  5.  — laddhatvatj  at  J  iv.406. 
is  to  be  corrected  to  uddhatva.  —  Cp.  upa°,  pa°. 


Laddha 


39 


Lambat 


aor 


;  laddbana  ger.  of  labhaii 


•adhippaya  one  who  obtains  his  wishes  Nd'  542. 
-assasa  getting  one's  breath  again,  coming  to  (out  of  a 
swoon)  J  IV.  126.  -upasampada  one  who  has  obtained 
ordination  PvA  54.  -jaya  victorious  Mhvs  25,  98. 
-jivika  revived  PvA  40.  -nama  so-called  ThA  292 
(puthulorao  laddhanamo  maccho) ;  PvA  33  (yamaloka 
1-n.  petaloka),  52  (niraya  1-n.  naraka),  57  (kuiijara  1-n. 
hatthi),  107  (sucika  jighaccha),  119  (Purindada  = 
Sakka),  143  (Himavanto  =  pabbata-raja).  etc. 

Laddhi  is  ger.  and  3""  sg. 
(q.  v.). 

Laddhi  (f.)  [fr.  labh]  religious  belief,  view,  theory,  esp. 
heretical  view ;  a  later  term  for  the  earlier  di^hi  (cp. 
Kvu  trsl.  introd.  p.  47)  J  1.142  (Devadattassa),  425: 
111.487;  v. 411;  Davs  11.86  (duUaddhi  wrong  view); 
DA  I.I  17  ;  PvA  254  ;  Sdhp  65.     Cp.  upa°. 

Laddhika  (-°)  [fr.  laddhi]  having  a  (wrong)  view  or  belief, 
schismatic  J  1.373  (evag°);  Dpvs  vii.35  (puthu°). 

Landhati  see  nandhati  &  pilandhana.  Concerning  l>n 
cp.  langula. 

littpA  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  lap:  see  lapati]  talkative,  talking, 
prattling ;  a  talker,  tattler,  prattler,  chatterer  A  11.26  ; 
Th  I,  959=It  112;  Vism  26  (doubled;  lapa-lapa)  = 
Nd'  226  (as  lapaka-lapaka). 

Lapaka  [fr.  lap]  one  who  mutters,  a  droner  out  (of  holy 
words  for  pay)  D  1,8  (cp.  Dial.  1.15) ;  A  iii.i  11  ;  J  111.349  ; 
Miln  228;  DA  1.91. 

Lapati  [lap,  cp.  Russ.  lepet  talk,  Cymr.  lief  voice.  The 
Dhtp  188  &  599  defines  lap  with  "  vacana  "]  to  talk, 
prattle,  mutter  Sn  776;  It  122  ;  Pv  1.8';  11.6'.  —  Cp. 
ullapati,  palapati,  samuUapati.  —  Caus.  lapeti  (and 
lapeti,  metri  causA)  to  talk  to,  to  accost,  beg  S  1.31  (here 
meaning  "  declare  ") ;  Sn  929  (janag  na  lapayeyya=na 
lapayeyya  lapanai]  pajaheyya  Nd'  389) ;  DhA  11. 157.  — 
Infin.  lapetaye  (only  in  Gatha  language  cp.  Geiger. 
P.Gr.  §  204)  Ud  21.  —  pp.  lapita.  —  Caus.  II.  lapapeti 
DhA  11.157. 

Lapana  (nt.)  &  Upana  (f.)  I.  talking,  muttering;  esp. 
prattling  or  uttering  indistinct  words  fo)  the  sake  of 
begging,  patter  D  1.8;  A  11.26;  111.430  ;  Nd^  389;  Nett 
94  ;  Miln  383.  As  f.  lapana  at  Vbh  352  ;  Vism  23  &  27 
(def.);  VbhA  482.  —  2.  the  mouth,  in  cpd.  lapana-ja 
"  mouth  bom,"  i.  e.  tooth  J  vi.218  (  =  mukhaja  C).  — 
Cp.  alapana  alapanata,  ullapana. 

Lapapana  (nt.)  [fr.  Caus.  II.  lapapeti  of  lap]  causing  to 
speak,  speaking  ThA  78. 

Lapita  [pp.  of  lapati]  talked,  uttered,  muttered  It  98. 

Lapila  see  lambila. 

Labuja  [cp.  Sk.  labuja]  the  bread-fruit  tree,  Artocarpus 
lacucha  or  incisa  D  1,53;  J  iv.363  ;  v. 6,  417;  PvA  153 
(sa°,  read  as  sala|a°,  like  Vv  35',  expH  at  VvA  162). 

Labbhamanatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  ppr.  med.  of  labhati]  the 
fact  of  being  taken  PvA  56. 

Labbha  (indecl.)  [best  to  be  taken,  with  Pischel,  Prk.  Gr. 
§  465,  as  an  old  Opt.  3""  sg.,  like  sakka  which  corre- 
sponds to  Vedic  Sakyat.  Thus  labbha=  *labhyat,  as  in 
Magadhl]  allowable,  possible  (with  inf.);  usually  jieg. 
(thus  =  Prohibitive  I)  Sn  393  na  1.  phassetuQ ;  SnA 
p.  376  expl»  by  "sakka"),  590;  Pv  11.6";  J  1.64  (na  | 
1.  taya  pabbajitur)).  145  (id.),  PvA  96  (  =  laddhur) 
sakka).  I 

Labha  (-°)  (adj.)  [a  base-formation  fr.  labh]  receiving,  to  be  ' 
received,  to  get ;  only  in  dul°  hard  to  get  Sn  75  ;  S  i.ioi  ; 
J  1.307;  Pug  26;  Miln  16;  Sdhp  17,  27;  and  su°  easy  to 
obtain  Pv  11. 3". 


Labhati  [later  Vedic  labh  for  older  rabh,  cp.  rabhate, 
rabha,    rabhasa.     Related    are    Or.    Xo^/Sdvw    to    get, 
Xd^vpov    booty;    Lat.   rabies=E.    rabies;    Lith.    lobis 
wealth.  — The  Dhtp  (204)  simply  defines  as  "  labhe." 
On  the  Prk.  forms  see  Pischel,  Prk.  Gr.  §  484.  —  See  also 
rabhasa]  i.  (the  very  freq.  &  ordinary  meaning)  to  get,  to 
receive,  obtain,  acquire.  —  2.  (fig.)  to  obtain  permis- 
sion, to  receive  an  opportunity,  etc.,  as  "  pabbajitur) 
sace  lacchami  "  if  I  am  allowed  to  receive  the  pabbajja 
Mhvs  18,  5;  or  "  labhamano  niccam  pi  khaditu-kamo 
'mhi  "  if  I  get  the  chance  I  should  always  like  to  eat 
J  1.478;  and  passim  (cp.  Pass,  labbhati  below).    The 
paradigma  of  labhati  shows  a  great  variety  of  forms 
owing  to  its  frequent  occurrence  (cp.  E.  "  get  ").     We 
have  selected  the   most  interesting  ones.     Pres.  Ind. 
labhati  rare  (late,  e.  g.  Vism  136) ;  usually  med  labhate 
Th   I,  35;  Sn  185,   439;   i^'  sg.  labhe  Pv  1.6*;  2»*  sg. 
labhase  J  11.220;  3^*  pi.  labhare  S  i.iio.  —  ppr.  med. 
labhamana  S  1.122   (otarai)  a°,  cp.  iv.178;  M  1.334); 
also  in  Pass,  sense  "getting  taken"  PvA  71.  —  Opt. 
I       3"*  .sg.  labhe  Sn  458,  &  (med.)  labhetha  Sn  45,  46,  217; 
Pv  II. 9' ;  also  (usual  form)  labheyya  PvA  115.     2^^  sg. 
med.  labhetho  (  =  Sk.  °thah)  Sn  833. — Imper.  2'«»  sg. 
t       labha  It  77 ;  3'"'  labhatu  PvA  112;  med.  2**  sg.  labhassu 
I       Th  2,  432  ;  3^^  sg.  labhatai)  D  11. 150  ;  i"  pi.  (as  Horta- 
I       tive)labhaiiiase  Pvi.5'  (=labhama  PvA  2  7) ;  &  labh  am - 
i       hase  Pv  111.2^. — Put.  3"*  sg.  lacchasi  (Sk.  lapsyatij 
j       S  1.114;  Pv  11.4';  III. 3';  J  11.60  (Maro  otarar)  1.).  258; 
j       Miln  126;  DhA  1.29;  SnA  405;  ThA  69  (Ap.);  i«  sg. 
lacchami  M  11.71  ;  2»*  sg.  lacchasi  Vv  83';  Pv  iv.i°*; 
j       i"  pi.  lacchama  J  1.54  ;  iv.292  ;  &  lacchamase  (med.) 
,       Vv  32».     Also   (the  Com.   form)  labhissati  FVA   190; 
VvA   136. — Cond.  i^  pi.  alabhissama  J  in.35  ;  med. 
3"*  sg.  alabhissatha  D  11.63.  —  Pret.  {&  aor.)  (a)  3"^  sg. 
alattha  D  1.176  (alattha  pabbajjai));  M  11.49 ;  S  iv.302  ; 
J  IV.310;  VvA  66,  69;   i^'  sg.  alatthag  D  11.268;  Vv 
81**;  Th  I,   747;  DhA  111.313  :  2-1  sg.  alattha  S  1.114; 
i="  pi.  alatthiamha  M  11.63;   3"^  p'-  alatthutj  D  11.274, 
&  alatthaosu   S   1.48.  —  (b)   (Prohib.)  ma  laddha  (3"" 
sg.  med.)  shall  not  receive  (Sk.  alabdha)  J  111.138. — 
(c)  labhiSn  994  ;  i^'  sg.  labhig  Th  i,  2i8  ;  2,  78  ;  J  11. 154  ; 
VvA  68  ;  &  alabhitthag  Th  1 ,  217;   3"'  sg.  alabhittha 
Pv  1.7'   (spelt  bbh) ;    i"  pi.  labhimha  (for  labhimha) 
D  II. 147.  —  Inf.  laddhui)  J  11.352;  DhA  111.117;  PvA 
96. — Ger.  laddha  (poet.)  Sn  306,  388,  766,  924;  lad- 
dhana   (poet.)  Sn   67   (=laddha,   labhitva  Nd>  546); 
It  65  ;  and  (ord.)  labhitva  J  1.150  ;  111.332  ;  FVA  95.  — 
I       Grd.   (a):   labbhiya  (only  neg.  alabbhiya  what  cannot 
be  got)   J  IV.86  ;  Pv  11.6*;  labbhaneyya  (a")  (in  Com. 
j       style  as  expl*  of  labbhaniya)  J  iv.86  (°thana) ;  PvA  65 
(°vatthu),    96    (id.);    and   labbhaniya    (as    a'-fthSnani 
I       impossible  things)  A  111.54  sq.  (five  such  items),  60  sq. 
(id.);  J  iv.59.  —  (b)  :  laddhabba  J  in. 332  ;  PvA  112, 
252.  —  (c):  laddheyya  Pv  iv.3*'.  —  Caus.  labbheti  (for 
•labheti,  a  difi.  form"  fr.  Sk.  lambhayati,  which  is  found 
in  P.  pa-lambheti)  to  make  someone  get,  to  procure,  in 
i^  sg.  aor.  alabbhesi  Vin   iv.5=J  1.193;  DhA  111.213 
(v.   1.  labh°);   and  in  pres.   3"*  sg.  labbheti   J  111.353 
(  =  adhigameti  C). — Pass,  labbhati   (fig.)  to   be  per- 
mitted, to  be  possible  or  proper  ;  (or  simply  :)  it  is  to  be 
Mhvs    30,    43;    KhA    192    (vattur)),    207    (id.). — pp. 
laddha.  —  Cp.  upa°,  pati°,  ri°. 

Labhana  (nt.)  [fr.  labh]  taking,  receiving,  gift,  acquisition 
DhA  in.271  (°bhava);  PvA  73  (°tthana),  121  (id). 

Lamba  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  lamb]  hanging  down,  drooping, 
pendulous  S  iv.341,  342  (°culaka  bhata  hirelings  with 
large  or  drooping  top-knots);  J  11. 185  ("tthana  with 
hanging  breasts);  111.265  (°cula-vihangama) ;  Davs 
11.61.  — alamba  not  drooping,  thick,  short  J  v.302  ; 
VI. 3  ("tthaniyo).  — Cp.  a°,  Yi°  &  alambana. 

Lambati  [lamb;  cp.  Lat.  limbus  "  limb,"  which  may  be 
also  in  E.  limp,  lit.  "banging  down." — The  Dhtp 
defines  the  root  as  "  ramba  lamba  avasar)sane  "  (No.  199), 


Lambita 


40 


Lapin 


as  does  Dhtm  284]  to  hang  down,  to  droop,  fall  Mhvs 
32,  70  (lagg^ni  lambigsu),  71  (akase  lambamanani). — 
Fut.  lambahiti  (poet.)  J  v,302  (=lambissati).  —  Caus. 
lambeti  to  cause  to  hang  up  or  to  be  suspended,  to  hang 
up  Mhvs  34,  48.  — Caus.  II.  lambapeti  id.  Mhvs  21,  15. 
—  pp.  lambite.  —  Cp.  abhi°,  pa°,  vi°. 

Lambita  [pp.  of  lambeti]  hanging  down,  suspended  Mhvs 
27.  38;  30.  67- 

Lambin  (adj.)  [fr.  lamb]  hanging  down,  able  to  hang  or 
bend  down  (with  ref.  to  the  membrum  virile)  Vin  :ii.35 
("  tassa  bhikkhussa  angajatag  dighar)  hoti  lambati. 
tasma  Iambi  ti  vutto  "  Sam.  Pas.  1.278). 

Lambila  (adj.)  [reading  not  quite  certain,  cp,  ambila] 
sour,  acrid,  astringent  (of  taste)  Nd'  240;  Nd^  540; 
Dhs  629;  DhsA  320  (reads  lapila,  v.  1.  lampila ;  expl* 
as  "  badara-salava-kapiftha-salav'  adi ") ;  Miln  56  (reads 
ambila). 

Lambheti  [Caus.  of  labh,  for  which  usually  labbheti  (q.  v. 
under  labhati).  The  Sk.  form  is  lambhayati.  —  The 
Dhtm.  (840)  puts  it  down  as  a  special  root,  although 
it  occurs  only  in  cpd.  pa°  in  this  special  meaning: 
"  labhi  vaiicane  "]  see  palambheti  (to  deceive,  dupe). 
It  may  be  possible  that  reading  lampetva  at  A  11.77 
(v.  1.  lambitva)  is  to  be  corrected  to  lambhetva  (comb* 
with  hapetva).  — alambhavissa  at  S  v.  146  is  to  be  read 
alam  abhavissa,  as  at  J  11.59. 

Laya  [cp.  Sk.  laya  :  see  liyati]  i.  a  brief  measure  of  time, 
usually  comb*  with  other  expressions  denoting  a  short 
moment,  esp.  frequent  as  khana  laya  muhutta  Vin  1.12  ; 
111.92;  A  IV. 137;  cp.  Dpvs  1. 16  (khane  khane  Jaye  i 
Buddho  sabbalokar)  avekkhati).  —  Vism  136  (isakam 
pi  layar)  yantag  pagganheth'  eva  manasag).  —  2.  time 
in  music,  equal  time,  rhythm  Davs  iv.50  ;  VvA  183 
(dvadasannag  laya-bhedanag  vasena  pabheda). 

Lalati  [lal,  onomat;.  cp.  Lat.  lallo  "lull";  Sk.  lalalla ; 
Gc.  XoAoc  talkative;  \a\ito  talk;  Ger.  lallen.  The 
Dhtp  distinguishes  2  roots :  lal  (=iccha)  &  la]  (=  vilasa 
&  upaseva)]  to  dally,  sport,  sing  J  11.121  (ppr.  laja- 
mana) ;  VvA  41  (lalanti ;  with  kijati),  57  (id.).  ^ — Caus. 
laleti  J  1.362  (ppr.  lalenta) ;  Vism  365  ;  cp.  upa°  ■ —  pp. 
lajita :  see  pa°. 

Lalatasee  nalata  (cp.  langula). 

Lava  [fr.  In]  a  small  particle,  a  drop  VvA  253  (lavanka  a 
small  mark) ;  Sdhp  105  (°odaka). 

Lavaka  [fr.  Ifi]  a  cutter,  reaper  SnA  148  (v.  1.  lavaka). 
See  lavaka. 

Lavava  (nt.)  [cp.  late  Vedic  lava^ia,  cp.  Zimmer,  A  Hind. 
Leben  54]  salt,  lotion  Miln   112;  Sdhp  158.     See  lona. 

Lavana  (nt.)  [fr.  lunati]  cutting,  reaping  Miln  360. 

Lavapeti  Caus.  of  lunati  (q.  v.). 

Lasagata  (hattha)  at  A  11. 165  is  to  be  read  (with  v.  1.)  as 
lepagata,  i.  e.  sticky  (opp.  suddha). 

Lasati  [represents  las  to  gleam,  shine  ;  sport,  play  ;  as  well 
as  laf  to  desire,  long  for.  Cp.  Lat.  lascivus  ;  Gr.  XiXaio- 
ftai;  Goth.  lustus=E.,  Ger.  lust  etc.  —  The  Dhtp 
324  defs.  las  as  "  kanti  "]  to  desire,  long  ;  to  dance,  play, 
sport ;  to  shine  ;  to  sound  forth.  See  lasana,  abhilSsa. 
upalaseti,  alasa,  vilasa.  —  Caus.  laseti  to  sport,  to  amuse 
(oneself)  Vin  11.10  (with  vadeti,  gayati,  naccati). 

LasikS  (£.)  [cp.  Sk.  •lasiVa]  the  fluid  which  lubricates  the 
joints,  synovic  fluid  Vin  1.202  ;  D  11.293  )  M  111.90  ; 
S  iv.iii  ;  Sn  196;  J  1. 146;  Miln  382.  In  detail  at  Vism 
264,  362  ;  VbhA  247. 

LasI  (f.)  [etym.  ?]  brains  J  1.493  (=matthalunga  C.)  = 
DhA  1.145. 


Lasmia  &  Lasana  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  lacuna]  garlic  Vin  11. 140  ; 
IV.258  ;  J  1.474  ;  Vv  43»  ;  VvA  186. 

Lahati  to  lick :  see  uUahaka,  palahati,  &  lehati. 

Laha  (adj.)  [Sk.  laghu  &  raghu  :  see  etym.  under  langhati] 
light,  quicfcA  i.io,  45.  — lahug  karoti  to  make  light,  to 
be  frivolous  J  n.451. — nt.  lahug  (adv.)  quickly  Pv 
IV.  i";  Dpvs  1.53;  Mhvs  4,  17.  —  Usually  as  lahuka 
(q.v.). 

-citta  light-minded  S  1.20 1  ;  J  111.73.  -tthana  light- 
ness of  body,  bodily  vigour,  good  health  M  1.437,  473  ; 
D  1.204;  Ud  15;  Miln  14.  [Cp.  BSk.  laghutthanata 
Divy  1 56.]  -parivatta  quickly  or  easily  changing  VbhA 
408. 

Lahnka  (adj.)  [lahu  +  ka]  i.  light  (opp.  garuka);  trifling 
Vin  1.49;  A  11.48  (apatti);  iv.137  (jivitag  parittag  1.); 
Miln  344  (apatti).  —  2.  light,  buoyant  Th  i,  104  (kayo); 
Dhs  648  ;  Miln  105  ;  PvA  280.  atilahukag  (adv.)  too 
soon  Vin  11. 215.  —  3  (as  tt.  in  grammar)  light  (of 
letters  or  syllables),  opp.  garuka  DA  1.177  (with  ref.  to 
the  10  fold  vyaiijana  of  the  dhamma). 

Labuta  (f.)  [fr.  lahu]  lightness,  buoyancy  Dhs  42,  322,  585  ; 
Vism  448. 

Lahnsa  (adj.)  [fr.  lahu]  easily  offended,  touchy  D  1.90  ; 
expl*  by  DA  1.256  as  follows :  "  lahusa  ti  lahuka, 
appaken'  eva  tussanti  va  russanti  va  udaka-pitthe 
labukatahag  viya  appakena  pi  uppilavanti."  Cp. 
rabhasa. 

Lahuso(adv.)[orig.  abl.oflahu]  quickly  A  iv. 247  (sabba°); 
Vism  238. 

Lakha  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  laksa]  lac ;  lac-dye ;  enum*  with  other 
colourings  at  Ml.  127=  S  11.  loi  =  A  ill. 230.  —  SnA  577  ; 
Vism  261  (as  colour  of  blood). 

-acariya  expert  in  lac-dyeing  SnA  577.  -gulaka  a 
ball  of  lac  SnA  80.  -golaka  id.  SnA  577.  -tamba 
copper  coloured  with  lac  Th  2,  440  (  =  lakha-rasa- 
rattehi  viya  tambehi  lomehi  samannagata  ThA  270). 
-rasa  essence  of  lac,  used  for  dyeing ;  lac-colouring 
J  v. 215  (°ratta-succhavi) ;  vi.269  (id.);  KhA  62,  63; 
ThA  270. 

Laja  &  Laja  (f.)  [cp.  Vedic  laja  :  Zimmer,  AUind.  Leben 
269]  I.  fried  grain,  parched  corn:  occurring  only  in 
comb"  madhu-laja  fried  grain  with  honey,  sweet  corn 
J  III. 538  ;  IV. 214,  281.  —  2.  the  flower  of  Dalbergia 
arborea,  used  for  scattering  in  bunches  (with  other 
flowers  making  5  kinds  or  colours)  as  a  sign  of  welcome 
&  greeting,  usually  in  phrase  laja-paiicainani  pupphani 
("a  cluster  of  flowers  with  laja  as  the  fifth")  DhA 
I.I  12  ;  VvA  31  ;  J  1.55  ("paflcamakani  p.) ;  cp.  J  11.240 
(vippakinna-laja-kusuma-mandita-tala) ;  vi.42  (vippa- 
kiijna-laja-kusuma-vasa-dhup'  andhakara) ;  DhA  1.140 
(vippakinna-valikag  paiicavanna-kusuma-laja-pumia- 
ghaja-patimaijdita). 

Lajeti  [fr.  laja]  to  fry  or  have  fried  J  vi.341  (v.  1.  lafic", 
lafij"),  385  (laiichetva;  v.  1.  laflci",  lafije"). 

Lapa^  [fr.  lap]  talk  :  see  cpds.  abhi°,  pa°,  sal". 

Lapa'  [also  fr.  lap,  lit.  "  talker,"  cp.  similar  semantics  of 
E.  quail >Ger.  quaken,  quicken;  E.  quack.  The  P. 
form  rests  on  pop.  etym.,  as  in  Sk.  we  find  correspond- 
ing name  as  laba]  a  sort  of  quail,  Perdix  chinensis 
S  V.I 46=  J  11.59.  As  lapaka-sakuna  also  at  J  11.59. 
—  Another  name  for  quail  is  vaftaka. 

Lapana(nt.)  [fr.  lapeti,  Caus.  of  lap]  muttering,  utterance, 
speech  It  98  ;  A  1.165  (lapita").  Perhaps  also  to  be  read 
at  Th  2,  73.  —  Cp.  upa°. 

Lapin  (-°)  (adj.)  [fr.  lap]  talking  (silly)  S  in. 143  (bala°). 


Lapu 


41 


Likha 


Lapa  (f.)  [short  for  alapu  or  alabu,  cp.  Geiger.  P.Gr.  §  39*] 
a  kind  of  cucumber  J  1.336,  341.     See  also  labuka. 
-lata  the  cucumber  creeper  or  plant  Miln  374. 

Lapeti :  see  lapati  &  cp.  upalapeti. 

Labn  (f . )  &  Labaka=  lapu  (alabu )  gourd  or  pumpkin,  often 
used  as  receptacle  J  1.158  (°ka),  41 1  ("kumbhanda  vessel 
made  of  the  gourd);  v. 37  (°ka).  155  (addWa-labu-sama   [ 
thana);    DhA    11.59    (°ka) ;    SnA    227    (labumhi   catu- 
madhurar)  puretukamo).  I 

-ka^ha  a  gourd  as  receptacle  Vism  255,  359  ;  VbhA 
63- 

Labha  [fr.  labh]  receiving,  getting,  acquisition,  gain, 
possession;  pi.  possessions  D  1.8;  11.58,  61;  M  1.508 
(arogya-parama  labha);  111.39;  A  1.74;  iv.157  sq.,  160 
(labhena  abhibhuto  pariyadinnacitto  Devadatto,  cp. 
J  1.185  sq.);  Sn  31,  438,  828,  854,  1014,  1046  (cp.  Nd- 
548) ;  It  67  (vitta°) ;  J  111.516  (yasa°,  dhana") ;  Vism  93, 
136  (°r|  labhati),  150  (°assa  bhagin  getting  riches); 
PvA  113,  280.  —  A  dat.  sg.  labha  (for  labhaya)  is  used 
adverbially  with  foil,  genitive  in  meaning  of  "  for 
my  (our)  gain,"  "it  is  profitable."  "good  for  me 
that "  etc. ;  e.  g.  Miln  1 7  (labha  no  tata.  suladdhar)  no 
tata),  232  (labha  vata  tasag  devatanag)  ;  A  111.313 
(labha  vata  me  suladdhai]  vata  me),  expH  at  Vism  223  ; 
DhA  1.98  (labha  vata  me,  elliptically) ;  11.95  ('■  vata  no 
ye  mayag  .  .  .  upatthahimha). 

-agga  highest  gain  J  in .  1 2  5  ;  Miln  2 1 .  -asa  desire  for 
gain  A  1.86.  -katnya  (abl.  out  of  desire  for  gain  Sn  854, 
929  (  =  labha-hetu  Nd'  389).  -tanha  craving  for  pos- 
session DhA  IV. 38.  -macchariya  selfishness  in  acquisi- 
tions A  III. 273  ;  D  III. 234;  Pug  19,  23;  Dhs  1122. 
-mada  pride  of  gain  VbhA  466.  -sakkara  gain  and 
honour,  usually  comb''  with  °siloka  fame ;  the  two  first 
K  e.  g.  at  Vin  n.196  ;  It  73  ;  J  1.185,  186  ;  v. 75  ;  the  three 
H  comb"*  e.  g.  at  M  1.192  ;  S  n.227,  237  ;  A  11.73  ;  111.343 
sq.,  377  ;  Vbh  352  sq.  ;  labha-siloka  alone  at  Vism  67. 

Labhaka  (adj.  nt.)  [fr.  labha]  one  who  receives  ;  reception  ; 
a°  not  getting,  non-receiving  Vin  111.77. 

Labha  see  under  labha. 

Labhin  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  labha]  receiving,  getting,  having 
possessed  of  M  111.39  (as  n.  "a  receiver,  recipient") 
A  1.24;  11.85;  IV. 400 ;  Pug  51;  Vbh  332  (nikama°) 
J  1. 140.  —  2.  one  who  has  intuition  either  in  reasoning 
(or  logical  argument)  or  psychically,  and  who  may 
therefore  take  certain  premises  for  granted  (opp. 
alabhin  a  denier)  DA  i.io6,  120. 

Lamaka  (adj.)  [seems  to  be  a  specific  Pali  word.  It  is 
essentially  a  C.  word  &  probably  of  dialectical  origin. 
Has  it  anything  to  do  with  omaka  ?]  insignificant,  poor, 
inferior,  bad,  sinful.  The  usual  syn.  is  papa.  —  Vin 
11.76;  Vism  268  (  =  papaka);  DhsA  45;  KhA  243 
(  =  khudda) ;  PugA  229  (nica  lamaka  =  onata) ;  KhA  150 
("desana,  cp.  ukkajtha) ;  DhA  11.77  :  '^.44  (°bhava) ; 
VvA  116;  PvA  15  (for  papa);  103  (  =  papaka),  125 
(°purisa  =  kapurisa) ;  Sdhp  28,  253,  426,  526  (opp. 
ukkattha).  — ■  f.  lamika  J  1.285 ;  11.346  (for  itara) ; 
DhA  11.61  (papika  1.  ditthi).  — Cp.  Dhs.  trsl.^  §  1025. 

Lamajjaka  (lamaiijaka)  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  lamajjaka]  the  root 
of  Andropogon  muricatus  Vv  43*  (v.  1.  "anc");  VvA 
186,  (°a6j°)  187. 

Layaka  (-°)  [fr.  layati]  cutter,  reaper  A  111.365  =  8  in. 155 
(read  babbaja"). 

Layati  [for  'lavati,  Ifi,  for  which  the  ordinary  form  is 
lunati  (q.  v.),  y  for  v  as  freq.  in  Pali :  see  Geiger.  P.Gr. 
§  46*.  — •  The  Dhtp.  has  a  root  la  in  meaning  "  adana  " 
(No.  370)]  to  cut  (off),  mow,  reap  ;  ger.  layitra  A  111.365  ; 
J  1.215  ;  III. 226  ;  Vin  in. 64  ;  Pv  1.8'  (=lavitva  PvA  40). 
—  pp.  layita. 


Layana  (nt.)  [fr.  layati]  cutting  J  v.45  (tii>a-layana  asi. 
sickle) ;  DhA  in. 285  (v.  1.  for  dayana). 

Layita  [pp.  of  layati,  layeti]  cut,  reaped  J  in.  130  (tinar) 
na  layita-pubbag) ;  Vism  419  (°tthana  place  where  one 
has  reaped). 

L&la  (adj.)  [fr.  lal,  see  lalati]  talking  without  sense,  silly, 
foolish  J  VI. 360,  417  (I).     Cp.  alala. 

Lalaka  [lala-i-  ka]  a  wag,  silly  person,  fool  J  1.205  ;  iv.2 10. 

Lalapati  &  Lalappati  [Intens.  of  lapati]  to  talk  much,  to 
talk  silly,  to  lament,  wail  Sn  580  ;  Pv  IV.5*  (  =  vilapati 
PvA  260);  J  III. 217;  Miln  148,  275;  Mhvs  32,  68. — 
pp.  lalappita. 

Lalappa  [fr.  lalappati]  talking  much,  excited  or  empty 
talk,  wailing  Vbh  100,  138  ;  Ps  1.38  ;  Nett  29  ;  VbhA  104 
(  =  punappunai)  lapanag). 

Lala(p)pana  (nt.)  &  °a  (f.)  =  lalappa,  together  with  lala(p)- 
pitatta  (nt.)  in  exegesis  of  parideva  at  Nd^  416;  Vbh 
100,  138  ;  VbhA  104;  DA  1.12 1. 

Lalappita  [pp.  of  lalappati]  i.  talking  much,  wailing  Miln 
148  (paridevita-l.-mukha).  —  2.  (nt.)  much  talk,  excited 
talk,  talking  J  vi.498. 

Lala  (f.)  [cp.  lajati]  saliva  J  1.61.  248  ;  vi.357  ;  Vism  259  ; 
DhA  1.307  (mukhato  lala  galati). 

La]ana  (nt.)  [fr.  lal]  swaying,  dalliance,  sport  DA  1. 197; 
Sdhp  387  ;  as  lajana  at  ThA  243. 

La)eti  see  Ia|ati. 

Lavaka  [fr.  lavati]  a  cutter,  reaper  Miln  33  (yava°) ;  Mhvs 
10,  31  ;  SnA  148  (v.  1.  BB.  for  lavaka). 

Lavati  &  Laveti  [the  latter  the  usual  form,  as  Caus.  of 
lunati.  lavati  is  the  simple  Pali  formation  fr.  Ifi. 
Another  Caus.  II.  is  lavapati  (q.  v.).  See  also  layati] 
to  cut,  to  mow  PvA  40  (lavitva),  Mhvs  10,  30  (lavayati). 

Lasa  [of  las]  sporting,  dancing  :  see  abhi°,  vi°. 

Lasika  (f.)  [fr.  las]  a  dancer,  Miln  331. 

Laseti  see  lasati. 

Likkha  (f.)  [*Sk.  liksa  egg  of  a  louse,  as  measure  equal  to 
8  trasarenu  (BR.). — Connected  with  Lat.  ricinus  a 
kind  of  vermin  (see  Walde.  Lat.  Wlb.  s.  v.)]  a  kind  of 
measure  VbhA  343  (36  rattareijus  equal  to  one  likkha, 
7  likkhas  equal  to  i  iika) ;  KhA  43  (°matta). 

Likhati  [likh;  Vedic  likhati,  also  rikh  in  Ved.  arikhati 
(R.V.  VI. 53,  7),  cp.  with  palatal  risati,  lisati.  Connected 
with  Gr.  iptiKU)  to  tear;  Lith.  rekti  to  cut  bread,  to 
plough;  Ohg.  riga=Ags.  raw=E.  row.  —  Dhtp  467 
simply  expl*  by  "  lekhane  "]  i.  to  scratch;  to  cut. 
carve;  write,  inscribe  M  1.127  (rupani);  J  11.372 
(suvaiina-patte) :  iv.257  (id.),  488,  489  (jati-hingula- 
kena) ;  DhA  1.182  ;  PvA  145  (namai)  likhi  wrote  his 
name).  — pannaij  1.  to  write  a  letter  J  n.174  ;  vi.369 
(panne  on  a  leaf).  —  2.  to  shave  (off),  plane  Vin  11.112 
(inf!  likhitur)). — pp.  likhita.  — Cp.  vi.°  — Caus.  I. 
lekheti  (q.  v.).  Caus.  II.  likhapeti  to  cause  to  be  cut  or 
carved  [cp.  BSk.  likhapayati  Divy  547]  Vin  ii.iio; 
SnA  577  ;  to  cause  to  be  written  Miln  42. 

Likhana  (nt.)  [cp.  late  Sk.  likhana  ;  fr.  likh]  scratching, 
cutting,  writing  J  v. 59  (a  golden  tablet  for  writing  on). 
Cp.  uUikhana. 

Likha  in  likha-panna  at   PvA   20   is   faulty   for  lekha° 

(lekha°)  letter,  cp.  lekha-pattra  letter  Malatim  172,  7. 


Likhita 


42 


Luthati 


Likhita  [pp.  of  likhati]  i.  carved,  cut,  worked  (in  ivory 
etc.),  in  cpd.  sankha°  brahmacariya  the  moral  life,  like 
a  polished  shell  D  1.63  ;  S  11. 219,  expl''  at  DA  1.181  as 
"likhita-sankha-sadisadhota-sankha-sappatibhaga."  — 
2.  written,  inscribed  J  IV.7  (likhitani  akkharani) ;  Miln 
42  (lekhal.).  —  3.  made  smooth,  shaved  J  vi.482  (capa). 
—  4.  marked,  proscribed,  made  an  outlaw  Vin  1.75.  — 
Cp.  ullikhita. 

Likhitaka  (adj.)  [likhita  +  qualifying  ending  ka]  one  who 
has  been  proscribed,  an  outlaw  Vin  1.75  (cora). 

Linga  (nt.)  [fr.  ling;  late  Vedic  &  (pre-eminently)  Class. 
Sk.  linga]  i.  characteristic,  sign,  attribute,  mark, 
feature  M  1.360  ;  S  v.278  ;  Sn  601  sq.  (=santhana  SnA 
464) ;  Vin  IV. 7  (two  :  hina  &  ukkatfha) ;  J  1.18  ;  iv.114 
(gihi°),  130;  Miln  133  (sasana°),  162  (dve  samanassa 
lingani),  405  (lingato  ca  nimittato  ca  etc.) ;  Vism  184  ; 
DhsA  64  (  =  santhana  Tika :  Expos.  86), — 2.  mark  of 
sex,  sexual  characteristic,  pudendum  (male  as  well  as 
female,  as  neither  m.  nor  f.)  Vin  111.35  (purisa°) ;  J  v.  197 
("santhana);  KhA  110  (itthi°) ;  SnA  48  (°sampatti),  51 
(id.),  300  (itthi°) ;  DhsA  321  sq.  (itthi°).  —  3.  (in  gram- 
mar) mark  of  sex,  (characteristic)  ending,  gender  SnA 
397-  "vipallasa  change  or  substitution  of  gender  PvA 
7.  33.  58.  87.  157- 

Lingala  [cp.  Sk.  lingalika  a  kind  of  mouse]  antelope  (?) 
Pgdp  10. 

Lingika  (adj.)  [fr.  linga]  having  or  being  a  characteristic 
Vism  210  (of  nama) ;  KhA  107  (id.). 

Lingeti  [Denom.  fr.  ling]  i.  to  embrace,  in  poet,  ger. 
lingiya  (as  if  fr.  lingati)  Th  2,  398  (=alirrgetva  ThA 
260).     See  a°.  —  2.  to  characterize:  see  ul°. 

Lipi  [fr.  lip;  late  Sk.  lipi]  the  alphabet;  a  letter  of  the 
alphabet ;  writing  Miln  79. 

Limpati  [lip,  cp.  repa  stain,  lepa  ointment,  stain  ;  Gr. 
XiTToc  grease,  fat,  XiTrnpdf  fat,  aXit^m  to  anoint ;  Lat. 
lippus ;  Lith.  limpii  to  stick,  Goth,  bi-leiban,  Ohg. 
biliban  to  stay  behind,  to  stay,  E.  leave  &  live,  Ger. 
leben.  The  Dhtp  (385)  simply  expl"  by  "  limpana  "] 
to  smear,  plaster,  stain  ;  usually  in  pass,  (or  med.)  sense 
"  to  get  soiled,  to  dirty  oneself  "  Th  2,  388  ;  PvA  215. 
Doubtful  in  Sn  passages,  where  both  limpati  &  lippati 
are  found  as  readings,  e.  g.  Sn  778  in  Text  lippati,  but 
Niddesa  reading  limpati  (Nd^  55);  Sn  811  lipp°,  Nd^ 
133  limp"  ;  Sn  1040,  1042  lipp°,  Nd^  549  limp.°  —  Pass. 
lippati  to  be  soiled  (by),  to  get  stained  (in  character) 
Sn  250,  547,  625,  778,  913,  1040  ;  cp.  Sn  71  (alippa- 
mana  ppr,), . —  pp.  litta:  see  ava°,  ul°,  vi.°  —  Cp.  also 
alimpeti,palimpeti,  vilimpati.  —  Caus.  I.lepeti  to  cause 
to  be  plastered  J  vi.432. . —  Caus.  II.  limpapeti  to  cause 
to  be  plastered  or  anointed  Mhvs  34,  42  (cetiyag  °ape- 
tvana). 

Limpana  (nt.)  [fr.  lip]  soiling,  smearing  Dhtp  385. 

Lisati  [cp.  dial,  Sk.  li^ate=  Vedic  riSate]  to  break  ofi,  tear 
off,  pull ;  only  at  Dhtp  444  exp\^  by  "  lesa." 

Lihati  [lih,  Sk.  ledhi  or  lidhe,  also  lihati.  Cp.  Lat,  lingo, 
Gr.  Xeixf;  Goth,  bilaigon,  Ags.  liccian  =  E.  lick,  Ger. 
lecken.  — -The  Dhtp  335  expl"  lih  by  "  assadane,"  i.  e. 
taste]  to  lick ;  pres.  lehati  J  11.44 :  ^or.  lehayigsu  PvA 
198  (v.  1.  for  palahigsu).  Cp.  parilehisai)  Vv  81"; 
VvA  316;  ger.  lehitva  DA  1.136  (sarirar)) ;  VvA  314.  — 
pp.  lilha  (?).     Cp.  leyya. 

LIna  [pp.  of  liyati]  clinging,  sticking  ;  slow,  sluggish  ;  shy, 
reserved,  dull,  A  1.3  ;  Vism  125.  Definitions  at  Vbh 
352.  373;  Dhs  1 156,  1236;  S  V.277,  279  (ati°).  Often 
comb''  with  uddhata  as  "  sluggish  or  shy  "  and  "  un- 
balanced," e.  g.  at  S  V.112;  Vism  136;  VbhA  310. 
alina  active,  open,  sincere  Sn  68  (°citta),  717  (id.); 
J  1.22  (v.  148  ;  "viriya  siha). 


LInata  (f.)  [abstr.  formation  fr.  lina  instead  of  liy°]  = 
liyana  Vism  469.  alinata  open-mindedness,  sincerity 
J  1.366  ;  SnA  122. 

Linatta  (nt.)  [abstr,  fr.  Una]  sluggishness,  shyness;  only 
in  phrase  cetaso  linattag  immobility  of  mind  S  v.64, 
103  ;  A  i.3  =  iv.32  ;  v. 145  sq. ;  Nett  86,  108  ;  VbhA  272 
(  =  cittassa  lin'  akara). 

Liyati  [U,  Vedic  liyati ;  *lci  to  stick  to  or  cleave :  see 
Walde,  Lat.  Wtb.  s.  v.  lino,  which  he  separates  in  mean- 
ing fr.  *lei  to  smear,  polish]  to  stick.  The  Dhtp  evi- 
dently favours  the  separation  when  interpreting  li  by 
"  silesana-dravlkarana,"  i.  e.  to  make  slip  or  run 
(Dhtp  441  ;  Dhtm  681)]  i.  to  stick,  adhere,  cling  to: 
see  cpds.  all",  0°,  ni°,  patisal".  - — 2.  to  melt,  slip:  see 
cpd.  pavi°  (to  dissolve).. —  pp.  Una. 

Liyana  (nt.)  [fr.  liyati]  sticking  to,  adhering,  resting 
Sdhp  190  (°tthana  resting-place). 

Liyana  (f.)  =  llyana;  cleaving  to,  sluggishness,  shyness 
Dhs  1156. 

Liyitatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  formation  after  similar  synonymical 
chains,  like  bhavitatta]  =  liyana  Dhs  1 1 56. 

Lila  (lila)  (f.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  lila  or  *lida]  play,  sport,  dal- 
liance;  probably  for  lilha  at  J  v. 5  &  157,  both  times 
comb*  with  vilasa. 

-aravinda  a  lotus  serviceable  for  sport  VvA  43  (Iil°). 

LQha  (f.)  [abstr.  of  lijha,  Sk.  lidha,  pp.  of  lih,  lit.  being 
polished,  cp.  uUidha  polished]  grace,  ease,  charm, 
adroitness  ;  always  used  with  ref.  totheBuddha  (Buddha- 
lilha),  e.  g.  J  1.155;  DhA  1.33;  ni.79.  So  in  phrase 
Buddhalilhaya  dhammag  deseti  "  to  expound  the 
doctrine  with  the  Buddha's  mastery"  J  1.152,  155; 
III. 289 ;  VvA  217  (spelling  wrongly  lijaya).  Of  the 
B's  gait:  J  1.93,  149;  DhA  11. 41.  The  comb"  with 
vilasa,  as  mentioned  by  Childers,  applies  to  lila  (q.  v.), 
which  may  stand  for  lilha  at  the  passages  mentioned, 
although  not  used  of  the  Buddha. 

Lagga  [pp.  of  rujati ;  corresponding  to  Sk.  rugna]  broken 
(up),  rugged  (of  a  path)  Miln  217,  218,     Cp.  vi°. 

j  Lujjati  [Pass,  of  ruj,  corresponding  to  Sk.  rujyate.  Dhtp 
400  gives  luj  as  sep,  root  with  meaning  vinasa.  See 
rujati]  to  be  broken  up,  to  break  (up),  to  be  destroyed  ; 
to  go  asunder,  to  fall  apart  A  1.283=  Pug  32  (here 
equal  to  "  be  wiped  out,"  butit  is  unnecessary  to  assume, 
as  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  lujjati  does,  a  by-form  of  lnc,luiicati. 
The  Pug  C.  215  expl' by  "  nassati") ;  Vin  1.297;  11.123  ; 
S  IV. 52  (in  etymologizing  interpretation  of  loka  :  "  luj- 
jati kho  loko  ti  vuccati "  ;  quoted  at  Nd^  550  on  Sn 
iiig);Th  i,  929.  —  Cp.  olujjati,  palujjati.  —  pp.  lugga. 

Lujjana  (nt.)  [fr.  lujjati ;  a  word  peculiar  to  Pali  dog- 
matics] breaking  up,  crumbling  away,  dissolution 
DhsA  47  (in  etym.  of  loka=lujjana-palujjan'  atthena 
vattar)),  308  (id.);  Vism  427  (id.). 

Luficati  [Vedic  luncati,  luc  or  luic,  to  Lat.  runco  to  pull 
up  weeds  ;  Gr.  pvKavtj  plane.  The  Dhtp  43  expl"  by 
apanayana]  to  pull  out,  pluck  (a  bird),  tear,  peel 
J  1.244,  476:  11-97.  363;  in. 314;  ly.  191  ;  v.463 ;  Mhvs 
23,  46  (aor.  alufici) ;  28,  26  (ger.  luAcitva) ;  Vism  248 
(kese).  . —  Caus.  II.  luficapeti  DhA  11.53  (kese),  and 
loceti  Th  i,  283  (kesamassui)  alocayii)). — pp.  luficita. 

Lnficita  [pp.  of  luiicati]  plucked,  pulled  Miln  240  (i.  e. 
combed,  of  wool ;  Rh.  D.  trsi"  "  pressed  "  ;  Nyanatiloka 
"  cut  ") ;  PvA  47  (viluna-kesa-f  ). 

Lnthati  [cp.  later  Sk.  luthati  to  plunder,  which  is  one  of 
the  dial,  variants  luth,  lunth,  loth,  of  Inl  to  shake.  The 
Dhtp  (474)  &  Dhtm  (136)  both  give  rnth  &  Inth  with 
meaning  "  upaghate  "]  to  rob,  plunder. 


Luta 


43 


LekhanI 


Lata  seems  to  bs  a  legitimate  spelling  representing  either 
lutta  or  luna,  in  meaning  "  cut,  cut  og  "  [cp.  lu  for  Ifi 
■'"''«"■  '■•"-*;!      Thus  at  S  t.5  (nalo  va  harito  luto)  = 


under  lunati 

126 

lut 

SnA  432). 


uci  iiiudLij.  luub  iiL  3  1.5  ^uiiio  va  narito  iUioj  = 
5=  J  VI. 25  ;  and  at  Sn  532  (lutani  bandhanani ;  vv.  11. 
ani  &  lunani ;  expl"*  as  "  chinaani  padalitani  "  at 


LuUa  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  lupta ;  pp.  of  lumpati]  brolien.  cut  oS  ; 
as  t.  t.  in  grammar  "  elided"  VvA  13  (of  ca),  11 1  (of 
iti),  122  (id.). 

Ludda  (adj.)  [the  usual  P.  form  of  rudda,  corresponding  to 
Sk.  raudra]  i.  fierce,  terrible  ;  cruel,  gruesome  S  1.143  ; 
A  n.174  (papa,  1.,  kibbisa);  v. 149;  Pug  56;  Vv  84' 
{  =  daruija  pisac'-adino  VvA  335);  J  v. 243  (thanar)  = 
niraya) ;  Sdhp  286.  The  spelling  ludra  occurs  at 
J  iv.46  =  VI.306,  which  is  ludda  at  J  v. 146.  —  2.  a 
hunter,  sportsman  Sn  247  (dussila"  ;  SnA  289:  ludda 
ca  kurura-kammanta  lohita-panitaya,  macchaghataka- 
migabandhaka-sakunik'adayo  idha  adhippeta) ;  VV63I ; 
J  n.154  (°putta  =  luddaka) ;  in. 432  (Bharata  by  name) ; 
Pug  56  (magavika,  sakunika,  I,,  macchaghataka  etc.  ; 
expH  by  daruna  kakkhaja  at  Pug  A  233);  Vism  245  = 
VbhA  259;  VbhA  228. 

Lnddaka=  ludda  2,  i.  e.  hunter  Vin  1.220;  J  iv.416 ; 
Pv  111.7^  (miga°  ;  expH  as  "daruna"  PvA  206);  Miln 
222;  VbhA  266  (miga°,  in  simile);  PvA  34.  168.  Cp. 
Fick,  SocialeGliederung  m,  2oy.  Note.  The  expression 
sunakha-luddako  at  DhsA  273  is  not  quite  clear  ("  dog- 
hunter"?).  It  applies  to  a  female  &  Maung  Tin 
(Expositor  II. 361)  reads  "  lucjdhika  "  (sic),  with  trsl" 
"  dog-mistress,"  remarking  that  Pyi  reads  luddako 
"  hunter-dog"  (?). 

Lnddha  [pp.  of  lubbhati]  greedy,  covetous  A  111.433  (with 
pharusa-vaca  &  samphappalapin) ;  It  84;  Miln  92 
(duftha,  miilha,  1.);  J  1.124. 

Lnaaaa  (nt.)  [for  luna(na),  cp.  lavana]  cutting,  severing 
Sn.\  148  (niddanan  ti  chedanar)  lunanar)  uppafanai)). 

Lunati  [Ifl,  given  as  lu  at  Dhtp  504  ("  chedana  ")  &  Dhtm 
728  ("  paccheda  ").  For  etym.  cp.  Gr.  Xvw  to  loosen, 
Lat.  luo  to  pay  a  fine.  Goth,  fraliusan  to  lose ;  Ger.  los, 
E.  lose  &  loose]  to  cut,  cut  ofi,  mow,  reap  Miln  33  (yava- 
lavaka  yavai)  lunanti) ;  DhsA  39. — pp.  liina  (&  luta). 
—  Caus  I.  lavayati  Mhvs  10,  30;  Caus.  II.  lavapeti  to 
cause  to  mow  Vin  11. 180.  —  A  Pass,  luyati  [fr.  lu]  is 
found  at  D  1.141  (aor.  luyirjsu)  and  at  corresponding 
passage  Pug  56  (iraper.  luyantu,  where  dubba  is  to  be 
corrected  to  dabbha).  —  See  lava,  lavaka.  lavana, 
layati,  lavati. 

Lubbhati  [Vedic  lubhyate,  Inbh,  cp.  Lat.  lubet  &  libet  it 
pleases,  libido  longing;  Goth.  liufs  =  Ger.  lieb  &  lob; 
E.  love,  etc.  —  Dhtp  434 :  lobhe]  to  be  lustful  or 
greedy,  to  covet,  long  for,  desire  It  84  (lobhaneyye  na 
lubbhati) ;  Vism  465,  468.  —  ger.  lubhha  (?)  in  olubbha 
is  to  be  referred  to  lamb  rather  than  labh.  A  grd. 
formation  in  lobhaneyya  or  lobhaniya  (q.  v.).  —  pp. 
luddha. 

L'ibbhana  (nt.)  [fr.  lubh]  being  greedy,  greediness,  a  scho- 
lastic word,  only  found  in  exegesis  of  word  lobha,  e.  g. 
at  Dhs  32  (where  also  the  enlarged  abstr.  formation 
lubbhitatta)  &  Vism  465,  468  (lubbhana-mattai)  lobha). 

Lumpati  [iup,  Epic  Sk.  lumpati,  found  also  as  rup  in  Pali  : 
see  ruppati.  Connected  with  Lat.  lugeo  to  be  sorry 
(cp.  rujati,  roga  ;  Gr.  Xinri  sorrow)  and  rumpo  to  break. 
Def«  at  Dhtp  386  &  433  (chedana)  and  at  Dhtm  618 
&  669  (cheda,  vinasa)]  to  break,  harm,  injure  ;  to  attack, 
plunder ;  with  a  strong  touch  of  affection  (sympathy 
or  desire)  lubh  in  it  [cp.  Iup:  Gr.  Xuirij ;  ruj  :  roga],  which 
is  still  more  evident  in  Intens.  loluppa  (q.  v.).  —  DhsA 
365  (in  expl°  of  loluppa). — pp.  lutta. — Cp.  ullum- 
paua,  ullopa,  lopa,  vilumpati,  vilopa. 


Lulati  &  Lntati  [cp.  Ep.  Sk.  loth  to  move  &  dial.  In4> 
lodayati,  to  stir,  agitate,  which  is  a  by-form  of  Inl, 
lolati  to  move,  Caus.  lolayati  to  set  in  motion.  Etym. 
connected  with  Slavonic  Ijuljati  to  rock,  Ags.  lael  a 
(flexible)  rod,  rood  ;  root  due  to  onomat.  formation.  — 
Another  form  is  luthati.  The  Dhtm  (117)  expl*  lut  ^V 
"  lotane  "  (cp.  vilotana  &  vilojana),  and  lul  (510)  by 
"  manthane  "]  to  stir,  shake,  agitate,  upset  ;  intrs.  to 
be  in  motion,  to  be  stirred  Miln  259  (calati  khubbhati 
I.  avilati). — pp.  lulita. 

Lu}ita  [pp.  of  lujati]  stirred,  moved,  disturbed ;  lively  ; 
turbid  (of  water)  S  v.i23  =  A  in. 233  ;  (udapatta  avila 
1.);  D  ii.i28=Ud  83  (udakar)  parittar)  lulitar)  avilai)); 
J  VI.63  ;  Nd'  488  (avila-f);  Miln  35,  177,  220  (°citta), 
383  (a");  DhsA  328  (indriyani  paripakkani  alulitani 
avisadani). 

Luka  [apocope  form  of  uluka,  arisen  through  wTong 
syllable-division]  owl  J  vi.497  (=  uluka  C). 

Lnkha  (adj.)  [Vedic  ruksa ;  Prk.  luha  &  lukkha ;  BSk. 
luha,  e.  g.  Divy  13  (prahenaka),  81  (°civara),  425,  427] 
I.  rough,  coarse,  unpleasant;  poor,  bad  (usually  appl* 
to  dress  or  food);  mediocre,  meagre,  wretched.  Opp. 
panita  (e.  g.  Vin  1.2 12;  S  11. 153;  A  iv.io;  J  1.228; 
VvA  64).  —  S  IV. 337  sq.  ;  A  iv.232  sq.  ;  Vin  1.55  ;  Th  i. 
923  ;  J  1.228  (cittasmir)  panite  .  .  .  danar)  lukhar)  na 
hoti) ;  Nd*  342  (p.  182,  in  exegesis  of  nikkuha,  where 
practices  of  ascetics  are  referred  to  as  "  lukhar)  civarar) 
dhareti,  I.  piijdapatar)  bhunjati,  1.  senasanar)  pajisevati " 
etc.) ;  VvA  298,  335  sq.  ;  PvA  180.  —  2.  (of  men)  low. 
wretched,  rough,  miserable,  offensive  Vin  1.199;  in.  no 
(kisa  I.  dubbariija) ;  S  1.175  (=jinija  C,  see  K.S.  320  ; 
trsl"  "looking  worn");  M  1.77=5  i-39°-  — lOkha- 
puggala  a  miserable,  oSensive  character  (opp.  siniddha- 
puggala)  Vism  132  ;  VbhA  282. 

-ajivin  leading  a  hard  or  rough  lifeD  1.161  ;  111.44,  47  ; 
S  11.200;  A  V.190.  -civara  (adj.)  wearing  a  shabby 
robe,  badly  clad  Vin  111.263 ;  Miln  342  (cp.  civara 
lukha  bad  condition  of  clothes  A  11.71  =  Pug  53  ;  lukha- 
clvara-dhara  A  1.25).  -ppamana  (&  °ika)  taking  un- 
pleasantness  or   misery  as   one's  standard   A   11.71  = 

'       Pug  53  (cp.  PugA  229);  DhA  in. 114;  SnA  242;  cp. 

!  rupa-ppamana.  -ppasanna  believing  in  shabbiness  or 
mediocrity,  having  (bodily)  wretchedness  as  one's  faith 
Vin  n.197;  A  n.7i  =  Pug  53.  -papurana  miserably 
clad  S  1.175  ;  DhA  IV. 8,  9. 

Lukhata  (f.)  [fr.  lukha]  unpleasantness,  wretchedness, 
poorness,  misery  PugA  229. 

L&khasa  (adj.)  [fr.  lukha]  rough,  harsh;  miserable,  self- 
mortifying  Sn  244  (  =  nirasa  atta-kilamath'  anuyutta 
SnA  287). 

Luta  (f.)  [*Sk.  luta]  spider  Abhp  621. 

Luna  [pp.  of  lunati]  cut,  mowed,  reaped  Th  2.  107  (°kesi) ; 
J  11.365  ;  Davs  1.32.     Cp.  Ti". 

L&yati :  Pass,  of  lunati  (q.  v.). 

Lekha  [fr.  likh,  cp.  Sk.  lekha  &  lekha]  i.  writing,  inscrip- 
tion, letter,  epistle  J  vi.595  (sila°  inscription  on  rock) ; 
Mhvs  5,  177  (lekhe  sutva) ;  27,  6  ;  33,  40  (°r)  vissajjayi) ; 
Davs  5,  67  (caritta°);  Miln  42;  SnA  164  ("vacaka 
reciting),  577.  —  2.  chips,  shavings  Vin  11.110  (v.  1. 
likba). 

Lekhaka  [fr.  lekha]  one  who  knows  the  art  of  writing,  a 
scribe,  secretary  Vin  iv.8  (as  a  profession) ;  iv.io  (  =  mud- 
dika  &  gaijaka,  pi.) ;  Miln  42. 

Lekha^I  (f)  [fr.  Ukh;  cp.  Epic  Sk.  lekhaiji  stencil  Mbh  i, 
78]  an  instrument  for  scratching  lines  or  writing,  a 
stencil,  pencil  A  11.200  ;  J  1.230. 


Lekhana 


44 


Loka 


Iillchaaa  (nt.)  [fr.  likh]  scratching,  drawing,  writing  Dhtp 

467. 

Lekha  (f .)  [fr.  likh ;  Vedic  lekha.  See  also  rekha  &  lekha] 
I.  streak,  line  VvA  277  (  =  raji) ;  canda°  crescent  moon 
[cp.  Epic  candralekha  Mbh  3,  1831]  Visra  168;  DhsA 
151- — 2.  a  scratch,  line  A  1.283;  P"K  3^  ;  J  vi.56 
(lekhar)  kaddhati).  —  3.  writing,  inscription,  letter  Vin 
III. 76  (°r)  chindati  destroy  the  letter);  J  1.451  (on  a 
phalaka) ;  Miln  349  ("acariya  teacher  of  writing) ;  PvA 
20  ("panna.  letter  so  read  for  likha").  —  4.  the  art  of 
writing  or  drawing  [  =  lipi  Hemacandra],  writing  as  an 
art.  It  is  classed  as  a  respectable  (ukkattha)  profession 
(sippa)  Vin  IV.7  ;  and  mentioned  bj'  the  side  of  tnudda 
and  ganana  Vin  iv.y,  128  =  1.77 ;  cp.  Vin  iv.305. 

Lekhita  [pp.  of  lekheti]  drawn  (of  lines),  pencilled  Th  2, 
256. 

Lekheti  [Cans,  of  likhati  or  Denom.  of  lekha]  to  (make  a) 
scratch  J  iv.  402.  — pp.  lekhita. 

Le44u  [dial.  Sk.  lestu>*Ietthu  >*lettu>leddu  ;  also  Prk. 
ledu  &  letthu  :  Pischel,  §  304 ;  cp.  Geiger,'  P.Gr.  §  62]  a 
clod  of  earth  S  v. 146=  J  11.59  (°tthana);  J  1.19,  175; 
III. 16;  VI. 405  ;  Miln  255;  SnA  222  (akase  khitta,  in 
simile);  Vism  28  (trsl"  "stone"),  360  ("khand'adini), 
366  (containing  gold),  419;  VbhA  66  ("khanda) ;  VvA 
141  ;  PvA  284.  — The  throwing  of  clods  (stones  ?)  is  a 
standing  item  in  the  infliction  of  punishments,  where  it 
is  grouped  with  danda  (stick)  and  sattha  (sword),  or  as 
leddu-dand'adi,  e.  g.  at  M  1.123;  D  11.336,  338  (v.  1. 
lendu);  J  11.77;  11116;  VI. 350  ;  Vism  419;  DhA  1.399 
(v.  1.  lendu) ;  iir.41  ;  iv.77  ;  VvA  141.  —  Note.  leddOpaka 
in  cunnar)  va  telar)  va  leddupakena  etc.  at  DhsA  115 
read  as  valandupakena,  as  at  Vism  142. 

-pata  "  throw  of  a  clod,"  a  certain  measure  of  (not 
too  far)  a  distance  Vin  iv.40  ;  Vism  72;  DhsA  315 
(trsl"  "  a  stone's  throw  "). 

Le44alca=  led(Ju  ;  Vism  28. 

Leva  (&  lena)  (nt.)  [*Sk.  layana,  fr.  U  in  meaning  "to 
hide,"  cp.  Prk.  lena]  i.  a  cave  (in  a  rock),  a  mountain 
cave,  used  by  ascetics  (or  bhikkhus)  as  a  hermitage  or 
place  of  shelter,  a  rock  cell.  Often  enum'^  with  kuji  & 
guha,  e.  g.  Vin  iv.48 ;  Miln  151;  Vbh  251  (n.).  At 
Vin  n.146  it  is  given  as  collective  name  for  5  kinds  of 
hermitages,  viz.  vihara,  addhayoga,  pasada,  hammiya, 
guha.  The  expl°  of  lena  at  VbhA  366  runs  as  follows  : 
"  pabbatag  khaijitva  va  pabbharassa  appahonaka- 
tthane  kuddai)  utthapetva  va  katasenasanai),"  i.  e. 
opportunity  for  sitting  &  lying  made  by  digging  (a  cave) 
in  a  mountain  or  by  erecting  a  wall  where  the  cave 
is  insufficient  (so  as  to  make  the  rest  of  it  habitable). 
Cp.  Vin  1.206=111.248  (pabbharai)  sodhapeti  leijar) 
kattukamo)  Mhvs  16,  12;  28,  31  sq.  (n) ;  Miln  200 
(maha").  —  2.  refuge,  shelter,  (fig.)  salvation  (some- 
times in  sense  of  nibbana).  In  this  meaning  often 
comb*  with  tana  &  sarana,  e.  g.  at  D  1.95;  S  iv.315 
(mar)-lena  refuge  with  me  ;  +  magtana) ;  iv.372  (=  nib- 
bana);  A  1. 155  sq.  (n);  J  11.253;  DA  1.232.  Cp.  Vin 
111.155.  len'atthar)  for  refuge  Vin  n.164  (n);  J  1.94. 
— -alena  without  a  refuge  Ps  1.127;  11.238;  Pv  11. 2' 
(  =  asarana  PvA  80). 

-gavesin  seeking  shelter  or  refuge  J  11.407  =  iv. 346. 
-guha  a  mountain  cave  J  111.511.  -dvara  the  door  of 
the  (rock)  hermitage  Vism  38  ;  DhA  111.39.  -pabbhara 
"  cave-slope,"  cave  in  a  mountain  DhA  iv.170. 

Lepa  [fr.  lip,  see  limpati ;  cp.  Classic  Sk.  lepa  stain,  dirt] 
I.  smearing,  plastering,  coating  over  Vin  iv.303 
(bahira");  J  11.25  (mattika").  —  2.  (fig.)  plaster,  i.  e. 
that  which  sticks,  affection,  attachment,  etc.,  in  tanha° 
the  stain  ot  craving,  &  ditthi°  of  speculation  Nd'  55  ; 
Nd^  271"".  —  ,Vo(e.  lasaga'ta  at  A  11. 165  read  with 
V.  1.  as  lepa-gata,  i.  e.  sticky.  —  Cp.  a°,  pa° 


Lepana  (nt.)  [fr.  Up]  smearing,  plastering,  anointing  Vin 

II. 172  (ku(Jda°);  A  iv.107  (vasana°),  iii  (id.);  J  11. 117. 
Cp.  abhi°,  a°,  pa°. 

Lepeti  see  limpati. 

Leyya  (adj.  nt.)  [grd.  of  lih:  see  lihati]  to  be  licked  or 
sipped ;  nt.  mucilaginous  food  (opp.  peyya  liquid)  A 
IV. 394  (-h peyya);  Miln  2  (id.). 

Lesa  [cp.  Sk.  le^a  particle  ;  as  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  points  out, 
it  occurs  in  Sk.  also  in  the  P.  meaning  at  Mbh  v. 33,  5 
although  this  is  not  given  in  BR. — -As  "particle" 
only  at  Dhtp  444  in  def"  of  lisati]  sham,  pretext,  trick 
Vin  in.  169  (where  ten  lesas  are  enum"",  viz.  jati°,  nama°, 
gotta",  linga",  apatti°,  patta°,  clvara",  upajjhaya°, 
acariya",  senasana") ;  J  ii.ii;  vi.402.  — lesa-kappa 
pretext  Vin  11. 166  ;  Vv  84"  (=kappiya-lesa  VvA  348) ; 
Th  I,  941  ;  DA  1. 103. 

Lehati  see  lihati- 

Loka  [cp.  Vedic  loka  in  its  oldest  meaning  "  space,  open 
space."  For  etym.  see  rocati.  To  the  etym.  feeling 
of  the  Pali  hearer  loka  is  closely  related  in  quality  to 
ruppati  (as  in  pop.  etym.  of  riipa)  and  rujati.  As 
regards  the  latter  the  etym.  runs  "  lujjati  kho  loko  ti 
vuccati  "  S  IV. 52,  cp.  Nd"  550,  and  loka  =  lujjana  DhsA 
47,  308:  see  lujjana.  The  Dhtp  531  gives  root  lok 
(loc)  in  sense  of  dassana]  world,  primarily  "  visible 
world,"  then  in  general  as  "  space  or  sphere  of  creation," 
with  var.  degrees  of  substantiality.  Often  (unspecified) 
in  the  comprehensive  sense  of  "  universe."  Sometimes 
the  term  is  applied  collectively  to  the  creatures  in- 
habiting this  or  var.  other  worlds,  thus,  "  man,  man- 
kind, people,  beings."  —  Loka  is  not  a  fixed  &  def. 
term.  It  comprises  immateriality  as  well  as  materiality 
and  emphasizes  either  one  or  the  other  meaning  according 
to  the  view  applied  to  the  object  or  category  in  question. 
Thus  a  trsl"  of  "  sphere,  plane,  division,  order  "  inter- 
changes with  "  world."  Whenever  the  spatial  element 
prevails  we  speak  of  its  "  regional  "  meaning  as  con- 
trasted with  "applied"  meaning.  The  fundamental 
notion  however  is  that  of  substantiality,  to  which  is 
closely  related  the  specific  Buddhist  notion  of  imper- 
manence(loka  =  lujjati). —  i.  Universe:  the  distinctions 
between  the  universe  (cp.  cakkavala)  as  a  larger  whole 
and  the  world  as  a  smaller  unit  are  fluctuating  &  not 
definite.  A  somewhat  wider  sphere  is  perhaps  indicated 
bysabba-loka  (e.  g.  S  1.12  ;  iv.127,  312  ;  v.132  ;  It  122  ; 
Mhvs  I,  44;  cp.  sabbavanta  loka  D  1.251  ;  111.224), 
otherwise  even  the  smaller  loka  comprises  var.  realms 
of  creation.  Another  larger  division  is  that  of  loka 
as  sadevaka,  samaraka,  sabrahmaka,  or  the  world  with 
its  devas,  its  Mara  and  its  Brahma,  e.  g.  S  1.160,  168, 
207;  II. 170;  III. 28,  59;  IV.158;  V.204 ;  A  1.259  sq. ; 
11.24  sq.  ;  III. 341  ;  iv.56,  173  ;  v. 50  ;  It  121  ;  Nd'  447  (on 
Sn  956),  to  which  is  usually  added  sassamana-brah- 
mani  paja  (e.  g.  D  1.250,  see  loci  s.  v.  paja).  With  this 
cp.  Dh  45,  where  the  divisions  are  pafhavi,  Yamaloka, 
sadevaka  (loka),  which  are  expl""  at  DhA  1.334  by 
pathavi  =  attabhava  ;  Yamaloka  =  catubbidha  apaya- 
loka ;  sadevaka  =manussaloka  devalokena  saddhig. 
—  The  universe  has  its  evolutional  periods  :  sagvattati 
and  vivattati  D  11. 109  sq.  The  Buddha  has  mastered 
it  by  his  enlightenment  :  loko  Tathagatena  abhisam- 
buddho  It  121.  On  loka,  lokadhatu  (  =  cosmos)  and 
cakkavala  cp.  Kirfel,  Kosmographie  p.  180,  181. — 
2.  Regional  meaning.  —  (a)  in  general.  Referring  to 
this  world,  the  character  of  evanescence  is  inherent  in 
it ;  referring  to  the  universe  in  a  wider  sense,  it  implies 
infinity,  though  not  in  definite  terms.  There  is  mention 
of  the  different  metaphysical  theories  as  regards  cos- 
mogony at  many  places  of  the  Canon.  The  ant- 
anantika  (contending  for  the  finitude  or  otherwise  of 
the  world)  are  mentioned  as  a  sect  at  D  1.22  sq.     Discus- 


Loka 


45 


Loka 


sions  as  to  whether  loka  is  sassata  or  antava  are  found 
e.  g.  at  M  1.426,  484  ;  11.233  ;  S  in. 182,  204 ;  iv.286  sq.  ; 
A  n.41  ;  V.31,  186  sq.  ;  Ps  1.123,  151  sq.  ;  Vbh  340; 
Dhs  1 1 1 7.  Views  on  consistency  of  the  world  (eternal 
or  finite;  created  or  evolved  etc.)  at  D  in. 137;  op. 
S  n.ig  sq.  Cp.  also  the  long  and  interesting  discussion 
of  loka  as  sufiAa  at  S  iv.54  sq.  ;  Ps  11.  i  77  sq.  ;  Nd^  680  ; 
—  as  well  as  M  11.68  (upaniyati  loko*  addhuvo,  and 
"  attano  loko,  assakoloko"etc.) ;  "  lokassa  anto"  is  lit. 
unattainable :  A  11.50  =  5  1.62  ;  iv.93  ;  but  the  Arahant 
is  "  lok'antagu."  cp.  A  iv.430.  — •  As  regards  their  order 
in  space  (or  "  plane  ")  there  are  var.  groupings  of  var. 
worlds,  the  evidently  popular  one  being  that  the  world 
of  the  devas  is  above  and  the  nirayas  below  the  world  of 
man  (which  is  "  tiriyag  vapi  majjhe  ") ;  Nd^  550.  The 
world  of  men  is  as  ayai]  loko  contrasted  with  the  beyond, 
or  pare  loko:  D  ni.181  ;  S  iv.348  sq. ;  A  1.269;  iv.226  ; 
Sn  779  (n'asigsati  lokarj  imar)  paraii  ca) ;  or  as  idha- 
lokaDiii.105.  Thedef  of  ayat]  loko  at  Nd' 60  is  given 
as:  sak'attabhava,  saka-rupa-vedana  etc.,  ajjhatt' 
ayatanani,  manussa-loka,  kamadhatu  ;  with  which  is 
contrasted  paro  loko  as :  parattabhava,  para-rupa- 
vedana,  bahir'ayatanani,  devaloka,  rupa-  &  arupa- 
dhatu.  —  The  rise  and  decay  of  this  world  is  referred  to 
as  samudaya  and  atthangama  at  S  n.73;  in. 135; 
IV.86  ;  A  v,i07.  —  Cp.  D  in. 33  (atta  ca  loko  ca) ;  Mhvs 
I,  5  (lokar)  dukkhapamocetui)) ;  28,  4  (loko'yar)  pilito) ; 
PvA  I  (vijja-carana-sampannai)  yena  niyanti  lokato). 
-.—  Other  divisions  of  var.  kinds  of  "  planes  "  are  e.  g. 
deva"  A  1.115,  153;  in. 414  sq.  ;  Brahnia°  Vbh  421; 
Mhvs  19.  45  ;  Yama°  Dh  44 ;  S  1.34;  nara°  Mhvs  5,  282. 
See  also  each  sep.  head-word,  also  peta°  &  manussa°.  — 
The  division  at  Nd'  550  is  as  follows  :  niraya",  tirac- 
chana",  pittivisaya",  manussa",  deva°  (  =  material); 
upon  which  follow  khandha",  dhatu",  ayatana"  (  =  im- 
material). Similarly  at  Nd'  29.  where  apaya°  takes  the 
place  of  niraya",  tiracchana",  pittivisaj'a°.  —  Another 
threefold  division  is  sankhara°,  satta°,  okasa°  at  Vism 
204,  with  expl" :  "  sabbe  satta  ahara-tthitika  "  ti  = 
sankharaloka  ;  "  sassato  loko  ti  va  asassato  loko  "  ti  = 
sattaloka;  "  yavata  candiraa-suriya  pariharanti  disa 
'bhanti  virocamana "  etc.  (=M  1.328;  A  1.227;  cp. 
J  1. 1 32)  =okasaloka.  The  same  expl"  in  detail  at 
SnA  442.  —  Another  as  kama°,  riipa°,  arupa°:  see 
under  rupa ;  another  as  kilesa°,  bhava°,  indriya°  at 
Nett  II,  19.  Cp.  sankhara-loka  VbhA  456  ;  dasa  loka- 
dhatuyo  (see  below)  S  1.26.  —  3.  Ordinary  &  applied 
meaning.  — ■  (a)  division  of  the  world,  worldly  things 
S  I.I,  24  (loke  visattika  attachment  to  this  world  ;  opp. 
sabba-loke  anabhirati  S  v.  132).  — -loke  in  this  world, 
among  men,  here  D  in. 196  (ye  nibbuta  loke);  It  78 
(loke  uppajjati);  DA  1.173  (id.);  Vbh  loi  (yag  loke 
piya-rupag  etc.);  Pv  n.i"  (  =  idar)  C);  KhA  15,  215. 
See  also  the  difi.  def"  of  loke  at  Nd*  552.  — loka  collec- 
tively "  one,  man  "  :  kicchag  loko  apanno  jayati  ca 
jiyati  ca,  etc.  D  11.30.  Also  "people":  Lanka-Ioka 
people  of  Ceylon  Mhvs  19,  85  ;  cp.  jana  in  similar  mean- 
ing. Derived  from  this  meaning  is  the  use  in  cpds.  ("-) 
as  "  usual,  every  day,  popular,  common  "  :  see  e.  g. 
"ayata,  "vajja,  "vohara.  —  (6)  "thing  of  the  world," 
material  element,  physical  or  worldly  quality,  sphere 
or  category  (of  "  materiality  ").  This  category  of  loka 
is  referred  to  at  Vbh  193,  which  is  expl""  at  VbhA  220  as 
follows  :  "  ettha  yo  ayar)  ajjhatt'  adi  bhedo  kayo  parig- 
gahito,  so  eva  idha-loko  nama."  In  this  sense  13 
groups  are  classified  according  to  the  number  of  con- 
stituents in  each  group  (1-12  and  No.  18);  they  are 
given  at  Nd*  551  (under  lokantagu  Sn  1 133)  as  follows  : 
(i)  bhavaloka  ;  (2)  sampatti  bhavaloka,  vipatti  bhava- 
loka  ;  (3)  vedana  ;  (4)  ahara  ;  (5)  up&dana-kkhandha  ; 
(6)  ajjhattikani  ayatanini  (their  rise  &  decay  as 
"lokassa  samudaya  &  atthangama"  at  S  iv.87) ;  (7) 
viftnanatthitiyo ;  (8)  loka-dhamma ;  (9)  satt'avasa ; 
(10)  upakkilesa :  (11)  kamabhava ;  (12)  ayatanani; 
(18)  dhatuyo.     They  are  repeated  at  Ps  1.122=174, 


with  (i)  as  "  sabbe  satta  ahara-tthitika;  (2)  namaii  ca 
rupaii  ca ;  and  the  remainder  the  same.  Also  at  Vism 
205  and  at  SnA  442  as  at  Ps  1.122.  Cp.  the  similar 
view  at  S  iv.95  :  one  perceives  the  world  ("  materiality"  : 
loka-saiinin  and  loka-manin,  proud  of  the  world)  with 
the  six  senses.  This  is  called  the  "  loka  "  in  the  logic 
(vinaya)  of  the  ariya.  —  A  few  similes  with  loka  see 
J.P.T.S.  1907.  131- 

-akkhayika  (f.,  scil.  katha)  talk  or  speculation  about 
(origin  etc.  of)  the  world,  popular  philosophy  (see 
lokayata  and  cp.  Dialogues  1.14)  Vin  1.188;  D  1.8; 
M  1.513;  Miln  316;  DA  1.90.  -agga  chief  of  the  world. 
Ep.  of  the  Buddha  ThA  69  (Ap.  v.  1 1 ).  -anta  the  end 
(spatial)  of  the  world  A  11.49  (na  ca  appatva  lokantag 
dukkha  atthi  pamocanai)).  -antagii  one  who  has 
reached  the  end  of  the  world  (and  of  all  things  worldly). 
Ep.  of  an  Arahant  A  11. 6,  49  sq.  ;  It  115,  Sn  1133;  Nd^ 
551.  -antara  the  space  between  the  single  worlds 
J  1.44  (v. 253  ;  Avicimhi  na  uppajjanti,  tatha  lokan- 
taresu  ca).  -antarika  (scil.  Niraya)  a  group  of  Nirayas 
or  Purgatories  situated  in  the  lokantara  (i.  e.  cakkaval. 
antaresu  J  1.76),  8,000  yojanas  in  extent,  pitch  dark, 
which  were  filled  with  light  when  Gotama  became  the 
Buddha  J  1.76;  VbhA  4;  Vism  207  (lokantariya° ) ; 
SnA  59  (°vasa  life  in  the  I.  niraya) ;  cp.  BSk.  lokan- 
tarika  Divy  204  (andhas  tamaso  'ndhakara-tamisra). 
-adhipa  lord  or  ruler  of  the  world  A  1.150.  -adhipa- 
teyya  "  rule  of  the  world,"  dependence  on  public 
opinion,  influence  of  material  things  on  man,  one  of  the 
3  adhipateyyas  (atta°,  loka°,  dhamma")  D  in. 220  ; 
Vism  1 4.  -anukampa  sympathy  with  the  world  of  men 
[cp.  BSk.  lokanugraha  Divy  124  sq.]  D  111.2  11  ;  It  79. 
-amisa  worldly  gain,  bait  of  the  flesh  M  1.156  ;  11.253  ; 
Th  2,  356.  -ayata  what  pertains  to  the  ordinary  view 
(of  the  world),  common  or  popular  philosophy,  or  as 
Rhys  Davids  (Dial.  1.171)  puts  it :  "  name  of  a  branch 
of  Brahman  learning,  probably  Nature-lore "  ;  later 
worked  into  a  quasi  system  of  "  casuistry,  sophistry." 
Franke,  Dlgha  trsl'  19,  trsl»  as  "  logisch  beweisende 
Naturerklarung  "  (see  the  long  note  on  this  page,  and 
cp.  Dial.  1. 166-172  for  detail  of  lokayata).  It  is  much 
the  same  as  lok-akkhay(ika)  or  popular  philosophy.  — 
D  I. II,  88;  Vin  11.139;  Sn  p.  105  (=  vitanda-vada- 
sattha  SnA  447,  as  at  DA  1.247);  Miln  4,  10,  178;  A 
1. 163,  166;  in. 223.  Cp.  BSk.  lokayata  Divy  630,  633. 
and  lokayatika  ibid.  619.  See  also  Kern's  remarks  at 
Toev.  s.  V.  -ayatika  (brahmana)  one  who  holds  the 
view  of  lokayata  or  popular  philosophy  S  1177  (trsl" 
K.S.  53  :  a  Brahmin  "  wise  in  world-lore  ") ;  Miln  178  ; 
J  VI. 486  (na  seve  lokayatikag  ;  expl''  as  "  anattha- 
nissitag  .  .  .  vitanda-sallapag  lokayatika-vadag  na 
seveyya,"  thus  more  like  "sophistry"  or  casuistry). 
-issara  lord  of  the  world  Sdhp  348.  -uttara  see  under 
lokiya.  -cinta  thinking  about  the  world,  world- 
philosophy  or  speculation  S  v,447  ;  A  11.80  (as  one  of 
the  4  acinteyyani  or  thoughts  not  to  be  thought  out ; 
buddha-visaya,  jhana-visaya,  kamma-vipaka,  1-c. ).  Cp. 
BSk.  laukika  citta  Divy  63,  77  etc.  -dhamma  (pi.) 
common  practice,  things  of  the  world,  worldly  con- 
ditions S  III. 139  sq.  ;  Sn  268  (expl"  loke  dhamma  ;  yava 
lokappavatti  tava-anivattika  dhamma  ti  vuttag  hoti 
KhA  153,  cp.  J  III. 468);  Miln  146.  Usually  comprising 
a  set  of  eight,  viz.  labha,  alabha,  yaso,  ayaso,  ninda. 
pasagsa,  sukhag,  dukkhag  D  in. 260;  A  iv.156  sq.  ; 
V.53  ;  Nd^  55 ;  Ps  1.22.  122  ;  Vbh  387  ;  Nett  162  ;  DhA 
n.157.  -dhatu  constituent  or  unit  of  the  Universe, 
"  world-element  "  ;  a  world,  sphere  ;  another  name  for 
cakkavala.  Dasa-sahassi-lokadhatu  the  system  of  the 
10,000  worlds  Vin  1. 12  ;  A  1.227.  —  D  iii.i  14  ;  Pv  11.9"  ; 
Kvu  476  ;  Vism  206  sq.  ;  Vbh  336 ;  Nd'  356  (with  the 
stages  from  one  to  fifty  lokadh&tu's,  upon  which  follow  : 
sahassi  culanikS.  1-dh.  ;  dvisahassi  majjhimika ;  tisa- 
hassi ;  mahasahassi) ;  J  1.63,  2  12  ;  Miln  237  ;  VbhA  430, 
436.  See  also  culanikci.  -natha  saviour  of  the  world, 
Ep.  of  the  Buddha  Sn  995  ;  Vism  201,  234  ;  VvA  165  ; 


Lokiya 


46 


Loma 


PVA42,  287.  -nayaka  guide  or  leader  of  the  world  (said 
of  the  Buddha)  Sn  991  ;  Ap  20  ;  Mhvs  7,  i  ;  Miln  222. 
-nirodha  destruction  of  the  world  It  121  (opp.  "samu- 
daya).  -pala  (°devata)  guardian  (governor)  of  the 
world,  which  are  usually  sepcified  a.s  four,  viz.  Kuvera 
(=Vessavai>a),  Dhatarattha,  Virupakkha,  VirOlhaka, 
alias  the  4  maharajano  Pv  1.4^ ;  J  1.48  (announce  the 
future  birth  of  a  Buddha),  -byiiha  "  world -array," 
pi.  byiiha.  (deva)  N.  of  a  class  of  devas  J  1.47  ;  Vism  415 
(kaiuavacara-deva's).  -mariyada  the  boundary  of  the 
world  VvA  72.  -vajja  common  sins  Miln  266;  KhA 
190.  -vatta  "  world-round,"  i.  e.  sagsara  (opp.  vivatta 
=  nibbana)  Nett  113,  119.  See  also  vatta.  -vidu 
knowing  the  universe,  Ep.  of  the  Buddha  D  111.76  ; 
S  1.62  ;  V.197,  343  ;  A  11.48  ;  Sn  p.  103  ;  Vv  34^  ;  Pug 
•  57 ;  expN  in  full  at  SnA  442  and  Vism  204  sq.  -viva- 
rana  unveiling  of  the  universe,  apocalypse,  revelation 
Vism  392  (when  humans  see  the  devas  etc.).  -vohara 
common  or  general  distinction,  popular  logic,  ordinary 
way  of  speaking  SnA  383,  466  ;  VbhA  164. 

Lokiya  (&  lokika)  (adj.)  [fr.  loka;  cp.  Vedic  laukika  in 
meaning  "  w6rldly,  usual"]  i.  (ordinarily)  "belonging 
to  the  world,"  i.  e.  —  (a)  world-wide,  covering  the  whole 
world,  famed,  widely  known  Th  i,  554;  J  vi.198.  • — 
(b)  (-")  belonging  to  the  world  of,  an  inhabitant  of 
(as  lokika)  Pv  1.6^  (Yama").  —  (c)  common,  general, 
worldly  Vism  89  (samadhi) ;  DhA  IV.3  ("mahajana) 
PvA  131  ("parikkhaka),  207  (sukha),  220  ("sabhava). 
See  also  below  3. — -2.  (special  meaning)  worldly, 
mundane,  when  opposed  to  lokuttara.  The  term 
lokuttara  has  two  meanings —  viz.  (a)  in  ordinary  sense  : 
the  highest  of  the  world,  best,  sublime  (like  lokagga, 
etc.),  often  applied  to  Arahantship,  e.  g.  lokuttara- 
dayajja  inheritance  of  Arahantship  J  i.gi  ;  DhA  1.117; 
ideal ;  lokuttara  dhamma  (like  pararaa  dhamma)  the 
ideal  state,  viz.  Nibbana  M  11. 181  ;  pi.  1.  dhamma 
Mm. 1 15. — •  (b)  (in  later  canonical  literature)  beyond 
these  worlds,  supra-iriundane,  transcendental,  spiritual. 
In  this  meaning  it  is  applied  to  the  group  of  nava 
lokuttara  dhamma  (viz.  the  4  stages  of  the  Path : 
sotapatti  etc.,  with  the  4  phala's,  and  the  addition  of 
nibbana),  e.  g.  Dhs  1094.  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  tries  to  com- 
promise between  the  two  meanings  by  giving  lokuttara 
the  trsl"  "  engaged  upon  the  higher  ideal  "  (Dhs.  isrl. 
Introd.  p.  98),  since  meaning  (b)  has  too  much  of  a 
one-sided  philosophical  appearance.  On  term  cp. 
Cpd.  91'.  —  3.  lokiya  (in  meaning  "  mundane  ")  is  con- 
trasted with  lokuttara  ("transcendental")  at  many- 
passages  of  the  Abhidhamma,  e.  g.  at  Ps  11. 166;  Dhs. 
505,  1093.  1446 ;  Vbh  17  sq.,  93,  106,  128,  229  sq.,  271, 
322  ;  Kvu  222,  515,  602  ;  Pug  62  ;  Tikp  41  sq.,  52  sq., 
275;  Dukp  304,  324;  Nett  10,  54,  67,  77,  III,  161  sq.. 
189  sq. ;  Miln  236,  294  (lokika),  390  ;  Vism  10,  85,  438  ; 
DA  1. 331  ;  DhsA  47  sq.,  213  ;  VbhA  128,  373  ;  DhA  1.76 
(lokika) ;  II. 150  ;  111.272  ;  iv.35. 

Locaka  (adj.)  [fr.  loc.  Cans,  of  lunc ;  cp.  Sk.  luncaka]  one 
who  pulls  out  D  1. 167  (kesa-massu",  habit  of  cert, 
ascetics) ;  M  1.308  (id.). 

Locana^  [fr.  loc  or  lok  to  see  ;  Dhtp  532  &  Dhtm  766  :  loc  = 
dassana]  the  eye;  adj.  (-")  having  eyes  (of  .  .  .)  Pv 
Ml'  (miga-manda°) ;  PvA  57,  90  (pingala°). 

Locana'  (nt.)  [fr.  loc.  Cans,  of  luncati]  pulling,  tearing 
out  D  1.167  (kesa-massu°) ;  A  1.296  ;  Pug  55. 

Loceti  see  luiicati. 

Lotaaa  (nt.)  [lut,  cp.  ♦Sk.  lolana  &  vilojana]  shaking, 
upsetting  Dhtm  117.     Cp.  vi°. 

LoQa  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  lavana,  for  which  see  also  lavana.  The 
Prk.  form  is  lona]  salt ;  as  adj.,  salty,  of  salt,  alkaline. 
—  Vin    1. 202    (lo^Ja.ni    bbesajjani    alkaline    medicine. 


among  which  are  given  samuddar)  kalaloijai)  sindhavar) 
ubbhidar)  bilag  as  var.  kinds  of  salt),  220  =  243  (as 
flavouring,  with  tela,  tandula  &  khadaniya) ;  A  1.2 10, 
250  ;  IV.  108  ;  Miln  63  ;  DhA  iv.176  (in  simile  see  below) ; 
VvA  98,  loo,  184  (alona  sukkha-kumraasa,  unsalted). 
On  lona  in  similes  cp.  J.P.T.S.  1907.  131. 

-ambila  jcid  and  salt  J  1.505;  n.171,  394.  -odaka 
salt  water  J  vi.37  ;  VvA  99  ("udaka).  -kara  salt-maker 
Vin  1.350  Cgama) ;  A  11.182  ("daraka) ;  J  vi.206  (kara) ; 
Miln  331.  -ghata  a  pitcher  with  salt  S  11.276.  See 
also  App.  to  KhA  68  (in  Sn  Index  870,  871)  on  Vism 
passage  with  lonaghataka.  -dhupana  salt-spicing 
VbhA  311  (viya  sabba  vyafijanesu  ;  i.  e.  the  strongest 
among  all  flavourings),  -phala  a  crystal  of  (natural) 
salt  [phala  for  phata=*sphata,  cp.  phalaka]  A  1.250 
(in  simile),  -rasa  alkaline  taste  A  iv.199,  203.  .sak- 
khara  a  salt  crj'stal  (cp.  "phala),  a  (solid)  piece  of 
(natural)  salt  S  11.276  (in  simile,  cp.  A  1.250) ;  SnA  222 
(aggimhi  pakkhitta  1-s.,  in  the  same  simile  at  DhA 
IV.  1 76  :  uddhane  pakkhitta-lona).  -sakkharika  a  piece 
of  salt-crystal,  used  as  a  caustic  for  healing  wounds 
Vin  1.206.  -sOTiraka  salted  sour  gruel  Vin  1.210; 
VvA  99. 

Lokika  &  LoQiya  (adj.)  [fr.  loiia]  salty,  alkaline  Dhs  629. 
— loniya-teliya  prepared  with  salt  &  oil  J  111.522  ; 
IV. 71.  — alonika  unsalted  42'  (°aka) ;  VvA  184  ;  J  1.228  ; 
III. 409. 

Lodda  [cp.  *Sk.  rodhra ;  on  sound  changes  see  Geiger, 
P.Gr.  44,  62^]  N.  of  a  tree  J  v.405  ;  vi.497. 

Lopa  [fr.  lup :  see  lumpati]  taking  away,  cutting  off ;  as 
tt.  g.  apocope,  elision  (of  the  final  letter)  VbhA  164 
(sabba-loka-vohara°)  ;  SnA  12,  303,  508;  VvA  79; 
often  in  anunasika°  dropping  of  (final)  g  SnA  410; 
VvA  154,  275.  At  S  V.342  read  pindiy  'alopena 
for  pindiya  lopena.  —  Cp.  alopa,  nillopa,  vilopa, 
vilopiya. 

Lobha  [cp.  Vedic  &  Epic  Sk.  lobha ;  fr.  lubh;  see  lub- 
bhati]  covetousness,  greed.  Defined  at  Vism  468  as 
"  lubbhanti  tena,  sayag  va  lubbhati.  lubbhana-mattam 
eva  va  tar),"  with  several  comparisons  following.  — 
Often  found  in  triad  of  lobha,  dosa,  moha  (greed,  anger, 
bewilderment,  forming  the  three  principles  of  demerit : 
see  kusala-mula),  e.  g.  at  A  iv.g6 ;  It  83,  84  ;  Vism  116; 
Dukp  9,  18  sq.  See  dosa  &  moha.  —  D  111.214,  275; 
S  1. 16,  43,  63,  123  (bhava°);  v.88  ;  A  1.64  ("kkhaya), 
160  (visama°),  cp.  D  111.70  sq.  ;  11.67;  Sn  367,  371,  537 
(°kodha),  663,  706,  864.  941  (°papa) ;  Nd^  15,  16,  261  ; 
J  IV.  1 1  (kodha,  dosa,  1. ) ;  Dhs  982 ,  1059  ;  Vbh  208,  341 , 
381,  402  ;  Nett  13,  27 ;  Vism  103  ;  VbhA  18  ;  PvA  7,  13, 
17,  89  (-(-dosa),  102  ;  VvA  14;  Sdhp  52  (°moha),  266. 
— alobha  disinterestedness  D  111.214;  Dhs  32. 

-dhamma  (pi.)  affection  of  greed,  things  belonging  to 
greed;  (adj.)  (of)  greedy  character  M  1.91  ;  111.37;  D 
1.224,  230;  S  IV. in;  A  in. 350  ;  J  iv.ii.  -mula  the 
root  of  greed  Vism  454  (eightfold ;  with  dosa-mula  & 
moha-mula). 

Lobhana  (nt.)  [fr.  lobha]  being  greedy  Th  2,  343  (  =  lobh' 
uppada  ThA  240). 

Lobhaniya  (°iya,  "eyya)  (adj.)  [grd.  formation  fr.  lobha] 
I .  belonging  to  greed  "  of  the  nature  of  greed  "  causing 
greed  It  84  (°eyya).  See  rajaniya.  —  2.  desirable  Miln 
361  (paduma). 

Loma  (ut.)  [cp.  Vedic  roman.  The  (restituted)  late  P. 
form  roma  only  at  J  v. 430  ;  Abhp  175,  259  ;  Sdhp  1 19] 
the  hair  of  the  body  (whereas  kesa  is  the  hair  of  the 
head  only)  D  11. 1 8  (ekeka",  uddhagga",  in  characteristics 
of  a  Mahapurisa) ;  S  11.257  (asi",  usu°,  satti°  etc.) ; 
A  II. 1 14;  Vin  III. 106  (usu°  etc.);  Sn  385;  J  1.273 
(khaggo  lomesu  alliyi) ;  VbhA  57;  DhA  1.126;  11. 17 


Lomaka 


47 


Lohita 


(°ganana) ;  ThA  199;  VvA  324  (sukara") ;  PvA  152, 
157  ;  Sdhp  104.  A  detailed  description  of  loma  as  one 
of  the  32  akaras  of  the  bodj-  (Kh  iii.  ;  pi.  loma)  is  found 
at  Vism  250,  353  ;  VbhA  233  ;  KhA  42,  43.  — aloma 
hairless  J  vi.457  ;  puthu"  having  broad  hair  or  fins, 
name  of  a  fish  J  iv.466 ;  Vv  4^^^.  hattha"  with  hairs 
erect,  excited  Mhvs  15,  33.  —  On  loma  in  similes  see 
J.P.T.S.  1907,  131.  — lomat)  pateti  to  let  one's  hair 
drop,  as  a  sign  of  subduedness  or  modesty,  opp.  to 
horripilation  [pateti  formed  fr.  pat  after  wrong  etym. 
of  panna  in  panna-loma  "  with  drooping  hairs,"  which 
was  taken  as  a  by-form  of  patita :  see  panna-loma]  : 
Vin  II. 5  (=pannalomo  hoti  C.) ;  in. 183;  M  1.442. — 
Cp.  anu°,  pati°,  vi°. 

-kOpa  a  pore  of  the  skin  J  1.67  ;  KhA  51,  63  ;  SnA  155 
(where  given  as  99,000)  Vism  195  (id,),  -padmaka  a 
kind  of  plant  J  vi.497  (reading  uncertain  ;  v.  1.  lodda°). 
-sundari  (f.)  beautiful  with  hairs  (on  her  body)  J  v.424 
(Kurangavi  I.  ;  expl''  on  p.  430  as  "  roma-rajiya  mandita 
udara").  -harjsa  horripilation,  excitement  with  fear 
or  wonder,  thrill  D  1.49;  A  iv.311  sq.  (sa°) ;  Sn  270; 
Vbh  367;  Miln  22;  Vism  143;  DA  1.150.  -hagsana 
causing  horripilation,  astounding,  stupendous  Sn  681  ; 
J  lv-355  (abbhuta-(- ) ;  Pv  111.9';  IV.3' ;  Miln  i  ;  Mhvs 
'7.  55  (abbhuta-l- ).  -hattha  having  the  hair  standing 
on  end,  horrified,  thunderstruck,  astounded  D  1.95  ; 
S  V.270  ;  Sn  p.  15  ;  Miln  23  ;  SnA  155  ;  cp.  hattha-loma 
above. 

Lomaka  (-°)  (adj.)  [fr.loma]  havinghair,  incpd.  caturanga" 
having  fourfold  hair  ( i .  e.  on  the  diS.  parts  of  the  body  ? ) 
Vin  IV. 1 73.  It  may  refer  to  the  5  dermatoid  con- 
stituents of  the  body  (see  pancaka)  &  thus  be  charac- 
teristic of  outward  appearance.  We  do  not  exactly 
see  how  the  term  caturanga  is  used  here.  —  Cp.  anulo- 
mika. 

Lomasa  (adj.)  [cp.  Vedic  roma^a]  hairy,  covered  with  hair, 
downy,  soft  M  1.305  ;  Pv  1.9*.  At  J  iv.296  lomasa  is 
exp\^  as  pakkhino,  i.  e.  birds  ;  reading  however  doubtful 
(vv.  11.  lomaharjsa  &  lomassa). 

Lomin  (-°)  (adj.)  [fr.  loma]  having  hair,  in  cpds.  ekanta° 
cS:  uddha°,  of  (couch-)  covers  or  (bed)  spreads  :  being 
made  of  hair  altogether  or  having  hair  only  on  top 
Vin  1.192  =  11.163  ;  D  1.7  ;  cp.  DA  1.87. 

Lola  (Lola)  (adj.)  [fr,  lu}:  see  lujati ;  cp.  Epic  &  Classic 
Sk.  lola]  wavering,  unsteady,  agitated  ;  longing,  eager, 
greedy  S  iv.in  ;  Sn  22,  922  ;  J  1.49  (Buddha-mata  lola 
na  hoti),  iii,  210,  339  (dhana-lola) ;  11. 319  (°manussa) ; 
III. 7  ;  Pug  65  ;  Nd'  366  ;  Davs  iv.44  ;  Miln  300.  — alola 
not  greedy,  not  distracted  (by  desire),  self-controlled 
S  V.148;  Sn  65. 

-bhava  greediness,  covetousness  ThA  16. 

Lolata  (f.)  [fr.  lola]  longing,  eagerness,  greed  Miln  93  ; 
SnA  35  (ahara°). 

Lolita  [pp.  of  loleti]  agitated,  shaken  Th  2,  373  (=alolita 
ThA  252). 

Lolapa  (adj.)  [fr.  lup,  a  base  of  lumpati  but  influenced  by 
labh,  probably  also  by  lola.  See  lumpati]  covetous, 
greedy,  self-indulgent  Davs  11.73.  a°  "ot  greedy,  tem- 
perate Sn  165.  Cp.  nil°.  —  f.  lolupa  as  N.  of  a  plant  at 
J  VI. 537- 

Lolnppa  (nt.)  [abstr,  fr.  lolupa]  greediness,  covetousness. 
self-indulgence,  desire  ;  in  the  language  of  the  Abhi- 
dhamma  often  syn,  with  jappa  or  tanha.  At  DhsA  36.5 
loluppa  is  treated  as  an  adj.  &  expl*  at  "  punappuna 
visaye  lumpati  akaddhati  ti,"  i.  e.  one  who  tears 
again  &  again  at  the  object  (or  as  Expos,  n.470  :  re- 
peated plundering,  hauling  along  in  the  fields  of  sense) 
—  J  1.340,  429  ;  DhsA  365  ;  Vism  61  ;  &  with  exegetical 


synonyms  loluppayana  &  loluppayitattat]  at  Dhs  1059, 
1 136. 

Loleti  [Caus.  fr.  Inl,  see  lujati]  to  make  shake  or  unstead}' 
A  III.  1 88  (khobheti-f  ).  —  pp.  lolita. 

LoU  see  aloli. 

Loha  (nt.)  [Cp.  Vedic  loha,  of  Idg.  *(e)rendh  "  red  "  ;  see 
also  rohita  &  lohita]  metal,  esp.  copper,  brass  or  bronze. 
It  is  often  used  as  a  general  term  &  the  individual 
application  is  not  always  sharply  defined.  Its  com- 
prehensiveness is  evident  from  the  classification  of  loha 
at  VbhA  63,  where  it  is  said  lohan  ti  jatilohai),  vijati", 
kittima",  pisaca"  or  natural  metal,  produced  metal, 
artificial  (i.  e.  alloys),  &  metal  from  the  Pisaca  district. 
Each  is  subdivided  as  follows:  jati°  =  ayo,  sajjhai), 
suvannar),  tipu,  sisar),  tambalohai),  vekantakalohai)  ; 
vijati''  =  naga-nasika'' ;  kittima°=kar|salohar),  vatta", 
arakutag  ;  pisaca"  =  morakkhakar),  puthukar),  malina- 
kag,  capalakag,  selakarj,  atakai),  bhallakag,  dusilohag. 
The  description  ends  "  Tesu  panca  jatilohani  pajiyag 
visur)  vuttan'  eva  (i.  e.  the  first  category  are  severally 
spoken  of  in  the  Canon).  Tambalohag  vekantakan  ti 
imehi  pana  dvihi  jatilohehi  saddhig  sesag  sabbam  pi 
idha  lohan  ti  veditabbag."  —  On  loha  in  similes  see 
J.P.T.S.  1907,  131.  Cp.  A  ili,i6=S  V.92  (five  alloys  of 
gold:  ayo,  loha,  tipu,  sisag,  sajjhag);  J  v. 45  (asi") ; 
Miln  161  (suvannam  pi  jativantag  lohena  bhijjati) ; 
PvA  44,  95  (tamba°  =  loha),  221  (tatta-loha-secanag 
pouring  out  of  boiling  metal,  one  of  the  five  ordeals  in 
Niraya). 

-kataha  a  copper  (brass)receptacle  Vinii.170.  -kara 
a  metal  worker,  coppersmith,  blacksmith  Miln  331. 
-kumbhi  an  iron  cauldron  Vin  11. 170.  Also  N.  of  a 
purgatory  J  111.22,  43  ;  iv.493  ;  v.268  ;  SnA  59,  480  ; 
Sdhp  195.  -gula  an  iron  (or  metal)  ball  A  iv.131  ;  Dh 
371  (ma  °g  gili  pamatto ;  cp.  DhA  iv.109).  -jala  a 
copper  (i.  e.  wire)  netting  PvA  153.  -thalaka  a  copper 
bowl  Nd^  226.  -thali  a  bronze  kettle  DhA  1.126. 
-pasada  "  copper  terrace,"  brazen  palace,  N.  of  a 
famous  monastery  at  Anuradhapura  in  Ceylon  Vism 
97  ;  DA  1.131  ;  Mhvs  passim,  -pinda  an  iron  ball  SnA 
225.  -bhanda  copper  (brass)  ware  Vin  11. 135.  -maya 
made  of  copper,  brazen  Sn  670  ;  Pvii.6*.  -masa  a  copper 
bean  Nd^  448  (suvanna-channa).  -masaka  a  small 
copper  coin  KhA  37  (jatu-masaka,  daru-masaka-f )  ; 
DhsA3i8.  -riipa  a  bronze  statue  Mhvs  36,  3 1 .  -salaka 
a  bronze  gong-stick  Vism  283. 

Lohata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  loha]  being  a  metal,  in  (suvannassa) 
aggalohata  the  fact  of  gold  being  the  best  metal 
VvA  13. 

Lohita  (adj.-nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  lohita  &  rohita;  see  also  P. 
rohita  "  red  "]  i.  (adj.)  red  :  rarely  by  itself  (e.  g.  M 
II. 17).  usually  in  cpds.  e.  g.  °abhijati  the  red  species 
(q.  V.)  A  III. 383 ;  °kasina  the  artifice  of  red  D  ni.268 ; 
A.  1.4 1  ;  Dhs  203;  Vism  173;  °candana  red  sandal 
(unguent)  Miln  191.  Otherwise  rohita.  —  2.  (nt.) 
blood  ;  described  in  detail  as  one  of  the  32  akaras  at 
KhA  54  sq. ;  Vism  261,  360;  VbhA  245.^ — Vin  1.203 
(imaka"),  205  (°g  mocetug)  ;  A  iv.i35  (satthi-mattanag 
bhikkhunag  unhag  1.  mukhato  ugganchi ;  cp.  the 
similar  passage  at  Miln  165);  Sn  433;  Pv  1.6';  1.9' 
(expl*  as  ruhira  PvA  44) ;  Vism  261  (two  kinds  :  san- 
nicita°  and  sagsarana°),  409  (the  colour  of  the  heart- 
blood  in  relation  to  states  of  mind) ;  VbhA  66  ;  PvA  56, 
78,  1 10. 

-akkha  having  red  (blood-shot)  eyes  (of  snakes  & 
yakkhas)  Vv  52*  (cp.  VvA  224  :  ratta-nayana ;  yak- 
khanag  hi  nettani  ati-!ohitani  honti) ;  J  vi.180.  -up- 
pada  (the  crime  of)  wounding  a  Tathagata,  one  of  the 
anantariya-kammas  VbhA  427;  cp.  Tathagatassa 
lohitag  uppadeti  Miln  214.  -uppadaka  one  who  sheds 
the  blood  of  an  Arahant  Vin  1.89,    136,  320;  v. 222. 


Lohitaka 


48 


Varjsa 


-kumbhi  a  receptacle  for  blood  Ud  1 7  (with  ref .  to  the 
womb),  -doni  a  bloody  trough  Vism  358;  VbhA  62. 
-pakkhandika  (or  °pakkhandik'  abadha)  bloody  diar- 
rhoea, dysentery  M  1.316;  D  II. 127;  Ud  82  ;  J  11. 213; 
Miln  134,  175  ;  DhA  111.269.  -homa  a  sacrifice  of  blood 
D  1.9  ;  DA  1.93. 


Lohitaka  (adj.)    [fr.  lohita]    i. 
349;  Ap.  1  ;  Dhs  247.  617. 


red  M   11. 14;   A   iv.306, 
-°upadhana  a  red  pillow 


D  1.7;  A  1. 137; 
rice  Miln  252.— 
Vism  179.  194. 


III. 50;    1V.94,    231.    394: 
2.  bloody   Pv    1.7*    (puti" 


°sali  red 

gabbha) ; 


Lohitanka  [lohita  +  anka]  a  ruby  A  iv.199.  203;  Ap  2; 
Vv  36^  ;  VvA  304.  See  masaragalla  for  further  refs.  — 
Note.  The  word  is  not  found  in  Vedic  and  Class.  Sk.  ; 
a  later  term  for  "ruby"  is  lohitaka.  In  the  older 
language  lohitanga  denotes  the  planet  Mars. 


L. 


Llyati  is  given  at  Dhtp  361  as  a  variant  of  4i  to  fly  (see  deti),  and  expl'*  as  "  akasa-gamana." 
Similarly  at  Dhtm  586  as  "  vehasa-gamana." 


V. 


-V-  euphonic  (sandhi)  consonant,  historically  justified 
after  u  (uv  from  older  v),  as  in  su-v-anaya  easy  to  bring 
(S  1.124);  hence  transferred  to  i,  as  in  ti-v-angika 
threefold  (Dhs  161).  and  ti-v-angula  three  inches  wide 
(Vism  152,  408);  perhaps  also  in  anu-v-icca  (see  anu- 
vicca). 

Va'  the  syllable  "  va  "'  KhA  109  (with  ref.  to  ending  °va 
in  Bhagava,  which  Bdhgh  exp'*  as  "  va-kararj  dighar) 
katva,"  i.  e.  a  lengthening  of  va) ;  SnA  76  (see  below  va^). 

Va'  (indecl.)  [the  enclitic,  shortened  form  of  iva  after  long 
vowels.  Already  to  be  found  for  iva  in  RV  metri 
causa]  like,  like  as.  as  if  ;  only  in  poetry  (as  already 
pointed  out  by  Trenckner.  Miln  422) :  It  84  (talapakkar) 
va  bandhana).  90  (chavalatag  va  nassati) ;  Dh  28; 
Sn  38  (vagso  visalo  va  :  see  C.  expl"  under  va')  ;  Pv 
1.8'  (ummatta-rupo  va  ;  =  viya  PvA  39) :  1. 1 1'  (nalo  va 
chinno) ;  Miln  72  (chaya  va  anapayini) ;  J  111.189  (kusa- 
muddo  va  ghosava) ;  iv.139  (aggiva  suriyo  va);  DhA 
111.175. 

Va'  (indecl.)  [for  eva,  after  long  vowels]  even,  just  (so), 
only;  for  sure,  certainly  Dh  136  (aggi-daddho  va 
tappati) ;  J  1.138.  149  (so  pi  suvanna-vaiino  va  ahosi), 
207;  SnA  76  (vakaro  avadharan'  attho  eva-k5ro  va 
ayar).  sandhi-vasen'  ettha  e-karo  nattho  :  wrong  at  this 
passage  Sn  38  for  va2  =  iva  !) ;  PvA  3  (eko  va  putto).  4 
(fiatamatta  va). 

Va*  is  (metrically)  shortened  form  of  va,  as  found  e.  g. 
Dh  195  (yadi  va  for  yadi  va) ;  or  in  correlation  va-va 
either-or  :  Dh  108  (yifthai)  va  hutar)  va).  138  (abadhar) 
va  cittakkhepar)  va  papune). 

VaQSa  [Vedic  vai)^a  reed,  bamboo  (R.V.)]  i.  a  bamboo 
Sn  38  (varjso  visalo  va  ;  vagso  expli*  at  Nd*  556  as 
"  velugumba,"  at  SnA  76  as  "  velu  "),  ibid.  (°kalira)  ; 


J  VI. 57;  Vism  255  ("kalira);  KhA  50  (id.). —  2.  race, 
lineage,  family  A  11.27  (ariya°  of  noble  family);  S 
v.  168  (candala°);  J  1.89,  139;  iv.390  (candala°);  v. 251 
(uju°) ;  Mhvs  4.  5  (pitu-ghataka-vai)so  a  parricidal  race). 

—  3.  tradition,  hereditary  custom,  usage,  reputation 
Miln  168  (acariya"),  190  (Tathagatanai)) ;  KhA  12 
(Buddha");  Dpvs  18,  3  (saddhamma°-kovida  thera). 
— vatjsat)  naseti  to  break  family  tradition  J  v.  383  ; 
varjsai)  ucchindati  id.  J  v. 383  ;  or  upacchindati  J  iv.63  ; 
opp.  patitthapeti  to  establish  the  reputation   J    v. 386. 

—  4,  dynasty  Mhvs  36,  61  (kassa  v.  thassati). —  5.  a 
bamboo  flute,  fife  Miln  31;  VvA  210.  —  6.  a  certain 
game,  at  D  1.6  in  enum"  of  pastimes  and  tricks  (caiida- 
lavai)sa-dhopana),  a  passage  which  shows  an  old  corrup- 
tion. Bdhgh  at  DA  1.84  takes  each  word  separately 
and  expl"  varjsa  as  "  venur)  ussapetva  kilanar)  "  (i.  e. 
a  game  consisting  in  raising  a  bamboo  ;  is  it  climbing  a 
pole  ?  Cp.  vagsa-ghatika"  akindof  game"  Divy475), 
against  Dial.  1.9  "  acrobatic  feats  by  Candalas."  Cp. 
J  IV. 390  in  same  passage.  Franke  (Digha  trcl')  has 
"bamboo-tricks";  his  conjecture  as  "  var)sa-dhama- 
nai),"  playing  the  bamboo  pipe  (cp.  Miln  31  :  "  varjsa- 
dhamaka  "),  as  oldest  reading  is  to  be  pointed  out.  — 
On  var)sa  in  similes  see  J.P.T.S.  1907,  I34- 

-agata  come  down  fr.  father  to  son.  hereditary  Mhvs 
23.  85.  -anupalaka  guarding  tradition  Sdhp  474 
(ariya°).  -anurakkhaka  preserving  the  lineage,  carrying 
on  the  tradition  J  iv,444;  Vism  99  (-|-paveni-palaka) ; 
DhA  III. 386.  -coraka  N.  of  a  certain  kind  of  reed  (cp. 
coraka  :  plant  used  for  perfume)  J  v. 406  (C.  for  ve)uka). 
-ja  belonging  to  a  race  Mhvs  i.  i  (suddha°).  -fifia  born 
of  good  family  A  11.27.  -dhara  upholding  tradition 
Miln  164.  -dharana  id.  Miln  226.  -nalaka  bamboo 
reed  KhA  52,  59  (with  note  Sn  Index  p.  870  :  nalaka). 
-nala  id.  Miln  102.  -raga  the  colour  of  bamboo,  a  term 
for  the  veluriya  gem  J  iv.141.  -vanna  the  veluriya 
gem  Abhp  491. 


Varjsika 


49 


Vankata 


Vagsika  (-°)  (adj.)  [fr.  vai)sa]  descended  from,  belonging 
to  a  family  (of)  S  v.i68  (candala°). 

Vaka'  [Vedic  vrka,  Idg.  ♦ulquo=Lat.  lupus,  Gr.  \vkos, 
Lith.  vilkas,  Goth.  wulfs  =  E.  wolf  etc.]  wolf,  only  in 
poetry  Sn  201  ;  J  1.336 ;  11.450  ;  v. 241,  302. 

Vaka^  (indecl.) :  a  root  vak  is  given  at  Dhtp  7  &  Dhtm  8 
in  meaning  "  adane,"  i.  e.  grasping,  together  with  aroot 
kuk  as  synonym.  It  may  refer  to  vaka^  wolf,  whereas 
kuk  would  explain  koka  wolf.  The  notion  of  voracious- 
ness is  prevalent  in  the  characterization  of  the  wolf  (see 
all  passages  of  vaka',  e.  g.  J  v. 302). 

Vakola  [cp.  *Sk.  vakula]  a  tree  (Mimusops  elengi) 
J  V.420. 

Vakka^  (adj.)  [Vedic  vakra  ;  the  usual  P.  form  is  vanka] 
crooked  J  1.2 16. 

Vakka'  (nt.)  [Vedic  vfkka]  the  kidney  Sn  195;  Kh  in.  ; 
Miln  26  ;  DhsA  140.  In  detail  described  as  one  of  the 
32  dkSras  at  Vism  255,  356;  VbhA  60,  239,  356. 

-paficaka  the  series  of  five  (constituents  of  the  body) 
beginning  with  the  kidney.  These  are  vakka,  hadaya, 
yakana,  kilomaka,  pihaka  :  VbhA  249. 

Vakkanga  [vakkar)  +  ga]  a  term  for  bird,  poetically  for 
sakuna  J  1.2 16  (tesar)  ubhosu  passesu  pakkha  vanka 
jata  ti  vakkanga  C). 

Vakkhati  is  fut.  of  vac:  he  will  say,  e.  g.  at  Vin  11. 190  ; 
IV, 238.     See  vatti. 

Vakkala[cp.  BSk.  valkala  (e.  g.  Jtm2io) :  see  vaka]  i.  the 
bark  of  a  tree  J  11. 13  (°antar£);  in. 522.  —  2.  a  bark 
garment  (worn  by  ascetics) :  see  vakkali. 

Vakkalaka  ("  bark-like,"  or  "  tuft  "  ?)  is  at  KhA  50  as 
the  Vism  reading,  where  KhA  reads  daijda.  The 
P.T.S.  ed.  of  Vism  (p.  255)  reads  wrongly  cakkalaka. 

Vakkali  [in  comp"  for  in]  wearing  a  garment  of  bark,  an 
ascetic,  lit.  "  barker  "  J  11.274  (°sadda  the  sound  of  the 
bark-garment-wearer).     See  also  Np.  Vakkali. 

Vakkalika  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  vakkala]  in  danta"  peeling  bark 
with  one's  teeth,  designation  of  a  cert,  kind  of  ascetics 
DA  1. 271. 

Vagga^  [Vedic  varga.  fr.  VTJ  •  cp.  Lat.  volgus  &  vulgus 
(=E.  vulgar)  crowd,  people]  i.  a  company,  section, 
group,  party  Vin  1.58  (du°,  ti°),  195  (dasa°  a  chapter  of 
10  bhikkhus).  —  2.  a  section  or  chapter  of  a  canonical 
book  DhA  1. 158  (eka-vagga-dvi-vagga-mattam  pi)  ; 
DhsA  27. 

-uposatha  celebration  (of  the  uposatha)  in  groups, 
"  incomplete  congregation  "  (trsl"  Oldenberg)  Dpvs  7, 
36.  More  likely  to  vagga* !  -gata  following  a  (sec- 
tarian) party  (Bdhgh  identifies  this  with  the  62  diffhi- 
gatika  SnA  365)  S  1.187;  Sn  371.  -bandha,  in  instr. 
°ena  group  by  group  Mhvs  32,  11.  -bandhana  banded 
together,  forming  groups  DhA  iv.93,  94.  -vagga  in 
crowds,  confused,  heaped  up  J  vi.224  ;  PvA  54.  -vadaka 
taking  somebody's  part  Vin  111.175.  -sarin  conforming 
to  a  (heretic)  party  Sn  371,  800,  912  ;  Nd'  108,  329. 

Vagga*  (adj.-nt.)  [vi-t-agga,  Sk.  vyagra ;  opposed  to 
samagga]  dissociated,  separated  ;  incomplete  ;  at  differ- 
ence, dissentious  Vin  i.i  1 1  sq.,  129,  160  ;  iv.53  (sangha) ; 
A  1.70  (parisa) ;  11.240. — instr.  vaggena  separately, 
secessionally,  sectariously  Vin  1.161  ;  iv.37,  126. 

-arama  fond  of  dissociation  or  causing  separation 
M  1.286;  It  II  (-(-adhamma-ttha ;  trsl"  Seidenstucker 
not  quite  to  the  point  :  rejoicing  in  parties,  i.  e.  vagga') 
=  Vin  11.205.  -kamma  (ecclesiastical)  act  of  an  in- 
complete chapter  of  bhikkhus  Vin  1.3 15  sq.  (opp.  sam- 
agga-kamma).     -rata  =  °arama. 


Vaggati  [valg,  to  which  belong  Oicel.  valka  to  roll ;  Ags. 
wealkan  =  E.  walk]  to  jump  Vv  64*  (expl''  at  VvA  278 
as  "  kadaci  pade  padai)  "  [better:  padapadai)  ?]  nikkhi- 
panta  vagganena  gamane  [read :  vagga-gamanena] 
gacchanti) ;  J  11.335,  404  )  iv-Si,  343  ;  v.473. 

Vaggatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  vagga']  distraction,  dissension, 
secession,  sectarianism  Vin  1.316  (opp.  samaggatta). 

Vagganasee  vaggati  (ref.  of  Vv  64»). 

Vaggiya  (-°)  (adj.)  [fr.  vagga']  belonging  to  a  group,  form- 
ing a  company,  a  party  of  (-°),  e.  g.  paficavaggiya  thera 
J  1.57,  82  ;  bhikkhu  M  1.70  ;  11.94 :  chabbaggiya  bhikkhu 
(the  group  of  6  bh.)  Vin  i.iii  sq.,  316  sq.  &  passim; 
sattarasa- vaggiya  bhikkhQ  (group  of  17)  Vin  iv.112. 

VaggU  (adj.)  [cp.  Vedic  valgu,  fr.  valg;  freq.  in  comb"  with 
vadati  "to  speak  lovely  words"]  lovely,  beautiful, 
pleasant,  usually  of  sound  (sara)D  11.20  (°ssara)  ;  Si.  180, 
190;  Sn  350,  668;  Vv  5',  36'.  36*  ("rflpa),  50"  (gira), 
63*.  64'"  (ghoso  suvaggu),  6420,  67*,  84";  Pv  i.ii'; 
11.12' ;  111.3*  ;  J  11.439;  111.21  ;  v. 215;  Sdhp  245.  The 
foil,  synonyms  are  frequently  given  in  VvA  &  PvA  as 
expl"  of  vaggu  :  abhirupa,  caru,  madhura,  rucira, 
savaniya,  siniddha,  sundara,  sobhana. 

-vada  of  lovely  speech  or  enunciation  Sn  955  (  =  ma- 
dhura-vada,  pemaniya-vada,  hadayangama°,  karavika- 
ruda-mai^ju-ssara  Nd'  446). 

Vaggnli  &  °i  (m.  &  f.)  [cp.  Sk.  valguli,  of  valg  to  flutter]  a 
bat  Vin  11.148;  Miln  364,  404;  Vism  663  (in  simile); 
DhA  III. 223. 

-rukkha  a  tree  on  which  bats  live  Vism  74.  -vata 
"  bat-practice,"  a  certain  practice  of  ascetics  J  1.493  ; 
III. 235  ;  IV. 299. 

Vanka  (adj.-n.)  [cp.  Vedic  vanka  &  vakra  bending;  also 
Ved.  vanku  moving,  fluttering,  walking  slant ;  vaflcati 
to  waver,  walk  crooked.  Cp.  Lat.  con-vexus  "  convex." 
Ags.  woh  "  wrong,"  Goth,  wahs  ;  Ohg.  wanga  cheek, 
and  others.  —  The  Dhtp  5  gives  "  kotilya  "  as  meaning 
of  vank.  Another  Pali  form  is  vakka  (q.  v.).  The 
Prk.  forms  are  both  vakka  &  vanka :  Pischel,  Prk.  Gr. 
§  74],  I.  (adj.).  —  I.  crooked,  bent,  curved  M  1.31 
(-f-jimha);  S  iv.118  (read  v-daijda) ;  Vin  11. 116  (sutta 

:        vanka  honti) ;  J  1.9  (of  kaja) ;  iv.362  (°daijda),  PvA  51. 

I  With  ref.  to  a  kind  of  vina  at  VvA  281.  —  2.  (fig.) 
crooked,  deceitful,  dishonest  J  in. 313  (of  crows  :  kaka- 
nar)  namari  C.) ;  vi.524  ;  Pv  iv.  i^*  (a°) ;  Sn  270  (probably 
to  be  read  dhanka  as  SnA  303,  =  kaka).  —  3.  doubtful, 
deceitful,  deceptive,  i.  e.  haunted  Vv  84',  cp.  VvA  334. 
—  II.  (m.)  —  I.  abend,  nook,  curve  (of  ponds)  J  11. 189  ; 
VI. 333  (sahassa").  —  2.  a  hook  J  v. 269.  —  3.  a  fish- 
hook D  11.266;  Th  I,  749;  J  VI. 437.  —  On  vanka  in 
similes  see /.P.T.S.  1907,  131. 

-angula  a  crooked  finger  A  in. 6.  -Ativankin  having 
curves  upon  curves  (in  its  horns),  with  very  crooked 
antlers  J  1. 160  (said  of  a  deer),  -gata  running  in  bends 
or  crooked  (of  a  river)  J  1.289.  -ghasta  (a  fish)  having 
swallowed  the  hook  D  11.266;  J  vi.113.  -chidda  a 
crooked  hole  DA  i.ii2.  -da^ha  having  a  bent  fang  (of  a 
boar)  J  n.405. 

Vankaka  (nt.)  [fr.  vanka]  a  sort  of  toy:  Rh.  D.  "toy- 
plough"  {Dial.  1. 10);  Kern  "miniature  fish-hook" 
{Toev.  s.  v.).  Rh.  D.  derives  it  fr.  Sk.  vyka  (see  P. 
vaka').  Bdhgh  at  DA  1.86  takes  it  as  "  toy-plough." 
See  D  1.6;  Vin  n.io  (v.  1.  vangaka  &  vankata);  in.  180 
(v.l.  cangaka) ;  A  v. 203  (T.  vanka  ;  v.  1.  vankaka) ;  Miln 
229.  At  ThA  15  vankaka  is  used  in  general  meaning 
of  "  something  crooked  "  (to  explain  Th  2,  ii  khujja), 
which  is  specified  at  Th  i,  43  as  sickle,  plough  and 
spade. 

Vankata  (f.)  &  Vankatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  vanka]  crooked- 
ness A  I  112  (tt);  Dhs  1339;  VbhA  494. 


Vankeyya 


50 


Vacchatara 


Vankeyya  (adj.)  [grd.  formation  fr.  vanka]  "  of  a  crooked 
kind,"  crooked-like ;  nt.  twisting,  crookedness,  dis- 
honesty M  1.340  ;  A  IV.  189;  V.167. 

Vanga  at  DA  1.223  '^  ^V-  with  kana  and  means  some 
kind  of  fault  or  flaw.  It  is  probably  a  wrong  spelling 
for  vanka. 

Vangati  [cp.  *Sk.  vangati,  to  which  belongs  vanjula.  Idg. 
*aag  to  bend  ;  cp.  Lat.  vagor  to  roam,  vagus=  vague  ; 
OTig.  wankon  to  waver]  to  go,  walk,  waver ;  found  only 
in  Dhtp  (No.  29)  as  root  vang  in  meaning  "  gamana." 
Perhaps  confused  with  valg :  see  vaggati. 

Vaca  (nt.)  a  kind  of  root  Vin  i.20 1  =  iv.35.     Cp.  vacattha. 

Vacata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  vaco]  is  found  only  in  cpd.  dub- 
bacata  surliness  J  1.159. 

*Vacati  [vac]  see  vatti. 

Vacattha  (nt.)  a  kind  of  root  Vin  i.20i  =  iv.35. 

Vacana  (nt.)  [fr.  vac;  Vedic  vacana]  i.  speaking,  utter- 
ance, word,  bidding  S  n.i8  (alar)  vacanaya  one  says 
rightly) ;  iv.195  (yatha  bhutai)) ;  A  11. 168  ;  Sn  417,  699, 
932,    984,    997;   Miln   235;    Pv  II. 2' ;   SnA   343.   386. 

—  mama  vacanena  in  my  name  PvA  53.  —  dubbacana  a 
bad   word   Th   2,  418    (  =  dur-utta-vacana   ThA  268). 

—  vacanag  karoti  to  do  one's  bidding  J  1.222,  253. — 
2.  (t.  t.  g.)  what  is  said  with  regard  to  its  grammatical, 
syntactical  or  semantic  relation,  way  of  speech,  term, 
expression,  as:  ainantana°  term  of  address  KhA  167; 
SnA  435  ;  paccatta°  expression  of  sep.  relation,  i.  e.  the 
accusative  case  SnA  303  ;  piya°  term  of  endearment 
Nd*  130  ;  SnA  536  ;  puna"  repetition  SnA  487 ;  vatta- 
mana°  the  present  tense  SnA  16,  23  ;  visesitabba° 
qualifying  (predicative)  expression  VvA  13  :  sampadana° 
the  dative  relation  SnA  317.  At  SnA  397  (comb""  with 
linga  and  other  terms)  it  refers  to  the  "  number,"  i.  e. 
singular  &  plural. 

-attha  word-analysis  or  meaning  of  words  Vism  364 ; 
SnA  24.  -kara  one  who  does  one's  bidding,  obedient ; 
a  servant  Vv  16'  ;  84"  ;  J  11. 129  ;  iv.41  (vacanar|-kara) ; 
V.98 ;  PvA  134.  -khama  gentle  in  words  S  n.282  ; 
A  IV. 32.  -pativacana  speech  and  counterspeech  (i.  e. 
reply),  conversation  DhA  11.35;  PvA  83,  92,  117. 
-patha  way  of  saying,  speech  M  1.126  (five  ways,  by 
which  a  person  is  judged :  k^lena  va  akllena  va,  bhu- 
tena  &  a°,  sajjhena  &  pharusena,  attha-sarjhitena  & 
an°,  mettacitta  &  dosantara) ;  A  11.117,  153;  111.163; 
IV. 277,  cp.  D  III. 236;  Vv  63"  (  =  vacana  VvA  262); 
SnA  159,  375.  -bheda  variance  in  expression,  different 
words,  kind  of  speech  SnA  169,  cp.  vacanamatte  bhedo 
SnA  471.  -vyattaya  distinction  or  specification  of 
expression  SnA  509.  -sampatiggaha  "taking  up 
together,"  summing  up  (what  has  been  said),  resume 
KhA  100.     -sesa  the  rest  of  the  words  PvA  14,  18,  103. 

Vacanlya  (adj.)  [grd.  formation  fr.  vacana]  to  be  spoken 
to,  or  to  be  answered  D  1.175  ;  Sn  p.  140. 

Vacasa  (adj.)  (-°)  [the  adj.  form  of  vaco  =  vacas]  having 
speech,  speaking,  in  cpd.  saddheyya"  of  credible  speech, 
trustworthy  Vin  111. 188. 

VacI  (°-)  [the  composition  form  of  vaco]  speech,  words  ; 
rare  by  itself  (and  in  this  case  re-established  from  cpds.) 
and  poetical,  as  at  Sn  472  (yassa  vaci  kharS ;  expl""  at 
SnA  409  by  "vacS"),  973  (cudito  vacihi  =  vacahi 
SnA  574).  Otherwise  in  cpds,  like  :  -gfutta  controlled 
,  in  speech  Sn  78.  -para  one  who  excels  in  words  (not 
in  actions),  i.  e.  a  man  of  words  J  11.390.  -parama 
id.  D  111.185.  -bheda  "kind  of  words,"  what  is  like 
speech,  i.  e.  talk  or  language  Vin  iv.2  ;  Miln  231  (mean- 
ing here  :  break  of  the  vow  of  speech  ?) ;  various  saying, 
detailed  speech,  specification  KhA  13;  SnA  464,  466. 
See  also  vakya-bheda  &  vacai)  bhindati.  -vififlatti 
intimation  by  language  Vism  448  ;  Miln  370  ;  Dhs  637. 


-vipphara  dilating  in  talk  Miln  230,  370.  -samacara 
good  conduct  in  speech  M  11. 114;  111.45;  D  111.217. — 
Often  coupled  (as  triad)  with  kaya"  &  mano°  (  =  in  deed 
&  in  mind  ;  where  vaca  is  used  when  not  compounded), 
e.  g.  in  (vaci)  -kamma  (-fkaya°  &  mano°)deed  byword 
M  1.373,  417;  111.207;  D  III. 191,  245;  °duccarita  mis- 
behaviour in  words  [four  of  these,  viz.  musavada, 
pisuija  vaca,  pharusa  vaca,  samphappalapa  A  11. 141 
D  111.52,  96,  III,  214,  217  ;  Nd'  386  :  Pug  60  ;  DhA  1.23  ; 
III. 417;  "sankhara  antecedent  or  requisite  for  speech 
M  1.301  ;  A  111.350;  S  IV. 293  ;  VbhA  167;  Vism  531  ; 
°saiicetana  intention  by  word  VbhA  1 44  ;  "sucarita  good 
conduct  in  speech  A  11. 131  (the  4:  sacca-vaca,  apisu^a 

vaca,  sapha  vaca,  manta  bhasa). 

Vaco  (&  vaca)  (nt.)  [Vedic  vacas,  of  vac]  speech,  words, 
saying;  nom.  &  ace.  vaco  Sn  54,  356,  988,  994,  1006, 
1057,  II 10,  1 147  ;  J  1. 188  ;  Nd'  553  (  =  vacana  byapatha 
desana  anusandhi) ;  Pv  i.ii'*.  instr.  vacasa  Vin  11.95 
(dhamma  bahussuta  honti  dhata  v.  paricita) ;  111.189  ; 
S  1. 12  (-l-manasa);  Sn  365,  663,  890  (=vacanena 
Nd'  299) ;  Vism  241  ;  Mhvs  19,  42.  ^  As  adj.  (-°)  vaca 
in  comb"  with  du°  as  dubbaca  having  bad  speech,  using 
bad  language,  foul-mouthed  M  1.95  ;  S  11.204  ;  A  11. 147  ; 
111.178  ;  v.  152  sq.  ;  J  1.159  ;  Pug  20  ;  Sdhp  95,  197.  Opp. 
suvaca  of  nice  speech  M  1.126  ;  A  v. 24  sq.  ;  Pv  iv.i" 
(  =  subbaca  PvA  230).  —  Cp.  vaci  &  vaca. 

Vacca  (nt.)  [cp.  BSk.  vaccah  Av^  1254]  excrement,  faeces 
Vin  11.212;  iv.229,  265;  Vism  250  (a  baby's);  VbhA 
232  (id.),  243;  PvA  268.  —  vaccag  osajjati,  or  karoti 
to  ease  oneself  J  1.3  ;  PvA  268. 

-ku^  (&  kuti)  a  privy  Vin  11. 221  ;  J  1.161  ;  11.10; 
Vism  235,  259,  261  ;  VbhA  242  ;  DhA  11.55,  56;  PvA 
266,  268.  -kupa  a  cesspool  Vin  11.22 1  ;  J  v. 231  ;  Vism 
344  sq.  ;  DhA  1.180.  -ghata  a  pot  for  excrements, 
chamber  utensil,  commode  Vin  1.157=11.216;  M  1.207. 
-donika  id.  Vin  11.221.  -magga  "the  way  of  faeces," 
excrementary  canal,  opening  of  the  rectum  Vin  11.221  ; 
111.28  sq.,  35  ;  J  1.502  ;  iv.30.  -sodhaka  a  privy-cleaner, 
night-man  Mhvs  10,  91. 

Vaccasin  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  varcasvin  &  Ved.  varcin,  having 
splendour,  might  or  energy,  fr.  Vedic  varcas]  energetic, 
imposing  D  1.114  (brahma°  ;  Dial.  1.146  "  fine  in  pres- 
ence," cp.  DA  1.282).  See  also  under  brahma. — 
Note.  The  P.  root  vacc  is  given  at  Dhtm  59  in  meaning 
of  "  ditti,"  i.  e.  splendour. 

Vaccita  [pp.  of  vacceti,  Denom.  of  vacca]  wanting  to  ease 
oneself,  oppressed  with  vacca  Vin  11. 2  12,  221. 

Vaooha'  [Vedic  vatsa,  lit.  "  one  year  old,  a  yearling  "  ; 
cp.  Gr.  (Tog  year,  Sk.  vatsara  id.,  Lat  vetus  old,  vitulus 
calf;  Goth.  wi|>rus  a  year  old  lamb  =  Ohg.  widar  =  E. 
wether]  a  calf  Dh  284  ;  J  v.ioi  ;  Vism  163  (in  simile). 
269  (id.  ;  kuta°  a  maimed  calf) ;  DhsA  62  (with  popular 
etym.  "  vadati  ti  vaccho  ") ;  VvA  100,  200  (taruna°).  — 
On  vaccha  in  simiVes  see /.P. T.S.  1907,  131. 

-giddhini  longing  for  her  calf  S  iv.  181.  -gopalaka  a 
cow-herd  Vism  28.  -danta  "  calf-tooth,"  a  kind  of 
arrow  or  javelin  M  1.429  ;  J  vi.448.  -palaka  cow-herd 
Vv  5i«. 

Vaccha'  [=rukkha,  fr.  vrk?a]  a  tree;  only  in  mala°  an 
ornamental  plant  Vin  11.12  ;  ill.  1 79;  Vism  172;  DhA 
11.109.  1' 

Vacchaka  [Demin.  fr.  vaccha']  a  (little)  calf  J  m.444 ; 
v.93,  433  ;  Miln  282  (as  go-vacchaka). 

-palaka  a  cow-herd  J  111.444.  -sala  cow-shed,  cow- 
pen  J  v.93  ;  Miln  282. 

Vacchatara  [fi'.  vaccha ;  the  compar.  sufi&x  in  meaning 
"  sort  of,  -like."  Cp.  Sk.  vatsatara]  a  weaned  calf, 
bullock  D  1. 127,  148 ;  S  1.75  ;  A  11.207 ;  iv.41  sq.  ;  Pug 
56;  DA  1.294. — f.  vacchatari  D  1.127;  S  1.75;  Vin 
1. 191  ;  Pug  56. 


Vacchati 


51 


Vata 


Vacchati  is  fut.  of  vasati  to  dwell. 

Vacchara  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  vatsara]  year  Sdhp  239.  See 
the  usual  saijvacchara. 

Vacchala(adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  vatsala]  affectionate,  lit.  "  loving 
her  calf  "  ThA  148  (Ap  v. 64). 

▼aja  [Vedic  vraja :  see  vajati]  a  cattle-fold,  cow-pen 
A  III. 373  ;  J  11.300  ;  III. 270,  379  ;  Vism  i66,  279  ;  DhA 
1. 126,  396.  —  giribbaja  a  (cattle  or  sheep)  run  on  the 
mountain  J  in. 479 ;  as  Npl.  at  Sn  408. 

Vajati  [Vedic  vraj,  cp.  Ved.  vraja  (  =  P.  vaja)  &  vrjana 
encIosure  =  Av.  varaigna-,  with  which  cp.  Gr.  dftyvvfu 
to  enclose,  lipyiiog,  Lat.  vergo  to  turn  ;  Gaelic  fraigh 
hurdle  ;  Ags.  wTingan  =  E.  wring  =  Ger.ringen,  E.  wrinkle 
=  Ger.  renken,  and  many  others,  see  Walde,  Lat.  Wtb. 
s.  V.  vergo.  —  The  Dhtp  (59)  defines  vaj  (together  with 
aj)  by  "  gamana  "]  to  go,  proceed,  get  to  (ace),  lit.  to 
turn  to  (cp.  VTJ,  vrnakti.pp.  vj-kta,  which  latter  coincides 
with  v|tta  of  vft  in  P.  vatta  :  see  vatta'  &  cp.  vajjeti 
to  avoid,  vajjita,  vajjana  etc.)  Sn  121,  381,  729  (jati- 
marana-sagsarar)),  1143;  J  111.401  ;  iv.103  (nirayar)); 
Pv  iv.i'*  (Pot.  vajeyya) ;  Nd'  423  (  =  gacchati  kamati) ; 
Mhvs  1 1,  35  (imper.  vaja  as  v.  1.  ;  T.  reads  bhaja).  See 
cpds.  anubbajati,  upabb",  pabb°,  paribb". 

Vajalla  see  rajo-vajalla. 

Vajiia*  [cp.  Vedic  vajira,  Indra's  thunderbolt ;  Idg. 
•ueg=  Sk.  vaj,  cp.  Lat.  vegeo  to  thrive,  vigeo  >  vigour  ; 
Av.  va-Era  ;  Gicel.  vakr  =  Ags.  wacor  =  Ger.  wacker  ;  also 
E.  wake  etc.  See  also  vajeti]  a  thunderbolt ;  usually 
with  ref.  to  Sakka's  (=  Indra's)  weapon  D  1.95  =  M  1.2  31 
(ayasa) ;  Th  i,  419  ;  J  1.134  (vajira-purita  viya  garuka 
kucchi  "  as  if  filled  with  Sakka's  thunderbolt."  Dutoit 
takesitin  meaning  vajira*  and  trsl"  "  with  diamonds  ") ; 
SnA  225  ("avudha  the  weapon  of  Sakka). 

-panin  having  a  thunderbolt  in  his  hand   (N.  of  a 
yakkha)  D  i.95  =  M.  1.231. 

Vajira'  (m.  &  nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  vajra  =  vajira']  a  diamond  A 
1.124  (°upamacitta)=Pug  30;  Dh  161  ;  J  iv.234;  Miln 
1 18,  267,  278  ;  Mhvs  30,  95  ;  KhA  1 10  (°sankhata-kaya) ; 
DhA  1.387  ("panti  row  of  diamonds),  392  sq. 

Vajll}a  [cp.  Sk.  vanjula.  Given  as  vauju'a  at  Abhp  553] 
N.  of  several  plants,  a  tree  (the  ratan  :  ilalayudha  2, 
46)  J  V.420.     See  also  yangati. 

Vajja'  (nt.)  [grd.  of  vajjati,  cp.  Sk.  varjya]  that  which 
should  be  avoided,  a  fault,  sin  D  11.38;  S  1.221  ;  Vin 
11.87  (thula°  a  grave  sin) ;  A  1.47,  98  ;  iv.140  ;  Ps  1.122  ; 
Dh  252  ;  VbhA  342  (syn.  with  dosa  and  garahitabba) ; 
KhA  23  (pauijatti°  &  pakati"),  24  (id.),  190  (Ioka°)  ; 
DA  1. 181  (  =  akusala-dhamma).  Freq.  in  phrase: 
aQumattesu  vajjesu  bhaya-dassavin  "  seeing  a  source 
of  fear  even  in  the  slightest  sins  "  D  1.63  ;  S  v.187  and 
passim.  -°dassin  finding  fault  Dh  76  (expl""  in  detail 
at  DhA  II.  107).  — anavajja  &  savajja,  the  relation  of 
which  to  vajja  is  d9ubtful,  see  separately. 

Vajja'  (adj.-nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  vadya,  grd.  of  vad]  i.  "to  be 
said,"  i.  e.  speaking  D  1.53  (sacca°  =  sacca-vacana  DA 
1. 160).  See  also  mosa-vajja.  —  2.  "to  be  sounded," 
i.  e.  musical  instrument  J  1.500  (°bheri). 

Vajja,  vajja,  vajjug  :  Pot.  of  yad,  see  vadati. 

Vajjati'  [VIJ,  Vedic  vnjakti  &  varjati  to  turn  ;  in  etym. 
related  to  vajati.  Dhtp  547:  "  vajjane "]  to  turn 
etc.  ;  only  as  Pass,  form  vajjati  [in  form  =  Ved.  vfjyate] 
to  be  avoided,  to  be  excluded  .from  (abl.)  Miln  227; 
KhA  160  (°itabba,  in  pop.  etym.  of  Vajjl). — Caus. 
vajjeti  (*varjayati)  to  avoid,  to  abstain  from,  renounce 
Sdhp  10,  II,  200.     Cp.  pari",  vi°. 

Vajjati'  Pass  of  vad,  see  vadati. 


Vajjana  (nt.)  [fr.  vajjati]  avoidance,  shunning  Vism  5 
(opp.  sevana) ;  DhA  111.417. 

Vajjaillya(adj.)  [grd.  formation  fr.  vajjati']  to  be  avoided, 
to  be  shunned  ;  improper  Miln  166  (i.  e.  bad  or  uneven 
parts  of  the  wood),  224. 

Vajjavant  (adj.)  [vaj ja' +  vant]  sinful  S  111.194. 

Vajjha  (adj.)  [grd.  of  vadhati]  to  be  killed,  slaughtered  or 
executed  ;  object  of  execution ;  meriting  death  Vin 
iv.226 ;  Sn  580  (go  vajjho  viya) ;  J  11.402  (cora) ; 
VI. 483  (=  vajjhappatta  cora  C);  Vism  314:  KhA  27. 
— avajjha  not  to  be  slain,  scathless  Sn  288  (brahmaija) ; 
Miln  221  =  J  v.49 ;  Miln  257  ("kavaca  invulnerable 
armour). 

-ghataka  a  slaughterer,  executioner  Th  2,  242  (cp. 
ThA  204).  -cora  a  robber  (i.  e.  criminal)  waiting  to  be 
executed  PvA  153.  -pataha-bheri  the  execution  drum 
PvA  4.  -bhavapatta  condemned  to  death  J  1.439. 
-sukariyo  (pi.)  sows  which  had  no  young,  barren  sows 
(read  vaiijha"  1)  J  11.406. 

Vajjhaka  (adj.)  (-°)  =  vajjha  DhsA  239. 

Vajjha  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  vadhya]  execution;  only  in  cpd.  (as 
vajjha")  °ppatta  condemned  to  death,  about  to  be 
executed  Vin  iv.226  ;  J  ii.i  19,  264  ;  vi.483. 

Vajjheti  [Denom.  fr.  vajjha]  to  destroy,  kill  J  vi.527  (siro 
vajjhayitvana).  Kern.  Toev.  s.  v.  vaddh°  proposes 
reading  vaddhayitvana  (of  a  root  vaidh  to  cut),  cutting 
off  is  perhaps  better.  The  expression  is  hapax  lego- 
menon. 

Va&cati  [vafic:  see  etym.  under  vanka.  — The  Dhtp  dis- 
tinguishes two  roots  vaiic,  viz.  "  gamane  "  (46)  and 
"  palambhane "  (543),  thus  giving  the  lit.  &  the  fig. 
meanings]  i.  to  walk  about  J  1.2 14  (inf.  °itur)  =  pada- 
cira-gamanena  gantur)  C).  —  2.  Caus.  vaftceti  to 
cheat,  deceive,  delude,  elude  D  1.50  ;  Sn  100,  129,  356  ; 
J  III. 420  (aor.  ava&ci  =  vancesi  C.) ;  vi.403  (°etu-kama) ; 
Pv  III. 4'  ;  Miln  396  ;  Mhvs  25,  69  (tomarar)  avaiicayi).  — 
pp.  vaAcita. 

Vaficana  (nt.)  [fr.  vafic,  cp.  Epic  Sk.  vancana]  deception, 
delusion,  cheating,  fraud,  illusion  D  1.5;  111.176;  A 
11.209  ;  Sn  242  ;  Pv  111.9' ;  Pug  19  ;  J  IV. 435  ;  DhsA  363 
(for  maya  Dhs  1059) ;  DA  1.79  ;  DhA  111.403  ;  PvA  193. 
— vaficana  in  lit,  meaning  of  vaflcati  i  is  found  in  avafi- 
cana  not  tottering  J  1.2 14. 

Vafioanika  (adj.)  [fr.  vaficana]  deceiving  ;  a  cheat  D 
III. 183  ;  Th  I.  940  ;  Miln  290. 

Vafioaniya  (adj.)  [grd.  formation  fr.  vancana.  cp.  MVastu 
II.  145  :  vaflcaniya]  deceiving,  deluding  Th  2,  490. 

Vaficita  [pp.  of  vaftceti]  deceived,  cheated  J  1.287  (vaiScit* 
ammi=vaflcita  amhi). 

Vafljolasee  vajula. 

Vaijha(adj.)  [cp.  Epic  &  later  Sk.  bandhya]  barren,  sterile 
D  1. 14,  56  ;  M  1. 271  ;  S  11.29  (a°) ;  iv.169  ;  v. 202  (a°) ; 
Pv  III. 4'  (a°  =  anipphala  C);  J  11.406  ("sukariyo:  so 
read  for  vajjha") ;  Miln  95  ;  Vism  508  ("bhiva) ;  DhA 
1.45  (°itthi);  DA  1.105;  PvA  31.  82;  VvA  149;  Sdhp 
345  (a°). 

Vata  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  vata.  A  root  vat,  "o*  connected 
with  this  vata  is  given  at  Dhtm  106  in  meaning 
"  vefhana  "  :  see  vatagsa]  the  Indian  fig  tree  J  1.259 
("nikkha) ;  in. 325  ;  Mhvs  6,  16  ;  DhA  1.167  (°rukkha) ; 
PvA  1 13. 

Vata  at  Pug  45.  46  (tuccho  pi  hito  puro  pi  vato)  read  ti 
pihito  puro  vivafo.     See  vivafa. 


Vataqsa 


52 


Vatti 


Vatagsa  [for  avatagsa :  see  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  66*  ;  cp.  Sk. 
avatagsa  with  t ;  Prk.  vaagsa]  a  kind  of  head  ornament, 
perhaps  ear-ring  or  garland  worn  round  the  forehead 
Mhvs  II,  28  (C.  expl"  as  "  kannapilandhanai)  vatai)- 
sakan  ti  vuttar)  hoti").  Usually  as  vatagsaka  Vin 
II. 10;  IH.180;  Th  I,  523;  Vv  38*  (expl*  as  "  ratana- 
maya  kaijijika  "  (pi.)  at  VvA  174) ;  J  vi.488  ;  VvA  178, 
189,  209.  —  Note.  The  root  vat  given  as  "  vethana  "  at 
Dhtm  106  probably  refers  to  vatagsa. 

Vataka  [cp.  *Sk.  vataka,  fr.  vafa  rope]  a  small  ball  or 
thickening,  bulb,  tuber;  in  mulala"  the  (edible)  tuber 
of  the  lotus  J  VI. 563  (C.  kan^aka). 

Vatakara  [probably  distorted  by  metathesis  from  Sk. 
vataraka.  Fr.  vafa  rope.  On  etym.  of  the  latter  see 
Walde,  Lat.  Wtb.  s.  v.  volvo]  a  rope,  cable  J  111.478 
(nava  sa-vafakara). 

Vatama  (nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  vartman,  fr.  vft]  a  road,  path 
D  II. 8;  S  IV.52  (chinna°);  J  111.412  ;  Vism  123  (sa°  & 
a°).     Cp.  ubbatuma  &  parivafuma. 

Vatta'  (adj.-nt.)  [pp.  of  vyt,  Sk.  vj-tta  in  meaning  of 
"round"  as  well  as  "happened,  become"  etc.  The 
two  meanings  have  become  differentiated  in  Pali : 
vatfa  is  not  found  in  meaning  of  "  happened."  All 
three  Pali  meanings  are  specialized,  just  as  the  pres. 
vattati  is  specialized  in  meaning  "  behoves  "]  i.  round, 
circular;  (nt.)  circle  PvA  185  (ayata+);  KhA  50 
(°nali).  See  cpd.  °anguli.  —  2.  (fig.)  "  rolling  on,"  the 
"round"  of  existences,  cycle  of  transmigrations,  sai)- 
sara,  evolution  (  =  involution)  (as  forward  or  ascending 
circle  of  existences,  without  implying  a  teleological  idea, 
in  contrast  to  vivatfa  "  rolling  back  "  or  devolution,  i.  e. 
a  new  (descending)  cycle  of  existence  in  a  new  aeon  with 
inverted  [vi-]  motion,  so  to  speak)  S  in. 63 ;  iv.53 
(pariyadiijna°),  cp.  M  111.118;  Th  i,  417  (sabba°  :  "all 
constant  rolling  on"  trsl") ;  SnA  351  (  =  upadana); 
DhsA  238.  —  There  are  3  vattas,  (te-bhumaka  vatta, 
see  also  tivatta)  embracing  existence  in  the  stages  of 
kamma-vatta,  kilesa°  and  vipaka",  or  circle  of  deed, 
sin  &  result  (found  only  in  Commentarial  literature)  : 
KhA  189  ;  SnA  510  (tebhumaka°) ;  DhA  1.289  (kile6a°) ; 
iv.69  (tebhumaka°).  See  also  Mara ;  and  "dukkha, 
"vivatfa  below.  —  3.  "what  has  been  profiered,"  1 
expenditure,  alms  (as  t.  t.)  J  vi.333  (dana°  alms-gift) ; 
DhA  11.29  (paka°  cooked  food  as  alms) ;  VvA  222  (id.) ;  ' 
Mhvs  32,  61  (alms-pension);  34,  64  (salaka-vatja- 
bhatta). — Cp.  vi°.  I 

-anguliarounded(i.e.well-formed)finger  ;adj. having  ' 
round  fingers  Vv  64^'  (  =  anupubbato  v.,  i.  e.  regularly   ; 
formed,  VvA  280);  J  v. 207,  215.     -angulika  same  as 
last  J  V.204.     -anugata  accompanied  by  (or  affected 
with)  sagsara  J  1,91   (dhana).     -<^paccheda  destruction 
of  the  cycle  of  rebirths  A  11.34=  It  88  ;  A  in. 35  ;  Vism 
293.     -katha    discussion    about    sagsara    Vism    525  ;   i 
DA  1. 126;  VbhA  133.     -kara  a  worker  in  brass.     The   j 
meaning  of  vafta  in  this  connection  is  not  clear  ;  the 
same  vatta  occurs  in  °loha  ("  round  "  metal  ?).     Kern,    I 
Toev.  s.  V.  compares  it  with  Sk.  vardhra  leather  strap,    ' 
taking  vatta  as  a  corruption  of  vaddha,  but  the  con-   | 
nection  brass>leather  seems  far-fetched.     It  is  only 
found  at  Miln  331.     -dukkha  the  "  ill  "  of  transmigra- 
tion (a  Commentary  expression )  Vism  3 1 5  ;  DhA  i  v .  1 49  ; 
VvA    116.     -patighataka(i))   (vivattai))   (a   devolution) 
destroying  evolution,  i.  e.  salvation  from  sagsara  SnA 
106.     -bhaya  fear  of  sagsara  VbhA  256.     -mula  the 
root  of  sagsara  DhA  111.278.     -vivatta  (i)  evolving  and 
devolving ;  going  round  and  back  again,  i.  e.  all  round 
(a  formation  after  the  manner  of  reduplicative  cpds. 
like    cuijija-vicuijija    in    intensive-iterative    meaning), 
°vasena   in   direct   and   inverse  succession,   all  round, 
completely    J    1.75.     Cp.    also    vatta-pativatta.  —  (2) 
sagsara  in  ascending  and  descending  lines,  evolution 
("involution  ")  and  devolution,  or  one  round  of  trans- 


migration and  the  other.  It  is  dogmatically  defined 
at  Nett  113  as  "  vattag  sagsaro  vivattag  nibbanag  " 
(similarly,  opposed  to  vatta  at  DA  1.126)  which  is 
however  not  the  general  meaning,  the  vivatta  not 
necessarily  meaning  a  nibbana  stage.  See  SnA  106 
(quoted  above) ;  VvA  68.  We  have  so  far  not  found 
any  passage  where  it  might  be  interpreted  in  the  com- 
prehensive sense  as  meaning  "  the  total  round  of  exist- 
ences," after  the  fashion  of  cpds.  like  bhavSbhava. 
-loha  "round  metal"  (?),  one  of  the  3  kittima-lohani 
mentioned  at  VbhA  63  (kagsa°,  vatta".  arakufa) ;  also 
at  Miln  267  (with  kala",  tamba"  &  kagsa°,  where  in 
the  trsl"  Rh.  D.  does  not  give  a  def.  expl"  of  the 
word). 

Vatta'  ("rained"):  see  abhivatta  and  vattha  (vuftha) ; 
otherwise  only  at  DhA  11.265. 

Vattaka  (nt.)  [fr.  vyt,  or  p.  vatta]  a  cart,  in  hattha"  hand- 
cart Vin  11.276. 

Vattaka  (f.)  (&  vattaka")  [cp.  Sk.  vartaka  &  Ved.  vartika] 
the  quail  M  in.  159  sq.  ;  J  1.172,  208  (vattaka-luddaka) ; 
III. 312  ;  DhA  in. 175  (inst.  pi.  vattakesu). — The 
Vattaka- jataka  at  J  1.208  sq.  (cp.  J  v. 414). 

Vattati  [Vedic  vft.  The  representative  of  vattati  (=Sk. 
vartate)  in  specialized  meaning.  The  regular  meaning 
of  *vartate  (with  vattana).  viz.  "  turning  round,"  is 
attached  to  vattati  only  in  later  Pali  &  sometimes 
doubtful.  It  is  found  also  in  the  Caus.  vatteti. 
The  def"  of  vatt  (literal  meaning)  at  Dhtp  89  is  "  vat- 
tana," and  at  Dhtm  107  "  avattana  "]  i.  to  turn  round, 
to  move  on  :  doubtful  in  "  kattha  vattag  na  vattati  " 
S  1. 15;  preferably  with  v.  1.  as  vaddhati. — Caus.  I. 
vatteti  to  turn  or  twist  J  1.338  (rajjug) ;  to  cause  to 
move  or  go  on  (in  weaving ;  tasarag  v.  to  speed  the 
shuttle)  SnA  265,  266.  Should  we  read  vacjdheti  ? 
Cp.  avatteti.  —  Caus.  II.  vattapeti  to  cause  to  turn 
J  1.422.  • — 2.  to  be  right  or  fit  or  proper,  to  behove  ; 
it  ought  to  (with  infin. ) ;  with  instr.  of  person  who  ought 
to  do  this  or  that,  e.  g.  silacara-sampannena  bhavitug 
vattati  J  1. 188;  kataiinuna  bhavitug  v.  J  1.122. — See 
^-  g-  J  1-376;  n.352,  406;  Miln  9;  Vism  184;  DhA 
n.38,  90,  168;  SnA  414  (vattug  to  say);  VvA  63,  69, 
75  ;  PvA  38  (datug).  The  noun  to  vattati  is  vatta  (not 
vatta!). 

Vattana  (nt.)  [fr.  vyt,  vattati]  turning  round  Dhtp  89  (in 
def"  of  vattati).     Cp.  avattana. 

Vattana  (f.)  [fr.  vft]  in  "vali  is  a  line  or  chain  of  balls 
("  rounds,"  i.  e.  rings  or  spindles).  Reading  somewhat 
doubtful.  It  occurs  at  M  1.80,  81  (seyyatha  v.  evag  me 
pitthi-kantako  unnat'  dvanato  hoti  ;  Neumann  trsl« 
"  wie  eine  Kugelkette  wurde  mein  Riickgrat  mit  den 
hervor-und  zuriiuktretenden  Wirbeln")  and  at  J  v. 69 
(spelt  "  vatthana-vali-sankasapitthi  te  ninnat'  unnata," 
with  C.  expl"  "  pitthika-tthane  avuijitva  thapita  vat- 
thana-vali-sadisa ").  The  J  trsl"  by  Dutoit  gives 
"  einer  Reihe  von  Spinnwirteln  dein  Rvicken  gleicht 
im  Auf  und  Nieder  "  ;  the  E.  tsrl"  has  "  Thy  back 
like  spindles  in  a  row,  a  long  unequal  curve  doth 
show." 

Vattani  (f.)  [cp.  Vedic  vartani  circumference  of  a  wheel, 
course]  a  ring,  round,  globe,  ball  Th  2,  395  (vattani-r- 
iva ;  expl*  at  ThA  259  as  "  lakhaya  gulika  viya,"  trsl° 
Sisters  154  :  "  but  a  little  ball  "). 

Vatt>  (f)  [represents  both  Epic  Sk.  varti  and  vrtti,  differ- 
entiated derivations  from  vyt,  combining  the  meanings 
of  "turning,  rolling"  and  "encircling,  round"]  i.  a 
wick  S  II. 86=111. I26=iv. 213  ;  J  1.243  (dipa°) ;  DhA 
393  ;  ThA  72  (Ap.  v.45  :  nom.  pi.  vattini) ;  Mhvs  32,  37  ; 
34,  35.  —  2.  enclosure,  lining,  film,  skin  Vism  258 
(anta°  entrails),  262  (udara°) ;  J  1.260  (anta°,  so  read 
for  °vaddhi).  —  3.  edge,  rim,  brim,  circumference  Vin 


Vattika 


53 


Vaddhika 


n.i20  (aggala"  of  the  door),  148  (id.) ;  S  111.141  (patta° 
of  a  vase  or  bowl);  iv.168  (id.);  DhA  11. 124  (nemi"). 
Often  as  mukha-va^ti  outer  rim,  border,  lining,  e.  g. 
cakkavala"  J  1.64,  72  ;  DhA  1.3 19  ;  in. 209  ,  patt°  J  v. 38  ; 
pasada°DhsA  107.  —  4.  strip, fringe Vinii. 266  (dussa°) ; 
J  V.73  (camma°) ;  Mhvs  11,  15.  —  5.  a  sheath,  bag,  pod 
J  111.366  (tiija°) ;  Mhvs  26,  17  (marica°  red  pepper  pod) ; 
DhA  IV. 203  (reiju°),  ^ — 6.  a  lump,  ball  DhA  111.117 
(pubba°,  of  matter).  —  7.  rolling  forth  or  along,  a  gush 
(of  water),  pour  J  1.109  (or  to  vj?  ?). 

Vattika  (f.)  [vatti+ka,  cp.  Class.  Sk.  vartika]  i.  a  wick 
Mhvs  30,  94.  —  2.  a  brim  Mhvs  18,  28.  —  3.  a  pod 
Mhvs  26,  16  (marica"). 

Vattia  (-°)  (adj.)  in  munda°  porter  (?)  is  not  clear.  It  is  a 
der"  fr.  vafti  in  one  or  the  other  of  its  meanings.  Found 
only  at  Vin  11. 137,  where  it  is  expl""  by  Bdhgh  as 
"  vetthin."  It  may  belong  to  vafagsa  or  vata  (rope) : 
cp.  Dhtm  106  "  vethana  "  for  vatar|sa. 

Vattnla  (adj.)  [fr.  vit,  cp.  late  Sk.  vartula]  circular  Abhp 

707. 

Va^ha  [pp.  of  vassati,  for  the  usual  vutfha]  rained,  in 
nava°  newly  rained  upon  DhA  1.19  (bhiimi). 

Va^hara  (adj.)  [cp.  BSk.  vafha.-a  MVastu  11.65.  A  root 
vath  is  given  at  Dhtm  133  in  meaning  "  thulattane 
bhave  "  i.  e.  bulkiness]  bulky,  gross  Abhp  701. 

Va44ha  (nt.)  [fr.  vrdh]  wealth,  riches  J  in. 131  (va^dhag 
vaddhatar),  imper).  Or  should  we  read  vatta  ?  — 
Vaddha  is  used  as  Np.  at  KhA  119,  perhaps  in  meaning 
"  prosperous." 

Va44haka  [fr.  vaddheti]  i.  augmenting,  increasing,  i.  e. 
looking  after  the  welfare  of  somebody  or  something, 
one  who  superintends  J  1.2  (rasi°  the  steward  of  an 
estate).  —  2.  a  maker  of,  in  special  sense  (civara"  robe- 
cutter,  perhaps  fr.  vaidb  to  cut :  see  vaddheti)  a  tailor 
J  1.220. 

Va44haki  (&  °i)  [cp.  Epic  &  Class.  Sk.  vardhaki  &  vardha- 
kin  ;  perhaps  from  vardh  to  cut :  see  vaddheti]  a  car- 
penter, builder,  architect,  mason.  On  their  craft  and 
guilds  see  Fick,  Sociale  Gliederung  181  sq.  ;  Mrs.  Rh.  D. 
Cambridge  Hist.  Ind.  1.206.  —  The  word  is  specially 
characteristic  of  the  Jatakas  and  other  popular  (later) 
literature  J  1.32,  201,  247;  11. 170;  vi.332  sq.,  432; 
Ap.  51  ;  DhA  1.269 ;  iv.207  ;  Vism  94 ;  PvA  141  ;  Mhbv 
154.  — itt''a°  a  stonemason  Mhvs  35,  102  ;  nagara°the 
city  architect  Miln  331,  345;  brahmana"  a  brahmin 
carpenter  J  iv.207 ;  maha°  chief  carpenter,  master 
builder  Vism  463.  In  metaphor  tanha  the  artificer  lust 
DhA  111.128. 

-gama  a  carpenter  village  J  11. 18,  405  ;  iv.159. 

Va^^bati  [Vedic  vardhati,  v^dh,  cp.  Av.  vgradaiti  to 
increase.  To  this  root  belongs  P.  uddha  "  high  up  " 
(  =  Gr.  opOdf  straight).  Def*  at  Dhtp  109  simply  as 
"  vaddhane  "]  primary  meaning  "  to  increase  "  (trs.  & 
intrs.) ;  hence  :  to  keep  on,  to  prosper,  to  multiply,  to 
grow  S  1. 15  (read  vaddh°  for  vatt°) ;  11.206  (vapijena) ; 
'V.73,  250  ;  A  V.249  (panflaya) ;  Sn  329  (panfia  ca  sutafi 
ca) ;  J  III. 131  (poraijar)  va(Jdhar)  vaddhatar),  imper.  med. 
S""  sg.) ;  V.66  (sada  so  vaddhata  raja  sukka-pakkhe  va 
candima) ;  Pv  i.i*  (data  puflrlena  v.) ;  Pug  71  ;  Miln  9  ; 
Mhvs  7,  68  (putta-dhitahi  va<J4hitva  having  numerous 
sons  &  daughters) ;  22,  73  (ubho  vaijdhiijsu  dSraka, 
grew  up);  SnA  319;  PvA  94.  —  ppr.  vaddhamana  (i) 
thriving  KhA  119  (read  as  Va<J<Jh°,  Np);  —  (2)  in- 
creasing J  1. 199  (putta-dhitahi);  Mhvs  23,  34  ("chayi- 
yai)  as  the  shadows  increased).  —  See  also  pari".  —  pp. 
vaddha,  vaddha,  vuddha,  vuddha,  buddha.  —  Caus.  I. 
vaddheti,  in  many  shades  of  meaning,  all  based  upon 
the  notion  of  progressive  motion .     Thus  to  be  translated 


in  any  of  the  foil,  senses  :  to  increase,  to  make  move  on 
(cp.  vv.  11.  vatteti),  to  bring  on  to,  to  further ;  to  take 
an  interest  in,  to  indulge  in,  practise  ;  to  be  busy  with, 
cause  to  prosper ;  to  arrange  ;  to  make  for ;  and  in  a 
general  sense  "to  make"  (cp.  derivation  vaddhaka 
"maker,"  i.  e.  tailor;  vaddhaki  id.,  i.  e.  carpenter; 
vaddhana,  etc.).  The  latter  development  into  "  make  " 
is  iate.  —  I.  to  increase,  to  raise  Sn  275  (rajar));  DA 
i.i  15  ;  Mhvs  29,  66  (mangalag  to  raise  the  chant) ;  PvA 
168  (-1- bruheti).  ■ — 2.  to  cultivate  (vipassanag  insight) 
J  I.I  1 7  (aor.  °esi);  PvA  14.  —  3.  to  rear,  to  bring  up 
Mhvs  35,  103  (aor.  vaddhesi).  —  4.  (with  ref.  to  food) 
to  get  ready,  arrange,  serve  in  (loc)  J  .111.445  (patiya 
on  the  dish);  iv.67  (karotiyag),  391.  —  5-  to  exalt 
J  1.338  (akuline  va^dhessati).  —  6.  to  participate  in,  to 
practise,  attend  to,  to  serve  (ace.)  S  11.109  (taijhar)) ; 
A  11.54  (katasig  to  serve  the  cemetery,  i.  e.  to  die  again 
and  again  :  see  refs.  under  kafasi) ;  Vism  1 1 1  (kasi^ag), 
152.  —  7.  to  make  move  on,  to  set  into  motion  (for 
vatteti  ?),  in  tasarag  v.  SnA  265,  266.  —  8.  to  take  up 
Mhvs  26,  10  (kuntag).  —  pp.  vaddhita.  —  Caus.  II. 
vaddhapeti:  i.  to  cause  to  be  enlarged  Mhvs  35,  119.  — 
2.  to  cause  to  be  brought  up  or  reared  J  1.455.  —  3-  t° 
have  attended  to  Vin  11. 134  (massug).  —  4.  to  cause 
to  be  made  up  (of  food)  J  iv.68. 

Va44haiia  (nt.  &  adj.)  [fr.  vaddheti ;  see  also  vaddhana] 
1.  increasing,  augmenting,  fostering;  increase,  en- 
largement, prolongation  M  1.518  (hayana°  decrease  & 
increase);  J  111.422  (kula°,  spelling  ddh);  Mhvs  35,  73 
(ayussa) ;  DhsA  406  ;  PvA  31  ;  Miln  320  (bala°  strength- 
increasing) ;  Dhtp  109;  Sdhp  361.  —  2.  indulgence  in, 
attachment ;  serving,  practising  Sn  1084  (takka°) ; 
J  1. 146  (kafasi",  q.  v.  &  cp.  vad(Jheti  6);  Vism  in 
(°avad(Jhana),  152,320.  Here  belong  the  phrases  raja° 
&  loka°.  —  3.  arrangement  J  vi.ii  (patha vi -vaddha - 
naka-kamma  the  act  of  attending  to,  i.  e.  smoothing  the 
ground).  —  4.  serving  for,  enhancing,  favouring  Pv 
111.3'  (rati-nandi°).  —  5.  potsherd  [connected  with 
vardh  ?  See  vaddheti]  J  111.226  (C.  kathalika ;  un- 
certain). —  6.  a  kind  of  garment,  as  punna°  (full  of 
costliness  ?  but  perhaps  not  connected  with  vaddh"  at 
all)  Mhvs  23,  33  &  37  (where  C.  expl»  :  anagghani  evag- 
namikani  vattha-yugani).     Cp.  vaddhamana. 

Va441iaLaka  (adj.)  [fr.  vaddhana,  cp.  vacjdheti  4]  serving, 
in  f.  °ika  a  serving  (of  food),  a  dish  (bh'atta°)  DhA  188 
(so  read  for  vad^hinika). 

Va^^hamana  (nt.)  at  Dpvs  xi.33  is  probably  equivalent 
to  vaddhana  (6)  in  special  sense  at  Mhvs  23,  33,  and 
designates  a  (pair  of)  specially  costly)  garment(s).  One 
might  think  of  meaning  vaijdheti  [BSk.  vardhate]  "  to 
bid  higher  (at  a  sale),"  as  in  Divy  403  ;  Av§  1.36,  and 
explain  as  "  that  which  causes  higher  bidding,"  i.  e. 
very  precious.  The  passage  is  doubtful.  It  may  simply 
mean  "  costly  "  (belonging  to  nandiyavattag) ;  or  is  it 
to  be  read  as  vafiamana  ? 

Va^^hamanaka  (adj.)  [ppr,  of  vaddheti -l- ka]  growing, 
increasing,  getting  bigger ;  only  in  phrase  vaddhama- 
naka-cchayaya  (loc.)  with  growing  shade,  as  the 
shadows  lengthened,  when  evening  drew  near  DhA  1.96, 
416;  11.79;  Mhvs  19,  40. 

Va^^lu  (f.)  [fr.  TTdb,  Vedic  vyddhi  refreshment  etc.,  which 
is  differentiated  in  Pali  into  vuddhi  &  vad^hi]  i.  increase, 
growth  (cp.  Cpd.  25:  sq.)  S  iv.250  (ariya°) ;  J  11.426 
(=phati);  Miln  109  (guna°) ;  DhsA  327;  DhA  111.335 
(ava<Jdhi  =  parihani).  —  2.  welfare,  good  fortune,  happi- 
ness J  v'.ioi  ;  VI. 330.  —  3.  (as  t.  t.)  profit,  interest  (on 
money,  esp.  loans)  Th  2,  444  (  =  iija-va^dhi  ThA  271); 
DA  1.2 12,  270  ;  VbhA256  (in  simile) ;  SnA  179  ("gahajia). 

Va44hika  (adj.)  [fr.  va(J(Jhi]  leading  to  increase,  augment- 
ing, prosperous  Miln  351  (ekanta".  equal  to  apariha- 
niya). 


Vaddhita 


54 


Vanna 


Va44hita[pp.of  vaddheti]  i.  increased,  augmented  ;  raised, 
enlarged;  big  Th  i,  72  (su-su°) ;  DA  1.115;  DhsA  188, 
364;  J  V.340  (°kaya).  ^ — 2.  grown  up  DhA  1.126. — 
3.  brought  up,  reared  J  1.455.  —  4.  served,  indulged, 
supplied  :  see  katasi°  (S  11. 178  e.  g.). 

Va^a  (nt.  &  ra.)  [cp.  Vedic  vra^ia ;  Serbian  rana  ;  Obulg. 
vafe,  both  "  wound  "]  a  wound,  sore  Vin  1.205  (m.),  218 
(vano  rulho) ;  111.36  (m ;  angajate),  117  (angajate); 
S  IV.177  (vaijar)  alimpeti) ;  A  v. 347  sq.,  350  sq.  ;  359; 
Nd*  540;  PugA  212  (puraija-vana-sadisa-citto) ;  DhA 
II.  165  (°r)  bandhati  to  bandage);  VvA  77;  PvA  80; 
Sdhp  395.  On  vana  in  similes  see  J.P.T.S.  1907,  132. 
-alepana  putting  ointment  on  a  sore  SnA  58  (in  sim.). 
-colaka  a  rag  for  dressing  a  wound  Vism  342  ;  VbhA  361. 
-patikatnina  restoration  or  healing  of  a  wound  DhA 
11. 164.  -paticchadana  dressing  of  a  wound  DhA  1.375. 
-patta  id.,  bandage  SnA  100.  -bandhana  id.  Vin  1.205. 
-mukha  the  opening  of  a  sore  A  iv.386  (nava  °ani) ; 
VvA  77  (id.). 

Vavi  (f.)  [fr.  van  to  desire]  wish,  request  Ud  53  ;  J  iv.404 
(  =  yacana  C.) ;  cp.  y.P.r.S.  1891,18.  See  vana^  &  cp. 
vaneti. 

Va^ijja  (f.)  [Vedic  vanijya,  fr.  vanij"  (vaijik)  merchant, 
cp.  vaijija  &  vanibbaka]  trade,  trading  M  11. 198  ;  Sn  404 
(payojaye  dhammikai)  so  vanijjar));  A  11. 81  sq.  ;  Pv 
1.5*  (no  trade  among  the  Petas) ;  J  1.169  ;  PvA  47  (tela°) ; 
Sdhp  332,  390.  —  Five  trades  must  not  be  carried  on  by 
lay  followers  of  the  Buddha,  viz.  sattha°  trade  in  swords, 
satta°  in  living  beings,  niar)sa°  in  meat,  majja°  in 
intoxicants,  visa"  in  poisons  A  in. 208,  quoted  at  DA 
1.235  and  SnA  379. 

Va^ita[pp.  of  *vapeti,  Denom.  fr.  vaija]  wounded,  bruised 
Pv  11.2*  ;■  J  1. 150  ;  Sdhp  395. 

Va^ippattha  [vanik  +  patha,  in  meaning  patha  2]  trading, 
trade  Vin  1.229=0  11.87=  Ud  88  (with  ref.  to  Patali- 
putta). 

VaQibbaka  [vanibba+ka.  The  form  ♦vanibba,  according 
to  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  45'.  distorted  fr.  vaniya,  thus  "  travel- 
ling merchant,  wayfarer."  Spelling  wavers  between 
vanibb°  &  vanibb".  The  BSk.  form  is  vanipaka,  e.  g. 
at  AvS  1.248  ;  11.37  ;  Divy  83  ;  occurring  also  as  vani- 
yaka  at  Divy  83]  a  wayfarer,  beggar,  pauper  Sn  100 
(n) ;  J  IV. 403,  406  (n) ;  v. 172  (  =  bhojaputta  C.  ;  n); 
VI.232  (n);  DA  1.298  (n) ;  PvA  78  (n),  112  (n);  VvA  5 
(n).  Often  comb""  with  similar  terms  in  phrase  kapan' 
addhika  [iddhika]  vanibbaka-yacaka  indigents,  tramps, 
wayfarers  &  beggars,  e.  g.  D  1.137  (n) ;  Miln  204  (ij) ; 
DhA  1. 105  (n).  Other  spurious  forms  are  vanidipaka 
PvA  120  ;  vanipaka  Cp.  1.4*. 

VaQibbin  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  'vaijibba]  begging,  a  beggar,  tramp 
J  111.312;  IV. 410  (  =  yacanto  C).  Spelling  at  both 
places  n.     See  also  vanin. 

Va^Iyati  see  vaniya ti. 

Vaneti  [Caus.  of  van  (see  etym.  under  vana*),  cp.  vaiji 
(vani).  It  may  be  derived  directly  fr.  yj,  vrnati  =  P. 
vunati,  as  shown  by  vanimhase.  A  Denom.  fr.  vani  is 
vaniyati]  to  wish,  desire,  ask,  beg  J  v. 2  7  (spelt  vanneti ; 
C.  expl'  as  vareti  icchati) ;  pres.  med.  1*'  pi.  vanimhase 
(  =  Sk.  vjrnimahe)  J  n.137  (  =  icchama  C).  As  vanayati 
at  KhA  1 1 1  (vanayati  ti  vanag). 

Tavt^  ("t)  [Epic  Sk.  vynta]  a  stalk  S  iii.i55  =  D  1.73 
("chinna  with  its  stalk  cut) ;  J  1.70  ;  Ap  62  ;  Vism  356 
(in  comparison) ;  SnA  296 ;  VbhA  60 ;  DhA  11.42  ; 
IV.  1 12;  VvA  44.  avanta  (of  thana,  the  breast  of  a 
woman)  not  on  a  stalk  (i.  e.  well-formed,  plump)  J 
v.  1 55.  So  to  be  trsl""  here,  although  vanta  as  medical 
term  is  given  in  BR  with  meaning  "  nipple."  —  See 
also  talavanfa 


VaQtaka  (adj  :)  (-°)  [vanta-(-ka]  having  a  stalk;  a°  not 
fastened  on  stalks  J  v. 203. 

Va^tati  [dial.  Sk.  vaijt]  to  partition,  share  ;  is  given  as 
root  va?t  at  Dhtp  92,  561  and  Dhtm  787  in  meaning 
"  vibhajana."  —  Another  root  vaflt  is  found  at  Dhtm 
108  with  unmeaning  expl"  "  vaijt'  atthe." 

Va^tika  (adj.)  (-°)  [vanta  +  ika]  having  a  stalk;  only  in 
phrase  ekato°  &  ubhato"  having  a  stalk  on  one  or  on 
both  sides  (of  a  wreath)  Vin  11. 10  ;  iii.iSo  ;  DhA  1.419. 

Vawa  [cp.  Vedic  varna,  of  vf!  see  vuijati.  Customary 
definition  as  "  vannane  "  at  Dhtp  572]  appearance  etc. 
(lit.  "  cover,  coating ").  There  is  a  considerable 
fluctuation  of  meaning,  especially  between  meanings 
2,  3,  4.  One  may  group  as  follows.  —  1.  colour  Sn  447 
(meda°) ;  S  v. 2 16  (chavi°  of  the  skin);  A  in. 324  (san- 
kha°);  Th  i,  13  (nil'abbha°) ;  Vv  45"  (danta°  =  ivory 
white) ;  Pv  iv.3*  ;  DhA  11. 3  (aruiia°) ;  SnA  319  (chavi") ; 
VvA  2  (vicitta") ;  PvA  215.  Six  colours  are  usually 
enum^  as  vanna,  viz.  nila  pita  lohitaka  odata  mati- 
je^ha  pabhassara  Ps  1.126;  cp.  the  6  colours  under 
rupa  at  Dhs  617  (where  kalaka  for  pabbassara) ;  J  1.12 
(chabbanpa-buddha-rasmiyo).  Groups  oifive  see  under 
panca  3  (cp.  J  1.222).  — dubbanna  of  bad  colour,  ugly 
S  1.94  ;  A  v. 61  ;  Ud  76  ;  Sn  426  ;  It  99  ;  Pug  33  ;  VvA  9  ; 
PvA  32,  68.  Opp.  savanna  of  beautiful  colour,  lovely 
A  v. 61  ;  It  99.  Also  as  term  for  "  silver."  —  As  t.  t.  in 
descriptions  or  analyses  (perhaps  better  in  meaning 
"  appearance  ")  in  abl.  vannato  by  colour,  with  santha- 
nato  and  others  :  Vism  184  ("  kala  va  odata  va  mangu- 
racchavi  va  "),  243  =  VbhA  225  ;  Nett  27.  —  2.  appear- 
ance S  I.I  15  (kassaka-vaijnai)  abhinimminitva) ;  J  1.84 
(id.  with  maijavaka") ;  Pv  11. i'"  (  =  chavi-vaijiia  PvA 
71) ;  111.3'  (kanakassa  sannibha) ;  VvA  16  ;  cp.  °dhatu. 

—  3.  lustre,  splendour  (cp.  next  meaning)  D  in. 143 
(suvanna",  or=i);  Pv  n.9''  (na  koci  devo  vapijena 
sambuddhar)  atirocati) ;  111.9^  (suriya°) ;  VV29I  (  =  sarir' 
obhasa  VvA  122)  ;  PvA  10  (suvaijna°),  44.  —  4.  beauty 
(cp.  vannavant)  D  11.220  (abhikkanta")  ;  M  1.142  (id.) ; 
D  111.68  (ayu-f  ) ;  FV  11.9"  (  =  rupa-sampatti  PvA  1 17). 
Sometimes  comb"*  with  other  ideals,  as  (in  set  of  5) : 
ayu,  sukha,  yasa,  sagga  A  in.47 ;  or  ayu,  yasa,  sukha, 
adhipacca  J  iv.275,  or  (4):  ayu,  sukha,  bala  A  in. 63. 

—  5.  expression,   look,   specified   as   mukha°,   e.   g.   S 
in. 2,  235  ;  IV. 275  sq.  ;  A  v. 342  ;  Pv  111.9'  ;  PvA  122.  — 
6.  colour   of   skin,    appearance    of   body,    complexion 
M  11.32  (parama),  84  (settba) ;  A  111.33  (dibba) ;  iv.396 
(id.);   Sn   610    (douijtful,   more  likely  because  of  its 
comb"  with  sara  to  below  8  1),  686  (anoma") ;  Vism 
422  (evai)°=odato  va  samo  va).     Cp.  °pokkharata. — 
In  special  sense  applied  as  distinguishing  mark  of  race         ' ' 
or  species,  thus  also  constituting  a  mark  of  class  (caste) 
distinction   &   translatable  as  "  (social)   grade,    rank,         [■ 
caste  "  (see  on  term  Dial.  1.27,  99  sq.  ;  cp.  Vedic  arya         ■ 
varija   and   dasa   varna   RV   11.12,    9;    111.34,    9 :    see         rr 
Zimmer,  Altind.  Leben  113  and  in  greater  detail  Mac- 
donell  &  Keith,    Vedic  Index  11.247  sq.).     The  custo- 
mary enum"  is  of  4  such  grades,  viz.  khattiya  brah- 
mana  vessa  sudda  Vin  11.239;  A  iv.202  ;  M  11.128,  but 

cp.  Dial.  1.99  sq.  —  See  also  Vin  iv.243  (here  applied  ||> 
as  general  term  of  "  grade  "  to  the  alms-bowls  :  tayo  ff  ■ 
pattassa  vanna,  viz.  ukkattha,  majjhima,  omaka  ;  cp. 
below  7);  D  1.13,  91  ;  J  vi.334;  Miln  225  (khattiya°, 
brahmaija").  —  7.  kind,  sort  Miln  118  (nana°),  cp.  Vin 
IV. 2 43,  as  mentioned  under  6.  —  8.  timbre  (i.  e.  appear- 
ance) of  voice,  contrasted  to  sara  intonation,  accent ; 
may  occasionally  be  taken  as  "  vowel."  See  A  1.229 
(-h  sara) ;  iv.307  (id.) ;  Sn  610  (id.,  but  may  mean  "  colour 
of  skin  "  :  see  6),  1 132  (girar)  vanij'  upasar)hitar|,  better 
than  meaning  "comment");  Miln  340  (-(-sara). — 
9.  constitution,  likeness,  property;  adj.  (-")  "like": 
aggi°  like  fire  Pv  ui.(fi  (  =  aggi-sadisa  PvA  203).  —  10. 
("good    impression")    praise    DhA    1.115    (magga") ; 


Vannaka 


55 


Vatta 


usually  comb''  and  contrasted  with  avanna  blame,  e.  g. 
D  i.i,  117,  174;  A  1.89;  II. 3;  111.264;  IV.179,  345; 
DA  1.37.  —  II.  reason  ("outward  appearance")  S 
1.206  {=  kSraiia  K.S.  1.320) ;  Vv  84'  (  =  karana  VVA336) ; 
Pv  IV. !•  (id.  PvA  220) ;  IV. I*'. 

-aroha  (large)  extent  of  beauty  Sn  420.  -kasina  the 
colour  circle  in  the  practice  of  meditation  VbhA  251. 
-karaka  (avanne)  one  who  makes  something  (unsightly) 
appear  beautiful  J  v. 2  70.  -da  giving  colour,  i.  e.  beauty 
Sn  297.  -dada  giving  beauty  A  11.64.  -dasaka  the 
ten  (years)  of  complexion  or  beauty  (the  3""  decade  in 
the  life  of  man)  Vism  619 ;  J  iv.497.  -dasi  "  slave  of 
beauty,"  courtezan,  prostitute  J  1.15^  sq.,  385  ;  11.367, 
380  ;  III. 463  ;  VI. 300  ;  DhA  1.395  ;  iv.88.  -dhatu  com- 
position or  condition  of  appearance,  specific  form, 
material  form,  natural  beauty  S  1.13;  Pv  1.3';  PvA 
■37  (  =  chavivariija) ;  DhsA  15.  -patha  see  vannu". 
-pokkharata  beauty  of  complexion  D  1.114,  115  ;  A1.38  ; 
11.203  ;  Pug  66  ;  VbhA  486  (def*)  ;  DhA  in. 389  ;  PvA  46. 
-bhu  place  of  praise  J  1.84  (ifor  °bhumi :  see  bhu^). 
-bhuta  being  of  a  (natural)  species  PvA  97.  -vadin 
saying  praise,  praising  D  1.179,  206  ;  A  11.27  ;  V.164  sq.  ; 
Vin  II.  197.  -sampanna  endowed  with  beauty  A  1.244 
sq.,  288  ;  11.250  sq. 

Vawaka  (nt.)  [fr.  vapna]  paint,  rouge  D  11. 142  ;  Th  1,960  ; 
Dpvs  VI. 70. 

Vaooata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  vanna]  having  colour,  complexion 
A  1.246  (dubbannata  bad  c);  VvA  9. 

VaQQanS  (f.)  [fr.  va^neti]  i.  explanation,  commentary, 
exposition  KhA  11,  145,  227;  SnA  65  (pada°) ;  PvA  2. 
— pali°  explanation  of  the  text  (as  regards  meaning  of 
words),  purely  textual  analysis  (opp.  vinicchayakatha) 
VbhA  291.  —  2.  praise  DhA  11. 100  (vana°). 

Vawanlya  (adj.)  [grd.  formation  fr.  vaijijeti]  to  be  de- 
scribed ;  a°  indescribable  J  v. 2  82. 

Vawavant  (adj.)  [fr.  vaij^a]  beautiful  A  iv.240  (catum- 
maharajika  deva  digh'ayuka  vaijijavanto  ;  v.  1.  °vanta) ; 
Pug  34;  Pv  III. 2*2  (=rupasampanna  PvA  184);  DhA 
t-383- 

Vawita  [pp.  of  vaijijeti]  i.  explained,  commented  on  SnA 
368.^2.  praised,  extolled  Pug  69;  J  1.9;  Miln  278 
(  +  thuta  &  pasattha) ;  PvA  116  (=pasai)sita),  241; 
VvA  156  (  =  pasai)sita). 

Vawin  (-°)  (adj.)  [fr.  vanpa]  i.  having  colour  Th  i,  1190 
(acchara  nanattavapniyo  "in  divers  hues").  —  2.  be- 
longing to  a  caste,  in  catu°  (suddhi)  (purity  of)  the 
fourfold  castes  M  11.132.  —  3.  having  beauty  Sn  551 
(uttama°).  —  4.  having  the  appearance  of  A  11.106  = 
Pug  44  (ama°,  pakka°);  J  v. 322  (vijju°). 

Vawiya  (nt.)  [fr.  vapijeti]  colouring;  having  or  giving 
colour,  complexion  M  1.446  (in  phrase  assag  assa-damako 
vanniyaii  ca  valiyafl  ca  anuppavecchati,  trsl*  by  Neu- 
mann as  "  lasst  der  Rossebandiger  noch  die  letzte 
StrahlungundStriegelungangedeihen  "  ;  still  doubtful) ; 
A  111.54  (dubbanniyar)  bad  complexion) ;  It  76  (dub°  evil 
colour). 

Va9Qa  (f.)  [cp.  late  Sk.  varnu,  N.  of  a  river  (-district)]  is 
given  at  Abhp  663  in  meaning  of  "  sand."  Occurs  only 
in  cpd.  vannupatha  a  sandy  place,  quicksand,  swamp 
J  1. 109;  Vv  84'  (  =  valu-kantara  VvA  334);  Pv  IV.3* 
(=petena  nimmitag  mudu-bhumi-magga  PVA  250,  so 
read  for  vanijapatha) ;  shortened  to  vannu  at  Vv  84" 
(where  MSS  vaijija). 

Va^Qeti  [Denom.  fr.  vapija]  i.  to  describe,  explain, 
comment  on  J  1.2,  222  ;  KhA  168  ;  SnA  23,  160.  368.  — 
2.  to  praise,  applaud,  extol  J  1.59,  84;  PvA  131  (  +  pa- 
saQsati). — pp.  vannita. 


Vata'  (indecl.)  [Vedic  bata,  post-Vedic  vata]  part  of  ex- 
clamation :  surely,  certainly,  indeed,  alas  I  Vin  in. 39 
(puris'  usabho  vat'  Syai)  "  for  sure  he  is  a  human  bull ") ; 
Th  2,  316  (abbhutar)  vata  vacag  bhasasi) ;  Sn  178,  191, 
358;  Vv  47I3;  Pv  1.8";  J  iv.355;  PvA  13,  61,  75,  121. 
Often  comb*  with  other  emphatic  particles,  like  aho 
vata  Pv  11.9*'  (  =  sadhu  vata  PvA  131) ;  labha  vata  no 
it  is  surely  a  gain  that  Sn  31  ;  DhA  11.95;  vata  bho 
J1.81. 

Vata'  (m.  &  nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  vrata  vow,  fr.  vft,  meaning 
later  "  milk "  (see  Macdonell  &  Keith,  Vedic  Index 
11.34 1 )]  '•  a  religious  duty,  observance,  rite,  practice, 
custom  S  1. 143,  201  ;  iv.180  ;  A  iv.46i  (sila,  vata,  tapas, 
brahmacariya) ;  v. 18;  Sn  792,  898;  Vv  84";  J  ni.75; 
VvA  9  ;  PvA  60.  — subbata  of  good  practice  Vv  34*. 
Cp.  patibbata,  silabbata.  —  2.  manner  of  (behaving 
like)  a  certain  animal  (as  a  practice  of  ascetics),  e.  g. 
aja°  like  a  goat  J  iv.318;  go°  like  a  cow  M  1.387;  J 
IV. 318;  vagguli"  bat  practice  J  1.493;  in. 235;  iv.299  ; 
hatthi"  elephant  behaviour  Nd'  92  (here  as  vatta;  see 
under  vatta'). 

-pada  an  item  of  good  practice,  virtue  (otherwise 
called  guna  at  Miln  90)  J  1.202  (where  7  are  enum*,  viz. 
devotion  to  one's  mother  &  father,  reverence  towards 
elder  people,  speaking  the  truth,  gentle  speech,  open 
speech,  unselfishness) ;  Miln  70  (where  8  are  given  in 
detail,  differing  from  the  above).  See  also  vatta'  2. 
where  other  sets  of  7  &  8  are  quoted,  -samadana 
taking  up  a  (good)  practice,  observance  of  a  vow 
J  II57- 

Vatavant  (adj.)  [vata'-i-vant]  observant  of  religious 
duties,  devout  Sn  624  (  =  dhuta-vatena  samannagata 
SnA  467) ;  Dh  400  (with  same  expl"  at  DhA  iv.i65  as 
as  SnA  467). 

Vati'  (f.)  [later  Sk.  vfti,  fr.  »f]  a  fence  J  1.153  ;  111.272  ; 
v.472  ;  Vism  186  (vati,  v.  1.  vati) ;  SnA  98  (v.  1.  for 
gutti),  148  (v.  1.  for  °vatika). 

Vati'  (f.)  [fr.  vy,  cp.  Sk.  vfti]  a  choice,  boon  DhA  1. 190 
(pubbe  Sama  nama  vatiya  pana  karitatta  Samavati 
nama  jata). 

Vatika(adj.)  (-°)  [vata' -t- ika]  having  the  habit  (of),  acting 
like  M  1.387  (kukkura"). 

Vatika  (f.)  [fr.  vati']  a  fence  SnA  148  (kai)taka°  & 
rukkha°). 

Vatta'  (nt.)  [orig.  pp.  of  vattati]  i.  that  which  is  done, 
which  goes  on  or  is  customary,  i.  e.  duty,  service, 
custom,  function  Vin  11. 31  ;  Sn  294,  393  (gahattha") ; 
Vism  188  (cetiy*  angaija"  etc.);  DhA  1.92  (acariya") ; 
VbhA  354 (gata-paccagata°) ;  VvA47(gama°).  —  2.  (for 
vata')  observance,  vow,  virtue  D  in. 9  (the  7  vatta- 
padani,  difi.  from  those  enum*  under  vata-pada) ; 
Nd'  66  (sllafi  ca  vattafl  ca),  92  (hatthi°  etc.  :  see  vata'  2), 
104  ("suddhi),  106  (id.),  188  (giving  8  dhutangas  as 
vattas). 

-pa^ivatta  all  kinds  of  practices  or  duties  J  1.67 ; 
II. 103;  111.339;  IV.298 ;  Miln  416  (sucarita") ;  DhA 
1. 13  sq.  ;  11.277  ;  iv.28.  -bbata  the  usual  custom  DhA 
IV.44  ;  C.  on  S  1.36  §  2  and  on  S  11.18  §  4  sq.  -sampanna 
one  who  keeps  all  observances  VbhA  297  (where  the 
foil. 'vattani  are  enum"" :  82  khuddaka-vattani.  14 
maha",  cetiyangapa",  bodhiyangaija",  paniyamala", 
uposathagara",  agantuka°,  gamika°). 

Vatta'  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  vaktra  &  P.  vattar]  the  mouth 
(lit.  "  speaker ")  Pgdp  55  (suci-vatto  mah'odaro 
peto). 

Vatta^  [vyatta,  Sk.  vyatta,  of  vi-(-a-(-d4]  opened  wide 
Vin  111.37;  J  V.268  (vatte  mukhe). 


Vatta 


56 


Vatthu 


Vatta*  at  J  V.443  is  corrupt  for  vantha  cripple. 

Vattaka  (adj.)  [fr.  vatta']  doing,  exercising,  influencing; 
in  vasa°  having  power,  neg.  avasa"  having  no  free  will, 
involuntary  PvA  64. 

Vattati  [Vedic  vartate ;  vft.  A  differentiated  P.  form  is 
vattati.  —  Cp.  Av,  varat  to  turn,  Sk.  vartana  turning, 
vartula  =  Lat.  vertellura=  E.  whorl  (Ger.  wirtel)  &  vertil ; 
Gr.  paravr] ;  Goth.  walr|)an  =  Ger.  werden  (to  become,  E. 
"turn");  Goth.  -wa£rJ>s=E.  -wards;  Obulg.  vreteno 
spindle  ;  and  many  others  (e.  g.  Lat.  vertex,  vortex),  q.  v. 
Walde,  Lat.  Wtb.  s.  v.  verto]  to  move,  go  on,  proceed ; 
to  happen,  take  place,  to  be  ;  to  be  in  existence  ;  to  fare, 
to  do  Sn  p.  13  (parivesana  vattati  distribution  of  food 
was  in  progress) ;  Sn  654  (kammana  vattati  loko  keeps 
up,  goes  on);  Pv  11.9"  (vatteyya) ;  Miln  338  (na  cirat) 
vattate  bhavo). — grd.  vattabba  to  be  proceeded,  or 
simply  "to  be  "  Vin  11. 8  (so  read  for  vatth°) :  nissaya 
te  v.  "  thou  must  remain  under  the  superintendence  of 
others"  (Vin.  Texts,  11.344). — Often  equal  to  atthi 
or  (pi.)  santi,  i.  e.  is  (are),!  e-  g-  J  vi.504  ;  SnA  100 
(balha  vedana  vattanti) ;  PvA  40. — ppr.  med.  vatta- 
mana  see  sep.  —  pp.  vatta. — Caus.  vatteti  to  make 
go  on,  to  keep  up,  practise,  pursue  Sn  404  (etai)  vat- 
tayar)  pursuing  this) ;  freq.  in  phrases  vasai)  vat- 
teti  to  exercise  power,  e.  g.  PvA  89 ;  and  cakkar) 
vatteti  to  wield  royal  power,  to  govern  (cp.  expression 
cakkavattin  &  see  pavatteti)  Sn  554,  684  (vattessati), 
693  (dhamraa-cakkar)) ;  J  ni.412. — grd.  vattitabba 
to  be  practised  Vin  n.32.  — pp.  vattita. 

Vattana  (nt.)  [fr.  vattati]  moving  on,  upkeep,  existence, 
continuance  Sn  698  (cakka°  continuance  of  royal 
power) ;  Mhvs  3,  38. 

VattanI  (&  °i)  (f)  [cp.  Sk.  vartanl,  fr.  vjl]  a  track,  a  road 
J  1. 196,  395.  429;  111.200.  — kanha°  leaving  a  black 
trail.  Ep.  of  the  fire  J  in.140. 

Vattamana  (adj.-nt.)  [ppr.  med.  of  vattati]  being  in  exist- 
ence, going  on,  happening  at  the  time  ;  nt.  process, 
progress,  (as  "■)  in  progress  SnA  4  (°uppanna) ;  PvA  55. 
-°vacana  the  present  tense  SnA  16,  23. 

Vattamanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  last]  going  on,  being,  existing; 
"bhave  in  the  present  existence  or  period  Miln  291. 

Vattar  [n.  ag.  of  vatti,  vac]  one  who  speaks,  a  sayer, 
speaker  M  1.470;  S  1.63;  11. 182;  vi.94,  198;  D  1.139; 
A  IV. 32  ;  v  79  sq.,  226  sq.  ;  Th  i.  334  (read  ariya -vatta 
for  "  vata) ;  J  1.134 ;  SnA  272  ;  PvA  15. 

Vatti  [Vedic  vakti,  vao]  to  speak,  say,  call ;  pres.  not 
found  (for  which  vadati) ;  fut.  1*'  sg.  vakkhami  J  1.346  ; 
3"!  vakkhati  S  M42  ;  J  1.356 ;  11.40  ;  vi.352  ;  VbhA  51  ; 
I''  pi.  vakkhama  S  iv.72  ;  M  111.207;  Vism  170,  446; 
3"'  vakkhanti  Vin  11.  i  ;  pte.  fut.  vakkhamana  PvA  18. 
—  aor.  1"  sg.  avacarj  J  111.280  ;  DhA  in. 194,  &  avocat) 
Th  2,  124;  Vv  79'';  S  i.io;  DhA  ni.285  ;  2'>'>  avaca 
Th  2,  415,  avoca  Dh  133,  &  avacasi  Vv  35';  53*;  3"! 
avaca  J  1.294  ;  Pv  11.3''  ;  PvA  65  (ma  a.) ;  avoca  Th  2, 
494;  S  1.150;  Sn  p.  78;  J  11.160;  PvA  6,  31,  49,  & 
avac&si  J  vi.525;  i*'  pi.  avacumha  &  avocumha  M 
II. 91  ;  in. 15;  2""'  avacuttha  Vin  1.75  (ma  a.);  11.297; 
J  11.48  ;  DhA  1.73  ;  iv.228,  &  avocuttha  J  1. 1 76  ;  Miln  9  ; 
3""  pi.  avacui]  J  v. 260,  &  avocug  M  11.147.  —  »"/• 
vattug  Sn  431  ;  J  vi.35i  ;  Vism  522  =  VbhA  130  (vattu- 
kama)  ;  SnA  414;  DA  1.109;  DhA  1.329;  n.5. — ger. 
vatva  SnA  398  ;  PvA  68,  73,  &  vatvana  Sn  p.  78.  — 
grd.  vattabba  Miln  2  76  (kig  vattabbag  what  is  there  to 
be  said  about  it  ?  i.  e.  it  goes  without  saying) ;  SnA  123, 
174,  178;  PvA  12,  27,  92. — ppr.  med.  vuccamana 
Vin  1.60  ;  111.221  ;  PvA  13.  —  Pass,  vuccati  D  1.168,  245  ; 
Dh  63  ;  Mhvs  9.  9  ;  34,  81  (vuccate,  v.  1.  uccate) ;  J  1.129 
(vuccare,  3"*  pi.);  Pv.A  24,  34,  63,  76; — pp.  vutta 
(q.  "  \  —  Caus.  vaceti  to  make  speak,  i.  e.  to  read  out ; 


to  cause  to  read;  also  to  teach,  to  instruct  Sn  1018, 
1020;  J  1.452  (read);  PvA  97. —  pp-  vacita  (q.  v.). — 
Desid.  vavakkhati  (see  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  i84=Sk.  vivak- 
$ati)  to  wish  to  call  D  11.256. 

Vattika  =  vatika   Nd'    89    (having   the    habit   of   horses, 
elephants  rtc). 

Vattita  (nt.)  [fr.  vatteti]  that  which  goes  on,  round  (of 
existence),  revolution  Miln  226. 

Vattin  (adj.)  (-")  [fr.  v^t]  engaged  in,  having  power  over, 
making,  doing ;  only  in  cpds.  cakka"  &  vasa°  (q.  v.). 

Vattha^  (nt.)  [Vedic  vastra,  fr.  vas,  vaste  to  clothe ;  Idg. 
♦ues,  enlargement  of  *eu  ( :  Lat.  ex-uo) ;  cp.  Lat.  vestis 
"*vest(-ment),"  Gr.  ivwiii  to  clothe,  tl/ia  dress ;  Goth, 
wasjan  to  clothe  ;  wasti  dress]  i ."  cloth  ;  clothing,  gar- 
ment, raiment ;  also  collectively  :  clothes  ;  M  1.36  sq.  ; 
A  1.132,  209,  286;  11.85,  241  ;  111.27  (odatag),  50  (kasi- 
kag),  386  (kasayag) ;  iv.60,  186,  210  ;  v. 61  sq.  (ubhato- 
bhaga-vimatthag  =  M  11.13,  reading  vimaddha ;  with 
the  expression  cp.  ubhato-bhaga-vimutta) ;  Sn  295, 
304;  KhA  237  (°g  pariyodayati,  simile);  PvA  43,  50, 
70  ;  Sdhp  2 1 7.  — alia"  fresh,  clean  clothes  DhA  iv.220  ; 
ahata°  new  clothes  J  1.50  ;  Davs  11.39  ;  dibba"  heavenly, 
i.  e.  exquisite  dresses  PvA  23,  46,  53. — pi.  vatthani 
garments,  clothes  Sn  64,  287,  924;  Pug  57  (kasayani)  ; 
DhA  1.2 19  (their  uses,  from  a  new  dress  down  to  a  bit  of 
rag).  —  2.  hangings,  tapestry  J  iv.304.  —  On  vattha 
in  5i»!i7es  see /.P.T.S.  1907.  132- 

-guyha  "  that  which  is  concealed  by  a  cloth,"  i.  e.  the 
pudendum  D  1.106;  Sn  1022  ;  DA  1.275  (  =  angajatag  ; 
Bhagavato  ti  varanass'  eva  kosohitag  vatthaguyhag 
suvannavaijnag  paduma-gabbha-samanag).  -yuga  a 
pair  of  garments  J  iv.172  ;  Davs  1.34.  -lakkhana 
fortune  telling  from  clothes  SnA  362.  -sannidhi 
storing  up  of  clothes  D  1.6  ;Nd' 3  72  ;DAi.82.  -suttathe 
Suttanta  on  clothes  (i.e.  with  the  parable  of  the  clothes  : 
vatth'  upama-sutta)  M  1.36  sq.,  quoted  at  Vism  377 
and  SnA  119. 

Vattha~  as  pp.  of  vasati'  occurs  only  in  cpd.  nivattha. 
The  two  passages  in  PvA  where  vattha  is  printed  as  pp. 
(vatthani  vattha)  are  to  be  read  as  vattha-nivattha 
(PvA  46,  62). 

Vatthabba  at  vin  11.8  is  to  be  spelt  vattabba  (see  vattati). 

Vatthi  (m.  &  f)  [Vedic  vasti  in  meaning  i  ;  the  other 
meanings  later]  1.  the  bladder  Vin  111. 117;  J  1.146; 
Sn  195;  Vism  i44=riisA  117;  Vism  264,  345  (mutta°), 
362;  DA  1.161  ;  VbhA  248.  —  2.  the  pudendum:  see 
'kosa.  —  3.  a  clyster  (-bag) :  see  °kamma. 

-kamma(g  karoti)  ^o  use  a  clyster  Vin  1.216.  -kosa 
a  membranous  sheath  enveloping  the  sexual  organ  of  a 
male  DA  1.275  (°kosena  paticchanna  vatthaguyha  :  so 
read  for  °kesena) ;  VvA  252  (°mukha  orifice  of  the 
pudendum  of  an  elephant). 

Vatthu'  (nt.)  [Class.  Sk.  vastu,  fr.  vas']  lit.  "  ground," 
hence  i.  (lit.)  object,  real  thing,  property,  thing,  sub- 
stance (cp.  vatthu^  I)  A  11.209  (khetta",  where  khetta  in 
lit.  sense,  cp.  No.  2).  Here  belongs  the  def"  of  kama 
as  twofold  :  vatthu-kama  and  kilesa-kama,  or  desire  for 
realities,  objective  kama,  and  desire  as  property  of 
stained  character,  i.  e.  subjective  kama,  e.  g.  Nd'  1  ; 
SnA  99,  112  ;  DhsA  62.  —  On  vatthu  as  general  philos. 
term  cp.  Dhs.  trsp"  "§§  455,  679,  1229,  also  introd.  p.  86 ; 
Cpd.  15,  31,  174'.  — 2.  (appl""  meaning)  object,  item 
Vin  1.12 1  (antima-vatthug  ajjhapannaka  guilty  of  an 
extreme  ogence  ?) ;  v. 138  (the  10  aghata-vatthuni,  as 
at  Vbh  86) ;  D  111.252  {seven  niddesa°),  255  (eight  kusita"). 
258  {eight  dana°) ;  S  11.41.  56  sq.  ;  Vbh  71  {cakkhu°  etc.). 
306  sq.,  353;  Nett  114  {ten);  SnA  172  ;  DhA  iv.2  (ak- 
kosa°) ;  PvA  8,  20  (dana").  26  (left  out  in  id.  p.  KhA  209) . 
29,  65  (alabbhaneyya°).  96  (id,),  119,  121  (ittha"),  177, 


Vatthu 


57 


Vaddhi 


220.  Cp.  °bhuta.  —  3.  occasion  for,  reason,  ground 
A  II. 158  (4  khetta  [in  fig.  sense  !].  ayatana  &  adhi- 
karana) ;  iv.334  ;  D  1.13  sq.  (atthadasahi  vatthuhi  etc.) ; 
J  II. 5  (avatthumhi  chandar)  m&kari  do  not  set  your 
heart  on  what  is  unreasonable) ;  vatthuna  (instr.)  because 
PvA  118;  vatthuto  (abl.)  on  account  of  PvA  241. — ■ 
4.  basis,  foundation,  seat,  (objective)  substratum,  sub- 
stance, element  J  1.146  (kayo  paridevan^r)  v.);  VbhA 
404  (+ arammana).  See  most  of  the  cpds.  —  5.  subject- 
matter,  subject,  story,  account  SnA  4  ;  DhA  11.66  ;  PvA 
77,  92,  263,  269.  Cp.  "gatha  &  titles  like  Petavatthu, 
Vimanavatthu.  ' 

-kata  made  a  foundation  or  basis  of,  practised  thor- 
oughly J  II. 61  ;  v. 14  and  passim  (-i-bhavita  etc.).  In 
phrase  taldvatthukata  (  =  tala  avatthu  kata)  vatthu 
means  foundation,  basis,  ground  to  feed  and  live  on,  thus  ( 
"  a  palm  deprived  of  its  foundation  "  :  see  refs.  under 
tala.  -gatha  the  stanzas  of  the  story,  the  introductorj- 
(explanatory',  essential  to  its  understanding)  stanzas, 
something  like  "  prologue "  SnA  483,  575  (preceding 
Sn  699  &  976).  -dasaka  tenfold  substance  or  material 
basis  VbhA  22.  -bhuta  being  an  object,  i.  e.  subject 
to  J  V.210.  -rupa  substance  or  substratum  of  matter, 
material  form  Vism  561,  564;  VbhA  22,  172.  -visada- 
kiriya  clearing  of  the  foundation  or  fundamentals, 
purification  of  the  elements  VbhA  2  83  =  DhsA  76 
(°kiriyata;  trsl"  Expos.  loi  "cleansing  of  things  or 
substance  ") ;  Vism  128  ;  VbhA  276. 

Vatthn'  (A'edic  vastu ;  fr.  vas]  site,  ground,  field,  plot 
Vin  III. 50  (arama°  &  vihara°),  90  (id.);  Sn  209,  473 
(sakhetta",  cp.  vatthu"  4),  769  (khetta  +  ),  858  (id.) ;  Th 
■■  957  (khetta  f  vatthu,  cp.  Brethren  p.  337'  &  Vin. 
Texts  III. 389  sq);  Miln  279  (khetta"  a  plot  of  arable 
land);  DA  1.78  (contrasted  with  khetta.  see  khetta  i 
and  cp.  vattliu'  i ) ;  PvA  88  (gehassa  the  back  j-ard  of  the 
house) ;  haunted  by  fairies  (pariganhanti)  1)  11.87. 

-kamma  "  act  concerning  sites,"  i.  e.  preparing  the 
ground  for  building  D  1.12  (trsl°  :  fixing  on  lucky  sites 
for  dwellings),  cp.  DA  1.98 :  akata-vatthumhi  geha- 
patitthapanar).  -devata  the  gods  protecting  the  grounds, 
field-gods,  house-gods  Pv  1.4'  ( =  ghara- vatthur)  adhi- 
vattha  devata  PvA  i  7).  -parikirana  offerings  over  the 
site  of  a  house  ("consecrating  sites"  trsl°)  D  1.12  (cp. 
DA  i.98=:balikamma-karanar)).  -vijja  the  science  of  | 
(building-)  sites,  the  art  of  determining  a  suitable  (i.  e. 
lucky)  site  for  a  house  D  19  (see  expl"  at  DA  1.93); 
S  III. 239  ;  Nd'  372  ;  Vism  269  (in  comparison) ;  KhA  237. 
See  also  Dial  11.92  &  Fick,  Sociale  Gliederting  152. 

Vatthuka  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  vatthu']  i.  having  a  site  or  founda- 
tion or  ground,  in  ucca"  (high)  and  nica"  (low)  Vin 
II. 117,  120;  Mhvs  33,  87.  —  2.  having  its  ground  in, 
founded  on.  being  of  such  &  such  a  nature  or  composi- 
tion S  iv.67  (vaca");  Ps  i  130  (micchaditthi".  correct  in 
Index  J.P.T.S.  1908!);  Vbh  319  (uppanna°  ;  4- aram- 
mana), 392  (micchadiuhi°) ;  VbhA  403  (uppanna°  etc.), 

Vada  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  vad]  speaking,  in  cpd.  vaggu°  speaking 
pleasantly  Sn  955  (cp.  Nd'  446;  SnA  57i=sundara- 
vada) ;  suddhiij°  of  clean  speech  Sn  910. 

Vadannu  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  vadaniya,  which  also  in  P.  avada- 
niya]  lit.  "  (easily)  spoken  to,"  addressable,  i.  e.  liberal, 
bountiful,  kind  S  1.43  ;  A  11.59,  61  sq. ;  iv.271  sq.,  285. 
289,  322  ;  Sn  487;  Pv  iv.i^\  3".  10",  15';  VvA  281. 

Vadannuta  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  vadaiifiu]  bounty,  kindness.  I 
liberality ;  neg.  a°  stinginess  A  v. 146,  148  sq. ;  Vbh  371.   j 

Vadati  [vad,  Ved.  vadati  ;  Dhtp  134  vada  =  vacana]  to  ! 
speak,  say,  tell  A  iv.79;  Sn  1037,  1077  sq.  ;  Pug  42;  j 
PvA  13,  16,  39;  Pot.   r'  sg.  vade  (so  read  for  vado  ? 


M 


258  ;  i'*  sg.  vadeyya  Pv  13'  ;  aor.  y'  pi.  vadiQsu 


FVA   4.  —  Cp.   abhi".   upa°,   pa°.   vi°.  —  Another   form 
{not  Caus. :  see  Geiger.  P.Gr.  §  139')  is  vadeti  D  1.36; 


Vin  in;  Sn  825;  Sn  p.  140  (kig  vadetha) ;  J  1.294; 
imper.  vadehi  PvA  62  ;  Pot.  med.  i-'  pi.  vademase 
D  III. 197;  fut.  vadessati  Sn  351;  aor.  vadesi  DhA 
III. 174.  —  A  specific  Pali  formation  is  a  Caus.  vadiyati 
in  act.  and  med.  sense  (all  forms  only  in  GSthd  style), 
e.  g.  indie,  vadiyati  Sn  824=892.  832  ;  expl""  as  vadati 
SnA  541,  542,  orkathetibhanatietc  (the  t>'pical  Niddesa 
expl"  of  vadati:  see  Nd-  555)  Nd"  161.  In  contracted 
(&  shortened)  form  Pot.  2'"'  sg.  vajjesi  (*vadiyesi) 
you  might  tell,  i.  e.  please  tell  Pv  11. ii'  (=vadeyyasi 
PvA  149);  111.6'  (same  expl"  p.  203).  The  other  Pot. 
forms  from  the  same  base  are  the  foil. ;  i"  sg.  vajjag 
Th  2,  308:  2'"'  sg.  vajjasi  Th  2,  307;  J  in. 272  ;  vi.19; 
and  vajja  Th  2.  323  ;  3'*'  sg.  vajja  Sn  971  (cp.  Nd"  498) ; 
J  VI. 526  (  =  vadeyyaC.) ;  3"*  pi.  vajjuij  Sn  859  (=vadey- 
yur)  katheyyur)  etc.  Nd-  555);  J  v.221.  —  Caus.  vadeti 
to  make  sound,  to  play  (a  musical  instrument)  J  i  293  ; 
II. no.  254  (vadeyyama  we  might  play);  Ap  31  (aor. 
vadesui));  PvA  151  (vinai)  vadento).  —  Pass,  vajjati 
(*vadiyati)  to  be  played  or  sounded  J  1.13  (vajjanti 
bheriyo) ;  Ap  31  (ppr.  vajjamana  &  aor.  vajjigsu). — 
Another  form  of  ppr.  med.  (or  Pass.)  is  vadana  (being 
called,  so-called)  which  is  found  in  poetry  only  (con- 
tracted fr.  vadamana)  at  Vin  1.36  =  J  1.83.  —  pp.  udita" 
&  vadita  (q.  v.).  —  Caus.  II.  vadapeti  to  cause  to  be 
played  Mhvs  25,  74  (turiyari). 

Vadana  (nt.)  [fr.  vad]  speech,  utterance  VvA  345  (-(-ka- 
thana). 

Vadana  see  vadati. 

Vadaniya  [another  form  of  vadaiinu]  see  a° 

Vadapana  (nt.)  [fr.  vadapeti.  Caus.  II.  of  vadati]  making 
somebody  speak  or  something  sound  DhsA  333  (we  should 
better  read  vad°). 

Vaddalika  (f.)  [cp.  late  Sk.  vardala  &  BSk.  vardalika 
MVastu  III. 301  ;  Divy  500]  rainy  weather  Vin  1.3; 
J  VI. 52  (loc.  vaddalike) ;  DhA  in. 339;  VbhA  109. 

Vaddha'  (adj.-n.)  [pp.  of  vaddhati ;  see  also  vaddha. 
vuddha  &  vuddha.  The  root  given  by  Dhtp  (166)  for 
vrdh  is  vadh  in  meaning  "  vuddhi "]  i.  grown,  old  ;  an 
Elder ;  venerable,  respectable ;  one  who  has  authority. 
At  J  1.2 19  three  kinds  of  vaddha  are  distinguished  :  one 
by  nature  (jati°),  one  by  age  (vayo^),  one  by  virtue 
(guna°);  J  v. 140  (  =  pannaya  vuddha  C).  Usually 
comb''  with  apacayati  to  respect  the  aged,  e.  g.  J  1.2 19 ; 
and  in  cpd.  vaddh-apacayika  respecting  the  elders  or 
those  in  authority  J  iv.94 ;  and  °apacayin  id.  Sn  325 
(=vaddhanar)  apaciti-karana  SnA  332);  Dh  109; 
DhA  11.239  (=buddhatare  gunavuddhe  apacayamana). 
Cp.  jetth'  apacayin.  —  2.  glad,  joyful;  in  cpd,  "bhuta 
gladdened,  cheerful  J  v.6. 

Vaddha'  (m.  &  nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  vardhra  in  meaning  "  tape  "] 
a  (leather)  strap,  thong  J  11.154  (vv.  11.  baddha,  bandhana, 
bandha,  vafta).  Occurs  as  ai]sa°  shoulder  strap  at 
Ap  310,  where  ed.  prints  baddha  (  =  baddha*). 

-maya  consisting  of  a  strap,  made  of  leather  J  it.  153. 

Vaddliaka  [vaddha -l-ka]  in  cpd.  ar]sa°  "shoulder  strap" 
should  be  the  uniform  reading  for  a  series  of  diff.  spell- 
ings ("vaftaka,  "baddhaka,  "bandhaka)  at  Vin  1.204 ; 
11.114;  IV.  1 70.  Cp.  Geiger,  Zeitschrift  fitr  Buddhismus 
IV. 107. 

Vaddhana  (nt.)  [fr.  vrdh;  see  the  usual  vaddhana]  increase, 
furthering  J  III. 422  (kula°) ;  Sdhp  247  (piti°),  307  (id.). 

Vaddhava  (nt.)  [fr.  vaddha'  2]  joy,  pleasure  J  v.6  (but 
C.  =  pandita-bhava). 

Vsddhavya(nt.)  [fr.  vaddha'  I]  (old)age  J  n.137  (=  vuddha- 
bhava,  mahallakata  C). 

Vaddhi  in  anta°  at  J  1.260  is  to  be  read  as  vafti. 


Vaddheti 


58 


Vanin 


Vaddheti  [fr.  vardh  to  cut,  cp.  vaddhaka  &  vaddhaki]  to 
cut  off,  is  Kern's  proposed  reading  (see  Toev.  s.  v.)  at 
J  VI. 52 7  (siro  vaddhayitvana)  for  vajjheti  (T.  reading 
vajjhayitvana). 

Vadha  [fr.  vadh]  striking,  killing;  slaughter,  destruction, 
execution  D  ni.176;  A  11. 113;  Pug  58;  J  11.347;  Miln 
419  (°kata) ;  DhA  1.69  (pana°+  pana-ghata),  80,  296 ; 
DhA  11. 39  ;  VbhA  382.  ^  vadhai)  dadati  to  flog  J  iv.382. 
—  atta°  self-destruction  S  11.241  ;  piti°  parricide  DA 
1. 153  ;  iniga°  hunting  J  1.149. 

-bandhana  flogging  and  binding  (imprisoning).  In 
this  connection  vadh  is  given  as  a  separate  root  at 
Dhtp  172  &  384  in  meaning  "  bandhana."  See  A  11.209  ; 
V.206;  Sn  242  (vadha-cheda-bandhana ;  v.  is  expl"*  at 
SnA  285  as  "  sattanag  daijd'  adihi  akotanan "  i.  e. 
beating)  623  (=pothana  SnA  467);  J  1.435;  iv.ii; 
VbhA  97. 

Vadhaka  [fr.  vadh]  slaying,  killing  ;  murderous  ;  a  murderer 
S  III. 1 12  (in  simile);  iv.173  (id.);  A  iv.92  (id.);  Th  2, 
347;  D  III. 72  (°citta) ;  KhA  27;  VvA  72  ("cetana  mur- 
derous intention) ;  Vism  230,  231  (in  sim.) ;  Sdhp  58.  — 
f.  vadhika  J  v. 425  (pi.  °ayo). 

Vadhati  [Vedic  vadh;  the  root  is  given  at  Dhtp  169  in 
meaning  of  "  hiijsa  "]  to  strike,  punish  ;  kill,  slaughter, 
slay;  imper.  2"^  pi.  vadhetha  Vism  314;  get  vadhitva 
M  1. 159;  D  1.98;  J  I.I2  ;  IV.67;  SnA  257  (higsitva-l- ) ; 
fut.  vadhissati  Mhvs  25,  62  ;  aor.  vadhi  J  1.18  (cp.  ud-a- 
bbadhi);  cond.  i"  sg.  vadhissai)  Miln  221.  —  grd. 
vajjha:  see  a°. — Caus.  vadheti  J  1.168;  Miln  109. — 
pp.  vadhita. 

Vadhita  [pp.  of  vadheti]  smitten  Th  i,  783  =  M  11.73  -{not 
with  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  =  vyathita). 

Vadhnka  (f.)  [fr.  vadhu]  a  daughter-in-law,  a  young  wife 
A  11.78;  DhA  III. 260. 

Vadhu  (f.)  [Ved.  vadhu ;  to  Lith.  vedii  to  lead  into  one's 
house]  a  daughter-in-law  VvA  123. 

Vana'  (nt.)  [Ved.  vana. — The  P.  (edifying)  etym9logy 
clearly  takes  vana  as  belonging  to  van,  and,  dogmati- 
cally, equals  it  with  vana^  as  an  allegorical  expression 
("jungle")  to  tanha  (e.  g.  DhsA  364  on  Dhs  1059; 
DhA  111.424  on  Dh  283). —  The  Dhtp  (174)  &  Dhtm 
(254)  define  it  "  sambhattiyar),"  i.  e.  as  meaning  com- 
panionship] the  forest ;  wood  ;  as  a  place  of  pleasure  & 
sport  ("  wood  "),  as  well  as  of  danger  &  frightfulness 
("jungle"),  also  as  resort  of  ascetics,  noted  for  its 
loneliness  ("  forest ").  Of  (fanciful)  def"  of  vana  may 
be  mentioned :  SnA  24  (vanute  vanoti  ti  vanag) ;  KhA 
III  (vanayati  ti  vanai)) ;  DhsA  364  (tag  tag  aramma- 
nag  vanati  bhajati  alliyati  ti  vanag,  yacati  va  ti  vanag 
[i.  e.  vana^].  vanatho  ti  vyanjanena  padag  vaddhitag 
.  .  .  balava-tanhay'etag  nama) ;  DhA  111.424  (mahanta 
rukkha  vanag  nama,  khuddaka  tasmig  vane  thitatta 
vanatha  nama  etc.,  with  further  distinguishing  detail, 
concerning  the  allegorical  meanings).  —  D  11.256  (bhik- 
khiinag  samitig  vanag);  A  1.35,  37;  Dh  283  (also  as 
vana^) ;  Sn  272,  562  (siho  nadati  vane),  1015  (id.),  684 
(Isivhaya  v.);  Sn  p.  18  (Jetavana),  p.  115  (Icchahan- 
gala) ;  Th  2,  147  (Anjanavana ;  a  wood  near  Saketa, 
with  a  vihara) ;  J  v.37  (here  meaning  beds  of  lotuses) ; 
Miln  219  (vanag  sodheti  to  clear  a  jungle);  Dhs  1059 
("  jungle  "  =  tanha);  Pv  11.6^  (araniia°-gocara) ;  Vism 
424  (Nandana°  etc.) ;  DhA  iv.53  (tanha°  the  jungle  of 
lust).  Characterized  as  amba°  mango  grove  D  11. 126 
and  passim;  ambataka"  plum  grove  Vin  11.17;  uduin- 
bara  of  figs  DhA  1.284  ;  tapo°  forest  of  ascetics  ThA  136  ; 
DhA  iv.53  ;  naga"  elephant  forest  M  1.175  ;  braha  wild 
forest  A  1.152;  111.44;  Vv  63';  J  v.215;  rnaha"  great 
forest  Th  2,  373  (rahitag  A-  bhigsanakag).  —  vanatarag 
(\vith  compar.  suffix)  thicker  jungle,  denser  forest  Miln 
269  (vanato  vanatarag  pavisama).  —  On  similes  see 
JJ>.T.S.  1907.  133.     Cp.  vi°. 


-anta  the  border  of  the  forest,  the  forest  itself  Sn  708, 
709  ;  Pv  11.3^°  (= vana  C).  -kammika  one  who  works  in 
the  woods  J  iv.210  (°purisa) ;  v. 427,  429.  -gahana 
jungle  thicket  Vism  647  (in  simile),  -gumba  a  dense 
cluster  of  trees  Vv  81'  (cp.  VvA  315).  -caraka  a  forester 
SnA  51  (in  simile),  -cetya  a  shrine  in  the  wood  J  v.255. 
-timira  forest  darkness ;  in  metaphor  °matt-akkhin  at 
J  iv.285  =  v.284,  which  Kern  (Toev.  s.  v.)  changes  into 
°patt-akkhin,  i.  e.  with  eyes  like  the  leaves  of  the  forest 
darkness.  Kern  compares  Sk.  vanajapattr'ak§5  Mbh 
1.171,  43,  and  vanaj^-loftana  Avad.  Kalp.  3,  137.  The 
Cy.  expl"'  are  "  vana-timira-puppha-saman'  akkhl," 
and  "  giri-kannika-samana-netta "  ;  thus  taking  it  as 
name  of  the  plant  Clitoria  tematea.  -dahaka  (&  °da- 
hana)  burning  the  forest  (aggi)  KhA  21  (in  simile). 
-devata  forest  deva  S  iv.302.  -ppagumba  a  forest  grove 
VbhA  196.  -ppati  (&  vanaspati)  [cp.  Vedic  vanaspati, 
Prk.  vanapphai]  "  lord  of  the  forest,"  a  forest  tree ;  as 
vanappati  only  at  Vin  111.47 ;  otherwise  vanaspati,  e.  g. 
S  IV. 302  (osadhl-h  tina-t-  v. ;  opposed  to  herbs,  as  in 
R.V.);  A  1. 152  ;  J  1.329;  iv.233  (tina-lata-vanaspatiyo)  ; 
DhA  1.3.  -pattha  a  forest  jungle  D  1.71  ;  111.38,  49,  195  ; 
M  1. 16,  104;  Vin  11.146;  A  1.60;  111.138  (aranna°) ; 
Pug  59,  68 ;  DA  1.210.  -pantha  a  jungle  road  A  1.241. 
-bhanga  gleanings  of  the  wood,  i.  e.  presents  of  wild 
fruit  &  flowers  A  iv.197.  -mula  a  wild  root  D  1.166 
(-1-  phala) ;  A  1.241  (id.) ;  Miln  278.  -rati  delight  in  the 
forest  DhA  11.100.  -vannana  praise  of  the  jungle 
DhA  II.  100.  -vasin  forest-dweller  SnA  56  (Maha-tissa- 
tthera).  -sanda  jungle-thicket,  dense  jungle  D  1.87, 
117;  S  III.  109  (tibba  v.  avijjaya  adhivacana) ;  A  111.30  ; 
J  1.82,  170  ;  DhA  1. 313  ;  ii.ioo. 

Vana"  (nt.)  [van;  vanati  &  vanoti  to  desire=Av.  vanaiti 
Lat.  venus,  Ohg.  wini  friend  ( :  E.  winsome,  attractive) 
wunsc  =  E.  wish,  giwon  =  E.  wont ;  also  "  to  win."  The 
spelling  sometimes  is  vap :  see  vani.  —  The  def"  at  Dhtp 
523  is  "  yacane "  (i.  e.  from  begging),  at  Dhtm  736 
"  yacayag  "]  lust,  desire.  In  exegetical  literature  mixed 
up  with  vana'  (see  definitions  of  vana').  —  The  word  to 
the  Pali  Buddhist  forms  a  connection  between  vana  and 
nibbana,  which  is  felt  as  a  quasi  derivation  fr.  nibbana  = 
nis-H  vana  ;  see  nibbana  &  cp.  nibbana  II.  B  1.  —  S  1.180 
(so  'hag  vane  nibbanatho  visallo) ;  Sn  1131  (nibbana); 
Dh  334;  Th  I,  691  (vana  nibbanag  agatag).  —  A 
Denom.  fr.  vana^  is  vanayati  (like  vaniyati  fr.  vani). 

Vanaka  (-)  (adj.)  [fr.  vana']  belonging  to  the  forest,  forest- 
like ;  adj.  in  cpd.  ku°  (kubbanaka,  q.  v.)  brushwood 
Sn  1 1 34. 

Vanati,  Vannte,  Vanoti  [van ;  Sk.  vanoti  &  vanute.  See 
also  vana-,  vani,  vaneti]  to  desire,  love,  wish,  aim  at, 
ask  for  SnA  24  (vanute  &  vanoti) ;  DhsA  364  (vanati, 
bhajati,  alliyati).     Caus.  vanayati  KhA  iii. 

Vanatha  [vana-i-  tha ;  same  in  BSk.  e.  g.  MVastu  1.204] 
underwood,  brushwood,  thicket.  Does  not  occur  in  lit. 
meaning,  except  in  exegesis  of  Dh  283  at  DhA  111.424; 
q.  V.  under  vana'.  Another  def"  is  given  at  SnA  24: 
"  tanha  pariyutthana-vasena  vanag  tanoti  ti  vanatho, 
tanh'  anusayass'  etag  adhivacanag."  -^  The  fig.  meaning 
is  "  lust,  desire,"  see  e.  g.  S  1.186  ;  Th  i,  338 ;  Dh  344 ; 
Sn  16  (°ja);  Dhs  1059  (as  epithet  of  tapha) ;  J  11.205 
(vanathag  na  kayira) ;  Nett  81,  82 .  —  nibbanatha  free 
from  desire  S  1.180  ;  DhsA  364. 

Vanayati  [Denom.  fr.  vana=,  cp,  vanayati]  to  desire,  wish, 
covet,  to  hanker  after  M  1,260;  S  in. 190.  See  also 
alliyati. 

Vanika=  vanaka;  only  in  cpd.  naga°  one  belonging  to  the 
elephant  forest,  i  e.  an  elephant-hunter  M  1.175  ;  in.  132. 

Vanin  (adj.-n.)  [either  fr.  Sk.  vani  (=P.  vapi)  in  meaning 
"  begging,"  or  poetical  abbreviation  of  vanibbin]  poor, 
begging ;  one  who  asks  (for  alms)  or  begs,  a  mendicant 
J  VI. 232  (=vanibbaka  C). 


Vanibbaka 


59 


Vammin 


Vanibbaka  see  vanibbaka. 

Vanlyati  [Deaom.  £r.  vani=P.  vani]  to  desire  J  vi.264  C. : 
(pattheti),  270  (hadayag  vaniyati,  v.  1.  dhaniyati:  cp. 
alliyati).  —  See  also  vanati  cS:  vaneti. 

Vaaeja  [vane  (loc.  of  vana')  +  ja]  born  in  the  woods  J  11.446. 

Vanta  [pp.  of  vamati]  i .  vomited,  or  one  who  has  vomited 
Miln  214;  PvA  80.  Asnt.  vomit  at  Vin  1.303.  —  2.  (fig.) 
given  up,  thrown  up,  left  behind,  renounced  M  1.37 
(+catta,  mutta  &  pahina).  Cp.  BSk.  vanti-bhava,  syn. 
with  prahana  AvS  11. 188. 

-Ada  refuse-feeder,  crow  J  11.439.  -asa  one  who  has 
given  up  all  wishes,  an  Arahant  Dh  97  (  =  sabba  asa 
imina  vanta  DhA  1.187).  -isika  eating  what  has  been 
vomited,  a  certain  class  of  Petas  Miln  294.  -kasava  one 
who  has  left  behind  all  fault  Dh  lo  (=chaddita°  DhA 
1.S2).  -gatnana  at  Vism  2 10  =  DA  1.34  read  either  as 
v"  antagamana  or  c'  anta°.  -mala  stainless  Dh  261. 
-lokamisa  renouncing  worldly  profit  Dh  378. 

Vandaka  (adj.)  [fr.  vand]  disposed  to  veneration;  f.  °ika 

Th  2,  337. 

Vandati  [vand,  originally  identical  with  vad;  the  def"  at 
Dhtp  (135  &  588)  is  "abhivadana  &  thuti "]  to  greet 
respectfully,  salute,  to  pay  homage,  to  honour,  respect, 
to  revere,  venerate,  adore  Sn  366,  547,  573,  1028 ; 
Pv  II. I*;  Mhvs  15,  14  (H-piijeti) ;  Miln  14;  SnA  191; 
PvA  53  (sirasa  with  the  head,  a  very  respectful  way  of 
greeting),  67;  VvA  71.  imper.  vanda  Vv  21'  (=abhi- 
vadaya  VvA  105) ;  pi.  vandantu  Sn  573  ;  ppr.  vanda- 
mana  Sn  598  ;  aor.  vandi  Sn  252  ;  J  1.88 ;  PvA  38,  61, 
81,  141,  275;  inf.  vanditui)  PvA  77;  grd.  vandiya  (neg. 
a")  Vin[ii.i62.  — Cans.  II.  vandapeti  to  cause  somebody 
to  pay  homage  J  1.88  ;  iii.ii.  — pp.  vandita. 

Vandana  (nt.)  &  Vandana  (f.)  [fr.  vand,  cp.  Vedic  vandana] 
salutation,  respect,  paying  homage ;  veneration,  adora- 
tion A  1.294  (a);  11.203  (-fpuja);  J  1.88;  Pug  19,  24; 
Mhvs  15,  18  ;  Miln  377 ;  PvA  1.53  ;  SnA  492  ;  ThA  256 ; 
Sdhp  221,  540. 

Vandapana  (nt.)  [fr.  vandapeti ;  Cans,  of  vandati]  causing 
to  do  homage  J  1.67. 

Vandita  [pp.  of  vandati]  saluted,  revered,  honoured,  paid 
homage  to ;  as  nt.  homage,  respect,  veneration  Sn  702 
(akkuttha-t-);Th2,  388  (id.);  J  1.88. 

Vanditar  [n.  ag.  fr.  vandita]  one  who  venerates  or  adores, 
a  worshipper  J  vi.207  (vandif  assa  =  vandita  bhaveyya 
C). 

Vapakassati  see  vavakassati. 

Vapati^  [vap,  Vedic  vapate.  Def  at  Dhtp  192  :  bija- 
nikkhepe]  to  sow  Sn  p.  13  (kasati+-);  J  1.150  (aivapai) 
vapitva) ;  PvA  139. — ^  Pass,  vappate  S  1.227  (yadisag 
v,  bijat)  tadisag  harate  phalag),  and  vuppati  [Vedic 
upyate]  Th  i,  530.  —  pp.  vutta.  —  Caus.  I.  vapeti:  see 
pp.  vapita'.  —  Caus.  II.  vapipeti  to  cause  to  be  sown 
Vin  III. 131  (khettag);  J  iv.276  (salii)). 

Vapati'  [vap,  probably  identical  with  vapati']  to  shear, 
mow,  to  cut,  shave  :  only  in  pp.  of  Caus.  vapita*  (q.  v.). 

Vapana  (nt.)  [fr.  vap]  sowing  SnA  137;  DhA  111.220  (°kas- 
saka) ;  PvA  8. 

Vapayati  [vi  -t-  apa  f  ya]  to  go  away,  to  disappear,  only  at 
Vin.  i.2  =  Kvu  186  (kankha  vapayanti  sabba  ;  cp.  id. 
p.  MVaatu  II. 416  vyapanauti,  to  be  read  as  vyapa- 
yanti). 

Vappa'  (m.  or  nt.)  [orig.  grd.  fr.  vap  =  Sk.  vapya]  to  be 
sown,  sowing ;  or  soil  to  be  sown  on,  in  pagsu°  sowing 
on  light  soil  &  kalala°  on  heavy  soil  SnA  137.  — Note. 


The  def"  of  a  root  vapp  at  Dhtm  541  with  "  varane  " 
refers  to  P.  vappa  bank  of  a  river  (Abhp  ii33)  =  Sk. 
vapra,  which  is  not  found  in  our  texts. 

-kanima  the  act  or  occupation  of  sowing  J  1.340 
(-t-kasi-kamma).  -kala  sowing  time  Sn  p.  13;  S  1.172 
(=vapanakala,  bija-nikkhepa-kala  SnA  137).  -man- 
gala  ploughing  festival  J  1.57;  DhA  11. 113;  SnA  141. 

Vappa'  [cp.  Epic.  &  Claiss.  Sk.  ba?pa]  a  tear,  tears  Vin  1.345 
(vappar)  puiichitva  wiping  the  tears). 

Vabbhacitao  is  a  UwaK  Xiyo/iivov  at  M  1.172  ;  read  perhaps 
better  as  vambhayitar) :  see  p.  545.  Neumann  trsl»  only 
"  thus  spoken  "  (i.  e.  bhasitam  etag). 

Vamati  [vam,  Idg.  *uemOi  cp.  Lat.  vomo,  vomitus  =  vama- 
thu ;  Gr.  ifiiio  (:  fi.  emetic);  Oicel.  vaema  seasickness. 

—  The  def°  at  Dhtp  221  &  Dhtm  315  is  "  uggirana  "] 
to  vomit,  eject,  throw  out,  discharge  Sn  198=]  1.146; 
J  v. 255  (fut.  vamissati);  Pv  IV.3*'  (=uddayati  chad^a- 
yati  PvA  256). — Caus.  vameti  Miln  169.  —  pp.  vanta. 

Vamatha  [fr.  vam]  vomiting;  discharged  food  PvA  173 
("bhatta;  -I- ucchitflia"). 

Vamana  (nt.)  [fr.  vam]  an  emetic  D  1.12;  A  v. 219;  cp. 
J.P.T.S.  1907,  452. 

Vamanlya  [grd.  of  vamati ;  cp.  Sk.  vamaniya ;  a  often 
interchanges  with  a  before  1  &  m,  like  Caus.  vameti  & 
vameti]  one  who  has  to  take  an  emetic  Miln  169. 

Vambhana  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  vambheti]  contempt,  despite 
Vin  iv.6 ;  M  1.402  (att'ukkarjsana :  para-vambhana), 
Nd'  505 ;  Vism  29 ;  VbhA  484 ;  Pgdp  100.  —  Spelt 
vamhana  at  J  1.454  (vamhana-vacana)  &  at  DhsA  396 
(khugsana"). 

Vambhanlya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  vambheti]  to  be  despised, 
wretched,  miserable  PvA  175,  176. 

Vambhayita  (nt.)  [pp.  of  vambheti]  being  despised  or  reviled 
M  1. 1 72;  Sn  905;  Nd'  319  (=nindita,  garahita,  upa- 
vadita). 

Vambhln  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  vambh]  despising,  treating  with 
contempt,  disparaging  M  1.95  (para°,  opp.  to  att'  ukkag- 
saka). 

Vambheti  (&  Vamheti)  [Caus.  of  vambh,  a  root  of  uncertain 
origin  (connected  with  vam  ?).  There  is  a  form  vambha 
given  by  Sk.  lexicographers  as  a  dial,  word  for  vag^. 
Could  it  be  a  contraction  fr.  vyambheti  =  vi  +  Denom. 
fr.  ambho  2,  part,  of  contempt? — The  Dhtp  (602) 
defines  vambh  as  "  garahayag  "]  to  treat  with  con- 
tempt, despise,  revile,  scold ;  usually  either  comb''  with 
khugseti  or  opposed  to  ukkagseti,  e.  g.  Vin  11. 18  ;  IV.4 ; 
M  1.200  (=Sn  132  avajanati),  402  sq. ;  Di.90  ;  Aii.27sq. ; 
Th  I,  621  ;  DA  1.256  (  =  hileti);  DhA  iv.38 ;  VvA  348. 

—  pp.  vambhayita.  — vamheti  is  found  at  J  1,191,  356  ; 
cp.  vamhana.  —  Note.  The  spelling  bh  interchanges 
with  that  of  h  (vamheti),  as  ambho  shows  var.  amho. 
Trenckner  (introd.  to  M  i.  p.  1)  gives  vambheti  (as  BB 
reading)  the  preference  over  vamheti  (as  SS  reading). 
Morris'  note  on  vambheti  in  J.P.T.S.  1884,  96  does  not 
throw  any  light  on  its  etymology. 

Vamma  (nt.)  [Vedic  varman,  fr.  vi  to  cover,  enclose] 
armour  J  11.22. 

Vammika  (adj.)  [£r.  vamma]  =  vammin  Vin  1.342. 

Vammita  [pp.  of  vammeti,  cp.  Sk.  varmita]  armoured, 
clad  in  armour  J  1.179  (assa);  11.315  (hatthi);  111.8  ; 
V.301,  322  ;  DA  1.40. 

Vammin  (adj.)  [fr.  vamma  ;  Vedic  varmin]  wearing  armour, 
armoured  J  iv.353  (=ketaka-phalaka-hattha  C.) ;  v. 259, 
373;  VI.25;  Miln  331. 


Vammika 


60 


Valanjeti 


Vammika  &  vammika  (m.  &  nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  valmika ;  Idg. 
*uorrn(ai) ;  cp.  Av.  raaoiris,  Sk.  vamrah,  Gr.  fiopiit]t, 
Lat.  formica,  Cyrar.  mor  ;  all  of  same  origin  &  meaning] 
ant-hill :  (a)  °ika:  M  1.142  sq. ;  J  111.85  ;  iv.30  ("bila  the 
ant's  hole) ;  v. 163.  —  (b)  °ika:  J  1.432  ;  iv.30  ;  Vism  183 
(described),  304  ("rauddani),  446;  DhA  11.51  ;  111.208; 
IV.  154. 

Vammeti  [Denom.  fr.  vamma]  to  dress  in  armour,  to  armour 
J  1. 180;  11.94  (raangala-hatthir)). — pp.  vammita. 

Vamha  [for  vambha :  see  vambheti]  bragging,  boasting, 
despising  J  1.319  (°vacana). 

Vaya'  (&  vayo)  (nt.)  [Vedic  vayas  vitality,  age;  to  be  dis- 
tinguished from  another  vayas  meaning  "  fowl."  The 
latter  is  probably  meant  at  Dhtp  232  (&  Dhtm  332)  with 
def°  "  gamane."  The  etym.  of  vayo  (age)  is  connected 
with  Sk.  vira  =  Lat.  vir.  man,  hero,  vis  strength;  Gr. 
if  sinew,  \<pwt;  strong ;  Sk.  vidayati  to  make  fast,  also 
ve&iti ;  whereas  vayas  (fowl)  corresponds  with  Sk. 
vayasa  (bird)  &  vih  to  Gr.  aUT64,  eagle,  oiwvot  bird  of 
prey,  Lat.  avis  bird]  age,  especially  young  age,  prime, 
youth  ;  meaning  "  old  age  "  when  characterized  as  such 
or  contrasted  to  youth  (the  ord.  term  for  old  age  being 
jara).  Three  "  ages  "  or  "  periods  of  life  "  are  usually 
distinguished,  viz.  pathama"  youth,  majjhima°  middle 
age,  pacchima°  old  age,  e.  g.  at  J  1.79 ;  Vism  619 ;  DhA 
III. 133.  —  vayo  anuppatta  one  who  has  attained  old  age, 
old  D  1.48  ( =  pacchima-vayar)  anuppatta  DA  1.143); 
Sn  pp.  50,  92.  —  Cp.  Dh  260  ;  J  1.138  (vayo-hara  kesa) ; 
Vism  619  (the  3  vayas  with  subdivisions  into  dasakas 
or  decades  of  life) ;  Mhvs  2,  26  (ekunatiijso  vayasa  29 
years  of  age) ;  PvA  5  (pathama-vaye  when  quite  young), 
36  (id. ;  just  grown  up).     In  cpds.  vaya°. 

-kalyana  charm  of  youth  DhA  1.387.  -ppatta  come  of 
age,  fit  to  marry  (at  16)  VvA  120  ;  PvA  3,  112;  ThA  266. 

Vaya^  [Sk.  vyaya,  vi-l-i;  occasionally  as  vyaya  in  Pali  as 
well]  I.  loss,  want,  expense  (opp.  aya)  A  iv.282  (bhoga- 
nag) ;  Sn  739  ;  PvA  130.  — avyayena  safely  D  1.72.  — 
2.  decay  (opp.  uppada)  D  11.157=}  1-392  (anicca  vata 
sankhara  uppada-vaya-dhammino) ;  S  iv.28;  A  1. 152, 
299. 

-karana  expense,  expenditure  J  iv.355 ;  Vin  11 321 
(Sam.  Pas  on  C.  V.  V1.4,  6,  explaining  vejryasika  or 
veyyayika  of  Vin  11.157). 

Vayag  is  the  Sk.  form  of  the  nom.  pi.  of  pers.  pron.  ahai], 
represented  in  Pali  by  mayai]  (q.  v.).  The  form  vayar) 
only  in  grammarians,  mentioned  also  by  Miiller,  P.Gr. 
p.  87  as  occurring  in  Dh  (?).  The  enclitic  form  for  ace. 
gen.  &  dat.  is  no,  found  e.  g.  at  Pv  1.5'  (gloss  for  vo ; 
C.  amhakari) ;  J  11.153,  35^  ;  DhA  i.ioi  ;  PvA  20,  73. 

Vayassa  [cp.  Sk.  vayasya]  a  friend  J  11. 31 ;  in. 140  ;  v.157. 

Vayha  (nt.)  &  Vayha  (f.)  [grd.  formation  fr.  vah;  cp.  Sk. 
vahya  (nt.)]  a  vehicle,  portable  bed,  litter  Vin  iv.339 
(enum''  under  yana  together  with  ratha  sakata  sanda- 
manika  sivika  &  patanki) ;  J  vi.500  (f.),  with  sivika  A 
ratha. 

Vara'  (adj.)  [fr.  vi  to  wish  ;  Vedic  vara]  excellent,  splendid, 
best,  noble.  As  attribute  it  either  precedes  or  follows 
the  noun  which  it  characterizes,  e.  g.  °paiina  of  supreme 
wisdom  Sn  391,  1128  (  =  agga-panna  Nd^  557);  °bhatta 
excellent  food  (opp.  lamaka")  J  1.123  )  "lailcaka  excellent 
gift  (?)  (Trenckner,  Miln  p.  424) :  see  under  lancaka.  — 
dhainma°  the  best  norm  Sn  233  ;  nagara"  the  noble  city 
Vv  16'  (  =  uttama°,  Rajagahai)  sandhaya  vuttag  VvA 
82) ;  ratana°  the  best  of  gems  Sn  683  ;  raja"  famous  king 
Vv  32*  (  =  Sakka  VvA  134);  or  inserted  between  noun 
and  apposition  (or  predicate),  e.  g.  akirina-vara-Iak- 
khana  full  of  the  best  marks  Sn  408 ;  nari-vara-gana  a 
crowd  of  most  lovely  women  Sn  301  ;  esp.  frequent  in 
comb"  with  predicate  gata:  "  gone  on  to  the  best  of," 


i.  e.  riding  the  most  stately  (horse  or  elephant),  or 
walking  on  the  royal  (palace)  etc.,  e.  g.  upari-pasada- 
vara-gata  PvA  105;  sindha-pitthi-vara-gata  J  1.179; 
hatthi-khandha  vara-gata  PvA  75.  216,  279. — -nt. 
varat)  in  compar.  or  superl.  function  :  better  than  (instr.) ; 
the  best,  the  most  excellent  thing  A  iv.128  (katamag  nu 
kho  varari  :  yag  .  .  .  yag) ;  Dh  178  (adhipaccena  sota- 
pattiphalar)  v.),  322  (varar)  assatara  danta  .  .  .  atta- 
danto  tato  varag). 

-angana  a  noble  or  beautiful  woman  Mhvs  33,  84. 
-adayin  acquiring  the  best  S  iv.250  ;  A  111.80.  -aroha 
(l)  state  elephant  Vv  5'  (  =  varo  aggo  settho  aroho  ti 
vararoho  VvA  35) ;  (2)  (f.)  a  noble  lady  J  vi.562  (Maddi 
vararoha  rajaputti). 

Vara"  (m.  &  nt.)  [fr.  vr  to  wish]  wish,  boon,  favour  Miln 
110,  139.  Usually  in  phrases  ilke  varag  dadati  to  grant 
a  wish  or  a  boon  J  iv.io;  VvA  260;  PvA  20.  varat) 
ganhati  to  take  a  wish  or  a  vow  J  v. 382  ;  varai)  vunati 
(varati)  id.  J  111.493  (varai)  varassu,  imper.) ;  Pv  ii.9"''  "  ; 
Miln  227.  — varag  yacati  to  ask  a  favour  J  111.315 
(varani  yacami). 

Varaka'  [cp.  *Sk.  varaka]  the  bean  Phaseolus  trilobus 
J  11.75  (where  equal  to  kalaya) ;  Miln  267  ;  DhA  1.311. 

Varaka"'  (adj.)  [fr.  vr]  wishing  or  asking  (in  marriage)  Th 
2,  406. 

VaraQa  [cp.  Sk.  varana  rampart,  causeway,  wall]  the  tree 
Crataeva  roxburghii  J  1.222,  317  (°rukkha),  3i9  =  DhA 
111.409  ("katthabhanja) ;  J  vi.535. 

*Varati  [vr]  &  der.  ("  to  choose  "  as  well  as  "  to  obstruct  ") 
see  vunati. 

Varatta  (nt.)  &  Varatta  (f)  [cp.  Vedic  varatra,  given  also 
in  meaning  "  elephant's  girth  "  at  Halayudha  11.66]  a 
strap,  thong,  strip  of  leather  S  1.63 ;  A  11.33  ;  Sn  622  ; 
Dh  398  (fig.  for  tanha) ;  J  11.153  ;  v.45.  As  "  harness  " 
at  J  1. 1 75  ;  as  straps  on  a  ship's  msist  (to  hold  the  sails) 
Miln  378.  —  Cp.  varattika. 

-khanda  strip  of  leather,  a  strap  M  1.244=11.193  = 
111.259  =  S  IV. 56= A  111.380. 

Varaka  (adj.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  varaka]  wretched,  miserable 
S  1.231  ;  J  IV. 285  ;  Vism  315;  VvA  loi  ;  PvA  120  (syn. 
for  kapana),  175  (id.). 

Varaha  [Vedic  varaha  &  varahu,  freq.  in  Rigveda]  a  boar, 
wild  hog  Dh  325  =  Th  i,  17;  J  v.4o6  =  vi.277  ;  Miln  364; 
Sdhp  378. 

Valanja  (-°)  [see  valanjeti]  i.  track,  line,  trace,  in  pada° 
track,  footprint  J  1.8;  11.153  (v-  1-  laiica  &  laficha) ; 
iv.221  (valaiicha  T.),  383;  DhA  11.38.  —  2.  that  which 
is  spent  or  secreted,  i.  e.  outflow,  faeces,  excrement,  in 
sarira°  faeces  J  1.70,  80,  421  (°r)  muncati  to  ease  oneself) ; 
111.486;  DhA  11.55.  —  2.  design,  use;  only  neg.  ava- 
lanja  useless,  superfluous  Vin  iv.266 ;  VvA  46  (°i) 
akagsu  rendered  useless);  DhA  iv.116. 

Valanjana  (nt.)  [fr.  valanjeti]  I.  resorting,  acting  as, 
behaviour  VvA  248.  —  2.  giving  off,  evacuation,  easing 
the  body  J  1.161  ("vacca-kufi  privy);  DhA  111.270 
(sarira°). 

Vala&janaka  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  valanjana]  being  marked  ofi, 
being  traced,  belonging  to,  behaving,  living  (anto°  in  the 
inner  precincts,  bahi'  outside  the  bounds)  J  1.382,  385, 
398. 

Valanjita  [pp.  of  valaiijeti ;  cp.  BSk.  valanjita  used, 
MVastu  III. 2 76]  traced,  tracked,  practised,  travelled 
J  111.542  (magga). 

Valafijeti  [customarily  expl^  as  ava-t-lafi]  (cp.  Geiger 
P.Gr.  §  66'),  the  root  la^  being  given  as  a  Sk.  root  in 
meaning  "  to  fry,"  "  to  be  strong,"  and  a  variety  of 


Valaya 


6i 


Valina 


others  (see  Mon.  Williams  s.  v.  lanj).  But  the  root  &  its 
derivations  are  only  found  in  lexicographical  and  gram- 
matical works,  therefore  it  is  doubtful  whether  it  is 
genuine,  lanja  is  given  as  "  pada."  i.  e.  track,  place, 
foot,  and  also  "  tail."  We  are  inclined  to  see  in  lanj  a 
by-form  of  lafich,  which  is  a  variant  of  lakf  "  to  mark  " 
etc.  (cp.  laiicha,  laiichaka,  "ana,  "ita).  Thus  the  mean- 
ing would  range  from  originally  "  trace,"  mark  off, 
enclose,  to  :  "  being  enclosed,"  assigned  or  belonging  to, 
i.  e.  moving  (in),  frequenting  etc.,  as  given  in  C.  expl°*. 
There  seems  to  be  a  Singhalese  word  at  the  root  of  it, 
as  it  is  certainly  dialectical.  —  The  Dhtm  (522)  laconi- 
cally defines  valafij  as  "  valaiijane  "]  i.  to  trace,  track, 
travel  (a  road)  ;  practise,  achieve,  resort  to  Miln  359  ; 
VvA  58. — 2.  to  use,  use  up,  spend  J  1.102  ;  in. 342  ; 
VI. 369,  382,  521.  —  ppr.  Pass,  (a-)valanjiyamana  (not 
any  longer)  in  use  J  i  iii.  —  pp.  valafijita. 

Valaya  (m.  &  nt.)  [Epic  Sk.  valaya,  fr.  Idg.  *uel  to  turn  ; 
see  Sk.  roots  vf  to  enclose,  and  val  to  turn,  to  which 
belong  the  foil.  :  varutra  upper  robe,  iirmi  wave,  fold, 
valita  bent,  valayati  to  make  roll,  valli  creeper,  vata 
rope,  vana  cane.  Cp.  also  Lat.  volvo  to  roll,  Gr.  iXvw 
to  wind,  t\i5  round,  i\vrfiui>  cover;  Goth,  walwjan  to 
roll  on,  Ohg.  welzan  &  walzan  =  Ags.  wealtan  (E.  waltz) ; 
Ags.  wylm  wave,  and  many  others,  q.  v.  in  Walde, 
Lat.  iVtb.  s.  V.  volvo. — The  Dhtp  (274)  gives  root  val 
in  meaning  sagvarana,  i.  e.  obstruct,  cover.  See  further 
vunati]  a  bracelet  Vin  11. 106;  J  11.197  (dantakare 
valay'-adini  karonte  disva) ;  111.377  ^  vi.64,  65  ;  DA  1.50  ; 
DhA  1.226  (danta°  ivory  Ijangle) ;  PvA  157  (sanklia°) ; 
Mhvs  II,  14  (°anguli-vethaka). 

Valabaka  [valaha  f  ka  ;  of  dial,  origin  ;  cp.  Epic  Sk.  bala- 
haka]  i.  a  cloud,  dark  cloud,  thundercloud  S  1.212  = 
Th  2,  55  ;  A  II. 102  ;  v. 22  ;  Th  i,  760  ;  Pug  42,  43  ;  Vv  68'  ; 
]  III. 245  ;  270  (ghana°) ;  Vism  285  ("patala) ;  Miln  274; 
DhsA  317;  VvA  12  (  =  abbha). — 2.  N.  of  mythical 
horses  S  in. 145. 

-kayika  (deva)  groups  of  cloud  gods  (viz.  sita°,  unha°, 
abbha°,  vata°,  vassa°)  S  in. 254. 

Valahassa  [valaha  f  assa]  cloud-horse  J  11.129  (the  Vala- 
hassajataka,  pp.  127  sq.) ;  cp.  BSk.  Balah'asva  (-raja) 
Divy  120  sq.  (see  Index  Divy). 

Vali  &  Vall  (f)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  vali ;  fr  val.  Spelling  occa- 
sionally with  1]  a  line,  fold,  ^vrinkle,  a  streak,  row; 
Vin  II. 112  (read  valiyo  for  valir)  ?) ;  Th  2,  256  ;  J  iv.109  ; 
Shhp  104. — mutta-vali  a  string  of  pearls  VvA  169. 
For  vat^a-vali  see  vattana.     See  also  avali. 

Valika  (adj.)  [fr.  vali]  having  folds  J  1.499. 

Valita  [pp.  of  val :  see  valeti]  wrinkled  A  1. 1 38  (ace.  khanda 
dantai]  palita-kesag  vilunag  khalitag  siro-valitar) 
tilak'ahata-gattar) :  cp.  valin  with  passage  M  1.88  = 
111.180,  one  of  the  two  evidently  misread) ;  PvA  56,  153. 
In  comp"  with  taca  contracted  to  valittaca  (for  valita- 
ttaca)  "with  wrinkled  skin"  DhA  11.190  (phalita- 
kesa-t-);  with  abstr.  valittacata  the  fact  of  having  a 
wrinkled  skin  M  1.49  (palicca-t-  ;  cp.  MA  215);  A  11. 196 
(khandicca  palicca-l-). 

Valin  (adj.)  [fr.  vali]  having  wrinkles  M  1.88  (ace.  palita- 
kesir)  vilunar)  khalita-sirag  valinar))=iii.i8o  (palita- 
kesar)  vilunar)  khalitag-sirar)  valinai)  etc.)  See  valita 
for  this  passage.  —  In  comp"  vali-mukha  "  wrinkled 
face,"  i.  e.  monkey  J  11.298. 

Valiya  at  M  1.446  is  not  clear.  It  is  comb''  with  vanniya 
(q.  v.).     See  also  note  on  p.  567 ;  v.  1.  paijiya ;  C.  silent. 

Vallkag  [cp.  Sk.  vyalikaij]  read  for  valikar)  at  Th  2,  403, 
in  meaning  "  wrong,  fault  "  ;  ThA  266  expl"  as  "  vya- 
likai)  dosag."     So  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v. 


VaUmint  (adj.)  [fr.  vali]  having  wrinkles  Th  2,  269  (pi. 
valimata). 

Valeti  [cp.  Sk.  valeti,  Caus.  of  val  to  turn  :  see  valaya] 
I.  to  twist,  turn,  in  givatj  to  wring  (a  fowl's  neck) 
J  1.436  ;  111.178  (givag  valitva  :  read  °etva).  —  2.  to  twist 
or  wind  round,  to  put  (a  garment)  on,  to  dress  J  1.452 
(satake  valetug  ;  v.  1.  valancetur)). — pp.  valita. 

VallaM  (f.)  cp.  Epic  Sk.  vallaki,  BSk.  valliki  Divy  108  ; 
MVastu  1.227]  the  Indian  lute  Abhp  138. 

Vallabha  [cp.  Epic  &  Class.  Sk.  vallabha  &  BSk.  valla- 
bhaka  a  sea  monster  Divy  231]  a  favourite  J  iv.404  ; 
VI  38.  371  ;  raja"  a  king's  favourite,  an  overseer  J  1.342  ; 
Mhvs  37,  10;  VbhA  501. — f.  vallabha  (a)  beloved 
(woman),  a  favourite  J  111.40  ;  VvA  92,  135,  i8r. 

Vallabhatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  vallabha]  being  a  favourite 
Davs  v.  7. 

Vallari  (f.)  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  vallari,  Halayudha  11.30]  a 
branching  footstalk,  a  compound  pedicle  Abhp  550. 
The  word  is  found  in  BSk.  in  meaning  of  "  musical 
instrument"  at  Divy  315  and  passim. 

Vallika  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  valika  ?]  i.  an  ornament  for  the  ear 
Vin  II. 106  (cp.  Bdhgh's  expl°  on  p.  316).  —  2.  a  jungle 
rope  Vin  11. 122. 

Vallibha  [cp.  late  Sk.  valibha  wrinkled]  the  plant  kum- 
bhanda  i.  e.  a  kind  of  gourd  Abhp  597  (no  other  ref .  ?). 

Valli  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  valll ;  for  etym.  see  valaya]  i.  a  climbing 
plant,  a  creeper  Vin  III. 144;  J  v.37  ;  vi.536;  VvA  147, 
335  (here  as  a  root  ?).  — santanaka°  a  long,  spreading 
creeper  VvA  94,  162.  —  2.  a  reed  or  rush  used  as  a  string 
or  rope  for  binding  or  tying  (esp.  in  building),  bast  (?) 
M  1. 190  (Neumann,  "Binse");  J  in. 52  (satta  rohita 
macche  uddharitva  valliya  avunitva  netva  etc.),  333  (in 
similar  connection);  DhA  in. 118.  —  3.  in  kanna°  the 
lobe  of  the  ear  Mhvs  25,  94.  — The  comp"  form  of  valli 
is  valli°. 

-koti  the  tips  of  a  creeper  J  vi.548.  -pakka  the  fruit 
of  a  creeper  Vv  33^"  .phala  =  °pakka  J  iv.445.  -san- 
tana  spreadings  or  shoots  of  a  creeper  KhA  48.  -haraka 
carrying  a  (garland  of)  creeper  Vism  523  =  VbhA  131 
(in  comparison  illustrating  the  paticca-samuppada). 

Vallora  (nt.)  [cp.  Cass.  Sk.  vallura]  dried  flesh  S  11.98  ; 
J  "■245- 

Va}a  at  Vism  312  is  to  be  read  vala  (snake),  in  phrase 
valehi  upadduta  "  molested  by  snakes." 

Valabha  [  =  va)ava?]  is  not  clear;  it  occurs  only  in  the 
expression  (is  it  found  in  the  Canon  ?)  vajabha-mukha 
a  submarine  fire  or  a  purgatory  Abhp  889.  The  Epic 
Sk.  form  is  vadava-mukha  (Halayudha  1.70  ;  iil.i). 

Valabhl  (f)  [cp.  late  (dial.)  Sk.  vadabhi]  a  roof;  only  in 
cpd.  "ratha  a  large  covered  van  (cp.  yogga')  M  1.175 
(sabba-setena  valabhi-rathena  Savatthiya  niyyati  diva 
divar)) ;  11.208  (id.),  but  t;a/ai;a6Ai-rathena) ;  J  vi.266 
(valabhiyo  =bhanda-sakatiyo  C).  The  expression 
reminds  of  valava-ratha. 

Valava  (f.)  [cp.  Vedic  vadava]  a  mare,  a  common  horse 
D  1.5;  Pug  58;  Mhvs  10,  54;  J  1.180;  VI. 343  ;  DhA 
1.399 ;  IV. 4  (assatara  valavaya  gadrabhena  jata). 

-ratha  a  carriage  drawn  by  a  mare  D  1.89,  105,  106. 
The  expression  reminds  of  valabhi-ratha. 

Valina  at  J  vi.90  is  not  clear  (in  phrase  jatat)  valtnar) 
pankagatar)).  The  C.  reads  valinag,  paraphrased  by 
akular).  FausboU  suggests  malinar).  Should  we  accept 
reading  valinar)  ?     It  would  then  be  ace.  sg.  of  valin 

(q.  v.). 


Vavakattha 


62 


Vasala 


Vavaka^ha  [pp.  of  vavakassati]  drawn  away,  alienated ; 
withdrawn,  secluded  DhA  11. 103  (°kaya). 

Vavakassati  [v  -1-  ava  f  kf ?,  would  correspond  to  Sk.  vya- 
vakfjyate,  Pass]  to  be  drawn  away,  to  be  distracted  or 
alienated  (from) ;  so  is  to  be  read  at  all  passages,  where 
it  is  either  comb''  with  avakassati  or  stands  by  itself. 
The  readings  are  :  Vin  11.204  (apakasanti  avapakasanti) 
=  A  V.74  (avakassanti  vavakassanti) ;  A  111.145  (bhikkhu 
n'  alag  sanghamha  'vapakasitui)  :  read  vavakasitug  or 
"kassitug),  393  (vapakassaf  eva  Satthara,  vapakassati 
garutthaniyehi).  See  also  apakasati,  avakassati,  avapa- 
kasati.  —  pp.  vavakattha. 

Vavakkhati  see  vatti. 

Vavatthapeti  &  °((hapeti  [Caus.  of  vi+ava+stha]  to 
determine,  fix,  settle,  define,  designate,  point  out  J  iv.17 
(disag  "tthapetva  getting  his  bearings) ;  Vbh  193  sq. ; 
Vism  182;  SnA  67;  KhA  11,  42,  89;  VvA  220. — ppr. 
Pass,  vavatthapiyamana  DhA  1.21,  35. — pp.  vavatthita 
&  vavatthapita. 

Vavatthaaa  (nt.)  [fr.  vi+avafstha;  cp.  late  Sk.  vya- 
vasthana  which  occurs  in  Ep.  Sk.  in  meaning  "  stay  "] 
determination,  resolution,  arrangement,  fixing,  analysis 
Ps  1.53;  Vin  iv.289;  Vism  iii,  236  (=nimitta),  347 
(def°);  Miln  136;  KhA  23. 

Vavatthapita  [pp.  of  vavatthapeti]  arranged,  settled, 
established  Miln  345  (su°). 

Vavatthita  [pp.  of  vi  +  avafstha,  cp.  vavatthapeti  &  late 
Sk.  vyavasthita  "determination"]  i.  entered  on, 
arranged,  fixed,  determined,  settled  M  111.25 ;  DhsA  36. 
—  2.  separated  (opp.  sambhinna)  Vin  11.67  ^1- 

Vavattheti  [unusual  pres.  (Med. -Pass.)  formation  fr.  vi  + 
ava  +  stha,  formed  perhaps  after  vavatthita]  to  be 
determined  or  analysed  Ps  1.53,  76,  84. 

Vavassagga  [vi-l-ava+srj;  Sk.  vyavasarga]  "letting  go," 
i.  e.  starting  on  something,  endeavouring,  resolution 
A  1.36 ;  J  VI. 188  (handa  ti  vavassagg'  atthe  nipato) ;  DA 
1.237  (bere  handa  is  expH  as  vavasay*  atthe  nipato).  — 
Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  wrongly  "  consent." 

Vasa  (m.  &  nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  vasa  ;  vat  to  be  eager,  to  desire] 
power,  authority,  control,  influence  S  1.43,  240  (kodho 
vo  veisam  ayatu  :  shall  be  in  your  power;  vasa=aija- 
pavattana  K.S.  1.320);  M  1.214  (bhikkhu  cittag  vasag 
vatteti,  no  ca  cittassa  vasena  vattati :  he  brings  the 
heart  under  his  control,  but  is  not  under  the  influence  of  | 
the  heart) ;  Sn  297,  315,  578,  586,  9O8  ;  Sdhp  264.  —The 
instr.  vasena  is  used  as  an  adv.  in  meaning  "  on  account 
of,  because  "  e.  g.  mahaggha-vasena  maharaha  "  costly 
on  account  of  its  great  worth  "  PvA  77 ;  cp.  J  1.94 ; 
PvA  36  (putta°) ;  Mhvs  33,  92  (patisanthara°).  —  Freq. 
in  phrase  vase  (loc.)  vattati  to  be  in  somebody's  power 
J  v.3i6  (te  vase  vattati),  cp.  M  1.2 14  (cittassa  vasena 
vattati)  &  231  (vatteti  te  tasmig  vaso  have  you  power 
over  that  ?) ;  trs.  vase  vatteti  to  get  under  control,  to 
get  into  one's  power  J  iv.4i5  (attano  vase  vattetva) ; 
v. 316  (rajano  attano  v.  v.);  DhA  ti.14  (rajanag  attano 
v.  v.),  cp.  M  1.2 1 4  {vasan  vatteti)  &  PvA  89  (vasay 
vattento).  —  Note.  The  comp°  form  in  connection  with 
kj  and  bhu  is  vasi°  (q.  v.). 

-dnuga  being  in  somebody's  power,  dependent,  sub- 
jected, obedient  Sn  332,  1095;  J  111.224  (=vasavattin 
C);  Th  2,  375  (=kinkara-patissavin  ThA  252);  Sdhp 
249.  -4nuvattin  id. ;  f.  °ini  obedient,  obliging  (to  one's 
husband)  Vv  31'.  -uttama  highest  authority,  greatest 
ideal  Sn  274.  -gata  being  in  someone's  power  J  v.453 
(narinag) ;  cp.  vasi-kata.  -vattaka  wielding  power 
Sdhp  483  (°ika) ;  a"  having  no  free  will  PvA  64.  -vat- 
tana  wielding  power,  (having)  authority  Miln  356. 
-vattin — ;.  (act.,  i.  e.  vatteti)  having  highest  power, 
domineering,  autocrat,   (all-)mighty ;   fig.  having  self- 


mastery,  controlling  one's  senses  D  1.247;  11.261;  A 
11.24;  It  122  ;  Th  2.  37;  Pv  11.3'';  Miln  253;  DA  i.iii, 
114,  121  ;  SnA  133  ("bhavana).  — 2.  (pass. ;  i.  e.  vattati) 
being  in  one's  power,  dependent,  subject  J  111.224 ; 
V.316;  ThA  226  (read  vattino  for  "vattito  !). 

Vasati'  [vas' ;  to  Idg.  *nes,  cp.  Gr.  fVi/n/ii  to  clothe,  Sk. 
vasman  cover,  Goth,  wasjan  clothe,  wasti  dress ;  Lat. 
vestis  =  E.  vest  etc.;  Dhtp  628  (&  Dhtm  870):  accha- 
dane]  to  clothe,  pp.  vuttha'.  Caus.  vaseti :  see  ni". 
See  also  vasana^  &  vasana"^. 

Vasati-  [vas- ;  Idg.  *aes  to  stay,  abide ;  cp.  Av.  varahaiti  :.^ 
Lat.  Vesta  the  goddess  of  the  hearth  =  Gr.  ion  a  hearth ;  ^  "■ 
Goth,  wisan  to  stay,  remain,  be  (  =  Ohg.  wesan,  E.  was, 
were) ;  Oicel.  vist  to  stay,  Oir.  foss  rest.  —  Dhtm  470  : 
kanti-nivasesu]  to  live,  dwell,  stay,  abide  ;  to  spend  time 
(esp.  with  vassag  the  rainy  season) ;  trs.  to  keep,  observe, 
live,  practise  Sn  469  sq.,  1088  (=sagvasati  avasati  pari- 
vasati  Nd-  558);  PvA  3,  12,  78  (imper.  vasatha). — 
uposathag  vasag  (ppr.)  keeping  the  Sunday  J  vi.232  ; 
brahmacariyag  v.  to  live  a  chaste  life  M  1.515  (cp.  same 
expression  Ait.  Br.  5,  13;  6at.  Br.  12,  2,  2  ;  13,  8.  22). 

—  ppr.  vasanto  PvA  75,  76 ;  ppr.  med.  vasamana 
J  1. 21,  236.  291;  PvA  117;  Pot.  vaseyya  M  1.515 ; 
Pv  11.9'  (ghare),  &  vase  Miln  372.  —  aor.  vasi  Sn  977; 
J  tv.317  (piya-sagvasag) ;  PvA  iii;  Mhvs  i,  13  (vasi 
vasi);  5,  229. — ger.  vasitva  J  1.278;  1V.317;  PvA  13; 
grd.  vasitabba  Sn  678 ;  PvA  42  ;  &  vatthabba  Mhvs  3, 
12  ;  inf.  vatthug  Th  2,  414,  &  vasitug  PvA  12,  1 12.  Fut. 
vasissati  [=Sk.  vasisyati]  Mhvs  14,  26;  PvA  12;  and 
(older)  vacchati  [=Sk.  vatsyati]  Vin  1.60;  Th  2,  294; 
J  IV. 217;  1='  sg.  vacchami  J  v. 467  (na  te  v.  santike); 
VI. 523,  524,  &  vacchag  Th  2,  414.  —  Pass,  vussati  [Sk. 
u^yate]  M  1.147  (brahmacariyag  v.).  —  pp.  vasita,.i<^ 
Tusita  [=vi  +  U5ita],  vuttha  [perhaps =vi-(-u?ta],  q.  v. 

—  Caus.  I.  vaseti  to  cause  to  live,  stay  or  dwell ;  to  make 
live;  to  preserve  (opp.  naseti  at  S  iv.248)  Vin  in. 140; 
S  iv.248;  Miln  211  ;  PvA  160  (inf.  vasetug) ;  see  also 
vaseti^.  —  Caus.  II.  vasapeti  (cp.  adhivasapeti)  to  make 
live  or  spend,  to  cause  to  dwell,  to  detain  J  1.290  ;  11.27 ; 
PvA  20  (vassag). —  pp.  vasita.  —  See  also  adhi°,  a°, 
ni°,  pari°. 

Vasati^  (f.)  [fr.  vas',  cp.  Vedic  vasati]  a  dwelling,  abode, 
residence  J  vi.292  (raja°  =  raja-paricariya  C.) ;  Miln  372 
(rajavasatig  vc^e) ;  Davs  iv.27  (saka°). 

Vasaaa'  (nt.)  [fr.  vasati']  clothing,  clothes  Sn  971  ;  Th  2, 
374;  D  III. 118  (odata°),  124  (id.);  Nd'  495  (the  six 
civarani);  PvA  49.  — vasanani  clothing  Mhvs  22,30. 
—  vasana  (-°)  as  adj.  "clothed,"  e.  g.  odata°  wearing 
white  robes  Vin  1.187;  kasaya"  clad  in  yellow  robes 
Mhvs  18,  10  ;  pilotika°  in  rags  J  iv.380;  suci°  in  bright 
garments  Sn  679 ;  Pv  i.io'. 

Vasana'^  (nt.)  [fr.  vasati^  dwelling  (-place),  abode;  usually 
in  cpds.  like  °gama  the  village  where  (he)  lived  J  11. 153  ; 
°tthana  residence,  dwelling  place  PvA  12,  42,  92  ;  DhA 
1.323  and  passim. 

Vasanaka  (adj.)  (-")  [fr.  vasana^]  living  (in)  J  11.435  (ni- 
baddha",  i.  e.  of  continuous  abode). 

Vasanta  [Vedic  vasanta  ;  Idg.  'f  er,  cp.  Av.  varehar  spring, 
Gr.  (ap,  Lat.  ver,  Oicel.  var  spring,  Lith.  vasara  summer] 
spring  J  1.86;  v.206;  KhA  192  (bala°  =  Citra) ;  DA  1. 132 
(°vana) ;  PvA  135. 

Vasabha  [the  Sanskritic-Pali  form  (*vr5abha)  of  the  proper 
Pali  usabha  (q.  v.  for  etym.).  Only  in  later  (Com.) 
style  under  Sk.  influence]  a  bull  Miln  115  (raja°) ;  SnA 
40  (relation  between  usabha,  vasabha  &  nisabha) ; 
VvA  83  (id.). 

Vasala  [Vedic  vrjala,  Dimin.  of  VT?an,  lit.  "  little  man  "] 
an  outcaste ;  a  low  person,  wretch ;  adj .  vile,  foul  Vin 


Vasalaka 


63 


Vassana 


11.221  ;  Sn  116,  136  ;  J  rv.388  ;  SnA  183,  —  f.  vasall  out- 
caste,  wretched  woman  S  :.i6o;  J  iv.121,  375;  DhA 
1. 189  ;  III. 1 19  ;  IV. 162  ;  VvA  260. 

-adhama  =  °dhamma  Sn  135.  -dhanuna  vile  conduct 
J  II. 1 80.  -vada  foul  talk  Ud  28;  SnA  347.  -sutta  the 
suttanta  on  outcasts  Sn  116  sq.  (p,  21  sq.).  commented 
on  at  SnA  174  sq.,  289. 

7asalaka  [vasala+ka  in  more  disparaging  sense]  =  vasala 
Sn  p.  21. 

Vasa'  (f.)  [Vedic  vaSa ;  cp.  vS^ita;  Lat.  vacca  cow]  a  cow 
(neither  in  calf  nor  giving  suck)  Sn  26,  27  ;  SnA  49  (=ada- 
mita-vuddha-vacchaka). 

Vasa^  (f.)  [cp.  Vedic  vasa]  fat,  tallow,  grease  Sn  196; 
Kh  in. ;  Pv  11.2'  ;  J  111.356  ;  v.489  ;  PvA  80  ;  VbhA  67. 
In  detail  at  Vism  263,  361  ;  VbhA  246. 

Vaai°  is  the  shortened  form  of  vasi°  (==vasa)  in  comb"" 
°ppatta  one  who  has  attained  power,  mastering  :  only  in 
phrase  ceto-vasippatta  A  11. 6 ;  111.340  ;  Miln  82  ;  cp. 
BSk.  va^iprapta  Divy  210,  546; — and  °ppatti  master- 
ship, mastery  Vism  190  ^appana+). 

Vasika  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  vasa,  cp.  Sk.  vaSika]  being  in  the 
power  of,  subject  to,  as  in  kodha"  a  victim  of  anger 
J  111.135 ;  tanha  under  the  influence  of  craving  J  IV.3  ; 
matugaina°  fond  of  women  J  111.277. 

Vasita  [pp.  of  vasati^  dwelled,  lived,  spent  Mhvs  20,  14. 

Vasitar  [n.  ag.  fr.  vasita]  one  who  abides,  stays  or  lives  (in), 
a  dweller ;  fig.  one  who  has  a  (regular)  habit  A  11.107= 
Pug  43,  cp.  PugA  225.  —  vasita  is  given  as  "  habit  "  at 
Cpd.  58  sq.,  207. 

Yasin  (adj.)  [fr.  vasa]  having  power  (over),  mastering,  esp. 
one's  senses  ;  a  master  (over)  Vin  111.93  ;  D  118  (=cinna- 
vasitatta  vasi  DA  1.112);  111.29;  Sn  372;  Vism  154 
(fivefold) ;  Mhvs  1,13  (vasi  vasi) ;  Davs  1.16. 

Vasima=vasin  It  32  (ace.  vasimai) ;  v.  1.  vasimai)), 

Vaaf  is  the  composition  form  of  vasa  in  comb"  with  roots 
k(  and  bhu,  e.  g.  °kata  made  dependent,  brought  into 
somebody's  power,  subject(ed)  Th  2,  295  (=  vasavattino 
katva,  pi.);  Sn  154;  cp.  BSk.  va§ilq-ta  ptm  213.  See 
also  vasagata.  —  "katva  having  overcome  or  subjected 
Sn  561  (=  attano  vase  vattetva  SnA  455).  Metricausftas 
vasit)  karitva  at  Sn  444.  —  °bhava  state  of  having  power, 
mastery  Nd^  466  [balesu) ;  Png  14  (in  same  passage,  but 
reading  phalesu),  expl*  at  PugA  189  (with  v.  1.  SS 
balesu .')  as  "  cinna-vasl-bhava  "  ;  Kvu  608  (implies 
balesu);  Miln  170.  Cp.  BSk.  bala-va^i-bhava  MVastu 
III. 379.  See  also  ciijna.  —  "bhflta  having  become  a 
master  (over),  mastering  S  i  132  ;  Miln  319 ;  cp.  MVjistu 
1.47  &  399  vasibhuta.  — The  same  change  of  vasa°  to 
vasi°  we  find  in  comb"  vasippn.tta  (vasi-t-ppatta),  q.  v. 
under  vasi". 

Vara  (nt.)  [Vedic  vasu  good,  cp.  Gr.  ivi  good,  Oir.  flu 
worthy,  Goth,  iusiza  better]  wealth  ;  only  in  cpds.  "deva 
the  god  of  wealth,  i.  e.  Krsna  (Kanha)  Miln  191  (as  °deva 
followers  of  K.) ;  J  v.326  (here  in  T.  as  adicco  vasudevo 
pabhankaro,  expl""  in  C.  as  vasudevo  vasujotano,  i.  e. 
an  Ep.  of  the  sun);  Vism  233  (Vasudevo  baladevo). 
-°dhara  (f.)  (as  vasun-dhara)  the  bearer  of  wealth,  i.  e. 
the  earth  S  l.ioo;  A  111.34:  J  v.425  ;  Vism  205,  366; 
DA  1.61.    -°dha  id.  J  1.25  ;  Ap  53  ;  Vism  125. 

Vasnmant  (adj.)  [fr.  vasu]  having  wealth,  rich  J  vi.192. 

Vana  (m-  &  nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  var?a  (nt.)  rain.  For  etym. 
see  vcissati']  i.  rain,  shower  J  iv.284  ;  vi.486  (khanika 
sudden  rain);  Miln  307;  Mhvs  21,  31;  DhA  111.163 
(pokkhara"  portentous)  ;  SnA  224  (maha°  deluge  of 
rain)  ;  PvA  55  (vata°  wind  &  rain).  - —  fig.  shower,  down- 
pour, fall  M  1.130=  Vin  11.25  (kahapaQa°)  ;  DhA  11.83 


(kusuma°).  —  Esp.  the  rainy  season,  lasting  roughly 
from  June  to  October  (Asalha-Kattika),  often  called 
"  Lent,"  though  the  term  does  not  strictly  correspond. 
Usually  in  pi.  vassa  (A  iv.138),  also  termed  vassa-ratta 
■'  time  of  rains  "  (J  iv.74  ;  v. 38).  Cp.  BSk.  var^a,  e.  g; 
Divy  401,  509.  —  Keeping  Lent  (i.  e.  spending  the  rainy 
season)  is  expressed  by  vassal)  vasati  Vin  iii.io  ;  Mhvs 
16,  8  ;  or  by  vassa-vasai)  (vass'  avasari)  vasati  (see  below), 
vassarj  upeti  S  v.152,  vassar)  upagacchati  S  v.  152  ;  PvA 
42.  One  who  has  kept  Lent  or  finished  the  residence 
of  the  rains  is  a  vuttha-vassa  J  1.82  ;  Mhvs  17,  i  ;  or 
vassag  vuttha  Vin  iii.ii  ;  S  1.199  ;  v.405  ;  PvA  43.  Cp. 
BSk.  vairs'  osita  Divy  92,  489.  —  Vassa-residence  is 
vassa-vasa  (see  below).  —  vassat]  vasapeti  (Cans.)  to 
induce  someone  to  spend  the  rainy  season  PvA  20. 
—  anto-vassai)  during  Lent;  cp.  antovass'  eka-divasag 
one  day  during  Lent  Mhvs  18,  2  ;  antara-vassai]  id. 
S  iv.63.  —  2.  (nt.)  a  year  A  iv.252  (manusakani  paii- 
fiasa  vassani)  ;  Sn  289,  446,  1073.  satta°  (adj.)  seven 
years  old  Mhvs  5,  61  ;  satta-attha°  7  or  8  years  old 
PvA  67.  —  See  cpd.  °sata.  —  3.  semen  virile,  viriUty  : 
see  cpds.  °kanuna  &  "vara. 

-agga  shelter  from  the  rain,  a  shed  (agga=  agara) 
J  1. 123  ;  DhA  111.105=  VvA  75.  -avasa  vassa-residence 
A  III. 67.  -avasika  belonging  to  the  spending  of  the 
rainy  season,  said  of  food  (bhatta)  given  for  that  purpose 
J  VI. 71  ;  DhA  1. 129  (as  one  of  the  4  kinds:  salaka", 
pakkhika",  navacanda",  vass'-avasika°),  298;  iv.129 
("labha  a  gift  for  the  r.  s.).  -upagamana  entering  on  the 
vassa-residence  PvA  42.  -upanayika  (f.)  the  approach 
of  the  rainy  season,  commencement  of  Vassa  residence 
[BSk.  varsopanayika  Divy  18,  489;  AvS  1.182,  where 
Ep.  of  the  full  moon  of  Asalha].  Two  such  terms  for 
taking  up  the  residence  :  purimika  &  pacchimika  A  1.51  ; 
i.  e.  the  day  after  the  full  moon  of  A.  or  a  month  after 
that  date.  See  upanayika.  —  vass'  upanayika-divasa 
the  first  day  of  Lent  Vism  92  ;  DhA  iv.118  ;  "iipana- 
yikai)  khandhakar)  the  section  of  the  Vinaya  dealing 
with  the  entrance  upon  Lent  (i.  e.  Vin  1.137  sq.)  Mhvs 
16.  9.  -odaka  rain-water  Vism  260  =  VbhA  243. 
-kamma  causing  virihty  D  1.12  (=  vasso  ti  puriso,  vosso 
ti  pandako  iti ;  vossassa  vassa-karanar)  vassa-kammai), 
vassassa  vossa-karanar)  vossa-kammai)  DA  1.97).  -kala 
time  for  rain  J  iv.55.  -dasa  (&  °dasaka)  a  decade  of 
years:  see  enum''  at  J  rv.397.  -piigani  innumerable 
years  J  vi.532,  cp.  Sn  1073.  -vara  a  eunuch  J  vi.502. 
-valahaka  a  rain  cloud  A  111243  (°deva).  -vassana 
shedding  of  rain,  raining  DhA  11.83.  -vasa  Vassa  resi- 
dence S  v.326;  PvA  20.  -vutthi  rainfall  SnA  34,  cp. 
224.  -sata  a  century  Sn  589,  804  ;  A  iv.138  ;  Pv  11. i"  ; 
PvA  3,  60,  69.     -satika  centenarian  Miln  301. 

Vassati'  [»T9.  varsati.  vj-sate ;  Idg.  *ners  to  wet,  cp.  Vedic 
vfsa  bull,  varsa  rain,  vfsabha  (P.  usabha),  Av.  varsna 
virile,  Lat.  verres  boar ;  Gr.  dppt)v  virile,  (pari  dew ; 
with  which  root  is  connected  *eres  to  flow :  Sk.  arsati, 
rsabha  buU,  Lat.  ros  dew=  Sk.  rasa  essence  etc.  — 
Dhtm  471  gives  "  secana  "  as  def"]  to  rain  (intrs),  fig. 
to  shower,  pour(down)  Vin  1.32  (mahamegho  vassi)  ; 
S  III.  14 1  (deve  vassante)  ;  v. 396  (id.)  ;  Sn  30  (devassa 
vassato,  gen.  sg.  ppr.)  ;  PvA  6,  139,  287  ;  Mhvs  21,  33  ; 
DhA  11.83  (vassatu,  imper.  ;  vassi,  aor.)  ;  265  (devo 
vassanto  nom.  sg.).  —  Cp.  kalena  kalai)  devo  Vfsyate 
Divy  71.  — Cans.  II.  vassapeti  to  cause  to  rain  J  v.201 
(Sakko  devai)  v.  let  the  Sky  shed  rain).  —  pp.  vatta, 
vattha,  vuttha.  Another  pp.  of  the  Caus.  'vasseti  is 
vassita. 

Vassati'  [vai  to  bellow.  Vedic  vaSyate ;  Dhtm  471  :  "  sad- 
dane  "]  to  utter  a  cry  (of  animals),  to  bellow,  bark,  to 
bleat,  to  crow  etc.  S  11.230  ;  J  1.436  (of  a  cock)  ;  11.37, 
153,  307;  Iii.ii7;  V1497  (ppr.  vassamana=  vasamana 
C).  —  pp.  vassita'. 

Vassana^  (nt.)  [fr.  vassati']  raining,  shedding  (water) 
DhA  11.83  (vassa°). 


Vassana 


64 


Vacapeyya 


Vassana^  (nt.)  [fr.  vassati^]  bleating;  neg.  a°  J  iv.251. 

Vassana  [gen.  pi.  formation  fr.  vassa,  like  gimhana  fr. 
giniha  (q.  v.).  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  sees  in  it  a  contraction 
of  varsayana.  Cp.  Trenckner.  Miln  p.  428]  (belonging 
to)  the  rainy  season  Vin  iv.286;  A  iv.138;  J  11.445; 
V.177. 

Vassapanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  vassapeti  ;  Cans,  of  vassati'] 
shedding,  pouring  out  J  1.253  (dhana°). 

Vassika  (adj.)  [fr.  vassa]  i.  (cp.  vassa')  for  the  rainy  season 
D  II. 2 1  (palace)  ;  cp.  AvS  1.269  varsaka  (id.).  — 2.  (-") 
of  years,  in  gana°  for  many  years  Sn  279;  SnA  339; 
tero°  more  than  one  year  (old)  :  see  under  tero;  satta° 
seven  years  old  PvA  53. 

Vassika  (f)  &  Vassika  (nt.)=vassiki,  i.  e.  Jasminum 
Sambac  ;  cp.  BSk.  varsika  Lai.  Vist.  366,  431  ;  Divy 
628;  AvS  1. 163.  (a)  f.  (the  plant)  Dh  377  (=  sumana 
DhA  IV. 1 12)  ;  Miln  251.  (b)  nt.  (the  flower,  said  to  be 
the  most  fragrant  of  all  flowers)  A  v.22  ;  S  v. 44  ;  DhA 

IV.  1 12  ("puppha). 

Vassiki  (f)  the  great-flowered  jasmine,  Jasminum  Sambac 
(cp.  vassika)  Dh  55=  J  111.291=  Miln  333  ;  Miln  181,  338  ; 
DhA  1.422. 

Vassita'  [pp-  of  *vasseti,  Caus.  of  vassati']  sprinkled  with, 
wet  with,  endowed  with,  i.  e.  full  of  J  iv.494  (balena 
vassita) . 

Vassita-  (nt.)  [pp.  of  vassati^]  a  cry  J  1.432  ;  iv.217,  225. 

Vassitar  [n.  ag.  fr.  vassita']  a  shedder  of  rain  A  11.102= 
Pug  42. 

Vassin  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  vassati']  raining;  in  padesa"  shedding 
local  showers  It  64. 

Vaha  (-°)  [fr.  vah]  i.  bringing,  carrying,  leading  Pv  1.5' 
(vari"  river=  mahanad!  PvA  29);  S  1.103  ;  PvA  13 
(anattha°).     Doubtful  in  hetu-vahe  Pv  11.8^.  better  with 

V.  1.  °vaco,  expH  by  sakarana-vacana  PvA  109.  — 2.  a 
current  J  iv.260  (Ganga°)  ;  v.388   {maha°).  —  Cp.  vaha. 

Vahati  [vah.  Idg.  *ueth  to  drive,  lead,  cp.  Sk.  vahitra= 
Lat.  vehiculum  =  E.  vehicle;  Gr.  oxac  waggon,  Av. 
vazaiti  to  lead,  Lat.  veho  to  drive  etc.  ;  Goth,  ga-wigan 
=  Ohg.  wegan=  Ger.  bewegen  ;  Goth.  wegs=  Ger.  weg, 
E.  way;  Ohg.  wagan=  E.  waggon,  etc.  —  Dhtp  333  & 
Dhtm  498  :  vaha  papunane]  i .  to  carry,  bear,  transport 
J  IV.260  ;  PvA  14  (=dhareti)  ;  Miln  415  (of  iron  :  carry 
weight).  —  imper.  vaha  Vv  81"  ;  inf.  vahituij  PvA  122 
(perhaps  superfluous)  ;  grd.  vahitabba  Mhbs  23,  93. — 
2.  to  proceed,  to  do  one's  work  M  1.444  :  Mhvs  34,  4 
gulayantar)  vahitvana,  old  var.  reading  for  P.T.S.  ed. 
T.  reading  gulayantamhi  katvana.  —  3.  to  work,  to 
be  able,  to  have  power  A  1.282.  —  Pass,  vuyhati  (Sk. 
uhyate)  to  be  carried  (along)  Vin  1.106  ;  Th  i,  88  ;  ppr. 
vuyhamana  S  iv.179;  Th  i,  88;  J  iv.260  ;  PvA  153; 
pass,  also  vahiyati  PvA  56  (=  niyati)  ;  ppr.  vahiyamana 
Miln  397.  — pp.  ulha  (see  sodha),  vulha  &  vulha  (bujha). 
—  Caus.  vaheti  to  cause  to  go,  to  carry,  to  drive  away 
Vin  11.237;  Sn  282;  J  vi.443.  —  ppr.  vahiyamana  (in 
med.  pass,  sense)  J  vi.125.  —  pp.  vahita  (for  vah")  Miln 
346.     Cp.  ubbahati". 

Vahana  (adj.  nt.)  [fr.  vah]  i.  carrying  VvA  316;  DhA 
III. 472  (dhura°). — 2.  a  current  J  iv.260. 

Vahanaka  (adj.)  (-")  [vahana+ka]  carrying,  bearing 
J  11.97  (dhura°). 

Va  (indecl.)  [Ved.  vi,  Av.  va,  Gr.  i;.  Lat.  -ve]  part,  of  dis- 
junction :  "or";  always  enclitic  Kh  viii.  (itthiya 
purisassa  va ;  matari  pitari  va  pi).  Usually  repeated 
va  —  va  (is  it  so  — )  or,  either  —  or.  e.  g.  Sn  1024  (Brah- 
ma va  Indo  va  pi)  ;  Dh  i  (bhasati  va  karoti  va)  ;  PvA  74 


(putto  va  dhita  va  natthi  ?).  - — with  negation  in  second 
place :  whether  —  or  not,  or  not,  e.  g.  hoti  va  no  va  is 
there  or  is  there  not  D  1.6 1  ;  tag  patthehi  va  ma  va 
VvA  226. — Combined  with  other  emphatic  particles: 
(na)  va  pana  not  even  Pv  11.6°  (manussena  amanussena 
va  pana)  ;  va  pi  or  even  Sn  382  (ye  va  pi  ca)  ;  Pv  11.6'* 
(isayo  va  pi  ye  santa  etc.)  ;  iti  va  Nd-  420  ;  atha  va 
Dh  83  (sukhena  atha  va  dukhena)  ;  uda  ...  va  Sn  232 
(kayena  vaca  uda  cetasa  va).  —  In  verse  va  is  some- 
times shortened  to  va,  e.  g.  devo  va  Brahma  va  Sn 
1024  :  see  va'. 

Vak  ("-)  [Vedic  vac,  for  which  the  usual  P.  form  is  vaca] 
speech,  voice,  talk  ;  only  in  cpd.  "karana  talk,  speaking, 
conversation,  as  kalyana-vak-karana  good  speech 
A  11.37;  i'i.i95,  261  ;  iv.296  sq.  ;  328;  v.155;  abstr. 
°ta  A  1.38.     Cp.  vakya. 

Vaka  (nt.)  [late  Sk.  valka,  cp.  P.  vakka]  the  bark  of  a  tree 
D  1. 167;  Vin  III. 34  ;  J  1.304;  11. 141  ;  Vism  249=  VbhA 
232  (akka°  &  makaci")  ;  Miln  128.  — avaka  without 
bark  J  111.522. 

-cira  (=  civara)  a  bark  garment  worn  by  an  ascetic 
Vin  III. 34  ;  A  1.240,  295;  J  1.8,  304;  v.132;  Pug  55. 
-maya  made  of  bark  Vin  11.130. 

Vakara=  vagula;  net,  snare  M  1.153  (danda",  Dvandva)  ; 
11.65.  —  As  vakara  at  J  111.541  ;  as  vakura  at  Th  i,  774. 

Vakya  (nt.)  [fr.  vac  :  see  vak  &  vaca  ;  Vedic  vakya]  saying, 
speech,  sentence,  usually  found  in  poetry  only,  e.  g. 
D  11.166  (sunantu  bhonto  mama  eka-vakyar))  ;  A  11.34 
(sutva  arahato  vakyag)  ;  111.40  (katvana  vakyag 
Asitassa  tadino)  ;  Sn  1102  (=  vacana  Nd^  559)  ;  J  1V.5  ; 
V.7S  ;  Ap  25;  KhA  166  ("opadana  resumption  of  the 
sentence)  ;  DhsA  324  ("bheda  "  significant  sentence  " 
trsl">). 

Vagama  at  Mhvs  19,  28  (tadahe  v.  raja)  is  to  be  read 
(tadah'  ev)  agama,  i.  e.  came  on  the  same  day.  The 
passage  is  corrupt :  see  trsl°  p.  130. 

Vagura  &  °a  (f)  [cp.  Epic  &  Class.  Sk.  vagura  ;  to  Idg. 
*neg  to  weave,  as  in  Lat.  velum  sziil,  Ags.  wecca  =  E. 
wick;  Ohg.  waba  =  Ger.  wabe]  a  net;  as  °a  J  vi.170; 
KhA  47  (sukara°)  ;  ThA  78  ;  as  °a  J  vi.582.  Another 
P.  form  is  vakara. 

Vacaka  (adj.)  [fr.  vaca]  reciting,  speaking,  expressing 
SnA  164  (lekha°)  ;  sotthi"  an  utterer  of  blessings,  a 
herald  Miln  359.  —  f.  °ika  speech  Sdhp  55. 

Vacanaka  (nt.)  [fr.  vacetij  talk,  recitation,  disputation  ; 
invitation  (?),  in  brahniana°  J  1.318  (karoti)  ;  in. 171  ; 
IV. 391  (karoti)  ;  regarded  as  a  kind  of  festival.  At 
J  111.238  vacanaka  is  used  by  itself  (two  brahmins 
receiving  it).  It  refers  to  the  treating  of  brahmanas 
(br.  teachers)  on  special  occasions  (on  behalf  of  their 
pupils  ;  a  sort  of  farewell-dinner  ?).  —  It  is  not  quite 
sure  how  we  have  to  interpret  vacanaka.  Under 
brahmana  (cpds.)  we  have  trsi''  it  as  "  elocution  show  " 
(cp.  our  "  speech  day  ").  The  E.  trsl°  gives  "  brahmin 
feast";  Prof.  Dutoit  "  Brahmanen-backwerk "  (i.  e. 
special  cakes  for  br.).  vacana  may  be  a  distortion  of 
vajana,  although  the  latter  is  never  found  as  v.  1.  It 
is  at  all  events  a  singular  expression.  BR  give  vacanaka 
as  uirnj  Xeyo/ifi'or  in  meaning  of  "  sweetmeat,"  with  the 
only  ref.  Haravali  152  (Calc.  ed.),  where  it  is  expl""  as 
"  prahelaka  "  (see  P.  pahenaka).  On  the  subject  see 
also  Pick,  Soc.  died.  137,  205. 

Vacana  (f)  [fr.  vaceti]  recitation,  reading  ;  °magga  way  of 
recitation,  help  for  reading,  division  of  text  (into  chapters 
or  paragraphs)  Tikp  239 ;  KhA  12,  14,  24. 

Vacapeyya  ( i )  amiable  speech  (vaca  +  peyya=  piya) 
J  VI. 575  (=  piya  vacana  C.).  —  (2)  spelUng  for  vaja- 
pej-ya  (q.  v.). 


Vacasika 


65 


Vata 


Vacasika  (adj.)  [fr.  vaca]  connected  with  speech,  verbal 
(contrasted  with  kayika  &  cetasika)  Vin  iv.2  ;  Pug  2 1  ; 
Miln  91  ;  Vism  18;  DhsA  324.  —  As  nt.  noun  at  Miln 
352  in  meaning  "  behaviour  in  speech." 

Vaca  (f.)  [vac,  vakti  &  vivakti ;  cp.  vacah  (P.  vaco)  ;  Vedic 
vak  (vac°)  voice,  word,  vakya  ;  Av.  vacah  &  vaxs  word  ; 
Gr.  tVoc  word,  lii//  voice,  I-at.  vox=  voice,'  voco  to  call  ; 
Ohg.  gi-wahan  to  mention  etc.     The  P.  form  vScS  is  a 
remodelling  of  the  nom.  vac  after  the  obUque  cases,  thus   ; 
transforming  it  from  the  cons.  decl.  to  a  vowel  (°a)   ■ 
decl.     Of  the  old  inflexion  we  only  find  the  instr.  vaca 
Sn   130,  232.     The  comp"  forms  are  both  vaca°  and 
▼ad"]    word,   saying,   speech;    also   as   adj.    (-")    vaca   I 
speaking,  of  such  a  speech  (e.  g.  duftha"  Pv  1.3^,  so  to   | 
be  read  for  dukkha°). — D  in. 69  sq.,  96  sq.,  171  sq.  ;   I 
S  IV.  1 32  (in  triad  kayena  vacaya  manasa  :  see  kaya  iii., 
and  mano  11. 3)  ;  Sn  232  (kayena  vaca  uda  cetasa  va), 
397,  451  sq.,  660,  973,  1061   (=vacana  Nd^  $to)  ;  Nd' 
504;  DhsA  324  (vuccati  ti  vaca). — ^  In  sequence  vaca 
gira  byappatha  vacibheda  vacasika  viniiatti,  as  a  def 
of  speech  Vin  1V.2,  expl"  at  DhsA  324  :  see  byappatha.    ; 
—  vacaij  bhindati ;  ( i )  to  modify  the  speech  or  expression   : 
SnA  216  (cp.  vSkya-bheda  DhsA  324).  —  (2)  to  use  a   \ 
word,  so  say  something  Vin  1157  ;  M  1.207  (Neumann,    i 
"das  Schweigen  brechen  ")  ;  Miln  231   (i.  e.  to  break 
silence  ?     So  Rh.  D.  trsl°).     Cp.  the  English  expression   [ 
"to  break  the  news."     — vaca  is  mostly  appUed  with   j 
some  moral   characterization,   as  the  foil.,   frequently 
found  :  atthasaghita  A  111.244  ;  kalyana"  A  in. 195,  261  ; 
rv.296 ;  V.155  ;  pisuna  &  pharusa  A  1.128,  174,  268  sq.  ;   | 
111.433  ;  IV.247  sq.  ;  DA  1.74,  75  ;  Nd'  220,  and  passim  ;   | 
rakkhita°    S   iv.112;    vikinna"    S   1.61,    204;    A   1.70; 
111.199.  391  sq.  ;  sacca°  A  11. 141,  228;  sanha  A  11. 141, 
228;  in.244  ;  1V.172  ;  see  also  vacl-sucarita ;  sainma° 
Vbh  105,  106,  235;  VbhA  no;  see  also  magga ;  hlna 
etc.     S  11.54. 

-Anurakkhin  guarding  one's  speech  Dh  281  (cp. 
vacaya  sag  vara  DhA  iv.86).  -ibhilapa  "speech- 
jabbering,"  forbidden  talk  Sn  49  (i.  e.  the  32  tiracchana- 
katha  Nd'  561).  -uggata  with  well  intoned  speech 
Miln  10.  -yata  restrained  in  speech  Sn  850  (=  yatta 
gutta  rakkhita  Nd'  221).  -vikkhepa  confusion  of  speech, 
equivocation  D  1.24  sq.  ;  DA  1.115. 

Vacetar  [n.  ag.  fr.  vaceti]  one  who  teaches  or  instructs 
D  1. 123. 

Vaceti  [Caus.  of  vac]  to  make  speak  or  recite,  to  teach  :  see 
vatti.  —  pp.  vacita. 

Vaja  [cp.  Vedic  vaja  strength  ;  Idg.  •ueft,  cp.  vajeti,  vajra 
(P.  vajira)  ;  Lat!  vegeo  to  be  alert  ["  vegetation  "], 
vigeo  to  be  strong  ["  vigour "]  ;  Av.  va«ra ;  Oicel. 
wakr=  Ags.  wacor=  Ger.  wacker ;  E.  wake,  etc.]  i. 
strength,  a  strength-giving  drink.  Soma  SnA  322. — 
2.  the  feather  of  an  arrow  J  iv.260  ;  v.  130. 

Vajapeyya  [cp.  Vedic  vajapeya ;  see  Macdonell,  Vedic 
Mythology  pp.  131  sq.,  155,  quoting  Weber,  Vajapeya; 
Banerjea,  Public  Administration  etc.  92]  the  vajapeya 
sacrifice,  a  soma  offering.  Spelling  often  vaca°  (mostly 
as  V.  1.)  ;  see  S  1.76;  A  11.42  ;  iv.151  ;  Sn  303;  It  21  ; 
Miln  219  ;  J  in.  5 18.     Cp.  peyya*. 

V&jita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  vajeti  :  see  vaja]  feathered  (of  an 
arrow)  M  1.429. 

Vajin  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  vaja]  possessed  of  strength  or  swiftness  ; 
ahorse,stalUonDavsi.3i  ;  v.35  (sita°),  53  (sasi-pa?«Jara°)  ; 
VVA278. 

Va^a  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  vata ;  on  etym.  see  Walde,  Lat.  Wth. 
s.  V.  vallus]  enclosure,  enclosed  place  Vin  11. 154.  See 
aOso  yafifia". 

Vataka  (-°)  [fr-  vata]  enclosure,  circle,  ring  ;  in  gala°  the 
throat  circle,  i.  e.  the  bottom  of  the  throat  Vism  258 ; 


DhsA   316 ;   DhA   1.394  ;   candala"   circle  of  Caijdalas 
J  VI. 1 56  ;  brahmana"  of  Brahmins  DhA  iv.i 77. 

Vaitija  [fr.  vaijij  (vanik)  :  see  vanijja ;  lit.  son  of  a  mer- 
chant ;  Vedic  vanija]  a  merchant,  trader  Vin  in. 6  (assa°)  ; 
Sn  614,  651,  1014;  J  V.156  (so  read  for  va°)  ;  Pv  i.io«; 
Davs  1.58;  KhA  224;  SnA  251  ;  PvA  47,  48,  100.  191, 
215,  271.     On  similes  with  v.  see  J.P.T.S.  1907,  134. 

Vifijaka  =  vanija  S  11.215  (suci°) ;  J  111.540. 

VaQijja  (f.)  [fr.  vanija,  cp.  vanijja]  trade,  trading  Vin 
IV. 6  (as  one  of  the  exalted  professions)  ;  PvA  in,  201, 
273.  277- 

Vata  [Vedic  vata,  of  vS;  cp.  Sk.  vati  &  vayati  to  blow, 
vayu    wind  ;    Lat.  ventus,   Goth,   winds  =  wind  ;    Ohg. 
wajan  to  blow,  Oir.  feth  air;  Gr.  iiiiiii  to  blow,  di;ri,t 
wind,   Lith.   ^udra   storm    etc.]  wind.     There  exists  a 
common  distinction  of  winds  into  2  groups  :  "  internal  " 
and   "external"  winds,  or  the  ajjhattika  vayo-dhatu 
(wind  category),  and  the  bahira.     They  are  discussed 
at  Vbh  84,  quoted  at  MA  30.  31,  and  expl""  in  detail  at 
VbhA  70  sq.  ;  Vism  350.     The  bdhird  aiso  at  Nd^  562, 
and  in  poetical  form  at  S  IV.218.  — The  internal  winds 
(see  below  2)   comprise  the  foil.  :   uddhangama  vata, 
adhogama,     kucchisaya,     kottbasasaya,     angam-ang'- 
anusarino,   satthaka.   khuraka,   uppalaka,  assaso,   pas- 
saso,  i.  e.   all  kinds  of  winds   (air)   or  drawing  pains 
(rheumatic  ?)    in   the   body,    from    hiccup,    stitch   and 
stomach-ache  up  to  breathing.     Their  compliment  are 
the  external  winds  (see  below  i),  viz.  puratthima  vata, 
pacchima,  uttara,  dakkhina  (from  the  4  quarters  of  the 
sky),  saraja  araja,  sita  uiiha,  paritta  adhimatta,  kaja, 
verambha°,    pakkha",    supanna°,    talavanta°,    vidhQ- 
pana.°     These  are  characterized  according  to  direction, 
dust,  temperature,  force,  height  &  other  causes  (Uke 
fanning  etc.).  — i.  wind    (of   the   air)   S  iv.218   (vata 
akase  vayanti)  ;  Sn  71,  348,  591  (vato  tulai)  va  dhag- 
saye),  622,  1074  ;  J  1.72  ;  Pug  32  ;  Vism  31.     adhimatta 
v.  S1V.56;  rnaha"  S  11.88  ;  A1.136,  205;  11.199;  iv.312  : 
veramba°  (winds  blowing  in  high  regions  :  upari  akase 
S11.231)  A  1. 1 37  ;Th:.  598;;  J  VI. 326.— 2.  "winds"  of  the 
body,  i.  e.  pains  caused  by  (bad)  circulation,  sometimes 
simply  (uncontrolled)  movements  in  the  body,  sometimes 
rheumatic  pains,  or  sharp  &  dragging  pains  in  var.  parts 
of  the  body  Nett.  74.     Also  applied  to  certain  humours, 
supposed  to  be  caused  by  derangements  of  the  "  winds  " 
of  the  body  (cp.  Gr.  Sv/int ;  or  E.  slang  "  get  the  wind 
up "),    whereas    normal    "  winds "    condition    normal 
health  :  Pv  11.6'  (tassa  vata  baliyanti :  bad  winds  become 
strong,  i.  e.  he  is  losing  his  senses,  cp.  PvA  94  :   um- 
mada-vata).     — anga°   pain   in  the  limbs  (or    joints), 
rheumatism  Vin  1.205  ;  udara"  belly  ache  J  1.393,  433  : 
DhA  IV. 129;  kammaja°  birth-pains  Vism  500;  kucchi° 
pains  in  the  abdomen  (stomach)  VbhA  5  ;  pitthi"  pains 
in  the  back  ibid.  —  3.  (fig)  atmosphere,  condidon,  state  ; 
or  as  pp.  (of  vayati)  scented  (with),  full  of,  pervaded 
(by),  at  Vin  1.39  (vijana°  pervaded  by  loneliness,  having 
an  atmosphere  of  loneliness;    Kern.   Toev.   s.   v.   vata 
wrongly  "  troop,  crowd."     The  same  passage  occurs  at 
D  III. 38,  where  Rh.  D.,  Dial.  111.35,  fr^l*  "  where  the 
breezes  from  the  pastures  blow  "  ;  with  expl°  vijana= 
vrjana  [see  vajati],  hardly  justified.     In  same  connection 
at   A   IV.88)  ;   Miln    19   (isi°-parivata  scented   with  an 
atmosphere  of  Sages;   Rh.   D.   differently:   "bringing 
down  the  breezes  from  the  heights  where  the   Sages 
dwell";   forced).  —  On   vata   in   similes   see   J.P.T.S. 

iQOy   I  s ■>• 

-atapa  (Dvandva)  wind  and  heat.  In  this  phrase 
Bdhgh.  takes  vata  as  wind  (above  i)  at  Vism  31  (saraja 
&  araja  v.),  but  as  (bodily)  pain  (above  2)  at  VbhA  5. 
See  D  in.353;  S  11.88;  111.54  ;  v.379  ;  A  1.204;  11.117, 
143,  199;  111.394  sq..  404:  V.15,  127:  Sn  52  ;  J  1.93; 
Miln  259,  314.  416;  DhA  111.112.  -abadha  "  wmd 
disease,"  internal  pains  (not  rheumatism)   Vin  1.205; 

YIl  -  5 


Vataka 


66 


Vabhi 


Miln  134  ;  Vism  41.  -ayana  air  hole,  window  Mhvs  5, 
37  ;  Dava  v. 57.  -ahata  struck  by  the  wind  Vism  63  ; 
DhA  in. 328.  -erita  moved  by  the  \vind  (of  trees) 
S  V.123;  A  III. 232  ;  VvA  175.  -kkhandha  "wind 
bulk,"  mass  of  wind,  region  of  the  wind  J  vi.326. 
-ghata  ("  wind-struck  ")  the  tree  Cassia  (or  Catharto- 
carpus)  fistula,  a  syn.  of  uddala(ka)  J  iv.298  ;  VvA  197  ; 
also  as  °ka  at  J  v.igg,  407  ;  VvA  43.  -jara  swiftness  of 
the  wind  J  vi.274.  -dhuta  shaken  by  the  wind,  swaying 
in  the  w.  Vv  38*,  cp.  VvA  174.  -passa  the  wind  side 
DhA  II. 17.  -pana  lattice,  window  Vin  1.209;  11. 148, 
211  ;  Ai.ioi,  137;  IV.231  ;  J  11.325  ;  v.214  ;  VI.  349  (read 
vatapan"  for  dvarapan")  ;  KhA  54;  DhA  1.2 11,  370; 
VvA  67;  PvA  4,  216,  279.  -bhakkha  living  on  air 
DhA  11.57.  -mandala  a  whirlwind,  gust  of  wind,  storm, 
tornado  [cp.  BSk.  vayu-mandala  at  AvS  1.256  with 
note]  J  1.72;  SnA  224.  -mandalika  id.  Vin  11.113; 
IV.  345  ;  J  IV.430.  -yoga  direction  of  the  wind  J  11. 11. 
-roga  "  wind  disease."  upset  of  the  body,  disturbance 
of  the  intestines,  colic  SnA  69  ;  VvA  185.  -vassa  (pi.) 
wind  and  rain  PvA  55.  -vutthi  id.  SnA  34.  -vegaforceof 
the  wind  Sn  1074  ;  PvA  47.  -sakuna  a  certain  kind  of 
bird  {"  wind-bird  ")  Nd'  87,  where  KhA  1 1 8  reads  bhasa". 

Vataka  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  vata  2]  belonging  to  or  connected 
with  the  winds  (of  the  body)  in  ahi-vataka-roga  a  cert, 
(intestinal)  disease  (lit.  "  snake-pain  "),  pestilence, 
plague  ;  dysentery  (caused  by  a  famine  and  attacking 
men  and  beasts  alike)  DhA  1.169,  187,  231  ;  in.437. 

Vati  see  vayati  (in  meaning  "  weave,"  as  well  as  "  blow  "). 

Vatika  (adj.)  [fr.  vata  2,  cp.  *Sk.  vatakin  Halayudha 
11.451]  connected  with  the  winds  (humours)  of  the  body, 
having  bad  circulation,  suffering  from  internal  trouble, 
rheumatic  (?)  Miln  135,  29S. 

VatingaQa  [cp.  *Sk.  vatingana]  the  egg  plant,  Solanum 
melongena  J  v.  131  ;  DhsA  320. 

Vada  [fr.  vad  :  see  vadati  ;  Vedic  vada  (not  in  RV  !),  in 
meaning  of  "  theory,  disputation  "  only  in  Class.  Sk.  — 
The  relation  of  roots  vac  :  vad  is  like  E.  speak  :  say  ; 
but  vada  as  t.  t.  has  developed  quite  distinctly  the 
specified  meaning  of  an  emphatic  or  formulated  speech= 
assertion  or  doctrine]  i.  speaking,  speech,  talk,  nearly 
always  -°,  e.  g.  iti"  hearsay,  general  talk  M.  1.133; 
S  V.73  ;  A  11.26  ;  kumaraka"  child-talk  or  childish  talk, 
i.  e.  in  the  manner  of  talking  to  a  child  S  11. 2 18  sq.  ; 
cori°  deceitful  talk  PvA  89  (so  read  with  v.  1.  for  T. 
bheri°)  ;  dhammika°  righteous  speech  A  v. 2  30  ;  musa° 
teUinglies,  false  speech  A  1.129  ;  11. 141  ;  iv.401  ;  PvA  15. 
See  under  musa.  — adj.  (-°)  speaking  up  for,  proclaim- 
ing, advertising  D  1.174  (sila",  paiifia°  etc.);  Sn  913 
(nivissa°  dogmatist) ;  A  1.287  (kamma°,  kiriya".  viriya°). 

—  vadar)  bhindati  to  refute  a  speech,  to  make  a  view 
discrepant  (cp.  bhinna-vada  under  4  I)  SnA  45  (Mara- 
vadar)  bh.).  —  2.  what  is  said,  reputation,  attribute, 
characteristic  Sn  859  (but  SnA  550=  ninda-vacana)  ; 
J  1.2  (jati°  genealogy,  cp.  D  1.137).    See  also  cpd.  °patha. 

—  3.  discussion,  disputation,  argument,  controversy, 
dispute  Sn  390,  827  (also  as  adj.  hlna°)  ;  DhA  111.390= 
Vin  IV. 1  ;  Mhvs  4,  42  (sutva  ubhinnai)  vadag). — 4. 
doctrine,  theory  put  forth,  creed,  belief,  school,  sect 
SnA  539  sq.  ;  in  cpds.  :  acariya"  traditional  teaching 
Miln  148  ;  also  "  heterodoxy  "  Mhbv  96,  cp.  Dpvs  v. 30  ; 
uccheda"  annihiUstic  doctrine  Nd'  282  :  see  under 
uccheda  ;  thera"  the  tradition  of  the  Theras,  i.  e.  the 
orthodox  doctrine  or  word  of  Gotama  Buddha  Mhvs 
5.  2  ;  33.  97  sq-  ;  Dpvs  v.io,  14  (theravado  aggavado  ti 
vuccati),  51(17  heretical  sects,  one  orthodox,  altogether 
18  schools)  ;  dhuta"  (adj.)  expounding  punctiliousness 
Vism  81  (=ariiie  dhutangena  ovadati  anusasati).  See 
under  dhuta ;  bhinna°  heretical  sect  (lit.  discrepant 
talk  or  view)  Dpvs  v.39,  51  (opp.  abhinnaka  vada); 
$assata°  an  eternalist  Ps  1.155. 


•inuvada  all  kinds  of  sectarian  doctrines  or  doctrinal 
theses  D  1.161  ;  111.115;  S  111.6  ;  iv.51,  346,  381  ;  v.7  ; 
A  111.4  ;  Nett  52.  -kama  desirous  of  disputation  Sn  825. 
-khitta  upset  in  disputation,  thrown  out  of  his  belief 
Vin  IV. I  =  DhA  111.390.  -patha  "  way  of  speech,"  i.  e. 
signs  of  recognition,  attribute,  definition  Sn  1076  (expl'' 
dogmatically  at  Nd-  563)  ;  A  11. 9.  -sattha  the  science 
of  disputation,  true  doctrine  SnA  540.  -sfla  having  the 
habit  of,  or  used,  to  disputes  Sn  381. 

Vadaka  (adj.  n.)  [fr.  vada]  doctrinal,  sectarian,  heretical  ; 
vagga"  (either  vagga'  or  vagga')  professing  somebody's 
party,  sectarian,  schismatic  Vin  in.  175  (anu-vattaka -I- )  ; 
vadaka-sammuti  doctrinal  (sectarian)  statement  A 
IV.  347' 

I  Vadana  (nt.)  [fr.  vadeti]  playing  on  a  musical  instrument, 
I       music  VvA  276. 

i  Vadika'  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  vada]  speaking,  talking  (of)  Mhvs  5, 
i  60  (para°  speaking  of  the  farther  shore,  i.  e.  wishing  him 
\       across  the  sea) . 

1  Vadika^  [?]  a  species  of  bird  J  vi.538  (v.  1.  vaj"). 

i  Vadita  (nt.)   [pp.  of  vadeti]  (instrumental)  music  D  1.6  ; 
III. 183  ;  A  1. 212  ;  11.209  ;  DhA  iv.75  ;  DA  1.77. 

Vaditar  [n.  ag.  fr.  vadeti]  a  speaker,  one  who  professes  or 

;       has  a  doctrine  D  111.232  ;  A  11.246  ;  iv.307. 

Vadin  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  vada]  speaking  (of),  saying,  asserting, 
talking  ;  professing,  holding  a  view  or  doctrine  ;  argu- 
j  ing.  Abs.  only  at  A  n.138  (cattaro  vadi  four  kinds  of 
disputants)  ;  Sn  382  (ye  va  pi  c'aiine  vadino  professing 
their  view).  Otherwise  -°,  e.  g.  in  agga°  "teacher  of 
things  supreme  "  Th  i,  1 142  ;  uccheda"  professing  the 
doctrine  of  annihilation  Nett  iii  (see  uccheda)  ;  kala°, 
bhuta°  attha°  etc.  speaking  in  time,  the  truth  &  good 
etc.  D  1.4,  165  ;  A  1.202  ;  V.  205,  265,  328  ;  candala" 
uttering  the  word  C.  Mhvs  5,  60  ;  tatha°  speaking  thus, 
consistent  or  true  speaker  D  mi  35  I  Sn  430  ;  dhamma" 
professing  the  true  doctrine  S  111.138;  in  comb°  with 
vinaya-vadin  as  much  as  "orthodox"  Vin  in. 175  ; 
maha°  a  great  doctrinaire  or  scholar  SnA  540  ;  yatha°  cp. 
tatha°-  ;  sacca"  speaking  the  truth  A  11.212  ;  the  Buddha 
so-called  Th  11.252  f.  ;  vanna°  singing  the  praises  (of) 
Vin  II. 1 97. 

Vana'  (nt.)  [fr.  va-:  see  vayati']  sewing,  stuffing  (of  a 
couch)  DA  1.86;  DhA  1.234  (mafica°). 

Vana-  (nt.)  [fr.  vana,  both  in  meaning  i  &  2  but  lit.  mean- 
ing overshadowed  by  fig.]  lit.  "  jungle "  (cp.  vana' 
etym.),  fig.  desire,  lust  (=  tanha  craving)  DhsA  409; 
KhA  151,  152. 

Vanayain  comb°  suvanaya  (S  1.124,  238)  is  to  be  separated 
su-v-anaya  (see  anaya). 

Vanara  [fr.  vana]  monkey,  lit.  "forester"  Th   i,   399  = 
Dh  334  ;  Th  i,  454  ;  J  11.78  (Senaka),  199  sq.  (Nandiya)  ; 
III. 429  ;  IV. 308  ;  V.445  ;  Miln  201  ;  DhA  11.22. 
-inda  monkey  king  J  1.279  ;  11.159. 

Vapi  (f  ■)  [cp.  Epic  &  Classic  Sk.  vapi]  a  pond  ;  °ja!a  water 
from  a  pond  Mhvs  25,  66. 

Vapita'  [pp  of  vapeti]  sown  J  1.6  (-f  ropita,  of  dhaiUia). 

Vapita'  [pp.  of  vapeti]  mown  DhsA '238. 

Vapeti  [Caus.  fr.  vap,  representing  vapati'  as  well  as 
vapati^  to  cause  to  sow  [cp.  Divy  2 1 3  vapayitur)]  or  to 
mow.  —  pp.  vapita. 

•Vabhi  [fr.  va  to  weave]  appears  in  P.  as  nabhi  in  unna- 
nabhi  (q.  v.). 


Vama 


67 


Vareti 


Vama  (adj.)  [Vedic  vama]  i.  left,  the  left  side  (always 
opposed  to  dakkhina)  J  iv.407  (°akkhi)  ;  Pv  IV.7'; 
Miln  295  (°gahin  left-handed)  ;  PvA  178  (°passa  left 
side).  As  "  northern  "  at  J  v.416.  vamar)  karoti  to 
upset  J  IV.  10 1.  — instr.  vamena  on  the  left  Sn  p.  80.  — 
abl.  vamato  from  or  on  the  left  J  111.340  ;  Pv  11.3^  (as 
much  as  "reverse";  PvA  87=  vilomato).  —  2.  beau- 
tiful ;  only  in  cpd.  vam-uru  having  beautiful  thighs 
D  11.266 ;  J  n.443.     So  read  at  both  places  for  vamuru. 

Vamana  (adj.)  [fr.  vama',  cp.  Ger.  linkisch=  uncouth] 
dwarfish ;  m.  dwarf  Vin  1.91  ;  DA  1.148. 


dwarfish,     crippled 
°ika   N.   of  certain 


Vamanaka     (adj.-n.)     [fr.     vamana] 
J   11. 226;  IV.137;  v.424.  427.  —  f. 
elephants  M  1.178. 

Vaya  [fr.  va,  vayati']  weaving  PvA  112  (tunna°).  See 
tanU°. 

Vayati'  [Vedic  vayati,  va,  cp.  Sk.  veman  loom,  vatika 
band,  Gr.  iri't  willow,  Ohg.  wida  id.  ;  Lat.  vieo  to  bind 
or  plait]  to  weave,  only  in  pp.  vayita.  —  Pass,  viyyati 
Vin  in. 2  59.  pp.  also  vita.  —  Cans.  II.  vayapeti  to 
cause  to  be  woven  Vin  in. 2  59  (=  vinapeti)  ;  VvA  181. 
—  See  also  vinati. 

Vayati*  [Vedic  vati  &  vayati.  See  etym.  under  vata] 
I.  to  blow  (only  as  vayati)  Vin  1.48;  D  11. 107  (maha- 
vata  vayanti)  ;  S  iv.218  (vata  akase  v.)  ;  J  1.18  :  vi.530  ; 
Mhvs  12,  12.  - — aor.  vayi  S  iv.290  ;  J  1.51.  Cp.  abhi°, 
upa°,  pa°.  —  2.  to  breathe  forth,  to  emit  an  odour,  to 
smell  Pv  1.6'  ;  PvA  14  ;  as  vati  (2°''  sg.  vasi)  at  J  11. 11 
(=  vayasi  C).  —  pp.  vata  only  as  noun  "  wind  "  (q.  v.). 

Vayana  (nt.)  [fr.  vS,  vayati'']  blowing  VbhA  71  (upari"- 
vata). 

Vayamati  [vi-f a-fyam]  to  struggle,  strive,  endeavour; 
to  exert  oneself  S  iv.3o8  ;  v.  398  ;  A  iv.462  sq.  (chandag 
janeti  v.  viriyag  arabhati  cittar)  pagganhati)  ;  Pv  1V.5*  ; 
Vbh  208  sq.  ;  Pug  51  ;  Vism  2;  DhA  in. 336  ;  iv.137; 
PvA  185. 

Vayasa  [cp.  Vedic  vayasa  a  large  bird.  Epic  Sk.  vayasa 
crow]  a  crow  D  1.9  ("vijja :  see  DA  193);  Si. 124; 
Sn  447,  675  ;  J  1.500  ;  11.440;  Miln  373  ;  DhA  111.206  ; 
VvA  27. 

Vayama  [fr.  vi-fa-Fyam]  striving,  effort,  exertion,  en- 
deavour S  II. 168  ;  IV. 197;  V.440  ;  A  1. 174  (chando-f-), 
219 ;  11.93  '■  'I'-JO? ;  IV. 320  ;  v. 93  sq.  ;  J  1.72  ;  Vbh  123, 
211,  235  ;  VbhA  91  ;  DhA  iv.iog  ;  PvA  259.  On  vayama 
as  a  constituent  of  the  "Path"  (samma°)  see  magga 
2. a.  — vayamat]  karoti  to  exert  oneself  DhA  iv.26  ; 
PvA  259. 

Vayita  [pp.  of  vayati',  cp.  Divy  276  vayita]  woven  M 
III. 253  (sama°),  where  Miln  240  in  id.  p.  reads  sayar° ; 
Vin  III. 2  59.     Cp.  vita. 

Vayin  (adj.)  [fr.  vayati^]  blowing  (forth),  emitting  an 
odour,  smelling  PvA  87. 

Viyima  (adj.)  [fr.  va  :  vayati']  weaving,  woven;  a°  not 
woven  Vin  in. 224  (of  a  rug  or  cover). 

Vayu  [Vedic  vSya,  fr.  va  :  vayati-]  wind  Miln  385  ;  PvA 
1 56.     See  next. 

V&yo  (nt.)  [for  vayu,  in  analogy  to  apo  &  tejo,  with  which 
frequently  enumerated]  wind  D  in. 268  ("kasina)  ; 
M  1. 1,  424  =  A  IV. 375  ;  A  v. 7,  318,  353  sq.  (°sai\iia)  ; 
S  III. 207  ;  Vism  172  ("kasina),  350  (def).  On  vayo  as 
t.  t.  for  mobihty,  mobili'  principle  (one  of  the  4 
elements)  see  Cpd.  3,  270  ;  Vhs  trsl"  §  962. 

-dhatu  the  wind  element,  wind  as  one  of  the  four 
great  elements,  wind  as  a  general  principle  (consisting 
of  var.  kinds  :  see  enum''  under  vata)  Vbh  84  ;  Vism 
363  ;  Nett  74  ;  VbhA  55  ;  VvA  15  ;  DA  1.194. 


V&ra  [fr.  vr,  in  meaning  "turn,"  cp.  vuijati]  i.  turn, 
occasion,  time,  opportunity  J  1.58  (utu-varena  utu- 
varena  according  to  the  turn  of  the  seasons),  150; 
VI. 294  ;  Vism  431  (santati"  interval);  DA  1.36;  DhA 
1.47  (dve  vare  twice);  DhsA  215;  VvA  47  (tatiya- 
varar)  for  the  3"'  &  last  time)  ;  PvA  109,  135.  —  2.  In 
pada°  "track-occasion,"  i.  e.  foot-track,  walk(ing) 
step  J  1.62,  213  ("varena)  by  walking  (here  spelt  pada°), 
506  (padavare  padavare  at  every  step).  —  3.  In  udaka° 
V.  stands  for  varaka  (i.  e.  bucket),  the  phrase  udaka- 
varaQ  gacchati  means  "  to  go  for  water,"  to  fetch  water 
(in  a  bucket)  J  iv.492  ;  DhA  1.49.  Dutoit  (/.  trsl" 
IV. 594)  trsl"  "  Wunsch  nach  Wasser."  —  4.  bhana° 
"  turn  for  recitation,"  i.  e.  a  portion  for  recital,  a  chapter 
SnA  194.     See  bhana. 

Varaka  [cp.  Sk.  vara  &  varaka]  a  pot,  jar  Vin  n.122  (three 
kinds:  loha°,  daru°  and  cammakhanda")  ;  J  1.349; 
n.70  ;  111,52  (dadhi°)  ;  Miln  260  ;  DhsA  377  (phanita"). 

Varaija'  (nt.)  [fr.  vy  to  obstruct]  warding  off,  obstruction, 
resistance  VbhA  194,  195  (=nivarana). — atapa"  sun- 
shade Davs  1.28  ;  v. 35. 

Va^a^a'  [cp.  Vedic  varana  strong]  i.  elephant  J  1358  ; 
IV.137  ;  v.50,416  ;DA  1.275  ;  DhA  1.389  ("lilha  elephant's 
grace)  ;  VvA  36,  257.  —  2.  the  Hatthilinga  bird  Th  i, 
1064. 

Varai^a'  [for  varuiji  ?]  spirituous  liquor  J  v. 505. 

VaraijUka  at  Th  i,  1129  read  caranika  (a  little  play)  :  see 
Brethren  419  note. 

Varattika  (adj.)  [fr.  varatta]  consisting  of  leather  or  a  strap 
J  in.185. 

Van  (nt.)  [Vedic  vari,  cp.  Av.  var  rain,  vairi-  sea  ;  Lat. 
urina=  urine ;  Ags.  waer  sea ;  Oicel.  Or  spray,  etc.] 
water  D  11.266;  M  in. 300  ;  A  in. 26  (in  lotus  simile)  ; 
Th  I,  1273  ;  Sn  353,  591,  625,  811  ;  Vv  79'°  ;  J  iv.19  ; 
Nd'  135,  203  (=  udaka)  ;  Miln  121  ;  PvA  77. 

-gocara  living  or  life  (lit.  feeding)  in  water  Sn  605. 
-ja  "  water-born,"  i.  e.  (i)  a  lotus  Sn  845,  cp.  Nd'  203  ; 

—  (2)  a.  fish  Dh  34  (=:maccha  DhA  1.289);  J  v. 464 
(=  Ananda-maccha  C),  507.  -da  "water-giver,"  i.  e. 
cloud  Davs  ni.40.  -dhara  water-holder,  water  jug 
J  v.4.  -bindu  a  drop  of  water  Sn  392.  -vaha  "  water- 
carrier,"  i.  e.  cloud  A  1156;  in.53  ;  S  v.400  ;  J  vi.26, 
543, 569  ;  Kh  VII. 8.  -varita.  -yuta.  -dhuta, -phuta  (Jain 
practice)  D  1.57  ;  M  1.377. 

Varita  [pp.  of  vareti,  Caus.  of  vf']  obstructed,  hindered 
J  IV. 264  :  restrained  (sabbavari)  see  vari. 

-vata  (so  read  for  carita")  "  having  the  habit  of  self- 
denial  "  (trsl")  S  1.28  (cp.  A'.S.  1.39  &  320  with  note  & 
Bdhgh's  expl" :  "  kilesanar)  pana  chinnatta  vatag 
phala-samadhina  samahitar)  "),  cp.  bhavana-balena 
varitatta  dhamma  etc.  at  Tikp.  14. 

Varitta  (nt.)  [fr.  vj,  on  the  analogy  of  caritta.  The  BSk. 
is  varitra  :  Mvyut  84]  avoidance,  abstinence  Th  i,  591  ; 
Miln  133  (carittafi  ca  varittaii  ca)  ;  Vism  11. 

Varopi  (f)  [cp.  Sk.  varuni,  with  only  ref.  in  BR.  :  Hari- 
var)§a  8432]  i.  spirituous  liquor  A  in. 213;  J  1.251 
("vaijija  spirit  merchant),  268;  vi.502.  —  2.  an  intoxi- 
cated woman  ;  term  for  a  female  fortune-teller  J  vi.500 
(Varuiji  'va  pavedhati  ;  C.  devata-bhuta-pavittha 
yakkha-dasi  viya  gahita,  i.  e.  possessed),  587  (varuni  'va 
pavedhenti  ;  C.  yakkh'  avittha  ikkhaijika  viya). 

Vareti  [Caus.  of  vupati,  representing  vt'  (to  enclose, 
obstruct),  as  well  as  vi'  (to  choose)]  i.  to  prevent, 
obstruct,  hinder  Pv  11.7'  (varayissar)  I  had  the  habit  of 
obstructing  ;  =  nivaresii)  PvA  102)  ;  VvA  68  ;  Sdhp  364. 

—  2.  to  ask  in  marriage  ThA  266  ;  PvA  55.  —  Caus.  II. 
varapeti  to  induce  somebody  to  choose  a  wife  J  iv.  289. 

—  Note,  variyamana  (kalakaijiji-salaka)  at  J  iv.2  read 
car"  (cp.  PvA  272  vicaresug  id.).  —  pp.  varita. 


L 


Vareyya 


68 


Vasin 


Vareyya  (nt.)  [grd.  of  vareti]  marriage,  wedding  Th  2,  464, 
47^,  479  ;  SnA  19. 

Tala'  [Vedic  vala  ;  connected  with  Lat.  adulare  (ad  + 
ulare)  to  flatter  (lit.  wag  the  tail,  like  a  dog),  cp.  E. 
adulation  ;  Lith.  valai  horse  hair]  i.  the  hair  of  the  tail, 
horse-hair,  tail  Vin  11. 195  =  J  v. 335  (pahattha-kapna- 
vala  with  bristling  ears  &  tail,  of  an  elephant)  ;  J  v. 2  74 
(so  read  for  phala,  cp.  p.  268,  v,  113)  ;  PvA  285  (°koti, 
so  read  for  bala°)  ;  Sdhp  139.  — pallankassa  vale  bhin- 
ditva  destroying  the  hair  (-stuffing)  of  a  couch  Vin 
ii.i70=DA  1.88;  cp.  Vin  iv.299  :  pallanko  aharimehi 
valehi  kato.  —  On  v.  in  similes  see  J.P.T.S.  1907,  136. 
—  2.  a  hair-sieve  [also  Vedic]  M  1.229. 

-agga  the  tip  of  a  hair  A  in.403  ;  Miln  250  (°vedha 
hitting  the  tip  of  a  hair,  of  an  archer)  ;  DA  1.66.  -andu- 
paka  a  cert,  material,  head  dress  (?)  A  1.209  (so  read  for 
valanduka)  ;  Vism  142  ;  DhsA  1 1 5  (reads  leddupaka). 
-kambala  a  blanket  made  of  horse-tails  D  1.167  ;  A  1240, 
296  ;  Pug  55.  -koti  thetipof  the  hair  PvA  285.  -rajju 
a  cord  made  of  hair  S  11.238  ;  A  iv.129  ;  J  n.i6i.  -vijani 
a  fan  made  of  a  Yak's  tail,  a  chowrie  D  1.7.  -vedhin  (an 
archer)  who  can  hit  a  hair  J  1.58  (akkhana- vedhin -|- )  ; 
Vism  150;  IVfhvs  23.  86  (sadda-vedhin  vijju-vedhin-H ). 
The  abstr.  "vedha  hitting  a  hair,  at  Vism  i  50.  —  fig.  an 
acute  arguer,  a  hair-splitter  ;  in  standing  phrase  pandita 
nipuna  kata-para-ppavada  valavedhi-rupa  at  D  1.26 ; 
M  1. 176  ;  II. 122  ;  see  expl°  at  DA  i.i  17. 

Vala^  (ttdj.)  [cp.  Sk.  vyala]  malicious,  troublesome,  difficult 
Vin  11.299  (adhikarana). 

Vala^  (nt.)  [=  vari,  cp.  late  Sk.  vala]  water  ;  only  in  cpd. 
°ja  a  fish  (cp.  varija). 

Valatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  vala*]  trouble,  difficulty  Vin  11.86 
(in  same  context  as  vala*)  ;  A  1.54. 

Valadhi  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  valadhi]  a  tail  (usually  of  a  large 
animal)  Th  i,  695  ;  J  1.63,  149  ;  vi.302  ;  Pv  1.8^  ;  Mhvs   j 
10,  59  ;  VvA  252,  Sdhp  621  ;  Vism  36  quoting  Ap. 

Valika  (f.)  [a  by-form  of  valuka]  sand  (often  sprinkled  in 
connection  with  festivities  to  make  the  place  look  neat) 
A  1.253;  J  1.210;  III. 52,  407;  vi.64  ;  Vism  420;  DhA 
1.3,  III  ;  VvA  160,  305  ;  PvA  189.  — paritta"  sand  (on 
the  head)  as  an  amulet  J  1.396,  399.  —  In  cpds.  usually  , 
valika°.     Cp.  valuka.  I 

-pufija  a  heap  of  sand  J  vi.560.  -pulina  sand  bed 
or  bank  J  n.366  ;  111.389.  -vassa  a  shower  of  sand 
SnA  224. 

Valin  (adj.)  [fr.  vala*]  having  a  hairy  tail  Vv  64',  cp.  VvA 
277- 

Valnkantara  at  VvA  332  probably  for  valuka-kantara,  i.  e. 
sandy  desert.     See  vannu. 

Valuka  (f)  [cp.  Vedic  &  Epic  Sk.  valuka]  sand.  In  comp» 
usually  valuka°.  —  S  iv.376 ;  Vv  39';  44";  Ap.  23; 
Nd*  p.  72  (Gangaya  v.);  J  11.258;  iv.16;  Pv  11.12*; 
Mhvs  2  3,  86  ;  DhA  111.243,  445  ;  VvA  31,  177  ;  Sdhp  244. 
See  also  valika. 

Vaja*  [cp.  late  Sk.  vyada,  see  Geiger,  P.Gr.  ij  54']  1 .  a  snake 
Vism  312  (so  read  for  vala).  —  2.  a  beast  of  prey  A 
III. 102  (amanussa)  ;  J  1.295  ;iii.345  ("maccha  predaceous 
fishes)  ;  Miln  23  ("vana  forest  of  wild  beasts). 

-miga  a  beast  of  prey,  predaceous  animal,  like  tiger, 
leopard,  etc.  J  vi.569;  DhA  1.171  (°tthana)  ;  111.348 
("rocana)  ;  Vism  180,  239. 

Va)a'  [misspelt  for  vada  ?]  music  (?y  Pgdp  83. 

Vavatteti  (vi  -j-  a  -(-  vft]  to  turn  away  (trs.),  to  do  away  with, 
remove  M  1.12  (aor.  vavattayi  sar)yojanar),  expl""  at 
MA  87  as  "  parivattayi,  nimmulan  akasi")=  122  (with 


Vasa*  [vasto  clothe,  see  vasati']  clothing  ;  adj.  (-°)  clothed 
in  J  vi.47  (hema-kappana-vasase). 


MA  87  as  "  parivattayi,  nimmular) 
v.  1.  vi°,  see  p.  526)  ;  A  11. 249  (v.  1.  vi°). 


'  [vas  to  dwell,  see  vasati^  i.  living,  sojourn,  life 
Sn   191  ;   Mhvs   17,  2    (anatha-vasar)   vasati  to  lead  a 

I       helpless  life)  ;  PvA  12  (samagga-vasar)  v.  live  a  life  of 

I  concord);  SnA  59  (lokantarika°) .  Cp.  pari",  sar)°. — 
2.  home,  house,  habitation  Sn  40.  vasaij  kappeti  to 
live  (at  a  place),  to  make  one's  home  J  1.242  ;  PvA  47, 
100.     vasai]    upcigacchati    to   enter   a   habitation    (for 

I  spending  the  rainy  season)  PvA  32.  In  special  sense 
"bed":  see  cpd.  °iipagata.  —  2.  state,  condition  (-"), 
in  ariya°  holy  state  A  v. 29  sq.  ;  brahmacariya"  chastity 
PvA  61. — 4.  (adj.)  (-°)  staying,  living,  abiding,  spend- 

j       ing  time  Sn  19  (ekaratti°),  414  (ettha°).     vassa"  spending 

!        Lent  PvA  20  ;  vuttha°  having  spent  Lent  J  1.183.     Cp. 

I        ante-vasika-vasa. 

I  -attha  home  success,  luck  in  the  house,  prosperity 

A  11.59,  61  sq.  -^ara  bedroom  J  111.317.  -upagata 
(a)  having  entered  one's  hut  or  abode  (for  the  rainy 
season)  Sn  415.- —  (b)  gone  to  bed  Pv  11. 12'  ;  PvA  280. 
-ghara  living  room,  bedroom  SnA  28  (=kuti).  -dhura 
ordinary  duty  (ht.  burden)  or  responsibihty  of  living, 
or  the  elementary  stages  of  saintliness  SnA  194,  195 
(contrasted  to  pariyatta-dhura),  306  (  :  ganthadhura) . 

Vasa^  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  vasa,  e.  g.  Malatim.  148,  4  ;  fr.  va  : 
see  vata]  perfume  J  1.242  ;  vi.42. 

Vasaka,  vasika  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  vasa*]  living,  dwelling; 
vasaka  :  see  sarj".  vasika  :  gama°  villager  Mhvs  28, 
1  5  ;  Baranasi°  living  in  Benares  J  111.49.     See  also  jinte". 

Vasati  [va4,  see  vassati*]  to  cry  (of  animals)  J  vi.497. 

Vasana^  (adj.-nt.)  [=vasana']  clothing,  clothed  in  (-°} 
PvA  173 

Vasana*  (adj.-nt.)  [=  vasana*]  dwelUng  Dpvs  v.  18. 

Vasana  (f  )  [fr.  vasati*  =  vasa*,  but  by  Rh.  D.,  following  the 
P.  Com.  connected  with  vaseti  &  vasa*]  that  which 
remains  in  the  mind,  recollection  of  the  past,  impression, 
usually  as  pubba°  former  impression  (Sn  1009  ;  Miln 
10,  263).  —  Cp.  Nett  4,  21,  48,  128,  133  sq.,  153,  158  sq., 
189  sq.^ — Cp.  BSk.  vasana,  e.  g.  MVastu  1.345. 

Vasara  [cp.  Vedic  vasara  matutinal,  vasah  early]  day  (opp. 
night),  a  day  Davs  1.55  ;  v.66. 

Vasi  (f .)  [cp.  Sk.  vasi]  i .  a  sharp  knife,  axe,  hatchet,  adze 
(often  comb""  with  pharasu)  J  1.32,  199 ;  11.274  ;  111.281  ; 
IV. 344  ;  Miln  383;  413;  DhA  1.178  (tikhina  vasiya 
khandakhaijdikai)  chinditva  :  cutting  him  up  piecemeal 
with  a  sharp  knife)  ;  KhA  49.  -°jata  handle  of  a 
mason's  adze  Vin  iv.168  ;  S  111.154;  A  iv.127.. —  2.  a 
razor  J  1.65  ;  11.103  ;  111.186,  377. 

Vasita  [fr.  vaseti*]  i.  scented  J  1.65  ;  11.235  (su°)  ;  111.299  ; 
V.89  ;  Vism  345.  —  2.  [preferably  fr.  vaseti*=  vasati*] 
established,  made  to  be  or  live,  preserved  Mhvs  8,  2. 
So  also  in  phrase  vasita-vasana  (adj.)  or  vasana-vasita 
one  who  is  impressed  with  (or  has  retained)  a  former 
impression  Sn  1009  (pubba",  =  vasanaya  vasita-citta 
SnA  583);  Miln  263  (id.);  Vism  185  ( H- bhavita-bha- 
vana).  If  taken  as  vaseti*,  then  to  be  trsf  as  "  scented, 
filled,  permeated,"  but  preferably  as  vaseti*.  —  Cp. 
pari". 

Vasitaka  (adj.)  [fr.  vasita]  scented,  perfumed  Vin  iv.341 
(vasitakena  pinnakena  nhayeyya :  should  bathe  with 
perfumed  soap).  —  f.  vasitika  (scil.  mattika)  scented 
clay  Vin  11.280  (id.). 

Vasin*  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  vas*]  clothed  in,  clad  Sn  456  (san- 
ghati°),  487  (kasaya")  ;  Pv  iii.i'  (sahunda°)  ;  J  111.22 
(nantaka")  ;  iv.380  (rumma°)  ;  f.  vasini  Vin  in.  139 
(chanda°,  pata"  etc. )=  VvA  y^. 


Vasin 


69 


Vikannaka 


Vasin-  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  vas']  liking,  dwelling  (in)  Sn  682 
(Mern-muddha°),  754  (aruppa")  ;  PvA  i  (Mahavihara°), 
22  (Anga-Magadha°),  47  (Savatthi"),  7},  (Baranasi°). 

Vaseti^  ;  Caus.  of  vasati-  (q.  v.). 

Vaseti'  [Denom.  fr.  vasa  perfume]  to  perfume,  to  clean 
or  preserve  by  means  of  perfumes,  to  disinfect  (?)  Vin 
1. 21 1  (here  in  the  sense  of  "  preserve,  cure,"  probably 
as  vaseti  of  vasati^)  ;  11. 120;  J  iv.52  (atthini.  for  the  i 
sake  of  preservation)  ;  v.  3  3  (saso  avasesi  sake  sarire, 
expl""  as  "  sake  sarire  attano  sarirar)  datur)  avasesi 
vasapesi  ti  attho,  sariraii  c' assabhakkh' atthayaadasi." 
In  this  passage  vaseti  is  by  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  taken  as 
Caus.  of  vas  to  eat,  thus  "  he  made  eat,  feasted,  enter- 
tained by  or  on  his  own  body  "),  321  (kusumehi  vasetva  : 
perfume).  See  also  vasati-  (Caus.).  —  pp.  vasita. — 
Caus.  II.  vasapeti  J  v.33. 

Vaha  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  vah]  i  ■  carrying,  leading  ;  a  leader,  as  in 
sattha°  a  caravan  leader,  merchant  J  1.271  ;  Vv  84'  ; 
3^20;  VvA  337.  —  2.  a  cart,  vehicle;  also  cartload 
Snp.  I26(tila°=tila-sakata  SnA476)  ;  J  iv.236  (satthi°- 
sahassani  60,000  cartloads)  ;  Miln  80  ("satai)). 

Vahaka  [fr.  vaheti]  that  which  carries  (or  causes  to 
carry)  away,  i.  e.  a  current,  torrent,  flow;  only  in 
corap"  with  udaka°  a  flood  of  water  A  1.178  ;  Vin  1.32  ; 
Miln  176. 

Vahana  [fr.  vaheti]  i.  (adj.)  carrying,  puUing,  drawing 
Vin  II. 122  (udaka°-rajju)  ;  J  1.136  (kattha°  gathering 
fire-wood);  PvA  127  (ratha-y uga") .  —  2.  (nt.)  convey- 
ance, beast  of  burden,  monture  Vin  1.277  (°agara  stable, 
garige)  ;  Sn  442  (Mara  sa°  with  his  elephant)  ;  Pv  11. 9**  ; 
DhA  1. 192  (hatthi°,  elephant-mount;  cp.  p.  196, 
where  five,  vahanani,  belonging  to  King  Pajjota,  are 
enum'',  viz.  kaneru,  dasa,  dve  assa,  hatthi).  — ^bala° 
army  &  elephants,  i.  e.  army  in  general,  forces  J  1.262. 

Vahanaka  =  vaha  i  ;  VvA  337. 

Vahasa  (indecl.)  [an  instr.  of  vaha,  formed  after  the  manner 
of  balasa,  thamasa,  used  adverbially]  owing  to.  by  dint 
of,  on  account  of,  through  Vin  iv.  1 58  ;  Th  i ,  2 1 8,  11 2  7  ; 
Miln  379  ;  VvA  100. 

Vahin  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  vaha]  carrying,  conveying  J  vi.125 
(haya°  running  by  means  of  horses,  i.  e.  drawn  by  horses) ; 
also  as  poetical  expression  for  "  horse  "  J  vi.25a  (=  sin- 
dhava  C.).  The  reading  vahin  at  Mhvs  22,  52  is  given 
as  v.  1.  for  T.  vajin  in  P.T.S.  ed.  — f.  vahini,  an  army 
J  III. 77  (miga"  ;  expl''  as  "  aneka-sahassa-sankhS  miga- 
sena  ")  ;  vi.581. 

V&heti  is  Caus.  of  vahati  (q.  v.). 

Vi  (indecl.)  [prefix,  resting  on  Idg.  'ni  "  two,"  as  conno- 
tation of  duaUty  or  separation  (Ger.  "  ent-zwei  "),  which 
is  contained  in  vig^ati,  num.  for  "  twenty  "  (see  vTsati), 
cp.  Sk.  visu  apart,  Gr.  Jiiot,-  private  (lit.  separate)  ;  also 
Sk.  u-bhau  both  ;  and  *gidh,  as  in  Lat.  divido=  divide. 
A  secondary  (corapar.)  formation  in  Sk.  vitara  further, 
farther,  Goth.  wi(>ra  against,  Ger.  wider]  i.  (a)  in- 
separable prefix  of  separation  and  expansion,  in  original 
meaning  of  "  asunder,"  semantically  closely  related  to 
Lat.  dis-  &  Ger  ver-.  Often  as  base-prefix  in  var. 
meanings  (see  below  1-4),  also  very  frequent  as  modify- 
ing prefix  (in  comb"  with  other  primary  prefixes  like  a, 
ni,  pa,  pati,  sag),  where  its  prevaihng  character  is  one 
of  emphasis.  —  (6)  The  native  grammarians  define  vi- 
either  as  "  vividha  "  (i.e.  our  meaning  2)  :  see  Bdhgh. 
at  SnA  I  36  (viharati  =  vividhag  hitag  harati)  ;  and  Vism 
179  vividhar)  khittar)=  vikkhittag  ;  see  also  under 
viggaijhati  ;  or  "  pratilomya  "  (i.  e.  meaning  3)  : 
Nirukta  (ed.  Roth)  1.3;  or  paraphrase  it  by  su°  or 
sutthu  (i.  e.  meaning  4)  :  see  under  viraana  &  vippa- 
sanna.     The    latter    meaning    also    in    Hemacandra's 


Anek'  artha-sangraha  (ed.  Calc.)  7,  15:  "  sre?the  'tite 
nanarthe  "  (i.  e.  Nos.  4  &  2).  —  (c)  vi°  occurs  also  as 
distributive  (repetitional)   prefix  in  redupUcation  com- 
pounds (here  closely  resembling  pati°  and  the  negative 
a°),    like    cunna-vicumja    piecemeal,    chidda-vicchidda 
holes    upon    holes,     vatta-vivatta,     etc.  —  Contracted 
forms  are  vy°  (=  viy°  before  vowels)  and  vo°  (=vi-t- 
ava)  ;  the  guna  Sc  vriddhi  form  is  ve°.  —  II.   Meanings. 
— I.  denoting  expansion,  spreading  out ;  fig.  variety  or 
detail,  to  be  trsl*  by  expressions  with  over  or  about  (cp. 
Lat.  e-),  as:  °kampati  shake  about,  °kaseti  open  out, 
"kirati  scatter  about,   °kujati  sing  out   (=  «^a-nadati 
C),  "carati  move  about  (=  a-hindati),  "churita  sprinkled 
about,  "jayati  bring  forth,  °tana  "  spread  out,"  "tthara 
««-tension,     de-tail,     "daleti    break    open,    "dhammati 
whirl  about,   "dhayaka  providing,   "pakirati  strew  all 
over,  °pphara  pervading,  "ppharika  c/-fulgence,  "bhajati 
e;t-plain,  "bhatta  dis-tributed,  "bhaga  division,  distri- 
bution, "ravati  shout  out,  °ruhana  growing  up,  "rocati 
shine  out,  "ssajjati  give  out,  "ssattha  sent  out,  "ssara 
shouting    out,     °ssuta    far-famed.  —  2.  denoting     dis- 
turbance, separation,  mixing  up   (opp.  sar)°),  as  given 
with  "  away  "  or  "  down,"  or  the  prefixes  de-  and  dis-, 
e.  g.  "kasita  burst  asunder,  "kubbana  change,  i.  e.  miracle 
(meta-morphosis).  °kkaya  sell  ("  ver-kaufen  ").  "kkham- 
bhati  de-iixoy,  °kkhaleti  wash  off  (=  acameti).  "kkhepa 
(ie-rangement.  °gata  iis-appeared  (used  as  def  of  vi° 
at  ThA  80),  °galita  dripping  down,  °ggaha  separation, 
"cinati    dis-criminate,    "jahati    dis-m\ss,    °desa   foreign 
country  (cp.  verajjaka),  "nattha destroyed,  "nata bending 
down,    °nasa    <ie-struction.    °nicchaya    dis-crimination, 
°nodaka  driving  out,  "pateti  to  be  destroyed,  "ppalapati 
to   talk   confusedly,    °rajeti    discard    as   raga,    "rodha 
destruction,  "lumpati  break  up,  "vitta  separated,  °vidha 
mixed,   °veka  separation,   °vaha  carrying  away,   i.   e. 
wedding.  —  3.  denoting  the  reverse  of  the  simple  verb, 
or  loss,  difference,  opposite,  reverse,  as  expressed  by 
un-  or  dis-,  e.  g.  "asana  mis-fortune,  "katika   unclean, 
"kappa  change  round,  °kara  per-turbation,  dts-tortion, 
°kala  wTong  time,  °tatha  ««-truth,  °dhuma  smoke-/ess, 
°patti  corruption,  "parita  dubious,  "ppatipanna  on  the 
wrong  track,  "bhava  non-existence  (or  as  4  "  more  " 
bhava,  i.  e.  wealth),  °mati  doubt,  °manana  dis-respect, 
"yoga    separation,    °raja    fault-tes,    "rata    afcs-taining, 
"rSpa    Kn-sightly,    "vata    unveiled,    "vanneti    defame, 
"vada    dis-pute,    "sama    uneven,    "ssandati     overflow, 
"ssarita  /w-gotten,   "siUha  distinguished,   "sesa  differ- 
ence, distinction.  —  4.  in  intensifying  sense  (developed 
fr.  I  &  2),  mostly  with  terms  expressing  per  se  one  or 
the  other  of  shades  of  meanings  given  under   1-3  ;  to  be 
trsl''   by   "  away,"   out,   all   over,    "  up,"   or    similarly 
(completely),  e.  g.  "akula  quite  confused,  "katta  cut  up, 
"kopeti  shake  up,  "garahati  scold  intensely,  "chindati 
cut  off,  "jita  conquered  altogether,  "jjotita  resplendent, 
"tarati  come  quite  through,  "niyoga  close  connection, 
"nivatteti  turn  off  completely,  "pariijama  intense  change, 
"pparautta    quite   released,    "ppasanna    quite   purified, 
"pphalita  crumpled  up.  "bandhana  (close)  fetter,  "ramati 
cease    altogether,     "sahati     have     sufficient    strength, 
"sukkha  dried  up,   "suddha  very  bright,  "ssamati  rest 
fully  (Ger.  aus-ruhen).  "harirlati  to  get  slain. 

Vikaca  (adj.)  blossoming  DA  1.40. 

Vikata  [vi-i-kata,  of  kf]  changed,  altered,  distorted;  dis- 
gusting, foul,  filthy  Pgdp  63  ("anana  with  filthy  mouth). 
— -  nt.  filth,  dirt;  four  maha-vikatani  apphed  against 
snake-bite,  viz.,  gutha,  mutta,  charika,  mattika  Vin 
1.206.  —  Cp.  vekafika. 

-bhojana  filthy  food  D  1. 167  ;  M  1.79. 

Vikawik  (adj.)  [vi-|-kaooa]  having  deranged  or  bent 
corners,  frayed  Vin  1.297;  11.116. 

Vikamtaka  [&.  vikaor>a]  a  kind  of  arrow  (barbed  ?)  J 
11.227.  228. 


Vikata 


70 


Vikala 


Vikata  changed,  altered  Vin  1.194  (gihi-vikata  changed  by 
the  g.). 

Vikati  (f.)  [fr.  vi  +  kr]  "  what  is  made  of  something,"  make, 
i.  e.  I.  sort,  kind  J  1.59  (abharana"  kind  of  ornament), 
243  (raaccha-mar)sa°)  ;  Miln  403  (bhojana°  all  kinds  of 
material  things)  ;  Vism  376  (bhajana°  special  bowl)  ; 
VbhA2  3o  (pilandhana")  ;  DhA  ii.io  (khajja").  —  2.  pro- 
duct, make  ;  vessel  :  danta"  "  ivory  make,"  i.  e.  vessels 
of  ivory  M  11.18;  D  1.78;  J  1320.  —  3.  arrangement, 
get  up,  assortment ;  form,  shape  J  v. 292  (mala°  garland- 
arrangement). 

-phala  an  assortment  of  fruit  J  v.417. 

Vikatika  (f.)  [fr.  vikati]  a  woollen  coverlet  (embroidered 
with  figures  of  lions,  tigers  etc.)  D  1.7  {cp.  DA  1.87)  ; 
A  1. 181  :  Vin  1. 192  ;  ThA  55  (Ap  v. 10  :  tulika"). 

Vikatta  (adj.)  [pp.  of  vi-l- kantati-]  cut  open  Jvi.iii  (v.  1. 
°kanta). 

Vikattana  (at.)  [fr.  vi -1- kantati^]  cutter,  knife  Vin  111.89 
(tiijha  go°)  M  1.449  ;  J  VI. 44 1. 

Vikatthati  [vi -(- katthati]  to  boast,  show  off  S  11. 229; 
J  1.454  (=  vancana-vacanar)  vadati  C).  —  pp.  vikatthita. 

Vikatthana  (nt.)  [fr.  vi-t-katth]  boasting  SnA  549. 

Vikatthita  (nt.)  [fr.  vikatthati]  boasting  J  1.359. 

Vikatthin  (adj.)  [fr.  vi-t-katth]  boasting  ;  only  neg.  a°  not 
boasting,  modest  A  v.i  57  ;  Sn  850  ;  Miln  414. 

Vikanta=  vikatta  ;  cut  open,  cut  into  pieces  J  11.420. 

Vikantati  [vi -1- kantati-]  to  cut  J  v.  368  (=chindati  C.y. — ■ 
pp.  vikatta  &  vikanta. 

Vikantana  (nt.)  [fr.  vikantati]  knife  M  1.244.  Cp.  vikat- 
tana. 

Vikappa  [vi  + kappa]  I.  thinking  over,  considering, 
thought,  intention  Nd  97,  351.  —  2.  doubtfulness,  in- 
decision, alternative,  appl*"  to  the  part,  va  SnA  202,  266  ; 
KhA  166  ;  DA  1.51  ;  PvA  18.  — attha°  consideration  or 
application  of  meaning,  exposition,  statement,  sentence 
J  III.  52 1  ;  SnA  433,  591.  — Cp.  nibbikappa. 

Vikappana  (nt.)  &  °a  (f.)  [fr.  vikappeti]  I.  assignment, 
apportioning  Vin  iv.6o=  123=283.  At  Vin  iv.122  two 
ways  of  assigning  a  gift  are  distinguished  :  sammukha- 
vikappana  &  parammukha".  All  these  passages  refer 
to  the  civara.  —  2.  alternative,  indecision,  indefinite- 
ness  (=  vikappa),  as  t.  t.  g.  applied  to  part,  ca  and  va, 
e.  g.  SnA  179  ("  ca  ")  ;  KhA  166  ("  va  "). 

Vikappita  [pp.  of  vikappeti]  prepared,  put  in  order, 
arranged,  made  ;  in  comb"  su°  well  prepared,  beautifully 
set  Sn  7  ;  VvA  188  (manohara-(-).  — Bdhgh.  at  SnA  21 
interprets  "kappita  as  chinna  "  cut,"  saying  it  has  that 
meaning  from  "  kappita-kesa-massu  "  (with  trimmed 
hair  &  beard),  which  he  interprets  ad  senstim,  but  not 
etymologically  correctly.     Cp.  vikappeti  5. 

Vikappin  (adj.)  [fr.  vikappa]  having  intentions  upon  [-"), 
designing  A  111.136  (an-issara°  intentioning  unruliness). 

Vikappiya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  vikappeti]  to  be  designed  or  in- 
tended Sdhp  358. 

Vikappeti  [vi -1- kappeti]  i.  to  distinguish,  design,  intend, 
to  have  intentions  or  preferences,  to  fix  one's  mind  on 
(loc.  or  ace.)  Sn  793=  802  {=  vikappag  apajjati  Nd'  97), 
9J8  (id.  Nd'  351). — 2.  to  detail,  describe,  state  KhA 
166 ;  SnA  43.  —  3.  to  assign,  apportion,  give  Vin  1.289 
(civarar))  ;  iv.121  (id.). — 4.  to  arrange,  put  on,  get 
ready  Vin  1.297.  —  5.  to  change,  alter,  shape,  form 
J  v. 4  (ambapakkar)  satthena  v.  ;  C.  not  quite  correctly 
=  vicchindati).  —  pp.  vikappita. 


Vikampati  [vi-t-kamp]  to  shake;  fig.  to  be  unsettled,  to 
waver,  to  be  in  doubt  S  iv.71  (cittar)  na  vikampate)  ; 
Th  I,  1076  (vidhasu  na  v.  ;  trsl"  Brethren  p.  366  :  "  who 
is  not  exercised  about  himself  in  this  way  or  in  that  ")  ; 
Nd'  195  (tisu  vidhasu,  as  at  Th  i,  1076  ;  as  comment  on 
Sn  843)  ;  J  VI. 488.  —  ppr.  med.  vikampamana,  only 
neg.  a°  not  hesitating,  settled,  well  balanced,  resolved 
Sn  842  ;  J  IV. 310;  v,4g5  (C.  anoliyamana)  ;  vi.175  (C. 
nirasanka).  — pp.  vikampita. 

Vikampin  (adj.)  [fr.  vikampati]  shaking  ;  only  neg.  a."  not 
shaking,  steadfast,  steady,  settled  Sn  952  ;  Vv  50^". 

Vikaroti  [vi  -1-  kr]  to  alter,  change,  disturb  ;  aor.  vyakasi 
J  II. 166  (=vikarar)  akasi  parivattayi  C.)  ;  so  read  for 
T.  vyakasi.  —  Imper.  Pass.  3  sg.  vikiriyyatu  "  let  him 
be  disturbed  "  J  111.368  (after  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  One 
may  take  it  to  vikirati,  q.  v.).  —  pp.  vikata  &  vikata. 
See  also  vikubbati,  etc. 

Vikala  (adj.)  [Sk.  vikala]  defective,  in  want  of ,  deprived, 
(being)  without  Th  2,  391  ;  Pv  iv.i  (bhoga°)  ;  J  iv.278  ; 
VI. 2 32  ;  Miln  106,  307  (udakena)  ;  DA  1.222  ;  PvA  4 
(hattha").     Cp.  vekalla. 

Vikalaka  (adj.)  [vikala -l-ka]  being  short  of,  wanting 
Vin  1.285. 

Vikasati*  [vi-i-kas]  to  open  (out),  to  expand,  to  blossom 
fully  (of  flowers).  —  pp.  vikasita.  Caus.  vikaseti  to 
open  J  VI. 364  (hatthar)). 

Vikasati-  [vi  +  ka4,  cp.  okasa]  to  shine  ;  Caus.  vikaseti  to 
illuminate  Davs  v.47  (mukh'  ambuja-vanani  vikasa- 
yanto) . 

Vikasita  [pp.  of  vikasati']  burst  asunder,  blossoming, 
opened  (wide),  expanded,  usually  appl''  to  flowers 
J  III. 320  (=  phahta  C.)  ;  iv.407  ;  VvA  40,  206  (of  eyes)  ; 
SnA  139  ;  DA  1.40 

Vikara  [fr.  vi  +  kr]  i.  change,  alteration,  in  maha"  great 
change  Vism  366,  367  (of  two  kinds  :  anupadinna  & 
upadinna,  or  primary  &  secondary,  i.  e.  the  first  caused 
by  kappa-vutthana,  the  second  by  dhatu-kkhobha)  ; 
KhA  107  (vanna").  —  2.  distortion,  reversion,  contor- 
tion, in  var.  connections,  as  kucchi"  stomach-ache 
Vin  1. 30 1  ;  bhamuka°  frowning  DhA  iv.90  ;  mukha" 
grimace,  contortion  of  the  face,  J  11.448;  PvA  123; 
hattha°  hand-figuring,  signs  with  the  hand,  gesture 
Vin  1. 1 57  (-fhattha-vilanghaka)=  M  1.207  (reads  vilan- 
gaka)  ;  Vin  v.  163  (with  other  similar  gestures)  ;  J  iv.491  ; 
V.287  ;  VI.400,  489.  —  Kern.  Toev.  s.  v.  vikara  is  hardly 
correct  in  translating  hattha-vikarena  at  Vin  1.157  by 
"  eigenhandig,"  i.  e.  with  his  own  hand.  It  has  to  be 
comb""  with  hattha-vilanghakena.  —  3.  perturbation, 
disturbance,  inconvenience,  deformity  Vin  1.271,  272 
(°r)  sallakkheti  observe  the  uneasiness)  ;  Miln  224  (tava- 
taka  V.  temporary  inconvenience),  254  (°vipphara  dis- 
turbing influence)  ;  SnA  189  (bhuta°  natural  blemish). 
—  4.  constitution,  property,  quality  (cp.  Cpd.  157^, 
168')  Vism  449  (rupa°  material  quality)  ;  VvA  10  (so 
correct undermaya in  P.D.  vol.  in.  p.  147).  —  5.  decep- 
tion, fraud  PvA  211  (=nikati).  —  Cp.  nibbikara. 

Vikala  [vi-f-  kala]  "  wrong  time,"  i.  e.  not  the  proper  time, 
which  usually  means  "  afternoon  "  or  "  evening,"  and 
therefore  often  "  too  late."  —  Vin  iv.274  (=  time  from 
sunset  to  sunrise);  J  v. 131  (ajja  vikalo  to-day  it  is 
too  late)  ;  VvA  230  (id.). — loc.  vikale  (opp.  kale)  as 
adv.,  meaning  :  (i)  at  the  wrong  time  Vin  1.200  ; 
Sn  386;  PvA  12.  —  (2)  too  late  Vv  84  (=akale 
VvA  337)  ;  DhA  1.356  ;  iv.69.  —  (3)  very  late  (at  night) 
J  V.458. 

-bhojana  taking  a  meal  at  the  wrong  time,  i,  e.  in  the 
afternoon  Vin  1.83;  D  1.5  ;  A  1.2 12  ;  11.209;  Sn  400; 
DA  1.77. 


Vikasa 


71 


Vikkinati 


Vlkass  [vi  +  kas:  see  vikasati']  opening,  expansion  J 
VI.497  (vana"  opening  of  the  forest)  ;  Dhtp  265. 

Vikasika  [fr-  vi  +  kf?  :  see  kasati]  a  linen  bandage  (Kern  : 
"  pluksel  ")  Vin  1.206  (for  wound-dressing).  May  be 
a  der"  fr.  kasika,  i.  e.  Benares  cloth,  the  vi°  denoting  as 
much  as  "  a  kind  of." 

Tikasitar  [fr.  vi  +  kfji   kasati]  one  who  plucks  or  pulls, 
.bender  of  a  bow,  archer  J  vi.201. 

Vikasin  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  vi  +  kaS:  see  vikasati^]  illumining, 
delighting  Mhvs  18,  68. 

Vikaseti  see  vikasati. 

Vikiws  [PP-  °^  vikirati]  scattered  about,  strewn  all  over, 
loose  Vin  1.209  (undurehi  okinna"  ;  overrun)  ;  J  v. 82. 

-kesa  with  dishevelled  hair  J  1.47  ;  Vism  415.  -vaca 
(adj.)  of  loose  talk  S  1. 61  (=asailiiata-vacana /v'.S.  1.320)  ; 
Pug  35  (same  expl"  PugA  217)  :  J  v.  77  (=patthata- 
vacana  C). 

Vikitteti  [vi  +  kitteti]  to  slander  Miln  276  (opp.  pakitteti). 

VikiraQa  (nt.  &  adj.)  [fr.  vikirati]  i.  scattering,  dispersing  ; 
being  scattered  or  dispersed  D  i.ii  (cp.  DA  1.96).^ — Vbh 
358  (T.  reads  viki°  ;  v.  1.  vikarana  &  vikkir°)=Pug  23 
(which  reads  nikarana  ;  trsl.  "  guilefulness  ").  In  this 
connection  VbhA  493  interprets  vikirana  (or  °a)  as 
"denial,  abnegation"  (pretext?),  by  saying  "  nShar) 
eva  karomi  ti  papanar)  vikkhipanato  vikirana."  —  With 
ref.  to  Arahantship  (the  dissolution  of  the  body)  at 
DhA  :ii.i09  in  formula  bhedana- vikirana- viddhai)sana- 
dhamma  i.  e.  "  of  the  nature  of  total  destruction." 
Cp.  BSk.  formula  satana-patana-vikirana-vidhvagsana 
(-dharmata)  AvS  1.96  (where  S.  Speyer  in  Index  con- 
siders vikarana  the  correct  form)=Divy  299  (reading 
cyavanapatana°)=  Lai.  V.  242.  See  also  Sin. 190  (under 
vikirati). — -2.  (adj.)  scattering,  spending,  squandering, 
f.  n  Sn.  ti2. 

Vikirati  [vi -1- kirati]  to  scatter  about,  sprinkle,  spread,  mix 
up  (trs.  &  intrs.)  M  1.127  ;  S  111.190  (in  simile  of  playing 
children  :  pagsv'  agarakani  hatthehi  ca  padehi  ca  viki- 
ranti  [mix  up]  vidhamanti  [fall  about]  viddhagsenti 
[tumble  over]  vikilanikai)  karonti,  describing  the 
scrambling  and  crowding  about.  In  quite  a  diff.  inter- 
pretation appH  to  Arahantship  :  see  under  vikirana,  as 
also  in  the  same  chapter  (S  111. 190  §  11  sq.)  in  phrase 
riipar)  vikirati  vidhamati  etc.  where  it  is  meant  in  trs. 
sense  of  "  destroy  "  ;  thus  vi°  in  the  same  verb  in  meaning 
(vi°  I  &  2)  ;  S  IV. 4 1  (kayo  vikiri  [came  to  pieces]  seyya- 
thapi  bhusa-mutthi)  ;  J  1.226;  Pv  11.3'  (vikiri,  v.  1.  for 
okiri)  ;  Miln  loi,  237  (lokadhatu  vikireyya,  would  fall  to 
pieces  ;  comb''  with  vidhameyya  &  viddhaijseyya  "  drop 
&  tumble,"  denoting  total  confusion  and  destruction. 
Similarly  on  p.  250  =  337  "  vari  pokkhara-patte  vikirati 
vidhamati  viddhagsati  "  :  the  water  scatters,  drops  tt 
falls  off  ;  appH  figuratively  to  bad  qualities  at  same 
passage)  ;  SnA  172.  —  Pass,  vikiriyyati  &  vikiriyati  may 
be  taken  either  to  vikirati  or  vikaroti  (cp.  kiriyati)  ; 
DhsA  19  (suttena  sangahitani  pupphani  na  vikiriyanti 
na  viddhagsiyanti :  get  scattered  and  fall  off)  ;  ppr. 
vikiriyamana  PvA  271  (with  sprawling  or  confused 
limbs)  ;  imper.  vikirijryatu  J  111.368.  —  pp.  vikinna. 

Vikilanika  (adj.  &  nt.)  [fr.  vi-l-kilana]  playing  about;  in 
phrase  vikilanikarj  karoti  (intrs.)  to  play  all  over  or 
excitedly  (lit.  to  make  play;  vi°  in  meaning  vi°  i)  S 
III. 1 90  ;  as  trs.  to  put  out  of  play,  to  discard  (vi"  3)  ibid, 
(riipar)  etc.  v.  karoti). 

Vikujjhita  [vi-i-pp.  of  kujjheti]  made  angry,  angered, 
annoyed,  vexed  M  11.24  (so  read  for  vikujjita). 

Vika9ita  (adj.)  [vi  +  kunita]  distorted,  deformed  Vism  346 
(■'mukha)  ;  PvA  123  (id.).     Cp.  vikuna. 


Vikaddha  (adj.)  [vi -f- kuddha]  free  fr.  anger  J  v. 308. 

Vikubbati  [vi-t-kubbati,  med.  of  karoti]  to  change  round, 
transform,  do  magic  J  in. 114  (=  parivatteti)  ;  Dpvs 
1.40  (vikubbeyya)  ;  also  in  phrase  iddhi-vikubbati  to 
work  transformation  by  magic  (psychic)  potency  Kvu 
55.  — ppr.  f.  vikubbanti  Vv  ii'''  (iddhii)  working  magic, 
=  vikubban'  iddhiyo  valaiijenti  VvA  58),  and  vikubba- 
mana  (iddhi°)  Vv  31'.  —  pp.  'vikubbita  miracle:  see 
vikubbana. 

Vikabbana  (nt.)  &  °a  (f.)  [fr.  vikubbati]  miraculous  trans- 
formation, change ;  assuming  a  diff.  form  by  super- 
natural power;  miracle  Th  i,  1183;  Ps  11.174,  210; 
Dpvs  VIII. 6  (°esu  kovida)  ;  Mhvs  19,  19  ;  Miln  343  ; 
Vism  309,  316  sq.  More  specific  as  iddhi- vikubbana 
(or  °a),  i.  e.  by  psychic  powers,  e.  g.  D  11.213  ;  Vism 
373  sq.  ;  or  vikubbana  iddhi  Vism  378,  406  ;  VvA  58  ; 
DhsA  91  (the  var.  forms  of  iddhi).  Cp.  Kvu  trsl.  50  ; 
I  Cpd.  61.  —  The  BSk.  form  is  represented  by  the  pp.  of 
j       vikubbati,  i.  e.  vikurvita,  e.  g.  Av^  1.258  ;  Divy  269  etc. 

I  Vikalava(ka)  (adj.)  [vi -)- kulava]  having  no  nest,  without 
'       a  nest  S  t.224  (ka)  ;  J  1.203. 

I  Vikujati  [vi-l-kujati]  to  sing  (hke  a  bird),  warble,  chirp, 
coo  PvA  189  (=  upanadati).  —  ppr.  med.  vikiijainana 
Vin  IV. I  5  ;  J  v.12. 

Viku^a  [cp.  vikunita  &  vikSra]  distortion,  grimace 
(mukha°)  SnA  30. 

Vikula  (adj.)  [vi-(-kiila]  sloping  down,  low-lying  A  1.35 
(contrasted  with  ukkula) .  We  should  expect  ni°  for  vi", 
as  in  BSk.  (see  ukkula). 

Vikiilaka  (adj.)  [fr.  vikflla]  contrary,  disgusting  ThA  2, 
467  (=  patikula  ThA  284). 

Vikesika  (adj .  -f .)  [vi  +  kesa  +  ika]  with  loose  or  dishevelled 
I       hair  Vin  1. 1 5. 

I  Vikottita  [vi-fkottita]  beaten,  cut,  slain,  killed  Miln  304 
I        (kottita-l-). 

Vikopana   (nt.)    [fr.    vi-l-kup]    upsetting,   injuring,   doing 
I       harm  J  11.330=  iv.471  ;  Miln  185,  266;  DhsA  145. 

'  Vikopin  (adj.)  [vi-t-kup]  shaking,  disturbed;  neg.  a° 
J  VI. 226. 

I   Vikopeti   [vi -(- kopeti]    i.  to  shake  up  PvA  253.  —  2.  to 
upset,  spoil,  todoharm  Vinni.47  ;  Miln 276  (vikitteti-)-). 
;       —  3-  to  destroy  J  vi.68  (padag  a  track). 

Vikkanta  [pp.  of  vi-i-kram]  heroic  J  1.119  ;  11. 211  ;  iv.271  ; 
Miln  400  (°carin,  of  a  lion). 

,   Vikkandati  [vi-i-  kandati]  to  cry  out,  lament,  wail  J  vi.525. 

Vikkaya  [vi  +  kaya]  selling,  sale  A  11.209 ;  Sn  929  (kaya-(- )  ; 
J   1.121  ;   11.200;  1V.115   (majja°)  ;    Miln   194   ("bhanda 
I       goods  for  sale,  merchandise)  ;  PvA  29,  113  (°bhaij(Ja). 

:  Vikkayika  &  kayika  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  vikiriati]  i.  a  salesman, 
vendor  DhA  iv.50  (a).  — 2.  for  sale  J  1.201  (a)  ;  DhA 
1.269  (a). 

Vikkama  [fr.  vi  -1-  kram]   i .  walking  about,  stepping ;  in 
"malaka     walking-enclosure,     "  jrtpijrnrcior,"     corridor 
J  1.449.  —  -■  strength,  heroism  J  ii.2ii,   398  :  111.386 
[       (°porisa). 

Vikkamati  [vi  +  kamati]  to  have  or  show  strength,  to  exert 
oneself  J  111.184  (=  parakkamati)  ;  Miln  400.  —  pp. 
vikkanta. 

VikkiQati  [vi+  kinati]  to  sell  J  1.227,  377  (ger.  vikkinitva)  ; 
PvA  100  (id.),  191  (aor.  vikkiiji).  —  mf.  vikketUQ 
J  III. 283.  —  grd.  vikkiniya  =forsaleDhA  1390  ("bhanda 
merchandise) . 


Vikkilita 


72 


Vigajita 


TikUlita  (nt.)  [vi  +  kijita]  sporting,  amusement,  pastime 
Nett  124  (in  appH  meaning). 

Vikknthita  (adj.)  [vi+kuthita]  boiled,  "duddha  boiled 
milk  KhA  60  (T.  reads  vikkuthita-duttha-varma,  but 
App.  SnA  Index  p.  870  :  vikkutthita-duddha°).  The 
corresp.  passage  at  Vism  260  has  duttha-khira-vanQa, 
which  seems  faulty. 

Vikkha^^^  [vi  +  khandati]  to  break  (up),  destroy,  spoil 
Sdhp  450  (ger.  °iya).  —  pp.  vikkhandita. 

Vikkha^fita  [pp.  of  vikkhapdati]  broken,  ruined,  spoilt 
Sdhp  436. 

Vikkhambha  [vi+khambha  i]  diameter  (lit.  support) 
J  V.268,  271  ;  Mhvs  18,  27 

Vikkhambhati  [fr.  vi  +  khambha  2]  (intrs.)  to  become  stiff 
(with  fear),  to  be  scared  or  frightened  Ap.  50. 

Vikkhambhana   (nt.)    [vi  +  khambha +  n a]   withdrawal   of 
support,  stopping  (the  nivaranas  or  any  evil  influences 
or  corruptions  :  kilesa°),  arresting,  paralysing  ;  elimina-   1 
tion,    discarding    Ps   11.179;    Nd'   6;    Nd^    338,   606'';   | 
J  III. 15  (kilesa°  +  metta-bhavana-jhan'  uppatti)  ;  iv.17;   | 
Vism320  ;  Sdhp  455.  — -  Usually  in  foil.  cpds.  :  °pahana  I 
elimination     (of     character-blemishes)     by    discarding 
J  11.230  ;  Nd^203  ;  Vism  5  ;  DhsA  352  ;  SnA  19  ;  "vimutti 
emancipation  by  ehmination  J  11.35  '■  "viveka  arrest  by 
aloofness  DhsA  12,  164  ;  Vism  140,  141. 

Vikkhambhanata  (f)  [vikkhambhana  +  ta]  state  of  having 
undone  or  discarded,  removal,  destruction,  paralysis 
Nett  15,  16. 

Vikkhambhlka  (adj.)  [fr.  vikkhambheti]  leading  to  arrest 
(of  passions),  conducive  to  discarding  (the  blemishes  of 
character)  Vism  1 14. 

Vikkhambhita  [pp.  of  vikkhambheti]  arrested,  stopped, 
paralysed,  destroyed  Ps  11. 179;  Tikp  155,  320  sq.  ; 
Dukp  10. 

Vikkhambhiya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  vikkhambheti]  in  neg.  a° 
not  to  be  obstructed  or  overcome  D  111.146. 

Vikkhambheti  [vi  +  khambheti]  (trs.)  to  "  unprop,"  un- 
settle, discard  ;  to  destroy,  extirpate,  paralyse  (cp. 
khambha  2  and  chambheti),  give  up.  reject  Sn  969 
(=  abhibhavati  etc.  Nd'  492)  ;  Vism  268  ;  J  1.303  (jhana- 
balena  kilese  v.)  ;  Miln  34  (nivarane)  ;  DhA  iv.  119  (pitii) 
vikkhambhetva  :  here  in  meaning  "  set  up.  estabUsh  "? 
Or  to  produce  such  piti  as  to  be  called  pharana  piti,  thus 
vikkhambheti=  pharati  2  ?  Or  as  Denom.  fr.  vikkham- 
bha "  diameter  "=  to  establish  etc.  ?)  ;  VvA  156  (read 
°etva.) —  pp.  vikkhambhita. 

Vikkhalita  (nt.)  [vi -(- khalita*]  stumbling,  fault,  faux  pas 
A  1. 199- 

Vikkh&yitaka  (adj.-nt.)  [vi-|-khayati(=khadita)-i-ka] 
"  pertaining  (or  :  of  the  nature  of)  to  being  eaten  up." 
i.  e.  a  (mental)  representation  obtained  by  contemplation 
of  a  corpse  gnawed  by  animals,  one  of  the  asubha- 
kammatthanas  Vism  no  =  Miln  332  (°sanna)  ;  Vism 
179,  194. 

Vikkhalita  [pp.  of  vikkhaleti]  washed  off,  cleansed  Vin 
II. 201  ;  Vism  59. 

Vikkhaleti  [vi -f  khaleti]  to  wa.sh  off,  to  wash  one's  face 
(mukhai))  Vin  11.201  ;  S  11.269  ;  J  1.266.  459  ;  PvA  75. 
209.  241  (=  acameti).  —  pp.  vikkhalita. 

Vikkhitta  (adj.)  [vi  +  khitta]  i.  upset,  perplexed,  mentally 
upset,  confused  S  11. 122  ("citta)  ;  v.157,  263  sq.  ;  A 
HI. 174  (°citta)  ;  v. 147  (id.);  Vism  410  (=uddhacc' 
anugata).  —  a°  undisturbed,  composed,  collected  A 
v.  149  ;  It  94  ;  PvA  26. 


Vikkhittaka  (adj.)  [vi+khitta+ka]  i.  scattered  all  over, 
deranged,  dismembered  ;  of  a  dead  body  with  respect  to 
its  limbs  (as  one  of  the  asubha-kammatfhana's  :  cp. 
vikkhayika  &  vicchiddaka)  Vism  1 10  ("saflfia)  =  Miln 
332  ;  Vism  179  (with  def  vividhaij  khittag  vikkhittai)  ; 
afinena  hatthar)  aflfiena  padag  annena  sisan  ti  evaij 
tato  tato  khittassa  chava-sarirassa  adhivacanag).  194. 
— hata°  killed  &  cut  up  Vism  1 79. — 2 .  citta°  of  unbalanced 
or  deranged  mind  Miln  308. 

Vikkhipana  (nt.)  [cp.  BSk.  viksepa  refusal  Avi  1.94] 
refusal,  denial  VbhA  493  (see  vikirapa  i). 

Vikkhipatti  [Pass,  of  vikkhipati]  to  be  disturbed  J  1.400 
(gocare.  in  .  .  .)  ;  Miln  337  (cittag).  —  pp.  vikkhitta. 

Vikkhl^a  [vi-t-khi^a]  totally  destroyed,  finished,  gone 
Th2,  22. 

Vikkhlyati  [vi  -1-  khiyati]  to  go  to  ruin,  to  be  destroyed,  to 
be  lost  J  V.392  (fut.  lyissati).  —  pp.  vikkhlna. 

Vikkhepa  [vi-t-khepa]  i.  disturbance,  derangement  J 
VI. 139.  —  2.  perplexity,  confusion  D  1.59.  — vaca" 
equivocation,  senseless  talk  D  1.24.  —  3.  in  citta°  & 
cetaso  v.  upset  of  mind,  unbalanced  mind,  mental 
derangement :  citta°  S  1.126  ;  Pug  69  ;  cetaso  A  in. 448  ; 
Dhs  429  ;  Vbh  373.  — avikkhepa  equanimity,  balance 
D  111.213  ;  A  1.83  ;  Ps  1.94  ;  Dhs  160.  430  ;  \t)h  178  sq., 
231  sq.,  266  sq.,  279  sq..  285  sq. 

-pa^ibahana  exclusion  or  warding  off  of  confusion  (of 
mind)  or  disturbance  Vism  244  ;  VbhA  227. 

Vikkhepika  (adj.)  [fr.  vikkhepa].  in  phrase  amara°:  see 
under  amara  ;  another  suggestion  as  to  explanation  may 
be  :  khipa=  eel-basket,  thus  vikhep-ika  one  who  upsets 
the  eel-basket,  i.  e.  causes  confusion. 

Vikkheliki  (adj  .-f .)  [vi  +  kheja  +  ika]  having  saliva  dropping 
from  the  mouth  (of  sleeping  women),  slobbering  Vin 
1.15. 

Vikkhobhita  [pp.  of  vikkhobheti :  see  khobha]  thoroughly 
shaken  up  or  disturbed  Miln  377. 

Vikhadana  (nt.)  [vi -t- khadana]  biting,  chewing  Dhs  646, 
740,  875  ;  DhsA  330. 

Vigacchati  [vi  +  gacchati]  to  depart,  disappear  ;  to  decrease 
D  1. 1 38  (bhogakkhandha  vigacchissati)  ;  Sdhp  523. — 
pp.  vigata. 

Vigata  {"-)  [pp.  of  vigacchati,  in  act.  (reflexive)  &  med- 
pass.  function]  gone  away,  disappeared,  ceased  ;  having 
lost  or  foregone  (f or-gone=  vi-gata) ,  deprived  of,  being 
without ;  often  to  be  trsl*  simply  as  prep.  "  without." 
It  nearly  always  occurs 'in  comp",  where  it  precedes  the 
noun.  By  itself  rare,  'e.  g.  Sn  483  (sarambha  yassa 
vigata)  ;  VvA  33  (paduma  ma  vigata  hotu).  Otherwise 
as  follows:  °asa  Pug  27;  "asava  SnA  51  ;  °iccha  Dh 
359  ;  °khila  Sn  19  ;  °capalla  D  i.i  1 5  ;  DA  1.286  ;  "chavi- 
vanna  ThA  80  (=  vivaijria)  ;  "jlvita  PvA  40  ;  °paccaya 
Vism  541;  Tikp  7,  21,  59;  °patighata  DhA  rv.176; 
°mada  Mhvs  34,  94  ;  °raja  Sn  517  ;  J  i.i  17  ;  "valita  PvA 
153.     Cp.  vita°  in  similar  application  and  meaning. 

Vigama  (-°)  [fr.  vi-(-gain]  going  away,  disappearance, 
departing,  departure  Davs  v. 68  (sabb"  asava")  ;  DhsA 
166;  Sdhp  388  (jighaccha°),  503  (sandeha°). 

Vigayha  see  vigahati. 

Vigarahati  [vi -)- garahati]  to  scold  (intensely),  to  abuse 
Vin  II. 161  (dhammig  kathaij)  ;  111.46  ;  S  1.30  (ariya- 
dhammari)  ;  Miln  227. 

Vigalati  [vi -I- galati]  to  drop  Miln  250.  —  pp.  vigalita. 
Cp.  vinigalati. 

Vigalita  [pp.  of  vigalati]  dropping,  dripping  (down)  PvA  56. 


Vigahati 


73 


Vicikiccha 


Vigahati  [vi  +  gahati]  to  plunge  into,  to  enter  S  1.180  (ger. 
vigahiya)  ;  J  v. 381  (°gahisur),  aor.)  ;  Mhvs  19,  29  (here 
as  °gahetvd).  The  ger.  is  also  vigayha  at  Sn  2,  825  ;  cp. 
Nd'  163  (=  ogayha  pavisitva).  At  Vin  11. 106  we  should 
prefer  to  read  viggayha  for  vigayha. 

Vigganhati  [vi  +  ganhati]  i.  to  take  hold  of,  to  quarrel, 
to  be  in  disharmony  with  ;  only  in  ger.  viggayha  dis- 
puting, quarrelling,  fighting  Vin  11. 106  (read  gg  for  g  I 
Bdhgh  on  p.  315  :  rubbing  against  each  other)  ;  Ud  69  ; 
Sn  844,  878;  Nd'  285  (=  uggahetva  paramasitva). — • 
2.  to  stretch  out,  disperse,  divide,  spread  ;  ger.  viggayha 
Vv  50*  (hattha-pade  v.  ;  expl''  as  "  vividhehi  akarehi 
gahetva  "  VvA  209). 

Viggaha  [fr.  vi  +  gah  :  see  ganhati  3]  i .  dispute,  quarrel 
J  1.208  (iiatakanar)  annamaniiar)  viggaho)  ;  Miln  90  ; 
often  comb''  with  kalaha,  e.  g.  Vin  n.88  ;  A  iv.401  ; 
Nd'  302;  Miln  383.  —  2.  taking  up  form  (lit.  seizing 
on),  "incorporation,"  form,  body  D  11.210=226  (so- 
vanno  viggaho  manusar)  viggahar)  atirocati)  ;  Vin  1.97 
(manussa")  ;  11.286  (id.);  iv.215  (tiracchanagata-ma- 
nussa°),  269  (id.);  J  v. 398  =  405  (  =  sarira  C)  ;  vi.188 
(rucira°)  ;  Davs  1.42  (uju-somma").  —  3.  (t.t.g.)  reso- 
lution of  words  into  their  elements,  analysis,  separa- 
tion of  words  Miln  381  ;  VvA  226  (pada°)  ;  SnA  168  ; 
ThA  2G2  (pada°). 

Viggahita  [pp.  of  vigganhati]  taken  hold  of,  seized  ;  pre- 
judiced against,  seduced  by  (-),  in  phrase  dhamm' 
uddhacca-viggahita-manasa  A  11.157:  Ps  ii.ioi.  Cp. 
BSk.  vigrahita,  e.  g.  Av^  183  =  308  (Ajata^atru  Deva- 
datta°)  ;  Divy  419,  557,  571  ;  Jtm  143.  146. 

Viggahika  (adj.)  [fr.  viggaha]  of  the  nature  of  dispute  or 
quarrel  ;  only  in  cpd.  °katha  quarrelsome  speech,  dispute 
D  1.8  ;  S  V.419  ;  Sn  930  ;  DA  1.91. 

Vighattita  [vi -f  ghattita]  struck,  knocked,  beaten  J  v. 203 
(a°). 

Vighatana  (adj.)  [fr.  vighateti]  unfastening,  breaking  up, 
overthrowing  Th  i,  419. 

Vigha^ita  [pp.  of  vighateti,  Denom.  fr.  vi-|-ghata,  cp. 
gantheti]  overthrown,  destroyed  Sdhp  314. 

Vighata  [vi-l-ghata]  I.  destruction,  killing,  slaughter 
PvA  150  (vighatai)  apajjati=  vihaniiati).  —  as  adj. 
slain,  beaten  Pv  IV.5'  (=  vighata va  vihata-bala). — 
2.  distress,  annoyance,  upset  of  mind,  trouble,  ve,Tiation 
D  III. 249  ;  M  1. 510;  A  11.197  sq-  '•  IV. 161  Cparijaha)  ; 
Sn  814  (=ugghata  pilana  ghattana  upaddava  Nd' 
140  =  170)  ;  Th  2,  450  (bahu°  full  of  annoyance).  — sa° 
connected  with,  or  bringing  vexation,  with  opp.  a°  free 
of  annoyance:  S  ni.8  ;  v.97  ;  A  1.202  sq.  ;  111,3,  4^9: 
Th  2,  352  ;  ThA  242.  —  3.  opposition  M  1.499. 

-pakkhika  having  its  part  in  adversity,  associated 
with  trouble  M  1.115;  S  v.97;  DhsA  382.  -bhiimi 
ground  for  vexation  Sn  830  (cp.  Nd'  170  with  expl° 
as  above). 

Vighatavant  (adj.)  [vighata -)- vant]  full  of  annoyance  or 
vexation  S  in.  16  sq.  ;  A  n.143  (=  discontented)  ;  Th  i, 
899  (in  same  connection,  neg.)  ;  PvA  260  (=  distressed). 

Vighasa  (&  °ghasa)  [fr.  vi -|- ghasati]  remains  of  food, 
broken  meat,  scraps  Vin  iv.265,  266;  J  11.288;  111.113, 
191,  311  (read  "ghasa  for  metre)  ;  v.268  (do.)  ;  Sdhp  389. 
-4da  one  who  eats  the  remains  of  food  Vin  1.200 
(panca°-satani)  J  1.348;  11.96;  in. 191  ;  DhA  11. 128. 
Also  N.  of  an  animal  J  vi.538. 

Vioakka  (adj.)  [vi-i-  cakka]  without  wheels  J  1.378  (sakata). 
Doubtful  in  phrase  asani°,  where  used  as  a  noun,  prob- 
ably in  diff.  meaning  altogether  (=  asani-pSta  ?)  :  see 
S  11.229  (=  "falling  of  a  thunderbolt"  K.S.  11. 155); 
D  IU.44.  47- 


Vicakkhapa  (adj.-nt.)  [vi  +  cakkhana,  of  cakf  to  see, 
attentive,  watchful,  sensible,  skilful  ;  (nt.)  application, 
attention,  wit  S  1.214=  Sn  186  (appamatta-l-  ;  trsl" 
K.S.  1.277  "  discerning  wit  ")  ;  Sn  583  ;  J  iv.58  ;  vi.286  ; 
Miln  216  ;  Vism  43  ;  SnA  238  ;  Sdhp  200,  293. 

Vicakkhu  (adj.)  [vi -1- cakkhu]  eyeless,  blind,  in  phrase 
"kamma  making  blind  or  perplexed  S  1. 1 1 1 ,  1 1 8  ("  dark- 
ening their  intelligence  "  trsl")  [cp.  BSk.  vicaksu-karma 
MVastu  111.416  ;  Lai  V.  490]. 

Vicakkhaka  (adj.)  [vicakkhu -f  ka]  not  seeing,  blinded, 
dulled  in  sight,  half-blind  Miln  295  (Rh.  D.  "  squinting  "). 

Vicaya  [fr.  vi-f-ci:  see  vicinati]  search,  investigation, 
examination  S  111.96  (vicayaso,  i.  e.  thoroughly)  ;  Pug  2  5  ; 
Miln  340  (dhamma°)  ;  Nett  i,  2,  10;  DhsA  147;  Sdhp 
466.     For  dhamma°  see  sambojjhanga. 

Vioaraoa  (adj.-nt.)  [fr.  vicarati]  going  about,  circulating, 
moving,  travelling  J  v.484  ("bhanda  travelling  mer- 
chandise) . 

Vicarati  [vi -t- carati]  to  go  or  move  about  in  (loc),  to  walk 
(a  road=acc.),  to  wander  Sn  444  (rajtha  ratthag 
vicarissar),  fut.),  696  (dhamma-maggai))  ;  Nd'  201,  263  ; 
Pv  111.7'  \^0T.  vicari)  ;  DhA  1.66;  PvA  4,  22,  33,  69, 
120,  185  (=ahindati);  Sdhp  133.  —  In  Sn  often  with 
loke  (in  this  world),  e.  g.  Sn  466,  501.  845,  846,  864.  — 
Caus.  vicareti;  pp.  vicarita,  vicarita  &  viciijna.  Cp. 
anu". 

Vicarita  [pp.  of  vicarati]  occupied  by  (-°),  haunted,  fre- 
quented VvA  163. 

Vic&ra  [vi  +  cara]  investigation,  examination,  consideration, 
dehberation. — Def''  as  "  vicarariat)  vicSro,  anusafi- 
carai^an  ti  vuttag  hoti  "  Vism  142  (see  in  def.  under 
vitakka).  —  Hardly  ever  by  itself  (as  at  Th  i,  11 17 
mano°),  usually  in  close  connection  or  direct  comb" 
with  vitakka  (q.  v.). 

Vioaraka  (adj.)  [fr.  vicareti]  i.  looking  after  something: 
watching  J  1.364  (ghara°). — 2.  investigating;  (n.)  a 
judge  Mhvs  35,  18. 

Vicaraoa  (f)  &  a°  (nt.)  [fr.  vicareti]  i.  investigation, 
search,  attention  Sn  1108,  1109  (f.  &  nt.)  ;  J  111.73 
(°pafiria).  —  2.  arranging,  planning,  looking  after; 
scheme  J  1.220  ;  11.404  (yuddha")  ;  vi.333  sq. 

Vicarita  [pp.  of  vicareti]  thought  out,  considered  ;  thought 
D  1.37  (vitakkita-)-,  like  vitakka-vicara.  cp.  DA  1.122), 
213  (id.)  ;  SnA  385. 

Vicareti  [Caus.  of  vicarati]  i.  to  make  go  round,  to  pass 
round,  to  distribute  PvA  272  (salakar)).  —  2.  to  think 
(over)  S  V.156  (vitakketi-H).  —  3.  to  investigate, 
examine,  test  J  11. 41 3;  111.258;  VvA  336  (a°  to  omit 
examining). — 4.  to  plan,  consider,  construct  J  11.404; 
VI.333.  —  5-  t°  6°  about  (some  business),  to  look  after, 
administer,  provide  J  n.287;  111.378;  Mhvs  35,  19 
(rajjaij)  ;  PvA  93  (kammante).  —  pp.  vicarita  &  vicinna. 

Vlcaliya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  vi-l-caleti]  in  neg.  a"  not  to  be 
shaken,  not  wavering  Sdhp  444. 

Vicikicchati  [vi-hcikicchati]  lit.  "  dis-reflect,"  to  be  dis- 
tracted in  thought,  i.  e.  to  doubt,  hesitate  D  1.106; 
S11.17,  50,  54  ;  HI. 122,  135  ;  J  IV. 272  (2  sg.  vicikicchase)  ; 
SnA  451  ;  DA  1.275  ;  —  pp.  vicikicchita. 

Vicikiccha  (f.)  [fr.  vicikicchati]  doubt,  perplexity,  uncer- 
tainty (one  of  the  nivaraijas)  D  1.246  ;  111.49,  216,  234, 
269  ;  S  1.99  ;  in.  106  sq.  (dhammesu  v.  doubt  about  the 
precepts)  ;  iv.350  ;  A  in. 292,  438  ;  iv.68,  144  sq.  ;  v. 144  ; 
Sn  343,  437,  540  ;  Vv  81  (=  solasa-vatthuka-vicikiccha 
VvA  317)  ;  J  11.266;  Pug  59;  Vbh  168,  341,  364;  Dhs 
425;  Nett  II  ;  Tikp  108,  122,  152  sq.,  171.  255,  275; 


Vicikicchita 


74 


Vijata 


Dukp  170  sq.,  265  sq.,  289  sq.  ;  Vism  471  ( =  vigata 
cikiccha  ti  v.  etc.),  599  sq.  ;  VbhA  209  ;  VvA  156 ;  MA 
1 16  ;  Sdhp459.  —  As  adj.  (-°)  vicikiccha,  e.  g.  tinna°  one 
who  has  overcome  all  doubt  D  1.71,  no;  M  1.18; 
A  11.211;  III. 92  ;  297  sq.  ;  iv.186;  210.  —  See  also  Cpd. 
242  ;  Dhs.  trsl.  §  425  n.  i  ;  and  cp.  kathankatha,  kicchati, 
vecikicchin. 

Vicikicchita  (nt.)  [pp.  of  vicikicchati]  doubt  Pv  iv.i". 

Vicikiccbin  see  ve°. 

ViciQOa  [pp.  of  vicareti]  thought  out ;  in  neg.  a°  not 
thought  out ;  reading  however  doubtful,  better  to  be 
taken  as  adhicinna,  i.  e.  procedure,  method  D  1.8  = 
M  11.3=  S  III. 12  (vi°  as  V.  1.).  — DA  1.91  reads  acinna 
(cp.M  1.372). 

Vicita  [pp.  of  vi  +  ci  to  gather]  in  phrase  "kalaka  bhatta 
rice  from  which  the  black  grains  have  been  separated 
D  1. 105  ;  Mil. 8  ;DA  1.274  ;  as  vicita-bhatta in  same  sense 
at  J  IV.371. 

Vicitta  {&  °citra)  (adj.)  [vi  +  citta']  various,  variegated, 
coloured,  ornamented,  etc.  J  1.18,  83  ;  Pv  n.i'  ;  Vv  64'° 
(citra)  ;  Miln  338,  349;  VvA  2,  yy ;  Sdhp  92.  245. 
—  vicitra-kathika  eloquent  Miln  196. 

Vicinati  ("cinati)  [vi  +  cinati]  i.  to  investigate,  examine, 
discriminate  S  1.34  (yoniso  vicine  dhammag)  ;  A  IV.3  sq. 
(id.)  ;  Sn  658,  933  ;  Ap  42  ;  J  vi.373  ;  Nd^  398  ;  Nett  10, 
22  (grd.  vicetabba),  25  sq.  ;  Miln  298  ;  Dpvs  iv.2  ;  DhsA 
147;  PvA  140;  Sdhp  344.  —  ger.  vicejrya  discriminat- 
ing ;  with  discrimination  D  11. 21  (doubled  :  with  careful 
discrim")  ;  111.167  ("pekkhitar)  ;  Sn  524  sq.  ;  usually  in 
phrase  viceyya-dana  a  gift  given  with  discrimination 
S  1.21;  A  1V.244  ;  J  IV. 36 1  ;  v.395  ;  Pv  11. 9"* ;  DhA 
111.221  ;  MHivs  5,  35.  —  2.  to  look  for,  to  seek,  to  linger, 
to  choose  Pv  ni.6*  (aor.  vicini=  gavesi  C.)  ;  iv.i''^  (ger. 
viceyya  =  vicinitva  PvA  240);  J  1.4 19.  —  See  also 
pacinati. 

Vicinana  (nt.)  [fr.  vicinati]  discrimination  Vism  162. 

Vicinteti  [vi  +  cinteti]  to  think,  consider  Sn  1023  ;  lyihvs  4, 
28  (vicintiya,  ger.)  ;  17,  38. 

ViouMia  [vi  +  cunna]  crushed  up,  only  in  redupl.-iter. 
formation  cunna-vicunna  crushed  to  bits,  piecemeal 
J  1.26  ;  111.438  etc.     See  under  cunna. 

Vicunijita  [pp.  of  vi  +  cunneti]  crushed  up  J  1.203  (vid- 
dhasta  + ) . 

Viccata  [vi  +  cuta]  fallen  down  J  v.403  (expH  as  viyutta 
C.)  ;  Dh  1. 140. 

Viccha44eti  [vi  +  chaddeti]  to  throw  out,  to  vomit ;  in  late 
(Sanskritic)  Pali  at  Sdhp  121  (pp.  vicchaddita)  and  136 
(nt.  vicchaddana  throwing  out). 

Vicchandanika  (&  °ya)  (adj.)  [vi  +  chanda  +  na  +  ika]  fit 
to  disinterest,  "  disengrossing,"  in  °katha  sermon  to  rid 
of  the  desire  for  the  body  Vin  111.271  (Sam.  Pas.  on  Par. 
III. 3,  i)  ;  &  "suttathe  Suttanta  having  disillusionment  for 
its  subject  (another  name  given  by  Bdhgh  to  the  Vija- 
yasutta  Sn  193-206)  SnA  241  sq.  (°ya).     Cp.  vicchindati. 

Vicchadana  (f.)  [vi-(-chadana]  concealment  Pug  19,  23. 

ViCChika  [cp.  Vedic  vr^cika  :  Zimmer,  Altind.  Leben  98]  a 
scorpion  D  1.9  ("vijja  scorpion  craft);  Vin  11. no;  A 
11.73  ;  ni.ioi,  306  ;  iv.320  ;  v.289  sq.  ;  J  11. 146  ;  Miln  272, 
394  ;  Vism  235  ;  DA  1.93. 

Vicchita  in  phrase  balavicchita-karin  at  Miln  1 10  is  to  be 
read  balav'  icchita-karin  "  a  man  strong  to  do  what  he 
likes,"  i.  e.  a  man  of  influence. 

Vicchidda  (adj.)  [vi h- chidda]  only  in  (redupl.)  combin. 
chidda"  full  of  little  holes,  perforated  all  over  J  1.419. 


Vicchiddaka  [vi -1- chidda -l- ka]  "having  holes  all  over," 
referring  to  one  of  the  asubha-kammatthanas,  obtained 
by  the  contemplation  of  a  corpse  fissured  from  decay 
A  II. 17  (°sarina)  ;  v. 106,  310  ;  Miln  332  ;  Vism  no,  178, 
194. 

Vicchinda  [fr.  vi-j-chind  as  in  vicchindati]  breaking  off, 
cutting  oif  J  11.436,  438  (kaya").  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v. 
considers  it  as  a  corruption  of  vicchanda.  See  vicchan- 
danika. 

Vicchindati  [vi-l-chindati]  to  cut  off,  to  interrupt,  to 
prevent  PvA  129  (°itu-kama).  The  BSk.  form  is 
vicchandayati  [=  vi-i-Denom.  of  chando]  e.  g.  Divy 
10,  n,  383,  590.  —  pp.  vicchinna. 

Vicchinna  [pp.  of  vicchindati]  cut  oif,  destroyed  Sdhp  34, 

117.  370.  585- 

Vicchorita  [vi  +  churita]  besprinkled,  sprinkled  about 
VvA  4,  280  (=ullitta). 

Viccheda  [vi-fcheda]  cutting  off,  destruction  J  iv.284 
(santati").     a"  uninterruptedness  VvA  16. 

Vijatana  (nt.)  [fr.  vijateti]  disentangling  Miln  n. 

Vijatita  [pp.  of  vijateti]  disentangled  S  1.165. 

Vijateti  [vi-l-Caus.  of  jat  :  see  jatita]  i.  to  disentangle,  to 
comb  out;  fig.  to  unravel,  explain  Vin  11. 150  (bimbo- 
hanai)  katur)  tulani  v.);  Miln  3;  Vism  i,  2.  —  2.  to 
plunder  J  111.523.  —  pp.  vijatita. 

Vijana  (adj.)  [vi  + jana]  deserted  of  people,  lonely  S  1. 180  ; 
ThA  252.     -"vata:  see  vata. 

Vijambhati  [vi-l-jambhati]  to  rouse  oneself,  to  display 
activity,  often  appl''  to  the  awakening  of  a  lion  S  111.84  ; 
A  11.33  ;  J  I- 12,  493  ;  V.215  (°amana,  ppr.,  getting  roused), 
433.  487;  VI. 173  ;  Vism  311. 

Vijambbana  (f.)  [vi-l-jambhana]  arousing,  activity,  energy 
J  VI.457- 

Vijambhika  (f)  [fr.  vijambhati]  yawning  (before  rising) 
i.  e.  drowsiness,  laziness,  in  ster.  comb°  with  arati  & 
tandi  S  1.7  (trsl»  "  the  lanquid  frame  ")  ;  A  1.3  ;  Vbh  352  ; 
Vism  T,!,.  As  vijambhita  at  S  v. 64  ;  J  1.506  (here  in 
meaning  "  activity,  alertness,"  but  sarcastically  as 
s!ha°)  ;  VbhA  272  (=  kaya-vinamana). 

Vijaya  [fr.  vi  -f  ji]  victory ;  conquering,  mastering ; 
triumph  over  (-°)  D  1.46;  A  iv.272  (idha-loka°)  ;  SnA 
241  sq.  (°sutta,  another  name  for  the  Kaya-vicchanda- 
nika-sutta). 

Vijayati  (&  vijinati)  [vi  +  jayati]  to  conquer,  master, 
triumph  over  DA  1.250  (vijeti)  ;  fut.  vijessati  J  iv.102.  — 
ger.  vijeyya  Sn  524,  1002  ;  and  vijetva  J  111.523.  —  pp. 
vijita.     Cp.  abhi°. 

Vijabati  [vi-t-jahati]  to  abandon,  forsake,  leave;  to  give 
up,  dismiss  Pv  111.6'^  (sarlrai))  ;  VvA  119;  Pot.  vija- 
heyya  Pv  iv.ii";  fut.  vijahissati  S  11.220;  Pv  11. 6' 
(jivitai)).  —  ger.  vihaya  Mhvs  12,  55  ;  &  vijahitra  Vin 
IV.269  ;  J  1.117  '•  "1-361  (iddh'  dnubhavena  attabhavai)). 
—  grd.  vihatabba  A  111.307  sq.  ;  Miln  371.  —  Pass, 
vihiyati  J  vi.499  (eko  v.=  kilamissati  C).  —  pp.  vija- 
hita  &  vihina. 

i   Vijahana    (nt.)    [fr.    vijahati]    abandoning,    relinquishing 
DA  1. 197. 

Vijahita  [pp.  of  vijahati]  left,  given  up,  relinquished  ;  only 
I       in  neg.  a°  J  1.71,  76,  94,  178. 

Vijata  (f.)  [pp.  of  vijahati]  (a  woman)  having  borne  J  11. 140  ; 
i        Pv  11.2'  (=  pasuta  PvA  80). 

I  -kala  time  of  birth  J  11. 140.     -ghara  birth-chamber 

Miln  301. 


Vijati 


75 


Vijja 


Vijati  in  °loha  a  kind  of  copper  VbhA  63. 

Vijana  (nt.-adj.)  [fr.  vijanati]  understanding;  as  adj.  (-°) 
in  cpds.  du"  (dubbijana)  hard  to  understand  S  1.60  ; 
J  1V.217  ;  and  su°  easy  to  perceive  Sn  92  ;  J  iv.217. 

Vijanaaa  (nt.)  [the  diaeretic  form  of  Sk.  vijnana :  cp. 
janana=nana]  recognition,  knowing,  knowledge,  dis- 
crimination Vism  452  ;  DhsA  141. 

Vijanati  [vi  +  jfia]  to  have  discriminative  (dis=  vi°)  know- 
ledge, to  recognize,  apprehend,  ascertain,  to  become 
aware  of,  to  understand,  notice,  perceive,  distinguish, 
learn,  know  Sn  93  sq.,  763  ;  Dh  64,  65  ;  Nd'  442.  See 
also  vinnaija  2'. — imper.  2""'  sg.  vijana  Sn  1091 
(=ajana  Nd'  S^s"")  ;  Pv  1V.5*  (=vijanahi  PvA  260); 
ppr.  vijananto  Sn  656,  953;  Pv  iv.i*';  PvA  41  ;  and 
vijanat)  neg.  a"  ignorant  Dh  38,  60  ;  It  103.  Pot.  i»'  sg. 
(poet.)  vijatinar]  J  m.360  (=  vijaneyyar)  C.)  ;  Sn  1065, 
1090,  1097  {=janeyyar)  Nd''  S^^S")  ;  &  vjjaniyarj  Vv  41* 
(pativijjhir)  C.)  ;  3"*  sg.  vijaiiiia  Sn  253,  316,  967  (cp. 
Nd'  489).  —  ger.  vijaniya  Mhvs  8,16;  vififiaya  Sn  232  ; 
&  virinitva  Vin  iv.264.  —  aor.  (3"'  pi.)  vijanigsu  Mhvs 
10,  18.  —  Pass,  viiiiiayati  PvA  197  ;  fut.  viiiiiissati  Th  i, 
703. — inf.  viiiflatug  S  in. 134. — grd.  vifinatabba  (to 
be  understood)  VbhA  46;  &  viiiriejrya  (q.  v.). — pp. 
viiiiiata.  —  Cans.  II.  vitiiiapeti  (q.  v.). 

Vijayana  (nt.)  [fr.  vijayati]  bringing  forth,  birth,  delivery 
A  1.78  ;  J  111.342  ;  VI. 333  ;  Vism  500  ;  VbhA  97. 

Vijayati  [vi-l-jayati]  to  bring  forth,  to  bear,  to  give  birth 
to  Sdhp  133  ;  aor.  vijayi  VvA  220  ;  PvA  82  (puttai))  ; 
ger.  vijayitva  Mhvs  5,  43  (puttag)  ;  and  vijayitvana 
Pv  1.6'.  —  pp.  vijata.  —  Caus.  II.  vijayapeti  to  cause 
to  bring  forth  J  vi.340. 

Vijayin  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  vijayati]  in  f.  °ini  able  to  bear  a  child, 
fertile  J  iv.77  (opp.  vanjha)  ;  DhA  1.46  (id.). 

Vijigucchati  [vi-l- j.]  to  loathe  Sn  41  (°amana=  attiyamana 
harayamana  Nd'  566),  253,  958  (°ato=  attiyato  harayato 
Ndi  466),  963  ;  Nd»  479. 

Vijita  [pp.  of  vijayati]  i.  conquered,  subdued,  gained, 
won  Sn  46  ;  SnA  352  ;  DA  1.160  ;  PvA  75,  76,  161.  — ■ 
Cp.  nijjita.  — 2.  (nt.)  conquered  land,  realm,  territory, 
kingdom  J  1.262  ;  Vv  St^o  (=desa  VvA  316)  ;  DhA  1.386. 
-anga  at  Pv  111.  i"  (PvA  176)  read  vijit.°  -indriya 
one  who  has  conquered  his  senses  Sn  250.  -sangama 
by  whom  the  battle  has  been  won,  victorious  D  11.39  ; 
It  76  ;  Nd2  542  ;  Pug  68. 

Vijitavin  (adj.)  [vijita -(- a  vin  ;  see  Geiger,  P.Gr.  198^] 
victorious  D  1.88  (caturanta-i-)  ;  11. 146;  S  ill. 83  ;  Sn 
552,  646  ;  DA  1.249  ;  DhA  iv.232  ;  SnA  162. 

Vijina  [doubtful]  distress  (?),  in  stock  phrase  at  A  v.  156, 
158,  160,  162  (v.  1.  at  all  pass,  vicina). 

Vijiyati  at  J  in. 374  is  to  be  read  as  vijiyati  (Pass,  of 
vijati). 

Vijja  (adj.)  (-°)  [=  vijja]  having  vijja,  possessed  of  wisdom  ; 
in  vatthu",  tiracchana°,  nakkhatta"  etc.  (referring  to  the 
lower  arts  condemned  as  heretic:  vijja  c.)  S  in. 239. 
te"  possessed  of  threefold  wisdom  :  see  vijja  b. 

Vijiatipatti  (f)  [?  doubtful  spelling]  adultery  PvA  151. 

Vijjati,  vijjamana  etc.  :  see  vindati. 

Vijjaatarika  (f)  is  not  clear  ;  according  to  Kern,  Toev. 
s.  v.=  vithi-l-antarika  [a  very  bold  assumption  :  vithy" 
contracted  to  vijj"  I],  i.  e.  space  in  between  two  streets 
or  midstrect  M  1.448  ;  A  1.124.  Neumann  {Mitll.  Slg. 
II. 182)  translates  "  Rinnstein  "  (i.e.  gutter).  Under 
antarika  we  have  given  the  trsl"  "  interval  of  Ughtning," 
thus  taking  it  as  vijju  +  antarika.     Quoted  DA  1.34. 


Vijja  (f)  [cp.  Vedic  vidya  knowledge :  etym.  see  under 
vindati]  one  of  the  dogmatic  terms  of  Buddhist  teaching, 
varying  in  meaning  in  difi.  sections  of  the  Canon.  It  is 
not  always  the  positive  to  avijja  (which  has  quite  a  well- 
defined  meaning  from  its  first  appearance  in  Buddhist 
psych,  ethics),  but  has  been  taken  into  the  terminology 
of  Buddhism  from  Brahmanic  and  popular  philosophy. 
The  opposite  of  avijja  is  usually  iiana  (but  cp.  Sin.  162  f., 
171  ;  V.429).  Although  certain  vijjas  pertain  to  the 
recognition  of  the  "  truth "  and  the  destruction  of 
avijja,  yet  they  are  only  secondary  factors  in  achieving 
"  vimutti  "  (cp.  abhiflna,  iiaija-dassana  &  panna). 
That  vijja  at  M  1.22  is  contrasted  with  avijja  is  to  be 
expl""  as  a  word-play  in  a  stereotype  phrase.  —  A  diff . 
side  of  "  knowledge  "  again  is  given  by  "  bodhi."  — 
(a)  Vijja  is  a  general,  popular  term  for  lore  in  the  old 
sense,  science,  study,  esp.  study  as  a  practice  of  some 
art  (something  like  the  secret  science  of  the  medicine 
man  :  cp.  vejja  !)  ;  hence  appH  in  special,  "  dogmatic  " 
sense  as  "  secret  science,"  revelation  (put  into  a  sort 
of  magic  formula),  higher  knowledge  (of  the  learned 
man),  knowledge  which  may  be  appUed  and  used  as 
an  art  (cp.  magister  artium  !),  practical  knowledge  ;  but 
also  mysterious  knowledge:  "charm."  —  (b)  vijja, 
having  a  varying  content  in  its  connotation,  is  applied 
to  a  series  of  diff.  achievements.  A  rather  old  tabulation 
of  the  stages  leading  by  degrees  to  the  attainment  of  the 
highest  knowledge  is  given  in  the  Samanna-phala-sutta 
(D  1.63-86),  repeated  in  nearly  every  Suttanta  of  D  i. 
It  is  composed  of  the  3  sampadds,  viz.  sila",  citta°  & 
panna°.  Under  the  first  group  belong  slla(-kkhandha), 
indriya-sagvara,  sati-sampajaniia,  santutthi  ;  the  second 
is  composed  (i)  of  the  overcoming  of  the  nlvaranas, 
(2)  of  the  4  jhanas :  the  third  consists  of  8  items,  viz. 
(i)  fiana-dassana,  (2)  manomaya-kaya,  (3)  iddhi, 
{4)  dibba-sota,  (5)  ceto-pariyanana,  (6)  pubbe-nivas' 
anussatinana,  (7)  cut'  upapatti-nana,  (8)  asavanar) 
khaya-nana.  Other  terms  used  are  :  for  the  a"""  sam- 
pada  :  carana  (D.  i.ioo),  and  for  the  3"'  ;  vijja  (ibid.).  — 
The  discussion  at  D  i.ioo  is  represented  as  contradicting 
the  (brahmanic)  opinion  of  Ambattha,  who  thought  that 
"  vijja  nama  tayo  Veda,  caranai)  panca  silani  "  (DA 
1.267  sq.).  —  In  the  enum"  of  3  vijjas  at  M  1.22  sq.  only 
Nos.  6-8  of  the  3"'  sampada  (said  to  have  been  attained 
by  the  Buddha  in  the  3  night  watches)  with  the  verbs 
anussarati  (No.  6),  pajanati  (7),  abhijanati  (8),  each 
signifying  a  higher  stage  of  ("  saving  ")  knowledge,  yet 
all  called  "  vijja."  Quoted  at  Vism  202.  where  all  8 
stages  are  given  as  "  attha  vijja,"  and  carana  with  15 
quaUties  (sila-sagvara,  indriyesu  guttadvaxa  etc.).  The 
same  3  vijjas  (No.  6,  7,  8)  are  given  atD  in. 220.  275,  and 
poetically  at  A  n.165  as  the  characteristics  of  a  proper 
(ariya,  Buddhist)  monk  (or  brahmana)  :  "  etahi  tihi 
vijjahi  tevijjo  hoti  brahmano,"  opposing  the  three- 
Veda-knowledge  of  the  Brahmins.  —  Tevijja  (adj.)  in 
same  meaning  at  S  1.146  (where  it  refers  to  Nos.  3,  5,  8 
of  above  enum"),  192,  194.  In  brahmanic  sense  at  Sn 
594  (=tiveda  SnA  463).  Both  meanings  compared  & 
contrasted  at  A  1.163  (aniiatha  brahmana  brahmanag 
tevijjar)  paftnapenti,  anfiatha  ca  pana  ariyassa  vinaye 
tevijjo  hoti  "  different  in  the  Brahmanic  and  diff.  in  the 
Buddhist  sense  ").  — Tisso  vijja  (without  specification, 
but  referring  to  above  6,  7,  8)  further  at  Vin  n.183  ; 
Sn  656;  Ps  1.34;  n.56;  Pv  IV. i'*;  Miln  359  (-fchala- 
bhifina)  ;  DhA  iv.30  (id.).  It  is  doubtful  whether  the 
def  of  fiana  as  "  tisso  vijja  "  at  Vin  in. 91  is  genuine.  — 
On  vijja-carana  see  also  D  in. 97,  98,  237  ;  S  1.153,  166  ; 
n.284  ;  v. 197  ;  A  n.163  ;  iv.238  :  v. 327  ;  Sn  163,  289.  442- 
—  On  vijja  in  the  doctrinal  appl°  see:  D  in. 156,  214, 
274;  S  11.7  sq.  (cakkhu,  flana,  pafina,  vijja,  aloka)  ; 
ni.47;  163  ;  171  ;  iv.3i,49Sq.  A1.83  ;  11.247  ;  Sn  334  (sim- 
ply meaning  "  wisdom,"  craft,  care,  but  Bdhgh  SnA  339 
takes  it  as  "  asavanarj-khaya-nana  "),  1026  (opposed  to 
avijja)  ;  Pug  14,  57;  Vbh324  ;  Nett  76,  191.  —  (c)  popular 
meanings  &  usage  of  vijja  :  science,  craft,  art,  charm. 


Vijju 


76 


Vifmana 


spell  D  1. 21 3  (Gindhari  nama  v.,  also  mentioned  at 
J  IV.498  as  practised  by  physicians).  214  (Manika 
n.  V.)  ;  J  111.504  (Cintamani  v.)  ;  iv.323  (vatthu"  ;  see 
under  vatthu),  498  (ghora")  ;  v.458  (anga°  palmistry)  ; 
Miln  200;  Dh  1.259  (bhuraicala  n.  v.  "earthquake" 
charm),  265  (dhanu-agamaniyar)  Ambattha  n.  v.)  ;  KhA 
237  {vatthu°,  khetta°,  anga°)  ;  and  see  the  list  of  for- 
bidden crafts  at  D  1.9  (anga°,  vatthu",  khetta"  etc.  ; 
cp.  Dial.  1. 18,  19). 

-gata  having  attained  wisdom  Sn  730  (opp.  avijja ; 
the  playful  expl"  at  SnA  505  is  "  ye  arahatta-magga- 
vijjaya  kilese  vijjhitvd  gata  khinasava-satta  ").  -carana 
(-sampanaa)  (endowed  with)  special  craft  (wisdom)  & 
virtue  :  see  above,  b.  -tthana  branch  of  study  ;  there  are 
18  vijja-tthanani  or  "  arts  &  sciences."  subjects  of  study, 
referred  to  at  J  1.259.  -dhara  a  knower  of  charms,  a 
sorcerer  J  in. 303.  529  ;  iv.496  ;  v. 94  ;  Miln  153,  200.  267. 
-bhagiya  (dharami)  (states)  conducive  to  wisdom  (6 
kinds  of  safina)  A  ni.334  ;  cp.  D  111.243  ;  S  v. 395  ;  A 
IV. 52  sq.  -maya  (iddhi)  (potency)  accomplished  by  art 
or  knowledge  (Expos.  1.122)  Vism  383  ;  see  iddhi.  -vi- 
mutti  wisdom  (higher  knowledge)  as  salvation  S  v. 28, 
335  sq.  ;  Ps  11.243  (in  detail). 

Vijja  &  vijjata  (f)  [cp.  Vedic  vidyut;  fr.  vi  +  dyat:  see 
juti]  lightning.  —  (a)  vijju:  S  1. 100  (°mali)  ;  A  1.124 
("uparaicitta)  ;  J  v. 322  ("vaijriin)  ;  Pug  30;  Miln  22 
(°jala)  ;  VvA  12;  Sdhp  244,  598. —(b)  vijjute:  Th  i, 
1 167  ;  J  II. 217.  —  On  similes  with  v.  see  J.P.T.S.  1907, 
1 36.  —  Cp.  next. 

Vijjallata  (f.)  [vijju(t)  +  lata]  a  flash  or  streak  of  light- 
ning, forked  lightning  S  1.106  ;  J  1.103.  279,  501. 

Vijjotati  [vi-(- jotati]  to  shine  (forth)  PvA  56;  Cans.  ?eti 
to  illumine  PvA  10.  —  pp.  vijjotita. 

Vijjotalati  [Freq.  of  vijjotati?  Or=  vijjotayati=  vijjo- 
teti  ?]  to  flicker  Vin  11. 131  ;  M  1.86. 

Vijjotita  [pp.  of  vijjotati]  resplendent  PvA  i  54. 

Vijihati  [vyadh]  to  pierce,  perforate  ;  to  shoot  with  an 
arrow;  to  strike,  hit.  split;  fut.  "issati  J  iv.272  ;  inf. 
°itug  ibid.  ;  gar.  °itva  Vin  ii.i  50  ;  J  1.201  (boring  through 
timber)  ;  SnA  505  (kilese)  ;  PvA  155  ;  &  viddha  J  vi.77. 

—  Pass,  vijjhati  :  ger.  °itva  having  been  hit  J  in. 323  ; 
ppr.  vijjhamana  PvA  107:  grd.  viddheyya  J  vi.77. — -pp. 
viddha.  — -Cans,  vijjheti  J  1.45  (sulehi vijjhayanto)  ;  and 
vedheti  to  cause  to  be  pierced  J  vi.453  (f"t-  vedhayissati). 

—  pp.  vedhita. 

Vijihana  (nt.)  [fr.  vijjhati]  piercing  or  getting  pierced 
DA  1.75  ;  11.87  (kanna°-mangala,  ear-piercing  ceremony)  ; 
PvA  107. 

Vijibapeti  [vi  +  jhapeti]  to  extinguish  Vin  1.31  ;  11.219, 
221  ;  J  IV. 292  ;  Miln  42. 

Vijjhayati  [vi-j-jhayati^]  to  be  extinguished,  to  go  out  (of 
fire)  Vin  1.31  (imper.  "iyatu  &  fut.  °ayissati)  ;  DhA  1.2 1 
(akkhini  dipa-sikha  viya  vijjhayigsu). 

Vinnatti  (f.)  [fr.  viiiflapeti]  intimation,  giving  to  under- 
stand, information  ;  begging  or  asking  by  intimation  or 
hinting  (a  practice  forbidden  to  the  bhikkhu)  Vin  1.72 
("bahula,  intent  on  .  .  .)  ;  in.  144  sq.  (id.);  iv.290  ; 
J  III. 72  (v.  nama  na  vatfati,  is  improper);  Vbh  13; 
Vism  41  (threefold:  nimitta",  obhasa",  parikatha  ;  as 
t.  t.,  cp.  Cpd.  J  20'  :  medium  of  communication)  ;  Miln 
343.  370;  DhA  II. 2 1  (vinfiattir)  katva  bhuiijitur)  na 
vattati)  ;  PvA  1 46.  —  Two  kinds  of  viiinatti  are  generally 
distinguished,  viz.  kaya°  and  vaci",  or  intimation  by  body 
(gesture)  and  by  voice  :Dhs  665,  718  ;  Miln  229  sq.  ;  Vism 
448,  53°.  53"-     Cp.  Cpd.  22,  264. 

ViMaija  (nt.)  [fr.  vi-l-jfta;  cp.  Vedic  vijfiana  cognition] 
(as  special  term  in  Buddhist  metaphysics)  a  mental 
quaUty  as  a  constituent  of  individuaUty.  the  bearer  of 
(individual)    life,    life-force    (as    extending    also    over 


rebirths),  principle  of  conscious  life,  general  conscious- 
ness (as  function  of  mind  and  matter),  regenerative  force, 
animation,  mind  as  transmigrant,  as  transforming 
(according  to  individual  kamma)  one  individual  life 
(after  death)  into  the  next.  (See  also  below,  c  &  d).  In 
this  (fundamental)  application  it  may  be  characterized 
as  the  sensory  and  perceptive  activity  commonly 
expressed  by  "  mind."  It  is  difficult  to  give  any  one 
word  for  v.,  because  there  is  much  difference  between  the 
old  Buddhist  and  our  modern  points  of  view,  and  there 
is  a  varying  use  of  the  term  in  the  Canon  itself.  In 
what  may  be  a  very  old  Sutta  S  11.95  ^-  ^^  given  as  a 
synonym  of  citta  (q.  v.)  and  mano  (q.  v.),  in  opposition 
to  kaya  used  to  mean  body.  This  simpler  unecclesi- 
astical,  unscholastic  popular  meaning  is  met  with  in 
other  suttas.  E.  g.  the  body  (kaya)  is  when  animated 
called sa-vitiiianaka  (q.  v.  and  cp.  vinfianatta).  Again, 
v.  was  supposed,  at  the  body's  death,  to  pass  over  into 
another  body  (S  1.122  ;  in. 124)  and  so  find  a  support  or 
platform  (patittha).  It  was  also  held  to  be  an  immut- 
able, persistent  substance,  a  view  strongly  condemned 
(M  1.258).  Since,  nowever.  the  persistence  of  v.  from 
life  to  life  is  declared  (D  11.68;  Sin. 54),  we  must 
judge  that  it  is  only  the  immutable  persistence  that  is 
condemned.  V.  was  justly  conceived  more  as  "  mind- 
ing "  than  as  "  mind."  Its  form  is  participial.  For 
later  variants  of  the  foregoing  cp.  Miln  86  ;  PvA  63,  219. 
Ecclesiastical  scholastic  dogmatic  considers  v.  under 
the  categories  of  (a)  khandha  ;  (b)  dhatu  ;  (c)  paticca- 
samuppada  ;  (d)  ahara  ;  (e)  kaya.  (a)  V.  as  fifth  of  the 
five  khandhas  (q.  v.)  is  never  properly  described  or 
defined.  It  is  an  ultimate.  But  as  a  factor  of  animate 
existence  it  is  said  to  be  the  discriminating  (vijanati)  of 
e.  g.  tastes  or  sapid  things  (S  in. 87),  or,  again,  of  pleasant 
or  painful  feeUng  (M  1.292).  It  is  in  no  wise  considered 
as  a  condition,  or  a  cUmax  of  the  other  incorporeal 
khandhas.  It  is  just  one  phase  among  others  of  mental 
life.  In  mediaeval  dogmatic  it  appears  rather  as  the  bare 
phenomenon  of  aroused  attention,  the  other  khandhas 
having  been  reduced  to  adjuncts  or  concomitants 
brought  to  pass  by  the  arousing  of  v.  {Cpd.  13),  and  as 
such  classed  under  cetasika,  the  older  sankharakkhandha. 
— (b)  as  dhatu,  v.  occurs  only  in  the  category  of  the  four 
elements  with  space  as  a  sixth  element,  and  also  where 
dhatu  is  substituted  for  khandha  (S  in.  10). — (c)  In  the 
chain  of  causation  (Paticca-samuppada)  v.  is  con- 
ditioned by  the  sankharas  and  is  itself  a  necessary 
condition  of  nama-riipa  (individuality).  See  e.  g. 
S  11.4,  6,  8,  12  etc.  ;  Vin  i.i  ;  Vism  545  sq.=  VbhA  150  ; 
Vism  558  sq.  ;  VbhA  169  sq.  ;  192.  —  At  S  11.4=  111.61 
viiinana  (in  the  Paticca-samuppada)  is  defined  in  a 
similar  way  to  the  def  under  v.-fthiti  (see  c),  viz.  as 
a  quality  peculiar  to  (&  underlying)  each  of  the  6 
senses  :  "  katamar)  vinnanar)  ?  cha-y-ime  viniSana-kaya 
(groups  of  v.),  viz.  cakkhu"  sota°  etc.,"  which  means 
that  viiinana  is  the  apperceptional  or  energizing  principle, 
so  to  speak  the  soul  or  Ufe  (substratum,  animator,  life- 
potency)  of  the  sensory  side  of  individueility.  It  arises 
through  the  mutual  relation  of  sense  and  sense-object 
(M  III. 281,  where  also  the  6  v.-kaya).  As  such  it  forms 
a  factor  of  rebirth,  as  it  is  grouped  under  upadhi  (q.  v.). 
Translations  of  S  11.4  :  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  {K.S.  11.4)  "  con- 
sciousness "  ;  Geiger  (in  Z.  f.  B.  iv.62)  "  Erkennen." — 
(d)  As  one  of  the  four  aharas  (q.  v.)  v.  is  considered  as 
the  material,  food  or  cause,  through  which  comes  rebirth 
(S  11.13  ;  cp.  B.Psy.  p.  62).  As  such  it  is  likened  to  seed 
in  the  field  of  action  (kamma)  A  1.223,  and  as  entering 
(a  body)  at  rebirth  the  phrase  viiifianassa  avakkanti  is 
used  (D  11.63  '■  S  11.91).  In  this  connection  the  expres- 
sion patisandhi-viniiana  first  appears  in  Ps  1.52,  and 
then  in  the  Commentaries  (VbhA  192  ;  cf.  Vism  548, 
659  pafisandhicitta)  ;  in  Vism  554=  VbhA  163,  the  v., 
here  said  to  be  located  in  the  heart,  is  made  out,  at 
bodily  death,  "  to  quit  its  former  '  support  '  and  pro- 
ceed (pavattati)  to  another  by  way  of  its  mental  object 


Vinnana 


n 


Vinnu 


and  other  conditions."  Another  scholastic  expression, 
both  early  and  late,  is  abhiscinkhara-v.,  or  "  endowment 
consciousness,"  viz.  the  individual  transmigrant  or 
transmitted  function  (vifinana)  which  supplies  the  next 
life  with  the  accumulation  of  individual  merit  or  demerit 
or  indifference,  as  it  is  expressed  at  Nd-  56g»  in  def  of 
V.  (on  Sn  1055  :  yai)  kiiici  sampajanasi  .  .  .  panujja 
vinnanar)  bhave  na  tifthe)  :  punn'  abhisankhara-saha- 
gata-virinanag,  apuiiri'  .  .  .,  anejj'  ...  —  Under  the 
same  heading  at  Nd^  56q''  we  find  abhisankhara  v. 
with  ref .  to  the  sotapatti-stage,  i.  e.  the  beginning  of 
salvation,  where  it  is  said  that  by  the  gradual  disap- 
pearance of  abhis.-v.  there  are  still  7  existences  left 
before  nama-rupa  (individuality)  entirely  disappears. 
The  climax  of  this  development  is  "  anupadi-sesa 
nibbana-dhatu,"  or  the  nibbana  stage  without  a  re- 
mainder (parinibbana),  which  is  characterized  not  by 
an  abhisankhara-v.,  but  by  the  carimaka-v.,  or  the 
jinal  vital  spark,  which  is  now  going  to  be  extinct. 
This  passage  is  referred  to  at  DhsA  357,  where  the  first 
half  is  quoted  literally. — (e)  As  kaya  i.  e.  group,  v.  is 
considered  psycho-physicaUy,  as  a  factor  in  sense- 
perception  (D  III. 243,  M  III. 281,  etc.),  namely,  the 
contact  between  sense-organ  and  object  (medium,  \ifTa.Z,v 
was  not  taken  into  account)  produces  v.  of  sight,  hearing 
etc.  The  three  factors  constitute  the  v.-kaya  of  the  given 
sense.  And  the  v.  is  thus  bound  to  bodily  process  as  a 
catseye  is  threaded  on  a  string  (D  11.76).     Cp.  above  c. 

Other  applications  of  the  term  v.,  both  Canonical  and 
mediaeval  :  on  details  as  to  attributes  and  functions,  see 
Vin  I.I  3  (as  one  of  the  khandhas  in  its  quality  of  anatta, 
cp.  S  IV. 166  sq.)  ;  D  111.223  (as  khandha)  ;  S  ii.ioi  sq. 
(°assa  avakkanti)  ;  in. 53  sq.  (°assa  gati,  agati,  cuti 
etc.)  ;  A  1.223  sq.  ;  111.40  ;  Sn  734  (yag  kiiici  dukkhai) 
sarabhoti,  sabbar)  vinnaija-paccaya),  1037  (nama-rupa 
destroyed  in  consequence  of  v.  destruction),  1073 
(cavetha  v.  [so  read  for  bhavetha]  ;  v.  at  this  passage 
expf  as  "  punappafisandhi-v."  at  Nd"  569');  mo 
(uparujjhati)  ;  Ps  1.53  sq.,  153  sq.  ;  11. 102  ;  Vbh  g  sq., 
53  sq.,  86;  Nett  15  (nama-rupa  v.-sampayutta),  16 
(v.-hetuka  n.-r.),  17  (nirodha),  28,  79,  116  (as  khandha)  ; 
Vism  529  (as  simple,  twofold,  fourfold  etc.),  545=  VbhA 
150  sq.  (in  detail  as  product  of  sankharas  &  in  32 
groups)  ;  VbhA  1 72  (twofold  :  vipaka  &  avipaka)  ; 
DhA  IV.  100. 

-inaiic'ayatana  infinitude  (-sphere)  of  life-force  or 
mind-matterD  1.35,  184,  223  ;  in. 224,  262,  265  ;  Nett  26, 
39.  It  is  the  second  of  the  Aruppa-jhanas  ;  see  jhana. 
-ahara  consciousness  (i.  e.  vital  principle)  sustenance  : 
see  above  dand  cp.  Dhs  70,  126  ;  Nett  114  sq.  ;  Vism  341. 
-kaya  :  see  above  e.  -khandha  life-force  as  one  of  the 
aggregatesof  physical  life  D  111.233  ;Tikp  61  ;  DhsA  141  ; 
VbhA  21,  42.  -tthiti  vinnana-duration,  phase  of  mental 
life.  The  emphasis  is  on  duration  or  continuation 
rather  than  place,  which  would  be  tfhana.  There  are 
(a)  4  V. -durations  with  regard  to  their  "  storing  " 
(abhisankhara)  quahty,  viz.  combinations  of  v.  (as 
the  governing,  mind-principle)  with  each  of  the  4 
other  khandhas  or  aggregates  of  material  life  (rupa, 
vedana,  saiina,  sankhara),  v.  animating  or  bringing 
them  to  consciousness  in  any  kind  of  life-appearance  ; 
and  (/3)  7  v.-durations  with  regard  to  their  "  regenerat- 
ing "  (new-hfe  comb"  or  rebirth=  pafisandhi)  quaUty, 
viz.  the  4  planes  of  var.  beings  (from  men  to  devas), 
followed  by  the  3  super-dimensional  stages  (the 
anaiic'  ayatanas)  of  akasa-infinitude,  viiiiiaija-infin.  & 
akiii-caiina-infin.  —  Passages  in  the  Canon :  (a)  as 
4  :  D  I  1.262  sq.  ;  S  111.53  *<!•  ("  standing  for  conscious- 
ness "  &  "  platform,"  "patittha  S  in. 54  ;  A'.S.  ni.45)  — 
{/9)  the  7:  D  n.68  sq.  ;  in. 253  (trsl°  "station  of  con- 
sciousness"), 282;  =A  iv.39.  Both  the  4  and  the  7 
at  Nd*  570.  Cp.  under  a  slightly  difi.  view  S  11.65  (y*5 
ceteti  .  .  .  Jrammanai)  .  .  .  hoti  viiiflanassa  fhitiya). 
—  See  also  Ps  1.22,  122;  Sn  1114;  Nett  31,  83  sq.  ; 
Vism  552  ;  VbhA  169.     -dhatu  mind-element,  which  is 


the  6th  dhatu  after  the  4  great  elements  (the  maha- 
bhutani)  and  akasa-dhatu  as  fifth  (this  expf  as  "  asam- 
phuttha-dhatu  "  at  VbhA  55,  whereas  v.-dhatu  as 
"  vijanana-dhatu  ")  D  in. 247  ;  Vbh  85,  87  ;  VbhA  55  ; 
cp.  A  1. 176  ;  M  III. 31,  62,  240  ;  S  n.248.  -vithi  the  road 
of  mind  (fig),  a  mediaeval  t.  t.  for  process  in  sense- 
perception  KhA  102. 

VinMoaka  (adj.)  [virinana-t-ka]  having  hfe  or  conscious- 
ness or  sense,  endowed  with  vitality.  Found  in  the 
four  Nikayas  only  in  one  standard  passage  in  the  same 
connection,  viz.  sa-viiiiianaka  kaya  "  the  body  with  its 
vifiiiana  "  (i.  e.  hfe-force  or  mind)  :  S  11.253  ;  in. 80,  169  ; 
V.31 1  ;  A  1.132  ;  IV. 53.  Thus  (sa°)  should  be  read  at  all 
passages.  —  Later  in  contrast  pair  sa°  and  a°,  i.  e.  with 
life  &  without,  alive  &  lifeless,  animate  &  inanimate,  e.  g. 
J  1.466,  468  ;  DhA  1.6  ;  PvA  130. 

ViMavatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  formation  fr.  viiinaija]  the  fact  of 
being  endowed  with  viiinana  S  in. 87 ;  P*vA  63. 

Vifinata  [pp.  of  vijanati]  apperceived,  (re)cognized,  under- 
stood, cogitated  {Cpd.  37),  learned  Sn  323  (°dhamma,  one 
who  has  recognized  or  understood  the  Dhamma)  ;  Vv 
44I8  (=  vifinata-sasana-dhamma  VvA  192);  J  1.2; 
Sdhp  429.  — •  Often  in  sequence  diftha  suta  muta 
vinAata  to  denote  the  whole  range  of  the  cognitional 
&  apperceptional  faculties  (see  muta),  e.  g.  D  111.232  ; 
Sn  1086,  1 122. 

Vinnatar  [n.  ag.  of  viiiiiata]  a  perceiver,  one  who  apper- 
ceives  or  takes  to  heart,  a  learner  D  1.56;  A  in. 169  ; 
IV. 1 96  (sotar,  uggahetar,  v.). 

ViMapaka  (adj.)  [fr.  viiiiiapeti]  clever  in  instruction,  able 
to  instruct  S  v.i62=  Miln  373  ;  It  107. 

Vinnapana  (adj.)  [fr.  vmriapeti]  instructing,  informing 
A  n.51,  97.  —  f.  vinfiapani  instructive,  making  clear 
(of  speech)  D  i.i  14  (atthassa  viniiapaniya  =  viiinapana- 
samatthava  DA  1.282);  A  111.114;  Dh  408  (=attha° 
DhA  IV.182)  ;  Sn  632. 

Vinnapaya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  viniiapeti,  =  *viniiapya]  acces- 
sible to  instruction  ;  only  in  cpds  du°  &  su°  indocile  & 
docile  S  1.138;  D  11.38;  Nd^  235^;  Ps  1.121  ;  11.195; 
Vbh  341. 

Vinnapita  [pp-  of  vififiapeti]  instructed,  informed  ;  su°  well 
taught  Miln  loi. 

Viiinapetar   [n.   ag.   of  viilnapita]   an  instructor,   teacher 
j        D  1.56  ;  A  IV.  1 96. 

I  ViMapeti  [Caus.  II.  of  vijanati]  to  address,  inform,  teach, 

I  instruct ;  to  give  to  understand  ;  to  appeal  to,  to  beg 

j  Vin  1.54  ;  IV. 264  ;  D  1.251  ;  J  111.72  (to  intimate)  ;  Miln 

I  229;  VvA  72,  181.  —  pp.  viiiflapita. 

Vififiaya  &  viMayati  see  vijanati. 

'  ViMuta  &   (rifliiuta  (f )   [fr.  vififiu]  discretion  ;  in  phrase 

■       viAtidtai)  papunati  to  reach  the  years  of  discretion  or 

puberty  Vin  1.269 ;  n.278  ;  J  1.231  ;  in.437  ;  PvA  3. 

Viiiiiapasattha  [vi-i-ni-i-upassattha,  pp.  of  sfj  (?)]  un- 
attacked,  not  deficient,  unmolested,  undisturbed  :  is 
Kern's  {Toev.  s.  v.)  proposed  reading  for  vifiAii-pasattha 
("  extolled  by  the  wise  ")  at  S  11.70  (reads  tth)  ;  v. 343  ; 
D  11.80;  III. 245  :  all  identical  passages.  We  consider 
Kern's  change  unnecessary  :  anupasa^ha  would  have 
been  the  most  natural  expression  if  it  had  been  meant 
in  the  sense  suggested  by  Kern. 


Vinneyya 


78 


Vitta 


Vinneyya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  vijanati]  to  be  recognized  or 
apperceived  (of  the  sense  objects :  cakkhu-vinneyya 
rupa,  etc.)  D  1.245  ;  M  111.291  ;  A  in. 377  ;  iv.404  sq.,  415, 
J430  ;  Nd'  24.  — su°  easily  understood  VvA  258. 

Vitapa  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  vitapa]  the  fork  of  a  tree,  a  branch 
J  I.i6g,  215,  222  ;  111.28  ;  VI. 177  (nigrodha°). 

Vi(apin  [vitapa  +  in]  a  tree,  lit.  "  having  branches  "  J  vi.178. 

Vitabtu  (f.)  [=  Sk.  vitapin]  the  fork  of  a  tree  M  1.306; 
J  II. 107  ;  III. 203. 

Vitakka  [vi  +  takka]  reflection,  thought,  thinking  ;  "  initial 
application"  (Cpd.  282). — Def  as  "  vitakkanar) 
vitakko,  uhanan  ti  vuttai)  hoti  "  at  Vism  142  (with 
simile  on  p.  143,  comparing  vitakka  with  vicara : 
kumbhakarassa  danda-ppaharena  cakkaij  bhamayitva, 
bhajanag  karontassa  uppilana-hattho  viya  vitakko  (like 
the  hand  holding  the  wheel  tight),  ito  c'  ito  sancarana- 
hattho  viya  vicaro  :  giving  vitakka  the  characteristic 
of  fixity  &  steadiness,  vicara  that  of  movement  & 
display).  — D  11.277  ("  pre-occupation  "  trsl"  :  see  note 
Dial.  II. 311);  III. 104,  222,  287  (eight  Mahapurisa")  ; 
M  1. 1 14  (dvidha-kato  v.),  377;  S  1.39,  126,  186,  203; 
II. 153;  IV. 69,  216;  A  11.36;  111.87  (dhamma°)  ;  iv.229 
(Mahapurisa"),  353  ("upaccheda)  ;  Sn  7,  270  sq.,  970, 
1 109 ;  J  1.407  (Buddha°,  Sangha",  Nibbana")  ;  Nd'  386, 
493,  501  (nine);  Nd^  s.  v.  takka ;  Ps  1.36,  136,  178; 
Pv  III. 5*  ;  Pug  59,  68  ;  Vbh  86,  104  (rijpa°,  sadda"  etc.), 
228  (sa°),  362  (akusala")  ;  Dhs  7,  160,  1268;  Tikp  61, 
333.  353  ;  Vism  291  ("upaccheda)  ;  Miln  82,  309  ;  DhsA 
142  ;  DhA  IV. 68  ;  VbhA  490  ;  PvA  226,  230.  ^kama°, 
vihigsa",  vyapada"  (sensual,  malign,  cruel  thought)  : 
D  III. 226  ;  S11.151  sq.  ;  111.93  ;  A1.148,  2  74sq.  ;  n.16,  117, 
252  ;  III. 390,  428.  Opp.  nekkhamma",  avyapada°, 
avihit]sa°  A  1275;  11.76;  111.429.  — vitakka  is  often 
comb"*  with  vicara  or  "  initial  &  sustained  appUcation  " 
Mrs.  Rh.  D.  ;  Cpd.  282  ;  "  reflection  &  investigation  " 
Rh.  D.  ;  to  denote  the  whole  of  the  mental  process  of 
thinking  (viz.  fixing  one's  attention  and  reasoning  out, 
or  as  Cpd.  17  expl'  it  "  vitakka  is  the  directing  of  con- 
comitant properties  towards  the  object ;  vicara  is  the 
continued  exercise  of  the  mind  on  that  object."  See 
also  above  def°  at  Vism  142).  Both  are  properties  of 
the  first  jhana  (called  sa-vitakka  sa-vicara)  but  are 
discarded  in  the  second  jhana  (called  a°).  See  e.  g. 
D.  1.37  ;  S  IV. 360  sq.  ;  A  iv.300  ;  Vin  111.4  ;  Vism  85  ; 
and  formula  of  jhana.  The  same  of  piti  &  samadhi  at 
Vbh  228,  of  pafiAa  at  Vbh  323.  The  same  comb" 
(vitakka  +  vicara)  at  foil,  passages:  D  111.219  (of  sama- 
dhi which  is  either  sa°,  or  a°,  or  avitakka  vicara-matta)  ; 
S  IV. 193  ;  v.iii  ;  A  iv.409  sq.,  450  ;  Nett  16  ;  Miln  60, 
62  ;  Vism  453.  Cp.  rupa-  (sadda-  etc.)  vitakka+rupa- 
(sadda-  etc.)  vicara  A  iv.147;  v.360  ;  Vbh  103.  —  On 
term  (also  with  vicara)  see  further  :  Cpd.  40,  56,  98, 
238  sq.,  282  (on  difference!  between  v.  &  manasikara)  ; 
Expos.  1.188°  ;  Kvu  trsl"  238^  —  Cp.  pa°,  pari°. 

Note.  Looking  at  the  comb"  vitakka -H  vicara  in  earlier 
and  later  works  one  comes  to  the  conclusion  that  they 
were  once  used  to  denote  one  &  the  same  thing  :  just 
thought,  thinking,  only  in  an  emphatic  way  (as  they  are 
also  semantically  synonymous) ,  and  that  one  has  to  take 
them  as  one  expression,  like  janati  passati,  without  being 
able  to  state  their  difference.  With  the  advance  in  the 
Sangha  of  intensive  study  of  terminology  they  became 
distinguished  mutually.  Vitakka  became  the  inception 
of  mind,  or  attending,  and  was  no  longer  applied,  as  in 
the  Suttas,  to  thinking  in  general.  The  expl""  of 
Commentators  are  mostly  of  an  edifying  nature  and 
based  more  on  popular  etymology  than  on  natural 
psychological  grounds. 

Vitakkana  (nt.)=  vitakka  Vism  142. 

Vitakkita  [pp.  of  vitakketi]  reflected,  reasoned,  argued 
DA  1. 12 1.     Cp.  pari". 


'  Vitakketi  [Denom.  fr.  vitakka]  to  reflect,  reason,  consider 
S  1. 197,  202  ;  IV. 169  ;  V.156  ;  A  11.36  ;  Miln  311.  — •  pp. 
vitakkita. 

Vitacchika  at  S  11.99=  iv.188  read  vitaccika  (q.  v.). 

Vitacchika  .(f.)  [cp.  *Sk.  (medical)  vicarcika]  scabies 
Nd^  304'  (as  roga). 

Vitacchita  [pp.  of  vitaccheti]  planed,  smoothed  ;  su°  well 
carded  (of  a  civara)  Vin  111.259. 

Vitaccheti  [vi  -f-  taccheti]  i .  tear,  pluck,  pick  to  pieces  ;  in 
simile  M  1.364  (-1-  virajeti)=  S  11.255  (reads  vibhajeti  for 
virajeti)=  Vin  in. 105  (id.).  —  2.  to  smoothe  :  see  pp. 
vitacchita. 

Vita94a  (f)  [cp-  Epic  Sk.  vitanda,  e.  g.  Mbh  2,  1310;  7, 
3022]  tricky  disputation,  frivolous  or  captious  dis- 
cussion; in  cpds.  vitanda":  °vada  sophistry  SnA  447; 
DA  1.247  ;  °vadin  a  sophist,  arguer  DhsA  3  (so  read  for 
vidaddha)  ;  VbhA  9,  51,  319,  459.     See  lokayata. 

Vitata  [pp.  of  vitanoti]  stretched,  extended,  diffused 
S  1.207;  Sn  272,  669  (v.  1.  vitthata)  ;  J  1.356  (tanta° 
where  the  strings  were  stretched)  ;  Miln  102,  307  ;  Mhvs 
17,  31  (vallihi  V.)  —  nt.  vitata  a  drum  (with  leather  on 
both  sides)  VvA  37. 

Vitatha  (adj.)  [vi  +  tatha;  cp.  Epic  &  Class.  Sk.  vitatha] 
untrue  ;  nt.  untruth  D  11.73  (°a  hi  Tathagata  vitathag 
bhananti)  ;  Sn  g  sq.  ;  Vv  53'^  (=atatha,  musa  ti  attho 
VvA  240)  ;  J  v. 1 12  ;  V1.207  ;  Ps  104  ;  DA  1.62.  — avitatha 
true  S  11.26  ;  v.430  ;  Miln  184  ;  Sdhp  530  ;  DA  1.65. 

Vitanoti  (*vitanati)  [vi  +  tanoti]  to  stretch  out,  spread 
out;  poet.  ger.  vitanitvana  J  vi.453.  —  Pass,  vitaniy- 
yati  ibid.  —  pp.  vitata.     Cp.  vitana. 

Vitarava  (nt.)  [fr.  vitarati]  overcoming,  getting  through 
M  1. 147  (kankha°)  ;  Miln  233  (id.),  351  ;  Sdhp  569. 

Vitarati  [vi  -1-  tarati]  i .  to  go  through,  come  through,  over- 
come Sn  495,  779  (ger.  °eyya,  taken  as  Pot.  at  Nd^  57  : 
oghar)  samatikkameyya),  941,  1052  ;  Pv  iii.2<  (vitaritva 
=  vitinno  hutva  PvA  181,  q.  v.  for  detail).- — 2.  to 
perform  J  11. 14  (bubhukkhito  no  vitarasi  bhottui)  ;  v.  1. 
visahami).  —  pp.  vitinna. 

Vitana  (m.  &  nt.)  [fr.  vi-)-tan]  spread-out,  canopy,  awning 
Vin  IV. 279  ;  J  1.40,  62,  83  ;  DhA  11.42  ;  SnA  447  ;  VvA  32, 
173  ;  PvA  154.     See  also  cela°. 

Vitimia  [pp.  of  vitarati]  i .  overcome  or  having  overcome, 
gone  through,  conquered  Dh  141  (°kankha)  ;  Sn  514  (id.), 
746;  PvA  181. — -2.  given  up,  rejected,  abandoned 
Dh  176  (°paraloka)  ;  J  iv.447  (=  pariccatta  C). 

Vitudati  [vi  +  tudati]  to  strike,  prick,  nudge,  knock,  push, 
attack  D  1.105  '■  S  iv.225  ;  A  111.366  ;  Sn  675  ;  Ud  67 ; 
J  II. 163.  185.  —  Pass,  vitujjati  Vism  505;  VbhA  104, 
108.  —  pp.  vitunna. 

Vitunna  [pp.  of  vitudati]  struck,  pricked,  pushed  J  in. 380. 

Vitureyyati  at  J  v.47  is  not  clear.  The  v.  1.  is  vitariyati ; 
the  C.  expl»  by  tuleti  tireti,  i.  e.  contemplates,  examines. 
Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  discusses  it  in  detail  &  proposes  writing 
vituriyata  (3"'  sg.  praet.  med.),  &  expl»  at  "  get  over  " 
[cp.  Vedic  turyati  overcome,  fr.  tuT  or  tvar=  P.  tarati^]. 
Dutoit  trsl"  "  uberstieg." 

Vitta'  [orig.  pp.  of  vindati=  Av.  vista,  Gr.  aiirroc,  Lat. 
visus ;  lit.  one  who  has  found,  acquired  or  recognized  ; 
but  already  in  Vedic  meaning  (as  nt.)  "  acquired  pos- 
sessions "]  property,  wealth,  possessions,  luxuries 
S  1.42  ;  Sn  181  sq.,  302  ;  J  v. 350,  445  ;  vi.308  ;  Pv  11.8' 
(=  vittiya  upakarana-bhutar)  vittai)  PvA  106).  —  Often 
in  phrase  °\ipakarana  possessions  &  means,  i.  e.  wealth. 


Vitta 


79 


Vidupita 


e.  g.  D  1. 1 34  ;  S  1.71  ;  iv.324  ;  Pug  52  ;  Dh  1.295  ;  PvA  3, 
71.  Vittai)  is  probably  the  right  reading  S  1.126  (15)  for 
cittag.     Cf.  p.  123  (3)  ;  K.S.  1. 153,  n.  3. 

Vitta^  (adj.)  [identical  with  vitta^]  gladdened,  joyful,  happy 
J  111.413  (=tuttha)  ;  IV. 103  ;  Vv  41*  (=  tuftha  C.)  ;  44^* 
(id.),  49'  (id.). 

Vitta'  [pp.  of  vie  to  sift,  cp.  Sk.  vikta]  see  vi°. 

Vittaka  (adj.)  [fr.  vitta^]  possessing  riches,  becoming  rich 
^y  (-°)  J  1-339  (lanca°)  ;  iv.267  (miga°),  vi.256  (jvita°).     i 

Vittakata  (f.)  [vittaka +  ta]  in  suta°  "  the  fact  of  getting 
rich  through  learning  "  as  an  expl°  of  the  name  Suta-   , 
soma  J  V.457  (for  auspiciousness).     Dutoit  trsl"  quite 
differently  :  "  weil  er  am  Keltern  des  Somatrankes  seine 
Freude  hatte,"  hardly  correct. 

Vitti  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  vitti,  fr.  vid]  prosperity,  happiness,  joy, 
felicity  A  111.78  ;  J  iv.103  ;  vi.117  ;  KVU484  ;  Th  i,  609  ; 
Dhs  9  (cp.  DhsA  143)  ;  PvA  106. 

Vittha  (nt.)  [vi  +  stha  ?]  a  bowl,  in  sura"  for  drinking  spirits 
J  v.427  ;  DhA  III. 66. 

Vitthaka  (nt.)  [fr.  vittha]  a  small  bowl,  as  receptacle 
(avesana°)  for  needles,  scissors  &  thimbles  Vin  n.117. 

Vitthata^  [pp.  of  vi  +  str]  i.  extended,  spread  out,  wide 
M.  1.178;  Vin  1.297;  J  v.3iq;  Miln  311;  SnA  214; 
PvA  68  (doubtful!). — 2.  wide,  spacious  (of  a  robe) 
Vin  111.259.  —  3.  flat  SnA  301. 

Vitthata~  [pp.  of  vitthayati  (?).  A  difficult  form  1]  per- 
plexed, confused,  hesitating  Miln  36  (bhita  +  ).  Ed. 
Miiller,P.Gr.  :o2  considersit  aspp.of  vi  + trasto  tremble, 
together  with  vitthayati  &  vitthaj-i. 

Vitthambhana  (nt.)  [fr.  vi  +  thambhati]  making  firm, 
strengthening,  supporting  Vism  351  (cp.  DhsA  335). 

Vitthambheti  [vi  +  thambheti]  to  make  firm,  strengthen 
DhsA  335. 

Vitthayati  [vi  +  stya :  see  under  thina]  to  be  embarrassed 
or  confused  (lit.  to  become  quite  stiff),  to  be  at  a  loss,  to 
hesitate  Vin  1.94=11.272;  aor.  vitthasi  (vitthayi  ?) 
ibid,  [the  latter  taken  as  aor.  of  tras  by  Geiger,  P.Gr. 
§  166].  —  pp.  vitthata^  cSt  vitthayita. 

Vitthayitatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  vitthayita,  pp.  of  vitthayati] 
perplexity,  hesitation  D  1249. 

Vitthara  [fr,  vi  +  str]  '•  expansion,  breadth  ;  instr.  vittha- 
rena  in  breadth  Miln  17;  same  abl.  vittharato  J  1.49. 
—  2.  extension,  detail  ;  often  in  C.  style,  introducing  & 
detailed  explanation  of  the  subject  in  question,  either 
with  simple  statement  "  vittharo  "  (i.  e.  here  the  foil, 
detail;  opp,  sankhepa).  e.  g.  DA  1.65,  229;  SnA  325 
[cp.  same  in  BSk.  "  vistarah,"  e.  g.  Divy  428],  or  with 
cpds.  °katha  SnA  464  ;  PvA  19 ;  °desana  SnA  163  ; 
"vacana  SnA  416.  Thus  in  general  often  in  instr.  or 
abl.  as  adv.  "  in  detail,"  in  extenso  (opp.  sankhittena 
in  short)  :  vittharena  D  111.241  ;  S  iv.93  ;  A  11.77,  177, 
189;  111.177;  Pug  41  ;  PvA  53,  113;  vittharato  Vism 
351,  479  ;  PvA  71,  72,  81.  Cp.  similarly  BSk.  vistarena 
karyag  Divy  377. 

Vittharata  (f.)  [fr.  vitthara]  explicitness,  detail  Nett  2.  As 
vittharana  at  Nett  9. 

Vittharika  (adj.)  [vitthara +  ika]  i.  wide-spread  Miln  272. 
—  2.  widely  famed,  renowned  Sn  693;  J  iv.262.  See 
also  bahujafifia. 

Vittharita  [pp.  of  vitthareti]  detailed,  told  in  full  Vism  351; 
Mhvs  I,  2  (ati°  with  too  much  detail  ;  opp.  sankhitta). 

Vitthariyati  [Denom.  fr.  vitthara]  to  expand,  to  go  into 
detail  Nett  9. 


Vitthareti  [fr.  vitthara]  i.  to  spread  out  A  111.187.  — 2.  to 
expand,  detail,  give  in  full  Vism  351  ;  SnA  94.  117,  127, 
274  and  passim.  —  pp.  vittharita;  f.pp.  vitharetabba. 

VitthJ^Qa [vi  +  thinna]  "  spread  out,"  wide,  large,  extensive, 
roomy  J  11. 159  (so  read  for  vittinna)  ;  Miln  102,  283, 
311,  382  ;  DhsA  307  ;  SnA  76  ;  VvA  88  ;  Sdhp  391,  617. 
Cp.  pari". 

VidaQSaka  (ad.)  [fr.  vidagseti]  showing  ;  danta°  showing 
one's  teeth  (referring  to  laughter)  A  1.261  ;  J  111.222. 

Vidanseti  [vi  +  dar)seti=  dasseti]  to  make  appear,  to  show 
A  1. 261  ;  Th  2,  74  ;  J  v. 196  ;  Miln  39.     Cp.  pa°. 

Vidaddha  [vi  +  daddha]  in  redupl.-iter.  cpd.  daddha- 
vidaddha-gatta  "  with  limbs  all  on  fire  "  Miln  303. 

*Vidati  see  vindati. 

Vidatthi  (f)  [cp.  Vedic  vitasti ;  see  Geiger,  P.Gr.  38']  a 
span  (of  12  angulas  or  finger-breadths)  Vin  in.  149 
(dighaso  dvadasa  vidatthiyo  sugata-vidatthiya)  ;  iv.2  7g  ; 
J  1.337  ;  III. 318  ;  Miln  85  ;  Vism  65,  124,  171,  175,  408  ; 
DhA  III. 1 72  ;  1V.220 ;  VbhA  343  (dvadas'  angulani 
vidatthi  ;  dve  vidatthiyo  ratanai),  etc.). 

Vidahati  [vi-(-dahati  ;  dha]  to  arrange,  appoint,  assign  ;  to 
provide  ;  to  practise.  ■ —  Pres.  vidahati  :  see  sag"  ; 
vidadhati  J  vi.537;  vidheti  J  v. 107.  Pot.  vidahe  Sn 
927  (=  vidaheyya  Nd*  382);  aor.  vidahi  J  v. 347. — 
Perf.  y*  pi.  vidadhu  [Sk.  vidadhuh]  J  vi.284. — 
inf.  vidhatui]  Vin  1.303  (bhesajjaij)  ;  ger.  vidhaya 
Mhvs  26,  12  (arakkhar),  posting  a  guard). — grd. 
vidheyya   in  meaning  "  obedient,"  tractable  J  vi.291. 

—  pp.  vihita. 

Vidarapa  (nt.)  [fr.  vidareti]  spUtting,  rending  Dhtp  247 
(in  expl°  of  dar),  381  (do  of  bhid). 

Vidarita  [pp.  of  vidareti]  split,  rent  Sdhp  381. 

Vidareti  [vi  +  dareti  :  see  under  dari]  to  split,  rend  J  1.340. 

—  pp.  vidarita. 

Vidalana  (nt.)  [fr.  vidaleti]  breaking  open,  bursting, 
splitting  Miln  i. 

Vidalita  [pp.  of  vidaleti]  split,  broken,  burst  J  1.493  : 
PvA  220. 

Vidaleti  [vi-l-daleti  ;  see  dalati]  to  break  open,  split,  burst 
Th  I,  184  ;  PvA  135,  185.  —  pp.  vidaUta. 

Vidita  [pp.  of  vindati]  known,  found  (out)  D  in. 100; 
S  V.180  ;  Sn  436,  1052  ;  Mhvs  17,  4  ;  DA  1.135  (a°). 

Viditatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  vidita]  the  fact  of  having  found  or 
known,  experience  J  11.53. 

Vidisa  (f  )  [vi  +  disa]  an  intermediate  point  of  tfie  compass 
S  1.224  ;  111.239;  Sn  1122  ;  J  1.20,  loi  ;  vi.6,  531. 

Vidagga  (adj.-n.)  [vi-|-dugga]  hard  to  walk;  troublesome, 
difficult,  painful.  —  (m.)  difficult  passage  ;  difficulty, 
distress  D  111.27  ;  A  ill. 128  ;  J  111.269  ;  iv.271. 

Vidora  (adj.)  [fr.  vid,  cp.  Sk.  vidura]  wise,  clever  J  v. 399 
(=  pandita  C).     Cp.  vidhura  2. 

Vidfi  (adj.)  [Vedic  vidu]  clever,  wise,  knowing,  skilled  in 
(-°)  S  1.62  (loka°)  ;  v. 197;  Vin  11.241  (pi.  paracitta- 
viduno)  ;  Sn  677  (viduhi).  996  ;  J  v. 222  (dhamma°)  ; 
Vv  30''  (=sappanna  VvA  127)  ;  Miln  276  ;  Alhvs  15,  51 
(than'  athana"  knowing  right  &  wrong  sites).  —  In  Pass, 
sense  in  dubbidO  hard  to  know  J  v.446.  —  For  vidO 
(vidu)  "  they  knew  "  see  vindati. 

Vidupita  at  Ud  71  (vitakka  vidupita)  is  to  be  read  as  vi- 
dhiipita. 


Vidura 


80 


Vidhana 


Vidura  (adj.)  [vi  +  dura]  far,  remote,  distant  A  11.50  (su°). 
Mostly  neg.  a°  not  far,  i.  e.  near  Sn  147;  PvA  14,  31. 
78,  81. 

Vidosita  (adj.)  [vi  +  dusita]  corrupted,  depraved  PvA  178 

(°citta). 

Videsa  [vi  +  desa;  cp.  disa  at  Vin  1.50]  foreign  country 
Miln  326;  VvA  338. 

Vidomanassa  (f.)  [vi  +  domanassa]  absence  of  dejection 
Vism  504=  VbhA  105. 

Viddasn  (adj.)  [another  form  of  vidva  =  Sk.  vidvan  :  see 
under  vindati]  skilled,  wise  M  1.65  (gen.  sg.  &  nom.  pi. 
viddasuno),  310  (id.).  Usually  in  neg.  form  aviddasu 
foolish  Vin  11.296  =  A  n.56  (pi.  aviddasu)  ;  S  v.i  ;  Th  2, 
164  (pi.  aviddasu)  ;  Sn  762  (=  bala  C.)  ;  Dh  268=  Nd^ 
514  (=aviiiilii  DhA  111.395)  ;  PvA  18. 

Viddesa  [fr.  vi  +  disa]  enmity,  hatred  J  111.353  ;  ThA  268. 

Viddesana  (f.)  [abstr.  formation  fr.  viddesa,  cp.  disata''] 
enmity  Th  2,  446  ;  J  111.353. 

Viddesin  (adj.-n.)  [vi  +  desin  ;  see  dessin]  hating  ;  an  enemy 

Th  I,  547. 

Viddessati  [vi  +  dessati]  to  hate  Th  2,  418.  —  grd.  vidde- 
saniya  to  be  hated,  hateful  Sdhp  82. 

Viddba^  [pp.  of  vijjhati]  pierced,  perforated  ;  hit,  struck, 
hurt  Sn  331  ;  Nd'  414  (sallena)  ;  Miln  251  (eaten  through 
by  worms)  ;  Sdhp  201  (kantakena). 

Viddha'  (adj.)  [cp.  *Sk.  vidhra  clear  sky]  clear;  onl^  in 
phrase  viddha  vigata-valahaka  deva  a  clear  sky  without 
a  cloud  Vin  1.3  ;  M  1.317=  S  1.65=  111.156=  v.44=  It  20. 

ViddhaQSa  [fr.  vidhagsati]  demolition,  destruction  J  iv.58 
(°karin). 

Viddhagsati  [vi  +  dharjsati]  to  fall  down,  to  be  shattered, 
to  be  ruined  Miln  237;  PvA  125  (Pot.  °eyya). — Caus. 
viddhaijseti  to  shatter,  to  destroy  S  ni.190  (bof-.  trs.  & 
intrs.,  the  latter  for  °ati)  ;  J  11.298;  ni.431  ;  v. 100; 
DA  1,265  ;  Nd"^  5  (vikirati  vidhameti  viddharjseti  :  see 
also  under  vikirati).  —  pp.  viddhasta  &  viddhaQsita. — 
Pass,  viddhagsiyati  to  drop  or  to  be  destroyed,  to  come 
to  ruin  DA  1.18=  DhsA  19  (suttena  sangahitani  pup- 
phani  na  vikiriyanti  na  v.). 

Viddhagsana  (adj.-nt.)  [fr.  viddhagseti  ;  cp.  BSk.  vidhvai)- 
sana  Divy  180]  shattering,  destruction  (trs.  &  intrs.), 
undoing,  making  disappear;  adj.  destroying  S  iv.83  ; 
Miln  351  (kosajja°)  ;  J  1.322  ;  v. 267  (adj.)  ;  Vism  85 
(vikkhepa+);  VvA  58,  161  (adj.).  —  Often  in  phrase 
(denoting  complete  destruction)  :  anicc-ucchadana-pari- 
maddana-bhedana-viddhar|sana-dhamma,  e.  g.  D  1.76  ; 
M  1.500;  A  IV. 386;  J  1. 146  [cp.  Divy  180:  Satana- 
patana-vikirana-vidhvagsana-dharmata  ;  see  also  under 
vikirana]. 

ViddhaQsaka  (adj.)  [fr.  viddhai]sana]  destroying  DhsA  165. 

Viddhatjsanata  (f)  [abstr.  formation  fr.  viddhagsana] 
quality  of  destruction,  abiUty  to  destroy  Vism  8. 

Viddbaosita  [pp.  of  viddhagseti]  shattered,  destroyed 
DhA  III. 129. 

Viddhasta  [pp.  of  viddhagsati]  fallen  to  pieces,  broken, 
destroyed  M  1.227  ;  A  11.50  ;  Sn  542  ;  J  1,203  ;  v.69,  401  ; 
Vv  63'*  (=  vinattha  VvA  265). 

Viddha  poet.  ger.  of  vijjhati  J  vi.77. 

Vidva  see  under  vindati. 

Vidha'  (adj.  (-")  [=  vidha]  of  a  kind,  consisting  of,  -fold, 
e.  g.  aneka^  manifold  DA  1.103  ;  tatha°  of  such-kind. 


such-hke  Sn  772  ;  ti°  threefold  D  1.136  ;  Sn  509  ;  nana° 
various  PvA  53,  96,  113  ;  bahu°  manifold  ThA  197  ;  etc. 

Vidha^  [=  vidha'  as  noun]  form,  kind  Th  i,  428  (mana"). 
—  There  are  several  other  meanings  of  vidha,  which  are, 
however,  uncertain  &  rest  on  doubtful  readings.  Thus 
it  occurs  at  Vin  11. 136  in  meaning  of  "  buckle  "  (v.  1. 
pltha  ;  C.  silent)  ;  at  Vin  iv.168  in  meaning  "  little  box  " 
(?)  ;  at  DA  1.269  as  "  carrying  pole  "  (=  kaca-,  but  text 
D  i.ioi  has  "  vividha  "). 

Vidhamaka  (adj.)  [fr.  vidhamati]  one  who  throws  away 
or  does  away  with  ;  destroying,  clearing  away  Miln  344 
(kilesa-mala-duggandha°) . 

Vidhamati  &  °eti  [vi  -1-  dhma  in  particular  meaning  of 
blowing  i.  e.  driving  asunder,  cp.  dhamati]  (trs.)  to 
destroy,  ruin  ;  do  away  with,  scatter.  —  (intrs.)  to  drop 
off,  fall  away,  to  be  scattered,  to  roll  or  whirl  about.  — 
Both  vidhamati  &  °eti  are  used  indiscriminately, 
although  the  Caus.  "eti  occurs  mostly  in  meaning  of 
"  destroy."  (i)  vidhamati  :  S  in. 190  ;  J  1.284  (in  play 
of  words  with  dhamati  to  blow  ;  aor.  vidhami=  viddhai)- 
sesi  C.)  ;  vi.490  (vidhamaij  te  ratthai),  is  ruined)  ; 
Miln  91,  226  (Marasenag),  237,  337  (intrs.,  with  vikirati 
&  viddhaijsati).  —  (2)  vidhameti:  Nd'  5;  J  111.261 
(poet,  vidhamemasi  [write  °se  !]=  vidhamema,  nasema 
C.)  ;  V.309  ;  Miln  39  ;  PvA  168.  —  pp.  vidhamita. 

Vidhamana  (nt.)  [fr.  vidhamati]  destroying,  scattering, 
dispersing  Miln  244  (Maccu-sena°). 

Vidhamita  [pp.  of  vidhamati]  destroyed  Nd'  576'». 

Vidhava  (f.)  [Vedic  vidhava  widow,  vidhu  lonely,  vidhura 
separated,  Av.  vidava  =  Goth,  widuwo  =  Ohg.  wituwa 
(Ger.  Witwe  =  E.  widow)  ;  Gr.  i)i9fo(,-  unmarried  ;  Lat. 
vidua  widow,  etc., in  all  Idg.  languages]  awidowSl.170  ; 
A  111.128  ;  J  VI. 33  ;  Miln  288  ;  Vism  17  ;  PvA  65,  161  ; 
VbhA  339. 

Vidha  (f .)  [cp.  Sk.  vidha]  i .  mode,  manner,  sort,  kind  ; 
proportion,  form,  variety  D  111.103  (adesana°)  ;Th2,  395 
(cakkhu°  "  shape  of  an  eye  "  trsl°)  ;  VbhA  496  (in  expl" 
of  katharj-vidha  :  "  ak5ra-santhanar|  vidha  nama  ")  ; 
DA  1.222  (iddhi°),  294  (in  expl"  of  tividha-yaiiiia : 
"  ettha  vidha  vuccati  thapana "  i.  e.  performance, 
arrangement) ,  2  99  (similarly  tisso  vidha=  tini  thapanani  ; 
of  yaniia).  —  Used  as  (abl.)  adv.  vidha  in  meaning 
"variously"  at  Pv  11.9^^  (C.  expl"=  vidhatabba,  not 
quite  correctly  ;  PvA  135).  Perhaps  the  phrase  vidha- 
samatikkanta  is  to  be  explained  in  this  way,  viz. 
"  excelUng  in  a  variety  of  ways,  higher  than  a  variety 
(of  things)"  or  perhaps  better  :  "  going  beyond  all  dis- 
tinctions "  (i.  e.  of  personality)  ;  free  from  prejudice 
[i.  e.  No.  2]  S  11.253;  III. 80,  136,  170;  A  IV. 53. — 
2 .  (ethically)  in  special  sense  :  a  distinctive  feature  (of 
a  person  as  diff.  from  others),  a  "  mode"  of  pride  or 
delusion,  a  "  form  "  of  conceit.  As  such  specified  as 
three  kinds  of  conceit  (tisso  vidha),  viz.  "  seyyo  'ham 
asmi,"  "  sadiso  'ham  asmi,"  &  "  hino  'ham  asmi  " 
(i.  e.  I  am  better  than  somebody  else,  equal  to,  &  worse 
than  somebody  else).  See  e.  g.  D  111.216  ;  S  1.12  ;  111.48, 
80,  127  ;  v.56,  98  ;  Nd*  195  ;  Vbh  367  ;  Sn  842  ;  VbhA 496 
(mano  va  vidha  nama).  — The  adj.  form  is  vidha  :  see 
Sep. 

Vidhatar  [n.  ag.  of  vidahati]  provider,  disposer  J  v,22i 
(dhata  vidhata,  as  of  Vi^vakarman :  cp.  Macdonell, 
Vedic  Mythology  p.  118). 

Vidhana  (nt.)  [fr.  vi-f  dha;  Vedic  vidhana]  i.  arrange- 
ment, get  up,  performance,  process  J  in. 178  (attano 
vidhanena  "  in  his  robes  of  office  ")  ;  Vism  66  sq.  ;  DhsA 
168=  Vism  122  (bhavana")  ;  VbhA  69,  71  (manasikara")  ; 
ThA  273  (id.).  —  2.  ceremony,  rite  J  vi.202  (yafina°)  ; 
Miln  3.  —  3.  assignment,  disposition,  provision  J  11.208 


Vidhanavant 


8i 


Vinassat' 


{vidhi-vidh4na-6flu  ;  C.  expl""  v.  as  "  kottnaso  va  sag- 
vidahanai)  va  ")  ;  PvA  30.  — 4.  succession  (as  much  as 
"supplement")  KhA  216;  SnA  23  (note  2).  —  Cp. 
sai)vidahana  &  sai)vidhana. 

ySdhanavant  (adj.)  [vidhana  +  vant]  making  dispositions, 
careful  in  providing,  circumspect,  considerable  J  vi.287. 

Vidhiyaka  [fr.  vi  +  dh&]  providing  PvA  60. 

Vidhivati  [vi  +  dhavati]  to  run  about,  roam,  cover 
space  (ace),  stray  S  1.37;  Sn  411,  939;  Nd'  414; 
DA  1.39. 

Vidhi  (f ■)  [fr.  vi  +  dhS,  cp.  Ved.  vidhi]  i .  form,  way  ;  rule, 
direction,  disposition,  method,  motto  Vism  278  (mana- 
sikara°,  eightfold);  PvA  78  (dana°=  dana),  126;  VvA 
82.  —  instr.  Tidhina  in  due  form  Mhvs  14,  52  ;  PvA  1 30  ; 
Sdhp  336.  — -2.  luck,  destiny  J  11.243  (°rahita  unlucky). 

Vidhatika  [etym.  ?]  a  wreath  Vin  11. 10  ;  111.180. 

Vidhnn&ti  [vi  +  dhunati]  to  shake  S  1.197;  Miln  399; 
Vism  71.  —  2.  to  remove,  to  skin  (an  animal)  Vin  1.193. 

Vidhnra  (adj .)  [Vedic  vidhura  :  see  vidhava]  i .  destitute, 
lonely ;  miserable,  wretched  J  v. 399  (so  read  for 
vidura  ;  according  to  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.,  but  doubtful).  — 
2.  [vi  +  dhura]  "  burdenless,"  unequalled  Sn  996  (=  vi- 
gata-dhura,  appafima  SnA  583);  A  1.116  (here  in 
meaning  "clever,"  perhaps  =  vidura  ;  spelt  vidhijra). 
Cp.  Np.  Vidhura  KhA  128  ;  SnA  201  (as  Vidhura  at 
J  IV.361). 

Vidhfipana  (adj.-nt.)  [fr.  vidhupeti]  fanning,  a  fan  Vin 
II. 130;  iv.263  ;  A  II. 130;  Nd*  562;  Vv  33*'  (=catu- 
rassa  vijani)  VvA  147  ;  VbhA  71. 

Vidhnpita  [pp.  of  vidhupeti]  scattered,  destroyed  Sn  472 
(=  daddha  SnA  409)  ;  Ud  71  (so  read  for  vidupita). 

Vidhupeti  (°dhupayati)  [vi+dhupayati]  i.  to  fumigate, 
perfume,  diffuse  Miln  252.  —  2.  to  scatter,  destroy 
Vin  1.2  (vidhupayar)  Mara-senag)  ;  S  1.14;  Hi. 90  =  A 
v. 325  ;  S  IV. 2 ID  ;  Ps  11. 167.  —  pp.  vidhupita. 

Vidhnma  (&  vidhuma)  (adj.)  [vi  +  dhuma]  "without 
smoke,"  i.  e.  passionless,  quiet,  emancipated  S  1.141 
[K.S.  :  "  no  fume  of  vice  is  his  ")  ;  Sn  460  (=  kodha- 
dhflma-vigamena  v.  SnA  405),  1048  (cp.  Nd*  576  with 
long  exegesis);  Pv  iv.i"  (=  vigata-miccha-vitakka- 
dhuma  PvA  230). 

Vinattha  [pp.  of  vinassati]  destroyed  VvA  265  ;  PvA  55. 

Vinata  [pp.  of  vi  +  nam]  bent,  bending  PvA  154  (°sakha). 

Vinadati  [vi  +  nadati]  to  cry  or  shout  out,  to  scold  J  in.  147 
(kamar)  vinadantu  let  them  shout  I).  Cp.  BSk.  vina- 
dita  "  reviled  "  Divy  540. 

Vinaddha  [pp.  of  vinandhati]  covered,  bound,  intertwined 
Vin  1. 194  (camma°,  onaddha+);  J  v.416;  vi.589 
(kancanalata°  bheri)  ;  Vism  i  (=jatita  sar)sibbita). 

Vinandhati  [vi  +  nandhati]  to  close,  encircle,  cover  Mhvs 
ig,  48;  Vism  253  (ppr.  vinandhamana  :  so  read  for 
vinaddh").  —  pp.  vinaddha. 

Vinandhana  (nt.)  [fr.  vi+ nandhati]  tying,  binding  Vin 
II. 1 16  (°rajju  rope  for  binding). 

Vinaya  [fr.  vi  +  nl,  cp.  vineti]  i.  driving  out,  aboUshing 
destruction,  removal  Vin  1.3  (asmi-manassa),  235  = 
III. 3  (akusalanai)  dhammanar)  vinayaya  dhammar) 
desemi)  ;  S  1.40  ;  Sn  921  ;  A  1.9 1  (kodha°,  upanaha")  ; 
11.34  (pipasa")  ;  IV. 15  (iccha°)  ;  v. 165  (id);  SnA  12; 
PvA  114  (atthassa  mulai)  nikati°).  Often  in  phrase 
raga°,  dosa°,  moha°,  e.  g.  S  iv.7  sq.  ;  v.  137  sq.,  241  ; 
A  IV.175  ;  Nett  22.  —  2.  rule  (in  logic),  way  of  saying 


or  judging,  sense,  terminology  (cp.  imina  nayena) 
S  IV. 95  (ariyassa  vinaye  vuccati  loko)  ;  A  1.163  (ariyassa 
vinaye  tevijjo  one  called  a  threefold  wise  in  the  nomen- 
clature of  the  Buddhist)  ;  11. 166  (ariyassa  v.)  ;  SnA  403. 
—  3.  norm  of  conduct,  ethics,  morality,  good  behaviour 
Sn  916,  974  ;  J  IV. 24 1  (=  acAra- vinaya  C.)  :  A  11. 112; 
III. 353  sq.  (ariya-vinaye  saddha  yassa  patiUhita  etc. 
faith  established  in  Buddhist  ethics). — 4.  code  of 
ethics,  monastic  discipline,  rule,  rules  of  morality  or  of 
canon  law.  In  this  sense  applied  to  the  large  collec- 
tion of  rules  which  grew  up  in  the  monastic  life  and 
habits  of  the  bhikkhus  and  which  form  the  ecclesiastical 
introduction  to  the  "  Dhamma,"  the  "  doctrine,"  or 
theoretical,  philosophical  part  of  the  Buddhist  Canon. 
The  history  &  importance  of  the  Vinaya  Pitaka  will  be 
dealt  with  under  the  titie  "  Vinaya  "  in  the  Dictionary 
of  Names.  Only  a  few  refs.  must  suffice  here  to  give 
a  general  idea.  See  also  under  Dhamma  C,  and  in 
detail  Geiger,  Dhamma  pp.  55-58.  —  Often  comb""  with 
dhamma :  dhammato  vinayato  ca  on  the  ground  of 
Dh.  and  V.  Vin  1.337  '.  cp.  11-247.  —  dhammo  ca  vinayo 
ca  Vin  1356;  11.285,  302  ;  or  (as  (Dvandva)  dhanuna- 
vinaya  (i.  e.  the  teaching  of  the  Buddha  in  its  com- 
pleteness) D  1.229  ;  Vin  11.237  sq.  ;  M  1.284  ;  11. 181  sq.  ; 
A  1.283;  III  297,  327;  S  1.9;  111.65;  Ud  53;  VvA  3. 
Often  approaches  the  meaning  of  "  Buddhist  order," 
e.  g.  Vin  1.69:  D  1.176;  M  1.68,  459,  480;  in. 127; 
S  II. 120  ;  A  1. 185  ;  II. 123  ;  v. 122.  —  See  further  Vin  n.96 
(vinaye  dieko  hoti)  ;  A  11. 168  (ayar)  dhammo,  ayar)  v., 
idar)  Satthu-sasanar))  ;  Vism  522  ;  VbhA  273  ;  KhA  106, 
151  ;  SnA  4.  195,  310.  — a-vinaya  one  who  sins  against 
the  V.  (like  a-dhamma  one  who  neglects  the  Dh.) 
Vin  11.295  sq.  ;  111.174  ;  A  I.i8  ;  v. 73  sq.  — The  division 
of  the  books  of  the  Vinaya  is  given  at  DhsA  18.  Its 
character  (as  shown  by  its  name)  is  given  in  the  foil, 
verse  at  DhsA  19  :  "  (vividha-visesa-)  nayatta  vina- 
yanato  c'-eva  kaya-vacanar)  vinayy'  attha-viduhi  ayag 
vinayo  Vinayo  ti  akkhato,"  i.  e.  "  Because  it  shows 
precepts  &  principles,  and  governs  both  deed  and 
word,  therefore  men  call  this  scripture  V.,  for  so  is  V. 
interpreted  "  {Expos,  i.  23). 

-atthakatha  the  (old)  commentary  on  the  Vinaya 
Vism  72,  272  ;  VbhA  334  ;  KhA  97.  -clnuggaha  taking 
up  (i.  e.  following  the  rules)  of  the  Vinaya  Vin  iii.2i  ; 
A  1.98,  100  ;  v. 70.  -katha  exposition  of  the  Vinaya 
Vin  IV.  142.  -dhara  one  who  knows  or  masters  the  V. 
by  heart,  an  expert  in  the  V.  Vin  1.169  ;  11.299  (with 
dhamma-dhara  &  matika-dhara)  ;  A  1.25;  11. 147; 
III. 78  sq.,  179,  361;  IV. 140  sq.  ;  v.io  sq.,;  J  111.486  ; 
IV.219  ;  Vism  41,  72  ;  KhA  151  ;DhAii.30  (with  dhamma 
-kathika  &  dhuta-vada)  [cp.  BSk.  vinayadhara  Divy 
21].  -pitaka  the  V.  Pitaka  KhAi  2,  97;  VbhA  431. 
-vatthu  chapter  of  the  V.  Vin  11.307.  -vadin  one  who 
professes  the  V.  (or  "  speaking  in  accordance  with  the 
rules  of  conduct  "),  a  V.-foUower  D  1.4  (here  expl""  by 
Bdhgh  as  "  sag  vara- vinaya-pahana- vinaya  sannissitai) 
katva  vadati  ti  "  v.  DA  1.76,  thus  taking  it  as  vinaya  3) 
=  M  111.49  =  Pug  58  (tisl°  here:  "speaking  according 
to  self-control  ")  ;  D  in. 135,  175. 

Vinayati  see  Tineti. 

Vinayana  (nt.)  [fr.  vi  +  nl]  i.  removing,  removal  Miln  318 
(pipasa°)  ;  PvA  39  (soka").  —  2.  instruction,  disciphne, 
setting  an  example  J  v.457  (conversion)  ;  Miln  220. 

VinalOcata  (adj .)  [vi  +  nala  -|-  kata,  with  nali  for  na|a  in 
comb"  with  kr]  lit.  "  having  the  reed  or  stem  removed," 
rendered  useless,  destroyed  M  1.227  ;  A  n.39  ;  Sn  542 
(=ucchinna  SnA 435)  ;Th  i,  216;  J  vi.60  (viddhasta+, 
as  at  Sn  542). 

Vinassati  [vi  -t-  nassati]  to  be  lost ;  to  perish,  to  be  destroyed 
S  IV. 309  ;  M  II. 108  (imper.  vinassa  "  away  with  you  ")  ; 
J  III. 351  ;  V.468  ;  Pv  111.4';  Vism  427.  —  pp.  vinattha. 
Cans,  vinaseti. 

VII-6 


Vin§ 


82 


Vinibbhutta 


Vina  (indecl.)  [Vedic  vin5  =  vi-n5  (i.  e.  "  not  so  "),  of  pron. 
base  Idg.  *no  {cp.  nana  "  so  &  so  "),  as  in  Sk.  ca-na, 
Lat.  ego-ne,  p6-ne  behind,  etc.  See  na^]  without,  used 
as  prep,  (or  post-position)  with  (usually)  instr.,  e.  g.  Vin 
II. 1 32  (vina  datKjena  without  a  support);  PvA  152 
(purisehi  vina  without  men)  ;  or  abl.,  e.  g.  Sn  589  (flati 
sangha  vina  hoti  is  separated  from  his  relatives ;  cp. 
BSk.  vinabhavati  MVastu  1.243)  ;  or  ace,  e.  g.  Mhvs 
3,  10  (na  sakka  hi  tag  vina).  In  comp"  vina-bhava 
separation  [cp.  BSk.  vinabhava  MVastu  n.141]  Sn  588, 
805  ;  Nd'  122  ;  J  111.95  ;  iv.155  ;  v.180  ;  vi.482  (=  viyo- 
gaC). 

Vinati  [vi,  by-form  of  va  to  weave :  see  vayati*]  to  weave 
J  11. 302  ;  DhA  1.428  (tantag)  ;  inf.  vetug  Vin  11. 150.  — 
Pass,  viyyati.  Cp.  upaviyati.  —  Caus.  II.  vinapeti  to 
order  to  be  woven  Vin  111.259  (=  vayapeti). 

Vinama  (m.)  &  Vinamana  (nt.)  [fr.  vinameti]  bending 
Miln  352  (°na)  ;  VbhA  272  (kaya- vinamana,  bending  the 
body  for  the  purpose  of  getting  up ;  in  expl"  of  vijam- 
bhika)  ;  Dhtp  208. 

Vinameti  [vi  +  nameti ;  Caus.  of  namati]  to  bend,  twist 
Miln  107,  118. 

Vinayaka  [fr.  vi  -t-  nl]  i .  a  leader,  guide,  instructor  M  11.94  ; 
Vv  16'  (=  veneyya-satte  vineti  VvA  83)  ;  ThA  69. — 
2.  a  judge  J  III. 336. 

Vinasa  [vi-(-nasa,  of  nai]  destruction,  ruin,  loss  D  1.34 
(-t-uccheda  &  vibhava),  55  ;  Pv  11. 7"  ;  Vism  427  (so  read 
for  vinasa)  ;  DA  1.120  ;  PvA  102  (dhana°),  133. 

Vinasaka  (°ika)  (adj.)  [fr.  vinasa]  causing  ruin ;  only  neg. 
a°  not  causing  destruction  A  111.38  ;  iv.266,  270  ;  J  v.iie. 

Viuasana  (adj.)  [fr.  vinasa],  only  neg.  a°  imperishable 
Dpvs  IV.  1 6. 

Vinaseti  [Caus.  of  vinassati]  i.  to  cause  destruction,  to 
destroy,  ruin,  spoil  Th  i,  1027;  Sn  106;  Pv  11. 7'; 
DA1.211  ;  PvA  3  (dhanag),  116;  Sdhp  59,  314,  546.— 
2.  to  drive  out  of  the  country,  to  expel,  banish  J  iv.200. 

Vinigalati  [vi -i- nigalati]  to  drop  down  Miln  349. 

Viniggata  [vi  +  niggata]  coming  (out)  from  J  vi.78  ;  DA 
1. 140  ;  DhA  iv.46  ;  Sdhp  23. 

Viniggaha  [vi -f.  niggaha]  checking,  restraint  Ps  1.16 ;  11.119. 

Viniggilati  [vi-f-niggilati]  to  throw  out,  to  emit  KhA  95. 

Vinigh&tin  (adj.)  [fr.  vi  +  nighata]  afraid  of  defeat,  anxious 
about  the  outcome  (of  a  disputation),  in  phrase  vini- 
ghati-hoti  (for  °i-hoti)  Sn  826,  cp.  Nd'  164. 

Vinicchara  [vi  +  nicchaya  ;  cp.  Vedic  vini^caya]  i.  dis- 
crimination, distinction,  thought,  (firm)  opinion  • 
thorough  knowledge  of  (-")  A  in. 354  (papakamma")  ; 
Sn  327  (dhamma°),  838  (=dvasatthi  difthi-vinicchaya 
Nd>  186),  867  (°g  kurute  ;  cp.  Ndi26s)  ;J  111.205  (attha°)  ; 
PvA  I,  112,  2:0  (kuta°),  287.-2.  decision;  (as  t.  t.  in 
law:)  investigation,  trial,  judgment  (given  by  the  king 
or  his  ministers)  D  11.58  (with  ref.  to  labha,  expl''  as 
deciding  what  to  do  with  one's  gains)  =  111.289  =  A 
IV .400  =  Vbh  390  (expl"  at  VbhA  512,  where  vinicchaya 
IS  said  to  he  fourfold,  viz.  ftaija",  Uijha°,  ditthi°,  vitak- 
ka°)  ;  J  11.2.  — 3.  courthouse,  hall  of  judgment  J  1. 176  ; 
m.105  ;  IV.122,  370;  VI. 333;  Miln  332  (vinaya",  i.  e. 
having  the  Vinaya  as  the  law  court  in  the  City  of 
Righteousness).— 4.  (as  t.  t.  in  logic  &  psychology) 
(process  of)  judgment,  detailed  analysis,  deliberation, 
consideration,  ascertainment  J  v. 60  (°g  vicareti)  '; 
VbhA  46  sq.  (according  to  attha,  lakkhana,  etc.)  8^  so' 
(id.);  KhA  23,  75.  A     J    q- 

-katha  analytical  discussion,  exegesis,  interpretation 
Vism  16 ;  VbhA  291  (opp.  paU-vamjana).     -ftliu  clever 


in  deciding  or  giving  judgment  J  in.205  ;  v. 367  (a°). 
-t^ana  place  of  judgment,  law  court  J  v. 229  ;  DhA 
111.141  ;  IV. 21 5.  -dhamma  law  practice  J.  v. 125;  DhA 
III. 141.  -vithi  process  of  judgment  (in  logic)  :  see 
Cpd.  241.     -sala  the  law  court(s)  J  iv.120  ;  DhA  in. 380. 

Vinicoharati  [vi -i- niccharati]  to  go  out  (in  all  directions) 
J  IV.181. 

Vinioohita  [pp.  of  vinicchinati]  discerned,  decided,  dis- 
tinguished, detailed  Vin  1.65  (su°)  ;  J  v. 65  (a°)  ;  SnA 
477 ;  Sdhp  508. 

Vinicohin  (adj.)  [fr.  vinicchinati]  discerning  Th  i,  551. 

Vinioohinana  (nt.)  [fr.  vinicchinati]  giving  judgment 
J  V.229. 

Vinicchinati  (°inati)  &  vinicchati  [vi  -1-  nicchinati]  to  in- 
vestigate, try ;  to  judge,  determine,  decide  J  v.229  ; 
fut.  yinicchissati  Vin  in. 159  ;  ger.  vinicchinitva  Nd'  76  ; 
aor.  vinicchini  J  11.2  ;  inf.  vinicchitug  J  1.148 ;  DhA 
IV.2 15.  —  pp.  vinicchita. 

Vinijjita  (adj.)  [vi  +  nijjita]  unvanquished  Sdhp  318. 

Vinidhaya  (indecl.)  [vi -f  nidhaya,  ger.  of  vinidahati]  lit. 
"  misplacing,"  i.  e.  asserting  or  representing  wrongly, 
giving  a  false  notion  of  (ace.)  Vin  11.205,  expH  at  Vin 
IV  .2  ;  SnA  204. 

Vinindati  [vi  +  nindati]  to  censure,  blame,  reproach 
J  n.346 ;  vi.200. 

Vinip&ta  [fr.  vi  -1-  nipateti]  ruin,  destruction  ;  a  place  of 
sufiering,  state  of  punishment,  syn.  with  apaya  & 
duggati  (with  which  often  comb"",  plus  niraya,  e.  g. 
Vin  1.227;  D  1.82,  162  ;  M  1.73  ;  A  Hi. 211  ;  It  58  ;  Pug 
60)  :  A  v. 169  ;  Sh  278  ;  J  111.32  ;  Miln  108  ;  Vism  427 
(where  expl""  as  "  vinasa  nipatanti  tattha  dukkata- 
karino,"  together  with  duggati  &  niraya).  The  sota- 
panna  is  called  "  avinipata-dhammo,"  i.  e.  not  liable  to 
be  punished  in  purgatory  :  see  under  sotapanna,  &  cp. 
sym.  term  khina-niraya  A  111.21 1. 

Vinipatika  (adj.)  [fr.  vinipata]  destined  to  suffer  in  purga- 
tory, liable  to  punishment  after  death  D  11.69  I  111-253  ; 
M  1.13,390  ;  A  1.123  ;  11.232  sq. ;  iv.39,  401  ;  J  v.  11 7,  119. 

Vinip&teti  [vi  +  nipateti]  to  bring  to  ruin,  to  destroy,  to 
frustrate  Vin  1.298  ;  J  vi.71  ;  VvA  208. 

Vinibaddha  (adj.)  [vi -)- nibaddha]  bound  (to)  S  1.20  ;  in. 9; 
A  111.311  (chanda-raga°)  ;  iv.289  (id.)  ;  Nd^  30  (  +  lagga 
etc.). 

Vinibandha  [vi  +  nibandha]  bondage  S  11.17;  111.135,  186; 
A  1.66  (H-vinivesa);  Sn  16.  —  The  five  cetaso  vini- 
bandha (bondages  of  the  mind)  are  :  kamesu  rago,  kaye 
rago,  rupe  rago,  yavadatthag  udar'  avadehakag  bhun- 
jitva  seyya-sukhag  anuyogo,  aiinatarag  deva-nikayag 
paijidhaya  brahmacariyag  ;  thus  at  D  111.238  ;  M  1.103  ; 
A  111.249  ;  iv.461,  463  sq.  ;  v.17  ;  Vbh  377. 

Vinibbhnjati  (or  °bhufijati)  [vi-|-ni  +  bhujati]  i.  [to  bhuj, 
to  bend,  as  in  bhuja^  &  nibbhujati]  to  turn  inside  out 
Th  2,  471.  —  2.  [to  bhnj  or  bhofij  as  in  bhufljati*  and 
paribhufijati*]  to  separate,  cut  off,  remove  M  1.233  ; 
Sill. 141  ;  IV.168  (spells  wronglyjj).  ^  3.  [id.]  to  cleanse  ; 
fig.  to  sift  out  thoroughly,  to  distinguish,  discriminate 
Mi.292  ;  Jv.i2i  (avinibbhujag,  ppr.)  ;  Miln  63  (doubled)  ; 
Vism  438  (spelling  wrongly  jj)  ;  DhsA  311.  —  pp. 
vinibbhutta. 

Vinibbhojana  (nt.)  [fr.  vinibbhujati]  turning  inside  out 
ThA  284. 

Vinibbhutta  [pp.  of  vinibbhujati]  separated,  distinguished, 
discriminated  Vism  368. 


Vinibbhoga 


83 


Vindati 


Vinibbhoga'  (adj.)  [vi  +  nibbhoga]  lacking,  deprived  of 
(-°),  deficient  ThA  248  (virSflana"). 

Vinibbhoga'  [fr.  vinibbhujati  3]  sifting  out,  distinction, 
discrimination  Vism  306  (dhatu°),  368  (id.)  ;  neg.  a° 
absence  of  discrimination,  indistinction  DhsA  47 ;  used 
as  adj.  in  sense  of  "  not  to  be  distinguished,"  indistinct 
at  J  111,428  (°sadda). 

Vinibhindati  [vi  +  ni  +  bhid]  to  break  (right)  through 
M  1.233. 

Vinimaya  [fr.  vi  +  niminati]  reciprocity,  barter,  exchange 
J  n.369. 

Vinimileti  [vj  +  nimlleti]  to  shut  one's  eyes  Sdhp  189. 

Vinimntta  (Vinimmutta)  [vi  +  nis  +  mutta]  i.  released,  free 
from  J  1.375  (mm)  ;  Sdhp  i,  4,  :6,  225.  —  2.  discharged 
(of  an  arrow)  DhA  ni.132  (mm). 

Vinimoceti  [vi  +  nis+moceti,  cp.  nimmoka]  to  free  (one- 
self) from,  to  get  rid  of  A  in. 92  ;  Pug  68. 

Viniyojjati  [vi+niyujjati]  to  be  connected  with,  to  ensue, 
accrue  PvA  29  (=  upalappati). 

Viniyoga  [vi  +  niyoga]  possession,  application,  use  DhsA 
151  ;  VvA  157;  PvA  171,  175. 

Vinivatteti  (&  °vatteti)  [vi  +  nivatteti]  i.  to  turn  over,  to 
repeat  J  1.25  (u),  153  (tt),  190  (tt).  —  2.  to  turn  (some- 
body) away  from,  to  distract  Pv  1.8*  (read  °vattayi  for 
°vattanti)  ;  n.6'*  ("vattayi ;  aor.)  ;  J  111.290  (tt).  — 
3.  to  roll  over,  to  glide  off  J  ni.344  (tt)  ;  DhA  11. 51  (tt)- 

Vinivijjha  (adj.)   [grd.  of  vinivijjhati]  to  be  pierced;  in 
dubbinivijjha    difficult   to    pierce,    hard    to   penetrate 
.  Jv.46. 

Vinivijjhati  [vi-n  ni  + vijjhati]  to  pierce  through  &  through 
J  II. 91  ;  Miln  339  ;  DhsA  253. 

Vinivijjhana  (nt.)  [fr.  vinivijjhati]  piercing,  perforating, 
penetrating  DhsA  253;  ThA  197  (in  expl"  of  bahu- 
vidha). 

Vinlviddba  [pp.  of  vinivijjhati]  pierced  (all  through),  per- 
forated J  V.269  ;  VI. 105  ;  Vism  222. 

Vinive^hana  (&  °nibbethana)  (nt.)  [vi -1- nibbethana]  un- 
wrapping, unravelling ;  fig.  explaining,  making  clear, 
explanation,  refutation  Nd*  503  (ditthi-sanghatassa 
vinibbethana ;  where  id.  p.  at  Nd'  343  reads  vinive- 
dhana,  cp,  nibbedha)  ;  Miln  96  ;  VvA  297  (ditthi-ganthi- 
vinivethana) . 

Vinivetheti  [vi -(- nibbetheti]  i.  to  disentangle,  to  unwrap 
Vin  1.3,  276  (anta-ganthii),  the  intestines)  ;  J  11.283 
(sarirar))  ;  v.47.  —  2.  to  disentangle  oneself,  to  free 
oneself  (from)  A  in. 92  ;  Pug  68. 

Vinivesa  [vi  +  nivesa]  tie,  bond,  attachment  A  1.66  {+  vini- 

bandha) . 

Vinlta  [pp.  of  vineti]  led,  trained,  educated  S  v.261  ; 
A  1V.310  (viyatta  +  );  DhA  11.66  (°vatthu)  ;  PvA  38. 
—  avinita  not  trained  S  iv.287  ;  VV29'  ;  Dhs  1003,  1217  ; 
suvinlta  well  trained  S  iv.287 ;  opp.  dubbinita  badly 
trained  J  v.284,  287.    — ratha-vinita  (nt.)  a  relay  M  1.149. 

Vinflaka  (adj.)  [vi -(- nilaka]  of  a  bluish-black  (purple) 
colour,  discoloured  J  11.39  (of  a  cygnet,  beistard  of  a 
swan  &  a  crow,  "  resembling  neither  father  nor  mother," 
i.  e.  "  black  &  white  ").  Usually  applied  to  the  colour 
of  a  corpse  (purple,  discoloured),  the  contemplation  of 
which  forms  one  of  the  10  asubha-saftfias  ;  M  1.88 
(uddhumataka-f )  ;  Sn  200  (id.).  —  A.  1.42;  11. 17;  S 
V.129  sq. ;  Dhs  264  ;  Nett  27  ;  Miln  332  ;  Vism  no,  178, 
'93- 


VinlvaraQa  (adj.)  [vi -)- nlvaraija]  unobstructed,  unbiassed, 
unprejudiced  A  11. 71  ;  Sdhp  458.  Usually  in  phrase 
°citta  of  an  unbiassed  mind,  combi"  with  mudu-citta  & 
udagga-citta  :  Vin  i.i6,  181  ;  D  i.iio,  148;  A  iv.186. — 
Same  in  BSk.,  e.g.  MVastu  111.225  ;  Divy  616  sq. 

Vinadati  is  only  found  in  Cans,  form  vinodeti. 

Vinetai  [n.  ag.  fr.  vineti]  teacher,  instructor,  guide  Sn  484  ; 
Ps  II. 194  (netar.  vinetar,  anunetar)  ;  J  iv.320. 

Vineti  [vi-i-neti ;  cp.  vinaya]  i.  to  remove,  put  away,  give 
up.  —  ppr.  vinayaQ  J  vi.499 ;  Pot.  3"*  sg.  vinayetha 
Sn  361,  &  vineyya  Sn  590  ;  imper.  vinaya  Sn  1098,  & 
vinayassu  Sn  559.  —  ger.  vineyya  Sn  58  (but  taken  as 
Pot.  at  Nd'  577"*)  ;  Pv  11. 3**  (macchera-malag)  ;  vinetva 
J  V.403  (chandar))  ;  vinajritva  VvA  156,  &  vinayitvana 
Sn  485  (bhakutig).  —  2.  to  lead,  guide,  instruct,  train, 
educate  A  in. 106  (inf.  vinetui])  ;  S  iv.105  (Pot.  vineyyai) 
&  fut.  vinessati)  ;  aor.  vinesi  Miln  1 3  (Abhidhamme)  ; 
ger.  vinayitvana  ThA  69  (Ap.  v.  10)  ;  grd.  vinetabba 
SnA  464,  &  vineyya  Miln  12  ;  cp.  veneyya.  —  pp. 
vinita. 

Vinodaka  (adj.)  [fr.  vinodeti,  cp.  nudaka  &  nudaka] 
driving  out,  dispelling,  alla}ang  PvA  114  (parissama"). 

Vinodana  (adj.-nt.)  [fr.  vinodeti]  dispelling,  removal 
A  III. 387,  390;  Sn  1086  (chanda-raga°,  =pahana  etc. 
Nd2  578)  ;  Miln  285  ;  DA  1.140  (nidda°)  ;  DhA  1.41 
(tama°,  adj.) ;  PvA  38  (soka°). 

Vinodeti  [Caus.  of  vi-i-nudati]  to  drive  out,  dispel,  remove, 
put  away  S  iv.70,  76,  190  ;  A  11.13,  117;  Sn  273,  956, 
(tamar))  ;  967  ;  Nd'  454,  489  ;  J  1.183  ;  11.63,  283  (sine- 
hag)  ;  Vv  84^*;  Miln  259  (imper.  vinodehi,  -|-apanehi, 
niccharehi)  ;  Mhvs  5,  245  (vimatii))  ;  31,  10  (kankhai))  ; 
DhA  IV. 145  ;  PvA  38  (sokag). 

Vindati  [vid,  both  in  meaning  "  to  know  "  &  "  to  find  "  ; 
cp.  Gr.  fiiov  I  saw,  o}6a  1^  know=  Sk.  veda  "  Veda," 
fi^uiXov  "  idol  "  ;  Vedic  vindati  to  find,  vetti  to  know, 
vidya.  knowledge  ;  Goth,  witan  to  observe  &  know  = 
Ger.  wissen  ;  Goth,  weis  =  E.  \vise,  etc.,  for  which  see 
Walde,  Lat.  IVtb.  s.  v.  video]  the  Vedic  differentia- 
tions vetti  "  to  know  "  and  vindati  "  to  find  "  are  both 
in  Pali,  but  only  in  sporadic  forms,  some  of  which  are 
archaic  and  therefore  only  found  in  poetry.  Of  vid 
are  more  frequent  the  Pass,  vijjati  and  derivations  fr. 
the  Caus.  ved°.  The  root  vind  occurs  only  in  the 
present  tense  and  its  derivations.  —  A.  vid  to  know,  to 
ascertain  :  The  old  Vedic  pres.  vetti  only  at  Th  i,  497 
(spelt  veti).  Another  old  aor.  is  vedi  [Sk.  avedit]  Dh. 
419,  423  ;  J  111.420  (=annasi)  ;  iv.35  (here  perhaps  as 
aor.  to  Caus.  vedeti :  to  cause  to  know  or  feel).  Rem- 
nants of  the  old  perfect  tense  3'"'  pi.  [Sk.  viduh]  are 
vidu  &  vidui]  (appears  as  vidu  in  verse),  e.  g.  at  Th  1, 
497;  Sn  758;  Pv  II. 7*  (=jananti  PvA  102);  J  v. 62 
(=  vijananti  C.)  ;  Mhvs  23,  78.  The  old  participle  of  the 
same  tense  is  vidva  [=  Sk.  vidvan  ;  cp.  Geiger  P.Gr. 
100^]  in  meaning  "  wise  "  Sn  792,  897,  1056,  1060 ; 
expl*  as  vijjagato  napi  vibhavi  medhavi  at  Nd'  93,  308  ; 
Nd'  575.  Opp.  avidva  Sn  535;  M  1.311.  —  Younger 
forms  are  a  reconstructed  (grammatical)  pres,  vidati 
DA  1.139;  ger.  viditva  S  v.193  ;  Sn  353,  365,  581.  1053, 
1068  and  pp.  vidita  (q.  v.).  —  Pass,  vijjati  to  be  found, 
to  be  known,  to  exist ;  very  frequent,  e.  g.  Sn  20  (pi. 
vijjare),  zi,  431,  611,  856,  looi,  1026;  Th  i,  132; 
D  1.18  ;  Pv  1.5*  ;  II. 3"  (spelt  vijjite  I)  11.9'*  (=  atthi  C.)  ; 
3'^  sg.  pret.  vijjittha  Sn  1098  (ma  v.=  saijvijjittha 
Nd*  568).  ppr.  vijjamana  existing  J  1.214;  in. 127; 
PvA  25,  87.  loj;  Miln  216  (gen.  pi.  vijjarainatai)). — 
Caus.  vedeti  ;  Pass.  Caus.  vediyati  ;  grd.  vedaniya:  see 
separately,  with  other  derivations.  —  B.  vind  to  find, 
possess,  enjoy  (cp.  vitta',  vitta*,  vitti)  Sn  187  (vindate 
dhanai)),  658  ;  Th  i,  551  ;  2,  79  (aor.  vindi)  ;  J  vi.508 
(vindate,  med.=  look  for,  try  to  find  for  oneself)  ;  Mhvs 


Vindussara 


84 


Viparivattana 


I,  13  (ppr.  vindar))  ;  DhA  in. 128  (ppr.  vindanto),  410. 
PvA  60,  77. — inf.  vinditur)  Miln  122;  J  18;  grd ; 
vindiya  Vism  526  (as  avindiya  in  expl"  of  avijja).  — 
Cp.  nibbindati.  —  pp.  vitta'  (for  which  adhigata  in  lit. 
meaning). 

Vindussara  is  v.  1.  of  bindu°  (q.  v.). 

Vipakka  (adj.)  [vi  +  pakka]  fully  ripe  J  1.136. 

Vipakkha  (adj.)  [vi  +  pakkha^  2]  opposite,  hostile  ;  enemy  ; 
only  in  foil.  cpds.  : 

-sevaka  siding  in  or  consorting  with  the  enemy, 
keeping  bad  company,  a  traitor  J  1.186;  111.321  ;  DhA 
IV. 95.     -sevin  id.  J  1.487;  11.98. 

Vipakkhika  (adj.)  [vipakkha +  ika]  i.  [vi  +  pakkha^  1] 
without  wings  J  1.429.  —  2.  [vi  +  pakkha'  2]  opposite, 
hostile  Sdhp  71. 

Vipakkhin  (adj.)  [vi  +  pakkhin]  having  no  wings,  without 
wings  J  V.255. 

Tipaccata  (f.)  at  Vin  n.88  is  perhaps  a  der.  fr.  vi  +  vac,  and 
not  pac,  thus  representing  a  Sk.  *vivacyata,  meaning 
"  challenging  in  disputation,"  quarrelsomeness,  provo- 
cation. See  also  vipaceti.  If  fr.  vi  +  pac,  the  mean- 
ing would  be  something  like  "  heatedness,  exasperation." 

Vipaccati  [vi -(- paccati]  i.  to  be  cooked,  i.  e.  to  ripen 
J  V.121  ;  PvA  104.  — -2.  to  bear  fruit  D  11.266  ;  S  1.144  ; 
M  1.388;  Nett  37;  VvA  171. 

Vipaccanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  vipaccati,  cp.  paccana]  bearing 
fruit,  ripening  (fully)  Miln  421   (Notes)  ;  PvA  190. 

Vipaccanika  (adj.)  [vi -i- paccanika]  hostile  M  1.402  ;  A 
iv.95  ;  J  IV.108  ;  Pug  20  ;  Vbh  351.  359,  371  ;  VbhA  478  : 
PvA  87. 

Vipajjati  [vi-i-pajjati]  to  go  wrong,  to  fail,  to  perish  (opp. 
sampajjati)  DhA  in. 357  ;  PvA  34.  —  pp.  vipanna. 

Vipancana  &  Vipaficiyati :  see  under  vipaficita. 

Vipancita  [fr.  vi  -1-  pane,  cp.  papaiicita]  only  in  phrase 
"fiiiii  either  :  knowing  diffuseness  or  detail,  or  :  of  un- 
illusioned  understanding,  clear-minded,  unprejudiced, 
comb"*  with  ugghatita-firiu  at  A  11.135=  Pug  4'  (trsl"" 
by  B.  C.  Law  as  "  learning  by  exposition  "  ;  PugA  223 
expl'  as  "  vittharitari  atthar)  janati,"  i.  e.  one  who 
knows  a  matter  expl""  in  detail.  The  spelling  at  A  ii.i  35 
is  vipacita"  ;  at  Pug  41  vipaccita"  &  at  PugA  vipaccita", 
with  V.  1.  vipaiicita°)  ;  Nett  7  sq.,  125  ;  SnA  163  (where 
ugghatita-nAu  is  applied  to  those  who  understand  by 
condensed  instruction,  sankhepa-desanaya,  and  vipan- 
cita-niiu  to  those  who  need  a  detailed  one,  vitthara- 
desana  ;  thus  "  learning  by  diffuseness  ").  —  At  Nett  9 
we  have  the  var.  terms  vipancana,  vipancayati  & 
vipaficiyati  (Denom.)  used  in  the  description  of  var. 
ways  of  parsing  and  grammatical  analysis.  Here 
vipancana  (resting  clearly  on  Sk.  papafica  expansion) 
means  "  expanding  "  (by  letters  &  vowels)  and  stands 
midway  between  ugghatana  &  vittharana  "condensing 
&  detailing."  The  term  vipancayati  (=  vipaficiyati)  is 
used  in  the  same  way.  —  Note.  The  term  is  not  sufficiently 
cleared  up.  It  occurs  in  BSk.  as  vipaflcika  (e,  g.  Divy 
319,  391,  475,  where  it  is  appl"*  to  "  brahmaija  nai- 
mittika  "  &  trsli"  by  Cowell  as  "  sooth-sayer  "),  and 
vipancanaka  (Divy  548  ?),  with  which  cp.  vipaficitajna 
at  Lai.  Vist.  520. 

Vipapeti  [vi-i-Caus.  of  paijati]  to  sell,  to  trade  (with) 
J  IV. 363  (=vikkinati  C). 

Vipatati  see  vipateti  2. 

Vipatti  (f.)  [vi-i-patti^  wrong  state,  false  manifestation, 
failure,  misfortune  (opp.  sampatti)  Vin  1.171  (acara° 
failure  of  morality)  ;  A  1.270  (ajiva")  ;  iv.26,  160  (atta°, 
para")  ;  Ps  1.122  ;  J  vi.292  ;  Nett  126  (the  3  vipattiyo  : 


sila°,  ditthi',  acara°)  ;  DhA  1.16  (sila°)  DA  1.235. — 
Often  in  pair  ditthi"  wrong  view,  heresy,  &  sUa"  moral 
failure  :  D  11.213  ;  A  1.95.  268,  270  ;  Vin  v. 98  ;  Vbh  361  ; 
Dhs  1 361.  — payoga"  wrong  application  PvA  117,  136 
(opp.  "sampatti). 

Vipatha  [vi  -1-  patha]  wrong  way  or  course  Vv  50'°  (=  apatha 
VvA  212). 

Vipanna  [pp.  of  vipajjati]  gone  viTong,  having  lost,  failing 
in  (-°),  opp.  sampanna  :  A  111.19  (rukkho  sakha-palasa" 
a  tree  which  has  lost  branches  and  leaves)  ;  Sn  116 
(°ditthi  one  who  has  wrong  views,  heretic ;  expl""  as 
"  vinattha-sammaditthi  "  SnA  177);  Miln  258  (su° 
thoroughly  fallen),  -sila"  gone  wrong  in  morals,  lacking 
morahty  Vin  1.63  (-t-acara°,  difthi")  ;  11.4  (id.)  ;  J  111.138 
(vipanna-sila) . 

Vipannatta    (nt.)    [fr.    vipanna]    failure,    misfortune   Dhs 

A  367. 

Viparakkamma  (indecl.)  [ger.  of  vi+parakkamati]  en- 
deavouring strongly,  with  all  one's  might  Sn  425 

Viparamosa  (Viparamasa)  [vi-i-paramasa,  the  form  °mosa 
probably  a  distortion  of  °masa]  highway  robbery  D 
1.5  (expl""  as  twofold  at  DA  1.80,  viz.  hima°  &  gumba°, 
or  hidden  by  the  snow  &  a  thicket ;  the  pop.  etym. 
given  here  is  "  janai)  musanti,"  i.  e.  they  steal,  or 
beguile  people);  111.176  (v.  1.  °masa) ;  A  11.209;  v.206 ; 
S  v.473  ;  Pug  58. 

Viparavatta  [pp.  of  vi-l-  para-l-  vyt]  reversed,  changed 
D  1.8  ;  M  11.3  ;  S  111.12  ;  v.419;  DA  1.9 1. 

Viparioata  [vi-f  parinata]  changed,  perverted  Dhs  1038; 
Vbh  I,  3,  5  sq. ;  Miln  50. 

ViparL()ama  [vi-f  pariijama]  change  (for  the  worse),  reverse, 
vicissitude  D  in. 216  ("dukkhata) ;  M  1.457  (also  as 
"disappointment");  S  n.274;  111.8;  rv.7  sq.,  67  sq.  ; 
A  II.I  77  ("dhamma  subject  to  change) ;  111.32  ;  v.59  sq.  ; 
Vbh  379  (°dhamma) ;  Vism  499  (°dukkha),  629  sq. ; 
VbhA  93  (id.) ;  PvA  60.  —  a°  absence  of  change,  stead- 
fastness D  1. 18;  III. 31,  33  ;  DhA  1. 121. 

Viparii^ameti  [Denom.  fr.  vipaririama]  to  change,  alter 
D  1.56  (T.  °uamati ;  but  DA  1.167  °nameti :  sic  for 
"ijamati  !)  =  S  in. 2 11  ;  PvA  199. 

Viparibbinna  [vi-f  paribhinna]  (entirely)  broken  up  M 
1.296  ;  S  IV. 294. 

Vipariyattba  in  verse  at  J  v. 372  is  the  poet,  form  of  vipal- 
lattha  (so  the  C.  expl°). 

Vipariyaya  &  Vipariyaya  [vi-f  pariyaya]  change,  reversal 
DA  1. 148  (a);  SnA  499;  DhsA  253  (a);  Sdhp  124,  333. 
Cp.  vipariyesa  &  vipallasa. 

Vipariyadikata  (adj.)  [vipariyaya -f  kata,  with  sound 
change  y>d,  viz.  °ayi>°adi]  thrown  out  of  its  course, 
upset,  destroyed  Th  i,  184  (cittar)  ;  cp.  similar  phrase 
vipariyatthai)  cittag  J  v. 372  —  The  v.  1.  at  Th  passage 
is  vimariyadi"). 

Vipariyesa  [a  contamination  form  between  "pariyaya  & 
"pallasa]  reversal,  contrariness,  viTong  state  Kvu  306 
{three  reversals  :  safina",  citta",  ditthi"  ;  or  of  perception, 
consciousness  &  views,  cp.  Kvu  trsl"  176) ;  Vbh  376  (id.). 
—  °gaha  inverted  grasp  i.  e.  holding  opposite  views  or 
"  holding  the  contrary  aim  "  (B.  C.  Law)  Pug  22  ; 
DhsA  253  (  =  vipallattha-gaha). 

Vipaiivatta  [vi-f  pari vatta]  changing  or  turning  round, 
upset  J  1.344  (lokassa  "kale). 

Viparivattati  [vi-f  parivattati]  to  turn  round,  to  upset 
J  IV. 224  (nava  "amana  capsizing);  Miln  117;  ThA  255. 

Viparivattana  (nt.)  [fr.  viparivattati]  changing,  change, 
reverse  DhsA  367. 


Viparita 


85 


Vipula 


Viparita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  vi+pari+i]  reversed,  changed; 
equivocal;  wrong,  upset  A  in. 114  (°dassana) ;  iv.226 
(id.);  V.284;  Th  2.  393;  J  1.334;  Kvu  307;  MUn  285, 
324;  Nett  85  (°gaha),  126  ("sarina) ;  PvA  244.  — avi- 
parita  unequivocal,  certain,  distinct,  definite  A  v.268 
(°dassana) ;  Miln  214  (°vacana) ;  PvA  231  (  =  sacca  & 
yathava). 

Viparitata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  viparita]  contradistinction  Vism 
450  (tabbiparitata). 

Vipalavita  [vi+palavita,  pp.  of  Cans,  of  pin]  made  to 
float,  floating,  thrown  out  (into  water)  J  iv.259  (reads 
viplavitai))=  1.326  (reads  vipalavitag,  with  reading 
nipalavitai)  in  C).  The  C.  at  J  iv.259  expl'  as  "  utta- 
rita,"  so  at  J  I  326  as  "  brought  out  of  water,"  fished 
out  =  thale  thapita,  evidently  incorrect. 

Vipallattha  (adj.)  [=Sk.  viparyasta,  pp.  of  vi+pari+as: 
see  vipallasa]  changed,  reversed,  upset,  deranged, 
corrupt,  perverted.  Occurs  in  two  forms  :  vipariyattha 
J  V.372  (°cittai) :  in  poetry) ;  and  vipallattha  Vism  20 
(°citta :  trsl°  "  with  corrupt  thought  "  ;  T.  spells  vipal- 
latta,  V.  1.  "attha) ;  DhsA  253  ("gaha) ;  PvA  212. 

Vipallasa  [cp.  Sk.  viparyasa,  vi+pari+as  (to  throw). 
The  diaeretic  P.  form  (founded  on  Sk.  is  vipariyasa ; 
another  bastard  form  is  vipariyesa  (q.  v.)]  reversal, 
change  (esp.  in  a  bad  sense),  inversion,  perversion, 
derangement,  corruption,  distortion. — The  form  vipa- 
riyasa  occurs  at  Vin  n.So  (citta-°kata,  with  deranged 
mind  or  wrong  thoughts) ;  J  1.344  (where  it  is  expl''  by 
vipallasa).  Otherwise  vipallasa,  e.  g.  Sn  299  ;  Ps  11.80  ; 
Vism  214  (attha°) ;  Nett  4,  27,  31,  85  sq.,  1 15  sq. ;  DhA 
11. 228;  PvA  7,  70. — There  are  3  kinds  of  vipallasas, 
viz.  sanna"  perversion  of  perception,  citta"  of  thought, 
ditthi°  of  views ;  A  11.52  ;  Nett  85  ;  Vism  683.  See  the 
same  under  vipariyesa  ! 

Vipallasayati  [Denom.  fr.  vipallasa]  to  be  deceived 
(about),  to  distort,  to  have  or  give  a  wrong  notion 
(of)  Nett  85. 

Vipassaka  (adj.)  [fr.  vipassati]  qualified  to  win  insight, 
contemplating,  gifted  with  introspection  S  11.232  ; 
Ps  1. 167;  Miln  342,  369;  393,  VbhA  297. 

Vipassati  [vi+  passati]  to  see  clearly  ;  to  have  intuition,  to 
obtain  spiritual  insight  D  ni.196  (ye  nibbuta  loke 
yathabhutai)  vipassisur),  aor.) ;  Th  1,471;  2,271 
(vipassi  for  °passasi) ;  Sn  11 15;  J  ni.183  (pabbajitva 
vipjissitva  arahattai)  papunigsu). 

Vipassana  (f)  [fr.  vi+ passati ;  BSk.  vipji^yana,  e.  g.  Divy 
44,  95,  264  etc.]  inward  vision,  insight,  intuition,  intro- 
spection D  111.213.  273  :  S  IV. 195,  360  ;  V.52  (samatha-l-  ) ; 
A  1. 61  (id.),  95;  II. 140,  157  (samatha-l- ) ;  iv.360  ;  v.99, 
131  ;  Ps  1.28,  57  sq.,  181  ;  11.92  sq.  ;  Pug  25  ;  J  1.106  ;  Dhs 
551356  i  Nett  7,  42  sq.,  50.  82,  88  sq.,  125  sq.,  160,  191  ; 
Miln  16;  Vism  2  (with  jhana  etc.),  289  (-(- saraadhi), 
628  sq.  (the  i8  maha") ;  PvA  14  (samahita-citta°),  167; 
VvA  77  ;  Sdhp  457,  466. 

-anga  constituent  of  intuition  SnA  8  (given  as  "  nama- 
rupa-pariccheda  etc.").  -upekkha  indifference  by  intro- 
spection Vism  162.  -kanunatthana  exercise  for  intui- 
tion DhA  IV. 46.  -fiana  ability  or  method  of  attaining 
insight  Vism  629 ;  DhA  iv.30  ;  cp.  Cpd.  65  sq.,  where 
10  such  modes,  -dhura  obligation  of  introspection 
DhA  1.8  ;  IV.37  sq. 

VipassiD  (adj.)  [fr.  vipassati]  gifted  with  insight,  wise 
A  IV. 2 44;  Sn  349;  It  2  =  7. 

Vipaka  [fr.  vi-l-  pac]  fruit,  fruition,  product ;  always  in 
pregnant  meaning  of  "  result,  effect,  consequence  (of 
one's  action),"  either  as  good  &  meritorious  (kusala) 
or  bad  &  detrimental  (akusala).  Hence  "  retribution  '■ 
(kamma°),  reward  or  punishment.     See  on  term  e.  g. 


Dhs.  (rsZ"  introd.*  xciii ;  Cpd.  43.  249. — D  in. 150,  160, 
176  sq.  ;  S  1.34,  57,  92  (kammassa) ;  11. 128  (compar. 
vipakatara),  255  (id);  iv.186  sq.,  348  sq.  ;  A  1.48,  97 
(sukha°,  dukkha°),  134  (kamma°),  263;  11.34  (agga),  80, 
112  ;  III. 35,  172  (danassa),  410  sq.  (kamanag  etc.),  436; 
IV.  303  (kamma") ;  v. 251  ;  Sn  653  (kamma°) ;  Ps  11.79 
(dukkha") ;  Pv  i.g' ;  i.io'  &  passim;  Pug  13,  21  ;  Dhs 
431.  497.  987;  Vbh  16  sq.,  73,  319,  326  sq.,  334  (sukha°) ; 
Kvu  353  sq.,  464  (kamma  &  vipaka);  Nett  99,  161, 
180  sq.  ;  Tikp  27  (fourfold),  44,  48,  50,  292  (a"  &  sa°), 
328  sq.  (°tika),  350  sq.  ;  Dukp  17;  Vism  177,  454  (four- 
fold), 456  ("viniiana),  538  ("paccaya),  545  sq.  ;  VbhA 
17,  150  sq.  (kusala°  &  akusala),  144,  177,  391  ;  PvA  50, 
73,  77;  Sdhp  12,  73,  197.  235. 

Vipakatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  vipaka]  state  of  being  ripe  PvA 
52- 

Vipaceti  [Cans,  of  vi-t-pac,  or  distorted  fr.  vivaceti  ?]  to 
become  annoyed,  to  get  angry  (lit.  to  get  heated) :  this 
meaning  as  trsl°  of  vi-f-  pac,  although  not  quite  correct, 
as  pac  means  to  "  ripen  "  and  is  not  ordinarily  used  of 
heated  conditions.  Since  the  word  is  not  sufficiently 
cleared  up,  we  refrain  from  a  detailed  discussion  con- 
cerning possible  explanations.  It  may  suffice  to  point 
out  that  it  occurs  only  in  Vinaya  (and  in  one  sporadic 
passage  S  1.232)  in  standing  comb°  ujjhayati  khiyati 
vipaceti,  expressing  annoyance  or  irritation  about 
something;  e.  g.  Vin  1.191  ;  11.85,  291;  iv.64.  The 
corresponding  BSk.  phrase  is  avadhyayati  dhriyati  [to 
resist,  dhf]  vivacayati,  e.  g.  Divy  492.  It  is  not  quite 
clear  which  of  the  two  versions  is  the  older  one.  There 
may  be  underlying  a  misunderstood  (dial.)  phrase 
which  was  changed  by  popular  analogy.  The  BSk. 
phrase  seems  a  priori  the  more  intelligible  one ;  if  we 
take  vipaceti  =  vivaceti.  we  should  translate  it  as  "  to 
speak  disparagingly."  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  at  K.S.  1.296  trsl" 
as  "  were  vexed  and  fretted  and  consumed  with  indig- 
nation." —  See  remarks  under  khiyati  &  cp.  vipaccata. 

Vipateti  [vi-l-pateti]  i.  to  rip  or  tear  open  Vin  11. 115. — 
2.  to  be  destroyed,  to  fall  to  pieces  (cp.  pateti  &  Pass, 
patiyati  in  sense  of  "destroy")  Pv  iv.i*'  (sanghatiyo 
vipatayanti  T.  ;  vv.  11.  vinasayati  &  vidalayati ;  PvA  240 
expl"  as  Pass,  vipaliyati  [  =  vipatiyati  .']  with  v.  1. 
vidaliyati) ;  J  v. 33  (reads :  muddha  vipphaleyya  sat- 
tadha :  perhaps  the  best  reading),  493  (muddha  vipa- 
teyya  [sic]  sattadha).     See  vipphalati. 

Vipaliyati  see  vipaceti  2. 

Vipitthi  [vi4-  pitth']  in  phrase  vipitthi-katva(na)  Sn  67  & 
362.  to  turn  one's  back  on  (ace),  to  leave  behind,  to 
abandon  ;  cp.  pitthito  karoti.  The  expl°  at  Nd*  580 
is  pahana  etc.  ;  at  SnA  1 19  pitthito  katva. 

Vipina  (nt.)  [cp.  *Sk.  vipina,  Halayudha  2,  55]  wood, 
grove  D  1.248  (doubtful ;  vv.  11.  vijina,  vivada,  vivana) ; 
Ap  51  (w.  11.  vivana,  vicina  ;  C.  vivana  &  vipina) ;  Davs 
1V.39;  PvA  81  (read  vicitta  !). 

Vipntta  (adj.)  [vi4-putta]  without  a  son,  bereft  of  his  son 

J  V.106. 

Vipnbbaka  (adj.)  [fr.  vi-i-pubba']  full  of  corruption  or 
matter,  festering  (said  of  a  dead  body).  The  contem- 
plation (saniia)  of  a  festering  corpse  is  one  of  the  asu- 
bhakammatthanas.  —  M  1.58,  88;  111.91  ;  A  111.324. — 
As  "saniia  :  A  11. 17  ;  v. 310  ;  Dhs  264  ;  Nett  27  ;  Miln  102, 
332  ;  Vism  no,  178,  193. 

Vipola  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  vipula]  large,  extensive,  great, 
abundant.  The  word  is  poetical.  —  D  in.  150;  A  1.45 
(°pannata) ;  Sn  41.  675,  687,  -978,  994  ;  Th  i,  588 ;  Nd' 
581  (  =  adhimatta) ;  Vv  67'  (  =  mahanta  VvA  290); 
Ap  40;  Pv  II. i";  11.4';  11.9"  (=ulara  PvA  139);  Miln 
164,  311,  404;  PvA  7,  76  ;  Sdhp  271. 


Vippakata 


86 


Vipphara 


Vippakata  [pp.  of  vijjpakaroti ;  vi+pakata]  i.  imper- 
fectly executed,  left  unfinished,  interrupted  D  1.2  (cp. 
Dh  1.49) ;  Vin  11.172,  243,  304  ;  iv.279 ;  A  11. 196  ;  J  1.120. 
—  2.  done  wrongly  J  v.214.  —  At  Vin  iv.358  (in 
Bdhgh's  remarks  on  Pac.  26,  i)  we  find  vippagata- 
medhuna  as  inaccurate  spelling  for  vippakata-methuna 
("  interrupted  intercourse  "). 

Vippakaroti  [vi+pa+kf]  to  ill-treat,  abuse  Vin  11.133. — 
pp.  vippakata. 

Vippakaia  [vi-l-  pakara]  change,  mutation,  alteration 
J  VI. 370  ;  DhA  1.28  ;  VvA  46. 

VippaklQ^a  [pp.  of  vippakirati]  strewn  all  over,  beset  with, 
sprinkled  (with)  J  11.240;  vi.42  ;  DhA  1.140;  DA  1.40; 
VvA  36. 

Vippakiwata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  vippakinna]  the  fact  of  being 
beset  or  endowed  (with)  Vism  8. 

Vippakirati  [viif  pakirati]  i.  to  strew  all  over  PvA  92.  — 
2.  to  confound,  destroy  J  11.398.  —  pp.  vippakinna. 

Vippakkamati  [vi-l-  pakkamati]  to  part  company,  to  go 
away  Vin  iv.284. 

Vippajahati  [vi-i- pajahati]  to  give  up.  to  abandon  Sn  817 
(inf.  °pahatave),  926  (Pot.  "pajahe) ;  ger.  °pahaya  Sn 
367,  499,  514;  J  1.87.  — pp.  vippahina. 

Vippatikknla  (adj.)  [vi-f  pafikkula]  contrary,  antagonistic 
Dhs  i325  =  Pug  20. 

Vippa^ipaijati  [vi-l- patipajjati.  Cp.  BSk.  vipratipadyate 
Divy  293]  to  go  astray ;  fig.  to  err,  fail ;  to  commit  sin 
Vin  III. 166;  S  1.73;  J  1.438.  —  pp.  vippatipanna. — 
Caus.  vippatipadeti. 

Vippatipatti  (f.)  [vi+  pafipatti]  wrong  way,  error,  sin 
Vism  511. 

Vippa^panna  [pp.  of  vippatipajjati]  "  on  the  wrong 
track,"  going  or  gone  astray,  committing  sin  Pv  iv.i^' 
(°citta  =  adhammiyar)  patipadarj  patipanna  PvA  242). 

Vippatipideti  [Caus.  of  vippatipajjati]  to  cause  to  commit 
sin  (esp.  adultery)  Vin  111.40. 

Vippatisara  [vi-i-patisara]  bad  conscience,  remorse,  regret, 
repentance  Vin  11.250;  D  1.138;  S  ill. 120,  125;  iv.46 ; 
A  III.I56,  197,  353;  1V.69;  J  IV. 12;  V.88;  Pug  62; 
DhA  rv.42  ;  VvA  116;  PvA  14.  60.  105.  152.  —  a°  no 
regret,  no  remorse  A  in. 46. 

Vippatisarin  (adj.)  [fr.  vippatisara;  cp.  BSk.  vipratisarin 
Divy  322,  638]  remorseful,  regretful,  repentant  S  111.125  ; 
IV.133,  320  sq.,  359  sq. ;  A  111.165  sq. ;  iv.244,  390; 
J  1.200 ;  Miln  10,  285  ;  Tikp  321,  346. 

Vippataccheti  [vi-f  pa+  taccheti]  to  scratch  open  or  apart 
M  1.506. 

Vippanattha  [vi-t-  pp.  of  panassati]  strayed,  lost,  perished 
Vv  84»=84"  (  =  magga-sammulha  VvA  337);  J  iv.139; 
V.70  ;  VI. 525  ;  Miln  326. 

Vippamatta  [vi-t-  pamutta]  released,  set  free,  saved 
S  1.4,  29,  50;  III. 31,  83;  IV. 11;  A  1. 10;  11.34;  Sn  176, 
218,  363,  472,  492,  501,  913;  J  1.84;  Vv  20''ai29'''  ;  Nd' 
331.  336. 

Vippamokkha  [vi-f- pamokkha]  release,  deliverance  S 
1.154;  J  v.27. 

Vippayatta  [vi-(- payutta]  separated  S  11.173  (visai)- 
yutta-f ) ;  Sn  914  (or  "mutta).  -°paccaya  the  relation 
of  dissociation  Tikp  6,  53  sq.,  65  ;  Vism  539. 

Vippayoga  [vi+  payoga]  separation  Sn  41  ;  PvA  161  (piya"). 


Vippal^ati  [vi-l-palapati]  to  talk  confusedly  (as  in  one's 
sleep),  to  chatter,  wail,  lament  Vin  1.15;  S  iv.303 ; 
J  1.61  ;  III. 217;  IV. 167;  DhA  II. 100  ;  PvA  40,  93. 

Vippalambheti  [vi-i-  palambheti]  to  deceive,  mock  DA 
1.151  ;  ThA  78. 

Vippalapa  [vi+  palapa]  confused  talk,  wailing  Ps  1.38 ; 
PvA  18. 

Vippalojiati  [vi-l-palujjati]  to  be  broken  up,  to  be  de- 
stroyed Nd'  5. 

Vippavadati  [vi-f  pavadati]  to  dispute,  disagree  J  iv.163; 
VI. 267. 

Vippavasati  [vi-i-  pavasati]  to  go  from  home,  to  be  awa; 
from  (abl.),  to  be  absent  Sn  ii38(=apeti  apagacchati^ 
vina  hoti  Nd*  582) ;  J  iv.51,  439.  —  pp.  vippavuttha. 


] 


Vippavasa  [vi+  pavasa]  absence  ;  in  sati°  absence  of  mind 
neglect,  absentmindedness.  thoughtlessness  J  1.410 ; 
SnA  339;  a°  thoughtfulness,  mindfulness  Vin  v. 216; 
Sn  1 142  ;  J  IV. 92. 

Vippaviddha  [pp.  of  vippavijjhati,  vi-i-  pa -I-  vyadh]  pierced 
through  and  through  J  1.6 1. 

Vippavuttha  [pp.  of  vippavasati]  absent ;  °sati  neglectful 
DhA  1.239. 

Vippasanna  (adj.)  [vi-t-pasanna]  (quite)  purified,  clear; 
happy,  bright,  pure,  sinless  Vin  111.88  ("chavivanna) ; 
S  1.32  (cetas) ;  111.2,  235;  iv.nS,  294;  v.301  ;  A  in. 41, 
236  ;  Sn  637  ;  Dh  82,  413  (=pasanna-citta  DhA  iv.192) ; 
Pv  Mo^"  (  =  sutthu  pasanna) ;  11.9'*;  Vism  262  (where 
KhA  reads  pasanna  only) ;  DhA  11.127 ;  DA  1.22 1. 

Vippasadeti  [Caus.  of  vippasidati]  to  purify,  cleanse  Sn  506. 

Vippasidati  [vi-f  pasidati]  to  become  bright;  fig.  to  be 
reconciled  or  pleased,  to  be  satisfied  or  happy  Dh  82  ; 
J  1. 51  ;  PvA  122  (mukha-vanna).     Caus.  vippasadeti. 

Vippasukkhati  [vi-l-pa-l-sukkhati]  to  dry  up  entirely 
J  v. 106. 

Vippahana  (nt  )  [vi-l- pahana]  leaving,  abandoning,  giving        V 
up  S  i.39=Sn  1109;  Sn  1097;  J  vi.260  ;  Miln  181. 

Vippahita  (nt.)  [vi-l- pahita*]  sending  out  in  all  directions, 
message  J  in. 386  (diita°). 

Vippahina  [pp.  of  vippajahati]  given  up,  abandoned 
S  1.99 ;  A  v. 16,  29  sq.  ;  Sn  360,  362. 

Vippitaat  J  VI. 185  is  to  be  read  cipita  ("  flat  "). 

Vipphandati  [vi-l- phandati ;  cp.  BSk.  vispandati  Jtm  11 
to  twitch,  writhe,  struggle  Vv  52"  (52^*  Ha.) ;  J  iv.495 
—  pp.  vipphandita. 

Vipphandita  (nt.)  [pp.  of  vipphandati]  "  writhing," 
twitching,  struggle  M  1.446;  S  11.62  ;  —  (fig)  in  ditthi" 
comb''  with  visukayita)  "  scuffling  of  opinion  "  (Mrs. 
Rh.  D.),  sceptical  agitation,  worry  &  writhing  (cp. 
Dial.  1.53)  M  1.8,  486;  S  1. 123  (here  without  ditthi"; 
the  C.  expl"  is  "  hatthirajavanna  sappavaijij'  adidassa 
nani"  K.S.  1.320);  Dhs  381  ;  Pug  22. 

Vipphala  (or  is  it  pipphala  ?)  =  phala  at  J  vi.518. 

Vipphalati  [vi-l- phalati]  (intrs.)  to  split  open,  to  burst 
asunder ;  so  read  at  J  v. 33,  493  (for  vipatati) ;  Pv 
IV. 1*'  (for  vipateti) ;  see  detail  under  vipateti. 

Vipphara  [fr.  vi-l-  pharati  i  or  2]  diffusion,  pervasion , 
(adj.)  pervading,  spreading  out  A  1.171  (vitakka-vip- 
phara-sadda,  cp.  Kvu  trsl"  241),  206  (mahajutika  maha 
vipphara);  iv.252  ;  Ps  1.112  sq. ;  11.174;  J  111.12  (maha" 
-(-mahajutika);   v. 150    (id.);    Miln   230   &   270    (vaci° 


Vippharavant 


87 


VibhSjana 


I 


dilating  in  talk),  130,  346;  Vism  42  ;  DA  1.192  ;   VvA 
103  (maha°+ mahajutika) ;  PvA  178  (karuna°). 

Vippharavant  (adj.)  [fr.  vipphara,  cp.  pharati  i  &  vip- 
phurati]  possessing  vibration  DhsA  115  =  Vism  142. 

Vippharika  (adj.)  [fr.  vi+ pharati  2]  spreading  out  (in 
effulgence)  VvA  5  (maha°). 

Vippharita  [pp.  of  Cans.  vi+  pharati]  expanded  Davs 
V.34  ("akkhi-yugala,  both  eyes  wide  open). 

Vipphalita  (adj.)  [vi+phalita  2]  split  open,  cut  to  pieces 
PvA  152  (su" ;  so  read  for  vipphalita);  Sdhp  188 
(°anga). 

Vipphaleti  [vi+gphar:  cp.  phalita  1.  It  is  «o/=vi+ 
phaleti]  to  expand,  to  bend  or  draw  the  bow  J  vi.580. 

VippharaQa  (nt.)  [vi+phurana=pharana]  spreading  out, 
effulgence,  pervasion  VvA  277. 

Vipphurati  [vi+  phurati  see  pharati]  to  vibrate,  tremble, 
quiver,  fly  asunder,  diffuse  J  1. 51  ;  SnA  225;  VvA  12 
(vijjotamana  vipphurato). 

Vipphotita  (adj.)  [vi+photita:  see  phota,  cp.  BSk.  vis- 
phota  open  Divy  603]  burst  open  (of  a  boil)  Th  i,  306. 

Viphala  (adj.)  [vi+phala]  fruitless,  useless  Sdhp  527. 

Vibandlia  [vi+  bandha]  fetter  PvA  207. 

Vibandhana  (nt.)  [vi+bandhana]  =  vibandha  ThA  243. 

Vibadhaka  (adj.)  [fr.  vibadha]  doing  harm  to  (-°),  injuring, 
preventing  Davs  11. 88. 

Vibadhati  [vi+badhati]  to  oppress,  harm  Miln  135  (so 
read  for  "bhadati) ;  DhsA  42.  —  Pass,  vibadhiyati  to  be 
oppressed  PVA  239. 

Vibbedha  [fr.  vi+vyadh  after  analogy  of  ubbedha ;  not 
vi+ bheda]  circumference  J  1.212. 

Vibbhanta  [pp.  of  vibbhamati]  i.  roaming,  straying; 
strayed,  confused  M  1.171  (padhana°  giving  up  exer- 
tion), 247  (id.).  Usually  in  phrase  "citta  with  wandering 
(or  confused)  mind  S  1.61  (see  expl"  of  C.  at  A'.S.  1.32 1), 
204;  111.93;  v.269;  A  1.70;  11.30;  III. 391  ;  It  90 ;  J 
rv.459  (+  kupit'  indriya) ;  Miln  324.  —  At  DhsA  260 
we  find  the  cpd.  vibbhanti-bhava  [vibbhanta  in  comp" 
with  bhu !]  of  citta,  in  meaning  "  wavering,  roaming  " 
(of  mind) :  so  read  for  vibhatti-bhava. 

Vibbhantaka  (adj.)  [vibbhanta+ ka]  i.  straying  away 
from  (-°),  confused  Vism  187  (jhana°),  429.  —  2.  (a 
bhikkhu)  who  has  forsaken  the  Order,  apostate  Vin  u.Oo. 

Vibbhamati  [vi+  bhamati]  to  wander  about,  to  go  astray, 
to  forsake  the  Order  Vin  1.72;  n.14;  in. 40  (may  be 
taken  in  the  sense  of  enjoying  oneself  or  sporting,  i.  c. 
cohabiting,  at  this  passage),  iv.216;  J  1.117;  111.462  (of 
a  bhikkhu  enticed  by  his  former  wife),  496.  —  pp.  vib- 
bhanta. 

Vibhanga  [vi-l-  bhanga,  of  bhai']  distribution,  division, 
distinction,  classification  Vin  1.359 ;  Sn  600  (jati° 
classification  of  species ;  expl*"  as  jati-vitthara  at  SnA 
464);  J  IV. 361  (+vicaya;  C.  expl»  as  vibhaga) :  Mhvs 
30,  87  (dhatu"  distribution  of  relics)  ;  SnA  422  (contrasted 
with  uddesa).  —  Vibhanga  is  the  title  of  the  second 
book  of  the  Abhidharama  Pitaka  (see  Pali  Name  Dic- 
tionary).    Cp.  Sutta-vibhanga. 

Vibhajati  [vi-f-bhajati,  i.  e.  bhaj^,  as  in  bhajeti]  (lit.)  to 
distribute,  divide;  (fig.)  to  distinguish,  dissect,  divide 
up,  classify  ;  to  deal  with  something  in  detail,  to  go  into 
details  M  in. 223  ;  S  11. 2,  255  (vibhajeti)  =  M  1.364  (reads 


virajeti);  S  iv.93  (atthai)) ;  v. 261  (dhammar)  vivarati 
vibhajati  uttani-karoti) ;  Sn  87;  Pug  41;  Vbh  259; 
Miln    145;   SnA   237;   DA   1.104;    PvA   81,    iii. 


ger. 


145;   SnA   237;   DA   1. 104;    PvA   81,    iii 

vibhajja  (q.  v.).  —  pp.  vibhatta. 

Vibhajana  (nt.)  &  °a  (f.)  [f»i  vibhajati]  distinction,  divi- 
sion, going  into  detail  Nett  5,  8  sq.,  38  (+vivarana  & 
uttani-kammata) ;  Tikp  10;  SnA  445  (vivarana,  v., 
uttani-karana) ;  DhsA  343,  344.     Cp.  vibhajana. 

Vibhajja  (adv.)  [ger.  of  vibhajati]  dividing,  analysing, 
detailing;  in  detail  ("-)  D  111.229  ("vyakaraniya  pafiha 
"  discriminating  reply  "  trsl") ;  A  11.46  (°vacana  analysis). 
—  °vada  the  Vibhajja  doctrine,  i.  e.  the  doctrine  which 
analyses,  or  the  "  religion  of  logic  or  reason  "  ;  a  term 
identical  with  theravada,  the  doctrine  of  the  Elders, 
i.  e.  the  original  teaching  of  the  Buddhist  church, 
-"vadin  one  who  teaches  the  V.  doctrine,  Ep.  of  the 
Buddha  Mhvs  5,  271  ;  Tikp  366;  VbhA  130;  cp.  Kvu 
trsl'  introd.  p.  38. 

Vibhatta  (adj.)  [pp.  of  vibhajati]  i.  (lit.)  divided,  distri- 
buted ;  parted,  partitioned,  having  divisions,  portioned 
ofi  Sn  300;  Pv  i.io'*  (of  niraya) ;  J  v. 266  (id);  Miln 
316  (a°  samudda).  — su°  well  divided,  well  planned, 
proportioned,  regular  Sn  305  ;  Pv  111.2^' ;  Miln  330,  345  ; 
Vism  108.  —  2.  (fig.)  detailed,  explained,  analysed 
Vism  187;  SnA  288;  PvA  104. 

Vibhattavaat  (adj.)  [fr.  vibhatta]  full  of  details,  giving  all 
detail  Vism  212  ;  DA  1.34. 

Vibhatti  (f.)  [fr.  vibhajati]  i.  division,  distinction,  classi- 
fication, detail,  variety  J  vi.432  (of  paintings) ;  Nett 
I  sq.,  105  ;  Miln  102,  381  ;  Vism  352  (contrasted  with 
sankhepa) ;  PvA  199,282  (rupa°  various  forms,  patterns). 
—  2.  (t.  t.  g.)  inflection  of  nouns  &  verbs,  declensions, 
conjugation  SnA  397;  VvA  78,  199.  -°lopa  omission 
of  inflection  VvA  174,  192;  PvA  147.  —  Note,  vibhatti- 
bhava  at  DhsA  260  is  to  be  read  as  vibbhanti"  (see 
under  vibbhanta). 

Vibhattika  (adj.)  [fr.  vibhatti]  having  divisions;  (fig.) 
detailed.     Neg.  a°  not  giving  details  VvA  164. 

Vibhava  [vi-t-bhava]  i.  power,  wealth,  prosperity  DA 
1. 147;  J  1.56;  v.285  ;  Mhvs  26,  6;  DhA  1.6;  11. 9,  84; 
IV. 7;  VvA  5,  302  ("sampanna  rich);  PvA  122,  130,  176, 
196.  Great  wealth  is  expressed  by  astti-koti-vibhava, 
consisting  in  80  kotis,  e.  g.  DhA  1.367 ;  11.25.  —  bahu° 
very  rich  J  1.145;  maha°  id.  PvA  97,  107.  —  yatha 
vibhavar)  according  to  one's  means  or  power  PvA  54 ; 
vibhav'  4nuruparj  id.  VvA  254. — 2.  non-existence, 
cessation  of  life,  annihilation  D  1.34:  Sn  514  (H-bhava), 
867  (id.);  Nd'  274,  282;  J  111,402  ("rj  gata=  vinasar) 
patta  C.) ;  v. 267  (id.) ;  DhsA  392  ;  DA  1.120  ;  VbhA  505 
(  =  bhava-vigaraa).     See  also  tanha  B  i. 

-tanha  "  craving  for  life  to  end  "  (Dial.  in. 208),  desire 
for  non-existence  D  111,216,  275;  Vin  i.io;  Ud  33; 
It  50;  VbhA  III.  -ditthi  the  theory  of  non-becoming 
D  III. 212  ;  A  1.83  ;  Nd*  245,  274. 

Vibhavati  [vi-l- bhavati]  to  cease  to  exist  S  in. 56  (fut. 
°issati) ;  Sn  873  (vibhoti) ;  Nd'  279  (id.).  —  pp.  vibhuta. 

Vibhassikata  (nt.)  [vin-  bhassa-t-  kata]  gossip,  lit.  "  made 

into  talk  "  Vin  iv.241. 

Vibhaga  [fr.  vibhajati,  cp.  vibhanga  &  vibhajana]  distri- 
bution, division  ;  detailing,  classification  J  iv.361  ; 
Vism  494;  VbhA  83;  ThA  100;  VvA  37;  PvA  122. 
—  attha°  detailing  of  meaning  Vism  569  ;  dhatu"  distri- 
bution of  relics  VvA  297;  PvA  212  ;  pada°  division  of 
words  SnA  269;  PvA  34.  — Cp.  sag°. 

Vibhajana  (nt.)  [vi-i-  bhajana']  distribution,  division  Dhtp 
92,  561  ;  Dhtm  776,  787. 


Vibhata 


88 


Vibhedeti 


Vibhata  [pp.  of  vibhati]  shining,  iumed  to  light,  bright ; 
in  phrase  vibhataya  rattiya  when  night  had  become 
light,  i.  e.  at  daybreak  or  dawn  (DhA  iv.ios;  PvA  13, 
22).  —  (nt.)  daybreak,  dawn  DhA  11.5  (°khane). 

Vibhati  [vi+bhati]  to  shine  forth,  to  be  or  become  light 
(said  of  the  night  turning  into  day) ;  pres.  also  vibhayati 
Vin  1.78;  fut.  vibhayissati  D  11.14S;  aor.  vibhayi 
J  V.354.  —  pp.  vibhata. 

Vibhadati  at  Miln  1 35  should  be  read  at  vibadhati. 

Vibhayana  (nt.)  [fr.  vibhati]  shining  forth,  brightening 
VvA  148. 

Vibhavana  (nt.)  &  °a  (f.)  [fr.  vibhaveti]  i.  making  clear, 
ascertainment,  explanation,  Exposition  J  111.389;  Vbh 
342,  343  (a);  Sn  A  13,  261  sq.,  318;  VbhA  409  (a); 
ThA  76  (a),  230  ;  PvA  T37,  140  (so  read  for  vibhavana 
in  attha°).  —  2.  annihilation,  disappearance,  making 
non-existing  (cp.  vibhava  2)  DhsA  163  (vibhavana 
nama  antara-dhapana  ti  attho). 

Vibhavaniya  (adj.)  [fr.  vibhavana]  pertaining  to  ascertain- 
ment, making  clear,  explaining  PvA  244  (paramattha"). 

Vibhavita  [pp.  of  vibhaveti]  made  non-existing,  anni- 
hilated Nd2  584. 

Vibhavin  (adj.)  [fr.  vibhaveti]  intelligent,  wise  Sn  317; 
J  VI.304;  Nd*  259  (=medhavin);  Miln  21,  276,  346; 
Sdhp  382. 

Vibhaveti  [vi-l- bhaveti]  I.  to  understand  clearly  (lit.  "  to 
produce  intensively  or  well  ")  Sn  318  (ger.  a-vibha- 
vayitva).  —  2.  to  make  clear,  to  explain  KhA  89  ;'SnA 
406,  472  ;  PvA  I,  70,  92,  135.  —  3.  to  put  out  of  exist- 
ence, to  annihilate  [as  Caus.  of  vibhava  2]  DhsA  163.  — 
pp.  vibhavita. 

Vibhasita  [pp.  Caus.  of  vi+  bhasati^]  illuminated,  made 
bright,  shining  forth  Sdhp  591. 

Vibhinna  (adj.)  [vi-i- bhinna]  scattered;  divided,  at  vari- 
ance Sn  314  (  =  atiiiam-aniiag  bhinna  SnA  324). 


Vibhitaka  (&  °taka)  [cp.  'Sk.  vibhita  &  °ka]  the  plant 
Terminalia  belerica ;  beleric  myrobolan.  Dice  were 
made  from  its  fruits,  which  are  also  used  as  medicine 
(intoxicant);  its  flowers  smell  vilely.  —  Vin  1.201  ; 
J  III. 161  ;  v.363  ;  VI. 529. 

Vibhnta  (adj.)  [pp.  of  vibhavati,  or  vi-i-bhuta]  i.  [cp. 
bhuta  I,  &  vibhava  2]  destroyed,  annihilated,  being 
without  Th  I,  715;  Sn  871  sq.,  11 13  (  =  vibhavita  atik- 
kanta  vitivatta  Nd^  584).  —  2.  [cp.  bhuta  3]  false  Sn 
664.  —  3.  [cp.  vibhaveti  2]  clear,  distinct  A  v. 325  ; 
Miln  311;  Abdhs  16  (a°  unclear);  Vism  112  (&  a°). 
-°g  karoti  to  explain  Miln  308. 

Vibhati  (f)  [fr.  vi-i- bhavati]  i.  [cp.  vibhuta  2]  destruc 
tion,  ruin  Th  i,  1018  (°mandin  =  malign).  —  2.  [cp. 
vibhava  i]  splendour,  majesty,  glory  J  v. 305  ;  PvA  133 
(dana°),  216  (raja°). 

Vibhusana  (nt.)  [vi-l- bhusana]  adornment  A  1.212  ;  11.40, 
145,  209;  Sn  59  (cp.  Nd*  585);  Pug  21,  58;  J  1.8;  Dhs 
1348;  Miln  382. 

Vibhusa  (f)  [vi-l-  bhusa]  ornament,  decoration,  distinction, 
pride  Sn  926;  Nd'  380;  Nd^  585;  Miln  224  (Rh.  D. 
trsl"  "  dexterity,"  hardly  correct.  Should  we  read 
"  vibhiiti  "  ?). 

Vibhasita  [pp.  of  vibhuseti]  adorned,  decorated  Mhvs  25, 
102  ;  Vism  10  ;  PvA  46,  157. 

Vibhuseti  [vi-i-  bhuseti]  to  adorn,  embellish,  beautify  Th  2, 
411;  Mhvs  19,  25  ;  DhA  1.77.  —  pp.  vibhusita. 

Vibheti  [vi-l-bhayati]  to  be  afraid,  to  stand  in  awe  of 
J  V.509  (  =  bhayati  C).     Should  we  read  bibheti  ? 

Vibhedaka  [vi-l-bhedaka]  one  who  disturbs  friendship, 
a  slanderer  J  in. 260. 

Vibhedika  (f.)  [fr.  vi-i-  bhid]  the  palmyra  tree  J  vi.529. 

Vibhedeti  [vi-l-bhedeti]  to  cause  disruption,  to  slander 
A  v.345  sq. 


THE    PALI    TEXT    SOCIETY'S 
PALI-ENGLISH  DICTIONARY 


EDITED  BY 


T.  W.  RHYS  DAVIDS  F.B.A    D.Sc.  PhD.  LL.D.  D.Litt 
and  WILLIAM  STEDE  Ph.D. 


Part  VIII  (Vim— H) 


PUBLISHED  BY 

THE  PALI  TEXT  SOCIETY 

LONDON 


First  published  -  -  -  1925 
Reprinted  -  .-  -  -  1949 
Reprinted         -     -     .     .     1952 


Vimajjana 


89 


Vim  ana 


Vimajjana  (nt.)  [fr.  vi  4- majjati*]  making  smooth,  polish- 
ing M  I.  385. 

Vima^ba  (adj.)  [vi  +  mattha]  smoothed,  soft,  smooth, 
polished  J  v. 96  (°abharana),  (C,  expl'  as  "  visala  "), 
204,  400  (of  ornaments).  — ubhato-bhaga°  polished  or 
smooth  on  both  sides  M  i.  385  ;  A  v. 61  =M  11. 13  (has 
°maddha). 

Vimata  (adj.)  [fr.  vi  +  man]  perplexed,  in  doubt    J  v. 340. 

Vimati  (f)  [vi  +  mati]  doubt,  perplexity,  consternation 
D  1. 105;  S  IV.327;  A  11.79.  185;  Ap  29;  Dhs  425; 
J  III. 522  ;  Miln  119,  144,  339;  DA  1.274. 

Vimada  (adj.)  [vi  +  mada]  disintoxicated.  without  conceit 
J  V.158  (taken  as  "  unconscious  "  by  C). 

Vimaddana  (nt.)  [vi  +  maddana]  crushing,  destroying 
VvA  232. 

Vimana  (adj.)  [vi  +  mano]  i.  perplexed,  consternated 
Miln  23,  118;  PvA  274.  —  2.  infatuate  Th  2,  380. — 
3.  distracted,  distressed  Th  i,  1051  ;  J  vi.523. 

Vimariyadikata  (adj.)  [vi  +  mariyada  +  kata]  lit.  made 
unrestricted,  i.  e.  delivered,  set  free  S  11173;  111.31 
(vippamutto  °ena  cetasa  viharati) ;  vi.ii  ;  A  v  151  sq. 
—  At  Th  I,  184  V.  1.  for  vipariyadi". 

Vimala  (adj.)  [vi  +  mala]  without  stains,  spotless,  un- 
stained, clean,  pure  A  iv. 340  ;  Sn  378,  476,  519.  637,  1131 
(op.  Nd«  586) ;  J  1.18  ;  Miln  324  ;  DhA  iv.192. 

Vimalayaka  [cp.  Sk.  vimalaka]  a  certain  precious  stone  of 
dark -blue  colour  VvA  1 1 1 . 

Vimina^  (nt.)  [in  the  Pali  meaning  not  V«di&.  Pound  in 
meaning  "  palace-chariot  "  in  the  Mbharata  and  else- 
where in  Epic  Sk.]  lit.  covering  a  certain  space,  measur- 
ing ;  the  def"  given  by  Dhpala  refer  it  to  "  without 
measure,"  i.  e.  immeasurable.  Thus  =vigata-mane 
appamane  mahanta  vara-pasada  VvA  131  ;  =visittha- 
manai),  pamanato  mahantar)  VvA  160.  — Appl''  mean- 
ing :  heavenly  (magic)  palace,  a  kind  of  paradise, 
elysium.  —  i.  General  remarks:  (a)  The  notion  of  the 
vimana  is  peculiar  to  the  later,  fantastic  parts  of  the 
Canon,  based  on  popular  superstition  (Vimana  &  Peta 
V«tthu,  Apadana,  Jataka  and  similar  fairy  tales).  It 
shows  distinct  traces  of  foreign  (Hellenic-Babylonian) 
influence  and  rests  partly  on  tales  of  sea-faring  merchants 
(cp.  location  of  V.  in  mid-ocean).  On  the  other  hand 
it  represents  the  old  (Vedic)  ratha  as  chariot  of  the  gods, 
to  be  driven  at  will  (cp.  below  5,  7.  8).  Thus  at  Vv  16 
(here  as  500  chariots  !).  36.  63.  O4  ;  J  1.59  (deva-vimana- 
sadisa  ratha).  —  (6)  The  vimanas  are  in  remote  parts 
of  the  world  (cp.  the  island  of  the  blessed),  similar  to 
the  elysium  in  Homer's  Odyssey,  e.  g.  iv.563  sq.  :  ir'tj,- 
'HXyffioi^  TTtdiov  Koi  ir  i  i  par  a  yairji-  d9al'aT0i  7r^^;//0t'(7(f 
etc.  (trsl"  G.  Chapman :  "  the  immortal  ends  of  all  the 
earth,  the  fields  Elysian  Fate  to  thee  will  give ;  where 
Rhadamanthus  rules,  and  where  men  live  a  never- 
troubled  life,  where  snow,  nor  show'rs.  por  irksome 
winter  spends  his  fruitless  pow'rs,  but  from  the  ocean 
zephyr  still  resumes  a  constant  breath,  that  all  the 
fields  perfume").  Cp.  Ehni,  Yama  p.  206  sq.  —  (r) 
In  popular  religion  the  influence  of  this  eschatological 
literature  has  been  very  great,  so  great  in  fact  as  to 
make  the  Vimana  and  Petavatthus  &  the  jataka- 
stories,  exemplifying  the  theorj-  of  retribution  as 
appealing  to  an  ordinary  mind  by  vivid  examples  of 
mythology,  greater  favourites  than  any  other  canonical 
book.  From  this  point  of  view  we  have  to  judge  Mhvs 
14,  58;  Petavatthug  Vimanan  ca  sacca-sagyuttai)  eva 
ca  desesi  thero  .  .  .  — •  2 .  The  descriptions  of  the 
Vimanas  are  in  the  most  exuberant  terms.  The 
palaces  (kingdoms  in  miniature)  are  of  gold,  crystal  or 
exquisite  jewels,  their  pillars  arc  studded  with  gems. 


their  glittering  roofs  are  peaked   with   700  pinnacled 
turrets  (VvA  244.   289  ;  also  as  "  innumerable  "   VvA 
188.  or  18.000  Ap.  63).     Surrounded  are  these  towering 
(ucca)  mansions  by  lovely,   well-planned  gardens,  the 
paths  of  which  are  sprinkled  with  gold  dust ;  they  are 
full  of  wishing-trees,  granting  every  desire.     There  is 
a  variety  of  stately  trees,  bearing  heavenly  flowers  & 
fruit,  swaying  gently  in  delicious  breezes.     Lotus  ponds 
with  cool  waters  invite  to  refreshing  baths ;  a  host  of 
birds  mix  their  songs  with  the  strains  of  cymbals  and 
lutes,  played  by  heavenly  musicians.     Angelic  maidens 
perform  their   dances,   filling  the   atmosphere   with   a 
radiant  light  which  shines  from  their  bodies.     Peace  and 
happiness  reign  everywhere,  the  joys  of  such  a  vimaBa 
cannot  be  expressed  in  words.     This  elysium  lasts  for 
aeons  (cira-tthitika  Vv  80'  r  kappa-Uhayin  Th  i.  1190) ; 
in  short  it  is  the  most  heavenly  paradise  which  can  be 
imagined.  —  For  a  monograph  of  vimana  the  Vimana 
Vatthu  and  its  Commentary  should  in  the  first  place 
be  consulted.  —  3.  The  inhabitants  of  the  Vimanas  are 
usually  happy  persons  (or  yakkhas  :  see  Stede.  P.  V .  trsl. 
39-41),  called  devata,  who   have   attained  to  such  an 
exalted  state  through  their  own  merit  (punha  see  foil 
4).  —  Departed  souls  who  have  gone  through  the  Peta- 
stage  are  frequently  such  devas  (at  \'v  1 7''  called  pubba- 
devata).     That  these  are  liable  to  semi-punishment  and 
semi-enjoyment  is   often  emphasized,   and  is   founded 
on  the  character  of  their  respective  kamma :   J   1.240 
(vimana-petiyo  sattahar)  sukhar)  anubhavanti.  sattahai) 
dukkhai));    J    v. 2    (vemanika-peta-bhavena-kammassa 
sarikkhako  vipako  ahosi ;  i.  e.  by  night  pleasures,  by 
day   tortures);   cp.    Pv    11.    12    (see   Stede,    Gespenster- 
geschichlen  des  Peta  Vatthu  p.  106),  m.  7'  ;  PvA  204,  210, 
&  Divy  p.  9.     Expressions  for  these  "  mixed  "  devatas 
who  are  partly  blessed,  partly  cursed  are  e.  g. :  vimana- 
peta  PvA  145.  148,  271.  275  :  f.  vimana-peti  PvA  152,  160. 
186,    190;    vimana   devata    PvA    190;    vemanika-peta 
J  V.2  ;  PvA  244;  DhA  111.192  (as  powerful,  by  the  side 
of  nagas  &  supannas).  —  In  their  appearance  they  are 
like    beautiful    human    beings,     dressed    in    yellowish 
(pita,    expl''    as    "  golden  "    robes    (cp.    the    angels    in 
the   oldest  Christian   apocalyptic  literature :    on   their 
relation  to  Hellenic  ideas  see  e.  g.  A.  Dieterich,  Nekyia, 
Leipzig  1903,  pp.   10-18,  29:  red  &  white  the  colours 
of  the  land  of  the  blessed),   with  gold  and  silver  as 
complementary    outfit    in    person    and    surroundings. 
Thus  throughout  the  Vimana  Vatthu.  esp.  Nos.  36  & 
47  (pita-vimana).     Their  splendour  is  often  likened  to 
that  of  the  moon  or  of  the  morning  star.  —  4.  Origin 
of  Vimanas.     A  vimana  arises  in  the  "  other  world  " 
(paraloka)  at  the  instant  of  somebody  doing  good  (even 
during  the  lifetime  of  the  doer)  and  waits  for  the  entry 
of  the  owner  ;  DhA  ill. 291  sq.     In  the  description  of  the 
vimana  of  the  naga-king  (J  vi.3i5=Vv  84*^)  it  is  said 
on  this  subject :  a  vimana  is  obtained  neither  without 
a  cause  (adhicca),  nor  has  it  arisen  in  the  change  of  the 
seasons,  nor  is  it  self-made  (sayankata),  nor  given  by 
the   gods,   but   "  sakehi   kammehi   apapakehi   pufliiehi 
laddha  "  (i.  e.  won  by  one's  own  sinless  &  meritorious 
deeds).  —  Entering  the  Vimana-paradise  is,  analogous 
to  all  semi-lethal  passing  over  into  enchanted  conditions 
in  fairy  tales,  compared  with  the  awakening  from  sleej) 
(as  in  a  state  of  trance) :  sutta-ppabuddha  DhA  in. 7. 
Of  the  Vimana  itself  it  is  said  that  it  appears  (patur 
ahosi).  e.  g.  VvA  188;  DhA  1.131  ;  or  arises  (uggarichi) 
DhA  III. 291  ;  VvA  221.  —  i. -Location  of  the  Vimanas. 
The    "  vimana "    is    an    individual   paradisiacal   state. 
Therefore  vimanas  are  not  definitely  located  "  Elysian 
Fields."     They  are  anywhere  (in  this  world  as  well  as 
in  the  Beyond),  but  certain  places  are  more  favourable 
for   their   establishment   than    others.     Thus   we   may 
state  that  tear'  iKoxljr  they  are  found  in  the  neighbour- 
hood of  water.     Thus  either  in  the  Ocean  (majjhe  saga- 
rasmir)   Th    i.   1190;   samudda-majjhe  PvA  47),  where 
access  is  possible  only  through  adventures  after  ship- 

VIII— I 


Vimana 


90 


Vimokkha 


wreck  or  similar  causes  (J.  iv.i  sq.  ;  Pv  iv.ii);  or  at 
one  or  the  other  of  the  great  lakes  of  the  Himavant 
(Pv  II. 12),  They  are  in  out-of-the-way  places  ("  end 
of  the  world  ") ;  they  are  also  found  in  the  wilderness  : 
Vv  84  ;  Pv  IV. 3^.  As  (ree-vimanas  with  rukkha-devata 
as  inhabitants  they  occur  e.  g.  at  J  111.310  ;  v.502  ;  Pv 
1.9;  11.9;  PvA  244.  Very  often  they  are  phantas- 
magoHcal  castles  in  the  air.  By  special  power  of  their 
inhabitants  they  may  be  transported  to  any  place  at 
will.  This  faculty  of  transference  is  combined  with  the 
ability  of  extremely  swift  motion  (compared  to  the 
speed  of  thought :  manojava).  Thus  a  golden  palan- 
quin is  suspended  in  mid-air  above  a  palace  at  VvA  6 
(akasa-carin,  sigha-java).  They  are  said  to  be  akasa- 
tthanani  J  vi.117;  SnA  222,  370  (but  the  palace  of 
the  Yakkha  Alavaka  is  bhumma-ttha,  i.  e.  stands  on 
the  ground,  and  is  described  as  fortified:  SnA  222). 
The  place  of  a  (flying)  vimana  may  be  taken  by  various 
conveyances :  a  chair,  an  elephant,  ship,  bed,  litter 
etc.  Or  the  location  of  it  in  the  other  world  is  in  the 
Cittalatavana  (Vv  37),  or  the  Paricchattaka  tree 
(Vv  38),  or  in  the  Catummaharajika-bhavana  (VvA  331). 
—  Later  on,  when  the  theory  of  meritorious  deities  (or 
departed  souls  raised  to  special  rank)  as  vemanika  deva 
was  established,  their  abode  was  luith  their  vimanas 
settled  among  the  Tavatiijsa  (e.  g.  VvA  188,  217,  221, 
244,  289;  DhA  111.291),  or  in  the  Tusita  heaven.  Thus 
Tusita-pura  interchanges  with  Tusita-vimana  at  DhA 
II.  208.  The  latter  occurs  e.  g.  at  DhA  111.173,  219.  — 
6.  The  dimensions  of  the  Vimanas  are  of  course  enor- 
mous, but  harmonious  (being  "  divine  "),  i.  e.  either  of 
equal  extent  in  all  directions,  or  specially  proportioned 
with  significant  numbers.  Of  these  the  foil,  may  be 
mentioned.  The  typical  numbers  of  greatest  frequency 
are  12,  16,  30,  700,  in  connection  with  yojana.  The 
dimensions,  with  ref.  to  which  12  &  16  are  used,  are 
length,  width,  height,  &  girth,  whereas  700  applies 
usually  to  the  height  (DhA  111.291  e.  g.,  where  it  is  said 
to  be  "  over  700  "),  and  the  number  of  turrets  (see  above 
2).  At  VvA  267  (satta-yojana-pamano  ratho)  No.  7 
is  used  for  700  ;  No.  30  (extent)  is  found  e.  g.  at  DhA 
ni.7;  ThA  55;  No.  12  e.  g.  at  J  vi.116;  DhA  in.291  ; 
VvA  6,  217,  221,  244,  246,  291  sq. ;  No.  16  at  VvA  188, 
289.  —  7.  Vimanas  of  sun  and  moon.  A  peculiar 
(late  ?)  idea  is  that  sun  and  moon  have  their  vimanas 
(cp.  Vedic  ratha  =  sun).  There  are  only  very  few 
passages  in  the  post -canonical  books  mentioning  these. 
The  idea  that  the  celestial  bodies  nee  vimanas  ("  immense 
chariots  in  the  shape  of  open  hemispheres "  Kirfel, 
Kosmographie  der  Inder  p.  282)  is  essentially  Jainistic. 
See  on  Jain  Vimanas  in  general  Kirfel,  1.  c.  pp.  7-9, 
292-300.  — In  the  Pali  Com.  we  find  SnA  187,  188 
(canda-vimanat)  bhinditva  =  breaking  up  the  moon's 
palace,  i.  e.  the  moon  itself) ;  and  DhA  111.99  (candima- 
suriya  vimanani  gahetva  atthagsu). — 8.  Other  terms 
for  vimana,  and  specifications.  Var.  other  expressions 
are  used  more  frequently  for  vimana  in  general.  Among 
these  are  ratha  (see  above  1  a);  nagara  (Pv  n.i2^)  : 
pura  (see  above  5,  as  tusita") ;  pasada,  either  as  dibba' 
(DhA  III. 291),  or  vara"  (VvA  130),  or  vimana"  (Vv 
31^°)-  —  The  vimanas  are  specified  as  deva- vimana 
"  heavenly  palace,"  e.  g.  J  1.59  ;  Vism  342  ;  VvA  173  ; 
or  (in  a  still  more  superlative  expression)  brahma- 
vimana,  i.  e:  best  or  most  excellent  magic  palace,  highest 
paradise,  e.  g.  D  1. 1 7  (here  perhaps  "  palace  of  Brahma  ") ; 
III. 28  ("  abode  of  brahmas  "  Rh.  D.) ;  It  15  ;  Vism  108. 
The  latter  expression  is  abbreviated  to  brahma  (nt.) 
"  highest,  best  thing  of  all,"  "  sumraum  bonura,"  para- 
dise, magic  palace :  ThA  47  (Ap.  v.  6)  &  55  (Ap. 
v.  8),  at  both  places  as  sukatag,  i.  e.  well  made. — A 
rather  odd  expression  for  the  paradisiacal  state  (in 
concrete  form)  is  attabhava  (existence,  cp.  Gr.  liwrl) 
Hom.  Od.  IV. 365  ?)  instead  of  vimana,  e.  g.  DhA  1.131 
(tigavuta-ppamana) ;  ni.7  (id.). —9.  Various.  Of  in- 
numerable   passages    in    the   books    mentioned    above 


(under  i)  only  the  foil,  may  be  given  for  ref.  :  J  111.310, 
398,  405;  V.165,  171;  VI. 117  sq.,  120  sq.  ;  Ap  35,  55, 
59  ;  Davs  iv.54  (acalar)  v.  antalikkhamhi  navai)  gati- 
virahitar)  ambhorasi-majjhamhi  disva) ;  and  Vimana 
Vatthu  throughout.  Of  passages  in  the  4  older  Nikayas 
we  have  only  A  11.33  (ye  deva  digh'  ayuka  uccesu  vima- 
nesu  cira-tthitika).  At  S  1.12  =23  we  should  read  "  na 
ca  manag  "  for  "  na  vimanar)  "  (K.S.  1.18). 

Vimana'  [vi-t-mana]  disrespect,  contempt  Sn  887  ("dassin 
showing  contempt). 

Vimanana  (nt.)  [vi -(- manana]  disrespect,  contempt  D 
III.  190  (a°) ;  Miln  377,  386. 

Vimanita  [pp.  of  vimaneti]  treated  with  contempt  A  in.  158, 
160. 

Vimaneti  [vi -1- maneti]  to  disrespect,  to  treat  with  con- 
tempt Vin  11.260  ;  Sn  888;  Nd^  297.  —  pp.  vimanita. 

Vimukha  (adj.)  [vi-l-mukha]  turning  away  from,  averted, 
neglectful  Mhvs  22,  80  ;  PvA  3  (dhamma-sanfla°),  269 
(carita"). 

Vimuccati  [vi-l-muccati.  Pass,  of  muiicati]  to  be  released, 
to  be  free  (of  passion),  to  be  emancipated  M  1.352  ; 
S  11.94,  124;  III. 46,  189;  IV.86  ;  v. 218;  A  IV. 126  sq., 
135.  179;  Sn  755;  Pug  61,  68;  Sdhp  613.  —  aor.  3"* 
pi.  vimuccigsu  Sn  p.  149.  —  pp.  vimutta.  See  also 
(an)upada  &  (an)upadaya.  —  Caus.  vimoceti  to  cause 
to  be  released  or  emancipated,  to  set  free  A  11. 196 
(cittag) ;  Vin  111.70  (id.). — grd.  vimocaniya  A  11. 196. 

Vimutta  [pp.  of  vimuficati]  freed,  released,  intellectually 
emancipated  Vin  1.8  ;  A  iv.75,  179,  340  ;  v.29 ;  D  111.97, 
100,  133,  258;  S  1.23,  35;  III. 13,  53,  137;  Sn  354,  475. 
522,  877,  1071  sq.,  iioi,  1114;  Nd'  283;  Nd''  587; 
Pv  IV. i'^  (araha-l-);  Vism  410.  —  Often  as  cittag  v. 
an  emancipated  heart,  e.  g.  D  1.80  ;  A  in. 21  ;  S  1.46, 
141  ;  III. 90  ;  IV. 164;  V.157  (here  taken  by  Mrs.  Rh.  D. 
at  S  VI.93,  Index,  as  "  unregulated,  distrait  ") ;  Sn  975  ; 
Nd^  284 ;  Vbh  197.  ubhatobhaga"  emancipated  in 
both  ways  (see  Dial  11.  70)  D  11. 71  ;  in. 105,  253  ;  S  1.191  ; 
A  1.73  ;  iv.io,  77,  453  ;  v.23  ;  M  1.439.  477  sq.  —  paiiiia", 
emancipated  by  insight,  freed  by  reason  (see  Dial. 
11.68)  S  1. 191  ;  II. 123  ;  D  11.70  ;  III. 105,  254  ;  M  1.439,  477. 
— saddha"  freed  by  faith  A  1.73  ;  iv.io,  77  ;  v.23  ;  Ps  11.52  ; 
M  1.439,  477.  — anupada  vimutta  freed  without  any 
further  clinging  to  the  world  M  1.486;  S  11. 18;  in. 59; 
IV. 83  and  passim. 

-atta  having  an  emancipated  self  S  in. 46,  55,  58 ; 
A  IV. 428.  -ayatana  point  or  occasion  of  emancipation, 
of  which  there  are  5,  viz.  hearing  the  Dhamma  taught 
by  the  Master,  teaching  it  oneself,  reciting  it,  pondering 
over  it,  understanding  it  A  in. 21  sq. ;  D  in. 241,  279; 
Ps  1.5. 

Vimutti  (f.)  [fr.  vimuccati]  release,  deliverance,  emanci- 
pation D  1.174;  ni.288  ;  S  v. 206  sq.  (abhijanati),  222 
(ariya"),  266,  356;  A  11.247,  111.165  (yathabhutai)  paja- 
nati),  242  ;  Sn  54,  73,  725  sq. ;  J  1.77,  78,  80  ;  Ps  1.22  ; 
II. 143  sq.  ;  Nd'  21  ;  Pug  27,  54  sq.  ;  Vbh  86,  272  sq., 
392  (miccha")  Nett  29;  Vism  410;  Sdhp  614. — ceto° 
(&  paiifia")  emancipation  of  heart  (and  reason)  D  1.156  ; 
in. 78,  108,  247  sq.,  273;  S  1. 120;  n.214;  IV. 119  sq. ; 
v. 1 18  sq.,  289  sq.  ;  A  1. 123  sq.,  220  sq. ;  243  ;  11.36,  87, 
214  ;  in. 20,  131,  400  ;  iv.83,  314  sq.  ;  v.io  sq. ;  Vbh  344  ; 
Nett  40,  43,  81  sq.,  127.  — samma"  right  or  true  eman- 
cipation A  11.222  sq. ;  v.327;  Ps  1.107;  11. 173. — See 
also  arahatta,  upekkha,  khandha  ii.A,  dassana,  phala, 
metta. 

-rasa  the  essence  of  emancipation  A  1.36 ;  iv.203 ; 
PvA  287.  -sara  substance  or  essence  of  emancipation 
A  11.141,  243  ;  IV. 385. 

Vimokkha  (&  Vimokha)  [fr.  vi-i-muc,  cp.  mokkha'] 
deliverance,    release,    emancipation,    dissociation   from 


Vimocana 


91 


Virajjati 


the  things  of  the  world.  Arahantship  D  11.70,  in); 
iii-3'(.  35.  230,  288;  M  1. 196  (samaya°  &  asamaya") ; 
S  1. 159  (cetaso  v.);  11.53,  123;  111.121  ;  iv.33  ;  A  11.87; 
IV. 316;  v.ii  ;  Vin  v. 164  (cittassa) ;  Sn  1071  (which  Nd* 
588  expl"  as  "  agga  "  etc..  thus  strangely  taking  it  in 
meaning  of  mokkha',  perhaps  as  edifying  etym.) ;  Nd- 
466  (in  expl°  of  Bhagava)  ;  Ps  1.22  ;  11.35  (as  68  !),  243  ; 
Pug  II  sq.  :  Vbh  342  ;  Dhs  248  ;  Nett  90,  100.  1 19,  126  ; 
Vism  13,  668  sq. ;  Miln  159  ;  PvA  98  ;  Sdhp  34,  264.  — 
The  three  vimokkhas  are :  suiiiiato  v.,  animitto  v., 
appanihito  v.  Ps  11.35 ;  Vism  658.  The  eight  vimok- 
khas or  sta,ges  of  emancipation,  are :  the  condition 
of  rupi,  ariipa-saiirii,  recognition  of  subha,  realiza- 
tion of  akas&naric'ayatana,  of  vifiiian'Ananc'ayatana, 
akificaiifi'ayataiia,  neva-safifia-n'Ssanfi'ayatana,  sanna- 
vedayita-nirodha  D  111.262  (cp.  Dial.  111.242),  A  1.40; 
:v.3o6  ;  Vbh  342  ;  expl''  in  detail  at  Ps  11.38-40.  [cp. 
BSk.  astau  vimoksah,  e.  g.  AvS  11.69,  153.]  — In 
sequence  jhana  vimokkha  samadhi  samapatti  (magga 
phala)  at  Vin  1.97,  i04;ni9i  ;  iv.25  ;  A  111.417,  419; 
V.34,  38  ;  Vbh  342.  —  See  also  jhana. 

Vimocana  (nt.)  [vi-l-mocana]  I.  letting  loose,  discharging 
Dhtm  216  (assu°).  —  2.  release  from,  doing  away  with 
Mhvs  35,  73  (antaraya°). 

Vimoceii  see  vimuccati. 

Viznohita  [pp.  of  vi-l-moheti]  deluded,  bewildered  Sdhp 
363. 

Vimba  is  another  spelling  for  bimba  at  S  v. 2 1  7.  Cp.  BSk. 
vimbaka  (form  of  face)  Divy  172,  525. 


Vimhaya  [cp.  Sk.  vismaya.  vi-fsmi]  astonishment,  sur- 
prise, disappointment  J  v.69  (in  expl"  of  vyamhita) ; 
Mhvs  5,  92  ;  SnA  42  (explaining  "  vata  "),  256  (do.  for 
"  ve  "  =aho) ;  DA  1.43  ;  VvA  234,  329. 

Vimhapaka  (adj.)  [fr.  vimhapati]  deceiving,  dismaying 
SnA  i^g  (=kuhaka). 

Vimhapana  (nt.)  [fr.  vimhapeti]  dismaj-ing,  deceiving, 
disappointing  Vism  24  (in  expl"  of  kuhana) ;  Dhtp  633 
(id). 

Vimhapeti  [Cans,  of  *vimhayati=vi-l-smi]  to  astonish,  to 
cau.se  dismay  to,  to  deceive  Mhvs  17,  44;  DA  1.91  (in 
expl"  of  kuhaka). 

Vimhita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  vi-fsmi,  cp.  mihita]  astonished, 
discouraged,  dismayed  J  vi.270  (su°  very  dismayed); 
Miln  122  ;  Mhvs  6,  19;  Davs  11.80. 

Viya  (indecl.)  [another  form  of  iva,  viA  'via  (so  some 
Prakrits;  Pischel  Prk.  Gr.,  §  143,  336)>viya.  Pischel, 
Prk.  Gr.  §  336,  337  derives  it  fr.  viva  =  v'  iva]  i.  part 
of  comparison  :  like,  as  ;  stands  for  iva  (usually  in  verse) 
after  a:  Sn  420  (jatima  v.);  Pv  1.8^  (varina  v.);  or  o: 
Su  580  (vajjho  v.),  818  (kapano  v.);  or  rj  :  Sn  381 
(vajantag  v.).  689  (nekkhai)  v.).  —  2.  dubitative 
particle:  na  viya  maiiiie  I  suppose  not  M  11.121. — 
Cp.  bya. 

Viya°  the  diaeretic  form  (for  sake  of  metre)  of  vya°  [  =  vi-H 
a°],  which  see  generally.     Cp.  the  identical  veyya". 

Viyatta  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  vyakta,  vi-(-pp.  of  anj]  determined, 
of  settled  opinion,  learned,  accomplished  ;  only  in  stock 
phrase  savaka  viyatta  vinita  visarada  (which  Rh.  D. 
trsl"  "  true  hearers,  wise  and  well-trained,  ready  etc." 
Dial.  II.  114)  at  D  1I.104=A  iv.3lo=S  v.26o=Ud  63. 
The  BSk.  (at  Divj-  202)  has  sravakah  (for  bhik- 
khu  !)  pandita  bhavisyanti  vyakta  vinita  vi^aradah. — 
2.  separated,  split,  dissenting,  heretic  Sn  800  {=vavat- 
thita  bhinna  dvejjhapanna  etc.  Nd^  io8 ;  =bhinna 
SnA  530).     Cp.  the  two  meanings  of  vavatthita  (  = 'vyak- 


ta), which  quasi -correspond  to  viyatta  1  &  2  At  this 
passage  the  v.  1.  (all  SS  of  the  Commentary)  viyutta 
is  perhaps  to  be  perferred  to  viyatta. 

Note.  It  is  to  be  noted  that  viyatta  in  §  1  does  not 
occur  in  poetrj-,  but  seems  to  have  spelling  viy°  because 
of  the  foil,  vinita  and  visarada.     Cp.  vyatta  &  veyyatta. 

Viyatti  (f)  [cp.  Sk.  vyakti]  distinctness  Dhtp  366  & 
Dhtm  593  (in  def  of  bru).     Cp.  veyyatti. 

Viyakaia  [vi-l-akara]  preparation,  display,  distinction, 
splendour,  majesty  Sn  299  (=sampatti  SnA  319). 

Viyacikkbati  in  verse  at  Sn  1090  for  vyacikkhati,  i.  e. 
vi-l-acikkhati,  to  tell,  relate,  explain. 

Viyapanna  [vi -1- apanna,  pp.  of  vi-l-apajjati  cp.  vyapaj- 
jatij  gone  down,  lost,  destroyed  Sn  314  (in  verse  ;  gloss 
viyavatta.  The  former  expl""  as  "  nattha,"  the  latter 
as  "  viparivattitva  aniiatha-bhuta  "  at  SnA  324). 

Viyayata  [vi-i-ayata]  stretched  out  or  across  J  111.373 
(in  verse). 

Viyaiambba  [vi -1- arambha]  striving,  endeavour,  under- 
taking Sn  953  (expl""  as  the  3  abhisankharas,  viz. 
puiiiia°,  apuniia°  &  aneiija°  at  Nd'  442). 

Viyiilha  [apparently  vi-l-ulha,  pp.  of  viyuhati,  but  mixed 
in  meaning  with  vi-l-Qha  (of  V8h)=v5-uha]  massed, 
heaped;  thick,  dense  (of  fighting)  M  i.86=Nd2  jggS 
(ubhato  viyulhar)  sangamag  massed  battle  on  both 
1  sides);  A  111.94,  99  (sangama,  cp.  S  iv.308) ;  J  vi.275 
(balaggani  viyulhani ;  C.  =pabbulha-vasena  thitani 
where  pabbulha  evidently  in  meaning  "  sambadha."  — 
2.  put  in  array,  prepared,  imminent  J  11.336  (marane 
viyijPie=paccupatthite  C).     Cp.  saijyiilha. 

Viyuhati  [vi-l-uh,  a  differentiated  form  of  vah]  to  take 
away,  carry  off,  remove  Vin  111.48  (pagsur)  vyuhati) ; 
J  I.I  77,  199  (pagsui)),  238,  331  (kaddamai)  dvidha 
viyuhitva) ;  111.52  (vaHkari) ;  iv.265  (parjsur)) ;  vi.448 
(valukao);  DhsA  315;  DhA  11.38;  III. 207  (pagsug). — 
pp.  viyulha.     Cp.  sagyuhati. 

Viynhana  (nt.)  [fr.  viyflhati]  removing,  removal  Vism  302 
(pagsu°). 

Viyoga  [vi-)-yoga  2]  separation  J  vi.482  ;  Mhvs  19,  16 
(Mahabodhi") ;  PvA  160,  161  (pati°  from  her  husband); 
Sdhp  77,  164. 

Viyyati  [Pass,  of  vayati'  or  vinati.  The  Vedic  is  uyate] 
to  be  woven  Vin  in. 259.  —  pp.  vita*. 

Viracita  [vi-t-racita]  i.  put  together,  composed,  made 
VvA  14.  183. — 2.  ornamented  ThA  257;  VvA  188. 

Viiaja  (adj.)  [vi-(-rajo]  free  from  defilement  or  passion, 
stainless,  faultless  Vin  1.294  (agamma  maggag  virajag) ; 
Sn  139,  520,  636,  1 105  (see  exegesis  at  Nd^  590);  iW 
III. 3'  (  =  vigata-raja,  niddosa  PvA  189);  DhA  iv.142, 
187;  DA  1.237.  Often  in  phrase  virajag  vitamalag 
dhamma-cakkhug  udapadi  "  there  arose  in  him  the 
stainless  eye  of  the  Arahant,"  e.  g.  Vin  1.16;  S  iv.47. 
—virajag  (H-asokag)  padag  "the  stainless  ( -l- painless) 
element  "  is  another  expression  for  Nibbana,  e.  g. 
S  1V.210;  A  IV. 157,  160;  It  37,  46;  Vv  i6»;  similarly 
thanag  (for  padag)  Pv  11.3"  (=sagga  PvA  89). 

Virajjaka  (adj.)  [vi-t-rajja-l-ka]  separated  from  one's 
kingdom,  living  in  a  foreign  country  VvA  336. 

Viiajjati  [vi -1- raj jati]  to  detach  oneself,  to  free  oneself  of 
passion,  to  show  lack  of  interest  in  (loc).  S  11.94.  '^s 
(nibbindag  [ppr.]  virajjati);  111.46.  189;  iv.2,  86; 
A  V.3  ;  Sn  739  =  S  iv.205  (tattha) ;  Th  1,  247;  Sn  813 
(na  rajjati  na  virajjati),  853  ;  Nd'  138,  237;  Miln  245  ; 
Sdhp  613.  —  pp.  viratta.  —  Caus.  virajeti  to  put  away. 


Virajjana 


92 


Virajeti 


to  estrange  (ace.)  from  (loc),  to  cleanse  (oneself)  of 
passion  (loc),  to  purify,  to  discard  as  rdga  D  11.51  ; 
S  i.i6  =  Sn  171  (ettha  chandai)  v.=vinetva  viddhai)- 
setva  SnA  213);  S  iv.i7  =  Kvu  178;  A  11. 196  (rajani- 
yesu  dhammesu  cittar)  v.);  Sn  139,  203;  Th  i,  282; 
Pv  II. 13"  (itthi-cittar)=viratta-citta  PvA  168);  ThA 
49;  DhA  1.327  (itthi-bhave  chandar)  v.  to  give  up  desire 
for  femininity).  —  pp.  virajita. 

Virajjana  (nt.)  [fr.  virajjati ;  cp.  rajjana]  discolouring 
J  III. 148  (rajjana+  ). 

Virajjhati  [vi+radh;  cp.  Sk.  viradhyati :  see  radheti'] 
to  fail,  miss,  lose  S  iv.117;  J  1.17,  490  (aor.  virajjhi) ; 
11.432  (id.) ;  PvA  59.  —  pp.  viraddha.  —  Caus.  vira- 
dheti  (q.  v.). 

Viiaqa  (adj.  nt.)  [vi  +  rana]  without  fight  or  harm,  peace 
Sdhp  579. 

Virata  [pp.  of  viramati]  abstaining  from  (abl.)  Sn  59,  531, 
704,  900,  1070 ;  Nd^  314 ;  Nd^  591  ;  VvA  72  ;  Sdhp  338. 

Virati  (f)  [vi+rati]  abstinence  Mhvs  20,  58.  The  three 
viratis  given  at  DA  1.305  (  =  veramani)  are  sampatta", 
samadana",  setughata"  (q.  v.).  Cp.  DhsA  154  (tisso 
viratiyo),  218;  Sdhp  215,  341  &  Cpd.  244,  n.  2. 

Viratta  [pp.  of  virajjati]  dispassioned,  free  from  passion, 
detached,  unattached  to,  displeased  with  (loc.)  S  111.45 
(rupadhatuya  cittar)  virattar)  vimuttar)) ;  Sn  204 
(chandaraga"),  235  ("citta  ayatike  bhavasmig);  A  v. 3, 
313;  J  v.233  (mayi);  Sdhp  613. 

Viraddha  [pp.  of  virajjhati]  failed,  missed,  neglected 
S  V.23  (ariyo  maggo  v.),  179  (satipatthana  viraddha), 
254,  294:  Ndi  512;  J  I.I  74,  490:  11.384;  IV. 71,  49'7; 
Nett  132. 

Viiaddhi  (f)  (missing,  failure  ?)  at  Vin  1.359  is  uncertain 
reading.  The  vv.  11.  are  visuddhi,  visandi  &  visandhi, 
with  expl""  "  viddhatthana  "  &  "  viraddhatthana  "  : 
see  p.  395. 

Viraudha  [vi  +  randha^]  opening;  defect,  flaw  Nd^  165. 

ViramaQa  (nt.)  (-")  [fr.  viramati]  abstinence,  abstaining 
from  {-")  Mhvs  14,  48  (ucca-seyya°). 

Viramati  [vi  +  ramati]  to  stop,  cease;  to  desist  (abl.), 
abstain,  refrain  Sn  400  (Pot.  ^meyya),  828  (Pot.  °me), 
925  ;  Nd'  168,  376 ;  Th  2,  397  (aor.  viramasi,  cp.  Geiger, 
P.Gr.  §  165I);  Pv  IV. 3^^  (papadassanag,  ace);  Miln 
85 ;  PvA  204. 

Virala  (&  Vira]a)  (adj.)  [connected  with  Vedic  fte  exclud- 
ing, without,  &  nirfti  perishing ;  cp.  also  Gr.  Iptifioc 
lonely  ;  Lat.  rarus=rare]  i.  sparse,  rare,  thin  Th  2,  254 
(of  hair,  expH  as  viluna-kesa  ThA  210,  i.  e.  almost  bald  ; 
spelling  J);  DhsA  238  (J);  DhA  1.122  ("cchanna  thinly 
covered) ;  PvA  4  (in  ratta-vanna-virala-mala  read 
better  with  v.  1..  as  ratta-kanavlra-mala,  cp.  J  111.59). 

Viralita  [pp.  of  Denom.  of  virala  =  viraleti,  cp.  Sk.  virala- 

yate  to  be  rare]  thin,  sparse,  rare  Davs  iv.24  (a°),  with 
V.  1.  viraUta. 

Virava  (&  °rava)  [vi  +  rava  &  rava;  cp.  Vedic  virava] 
shouting  out,  roaring;  crying  (of  animals)  J  1.25,  74 
(a),  203  (of  elephants) ;  v.9  (a,  of  swans). 

Viravati  [vi  +  ravati]  i .  to  shout  (out),  to  cry  aloud  ;  to 
utter  a  cry  or  sound  (of  animals)  J  11.350  (kiki  sakuno 
viravi) ;  v.206 ;  Mhvs  12,  49  (maharavai)  viravirjsu 
mahajana) ;  PvA  154,  217,  245  (vissarag),  279  (id.); 
Sdhp  179,  188,  291. — 2.  to  rattle  J  1.51. — Cans, 
viraveti  to  sound  Mhvs  21,  15  (ghantar)  to  ring  a  bell). 

Viraha  (adj.)  [vi  +  raho]  empty,  rid  of,  bar,  without  PvA 
137.  139  (sila°). 


Virahita  (adj.)  [vi  +  rahita]  empty,  exempt  from,  rid  of, 
without  Miln  330  (dosa°) ;  PvA  139. 

Viraga  [vi  +  raga]  i .  absence  of  raga,  dispassionateness, 
indifference  towards  (abl.  or  loc.)  disgust,  absence  of 
desire,  destruction  of  passions  ;  waning,  fading  away, 
cleansing,  purifying ;  emancipation,  Arahantship.  — • 
D  III. 130  sq.,  136  sq.,  222,  243,  251,  290;  S  1.136; 
III. 19  sq.,  59  sq.,  163,  189;  IV.33  sq.,  47,  226,  365; 
V.226,  255,  361  ;  A  1. 100,  299  ;  11.26  ;  III. 35,  85,  325  sq. ; 
IV. 146  sq.,  423  sq. ;  v. 112,  359;  Th  i,  599;  Sn  795; 
Ps  11.220  sq.  ;  Nd'  100;  Kvu  600  =Dh  273=Nett  188 
(virago  settho  dhammanai));  Dhs  163;  Nett  16,  29; 
Vism  290  (kliaya"  &  accanta")  293.  —  Often  nearly 
synonymous  with  nibbana,  in  the  description  of  which 
it  occurs  frequently  in  foil,  formula;  tanhakkhaya 
viraga  nirodha  nibbana,  e.  g.  S  1.136  ;  Vin  1.5  ;  A  11. 1 18  ; 
It  88  ;  —  or  comb''  with  nibbida  viraga  nirodha  upasama 
.  .  .  nibbana,  e.  g.  M  1.431  ;  S  11.223  '•  cp.  nibbana 
II. B'  &  III. 8.  —  In  other  connection  (more  objectively 
as  "destruction");  aniccata  sankharanai)  etc.,  vipari- 
nama  viraga  nirodha,  e.  g.  S  111.43;  (as  "ceasing, 
fading  away  "  ;)  khaya(-dhamma  liable  to),  vaya", 
viraga',  nirodha"  M  1.500;  S  11.26.  —  2.  colouring, 
diversity  or  display  of  colour,  dye,  hue  (=raga  l)  J  1.89 
(nana°-samujjala  blazing  forth  different  colours) ;  395 
(nana"  variously  dyed) ;  PvA  50  (nana°-vanna-samuj- 
jala). 

Viragata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  raga]  disinterestedness,  absence  of 
lust  Kvu  212  =Ud  10. 

Viragita  (adj.)  [fr.  vi-l- *rageti,  Denom.  of  raga?]  at 
J  v.96  is  not  clear.  It  is  said  of  beautiful  women  & 
expl""  by  C.  as  vilagga-sarira,  tanumajjha,  i.  e.  "  having 
slender  waists."  Could  it  be  "excited  with  passion" 
or  "  exciting  passion  "?  Or  could  it  be  an  old  mis- 
reading for  virajita^  ?  It  may  also  be  a  distorted 
vilaka  (q.  v.)  or  vilaggita. 

Viiagin  (adj.)  [fr.  viraga  2,  cp.  ragin]  i.  discoloured,  fading 
in  colour  J  111.88  (fig.  saddha  aviragini),  148  (raga° 
fading  in  the  original  dye,  of  citta). — 2.  changing, 
reversing  A  111.416  (of  dukkha :  dandha"  &  khippa"  of 
slow  &  quick  change  ;  v.  1.  M,.,  is  viparagi,  which  may 
represent  a  vipariyayi,  i.  e.  changing). 

Viraguna  in  meaning  "  fading  away,  waning  "  in  verse  at 
It  69  (of  vinnana)  is  doubtful  reading.  It  corresponds 
to  viragadhamma  of  the  prose  part  (viragudh"  vv.  11.). 
The  V.  1.  is  pabhanguna  (which  might  be  preferable, 
unless  we  regard  it  as  an  explanation  of  viragin,  if  we 
should  write  it  thus). 

Virageti  [for  viradheti,  as  in  BSk.  viragayati  (e.  g.  Divy 
'31'  '33)  to  displease,  estrange,  the  fig.  meaning  of 
virageti  like  BSk.  arageti  for  Pali  aradheti  in  lit  &  fig. 
meanings]  to  fail,  miss  ;  only  at  M  1.327  (puriso  naraka- 
papate  papatanto  hatthehi  ca  padehi  ca  pathavii)  vira- 
geyya  "  would  miss  the  earth  "  ;  differently  Neumann : 
"  Boden  zu  fassen  suchte,"  i.  e.  tried  to  touch  ground). 
—  Perhaps  also  in  viragaya  (either  as  ger.  to  virageti 
or  as  instr.  to  viraga  in  sense  of  viradha(na))  Pv  i.ii' 
(sukhar)  viragaya.  with  gloss  viragena,  i.  e.  spurning 
one's  good  fortune  ;  expH  as  virajjhitva  viradhetva  at 
P\'A  59).  Cp.  viraye  (  =  virage  ?)  at  Th  i,  11 13  (see 
viradheti). 

Virajati  [vi-l-rajati]  to  shine  PvA  189  (=virocati). 

Virajita^  [pp.  of  virajeti]  cleansed,  discarded  as  raga,  given 
up  S  IV. 158  (dosa) ;  J  111.404  (=pahina  C). 

Virajita^  [pp.  of  Caus.  of  virajati]  shining  out,  resplendent 
J  11.33  (mora  .  .  .  suratta-raji-virajita  here  perhaps 
=  streaked  ?).     Cp.  viragita. 

Virajeti  see  virajjati. 


Viradhana 


93 


Vilanga 


Viradhana  (f.)  [fr.  viradheti]  failing,  failure  D  11.287 ; 
A  V.211  sq. 

Viradhita  [pp.  of  viradheti]  failed,  missed,  lost  J  v. 400  ; 
Pv  IV. i'  (=pariccatta  C). 

Viradheti  [vi  +  radheti',  or  Caus.  of  virajjhati]  to  miss, 
omit,  fail,  transgress,  sin  Sn  899;  Th  i.  37,  1113  viraye 
for  viradhaya  C,  may  be  virage,  cp.  Brethren  375*  & 
see  virageti) ;  Nd'  312  ;  J  i.i  13  ;  Ap.  47  ;  PvA  59.  —  Cp. 
virageti. — pp.  viradhita. 

Virava  see  virava. 

Viriccati  [Pass,  of  vi+  riflcati]  to  get  purged  D  11. 128  (ppr. 
viriccamana).  —  pp.  viritta.  —  Cp.  vireka. 

Viritta  [pp.  of  viriccati]  purged  Miln  214. 

Viriya  (nt.)  [fr.  vira;  cp.  Vedic  virya  &  viria]  lit.  "  state 
of  a  strong  man,"  i.  e.  vigour,  energy,  effort,  exertion. 
On  term  see  also  Dhs.  Irsl"  §  13  ;  Cpd.  242.  —  D  iii.i  13, 
120  sq.,  255  sq.  ;  S  11. 132,  206  sq.  ;  Sn  79,  184,  353,  422, 
531,  966,  1026  (chanda°) ;  Nd'  476,  487;  Nd^  394; 
J  I.I  78  (viriyar)  karoti,  with  loc);  Pug  71;  Vbh  10; 
Nett  16,  28;  Tikp  60,  63;  Miln  3O  ;  Vism  160  (°upek- 
kha),  462  ;  KhA  96:  SnA  489;  DhA  iv.231  ;  DA  1.63; 
DhsA  120;  VvA  14;  PvA  98,  129;  Sdhp  343,  517. — 
accaraddha°  too  much  exertion  M  in. 159;  A  111.375  ; 
opp.  atilina"  too  little  ibid  ;  utthana"  initiative  or 
rousing  energy  S  1.2 1 ,  217:  A  in. 76  ;  iv.282  ;  ThA  267  ; 
PvA  129  ;  nara°  manly  strength  J  iv.478,  487.  -viriyag 
ara(m)bhati  to  put  forth  energy,  to  make  an  efiort 
S  11.28  ;  IV. 125  ;  V.9,  244  sq.  ;  A  1.39,  282,  296  ;  11. 15  = 
IV. 462.  —  As  adj.  (-°)  in  alina°  alert,  energetic  J  1.22  ; 
araddha°  full  of  energy,  putting  forth  energy,  strenuous 

5  1.53,  166,  198;  11.29,  207  sq.  ;  IV. 224;  V.225;  A  1.4, 
12;  11.76,  228  sq. ;  111.65,  127;  IV. 85,  229,  291,  357; 
V.93,  95,  153,  335  ;  J  I. no  ;  ossattha"  one  who  has  given 
up  efiort  J  I.I  10  ;  hina°  lacking  in  energy  It  34  (here  as 
Viriya,  in  metre).  — v.  is  one  of  the  indriyas,  the  balas 

6  the  sambojjhangas  (q.  v.). 

-&rambha  "  putting  forth  of  energy,"  application  of 
exertion,  will,  energy,  resolution  D  111.252  ;  S  11.202  ; 
IV. 175;  A  1.12  ;  III. 117;  IV. 15  sq.,  280;  v. 123  sq.  ;  Ps 
1. 103  sq. ;  Vbh  107,  194,  208;  DhsA  145,  X46.  -indriya 
the  faculty  of  energy  D  in. 2  39,  278  ;  S  v.ig6sq. ;  Dhs  13  ; 
Vbh  123;  Nett  7,  15,  19;  VbhA  276.  -bala  the  power 
of  energy  D  in. 229,  253;  A  iv.363  ;  J  1.109.  -saQvara 
restraint  by  will  Vism  7 ;  SnA  8 ;  DhsA  351. 

Viriyata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  viriya]  manliness,  energy,  strength 
M  1. 19  ;  VvA  284. 

Viriyavant  (adj.)  [viriya+vant]  energetic  A  1.236;  Sn  528, 
531  (four-syllabic).  548  (three-syllabic);  Vism  3  (=ata- 
pin) ;  Sdhp  475. 

Viruiaka  (viija°)  lute-player  J  vi.51  (=viija-vadaka  C). 
See  rujaka. 

Vimjjhati  [vi-l-rujjhati]  to  be  obstructed  Sn  73  (aviruj- 
jhamana  unobstructed);  J  vi.12. 

Vimjjhana  (nt.)  [fr.  virujjhati]  obstructing  or  being 
obstructed,  obstruction,  J  vi.448. 

Virata  (nt.)  [vi-l-rutaj  noise,  sound  (of  animals),  cry  Sn 
927:  expl"*  as  "  virudar)  [spelling  with  d,  like  ruda  for 
ruta]  vuccati-miga-cakkai)  ;  miga-cakka-pathaka  [i.  e. 
experts  in  the  ways  of  animals ;  knowers  of  auspices] 
migacakkai)  adisanti  "  at  Nd'  382  ;  and  as  "  mig'  adinai) 
vassitai)  "  at  SnA  564.  The  passage  is  a  little  doubtful, 
when  we  compare  the  expression  virutan  ca  gabbha- 
karanag  at  Sn  927  with  the  passage  viruddha-gabbha- 
karanag  at  D  i.ii  (cp.  DA  1.56),  which  seems  more 
original. 

Viniddha  [pp.  of  vixundhati]  hindered,  obstructed,  dis- 
turbed S  1.236;  Sn  248,  630;  Ndi  239;  Miln  99,  310; 


J  1.97.  —  Often  neg.  a°  unobstructed,  free  S  1.236; 
IV.71  ;  A  111.276  (°ka) ;  Dh  406 ;  Sn  365,  704,  854  ;  VbhA 
i48=Vism  543. 

-gabbha-karana  (using  charms  for)  procuring  abortion 
D  in;  DA  1.96  (expl"*  here  as  first  trying  to  destroy 
the  foetus  and  afterwards  giving  medicine  for  its  preser- 
vation).    See  also  viruta. 

'Vixundhati  [vi-l-rundhati]  fo  obstruct  etc.  Pass,  viruj- 
jhati  (q.  v.).  —  pp.  viruddha.  —  Caus.  virodheti.  (q.  v.). 

Virupa  (adj.)  [vi-l-rupa]  deformed,  unsightly,  ugly  Sn  50  ; 
J  1.47;  IV. 379;  VI. 31,  114;  PvA  24,  32,  47;  Sdhp  85. 

Viru}ha  [pp.  of  virflhati]  having  grown,  growing  S  11.65 
(viiinane  virulhe  ayatii)  punnabbhav'  abhinibbattihoti). 

Virulhi  (f.)  [vi-i-rOlhi,  of  ruh]  growth  M  1.250;  S  111.53; 
A  III. 8,  404  sq.  ;  v. 152  sq.,  161,  350  sq.  ;  It  113  ;  Miln  33  ; 
Mhvs  15,  42  ;  VbhA  196.  — aviriilhi-dhamma  not  liable 
to  growth  Sn  235  ;  DhA  1.245. 

Viruhati  [vi-l-ruhati']  to  grow,  sprout  It  113;  Miln  386; 
DA  1. 120. — Cp.  pati".  ■ — pp.  virOlha.  —  Caus  II.  viru- 
hapeti  to  make  grow,  to  foster  Miln  386. 

Viruhana  (f)  &  °a  (nt.)  [vi-i-ruhana]  growing,  growth 
J  n.323  (f.) ;  Miln  354;  Vism  220;  DA  1.161  ;  PvA  7. 

Vireka  =virecana  ;  Miln  134  (cp.  Vin  1.279). 

Virecana  (nt.)  [vi-l-recana,  ric]  purging,  a  purgative  Vin 
1.206  (°r)  patur)  to  drink  a  p.),  279  (id.) ;  D  1.12  ;  A  v.218  ; 
J  111.48  (sineha"  an  oilv  or  softening  purgative);  DA 
1.98. 

Virecaniya  (adj.)  [grd.  formation  fr.  virecanaj  (one  who 
is)  to  be  treated  with  a  purgative  Miln  169. 

Vireceti  [vi-l-Caus.  of  rificati]  to  purge  Miln  229,  335. 

Virocati  [vi-i-rocati]  to  shine  (forth),  to  be  brilliant  Vin 
II.  296  (tapati,  bhasati,  v.) ;  Sn  378,  550  ;  It  64  (viro- 
care) ;  J  1.18,  89  ;  iv.233  ;  Pv  i.i  1*  ;  11.9'-  ;  in. 3''  (=vira- 
jati  PvA  189);  DhA  1.446  ;  iv.143  ;  DhsA  ^4  ;  PvA  no 
(°amana  =sobhamana),  136  sq.,  157.  Cp.  verocana. — 
Caus.  viroceti  to  illumine  Miln  336. 

Vifodha  [vi -1- rodha']  obstruction,  hindrance,  opposition, 
enmity  S  i.iii  ;  iv.71,  210;  Sn  362  ;  Pug  18,  22  ;  Kvu 
485 ;  Miln  394  ;  DhsA  39.  — avirodha  absence  of 
obstruction,  gentleness  M  ii.io5=Th  i,  875;  Pv  111.7^. 

Virodhana  (adj.  nt.)  [fr.  virodheti]  opposing,  obstruction, 
opposition,  contradiction,  only  neg.  a°  absence  of 
opposition,  J  in. 274,  320,  412  ;  v. 378. 

Virodbita  [pp.  of  virodheti]  obstructed,  rendered  hostile 
Pgdp  90  (or  is  it  viradhita  ?). 

Virodheti  [Caus.  of  virundhati]  to  cause  obstruction,  to 
render  hostile,  to  be  in  disharmony,  to  exasperate 
S  IV. 379=  A  V.320  (which  latter  passage  reads  viggan- 
hati  instead) ;  Sdhp  45,  496.  — -  pp.  virodhita. 

Virosana  (f.)  [vi -(- rosana]  causing  anger  Vbh  86  ;  VbhA  75. 

Vilahlrhft^a  (adj.-nt.)  [vi -H  lakkhaija]  wrong  or  false 
characteristic;  (adj.)  discharacteristic,  i.  e.  inconsistent 
with  characteristics,  discrepant  (opp.  sa°  in  accordance 
with  ch.)  Miln  405  ;  Nett  78 ;  VbhA  250  sq. 

Vilagga  (adj.)  [vi-t-lagga]  1.  stuck  Vin  1.138;  M  1.39.3  — 
2.  slender  (of  waist)  J  v.96  (see  viragita),  216  (see 
vilaka). 

Vilaggita  (adj.)  [vi-(-laggita]  stretched  or  bending  (?), 
slender  J  iv.20  (see  under  vilaka). 

Vilanga  (nt.)  ['Sk.  vi(Janga]  the  plant  Erycibe  paniculata 
Vin  1. 201  (v.  1.  vil°).  —  "thalika  at  Nd'  154  read  as 
bilanga°  (4    v  ). 


Vilanghaka 


94 


Vilokana 


Vilanghaka  [fr.  vilangheti]  in  hattha"  jerking  of  the 
hand,  beckoning  (as  a  mode  of  making  signs)  Vin  1.157  = 
M  1.207  (has  g  for  gh,  cp.  p.  547).  —  Cp.  hattha-vikara. 

Vilanghati  [vi  +  langhati]  to  jump  about,  to  leap  (over) 
Sdhp  168. 

Vilajjati  [vi+Iajjati]  to  be  ashamed,  to  be  bashful,  to 
pretend  bashfulness  J  v. 433. 

Vilapati  [vi  +  Iapati]  I.  to  talk  idly  J  1.496.  —  2.  tolament, 
wail  Th  I,  705;  J  n.156;  V.179;  Miln  275';  ThA  148 
(Ap.  V.  66). 

Vilamba  (adj.)  [vi  +  lamba]  hanging  dovm  ;  only  in  redupl. 
-iter.  cpd.  olamba-vilamba  dropping  or  falling  oS  all 
round  J  iv.380. 

Vilambati  [vi  +  lambati]  to  loiter,  to  tarry,  lit.  "hang 
about  "  J  1. 41 3  ;  DhA  1. 81. 

Vilambin  (adj.)  [vi  +  lambin]  hanging  down,  drooping 
M  1.306  (f.  "ini,  of  a  creeper,  i.  e.  growing  tendrils  all 
over  J . 

Vilaya  [vi  +  laya,  cp.  liyati]  dissolution;  "g  gacchati,  as 
much  as :  "  to  be  digested,"  to  be  dissolved  Miln  67.  — 
adj.  dissolved,  dispersed  Dpvs  1.65. 

Vilasati  [vi  +  lasati]  to  play,  dally,  sport;  to  shine  forth, 
to  unfold  splendour  J  v.38  (of  a  tree  "  stand  herrlich 
da  "  Dutoit),  433  (of  woman) ;  vi.44  (of  a  tree,  vilasa- 
mana  T.).  —  pp.  vilasita. 

Vilasita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  vilasati]  shining;  gay,  plajrful. 
coquettish  J  v. 420. 

Vilaka  (adj.)  [perhaps  =vilagga  (Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  6'i2), 
although  difficult  to  connect  in  meaning]  only  in  f. 
°a  ;  slender  (of  waist) ;  the  expl"  with  vilagga  may  refer 
to  a  comparison  with  a  creeper  (cp.  vilambin  &  J  v.215) 
as  "  hanging  "  ("  climbing  ")  i.  e.  slim,  but  seems  forced. 
See  also  viragita  which  is  expIJ  in  the  same  way.  The 
word  is  peculiar  to  the  "  Jataka  "  style.  —  J  iv.19 
(=sutthu-vilaggita-tanu-majjha) ;  v. 155  (-|-muduka;  C. 
expl'  as  sankhitta-majjha),  215  ("majjha  =vilagga- 
sarira  C),  506  (velli-vilaka-majjha=vilagga-majjha, 
tanu-digha-majjha  C.) ;  VvA  280  ("majjha  for  sumajjhima 
of  Vv  64I3  ;  T,  reads  vilata"). 

Vilapa  [vi  +  lapa]  idle  talk  J  1,490;  v. 24.     Cp.  sar)°. 

Vilapanata  (f.)=  vilapa  Pug  21'. 

Vilasa  [fr.  vilasati]  i.  charm,  grace,  beauty  J  1.470  ;  vi.43  ; 
Mihi  201  ;  ThA  78  ;  PvA  3.  —  desana"  beauty  of  instruc- 
tion DA  1.67;  Vism  524,  541  ;  Tikp  21.  —  2.  dalliance, 
sporting,  coquetry  J  in. 408 ;  v. 436.  vilasa  is  often 
coupled  with  lila  (q.  v.). 

Vilasavant  (adj.)  [fr.  vilasa]  having  splendour,  grace  or 
beauty  Mhvs  29,  25. 

Vilasin  (adj.)  [fr.  vilasa]  shining  forth,  unfolding  splendour, 
possessing  charm  or  grace,  charming  DA  1.40  (v-yama- 
pabha  parikkhepa-vilasini  splendour  shining  over  a 
radius  of  a  vyama). 

Vilikhati  [vi-i-likhati]  i.  to  scrape,  scratch  S  1.124  (bhu- 
rair));  iv.198;  DhsA  260  (fig.  manar)  v.;  in  expl"  of 
vilekha).  —  2.  to  scratch  open  Vin  11. 175.. —  pp. 
vilikhita. 

Vilikhita  [pp.  of  vilikhati]  scraped  off  SnA  207. 

Vilitta  [pp.  of  vilimpati]  anointed  D  1.104  (su-nahata  su- 
vilitta  kappita-kesa-massu) ;  J   111.91  :   iv.442. 

Vilimpati  [vi-l-limpati]  to  smear,  anoint  A  111.57;  J  1.265 
(ger.  °itva) ;  111.277  (ppr.  °anto) ;  Pv  i.io*  (ger.  °itvana) ; 
PvA  62  (°itva). — pp.  vilitta.  —  Cans.  II.  vilimpapeti 
to  cause  to  be  anointed  J  1.50  (gandhehi),  254  (id.). 


Vilivili  (-kriya)  see  biUbilika. 

Vilina  (adj.)  [vi-(-lina,  pp.  of  villyati]  i.  clinging,  sticking 
[cp.  liyati  i]  Vin  1.209  (olina°  sticking  all  over).— 
2.  matured  ("digested"  ?  cp.  vilaya)  J  iv.72  (nava°- 
gosappi  freshly  matured  ghee);  Miln  301  (phalani  ripe- 
fruit). —  3.  [cp.  liji^ti  2]  molten,  i.  e.  refined,  purified 
J  IV.118  (tamba-loha°  molten  or  liquid-hot  copper); 
V.  269  (tamba-loha°,  id.  ;  cp.  C.  on  p.  274  :  vilinar)  tam- 
balohai)  viya  pakkatthitar)  lohitar)  payenti) ;  DhsA  14 
(°suvanna).  —  Cp.  uttatta  in  same  sense  and  the  expl" 
of  velli  as  "  uttatta-ghana-suvanna-rasi-ppabba "  at 
J  V.506  C. 

Viliyati  [vi4- liyati  2]  to  melt  (intrs.),  to  be  dissolved,  to 
perish  J  iv.498 ;  Vism  420  (pabbata,  spelling  here  with 
J ;  Warren  wrong  "  are  hidden  from  view,"  i.  e.  niliyati) ; 
DhsA  336  (phanita-pinda ;  trsl"  not  to  the  point : 
"reduced  or  pounder!  ");  Sdhp  383;  Pgdp  21.  —  pp. 
vilina.  —  Cp.  pa°. 

Viliyana  (nt.)  [fr.  viliyati]  melting,  dissolution  Sdhp  201. 

Viliva  &  Viliva  (adj.)  [Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  compares  Sk,  bilma 
slip.  chip.  Phonetically  viliva  =  Sk.  bilva ;  see  billa] 
I.  made  of  split  bamboo  Vin  11.266  (i).  —  2.  (I)  a  chip 
of  bamboo  or  any  other  reed,  a  slip  of  reed  M  1.566 
(Bdhgh  on  M  1.429) ;  Vism  310  (°maya). 

Vilivakara  [viliva -l-kara]  a  worker  in  bamboo,  a  basket- 
maker  Vin  III. 82  ;  Miln  331  ;  VbhA  222  (°ka  in  simile); 

PvA  175. 

Vilugga  (adj.)  [vi-l-lugga]  broken;  only  in  redupl. -iter, 
cpd,  olugga-vilugga  all  broken  up,  tumbling  to  pieces 
M  1.80,  450. 

Vilutta  [pp.  of  vilumpati]  plundered,  stripped,  robbed, 
ruined  S  1.85  =  J  11.239  ;  J  v.99  ;  vi.44  ;  Miln  303  ;  Mhvs 
33,  71  (corehi). 

Vilumpaka  (adj.)  [fr.  vi-l-lup]  (act.  or  pass.)  plundering 
or  being  plundered  J  1.370  (°cora) ;  11.239  (pass.). 

Vilumpati  [vi  -1-  lumpati]  to  plunder,  rob,  steal,  ruin  S 
1.85-5  11.239;  v.99;  Miln  193;  VvA  100;  DhA  ^11.23. 

—  Pass,  viluppati  J  v. 254  (gloss  for  °lump°  of  p.  253). 

—  pp.    vilutta.  —  Caus.    II.   vilumpapeti   to    incite    to 
plunder  Miln  193;  J  1.263. 

Vilumpana  (nt.)  [fr.  vilumpati]  plundering  DhA  ni.23. 

Vilumpamaiia(ka)  [orig.  ppr.  med.  of  vilumpati]  plundering, 
robbing  J  v.254  ;  PvA  4  (°ka  cora). 

Vilulita  (adj.)  [vi -f- lujita ;  cp.  BSk.  vilulita  Jtm  210] 
stirred,  agitated,  shaken,  disturbed  Davs  iv.54  (bhaya°- 
citta).     Cp.  viloleti. 

VilJina  (adj.)  [vi-t-luna]  cut  off  (always  with  ref.  to  the 
hair)  M  III. 180  =A  1.138;  Miln  11  ;  PvA  47. 

Vilekha  [vi 4- lekha]"  perplexity,  lit.  "scratching"  Vin 
IV. 143  (here  as  f.  °a) ;  Dhs  1256  (mano°) ;  DhsA  260.  — 
The  more  common  word  for  "  perplexity  "  is  vikkhepa. 

Vilepana  (nt.)  [vi-l-lepana]  ointment,  cosmetic,  toilet 
perfume  A  1.107,  212;  11.209;  Th  i,  616  (silar)  v.  set- 
thar).  Cp.  J  111.290);  Pug  51,  58;  Pv  11. 3"  ;  DA  1.77, 
88. 

Vilokana  (nt.)  [vi-t-iok  (loc  =  roc).  see  loka  &  rocati] 
looking,  reflection,  investigation,  prognostication ; 
usually  as  5  objects  of  reflection  as  to  when  &  where 
&  how  one  shall  be  reborn  (paiica-maha-°ani),  consisting 
in  kala,  desa,  dipa,  kula,  mata  (the  latter  as  janetti-ayu 
1.  e.  mother  and  her  time  of  delivery  at  J  1.48)  or  time 
(right  or  wrong),  continent,  sky  (orientation),  family 
(or  clan)  and  one's  (future)  mother:  J  1.48,  49;  DhA 
1.84  ;  as  8  at  Miln  193,  viz.  kala,  dipa,  desa,  kula,  janetti, 
ayu,  masa,  nekkhamma  (i.  e.  the  5-1- period  of  gestation, 
month  of  his  birthday,  and  his  renunciation).  Without 
special  meaning  at  DA  i .  1 94  (alokana  +  ).     Cp .  volokana . 


Vilokita 


95 


Vivatta-cchada 


Vilokita  (nt.)  [pp.  of  viloketi]  a  look  A  n.104,  106  sq.,  210  ; 
Pug  44.  45;  DA  1. 193;  VvA  6  (alokita  +  ). 

Viloketar  [n.  ag.  fr.  viloketi]  one  who  looks  or  inspects 
DA  1. 194  (aloketar  +  ). 

Viloketi  [vi+loketi,  of  lok,  as  in  loka]  to  examine,  study, 
inspect,  scrutinize,  reflect  on  Th  2,  282  ;  J  1.48,  49  ; 
DhA  1.84;  Miln  193;  Mhvs  22,  18. —  pp.  vilokita. — 
Cp.  pa"  &  vo°. 

Vilocana  (nt.)  [vi  +  locana]  the  eye  Davs  1.41  ;  ThA  253. 

Vilopa  [vi  +  lopa]  plunder,  pillage  M  1.456  (maccha°  fish- 
haul);  J  i.j;  HI. 8;  VI. 409;  Dpvs  IX.7  ("kamraa). — 
vilopai)  khadati  to  live  by  plunder  J  vi.131. 

Vilopaka  (adj.)  [fr.  vilopa]  plundering,  living  by  plunder- 
ing J  1.5;  Miln  122  (f.  °ika). 

Vilopiya  (adj.)  [grd.  formation  fr.  vilopa]  to  be  plundered  ; 
neg.  a"  Sdhp  311. 

Vilomatlt  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  viloma]  unseemliness,  repugnance 
SnA  106. 

Viloma  (adj.)  [vi-l-loma]  against  the  grain  (lit.  against 
the  hair),  discrepant,  reversed,  wrong,  unnatural  Vin 
II.  115  (of  civara  :  unsightly);  J  ill. 113;  Dpvs  vii.55  ; 
DhA  1.379  ;  P^-A  87 

Vilomana  (nt.)  [fr.  viloma]  discrepancy,  disagreement, 
reverse  DhsA  253. 

Vilometi  [Denom.  fr.  viloma]  to  dispute,  disagree  with,  to 
find  fault  Nett  22  ;  Miln  29,  295 ;  DhsA  253. 

Vil0]ana  (nt.)  [fr.  vi-t-lul]  &  Vilotana  [fr.  vi-Hu^;  cp. 
Whitney,  Sanskrit  Roots,  1885,  p.  149,  where  themes 
&  their  forms  are  given  by  lajh'  to  roll,  luth^  &  lu^th 
to  rob,  ln4  to  stir  up  (some  forms  of  it  having  meaning 
of  lii9th)  =lal  to  be  lively]  shaking,  stirring  ;  only  found 
in  lexicogr.  literature  as  def  of  several  roots,  viz.  of 
gah  Dhtp  349  ;  Dhtm  504;  math  &  manth  (see  mathati) 
Dhtp  126;  Dhtm  183.     See  also  lulati. 

Viloleti  [vi-l-loleti  or  loleti,  cp.  vilulita]  to  stir,  to  move 
about  J  1.26;  Dpvs  VI. 52. 

Vi]ayhati  [vi-t-dayhati]  to  burn  (intrs.)  J  11.220. 

Vi]ara  at  A  111.122  read  as  bilara  (sasa-bijara  rabbits  & 

cats). 

Vivajjita  [pp.  of  vivajjeti]  i .  abandoning,  abstaining  from 
VvA  75  (°ki!ittha-kamma).  —  2.  avoided  Th  2,  459. — 
3.  distant  from  (abl.)  Miln  131. 

Vivajjeti  [vi-l-vajjeti]  to  avoid,  abandon,  forsake  S  1.43; 
A  V.I 7;  Sn  53  (=parivajj°  abhivajj"  Nd*  592),  399 
(°jjaya),  407  (praet.  °jjayi) ;  Vv  84''  (°jjayatha=pari- 
vajjetha  VvA  346);  J  1.473:  111263,  481  (°jjayi);  v.233 
(Pot.  °jjaye);  Miln  129;  Sdhp  210,  353,  395— PP- 
vivajjita.  —  Pass,  vivajjati  J  1.27. 

Viyata  [vi-t-yata,  pp.  of  vT:  see  vuijati]  uncovered,  open 
(lit.  &  fig.),  iaid  bare,  unveiled  Sn  19  (lit.),  374  (fig.= 
anavata  SnA  366),  763,  793  (=open-minded) ;  Nd'  96; 
Pug  45,  46  (read  vivata  for  pi  vata  ;  opp.  pihita) ;  Vism 
185  (opp.  pihita);  J  v.434 ;  DhA  111.79  ;  VvA  27;  PvA 
283  (mukha  unveiled).  — vivatena  cetasa  "  with  mind 
awake  &  clear  "  D  in. 223  ;  A  iv.86 ;  S  v.263  ;  cp.  ceto- 
vivarana.  — vivata  is  freq.  v.  1.  for  vivatta  (-cchada), 
e.  g.  at  A  11.44  I  Sn  372  ;  DhA  111.195  ;  SnA  265  (in  expl" 
of  term) ;  sometimes  the  only  reading  in  this  phrase 
(q.  v.),  e.  g.  at  Nd*  593. — instr.  vivatena  as  adv. 
"openly"  Vin  11.99;  IV.21. 

-cakkhu  open-minded,  clear-sighted  Sn  921  ;  Nd'  354. 
-dvara  (having)  an  open  door,  an  open  house  J  v.293 
(a(}4ha°  half   open) ;   DhA  11.74.     -nakkhatta  a  yearly 


festival,  "  Public  Day,"  called  after  the  fashion  of  the 
people  going  uncovered  (appaticchannena  sarirena)  & 
bare-footed  to  the  river  DhA  1.388. 

Vivataka  (adj.)  [vivata-^ka]  open  (i.  e.  not  secret)  Vin 
n.99- 

Vivatta  (ni.  &  nt.)  [vi-l- vatta']  i.  "rolling  back,"  with 
ref.  to  the  development  of  the  world  (or  the  aeons, 
kappa)  used  to  denote  a  devolving  cycle  ("  devolution  "), 
whereas  vafta  alone  or  sagvatta  denote  the  involving 
cycle  (both  either  with  or  without  kappa).  Thus  as 
"  periods  "  of  the  world  they  practically  mean  the  same 
thing  «  may  both  be  interpreted  in  the  sense  of  a  new 
beginning.  As  redupl. -inter,  cpds.  they  express  only 
the  idea  of  constant  change.  We  sometimes  find 
vivatta  in  the  sense  of  "  renewal  "  &  sarjvatta  in  the 
sense  of  "  destruction,"  where  we  should  expect  the 
opposite  meaning  for  each.  See  also  vatta  &  sagvatta. 
Dogmatically  vivatta  is  used  as  "  absence  of  vatta," 
i.  e.  nibbana  or  salvation  from  sarjsara  (see  vatta  & 
cp.  citta-vivatta,  ceto°,  fiana°,  vimokkha"  at  Ps  1.108 
&  11.70).  —  Fig.  in  kamma°  "the  rolling  back  of  k," 
i.  e.  devolution  or  course  of  kamma  at  S  1.85.  —  Abs. 
&  comb''  with  satjvatta  (i.  e.  devolution  comb''  with 
evolution)  e.  g.  at  D  1.14,  16  sq.  ;  111.109  ;  A  11. 142  (where 
read  vivatte  for  vivatto);  Pug  60;  Vism  419  (here  as 
m.  vivatto,  compared  with  sagvatto),  420  ("tthayin). 
In  cpd.  °kappa  (i.  e.  descending  aeon)  at  D  in. 51  ;  Pug 
60;  It  15.  —  2.  (nt.)partof  abhikkhu'sdress  (rolling  up 
of  the  binding  ?),  comb''  with  anu-vivatta  at  Vin  1.287. 

Vivattati  [vi-f  vattati]  i.  to  move  back,  to  go  back,  to 
revolve,  to  begin  again  (of  a  new  world-cycle),  contrasted 
with  sat)vattati  to  move  in  an  ascending  line  (cp. 
vivatta)  D  1.17;  111.84,  109;  Vism  327.  —  2.  to  be 
distracted  or  diverted  from  (abl.),  to  turn  away;  to 
turn  over,  to  be  upset  Nett  131  ;  Pug  32  (so  read  for 
vivattati);  Ps  11.98  (ppr.). — pp.  vivatta. 

Vivattana  (nt.)  &  "a  (f.)  [fr.  vivattati]  turning  away, 
mpving  on,  moving  back  Ps  1.66;  11  98 ;  Vism  278  (f.  ; 
expl^  as  "  magga  "). 

Vivatteti  [vi-l-vatteti]  to  turn  down  or  away  (perhaps  in 
dogmatic  sense  to  turn  away  from  sarjsara),  to  divert, 
destroy :  only  in  phrase  vivattayi  sarjyojanag  (in 
standard  setting  with  acchecchi  tanharj),  where  the 
usual  V.  1.  is  vavattayi  (see  vavatteti).  Thus  at  M  1.12. 
122;  S  1. 127;  IV. 105,  205,  207,  399;  A  1. 134;  III. 246, 
444  sq. ;  IV. S  sq. ;  It  47  (T.  vivattayi). 

Vivaw&  (S'dj.)  [vi-l- vanna]  discoloured,  pale,  wan  Sn  585  ; 
Th  2,  79;  J  11.418. 

Vivawaka  (nt.)  [fr.  vivanneti]  dispraise,  reviling  Vin 
IV. 143. 

Vivaweti  [vi-l- vanneti]  to  dispraise,  defame  Pv  iii.io' 
(thupa-pujari) ;  PvA  212. 

Vivatta-cchada  (adj.)  having  the  cover  removed,  with  the 
veil  lifted  ;  one  who  draws  away  the  veil  (cp.  vivarana) 
or  reveals  (the  Universe  etc.) ;  or  one  who  is  freed  of  all 
(mental  &  spiritual)  coverings  (thus  Bdhgh),  Ep.  of 
the  Buddha.  • —  Spelling  sometimes  chadda°  (see  chada). 
—  D  1.89;  11.16  ;  in. 142  (dd  ;  samma-sambuddha  loke 
vivatta-chadda ;  trsl"  "  rolling  back  the  veil  from  the 
world"),  177  (dd);  A  11.44  (v-  1-  dd) ;  Sn  372  (expl"  as 
"  vivata-raga-dosa-moha-chadana  SnA  365),  378,  1003 
(ed.  Sn  prefers  dd  as  T.  reading) ;  Nd*  593  (with  alle- 
gorical interpretation);  J  1.51  ;  in. 349 ;  iv.271  (dd) ; 
DhA  1. 201  (v.  1.  dd) ;  in. 195;  DA  1.250.  —  It  occurs 
either  as  vivatta"  or  vivata".  In  the  first  case  (vivatta") 
the  expl"  presents  difficulties,  as  it  is  neither  the  opp. 
of  vatta  ("  duty  "),  nor  the  same  as  vivatta  ("  moving 
back  "  intrs.),  nor  a  direct  pp.  of  vivattati  (like  Sk. 
vivrtta)  in  which  meaning  it  would  come  nearer  to 


Vivattati 


96 


Viveka 


"  stopped,  reverted,  ceased."  vivattati  has  not  been 
found  in  Pali.  The  only  plausible  expl"  would  be  taking 
it  as  an  abs.  pp.  formation  fr.  vft  in  Cans,  sense  (vatteti), 
thus  "  moved  back,  stopped,  discarded  "  [cp.  BSk. 
vivartayati  to  cast  off  a  garment,  Divy  39).  In  the 
second  case  (viva^")  it  is  pp.  of  vivarati  [vi  +  vTI  see 
vuijati],  in  meaning  "  uncovered,  lifted,  off,"  referring 
to  the  covering  (chada)  as  uncovered  instead  of  the 
uncovered  object.  See  vivata.  It  is  difficult  to  decide 
between  the  two  meanings.  On  the  principle  of  the 
"  lectio  difficilior  "  vivatta  would  have  the  preference, 
whereas  from  a  natural  &  simple  point  of  view 
vivata  seems  more  intelligible  &  more  fitting.  It  is 
evidently  an  old  phrase.  Note,  -vivatta-kkhandha  at 
S  1. 12 1  is  a  curious  expression  ("with  his  shoulders 
twisted  round  "  ?).  Is  it  an  old  misreading  for  patta- 
kkhandha  ?  Cp.  however,  S.A.  quoted  K.S.  1.151, 
n.  5,  explaining  it  as  a  dying  monk's  effort  to  gain  an 
orthodox  posture. 

Vivattati  at  Pug  32  is  to  be  read  as  vivattati. 

Vivadati  [vi+vadati]  i.  to  dispute,  quarrel  Sn  842,  884; 
J  1.209;  Miln  47.  —  2.  (intrs.)  to  be  quarrelled  with 
S  III. 138. 

Vivadana  (nt.)  [fr.  vivadati]  causing  separation,  making 
discord  D  i.ii  ;  DA  1.96. 

Vivadha  (carrying  yoke)  see  khari-vidha  and  vividha^. 

Vivana  (nt.)  [vi  +  vana]  wilderness,  barren  land  S  i.ioo  ; 
Vv  77'  (=aranna  VvA  302);  J  11.191,  317. 

Vivara  (nt.)  [fr.  vi  +  vr]  i.  opening  (lit.  dis-covering),  pore, 
cleft,  leak,  fissure  Dh  127  (pabbatanar) ;  cp  Divy  532  ; 
Miln  150;  P\'A  104);  Vism  192,  262;  J  iv.16;  v'87 ; 
DhA  IV.46  (mukha°);  SnA  355;  PvA  152,  283.— 
2.  interval,  interstice  D  1.56  (quoted  at  Pv  IV.3") ; 
Vism  185.  —  3.  fault,  flaw,  defect  A  111.186  sq. ;  J  v.376. 

ViyaiaQa  (nt.)  [fr.  vivarati]  1.  uncovering,  unveiling, 
making  open,  revelation,  in  loka°  laying  open  the 
worlds,  unveiling  of  the  Universe  ;  referred  to  as  a  great 
miracle  at  Vism  392  ;  Miln  350  ;  Davs  11  120  ;  J  iv.266. 
—  2 .  opening,  unfolding,  making  accessible,  purifying 
(fig.),  in  ceto°  A  111.117,  121;  iv.352  ;  v.67. — 3.  ex- 
planation, making  clear  (cp.  vibhajana)  Nett  8  (as  f); 
SnA  445 

Vivarati  [vi  +  varati,  vy;  see  vunati]  i.  to  uncover,  to 
open  Vin  11. 2 19  (windows,  opp.  thaketi) ;  D  T.85  (patic- 
cbannar)  v.);  J  1.63  (dvarag),  69;  iv.133  (nagarar)) ; 
DhA  1.328  (vatapanag) ;  DA  1.228;  PvA  74  (mukhar)); 
VvA  157,  284.  —  2.  (fig.)  to  open,  make  clear,  reveal 
S  IV. 166;  V.261  ;  KhA  12  (+ vibhajati  etc.). — pp. 
vivata. 

Vivasati  [vi  +  vasati^]  to  live  away  from  home,  to  be 
separated,  to  be  distant  J  iv.217.  — Cp.  vippavasati. 

Vivasana  (nt.)  [vi  +  vas(u?)  to  shine,  cp.  vibhati]  (gradually) 
getting  light ;  turning  into  dawn  (said  of  the  night),  only 
in  phrase  ratya  vivasane  at  the  end  of  night,  comb''  in 
stock  phrase  with  suriy'  uggamanag  pati  "  towards 
sunrise"  (evidently  an  old  phrase)  at  Th  i,  517;  J 
IV. 241  ;   V..381,  461  ;  VI. 491  ;  Pv  iii.S*.     Also  at  Sn  710. 

Vivaseti[Caus.ofvi-|-vas  to  shine]  lit.  to  make  [it]  get  light ; 
rattig  v.  to  spend  the  night  (till  it  gets  light)  Sn  1 142  ; 
Nd*  594  (=atinameti)  — vivasati  is  Kern's  proposed 
reading  for  vijahati  (rattig)  at  Th  i,  451.  He  founds 
his  conjecture  on  a  v.  1.  vivasate  &  the  C.  expl"  "  ati- 
nameti  khepeti."  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  trsl»  "  waste  "  (i.  e. 
vijahati). 

Vivada  [fr.  vi+vad]  dispute,  quarrel,  contention  D  1.236; 
111.246  ;  A  IV.401  ;  Sn  596,  863,  877,  912  ;  Nd'  103,  167, 
I  73.  260,   307 ;  Pug  19,  22  ;  Ud  67 ;  J  1.165  ;  Miln  413  ; 


VvA  131.  There  are  6  vivada-mulani  (roots  of  con- 
tention), viz.  kodha,  makkha.  issa,  satheyya,  papic- 
chata,  sanditthi-paramasa  or  anger,  selfishness,  envy, 
fraudulence,  evil  intention,  worldliness :  D  111.246 ; 
A  III. 334  sq.  ;  Vbh  380  ;  referred  to  at  Ps  1.130.  There 
is  another  list  of  10  at  A  v. 78  consisting  in  wrong 
representations  regarding  dhamma  &  vinaya. 

Vivadaka  [fr.  vivada]  a  quarreller  J  1.209. 

Vivadiyati  (vivadeti)  [Denom.  fr.  vivada]  to  quarrel  Sn 
832  (=kalahar)  karoti  Nd'  173),  879,  895.  Pot.  3"'  sg. 
vivadiyetha  (  =  kolahar|  kareyya  Nd'  307),  &  viva- 
dayetha  Sn  830  (id.  expl°  Nd'  170). 

Vivaha  [fr.  vi-l-vah]  "carrying  or  sending  away,"  i.e. 
marriage,  wedding  D  1.99;  Sn  p.  105;  PvA  144;  SnA 
448  (where  distinction  avaha  =  kaiiiia-gahanai),  vivaha  = 
kanna-danar)).  —  As  nt.  at  Vin  in. 135.  Cp.  avaha 
&  vevahika. 

Vivabana  (nt.)  [fr.  vi-i- vah]  giving  in  marriage  or  getting 
a  husband  for  a  girl  (cp.  avahana)  D  i.i  i  ;  DA  1.96.  Cp. 
Vin  III. 135. 

Vivicca  (indecl.)  [ger.  of  viviccati]  separating  oneself  from 
(instr.),  aloof  from  D  1.37  ;  A  III. 25  ;  J  VI. 388  ;  Dhs  160  ; 
Pug  68;  Vism  139,  140  (expH  in  detail).  —  Doubtful 
reading  at  Pv  i.ii"  (for  viricca  ?).  — As  viviccar)  (&  a°) 
at  J  v. 434  in  meaning  "  secretly  "  (=raho  paticchannar) 
C). 

Vivicoati  [vi-l-vic]  to  separate  oneself,  to  depart  from,  to 
be  alone,  to  separate  (intrs.)  Vin  iv.241  ;  ger.  viviccitva 
Dhs  A  165,  &  vivicca  (see  sep). — pp.  vivitta.  —  Cp. 
viveceti. 

Vivicchati  [Desid.   of  vindati]  to  desire,   long  for,   want 

Nett  II. 

Viviccha  (f.)  [Desid.  of  vid,  cp.  Sk.  vivitsa]  manifold 
desire,  greediness,  avarice  DhsA  375  ;  Nett  1 1  (where 
expl°  "  viviccha  nama  vuccati  vicikiccha  ").  See  also 
veviccha. 

Vivitta  (adj.)  [pp.  of  viviccati;  viH-vitta']  separated, 
secluded,  aloof,  solitary,  separate,  alone  D  1.71  ;  S  i.iio  ; 
A  II. 210;  111.92  ;  IV. 436 ;  V.207,  270:  Sn  221,  338,  810, 
845  ;  Nd^  201  ;  Kvu  605  ;  Miln  205  ;  DA  1.208  ;  DhsA  166  ; 
DhA  III. 238  ;  IV. 157  (so  read  for  vivivitta  1) ;  VbhA  365  ; 
PvA  28,  141,  283.     Cp.  pa°. 

Vivittaka  (adj.)  [vivitta-l-ka]  solitary  J  iv.242  (°avasa). 

Vivittata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  vivitta]  seclusion  (=  viveka)  VbhA 
316,  cp.  K.S.  1.321. 

Vivitti  (f.)  [fr.  viviccati]  separation  DhsA  166.  —  Cp. 
viveka. 


Vividha"^  (adj  )  [vi -1- vidha^]  divers,  manifold,  mixed;  full 
y  with  (-")  D  11.354  '•  P^  "4'  :  Vv  35*  ;  Miln  319 ; 
25,   30;  SnA   136  (in  expl"  of  vi°  :   "  viharati  = 


of,  gay  witn  ^-  ;  u  11.354;  *^  "-4 
Mhvs  25,  30  ;  SnA  136  (in  expl" 
ividhari  hitai)  harati  "). 


VI 


Vividha"  [for  Sk.  vivadha  ;  vi-l-  vah]  carrying-yoke  D  i.ioi  ; 
S  1.78  (as  V.  1.  khari-vividhag,  see  khari);  J  in. 116 
(parikkharar)  vividhag  adaya,  where  v.  1.  reads  kharig 
vividhag). 

Viveka  [fr.  vi-l-vic]  detachment,  loneliness,  separation, 
seclusion ;  "  singleness  "  (of  heart),  discrimination  (of 
thought)  D  1.37,  182;  III. 222,  226,  283=5  IV. 191 
(°ninna  citta) ;  S  1.2,  194;  iv.365  sq.  ;  v.6,  240  sq. ; 
A  1.53;  III. 329  ;  IV.224;  Vin  iv.241  ;  Sn  474,  772,  822, 
851,  915,  1065  ;  Nd'  158,  222  ;  J  1.79  ;  in. 31  ;  Dhs  160  ; 
Pug  59,  68;  Nett  16,  50;  DhsA  164,  166;  ThA  64; 
PvA  43;  Sdhp  471.  — viveka  is  given  as  fivefold  at 
Ps  11.220  sq.  and  VbhA  316.  cp.  K.S.  1.32 1  (Bdhgh  on 
S  III. 2,  8),  viz  tadanga",  vikkhambhana",  samuccheda" 


Vivekatta 


97 


Visattika 


patippassaddhi",  nissaraija" ;  as  threefold  at  Vism  140, 
viz.  kaya°,  citta°,  vikkhambhana°,  i.  e.  ph^'sically, 
mentally,  ethically  ;  which  division  amounts  to  the  same 
as  that  given  at  Nd'  26  with  kaya°,  citta°.  upadhi". 
the  latter  equivalent  to  "  nibbana."  Cp.  on  term 
Dial.  1.84.     See  also  jhana.     Cp.  pa°. 

Vivekatta  =  vivlttata  VbhA  316. 

Vivecitatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  vivecita,  pp.  of  viveceti]  dis- 
crimination, specification  DhsA  388. 

Viveceti  [Caus.  of  viviccati]  to  cause  separation,  to  separate, 
to  keep  back,  dis.suade  Vin  1.64;  D  1.226;  S  in. no; 
M.  1.256;  Pv  in. 10'  ( =paribaheti  P\'A  214);  Miln  339; 
DhsA  311  ;  Nett  113,  164  (°iyamana). 

Vive(hiyati  [vi  +  vethiyati]  to  get  entangled  Vin  11. 117. 

Vivesa  [?]  distinction  D  1.229.  233.  We  should  read 
visesa,  cis  printed  on  p.  233. 

Visa  (nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  visa  ;  Av,  vis  poison,  Gr.  io^,  Lat. 
virus,  Oir.  fi :  all  meaning  "poison"]  poison,  virus, 
venom  M  1.316  =S  11. no  ;  Th  i,  418  ;  768  ;  Sn  i  (sappa° 
snake  venom) ;  A  11. no  ;  J  1.2 71  {halahala°  deadly  p.) ; 
III. 201  ;  IV. 222  ;  Pug  48  ;  Miln  302  ;  PvA  62,  256 ;  ThA 
489.  — On  visa  in  similes  see  J.P.T.S.  1907,  137.  Cp. 
asi°. 

-uggara  vomiting  of  poison  SnA  176.  -kantaka  a 
poisoned  thorn  or  arrow,  also  name  of  a  sort  of  sugar 
DhsA  203.  -kumbha  a  vessel  filled  with  p.  It  86. 
-panaka  a  drink  of  p.  DhA  11. 15.  -pita  (an  arrow) 
dipped  into  poison  (lit.  which  has  drunk  poison).  At 
another  place  (see  pita')  we  have  suggested  reading 
visappita  (visa  +  appita).  i.  e.  "  poison -applied,"  which 
was  based  on  reading  at  Vism  303.  See  e.  g.  J  v. 36  ; 
Miln  198;  Vism  303,  381  ;  DhA  1.216.  -rukkha  " poison 
tree,"  a  cert,  tree  Vism  512  ;  VbhA  89;  DA  1.39.  -va- 
nijja  trading  with  poison  A  in. 208.  -vtjja  science  of 
poison  DA  1.93.  — vejja  a  physician  who  cures  poison  (ous 
snake-bites)  J  1.3 10.     -salla  a  poisoned  arrow  Vism  303. 

Visag  is  P.  prefix  corresponding  to  Sk.  vi?u  (or  visva" 
[see  vi"]  in  meaning  "diverging,  on  opposite  sides,") 
apart,  against ;  only  in  cpd.  °vadeti  and  derivations,  lit. 
to  speak  wrong,  i.  e.  to  deceive. 

Visagyutta  (&  visanflutta)  (adj.)  [vi-i-sagyutta]  i.  (lit.) 
unharnessed,  unyoked  Th  i,  1021  (half-fig.).  —  2.  de- 
tached from  the  world  A  1.262=111.214;  S  11.279  (nii) ; 
Th  I,  1022  ;  Sn62i,  626,  634;  DhAiii.233  (sabba-yoga°) ; 
rv.141,  159,   185. 

Visagyoga  (&  visafifioga)  [vi -l- sagyoga]  disconnection, 
separation  from  (-°),,  dissociation  Vin  11.259  {nn)=A 
IV.280  ;  D  111.230  (kama-yoga°,  bhava",  ditthi",  avijja"; 
cp.  the  4  oghas),  276;  A  11. 11  ;  111.156. 

Visag vada  [visag -(- vada]  deceiving;  neg.  a°  Miln  354. 

Visag vadaka  (adj.)  [visag -t- vadaka]  deceiving,  untrust- 
worthy Vism  496  ;f.°ika  J  v. 401,  410.  — ^  a°  not  deceiving 
D  III. 1 70  ;  A  IV. 249;  M  111.33;  Pug  57. 

Visagvadana  (nt.)  &  °a  (f.)  &  "ata  (f.)  [fr.  visagvadeti] 
deceiving,  disappointing  A  v.  136  (°a) ;  Vin  iv.2.  —  a° 
honesty  D  111.190  (°ata). 

Visagvadayitar  [n.  ag.  fr  visagvadeti]  one  who  deceives 
another  D  111.171. 

Visagvadeti  [visag  +  vadeti ;  cp.  BSk.  visagvadayati 
Av§  1.262,  after  the  Pali]  to  deceive  with  words,  to 
break  one's  word,  to  lie,  deceive  Vin  111.143;  iv.i  ; 
Nett  91 .  —  Neg.  a°  J  v. 124. 

VisagsaHlut  (adj.)  [vi-l-sagsattha]  separated,  uncon- 
nected with  (instr.)  M  1.480 ;  DA  1.59. 


Visaghata  [vi -1- saghata']  removed,  destroyed  Th  i,  89. 

Visakkiya  [vi-i-sakldya  ?]  in  "duta  is  a  special  kind  of 
messenger  Vin  111.74. 

Visaggata  see  a°. 

Visanka  (adj.)  [vi  +  sanka;  Sk.  vi^anka]  fearless,  secure; 
a°  Sdhp  176. 

Visankita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  vi-i-Sank]  suspicious,  anxious 
ThA  134  (Ap.  V.  78).  —  neg.  a°  not  perturbed,  trusting, 
secure  Sdhp  128. 

Visankhara  [vi  +  sankhara]  divestment  of  all  material  things 
Dh  154  (=nibbana  DhA  111.129).     See  sankhara  3. 

Visankhita  [vi -1- sankhata]  destroyed,  annihilated  Dh 
154;  J  1.493  (=viddhar)sita  DhA  111.129). 

Visaijati  [vi-i-sajjati.  Pass,  of  sanj  ;  the  regular  Act.  would 
be  visajati]  to  hang  on,  cling  to,  stick  to,  adhere  (fig.) ; 
only  in  pp.  visatta  (q.  v.). — The  apparent  ger.  form 
visajja  belongs  to  vissajjati. 

Visajjana  cS:  visajjeti :  see  viss°. 

Visaina  (adj.)  [vi-fsaiiiia=saiina]  i.  having  wrong  per- 
ceptions Sn  874.  —  2.  unconscious  J  v. 159.  In  com- 
position with  bhu  as  visaiiiii-bhuta  at  J  1.67. 

Visanfiin  (adj.)  [vi-l-sannin]  unconscious,  one  who  has  lost 
consciousness ;  also  in  meaning  "  of  unsound  mind  " 
(  =  ummattaka  Nd'  279)  A  n.52  (khitta-citta-l- ) ;  Miln 
220  ;  Sdhp  117. 

Visata  &  visata  [pp.  of  vi-f  sr,  Sk.  visrta]  spread,  difiused, 
wide,  broad  D  111.167  (!):  Sn  i  (T.  rea'is  t,  v.  1.  BB  has 
!);  J  11.439;  IV. 499  (t) ;  Miln  221,  354  (t  ;  4-vitthata), 
357.     Cp.  anu°. 

Visata  &  visata  (f.)  [abrh.  formation  fr.  vi-(-safij,  spelling 
t  for  tt :  see  visatta.  The  writing  of  MSS.  concerning 
t  in  these  words  is  very  confused]  "  hanging  on,"  cling- 
ing, attachment.  The  word  seems  to  be  a  quasi-short 
form  of  visattika.  Thus  at  Sn  715  (  =tanha  C. ;  spelling 
t) ;  Dhs  1059  (trsl°  "  diffusion,"  i.  e.  fr.  vi-t-sy;  spelling 
t)=Nd''  s.  V.  tanhci  (spelt  with  t). 

Visattha  see  vissa^tha. 

Visatthi  (1)  [for  vissatthi,  fr.  vi-fsTJ]  '■  emission;  in 
sukka°  emission  of  semen  Vin  11.38;  in. 112  ;  Kvu  163. 

—  2.  Tisatthi  at  S  in. 133  and  A  iv.52  (T.  visatthi) 
probably  stands  for  visatti  in  meaning  "  longing," 
clinging  to  (cp.  BSk.  vi^akti  Av§  11.191),  or  "  love  for  " 
(loc). 

Visati  [vii,  cp.  vi5  dwelling-place,  veia ;  Gr.  oJicoc  house, 
iiik-iui  to  dwell;  Lat.  vicus,  Goth.  weihs=E.  °wick  in 
Warwick,  etc.]  to  enter,  only  in  comb"  with  prefixes, 
like  upa°,  pa",  pari",  sag°,  abhisag",  etc.  .  .  .  See  also 
vesma  (house). 

Visatta  [pp.  of  visajjati]  hanging  on  (fig.),  sticking  or 
clinging  to,  entangled  in  (loc.)  A  11.25;  Sn  38,  272; 
Nd'  597;  J  n.i46;iii.24i, 

Visattika  (f.)  [visatta -l-ika,  abstr.  formation]  clinging  to, 
adhering,  attachment  (to=loc.),  sinful  bent,  lust,  desire. 

—  It  is  almost  invariably  found  as  a  syn.  of  tanha.  P. 
Commentators  explain  it  with  ref.  cither  to  visata 
(difiused),  or  to  visa  (poison).  These  are  of  course  only 
exegetical  edifying  etymologies.  Cp.  Dhs.  trsl'  §  1059  ; 
Expositor  n.468;  Brethren  213  n.  3,  K.S.  1.2,  n.  6,  and 
the  varied  exegesis  of  the  term  in  the  Niddesas.  — 
S  I.I,  24,  35,  107,  no  ;  A  11. 211  ;  iv,434  ;  Sn  333,  768, 
857,  1053  sq. ;  Th  i,  519;  Nd'  8  sq.,  247;  Nd*  598; 
DhA  III. 198;  iv.43 ;  DhsA  364;  Nett  24;  Dhs  1059. 


Visada 


98 


Visiyati 


Visada  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  viSada]  i.  clean,  pure,  white  D 
11.14;  Miln  93,  247;  Davs  v.  28.  —  2.  clear,  manifest 
Miln  93  ;  DhsA  321,  328  {a°) ;  VbhA  388  sq. 

-kiriya    making   clear :    see   under    vatthu'.      -bhava 
clearness  Vism  128  ;  Tikp  59. 

Visadata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  visada]  purity,  clearness  Vism 
134  (vatthu°). 

Visanna  [pp.ol  visidati]  sunk  into  (loc),  immersed  J  iv.399. 
The  poetical  form  is  vyasanna. 

Visappana  in  "rasa  at  Vism  470  is  not  clear.  Is  it  "  spread- 
ing "  [vi  +  sTP],  or  misprint  for  visa-pana  ? 

Visabhaga  (adj.)  [vi+sabhaga]  different,  unusual,  extra- 
ordinary, uncommon  Miln  78  sq.  ;  DA  1.2 12  ;  Vism  180 
(purisassa  itthisarirar),  itthiya  purisa-sarirar)  visabha- 
gag),  516;  DhA  iv.52  ;  PvA  118.  -"arammana  puden- 
dum muliebre  J  11.274 ;» 111.498. 

Visama  (adj.)  [vi-l-sama']  i.  uneven,  unequal,  dishar- 
monious, contrary  A  1.74  ;  PvA  47  (vata).  131  (a'=sama 
of  the  "middle"  path).  —  2.  (morally)  discrepant, 
lawless,  wrong  A  in. 285  ;  v.329 ;  Sn  57  (cp.  Nd^  599); 
Miln  250  ("ditthi).- — 3.  odd,  peculiar,  petty,  disagree- 
able A  11.87;  Miln  112,  304,  357;  J  1. 391  (nagaraka). — 
As  nt.  an  uneven  or  dangerous  or  inaccessible  place, 
rough  road ;  (fig.)  unevenness,  badness,  misconduct, 
disagreeableness  A  1.35  (pabbata") ;  Siv.117;  Vbh  368 
(two  sets  of  3  visamani ;  raga,  etc.) ;  Miln  136,  157,  277, 
351  ;  J  ^-7°  ;  VvA  301.  — visamena  (instr.)  in  a  wrong 
way  Pv  IV. 1 4. 

Visamayati  [Denom.  fr.  visama]  to  be  uneven  D  11.269 
(so  read  for  visama  yanti). 

Visaya  [cp.  Sk.  vi^aya,  fr.  vi-t-Si]  i.  locality,  spot,  regfon ; 
world,  realm,  province,  neighbourhood  Sn  977.  Often 
in  foil,  comb""  ■  petti"  (or  pitti")  and  pettika  (a)  the 
world  of  the  manes  or  petas  M  1.73;  S  in. 224 ;  v. 342, 
356  sq. ;  A  1.37,  267;  II. 126  sq.  ;  ni.211,  339,  414  sq. ; 
IV. 405  sq. ;  V.182  sq. ;  Pv  11.2^  ;  11. 7'  ;  J  1.51  ;  PvA  25  sq., 
59sq.,  214.  (fc)  the  way  of  the  fathers,  native  or  proper 
beat  or  range  D  111.58  ;  S  v. 146  sq.  ;  A  in.67  ;  J  11.59. 
Yama°  the  realm  of  Yama  or  the  Dead  Pv  11. 8*  (=peta- 
loka  PvA  107). — -2.  reach,  sphere  (of  the  senses), 
range,  scope ;  object,  characteristic,  attribute  (cp.  Cpd. 
143  n.  2)  S  v.2i8(gocara°);  Nett  23  (iddhi°) ;  Miln  186, 
215,  316;  Vism  216  (visayi-bhuta),  57o=VbhA  182 
(raaha°  &  appa") ;  KhA  17;  SnA  22,  154  (buddha"). 
228  (id.) ;  P\'A  72,  89.  — avisaya  not  forming  an  object, 
a  wrong  object,  indefinable  A  v.50  ;  J  v.117  (so  read 
for  °ara) ;  PvA  122,  197.  —  3.  object  of  sense,  sensual 
pleasure  SnA  100. 

Visayha  (adj.)  [ger.  of  visahati]  possible  Pv  iv.i'^  (yatha 
°r)  as  far  as  possible) ;  a°  impossible  M  1.207  =Vin  1.157. 

Visara  [vi-l-sara]  a  multitude  DA  1.40. 

Visalla  (adj.)  [vi-l-sallal  free  from  pain  or  grief  S  1.180; 
Sn  17,  86=367. 

Visarita  (f  )  at  D  11.2 1 3  in  phrase  iddhi"  is  doubtful  reading. 
The  gloss  (K)  has  "  visevita."  Trsl°  (Dial.  11.246): 
"  proficiency."  It  is  comb*"  with  iddhi-pahuta  &  iddhi- 
vikubbanata.  Bdhgh's  expl°  is  "  visavana  "  [fr. 
vi-i-sru  ?]. 

Visahati  [vi -1- sahati]  to  be  able,  to  dare,  to  venture  Sn 
1069  (  =  ussahati  sakkoti  Nd'  600);  J  1.152. — ppr. 
neg.  avisahanto  unable  VvA  69,  112  ;  and  avisahamana 
J  1. 91.  — ger.  visayha  (q.  v.). 

Visaktaa  (adj.)  [visakha  as  adj.]  having  branches,  forked; 
in  ti°  three-branched  S  i.ii8=M  1.109. 

Visafcha  (f .)  [vi-t-  sakha,  Sk.  visakha]  N.  of  a  lunar  mansion 
(nakkhatta)  or  month  (see  vesakha),  usually  as  visakha" 
(-puijpama),  e.  g.  SnA  391  ;  VvA  165. 


Visatita  [pp.  of  vi-l-sateti]  cut  in  pieces,  smashed,  broken 
J  II. 163  (=bhinna  C). 

VisaQa  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  visana]  i.  the  horn  of  an  animal  (as 
cow,  ox,  deer,  rhinoceros)  Vin  1.191  ;  A  11.207;  iv.376 ; 
Sn  35  (khagga".  q.  v.),  309;  Pug  56  (miga°) ;  Ap  50 
(usabha") ;  J  1.505;  Miln  103.  —  2.  (also  as  m.)  the 
tusks  of  an  elephant  J  in. 184;  v. 41,  48. 
-maya  made  of  horn  Vin  n.115. 

Visata  (adj.)  [fr.  vi-l-Sat,  cp.  sateti]  crushed  to  pieces, 
destroyed  M  n.  102  ("gabbha,  with  mulha-gabbha ;  v.  1. 
vighata). 

Visada  [fr.  vi-l-sad]  depression,  dejection  D  1.248;  DA 
1.121  ;  Sdhp  117.     Cp.  visidati. 

Visaia  [fr.  vi-l-sf]  spreading,  diffusion,  scattering  DhsA 
118. 

Visaraka  (adj.)  [vi-l-saraka.  of  sr]  spreading,  extending, 
expanding  Vin  ni.97  (vattu°  T. ;  vatthu"  MSS.). 

Visarada  (adj.)  [cp.  BSk.  viSarada,  e.  g.  Av6  1.180.  On 
etym.  see  sarada]  self-possessed,  confident ;  knowing 
how  to  conduct  oneself,  skilled,  wise  D  1.175;  11.86; 
S  1. 181  ;  IV. 246  ;  v. 261  ;  A  n.8  (vyatta-(- ) ;  in. 183,  203  ; 
IV. 310,  314  sq. ;  v.io  sq. ;  M  1.386;  Ap  23  ;  J  111.342; 
V.41  ;  Miln  21  ;  Sdhp  277.  — avisarada  diffident  Miln  20, 
105- 

Visala  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  vi^ala]  wide,  broad,  extensive  Sn 
38;  J  v.49,  215  ("pakhuma) ;  Miln  102,  311. 

-akkhi  (f.)  having  large  eyes  J  v. 40  ;  Vv  37^  (-)- vipula- 
locana  ;  or  a  peti). 

Visalata    (f.)    [abstr.    fr.    visala]    breadth,    extensiveness 

VvA  104. 

Visahata  (adj.)  [visa-l-ahata]  only  neg.  a°  imperturbed, 
balanced  Dhs  11,  15,  24  etc. 

Visahara  [visa-l- ahara,  or  vi -|- sai) -I- ahara]  distractedness, 
perturbation;  neg.  a."  balance  Dhs  11.  15. 

Visikha  (f.)  [cp.  'Sk.  (lexicogr.)  viSikha]  a  street,  road 
Vin  IV.312;  J  1.338;  IV.310;  V.16,  434. 

-katha  gossip  at  street  comers  D  1.179;   M  1.513; 
Dh  1.90. 

Visittha  (adj.)  [pp.  of  visissati]  distinguished,  prominent, 
superior,  eminent  D  111.159;  Vv  32*;  J  1.441  ;  Miln  203, 
239;  DhA  11.15;  VvA  I  (°mana  =  vimana),  85.  261; 
Sdhp  260.  269,  332,  489.  —  compar.  "tara  Vism  207 
(=anuttara).  —  As  visitthaka  at  Sdhp  334.- — See  also 
abhi°,  pati°,  and  vissattha. 

Visi99a  [pp.  of  viseyyati]  broken,  crushed,  fallen  to  pieces 

J  II74- 
Visineti  see  usseneti. 

Visibbita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  vi-l-sibbeti,  siv  to  sew]  entwined, 
entangled  Miln  102  (sai)sibbita°  as  redupl. — iter, 
cpd.). 

Visibbeti  [vi-i-sibbeti.  siv]  to  unsew,  to  undo  the  stitches 
Vin  IV. 280.  —  Caus.  II.  visibbapeti  ibid. — Another 
visibbeti  see  under  visiveti. 

Visissati  [Pass,  of  vi-f-Sij]  to  differ,  to  be  distinguished  or 
eminent     Nett     188.  —  pp.     visiJtha. — Caus.    yiseseti 

(q.  v.). 

Visidati  [vi4-sad;  cp.  visada  &  pp.  BSk.  vijanna  Divy 
44]  I.  to  sink  down  J  iv.223.  —  2.  to  falter,  to  be 
dejected  or  displeased  S  1.7;  A  111.158;  Pug  65. — pp. 
visanna. 

Visiyati  [vi-l-siyati ;  cp.  Sk.  ^iyate.  Pass,  of  4ya  to  coagu- 
late] to  be  dissolved ;  3"'  pi.  imper.  med.  visiyaruij 
Th  I,  312  (cp.  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  126). 


Visivana 


99 


Visoseti 


Visivana  (nt.)  [fr.  visiveti]  warming  oneself  J  1.326 ; 
V.202.     As  Tisibbana  at  Vin  iv.115. 

Visiveti  [vi+slveti,  which  corresponds  to  Sk.  vi-^yapayati 
(lexicogr.  !).  Caus.  of  4ya,  syayati  to  coagulate:  lit.  to 
dissolve,  thaw.  The  v  stands  for  p ;  ija  is  contracted 
to  si]  to  warm  oneself  Miln  47  ;  J  11.68  ;  DhA  1.225,  261  ; 
11.89.  As  visibbeti  (in  analogy  to  visibbeti  to  sew)  at 
Vin  IV. 115.  —  Caus.  II.  visivapeti  J  11.69. 

Visuo  (indecl.)  [op.  Sk.  visu,  a  derivation  fr.  vi°]  separately, 
individually;  separate,  apart  DhA  11.26  (mata-pitaro 
visur)  honti).  Usually  repeated  (distributively)  visut) 
visui)  each  on  his  own,  one  by  one,  separately,  e.  g. 
Vism  250;  Mhvs  6,  44;  SnA  583;  VvA  38;  PvA  214. 
— visukarana  separation  ThA  257. 

Visukkha  (adj.)  [vi  +  sukklia]  dried  out  or  up  PvA  58. 

Visukkllita  (adj.)  [vi  +  sukkhita]  dried  up  Miln  303. 

Visajjhati  [vi  +  sujjhati]  to  be  cleaned,  to  be  cleansed,  to 
be  pure  Vin  II. 137  ;  J  1.75;  111.472.  —  pp.  visuddha. — 
Caus.  visodheti  (q.  v.). 

Visnddha  (adj.)  [pp.  of  visujjhati]  clean,  pure,  bright;  in 
appl""  meaning  :  purified,  stainless,  sanctified  Vin  1.105  ; 
D  HI. 52  (cakkhu);  S  11. 122  (id.);  iv.47  (sila) ;  A  iv.304 
(su°);  Sn  67,  517,  687;  Nd^  601  ;  Pug  60;  PvA  1  (su°) ; 
Sdhp  269,  383. 

Visnddhatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  visuddha]  purity,  purification 
A  11.239. 

Visnddhi  (f.)  [vi  +  suddhi]  brightness,  splendour,  excel- 
lency ;  (ethically)  purity,  holiness,  sanctification ; 
virtue,  rectitude  Vin  1.105  (visuddho  paramaya  visud- 
dhiya);  D  1.53;  111.214  (ditthi°,  sila°),  288;  M  1.147; 
S  111.69;  A  1.95  (sila°  &  ditthi°);  11.80  (catasso  dak- 
khi^ia"),  195;  III. 315;  v.64  (paramattha°) ;  Sn  813,  824, 
840,  892  ;  Dh  16  (kamma°) ;  Ps  1.21  (sila°,  citta°.  ditthi°) ; 
n.85  (id.);  Nd'  138,  162;  Vism  2;  SnA  188  (°divasa), 
PvA  13  ("cittata) ;  Sdhp  447.  A  class  of  divine  beings 
(dogmatically  the  highest  in  the  stages  of  development, 
viz.  gods  by  sanctification)  is  called  visuddhi-deva 
Nd*  307;  J  1. 139;  VvA  i8.     See  under  deva. 

Visiika  (nt.)  [perhaps  to  siic,  sucayati]  restless  motion, 
wriggling,  twisting,  twitching  (better  than  "  show," 
although  connection  with  sue  would  give  meaning 
"indication,  show"),  almost  synonjinous  with  vip- 
phandita.  Usually  in  cpd.  difthi"  scuffling  or  wriggling 
of  opinion,  wrong  views,  heresy  M  1.8,  486;  Sn  55  (cp. 
Nd2  301);  Pv  IV. i". 

-dassana  visiting  shows  (as  fairs)  D  1.5  (cp.  DA  1.77 : 
"  visukag  patani-bhiitag  dassanag,"  reading  not  clear) ; 
A  1.2 12  ;  11.209  ;  Pug  58. 

Visukayita  (nt.)  [pp.  of  visiikayeti,  denom.  fr.  visuka] 
I.  restlessness,  impatience  M  1.446.  —  2.  disorder, 
twisting,  distortion  (of  views) ;  usually  in  phrase  di^hi" 
with  "visevita  &  "vipphandita  e.  g.  M  1.234;  S  1.123 
(Bdhgh's  expl"  at  K.S.  1.321  is  "  vinivijjhan'  atthena 
viloman'  atthena");  11.62  (in  same  comb";  Bdhgh  at 
K.S.  n.203  ;  "  sabbar)  micchaditthi-vevacanai)  ") ;  Dhs 
381  ("disorder  of  opinion"  trsl°) ;  Nd*  271"";  Vbh 
145;  DhsA  253.  Cp.  v.  1.  S  T.123"  (K.S.  1. 155  "dis- 
orders "  ;  n.  p.  321). 

Visiicika  (f.)  [cp.  'Sk.  visucika]  cholera  Miln  153,  167. 

Viseni"  [vi-l-sena  in  comb°  with  kf  and  bhu;  cp.  patisena] 
"  without  an  enemy."  in  "katva  making  armyless,  i.  e. 
disarming  Sn  833,  1078.  Expl''  in  the  Niddesa  as 
"keep  away  as  enemies,  conquering"  Nd'  i74  =  Nd* 
602  (where  Nd'  reads  patisenikara  kilesa  for  viseni- 
katva  kilesa).  -°bhuta  disarmed,  not  acting  as  an 
enemy  Sn  793=914.  where  Nd'  96=334  has  the  same 


expl°  as  for  "katva ;  S  1.141  (-(- upasanta-citta ;  trsl° 
"  by  all  the  hosts  of  evil  unassailed  "  K.S.  1.178).  Kern, 
Toev.  s.  V.  differently  "  not  opposing  "  for  both  expres- 
sions. 

Viseneti  to  discard,  dislike,  get  rid  of  (opp.  usseneti) 
S  III. 89;  Ps  11.167.     See  usseneti. 

Viseyyati  [vi-(-seyyati.  cp.  Sk.  siryati,  of  if  to  crush] 
to  be  broken,  to  fall  to  pieces  J  11 74.  — pp.  visinna. 

Visevita  (nt.)  [vi -1- sevita]  i.  restlessness,  trick,  capers 
M  1.446  (of  a  horse;  comb''  with  visukayita).  —  2.  dis- 
agreement S  1.123  (  =viruddha-sevita  A'.S.  1.320).  Bdhgh 
at  A'. 5.  11.203  reads  °sedhita.     Cp.  visiikayita. 

Visesa  [fr.  vi-l-si?,  cp.  Epic  Sk.  visesa]  i.  (mark  of)  dis- 
tinction, characteristic,  discrimination  A  1.267  ;  S  iv.210  ; 
J  11.9  ;  Miln  29  ;  VvA  58,  131  ;  PvA  50,  60.  —  2.  elegance, 
splendour,  excellence  J  v.151  ;  DhA  1.399.  —  3.  dis- 
tinction, peculiar  merit  or  advantage,  eminence,  excel- 
lence, extraordinary  state  D  1.233  (so  for  vivesa  all 
through?);  A  111.349  (opp.  hana) ;  J  1.435;  VvA  157 
(punna°) ;  PvA  71  (id.),  147  (sukha").  —  4.  difference, 
variety  SnA  477,  504  ;  VvA  2  ;  PvA  37,  81.  135  (pl.= 
items),  abl.  visesato,  distinctively,  altogether  PvA  i, 
259.  —  5.  specific  idea  (in  meditation),  attainment 
J  vi.69  :  see  &  cp.  Brethren  24,  n.  i  ;  no.  —  Cp.  pati°. 

-4dhigama  specific  attainment  A  iv.22  ;  M  11.96; 
Nett  92  ;  Miln  412  ;  DhA  i.ioo.  [Cp.  BSk.  viSesadhi- 
gama  Divy  174].  -gamin  reaching  distinction,  gaining 
merit  A  11.185;  111.349  sq.  ;  S  v. 108.  -gii  reaching  a 
higher  state  or  attainment  J  vi.573.  -paccaya  ground 
for  distinction  VvA  20.  -bhagiya  participating  in,  or 
leading  to  distinction  or  progress  (spiritually)  D  111.272 
sq.,  277,  282  ;  Nett  77;  Vism  11,  88  (abstr.  "bhagiyata). 

Visesaka  (m.  or  nt.)  [fr.  visesa]  i.  a  (distinguishing)  mark 
(on  the  forehead)  Vin  11.267  (with  apanga).  —  2.  lead- 
ing to  distinction  VvA  85. 

Vi8esata=  visesa  Sdhp  265. 

Visesana  (nt.)  [fr.  viseseti]  distinguishing,  distinction, 
qualification,  attribute  Vv  16'";  J  iii.ii;  vi.63  ;  SnA 
181,  365.  399  ;  VvA  13.  —  instr.  avisesena  (adv.)  without 
distinction,  at  all  events,  anyhow  PvA  n6. 

Visesika  (f.)  [fr.  visesa]  the  Vaisesika  philosophy  Miln  3. 

Visesita  [pp.  of  viseseti]  distinguished,  differentiated 
Mhvs  II,  32  ;  KhA  18  ;  PvA  56. 

Visesin  (adj.)  [fr.  visesa]  possessing  distinction,  distin- 
guished from,  better  than  others  Sn  799,  842,  855,  905 ; 
Nd'  244. 

Visesiya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  viseseti]  distinguished  Vv  16" 
(=visesar)  patva  VvA  85);  v.  1.  visesin  (  =  visesavant 
C). 

Viseseti  [Caus.  of  visissati]  to  make  a  distinction,  to  dis- 
tinguish, define,  specify  J  v. 120,  451;  SnA  343;  grd. 
visesitabba  (-vacana)  qualifying  (predicative)  expres- 
sion VvA  13.  —  pp.  visesita. 

Visoka  (adj.)  [vi-t-soka]  freed  from  grief  Dh  90;  DhA 
II. 166. 

Visodha  [fr.  vi-i-iadb]  cleaning,  cleansing,  in  cpd.  dubbi- 
sodha  hard  to  clean  Sn  279. 

Visodhana  (nt.)  [fr.  visodheti]  cleansing,  purifjang,  emend- 
ing Ps  11.21,  23;  PvA  130. 

Visodheti  [Caus.  of  visujjhati]  to  clean,  cleanse,  purify, 
sanctify  Kvu  551  ;  Pv  1V.3*' ;  DhA  111.158;  Sdhp  321. 

Visoseti  [Caus.  of  vissussati]  to  cause  to  dry  up,  to  make 
wither,  to  destroy  A  1.204;  Sn  949  =  1099;  Nd'  434 
(=sukkhapeti);  Nd'  603  (id.). 


Vissa 


lOO 


Vihannati 


Vissa'  (adj.)  [\^edic  visva,  to  vi°]  all,  every,  entire;  only 
in  Np.  Vissakamma.  The  word  is  antiquated  in  Pali 
(for  it  sabba) ;  a  few  cases  in  poetry  are  doubtful.  Thus 
at  Dh  266  (dhamma),  where  DhA  111.393  expl»  as 
"  visama,  vissagandha "  ;  and  at  It  32  (vissantarai) 
"  among  all  beings  "  ?  v.  1.  vessantara^). 

Vissa^  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  visra]  a  smell  like  raw  flesh,  as  "gandha 
at  Dhs  625  ;  DhsA  319 ;  SnA  286  ;  DhA  in. 393. 

Vissaka  \oi  vi5]  dwelling :  see  pati°. 

Vissagga  [vi  +  sagga,  vi  +  syj,  cp.  sk.  visarga]  dispensing, 
serving,  donation,  giving  out,  holding  (a  meal),  only 
in  phrases  bhatta"  the  function  of  a  meal  Vin  11.T53; 
IV. 263  ;  Pv  III. 2'  (so  read  for  vissatta) ;  Miln  9;  SnA 
19.  140  ;  and  dana°  bestowing  a  gift  Pv  11.9^'  (=paric- 
caga-tthane  dan'agge  PvA  124). 

Vissajjaka  [fr.  vissajjati]  i.  giving  out,  distributing  Vin 
II. 177.  —  2.  one  who  answers   (a  question)   Miln   295. 

Vissajjati  [vi  +  sajjati,  of  srj.  The  ss  after  analogy  of 
ussajjati  &  nissajjati,  cp.  ossajjati  for  osajjati],  A.  The 
pres.  vissajjati  is  not  in  use.  The  only  forms  of  the 
simple  verb  system  are  the  foil. :  ger.  vissajja,  usually 
written  visajja,  in  meaning  "  setting  free,"  giving  up, 
leaving  behind  Sn  522,  794,  912,  1060  ;  Nd'  98  ;  Nd^  596. 

—  grd.  vissajjaniya  [perhaps  better  to  vissajjeti']  to  be 
answered,  answerable;  nt,  a  reply  Nett  161,  175  sq., 
191  ;  and  vissajjiya  to  be  given  away :  see  under  a°.  — 
pp.  vissattha.  —  B.  Very  frequent  is  the  Caus.  vissajjeti 
(also  occasionally  as  visajj°)  in  var.  meanings,  based  on 
the  idea  of  sending  forth  or  away,  viz.  to  emit,  dis- 
charge J  1.164  (uccara-passavar)).  —  to  send  Mhvs  8, 
3  (lekar)  visajjayi).  —  to  dismiss  PvA  81  (there). —to 
let  loose  PvA  74  (rathar|).  —  to  spend,  give  away,  bestow, 
hand  over  Pug  26  (visajj") ;  Nd'  262  (dhanarj) ;  Miln  41 
(dhafiilar)) ;  PvA  in,  119.  — to  get  rid  of  J  1.134  (mud- 
dikari).  —  to  answer  (questions),  to  reply,  retort  Sn  1005 
("essati,  fut.) ;  VvA  71  ;  PvA  15,  59,  87.  —  pp.  vissajjita. 

—  Caus.  II.  vissajjapeti  (in  meanings  of  vissajjeti) 
J  IV.2  (hatthai)  =to  push  away) ;  Miln  143  ;  Mhvs  6,  43. 

Vissajjana  (nt.)  &  "a  (f.)  [fr.  vissajjeti]  i.  giving  out, 
bestowing  Nd^  262  (dhana°). — 2.  sending  off,  dis- 
charging J  1.239  (nava°  putting  off  to  sea).  —  3.  answer, 
reply  Vism  6,  84  ;  often  in  comb"  puccha°  question  and 
answer,  e.  g.  Mhvs  4,  54  ;  PvA  2. 

Vissajjanaka  (adj.)  {-°)  [fr.  vissajjana]  I.  giving  out, 
bestowing  PvA  121.  —  2.  answering  J  1.166  (panha°). 

Vissajjapetar  [n.  ag.  fr.  vissajjapeti]  one  who  replies  or 
causes  to  reply  DhA  IV.199.     Cp.  vissajjetar. 

Vissajjita  [pp.  of  vissajjeti]  i .  spent,  given  away  Sn  982 

—  2.  let  loose,  sent  off,  discharged  Mhvs  23,  88. 

Vissajjetar  [n.  ag.  fr.  vissajjeti]  one  who  answers  (a  ques- 
tion) A  1. 103  (panhai]).     Cp.  vissajjapetar. 

Vissattha  [pp.  of  vissajjati]  i .  let  loose ;  sent  (out) ; 
released,  dismissed  ;  thrown  ;  given  out  Mhvs  10,  68 ; 
J  1,370;  111.373;  PvA  46,  64,  123,  174.-2.  (oif  the 
voice:)  distinct,  well  enunciated  D  1.114  (=apali- 
buddha,  i.  e.  unobstructed ;  sandiddha-vilambit'  adi 
dosa-rahita  DA  1.282);  11.211  ;  A  11.51  ;  111.114;  S  1.189; 
J  VI. 16  (here  as  vissattha-vacana).  —  3.  vissattha  at 
J  IV. 2 19  in  phrase  "indriya  means  something  like 
"  strong,"  distinguished.  The  v.  1.  visatta"  suggests  a 
probable  visata"  ;  it  may  on  the  other  hand  be  a' corrup- 
tion of  visittha°. 

Vissatthi  see  visatthi. 

Vissattha  [pp.  of  vissasati]  trusting  or  trusted  ;  confident ; 
being  confided  in  or  demanding  confidence,  intimate! 
friendly  A   111.114;   Vin   1.87   (so  read  for  tth);   iv.21  ; 


J  11.305  ;  III. 343  ;  Miln  109  (bahu°  enjoying  great  con- 
fidence);  SnA  188  ("bhava  state  of  confidence);  Sdhp 
168,  593.  — vissatthena  (instr.)  in  confidence  Vin  11.99. 
—  Cp.  abhi°. 

Vissandaka  (adj.)  [fr.  vissandati]  overfiowiDg  PvA  119. 

Vissandati  [vi-i-sandati,  of  syand]  to  flow  out,  to  stream, 
overflow  J  1.51  ;  v. 274;  PvA  34  (aor.  °sandi=paggbari), 
51  (ppr.  °amana),  80  (ger.  "itva),  119  ("anto  =  paggha- 
ranto),  123  (for  paggharati ;  T.  °eti). 

Vissamati  [vi-l-  samati.  of  iram]  to  rest,  repose  ;  to  recover 
from  fatigue  J  1485;  11.70;  128,  133;  m.208 ;  iv.93, 
293;  V.73  ;  PvA  43,  151.  —  Caus.  vissameti  to  give  a 
rest,  to  make  repose  J  111.36. 

Vissamana  (nt.)  [fr.  vissamati]  resting,  reposing  J  111.435. 

Vissametar  [n.  ag.  fr.  vissameti]  one  who  provides  a  rest, 
giver  of  repose,  remover  of  fatigue  J  vi.526. 

Vissaia  [fr,  vi-l-sarati,  of  svar]  i.  outcry,  shout,  cry  of 
distress,  scream  Vin  1.87;  11.152,  207;  iv.316;  PvA  22. 
245  (s),  279,  284  (°r)  karoti) ;  Sdhp  188.  —  2.  distress 
Vin  IV. 2 12,  229. 

Vissarati  [vi-t-sarati,  of  smf]  to  forget  Vin  1.207;  iv.261  ; 
Mhvs  26,  16.  — pp.  vissarita. 

Vissarita  [opp.  of  vissarati]  forgotten  PvA  202. 

Vissavati  [vi-t-savati,  of  sru]  to  flow,  ooze  Th   i,  453  = 

Sn  205  (v.  1.  SS  vissasati). 

Vissasati  &  vissaseti  [vi-l-sasati,  of  svas]  to  confide  in,  to 
put  one's  trust  in  (loc.  or  gen.),  to  be  friendly  with 
S  1.79  (vissase) ;  J  1.461  (vissasayitva) ;  111.148=525 
(vissasaye) ;   iv.56  ;  vi.292.  —  pp.  vissattha. 

Vissasa  [vi-fsasa,  of  svas]  trust,  confidence,  intimacy, 
mutual  agreement  Vin  1.296 ;  308,  A  11.78;  J  1.189,  487; 
Miln  126  ;  Vism  190  ;  VvA  66  ;  PvA  13,  265.  — dubbis- 
sasa  difficult  to  be  trusted  J  iv.462. 

Vissasaka  (&  °ika)  (adj.)  [vissasa]  intimate,  confidential; 
trustworthy  A  1.26  ;  Miln  146  ;  DA  1.289. 

Vissasaniya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  vissaseti]  to  be  trusted,  trust- 
worthy PvA  9;  Sdhp  306,  441  ;  neg.  a°  J  in. 474;  cp. 
dubbissasaniya  hard  to  trust  J  iv.462. 

Vissasin  (adj.)  [fr.  vissasa]  intimate,  confidential  A  111.136 
(asanthava"  intimate,  although  not  acquainted). 

Vissuta  (adj.)  [vi-)-suta,  of  sru]  widely  famed,  renowned, 
famous  Sn  137,  597,  998,  1009;  Pv  11.7^;  Mhvs  5,  19; 
PvA  107  (=diira-ghuttha). 

Vissussati  [vi-l-SU?]  to  dry  up,  to  wither  S  1.126  (in  comb" 
ussussati  vissussati,  with  ss  from  uss°).  Spelling  here 
visuss",  but  ss  at  S  111.149.  — Caus.  visoseti  (q.  v.). 

Vissota  (adj.)  [vi-l-sota,  of  sru]  flown  away,  wasted  Miln 
294- 

Vihaga  [viha,  sky,  -|-  ga]  a  bird  (lit.  going  through  the  sky) 
DA  1.46.  -°pati  lord  of  birds,  a  garuja  Davs  iv.33.  38, 
55- 

Vihanga  =  vihaga,  J  v. 416;  PvA  154,  157;  Sdhp  241. 

Vibangama  (adj .)  [viha -f  gam]  going  through  the  air,  flying  ; 
(m.)  a  bird  A  11.39;  in. 43;  Sn  221,  606;  Th  i,  1108; 
J  1. 216;  111.255  ;  DA  i.i25=DhsA  141. 

Vihannati  [I'ass.  of  vihanati]  to  be  struck  or  slain ;  to  be 
vexed  or  grieved,  to  get  enraged,  to  be  annoyed,  suffer 
hardship  ;  to  be  cast  down  Sn  168  sq. ;  Pv  ii.i  i'  (  =  vigha- 
tai)  apajjati  PvA  150);  1V.5*  (with  same  expl") ;  J  1.73, 
359;  11.442;  V.330 ;  DA  1.289.  —  ppr.  vihafifiainana 
Sn  1121  (with  long  and  detailed  exegesis  at  Nd*  604) ; 
S  1.28  (a") ;  PvA  150.     pp.  vihata  DA  1.231. 


Vihata 


loi 


Vihesika 


Vihata'  [pp.  of  vihanati]  struck,  killed,  destroyed,  impaired 
It  loo  (where  A  1.164  reads  vigata) ;  J  vi.i  71  ;  Sdhp  313, 
425- 

Vihata^  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  vihrti]  broad,  wide  J  vt.171  (-pu- 
thula  C). 

Vihanati  [vi  +  hanati]  to  strike,  kill,  put  an  end  to.  remove 
A  III. 248  (kankhar) ;  v.  1.  vitarati  perhaps  to  be  pre- 
ferred) ;  Sn  673  ;  Pot.  3"'  sg.  vihane  Sn  975  (cp.  Nd'  509)  ; 
&  vihane  Sn  348  =Th  i ,  1268,  —  ger.  vihacca  :  see  abhi°. 

—  Pass,  vihaniiati  (q.  v.).  —  pp.  vihata. 

VihaiaQS  (nt.)  [fr.  viharati]  abiding,  dwelling  DhsA  164, 
168. 

Viharati  [vi+harati]  to  stay,  abide,  dwell,  sojourn  (in  a 
certain  place) ;  in  general  :  to  be,  to  live  ;  appl^  :  to  be- 
have, lead  a  life  (as  such  expli"  with  "  iriyati "  at 
Vism  16).  SjTionyms  are  given  at  Vbh  194  with  iriyati, 
vattati,  paleti,  yapeti,  yapeti,  carati;  cp.  VbhA  262. — 
See  e.  g.  D  1.251  ;  Sn  136,  301,  925  ;  Pug  68  ;  DhsA  168 
DA  1.70,  132;  PvA  22,  67,  78.  —  Special  Forms:  aor 
3"*  sg.  vihasi  Sn  p.  16 ;  Pv  u.g*"  ;  Mhvs  5,  233  ;  PvA  54, 
121  ;  y^  pi.  vihiijsu  Th  i,  925,  &  vihatjsu  A  11. 21  ;  fut 
viharissati  A  111.70  ;  vihessati  Th  i,  257  ;  vihissati  Th  2 
181  ;  and  vihahisi  J  1.298  (doubtful  reading  '.),  where 
C.  expl'  as  "  vijahissati,  parihayissati "  ;  with  phrase 
sukhai]  vihahisi  cp.  dukkhar)  viharati  at  A  1.95,  and 
see  also  vihahesi.  — pp.  not  found. 

Vihaviba  [for  vihaga]  a  sort  of  bird  Th  i,  49  (v.  1.  cihaciha). 
The  C.  expl»  by  "  parillaka." 

Vihami  at  J  vi.78  (lohitai))  is  poetical  for  vijahami ;  C. 
expl«  as  nit^hubhami,  i.  e.  I  spit  out. 

Vihaya  is  ger.  of  vijahati  (q.  v.), 

Vihayasa  [cp.  Sk.  viha  &  vihayasa]  the  air,  sky  PvA  14. 
Cases  adverbially:  °yasa  through  the  air  Mhvs  12,  10, 
&  °yasai)  id.  J  iv.47.     Cp.  vehayasa  &  vehasa. 

Vihara  [fr  viharati]  i,  (as  m.  &  adj.)  spending  one's  time 
(sojourning  or  walking  about),  staying  in  a  place,  living  ; 
place  of  living,  stay,  abode  (in  general)  VvA  50  (jala°) ; 
PvA  22,  79  ;  eka°  living  by  oneself  S  11. 282  sq. ;  jangha" 
wandering  on  foot  PvA  73  ;  diva"  passing  the  time  of  day 
Sn  679;  PvA  142.  See  also  below  3  a.  —  2.  (appl'' 
meaning)  state  of  life,  condition,  mode  of  life  (in  this 
meaning  almost  identical  with  that  of  vasa'),  e.  g.  aiiya° 
best  condition  S  v. 326;  SnA  136;  dibba°  supreme  con- 
dition (of  heart)  Miln  225  ;  brahma°  divine  state  S  v. 326  ; 
SnA  136  ;  Vism  295  sq.  (ch.  ix.) ;  phasu°comfort  Ain.i  19, 
132;  sukha°  happiness  S  111.8 ;  v.326  ;  A  1.43;  1123; 
III. 131  sq. ;  IV. Ill  sq.,  230  sq. ;  v. 10  sq.  See  further 
D  1. 145,  196;  ni.22o  (dibba,  brahma,  ariya),  250  (cha 
satata"),  281  ;  S  n.273  (jhana°) ;  111.235  (id.);  A  111.294 
(°r)  kappeti  to  live  one's  life) ;  Ps  11.20  ;  Nett  119  sq.  — 
3.  (a)  a  habitation  for  a  Buddhist  mendicant,  an  abode 
in  the  forest  (aranna°).  or  a  hut ;  a  dwelling,  habitation, 
lodging  (for  a  bhikkhu),  a  single  room  Vin  11  207  sq. ; 
D  II. 7;  A  111.51,  299  (yathaviharai)  each  to  his  apart- 
ment); Sn  220  (diira°  a  remote  shelter  for  a  bhikkhu), 
391  ;  Vism  118  (different  kinds;  may  be  taken  as  c). 

—  (b)  place  for  convention  of  the  bhikkhus,  meeting 
place ;  place  for  rest  &  recreation  (in  garden  or  park) 
DA  1. 133.  —  (c)  (later)  a  larger  building  for  housing 
bhikkhus,  an  organized  monastery,  a  Vihara  Vin  1.58  ; 
III. 47;  S  1. 1 85  (°pala  the  guard  of  the  monastery); 
J  1. 126;  Miln  212  ;  Vism  292  ;  DhA  1.19  ("carika  visit 
to  the  monaster)'),  49  (°pokkharani),  416  ;  Mhvs  19,  77  ; 
P\'A  12,  20,  54,  67,  141,  151  ;  and  passim.  See  also 
Dictionary  of  Nama.  The  modern  province  Behar 
bears  its  name  from  the  viharas. 

Viharaka= vihara  (room,  hut)  Th  2,  94  (  =  vasanaka- 
ovaraka  ThA  90). 


Viharika  (adj.)=viharin  ;  in  sa<ldhi°  co-resident  A  111.70. 

Viharin  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  vihara]  dwelling,  living;  being  in 
such  &  such  a  state  or  condition  D  1.162  (appa-dukkha°), 
251  (evar)°);  A  1.24  (arana°).  26  (metta) ;  It  74  (appa- 
mada°);  Sn  45  (sadhu°),  375;  Pv  iv.i^'  (arana°) ;  PvA 
77,  230  (metta°);  VvA  71.  — eka°  living  alone  S  11.282 
sq. ;  IV. 33  ;  opp.  saddhi"  together  with  another ;  a  co- 
resident, brother-bhikkhu  S  11.204;  iv.103;  A  11239. 

Vihahesi  "  he  banished  "  at  J  iv.471  is  3"*  sg.  aor.  Caus. 
of  vijahati  (ha) ;  expl''  in  C.  by  pabbajesi.  —  Another 
form  vihahisi  see  under  viharati  &  cp.  viheti'. 

Vihiijsati  [vi  +  higsati]  to  hurt,  injure,  harass,  annoy 
S  1. 165  ;  It  86 ;  Sn  1 17,  451  ;  PvA  123,  198. 

Vihii)saiia  (f)  a  Commentary  word  for  vihiijsa  \'bhA  75. 
A  similar  vihirjsaka  occurs  at  PvA  123. 

Vihigsa  (f.)  (&  adj.  °a)  [abstr.  fr.  vi-(-hii)S,  to  injure] 
hurting,  injuring,  cruelty,  injury  D  111.215;  226  (°vi- 
takka);  S  1.202;  11. 151  (°dhatu) ;  A  111.448  ;  Sn  292; 
Ndi  207  (°sanna),  386,  501  ("vitakka) ;  Vbh  86,  363 
(°vitakka) ;  Dhs  1348  ;  Pug  25  ;  Nett  97 ;  Miln  337,  367. 
390;  DhsA  403;  VbhA  74  (°dhatu),  118  (°vitakka) ; 
Sdhp  510.     Neg.  avihiijsa  see  sep.  —  See  also  vihesa. 

Vihita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  vidahati]  arranged,  prepared,  disposed, 
appointed;  furnished,  equipped  J  vi.201  (loka) ;  Miln 
345  (nagara) ;  D  1.45  ,  S  in. 46  ;  Pug  55  (aneka°) ;  Mhvs  10, 
93  ;  PvA  51  (sutthu°).  a&&a.°  engaged  upon  something 
else  Vin  iv.269. 

Vihitaka  (adj.)=vihiU;  D  111.28  sq.  (kathag  v.  aggaiinai) 
how  as  the  beginning  of  things  appointed  ? ) ;  —  aiitia° 
engaged  upon  something  else  J  iv.389  (or  does  it  belong 
to  ahara,  in  sense  of  "  prepared  by  somebody  else  "?). 

Vihitata  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  vihita]  in  afUia"  being  engaged  upon 
something  else  DhA  1.181. 

Vihina  (adj.)  [pp.  of  vijahati]  left,  given  up,  abandoned 

Sdhp  579. 

Vihethaka  (adj.)  [fr.  vihetheti]  harassing,  oppressing, 
annoying  J  1.504  ;  v. 143  ;  Sdhp  89.     Neg.  a°  see  sep. 

Vihe^hana  (nt.)  [fr.  vihetheti]  harassing,  hurting  ;  oppres- 
sion VbhA  74 ;  VvA  68 ;  PvA  232. 

Vihethanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  vihethana]  oppressing,  hurting, 
doing  harm  J  11.123. 

Vihetheti  [vi-i-hetheti,  of  hi4  or  hej  to  be  hostile.  Same 
in  BSk.,  e.  g.  MVastu  in. 360  ;  Divy  42,  145  rtc]  to 
oppress,  to  bring  into  difficulties,  to  vex,  annoy,  plague, 
hurt  D  1. 116,  135  ;  11.12  ;  Sn  35  ;  J  1.187;  n.267;  iv.375  ; 
Miln  6,  14  ;  DhA  191  ;  VvA  69  (Pass.  "iyamSna). 

Viheti'  [for  bibheti  ?]  to  be  afraid  (of)  J  v.  154  (=bhayati 
C).     Cp.  vibheti. 

Viheti'  [contracted  Pass,  of  vijahati  =  vihayati,  cp.  viha- 
hesi] to  be  given  up,  to  disappear,  to  go  away  J  iv.216. 
Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  wrongly  =  vi-feti. 

Vihesaka  (adj.)  [fr,  viheseti]  annoying,  vexing,  troubling 
Vin  iv.36 ;  Dpvs  1.47. — -  f .  °ika  Vin  iv.239,  241. 

Vihesa  (f .)  [for  vihiijsa]  vexation,  annoyance,  injury ; 
worry  M  1.510  ;  n.241  sq. ;  S  1.136;  111.132;  iv.73 ; 
v. 357;  D  in.240  (a°) ;  Vin  iv.143  (-1- vilekha) ;  A  111.245, 
291  ;  Sn  247,  275,  277;  Vbh  369;  Nett  25;  Miln  295: 
DhA  1.55- 

Vihesika  (f.)  [probably  for  Sk.  'vibhijika,  fr.  bhl.  Epic  Sk. 
bhija,  cp.  bhisma  =  P.  bhigsa  (q.  v.)]  fright  J  111.147. 
(C.  says  "  an  expression  of  fearlessness  ") . 


Viheseti 


102 


Vitnaqsati 


Viheseti  [vi  +  hirjs,  or  Denom.  fr.  vihesa,  cp,  Geiger, 
P.Gr.  §  lo*]  to  harass,  vex,  annoy,  insult  S  iv.63  ;  v. 346  ; 
A  111.194;  Vin  IV. 36  sq. ;  Ud  44;  Sn  277;  Pv  iv.i"" 
(vihesai),  aor.) ;  iv.i^'  (vihesayi,  aor.). 

Vici  (m.  &  f.)  [cp.  late  Sk.  vici  wave ;  Vedic  vici  only  in 
meaning  "  deceit  "  ;  perhaps  connected  with  Lat.  vicis, 
Ags.  wice  =  E.  week,  lit.  "change,"  cp.  tide]  i.  a  wave 
J  1.509;  Miln  117  (jala°),  319  ("puppha  wave-flower, 
tig.);  Vism  63  (samudda") ;  Davs  iv.46 ;  DhsA  116  = 
Vism  143.  — 2.  interval,  period  of  time  (cp.  "  tide  "  = 
time  interval)  ]  v.271  (°antara,  in  Avici  definition  as 
"  uninterrupted  state  of  suffering ").  In  contrast 
pair  avici  (adj.)  uninterrupted,  without  an  interval,  & 
savici  with  periods,  in  def°  of  jara  at  VbhA  99  &  DhsA 
328(  where  avici  means  "  not  changing  quickly,"  and 
savici  "  changing  quickly."  Also  in  def"  of  sada  (con- 
tinuously) as  "  avici-santati  "  at  Nd^  631.     Cp.  avici. 

Vljati  [vij]  to  fan  J  1.165  ;  SnA  487 ;  VvA  6  (T.  bijati).  — 
Caus.  vijeti  DhA  iv.213;  Mhvs  5,  161.  —  Pass,  viji- 
yati :  ppr.  vijiyamana  getting  fanned  J  111.374  (so  read 
for  vijiy") ;  PvA  i  76  (so  for  vijjamana  !).  —  pp.  vijita. 

Vijana  (nt.)  [fr.  vij,  cp.  Class.  Sk,  vijana]  a  fan,  fanning; 
in  vijana-vata  a  fanning  wind,  a  breeze  SnA  174. 

Vijani  (f.)  [fr.  vijana,  of  vij]  a  fan  Vv  47^  (T.  bijani,  v.  1. 
vij");  J  1.46;  Vism  310;  DhA  iv.39 ;  VvA  147;  PvA 
176  ;  KhA  95.  There  are  3  kinds  of  fans  mentioned  at 
Vin  II. 1 30,  viz.  vakamaya",  usira",  mora-pificha°,  or 
fans  made  of  bark,  of  a  root   (?),  and  of  a  peacock's  tail. 

Vijita  [pp.  of  vijati]  fanned  Pv  iii.ii'  (°anga). 

*Vinati  (?),  doubtful:  sec  apa"  &  pa".  Kern,  Toev.'s.  v. 
wrong  in  treating  it  as  a  verb  "  to  see." 

Vina  (f.)  [cp.  Vedic  vina]  the  Indian  lute,  mandoline 
S  i.i22=Sn  449  (kaccha  bhassati  "let  the  lyre  slide 
down  from  hollow  of  his  arm  "  K.S.  1. 153) ;  Th  i,  467  ; 
S  iv.igb  (six  parts);  A  111.375;  J  111.91  ;  v. 196,  281 
(named  Kokanada  "wolf's  howl");  vi. 465  =580; 
VV.64I'';  811";  Miln  53  (all  its  var.  parts);  VvA  138, 
161,  210;  PvA  151.  —  vinag  vadeti  to  play  the  lute 
Mhvs  31,  82  ;  ThA  203. 

-dandaka  the  neck  of  a  lute  J  11.225.  -donika  the 
sounding  board  of  a  lute  (cp.  doni'  4)  Vism  251  ;  VbhA 
234  ;  KhA  45. 

Vita'  (adj.)  [vi-i-  ita,  pp.  of  i]  deprived  of,  free  from,  (being) 
without.  In  meaning  and  use  cp.  vigata°.  Very  fre- 
quent as  first  part  of  a  cpd.,  as  e,  g.  the  foil.  : 

-accika  without  a  flame,  i.  e.  glowing,  aglow  (of 
cinders),  usually  comb''  with  "dhuma  "  without  smoke  " 
M  1.365  ;  S  11.99  (soreadfor  vitacchika)  =  iv.i88=M  1.74  ; 
D  II. 134;  J  1. 15,  153;  III. 447;  v. 135;  DhA  n.68  ;  Vism 
301.  -iccha  free  from  desire  J  11.258.  -gedha  without 
greed  Sn  210,  860,  iioo;  Nd'  250;  Nd*  606.  -tanha 
without  craving  Sn  83,  741,  849,  1041,  1060  ;  Nd'  211  ; 
Nd*  607.  -tapo  without  heat  J  11.450.  -(d)dara 
fearless  Ph  i,  525;  Dh  385.  -dosa  without  anger  Sn 
12.  -macchara  without  envy,  unselfish  Sn  954;  Nd' 
444  ;  J  V.398  ;  Pv  iii.i'^.  -mada  not  conceited  So  328, 
cp.  A  II. 120.  -mala  stainless  (cp.  vimala)  S  iv.47,  107  ; 
DA  1.237  '■  Miln  16.  -moha  without  bewilderment 
Sn  13.  -ragsi  rayless  (?)  Sn  1016  (said  of  the  sun  ;  the 
expression  is  not  clear.  One  MS.  of  Nd^  at  this  passage 
reads  pita",  i.  e.  with  yellow,  i.  e.  golden,  rays;  which 
is  to  be  preferred).  Cp.  note  in  Index  to  SnA.  -raga 
passionless  Sn  11,  507,  1071  ;  Pug  32  ;  Pv  11.4'  ;  Miln  76, 
and  frequently  elsewhere.  -lobha  without  greed  Sn  10, 
469,  494.  -vanna  colourless  Sn  1120.  -salla  without 
a  sting  S  iv.64.  -sarada  not  fresh,  not  unexperienced, 
i.  e.  wise  It  123. 

Vita*  [pp.  of  vayati',  or  vinati]  woven  Vin  111.259  (su°). 


Vltaosa  [fr.  vi+  tan,  according  to  BR.  The  word  is  found 
in  late  Sk.  (lexicogr.)  as  vitagsa.  BR  compare  Sk. 
avatagsa  (garland :  see  P.  vataijsa)  &  uttagsa.  The 
etym.  is  not  clear]  a  bird-snare  (BR.  ;  "  jedes  zum 
Fangen  von  Wild  &  Vogeln  dienende  Gerat"),  a  decoy 
bird  Th  i,  139.     Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  "  vogelstrik." 

Viti°  is  the  contracted  prepositional  comb"  vi-l-  ati,  repre- 
senting an  emphatic  ati,  e.  g.  in  the  foil. : 

-(k)kama  (i)  going  beyond,  transgression,  sin  Vin 
111.112;  IV. 290  ;  J  1.412  ;  IV. 376;  Pug  21;  Miln  380; 
Vism  II,  17;  DhA  IV.3.  —  (2)  going  on,  course  (of 
time)  PvA  137  ("ena  by  and  by;  v.  1.  anukkamena). 
-kinna  sprinkled,  speckled,  gay  with  J  v. 188.  -nameti 
to  make  pass  (time),  to  spend  the  time,  to  live,  pass, 
wait  J  III. 63,  381  ;  DhA  11.57;  VvA  158;  PvA  12,  21, 
47.  76.  -patati  to  fly  past,  to  flit  by,  to  fly  up  &  down 
Sn  688;  A  v.88=Miln  392.  -missa  mingled,  mixed 
(with)  M  1. 318;  D  III  96;  J  VI  151.  -vatta  having 
passed  or  overcome,  gone  through ;  passed,  spent  S 
1. 14,  145;  III. 225;  iv,52  ;  A  11.44;  Sn  6,  395,  796; 
J  1.374  ;  ThA  I  70  ;  PvA  2  i ,  55,  83.  -sareti  [fr.  vi-|-  ati-(- 
sr;  not  with  Childers  fr.  smf;  cp.  BSk.  vyatisarayati] 
to  make  pass  (between),  to  exchange  (greeting),  to 
address,  converse  (kathar)),  greet.  Often  in  phrase 
saraniyag  sammodaniyag  kathag  vitisareti  [for  which 
BSk.  sammodaniri  sagranjanir)  vividhai)  kathar)  vya- 
tisarayati, e.  g.  Av^  II. 140]  D  1.52,  90,  118,  152;  Sn 
419;  cp.  Miln  19;  J  iv.98  (shortened  to  saraiiiyar) 
vitisarimha ;  expH  with  sarayimha) ;  v.264.  -harana 
passing  (mutually),  carrying  in  between  J  VI.35S  (bho- 
jananar)).  -harati  to  associate  with  (at  a  meal)  S  1.162. 
-hara,  in  pada°  "  taking  over  or  exchange  of  steps,"  a 
stride  S  1.211;  A  iv.429 ;  J  vi.354.  Same  in  BSk., 
e.  g.  MVastu  1.35;  111.162. 

Vithi  (f.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  vithi,  to  Idg.  *ueia-  to  aim  at,  as  in 
Lat.  via  way,  Sk.  veti  to  pursue;  Lat.  venor  to  hunt; 
Gr.  tiffaro  he  went]  i.  street,  way,  road,  path,  track 
A  V.347,  350  sq. ;  Vv  83'  ;  J  1.158  (garden  path) ;  v. 350 
(dve  vithiyo  gahetva  titthati,  of  a  house);  vi.276  (v. 
and  raccha) ;  DhA  1.14;  VvA  31;  PvA  54.  -antara- 
vithiyag  (loc)  in  the  middle  of  the  road  J  1.373;  PvA 
96.  -°sabhaga  share  of  road  J  1.422  ;  -"singhataka  cros.s- 
road  DhA  IV.4.  —  Of  the  path  of  the  stars  and  heavenly 
bodies  J  1.23;  VvA  326. — Various  streets  (roads, 
paths)  are  named  either  after  the  professions  carried 
on  in  them,  e.  g.  dantakara°  street  of  ivory-workers 
J  1.320  ;  pesakara"  weaver  st.  DhA  1.424  ;  bhatakara° 
soldier  st.  DhA  1.233; — °^  after  the  main  kind  of 
traffic  frequenting  these,  e.  g.  naga°  elephant  road 
VvA  316;  miga°  animal  rd.  J  1.372  ;  — or  after  special 
occasions  (like  distinguished  people  passing  by  this  or 
that  road),  e.  g.  buddha"  the  road  of  the  Buddha  DhA 
11.80;  raja°  King  st.  ThA  52;  Mhvs  20,  38.  —  2.  (t.t. 
in  psychology)  course,  process  (of  judgment,  sense- 
perception  or  cognition,  cp.  Cpd.  25,  124,  241  (vinic- 
chaya"),  266.  —  Vism  187  (kammatthana°) ;  KhA  102 
(viniiana°).  -"citta  process  of  cognition  (lit.  processed 
cognition)  Vism  22  ;  DhsA  269. 

Vithika  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  vithi]  having  (as)  a  road  Miln  322 
(satipatthana°,  in  the  city  of  Righteousness). 

Vimagsaka  (adj.)  [fr.  vimagsa]  testing,  investigating, 
examining  S  111.6  sq. ;  Sn  827  ;  Nd*  166  ;  J  1.369. 

Vimagsati  (&  °eti)  [Vedic  mimagsate,  Desid.  of  man.  The 
P.  form  arose  through  dissimilation  m>v,  cp.  Geiger, 
P.Gr.  46,  4]  "  to  try  to  think,"  to  consider,  examine, 
find  out,  investigate,  test,  trace,  think  over  Sn  215 
(°amana),  405;  J  1.128,  147,  200;  vi.334 ;  Miln  143; 
PvA  145,  215,  272;  Sdhp  91.  —  ger.  °itva  J  vi.368 ; 
Mhvs  5,  36 ;  PvA  155  ;  inf.  °itug  Mhvs  37,  234  ;  PvA  30, 
155,  283  (sippar)). — Caus.  II,  vimarjsapeti  to  cause  to 
investigate  J  v.iio.  —  Cp.  pari". 


Vimaqsana 


103 


Vunhi 


Vimaosana  (nt.)  Jt  "a  (f.)  [fr,  vimaijsati]  trying,  testing; 
finding  out,  experiment  Vin  ni.79  ;  J  ni.55  ;  Mhvs  22, 
78;  PvA  153- 

VImaosa  (f.)  [fr.  vimagsati]  consideration,  examination, 
test,  investigation,  the  fourth  of  the  Iddhipadas,  q.  v. ; 
D  III. 77  (°samadhi),  222;  S  v.280  ;  A  1.39,  297;  in. 37, 
346  ;  V.24,  90,  338  ;  Ps  1.19 ;  II. 123  ;  Kvu  508  ;  Dhs  269  ; 
Vbh  219  (°samadhi),  222,  227;  Tikp  2;  Nett  16  ("sa- 
madhi),  42;  DA  1.106;  SnA  349  (vlmai)sa-kara=san- 
khej-ya-kara).  —  Cp.  pari". 

Vimagsin  =  vimar)saka  Sn  877;  Nd'  283  ;  DA  1. 106. 

Vira  [Vedic  vira ;  cp.  Av.  vira,  Lat.  vir,  virtus  "  virtue  "  ; 
Gotu.  wair,  Ohg,  Ags  wer ;  to  vayas  strength  etc.;  cp. 
viriya]  manly,  mighty,  heroic;  a  hero  S  1.137;  Sn  44, 
165  (not  dhira),  642,  1096.  1102  ;  Th  1,  736  (nara°  hero); 
Nd*  609;  DhA  IV.225.  — maha°  a  hero  S  i.iio,  193; 
III. 83  (of  the  Arahant).  — vira  is  often  an  Ep.  of  the 
Buddha. 

-angarupa  built  like  a  hero,  heroic,  divine  D  1.89; 
II. 16;  III. 59,  142,  145;  S  1.89;  Sn  p.  106;  expH  as 
"  devaputta-sadisa-kaya  "  at  DA  1.250  &  SnA  450. — 
The  BSk.  equivalent  is  var-anga-rupin  (distorted  fr. 
vlr'=),  e.  g.  MVastu  1.49;  11. 158;  in. 197. 

Viyati  [Pass,  of  vinati]  see  viyyati. 

Vivadata  (adj.)  [vi+avadata,  the  metric  form  of  vodata] 
clean,  pure  Sn  784,  881. 

VIsati  &  vlsar)  (indecl.)  [both  for  Vedic  vigsati ;  cp.  Av. 
visaiti,  Gr.  fi«oTi,  Lat.  viginti,  Oir.  fiche,  etc. ;  fr. 
Idg.  *ijiH-  komt  (decad),  thus  "  two  decads."  Cp.  vi°] 
number  20.  —  Both  forms  are  used  indiscriminately. 
—  (i)  visati,  e.  g.  Vin  11. 2 71  ("vassa,  as  minimum  age 
of  ordination);  Sn  457  (catu-visat'akkharar)) ;  J  1.89 
("sahassa  bhikkhu);  in. 360  ;  VbhA  191  sq. ;  DhA  1.4 
(ekuna",  19);  11. g.  54;  in. 62  ("sahassa  bhikkhu,  as 
followers);  as  visatig  at  DhA  11. 61  (vassa-sahassani). — 
(2)  visar) ;  e.  g.  Sn  1019  (°vassa-sata) ;  It  99  (jatiyo) ; 
J  1-395  (°yojana-sata) ;  v. 36  (°ratana-sata) ;  DhA  1.8; 
11.91  (°yojana-satar)). 

^hi  [cp.  Vedic  vrihi]  rice,  paddy  Vin  iv.264  (as  one 
of  the  7  kinds  of  amaka-dhaiiiia) ;  J  1.429 ;  in. 356 ; 
Miln  102,  267;  Vism  383  (°tumba) ;  DhA  1.125  ;  111.374 
("pitaka). 

Vaccati  [Pass,  of  vac]  to  be  called  D  1.168,  245;  Sn  436, 
759,  848,  861,  946  ;  Nd'  431  ;  Nd*  s.  v.  katheti ;  SnA  204  ; 
DhA  11.35.     See  also  vatti.  —  pp.  vutta. 

Vattha  [pp.  of  vassati^]  (water)  shed,  rained  Pv  1.5* ; 
PvA  29      See  also  vatta  &  vattha. 

Vutthavant = vusitavant,  Nd*  179,  284,  611. 

Vutthahati  &  vutthati  [the  sandhi  form  of  utfhahati 
(q.  v.),  with  euphonic  v,  which  however  appears  in 
BSk.  as  vyut°  (i.  e.  vi+ ud°) ;  vyuttisthate  "to  come 
back  from  sea "  Divy  35,  and  freq.  in  AvS,  e.  g. 
1.242]  I.  to  rise,  arise;  to  be  produced  Vin  n.278 
(gabbha).  —  2.  to  rise  out  of  (abl.),  to  emerge  from,  to 
come  back  S  iv.294  ;  Vism  661  (vutthati).  —  pp.  vut- 
thiU. — Cans,  vutthapeti  (i)  to  ordain,  rehabilitate 
Vin  IV. 226,  317  sq.  ( ^upasampadeti).  (2)  to  rouse 
out  of  (abl.),  to  turn  away  from  A  ni.i  15. 

Vuttt^&na  (nt.)  [the  sandhi  form  of  utthana]  i.  rise,  origin 
J  1. 114  (gabbha").  — 2.  ordination,  rehabilitation  (in  the 
Order)  Vin  iv.320  ;  Miln  344.  —  3.  (cp.  utthana  3) 
rousing,  rising  out,  emerging,  emergence ;  appli*  as  a 
religious  term  to  revival  from  jhana-abstraction  (cp. 
Cpd.  67,  215  n.  4;  Dhs.  trl',  §  1332)  M  1.302  ;  S  111.270  ; 
IV.294;  A  111.3U,  418,  427  sq. ;  Vism  661  (in  detail),  681 


sq.  (id.) ;  Dhs  1332  ;  Nett  loo  ;  Tikp  272,  346.  -"gamini 
(-vipassana-i^ana)  "  insight  of  discernment  leading  to 
uprising  "  {Cpd.  67)  Vism  661,  681  sq. 

Vutthanata  (f.)  [fr.  vuuhana]  rehabilitation ;  in  apatti" 
forgiveness  of  an  offence  Vin  n.250. 

VQ^hanima  [?]  is  an  expression  for  a  certain  punishment 
(pain)  in  purgatory  M  1.337  (vutthanimar)  nama  vedanar) 
vediyamana). 

Vuttlli  (f)  [fr-  VT?,  see  vassati'  &  cp.  Vedic  vrsti]  rain 
S  i.i72=Sn  77  (fig.  =saddha  bijai)  tapo  vutthi);  A 
in.370,  378  (vata°);  It  83;  Dh  14;  J  vi.587  ("dhara) ; 
Ap  38  (fig),  52  (amata°) ;  Miln  416;  Vism  37.  234 
(salila");  Mhvs  1,  24;  SnA  34.  224;  PvA  139  ("dhara 
shower  of  rain).  — dubbutthi  lack  of  rain,  drought 
(opp.  suvutthi)  J  11.367  =  vi.487  ;  Vism  512. 

Vntthika  (f.)  =  vutthi;  only  in  cpd.  dubbutthika  time  of 
drought,  lack  of  rain  D  i.ii  ;  DA  1.95  ;  It  64  sq.  (as 
avutthika-sama  resembling  a  drought);  DhA  1.52. 

Vutthita  [pp.  of  vutthahati ;  cp.  utthita]  risen  (out  of), 
aroused,  having  come  back  from  (abl.)  D  11.9  (pati- 
sallana) ;  Sn  p.  59  ;  S  iv.294. 

Vutthimant  (adj.)  [fr.  vutthi,  cp.  Vedic  vj-stimant  in  same 
meaning]  containing  rain,  full  of  rain ;  the  rainy  sky 
Th  2,  487  (=deva,  i.  e.  rain-god  or  sky  ThA  287). 
Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  wrongly  =  *vjTisti°,  i.  e.  fr.  vi-|- a? 
(vas)  to  shine,  "  luisterrijk,"  i.  e.  lustrous,  resplendent. 

Vu441ia  &  vnddha  [pp.  of  vaddhati]  old  (fig.  venerable)  — 
I.  vuddha  Pv  n.ii*  ;  Mhvs  13,  2,  —  2.  vuddha  M  n.168  ; 
J  v,i40;  Sn  p.  108  (+ mahallaka) ;  DA  1.283. 

Va44haka  (adj.)  [vuddha+ka]  old;  f.  "ika  old  woman 
Th  2,  16. 

Va44hi  A  vuddhi  (f  )  [a  by-form  of  vaddhi]  increase, 
growth,  furtherance,  prosperity.  —  i.  vuddhi  PvA  22. 
Often  in  phrase  vuddhi  virulhi  vepuUa  (all  three  almost 
tautological)  Miln  51  ;  Vism  129.  —  2.  vuddhi  M  1.117 
(-f  virulhi  etc.);  S  11.205  sq.  ;  in.53  ;  v.94,  97;  A  in. 76 
(opp.  parihani),  404  (-(-virulhi),  434  (kusalesu  dham- 
mesu);  v.123  sq. ;  It  108;  J  v. 37  ("ppatta  grown  up); 
Vism  271,  439  (so  read  for  buddhi);  DhA  11.82,  87; 
Sdhp  537. 

'Vupati  [we  are  giving  this  base  as  such  only  from  analogy 
with  the  Sk.  form  vrnati  (vrnoti);  from  the  point  of 
view  of  Pali  grammar  we  must  consider  a  present  tense 
varati  as  legitimate  (cp.  sar)°).  There  are  no  forms  from 
the  base  vunati  found  in  the  present  tense ;  the  Caus. 
vareti  points  directly  to  varati].  The  two  meanings 
of  the  root  vT  as  existing  in  Sk.  are  also  found  in  Pali, 
but  only  peculiar  to  the  Caus.  vareti  (the  form  aor. 
avari  as  given  by  Childers  should  be  read  avarinsu 
Mhvs  36,  78).  The  present  tense  varati  is  only  found 
in  meaning  "  to  wish  "  (except  in  prep.  cpds.  like  san- 
varati  to  restrain).  —  Def"*  of  vT :  Dhtp  255  var  = 
varana-sambhattisu  ;  274  val=sagvarane  (see  valaya); 
606  var  =  avaran'icchasu.  —  1.  to  hinder,  obstruct;  to 
conceal,  protect  (on  meanings  "  hinder  "  and  "  con- 
ceal "  cp.  rundhati) ;  Idg.  'ner  and  •nel,  cp.  Gr.  IKurpov, 
Sk.  varutra,  Lat.  volvo,  aperio  etc.  See  vivarati.  The 
pp.  'vuta  only  in  comb"  with  prefixes,  like  pari",  san". 
It  also  appears  as  'vata  in  vivafa.  —  2.  to  wish,  desire  ; 
Idg.  *pel,  cp.  Sk.  varana,  variyan  "  better,"  Gr.  !\louai 
to  long  for,  Lat.  volo  to  intend,  Goth,  wiljan  to  "  will," 
wilja  =  E.  will.  —  Pres.  varati  (cp.  vapeti):  imper. 
varassu  J  in. 493  (vararj  take  a  wish  ;  Pot.  vare  Pv 
ii.9*»  (=vareyyasi  C);  ppr.  varamana  Pv  11  9*"  (=pat- 
thayamana  PvA  128).  —  pp.  does  not  occur. 

Vmihi°  (&  instr.  vunhina)  at  Pgdp  13,  15,  19,  35  must  be 
meant  for  v-unha°  (&  v'unhena),  i.  e.  heat  (see  unha). 


Vutta 


ro4 


Vupasammati 


Vutta^  [pp.  of  vatti,  vac;  cp.  utta]  said  DA  1.17  (°r)  hoti 
that  is  to  say) ;  DhA  11.2 1 ,  75,  80  ;  SnA  1 74. 

-vadin  one  who  speaks  what  is  said  (correctly),  telling 
the  truth  M  1.369;  S  11.33  :  111.6. 

Vntta^  [pp.  of  vapati']  sown  S  1.134  (khetta) ;  J  1.340; 
IIH2  ;  VT.14;  Miln  375  (khetta);  PvA  7,  137,  139. 

Vntta'  [pp.  of  vapati*]  shaven  M  11. 168  (''siro).  Cp. 
ni  vutta*. 

Vutta-vela  at  J  Tv.45  (tena  vutta-velayai)  &  ittaraya 
vutta-velaya)  is  by  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  vutta*  fancifully 
&  wrongly  taken  as  'vyusta  (=vi+usta,  pp.  of  vas  to 
shine),  i.  e.  dawned  ;  it  is  however  simply  vutta'  =at  the 
time  said  by  him  (or  her). 

Vuttaka  (nt.)  [vutta^+ka.  The  P.  connection  seems  to 
be  vac  although  formally  it  may  be  derived  fr.  vft  "  to 
happen  "  etc.  (cp.  vuttin  &  vattin,  both  fr.  vTt,  &  vutti). 
The  B5k.  equivalent  is  vrttaka  "  tale  "  (lit.  happening), 
e.  g.  Divy  439]  what  has  been  said,  saying  ;  only  in  title 
of  a  canonical  book  "  iti-vuttakar)  "  ("logia"):  see 
under  iti. 

Vuttamana  at  S  1.129  read  as  vattamana. 

Vattari  of  Dh  370  is  pafica-v-uttari(g),  cp.  DhA  iv.iog. 

Vntti  (f.)  [fr.  VTt,  cp.  vattati ;  Sk.  vrtti]  mode  of  being  or 
acting,  conduct,  practice,  usage,  livelihood,  habit 
S  1. 100  (afiya°;  cp.  ariya-vasa) ;  Sn  81  =Miln  228 
(=jlvitavutti  SnA  152);  Sn  68,  220,  326,  676;  J  vi.224 
(=jivita-vutti  C.) ;  Pv  11.91*  (=jivita  PvA  120);  iv.i'^ 
(=jivika  PvA  229);  Miln  224,  253;  VvA  23, 

Vattika  (adj.)  (-")  [vutti4-ka]  living,  behaving,  acting 
A  III. 383  (kandaka°);  PvA  120  (dukkha°) ;  sabhaga" 
living  in  mutual  courtesy  or  properly,  always  comb"* 
with  sappatissa,  e.  g,  Vin  1.187;  11. 162  ;  A  111.14  sq, 

Vattita  (f.)  {-")  [abstr.  formation  fr.  vutti]  condition  Vism 
310  (ayatta"). 

Vnttin  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  vrttin]  =vuttika  ;  in  sabhaga"  Vin 
1.45  ;  J  1.219.     Cp.  vattin. 

Vuttha'  [pp.  of  vasatii]  clothed  :  not  found.  More  usual 
nivattha. 

Vuttha*  [pp.  of  vasati*]  having  dwelt,  lived  or  spent  (time), 
only  in  connection  with  vassa  (rainy  season)  or  vasa 
(id.  :  see  vasa*).  See  e.  g.  DhA  1.7  ;  PvA  32,  43  ;  J  1. 183 
(°vasa).  With  ref.  to  vassa  "  year  "  at  J  iv.317.  —  At 
DhA  1.327  vuttha  stands  most  likely  for  vuddha 
(arisen,  grown),  as  also  in  abstr.  vutthattar)  at  DhA 
1330.  —  See  also  parivuttha,  pavuttha  &:  vusita. 

Vatthaka  (adj.)  (-°)  [vuttha*+ka]  dwelt,  lived,  only  in 
pubba°  where  he  had  lived  before  Mhvs  i,  53  (so  for 
"vuttaka ). 

Vnddha  &  Vaddhi:  sf  e  vuddha  i.\:  vuddhi. 

Vappati  is- Pass,  of  vapati. 

Voyhati  to  be  carried  away :   Pass,  of  vahati,  q.  v.  and 

add  refs.  :  Miln  69;  Vism  603  (vuyhare). — ppr.  vuy- 
hamana :  —  i .  being  drawn  M  1.225  (of  a  calf  following 
its  mother's  voice).  —  2.  being  carried  away  (by  the 
current  of  a  river),  in  danger  of  drowning  Sn  319. — 
Bp.  vulha  &  vulha. 

Voyhamanaka  (adj.)  [vuyhamana  with  disparaging  suffix 
"ka]  one  who  is  getting  drowned,  "  drownedling  " 
J  ni.507. 

Vil}ha  &  Vii}ha  [pp.  of  vahati.  Pass,  vuyhati ;  but  may  be 
vi+ujha]  carried  away.  —  i.  vulha:  Vin  1.32,  109. — • 
2.  vulha:  A  111.69;  J  1.193;  DhA  11.265  (udakena).  See 
also  biilha. 


Vuvahyamana  at  A  iv.  170  read  with  C.  at  opuniyamana 
"  sifting  "  (fr.  opunati) :  see  remark  at  A  iv.476. 

Vnsita  [Kem,  Toev.  s.  v.  vasati  takes  it  as  vi4-usita  (of 
vas'),  against  which  speaks  meaning  of  vivasati  "  to 
live  from  home."  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  66'  &  195  expl''  it  as 
usita  with  prothetic  v,  as  by-form  of  vuttha.  Best 
fitting  in  meaning  is  assumption  of  vusita  being  a 
variant  of  vosita,  with  change  of  o  to  u  in  analogy  to 
vuttha;  thus  =vi4- osita  "fulfilled,  come  to  an  end  or 
to  perfection  "  ;  cp.  pariyosita.  Geiger's  expl°  is 
supported  by  phrase  brahmacariyaq  vasati]  fulfilled, 
accomplished;  (or:)  lived,  spent  (=vuttha);  only  in 
phrase  vusitag  brahmacariyar)  (trsl°  Dial.  1.93 ;  "  the 
higher  life  has  been  fulfilled")  D  1.84  (cp.  Dh  1.225  — 
vutthari  parivutthar)) ;  It  115  (ed.  vusita");  Sn  463, 
493;  Pug  61.  —  Also  at  D  1.90  neg.  a°,  with  ref.  to 
avusitava,  where  Rh  D.  {Dial.  1.112)  trsl'  "ill-bred" 
and  "  rude,"  hardly  just.     See  also  arahant  ii.A. 

Vasitatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  vusita]  state  of  perfection  D  1.90 
(vusitava-manin  kir)  aiiiiatra  avusitatta=he  is  proud 
of  his  perfection  rather  from  imperfection). 

Vasitavant  (adj.)  [vusita -1- vant]  one  who  has  reached  per- 
fection (in  chaste  living),  Ep.  of  the  arahant  D  11.223 
(trsl°  "  who  has  lived  '  the  life  '  ") ;  M  1.4  ;  S  ni.6i  ; 
A  V.16  ;  Sn  514;  Nd'  611  ;  Miln  104.  On  D  1.90  see 
vusita  (end).     See  also  arahant  ii.C. 

Vnsimant  (adj.)  [difficult  to  explain;  perhaps  for  vasi- 
mant  (see  vasivasa)  in  sense  of  vasa  vattin]  =  vusita  vant 
A  IV. 340  ;  Sn  1 1 15  (cp.  Nd*  61 1  =  vutthava  cinna-carano 
etc.,  thus  "  perfected,"  cp.  cipnavasin  in  same  meaning). 

Vassati  is  Pass,  of  vasati*  (q.  v.). 

Viipakattlia  [doubtful,  whether  vi-fupakattha  (since  the 
latter  is  onlj'  used  of  lime),  or  =vavakattha,  with  which 
it  is  identical  in  meaning.  Cp.  also  BSk.  vyapakrsta 
Av§  1.233  ;  II. 194  ;  of  which  it  might  he  a  re-translation] 
alienated,  withdrawn,  drawn  away  (from),  secluded ; 
often  in  phrase  eko  vupakattho  appamatto  atapi  etc. 
(see  arahant  11. B.),  e.  g.  D  111.76;  S  1.117;  11. 21,  244; 
'"■35.  73  sq. ;  IV.7J  ;  A  iv.299.  Cp.  also  A  iv.435 
(ganasma  v.). 

Vupakasa  [formed  fr.  vupakaseti]  estrangement,  aliena- 
tion, separation,  seclusion  ;  always  as  twofold :  kaya°  & 
citta"  (of  body  &  of  mind),  e.  g.  D  111.285  {Dial.  111.260 
not  correctly  "  serenity  ") :  S  v.67  ;  A  iv.152. 

Vupakaseti  [Cans,  of  vavakassati]  to  draw  away,  alienate, 
distract,  exclude  Vin  iv.326 ;  A  v. 72  sq, — Cans.  II. 
vupakasapeti  to  cause  to  distract  or  draw  away  Vin 
1.49;  IV. 326. — pp.  viipakattha. 

Vuparati  [vi-i-  uparati]  ^uparati  cessation  DhsA  403. 

Vupasanta  [pp.  of  vupasammati]  appeased,  allayed, 
calmed  S  iv.2 1 7,  294;  A  1.4  (°citta)  ;  111.205;  Sn  82; 
Pug  61  (°citta);  PvA  113. 

Vupasama  [fr.  vin-upa-f  sam;  cp.  BSk.  vyupasama  Div\' 
578]  I.  allaying,  relief,  suppression,  mastery,  cessation, 
calmness  S  111.32  ;  IV.217;  v.65  (cetaso) ;  D  11. 157 
(sankhara);  A  1.4  (id.);  11.162  (papanca") ;  v.72  ;  Pug 
69;  J  1.392;  DhsA  403.  —  2.  quenching  ^of  thirst) 
PvA  104. 

Vupasamana  (nt.)  [fr.  vi-i-upa-i-sain;  cp.  BSk.  vyupaia- 
mana  .^^v^  11114]  allayment,  cessation  J  1.393;  Miln 
320  ;  PvA  37,  98. 

Vupasammati  [vi-t-  upasamraati]  i .  to  be  assuaged  or 
quieted  S  iv.215.  —  2.  to  be  suppressed  or  removed 
J  in. 334.  —  3.  to  be  subdued  or  extinguished,  to  go  out 
(of  light)  Ap.  35. — pp.  viipasanta. — Caus.  viipasa- 
meti  to  appease,  allay,  quiet,  suppress,  relieve  S  v. 50  : 
SnA  132  (renuri);  PvA  20,  38  (sokar)),  200; 


Vulha 


105 


VetuUa 


V&]ha  see  vulha. 

Ve'  (indecl.)  [cp.  V'edic  ve.  vail  part,  of  affirmation,  em- 
phasizing the  preceding  word:  indeed,  truly  Vin  1.3 
(etar)  ve  sukharj);  Dh  63  (sa  ve  bilo  ti  vuccati),  83 
(sabbattha  ve),  163  (yag  ve  .  .  .  tag  ve) ;  Sn  1050, 
1075^  1082  ;  DhA  HI.  1 55  (=yeva).     See  also  have. 

Ve'  may  be  enclitic  form  of  tumhe,  for  the  usual  vo  fit  Sn 
333  (— tumhakari  SnA  339).  See  P.T.S.  cd.  of  Sn  ;  cp. 
V.  1.  ve  for  vo  at  Sn  560  (here  as  particle  ! ). 

Ve°  is  the  guna  (increment)  form  of  vi",  found  in  many 
secondary  (mostly  f.  <t  nt.  abstr.)  derivations  from  words 
with  vi",  e.  g.  vekalla,  vecikicchin,  veneyya,  vepulla, 
vematta,  veviccha,  veramani,  which  Bdhgh  expl"  simply 
as  "  vi-karassa  ve-karar)  katva  veramani  "  KhA  2^.  — 
Cp.  vejry". 

Vekatika  (adj.)  [fr.  vikata]  one  addicted  to  dirt,  living  on 
dirty  food  D  1.167;  Miln  259  (doubled). 

Veka94A  [perhaps  connected  with  vikannaka]  a  kind  of 
arrow  M  1.429. 

Vekats  (adj.)  [=vikata]  changed  VvA  10. 

Vekantaka  (VbhA  63)  is  a  kind  of  copper  :  see  loha. 

Vekalla  (nt.)  [fr.  vikala]  deficiency  J  v.400  ;  Miln  107; 
Dhs  223;  DhA  11.26  (anga°  deformity),  79;  111.22; 
VvA  193  ;  Sdhp  5,  17.  —  As  vekalya  at  KhA  187  (where 
contrasted  to  sakalya).  — jannii  avekallai)  karoti  to 
keep  one's  knees  straight  Miln  418  (Kern,  Toev.  s.  v. 
trsl»  "  presses  tightly  together  ").     See  also  avekalla. 

Vekallata  &  vekalyata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  vekaUa]  deficiency 
A  III. 441  (a°) ;  Vism  350  (indriya") ;  J  1.45  (v.  254) 
(°lya°). 

Vekkhiya  is  poetical  for  avekkhiya  ( ^avekkhitva :  see 
avekkhati)  in  appativekkhiya  not  considering  J  IV.4. 
See  the  usual  paccavekkhati. 

Vega  [cp.  V'edic  vega,  fr.  vij  to  tremble]  quick  motion, 
impulse,  force;  speed,  velocity  S  iv.157;  A  111.158 
(sara°) ;  Sn  1074  ;  Miln  202,  258,  391  ;  PvA  11,47  (vata°), 
62  (visa").  67,  284  (kamma°) ;  Sdhp  295. — instr. 
vegena  (adv.)  quickly  DhA  1.49;  another  form  in  same 
meaning  is  vegasa,  after  analogy  of  thamasa,  balasa 
etc.,  e.  g.  J  111.6  ;  v.  117.  —  Cp.  sag°. 

Vegha  at  D  II. 1 10  ("missakena,  trsl"  Rh.  D.  "  with  the  help 
of  things  ")=S  V.153  (T.  reads  vedha"),  &  Th  i,  143 
("missena,  trsl"  "  violence  ")  may  with  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v. 
be  taken  as  veggha  =  viggha  (Sk.  vighna),  i.  e.  obstacle, 
hindrance;  cp.  uparundhati  Th  i,  143.  It  remains 
obscure  &  Kern's  expl"  problematic.     Cp.  Dial.  11.108. 

Vecikicohin  (adj.)  [fr.  vicikiccha]  daubting,  doubtful 
A  11.174  (kankhin-l- ) ;  S  111.99  (id.) ;  M  1.18  ;  Sn  510. 

Veoitta  (nt.)  [fr.  vi+citta*]  confusion,  disturbed  state  of 
mind  Dhtp  460  (in  def"  of  root  mub) 

Vejja  [fr.  vid,  'Sk.  vaidya,  but  to  Pali  etym.  feeling  fr. 
vijja]  a  physician,  doctor,  medical  man,  surgeon  J  1.455  ; 
III. 142  ;  KhA  21  ;  SnA  274  (in  simile);  VvA  185,  322  ; 
DhA  1.8  ;  PvA  36,  86  ;  Sdhp  279,  351 .  — hatthi°  elephant- 
doctor  J  VI. 490  ;  Mhvs  25,  34 ;  visa"  a  physician  who 
cures  poison(ous  bites)  J  1.310;  iv.498. 

-kamma    medical    practice    or   treatment    J    11.421  ; 
V.253  ;  Vism  384;  DhA  111.257,  35'  '•  1*1 72. 

Vejjika  (f.)  [fr.  vejja  ?]  medicine  (?)  Vin  111.185. 

Vetba  [fr.  visti  vejt]  wrap,  in  sisa°  head-wrap,  turban 
M  1.244  ;  S  IV. 56. 

Vefhaka  (adj.)  [fr.  vejheti]  surrounding,  enveloping  D  1.105 
("furbelow"  see  Dial.  1.130);  Mhvs  11,  14  (valay- 
anguli°). 


Ve^hana  (nt.)  [fr.  vetheti,  cp.  Epic  &  CIeiss.  Sk.  vesthana] 
I.  surrounding,  enveloping  J  vi.489.  —  2.  a  turban, 
head-dress  D  1.126;  A  1.145;  111.380  (sisa°) ;  J  v. 187; 
DhA  IV. 213;  PvA  161. — .3.  wrapping,  clothing,  wrap, 
shawl  J  VI. 12.  —  Cp    pali°. 

Vethita  [pp.  of  vetheti]  enveloped,  enclosed,  surrounded, 
wrapped  Sdhp  362.     Cp.  ni",  pari°. 

Vetheti  [\'edic  vestate,  vi?t  or  vejti  to  Lat.  virga,  branch, 
lit.  twisting]  to  twist  round,  envelope,  wrap,  surround 
J  15.  422  ;  Miln  282.  —  Pass,  vethiyati :  see  vi°.  —  pp. 
vethita.  —  Cp.  pali°. 

VeQa  [cp.  *Sk.  vaina,  dial]  i.  a  worker  in  bamboo  PvA 
1  75.  —  2.  a  member  of  a  low  &  despised  class  (cp.  puk- 
kusa)  Vin  iv.6 ;  S  1.93  (°kula) ;  A  11.85  (id);  in. 385  ; 
Pug  51  ;  f.  veni  J  v.306  (=tacchika  C);  Pv  iii.i''  (read 
veni  for  venii)). 

yeifi  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  veni]  a  braid  of  hair,  plaited  hair,  hair 
twisted  into  a  single  braid  A  111.295  ;  Vin  11.266  (dussa") ; 
Th  2,  255  ;  Vv  38-'  (  =  kesa-verii  C).  fig.  of  a  "  string  " 
of  people  D  1.239  (andha°).  -°kata  plaited,  having  the 
hair  plaited  J  11.185;  v.431. 

Ve9a  [cp.  Vedic  venu.  Another  P,  form  is  veju  (q.  v.)] 
bamboo;  occurs  only  in  cpds.,  e.  g.  -°gumba  thicket  of 
bamboo  DhA  1.177;  -°tinduka  the  tree  Diospyros 
J  V.405  (^timbaru  C.) ;  -"dandaka  jungle-rope  J  111.204  ; 
-°bali  a  tax  to  be  paid  in  bamboo  (by  bamboo  workers) 
DhA  1.177  ;  °-vana  bamboo. forest  J  v. 38. 

VetaQ^in  (adj.)  [fr.  vitanda]  full  of  sophistry,  skilled  in 
vitanda  Miln  90  (.said  of  King  Milinda). 

Vetana  (nt.)  [cp.  Epic  &  Class.  Sk.  vetana]  wages,  hire; 
payment,  fee,  remuneration;  tip  J  1.194  (nivasa°  rent); 
Sn  24  ;  VvA  141  ;  DhA  1.25  ;  PvA  112.  Most  frequently 
comb""  with  bhatta"  (q.  v.).     As  vedana  at  J  111.349. 

Vetabba  is  grd.  of  *veti  [vi]=vinati  to  weave  (q.  v.),  thus 
"  to  be  woven,"  or  what  is  left  to  be  woven  J  vi.26.  — 
inf.  vetug  Vin  11. 150. 

Vetasa  [Vedic  vetasa]  the  ratan  reed,  Calamus  rotang 
J  v. 167;  SnA  451. 

Vetala  at  D  1.6  (in  the  lists  of  forbidden  crafts)  refers  to 
some  magic  art.  The  proper  meaning  of  the  word  was 
already  unknown  when  Bdhgh  at  DA  1.84  explained  it  as 
"  ghana-ta|ai)  "  (cymbal  beating)  with  remark  "  raan- 
tena  mata-sarir'  utthapanan  ti  eke  "  (some  take  it  to 
be  raising  the  dead  by  magic  charms).  Rh.  D.  at  Dial. 
1.8  translates  "  chanting  of  bards  "  (cp.  vetalika).  It 
is  of  dialectical  origin. 

Vetalika  [dial. ;  cp.  Epic  &  Class.  Sk.  vaitalika]  a  certain 
office  or  occupation  at  court  connected  with  music  or 
other  entertainment,  a  bard.  With  other  terms  in  list 
at  Miln  331.  some  of  them  obscure  and  regional.  Also  at 
J  VI. 2 77,  where  expH  as  "  vetala  [read  vettaya  ?] 
utthapake,"  i.  e.  those  whose  duty  it  is  [by  vetala  or 
vetta]  to  make  (people]  rise.  The  expl"  is  obscure,  the 
utthapaka  reminds  of  Bdhgh's  ufthapana  (under 
vetala).  Kern  misunderstands  the  phra.se  by  trans- 
lating "  chasing  bards  away." 

Veti  [vi-(-eti,  of  i;  Sk.  vyeti]  to  go  away,  disappear,  wane 
S  111.135;  A  11.51;  J  111.154;  DhsA  329.  Cp.  vyava- 
yati. 

Vetulla  (&  vetnlya)  [cp.  *Sk.  vaitulya ;  also  called  vai- 
pulya,  fr.  vipula.  The  P.  form  is  not  clear ;  it  probably 
rests  on  dial,  trsl"  of  a  later  term]  a  certain  dissenting 
sect  (see  Mhvs.  trsf  259,  n.  2)  in  °vada  heretic  doctrine 
Mhvs  36,  41  ;  Dpvs  22,  45 ;  •°vadin  an  adherent  of  this 
doctrine. 

VIII— 2 


Vetta 


io6 


Vedeti 


Vetta  (nt.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  vetra]  twig,  rod  ;  creeper  ;  jungle- 
rope  (cp.  venu-danda) ;  cane  (calamus).  By  itself  only 
in  standard  list  of  punishments  (tortures) :  vettehi 
taleti  to  flog  with  canes,  e.  g.  A  1.47;  11. 122  ;  Miln  196. 
Otherwise  freq.  in  cpds. : 

-agga  cane-top,  sprout  of  bamboo  (cp.  kalira)  Vism 
255  (where  KhA  in  id.  p.  reads  °ankura) ;  VbhA  60,  239, 
252.  -ankura  a  shoot  of  bamboo  KhA  52,  67.  -asana 
cane  chair  VvA  8.  -cara  (vettacara)  "  stick-wander- 
'"g  "  {')  J  III  541  (-(- sankupatha ;  C.  :  vettehi  saficari- 
tabba) ;  Vv  84I1  (vettacarai)  sankupathaii  ca  maggag, 
expl''  as  vettalata  bandhitva  acaritabba  magga  \'vA 
338);  better  as  "jungle-path."  -patha  "a  jungle  full 
of  sticks"  (trsl"  Rh.  D.)  Miln  280  (-(-sankupatha), 
jungle-path,  -bandhana  binding  with  twigs  (rope?), 
creeper-bands  S  111.155;  v.51  =A  iv.127.  -lata  cane 
creeper  J  1.342  ;  VvA  8,  338.  -valli  garland  of  creeper 
Davs  III. 40. 

Veda  [fr.  vid,  or  more  specifically  ved  as  P.  root]  i.  (cp. 
vediyati  &  vedana)  (joj-ful)  feeling,  religious  feeling,  en- 
thusiasm, awe,  emotion,  excitement  (something  like 
sagvega)  D  11.210  (°patilabha-f  somanassa-patilabha) ; 
M  1.465  (ujara) ;  Sn  1029  (=piti  SnA  585);  J  11.336; 
III. 266.  attha-veda  +  dhamma-veda  enthusiasm  for  the 
truth  (for  the  letter  &  the  spirit)  of  Buddha's  teaching 
M  1.37  ;  A  V.329  sq.,  333,  349.  352  ;  veda  here  interpreted 
as  "  somanassar)  "  at  MA  1.173. — See  also  cpd. 
°jata.  —  2.  (cp.  vedeti  &  vijja)  (higher)  knowledge  (as 
"  Buddhist  "  antithesis  to  the  authority  of  the  "  Veda  "), 
insight,  revelation,  wsdom :  that  which  Bdhgh  at 
MA  I.I  73  defines  with  "  fiana,"  and  illustrates  with 
vedagia  of  Sn  1059 ;  or  refers  to  at  DA  1.139  with  def° 
"  vidanti  etena  ti  vedo."  Thus  at  Sn  529  &  792  (  =  veda 
vuccanti  catusu  maggesu  nanar)  paniia  Nd'  93),  cp.  SnA 
403.  —  As  adj.  veda  Ep.  of  the  Buddha  "  the  knower  " 
or  the  possessor  of  revelation,  at  M  1.386.  See  also 
vedagu.  —  3.  the  Veda(s),  the  brahmanic  canon  of 
authorized  religious  teaching  (revelation)  &  practice ; 
otherwise  given  as  "  gantha  "  i.  e.  "  text  "  at  MA  1.173, 
iS:  illustrated  with  "  tinnai)  vedanar)  paragu."  The 
latter  formula  is  frequent  in  stock  phrase  describing  the 
accomplishments  of  a  Brahmin,  e.  g.  at  D  1.88  ;  M  11. 133  ; 
Sn  1019  ;  A  1. 163  ;  DhA  111.361.  In  the  older  texts  only 
the  3  Vedas  (irubheda  =  Rg  ;  yaju"  &  saraa°)  are  referred 
to,  whereas  later  (in  the  Commentaries)  we  find  the  4 
mentioned  (athabbana  added),  e.  g.  the  three  at  S  iv.i  18  ; 
J  1. 168;  11.47;  III-537;  Miln  10;  Vism  384;  the /owe 
at  DA  1.247";  Miln  178.  —  Unspecified  (sg.):  SnA  462. 
As  adj  veda  "  knowing  the  Vedas  "  SnA  463  (ti"),  cp. 
tevijja.  —  The  Vedas  in  this  connection  are  not  often 
mentioned,  they  are  almost  identical  with  the  Mantras 
(see  manta)  and  are  often  (in  Corp..)  mentioned  either 
jointly  with  manta  or  promiscuously,  e.  g.  Pv  11.6^' 
(the  Vedas  with  the  6  angas,  i.  e.  vedangas,  called 
manta);  SnA  293  (manta-paragu4- veda-paragu),  322, 
448. 

-antagu  "  one  who  has  reached  the  end  of  knowledge," 
i.  e.  one  who  has  obtained  perfection  in  wisdom  Vin 
1.3;  Sn  463.  -gH  one  who  has  attained  to  highest 
knowledge  (said  of  the  Buddha).  Thus  different  from 
"  tinnar)  vedanarj  paragii,"  which  is  brahmanic.  The 
expl°  of  vedagu  is  "  catusu  maggesu  iianar)  "  Nd^  612, 
&  see  above  2.  —  S1.141,  168  ;  iv,83,2o6;  An.6;  iv.340  ; 
Sn  322,  458,  529,  749,  846,  947,  1049,  1060;  Nd'  93, 
204,  299,  431.  A  peculiar  meaning  of  vedagii  is  that 
of  "soul"  (lit.  attainer  of  wisdom)  at  Miln  54  &  71. 
-jata  thrilled,  filled  with  enthusiasm,  overcome  with 
awe,  excited  A  11.63  :  Sn  995,  1023  ;  Kvu  554  =  Vv  34^' 
(  =jata-somanassa  VvA  156) ;  J  i.i  i  ;  Miln  297.  -paragii 
one  who  excels  in  the  knowledge  of  the  Vedas,  perfected 
in  the  Veda  SnA  293  ;  cp.  above  3.  -bandhu  one  who 
is  familiar  with  the  Vedas  SnA  192. 

Vedaka  (adj.)  [fr,  veda  3]  knowing  or  studying  the  Vedas 
SnA  462  (brahmaija). 


Vedanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  vedana]  having  feeling,  endowed  with 
sensation  Vbh  419  (a°-|- asaiiiiaka). 

Vedana  (f.)  [fr.  ved°  :  see  vedeti  ;  cp.  Epic  Sk.  vedana] 
feeling,  sensation  (see  on  term,  e.  g.  Cpd.  14  Mrs.  Rh. 
D.  B.  Psy.,  ch.  iv.)  D  1.45;  11.58  (cp.  Dial,  n.54),  66; 
111.58,  77,  221,  228,  238  ("upadana) ;  S  111.86  sq. ;  A 
1.39,  122,  141  ;  11.79,  198,  256;  III. 245  sq.,  450;  IV. 301. 
385  ;  Kh  III.  (tisso  v.) ;  Sn  435,  529,  739.  mi;  Nd^  109 ; 
Nd^  551  (tisso  v.);  Ps  1.6,  50  sq.,  145  sq.,  153  sq. ; 
II. 109  sq.,  181  sq. ;  Vbh  135  sq.,  294,  401,  403  sq. ; 
Dhs  3,  1348;  Nett  27,  65  sq. ;  83,  123,  126;  Tikp  246, 
317  sq.,  345  sq. ;  Vism  460  sq. ;  DA  1. 125  ;  VbhA  13  sq., 
39  sq.,  80,  178,  193,  221  (°auupassana,  in  detail),  263  sq., 
382  (various).  —  Three  modes  of  feeling  (usually  under- 
stood whenever  mention  is  made  of  "tisso  vedana"): 
sukha  (pleasant),  dukkha  (painful)  adukkha-m-asukha 
(indilierent)  D  111.275;  S  11.53,  82;  iv.207  ;  A  111.400; 
It  46;  Tikp  317  sq.  —  or:  kusala,  akusala,  avyakata 
Vism  460.  —  Five  vedanas :  sukhag,  dukkhai),  soma- 
nassag.  domanassar),  upekkha  Vism  461.  Categories 
of  2  to  108  modes  of  Vedana,  S  iv.223  sq.  — vedana  is 
one  of  the  5  khandhas  (see  khandha  11. B).  —  On  relation 
of  old  and  new  sensations  (purana°>nava°)  see  e.  g. 
A  11.40;  III. 388;  IV. 167;  Vism  33;  and  see  formula 
under  yatra.  — In  the  Paticcasamuppada  (q.  v.)  vedana 
stands  between  phassa  as  condition  and  tanha  as 
result;  see  e.  g.  Vism  567  sq.  —  2.  (in  special  appli- 
cation) painful  sensation,  suffering,  pain  (i.  e.  dukkha- 
vedana)  M  1.59;  A  1.153  (saririka  bodily  pain)  ;  11. 116 
(id.);  III. 143  (id.);  Pv  i.io'^;  Miln  253  (kayika  &  ceta- 
sika)  ;  VbhA  loi  (maraij'  antika  v.  agonies  of  death). 
— vedan'  atta  afflicted  by  pain  Vin  11.61  ;  iii.ioo  ;  J  1.293. 
—  As  adj.  vedana  suffering  or  to  be  suffered  Pv  iii.io' 
(=anubhuyamana  PvA  2  14).  — vedana  at  J  111.349  is 
to  be  read  as  vetana. 

Vedayita  [pp.  of  vedeti]  felt,  experienced  S  1.112  ;  11.65; 
III. 46  ;  A  II. 198  ;  IV. 415  ;  Vism  460. 

Vedalla  (nt.)  [may  be  dialectical,  obscure  as  to  origin ; 
Bdhgh  refers  it  to  Veda  i]  Name  of  one  of  the  9  angas 
(see  nava)  or  divisions  of  the  Canon  according  to  matter 
A  II. 7,  103,  178  ;  111.88,  107,  361  sq. ;  iv.i  13  ;  Vin  in  8  ; 
Pug  43  ;  DhsA  26  ;  DA  1.24  ;  PvA  22.  The  DhsA  com- 
prises under  this  anga  the  2  suttas  so-called  in  M. 
(43,  44),  the  Sammaditthi,  Sakkapafiha,  Sankharabha- 
janiya,  Mahapunnama  etc.  Suttas.  as  catechetical 
DhsA  26  =  DA  1.24.  —  Note.  The  2"^  part  of  the  word 
looks  like  a  distortion  fr.  ariya  (cp,  mahalla>mah' 
ariya).     Or  might  it  be  =  vedanga  ? 

Vedi  &  Vedi  (f.)  [Vedic  vedi  sacrilrcial  bench]  ledge,  cornice, 
rail  Mhvs  32,  5  ;  35,  2  ;  36,  52  (pasana°) ;  36,  103;  Vv 
84I'  (=vedika  VvA  346). — See  on  term  Dial.  11. 210; 
Mhvs.  tsrl"  220,  296.     Cp.  vedika  &  velli. 

Vedika  (f  )  (&  vediya)  [fr.  vedi]  cornice,  ledge,  railing 
D  1I-I79;  Vin  II. 120  ;  J  iv.229,  266;  Vv  78*  (vediya  = 
vedika  VvA  304);  84"  (=vedikaVv.\  340);  VvA  275. 

Vedita  [pp.  of  vedeti]  experienced,  felt  S  iv.205  (sukha  & 
dukkha)  =Sn  738. 

Vedisa  [fr.  vidisa  ?]  N.  of  a  tree  J  v. 405  ;  vi.550. 

Vedeti  [Vedic  vedayati ;  Denom.  or  Caus.  fr.  vid  to  know 
or  feel]  "  to  sense,"  usually  in  Denom.  function  (only 
one  Caus.  meaning  ;  see  aor.  avedi) ;  meaning  twofold  : 
either  intellectually  "  to  know "  (cp.  veda),  or  with 
ref.  to  general  feeling  "  to  experience  "  (cp.  vedana).  — 
For  the  present  tense  two  bases  are  to  be  distinguished, 
viz.  ved°,  used  in  both  meanings  ;  and  vediy"  (  =  *vedy°), 
a  specific  Pali  formation  after  the  manner  of  the  4"' 
(y)  class  of  Sk.  verbs,  used  only  in  meaning  of  "  experi- 
ence." Thus  vedeti:  (a)  to  know  (as=acc.,  equal  to 
"to  call")  Sn  211  sq.  (tag  munig  vedayanti) ;  (b)  to 
feel,  to  experience  S  iv.68  (phuttho  vedeti,  ceteti,  san- 


Vedeha 


107 


Veyy 


janati);  M  1.37;  Pv  iv.i^"  (dukkhar)  =anubhavati  PvA 
241).  — vediyati :  to  feel,  to  experience  a  sensation  or 
feeling  (usually  with  vedanar)  or  pi.  vedana)  M  1.59; 
n.70  (also  Pot.  vediyejya) ;  S  11.82  ;  111.86  sq.  ;  iv.207  ; 
A  1. 141  ;  II. 198  (also  ppr.  vediyamana) ;  J  11.241  ;  Miln 
253.  —  aor.  avedi  he  knew,  recognized  J  111.420  ( -  aiinasi 
C.) ;  he  made  known,  i.  e.  informed  J  iv.35  (  =  janapesi 
C);  vedi  (recognized,  knew)  Su  643,  647,  114S  (-annasi 
aphusi  pativijjhi  Nd^  613);  &  vedayi  Sn  251  (-aiinasi 
SnA  293). — Fut.  vedissati  (shall  experience)  Pv  i.io'^ 
(dukkhar)  vcdanarj  v.).  —  grd.  vediya  (to  be  ktiown) 
Sn  474  (para°  ditthi  held  as  view  by  others;  expl''  as 
"  napetabba  "  SnA  410) ;  vedaniya  :  (a)  to  be  known, 
intelligible,  comprehensible  D  1.12  :  (dhamma  nipuna 
.  .  .  pandita-vedaniya) ;  11.36;  M  1.487;  ri.  220  ;  (b)  to 
be  experienced  S  iv.114  (sukha°  A-  dukkha") ;  A  1.249 
(ditthadhamma") ;  iv.382  ;  Pv  11. 11'  (sukha°-kamma  = 
sukha-vipaka  PvA  150);  111.3'  (kamma);  iv.i^'  (of 
kamma-vipaka —  anubhavana-yogga  PvA  22S);  PvA 
145  (kamma);  &  veditabba  to  be  iinderslcod  or  known 
D  1. 186;  PvA  71,  92,  104.  —  pp   vedita  &  vedayita. 

Vedeha  [=Npl.  Vedeha]  lit.  from  the  Videha  country'; 
wise  (see  connection  between  \'edeha  &  ved,  vedeti  at 
DA  I.I 39.  resting  on  popular  etymology)  S  11.215  sq. 
(°muni,  of  Ananda  ;  expl**  as  "  vedeha-muni  =pandita- 
muni,"  cp.  K.S.  1.321  ;  trsl"  K.S.  11.145  "the  learned 
sage  ") ;  Mhvs  3,  36  (same  phrase  ;  trsl"  "  the  sage  of  the 
Videha  country");  Ap  7  (id). 

Vedha  [adj.-n.)  rfr.  vidh^vyadh,  cp.  vyadha]  I.  piercing, 
pricking,  hitting  A  ii.i  14  sq  (where  it  is  said  of  a  horse 
receiving  pricks  on  var.  parts,  viz.  on  its  hair :  loma°  ; 
its  flesh  :  magsa"  ;  Hs  bone  :  atthi").  — avedha  [to  vyath '.] 
not  to  be  shaken  or  disturbed,  imperturbable  Sn  322 
( =  akampana-sabhava  SnA  331)-  —  -■  ''■  wound  j 
11.274  ^l-  —  3-  ^  fl^^  Miln  119.  —  Cp.  ubbedha. 

Vedhati  [for  •vethati=vj'athati.  of  vyath^  to  tremble, 
quiver,  quake,  shake  S  v. 402  ;  Th  i,  651  ;  2,  237  (°ama- 
na);  Sn  899,  902  (Pot.  vedheyya) ;  Nd'  312,  467; 
J  II. 191  (kampati+ ) ;  Miln  254  (+calati);  VvA  76 
(vedhamanena  sarirena) ;  DhA  11.249  (Pass,  vedhiya- 
mana  trembling ;  v.  1.  pa°).  Cp.  vyadhati,  ubbedhati 
&  pa  vedhati. 

Vedbana  (nt.)  [fr.  vidh  to  pierce]  p-ercing  J  iv.29  ;  DA 
1.22  I. 

Vedhabba  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  vidhava,=Epic  Sk.  vaidhavya] 
widowhood  J  vi.508. 

Vedhavera  [for  'Sk.  vaidhaveya,  fr.  vidhava]  son  of  a 
widow;  in  two  diff.  passages  of  the  Jataka,  both  times 
characterized  as  sukka-cchavi  vedhavera  "  sons  of 
widows,  with  white  skins."  and  at  both  places  misunder- 
stood (or  unintelligiblj'  expl"")  by  the  Cy.,  viz.  J  iv.184 
(+ thuUa-bahu ;  C:  vidhava  apatika  tehi  vidhava 
saranti  ti  [ti]vidha-vera  ca  vedhavera);  vi.508  (C. : 
vidhav'  itthaka;  v.  1.  vidhav-ittikama  purisa). 

Vedhita  (f.)  [pp.  of  vedheti,  Caus.  of  vijjhati]  shooting, 
hitting  J  VI. 448. 

Vedhin  (adj.)  [fr.  vidh-vyadh]  piercing,  shooting,  hitting : 
see  akkhana°. 

Venateyya  [fr.  vinata]  descended  from  Vinata,  Ep.  of  a 
garula  Ps  II. 196;  J  vi.260  ;  Days  iv.45. 

Venayika'  [fr.  vi  3  +  naya]  a  nihilist.  The  Buddha  was 
accused  of  being  a  v.  M  1.140. 

Venayika'  (adj.)  [fr.  vinaya]  versed  in  the  Vinaya  Vin 
1.235  ;  III. 3  (cp.  Vin  A  1.135) ;  M  T.140  ;  A  iv.175,  182  sq. ; 
V.190  ;  Miln  341. 

Veneyya  (adj.)  [  =  vineyya,  grd.  of  vineti ;  cp.  BSk.  vaineya 
Divy  36,  202  &  passim]  to  be  instructed,  accessible  to 


instruction,  tractable,  ready  to  receive  the  teaching  (of 
the  Buddha).  The  term  is  late  (Jataka  style  &  Com.) 
J  1.182  (Buddha"),  504:  SnA  169,  510;  Dh.\  1.26; 
VbhA  79  ;  VvA  217;  ThA  69  (Ap.  v.  10).     Cp.  buddha". 

Veneyyatta  (nt.)  [fr.  veneyya]  tractableness  Nett  99. 

Vepakka  (nt.)  [fr.  vipakka]  ripening,  ripeness,  maturity.  — 
(adj  )  vielding  fruit,  resulting  in  (-")  A  1.223  (kama- 
dhatu°  kamma):  111.416  (sammoha°  dukkha) ;  Sn  537 
(dukkha°  kamma). 

Vepniisika  (f.)  [vi+purisa-i- aka]  a  woman  resembling  a 
man  (sexually),  a  man-like  woman,  androgN-n  Vin 
11.271  ;  III. 129. 

Vepulla  (nt.)  [fr.  vipulal  full  development,  abundance, 
plenty,  fullness  D  iii.Vo,  221,  285;  S  in.53  :  A  '94 
(amisa",  dhamma");  111.8,  404;  v.15^  sq.,  350  sq. ;  Miln 
33,  251  ;  Vism  2  12  (saddha°,  sati°,  paniia",  puiiiia'),  619  ; 
DhA  1.262  (sati'^);  VbhA  290.  —  Often  in  phrase 
vuddhi  virulhi  vepulla  (see  vuddhi),  e.  g.  Vin  1.60; 
It  113.     Cp.  vetuUa. 

Vepollata  (f.)  [abstr.  formation  fr.  vepulla]  =  vepulla ; 
A  11.144  (raga°,  dosa",  moha°) ;  Ap  26,  39;  Miln  252. 
As  vepullatag  (nt.)  at  A  111.432. 

Vebhanga  [fr.  vibhanga]  futility,  failure  J  iv.451  (opp. 
sampatti ;  cxpH  as  vipatti  C). 

Vebhangika  {H  °iya)  (adj.)  see  a°. 

Vebhavya  {&  °a)  (nt.  &  f.)  [fr.  vibhavin]  thinking  over, 
criticisrri  Dhs  16;  Ps  1.1 19;  Pug  25;  Nett  76. 

Vebhassi  (f.)     vibhassikata,  i.  e.  gossiping  Vin  iv.241. 

Vebhutika  (&.°ya)  (adj.-nt.)  [fr.  vibhuti  i]  causing  disaster 
or  ruin  ;  nt.  calumnious  speech,  bad  language  D  111.106 
(°ya) ;  Sn  158  (°ya) ;  Vv  84*"  (°ka  ;  expli"  as  "  sahitanar) 
vinabhava-karanato  vebhutikar),"  i.  e.  pisunag  VvA 
347)- 

Vema  (nt.)  [fr.  vayati^,  cp.  Sk.  veman  (nt.);  Lat.  vimen] 
loom  or  shuttle  DhA  111.175  ;  SnA  268. 

Vemaka  (nt.)=vema  Vin  11. 135. 

Vemajiha  (nt.)  [fr.  vi-t-majjha]  middle,  centre  J  iv.250  ; 
VI. 485  ;  Pug  16,  17;  Vism  182  ("bhaga  central  part); 
VvA  241,  277.  —  loc.  vemajjhe  :  (a)  in  the  present,  or 
central  interval  of  sagsara  Sn  849  (cp.  Nd'  213  and 
majjha  3  b) ;  (b)  in  two,  asunder  Vism  178. 

Vematika  (adj.)  [fr.  vimati]  in  doubt,  uncertain,  doubtful 
\jn  1. 126;  11.65;  1V.220,  259;  Vism  14  (°sila).  Opp. 
nibbematika.   * 

Vematta  (nt.)  [fr.  vi-i-matta']  difference,  distinction  Miln 
410  ;  \'ism  195. 

Vemattata  (f)  [abstr.  formation  fr.  vematta]  difference, 
distinction,  discrepancy,  disproportion(ateness)  M  1.453, 
494;  S  11.21;  III. 101  ;  V.200  ;  A  III. 410  sq. ;  Sn  p. 102 
(puggala");  Nett  4,  72  sq.,  107  sq. ;  Miln  284,  285. — 
The  8  differences  of  the  var.  Buddhas  are  given  at  SnA 
407  sq.  asaddhana",  ayu°,  kula°,  pamana",  nckkhamma", 
padharia",  bodhi°.  ragsi". 

Vematika  (adj.)  [vi-|-°matika]  having  a  different  mother 
J  IV  105  (°bhagini) ;  vi.134  ("bhataro) ;  PvA  19. 

Vemanika  (adj.)  [fr.  vimana']  having  a  fairy  palace  (see 
vimana  3)  ]  v. 2  ;  DhA  111.192. 

Veyy"  is  a  (purely  phonetic)  diaeretic  form  of  vy°,  for 
which  viy°  &  veyy°  are  used  indiscriminately.  There 
is  as  little  difference  bewteen  viy°  &  veyy°  as  between 
vj°  &   ve°  in  those  cases  where    (double,   as  it  were) 


Veyyaggha 


io8 


Vellita 


abstract  nouns  are  formed  from  words  with  ve"  (vepul- 
lata,  vemattata,  etc.),  which  shows  that  ve°  was  simply 
felt  as  vi°.  Cp.  the  use  of  e  for  i  (esp.  before  y)  in  cases 
like  alabbhaneyya>°iya ;  addhaneyya >  °iya ;  pesu- 
ijeyya>°iya,  without  any  difference  in  meaning. 

Veyyaggha  (adj.)  [fr.  vyaggha]  belonging  to  a  tiger  Dh  295 
(here  simply  =  vyaggha,  i.  e.  with  a  tiger  as  fifth; 
veyya°=vya°  metri  causS ;  Bdhgh's  expl°  at  DhA 
III. 455  is  forced).  —  (m).  a  car  covered  with  a  tiger's 
skin  J  V.259.  cp.  377. 

Veyyagghin  =  veyyaggha  (adj.)  J  iv.347. 

Veyyanjanika  [  =  vyanjanika]  one  who  knows  the  signs,  a 
fortune-teller,  soothsayer  J  v. 233,  235.  —  The  BSk. 
equivalent  is  vaipaficanika  (MVastu  1.207)  etc. ;  see 
under  vipaficita,  which  may  have  to  be  derived  (as 
viyaiicita=viyanjita)  from  vi-|- anj  =  vyanjana.  See 
also  Kern,  Toev.  p.  19. 

Veyyatta=viyatta,  i.  e.  accomplished,  clever  J  v.258. 

Veyyatti  (f.)  [=viyatti]  distinction,  cleverness,  accom- 
plishment J  v.258  ;  VI. 305. 

Veyyattiya  (nt.)  [abstr.  form  (°ya  =  °ka)  fr.  veyyatti  = 
viyatti]  distinction,  lucidity;  accomplishment  D  111.38 
(pafina°  in  wisdom) ;  M  1.82,  1 75  ;  11.209. 

Veyyakarapa  (m.  nt.)  [  =  vyakarana]  i,  (nt.)  answer,  ex- 
planation, exposition  D  1.46,  51,  105,  223;  11.202; 
A  III. 125;  V.50  sq. ;  Sn  352,  510,  1127;  Pug  43,  50; 
Miln  347;  DA  1.247.  —  2.  (m.)  one  who  is  expert  in 
explanation  or  answer,  a  grammarian  D  1.88  ;  A  111.125  ; 
Sn  595  ;  Miln  236  ;  SnA  447. 

Veyyabadhika  (adj.)  [  =  vyabadhika]  causing  injury  or 
oppression,  oppressive,  annoying  (of  pains)  M  i.io; 
A  III. 388;  Vism  35  (expl'i  diff.  by  Bdhgh  as  "  vyaba- 
dhato  uppannatta  veyyabadhika  "). 

Veyyayika  (nt.)  [fr.  vyaya]  money  to  defray  expenses, 
means  Vin  11. 157. 

Veyyavacca  (nt.)  [corresponds  to  (although  doubtful  in 
what  relation)  Sk.  'vaiya-prtya,  abstr.  fr.  vyaprta 
active,  busy  (to  pr,  prnoti)=  P.  vj'avafa ;  it  was  later 
retranslated  into  BSk.  as  vaiyavrtya  (as  if  vi+  a-H  v?t) ; 
e.  g.  Divy  54,  347  ;  MVastu  1.298]  service,  attention, 
retidering  a  service ;  work,  labour,  commission,  duty 
Vin  1.23;  A  111.41  ;  J  1.12  (kaya°) ;  VI. 154;  SnA  466; 
VvA  94;  ThA  253.  -°kamma  doing  service,  work 
J  iii..|22  ;  -°kara  servant,  agent,  (f.)  housekeeper 
J  111.327;  VvA  349;  "-karika  (f.)  id.  PvA  65. —Cp. 
vyappatha. 

Veyyavatika  (nt.)  [doublet  of  ve>'yavacca ;  °ka  =  '=ya] 
service,  waiting  on,  attention  Sn  p.  104  (kaya°) ;  J 
IV.463;  VI. 154.  418,  503  (dana°);  DhA  1.27  (kaya°) ; 
III. 19  (dana°);  Dpvs  vi.6i. 

Vera  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  vaira,  der.  fr.  vira]  hatred,  revenge, 
hostile  action,  sin  A  iv.247;  Dh  5  ;  J  iv.71  ;  DhA  1.50  ; 
PyA  13.  — avera  absence  of  enmity,  friendliness  ;  (adj.) 
friendly,  peaceable,  kind  D  1.167,  247  (sa°  &  a°),  251  ; 
S  IV.296;  A  IV. 246;  Sn  150  The  paiica  bhayani 
verani  (or  vera-bhaya)  or  paiica  vera  (Vbh  378)  "  the 
fivefold  guilty  dread  "  are  the  fears  connected  with 
sins  against  the  5  first  commandments  (silani);  see 
S  n.68;  A  111.204  sq.  ;  lv.405  sq. ;  v.182  ;  It  57  =  Sn  167 
(vera-bhay'atita). 

Veraka=vera;  a°  Pv  iv.v».     See  also  verika. 

Verajja  (nt.)  [fr.  vi-i-rajja]  a  variety  of  kingdoms  or 
provinces  S  111.6  (nana°-gata  bhikkhu  a  bh.  who  has 
travelled  much). 


Verajjaka  (adj.)  [fr.  verajja]  belonging  to  var.  kingdoms 
or  provinces,  coming  from  various  countries  (nana°) 
living  in  a  different  country,   foreign,   alien  D   1.113 
M  II. 165  (brahmana) ;  A  in. 263  (bhikkhu);  Th  i,  1037 
Vv  84'^  (  =videsa-vasika  VvA  338) ;  Miln  359. 

VeramaQi  (f .)  [fr.  viramaija ;  cp.  the  odd  form  BSk. 
viramani,  e.  g.  Jtm.  213]  abstaining  from  (-°),  absti 
nence  A  11.2 1 7,  253  ;  v. 252  sq.,  304  sq.  ;  Sn  291  ;  Pug  39, 
43;  Vism  II  ;  KhA  24;  DhA  1.235,  305. 

Veramba  (&  °bha)  (adj.)  [etym.  ?  Probably  dialectical, 
i.  e.  regional]  attribute  of  the  wind  (vata  or  pi.  vata), 
a  wind  blowing  in  high  altitudes  [cp.  BSk.  vairambhaka 
Divy  90]  S  11.231  ;  A  1.137;  Th  1.597;  J  "1-255,  484; 
VI. 326  ;  Nd"  562  ;  VbhA  71. 

Verika=vera  i.  e,  inimical;  enemy  (cp.  veraka)  J  v.229. 
505  ;  Vism  48. 

Verin  (adj.)  [fr.  vera]  bearing  hostility,  inimical,  revenge- 
ful J  III. 1  77  ;  Pv  IV. 3*^  (=veravanto  PvA  252) ;  Miln  196  ; 
Vism  296  Cpuggala),  326  ("purisa,  in  simile),  512  (in 
sim.);  VbhA  89. — Neg.  averin  Dh  197,  258, 

Verocana  [  =  virocana,  fr  virocati]  the  sun  (lit.  "shining 
forth  ")  S  1. 51  ;  A  11.50. 

Vela  (f.)  [Vedic  vela  in  meaning  i  ;  Ep.  Sk.  in  meanings 
2  &  3]  ^  I .  time,  point  of  time  (often  equal  to  kala) 
Pug  13  (uddahana") ;  J  lv.2g4 ;  Miln  87;  KhA  181; 
PugA  187;  SnA  III  (bhatta°  meal-time);  DhsA  219; 
PvA  61,  104,  109  (arun'  uggamana"),  129,  155  ;  VvA  165 
(paccusa"  in  the  early  morning).  —  2.  shore,  sea-shore 
Vin  11.237=  A  IV.198  ;  J  1.2 12  ;  Mhvs  19,  30.  —  3.  limit, 
boundary  A  v. 2  50  (between  v.  &  agyagara) ;  Th  i,  762  ; 
Miln  358;  DhsA  219;  in  spec,  sense  as  "measure," 
restriction,  control  (of  character,  slla-vela)  at  Dhs  299 
("  not  to  trespass  "  trsl"),  and  in  dogmatic  exegesis  of 
ativelat)  at  Nd^  504;  cp.  Nd^  462  &  DhsA  219.- — 4. 
heap,  multitude  (?)  DhsA  219  (in  Npl.  Uruvela  which  is 
however  *Uruvilva). 

Velamika  (adj.)  [velama-fika,  the  word  velama  probably 
a  district  word]  "  belonging  to  Velama,"  at  D  11.198 
used  as  a  clan-name  (f.  Velamikani),  with  vv.  11.  Vessini 
&  Vessayini  (cp.  Velama  Np.  comb""  with  Vessantara 
at  VbhA  414),  and  at  D  11.333  classed  with  khujja, 
vamanika  &  komarika  (trsl"  "  maidens "  ;  Bdhgh : 
"  very  young  &  childish  "  :  see  Dial.  11.359) ;  v.  1.  cela- 
vika.  They  are  some  sort  of  servants,  esp.  in  demand 
for  a  noble's  retinue.  See  also  Np.  Velama  (the  V.- 
sutta  at  J  1.228  sq.), 

Velayati  [Denom.  fr.  vela]  to  destroy  (?)  DhsA  219  (cp. 
Expos.  11.297) ;  expl''  by  viddhagseti.  More  appro- 
priate would  be  a  meaning  like  "  control,"  bound, 
restrict . 

Vellalin  (adj.)  [Is  it  a  corruption  fr.*veyyayin  =  *vyayin  ?] 
flashing  (of  swords)  J  vi.449. 

Velli  [dial.  ?]  is  a  word  peculiar  to  the  Jataka.  At  one 
passage  it  is  expl''  by  the  Commentary  as  "  vedi  "  (i.  e. 
rail,  cornice),  where  it  is  applied  to  the  slender  waist  of 
a  woman  (cp.  vilaka  &  vilaggita) :  J  vi.456.  At  most 
of  the  other  passages  it  is  expH  as  "  a  heap  of  gold  "  : 
thus  at  J  v. 506  (verse :  velli-vilaka-majjha ;  C  :  "  ettha 
veil!  ti  rasi  vilakamajjha  ti  vilagga-majjha  uttatta- 
ghana-suvanna-rasi-ppabha  c'  eva  tanu-digha-majjha 
ca  ").  and  vi.269  (verse:  kaficana-velli-viggaha ;  C. : 
"  suvanna-rasi-sassirika-sarira  ").  At  V.39S  in  the  same 
passage  as  vi.269  expl*  in  C.  as  "  kancana-rupaka- 
sadisa-sarira  ").  The  idea  of  "golden"  is  connected 
with  it  throughout. 

Vellita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  vellati,  veil  to  stagger,  cp.  pativellati] 
crooked,  bent;  (of  hair:)  curly  PvA  189.  It  is  only 
used  with  ref.  to  nair. 


Velu 


109 


Vokinna 


-agga  with  bending  (or  crooked)  tip  (of  hair),  i.  e. 
curled  Th  2,  252  (cp.  ThA  209) ;  J  v. 203  (=kuflcit'  agga 
C);  VI. 86  (sun-agga-vellita) ;  PvA  46,  142.  —  Cp. 
kuficita-kesa  J  1.89. 

Veju  [=venu,  cp.  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  43'  &  Prk.  velu  :  Pischel, 
Prk.  Gr.  §  243]  a  bamboo  A  11.73;  Vin  iv.35  ;  J  iv.382 
(daijda") ;  v. 71  ;  Vism  i.   17;  SnA  76  (=var)sa);  VbhA 

334- 

-agga  (vejagga)  the  top  of  a  bamboo  Vin  11. 110. 
-gumba  a  bamboo  thicket  SnA  49,  75.  -danda  a  bamboo 
stick  SnA  330.  -dana  a  gift  of  bamboo  Vbh  246 ;  Miln 
369;  SnA  311  ;  KhA  236;  VbhA  333.  -nali  (°nalaka, 
"najika)  a  stalk  or  shaft  of  bamboo  Vism  260  ;  KhA  52  ; 
ThA  212.  -pabba  a  stalk  or  section  of  the  b.  J  1.245  ; 
Vism  358=VbhA  63. 

Vejoka  [fr.  velu]  a  kind  of  tree  J  v.405  (=vai)sa-coraka). 

Ve)ariya  (nt.)  [cp.  dial.  Sk.  vaidurya]  a  precious  stone, 
lapis  lazuli ;  cp.  the  same  word  "  beryl  "  (with  meta- 
thesis r>l ;  not  fr.  the  Sk.  form),  which  the  Greeks 
brought  to  Europe  from  India.  —  D  1.76;  Vin  11. 112; 
S  1.64;  A  1. 215;  IV. 199.  203  sq.  ;  J  in. 437  ;  Pv  11. 7*; 
Mhvs  11,  16;  DhA  11.220.  Often  in  descriptions  of 
Vimanas,  e.  g.  Vv  2^  ;  12^;  17^  ;  cp.  VvA  27,  60.  —  Pro- 
bably through  a  word-play  with  velu  (bamboo  ;  popular 
etymology)  it  is  said  to  have  the  colour  of  bamboo  :  see 
vat)sa-raga  &  vagsa-vanna.  At  J  1.207  a  peacock's 
neck  is  described  as  having  the  colour  of  the  veluriya. 
At  Miln  267  (in  inventory  of  "  loka  ")  we  have  the  foil, 
enumeration  of  precious  stones  :  pavala  coral,  lohitanka 
ruby,  tnasaragalla  cat's  eye,  veluriya  lapis  lazuli,  vajira 
diamond.     See  also  under  ratana*. 

Vejuva  [cp.  Vedic  vainava  (made  of  cane)  ?]  probably  not 
to  veju,  but  another  spelling  for  beluva,  in  °latthika 
S  III. 91,  as  sometimes  v.  1.  veluva  for  beluva  (q.  v.). 

Vevacana  (nt.)  [fr.  vivacana}  attribute,  epithet ;  synonym 
Nett  I  sq.,  24,  53  sq.,  82,  106;  Vism  427;  SnA  24,  447. 
Cp.  adhivacana. 

VevaQ9a  (nt.)  [fr.  viva^na]  discolouring  ThA  85  (Ap.  v.  42). 

Vevawiya  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  vivanna]  i.  state  of  having  no 
caste,  life  of  an  outcast  A  v. 87  isa  200.  [Cp.  BSk.  vai- 
varnika  outcast  Divy  424].  —  2.  discolouring,  fading, 
waning  J  111.394. 

Vevahika  [fr.  vivaha]  wedding-guest  J  11.420. 

Veviccha  (nt.)  [abstr.  formation  fr.  viviccha]  "  multi- 
farious wants,"  greediness,  selfishness,  avarice  Sn  941 
(=paiica  macchariyani  Nd^  422,  as  at  Nd*  614),  1033 
(where  Nett  11  reads  viviccha);  Pug  19,  23  ;  Dhs  1059, 
1 122  ;  Nd'  s.  V.  taijha;  DhsA  366,  375. 

Vssa  [cp.  Sk.  ve^a,  fr.  vi?  to  be  active]  dress,  apparel  ;  (more 
frequently;)  disguise,  (assumed)  appearance  J  1.146 
(pakati"  usual  dress),  230  (ayuttaka") ;  in. 418  (andha°) ; 
Miln  12;  DhA  11. 4;  PvA  62,  93  (ummattaka"),  161 
(tunnavaya") ;  Sdhp  384  ;  purisa"  (of  women)  DA  1.147. 

Tesama  =  visama  VvA  10. 

Vesakba  [cp.  Vedic  vai^akha]  N.  of  a  month  (April-May) 
Mhvs  I,  73 ;  29,  I. 

VM&rajja  (nt.)  [abstr.  formation  fr.  visarada,  i.  e.  *vais5- 
radya]  (the  Buddha's  or  an  Arahant's)  perfect  self- 
confidence  (which  is  of  4  kinds),  self-satisfaction,  subject 
of  confidence.  The  four  are  given  in  full  at  M  1.71  sq., 
viz.  highest  knowledge,  khipasava  state,  recognition  of 
the  obstacles,  recognition  &  preaching  of  the  way  to 
salvation.  See  also  D  i.iio  ;  J  11.27  ;  A  11.13  ;  iil.297sq.  ; 
IV.83,  210,  213;  M  1.380;  Ps  11.194;  Nd'  466";  DhA 
186;  DA  1.278;  KhA  104;  VvA  213;  Sdhp  593. 


Vesiyana  [=vessa,  with  °na  as  in  gimhana,  vassana  etc.] 
a  Vai^ya  (Vessa)  J  vi.15,  21,  328,  490,  492.  As  vessa- 
yana  at  Sn  455  (where  vesiyana  is  required). 

Vesi  &  Vesiya  (f .)  [the  f .  of  vessa]  a  woman  of  low  caste,  a 
harlot,  prostitute.  —  (a)  vesi:  Vin  in. 138;  J  v.425  ;  in 
cpd.  vesi-dvara  a  pleasure  house  Th  2,  73.  —  (b)  vesiya  : 
Vin  IV. 278;  Sn  108;  Vbh  247;  in  cpd.  vesiya-gocara 
asking  alms  from  a  prostitute's  house  DhA  in. 2 75; 
DhsA  151  ;  VbhA  339. 

Vesma  (nt.)  [Vedic  veSman,  fr.  vis  to  enter :  see  visati]  a 
house  J  V.84.  A  trace  of  the  n-stem  in  loc.  vesmani 
J  V.60. 

Vessa  [cp.  Vedic  vaiSya,  a  dial,  (local)  word]  a  Vai^ya, 
i.  e.  a  member  of  the  third  social  (i.  e.  lower)  grade  (see 
vanna  6).  a  man  of  the  people  D  111.81,  95  (origin); 

5  1. 102,  166  ;  IV. 219  ;  V.51  ;  A  1. 162  ;  II. 194  ;  in. 214,  242  ; 
Vbh  394;  DA  1.254  (origin).  —  f.  vesi  (q.  v.);  vessi  (as 
a  member  of  that  caste)  D  1.193  ;  A  in. 226,  229. 

Vessika  (f.)  [fr.  vessa]  a  Vai^ya  woman  Sn  314. 

Vehayasa -vihayasa,  i.  e.  air,  sky;  only  used  in  ace. 
vehayasar)  in  function  of  a  loc.  (cp.  VvA  182  :  veha- 
yasar)  =vehayasa-bhute  hatthi-pitthe),  comb''  with 
thita  (standing  in  the  air)  Vv  41  ;  Mhvs  i,  24;  PvA  14. 

Vehasa  [contraction  of  vehayasa]  the  air,  sky,  heaven  ; 
only  in  the  two  cases  (both  used  as  loc.  "  in  the  air  ") : 
ace.  vehasai)  D  in. 27;  S  v.283  ;  Vin  in. 105;  VvA  78; 

6  loc.  vehase  Vin  1.320. 

-kuti  "  air  hut  "  i.  e.  airy  room,  "  a  hut  in  which  a 
middle-sized  man  can  stand  without  knocking  his  head 
against  the  ceiling  "  (expl")  Vin  iv.46.  -gamana 
going  through  the  air  Vism  382  ;  Dhtm  586.  -ttha 
standing  in  the  air  D  1.115;  DA  1.284.  -tt^ita  id.  D 
195- 

VehSsaya  [=  vehayasa  with  metathesis  y>s]  occurs  only 
in  ace.  (  =loc.)  vebasayag,  equal  to  vihayasar)  at  J  iv.471 . 

Vo'  (indecl.)  a  particle  of  emphasis,  perhaps  =eva,  or 
=  vo'^  (as  dative  of  interest).  The  Commentaries 
explain  it  as  "  nipata,"  i.  e.  particle.  Thus  at  Sn  560, 
760. 

Vo^  [cp.  Vedic  vah,  Av.  v6,  Lat.  vos,  Gr.  vfifit]  is  enclitic 
form  of  tumhe  (see  under  tuvai)),  i.  e.  to  you,  of  you  ; 
but  it  is  generally  interpreted  by  the  C.  as  "  nipata," 
i.  e.  particle  (of  emphasis  or  exclamation;  i.  e.  vo'). 
Thus  e.  g.  at  Pv  1.5'  (cp.  PvA  26). 

Vo°  is  commonly  regarded  as  the  prefix  comb"  vi-t-  ava° 
(i.  e.  vi-i-  0°),  but  in  many  cases  it  simply  represents 
ava°  (=0°)  with  v  as  euphonic  ("  vorschlag  "),  as  in 
vonata  (=onata),  voloketi,  vokkanti,  vokinpa,  voro- 
peti,  vosapeti,  vosana,  vossagga.  In  a  few  cases  it 
corresponds  to  vi-(- ud°,  as  in  vokkamati,  vocchijjati, 
voyoga. 

Vokara  [v(i)-(-okara;  cp.  vikara]   i.  difference  Sn6ii. — 

2.  constituent  of  being  (i.  e.  the  khandhas),  usually  as 
eka°,  catu°  &  paflca°-bhava,  e.  g.  Kvu  261  ;  Vbh  137; 
Tikp  32,  36  sq  ;  Vism  572;  KhA  245;  SnA  19,  158. 
In  this  meaning  vokara  is  peculiar  to  the  Abhidhamma 
and  is  almost  synonymous  with  vikara  4,  and  in  the 
Yamaka  with  khandha,  e.  g.  paiica  v.,  catu  v.  etc.  — 

3.  worthless  thing,  trifle  S  11.29.  —  4.  inconvenience, 
disadvantage  (cp.  vikara  3)  PvA  12  (line  i  read:  anek' 
akara-vokarag). 

VokiQQa  (adj.)  [v(i)-)- okiijija]  covered  with,  drenched 
(with) ;  mixed  up,  full  of  (instr.)  M  1.390 :  S  11.29 : 
A  1. 123,  148;  11.232;  J  i.iio;  DhsA  69. — Cp.  abbo- 
kinna. 


Vokinnaka 


no 


Vossagga 


Vokinnaka  (adj.)  [vokinna+ka]  mixed  up  Miln  300  (kapi- 
nidda-pareto  vokinnakaij  jaggati  a  person  with  light 
sleep,  so-called  "  monkey-doze,"  lies  confusedly  awake, 
i.  e.  is  half  asleep,  half  awake).  Rh.  D.  not  quite 
to  the  point :  "  a  man  still  guards  his  scattered 
thoughts." 

Vokkanta  [pp.  of  vokkamati]  deviated  from  (abl.)  It  36. 

Vokkanti  (f.)  [v(i)-i-akkanti]  descent  (into  the  womb), 
conception  Th  i,  ygo. 

Vokkamati  [vi-i-  ukkamati]  to  turn  aside,  deviate  from 
(abl.);  mostly  in  ger,  vokkamma  Vin  11.213;  D  1.230; 
M  III. 117;  S  IV.117;  Sn  04''> :  J  :.?3  :  Vism  18.  —  pp. 
vokkanta. 

Vokkamana  (nt.)  [fr.  vokkamati]  turning  aside,  deviation 
fr.  (abl.)  M  1.14  ;  A  1.243. 

Vokkha  (adj.)  [?  doubtful  reading]  is  at  J  111.2  i  given  as 
syn.  of  vaggu  (q.  v.). 

Vocarita  [pp.  of  vi-i-  ocarati]  penetrated  (into  conscious- 
ness), investigated,  apperceived  M  1.478 ;  A  iv.363 
(=manodvare  samudacara-ppatta). 

Vocchadana  (f)  [fr.  vi+ ava-f- chad]  covering  up  (entirely) 
VbhA  493. 

Vocchijjati  [vi-f  ud+chijjati.  Pass,  of  chid]  to  be  cut  off 
S  111.53  (so  read). — pp.  neg.  abbocchinna  :  see  abbhoc- 
chinna  (  =  *avyucch°). 

Votthapana  {&  'tthapana)  (nt.)  [  -vavatth"]  establishing, 
svnthesis,  determination,  a  momentary  stage  in  the  unit 
called  percept  jcp.  Cpd.  29),  always  with  °kicca'  (or 
"kiriya)  "  accomplishing  the  function  of  determination  " 
Vism  21  ;  DhsA  401  ;  DA  1. 194  (v.  1.  votthabb") ;  Tikp 
276  (°kiriya). 

Votthapeti  [=vavatthapeti]  to  establish,  put  up,  arrarge 
J  VI.583. 

Vodaka  (adj.)  [vi+odaka  =  udaka]  free  from  water  Vin 
II.  1 13. 

Vodapeti  (or  °dapeti)  [Caus.  of  vodavati]  to  cleanse,  purify 
DhA  II. 162. 

Vodata  (adj.)  [vi-i-  odata,  cp.  vivadata]  clean,  pure  M  1.319. 

Vodana  (nt.)  [fr.  vi-i-ava+da*  to  clean,  cp.  BSk.  vj'ava- 
dana  Divy  616;  AvS  11.188]  i.  cleansing,  getting 
bright  (of  sun  &  moon)  D  i.io  (— visuddhata  DA  1.9.5). 
—  2.  purity  (from  the  kilesas,  or  stains  of  sin),  purifica- 
tion, sanctification  M  1.115  (opp.  sankilesa) ;  S  ni.151 
{citta°,  adj.;  opp.  citta-sankilesa) ;  A  111.41S  sq. ;  v.34  ; 
I's  1. 166  ;  Vbh  343  ;  Mett  96,  700,  125  sq.  ;  Vism  51  sq., 
89  ;  VbhA  401  ;  Dh.-\  111.405. 

Vodaniya  (adj.)  [grd.  form"  from  vodana]  apt  to  purify, 
purifying  D  1.195;  in.57.     Opp.  sankilesika. 

Vodapana  (nt.)  [fr.  vodapeti]  cleansing,  purification  DhA 
111.237  ( =pariyodapana). 

Vodaya  at  J  iv.184  appears  to  be  a  misreading  for  codaya 
(ger.  from  codeti)  in  meaning  inag  codeti  to  undertake 
a  loan,  to  lend  money  at  interest  (  =  vaddhi3'a  inar) 
payojetva  C),  to  demand  payment  for  a  loan.  The 
V.  1.  at  all  places  is  codaya  (=codetva).     See  codeti. 

Vodayati  C''i+  ava-f  da*  to  clean]  to  become  clean  or  clear, 
to  be  purified  or  cleansed  A  v. 169  (fig.  saddhammassa), 
31  7  (id. ;  expl""  by  C.  as  "  vodanarj  gacchati  ") ;  J  11.418 
(of  a  precious  stone). 

Vodasa  [?]  only  at  D  in. 43  in  phrase  °g  apajjatiin  meaning 
of  "  making  a  distinction,"  being  particular  (about 
food ;  bhojanesu),  having  a  dainty  appetite ;  expl""  by 


"  dve  bhage  karoti  "  Bdhgh.  It  seems  to  stand  for 
vokara,  unless  we  take  it  to  be  a  misspelling  for  vodaya 
"cutting  off,"  fr.  vi+ava-fda,  thus  "separating  the 
food  "  (?).  Suggestive  also  is  the  likeness  with  vosanai) 
apajjati. 

Vodittha  [pp.  of  vi4-  ava+  di§,  cp.  odissa  &  the  BSk. 
vyapadesa  pretext  Divy  435]  defined,  fully  understood, 
recognized  M  1.478;  A  iv.363  (=sutthu  dittha  C). 

Vonata  (adj.)  [v(i)-|-  onata]  bent  down  Th  i,  662. 

Vopeti  at  DA  1.277  (avopetva)  is  to  be  read  with  v.  1.  as 
copeti,  i.  e.  shake,  move,  disturb,  violate  (a  rule). 

Vobhindati  [vi-(-ava-t-bhindati]  to  split;  ppr.  "ante  (fig.) 
hair-splitting  D  1.162;  M  1.176;  aor.  vobhindi  (lit.)  to 
break,  split  (one's  head,  sisar))  M  1.336. 

Vomadapeti  at  DA  1.300  is  to  be  read  as  vodapeti  (cleanse, 
purify);  v.  1.  BB  vodapeti;  SS  cama[da]peti,  i.  e.  to 
cause  to  be  rinsed,  cleanse. 

Vomissa(ka)  ladj.)  [v(i)+ omissa(ka)]  miscellaneous, 
various  Vism  87  (°kata),  88  (°ka),  104  (°carita). 

Voyoga  [vi-Huyyoga  in  sense  of  uyyutta  ?]  effort  (?), 
application  KhA  243.     Reading  doubtful. 

Voropana  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  voropeti]  depriving  (jivita°  of 
life)  J  1.99. 

Voropeti  [  =  oropeti]  to  deprive  of  (abl.),  to  take  away; 
only  in  phrase  jivita  voropeti  [which  shows  that  -v-  is 
purely  euphonic]  to  deprive  of  life,  to  kill  D  1.85  ;  J 
IV. 454  ;  DA  1.236;  DhA  iv.68  ;  PvA  67,  105,  274. 

Volokana  (nt.)  [v(i)+  olokana,  but  cp.  BSk.  vyavalokana 
"  inspection "  Divy  435]  looking  at,  examination 
J  IV.237  (v.  1.  vi°). 

Voloketi  [v(i)+ oloketi ;  in  meaning  equal  to  viloketi  & 
oloketi]  to  examine,  study,  scrutinize  M  1. 213  (with 
gen.);  Vin  1.6  (lokag) ;  Kvu  591  ;  DhA  1. 319  (lokar)) ; 
11.96  (v.  1.  oloketi). 

Vosatitaka  (nt.)  [wrong  spelling  for  *vossatthika  — v(i)+ 
ossattha-i-ika]  (food)  put  down  (on  cemeteries  etc.)  for 
(the  spirits  of)  the  departed  Vin  iv.89. 

Vosana  (nt.)  [v(i)+osana]  i.  (relative)  achievement,  per- 
fection (in  this  world),  accomplishment  M  11.2  1 1  (dittha- 
dhamm'  abhiniiavosana-parami-ppatta) ;  Dh  423  (cp. 
DhA  IV. 233);  Th  I,  784  (°r)  adhigacchati  to  reach  per- 
fection).—  2.  stopping,  ceasing;  in  phrase  "g  apajjati 
(almost  equal  to  pamada)  to  come  to  an  end  (with),  to 
stop,  to  become  careless,  to  flag  M  1.193;  J  111.5  ;  PvA 
29  ;  antara  °r)  apajjati  to  produce  half-way  achievement, 
to  stop  half-way  A  v.157,  164  ;  It  85.  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v. 
quite  wrong  "  to  arrive  at  a  conclusion,  to  be  convinced." 

Vosapeti  [v(i)-|- osapeti]  to  make  end,  to  bring  to  an  end 
or  a  finish  SnA  46  (desanar)). 

Vosaraniya  (adj.  nt.)  [fr.  v(i)H- osarana]  belonging  to 
reinstatement  A  1.99. 

Vosita  [vi-t  osita,  pp.  of  ava-l-sa.  See  also  vusita  & 
vyosita]  one  who  has  attained  (relative)  achievement, 
perfected,  accomplished,  mastering,  in  phrase  abhiiiiia" 
one  who  masters  special  knowledge  S  1.167;  Dh  423; 
It  47  =  61  =81  ;  A  1. 165  ;  cp.  DhA-  iv.233  ;  "  nitthanar) 
patto  vusita-vosanar)  va  patto  etc." 

Vossa  (-kamma)  (nt.)  making  impotent  (see  under  vassa- 
kamma)  D  1.12  ;  DA  1.97. 

Vossagga  [  =  ossagga;  ava-t-STJ]  relinquishing,  relaxation; 
handmg  over,  donation,  gift  (see  on  term  as  ethical 
Bdhgh  at  K.S.  1321)  D  in. 190  (issariya°  handing  over 


Vossajjati 


III 


Vyappatha 


Vbh  229, 
relaxation 


of  authority),  226;  S  iv.365  sq. ;  v.63  sq.,  351  ("rata 
fond  of  giving);  A  11.66  (id.);  111.53  (id);  Ps  1. 109 
11.24,  I'?;  J  VI. 213  (kamma°);  Nett  16  "" 
350;  Vism  224;  VbhA  317.  -sati-vossagg. 
of  attention,  inattention,  indifference  L,i.n  ^.^^y, , 
III. 163,  482  ;  IV.43.  -parinami,  maturity  of  surrender 
S  1.88. 

Vossajjati  [  =  ossaj(j)ati]  to  give  up,  relinquish;  to  hand 
over,  resign  Sn  751  (ger.  vossajja;  SnA  508  reads  oss°) ; 
J  V.124  (issariyari  vossajjanto ;  cp.  D  111.190). 

Voharati  [vi+oharati]  1.  to  express,  define,  decide 
M  1.499  ;  D  1.202  ;  Miln  218.  —  2.  to  decide,  govern  over 
(a  kingdom),  give  justice,  administrate  J  iv.134  (Bara- 
nasii)  mar)sa-sur-odakar),  i.  c.  provide  with ;  double 
ace),  192  (inf.  vohatug  =voharitur)  C.).  —  Pass,  voha- 
riyati  to  be  called  SnA  26  ;  PvA  94  ;  ThA  24. 

Vohara  [vi+avahara]  i,  trade,  business  M  11.360  ;  Sn  614 
(°r|  upajivati) ;  J  1.495;  11. 133,  202;  v.471  ;  PvA  m, 
278.  —  2.  current  appellation,  common  use  (of  lan- 
guage), populai  logic,  common  way  of  defining,  usage, 
designation,  term,  cognomen;  (adj.)  (-°)  so  called  SnA 
383,  466,  483  (laddha°  so-called) ;  DA  1.70  ;  PvA  56,  231 
(laddha°  padesa,  with  the  name)  VvA  8.  72  (pano  ti 
voharato  satto),  108  (loka  nirulhaya  samaiinaya  v.). 
— ariya-Tohara  proper  (i.  e.  Buddhist)  mode  of  speech 
(opp.  anariya"  unbuddhist  or  vulgar,  common  speech) 
D  III. 232  ;  A  11.246;  IV. 307;  V'in  iv.2  ;  Vbh  376,  387. 
lokiya-vohara  common  definition,  general  way  of  speech 
Sn.\  382.  On  term  see  also  Dhs.  trsl"  §  1306.  —  3.  law- 
suit, law.  lawful  obligation ;  juridical  practice,  juris- 
prudence (cp.  voharika)  Sn  246  (°kuta  fraudulent 
lawyer) ;  J  11.423  (°r)  sadheti  to  claim  a  debt  by  way  of 
law,  or  a  lawiul  debt);  vi.229  ;  DhA  in. 12  ("iipajivin 
a  lawyer) ;  SnA  289.  —  4.  name  of  a  sea-monster,  which 
gets  hold  of  ships  J  v.259. 

Voharika  [fr.  vohara]  "  decider,"  one  connected  with  a 
law-suit  or  with  the  law,  magistrate,  a  higher  official 
(mahamatta)  in  the  law-courts,  a  judge  or  justice.  At 
Vin  1.74  two  classes  of  mahamatta  (ministers)  are  given  : 
senanayaka  those  of  defence,  and  voharika  of  justice ; 
cp.  Vin  II. 158;  III. 45  (purana-vohariko  mahamatto) ; 
IV. 223. 

Vy°  is  the  semi-vowel  (i.  e.  half-consonantic)  form  of  vi° 
before  following  a  &  a  (vya°,  vya).  very  rarely  u  &  o. 
The  prefix  vi°  is  very  unstable,  and  a  variety  of  forms 
are  also  attached  to  vy",  which,  after  the  manner  of  all 
consonant-comb"'  in  Pali,  may  apart  from  its  regular 
form  vy°  appear  either  as  contracted  to  vv°  (written  v°), 
like  vagga  (for  vyagga),  vaya  (for  vyaya),  vosita  (  =  vyo- 
sita),  *vvuha  (  =  vyuha,  appearing  as  "bbiiha),  or 
diaeretic  as  viy"  (in  poetry)  or  veyy°  (popular),  e.  g. 
viyafijana.  viyarambha,  viyaj-ata ;  or  veyyanjanika, 
veyyakaraija,  veyyayika.  It  further  appears  as  by" 
(like  byaggha,  byaiijana,  byappatha,  byamha,  bya- 
panna,  byabadha  etc.).  In  a  few  cases  vya°  represents 
(a  diaeretic)  vi°,  as  in  vyamhita  &  vyasanna ;  and 
vya°=vi°  in  vyarosa. 

Vyakkhissao  at  Sn  600  is  fut.  of  vyacikkhati  (see  viya°). 

Vyagga  (adj.)  [vi-l-agga,  of  which  the  contracted  form  is 
vagga*]  distracted,  confused,  bewildered;  neg.  a°  S  1.96 
(°manasa) ;  v.66,  107. 

Vyaggha  [cp.  Vedic  vyaghra]  a  tiger  D  in. 25;  A  iii.ioi  ; 
Sn  416  (°usabha) ;  Ap  68  (°raja) ;  J  1.357;  111.192 
(Subahu);  v. 14  (giri-sanuja).  —  f.  viyagghini  (biy°) 
Miln  67.     See  also  byaggha. 

Vyagghlnasa  [■■']  a  hawk  S  1.148  (as  °nisa);  J  vi.538. 
Another  word  for  "  hawk  "  is  sakunagghi. 


Vyafijana  (nt.)  [fr.  vi-l-  afij,  cp.  afljati^  &  abbhanjati] 
I.  (accompanying)  attribute,  distinctive  mark,  sign, 
characteristic  (cp.  anu")  Sn  549,  loi  7  ;  Th  1,819  (metric  : 
viyafijana) ;  J  v. 86  (viyafijanena  under  the  pretext) ; 
Dhs  1306.  gihi°  characteristic  of  a  layman  Sn  44  (cp. 
SnA  91);  Miln  11  ;  purisa°  membrum  virile  Vin  11.269. 
—  2.  letter  (of  a  word)  as  opposed  to  attha  (meaning, 
sense,  spirit),  e,  g.  D  in. 127;  S  iv.281,  296;  v.430  ; 
A  n.139  (Cp.  savyanjana) ;  or  pada  (word),  e.  g.  M  1.399  ; 
A  1.59;  n.147,  168,  182;  III. 178  sq.  ;  Vin  11. 316;  Nett 
4  ;  SnA  1 77.  — vyaiijanato  according  to  the  letter  Miln 
18  (opp.  atthato).  —  3.  condiment,  curry  Vin  11.214; 
A  in. 49  (odano  anekasupo  aneka-vyaiijano) ;  Pv  n.i^* 
(bhatta°  rice  with  curry) ;  PvA  50.  —  Cp.  byaiijana. 


[fr.   vyafijana]   see  ubhato"  cS:  veyyari- 


Vyanjanaka  (adj. 
janika. 

Vyanjayati  [vi-i-  aiijati,  or  aiijeti]  to  characterise,  denote, 
express,  indicate  SnA  91  ;  Nett  209  (Cy.). 

Vyatiieka  [vi -j- atircka]  what  is  left  over,  addition,  surplus 
PvA  18  (of  "ca"),  228  (°to). 

Vyatta  (adj.)  [cp.  viyatta,  veyyatta  &  byatta]  i.  experi- 
enced, accomplished,  learned,  wise,  prudent,  clever 
S  IV.174  (pandita-t- ).  375;  A  in. 117,  258;  J  vi.368  ; 
VvA  131  (pandita-i- ) ;  PvA  39  (id.).  — a."  unskilled, 
foolish  (-i-bala)S  IV. 380  ;  A  ni.258  ;  J  1.98.  —  2.  evident, 
manifest  PvA  266  (°pakata-bhava). 

Vyattata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  vyatta]  experience,  learning, 
cleverness  Miln  349  (as  by") ;  DhA  n.38  (avyattata 
foolishness:  so  correct  under  avyattata  P.D.  1.86). 

Vyattaya  [vi-i-ati-i-aya]  opposition,  reversal;  in  purisa" 
change  of  person  (grain.)  SnA  545  ;  vacana°  reversal  of 
number  (i.  e.  sg.  &  pi.)  DA  1.141  ;  SnA  509. 


vyath]   shaking,   wavering   Dhtp  465 


Vyatbana  (nt.)  [fr. 
(as  def"  of  tud). 

Vyadhati  [in  poetry  for  the  usual  vedhati  of  vyath>  cp. 
Goth.  wi[)6n]  to  tremble,  shake,  waver  ;  to  be  frightened 
Vin  11.202  (so  for  vyadhati)  ;  J  in. 398  (vyadhase  ;  C. 
vyadhasi  =kampasi)  — Caus.  vyadheti  (&  vyadheti) 
to  frighten,  confuse  J  iv.166  (=vyadheti  badheti  C). 
—  Fut.  vyadhayissati  S  i.i20=Th  i,  46  (by°).  Under 
byadheti  we  had  given  a  different  derivation  (viz. 
Caus.  fr.  vyadhi). 

Vyanta  (adj.  nt.)  [vi-i-anta]  removed,  remote;  nt.  end, 
finish  ;  only  as  vyanti"  in  comb"  with  kr  and  bhu.  The 
spelling  is  often  byanti°.  —  (i)  vyantikaroti  to  abolish, 
remove,  get  rid  of,  destroy  M  i.i  15  (byanf  eva  ekasir)), 
453  (by°) ;  I^  1.71  (°kareyya) ;  S  iv.76,  190;  A  iv.195; 
DA  1. 125,  212.  —  Fut.  vyantikahiti  Miln  391  (by°) ; 
DhA  IV. 69.  —  pp.  vyantikata  Th  1,  526.  —  (2)  vyanti- 
bhavati  to  cease,  stop  ;  to  come  to  an  end,  to  be  destroyed 
Kvu  597  (by°) ;  or  °hoti  A  1.141  ;  in. 74  ;  Ps  i.i  71  (by") ; 
Miln  67  (by°),  vyantibhava  destruction,  annihilation 
M  1.93;  A  V.292.  297  sq.  ;  Pv  iv.i";  Kvu  544  (by°). 
vyantibhuta  come  to  an  end  J  v. 4. 

Vyapagacchati  [vi-i-apagacchati]  to  depart,  to  be  dispelled 
J  11.407  (ger.  "gamma).  — -pp.  °gata. 

Vyapagata  [pp.  of  vyapagacchati]  departed  J  1.17;  Miln 
13.5.  225. 

Vyapanadati  [vi-i-apanudati]  to  drive  away,  expel;  ger 
"nujja  Sn  66.     aor.  vyapanudi  Th  2,  318. 

Vyapaha&nati  [vi-l-apa-t-haiiiiati]  to  be  removed  or 
destroyed  J  vi.565. 

Vyappatha  (nt.)  [perhaps  a  distortion  of  'vyaprta,  for 
which  the  usual  P.  (der.)  veyyavacca  (q.  v.)  in  meaning 
"duty"]  I.  duty,  occupation,  activity  Sn  158  (khiija" 


Vyappathi 


112 


Vyapanna 


of  the  Arahant :  having  no  more  duties,  cp.  vyappathi). 
—  2.  way  of  speaking,  speech,  utterance  Sn  163,  164 
(contrasted  to  citta  &  kamma ;  cp.  kaya,  vaca,  mano 
in  same  use),  expl''  at  SnA  206  by  vacikamma;  &  in 
def  of  "  speech  "  at  Vin  iv.2  (see  under  byappatha) ; 
DhsA  32  .f  (expl''  as  vak>-a-bheda). 

Vyappathi  (f  )  [cp.  Sk.  vyapj-ti]  activity,  occupation,  duty 
(?)  Sn  961,     See  remarks  on  byappatha. 

Vyappana  (f.)  [vi+  appana]  application  (of  mind),  focussing 
(of  attention)  Dhs  7. 

Vyamha  (nt.)  [etym.  ?]  palace ;  a  celestial  mansion,  a 
vimana,  abode  for  fairies  etc.  J  111.454 ;  vi.119,  251 
(=pura  &  raja-nivesa  C.) ;  Vv  35'  (=bhavana  VvA 
160).     Cp.  byamha. 

Vyamhita  (adj.)  [metric  for  vimhita]  astounded,  shocked, 
awed  ;  dismayed,  frightened  J  v. 69  (=bhita  C.) ;  vi.243, 
314- 

Vyaya  [vi+aya,  of  i;  the  assimilation  form  is  vaya'] 
expense,  loss,  decay  S  iv.68,  140  ;  Miln  393  (as  abbaya). 
avyayena  (instr.)  safely  D  1.72.  Cp.  veyyayika  & 
vyayika. 

Vyavayati  [vi+ava(=apa)+i,  cp.  apeti  &  veti]  to  go 
away,  disappear  J  v. 82. 

Vyavasana  (nt  )  [somewhat  doubtful.  It  has  to  be  com- 
pared with  vavassagga,  although  it  should  be  derived 
fr.  sa  (cp.  pp.  vyavasita ;  or  Sri  ?).  thus  mixture  of  syj 
&  sa.  Cp.  a  similar  difficulty  of  sa  under  osapeti] 
decision,  resolution ;  only  used  to  explain  part,  handa 
(exhortation)  at  SnA  200,  491  (v.  1.  vyavasaya  :  'cp. 
vavasaya  at  DA  1237),  f°''  which  otherwise  vavassagga. 

Vyavasita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  vi+ava+sa  (or  Sri?),  cp.  vya- 
vasana] decided,  resolute  SnA  200. 

Vyasana  (nt.)  [fr.  vy-t-  as]  misfortune,  misery,  ruin,  destruc- 
tion, loss  D  t.248  ;  S  III. 137  (anaya°) ;  iv.159;  A  1.33; 
V.156  sq.,  317  (several) ;  Sn  694  (°gata  ruined) ;  Pv  1.6* 
(=dukkha  PvA  33);  111.5*  (  =  anattha  PvA  199);  Vbh 
99  sq.,  137;  VbhA  102  (several);  PvA  4,  103,  112; 
Sdhp  499. — The  5  vyasanas  are:  nati°,  bhoga°,  roga°, 
sila°,  diuhi°  or  misfortune  concerning  one's  relations, 
wealth,  health,  character,  views.  Thus  at  D  111.235  ; 
A  III. 147;  Vin  IV. 277. 

Vyasanin  (adj.)  [fr.  vyasana]  having  misfortune,  unlucky, 
faring  ill  j  v.259. 

Vyasanna  [metric  (diaeretic)  for  visanna]  sunk  into  (loc), 
immersed  J  iv.399 ;  v.i6  (here  doubtful;  not,  as  C, 
vyasanapanna  ;  gloss  visanna ;  vv.  11.  in  C. :  vyaccanna, 
viphanua,  visatta). 

Vyakata  [pp.  of  vyakaroti]  I.  answered,  explained,  de- 
clared, decided  M  1.431  (by°) ;  A  1.119;  S  11. 51.  223; 
IV. 59,  194;  v. 177;  Sn  1023. — avyakata  unexplained, 
undecided,  not  declared,  indeterminate  M  1.431  (by°) ; 
D  1.187,  189;  S  11.222;  iv.375  sq.,  384  sq.,  391  sq. ; 
Ps  ir.108  sq. ;  Dhs  431,  576. — 2.  predicted  J  1.26.  — 
3.  settled,  determined  J  111.529  (asina  v.  brought  to  a 
decision  by  the  sword). 

Vyakatatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  vyakata]  explanation,  definite- 
ness  PvA  27. 

Vyakattar  [n.  ag.  of  vyakaroti ;  cp.  BSk.  vyakartf  Divy 
620]  expounder  A  111.81. 

Vyakarava  (nt.)  [fr.  vyakaroti ;  see  also  veyyakarana] 
1.  answer  (panha°),  explanation,  exposition  A  1.197; 
n.46 ;  111.119;  SnA  63,  99;  KhA  75,  76. — 2.  grammar 
(as  one  of  the  6  angas)  SnA  447  ;  PvA  97.  —  3.  predic- 
tion J  1.34,  44;  DhA  IV. 120. 


Vyakaroti  [vi-na-i-kr]  i.  to  explain,  answer  (in  comb" 
with  puttha,  asked)  D  1.25,  58,  175,  200  ;  Sn  510,  513  sq., 
1102,  1 1 16;  Miln  318  (byakareyya) ;  VvA  71.  Fut. 
°karissati  D  1.236  ;  Sn  993  ;  PvA  f8i.  For  vyakarissati 
•we  have  vyakkhissati  (of  viyacikkhati)  at  Sn  600.  —  aor. 
sg.  vyakasi  Sn  541,  1 1 16.  1127  ;  PvA  212  ;  pi.  vyakaijsu 
Sn  1084;  Pv  II. 13*. — grd.  vyakatabha  D  1.94,  118. — 
2.  to  prophesy,  predict  [cp,  B3k  \yakaroti  in  same 
sense  Divy  65,  131]  J  1.140;  Pv  111.5*  (aor.  °akari) ; 
Mhvs  6,  2  (aor.  °akarur)) ;  DhA  iv.120  (°akasi) ;  PvA  196. 
199  (°akasi).  —  pp.  vyakata. 

Vyakata  see  viy°. 

Vyakhyata  [pp.  of  v(i)yacikkhati]  told,  announced,  set 
forth,  enumerated  Sn  1,000. 

Vyakula  (adj.)  [vi-i-akula]  perplexed  J  1.30 1  ;  PvA  160; 
VvA  30  ;  Sdhp  403. 

Vyadinna  [for  vyadinna,  vi-i-  adinna  ?]  at  A  111.64  (soto 
vikkhitto  visato-(-  )  is  doubtful  in  reading  &  meaning 
("split"?).  It  must  mean  something  like  "inter- 
rupted, diverted."     The  vv.  11.  are  vicchinna  &  jinna. 

Vyadha  [fr.  vyadh:  see  vedha  cSt  vijjhati]  a  huntsman, 
deer-hunter  Mhvs  10,  89  (read  either  vyadha-deva  god 
of  the  h. ;  or  vyadhi°  demon  of  maladies) ;  10,  95. 

Vyadhi^  [see  byadhi]  sickness,  malady,  illness,  disease 
A  1. 139  (as  devaduta),  146,  155  sq. ;  111.66  ;  Ps  1.59  sq.  ; 
II. 147;  J  VI. 224;  Vism  236.  Often  in  sequence  jati 
jara  vyadhi  marana,  e.  g.  A  11.172;  111.74  ^1-: 
Vism  232. 

VyadW  (camel)  see  otthi°. 

Vyadhita  [pp.  of  vyadheti]  i.  affected  with  an  illness,  ill 
J  v. 497;  Miln  168.  See  byadhita.  —  2.  shaken,  f.  °a 
as  abstr.  shakiness,  trembling  VbhA  479. 

Vyadhiyaka  (nt.)  [fr.  vyadheti]  shaking  up  Vbh  352  ; 
VbhA  479  (uppannavyadhita ;  i.  e.  kaya-pphandana). 

Vyadheti  see  vyadhati.  —  pp.  vyadhita. 

Vyapaka  (adj.)  [fr.  vyapeti]  filling  or  summing  up,  com- 
bining, completing  PvA  71  (in  expl"  of  "  ye  keci  "  : 
anavasesa"  niddesa). 

Vyapajjati  [vi-i-apajjati]  (instr.)  to  go  wrong,  to  fail, 
disagree  ;  to  be  troubled  ;  also  (trs.)  to  do  harm,  to  injure 
S  III. 119.  i84=Nd2  40  (by°);  A  iii.ioi  (bhattag  me 
vyapajjeyya  disagrees  with  me.  makes  me  ill) ;  Sn  1065 
(akaso  avyapajjamano  not  troubled,  not  getting  upset) ; 
Nd*  74  (by°).  — pp.  vyapanna.  —  Caus.  vyapadeti. 

Vyapajjana  (f  )  [fr.  vyapajjati]  injuring,  doing  harm,  ill- 
will  Pug  18  ;  Dhs  418  ("  getting  upset  "  IrsV^). 

Vyapajjha  (adj.-nt.)  [perhaps  grd.  of  vyapajjati;  but  see 
also  avyapajjha]  to  be  troubled  or  troubling,  doing 
harm,  injuring ;  only  neg.  avyapajjha  (&  abyabajjha) 
(adj.)  not  hurting,  peaceful,  friendly;  (nt.)  kindness  of 
heart  Vin  1.183  ;  M  1.90  (abyabajjharj  vedanag  vedeti), 
526  ;  D  1. 167,  247,  251  ;  S  IV. 296,  371  ;  A  1.98  ;  11. 231  sq.  ; 
III. 285,  329  sq..  376  sq.  Cp.  byapajjha  &  vyabadha 
etc. 

Vyapatti  (f.)  [fr.  vyapajjati]  injury,  harm ;  doing  harm, 
malevolence  A  v. 292  sq. ;  Pug  t8;  J  iv.137;  Dhs  418 
("  disordered  temper  "  tvsl"). 

Vyapanna  (adj.)  [pp.  of  vyapajjati]  spoilt,  disagreeing, 
gone  wrong ;  corrupt ;  only  with  citta,  i.  e.  a  corrupted 
h«art,  or  a  malevolent  intention;  adj.  malevolent 
D  1.139;  III. 82  ;  A  1.262,  299;  opp.  avyapanna  (q.  v.). 
See  also  byapanna  &  viyapanna. 


Vyapada 


"3 


Vyosita 


Vyapada  [fr.  vyapajjati.  See  also  byapada]  making  bad, 
doing  harm ;  desire  to  injure,  malevolence,  ill-will 
D  1. 71,  246  ;  111.70  sq.,  226,  234  ;  S  1.99  ;  11. 151  ;  IV. 343  ; 
A  1. 194,  280;  11. 14,  210;  111.92,  231,  245;  IV. 437  ;  Vbh 
86,  363  sq.,  391  ;  Pug  17  sq.  ;  Dhs  11 37;  Vism  7;  DA 
1.2  n;  VbhA  74,  Ii8,  369.  °anusaya  M  1.433.  °dosa 
M  III. 3.  "dhatu  M  ni.62.  "nivarana  M  11.203.  See 
under  each  affix.  —  Cp.  avyapada. 

Vyapadeti  [Caus.  of  vyapajjati]  to  spoil  Miln  92. 

Vyapara  [vi+a+Pf]  occupation,  business,  service,  work 
J  1. 341  ;  V.60  ;  Vism  595.  Cp.  veyyavacca,  vyappatha 
(by°),  vyavata. 

Vyaparitar  one  occupied  with  M  111.126. 

Vyapin  (adj.)  [fr.  vi+ap]  pervading,  diffused  DhsA  311. 

Vyapeti  [vi+  Caus.  of  ap]  to  make  full,  pervade,  fill,  com- 
prise DhsA  307  ;  VvA  1 7  ;  ThA  287  ;  PvA  52  ( =pharati), 
71  (in  expl"  of  "  ye  keci  "). 

Vyabadha  (&  byabadha)  [fr.  vi-t-  a+  badh,  but  semantically 
connected  with  vi-|-  a-|-  pad.  as  in  vyapada  &  vya- 
pajjha]  oppression,  injury,  harm,  hurting ;  usually  in 
phrase  atta"  &  para°  (disturbing  the  peace  of  others  & 
of  oneself)  M  1.89 ;  S  iv.339  ;  A  i.i  14,  157,  216  ;  11. 179. 
—  Also  at  S  IV. 159  (paninar)  vyabadhaya,  with  v.  1. 
vadhaya).  See  also  byabadha.  The  corresponding 
adjectives  are  (a)vyapajjha  &  veyyabadhika  (q.  v.). 

Vyabadheti  (&  bya°)  [Caus.  of  vi+a+badh,  or  distortion 
fr.  vyapadeti,  with  which  identical  in  meaning]  to  do 
harm,  hurt,  injure  Vin  11.77/78 ;  S  iv.351  sq. ;  DA  1.167. 
The  BSk.  is  vyabadhayate  (e.  g.  Divy  105). 

Vyabaheti  [vi-i-a-l-bah:  see  bahati']  lit.  "to  make  an 
outsider,"  to  keep  or  to  be  kept  out  or  away  Vin  11. 140 
("bahirjsu  in  Pass,  sense ;  so  that  they  may  not  be  kept 
away).  Oldenberg  (on  p.  320)  suggests  reading  vya- 
badhi^jsu,  which  may  be  better,  viz.  "  may  not  be 
offended  "  (?).     The  form  is  difficult  to  explain. 

VyabhangI  (f.)  [see  bya°]  i.  a  carrying  pole  (or  flail?) 
Th  I,  623;  comb''  with  asita  (see  asita*  in  corr.  to  pt. 
2)  "sickle  &  pole"  M  11. 180;  A  111.5.  —  2.  a  flail 
S  IV. 201. 

Vyama  see  byama  &  add  ref.  D  ii.i8«Vism  136  (catu°- 
pamana). 

Vyayata  [vi+ayata]  stretched;  only  neg.  a°  senseless, 
confused  (should  it  be  vyayatta  ?)  J  1.496  (=avyatta 
C).     See  also  viyayata. 

Vyayama  =  vayama  DhsA  146. 

Vyayika  (adj.)  [fr.  vyaya]  belonging  to  decay  ;  only  neg. 
a°  not  decaying,  imperishable  A  11. 51  ;  J  v.508. 

Vyarambha  see  viy°. 

Vyaraddba  (adj.)  [pp.  of  vi+a+rundh]  opposed,  hostile 
Th  1,  344;  Sn  936.     See  byaruddha. 

Vyarosa  [vi-(-  a-t-  rosa,  cp.  virosana]  anger  M  in. 78  ;  S  111.73. 


Vyalika  (nt.)  [for  vy+alika]  fault  ThA  266. 

Vyavata  (a-dj.)  [  =  Sk.  vyaprta,  cp.  vyapara,  byappatha. 
&  veyyavacca]  doing  service,  active,  busy  ;  eager,  keen, 
intent  on  (loc),  busy  with  A  iv.195  (mayi  =  worrying 
about  me);  J  111.315  (su°) ;  iv.371  (kiccSiiccesu  v.  = 
uyyatta  C.) ;  v.395  (=ussukka);  vi.229  ( =kaya-veyya- 
vacca-dan'  adi-kamma-karanena  vyavata  C).  — das- 
sana"  keen  on  a  sight,  eager  to  see  J  1.89;  VvA  213 
(preferred  to  T.  reading  !).  — dana°  serving  in  connec- 
tion with  a  gift,  busy  with  giving,  a  "  commissioner  of 
gifts,"  i.  e.  a  superintendent  installed  by  a  higher  (rich) 
person  (as  a  king  or  setthi)  to  look  after  the  distribution 
of  all  kinds  of  gifts  in  connection  with  a  mahadana.  Rh. 
Davids  at  Dial.  11.372  (following  Childers)  has  quite 
misunderstood  the  term  in  referring  it  to  a  vyavata  in 
meaning  of  "  hindered,"  and  by  translating  it  as  "  hin- 
dered at  the  largesse  "  or  "  objecting  to  the  largesse." 
At  none  of  the  passages  quoted  by  him  has  it  that 
meaning.  See  e.  g.  D  11.354;  J  111.129;  Pv  11.9^°  (dane 
v.=ussukkar|  apanna  PvA  135);  PvA  112  (dane),  124 
(id.) ;  DA  1.296  (?  not  found),  avyavata  not  busy,  not 
bothering  about  (loc),  unconcerned  with,  not  worrying 
D  II. 141  (Tathagatassa  sarire ;  trsl"  not  to  the  point 
"hinder  not  yourselves");  Vin  111.136.  See  also 
separately.  — •  Note,  vyavata  (&  a°)  only  occur  in  the 
meaning  given  above,  and  not  in  the  sense  of  "  covered, 
obstructed "  [wrongly  fr.  Vf]  as  given  by  Childers. 
Correct  the  trsl"  given  under  byavata  accordingly  ! 

Vyaviddha  (adj.)  [vi-i- aviddha]  whirling  about,  flitting 
(here  &  there),  moving  about,  pell-mell  J  VI.530. 

Vyasa  [fr.  vi4-  as  to  sit]  separation,  division ;  always  con- 
trasted with  samasa,  e.  g.  Vism  82  (vyasato  separately, 
distributively ;  opp.  samasato) ;  KhA  187. 

Vyasatta  see  byasatta. 

Vyasificati  [vi-i-  asiucati]  to  defile,  corrupt,  tarnish  S 
IV. 78  (cittai)).  — ^pp.  vyasitta  ibid. 

Vyaseka  [fr.  vi-(-a-|-sic]  mixed;  only  neg.  a°  unmixed, 
untarnished,  undefiled  D  1.70  ;  DA  1.183  ;  Pug  59  ;  Th  i, 
926. 

Vyahaiati  [vi-i- aharati]  to  utter,  talk,  speak  Vin  11.214; 
J  II. 1 77;  iv.225  (puttho  vyahasi,  perhaps  with  v.  1.  as 
vyakasi).     See  also  avyaharati.  — Cp.  pa^i". 

Vyuha  [fr.  vi-i-  vah;  see  byuha]  i.  heap,  mass  ;  massing  or 
array,  grouping  of  troops  S  v. 369  (sambadha"  a  dense 
crowd,  or  massed  with  troops  (?);  in  phrase  iddha 
phita  etc.,  as  given  under  bahujaiina) ;  J  11.406  (battle 
array:  paduma",  cakka",  sakata").  —  2.  a  side  street 
(?),  in  sandhibbiiha  J  vi.276. 

Vyubati  at  VvA  104  is  not  clear  (see  byiihati).  It  looks 
more  like  a  present  tense  to  viyiilha  in  sense  "  to  be 
bulky,"  than  a  Denom.  fr.  vyuha  as  "  stand  in  array." 
For  the  regular  verb  vi-t-  vah  see  viyuhati.  Cp.  pati"  & 
saijyijhati. 

Vyosita  (adj.)  [=vosita]  perfected;  neg.  a"  not  perfected, 
imperfect  Th  i,  784  (aby°). 


s. 


-S-  a  euphonic  -s-  seems  to  occur  in  comb"  ras-agga-s- 
aggin  (see  rasa').  An  apparent  hiatus  -s  in  ye  s-idha 
Sn  1083,  and  evar)  s-ahag  Sn  11 34  (v.  1.)  may  be  an 
abbreviated  su°  (see  su-),  unless  we  take  it  as  a  mis- 
spelling for  p. 

Sa'  the  letter  s  (sa-kara)  SnA  23  ;  or  the  syllable  sa  DhA 
11.6 ;  PvA  280. 

Sa^  [Idg.  *so-  (m.).  'sa-  (f .) ;  nom.  sg,  to  base  *to-  of  the 
oblique  cases;  cp.  Sk.  sa  (sah),  sa ;  Av.  ho,  ha;  Gr.  o, 
i) ;  Goth.  sa.  so  ;  Ags.  se  "  the  "  (=that  one) ;  \>e-s  =E. 
thi-s]  base  of  the  nom.  of  the  demonstr.  pron.  that,  he, 
she.  The  form  sg.  m.  sa  is  rare  (e.  g.  Dh  142  ;  Sn  89). 
According  to  Geiger  {P.Gr.  §  105)  sa  occurs  in  Sn  40  times, 
but  so  124  times.  In  later  Pali  sa  is  almost  extinct. 
The  final  o  of  so  is  often  changed  into  v  before  vowels, 
and  a  short  vowel  is  lengthened  after  this  v :  svajja 
Sn  998  =so  ajja;  svahar)  J  i.i67=so  ahar) ;  svayar) 
Vin  1.2  =so  ayai).  The  foil,  vowel  is  dropped  in  so  mar) 
It  57=so  imai).  —  A  form  se  is  Magadhism  for  nt.  ace. 
sg.  tag,  found  e.  g.  at  D  11.278,  279;  M  11.254,  255,  and 
in  combi  seyyatha,  seyyathidag  (for  which  tagyatha 
Miln  I).  An  idiomatic  use  is  that  of  so  in  meaning  of 
"  that  (he  or  somebody),"  e.  g.  "  so  vata  .  .  .  pali- 
panno  parag  palipannag  uddharissati  ti :  n'  etag  thanag 
vijjati  "  M  1.45  ;  cp.  "  sa  'hag  dhammag  nassosig  "  that 
I  did  not  hear  the  Dh.  Vv  408.  Or  in  the  sense  of  a 
cond.  (or  causal)  part.  "  if,"  or  "  once,"  e.  g.  sa  kho  so 
bhikkhu  .  .  .  upakkileso  ti  iti  viditva  .  .  .  upakki- 
lesag  pajahati  "  once  he  has  recognised  .  .  ."  M  1.37. 
Cp.  ya°  II. 2  b.  On  correl.  use  with  ya°  (yo  so  etc.)  see 
ya°  11. 1. 

Sa'  [identical  with  sag°]  prefix,  used  as  first  pt.  of  com- 
pounds, is  the  sense  of  "  with,"  possessed  of,  having, 
same  as  ;  e.  g.  sadevaka  with  the  devas  Vin  1.8  ;  sadham- 
mika  having  common  faith  D  11.273;  sajati  having  the 
same  origin  J  11. 108.  Often  opposed  to  a-  and  other 
neg.  prefixes  (like  nir°).  Sometimes  almost  pleonastical 
(like  sa-antara).  —  Of  combinations  we  only  mention 
a  few  of  those  in  which  a  vocalic  initial  of  the  2'"'  pt. 
remains  uncontracted.  Other  examples  see  under  their 
heading  in  alph.  order.  E.  g.  sa-antara  inside  DhA 
111.788  (for  santara  Dh  315);  sa-Inda  together  with 
Indra  D  11. 261,  274  ;  A  v. 325  sq. ;  °-uttara  having  some- 
thing beyond,  inferior  (opp.  an°)  D  1.80  ;  11.299  =M  i  59  ; 
Dhs  1292,  1596;  DhsA  50;  "-uttaracchada  (&  "chadana) 
a  carpet  with  awnings  above  it  D  1.73-  ;  11. 187  (°ava) ; 
A  1. 181  ;  Vin  1.192  ;  DA  1.87  ;  -°udaka  with  water,  wet 
Vin  1.46  ;  -"udariya  born  from  the  same  womb,  a  brother 
J  IV. 41 7,  cp.  sodariya  ;  -°uddesa  with  explanation  It  99  ; 
Vism  423  (nama-gotta-vasena  sa-udd. ;  vann'adi-vasena 
sakara) ;  -"upanisa  together  with  its  cause,  causally 
associated  S  11.30  ;  -"upavajja  having  a  helper  M  111.266  ; 
-°upadana  showing  attachment  M  11.265  :  -"upadisesa 
having  the  substratum  of  life  remaining  Sn  354  ;  It  38  ; 
Nett  92.  Opp.  anupadisesa;  -°ummi  roaring  of  the 
billows  It  57,  1 14.  —  Nole.  sa*  &  sa'  are  differentiations 
of  one  and  the  same  sa,  which  is  originally  the  deictic 


pronoun  in  the  function  of  identity  &  close  connection. 
See  etym.  under  sag". 

Sa*  (reflex,  pron.)  [Vedic  sva  &  svayag  (=P.  sayag) ;  Idg. 
*seuo,  'sue  ;  cp.  Av.  hava  &  hva  own  ;  Gr.  tog  &  og  his 
own;  Lat.  sui,  suus ;  Goth,  swes  own,  sik  =  Ger.  sich 
himself;  etc.]  own  M  1.366;  D  11.209;  Sn  905;  J  11. 7  ; 
III. 164,  323  (loc.  samhi  lohite),  402  (ace.  sag  his  own, 
viz.  kinsman;  C=sakag  janag);  iv.249  (sag  bhatarag); 
Pv  ii.i2'=DhA  HI. 277  (ace.  san  tanug);  instr.  sena  on 
one's  own,  by  oneself  J  v. 24  (C.  not  quite  to  the  point ; 
mama  santakena).  Often  in  composition,  like  sadesa 
one's  own  country  Davs  i.io.     Cp.  saka. 

Sag°  (indecl.)  [prefix ;  Idg.  *sem  one ;  one  &  the  same,  cp. 
Gr.  li^aXi'iQ  even,  ufia  at  one,  ii^ug  together ;  Sk.  sama 
even,  the  same ;  sama  in  the  same  way ;  Av.  hama 
same  =Goth.  sama,  sama))  together  ;  Lat.  simul  ( =simul- 
taneous),  similis  "  re-sembling."  Also  Sk.  sa  (=sa'') 
together  =  Gr.  a-,  d-  (e.  g.  dn-oinc) ;  Av.  ha- ;  and  samyak 
towards  one  point  =  P.  samma.  —  Analogously  to  Lat. 
semel  "  once,"  simul,  we  find  sa°  as  numeral  base  for 
"one"  in  Vedic  sakrt  "once"=P.  sakid  {&  sakad), 
sahasra  1000  =P.  sahassa,  and  in  adv.  sada  "  always," 
lit.  "  in  one "]  prefix,  implying  conjunction  &  com- 
pleteness, sag"  is  after  vi°  (i9"o)  the  most  frequent 
(i6°'o)  of  all  Pali  prefixes.  Its  primary  meaning  is 
"  together  "  (cp.  Lat.  con°) ;  hence  arises  that  of  a  closer 
connection  or  a  more  accentuated  action  than  that 
expressed  by  the  simple  verb  (intensifying  =  thoroughly, 
quite),  or  noun.  Very  often  merely  pleonastic,  esp.  in 
comb"  with  other  prefixes  (e.  g.  sam-anu°,  sam-a°, 
sam-pa°).  In  meaning  of  "  near  by,  together  "  it  is 
opposed  to  para"  ;  as  modifying  prefix  it  is  contrary  to 
abhi°  and  (more  frequently)  to  vi°  (e.  g.  sagvadati> 
vivadati),  whereas  it  often  equals  pa°  (e.  g.  pamodati> 
sammodati),  with  which  it  is  often  comb"'  as  sampa°; 
and  also  abhi°  (e.  g.  abhivaddhati>sagvaddhati),  with 
which  often  comb''  as  abhisag°.  —  Bdhgh  &  Dhpala 
explain  sag"  by  samma  (SnA  151  ;  KhA  209:  so  read 
for  sama  agata),  sutthu  (see  e.  g.  santasita,  santusita), 
or  samanta  (  =  altogether ;  SnA  152,  154),  or  (dog- 
matically) sakena  santena  samena  (KhA  240),  or  as 
"  sagyoga  "  Vism  495.  —  In  comb"  with  y  we  find  both 
sagy°  and  safifi".  The  usual  contracted  form  before  r 
is  sa°. 

Sagyata  (&  safiiiata)  [pp.  of  sagyamati]  lit.  drawn  together  ; 
fig.  restrained,  self-controlled  D  11.88;  S  1.79;  Sn  88, 
156,  716;  J  1. 188;  Vv  34";  Miln  213.- 

-atta  having  one's  self  restrained,  self-controlled 
S  1. 14  (for  saya°);  Sn  216,  284  (nn),  723;  Pv  11.6" 
(nil ;  =sanilata-citta  PvA  98).  -iiru  having  the  thighs 
pressed  together,  having  firm  thighs  J  v. 89,  107  (fin). 
155  (iin).-  -carin  living  in  self-control  Dh  104  (nn). 
-pakhuma  having  the  eyelashes  close  together  VvA  162. 

Sagyama  {&  saniiama)  [fr.  sag -I- yam]  i.  restraint,  self- 
control,  abstinence  S  1.2 1,  169  ;  D  1.53  ;  Vin  1.3  ;  A  1. 155 
sq.  (kayena,  vacaya,  manasa);  D  in. 147  ;  It  15  (nn) ;  Sn 
264,  655  ;  M  ii.ioi  (sila°)  ;  Dh  25  (saflnama  dama) ;  DA 


114 


Saqyamati 


"5 


Saijvattati 


1.160;  DhA  11.255  (=catu-parisuddhi-slla) ;  VbhA  332 
—  2.  restraint  in  giving  alms,  saving  (of  money  etc.), 
stinginess  Vin  1.272  ;  Pv  11.7I'  (  =  sankoca  PvA  102). 

Sagyamati  [sar)  +  yamati]  to  practise  self-control  S  1.209 
(panesu  ca  saijyamamase,  trsl"  "  if  we  can  keep  our 
hands  off  living  things"). — pp.  sagyata. — Caus. 
sanriameti  to  restrain  M  1.365,  507  ;  Dh  37,  380.  Cp. 
pati°. 

Saoyamana  (nt.)  [fr.  sag  +  yam]  fastening  J  v.202,  207. 

Saoyamanl  (f)  [fr.  last]  a  kind  of  ornament  J  v.202 
( =  manisuvanna-pavaja-rajata-mayani  pilandhanani  C). 

Sapyacika  (f)  [collect,  abstr.  fr.  sarj-fyac]  begging,  what 
is  begged  ;  only  in  instr.  °aya  (adv.)  by  begging  together, 
by  collecting  voluntary  offerings  Vin  in. 144  (so  read 
for  °ayo),  149  (expl"*  incorrectly  as  "  sayag  yacitva"); 
J  11.282  (so  read  for  °ayo). 

Saoynga  (nt.)  [fr.  sar)  +  yuj]  harness  Th  i,  659. 

Sarjyunjati  [sari  +  yufijati]  to  connect,  join  with  (instr.), 
unite  S  1.72,  Pass,  sagyujjati  S  111.70.  —  pp.  sag- 
yutta.  —  Caus.  sagyojeti  (i)  to  put  together,  to  endow 
with  D  11. 355  ;  S  v. 354 ;  J  1.277.  —  (2)  to  couple,  to  wed 
someone  to  (instr.)  J  111.512  (darena) ;  IV.7  (id.). — pp. 
sai)yojita. 

Sagyuta  (adj.)  [sag  +  yuta,  of  yu]  connected,  combined  Sn 
574  (fifi),  1026. 

Sagyutta  [pp.  of  saijyuiiiati]  I.  tied,  bound,  fettered 
M  III. 275  (cammena)  ;  S  iv.163;  A  iv.216  (sarjyojanena 
s.  by  bonds  to  this  world) ;  Sn  194  (fin).  300,  304  ;  It  8  ; 
Sdhp2ii.  —  2.  connected  with,  mixed  with  (-°)  J  1.269 
(visa").  — Cp.  pati",  vi°. 

Sai)yii}ha  [pp.  of  sagyuhati,  cp.  in  similar  meaning  viyiilha] 
massed,  collected,  put  together,  composed  or  gathered 
(like  a  bunch  of  flowers  D  n.267  (gatha) :  M  1.386; 
DA  1.38  (spelt  sar|vu]ha,  i.  e.  sarjvyujha ;  v.  1.  saiialha, 
i.  e.  sannaddha). 

Sagyiihati  [sar)  +  vyuhati]  to  form  into  a  mass,  to  ball 
together,  to  conglomerate  A  iv.137  (khelapindar)). — 
pp.  sarjyijlha. 

Sagyoga  [fr.  sag  +  yuj]  i.  bond,  fetter  M  1.498;  S  1.226: 
111.70;  iv.36 ;  A  iv.280  =Vin  11.259  (opP-  vi°) ;  Sn  522, 
733;  Dh  384  ( =kamayog'adayo  sarjyoga  DhA  iv.140). 
—  2.  union,  association  J  in. 12  (iiii) ;  Vism  495. — 
3.  connection  (within  the  sentence),  construction  PvA 
73  (accanta"),  135  (id.). 

Sagyojana  (nt.)  [fr.  sagyunjati]  bond,  fetter  S  iv.163  etc. ; 
especially  the  fetters  that  bind  man  to  the  wheel  of 
transmigration  Vin  1.183;  S  1.23;  v. 241,  251  ;  A  1.264; 
111.443  ;  IV. 7  sq.  (ditthi°) ;  M  1.483  ;  Dh  370  ;  It  8  (tanha) ; 
Sn  62,  74,  621;  J  1.275;  n.22  ;  Nett  49;  DhA  in. 298; 
iv.49. 

The  ten  fetters  are  (i)  sakkayaditthi ;  (2)  vicikiccha  ; 
(3)  silabbataparamaso  ;  (4)  kamacchando  ;  (5)  vyapado  ; 
(6)  ruparago  ;  (7)  aruparago ;  (8)  mano  ;  (9)  uddhaccar)  ; 
(10)  avijja.  The  first  three  are  the  tini  sagyojanani  — 
e.  g.  M  1.9;  A  1. 231,  233;  D  1. 156;  11.92  sq.,  252; 
m.107,  132,  216;  S  v. 357.  376,  406;  Pug  12,  15; 
Nett  14  ;  Dhs  1002  ;  DA  1.312.  The  seven  last  are  the 
satta  saoyojanani,  Nett.  14.  The  first  five  are  called 
orambhagiyani  —  e.  g.  A  1.232  sq.  ;  11.5,  133;  v.17; 
D  1. 156;  11.92,  252;  M  1.432;  S  V.61,  69;  Th  2,  165; 
Pug  17.  The  last  five  are  called  uddhambhagiyani  — 
e.  g.  A  v.17;  S  v.61,  69;  Th  2,  167;  ThA  159;  Pug  22  ; 
Nett  14,  49. 

A  different  enumeration  of  the  ten  sagyojanas,  at 
Nd"  657=Dhs  11 13,  1463  (kamaraga,  patigha,  mana, 
ditthi,  vicikiccha,  silabbataparamasa,  bhavaraga,  issa, 
macchariya,  avijja);  compare,  however,  Dhs  1002. 


A  diff.  enum"  of  seven  sagyojanas  at  D  111.254  & 
A  IV. 7,  viz.  anunaya",  patigha",  difthi",  vicikiccha", 
mana°,  bhavaraga",  avijja".  A  list  of  eight  is  found  at 
M  1. 361  sq.  Cp.  also  ajjhatta-sagyojano  &  bahiddha- 
sagyojano  puggalo  A  1.63  sq.  ;  Pug  22  ;  kig-su-s°  S  1.39  = 
Sn  1 108. 

Sagyojaniya  (safifi")  (adj.)  [fr.  sagyojana]  connected  with 
the  sagyojanas,  favourable  to  the  sagyojanas,  A  1.50  ; 
S  11.86;  in. 166  sq.  ;  iv.89,  107;  Dhs  584,  1125,  1462; 
DhsA  49.  Used  as  a  noun,  with  dhamma  understood, 
Sn  363,  375. 

Sagyojita  [pp.  of  sagyojeti,  Caus.  of  sagyunjati]  combined, 
connected  with,  mixed  with  J  1.269  (bhesajja"). 

Sagrakkhati  [sag  +  rakkhati]  to  guard,  ward  off  Sdhp  364. 

Sagrambha  [sag-l-*rambha,  fr.  rabh,  as  in  rabhasa  (q.  v.)] 
impetuosity,  rage  Davs  iv.34.  This  is  the  Sanskritic 
form  for  the  usual  P.  sarambha. 

Sagraga  [sag  +  raga]  passion  J  iv.22.     Cp.  saraga. 

Sagrulha  [pp.  of  sagruhati]  grown  together,  healed  J 
111.216  ;  V.344. 

Sagruhati  [sag  +  ruhati]  to  grow  J  iv.429  (  =  vaddhati). 

Sagroceti  [sag  +  roceti]  to  find  pleasure  in,  only  in  aor. 
{poetical)  samarocayi  Sn  290,  306,  405  ;  J  iv.471. 

Sagvacana  (nt.)  [sag  +  vacana]  sentence  DhsA  52. 

Sagvacchara  [sag  +  vacchara  ;  cp.  Vedic  sagvatsara]  a  year 
D  11.327;  A  11.75;  IV. 139,  252  sq.  ;  Dh  108;  J  11.80; 
Sdhp  239;  nom.  pi.  sagvaccharani  J  11.128. 

Sagvatta  (m.  &  nt.)  [sag  +  vatta"]  i.  "rolling  on  or  for- 
ward "  (opp.  vivatta  "rolling  back"),  with  ref.  to  the 
development  of  the  Universe  &  time  (kappa)  the 
ascending  aeon  (vivatta  the  descending  cycle),  evolution 
It  99  ;  Pug  60  ;  Vism  419  ;  Sdhp  484,  485.  -"vivatta  a 
period  within  which  evolution  &  dissolution  of  the  world 
takes  place,  a  complete  world-cycle  (see  also  vivatta) 
D  1. 14  ;  A  II. 142  ;  It  15,  99  ;  Pug  60. 

Sagvattati  [sag-l-vattati]  i.  to  be  evolved,  to  be  in  a 
process  of  evolution  (opp.  vivattati  in  devolution)  D  1.17  ; 
III. 84,  109  ;  A  n.142  ;  DA  i.i  10.  —  2.  to  fall  to  pieces,  to 
come  to  an  end  (like  the  world's  destruction),  to  pass 
away,  perish,  dissolve  (intrs.)  J  in. 75  (pafhavi  s.  ;  v.  1. 
sagvaddh") ;  Miln  287  (akaso  "eyya).  For  sagvatt"  at 
J  1. 189  read  sagvaddh". 

Sagvattanika  (adj.)  [fr.  sagvatta(na)]  turning  to,  being 
reborn  D  1.17. 

Sagva44ha  [pp.  of  sagvaddhati]  grown  up,  brought  up 
D  1.75;  11.38;  PvA  66. 

Sagva44hati  [sag -(- vaddhati]  to  grow  up;  ppr.  "amana 
(ddh.)  growing  up,  subsistigg  J  1.189  (so  far  "vatt").  — 
Caus.  "vaddheti  to  rear,  nourish,  bring  up  J  1. 231  (ppr. 
pass,  "vaddhiyamana). 

Sagvai^ana  (nt.)  [sag -1- vannana]  praising,  praise  J  1234. 

SagvaiKtita  [pp.  of  sagvanneti]  praised,  comb''  with 
sambhavita  honoured  M  i.iio;  in. 194,  223. 

Sagvaw^ti  [sag -I- vanneti]  to  praise  Vin  in. 73  sq.  ;  J  v. 292 
(aor.  3""  pi.  "vannayug),  Cp.  BSk.  sagvarnayati  Divy 
115.^ —  pp.  sagvannita. 

Sagvattati  [sag -1- vattati]  to  lead  (to),  to  be  useful  (for) 
A  1.54,  58  (ahitaya  dukkhaya) ;  Vin  i.io=S  v. 421; 
It  71  sq.  ;  J  1.97  ;  Pot.  sagvatteyya  Vin  1.13.  —  Oftin  in 
phrase  nibbidaya,  viragaya  .  .  .  nibbanaya  sagvattati 
e.  g.  D  1. 189  ;  II. 251  ;  in. 130  ;  S  v. 80,  255  ;  A  in. 83,  326. 


Sarjvattanika 


ii6 


Saqvuta 


Saijvattanika  (adj.)  [fr.  sagvattati]  conducive  to,  involving 
A  11.54,  65  :  It  82  ;  Kvu  618  ;  J  1.275  ;  Nett  134=8  v. 371. 
As  °iya  at  PvA  205. 

Sagvadati  [sai)  +  vadati]  to  agree  M  1.500  (opp.  vivadati). 

Saijvadana  (nt.)  [fr.  sagvadati]  a  certain  magic  act  per- 
formed in  order  to  procure  harmony  D  i.ii  ;  DA  1.96 ; 
cp.  Dial.  1.23. 

Satjvaddhana  (nt.)  [fr.  sag  +  vydh]  increasing,  causing  to 
grow  J  IV. 16. 

Saovara  [fr.  sag  +  vy]  restraint  D  1.57,  70,  89;  n.281  (in- 
driya°);  ni.130,  225;  A  11.26;  S  IV. 189  sq. ;  It  28,  96, 
n8;  Pug  59;  Sn  1034;  Vin  11.126,  192  (ayatii)  sag- 
varaya  "  for  restraint  in  the  future,"  in  confession 
formula),  Dh  185  ;  Nett  192  ;  Vism  11,  44  ;  DhA  111.238  ; 
IV. 86  (°dvarani).  The  fivefold  sarjvara :  sfla°,  sati°, 
fiana",  khanti",  viriya",  i.  e.  by  virtue,  mindfulness, 
insight,  patience,  effort  DhsA  351  ;  as  patimokkha"  etc. 
at  Vism  7  ;  VbhA  330  sq.  -"vinaya  norm  of  self-control, 
good  conduct  SnA  8.  catuyama°,  Jain  discipline  M 
I-377- 

Sarjvarana  (nt.)  [fr.  sag-f  vr]  covering;  obstruction  Dhtp 
274  (as  def.  of  root  val,  i.  e.  vr). 

Saijvarati  [sar)-fvarati=vunati  i]  to  restrain,  hold;  to 
restrain  oneself  Vin  ii.io2  (Pot.  °vareyyasi) ;  Miln  152 
(paso  na  sagvarati).  —  pp.  sagvuta. 

Sagvari  (f.)  [Vedic  sarvari  fr.  ^arvara  speckled ;  the  P. 
form  via,  sabbari>savari>sar|vari]  the  night  (poetical) 
D  111.196  ;  J  IV. 441  ;  v. 14,  269  ;  vi.243. 

Sagvasati  [sag-l-vasati^]  to  live,  to  associate,  cohabitate 
A  11.57;  Vin  11.237;  ^^^  423'  P^g  65;  •Dl'  ^67;  Dpvs 
X.8 ;  Miln  250.  —  Caus.  °vaseti  same  meaning  Vin 
IV. 137.  ^Cp.  upa°. 

Sagvati  [sag-f-vayati-]  to  be  fragrant  J  v.206  (cp.  vv.  11. 
on  p.  203). 

Sagvasa  [sag  +  vasa^]  i .  living  with,  co-residence  Vin 
T.97  ;  11. 237  ;  III. 28  ;  A  11.57  sq.,  187  ;  in. 164  sq.  ;  iv.172  ; 
J  1.236;  IV. 317  (piya-sagvasag  vasi  lived  together  in 
harmony) ;  Sn  283,  290,  335  ;  Dh  207,  302  ;  Sdhp  435.  — 
2.  intimacy  J  11.39.  —  3.  cohabitation,  sexual'  inter- 
course D  1.97  ;  J  1. 134  ;  II. 108  ;  SnA  355. 

Sagvasaka  (adj.)  [fr.  sagvasa]  living  together  Vin  11. 162  ; 

111.173. 

Sagvasiya  [fr.  sagvasa]  one  who  lives  with  somebody  Sn 
22  ;  a°-bhava  injpossibility  to  co-reside  Miln  249. 

Sagvigga  [pp.  of  sagvijjati^]  agitated,  moved  by  fear  or  awe, 
excited,  stirred  D  1.50;  11.240;  A  11. 115;  S  iv.290 ; 
V.270  ;  J  1.59  ;  Miln  236  ;  PvA  31  ("hadaya). 

Sagvijita  [pp.  of  sagvejeti]  (med.)  filled  with  fear  or  awe, 
made  to  tremble  ;  (pass.)  felt,  realized  Sn  935  (  =  sagve- 
jita  ubbejita  Nd'  406), 

Sagvijjati'  [Vedic  vijate,  vij;  not  as  simple  verb  in  P.]  to 
be  agitated  or  moved,  to  be  stirred  A  ii.i  14 ;  It  30.  — 
pp.  sagvigga. — Caus.  sagvejeti  M  1.253;  S  1.141  ; 
Vin  1.32  ;  imper.  °vejehi  S  v.270  ;  aor.  "vejesi  Miln  236 ; 
inf.  °vejetug  S  1.197  ;  ger  "vejetva  J  1.327  ;  grd.  °vejaniya 
that  which  should  cause  awe,  in  °dni  thdndni  places  of 
pilgrimage  D  11.140;  A  1.36;  11.120;  It  30.  —  pp.  sag- 
vijita &  °vejita. 

Sagvijjati^  [Pass,  of  sagvindati]  to  be  found,  to  exist,  to  be 
D  1.3  ;  Vin  11. 122  ;  J  1.214  (°amana) ;  PvA  153. 

Sagvidati  [sag  +  vidati :  see  vindati]  to  know  ;  gep.  °viditva 
J  111.114;  v.  1 72.  —  pp.  sagvidita. 


Sagvidahati  [sag -1- vidahati]  to  arrange,  appoint,  fix,  settle, 
provide,  prepare  D  1.61  (Pot.  °eyyama) ;  aor.  "vidahi 
PvA  198;  inf.  °vidhatug  A  11.35,  &  "vidahitug  Vin 
1.287;  g^''-  °vidhaya  Vin  iv.62  sq.,  133;  Mhvs  17,  37,  & 
"vidahitva  Vin  1.287;  111.53,  64;  J  1.59;  v.46  ;  also  as 
Caus.  form"  "vidahetvana  J  vi.301.  —  pp.  sagvidahita 
&  sagvihita. 

Sagvidahana  (nt.)  [for  the  usual  "vidhana]  arrangement, 
appcmtment,  provision  J  11.209;  DA  1. 148;  DhsA  in. 
The  word  is  peculiar  to  the  Commentary  style. 

Sagvidahita  [pp.  of  sagvidahati]  arranged  Vin  iv.64  ;  DhA 
I-397- 

Sagvidita  [pp.  of  sagvidati]  known  Sn  935. 

Sagvidhatar  [n.  ag.  fr.  sagvidahati]  one  who  arranges  or 
provides  (cp.  vidhatar)  D  111.14S. 

Sagvidhana  (nt.)  [fr.  sagvidahati]  arranging,  providing, 
arrangement  D  1.135;  J  1140  (rakkha"). 

Sagvidhayaka  (adj.)  [sag -1- vidhayaka]  providing,  manag- 
ing; f.  °ika  J  1. 155. 

Sagvidbavahara  [sagvidha  (short  ger.  form)-l-avahara] 
taking  by  arrangement,  i.  e.  theft  committed  in  agree- 
ment with  others  Vin  111.53. 

Sagvindati  [sag -1- vindati]  to  find  ;  ppr.  (a)sagvindag  Th  i, 
717.  —  Pass,  sagvijjati  (q.  v.). 

Sagvibhajati  [sag-l-vibhajati]  to  divide,  to  share,  to  com- 
municate D  11.233  ;  Miln  94,  344  ;  inf.  "vibhajitug  Miln 
295  ;  Davs  v. 54.  —  pp.  sagvibhatta.  —  Caus.  °vibhajeti. 
It  65. 

Sagvibhatta  [pp.  of  sagvibhajati]  divided,  shared  Th  i,  9, 

Sagvibhaga  [sag -H  vibhaga]  distribution,  sharing  out 
D  III. 191  ;  A  1.92,  150  ;  It  18  sq.,  98,  102  ;  Vv  37^;  Miln 
94.     — ^iana°  (of  gifts)  J  v.331  ;  Vism  306. 

Sagvibhagin  (adj.)  [fr.  sagvibhaga]  generous,  open-handed 
S  1.43=  J  IV.  1 10;  V.397  (a°) ;  Miln  207. 

SagviriUha  (adj.)  [pp.  of  sagviruhati]  fully  grown,  healed 
up  J  II.I  17. 

Sagviliihati  [sag -f- viruhati]  to  germinate,  to  sprout  Miln 
99,  125,  130,  375.  —  pp.  sagviriilha.  ■ — Caus.  °viruheti 
to  cause  to  grow,  to  nourish  J  iv.429. 

Sagvilapa  [sag  -1-  vilapa]  noisy  talk ;  fig.  for  thundering 
S  IV.289  (abbha°). 

Sagvisati  [sag -l- visati]  to  enter;  Caus.  sagveseti  (q.  v.). 
Cp.  abhisagvisati. 

Sagvissajietar    [sag -(- vissajjetar]    one    who    appoints    or 

assigns  DA  1.112. 

Sagvissandati  [sag -t- vissandati]  to  overflow  M  11.117; 
Miln  36. 

Sagvihita  [pp.  of  sagvidahati]  arranged,  prepared,  pro- 
vided J  1.133  ("arakkha  i.  e.  protected)  ;  in  cpd.  su°  well 
arranged  or  appointed,  fully  provided  D  11.75  ;  M  11.75 ; 
DA  1.147,  182  ;  a°  unappointed  Vin  1.175  ;  Vism  37. 

Sagvijita  [sag-l-vijita]  fanned  Davs  v.  18. 

Sagvuta  [pp.  of  sagvarati]  i.  closed  D  1.81.  —  2.  tied  up 
J  IV. 361.  —  3.  restrained,  governed,  (self-)controlled, 
guarded  D  1.250  ;  in. 48,  97  ;  S  11.231  ;  iv.351  sq.  ;  A  1.7 
(cittag) ;  ir.25  ;  111.387;  It  96,  118;  Sn  340  (indriyesu) ; 
Dh  340;  DA  1. 181.  asagvuta  unrestrained  S  iv.70 ; 
A  111.387;  Pug  20,  24;  in  phrase  asagvufa  lokeintarika 
andhakara  (the  world-spaces  which  are  dark  &)  un- 
governed,   orderless,   not  supported,   baseless   D   11.12. 


Sagvulha 


117 


Saijsara 


— su°well  controlled  Vin  11.213  ;  iv.186  ;  S  iv.70  ;  Sn  413  ; 
Dh  8. 

-atta    self-controlled    S    1.66.      -indriya    having    the 
senses  under  control  It  91  ;  Pug  35.     -karin  M  11.260. 

Sagvuiha  see  satjyOlha. 

Saovega  [fr.  sarj  +  vij]  agitation,  fear,  anxiety;  thrill, 
religious  emotion  (caused  by  contemplation  of  the 
miseries  of  this  world)  D  111.214;  A  1.43;  :i.33.   114; 

5  1.197;  III. 85;  V.130,  133;  It  30;  Sn  935;  J  1.138; 
Nd"-  406.;  Vism  i35  =  KhA  235  (eight  objects  inducing 
emotion  :  birth,  old  age,  illness,  death,  misery  in  the 
apayas.  and  the  misery  caused  by  sarjsara  in  past,  present 

6  future  stages);  Mhvs  i,  4;  23,  62  ;  PvA  i.  22,  32.  39, 
76. 

Sagvejana  (adj.)  [fr.  sag  +  vij]  agitating,  moving  It  30. 

Saovejaniya  (adj.)  [fr.  sagvejana]  apt  to  cause  emotion 
A  II.I20;  Vism  238.     See  also  sagvijjati'. 

Sagvejita  [pp.  of  sagvejeti]  stirred,  moved,  agitated  S 
1. 197  ;  Nd'  406. 

Sagvejeti  Caus.  of  sagvijjati'  (q.  v.). 

Sagvetheti  [sag  +  vetheti]  to  wrap,  stuff,  tuck  in  Vin 
IV. 40. 

Sagvedhita  [sag  +  vyathita :  see  vyadhati]  shaken  up. 
confused,  trembling  Sn  902. 

Sagvelli  (f.)  [sag  + velli.  cp.  vellita]  "  that  which  is  wound 
round."  a  loin  cloth  J  v.306.  As  sagvelliya  at  Vin 
n.137,  271. 

Sagvelleti  [fr.  sag  +  veil]  to  gather  up,  bundle  together, 
fold  up  Vism  327. 

Sagvesana  (f.)  [fr.  sagveseti]  lying  dovm.  being  in  bed, 
sleeping  J  VI.551  sq.,  557. 

Sagveseti  [Caus.  of  sagvisati]  to  lead.,  conduct  A  1.141  ; 
Pass,  sagvesiyati  to  be  put  to  bed  (applied  to  a  sick 
person)  M  i.8§=ni.  181  ;D  11.24.     Cp.  abhi°. 

Sagvossajjati  see  samavossajjati. 

Sagvohaia  [sag  +  vohara]  business,  traffic  Vin  111.239; 
A  11.187=5  1.78 ;  A  111.77 :  SnA  471. 

Sagvoharati  [Denom.  fr.  sagvohara]  to  trade  (with) ;  ppr. 
°voharamana  [cp.  BSk.  sagvyavaharamana  Divy  259] 
A  II. 188. 

Sagsagga  [fr.  sag  +  srj]  contact,  connection,  association 
Vin  in. 120;  A  111.293  sq.  (°aramata) ;  iv.87  sq..  331; 
It  70;  J  1.376;  1V.57 ;  Miln  386;  Nd''  137;  VbhA  340 
(an-anulomika°)  ;  PvA  5  (papamitta°).  • —  Two  kinds  of 
contact  at  Nd^  659  :  by  sight  (dassana°)  and  by  hsaring 
(savaija°).  —  pada°  contact  of  two  words.  "  sandhi  " 
Nd»  139  ;  Nd*  137  (for  iti) ;  6nA  28.  — a°  S  11.202  ;  Miln 
344.     -°jata  one  who  has  come  into  contact  Sn  36. 

Sagsattha  [pp.  of  sag  +  srj]  i.  mixed  with  (instr.),  asso- 
ciating with,  joined  M  1.480  (opp.  vi°) ;  A  in. 109.  116. 
258  sq.,  393  ;  PvA  47.  —  2.  living  in  society  Vin  1.200  ; 
11.4;  IV.239,  294;  D  11. 214;  Kvu  337=DhsA  42;  Dhs 
1193  ;  J  II. 105  ;  DhsA  49,  72.  — a°  not  given  to  society 
M  1.2 14;  S  1.63 ;  Miln  244;  Vism  73. 

Sagsati  [Vedic  ^agsati,  cp.  Av.  saghaiti  to  proclaim,  Lat. 
censeo=  censure  ;  Obulg.  9om  to  say]  to  proclaim,  point 
out  J  V.77;  VI. 533  ;  Pot.  sagse  J  vi.181  ;  aor.  asagsi 
1  III. 420  ;  IV. 395;  V.66;  &  asasi  (Sk.  aSagsit)  J  111.484. 
Cp.  abhi°. 

Sagsatta  [pp.  of  sag-t-saij]  adhering,  clinging  D  1.239 
(parampara°j. 

Sagsad  (f.)  [fr.  sag -l- sad]  session,  assembly;  loc.  sagsati 
J  111.493  (=parisamajjhe  C),  495 


Sagsaddati  [sag  +  ^abd]  to  sound,  in  def.  of  root  kitt  at 
Dhtp  579;  Dhtm  812. 

Sagsandati  [sag -t- syand,  cp.  BSk.  sagsyandati  A\i  11. 142 
sq.,  188]  to  run  together,  to  associate  D  1.248;  11.223; 
S  Ii.i58=,lt  70;  S  IV. 379;  Pug  32.  — Caus.  sagsandeti 
to  put  together  ;  unite,  combine  J  1.403  ;  v.216  ;  Miln  131  ; 
DhA  11.12  ;  1V.51 . 

Sagsandana  (f.)  [fr.  sagsandati]  i.  (lit.)  coming  together 
J  VI. 414  (v.  1.  for  T.  sagsandita).  —  2.  (fig.)  import, 
application,  reference,  conclusion  (lit.  "  flowing  to- 
gether ")  Tikp  264.  opamma°  application  of  a  simile, 
"  tertium  comparationis  "  Vism  326  ;  DA  1.127.  dittha° 
(puccha)  a  question  with  reference  to  observation  Nd^ 
s.  v.  puccha;  DhsA  55. 

Sagsanna  [pp.  of  sagsidati  or  sagsandati]  depressed,  ex- 
hausted Dh  280  (  =  osanna  DhA  111.410  :  see  ossanna). 

Sagsappa  (adj.)  [fr.  sag  +  srp]  creeping  A  v.289. 

Sagsappati  [sag -1- sappati]  to  creep  along,  to  crawl,  move 
A  v.289;  VvA  278;  DhA  iv.49. 

Sagsappaniyapariyaya,  the  creeping  exposition,  a  dis- 
cussion of  the  consequences  of  certain  kinds  of  kamma, 
A  V.288  sq. 

Sagsappin  (adj.)=sagsappa  A  iv.172. 

Sagsaya  [cp.  Vedic  sagsaya]  doubt  A  11.24;  Nd^  660 
(=vicikiccha  etc.) ;  Miln  94  ;  Dhs  425. 

Sagsayita  (nt.)  [pp.  of  sagsayati=sag-fseti  of  ii;  in 
meaning  =  sagsaya]  doubt  Davs  1.50. 

Sagsarati  [sag-t-sarati,  of  sr]  to  move  about  continuously, 
to  come  again  and  again  J  1.335.  —  2.  to  go  through 
one  life  after  the  other,  to  transmigrate  D  1.14;  DA 
1. 105;  ppr.  sagsaranto  (&  sagsarag)  S  in. 149;  iv.4.39 ; 
It  109;  PvA  166;  med.  sagsaramana  Vv  19';  ger. 
"saritva  S  111.212  ;  Pug  16.  — pp.  sagsarita  &  sagsita. 

Sagsarana  (nt.)  [fr.  sag-l-sr]  i.  moving  about,  running; 
°lohita  blood  in  circulation  (opp.  sannicita")  Vism  261  ; 
KhA  62  ;  VbhA  245.  —  2.  a  movable  curtain,  a  blind 
that  can  be  drawn  aside  Vin  11. 153. 

Sagsarita  [pp.  of  sagsarati]  transmigrated  D  11.90 ;  A 
ii.i  ;  Th  2.  496.     a°  M  1.82. 

Sagsava  [fr.  sag-l-sni]  flowing  VvA  227. 

Sagsavaka  [fr.  sagsava]  N.  of  a  purgatory  Vv  52'^^,  cp. 
VvA  226  sq. 

Sagssveti  [fr.  sag  +  sru]  to  cause  to  flow  together,  to  pour 
into  (loc),  to  put  in  J  v. 268  (=pakkhipati  C). 

Sagsadiya  (f.)  [cp.  *Sk.  syavag-satika.  on  which  see  Kern, 
Toev.  11.62,  s.  v.]  a  kind  of  inferior  rice  J  vi.530. 

Sagsadeti  Caus.  of  sagsidati  (q.  v.). 

Sagsameti  [Caus.  of  sag  +  Sam]  lit.  "  to  smoothe."  to  fold 
up  (one's  sleeping  mat),  to  leave  (one's  bed),  in  phrase 
senasanag  sagsametya  Vin  11. 185;  iv.24 ;  M  1.457; 
S  iii.95,  133;  iv.288. 

Sagsayati  [sag-l-sayati,  which  stands  for  sadati  (of  svad 
to  sweeten).  On  y>d  cp.  khayita>  khadita  &  san- 
khayita]  to  taste,  enjoy  J  111.201  (aor.  samasaj'isug  :  so 
read  for  samasasisug). 

Sagsara  [fr.  sagsarati]  i.  transmigration,  lit.  faring  on 
D  1.54:  If. 206  (here  =  existence) ;  M  1.81  (sagsarcna 
suddhi)  ;  S  ii.i78sq.  ;  A  i.io;  11.12=52;  Sn  32;  Dh 
60;  J  1. 115;  Pvii.13";  Vism' 544  (in  detail).  578.  603 
(°assa  karaka) ;  PvA  63.  243.  For  description  of  sagsara 
(its   endlessness   &   inevitableness)  sec   e.  g.   S   11. 178, 


Saqsijjhati 


Il8 


Sakantaka 


184  sq.,  263;  III. 149  sq. ;  VbhA  134  (anta-virahita)  & 
anamatagga  (to  which  add  refs.  VbhA  45,  182,  259, 
260).  —  2.  moving  on,  circulation:  vaci°  exchange  of 
words  A  1.79. 

-cakka  [cp.  BSk.  sagsara-cakra]  tne  wheel  of  tr.  Vism 

198,  201;  VvA  i05  =  PvA  7.  -dukkha  the  ill  of  tr. 
Vism  531  :  VbhA  145,   149.     -bhaya  fear  of  tr.  VbhA 

199.  -sagara  the  ocean  of  tr.  J  111.24:. 

Sar]sijjhati  [sarj  +  sidh]  to  be  fulfilled  Sdhp  451. 

Sagsita'=3ai)sarita  J  v. 56  (cira-ratta°=carita  anucinna 
C). 

Saosita-  [pp.  of  sag  +  iri]  dependent  Sdhp  306. 

Sarjsiddhi  (f.)  [sar)  +  siddhi]  success  Dhtp  420. 

Sagsibbita  [pp.  of  sag  +  sibbati]  entwined  Vism  i  ;  Miln 
102,  148  ;  DhA  111.198. 

Sat)Sida  [fr.  sagsldati]  sinking  (down)  S  iv.180  (v.  1.  sag- 
sada). 

Sagsidati  [sag  +  sad]  i .  to  sink  down,  to  lose  heart  D  1.248  ; 
A  iii.89  =  Pug  65  ;  Th  i,  681  ;  ]  11.330.  —  2.  to  be  at  an 
end  (said  of  a  path,  magga)  Vin  111.131  ;  S  i.i.  — Caus. 
sarjsadeti:  i.  to  get  tired,  give  out  M  1.214;  A  1.288.  — 
2.  to  drop,  fail  in  A  iv.398  (pafihar),  i.  e.  not  answer). 
—  3.  to  place  DA  1.49. 

Sagsidana  (nt.)  [fr.  sags;dati]=sar)sida  Th  i,  572  (ogha°). 

Sarisina  [sag  +  sina,  pp.  of  sy  to  crush,  Sk.  sirija]  fallen  off, 
destroyed  Sn  44  ("patta  without  leaves -patita-patta 
C). 

Sagsuddha  (adj.)  [sag  +  suddha]  pure  D  1.113:  Sn  372, 
1107;  Ndi  289;  Nd2  661  ;  J  1.2. 

-gahanika  of  pure  descent  D  1.113  ;  DA  1.281. 

Sagsuddhi  (f.)  [sag  +  suddhi)  purification  Sn  788;  Nd'  84. 

Sagsumbhati  [sag  +  sumbhati]  to  beat  J  vi.53,  88  (°amana). 

Sagsucaka  fadj.)  [fr.  sagsuceti]  indicating  VvA  244,  302. 

Sagsuceti  [sag  +  siicay",  Denom.  fr.  siici]  to  indicate,  show, 
betray  Davs  v.50  ;  DA  1.311. 

Sagseda  [sag  +  seda]  sweat,  moisture  M  1.73  ;  ThA  185. 

-ja  [cp.  BSk  sagsvedaja  Divy  627]  born  or  arisen  from 
moisture  D  111.230  ;  Miln  128;  KhA  247  ;  VbhA  161. 

Sagseva  (adj.)  [fr.  sag  +  sev]  associating  A  11.245  ;  v. 113  sq. 
(sappurisa°  &  asappurisa") ;  Miln  93. 

Sagsevana  (f.)  [fr.  sagsevati]  associating  Dhs  i326=Pug20. 

Sagseva  (f)  [fr-  sagseva]  worshipping,  attending  Miln  93 
(sneha°). 

Sagsevita  [sag  +  sevita]  frequented,  inhabited  J  vi.539. 

Sagsevin  (adj.)=sagseva  J  1.488. 

Saghata^  [pp-  of  sag  +  han]  firm,  compact  Miln  416  ;  Sdhp 
388. 

Saghata^  [pp.  of  sag  +  hf]  DA  1.280  ;  see  vi^ 

Saghanati  &  saghanti  [sag  +  han]  i.  to  join  together,  reach 
to  J  V.372. — 2.  to  suppress,  allay,  destroy  A  iv.437 
(kai.idug).  — pp.  saghata. 

Saghanana  (nt.)  [fr.  saghanati]  joining  together,  closing 
D  MI  ;  J  VI. 65. 

Saghara  [fr.  sag  +  hf]  collecting;  dus°  hard  to  collect 
Vin  III. 148;  J  IV. 36  (here  as  dussanghara,  on  which  see 
Kern,  Toev.  :.i2i). 

Saghara^a  (nt.)  [fr.  sagharati]  collecting,  gathering  Davs 
V.33.     Cp.  upa°  &  sangharaija. 


Saghaiati  [sag  +  harati]  i.  to  collect,  fold  up  Vin  1.46; 
II.  1 17,  150  ;  M  111.169  ;  J  1.66,  422  ;  Davs  iv.12  ;  PvA  73. 

—  2.  to  draw  together  Vin  11.217.  —  3.  to  gatner  up, 
take  up  SnA  369  (rupag).  —  4.  to  heap  up  Pv  iv.14 
(sagharimha  =  sailcinimhaPvA  279).  — asaghariya  (grd.) 
which  cannot  be  destroyed  (see  also  saghira)  S  v. 2 19.  — 
Caus.  II.  "harapeti  to  cause  to  collect,  to  make  gather  or 
grow  Vin  iv.259  (lomani),  260  (id.).  —  Pass,  saghirati 
(q.  v.).  — pp.  saghata.     Cp.  upa°. 

Saghasati  [san  +hasati]  to  laugh  with  M  11.223. 

Saghani  (f.)  [sag  +  hani]  shrinking,  decrease,  dwindling 
away  D  11.305  =M  1.49=8  ii.2=Dhs  644;  DhsA  328. 
Cp.  parihani. 

Saghara  [fr.  sag  +  hf]  abridgment,  compilation  PvA  114. 
Cp.  upa°. 

Sagharaka  [sag  +  hara  +  ka]  drawing  together,  a  collector 
S  ii.i85=It  17.  sabba°  a  kind  of  mixed  perfume 
J  V1.336. 

Sagharima  (adj.)  [fr.  sag  +  hr]  movable  Vism  124;  Sn  28, 
331.     a°  Vin  IV. 2  72. 

Saghita  [pp.  of  sandahati]  connected,  equipped  with, 
possessed  of  D  1.5  ;  M  11.202;  S  1.103;  Dh  loi  (gatha 
anattha-pada°).  Often  as  attha"  endowed  with  profit, 
bringing  advantage,  profitable  D  1.189;  S  11.223; 
IV. 330  ;  V.417;  A  111.196  sq.  ;  V.81  ;  Sn  722.     Cp.  upa°. 

Saghiyati  see  sandhiyati. 

Saghira  (&  saghariya)  [grd.  of  sagharati]  that  which  can  be 
restrained,  conquerable  Th  i,  1248;  J  v.8i.  a°  immov- 
able, unconquerable  S  1.193;  Vin  11.96;  A  iv.i4i  sq.; 
Th  I,  649;  Sn  1149;  J  IV. 283.     See  also  asaghariya. 

Saghirati  [Pass,  of  sagharati]  to  be  drawn  away  or  caught 
in  (loc.)  M  III. 188  sq.  (paccuppannesu  dhammesu) ; 
DhsA  420  (id.);  J  111.333. 

Saka  (adj.)  [sa'  +  ka]  own  D  1.106,  119,  231  ;  11.173  (sakag 
te  "  all  be  your  own,"  as  greeting  to  the  king) ;  M  1.79  ; 
Vin  1.3,  249  (acariyaka) ;  S  v. 261  (id.);  Sn  861  ;  It  76  ; 
Nd'  252  ;  Pv  1.5'  (ghara) ;  11.6'  (bhata).  —  Opp.  assaka^. 

—  appassaka  having  little  or  nothing  as  one's  own 
(=dalidda)  A  1.261  ;  11.203;  kamma-ssaka  possessing 
one's  own  kamma  M  111.203  sq. ;  A  v.288;  Miln  65; 
Dhs  1366. 

-gavacanda  violent  towards  one's  own  cows,  harassing 
one's  own  Pug  47. 

Sakata'  (m.  &  nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  sakata ;  Vedic  SakatI]  a  cart, 
waggon  ;  a  cartload  D  n.lio  ;  Vin  111.114  ;  J  1.191  ;  Miln 
238  ;  PvA  102  ;  VbhA  435  (simile  of  two  carts) ;  SnA  58 
(udaka-bharita°),  137  (bija°).  sakatani  pajapeti  to 
cause  the  carts  to  go  on  J  11.296. 

-gopaka  the  guardian  of  the  waggon  DhA  iv.60. 
-bhara  a  cart-load  VvA  79.  -mukha  the  front  or  opening 
of  the  waggon,  used  as  adj.  "  facing  the  waggon  or  the 
cart  "  (?)  at  D  11.234,  of  the  earth  — that  is,  India  as 
then  known  —  and  at  D  11.235  (comp.  Mahavastu 
111.208),  of  six  kingdoms  in  Northern  India.  At  the 
second  passage  B.  explains  that  the  six  kingdoms  all 
debouched  alike  on  the  central  kingdom,  which  was 
hexagonal  in  shape.  This  explanation  does  not  fit  the 
other  passage.  Could  sakata  there  be  used  of  the  con- 
stellation Rohini,  which  in  mediaeval  times  was  called 
the  Cart  ?  Cp.  Dial.  11.269.  -vaha  a  cart-load  Pv  11.7^. 
-vyiiha  "  the  waggon  array,"  a  wedge-shaped  phalanx 
J  11.404  ;   IV.343  ;  Vism  384. 

Sakata~  see  kasata. 

Sakai^ika  (adj.)  [sa-(-kana-l-ika]  having  a  mole  D  1.80; 
DA  1.223. 

Sakantaka  (adj.)  [sa-l-kantaka]  thorny,  dangerous  D  1.135  I 
Th  2,  352  ;  DA  1.296. 


Sakannajappaka 


119 


Sakkaya 


SakaOQajappaka  [sa+  kai}i)a+  jappa  +  ka]  whispering  in  the 
ear,  a  method  of  (secretly)  taking  votes  Vin  11.98  sq. 
(salaka-gaha). 

Sakata  (f.)  (-°)  [abstr.  fr.  saka]  one's  own  nature,  identity, 
peculiarity :  see  kamma-ssakata  &  adj .  °ssakata.  It 
may  also  be  considered  as  an  abstr.  formation  fr. 
kamma-ssaka. 

Sakadagamin  [sakad=sakid,  +agarain]  "  returning  once," 
one  who  will  not  be  reborn  on  earth  more  than  once  ;  one 
who  has  attained  the  second  grade  of  saving  wisdom 
Vin  1.293;  D  1.156,  229;  III. 107;  M  1.34;  S  III. 168; 
A  1. 120,  232  sq. ;  11.89,  134;  111.348;  IV .292  sq.,  380; 
V.138  sq.,  372  sq. ;  DhA  iv.66. 

Sakadagamita  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  last]  the  state  of  a  "  once- 
returner  "  D  11.206. 

Sakabala  (adj.)  [sa  +  kabala]  containing  a  mouthful  Vin 
IV.195. 

Sakamana  [saka  +  mana]  is  Bdhgh's  expl"  of  attamana 
(q.  v.),  e.  g.  DA  1. 129,  255. 

Sakamma   (nt.)    [sa*  +  kamma]   one's   own   occupation   D 

1135. 

Sakara^iya  (adj.)  [sa^  +  karaniya]  one  who  still  has  some- 
thing to  do  (in  order  to  attain  perfection)  D  11. 143; 
Th  I,  1045;  Miln  138. 

Sakarava-bhava  [sa^  +  karuna  +  bhava]  being  full  of  com- 
passion SnA  3:8. 

Sakala  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  sakala]  all,  whole,  entire  Vin  11. 109; 
Vism  321  ;  SnA  132  ;  PvA  93,  97,  iii.     Cp.  sakalya. 

Sakalika  (f.)  [fr.  sakala  =Sk,  sakala  potsherd]  a  potsherd; 
a  splinter,  bit  D  11.341  ;  A  11.199=8  iv.197;  S  1.27  = 
Miln  179;  M  1.259;  A  V.9  (°aggi);  J  iv.430 ;  Miln  134; 
KhA  43  (maccha°) ;  Nett  23;  DhsA  319.  —  -  sakalikag 
sakalikaif  in  little  pieces  Vin  11.112. — sakalika-hira  a 
skewer  J  iv.29,  30. 

Sakasata  (adj.)  [sa'-(-k.]  faulty,  wrong  (lit.  bitter)  Miln  1 19 
(vacana). 

Sakasa  [sa'-n  k.  =Sk.  kasa]  presence  ;  ace.  sakasag  towards, 
to  Sn  326 ;  J  V.480  ;  PvA  237  ;  loc.  sakase  in  the  pres- 
ence of,  before  J  111.24;  iv.281  ;  v. 394;  vi.282. 

Sakicca  (nt.)  [sa*-fkicca]  one's  own  duty  or  business  Vism 
321  Cpasuta). 

Sakiccaya  (nt.)  [sa*-l-kiccaya=krtya]=  sakicca  Miln  42; 
DhsA  196  (°pasuta). 

Sakincana  (adj.)  [sa^-l-kincana]  having  something  ;  (appl*) 
with  attachment,  full  of  worldly  attachment  Sn  620  = 
Dh  1.246;  Dh  396  (=rag'adihi  kiucanehi  sakiQcana 
DhA  IV.158). 

Sakid  &  Sakii)  (adv.)  [fr.  sa°=sag]  once,  (i)  sakii]: 
D  n.i88;  J  1.397:  DhA  in. 116  (sakigvijata  itthi  = 
primipara) ;  once  more:  Miln  238;  once  for  all:  Th  2, 
466  ;  DhA  11.44  :  Th  2,  283.  —  (2)  sakid  (in  composition  ; 
see  also  sakad-agamin) :  in  sakid  eva  once  only  A  11.238  ; 
IV. 380  ;  Pug  16;  PvA  243  ;  at  once  Vin  1.3 1. 

Sakiya  (adj.)  [fr.  saka,  cp.  Sk.  svakiya]  own  J  11.177; 
III. 48,  49  ;  IV. 1 77. 

SakoQa  [Vedic  sakuna]  a  bird  (esp.  with  ref.  to  augury) 
D  1. 71  (pakkhin-)-) ;  Vin  111.147;  S  1.197;  A  11.209; 
III. 241  sq.,  368;  J  ii.iii,  162  (Kandagala) ;  KhA  241. 
pantha°  see  under  pantha. — f.  sakuni  S  1.44.  adj. 
sakuna  J  v. 503  (magsa). 

-kulavaka  a  bird's  nest  KhA  56.     -patha  bird -course, 
Npl.  Nd'  155.     -pada  bird  foot  KhA  47.     -ruta  the  cry 


of  birds  Miln  178.  -vatta  the  habit  (i.  e.  life)  of  a  bird 
J  v.254.  -vijja  bird  craft,  augury  (i.  e.  understanding 
the  cries  of  birds)  D  1.9  ;  DA  1.93. 

Sakimaka  =  sakuna  SnA  27. — f.  sakunika  D  1.9 1  ;  Miln 
202  ;  J  I.I  71  ;  IV. 290. 

Sakunagghi  (f)  [sakuna -t-°ghi,  f.  of  °gha]  a  kind  of  hawk 
(lit'.  "  bird-kiUer ")  S  v.146;  J  11.59;  Miln  365.  Cp. 
vyagghinasa. 

Saku^ita  at  PvA  123  read  sankucita. 

Sakunta  [cp.  Sk.  sakunta]  a  bird  ;  a  kind  of  vulture  Sn  241  ; 
Dh  92,  174;  J  iv.225;  VI. 272. 

Sakuntaka  =  sakunta  Vin  1.137. 

Sakvunara  (adj.)  [sa^'-t-kumara]  of  the  same  age;  a  play- 
mate J  V.360,  366. 

Sakula  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  §akula]  a  kind  of  fish  J  v.405. 

Sakka  (adj.)  [fr.  sak,  cp.  Sk.  sakya]  able,  possible  Sn  143. 
sasakkag  ( =sa'-l-  s.)  as  much  as  possible,  as  much  as  one 
is  able  to  M  1.415,  514. 

Sakkacca(g)  (adv.)  [orig.  ger.  of  sakkaroti]  respectfuUy, 
carefully,  duly,  thoroughly ;  often  with  uppatthahati  to 
attend,  serve  with  due  honour.  —  Vv  12';  Miln  305; 
J  IV. 310.  The  form  sakkaccag  is  the  older  and  more 
usual,  e.  g.  at  D  11.356  sq. ;  S  iv.314;  A  11.147;  iv.392  ; 
Vin  IV.  1 90,  275  ;  Th  i,  1054  ;  J  1.480  ;  Dh  392  ;  PvA  26. 
121.  The  BSk.  form  is  satkrtya,  e.  g.  MVastu  i.io. 
-karin  zealous  S  111.267  ;  Miln  94.     -dana  M  111.24. 

Sakkata  [pp.  of  sakkaroti]  honoured,  duly  attended 
D  1. 114,  116;  II. 167;  Nd  73;  J  1.334;  Miln  21  ;  SnA  43. 
Usually  comb*"  with  garukata,  pujita,  manita. 

Sakkati  [9va?k;  Dhtp  9  :  gamana]  to  go  ;  see  osakkati  &  cp. 
Pischel,  Prk.  Gr.  §  302.  Other  P.  cpds.  are  ussakkati  & 
patisakkati. 

Sakkatta  (nt.)  [fr.  Sakka  =  Indra]  ^akraship,  the  position 
as  the  ruler  of  the  devas  M  in.  65  ;  J  1.315  ;  Vism  301 
(brahmatta-l-).  °rajja  a  kingdom  rivalling  Sakka's 
J  I  315- 

Sakkaroti  [sat-f  kr]  to  honour,  esteem,  treat  with  respect, 
receive  hospitably ;  often  comb'"  with  garukaroti, 
maneti,  pujeti,  e.  g.  D  1.91,  117;  111.84;  M  1.126.  ppr. 
"karonto  D  n.159  ;  Pot.  "kareyya  It  no  ;  aor.  °kari  PvA 
54;  ger.  "katsra  Pug  35  ;  ]  vi.14,  &  "kacca  (q.  v.).  —  pp. 
sakkata. —Caus.  sakkareti=sakkaroti ;  Mhvs  32,  44; 
grd.  sakkareyya  Th  i.  186  (so  read  for  °kareyya). 

Sakka  (indecl.)  [originally  Pot.  of  sakkoti  =  Vedic  Sakyat ; 
cp.  Prk.  sakka  with  Pischel's  expl"  in  Prk.  Gr.  §  465.  A 
corresponding  formation,  similar  in  meaning,  is  labbha 
(q.  V.)]  possible  (lit.  one  might  be  able  to) ;  in  the  older 
language  still  used  as  a  Pot.,  but  later  reduced  to  an 
adv.  with  infin.  E.  g.  sakka  sdmaahhphalar)  panhd- 
petur)  would  one  be  able  to  point  out  a  result  of  sama- 
ijaship,  D  1.51  ;  khddituy  na  sakkd,  one  could  not  eat, 
J  11.16;  na  sakkd  maggo  akhhdtutj.  the  way  cannot  be 
shown,  Mil  269 ;  sakkd  etay  mayd  hdtur/  ?  can  I  ascer- 
tain this?  D  1. 187;  sakkd  honti  imdni  attha  sukhdni 
vindituy.  these  eight  advantages  are  able  to  be  enjoyed, 
J  1.8  ;  sakkd  etay  abhavissa  kdtuy,  this  would  be  possible 
to  do,  D  1.168;  imay  sakkd  ganhituy,  this  one  we  can 
take  J  1V.219.  See  also  SnA  338,  376  ( =labbha) ; 
PvA  12,  69,  96. 

Sakkaya  [sat-(-kaya,  cp.  BSk.  satkaya  Divy  46;  AvS 
1.85.  See  on  expl"  of  term  Mrs.  Rli.  D.  in  J.R.A.S. 
1894,  324;  Franke  Dlgha  Irsl'  p.  45;  Geiger  P.Gr. 
§  24' ;  Kern.  Toev.  11.52]  the  body  in  being,  the  existing 
body  or  group  (=-nikaya  q.  v.);  as  a  t.t.  in  P.  psy- 
chology almost  equal  to  individuality  ;  identified  with  the 


Sakkara 


120 


Sagula 


five  khandhas  M  1.299  ;  S  rn.159  ;  iv.259  ;  A  11.34 ;  Th  2, 
170,  239;  DhsA  348.  See  also  D  111.216  (cp.  Dial. 
III. 2 16')  ;  A  III. 293,  401  ;  Nd^  109. 

-ditthi  theory  of  soul,  heresy  of  individuality,  specu- 
lation as  to  the  eternity  or  otherwise  of  one's  own 
individuality  M  1.300  =111. i7=DhS  1003,  S  ni.16  sq. 
In  these  passages  this  is  explained  as  the  belief  that  in 
one  or  other  of  the  khandhas  there  is  a  permanent  entity, 
an  atta.  The  same  explanation,  at  greater  length,  in 
the  Ditthigata  Sutta  (Ps  1.143-151).  As  delusions 
about  the  soul  or  ghost  can  arise  out  of  four  sorts  of  bias 
(see  abhinivesa)  concerning  each  of  the  five  khandhas, 
we  have  twenty  kinds  of  s°  ditthi  :  fifteen  of  these  are 
kinds  of  sakkaya-vatthuka  sassata-ditthi,  and  five  are 
kinds  of  s°-vatthuka  uccheda-ditthi  (ibid.  149,  150). 
Gods  as  well  as  men  are  s°  pariyapanna  S  111.85  ;  and  so 
is  the  eye,  DhsA  308.  When  the  word  ditthi  is  not 
expressed  it  is  often  implied,  Th  2,  199,  339;  Sn  231. 
S°  difthi  is  the  first  Bond  to  be  broken  on  entering  the 
Path  (see  sagyojana) ;  it  is  identical  with  the  fourth 
kind  of  Grasping  (see  upadana) ;  it  is  opposed  to 
Nibbana,  S  iv.175  ;  is  extinguished  by  the  Path,  M  1.299  ; 
S  III. 159;  1V.260 ;  and  is  to  be  put  away  by  insight 
DhsA  346. — -See  further:  D  111.234;  A  111.438 ;  iv.144 
sq. ;  Kvu  81  ;  Sn  950  ;  Dhs  1003  ;  and  on  term  Dhs. 
irsl"  §  1003  ;  K.S.  III. 86,  n.  3.  -nirodha  the  destruction 
of  the  existing  body  or  of  individuality  A  11. 165  sq.  ; 
111.246;  D  III. 2 16.  -samudaya  the  rise  of  individuality 
D  HI. 216;  Nd'  109. 

Sakkara  [fr.  sat  +  kf]  hospitality,  honour,  worship  Vin 
1.27,  183;  A  11.203;  J  1.63;  11.9,  104;  Dh  75;  Miln  386; 
Dhs  1 1 2 1  ;  Vism  2  70  ;  SnA  284;  VbhA  466.  °g  karoti  to 
pay  reverence,  to  say  goodbye  DhA  1.398.     Cp.  labl}a. 

Sakkareti  is  Caus.  of  sakkaroti  (q.  v.). 

SakkuQeyyatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  sakkuneyya,  grd.  of  sak- 
koti]  possibility ;  a°  impossibility  PvA  48. 

Sakkoti  [sak;  def.  Dhtp  508  etc.  as  "  sattiyag  "  :  see  satti] 
to  be  able.  Pres.  sakkoti  D  1.246;  Vin  1.31  ;  Miln  4; 
DhA  1.200;  sakkati  [=Class.  Sk.  §akyate]  Nett  23. 
Pot.  sakkuneyya  J  1.361  ;  PvA  106;  archaic  V  pi. 
sakkunemu  J  v. 24;  Pv  11. 8'.  ppr.  sakkonto  Miln  27. 
—  Fut.  sakkhati  Sn  319;  sakkhiti  [  =  Sk.  saksyati] 
M  1.393:  pl-  3"*  sakkhinti  Sn  28;  2'^^'^  sg.  sagghasi  Sn 
834;  3"'  sg.  sakkhissati  DhA  iv.87.  —  Aor.  asakkhi 
D  1.96,  236;  PvA  38;  sakkhi  Miln  5;  J  v.ii6;  i"  pi. 
asakkhimha  PvA  262,  &  asakkhimha  Vin  iii.23  ;  3"'  sg. 
also  sakkuni  Mhvs  7,  13. — grd.  sakkuneyya  (neg.  a°) 
(im)possible  J  1.55  ;  PvA  122.  —  sakka  &  sakka  see  sep. 

Sakkhara  (f.)  [cp.  Vedic  sarkara  gravel]  i.  gravel,  grit 
Vin  111.147=]  11.284;  J  M92;  A  1.253;  D  1,84;  Pv 
111.2*8;  DhA.  IV. 87.  —  2.  potsherd  VvA  157;  PvA  282, 
285.  —  3.  grain,  granule,  crystal,  in  lona°  a  salt  crystal 
S  11.276;  DhA  1.370;  SnA  222.-4.  (granulated)  sugar 
J  1-50- 

Sakkharika  (f.)  [fr.  sakkhara]  in  lona°  a  piece  of  salt 
crystal  Vin  1.206;  11.237. 

Sakkhacilla  (adj.)  [=  sakkharika,  fr.  sakkhara]  containing 
gravel,  pebbly,  stony  A  lv.237. 

Sakkhali  (&  °ika)  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  §askuH]  1.  the  orifice  of  the 
ear :  see  kanna".  —  2.  a  sort  of  cake  or  sweetmeat  (cp. 
sangulika)  A  111.76  (T.  sakkhalaka ;  v.  1.  "lika  &  sanku- 
lika) ;  Vin  111.59  ;  J  11. 281. 

Sakkhi'  [sa^  +  akkhin;  cp.  Sk.  saksin]  an  eyewitness  D 
11.237  (nom.  sg.  sakkhi  =  with  his  own  eyes,  as  an  eye- 
witness); Sn  479,  921,  934  (sakkhi  dhammai)  adassi, 
where  the  corresp.  Sk.  form  would  be  sak^ad) ;  J  1.74. 
—  kaya-sakkhi  a  bodily  witness,  i.  e.  one  who  has  bodily 
experienced  the  8  vimokkhas  A  iv.451  ;  Vism  93,  387, 


659.  — ^  sakkhig  karoti  [Sk.  saksl  karoti]  (i)  to  see  with 
one's  own  eyesj'S  11.255;  (2)  to  call  upon  as  a  witness 
(with  gen.  of  person)  J  vi.280  (rajauo) ;  DhA  11.69  (Mog- 
gallanassa  sakkhir)  katva) ;  PvA  217  (but  at  241  as 
"friendship").  Note.  The  P.  form  is  rather  to  be 
taken  as  an  adv.  ("  as  present  ")  than  adj. :  sakkhii)  & 
sakkhi,  with  reduced  sakkhi"  (cp.  sakid  &  sakirj).  See 
also  sacchi". 

-dittha  seen  face  to  face  M  1.369;  D  1.238;  J  vi.233. 
-puttha  asked  as  a  witness  Sn  84,  122  ;  Pug  29.  -bhab- 
bata  the  state  of  becoming  an  eyewitness,  of  experiencing 
M  1.494;  DhsA  141.  -savaka  a  contemporaneous  or 
personal  disciple  D  11. 153. 

Sakkhi  (f)  or  sakkhi'^  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  sakhya]  friendship  (with 
somebody  =  instr.)  S  i.i23=A  v. 46  (janena  karoti 
sakkhig  make  friends  with  people);  Pv  iv.i";  iv.i"; 
J  III. 493  ;  IV. 478.     Cp.  sakhya. 

Sakya:  see  Dictionary  of  Names.  In  cpd.  "puttiya  (be- 
longing to  the  Sakya  son)  in  general  meaning  of  "  a 
(true)  follower  of  the  Buddha,"  A  iv.202  ;  Vin  1.44  ; 
Ud  44 ;  a°  not  a  follower  of  the  B.  Vin  111.25. 

Sakhi  [Vedic  sakhi  m.  &  f.]  a  companion,  friend ;  nom. 
sakha  J  11.29 ;  348 ;  ace.  sakharag  J  11.348 ;  v. 509 ;  & 
sakhag  J  11.299;  instr.  sakhina  J  iv.41  ;  abl.  sakha- 
rasma  J  111.534;  gen.  sakhino  J  vi.478 ;  voc.  sakha 
J  III. 295  ;  nom.  pi.  sakha  J  111.323  ;  &  sakharo  J  111.492  ; 
gen.  sakhinag  J  in. 492  ;  iv.42  ;  &  sakhanag  J  11.228. 
In  comp"  with  bhu  as  sakhi°  &  sakhi",  e.  g.  sakhibhava 
friendship  J  vi.424;  PvA  241  ;  &  sakhibhava  J  111.493. 

Sakhika  (f.)  [fr.  sakhi]  a  female  friend  J  111.533. 

Sakhita  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  sakhi]  friendship  Th  1,  1018,  1019. 

Sakhila  (adj . )  [f  r.  sakhi]  kindly  in  speech,  congenial  D  1. 1 1 6  ; 
Vin  II. 11;  J  1.202,  376;  Miln  207;  Pv  iv.i'^  (=mudu 
PvA  230).     Cp.  sakhalya. 

-vacata  use  of  friendly  speech  Dhs  1343. 

Sakhi  (f)  [to  sakhi]  a  female  friend  J  11.  27,  348. 

SakhlUa  (adj.)  [sa^-fkhura]  with  the  hoofs  J  1.9 ;  Bdhgh 
on  M.  1.78  (see  M  1.536). 

Sakhya  (nt.)  [Sk.  sakhya;  cp.  sakkhi]  friendship  J  11.409; 
VI. 353  sq- 

Sagandhaka  (adj.)  [sa'-l-gandha-l-ka]  fragment  Dh  52. 

Sagabbha  (adj.)  [sa'-l-gabbha]  with  a  foetus,  pregnant 
Mhvs  33,  46. 

Sasaha  (adj.)  [sa' -h gaha^]  full  of  crocodiles  It  57,  114. 
As  sagaha  at  S  iv.157. 

Sagameyya  (adj.)  [grd.  formation  fr.  gama, -f-sa*=sai)°) 
hailing  from  the  same  village  S  1.36,  60. 

Sagarava  (adj.)  [sa'-l-garava]  respectful,  usually  comb'* 
with  sappatissa  &  other  syn.,  e.  g.  Vin  1.45 ;  It  10 ; 
Vism  19,  221. 

Sagaravata  (f)  [fr.  sagarava]  respect  Th  i,  589. 

Saguva  (adj.)  [either  sa'-Hguna'  1,  as  given  under  guna' ; 
or  sa°=sag°  once,  as  in  sakrt, -H guna'  2]  either  "with 
the  string,"  or  "  in  one  "  ;  Vin  1.46  (saguijag  karoti  to 
put  together,  to  fold  up ;  C  ekato  katva).  This  inter- 
pretation (as  "  put  together")  is  much  to  be  preferred 
to  the  one  given  under  guna'  i  ;  sagunag  katva  belongs 
to  sanghafiyo,  and  not  to  kayabandhanag,  thus :  "  the 
upper  robes  are  to  be  given  putting  them  into  one 
(bundle)." 

Sagula  [sa^-l-gula^]  acakewith  sugar  J  vi.524.  Cp.  sangu- 
lika. 


Sagocara 


121  Sankinna 


Sagocara  [sa^  =sar),  +  gocara]  companion,  mate  (lit.  having 
the  same  activity)  J  11.31. 

Sagotta  [sa2=sar),  + gotta]  a  kinsman  J  v. 411  ;  cp.  vi.500. 

Sagga  [Vedic  svarga,  svar+ga]  i.  heaven,  the  next  world, 
popularly  conceived  as  a  place  of  happiness  and  long  life 
(cp.  the  pop.  etym,  of  "  sutthu-aggatta  sagga  "  PvA  9  ; 
"  rupadihi  visayehi  sutthu  aggo  ti  saggo  "  Vism  427); 
usually  the  kam'dvacara-devaloka,  sometimes  also  the 
26  heavens  (ThA  74).  Sometimes  as  sagga  thana  (cp. 
°loka),  e.  g.  J  VI. 2  10.  — Vin  1.223  ;  U  11.86  ;  in. 52,  146  sq. ; 
M  1.22,  483  ;  S  1.12  ;  A  1.55  sq.,  292  sq.  ;  11.83  sq.  ;  111.244, 
253  sq.  ;  TV. 8 1  ;  v.[35sq.  ;Sn224  (loc.  pi.  saggesu) ;  It  14  ; 
Pv  i.i'  ;  Vism  103,  199. 

-dpaya  heaven  and  hell  Th  2,  63;  Sn  647.  -arohana 
(-sopana)  (the  stairs)  leading  to  heaven  (something  like 
Jacob's  ladder)  Visjn  10.  -katha  discourse  or  talk  about 
heaven  Vin  1.15  (cp.  anupubbikatha)  -kaya  the  heavenly 
assembly  (of  the  gods)  J  vi.573.  -dvara  heaven's  gate 
Vism  57.  -patha  =  sagga  J  1.256.  -pada  heavenly 
region,  heaven  J  11. 5  ;  iv.272  (=saggaloka).  -maggathe 
way  to  heaven  J  vi.287  ;  DhA  1.4.  -loka  the  heaven- 
world  M  1.73  ;  J  IV.272.  -sat)vattanika  leading  to  heaven 
D  111.66. 

Saggn^a  [sat  +  guna]  good  quality,  virtue  Sdhp  313. 

Saggh°  see  sakkoti. 

Saghacca  (f)  [sat  +  ghacca]  just  or  true  killing  J  1.177. 

Sankaccha  (f.)  [sag  +  kaccha']  part  of  a  woman's  dress, 
bodice,  girdle  (?)  J  v. 96  (suvanna"). 

Sankacchika  (nt.)  [fr.  sankaccha]  a  part  of  clothing,  belt, 
waist -cloth  Vin  11. 272  ;  iv.345.  The  C.  expl"  is  in- 
correct. 

Sankatira  (nt.)  [unexplained]  a  dust  heap  D  11. 160; 
S  11.270  ;  M  1.334.  Expl''  as  "  sankara-tthana  "  K.S. 
11.203. 

Sanka44bati  [sag -1-  ka4dhati]  i.  to  collect  M  1.135  ;  J  1.254  ; 
IV. 224 ;  Dh  1.49;  Pass.  °khaddiyati  Vism  251  (ppr. 
°iyamana  being  collected,  comprising).  —  2.  to  examine, 
scrutinize  J  vi.351  (cintetva  "kaddhitug). 

Sankati  [iank,  Vedic  sankate,  cp.  Lat,  cunctor  to  hesitate  ; 
Goth,  hahan  =Ags.  hangon  "  to  hang  "  ;  Oicel.  haetta 
danger]  to  doubt,  hesitate,  to  be  uncertain  about ; 
pres.  (med.)  i*'  sg.  sanke  S  i.iii  ;  J  111.253  (=asankami 
C);  VI. 312  (na  sanke  maran'agamaya) ;  Pot.  sanketha 
J  11.53  =v. 85.  Pass,  sankiyati  S  111.71  =Kvu  141; 
A  IV. 246. 

Sankathati  [sag -1- kathati]  to  name,  explain.  Pass,  sanka- 
thiyati  DhsA  390. 

Sankanta  [pp.  of  sankamati]  gone  together  with  (-"),  gone 
over  to,  joined  Vin  1.60  ;  iv.217. 

Sankantati  [sag -H  kantati]  to  cut  all  round,  M  111.275. 

Sankaati  (f)  [fr.  sankamati]  transition,  passage  Kvu  569  ; 
Vism  374  sq. 

Sankantika  [fr-  sankanta]  a  school  of  thought  (lit.  gone  over 
to  a  faction),  a  subdivision  of  the  Sabbatthivadins 
S  V.14  ;  Vism  374  sq. ;  Mhvs  5,  6;  Dpvs  5,  48;  Mhbv  97. 

Sankappa  [sag-l-kjp,  cp.  kappeti  fig.  meaning]  thought, 
intention,  purpose,  plan  D  in. 2 15  ;  S  11. 143  sq. ;  A  1.281  ; 
11.36;  Dh  74;  Sn  154,  1 144;  Nd'  616  (=vitakka  iiana 
paima  buddhi) ;  Dhs  21  ;  DhA  11.78.  As  equivalent  of 
vitakka  also  at  D  111.215;  A  iv.385 ;  Dhs  7.  — kama° 
a  lustful  thought  A  111.259;  v. 31.  paripunna°  having 
one's  intentions  fulfilled  M  1.192;  111.276;  I)  111.42 ; 
A  v.92,  97  sq.  ;  sara°  memories  &  hopes  M  1.453  ;  S  iv.76  ; 
vyapada",  vihigsa",  malicious,  cruel  purposes,  M  11.27 
sq.  ;  samma"  right  thoughts  or  intentions,  one  of  the 
angasof  the  8-fold  Path  (ariya-magga)  Vin  1.10  ;  D  11.312  ; 


'a  III. 140;  VbhA  117.  Sankappa  is  def"*  at  DhsA  124 
as  (cetaso)  abhiniropana,  i.  e.  application  of  the  mind. 
See  on  term  also  Cpd.  238. 

Sankappeti  [Den.  fr.  sankappa]  i.  to  imagine;  wish  A 
11.36;  M  1.402;  Pug  19. — -2.  to  determine,  to  think 
about,  strive  after  J  111.449  sq. 

Sankamati  [sag -1- karaati]  I.  to  go  on,  to  pass  over  to 
(ace),  to  join  D  1.55  (akasag  indriyani  s.) ;  Vin  1.54; 
11.138  (bhikkhu  rukkha  rukkhag  s.,  climb  fr.  tree  to 
tree) ;  Kvu  565  sq.  (jhana  jhanag).  —  2 .  to  transmigrate 
Miln  71  sq.  (-|-patisandahati).  —  grd.  sankamaniya  to  be 
passed  on  or  transferred  Vin  1.190  ;  civara"  a  dress  that 
should  be  handed  over,  which  does  not  belong  to  one 
Vin  IV. 282. — pp.  sankanta.  —  Caus.  sankameti  (1)  to 
pass  over,  to  cause  to  go,  to  move,  to  shift  Vin  111.49, 
58,  59.  —  2.  to  come  in  together  (sensations  to  the 
heart)  DhsA  264.  —  Cp.  upa°. 

Sankama  [fr.  sag-t-kram]  a  passage,  bridge  M  1.439; 
Vin  III. 127;  J  III. 373  (attanag  °g  katva  yo  sotthig 
samatarayi) ;  Miln  91,  229. 

Sankamana  (nt.)  [fr.  sankamati]  lit.  "  going  over,"  i  e. 
step;  hence  "bridge,"  passage,  path  S  i.iio;  Vv  52'*; 
yy5.  Pv  11.7*;  ii.Q^^;  J  VI. 120  (papa°).     Cp.  upa°. 

Sankampati  [sag -1- kampati]  to  tremble,  shake  Vin  1.12; 
D  11.12,108  ;  J    1.25.  —  Caus.  sankampeti  id.  D  11.108. 

Sankara^  (fight  confusion)  wrongly  for  sangara  Nett  149, 
in  quot.  fr.  M  111.187. 

Sankara^  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  ^ankara]  blissful  Mhbv  4  (sabba°). 

Sankalana  (nt.)  [fr,  sag  -1-  kal  to  produce]  addition  DA  1.95  ; 
MA  1.2. 

Sankalaha  [sag  +  kalaha]  inciting  words,  quarrel  J  v.393. 

Saukasayati  [fr.  sag-nkf?,  kasati  ?  Or  has  it  anything  to 
do  with  kasaya  ?]  to  become  weak,  to  fail  S  1,202  ; 
11.277  ;  IV. 178  ;  A  1.68. 

Sankassara  (adj.)  [doubtful,  if  Vedic  sankasuka]  doubtful  ; 
wicked  Vin  11.236  (cp.  Vin.  Texts  in. 300);  S  1.49 —Dh 
312  (expl""  as  "  sankahi  saritabba,  asankahi  sarita, 
ussankita,  parisankita "  DhA  in. 485,  thus  taken  as 
sanka-t-sf  by  Bdhgh ;  of  course  not  cogent);  A  11.239; 
IV. 128,  201;  S  1.66  (°acara  =  "  suspecting  all"  trsl°); 
IV. 180  ;  Th  I,  277  :  Pug  27. 

Sanka  (f)  [fr.  §ank:  see  sankati]  doubt,  uncertainty,  fear 
(cp.  visanka)  J  vi.158;  DhA  111.485. 

Sankapeti  [fr.  sag-fklp]  to  prepare,  get  ready,  undertake 
Vin  1. 137  (vass'avasag) ;  S  iv.312. 

Sankayati  [Denom.  fr.  sanka ;  Dhtp  4  defines  sank  as 
"  sankayag  "]  to  be  uncertain  about  Vin  11.274.  Cp. 
pari". 

Sankaia  [fr.  sag-l-kl]  rubbish  Vin  1.48;  iv.265  ;  J  1.315; 
II. 196. 

-kuta  rubbish  heap,  dust  heap  M  11. 7  ;  Pug  33  ;  Miln 
365  ;  DhA  1.174.  Cp.  kacavara  cS:  kattara.  -cola  a  rag 
picked  up  from  a  rubbish  heap  J  iv.380.  -fhana  dust 
heap  fh  i,  1 175  ,  J  1.244  '■  Vism  250  ;  DhA  11.27.  -dhana 
id.  Dh  58.     -yakkha  a  rubbish  heap  demon  J  iv.379. 

Sankasa  [sag-t-kasa,  of  ka^  cp.  okasa]  appearance;  (-°) 
having  the  appearance  of,  like,  similar  J  11. 150;  v. 71, 
155,  370  (pufina°  =  sadisa  C.) ;  Bu  17,  21  ;  Miln  2. 

Sankasana  (nt.)  &  °a  (f.)  [fr.  sag-l-kaS]  explanation,  illus- 
tration S  V.430  ;  Nett  5,  8,  38;  SnA  445  ( -)- pakasana) . 

Sftnlrinnn  [pp.   of  sankirati]   mixed  ;   impure  S   111.71  ;   A 

,1V.240. 

-parikha  having  the  trenches  filled  ;  said  of  one  who 
is  free  of  saysdra  M  1.139  ;  A  111.84  ;  Nd*  p.  i6i. 

VIII— 3 


Sankita 


122 


Sankha 


Sankita  [fr.  sank]  anxious,  doubtful  J  v.85  :  Mhvs  7,  15; 
SnA  60,     Cp.  pari",  vi°. 

Sankittana  (nt  )  [sag  +  kittana]  proclaiming,  making  known 
PvA  164. 

Sankitti  (f .)  [perhaps  sar)  +  kitti]  derivation  &  meaning  very 
doubtful  ;  Bdhgh's  expl"  at  PugA  j 31  is  not  to  be  taken 
as  reliable,  viz.  "  sankittetva  katabhattesu  hoti.  dub- 
bhikkha-samaye  kira  acela-kasavaka  acelakanar)  atthaya 
tato  tato  tarKjul'adini  samadapetva  bhattai)  pacanti, 
\ikkatthacelako  tato  na  patiganhati."  D  1.166  (trsl° 
Dial.  1.229  "  he  will  not  accept  food  collected,  i.  e.  by 
the  faithful  in  time  of  drought  "  ;  Neumann  "  not  from 
the  dirty  "  ;  Franke  "  nichts  von  Mahlzeiten,  fur  die  die 
Mitteldurch  Aufruf  beschafftsind  "  ?) ;  M  1.77  ;  A  11.206  ; 
Pug  55.     It  may  be  something  like  "  convocation." 

Sankin  (adj.)  [fr.  sank]  anxious  Mhvs  35,  101. 

Sankiya  (adj.)  [grd.  fr.  sankati]  i.  apt  to  be  suspected 
It  67.  —  2.  anxious  J  1.334. 

Sankirana  (nt.)  [fr.  sag  +  kirati]  an  astrological  t.t., 
denoting  the  act  of  or  time  for  collecting  or  calling 
in  of  debts  (Bdhgh ;  doubtful)  D  i.ii  ;  DA  1.96;  cp. 
Dial.  1.23. 

Saokirati  [sai)  +  kirati]  to  mix  together ;  Pass,  sankiyati 
(q.  v.);  pp.  sankinna. 

Sankilittha  [pp.  of  sankilissati]  stained,  tarnished,  impure, 
corrupt,  foul  D  1.247;  S  11. 271  ;  Am. 124  ;  v. 169;  Dh244  ; 
J  11.418  ;  Dhs  993,  1243  ;  Pv  iv.i^a  (kayena  vacaya  ca) ; 
DhsA  319. 

Sankilissati  [sag  +  kilissati,  cp.  BSk.  sanklisyati  Divy  57] 
to  become  soiled  or  impure  D  1.53;  S  111.70;  Dh  165; 
J  "-33.  271. — pp.  scnkilittha.  —  Cans,   sankileseti. 

Sankilissana  (nt.)  [fr.  sankilissati]  staining,  defiling  ;  getting 
defiled  VvA  329. 

Sankilesa  [sag  +  kilesa]  impurity,  defilement,  corruption, 
sinfulness  Vin  1.15;  D  i.io,  53,  247  (opp.  visuddhi); 
M  1.402  ;  S  m.69  ;  A  li.i  I  ;  111.418  sq.  ;  v. 34  ;  J  1.302  ; 
Dhs  993,  1229  ;  Nett  100  ;  Vism  6,  51,  89  ;  DhsA  165. 

Sankilesika  (adj.)  [fr.  sankilesa]  baneful,  sinful  D  1.195; 
111.57;  A  n.172;  Dhs  993  (cp.  DhsA  345);  Tikp  333^ 
353- 

Sankiyati  [Pass,  of  sankirati,  sag  +  kir;  Sk.  °kiryate> 
•kiyyati>P.  "kiyati]  to  become  confused  or  impure 
S  in. 71  ;  A  11.29  ;  iv.246. 

SankQati  [sag  +  kijati]  to  play  or  sport  D  1.91  ;  A  iv  55 
343;  DA  1.256. 

Sanku  [cp.  Vedic  ^anku]  a  stake,  spike  ;  javelin  M  1.337  '• 
S  1V.108;  J  VI. 112;  DhA  1.69.  — ayo°  an  iron  stake 
A  IV. 131. 

-patha  a  path  full  of  stakes  &  sticks  Vv  84"  ;  J  in. 485, 
541;  Miln  280;  Vism  305.  -sata  a  hundred  sticks! 
hundreds  of  sticks  J  vi.112  ;  Vism  153  (both  passages 
same  simile  with  the  beating  of  an  ox -hide),  -samahata 
set  with  iron  spikes,  N.  of  a  purgatory  M  1317 
Jvi.453- 

Sankoka  [fr.  sanku]  a  stake  VvA  338.     Cp.  khanuka. 

Sankucati  [sag  +  kucati :  see  kuiicita]  to  become  contracted 
to  shrink  DhsA  376.  —pp.  "kuctta.  —  Cans.  °koceti. 

Sankacita  [pp.  of  sankucati]  shrunk,  contracted,  clenched 
(of  the  first :  "hattha)  J  1.275  ;  vi.468  ("hattha,  opposed 
to  pasarita-hattha) ;  DA  1.287;  PvA  123,  124. 

Sanku(ika  [fr.  sag+'kut^  kuc,  ep.  kutilal  doubled  up 
J  11.68;  cp.  J.l'.T.S.  1884.  102. 


Sankutita  [  =  last]  doubled  up,  shrivelled,  shrunk  ;  J  11.225  '• 
.Miln  251,  362  ;  DhsA  376;  Vism  255  (where  KhA  reads 
bahala);  VbhA  238. 

Sanku^ila  (adj.)  [sag  +  kutila]  curved,  winding  Miln  297. 

Sankup^ita  [pp.  of  sag  +  kuJ?4:  ^"^^  kunda]  contorted,  dis- 
torted PvA  123. 

Sankuddha  [sag  +  kuddha]  angry  D  11.262. 

Sankupita  [sag  +  kupita]  shaken,  enraged  S  1.222. 

Sankuppa  (adj.)  [sag  +  kuppa]  to  be  shaken,  movable;  a" 
immovable  Th  i,  649;  Sn  1149. 

Sankula  (adj.)  [sag+kula]  crowded,  full  Sdhp  603. 

Sankuli  [cp.  sakkhali  2  &  sangulika]  a  kind  of  cake  J  vi.580. 

Sankulya  (nt.)  =  sankuli  J  vi.524. 

Sankusaka  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  sankasuka  crumbling  up]  con 
trary  ;  neg.  a°  J  vi.297  (=appatiloma  C). 

Sankusumita  (adj.)  [sag  +  kusumita]  flowering,  in  blossom 
J  V.420  ;  Miln  319. 

Sanketa  [sag  +  keta:  see  ketu]  intimation,  agreement, 
engagement,  appointed  place,  rendezvous  Vin  1.298; 
Miln  212  ,  Nett  15,  18  ;  cp.  Cpd.  6,  33.  sanketag  gacchati 
to  keep  an  appointment,  to  come  to  the  rendezvous 
Vin  11.265.  asanketena  without  appointing  a  place 
Vin  1. 107.  vassika"  the  appointed  time  for  keeping  the 
rainy  season  Vin  1.298. 

-kamma  agreement  Vin  in. 47.  53,  78. 

Sanketana    (nt.)=sanketa,    °tthana   place   of    rendezvous 

DhA  11.261. 

Sankelayati  [sag  +  kelayati]  to  amuse  oneself  (with)  A 
IV. 55- 

Sankoca  [sag  +  koca,  of  kunc :  see  kuficita]  contraction  (as 
a  sign  of  anger  or  annoyance),  grimace  ^muklia")  PvA 
103  ;  also  as  hattha",  etc.  at  PvA  124. 

Sankocana  (nt.)  =  sankoca  J  111.57  (mukha°) ;  DhA  111.270; 
Dhtp  809. 

Sankoceti  [Cans,  of  sankucati]  to  contract  J  1.228  ;  DhsA 

324- 
Sankopa  see  sankhepa. 

Sankha^  [cp.  Vedic  sankha ;  Gr.  kiijx"!.'  shell,  measure  of 
capacity,    &   l^•(ix^n(,• ;    Lat.   congius  a   measure]   a  shell, 
couch  ;  mother-of-pearl  ;  a  chank,  commonly  used  as  a 
trumpet    D    1.79;     ii.297=M    1.58;    A    11. 117;    iv.igg 
Vv  81"' ;  J  1.72  ;  n.iio  ;  vi.465,  580  ;  Miln  21  (dhanima°) 
DhA  118.   Combined  with  panava  (small  drum)  Vism  408 
J  VI. 2 1  ;  or  with  bheri  (large  drum)  Miln  21  ;  Vism  408. 
-upama  like  a  shell,  i.  e.  white  J   v. 396,  cp.  vi.572. 
-kutthin  a  kind  of  leper  ;  whose  body  becomes  as  white 
as  mother-of-pearl  DhA  1. 194,   195.     -thala  mother  of- 
pearl,  (.shell-)  plate  Vism  126  (sudhota"),  255.     -dhama 
a   trumpeter   D    1.259  =M   11. 19;    M    11.207=8    iv.322. 
-dhamaka   a   conch   blower,   trumpeter   J    1.284;    vi.7. 
-nabhi  a  kind  of  shell  Vin  1.203  ;  11. 1 17.'    -patta  mother- 
of-pearl  DhA  1.387.     -tnundika  the  shell-tonsure,  a  kind 
of  torture  M  1.87;  A   1.47;    11.122.     -mutta  mother-of- 
pearl  J  v. 380  (C   expl^  as  "  shell-jewel  &  pearl-jewel  ") 
VI. 21 1,    230.     -likhita    polished    like    mother-of-pearl 
bright,  perfect  D  1.63,  250  ;  S  11.219  ;  A  v. 204  ;  Vin  1.181 
Pug  57;  DA  1. 181  ;  DhA  iv.195.     See  also  under  likhita, 
&   cp.   Franke,    Wiener  Zeitschnjt    1893,    357.     -vanna 
pearl-white  J    111.477;   ^  1.58  =A  in. 324.     -sadda   the 
sound  of  a  chank  A  11.186;  Vism  408;  Dhs  621.     -sila 
"  shell-stone,"    a    precious    stone,    mother-of-pearl    (?) 
Ud   54;    J    iv.85 ;    Pv   II. 6*.     Frequent    in   BSk..   e.   g. 
AvS  1.184,  201,  205;  Divy   291. 


Sankha 


123 


Sankhara 


Sankha-  [etym.  ?]  a  water  plant  (comb''  with  sevala)  Miln 
35      See  detail  under  pannaka  2. 

Sankhata  [pp.  of  sankharoti ;  Sk.  sagskrta]  i .  put  together, 
compound  ;  conditioned,  produced  by  a  combination  of 
causes.  "  created,"  brought  about  as  effect  of  actions 
in  former  births  S  11.26;  m.56:  \\n  n.284  ;  It  37,  88; 
J  11.38;  Xett  14;  Dhs  1085;  DhsA  47.  As  nt.  that 
which  is  produced  from  a  cause,  i.  e.  the  sankharas 
S  1.112;  A  1.83.  152;  Nett  22.  asankhata  not  put 
together,  not  proceeding  from  a  cause  Dhs  983  (so  read 
for  sankhata),  1086;  Ep.  of  nibbana  "the  Uncondi- 
tioned "  (&  therefore  unproductive  of  further  life) 
A  1.152  ;  S  IV. 359  sq.  ;  Kvu  317  sq.  ;  Pv  111.7"  (=lad- 
dhanama  amatag  PvA  207);  Miln  270;  Dhs  583  (see 
trsl'  ibid.),  1439.  The  discernment  of  higher  jhana- 
states  as  sankhata  is  a  preliminary  to  the  attainment  of 
Arahantship  M  111.244.  Cp.  abhi°  ;  visankhita  ;  visan- 
khara. — -2.  cooked,  dressed  Mhvs  32.  39.  —  3.  em- 
bellished Mhvs  22.  29. 

-lakkhana  properties  of  the  sankhata,  i.  e.  production, 
decay  and  change  A  1.152  ;  \'vA  29. 

Sankhati  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  sarjskrti]  cookery  M  1.448. 

Sankbaya  [sag -1- khaya]  destruction,  consumption,  loss, 
end  Vin  1.42;  D  11.283;  M  1.152  ;  S  1.2,  124;  iv.391  ; 
It  38;  Dh  282  (=vinasa  DhA  m.421),  331  ;  J  11.52; 
V.4O5  ;  Miln  205,  304. 

Sankharoti  [sarj  +  kf ]  to  put  together,  prepare,  work  PvA 
287.  a-sankharana  S  1.126.  Ger.  sankharitva  S  11.269 
(v.  1.  sankhaditva,  as  is  read  at  id.  p.  Vin  11. 201).  Cp. 
abhi°.  —  pp.  sankhata. 

Sankhala  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  srnkhala]  a  chain  Th  2,  509.  atthi° 
a  chain  of  bones,  skeleton  A  111.97.  As  "kankala  at 
Th  2,  488. 

Sankhalika  (f)  [fr.  sankhala]  a  chain  S  1.76;  J  in. 168; 
VI. 3  ;  Nd*  30V";  Miln  149.  279;  DhA  iv.54  ;  PvA  152. 
Sometimes  sankhalika  (esp.  in  composition),  e.  g. 
J  III. 125  (^bandhana) ;  VI.3  ;  Miln  279.  — atthi"  a  chain 
of  bones,  a  skeleton  [cp.  BSk.  asthi-sankhalika  MVastu 
1.2 1]  D  11.296  =M  1.58;  Vin  III.  105;  ]  I  433  ;  P^'  11.12"; 
Dh.\  III  479.     — deva°  a  magic  chain  J  11. 128;  v.92. 

Sankha  (f  )  &  Sankhya  (f.)  [fr.  sar)-(-khyaj  i.  enumeration, 
calculation,  estimating  D  11.277;  ^  1109:  Miln  58. — 
2.  number  Davs  1.25.  —  3.  denomination,  definition, 
word,  name  (cp.  on  term  K.S.  1.32  i)  S  in. 71  sq. ;  iv.376 
sq.  ;  Nd-  617  (  =  uddesa  ganana  pafiiiatti);  Dhs  1306; 
Miln  25  — sankhag  gacchati  to  be  styled,  called  or 
defined  ;  to  be  put  into  words  D  1.199.  201  ;  Vin  11.239; 
M  1. 190,  487;  A  1.68,  244^11.113  ;  Pug  42  ;  Nett  66  sq.  ; 
Vism  212,  225,  235,  294  (khy) ;  SnA  167  (khy) ;  Dhs.\  1 1 
(khy).  sankhag  gata  (cp.  sankhata)  is  called  D.\  1.41 
(uyyaiiar)  Ambalatthika  t'eva  s.  g).  sankhai)  na  upeti 
(nopeti)  cannot  be  called  by  a  name,  does  not  count, 
cannot  be  defined  It  54;  Sn  209,  749,  911,  1074;  Nd' 
327;  Nd=  617. 

Sankhata  [pp  of  sankhayati]  agreed  on,  reckoned  ;  (■") 
so-called,  named  D  1.163  (akusala"  dhamma) ;  in.65, 
i33=Vin  III. 46  (theyya"  what  is  called  theft) ;  DA  1. 313 
(the  sambodhi,  by  which  is  meant  that  of  the  three  higher 
stages);  DhsA  378  (kbandha-ttaya''  kaya,  cp.  Expos. 
11.4S5);  Pv.\  40  (medha°  panna).  56  fhattha°  pani),  131 
(pariccaga"  atidana),  163  (carana"  gui.ia). 

-dhamma  one  who  has  examined  or  recognized  the 
dhamma  ("  they  who  have  mastered  well  the  truth  of 
things"  K.S.  n.36),  an  Ep  oithtarahant  S  11.47  :  iv.210  ; 
Sn  70  ("dhammo,  with  expl"  Nd^  618'':  "  vuccati 
fianar)  "  etc.;  "  sankhata-dh.  =iiata-dhammo."  of  the 
paccekabuddha),  103S  ("dhamma  -vuccanti  arahanto 
khinasava  Nd«  6i8'j.  Dh  70  (T.  sankhata",  but  DhA 
11.63  sankhata"). 


Sankhadati  [sag -1- khadati]  to  masticate  Vin  11.201  = 
S  11.2(19  (reads  "kharitva) ;  A  in. 304  sq. ;  J  1.507.  —  pp. 
"khadita. 

Sankhadita  [pp  of  sankhadati]  chewed,  masticated  KhA 
56.  257  ,  \bh.\  241  (where  Vism  257  reads  "khayita). 

Sankhana'  (nt.)  &  Sankhyana  (nt.)  [fr.  sag  +  khya,  cp. 
sankha]  calculation,  counting  D  i.i  i  ;  M  1.85  ;  DA  1.95  ; 
Dhtp  613  (khy). 

Sankhana^  (nt.)  [?]  a  strong  leash  ThA  292  (where  Th  2, 
509  reads  sankhala). 

Sankhayaka  [ir.  sag-l-khya]  a  calculator  S  iv.376. 

Sankhayati  &  Sankhati  [sar)  +  khyal  i.  to  appear  J  v.203 
(°ati).  — 2.  to  calculate  Sn  p.  126  (inf.  "khatug) ;  Dh 
196.  ger.  sankhaya  having  considered,  discriminately, 
carefully,  with  open  mind  D  n.227;  in. 224  (patisevati 
etc. :  with  ref.  to  the  4  apassenani) ;  S  1.182  ;  Sn  209.  391, 
749,  1048  (=ianitva  etc.  Nd*  619);  Nd>  327;  Dh  267 
(=iianena  DhA  in. 393)  ;  It  .54.  sankha  pi  deliberately 
M  1. 105  sq. 

Sankhayita= sankhadita;  Vism  257. 

Sankhara  [fr.  sag-l-kr,  not  Vedic,  but  as  sagskara  Epic 
ik.  Class.  Sk.  meaning  "  preparation  "  and  "  sacrament," 
also  in  philosophical  literature  "  former  impression,  dis- 
position," cp,  vasana]  one  of  the  most  difficult  terms 
in  Buddhist  metaphysics,  in  which  the  blending  of  the 
subjective-objective  view  of  the  world  and  of  happening, 
peculiar  to  the  East,  is  so  complete,  that  it  is  almost 
impossible  for  Occidental  terminology  to  get  at  the  root 
of  its  meaning  in  a  translation.  We  can  only  convey  an 
idea  of  its  import  by  representing  several  sides  of  its 
application,  without  attempting  to  give  a  "  word  "  as 
a  def.  trsl".  —  An  exhaustive  discussion  of  the  term  is 
given  by  Franke  in  his  D'tgha  translation  (pp.  307  sq., 
esp.  311  sq.) ;  see  also  the  analysis  in  C/)rf.  273-276.  —  Lit. 
"  preparation,  get  up  "  ;  appH  :  coefficient  (of  conscious- 
ness as  well  as  of  physical  life,  cp.  vinnana),  constituent, 
constituent  potentiality;  (pi.)  synergies,  cause-combina- 
tion, as  in  S  in. 87  ;  discussed,  B.  P.s>  ..  p.  50  sq.  (cp.  DhsA 
156,  where  paraphrased  in  def"  of  sa-sankhara  with 
"ussaha,payoga,upaya,paccaya-gahana");  composition, 
aggregate,  i .  Aggregate  of  the  conditions  or  essential 
properties  for  a  given  process  or  result  —  e.  g.  (i.)  the 
sum  of  the  conditions  or  properties  making  up  or  result- 
ing in  life  or  existence  ;  the  essentials  or  "  element  "  of 
anything  (-"),  e.  g.  ayusankhara,  life-element  D  11. 106; 
S  11.266;  PvA  210;  bhavasankhara.  jivitasaiikhara, 
D  11.99,  107.  (ii.)  Essential  conditions,  antecedents  or 
synergy  (co-ordinated  activity),  mental  coefficients, 
requisite  for  act.  speech,  thought :  kaya',  vaci", 
citta",  or  mano",  described  respectively  as  "  respira- 
tion," "  attention  and  consideration,"  "  percepts  and 
feelings,"  "because  Ihese  are  (respectively)  bound  up 
•with,"  or  "  precede  "  those  M  1.301  (cp.  56);  S  iv.293 ; 
Kvu  395  (cp.  trsl"  227) ;  Vism  530  sq.  ;  DhsA  S  ;  VbhA 

1^2  sq. 2.  One  of  the  live  khandhas,  or  constitutional 

elements  of  physical  life  (see  khandha),  comprising  all 
the  citta-sampayutta-cetasika  dhamma  —  i.  e.  the 
mental  concomitants,  or  adjuncts  which  come,  or  tend 
to  come,  into  consciousness  at  the  uprising  of  a  citta, 
or  unit  of  cognition  Dhs  i  (cp.  M  in. 25).  As  thus 
classified,  the  sankhara's  form  the  mental  factor  corre- 
sponding to  the  bodily  aggregate  or  rupakkhandha,  and 
are  in  contrast  to  the  three  khandhas  which  represent 
a  single  mental  function  only.  But  just  as  kaya  stands 
for  both  body  and  action,  so  do  the  concrete  mental 
syntheses  called  sankhara  tend  to  take  on  the  implica- 
tion of  synergies,  of  purposive  intellection,  connoted  by 
the  term  abhisafikhara,  q.  v. — e.  g.  M  111,99,  where 
sartkhara  are  a  purposive,  aspiring  state  of  mind  to 
induce  a  specific  rebirth;  S  11.82,  where  pui^fiar).  opuii- 


Sankhara 


124 


Sanga 


nay.  anei'iiai)  s.  abhisankharoti.  is,  in  D  111.217  &  Vbh 
135.  catalogTied  as  the  three  classes  of  abhisankhara ; 
S  11-39.  360  ;  A  n.157,  where  s.  is  tantamount  to  saiice- 
tana  ;  Miln  61 ,  where  s.,  as  khandha,  is  replaced  by  cetana 
(purposive  conception).  Thus,  too.  the  ss.  in  the  Patic- 
casamuppada  formula  are  considered  as  the  aggregate  of 
mental  conditions  which,  under  the  law  of  kamma,  bring 
about  the  inception  of  the  patisandhivifiiiana.  or  first 
stirring  of  mental  life  in  a  newly  begun  individual.  Lists 
of  the  psychologically,  or  logically  distinguishable  factors 
making  up  the  composite  sankharakkhandha.  with 
constants  and  variants,  are  given  for  each  class  of  citta 
in  Dhs  62,  etc.  (X.B. — Read  cetana  for  vedana.  §  338.) 
Phassa  and  cetana  are  the  two  constant  factors  in  the 
s-kkhandha.  These  lists  may  be  compared  with  the 
later  elaboration  of  the  sankhara-elements  given  at 
Vism  462  sq.  —  3.  sankhara  (pi.)  in  popular  meaning. 
In  the  famous  formula  (and  in  many  other  connections, 
as  e.  g.  sabbe  sankhara)  "  anicca  vata  sankhara  uppada- 
vaya-dhammino  "  (D  11. 157;  S  1.6,  158,  200;  11. 193; 
Th  I.  1 159  ;  J  1.392.  cp.  \'ism  527),  which  is  rendered  by 
Mrs.  Rh.  D.  [Brethren,  p  385  e.  g.)  as  "  O,  transient  are 
our  lije's  experiences  !  Their  nature  'tis  to  rise  and 
pass  away,"  we  have  the  use  of  s.  in  quite  a  general  & 
popular  sense  of  "  life,  phj-sical  or  material  life  "  ;  and 
sabbe  sankhara  means  "  everj-thing,  all  physical  and 
visible  life,  all  creation."  Taken  with  caution  the  term 
"  creation "  may  be  applied  as  t.t.  in  the  Paticca- 
samuppada.  when  we  regard  avijja  as  creating,  i.  e. 
producing  by  spontaneous  causality  the  sankharas,  and 
sankhara  as  "  natura  genita  atque  genitura  "  (the  latter 
with  ref.  to  the  foil,  vinnana).  If  we  render  it  by 
"  formations  "  (cp.  Oldenberg's  "  Gestaltungen,"  Buddha 
^■1920,  p.  254).  we  imply  the  mental  "constitutional-" 
element  as  well  as  the  physical,  although  the  latter  in 
customary  materialistic  popular  philosophy  is  the  pre- 
dominant factor  (cp.  the  discrepancies  of  "  life  eternal " 
and  "  life  is  extinct  "  in  one  &  the  same  European  term). 
None  of  the  "  links  "  in  the  Paticca-samuppada  meant 
to  the  people  that  which  it  meant  or  was  supposed  to 
mean  in  the  subtle  and  schematic  philosophy  (dhamma 
duddasa  nipuna  !)  of  the  dogmatists.  —  Thus  sankhara 
are  in  the  widest  sense  the  "  world  of  phenomena  "  (cp. 
below  °loka)  all  things  which  have  been  made  up  by 
pre-existing  causes.  —  At  PvA  71  we  find  sankhara  in 
lit.  meaning  as  "  things  "  (preparations)  in  def"  of  ye 
keci  (bhoga)  "whatever."  The  sabbe  s.  at  S  11. 178 
(trsl"  "  all  the  things  of  this  world  ")  denote  all  5  aggre- 
gates exhausting  all  conditioned  things  ;  cp.  Kvu  226 
(trsl"  "  things  ") ;  Mhvs  iv.66  ( :  the  material  and  transi- 
tory world);  Dh  154  (vi-sankhara,gatar)  cittai)^mind 
divested  of  all  material  things) ;  DhsA  304  (trsl"  "  kamma 
activitie.s,"  in  connection  avijja-paccaya-s") ;  Cpd.  211, 
n.  3-  ^The  def"  of  sankhara  at  Vism  526  (as  result  of 
avijja  &  cause  of  vifinana  in  the  P.-S.)  is:  sankhatar) 
abhisankharonti  ti  sankhara.  Api  ca :  avijja-paccaya 
sankhara  sankhara-saddena  agata-sankhara  ti  duvidha 
sankhara  ;  etc.  with  further  def.  of  the  4  sankharas.  — • 
4.  Var.  passages  for  sankhara  in  general:  D  11.  213; 
111.221  sq.,M  11.223  (imassadukkha-nidanassasankharai) 
padahato  sankhara-ppadhana  virago  hoti) ;  S  111.69 
(ekanta-dukkha  sankhara);  iv.216  sq.  (sankharanar) 
khaya-dhammata ;  id.  with  vaya°,  viraga",  nirodha" 
etc.);  Sn  731  (yar)  kiilci  dukkhar)  sambhoti  sabbai] 
sankhara-paccaya ;  sankharanar)  nirodhena  n'atthi 
dukkhassa  sambhavo) ;  Vism  453.  462  sq.  (the  51), 
329  sq.;  Dh.A  111.264,  379;  VbhA  134  (4  fold),  149 
(3  fold),  192  (ayflhana):  PvA  41  (bhijjana-dhamma). — 
Of  passages  dealing  with  the  sankharas  as  anicca, 
vayadhamma,  anatta,  dukkha  etc.  the  foil,  may  be 
mentioned:  Vin  1.13;  S  1.200;  111.24;  iv.2:6,  259; 
v-56,  345;  M  nr.64,  108;  A  1.286;  II. 150  sq. ;  111.83, 
143;  IV.13,  100;  It  38;  Dh  277,  3S3;  Ps  1.37,  132; 
11.48;  109  sq.;  Nd2  444,  430  ;  .also  Nd^  p.  259  (s.  v. 
sankhara). 


-upekkha  equanimity  among  "things"  Vism  161, 
162.  -upasama  allay ment  of  the  constituents  of  life 
Dh  368.  381  ;  cp.  DhA  iv.108.  -khandha  the  aggregate 
of  (mental)  coefficients  D  m  233  ;  Kvu  578  ;  Tikp  61  ; 
DhsA  345  ;  VbhA  20.  42.  -dukkha  the  evil  of  material 
life,  constitutional  or  inherent  ill  VbhA  93  (in  the  classi- 
fication of  the  sevenfold  siikkha).  -paccaya  (viiiiianar)) 
conditioned  by  the  synergies  (is  vital  consciousness), the 
second  linkage  in  the  Paticca-samuppada  (q.  v.)  Vism 
577;  VbhA  152  sq.  -padhana  concentration  on  the 
sankharas  M  11.223.  -majjhattata  =  "upekkha  \TDhA 
283.  -loka  the  material  world,  the  world  of  formation 
(or  phenomena),  creation,  loka  "  per  se,"  as  contrasted 
to  satta-loka,  the  world  of  (morally  responsible) 
beings,  loka  "per  hominem  "  Vism  205;  VbhA  456; 
SnA  442. 

Sankharavant  (adj.)  [fr.  sankhara]  having  sankharas  A 
n.2i4=Dhs  1003. 

Sankhitta  [pp.  of  sankhipati]  i.  concise,  brief  Miln  227; 
DhsA  344  ;  instr.  sankhittena  in  short,  concisely  (opp. 
vittharena)  Vin  i.io;  D  11.305;  S  v. 421;  Pug  41. 
Cp.  BSk.  sanksiptena  Divy  37  etc.- — 2.  concentrated, 
attentive  D  1.80  (which  at  Vism  410  however  is  expH 
as  "  thina-middh'  Snugata  ") ;  S  n.122  ;  v.263  ;  D  11.299  = 
M  1.39.  —  3.  contracted,  thin,  slender  :  °majjha  of  slender 
waist  J  v.r55.  — Cp.  abhi". 

Sankhipati  [sag -1- khipati]  i.  to  collect,  heap  together 
Mhvs   I.   31. — 2.  to  withdraw,   put  off  Davs  rv.35. — 

3.  to  concentrate   J   1.82.  —  4.  to  abridge,  shorten. — 
pp.  sankhitta. 

Sankhippa  (adj.)  [sag -t- khippa]  quick  J  vi.323. 

Sankhiya-dhamma  form  of  talk,  the  trend  of  talk  D  1.2  ; 
DA  I  43.     Cp.  sankhya. 

Sankhubhati  [sag  -1-  khubbati]  to  be  shaken,  to  be  agitated. 
to  stir  J  1.446  (ger.  °khubhitva) ;  DhA  n.43,  57  ;  aor. 
"khubhi  PvA  93. — pp.  sankhubhita. — Caus.  sankho- 
bheti  to  shake,  stir  up,  agitate  J  1.119,  350  ;  11. 119. 

Sankhubhita  [pp.  of  sankhubhati]  shaken,  stirred  J  111.443. 

Sankhepa  [sag  +  khepa]  i .  abridgment,  abstract,  condensed 
account  (opp.  vitthara),  e.  g.  Vism  532,  479;  Dh  1.125; 
KhA  183;  DhsA  344;  SnA  150,  160,  314;  VbhA  47. 
Cp.  ati".  —  2.  the  sum  of,  quintessence  of;  instr.  °ena 
(adv.)  by  way  of,  as  if,  e.  g.  raja"  as  if  he  were  king 
DA  1.246  ;  bhiimi-ghara"  in  the  shape  of  an  earth  house 
DA  1.260.  —  3.  group,  heaping  up.  amassing,  collection  : 
pabbata-sankhepe  in  a  mountain  glen  (lit.  in  the  midst 
of  a  group  of  mountains)  D  1.84;  A  111.396.  bhava° 
amassing  of  existences  J  1.165  sq.,  366,  463;  11.137. — 

4.  atavi"  at  A  1.178  ;  111.66  is  probably  a  wrong  reading 
for  °sankopa  "  inroad  of  savage  tribes." 

Sankheyya*  (adj.)  [grd.  of  sankliayati]  calculable;  only 
neg.  a°  incalculable  S  v.400 ;  A  ill. 366;  PvA  212. 
-"kara  acting  with  a  set  purpose  Sn  351.  —  As  grd.  of 
sankharoti:  see  upa". 

Sankheyya^  (nt.)  a  hermitage,  the  residence  of  Thera 
Ayupala  Miln  19,  22  etc. 

Sankhobha  [san -l- khobha]  shaking,  commotion,  upsetting, 
disturbance  J  1.64  ;  Sdhp  471. 

Sankhobheti  see  sankhubhati. 

Sanga  [fr.  sanj:  see  sajjati']  cleaving,  clinging,  attach- 
ment, bond  S  1.23,  117  sq.;  A  ni.311  ;  iv.289  ;  Dh  170, 
342,  etc.;  Sn  61,  212,  386,  390,  475.  etc.;  Dhs  1039; 
DhsA  363;  J  III. 201  ;  the  five  sangas  are  raga,  dosa, 
moha,  mana,  and  dilthi,  Thag.  633=Dhp.  370;  DhA 
IV. 187 ;  seven  sangas.  It.  94  ;  Nd'  91,  432  ;  Nd*  620. 


Sangacchati 


125 


Sangiti 


-Atiga  one  who  has  overcome  attachment,  free  from 
attachment,  an  Arahant  M  1.386;  S  1.3,  23;  iv.158 - 
It  58 ;  Sn  250,  473,  621  ;  DhA  iv.159. 

Sangacchati  [sag  +  gacchati]  to  come  together,  to  meet 
with;  ger.  "gamma  It  123;  &  "gantva  Sn  290. — pp. 
sangata. 

Sangana  (adj.)  [sa  + angaria)  sinful  Sn  279.    Cp.  sangana. 

SangaQika  (f.)  [sar)  +  gana  +  ika,cp.  BSk.  sanganikaM^^astu 
"■35.')  ;  Divy  464]  communication,  association,  society 
Vin  1.45;  A  111256;  J  1.106. 

-arama  delighting  in  society  D  n.78 ;  M  in. no; 
VbhA  474.  -aramata  delight  in  company  D  n.78;  M 
III. 1 10  ;  A  III. 1 16.  293  sq.,  310,  422.  -rata  fond  of 
society  D  11.78;  Sn  54;  cp.  sanganike  rata  Th  i,  84. 
-vihara  (sanganika°)  living  in  society  .\  111.104  ;  iv.342. 

Sanganha  (adj.)  [fr.  satj  +  grah]  showing  kindness,  helping 
VvA  59  t°sila). 

Sanganhati  [sarj  +  ganhati]  i.  to  comprise  PvA  80,  117; 
SnA  200  (ger.  °gahetva),  347  ("ganhitva).  —  2.  to  collect 
Mhvs  10,  24.  —  3.  to  contain,  include  Miln  40.  —  4.  to 
compile,  abridge  Mhvs  37,  244.  —  5.  to  take  up;  to 
treat  kindly,  sympathize  with,  favour,  help,  protect 
Vin  1.50;  J  II. 6  ;  iv.132  ;  v. 426  (aor.  °ganhi),  43S  (to 
favour  with  one's  love),  510;  Miln  234;  KhA  160. — 
aor.  sangahesi  Mhvs  38,  31  ;  fut.  "gahissati  J  vi.392  ; 
ger.  "gahetva  Mhvs  37,  244 ;  grd.  "gahetabba  Vin  1.50  ; 
ppr.  Pass,  "gayhamana  DhsA  18. — pp.  sangahita. — 
Caus.  II.  sanganhapeti :  see  pari"  (e.  g.  J  vi  328). 

Sangata  [pp.  of  sangacchati]  1.  come  together,  met  Sn  807, 
1102  (=saraagata  samohita  sannipatita  Nd-  621);  nt. 
sangata^  association  Dh  207. — 2.  compact,  tightly 
fastened  or  closed,  well-joined  Vv  64'  (=nibbivara 
VvA  275). 

Sangati  (f.)  [fr.  sangacchati]  i.  meeting,  intercourse  J 
iv.oS ;  v. 78,  483.  In  def"  of  yajati  (^service?)  at 
Dhtp  62  &  Dhtm  79.  —  2.  union,  combination  M  1.1 1 1  ; 
S  II  72  ;  IV.3J  sq.,  68  sq.  ;  Vl)h  138  (=VbhA  188).— 
3.  accidental  occurrence  D  1.53  ;  DA  1.161. 

Sangatika  [adj .]  kalyaija",  papa",  united  with,  M  11.222,  227. 

Sangama  [fr.  sag  +  gam]  i .  meeting,  intercourse,  associa- 
tion Sn  681  ;  J  n.42  ;  in. 488  ;  v. 483.  —  2.  sexual  inter- 
course M  1.407  ;  J  IV. 106. 

Sangara  [fr.  sag-l-gr^  to  sing,  proclaim,  cp.  gayati  &  gita] 
I.  a  promise,  agreement  J  iv.105,  iii,  473;  v. 25,  479; 
sangarai)  karoti  to  make  a  compact  Vin  1.247  ■  J  iv.105  ; 
v.47g.  —  2.  (also  nt.)  a  fight  M  iii.i87=Nett  149; 
S  v.  109. 

Sangaha'  [fr  sari-t^grah]  i.  collecting,  gathering,  accu- 
mulation Vin  1.253;  Mhvs  35,  28. — 2.  comprising, 
collection,  inclu.sion,  cla-ssification  Kvu  335  sq.  ("katha). 
cp.  Kvu.  trsl'  388  sq. ;  Vism  191,  368  (eka°) ;  °g  gacchati 
to  be  comprised,  included,  or  classified  SnA  7.  24,  29:. 
—  3.  inclusion,  i.  e.  constitution  of  consciousness,  phase 
Miln  40,  —  4.  recension,  collection  of  the  Scriptures 
Mhvs  4,  61  ;  5,  95  ;  38,  44  ;  DA  1.131.  —  5.  (appl*")  kind 
disposition,  kindliness,  sympathy,  friendliness,  help, 
assistance,  protection,  favour  D  in. 245  ;  Sn  262,  263; 
A  1.92  ;  J  1.86  sq.  ;  ill. 471  ;  vi.574  ;  DA  1.318  ;  VvA  63. 
64;  PvA  196  ("g  karoti).  The  4  sangaha-vatthuni  or 
objects  (characteristics)  of  sympathy  are  :  dana,  pejrya- 
vajja,  atthacariya,  samanattata,  or  liberality,  kindly 
speech,  a  life  of  usefulness  (Rh.  D.  at  Dial.  in. 145: 
sagacious  conduct ;  223  :  justice),  impartiality  (?  better 
as  state  of  equality,  i.  e.  sensus  communis  or  feeling  of 
common  good).  The  BSk.  equivalents  (as  .sangraha- 
vastuni)  are  dana.  priyavakya,  tatharthacarya,  samana- 
sukha-duhkata  MVastu  13;  and  d.,  p.,  arthakriya, 
samanarthata     ( ^  sainana  + artha-)- ta)     Lai.     Vist.     30. 


Cp.  Divy  95,  124,  264.  The  P.  refs.  are  D  in. 152,  232  ; 
A  n.32,  248;  IV. 2 19,  364;  J  v.330  ;  Sn.\  236,  240.  See 
also  Kern,  Toev.  11.67  s.  v. 

Sangaha'  (nt.)  [fr.  sag -1- grab]  restraining,  hindrance,  bond 
It  73  (both  reading  &  meaning  very  doubtful). 

Sangahana  (adj.)  [fr.  sanganhati]  firm,  well-.supportcd 
J  V.484. 

Sangahita  (&  "gahita)  [pp.  of  sanganhati]  i.  comprised, 
included  Miln  40  (eka°) ;  PvA  80.  —  2.  collected  Mhvs 
10,  24.  —  3.  grouped  Kvu  335  sq.  —  4.  restrained  Sn 
388  ("attabhava) ;  SnA  291  (°a"tta).  —  5.  kindly  disposed 
Vv  ii*  =  Pv  IV. i'"  ("attabhava  =paresag  sanganha-sila 
VvA  59,  i.  e.  of  sympathetic  nature). 

Sangama  [fr.  sag-l-  *gam:  see  grama;  lit.  "  collection  "]  a 
fight,  battle  D  1.46 ;  11.285  ;  M  1.86,  253  ;  S  1.98  ;  1V.30S 
sq.  ;  A  1.106;  n.iib;  in.94  ;  Vin  1.6;  It  75:  Sn  440; 
Nd-  199;  Pug  68;  J  1.358;  nil  ;  Miln  332  ;  Vism  401. 
Cp.  vijita". 

-ivacara  whose  sphere  is  the  battle,  quite  at  home  on 
the  battlefield  J  11.94,  95  :  Vin  v. 163  sq..  183  (here  said 
fig.  of  the  bhikkhu).  -ji  (sangama-j-uttama)  victorious 
in  battle  Dh  103  (cp.  DhA  11.227  =sangama-sisa-yodha). 
-bheri  battle  drum  DhA  in. 298 ;  iv.25.  -yodha  a 
warrior  J  1.358. 

Sangameti  [Denom.  fr.  sangama:  given  as  special  root 
sangam^  at  Dhtp  605  with  def"  "  yuddha  "]  to  fight, 
to  come  into  conflict  with  Vin  11.195;  ni.108;  It  75; 
J  II. II,  212.  aor.  "gamesi  J  v. 417,  420  (C.  =samagami, 
cp.  sangacchati). 

Sangayati  [sag -1- gayati]  to  chant,  proclaim  (cp.  sangara), 
to  rehearse,  to  establish  the  text  of  the  B.  scriptures 
Vin  11.285;  DA  1.25  (Buddha-vacanag). — pp.  sangita. 

Sangayika  (adj  )  [fr.  sangayati]  connected  with  the  procla- 
mation ;  dhamma°-thera  the  Elders  gathered  in  the 
council  for  proclaiming  the  Doctrine  J  v. 56. 

Sangaha  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  sag-)-grah]  1.  collecting,  collection, 
Mhvs  10,  24.  —  2.  restraining,  self-restraint  A  11.142. 

Sangahaka  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  sangaha]  1.  compiling,  collection, 
making  a  recension  J  1. 1  ;  Miln  369  ;  VvA  169  (dhamma"). 

—  2.  treating  kindly,  compassionate,  kind  (cp.  sangaha 
5)  A  IV.90  ;  J  1.203;  III. 262.  —  3.  (m.)  a  charioteer 
D  11.268;  J  1,203;  11.257;  IV.63. 

Sangahika  (adj.)  [=last]  i.  comprising,  including  J  i.i5o; 
Vism  6;  DA  1.94. — 2.  holding  together  M  1.322  =A 
III. 10.  —  3.  comprehensive,  concise  J  11.236. 

Sangita  [pp.  of  sangayati]  sung ;  uttered,  proclaimed, 
established  as  the  text  Vin  11.290;  J  1.1  ;  DA  1.25  (of 
the  Canon,  said  to  have  been  rehearsed  in  seven  months). 

—  (nt.)  a  song,  chant,  chorus  D  11. 138;  J  vi.529. 

Sangiti  (f.)  [fr.  saggayati ;  BSk.  sangiti  Divy  61]  i.  a  song, 
chorus,  music  J  132  (dibba°) ;  vi. 528  (of  birds).  —  2.  proc- 
lamation (cp.  sangara).  rehearsal,  general  convocation 
of  the  Buddhist  clergy  in  order  to  settle  questions  of 
doctrine  and  to  fix  the  text  of  the  Scriptures.  The  first 
Council  is  alleged  to  have  been  held  at  Rajagaha.  Vin 
11.284  sq. ;  Dpvs  iv.  ;  Mhvs  in.  ;  DA  12  sq.  ;  SnA  67,  483. 
The  second  Council  at  Vesali  Vin  11.294  sq.  ;  Dpvs 
IV. 27  .sq.  ;  Mhvs  iv.  ;  the  third  at  Pataliputta,  Dpvs 
VII. 34  sq.  ;  Mhvs  v. 268  sq.  A  Council  of  heretics,  the 
so-called  Mahasangiti,  is  mentioned  Dpvs  v. 31  sq.  — 
3.  text  rehearsed,  recension  Vin  11.290;  DA  1. 17;  Miln 
175  (dhamma") ;  text,  formula  Vin  1.95;  11.274,  278. 
On  the  question  of  the  Councils  see  especially  Franke 
J.P.T.S.  1908,  1  sq, 

-kara  editor  of  a  redaction  of  the  Holy  Scriptures 
Sn.\  42  sq.,  292,  394,  413  .'^q.,  504  and  pa.ssim  ;  PvA  49, 
70,   etc.     -karaka   id     J    1.345       -kala   the  time   of   the 


Sangulika 


126 


Sacetasa 


redaction  of  the  Pali  Canon,  or  of  (one  of  them,  probably 
the  last)  the  Council  Tikp  241  ;  SnA  580;  VvA  270. 
-pariyaya  the  discourse  on  the  Holy  Text  D  111.271 
(Rh.  D.  "  scheme  of  chanting  together  "). 

Sangulika  (f.)  [either  =  Sk.  saskulika.  cp.  sakkhali  2,  or 
fr.  sagula  =  sangula]  a  cake  Yin  11.17;  DhA  11.75;  cp. 
sankulika  A  111.78. 

Saogopeti  [sag  +  gopeti]  to  guard;  to  keep,  preserve;  to 
hold  on  to  (ace.)  J  iv.35i  (dhanai)). 

Sangha  [fr.  sag  +  hr;  lit.  "comprising."     The  quasi  pop. 
etym.  at  VvA  233  is  "  ditthi-sila-samaiinena  sanghata- 
bhavena  sangha  "]    i .  multitude,   assemblage  Miln  403 
(kaka°);  J  1.52  (sakuna") ;  Sn  589  (nati°) ;  680  (deva°)' 
D    III. 23   (niiga°) ;   Vv  5'  (acchara"  =samriha   VvA   37) 
bhikkhu"  an  assembly  of  Buddhist  priests  A  1.56,  etc. 
D  I.I,  etc.;  S  1.236;   Sum  1.230,  280;  Vin  1.16;  11. 147 
bhikkhuni°  an  assembly  of  nuns   S   v.360  ;   Vin   1. 140 
savaka°   an   assembly   of   disciples   A   1.208;   D   11.93 

5  1.220  ;  PvA  195,  etc.  ;  samana"  an  assembly  of  ascetics 
Sn  550.  —  2.  the  Order,  the  priesthood,  the  clergy,  the 
Buddhist  church  A  1.68,  123,  etc.;  D  1.2,  etc.;  111.102, 
126,  193,  246  ;  S  IV. 270  sq. ;  Sn  227,  etc.  ;  J  11. 147,  etc.  ; 
Dhs  1004;  It  II,  12,  88;  Vin  1.102,  326;  11. 164,  etc. — 
3.  a  larger  assemblage,  a  community  A  11.55=  Sv.400  ; 
M  1. 231  (cp.  gana).  —  On  the  formula  Buddha,  Dhamma, 
Sangha  see  dhamma  C  2. 

-inussati  meditation  on  the  Order  (a  kammatlhaim) 
D  111.250,  280;  A  1.30;  J  1.97.  -arama  a  residence  for 
members  of  the  Order  J  194;  Vbh.\  13.  -kamma  an 
act  or  ceremony  performed  by  a  chapter  of  bhikkhus 
assembled  in  solemn  conclave  Vin  1.123  (cp.  1.53.   143 

6  expl"  at  S  BE.  xxn.7) ;  111.38  sq.  ;  J  1.341.  -gata  gojie 
into  the  sangha.  joining  the  community  M  1.469.  -thera 
senior  of  the  congregation  Vin  11. 2  12,  303.  -bhatta  food 
given  to  the  community  of  bhikkhus  \'in  1.58;  11. 109, 
212.  -bhinna  schismatic  Vin  v. 2 16.  -bheda  causing 
dissension  among  the  Order  Vin  1.150;  11. 180  sq.  ; 
A  n.239  sq.  ;  It  11;  Tikp  167,  171;  J  vi.129;  VbhA 
.f2  5  sq.  -bhedaka  causing  dissension  or  divisions, 
schismatic  Vin  1.89,  136,  168;  It  11.  -mamaka 
devoted  to  the  Sangha  DhA  1.206.  -raji  [=raji-] 
dissension  in  the  Order  Vin  1.339;  11.203  =VbhA  428 ; 
Vin  IV. 37. 

SanghaQsati  [sag  +  ghapsati]  to  rub  together,  to  rub  against 
Vin  11.315  (Bdhgh)." 

Sanghatita   [sag  +  ghatita,  for  "ghattita,   pp.  of  ghatteti] 

1,  struck,  sounded,  resounding  with  (-")  J  v. 9  (v.  1. 
tt);  Miln  2.  —  2.  pierced  together,  pegged  together, 
constructed  Miln  161   (nava  nana-daru°) 

Saoghatta'  (adj.)  [fr.  sag  +  ghatt]  knocking  against,  offend- 
ing, provoking,  making  angry  J  vi.295. 

Sanghatta^  (?)  bangle  Sn  48  (°yanta) :  thus  Nd^  reading 
for  'mana  (ppr.  med.  of  sanghatteti). 

Sanghattana  (nt.)  &  °a  (f.)  [fr.  sanghatteti]  i.  rubbing  or 
striking  together,  close  contact,  impact  S  iv.215; 
V.212;    J    vi.65 ;    Vism    112;    DA    1.256    (anguli"). — 

2.  bracelet  (?)  SnA  96  (on  Sn  48). 

Sanghatteti  [sag  +  ghatteti]  I.  to  knock  against  Vin  11.208. 
—  2.  to  sound,  to  ring  Mhvs  21,  29  ("aghattayi).  —  3  to 
knock  together,  to  rub  against  each  other  J  iv.98 
(agsena  agsag  samaghattayimha) ;  Davs  111.87.  —  4.  to 
provoke  by  scoffing,  to  make  angry  J  vi.295  (parag 
asanghattento,  C.  on  asanghatta) ;  VvA  139  (pres,  pass, 
"ghattiyati).  —  pp.  sanghat(t)ita. 

Sanghara  =  saghara  [sa*4  ghara]  one's  own  house  J  v.222. 

Sangharana    (nt.)   [=sagharana]    accumulation    J    111.319 

(dhana"). 


Sangharati  [— sagharati]  i.  to  bring  together,  collect, 
accumulate  J  111. 261  ;  iv.36  (dhanag),  371;  v. 383. — 
2.  to  crush,  to  pound  J  1.493. 

Sanghata  [fr.  sag  +  ghateti,  lit.  "binding  together";  on 
etym.  see  Kern.  Toev.  11.68]  i.  a  raft  J  11.20,  332  (nava°) ; 
III. 362  (id),  371.  Miln  376.  daru°  (  =  nava'')  J  v. 194, 
195.  —  2.  junction,  union  VvA  233.  —  3,  collection, 
aggregate  J  iv.15  (upahana") ;  Th  i,  519  (papaiica"). 
Freq.  as  atthi'  (cp.  sankhala  etc.)  a  string  of  bones,  i.  e. 
a  skeleton  Th  i,  570;  DhA  Iii.n2  ;  J  v. 256.  —  4.  a 
weft,  tangle,  mass  (almost  ="  robe,"  i.  e.  sanghati),  in 
tanha'-patimukka  M  1.2 71  ;  vada°-patimukka  M  1.383 
(Neumann  "defeat");  ditthi  -patimukka  Miln  390. — 
5.  a  post,  in  pittha"  door-post,  lintel  Vin  11. 120. 

Sanghatika  (adj.)  [fr.  sanghati]  wearing  a  sanghati  M  1.281. 

Sanghati  (f)  [fr  sanghateti;  cp.  BSk.  sanghati  Divy  154, 
159,  494]  one  of  the  three  robes  of  a  Buddhist  Vin  1.46, 
289;  11.78,  135.  213;  D  1.70;  11.65;  M  1.281  ;  11.45; 
S  1.175  ;  A  II.  104,  106  sq.,  210  ;  jv.169  sq. ;  V.123  ;  Pv 
IV.  H^;  VbhA  359  (°civara) ;  PvA  43. 

-cara  wandering  about  in  a  sanghati,  having  deposited 
the  civara  Vin  iv.281.      -vasin  dressed  in  a  s.  Sn  456. 

Sanghati  (f.)  a  loin-cloth  \'in  iv.339  sq. 

Sanghata  [sag4-ghata]  i.  striking,  killing,  murder  Vin 
1. 137  ;  D  1.141  ;  11.354  '■  ^^  '/^  '■  '^  ■'•42  ^1-  —  -•  knocking 
together  (cp.  sanghatteti),  snapping  of  the  fingers 
(acchara°)  A  1.34,  38;  J  vi.64.  —  3.  accumulation, 
aggregate,  multitude  PvA  206  (atthi°  mass  of  bones,  for 
the  usual  "sanghala) ;  Nett  28.  —  4.  N.  of  one  of  the  8 
principle  purgatories  ]  v. 266,  270. 

Sanghatanika  (adj.)  [fr.  sanghata  or  sanghata]  holding  or 
binding  together  M  1.322  (-l-agga-sangahika) ;  A  in. 10 
(id.);  Vin  1.70  ("the  decisive  moment"  Vi>i.  Texts 
1. 190). 

Sanghadisesa  [unexplained  as  regards  etym.  ;  Geiger, 
P.Gr.  §  38^,  after  S.  Levi,  =  sangh'atisesa  ;  but  atisesa 
does  not  occur  in  Pali]  requiring  suspension  from  the 
Order  ;  a  class  of  offences  which  can  be  decided  only  by 
a  formal  sangha-kamma  Vin  11.38  sq. ;  in. 112,  186; 
IV. 1 10  sq.,  225  (where  explained);  A  11.242;  Vism  22; 
DhA  III. 5. 

Sanghika  (adj.)  [fr.  sangha]  belonging  to,  or  connected 
with  the  Order  Vin  1.250. 

Sanghin  (adj.)  [fr.  sangha]  having  a  crowd  (of  followers), 
the  head  of  an  order  D  1.47,  116;  S  1.68;  Miln  4:  DA 
I  143.  — sangh4sanghi  (pi.)  in  crowds,  with  crowds 
(redupl.  cpd.!),  with  gani-bhiita  "crowd  upon  crowd" 
at  D  1. 112,  128;  II. 317;  DA  1.280. 

Sanghuttha  (adj.)  [sag-(-ghut!ha]  i.  resounding  (with) 
J  VI. 60,  277  (turiya-tajita") ;  Mhvs  15,  196;  29.  25 
(turij'a°) ;  Sdhp  298. — 2.  proclaimed,  announced  PvA 
73- 

Sacaca  (conj.)  if  indeed  Vin  1.88 ;  see  sace. 

Sacitta'  (nt.)  [sa*-l-citta]  one's  own  mind  or  heart  D  11. 120  ; 
Dh  183.  327=Miln37g. 

Sacitta'  (adj.)  [sa'-l-citta]  of  the  same  mind  J  v.360. 

Sacittaka  (adj.)  [sa'-l-citta-t-ka]  endowed  with  mind,  in- 
telligent DhsA  295. 

Sace  (conj.)  [sa'-t-ce;  cp.  sacaca]  if  D  1.8.  51  ;  Vin  1.7; 
Dh  134;  J  .1.311.  —  sace  .  .  .  noce  if  ...  if  not 
J  VI. 365. 

Sacetana  (adj.)  [sa'  +  cetana]  animate,  conscious,  rational 
J  1.74  ;  Mhvs  38,  97. 

Sacetasa  (adj.)  [sa^-l-cetasa]  attentive,  thoughtful  A  1.254 
( =citta-sampanna  C). 


Sacca 


127 


Sajjita 


Sacca  (adj.)  [cp,  Sk.  satya]  real,  true  D  1.182  ;  M  11. 169; 
III. 207;  Dh  408;  nt.  saccat)  truly,  verily,  certainly  Miln 
120  ;  saccat)  kira  is  it  really  true  ?  D  i.i  13  ;  Vin  1.45,  60  ; 
J  1. 107;  saccato  truly  S  ni.H2.  — (nt.  as  noun)  saccar) 
the  truth  A  11.25,  '  i5  (parama°) ;  Dh  jgj  ;  also  :  a  solemn 
asseveration  Mhvs  25,  i8.  Sacce  patitthaya  keeping  to 
fact,  M  1.376. — pi.  (cattari)  saccani  the  (four)  truths 
M  11. 199;    A  II. 41,    176;    Sn  883   sq   ;    Dhs  358. — The 

4  ariya-saccani  are  the  truth  about  dukkha.  dukkha- 
samudaya,  dukkha-nirodha,  a  nd  dukkha-nirodha-gamini- 
patipada.  Thus  e.  g.  at  Vin  1.230  ;  D  11.304  sq.  ;  in. 2 77  ; 
A  1. 175  sq.  ;  Vism  494  sq.  ;  VbhA  i\b  sq.,  141  sq.  A 
shortened  statement  as  dukkha,  samudaya,  nirodha, 
magga  is  freq.  found,  e.  g.  \'in  116  ;  see  under  dukkha 
B.I.  —  See  also  ariyasacca  &  asacca.  —  imina  saccena  in 
consequence  of  this  truth,  i.  e.  if  this  be  true  J  1.294. 

-avhaya  deserving  his  name,  Cp.  of  the  Buddha  Sn 
1 133,  cp,  Nd^  624.  -4dhitthana  determined  on  truth 
M  III. 245  ;  D  111.229.  -Anupatti  realization  of  truth 
M  11. 173  sq.  -&nubodha  awakening  to  truth  M  11  171  sq. 
-inurakkhana  warding  of  truth,  M  11.176.  -ibhinivesa 
inclination  to  dogmatize,  one  of  the  kaya-ganthas  S  v. 59  ; 
Dhsii39;  UhsA377.  -«lbhisaniaya  comprehension  of  the 
truth  Sn  758;  Th  i,  338;  ThA  239.  -kara  ratification, 
pledge,  payment  in  advance  as  guarantee  J  1. 1 2  i .  -kiriya 
a  solemn  declaration,  a  declaration  on  oath  J  1.2  14,  294  ; 
IV. 31,  142  ;  v. 94  ;  Miln  120  ;  Mhvs  18,  39  (see  trsl'  p.  125 
on  term),  -riana  knowledge  of  the  truth  Vism  510; 
DhA  IV.  1 52 .  -nama  doing  justice  to  one's  name,  bearing 
a  true  name,  Ep.  of  the  Buddha  A  111.346  ;  iv.285.  289  ; 
P\'A  231.  -nikkhama  truthful  Sn  542.  -pafivedha 
penetration  of  the  truth  Ps  11.57  -vanka  a  certain  kind 
of  fish  J  v. 405  (the  Copenhagen  MS.  has  [sa]sacca-vanka, 
which  has  been  given  by  Fausboll  as  sata-vanka). 
-vacana  (i)  veracity  M  1.403;  Dh  1.160;  (2)=sacca- 
kiriya    KhA    i6g,     180.     -vajja    truthfulness    D    1.53; 

5  IV. 349  ;  J  IV. 320.  -vaca  id.  A  11.228  ;  111.244  ;  J  1.201. 
-vadin  truthful,  speaking  the  truth  D  1.4;  111.170; 
A  11.209  ;  IV. 249,  389  ;  S  1.66  :  Sn  59  ;  Dh  217  ;  Miln  120  ; 
Nd^  623:  DhA  III. 288.  -vivatta  revelation  of  truth 
Ps  I.I  I.  -sandha  truthful,  reliable  D  1.4;  111.170; 
A  11.209;  IV. 249  ;  DA  1.73.  -sammata  popular  truth, 
maxim  S  iv.230. 

Saccapeti  at  A  iv.346=Vin  11.19  '^  probably  misreading 
or  an  old  misspelling  for  sajjapeti  fr.  sajjeti,  the  con- 
fusion sac  :  saj  being  frequent.  Meaning  :  to  undertake, 
fulfil,  realize. 

Saccika  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  satyaka]  real,  true  Miln  226  (the 
same  passage  at  Ps  1.174  "^  ^'^'  45**  spells  sacchika).  — 
saccik'  attha  truth,  reality,  the  highest  truth  Kvu  i  sq.  ; 
DhsA  4  (nearly  ^paramaltha) ;  KhA  102.  Kern  in  a 
phantastic  interpretation  (Toev.  11.49,  50)  takes  it  as 
sacci-kattha  (=Sk.  sici-krsta)  "  pulled  sideways,"  i.  e. 
"  misunderstood." 

Sacceti  in  fut.  saccessati  at  A  iv.343  is  most  likely  an  old 
mistake  for  ghattessati  is  the  same  passage  at  A  111.343  ; 
the  meaning  is  "  to  touch,"  or  to  approach,  disturb. 
It  is  hardly  =  sasc  "  to  accompany." 

Sacchanda  (adj.)  [sa*  +  chandaj  self-willed,  headstrong 
J  1.42  1  ;  as  sacchandin  ibid. 

Sacchavini  (mulani)  at  A  III  371  (opp.  unimula)  means 
"  roots  taking  to  the  soil  again."  It  is  doubtful  whether 
it  belongs  to  chavi  "  skin." 

Sacchikata  [pp.  of  sacchikaroti  cp.  BSk.  sak$atkrtah 
Av6  1.2 10]  seen  with  one's  own  eyes,  realized, 
experienced     D     1.250;     S     v.422  =Vin     i.ii;     DhA 

IV. 1 1  7. 

8acchikara^iya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  sacchikaroti]  (able)  to  be 
realized  S  iii. 223  .sq.  ;  D  111.230  —A  II. 182  (in  four  ways  : 
by  kaya,  sati,  cakkhu,  pa&iia). 


Sacchikaroti  [cp.  Sk.  saksat  kr  ;  the  P.  form  being  •saccha" 
(=sa'-t-aks,  as  in  akkhi),  with  change  of  "3.  to  °i  before 
kr.  See  also  sakkhir)  karoti]  to  see  with  one's  eyes,  to 
realize,  to  experience  for  oneself.  Pres.  "karoti  D  1.229  ; 
S  IV. 337  ;  V.I  I,  49.  —  Fut.  "karissati  S  v. 10;  M  11. 201 
(as  sacchi  va  k).  —  Aor.  sacch'ikasi  S  iv.63  ;  SnA  166. 

—  Grd.  "katabba  Vin  i.ii  ;  S  v.422  ;  &  "karaniya  (q.  v.). 

—  pp.  sacchikata. 

Sacchikiriya  (f.)  [fr.  sacchikaroti]  realization,  experiencing 
D  1. 100;  HI. 255  ;  S  IV. 254  ;  A  1.22;  11. 148;  iii.ioi  ; 
IV. 332  sq.  ;  Sn  267  ;  Vism  696  sq. ;  Dhs  296  ;  DhA  iv.63. 

Sajati^  [srj,  cp.  Av.  harasaiti  to  let  loose  ;  Sk.  sarga  pouring 
out,  srsti  emanation,  creation]  to  let  loose,  send  forth  ; 
dismiss,  give  up  Sn  386,  390;  J  1.359;  v. 218  (imper. 
sajahi) ;  vi.185,  205.  — infin.  satthut)  (q.  v.);  pp.  sattha 
(see  vissattha). — Caus.  sajjeti  (q.  v.).  —  For  sajj° 
(Caus.)  we  find  safij°  in  saAjitar. 

Sajati*  [svaj;  Dhtp  74,  549=ajjana  (?)  or=sajati'?]  to 
embrace  D  11.266  (imper.  saja).  udakarj  sajati  to  em- 
brace the  water,  poet,  for  "  to  descend  into  the  water  " 
J  IV. 448  (T.  sajati);  vi.198  (C.  =abhisiiicati),  205  (C.=-- 
attano  upari  sajati  [i.  e.  sajati^]  abbhukkirati).  On 
C.  readings  cp.  Kern,  Toev  11.51. 

Sajana  [sa*-l-jana]  a  kinsman  J  iv.ii  (read  °parijanag). 

Sajala  (adj.-n.)  [sa'-FJala]  watery,  wet;  nt.  water. 

-da  giving  water,  bringing  rain  (of  wind)  Vism   10. 
-dhara  holding  water,  i,  e.  a  cloud  VvA  223. 

Sajati  (f.)  [sa*-l-jati]  (being  of)  the  same  class  or  caste 
Vin  1.87;  J  II. 108  (°putta). 

Sajitar  see  safijitar. 

Sajiva'  (adj.)  [sa^-l-jiva]  endowed  with  life  Mhvs  11,  13. 

jiva-  [forsaciva  ?]  a  minister  J  vi.307,  318  (  =  amaccaC.). 

^jivana  (nt.)  at  S  1.44  is  metric  spelling  for  sa-jivana 
[sa- =sar),-)- jivana]  "same  livelihood,"  in  phrase  kitjsu 
kamme  s.  "  what  is  (of)  the  same  livelihood  in  work,  i.  e. 
occupation  ?"  The  form  is  the  same  as  jivana  at  J 
in. 353.  Taken  wrongly  as  gen.  pi.  by  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  in 
trsl"  (K.S.  1.63) :  "  who. in  their  work  is  mate  to  sons  0] 
men  ?"  following  Bdhgh's  wTong  interpretation  (see 
K.S.  I  321)  as  "  kammena  saha  jlvantanan  ;  kamma- 
dutiyaka  nama  honti." 

Sajotibhuta  (adj.)  [sa'-fjoti-l-bhuta ;  same  BSk.,  e.  g. 
M\astu  15]  flaming,  ablaze,  aglow  D  1.95;  Vin  1.25; 
A  1.141  ;  J  I.2J2  ;  DA  1.264. 

Sajja  (adj.)  [grd.  formation  fr.  sajj  =sai"ij  Caus.;  cp.  the 
exact  likeness  of  Ger.  "  fertig  "]  prepared,  ready  J  1.98  ; 
11.325;  111.271;  Miln  351;  PvA  156,  256.  Of  a  bow 
furnished  with  a  bow-string  A  in. 75. 

Sajjaka  (adj.)  =  sajja  ;  J  iv.45  (gamana"  ready  for  going, 
"  fertig  "). 

Sajjati  [Pass,  of  sanj  or  saj  to  hang.  Cp.  sanga]  1.  to 
cling,  to,  to  be  attached  S  1.38,  111  (aor.  2  sg.  saj- 
jittho) ;  11.228;  A  11.165;  J  1.376  (id.  asajjittho) ;  Sn 
522,  536.  ppr.  (a)sajjamana  (un)-attached  Sn  28,  466; 
J  III. 352.  —  2.  to  hesitate  J  1.376  (asajjitva  without 
hesitation). —  pp.  satta*.  —  Cp.  abhi"  &  vi°. 

Saijana'  (nt.)  [fr.  sfj]  decking,  equipping  ThA  241. 

Saijana'  [sat(=sant)-)-jana]  a  good  man  Miln  321. 

Sajja  (f.)  forig.  grd.  of  sad]  seat,  couch  Pv  11.12'  (expl"  at 
PvA  157  doubtful). 

Sajjita  [pp.  of  sajjeti]  issued,  sent  off;  offered,  prepared 
S    11.186;    Vin    III. 137   (here   in   sense  of   "  happy "  = 


Sajju 


128 


Sunjati 


sukhita);  Miln  244  (of  an  arrow:  sent);  Mhvs  17,  7; 
27,  16. — -nt.  ofiering  (=upakkhata)  DA  1.294; 
PvA  107. 

Sajju  (adv.)  [Sk.  sadyat,  sa+dyah,  lit.  one  the  same  day] 
I.  instantly,  speedily,  quickly  Davs  III. 37. — 2.  newly, 
recently  Dh  71  (°khira  ;  cp.  DhA  11.67). 

Sajiukag  =  sajju:  i.  quickly  Mhvs  7,  6;  14,  62.  — 2.  newly 
\'vA  197, 

Sajjulasa  [cp.  Sk.  sarja"—  •  see  Gt  ger,  P.Gr.  §  19"]  resin 
Vin  1.202. 

Sajjeti  [Caus.  of  srj  (sajati'),  Sk.  sarjayati]  to  send  out, 
prepare,  give,  equip ;  to  fit  up,  decorate :  danai]  to  give 
a  donation  DhA  11.88  ;  patheyyag  to  prepare  provisions 
J  III. 343  ;  gehe  to  construct  houses  J  1.18;  natakani  to 
arrange  ballets  J  1.59 ;  yannag  to  set  up  a  sacrifice 
J  1.336  ;  dhammasabhai)  to  equip  a  hall  for  a  religious 
meeting  J  111.342  ;  nagarag  to  decorate  the  town  J  v. 2 12  ; 
pannakarag  to  send  a  present  J  iii.io, — Caus.  II. 
sajjapeti  to  cause  to  be  given  or  prepared  J  x.446 : 
PvA  81.     Cp.  vissajjeti. 

Sajjha  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  sadhya]  silver  D  11. 351  (v.  1.) ;  S  v. , 
(v.  1.);  A  III. 16.     Cp.  sajjhu. 
-kara  silversmith  Miln  331. 

Sajjhaya  [cp.  Sk.  svadhyaya,  sva+adhyaya,  i.  e.  sa*  + 
ajjhaya,  cp.  ajjhayana  &  ajjhayaka]  repetition,  rehearsal, 
study  D  III. 241  ;  Vin  1.133  ;  11. 194  ;  A  iv.136  ;  S  v.121  ; 
J  1. 1 16,  436  ;  11.48  ;  Miln  12,  KhA  24  ;  VbhA  250  sq.  — • 
°g  karoti  to  study  D  111.241  ;  A  111.22  ;  J  v.5d. 

Saijhayati  [Denom.  fr.  sajjhaya,  cp.  BSk.  svadhyayita 
Av§  1.287;  11.23]  to  rehearse,  to  repeat  (aloud 'or 
silently),  to  study  J  1.435;  '1.273;  111.216;  iv.64  ;  Miln 
10.  —  ppr.  "ayanto  DhA  ni.347  ;  ger.  sajjhaya  S  1.202,  &■ 
sajjhayitva  J  iv.477  ;  v. 450  ;  KhA  97.  — Caus.  sajjhapsti 
to  cause  to  learn,  to  teach  J  111.28  (of  teacher,  with 
adhiyati,  of  pupil).     Caus.  11.  sajjhayapeti  id.  Miln  10. 

Sajjhu  (nt.)  [cp.  sajjha]  silver  D  11. 351  ;  S  v.92  ;  J  vi.4» ; 
Mhvs  19,  4;  27,  26;  28,  33. 

Sa&caya  [fr.  sag  +  ci]  accumulation,  quantity  Sn  697;  It 
17  (atthi°);  Miln  220. 

Sancara  [fr.  sag  +  car]  passage,  way,  medium  DA  1,289. 

Sancarana  (nt.)  [fr.  sag  +  car]  wandering  about,  meeting, 
meeting-place  J  1.163  ;  iv.335  ;  Miln  359.  a°  impassable 
Miln  217. 

Sancarati  [sag  +  carati]  I.  to  go  about,  to  wander  D  1.83. 
—  2.  to  meet,  unite,  come  together  J  11.36  (of  the  noose 
of  a  snare).  —  3.  to  move,  to  rock  J  1.265.  —  4.  to  pass 
J  1. 491. — Caus.  "careti  to  cause  to  move  about  Miln 
377,  385. — Caus.  II.  "carapeti  to  cause  to  go,  to  emit 
J  1. 164;  to  make  one's  mind  dwell  on  Vism  187. 

Sancaritta  (nt.)  [fr.  sag  +  caritar]  i.  going  backwards  & 
forwards,  acting  as  go-between  Vin  in. 137.  —  2.  inter- 
course Miln  266. 

Sancara  [sag-l-cara]  I.  going,  movement,  passing  through 
Sdhp  244. — 2.  passages  entrance,  road  J  1.409;  11.70. 
122. 

Sancalati  [sag -f- calati]  to  be  unsteady  or  agitated  Miln 
117.  Caus.  "caleti  to  shake  Vin  in. 127;  J  v. 434. — pp. 
calita. 

Sancalita  [pp.  of  sancalati]  shaken  Miln  224  (a"). 

Sancicca  (adv.)  [ger.  of  sag 4- cinteti ;  ch.  BSk.  sanciutya 
Divy  494]  discriminately,  purposely,  with  intention 
Vin  11,76  ;  III. 71,  112  ;  iv.149,  290  ;  D  in. 133  ;  Kvu  593  ; 
Miln  380  ;  PvA  103. 


Sa&Cita  [pp.  of  sancinati]  accumulated,  filled  (with)  J 
VI. 249  ;  ThA  282  ;  Sdhp  319. 

Saiicinati  (&  sagcayati)  [sag  +  cinati]  to  accumulate;  ppr. 
"cayanto  Mhvs  21,4;  aor.  cini°  PvA  202  (puiinag),  279 
(pi.  °cinimha).  —  pp.  sancita.  —  Cp.  abhi°. 

Saficinteti  (&  °ceteti)  [sag -1- cinteti]  to  think,  find  out,  plan, 
devise  means  D  11.180,  245  (aor.  samacintesug) ;  Th  i, 
U03  (Pot.  "cintaye) ;  J  III. 438  (aor.  samacetayi). 

Sanca99a  [sag-J-cunija]  crushed,  shattered  Bu  11.170  = 
J  1.26. 

SanCUWita  [pp.  of  sancunneti]  crushed  J  11. 41  ;  Miln  188; 
Vism  259. 

Saficuweti  [sag-fcunneti]  to  crush  J  11. 2 10,  387  (aor. 
°esi);  III. 175  (Pot.  °eyya),  176  (ger.  °etva).  —  pp. 
"cunnita. 

Sancetana  (f)  [sag -t- cetana]  thought,  cogitation,  percep- 
tion, intention  A  11. 159  (atta°,  para°) ;  D  in. 231  (id.); 
S  II. 1 1,  40,  99  (mano°) ;  11.39  sq.,  247;  in. 60,  227  sq. ; 
Vbh  285  ;  Dhs  70,  126.  Sixfold  (i.  e.  the  6  fold  sensory 
perception,  riipa°,  sadda°,  etc.):  D  11.309;  111.244; 
Ps  1. 136.  Threefold  (viz.  kaya",  vaci°,  mano°) :  Vism 
341,  530  ;  VbhA  144,  145. 

Sancetanika  (adj.)  [fr.  saiicetana]  intentional  Vin  in. 112; 
M  111.J07 ;  A  v. 292  sq.  ;  a.°  M  1.377. 

Sancetayitatta  (nt.)  reflection  Dhs  5,  72. 

Sanceteti  see  °cinteti. 

Sancodita  [sag -(- codita]  instigated,  excited  PvA  5,  68,  171, 
213  ;  ThA  207. 

Sancopati  [cp.  Sk.  copati,  as  <Virn?  in  Mhbh.  We  should 
expect  copeti  in  Pali,  fr.  cup  to  stir]  to  move,  to  stir  ;  a 
misunderstood  term.  Found  in  aor.  samacopi  (so  read 
for  T.  samadhosi  &  v.  1.  samaiicopi)  maiicake  "  he  stirred 
fr.  his  bed  "  S  in. 120,  125  ;  and  saficopa  (pret.)  J  v. 340 
(v.  1.  for  T.  saficesug  asana  ;  C.  expl'~  as  "  caligsu  "). 

Sancopana  (nt.)  &  °a  (f.^[sag-fcopana]  touching,  handling 
Vin  III. 12 1  (a);  iv.214  (a)  (  =  paramasanan  nama  ito 
c'  ito  ca). 

Sanchanna  [sag-l-channa*]  covered  (with  =  -°)  M  1.124  ; 
Th  I,  13  ;  J  1. 201  ;  SnA  91  ("patta  full  of  leaves  ;  puppha" 
of  flowers).  Often  in  cpd.  paduma°  covered  with 
lotuses  (of  ponds)  Pv  11. 1^°;  11. 12^;  Vv  44';  J  1.222; 
V.337- 

Sanchavin,  M  11.217,  259. 

Sanchadita  [pp.  of  sanchadeti]  covered  PvA  157. 

Sanchindati  [sag  +  chindati]  to  cut,  destroy  M  111.275  (Pot. 
"chindeyya);  A  ii.33  =  S  in. 85  (ger.  "chinditva).  —  pp. 
saAchinna. 

Sanchinna  [pp.  of  safichindati]  Vin  1.255  (of  the  kathina, 
with  samandalikata  "  hemmed  ").  Also  in  cpd.  "patta 
"  with  leaves  destroyed  "  is  Nd-  reading  at  Sn  44  (where 
T.  ed.  &  SnA  91  read  sagsina),  as  well  as  at  Sn  64  (in 
similar  context,  where  T.  ed.  reads  saiichinna).  The 
latter  passage  is  expli^  (Nd-  625)  as  "  bahula-patta- 
palasa  sanda-cchaya,"  i.  e  having  thick  &  dense  foliage. 
The  same  meaning  is  attached  to  sanchinna-patta  at 
VvA  288  (with  v.  1.  sagsina  !),  thus  evidently  in  sense 
of  sarichanna.  The  C.  on  Sn  64  (viz.  SnA  117)  takes  it 
as  sarichanna  in  introductory  story. 

Sanjagghati  [sag-l-jagghati]  to  joke,  to  jest  D  1.91  ;  A 
1V.55.  343  ;  I^A  1.256. 

Safijati  is  the  P.  correspondent  of  sajati'  (STJ),  but  Sk. 
saflj^^sajjati  (to  hang  on,  cling),  which  at  Dhtp  67  & 
397  def  as  sanga.     The  Dhtp  (64)  &  Dhtm  (82)  take 


Saiijanati 


129 


Sahfiapeti 


sanj   in  all   meanings  of   alingana   (=sajati*),  vissagga 
(=sajati'),  &  nimmana  (=sajjeli). 

Sanjanati  [sai)  + janati]  to  be  born  ;  only  in  Cans,  "janeti  to 
cause,  produce  :  realize  Pug  16;  Sdhp  564  (ger.  °jana- 
yitvana)   — pp.  sanjata.     See  also  Pass    sagjayati. 

Sanjanaaa  (nt:)  producing  ;  f.  °i  progenetrix  (identical  with 
tanha)  Dhs  1059  ;  DhsA  363. 

Safijanetar  [n.  ag.  fr.  sanjaneti]  one  who  produces  S  i  191  ; 
III. 60. 

Sanjambhari  in  "g  karoti  is  not  clear  in  der"  &  meaning; 
perhaps  "  to  tease  abuse."  see  D  i.i8g  (°riyar)) ;  A  1.187  ; 
S  IT. 282.  Probably  fr.  bhr  (Intensive  jarbhrta  Vcdic  !) 
as  *jarbhari.  See  on  der"  Konow,  J.P.T.S.  1909,  42  ; 
Kern,  Toev.  n.69.  The  C.  on  S  11.282  {W.S.  11.203) 
expl^  as  "  sarabharitar)  nirantarar)  phutar)  akarjsu. 
upari  vijjhirisu  ti,"  i.  e.  continually  touching  (01 
nudging)  (phuta  =phuttha  or  ph'otita). 

Safijata  [pp.  of  safijanati]  having  become,  produced,  arisen 
Dhs  1035  (  +  bhuta(.'v:othersyn.).  ° —  full  of,  grown  into, 
being  in  a  state  of  Sn  53  ("khandha  =susanthita°  SnA 
103);  VvA  312,  318  (°garava  full  of  respect),  324  (°pa- 
sada). 

Saaiata^  (adj.)  [sa'  +  jata]  of  the  same  origin  (con-gener) 
J  IV  I  34.     Cp.  sajati. 

Sanjati  (f)  [sar)  +  jati]  birth,  origin;  outcome;  produce 
D  1.227;  ti-3°5- 

Sanjadiya  a  grove,  wood  J  v. 41  7,  421  (v.  1   saiicariya). 

Saajanana  (nt.)  &  "a  (f.)  [fr.  sanjanati]  knowing,  perceiving, 
recognition  Miln  61  ;  DA  1.2 11  ;  characteristic,  that  by 
which  one  is  distinguished  DhsA  321.  As  f.  at  Dhs  4; 
DhsA  I  lo,  140  (trsi"  Expos.  185  :  "  the  act  of  perceiving 
by  noting  "). 

Saojanati  [sag  +  janati]  i.  to  recognize,  perceive,  know 
to  be  aware  of  Vin  iii.i  12  ;  D  11.12  ;  M  i.i  1 1,  473  ;  S  ill. 87  ; 
A  v. 46.  60,  63  ;  J  1. 135  ;  IV. 194  ;  ThA  1 10.  —  2.  to  thinK. 
to  suppose  J  11.98.  —  3.  to  call,  name,  nickname  D  1.93  ; 
J  1. 148.  -- Aor  saiijani  DA  1.261  ;  ger.  sannaya  J  1.187; 
11.98;  saiiiiatva  M  11  ;  and  saiijanitva  J  1.352.  —  Cans, 
saniiapeti  (q.  v.). — pp.  safifiata. 

Sanjanitatta  (nt.)  [fr.  saiijanita.  pp.  Caus.  of  saiijanati] 
the  state  of  having  perceived  Dhs  4. 

Sanjanetar  at  S  in. 66  read  safijaneta. 

Sanjayati  [sag  +  jayati,  cp.  safijanati]  to  be  born  or  pro- 
duced D  1.220  ;  J  II  97  ;  aor.  safijayi  D  ii.2og ;  Vin  1.32  ; 
ppr.  °jayaniana  J  v. 384. 

Safljiwa  [sag  +  jinna]  decayed  J  1.503  (v.  1.). 

Safijitar  [n.  ag.  fr.  sajati'.  cp.  saiijati]  creator,  one  who 
assigns  to  each  his  station  D  1.18,  221  ;  M  1.327;  DA 
I.I  II  (v.  1.  sajjitar,  cp.  Sk.  srastar). 

Sanjivana  (adj.)  [fr.  sai)  + ji»]  reviving  ThA  181  (Ap.  v.  23 : 
putta"). 

Sanjha  (f  ■)  [cp.  Sk.  sandhya]  evening ;  only  in  cpds.  °atapa 
evening  sun  VvA  4,  12  ;  "ghana  evening  cloud  ThA  146 
(Ap.  V.44);  Davs  V.60. 

Safin"  is  frequent  spelling  for  saoy°  (in  sar)yojana=saii- 
nojana  e.  g.),  q.  v. 

Safinatta'  (nt.)  [abstr.  formation  fr.  sanfia]  the  state  of 
being  a  sanna,  perceptibility  S  in. 87. 

Safinatta'  [pp-  oi  saiifiapeti]  induced,  talked  over  Sn  303, 

308. 


Safifiatti  (f )  [fr.  saiifiapeti]  i.  informing,  convincing  A 
1.75;  S  1199;  Vin  11.98,  199,  307;  J  III. 402.  —  2.  ap- 
peasing, pacification  M  1.320. 

Sanna  (f)  [fr.  sag  +  jfia]  (pi.  sannayo  and  sauna  —  e.  g. 
M  1. 108)  I.  sense,  consciousness,  perception,  being  tlie 
third  khandha  Vin  1.13;  M  1.300;  S  in. 3  sq. ;  Dhs  40. 
58,  61,  113;  VbhA  42.  —  2.  sense,  perception,  discern- 
ment, recognition,  assimilation  of  sensations,  awareness 
M  1.293;  A  in. 443  (nibbana°);  S  111.87  ;  Sn  732  (san- 
naya uparodhana  dukkhakkhayo  hoti ;  expl""  as  "  kama- 
saniia  "  SnA);  Miln  61  ;  Dhs  4;  DhsA  no,  200  (rupa° 
perception  of  material  qualities).  —  3.  consciousness 
D  1. 180  sq.  ;  M  1.108  ;  Vbh  369  (nanatta"  c.  of  diversity : 
see  nanatta) ;  Miln  159;  J  iv.391  ;  is  previous  to  iiana 
D  1. 185  ;  a  constituent  part  of  nama  S  11.3,  cp.  Sn  779  ; 
according  to  later  teaching  differs  from  viiinana  and 
paniia  only  as  a  child's  perceiving  differs  from  (a)  an 
adult's,  (6)  an  expert's  Vism  436  sq.  ;  Dhs.  Irsl"  7  n. 
2,  17  n.  2.  — nevasarifia-nisafifia  neither  conscious- 
ness nor  unconsciousness  D  in. 224,  262  sq.  ;  M  1.41,  160  ; 
11.255  ;  III. 28,  44  ;  Ps  1.36  ;  Dhs  268,  582,  1417  :  Kvu  202  ; 
Nett  26,  29;  Vism  571.  —  4.  conception,  idea,  notion 
D  1.28;  in. 289  (cp.  Dial.  111.263:  "concept  rather  than 
percept");  M  in. 104;  S  1.107;  Sn  802,  841;  J  1.368 
(ambaphala  sanflaya  in  the  notion  or  imagining  of 
mango  fruit);  Vism  112  (rupa°  &  atthika").  saiinaij 
karoti  to  imagine,  to  think  J  n.71  ;  to  take  notice,  to 
mind  J  1.117.  —  5.  sign,  gesture,  token,  mark  J  1.287; 
II. 18;  panna"  a  mark  of  leaves  J  1.153  ;  rajjusaniia  arope 
used  as  a  mark,  a  guiding  rope,  J  1.287  ;  rukkha-sannar) 
pabbata-saiifiar)  karonto,  using  trees  and  hills  as 
guiding  marks  J  iv.91  ;  saiiiiai)  dadati  to  give  the  sign 
(with  the  whip,  for  the  horse  to  start)  J  V1302.  —  6. 
saiifia  is  twofold,  patighasamphassaja  and  adhivacana- 
samphassaja  i.  e.  sense  impression  and  recognition 
(impression  of  something  similar,  "association  by 
similarity,"  as  when  a  seen  person  calls  up  some  one  we 
know), Vbh  6  ;  VbhA  i9sq.  ;  threefold.  r\ipasa.nna,  patigha- 
safiiia,  and  nanattasaiiiia  A  11.184  ;  S  11.211  ;  cp.  Sn  535  ; 
or  kama°.  vyapada°.  vihirjsa"  (as  nanatta")  Vbh  369,  cp. 
VbhA  499  ;  fivefold  (pafica  vimutti-paripacaniya  sanna) ; 
anicca",  anicce  dukklia",  dukkhe  anatta",  pahana", 
viraga"  D  in. 243,  cp.  A  in. 334  ;  there  are  six  perceptions 
of  rupa,  sadda,  gandha,  rasa,  photthabba,  and  dhamma, 
D  11.309  ;  S  III. 60  ;  the  sevenfold  perception,  anicca-, 
anatta-,  asubha-,  adinava-,  pahana-,  viraga-,  and 
nirodha-saiina,  D  11.79  ;  cp.  A  in. 79  :  the  tenfold  percep- 
tion, asubha-.  marana-,  ahare  patikkula-,  sabbaloke 
anabhirata-,  anicca-,  anicce  dukkha-,  dukkhe  anatta-, 
pahana-,  viraga-,  nirodha-saiiiia  A  v.  105;  the  one  per- 
ception, ahare  patikkulasaniia,  Cpd.  21.  —  7.  See 
further  (unclassified  refs):  D  1.180  ;  n.277  (papaiica") ; 
in. 33,  223;  S  II. 143;  A  n.17;  IV. 312  ;  Nd'  193,  207; 
Nett  27;  Vism  iii,  437,  461  sq.  (in  detail);  VbhA  20 
(paiica-dvarika),  34;  VvA  no;  and  on  term  Cpd.  40, 
42. 

-gata  perceptible,  the  world  of  sense  M  1.38.  -bhava 
conscious  existence  Vism  572  ;  VbhA  183.  -maya  = 
ariipin  M  1.410  (opp.  manomaya  -  rupin).  -vedayitani- 
rodha  cessation  of  consciousness  and  sensation  M  1.160, 
301  ;  in.45  ;  A  1. 41  ;  Kvu  202  ;  S  11. 212.  -viratta  free 
from  consciousness,  an  .\rahant,  Sn  847.  -vimokkha 
emancipation  from  consciousness  Sn  1071  sq.  ;  Miln 
159  T=Vin  v.i  16. 

SaifitUia  (nt.)  [Vedic  saiijiiana]  1.  perception,  knowledge 
VvA  no. — 2.  token,  mark  J  iv.301  ;  DA  1.46;  Vism 
244.  —  3.  monument  Mhvs  19,  35. 

Safifiata  [pp.  of  safijanati]  skilled  M  1.396. 

Sannapana  (nt.)  [fr.  sanfiapeti]  convincing-  J  v. 462. 

Safifiapeti  [Caus  of  sanjanati]  i.  to  make  known,  to  teach 
J  1.344;  Miln  45   —2    to  remonstrate  with,  gain  over, 


Sannavant 


130 


Sanda 


convince  D  1.236  ;  M  1.397  '•  A  1.75  ;  S  iv.313  ;  Vin  i.io  ; 
II. 197;  Miln  316. — ^3.  to  appease,  conciliate  J  1.479; 
PvA  16.  Also  safliiapeti  J  1.26.  etc. -—inf.  saniiattur) 
Sn  597.  —  pp.  sannatta.  —  At  J  1.408  read  sannapa- 
petva  (instead  of  saiinar)  papetva),  or  simply  satiiiapetva, 
like  the  parallel  text  at  Ud  17. 

Sannavant  (adj.)  [fr.  saiifia]  having  perception  A  11.215  = 
Dhs  1003. 

Sannita  [=sannata;  pp.  of  sanjanati]  so-called,  named, 
so-to-speak  Mhvs  7,  45;  PvA  135;  Sdhp  72,  461.  See 
also  aya  under  niraya. 

Sannin  (adj.)  [fr.  saiiiia]  (f.  saiiiiini)  conscious,  being  aware 
of  (-"),  perceiving,  having  perception  D  1.31,  180  ;  111.49, 
III,  140,  260;  S  1.62;  A  11.34,  48.  5°;  'ii-iS ;  IV. 427; 
Dh  253;  Nd'  97,  138.  —  alokasanfiin  having  a  clear 
perception  D  1.71  ;  A  11. 21 1  ;  v.207  ;  turn  1.2 1 1  ;  nanatta" 
conscious  of  diversity  A  iv.39  sq.  ;  pathavisafifiin  con- 
scious of  the  earth  (kasina),  in  samadhi  A  v. 8  sq.  ; 
pathavisanniniyo  (fern,  plur.),  having  a  worldly  mind 
D  II.  1 39  ;  asubhasaiinin  perceiving  the  corruption  of  the 
world  It  93  ;  vihigsasaniiin  conscious  of  the  trouble 
Vin  1.7  ;  nevasaniii-nasannin  neither  conscious  nor  un- 
conscious D  III. in  ;  A  11.34;  i^d'  97,  138;  It  90;  DA 
I.I  19.  Cp.  vi°.  —  In  composition  safiiii'',  e.  g.  °gabbha 
animate  production  D  1.54  ;  DA  1.163. 

Sannivada  [sannin  -I-  vada]  name  of  a  school  maintaining  con- 
scious existence  after  death  D  1.31  ;  DA  i.i  19  ;  Mhbv  1 10. 

Sa(a  [most  likely  — Sk.  sada  (fall),  fr.  sad  to  fall;  Kern 
Toev.  s.  v.  equals  it  to  Sk.  suta  (or  srta)  of  sj  (or  su)  to 
run  (to  impel),  as  in  ussata  and  visata.  The  Dhtm 
(789)  gives  a  root  sat  '"  meaning  of  "  visarana,"  i.'  e. 
profusion,  diffusion  (cp.  visata)]  a  fall,  a  heap  of  things 
fallen;  only  in  cpd.  panna°  a  heap  of  fallen  leaves 
M  1. 21  (  — panna-kacavara  MA  1.120);  J  11.271. 

Sattha  [pp.  of  sajati^]  dismissed  ;  in  cpd.  -"esana  one  who 
has  abandoned  all  longing  or  research  D  111.209  (cp. 
Dial.  III. 247  "has  utterly  given  up  quests");  A  11. 41 
(so  read  for  sath°).  —  sittha  at  S  111.84  is  to  be  read 
settha,  and  at  S  iv.298  satha. 

Satthi  (num.  ord.)  [cp.  Sk.  sasti  :  see  cha]  sixty  D  1.45  ; 
11.261  ;  Sn  538;  DhA  111.412  (ckuna°).  It  is  found 
mostly  in  the  same  application  as  cha  (group-number), 
e.  g.  at  J  1.64  (°turiya-sahassani) ;  VvA  92  (id.) ;  J  1.87 
(°yojana) ;  vi.5i2  ("sahassa) ;  DhA  1.8,  17,  26,  131 
("sakata).  -°hayana  60  years  old  (of  elephant)  M 
1.229;  J  n.343. 

Satthut]  at  J  V!.i85  (tar)  asakkhi  satthug)  is  inf.  of  sajati* 
(srj^Sk.  srastur))  to  dismiss,  let  loose.  The  form  has 
caused  trouble,  since  the  Com.  explains  it  with  gan- 
hitur)  "  to  take."  This  has  induced  Kern  (Toev.  s.  v.) 
to  see  in  it  a  very  old  (even  pre-\eA\c  !)  form  with 
*sadhug  as  original.  Evidently  he  derives  it  fr.  sah 
(Epic  Sk.  sodhui)  !),  as  he  trsh  it  as  "  to  master,  over- 
power." 

Sa^ha  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  satha]  crafty,  treacherous,  fraudulent 
D  11.258 ;  III. 246 ;  M  1.32,  153  ;  S  iv.299  ;  A  11. 41  ;  III. 35  ; 
v. 157;  Dh  252;  Vin  11.89;  Nd'  395;  Miln  250;  Davs 
11.88;  DhA  III. 375;  Dhtp  100  (.  =  ketave). — f.  sathi 
Pv  II.3''.     See  also  keratika,  samaya°,  satheyya. 

Sathata  (f.)  [abstt  fr.  satha]  craft,  wickedness  Pug  19. 

Sathila  (adj.)  [Sk.  srthila,  which  also  appears  as  sithila, 
e.  g.  Th  I,  277]  loose,  inattentive  Dh  312. 

Sathesana  see  sattha. 

Saoa  (nt.)  [Vedic  sana ;  Gr.  icrfi'i/n.^if  =Lat.  cannabis; 
Ags  haenep  =  E.  hemp;  Ger.  hanf.]  a  kind  of  hemp 
D  11.350  (v.  1.) ;  S  I.I  15  (do.) ;  cp.  san  >lS:  sani. 


-dhovika  [perhaps  (Kern's  suggestion)  sana°  (v.  1.)  = 
visana"  ?]  name  of  a  particular  kind  of  gambol  of 
elephants  in  water  M  i.2.}9,  375.  Bdhgh  at  DA  1.84 
uses  the  obscure  term  sana-dhovana-kija  to  denote  a 
trick  of  Candalas.     But  see  sandhovika. 

Savati  [svan;  Idg.  *suen6=Lat.  sono,  Ags.  swin  music, 
swinsian  to  sing  ;  Ohg.  swan=swan]  to  sound,  to  make 
a  noise  Sn  721  (T.  sanati)  =  Miln  414  ;  sanate  S  1.7  =203  ; 
J  VI  507  ;  ppr.  sananto  Sn  720  (T.  n). 

Sa9ii)  (adv.)  [cp.  Sk.  sanaih]  softly,  gradually  Sn  350  ; 
Mhvs  25,  84. 

SaQikat]  (adv.)  [fr.  last]  slowly,  gently,  gradually  D  11.333  '• 
M  1. 120  ;  S  1.82,  203  ;  J  1.9,  292  ;  11. 103  ;  Miln  117;  DA 
1. 197  ;  DhA  1.60,  389  ;  VvA  36,  178. 

Saptha  a  reed  (used  for  bow-strings)  M  1.429. 

Santhapeti  &  °^apeti  [Caus.  of  santitthati]  i.  to  settle,  to 
establish  A  11.94  (cittari)  ;  S  iv.263  ;  J  1.225  ;  PvA  196. 
—  2.  to  call  to  order  D  I.I 79  (°ap°).  —  3.  to  adjust,  fold 
up  J  1.304. 

Santhahana  (nt.)  [fr.  santitthati]  recreation  Vism  420  sq. 

Santhati  see  santitthati. 

Sa9^ana  (nt.)  [fr.  sag -1- stha]  i.  configuration,  position  ; 
composition,  nature,  shape,  form  Vin  11. 7O;  M  1.120 
(spelt  °nth°) ;  A  1.50;  iv.igo  (C.  osakkana) ;  Miln, 270, 
316,  405;  J  1. 71,  291.  368;  11.108;  Vism  184,  225.  243; 
DhsA  32  I  ;  DA  1.88  (nth) ;  SnA  464  (  =linga).  su°  well 
formed  Sn  28.  —  adj.  (-°)  having  the  appearance  of 
megha-vanna°  PvA  251  ;  chavi"  appearance  of  the  skin 
J  1.489;  vanna°  outward  semblance  Nett  27;  J  1.271  ; 
sarira"  the  (material)  body  Vism  193.  —  2.  fuel  J  11.330 
^iv.471.  —  3.  (usually  spelt  °nth°)  a  resting  place, 
meeting  place,  public  place  (market)  (cp.  Sk.  sansthana 
in  this  meaning).  At  S  1.201  in  phrase  nadi-tiresu 
santhane  sabhasu  rathiyasu  (i.  e.  at  all  public  places). 
S  1.201  reads  santhane  (v.  1.  santhane)  ;  cp.  K.S.  1.25O 
from  C. :  "a  resting  place  (vissaraana-tthane)  near  the 
city  gate,  when  market -wares  had  been  brought  down." 
trsl"  "  resting  by  the  gates."  This  stanza  is  quoted  at 
SnA  20,  where  the  ed.  prefers  reading  panthane  as 
correct  reading  (v.  1.  santhane).  At  M  1.481  ("nth") — 
S  11.28  (2  fr.  b.).  it  seems  to  be  used  in  the  sense  of  "  end. 
stopping,  cessation  "  =  A  iv.190  (the  editions  of  S  and  A 
havcsaijthana).  At  J  vi.i  13  it  is  translated  by  "  market 
place."  the  comp.  santhana-gata  being  explained  by  the 
Comm.  by  santhana-mariyadag  gata.  but  at  J  vt.360 
santhana-gata  is  by  the  English  translator  translated 
"  a  wealthy  man  "  (vinicchaye  thito,  Com.),  which, 
however,  ought  to  be  "  in  the  court  house  "  (cp.  vinic- 
chaya-tthana),  i.  e.  publicly.  In  both  places  there  is  also 
v.  1.  santhana-°. 

Savthita  [pp.  of  santitthati]  1.  established  in  {-°),  settled, 
composed  Sn  330  (santi-soracca-samadhi°) ;  Sdhp  458  ; 
su°  firmly  or  well  established  Sn  755  ;  Miln  383  ;  in  a 
good  position,  well  situated  DhsA  65.  —  2.  being  com- 
posed (as),  being  of  the  nature  of  (-").  uUumpana- 
sabhava"  of  a  helping  disposition  DA  i.i  77  ;  PvA  35. 

Savthiti  (f.^  [fr.  santitthati]  i.  stability,  firmness  S  v.228  ; 
Dhs  11;  Vism  206;  DhsA  143;  Sdhp  460.  —  2.  fixing, 
settling  Miln   144. 

Sa94a  [dial.;  Dhtm  157:  gumb'  attha-m-irane ;  cp.  Sk. 
sanda]  a  heap,  cluster,  multitude ;  a  grove  (vana") 
D  1.87;  S  III. 108;  Vin  1.23;  J  1.134  (vana°) ;  satta° 
teeming  with  beings  It  21.  —  Jambu°  N.  of  Jamhudipa 
Sn  352  -  Th  I.  822  (v.  1.  °manda.  which  Kern  considers 
to  be  the  correct  reading;  see  Toev.  11.67).  — sanda°- 
carin  swarming  D  i.i66=M  1.77  =A  11  206. 


Sandasa 


131 


SatI 


San^asa  [sai)  +  dar)sa,  fr.  dasati]  (long)  pincers,  tweezers 
A  1.2  10  :  J  i.jj  5  ;  III.  1 38  ;  iisccl  to  pull  out  hair  M  11.75  ; 
\'in  II  134. 

Sannika  (sanika)  fcp.  sani  =  Sk.  srni]  an  elephant-driver's 
liiioU  J  1.-1(5  (so  read  for  pann°). 

Sapha  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  slaksna]  i.  smooth,  soft  Vin  1.202  ; 
11.151  :  \'v  50"  (  =  mudu  VvA  21  ?) ;  \'ism  260  — Kh A  59. 
sanhena  softly  Th  i,  460.  —  2.  gentle,  mild  D  11.259; 
Sn  855  ;  J  1,202.  376;  Nd'  234;  Pv.\  56,  215.  Of  speech 
(npp.  pharusa  harsh)  M  1.126;  A  111.196;  Dhs  134.I. — 
3.  delicato.  exquisite  Th  2.  258,  262.  264.  26S.  Cp. 
pari". 

-karani  "  a  wooden  in.strumcnt  for  smoothing  the 
ground,  or  a  .sort  of  trowel,"  Abhp  1007;  J  iv.250  (loc. 
"iyaij  pirisito) ;  1V.4  (°i  viya  tilani  pigsamana) ;  v. 271  ; 
VI. 114  (asani  viya  viravanto  °iyar|  viya  pir)santo) ;  cp. 
KhA  59  ;  thus  it  seems  to  mean  also  a  sort  of  instrument 
for  oil -pressing,  or  a  mortar. 

SaQhaka,  at  J  111.394  (of  hair  growing  white  "  sanhaka- 
sadisa  ")  according  to  Kern,  Toev.  11. O9  (coar.sc)  hempen 
cloth  (  sanavaka).  as  indicated  by  v.  1.  sanalaka.  Thus 
a  der.  fr.  .sana  =  sana.  Kern  compares  P.  tunhira- 
tfinira;  Sk.  sana  =  sanaka.  According  to  Andersen. 
Pali  Glossary  "  betelnut  "  (=sanha). 

SaQheti  [Caus.  fr.  sanha]  to  brush  down,  smooth  (kese) : 
only  as  cpd.  0°  at  Vin  n.107  ;  J  iv.219. 

Sata'  (niim,  card.)  [V'odic  satar)  ;  cp.  Av.  satam,  Gr.  i-Karof, 
Lat.  centum;  Goth,  hund -hundred  ;  Idg.  •kmtom 
fr.  dkmtom  (— dccem),  thus  ultimately  the  same  as 
dasa,  i.  e.  decad  (of  tens)]  a  hundred,  used  as  nt. 
(collect.),  either  -°  or  as  apposition,  viz.  gama-satar)  a 
hun(lrcd(ship  of)  villages  DhA  1.180;  jatila-satani  100 
ascetics  Vin  1.24;  jati"  D  1. 13;  or  gatha  satai)  100 
stanzas  Dh  102.— Often  in  sense  of  "many"  or 
"  innumerable,"  e.  g.  °kaku,  °rar)si,  etc.;  cp.  "satani - 
bahfini  J  iv.310,  311. 

-kaku  having  a  hundred  corners,  epithet  of  a  cloud 
A  iii.34  =  S  1. 100  (v.  1.  sattakatu)  see  J.I'.T.S.  1891-93 
p.  5.  -patta  the  Indian  crane  (or  woodpecker  ?)  J  11. 153; 
388  ;  Miln  404.  -padi  a  centipede  A  11.73  '■  m  loi.  306  ; 
IV. 320  ;  V.290  ;  Vin  11. no.  148;  Miln  272.  -pala  (Th  1, 
97)  see  pala.  -paka  (-tela)  oil  mixture,  worth  100  pieces 
J  IV. 281  ;  DhA  11.48;  111.311;  see  also  paka.  -punfia 
100,  i.  e.  innumerable  merits  Vism  211.  -puppha 
Anethum  sowa.  a  sort  of  dill  or  fennel  J  vi.537.  -porisa 
of  the  height  of  a  hundred  men,  extremely  high,  attribute 
of  a  hell  Vv  52,  12  sq.  ;  name  of  a  hell  J  v. 269.  -mOli 
Asparagus  racemosus  Abhp  585.  -ragsi  "  having  100 
rays."  the  sun  Sdhp  590  ;  J  1.44.  -rasabhojana  food  of 
100  flavours  DhA  111.96  (v.  1.  all  pass,  satta")  -vanka  a 
kind  of  fish  Abhp  672.  -vallika  an  under-garment, 
arranged  like  a  row  of  jewelry  Vin  11.137.  -sahassa  one 
hundred  thousand  J  11.20  ;  Miln  88;  136;  DhA  11. S6. 
-sahassima  id.  S  11.133. 

Sata'  [pp.  of  sarati.  of  smf,  cp.  BSk.  smrta  Av^  1.228; 

II.  197]  remembering,  mindful,  conscious  D  1.37;  11.94; 

III. 49,    107,   222,   269;   M  1.520   (su-ssata  &   dus-sata) ; 

S  IV. 2  1 1  ;  A  III. 169  (-l-sampajana),  325  ;  iv.31 1  ;  Sn  741  ; 

Dhs  163;  DA   1.21 1. — satokarin  cultivator  of  sati  Ps 

'■■75- 
Sataka  (nt.)  [cp.  BSk.  sataka]  a  hundred,  collection  of  100 

J  i7t- 
Satakkhattuo    (adv.)  [cp.  dvi-kkhattur),   ti-kkhattui)  etc.] 

a  hundred  times. 

Satata  (adj.)  [with  satra  "  completely  "  &  sada  "  always  " 
to  sa°  "  one  "  :  see  sag° ;  lit.  "  in  one  (continuous) 
stretch  "]  continual,  chronic.  Only  in  nt.  satatar) 
(adv.)  continually  A  iv.14;  It  116;  Sn  507;  Miln  70; 
Pv  II  8"  (     nirantarar)  PvA  no);  111.7"'  (=sabbakalar) 


VvA.  207) ;  PvA  1 77  ;  and  as  "-  in  "vihara  a  chronic  state 
of  life,  i.  e.  a  behaviour  remaining  even  &  the  same 
A  ii.i98^D  111.250,  281.     Cp.  satacca. 

Satadha   (adv.)   [sata-l-dha.   cp.   ekadha.  dvidha  etc.]  in 
nil)  wavs,  into  100  pieces  D  11. 341. 

Sati  (f.)  [Vcdic  smrti :  see  etym.  under  sarati*]  memory, 
recognition,  consciousness,  D  1.180  ;  11.292  ;  Miln  77-80  ; 
intentness  of  mind,  wakefulness  of  mind,  mindfulness, 
alertness,  lucidity  of  mind,  self-po.ssession.  conscience, 
self-con.sciousness  D  1.19;  111.31,  49.  213,  230,  270  sq.  ; 
A  1.95  ;  Dhs  14  ;  Ndi  7  ;  Tikp  61  ;  VbhA  91  ;  DhsA  121  ; 
Miln  37  ;  upatthita  sati  presence  of  mind  D  111.252,  282, 
287;  S  1I-231;  A  11.6,  218;  111.199;  IV. 232  ;  It  120; 
parimukhar)  satig  upatthipetug  to  surround  oneself 
with  watchfulness  of  mind  M  111.89 ;  Vin  1.24 ;  satig 
paccupatthapetut)  to  preserve  self-possession  J  1.112; 
IV.215;  kayagata  sati  intentness  of  mind  on  the 
body,  realization  of  the  impermanency  of  all  things 
M  111.89;  A  1.43;  S  1. 188;  Miln  248;  336;  mutthasati 
forgetful,  careless  D  111.252,  282;  maranasati  mind- 
fulness as  to  death  A  iv.317  sq.  ;  J  iv.216;  SnA  54; 
PvA  61,  66.  asati  not  thinking  of,  forgetfulness  DhsA 
241  ;  instr.  asatiyj  through  forgetfulness,  without 
thinking  of  it,  not  intentionally  Vin  11.289^.  sati 
{.samma")  is  one  of  the  constituents  of  the  8-fold  Ariyan 
Path  (e   g.  A  111. 141  sq.  ;  VbhA  120) :  see  magga  2. 

-4dhipateyya  (sat°)  dominant  mindfulness  A  11.243 
sq. ;  It  40.  -indriya  the  sense,  faculty,  of  mindfulness 
.\  11.149  ;  Dhs  14.  -uppada  arising,  production  of  recol- 
lection J  1.98  ;  A  11.185  ;  M  1. 124.  -ullapakayika,  a  class 
of  devas  S  1.16  sq.  -patthana  [BSk.  smrty'upasthana 
Divy  126,  182,  208]  intent  contemplation  and  mind- 
fulness, earnest  thought,  application  of  mindfulness  ; 
there  are  foul'  satipatthanas,  referring  to  the  body,  the 
sensations,  the  mind,  and  phenomena  respectively, 
D  11.83,  290  .sq.  ;  III. 101  sq.,  127,  221;  M  1.56,  339; 
II. 1 1  etc. ;  A  11.218  ;  111.12  ;  iv.125  sq.,-  457  sq. ;  V.175  ; 
S  111.96,  153;  V.9,  166;  Dhs  358;  Kvu  155  (cp.  Kvu. 
Irsl'  104  sq.);  Nd^  14,  45,  325,  340;  Vism  3;  VbhA  57, 
214  sq.,  417.  —  See  on  term  e.  g.  Cpd.  179;  and  in 
greater  detail  Dial.  11.322  sq.  -vinaya  disciplinary  pro- 
ceeding under  appeal  to  the  accused  monk's  own  con- 
science Vin  1.325  ;  11.79  etc.  ;  M  11.247  ;  A  1.99.  -vepul- 
lappatta  having  attained  a  clear  conscience  Vin  11179. 
-sagvara  restraint  in  mindfulness  Vism  7;  DhsA  351  ; 
SnA  8.  -sampajaiina  mindfulne'--  and  self-possession 
D  1.70;  A  II. 210;  DA  1. 183  sq.  -sambojjhanga  (e.g. 
S  V.90)  see  (sam)bojjhanga.  -sammosa  loss  of  mindful 
ness  or  memory,  lack  of  concentr.atioji  or  attention 
D  1. 19  ;  Vin  11.114;  DA  1.113;  Pug  32  ;  Vism  63;  Mfln 
260. 

Satika  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  sata']  consisting  of  a  hundred,  belong- 
ing to  a  hundred  ;  yojanasatika  extending  one  hundred 
yojanas  Vin  11.238  ;  visagvassasatika  of  hundred  and 
twenty  years'  standing  Vin  11.303. 

Satita  (f.)  [abstr.  formation  fr.  sati]  mindfulness,  memory 

DhsA  405  (-»). 

Satima  (adj.)  [superl.  form"  fr.  sata']  the  hundredth 
S  II  133;  J  1. 167  (panca°). 

Satimant  (adj.)  [fr.  sati]  mindful,  thoughtful,  contempla- 
tive, pensive;  nom.  sg.  satima  D  1.37;  S  I.i2(>;  Sn  174; 
A  11.35;  Dhs  163;  Dh,\  IV. 1 17;  Pv  IV. 3"  ;  satima  (in 
verse)  Sn  45;  nt.  satimag  Sn  211;  gen.  satimato  S 
1.208;  satimato  S  1.81;  Dh  24;  nom.  pi.  satimanto 
D  II. 120;  Dh  91  ;  DhA  11. 170;  gen.  satimatag  Dh  i8i  ; 
It  35;  satimantanag  A  1.24.  —  See  also  D  ni.77.^  M'. 
221  sq.  ;  A  IV. 4,  38,  300  sq.,  457  sq. ;  Nd'  506 ;  Nd-  629. 

Sati  (f.)  [fr,  sant,  ppr.  of  as]  1.  being  J  111. 251.  —  2.  a 
good  or  chaste  woman  Abhp  237;  asati  an  unchaste 
woman  Miln  I22-=^^J  111.350;  J  v. 418;  vi.310. 


Satekiccha 


132 


Sattu 


Satekiccha  (adj.)  [sa' +  tekiccha]  curable,  pardonable  Miln 
192,  221  ;  Vism  425.     See  tekiccha. 

Saterata  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  ^atahrada,  sata+hrada]  lightning 
J  V.14,  203.  Also  as  saterita  Vv  33^;  64*;  VvA  161 
(=vijjulata),  277.     As  saderita  at  Th  i,  260. 

Satta'  [pp.  of  sanj :  sajjati]  hanging,  clinging  or  attached 
to  Vin  1. 185;  D  11.246;  Ndi  23,  24;  Dh  342  ;  J  1.376. 
Cp.  asatta'  &  byasatta. 

Satta'  [cp,  "edic  sattva  living  being,  satvan  "  strong  man, 
warrior.'  fr.  sant]  i.  (ra.)  a  living  being,  creature,  a 
sentient  &  rational  being,  person  D  1.17.  34,  53,  56,  82  ; 
n.68;  A  1.35  sq.,  55  sq. ;  S  1.135  ;  v. 41  ;  Vin  1.5  ;  Miln  273  ; 
Vism  310  (def"  :  "  riip'adisu  khandhesu  chandaragena 
satta  visatta  ti  satta,"  thus  =  satta') ;  Nett  161;  DA 
1. 51,  161  ;  VbhA  144.  — naraka°  a  being  in  purgatory 
(cp.  niraya")  Vism  500.  —  2.  (nt.)  soul  (=jivita  or 
virinana)  Pv  1.8I  (gata°  =  vigata-jivita  PvA  40). — 
3.  (nt.)  substance  Vin  1.287.  nissatta  non-substantial, 
phenomenal  DhsA  38. 

-avasa  abode  of  sentient  beings  (see  nava^  2)  D  111.263, 
268;  A  V.53 ;  Vism  552;  VbhA  168.  -ussada  (see 
ussada  4)  teeming  with  life,  full  of  people  D  1.87,  iii, 
131.  -loka  the  world  of  living  creatures  SnA  263,  442  ; 
Vism  205.  See  also  sankhara-loka.  -vanijja  slave 
trade  DA  1.235  =A  111.208  (C.  :  manussa-vikkaya) 

Satta^  [pp.  of  sapati  to  curse ;  Sk.  iapta]  cursed,  sworn 
J  111.460  ;  V.445. 

Satta'  (num.)  [cp.  Vedic  sapta,  Gr.  iirTi'i  ;  Av.  hapta ;  Lat. 
septem,  Goth.  sibun  =  E.  seven  etc.]  number  seven. 
It  is  a  collective  and  concluding  (serial)  number ; 
its  application  has  spread  from  the  week  of  7  days 
(or  nights),  and  is  based  on  astronomical  conception 
(Babylon  !),  this  science  being  regarded  as  mystic,  it 
invests  the  number  with  a  peculiar  magic  nimbus. 
From  time-expressions  it  was  transferred  to  space,  csp. 
when  originally  connected  with  time  (like  satta-bhumaka 
the  7-storied  palace  ;  the  Vimanas  with  700  towers  :  see 
vimana  2  &  6  ;  or  the  7  great  lakes  :  see  sara'  ;  "yojana 
7  miles,  cp.  the  7  league-boots!).  Extremely  frequent 
in  folklore  and  fairy  tales  (cp.  7  years  of  famine  in 
Egypt.  7  days'  festivals,  dragon  with  7  heads,  7  ravens. 
7  dwarfs,  7  little  goats,  7  years  enchantment,  etc.  etc.). — 
For  time  expressions  see  in  cpds.  :  °aha,  °masa,  "ratta, 
°vassa.  Cp.  Sn  446  (vassani) ;  J  11.91  (kaya,  thick 
masses);  DA  1.25  (of  the  Buddh.  Scriptures:  sattahi 
masehi  sangitar)) ;  DhA  11.34  (dhanani),  101  (mangala) ; 
the  collective  expression  7  years,  7  months,  7  days  at 
J  v. 48  ;  the  7X  70  nanavatthflni  S  11.59  ;  and  the  curious 
enumeration  of  heptads  at  D  1.54.  —  Cases  :  instr. 
sattahi  D  1.34 ;  gen.  sattannai)  D  1.56 ;  loc.  sattasu 
n  11.303  =M  1. 61. 

-anga  a  couch  with  7  members  (i.  e.  four  legs,  head 
support,  foot  support,  side)  Vin  11. 149.  -attha  seven  or 
eight  J  ii.ioi.  .-agarika  a  "  seven-houser,"  one  who 
turns  back  from  his  round,  as  soon  as  he  has  received 
alms  at  7  houses  D  1.166.  -alopika  a  "  seven-mouthful," 
one  who  does  not  eat  more  than  7  bits  D  1.166.  -aha 
(nt.)  seven  days,  a  week  of  7  days  [cp.  BSk.  saptaka 
D ivy  99]  D  11.248;  Vin  i.i,  139;  J  1.78;  11.85;  iv.360  ; 
v.472  ;  VI.37 ;  DhA  1.109;  VvA  63.  satta°  7  weeks 
DhA  1.86  ;  cp.  satta-satta-divasa  J  v. 443.  -ussada  (see 
ussada  2)  having  7  prominences  or  protuberances  (on 
the  body),  a  sign  of  a  Mahapurisa  D  11. 18  ;  in. 144.  151 
(i.  e.  on  both  hands,  on  both  feet,  on  both  shoulders,  on 
the  back),  -guna  sevenfold  Mhvs  25,  36.  -jata  with 
seven  plaits  (of  hair)  J  v.g I  (ofahunter).  -tanti  having 
7  .strings,  a  lute  VvA  139.  -tala  (-matta)  (as  big  as) 
7  palm  trees  DhA  n.62,  100.  -tigsa  37  (see  bodhi- 
pakkhiya-dhamma).  -dina  a  week  Mhvs  11,  23.  -pa- 
karanika  mastering  the  7  books  of  the  Abhidhammn 
J  1. 312  ;  DhA  III. 233.  -patittha  sevenfold  firm  D  n.174  ; 
Miln  282.     -padar)  for   7  steps    J    vi.351    (Kern,   Toev. 


s.  V.  "  unfailing  ").  -bhiimaka  (pasada)  (a  palace)  with 
7  stories  Mhvs  37,  1 1  :  J  1.58  ;  iv.378  ;  DhA  1.180,  239  ; 
IV. 209.  -masag  (for)  seven  months  PvA  20.  -yojanika 
7  miles  in  extent  J  v. 484.  -ratana  the  7  royal  treasures 
D  1.88  ;  It  15  ;  J  v. 484.  -ratta  a  week  J  vi.230  (dve°  = 
a  fortnight),  304  ;  Sn  570.  -vassika  7  years  old  Miln  9. 
310  ;  DhA  11.87,  89  (samanera).  139  ;  PvA  53  (Sankicca 
arahattar)  patva) ;  Dh.\  111.98  (kumaroarahattar)  patto)  ; 
J  V.249.  On  the  age  of  seven  as  that  of  child  arahants 
see  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  in  Brethren  introd.  xxx.  -visati  twenty 
seven  DhA  1.4. 

Sattakkbatturi  (adv.)  [cp.  tikkhattui)  etc.]  seven  times 
Vin  1.3;  It  18;  sattakkhattuparamai)  seven  times  at 
the  utmost ;  "parama  one  who  will  not  be  reborn  more 
than  seven  times  S  11. 134  sq.  ;  A  1.233,  235;  iv.381  ; 
Kvu  104;  Pug  15  sq.  ;  Nett  189;  KhA  187;  J  1.239; 
DhA  III. 61,  63. 

Sattati  [cp.  Sk.  saptati]  seventy  D  11.256;  Ap  118,  126  & 
passim.     As  sattari  at  S  11. 59  ;  Ap  248  &  passim. 

Sattatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  satta-]  state  of  having  existence 
I">  1.29. 

Sattadha  (adv.)  [fr.  satta*,  cp.  dvidha]  in  seven  pieces 
n  1.94;  11.235;  Sn  783;  J  v. 33,  493;  DhA  1. 17,  41.  Cp. 
phaJati. 

Sattapanni-rukkha  N.  of  a  tree.  Mhvs  30,  47  ;  cp.  satta- 
panni-guha  N.  of  a  cave  KhA  95. 

Sattama'  (adj.)  [superl.  fr.  sant]  best,  excellent  Sn  356; 
J  1.^33. 

Sattama'  (num.  ord.)  [fr.  satta*]  the  seventh  D  1.89  ; 
Sn  103.  —  f.  "mi  Sn  437.  Often  in  loc.  "divase  on  the 
7th  day  Sn  983  ;  J  1.395  :  Miln  15  ;  PvA  6,  74.  -°bha- 
vika  one  who  has  reached  the  7"'  existence  (or  rebirth) 
Kvu  475  (cp.  trsl'  271*). 

Sattarasa  (num.  card.)  [satta*-l-rasa2  =  dasa]  seventeen 
Vin  1.77  ;  :v.ii2  ("vaggiya  bhikkhu,  group  of  17). 

Sattari  =  sattati,  at  S  11.59  sq. 

Sattali  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  saptala,  name  of  var.  plants,  e.  g. 
jasmine,  or  many-flowered  nykkanthes,  Halay.  2,  52] 
the  plantain,  and  its  flower  J  iv.440  ( =  kadali-puppha 
C. ;  so  read  for  kandala") ;  and  perliaps  at  Th  2,  260  for 
pattali  (q.  v.),  which  is  expl''  as  kadali(-makula)  at 
ThA  211. 

Sattava  =  satta^  [a  diaerctic  sattva]  J  v. 351.  Cp.  Lai. 
Vist.  520. 

Satti^  (f.)  [fr.  sak,  cp.  Vedic  Sakti]  ability,  power  Dhtp  508 
Usually  in  phrase  yatha  satti  as  much  as  one  can  do. 
according  to  one's  ability  Cp  1. 10'  ;  DhA  1.399  ;  or  yatha 
sattir)  D  1.102,  or  y.  sattiya  DhA  1.92. 

Satti^  (f.)  [cp.  Vedic  Sakti,  orig.  identical  with  sattii] 
I.  knife,  dagger,  sword  A  IV.130;  J  n.153;  Vism  313 
(digha-danda°  with  a  long  handle);  DhA  1.189;  11. 134 
(tikhina"  a  sharp  knife).  mukha°  piercing  words 
J  1. 34 1.  —  2.  a  spear,  javelin  S  1.13  ;  A  11.117 ;  J  1.150. 
-panjara  latticework  of  spears  D  11.164.  -langhana 
javelin  dance  J  1.430.  -simbali-vana  the  forest  of 
swords  (in  purgatorj')  J  v. 453.  -siila  a  .sword  stake, 
often  in  simile  °iipam5  kiimu  S  1.128  ;  A  111.97  :  Vism  341. 
Also  N.  of  a  purgatory  J  v. 143  sq. 

Sattika  see  tala". 

Sattu^  [Vedic  satru]  an  enemy  J  v.94  (ace.  pi.  sattavo) ; 
Vism  234  ("iiimmathana). 

Sattu^  [cp.  Sk.  saktu]  barley-meal,  flour  Vin  ii.i  16  (satthu) ; 
Ndi  372  ;  J  III. 343  sq.  ;  Pv  iii.i^  ;  Dhs  646 


-apana  baker's  shop  J  vi.365. 
"bhasta'id.  J  111.346. 


pasibbaka  flour  sack ; 


Sattuka 


133 


Saddahati 


Sattuka  [fr.  sattu^]  an  enemy  J  111.154  ;  Mhvs  32,  18. 

Sattha'  (nt.)  [cp.  \'edic  sastra,  £r.  sas  to  cut]  a  weapon, 
sword,  knife;  coll.  "arms"  D  1.4,  56;  Sn  309.  819 
(expl"!  as  3:  kaya°,  vacl°,  mano°,  referring  to  A  iv,42, 
at  Ndi  :5i);  J  1.72,  504;  Pv  iii.io*;  SnA  458  (°mu- 
khena) ;  PvA  253.  Often  in  comb"  danda 4- sattha  (cp. 
danda  4),  coll.  for  "  arms,"  \'in  1.349  ;  D  1.63  ;  A  iv.249  ; 
Nd*  576.  — satthai]  aharati  to  stab  oneself  S  1.121; 
III. 123  ;  IV. 57  sq. 

-kamma  application  of  the  knife,  incision,  operation 
\'in  1.205;  SnA  100.  -karaka  an  assassin  Vin  in. 73. 
-vanijja  trade  in  arms  A  in. 208.  -haraka  an  assassin 
Vin  111.73  ;  S  iv.62. 

Sattha"  (nt.)  [c£.  V'edic  sastra,  fr.  sas  to  teach]  a  science, 
art.  lore  Miln  3  ;  SnA  327,  447.  — vada"  science  of  right 
belief  SnA  540 ;  sadda°  grammar  SnA  266 ;  supina" 
dream-telling  SnA  564. 

Sattha^  [sa'+attha ;  Sk.  sartha]  a  caravan  D  11. 130,  339; 
Vin  1.152,  292  ;  Nd'  446  ;  Dh  123  (appa°  with  a  small  c), 
Miln  351 . 

-gamaniya  (magga)  a  caravan  road  \in  iv.63.  -vasa 
encampment  D  11  340,  344.  -vasika  &  °vasin  caravan 
people  J  1.33  V  -vaha  a  caravan  leader,  a  merchant 
P  11.342  ;  Vv  84'  (cp.  VvA  337) ;  leader  of  a  band, 
teacher  ;  used  as  Ep.  of  the  Buddha  S  1. 192  ;  It  80,  108  ; 
\'in  1.6.  In  exegesis  of  term  Sallhii  at  Nd'  440=Nd'' 
630  =Vism  208. 


sas]  told,  taught   J   11.298   (v.  I. 


Sattha^   [pp.   of  sasati 
sittha). 

Sattha^  (adj.)  [wrong  for  satta=sakta]  able,  competent 
J  111.173  (  =  samattha  C). 

Sattha°  [cp.  Sk.  svasta,  svas]  breathed  :  see  vissattha. 

Satthaka'  (nt.)  [fr.  sattha']  a  knife,  scissors  Vin  11. 115 
(danda°,  with  a  handle) ;  J  v. 254  (as  one  of  the  8  parik- 
kharas) ;  Miln  282      aya°  at  J  v. 338  read  "pattaka. 

-nisadana  [cp.  Sk.  nisatana]  knife-sharpening  DhA 
1.308,  cp.  Miln  282  °nisana  [~Sk.  nisana].  -vata  a 
cutting  pain  A  i.ioi  =307  ;  J  in. 445. 

Satthaka~  (adj.)  [fr.  sattha"]  belonging  to  a  caravan, 
caravan  people,  merchant  PvA  274. 

Satthar  [Venic ^astj-.  n.  ag.  fr.  Sas]  teacher,  master.  —  nom. 
sattha  D  1.49;  Sn  179;  ace.  satthararj  D  1.163;  Sn 
153,  343;  instr.  satthara  JD  1.163;  instr.  satthuna 
Mhvs  32,  19;  gen.  satthu  O  i.iio;  It  79;  Vin  1.12  ; 
gen.  satthuno  D  11. 128;  Sn  547,  573,  loc.  satthari 
Dhs  1 004  ;  nom.  and  ace.  pi.  sattharo  D  1.230  ;  A  i  277 ; 
Miln  4;  gen.  pi.  sattharanar)  J  1.509.  —  See  e.  g. 
D  1.230  ;  A  1.277  ;  Vin  1.8  ;  Th  2,  387.  —  The  6  teachers 
(as  in  detail  at  D  1.52-59  &  var.  places)  are  Purana 
Kassapa,  Makkhali  Gosala,  Nigantha  Nathaputta, 
Sanjaya  Belatthiputta.  Ajita-Kcsakambali.  — 5  teachers 
at  Vin  11.186;  A  111.123.- — 3  at  D  1.230;  A  1277. — 
The  Ma.ster  par  excellence  is  the  Buddha  D  i.iio; 
11.128  ;  iii.i  19  sq.  ;  A  111.248  ;  iv.120,  460  ;  Sn  153,  545, 
955  (see  exegesis  in  detail  at  Nd'  446  Nd*  630),  1 1  48  ; 
Vism  389,  401,  604.  — ^  gana-satthar  leader  of  a  company 
J  11.4 1,  72  ;  satthara-dassana  sight  of  the  Master  SnA 
49  ;  satthu -d-anvaya  successor  of  the  M.  Sn  556. 

Satthi'  (nt.  &  f.)  [cp.  Sk.  sakthi]  Ine  thigh  Vin  n.i6i  ; 
Th  I,  151;  Vv  81";  J  11.408;  III. 83;  VI. 528;  antara" 
between  the  thighs  A  11.245. 

Satthika  (adj.)  [fr.  sattha"]  belonging  to  a  caravan  D  11.344. 

Satthu  see  sattu*  ;  satthu"  see  satthar. 

Satthuka  "  having  a  teacher,"  in  atlta°  [belonging  to  the 
whole  cpd]  whose  teacher  is  dead  D  n.154. 


Satthuna  [?]  a  friend  J  1.365. 

Satthuvaniia  tsatthar°4-vaijna]  gold  (lit.  the  colour  of  the 
Master)  \'in  in. 238,  240. 

Sathera  (adj.)  [sa'' -1- thera]  including  the  Theras  A  11.109 

Sadattba  [sat  (  =  sant)-)-attha]  the  highest  good,  ideal 
1>  11  141  ;  M  1.4  ;  A  v. 207  sq.  ;  Dh  166  ;  Mhvs  3,  24.  It 
may  be  taken  as  sa*-t-attha  (with  eupho'nic-d-),  i.  e. 
one's  own  good,  as  it  is  expl''  bj'  Bdhgh  at  DhA  in.  160 
("  sake  atthe  "),  &  adopted  in  trsl"  at  Dial.  11.154. 

Sadatthuta  (adj.)  [sada -1- thuta]  always  praised  J  iv.ioi 
( =nicca-pasattha  C). 

Sadara  (adj.)  [sa"4-dara]  fearful,  unhappy  A  11. 172; 
M  1.280,  465  =  D  111.57  (reads  dd). 

Sadasa  [sa-l-dasa]  a  squatting  mat  with  a  fringe  Vin  iv.i7i. 

Sadassa  [sat(  =  sant)4-assa]  a  horse  of  good  breed  A  1.289. 

Sada  (adv.)  [fr.  sar)°]  always  Sn  1041,  1087,  iii9;Nd*63i 
(where  long  stereotype  definition);  Dh  79;  Pv  11.8" 
(  =  sabbakalar)  yavajivai)  PvA  no);  11.9"  (  =  sabba- 
kalar)  divase  divase  sayan  ca  pato  ca  PvA  127): 
IV. i'". 

-matta  "  always  revelling,"  N.  of  a  palace  J  1.363  sq 
(cp.  Divy  603) ;  a  class  of  devas  D  11.260. 

Sadisa  (adj.)  [sa*-l-  disa  =drsa]  similar,  like,  equal  D  11.261  ; 
S  111.48  sq.  ;  A  1.125  =  Pug  35;  Vin  1.8;  J  1.191  ;  Dhs 
116;  Vism  543=VbhA  148.     Cp.  sadisa. 

Saderita  see  saterita. 

Sadevaka  (adj.)  [sa'-l-deva-l-ka]  together  with  the  devas, 
with  the  deva  world  D  1.62  ;  111.76,  135  ;  Sn  86  ;  Vin  1.8, 
1 1  ;  Dh  44  ;  DA  1.174.  At  J  1. 14  sadevake  (loc.)  is  used 
in  the  sense  of  "  in  the  world  of  men  &  gods." 

Sadevika  (adj.)  [.sa"H-devi-|-ka]  together  with  his  queen 
Mhvs  33.  70. 

Sadda  [cp.  late  Vedic  sabda ;  BSk.  sabda  as  nt.  at  AvS 
1.3]  1.  sound,  noise  D  1.79,  152  ;  in.  102  sq.,  146,  234. 
244  sq.,  269,  281  ;  M  111.56,  267  ;  A  111.30  sq.  ;  iv.gl,  248  ; 
J  1.3  (ten  sounds);  Sn  71  ;  Vism  408  (var.  kinds);  Dhs 
621  (udaka°);  DhA  11. 7  (udriyana") ;  def"*  at  Vism  446 
("  sota-patihanana-lakkhai;ia,"  etc.)  &  at  VbhA  45 
("  sappati  ti  saddo,  udahariyati  ti  attho  ").  —  2.  voice 
J  11.108.  -—3.  word  Vin  i.ii  ;  It  114;  DhA  1.15  (itthi°); 
\bhA  387  (in  nirutti) ;    SnA  261,  318,  335. 

-kovida  a  grammarian  or  phonetician  SnA  321.. 
-dhatu  element  of  sound  Dhs  707.  -naya  science  of 
grammar,  etymology  Kh.\  107.  -bheda  word  analysis 
\"ism  519  sq.  -vidu  a  grammarian  Sn.V  lOy.  -vedhin 
shooting  by  sound  Mhvs  23.  85.  -sattha  science  of 
words,  grammar  Sn.\  266.  -siddhi  analysis  or  correct 
formation  of  a  word,  grammatical  explanation  Sn.\  304. 
.551- 

Saddana  (nt 
Dhtm  401 . 

Saddala  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  iadvala]  grassy  Th  i,  21 1  ;  J  1.87  ; 
VI.  518;  Miln  286;  Pv  u.iz'^o  (=taruna-tina  PvA  158). 

Saddahati  [V'^edic  ^rad-dha.  only  in  impcrs.  forms  grd. 
srad-dadhana ;  pp.  srad-dhita  ;  inf.  srad-dha  ;  cp.  Av. 
.Traa-da  id.  ;  Lat.  crcd-(d)o  (cp.  "  creed  ") ;  Oir.  cretim  to 
believe.  Vr.  Idg.  'kred  (cord"  hcart)H- •dhe,  I't.  to 
put  one's  heart  on]  to  believe,  to  have  faith  1)  11.115  ; 
244;  S  111.225;  Pv  11.8';  J  V.480 ;  DhA  11.27.  PPf 
saddahanto  DA  1.81  ;  PvA  148  (a"),  151  (a°),  285;  & 
saddahana  S  1  20.  214;  Sn  186;  It  112.  Pot  saddheyya 
J  n.  I  ('•  (  saddaheyya  C);  2'"'  pi.  saddahe'^ha  |  in  i>i"  ; 
■3"' pi.  saddheyyur)  S  11.255.     At  J  vi.575  (I'ot.)  saddahe 


[fr.  sabd :  see  saddayati]   making  a  noise 


Saddabana 


134 


Santa 


seems  to  be  used  as  an  exclamation  in  the  sense  of  "  I 
wonder"  (cp.  nianne).  — saddahase  at  Pv  iv.S^  is  to  be 
read  saddayase  (see  saddayati).  —  grd.  saddhatabba 
J  11.37;  V.480 ;  PvA  2iy;  saddahatabba  D  ii34i>: 
saddahitabba  Miln  310;  saddhesrya  Vin  111.188;  and 
saddhayitabba  (Cans.  !)  PvA  109.  A  Cans.  aor.  2  sg. 
is  (ma)  .  .  .  saddahesi  J  vi.i36''"'  —  ger.  saddhaya 
J  V.176  (^saddahitva  C.) ;  inf.  saddhatur)  J  v. 445. — 
pp.  (Cans.)  saddhayita.  — Caus.  II.  saddahapeti  to  make 
believe,  to  convince;  Pot.  "dahapeyya  J  vi.575  ; 
Pv  IV. 1^5;  fut.  "dahapessati  J  1.294. 

Saddahana  (f.)  [fr.  .sad4-dhal  believing,  trusting,  having 
faith  Nd^  632  ;  Dhs  12,  25  ;  Nett  15,  19 ;  DhA  1.76. 

Saddayati  [Denom.  fr.  sadda;  i.  e.  sabd]  cp.  Epic  Sk.  sab 
dayati  A  sabdayati]  i.  to  make  a  sound  Miln  258; 
Pv  IV. 8'  (saddavase  read  for  saddahase);  iv.16'  (id.); 
Ud  61  ("ayamana  noisj'). —  2.  to  call,  summon  (with 
ace.)  J  111.288. 

Saddita  [pp.  of  sabd;  cp.  saddayati]  sounded,  called  Sdhp 
100. 

Saddula  [cji.  Sk.  sardrda]  a  leopard  Miln  23. 

Saddha^  {b-Aj.)  [orig.  adj.  of  saddha^,  but  felt  to  be  adj.  of 
saddha;  cp.  BSk.  Sraddha  AvS  1.83,  383]  i.  believing 
faithful  T)  1.171  ;  S  1.43;  n.159  sq. ;  A  1.150  ;  11. 164, 
227  sq.  ;  III. 3  sq.,  34,  182  ;  iv.38,  145,  314  sq. ;  v. 10  sq., 
124  sq. ;  Sn  188,  371;  Dh  S";  Pv  i.io'>;  iv.i8«;  DhA 
11.82.  — as(s)addha  unbelieving  PvA  42,  54,  67,  243  A 
pa.ssim  (see  a").  —  2.  credulous  Sn  853  ;  Dh  97. 

Saddha^  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  &  Siitra  literature  sraddha,  fr. 
srad-dhaj  a  funeral  rite  in  honour  of  departed  relatives 
connected  with  meals  and  gifts  to  the  brahmins  D  1.97  ; 
A  1. 166;  v. 269,  273  ;  DA  1.267;  saddhag  pamuncati  to 
give  up  offerings,  to  abandon  Brahmanism  Vin  1.7  ; 
D  11.39;  Sn  1146.  The  word  is  n.  according  to  Abhp 
and  A  V.2O9-273  ;  loc.  °e,  D  1.97  ;  J  11.360  ;  kar)  saddhai) 
(ace.  in  a  gatha),  seems  to  be  f. ;  Com.  ib.  360  has 
saddha-bhattag,  a  funeral  repast  (v.  1.  saddha-"). 
Thus  it  seems  to  be  confused  with  saddha. 

Saddhamma  [sad(  =  sant)-t-dhamma,  cp.  BSk.  saddharma, 
e.  g.  Jtm  224]  the  true  dhamma,  the  best  religion,  good 
practice,  the  "  doctrine  of  the  good  "  (so  Geiger,  Pali 
Dhamma  pp.  53,  54,  q.  v.  for  detailed  discussion  of  the 
term)  M  1.46;  S  v. 172  sq.  ;  A  1.69;  in. 7  sq.,  174  sq., 
435  sq.  ;  v. 169,  3:7;  Sn  1020;  Dh  38;  J  v.483  ;  DhA 
IV.95.  Seven  saddliammas :  M  1.354,  356;  D  111.252, 
282  ;  A  IV. 208  sq.  —  Opp.  a-saddhamma  (q.  v.) ;  four  a°  : 
A  11.47  )  eight  ;  Vin  11.202. 

-garu  paying  homage  to  the  true  religion  S  1.140. 
-savana  hearing  the  (preaching  of  the)  true  dhamma 
D  III. 2 2 7,  274  ;  A  1.279  ;  11.245  ;  iv.25  sq.,  221  ;  v.115  sq. 

Saddha  (f.)  [cp.  Vedic  sraddha  :  see  saddahati]  faith  (on 
term  cp.  Geiger,  SayyuUa  trsl"  11.45')  D  1.63  ;  111.164  sq. ; 
S  l.i72  =  Sn  76  ;  S  V.196  ;  Dh  144  ;  A  1. 150,  210  ;  in. 4  sq., 
352  ;  iv.23  ;  v.96  ;  Dhs  12  ;  Miln  34  sq.  ;  Tikp  61,  166, 
277,  282.  — instr.  saddhaya  (used  as  adv.)  in  faith,  by 
faith  in  (ace.  or  gen.)  Vin  11.289  (ayasmantanay) ; 
J  v.176  (pabbajita) ;  PvA  49  (kammaphalag  s.) ;  or 
shortened  to  saddha  (-pabbajita)  M  1.123  ;  .\  1.24: 
J  1. 1 30.  The  same  phrase  as  saddhaya  pabbajita  at 
S  1. 120  is  expl'i  as  "  saddahitva  "  by  Bdhgh  (see  K.S. 
1.32  I ).  thus  taking  it  as  ger. 

-dnusarin  walking  according  to  faith  M  1.479  :  A  1.74  ; 
Pug  15;  Nett  112,  189.  -indriya  (saddh°)  the  faculty, 
i.  e.  the  moral  sense,  of  faith  D  in. 239,  278;  .\  11. 149; 
S  V.I93,  377;  Dhs  12,  62,  75  ;  Nett  19.  -cariya  living 
in  faith  Vism  loi.  -dejrya  a  gift  in  faith  D  1.5;  Vin 
1.298;  1V.30  ;  DA  1. 81.  -vimutta  emancipated  through 
faith  M  1.478;  A  1.74,  118  sq.  ;  Pug  15;  Nett  190. 
-vimutti  emancipation  through  faith  Pug  15. 


Saddhatar  [n.  ag.  fr.  saddahati.  i.  e.  sad -)- dhatar]  a  believer 
Sdhp  39. 

Saddhayika  (adj.)  [fr.  saddhaya,  ger.  of  saddahati!  trust- 
worthy D  11.320  ;  A  IV.  109  (so  read  for  °sika) ;  Th  2,  43. 
09. 

Saddhayita  [pp.  of  saddahati ;  BSk.  sraddhayita]  one  who 
is  trusted;  nt.  that  which  is  believed,  faith  Pv  11. 8». 
May  be  mis.speiling  for  saddhayika. 

Saddhig  (&  saddhi°)  (adv.)  [in  forra=Vedic  sadhrtg 
"towards  one  aim,"  but  in  meaning  =  Vedic  sadhryak 
(opp.  visvak,  cp.  P.  visurj)  "  together."  Cp.  also  Vedic 
sar)yak  =  P.  samma.  The  BSk.  is  sardhai),  c.  g.  s. 
viharin  AvS  11.139]  together;  as  prep,  (following  the 
noun) :  in  company  with  (inslr.)  D  1.31  ;  Vin  1.32  ; 
III. 188  (expW  as  "ekatn");  J  1.189;  11.273;  DA  1.35; 
Miln  23;  also  with  loc.  1">.\  1.15;  or  gen.  Vin  11. 154; 
J  1.420.  As  ad\-.  saddhig  agamasi  J  1.154,  cp.  saddhig- 
kilita  J  11.20. 

-cara  companion  Sn  45,  46  (=ekato  cara  Nd'  633): 
Dh  328.  -viharika  (saddhi")  co-resident,  fellow-bhikkhu  ; 
pupil  Vin  1.45  sq.  ;  A  111.70;  J  1.182,  224;  Vism  gy; 
DhA  II. 19.  -viharin  id.  A  11.239;  in.69 ;  J  i.i  ;  f. 
'viharinl  Vin  iv.291 . 

Saddhiya  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  *sraddhya]  only  in  neg.  a"  (q.  v.). 

Sadhana  (adj.)  [sa'-l-dhana]  wealthy,  rich  D  1.73;  J  1.334. 

Sadhamma  [sa'-l- dhamma]  one's  own  religion  or  faith 
M  1.523  ;  Sn  1020  ;  Bu  n.5  =  J  1.3. 

Sadhammika  [sa^ -i- dhamma -F  ika]  co-religionist  D  11.273. 

San'  [cp.  Vedic  sva,  gen.  sunah  ;  Av.  spa,  Gr.  Kinoi- ;  Lat. 
canis,  Oir.  cu,  Goth.  hunds  =  hound]  a  dog;  nom.  sg. 
sa  D  i.i66=M  1.77;  S  1.176;  in. 150;  Kvu  336.  For 
other  forms  of  the  same  base  see  suvana. 

San"  (=sar))  ace.  of  sa^. 

Sanacca  (nt.)  [ sa^ -1- nacca]  dancing  (-party)  Vin  n.267. 

Sanati  see  sanati. 

Sanantana  (adj.)  [for  sanatana  (cp.  puratana) ;  Idg. 
*seno  =  Gr.  f'/'og  old;  Sk.  sanah  in  old  times;  Av.  hana 
old,  Lat.  seneo,  senex  ("  senile "),  senatus ;  Goth, 
sineigs  old;  Oir.  sen  old]  primeval,  of  old;  for  ever, 
eternal  D  11.240,  244  ;  S  1.189  (cp.  K.S.  1.321  :  poranaka, 
santanag  va  panditanag  dhamma);  DhA  1.51. 

Sanabhika  (adj.)  [sa^-fnSbhi-t-ka]  having  a  nave  (of  a 
wheel)  D  II. 17,  172  ;  A  11.37  '■  ^^  both  places  comb''  with 
sa-nemika  "  with  a  felly  "  (i.  e.  complete). 

Sanamika  (adj.)  [sa'-fnama-l-ika]  having  a  name,  called 
Bu  II. 194  — J  1.28. 

Sanidassana  (adj.)  [sa^ -1- nidas.sana]  visible  D  in. 217; 
Dhs  1087. 

Sant  [ppr.  of  atthi]  i.  being,  existing  D  i.Ci,  152  ;  A  1.176; 
It  62  sq.  ;  Sn  98,  124.  —  2.  good,  true  S  1.17  ;  Dh  151.  — ' 
Cases  .  nom.  sg.  m.  santo  Sn  gS  ;  Miln  32  ;  Nd^  635 
(=samana) ;  f.  sati  (q.  v.) ;  nt.  santag  A  v. 8  ;  PvA  192  ; 
ace.  santag  D  11.65  ;  &  satag  J  iv.435  (opp.  asag);  instr. 
sata  D  11.55  ;  Ice  sati  D  11.32  ;  A  1.176 ;  in.338  ;  Sn  81  ; 
Dh  146  ;  It  85  ;  cS:  sante  D  161;  abl.  santato  Nett  88  ; 
DhsA  206  sq.  —  pi.  nom.  santo  M  1.24  ;  S  1.71  ;  Sn  450  ; 
It  62  ;  Dh  151  ;  nt.  santani  D  1.152  ;  ace.  sante  Sn  94, 
665;  gen.  satag  M  1.24;  S  1.17;  Sn  227;  instr.  sabbhi 
D  11.246;  S  1. 17,  56;  Miln  221— J  V.49  ;  Dh  151;  loc. 
santesu. — Compar.  santatara  It  62;  superl.  sattama 
(q.v.). 

Santa'  [pp.  of  sammati']  calmed,  tranquil,  peaceful,  pure 
D   I.T2  ;    \in   1.4;    S   1.5:   A    11. 18;   Sn    746;    Pv   iv.i" 


Santa 


135 


Santirana 


{  - upasanta-kilesa  PvA  230);  Miln  232,  (.09;  Vism  155 
(°anga;  opp.  ojaiik'anga) ;  DhA  11.13;  iu.83.  —  nt. 
peace,  bliss,  nibbana  S  iv.370. 

-indriya  one  whose  senses  are  tranquil  A  11.38  ;  Sn  144  ; 
Vin  1. 195;  J  1.506;  -kaya  of  calmed  bodj'  Dh  378; 
DhA  IV. 1 14.  -dhatnma  peaceful  condition,  quietude 
J  1.506  ;  -bhava  id.  Miln  265.  -manasa  of  tranquil  mind 
Vin  1. 195;  J  1.506.  -vasa  peaceful  state  DhA  iv.114. 
-vutti  living  a  peaceful  life  It  30,  121. 

Santa'  [pp.  of  sammati']  tired,  wearied,  exliausted  Dh  60  ; 
J  1.498;  Pv  u.g^*  (=parissama-patta  PvA  127). 

Santaka'  (adj.)  [fr.  sant ;  cp.  BSk.  santaka  Divy  280  etc.] 
I.  belonging  to  J  1.122  ;  nt.  property  J  1.91,  494;  DhA 
1.346.  —  2.  due  to  (gen.)  J  111.408  ;  iv.37.  —  3.  (being) 
in  the  power  of  J  iv.260  (bhaya°). 

Santaka'    (adj.)    [sa^  +  antaka]    limited    (opp,    anantika) 

5  V.272. 

Santaca  (f.)  [.')  bark  J  v. 202  ('.^attacag  ?). 

Santajjeti  [sag  +  tajjeti]  to  frighten,  scold,  menace  J  1.470  '• 
V.94  ;  ThA  65  ;  PvA  123,  195. 

Santatai]  (adv.)  [  — satatar),  or  fr.  sag+tan]  continually, 
only  in  cpds  :  "karin  consistent  A  11. 187  ;  "vutti  of  con- 
sistent behaviour  A  11. 187;  M  1.339;  °sila  steady  in 
character  M  1.339. 

Santatara  see  sant. 

Santati  (f.)  [fr.  sag  +  tan,  Ht.  stretch]  i.  continuity,  dura- 
tion, subsistence  Dhs  643;  Nett  79;  Miln  72,  185; 
VbhA  8,  170.  173;  VvA  25;  Vism  431,  449.  citta" 
continuity  of  consciousness  Kvu  458  ;  cp.  C-pd.  6,  153^, 
252  sq.  ;  dhamma"  continuity  of  states  Miln  40  ;  rupa° 
of  form  VbhA  2 1  ;  sankhara"  causal  connection  of 
material  things  Th  i,  716.  —  2.  lineage  Miln  ibo. 

Santatta^  [pp.  of  santappati]  heated,  glowing  D  11.335; 
M  1.453;  S  1.L69  {divasa°);  J  iv.118;  Miln  325;  PvA 
38  (soka°). 

Saatatta'  [pp,  of  santasatij  frightened,  disturbed  J  111.77 
(     santrasta  C). 

Santaneti  (&  "taneti)  [Caus.  of  sag -1- tan]  to  continue  A 
111.96  sq.  ;  S  IV. 104  ;  Pug  06  sq. ;  SnA  5  (see  santayati). 

Santappati  [sag  +  tappati'J  to  be  heated  or  chafed;  fig.  to 
grieve,  sorrow  M  1.188;  J  111.153.  —  pp.  santatta'  — 
Caus.  "tapeti  to  burn,  scorch,  torment  M  1. 128  ;  S  iv.56 
s(].  —  pp.  santapita. 

Santappita  ipp.  of  santappeti]  satistied,  pleased  J  11,44  ; 
Pv  11.8"  (     pii.iita  PvA  no). 

Sautappeti  L^''>">-  of  sag  +  tappati^J  to  satisfy,  please 
D  1.109;  Vin  1. 18;  J  1.50,  272. — pp.  santappita. 

Santara  (adj.)  [sa^4  antara,  cp.  E.  with-in]  inside;  in 
lomp"  "uttara  inner  &  outer  Vin  111.214;  iv.281  ;  "utta- 
rena  with  an  inner  iS:  outer  garment  Vin  1.298  ;  ThA  171  ; 
"bahira  within  &  without  D  1.74;  Dh  315;  J  1.125; 
DA  1.2 18;  DhA  111.488. 

Santarati  [sag  -f  tarati'j  to  be  in  haste,  to  be  agitated  ;  ppr. 
amana  ('rupa)  J  111.156,  172  ;  vi.12,  451. 

Santavant  (adj.)  [fr.  santa']  tranquil  Dh  378. 

Santasati  [sag-t-  tasati'l  to  be  frightened  or  terrified,  to  fear, 
to  be  disturbed  Miln  92.     ppr.  santasag  J  vi.306  (a°), 

6  santasanto  J  iv.ioi  (a°) ;  Pot.  santase  J  111. 147; 
V.378;  ger.  santasitva  J  11.398.  —  pp.  santasita  & 
santatta. 

Santasita  [pp.  of  santasati]  frightened  Miln  92  ;  PvA  260 
(=sulthu  tasita). 


Santana  (nt.)  [fr.  sag  4- tan]  1.  spreading,  ramification, 
tendril  (valli°)  KhA  48.  —  2.  one  of  the  5  celestial  trees 
J  VI. 239  (°maya  made  of  its  flowers).  —  3.  (also  m,) 
continuity,  succession;  lineage  S  111.143;  DA  1.46; 
Dhs.\  63,  217,  297;  Vism  555;  VbhA  164.  Cp.  citta° 
continuity  of  consciousness  Cpd.  167'. 

Santanaka  [santana -l-ka]  i.  (nt.)  =santana  i;  Vv.\  94, 
162  (°valli  a  sort  of  long  creeper).  miila°  a  spreading 
root  S  III. 155  ;  J  1.277.  —  2.=^santana  2  VvA  12. — 
3.  (nt.)  a  cobweb  Vin  1.48.  —  4.  offspring  S  1.8. 

Santapa  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  sag-l-tap]  burning;  heat,  fire;  fig. 
torment,  torture  Sn  1123  (cp.  Nd'  636);  J  1.502  ;  Miln 
97,  324;  VbhA  70  (various),  245  (aggi",  suriya");  Sdhp 
9.  57^- 

Santapita  [pp-  of  santapeti]  heated,  aglow  Th  2,  504. 

Santapeti  see  santappati. 

Santayati  [sag  4- tayati]  to  preserve  (connect  ?)  Vism  688 
(better  °dhayati)  =SnA  5  (reads  "taneti). 

Santaiana  (nt.)  &  °i  (f.)  [fr.  sag  +  tareti']  conveying  to  the 
other  shore  S  iv.174;  M  1.134. — f.  santarani  Ap  234 
(scil.  nava). 

Santasa  [sag-ftasa]  trembling,  fear,  shock  A  11.33; 
S  III  85  ;  J  r.274  ;  Miln  146,  207  ;  PvA  22. 

Santasaniya  (adj.)  [fr.  sag -1- tasana]  making  frightened, 
inspiring  terror  Miln  387. 

Santasin  (adj.)  [fr.  santasa]  trembling,  frightened  Dh  351. 

Santi  (f.)  [fr.  sam,  cp.  Sk.  °santi]  tranquillity,  peace  Sn  204  ; 
D  11.157  :  A  11.24  ;  Dh  202. 

-kamma  act  of  appeasing  (the  gods),  pacification 
D  1. 12  ;  DA  1.97.  -pada  "  the  place  of  tranquillity  "  ; 
tranquil  state,  i.  e.  Nibbana  A  11.18;  VvA  219.  -vada 
an  advocate  of  mental  calm  Sn  845  (°vada  in  verse); 
Nd'  203. 

Santika  ("t.)  [sa' -l- antika]  vicinity,  presence;  santikag 
into  the  presence  of,  towards  J  1.91,  185  ;  santika  from 
the  presence  of,  frum  J  1.43,  83,  189  ;  santike  in  the 
presence  of,  before,  with  D  1.79,  144  ;  Dh  i>  iMiln  408  ; 
Sn  379  ;  \in  1.12  ;  S  1.33  ;  J  V.4O7  ;  with  ace.  S  iv.74  ;  with 
abl.  .Mhvs  205  ;  nibbanasantikc  Dh  372  ;  instr.  santi- 
kena- by,  along  with  J  11  301  (if  not  a  mistake  instead  of 
suntikag  or  santike  ?). 

-4vacara  keeping  or  being  near  D  1.206;  11.139; 
J  >'J7- 

Santika  (f.)  [uncKar  in  origin  A  meaning]  a  kind  of  game, 
"  spellicans "  (Kh.  1).);  (Kern:  knibbclspel)  D  i.O; 
\in  11.10  ;  III. 180  ;  DA  1.85. 

Santitthati  [.sag-l- tiuhati]  I.  to  stand,  stand  still,  remain, 
continue  A  iv.ioi  (udakag  -  stands  still),  282,  302  sq. ; 
Pug  31  ;  J  1.26.  —  2.  to  be  established,  to  be  put  into 
order  Vin  ii.i  i.  —  3.  to  stick  to,  to  be  fixed  or  settled, 
to  be  composed  D  11.206;  in. 239  (citta) ;  S  v. 321; 
Vin  1.9,  15;  It  43.  —  4.  to  restrain  oneself  J  1.438.-- 
5.  to  wait  for  (ace.)  Dh.\  1.50.  —  l-'otms  pres.  santitthati 
D  11.206;  S  111.133;  san^hahati  J  vi.160;  &  santhati 
Pug  31  ;  J  IV  469.  ppr.  santhahanto  Vin  1.9  ;  Pot. 
santhahejrya  \in  11. 1 1  ;  S  v.321.  aor.  santhasi  Vin  1.15  ; 
santhahigsu  (3""  pi.)  S  11.224.  Inf.  santhatug  J  1.438; 
DhA  1.50.  —  pp.  santhita  —  Caus.  II.  santhapeti  (& 
"(hapeti). 

SantlraQa  (nt.)  [sagftirana]  investigation,  decision;  as 
t.t.  denoting  a  stage  in  the  act  of  sense-cognition, 
judging  an  impression  (see  Cpd.  28,  40.  238)  DA  1.194; 
DhsA  264.  2()0,  272  ;  \ism  459.  As  °a  (f.)  at 
Nett  82,  191.  -'kicca  function  of  judging  Tikp  33; 
Vism  21,  454. 


Santuttha 


136 


Saxiditthika 


Santuttha  [pp.  of  santussati]  pleased,  happy  D  1.60,  71  ; 
M  n.6  ;  A  11.209  ;  iv.232  sq.  ;  v. 25,  67,  130.  154.  maha", 
tlie  greatly  contented  one,  the  Arahant  DhsA  407. 


Santutthi  (f.)  [sag  +  tutthi]  satisfaction,  contentment 
D  1.71  ;  I\I  1.13  ;  Sn  265  ;  Dh  204;  A  11.27,  31  ;  111.219  sq., 

432  (a°);  DhA  iv.ui. 

Santutthita  (f.)  [abstr.  formation  fr.  last]  state  of  content- 
ment D  III. 115;  A  1.12  ;  Pug  25;  Vism  53;  Dhs  1367 
(a°). 

Santuleyya  (adj.)  [metric  for  °tulya,  grd.  of  sar)  +  tuleti] 
conuneasurable ;  neg.  a°  J  vi.283. 

Santus(s)ita  [pp.  of  santussati]  contented,  pleased,  happy 
S  III. 45  {°tussit'  atta) ;  Sn  1040  ;  Dh  362  (=sutthu  tusita 
DhA  IV.90) ;  Mhbv  31  (ss). 

Santassaka  (adj.)  [fr.  santussati]  content  Sn  144. 

Santussati  [sar)  + tussati]  to  be  contented,  or  pleased,  or 
happy;  ppr.  "amana  Sn  42.  —  pp.  santuttha  &  "tusita. 

Santosa  [fr.  sag  +  tu?]  contentment  DA  1.204. 

Santhata  [pp.  of  santharati]  i.  spread,  strewn  with  (-°), 
covered  D  11. 160  ;  Vin  111.32  ;  Sn  401,  668.  — dhamani"- 
gatta  having  the  body  strewn  with  veins,  emaciated 
Vin  iii.i46  =  J  11.283;  J  1.346.  350  &  passim  (see  dha- 
mani).  Kem,  Toev.  s.  v,  considers  santata  the  right 
spelling.  —  2.  (nt.)  a  rug  or  mat  Vin  111.224;  Vv  63* 
( =tina-santharaka  VvA  262). 

Santhatika  (adj.)  [fr.  santhata  2]  sleeping  on  a  rug  Miln 
34^.  359. 

Santhana  (nt.)  [fr.  sam,  cp.  Sk.  santvana]  i.  appeasing 
Dh  275.  —  2.  satisfaction  Vv  18'. 

Santhamati  at  J  1.122  is  to  be  read  sandhamati  "  to  blow." 

Santhambhati  [sag  +  thambhati]  to  restrain  oneself,  to 
keep  firm  Sn  701  (imper.  med.  2"'i  sg.  "thambhassu) ; 
Pug  65;  J  1.255;  111.95.  —  Caus.  "thambheti  to  make 
stil'f  or  rigid,  to  numb  J  i.io. 

Santhambhana  (f.)  &  °thambhitatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  san- 
thambhati] stiffening,  stiffness,  rigidity  Dhs  636 ; 
DhsA  324;  J  1. 10  (a-santhambhana-bhava). 

Santhaia  [fr.  sag-l-str]  a  couch  or  mat  Vin  11.162  ;  A  1.277  ; 
Ap  97  (tina°). 

Santharaka=santhara;  only  as  tina°  made  of  grass  Vin 
1.24  ;  M  1. 501  ;  J  1.360  ;  VvA  262. 

Santharanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  santharati]  spreading,  strewing; 
"vata  a  wind  which  strews  things  about  SnA  67. 

Santharati  [sag -F tharati]  to  spread,  strew  D  11. 84. — -pp. 
santhata.  —  Caus.  santhareti  Mhvs  29,  12.  —  Caus.  II. 
santharapeti  to  cause  to  be  spread  Vin  iv.39  ;  Mhvs 
29.  9- 

Santharii]  (adv.)  [fr.  santhara]  by  way  of  spreading;  in 
sabba°  so  that  all  is  spread,  prepared  D  11.84;  cp.  Vin 
1.227,  384. 

Santhava  [fr.  sag-l-stu,  cp.  santhuta]  acquaintance,  inti- 
macy S  1. 17;  Sn  37,  168,  207,  245;  J  1.158;  11.27,  42, 
180;  Dhs  1059;  DhsA  364;  DhA  1.235.  nom.  pi. 
santhavani  Sn  844  =  S  111.9 ;  J  iv.98.  -°jata  having 
become  acquainted,  an  acquaintance  Nd'  ig8.  — a°- 
vissasin  intimate  without  being  acquainted  A  in.  136. 

Santhavana  (nt.)  [fr.  sag 4- thavati]  acquaintance  DhsA 
3'M 

Santhagava  [Sk.  sansthagara]  a  council  hall,  a  mote  hall 
D   i.yi  ;   II. 147;   A  11.207;   M  1.228,   353,  457;  111.207;' 


DA   1.256;   J    IV. 72,    147;   Vin   1.233;   VvA  298;  DhA 
1.347.     Cp.  sanfhana  3. 


Santhana  see  santhana. 

Santhara     [sag -l- thara]     spreading,     covering,     fioor(ing) 

5  I  170;  \'in  n.i3o  (3  kinds  of  floors:  itthaka",  sila°, 
daru°,  i.  e.  of  tiles,  flags,  wood) ;  A  1. 1 30  (panna°) ;  J  vi.24 
(id.);  J  1.92  ;  Ps  1.176.  — 2.  (cp.  pati°)  friendly  welcome 
A  1.93  (amisa°  &  dhamma"). 

Sautharaka  [santhara -l-ka  cp.  BSk.  sanstaraka  MVastu 
III. 272]  a  spread,  cover,  mat  Vin  11. 113  (tina"),  116. 

Santhuta  (adj.)  [sag  +  thuta]  acquainted,  familiar  J  1.365; 
III. 63   (cira°) ;   v. 448  (so  read  for  santhata);  Sdlip  31 
Neg.  a°  J  III. 63,  221  ;  VI.310.     Cp.  santhava. 

Santhutika  (adj.)  [fr.  santhuta]  acquainted  Vism  78. 

Sanda'  [cp.  Sk.  sandra]  i.  (adj.)  thick,  dense;  in  -°cchaya 
giving  dense  shade  S  iv.194;  J  1.57,  249;  D,\  1.209  — 
(2)  (thick)  wood,  forest;  in  -"vihara  dwelling  in  the 
wood,  life  as  a  hermit  Th  i ,  688. 

Sandati  [syand;  Dhtp  149:  passavane]  to  flow  D  II. 128, 

129  (aor.  sandittha)  ;  J  1.18;  vi  534  (v.  1.  sikandati — 
siyandati  ?)  ;  Pv  11. 10*  (  -  pavattcti  PvA  143). — Caus. 
sandapeti  to  cause  to  flow  Miln  122. — pp.  sanna. — 
Cp.  vissandati  &  vissandaka. 

Sandana'  (nt.)  trappings  D  II. 188  (read  sandana  ?). 

Sandana^  [cp.  Vedic  syandana]  a  chariot  Mhvs  21,  25; 
Dpvs  14,  56 ;  Vv  642  ;  J  IV.103  ;  v,264  ;  vi.22. 

Sandamanika  (f)  [fr.  syand]  a  chariot  vin  111.49 ;  iv.339  ; 
DA  1.82  ;  KhA  50  ;  Vism  255. 

Sandambhita  [fr.  Sk.  sandarbhati]  is  Kern's  proposed 
reading  for  santhambhita  at  J  vi.207. 

Sandassaka  [fr.  sandassati,  Caus.  of  sandissati]  instructing 
M  1. 145  ;  A  11.97  ;  IV. 296  ;  S  v. 162  ;  It  107  ;  Miln  373. 

Sandassana  showing  J  1.67. 

Sandahati  [sag -l- dahati']  to  put  together,  to  connect,  to 
fit,  to  arrange  J  iv.336 ;  Mhvs  vii.iS;  ppr.  med. 
sandahamana    DhsA    113;    ger.    sindahitva   J    iv.336; 

6  sandhaya  lit.  after  putting  on  J  iv.258  (the 
arrow  on  to  the  bow)  ;  fig.  with  reference  to,  concerning 
M  1.503  ;  J  1.203,  274  ;  11.177  ;  PvA  87,  89,  1 10  ;  towards 
J  1.49 1  ;  III. 295.  pp.  sandhiyate  [&  sandhisryate]  to  be 
put  together,  to  be  self-contained  Pug  32  ;  to  be  connected 
SnA  376,  572  ;  to  reflect  upon,  to  resent  Sn  366  ;  to  be 
reconciled  J  11. 114.  —  pp.  saghita. 

Sandabana  (nt.)  [fr.  sag-t-dha]  applying,  placing  (an 
arrow)  on  the  string  Miln  352. 

Sandana  (nt.)  [sag-l-dana,  fr.  da  to  bind:  see  dama],  a 
cord,  tether,  fetter  D  11.274;  Th  i,  290;  Dhp  398; 
Sn  622  ;  J  11.32  ;  Ud  77  (text  sandhana) ;  DhA  iv.ioi. 

Sandaleti  [sag -f  daleti]  to  break;  ger.  sandalayitvana 
Sn  62. 

Sandittha  [pp.  of  sandissati]  seen  together,  a  friend  J 
1. 106,  442  ;  Vin  III. 42  ;  yathasanditthag,  where  one's 
friends  live  D  11.98  ;  S  v. 152. 

Sanditthi  (f)  [fr.  sag-l-dfs]  the  visible  world,  worldly  gain 
D  III. 45,  247  ;  M  1.43  ;  Sn  891  ;  Vin  11. 8g  ;  Nd'  288,  300  ■ 
°paramasin  infected  with  worldliness  M  1.97. 

Sanditthika  [cp.  BSk.  sandr.stika  Divy  426]  visible ; 
belonging  to,  of  advantage  to,  this  life,  actual  D  1.51  ; 
11.93,  217;  111.5  ;  M  1.85,  474;  A  1. 156  sq. ;  11.56,  198; 
S  1.9,  117,  IV.41,  339  ;  Sn  567,  1137  ;  Vism  215  sq.  — As 
sanditthiya  (f  )  at  J  vi.213 


Sandita 


137 


Sannitodaka 


Sandita  [fr.  sag  +  da:  see  sandana)  bound,  tied.  Th  i,  290 
(ditllii-sandana"). 

Sandiddha  [sag  +  diddha]  smeared,  indistinct,  husky 
V'in  11.202  ;  PA  1.282. 

Sandiyyati  &  sandiyati  [sar)  +  diyyati{=diyati)  =  Sk.  diyate 
of  dyati,  i.  e.  da^  to  cut :  see  datta]  to  he  vexed,  to 
resent  S  11.200  sq. ;  J  vi.570  {spelt  vvrongly  sandhiyati ; 
C.  expl"  as  "  manku  hoti  "). 

Sandissati  [sag  +  dissati]  to  be  seen  together  with,  to  be 
engaged  in.  or  to  tally,  agree  with,  to  live  conformably 
to  (loc,  e.  g.  dhamme)  D  1,102  ;  11. 75  ;  S  v. 177  ;  Sn  50  ; 
D  II. 127;  Nett  23;  ppr.  a-sagdissamana  invisible  Davs 
IV. 30  ;  Caus.  sagdasseti  to  teach,  instruct  U  1.126;  11.95  ; 
Vin  1. 18;  to  compare,  verify.  D  11.124;  ppr.  sandassi- 
yamana  D  11. 124  ;  J  vi.217  (sunakhesu  sandissanti,  i.  e. 
they  are  of  no  more  value). 

Saudipeti  [sag  +  dipeti]  to  kindle  J  v. 32. 

Sandesa  [Sk.  sandesa]  news,  message  Mhvs  18,  13. 

Sandeba  [sag+deha]  1.  accumulation;  the  human  body 
Dh  148.  —  2.  doubt  Miln  295. 

Saadosa  [sag  +  dosa]  pollution,  defilement  M  1.17  ;  A  111.106, 
358  ;  V.292  ;  Sn  327. 

Sandhana  (nt.)  [sag  +  dhana]  property,  belongings  M  11. 180. 

Sandhanta  [pp.  of  sandhamati]  blown,  smelted  (of  gold. 
A  1.253. 

Sandhamati  [sag  +  dhamati]  to  blow,  to  fan  J  1.122. — 
pp.  sandhanta. 

Sandhatar  [sag  +  dhatar]  one  who  puts  together,  a  con- 
ciliator D  1.4  ;  III.  1 71  ;  M  1.345  ;  A  11.209  ;  Pug  57. 

Sandhana  (nt.)  [fr.  sag  +  dha]  i.  uniting,  conciliation, 
friendship  DA  1.74;  DhsA  113.  —  2.  bond,  fettei 
Ud  77  (read  sandana  ?). 

Sandhapana  (nt.)  [fr.  sandhapeti,  Caus.  of  sandahatij 
combination  VvA  349. 

Sandhaya  see  sandahati. 

Sandhaiaka  (adj.)  [fr.  sandhareti]  checking,  restraining 
Vism  205. 

Sandharana  (nt.)  [fr.  sandhareti]  checking  Miln  352. 

Sandhareti  [sag -1- dhareti]  i.  to  hold,  bear,  carry  J  111.184. 
—  2.  to  hold  up,  support  J  iv.167.  —  3.  to  curb, 
restrain,  check  Vin  11. 2 12;  J  11.26,  59.  — dussandhariya 
difficult  to  keep  back  J  in. 340. 

Sandhavati  [sag  +  dhavati]  to  run  through,  to  transmigrate 
D  1. 14;  A  II. I  ;  S  III. 149;  J  1.503:  aor.  sandhavissat) 
Dh  153  =  J  1.76  (  =  apar'  aparag  anuvicarig  DhA 
III. 128). 

Sandbi  (m.  &  f.)  [fr.  sag  +  dhai  '•  union,  junction  Miln  330 
(of  2  roads) ;  Bdhgh  on  S  11.270  (between  2  houses).  — 
2.  breach,  break,  hole,  chasm  D  ii.83=A  v. 195  ;  Th  i, 
786;  J  v. 459.  aloka°  a  window  Vin  11.172  ;  sandhig 
chindati  to  make  a  break,  to  break  into  a  house  D  1.52  ; 
DA  1. 159.  —  3.  joint,  piece,  link  J  11.88  ;  Vism  277  (the 
5,  of  kammatthana) ;  Mhvs  33.  11;  34,  47  ;  applied  to 
the  joints  of  the  body  Vism  185  (the  14  maha°) ;  DhsA 
324.-4.  connection,  combination  VbhA  191  (hetu- 
phala"  &  phalahetu"  etc.).  —  5.  euphonic  junction, 
euphony,  "  sandhi  "  Sn.\  76.  See  pada°.  —  6.  jigree- 
ment  Mhvs  9,  16. 

-cheda  (i)  housebreaking  J  1.187  sq.  ;  n.388.  —  (2)  one 
who  has  brought  rebirths  ( =patisandhi)  to  an  end  Dh 
97;  DhA  11.187;  III. 257.     -chedaka  one  who  can  cut  a 


break,  an  underminer  J  vi.458.  -bheda(ka)  causing 
discord  J  111.151.  -mukha  opening  of  a  break  (made 
by  burglars)  into  a  house  Th  i,  786;  PvA  4.  -samala 
(-sankativa)  refuse  heap  of  a  house-sewer  (cp.  A'.S.  11. 181, 
203)  D  II. 160;  M  i.334  =  S  11.270. 


having  5  links  or  pieces 


Sandhika  (adj.)  (-°),  in  pafica° 

Vism  277. 

Sandhiyati  see  sandahati. 

Sandhunati  [sag -f  dhunatij  to  shake  D  11.336. 

Sandhupeti  [sag -1- dhupeti]  to  fumigate  S  111.89  ;  Ps  11. 167. 
As  sandhupayati  to  cause  thick  smoke  or  steam 
thickly,  at  Vin  1.225;  Sn  p.  15  (=samanta  dhupayati 
SnA  154). 

Sandhovati  [sag -1- dhovati]  to  clean  A  1.253. 

Sandhovika  [fr.  sandhovati]  washing ;  kanna-sandhovika 
khidda  ear-washing  sport  or  gambol  (of  elephants,  with 
pitthi°  etc.)  A  v. 202.  So  probably  for  sanadhovika  at 
M  1.229,  375.     Cp.  sanadhovana  (?). 

Sanna'  [pp.  of  sidati]  sunk  Dh  327. 

Sanna'  [pp.  of  sandati]  flown  J  vi.203  (dadhi°). 

Sannakaddu  [lexicogr.  Sk.  sannakadru]  the  tree  Bu- 
chanania  latifolia  Abhp  556. 

Sannata  [pp.  of  sag -1- nam,  cp.  sannameti]  1.  bent  down, 
low  J  VI. 58  (opp.  unnata).  — 2.  bent,  prepared  J  v.215 
(C.  suphassita). 

Sannaddha  [pp  of  sannayhati]  I.  fastened,  bound,  D  11.350 
(susannaddha) ;  Miln  339. — 2.  put  on,  clothed  (with) 
Pv  IV. i^"  ("dussa).  —  3.  armed,  accoutred  S  11.284; 
J  I.I 79  ;  Dh  387  ;  DhA  iv.144  ;  PvA  154  (°dhanu-kalapa). 

Sannayhati  [sag -f  nayhati]  to  tie.  bind,  fasten,  to  arm 
oneself  J  1.129  ;  to  array,  arm  D  11175  ;  Vin  i.  342  ;  to 
arrange,  tit  D  1.96 ;  J  1.273  ;  aor.  sannayhi  D  1.96  ;  inf. 
sannayhitug  J  1.179;  ger.  sannayhitva  D  11. 175; 
J  11.77;  ^  sannahitva  J  1.273. 

Sannameti  [Caus.  of  sag -1- nam]  to  bend  M  1.365,  439,  450, 
5071=5  IV.  1 88  (kayag  sannameyya — i.  e.  to  writhe). 
Cp.  Cpd.  162  n.  5  ("  strengthen  "  ?). 

Sannaha  [fr.  sannayhati]  i.  dressing,  fastening  together 
PvA  231.  —  2.  armour,  mail  S  v. 6  ;  J  11.443  :  Th.  i,  543  ; 
J  II79- 

Sannikasa  (adj.)  [sag-f-nikasa]  resembling,  looking  like  J 
III. 522  ;  v87  =  vi.3o6;  v.169  (C.  dassana) ;  vi.240,  279. 

Sannikkhepana  (nt.)  [sag H- nikkhepana]  elimination  VbhA 
355- 

Sanniggai;^ati  [sag -l- nigganhati]  to  restrain  S  1.238, 

Sannighata  [sag  +  nighata]  concussion,  knocking  against 
each  other  Dhs  621. 

Sannicaya  [sag -t- nicaya]  accumulation,  hoarding  A  1.94; 
11.23  ;  Dh  92  ;  Vin  11.95  ;  iv.243  ;  DhA  11. 171  ;  A  iv.108 ; 
KhA  62  (lohita). 

Sannioita  [sag -t- nicita]  accumulated,  hoarded  Miln  120. 

Sannit^ana  (nt.)  [sag -1- nitthana]  i.  conclusion,  consum- 
mation, J  II. 166.  —  2.  resolve  J  1.19  ;  6g  ;  187;  iv.167; 
Vin  1.255  sq.  —  3.  ascertainment,  definite  conclusion, 
conviction,  J  vi.324  ;  Vism  43. 

Sannitajeti  [sag -1- nitaleti]  to  strike  J  v. 71. 

Sannitodaka  (nt.)  [fr.  sag -t- ni -1- tud]  "pricking,"  instigat- 
ing, jeering  D  1.189  ;  A  1.187  ;  S  11.282. 

VIII— 4 


Sannidhana 


138 


Sapadi 


Sannidhana  (nt.)  [sag  +  nidhana)  lit.  "putting  down 
together,"  proximity  Davs  v. 39. 

Saonidhi  [sag  +  nidhi]  putting  together,  storing  up  D  1.6; 
Sn  306,  924;  Nd'  372;  -kara  storing  D  1.6;  -karaka, 
storing  up,  store  M  1.523;  Vin  1.209;  iv.87 ;  D  111.235  ; 
A  III.  109  ;  IV. 370.  -kata  stored  up  Vin  11.270  ;  put  by, 
postponed  Vin  1.254. 

Sannipatati  [sag  +  nipatatij  to  assemble,  come  together 
J  1. 107;  pp.  "ita.  Caus.  sannipateti  to  bring  together, 
convoke  D  11.76  ;  Miln  6  ;  Caus.  II .  sannipatapeti  to  cause 
to  be  convoked  or  called  together  J  1.58,  153,  271  ; 
III. 376  ;  Vin  1.44  ;  111.71. 

Sannipatita  [pp.  of  °nipatati]  come  together  D  1.2  ;  11.76. 

Sannipata  [fr.  sannipatati]  i.  union,  coincidence  S  iv.68 
sq.  ;  Miln  60,  123  sq.  ;  Nett  28. — -2.  assemblage, 
assembly,  congregation  U  11. 5  ;  Miln  7.  —  3.  union  of 
the  humours  of  the  body  Miln  303.  — -  4.  collocation 
Dh  352. 

Sannipatika  (adj.)  [fr.  last]  resulting  from  the  union  of  the 
humours  of  the  body  A  11.87;  v. no;  S  iv.230  ;  Miln 
135.  137.  302.  304- 

Sannibha  (adj.)  [sag  +  nibha]  resembling  D  11.17;  Sn  551  ; 
J  '319. 

Sanniyojeti  [sag  +  niyojeti]  to  appoint,  command  Mhvs  5, 
34- 

Sanniyyatana  (nt.)  [sag  +  niyyatana]  handing  over,  resigna- 
tion DA  1.232. 

Sannirata  (adj.)  [sag  +  nirata]  being  (quite)  happy  to- 
gether J  v.405. 

Sanniiumbhati  ("rundhati)  [sag  +  nirumbhati]  to  restrain, 
block,  impede;  ger.  sannirumhitva  J  1.109,  164; 
11.6;  VvA  217.  sannirumbhitva  J  1.62;  11.341.  san- 
nirujjhitva  Vism  143;  Pot.  sannirundheyya  M  i.i  15. — 
pp.  sanniniddha  Vism  278. 

Sannirumhana  (nt.)  [fr.  last]  restraining,  checking,  sup- 
pression J  1.163 ;  DA  1.193  ;  as  °bhana  at  VbhA  355. 

Sannivatta  [  =sag  +  nivatta]  returning,  return  Vin  1.139  sq. 

Sannivasati  [sag  +  nivasati]  to  live  together,  to  associate 
A  1.78;  pp.  sanniruttha. 

Sanuivareti  [sag  +  nivareti]  to  restrain,  check;  to  keep 
together  M  1.115  ;  Th  2,  366. 

Sannivasa  [sag  +  nivasa]  association,  living  with  ;  com- 
munity A  1.78:  11.57;  D  III. 271  ;  Dh  206;  J  IV403  ; 
loka-sannivasa  the  soc'fity  of  men,  all  the  world  J  1.366  ; 
11.205. 

Sannivuttha  [pp.  of  sannivasati]  living  together  (with), 
associating  A  iv.303  sq. 

Sannivesa  [sag  4- nivesa]  preparation,  encampment,  settle- 
ment ThA  257. 

Sannivesana  (nt.)  [sag 4- nivesana]  position,  settlement; 
patiekka-"  private,  separate  J  1.92. 

Sannisaija  (f)  [sag4-nissajja]  meeting-place  Vin  1.188; 
11.174  =  111.66;  sannisajja-tthana  (n.)  the  same  Vin 
111.287. 

Sannisinna  [pp.  of  sannisidati]  i.  sitting  down  together 
D  1.2  ;  11.109  ;  Vin  11.296  ;  J  1.120.  — -  2.  (having  become) 
settled,  established  Vin  11.278  (°gabbha  pregnant). 

Sannisidati  [sag -l- nisidati]  i.  (lit.)  to  sink  down,  to  settle 
Miln  35.  —  2.  (fig.)  to  subside,  to  become  quiet  M  1.121  ; 
S  IV.  196;  A  11.157.  —  Caus.  sannisadeti  to  make  quiet. 


to  calm  M  1.116;  A  11.94.  —  Caus.  U.  sannisidapeti  to 
cause  to  halt  J  iv.258.  —  pp.  sannisinna. 

Sannissayata  (f)  [sag  4- nissayataj  dependency,  connection 
Nett  80. 

Sannissita  [sag  4- nissita,  cp.  BSk.  sannisrita]  based  on, 
connected  with,  attached  to  Vism  43,  118,  120,  554 
(vinnana  is  "  hadaya-vatthu"  "  ;  cp.  VbhA  163). 

Sannihita  [sag  4- nihita  ;  cp.  sannidhi]  i.  put  down,  placed 
Miln  326.  —  2.  stored  up  Th  2,  409  ;  ThA  267. 

Sannita  [pp.  fr-  sanneti]  mixed,  put  together,  kneaded 
Mhvs  29,  11  &  12. 

Sanneti  [fr.  sag4-neti]  to  mix,  knead  D  1.74  (Pot.  san- 
neyya) ;  111.29;  Vin  1.47  (grd.  "netabba);  JM  1.276; 
S  11.58  sq.  ;  J  VI. 432.  —  pp.  sannita. 

Sapajapatika  (adj.)  i.  with  Pajapati.  The  passage  under 
pajapati  i  was  disvorted  through  copyist's  default.  It 
should  read :  "  only  in  one  formula,  with  Inda  & 
Brahma,  viz.  deva  sa-indaka  sa-brahmak.H  sapaja- 
patika D  11.274  (without  sa-brahmaka) ;  S  111.90  — 
A  v. 325.  Otherwise  sapajapatika  in  sense  of  foil. 
.\lso  at  VbhA  497  with  Brahma."  —  2.  with  one's  wife 
Vin  1.23;  iv.62  ;  J  1.345. 

Sapati  [§ap,  cp.  Dhtp  184  "  akkose  "]  to  swear,  curse 
S  1.225  ;  J  V.104.  397;  Mhvs  25,  113;  VvA  336.  —  pp. 
satta^ 

Sapatika  (adj.)  having  a  husband,  a  woman  whose  husband 
is  alive  J  vi.i58  ;  PvA  86. 

Sapati  (f .)  having  the  same  husband  ;  a  rival  wife,  a  co- 
wife  Pv  i.6«  ;  11.3". 

Sapatta  [Sk.  sapatna]  hostile,  rival  Th  2,  347;  ThA  242  ; 
sapattaraja  a  rival  king  J  1.358  ;  11.94  •  ni.416  ;  asapatta 
without  enmity  Sn  150  ;  sapatta  (m)  a  rival,  foe.  It  83  ; 
A  IV.94  sq. ;  J  1.297- 

Sapattaka  (adj.)  [fr.  last]  hostile,  full  of  enmity  D  1.227. 

Sapattabhaia  [sa' -t- patta' 4- bhara]  with  the  weight  of  the 
wings,  carrying  one's  wings  with  oneself  D  1.71  ;  M  1. 180, 
268  ;  A  11.210  ;  Pug.  58. 

Sapattika  (nt.)  the  state  of  a  co-wife  Th  2,  216;  ThA  1  78. 
—  Kern,  Toev.  s.v.  proposes  reading  sa°. 

Sapatti  (f.)  [Sk.  sapatni]  a  co-wife  D  11.330 ;  J  1.398 ; 
IV.316,  491;  Th  2,  224;  DhA  1.47.  asapatti  without 
any  co-wife  S  iv.249. 


Sapatha  [fr.  4ap]  an  oath  Vin  1.347;  J  1.180,  267;  ill. 138; 
SnA  418. 

Sapadanag  (adv.)  [fr.  phrase  sa-padanag-carika ;  i.  e. 
ssi'  +  gen.  pi.  of  pada  (cp.  gimhana).  Weber  [Ind. 
Str.  III. 398)  suggests  sapada4-nag,  sapada  being  an 
instr.  by-form  of  sapada,  and  nag  an  enclitic.  Trenckner 
[Miln.  p.  428)  says  sapadi 4- ayana.  Kern  (Toev.  11.73) 
agrees  on  the  whole,  but  expl»  padanag  as  pad'ayanag] 
"  with  the  same  steps,"  i.  e.  without  interruption,  con- 
stant, successive  (cp.  Lat.  stante  pede  &  Sk.  adv.  sapadi 
at  once).  (1)  lit.  (perhaps  a  later  use)  of  a  bird  at 
J  V.358  (s.  salig  khadanto,  without  a  stop) ;  of  a  lion 
at  Miln  400  (sapadana-bhakkha).  (2)  appl''  in  phrase 
sapadanag  carati  to  go  on  uninterrupted  alms-begging 
Vin  IV. 191  ;  S  111.238  ;  Sn  413  ;  J  1.66  ;  Pv  IV. 3"  ;  VvA 
121;  and  in  phrases  sapadana-carika  J  1.89;  "carika 
(adj.)  Vin  111.15;  "carin  M  1.30;  11.7;  Sn  65;  Nd"  646. 
Also  as  adj.  sapadana  (piijdapata)  Vin  11.214. 

Sapadi  (adv.)  [sa*4-adv.  form"  fr.  pada]  instantly,  at  once 
Davs  1.62. 


Sapariggaha 


139 


Sabba 


Sapariggaha  (adj.)  [sa'  +  pariggaha]  1.  provided  with 
possessiuns  P  1.247;  Sn  393.  —  2.  having  a  wife, 
married  J  VI.3O9. 

SaparidaQ^S  (^O  a  cert,  class  of  women,  the  use  of  whom 
renders  a  person  liable  to  punishment  Vin  111.139  = 
A  v.264  =  M  1.286. 

Sapallava  (adj.)  [sa'  +  pallava]  with  the  sprouts  VvA  173. 

Sapaka  [san  +  paka;  cp.  Sk.  svapakal  "  dog-cooker,",  an 
outcast  or  Candala  J  iv.380.     Cp.  sopaka. 

Sappa  [cp.  Sk.  sarpa,  fr.  srp;  "  serpent  "]  a  snake  M  1.130  ; 
A  111.97,  260  sq.  :  Sn  768  ;  J  1.46,  239,  310.  372  ;  v. 447 
(kanha°);  Nd'  7;  DA  1.197;  SnA  13.  Often  in  similes. 
e.  g.  Vism  161.  587 ;  KhA  144  :  SnA  226,  333.  -°potaka 
a  young  snake  Vism  500  ;  -"phana  the  hood  of  a  snake 
KhA  50.  — Cp.  sappin. 

Sappaccaya   (adj.)    [sa^ 

cause,  conditioned  D 


hpaccaya]    correlated,    having    a 
1. 180;  A  1.82  ;  Dhs  1083. 


Sappanna  (adj.)  [sa' +  patiiia]  wise  M  1.225  :  Sn  591  ;  often 
as  sapanna  It  36 ;  Sn  go ;  J  11.65. 

Sappatigha  (adj.)  [sa^  +  patigha]  producing  reaction,  react- 
ing D  III. 217;  Dhs  597,  617,  648,  1089;  DhsA  317; 
Vism  451 . 

Sappatipuggala  [sa'-l-patipuggala]  having  an  equal,  com- 
parable, a  friend  M  1.27. 

Sappatibhaga  (adj.)  [sa'-l-patibhaga]  i.  resembling,  like 
D  II. 2  15  ;  J  1.303  ;  Pug  30  sq.  ;  Miln  37.  —  2.  having  as 
(equal)  counterparts,  evenly  mixed  with  M  1.320  (kanha- 
sukka") ;  Miln  379  (id.). 

Sappatissa  (adj.)  [sa-l-patissa,  cp.  BSk.  sapratiSa  Divy 
333  484]  reverential,  deferential  It  10  ;  Vin  1.45  :  Vv 
84*'  (cp.  VvA  347).     See  also  garava. 

Sappatissava  (adj.)  [sa-l-patissava]  deferential,  respectful 
nii>..\  125.  127  — J  1. 129.  131  ;  -ta  deference,  reverence 
Dhs  1327  =Pug  24. 

Sappati  [STP,  cp.  Vedic  sarpati,  Gr.  ffimo,  Lat.  serpo  ;  Dhtp 
194  "  gamana  "]  to  creep,  crawl  :  see  sag". 

Sappadesa  (adj.)  [sa' -(- padesa]  in  all  places,  all  round 
M  I  153. 

Sappana  (nt.)  [fr.  sappati]  gliding  on  DhsA  133. 

Sappa^ihariya  (adj.)  [sa'-l-patihariya]  accompanied  by 
wonders  I)  1.198  ;  S  v. 261  ;  Ud  63. 

Sappatihirakata  (adj.)  [sa'  +  patihira-l-kata]  made  with 
wonders,  substantiated  by  wonders,  substantiated,  well 
founded  D  1.198;  in. 121  ("has  been  made  a  thing  of 
saving  grace  "  Dial.  111.115,  q.  v.). 

Sappa^aka  (adj.)  [sa' -t- pana -t- ka]  containing  animate 
beings  \in  Mi. 125  ;  J  1.198. 

Sappaya  (adj.)  [sag -l- pa  (^pra-l-a)-(-i,  cp.  paya.  The 
corresponding  BSk.  form  is  sampreya  ( -sag-t-pra-l-i, 
with  guna),  e.  g.  Avis  1255:  iii.no]  likely,  beneficial, 
fit,  suitable  A  1.120;  S  in. 268  ;  iv.23  sq..  133  sq.  (Nib- 
bana°  pafipada) ;  J  1.182,  195;  11.436  (kigci  sappSyar) 
something  that  did  him  good,  a  remedy);  \'in  1292, 
302;  Miln  215  (sappayakiriya.  giving  a  drug),  nt 
something  beneficial,  benefit,  help  Vism  34.  87  (°sevin); 
VbhA  265  (various).  271  (°katha).  —  Ten  sappayas  & 
10  asappayas  at  DhsA  168.  —  sappayAsappayai)  what 
is  suitable,  and  what  not  J  1.2  15,  471  ;  used  as  the  last 
part  of  a  compound,  meaning  what  is  suitable  with 
reference  to :  senasanasappaya  (nt.)  suitable  lodgings 
J  215- 


Sappayata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  sappaya]  agreeableness,  suitability, 
convenience  Vism  79,  121  (a").  127. 

Sappi  (nt.)  [Vedic  sarpis]  clarified  butter,  ghee  D  1.9,  141, 
201;  A  1.278;  A  11.95.  207  ("tela);  111.219;  iv.103; 
Sn  295  ("tela).  Dhs  646  ;  J  1.184 ;  11.43  ;  iv.223  ("tela) ; 
Vin  1.58,  etc.  -°manda  [cp.  BSk.  sarpimanda  Divy  3 
etc.]  the  scum,  froth,  cream  of  clarified  butter,  the  best 
of  ghee  D  1.20 1  ;  A  11.95  ;  VvA  172  ;  Pug  70  ;  its  tayo 
guna  Miln  322. 

Sappin  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  sappati]  crawling,  creeping;  moving 
along  :  see  pitha".  —  (f.)  sappini  a  female  snake  ]  vi.339 
(where  the  differences  between  a  male  and  a  female  snake 
are  discussed). 

Sappitika  (adj.)  [sa'-l-plti-l-ka]  accompanied  by  the 
feeling  of  joy,  joyful  A  1.81  ;  J  i.io;  Vism  86  (opp. 
nippitika). 

Sapporisa  [sat  (=sant)-(-purisa]  a  good,  worthy  man 
M  III. 21,  37  ;  D  111.252  (the  7  s°-dhamma),  274,  276,  283  ; 
A  11.217  sq.,  239;  Dhs  259  =  1003;  Vin  1.56,  Dh  54; 
Pv  11.9' ;  11.9*' ;  IV.  i^';  J  1.202;  equal  to  ariya  M  1.8; 
S  111.4 ;  asappurisa  =  anariya  SnA  479.  sappurisatara 
a  better  man  S  v. 20. 

Saphala  (adj.)  [sa' -l- phala]  bearing  fruit,  having  its  reward 
Dh52. 

Saphalaka  (adj.)  [sa' -1- phalaka]  together  with  his  shield 
Mhvs  25,  63. 

Sabala  [Vedic  Cabala  (e.  g.  A.V  8,  i,  g)  ^ Ktpliepoi ,  Weber, 
Ind.  Stud.  11.297]  spotted,  variegated  Sn  675  ;  Vism  51  ; 
VvA  253  ;  name  of  one  of  the  dogs  in  the  Lokantara  hell 
J  VI.  106.  247  (Sabalo  ca  Samo  ca).  asabala,  unspotted 
D  11.80. 

-karin  acting  inconsistently  A  11. 187. 

Sabba  (adj.)  [Vedic  sarva  =  Av.  haurva  (complete);  Gr. 
iiXoc  ("  holo-caust  ")  whole;  Lat.  solidus  &  soldus 
"solid."  perhaps  also  Lat.  salvus  safe]  whole,  entire; 
all.  every  D  1.4  ;  S  iv.15  ;  Vin  1.5  ;  It  3  ;  Nd»  s.  v.,  nom. 
pi.  sabbe  Sn  66;  gen.  pi.  sabbesag  Sn  1030.  —  nt. 
sabbai)  the  (whole)  world  of  sense-experience  S  iv.15, 
cp.  M  1.3.  —  At  Vism  310  "  sabbe  "  is  defined  as  "  an- 
avasesa-pariyadanar)  "  In  comp"  with  superlative 
expressions  sabba"  has  the  meaning  of  "  (best)  of  all." 
quite,  very,  nothing  but.  all  round  ;  entirely :  °bala  the 
greatest  fool  D  1.59;  "pathama  the  very  first,  right  in 
front  PvA  56;  "sovanna  nothing  but  gold  IV  1.2*; 
II. 9*'  ;  "kanittha  the  very  youngest  PvA  in  ;  "atthaka 
in  every  way  useful ;  "sangahika  thoroughly  compre- 
hensive SnA  304.  —  In  connection  with  numerals  sabba" 
has  the  distributive  sense  of  "  of  each,"  i.  e.  so  &  so  many 
things  of  each  kind,  like  "catukka  (with  four  of  each, 
said  of  a  gift  or  sacrifice)  J  111.44 ;  DhA  in. 3  ;  "atthaka 
(dana)  (a  gift  consisting  of  8x  8  things)  Miln  291.  See 
detail  under  attha  B  i.  a.  —  °so]asaka  (of  16  each) 
DhA  111.3  ;  "sata  (of  100  each)  DhA  11.6. — Cases 
adverbially  instr.  sabbena  sabbarj  altogether  all,  i.  e. 
with  everj'thing  [cp.  BSk.  sarvena  sarvari  Divy  39.  144, 
270;  502]  D  11.57;  PvA  130;  131.  —  abl.  sabbato  "all 
round,"  in  every  respect  Pv  i.ii';  J  vi.76;  &  sabbaso 
altogether,  throughout  D  1.34;  Sn  288;  Dh  265;  PvA 
119  ;  Ndi  421  ;  DhA  IV.  100.  —  Derivations  :  i.  sabbattha 
ever^'where,  under  all  circumstances  S  1.134:  Dh  83; 
Sn  269;  Nd  133;  PvA  I,  18,  107;  VbhA  372  sq.  "kag 
everywhere  J  1.15,  176.  172;  Dafh  v. 57.  —  2.  sab- 
batha  in  every  way ;  sabbatha  sabbag  completely 
D  11.57;  S  IV. 167.  —  3.  sabbada  always  Sn  174.  197. 
536;  Dh  202;  Pv  1.9'  (=sabbakalari  C.) ;  i.io"  (id.), 
sabbada-cana  always  It  36.  —  4.  sabbadhi  (fr.  Sk. 
•sarvadha  -  vi(;vadha.  Weber.  Ind.  Sir.  111.392)  every- 
where, in  every  respect  D  1.251  ;  11. 186  ;  Sn  176  ;  Dh  90  ; 
also  sabbadhi  Sn  952,  1034;  Vin  1.38;  VbhA  377; 
Vism  308  (=sabbattha) ;  Nd>  441,  443. 


Sabbatthata 


140 


Samangin 


-atthaka  concerned  with  everything,  a  do  all  J  11.30  ; 
74;  DhA  n.151  (mahamatta).  —  profitable  to  all  Miln 
373  n  •  till)-  "f  kammatthana  Sn.V  11.54 :  Vism  97. 
-atthika  always  useful  Miln  153.  -4bhibhu  conquering 
all  Sn  211;  Vin  1.8.  -otuka  corresponding  to  all  the 
seasons  D  11. 179;  Pv  iv.12^;  Sdhp  248.  -kammika 
(amacca)  (a  minister)  doing  all  work  Vism  130.  -kalag 
always:  see  sada.  -ghasa  all-devouring  J  1.288.  -ji 
all -conquering  S  iv.83.  -(n)jaha  abandoning  everv^thing 
S  11.284;  Sn  211  ;  Dh  353=  Vin  1.8.  -fiiiu  omniscient 
M  1.482  ;  n.31,  126;  A  1.2 14;  Miln  74;  VbhA  50;  SnA 
229,  424,  585  ;  J  1.2 14  ;  335  ;  °ta  (f.)  omniscience  Pug  61  ; 
103  ;  J  1.2,  14  ;  Nett  Oi.  103  ;  also  \vritten  sabbanniita  ; 
sabbannuta-nana  (nt.)  omniscience  Nett  103  ;  DA  1.99  : 
VbhA  197.  Also  \vTitten  sabbannii°,  thus  J  1.75  ; 
-dassavin  one  who  sees  (i.e.  knows)  everjiihing  ]M  1.92. 
-byohara  business,  intercourse  I'd  65  :  see  sagvohara. 
-bhumma  universal  monarch  J  vi.45.  -vidu  all  wise  Sn 
177,  211;  Vin  1.8;  Dh  353.  -sagharaka  a  kind  of 
perfume  "  eau  de  mille  fleurs  "  J  vi.336.  -sadharana 
common  to  all  J  1.301  sq. 

Sabbatthata  the  state  of  being  everywhere  ;  sabbatthataya 
on  the  whole  D  1.251  ;  11.187  ;  M  1.38  ;  S  IV. 296  ;  A  111.225  ; 
v.2g9,  344.     Expl"!  at  Vism  308  (with  tt). 

Sabbassa  (nt.)  [sarvasva]  the  whole  of  one's  property 
J  111.105;  v.ioo  (read:  sabbasai)  va  pan'assa  haranti) ; 
°-harana  (nt.)  confiscation  of  one's  property^  J  111.105; 
v. 246  (v.  I.);  sabbassaharanadanda  (m.)  the  same 
J  IV. 204  (so  read  instead  of  sabbarppaharana).  At  some 
passages  sabba  (nt.)  "  all,"  seems  to  be  used  in  the 
same  sense,  esp.  gen.  sabbassa — e.  g.  J  111.50;  iv.19; 
V.324. 

Sabbavant  (adj.)  [cp.  BSk.  sarvavant  Divy  294,  298,  352] 
all,  entire  D  1.73,  251  ;  111.224;  A  111.27  ;  v. 299  sq.,  344  sq. 

Sabbha  see  a°. 

Sabbhin  see  a°. 

Sabrahmaka  (adj.)  [sa'  +  brahma-l-ka]  including  the 
Brahma  world  D  1.62;  111.76,  135;  A  1.260;  11.70; 
S  V.423  ;  Vin  i.ii  ;  DA  1.174. 

Sabrahmacarin  (adj.-n.)  [sa^  +  brahmacarin]  a  fellow 
student  D  11.77;  iil--4i  sq.,  245  sq..  101  ;  A  n.97  ;  Sn 
973;  VbhA  281. 

Sabhaggata  (adj .)  [sabha-l-  gata]  gone  to  the  hall  of  assembly 
A  1. 128  ;  Sn  397  ;  Pug  29. 

Sabha(f.)  [Vedicsabha,cp.  A'.Z.  iv.370]  1.  a  hall,  assembly- 
room  D  11.274;  A  1. 143;  S  1.176;  J  1.119;  157.  204. — 
2.  a  public  rest-house,  hostelry  J  1.302.  dhamma" 
chapel  J  VI. 333. 

-gata  =  sabhaggata  S  v.394  ;  M  1.286. 

Sabhaga  (adj.)  [sa^-t-bhaga]  common,  being  of  the  same 
division  Vin  11.75  ;  like,  equal,  similar  Miln  79  ;  s.  apatti 
a  common  offence,  shared  by  all  Vin  1.126  sq.  ;  vithisa- 
bhagena  in  street  company,  the  whole  street  in  common 
J  11.45  :  °PP-  visabhaga  unusual  J  1.303  ;  different  Vism 
516  ;  Miln  79. 

-tthana  a  common  room,  a  suitable  or  convenient 
place  J  1.426;  111.49;  v. 235.  -vuttin  living  in  mutual 
courtesy,  properly,  suitably  Vin  1.45;  J  1.219; 
a-sabhagavuttin  J  1.218;  sabhaga\nittika  Vin  11.162; 
A  111.14  s<l-  '1  a-sabhagavuttika  ibid. 

Sabhajana  [Dhtp  553 :  piti-dassanesul  honouring,  salu- 
tation Miln  2. 

Sabhaya  (nt.)=sabha  Vin  111.200. 

Sabhava  [sa* 4- bhava]  1.  state  (of  mind),  nature,  con- 
dition Miln  90,  212,  360;  PvA  39  (iimmattaka°),  98 
(santa°),     219. — -2.  character,     disposition,     behaviour 


P^'A  13,  35  (ullumpana°),  220  (lokiya°).  —  3.  truth, 
reality,  sincerity  Miln  164;  J  v.459  ;  v.198  (opp.  musa- 
vada) ;  J  vi,409  ;  sabhavar)  sincerely,  devotedly  J  vi.486. 
-dhatnina  principle  of  nature  J  1.214;  -dhammatta  = 
"dhamma  \'ism  238.      -bhiita  true  J  111.20. 

Sabhoga'  (adj.)  [sa'4-bhoga]  wealthy  D  1.73. 

Sabhoga"  lsa*4-bhoga]  property,  possession  Miln  139. 

Sabhojana  (adj.-nt.)  [sa'-fbhojana]  sharing  food  (?)  Vin 
IV. 95  ;  Sn  102. 

Sama^  [fr.  sam:  see  sammati']  calmness,  tranquillity, 
mental  quiet  Sn  896.  samai)  carati  to  become  calm, 
quiescent  J  iv.172.     Cp.  "cariya  &  "carin. 

Sama-  [fr.  siam :  see  sammati-]  fatigue  J  vi.565. 

Sarna^  (adj.)  [Vedic  sama.  fr.  sa^ ;  see  etym.  under  sar)°] 
I.  even,  level  J  1.315;  111.172;  Mhvs  23.  51.  samag 
karoti  to  level  Dh  1 78  ;  SnA  66.  Opp.  visama.  —  2.  like, 
equal,  the  same  D  1.123.  174;  S  1.12  ;  Sn  90,  226,  799, 
842  ;  It  17,  64;  Dh  306;  Miln  4.  The  compared  noun 
is  put  in  the  iiish. :  or  precedes  as  first  part  of  cpd.  — 
3.  impartial,  upright,  of  even  mind,  just  A  1.74.  293  sq. ; 
Sn  215,' 468,  952.  —  4.  sama°.  foil,  by  numerals,  means 
"  altogether,"  e.  g.  °tir)sa  thirty  altogether  Bu   18.    18. 

—  5.  Cases  as  «rfi.:  instr.  samena  with  justice,  impartially 
(  =  dhammena  K.S.  1.321)  Dh  257;  J  1.180;  ace.  samag 
equally  D  11. 166  ;  together  with.  at.  D  11.288  ;  Mhvs  11, 

12. 

-caga  equally  liberal  A  11.62.  -jana  an  ordinary  man, 
common  people  M  111.154  =Vin  1.349.  -jatika  of  the 
same  caste  J  1.68.  -jivita  regular  life,  living  economi- 
cally A  iv.281  sq.  -tala  level,  even  J  1.7;  Pv  1V.12I 
(of  a  pond),  -dharana  equal  support  or  sustenance 
SnA  95.  -dhura  carrying  an  equal  burden,  equal 
J  1.191  ;  asamadhura  incomparable  Sn  694  sq. ;  J  1.193. 
But  sama-dhura-ggahana  "  complete  imperiousness  " 
\'bhA  492  (see  j-ugaggaha).  -vahita  evenly  borne  along 
(of  equanimity)  DhsA  133.  -vibhatta  in  equal  shares 
J  1.266.  -sama  exactly  the  same  D  1.123;  11.136; 
Pug  64  ;  Miln  410  ;  DA  1.290.  -sisin  a  kind  of  puggala, 
lit.  "  equal -headed,"  i.  e.  one  who  simultaneously  attains 
an  end  of  craving  and  of  life  (cp.  PugA  l86.  The  expl" 
in  J. P.T.S.  1891,  5is  wrong)  Pug  i3;Nett  190.  -supaka 
with  equal  curry  (when  the  curry  is  in  quantity  of  one- 
fourth  of  the  rice)  Vin  iv.190. 

Samaka  (adj.)  [cp.  BSk.  samaka  Vhy  585]  equal,  like,  same 
Miln  122,  410  ;  of  the  same  height  (of  a  seat)  Vin  11.169. 
samakat)  (adv.)  equally  Miln  82, 

Samakkhata  [sag -f  akkliata]  counted,  known  Sdhp  70, 
458. 

Samagga  (adj.)  [sag-l-agga]  being  in  unity,  harmonious 
M  11.239;  D  111.172;  A  11.240;  V.74  sq. ;  plur.=all 
unitedly,  in  common  Vin  1.105  ;  J  vi.273'.  A  1.70=243  ; 
Sn  281,  283;  Dh  194;  Th  2,  161;  ThA  143;  J  1. 198, 
2og  ;  samaggakarana  making  for  peace  D  1.4  =A  11.209 
=  Pug57;  DA  174;  samagganandin,  samaggarata,  and 
samaggarama,  rejoicing  in  peace,  delighting  in  peace, 
impassioned  for  peace  D  1.4  =A  11.209  =  Pug  57;  DA 
1.74;  samaggavasa  dwelling  in  concord  J  1.362;  11.27. 

—  samaggi-karoti  to  harmonize,  to  conciliate  D  111. 161. 

—  Cp   samaggi  etc. 

Samaggatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  samagga]  agreement,  consent 
Vin  1.316. 

Samangita  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  foil.]  the  fact  of  being  endowed 
or  connected  with  (-")  J  111.95  (paraloka") ;  VbhA  438 
(fivefold :  ayuhana"  etc.). 

Samangin  (adj.)  [sag4-angin]  endowed  with,  possessing 
Pug   13.    14:  J   1.303:  Miln  342;  VbhA  438.  —  saman- 


Samacariya 


141 


Samatha 


gibhuta,  possessed  of,  provided  with  D  1,36;  A  11. 125; 
Sn  321  ;  Vin  1.15  ;  DA  1.121  ;  samangi-karoti  to  provide 
with  J  VI. 266,  289,  290  (cp.  VI. 323  :  akarl  samangig) . 

Samacariya  [sama' f  cariya]  (f.)  living  in  spiritual  calm, 
quietism  A  1.55:  S  196.  loi  sq. ;  It  16,  52;  Dh  388; 
Miln  19;  J  VI. 128  :  DhA  iv.145. 

Samacaga  [sama'+caga]  equally  liberal  A  11.62. 

Samacarin  (sama-)  living  in  peace  M  1.289. 

Samacitta  possessed  of  equanimity  A  1.65;  iv.215;  SnA 

174  (°patipada-sutta). 

Samacchati  [sag  +  acchati]  to  sit  down  together  J  11.67 
(samacchare) ;  iv.356;  vi.104,  127. 

Samacchidagatta  (adj.)  [sam  +  a+chida+gatta]  with 
mangled  limbs  Sn  673. 

Samajja  (nt.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  samaja  (fr.  sag  +  aj)  congre- 
gation, gathering,  company!  a  festive  gathering,  fair  ; 
a  show,  theatrical  display.  Originally  a  mountain  cult, 
as  it  was  esp.  held  on  the  mountains  near  Rajagaha.  — 
J  II. 13:  III. 541  ;  VI. 277,  559;  S  v. 170:  DA  1.84;  DhA 
IV. 59  ;  DhsA  255.  —  On  character  and  history  of  the 
festival  see  Hardy,  Album  hern  pp.  61-66. — gir-agga- 
samajjar)  mountain  fair  Vin  11. 107,  150  ;  iv.85,  267,  360  ; 
DhA  1.89,  113.  samajjag  karoti  or  kareti  to  hold  high 
revel  J  vi.383. 

-ftbhicarana  visiting  fairs  D  111.183.  -tthana  the  place 
of  the  festival,  the  arena,  Vin  11. 150;  J  1.394;  -dana 
giving  festivals  Miln  278  ;  -majjhe  on  the  arena  S  iv.306 
sq.  ;  J  HI. 541  ;  -mandala  the  circle  of  the  assembly 
J  1.283  sq. 

Samajjhagao  (B  °-gui})  aor.  from  sam-adhi-ga.  (See 
samadhigacchati. ) 

Samancati  [sam-l-anc]  to  bend  together  Vin  iv.171,  363. 

Samancara  [sama'  +  cara]  pacified,  calm  S  1.236. 

Samancinteti  to  think  S  1.124;  see  sancinteti. 

Samafifia  (f.)  [sag -1- aiina]  designation,  name  D  1.202  ; 
11.20;  M  III. 68  ;  S  II. 191  ;  Sn  611,  648;  J  11.65;  Dhs 
!}  130O;  loka"  a  common  appellation,  a  popular  expres- 
sion D  1.202. 

Samannata  [sag -f  afiiiata]  designated,  known,  notorious 
S  1.63  ;  Sn  1 18,  820  ;  Nd'  153  ;  Vin  11.203. 

Sama^a  [BSk.  sramana,  fr.  ituva,  but  mixed  in  meaning 
with  iaml  a  wanderer,  recluse,  religieux  A  1.67  ;  D  111.16, 
95  sq.,  130  sq. ;  S  1.45;  Dh  184;  of  a  non-Buddhist 
(tapasa)  J  in. 390;  an  edifying  etymology  of  the  word 
DhA  III. 84  :  "  samita-papatta  s.,"  cp.  Dh  265  "  sami- 
tatta  papanag  '  samano  '  ti  pavuccati  "  ;  four  grades 
mentioned  D  11. 151  ;  M  163;  compare  Sn  84  sq. ;  the 
state  of  a  Samana  is  attended  by  eight  sukhas  J  1.7  ;  the 
Buddha  is  often  mentioned  and  addressed  by  non- 
Buddhists  as  Samana:  thus  D  1.4,  87;  Sn  p.  91.  99; 
Vin  1.8.  350  ;  Samanas  often  opposed  to  Brahmanas: 
thus,  D  1. 13;  It  58,  60;  Sn,  p.  90;  Vin  1.12  ;  11. no; 
samanabrahmana,  Samanas  and  Brahmanas  quite 
generally:  "leaders  in  religious  life"  (cp.  Dial.  11.165) 
D  1.5  ;  II.  150  ;  A  1. 1 10,  i  73  sq.  ;  It  64  ;  Sn  189  ;  Vin  11.295  ; 
samanadhammag  the  duties  of  a  samana  .\  in. 371  ; 
J  1. 106,  107,  138;  pure-samana  a  junior  who  walks 
before  a  Bhikkhu  Vin  11.32  ;  pacchasamana  one  who 
walks  behind  Vin  1.186;  11.32;  A  in. 137.  —  samani 
a  female  recluse  S  1.333;  ThA  18;  J  v. 4^4,  427;  Vin 
IV. 2  35.  — assamana  not  a  true  samana  Vin  1.96. 

-uddesa  a  novice,  a  samanera  D  1.151;  M  111.128; 
S  V.161  ;  Vin  iv.139  ;  A  11.78  ;  in. 343.  Cp.  BSk.  Srama- 
nodde^a  Divy  160.  -kuttaka  (m.)  who  wears  the  dress 
of  a  Samana  Vin  111.6S  sq.  (  =samana-vesa-dharako, 
Bdhgh  ib.  p.  271). 


Samaijiaka  [samana -l-ka]  a  contemptible  (little)  ascetic. 
"  some  sort  of  samana  "  D  i  90  ;  M  11.47.  2 10  ;  Sn  p.  2 1  ; 
Miln  222  ;  DA  1.254.  At  .\  11.48  samanaka  is  a  slip  for 
sasanaka      Cp.  mundaka  in  form  &  meaning. 

SamAV^sUk&ta  [sa-l- mandala -l-kata]  hemmed  Vin  1.255 
(kathina). 

Samata  [fr.  sama^]  equality,  evenness,  normal  state  Vin 
1. 183  ;  A  III. 375  sq.  ;  Miln  351. 

Samatikkama  (adj.)  [sag-l-atikamma]  passing  beyond, 
overcoming  D  1.34;  11.290;  M  1.41,  455;  Vin  1.3;  J 
v. 454  ;  Vism  1 1 1. 

Samatikkamati  [sag-Hatikkamati]  to  cross  over,  to  tran- 
scend D  1.35  ;  to  elapse  Mhvs  13.  5  ;  ger.  samatikkamma 
D  1.35  :  M  41  ;  pp.  samatikkanta  crossed  over,  or  escaped 
from  S  in. 80  ;  Dh  195. 

Samatiggaotaati  [sag-t-ati-i-grh]  to  stretch  over,  rise  above, 
to  reach  beyond  J  iv.411  (ger.  samatiggayha). 

Samatittha  (adj.)  [sama'  +  tittha]  with  even  banks  (of  a 
pond)  J  V.407. 

Samatittbika  (adj.)  [sama'-t-tittha-l-ika]  even  or  level 
with  the  border  or  bank.  i.  e.  quite  full,  brimful  D  1.244  ■ 
M.89;  M  1.435;  n.7  =  Miln  213;  S  11. 134;  v. 170;  J 
1.400  ;  J  1.235,  393  ;  Miln  121  ;  Vism  170  (pattag  "tittikag 
pfiretva  ;  v.  1.  "titthikag) ;  A  m.403  ;  \'in  1.230  ;  iv.190  ; 
often  written  °tittika  and  "tittiya.  [The  form  is  pro- 
bably connected  with  samaicchia — i.  e.  samaitthia 
(•samatisthita)  in  the  DeSinamamala  vin.20  (Konow). 
Compare,  however.  Rhys  Davids'  Buddhist  Suttas, 
p.  178'  ;  °-ag  bunjami  Miln  213  ;  "I  eat  (only  just)  to 
the  full  "  (opp.  to  bhiyyo  bhunjami)  suggests  the  ety- 
mology :  sama-titti-F  ka.     Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  as  above.] 

Samatimannti  [sag  -1-  atimafifiti  |  to  despise  (aor.)  sama- 
timaiini  Th  2,  72. 

Samativattati  [sag-l-ativattati]  to  transcend,  overcome 
Sn  if)8,  cp.  Nd'  10. 

Samativijjhati  [sag-l-ativijjhati]  to  penetrate  Dh  13  = 
Th  1,   133. 

Samatta'  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  sama']  equality  A  in. 359  ;  Mhvs 
3,  7  ;  equanimity,  justice  A  1.75. 

Samatta'  [cp.  Sk.  .samapta,  pp.  of  sag-fapl  '  accom- 
plished, brought  to  an  end  A  11.193  ;  Sn  781  =paripuniia 
Nd'  65.  —  2.  [cp.  Sk.  samasta.  pp.  of  sag-(-  as  to  throw, 
cp.  BSk.  samasta.  e.  g.  Jtm  xxxi.90]  complete,  entire, 
perfect  Miln  349  ;  Sn  881  ;  1000  ;  Nd'  289,  298.  samattai) 
completely  S  v.  175;  accomplished,  full  Sn  889. 

Samattha(adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  samartha.  sag -Martha]  able,  strong 
J  1.179  ;  187  ;  SnA  143. 

Samattbita  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  samarthita,  sag-f  pp.  of  artha- 
yati]  unravelling  Miln  1. 

Samattbiya  (adj.)  [fr.  samatthai  able  Sdhp  619. 

Samatha  [fr  Sam,  cp.  BSk.  samatha]  i.  calm,  quietude  of 
heart  M  1.33;  A  1.61,  95;  11. 140;  in. 86  sq.  (ceto°). 
u6  sq.,  449;  IV. 360  ;  v.99  ;  D  in. 54,  213,  273;  DhA 
n.177;  S  iv.362  ;  Dhs  II.  15,  54;  cessation  of  the  Sag- 
kharas  S  1.136;  in. 133;  A  1.133;  Sn  732;  Vin  1.5. — 
2.  settlement  of  legal  questions  (adhikarana)  Vin  n.93  ; 
IV. 207  ;  cp.  Dhs.\  144  ;  s.  pativijjhati  Pts  1.180 

-yanika  who  makes  quietude  his  vehicle,  devoted  to 
quietude,  a  kind  of  Arahant ;  cp.  Geiger,  Sanvulta  Ir.l' 
II. 172.  -vipassana  introspection  ("  auto-hypnosis  "  Cpd. 
202)  for  promoting  calm  [cp.  samatha-vipasyana  Divy 
95]  S  V.52  ;  A  11.157  :  DhA  iv.  1 41)  ;  also  sepanitely  "  calm 
it  intuition."  e.  g.  M  \.\>)\- 


Samadhigacchati 


142 


Samaya 


Samadhigacchati  [sat)  +  adhigacchati]  to  attain  Th  i,  4  ;  aor. 
samajjhaga  It  83  ;  3"*  pi.  samajjhagag  S  1.103. 

Samadhiganhati  [sag  +  adhigaijhati]  i.  to  reach,  to  get, 
obtain;  ger.  samadhiggayha  M  1.506;  11.23;  S  1.86  = 
It  16.  —  2.  to  exceed,  surpass,  to  overcome,  to  master 
J  VI. 261  (panhar)  samadhiggahetva).  Often  con- 
founded with  samatiganhati. 

Samadhosi  various  reading  S  in. 120  sq.  ;  iv.46  ;  the  form 
is  aor.  of  sar)dhu.     See  saiicopati. 

Samana  (nt.)  [fr.  sam]  suppression  Mhvs  4,  35. 

Samanaka  (adj.)  [sa'  +  mana+ka]  endowed  with  mind 
.\  11,48  (text,  samanaka);  S  1.62. 

Samanantara  (adj.)  [sag  +  anantara]  immediate;  usually 
in  abl.  (as  adv.) ;  samanantara  immediately,  after,  just 
after  D  11. 156;  Vin  1.56;  rattibhaga-samanantare  at 
midnight  J  i.ioi. 

-paccaya  the  relation  of  immediate  contiguity  Tikp 
3,  61  sq.  ;  Dukp  26  ;  Vism  534. 

Samanukkamati  [sar)  +  anukkamati]  to  walk  along  to- 
gether J  III. 373. 

Satnanugahati  [sag-l-anugahati]  to  ask  for  reasons,  to 
question  closely  D  1.26  ;  M  1.130  ;  A  v. 156  sq.  ;  ppr.  med. 
samanuggahiyamana  being  pressed  M  1.130;  A  v.  156; 
Vin  111.91. 

Samannjanati  [sag-Hanujanati]  to  approve;  samanuja- 
nissanti  (fut.  3  pi.)  M  1.398  ;  S  iv.225  ;  pp.  samanufifiata 
approved,  allowed  Mhvs  8,  1 1  ;  aor.  i  sg.  samanuiinasin 
J  IV.  1 17  (=samanuiino  asig  Com.  ib.  117'^). 

Samanunna  (adj.)  [  =  next]  approving  D  111.271  ;  A  11.253; 
III. 359  ;  v.305  ;  S  I.I,   153;  IV.187;  J  IV.I17. 

Samanunna  (f  )  [fr.  samanujanati]  approval  S  i.i  ;  M  1.359. 

Samanupassati  [sar)-|-anupassati]  to  see,  perceive,  regard 
D  1.69,  73  ;  11.198  ;  M  1.435  sq.  ;  11.205  ;  Pot.  Vin  11.89  ; 
ppr.  °passanto  J  1.140  ;  ppr.  med.  "passamano  1)  11.66  ;  inf. 
"passitug  Vin  1.14;  rupag  attato  .samanupassati  to 
regard  form  as  self  S  111.42. 

Samanupassana  (f.)  [fr.  last]  considering  S  in. 44  :  Nett  27. 

Samanubandhati  [saij  +  anubandhati]  to  pursue  Mhvs  10,  5. 

Samanubhasati  [sar)-t-anubhasati]  to  conver.se  or  study 
togetlier  1)  1.26,  163;  M  1. 130;  A  1.138;  v. 156  sq  ;  Vin 
III. 173  sq.  ;  IV. 236  sq   ;  DA  1.117. 

Samanubhasana  (f)  [fr.  last]  conversation,  repeating 
together  \'in  111.174  sq.  ;  iv.235  sq. 

SamanumaMati  [sar) -1- anumannati]  to  approve  ;  fut.  3  pi. 
"manuissanti  M  1.398;  S  iv.225;  aor.  3  pi.  °mannir)su 
J  IV.  134- 

Samanumodati  [sar)-l-anumodati]  to  rejoice  at,  to  approve 
.M  1.398  ;  S  IV. 225  ;  Miln  89. 

Samanuyunjati  [sag-l-anuyunjati]  to  cross-question  D 
1. 26,   163  ;  M  I.130  ;  A  I.I  38  ;  v.  1 56  ;  DA  I.I  1 7. 

Samanussarati  (sai) -t- anussarati]  to  recollect,  call  to  mind 
S  IV.  190  ;  Vin  II. 183. 

Samanta  (adj.)  [sag-l-anta  "of  complete  ends"]  all, 
entire  Sn  672  ;  Miln  3.  occurs  usually  in  oblique  cases, 
used  adverbially,  e.  g.  ace.  samantag  completely  Sn 
442  ;  abl.  samanta  (D  1.222  ;  J  11.106  ;  Vin  1.32)  &  saman- 
tato  (M  1.168- Vin  1.5;  Mhvs  i,  29;  Vism  185;  and  in 
definitions  of  prefix  pari"  DA  1.2 17  ;  VvA  236  ;  PvA  32) ; 
instr.  samantena  (Th  2,  487)  on  all  sides,  everjTvhere, 
anj'where ;    also   used   as   prepositions ;    thus,    samanta 


Vesaliri,  everywhere  in  Vesali  D  11.98  ;  samantato  naga 
rassa  all  round  the  city  Mhvs  34,  39  ;  samasamantato 
everywhere  DA  1.61. 

-cakkhu  all-seeing,  an  epithet  of  the  Buddha  M  1.168  = 
Vin  1.5;  Sn  345,  etc.;  Miln  in  ;  Nd^  360.  -pasadika 
all-pleasing.  quite  serene  A  1.24 ;  °ka  Buddhaghosa's 
commentary  on  the  Vinaya  Pitaka  DA  1.84; 
-bhaddakatta  complete  auspiciousness,  perfect  loveliness 
SnA  444;  VbhA  132.  -rahita  entirely  gone  J  1.29. 
-veda  one  whose  knowledge  (of  the  Veda)  is  complete 
J  V1.213. 

Samandhakara  [sag-l-andhakara]  the  dark  of  night  Vin 
IV  54  ;  DhA  11.94  '■  ^  UI.60. 

Samannagata  (adj.)  [sari -t- anvagata]  followed  by,  pos- 
ses.sed  of,  endowed  with  (instr.)  D  1.50;  88  Vin  1.54; 
Sn  p.  78,  102,  104.  SnA  1 77  (in  expl"  of  ending  "  -in  "), 
216  (of  " -mant  ") ;  PvA  46,  73.  —  nt.  abstr.  "anna- 
gatatta  PvA  49. 

Samannaneti  [samanva  -1-  ni]  to  lead,  conduct  properly, 
control,  pres.  sam-anv-aneti  M  111.188;  ppf.  °annana- 
yamana  M  1.477. 

Samannahata  [sag  -1-  anvahata]  struck  (together),  played 
upon  D  II. I  71 . 

Samannahsrati  [sag -t- anu -1- aharati ;  cp.  BSk.  samanva- 
harati]  i.  to  concentrate  the  mind  on,  to  consider, 
reflect  D  11.204 ;  M  1.445  ;  A  111.162  sq.,  402  sq. ;  S  1.1 14. 
—  2.  to  pay  respect  to,  to  honour  M  11. 169  ;  Vin  1.180. 

Samannahara  [sag  -1-  anu  +  ahara]  concentration,  bringing 
together  M  1.190  sq.  ;  DA  1.123  ;  Miln  189. 

Samannesati  [sag  +  anvesati]  to  seek,  to  look  for,  to  ex- 
amine D  1.105  ;  S  III. 124;  IV. 197;  Miln  37;  DA  1.274. 
pres.  also  samanvesati  S  1.122. 

Samannesana  (f.)  [fr.  last]  search,  examination  M  1,317. 

Samapekkhana  (nt.)  considering;  a'  S  in. 261. 

Samapekkhati  [sag -1- apekkhati]  to  consider,  ger.  ekkhiya 
Sdhp  536  ;  cp.  samavekkh". 

Samappita  [pp-  of  samappeti]  i.  made  over,  consigned 
Dh  315;  Sn  333;  Th  2,  451.  —  2.  endowed  with  (-°), 
affected  with,  pos.scssed  of  J  v. 102  (kantakena);  Pv 
IV. i''  (  =  ainna  PvA  265) ;  PvA  162  (soka-salla°-hadaya) ; 
Vism  303   (sallena).  yasabhoga"  possessed  of  fame  & 

wealth  r)h  303  ;  dukkhena  afflicted  with  pain  Vv  52'  ; 
pancehi  kamagunchi  s.  endowed  with  the  5  pleasures  of 
the  senses  D  1.36,  60  ;  Vin  1.15  ;  DA  1.121. 

Samappeti  [sag -l- appeti]  to  hand  over,  consign,  commit, 
deposit,  give  Mhvs  7,  72  ;  19,  30  ;  21,  2  i  ;  34,  21  ;  Davs 
11.64.  —  pp.  samappita. 

Samabbhahata  [sag  H- abbhahata]  struck,  beaten  (thor- 
ouglilv)  \'ism  153  ;  DA  1.140. 

Samabhijanati    [sag  +  abhijanati]    to    recollect,    to    know 

J    VI,  I  2(1. 

Samabhisata  joyful  Th  2,  461. 

Samabhisincati  [sag-(-abhisincati]  to  inaugurate  as  a  king 
Mhvs  4,  6  ;  V.14, 


Samaya    [cp.    Sk.    samaya,    fr.    sag  =  i, 
congregation  ;  time,  condition,   etc. 


See  also  samiti] 
At  DhsA  57  sq 
we  find  a  detailed  expl"  of  the  word  samaya  (s-sadda), 
with  meanings  given  as  follows:  (i)  samavaya  ("har- 
mony in  antecedents  "  trsl"),  (2)  khana  (opportunity), 
(3)  kala  (season).  (4)  samiiha  (crowd,  assembly),  (5)  hetu 
(condition),  (6)  ditthi  (opinion).  (7)  patilabha  (acquisi- 
tion), (8)  pahana  (elimination).  (9)  pativedha  (penetra- 


Samara 


143 


Samadana 


tion).  Bdhgh  illustrates  each  one  with  fitting  examples  ; 
cp.  DhsA  b\.  —  We  may  group  as  follows:  i.  coming 
together,  gathering;  a  crowd,  multitude  L)  1.178  (°pava- 
daka  debating  hall);  11.254  sq.  ;  Miln  257;  J  1.37J  ; 
PvA  86  (=samagama).  samaya  in  a  crowd  Pv  ill. 3* 
(so  read  for  samayya ;  I'vA  i8g  "  sangamma  "). — 
J.  consorting  with,  intercourse  Miln  1O3;  DhA  1.90; 
sabba"  consorting  with  everybody  J  iv.317.  —  3.  time, 
point  of  time,  season  V  i.i  ;  Sn  291,  1015  ;  Vin  1.15  ;  \'bhA 
157  (marana°);  \'ism  473  (def.) ; — samaya  samayar) 
upadaya  from  time  to  time  It  75.  Cases  adverbially  : 
ekar)  samayai)  at  <me  timeD  1.47,  87,  in  ;  tenasamayena 
at  that  time  D  1.179  ;  DhA  i  90,  aparena  s.  in  course  of 
time,  later  PvA  31,  08;  yasmig  samaye  at  which  time 
D  1. 199;  DhsA  01.  ekasmii]  samaye  some  time,  once 
J  1.306.  paccusa"  at  daybreak  PvA  38  ;  addharatti"  at 
midnight  PvA  155;  cp.  ratta°.  —  4.  proper  time,  due 
season,  opportunity,  occasion  Sn  388  ;  \m  iv.77  ;  Bu 
ii.iSi  ;  Mhvs  22,  59;  V'bhA  283  sq.  ;  annatra  samaya 
except  at  due  season  \'in  iii  J12  ;  iv.77;  samaye  at  the 
right  time  J  1.2  7.  —  asamaya  inopportune,  unseasonable 
D  III. 263,  287.  —  5.  toincidence,  circumstance  M  1.438. 
akkhara°  spelling  DhA  1.181.  —  6.  condition,  state; 
extent,  sphere  (cp.  def"  of  Bdhgh,  above  9) ;  taken 
dogmatically  as  "  ditthi,"  doctrine,  view  (equal  to  above 
def"  0)  It  14  (imamhi  samaye);  DhA  1.90  (janana") ; 
Davs  VI. 4  ("antara  var.  views),  bahira°  state  of  an 
outsider,  doctrine  of  outsiders,  i.  e.  brahmanic  DhA 
111.392,  cp.  brahmananari  samaye  DA  1.291  ;  ariyanar) 
samaye  Miln  229.  —  7.  end,  conclusion,  annihilation 
Sn  876;  °vimutta  finally  emancipated  A  111.173;  v. 336 
(a°) ;  Pug  1 1  ;  cp.  DhsA  57.  —  Pp.  abhi°. 

-vasatha  at  A  11. 41  is  to  be  read  as  samavasattha,  i.  e. 
thoroughly  given  up.  Thus  Kern,  Toev.  The  same 
pa.ssage  occurs  at  D  111.269  as  samavaya-sathesana  (see 
under  satha). 

Samara  [sa+mara]  battle  Davs  iv.i 

Samala  (adj.)  [BSk,  samala]  impure,  contaminated  Vin 
1.5  ;  samala  (f.)  dustbin  S  11.270  (  =  gamato  giitha- 
nikkhamana-magga,  i.  e  sewer  K.S.  11.203) ;  see  sandhi". 

Samalankaroti  [sag+alankaroti]  to  decorate,  adorn 
Mhvs  7,  56  ;  "kata  pp.  Davs  v. 36  :  °karitva  J  vi.577. 

Samavattbita  ready  Sn  345  (°-a  savanaya  sota) 

Samavattakkhandha  (adj.)  [sama+ vatta+ kli.,  but  BSk. 
sasaijvrtta"]  having  the  shoulders  round,  one  of  the 
lakkhanas  of  a  Buddha  D  11. 18;  111.144,  ■'^4:  Dial. 
11.15  :  "  his  bust  is  equally  rounded." 

Samavattasat)vasa  [sama+  vatta'+  .saijvasa]  living  together 
with  the  same  duties,  on  terms  of  equality  J  1.236. 

Samavadhana  (nt  )  concurrence,  co-existence  Nett  79. 

Samavaya  annihilation,  termination  (?)  see  samaya  (cpd.) 
A  satha. 

Samavasarati  of  a  goad  or  spur  Th  2,  210.  See  sanio- 
sarati. 

Samavapaka  (nt.)  [sama+ vSpaka,  cp.  vapati']  a  store- 
room M  1.451. 

Samavaya  (m.)  coming  together,  combination  S  iv.68 ; 
Miln  376  ;  DhsA  57,  196  ;  PvA  104  ;  VvA  20,  55.  sama- 
vayena  in  common  VvA  336  ;  khana-s°  a  momentary 
meeting  J  1.381. 

Samavekkhati     [sao+ avekkhati]     to    consider,     examine 

M  1.225  ;  A  11.32  ;  It  30. 

Samavekkhitar  [fr.  last]  one  who  considers  It  120. 

Samavepakin  (adj.)  [sama-l- vepakin.  cp.  vcpakka]  pro- 
moting a  good  digestion  D  II. 177;  111.16O;  M  11.O7 ; 
A  111.65  sq.,  103,  153;  v. 15. 


Samavossajjati  [read  sagvossajjati  !]  to  transfer,  entrust 
D  11.231. 

Samavbaya  [sag  +  ahvaya]  a  name  Davs  v.67. 

Samasayisun  (aor.)  J  111.20 1  (text,  samasasisur),  cp. 
J.P.T.S.  1885,  60;  read  tag  asayisug). 

Samassattba  [sag  +  assattha^]  refreshed,  relieved  J  111.189 

Samassasati  [sag -f  assasatij  to  be  refreshed  J  1.176;  Caus. 
samassaseti  to  relieve,  refresh  J  1.175. 

Samassasa  [sag -1- assasa]  refreshing,  relief  DlisA  150 
(expl"  of  passaddhi). 

Samassita  [sag+assita]  leaning  towards  Th  i,  525. 

Sama  (f.)  [Vedic  sama]  i.  a  year  Dh  106  ;  Mhvs  7,  78.  — 
2.  in  agginisama  a  pyre  Sn  668,  670. 

Samakaddbati  [sag+akaddhati]  to  pull  along;  to  entice; 
ger.  °iya  Mhvs  37,  145. 

Samaki^^a  [sag  +  akinna]  covered,  lilled  S  1.6;  Miln  342. 

Samakula  (adj.)  [sag  +  akula]  1.  filled,  crowded  B  11.4=^ 
J  i.3;Miln33i.  342.  —  2.  crowded  together  Vin  11.]  1  7. 
—  3.  confused,  jumbled  together  J  v. 302. 

Samagaccbati  [sag  -f  agacchati]  to  meet  together,  to 
assemble  Bu  11.171  ;  Sn  222  ;  to  associate  with,  to  enter 
with,  to  meet,  D  11.354  ;  Sn  834  ;  J  ii.82  ;  to  go  to  see 
Vin  1.308  ;  to  arrive,  come  Sn  698  ;  aor.  1  sg.  °ganchig 
D  11.354  ;  3"'  "gacchi  Dh  2  10  ;  J  11.62  ;  aor.  2  sg.  "gama 
Sn  834;  ger.  "gamma  B  11.171=}  1.26;  ger.  "gantva 
Vin  1.308  ;  pp.  samagata. 

Samagata  [pp.  of  samagacchati]  met,  assembled  Dh  337 ; 
Sn  222. 

Samagama  [sag  +  agama]  meeting,  meeting  with,  inter- 
course A  11.51  ;  III. 31  ;  Miln  204  ;  cohabitation  D  11.268  ; 
meeting,  assembly  J  11.107;  Miln  349;  DhA  111.443 
(three  :  yamaka-patihariya°  ;  dev'orohana°  ;  Gangaro- 
hana°). 

Samacaiati  [sag-l-acarati]  to  behave,  act,  practise  M  11.113. 

Samacaia  [sag  +  acara]  conduct,  behaviour  D  11.279; 
111.106,  217;  M  11.113;  A  11.200,  239;  IV.82  ;  Sn  279; 
Vin  11.248 ;  111.184. 

Samatapa  [sag -t- atapa]  ardour,  zeal  A  111.346. 

Samadapaka  [fr.  samadapcti  ;  cp.  BSk.  samadapaka  Divy 
142]  instructing,  arousing  M  1.145  ;  A  11.97  i  iv.296,  328 ; 
V.155;  S  V.162  ;  Miln  373;  It  107;  DhA  n.129. 

Samadapana  (nt.)  instructing,  instigating  M  111.132. 

Samadapetar  adviser,  instigator  M  1.16. 

Samadapeti  [sag+adapeti,  cp.  BSk.  samadapayati  Divy 
51]  to  cause  to  take,  to  incite,  rou.se  Pug  39,  55;  Vin 
1.250;  111.73;  DA  1.293,  3"o  ;  aor.  "dapesi  D  11.42,  95, 
206  ;  Miln  195  ;  Sn  695  ;  ger.  "dapetva  D  1.126  ;  Vin  1.18  ; 
ger.  samadetva  (sic)  Mhvs  37,  201  ;  ppr.  pass.  °dapiya- 
mana  D  11.42. 

Samadabati  [sag  +  adahati']  to  put  together  S  1.169; 
jotig  s.  to  kindle  a  fire  Vin  iv.i  15  ;  cittag  s.  to  compose 
the  mind,  concentrate  M  1.116;  pres.  samadheti  Th  2. 
50;  pr.  part,  samadahag  S  v.312  ;  ppr.  med.  samada- 
haiia  S  1.169;  aor  3"'  pi.  samadahagsu  D  11.254.  Pass, 
samadhiyati  to  be  stayed,  composed  D  1.73;  M  1.37; 
Miln  289;  Caus.  II.  samadahapeti  Vin  iv.115.. — -pp. 
samahita. 

Samadana  1.  taking,  bringing;  asamadanacara  (m.)  going 
for  alms  without  taking  with  one  (the  usual  set  of  three 


Samadinna 


144 


Samapajjita 


robes)  Vin  1.254.  —  2.  taking  upon  oneself,  undertaking, 
acquiring  M  1.305  sq.  ;  A  1.229  sq.  ;  11.52  ;  J  1.157.  219  ; 
Vin  IV. 319;  KhA  lO,  142.  kammasamadana  acquiring 
for  oneself  of  Karma  D  1.82  ;  A  in. 41 7  ;  v. 33  ;  S  v. 266, 
304;  It  58  sq.,  99  sq.  ;  V'bliA  443  sq.  —  3.  resolution, 
■  vow  Vin  11.268;  J  1.233;  Miln  352. 

Samadinna  [pp.  of  samadiyati]  taken  up,  undertaken 
A  11.193. 

Samadiyati  [sarj  +  adiyati']  to  take  with  oneself,  to  take 
upon  oneself,  to  undertake  D  1.14O;  imper.  samadiya 
Bu  ii.iiS— J  1.20;  aor.  samadiyi  S  1.232;  J  1.219;  ger. 
samadiyitva  S  1.232  ;  &  samadaya  having  taken  up,  i  e. 
with  D  1.71  ;  Pug  58;  DA  1.207;  Mhvs  i,  47;  having 
taken  upon  himself,  conforming  to  D  1. 163;  11.74: 
Dh  266;  Sn  792,  89S,  962;  samadaya  sikkhati  sikkhS- 
padesu,  he  adopts  and  trains  himself  in  the  precepts 
D  1.63:  S  v. 187;  It  118;  Sn  962  (op.  Ndi  478).  —  pp. 
samadinna. 

Samadisati  [sag  +  adisati]  to  indicate,  to  command  D  1.2  1 1  ; 
Mhvs  38,  59. 

Samadbana  (nt.)  [sarj  +  a+dha]  putting  together,  fixing; 
concentration  Vism  84  (=samma  adhanar)  thapanar))  in 
def°  of  samadhi  as  "  samadhan'  atthena." 

Samadhi  [£r.  saii+a+dha]  i.  concentration;  a  concen- 
trated, self-collected,  intent  state  of  mind  and  medita- 
tion, which,  concomitant  with  right  living,  is  a  necessary 
condition  to  the  attainment  of  higher  wisdom  and 
emancipation.  In  the  Subha-suttanta  of  the  Digha 
(D  1.209  sq.)  samadhi-khandha  ("  section  on  concen- 
tration ")  is  the  title  otherwise  given  to  the  citta- 
sampada,  which,  in  the  ascending  order  of  merit  accruing 
from  the  life  of  a  samana  (see  Samahnaphala-suttanta, 
and  cp.  Dial.  1.57  sq.)  stands  between  the  sfla-sampada 
and  the  paiiria-sampada.  In  the  AmbaUha-sulta  the 
corresponding  -terms  are  sila,  carana,  vijja  (D.  i.ioo). 
Thus  samadhi  would  comprise  (a)  the  guarding  of  the 
senses  (indriyesu  gutta-dvarata),  (b)  self-possession 
(sati-sampajailiia).  (c)  contentment  (santutthi),  (d) 
emancipation  from  the  5  hindrances  (nivar^nani), 
(e)  the  4  jhanas.  In  the  same  way  we  find  samadhi 
grouped  as  one  of  the  sampadas  at  A  111.12  (sila°. 
samadhi",  panna",  vimutti"),  and  as  samadhi-khandha 
(with  sila°  &  paiina")  at  D  111.229  (+  vimutti°) ;  A  1.125  ; 
11.20;  III. 15;  v.326 ;  Nd'  21;  Nd-  p.  277  (s.  v.  sila). 
It  is  defined  as  cittassa  ekagatta  M  1.301  ;  Dhs  15; 
DhsA  1 18  ;  cp.  Cpd.  89  n  4  ;  identified  with  avikkhepa 
Dhs  57,  and  with  samatha  Dhs  54.  —  samina°  is  one  the 
constituents  of  the  eightfold  ariya-magga,  e.  g.  D  111.2  77  ; 
VbhA  120  sq.  — -See  further  D  11. 123  (ariya) ;  Vin  1.97, 
104;  S  1.28;  Ndi  365;  Miln  337;  Vism  84  sq.  {witn 
definition),  289  (4- vipassana),  380  ("vipphara  iddhi) ; 
VbhA  91  ;  DhA  1.427;  and  on  term  in  general  Heiler, 
Buddhistische  Versenkting  104  sq.  —  2.  Description  & 
characterization  of  samadhi :  Its  four  nimittas  or  signs 
are  the  four  satipatthanas  M  1.30 1  ;  six  conditions  and 
six  hindrances  A  111.427;  other  hindrances  M  111.15S. 
The  second  jhana  is  born  from  samadhi  D  11. 186;  it  is 
a  condition  for  attaining  kusala  dhamma  A  1.115; 
Miln  38;  conducive  to  insight  A  111.19,  24  sq.,  200; 
S  IV.80 ;  to  seeing  heavenly  sights  etc.  D  1.173;  to 
removing  mountains  etc.  A  in. 311  ;  removes  the  delu- 
sions of  self  A  1. 1 32  sq. ;  leads  to  Arahantship  A  11.45  ; 
the  anantarika  s.  Sn  226;  cetosamadhi  (rapture  of 
mind)  D  1.13;  A  n.54  ;  in.51  ;  S  iv.297;  citta°  id.  Nett 
16.  dhammasamadhi  almost  identical  with  samatha 
S  IV.  ^50  sq.  —  Two  grades  of  samadhi  distinguished. 
viz.  upaclra-s.  (preparatory  concentration)  and  appani-s. 
(attainment  concentration)  DA  1.217;  Vism  126;  Cpd. 
54,  5(>  sq. ;  only  the  latter  results  in  jhana;  to  these  a 
3""  (preliminary)  grade  is  added  as  khanika"  (momentary) 
at   Vism    144.  —  Three   kinds  of  s.   are  distinguished. 


sunnata  or  empty,  appanihita  or  aimless,  and  animitta 
or  signless  A  1.299;  S  iv.360  ;  cp.  iv.296  ;  Vin  111.93; 
Miln  337  ;  cp.  333  sq.  ;  DhsA  179  sq.,  222  sq  ,  290  sq. ; 
see  Yogdvacara's  ManiMl  p.  xxvii ;  samadhi  (tayo 
samadhi)  is  savitakka  savicara.  avitakka  vicaramatta  or 
avitakka  avicara  D  in. 219  ;  Kvu  570  ;  cp.  413  ;  Miln  337  ; 
DhsA  179  sq.  ;  it  is  fourfold  chanda-,  viriya-.  citta-,  and 
vimagsa-samadhi  D  11.213  ;  S  V.26S.  —  Another  fourfold 
division  is  that  into  hana-bhagiya,  thiti",  visesa", 
nibbedha"  D  111.277  (as  "  dhamma  duppativijjha  "). 

-indriya  the  faculty  of  concentration  A  11.149  ;  Dhs  13. 
-khandha  the  section  on  s.  see  above  i.  -ja  produced 
by  concentration  D  1.74  :  in. 13  ;  Vism  158.  -parikkhara 
requisite  to  the  attainment  of  samadhi :  either  4  (the 
sammappadhanas)  M  1.301  ;  or  7  ;  D  II. 216;  III. 252  ; 
A  IV. 40.  -bala  the  power  of  concentration  A  1.94; 
n.252  ;  D  111,213,  -53:  Dhs  28.  -bhavana  cultivation, 
attainment  of  samadhi  M  1.301  ;  A  11.44  *1-  (four  different 
kinds  mentioned);  in. 25  sq. ;  D  in. 222  ;  Vism  371. 
-sagvattanika  conducive  to  concentration  A  1157; 
S  IV. 272  sq. ;  D  111.245;  Dhs  1344.  -sambojjhanga 
the  s.  constituent  of  enlightment  D  in. 106,  226,  252  ; 
Vism  134  =  VbhA  283  (with  the  eleven  means  of 
cultivating  it). 

Samadhika  (adj.)  [sama-l- adhika]  excessive,  abundant 
P  n.251  ;  J  11.383;  IV.31. 

Samadbiyati  is  Passive  of  samadahati.  , 

Samana'  (adj.)  [Vedic  samana,  fr.  sama^]  similar,  equal, 
even,  same  Sn  18,  309  ;  J  11. 108.    Cp.  samaiiiia'. 

Samana"  [ppr.  fr.  as  to  be]  i.  being,  existing  D  i.i8,  60  ; 
J  1. 218:  PvA  129  (  =  santo),  167  (id.).  —  2.  a  kind  of 
gods  D  11.260. 

-asanika  entitled  to  a  seat  of  the  same  height  Vin  11. 
169.  -gatika  identical  Tikp  35.  -bhava  equanimity  Sn 
702 .  -vassika  having  spent  the  rainy  season  together  Vin 
1. 168  sq.  -sagvasa  living  together  with  equals  Dh  302 
(a°),  cp.  DhA  111.462.  -sarjvasaka  belonging  to  the  same 
communion  Vin  1.32 1.  -sima  the  same  boundary, 
parish  Vin  1.321;  °ma  belonging  to  the  same  parish 
Vin  n.300. 

Samanatta  (adj.)  [samana 4- attan]  equanimous,  of  even 
mind  A  iv.364. 

Samanattata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  Isist]  equanimity,  impartiality 
A  11.32  =  248;  IV. 219,  364;  D  III. 152,  190  sq.,  232. 

Samaniya  [instr.  fem.  of  samana,  used  adverbially,  Vedic 
samanya]  (all)  equally,  in  common  Sn  24. 

Samanita  [pp.  of  samaneti]  brought  home,  settled  Miln  349. 

Samaneti  [sag -t- aneti]  i.  to  bring  together  J  1.68.  —  2.  to 
bring,  produce  J  1.433.  —  3.  to  put  together,  cp.  J  1.120, 
148.  —  4.  to  collect,  enumerate  J  1.429.  —  5.  to  calcu- 
late (the  time)  J  1.120,  148  ;  aor.  samanayi  DA  1.275.  — 
pp.  samanita. 

Samapajjati  [sag4-apajjati]  i.  to  come  into,  enter  upon, 
attain  D  1.215  (samadhig  samapajji) ;  Vin  111.241 
(Pot.  °pajjey>-a) ;  samapattig  J  1.77  ;  arahattamaggag  A 
11.42  sq. ;  Vin  1.32  ;  safinavedayitanirodhag  to  attain 
the  trance  of  cessation  S  iv.293  ;  kayavikkayag  to 
engage  in  buying  and  selling  Vin  in. 241  :  sakacchag  to 
engage  in  conversation  D  11.109  ;  tejodhatug  to  convert 
one's  body  into  fire  Vin  1.25:  11.76.  —  j.  to  become 
S  111.86  (aor.  3'*  pi.  samapadug). — pp.  samapajjita  & 
samapanna. 

Samapaijana  (nt.)  [fr.  last]  entering  upon,  passing  through 
(?)  Miln  176. 

Samapajjita  [pp.  of  "apajiatij  attained,  reached,  got  into 
D  n.109  (parisa  °pubba). 


Sainapatipatti 


145 


Samiddhin 


Samapatipatti  misprint  for  sarama"  A  1.69. 

Samapatti  (f.)  [fr.  sag+a+pad]  attainment  A  111.5;  S 
U.I 50  sq. ;  IV.293  (sanna-vedayita-nirodha°) ;  Dhs  30  = 
loi  ;  a  stage  of  meditation  A  1.94;  Dhs  1331  ;  J  1.343, 
473;  PvA  6i  (maha-karuna°) ;  Nd^  100,  106,  139.  143; 
the  Buddha  acquired  anekakotisata-sahassa  s.  J  1.77. 
The  eight  attainments  comprise  the  four  Jhanas,  the 
realm  of  the  infinity  of  space,  realm  of  the  infinity  of 
consciousness,  realm  of  nothingness,  realm  of  neither 
consciousness  nor  unconsciousness  Ps  1.8,  20  sq. ; 
Ndi  108,  328  ;  Bu  :92  =  J  1.28,  54  ;  necessary  for  becom- 
ing a  Buddha  J1.14;  acquired  by  the  Buddha  J  1.66  ; 
the  nine  attainments,  the  preceding  and  the  trance  of 
cessation  of  perception  and  sensation  S  11. 216,  222; 
described  M  1.159  sq.  etc.;  otherwise  called  anupubba- 
vihara  D  11.156:  A  iv.410,  448  &  passim  [cp.  Divy 
95  etc.].  —  In  collocation  with  jhana,  vimokkha,  and 
samadhi  Vin  1.97;  A  111.417  sq.  ;  cp.  Cpd.  59,  133  n.  3. 
-°bhavana  realizing  the  attainments  J  1.67;  °kusalata 
success  in  attainment  D  in. 2 12  ;  Dhs  1331  sq. 

Samapattila  [fr.  last]  one  wbo  has  acquired  J  1.406. 

Samapattesiya  (adj.)  [samapatti +esiya,  adj.  to  esika] 
longing  for  attainment  Kvu  502  sq. 

Samapanna  [pp.  of  samapajjati]  having  attained,  got  to, 
entered,  reached  S  iv.293  (saiiiia-nirodhag) ;  A  11.42 
(arahatta-maggai)  entered  the  Path) ;  Dh  264  (iccha- 
lobha°  given  to  desire);  Kvu  572  (in  special  sense  = 
attaining  the  samapattis). 

Samapaanaka  (adj.)  [last-f  ka]  possessed  of  the  samapattis 
DA  1. 119. 

Samapeti  [sag+apeti]  to  complete,  conclude  Mhvs  5, 
273  ;  30,  55  ;  DA  1.307  (desanai)).  —  pp.  samatta'-. 

Samayati  [sag+ayati]  to  come  together,  to  be  united 
J  ni.38. 

Samayuta  [sag  +  ayuta]  combined,  united  Miln  274. 

Samayoga  [sag+ayoga]  combination,  conjunction  DA 
1.95  ;  Sdhp  45,  469. 

Samaiaka  (adj.)  [sa'+ mara+ka]  including  Mara  Vin 
I.II  =  S  V.423  ;  D  1.250  ;  111.76,  135  &  passim. 

Samaiaddba  [pp.  of  samarabhati]  undertaken  S  iv.197; 
Dh  293  ;  J  II. 61. 

Samarambha  [sag  +  arambha]  1.  undertaking,  effort,  en- 
deavour, activity  A  11. 197  sq.  (kaya°,  vaci",  mano") ; 
Vin  1V.67.  —  2.  injuring,  killing,  slaughter  Sn  311; 
D  1.5  ;  DA  1.77  ;  A  11. 197  ;  S  v. 470  ;  Pug  58  ;  Dhs.\  146. 
— appasamarambha  (written  "rabbha)  connected  with 
little  (or  no)  injury  (to  life)  D  1.143.     Cp.  arabhatii. 

Samarabhati  [sag -1-  arabhati*]  to  begin,  undertake  M  1.227  ; 
Mhvs  5,  79.  —  pp.  samaraddha. 

Samaruhati  [sag  -t-  aruhati]  to  climb  up,  to  ascend,  enter ; 
pres.  samarohati  J  vi.2iio  (cp.  samorohati  p.  206,  read 
samarohati) ;  aor.  samaruhi  Mhvs  14,  38.  —  pp.  sama- 
rulha.  —  Caus.  samaropeti  to  raise,  cause  to  enter  Miln 
85  ;  to  put  down,  enter  Nett  4,  206. 

Samaru]ha  [pp.  of  samaruhati]  ascended,  entered  M  1.74. 

Samaropana  [fr.  samaropeti]  one  of  the  Haras  Nett  i,  2,  4. 
108,  205  sq.,  256  sq. 

Samalapati  [sag-f-alapati]  to  speak  to,  address  J  1.478. 
At  J  1.5 1  it  seems  to  mean  "  to  recover  the  power  of 
speech." 

Sama?ayB=samavaya,  closely  united  J  vi.475  (in  verse). 


Samasa  [fr.  sag 4-  as]  i.  compound,  combination  Vism  82  ; 
SnA  303;  KhA  228.  Cp.  vyasa.  —  2.  an  abridgment 
Mhvs  37,  244. 

Samasati  [sag-l-  asati]  to  sit  together,  associate  ;  Pot.  3  sg. 
samasetha  S  1.17,  56  sq. ;  J  it. 1x2  ;  v. 483,  494;  Th  i,  4. 

Samasana  (nt.)  [sag -H  asana]  sitting  together  with,  com- 
pany Su  977. 

Samasama  "  exactly  the  same  "  at  Ud  85  (=D  11.135)  read 
sama°. 

Samasadeti  [sag -1- asadeti]  to  obtain,  get;  ger.  samasajja 
J  III. 218. 

Samahata  [sag-l-ahata]  hit,  struck  Sn  153  (ayosanku") ; 
Miln  i8i,  254,  304.  Sankusamahata  name  of  a  pur- 
gatory M  1.337. 

Samahita[pp.  of  samadahati]  i.  put  down,  fitted  J  iv.337; 

—  2.  collected  (of  mind),  settled,  composed,  firm,  atten- 
tive D  1. 13  ;  S  1. 169  ;  A  11. 6  ("indriya) ;  111.312,  343  sq. ; 
v. 3,  93  sq.,  329  sq. ;  Sn  212,  225,  972  etc. ;  Dh  362  ;  It 
119;  Pug  35;  Vin  III. 4;  Miln  300;  Vism  410;  Nd^  501. 

—  3.  having  attained  S  1.48  (cp.  U.S.  1.321  &  Miln  352). 

Samijihati  [sag-t-ijjhati]  to  succeed,  prosper,  take  effect 
D  1.71  ;  Sn  766  (cp.  Nd^  2  =  labhati  etc.);  Bu  11.59  = 
J  1.14,  267;  Pot.  samijjheyyug  D  1.71  ;  aor.  samijjhi 
J  1.68;  Fut.  samijjhissati  J  1.15.  —  pp.  samiddha. — 
Caus.  II.  "ijjhapeti  to  endow  or  invest  with  (ace.)  J 
VI. 484. 

Samijjhana  (ut.)  [fr.  samijjhati]  fulfilment,  success  DliA 
I.I  12. 

Samijihittha  [sag4- ajjhittha]  ordered,  requested  J  vi.12 
(  =  anatta  C). 

Saminjati  [sag-l-injati  of  rnj  or  rj  to  stretch]  i.  to  double 
up  M  1.326.  —  2.  (intrs.)  to  be  moved  or  shaken  Dh  81 
(  =  calati  kampati  Dh.\  11. 149).     See  also  sammifijati. 

Saminjana  (nt.)  [fr.  samiiijati]  doubling  up,  bending  back 
(orig.  stretching!)  Vism  500  (opp.  pasarana).  See  also 
samminjana. 

Samita'  [sag-t-ita,  pp.  of  sameti]  gathered,  assembled 
Vv  64'"  ;  VvA  277.  —  nt.  as  adv.  samitag  continuously 
M  1.93  ;  A  IV. 13  ;  It  116  ;  Miln  70,  1 16. 

Samita^  [sa+  mita,  of  ma]  equal  (in  measure),  like  S  1.6. 

Samita^  [pp.  of  sammati']  quiet,  appeased  DhA  111.84. 

Samita'  [pp.  of  sag  +  Sam  to  labour]  arranged,  put  in  order 
J  V.201  (  =  sagvidahita  C). 

Samitatta  (nt.)  [fr.  samita']  state  of  being  quieted  Dh  265. 

Samitavin  [samita'+  avin,  cp.  vijitilvin]  one  who  has  quieted 
himself,  calm,  Sn  449,  520  ;  S  1.62,  188  ;  A  11.49,  50.  Cp. 
BSk.  samitavin  &  samitavin. 

Samiti(f.)  [fr.  sag  +  i]  assembly  D  11.256;  Dh  32  i  ;  J  iv.351  ; 
Pv  II. 3»'  (  =  sannipata  PvA  86) ;  DhA  iv.13. 

Samiddha  [pp.  of  samijjhati]  i.  succeeded,  successful  Vin 
1.37;  Bu  ii.4=J  1.3;  Miln  331. — 2.  rich,  magnificent 
J  VI. 393 ;  J  111.14:  samiddhena  (adv.)  successfully 
J  VI.3I4- 

Samiddhi  (f)  [fi".  samijjhati]  success,  prosperity  Dh  84  ; 
S  1.200. 

Samiddhika  (adj.)  [samiddhi -1- ka]  rich  in,  abounding  in 
Sdhp  421. 

Samiddhin  (adj.)  [fr.  samiddhi]  richly  endowed  with  ThA 
18  (Ap  V.23);  fem.  -ini  J  v. 90. 


Samidha 


146 


Samudagama 


Samidha  (f.)  [fr.  saij+idh;  sec  indhana]  fuel,  firewood 
SnA  174. 

Samihita  [=sar)hitaj  collected,  composed  Vin  1.245  = 
D  1.104=238;  A  iii.224  =  229=DA  1.273;  E)  1.241,  272. 

Samici  D  11.94  :  see  samici. 

Samitar  [  =  sametar]  one  who  meets,  assembles;  pi.  sami- 
taro  J  V.324. 

Samipa  (adj.)  [cp.  Epic  dt  Class.  Sk.  samlpa]  near,  close 
(to)  SnA  43  (bhumma-vacana),  174,  437;  KhA  in; 
PvA  47  (dvara°  magga)  (nt.)  proximity  D  1.118.  Cases 
adverbially :  ace.  °ag  near  to  PvA  107 ;  loc.  °-e  near 
(with  gen.)  SnA  23,  256;  PvA  10,  17,  67,  120. 

-ga  approaching  Mhvs  4,  27;  25,  74.  -cara  being 
near  DhsA  193.  -carin  being  near  D  1.206;  11.139. 
-tfha  standing  near  Mhvs  37,  164. 

Samipaka  (adj.)  [samipa+  ka]  being  near  Mhvs  33,  52. 

Samira  [fr.  sag+Ir]  air,  wind  Davs  iv.40. 

Samirati  [sag+irati]  to  be  moved  Vin  1.185;  ^^  81; 
DhA  II.  149.  —  pp.  samirita  J  1.393. 

Samirita  [sag+irita]  stirred,  moved  J  1.393. 

Samihati  [sag  +  ihati]  to  move,  stir  ;  to  be  active  ;  to  long 
for,  strive  after  Sn  1064  (cp,  Nd*  651) ;  Vv  5I ;  VvA  35 ; 
J  v. 388.  —  pp.  samihita. 

Samihita  (nt.)  [pp.  of  samihati]  endeavour,  striving  after, 
pursuit  J  V.388. 

Samukkagsati  [sai)+  ukkagsati]  to  extol,  to  praise  Sn  132, 
438  ;  M  1.498.  —  pp.  samukkattha. 

Samukkattba  [sai)+  ukkaftha]  exalted  A  iv.2g3  ;  Th  i,  632. 

Samukkacana=ukkacana  Vbh  352  ;  Vism  23. 

Samukkhetita  [sag  +  ukkhetita]  despised,  rejected  Vin 
111.95  ;  iv.27. 

Samugga  [Class.  Sk.  samudga]  a  box,  basket  J  1.265,  372, 
383;  Miln  153,  247;  Sdhp  360  (read  samuggabhag). 
Samugga-jataka  the  436th  Jataka  J  111.527  sq.  (called 
Karandaka-Jataka  ibid.  ;  v. 455). 

Samugganhati  [sag+ugganhati]  to  seize,  grasp,  embrace; 
ger.  samuggahaya  Sn  797  ;  Nd^  105.  — •  pp.  samuggahita. 

Samuggata  [sag+uggata]  arisen  VvA  2S0 ;  J  iv.403  (text 
samuggagata). 

Samuggama  [sag+uggama]  rise,  origin  VbhA  21  (twofold, 
of  the  khandhas). 

Samuggahita  [pp.  of  samugganhati]  seized,  taken  up  Sn 

35-.  7'^5.  801,  837,  907;  Nd'  76,  100,  193. 

Samuggirati  [sag+  uggirati]  to  throw  out,  eject  VvA  199  ; 
to  cry  aloud  Davs  v. 29. 

Samugghata  [sag+ugghata;  BSk.  samudghata  Lai.  Vist. 
36,  571]  uprooting,  abolishing,  removal  D  1.135  ;  M  1.136  ; 
A  11.34;  "i-4°7  I  V.198;  S  11.263;  III. 131  ;  IV.31  ;  Vin 
1. 107,  1 10  ;  J  III. 397. 

Samugghataka  (adj.)  [fr.  last]  removing  Miln  278. 

Samugghatita  [pp.  of  samugghateti,  see  samuhanati] 
abolished,  completely  removed  ;  nt.  abstr.  °tta  Miln  10 1 . 

Samucita  [sag+ucita,  pp.  of  uc  to  be  pleased]  suitable 
Vin  IV. 147  (must  mean  something  else  here,  perhaps 
"  hurt,"  or  "  frightened  ")  Davs  v. 55. 

Samuccaya  [sag+uccaya]  collection,  accumulation  J 
n.235   (the  signification  of  the  particle  va) ;  SnA  266 


(id.).  —  samuccaya-kkliandhaka    the    third   section   of 
Cullavagga  Vin  11.38-72. 

Samucchaka  see  samuiichaka. 

Samucchati  [derivation  and  meaning  uncertain  ;  Windisch, 
Buddha's  Geburt,  p.  39,  n.  i  derives  it  fr.  sag-l-  mucchati. 
Cp.  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  157]  to  be  consolidated,  to  arise; 
samucchissatha  (Conditional)  D  11.63. 

Samacchita  [sag+mucchita]  infatuated  S  1.187;  iv.71  ; 
Th  I,  1219.  It  is  better  to  read  pamucchita  at  all 
passages. 

Samucchindati  [sag  +  ucchindati]  to  extirpate,  abolish, 
spoil,  give  up  D  1.34  ;  11.74  '•  ^  l.ioi  sq.,  360  ;  J  IV. 63.  — 
pp.  samucchinna. 

Samucchinua  [sag+  ucchinna]  cut  off,  extirpated  D  1.34. 

Samuccheda  [sag  +  uccheda]  cutting  oS,  abolishing,  giving 
up  M  1.360;  KhA  142;  samma  s.  Ps  i.ioi  ;  "pahana 
relinquishing  by  extirpation  Vism  5  ;  SnA  9 ;  "maraija 
dying  by  extirpation  (of  sagpara)  Vism  229 ;  "visuddhi 
Ps  II. 3  ;  °sunfiag  Ps  ii.180. 

Samujjala  (adj.)  [sag  + ujjala]  resplendent  J  1.89,92  (panca- 
variija-vattha°).  ragsi-jala°  resplendent  with  the  blaze 
of  rays  VvA  12,  14,  166. 

Samajjtt  (adj.)  [sag+uju]  straightforward,  perfect  Sn  352  ; 
S  IV.  196  (text  sagmuju). 

Samoilchaka  (adj.)  [sag+ uncha+ka]  only  as  nt.  adv. 
°g  gleaning,  (living)  by  gleaning  S  1.19;  J  iv.466 
{°g  carati). 

Samutthahati  [sag-t- utthahati]  to  rise  up,  to  originate; 
pres.  samutthati  Vin  v.i  ;  aor.  samutthahi  Mhvs  28, 
16.  —  pp.  samutthita.  —  Cans,  samutthapeti  to  raise, 
to  originate,  set  on  foot  J  1.144,  191,  318. 

Samu^hana  (nt.)  [sag+  utthana]  rising,  origination,  cause  ; 
as  adj.  (-'')  arising  from  A  11.87  ;  Dhs  766  sq.,  981,  1175  ; 
Miln  .134,  302,  304;  J  1.207;  IV. 171;  KhA  23,  31,  123; 
Vism  366. 

Samu^banika  (adj.)  [fr.  last]  originating  DhsA  263. 

Samutthapaka  (f.  °ika)  [fr.  samutthapeti]  occasioning, 
causing  DhsA  344  ;  VvA  72. 

Samutthita  [pp-  of  samutthahati]  arisen,  originated,  hap- 
pened, occurred  J  11. 196;  Dhs  1035. 

Samuttarati  [sag-t- uttarati]  to  pass  over  Miln  372. 

Samuttejaka  (adj.)  [fr.  samuttejeti]  instigating,  inciting, 
gladdening  M  1.146  ;  A  11.97  '■  iv.296,  328;  v. 155  ;  S  v.162  ; 
It  107. 

Samuttejeti  [sag-fud-(- tij]  to  excite,  gladden,  to  fill  with 
enthusiasm  Vin  1.18;  D  1.126.  Cp.  BSk.  samutteja- 
yati,  e.  g.  Divy  80. 

Samudaya  [sag -(- udaya]  i.  rise,  origin  D  1.17;  11.33,  3°8  ; 
III. 227;  A  1.263  (kamma") ;  Vin  i.io;  Sn  p.  135;  It  16 
(samuddaya  metri  causa)  etc.  dukkha"  the  origin  of 
ill,  the  second  ariya-sacca,  e.  g.  D  111.136;  A  1177; 
Vism  495  (where  samudaya  is  expl""  in  its  parts  as  sam-t- 
u-f  aya) ;  VbhA  124.  —  2.  bursting  forth,  effulgence 
(pabha°)  J  1.83. —  3.  produce,  revenue  D  1.227. 

Samudagacchati  [sag -1- udagacchati]  to  result,  rise;  to  be 
got,  to  be  at  hand  D  1. 116;  M  1.104.  —  pp.  samudagata. 

Samudagata  [pp-  of  last]  arisen,  resulted  ;  received  S  11.24 ; 
Sn  648  (=agata  C). 

Samudagama  [sag-t-ud+agama]  beginning  J  1.2. 


Samudacarati 


147 


Samussaya 


Samadacarati  [sag+ud+acarati]  i.  to  be  current,  to  be 
in  use  M  1.40  (=kaya-vaci-dvarar)  sampatta  s.  MA  182). 
—  2.  to  occur  to,  to  befall,  beset,  assail  M  1.109,  112, 
453  ;  S  11.273  ;  It  31  ;  Vism  343.  —  3.  to  behave  towards, 
to  converse  with  (instr.),  to  address  Vin  1.9;  D  11. 154, 
192  ;  A  III. 124,  131  ;  IV. 415,  440  :  V.103  ;  J  1.192.  — •  4.  to 
practise  J  11.33  (aor.  °acarii)su).  —  5.  to  claim,  to  boast 
of  Vin  111.91.  —  pp.  samudacinna. 

Samudacaritatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  samudacarita,  pp.  of 
samudacarati]  practice  Miln  59. 

Samadacaia  [sag+ud+acara]  behaviour,  practice,  habit, 
familiarity  J  iv.22  ;  SnA  6;  DhsA  392  ;  PvA  279. 

Samudacinna  [pp.  of  samudacarati]  practised,  indulged  in 
J  11.33  ;  Tikp  320. 

Samudanaya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  samudaneti]  to  be  procured  or 
attained  J  ill. 313  (su°). 

Samadanlta  [pp.  of  samudaneti,  cp.  BSk.  samudanita 
MV'astu  1.231]  collected,  procured  J  iv.177. 

Samadaneti  [saij+ud+aneti;  cp.  BSk.  samudanayati 
Divy  26,  50,  490  ;  AvS  I.I99]  to  collect,  procure,  attain, 
get  M  1. 104  ;  Sn  295.  — pp.  "anita. 

Samadaya  [fr.  sag+ud+a+i]  multitude,  quantity  VvA 
1 75  ;  the  whole  VvA  2  76. 

Samndarata  [sag+ud+avata  ?  Better  read  as  sar)  + 
uda\atta]  restrained  DhsA  75. 

Samadahaia  [sag+udahara,  cp.  BSk.  samudahara  Divy 
143]  talk,  conversation  Miln  344;  piya"  A  v.24,  27,  90, 
201,  339  ;  ThA  226. 

Samadikkbati  [sag  +  udikkhati]  to  behold  ThA   147  (Ap. 


Samadita  [sag+udita']   I.  arisen  Davs  v.4.  ■ 
S  1.136.  —  3.  united  VvA  321. 


Samudirana  (nt.)  [sag+udirana  in  meaning  udireti  i] 
moving  M  1.119  ;  D  1.76 ;  Vism  365  ;  DhsA  307. 

Samudirita  [sag  +  udirita]  uttered  J  vi.17. 

Samudeti  [sag  +  udeti]  to  arise;  pres.  samudayati  (v.  1. 
samudiyati)  S  11.78  ;  samudeti  A  111.338  ;  pp.  samudita. 

Samudda  [cp.  Vedic  samudra,  fr.  sag  +  udra,  water]  a 
(large)  quantity  of  water,  e.  g.  the  Ganges ;  the  sea, 
the  ocean  D  1.222;  M  1.493;  A  1243;  11.48  sq.; 
III. 240;  D  III. 196,  198;  S  1.6,  32,  67;  J  1.230;  IV. 167, 
172;  Dh  127;  Ndi  353;  SnA  30 ;  PvA  47,  104,  133, 
271  ;  explained  by  adding  sagara,  S  11.32  ;  four  oceans 
S  11.180,  187;  ThA  III.  Often  characterized  as  maha° 
the  great  ocean,  e.  g.  Vin  11.237;  A  1.227;  11.55; 
111.52;  rv.ioi  ;  SnA  371  ;  DhA  111.44.  Eight  qaaiities  : 
A  IV. 198,  206;  popular  etymology  Miln  85  sq.  (viz. 
"yattakag  udakag  tattakag  lonag,"  and  vice  versa); 
the  eye  etc.  (the  senses)  an  ocean  which  engulfs  all 
beings  S  iv.157  (samudda  =  r^^aha  udakarasi). — .  Cp. 
samuddika. 

-akkhayika  (f.)  tales  about  the  origin  of  the  sea. 
cosmogony  Vin  1.188;  M  1.513  sq.  ;  D  1.8;  DA  1.91. 
-tthaka  situated  in  the  ocean  J  vi.158.  -vici  a  wave  of 
the  ocean  Vism  63. 

Samuddaya  metri  causi  instead  of  samudaya  It  16,  52. 

Samaddhata  [sag+ uddhata]  pulled  out,  eradicated  Mhvs 
59.  15  ;  J  V1.309;  Sdhp  143. 

SamuddbaiaQE  (nt.)  [sag  +  uddharaija]  pulling  out,  sal- 
vation Miln  232. 


Samaddharati  [sag+  uddharati]  to  take  out  or  away ;  to  lift 
up,  carry  away,  save  from;  aor.  samuddhari  J  vi.271  ; 
samuddhasi  (aor.  thus  read  instead  of  samutthasi) 
J  V.70- 

Samonna  [sag+  unna]  moistened,  wet,  immersed  S  iv.158  ; 
cp.  the  similar  passage  A  11.2 11  with  ref.  to  tanha  as  a 
snare  (pariyonaddha). 

Samunnameti  [sag 4-  unnameti]  to  raise,  elevate.  Th  i,  29 

Samapagacchati  [sag  +  upagacchati]  to  approach  Miln  209. 

Samnpajaneti  [saT|+ upa+ janeti]  to  produce;  "janiya- 
mana  (ppr.  pass.)  Nett  195. 

Samupat^hahati  [sag+upatthahati]  to  serve,  help;  pres. 
samupatthati  Sdhp  283;  aor.  samupatthahi  Mhvs  33, 
95- 

Samapabba}ha[sag+  upa+  viyulha]setup  ;  heaped,  massed, 
in  full  swing  (of  a  battle),  crowded  M  1.253;  D  11.285; 
S  1.98  ;  Miln  292  ;  J  1.89. 

Samapama  [sag+upama]  resembling  Mhvs  37,  68;  also 
samupama  J  1.146;  v.155;  vi.534. 

Samuparujha  [sag  +  uparnlha]  ascended  Davs  iv.42. 

Samupasobbita  [sag+  upasobhita]  adorned  Miln  2. 

Samapagacchati  [sag  +  upagacchati]  to  come  to ;  aor. 
samupagami  Mhvs  36,  91  ;  pp.  samupagata. 

Samopagata  [sag 4- upagata]  come  to,  arrived  at  Mhvs  37, 
1 15  ;  38,  12  ;  J  VI. 282  ;  Sdhp  324. 

Samapadika  being  on  a  level  with  the  water  Miln  237 
(Trencknef  conjectures  samupodika).  The  better  read- 
ing, however,  is  samupp",  sama  =  peace,  quiet,  thus 
"  producing  quiet,"  calm. 


excited      Samnpeta  [sag  +  upeta]  endowed  with,  Miln  352. 


Samnppajjati   [sag+ uppajjati]   to  arise,  to  be   produced 
S  IV.218  ;  pp.  samuppanna. 

Samuppatti  (f.)  origin,  arising  S  iv.218. 


produced,     come 


Samappanna    [sag  4- uppanna]    arisen, 
about  Sn  168,  599  ;  Dhs  1035. 

Samnppada  [sax)  +  uppada]  origin,  arising,  genesis,  coming 
to  be,  production  Vin  11.96  ;  S  in.  16  sq. ;  It  17  ;  A  in. 406 
(dhamma") ;  J  vi.223  (anilupana-sarauppada,  v.  read, 
"-samuppata,  "  swift  as  the  wind  ") ;  Vism  521  (samma 
&  saha  uppajjati  =  samuppada).     Cp.  paficca". 

Samnppilava  (adj.)  [fr.  sag4-uppilavati]  jumping  or 
bubbling  up  Sn  670  (°aso  nom.  pi.). 

Samapphosita  [sag-(-ud-(-phosita]  sprinkled  J  vi.481. 

Samnbbabati  [sag+ ubbahati-]  to  carry  Davs  111.3;  v.35 ; 
ppr.  samubbahanto  J  vi.21  (making  display  of). 

Samubbhuta  [sag+  ud4-  bhuta]  borne  from,  produced  from 
Davs  11.25. 

Samoyyuta  [sag -H  uyyuta]  energetic,  devoted  Vv  63"; 
VvA  269. 

Samallapati  [sag+ullapati]  to  talk,  converse  Vin  111.187; 
PvA  237;  ppr.  samuUapanto  J  in. 49. 

Samullapana  (nt.)  [sag -1- uUapana]  talking  (with),  con- 
versation SnA  71. 

Samollapa  [=Iast]  conversation,  talk  Miln  351. 

Samussaya  [sag+  ud-i-iri,  cp.  BSk.  samucchraya  "  body," 
Divy  7o  =  AvS  1.162]  i.  accumulation,  complex  A  11.42  = 


Samussapita 


148 


Sampaggahita 


It  48  ;  It  34 ;  bhassasamuccaya,  grandiloquence  Sn  245  ; 

—  2.  complex  form,  the  body  D  11.157  =  8  1.148  ;  VV35'' 
(=sarira  VvA  164);  Dh  351  ;  Tli  i,  202  ("confluence," 
i.  e.  of  the  5  factors,  trsl") ;  Th  2,  22,  270  ;  DhA  IV.70  ; 
ThA  98,  212;  rupasamussaya  the  same  Th  2,  102; 
cp.  samuccaya. 

Samussapita  [sarj  +  ussapita]  lifted,  raised  J  m.408. 

Samussahita  [sag  +  ussahita]  instigated  VvA  105. 

Samussita  [sag  +  ussita]  i.  elevated,  erected  J  111.497. — ■ 
2.  arrogant,  proud,  haughty  Dh  147  (interpreted  at 
DhA  111.109  as  "  compounded,"  i.  e.  the  body  made  up 
of  300  bones) ;  A  1.199  ;  SnA  288  (°r)  bhassag  high  and 
mighty  talk). 

Samusseti  [sar|+  ud+  sril  to  raise,  lift  up  ;  Pot.  samusseyya 
A  1. 199  (here  =  to  be  grandiloquent).  —  pp.  samussita. 

Samiipasanta  [sag+  upasanta]  is  v.  1.  for  su-viipasanta  (?) 
"  calmed,"  at  KhA  21. 

Samiilaka  (adj.)  [sa'+  miila+  ka]  including  the  root  Th  2 
385  ;  ThA  256. 

Samflha  [fr.  sag+vah,  uh]  multitude,  mass,  aggregation 
Nett  195  ;  PvA  49,  127,  157  (  =  gana),  200  (id.). 

Samuhata  [pp.  of  samuhanati]  taken  out,  removed  D  1. 136  ; 

5  111.131  ;  Th  I,  223  ;  Dh  250  ;  Sn  14,  360  ;  It  83  ;  J  IV. 345 
(Kern,  wrongly  "combined"). 

Samubatatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  samuhata]  abolition  M  in. 151. 

Samuhanati  [sai)+ uhanati-]  to  remove,  to  abolish  Vin 
i.lio;  D  1.135  sq.  ("hanissati) ;  11.91  =  5  v.432  ;  M  1.47; 
11.193;  S  V.76;  J  1.374=  Sn  360;  Sn  14,  369,  1076; 
sikkhapadar)  Vin  111.23;  D  11.154;  uposathagarai)  to 
discontinue  using  a  Vihara  as  an  Uposathagara  Vin 
1.107;  simar)  to  remove  the  boundary  Vin  i.iio.  Pres. 
also  samuhanti  S  111.136 ;  Pot.  samiihaneyya  Vin  i.iio  ; 
imper.  samuhantu  D  11.154;  &  "uhanatu  Miln  143;  ger. 
samuhanitva  M  1.47  ;  Vin  1.107  ;  a"  M  111.285  '.  inf.  samug- 
ghatur)   Mhvs    37,   32  ;     grd.  samiihantabba  Vin   1.107. 

—  Caus.  II.  samugghatapeti  to  cause  to  be  removed,  i.  e. 
to  put  to  death  Miln  193;  samCihanapeti  Miln  142. — 
pp.  samuhata  &  (Caus.)  samugghatita. 

Samiiheti  [Caus.  of  sar)+  uh=vah]  to  gather,  collect  Mhvs 
37.  245- 

Samekkhati  [sag  +  ikkhati]  to  consider,  to  seek,  look  for  ; 
Pot.  samekkhe  J  1V.5  ;  ppr.  samekkhamana  Th  1,  547; 

6  samekkhar)  J  11.65  ;  ger.  samekkhiya  Mhvs  37,  237. 

Sameta  [pp.  of  sameti]  associating  with  Miln  396  ;  con- 
nected with,  provided  with  Mhvs  19.  69  ;  combined,  con- 
stituted Sn  873,  874. 

Sameti  [sag  -t-  eti]  1 .  to  come  together,  to  meet,  to  assemble 
Bu  11.199=  J  1.29.  —  2.  to  associate  with,  to  go  to 
D  11.273;  J  iv.93.  —  3.  to  correspond  to,  to  agree 
D  1.162.  247;  J  1.358;  111.278.  —  4.  to  know,  con- 
sider S  1.186  ;  Nd'  284.  —  5.  to  fit  in  J  vi.334.  —  imper. 
sametu  J  iv.932»  ;  fut.  samessati  S  iv.379 ;  It  70  ;  aor. 
samigsu  Bu  11.199  ;  S  11.158=  It  70  ;  &  samesug  J  11.30"  ; 
ger.  samecca  (i)  (coming)  together  with  D  n.273; 
J  vi.2  1 1,  318.  —  (2)  having  acquired  or  learnt,  knowing 
S  1.186;  Sn  361,  793;  A  11.6.  —  pp.  samita  &  sameta 
[  =  sag-l-  R+  ita]. 

Sametika  Sn  285  ;  read  samahita. 

Samerita  [sag  +  erita]  moved,  set  in  motion;  filled  with 
(-°),  pervaded  by  Sn  937  ;  Nd'  410  ;  J  VI.529  ;  Vism  172. 

Samokimia  [pp.  of  samokirati]  besprinkled,  covered  (with) 
J  1-233. 


Samokiiati  [sag -f  oki rati]  to  sprinkle  Bu  11.178=  J  1.27.  — 
pp.  samokinna. 

Samocita  [sag-nocita]  gathered,  arranged  J  v. 156  (  =  suro- 
cita  C). 

Samotata   [sag -1- otata]   strewn   all   over,   spread   Vv   81' 

(vv.  11.  samogata  and  samohata) ;  J  1.183  ;  Ap  191. 

Samotarati  [sag-t-  otarati]  to  descend  Mhvs  10,  57. 

Samodakai)  (adv.)  [sag -(- odakag]  at  the  water's  edge 
Vin  i.6=M  i.i69=D  11.38. 

Samodahati  [sag  -f-  odahati]  to  put  together,  supply,  apply 
S  1.7  ;  IV. 178  sq.  ;  to  fix  Nett  165,  178  ;  ppr.  samodaharj 
S  I.7=iv.i79;  ger.  samodahitva  S  iv.178;  &  samodhaya 
Vism  105  ;  Sdhp  588.  —  pp.  samohita. 

Samodita  united  VvA  186  (so  read  for  samm°),  320  ;  cp. 
samudita. 

Samodhana  (nt.)  [sag4-odhana,  cp.  odahana]  collocation, 
combination  Bu  11.59=  J  i-H^  S  iv.2i5  =  v.212  ;  appli- 
cation (of  a  storj')  J  11.381.  samodhanag  gacchati  to 
come  together,  to  combine,  to  be  contained  in  Vin  1.62  ; 
M  1.184  =  8  1.86;  V.43,  231=  A  V.21  (Com.  odhanapak- 
khepag)  A  111.364;  SnA  2;  Vism  7;  VbhA  107; 
samodhanagata  wrapped  together  Miln  362  ;  samodhana- 
parivasa  a  combined,  inclusive  probation  Vin  11.48  sq. 

Samodhanata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  samodhana]  combination, 
application,  pursuance,  in  vutti°  J  111.541  (so  read  for 
vatti"). 

Samodhaneti  [Denom.  fr.  samodhana]  to  combine,  put 
together,  connect  J  1.9,  14;  DA  1.18  ;  SnA  167,  193,  400  ; 
especially  jatakag  s.  to  apply  a  Jataka  to  the  incident 
J  1. 106,  171  ;  11.381  &  passim. 

SamoTodha  [sag -1- orodha]  barricading,  torpor  Dhs  1157; 
DhsA  379. 

Samorohati  [sag-F  orohati]  to  descend;  ger.  samoruyha 
Mhvs  10,  35. 

Samosarana  (nt.)  [sag-f  osarana]  coming  together,  meeting, 
union,  junction  D  1.237;  11.61  ;  S  111.156;  v. 42  sq.,  91  ; 
A  111-364;  Miln  38. 

Samosaiati  [sag-l- osarati]  1.  to  flow  down  together  Miln 
349.  —  2.  to  come  together,  gather  J  1.178  (see  on  this 
Kern,  Toev.  11.60). 

Samoha  infatuated  Pug  61. 

Samohita  [pp.  of  samodahati]  i.  put  together,  joined 
J  VI. 261  (su°).  —  2.  connected  with,  covered  with 
Ndi  149  (for  pareta) ;  Miln  346  (raja-panka°). 

Sampakampati  [sag  -1-  pakampati]  to  tremble,  to  be  shaken 
Vin  1.12;  D  11.12,  108;  M  1.227;  111.120.  —  Caus.  sam- 
pakampeti  to  shake  D  11. 108. 

Sampakopa  [sag -f  pakopa]  indignation  Dhs  1060. 

Sampakkhandati  [sag-f  pakkhandati.  cp.  BSk.  sampra- 
skandati  MVastu  11.157]  to  Eispire  to,  to  enter  into  Miln 
35- 

Sampakkhandana  (nt.)  [sag-i-pakkhandana]  aspiration 
Miln  34  sq. 

Sampagga^bati  [sag-l-  pagganhati]  1.  to  exert,  strain  DhsA 
372.  —  2.  to  show  a  liking  for,  to  favour,  fcefriend 
J  VI. 294.  —  pp.  sampaggahita. 

Sampaggaha  [sag -1- paggaha]  support,  patronage  Mhvs  4, 

44- 
Sampaggahita  [sag -1- paggahsta]  uplifted  Miln  309. 


Sampaggaha 


149 


Sampada 


Sampaggaha  assumption,  arrogance  Dhs  11 16. 

Sampaghosa  sound,  noise  Mhbv  45. 

Sampacora  (adj.)  [sag+pacura]  abundant,  very  many 
A  11.59,  61  ;  S  I. no. 

Sampajanna  (nt.)  [fr.  sampajana,  i.  e.  *sampajanya]  atten- 
tion, consideration,  discrimination,  comprehension,  cir- 
cumspection A  1. 13  sq.  ;  11.93  '•  HI  3°7  :  rv.320  ;  v.98  sq. ; 
S  III. 169;  D  111.213  (sati-H  samp.  opp.  tomuttha-sacca  + 
asampajaiiiia),  273.  Description  of  it  in  detail  at  DA 
1. 183  sq.  =  VbhA  347  sq.,  where  given  3uS  fourfold,  viz. 
satthaka",  sappaya",  gocara",  asammoha",  with  ex- 
amples. Often  combined  %vith  sati,  with  which  almost 
synonymous,  e.g.  at  D  1.63  ;  A  1.43  ;  11.44 sq. :  v. 115,  118. 

Sampajana  (adj.)  [sarn- pajana,  cp.  pajanati  ;  BSk.  sam- 
prajana,  MVastu  1.206;  11.360]  thoughtful,  mindful, 
attentive,  deliberate,  almost  syn.  with  sata,  mindful 
D  1.37;  11.94  sq. ;  Sn  413,  931;  It  10,  42;  Pug  25; 
D  111.49,  58,  221,  224  sq.  ;  A  iv.47  sq.,  300  sq.,  457  sq. ; 
Ndi  395;  Nd'  141.  sampajanakarin  acting  with  con- 
sideration or  full  attention  D  1.70  ;  11.95,  292  ;  A  11. 2 10  ; 
V.206 ;  VbhA  347  sq.  ;  DA  1. 184  sq. ;  sampajanamusa- 
vada  deliberate  lie  Vin  iv.2  ;  It  18 ;  D  111.45  ;  A  1.128  ; 
IV. 370;  v. 265;  J  1.23. 

Sampajanati  [saij -1- pajanati]  to  know  S  v. 154;  Sn  1055; 
Nd2  655. 

Sampajjati  [sari-Fpajjati]  i.  to  come  to,  to  fall  to;  to 
succeed,  prosper  J  1.7;  II. 105.  —  2.  to  turn  out,  to 
happen,  become  D  1.91,  loi,  193,  239;  Pv.\  192.  aor. 
sampadi  D  11.266,  269. — pp.  sampanna. — Caus. 
sampadeti. 

Sampajialita  (adj.)  [sarj-l-pajjalita]  in  flames,  ablaze 
A  IV.131  ;  Vin  1.25  ;  D  1.95  ;  n.335  ;  J  1.232  ;  Miln  84. 

Sampatike  (adv.)  [loc.  fr.  sar)-l-pati-|-ka]  now  J  iv.432 
(  =  sampati,  idani  C). 

Sampatiggaha  [sar)+patiggaha]  summing  up,  agreement 
Kh.\  100. 

Sampaticchati  [sag-l-paticchatij  to  receive,  accept  J  1.69; 
III. 351  ;  Mhvs  6,  34;  ovadai)  s.  to  comply  with  an 
admonition  J  in. 52  ;  sadhu  ti  s.  to  say  "  well  "  and 
agree  J  11.31  ;  Miln  8.  —  Caus.  II.  sampaticchapeti  J 
VI.336. 

Sampaticchana  (nt.)  [fr.  last]  acceptance,  agreement  DhsA 
332  ;  SnA  176  ("  sadhu  ");  V'ism  21  ;  Sdhp  59,  62. 

Sampatinipajja  (f)  [sarj-f  pati-l- nipajja]  squatting  down, 
Iving  down  ThA  in. 

Sampativijjbati  [sag-l-pativijjhati]  to  penetrate;  Pass, 
sampativijjhiyati  Nett  220. 

Sampativedha  [sarj-l-pativcdha]  penetration  Nett  27,  41, 

42,  220. 

Sampa^aijkha  deliberately  S  ii.iii;  contracted  from 
ger.  °-sar)khaya. 

Sampatati  [sarj -(- patati]  to  jump  about,  to  fly  along  or 
about  J  VI. 528  (duma  dumag) ;  imper.  sampatantu, 
ib.  VI. 448  (itaritarar)) ;  ppr.  sampatanto  flying  to 
J  1 1 1. 49 1,  pp.  sampatita. 

Sampati  [sag-l-pati ;  cp.  Sk.  saraprati]  now  Miln  87; 
sampatijata,  just  born  D  ii.i5  =  M  in. 123.  Cp.  sam- 
patike. 

Sampatita  [pp.  oi  sampatati]  jumping  about  J  vi.507. 

Sampatta  [pp.  of  sampapunati]  reached,  arrived,  come  to, 
present  J  iv.142  ;  Miln  9.  66;  PvA  12  ;  KhA  142  ;  SnA 
295  ;  Sdhp  56. 


Sampattakajata  merged  in,  given  to  Ud  75  [read  sammat- 
taka  (?)]. 

Sampatti  (f.)  [sai)-l-patti2]  ,  success,  attainment ;  happi- 
ness, bliss,  fortune  (opp.  vipatti)  A  iv.26,  160  ;  Vism  58, 
232;  J  IV.3  (dibba°);  DA  1.126;  three  attainments 
J  1.105;  Miln  96;  DhA  111.183  (manussa",  devaloka". 
nibbana");  Nett  126  (sila°.  samadhi",  panna° ;  cp. 
sampada);  four  VbhA  439  sq.  (gati°,  upadhi",  kala°, 
payoga");  six  J  1.105;  nine  Mihi  341.  — 2.  excellency, 
magnificence  SnA  397;  rupasampatti  beauty  J  in. 187; 
IV. 333.  _  3.  honour  Mhvs  22,  48.  —  4.  prosperity, 
splendour  J  iv.455 ;  Mhvs  38,  92  ;  s.  bhavaloko  Ps  1.122. 
Cp.  samapatti  &  sampada. 

Sampatthana   (f.)   [sag-(-patthana]   entreating,  imploring 

Dh.'i  1059. 

Sampada  (f.)  [fr.  sat) -1- pad,  cp.  BSk.  sampada  Divy  401 
(devamanu§ya°),  also  sampatti]  i.  attainment,  success, 
accomplishment ;  happiness,  good  fortune ;  blessing, 
bliss  A  1.38;  Pv  n.9*'  (  =  sampatti  PvA  132). —  Sam- 
pada in  its  pregnant  meaning  is  applied  to  the  accom- 
plishments of  the  individual  in  the  course  of  his  religious 
development.  Thus  it  is  used  with  sila,  citta,  &  paiiiia 
at  D  1. 1 71  sq.  and  many  other  passages  in  an  almost 
encyclopedic  sense.  Here  with  sila"  the  whole  of  the 
silakkhandha  (D  1.63  sq.)  is  understood;  citta°  means 
the  cultivation  of  the  heart  &  attainments  of  the  rnind 
relating  to  composure,  concentration  and  religious 
meditation,  otherwise  called  samadhikkhandha.  It 
includes  those  stages  of  meditation  which  are  enum'' 
under  samadhi.  With  paniia°  are  meant  the  attain- 
ments of  higher  wisdom  and  spiritual  emancipation, 
connected  with  supernormal  faculties,  culminating  in 
Arahantship  and  extinction  of  all  causes  of  rebirth, 
otherwise  called  vijja  (see  the  8  items  of  this  under 
vijja  b.).  The  same  ground  as  by  this  3  fold  division 
is  covered  by  the  enumeration  of  5  sampadas  as  sila  , 
samadhi°,  paiiiia",  vimutti",  vimutti-fianadassana"  M 
1. 145;   Pug  54;   cp.  S1.139;   A  m.i2. 

The  term  sampada  is  not  restricted  to  a  definite  set  of 
accomplishments.  It  is  applied  to  various  such  sets  be- 
sides the  one  mentioned  above.  Thus  we  find  a  set  of  3 
sampadas  called  sila°,  citta"  &  ditthi"  at  A  1.269,  where 
under  sila  the  Nos.  1-7  of  the  10  sUas  are  understood  (see 
sila  2  a),  under  citta  Nos.  8  &  9,  under  ditthi  No.  10. — 
sila  &  ditthi"  also  at  D  111.213.  — A  set  of  8  sampadas  is 
given  at  A  iv.322  with  utthana",  arakkha",  kalyaijamit- 
tata,  sammajivita,  saddha",  sila",  caga",  paiiiia" ;  of  which 
the  first  4  are  expH  in  detail  at  A  iv.281  =  322  as  bringing 
worldly  happiness,  viz.  alertness,  wariness,  association 
with  good  friends,  right  livelihood  ;  and  the  last  4  as  lead- 
ing to  future  bliss  (viz.  faith  in  the  Buddha,  keeping  the  5 
Silas,  liberality,  higher  wisdom)  at  A  iv. 284=  324. 
Another  set  of  5  frequently  mentioned  is  :  fiati",  bhoga", 
arogya",  sila",  ditthi'  (or  the  blessings,  i.  e.  good  fortune, 
of  having  relatives,  possessions,  health,  good  conduct, 
right  views)  representing  the  "  summa  bona  "  of  popular 
choice,  to  which  is  opposed  deficiency  (vyasana,  reverse) 
of  the  same  items.  Thus  e.  g.  at  A  in.  147  ;  D  in. 235. — 
Three  sampadas:  kammanta",  ajiva",  ditthi,"  i.  e.  the 
7  Silas,  right  living  (samma-ajiva),  right  views  A  1.271. 
—  Another  three  as  saddha",  sila",  pafiiia"  at  A  1.287.  — 
Bdhgh  at  Dh.\  111.93,  94  speaks  of  four  sampadas,  viz. 
vatthu",  paccaya",  cetana",  gunStircka"  ;  of  the  blessings 
of  a  foundation  (for  merit),  of  means  (for  salvation),  of 
good  intentions,  of  virtue  (&  merit).  —  A  (later)  set  of 
seven  sampadas  is  given  at  J  iv.96  with  agama",  adhi- 
gama".  pubbahetu",  attattha-paripuccha",  titthavasa", 
yoniso  -  manasikara",  buddh'upanissaya". — Cp.  the 
following:  atta"  S  v. 30  sq. ;  akappa"  A  1.38;  ajiva' 
A  1.271  ;  D.\  1.235;  kamma"  A  iv.238  s<j.  ;  dassana" 
Sn  231  ;  nibbana"  Vism  58;  bhoga"  (-)- parivara")  DhA 
1.78 ;   yaga"   ThA    40   (Ap.    v.7) ;    vijjacarana"   D    1.99. 


Sampadati 


150 


Sampavannita 


2.  execution,  performance;  result,  consequence;  thus 
yanna°  successful  performance  of  a  sacrifice  D  1.128; 
Sn  505,  509  ;  pitaka-sampadaya  "  on  the  authority  of 
the  Pitaka  tradition,"  according  to  the  P.  ;  in  exegesis 
of  iti-kira  (hearsay)  A  1.189=  11. 191  =  Nd2  151  ;  and  of 
itihitiha  M  1.520  =  11.169. 

Sampadati  [sag+padati]  to  hand  on,  give  over  J  iv.204 
(aor.  "padasi). 

Sampadana  (nt.)  [sag  +  padana]  the  dative  relation  J  v. 2 14 
(upayogatthe),  237  (karanatthe) ;  SnA  499  ("vacana). 

Sampadaleti  [sag+padaleti]  to  tear,  to  cut  M  1.450; 
A  ii.33  =  S  III. 85  ;  S  III. 155;  Mhvs  23,  lo.  —  Act.  intrs. 
sampadalati  to  burst  J  vi.559  (  =  phalati,  C). 

Sampaditta  [sag  +  paditta]  kindled  Sdhp  33. 

Sampadattha  [sag+paduttha]  corrupted,  wicked  J  vi.317 
(a^)  ;  Sdhp  70. 

Sampadussati  [sag+padussati]  to  be  corrupted,  to  tres- 
pass Vin  iv,26o  ;  J  11. 193  ;  pp.  sampadattha. 

Sampadosa  [sag  +  padosa']  wickedness  Dhs  1060;  a-sam- 
padosa  innocence  ]  vi.3i7=  vi.321. 

Sampaddavati  [sag+pa+dru]  to  run  away;  aor.  sam- 
paddavi  J  vi.53.  —  pp.  sampadduta. 

Sampadduta  [pp.  of  sampaddavati]  run  away  J  vi.53. 

Sampadbupeti  (°dhupayati,  °dhupati)  [sag+ padhupati]  to 
send  forth  (thick)  smoke,  to  fill  with  smoke  or  incense, 
to  pervade,  permeate  S  i.i6g  ;  Vin  1.225  ;  Sn  p,  15  ;  Miln 
333.     Cp.  sandhupayati. 

Sampanna  [pp.  of  sampajjati]  i.  successful,  complete, 
perfect  Vin  11.256;  sampannaveyyakarana  a  full  ex- 
planation Sn  352.  —  2.  endowed  with,  possessed  of, 
abounding  in  Vin  1.17;  Sn  152.  727  (ceto-vimutti°) ; 
J  1.42 1  ;  vijjacaranasampanna  full  of  wisdom  and  good- 
ness D  1.49  ;  Sn  164;  often  used  as  first  part  of  a  com- 
pound, e.g.  sampannavijjacarana  Dh  I44  ;  DhA  111.86  ; 
sampannaslla  virtuous  It  118;  Dh  57;  sampannodaka 
abounding  in  water  J  iv.125.  —  3.  sweet,  well  cooked 
\'in  II. 196  ;  Miln  395. 

Sampaphnlla  (adj.)  [sag-t-pa+phulla]  blooming,  blossom- 
ing Sdhp  245. 

Sampabhasa  [sag-i-  pa-i-  bha;]  frivolous  talk  S  v.355. 

Sampabbasati  [sag+  pa-(-  bhas]  to  shine  Miln  338. 

Sampamathita  [sag -1- pamathita]  altogether  crushed  or 
overwhelmed  J  vi.189. 

Sampamaddati  [sag+  pamaddati]  to  crush  out  Miln  403. 

Sampamujba  (adj.)  [sag-l-pamvijha]  confounded  Sn  762. 

Sampamodati  [sag+pamodati]  to  rejoice  Vv  36".  —  pp. 
sampamodita. 

Sampamodita  [sag -1- pamodita]  delighted,  rejoicing  Sdhp 
301. 

Sampayata  [sag+payata]  gone  forth,  proceeded  Dh  237. 

Sampayati  [sag-l-payati]  to  proceed,  to  go  on;  inf.  sam- 
payatave  Sn  834;  pp.  sampayata. 

Sampayutta  [sag-(-payutta]  associated  with,  connected 
Dhs  I  ;  Kvu  337;  DhsA  42.  -°paccaya  the  relation  of 
association  (opp.  vippajoitta" )  Vism  539;  VbhA  206; 
Tikp  6,  20,  53,  65,  152  sq. ;  Dukp  i  sq. 

Sampayoga  [sag-l-payoga]  union,  association  Vin  i.io; 
S  v. 42 1  ;  DA  1.96,  260. 


Sampayojeti  [sag-fpayojeti]  i.  to  associate  (with)  Vin 
ii.;t)2  ;  M  11.5.  —  2.  to  quarrel  Vin  11.5;  S  1.239.  —  pp. 
sampayutta. 

Sampaiaya  [fr.  sag-l-  para-l-  i]  future  state,  the  next  world 
Vin  II. 162;  A  111.154;  IV.284  sq.  ;  D  11.240;  S  1. 108; 
Sn  141,  864,  J  1.219;  III. 195;  Miln  357;  DhA  11.50. 

Sampaiayika  (adj.)  [fr.  last]  belonging  to  the  next  world 

Vin    1. 179;    III. 21  ;   D    11.240;    111.130;    A    111.49,    364; 
IV. 285;  M  187;  It  17,  39;  J  11.74. 

Samparikaddhati  [sag-i- parikaddhati]  to  pull  about,  drag 
along  M  1.228. 

Samparikantati  [sag-Fparikantati]  to  cut  all  round  M 
111.275.     (Trenckner  reads  sampakantati.) 

Samparikinna  [sag-f-parikinna]  surrounded  by  Vin  111.86; 

Miln   155. 

Samparitapeti  [sag -t- paritapeti]  to  make  warm,  heat, 
scourge  M  1.128,  244  =  8  iv.57. 

Sampaiibbinna  (adj.)  [sag -1- paribhinna]  broken  up  J 
VI.113  (°gatta). 

Samparivaiieti  [sag-l-parivajjeti]  to  avoid,  shun  Sdhp  52, 

208. 

Samparivatta  (adj.)  [sag -l- pari vatta]  rolling  about  Dh  325. 

S  imparivattaka  (adj.)  [sag-t-parivattaka]  rolling  about 
grovelling  J  11. 142  (turning  somersaults) ;  DhA  II. 5,  12; 
Miln  253,  357  ;  samparivattakag  (adv.)  in  a  rolling  about 
manner  M  11. 138;  samparivattakag-samparivattakag 
continually  turning  (it)  Vin  1.50, 

Samparivattati  [sag-t-parivattati]  to  turn,  to  roll  about; 
ppr.  samparivattamana  J  1. 140;  pp.  samparivatta. — 
Cans,  samparivatteti  [cp.  BSk.  "parivarjayati  to  wring 
one's  hands  Divy  263]  to  turn  over  in  one's  mind,  to 
ponder  over  S  v. 89. 

Samparivareti  [sag -l- parivareti]  to  surround,  wait  upon, 
attend  on  J  1.61  ;  aor.  3"*  pi.  samparivaresug  J  1.164; 
ger.  samparivarayitva  J  i.5i  ;  °etva  (do.)  J  vi.43,  108. 
Cp.  sampavareti. 

Samparivasita  see  parivasita. 

Sampareta  (adj.)  [sag -f  pareta]  surrounded,  beset  with 
J  n.317:  111.360  =  3  1.143. 

Sampalibodba    [sag -1- palibodha]    hindrance,    obstruction 

Nett  79. 

Sampalibhagga  [pp-  of  next]  broken  up  S  1.123. 

Sampalibhanjati  [sag-l-pari-f  bbanj]  to  break,  to  crack 
M  1.234  i  S  1.123  ;  pp.  sampalibhsigga. 

Sampalimattha  [sag-t-palimattha]  touched,  handled, 
blotted  out,  destroyed  S  iv.168  sq.  =  J  111.532  =  Vism  36. 


[sag  +  palivethita]     wrapped     up. 


Sampalivethita    (adj.) 
enveloped  M  1.281. 

Sampalivetbeti  [sag  +  palivetheti]  to  wrap  up,  envelop ; 
°eyya  .\1v.131   (kayag). 

Sampavanka  (adj.)  [perhaps  sag-l- pari -i-anka^,  con- 
tracted to  *pa>'yanka>  *pavanka]  intimate,  friend 
D  11.78;  S  1.83,  87;  Pug  36, 

Sampavankata  (f)  [fr.  last]  connection,  friendliness, 
intimacy  S  1.87  ;  A  111.422  (papa°  &  kalyana") ;  iv.283 
sq.  ;  V.24,  199  ;  Dhs  1326  ;  Pug  20,  24  ;  DhsA  394.  Cp. 
anu°  Vin  11.88. 

Sampavannita  (adj.)  [sag-t-pa-f  vaijijita]  described,  praised 
J  VI. 398. 


Sampavattar 


151 


Samputa 


Sampavattar  [sag  +  pavattar]  an  instigator  A  ill.  133. 

Sampavatteti  [sag  +  pavatteti]  to  produce,  set  going 
A  III. 222  (sarjvasar))  ;  Mhvs  23,  75. 

Sampavati  [sar)+ pavati]  to  blow,  to  be  fragrant  M  1.2  12  ; 
J  VI  534;  VVA343  (=Vv84"). 

Sampavayati  [sag  +  pavayati]  to  make  fragrant,  Vv  81', 
84^^ ;  VvA  344. 

Sampavayana  (nt.)  [fr.  last]  making  fragrant  VvA  344. 

Sampavareti  [sai)+ pavareti ;  cp.  BSk.  sagpravarayati 
Divy  285,  310,  etc.  ;  Av^  1.90  ;  MVastu  111.142]  to  cause 
to  accept,  to  offer,  to  regale,  serve  with  ;  ger.  sampa- 
varetva  Vin  1.18;  11. 128;  D  1.109;  aor.  sarapavaresi 
D  n.97. 

Sampavedhati  [sag+pavedhati]  to  be  shaken  violently, 
to  be  highly  afiected  Vin  1.12;  D  11.12,  108;  M  1.227; 
Th2,23i  ;  J  1.25  ;  S  IV.71.  —  Caus.  sampavedhati  to  shake 
violently  D  11. 108;  M  1.253;  Nd'  316,  371  (pp.  °pave- 
dhita). 

Sampavedhin  to  be  shaken  Sn  28  ;  Miln  386. 

Sampasada  [sag+pasada]  serenity,  pleasure  D  11. 2 11,  222; 
A  II. 199  ;  M  11.262. 

Sampasadana  [sag+ pasadana]  (nt.)  tranquillizing  D  1.37; 
Dhs  161  ;  Miln  34 ;  Vism  156  ;  DhsA  170  (in  the  descrip- 
tion of  the  second  Jhana) ;  happiness,  joy  Bu  1.35, 

Sampasadaiiiya(adj.)  [sag+pasadaniya]  leading  to  serenity, 
inspiring  faith  D  111.99  sq.  (the  S.  Suttanta),   116. 

Sampasareti  [sag+pasareti]  to  stretch  out,  to  distract 
Vism  365.  —  Pass,  sampasariyati  A  IV17;  Miln  297; 
DhsA  376. 

Sampasadati  [sag  +  pasidati]  to  be  tranquillized,  reassured 
D  1. 106;  M  i.ioi  ;  DA  1.275. 

Sampasidana  (nt.)  [fr.  last]  becoming  tranquillized  Nett  28. 

Sampassati  [sag  +  passati]  to  see,  behold;  to  look  to.  to 
consider;  ppr  sampassanto  Vin  1.42;  D  11.285;  sam- 
passag  Dh  290. 

SainpahaQSaka  (adj.)  [fr.  next]  gladdening  M  1.146; 
A  11.97  ;  iv.2g6,  328 ;  v.  155  ;  It  107 ;  Miln  373. 

Sampahagsati  [sag+pahagsati^J  to  be  glad;  pp.  sam- 
pahattha.  —  Caus.  sampahagseti  to  gladden,  delight 
\in  i.iS  ;  D  1. 126. 

SampahaQSana  (nt.)  [fr.  sampahagsati]  being  glad,  plea- 
sure ;  approval  Ps  1.167;  Vism  148  (°a) ;  KhA  100 
("  evag  ") ;  SnA  176  ("  sadhu  ") ;  Sdhp  568. 

Sampaha^ha^  (adj.)  [sag-l-pahattha']  beaten,  struck  (of 
metal),  refined,  wrought  S  1.65  (sakusala° ;  Bdhgh : 
ukkamukhe  pacitva  s.  ;  A'.-S.  1.32 1) ;  Sn  686  (sukusala° ; 
SnA  486  :  "  kusalena  suvaijijakarena  sanghattitag 
sanghattentena  tapitag  "). 

Sampahattha'  [sag+pahattha*]  gladdened,  joyful  Sdhp 
301. 

Sampahara  [sag -t- pahara]  clashing,  beating  together,  im- 
pact, striking;  battle,  strife  D  11. 166;  Pug  66  sq. ;  DA 
1. 150;  Miln  161  (umi-vega"),  179  (of  two  rocks),  224. 

Sampaka  [sag-t-paka]  i.  what  is  cooked,  a  cooked  pre- 
paration, concoction  Vin  11.259  (magsa°  etc.)  ;  Vv  43' 
(kola°) ;  VvA  186.  —  2    ripeness,  development  J  vi.236. 

Sampata  [sag  +  pata]  falling  together,  concurrence,  colli- 
sion It  68  ;  kukkutasampata  neighbouring,  closely  ad- 
joining (yasma  gama  nikkhamitva  kukkuto  padasa  va 


aniiag  gamag  gacchati,  ayag  kukkutasampato  ti  vuc- 
cati)  Vin  iv.63,  358 ;  kukkutasampataka  lying  close 
together  (lit.  like  a  flock  of  poultry)  A  1.159.  Cp.  the 
similar  sannipata. 

Sampadaka  [fr.  sampadeti]  one  who  obtains  Miln  349. 

Sampadana  (nt.)  [fr.  sampadeti]  effecting,  accomplishment 
Nett  44;  preparing,  obtaining  J  1.80. 

Sampadeti  [Caus.  of  sampajjati]  i.  to  procure,  obtain 
Vin  1. 217;  11.214;  ekavacanag  s.  to  be  able  to  utter  a 
single  word  J  u.164  ;  kathag  s.  tobe  able  to  talk  J  n.165  ; 
dohale  s,  to  satisfy  the  longing  Mhvs  22,  51. — 2.  to 
strive,  to  try  to  accomplish  one's  aim  D  11.120  ;  S  11. 2g 

Sampapaka  (adj.)  [fr.  sampapeti]  causing  to  obtain,  leading 
to.  bringing  J  111.348  ;  vi.235. 

Sampapana  (nt.)  [fr.  sampapunati]  reaching,  getting  to 
Miln  355,  536  (tira°). 

Sampapunati  [sag-t-  papuijati]  to  reach,  attain  ;  to  come  to, 
meet  with  ;  aor.  sampapuni  J  1.67  ;  11.20  ;  pp.  sampatta. 
—  Caus.  sampapeti  to  bring,  to  make  attain  Vism  303. 

Sampayati  [der"  not  clear;  Kern,  Toev.  i.62  =  sampada- 
yati  ;  but  more  likely  =  sampayati,  i.  e.  sam+  pa -I-  a-h  ya] 
to  be  able  to  explain  (DA  1.117:  sampadetva  kathe- 
tug  sakkunoti),  to  agree,  to  come  to  terms,  succeed 
D  1.26  ;  11.284  i  M  1.85,  96,  472  ;  II. 157  ;  A  v. 50  ;  S  IV.15, 
67;  V.109;  Vin  11.249  (cp.  p.  364);  aor.  sampayasi  M 
1.239.     Cp.  sampayati. 

Samparnta  [sag-t- paruta]  (quite)  covered  M  1.28 1. 

Sampaleti  [sag-l-paleti]  to  protect  J  iv.127. 

Sampi^dai^a  (nt.)  [fr.  sag-(-pind°]  combining,  connection, 
addition  Vism  159  (of  "  ca  ") ;  KhA  228  (id.) ;  DhsA  171. 

Sampin^ta  [pp-  of  sampindeti]  brought  together,  restored 
J  1.230  ;  compact,  firm  J  v. 89. 

Sampindeti  [sag -1- pindeti]  to  knead  or  ball  together,  com- 
bine, unite  Vism  159  ;  KhA  125,  221,  230  ;  DhsA  177  ;  pp. 
sampindita. 

Sampiya  (adj.)  [sag-l-  piya]  friendly  ;  sampiyena  by  mutual 
consent,  in  mutual  love  Sn  123,  290. 

Sampiyayati  [sag-fpiyayati]  to  receive  with  joy,  to  treat 
kindly,  address  with  love  J  in. 482  ;  ppr.  sampiyayanto 
J  1. 135;  sampiyayamana  (do.)  fondling,  being  fond  of 
D  11.223  ;  J  1. 191,  297,  361  ;  11.85  ;  DhA  11.65.  aor.  3r<i 
pi.  sampiyayigsu  J  vi.127. 

Sampiyayana  (f.)  [sag -t- piyayana]  intimate  relation,  great 
fondness  J  111.492. 

SampiQeti  [sag-i-plneti]  to  satisfy,  gladden,  please;  aor. 
2"''  sg.  sampesi  J  111.253  ;  ger.  sampinayitva  Davs  rv.n. 

Sampila  (nt.)  [sag+pila,  cp.  pija]  trouble,  pain;  asam- 
pijag  free  from  trouble  Miln  351. 

Sampilita  [pp.  of  sampijeti]  troubled  ;  as  nt.,  worry,  trouble 
Miln  368. 

Sampi|eti  [sag-l-plleti]  to  press,  to  pinch,  to  worry  Vin 
III.  1 26;  pp.  sampilita. 

Sampucchati  [sag-(-pucchati]  to  ask  D  1.116;  ger.  sam- 
puccha  having  made  an  appointment  with  S  1.176. 

Samputa  [cp.  sag-t-puta  (lexicogr.  Sk.  samputa  "round 
box  ")  &  BSk.  samputa  in  meaning  "  afljali  "  at  Divy 
380,  in  phrase  krta-kara-sampufah]  the  hollow  of  the 
hand  (in  posture  of  veneration),  in  papi°  Mhvs  37,  192 
i.  e.  Culavagsa  (ed.  Geiger)  p.  15. 


Samputita 


152 


Sambodha 


Sampu(ita  [sag  +  putita  =  phutita,  cp.  BSk.  samputaka 
MVastu  11.127]  shrunk,  shrivelled  M  1.80. 

Sampunna  (sampurna)  filled,  full  Sn  279;  Bu  11.119  = 
J  I.JO  ;  Mhvs  22,  60. 

Sampupphita  [sag  +  pupphita]  in  full  bloom  Pv  iv.12 
(=niccag  pupphita  PvA  275). 

Sampurekkharoti  [sai)+ purakkharoti]  to  honour  M  11.169. 

Sampujeti  [sag+pujeti]  to  venerate  Mhvs  30,   100. 

Sampureti  [sar)+  pureti]  Pass,  puriyati"  to  be  filled,  ended  ; 
aor.  sampuri  (maso,  "  it  was  a  full  month  since  .  .  .  ") 
J  1V.458. 

Sampha  (adj.-n.)  [not  clear,  if  &  how  connected  with  Sk. 
saspa,    grass.     The    BSk.    has    sambhinna-pralapa    for 
sampha-ppalapa]    frivolous  ;    nt.    frivolity,  foolishness  ; 
only  in  connection  with  expressions  of  talking,  as  samphag 
bhasati  to  speak  frivolously  A  11. 23  ;  Sn  158  ;  samphag 
girag  bh.  J  vi.295  ;   samphag  palapati  Tikp   167  sq.  — 
Also  in  cpds.  °palapa  frivolous  talk  D  1.4;    111.69,  82 
175.  269;  A  1.269  sq.,  298;  11.60,  84,  209;  III. 254,  433 
IV.  248;  v. 251  sq.,  261  sq. ;  Tikp  168,  281;  DA  1.76 
°palapin  talking  frivolously  D  1.138;   111.82  ;  A  1.298 
Pug  39,  58. 

Samphala  (adj.)  [sag+phala]  abounding  in  fruits  S  1.70; 
90=  It  45. 

Samphassa  [sag  +  phassa]  contact,  reaction  Vin  1.3; 
A  11.117  ;  D  11.62  ;  M  1.85  ;  J  1.502  ;  kaya-s.  the  touch  of 
the  skin  D  11.75  ;  cakkhu-,  sota-,  ghana-,  jivha-,  kaya-. 
and  mano-s.  D  11. 58,  308  ;  S  iv.68  sq.  ;  VbhA  19. 

Samphuttha  [pp.  of  samphassati]  touched  S  iv  97  ■  Av  10^  ■ 
It  68. 

SamphuUa  (adj.)  [sag+phulla]  fuU-blown  J  vi.188. 

Samphusati  [sag  +  phusati]  to  touch,  to  come  in  contact 
with  ;  ppr.  samphussag  It  OS  ;  ppr.  med.  samphusamana 
Sn  671  ;  Nd-  199  (reads  samphassamana,  where  id.  p. 
at  M  1.85  has  rissamana) ;  aor.  samphusi  D  ti.128  ;  inf. 
samphusitug  Sn  835  ;  D  11.355  ;  PP-  samphuttha. 

Samphusana  (f.)  [sag  +  phusana]  touch,  contact  Th  2,  ^67  • 
Dhs  2,  71.  •  3   I  . 

Samphusitatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  samphusita]  the  state  of 
having  been  brought  into  touch  with  Dhs  2,  71. 

Sambaddha  [sag+baddha]  bound  together  Sdhp  81. 

Sambandha  [sag  +  bandha]  connection,  tie  D  11.296=  M  1.58  ; 
SnA  IDS,  166,  249,  273.  343,  516.  o-kula  related  family 
J  111.362  ;  a-sambandha  (adj.)  incompatible  (C  on 
asaiinuta  J  in. 266). 

Sambandhati  [sag+ bandhati]  to  bind  together,  to  unite 
Vm  II. 1 16;  pass,  sambajjhati  is  united,  attached  to 
J  111.7;  ger.  sambandhitva  Vin  1.274;  n.ii6.  —  pp 
sambaddha.  '  ■       fv- 

Sambandhana  (nt.)  [sag  +  bandhana]  binding  together 
connection  J   1.328. 

Sambarimaya  (f)  [sambari+ maya]  the  art  of  Sambari 
jugglery  S  1.239  (trsl"  "  Sambara's  magic  art").  Sam- 
bara  is  a  king  of  the  Asuras. 

Sambala  (nt.)  [cp.  *Sk.  sambala]  provision  S  11 98  •  T 
V.71,  240;  VI.531. 

Sambahula  (adj.)  [sag+bahula]  manv  Vin  1.32-  D  i ->.• 
J  1. 126,  329  ;  Sn  19  ;  sambahulag  fciroti  to  take  a  plur- 
ality vote  J  11.45. 


Sambahulata  (f.)  [fr.  sambahula]  a  plurality  vote  J  11.45. 

Sambahulika  (adj.)  in  °g  karoti  =  sambahulag  karoti 
J  II.I97- 

Sambadha  [cp.  Sk.  sambadha]  I.  crowding,  pressure,  in- 
convenience from  crowding,  obstruction  Vism  119. 
janasambadharahita  free  from  crowding  Miln  409 ; 
kitthasambadha  crowding  of  corn,  the  time  when  the 
corn  is  growing  thick  M  1. 115;  J  1.143,  388.  —  yassa 
sambadho  bhavissati  he  who  finds  it  too  crowded  Vin 
IV.43  ;  asambadha  unobstructed  Sn  150  ;  atisambadhata 
(q.  v.)  the  state  of  being  too  narrow  J  1.7  ;  puttadara- 
sambadhasayana  a  bed  encumbered  with  child  and 
wife  Miln  243 ;  cp.  S  1.78 ;  (in  fig.  sense)  difficulty, 
trouble  S  1.7,  48;  J  iv.488  ;  sambadhapatipanna  of  the 
eclipsed  moon  S  1.50.  As  adjective  "  crowded,  dense  " 
sambadho  gharavaso  life  in  the  family  is  confined,  i.  e. 
a  narrow  life,  full  of  hindrances  D  1.63,  250  ;  S  11.2 19  ; 
V.350  ;  DA  1. 180;  s.  magga  a  crowded  path  J  1.104; 
nijana"  vana  Vism  342  ;  s.  vyuha  S  ¥.-369.  —  atisambadha 
too  confined  DhA  1.310  (cakkavala).  —  compar.  samba- 
dhatara  S  v.350  ;  asambadhag  comfortably  J  1.80.  — - 
2.  pudendum  masculinum  Vin  1.216;  11. 134  ;  pudendum 
muliebre  Vin  iv.259 ;  Sn  609  ;  sambadhatthana  (nt.) 
pudendum  muliebre  J  1.61  ;  iv.260. 

Sambadheti  [sag4-badheti]  to  be  crowded  D  11.269  (read 
°badhayanti). 

Sambahati  [sag+bahati;  Kern,  Toev.  s.  v.  disputes  rela- 
tion to  vah,  but  connects  it  with  bah  "  press  "]  i .  to  rub, 
shampoo  J  1.293;  11. 16;  iv.431  ;  v. 126;  also  sambaheti 
Miln  241  ;  Cans,  sambahapeti  to  cause  to  shampoo  Vin 
iv.342  ;  ppr.  sambahanta  J  vi.77  ;  aor.  sambahi  J  1.293. 
Cp.  pari". 

Sambahana  (nt.)  [fr.  last]  rubbing,  shampooing  D  1.7  (as 
a  kind  of  exercise  for  Avrestlers  DA  iJ38)  ;  A  1.62  ;  iv.54  ; 
Miln  241  ;  J  1.286. 

Sambuka  [cp.  Sk.  sambuka]  a  shell  D  1.84=  A  1.9;  111.395 
(sippi°) ;  J  ii.ioo. 

Sambujjhati  [sag+bujjhati]  to  understand,  achieve, 
know  DhsA2i8;  inf.  sambuddhug  Sn  765  (v.  1.  sam- 
buddhag)  ;  Caus.  sambodheti  to  teach,  instruct  J  1.142. 
Cp.  samma". 

Sambuddha  [sag-(- buddha]  i.  well  understood  Sn  765 
(various  reading,  sambuddhug  =  to  know) ;  J  v.77  (sam° 
&  a°,  taken  by  C.  as  ppr.  "  jananto  "  &  "  ajananto  ") ; 
susambuddha  easily  understood  Sn  764.  —  2.  one  who 
has  thoroughly  understood,  being  enlightened,  a  Buddha 
Sn  178  etc.,  559;  A  11. 4  ;  Dh  181  ;  S  1.4  ;  It  35  etc. 

Sambuddbi  (f.)  [sag+buddhij  complete  understanding; 
adj.  °vant  wise  J  in. 361   (=buddhisampanna). 

Sambojjhanga  [sag-l-bojjhanga]  constituent  of  Sambodhi 
(enlightenment),  of  which  there  are  seven  :  sati,  self- 
possession  ;  dhammavicaya,  investigation  of  doctrine ; 
viriya,  energy ;  piti,  joy ;  passaddhi,  tranquillity ; 
samadhi,  concentration  ;  upekha,  equanimity  D  11.79, 
303  sq.  ;  111.106,  226  ;  M  1.61  sq. ;  A  iv.23  ;  S  v. 1 10  sq. ; 
Nd^  s.  V.  Miln  340  ;  ^■bhA  135,  310.  The  characteristics 
of  the  several  constitutents  together  with  var.  means  of 
cultivation  are  given  at  Vism  132  sq.  =  VbhA  275  sq. 

Sambodha  [sag-t-bodha]  enlightenment,  highest  wisdom, 
awakening ;  the  insight  belonging  to  the  three  higher 
stages  of  the  Path,  Vin  1.10;  D  111.130  sq.,  136  sq. ; 
S  n-'.3;  v. 214;  M  1.16.  241;  A  1.258;  11.200,  240  sq., 
32J  sq.;  V.238  sq.  ;  It  27;  pubbe  sambodha,  before 
attaining  insight   M   1.17,    163;   11.211;    ni.157;   S   11.5, 

10  ;  IV. 6.  8,  97,  233  ;  v. 281  ;  A  1.258  ;  111.82,  240.     abhabba 
sambodhaja,    incapable    of   insight    M    1.200,    241  =A 

11  200.     (Cp.  Dial,  i.igo-192.) 


Sambodhana 


153 


Sambhoga 


-gamin  leading  to  enlightenment  D  111.264  ;  Sn  p.  140. 
-pakkhika  belonging  to  enlightenment  A  iv.357,  -sukha 
the  bliss  of  enlightenment  A  iv.341  sq. 

Sambodhana  (nt.)  [sag+bodhana]  the  vocative  case  VvA 

12,  18. 

Sambodhi  (f.)  [sarj+bodhi^]  the  same  as  sambodha,  the 
highest  enlightenment  D  1.156  ;  11. 155  ;  Dh  89  =  3  v. 29  ; 
Sn  478;  S  1.68,  t8i  ;  A  II. 14;  It  28,  42,  117;  SnA  73. 
See  also  sainina°. 

-agga  [°yagga]  the  summit  of  enlightenment  Sn  693  ; 
-gamin  leading  to  enlightenment  S  v. 2  34  ;  -patta  having 
attained  enlightenment,  an  Arahant  Sn  503,  696 ; 
-parayana  that  which  has  enlightenment  as  its  aim, 
proceeding  towards  enlightenment,  frequently  of  the 
Sotdpanna  D  1.156  (discussed  in  Dialogues  1.190  sq.); 
III. 131  sq.  ;  A  1.232;  11.80,  238;  III. 211;  IV. 12,  405; 
S  V.343,  346  ;  DA  1.3 1 3.  -sukha  the  bliss  of  enlighten- 
ment Kvu  209. 

Sambodbiyanga  the  same  as  sambojjhanga  A  v. 253  sq.  ; 
S  v. 24;   cp.  spelling  sambodhi-anga  at  Dh  89;   DhA 

II. 162. 

Sambodheti  see  sambujjhati. 

Sambhagga  [sag+bhagga]  broken  S  1.123;  M  1.237.  Cp. 
sampali°. 

Sambhajati  [sag+bhajati]  to  consort  with,  love,  to  Xx 
attached,  devoted  J  in. 495  ;  ppr.  sambhajanto  J  111.108  ; 
Pot.  sambhajeyya  ibid.  (C.  samagaccheyya) . — pp. 
sambhatta. 

Sambhajana  (f.)  [sag-l-  bhajana]  consorting  with  Dhs  1326  ; 

Pug  20. 

Sambhanjati  fsag+bhanjati]  to  split,  break  J  v.32  ;  Cans, 
sambhanjeti  to  break  M  1.237  '■  S  1.123  ;  pass.  aor.  sama- 
bhajjisag  J  v. 70.  — -pp.  sambhagga.  — Cp.  sampali". 

Sambhata  [sag+bhata]  brought  together,  stored  up;  (nt.) 
store,  provisions  M  1.116;  D  111.190;  A  iii.38  =  iv.256 ; 
S1.35;  ii.i85  =  It  17;  J  1.338;  ThA  II. 

Sambhati  [irambh,  given  as  sambh  at  Dhtp  2 14  in  meaning 
"  vissasa  "]  to  subside,  to  be  calmed ;  only  in  prep, 
comb"  patippassambhati  (q.  v.). 

Sambhatta  [pp.  of  sambhajati]  devoted,  a  friend  J  1.106, 
221  ;  Ndi  226=Vism  25.  —  yathasambhattag  according 
to  where  each  one's  companions  live  D  11.98  ;  S  v.  152. 

Sambhatti  (f.)  [sag+bhatti]  joining,  consorting  with  Dhs 
1326 ;  Pug  20. 

Sambhama  [sag+  bhama,  fr.  bhiam]  confusion,  excitement ; 
°-patta  overwhelmed  with  excitement  J  iv.433. 

Sambhamati  [sag+bhamati]  to  revolve  DhsA  307. 

Sambhava  [sag+bhava]  I.  origin,  birth,  production  U 
II. 107 ;  S  111.86 ;  A  II.  10,  18  ;  Sn  724,  741  etc. ;  Dh  161  ; 
J  1. 1 68;  matapettikas°  born  from  father  and  niother 
D  1.34 ;  DhsA  306  ;  natthi  sambhavag  has  not  arisen 
Sn  235.  —  2.  semen  virile  J  v.152  ;  vi.160  ;  Miln  124. 
-esin  seeking  birth  M  1.48  ;  S  ii.ii  ;  Sn  147. 

Sambhavati,  sambhajnati  &  sambhoti  [sag  +  bhavati]  i .  to 

be  produced,  to  arise  D  1.45,  70  ;  S  1.135  ;  IV. 67  ;  Sn  734  ; 
Davs  v.6 ;  Milri  210.  —  2.  to  be  adequate,  competent 
D  11.287  ;  na  s.  is  of  no  use  or  avail  Miln  152.  —  3.  to  be 
present,  to  witness  J  1.56.  —  4.  to  be  together  with  J 
11.205  (C.  on  sambhaj-°).  —  Pres.  "-bhunati  or  °-bhunati 
(like  abhi-sam-bhuiiati)  in  the  sense  of  "  to  reach  "  or 
"  to  be  able  to,"  capable  of  Vin  1.256  (°-bhunati) ;  Sn  396 
(part.  a-sambhu?janto  =  asakkonto,  C);  also  sambhoti 
Sn  734  ;  D  11.287  ;  fut.  sambhossama  Mhvs  5,  99.  —  aor. 


sambhavi  D  1.96 ;  3"'  pi.  samabhavug  Davs  v.6 ;  ger. 
sambhuyya  having  come  together  with  VvA  232.  —  pp. 
sambhiita. — -Cans,  sambhaveti  (q.  v.). 

Sambhavana  (nt.)  [fr.  sambhavati]  coming  into  existence 

Nett  28. 

Sambhara  [fr.  sai)+  bhf]  "  what  is  carried  together,"  viz.  i . 
accumulation,  product,  preparation ;  sambharaseda 
bringing  on  sweating  by  artificial  means  Vin  1.205.  — 2. 
materials,  requisite  ingredients  (of  food)  Miln  258 ; 
J  1.481  ;  V.13,  506;  J  1.9;  II. 18;  IV. 492  ;  dabba"  an 
effective  requisite  DhA  1.32 1  ;  11. 1 14  ;  bodhis"  the  neces- 
sary conditions  for  obtaining  enlightening  J  i.i  ;  vimok- 
khas°  ThA  214.  —  3.  constituent  part,  element  S  iv.197  ; 
DhsA  306. — 4.  bringing  together,  collocation  S  1.135; 
Miln  28. 

Sambhavana  (nt.)  [fr.  sambhaveti]  supposition,  assump- 
tion, the  meaning  of  the  particle  sace  Vin  1.372^' ;  cp. 
J  11.29 ;  DhA  11.77. 

Sambhavana  (f.)  [fr.  sambhaveti]  honour,  reverence, 
intention,  confidence  Mhvs  29,  55  ;  DhsA  163  (  =  okap- 
pana) ;  Sdhp  224. 

Sambhavita  [pp.  of  sambhaveti]  honoured,  esteemed 
M  I.I  10,  145  ;  ThA  200  ;  J  in. 269  (  =  bhaddaka) ;  VbhA 
109. 

Sambhaveti  [Caus.  of  sambhavati.  The  Dhtp  (512)  gives 
a  special  root  sambhu  in  meaning  "  papunana  "]  i.  to 
undertake,  achieve,  to  be  intent  on  (ace.)  Vin  1.253; 
DhsA  163.  — 2.  to  reach,  catch  up  to  (ace.)  Vin  1.277 ; 
11.300.  —  3.  to  produce,  effect  Miln  49.  — 4.  to  con- 
sider J  III. 220.  —  5.  to  honour,  esteem  ;  grd.  °bhavaniya 
to  be  honoured  or  respected,  honourable  VvA  152  ; 
MA  156. —pp.  sambhavita. 

Sambhasa  (f.)  [sag -1- bhasa]  conversation,  talk;  sukha-° 
J  VI. 296  (v.  1.) ;  mudu-°  J  11.326=  iv. 47!  =  v.45i. 

Sambhindati  [sag  +  bhindati]  to  mix  Vin  i.iii  (simaya 
simau)  s.  to  mix  a  new  boundary  with  an  old  one,  i.  e. 
to  run  on  a  boundary  unduly) ;  DA  1.134  (udakena).  — 
pp.  sambhinna.  —  Cp.  sambhejja. 

Sambhinna  [pp.  of  sambhindati]  i.  mixed,  mixed  up 
Vin  1.2 10  ;  11.67,  68  (cp.  Vin.  Texts  11.431) ;  J  1-55  :  Sn  9, 
319  ("mariyada-bhava  confusing  the  dividing  lines, 
indistinctness),  325  (id).  Said  of  a  woman  (i.  e.  of 
indistinct  sexuality)  Vin  11.271  =  111.129.-2.  broken 
up  (?),  exhausted  J  1.503  (°sarira). — asambhinna  :  i.  un- 
mixed, unadulterated  Vism  41  (°khira-payasa) ;  J  v. 257 
("khattiyavagsa) ;  DhA  11.85  (id.).  — 2.  (of  the  voice) 
unmixed,  i.  e.  distinct,  clear  Miln  360.  —  3.  name  of  a 
kind  of  ointment  Vin  iv.i  17. 

Sambhita  (adj.)  [sag 4- bhita]  terrified  Miln  339;  a-sam- 
bhita,  fearless  Miln  105  ;  J  iv.92  ;  v. 34  ;  vi.302. 

Sambhuajati  [sag+bhuiijati]  i.  to  eat  together  with 
Vin  IV.137.  — -2.  to  associate  with  S  1.162. 

SambhuQati  see  sambhavati. 

Sambhiita  [pp.  of  sambhavati]  arisen  from,  produced  Sn 
272  ('atta°  self-;  cp.  SnA  304:  attabhava-pariyaye 
attani  s.) ;  S  1.134. 

Sambhejja  [grd.  of  sambhindati]  belonging  to  the  con- 
fluence of  rivers  (said  of  the  water  of  the  ocean),  united 
S  II. 135;  v. 461  (various  reading  sambhojja). 

Sambheda  [sag-l-bheda]  mixing  up,  confusion,  contamina- 
tion D  111.72  ;  A  1.51  =  It  ^(>  ;  DA  1.260  (jati"  mixing  of 
caste)  ;  Vism  123  (of  colours). 

Sambhoga  [sag-l-bhoga]  eating,  living  together  with  Vin 
1.97;  11.21  ;  IV.137;  A  1.92;  SnA  71  ;  J  iv.127;  Sdhp  435. 

VIII— S 


Sambhoti 


154 


Samma 


Sambhoti  see  sambhavati. 

Samma^  [as  to  etym.  Andersen,  P.  Reader  11.263  quite 
plausibly  connects  it  with  Vedic  ^am  (indecl.)  "  hail," 
which  is  often  used  in  a  vocative  sense,  esp.  in  comb" 
sam  ca  yos  ca  "  hail  &  blessing  !",  but  also  suggests 
relation  to  samma.  Other  suggestions  see  Andersen, 
s.  v.]  a  term  of  familiar  address  D  1.49.  225  ;  DA  1.151  ; 
Vin  II. 161  ;  1  1.59  ;  PvA  204  ;  plur.  samma  Vin  11. 161. 

Samma^  [samyak]  see  samma. 

Samma'  a  cymbal  Miln  60  ;  Dhs  621  ;  ]  1.3  ;  DhsA  319-  — 
Otherwise  as  "tala  a  kind  of  cymbal  Th  1,  893.  911  ; 
Vv  353  ;  VvA  l6i';  J  VI.60  ;  277  (-1-). 

Sammakkhana  (nt.)  [sa:j  +  makkhana]  smearing  Vism  346. 

Sammakkhita  [sag  +  makkhita]  smeared  J  v.  16;  abstr. 
°tta  (nt.)  Vism  346. 

Sammakkheti  [sari+makkheti]  to  smear  Vism  346. 

Sammaggata  see  under  samma°. 

Sammajjati  [sag+majjati*]  i.  to  sweep  Vin  1.46;  11.209; 
J  11.25;  DhA  1.5S;  II. 1 84;  111.168.  —  2.  to  rub,  polish 
J    1.338.  —  pp.    samma^ha. — Cans.   II.   sammajjapeti 

Vin  1.240. 

Sammajjana  (adj.-nt.)  [fr.  last]  sweeping  J  1.67;  SnA  66 
(°ka) ;  VvA  319  (T.  sammajja). 

Sammajjani  (f.)  [fr.  last]  a  broom  Vin  II. 129;  A  iv.170; 
Vism  105;  DhA  111.7 ;  cp.  sammujjani. 

Sammannati  see  sammannati. 

Sammattha  [pp.  of  sammajjati]  swept,  cleaned,  polished, 
smooth  Vin  111.119  (su°) ;  J  i.io;  111.395  (smooth). 
Spelt  °matta  at  Miln  15. 

Sammata  [pp.  of  sammannati]  i.  considered  as  M  1.39; 
S  II. 15;  IV. 127;  D  III. 89  (dhamma°) ;  Vin  iv.161,  295. 

—  2.  honoured,  revered  M  11. 213  ;  J  1.49  ;  v. 79  ;  sadhu- 
sammata  considered,  revered,  as  good  D  1.47  ;  S  iv.398. 

—  3.  authorized,  selected,  agreed  upon  D  111.93  (maha- 
jana°)  Vin  i.ii  i  ;  111.150. 

Sammati^  [sam;  Dhtp  436  =  upasama]  1.  to  be  appeased, 
calmed  ;  to  cease  Dh  5  ;  Pot  y^  pi.  sammeyyug  S  1.24. 

—  2.  to  rest,  to  dwell  D  1.92  ;  S  1.226  ;  J  v. 396  ;  DA  1.262 
(=vasati);  pp.  santa.  —  Caus.  sameti  to  appease, 
suppress,  stop,  A  11.24;  I*  8*'  ^3'  "?•  '^3  :  Dh  265. 

Sammati'  [sram;  Vedic  sramyati  Dhtp  220  =  parissama. 
436=kheda]  to  be  weary  or  fatigued. 

Sammati'  [sam  to  labour ;  pres.  samyati ;  pp.  Vedic 
samita]  to  work;  to  be  satisfactory  Vin  11. 119  (paris- 
savanai)  na  s.),  278  (navakammag  etc.  na  s.). 

Sammatta^  [sar|+  matta*]  intoxicated,  maddened,  delighted 
D  11.266;  Dh  287  ;  J  III.  1 88  ;  doting  on  J  v. 443  ;  rogasam- 
matta  tormented  by  illness  J  v. 90  (=''pilita  C.  ;  v.  1. 
°patta,  as  under  matta*). 

Sammatta'  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  samma]  correctness,  righteous- 
ness A  1. 121  ;  111.441  ;  Pug  13  ;  Dhs  1029  ;  Nett  44  ;  96, 
112  ;  Kvu  609  ;  DhsA  45  ;  KvA  141  ;  "karin,  attained  to 
proficiency  in  Miln  191  ;  sammatta-karita  ibid.  —  The 
8  sammatta  are  the  8  angas  of  the  ariya-magga  (see 
magga  2  a)  D  111.255;  the  10  are  the  above  with  the 
addition  of  samma-nana  and  "vimutti  A  v. 240. 

Sammad°  see  samma. 

Sammada  [sag  +  mada]  drowsiness  after  a  meal  D  11.195; 
A  1.3  ;  V.83  ;  J  11.63  ;  bhatta-"  S  1.7 ;  J  vi.57. 


Sammaddati  [sag+maddati]  to  trample  down  Vin  1.137; 

286   (civarag,  to  soak,  steep);  ppr.  sammaddanto  Vin 

1.137  (to  crush). 
Sammanteti  [sag+manteti]  to  consult  together  D  1.142  ; 

J  1.269,  399;  DA  1.135. 

Sammannati  [sag  +  man,  fr.  Vedic  manute,  manvate,  for 
the  usual  manyate  :  see  mannati]  i .  to  assent,  to  consent 
to  Mhvs  3,  10  ;  DA  i.i  i.  —  2.  to  agree  to,  to  authorize, 
select  Vin  111.150,  158,  238  ;  IV. 50  ;  Mhvs  3,  9  ;  simag  s. 
to  determine,  to  fix  the  boundary  Vin  1.106  sq.  —  3.  to 
esteem,  honour  ;  inf.  sammannitug  Vin  iv.50.  samman- 
nesi  D  1.105  is  misprint  for  samannesi.  —  ppr.  sammata. 

Sammasati  [sag+masati]  to  touch,  seize,  grasp,  know 
thoroughly,  master  S  11. 107;  Dh  374;  Miln  325;  to 
think,  meditate  on  (ace.)  J  vi.379 ;  ppr.  sammasag 
11.107  &  sammasanto  Miln  379  ;  J  1.74,  75  :  fem.  samma- 
santi  ThA  62;  sammasamana  Miln  219,  325.  398;  pp. 
sammasita. 

Sammasana  [(nt.)  fr.  last]  grasping,  mastering  Miln  178; 
Vism  287,  629  sq.  ;  cp.  Cpd.  65,  210. 

Sammasita  [pp.  of  sammasati]  grasped,  understood, 
mastered  J  1.78. 

Sammasitai  one  who  grasps,  sees  clearly  Sn  69. 

Samma^  [cp.  Sk.  samya]  a  pin  of  the  yoke  Abhp  449  ;  a 
kind  of  sacrificial  instrument  SnA  32 1  (sammag  ettha 
pasanti  ti  sammapaso ;  and  satra-yagass'  etag  adhiva- 
canag).  Cp.  Weber  Indische  Streifen  1.36,  and  samma- 
pasa,  below. 

Samma'  (indecl.)  [Vedic  samyac  (  =  samyak)  &  samis 
"  connected,  in  one " ;  see  under  sag°]  thoroughly, 
properly,  rightly;  in  the  right  way,  as  it  ought  to  be, 
best,  perfectly  (opp.  miccha)  D  1.12  ;  Vin  1.12  ;  Sn  359; 
947  ;  Dh  89,  373.  Usually  as  °-,  like  samma-dhara  even 
or  proper  showers  (i.  e.  at  the  right  time)  Pv  11.9'°  ; 
especially  in  connection  with  constituents  of  the  eight- 
fold Aryan  Path,  where  it  is  contrasted  with  miccha; 
see  magga  2  a.  (e.  g.  VbhA  114  sq.,  121,  320  sq.). — 
The  form  samma  is  reduced  to  scimma"  before  short 
vowels  (with  the  insertion  of  a  sandhi  -d-,  cp.  puna-d- 
eva),  like  samma-d-eva  properly,  in  harmony  or  com- 
pleteness D  1. 1 10;  Vin  1.9:  PvA  139,  157;  samma-d- 
afifia  &  "akkhata  (see  below) ;  and  before  double  con- 
sonants arisen  from  assimilation,  like  sammag-gata 
(  =  samyak -(-gata).  The  cpds.  we  shall  divide  into  two 
groups,  viz.  (A)  cpds.  with  samma",  (S)  with  samma°. 

A.  -akkhata  well  preached  Dh  86.  -aiifia  perfect 
knowledge  Vin  1.183;  S  1.4;  iv.128;  Dh  57  ("vimutta, 
cp.  DhA  1.434) ;  It  38'  79-  93'  95'  '°8-  -attha  a  proper 
or  good  thing  or.  cause  J  vi.i6.  -ddasa  having  right 
views  A  11.18;  S  IV. 205,  207;  Sn  733;  It  47,  61,  81; 
Kvu  339.  -ggata  [cp.  BSk.  samyaggata  Divj'  399]  who 
has  wandered  rightly,  perfect  M  1.66 ;  who  has 
attained  the  highest  point,  an  Arahant  D  1.55  ;  S  1.76  ; 
A  1.269;  IV. 226 ;  v.265  ;  J  III. 305  ;  It  87;  Ap  218. 
Also  sammagata  Vin  11.203I'.  -ppajana  having  right 
knowledge  Dh  20;  It  115.  -ppafina  right  knowledge, 
true  wisdom  Vin  1.14  ;  Dh  57,  190  ;  Sn  143  ;  It  17  ;  Miln 
39.  -ppadhana  [cp.  BSk.  samyakprahana  Divy  208] 
right  exertion  Vin  1.22  ;  Dhs  358  ;  Dpvs  18,  5  ;  they  are 
four  D  11.120;  M  III. 296 ;  explained  M  11. ii  (anuppan- 
nanag  papakanag  akusalanag  dhammanag  anuppada- 
ya ;  uppannanag  pahanaya ;  anuppannanag  kusalanag 
dhammanag  uppadaya ;  uppannanag  thitiya). 

B.  -ajiva  right  living,  right  means  of  livelihood,  right 
occupation  Vin  i.io;  S  v. 421,  etc.;  formula  D  11. 312; 
(adj.)  living  in  the  right  way  M  1.42  ;  A  11.89.  -kam- 
manta  right  conduct,  right  behaviour  Vin  i.io  ;  S  v. 421 
etc.  ;  definition  D  11.312  ;  Dhs  300  ;  adj.  behaving  in  the 
right  way  M  1.42  ;  A   11.89.     -nai^a  right  knowledge, 


Sammana 


155 


Sammodati 


enlightenment,  results  from  right  concentration  D  11.2 1 7  ; 
A  1.292  ;  adj.  M  1.42.  -nanin  possessing  the  right 
insight  A  n.89.  222.  -dassana  right  views  Vism  605. 
-ditthi  right  views,  right  belief,  the  first  stage  of 
the  noble  eightfold  path,  consists  in  the  knowledge 
of  the  four  truths  D  11. 311;  its  essence  is  know- 
ledge Dhs  20,  297,  317:  cp.  Vism  509;  comprises  the 
knowledge  of  the  absence  of  all  permanent  Being  and 
the  reality  of  universal  conditioned  Becoming  S  11.17; 
III.  1 35;  and  of  the  impermanence  of  the  5  Khandhas 
S  111.51  =  rv.142  ;  and  of  Sila,  of  causation  and  of  the 
destruction  of  the  Asavas  M  1.46-55  ;  how  obtained 
M  1.294  ;  t^'o  degrees  of  M  111.72  ;  supremely  important 
A  1.30-2  292  sq.  ;  (adj.)  Miln  1.47.  -ditthika  having 
the  right  belief  D  1.139  ;  A  11.89  ;  220  sq.  ;  in.i  15,  138  ; 
IV.290 ;  V.124  sq. ;  S  iv.322.  -dvayatanupassin  duly 
considering  both — i.  e.  misery  with  its  origin,  the 
destruction  of  misery  with  the  path,  respectively  Sn 
p.  140.  -dhara  a  heavy  shower  S  v. 379.  -patipatti 
right  mental  disposition  A  i.6g ;  Nett  27;  Miln  97; 
sammapatipada  Pug  49  sq.  ;  DhA  iv.127;  samma- 
patipanna  rightly  disposed,  having  the  right  view 
I^  '^.  55  ;  Pug  49  sq.  -passag  viewing  the  matter  in 
the  right  way  S  in. 51  ;  iv.142.  -pasa  [Sk.  ^amyaprasa, 
but  BSk.  ^amyaprasa  Divy  634]  a  kind  of  sacrifice  Sn 
303  ;  A  ii.:)2  ;  IV.151  ;  S  1.76  ;  It  21  ;  J  iv.302  ;  SnA  321. 
Cp.  samma^.  -manasikara  right,  careful,  thought 
D  1.13;  DA  1. 104.  -vattana  strict,  proper,  conduct 
Vin  1.46,  50;  II. 5.  -vaca  right  speech  Vin  i.io;  DA 
1. 314;  definition  D  11. 312  ;  Dhs  299;  (adj.)  speaking 
properly  M  1.42  ;  A  n.89.  -vayama  right  effort  Vin  i.io  ; 
Dhs  13,  22,  302  ;  definition  D  11. 312  ;  adj.  M  1.42  ;  A  11.89. 
-vimutta  right  emancipation  A  1.292  ;  "vimutti  the 
same  D  11. 217;  A  11. 196,  222;  (adj.)  M  1.42;  A  ri.89. 
-sankappa  right  resolve,  right  intention  Dh  12  ;  Vin  i.io  ; 
Dhs  21,  298;  definition  D  11. 312  ;  (adj.)  M  1.42  ;  A  11.89. 
-sati  right  memory,  right  mindfulness,  self-possession 
Vin  I.IO  ;  Dhs  23,  303  ;  definition  D  11. 313  ;  (adj.)  M  1.42  ; 
A  11.89.  -samadhi  right  concentration,  the  last  stage 
of  the  noble  eightfold  path  Vin  i.io;  Dhs  24,  304; 
definition  D  II. 313;  adj.  M  1.12;  A  n.89.  -sampassag 
having  the  right  view  S  iv.142.  -sambuddha  perfectly 
enlightened,  a  universal  Buddha  Vin  1.5  ;  D  1.49  ;  Dh 
187 :  J  1.44  ;  DhA  1.445  ;  111.241  ;  VbhA  436,  etc.  -sam- 
bodhi  perfect  enlightenment,  supreme  Buddhaship 
Vin  i.ii  ;  D  11.83;  S  1.68,  etc. 

Sammana  (nt.)  [fr.  sarj-fman]  honour  j  1.182;  vi.390; 
Sdhp  355. 

Sammanana  (f)  [sag -1- manana]  honouring,  veneration 
D  III. 190  ;  Miln  162,  375,  386. 

Samminjati  {&  °eti)  [sag  +  ifijati,  see  also  saminjati;  cp. 
BSk.  sammiiijayati  Divy  473.  See  also  Leumann. 
Album  Kern,  p.  393]  to  bend  back,  to  double  up  (opp. 
pasarati  or  sampasareti)  Vin  1.5  ;  M  1.57.  168  ;  D  1.70  ; 
J  I  321;  Vism  365  (v.  1.  saminjeti) ;  DA  1.196.  —  pp. 
sammiiij  ita. 

Sammifijana  (nt.)  [fr.  samminjati]  bending  DA  1.196  (opp. 
pasarana) ;  VbhA  358. 

Sammiujita  [pp.  of  samminjati]  bent  back  M  1.326  (spelt 
samiiijita) ;  A  11. 104,  106  sq.,  210. 

Sammita  [sag-f-mita]  measured,  i.  e.  just  so  much,  no 
more  or  less  ;  "-bhanin  Th  i,  209. 

Sammilata  [sag-(-  milata]  withered,  shrunk  M  1.80. 

Sammillabhasinl  (f)  [sag-|-milIa  =  mihita,-)-bhasinj  speak- 
ing with  smiles  J  iv.24  ;  name  of  a  girl  in  Benares 
J  ni.93  sq. 

Sammissata  (f.)  [fr.  sag-f-  missa]  the  state  of  being  mixed, 
confusion  DhsA  311. 


Sammukha  (adj.)  [sag-(-mukha]  face  to  face  with,  in 
presence  ;  sammukhacinna  a  deed  done  in  a  person's 
presence  J  111.27;  sammukha  (abl.)  1.  face  to  face, 
before  from  before  D  n.155;  Sn  p.  79;  J  1.115;  in. 89 
(opp.  parokkha) ;  with  ace.  Bu  11.73  =  }  1.17;  with  gen. 
D  1.222;  11.220;  M  1.146. — 2.  in  a  full  assembly  of 
qualified  persons  Vin  11. 3  ;  loc.  sammukhe  D  n.206 ; 
J  v. 461.  In  composition  sammukha",  sammukha"  & 
samn.ukhi"  (before  bhu) :  °bhava  (°a°)  presence,  con- 
frontation Miln  126;  (°i°)  being  face  to  face  with, 
coming  into  one's  presence  D  1.103  ;  M  1.438;  A  1.150; 
"bhuta  (°i°)  being  face  to  face  with,  confronted  D  n.155  I 
S  IV. 94  ;  Vin  11.73  ;  A  in. 404  sq.  ;  v. 226;  one  who  has 
realized  the  sai)yoianas  Kvu  483  ;  "vinaya  (°a°)  proceed- 
ing in  presence,  requiring  the  presence  of  a  chapter  of 
priests  and  of  the  party  accused  Vin  n.74,  93  sq.  ;  iv.207  ; 
A  1.99;  DhsA  144.     See  also  yebhuyyasika. 

Sanuuakhata  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  sammukha]  presence,  con- 
frontation Vin  11.93  (sangha°). 

Sammucchita  see  samucchita. 

Sammajjani  (f.)  [  =  sammajjani]  a  broom  J  1.161  ;  sam- 
munjani  the  same  Miln  2. 

Sammattha  [sag+muttha]  confused  M  1.21;  S  iv.125; 
v. 331  ;  one  who  has  forgotten  Vin  iv.4^  (=na  ssarati); 
111.1651^;  "ssati  id.  A  1.280. 

Sammoti  (f)  [fr.  sag-t-man]  i.  consent,  permission  Vin 
III.  199.  — -2.  choice,  selection,  delegation  Vin  in.  159.  — 

3.  fixing,    determination    (of   boundary)    Vin    1.106. — 

4.  common  consent,  general  opinion,  convention,  that 
which  is  generally  accepted  ;  as  °-  conventional,  e.  g. 
°sacca  conventional  truth  (as  opposed  to  paramattha" 
the  absolute  truth)  Miln  160  ;  "nana  common  knowledge 
D  in. 226  ;  °deva  what  is  called  a  deva  J  1. 1 32  ;  DA  1. 1 74  ; 
see  under  deva;  "marana  what  is  commonly  called 
"  death  "  Vism  229.  —  sarnmucca  (instr.)  by  convention 
or  common  consent  Sn  648  (v.  1.  sammacca  =  ger.  of 
sammannati).  • — -5.  opinion,  doctrine  Sn  897  (  =  dva- 
satthi  ditthigatari  Nd'  308),  904,  911.  —  6.  definition, 
declaration,  statement  Vin  1.123  (ummattaka") ;  A 
■V.347  (vadaka") ;  VbhA  164  (bhuiijaka").  —  7.  a 
popular  expression,  a  mere  name  or  word  Miln  28.  — 
8.  tradition,  lore ;  comb''  with  suti  at  Miln  3. 

Sammudita  [pp.  of  sammodati]  delighted,  delighting  in 
Vin  1.4  ;  M  1.503  ;  S  lv.3go. 

Sammnyhati  [sag-t-  muyhati]  to  be  bewildered,  infatuated, 
muddle-headed  J  iv.385 ;  Miln  42.  — pp.  sammiilha 
D  n.85  ;  M  1.250  ;  A  1.165  ;  Sn  583  ;  Cans,  sammoheti  to 
befool  Miln  224. 

Sammayhaiia(nt.)  [sag -t-muyhana]  bewilderment  DA  1.193 

Sammusa  M  11.202,  read  sammucca  (from  sammuti). 

Sammnssanata  (f.)  [fr.  sag -t-  mussati]  forgetfulness  Dhs  14 
1 349  ;  Pug  2 1 . 

8ammii}lia  [sag-nmulha]  infatuated,  bewildered  D  11.85; 
M  1.250;  A  1. 165;  Sn  583;  J  V.294;  Tikp  366. 

Sammegha  [sag-l-  megha]  rainy  or  cloudy  weather  J  vi.51, 
52- 

Sammoda  [fr.  sag  -1-  mud]  odour,  fragrance ;  ekagandha", 
filled  with  fragrance  J  vi.g. 

Sammodaka  (adj.)  [fr.  sammodati]  polite  D  1.116;  DA 
1.287;  a-sammodaka  (f.  °-ika)  Vin  1.341**. 

Sammodati  [sag-l-modati]  i.  to  rejoice,  delight;  pp.  sam- 
mudita (q.  v.).  —  2.  to  agree  with,  to  exchange  friendly 
greeting  with;  aor.  sammodi  Vin  1.2;  D  1.52;  Sn  419; 
J  VI. 224;  ppr.  sammodamina  in  agreement,  on  friendly 


Sammodana 


136 


Sarati 


terms  J  1,209;  11. 6 ;  ger.  sammoditva  J  II. 107;  grd 
sammodaniya  [cp.  BSk.  sammodani  sarjranjanl  katha 
Divy  70,  156  &  passim]  pleasant,  friendly  A  v.  193  ;  cp. 
Sn  419  ;  Vin  1.2  ;  D  1.52.  —  sammodita  at  VvA  186  read 
samodita. 

Sammodana  (nt.)  [sag+modana]  satisfaction,  compli- 
ment ;  °r|  karoti  to  exchange  politeness,  to  welcome 
VvA  141,  259. 

Sammosa  [for  *sam-mrsa,  of  mrj:  see  mussati.  sammosa 
after  moha  &  musa>mosa]  bewilderment,  confusion 
D  i.ig;  A  1.58;  11. 147;  S  11.224;  iv.190;  Vin  11. 114; 
Miln  266,  289  ;  Vism  63  (sati°  lapse  of  memory). 

Sammoha  [sag  +  moha]  bemlderment,  infatuation,  delu- 
sion M  1.86,  136;  Vin  1. 183;  Nd'  193;  A  11. 174;  111.54 
sq..  416  ;  S  1.24  ;  iv.206  ;  Dhs  390. 

Sammoheti  see  sammuyhati. 

Saya=saka  (?)  one's  own  J  vi.414  (  =  saka-rattha  C). 

SayaiJ  (adv.)  [see  etym.  under  sa*]  self,  by  oneself  Vin  1.8  ; 
D  1. 12;  DA  1. 175;  Sn  57,  320,  etc.;  p.  57,  100,  etc.; 
Mhvs  7,  63  (for  f.).  Also  with  ref.  to  several  people, 
e.  g.  DhA    1. 13. 

-kati  made  by  itself,  spontaneous  D  111.137  (loka) ; 
S11.19.sq.  (dukkha) ;  Ud  69  sq.  -jata  born  from  one- 
self, sprung  up  spontaneously  J  1,325;  11,129,  -pabha 
radiating  light  from  oneself,  a  kind  of  devas  D  1,17; 
111,28  sq,,  84  sq,  ;  Sn  404;  DA  1,110  -bhu  self-depen- 
dent, an  epithet  of  a  Buddha  Bu  xiv,i  =  J  1.39; 
Miln  214,  227,  236;  Vism  234;  SnA  106  (f.  abstr. 
sayambhuta),  135,  -vara  self-choice  J  v,426.  -rasin 
self-controlled,  independent  Bu  11.20=  J  1.5;  Davs 
1.22. 

Sayatatta  at  S  1.14  read  sagyatatta. 

Sayati'    [si]   to  lie  down:    see    seti.     Caus.   II.   sayapeti 

ibid. 

Sayati^  [sri  which  is  given  in  meaning  seva  at  Dhtp  289]  to 
lean  on  ;  to  be  supported  etc.  :  only  in  pp.  sita,  and  in 
prep.  cpd.  nissayati. 

Sayatha  (adv.)  [cp,  Sk,  sayatha  or  tadyatha  ;  see  sa*.  The 
usual  P.  form  is  seyyatha]  like  as  Th  i,  412. 

Sayana  (nt.)  [fr,  ii]  1,  lying  down,  sleeping  Vism  26; 
PvA  81J  (mauca°),  — 2,  bed,  couch  Vin  1.57,  72  ;  11. 123  ; 
D  1.5,  7  ;  A  1,132  ;  J  ii,S8  ;  v,i  10  (°r)  attharapeti  to  spread 
out  a  bed) ;  Miln  243,  348  ;  Nd'  372  (°sannidhi) ;  Pv  i,ii' 
(kis°=kir|°) ;  PvA  78,  — •  sayanakalaha  a  quarrel  in  the 
bedroom,  a  curtain-lecture  J  111,20  ;  sayanasana  bed  & 
seat  It  112  ;  Dh  185,  etc.  :  see  senasana. 

Sayanighara  (nt.)  a  sleeping-room  Vin  1.140  sq. ;  iv.160; 
J  1.433;  111.275,  276. 

Sayana  is  ppr.  of  sayati  lying  down  (e.  g,  A  11,13  sq.)  •  see 
seti. 

Sayapita  [pp.  of  sayapeti]  made  to  lie  down  VbhA  1 1. 

Sayita  [pp.  of  seti]  lying  down  J  1,338  ;  v,438,  sukha° 
lying  in  a  good  position,  sleeping  well,  well-embedded 
(of  seeds)  A  111.404  =  0  11.354  ;  Miln  255.  sukha-sayita- 
bhava  "  having  had  a  good  sleep,"  being  well  J  v.  12  7. 

Sayha  see  sahati. 

Sara^  [cp.  Vtdic  sara]  i.  the  reed  Saccharum  sara  Miln 
342.  —  2.  an  arrow  (orig.  made  of  that  reed)  D  i.g  ; 
Dh  304  ;  Miln  396  ;  DhA  216  (visa-pita). 

-tunda  a  beak  as  sharp  as  an  arrow  DhA  111.32. 
-dandaka  shaft  of  an  arrow  DhA  11. 141.  -bhanga 
arrow-breaking  Vism  41 1  (in  comp.). 

Sara'  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  sarati'  i.  going,  moving,  following 
Sn  3,  901   —  2.  fluid,  flow  J  1.359  (puti°). 


Saia^  (m.-nt.)  [Vedic  saras]  a  lake  J  1.221  ;  11.10;  vi.518 
(Mucalinda) ;  there  are  seven  great  lakes  (maha-sara, 
viz,  Anotatta,  Sihapapata.  Rathakara,  Kannamunda, 
Kunala,  Chaddanta,  Mandakini)  A  lv,ioi  ;  D  1,54; 
J  11.92;  DA  1.164,  283;  annava"  the  ocean  D  il,8g  ; 
cp,  A  11.55  i  '°c.  sare  J  11.80  ;  sarasmig  Sn  1092  ;  & 
sarasi  Mhvs  10,  7  ;  jatassara  a  natural  lake  J  1.472  sq. 

Saia^  (adj.)  [fr.  sarati^]  remembering  M  1.453;  A  11. 21  ; 
DA  1. 106.  °sankappa  mindfulness  and  aspiration  M 
1.453  ;  III.  132  ;  S  IV. 76,  137,  190  ;  Nett  16. 

Sara^  [Vedic  svara,  svar,  cp.  Lat.  su-surrus,  Ger.  surren] 
sound,  voice,  intonation,  accent  Vin  11.108  ;  D  11.24  sq.  ; 
A  1.227;  Pv  II. 12*  (of  birds'  singing=abhiruda  C.) ; 
J  II. 109;  Sn  610  (-i-vanna,  which  is  doubtful  here, 
whether  "  complexion  "  or  "  speech,"  preferably  the 
former);  DhsA  17;  eight  qualities  D  11.21 1,  227;  gitas- 
sara  song  Vin  11. 108  ;  bindussara  a  sweet  voice  Sn  350  ; 
adj.  J  11.439  ;  sihassara  with  a  voice  like  a  lion's  J  v. 296, 
311  (said  of  a  prince).  Cp.  vissara.  —  In  comb"  with 
vanna  (vowel)  at  A  iv.307;  Miln  340. 

-kutti  [=klpti;  can  we  compare  BSk.  svaragupti 
"  depth  of  voice  "  Divy  222  ?]  intonation,  resonance, 
timbre,  melodiousness  of  voice  Vin  ii.io8  =  A  111.251  ; 
J  VI. 293  (Kern,  "enamoured  behaviour"  [?]);  DhsA 
16.  Cp.  Vin.  Texts  in. 72.  -bhafifia  intoning,  a  par- 
ticular mode  of  reciting  Vin  1.196;  11.108,  316;  J 
11.109;  DhA  1. 154,  -bhana=  "bhaiiiia  DhA  11,95  (v.  1. 
"bhaiiiia),  -bhanaka  an  intoner,  one  who  intones  or 
recites  the  sacred  texts  in  the  SarabhaiiiSa  manner 
Vin  11.300.  -sara  an  imitative  word ;  sarasarag  karoti 
to  make  the  noise  sarasara  M  1.128. 

Saraijsa  (f.)  [fr.  sa^-t-ra^si]  the  sun  (lit.  having  rays) 
Mhvs  18,  68. 

Saraka  a  vessel,  a  drinking  vessel  J  1.157,  266;  iv.384 ; 
DA  1.134,  136;  Mhvs  32,  32;  DhA  11.85;  HI.7. 

Saiaja  (adj.)  [sa-l-rajo]  dusty  Vin  1.48  ;  A  n.54. 

Saiai^a'  (nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  Parana  protection,  shelter,  house, 
barman  id.  ;  Sala  hall;  to  Idj.  *kel  to  hide,  as  in  Lat. 
celo,  Gr.  icnXinrTui  to  conceal,  Oir.  celim,  Ohg.  Ags.  helan, 
Goth,  huljan  to  envelop;  Ohg.  hella=E.  hell;  also 
E.  hall,  and  others]  shelter,  house  Sn  591  ;  refuge,  pro- 
tection D  111.187  ;  Sn  503  ;  J  11.28  ;  DA  1.229  ;  especially 
the  three  refuges — the  Buddha,  the  Dhamma.  and  the 
Brotherhood —  A  1.56  ;  D  1.145  ;  J  1.28  ;  usually  combined 
with  verbs  like  upeti  Vv  53";  Sn  31;  gacchati 
D  1. 1 16;  A  III. 242  ;  Vin  1.4;  Dh  190;  Sn  p.  15,  25; 
It  63;  or  yati  Sn  179;  Dh  i88;  asarana,  asaranibhuta 
without  help  and  refuge  Miln  148.     See  lena  2. 

-agamana=°gamana  D  1.146;  SnA  42,  157.  -gamana 
(nt.)  taking  refuge  in  the  three  Saranas  Vin  111.24; 
S  1V.270. 

Sara^a'  (adj.)  [sa-t-  rana]  concomitant  with  war  Dhs  1294  ; 
DhsA  50. 

Sara^a^  [fr.  smi;  i.  e.  sarati']  (nt.)  remembrance;  -ta  (f.) 
remembering  Dhs  14,  23  ;  Pug  21,  25. 

Sa^a^iya  (nt.)  [grd.  formation  fr.  sarana*]  something  to  be 
remembered  A  1.106. 

Sarati'  [sf  given  by  Dhtp  248  as  "  gati  "]  to  go,  flow,  run, 
move  along  J  111.95  (  =  parihayati  nassati  C);  Pot.  sare 
J  IV, 284,  —  aor,  asara  J  vi.igg.  —  pp.  sarita'. — Caus. 
sareti  (i)  to  make  go  A  1,141  ;  iii,28  =  M  1,124  =  8  iv.i76 
J  IV.99  ;  Miln  378  ;  Vism  207.  —  (2)  to  rub,  to  mix 
Vin  II.  1 1 6.  Also  sarapeti.  A  Desid.  form"  is  sigsare 
(3'^  pi.  med.)  at  Vv  64'  (=Sk.  sisir?ati),  cp.  Geiger, 
P.Gr.  §  184. 

Sarati'  [smr,  cp.  smrti  =  sati;  Dhtp  248  "cinta";  Lat 
memor,    memoria  =  memory ;    Gr.    fjfpi^va    care,    ^dprv 


Sarati 


157 


Salala 


witness,  martyr;  Goth.  maurnan=E.  mourn  to  care, 
etc.]  to  remember  D  11.234  '■  Vin  1.28  ;  11.79  ;  J  11.29.  A 
diaeretic  form  is  sumarati  Dh  324;  ger.  sumariya  Mhvs 
4.  65.  —  I"  pi.  saremhase  Th  2,  383  ;  med.  sare  J  VI.227  ; 
imper.  sara  Th  i,  445  ;  A  sarahi  Miln  79;  3"'  sg.  saratu 
Vin  1.273,  —  ppr.  sarag  Mhvs  3,  6  ;  &  saramana  Vin  1.103. 
• —  aor.  sari  J  1.330 ;  fut.  sarissati  J  vi.4g6.  —  ger. 
saritva  J  1.214.  —  pp.  sata*  &  sarita^.  — Caus.  sareti  to 
remind  Vin  11. 3  sq..  276  ;  111.221  ;  sarayamana,  reminding 
J  1.50;  ppr.  pass,  sariyamana  Vin  111.221;  w.  ace. 
D  11.234;  w,  gen.  Dh  324;  J  vi.496 ;  with  foil.  fut.  II. 
(in  °ta)  Vin  11. 125,  4;  in. 44.  9,  etc.  —  Caus.  II.  sarapeti 
Vin  111.44;  Miln  37  (with  double  ace),  79. 

SaiatP  [sr;  Dhtp  248  :  higsa]  to  crush  :  see  seyyati.  Caus. 
sareti  Vin  11. 116  (madhu-sitthakena.  to  pound  up,  or 
mix  with  beeswax).     Cp.  saritaka. 

Sarada  [Vedic  ^arad  (f.)  traces  of  the  cons.  decl.  only  in 
ace.  pi.  sarado  satar)  ''  100  autumns  "  J  11.16]  autumn, 
the  season  following  on  the  rains  Sn  687  ;  Vv  35',  °-sa- 
maya  the  autumn  season  D  11. 183  ;  M  1.115  ;  A  iv.102  ; 
V.22  ;  It  20  ;  S  1.65  ;  111.141,  155  ;  v.44  ;  VvA  134,  161. 

Sarabha  [Vedic  ^arabha  a  sort  of  deer  J  iv.267  ;  vi.537] 
(rohiccasarabha  miga  =  rohitasarabhamiga,C.ibid.  538) ; 
Sarabhamigajataka  the  483rd  Jataka  J  1.193.  406  (text 
Sarabhanga) ;  iv.263  sq. 

-pallanka  "  antelope-couch,"  a  high  seat,  from  which 
the  Bodhisat  preaches  J  111.342  (cp.  vara-pallanka 
J  111.364).  -padaka  having  legs  like  those  of  a  gazelle 
J  J-267. 

Sarabhasag  (adv.)  [sa^-f-rabhasarj]  eagerly,  quickly  Davs 
'V.22,  34  sq.,  43. 

Sarabhn  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  sarata]  a  lizard  Vin  11. no;  A  11.73; 
J  "135.  147;  SnA  439. 

Sarala  the  tree  Pinus  longifolia  J  v. 420  (thus  read  with  B 
instead  of  salala  [?]). 

Saravant  (adj.)  [sara^-l- vant]  i.  having  or  making  a 
sound,  well-sounding  Vin  1.182  ;  A  in.375.  —  2.  with 
a  noise  Mhvs  25,  38. 

Sarasa  (adj.)  [sa'-l-rasa]  with  its  essential  properties  (see 
rasa)  Nd'  43  ;  sarasabhava  a  method  of  exposition 
DhsA  71. 

Sarasi  (f.)  [Vedic  sarasi]  a  large  pond  Vin  11.20 1  =  S  11.269  ; 
J  V.46. 

Saraga  (adj.)  [sa'-l-raga]  connected  with  lust,  passionate 
D  1.79  ;  11.299  ;  M  1.59  ;  Vism  410. 

Sarajaka  (adj.)  [sa'-l-raja-l-  ka]  including  the  king  J  1.126  ; 
fem.  -ika  Vin  11. 188;  S  1.162  ;  J  11. 113.  114  (sarajika  at 
J  III. 453) ;  with  the  king's  participation  Tikp  26  (sassa- 
mika-sarajaka  geha). 

Sarajita  denomination  of  a  purgatory  and  its  inhabitants 
S  IV. 309  sq.     Various  readings  Parajita  and  Saraiijita. 

Sarapana  (nt.)  [fr.  sarapeti  Caus.  of  sarati*]  causing  some- 
body to  remember  Miln  79. 

Sarava  [Sk.  ^arava]  a  cup,  saucer  A  1.161  ;  J  1.8  ;  M  111.235 
for  patta);  Miln  282  ;  DA  1.298;  PvA  244,  251. 

Saravaka=  sarava  Vin  1.203;  11. 142,  153,  222. 

Sari  according  to  Payogasiddhi  =  sarisa  (sadisa)  cp.  sari- 
vanna  J  11.439  (  =  samana-vanna,  C). 

Sarikkha  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  sadrksa,  fr.  sadr^=P.  sadisa]  like, 
resembling  S  1.66  ;  J  1443  ;  111.262. 

Sarikkhaka  (adj.)  [  =  sarikkha]  in  accordance  with,  like 
J  rv.215  ;  PvA  206,  284.     See  also  kamma". 


Sarikkhata  (f.)  [fr.  sarikkha]  resemblance,  likeness  J  111.241 
(t.-ir)°  being  like  that) ;  VvA  6  (cp.  kamma°). 

Sarikkhatta  (nt.)  [fr.  sarikkha]  likeness  DhsA  63 ;  as 
sarikkhakatta  (kamma°)  at  DhsA  347. 

Santa'  [pp.  of  sarati']  gone,  set  into  motion  Dh  341 
(  =  amisata,  payata  DhA  iv.49). 

Santa'  [pp.  of  sarati*]  remembered  Vin  11.85. 

Saritaka  (nt.)  powdered  stone  (pasana-cunna)  Vin  11. 116; 
saritasipatika  powder  mixed  with  gum  Vin  11. 116. 

Saritar  [n.  ag.  fr.  sarati']  one  who  remembers  D  111.268, 
286  ;  A  n.35  ;  S  V.197,  225. 

Sarita  (f.)  [cp.  Vedic  sarit,  fr.  sarati^]  a  river  Dhs  1059  ; 
saritag  ace.  Sn  3  ;  gen.  pi.  J  11.442  ;  nom.  pi.  sarita  Miln 
125. 

Sarisa  (adj.)  [=sadisa]  like,  resembling  J  v. 159. 

Sarisapa  various  reading  of  sirir)sapa  M  i.io  etc. 

Saiira  (nt.)  [Vedic  Sarisa]  i.  the  (physical)  body  D  1.157; 
M  1.157;  S  IV. 286  ;  A  1.50;  II. 41  ;  111.57  ^1  ■  3^3  sq. ; 
IV. 190.  Sn  478,  584;  Dh  151  ;  Nd'  181  ;  J  1.394  (six 
blemishes);  11. 31  ;  antimasarira  one  who  wears  his  last 
body,  an  Anagamin  Sn  624;  S  1.210  ;  Dh  400.  —  2.  a 
dead  body,  a  corpse  D  11. 141,  164;  M  111.91.  —  3.  the 
bones  D  11. 164.  —  4.  relics  Vv  63,  32  ;  VvA  269. 

-atthaka  the  bony  framework  of  the  body  DhsA  338. 
-abha  radiation  of  light  proceeding  from  the  body,  lustre 
SnA  16  (°r)  muiicati  to  send  forth),  41  (id.),  140  (id.), 
-kicca  (i)  funeral  ceremonies,  obsequies  J  1.180;  11. 5  ; 
VvA  76.  257  ;  PvA  74,  76,  162.  —  (2)  "  bodily  function," 
satisfying  the  body's  wants  J  11.77;  'v.37.  -davya 
(  =  dabba')  fitness  of  body,  good  body,  beauty  J  11. 137. 
-dhatu  a  body  relic  (of  the  Buddha)  Mhvs  13,  167; 
VvA  165,  269.  -pabha  lustre  of  the  body  DhA  1. 106. 
-parikamma  attending  the  body  SnA  52.  -mai]sa  the 
flesh  of  the  body  J  111.53.  -vanna  the  (outward)  appear- 
ance of  the  body  Vism  193.  -valaiija  discharge  from 
the  body.  fi~ces  Dh.\  11.55  ;  iv.46  (°thana).  See  valanja. 
-sanghata  perfection  of  body  Vism  194.  -santhana 
constitution  of  the  body,  bodily  form  Vism  193. 

Sariravant  (adj.)  [sarira-l- vant]  having  a  body  S  11.279. 

SailvaWA  resembling  J  11.439  (v.  1.  sarira°).     Cp  sari. 

Sarupa  (adj.)  [sa'-f-riJpa]  i.  of  the  same  form  A  1.162; 
Pug  56.  —  2.  [sa^-l-  rupa]  having  a  body  A  1.83. 

Saroja  (nt.)  [Sk.  saroja,  saras4-ja]  "lake-born,"  a  lotus 
Davs  III.  13. 

Sarojayoni  [fr.  last]  a  Brahma,  an  archangel  Davs  1.34. 

Saioruha  (nt.)  [saras-(-ruha]  a  lotus  Davs  in. 83. 

Salakkha^a'  (adj.)  [sa'-Flakkhana]  together  with  the 
characteristics  Sn  1018. 

SalakkhaQa*  (nt.)  [sa'-f-lakkhana]  own  characteristic,  that 
which  is  consistent  with  one's  own  nature  Miln  205  ; 
Nctt  20.     Opp.  vilakkhana. 

Salana  (nt.)  [fr.  Sal]  moving,  shaking  VvA  169;  DhsA  62 
(in  def  of  kusala  as  "  kucchitanag  salan'adlhi  attbehi 
kusalar)  "). 

Salabha  [cp.  Sk.  ^alabha]  a  moth  J  v. 401  ;  Ud  72  (C); 
VbhA  146. 

Salayati  [Caus,  of  iaX  to  leap]  to  shake  DhsA  39. 

Sala]a  a  kind  of  sweet-scented  tree  J  v.420  ;  Bu  11.51  = 
J  1.13  ;  Vv  35';  VvA  162  ;  Miln  338  ;  M  11. 184. 


Salaka 


158 


Savanlya 


Salaka  (f.)  [cp.  Vedic  Salaka]  i.  an  arrow,  a  dart  A  iv.107 
(T.  has  it  as  nt.). — -2.  a  small  stick,  peg,  thin  bar 
S  IV.168;  Davs  IV. 51.  —  3.  blade  of  a  grass  M  1.79; 
J  .i-43?>-  —  4.  ribs  of  a  parasol  Vin  iv.338  ;  SnA  487  ; 
Miln  226.  —  5,  a  pencil,  small  stick  (used  in  painting  the 
eyes  with  coUyrium)  Vin  1.204;  J  in. 419  (anjana°). — 
6.  a  kind  of  needle  Vin  11. 116.  —  7.  a  kind  of  surgical 
instrument,  a  stick  of  caustic  Miln  112,  149.  —  8.  a 
gong  stick  (of  bronze,  loha°)  J  n.342  ;  Vism  283.  — g. 
membrum  virile  J  11.359.  —  lO-  a  ticket  consisting  of 
slips  of  wood  used  in  voting  and  distributing  food,  vote, 
lot  Vin  11.99,  176.  306;  J  1. 123;  PvA  272  (kalakanni")  ; 
salakar)  ganhati  to  take  tickets  (in  order  to  vote  or  to 
be  counted)  Vin  1. 117;  11.199;  pathaman  salaxar)  gan- 
hanto  taking  the  first  vote,  first  rate  A  1.24;  salakar) 
gaheti  to  issue  tickets,  to  take  a  vote  Vin  11.205  ;  salakar) 
dadati  to  issue  tickets  J  1.123  ;  salakar)  vareti  to  throw 
lots  J  1.239  (kalakanni"). 

-agga  room  for  di.stributing  food  by  tickets  J  1.123; 
Mhvs  15,  205.  -odhaniya  a  case  for  the  ointment -stick 
Vin  1.204.  -gaha  taking  of  votes,  voting  Vin  n.85,  98 
sq.  (3  kinds),  -gahapaka  ticket-issuer,  taker  of  voting 
tickets  Vin  11.84.  -bhatta  food  to  be  distributed  by 
tickets  Vin  1.58,  96;  11. 175;  J  1.123;  DhA  1.53  (eight 
kinds),  -vatapana  a  window  made  vrith  slips  of  wood 
Vin  II. 148.  -vutta  "subsisting  on  blades  of  grass"  (or 
"  by  means  of  food  tickets  "?)  Vin  hi. 6,  67  ;  iv.23  ;  A 
1. 160  ;S  IV. 323.  Cp.  BSk.  salakavrttiDivy  131  -hattha 
brush-hand,  a  kind  of  play,  where  the  hand  is  dipped 
in  lac  or  dye  and  used  as  a  brush  (?)  D  1.85  ;  DA  1.85. 

Salatuka  (adj.)  [cp.  *Sk.  salatu]  fresh,  unripe  S  1.150  = 
Sn  p.  125  ;  Miln  334  ;  VvA  288. 

Salabba  fsa'-Mabha]  one's  own  advantage  Dh  365. 

Salila  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  salila,  to  sarati^l  water  Sn  62,  319,  672  ; 
J  1.8;  V.169;  VvA  41;  PvA  157;  Nd^  665  ("  vuccati 
udakag  ");  Miln  132  (written  salija) ;  Sdhp  168.  It  is 
also  adj.  salilar)  apo  flowing  water  J  vi.534;  cp.  Miln 
114:  na  ta  nadiyo  dhuva-salila. 
-dharashower  of  water  Miln  117.     -vutthiid.Vism  234. 

Salla  (nt.)  [Vedic  §alya,  cp.  Salaka]  an  arrow,  dart  M  1.429 
(°g  aharati  to  remove  the  a) ;  11. 2 16  ;  S  iv.206  ;  J  1.180  ; 
v.4g  ;  Sn  331,  767;  Miln  112;  Vism  503  (visa"  sting  of 
poison ;  cp.  VbhA  104  sallar)  viya  vitujjati) ;  often 
metaphorically  of  the  piercing  sting  of  craving,  evil, 
sorrow  etc.,  e.  g.  antodosa"  Miln  323  ;  tanha"  S  1.40,  192  ; 
bhava"  Dh  351  ;  raga°  DhA  111.404;  PvA  230;  soka° 
Sn  985  ;  Pv  1.86 ;  KhA  153.  Cp.  also  D  11.283  :  Sn  51, 
334.  938;  J  1.155;  111157:  DhA  IV. 70.  At  Ndi  59 
seven  such  stings  are  given  with  raga°,  dosa°,  moha°, 
mana°,  ditthi",  soka°,  kathankatha".  — abhulha"  one 
whose  sting  of  craving  or  attachment  is  pulled  out  D 
11.283  ;  Sn  593  ;  J  III. 390  ;  Pv  1.8'  etc.  (see  abbiilha).  — 
Cp.  Ti°. 

-katta  [*kartj:  cp.  Geiger  P.Gr.  §  90,  4]  "  one  who 
works  on  the  (poisoned)  arrow,"  i.  e.  a  surgeon  M  1.429  ; 
II. 216;  Sn  562;  It  loi  ;  Miln  no,  169;  Vism  136  (in 
simile) ;  IQiA  21  (id).  The  Buddha  is  the  best  surgeon  : 
Sn  560;  Miln  215.  -kattiya  surgery  D  1.12  (T.  °ka) ; 
DA  1.98.  -bandhana  at  Th  2,  347  take  as  salla-H 
bandhana  "  arrow  &  prison  bond  "  (ThA  242  different). 
-viddha  pierced  by  an  arrow  Th  i,  967;  Sn  331  ;  cp. 
ruppati.  -santhana  removal  of  the  sting  Dh  275  (=;nim- 
mathana  abbahana  DhA  in. 404). 

Sallaka  [cp.  *Sk.  ^alala  Sc  ^allaka]  a  porcupine  J  v.489. 

SallakI  (f.)  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  Sallaki]  the  tree  Boswellia  thuri- 
fera  (incense  tree)  J  iv.92  ;  pi.  °-iyo  J  vi.535 ;  bahu- 
kutaja-sallakika  Th  i,  115  (=indasalarukkha  [?]). 

Sallakkha^a  (f.)  [fr.  sallakkheti]  discernment,  testing 
Dhs  16.  292.  555  ;  Pug  25  ;  Vism  278  ;  VbhA  254  ;  DhsA 
147;  asallakkana  non-discernment  S  in. 261. 


Sallakkhita  [pp.  of  sallakkheti]  realized,  thought  DhA 
1.89. 

Sallakkheti  [sag -1- lakkheti]  to  observe,  consider  Vin  1.48, 
271  ;  J  1. 123;  II. 8  ;  Vism  150;  to  examine  J  v. 13;  to 
bear  in  mind  DhsA  no;  J  vi.566;  to  understand, 
realize,  conclude,  think  over  J  iv.146  ;  VvA  185  ;  VbhA 
53;  asallakkhetva  without  deliberation  Vin  11. 2 15; 
inadvertently  J  1.209.  —  Caus.  II.  sallakkhapeti  to  cause 
to  be  noted  Mhvs  g,  24 ;  DhsA  121  ;  to  persuade,  bring 
to  reason  J  vi.393. 

Sallapati  [sag -t-  lapati]  to  talk  (with)  D  i.go  ;  11. 109  ;  Miln  4  ; 
sallapeti  the  same  Vin  iv.i''. 

Sallalikata pierced,  perforated  J  1.180.  Trenckner  suggests 
that  this  form  may  have  arisen  from  *sallakikata  (from 
sallaka,  porcupine). 

Sallahuka  (adj.)  [sag-f  lahuka]  light  J  1.277;  ii-26;  Vism 
65;  DhA  IV.17;  sallahukena  nakkhattena  on  lucky 
nights  J  11.278 ;  sallahuka vuttin  whose  wants  are  easily 
met,  frugal  Sn  144  ;  DA  1.207. 

Sallapa  [sag -1- lapa]  conversation  D  1.89  ;  A  11. 182  ;  J  1.112, 
189  ;  Miln  94.     Often  in  cpd.  katha  &  allapa°. 

Sallitta  [sag -I- litta]  smeared  (with)  Th  i,  1175  (mijha"). 

Sallina  [sag -t- Una]  sluggish,  cowering  D  11.255;  asallina 
active,  upright,  unshaken  D  11.157;  S  1.159;  IV.125; 
Cp.  v. 68.  pati°. 

Salliyana  (f.)  stolidity  Dhs  1 156,  1236. 

Sallekba  [fr.  sag-l-likh]  austere  penance,  the  higher  life 
M  1. 13,  40  ;  Vin  1.305  ;  Ps  1.102,  103  ;  Pug  69  sq.  ;  DA 
1.S2  ;  Vism  6g  ;  Miln  360,  380  ;  adj.  Vin  1.45  ;  sallekhita- 
cara  pi'actising  austere  penance  Miln  230,  244,  348  sq. ; 
"vutti  Vin  it.197  ;  Vism  65  ("vuttita).     Cp.  abhi°. 

Sallekhata  (f.)  =sallekha  D  in. 115;  Vism  53. 

Salayatana  (nt.)  [sad°  for  which  ordinarily  chal°  :  see  cha] 
the  six  organs  of  sense  and  the  six  objects — viz.,  eye, 
ear,  nose,  tongue,  body,  and  mind  ;  forms,  sounds,  odouis, 
tastes,  tangible  things,  ideas  ;  occupying  the  fourth  place 
in  the  Paticcasamuppada  D  n.32  ;  M  1.53;  A  1.176; 
S  11.3;  Vin  11;  Vism  529,  562  sq.,  671;  VbhA  174, 
176  sq.,  319. 

Sava  (adj.)  [fr.  sru,  savati]  dripping,  flowing  with  (-°) 
Pv  II. 9I'  (madhu°,  with  honey). 

Savaka  see  "sag. 

Savanka  a  sort  of  fish  J  v. 405.  Cp.  satavanka  &  sacca- 
vanka. 

Savacanlya  [sa'-f  vacsmiya]  (the  subject  of  a)  conversation 

Vin  II. 5,  32,  276. 

Savati  [sru ;  cp.  Sk.  srotas  stream  ;  Gr.  piviia,  pim  to  flow ; 
Ags.  stream= stream ;  Oir.  sruth]  to  flow  Sn  197,  1034; 
J  VI. 278  ;  Dh  370.  —  ppr.  fr.  savanti  ThA  109. 

Savana'  (nt.)  [fr.  iru  :  see  suijati]  i.  the  ear  Sn  1120  ;  Miln 
258.-2.  hearing  D  1.153,  179;  A  1.121  ;  S  1.24;  Vin 
1.26;  Sn  265,  345;  Dh  182;  J  1. 160,  250;  Miln  257; 
Nd^  188.  sussavanag  savesi  she  made  me  hear  a  good 
hearing,  she  taught  me  a  good  thing  J  1.61  ;  savanat- 
thane  within  hearing  J  iv.378.  dhamma"  hearing  the 
preaching  of  the  Dhamma  Vin  i.ioi  etc. 

Savana^  (nt.)  [fr.  savati]  flowing  Dh  339  ;  J  iv.288  ;  v.257 ; 
savana-gandha  of  the  body,  having  a  tainted  odour 
Th  2,  466. 

Savaniya  (adj.)  [grd.  of  sunati]  pleasant  to  hear  D  11.211  ; 
J  1.96  (-n-);  J  VI. 120=  122  (savaneyya). 


Savant! 


159 


Saha 


SavaatI  (f.)  [cp.  Vedic  sravat,  orig.  ppr.  of  sTQ,  sravati] 
a  river  \'in  11.238;  Bu  11.86=  J  1.18  ;  J  VI. 485  ;  Miln  319. 

Savara  [Epic  Sk.  Sahara,  cp.  Sabala=P.  sabala]  an  ab- 
original tribe,  a  savage  Vin  i.i68;"Miln  191. 

Savasa  [sa*+ vasa]  one's  own  will  DhsA  61  (°vattita;  cp. 

Expos.  81). 

Savigbata  (adj.)  [sa^+ vighata]  bringing  vexation  Th  2, 
352  ;  ThA  242. 

Savicara  accompanied  by  investigation  D  1.37  etc.,  in  the 
description  of  the  first  Jhana.     See  vicara. 

Savijjaka  (adj.)  [sa'+ vijju+ka]  accompanied  by  light- 
ning D  11.262. 

Savinnai^a  possessed  of  consciousness,  conscious,  animate 
A  1.83  ;  -ka  the  same  A  1. 1 32  ;  DhA  1.6.  —  See  viiiaanaka. 

Savitakka  accompanied  by  reasoning  D  1.37  etc.,  in  the 
formula  of  the  first  Jhana.     See  vitakka. 

Savidha  (adj.)  [Sk.  savidha]  near;  (nt.)  neighbourhood 
Davs  IV. 32  ;  v.9. 

Savibhattika  (adj.)  [sa'+ vibhatti-l-ka]  (able)  to  be  clas- 
sified DhsA  134. 

Savupadana=sa-upadana  (A  11. 163):  see  upadana. 

Savera  (adj.)  [sa*+  vera]  angry  D  1.247. 

Savyafijaaa  (adj.)  [sa'-l- vyaiijana]  with  the  letters  Vin 
1.21  ;  D  1.62  ;  DA  1. 1 76;  Sn.  p.  103  ;  Vism  214. 

Savhaya  (adj .)  [sa'  -l-  avhaya]  called,  named  Dpvs  4,  7  ;  Ap 
109. 

Sasa  [Vedic  ^a^a,  with  Ohg.  haso=E.  hare  to  Lat.  canus 
grey,  greyish-brown ;  cp.  Ago.  hasu]  a  hare,  rabbit 
Dh  342  ;  J  IV.85  ;  of  the  hare  in  the  moon  J  iv.84  sq.  ; 
sasoliika  (  =  sasa  ca  uluka  ca)  J  vi.564. 

-lakkhana  the  sign  of  a  hare  J  1.172  ;  111.55.  -lafljana 
id.  VvA  314  C vant  =  sasin,  the  moon),  -visana  a 
hare's  horn  (an  impossibility)  J  111.477. 

Sasaka=sasa  J  11.26 ;  iv.85  ;  Cp  i.io'. 

Sasakkao  [sa-l-  sakkai)]  as  much  as  one  can  M  1.415,  314  sq. 

Sasati'  [sas.  cp.  Dhtp  301  ;  gati-higsa-pa^anesu]  to  slay, 
slaughter  ;  sassamana  ppr.  pass.  J  v.24  (C.  =  hii)samana). 
inf.  scisitug  J  vi.291  (read  sasitut}  from  sasati?).  pp. 
sattha. 

Sasati'  [svas]  to  breathe  (cp.  Dhtp  301:  paijana) :  see 
vissasati. 

Sasattha  [sa'+  sattha]  with  swords  J  iv.222  ;  DhsA  62. 

Sasambhama  (adj.)  [sa-l- sambhama]  with  great  confusion 

Mhvs  5,  139. 

Sasambhara  (adj.)  [sa'+  sambhara]  with  the  ingredients  or 
constituents  Vism  20,  352,  353. 

Sasin  [Sk.  ia.iin,  fr.  Saia]  the  moon  Davs  iv.29 ;  J  in  141  ; 
v. 33  ;  Vv  81*  (=canda  VvA  314),  82'. 

Sasisa  (adj.)  [sa'-l-slsa]  together  with  the  head;  saslsai) 
up  to  the  head  D  1.76,  246  ;  J  1.298  ;  sasisaka  head  and 
all  D  11.324 ;  Sn,  p.  80. 

Sasoia  [Vedic  ^vaSura,  f.  ivasrii  (see  P.  sassii),  Idg.  •sue- 
kuros,  *suekru  ;  cp.  Gr.  ervpug  &  licvpa  ;  Lat.  socer  & 
socrus  ;  Goth,  swaihra  &  swalhro,  Ags.  sweor  &  swcger  ; 
Ohg.  swehur  &  swigar]  father-in-law  Vin  in.  137  ;  M1.168  ; 
A  11.78;  VvA  69,  121;  Th  2,  407  (sassura);  J  1.337; 
sassu-sasura  mother-  and  father-in-law  J  11.347  ;  111182  ; 
IV. 38  ;  VI. 510  ;  the  form  sassura  Th  2,  407  has  probably 
arisen  through  analogy  with  sassu.  —  f.  sasuri  VvA  69. 


Sasenaka  (adj.)  [sa'-nsena-l-ka]  accompanied  by  an  army 
Mhvs  19,  27. 


(nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  sasya]  com,  crop  M  1.116;  J  1.86, 
143,  152;  II. 135;  Miln  2;  DhA  1.97;  SnA  48;  sassasa- 
maya  crop  time  J  1.143;  susassa  abounding  in  com 
Vin  1.238;  pi.  m.  sassa  J  1.340.  °-kamma  agriculture 
1  vi.ioi  ;  °-kala  harvest  time  Vin  iv.254 ;  °-tthana  = 
°-khetta  J  vi.297;  dussassa  (having)  bad  crops  Vin 
1.238;  A  1. 160;  KhA  218  (=dubbhikklia). 

-uddharana  lifting  the  corn  Miln  307.  -ghata  destroy- 
ing property  S  11.218  sq. 

Sassata  (adj.)  [Vedic  SaSvat]  eternal,  perpetual  D  1.13; 
III. 31  sq..  137  sq.  ;  M  1.8,  426  ;  A  1.41  ;  Dh  255  ;  Dhs  1099  ; 
J  1.468;  Miln  413;  DA  1. 1 12;  dhuvasassata  sure  and 
certain  Bu  ii.iii  sq.  =  J  1.19  ;  sassatiya  for  ever,  Sn  1075  ; 
a-sassata  J  v.176;  vi.3!5;  sassatayag  adv.  (dat.)  for 
ever  (?)  J  1.468  ;  v. 172  ;  Fausboll  takes  it  =  SEissata  ayam 
(following  the  C),  and  writes  sassafayag. 

-difthi  etemalism,  the  doctrine  that  soul  and  world 
are  eternal  Dhs  1315;  S  11.20;  111.98 ;  Nett  40,  127. 
-mijla  etemalist  Dpvs  6,  25.  -vada  an  eternalist, 
etemalism  D  1.13;  111.108;  S  11.20;  111.99,  182;  iv.400 ; 
Pug  38;  DA  1. 104  sq. ;  Ps  1. 155;  VbhA  509.  -vadin 
eternalist  Nett  iii  ;  Mhbv  no. 

Sassatika  [fr.  sassata]  etemalist  D  1.17  ;  Mhbv  1 10  (ekacca" 
partial  etemalist);  Vin  in. 312  ;  "-ika  J  v. 18,  19. 

Sassatisamai]  (adv.)  [cp.  Sk.  SaSvatlh  samalj]  for  ever  and 
ever  D  1.14  ;  M  1.8  ;  S  111.143  :  also  sassati  sama  J  111.255  ; 
Vv  63I*  (explained  by  sassatihi  samana,  like  the  eternal 
things — viz.,  earth,  sun,  moon,  etc.,  VvA  265) ;  J  111.256  ; 
DA  1. 105. 

SassamaQabrahmava  (fem.  -i)  together,  with  samaqas  and 
brahmins  Vin  in;  D  1.62;  in. 76,  135;  S  v.423 ;  Sn 
p.  100  ;  DA  I.I  74. 

Sassara  imitative  of  the  sound  sarasara ;  chinnasassara 
giving  out  a  broken  or  irregular  sound  of  sarasara 
M  1. 128;  see  J.P.T.S..  1889,  p.  209. 

Sassamika  (adj.)  [saH- samin-l- ka]  i.  having  a  master, 
belonging  to  somebody  D  11. 1 76.  —  2 .  having  a  husband, 
married  J  1.177,  397;  iv.190. 

Sassirika  (adj.)  [sa'+sirl-t-ka]  glorious,  resplendent  J  1.95  ; 
II. I  ;  IV. 189  ;  VI. 270. 

Sassii  and  Sassa  (f)  [Vedic  svasru  :  see  sasura]  mother-in- 
law  Vin  III. 137;  A  11.78;  Th  2,  407;  Sn  125;  J  1.337; 
III. 425  sq.  ;  V.286  (gen.  sassuya) ;  DhA  1.307;  VvA  1 10, 
121;  Pv.\  89.  sassu-sasure,  see  sasura;  sassudeva 
worshipping  one's  mother-in-law  as  a  god  S  1.86 ;  J 
iv.322. 

Saha^  (indecl.)  [fr.  sa' ;  cp.  Vedic  sjiha]  prep.  &  prefix, 
meaning:  in  conjunction  with,  together,  accompanied 
by  ;  immediately  after  (with  instr.)  Vin  1.38  ;  Sn  49,  928  ; 
Th  2,  414  =  425  ;  saha  Sn  231. 

-anukkama  =  sahanukkama  with  the  bridle  Dh  398; 
DhA  IV.  161.  -amacca  together  with  the  ministers 
Mhvs  5,  182.  -avudha  together  with  one's  weapons 
J  IV. 416.  -indaka  together  vrith  Indra  D  11.208,  221  ; 
Vv  30'.  -udaka  together  with  water  J  v. 407.  -odha 
together  with  the  stolen  goods ;  corag  °-ar)  gahctva 
Vism  180;  Mhvs  23,  11  (thena) ;  35,  11.  See  oddha. 
-odaka  containing  water  Mhvs  4,  13.  -orodha  with  his 
hairem  Mhvs  5,  182  ;  -kathin  conversing  with  (instr.) 
M  1.489.  -kara  a  sort  of  fragrant  mango  KhA  53. 
-gata  accompanying,  connected  with,  concomitant 
Vin  1.10;  D  11.186;  S  V.421  ;  Kvu  337;  DhsA  157. 
-ggana  together  with  his  companions  Dpvs  14,  58. 
-cetiya  containing  a  Cetiya  Mhvs  33,  10.  -ja  born  at  the 
same  time  Vv  81''.  -jata  i.  born  at  the  same  time,  of 
equal  age  J  1.54;  vi.512.  —  2.  arisen  at  the  same  time, 


Saha 


i6o 


Saka 


coinciding  with  (instr.)  Kvu  337,  620;  VbhA  127. — 
3.  (in  "paccaya)  the  relation  of  co-nascence,  coincidence 
Dukp  17  sq.,  52  sq..  113  sq.,  129  sq.,  145  sq.,  225  sq., 
33^  sq.  and  passim  ;  Tikp  36  sq.,  62  sq.,  107  sq.,  243  sq. ; 
Vism  535.  -jivin  (£em.  -i)  living  together  with  Vin 
IV. 291,  325  sq.  -dhanunika  having  the  same  Dhamma, 
co-religionist  M  1.64;  Nd'  485  (opp.  para°) ;  regarding 
the  Dhamma  D  1.94,  161  ;  M  1.36S  ;  Vin  1.134  ;  Nett  52  ; 
DA  1.263  (  =  sahetuka,  sakarana) ;  that  which  is  in 
accordance  with  the  dhamma  Dhs  1327;  M  1.482; 
°g  adv.  in  accordance  with  the  dhamma  Vin  1.60,  69 ; 
111,178;  IV. 141.  -dhammiya  co-religionist  Nett  1O9. 
-dhenuka  accompanied  by  a  cow  Mhvs  21,  18.  -nandin 
rejoicing  with  It  73.  -pagsukilita  a  companion  in  play, 
a  playfellow  A  11. 186:  J  1.364;  iv.77;  PvA  30.  -pesuna 
together  with  slander  Sn  862  f . ;  Nd^  257.  -bhavin  being 
at  one's  service  J  iii.  1 8 1  (amacca).  -bhu  arising  together 
with  Dhs  1197;  Nett  16;  a  class  of  devas  D  11.260. 
-macchara  with  envy  Sn  862.  -yoga=karana-vacana 
SnA  44.  -vatthu  living  together  with  Th  2,  414  = 
425;  ThA  269.  -vasa  living  together,  associating 
Vin  11.34  ;  I*-  *^8-  -vasin  living  together  J  v. 352 .  -sangha 
together  with  the  Order  Mhvs  1,71.  -seyya  sharing  the 
same  couch,  living  together  Vin  iv.16;  KhA  190. 
•sevaka  together  with  the  servants  Mhvs  36.  43.  -sokin 
sorrowful  (?)  S  iv.180. 

Saha^  (adj.)  [fr.  sah]  submitting  to,  enduring  M  1.33; 
Th  I,  659  ;  J  VI. 379  ;  sabbasaha  J  v. 425,  431.  —  dussaha 
hard  to  endure  Sdhp  95.  118,  196 

Sahati  [sah  to  prevail]  i.  to  conquer,  defeat,  overcome 
M  1.33;  S  IV.I57;  Sn942  ;  Dh  335;  It  84 ;  J  1.74;  11.38& 
(avamanag) ;  111.423  (id.).  —  2.  to  bear,  endure  Sn  20  ; 
Pug  68.  —  3.  to  be  able  D  11.342  (sayhSmi) ;  Pot.  sahe 
Sn  942  ;  Pot.  saheyya  M  1.33 ;  saha  (imper.  excuse, 
forgive,  beg  your  pardon!)  J  in. 109;  grd.  sayha  that 
which  can  be  endured,  able  to  be  done  Sn  253  ;  Davs 
11.29  ;  a-sayha  Miln  1 148. 

Sabattha  [sa' -F  h  ittha]  one's  own  hand  j  1.68;  usually 
sahattha  (abl.)  with  one's  own  hand  Vin  1.18;  A  1.274; 
D  1. 109;  Sn  p.  107;  J  1.286;  Pv  11.9' ;  11.9^*;  Miln  15. 
instr.  sahatthena  id.  PvA  no,  124,  135;  J  in. 267 ; 
VI. 305.     Cp.  sahatthika. 

Sahatthin  (adj.)  [sa' -1- hatthin]  together  with  the  elephant 
Mfevs  25,  70. 

Sahavya  (nt.)  [fr.  sahaya,  cp.  Sk.  sahayya]  companionship 
Vv  47'  (  =  sahabhava  VvA  202).  -°upaga- coming  into 
union  with  D  1.245. 

Sahavyata  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  sahavya]  companionship  D  1.18, 
235  ;  11.206  ;  M  II. 195  ;  111.99  :  S  iv.306  ;  A  ni.192. 

Sahasa  (adv.)  [instr.  of  sahas  (Vedic),  force]  forcibly, 
hastily,  suddenly  Sn  123;  DhA  in. 381  ;  PvA  40,  279; 
inconsiderately  J  1.173;  111.441.  -°kara  violence  D 
1.5  ;  in.  1 76  ;  A  n.209  ;  Pug  58  ;  J  iv.  1 1  ;  DA  1.80. 

Sahassa  [Sk.  sahasra,  see  etym.  under  sar)°]  a  thousand, 
used  as  a  singular  with  a  noun  in  the  plural,  sahassag 
vaca  Dh  100  ;  satasahassag  vassani  J  1.29  ;  also  in  the 
plural  after  other  numerals  cattari  satasahassani  chala- 
bhinna  Bu  11.204=]  1.29;  also  with  the  thing  counted 
in  the  genitive,  accharanag  sahassag  Mhvs  17,  13;  A 
1.227;  or  °-,  as  sahassa-yakkha-parivara  SnA  209.  In 
combination  with  other  numerals,  sahassa  is  sometimes 
inflected  like  an  adjective,  satthisahassa  amacca  sixty 
thousand  ministers  J  vi.484 ;  satasahassiyo  gavo 
100,000  cows  Sn  308 ;  the  thing  counted  then  precedes 
in  a  compound  jati-sahassag  1,000  births  D  1.13  ;  It  99  ; 
ghata-sahassam  pi  udakag  Miln  189;  sindhava-sahasso 
ratho  J  VI.  103;  sahassag  sahassena  a  thousand  times 
a  thousand  Dh  103  ;  sahassass'  eva  in  thousands  D  11.87. 


— sahassag  (nt.)  1,000  gold  pieces  Dh  106;  J  vi.484 ; 
Miln  10;  satasahassag  a  hundred  thousand  J  1.28; 
sahassa  (adj.)  (fem.  i)  worth  a  thousand  J  v. 484,  485  ; 
ThA  72  (Ap  V.45,  read  sahassayo  for  °aso) ;  epithet  of 
Brahma,  the  B.  of  a  thousand  world  sj'stems  >I  iii.ioi. 
Gr.  dasa-sahassi. 

-akkha  thousand-eyed,  the  god  Sakka  S  1.229 '. 
J  VI. 203  ;  sahassacakkhu  the  same  J  v. 394,  407.  -aggha 
worth  a  thousand  Miln  284.  -ara  having  1,000  spokes 
D  n.  1 72 .  -tthavika  a  purse  with  i  ,000  pieces  (of  money) 
Vism  383  ;  J  1.506  ;  DhA  11.3 7  ;  VvA  33.  -netta  thousand- 
eyed,  the  god  Sakka  S  1.226  ;  Sn  346  ;  J  in. 426  ;  iv.313  ; 
V.408 ;  VI.  1 74  ;  Vv  30'";  DhA  1.17.  -bahu  having  a 
thousand  arm5,  said  of  Ajjuna  J  v.i  19,  135,  145  ("-raja) ; 
267,  273;  VI. 201.  -bhandika  a  heap  of  1,000  pieces 
J  11.424;  111.60 ;  IV. 2.     -ragsi  the  sun  J  1.183. 

Sahassadha  (adv.)  [cp.  satadha  etc.]  in  a  thousand  ways 
A  1.227  ;  Th  I,  909. 

Sahassika  (adj.)  [fr.  sahassa]  thousandfold  J  1.17;  iv.175 
(so  for  °iyo). 

Sahassi-lokadtaatu  (f.)  a  thousandfold  world,  a  world 
system  D  1.46;  A  1.228;  DA  1.130;  dasasahassi-loka- 
dhatu  ten  world  systems  J  1.51,  63  ;  cp.  dasasahassi  and 
lokadhatu. 

Sahajanetta  [sahaja+ netta]  at  Sn  1096  is  of  doubtful 
meaning  ("  all-seeing  "?),  it  is  expl'*  as  "  spontaneously 
arisen  omniscience "  at  Nd^  669  (where  spelling  is 
sahajanetta);  lit.  "coinciding  eye";  SnA  598  expl*  as 
"  sahajata-sabbannuta-nana-cakkhu." 

Sahaya  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  sahaya,  fr.  saha-)-  i]  companion,  friend 
D  n.78;  M  1.86;  S  1V.288;  Pug  36;  Sn  35,  45  sq. ;  J 
11.29  ;  "-kicca  assistance  (?)  J  v. 339  ;  °-matta  companion 
J  IV.  76  ;  "-sampada  the  good  luck  of  having  companions 
Sn  47 ;  adi^tha-"  a  friend  who  has  not  yet  been  seen 
personally  J  1.377  •  i"-364 ;  bahu-°  having  many  friends 
Vin  II. 1 58;  nahag  ettha  sahayo  bhavis-sami  I  am  not 
a  party  to  that  J  in. 46  ;  asahaya  Miln  225. 

Sahayaka  (adj.)  [fr.  last]  f.  °yika  companion,  ally,  friend 
Vin  1.18;  D  II. 155;  A  11.79,  186;  J  1.165;  11.29;  v. 159; 
VI. 256  (gihi  sahayaka,  read  gihisahayaka  [?]). 

Sahayata  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  sahaya]  companionship  Dh  61  ; 
sahayatta  (nt.)  the  same  Mhvs  30,  21. 

Sahita  [pp.  of  sag4-  dha,  cp.  Sk.  sahita=saghita]  i .  accom- 
panied with  Mhvs  7,  27.  —  2.  united,  keeping  together 
D  1.4  ;  J  IV. 347  ;  Pug  57.  —  3.  consistent,  sensible,  to  the 
point  D  1.8;  A  11.138;  IV. 196;  S  111.12  ;  Dh  19  (at  DhA 
1.157  expl"*  as  a  name  for  the  Tipitaka,  thus  equalling 
Sk.  saghita);  Pug  42.  —  4.  close  together,  thick  Th  2, 
254.  —  aranisahita  (nt.)  firewood  and  appurtenances 
Vin  n.217;  D  11.340  sq. ;  J  1.2 12;  DhA  11.246.  —  sahi- 
tagvata  (adj.)  having  a  consistent  or  perpetual  vow, 
i.e.  living  the  holy  life  J  v. 320  (  =  silacara-sampanna 
C);  VI. 525  (T.  sahitabbata;  C.  expl«  as  samadinna-vata 
gahita-tapasa-vesa).  Kern,  Toev.  11. 51  takes  it  as  a 
corrupted  Sk.  ^agsita-vrata. 

Sahitar  [n.  ag.  fr.  sahati]  one  who  endures  Sn  42. 

Sahiranna  (adj.)  [sa-l-hirailna]  possessing  gold  Sn  102. 

Saheta  (adj.)  [sa-l-hetu]  having  a  cause,  together  with  the 
cause  Vin  1.2  ;  D  1.180;  DA  1.263.     See  hetu. 

Sahetuka  having  a  cause,  accompanied  by  a  cause  (especially 
of  good  or  bad  karma)  A  1.82  ;  Dhs  1073. 

SahO^ha  see  under  saha'. 

Saka  (nt.)  [Epic  Sk.  saka]  i.  vegetable,  potherb  D  1.166; 
M  1.78,  156;  A  1. 241,  295;  11.206;  Pug  55;  Vism  70; 
Vv  3333  ;  J  III. 225;  rv.445;  V.103.  — 2.  (m.)  name  of  a 


Sakaccha 


i6i 


Sata 


tree  (Tectona  grandis)  D  1.92  ;  DA  1.259 ;  Vism  250.   | 
°-vatthu  ground  for  cultivation  of  vegetables  J  iv.446 ; 
saka-pannavanna  "  like  the  colour  of  vegetable  leaf  " 
(said  of  teeth)  J  v.206  (op.  203). 

Sakaccha  (f.)  conversation,  talking  over,  discussing 
D  1. 103;  II. 109;  M  1.72;  S  1.79;  A  11.140,  187  sq. ; 
iii.Si  ;  Sn  266;  Miln  19,  24;  DhA  1.90  ("ar)  karoti) ; 
J  VI.4I4. 

Sakaccheti  [Denom.  fr.  sakaccha]  to  converse  with,  talk 
over  with,  discuss  D  11.237  (+ sallapati) ;   ppr.   sakac- 
chanto  Vin  1.169  ;  fut.  sakacchissanti  Vin  11.75  ;  in. 159  ; 
grd.  sakacchatabba  Vin  v.  123,  196  ;  ppr.  raed.  sakaccha 
yamana  A  11. 189. 

Sakatika  [fr.  sakata']  a  carter  S  1.57  ;  Th  2,  443  (ThA  271  = 
senaka);  J  111.104;  Miln  66,  164. 

Sakalya  (nt.)  [fr.  sakala]  totality  ;  KhA  187  {opp.  vekalya) ; 
sakalya  A  1.94  is  misprint  for  sakhalya. 

Sakara  (adj.)  [sa'+  akara]  with  its  characteristics  D  1.13  ; 
III.  II I  ;  M  1.35  ;  Pug  60  ;  Vism  423  (+  sa-uddesa). 

Sakatika  [fr.  sakuija]  a  fowler  S  11.256  ;  A  111.303  ;  Pug  56 ; 
J  1.20S.  Comb''  with  miga-bandhaka  &  maccha- 
ghataka  at  SnA  289  ;  with  magavika  A  maccha-ghataka 
at  Pug  56. 

Saknntika  [fr.  sakunta]  a  fowler,  bird-catcher  A  11.207  ; 
Th  2,  299  ;  ThA  227  ;  DA  1.162. 

Sakkharappabheda  [sa'-l-  akkhara+  pabheda]  together  with 
the  distinction  of  letters,  with  the  phonology  D  1.88; 
A  1.163;  Sn,  p.  loi  ;  Miln  10;  DA  1.247  (akkharappa- 
bhedo  ti  sikkha  ca  nirutti  ca). 

Sakhapura^asanthata  [fr.  sakhi+pura5ia°]  one  with  whom 
one  has  formerly  been  friendly  J  v. 448. 

Sakhalya  &  Sakhalla  (nt.)  [abstr.  from  sakhila]  friendship 
M  1.446  (  =  tameness);  A  1.94;  D  111.213;  Dhs  1343; 
DA  1.287;  DhsA  396;  J  IV. 57,  58  (  =  matthavacana 
"  smooth  words  "). 

Sakhavant  (adj.)  [sakha-l- vant]  having  branches  J  in. 493. 

Sakha  [V'edic  sakha,  cp.  also  sanku  stick,  &  Goth,  hoha 
plough]  a  branch  Vin  1.28;  M  1.135;  A  1.152  ;  11. 165, 
200  sq. ;  in.  19,  43  sq.,  200  ;  iv.99,  336  ;  v.3i4Sq.  ;  Sn  791  ; 
J  V.393  ;  J  n.44  ;  a  spur  of  a  hill  A  1.243  ;  11. 140  ;  Miln 
36;  also  sakha  (nt.)  Mhvs  i,  55  ;  J  1.52  ;  iv.350  ;  J  1.164 
(?  yava  aggasakha).  — -the  rib  of  a  parasol  Sn  688,  — 
adj.  sila-sakha-pasakha  whose  branches  and  boughs  are 
like  the  virtues  J  vi.324.     In  cpds.  sakha"  &  sakha°. 

-nagaraka  "little  town  in  the  branches,"  i.  e.  a 
suburb,  a  small  town  D  11. 146;  J  i  391  -patta-palasa 
branches  and  foliage  A  in. 44 ;  -patta-phal'upeta  with 
branches,  leaves  &  fruit  A  in. 43.  -palasa  id.  M  1.488; 
A  11.200.  -bhanga  faggots  J  1.158  ;  in. 407  ;  DhA  11.204  ; 
in. 375.  -miga  a  monkey  J  n.73  ;  -ssita  living  upon 
branches  (i.  e.  monkey)  J  v.233. 

Sagatag  (indecl.)  [su-l-  agata,  orij.  nt.  =  wel-come]  "greeting 
of  welcome,"  hail!  D  i.i7g  =  Mi.48i  (sagatag  bhante 
Bhagavato) ;  D  11. 173;  M  1.514  (°ar)  bhoto  Anandassa) ; 
DA  1.287;  DhA  III. 293, 

Sagara  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  sagara]  the  ocean  D  1.89  ;  A  n.56,  140  ; 
ni.52  ;  v. 1 16  sq.  ;  Vin  1.246;  Sn  568;  PvA  29;  sagara- 
umi  a  wave  of  the  ocean,  a  flood  J  iv.165;  °-vari  the 
ocean  J  iv.165  ;  sagaranta  or  sagarapariyanta  bounded 
or  surrounded  by  the  ocean  (said  of  the  earth)  J  vi.203  ; 
"-kundala  the  same  J  in. 32  ;  vi.278. 

Sagara  (adj.)  [sa'+  agara]  living  in  a  house.  It  1 1 1  ;  sleep- 
ing under  the  same  roof  Vin  n.279. 


Sanga^a  (adj.)  [sa+ angaria]  full  of  lust,  impure  M  1.24 
(var.  read  sangana ;  this  is  also  the  reading  at  Sn  279, 
see  above). 

Sacakka  (nt.)  [sa  =  svan,  dog;  4- cakka ;  cp.  sopaka  & 
Suva]  name  of  a  science  ("  the  interpretation  of  omens 
to  be  drawn  from  dogs  ")  Miln  178. 

Sacariyaka  (adj.)  [sa»  +  acariya  +  ka]  together  with  one's 
teacher  D  1.102. 

Saciyoga  [aaci+yoga;  cp.  Sk.  saci  crooked]  crooked  ways, 
insincerity  D  1.5;  in.  176;  M  1.180;  A  11.209;  v.206; 
Pug  58  ;  DA  1.80. 

Sajlva  (nt.)  rule  of  life,  precept  governing  the  monastic 
life  of  the  Buddhist  bhikkhus  Vin  in. 24'*;  adj.  "-sama- 
panna  ibid. ;  adj.  °-kara  one  who  supports  J  iv.42 
(  =  sa-ajivakara,  C). 

Sata  [cp.  Sk.  sata]  a  garment,  cloth  Th  2,  245  ;  sati  (f)  the 
same  S  1.115  ;  Dh  394  ;  J  1.230  (udaka°  bathing  mantle), 
481. 

Sataka  [sata  +  ka]  an  outer  garment,  cloak;  cloth  ThA 
246;  J  1.89,  138,  195,  373,  426;  Vism  54  (sana°),  275 
(alia");  DhA  1.393  (thula°).     Cp.  antara",  alag°. 

-lakkhina  prognostication  drawn  from  pieces  of  cloth 

J  I-37I- 
Satika  (f.)  =  sataka  Vin  1.292  sq.  ;  n.31  ;  272,  279  (udaka" 
bathing  mantle)  J  1.330  ;  Vism  339  (in  simile) ;  Miln  240 
(cp.  M  111.253).     satiya  the  same  Vin  11.177  ("gahapaka 
receiver  of  undergarments). 

Satetar  [n.  ag.  fr.  sateti]  one  who  dispels,  drives  away 
M  1.220 ;  A  V.347  sq.,  351,  359. 

Sateti  [sat  to  cut,  destroy]  to  cut  open,  to  destroy  ;  fig.  to 
torment:  Kern's  proposed  reading  (see  Toev.  s.  v. 
saveti)  for  saveti  at  J  in.  198  (amba-pakkani) ;  iv.402 
(attanao  satetva  dasakammao  karissani) ;  vi.486 
(kayar)  s.).  He  compares  MVastu  in. 385 :  sateti 
gatrani.     Cp.  visatita  &  visata. 

Satheyya  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  satha='^athya]  craft,  treachery 
M  1. 15.  36,  281,  340 ;  A  1.95,  100 ;  Nd'  395  ;  Pug  19,  23  ; 
Miln  289.     Cp   pati°. 

Safla'  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  Sana  hempen,  fr.  sana  =  P.  sana ;  cp. 
bhanga>]  hemp  D  11.350;  Miln  267;  a  coarse  hempen 
cloth  Vin  1.58  ;  D  1.166  ;  in. 41  ;  M  1.78  ;  A  1.240  ;  S  11.202, 
221  ;  Pug  55  ;  Vism  54  (°sataka).  —  sanavaka  the  same 
Th  2,  252  ;  J  in. 394  (var.  read). 

Sava*  [sa  +  ina]  having  a  debt,  indebted,  fig.  subjected  to 
the  kilesas,  imperfect  M  in.i27  =  S  11. 221  (  =  sakilesa, 
sa-ina  K.S.  n.203) ;  ThA  8  ;  cp.  anana  under  ana. 

Savadhovana  (nt.)  a  kind  of  play  DA  i.84  =  saijadhovika. 

Savika  (f.)  [fr.  saiji]  a  curtain  J  in. 462. 

Sa^ll  (f.)  [fr.  saua]  hemp-cloth  D  11.350;  Vin  in. 17;  a 
screen,  curtain,  tent  J  1.58,  148  sq.,  178,  419;  DhA 
I  194-  11.49.  "-pakara  a  screen-wall  Vin  iv.269,  279; 
J  11.88;  DhA  11.68,  71,  186;  VvA  173;  PvA  283; 
Mhvs  7,  27;  saijipasibbaka  a  sack  or  bag  of  hemp- 
cloth  Vin  111.171°.  — patta-sani  a  screen  of  fine  cloth 
J  I-395- 

Sata  (adj.)  [cp.  'Sk.  ^ata]  pleasant,  agreeable  It  114; 
Nett  27.  Often  comb''  with  piya,  e.  g.  it  114;  Vbh  103  ; 
DA  1. 31 1.  — Opp.  katuka.  —  site  (nt.)  pleasure,  joy 
M  I  508  ;  A  1.81  sq.  ;  S  n.220  ;  J  1.410  ;  Dh  341  (''sita  = 
sata-nissita  DhA  iv.49) ;  Sn  867  sq.  ;  Nd»  30  (three,  of 
bhava);  Pv  ii.ii';  iv.5«  (  +  sukha);  Dhs  3.  asata  dis- 
agreeable, unpleasant  Dhs  1343  ;  J  1.4I";  J  i  2^8  :  n.105; 
Sn  867  sq.  ;  satabhakkha  Pug  55,  read  hatabhakkha. 


Sataka 


162 


Sadheti 


-odaka  with  pleasant  water  D  11. 129;  M  1.76;  Vin 
III.  108.  -kumbha  gold  VvA  13.  See  also  v.  1.  under 
ha^aka.  -putta  a  noble  son  J  vi.238  (  =  amacca-putta 
C). 

Sataka  name  of  a  kind  of  bird  J  vi.539  (kotthapokkhara-", 
■cp.  540);  SnA  359  (id.). 

Satacca  (nt.)  [fr.  satata]  perseverance  M  i.roi  ;  S  11. 132  ; 
A  III. 249  sq.  ;  IV. 460  sq.  ;  v. 17  sq. ;  Th  i,  585  ;  Vism  4  ; 
VbhA  346.  °-karin  persevering  S  111.268,  271,  277  sq.  ; 
Dh  293  ;  "-kiriyata  persevering  performance  Dhs  1367. 

Satatag  (adv.)  [fr.  satata]  continually  S  1.17  =  57. 

Satata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  sata]  happiness  S  1. 17. 

Satatika  (adj.)  [fr.  last]  persevering  Dh  23;  S  11.232; 
It  74  ;  DhA  1.230. 

Satatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  sata]  tastiness,  sweetness  A  1.32. 

Satava  (nt.)  sweet  result  (of  good  words)  (kalyanakamma. 
Com.)  J  VI. 235,  237.  Is  it  misspelling  f or  sadhava  (fr. 
sadhu)  ?■ 

Satiya  (adj.)  [fr.  sata]  pleasant  Sn  853. 

Satireka  (adj.)  [sa  +  atireka,  cp.  BSk.  satirikta  Divy  27] 
having  something  in  excess  D  11.93. 

S&tisara  (adj.)  [sa  +  atisara]  trespassing  Vin  1.55. 

Sattha  [sa'  +  attha]  with  the  meaning,  in  spirit  D  1.62  ; 
11.48  ;  It  79,  II I  ;  Sn  p.  100  ;  Vin  1.2 1  ;  DA  1. 1 76  ;  Vism 
214. 

Satthaka  (adj.)  [sa  +  atthaka]  (fem.  -ika)  useful  PvA  12.  - 

Sathalika  (adj.)  [irath,  cp.  safhila  &  sithila]  lethargic,  lax 
M  1. 14,  200  sq.  ;  III. 6 ;  A  1.71  ;  11. 148 ;  1:1.108,  179  sq. 

Satra-yaga  identical  with  sammapasa  (Sn  303)  SnA  322 
(?  conjecture  yatra°). 

Sadana  (nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  sadana,  fr.  sad]  place,  house  J 
IV. 405 ;  Yama-sadanar)  sampatto  come  to  Yama's 
abode :  dead  J  iv.405 ;  v.267,  304  ;  vi.457,  505  (do.,  the 
MSS.  always  read  °-sadhana). 

Sadara  (adj.)  [sa  +  adara]  reverential  Mhvs  5,  239  ;  15,  2  ; 
28,  25  ;  33,  82  ;  sadariya  (nt.)  and  sadariyata  (f.)  showing 
regard  and  consideration  Pug  24  ;  cp.  Dhs  1327. 

Sadana  (adj.)  [sa+  adana]  attached  to  the  world,  passionate 
Dh  406  =  Sn  630;  DhA  iv.180. 

Saditar  [n.  ag.  fr.  sadiyati]  one  who  accepts,  appropriates 
M  III.  126. 

Sadiyati  [cp.  BSk.  svadiyati:  MVastu  11. 145;  Med. -Pass 
fr.  *sadeti,  Caus.  of  svad]  lit.  to  enjoy  for  oneself,  to 
agree  to,  permit,  let  take  place  D  1.166;  Vin  11.294; 
A  IV. 54,  347  ;  S  1.78  ;  iv.226  sq.  ;  Pug  55  ;  Miln  95  sq.  ; 
aor.  sadiyi  Vin  in. 38  sq.  ;  fut.  sadiyissati  J  vi.158. 

Sadiyan&  (f)  [fr.  sadiyati]  appropriating,  accepting  Miln  95. 

S&disa  [fr.  sadisa]  (fem.  -si)  like,  similar  D  11.239  ;  Sn  595  ; 
Th  2,  252  (so  far  sa°) ;  Ap  239  ;  J  iv.97  ;  Miln  217  (with 
instr.). 

Sada  (adj.)  [Vedic  svadu,  f.  svadvi ;  fr.  svad,  cp.  Gr.  t'lSvg, 
Lat.  suavis,  Goth.  suts  =  E.  sweet ;  also  Sk.  suda  cook ; 
Or.  ijloftai  to  enjoy,  tiSoi'i]  pleasure]  sweet,  nice,  pleasant 
Vin  II. 196  ;  M  i.i  14  ;  Th  2,  273  ;  Sn  102  ;  J  iv.i68  ;  v. 5  ; 
Dhs  629;  asadu  (ka)  J  in. 145  ;  iv.509  (text,  asadhuka, 
com.  on  katuka) ;  sadu-karoti  makes  sweet  J  in. 319  ;  Pot. 
a-sadu-kiyira  makes  bitter,  ibid.  319  ;  sadu  sweet  things 
Vin  II.  196;  sadu-pbala  see  sadhuphala ;  for  °kamyata 
see  the  latter. 


Saduta  (f.)  [fr.  sadu]  sweetness  Davs  1.40. 

Sadeti^  [Caus.  of  sad:  see  sidati]  to  cause  to  sink,  to  throw 
down  DhA  1.75  (  +  vinaseti;  v.  1.  pateti). 

Sadeti'  [Caus.  of  svad;  given  as  root  in  meaning  "  assa- 
dane  "  at  Dhtp  147]  to  enjoy:  see  ucchadeti  (where 
better  referred  to  svad)  and  chadeti^. 

Sadhaka  (adj.)  [fr.  sadh]  accomplishing,  effecting  J  1.86; 
SnA  394,  415  ;  Sdhp  161  ;  ina°  debt -collector  Miln  365; 
ball"  tax-collector  J  iv.366 ;  v. 103,  105,  106. 

Sadhakata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  sadhaka]  effectiveness,  efficiency 
Sdhp  329. 

Sadhana  (adj.-nt.)  [fr.  sadh]  i.  enforcing,  proving  J  1.307; 
DA  1. 105.  —  2.  settling,  clearing  (a  debt)  J  11.341 
(uddhara°).  In  this  meaning  mixed  with  sodheti;  it  is 
impossible  to  decide  which  of  the  two  is  to  be  preferred. 
See  ina  &  uddhara.  — -  3.  yielding,  effecting,  producing, 
resulting  in  (-°)  A  in.  156  (Iaijda°  dung-producing); 
DA  1.273;  VvA  194;  PvA  278  (hita°).  —  4.  materials, 
instrument  VvA  349;  PvA  199. 

Sadhara^a  (adj.)  general,  common,  joint  Vin  11.258  ;  in. 35  ; 
Th  2,  505  ;  J  1.202,  302  ;  IV.7  (parica°-bhava  5  fold  con- 
nection);  Nett  49  sq. ;  PvA  122,  194,  265.  a°  J  1.78; 
DA  1.71. 

Sadhika  (adj.)  [sa4-adhika;  cp.  BSk.  sadhika  Divy  44] 
having  something  beyond  D  n.93 ;  Vv  53''  ("visati). 
"-porisa  exceeding  a  man's  height  M  1.74,  365  ;  A  111.403. 

Sadhiya  (adj.)  [fr.  sadh]  that  which  can  be  accomplished 
Sdhp  258  etc. 

Sadhu  (adj.)  [Vedic  sadhu,  fr.  sadh]  i.  good,  virtuous, 
pious  Sn  376,  393;  J.  I.I  ;  Mhvs  37,  119;  PvA  lib,  132; 
asadhu  bad,  wicked  Dh  163,  223;  DhA  in. 313.  —  2. 
good,  profitable,  proficient,  meritorious  Dh  35,  206 
(  =  sundara,  bhaddaka  DhA  ni.271);  D  1.88;  Pv  11.9' ; 
nt.  adv.  well,  thoroughly  Dh  67;  J  i.i  ;  Mhvs  36,  97; 
37.  73-  Very  frequent  as  interjection,  denoting  {a) 
request  (adhortative,  with  imper.  ;  sadhu  gaccha  please 
go  I  Miln  18  ;  gacchatha  VvA  305),  to  be  translated  with 
"  come  on,  welcome,  please,"  or  similar  adverbs.  Thus 
e.  g.  at  Pv  IV. I*"  (=ayacane  PvA  232);  J  1.92  ;  PvA  6, 
35,  272  ;  VvA  69  ;  — ■  (6)  assent  &  approval  in  replies  to 
a  question  "  alright,  yes  "  or  similarly ;  usually  with  the 
verbs  (in  ger.)  patisunitva,  vatva,  sampaticchitva  etc. 
Thus  e.  g.  at  J  v.297 ;  Vin  1.56;  Miln  7;  DhA  ni.13; 
VvA  149  ;  DA  1.171  ;  SnA  176  (  =  sampahar)sane)  ;  PvA 
55,  78  and  passim. 

-Kamyata  desire  for  proficiency  VbhA  477.  -kara 
saying  "well,"  approval,  cheering,  applause  J  1.223; 
Miln  13,  16,  i8  ;  VvA  132  ;  DhA  1.390  ;  in. 385.  -kilana 
a  festive  play,  a  sacred  festivity  Mhvs  3,  1 1  ;  sadhukilita 
the  same  Mhvs  20,  36  ;  °-divasa  Vin  in. 285  ;  sadhu-kila 
J  III. 434  ;  v. 127;  sadhu-kilika  J  in. 433.  -jivin  leading 
a  virtuous  life  It  71.  -phala  having  wholesome  fruits 
J  1.272  (read  sadu°).  -riipa  good,  respectable  Dh  262. 
-sammata  highly  honoured  D  1.48  ;  S  iv.3g8  ;  Sn  p.  90 
sq. ;  Miln  4,  21;  DA  1143.  -siliya  good  character 
J  "IB?- 

Sadhakag  (adv.)  [fr.  sadhu]  well,  thoroughly  Vin  1.46; 
n.208 ;  D  1.62.  —  instr.  sadhukena  (as  adv.)  willingly 
(opp.  with  force)  Pv  11. 9'. 

Sadheti  [Caus.  of  sadh  to  succeed.  Dhtp  42i  =  sagsid- 
dhiyan]  i.  to  accomplish,  further,  effect  J  11.236  (Pot. 
sadhayemase).  —  2.  to  make  prosperous  PvA  113,  125. 
—  3.  to  arrange,  prepare  Mhvs  7,  24.  —  4.  to  perform, 
execute  J  1.38  (aramika-kiccai)) ;  DA  1. 194  ;  Mhvs  36,  62  ; 
Vism  344  (see  udukkhala).  —  5.  to  make  clear,  bring  to 
a  (logical)  conclusion,  to  prove  J  11.306 ;  SnA  192  (at- 
thai)),  459  ;  Tikp  58  ;  PvA  30  (here  as  much  as  "  is  any 


Sanu 


163 


Sami 


good  ").  —  6.  to  collect  or  clear  a  debt,  to  recover 
(money).  In  this  sense  sadheti  is  mixed  up  with 
sodheti,  which  is  regularly  found  as  v.  1,,  is  it  almost 
better  to  substitute  sodheti  at  all  passages  for  sadheti 
(cp.  ina,  uddhara),  e.  g.  J  1.230;  n.341.  423;  111.106; 
IV.45  ;  DhA  in.  12.  —  Cp.  abhi°. 

Sana  (m.  and  nt.)  [Vedic  sanu]  ridge  Vv  32";  J  111.172. 
The  commentary  on  the  former  passage  (VvA  136), 
translates  vana  wood,  that  on  the  latter  parjsupabbata  ; 
sanupabbata  a  forest-hill  J  iv.277;  vi.4i5,  540;  pabba- 
tasanu-"  J  in. 175;  girisanu-°  J  in. 301  ;  iv.195. 

Sanacara  (adj.)  [sa' +  anucara]  together  with  followers 
Dh  294  ;  J  VI. 172. 

Sannvajja  (adj.)  [sa+anuvajja]  blameable  A  11. 3. 

Sanaseti  [sa  (  =  sai))-(-anuseti]  to  fill  (the  mind)  completely 
A  II. 10. 

Sapa  [fr.  sap,  cp.  Sk.  ^apa]  a  curse  VvA  336 ;  DhA  1.4 1. 

Sapateyya  (nt.)  [sa  (=guija  of  sva)  +  pateyya  (abstr.  fr. 
pati  lord),  cp.  adhi-pateyya]  property,  wealth  D  1.142  ; 
11.180;  111.190;  Vin  1.72,  274;  in.66 ;  J  1.439,  466; 
Th  2,  340;  ThA  240;  J  v. 117  (sapateya,  var.  read, 
sapatiyya) ;  DhA  1.67. 

Sapattika  (adj.)  [sa' +  apatti  +  ka]  one  who  has  committed 
a  sin  (see  apatti)  Vin  1.125  ;  n.240  ;  Nd'  102. 

Sapada  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  5vapada]  a  beast  of  prey  J  11. 126; 
vi.79. 

Sapadesa  (adj.)  [sa  +  apadesa]  with  reasons  D  1.4  ;  A  n.22  ; 
M  i.iSo  :  III. 34,  49  ;  Pug  58 ;  DA  1.76.     Opp.  anapadesa 

M  1.287. 


Sapanado^I  M  11.183  = 
dog's  trough). 


:  152  (C.  =  sunakhanar)  pivanado^i  a 

Sapekha  [sa+apekha]  longing  for  D  n.77;  in. 43. 

Sama^  [cp.  Vedic  syama  black  &  syava  brown  ;  Av.  syava  ; 
Ags.  haeven  blue  (=E.  heaven);  Gr.  rT«roiof,  axta 
(shadow)  =  Sk.  chaya ;  Goth,  skeinan  =  shine,  etc.] 
I.  black,  dark  (something  like  deep  brown)  Vin  iv.120 
(kalasama  dark  blue  [?])  ;  D  1.193;  M  1.246  (different 
from  kala) ;  J  vi.187  (°ar)  mukhar)  dark,  i.  e.  on  account 
of  bad  spirits) ;  Vism  422  (opp.  to  odata  in  colour  of 
skin).  —  2.  yellow,  of  a  golden  colour,  beautiful  J  11.44. 
45  (migi) ;  V.2I5  (suvanna-sama),  366  (suvartpa-vanna). 
—  f.  sama,  q.  v.  • —  See  sabala. 

Sama'  (nt.)  [perhaps  =  Vedic  saman]  song,  sacred  song, 
devotion,  worship,  propitiation  D  11.288. 

Sama^  [on  etymology,  see  Andersen  Pali  Gloss.,  p.  268 
(contracted  from  sayamai),  Trenckner),  cp.  Michelson, 
Indog.  Forsch..  vol.  xxiii,  p.  235,  n.  3  (=avest.,  hamo ; 
Slav.,  samz)]  self,  of  oneself  Vin  1.16,  33,  211  (s.  paka) ; 
IV.I2I  ;  D  1.165;  M  1.383;  11.211;  111.253  (samai) 
kantai)  samai)  vayitai)  dussayugar)) ;  S  11.40  ;  iv.230  sq. ; 
V.390  ;  Sn  2  70  (asama-paka  not  cooking  for  oneself),  889  ; 
J  1.150;  samafifieva,  i.  e.  samag  yeva  Sn  p.  loi. 

Samaggiya  (nt.)  [fr.  samagga]  completeness,  concord  Sn 
810;  samaggiya-rasa  J  111.21  ("the  sweets  of  con- 
cord"); adj.  asamaggiya,  unpleasant  J  vi.517  (C.  on 
asammodiya). 

Samaggl  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  samagga]  completeness,  a  quorum 
Vin  1.105,  106;  meeting,  communion  Vin  1.132  sq. ; 
11.243;  unanimity,  concord  Vin  1.97,  136,  357;  11.204; 
D  in.245  sq.  ;  A  in.289 ;  Nd»  131  ;  J  1.328  ;  It  12. 

Samacca  (adj.)  [sa* -l- araacca]  together  with  the  ministers 
D  i.iio. 


Saman&a*  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  samana]  generality ;  equality, 
conformity;  unity,  company  Miln  163;  SnA  449  (jati° 
identity  of  descent).  449  (generality,  contrasted  to 
visesa  detail),  548  (id.) ;  VvA  233  (ditthi°,  sila°,  equality). 
°-gata  united  D  11,80  ;  °-nama  a  name  given  by  general 
assent  DhsA  390. 

Samanfia*  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  samara]  Samaijaship  D  1.5 1  sq.  ; 
III. 72,  245;  M  1.281  sq.  ;  S  v.25  ;  A  11.27=  It  103;  Dh 
19  sq.,  311  ;  DA  1. 158;  Vism  132;  adj.,  in  accordance 
with  true  Samanaship.  striving  to  be  a  samana  Miln  18  ; 
Samanaship  A  1.142  sq.  ;  Pv  11. 7"  (expl""  at  PvA  104  as 
"  honouring  the  samanas  "). 

-attha  the  aim  of  Samanaship  D  1.230;  A  iv.366  ; 
M  1.271  ;  S  II. 15;  111.93 ;  J  1.482;  -phala  advantage 
resulting  from  Samanaship,  fruit  of  the  life  of  the  re- 
cluse D  1. 51  sq.  ;  Vism  215,  512  ;  VvA  71  ;  VbhA  317 ; 
more  especially  the  fruition  of  the  four  stages  of  the 
Path,  sotapatti-,  sakadagami-,  anagami-,  and  arahatta- 
phala  S  v.25;  D  in. 227,  277;  Dhs  1016;  DhsA  423; 
Miln  344,  358  ;  DA  1.158  ;  three  samannaphalas  Kvu  112. 

Samannata' =  samaiina^  (identity,  congruity  etc.)  J  vi.371 
(vanna°) ;  Vism  234  (marana°). 

Sainannata'  =  samanna'   D    111.145,    169;    Dh    332;    DhA 

III. 484;   IV. 33. 


(adj .)  [fr.  samana]  worthy  of  or  needful  for  a 
Samana  Mhvs  4,  26;  30,  37;  assamaijaka  unworthy  of 
a  Samaija  Vin  1.45. 

SaIna^era  [fr.  samana;  cp.  BSk.  ^ramaneraka  Divy  342] 
fem.  °-rI  a  novice  Vin  1.62  sq.  ;  iv.121  ;  S  11. 261  ;  Miln  2  ; 
VbhA  383  ;  are  not  present  at  the  recital  of  the  Pati- 
mokkha  Vin  1.135;  ^pabbajja  ordination  of  a  novice 
Vin  1.82.  "pesaka  superintendent  of  Samaneras  Vin 
11.177;  A  in. 275. —  f.,  also  -°a  A  111.276;  as  -°i  at  Vin 
1.141. 

Samattha  (adj.)  [  =  samattha]  able  J  11.29. 

Samatthiya  [abstr.  fr.  samattha]  (nt.)  ability  Mhvs  37,  243 

Samanta  (adj.)  [fr.  samanta]  neighbouring,  bordering 
D  i.ioi  ;  Vin  1.46  (apatti"  bordering  on  a  transgression) ; 
J  II. 21;  IV. 124  ;  connected  with  M  1.95;  °jappa  (or 
°jappana)  roundabout  talk  Vbh  353  ;  Vism  28  ;  Nd'  226  ; 
VbhA  484.  abl.  samjinta  in  the  neighbourhood  of 
Vin  ni.36 ;  D  n.339  ;  loc.  samante  the  same  J  iv.152 
(Kapila-vatthu-°). 

Samayika  (aJj.)  [fr.  samaya]  temporary  Sn  54;  Miln  302 
(so  read) ;  see  samayika. 

SamalatI  (f.)  [sama' +  lata;  Sk.  ^yamaJata]  the  creeper 
Ichnocarpus  J  1.60. 

Sama  (f )  [Sk.  ^jarna  Halayudha  2,  38 ;  see  sama',  sima- 
lata,  and  samaka]  a  medicinal  plant  J  rv.92  (bhisa- 
sama,  C.  bhisani  ca  samaka  ca) ;  the  Priyangu  creeper 
J  1.500  ;  V.405. 

Samaka  [cp.  Vedic  Syamaka]  a  kind  of  millet  (Panicum 
frumentaceum)  D  1.166;  M  1.78,  156,  343;  A  1.295; 
11.206;  Sn  239;  Pug  55;  J  111.144,  371;  Nett  141; 
DhA   'V.81. 

Samajika  [(r.  Sk.  samaja:  sec  samajja]  a  member  of  an 
assembly  Davs  in.27. 

Samadhika  (adj . )  [fr.  samadhi]  consisting  in  concentration 
S  1.120. 

Samamigl  (f.)  a  black  hind  J  11.44. 

Samayika  (adj.)  [fr.  samaya]  i.  on  a  friendly  footing,  in 
agreement  M  in. no;  Miln  22.  —  2.  occurring  in  due 
season,  timely  Miln  302  sq.,  305.  —  3.  temporary 
A  in. 349  sq.  ;  cp.  samayika. 

Sami  J  V.489,  read  s^vi. 


Samika 


164 


Sarathi 


Samika  [fr-  samin]  i.  owner  M  1.27;  J  1.194;  Vism  63. — 
2.  husband  Vin  111.137;  J  1.307;  n.128;  A  11.58  sq. ; 
Pv  11.37. 

Samin  [cp.  Sk.  svamin,  fr.  sva  =  sa*]  i.  owner,  ruler,  lord, 
master  Vin  1.303,  307;  Sn  83;  Mhvs  37,  241  ;  J  v. 253 
(°paribhoga,  q.  v.);  Pv  iv.6* ;  Vism  63;  DA  1.261  ; 
PvA  43,  65.  voc.  sami  "  Sir  "  J  vi.300 ;  DhA  1.20. 
f.  samini  J  v.297  ;  VvA  225.  See  also  suramin.  —  assa- 
min  not  ruling  Miln  253  ;  Pv  rv.6'.  — 2.  husband  PvA 
31  (sami,  voc.  =  "my  lord"),  82.  —  f.  samini  wife 
Mhvs  5,  43  ;  PvA  82,  276. 

-vacana  (sami°)  the  genitive  case  J  1.185;  111.98 
(upayog'atthe) ;  v. 42  (karan'atthe).  444 ;  VvA  304 ; 
SnA  210  (for  upayoga),  310  (id.). 

Samiya  husband  J  1.352  ;  see  samika. 

Samisa  (adj.)  [sa+amisa]  i.  holding  food  Vin  11.214= 
IV.  198.  —  2.  fleshly,  carnal  D  11.298  =  M  1.59;  A  1.81  ; 
Ps  II. 41.     Opp.  to  niramisa  spiritual  (e.  g.  Ps  1.59). 

Samici  &  samici°  (f)  [fr.  samma2  =  Vedic  samyac,  of  which 
pi.  nom.  f.  samicih  freq.  in  R.  V.]  right,  proper  course 
Vin  III. 246  ;  D  11.104  ;  A  11.56,  65  ;  S  v.261,  343  ;  Miln  8  ; 
DhA  1.57. 

-kamma  proper  act,  homage  Vin  11.22,  162,  255;  A 
1.123  ;  II. 180  ;  D  III. 83  ;  J  1.218,  219  ;  Miln  8.  -patipada 
right  course  of  life  M  1.281  ;  A  11.65.  -patipanna 
correct  in  life  D  11.104;  S  1.220;  A  11.56;  iv.310. 

Samokkagsika  (adj.)  [fr.  samukkagsati,  cp.  ukkagsaka. 
The  BSk.  is  samutkarsiki  dharmadeSana  Divy  61 7]  exalt- 
ing, praising  (i.  e.  the  4  truths),  as  much  as  "  standard." 
Kern,  Toev.  11.64,  takes  it  to  mean  "  condensed,  given 
in  brief."  Usually  in  phrase  °ika  dhammadesana  (thus 
as  f.  of  °aka!)e.  g.  Vin  1.16,  18  ;  11.156  ;  D  i.i  10  ;  M  1.380  ; 
A  IV. 186;  V.194;  DA  1.277  (expl"!);  ThA  137;  PvA  38. 
195  ;  VvA  50.     Only  once  with  fiana  at  DhsA  9. 

Samudda  (nt.)  [fr.  samudda]  sea  salt  Vin  1.202  ;  Abhp  461. 

Samuddika  (adj.)  [fr.  samudda]  seafaring  D  1.222  ;  S  111.155  ; 
A  III. 368  (vanija) ;  iv.uy  (nava) ;  Vism  63;  DhsA  320. 
At  J  VI. 581  s.-mahasankha  denotes  a  kind  of  trumpet. 

Sameti  see  sammati^, 

Saya  [cp.  Sk.  sayar).  on  which  Aufrecht,  Halayudha  p.  380, 
remarks  :  "  this  word  seems  to  be  the  gerund  of  sa,  and 
to  have  signified  originally  '  having  finished."  A  masc. 
saya  does  not  exist."  Cp.  Vedic  °saya]  evening,  only 
adverbially  sayag,  at  night  Vin  in. 147;  J  11.83;  DhA 
1.234;  usually  opposed  to  pato  (patag)  in  the  morning, 
early  e.  g.  saya-patag  D  Ii.i88  ;  Miln  419  ;  J  1.432,  460  ; 
V.462  ;  sayag-patag  Vin  11. 185;  DhA  11.66;  sayari  ca 
pato  ca  Pv  1.6'  ;  11. 9"  ;  PvA  127  ;  saya-tatiyaka  for  the 
third  time  in  the  evening  D  1. 167  ;  A  11.206  ;  v. 263,  266, 
268;  M  1.343;  sayamasa  supper  J  1.297;  v.461  ;  DhA 
1.204.  sayag  as  quasi-nominative  :  sayag  ahosi  J  vi.505  ; 
atisayag  too  late  Th  i,  231  ;  J  11.362  ;  v.g4 ;  sayatarag 
later  in  the  evening  (compar.)  J  vi.366. 

Sayanha  [sayag -1- anha.  cp.  Sk.  sayahna]  evening  D  11.9  ; 
J  I  i<(4;  -°samayag  at  evening  time  D  11.205;  M  1.147; 
Vin  1. 21;  sayanhasamaye  J  1.148,  279;  PvA  33,  43, 
100;  °-kale  the  same  J  iv.120;  sayanhe  (loc.)  J  1.144, 
237  ;  atisayanha  late  evening  J  vi.540. 

Sayati  [svad,  Sk.  svadate,  cp.  sadiyati]  to  taste,  eat ; 
pres.  sayati  Vin  11.121;  ppr.  sayanto  D  111.85 ;  grd. 
sayaniya  savoury  Vin  1.4-4;  S  1.162  ;  ger.  sayitva  S 
IV.  1 76;  A  III.  163.     Cp.  sagsayati. 

S&yana'  (nt.)  [fr.  sayati]  tasting,  taste  Dhtp  229. 

Sayana^  the  Naga  tree  (cp.  naga  3)  J  vi.535  (varana  sa 
yana  =  nagarukkha,  C,  ibid.  535,  var.  read,  vayana). 
Kern,  Toev.  11.77  conjectures  sasana  "  with  Asana's 
Terminal  ia's." 


Sayika  (adj.)  [fr.  si]  Iving,  sleeping,  resting  in  (-°)  Dh  141  ; 
M  1.328  (vatthu") ;  Th  i.  5oi  =  Miln  367. 

Sayita  [pp.  of  sayati,  cp.  saditar]  (having)  tasted,  tasting 
D  1.70  ;  11.95,  292  ;  M  1. 188,  461  ;  Miln  378;  Vism  258 
(khayita+  ). 

Sayin  (adj.)  [fr.  i\\  lying  Dh  325. 

Sara  [Vedic  sara  nt.]  i.  essential,  most  excellent,  strong 
A  II. 1 10  ;  Vin  iv.214  ;  J  in. 368  ;  Pug  53.  —  2.  (m.)  the 
innermost,  hardest  part  of  anything,  the  heart  or  pith 
of  a  tree  (see  also  pheggu)  M  i.iii;  J  1.331  ;  Miln 
413  ;  most  excellent  kind  of  wood  Vin  11. no  ;  D  11.182, 
187  ;  sattasara  the  elect,  the  salt  of  the  earth  M  in. 69.  — 
3.  substance,  essence,  choicest  part  (generally  at  the 
end  of  comp.)  Vin  1.184  ;  A  11.141  ;  S  111.83,  140  ;  Sn  5, 
330.  364;  Dh  II  sq. ;  PvA  132,  211  (candana°).  sare 
patitthito  established,  based,  on  what  is  essential 
M  1.31  ;  A  n.183.  —  4.  value  Miln  10  ;  appasara  of  small 
value  D  11.346.  —  asara  worthless  Sn  937 ;  nissara  the 
same  J  11. 163  ^pithless) ;  mahasara  of  high  value  J  1.384, 
463. 

-adayin  acquiring  what  is  essential  S  iv.250.  -gandha 
the  odour  of  the  heart  of  a  tree  Dhs  625.  -gabbha  a 
treasury  J  in. 408 ;  v. 331.  -gavesin  searching  for  hard 
wood  M  I.III,  233;  sarapariyesana  the  same  ibid. 
-daru  strong,  durable  wood  J  11.68.  -bhanda(ka)  a 
bundle  of  one's  best  things  J  11.225.  -bhiimi  good  soil 
J  II.  188.  -mailjiisa  a  box  made  of  choice  wood  J  iv.335. 
-maya  being  of  hard  or  solid  wood  J  111.318  (C.  saramk- 
khamaya.  "  of  sara  wood  "  trsV).  -suvanna  sterling 
gold  SnA  448  (in  expl"  of  name  Bimbisara).  -suci  a 
needle  made  of  hard  wood  J  1.9. 

Saraka'  (-°)  (adj.)  [fr.  sara]  having  as  most  es.sential  Miln 
133  ;  a-saraka  rotten  (said  of  wood)  J  11. 163. 

Saraka^  [fr.  sarati^]  a  messenger. 

Saraka^  in  the  comp.  kata-saraka  a  mat  J  iv.248  (v.  1.) ; 

IV. 474 ;  V.97  (cp.  osaraka), 

Sarakkhati=sagrakkhati  Th  i,  729. 

Sarakkha  (f.)  [fr.  sa'  +  rakklia]  "standing  under  protec- 
tion "  (?),  a  categorv  of  married  women  Vin  in. 139  (cp. 
M  1.287). 

Saiajja  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  sarada  =  *saradya]  timidity  A 
in. 127,  203;  IV.359,  364;  Miln  24,  72,  196  (parisa°,  cp. 
Nd^  470);  J  1.334;  11.66;  nissarajja  undaunted  J  1.274. 

Sarajjati  [sag  4- raj,  cp.  BSk.  sarajyati,  Sk.  sagrajyate,  cp. 
saraga]  to  be  pleased  with,  to  be  attached  to  A  1.260 ; 
S  II.  1 72  ;  in. 69  sq. ;  iv.io  sq. 

Sarajjana  (f.)  [fr.  sarajjati]  infatuation,  feeling  infatuated 
Dhs  389  ;  J  V.446. 

Sarajjayati  [Denom.  of  sarajja]  to  be  embarrassed,  per- 
plexed, ashamed  S  111.92  ;  A  iv.359. 

Sarajjitatta  (nt.)  [  =  sarajjana]  infatuation,  the  state  of 
being  infatuated  Dhs  389. 

Sarapa  (f.)  [fr.  sareti*]  reminding,  remonstrating  with 
Vin  V.  158,  164. 

Saratta  [=sagratta,  pp.  of  sarajjati]  impassioned,  en- 
amoured, passionately  devoted  Vin  in.  118;  M  11.160, 
223  ;  S  1.74,  77  ;  Dh  345  ;  J  1.288  ;  11.140  ;  Mhvs  10,  34 
("manaso).     asaratta  unattached  Sn  704. 

Sarathi  [fr.  sa-ratha ;  Vedic  sarathi]  charioteer,  coachman 
D  II.  1 78,  254;  S  1.33  ;  V.6  ;  A  11.112  ;  1V.190  sq. ;  Sn  83  ; 
J  1.59,  i8o  ;  Pv  rv.3'.  assadammasarathi  a  coach- 
man by  whom  horses  are  driven,  a  trainer  of  horses 
M  1.124;  ^  IV. 176;  purisadammasarathi  a  coachman  of 
the  driving  animal  called  man,  a  man-trainer  Vin  1.35 ; 


Sarada 


165 


Salin 


D  1.49 ;   Sn  p.   103  ;    It   79.  —  In   similes ;   Vistn  466 ; 
KhA  21. 

Sarada  (adj.)  [Vedic  sarada,  fr.  Sarad  autumn  (of  Babyl. 
origin  ?  cp.  Assyr.  sabatu  corn  month)]  autumnal,  of 
the  latest  harvest,  this  year's,  fresh  A  111.404  =  0  in. 354 
(bijani  fresh  seeds);  A  1.135,  181  (badara-pandu) ; 
S  in. .54  ;  V.380  ;  Miln  255  ;  Dh  149  (but  at  this  passage 
expliias  "  scattered  by  the  autumn  winds  "  DhA  iii.i  12). 
—  asarada  stale,  old  D  11.353  ;  S  v. 379.  Fig.  sarada  un- 
ripe, not  experienced,  immature  (see  sarajja  shyness), 
opp.  visarada  (der.  vesarajja)  experienced,  wise,  self- 
confident  ;  vita-sarada  id.  (e.  g.  A  11. 24 ;  It  123). —  Note: 
At  A'.S.  III. 46  (=S  III. 54)  s.  is  wrongly  taken  assara-l-da, 
i.  e.  "  giving  sara  "  ;  but  seeds  do  not  give  sara :  they 
conla  in  sara  (cp.  saravant) .  The  C  expl"  as  sar-adayin 
is  nearer  the  truth,  but  of  course  not  literal ;  °da  is  not 
aH-''da,  Moreover,  i.he  fig.  meaning  cannot  be  recon- 
ciled with  this  expl°. 

Saradika  (adj.)  [fr.  sarada]  autumnal  Vin  1.199;  11.41  ; 
Dh  285  =  ]  1. 183;  Vv  64";  DhA  111.428. 

Saraddha  [  =  sai)raddha]  violent,  angry  A  1.148,  282  ; 
S  IV. 125  ;  M  I.2I  ;  Vism  134  (opp.  passaddha-kaya),  282 
(°kaya);  VbhA  283  (id.). 

Sarana  [fr.  saratii]  going  DhsA  133. 

Sarameya  [Vedic  sarameya]  a  dog  (lit.  "  son  of  Sarama  ") 
Mhbv  III. 

Sarambha^  [  =  sagrambha]  i.  impetuosity,  anger  A  i.ioo, 
299;  11.193;  M  1.16;  Dh  133;  J  1V.26 ;  Miln  289  (sa- 
sagrambha).  —  2.  quarrel  Sn  483;  J  11.223;  v. 141. — 
3.  pride  Th  i,  759  ;  VvA  139. 

-katha  angry  or  haughty  talk,  imperiousness  Dh  133  ; 
M  1. 16;  DhA  III. 57. 

Sarambba'  [sa-t-arambha]  involving  killing  or  danger  to 
living  creatures  Vin  in. 149  ;  A  11.42  sq.    Cp.  samarambha. 

Sarambhin  (adj.)  [fr.  sarambha]  impetuous  J  111.259. 

Saravant  (adj.)  [fr.  sara]  valuable,  having  kernel  or  pith 
(said  of  grain  or  trees)  A  iv.170  (syiiom.  dalha,  opp. 
palapa) ;  S  v.163  ;  M  1.111=233. 

Sarasa  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  sarasa]  a  water  bird,  Ardea  sibirica 
VvA  57,  163;  at  both  pass.  =  konca. 

Saraga  [  =  sar)raga,  fr.  sag  +  raj]  affection,  infatuation 
Vin  11.258;  M  1. 1 7,  498;  A  1.264;  S  III  69  sq.,  93;  Dhs 
1059,  1230;  cp.  sagraga.  — Neg.  a°  Dhs  32,  312,  315. 

Saragin  (adj.)  [fr.  last]  attached  to  M  1.239  (sukha-°) ; 
sukha-saragita  ibid,  impassioned. 

Saraniya  (adj.)  [the  question  of  derivation  is  still  unsettled. 
According  to  Trenckner  (Notes  75)  fr.  sarana  (i.  e. 
sarana^  or  sarana^  ?)  with  double  vfddhi.  Kern  (Toev. 
11.74)  coasiders  the  (B)  Sk.  sagraiijaniya  as  the  original 
and  derives  it  fr.  sar)-(-raj  to  rejoice,  to  gladden:  see  1 
ranjati.  The  BSk.  is  divided:  MVastu  in. 47,  60,  206 
etc.  has  sarayaniya,  whereas  Av§  1.229  &  Divy  404 
read  sagranjani  and  sagrafijaniya  (see  below).  —  The 
C.  at  J  IV. 99  derives  it  fr.  sarana'  in  explaining  sara- 
niya katha  as  "  saritabba-yuttaka  katha  "]  courteous, 
polite,  friendly  (making  happy,  pleasing,  gladdening?), 
only  in  comb"  with  katha,  dhamma,  or  dhammakatha, 
e.  g.  s.  katha  polite  speech,  either  in  phrase  sammo- 
daniyay  kathay  sdrHniyaT/  vltisdreti  to  exchange  greetings 
of  friendliness  &  courtesy  D  1.52  ;  M  I.i6  (expl''  inter 
alia  as  "  anussariyamanasukhato  s."  at  MA  i  lo) ; 
A  1.55,  281  ;  11.42  ;  cp.  BSk.  sammodanhj  sayraiijaniy 
vividhaij  k.  vyatisdrya  Av^  1.229.  —  sdrdniyai)  kathatj 
katheti  DhA  1.107;  iv.87 ;  saraniya  dhamma  states  of 
conciliation,  fraternal  living  (Dial.  in. 231)  I)  in.  245; 
M  1.322;  11.250;  A  111.288;  V.89;  DhsA  294;  J  V.382  ; 
cp.  BSk.  sayranjaniyan  dharmar/  samaddya  Divy  404.  ' 
—  saraniyar)  dhammakathaij  sunati  DhA  iv.  168. 


S&ri  [cp.  *Sk.  £ari]  cheesman  DA  1.85. 

Sarin  (adj.)  [fr.  sareti]  wandering,  going  after,  following, 
conforming  to  (loc.)  J  v. 15;  aniketasarin  wandering 
about  houseless  Sn  844.  970  ;  anokasarin  wandering 
homeless  Dh  404;  Sn  628;  ditthisarin  a  partisan  of 
certain  views  Sn  91 1  ;  vaggasarin  conforming  to  a  party, 
a  partisan  Sn  371,  800,  912. 

Saririka  (adj.)  [fr.  sarira]  connected  with  the  body,  bodily 
M  i.io  ;  A  1. 168  sq. ;  11.153  i  ("*•)  bodily  relics  Miln  341  ; 
°r|  cetiyar)  one  of  the  3  kinds :  paribhogika,  s.,  uddesika 
J  IV. 228. 

Sarappa  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  sarupa,  BSk.  sSrupya  &  sSropya] 
equal  state;  as  adj.  fit,  suitable,  proper  Vin  1.39,  287; 
D  11.277;  S  IV.21  sq.;  J  1.65,  362  ;  DhsA  294;  Sn  368; 
P-  79.  97,  104;  J  IV. 404.  (a°)  (nt.)  Vism  24;  PvA  269. 
paribbajaka-s°,  as  befits  a  Wanderer  J  v. 228. 

Sareti  is  Caus.  of  sarati^  as  well  as  sarati'.     Cp.  viti°. 

Saropin  (adj.)  [sagn-ropin,  cp.  ropetii  &  ruhatii]  healing, 
curative  M  11.257  (vana-°). 

Sala  [cp.  Sk.  ^ala  &  sala]  a  Sal  tree  (Shorea  robusta) 
M  1.488  ;  D  11.134  ;  A  1. 202  ;  in. 49,  214  ;  Dh  162. 

-malaka  an  enclosure  of  Sal  trees  J  1.3 16.  -rukkha 
Sal  tree  VvA  176.  -lat^hi  Sal  sprout  A  11.200.  -vana 
Sal  grove  D  11.134  ;  M  1.124  ;  S  1.157  '•  Vv  39*. 

S&laka  [Sk.  syala-t-ka]  a  brother-in-law  J  11.268. 

S&Iakakimi  a  kind  of  worm  Miln  312. 

S&laya  (adj.)  [sa'-i-alaya]  having  intentions  (on),  being 
attached  (to=loc.)  J  111.332. 

Sala  (f.)  [cv.  Vedic  4ala.  cp.  Gr.  Ka\ia  hut,  Lat.  cella  cell, 
Ohg.  halla,  E.  hall]  a  large  (covered  &  enclosed)  hall, 
large  room,  house;  shed,  stable  etc.,  as  seen  fr.  foil, 
examples :  aggi°  a  hall  with  a  fire  Vin  1.25,  49=  11.2 10  ; 
asana°  hall  with  seats  DhA  11.65  ;  udapana"  a  shed  over 
the  well  Vin  1139;  11.122;  upafthana"  a  service  hall 
Vin  1.49,  139  ;  n.153,  208,  210  ;  S  n.280  ;  v. 321  ;  J  1.160  ; 
kathina°  a  hall  for  the  kathina  Vin  11. 11 7.  kila°  play- 
house J  VI.  332  ;  kutuhala°  a  common  room  D  1.179  = 
S  IV. 398.  kumbhakara°  potter's  hall  DhA  1.39  ;  gilana" 
sick  room,  hospital  S  iv.210;  Vism  259;  jantaghara" 
(large)  bath  room  Vin  1140;  11.122  ;  dana°  a  hall  for 
donations  J  1.262  ;  dvara"  hall  with  doors  M  1.382  ; 
11.66;  paniya"  a  water-room  Vin  11.153;  bhatta°  refec- 
tory Vism  72  ;  yaflila°  hall  of  sacrifice  PugA  233  ;  rajana" 
dyeing  workshop  Vism  65 ;  ratha"  car  shed  DhA 
III.  121;  hatthi°  an  elephant  stable  Vin  1.277,  345; 
11.194  ;  J  1.187, 

Salakiya  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  ^alakya  in  Su^ruta]  ophthalmology 
D  1.12,  69;  DA  1.98. 

Sali  [cp.  Sk.  ^ali]  rjce  D  1.105,  230;  11.293;  Vin  rv.264 ; 
M  1.57;  A  1.32,  145;  III. 49  ;  IV. 108  (-(-yavaka),  231; 
S  v. 10,  48;  J  1.66.  178  ;  IV. 276;  V.37;  VI. 531  ;  Miln  251  ; 
Sn  240  sq. ;  Vism  418  ;  pi.  "-iyo  J  1.325  ;  gen.  pi.  °-inar) 
J  VI. 510.  — lohitaka°  red  rice  Miln  252. 

-khetta  a  rice-field  A  1.241  ;  rv.278;  Vin  11.256; 
DhA  I  97 ;  III. 6.  -gabbha  ripening  (young)  rice  DhA 
1.97.  -bija  rice  seed  A  1.32  ;  v  213.  -bhatta  a  meal  of 
rice  Vism  191.     -bhojana  rice  food  J  1.178. 

Salika  (adj.)  [fr.  sali]  belonging  to  rice  DhA  111.33. 

Salika  (f.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  sarika  crow,  usually  comb'*  with 
§uka  parrot]  a  kind  of  bird  S  i.i9o  =  Th  i,  1232  ;  J 
V.I  10.     See  saliya  &  salika. 

Salittaka  (nt.)  [fr.  Sk.  saglepa  ?]  a  sling,  catapult  (?); 
slinging  stones,  throwing  potsherds  etc.  Pv  iv.iO''; 
PvA  285;  J  1. 418,  420;  DhA  11.69. 

Salin  excellent  DJvs  1.9. 


Saliya 


i66 


Siqsaka 


Saliya  or  saliya  the  maina  bird  (  =  salika)  J  111.203  ;  saliya- 
chapa  (a  young  bird  of  that  kind),  and  saliyacchapa 
(i.  e.  saliya  which  is  probably  the  right  form)  J  111.202.  — 
madhu-saliya  j  v.8  (  =  suvarina-salika-sakuna  C.  p.  9''); 
J  VI.199  (suva-ialiya-°).  425  (Saliya-vacana  the  story  of 
the  maina  bird,  var.  read,  suva-khanda ;  a  section  of 
the  546th  Jataka,  but  saliya,  salika,  saliya  is  not  a 
parrot. 

Sallna  (adj.)  [fr.  sali]  fine  (rice)  Miln  16  (°g  odanar)  ;  cp. 
salinar)  odanai)  Divy  559) . 

Saluka  (&  "uka)  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  saluka]  the  edible  root  of  the 
water-lily  Vin  1.246  ;  J  vi.563  ;  VvA  142  (°mutthi). 

Salura  [but  cp.  Sk.  ^alura  a  frog]  a  dog  J  iv.438  (°-sar)gha 
=  sunakhagana,  C. ;  spelling  J). 

Saloka  [sa^+aloka]  sight,  view;  saloke  titthati  to  expose 
oneself  to  view  in  an  open  door  Vin  11.267. 

Salohita  [fr.  sa' +  lohita]  a  kinsman,  a  blood  relation, 
usually  together  with  fiati  Vin  1.4  ;  D  n.26,  345  ;  A  1.139, 
222  ;  U.I  15;  Sn  p.  91  ;  PvA  28;  VbhA  108. 

Sa)ava  [cp.  Sk.  sadava,  which  is  given  in  diff.  meaning, 
viz.  "  comfits  with  fruits  "]  a  certain  dish,  perhaps  a 
kind  of  salad,  given  as  "  lambila,"  i.  e.  bitter  or  astrin- 
gent at  DhsA  320  (made  of  badara  or  kapittha) ;  cp. 
Vin  rv.259. 

Salika  a  bird;  f.  °a  the  Maina  bird  J  1.429  ;  vi.421.  Spelt 
saliya  at  J  vi.425.     See  salika  &  saliya. 

Sava  [fr.  sru]  juice  VvA  186. 

Savaka  [fr.  sru]  a  hearer,  disciple  (never  an  Arahant)  D 
1. 164  ;  11. 104  ;  III. 47.  52,  120  sq.,133  ;  A  1.88  ;  M  1.234  ; 
S  n.26;  It  75  sq.,  79;  J  1.229;  Vism2i4,  411.  —  fern, 
savika  D  11. 105;  111.123;  Th  2,  335;  S  iv.37g  ;  A  1.25, 
88.     (Cp.  ariya-°,  agga-°,  maha), 

-sangha  the  congregation  of  the  eight  Aryas  M  11. 120  ; 
S  1.220  (cattari  purisayugani  attha  purisapuggala) ; 
11.79  sq.  ;  It  88. 

Savakatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  last]  the  state  of  a  disciple 
M  1.379  sq. 

Savajja  (adj.)  [sa-l-avajja]  blameable,  faulty  D  1.163  ; 
II. 2 15  ;  M  1.119  ;  S  V.66,  104  sq.  ;  Sn  534  ;  Pug  30,  41  ; 
(nt.)  what  is  censurable,  sin  J  1.130;  Miln  392  ;  VbhA 
382  (maha°  or  appa°,  with  ref.  to  var.  crimes). 

Savajj&ta  (f.)  [fr.  last]  guilt  Miln  293. 

Savaka  (nt.)  name  of  a  certain  throw  in  playing  at  dice 
J  VI. 281  (v.  1.  savatta). 

Savatta  (adj.)  [sa' -f  avatfa]  containing  whirlpools  It  114. 

Savana  (nt.)  [fr.  saveti]  shouting  out,  announcement, 
sound,  word  J  11.352  ;  Sdhp  67. 

Savasesa  (adj.)  [sa' -)- avasesa]  with  a  remainder,  incom- 
plete, of  an  offence  which  can  be  done  awav  Vin  1.354 ; 
11.88;  V.153;  A  1.88. —  Of  a  text  (pathaj  KhA  238; 
SnA  96. 

Savi  [Sk.  ^vavidh,  see  Liider's  Z.D.M.G.  61,  643]  a  por- 
cupine J  V.489  (MSS.  sami  and  sasi,  cp.  Manu  v.  18). 

Savitti  (f.)  the  Vedic  verse  Savitri  Sn  457,  568  =  Vin  1.246 
(Savitthi);  J  iv.184. 

Savetar  [n.  ag.  fr.  saveti]  one  who  makes  others  hear,  who 
tells  D  1.56;  A  rv.196. 

Saveti  is  Caus.  of  sunati. 

Sasa  [Sk.  §v§sa,  ir.  ivas]  asthma  A  v.i  10  ;  J  vi.295. 


Sasanka  (adj.)  [fr.  sa'-f  asanka]  dangerous,  fearful,  sus- 
picious S  IV. 1 75  (opp.  khema) ;  Th  2,  343;  ThA  241  ; 
Vism  107;  J  1.154;  PvA  13;  Miln  351. 

Sasati  [sas,  Dhtp  3oo  =  anusitthi]  to  instruct,  teach, 
command;  tell  J  VI. 472  (dutani,  =pesesi  C.) ;  inf. 
sasitui)  J  VI. 291  (=anusasitur)  C). 

Sosana  (nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  iasana]  order,  message,  teaching 
J  1.60,  328;  II. 2 1  ;  P\'  IV. 3'*  (Buddhanari)  ;  KhA  11  sq.  ; 
the  doctrine  of  the  Buddha  Vin  1.12  ;  D  I. no;  11.206; 
A  1.294  '■  Dh  381  ;  Sn  482  etc.  ;  J  i.i  16.  sasanaij  aroceti 
to  give  a  message  (diitassa  to  the  messenger)  Vin  in. 76. 
-antaradhana  the  disappearance  or  decline  of  the 
teaching  of  the  Buddha.  Said  of  the  doctrine  of 
Kassapa  Bhagava  SnA  156  (cp.  sasane  parihayamane 
SnA  223),  and  with  ref.  to  the  Pali  Tipitaka  VbhA 
432  sq.,  where  3  periods  of  the  development  of  the 
Buddhist  doctrine  are  discussed,  viz.  sasana-thita-kala, 
°osakkana-kala,  "antaradhana.  -kara  complying  with 
one's  order  and  teaching  M  1.129;  -karaka  the  same 
Sn  445  ;  -karin  the  same  A  11.26 ;  susasauar)  dussanai) 
J  1.239  (English  transl.  :  "true  and  false  doctrine," 
"good  and  bad  news"),  -hara  (4-°jotaka)  taking  up 
((S  explaining)  an  order  SnA  164. 


[cp.  Sk.  sarsapa]  a  mustard  seed  S  n.137;  v.464; 
A  V.170;  J  VM74  (comp.  with  mt.  Meru);  Sn  625,  631, 
p.  122;  Dh  401;  DA  1.93;  DhA  1.107;  11.51;  rv.i66; 
Vism  306  (ar'agge),  633 ;  PvA  198  ("tela).  -°kutta 
mustard  powder  Vin  1.205;  11. 151. 

Sasava  (adj.)  [sa'  =  asava]  connected  with  the  dsavas 
D  III. 1 12  ;  A  1. 81  ;  Dhs  990,  1 103  ;  Nett  80. 

Saha  six  days  (cp.  chaha)  J  vi.8o  (=chadivasa,  C). 

Sahatthika  (adj.)  [fr.  sahattha]  with  one's  own  hand 
J  1.168  ;  DhsA  97  ;  SnA  493  ;  KhA  29. 

Sahag  contraction  of  so  ahar). 

Sahasa  [fr.  sahas  power]  violent,  hasty  Sn  329;  (nt.) 
violence,  arbitrary  action,  acts  of  violence  Sn  943 ; 
J  VI. 284  ;  Mhvs  6,  39  ;  sahasena  arbitrarily  A  v. 177  ; 
opp.  a°  ibid.  ;  Dh  257  ;  J  vi.280.  sahasai)  id.  J  vi.358 
(  =  sahasena  sahasikar)  kammari  katva  ibid.  359);  adv. 
asahasar)  =  asahasena  J  111.319  (C.  sahasiyatanhaya 
ibid.  320,  if  we  do  not  have  to  read  sahasiya  ta^lhaya, 
from  sahasi). 

..kiriya  violence  J  111.321. 

Sabasika  (adj.)  [fr.  sahasa]  brutal,  violent,  savage  J  1.187, 

504  ;  II.  1 1  ;  PvA  209  ;  DhA  1. 17. 

Sahasiyakamma  (nt.)  a  brutal  act  J  1.412,  438. 

Sahara  (adj.)  [sa-fahara]  with  its  foods  111.54  (virifiaija s.) ; 
D  11.96  (Vesali  s. ;  trsl°  "  with  its  subject  territory  "). 

Sahin  (-°)  (adj.)  [fr.  sah]  enduring  It  32.     See  asayha". 

Sahu  (adj.)  [=sadhu]  good,  well  Vin  1.45;  S  1.8;  Pug 
71  sq. ;  Th  i,  43  ;  VvA  284. 

Sahu}ac!vara  (nt.)  a  coarse  cloth  M  1.509  (cp.  De^inama- 
mala  viii.52  ;  Karpuramanjari  p.  19;  J.P.T.S.  1891,  5, 
and  Prakrit  sahuli,  Z.D.M.G.,  xxviii.,  p.  415). 

Sahuueyyaka  see  ahuneyya. 

Sahunna  [  =  sahuja]  a  strip  of  ragged  cloth  Pv  iii.i'; 
PvA  173;  J.P.T.S.  1891,  5;  var.  read,  sahunda. 

Si  (-°)  [=svid,  for  which  ordinarily  °su]  part,  of  interro- 
gation ;  e.  g.  kar)-si  DhA  1.91. 


(nt.)  [Sk.  ^irsaka  ?]  name  of  a  water  plant  J  vi.536 
(C.  not  correct). 


Siqsati  167 


Siijsati^  [sags]  to  hope  for  Dhtp  296  (def.  as  "  iccha  ") ; 
only  in  cpd.  a"  (q.  v.). 

Sigsati'  is  Desiderative  of  sarati*.  — Sirjsati  "  to  neigh  " 
at  J  V.304  is  to  be  read  higsati  (for  hesati,  q.  v.). 

Sigsapa  (f)  [cp.  Vedic  sigsapa]  the  tree  Dalbergia  sisu  (a 
strong  &  large  tree)  S  v. 437;  Sigsapa-groves  (s.-vana) 
are  mentioned  near  Alavi  A  1.136  ;  near  Setavya  D  11. 316 
sq. ;  DhA  1.71  ;  VvA  297 ;  and  near  Kosambi  S  v. 437. 

Sikata  (f .)  [cp.  Sk.  sikata]  sand,  gra^'el ;  suvaQ^a°  gold 
dust  A  1.253. 

Sikayasa-maya  (adj.)  made  of  tempered  steel  (said  of 
swords)  J  VI. 449  (cp.  Note  of  the  trsl'  p.  546). 

Sikka  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  §ikya]  string,  string  of  a  balance  Vin 
II. 1 10;  131,  J  1.9;  11.399;  111.13  (text  sikkha) ;  vi.242  ; 
VvA  244  (mutta°  string  of  pearls) ;  Kvu  336  sq. 

Sikkhati  [Vedic  Sikjati ;  Desid.  to  iak:  see  sakkoti.  — The 
Dhtp  (12)  gives  "  vijj'  opadana "  as  meaning]  i.  to 
learn,  to  train  oneself  (  =  ghatati  vayamati  Vism  274); 
usually  combined  with  the  locative,  thus  sikkha-padesu 
s.  to  train  oneself  in  the  Sikkhapadas  D  1.63.  250 ;  Vin 
1.84;  It  96,  1 18;  also  with  the  dative,  indicating  the 
purpose ;  thus  vinayaya  s.  to  train  oneself  to  give  up 
Sn  974;  the  thing  acquired  by  training  is  also  put  in 
the  accusative ;  thus  nibbanag  s.  to  learn,  to  train  one- 
self towards  Nibbana  Sn  940,  io6i  ;  Miln  10  ;  Pot. 
sikkheyyasi  Miln  10  ;  sikkheyyama  D  11.245 ;  sikkhema 
Sn  898;  sikkhe  Sn  974;  sikkheyya  Sn  930.  Fut.  sik- 
khissami  Vin  iv.141  ;  sikkhissamase  Sn  814;  ppr.  sik- 
khanto  Sn  657 ;  ppr.  med.  sikkhamana  training  oneself 
Vin  IV, 141  ;  E)  11.241  ;  It  104,  121  ;  sikkhamana  (f.)  a 
young  woman  undergoing  a  probationary  course  of 
training  in  order  to  become  a  nun  Vin  1.135,  139,  145. 
147,  167;  IV. 121  ;  A  III. 276;  S  II. 261  ;  grd.  sikkhitabba 
Vin  1.83;  J  VI. 296;  M  1.123;  ^  11138;  Miln  10;  & 
sikkha  that  ought  to  be  learnt  Miln  10 ;  inf.  sikkhitug 
Vin  1.84,  270  ;  ger.  sikkhitva  Miln  219.  —  2.  to  want  to 
overcome,  to  try,  tempt  D  11.245. — pp.  sikkhita. — 
Caus.  II.  sikkhapeti  to  teach,  to  train  J  1.162,  187,  257; 
DA  1.261  ;  Miln  32  ;  PvA  3,  4. 

Sikkhana  (nt.)  [fr.  gikj]  training,  study  J  1.58. 

Sikkha  (f.)  [Vedic  ^ik?a]  i.  study,  training,  discipline 
Viniii.23;  D1.181;  A  1.238;  S  11.50,  131;  V.378;  Dhs 
1004;  VbhA  344  (various). — sikkhag  paccakkhataka 
one  who  has  abandoned  the  precepts  Vin  1.135,  167; 
11.244  sq.  (cp.  sikkha-paccakkhana  Vin  11.279,  and 
sikkhag  apaccakkhaya  Vin  111.24;  ^  iv.igo;  sikkha 
apaccakkhata,  ibid.) ;  tisso  sikkha  S  111.83  ;  Ps  1.46  sq. ; 
Miln  133,  237  ;  Nd^  39  ;  explained  as  adhisila-,  adhicitta-, 
and  adhipaiina-sikkha  A  1.234  sq. ;  Nett  126;  with  the 
synonyms  sagvara,  samadhi  &  paniia  at  Vism  274.  — 
2.  (as  one  of  the  6  Vedangas)  phonology  or  phonetics, 
comb""  with  nirutti  (interpretation,  etymology)  DA 
i.247  =  SnA  447. 

-anisagsa  whose  virtue  is  training,  praise  of  discipline 
A  11.243  ;  It  40  -inusantatavutti  whose  behaviour  is 
thoroughly  in  accordance  with  the  discipline  Nett  112. 
-kama  anxious  for  training  Vin  1.44;  D  ii.ioi  ;  S  v.  154, 
163;  A  1.24,  238;  °-ta  anxiety  for  training  J  1.161. 
-samadana  taking  the  precepts  upon  oneself  Vin  1.146  ; 
Miln  162  ;  A  1.238  sq. ;  iv.15  ;  v. 165.  -sajiva  system  of 
training  Vin  111.23  sq. ;  Pug  57. 

Sikktaapada  (nt.)  [sikkha  +  pada,  the  latter  in  sense  of 
pada  3.  Cp.  BSk.  Mksapada]  set  of  precepts,  "  pre- 
ceptorial," code  of  training;  instruction,  precept,  rule. 
—  I.  in  general :  D  1.63.  146,  250  ;  M1.33  ;  A  1.63,  235  sq. ; 
U.14,  250  sq. ;  III. 113,  262;  IV.152,  290  sq. ;  S  11.224; 
v. 187;  Vin  1.102  ;  11.95,  258;  in. 177;  iv.141  (saha- 
dhammika),  143  (khudd'  cinukhuddakani) ;  It  96,  118; 


Sigalika 

VbhA  69  (bhesajja°);  DhA  ill.  16.  —  2.  in  special:  the 
5  (or  10)  rules  of  morality,  or  the  precepts  to  be  adopted 
in  particular  by  one  who  is  entering  the  Buddhist 
community  either  as  a  layman  or  an  initiate.  There 
seem  to  have  been  only  5  rules  at  first,  which  are  the 
same  as  the  first  5  silas  (see  sila  2  b) :  S  11. 167  ;  Vbh  285 
(expH  in  detail  at  VbhA  381  sq.) ;  DhA  1.32  and  passim. 
To  these  were  added  another  5,  so  as  to  make  the  whole 
list  (the  dasasikkhapadag  or  "padani)  one  of  10  (which 
are  nol  the  10  silas  !).  These  are  (6)  vikala-bhojana 
(-veramaiji)  not  eating  at  the  wrong  hour  ;  (7)  nacca-gita- 
vadita-visiika-dassana°  to  avoid  worldly  amusements ; 
(8)  mala-gandha-vilepana-dharana-mandana-vibhiisana- 
tthana"  to  use  neither  unguents  nor  ornaments ;  (9) 
ucca-sayana-maha-sayana°  not  to  sleep  on  a  high,  big 
bed;  (10)  jatarupa  rajata-patiggahana°  not  to  accept 
any  gold  or  silver  :  Vin  1.83=  Kh  11. ;  A  1.2  1 1,  and  fre- 
quently.—  dasa-sikkhapadika  (f.)  conforming  to  the  10 
obligations  (of  a  nun)  Vin  iv.343  (  =  samaneri).  There 
is  nowhere  any  mention  of  the  8  sikkhapadas  as  such, 
but  they  are  called  atthangika  uposatha  (see  sila  2b). 
e.  g.  Mhvs  37,  202.  —  diyaddha-sikkhapada-sata  the  150 
precepts,  i.  e.  the  Pafimokidia  A  1.230,  234;  Miln  243. 

Sikkhapaka  (adj.)  [fr.  sikkhapeti]  teaching  PvA  252; 
Miln  164. 

Sikkhapana  (nt.)  [fr.  sikkhapeti]  teaching  Miln  163. 
Sikkhapanaka  teaching  J  1.432. 

Sikkhita  [pp.  of  sikkhati]  trained,  taught  Vin  iv.343 
("sikkha.  adj.,  trained  in  .  .  . ;  chasu  dhammesu) ; 
Miln  40  ;  PvA  263  (°sippa). 

Sikhan^in  (adj.-n.)  [Sk.  Sikhaiidin]  i.  tufted,  crested  (as 
birds);  J  v.406 ;  vi.539 ;  Th  i.  H03  (mayura) ;  with 
tonsured  hair  (as  ascetics)  J  111.311. —  2.  a  peacock 
J  V.406  ;  VvA  163. 

Sikhara  [cp.  Sk.  ^ikhara]  the  top,  summit  of  a  mountain 
J  VI.519;  Miln  2;  a  peak  DhA  111.364  (°thupiyo  or 
"thupikayo  peaked  domes);  the  point  or  edge  of  a 
sword  M  1.243;  S  1V.56;  crest,  tuft  J  11.99;  (this  is* a 
very  difficult  reading ;  it  is  explained  by  the  C.  by  sun- 
dara  (elegant) ;  Trenckner  suggests  singara.  cp.  n.98) ; 
a  bud  Th  2,  382. 

Sikhari;*!  (f)  [fr.  last]  a  kind  of  woman  (with  certain 
defects  of  the  pudendum  Vin  11. 271  ;  111.129  (text,  °aiji). 

Sikha  (f.)  [Vedic  iikha]  point,  edge  M  M04 ;  crest,  top- 
knot DA  1.89  ;  J  v.406  ;  of  a  flame  Dh  308  ;  DhsA  124  ; 
of  fire  (aggi°)  Sn  703;  J  v.213;  (dhuma°)  J  vi.206 ;  of 
a  ray  of  light  J  1.88  ;  in  the  corn  trade,  the  pyramid  of 
cornatthetopof  the  measuring  vessel  DA  1.79  ;  °-bandha 
top-knot  D  1.7;  vatasikha  (tikkha  a  raging  blast)  J 
111.484;  susikha  (adj.)  with  a  beautiful  crest  Th  i,  211 
(mora),  1136. 

Sikkhitar  [n.  ag.  fr.  sikkhati]  a  master,  adept ;  proficient, 
professional  J  vi.449,  450. 

Sikhin  (adj.)  [fr.  sikha]  crested,  tufted  Th  i,  22  (mpra) ; 
J  11.363  (f.  °inT).  Also  name  of  (a)  the  fire  J  1.2 15.  288 ; 
(b)  the  peacock  Sn  221.  687. 

SigSIa  (it")  [cp.  Vedic  srgala;  as  loan-word  in  English  = 
jackal]  ajackal  D  11.295  ;  iii.24sq. ;  A  1.187;  S  11.230.  271  ; 
IV. 177  sq.  (text  singala);  iv.199;  J  1.502  ;  111.532  (Puti- 
magsa  by  name) .  —  sigali  (f.)  a  female  jackal  J  1.336; 
II. 108;  III. 333  (called  Mayavi) ;  Miln  365.  —  See  also 
singala. 

Sig&lika  (adj.)  [fr.  sigala]  belonging  to  a  jackal  J  11.108; 
III. 1 13  (°ag  nadag,  cp.  segalikag  A  1.187,  where  the 
Copenhagen  MS.  has  sigalakag  corrected  to  segalakag). 
—  (nt.)  a  jackal's  roar  [sigSlakay  nadati)  D  111.25.  Cp_ 
segalaka. 


Siggu 


i68 


Siddhika 


Sigga  (nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  sigru.  N.  of  a  tribe;  as  a  tree  in 
Susruta]  name  of  a  tree  (Hyperanthera  moringa)  J 
111.161 ;  V.406. 

Singa'  [at.)  [Vedic  Srnga,  cp.  Gr.  Kupvov,  Kpayy<ot> ;  Lat. 
coruu  =  E.  horn]  a  horn  J  1.57,  149,  19+;  IV-I73  {°^  a 
cow);  Vism  106;  VvhA  476. 

-dhanu  horn-bow  DhA  1.2  16.  -dhamaka  blowing  a 
horn  Miln  31. 

Siuga^  the  young  of  an  animal,  calf  J  v.92  ;  cp.  Desinama- 
mala  viii.31. 

Singata  [cp.  Sk.  ifaga.Ta]  erotic  sentiment ;  singarata  (f.) 
fondness  of  decorations  J  1.184 ;  an  elegant  dress,  finery 
Miln  2;  (adj.)  elegant,  graceful  (thus  read)  J  11. yg; 
singara-bhava  being  elegant  or  graceful  (said  of  a 
horse)  J  11.98. 

Singala  various  reading  instead  of  sigala  S  11. 231  etc.; 
Vism  196;  Pv  111.52. 

Singika  (adj.)  [fr.  singa^]  having  horns  J  vi.354  (avelita-" 
having  twisted  horns). 

Singin  (adj.)  [Vedic  srngin]  having  a  horn  Vin  11.300; 
J  IV.  1 73  (  =  cow) ;  clever,  sharp-witted,  false  Th  i,  959  ; 
A  11.26;  It  112;  cp.  J.P.T.S.  1885,  53. 

Singila  a  kind  of  horned  bird  J  111.73;  DhA  ui.22  (v.  1. 
singala). 

Singivera  (nt.)  [Sk.  ^rnga  + Tamil  vera  "root,"  as  E.  loan 
word  =  ginger]  ginger  Vin  1.201  ;  rv.35  ;  J  1.244;  111.225 
(alla-°) ;  Miln  63  ;  Mhvs  28,  21  ;  DhsA  320  ;  DA  1.81. 

Singi  &  singi  (f)  [cp.  Sk.  irngi]  i.  gold  Vin  1.38 ;  S  11.234; 
J  1.84.  —  2.  "ginger"  in  sense  of  "dainties,  sweets" 
J  IV. 352  (  =  singiver'  adika  uttaribhanga  C. ;  cp.  Tamil 
iflji  ginger). 

-nada  gold  Vv  64*^  ;  VvA  284.  -lona  (-kappa)  license 
as  to  ginger  &  salt  Vin  11.300,  306.  -vanna  gold- 
coloured  D  II.  1 33.     -suvanna  gold  VvA  167. 

Singu  (f.)  (?)  a  kind  of  fish  J  v.406;  plur.  singu  J  vi.537. 
According  to  Abhp.  singu  is  m,  and  Payogasiddhi  gives 
it  as  ni. 

Singhati  [singh,  given  as  "  ghayana  "  at  Dhtp  34]  to  sniff, 
to  get  scent  of  S  1.204=  J  111.308;  DA  1.38.    Cp.  upa°. 

Singha(aka  [cp.  Sk.  ^rngataka ;  fr.  Spiga]  (m.  and  n.)  i.  a 
square,  a  place  where  four  roads  meet  Vin  1.237,  287, 
344;  IV. 271  ;  D  1.83;  A  II. 241  ;  iv.187,  376;  S  1. 212; 
11.128;  IV. 194;  Miln  62,  330,  365;  DhA  1.317.  aya-s° 
perhaps  an  iron  ring  (in  the  shape  of  a  square  or  triangle) 
M  1.393  ;  J  V.45.  —  2.  a  water  plant  (Trapa  bispinosa  ?) 
J  VI.530,  563. 

8ingha^ika  (f)  [Sk.  singhanaka]  mucus  of  the  nose,  snot 
D  It. 293;  M  1. 187;  Sn  196-198  =  ]  1.148  (all  MSS.  of 
both  books  -n-  instead  of  -n-) ;  Miln  154,  382  ;  Pv  11. 2'  ; 
Vism  264  &  362  (in  detail) ;  DhA  1.50  ;  VbhA  68,  247. 

Sijjati  [svid.  Epic  Sk.  svidyate]  to  boil  (intr.),  to  sweat ; 
ppr.  sijjamana  boiling  J  1.503  ;  Cans,  sedeti  (q.  v.).  The 
Dhtp  162  gives  "  paka  "  as  meaning  of  sid.  —  pp.  sinna 
(wet)  &  siddha*  (cooked). 

Sijjhati  [sidh;  Epic  Sk.  sidhyate.  The  Dhtp  gives  2  roots 
sidh,  viz.  one  as  "  gamana  "  (170),  the  other  as  "  sag- 
siddhi  "  (419)]  to  succeed,  to  be  accomplished,  to  avail, 
suit  SnA  310;  PvA  58,  113,  254  (inf.  sijjhitug).  —  pp. 
siddha. 

Sincaka  [fr.  siiicati]  watering,  one  who  waters  Vv  79' 
(amba°). 

SiAcati  [sic,  cp.  Av.  hincaiti  to  pour  ;  Lat.  siat  "  urinate," 
Ags.  seon ;  Ohg.  sihan,  Ger.  ver-siegen ;  Gr.  I'lt^di,-  wet ; 
Goth     saiws=E.    sea.  —  Dhtp    377:    kkhara^e]    i.  to 


sprinkle  J  111.144  ;  v. 26  ;  Mhvs  37,  203  ;  SnA  66.  —  2.  to 
bale  out  a  ship  Sn  771  ;  Dh  369.  inf.  sinciturj  J  vi.583  ; 
pass,  siccati  Th  i,  50  (all  MSS.  siiicati);  imper.  siiica 
Dh  369  ;  ppr.  med.  sincamana  Mhvs  37,  203  ;  ger.  sitva 
Sn  77i=Nett  6;  pp.  sitta.  —  Caus.  seceti  to  cause  to 
sprinkle  Mhvs  34,  45  ;  Caus.  II.  sificapeti  J  11.20,  104.  — 
Cp.  pari". 

Sincaaaka  (adj.)   [fr.   siiicati]  sprinkling  (water)  SnA  66 

(vata). 

Sit^ha  [pp.  of  §15;  Sk.  sistha]  see  vi°. 

Siqati  see  seyyati. 

Sita^  (adj.)  [pp.  of  ia;  Sk.  ^ita]  sharp  Davs  1.32. 

Sita"  [pp.  of  sayati"]  i.  (lit.)  stuck  in  or  to  :  hadaya"  salla 
Sn  938  ;  Ndi  412.  —  2.  (fig.)  reclining,  resting,  depending 
on,  attached,  clinging  to  D  1.45,  76;  11.255;  M  1.364; 
Cp.  100  ;  J  V.453  ;  Sn  229,  333,  791,  944,  1044.  See  also 
asita'. 

Sita'  [pp.  of  sinoti]  bound ;  satu-°  Dh  341  (bound  to  plea- 
sure) ;  tanha-"  Miln  248.     Perhaps  as  sita'. 

Sita*  (adj.)  [Sk.  sita]  white  Davs  111.4. 

Sita°  (nt.)  [pp.  of  smi,  cp.  vimhapeti.  The  other  P.  form 
is  mihita]  a  smile  Vin  111.105;  iv.159;  S  1.24;  11.254; 
M  11.45;  Th  I,  630;  Ap  21  (patukari),  22  ('kamma) 
DhA  11.64  (°r|  patvakasi) ;  111.479 ;  VvA  68.  -°kara 
smiling  J  1.35 1  (as  °akara). 

Sitta  [pp.  of  sincati]  sprinkled  Dh  369  ;  J  in.  144  ;  Vism  109 

Sittha  (nt.)  [cp.  *Sk.  siktha]  a  lump  of  boiled  rice  Vin 
11.165,  214;  J  1.189,  235;  v.387;  VI. 358  (odana°),  365 
(yagu°) ;  PvA  99 ;  sitthatelaka  oil  of  beeswax  Vin 
n.107,  151. 

-avakarakar)    (adv.)   scattering   the  lumps  of  boiled 
rice  Vin  iv.196. 

Sitthaka  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  sikthaka]  beeswax  Vin  n.ii6 
(madhu°). 

Sithila  (adj .)  [Vedic  sithira,  later  ^ithila]  loose,  lax,bending, 
yielding  S  1.49,  77  =  Dh  346=)  11. 140;  J  1.179;  11.249; 
Miln  144;  DhA  iv.52,  56;  PvA  13.  In  comp"  with 
bhu  as  sithili",  e.  g.  "bhava  lax  state  Vism  502  =  VbhA 
100  ;  "bhiita  hanging  loose  PvA  47  (so  read  for  sithila"). 
-°hanu  a  kind  of  bird  M  1.429.  —  Cp.  sathila. 

Siddha'  [a specific  Pali  formation  fr.  sijjati  (svid)  in  mean- 
ing "  to  cook,"  in  analogy  to  siddha*]  boiled,  cooked 
J  11.435  (  =  pakka);  v. 201  (°bhojana);  Miln  272;  SnA 
37  (''bhatta  =  pakk'odana  of  Sn  18). 

Siddha^  [pp.  of  sijjhati]  ended,  accomplished  Mhvs  23,  45, 
78  ;  successful  Miln  247,  —  (m.)  a  kind  of  semi-divine 
beings  possessed  of  supernatural  faculties,  a  magician 
Miln  120,  267  [cp.  Sk.  siddha  Halayudha  i,  87;  Yoga- 
siitra  3,  33  ;  Aufrecht  remarks :  "  This  is  a  post-vedic 
mythological  fiction  formed  on  the  analogy  of  sadhya  "J. 
-attha  one  who  has  completed  his  task  iMiln  2 14. 

Siddhatthaka  [Sk.  siddharthaka]  white  mustard  ThA  181 
(Ap.  v.24) ;  J  111.225 ;  vi.537 ;  DhA  11.273  (in  Kisa- 
gotami  story). 

Siddhi  (f .)  [fr.  sidh,  Vedic  siddhi]  accomplishment,  success, 
prosperity  Mhvs  29,  70  ;  Sdhp  14,  17,  325,  469  ;  PvA  63 
(attha"  advantage).;  padasiddhi  substantiation  of  the 
meaning  of  the  word  DA  1.66  ;  cp.  sadda". 

Siddhika  (adj.)  (-")  [fr.  siddhi]  connected  with  success; 
namasiddhika  who  thinks  luck  goes  by  names  J  1.40 1  ; 
appasiddhika  unprofitable,  fatal,  etc.  J  iv.4,  5  (sagara) ; 
VI. 34  (samudda). 


Sinata 


169 


Sibbita 


Sinata  [pp.  of  sinati]  bathed,  bathing  M  1.39;  S  1.169  = 
'83;  J  V.330. 

Sinati'  (to  bind) :  see  sinoti. 

Sinati'  [Vedic  snati,  sna.  For  detail  see  nahayati.  The 
Dhtp  426  gives  root  sina  in  meaning  "  soceyya,"  i.  e. 
cleaning]  to  bathe ;  imper.  sinahi  M  1.39 ;  inf.  sinayitug 
M  1.39  ;  aor.  sinayi  Ap  204.  —  pp.  sinata. 

Sinana  (nt.)  [fr.  sna]  bathing  M  1.39;  S  1.38,  43;  iv.nS; 
Nd'  39;  Vism  17;  VbhA  337. 

Sinani  (f.)  bath-powder  (?)  M  11.46,  151,  182. 

Siniddha  [pp.  of  siniyhati;  cp.  Epic  Sk.  snigdha]  i.  wet, 
moist  Vism  171.  — 2.  oily,  greasy,  fatty  J  1.463,  481  ; 
SnA  100  ("ahara  fattening  food).  —  3.  smooth,  glossy 
J  1.89;  IV. 350  (of  leaves):  Miln  133.  —  4.  resplendent, 
charming  ThA  139.  —  5.  pliable  Vin  1.279  (kaya,  a 
body  with  good  movement  of  bowels).  —  6.  affectionate, 
attached,  fond,  loving  J  i.io;  MUn  229.  361  ;  VbhA  282 
(°puggala-sevanata). 

Siniyhati  [Vedic  snihyate,  snih;  cp.  Av.  snaeiaitiit  snows  = 
Lat.  ninguit,  Gr.  vdyn;  Oir.  snigid  it  rains;  Lat.  nix 
snow=Gr.  Wya  =Goth.  snaiws,  Ohg.  sneo  =  snow;  Oir. 
snige  rain  ;  etc.  —  The  Dhtp  463  gives  the  2  forms  sinih 
&  snih  in  meaning  pinana.  Cp.  sineha]  (to  be  moist  or 
sticky,  fig.)  to  feel  love,  to  be  attached  Vism  3i7=DhsA 
192  (in  def"  of  metta).  Caus.  sineheti  (sneheti,  sneha- 
yati)  to  lubricate,  make  oily  or  tender  (through  purga- 
tives etc.)  Vin  1.279  (kayag);  Miln  172;  DA  1.217 
(temeti-i-);  to  make  pliable,  to  soften  Miln  139  (mana- 
sag).  —  pp.  siniddha. 

Sineha  &  sueha  [fr.  snih]  Both  forms  occur  without  dis- 
tinction ;  sneha  more  frequently  (as  archaic)  in  poetry.  — 
A.  sineha:  i.  viscous  liquid,  unctuous  moisture,  sap 
S  1. 134;  A  1.223  sq.  ;  ]  1.108;  Dhs  652  (  =  sinehana 
DhsA  335);  Vism  262  (thina''  =  meda;  vilma°  =  vasa). 
—  2.  fat  J  11.44  (bahu°) ;  VbhA  67.  — -  3.  affection,  love, 
desire,  lust  J  1.190  ;  11.27  ;  PvA  82.  —  B.  sneha:  i.  (oily 
liquid)  D  1.74  ;  Pv  in. 5*  (anguttha",  something  like  milk  ; 
expl""  as  khira  PvA  198).  — 2.  (affection)  A  11.10; 
S  IV. 188  (kama°) ;  Sn  36,  209,  943  (  =  chanda,  pema, 
raga,  Nd'  426) ;  J  iv.  1 1 . 

-anvaya  following  an  afiection  Sn  36.  -gata  anything 
moist  or  oily  A  111394  sq.  ;  DhsA  335.  -ja  sprung  from 
affection  Sn  272  ;  S  1.207.  -bindu  a  drop  of  oil  Vism 
263.     -virecana  an  oily  purgative  J  in. 48. 

Sinehaka  a  friend  Mhvs  36,  44. 

Sinehana  (nt.)  oiling,  softening  Miln  229;  DhsA  335. — 
Cp.  senehika. 

Sinehaniya  (adj.)  [grd.  formation  fr.  sinehana]  softening, 
oily;  °ani  bhesajjani  softening  medicines  Miln  172  (opp. 
lekhaniyani). 

Sinehita  [pp.  of  sineheti]  lustful,  covetous  Dh  341  ;  DhA 
iv.49. 

Sinoti  [sa  or  si;  Vedic  syati  &  sinati ;  the  Dhtp  505  gives 
si  in  meaning  "  bandhana  "]  to  bind  DhsA  219  (sinoti 
bandhati  ti  setu)      pp.  sita*. 

Sindl  (f.)  [etym.  ?]  N.  of  a  tree  Vism  183,  where  KhA  49 
in  id.  passage  reads  khajjurika.  See  also  Abhp  603 ; 
De§in  viii.29. 

Sinduvara  [Sk.  sinduvara]  the  tree  Vitex  negundo  DA 
1.252;  DhsA  14,  317;  also  spelt  sindhavara  VvA  177; 
sinduvarika  J  vi.269  ;  sindhuvarita  (i.  e.  sinduvarika  ?) 
J  VI. 550  =  553  ;  sinduvarita  J  iv.440,  442  (v.  1.  °varaka). 

Sindhava  [Sk.  saindhava]  belonging  to  the  Sindh,  a  Sindh 
horse  J  1.175;  n.96 ;  111.278  ;  v. 259;  DhA  i v. 4  (  =  Sin- 


dhava-ratthe   jata    assa) ;    (nt.)   rock   salt   Vin    1.203; 
Sindhavarattha  the  Sindh  country  ThA  270  ;  J  v. 260. 

Sindhavara  see  sinduvara. 

Sinna  [pp.  of  sijjati;  Vedic  svinna]  i.  wet  with  perspira. 
tion  Vin  1.46,  51  ;  11.223.  —  2.  boiled  (cp.  siddha')  esp. 
in  the  comp.  udaka-sinna-panna ;  it  occurs  in  a  series 
of  passages  J  in. 142,  144;  iv.236,  238,  where  Fausboll 
reads  sitta,  although  the  var.  readings  give  also  sinna. 
The  English  translation,  p.  149,  says  "  sprinkled  with 
water,"  but  the  text,  238,  speaks  of  leaves  which  are 
"  sodden  "  (sedetva). 

Sipatika  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  srpatika,  beak,  BR.]  i.  pericarp 
M  1.306  ;  Vv  84''  ;  VvA  344  ;  hingu"  a  s.  yielding  gum 
Vin  1.20 1.  Also  written  sipatika;  thus  adinnasipatika 
with  burst  pod  or  fruit  skin  S  iv.193.  —  2.  a  small  case, 
receptable ;  khura°  a  razor  case  Vin  11. 134.  On  s.  at 
Pv  III. 2"  the  C.  has  ekapafala  upanaha  PvA  186. 

Sippa  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  Silpa]  art,  branch  of  knowledge,  craft 
Sn  261;  A  III. 225 ;  IV. 281  sq.,  322;  D  in. 156,  189; 
J  1.239,  478;  Miln  315;  excludes  the  Vedas  Miln  10; 
sabbasippani  J  1.356,  463  ;  11.53  i  eight  various  kinds 
enumerated  M  1.85;  twelve  crafts  Ud  31,  cp.  dvadasa- 
vidha  s.  J  1.58  ;  eighteen  sippas  mentioned  J  11.243  ; 
some  sippas  are  hina,  others  ukkattha  Vin  iv.6  sq.  ; 
VbhA  410.  asippa  untaught,  unqualified  J  iv.177; 
vi.228  =  asippin  Miln  250. — sippag  ugganhati  to  learn 
a  craft  VvA  138 

-ayatana  object  or  branch  of  study,  art  D  1.5 1  ;  Miln 
78  ;  VbhA  490  (papaka).  -uggahana  taking  up,  i.  e. 
learning,  a  craft  J  IV.7  ;  PvA  3.  -{thana  a  craft  M  1.85  ; 
cp.  BSk.  silpasthana  Divy  58,  100,  212.  -phala  result 
of  one's  craft  D  1.5 1.  -mada  conceit  regarding  one's 
accomplishment  VbhA  468. 

Sippaka= sippa  J  1.420. 

Sippavant  [fr.  sippa]  one  who  masters  a  craft  J  vi.296. 

Sippika  [fr.  sippa]  an  artisan  Sn  613,  651  ;  Miln  78;  Vism 
336.     Also  sippiya  J  vi.396,  397. 

Sippika*  (f .)  [fr.  sippi]  a  pearl  oyster  J  1.426  ;  n.  100  (sippika- 
sambukai));  Vism  362  (in  comp. )  =  VbhA  68. 

Sippika'  at  Th  i,  49  is  difficult  to  understand.  It  must 
mean  a  kind  of  bird  ("abhiruta),  and  may  be  (so  Kern)  a 
misread  pippika  (cp.  Sk.  pippaka  &  pippika).  See  also 
Brethren  p.  53'. 

Sippi  [cp.  Prakrit  sippi]  (f.)  a  pearl  oyster  J  11. 100  ;  sippi- 
puta  oyster  shell  J  v.  197,  206.  sippi-sarabuka  oysters 
and  shells  D  1.84;  M  1.279  ;  A  1.9  ;  in. 395. 

Sibala  N.  of  a  tree  J  vi.535. 

Sibba(nt.)  [fr.  siv]  a  suture  of  the  skull ;  plur.  °-ani  J  vi.339  ; 
sibbini  (f.)  the  same  Vin  12  74. 

Sibbati  [riv,  Vedic  sivyati.  The  root  is  sometimes  given 
as  siv,  e.  g.  Dhtp  390,  with  def"  "  tantu-santana  "]  to 
sew  J  IV. 25;  VvA  251.  Pres.  also  sibbeti  Vin  11.116; 
IV. 61,  280;  ger.  sibbetva  J  i  316;  grd.  sibbitabba  J  1.9; 
aor.  sibbi  J  iv.25  ;  &  sibbesi  Vin  11.289  ;  inf.  sibbeturj, 
Vin  1.203.  —  pp.  sibbita.  —  Caus.  II.  sibbapeti  J  11. 197  ; 
Vin  rv.6i. 

Sibbana  (nt.)  [fr.  siv]  sewing  Sn  304=;  iv.395  ;  J  1.220; 
VI. 218.  sibbani  (f.)  "  seamstress  "  =  greed,  lust  Dhs 
1059  ;  A  in. 399  ;  DhsA  363  ;  Sn  1040  (see  lobha).  -°magga 
suture  Vism  260  ;  KhA  60  (id.). 

Sibbapana(nt.)[fr.  sibbapeti]  causing  to  be  sewn  Vin  iv.280. 

Sibbita  [pp.  of  sibbati]  sewn  Vin  iv.279  (dus")  ;  J  iv.20 
(su°) ;  VbhA  252  (°rajjuka).     Cp.  vi°  &  pari". 

VIII— 6 


Sibbltar 


170 


Sigha 


Sibbitar  [n.  ag.  fr.  siv]  one  who  sews  M  111.126 

Sibbini  Dhs  1059,  read  sibbanT.     Cp.  sibba. 

Simbali  (f)  [cp.  Vedic  simbala  flower  of  the  B,,  cp.  Pischel, 
P/A.  Gi-.  §  109]  the  silk-cotton  tree  Bombax  hepta- 
phyllum  J  1.203  ;  ui.397  ;  Vism  206  ;  DhA  1.279.  °-vana 
a  forest  of  simbali  trees  J  1.202  ;  11. 162  (s.  °-pali- 
bhaddaka-vana) ;  iv.277.  sattisimbalivana  the  gword 
forest,  in  purgatory  J  v. 453. 

Siyyati  see  seyyati. 

Sira  (nt.  and  m.)  [cp.  Vedic  siras,  sirsaii ;  Av.  saro,  Gr. 
K<ipapa  head,  icipni;  horn,  Kpavioi' ;  Lat.  cerebrum ;  Ohg. 
hirni  brain]  head,  nom.  sirarj  Th  2,  255,  ace.  sirar)  A 
1. 141  ;  siro  Sn  768  ;  sirasag  J  v. 434  ;  instr.  sirasa  Vin  1.4  ; 
D  1. 126 ;  Sn  1027 ;  loc.  sirasmig  M  1.32  ;  sire  DA  1.97  ;  in 
compounds  siro-  A  1. 1 38.  —  sirasa  patigganhati  to  accept 
with  reverence  J  1.65  ;  padesu  sirasa  nipatati  to  bow 
one's  head  to  another's  feet,  to  salute  respectfully 
Vin  1.4,  34;  Sn  p.  15,  p.  loi.  sirag  muficati  to  loosen 
the  hair  J  v. 434  ;  cp.  1.47  ;  mutta°  with  loose  hair  KhA 
120  =  Vism  415;  adho-sirag  with  bowed  head,  head 
down  A  1.141  ;  iv.133;  J  vi.298 ;  cp.  avag°  ;  dvedha" 
with  broken  head  J  v.206 ;  munda°  a  shaven  head 
DhA  II. 125. 

Sira  [Sk.  sira]  (f.)  a  bloodvessel,  vein  Mhvs  37,  136  ;  nerve, 
tendon,  gut  J  v. 344,  364;  °-jala  the  network  of  veins 
J  v.69  ;  PvA  68. 

Sirigsapa  [Sk.  sarisrpa]  a  (long)  creeping  animal,  serpent,  a 
reptile  Vin  1.3  ;  ii.iio  ;  D  11.57  :  M  iio  ;  S  1.154  ;  A  11.73, 
117,  143  ;  v. 15  ;  Sn  52.  964  ;  J  1.93  ;  Pv  111.52  ;  Nd'  484  ; 
VbhA  6.  -tta  (nt.)  the  state  of  being  a  creeping  thing 
D  11.57. 

Sirimant  (adj.)  [siri  +  mant]  glorious  D  11.240. 

Sir!  (siri)  (f.)  [Vedic  sri]  i.  splendour,  beauty  Sn  686  (instr. 
siriya) ;  J  vi.348  (sirig  dhareti).  —  2.  luck,  glory, 
majesty,  prosperity  S  1.44  (nom.  siri) ;  J  11. 410  (sirig), 
466;  DA  1. 148;  VvA  323  (instr.  buddha-siriya).  rajja- 
siri-dayika  devata  the  goddess  which  gives  prosperity  to 
the  kingdom  DhA  11.17;  siri -|- lakkhi  splendour  &  luck 
J  III. 443.  —  3.  the  goddess  of  luck  D  i.ii  (see  Rh.  D. 
Buddhist  India  216-222);  DA  1.97;  J  v. 112;  Miln  191 
("devata). —  4.  the  royal  bed-chamber  (  =  sirigabbha) 
J  VI. 383.  —  assiri  unfortunate  Nett  62  =  Ud  79  (reads 
sassar'iva).  sassirika  (q.  v.)  resplendent  SnA  91  ; 
sassirika  J  v.  177  (punna-canda") ;  opp.  nissirlka  (a) 
without  splendour  J  vi.225,  456;  (b)  unlucky  VvA  212 
(for  alakkhika).  — •  The  composition  form  is  siri". 

-gabbha  bedroom  J  1.228,  266  ;  tii.  125  ;.v.  214.  -cora- 
brahmana  "  a  brahmin  who  stole  good  luck  "  J  11.409 
(cp.  sirilakkhana-").  -devata  goddess(es)  of  luck  Miln 
191  (-(-kalidevata).  -dhara  glorious  Mhvs  5,  13.  -niggundi 
a  kind  of  tree  J  vi.535.  -vilasa  pomp  and  splendour 
J  IV. 232.  -vivada  a  bedchamber  quarrel  J  111.20  (sa- 
yanakalaho  ti  pi  vadanti  yeva,  C).  -sayana  a  state 
couch,  royal  bed  J  1.398;  111.264 ;  vi.io;  DhA  11.86; 
PvA  280. 

Sirisa  (nt.)  [cp.  Class.  Sk.  ^ir§a]  the  tree  Acacia  sirissa 
D  II. 4;  S  IV. 193;  Vv  84^2;  VvA  331,  344;  °-puppha  a 
kind  of  gem  Miln  118.     Cp.  serisaka. 

Siioruba  [Sk.  ^iras-t-ruha]  the  hair  of  the  head  Mhvs  i,  34  ; 
Sdhp  286. 

Sila  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  sila]  a  stone,  rock  Vin  1.28  ;  S  iv.3i2  sq.  ; 
Vin  445  ;  DA  1.154  ;  J  v. 68  ;  Vism  230  (in  comparison) ; 
VbhA  64  (var.  kinds) ;  a  precious  stone,  quartz  Vin 
11.238;  Miln  267,  380;  Vv  84I*  (  =  phalika°  VvA  339); 
pada-sila  a  flag-stone  Vin  11. 121,  154.     Cp.  sela. 

-uccaya  a  mountain  A  111.346;  Th  i,  692;  J  1.29; 
VI. 272,  278  ;  Davs  v. 63.  -gula  a  ball  of  stone,  a  round 
stone  M  111.94.     -tthambha  (sila°)  stone  pillar  Mhvs  15, 


173.  -patima  stone  image  J  iv.95.  -palta  a  slab  of 
stone,  a  stone  bench  J  1.59  ;  vi.37  (mangala°) ;  SnA  80, 
117.  -pakara  stone  wall  Vin  11. 153.  -maya  made  of 
stone  J  VI. 269,  270;  Mhvs  33,  22;  36,  104.  -yupa  a 
stone  column  S  v. 445  ;  A  iv.404;  Mhvs  28,  2.  -santhara 
stone  floor  Vin  11. 120. 

SUa^hati  [Epic  Sk.  dlagh]  to  extol,  only  in  Dhtp  30  as  root 
sUagh,  with  def"  "  katthana,"  i.  e.  boasting. 

Silabhu  (nt.)  a  whip  snake  J  vi.194  (  =  nilapannavanna- 
sappa). 

Silittba  [cp.  Sk.  slista.  pp.  of  Sli^  to  clasp,  to  which  slejman 
slime=P.  silesuma  &  semha.  The  Dhtp  (443)  expl« 
silis  by  "  alingana  "]  adhering,  connected  A  1.103; 
DA  1.91  ;  J  III. 154  ;  DhsA  15  ;  Sdhp  489  (a°). 

Silitthata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  silittha]  adherence,  adhesion, 
junction  Nd^  137  (byafijana°,  of  "  iti  "). 

Silutta  a  rat  snake  J  vi.194  (  =  gharasappa). 

Silesa  [fr.  sli?]  junction,  embrace ;  a  rhetoric  figure,  riddle, 
puzzle,  pun  J  v. 445  (silesupama  said  of  women  =  puri- 
sanag  cittabandhanena  silesasadisa,  ibid.  447). 

Silesama  (nt.)  [Sk.  slesman,  fr.  sli?.  This  the  diaeretic 
form  for  the  usual  contracted  form  semha]  phlegm 
Pv  11.2^  (  =  semha  PvA  80). 

Siloka  [Vedic  sloka  Dhtp  8:  silok  =  sanghata]  fame  D 
11.223,  255;  M  1. 192  ;  S  11.226  (labha-sakkara°) ;  A  11.26, 
143  ;  Sn  438  ;  Vin  1. 183  ;  J  IV.  223  (  =  kitti-vanna)  ;  Miln 
325 ;  SnA  86  ("bhanana,  i.  e.  recitation) ;  papasiloka 
having  a  bad  reputation  Vin  iv.239  ;  asiloka  blame 
A  IV. 364  ("bhaya) ;  J  vi.49i.  —  2.  a  verse  Miln  71; 
J  V.387. 

Silokavant  (adj.)  [siloka -h  vant]  famous  M  1.200. 

Siva  (adj.-n.)  [Vedic  siva]  auspicious,  happy,  fortunate, 
blest  S  1.181  ;  J  1.5  ;  11. 126;  Miln  248;  Pv  iv.3»  ;  Vv  18'. 
—  2.  a  worshipper  of  the  god  Siva  Miln  191  ;  the  same 
as  Sivi  J  HI. 468.  —  3.  nt.  happiness,  bliss  Sn  115,  478  ; 
S  IV.370. 

-vijja  knowledge  of  auspicious  charms  D  1.9  ;  DA  1.93 
(alternatively  explained  as  knowledge  of  the  cries  of 
jackals);  cp.  Divy  630  ^ivavidya. 

Siva  (f.)  [Sk.  siva]  a  jackal  DA  1.93. 

Sivatika  various  reading  instead  of  sipafika,  which  see. 

Sivika  (f)  [Epic  Sk.  §ibika]  a  palanquin,  litter  Bu  17,  16 
(text  savaka) ;  Pv  i.iii;  Vin  1.192;  "-gabbha  a  room 
in  shape  like  a  palanquin,  an  alcove  Vin  11.152  ;  maflca-° 
J  V.136,  262  (a  throne  palanquin  ?).  suvanna"  a  golden 
litter  J  1.52,  89  ;  DhA  1.89  ;  Vism  316. 

Siveyyaka  (adj.)  hailing  from  the  Sivi  country,  a  kind  of 
cloth  (very  valuable)  Vin  1.278,  280  ;  J  iv.401  ;  DA  1.133. 
The  two  latter  passages  read  siveyyaka. 

Sisiia  (adj.)  [Sk.  SiSira]  cool,  cold  Davs  v.33  ;  VvA  132. 
(m.)  cold,  cold  season  Vin  11.47=  J  1.93. 

Sissa  [cp.  Sk.  Sisya,  grd.  of  §if  or  ias  to  instruct :  see  sasati 
etc.]  a  pupil ;  Sn  997,  1028  ;  DhsA  32  (°4nusissa). 

Sissati  [Pass,  of  Sij  to  leave  ;  Dhtp  630  :  visesana]  to  be  left, 
to  remain  VvA  344.  Cp.  visissati.  —  Caus.  seseti  to 
leave  (over)  D  11.344  (aor.  sesesi) ;  J  1.399  .'  v.  107 ;  DhA 
1.398  (asesetva  without  a  remainder).  — pp.  siftha:  see 
visittha. 

SIgba  (adj.l  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  ^ighra]  quick,  rapid,  swift  M 
1. 120  ;  A  1.45  ;  Dh  29 ;  Pug  42  ;  "-gamin  walking  quickly 
Sn  381  ;  sighasota  swiftly  running  D  11.132  ;  A  11.199; 
Sn  319  ;  "-vahana  swift  (as  horses)  J  vi.22  ;  cp.  adv. 


Sita 


171 


Slla 


sighatarar)  Miln  82;  sighar)  (adv.)  quickly  Miln  147; 
VvA  6;  VbhA  256;  usually  redupl.  sigha-sighai]  very 
quickly  J  1.103  ;  PvA  4. 

SIta  (adj.)  [Vedic  ^ita]  cold,  cool  D  1.74,  148;  11.129; 
A  n.117.  143;  Sn  467,  1014;  Vin  1.31,  288.  (ut.)  cold 
Vin  1.3;  J  1. 165;  Mhvs  i,  28;  Sn  52.  966.  In 
comp"  with  kf  &  bhu  the  form  is  siti",  e.  g.  siti-kata 
made  cool  Vin  11. 122;  siti-bhavati  to  become  cooled, 
tranquillized  S  11.83;  ni.126;  iv.213;  v. 319;  Sn  1073 
(siti-siya.  Pot.  of  bhavati) ;  It  38  ;  "-bhflta,  tranquillized 
Vin  1.8;  11.156;  S  1. 141,  178;  Sn  542,  642;  A  1.138; 
V.65;  D  III. 233;  Vv  532*;  Pv  1.8';  IV. i".  siti-bhava 
coolness,  dispassionateness,  calm  A  11  j. 435  ;  Th  2.  360  ; 
Ps  11.43  :  Vism  248  ;  VbhA  230  ;  PvA  230  ;  ThA  244.  — 
At  J  II.  1 63  &  V.70  read  sina  ("  fallen  ")  for  sita. 

-iluka  susceptible  of  cold  Vin  1.288  (synon.  sitabhi- 
ruka).  -unha  cold  and  heat  J  i.io.  -odaka  with  cool 
water  (pokkharani)  M  1.76;  Pv  11. 10*;  sitodika  (°iya) 
the  same  J  iv.438.  -bhiruka  being  a  chilly  fellow  Vin 
1.288W  (cp.  sitaluka). 

SIta  (nt.)  sail  J  IV.21.     Soalso  in  BSk.  :  Jtm  94. 

SItaka=sita  S  iv.289  (vata). 

Sitala  (adj.)  [cp.  Vedic  sitala]  cold,  cool  J  11. 128  ;  DA  l.i  ; 
Miln  246;  tranquil  J  1.3;  (nt.)  coolness  Miln  76,  323; 
VvA  44,  68,  100  ;  PvA  77,  244.  sitalibhava  becoming 
cool  Sdhp  33. 

SIta  (f.)  a  furrow  Vin  1.240  (satta  sitayo);  gambhirasita 
with  deep  mould  (khetta)  A  iv.237,  238  (text,  °-sita). 

-aloli  mud  from  the  furrow  adhering  to  the  plough 
Vin  1.206. 

Siti°  see  sita.  The  word  sitisiyavimokkha  Ps  11.43,  ™ust 
be  artificial,  arisen  from  the  pada.  siti-siya  vimutto  Sn 
1073  (on  which  see  expl"  at  Nd*  678). 

SIdati  [sad,  Idg.  *si-«d-6,  redupl.  formation  like  ti^Jhati ; 
cp.  Lat.  sido,  Gr.  V?.« ;  Av.  hidaiti.  —  The  Dhtp  (50) 
gives  the  3  meanings  of  "  visarapa-gaty-avasadanesu  "] 
to  subside,  sink;  to  yield,  give  way  S  1.53;  Sn  939 
(  =  sagsidati  osidati  Nd'  420);  It  71;  Mhvs  35,  35; 
3'^  pi.  sidare  J  11.393  ;  Pot.  side  It  71  ;  fut.  sidissati:  see 
ni°.  —  pp.  sanna.  —  Caus.  sadeti  (q.  v.);  Cans.  II. 
sidapeti  to  cause  to  sink  Sdhp  43.  — •  Cp.  ni°,  vi°. 

SIdana  (nt.)  [fr.  sidati]  sinking  Mhvs  30,  54. 

Sina^  [pp.  of  ST  to  crush ;  Sk.  ^Irna]  fallen  ofi,  destroyed 
Miln  117  (°patta  leafless);  J  11. 163  (°patta,  so  read  for 
sita°).     See  silso  sagsina. 

Slna'  [pp.  of  siyati ;  Sk.  Sina]  congealed ;  cold,  frosty 
M  1.79. 

SIpada  (nt.)  [Sk,  sllpada]  the  Beri  disease  (elephantiasis) 
morbid  enlargement  of  the  legs ;  hence  sipadin  and 
sipadika  suffering  from  that  disease  Vin  1.9 1,  322. 

Slmantinl  (f)  a  woman  J  iv.310  ;  vi.142. 

SIma  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  sima]  boundary,  limit,  parish  Vin  i.io6sq., 
309,  340;  Nd'  99  (four);  DhA  iv.115  (malaka°) ;  anto- 
simag  within  the  boundary  Vin  1.132,  167;  ekasimaya 
within  one  boundary,  in  the  same  parish  J  1.425  ;  nissi- 
mag  outside  the  boundary  Vin  1.122,  132;  bahisima- 
gata  gone  outside  the  boundary  Vin  1.255.  bhinnasima 
transgressing  the  bounds  (of  decency)  Miln  122.  —  In 
comp°  sima°  &  sima°. 

.-anta  a  boundary  Mhvs  25,  87  ;  sin  Sn  484  ;.  J  iv.311. 
-antarika  the  interval  between  the  boundaries  J  1.265  ; 
Vism  74.  -4tiga  transgressing  the  limits  of  sin,  con- 
quering sin  Sn  795  ;  Nd'  99.  -kata  bounded,  restricted 
Nd'  p.  153  (cp.  pariyanta).  -ttha  dwelling  within  the 
boundary  Vin  1.255.      -samugghata  removal,  abolish- 


ing, of  a  boundary  Mhvs  37,  33.     -sambheda  mixing  up 
of  the  boundary  lines  Vism  193,  307,  315. 

Siyati  [for  Sk.  Syayati]  to  congeal  or  freeze :  see  visiyati 
&  visiveti.  —  pp.  sina*. 

Sba  [Vedic  sira]  plough  ThA  270  (  =  nangala). 

SOa  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  iila.     It  is  interesting  to  note  that  the 
Dhtp  puts  down  a  root  ^  in  meaning  of  samadhi  (No. 
268)  and  upadharana  (615)]  i.  nature,  character,  habit, 
behaviour  ;  usually  as  -°  in  adj.  function  "  being  of  such 
a  nature,"     like,   having  the  character  of   .  .  .,  e.  g. 
adana°  of  stingy  character,  illiberal  Sn  244 ;  PvA  68 
(+maccharin) ;    kir)°   of   what   behaviour?    Pv   11.9'^; 
keli°  tricky  PvA  241  ;  damana°  one  who  conquers  PvA 
251;    parisuddha°    of    excellent    character    A    in. 124; 
papa"  wicked  Sn  246  ;  bhanana°  wont  to   speak  DhA 
IV. 93  ;  vada°  quarrelsome  Sn  381  sq. —  dussila  (of)  bad 
character  D  in. 235  ;  Dhs   1327;  Pug  20,   53;  Pv  11. 8* 
(noun);    11. 9"    (adj.);    DhA    11.252;    1V.3 ;    Sdhp    338; 
Miln  257  ;  opp.  susila  S  1.141.  —  2.  moral  practice,  good 
character,  Buddhist  ethics,  code  of  morality,     (a)  The 
dasa-sila  or  10  items  of  good  character  (ho(  "  command- 
ments ")  are  (i)  pan4tipata  veramani,  i.  e.  abstinence 
from  taking  life ;   (2)  adinn'adana  (from)  taking  what  is 
not  given  to  one;    (3)  abrahmacariya  adultery  (other- 
wise called  kamesu  miccha-cara);  (4)  musavada  telling 
lies ;    (5)    pisuna-vacaya   slander ;     (6)    pharusa-vacaya 
harsh  or  impolite  speech ;  (7)  samphappalapa  frivolous 
and     senseless     talk;      (8)    abhijjhaya     covetousness ; 
(9)  byapada  malevolence;    (10)  micchaditthiya  heretic 
views.  —  Of  these  10  we  sometimes  find  only  the  first  7 
designated  as  "  sila  "  per  se,  or  good  character  generally. 
See  e.  g.  A  1.269  (where  called  sila-sampada) ;  11.83  sq. 
(not  called  "  sila  "),  &  sampada.  —  (6)  The  paAca-sHa 
or  5  items  of  good  behaviour  are  Nos.  1-4  of  dasa-sila, 
and  (5)  abstaining  from  any  state  of  indolence  arising 
from  (the  use  of)  intoxicants,  viz.  sura-meraya-majja- 
pamada-tthana   veramani.     These   five   also   from   the 
first  half  of  the  10  sikkha-padani.     They  are  a  sort  of 
preliminary  condition  to  any  higher  development  after 
conforming  to  the  teaching  of  the  Buddha  (saranag- 
gamana)  and  as   such   often    mentioned  when  a   new 
follower  is  "  officially  "  installed,  e.  g.  Bu  11. 190  :  sara- 
niigamane    kanci    nivesesi    Tathagato    kafici    paiicasu 
silesu  sile  dasavidhe  parar).     From  Pv  iv.i"  sq.  (as  also 
fr.  Kh  II.  as  following  upon  Kh  i.)  it  is  evident  that  the 
sikkhapadani  are  meant  in  this  connection  (either  5  or 
10),  and  not  the  silag,  cp.  also  Pv  IV. 3'°  sq.,  although 
at  the  above  passage  of  Bu  and  at  J  1.28  as  well  as  at 
Mhvs  18,  10  the  expression  dasa-sila  is  used  :  evidently 
a  later  development  of  the  term  as  regards  dasa-sila 
(cp.  Mhvs  trsl'  122,  n.  3).  which  through  the  identity 
of  the  5  Silas  &  sikkhapadas  was  transferred  to  the  10 
sikkhapadas.     These  5  are  often  simply  called  pailca 
dhanuna,   e.  g.   at  A  in. 203  sq.,   208  sq.      Without  a 
special  title  they  are  mentioned  in  connection  with  the 
"  saranai)  gata  "  formula  e.  g.  at  A  iv.266.     Similarly 
the  10  'Silas  (as  above  a)   are  only  called  dhamma  at 
A  11.253  sq.  ;  v. 260  ;  nor  are  they  designated  as  sila  at 
A  11.22 1 .  —  pancasu  silesu  samadapeti  to  instruct  in  the 
5  Silas  (alias  sikkhapadani)  Vin  11. 162.  —  (c)  The  only 
standard  enumerations  of  the  5  or  10  silas  are  found  at 
two  places  in  the  Saijyutta  and  correspond  with  those 
given  in  the  Niddesa.     See  on  the  10  (as  given  under 
a)  S  IV. 342  &  Nd*  s.  V.  sila  ;   on  the  5  (also  as  under  b) 
S  11.68  &  Nd*  s.  V.     The  so-called  10  silas  (Childers)  as 
found  at  Kh  11.  (under  the  name  of  dasa-sikkhapada) 
are  of  late  origin  &  served  as  memorial  verses  for  the 
use  of  novices.     Strictly  speaking  they  should  not  be 
called  dasa-sila.  —  The  eightfold  sila  or  the  eight  pledges 
which  are  recommended  to  the  Buddhist  layman  (cp. 
Miln  333  mentioned  below)   are  the  sikkhapadas   Nos. 
1-8  (see  sikkhapada),  which  in  the  Canon  however  do 


Sila 


172 


Sisa 


not  occur  under  the  name  of  sila  nor  sikkhapada,  but  as 
atthanga-samannagata     uposatha     (or     atthangika    u.) 

"  the  fast -day  with  its  8  constituents."  They  are  dis- 
cussed in  detail  at  A  iv.348  sq.,  with  a  poetical  setting 
of  the  eight  at  A  iv.254  =  Sn  400,  40 1  —  (d)  Three  special 
tracts  on  morality  are  found  in  the  Canon.  The  Culla- 
sila  (D  1.3  sq.)  consists  first  of  the  items  (dasa)  sila  1-7  ; 
then  follow  specific  injunctions  as  to  practices  of  daily 
living  1^'  special  conduct,  of  which  the  first  5  (omitting 
the  introductory  item  of  bijagama-bhutagama-sama- 
rambha)  form  the  second  5  sikkhapadani.  Upon  the 
Culla°  follows  the  Majjhima"  (D  1.5  sq.)  &  then  the  Maha- 
sila  D  1.9  sq.  The  whole  of  these  3  silas  is  called  sflak- 
khandha  and  is  (in  theSamaiiiiaphalasuttae.  g.)  grouped 
with  samadhi-  and  pafinakkhandha:  D  1.206  sq.  ;  at 
A  V.205,  206  slla-kkhandha  refers  to  the  Culla-sila  only. 
The  three  (s.,  samadhi  &  paiifia)  are  often  mentioned 
together,  e.  g.  D  11. 81,  84;  It  51;  DA  1.57. —The 
characteristic  of  a  kalyana-mitta  is  endowment  with 
saddha,  sUa,  caga,  paiifia  A  iv.282.  These  four  are 
counted  as  constituents  of  future  bliss  A  iv.282,  and  form 
the  4  sampadas  ibid.  322.  In  another  connection  at 
M  111.99;  Vism  19.  They  are.  with  suta  (foil,  after 
sila)  characteristic  of  the  merit  of  the  devatas  A  1.2  10  sq. 
(under  devat'anussati).  —  At  Miln  333  sila  is  classed 
as :  sarana°,  paiica°,  atthanga",  dasanga",  patimokkha- 
sagvara",  all  of  which  expressions  refer  to  the  sikkha- 
padas  and  not  to  the  silas.  —  At  Miln  336  sq.  sila  func- 
tions as  one  of  the  7  ratanas  (the  5  as  given  under 
sampada  up  to  vimuttiiianadassana ;  plus  patisam- 
bhida  and  bojjhanga).  —  cattaro  silakkhandha  "4 
sections  of  morality  "  Miln  243;  Vism  15  &  DhsA  168 
(here  as  patimokkha-saijvara,  indriya-sagvara,  ajiva- 
parisuddhi,  paccaya-sannissita.  The  same  with  ref^ 
to  catubbidha  sila  at  J  iii.  195).  See  also  under  cpds.  — 
At  Ps  1.46  sq.  we  find  the  fivefold  grouping  as  (i) 
panatipatassa  pahanai),  (2)  veramani,  (3)  cetana, 
(4)  saijvara,  (5)  avitikkama,  which  is  commented  on  at 
Vism  49.  —  A.  fourfold  sila  (referring  to  the  sikkhapada) 
is  given  at  Vism  15  as  bhikkhu",  bhikkhuni",  anupasam- 
panna"  gahattha°.  —  On  sila  and  adhisila  see  e  g. 
A  1.229  sq.  ;  VbhA  413  sq. — -The  division  of  sila  at 
J  III.  195  is  a  distinction  of  a  simple  sila  as  "  sagvara," 
of  twofold  sila  as  "  caritta-varitta,"  threefold  as  "  ka- 
yika,  vacasika,  manasika,"  and  fourfold  as  above  under 
cattaro  silakkhandha.  —  See  further  generally :  Ps 
1.42  sq.  ;  Vism  3  sq. ;  Tikp  154,  165  sq.,  269,  277  ;  Nd^ 
14,  188  (expl'i  as  "  patimokkha-sai)vara  ")  ;  Nd^  p.  277  ; 
VbhA  143. 

-anga  constituent  of  morality  (applied  to  the  panca- 
sikkhapadar))  VbhA  381.  -acara  practice  of  morality 
J  I.I  87  ;  II. 3.  -katha  exposition  of  the  duties  of  morality 
Vin  1. 15  ;  A  1.125  ;  J  1.188.  -kkhandha  all  that  belongs 
to  moral  practices,  body  of  morality  as  forming  the  first 
constituent  of  the  5  khandhas  or  groups  (-f- samadhi", 
paiiria'',  vimutti",  iianadassana-kkhaudha),  which  make 
up  the  5  sampadas  or  whole  range  of  religious  develop- 
ment ;  see  e.  g.  Nd'  21,  39  ;  Nd'  p.  277.  — Vin.  162  sq.  ; 
III. 164;  A  1.124,  291;  11.20;  S  1.99  sq.  ;  It  51,  107; 
Nett  90  sq.,  128;  Miln  243;  DhA  in. 417.  -gandha  the 
fragrance  of  good  works  Dh  55 ;  Vism  58.  -carana 
moral  life  J  iv.328,  332.  -tittha  having  good  behaviour 
as  its  banks  S  1.169,  183  {trsl'  Mrs.  Rh.  D.  "with 
virtue's  strand  for  bathing"),  -bbata  [=vata^]  good 
works  and  ceremonial  observances  Dh  271;  A  1.225; 
S  IV.  1 18  ;  Ud  71  ;  Sn  231,  etc. ;  silavata  the  same  Sn  212, 
782,  790,  797,  803,  899  ;  It  79  sq.  ;  °-paramasa  the  con- 
tagion of  mere  rule  and  ritual,  the  infatuation  of  good 
works,  the  delusion  that  they  suffice  Vin  1.184  ;  M  1.433  : 
Dhs  1005;  A  III. 377;  IV. 144  sq.  ;  Nd^  98;  Dukp  245, 
282  sq.  ;  DhsA  348;  see  also  expl°  at  Cpd.  171,  n.  4.  — 
sHabbatupadana  grasping  after  works  and  rites  D  11.58  ; 
Dhs  1005.  12 16;  Vism  569;  VbhA  "181  sq. — The  old 
form  silavata  still  preserves  the  original  good  sense,  as 
much  as  "  observing  the  rules  of  good  conduct,"  "  being 


of  virtuous  behaviour."  Thus  at  Th  i,  12  ;  Sn  212,  782 
(expl""  in  detail  at  Nd^  66),  790,  797,  803  ;  It  79 ;  J 
VI. 49 1  (ariya°).  -bheda  a  breach  of  morality  J  1.296. 
-mattaka  a  matter  of  mere  morality  D  1.3  ;  DA  1.55. 
-maya  consisting  in  morality  It  51  ;  VvA  10  (see  maya, 
def"  6).  -vatta  morality,  virtue  S  1. 143;  cp.  J  111.360. 
-vipatti  moral  transgression  Vin  1.171  sq. ;  D  11.85; 
A  1.95  ;  268  sq.  ;  111.252  ;  Pug  21  ;  Vism  54,  57.  -vipanna 
trespassing  D  11,85;  Pug  21  ;  Vin  1.227.  -vimagsaka 
testing  one's  reputation  J  1.369;  n.429  ;  III. 100,  193. 
-sagvara  self-restraint  in  conduct  D  1.69;  Dhs  1342; 
DA  1. 1 82.  -sagvuta  living  under  moral  self-restraint 
Dh  281.  -sampatti  accomplishment  or  attainment  by 
moral  living  Vism  57.  -sampada  practice  of  morality 
Vin  1.227;  ^  11.86;  M  1. 194,  201  sq.  ;  A  1.95,  269  sq., 
11.66 ;  Pug.  25,  54.  -sampanna  practising  morality, 
virtuous  Vin  1.228  ;  D  1.63  ;  11.86  ;  M  1.354  ;  Th  2,  196  ; 
ThA  168;  DA  1.182. 

SData  (f.)  (-°)  [abstr.  fr.  sila]  character(istic),  nature, 
capacity  DhA  in. 2 72. 

Silavant  (adj.)  [sila-l-vant]  virtuous,  observing  the  moral 
precepts  D  111.77,  259  sq.,  285;  A  1.150;  11.58,  76; 
III. 206  sq.,  262  sq.  ;  iv.290  sq.,  314  sq.  ;  v. 10  sq.,  71  sq.  ; 
Vism  58;  DA  1.286;  Tikp  279.  —  nom.  sg.  silava  D 
I.I  14  ;  S  1. 166  ;  It  63  ;  Pug  26,  53  ;  J  1.187  ;  ace.  -vantai) 
Vin  111.133;  Sn  624;  instr.  -vata  S  141.^67;  gen.  -vato 
S  IV. 303  ;  nom.  pi.  -vanto  Pug  13  ;  Dhs  1328  ;  Nett  191  ; 
ace.  pi.  -vante  J  1.187;  instr.  -vantehi  D  11.80;  gen.  pi. 
-vantanag  M  1.334;  %^^-  P^-  -vatag  Dh  56;  J  1.144;  ^• 
-vati  D  II.  12  ;  Th  2,  449.     compar.  -vantatara  J  113. 

Silika  (adj.)  (-")  [fr.  sila]  =  silin  J  vi.64. 

sain  (adj.)  [fr.  sila]  having  a  disposition  or  character; 
ariyasilin  having  the  virtue  of  an  Arya  D  1.115;  DA 
1.286;  niddasilin  drowsy,  Sn  96;  vuddhasilin  increased 
in  virtue  D  i.i  14 ;  sabhasilin  fond  of  society  Sn  96. 

SQiya  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  sila,  Sk.  sllya  for  sailya]  conduct, 
behaviour,  character ;  said  of  bad  behaviour,  e.  g. 
J  iii.74  =  rv.7i  ;  emphasized  as  dussilya,  e.  g.  S  v. 384; 
A  1.105;  V.145  sq. ;  opp.  sadhu-siliya  J  11. 137  (  =  sun- 
dara-sila-bhava  C). 

Sivathika  (f.)  [et\-m.  doubtful;  perhaps=*Sk.  sivalaya; 
Kern  derives  it  as  sivan  "  lying  " -h  atthi  "bone," 
problematic]  a  cemetery,  place  where  dead  bodies  are 
thrown  to  rot  away  Vin  in. 36  ;  D  11.295  sq. ;  A  in. 268, 
323;  J  1. 146;  Pv  111.52  (  =  susanaPvA  198);  Vism  181, 
240  ;  PvA  195. 

SIvana  &  siveti :  see  vi°. 

Sisa'  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  sisa]  lead  D  11.351  ;  S  v.92  ;  Miln  331  ; 
VbhA  63  (  =  kala-tipu) ;  a  leaden  coin  J  1.7;  °-kara  a 
worker  in  lead  Miln  331  ;  °-maya  leaden  Vin  1.190. 

Sisa*  (nt.)  [Vedic  Sirsa :  see  under  sira]  i.  the  head  (of  the 
body)  Vin  1.8;  A  1.207;  Sn  199,  208,  p.  80  ;  J  1.74; 
II.  103  ;  sisag  nahata,  one  who  has  performed  an  ablution 
of  the  head  D  11. 172  ;  PvA  82  ;  aditta-sisa,  one  whose 
turban  has  caught  fire  S  1.108 ;  111.143  ;  v. 440  ;  A  n.93  ; 
sisato  towards  the  head  Mhvs  25,  93  ;  adho-sisa,  head 
first  J  1.233.  — ■  2.  highest  part,  top,  front  :  bhumi"  hill, 
place  of  vantage  Dpvs  15,  26;  J  11.406;  cankamana" 
head  of  the  cloister  Vism  121  ;  sangama"  front  of  the 
battle  Pug  69 ;  J  1.387 ;  megha°  head  of  the  cloud 
J  1.103.  In  this  sense  also  opposed  to  pada  (foot),  e.  g. 
sopana"  head  (&  foot)  of  the  stairs  DhA  1.115.  Con- 
trasted with  sama  (plain)  Ps  i.ioi  sq.  —  3.  chief  point 
Ps  1. 102.  —  4.  panicle,  ear  (of  rice  or  crops)  A  iv.169  ; 
DA  1.118. — -5.  head,  heading  (as  subdivision  of  a 
subject),  as  "  chanda-sisa  citta-sisa  "  grouped  under 
chanda  &  citta  Vism  376.     Usually  instr  "sisena  "  under 


Sisaka 


173 


Su 


the  heading  (or  category)  of,"  e.  g.  citta°  Vism  3  ;  pari- 
bhoga°  J  11.24;  sanna°  DhsA  200;  kammatthana"  DhA 
111.159. 

-dnulokin  looking  ahead,  looking  attentively  after 
something  M  1.147.  -abadha  disease  of  the  head  Vin 
1.270  sq.  ;  J  VI. 331.  -4bhitapa  heat  in  the  head,  head- 
ache Vin  1.204.  -kataha  a  skull  D  ii297  =  M  1.58; 
Vism  260=  KhA  60;  KhA  49.  -kalanda  Miln  272. 
[Signification  unknown ;  cp.  kalanda  a  squirrel  and 
kalandaka  J  vi.227;  a  blanket  [cushion  ?]  or  kerchief.] 
-cchavi  the  skin  of  the  head  Vin  1.277.  -cola  a  head- 
cloth,  turban  Mhvs  35,  53.  -cchejja  resulting  in  decapi- 
tation A  11.241.  -ccheda  decapitation,  death  J  1.167; 
Miln  358.  -ppacalakag  swaying  the  head  about  Vin 
IV.  188.  -paramparaya  with  heads  close  together  DhA 
1.49.  -virecana  purging  to  relieve  the  head  D  1.12  ; 
DA  1.98.  -vetha  head  wrap  S  iv.56.  -vethana  head- 
cloth,  turban  M  11. 193;  sisavetha  id.  M  1.244  =  3  iv.56. 
-vedana  headache  M  1.243;  11. 193. 

Sisaka  (nt.)  [=sisa]heakd,  as  adj.  -°  heading,  with  the  head 
towards ;  uttarasisaka  head  northwards  D  11. 1 37 ; 
pacina"  (of  Maya's  couch  :  eastward)  J  1.50.  hettha- 
slsaka  head  downwards  J  111.13;  dhammasisaka  wor- 
shipping righteousness  beyond  everything  Miln  47,  117. 

Siha  [Vedic  sigha]  i.  a  lion  D  11.255  ;  S  1.16  ;  A  11  33.  245  ; 
111.121  ;  Sn  72  ;  J  1.165  ;  Miln  400  ;  Nd'  679  (  =  niigaraja) ; 
VbhA  256,  398  (with  pop.  etym.  "  sahanato  ca  hananato 
ca  siho  ti  vuccati");  J  v. 425  (women  like  the  lion); 
KhA  140  ;  often  used  as  an  epithet  of  the  Buddha  A 
11.24  ;  III.  122  ;  S  1.28  ;  It  123  ;  fem.  sihi  lioness  J  11.27  ; 
III.  149,  and  sihini  Miln  67. 

-asana  a  throne  Mhvs  5.  62  ;  25,  98.  -kundala  "  lion's 
ear-ring,"  a  very  precious  ear-ring  J  v.348 ;  SnA  138; 
also  as  "mukha-kundala  at  J  v. 438.  -canuna  lion's  hide 
A  IV. 393.  -tela  "  lion-oil,"  a  precious  oil  KhA  198. 
-nada  a  lion's  roar,  the  Buddha's  preaching,  a  song  of 
ecstasy,  a  shout  of  exultation  "  halleluiah  "  A  11.33  ; 
M  1.71  ;  D  1.161,  175  ;  S  11.27,  55  ;  J  119  ;  Miln  22  ;  DhA 
11.43,  178  ;  VbhA  398  ;  (  =  settha-nada  abhita-nada) ;  SnA 
163,  203.  -nadika  one  who  utters  a  lion's  roar,  a  song 
of  ecstasy  A  1.23  -panjara  a  window  J  1.304;  11. 31  ; 
DhA  1.191.  -papataka  "  lion's  cliif,"  N.  of  one  of  the 
great  lakes  in  the  Himava  SnA  407  and  passim,  -pitthe 
on  top  of  the  lion  J  11.244.  -potaka  a  young  lion  J 
III. 149.  -mukha  "lion's  mouth,"  an  ornament  at  the 
side  of  the  nave  of  the  king's  chariot  KhA  172.  See 
also  "kundala.  -ratha  a  chariot  drawn  by  lions  Miln 
121.  -vikkilita  the  lion's  play,  the  attitude  of  the 
Buddhas  and  Arahants  Nett  2,  4,  7,  I2j.  -sejrya  lying 
like  a  lion,  on  the  right  side  D  11. 134;  A  1.114;  11.40, 
244;  J  I.I  19,  330;  VbhA  345;  DhA  1.357.  -ssara 
having  a  voice  like  a  lion  J  v. 284,  296  etc.  (said  of  a 
prince),  -hanu  having  a  jaw  like  a  lion,  of  a  Buddha 
D  III. 1 44,  175;  Bu  xiii.i  =  J  1.38. 

Siba|a  Ceylon  ;  (adj.)  Singhalese  Mhvs  7,  44  sq.  ;  37,  62  ; 
37.  175:  Dlivs  9,  I  ;  KhA  47,  50,  78;  SnA  30.  53  sq., 
397.  -°kuddala  a  Singhalese  hoe  Vism  255  ;  VbhA  238  ; 
-°dipa  Ceylon  J  vi.30;  DhsA  103;  DA  i.i  ;  KhA  132; 
-°bhasa  Singhalese  (language)  DA  i.i  ;  Tikp  259.  See 
Diet,  of  Names. 

Sihalaka  (adj.)  [fr.  last]  Singhalese  SnA  397. 

Su'  (indecl.)  [onomaul  a  part,  of  exclamation  "  shoo  !"  ; 
usually  repeated  su  su  J  11.250  ;  VI. 165  (of  the  hissing  of 
a  snake) ;  ThA  1 10  (scaring  somebody  away),  305  (sound 
of  puffing).  Sometimes  as  su  su,  e.  g.  Tikp  280  (of  a 
snake),  cp.  siikara.  —  Denom  susumayati  (q.  v.). 

Su-'  (indecl.)  [Vedic  su°,  cp.  Gr.  n'-]  a  particle,  combi" 
with  adj.,  nouns,  and  certain  verb  forms,  to  express  the 
notion  of  "  well,  happily,  thorough  "  (cp.  E.  well-bred, 
wel-come,  wel-fare) ;  opp.  du°.     It  often  acts  as  simple 


intensive  prefix  (cp.  sar)°)  in  the  sense  of  "  very,"  and 
is  thus  also  comb''  with  concepts  which  in  themselves 
denote  a  deficiency  or  bad  quality  (cp.  su-papika  "  very 
wicked  ")  and  the  prefix  du°  (e.  g.  su-duj-jaya,  su-dud- 
dasa,  su-dub-bala).  —  Our  usual  practice  is  to  register 
words  with  su°  under  the  simple  word,  whenever  the 
character  of  the  composition  is  evident  at  first  sight  (cp. 
du°).  For  convenience  of  the  student  however  we  give 
in  the  foil,  a  few  comp"'  as  illustrating  the  use  of  su'. 

-kata  well  done,  good,  virtrous  D  1.55  ;  Miln  5  ;  sukata 
the  same  D  1.27;  (nt.)  a  good  deed,  virtue  Dh  314; 
A  III. 245.  -kara  feasible,  easy  D  1.250;  Dh  163;  Sn 
p.  123  ;  na  sukaro  so  Bhagava  amhehi  upasarjkamitug 
S  1.9.  -kiccha  great  trouble,  pain  J  iv.451.  -kittika 
well  expounded  Sn  1057.  -kumara  delicate,  lovely 
Mhvs  59,  29 ;  see  sukhumala.  -kumalatta  loveliness 
DA  1.282.  -kusala  very  skilful  J  1220;  -khara  very 
hard  (-hearted)  J  VI. 508.  (=sutthu  khara  C).  -khetta 
a  good  field  D  11.353  ,  A  1.135  ;  S  1.2  i.  -gajjin  shrieking 
beautifully  (of  j^^acocks)  Th  i,  211.  -gandha  fragrant 
J  11.20;  pleasant  odour  Dhs  625.  -gandhi  =  sugandha 
J  100.  -gandhika fragrant  Mhvs  7,  27  ;  J  1.266.  -gahana 
a  good  grip,  tight  seizing  J  1.223.  -gahita  and  sugga- 
hita,  grasped  tightly,  attentive  A  11. 148,  169;  in. 179; 
J  1. 163,  222.  -ggava  virtuous  J  iv.53  (probably  mis- 
spelling for  suggata).  -ghara  having  a  nice  house 
J  VI. 4 18,  420.  -carita  well  conducted,  right,  good 
Dh  168  sq.  (nt.)  good  conduct,  virtue,  merit  A  1.49  sq., 
57,  102;  D  III. 52,  96,  152  sq.,  169;  Dh  231;  It  55, 
59  sq. ;  Ps  I.I  15;  Vism  log.  -citta  much  variegated 
Dh  151  ;  DhA  111. 122.  -cchanna  well  covered  Dh  14. 
-cchavi  having  a  lovely  skin,  pleasant  to  the  skin  D 
III. 159  ;  J  V.2  15  ;  VI. 269.  -jana  a  good  man  Mhvs  i.  85. 
-jata  well  born,  of  noble  birth  D  1.93  ;  Sn  548  sq.  -jati 
of  noble  family  Mhvs  24,  50.  -jiva  easy  to  live  Dh  244. 
-tanu  having  a  slender  waist  Vv  64''  (  =  sundara-sa- 
rira  VvA  280).  -danta  well  subdued,  tamed  D  11. 254  ; 
Dh  94  ;  A  IV. 376.  -dassa  easily  seen  Dh  252  ;  (m.)  a 
kind  of  gods,  found  in  the  fourteenth  rupa-brahmaloka 
D  11.52  ;  Pug  17;  Kvu  207.  -dittha  well  seen  Sn  178; 
p.  143.  -divasa  a  lucky  day  J  iv.209.  -dujjaya  difficult 
to  win  Mhvs  26,  3.  -duttara  very  difficult  to  escape 
from  A  V.232  sq.,  253  sq.  ;  Dh  86;  Sn  358.  -dukkara 
very  difficult  to  do  J  v.31.  -duccaja  very  hard  to  give 
up  J  VI. 473.  -duddasa  very  difficult  to  see  Vin  1.5  ; 
Th  I,  1098;  Dh  36;  DhA  i.3>'i;  used  as  an  epithet 
of  Nibbana  S  iv.369.  -duppadhagsiya  very  difi&cult 
to  overwhelm  D  111.176.  -dubbala  very  weak  Sn  4. 
-duUabha  very  difficult  to  obtain  Sn  138;  Vv  44"; 
Vism  2  ;  VvA  20.  -desika  a  good  guide  Miln  354  ; 
DhsA  123  ;  Vism  465.  -desita  well  preached  Dh  1  1  ; 
Sn  88,  230.  -ddittha  [  =  su-|- uddiftha]  well  set  out 
Vin  1. 129;  J  IV. 192.  -ddhanta  well  blown  M  111.243; 
DhsA  326  ;  =  sar|dhanta  A  1.253;  Vin  1159.  -dham- 
mata  good  nature,  good  character,  goodness,  virtue 
J  11.159  ;  V. 357  ;  VI. 527.  -dhota  well  washed,  thoroughly 
clean  J  1.331.  -nandi  (scil.  vedana)  pleasing,  pleasurable 
S  1.53.  -naya  easily  deducted,  clearly  understood 
A  iii.i79  =  sMHKav«  A  11. 148;  iii.  179  (v.  1.).  -nahata 
well  bathed,  well  groomed  D  1.104;  as  sunhala  at  S  1.79. 
-nimmadaya  easily  overcome  D  243  and  sq.  -nisita 
well  whetted  or  sharpened  J  iv.118;  as  "nissita  at 
J  VI. 248.  -nisit-agga  with  a  very  sharp  point  VvA  227. 
-nita  well  understood  A  1.59.  -pakka  thoroughly  ripe 
Mhvs  15,  38.  -pannasala  a  beautiful  hut  J  1.7.  -patit- 
tha  having  beautiful  banks  D  11. 129  ;  Ud  83  =  supatittha 
M  1.76.  See  also  under  supatittha.  -parikammakata 
well  prepared,  well  polished  D  1.76  ;  A  11. 201  ;  VA  1.221. 
-pariccaja  easy  to  give  away  J  111.68.  -parimanda'a 
well  rounded,  complete  Mhvs  37,  225.  -parihina  thor- 
oughly bereft,  quite  done  for  It  35.  -papa-kammin 
very  wicked  J  v.  143.  -papa-dhamma"  very  wicked 
Vv  52'.  -papika  very  sinful,  wicked  A  11  203.  -payita 
well  saturated,  i.  e.  hardened  (of  a  sword)  J  iv.iiS 
Cp.    suthita.      -pasiya    easily    threaded    (of    a    needle) 


Su 


174 


Sukkha 


J  111.282.  -picchita  well  polished,  shiny,  slippery 
J  V.197  (cp-  Sk.  picchala  ?).  Dutoit  "  fest  gepresst  " 
(pl|  ?),  so  also  Kern,  Toev.  11.85.  C.  expls  as  suphassita. 
■plpi  good  to  drink  J  vi.526.  -pita  see  suthita.  -pub- 
banha  a  good  morning  A  1.294.  -posata  good  nature 
Vin  1.45.  -ppatikara  easy  requital  A  1. 123,  -ppati- 
panna  well  conducted  A  11.56  ;  Pug  48  ;  -ta,  good  conduct 
Nett  50.  -ppatippatalita  well  played  on  D  11. 171  ; 
A  IV. 263.  -ppatividdha  thoroughly  understood  A  11. 185. 
-ppatitthita  firnily  established  It  77;  Sn  444.  -ppatita 
well  pleased  Mhvs  24,  64.  -ppadhagsiya  easily  assaulted 
or  overwhelmed  D  in.  176;  S  n.264.  Cp.  "duppadhar)- 
siya.  -ppadhota  thoroughly  cleansed  D  11.324.  -ppa- 
bhata  a  good  daybreak  Sn  178.  -ppameyya  easily 
fathomed  D  1.266 ;  Pug  35.  -ppavadita  (music)  well 
played  Vv  39.  -ppavayita  well  woven,  evenly  woven 
Vin  III. 259.  -ppavedita  well  preached  It '  78 ;  Th  2, 
341  ;  ThA  240.  -ppasanna  thoroughly  full  of  faith 
Mhvs  34,  74.  -ppahara  a  good  blow  J  111.83.  -phas- 
sita  agreeable  to  touch,  very  soft  J  j.22o  ;  v.197  (C-  for 
supicchita) ;  smooth  VvA  275.  -bahu  very  much,  very 
many  Mhvs  20,  9  ;  30,  18  ;  34,  15  ;  37,  48.  -balhika  see 
balhika.  -bbata  virtuous,  devout  D  1.52  ;  S  1.236 ; 
Sn  220  ;  Dh  95  ;  J  vi.493  ;  DhA  11. 177  ;  111.99  :  PvA  226  ; 
VvA  151.  -bbinaya  easy  to  understand  Nd  326. 
-bbutthi  abundant  rainfall  Mhvs  15,  97;  DhA  1.52; 
-kathesameDi.il.  -braha  very  big  J  iv.iii.  -bhara 
easily  supported,  frugal  ;  -ta  frugality  Vin  1.45  ;  11. 2  ; 
M  1. 13.  -bhikkha  having  plenty  of  food  (nt.)  plenty 
D  I.  II.  -"vdca  called  plenty,  renowned  for  great 
liberality  It  66.  -bhflmi  good  soil  M  i  124.  -majja 
well  polished  J  111.282.  -majjhantika  a  good  noon 
A  1.294.  -mati  wise  Mhvs  15,  214.  -matikata  well 
harrowed  A  1.239.  -mada  very  joyful  J  v. 32 8.  -mana, 
glad,  happy  D  1.3;  in. 269  ;  A  11. 198;  Sn  222,  1028; 
Dh  68;  Vism  174.  kind,  friendly  J  iv.217  (opp.  disa). 
-manohara  very  charming  Mhvs  26,  17.  -manta  well- 
advised,  careful  Miln  318.  -manasa  joyful  Vin  1.25; 
Mhvs  I,  76.  -mapita  well  built  J  1.7.  -mutta  happily 
released  D  11. 162.  -medha  wise  Vin  1.5;  M  1.142  ; 
A  11,49  and  sq.  ;  Dh  208  ;  Sn  117,  211  etc.  ;  It  33  ;  Nd' 
453-  -medhasa  wise  D  11.267;  A  11.70  ;  Dh  29.  -yittha 
well  sacrificed  A  11.44.  -yutta  well  suited,  suitable 
J  1.296.  -ratta  very  red  J  1.119;  DhA  1.249.  -rabhi 
fragrant  S  iv.71  ;  Vv  84^2  ;  J  i.i  19  ;  A  111.238  ;  Vv  44I2, 
53',  7i«;  Pv  II. 12';  Vism  195  (°vilepana) ;  VvA  237; 
PvA  77;  Davs  iv.40  ;  Miln  358.  -°ka-/andaka  fragrance 
box,  a  fragrant  box  Th  2,  253;  ThA  209.  -ruci  re- 
splendent Sn  548.  -ruddha  very  fierce  J  v. 425,  431 
(read  °rudda).  -riipin  handsome  Mhvs  22,  20.  -rosita 
nicely  anointed  J  v.  173.  -laddha  well  taken;  (nt.)  a 
good  gain,  bliss  Vin  1.17;  It  77.  -labha  easy  to  be 
obtained  It  102  ;  J  1.66  ;  vi.125  ;  PvA  87.  -vaca  of  nice 
speech,  compliant  M  1.43,  126  ;  Sn  143  ;  A  in. 78  ;  J  1.224. 
Often  with  padakkhinaggahin  (q.  v.).  See  also  subbaca 
&  abstr.  der.  sovacassa.  -vatthi  [i.  e.  su4-asti]  hail, 
well-being  Cp.  100=  J  iv.31  ;  cp.  sotthi.  -vammita  well 
harnessed  J  1.179.  -vavatthapita  well  known,  ascer- 
tained J  1.279;  Miln  10.  -vanaya  [i.  e.  su-v-anaya] 
easily  brought,  easy  to  catch  J  1.80,  124,  238.  -vig- 
gaha  of  a  fine  figure,  handsome  Mhvs  19,  28.  -vijana 
easily  known  Sn  92  ;  J  iv.217.  -vififlapaya  easy  to 
instruct  Vin  1.6.  -vidiiravidiira  very  far  off  A  11.50. 
-vibhatta  well  divided  and  arranged  Sn  305.  -vilitta 
well  perfumed  D  1.104.  -vimhita  very  dismayed 
J  VI. 270.  -visada  very  clean  or  clear  SnA  195.  -visama 
very  uneven,  dangerous  Th  11.352;  ThA  11.242.  -vi- 
hina  thoroughly  bereft  J  1.144.  -^vutthika  abundance 
of  rain  J  11.80;  SnA  27;  DA  1.95;  see  subbutthika. 
-vositag  happily  ended  J  iv.314.  -sankhata  well  pre- 
pared A  11.63.  -sariiia  (f.)  having  a  good  understanding 
J  V.304;  VI. 49,  52,  503  (for  °sonna  ?  C.  sussoniya,  i.  e. 
having  beautiful  hips) ;  Ap  307  (id.),  -saiiiiata  thor- 
oughly restrained  J  1.188.  -sanfhana  having  a  good 
consistence,    well   made   Sn   28.     -sattha   well   trained 


J  III. 4.  -sandhi  having  a  lovely  opening  J  v.204. 
-samagata  thoroughly  applied  to  A  iv.271  (atthanga", 
i.  e.  uposatha).  -samaraddha  thoroughly  undertaken 
D  II. 103;  S  11.264  sq.  ;  Dh  293;  DhA  in. 452.  -sama- 
hita  well  grounded,  steadfast  D  11.120;  Dh  10;  DhA 
IV.  114;  It  113;  -atta  of  steadfast  mind  S  1.4,  29. 
-samucchinna  thoroughly  eradicated  M  1.102.  -samut- 
thapaya  easily  raised  S  v. 113.  -samudanaya  easy  to 
accomplish  J  in.  3 13.  -sambuddha  easy  to  understand 
Vin  1.5;  Sn  764;  S  1.136.  -sayanha  a  good,  blissful 
evening  A  1.294.  -sikkhita  well  learnt,  thoroughly 
acquired  Sn  261  ;  easily  trained,  docile  J  1.444  i  ii-43> 
-sikkhapita  well  taught,  trained  J  1.444.  -sippika  a 
skilful  workman  Mhvs  34,  72.  -slla  moral,  virtuous 
S  1. 141.  -sukka  very  white,  resplendent  D  li.iS; 
III. 144;  Sn  548.  -seyya  lying  on  soft  beds  S  11.268. 
-ssata  well  remembered  M  1.520.  -ssara  melodious 
Vv  36';  SnA  355.  -ssavana  good  news  J  1.61.  -ssoni 
having  beautiful  hips  J  iv.19;  v. 7,  294;  cp.  sussoniya 
J  VI. 503,  &  see  "safiiia.  -hajja  friend  S  iv.59  ;  Dh  219 ; 
^f  37  i  J  '1274;  A  IV.96  ;  DhA  in. 293.  -hada  friendly, 
good-hearted  a  friend  D  in.  187  (  =  sundara-hadaya  C.) 
J  IV. 76;  VI. 382  ;  suhadil  a  woman  with  child  J  v. 330. 
-hanna  modesty  J  1.42  i.  See  hanna.  -hutthita  [su-|- 
utthita]  well  risen  Sn  178.  -huta  well  offered,  burnt 
as  a  sacrifical  offering  A  11. 44. 

Su^  (indecl.)  (-°)  ['ssu,  fr.  Vedic  svid,  interrog.  part.,  of 
which  other  forms  are  si  and  sudag.  It  also  stands 
for  Vedic  sma,  deictic  part,  of  emphasis,  for  which  also 
sa  &  assa]  a  particle  of  interrogation,  often  added  to 
interrogative  pronouns  ;  thus  kar)  su  S  1.45  ;  kena  ssu 
S  1.39;  kissa  ssu  S  1.39,  i5i  (so  read  for  kissassa) ;  ko 
su  Sn  173,  181  ;  kir)  su  Sn  1108;  kathai)  su  Sn  183,  185, 
1077  ;  it  is  often  also  used  as  a  pleonastic  particle  in 
narration;  thus  tada  su  then  D  11.212  ;  hatthe  su  sati 
when  the  hand  is  there  S  iv.171.  It  often  takes  the 
forms  ssu  and  assu;  thus  tyassu  =  te  assu  D  11.287; 
yassahai)  =  ye  assu  ahar)  D  11.284  n.  5  ;  api  ssu  Vin  1.5 ; 
11.7,  76;  tad-assu  =  tada.  su  then  J  1.196;  tay'assu  three 
Sn  231  ;  aditt'assu  kindled  D  11.264;  nassu  not  Sn  291, 
-95.  297,  309;  sv-assu  =  so  su  J  1.196.  Euphonic  r)  is 
sometimes  added  yehi-g-su  J  vi.564  n.  3  ;  kaccig-su 
Sn  1045,  1079. 

Sugsumara  [cp.  Sk.  ^i^umara,  lit.  child-killing]  a  crocodile 
S  IV. 198  ;  Th  2,  241  ;  ThA  204  ;  J  11. 158  sq. ;  Vism  446  ; 
SnA  207  (°kucchi) ;  DhA  111.194.  —  °ri  (f.)  a  female 
crocodile  J  11. 159;  sugsamarini  (f.)  Miln  67;  sugsuraa- 
rapatitena  vandeti  to  fall  down  in  salutation 
DA  1. 291. 

Suka  [Vedic  suka,  fr,  4uc]  a  parrot  J  1.458  ;  n.132  ;  instead 
of  suka  read  sQka  S  v.  10.     See  suva. 

Sukka^  [Videc  Sukra ;  fr.  §uc]  planet,  star  Ud.  9=Nett 
150;  (nt.)  semen,  sukkavisatthi  emission  of  semen  Vin 
11.38  ;  in. 1 12  ;  iv.30  ;  Kvu  163. 

Sukka^  (adj.)  [Vedic  Sukla]  white,  bright;  bright,  pure, 
good  S  n.240  ;  V.66,  104;  Dh  87;  Dhs  1303;  It  36; 
J  1. 129  ;  Miln  200  ;  sukkadhamma  J  1. 129  ;  kaiihasukkag 
evil  and  good  Sn  526  ;  Sukka  a  class  of  gods  D  11.260. 
-agsa  bright  lot,  fortune  Dh  72  ;  DhA  11.73.  -chavi 
having  a  white  skin  J  iv.184  ;  vi.508  ;  at  both  pass,  said 
of  the  sons  of  widows,  -pakkha  [cp.  BSk.  sukla-paksa 
Divy  38]  the  bright  fortnight  of  a  month  A  11.19  ;  Miln 
388;  j  IV. 26  (opp.  kala-pakkha) ;  the  bright  half,  the 
good  opportunity  Th  2,  358;  ThA  244. 

Snkkha  (adj.)  [Vedic  Suska,  fr.  Su?]  dry,  dried  up  D  11.347  ) 
J  1.228,  326;  III. 435 ;  V.106;  Miln  261,  407.  Cp. 
pari",  vi°. 

-kaddama  dried  mud  Mhvs  17,  35.  -kantara  desert 
J  v. 70.  -vipassaka  "  dry-visioned  "  Cpd.  55,  75 ;  with 
difi.  expl"  Geiger,  Sanyulta  tsrl"  n.172  n.  i. 


Sukkhati 


175 


Sunka 


Sukkhati  [fr.  suska  dry;  su?]  to  be  dried  up  Miln  152; 
J  V.472  ;  ppr.  sulckhanto  getting  dry  J  1.498 ;  ppr.  med. 
sukkhamana  wasting  away  J  1.104;  Caus.  II.  sukkha- 
peti  S  i.S  ;  Vin  iv.86  ;  J  1. 201,  380;  11.5b;  DA  1.202; 
see  also  pubbapeti.  — -  pp.  sukkhita. 

Sokkhana  (nt.)  [fr.  sukkha]  drying  up  J  111.390  (assu-°). 

Sokkbapaaa  (nt.)  [fr.  sukkhapeti]  drying,  making  dry 
J  VI. 420. 

Sokktaita  [pp.  of  sukkhati]  dried  up,  emaciated  Miln  303. 
Cp.  pari". 

Sukba  (adj.-n.)  [Vedic  sukha;  in  R.  V.  only  of  ratha; 
later  generally]  agreeable,  pleasant,  blest  Vin  1.3  ;  Dh 
118,  194,  331  ;  Sn  383;  patipada,  pleasant  path,  easy 
progress  A  11. 149  sq. ;  Dhs  178  ;  kanna-s.  pleasant  to  the 
ear  D  1.4  ;  happy,  pleased  D  11.233.  —  nt.  sukhag  well- 
being,  happiness,  ease ;  ideal,  success  Vin  1.294  '•  ^ 
1.73  sq. ;  M  1.37;  S  1.5;  A  ni.355  (deva-manussanag) ; 
It  47  ;  Dh2  ;  SU67;  Dhs  10  ;  DhsA  117;  PVA207  (lokiya" 
worldly  happiness).  —  kayika  sukkha  bodily  welfare 
Tikp  283  ;  cp.  Cpd.  112' ;  samisag  s.  material  happiness 
A  1. 81  ;  III. 412  ;  VbhA  268.  On  relation  to  piti  (joy) 
see  Vism  145  (sankhara-kkhandha-sangahita  pIti, 
vedana-kkhandha-sangahitaj)  sukhar))  and  Cpd.  56, 
243.  —  Defined  further  at  Vism  145  &  461  (ittha-phot- 
thabb-4nubhavana-lakkhanar) ;  i.  e.  of  the  kind  of 
experiencing  pleasant  contacts).  —  Two  kinds,  viz. 
kayika  &  cetasika  at  Ps  1.188;  several  other  pairs  at 
A  1.80  ;  three  (praise,  wealth,  heaven)  It  67 ;  another 
three  (manussa°,  dibba°,  nibbana")  DhA  111.51  ;  four 
(possessing,  making  good  use  of  possessions,  having  no 
debts,  living  a  blameless  life)  A  11.69.  —  gatha-ban- 
dhana-sukh'atthar)  for  the  beauty  of  the  verse  J  11.224. 
—  Opp.  asukha  D  111.222,  246  ;  Sn  738  ;  or  dukkha,  with 
which  often  comb*  (e.  g.  Sn  67,  873,  with  spelling  dukha 
at  both  pass). — Cases:  instr.  sukhena  with  comfort, 
happily,  through  happiness  Th  i,  220;  DhsA  406;  ace. 
sukhag  comfortably,  in  happiness ;  yatha  s.  according 
to  liking  PvA  133;  sukhag  seti  to  rest  in  ease,  to  lie 
well  S  1.41  ;  A  1.136 ;  Dh  19,  201  ;  J  1.141.  Cp.  sukha- 
sayita.  —  s.  edhati  to  thrive,  proper  S  1.217;  Dh  193; 
Sn  298;  cp.  sukham-edha  Vin  111.137  (with  Kern's 
remarks  Toev.  11. 83).  s.  viharati  to  live  happily, 
A  1.96  ;  111.3  '■  ^^  379-  —  ^^^-  sokhya. 

-atthin  fern,  -ni  longing  for  happiness  Mhvs  6,  4. 
-avaha  bringing  happiness,  conducive  to  ease  S  1.2  sq., 
55  ;  Dh  35  ;  J  11.42.  -indriya  the  faculty  of  ease  S  v. 209 
sq.  ;  Dhs  452;  It  15,  52.  -udraya  (sometimes  spelt 
"undriya)  having  a  happy  result  A  1.97 ;  Ps  1.80 ;  Pv 
IV. i"  (  =  sukha-vipaka  PvA  243) ;  Vv  31*.  -upaharana 
happy  offering,  luxury  J  1.23 1.  -edhita  read  as  sukhe 
{hita  (i.  e.  being  happy)  at  Vin  111.13  &  S  v. 351  (v.  1. 
sukhe  thita);  also  at  DhA  1.165;  cp.  J  vi.219.  -esin 
looking  for  pleasure  Dh  341.  -kama  longing  for  happi- 
ness M  1. 341  ;  S  IV. 172,  188.  -da  giving  pleasure  Sn  297. 
-dhamma  a  good  state  M  1.447.  -nisinna  comfortably 
seated  J  iv.125.  -patisagvedin  experiencing  happiness 
Pug  61.  -ppatta  come  to  well-being,  happy  J  in. 112. 
-pharanata  ditiusion  of  well-being,  ease  Nett  89  (among 
the  constituents  of  samadhi).  -bhagiya  participating  in 
happiness  Nett  120  sq  ,  125  sq.,  239  (the  four  s.  dhamma 
are  indriyasagvara.  tapasagkhata  puniiadhamma,  boj- 
jhangabhavaua  and  sabbupadhipatinissaggasankhata 
nibbana).  -bhiimi  a  soil  of  ease,  source  of  ease  Dhs  984  ; 
DhsA  346.  -yanaka  an  easy-going  cart  DhA  325. 
-vinicchaya  discernment  of  happiness  M  111.230  sq. 
-vipaka  resulting  in  happiness,  ease  D  1.51  ;  A  1.98  ; 
DA  1. 158.  -vihara  dwelling  at  ease  S  v. 326.  -viharin 
dwelling  at  ease,  well  at  ease  D  1.75  ;  Dhs  163  ;  J  1.140. 
-sagvasa  pleasant  to  associate  with  Dh  207.  -sanfiin 
conceiving  happiness,  considering  as  happiness  A  11.52. 
-samuddaya  origin  of  bliss  It  16,  52.  -samphassa 
pleasant  to  touch  Dhs  648.     -sammata  deemed  a  plea- 


sure Sn  760.     -sayita  well  embedded  (in  soil),  of  seeds 
A  iii.404=D  11.354. 

Sukhallik&nuyoga  [same  in  BSk.]  luxurious  living  Vin  1. 10" 
(kama-°).     See  under  kama°, 

Snkhayati  [Denom.  fr.  sukha]  to  be  pleased  J  11.31  (asu- 
khayamana  being  displeased  with). 

Sokhita  [pp  of  sukheti]  happy,  blest,  glad  S  1.52;  in. 11 
(sukhitesu  sukhito  dukkhitesu  dukkhito) ;  iv.iSo;  Sn 
1029;  Pv  11.811;  healthy  Mhvs  37,  128;  °-atta  [atman] 
happy,  easy  Sn  972. 

Sokhin  (adj.)  [fr.  sukha]  happy,  at  ease  D  1.31,  73,  108; 
A  II. 185;  S  1.20,  170;  in.83;  Dh  177;  Sn  145;  being 
well,  unhurt  J  111.541  ;  fern,  -ni  D  11. 13  ;  M  11. 126. 

Sukhuma  (adj.)  [Epic  Sk.  suksma]  subtle,  minute  Vin  1.14  ; 
D  1. 182  ;  S  IV. 202  ;  A  11. 171  ;  Dhs  676 ;  Th  2,  266  ;  Dh 
i25  =  Sn  662;  Vism  274,  488  (°rupa).  fine,  exquisite 
D  II. 17,  188;  Miln  313;  susukliuma,  very  subtle  Th  i, 
71  =  210  (°-nipunattha-dassin) ;  cp.  sokliumma;  kho- 
ma-°,  kappasa-",  kambala-°  (n.  ?)  the  finest  sorts  of 
linen,  cotton  stuff,  woolwork  (resp.)  Miln  105.- — Der. 
sokhumma. 

-acchika  fine-meshed  D  1.45  ;  DA  1.127  ;  Ap  21  (jala). 
-ditthi  subtle  view  It  75.     -dhara  with  fine  edge  Miln  105. 

Sukhuinaka=  sukhuma  Ps  1.185. 

Sokhumatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  sukhuma]  fineness,  delicacy 
D  11.17  sq. 

Sakbumala   (adj.)   [cp.   Sk.   su-kumara]  tender,   delicate, 

refined,  delicately  nurtured  A  1. 145;  11.86  sq. ;  111.130; 
Vin  1. 15,  179;  II. 180;  beautifully  young,  graceful 
J  1.397;  Sn  298;  samaiia-"  a  soft,  graceful  Samana 
A  11.87;  fsni-  sukhumalini  Th  2,  217;  Miln  68,  &  su- 
khumali  J  vi.514. 

Sokhumalata  (f)  [abstr.  fr.  sukhumala]  delicate  constitu- 
tion J  V.295  ;  DhA  III. 283  (ati°). 

Sukheti  [Caus.  fr.  sukha]  to  make  happy  D  1.51  ;  S  IV.331  ; 
DA  1.157;  also  sukhayati  DhsA  117;  Caus.  II.  sukha- 
peti  D  n.202  ;  Miln  79.  — pp.  sukhita. 

Sugata  [su-t-gata]  faring  well,  happy,  having  a  happy  life 
after  death  (gati) :  see  under  gata;  cp.  Vism  424  (s.= 
sugati-gata).  Freq.  Ep.  of  the  Buddha  (see  Diet,  of 
Names). 

-angula  a  Buddha-inch,  an  inch  according  to  the 
standard  accepted  by  Buddhists  Vin  iv.168.  -alaya 
imitation  of  the  Buddha  J  1.490,  491  ;  11.38,  148,  162  ; 
111.112.  -ovada  a  discourse  of  the  Blessed  one  J  1.119, 
349;  11.9,  13,  46;  III. 368.  -vidatthi  a  Buddha-span,  a 
span  of  the  accepted  length  Vin  in.  149  ;  iv.173.  -vinaya 
the  discipline  of  the  Buddha  A  n.147. 

Sugati  (f.)  [su-l-gati]  happiness,  bliss,  a  happy  fate 
(see  detail  under  gati)  Vin  11. 162,  195  ;  D  1.143  ;  11.141  ; 
Pug  60  ;  It  24.  77.  112;  A  III. 5.  205  ;  V.268  ;  Vism  427 
(where  def''  as  "  sundara  gati  "  &  distinguished  fr. 
sagga  as  including  "  manussagati,"  whereas  sagga  is 
"devagati");  VbhA  158;  DhA  1.153.  —  suggati  (in 
verses),  Dh  18;  D  11.202  (printed  as  prose);  J  iv.436 
(  =  saggaC.);  vi.224.  Kern,  Toev.  11.83  expl''  suggati  as 
svargati,  analogous  to  svar-ga  (  =  sagga);  doubtful. 
Cp.  duggati. 

Sugatin  (adj.)  [fr.  sugati]  righteous  Dh  126;  J  1.219  = 
Vin  II.  162  (suggati). 

Sonka  (m.  and  nt.)  [cp  Vedic  sulka,  nt.]  i.  toll,  tax, 
customs  Vin  111.52;  iv.131  ;  A  1.54  sq.  ;  DhA  11.2;  J 
IV. 132;  VI. 347;  PvA  III.  —  2.  gain,  profit  Th  2,  25; 
ThA    32.  —  3.  purchase-price   of    a   wife   Th    2,    420; 


Sunkika 


176 


Suta 


J   VI.265 ;    MUn   47   sq.  —  odhisunka  stake   J    vi.279; 
°-gahana  J  v.254  ;  a-sugkaxaha  J  v.254. 

-ghata  customs'  frontier  Vin  in. 47,  52.  -tthana 
taxing  place,  customs'  house  Vin  111.62  ;  Miln  359. 
-sayika  (?)  customs'  officer  Miln  365  (read  perhaps 
"sadhaka  or  °salika  ?). 

Sunkika  [sunka+ika]  a  receiver  of  customs  J  v.254. 

Sunkiya  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  sunka]  price  paid  for  a  wife  J 
VI. 266. 

Saoi  (adj.)  [Vedic  §uci]  pure,  clean,  white  D  1.4  ;  A  1.293 ; 
Sn  226,  410.  —  opp.  asuci  impure  A  in. 226 ;  v.iog, 
2j66.  —  (nt.)  purity,  pure  things  J  1.22  ;  goodness,  merit 
Dp  245  ;  a  tree  used  for  making  foot -boards  VvA  8. 

-kamma  whose  actions  are  pure  Dh  24.  -gandha 
having  a  sweet  perfume  Dh  58;  DhA  1.445.  -gavesin 
longing  for  purity  S  1.205  ;  DhA  in. 354.  -gha^ika  read 
sucighatika  at  Vin  11.237.  -ghara  Vin  11. 301  sq.  ;  see 
sQcighara.  -jatika  of  clean  descent  J  ii.ii.  -bhojana 
pure  food  Sn  128.  -mhita  having  a  pleasant,  serene 
smile  Vv  iS^";  502^;  64^2;  VvA  96,  280  (also  explained 
as  a  name);  J  iv.107.  -vasana  wearing  clean,  bright 
clothes  Sn  679. 

Sacimant  (adj.)  [suci  +  mant]  pure,  an  epithet  of  the 
Buddha  A  iv.340. 

Soja  (f.)  [Vedic  sruc,  f.]  a  sacrificial  ladle  D  1.120,  138; 
S  1. 169;  DA  1.289,  299. 

Snjihati  [^adh  which  the  Dhtp  (417)  defines  as  "  soceyye," 
i.  e.  from  cleansing]  to  become  clean  or  pure  M  1.39  ; 
S  1.34,  166;  Ndi  85;  Vism  3;  cp.  pari°, — pp.  suddha. 
—  Cans,  sodheti  (q.  v.). 

Sajjhana  (nt.)  [fr.  sujjhati]  purification  Vism  44. 

Safina  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  sunya,  fr.  Vedic  Suna,  nt.,  void] 
I.  empty,  uninhabited  D  1.17;  11.202  ;  S  1.180;  iv.  173; 
DA  I. no;  Miln  5.  —  2.  empty,  devoid  of  reality,  un- 
substantial, phenomenal  M  1.435  ;  S  111.167;  iv.54,  296; 
Sn  II 19;  Nd'  439  (loka).  —  3.  empty,  void,  useless 
M  1.483;  S  IV. 54,  297;  Davs  V.I  7;  Miln  96;  Vism  594 
sq.  (of  namarupa,  in  simile  with  suiiiia  daruyanta). 
suiinasuiina  empty  of  permanent  substance  Ps  11. 178; 
asunila  not  empty  MUn  130.  — -nt.  suniiai)  emptiness, 
annihilation,  Nibbana  Vism  513  (three  nirodha-sun- 
nani) ;  abl.  °to  from  the  point  of  view  of  the  "  Empty  " 
Nd^  680  (long  exegesis  of  sunnato  at  Sn  1 19) ;  Vism  512  ; 
VbhA  89,  261  ;  KhA  74. 

-agara  an  empty  place,  an  uninhabited  spot,  solitude 
Vin  1.97,  228  ;  11.158,  183  ;  in. 70,  91  sq.  ;  D  1.175  ;  11.86 ; 
291,  M  1.33;  S  IV. 1 33,  359  sq.;  Ain.353;  IV.139,  392, 
437;  V.109,  207,  323  sq. ;  It  39  ;  J  ni.191  ;  Miln  344; 
Vism  270  ;  Nd'  94.  -gama  an  empty  (deserted)  village 
(in  similes)  Vism  484  ;  VbhA  48  ;  Dhs  597  ;  DhsA  309  ; 
°Uhana  Vism  353;  VbhA  57. 

Soiiilata  (adj.)  [i.  e.  the  abl.  suiiflato  used  as  adj.  nom.] 
void,  empty,  devoid  of  lusts,  evil  dispositions,  and 
karma,  but  especially  of  soul,  ego  Th  2,  46 ;  ThA  50  ; 
Dhs  344;  Mhvs  37,  7;  nibbana  DhsA  221;  phassa  S 
IV. 295 ;  vimokkha  Dh  92;  DhA  11. 172;  Miln  413; 
vimokkha  samadhi,  and  samapatti  Vin  111.92  sq. ; 
rv.25  sq. ;  samadhi  (contemplation  of  emptiness,  see 
Cpd.  216)  D  III. 219  (one  of  three  samadhis) ;  S  iv.360, 
363  ;  Miln  337  ;  anupassana  Ps  11.43  sq. 

Sunnata  (f)  [abstr.  fr,  suniia]  emptiness,  "  void,"  unsub- 
stantiality,  phenomenality ;  freedom  from  lust,  ill-will, 
and  dullness,  Nibbana  M  in.  in;  Kvu  232;  DhsA 
221;  Nett  118  sq.,  123  sq.,  126;  Miln  16;  Vism  333 
(n'atthi ;  suiina ;  vivitta ;  i,  e.  abhava,  suiiiiata,  vivitt'- 
akara),  578  (12  fold,  relating  to  the  Paticcasamuppada), 
653  sq. ;  VbhA  262  (atta°.  attaniya",  niccabhava°). 


Ap  156 ;  VvA  187  ;  i"'  sg.  sussag  Sn  694. 
J  VI. 423. — -aor.  i"  sg.  assur)  J  in. 572. 


-pakasana  the  gospel  of  emptiness  DA  1.99,  123  ;  -pati- 
sagyutta  relating  to  the  Void,  connected  with  Nibbana 
A  1.72  =  in.i07  =  S  n.267;  DA  i.ioo  sq. ;  Miln  16; 
-vihara  dwelling  in  the  concept  of  emptiness  Vin  11.304  ; 
M  in.iP4,  294.  See  on  term  e.  g.  Cpd.  69;  Kvu  trsl' 
142,  n.  4. 

Sonnatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  sufina]  emptiness,  the  state  of 
being  devoid  DhsA  221. 

Sa^hn  (indecl.)  [cp.  Sk.  su?thu,  fr.  su°]  well;  the  usual  C. 
expl°  of  the  prefix  su^  PvA  19,  51,  52,  58,  77,  103  etc. ; 
s.  tata  well,  father  J  1. 170  ;  s.  katag  you  have  done  well 
J  1.287;  DA  1.297;  sutthutarag  still  more  J  1.229; 
SnA  418. 

Sutthuta  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  sufthu]  excellence  A  1.98  sq. ;  Nett 
50- 

SuQa  "  dog,"  preferable  spelling  for  suna,  cp.  Geiger, 
P.Gr.  §  93^- 

Sui^ati  (sunoti)  [srn,  Vedic  Syijoti ;  cp.  Gr.  /cXiw  to  praise ; 
Lat.  clueo  to  be  called ,  Oir.  clunim  to  hear ;  Goth. 
hliujj  attention,  hliuma  hearing,  and  many  others]  to 
hear.  Pres.  sunati  D  t.62,  152;  S  v.265 ;  Sn  696; 
It  98  ;  Miln  5.  — sunoti  J  iv.443  ;  Pot.  suneyya  Vin  1.7  ; 
D  1.79;  sune  J  iv.240  ;  Imper.  suna  S  in. 121  ;  sunahi 
Sn  p.  21  ;  sunohi  D  1.62  ;  Sn  997;  3"*  sg.  sunatu  Vin 
1.56  ;  i"  pi.  sunama  Sn  354  ;  sunoma  Sn  350,  988,  1 1 10  ( 
Pv  IV. i^*. — 2"^  pi.  sunatha  D  1.131  ;  11.76;  It  41; 
Sn  385;  PvA  13.  sunotha  Sn  997;  Miln  i.  —  s""  pi 
sunantu  Vin  1.5;  — ppr.  sunanto  Sn  1023;  DA  1.261  ; 
savag  J  in. 2  77. — inf.  sotug  D  11.2  ;  Sn  384;  sunitum 
Miln  91.  —  Fut.  sossati  D  11.131,  265  ;  J  11.107;  J  11.63  : 

2°''  sg.  assu 
J  III. 541.  —  3"'  sg.  suni  J  IV. 336;  assosi  D  1.87,  152; 
Sn  p.  103;  1='  pi.  assumha  J  11.79. — •2""'  pi.  assuttha 
S  1. 157;  11.230.  3"!  pi.  assosug  Vin  1.18;  D  i.iii. — • 
ger.  sutva  Vin  1.12  ;  D  1.4 ;  Sn  30.  sutvana  Vin  1.19; 
D  11.30  ;Sn  202.  suijitva  J  v.96  ;  Mhvs  23,  80.  suniya 
Mhvs  23,  loi.  —  Pass,  siiyati  M  1.30;  J  1.72,  86;  Miln 
152.  suyyati  J  IV.141  ;  J  iv.160  ;  v.459.  3"^  pi.  siiyare 
J  VI. 528.  —  Grd.  savaniya  what  should  be  heard,  agree- 
able to  the  ear  D  11.211.  sotabba  D  1.175;  11.346. — 
pp.  suta :  see  separately.  —  Caus.  saveti  to  cause  to  hear, 
to  tell,  declare,  announce  J  1.344;  Mhvs  5,  238;  PvA 
200 ;  VvA  66.  namag  s.  to  shout  out  one's  name 
Vin  1.36;  DA  1.262  ;  mag  dasi  ti  savaya  announce  me 
to  be  your  slave  J  in. 437  ;  cp.  J  iv.402  (but  see  on  this 
passage  and  on  J  in.  198  ;  vi.486  Kern's  proposed  reading 
sateti) ;  to  cause  to  be  heard,  to  play  D  11.265.  Caus. 
also  sunapeti  DhA  1.206.  —  Desiderative  sussusati 
(often  written  sussuyati)  D  1.230  ;  M  in. 133  (text  sussu- 
santi),  A  iv.393  (do.).  —  ppr.  sussusag  Sn  189  (var. 
read.,  text  sussussa) ;  sussiisamana  Sn  383  ;  aor.  sussu- 
sigsu  Vin  i.io;  fut.  sussusissanti  Vin  1.150;  S  11.267 
(text  sussu-). 

Su^isa  (f .)  [Vedic  snusa ;  cp.  Gr.  ruuf ;  Ohg.  snur ;  Ags. 
snoru  ;  Lat.  nurus]  a  daughter-in-law  Vin  1.240  ;  111.136  ; 
D  II. 148;  M  1. 186,  253;  J  VI. 498  ;  Vv  13*  (  =  puttassa 
bhariya  VvA  61);  DhA  1.355;  iv.8  ;  Pv  11.46  (pi.  suni- 
sayo,  so  read  for  sutisaye).  —  sunha  the  same  Vin  11. 10  ; 
A  IV.91  ;  Th  2,  406  ;  J  11.347  :  vi.506  ;  Pv  IV.3.*' 

Suta^  [pp.  of  sunati ;  cp.  Vedic  sruta]  i.  heard  ;  in  special 
sense  "  received  through  inspiration  or  revelation  "  ; 
learned  ;  taught  A  97  sq.  ;  D  in. 164  sq.,  24I  sq.  ;  freq. 
in  phrase  "  iti  me  sutag  "  thus  have  I  heard,  I  have 
received  this  on  (religious)  authority,  e.  g.  It  22  sq.  — 
(nt.)  sacred  lore,  inspired  tradition,  revelation  ;  learning, 
religious  knowledge  M  111.99  ;  A  1.2 10  sq. ;  11. 6  sq. ; 
S  IV. 250;  J  11.42;  V.450,  485;  Miln  248.  —  appa-ssuta 
one  who  has  little  learning  A  11. 6  sq.,  218;  in. 181  ; 
V.40,    152  ;   bahu-ssuta   one   who   has   much   learning, 


Suta 


177 


Suddha 


famous  for  inspired  knowledge  A  11. 6  sq. ;  in. 113  sq., 
182  sq.,  261  sq.  ;  S  11.159.  See  bahu.  asuta  not  heard 
Vin  1.238;  Pv  iv.i«';  J  111.233  ;  also  as  assuta  J  1.390 
("pubba  never  heard  before) ;  111.233. —  na  suta  pubbao 
a  thing  never  heard  of  before  J  11 1.2  85.  dussuta  M 
1.228  ;  sussuta  M  111.104.  —  2.  renowned  J  11.442. 

-adhara  holding  (i.  e.  keeping  in  mind,  preserving)  the 
sacred  learning  J  :ii.i93;  vi.287.  -kavi  a  Vedic  poet, 
a  poet  of  sacred  songs  A  11.230.  -dhana  the  treasure 
of  revelation  D  in. 163,  251  ;  A  111.53  ;  1V.4  sq.  ;  VvA  113. 
-dhara  remembering  what  has  been  heard  (or  taught  in 
the  Scriptures)  A  11.23  (  +  °sannicaya) ;  ni.152,  261  sq. 
-maya  consisting  in  learning  (or  resting  on  sacred 
tradition),  one  of  the  3  kinds  of  knowledge  (paiiila), 
viz.  cinta-maya,  s.-m.,  bhavana-maya  paiifia  D  in. 2  19  ; 
Vbh  324  (expl"'  at  Vism  439) ;  as  "raayi  at  Ps  1.4,  22  sq. ; 
Nett  8,  50,  60.  -ssava  far-renowned  (Ep.  of  the  Buddha) 
Sn  353. 

Snta'  [Sk.  suta,  pp.  of  su  (or  sn)  to  generate]  son  Mhvs  i, 
47;  fem.  suta  daughter,  Th  2,  384. 

Sotatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  suta']  the  fact  of  having  heard  or 
learnt  SnA  166. 

Sutappaya  (adj.)  [su  +  grd.  of  tappati']  easily  contented 
A  1.87  ;  Pug  26  (opp.  dut°). 

Satavant  (adj.)  [suta'  +  vant]  one  who  is  learned  in  religious 
knowledge  Vin  1.14;  A  11. 178;  in.55 ;  iv.68,  157;  S 
III. 57  ;  Tikp  279  ;  Sn  70  ( =  agama-sampanna  SnA  124). 
90,  371  ;  sutavanta-nimmita  founded  by  learned,  pious 
men  Miln  i  ;  assutavant,  unlearned  M  i.i  (°va  puthuj- 
jano  laymen);  Dhs  1003;  A  in.54  ;  iv.157. 

Suti  (f)  [cp.  sruti  revelation  as  opp.  to  smrti  tradition] 

1.  hearing,  tradition,  inspiration,  knowledge  of  the 
Vedas  Sn  839,  1078  ;  Miln  3  (-|-sammuti) ;  Mhvs  i,  3.  — 

2.  rumour  ;  sutivasena  by  hearsay,  as  a  story,  through 
tradition  J  111.285.  476;  vi.ioo.  —  3.  a  sound,  tone 
VvA  139  (dvavlsati  suti-bheda  22  kinds  of  sound). 

Satitikkha  (adj.)  [fr.  su  +  titikkha]  easy  to  endur*  J  524. 

Satta'  [pp.  of  supati]  asleep  Vin  111.117;  v.205  ;  D  1.70; 
11.130;  Dh  47;  It  41  ;  J  v. 328.  —  (nt.)  sleep  D  n.95  ; 
M  1.448;  S  IV.  169.  In  phrase  °-pabuddha  "  awakened 
from  sleep  "  referring  to  the  awakening  (entrance)  in 
the  deva-world,  e.  g.  Vism  314  (brahmalokag  uppajjati) ; 
DhA  1.28  (kanaka-vimane  nibbatti) ;  in. 7  (id.);  cp. 
S  1.143. 

Sntta'  (nt.)  [Vedic  sutra,  fr.  siv  to  sew]  i.  a  thread,  string 
D  1.76;  II. 13;  Vin  II. 150;  Pv  II. 11'  (  =  kappasiya  sutta 
PvA  146) ;  J  1.52.  —  fig.  for  tanha  at  Dhs  1059  ;  DhsA 
364.  —  kala"  a  carpenter's  measuring  line  J  11.405  ; 
Miln  413;  digha"  with  long  thread  J  v.389  ;  makkata° 
spider's  thread  Vism  136;  yanta°  string  of  a  machine 
VbhA  241. — Mentioned  with  kappasa  as  barter  for 
civara  at  Vin  in. 216.  —  2.  the  (discursive,  narrational) 
part  of  the  Buddhist  Scriptures  containing  the  suttas 
or  dialogues,  later  called  Sutta-pitaka  (cp.  Suttanta). 
As  such  complementary  to  the  Vinaya.  The  fanciful 
expl"  of  the  word  at  DhsA  19  is  ;  "  atthanai)  sQcanto 
suvuttato  savanato  'tha  sudanato  suttana-sutta-sabha- 
gato  ca  suttai)  Suttan  ti  akkhatar)."  —  D  n.,124;  Vin 
11.97;  VbhA  130  (  +  vinaya);  SnA  159,  310  (compared 
with  Vinaya  &  Abhidhamma).  —  3.  one  of  the  divisions 
of  the  Scriptures  (see  navanga)  A  11.103,  178;  in.  177, 
361  sq.  ;  Miln  263.-^4.  a  rule,  a  clause  (of  the  Pati- 
mokkha)  Vin  1.65,  68  ;  11.68,  95  ;  111.327-  —  5-  a  chapter, 
division,  dialogue  (of  a  Buddh.  text),  text,  discourse 
(see  also  suttanU)  S  in  221  (pi.  sutta),  253  ;  v.46 ;  Nett 
118;  DhsA  28.  suttaso  chapter  by  chapter  A  v. 72,  81  ; 
suttato  according  to  the  suttas  Vism  562=  VbhA  173. 
—  6.  an  ancient  verse,  quotation  J  1.288,  307,  314. — 
7.  book  of  rules,  lore,  text  book  J  1.194  (go°  ^°^^  °^ 
cows);  11.46  (hatthi'  elephant  trainer's  handbook). 


-anta  i.  a  chapter  of  the  Scriptures,  a  text,  a  dis- 
course, a  sutta,  dialogue  Vin  1.140  sq.,  169;  n.75; 
III. 159;  1V.344 ;  A  1.60,  69,  72;  n.147;  S  11.267  =  A 
III.  107  (suttanta  kavi-kata  kaveyya  citt'akkhara  citta- 
vyanjana  bahiraka  savaka-bhasita) ;  Vism  246  sq.  (three 
suttantas  helpful  for  kayagata  sati).  —  2.  the  Suttanta- 
pitaka,  opp.  to  the  Vinaya  Vism  272  ("atthakatha  opp. 
to  Vinay'atthakatha).  As  °pitaka  e.  g.  at  KhA  12  ; 
VbhA  431.  See  Proper  Names,  -kantika  (scil.  itthi) 
a  woman  spinner  PvA  75  ;  as  °kanti  at  J  11.79.  -kara 
a  cotton-spinner  Miln  33 1 .  -gula  a  ball  of  string  V)  1.54  ; 
M  111.95  ;  Pv  IV. 3*' ;  PvA  145.  -jala  a  web  of  thread,  a 
spider's  web  Nd^  260.  -bhikkha  begging  for  thread 
PvA  145.  -maya  made  of  threads,  i.  e.  a  net  SnA  115, 
263.  -rajjuka  a  string  of  threads  Vism  253  ;  VbhA  236. 
-lukha  roughly  sewn  together  Vin  1.287,  297.  -vada  a 
division  of  the  Sabbatthavadins  Dpvs  5,  48  ;  Mhvs  5,  6  ; 
Mhbv  97.  -vibhanga  classification  of  rules  Vin  11.97. 
Also  title  of  a  portion  of  the  Vinaya  Pitaka. 

Snttaka  (nt.)  [fr.  sutta]  a  string  Vin  11.271  ;  PvA  145;  a 
string  of  jewels  or  beads  Vin  11. 106  ;  in. 48  ;  DhsA  321  ; 
a  term  for  lust  DhsA  364. 

Suttantika  versed  in  the  Suttantas.  A  suttantika  bhikkhu 
is  one  who  knows  the  Suttas  (contrasted  with  vinaya- 
dhara,  who  knows  the  rules  of  the  Vinaya)  Vin  11.75. 
Cp.  dhamma  C  i  &  pitaka. — Vin  1.169;  n.75,  161; 
111.159;  J  1. 218;  Miln  341;  Vism  41,  72,  93;  KhA  151. 
-duka  the  Suttanta  pairs,  the  pairs  of  terms  occurring 
in  the  Suttantas  Dhs  1296  sq,  ;  -vatthiini  the  physical 
bases  of  spiritual  exercise  in  the  Suttantas  Ps  i.i86. 

Sntti'  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  sukti,  given  as  pearl-shell  (Susruta),  and 
as  a  perfume]  in  kuruvindakasutti  a  powder  for  rubbing 
the  body  Vin  11. 107  ;  see  sotti. 

Sutti'  (f.)  [Sk.  sukti]  a  good  saying  Sdhp  340,  617. 

Suthita  (?)  beaten  out,  Miln  415  (with  vv.  II.  suthiketa. 
suphita  &  supita).  Should  we  read  su-pothita  ?  Kern, 
Toev.  11.85  proposes  su-pita  "  well  saturated  "  (with 
which  cp.  supayita  J  iv.118,  said  of  a  sword). 

Sndao  (indecl.)  [  =  Vedic  svid,  influenced  by  sma  :  see  su'] 
a  deictic  (seemingly  pleonastic)  particle  in  comb"  with 
demonstr.  pronouns  and  adverbs  ;  untranslatable,  unless 
by  "  even,  just,"  e.  g.  tapassi  sudag  homi,  lukha  ssudai) 
[sic]  homi  etc.  M  i.77  =  J  1.390;  cp.  itthar)  sudai)  thus 
Sn  p.  59  ;  tatrasudarj  there  Vin  1.4,  34  ;  iv.108  ;  D  1.87; 
11.91  ;  It  15;  api  ssudai)  D  11.264;  S  I.I  19;  api  sudag 
S  1. 1 13  ;  sa  ssudam  S  n.255. 

Sndda  [cp.  Vedic  ^udra]  (see  detail  under  vanna  6)  a  Sudra 
Vin  11.239;  D  1. 104;  in. 81,  95  sq.  (origin);  M  1.384; 
A  1. 162;  II. 194;  S  I.I02  ;  Pug  60;  Sn  314;  fem.  suddi 
D  1. 241  ;  A  III. 226,  229  ;  Vin  ni.133. 

Suddha  [pp.  of  sujjhati]  I.  clean,  pure,  Vin  1.16;  II. 152  ; 
D  I. no;  Sn  476.  — 2.  purified,  pure  of  heart  M  1.39; 
Dh  125,  412  ;  Sn9o  —  3.  simple,  mere,  unmixed,  nothing 
but  S  1. 135;  DhsA  72  ;  J  n.252  (°dandaka  just  the  stick), 
-antaparivasa  a  probation  of  complete  purification 
Vin  11.59  sq.  -ajiva  clean  livelihood  VbhA  116;  DhA 
iv.iii.  -ajivin  living  a  pure  life  Dp  366.  -inupassin 
considering  what  is  pure  Sn  788 ;  Nd'  85.  -avasa  pure 
abode,  name  of  a  heaven  and  of  the  dcvas  inhabiting 
it  D  11.50;  Vism  392.  Five  are  enum""  at  D  in. 237, 
viz.  Aviha,  Atappa,  Sudassa,  Sudassi,  Akanittha  ;  cp. 
M  in.  103.  -avasakayika  belonging  to  the  pure  abode, 
epithet  of  the  Suddhftvasa  dcvas  Vin  11.302  ;  D  11.253  : 
S  1.26.  -piti  whose  joy  is  pure  Mhvs  29,  49.  -buddhi 
of  pure  intellect  J  i.i.  -vagsata  purity  of  lineage 
Mhvs  59,  25.  -yasana  wearing  pure  clothes  Th  2,  338; 
ThA  239.  -valuka  white  sand  Mhvs  19,  37.  -sankha- 
rapuiija  a  mere  heap  of  sankharas  S  1.135. 


Suddhaka 


178 


Subhaga 


Suddhaka  (nt.)  [suddha  +  ka]  a  trifle,  a  minor  otience,  less   j 
than  a  Sanghadisesa  Vin  11.67. 

Saddhata  (£.)  [abstr.  It.  suddha]  purity  Sn  435. 

Suddhatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  suddha]  purity  D  11.14;  Vism44. 

Saddhi  (f.)  [fr.  ^adh]  purity,  purification,  genuineness, 
sterling  quality  D  1.54  ;  M  1.80  ;  11.132,  147  ;  S  1.166,  169, 
182;  IV. 372  ;  Th  2,  293;  DhA  111.158  (v.  1.  visuddhi) ; 
VvA  60  (payoga") ;  Vism  43  (fourfold  :  desana",  sag- 
vara°,  pariyetthi",  paccavekkhana") ;  Dhs  1005  ;  Sn  478  ; 
suddhigvada  stating  purity,  Sn  910;  Nd'  326;  suddhi- 
niya  leading  to  purity  Sn  910.     Cp.  pari",  vi°. 

-magga  the  path  of  purification  (cp.  visuddhi°)  S  1. 103. 

Suddhika  (adj.)  [suddhi  +  ka]  i.  connected  with  purifica- 
tion Dhs  519-522  ;  udaka-s.  pure  by  use  of  water  S  1.182  ; 
Vin  1. 196;  udakasuddhika  (f.)  cleaning  by  water  Vin 
IV. 362  ;  susana-s.  fastidious  in  the  matter  of  cemeteries 
J  11.54.^2.  pure,  simple;  orthodox,  schematized; 
justified  Ndi  89  (vatta") ;  Vism  63  (ekato  &  ubhato),  64 
(id.);  DhsA  185  (jhana). 

Sudba  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  sudha]  i.  the  food  of  the  gods,  ambrosia 
J  V.396;  Vism  258=  KhA  56  (sakkhara°). — 2.  lime, 
pleister,  whitewash,  cement  Vin  11. 154;  °-kamma  white- 
Wcishing,  coating  of  cement  J  vi.432  ;  Mhvs  38,  74. 

Sona^  [Sk.  suna,  pp.  of  ^u  to  swell]  swollen  Vin  11.253  '■ 
A  IV. 2  75,  470. 

Sana'  [Sk.  suna ;  see  suvaija]  a  dog,  also  written  suna 
J  VI.353.  357  (cp-  sunakha). 

Sanakha  [cp.  Sk.  Sunaka ;  the  BSk.  form  is  also  sunakha,- 
e.  g.  MVastu  111.361,  369]  a  dog  A  1.48;  11.122  ;  Th  2, 
509  ;  J  1. 175,  189  ;  II. 128,  246  ;  PvA  151,  206. —  rukkha° 
some  sort  of  animal  J  vi.538.  fern,  sunakhi  a  bitch 
J  IV. 400.  —  Names  of  some  dogs  in  the  Jatakasare  Kanha 
(or  Maha°)  J  iv.183;  Caturakkha  111535;  Jambuka, 
Pingiya  ibid. ;  Uhattabhuiijana  11.246.     Cp.  suva^a. 

Sonaggavellita  [su-l-agga-t-vellita,  perhaps  originally  su- 
v-agga°]  beautifully  curled  at  the  ends  (of  hair)  J  vi.86. 

Sundara  (adj.)  [cp.  Epic  &  Class.  Sk  sundara]  beautiful, 
good.  nice,  well  J  ii.ii,  98  ;  SnA  410,  493  (cp.  parovara). 
It  is  very  frequent  as  Commentary  word,  e.  g.  for  prefix 
su°  PvA  57,  77;  VvA  III  ;  for  subha  PvA  14,  44;  for 
sadhu  SnA  176  ;  for  sobhana  PvA  49  ;  for  seyyo  PvA  130. 

Sllpa^9a  [Vedic  suparna]  "  Fairwing "  a  kind,  of  fairy 
bird,  a  mythical  creature  (cp,  garula),  imagined  as 
winged,  considered  as  foe  to  the  nagas  D  11.259  ;  S  1. 148  ; 
J  1.202;  11.13,  i°7;  111.91,  187,  188;  VI. 256,  257; 
Visra  155  (°raja),  400;  Ndi  92,  448;  DhA  1.280;  PvA 
272;  DA  1.51;  Mhvs  14,  40;  ig.  20.  Four  kinds  S 
111.246. 

Supati  (suppati,  soppati)  [svap;  Vedic  svapiti  &  svapati  ; 
svapna  sleep  or  dream  (see  supina),  with  which  cp.  Gr. 
vn-TOc  sleep  =  Av.  xvafna,  Lat.  somnus,  Ags.  swefn. — 
Dhtp  481  "  saye  "]  to  sleep;  supati  Sn  no;  J  11. 61 
(sukhag  supati  he  sleeps  well) ;  v. 2 15  ;  Pv  11.9^*  ;  suppati 
S  1. 107;  soppati  S  1.107,  no;  Pot.  supe  S  i.iii;  ppr. 
supanto  Vin  1.15;  ppr.  med.  suppamana  J  in. 404  ;  aor. 
supi  Miln  89* ;  Vin  11.78 ;  PvA  195  (sukhag) ;  inf.  sottug 
S  I.I  1 1  ;  pp.  supita;  also  sutta'  &  sotta. 

Supava  [  =  suvana]  a  dog  D  ii.295  =  M  1.58,  88;  Sn  201  ; 
Miln  147.     Spelt  supana  at  J  iv.400. 

Supayika  J  iv.i  18  (read  ;  supayita).     See  under  su". 

Supita  [pp.  of  supati]  sleeping;  (nt.)  sleep  S  1.198  (ko 
attho  supitena)=  Sn  331  ;  SnA  338  ;  Pv  11. b^  (so  read  for 
supina  ?). 


Supina  (m.  &  nt.)  [Vedic  svapna;  the  contracted  P.  form 
is  soppa]  a  dream,  vision  D  1.9,  54;  S  1.198;  iv.117 
(supine  in  a  dream;  v.  1.  supinena) ;  Sn  360,  807,  927; 
Nd'  126  ;  J  1.334  sq.,  374  ;  v. 42  ;  DA  1.92,  164  ;  Vv  44^*  ; 
VbhA  407  (by  4  reasons),  408  (who  has  dreams);  DhA 
1.2  15.  The  five  dreams  of  the  Buddha  A  111.240  ;  J  1.69. 
dussupina  an  unplejisant  dream  J  1.335 )  PvX  105  (of 
Ajatasattu) ;  mangala°  a  lucky  |dream  J  vi.330  ;  maha- 
°g  passati  to  have  (lit.  see)  a  great  vision  J  1.336  sq. 
(the  16  great  visions) ;  °g  adisati  to  tell  a  dream  Nd^  381. 
—  Supina  at  Pv  11. 6I  read  supita. 

-anta  [anta  pleonastic,  cp.  ThA  258  "  supinam  eva 
supinantag  "]  a  dream  ;  abl.  "ante  in  a  dream  Th  2,  394  ; 
J  V.328  (spelt  suppante  ;  C.  sopp°  ;  expH as  "  supinena") ; 
instr.  "antena  id.  Vin  11. 125;  in. 112;  J  v.40  ;  vi.i3i  ; 
ThA  258;  IvhA  175;  SnA  80.  -pafhaka  a  dream-teller, 
astrologer  Ndi  381.  -sattha  science  of  dream-telling, 
oneiromantics  SnA  564. 

Supinaka  [supina -l-ka]  a  dream  Vin  11.25;  D  11.333; 
M  1.365;  J  V.354;  DA  1.92. 

Supita  read  Miln  415  for  suthita  (Kern's  suggestion).  See 
under  su°. 

Supothita  [su -f- pothita]  well  beaten;  perhaps  at  Miln  415 
for  suthita  (said  of  iron) ;  (nt.)  a  good  thrashing  DhA 
1.48. 

Suppa  [cp.  Vedic  surpa]  a  winnowing  basket  Ud  68 ;  J 
1.502;  11.428;  Vism  109  (4-sarava),  123;  Miln  282; 
DhA  1.174  (kattara°);  11. 131  ;  Mhvs  30,  9.  °-ka  a  toy 
basket,  little  sieve  DhsA  321  (-(-musalaka). 

Suppata  (f.)  [fr.  supa]  in  mugga-s.  pea-soup  talk,  sugared 
words  Miln  370.     See  under  mugga. 

Suppanta  see  under  soppa. 

Suplavattha  at  J  v. 408  is  doubtful  in  spelling  &  meaning. 
Perhaps  to  be  read  "  suplavantag  "  gliding  along 
beautifully;  C.  expl"'  as  "  sukheua  plavan'atthag." 

Subbaca  (adj.)  [su-l-vaca]  compliant,  meek  A  111.180.  See 
also  suvaca  (under  su°).     Der.  sovacassa. 

Subbhu  (adj.)  [su-(-bhii,  Sk.  bhru,  see  bhukuti]  having 
beautiful  eyebrows  J  iv.i8  (  =  subhamukha  C). 

Snbha  (adj.)  [Vedic  subhas  fr.  subh;  cp.  sobhati]  shining, 
bright,  beautiful  D  i. 76  =  11. I3  =  M  111.102;  Dhs  250; 
DA  1.22 1  ;  auspicious,  lucky,  pleasant  Sn  341  ;  It  80  ; 
good  Sn  824,  910;  subhato  maiinati  to  consider  as  a 
good  thing  Sn  199;  J  1.146;  cp.  S  iv.iii  ;  (nt.)  welfare, 
good,  pleasantness, cleanliness,  beauty,  pleasure  ;  -vasena 
for  pleasure's  sake  J  1.303,  304  ;  asubha  anything  repul- 
sive, disgusting  or  unpleasant  S  1.188;  v.320  ;  subha- 
subha  pleasant  and  unpleasant  Miln  136;  J  111.243 
(niraya  =  subhanag  asubhag  unpleasant  for  the  good, 
C. ) ;  cp.  below  subhasubha. 

-angana  with  beautiful  courts  J  vi.272.  -isubha  good 
and  bad,  pleasant  &  unpleasant  Dh  409  =  Sn  633.  -kinna 
the  lustrous  devas,  a  class  of  devas  D  11  69  ;  M  i  2  329, 
390  ;  III. 102  ;  A  1. 122  ;  J  111.358  ;  Kvu  207  ;  also  written 
"kinha  A  11.231,  233;  iv.40,  401;  Vism  414,  420  sq.  ; 
VbhA  520  ;  KhA  86.  -gati  going  to  bliss,  to  heaven 
Mhvs  25,  115.  -^thayin  exist  ng  or  remaining,  con- 
tinuing, in  glory  D  1.17  ;  DA  1.1 10  ;  A  v. 6a,  -dhatu  the 
element  of  splendour  S  11.150.  -nimitta  auspicious  sign, 
auspiciousness  as  an  object  of  one's  thought  M  i  26 ; 
A  1.3,  87,  200  ;  S  V.54,  103  ;  Vism  20.  -safifia  perception 
or  notion  of  what  is  pleasant  or  beautiful  Nett  27. 
Opp.  asubhasaiiiia  concept  of  repulsiveness  A  1.42 ; 
11.17  ;  111.79  ;  IV.46  ;  v.106.  See  asubha.  -safifiin  con- 
sidering as  beautiful  A  11.52. 

Subhaga  (adj.)  [su-l-bhaga]  lucky;  "karana  making  happy 
or  beloved  (by  charms)  D  i.ii;  DA  1.96.  —  Der.  so- 
bhagga 


Sumana 


179 


Susu 


Sumana  the  great-flowered  jasmine  J  1.62  ;  iv.455  ;  DhA 
IV.12.     In  composition  sumana". 

-dama  a  wreath  of  jasmine  J  iv.455.  -patta  cloth 
with  jasmine  pattern  J  1.62.  -puppha  j.  flower  Miln 
291  ;  VvA  147.  -makula  a  j.  bud  DhA  111.371.  -mala 
garland  of  j.  VvA  142. 

Samarati  see  sarati'. 

Sambhati  {&  sumhati)  [sambh  (?),  cp.  Geiger,  P.Gr.  60, 
128.  The  Dhtm  (306  lS;  548)  only  says  "  saijsum- 
bhane."  The  BSk.  form  is  subhati  MVeistu  1.14]  to 
push,  throw  over,  strike  J  in. 185  (sumh°) ;  vi.549. — 
pp.  sumbhita.  —  Cp.  a°,  pari". 

Sambtaita  [pp.  of  sumbhati]  knocked  over,  fallen  (over) 
Pv.\  I  74, 

Sayyati  is  Passive  of  sunati. 

Snra  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  sura  probably  after  asura]  god  Sn  681 
(  =  deva  SnA  484);  name  of  a  Bodhisatta  J  v. 12,  13; 
surakanna  a  goddess,  a  heavenly  maid  J  v. 407  (  =  deva- 
dhita,  C.) ;  surinda  the  king  of  gods  Mhbv  28.  Opp. 
asura. 

Sarsta  (adj.)  [su  +  rata]  (in  good  sense:)  well-loving, 
devoted  :  see  soracca;  (in  bad  sense :)  sexual  intercourse, 
thus  wrongly  for  soracca  at  J  in. 442  C,  with  expl"  as 
"  dussilya."     Cp.  surata. 

Sura  (f  )  [Vedic  sura]  spirituous  (intoxicating)  liquor 
("drink")  Vin  11.295.  301;  iv.iio;  D  1.146;  A  1.212, 
295  ;  It  63  ;  J  1. 199,  252  (tikhinai)  surar)  yojetva  mixing 
a  sharp  drink);  DhA  11. 9  ;  Dh  247;  as  nt.  at  J  vi.23 
(v.  1.  sura  as  gloss).  —  Five  kinds  of  sura  are  mentioned, 
viz.  pittha",  puva°,  odana"  (odaniya"),  kinnapakkhitta°, 
sambhara-sjiriyutta"  VvA  73  ;  VbhA  381. 

-Adhitthaka  addicted  to  drink  J  v. 42  7.  -geha  a 
drinking  house  J  1.302.  -ghata  a  pitcher  of  liquor 
J  III. 477.  -ghara  =  °geha  J  v. 367.  -chana  a  drinking 
festival  J  1.489;  DhA  iii.ioo.  -dhutta  a  drunkard 
Sn  106  ;  J  1.268  ;  111.260.  -nakkhatta  a  drinking  festival 
J  362;  SnA  185.  -pana  drinking  strong  liquor  J  1.50; 
IV.23 ;  VbhA  383.  -payika  a  woman  drinking  liquor 
J  V.I  I.  -pipasita  thirsty  after  strong  drink  S  11. no. 
-pita  one  who  has  drunk  liquor  J  1.426.  -mada  tipsiness. 
intoxication  A  iv.213;  J  1.352,  362.  -meraya  (-pana) 
(drinking)  rum  &  spirits  A  1.261  ;  11.53.  See  also  (panca-) 
sikkhapada.  -vitthaka  bowl  for  drinking  spirits  J  v.42  7  ; 
DhA  III. 66.  -sonda  a  drunkard  DhA  III.  1 29.  -sondaka 
id.  J  v.433. 

Sariya  [Vedic  surya  cp.  suvar  light,  heaven  ;  Idg.  *sauel, 
as  in  Gr.  >/\iof ,  Lat.  sol..  Goth,  sauil  sun  ;  Oir.  suil  "eye  "  ; 
cp.  also  Gr.  aiXas  splendour,  nMjvq  moon,  &  many 
others,  for  which  see  Walde,  Lai.  Wlb.  s.  v.  sf,l]  i.  the 
sun  Vin  1.2;  D  11. 319;  Sn  687;  A  1.227;  S  v.29  sq.  ; 
J  11.73;  Vism  231  (in  simile),  416  (the  seventh  sun),  41 7 
(myth  of  pop.  etym.),  690  (in  sira.) ;  Miln  299  ;  KhA  2 1 
(bala°,  in  simile) ;  PvA  137,  21 1  ;  VbhA  519  ;  size  of  the 
sun  DhsA  318;  suriyag  ufthapeti  to  go  on  till  sunrise 
J  1. 318.  • —  2.  the  sun  as  a  god  D  11.259  ;  S  1.51  ;  J  iv.63, 
etc. ;  vi.89,  90,  201,  247,  263,  etc. 

-atthangamana  sunset  VvA  295.  -uggamana  sunrise 
Mhvs  23,  22  ;  J  1. 107.  -kanta  the  sun-gem,  a  kind  of 
gem  Miln  118.  -ggaha  eclipse  of  the  sun  D  1,10; 
J  1.374.  -mandala  the  orb  of  the  sun  A  1.283  ;  Dhs  617. 
-rasmi  a  sunbeam  J  1.502.  -vattika  a  sun-worshipper 
Ndi  89. 

Sura  (indecl.)  [onamat.]  a  hissing  sound  ("  sum  ");  suru- 
suru-karakai)  (adv.)  after  the  manner  of  making  hissing 
sounds  (when  eating)  Vin  11. 214;  iv.197. 

Sartmga  [a  corruption  of  ffT'piyi]  a  subterranean  passage 
Mhvs  7,  14  sq. 


SnlasI  (f .)  [cp.  Sk.  surasi,  "  basilienkraut  "  BR ;  fr.  surasa] 
a  medicinal  plant  Vin  1.201  ;  cp.  DeSinamamala  vin.40. 

Salop!  (f.)  a  kind  of  small  deer  J  vi.437,  438. 

Sava  [cp.  Sk.  Suka]  a  parrot  J  1.324  ;  iv.277  sq.  ;  vi.421  ; 
431  sq.  (the  tw^o:  Pupphaka  &  Sattigumba) ;  DhA  1.284 
(°raja).     fem.  suvi  J  vi.421. 

Snvawa  [Sk.  suvarija]  of  good  colour,  good,  favoured, 
beautiful  D  1.82  ;  Dhs  223  ;  It  99  ;  A  iv.255  ;  Pug  60  ; 
J  1.226;  suvanna  (nt.)  gold  S  IV. 325  sq.  ;  Sn  48,  686; 
Nd'  687  (  =  jatarupa);  KhA  240;  VvA  104;  often  to- 
gether with  hiranna  Vin  111.16,  48;  D  11. 179;  °-ani  pi. 
precious  things  J  i  206.  —  Cp.  sonna. 

-i^thaka  gilt  tiles  DhA  111.29,  61  ;  VvA  157.  -kara 
goldsmith  D  1.78 ;  M  ii.iS  ;  111.243  '■  A  1253  sq.  ;  J  1.182  ; 
V.438  sq.  ;  Nd^  478;  Vism  376  (in  sim.) ;  DhA  iir.340  ; 
SnA  15  ;  VbhA  222  (in  sim).  -gabbha  a  safe  (-room) 
for  gold  DhA  iv.105.  -guha  "  golden  cave,"  N.  of  a  cave 
SnA  66.  -torana  gilt  spire  VbhA  112.  -patta  a  golden 
(writing)  slab  J  IV.7  ;  SnA  228,  578;  DhA  iv.89.  -pa- 
naka  a  golden  diadem  Miln  210.  -pabbata  N.  of  a 
mountain  SnA  358.  -passa  id.  SnA  66.  -paduka 
golden  slippers  Vin  1.15.  -maya  made  of  gold  J  1,146. 
-mala  golden  garland  DhA  1,388.  -mendaka  a  golden 
ram  DhA  III. 364  ;  iv.2i7;  -bhinkara  a  g  vase  Mhbv  154 
-bhumi  "  gold-land."  N.  of  Cambodia  Nd^  155.  -raja- 
harjsa  golden-coloured  royal  mallard  J  1.342.  -vanna 
gold-coloured  (of  the  body  of  the  Yathagata)  D  111.143, 
'59  ;  J  n.104  ;  rv.333  ;  DhA  in. 113.  -vithi  golden  street 
(in  Indra's  town)  J  v. 386.  -sivika  ag.  litter  DhA  in.  164. 
-haijsa  golden  swan  J  1.207  ;  11.353 ;  SnA  277,  349. 

Savawata  (f.)  [abstr.  fr.  suvanna]  beauty  of  colour  or 
complexion  Pug  34. 

Sava^a  (&  suvana)  [cp.  Sk.  4van,  also  Svana  (f.  Svani) :  fr. 
Vedic  ace.  Suvanar),  of  ^van.  For  etym.  cp.  Gr.  kvu-v, 
Av.  spa,  Lat.  canis,  Oir.  cu,  Goth,  hunds]  a  dog  M  111.91 
(  =  supana  M  1.58) ;  J  vi.247  (the  2  dogs  of  hell :  Sabala 
&  Sama) ;  Vism  259  (  =  supana  KhA  58).  As  suva°  at 
Sdhp  379,  408. — -See  also  the  var.  forms  san,  suna, 
suna,  sunakha,  supana,  soiia. 

-doni  a  dog's  (feeding)  trough  Vism  344,  358 ;  VbhA 
62.  -pinda  a  dog  biscuit  Vism  344.  -vamathu  dog's 
vomit  Vism  344  (  =  suva-vanta  Sdhp  379). 

Sovanaya  [su-v-anaya]  easy  to  bring  S  1.124=  J  ^■^• 

Savamin  [metric  for  samin]  a  master  Sn  666. 

Save  see  sve. 

Sosana  (nt.)  [cp.  Vedic  ^masana]  a  cemetery  Vin  1.15,  50  ; 
II. 146 ;  D  1.71  ;  A  1.241  ;  11.210 ;  Pug  59  ;  J  1.175 ;  Nd' 
466;  Nd'  342  ;  Vism  76,  180  ;  PvA  80,  92,  163,  195  sq. 
amaka-s.  a  place  where  the  corpses  are  left  to  rot  J 
1. 61,  372  ;  VI. 10;  DhA  1. 176.     Cp.  sosanika. 

-aggi  a  cemetery  fire  Vism  54.  -gopaka  the  cemetery 
keeper  DhA  1.69.  -vaddhana  augmenting  the  cemetery, 
(it  to  be  thrown  into  the  cemetery  Th  2,  380.  Cp. 
katasi". 

Sasanaka  (adj.)  [fr.  last]  employed  in  a  cemetery  Mhvs  10, 
91. 

Sosira  (adj.-nt.)  [Sk.  §u§ira]  perforated,  full  of  holes, 
hollow  J  1. 1 46;  Sn  199;  J  1. 1 72,  442;  DA  1.26 1  ;  Miln 
112;  Vism  ig4  =  DhsA  199;  KhA  172  ;  asusira  DhA 
II. 148  (Bdhgh  for  eka-ghatia).     (nt.)  a  hole  ;  PvA  62. 

Susa'  [cp.  Sk.  SiSu]  a  boy,  youngster,  lad  Vin  111.147  = 
J  11.284;  Vv  64'*  (  =  dahara  C.)  ;  Sn  420;  D  1.115; 
M  1.82;  A  11.22;  J  11.57;  ajaniya-susupama  M  1.445, 
read  ajaniy-ass-upama  (cp.Th  i,  72).  —  In  phrase  susu- 
kaja  the  susu  is  a  double  su°,  in  meaning  "very,  very 
black"  (see  under  k3|a-kesa),  e  g.  D  i.ii5  =  M  1,82  = 


Susu 


i8o 


Suyati 


A  11.22  =  111.66=  J  11.57;  expl''  as  sutthu-ka]a  DA  1.284. 
—  susunaga  a  young  elephant  D  11.254. 

Susu^  the  sound  susu,  hissing  J  in. 347  (cp.  su  and  su) ; 
ThA  189. 


the  name  of  a  sort  of  water  animal  (alligator  or  sea- 
cow  ?)  J  VI. 537  (plur.  susu)  =  v.255  (kumbhila  makasa 
susu). 

Snsaka  (f.)  an  alligator  Vin  1.200  ;  A  11. 123  (where  id.  p.  at 
Nd^  470  has  sugsumara) ;  M  1.459  ;  Miln  196. 

Sussati  [Vedic  ^usyati ;  §u?  (  =  sosana  Dhtp  457)]  to  be 
dried,  to  wither  Sn  434  ;  J  1.503  ;  11.424  ;  VI.5  (being 
thirsty);  ppr.  med  sussamana  J  1.498;  Sn  434  ; -iut. 
sussissati  J  1.48  ;  ger.  sussitva  J  11. 5,  339  ;  PvA  152.  Cp. 
vissussati  &  sukkhati.  —  Caus.  soseti  (q.  v.). 

Sassasa  (adj.)  wishing  to  hear  or  learn,  obedient  S  1.6; 
J  IV.I34- 

Sussiisati  [Desid.  fr.  sunati ;  Sk.  susrusati]  to  wish  to  hear, 
to  listen,  attend  D  1.230  ;  A  1.72  ;  iv.393  ;  aor.  sussusimsu 
Vin  1. 10  ;  ppr.  med.  sussusamana  Sn  383. 

Sassusa  (f)  [Class.  Sk.  5uSru§a]  wish  to  hear,  obedience, 
attendance  D  111.189;  A  v.  136;  Th  i,  588;  Sn  186; 
J  in. 526;  Miln  115. 

Snssiisin  (adj.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  SuSrusin]  obedient,  trusting 
J  111.525- 

Sahata  (f.)  [sukha  +  ta]  happiness  J  in. 158. 

Sahita  (adj.')  [su  +  hita]  satiated  M  1.30;  J  1.266,  361; 
V.384  ;  Miln  249. 

Su  (indecl.)  an  onomat.  part.  "  shoo,"  applied  to  hissing 
sounds:  see  su'.  Also  doubled:  su  sii  DhA  1.171; 
in. 352.     Cp.  sukara  &  siisuyati. 

Siika  [cp.  Sk.  §uka]  the  awn  of  barley  etc.  S  v. 10,  ^j 
A  1.8. 

Sokara  [Sk.  sukara,  perhaps  as  su  +  kara;  cp.  Av.  hu  pig, 
Gt.iiq;  Lat.sus;  Ags.  su  =  E.  sow]  a  hog,  pig  Vin  1.200  ; 
D  1.5;  A  11.42  (kukkuta+).  209;  It  36;  J  1.197 
(Munika);  11. 419  (Saluka) ;  111.287  (CuUatundila  & 
Maha-tundila) ;  Miln  118,  2  67;VbhA  ii  (vara-sayane 
sayapita).  —  f.  siikari  J  11.406  (read  vanjha"). 

-antaka  a  kind  of  girdle  Vin  11. 136.  -inar|sa  pork 
A  III. 49  (sampanna-kolaka).  -maddava  is  with  Franke 
(Digha  trsl'  222  sq.)  to  be  interpreted  as  "  soft  (tender) 
boar's  flesh."  So  also  Oldenberg  [Reden  des  B.  1922, 
100)  &  Fleet  (J.R.A.S.  1906,  656  &  881).  Scarcely  with 
Rh.  D.  (Dial.  11.137,  with  note)  as  "  quantity  of  truffles  " 
D  II. 127;  Ud  81  sq.  ;  Miln  175.  -potaka  the  young  of 
a  pig  J  V.I9.  -sali  a  kind  of  wild  rice  J  vi.531  (v.  1. 
sukasali). 

Sukarika  [fr.  sukara;  BSk.  saukarika  Divy  505]  a  pig- 
killer,  pork-butcher  S  11.257  '•  A  n.207  ;  111.303  ;  Pug  56  ; 
Th  2,  242  ;  J  vi.i  1 1  ;  ThA  204. 

Sucaka  [fr.  s&C  to  point  out]  an  informer,  slanderer  S  11.257 
(  =  pesuniia-karaka  C);  Sn  246.     Cp.  sag". 

SQcana  (nt.)  indicating,  exhibiting  Dhtp  592  (for  gandh). 

Sfici  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  suci ;  doubtful  whether  to  siv]  a  needle 
Vin  H.115,  117,  177;  S  II. 215  sq.,  257;  J  i.iii,  248; 
Vism  284  (in  simile) ;  a  hairpin  Th  2,  254  ;  J  1.9  ;  a  small 
door-bolt,  a  pin  to  secure  the  bolt  M  1.126  ;  Th  2,  1 16  ; 
J  1.360;  V.294  (so  for  suci);  ThA  117;  cross-bar  of  a 
rail,  railing  [cp.  BSk.  siici  Divy  221]  D  11. 179. 


-kara  a  needle-maker  S  11.2 16.  -ghatika  a  small 
bolt  to  a  door.  Vin  11.237;  Ud  52;  A  rv.206  ;  J  1.346; 
VI. 444  ;  Vism  394.  -ghara  a  needle  case  Vin  11. 301  sq. ; 
rv.123,  167;  S  II. 231  ;  J  1.170.  -nalika  a  needle-case 
made  of  bamboo  Vin  ii.i  16  -mukha"  needle-mouthed," 
a  mosquito  Abhp  646;  a  sort  of  intestinal  worm;  °a 
pana  (in  the  Guthaniraya  purgatory)  M  in.  185.  -loma 
needle-haired,  having  hair  like  needles  S  11.257;  name 
of  a  Yakkha  at  Gaya  S  1.207  ;  Sn  p.  48  ;  SnA  551  ;  Vism 
208.  -vatta  needle-faced,  having  a  mouth  like  a  needle 
Pgdp  55.     -vanijaka  a  needle-seller  S  11.215. 

Sucika  (f.)  [fr.  suci]  i.  a  needle;  (fig.)  hunger  Pv  11. 8' ; 
PvA  107.  —  2.  a  small  bolt  to  a  door  Vin  n.120,  148.  — 
siicik'attha  whose  bones  are  like  needles  (?)  Pv  in. 2'  ; 
PvA  180  (sucigata  ti  va  patho.  Vijjhanatthena  sucika 
ti  laddhanamaya  khuppipasaya  ajjhapi|ita.  Sucikaijtha 
ti  keci  pathanti.  Siicichiddasadisa  mukhadvara  ti 
attho). 

Sujn  (adj.)  [su-fuju]  upright  Sn  143  =  Kh  ix.i  (  =  sutthu 
uju  KhA  236). 

Suna  (f.)  a  slaughter-house  J  vi.62  ;  see  siina. 

S&ta  [Sk.  siita]  a  charioteer  J  iv.408 ;  a  bard,  panegyrist 
J  1.60  ;  v. 258. 

Sfitighara  (nt.)  [suti -(- ghara]  a  lying-in-chamber  J  iv.188; 
VI, 485  ;  Vism  259  (KhA  pasuti") ;  VbhA  33,  242. 

Suda  [Sk.  siida;  for  etym.  see  sadu]  a  cook  D  1.51  ;  S  v.149 
sq. ;  J  V.292  ;  DA  1.157;  Vism  150  (in  simile);  Pv 
11.9",  9=". 

Sadaka=suda  (cook)  J  v.507. 

Suna  [Sk.  ^una]  swollen  Miln  357''  ;  J  vi.555  ;  often  wrongly 
spelt  suna  (q.  v.)  Vin  ii.253  =  A  iv.275  (cp.  Leumann, 
Golt.  Anz.,  1899,  p.  595);  DhsA  197  (suna-bhava). 

Suna  (f.)  [Sk.  siina]  a  slaughter-house  Vin  1.202  ;  n.267; 
asisuna  the  same  Vin  11.26;  M  1.130,  143;  also  suna 
J  villi  ;  and  siina  J  v. 303  ;  siinapana  J  vi.iii  ;  suna- 
ghara  Vin  in.59  ;  suna-nissita  Vin  in. 151  ;  sunakara- 
ghara  VbhA  252 

Sunn  [Vedic  siinu,  fr.  sii,  cp.  siiti]  a  son,  child  Mhvs  38,  87. 

Supa  [Vedic  siipa,  cp.  Ags.  supan  =  Ger.  saufen ;  Ohg. 
suf  =  soup]  broth,  soup,  curry  Vin  11.77,  214  sq.  ; 
IV. 192;  D  1. 105;  S  v.i2g  sq.  (their  var.  flavours); 
A  III. 49  (aneka°) ;  J  11.66  ;  Vism  343.  samasupaka  with 
equal  curry  Vin  iv.192.  Also  nt.  Vin  1.239*1  (-ani)  and 
f .  supi  J  IV. 352  (bidalasiipiyo) ;  siipavyaiijanaka  a 
vessel  for  curry  and  sauce  Vin  1.240. 
-vyafijana  curry  J  1.197. 

Supatittha  (adj.)  [su -t- upatittha.  the  latter  =  tittha,  cp. 
upavana :  vana]  with  beautiful  banks.  '  Usually  spelt 
su°,  as  if  su-fpatittha  (see  patittha),  e.  g.  Vin  in. 108; 
J  VI. 518,  555  (  =  sobhana°);  D  11. 129;  Ud  83;  Pv  11. 1*° 
(  =  sundara-tittha  PvA  77).  But  su°  at  M  1.76,  283; 
Ap  333- 

Supadharita=su-l-upadharita  well-known  Miln  10. 

Supika  [supa-)-ika]  a  cook  DA  1.157  ;  J  vi.62  (v.  1.),  277. 

Supin  (adj.)  [fr.  supa]  having  curry,  together  with  curry 
J  111.328- 

Supeyya  (nt.)  [fr.  supa  =  Sk.  siipya]  i.  belonging  to  soup, 
broth,  soup  M  1.448;  S  in. 146.  —  2.  curry  D  11.198; 
Nd'  314  ;  DhA  iv.209. 

-panna  curry  leaf,  curry  stuff  Vism  250  =  VbhA  233; 
J  1.98,  99  ;  -saka  a  potherb  for  making  curry  J  iv.445. 

Suyati  is  passive  of  sunati. 


Sura 


i8i 


Setu 


Sura'  [Vedic  4ura,  fr.  4n]  valiant,  courageous  S  1.2 1  ; 
J  1.262,  320  ;  ii.iig  ;  (m.)  a  hero,  a  valiant  m^n  D  1.51, 
89  ;  in. 59,  142,  145  sq.  ;  A  IV. 107,  1 10  ;  Sn  8ji  ;  DA  157, 
250  ;  (nt.)  valour  S  v. 227.  read  suriya. 

-katha  a  tale  about  heroes  D  1.8  ;  DA  1.90  -kaka 
the  valiant  crow  DhA  111.352.  -bhava  strength,  valour 
J  1. 130  ;  Vism  417  (in  def.  of  suriya). 

Sfira"  [Vedic  sura]  the  sun  ThA  150  (Ap  v.90)  ;  J  v.56. 

Soiata  [=surata]  soft,  mild  J  vi.286;  Mhbv  75;  kindly 
disposed  S  iv.305.     Cp.  surata  &  sorata. 

Sarin  (adj.)  [fr.  siirai]  wise  Mhvs  26,  23. 

Sariya  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  sura']  valour  S  v. 227  (text,  siira) ; 
J  1.282  ;  Miln  3. 

Sflla  [cp.  Vedic  Sula]  (m.andnt.)  i.  a  sharp-pointed  instru- 
ment, a  stake  Th  2,  488  ;  S  v.41 1  ;  Pv  iv.i'  ;  Vism  489 
(in  compar.).  646  (khadira",  ayo",  suvanna") ;  ThA  288  ; 
J  1. 143,  326;  sule  uttaseti  to  impale  A  1.48;  J  1.326; 
11.443;  rv.29  ;  appeti  the  same  J  111.34;  vi.17,  or 
aropeti  PvA  220.  ayasiUa  an  iron  stake  J  iv.29  ; 
Sn  667;  cp.  asi°  &  satti".  —  2.  a  spit  J  1.2 11  ;  roasted 
on  a  spit,  roasted  meat  J  111.220  ;  mar)sa°  the  same,  or 
perhaps  a  spit  with  roasted  meat  J  111.52,  220.  — -  3.  an 
acute,  sharp  pain  DhsA  397  ;  sula  (f.)  the  same  A  v.i  10'. 
Cp.  def"  of  8Ul  as  "  ruja  "  at  Dhtp  272. 

-aropana  impaling,  execution  Miln  197,  290.  -koti 
the  point  of  the  stake  DhA  11.240. 

SaJ&ra  (adj.)  [su  +  ulara]  magnificent  Mhvs  28,  i. 

Sasayati  [Denom.  fr.  su]  to  make  a  hissing  sound  "  su  sii  " 
(of  a  snake)  DhA  11.257  (v.-  '•  susumayati). 

8e  (pron.)  =  tag:  see  under  sa*. 

Seka  [fr.  sic,  see  sincati]  sprinkling  J  1.93  (suvanija-rasa-s.- 
pinjara). 

Sekata  (nt.)  [Sk.  saikata]  a  sandbank  Davs  1.32. 

Sekadhari  (f.)  (?)  J  vi.536  (nilapupphi-°,  C.  nilapupphiti 
adika  pupphavalliyo). 

Sekha  (&  sekkha)  [cp.  Sk.  ^aiksa  ;  fr.  siks,  sikkhati]  belong- 
ing to  training,  in  want  of  training,  imperfect  Vin  1.17, 
248  ;  111.24  ;  Dhs  1016  ;  one  who  has  still  to  learn,  denotes 
one  who  has  not  yet  attained  Arahantship  D  11. 1 43  ; 
M  1.4,  144  ;  A  1.63  ;  Pug  14  ;  It  9  sq.,  53,  71  ;  Sn  970, 
1038  =  5  11.47;  definition  A  1.231  ;  S  v. 14,  145,  175, 
229  sq.,  298,  327;  Nd'  493  (sikkhati  ti  sekkho,  etc.) 
=  Nd«  689;  VbhA  328.  s.  patipada  the  path  of  the 
student  M  1.354;  111.76,  300;  s.  sila  the  moral  practice 
of  the  student  A  1.2 19  sq. ;  11.6,  86  sq.  ;  asekha  not 
to  be  trained,  adept,  perfect  Vin  1.62  sq.  ;  in. 24 ; 
Pug  14  (  =  arahant).     See  asekha. 

-bala  the  strength  of  the  disciple,  of  five  kinds  A  11.  i  50. 
-saininata  esteeme(^  to  be  under  discipline,  educated 
Vin  IV.  179. 

Sekhavant  (?)  quick  J  vi.199  (v.  1.  sighavant). 

Sekhiya  [fr.  sekha]  connected  with  training ;  s.  dhamma 
rule  of  good  breeding  Vin  rv.185  sq. 

Segalaka  (nt.)  [fr.  sigala]  a  jackal's  cry  A  1.187  sq.  (°i) 
nadati);  cp.  sigalika. 

Secanaka  [fr.  seceti]  sprinkling  J  v:.69  ;  neg.  asecanaka 

(q.v.). 

Seceti  see  siiicati. 

Seccha=sa-iccha,  Sdhp  249. 

Setthabest,  excellent  D  1.18,  98;  S  111.13;  Sn  47,  181,  822, 
907:  Dh  I,  26;  J  1.443;  Nd'  84  =  Nd*  502  (with  syn.) ; 
J  1.88;  cp.  setthatara  J  v.  148. 


-kamma  excellent,  pious  deeds  Mhvs  59,  9.     -sam- 
mata  considered  the  best  J  iii.  in. 

Setthi  [fr.  seuha,  Sk.  Sresthin]  foreman  of  a  guild,  treasurer, 
banker,  "City  man",  wealthy  merchant  Vin  1.15  sq., 
271  sq.  ;  II. no  sq.,  157;  S  1.89;  J  1. 122;  11.367  etc.; 
Rajagaha°  the  merchant  of  Rajagaha  Vin  11.154; 
J  IV.37 ;  Baranasi°  the  merchant  of  Benares  J  1.242, 
269  ;  jana-pada-setthi  a  commercial  man  of  the  country 
J  IV. 37  ;  setthi  gahapati  Vin  1.273  ;  S  i  92  ;  there  were 
families  of  setthis  Vin  1.18;  J  iv.62  ;  "-tthana  the 
position  of  a  setfhi  J  11.122,  231;  hereditary  J  1.231, 
243  ;  11.64  '■  "'^TS  ;  rv.62  etc.  ;  set^h4nusetthi  treasurers 
and  under-treasurers  Vin  1. 18;  seeVinaya  Texts  1.102. 

Setthitta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  setthi]  the  office  of  treasurer  or 
(wholesale)  merchant  S  1.92 . 

Se^i  (f.)  [Class.  Sk.  5reni  in  meaning  "guild";  Vedic  = 
row]  1.  a  guild  Vin  iv.226 ;  J  1.267,  3'4;  iv.43  ;  Davs 
II. 124;  their  number  was  eighteen  J  vi.22,  427;  VbhA 
466.  °-pamukha  the  head  of  a  guild  J  11.12  (text  seni-). 
—  2.  a  division  of  an  army  J  vi.583  ;  ratha-°  J  vi.8i,  49  ; 
seijimokkha  the  chief  of  an  army  J  vi.37i  (cp.  sena  and 
seniya). 

Seta  (adj.)  [Vedic  Sveta  &  Ivitra;  cp.  Av.  spaeta  white; 
Lith.  szaityti  to  make  light ;  6hg.  hwiz  =  E.  white]  white 
D  ii.297  =  M  1.58;  Sn  689;  A  111. 241  ;  VbhA  63  (opp. 
kaja);  J  1.175;  PvA  157,  215.  name  of  a  mountain  in 
the  Himalayas  S  i.67  =  Miln  242;  an  elephant  of  King 
Pasenadi  A  111.345. 

-anga  white  bodied  Mhvs  10,54.  -a^hika  lit .  (having) 
white  bones,  (suffering  from)  famine  [cp.  BSk.  ^vetasthi 
Divy  131]  Vin  111. 6  ;  rv.23  ;  S  iv.323  ;  A  1.160  ;  iv.279.  — 
f.  mildew  Vin  11.256  ;  J  v. 401.  -odaka  clear  (transparent) 
water  Pv  11.  i*".  -kambala  white  blanket  J  iv,353. 
-kamma  whitewashing  J  vi.432 .  -kuftha  white  leprosy 
J  V.69  ;  VI.  196.  -geru  N.  of  a  plant  J  vi.535.  -cchatta 
a  white  parasol,  an  emblem  of  royalty  D  11.19  ;  A  1.145  ; 
J  1. 177,  267;  PvA  74;  DhA  1. 167;  III. 120.  -pacchada 
with  white  covering  S  rv.292  =  Ud  76  =  DhsA  397. 
•puppha  "  white-flowered,"  N.  of  a  tree  (Vitex  trifolia  ?) 
J  v. 422  (  =  piyaka).  -vari  (&  "varisa)  names  of  plants 
or  trees  J  vi.535,  536. 

Setaka  (adj.)  [seta  +  ka]  white,  transparent  D  11.129; 
M  1.76,  167,  283. 

Setaccba  a  tree  J  vi.535  ;  setacchakuta  adj.  J  vi.539 
(sakuna). 

Setapawi  (f  [?])  a  tree  J  vi.335. 

Seti  &  sayati  [si,  Vedic  iete  &  Sayate ;  cp.  Av.  saete=Gr. 
ctirni  to  lie,  li-rjaKOf  ("  ocean  ")=  Sk.  a-^ay5nah,  coi/iau 
to  put  to  sleep ;  Ags.  haeman  to  marry ;  also  Lat. 
civis=citizen.  —  The  Dhtp  simply  defines  as  saya  (374)] 
to  lie  down,  to  sleep  ;  (applied)  to  be  in  a  condition,  to 
dwell,  behave  etc.  —  Pres.  seti  S  1.41,  47,  198  (kig  sesi 
why  do  you  lie  asleep  ?  Cp.  Pv  11,6') ;  J  1.141  ;  Dh  79, 
168;  Sn  200;  VvA  42;  sayati  Vin  1.57;  J  n.53  i  E*A. 
1.261.  Pot.  sayeyya  Pv  11. 3,*  &  saye  It  120.  ppr, 
sayai)  It  82,  117;  Sn  193  ;  sayana  (med.)  D  1.90 ;  11.292  ; 
M  1.57;  It  117;  Sn  1 1 45;  &  seraana  D  11.24;  M  188; 
S  1.121  ;  J  1. 180;  also  sayamana  Th  i,  95.  —  Fut. 
sessati  S  1.83  ;  Sn  970  ;  DhA  1.320.  —  Aor.  sesi  J  v. 70  ; 
settha  Sn  970;  sa^i  J  vi.197,  asayittha  J  1335-  —  1°^- 
sayitug  PvA  157;  ger.  sayitva  J  n.77.  —  pp.  sayita 
(q.  v.).  —  Cans.  II.  sayapeti  to  make  lie  down,  to  bed 
on  a  couch  etc.  J  1.245  ;  v. 461  ;  Mhvs  31,  35  ;  PvA  104. 
—  pp.  sayapita.  —  sukhag  seti  to  be  at  ease  or  happy 
S  1. 2 12;  J  v. 242  (ratthar)  i.  e.  is  prosperous);  opp. 
dukkhai)  s.  to  be  miserable  A  1.137. 

Seta  [Vedic  setu,  to  si  or  gi  (see  sinoti) ;  cp.  Av.  haetu 
dam  ;  Lat.  saeta ;  Ags  sada  rope ;  etc.]  a  causeway, 
bridge  Vin  1.230  =  0  11.89;  J  1.199;  Vism  412  (simile)j 


Seda 


182 


Seleti 


DhA  1.83;  SnA  357;  PvA  102,  151,  215.  uttara°-  a 
bridge  for  crossing  over  M  1.134;  S  iv.174;  Miln  194; 
nala-"  a  bamboo  bridge  Th  i,  7. 

-karaka  a  bridge-maker,  one  who  paves  the  way 
S  1.33  ;  Kv  345,  -ghata  pulling  down  of  the  bridge 
(leading  to  something)  Vin  1.59;  in.6 ;  A  1.220.  261; 
II.  145  sq.  ;  Dhs  299  ;  DhsA  219  ;  DA  1.305  ;  Nd^  462  ; 
DhA  IV.36. 

Seds  [Vedic  sveda,  fr.  svid,  op.  Av.  xvaeda,  Gr.  I'i'pwi-,  Lat. 
sudor,  Ags.  svat  =  E,  sweat]  sweat  D  11.293  '■  A  11.67  sq.  ; 
It  76;  Sn  196;  J  I.I  18,  138,  146,  243;  in  detail 
(physiologically)  at  Vism  262,  360 ;  VbhA  66,  245  ; 
sweating  for  medicinal  purposes,  maha"  a  great  steam- 
bath  ;  sambhara"  bringing  about  sweating  by  the  use 
of  herbs,  etc.;  seda-kamma  sweating  Vin  1.205.  —  pi. 
seda  drops  of  perspiration  DhA  1.253. 

-ivakkhitta  earned  in  the  sweat  of  the  brow  A  11. 67 
sq..  III. 45,  76  ;  IV. 95,  282.  -gata  sweat-covered,  sweating 
VvA  305.  -mala  the  stain  of  sweat  J  111.290  ;  Vbh.\  276. 
-yusa  sweat  Vism  195. 

Sedaka  (adj.)  [fr.  seda]  sweating,  transpiring  D  11.265. 

Sedita  [pp.  of  sedeti]  moistened  J  1.52  (su°).     Cp.  pari". 

Sedeti  [Cans,  of  sijjati]  to  cause  to  transpire,  to  heat,  to 
steam  J  IV. 238  ;  v. 271  ;  KhA  52,  67;  Vin  111.82  (aor. 
sedesi) ;  ger.  sedetva  J  1.324  ;  11.74  •  PP-  sedita.  Caus  II. 
sedapeti  J  in. 122. 

Sena'  [  =  sayana]  lying,  sleeping;  couch,  b'ed  J  v.96  (  =  sa- 

yana). 
Sena^  [Sk.  Syena]  a  hawk  J  1.273  ;  11. 51,  60  ;  DhA  11.267. 

Senaka'  a  carter  ThA  271  (  =  sakatika  of  Th  2,  443). 

Senaka'  =  sena2  J  iv.58,  291  ;  vi.246. 

Sena  [Vedic  sena'  perhaps  fr.  si  to  bind]  an  army  Vin 
1. 241  ;  IV. 104  sq.  (where  described  as  consisting  of  hatth!, 
assa,  ratha,  patti),  160  ;  S  i.i  12  ;  A  111.397  ;  v. 82  ;  J  11.94  '■ 
Miln  4  ;  Nd^  95  (Mara°),  174  (id.). 

-gutta  [sena°]  a  high  official,  a  minister  of  war,  only 
in  cpd.  maha-°  J  VI.2,  54;  mahasenaguttatthana  the 
position  of  a  generalissimo  J  v.i  15.  -nayaka  a  general 
Vin  1.73.  -pacca  the  position  as  general  Mhvs  38,  81. 
-pati  a  general  Vin  1.233  sq. ;  Sn  556  ;  A  111.38  ;  iv.79  ; 
J  I.I 33  ;  IV.43  ;  dhamma-°  a  general  of  the  Dhamma  Miln 
343  ;  DhA  HI. 305.  -patika  a  general  A  in. 76,  78,  300. 
-byuha  massing  of  troops,  grouping  &  fitting  up  an 
army  Vin  iv.107;  D  1.6;  Ps  11.213;  DA  1.85  (-vyuha). 

Senan!  a  general;  only  in  cpd.  °-kutilata  strategy  (lit. 
crookedness  of  a  general)  DhsA  151. 

Senasana  (nt.)  [sayana-l-asana]  sleeping  and  sitting,  bed 
&  chair,  dwelling,  lodging  Vin  1.196,  294,  356;  11. 146, 
150  (°parikkhara-dussa) ;  in. 88  etc.;  D  11.77;  A  1.60; 
It  103,  109;  DA  1.208;  J  1.2 17;  VbhA  365  (  =  seti  c'eva 
asati  ca  ettha  ti  senasanag).     See  also  panta. 

-gaha  allotment  of  lodging-places  Vin  n.  167.  -gaha- 
paka  house-steward  Vin  11. 167.  -carika  a  wandering 
from  lodging  to  lodging  Vin  1.182,  203;  111.21  ;  J  126. 
-paAiiapaka  regulator  of  lodging-places  Vin  11.75,  176; 
III.  1 58  sq. ;  IV. 38.  -patibahana  keeping  out  of  the  lodg- 
ing J  1.2 1 7.  -paviveka  secluson  in  respect  of  lodging 
A  1.240  sq.  -vatta  rule  of  conduct  in  respect  of  dwell- 
ing Vin  II.2ZO. 

Seniya  [fr.  sena]  belonging  to  an  army,  soldier  J  1.314. 

Senesika  at  Vin  1.200  is  to  be  read  senehika  (fr.  sineha). 
i.  e.  greasy. 

Sepaoni  (f .)  [Sk.  ^riparni,  lit.  having  lucky  leaves]  name  of 
a  tree,  Gmelina  arborea  J  1.173,  174;  DhA  1.145. 


Semanaka  [semana4-ka;  ppr.  of  seti]  lying  Th  1,14; 
DhA  1. 16. 

Semha  (nt.)  [  =  silesuma]  phlegm  Vin  11. 137;  D  n.14,  293; 
A  11.87;  ni.ioi  ;  IV. 320  ;  Sn  198,  434;  Miln  112,  303. 
Physiologically  in  detail  at  Vism  359 ;  VbhA  65,  244. 

Semhara  some  sort  of  animal  (monkey  ?)  (explained  by 
makkata)  M  1.429. 

Semhika  (adj.)  [fr.  semha]  a  man  of  phlegmatic  humour 
Miln  298. 

Seyya  (adj.)  [Sk.  sreyas,  compar.  form"]  better,  excellent; 
nom.  masc.  seyyo  S  111.48  sq.  ;  Sn  918  ;  Dh  308  ;  Dhs  1 1 16  ; 
J  1. 180;  nom.  fem.  seyyasi  J  v.393 ;  nom.  neut.  seyyo 
often  used  as  a  noun,  meaning  good,  happiness,  well- 
being  Vin  1.33;  D  1. 184;  11.330;  Sn  427,  440;  Dh  76, 
100;  J  11.44;  VI. 4  (maranar)  eva  seyyo,  with  abl.  of 
compar.  rajjato) ;  Pv  11.9*^  (dhanar)) ;  iv.i'  (jivitai)) ; 
nom.  fem.  seyya  J  v.94  ;  nom.  ace.  neutr.  seyyag  J  11.402  ; 
III. 237 ;  abl.  as  adv.  seyyaso  "still  better"  Dh  43; 
J  11.402  ;  1V.241.     Superl.  settha. 

Seyyaka  (adj.)  [fr.  sej-ya]  lying  M  1.433,  see  uttanaseyyaka 
and  gabbhaseyyaka. 

Seyyati  [sr,  Vedic  Srnati  &  siryate]  to  crush  J  1.174.  See 
also  sarati'  &  vi°.  —  pp.  sinna:  see  vi°. 

Seyyatha  (adv.)  [  =  tar)  yatha,  with  Magadhi  se°  for  ta° ; 
cp.  sayatha  &  tagyatha]  as,  just  as,  s.  pi  Vin  1.5  ;  D  1.45  ; 
It  90,  113;  J  1.339;  sejryathidag  as  follows  "  i.  e."  or 
"  viz."  Vin  i.io  ;  D  1.89  ;  n.91  ;  S  v. 42  i  ;  It  99. 

Seyya  (f.)  [Sk.  ^ay>'a  ;  fr.  ^J]  a  bed,  couch  M  1.502  ;  A  1.296  ; 
Vin  II. 167  (°aggena  by  the  surplus  in  beds) ;  Sn  29.  152, 
535;  Dh  305,  309;  Pv  II. 31*;  iv.i*;  J  VI. 197  (gilana" 
sick-bed).  Four  kinds  A  n.224 ;  VbhA  345.  seyyag 
kappeti  to  lie  down  Vin  iv.15,  18  sq.  —  Comb''  with 
avasatha,  e.  g.  at  A  11.85,  203  ;  in. 385  ;  iv.60  ;  v.271  sq, 
—  As  -°  used  in  adj.  sense  of  "lying  down,  resting," 
viz.  ussura"  sleeping  beyond  sunrise  D  ni.i84  =  DhA 
n.227;  diva"  noon-day  rest  D  1.112,  167;  siha°  like  a 
lion  D  II. 134;  A  iv.87  ;  dukkha°  sleeping  uncomfortably 
DhA  IV. 8. 

Serita  (f)  [fr.  serin]  independence,  freedom  Sn  39  sq. 

Serin  (adj.)  [cp.  Sk.  svairin]  self-willed,  independent, 
according  to  one's  liking  M  1.506  ;  Th  i,  1 144  ;  Pv  iv.i"  ; 
J  1.5. 

Seiivihara  (adj.)  [serin -1- vihara]  lodging  at  one's  own 
choice  M  1.469  sq.  ;  Vism  66  (°sukhai)). 

Serisaka  (adj.)  [fr.  sirisa]  made  of  Sirisa  wood,  name  of  a 
hall  D  11.356  sq.;  Vv  84";  VvA  331,  351. 

Serisamaba  a  festival  in  honour  of  the  Serisaka  Vimana 
Vv  84"'  '8 . 

Sereyyaka  name  of  a  tree  (Barleria  cristata)  J  in. 253. 

Sela  [fr.  sila]  rocky  Dh  8  ;  (m.)  rock,  stone,  crystal  S  1.127  ; 
D  11.39  ;  A  111.346  ;  Dh  81  ;  J  11. 14  ;  Vin  1.4  sq. ;  111.147  = 
J  11.284. 

-gula   a  rocky  ball   J  1147.      -maya  made  of  rock 
(crystal  ?),  of  the  bowl  of  the  Buddha  SnA  139,  159. 

Selaka  [sela-l-ka]  "rocky,"  a  kind  of  copper  (cp.  pisaca) 
VbhA  63. 

Selita  (selita)  [pp.  of  sejeti]  shouting,  noise,  row  J  11.2 18. 
To  this  belongs  the  doubtful  der.  selissaka  (nt.)  noise, 
row,  mad  pranks  at  S  iv.117  (v.  1.  seleyyaka). 

Seleti  [according  to  Kern,  Toev.  11.78  for  svelayati,  cp. 
Oir.  fgt  whistle,  music  etc.  Idg.  *sveizd]  to  make  a 
noise,  shout,  cry  exultantly  Sn  682  ;  J  v. 67 ;  Bu  1.36.  ■ — 
pp.  selita.  —  Other,  diff.  expl"^  of  the  word  see  in 
J.P.T.'S.  1885,  p.  54. 


Sevaka 


183 


Sondi 


Sevaka  serving,  following;  a  servant,  dependent  J  n.12, 
125,  420  ;  SnA  453.     See  vipakkha°. 

Sevati  [sev]  i.  to  serve,  associate  with,  resort  to  Vin  n.203  ; 
A  1. 124  sq. ;  Sn  57,  75;  Pug  33;  It  107;  J  111.525 ; 
SnA  169.  —  2.  to  practice,  embrace,  make  use  of  Vin 
l.io  =  S  V.421  ;  D  111.157 ;  S  1.12  ;  M  in. 45 ;  Dh  167,  293, 
310 ;  Sn  72,  391,  927  ;  Nd*  383,  481  ;  J  1.152,  361  ;  aor. 
asevissag  J  iv.178.  —  pp.  sevita:  see  a°,  vi°. 

Sevaaata  (-")  (f.)  [abstr,  fr.  sevati]  =  sevana  VbhA  282  sq. 

Sevana  (f-)  [fr.  sevati]  following,  associating  with  Sn  259; 
Dhs  1326;  Pug  20;  Dhtp  285  (as  nt.);  cohabiting  Vin 
ni.29. 

Seva  (f.)  [fr.  sev]  service,  resorting  to  S  i.i  10 ;  ThA  179. 

Sevala  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  ^aivala  &  saivala]  the  plant  Blyxa 
octandra  moss,  A  111.187,  232,  235;  J  ii.i5o  =  DhA 
1. 144;  J  III. 520 ;  rv.71  ;  V.452  ;  Miln  35 ;  DhA  111.199; 
Tikp  12  (in  sim.).  (m.  and  nt.)  J  v.37 ;  -malaka  (or 
-tailika.)  who  makes  garlands  of  Blyxa  octandra  A 
V.263  ;  S  IV. 312. — Often  comb''  with  another  water- 
plant,  panaka  (see  under  paijijaka),  e.  g.  A  111.187; 
Vism  261  (simile);  VbhA  244  (id.);  KhA  61  (cp.  Schu- 
bring,  Kalpasutra  p.  46  sq.). 

Sevin  (adj.)  [fr.  sev]  serving,  practising  Sn  749  ;  It  54. 
See  vipakkha". 

Seveti  to  cause  to  fall,  to  throw  down  J  111.198  (doubtful ; 
C-expl*  as  pateti  &  gives  saveti  [=saveti,  Caus.  of  sru 
to  make  glide]  as  gloss  ;  v.  1.  also  sadeti). 

Sesa  [fr.  si?]  remaining,  left  D  11.48  ;  Sn  217,  354  ;  J  11.128  ; 
(nt.)  remainder  PvA  14,  70  ;  °-ka  the  same  Mhvs  10,  36  ; 
22,  42  ;  25.  ig. 

Seseti:  see  sissati. 

Sessan,  sessati  see  seti. 

Sehi  is  instr.  pi.  of  sa*  (his  own) :  Dh  136 ;  DhA  111.64. 

Soka  [fr.  4aO,  to  gleam  (which  to  the  Dhtp  however  is 
known  only  in  meaning  "  soka  "  :  Dhtp  39) ;  cp.  Vedic 
§oka  the  flame  of  fire,  later  in  sense  of  "  burning  grief  "] 
grief,  sorrow,  mourning ;  def''  as  "  socana  socitattag 
anto-soko  .  .  .  cetaso  parijjhayana  domancissag  "  at 
Ps  i.38  =  Nd^  i28  =  Nd'  694;  shorter  as  "  iiati-vyaisan'- 
adihi  phufthassa  citta-santapo  "  at  Vism  503  =  VbhA. 
Cp.  the  foil.  :  Vin  1.6;  D  1.6;  11.305.  103;  S  i.iio,  123, 
137;  A  1. 51,  144;  11.21  ;  V.141  ;  Sn  584,  586;  J  1.189; 
SnA  155;  DhA  11.166;  KhA  153  (abbulha°);  Pv  1.4' 
(  =  citta-santapaPvA  18);  PvA  6,  14,  38,  42,  61.  —  asoka 
without  grief:  see  viraja.     See  also  dukkha  B  iii.i  b. 

-aggi  the  fire  of  sorrow  PvA  41.  pi.  -divasa  the  days 
of  mourning  (at  the  lung's  court  after  the  death  of  the 
queen)  SuA  89.  -parideva  sorrow  and  lamenting 
A  in. 32,  326  sq.  ;  v.2 16  sq.  ;  Vism  503  ;  Nd'  128.  -parid- 
dava  id.  Vv  84'".  -pareta  overcome  with  grief  Pv  i.8«. 
-vinaya  dispelling  of  grief  PvA  39.  -vinodana  id.  PvA 
61.  -salla  the  dart  or  sting  of  sorrow  A  in. 54,  58; 
Nd'  59,  414;  Pv  1.8";  PvA  93,  162. 

Sokajjhayika  (f)  [soka  +  ajjhayaka;  this  soka  perhaps 
•suka,  as  in  visuka  ?]  a  woman  who  plays  the  fool,  a 
comedian  Vin  iv.285  ;  J  vi.580  (where  C.  expl»  as  "  grief- 
dispellers  "). 

Sokavant  (adj.)  [soka+vant]  sorrowful  Mhvs  19,  15. 

Sokika  (adj.)  [soka  +  ika]  sorrowful;  a-°  free  from  sorrow 
ThA  229. 

Sokin  (adj.)  [fr.  soka]  (fem.  °ni)  sorrowful  Dh  28. 

Sokhya  (nt.)  [abstr.  der.  fr.  sukha]  happiness  Sn  61 ; 
J  V.205. 


Sokhamma  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  sukhuma]  fineness,  minuteness 
A  II. 17  ;  Th  I,  437.     At  A  11.18  with  double  suffix  °ta. 

Sogandhika  (nt.)  [Sk.  saugandhika ;  fr.  sugandha]  the 
white  water-lily  (Nymphaea  lotus)  J  v. 419;  vi.518, 
537  (seta-sogandhiyehi).  —  As  m.  designation  of  a 
purgatory  A  v.  173;  S  1.152  ;  Sn  p.  126. 

Socati  [Vedic  iocati,  sue,  said  of  the  gleaming  of  a  fire] 
I.  to  mourn,  grieve  Sn  34;  Dh  15;  J  1. 168;  Pv  1. 8' 
(-l-rodati);  i.ioi*;  1.12*;  Miln  11;  pres  3"!  pi.  socare 
Sn  445  ;  Dh  225  ;  ppr.  socamana  J  n.75  ;  ppr.  asocag 
not  grieving  S  1.116;  ma  soci  do  not  sorrow  D  11. 144; 
J  VI.190;  plur.  ma  socayittha  do  not  grieve  D  11. 158; 
Caus.  socayati  to  cause  to  grieve  D  1.52;  S  1.116; 
Th  I,  743  (ger.  "ayitva) ;  Miln  226;  soceti  J  11.8.  —  pp. 
socita.  — Caus.  II.  socapayati  the  same  S  1.116. 

Socana  (nt.)  [fr.  4uc]  sorrow,  mourning  PvA  18.  62  ;  -na  (f.) 
the  same  D  11.306;  S  i.io8  =  Sn  34;  Nd*  694. 

Socita  (nt.)  [fr.  socati]  grief  Th  2,  462. 

Socitatta  (nt.)  sorrowfulness  D  11.306;  Ps  i.38  =  Nd*  694. 

Socin  [fr.  socati]  grieving  A  iv.294  (soci  ca=socicca). 

Sociya  [=Sk.  socya]  deplorable  Sdhp  262. 

Soceyya  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  Sue,  *Saucya]  purity  S  1.78;  A 
1.94;  II. 188;  v.263;  Vism  8;  J  1. 214;  Miln  115,  207; 
is  threefold  A  1.2  71  ;  It  55  ;  D  in. 2 19  ;  further  subdivided 
A  v.264,  266  sq.  In  meaning  of  "  cleaning,  washing  " 
given  in  the  Dhtp  as  def.  of  roots  for  washing,  bathing 
etc.  (khal,  naha,  sina,  sudh). 

Sojacca  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  sujata]  nobility,  high  birth  J  11. 137. 

'  [see  suvana]  a  dog  J  1.146;  vi.107  (  =  sunakha)  ; 
Sn  675;  Vism  191  ;  DhA  in.255  (-(-sigala);  soni  (f.)  a 
bitch  Mhvs  7,  8  =  sona  It  36. 

So^a'  [cp.  Syonaka]  a  kind  of  tree ;  the  Bodhi  trees  of 
the  Buddhas  Paduma  and  Narada  Bu  ix.22  ;  x.24 ; 
J  1-36,  37- 

S09ita  (nt.)  [Sk.  Sopita,  fr.  ioifa,  red]  blood  Th  2.  467 ; 
DA  1. 120  ;  Vism  259. 

Soifi  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  Sroni]  i.  the  buttock  Sn  609;  J  v. 155, 
216,  302.  —  2.  a  bitch,  see  soija'. 

S094&  ["^P-  Sk.  Saunda]  addicted  to  drink,  intoxicated,  a 
drunkard  D  11.172  ;  J  v. 436,  499;  Miln  345;  Vism  316. 
a-sonda  A  in. 38;  iv.266;  J  v. 166;  (fem.  -i)  itthisoo^" 
a  woman  addicted  to  drink  Sn  112  (?  better  "one 
who  is  addicted  to  women  "  ;  SnA  1 72  expl'  to  that 
effect,  cp.  J  n.431  itthi-sura-maijsa-sonda) ;  yuddha- 
soij(Ja  J  1.204  ;  dasi-soi>(Ja  a  libertine  J  v.436  (  +  sura'') ; 
dhamma-soijdata  affectionate  attachment  to  the  law 
J  V.482. 

S094aka  [sorwja-l-ka]  in  cpd.  sura°  a  drunkard  J  v.433 ; 

VI. 30. 

So94^  (f)  [Sk.  ^mi(Ja]  an  elephant's  trunk  Vin  11.20 1  ;  = 
S  n.269  ;  M  1. 415;  A  IV. 87  (ucca°  fig.  of  a  bhikkhu]  J 
1.50,  187;  iv.gi  ;  v.37;  DhA  1.58;  Miln  368;  sonda  (m.) 
the  same  S  1.104. 

Sov^ika  [ff.  soTK^a]  I.  a  distiller  and  seller  of  spirituous 
liquors  ;  M  1.228=  374.  —  2.  a  drunkard  Miln  93. 

Sov^ika  (f)  I.  tendril  of  a  creeper  S  1.106;  Miln  374. — 
2.  peppered  meat  S  11.98  (cp.  Sanskrit  Sauijiji  long 
pepper).  —  3.  in  udaka°  KhA  65  (  =  sondi*)  a  tank. 

SoQ^I'  (f.)  a  natural  tank  in  a  rock  J  1.462  ;  DhA  11.56 
(so9(})) ;  udaka-''  J  iv.333  ;  Vism  1 19  ;  KhA  65  (sopiJikiL). 


Sondi 


.    184 


Sopadhika 


Son^l'  (f.)  the  neck  of  a  tortoise  S  iv.ijy  (sondi-pancamani 
angani) ;  MUn  371  ;  the  hood  of  a  snake  J  vi.166  (naga 
sondi-kata). 

Sosilta  (nt.)  [the  contracted  form  of  suvaijna,  cp.  sovanna] 
gold  ;  (adj.)  golden  Mhvs  5,  87  ;  Vv  5*,  36'. 

-41ankara  with  golden  ornaments  J  11.48.  -dhaja 
with  golden  flags  J  11.48.  -bhinkara  a  golden  vase 
Sdhp  513.  -maya  golden,  made  of  gold  J  vi.203. 
-valuka  gold  dust  J  vi.278. 

Sota'  (nt.)  [V^edic  ^rotas  &  ^rotra ;  fr.  sru:  see  sunati]  ear, 
the  organ  of  hearing  Vin  1.9,  34;  D  1.21  ;  Sn  345  (nom. 
pi.  sota) ;  Vism  444  (defined);  Dhs  601;  DhsA  310; 
—  dibba-sota  the  divine  ear  (cp.  dibba-cakkhu)  D  1.79, 
154;  111.38,  281;  dhamma°  the  ear  of  the  Dhamma 
A  111.285  sq.,  350  ;  V.140  ;  S  11.43  '•  sotai)  odahati  to  listen 
(carefully)  D  1.230;  ohita-s.  with  open  ears  A  xv.iis; 
V.154;  J  1. 129. 

-anjana  a  kind  of  ointment  made  with  antimony 
Vin  1.203.  -Snugata  following  on  hearing,  acquired  by 
hearing  A  11. 185.  -ayatana  the  sense  of  hearing  Dhs 
601  sq.  ;  D  11.243,  280,  290.  -4vadhana  giviVig  ear, 
attention  M  n.175.  -indriya  the  faculty  of  hearing 
Dhs  604  ;  D  111.239.  -dvara  "  door  of  the  ear,"  auditory 
sensation  VbhA  41.  -dhatu  the  ear  element,  the  ear 
Vin  11.299;  D  1,79;  S  II. 121  ;  A  1.255  (dibba°) ;  in. 17 
(id.) ;  v.i9g  ;  Vbh  334  ;  Vism  407  {dei'') ;  Dhs  601,  604  ; 
Miln  6.  -vinnana  auditory  cognition,  perception  through 
the  ear  Dhs  443.  -viiifieyya  cognizable  by  hearing  D 
II. 281  ;  Dhs  467;  KhA  loi. 

Sota^  (m.  &  nt.)  [Vedic  srotas,  nt.,  fr.  sru;  see  savati] 
I.  stream,  flood,  torrent  Sn  433  ;  It  144  ;  J  1.323  ;  sigha-s. 
having  a  quick  current  D  11. 132  ;  Sn  319  ;  metaphorically, 
the  stream  of  cravings  Sn  715  (chinna° ;  cp.  MVastu  ' 
III. 88  chinna-srota),  1034;  S  iv.292  ;  M  1.226  (sotag 
chetva);  It  114;  denotes  noble  eightfold  path  S  v.347 ; 
bhava-s.  torrent  of  rebirth  S  1.15;  iv.128;  viiiiiana-s. 
flux  of  mind,  D  111.105  ;  nom.  sing,  soto  S  IV. 291  sq. ; 
v.347;  nom.  plur.  sota  Sn  1034;  ace.  plur.  sotani  Sn 
433  ;  plur.  sotayo  (f.  [?],  or  wrong  reading  instead  of 
sotaso,  sotase  [?])  J  iv.287,  288.  —  2.  passage,  aperture 
(of  body,  as  eyes,  ears,  etc.),  in  kanna"  orifice  of  the 
ear,  and  nasa°  nostril,  e.  g.  D  1.106;  Sn  p.  108;  J 
1.163,  164  (hettha-nasika-s.) ;  Vism  400  (dakkhina"  & 
vama-kanna-s.). 

-apatti  entering  upon  the  stream,  i.  e.  the  noble 
eightfold  path  (S  v.347),  conversion  Vin  11.93  ^^c.  By 
it  the  first  three  Sarjyojanas  are  broken  S  v. 357,  376. 
It  has  four  phases  (angas) :  faith  in  the  Buddha,  the 
Dhamma,  and  the  Order,  and,  further,  the  noble  Silas 
S  11.68  sq.  ;  v. 362  sq.  ;  A  III. 12  ;  iv.405  ;  D  111,227  ('" 
detail).  Another  set  of  four  angas  consists  of  sappu- 
risa-sai)seva.  saddhammasavana,  yonisomanasikara,  and 
dharamanudhammapatipatti  S  v.347,  4°4-  -phala  the 
effect  of  having  entered  Upon  the  stream,  the  fruit  of 
conversion  Vin  1.293  i  11183  ;  M  1.325  ;  A  1.44;  ill. 441  ; 
IV.292  sq.,  372  sq.  ;  D  1.229;  111.227;  S  III. 168,  225; 
V.410  sq. ;  Pug  13;  DhA  in. 192  ;  IV.5  ;  PvA  22,  38, 
66,  142.  -magga  the  way  to  conversion,  the  lower  stage 
of  conversion  DA  1.237  i  J  i-97  '■  VbhA  307  ;  see  magga. 
-apanna  one  who  has  entered  the  stream,  a  convert 
Vin  II. 161,  240;  III. 10;  D  1. 156;  111.107  sq.,  132,  227; 
A  11.89;  S  11.68;  III. 203  sq.,  225  sq.  ;  v. 193  sq.  ; 
DA  1. 313;  Vism  6,  709;  PvA  5,  153.  The  converted 
is  endowed  with  ayu,  vanna,  sukha,  and  adhipateyva 
S  v. 390  ;  he  is  called  wealthy  and  glorious  S  v. 402  ;  con- 
version excludes  rebirth  in  purgatory,  among  animals 
and  petas.  as  well  as  in  other  places  of  misery ;  he  is 
a-vinipata-dhamma :  D  1.156;  11.200;  S  v. 193  sq.,  343; 
A  1.232  ;  11.238  ;  III. 331  sq. ;  iv.405  sq.,  v. 182  ;  M  in. 81  ; 
or  khina-niraya:  A  in. 211  ;  iv.405  sq.  (4-khina-tiraccha- 
nayoni  etc.).  The  converted  man  is  sure  to  attain  the 
sambodhi  (niyato  sambodhiparayano  D  i .  1 56,  discussed 
in  Dial.  1.190-192). 


Sotatta  scorched  J  1.390  =  M  1.79,  read  so  tatto  (cp.  M 
1.536).     See  sosita. 

Sotar  [n.  ag.  fr.  sunati]  a  hearer  D  1.56;  A  11. 116;  :n.i6i 
sq.  —  sota  used  as  a  feminine  noun  ThA  200  (Ap  v. 3). 

Sotavant  [sota'  +  vant]  having  ears,  nom.  pi.  sotavanto 
S  1. 138;  Vin  1.7;  D  11.39. 

Sotokama  [sotug  (  =  inf,  of  sunati) -i-kama]  wish  or  wishing 
to  hear  A  1.150  ;  IV. 1 15  ;  Vism  444  ;  f.  abstr.  "kamyata 
desire  to  listen  A  v.145  sq.,  SnA  135. 

Sotta  [pp.  of  supati,  for  sutta]  asleep  S  1.170. 

Sotti  (f.)  [Sk.  sukti]  a  shell  (?)  filled  with  chunam  and  lac, 
used  for  scratching  the  back,  a  back-scratcher  acting 
as  a  sponge  M  11.46  ;  A  1.208  ;  see  sutti  e.  g.  Vin  11.107. 

Sottiy a  [  =  *§rotriya]  well  versed  in  sacred  learning,  a 
learned  man  M  1.280  ;  Sn  533  sq.     See  sotthiya. 

Sottun  see  supati 

Sotthana  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  svastyayana]  blessing,  well-fare 
Sn  258;  A  IV. 271,  285;  J  V.29  (where  the  metre 
requires  sotthayanar).  as  at  iv.75) ;  vi.139. 

Sotthi  (f.)  [Sk.  svasti=su-|-asti]  well-being,  safety,  bless 
ing  A  111.38=  rv. 266  ("brings  future  happiness"); 
J  1-335  ;  s.  hotu  hail  !  D  1.96 ;  sotthii)  in  safety,  safely 
Dh  219  (=anupaddavena  DhA  in. 293);  Pv  iv.6* 
(  =  nirupaddava  PvA  262);  Sn  269;  sotthina  safely, 
prosperously  D  1.72,  96  ;  11.346  ;  M  1.135  ;  J  11.87  ;  in. 201 . 
suvatthi  the  same  J  iv.32.     See  sotthika  &  sovatthika. 

-kamma  a  blessing  J  1.343.  -kara  an  utterer  of  bless- 
ings, a  herald  J  vi.43.  -gata  safe  wandering,  pros 
perous  journey  Mhvs  8,  10 ;  sotthigamana  the  same 
J  1.272.  -bhava  well-being,  prosperity,  safety  J  1.209  ; 
111.44  ;  DhA  11.58  ;  PvA  250.  -vacaka  utterer  of  blessings, 
a  herald  Miln  359.     -sala  a  hospital  Mhvs  10,  loi. 

Sotthika  (&  °iya)  (adj.)  [fr.  sotthi]  happy,  auspicious, 
blessed,  safe  VvA  95  ;  DhA  11.227  (°'ya  '•  in  phrase  digha° 
one  who  is  happy  for  long  [?]). 

Sotthiya' =  sottiya  a  learned  man,  a  brahmin  Dh  295; 
ThA  200  (Ap  V.6) ;  J  iv.301,  303  ;  v. 466. 

Sotthiya^  (nt.)  [der.  ?]  a  childbirth  rag  Vism  63. 

Sotthivant  (adj.)  [sotthi -|- vant]  lucky,  happy,  safe  Vv  84*2. 

Sodaka  (adj.)  [sa-f-udaka]  containing  water  Mhvs  30,  38; 
37,  200. 

Sodariya  (adj.)  [sa-f  udariya]  having  a  common  origin  (in 
the  same  mother's  womb),  born  of  the  same  mother, 
a  brother  J  1.308  ;  iv.434  ;  PvA  94  (bhata). 

Sodhaka  [fr.  sodheti]  one  who  cleanses  Mhvs  10,  90  ;  PvA  7. 

Sodhana  (nt.)  [fr.  sodheti]  cleansing  Vism  276  (as  f.  °na); 
examining  J  1.292  ;  payment  (see  uddhara)  J  1.32 1. 

Sodheti  [Cans,  of  sujjhati]  to  make  clean,  to  purify  Vin 
1.47  ;  M  1.39  ;  Dh  141  ;  DA  1.261,  13* ;  to  examine,  search 
J  1.200,  291;  II. 123;  III. 528;  to  search  for,  to  seek 
J  n.135  ;  to  clean  away,  to  remove  J  iv.404  ;  to  correct 
J  n.48  ;  to  clear  a  debt :  in  this  meaning  mixed  with 
sadheti  (q.  v.)  in  phrases  inai)  s.  and  uddharar)  s. ;  we 
read  inar)  sodheti  at  PvA  2  76 ;  uddharag  sodheti  at 
J  iv,45  ;  otherwise  sadheti.  —  Caus.  II.  sodhapeti  to 
cause  to  clean,  to  clean  Vin  in. 208,  248  =  1.206  ;  J  1.305  ; 
:i.i9  ;  Pass,  sodhiyati  to  be  cleansed,  to  be  adorned 
Bu  11.40  sq.=  J  1. 12. 

Sona  dog  It  36  ;  see  soija. 

SopadhIka=  sa  +  upadhika. 


Sopavahana 


185 


Sosarita 


Sopavahana=  sa  +  upavahana. 

Sopaka  [=sapaka ;  sva  +  paka]  a  man  of  a  very  low  caste, 
an  outcast  Sn  137.     See  also  sapaka. 

Sopana  (m.  and  nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  sopana;  Aufrecht  "  sa  + 
upayana  "]  stairs,  staircase  Vin  11. 117,  152;  D  11. 178; 
J  i-SSo.  348  ;  IV. 265  ;  Vism  10  ;  VvA  188  ;  PvA  156,  275  ; 
Vv  78*  ;  dhura-sopana  the  highest  step  of  a  staircase  (?) 
J  1-330 

-kalingara  flight  of  steps  Vin  i'.i28  (v.  1.  sopana- 
kalevara  as  at  M  11.92).  -panti  a  flight  or  row  of 
steps,  a  ladder  Vism  392  (three),  -pada  the  foot  of 
the  steps  (opp.  °sisa)  DhA  1.115.  -phalaka  a  step  of  a 
staircase  ^  1.330. 

Soppa  (nt.)  [  =  supina]  sleep,  dream  S  i.i  10  ;  A  1.261  (i.  e. 
laziness),  "ante  in  a  dream  J  v. 329  (C.  reading  for  T. 
suppante). 

Soppati  see  supati. 

Sobbba  [cp.  Sk.  svabhra]  a  hole,  (deep)  pit  D  11. 12  7; 
M  I.I  I  ;  A  1.243  ;  11. 140  ;  111.389  (see  papata) ;  v.i  14  sq.  ; 
J  VI. 166  ;  Th  I,  229  ;  SnA  355,  479  ;  a  water-pool  S  11.32  ; 
Sn  720 ;  Vism  186 ;  as  adj.  at  S  ni.109  (-|-papata),  i.  e. 
"deep  "  ;  kussobbha  a  small  collection  of  water  S  11. 32, 
118  ;  Sn  720  ;  mahasobbha  the  ocean  S  11.32,  n8, 

Sobhagga  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  subhaga]  prosperity,  beauty 
Xh  2,  72  ;  J  1. 51,  475;  11. 158;  IV. 133.  As  sobhagyata 
at  DA  1.161. 

Sobbanjdna  the  tree  Hyperanthica  moringa  J  v.405 ; 
sobhaiijauaka  the  same  J  111.161  (  =  siggurukkha,  C.) ; 
VI.535- 

SobhaQa^  (nt.)  [fr.  Subh]  i.  a  kind  of  edging  on  a  girdle 
Vin  1 1. 1 36.  —  z.  beauty,  ornament  Miln  356. 

Sobhava'  (adj.)  [fr.  §abh]  i.  adorning,  shining,  embellish- 
ing A  a. 8,  225  ;  very  often  spelt  sobhana  J  1.257  ;  ThA 
247;  nagara-sobhana  (or  °ini)  a  courtesan  J  11. 367 ; 
III. 435,  475  ;  Miln  350  ;  PvA  4.  —  2.  good  Miln  46  (text 
°na) ;  Cpd.  96  ;  10 1  ;  106. 

Sobhati  [^ubh,  Vedic  sobhate]  i .  to  shine,  to  be  splendid, 
look  beautiful  J  1.89  ;  11.93  i  sobhetha  let  your  light  shine 
(with  foil,  yag  "  in  that  .  .  .")  Vin  1.187,  349=  11.162  = 
J  111.487  =  3  1.2 17;  ppr.  °mana  Vism  58.  aor.  sobhi 
J  1. 143  ;  Cans,  sobheti  to  make  resplendent,  adorn,  grace 
A  II. 7;  Sn  421  ;  J  1.43;  Miln  i  ;  Vism  79  (ppr.  sobha- 
yanto) ;  to  make  clear  D  11. 105. 

Sobhanagaraka  (nt.)  a  kind  of  game,  fairy  scenes  D  1.6,  13  ; 
DA  1.84. 

Sobba  (f.)  [fr.Subh;  Sk.  !5obha]  splendour,  radiance,  beauty 
Mhvs  33,  30  ;  J  IV. 333  ;  ThA  226 ;  Miln  35C). 

Sobbiya  [cp.  Sk.  saubhika;  BSk.  ^obhika  MVastu  111.113] 
a  sort  of  magician  or  trickster,  clown  J  vi.277  (sobhiya 
ti  nagarasobhana  sampannarupa  purisa  ;  not  correct ; 
C). 

Somanassa  (nt.)  [fr.  su-(-mano;  cp.  domanassa]  mental 
ease,  happiness,  joy  D  1.3  ;  11.278  ;  111.270  ;  M  1.85,  313  ; 
S  IV. 232  ;  A  11.69  ;  ni.207,  238  ;  Dh  34  i  ;  Sn  67  ;  Pug  59  ; 
VbhA  73;  PvA  6,  14,  133;  DA  1.53;  it  is  more  than 
sukha  D  11. 214;  defined  at  Vism  461  (itth'aramman'- 
anubhavana-lakkhaijai),  etc.).  A  syn.  of  it  is  veda  i. 
On  term  see  also  Cpd.  277. 

-indriya  the  faculty  of  pleasure  D  111.224 ;  S  v. 209 
sq.  ;  Dhs  18. 

Somanassita  (adj.)  [Cans.  pp.  formation  fr.  somanassa] 
satisfied,  pleased,  contented  VvA  351. 

Somanikkba  [soma-t-rukkha]  a  certain  species  of  tree 
J  VI.530. 


Sombba  (f .)  a  puppet,  doll  Th  2,  390 ;  explained  as  som- 
bhaka  ThA  257. 

Somma  (adj.)  [Sk.  sauraya,  fr.  soma]  pleasing,  agreeable, 
gentle  Davs  1.42;  DA  1247;  DhsA  127;  VvA  205; 
SnA  456;  Vism  168. 

Soracca  (nt.)  [fr.  sorata]  gentleness,  restraint,  meekness 
A  11.68,  113;  III. 248;  S  1. 100,  172,  222;  Sn  78,  292; 
Dhs  1342  ;  J  III  442  ;  iv.302  ;  Miln  162  ;  VvA  347. 
Often  comb''  with  khanti  forbearance  (q.  v.).  —  soracciya 
(nt.)  the  same  J  in. 453. 

Sorata  (adj.)  [  =  su-|-rata,  with  so"  for  su°,  which  latter  is 
customary  for  su°  before  r  (cp.  diir°  for  dur°).  See 
dui  2  and  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  11. — -The  (B)Sk.  is  surata] 
gentle,  kind,  humble,  self-restrained  M  1.125;  S  1.65; 
IV.305  (text,  siirata) ;  A  11.43  ;  111.349,  393  sq.  ;  Sn  309, 
515.  540;  J  IV.303;  DhA  1.56. 

Solasa  (num.  card.)  [Sk.  sodaia]  sixteen  D  1.128  ;  Sn  1006  ; 
J  1.78  (lekha) ;  11.87  '■  iii-342  (atappiya-vatthiini) ;  v.175  ; 
VI. 37;  Miln  II  (palibodha) ;  DhA  1.129  (°salaka) ;  iv.208 
(°karisa-matta).  instr.  sojasahi  D  1.31,  &  sojasehi  D 
1. 139;  gen.  sojasannar)  J  iv.124.  Very  frequent  in 
measures  of  time  &  space.  -°vassa°  (16  years  .  .  .) 
J  1. 231,  285;  11.43;  IV. 7;  VI. 10,  486;  DhA  1.25  and 
passim.  The  fern.  °-si  acts  as  num.  ord.  "  sixteenth," 
in  phrase  kalar)  nagghati  solasit]  he  is  not  worth  a  six- 
teenth particle  of  A  iv.252  ;  S  111.156;  v. 44,  343;  Dh 
70 ;  It  19. 

So}asakkbattui)  sixteen  times  DA  1.261  ;  DhA  1.353  = 
Mhvs  6,  37. 

Solasama  sixteenth  Mhvs  2,  29 ;  Vism  292. 

Sovaggika  (adj.)  [fr.  sagga=*svarga;  cp.  the  similar 
formation  dovarika  =  dvara]  connected  with  heaven 
Vin  1.294;  D  1. 51  ;  A  11.54,  ^8 ;  in. 46,  51,  259;  iv.245  ; 
S  1.90;  DA  1. 158. 

Sovacassa  (nt.)  [fr.  suvaca,  in  analogy  to  dovacassa] 
gentleness,  suavity  D  111.267;  A  11. 148;  in. 180;  Nett 
40;  127;  "-karaija  making  for  gentleness  M  1.96;  A 
11.148=111.180. 

Sovacassata  (f.)= sovacassa  M  1,126;  D  in. 212,  274; 
A  1.83  ;  in. 310,  423  sq  ,  449  ;  iv.jg  ;  Sn  266  ;  Dhs  1327  ; 
Pug  24.  Sovaccasaya  &  sovacassiya  the  same  (Dhs  1327; 
Pug  24). 

Sovawa  (adj.)  [fr.  suvanna]  golden  D  11. 210;  A  iv.393  ; 
PvA  H.12I;  J  1,226;  °-maya  golden  Vin  1.39;  11. 116; 
D  II. 170  etc. ;  J  HI  12. 

Sovawaya  (adj)  [=sovaunaka]  golden  J  1.226. 

Sovattbika  (adj.)  [either  fr.  sotthi  with  diseresis,  or  fr. 
su4-atthi-|-ka=Sk.  svastika]  safe  M  1.117;  Vv  18' 
(  =  sotthika  VvA  95) ;  J  vi.339  (in  the  shape  of  a  svas- 
tika ?) ;  Pv  IV. 3^  (  =  sotthi-bhava-vaha  PvA  250).  -&lan- 
kara  a  kind  of  auspicious  mark  J  vi.488. 

Sovlraka  (nt.)  [dialectical  ?]  sour  gruel  \in  1.2  10  ;  S  ii.i  1 1  ; 
Vv  19'  ;  PugA  232. 

Sosa  [fr.  4u9]  drying  up,  consumption  Vin  1.71  ;  Vism  345. 

Sosana  (nt.)  [fr.  soseti]  causing  to  dry  (in  surgery) 
Miln  353. 

Sosanika  (adj.)  [fr.  susana]  connected  with  a  cemetery, 
bier-like  Vin  n.149;  m.,  one  who  lives  in  or  near  a 
cemetery  A  in. 220  ;  Pug  69  sq.  ;  Miln  342  ;  Vism  61  sq.  ; 
DhA  1.69. 

Sosarita  (adj.)  [su -1- osarita]  well  reinstated  (opp.  dosarita) 
Vin  1.322. 

VIII— 7 


Sosika 


i86 


Hata 


Sosika  (adj.)  [fr.  sosa]  afflicted  with  pulmonary  consump- 
tion Vin  1.93  ;  IV. 8. 

Sosita  at  J  1.390  means  either  "  thoroughly  chilled  "  or 
"  well  wetted."  It  is  expl''  as  "  him'odakena  su-sito 
sutthu  tinto."  Perhaps  we  have  to  read  so  sita,  or 
sina  (cp.  sina'),  or  sinna.  The  corresponding  sotatta 
(expH  as  "  suriya-santapena  su-tatto  ")  should  then  be 
so  tatto. 

Soseti  [Caus.  of  sussati]  to  cause  to  dry  or  wither  Mhvs  2  i, 
28  ;  Vi    n  120.     See  Yi°. 

Sossatiis  Fut.  of  sunati. 

Sohada  [Sk.  sauhrda,  fr.  su  +  hrd]  a  friend  Mhvs  38,  98. 
See  also  suhada. 

Sneha  see  sineha. 

Svakara  [su+  akara]  being  of  good  disposition  Vin  1.6. 

Svakkhata  [su  +  akkhata;  on  the  long  a  cp.  Geiger,  P.Gr. 
§  7;    BSk.   svakhyata]   well   preached   Vin    1.12,    187; 


II. 199  ;  M  1.67  ;  A  1.34  ;  11.56  ;  Sn  567.     Opp.  durakkhata 

Vism  213  (in  detail). 

Svagata  [su+agata]  I.  welcome  Vin  11. 11;  Th  2,  337; 
ThA  236.  — 2.  learnt  by  heart  Vin  11.95,  249  ;  A  iv.140 
(patimokkhani).     See  sagata. 

Svatana  [cp.  Sk.  svastana  ;  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  6,  54]  relating  to 
the  morrow  ;  dat.  °-naya  for  the  following  day  Vin  1.27  ; 
Di.i25;Ji.ii;  DhA  1.314  ;  iv.12. 

Svativatta  [su  +  ativatta]  easily  overcome  Sn  785  ;  Nd'  76. 

Svassu  =  so  assu  J  1. 196. 

Svahag  =  so  ahag. 

Sve  (adv.)  [cp.  Sk.  svas]  to-morrow  Vin  11.77  ;  D  1.108,205  ; 
J  1.32,  243  ;  11.47  I  VvA  230  ;  svedivasa  DhA  1.103.  The 
diaeretic  form  is  suve,  e.  g.  Pv  iv.i^;  Mhvs  29,  17;  and 
doubled  suve  suve  day  after  day  Dh  229  ;  DhA  111.329  ; 
J  V.507. 


H. 


Ha  [freq.  in  Rigveda,  as  gha  or  ha,  Idg.  *gho,  *ghe ;  cp. 
Lat.  hi-c,  Sk.  hi]  an  emphatic  particle  "  hey,  oh,  hallo, 
I  say"  Vin  11. 109;  Sn  666;  iti  ha,  thus  Vin  1.5,  12; 
D  I.I  ;  a  common  beginning  to  traditional  instruction 
Sn  1053  ;  itihitihag  (saying),  "  thus  and  thus  "  Sn  1084 ; 
SnA  416  (ha-kara) ;  PvA  4  (ha  re),  58  (gloss  for  su). 

Hag  (indecl.)  [cp.  Sk.  hag]  an  exclamation  "  I  say,  hey, 
hallo,  look  here  !"  Vv  50'  (  =  nipata  VvA  212) ;  J  v. 422  ; 
VvA  77.  Sometimes  as  ban  ti,  e.  g.  J  v. 203  ;  DhA 
III.  108.  See  also  handa  &  hambho.  In  comb"  iti  hag 
(  =  iti)  Sn  783  ;  Nd'  71  ;  or  with  other  part,  like  hag  dhi 
DhA  1. 1 79   216  (here  as  hag  di). 

Hagsa'  [fr.  hagsati]  bristling :  see  lomahagsa  Sn  270  etc 

Hagss'  [cp.  Sk.  hagsa  =  Lat.  (h)anser  "goose,"  Gr.  x';''  = 
Ags.  gos=E.  goose,  Ger.  gans]  i.  a  water-bird,  swan 
S  1.148  ;  Sn  221,  350,  1134  ;  Dh  gi,  175  ;  DhA  11.170  ; 
J  II.  1 76  sq.  ;  SnA  277  ;  Pv  11.12'  ;  11 1.3*.  Considered  as 
(suvanna-)  raja-hagsa  ("  golden  royal  swan  ")  to  be 
king  of  the  birds  :  J  1.207  I  >'  353  ;  Vism  650.  —  At  SnA 
277  Bdhgh  gives  various  kinds  of  hagsa's,  viz.  harita", 
tamba",  khira°,  kala°,  paka°,  suvanna".  —  paka°  a 
species  of  water  bird  J  v.356  ;  vi.539  ;  SnA  277. — f. 
hagsi  Davs  v. 24  (raja°).  —  2.  a  kind  of  building  J  1.92. 
-potaka  a  young  swan  Vism  153  (in  simile),  -raja 
the  king  of  swans  Vv  35^  ;  Vin  iv.259. 

Hagsati  [cp.  Vedic  harsate  Idg.  *gher  to  bristle  (of  hair), 
as  in  Lat  horreo  ("horrid,  horripilation"),  cr  hedge- 
hog ("  bristler  ")  =  Gr.  x'l!^  id- ;  Lat.  hirtus,  hispidus 
"rough";  Ags.  gorst  =  gorse;  Ger.  granne  &  many 
others,  for  which  see  Walde,  Lai.  }]'lb.  s.  v.  er.  — The 
Dhtp  (309)  defines  as  "  tutthi."  See  also  ghagsati^, 
pahagsati^,  pahattha^,  pahagsita^]  to  bristle,  stand  on 
end  (said  of  the  hair)  Vin  111.8  ;  M  1.79  ;  Caus.  hagseti  to 
cause  to  bristle  J  v. 154.  —  pp.  hattha. 


Hagsana  (adj.-nt.)  [fr.  hf?]  bristling,  see  lomahagsa  Sn 
270  etc. 

Hagsi  (indecl.)  [?]  =  hafici  if,  in  case  that  J  vi.343. 

Hankbati  see  pati°. 

Hacca  (adj.)  [fr.  ban]  killing  in  bhiinahacca  killing  an 
embryo  A  iv.98  ;  J  vi. 579  =  587  ;  Miln  314  (text  bhfita-). 

Hanci  (indecl.)  [hag-fci]  if   Kvu  i. 

Hannati  ^:  hafichati  see  hanti. 

Hata*  [pp.  of  harati]  taken,  carried  off  Vin  iv.23  ;  J  1.498. 
hata-hata-kesa  with  dishevelled  hair  S  1.115. 

Ha(a'  [cp.  Sk.  hatha  &  hata]  a  kind  of  water-plant,  Pistia 
stratiotes  D  1.166;  M  ;.78,  156;  Pug  55  (text  sata-) ; 
A  1. 241,  295  (v.  I.  sata;  cp.  hataka). 

Hattha  [pp.  of  hagsati]  i.  bristling,  standing  on  end 
M  1.83  ;  Davs  v. 64  ;  lomahatthajata  (cp.  °loma)  with 
bristling  hairs,  excited  D  11.240  ;  Sn  p.  14.  —  2.  joyful, 
happy  Vin  1. 1 5  ;  Sn  1017  ;  J  1.31,  335  ;  11.32  ;  often  comb'' 
with  either  tuttha  (e.  g.  J  vi.427  ;  PvA  113),  or  pahattha 
(DhA  III. 292). 

Hatha  [only  as  lexicogr.  word;  Dhtp  loi  =  balakkara] 
violence. 

Hata  [pp.  of  hanti]  struck,  killed  D  11.131  ;  destroyed, 
spoilt,  injured  Vin  1.25;  Dhs  264;  J  11. 175;  renuhata 
struck  with  dust,  covered  with  dust  Vin  1.32  ;  hatatta 
(nt.)  the  state  of  being  destroyed  Dh  390;  hatflvakasa 
who  has  cut  oft  every  occasion  (for  good  and  evil)  Dh 
97;  DhA  II. 188;  hativasesaka  surviving  D  1. 135; 
pakkha°  a  cripple  (q.  v.)  ;  "vikkhittaka  slain  &  cut  up, 
killed  &  dismembered  \  ism  i  79,  194.  —  hata  is  also  used 
in  sense  of  med.,  i.  e.  one  who  has  destroyed  or  killed, 


Hati 


187 


Hadaya 


e.  g.  naga°  slayer  of  a  naga  Vin  11. 195  ;  °antaraya  one 
who  removes  an  obstacle  PvA  i .  —  ahata  unsoiled,  clean, 
new  D  II. 160;  J  1.50;  Davs  11.39. 

Hati  (f.)  [fr.  han]  destruction  Davs  iv.17. 

Hattha  [fr.  hy,  cp.  Vedic  hastal  i.  hand  D  1.124;  A  1.47; 
Sn   610;    J    VI. 40. — forearm   Vin    iv.221  ;   of  animals 

5  V.148  ;  J  r.149  ;  °pada  hand  and  foot  M  1.523  ;  A  1.47  ; 
J  11.117;  PvA  241  ;  DhAiv.7.  sahassa"  thousand-armed 
Mhvs  30,  75  ;  panca"  having  five  hands  J  v. 425  ;  J  v. 431 
(mukhassa  ceva  catunnag  ca  Ccirananai)  vasena  etarj 
vuttar)) ;  kata°  ^  practised  hand,  practised  (of  an 
archer)  S  1.62  ;  A  11.48  ;  J  IV.2  11.  —  hatthe  karoti  to 
bring  under  one's  hand,  to  take  possession  of,  to  subdue 
J  VI. 490  ;  hatthag  gacchati  to  come  under  somebody's 
hand,  to  come  under  the  sway  of  J  1.179;  hatthaga 
being  in  the  power  of ;  hatthagata  fallen  into  the  hand 
or  possession  of,  hatthappatta  what  one  can  put  one's 
hand  on,  i.  e.  "before  his  very  eyes"  Vin  1.15  As 
"hattha  in  hand,  -handed  ;  e.  g.  danda°  stick  in  hand 
J  1.59  ;  ritta°  empty-handed  Sdhp  309  ;  vina°  lute  in 
hand  Mhvs  30,  75.  Cp.  sa°  with  one's  own  hand.  — 
2.  the  hand  as  measure,  a  cubit  J  1.34,  233  (asiti°,  q.  v.) ; 
Mhvs  38,  52  ;  Vism  92  (nava°  sataka).  —  3.  a  handful, 
a  tuft  (of  hair)  VvA  197. 

-anguli  finger  PvA  124  (-(-padanguli  toe),  -a^thika 
hand-bone  KhA  49.  -antara  a  cubit  Vism  124.  -&pa- 
lekhana  licking  the  hands  (to  clean  them  after 
eating  —  cp.  the  52"''  Sekhiya  Vin  rv.198)  D  1.166; 
III. 40  ;  M  1.77.  238,  307  ;  A  1.295  (v.  1.  °ava°) ;  Pug  55.. 
-obharana  bracelet  Vin  11. 106.  -Abhijappana  (nt.) 
incantations  to  make  a  man  throw  up  his  hands 
D  MI  ;  DA  1.97.  -ftlankara  a  (wrist)  bracelet, 
wristlet  VvA  167.  -kacchapaka  making  a  hollow  hand 
J  111.505.  -kamma  manual  work,  craft,  workmanship, 
labour  J  1.220  ;  DhA  1.98,  395  ;  iv.64.  -gata  received, 
come  into  the  possession  of  J  1.446  ;  11.94,  '"S  '■  VvA 
149;  (nt.)  possession  J  vi.392.  -gahana  seizing  by  the 
hand  Vin  iv.320.  -cchinna  whose  hand  is  cut  off  M 
1.523;  Miln  5.  -ccheda  cutting  off  the  hand  J  1.155 
(read  sugatiya  va  hatthacchedadi).  -cchedana  =  °cheda 
J  IV.  192  ;  DhA  III. 482.  -tala  palm  of  the  hand  VvA  7. 
-ttha  [cp.  Sk.  hasta-stha,  of  stha]  lit.  standing  in  the 
hand  of  somebody,  being  in  somebody's  power  (cp. 
hattha-gata) ;  used  as  abstr.  hatthattha  (nt.)  power, 
captivity,  °r)  gacchati  &  agacchati  to  come  into  the 
power  of  (gen.),  to  be  at  the  mercy  of  [cp.  hattha-gata 

6  hatthai)  gacchati]  J  11.383  (ayanti  hatthattharj) ; 
IV. 420,  459  ;  v. 346  (°r)  agata).  As  pp.  hatth-attha-gata 
in  somebody's  power  J  1.244;  m  204 ;  vi.582.  An 
abstr.  is  further  formed  fr.  hatthattha  as  hatthatthata 
J  v. 349  (°tar)  gata).  The  BSk.  equivalent  is  hastatvarj 
MVastu  II.  1 82.  -pajjotika  hand-illumination,  scorching 
of  the  hand  (by  holding  it  in  a  torch),  a  kind  of  punish- 
ment M  1.87  ;  A  1.47  ;  II. 122  ;  Miln  197  ;  Nd'  154.  -pata- 
paka  a  coal-pan,  heating  of  the  hand  Vv  33'*  ;  VvA 
147;  see  mandamukhi.  -pasarana  stretching  out  one's 
hand  Vism  569.  -pasa  the  side  of  the  hand,  vicinity 
Vin  IV. 221,  230.  -bandha  a  bracelet  D  1.7;  DA  1.89. 
-vattaka  hand-cart  Vin  11.276.  -vikara  motion  of  the 
hand  J  iv.491.  -sara  hand-wealth,  movable  property 
DhA  1.240  ;  J  i.i  14  ;  DA  1.216. 

Hatthaka  [hattha -(- ka]  a  handful,  a  quantity  (lit.  a  little 
hand)  Vv  45^  (=kalapa  VvA  197). 

Hatthin  [Vedic  hastin,  lit.  endowed  with  a  hand.  i.  e. 
having  a  trunk]  an  elephant  Vin  1.218,  352  ;  11. 194  sq. 
(Nalagiri)=  J  v. 335  (nom.  sg.  hatthi ;  gen.  hatthissa) ; 
D  1.5;  A  11.209;  J  1.358;  II.  102;  DhA  1.59  (correct 
hatthi  !),  80  (ace.  pi.  hatthi) ;  size  of  an  elephant  Miln 
312;  one  of  the  seven  treasures  D  1.89;  11. 174;  often 
mentioned  together  with  horses  ("ass'adayo).  e.  g. 
A  IV. 107;  M  III. 104;  Vism  269;  DhA  1.392.  ekaca- 
rika-h.,  an  elephant  who  wanders  alone,  a  royal  elephant 


J  111.175;  canda  h.  rogue  elephant  M  1.519;  DA  137. 
—  hatthini  (f.)  a  she-elephant  Dh  105.  hatthinika  (f.) 
the  same  Vin  1277  ;  D  1.49  ;  DA  1.147. 

-atthara  elephant  rug  Vin  1.192  ;  D  I.7 ;  A  1.181. 
-Acariya  elephant  trainer  Vin  1.345;  J  n  94.  -21.  4"  ; 
IV. 91  ;  Miln  201.  -aroha  mounted  on  an  elephant,  an 
elephant-driver  D  151  ;  S  iv.310.  -Alankara  elephant's 
trappings  J  11.46.  -kanta^manta  el.  charm  DhA  1.163. 
-kantavina  lute  enticing  an  elephant  DhA  1.163  -kala- 
bha  the  young  of  an  elephant  A  iv.435.  -kumbha  the 
frontal  globe  of  an  elephant  J  11.245.  -kula  elephant 
species,  ten  enum''  at  VbhA  397.  -kkhandha  the 
shoulder  or  back  of  an  elephant  J  1.313;  Mhvs  vi.24. 
Pv'A  75.  178  -gopaka  an  elephant's  groom  or  keeper 
J  1. 187.  -damaka  elephant  tamer  M  in. 132.  136; 
SnA  161.  -damma  an  elephant  in  training  M  111.222. 
-nakha  a  sort  of  turrent  projecting  over  the  approach 
to  a  gate ;  °ka  provided  with  such  turrets,  or  supported 
on  pillars  with  capitals  of  elephant  heads  Vin  11. 169. 
-pada  an  elephant's  foot  M  1.176.  184;  S  v.43  ;  J  1.94. 
-pakara  "  elephant -wall,"  wall  of  the  upper  storey  %vith 
figures  of  elephants  in  relief  Mhvs  35,  5.  See  Geiger, 
Mhvs  trsl"  228,  n.  2.  -ppabhinna  a  furious  elephant 
Dh  326;  M  1.236.  -bandha  J  I.i35  =  hatthibhanda 
-bhanda  an  elephant-keeper  Vin  1.85;  11. 194.  -magga 
elephant  track  J  11.102.  -mangala  an  elephant  festival 
J  11.46.  -matta  only  as  big  as  an  elephant  J  1.303. 
-maraka  elephant  hunter  DhA  1.80.  -menda  an 
elephant's  groom  J  ill. 431  ;  v.287  ;  vi.498.  -yana  an 
elephant  carriage,  a  riding  elephant  D  i  49  ;  DA  1.147  ; 
FVA  55.  -yuddha  combat  of  elephant's  (as  a  theatrical 
show)  D  1.6.  -rupaka  elephant  image  or  picture,  toy 
elephant  (-t-assa°)  DhA  11.69.  -landa  elephant  dung 
DhA  IV. 1 56.  -lingasakuna  a  vulture  with  a  bill  like 
an  elephant's  trunk  DhA  1.164.  -vatta  elephant  habit 
Nd  92.  -sala  elephant  stable  Vin  1.277;  11  194  ;  DhA 
1.393.  -sippa  the  elephant  lore,  the  professional 
knowledge  of  elephant-training  J  11.22 1  sq.  -sutta 
an  elephant-trainer's  manual  J  11.46  (cp.  Mallinatha 
on  Raghuv.  vi.27).  -sondaka  "elephant  trunk,"  an 
under-garment  arranged  with  appendages  like  elephant 
trunks  Vin  11. 13  7. 

Hadaya  [Vedic  hfdaya,  hrd  =  Av.  «3roda_«o<  the  same  as 
Lat.  cor(dem),  but  perhaps=Lat.  haru  entrails  (haru- 
spex).  See  K.Z.  XL.419]  the  heart. —  i.  the  physical 
organ  D  11.293  i  S  1.207  (ettha  uro  hadayan  ti  vuttai) 
DhsA  140) ;  in  detail :  Vism  256,  356  ;  VbhA  60,  239.  — 
2.  the  heart  as  seat  of  thought  and  feeling,  esp.  of 
strong  emotion  (as  in  Vedas  !),  which  shows  itself  in  the 
action  of  the  heart  S  1. 199.  Thus  defined  as  "  cinta  "  at 
Dhtm  535  (as  had),  or  as  "  hadayarj  vuccati  cittag," 
with  ster.  expl"  "  raano  manasa  pandara  "  etc.  Dhs  17  ; 
Nd'  412.  Cp.  DhsA  140  (cittar)  abbhantar'  atthena 
hadayan  ti  vuttar)).  — With  citta  at  Sn  p.  32  (hadayar) 
te  phalessami  "  1  shall  break  your  heart  ") ;  hadayar) 
phalitar)  a  broken  heart  J  1.65  ;  DhA  1.173.  chinna  h. 
id.  J  V.I 80.  hadayassa  santi  calmness  of  h.  A  v. 64  sq.  ; 
hadaya  hadayar)  anfiaya  tacchati  M  1.32.  h.  nibbayi 
the  heart  (i.  e.  anger)  cooled  down  J  vi.349;  h.  me 
avakaddhati  my  heart  is  distraught  J  iv.415. —  duha- 
daya  bad-hearted  J  vi.469. 

-atthi  a  bone  of  the  heart  KhA  49,  50  (so  read  for 
padatthi,  see  App.  to  Pj  i.) ;  Vism  255  ;  SnA  1 16.  -gata 
["ngata]  gone  to  the  heart,  learnt  by  heart  Miln  10. 
-gama  [°ngama]  heart-stirring,  pleasant,  agreeable 
D  1.4;  III.  1 73;  M  1.345;  A  11.209;  V.205  ;  Vin  11177; 
NU'  446;  Dhs  1343;  DA  1.75.  -parijaha  heart -glow 
Miln  318.  -phalana  bursting  of  the  heart  J  1.282. 
-magsa  the  flesh  of  the  heart,  the  heart  J  1.278,  347; 
11.159  etc.  (very  frequent  in  the  Jatakas) ;  DhA  1.5; 
11.90.  -bheda  "  heart-break,"  a  certain  trick  in  cheating 
with  measures  DA  1.79.  -vaiicana  deluding  the  heart 
SnA  183  (cp.  J  VI. 388  hadaya-tthcna),  -vatthu  (i) 
the    substance    of   the    heart    Miln    281  ;    DhsA    140. 

VIII— 7* 


Han 


i88 


Hari 


(2)  "  heart-basis,"  the  heart  as  basis  of  mind,  sen- 
sorium  commune  Tikp  17,  26,  53  sq.,  62,  256;  Vism 
447;  SnA  228;  DhsA  257,  264.  See  the  discussion  at 
Dhs.  trsl'  Ixxxvi.  and  Cpd.  2  jj  sq.  -santapa  heart-burn, 
i.  e.  grief,  sorrow  Vism  54.  -ssita  stuck  in  the  heart 
(of  salla,  dart)  Sn  938  ;  Nd^  411. 

Han  (indecl.)  see  hai]. 

Hanati^  (&  hanti)  [han  or  ghan  to  smite,  Idg.  *gnhen,  as 
in  Av.  jainti  to  kill  ;  Gr.  f'n'rw  to  strike,  puvoc  murder  ; 
Lat.  de-fendo  "defend"  it  of-fendo ;  Ohg,  gundea  = 
Ags.  gua  "  battle."  The  Dhtp  (363  &  429)  gives 
"  higsa  "  as  meaning  of  han]  i.  to  strike,  to  thresh 
S  IV. 201  ;  ]  IV. 102.  —  2.  to  kill  D  1. 123  ;  A  iv.97  (asina 
hanti  attanar));  Sn  125;  Dh  405;  maggari"  to  slay 
travellers  on  the  road  J  1.274  ;  111.220.  —  3.  to  destroy, 
to  remove  Sn  118;  Dh  72.^ — Forms:  Pres.  i"'  sg. 
hanami  J  11.273;  2"''  sg.  hanasi  J  111.199;  v.460  ;  3''' 
sg.  hanti  Sn  118;  A  iv.97 ;  DhA  11.73  (  =  vinaseti) ; 
Dh  72  ;  hanati  J  v. 461  ;  hanati  J  1.432  ;  i='  pi.  hanama 
J  1.200  ;  3"i  pi.  hananti  Sn  669.  Imper.  hana  J  111.185  ; 
hanassu  J  v. 311  ;  hanantu  J  iv.42  ;  Dh  355;  J  1.368. 
Pot.  hane  Sn  394,  400  ;  haneyya  D  1.123  ;  Sn  705.  ppr. 
a-hanag  not  killing  D  1.116;  hananto  J  1274.  fut. 
hanissati  J  !V.io2;  haiichati  J  iv.102;  hafichema 
J  II. 418.  aor.  hani  Mhvs  25,  64  ;  s'""  pi.  hanigsu  Sn  295  ; 
J  1.256;  ger.  hantva  Sn  121;  Dh  294  sq.  ;  hanitvana 
J  III. 185.  —  Pass,  hafinati  D  11.352  ;  S  iv.i75 ;  Sn  312  ; 
J  1. 371  ;  IV. 102  ;  DhA  11.28.  ppr.  hafinamana  S  iv.201. 
grd.  hantabba  D  n.  173.  aor.  pass.  hannir)su  D  1.141. 
fut.  hafifiissati  DA  1.134.  —  Cans,  hanapeti  to  cause  to 
slay,  destroy  J  1.262  ;  DA  1.159;  ghatapeti  Vin  1.277; 
ghateti  to  cause  to  slay  Dh  405  ;  Sn  6.^:9  ;  a-ghatayag, 
not  causing  to  kill  S  i.i  16  ;  Pot.  ghataye  Sn  705  ;  ghata- 
yeyya  Sn  394 ;  aor.  aghatayi  Sn  308  ;  ghatayi  Sn  309  ; 
pass,  ghatiyati  Miln  186.  See  also  ghateti.  Cp.  upa- 
hanati,  vihanati;  °gha,  ghata  etc.,  paligha. 

Hanati^  [*han  for  had,  probably  from  pp.  hanna.  The 
Dhtm  (535)  gives  had  in  meaning  of  "  uccara  ussagga  "] 
to  empty  the  bowels  Pv  iv.8*  (  =  vaccar)  osajjate  PvA 
268).  —  pp.  hanna.     Cp.  uhanati*  &  ohanati. 


Banana  (nt.)  [fr.  hanati]  killing,  striking,  injuring  Mhvs  3, 
42- 

Hanu  (f.)  [Vedic  hanu  ;  cp.  Lat.  gena  jaw,  Gr.  yo'iic  chin, 
Goth.  kinnus  =  Ger.  kinn=E.  chin.  Oir.  gin  mouth]  the 
jaw  D  i.ii  ;  J  1.28  (maha°),  498;  SnA  30  ("saricalana) ; 
VbhA  145  ("sancopana).  "-saghanana jaw-binding,  in- 
cantations to  bring  on  dumbness  D  i.ii  ;  DA  1.97. 

Hanuka  (f.)  [fr.  hanu]  the  jaw  J  1.498  ;  DA  1.97  ;  Miln  229  ; 
also  nt.  Vin  11.266  ;  J  1.461  ;  11. 127  ;  iv.188  ;  -"ajthika  the 
jaw  bone  J  1.265  sq.  ;  Vism  251  ;  VbhA  58;  KhA  49  ; 
SnA  1 15. 

Hantar  [n.  ag.  fr.  hanati]  a  striker,  one  who  kills  D  1.56 ; 
A  II.  1 16  sq.  ;  III. 161  sq.  ;  S  1.85  ;  Dh  389. 

Handa  (indecl.)  [cp.  Sk.  hanta,  hag-l-ta]  an  exhortative- 
emphatic  particle  used  like  Gr.  aye  Si;  or  French  allons, 
voil4 :  well  then,  now,  come  along,  alas  !  It  is  con- 
structed with  i»'  pres.  &  fut.,  or  imper,  2"''  person 
D  1. 106,  142  ;  11.288  ;  Sn  153,  701,  1 132  ;  J  1.88,  22  i,  233  ; 
in. 135;  DA  1.237  (=  vavasay'atthe  nipato) ;  Nd^  697 
(  =  padasandhi) ;  Pv  i.io'  (  =  ganha  PvA  49);  11.3^' 
(  =  upasagg'atthe  nipata  PvA  88) ;  DhA  i.i6.  410  (handa 
je) ;  SnA  200  (vyavasane),  491  (id.);  VvA  230  (hand'- 
&hai)  gamissami). 

Hanna  (nt.)  [pp.  of  hanati^]  easing  oneself,  emptying  of 
the  bowels ;  su°  a  good  (i.  e.  modest)  performance  of 
bodily  evacuation,  i.  e.  modesty  J  1.421. 

Hambho  (indecl.)  [hag-l-bho]  a  particle  expressing  surprise 
or  haughtiness  J  1.184,- 494.     See  also  ambho. 


Hammiya  (nt  )  [cp.  Vedic  harmya  house  &  BSk.  harmika 
"summer-house"  (?)  Divy  244]  customarily  given  as 
"  a  long,  storied  mansion  which  has  an  upper  chamber 
placed  on  the  top,"  a  larger  building,  pasada,  (store-) 
house  Vin  1.58,  96.  239  ;  11. 146  (with  vihara,  addhayoga, 
pasada,  guha,  as  the  5  lenani),  152,  195;  Miln  393; 
Nd'  226  =  Vism  25.  °-gabbha  a  chamber  on  the  upper 
storey  Vin  11. 152. 

Haya  [cp.  Vedic  haya,  fr.  hi  to  impel.  A  diff.  etym.  see 
Walde,  Lat.  Wtb.  s.  v.  haedus]  i .  a  horse  Vv  64'  ;  J  11.98  ; 
Miln  2.  —  2.  speed  M  1.446.  -°vahin  drawn  by  horses 
J  VI. 125. 

Hara  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  hr]  taking,  fetching  ;  vayo°  bringing  age 
(said  of  giey  hairs)  J  1.138  ;  du°  S  1.36. 

Hara^a  (nt.)  [fr.  hi]  taking,  seizing,  removing  J  1.117,  118, 
232  ;  DA  1. 71.  kucchi"  n.  filling  of  the  belly  J  1.277. 
"bhatta  a  meal  to  take  along  DhA  11. 144. 

Haranaka  (nt.)  [fr.  harana]  goods  in  transit,  movable 
goods  Vin  111.51. 

Harani  (f.)  [fr.  harana]  i.  a  nerve  conveying  a  stimulus 
(lit.  "carrier");  only  used  with  rasa°  nerve  of  taste 
Vin  II.  1 37 ;  usually  given  as  "  a  hundred  thousand  "  in 
number,  e.  g.  J  v. 4.  293,  458 ;  DhA  1.134.  —  2.  in  kan- 
namala",  an  instrument  to  remove  the  wax  from  the 
ear  Vin  11.135.     Cp.  haraka. 

Harati  [Idg.  *gher;  in  meaning  "  take  "  cp.  Gr.  xf'p  hand ; 
in  meaning  "  comprise  "  cp.  Lat.  cohors.  Gr.  x^P'''"'^  '• 
Ags.  geard  =  yard.  —  The  Dhtm  expU  har  laconically  by 
"  harana"]  i.  to  carry  J  11. 176  ;  Dh  124  ;  to  take  with  one 
D  1.8,  142;  opposed  to  paccaharati  VbhA  349-354; 
SnA  52-58.  —  2.  to  bring  J  1.208;  to  offer  J  1.238; 
Sn  223.  —  3.  to  take,  gather  (fruits)  Miln  263.  —  4.  to 
fetch,  buy  J  1.291  (mama  santika).  —  5.  to  carry  away, 
to  remove  D  11. 160,  166;  J  1.282;  Sn  469  ;  Mhvs  i,  26; 
to  do  away  with,  to  abolish  J  1.345.  —  6.  to  take  away 
by  force,  to  plunder,  steal  D  1.52;  J  1.187;  v. 254. — 
7.  to  take  ofE,  to  destroy  J  1.222  (jivitai)),  310  (visag); 
to  kill  J  1.281.  —  Forms  :  aor.  ahasi  Sn  469  sq.  ;  Dh  3  ; 
]  IV.308  ;  cp.  upasaghasi  S  v. 2 14;  pahasi,  pariyudahasi, 
ajjhupahari ;  ger.  haritva  D  11. 160;  hatuna  J  iv.280 
(  =  haritva  C.);  inf.  haritug  J  1.187;  hatave  Th  i,  186; 
hatug  :  see  voharati ;  hattug  :  see  aharati  ;  Fut.  hahiti 
J  VI. 500  (  =  harissati).  —  Pass,  hariyati  M  1.33;  hirati 
J  v. 254  ;  pret.  ahiratha  J  v. 253  ;  grd.  haritabba  J  1.187, 
281.  —  pp.  hata. — Caus.  hareti  to  cause  to  take  Sn 
395  ;  to  cause  to  be  removed,  to  remove  J  1.345  ;  11. 176  ; 
III. 431  (somebody  out  of  office);  haretabba  that  which 
should  be  taken  out  of  the  way  J  1.298  ;  Caus.  II.  hara- 
peti  to  cause  to  be  brought,  to  offer  Vin  1.245  ;  J  11.38 ; 
to  cause  to  be  taken  (as  a  fine)  Miln  193. 

Haiayati  [Denom.  fr.  hiri  (  =  hri),  cp.  Vedic  hri  to  be 
ashamed,  Pres.  jihreti.  —  The  Dhtp  (438)  gives  roots 
hiri  &.  hara  in  meaning  "  lajja  "]  i.  to  be  ashamed  Vin 
1.88;  11.292  ;  D  1.213;  M  1. 120  ;  S  IV. 62  ;  It  43  ;  Pv  i.io^; 
ppr.  harayanto  Nd^  466,  &  harayamana  J  IV.171  ;  Nd* 
566.  Often  comb'*  with  attiyati  (q.  v.).  See  also  hiri- 
yati.  —  2.  [in  this  meaning  =  Vedic  hf  to  be  angry. 
Pres.  hfnite]  to  be  depressed  or  vexed,  to  be  cross,  to 
worry  (cp.  hiriyati)  J  v. 366  (ppr.  hariyyamana) ;  Th  i, 
1 1 73  (ma  hari  "  don't  worry  "). 

Hari  (adj.)  [Idg.  *ghel,  as  in  Lat.  helvus  yellow,  holus 
cabbage ;  Sk.  harita,  harina  pale  (yellow  or  green),  hiri 
(yellow) ;  Av.  sairi ;  Gr.  \Kooi:  green,  x^'^1  "  greens  "  ; 
Ags.  geolo  =  E.  yellow.  Also  the  words  for  "gold": 
hataka  &  hiranya]  green,  tawny  Dhs  617;  DhsA  317; 
"-ssavanna  gold-coloured  J  11.33  (  =  hari-samana-vanija 
suvanna"  C). 

-candana  yellow  sandal  Vv  83' ;  DhA  1.28 ;  -tala 
yellow  orpiment  Th  2,  393  ;lDhA  ni.29  ;  iv.113  ;  -ttaca 
gold-coloured  Th  2,  333;  ThA  235;  -pada  gold  foot, 
yellow  leg,  a  deer  J  111.184. 


Harina 


189 


Hayati 


Haripa  [fr.  hari]  a  deer  J  n.26. 

Harita  (adj.)  [see  hari  for  etym]  i.  green,  pale{-green), 
yellowish.  It  is  expH  by  Dhpala  as  nila  (e.  g.  VvA  197  ; 
FVA  158),  and  its  connotation  is  not  fixed.  —  Vin  1.137  ; 
D  1. 148;  S  1.5;  J  1.86,  87;  11.26.  no;  Pv  II.I21"  (bank  of 
a  pond) ;  Vv  45'  (°patta,  with  green  leaves,  of  a  lotus) ; 
J  II.  1 10  (of  wheat) ;  SnA  277  (°har)sa  yellow,  i.  e.  golden 
swan).  —  2.  green,  fresh  Vin  111.16;  A  v.234  (kusa) ; 
nt.  (collectively)  vegetables,  greens  Vin  266  (here 
applied  to  a  field  of  fresh  (i.  e.  green)  wheat  or  cereal  in 
general,  as  indicated  by  expl°  "  haiitar)  nama  pubbari- 
nai)  aparannar)  "  etc.);  cp.  haritapanna  vegetables 
SnA  283.  —  3.  harita  (f.)  gold  Th  i,  164  =  }  11.334 
(°maya  made  of  gold  ;  but  expl''  as  "  harita-mapi  parik- 
khata  "  by  C).  —  4.  Two  cpds.,  rather  odd  in  form,  are 
haritamatar  "  son  of  a  green  frog  "  J  11.238  (in  verse) ; 
and  haritupatta  (bhiimi)  "  covered  with  green  "  M 
1-343  ;  J  1-50.  399- 

Haritaka  (nt.)  [harita+ka]  a  pot-herb  D  11.342. 

Haritatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  fr.  harita]  greenness  Vin  1.96. 

Haritaka  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  haritaka]  yellow  rayrobalan  (Ter- 
minalia  citrina  or  chebula)  Vin  1.201,  206;  J  1.80; 
IV. 363;  Miln  II  ;  DhsA  320  (T.  haritaka);  VvA  5  (t) ; 
°-kI  (f.)  the  myrobalan  tree  Vin  1.30  ;  M  111.127.  puti- 
haritaki  Vism  40  ;  "pannika  all  kinds  of  greens  Vin  11.267. 

Hatei^uka  (f.)  [cp.  Sk.  harenuka]  a  pea  M  1.245  :  J  v. 405 
(  =  aparannaja  ti  406);  vi  537  ;  harenuka-yusa  pea-soup 
M  1.245  (one  of  the  4  kinds  of  soup). 

Halag  =  lii  alag  (q.  v.);  "  halag  dani  pakasitug  "  why 
should  I  preach  ?  Vin  1.5  =  D  11.36  =  M  i.  i68  =  S  1.136. 

Halahala'  [onomat.  ;  cp.  Sk.  halahala]  a  kind  of  deadly 
poison,  usually  as  "visa  J  1.271,  273,  380;  111.103; 
V.465  :  Miln  256;  Vism  57;  ThA  287. 

Halahala'  (nt.)  [onomat.]  uproar,  tumult  J  1.47  sq.  ;  Miln 
122.     Cp.  kolahala. 

Halidda  &  Haliddl  (i.)  [cp.  Sk.  haridra]  turmeric.  — 
I.  halidda:  Vin  ir2oi  ;  J  v. 89. — 2.  haliddi  (haliddi") 
M  1. 127;  A  III. 230,  233;  S  II.  10 1  ;  KhA  64;  "raga  like 
the  colour  of  turmeric,  or  like  the  t.  dye,  i.  e  not  fast, 
quickly  changing  &  fading  J  in.  148  (of  citta),  cp.  J 
III. 524  sq. 

Hava  [cp.  Vedc  hava ;  hu  or  hva  to  call]  calling,  challenge 
Days  II.  1 4. 

Have  (indecl.)  [ha-f-ve]  indeed,  certainly  Vin  1.2  ;  D  11.168  ; 
S  1. 169  ;  Sn  120,  181,  323,  462  ;  Dh  104,  151,  177,  382  ; 
J  '-S'.  365;  DhA  11.228. 

Havya  (nt.)  [Vedic  havya  ;  fr.  hu  to  sacrifice]  an  oblation, 
offering  S  1.169  ;  Sn  473  sq. ;  490. 

Haaati  &  Hassati  [owing  to  similarity  of  meaning  the  two 
roots  has  to  laugh  (Sk.  hasati,  pp.  hasita)  &  hi?  to  be 
excited  (Sk.  hfsyati,  pp.  hfsita  &  hfsja)  have  become 
mixed  in  Pali  (see  also  hasa).  —  The  usual  (differen- 
tiated) correspondent  of  Sk.  hj-fyati  is  hagsati.  The 
Dhtp  (309)  gives  hagsa  (  =  har?a)  with  tul^hi,  and  (310) 
hasa  with  ha-sana]  i.  to  laugh,  to  be  merry;  pres. 
hasati  Bu  1.28  ;  Mhvs  35,  59  ;  hassati  Sn  823,  829  ;  ppr. 
hasamana  is  preferable  v.  1.  at  J  iv.281  for  bhasamana; 
aor.  hasi  J  11. 103;  DhA  11. 17. —  Caus.  haseti  [i.  e.  both 
fr.  has  A  hr?]  to  cause  to  laugh  ;  to  please,  to  gladden 
Mhvs  32,  46;  J  VI. 217,  304;  DhA  11.85;  aor.  hasesi 
Vin  III. 84  ;  ppr.  hasayamana  making  merry  J  1.163.  209 
210;  ger.  hasayitvana  Miln  i. — Caus.  II.  hasapeti 
Sn.\  401  ;  J  VI. 31 1.  Cp.  pari",  pa°.  —  2.  to  neigh  (of 
horses)  J  1.62  ;  vi.581  (strange  aor.  hasissitjsu,  expl""  as 
hasigsu  by  C).  —  pp.  hasita  {&  haftha). 


H^ytanft  (nt.)  [fr.  hasati]  laughter  Dhtp  Jl. 

Hasamanaka  (adj.)  [ppr.  of  hasati -t-ka]  laughing,  merry 
Mhvs  35,  55  ;  (nt.)  as  adv.  °r)  jokingly,  for  fun  Vin  1.185. 

Hasita  [pp.  of  hasati,  representing  both  Sk.  hasita  & 
hfsita]  laughing,  merry;  (nt.)  laughter,  mirth  A  1. 261  ; 
Pv  III. 3'  (  =  hasitavant  hasita-mukhin  C);  Miln  297; 
Bu  1.28  ;  J  1.62  (?  read  hesita) ;  in. 223  ;  Vism  20. 

-uppada  "'genesis  of  mirth,"  aesthetic  faculty  Tikp 
276  ;  see  Cpd.  20  sq. 

Hasala  (adj.)  [fr.  has]  is  rather  doubtful  ("  of  charming 
speech"?  or  "smiling"?).  It  occurs  in  (corrupted) 
verse  at  J  vi.503  =  Ap  40  (&  307),  which  is  to  be  read 
as  "  ajara-bhamukha  (or  "pamha)  hasula  sussofifi5 
tanu-majjhima."  See  Kern's  remarks  at  Toev.  s.  v. 
hasula. 


(adj.-nt.)  [fr.  has,  cp.  Sk.  hasya]  ridiculous  Sn  328; 
(nt.)  I.  laughter,  mirth  D  1.19;  Sn  926;  DA  1.72; 
PvA  226;  DhA  III. 258  ;  Miln  266.  —  2.  a  joke,  jest 
hassa  pi,  even  in  fun  M  1.415;  hassena  pi  the  same 
J  V.481  ;  Miln  220  ;  "vasena  in  jest  J  1.439. 

Ha  (indecl.)  an  exclamation  of  grief,  alas!  ThA  154  (Ap 
V.154);  VvA  323,  324. 

Hataka  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  hataka,  connected  with  hari ;  cp. 
Goth.  gul}>=E.  gold]  gold  A  1.215;  iv.255,  258,  262 
(where  T  reads  hataka,  with  sataka  as  v.  1.  at  all 
pjissages) ;  Th  2,  382  ;  J  v.90. 

Hatabba  at  Nett  7,  32  may  be  interpreted  as  grd.  of  ha 
to  go  (pres.  jihite).  The  C.  expl»  it  as  "  gametabba, 
netabba  "  (i.  e.  to  be  understood).     Doubtful. 

Hatuna  see  harati. 

Hana  (nt.)  [fr.  ha,  cp.  Sk.  hana]  relinquishing,  giving  up, 
falling  off;  decrease,  diminution,  degradation  A  11. 167; 
III. 349  sq.  (opp.  visesa),  427;  Vism  11. 

-gamin  going  into  disgrace  or  insignificance  A  111.49  sq. 
-bhagiya  conducive  to  relinquishing  (of  perversity  and 
ignorance)  D  111.272  sq. ;  A  11. 167;  Nett  77;  Vism  85. 

Hani  (f)  [cp.  Sk.  hani]  i.  decrease,  loss  A  11.434  ;  v. 123  sq. ; 
S  I.I  1 1  ;  11.206,  242  ;  J  1.338,  346.  —  2.  falling  off,  waste 
Mhvs  33,  103.     Cp.  sag",  pari". 

Hapana  at  J  v.  ^33  is  with  Kern.  Toev.  1.132  (giving  the 
pa.ssage  without  ref.)  to  be  read  as  hapaka  "  neglectful  " 
[i.  e.  fr.  hapeti']. 

Hapita  [pp-  of  hapeti*]  cultivated,  attended,  worshipped 
J  IV.221  ;  V.158  (aggihuttag  ahapitag  ;  C.  wTongly  = 
hapita) ;  v. 20 1  =  vi.565.  On  all  passages  &  their  relation 
to  Cofn.  &  BSk.  see  Kern,  Toev.  1.132,  133. 

Hapeti*  [Caus.  of  ha  to  leave:  see  jahati;  to  which  add 
fut.  2°''  sg.  hahasi  J  in. 172;  and  aor.  jahi  J  iv.314; 
V.469]  I.  to  neglect,  omit  A  in. 44  (ahapayag);  rv.25  ; 
Dh  166;  J  n.437 ;  IV.  1 82  ;  ahapetra  vrithout  omitting 
anything,  i.  e.  fully  A  11.77  :  J  iv.132  ;  DA  1.99.  atthag 
hapeti  to  lose  one's  advantage,  to  fail  Sn  37  ;  J  1.251.  — 
2.  to  postpone,  delay  (the  performance  of  .  .  .)  J  in. 448; 
Vism  129.  —  3.  to  cause  to  reduce,  to  beat  down 
J  1. 124;  II. 31.  —  4.  to  be  lost  Sn  go  (?  read  hayati). 

Hapeti'  [in  form  =  Sk.  (Sutras)  havayati,  Caus.  of  juhoti 
(see  juhati),  but  in  mcaning  =  juhotil  to  sacrifice  to, 
worship,  keep  up,  cultivate  J  v. 195  (aggig  ;  =  juhati 
C).     See  Kern,  Toev.  1.133.  —  pp.  hapita. 

Hayati  is  Pass,  of  jahati  [ha],  in  sense  of  "  to  be  left 
behind,"  as  well  as  "  to  diminish,  dwindle  or  waste 
away,  disappear."  e.  g.  Nd*  147  (-(-pari^,  antaradha- 
yati);  Miln  297  (-fkhiyati);  ppr.  hayamana  Nd*  543. 
Cp.  hayana. 


Hayana 


190 


Hiranna 


Hayana'  (nt.)  [fr.  ha]  diminution,  decay,  decrease  D  1.54  ; 
DA  1. 165.     Opposed  to  vaddhana  (increase)  at  M  1.518. 

Hayana^  (nt.)  [Vedic  hayana]  year  ;  in  satthi°  60  years  old 
(of  an  elephant)  M  1.229  ;  J  11.343  ;  VI. 448,  581. 

Hayin  (adj.)  [fr.  ha]  abandoning,  leaving  behind  Sn  755  = 
It  62  (maccu°). 

Hara  [fr.  harati]  i.  that  which  may  be  taken;  grasping, 
taking;  grasp,  handful,  booty.  In  cpd.  "harin  taking 
all  that  can  be  taken,  rapacious,  ravaging  J  VI.58L  (of 
an  armv  '.  Kern,  Tocv.  1.133  wrong  in  trsl"  "  magnificent, 
or  something  like  it").  Of  a  river:  tearing,  rapid 
A  III. 64  ;  IV. 1 37  ;  Vism  231.  —  2.  category  ;  name  of  the 
first  sections  of  the  Netti  Pakarana  Nett  i  sq.,  195. 

Haraka  (adj.)  [fr.  hara]  carrying,  taking,  getting  ;  removing 
(f.  harika)  M  1,385;  J  1.134,  479:  Pv  ng'  (dhana°) ; 
SnA  259  (mar)sa°).  —  mala"  an  instrument  for  removing 
ear-wax  Ap  303  ;  cp.  haranl.  sattha°  a  dagger  carrier, 
assassin  Vin  in. 73  ;  S  iv.62.     See  also  valli. 

Hari  (adj.)  [fr.  hr;  cp.  Sk.  hari]  attractive,  charming 
S  IV. 316;  J  1.204  (°sadda). 

Harika  (adj.)  [fr.  hara]  carrying  D  11.348. 

Harin  (adj.)  [fr.  hara]  i.  taking,  carrying -(f.  harini) 
J  1133;  Pv  11.3'"  (nom.  pi.  f.  hari);  PvA  113.  —  2. 
robbing  J  1.204.  —  Cp.  hara". 

Hariya  (adj.)  [fr.  hara]  carrying  Vv  50';  ThA  200;  VvA 


Hahdda  (adj.)  [fr.  halidda]  dyed  with  turmeric  ;  a"  undyed, 
i.  e.  not  changing  colour  J  111.88  ;  cp.  111.148. 

Hasa  [fr.  has,  cp.  Sk.  hasa  &  harsa]  laughter;  mirth,  joy 
Dh  146;  DA  i.228  =  SnA  155  ("  amendita  ")  ;  J  1.33; 
11.82  ;  v. 1 12  ;  Miln  390.     See  also  ahasa. 

-kara  giving  pleasure,  causing  joy  Miln  252.  -kkhaya 
ceasing  of  laughter  Dhtp  439  (in  def"  of  gilana,  illness), 
-dhamma  merriment,  sporting  Vin  iv.112. 

Hasaniya  (adj.)  [fr.  has  or  hf? ;  cp.  Sk.  harsanlya]  giving 
joy  or  pleasure  Miln  149. 

Hasu°  (of  uncertain  origin)  occurs  with  hasa"  in  comb" 
with  "pafiiia  and  is  customarily  taken  in  meaning  "  of 
bright  knowledge"  (i.  e.  hasa  +  pafina),  wise,  clever. 
The  syn.  javana-paiiiia  points  to  a  meaning  like  "  quick- 
witted," thus  implying  ."  quick  "  also  in  hasu.  Kern, 
Toev.  1. 1 34  puts  forth  the  ingenious  cxpl"  that  hasu  is 
a  "  cockneyism  "  for  asu  =  Sk.  asu  "  quick,"  which  does 
not  otherwise  occur  in  Pali.  Thus  his  expl"  remains 
problematic.  —  See  e.  g.  M  III. 25  ;  S  1.63;  v.376 ; 
J  IV. 136;  VI. 255,  329.  —  Abstr.  °ta  wisdom  S  v.412  ; 
A  1.45. 

Haseti  see  hasati. 

Hahasi  is  2^^  sg.  fut.  of  jahati  (e.  g.  J  111.172) ;  in  cpd.  also 
"hahisi :  see  vijahati. 

Hahiti  is  fut.  of  harati. 

Hi  (indecl.)  [cp.  Sk.  hi]  for.  because ;  indeed,  surely  Vin 
1. 13  ;  D  1.4  ;  Dh  5  ;  Sn  21  ;  Pv  11. i'^  ;  11. 7"*  (  =  hi  saddo 
avadharane  PvA  103) ;  SnA  377  (  =  hi  karo  nipato  pada- 
piirana-matto)  ;  PvA  70,  76.  In  verse  J  iv.495.  h'etar) 
=  hi  etar)  ;  no  h'etag  not  so  D  1.3.     hevag  =  hi  evag. 

Hirjsati  [higs,  Vedic  hinasti  &  hirjsanti]  i.  to  hurt,  injure 
D  11.243;  S  1.70;  Sn  515;  Dh  132;  Pv  11. 9'  (  =  badheti 
C.) ;  111.4^  (  =  paribadheti  C.)  ;  SnA  460.  —  2.  to  kill 
M  1.39;  Dh  270. — Caus.  II.  higsapeti  PvA  123.  —  Cp. 


Higsana  (nt.)  [fr.  higs]  striking,  hurting,  killing  Mhvs  15, 
28. 

Higsa  (f.)  [Vedic  higsa]  injury,  killing  J  1.445  ;  Dhtp  387. 
higsa-mano  wish  to  destroy  Dh  390.     Opp.  a°. 

Higsitar  [n,  ag.  fr.  higsati]  one  who  hurts  D   11.243  ;   J 


Hikka  (I.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  hikka,  fr, 
hiccup  Sdhp  279. 


hikk  to  sob;  onomat.] 


Hikkara  [hik-|-kara]  =  hikka,  VbhA  70. 

Hinkara  (indecl.)  [hig  =  hi,  -(-kara,  i.  e.  the  syllable 
"  hig  "]  an  exclamation  of  surprise  or  wonder  J  VI.5Z9 
(C.  hin  ti  karanag). 

HingU  (nt.)  [Sk.  hingu]  the  plant  asafetida  Vin  1.20 1  ; 
VvA  1 86. 

-cunna  powder  of  asafetida  DhA  iv.171.  -raja  a 
sort  of  bird  J  vi.539. 

Hingulaka  [cp  Sk.  hingula,  nt.]  vermilion ;  as  jati"  J  v. 67. 
416  ;  VvA*.  168.     Also  as  °ika  (f.)  VvA  324. 

Hinguli  [Sk.  hinguli]  vermilion  Mhvs  27.  18. 

Hip^ati  [*Sk.  hilt4]  to  roam  Dhtp  108  (  =  ahindana).  See 
a°. 

Hita  (adj.)  [pp.  of  dahatji]  useful,  suitable,  beneficial, 
friendly  A  1.58,  155  sq.  ;  11.191  ;  D  111.211  sq.  ;  Dh  163. 
—  (m.)  a  friend,  benefactor  Mhvs  3,  37.  —  (nt.)  benefit, 
blessing,  good  Vin  1.4  ;  Sn  233  ;  A  11.96  sq..  176 ;  It  78 ; 
SnA  500.  —  Opp.  ahita  A  1.194  ;  M  1.332. 

-clnukampin  friendly  &  compassionate  D  1.4.  227; 
Sn  693;  J  1. 241,  244.  -upacara  beneficial  conduct, 
saving  goodness  J  1.172.  -esin  desiring  anothei's 
welfare,  well-wishing  M  11.238;  S  iv.359;  V.157;  °ta 
seeking  another's  welfare,  solicitude  Dhs  1056;  DhsA 
362  ;  VvA  260.     -kara  a  benefactor  Mhvs  4,  65. 

Hinati  [hi,  hinoti]  to  send  ;  only  in  cpd.  pahinati. 

Hintala  [hig-f-tala]  a  kind  of  palra,  Phoenix  paludosa 
Vin  1. 190;  DhA  in. 451. 

HindagU  [probably  for  indagu,  inda4-gu  (=°ga).  i.  e. 
sprung  from  Indra.  The  h  perhaps  fr.  hindu.  The 
spelling  h°  is  a  corrupt  one]  man,  only  found  in  the 
Niddesa  in  stock  def"  of  jantu  or  nara;  both  spellings 
(with  &  without  h)  occur;  see  Nd*  3  =  Nd2  249. 

Hima  (adj.-n.)  [cp.  Vedic  hima  ;  Gr.  xef^m  &  xmiibv  winter, 
Xiiiv  snow ;  Av.  saya  winter ;  Lat.  hieras  etc.]  cold, 
frosty  DhsA  317.  —  (nt.)  ice,  snow  J  111.55. 

-pata-samaya  the"  season  of  snow-fall  Vin  1.31,  288; 
M  1.79  ;  J  1.390  ;  Miln  396.  -vata  a  snow  or  ice  wind 
J  1-390- 

Himavant  (adj.)  [hima-fvant]  snowy  J  v. 63  (  =  hima- 
yutta  C).  (m.)  Himava  the  Himalaya:  see  Diet,  of 
Names. 

Hiyyo  (adv.)  [Vedic  hyah,  Gr.  x^k.  Lat.  heri ;  Goth, 
gistradagis  "  to-morrow."  E.  yester-day,  Ger.  gestern 
etc.]  yesterday  Vin  1.28;  11.77;  J  'yo.  237;  v.461  ; 
VI. 352,  386;  Miln  9.  In  sequence  ajja  hiyyo  pare  it 
seems  to  mean  "  to-morrow  "  ;  thus  at  Vin  iv.63,  69  ; 
J  IV, 481  (  =  sve  C).     See  para  2.  c. 

Hiranna  (nt.)  [Vedic  hiranya ;  see  etym.  under  hari  & 
cp.  Av.  saranya  gold]  gold  Vin  1.245,  276;  11. 159; 
A  IV. 393  ;  Sn  285,  307,  769  ;  Nd^-  11  ;  gold-piece  S  1.89  ; 
J  1.92.  Often  together  with  suvanna  Vin  1.150;  D 
II. 179;  h°-suvannag  gold  &  money  M  in. 175;  J  1.341- 
"olokana  (-kanima)  valuation  of  gold  J  11.272. 


Hiri 


191 


Hettha 


Hiri  &  hiri  (f.)  [cp.  Vedic  hri]  sense  of  shame,  bashfulness, 
shyness  S  1.33  ;  D  ni.212  ;  A  1.51,  95  ;  in. 4  sq..  331,  352  ; 
IV. II,  29  ;  Sn  77,  253,  719  ;  Pug  71  ;  Pv  1V.7'  ;  J  1.129, 
207;  Nett  50,  82  ;  Vism  8.  Expl^  Pug  23  sq.  ;  is  one 
of  the  caga-dhana's :  see  caga  (cp.  Jtm  31I).  —  Often 
contrasted  to  ct  combined  with  ottappa  {cp  below)  fear 
of  sin  :  A  1.51  ;  D  111.284  ;  S  11.206  ;  It  36  ;  Xett  39  ;  their 
difference  is  expH  at  Vism  464  ("  kaya-duccarit'  adihi 
hiriyati  ti  hiri ;  lajjay'  etar)  adhivacanai) ;  tehi  yeva 
ottappati  ti  ottappar)  ;  papato  ubbegass'  etag  adhi- 
vacanag  ") ;  J  1.129  sq.  ;  DhsA  124. 

-ottappa  shame  &  fear  of  sin  M  1.271  ;  S  11.220  ;  It  34  ; 
A  11.78 ;  J  1. 127,  206 ;  Tikp  61  ;  Vism  221  ;  DhA  in. 73. 
Frequently  spelt  otappa,  e.  g.  J  1.129;  It  36.  -kopina 
a  loin  cloth  M  i.io  ;  Vism  31,  195.  -nisedha  restrained 
by  conscience  S  1.7,  i68  =  Sn  462  ;  Dh  143  ;  DhA  in. 86. 
-ba'.a  the  power  of  conscientiousness  A  11. 150;  Dhs  30, 
loi.  -mana  modest  in  heart,  conscientious  D  11.78; 
M  1.43;  S  II.  159. 

Hirika  {&  hirJka)  (adj.)  {fr.  hiri]  having  shame,  only  as  -° 
in  neg.  ahirika  shameless,  unscrupulous  A  1.5 1,  85; 
II. 219;  Pug  19;  It  27  {'ika);  J  1.258  (chinna°  id.);  nt. 
°g  unscrupulousness  Pug  19. 

Hirimant  (&  hirimant)  (adj.)  [fr.  hiri]  bashful,  modest, 
shy  D  III. 252,  282  ;  S  11.207  sq. ;  iv.243  sq. ;  A  11. 2 18, 
227;  III. 2  sq.,  7  sq.,  112;  IV. 2  sq.,  38,  109;  v. 124,  148; 
1197;  Pug  23. 

Hiriya  (m.  &  nt.)  [fr.  hiri]  shame,  conscientiousness  VvA 
194. 

Hiriyati  (hiriyati)  [see  harayati]  to  blush,  to  be  shy ;  to 
feel  conscientious  scruple,  to  be  ashamed  Pug  20,  24  ; 
Miln  171  ;  Vism  464  (hiriyati);  DhsA  149. 

Hirivera  (nt.)  [cp.  Sk.  hrivera]  a  kind  of  Andropogon  (sort 
of  perfume)  J  vi.537;  ^^  '-^i- 

Hiladati  [hlad]  to  refresh  oneself,  to  be  glad  Dhtp  152 
(  =  sukha),  591  (id.). 

Hina  [pp.  of  jahati]  i.  inferior,  low  ;  poor,  miserable  ;  vile, 
base,  abject,  contemptible,  despicable  Vin  i.io;  D  1.82, 
98;  S  II. 154  (hinag  dhatug  paticca  uppajjati  hina 
sarifia);  ni.47  ;  iv.88,  309  (citta  h,  duggata);  D  111.106, 
III  sq.,  215  (dhatu);  A  11. 154;  m  349  sq.  ;  v.59  sq.  ; 
Sn  799,  903  sq. ;  Nd^  48,  103,  107,  146  ;  J  11. 6  ;  Pv  iv.i*' 
(opp.  panita) ;  Vv  24'^  (  =  lamaka  VvA  116) ;  Dhs  1025  ; 
DhsA  45;  Miln  288;  Vism  13;  Dh.\  111.163.  —  Often 
opposed  to  ukkatfha  (exalted,  decent,  noble),  e.  g.  Vin 
IV. 6 ;  J  1.20,  22;  111.218;  VbhA  410;  or  in  graduated 
sequence  hina  (>majjhinia)>  panita  (i.  e.  low.  medium, 
excellent),  e.  g.  Vism  11,  85  sq..  424,  473.  See  maj- 
jhima.  —  2.  deprived  of,  wanting,  lacking  Sn  725  = 
It  106  (ceto-vimutti°) ;  Pug  35.  —  hinaya  avattati  to 
turn  to  the  lower,  to  give  up  orders,  return  to  secular 
life  Vin  1.17;  S  11. 231  ;  iv.igi;  Ud  2i:  A  111.393  sq.  ; 
M  1.460  ;  Sn  p.  92  ;  Pug  66  ;  hinaya  vattati  id.  J  1.276 ; 
hinay'avatta  one  who  returns  to  the  world  M  1.460,  462  ; 
S  11.50  ;  IV. 103  ;  Nd'  147. 

-&dhimutta  having  low  inclinations  J  111.87  ;  Pug  26  ; 
°ifta  id.  S  11.157;  I'  7°-  -kaya  inferior  assembly  VvA 
298  (here  meaning  Yamaloka) ;  PvA  5.  -jacca  low- 
born, low-caste  J  11. 5  ;  in. 452  ;  v. 19,  257.  -vada  one 
whose  doctrine  is  defective  Sn  S2  7 ;  Nd'  1 67.  -viriya 
lacking  in  energy  It  116;  DhA  1.75  ;  11.260. 

EQyati  is  Pass,  of  jahati. 

Hira  [cp.  late  Sk.  hira]  i.  a  necklace  (?)  VvA  176.  —  2.  a 
small  piece,  splinter  J  iv.30  (sakalika") ;  hirahirag 
karoti  to  cut  to  pieces,  to  chop  up  J  1.9  ;  DhA  1.224 
(+  khai)4akhaijdag). 

HIraka  [hira-l-ka,  cp.  lexic.  Sk.  hiraka  "diamond"]  a 
splinter;  tala"  "  palm-splinter,"  a  name  for  a  class  of 
worms  Vism  258. 


Hirati  is  Pass,  of  harati. 

Hilana  (nt.)  &  °a  (f.)  [fr.  hi^  scorn(ing).  disdain,  contempt 
Miln  357;  DA  1.276  (of  part,  "re":  hilana-vasena 
amantanag) ;  as  °a  at  Vbh  353  (-|-ohilana) ;  VbhA  486. 

EElita  [pp.  of  hijetij  despised,  looked  down  upon,  scorned 
Vin  IV. 6 ;  Miln  227,  251;  Vism  424  (  +  ohilita  oniiata 
etc.);  DA  1.256. 

Hileti  [Vedic  hi^  or  hel  to  be  hostile  ;  cp.  Av.  scasa  awful ; 
Goth,  us-geisnan  to  be  terrified.  Connected  also  with 
higsati.  —  The  Dhtp  (637)  defines  by  "  ninda  "]  i.  to 
be  vexed,  to  grieve  S  1.308  ;  to  vex,  grieve  Vv  84*'.  — 
2.  to  scorn,  disdain,  to  feel  contempt  for,  despise  D 
11.275;  Sn  713  (appag  danag  na  hijeyya) ;  J  11.258; 
DA  1.256  (  =  vambheti):  DhA  iv.97;  Miln  169  (H-gara- 
hati).  —  pp.  hilita. 

Hug  (indecl.)  the  sound  "  hug  "  an  utterance  of  discontent 
or  refusal  DhA  in. 108  =  VvA  77;  Vism  96.  Cp.  hag. 
hunkara  growling,  grumbling  Vism  105.  hunkaroti  to 
grumble  DhA  11 73.  hunkarana=°kara  DhA  11  73  sq. 
See  also  huhunka. 

Hokka  the  sound  uttered  by  a  jackal  J  in.i  13. 

Huta  [pp.  of  juhati]  sacrificed,  worshipped,  offered  Vin 
1.36=  J  1.83  ;  D  1.55  ;  J  1.83  (nt.  "  oblation  ") ;  Vv  342' 
(su°.  +  sudinna,  suyittha) ;  Pug  2  i  ;  Dhs  1215;  DA  1. 1 65  ; 
DhA  11.234. 

-asana  [cp.  Sk.  huta^ana]  the  fire,  lit.  "  oblation- 
eater  "  Davs  11.43  ;  Vism  171  (  =  aggi). 

HoUa  (nt.1  [cp.  Vedic  hotra]  sacrifice :  see  aggi". 

Honitabba  is  grd.  of  juhati  •^  to  be  sacrificed,"  or  "  vener- 
able "  Vism  219  (  =  5huneyya). 

Hapeyya  "  it  may  be  "  Vin  1,8  ;  =  huveyya  M  1.171.  See 
bhavati. 

Horai]  (adv.)  [of  uncertain  origin]  there,  in  the  other 
world,  in  another  existence.  As  prep,  with  ace.  "  on 
the  other  side  of,"  i.  e.  before  Sn  1084  ;  Nd'  109  ;  usually 
in  connection  idha  va  hurag  va  in  this  world  or  the  other 
S  1. 12  ;  Dh  20  ;  Sn  224  =  J  1.96  ;  hurahurag  from  existence 
to  existence  Dh  334  ;  Th  1,  399  ;  Vism  107  ;  DhA  IV. 43. 
—  The  expl"  by  Morris  7. P.  T.S.  1884,  105  may  be  dis- 
carded as  improbable. 

Hnhonka  (adj.)  [fr.  hug]  saying  "  hug,  hug,"  i.  e.  grumbly, 
rough  ;  "jatika  one  who  has  a  grumbly  nature,  said  of 
the  brahmins  Vin  1.2  ;  Ud  3  ("  proud  of  his  caste  " 
Seidenstucker).  nihuhunka  (  =  nis  +  h.)  not  grumbly 
(or  proud),  gentle  Vin  1.3 ;  Ud  3.  Thus  also  Kern, 
Toev.  1.137;  differently  Hardy  in  J.P.T.S.  1901,  42 
("  uttering  &  putting  confidence  into  the  word  hug  ") 
Bdhgh  (Vin  1.362)  says  :  "  dittha-mangaliko  manava.sena 
kodhavasena  ca  huhun  ti  karonto  vicarati." 

Huti  (f.)  [fr.  hu,  hva  "  to  call,"  cp.  avhayati]  calling, 
challenging  S  1.208. 

He  (indecl.)  a  vocative  (exclam.)  particle  "  eh,"  "  here," 
hey  M  1.125,  126  (  +  je);  DhA  1.176  (double). 

Hetthato  (adv.)  [fr.  hettha]  below,  from  below  Ps  1.84; 
Dhs  1282,  1284  ,  Mhvs  5,  64. 

Hettha  (indecl.)  [cp.  Vedic  adhastat  =  adhalj  +  abl.  suS. 
°tat]  down,  below,  underneath  Vin  1.15;  D  1.198;  It 
114;  J  1.71  ;  VvA  78;  PvA  113.  As  prep,  with  gen. 
(abl.)  or  cpd.  "under"  J  1.176;  11. 103;  lower  in  the 
manuscript,  i.  e.  before,  above  J  1.137,  206,  350;  VvA 
203  ;  lower,  farther  on  J  1.235. 

-asana  a  lower  seat  J  1.176.  -nasika-(sota)  the  lower 
nostril  J  1.164.  -bhaga  lower  part  J  1.209.  4S4.  -maflce 
underneath  the  bed  J  1.197  ("maiicato  from  under  the 


Hetthima 


192 


Horapathaka 


bed) ;  11. 2  75,  419;  iv.  365 .  -vata  the  wind  below,  a  wind 
blowing  underneath  J  1.481.  -sisaka  head  downwards 
J  in.  1 3. 

Hetthima  (adj.)  [compar.-superl.  formation  fr.  hettha] 
lower,  lowest  Vin  iv.168;  Dhs  1016;  Tikp  41;  PvA 
281  ;  Sdhp  238,  240,  256.     °tala  the  lowest  level  J  1.202. 

Hethaka  (adj.-n.)  [fr.  hetheti]  one  who  harasses,  a  robber 
J  IV. 495,  498.     Cp.  vi°. 

Hethana  (f.)  [fr.  hetheti]  harassing  D  11.243  ;  VbhA  75. 

Hetheti  [Vedic  he4  =  hel  or  hi4  (see  hileti)]  to  harass,  worry, 
injure  J  iv.446,  471;  Pv  111.52  (  =  badheti  PvA  198); 
ppr.  a-hethayag  Dh  49;  S  1.2 1.  med.  a-hethayana 
S  1.7;  IV. 1 79;  ger.  hefhayitvana  J  111.480, — pp.  hetha- 
yita  J  1V.447. 

HetaiJ  — bi  etag. 

Heta  [Vedic  hetu,  fr.  hi  to  impel]  i.  cause,  reason,  con- 
dition S  1. 134  ;  A  111.440  sq.  ;  Dhs  595.  1053  ;  Vism  450  ; 
Tikp  Ti,  233,  239.  In  the  older  use  paccaya  and  hetu 
are  almost  identical  as  synonyms,  e.  g.  n'atthi  hetu 
n'atthi  paccayo  D  1.53 ;  attha  hetu  attha  paccaya 
D  III. 284  sq.  ;  cp.  S  111.69  sq. ;  D  11. 107;  M  1.407;  A 
1.55  sq.,  66,  200  ;  IV.  151  sq. ;  but  later  they  were  differen- 
tiated (see  Mrs.  Rh.  D.,  Tikp  introd.  p.  xi.  sq.).  The 
dift.  between  the  two  is  expH  e.  g.  at  Nett  78  sq. ;  DhsA 
303.  —  There  are  a  number  of  other  terms,  with 
which  hetu  is  often  comb'',  apparently  without  dis- 
tinction in  meaning,  e.  g.  hetu  paccaya  karana  Nd^  617 
(s.  V.  sankha) ;  mula  h.  nidana  sambhava  pabhava 
samutthana  ahara  arammana  paccaya  samudaya; 
frequent  in  the  Niddesa  (see  Nd^  p.  231,  s.  v.  mQla).  — 
In  the  Abhidhimmi  we  find  hetu  as  "  moral  condition  " 
referring  to  the  6  mulas  or  bases  of  good  Sc  bad  kamma, 
viz.  lobha,  dosa,  moha  and  their  opposites  •  Dhs  1053  sq, ; 
Kvu  532  sq.  — ■  Four  kinds  of  hetu  are  distinguished  at 
DhsA  303  =  VbhA  402,  viz.  hetu",  paccaya",  uttama°, 
sadharana°.  Another  4  at  Tikp  27,  viz.  kusala", 
akusala",  vipaka°,  kiriya°,  and  9  a:  Tikp  252,  viz. 
kusala",  akusala",  avyakata°,  in  3  x  3  constellations  (cp, 
DhsA  303).  —  On  term  in  detail  see  Cpd.  279  sq. ;  Dhs. 
tsyl"  §§  1053,  1075.  —  abl.  hetuso  from  or  by  way  of 
(its)  cause  S  v.304 ;  A  111.417. — ace.  hetu  (-°)  (ellipti- 
cally  as  adv.)  on  account  of,  for  the  sake  of  (with  gen.) ; 
e.  g.  dasa-kammakara-porisassa  hetu  M  11. 187;  kissa 
hetu  why  ?  A  111.303  ;  iv.393  ;  Sn  1 131  ;  Pv  11. 8I  (  =  kir) 
niraittar)  PvA  106) ;  pubbe  kata°  by  reason  (or  in  con- 
sequence) of  what  was  formerly  done  A  1. 1 73  sq.  ;  dhana" 
for  the  sake  of  gain  Sn  122. — 2.  suitability  for  the 
attainment  of  Arahantship,  one  of  the  8  conditions  pre- 
cedent to  becoming  a  Buddha  Bu  11.59  =  J  1.14,  44.  — • 
3.  logic  Miln  3. 

-paccaya  the  moral-causal  relation,  the  first  of  the  24 
Paccayas  in  the  Patthana  Tikp  i  sq  ,  23  sq.,  60  sq.,  287, 
320  ;  Dukp  8,  41  sq.  ;  Vism  532  ;  VbhA  174.  -pabhava 
arising  from  a  cause,  conditioned  Vin  1.40;  DhA  1.92. 
-vada  the  theory  of  cause,  as  adj.  "  proclaimer  of  a 
cause,"  name  of  a  sect  M  1.409  ;  opp.  ahetu-vada  "  denier 
of  acausBj"  (also  a  sect)  M  1.408  ;  ahetu-vadin  id.  J  v. 228, 
241  (=Jtm  149). 


Hetoka  (adj.)  (-°)  [fr.  hetu]  connected  with  a  cause, 
causing  or  caused,  conditioned  by,  consisting  in  Mhvs 
I,  45  (mani-pallanka°) ;  Dhs  1009  (pahatabba") ;  VbhA 
17  (du°,  ti°).  Usually  as  sa°  and  a°  (with  &  without  a 
moral  condition)  A  1.82  ;  Vism  454  sq. ;  Dukp  24  sq. 
sa°  Dhs  1073  (trsl°  "  having  root-conditions  as  concomi- 
tants ") ;  Kvu  533  ("  accompanied  by  moral  condi- 
tions ");  a°  S  111.210  (°vada,  as  a  "  ditthi  ");  Vism  450. 

Hetatta  (nt.)  [abstr.  formation  fr.  hetu]  reason,  conse- 
quence; abl.  in  consequence  of  (-")  Vism  424  (diUhi- 
visuddhi"). 

Hetuye  see  bhavati. 

Hema  (nt.)  [cp.  Epic  Sk.  heman]  gold  D  11. 187  ;  J  vi.574. 
-Jala  golden  netting  (ascoverof  chariots  etc.)  A  iv. 393  ; 
Vv  35"^,   36*  (°ka).     -vanna  golden-coloured  D  11. 134; 
Th  2,  333  ;  ThA  235  ;  DhsA  317. 

Hemanta  [hema(=hima)-fanta]  winter  A  iv.138  ;  J  1.86  ; 

Miln  274. 

Hemantika  (adj.)  [fr.  hemanta]  destined  for  the  winter, 
wintry,  icy  cold  Vin  1.15,  31  (rattiyo),  288;  M  1.79; 
S  V.51  ;  A  IV. 127 ;  Vism  73. 

Hemavataka  (adj .)  [fr.  himavant]  belonging  to,  living  in  the 
Himalaya  J  1.506;  iv.374,  437;  "vatika  id.  Dpvs  v. 54. 

HeraMika  {&  °aka)  [fr.  hirafifia,  cp  BSk.  hairanyika  Divy 
501  ;  MVastu  in. 443]  goldsmith  (?  for  which  suvaij- 
nakara  !).  banker,  money-changer  Vism  5i5  =  VbhA 
91  ;  J  1.369;  III. 193;  DA  1. 315;  Miln  331  (goldsmith  ?). 
-phalaka  tue  bench  (i.  e.  table,  counter)  of  a  money 
changer  or  banker  Vism  437  =  VbhA  115;  J  u.429 ; 
III.  193  sq. 

Hevar)  see  hi. 

Hesati  [both  he?  (Vedic)  &  hre?  (Epic  Sk.);  in  Pali  con- 
fused with  hr?  (hasati):  see  hasati^j  to  neigh  J  1.51,  62 
(here  hasati);  v.304  (T.  sigsati  for  higsati;  C.  expU 
hiijsati  as  "  hessati,"  cp.  abbihigsan.a  for  "hesana).  — 
pp.  hesita. 

Hesa  (f.)  [fr.  hesati]  neighing,  neigh  Davs  v. 56. 

Hesita  (nt.)  [pp.  of  hesati]  neighing  J  1.62  (here  as  hasita); 
Mhvs  23,  72. 

Hessati  is:  i.  Fut.  of  bhavati,  e.  g.  J  111.279.  —  2.  Fut. 
of  jahati,  e.  g.  J  iv.4i5  ;  vi.44i. 

Hehitiis  Fut.  3"'  sg.  of  bhavati,  e.  g.  Bu  11.10=  J  1.4  (v.  20). 

Hoti,  hotabba  etc.  see  bhavati. 

Hotta  (nt.)  [Vedic  hotra]  (function  of)  offering;  aggi°  the 
sacrificial  fire  SnA  436  (v,  1.  BB  "hutta). 

Homa  (m.  &  nt.)  [fr.  hu,  juhati]  oblation  D  1.9  ;  DA  1.93 

(lohita''). 

Horapathaka  [late  Sk.  hora  "  hour  "  (in  astrol.  literature, 
fr.  Gr.  iofja  :  cp.  Winternitz,  Gesch.  d.  Itid.  Lit.  111.569 
sq.) -H  pathaka,  i.  e.  expert]  an  astrologer  Mhvs  35,  71. 


X, 

la 

X, 

.      lb 

X, 

.      lb 

X, 

.      lb 

ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 

Note. — A  great  many  suggested  additions  (esp.  to  Vol.  I.)  I  have  to  leave  over  for  a  second  edition,  as  a  complete 
enumeration  would  greatly  augment  the  inconvenience  of  the  following  list,  "  additions  "  being  a 
nuisance  in  any  case.     I  have  picked  out  the  most  important  ones  only. 

VOLUME  I. 

Page     X,  fce/ore  Mahavagsa  .   .  .,  Khuddhasikkha,  J.T.P.S.  1883  (Khus). 
X.     ,,      Netti  .   .  ..  Miilasikkha,  J  P.T.S.  1883  (Mills). 
,,         X,  under  la  add  Ap&dana.  P.T.S.  I9.:5  (Ap). 

X,      ,,     la    ,,  Dukapatthana,  P.T.S.  1906  (Dukp). 

Tikapatjiiana,  3  vols.    P.T.S.  1921-23  (Tikp). 

Manoratha-purani   P.T.S.    1924   (AA) ;    Samanta-pasadika   P.T.S.    1924    (Sam.   Pas.  or 

Vin  A). 
Papanca  Sudani,  pt.  I.,  P.T.S.  1922  (MA). 
Sammoha-Vinodani,  P.T.S.  1923  (VbhA). 
xi,  a/<c»- Visuddhi  .  .  .,  Yogavacara's  Manual,  P.T.S.  1896  (Yog). 
xi,  for  Ilaward  read  Harvard, 
xi,  to  Mahavastu  .  .  .  add  (Mvst). 
xi,  under  2  :  The  ed.  of  Lalitavistara  which  I  have  used,  and  from  which  I  quote,  is  the  Calcutta  ed.  (1877), 

by  Rajendralala  Mitra  (Bibl.  Indica),  and  not  Lefmann's. 
xi,      „      3  add  Neumann,  Die  Reden  Gotamo  Buddha's  (Mittlere  Sammlung),  Vols.  I.  to  III.*  192 1. 
xi.      „      3  for  Anug  read  S.Z.  Aung. 
xi,      ,,      3  to  Questions  of  .  .   .  add  (Miln). 
xi,      ,,      3  <i)  Vinaya  Texts  .  .   .  add  (y'lnT.). 

xi,      .,      3  add  Human  Types,  P.T.S.  trsl.  1924  (Pug  trsl.)  and  insert  accordingly  on  p.  xii  under  B  i. 
xi,      „      3     ,,     Path  of  Purity,  P.T.S.  trsl.  1923,  ist  pt.  (Vism.  Trsl.). 
xi,      ,,      4     ,,     Brahmaija  (Br.). 

xi,      ,,4     ,.     Dhatupatha  &  Dhatumanjusa.  ed.  Andersen  &  Smith,  Copenhagen  192 1  (Dhtp,  Dhtm). 
xi,      ,,      4     ,.     ^tapatha-Brahmana  (trsl.  J.  Eggeling)  (^at.  Br.). 
xii.      ,,    B,  I  ,,     BR.  Boehtlingk  and  Roth. 
xii,      ,,    B,  I  ,,     Dhtm  Dhatumanjusa    ...  4. 
xii,      ,,    B   I  ,,     Dhtp  Dhatupatha         ...  4. 
xii,      ,,    B,  I  ,,     Dukp  =  Dukapatthana    .     .     .   \a. 
xii,      „   B,  I  .,     Pattli=Patthana:  see  Duka"  &  Tika°  .     .     .  la. 
xii,      .,   B,  I    .     Tikp=Tikapatthana  .   la. 

xii,      ,.   B.  I,.     VbhA=Sammoha-Vinodani     .     .     .   ib. 
xii,      „    B,  1  „     Vism.  Trsl.  =  Path  of  Purity    .     .     .  3. 
xii.      .,      4     .,     Kirfel,  W.  Kosmographie  der  Inder,  Bonn  &  Leipzig  1920, 
xiii,      ,,      2     ,,     cond  conditional. 
J,  column  I.  1.  25,  read  a*  fot  a*. 
I,       ,,       2.  under  akkamana  in  [  ]  read  Jbafor  Itm. 

4,  ,,       2,      ,.      aggala  iMseri  I.  (better :)  the  wing  of  a  door  (see  phusita'). 

5,  ,.       2,    read    aghamiga  for  aggha". 

6,  ,,       2,  1.22.    rea<i  "  part  or  interest  (opp.  bahirag  the  interest  in  the  outside  world)  " 
8,        ,.        I.   read  accasarin /of  accasarin. 

8.  ,.  I,    put     accavadati  before  accasanna. 

9.  .,  2,  under  aja  :  aja  pada  refers  to  a  stick  cloven  like  a  goat's  hoof  ;  so  also  at  Vism  161. 
II,  ,,  2.      ,.      ajjhavuttha  reaij  osita /or  anosita. 
II,  ,,  2,    1.3,    read  excessive  for  ecc". 

14,  ,,  2,    1.28,     .,    believes /or  belives. 

15,  ,,  2,  to  p.  17,  column  I  headlines  read  Attha,  Ad^ha  for  Attha,  Addha. 
15,  ,,  2,  I.  21  from  bottom,  read  symmetry /or  surametry. 
17,  ,,  I,  under  addha-ratta  change  J  1.164  into  1.264. 
17,  ,,  I,      ,,      addha-telasa  reaii  12 J /or  1 3j. 
19,  ,,  I,  1.  6,  read  adulteress /or  adultress. 
19,  ,,  2,  1.  9  from  top,  r«a<i  atidura /or  atidura. 

21,  ,.  I,  1.  26.  read  late /or  exete. 

22,  ..  2,  transfer  atta-kama  to  attha". 

23,  „  I,  »«(i«r  attaniya  read  soul-like /or  soul-lika. 

24,  ,,  I,  transfer  °kama  to  precede  kamin. 
24,  ,,  2,  1.  25,  read  phraseology  for  phraselogy. 
26.  „  I,  under  adda'  correct  Nd«  99*  to  Nd"  I99«,  and  add  :  The  reading  allAvalepana  occurs  at  Nd»  40 

(=S  IV.  187).  and  is  perhaps  to  be  pcrferred.     T"he  meaning  is  better  to  be  given 
as  "  newly  plastered." 
26,        ,,       2,  1.  41,  renrf  period /or  geriod. 

'93 


194 

Page    27,  column  2,  under  adhikarana  read  under  yatva°  :  yato  +  adhi/o/  yat  +  adhi. 

30,        ,,       2.   after  anajjhittha  insert  :  Anati  [An,  Vedio  aniti  &  anati]  to  breathe  KhA  1.124  (>n  def.  of 
bala) ;  DA  1.244  {"^"d  ananti/oy  ananti).     Cp.  pana. 

32,  ,,        2,  1.  10,   read  unlucky /or  unluckly. 

33.  ..       2,  1.  1 1  from  bottom,  rcaii  supplementary /o»' supplementy. 
35.        ,,        1,1.    5      .,         ,,  ,,     move /or  more. 
35,        ,,       I,  under  anugganhati  read  D  1.53 /or  T  1.53. 
38,        ,.        1,1.  30,  read  worldly /oy  wordly  and  (>-j  for  97. 

38,  ,,       2,1.24,     ••    supreme /or  suppreme. 

39,  ,,        I,  under  ioapaXa.  add  [\a.da.°)  after  A  I. idi. 

41,  ,,       2,      ,,      anurakkhana  read  Pug /oy  Rug. 

42,  ,,        I,  1.  I  from  bottom,  delete  "in." 
42,        ,,       2,  1.  36,  read  facing  the  wind. 

42,  ,,  2,   read  Anuvada /w- Anuvada. 

43,  ,,  2,  1.  46,  rea«i  connected /or  nonnected. 

44,  ,,  1,1.    2,     ,,    quarrelling /or  quarelling. 
44,  ,,  1,1.39,     i>    residuum /or  residium. 

44,  ,,        I,  under  anusaya,  1.  11  of  article,  read  is  for  i\. 

45,  ,,       2,  read  anupaghata/oy  aniipghata. 

47,  .,  2,  1.  1 1  from  bottom,  read  Trenckner /or  Trenckener. 

48,  ,,  I,  ««(i(!>' Antara  read -gacchati/or -gattchati. 
52,  ,,  I,      ,,      Apapibati  yead  J  11.126/or  III.I26. 
52,  ,,  I,  1.  16  from  bottom,  read  continuous /or  continuou. 
54,  „  2,  under  api  1.  6  from  bottom,  read  Yasag /or  yasar) . 

56,  „        2,1.8    from  bottom,  j'fiad  impulsive /or  in°. 

57.  ..        I.  1.  19      ..  ,,  ,,     indestructible /or  "able. 
59,        ,,        I,  1.  14,  read  achievements /or  acch°. 

69,  „  I,  read  abhilakkhita /or  ahhilakkhita. 

70,  ,,  I,  1.  19  from  bottom,  i-rad  heathenish /or  °isch. 

71.  ,,  I,  1.    2      ,,  ,,         ,,       possessing /or  posess". 

72.  ,,  1,  1.  II,  read  Abhisambhu /or  Absambhu. 
73i  •.  2,  Mnder  Amassuka  >-ead  J  II. 185 /or  175. 
76,  ,,  I,      ,,      arana'  cross  out  No.  i  before  (adj.). 

76,  ,,  2,      ,,      arani  read  sadisa-vanna /or  sadi-savanija. 

77,  ,,  2,  Aribhaseti  correct  to  Pari°  according  to  FausboU  (J  v.  corr.) 
77,  ,,  2,1.    9,  read  spirituous /or  spiritous. 
77.  ..  2,  1.  II  from  bottom,  reai  M  1.7,  300 /or  M  1.7.  I. 
79,  ,,  2,  M«der  alia  2  insert  alldvalepana,  see  adda'. 

81,  ,,  2,  1.  3  from  bottom,  read  e.xperiences. 

82,  ,,  2,  M«der  Avadata  read  metri/or  matri. 

83,  ,,  I,  ,,  avanata  read  onata /or  avanata. 
86,  ,,  I,      ,,      Avyapajjha' read  It  31  (abyabajjh') /or  abyabojjh'. 

88,  ,,       2,      ,,      Asi  read  (uiider  cpds.) : -mala  (-kamma)  sword-garland  (-torture)  J  III.  178;  D5VSIH.35. 
Preferable  to  interpretation  "  sword  dirt  "  ;  see  mala  (mala). 

89,  ,,        I,  after  Asita'  put  in  new  article  Asita*  (m.  nt.)  [fr.  asi]  a  sickle  J  in. 129  ;  v. 46. 
89,        ,,        I,  1.  35. ''''"'^  intuiting /or  intuitising. 
91.        ,,        1,1.  16.     ,.    intoxicated /or  intoricated. 
91,        ,,       2,  under  ahag  read  "  The  end.  form  in  the  sg." 
93.  should  have  heading  A  at  top  of  page. 
98,  column  I,  M«d«r  ani,  last  line,  read  Hve  for  fire. 

102,  ,,  I,  ,,  apaga  read  Davs  1.32  for  52. 

102,  ,,  2,  ,,  apana  read  a+ pan. 

102,  ,,  2,  ,,  apatti  add  cpd.  "vutthanata  forgiveness  of  an  offence  Vin  11.250. 

103,  ,,  2,  ,,  abhata  add:  see  under  yatha-bhata. 
103.  ..  I.  ..  apiyati  read  r /or  ^. 
103,  ..  2,  ,,  abhata  detoe  "  for  yathabhutag,"  awiitHser/ r«/.  A  11.71  ;  It  12,  14  witt /)Arase  "  yatha- 

bhatari  as  he  has  been  reared  (cp.  J  v. 330  evag  kiccha  bhafo)."     Gp.  yathabhata. 
103,        ,,       2,      ,,      abhasa  de/e/e  ref.  M  11.215. 
lio>        ,,       2,      ,,       alupa  add  :  the  form  aluva  occurs  at  Ap  237. 
Ill,        ,,        2,      ,,        avatta  read  M  1.461 /or  460. 
115.        ..        I.  after     Asana  insert  Asana^  (.')  eating  Vism  116  (visam°,  cp.  visam-asita  Miln  302).      See, 

however,  masana. 
1 17-         ..        I.  MKder  ahanati  add.    i"  sg.  fut.  ahanhi  Vin  1.8  ;  D  11.72,  where  probably  to  be  read  as  ahaiih' 

(=ahaiihar)).     See  Geiger,  P.Gr.  §  153,  2. 
123,       ..       2,      ,,      isi  read  Bharadvaja /or  Bhara°  ;  and  jwseri  ref.  Vin.  1.245. 
125,        ,,        2,  invert  ukkasika  and  next. 

130,        ,,        2,  under  unha  first  word  in  [  ]  read  "  Vedic  "  instead  of"  adj." 
133.        ..       2,  cross  out  art.  udakanti  (which  is,  of  course,  udakan  ti). 

139,        ,.       2,  ««der  upakarin /raHs/er  ref.  Mi. 86  (=Nd2  i99«)  (0  art,  upakarika  z»  »wani«^  "  fortification." 
149.        ..        I.      ,,      upahata:  The  formula  at  D  1.86  (khata-(-upahata)  is  doubtful  as  to  its  exact  meaning. 

According  to  Bdhgh  it  means  "  one  who  has  destroyed  his  foundation  of  salvation," 

i.  e.  one  who  cannot  be  saved.     Thus  at  DA  1.237  :  "  bhinna-patiftho  jato,"  i.  e. 

without  a  basis.     Cp.  remarks  under  khata.     The  trsl"  at  Dial.  1.95  gives  it  as 

"  deeply  affected   and  touched   in   heart " :   doubtful.     The  phrase  upahacca- 

parinibbayin  may  receive  light  from  upahata. 


195 

Page  151,  top  and  bottom  of  column  i,  read  uppajjati  for  upajjati. 
,,      155,  column  2,  under  ura  read  urasa/or  urusa. 
..      155.        ,.       2,      ,,      uyyutta  ceaii  zealous /o)- zeolaus. 
..      157.        ..        I.      ..       ussa'tkati' read  [ud  +  sakkati]/oy  [ud  +  sTP]• 
..      159.        ..        I.      ..       uka  add:  is  also  used  as  a  linear  measure  (cp.  Sk,  yukaliksag)  VbhA  343  (where 

7  likkha  are  said  to  equal  i  uka). 
..      17°.        ..       2,      ,,       ora  reafi  M  II.  142 /oy  III.  142,  a«(f  aid  "  doubtful  reading." 
>■      172.        ,,        I,      ,.       osarati  cead  [o  +  sf]  to^oir,  to  go  away.   .  .  . 
•>      172.        ..        2,    for     ossajati  read  ossajjati,  awd/of  osajjana  j-eai  ossajjana. 


VOLUME  II. 

8,  ,,        I,  line  8fr.  bottom,  read  Sn  p.  roS/orSn  108. 

9.  ,.        I,  half-way  down,  M«de>-kat-atta  read  J.  vi.296/oy  IV.291. 

12,  ,,  I,  under  kathalika:  the  meaning  "  bowl  "  seems  to  be  preferable  to  Bdhgh's  forced  inter- 
pretation as  "  towel." 

12,        ,,        2,   after  kathapeti  insert:  kathalika  (f.)  [fr.  kuth,  to  boil]  kettle,  cooking  pot ;  in  danda"  (a  pot 
with  a  handle)  Vin  1.286  (v.  1.  kathalaka),  and  meda°  A  iv.377 ;  DhA  11.179. 

14,        ,,        I,  Mnder  kantita'  :  at  Miln  240  better  as  kantita'.  i.  e.  "  spun." 

1 7.        . .        I .  exchange  respective  position  0]  articles  Kamati  and  Kamandalu ;  also  write  Kamana  as  Kamana. 

24,  ,,  I,  under  Karana,  in  Note,  read  passage  as  follows  :  Karana  here  ...  as  by  J  vi.270,  where 
it  expls.  kappitakesa-ma-ssu  and  J  v. 309  &  DhA  1.253,  where  massukararaa  takes 
the  place  of  "karana;  and  J  111.314,  where  it  is  represented  by  massu-kutti  (C. : 
massukiriya).     Cp.  also  DA  1.137. 

ij,       ,,        I,      ,,      kali,  line  4,  read  Dh  252  for  Dh  1.252. 

27,        ,,       2,      ,,      Kalyana  read  5  kalyanani /or  kalyani. 

31,        ,,        I,      ,,      kata-kotacika  correct  1889  to  89. 
37-38,  transfer  kara,  bottom  of  p.  37  to  p.  38,  column  i,  line  3  from  bottom. 

58,  column  I,  under  kovilara  delete  "  a  sort  of  ebony.' 

66. 

67. 

67. 
73. 
81, 
83. 

84. 
86, 
90. 
93. 
100, 

105. 
no, 
112, 

113. 
118, 
120, 


khura'  add:  khura-kase  M  1.446,  read  (with  Neumann)  for  khura-kaye,  "in  the 
manner  of  dragging  (kf?)  the  hoofs." 

1,  after    khura"  insert :  KhulnkhoJu-karakat]  (nt.  adv.)  "  so  aa  to  make  the  sound  khulu, 

khulu."  i.  e.  clattering  or  bumping  about  M  11. 138.     Cp.  ghuru-ghuru. 
2,  bottom,  for  khelakapa  read  khelapaka  .  .  .  cp.  apaka.  ?  spittle-dribbler  ;  cp.  our  "  wind-bag." 

2,  under  gandha  add  as  No.  5  :  occurs  as  v.  I.  for  gantha  (book), 
guna'  I  correct  (a)  saguna  according  to  expl"  under  saguna. 
gutha:  °gata  is  preferably  to  be  trsl'i  as  "  covered  with  dung."     See  id.  p.  under 

chavalata  and  add  DhsA  247. 
go-ratika  read  M  1.387 /or  837. 
gharjsati'  put  haijsati  for  hassati. 
cakkhu,  1.  4,  read  M  in. 134  for  136. 

camu  last  line  to  be  read  camupati  a  general  Mhvs  10,  65  ;  23,  4  ;  Davs  1.3. 

=  garayha. 


2, 
r, 

2. 
I, 
I, 

I, 


after 


1,  insert    Adissa*  (adj.)  blameworthy  M  1.12  ;  MA  = 

2,  in  top  line  read  J  vi. 538 /or  358. 
2,  under  ja^a  handle  of  an  adse  [instead  of  "  razor  "). 
2,  insert    jaliika  leech  DA  i.i  17. 

jahati  insert :  Jahita  [pp.  of  jahati]  left,  abandoned  Sn  231  ;  J  1.311. 
juhati  add :  Caus.  hapeti^. 

jhapeti,  ger.  jhatva  add  ref.  S  1.161  {reads  chetva)=Nett  145  {reads  jhitvS,  with 
v.  1.  chetva). 
120.        ,,        2,      ,,       jhayin  insert    Jhitva  is  reading  at  Nett  145  for  jhatva  (see  jhapeti). 
127,  after  tajjaniya  inMrt:  tajjari  a  linear  measure,  equal  to  36  anu's  and  of  which  36  form  one  ratharepu 

Vbh  343  ;  cp.  Abhp  194  (tajjari). 
134.  column  I,   after   talisa  insert :  Talisa'  (No.  40)  is  short  for  cattalisa,  e.  g.  Ap  103,  234  and  passim. 
144,        ,,       2,  under  thula  delete  M  1.453. 

146,  ,,        2,      ,,      dakkhina,  in  ref.  under  cpd.  "visuddhi  read  M  m.256/o»' 11.256. 

147,  ,,       2,      ,,      dand'adana  read    "  comb'' with  satth'adana." 
149/150  reverse  order  dameti  and  dametar. 

150,  column  I,  under  darl  read  musika"  for  musika" 


J  50. 


152. 

2, 

154. 
156, 

2. 
I. 

166, 

I. 

170. 
170. 
175. 

189. 

X, 
I, 
2, 
2. 

190. 
196. 

I, 

I. 

209, 

I. 

209, 

2, 

2,   after   dava'  insert :  Davya  [for  'dravya]  =  dabba',  in  sarlra°  fitness  of  body,  a  beautiful 
body  J  11.137. 
under  dahati'  add:  pp.  hita. 

daru  read  daru  yanta  a  wooden  machine  (not  mill). 

dit^ha-mangalika  (of  puccha)  put  in  the  simple  trsl*  :  "  a  que.stion  concerning  visible 

omina." 
dessin  read  Sn  92  {for  93),  and:  better  desfn,  cp.  viddesin. 
,,      dhaja,  1.  4,  read  M  1. 139 /or  137. 

dhatifia,  1.  3  from  bottom,  read  M  1.180,  268,  for  429. 
after   dhata  insert    Dhatar  [n.  ag.  fr.  dhrl  upholder  J  v. 225. 

under  nikkhepa  read  ref.  Vin  1.16  as:  (pa(lukanai)  =  the  putting  down  of  the  slippers, 
i.  e  the  slippers  as  they  were  put  down). 
,,      nikhanati  read  khanati/or  khanai. 

nipatati  read  intrs.  for  instr. 
,,      nivesa  read  nivesana  2  for  nivesana*. 
after   nisada  insert  .•  Nisadana  [  =  ni4-^atana]  grinding  DhA  1.308. 


196 

VOLUME  III. 

Page      I,  column  i,  under  pa^jsu  in  cpd.  °kula  read  "  rags  "  for  "  rays." 
pakkamati  read  2.  for  2nd. 

paguna  in  cpd.  °bhava  read  "  familiarity  "  for  "  familiarly." 
pacceka-buddha  read  M  in. 68  for  86. 
pajapati  i,  a  line  was  left  out  (through  copyist's  error) ;  read  as  given  correctly  tirtder 

sapajapatika. 
pancaka  (taca°)  read  kesa/oc  kosa. 
paiijara  add  in  comb°  siha°  meaning  "  window." 
Pativameti;  For  Dh  1.39  read  DA  1.39.     Cp.  J.P.T.S.  1886,  p.  160,  suggesting  pati- 

vadh°,  or  patibadliayamano.  and  referring  to  Th  i,  744. 
patisakkati  read  [pati  +  sakkati]. 
patisancikkhati  read  M  1.499  for  469. 
patisarana  delete  remainder  after  "  applf"." 
pathavi,  in  cpds.,  read  °oja  /oc  °oja. 
pandita  cross  out  refs.  M  1.423  &  111.105. 

1,  the  ref.  under  pannaka  is  to  be  read  Kern,  Toev,  11.16. 

2,  under  patati  correct  Milo  to  Miln. 
pattika'  cross  out  all  refs.  after  Sn  418,  and  add:  a  form  pattikarika  is  found,  e.  g. 

at  J  IV. 134  ;  v.ioo  ;  vi.15,  463  ;  Ap  316. 
,,       padana  delete  sapadana  on  last  line. 
after    pantha  insert    Panthana  {for  santhana)  at  SnA  20  :  see  santhana  3. 
under  panna  read  M  1.139/or  137. 

pappataka  2,  read  pannaka  /oy  pannaka. 
after    pabbhara  insert    Pabruti  [pa  +  bruti]  to  speak  out,  proclaim,  declare  (publicly)  Sn  131. 

649,  870,  952  and  passim  (cp.  Nd^  211,  273  ;  Nd^  398,  465). 
under  pabhasati  read  [pa  f  bhas]. 
at  end  o/parama  add:  paramajja-dhamma  [cp.  Vedic  parama-jya]  the  most  influential  or 

ruling  doctrine  M  in.  7. 
under  garidanda  read  M  1.286  for  386. 

paripunna  read  M  ni. 2 y6  for  III. 11. 

palaganda  read  A  iv.  127/0/  v.  12 7. 

pavatta  read  M  1.344  "^  243. 

pavecchati:  another  der"  suggested  by  Dr.  Barnett  in  J.R.A.S.  1924,  186  is=Sk. 

pra-vrscati. 
pahara  read  M  i.      ;  as  M  1.123  ; 
bottom,  read  pahita'  for  pahital. 
under  patipadaka  insert  after  Vin  iv.75  :  (f.  °ika),  78. 

after    papeti  insert    Pivbhata  [pa  +  abhata]  brought,  conveyed  DA  1.262  ;  SnA  356  (katha°). 
under  pabhati  read  [pa  +  a  +  pp   of  bhr],  and  delete  ref.  SnA  356  at  end. 
after    pasanda  insert:  Pasati  (?)  only  in   "  sammai)  pasanti  "   at  SnA   321   as  expl"  of 

sammapasa  (q.  v.). 
under  pasarjsa  read  M  1.15  for  M  1.5. 
pinjita  read  "  dyed  "  for  died. 
on  line  1 1  fr.  top,  after  PvA  68  delete  ist.  pi.  ;  and  insert  after  apucchatha  Sn  1017  ;  ist.  pi, 

apucchimha  Sn  1052. 
under  pokkhara  (cpds.)  j-enif  "sataka/oc  °sataka. 
potheti  in  [  ]  read  puth=sphut. 
posin  read  Nd^-  ^6  for  Nd'  39. 
phuta'  read  sphut  for  spufh,  as  under  phutita. 
1.  3  from  bottom,  read  S  11.228 /oc  1.228. 
read  bya  for  bya. 

under  byavata:  the  meaning  (\vrongly  given  as  "  adorned  ")  is  to  be  deleted.     The  reading 
at  VvA  213  is  doubtful.     It  may  be  kayavyavata,  but  dassana-vyavata  is  to  be 
preferred  (see  under  vyavata). 
bhamara  read  Lat.  fremo  for  "  fermo." 

msingun  add  i n  []  "  the  corresponding  passage  to  M  1.246  in  Lai.  v. 320  has  madgura." 
tnatica  after  J  1.197  read  "  where  the  domestic  pig  lies  "  for  "  where  the  domestic 

lies." 
maddava  add  :  see  also  siikara". 

madhuraka  add:  taken   as   noun   also  by  Wintemitz  {Rel.  gesch.  Lesebuch  301): 
"  wohl  eine  zarte  Pflanze  mit  schwachem  Stengel."     Mr.  F.  L.  Woodward  follows 
me  in  discarding  trsl"  "  creeper  "  and  assuming  one  like  "  intoxicated  "  (so  also 
UdA,  Sinh.  ed.  p.  165)  :  see  his  note  on  S  iii.ioC,  trsl"  {K .S.  111.90). 
155,        ,,        I,      ,,      masa,  1.  14  of  article,  cend  "  summer  "  insiea^i  0/ "  winter." 

VOLUME  IV. 

36,        „        I,      ,,       lakara  in  []  arfi  a/ifer  ilankaran  "  in  meaning  anchor." 
36,        „       2,      ,,       lakkhana  2  b  a(f(?  •  the  3  lakkhanas  at  Sn  1022  refer  to  the  brahmin  Bavari. 
51,        ,,        I,      ,,       vajja' last  word,  ceafi  avajja  !Ks/earf  0/ "  separately." 

66,        ,,       2,  line  i  fr.  top,  under  vad4nuvada  add:  the  trsl"  of  this  phrase  (used  as  adj.)  at  S  111.6  (see  K.S. 
lit. 7)  is  "  one  who  is  of  his  way  of  thinking." 


I,  col 

umn  I, 

3. 

I. 

4. 

..       2. 

8, 

..       I. 

9. 

>.       2. 

12, 

I. 

12, 

I. 

21, 

2, 

22, 

2, 

23. 

.        I. 

23. 

2. 

25. 

2, 

26, 

.       2, 

27. 

.        I. 

27. 

2, 

29. 

2. 

31. 

2, 

34. 

2, 

35. 

I. 

36. 

I. 

37. 

I, 

38. 

I. 

43. 

I. 

49. 

2, 

51. 

2, 

62, 

I, 

65. 

I. 

67. 

2, 

71. 

I, 

71.        . 

I. 

73. 

I, 

76. 

J. 

76. 

I, 

78. 

2, 

78. 

2, 

79. 

2, 

86, 

I. 

96, 

2, 

97. 

I. 

98, 

2, 

102, 

2, 

104, 

.       2, 

115.        . 

I. 

"5. 

.       2, 

122, 

I. 

137. 

2,. 

139. 

I, 

142. 

I. 

143. 

2, 

197 


Page 


71. 

col 

umn  2, 

82. 

2, 

84. 

I. 

91. 

I. 

91. 

2, 

93. 

2. 

/>M<     Tikkama  &  vikkamati  before  vikkaya. 
under  vinipatika  read  M  1.73  for  M  1. 13. 

vipaficita  add  at  end :  see  remark  on  veyyaBjanika. 
vimhita  add :  see  also  vyamhita. 
,,       viyacikkhati  adf/.' pp.  vyakhyata. 

virupa  :  at  Sn  50  virupa  is  taken  as  "  various  "  by  Bdhgh  (SnA  99),  and  virupa-rupa 
expl'i  as  vividha-rupa,  i.  e.  diversity,  variety.  So  also  the  Niddesa. 
on  vitaragsi  I  have  to  remark  that  the  reading  vita"  seems  to  be  well  established.  It 
occurs  very  frequently  in  the  Apadana  Should  we  take  it  in  meaning  of  "  e.\- 
cessive  "  ?  And  are  we  confronted  with  an  attribute  of  osadhi,  the  morning  star, 
which  points  to  Babylonian  influence  (star  of  the  East)  ?  As  it  occurs  in  the 
Vatthugathas  of  the  Parayanavagga,  this  does  not  seem  improbable. 


AFTERWORD. 

I.  Dictionary  Work. 

It  had  been  my  intention  at  the  end  of  the  work  to  give  a  full  account  of  Pali  lexicography,  its 
history  and  aims,  but  as  the  Dictionary  itself  has  already'  been  protracted  more  than  others  and 
I  have  wished,  I  have,  in  order  to  save  time  and  to  bring  the  work  to  a  finish,  to  reserve  a  detailed 
discussion  of  the  method  of  dictionary  work  for  another  occasion,  and  outline  here  only  the  essentials 
of  what  seems  to  me  worth  mentioning  at  all  events. 

WTien  Rhys  Davids  in  1916  entrusted  me  with  the  work,  he  was  still  hopeful  and  optimistic  about 
it,  in  spite  of  the  failure  of  the  first  Dictionary  scheme,  and  thought  it  would  take  only  a  few  years  to  get 
it  done.  He  seemed  to  think  that  the  material  which  was  at  hand  (and  the  value  of  which  he  greatly 
overrated)  could  be  got  ready  for  press  with  very  little  trouble.  Alas  !  it  was  not  so.  For  it  was  not 
merely  and  not  principally  a  rearrangement  and  editing  of  ready  material:  it  was  creative  and  re-creative 
work  from  beginning  to  end,  building  an  intellectual  (so  to  say  manomaya)  edifice  on  newly  sunk  founda- 
tions and  fitting  all  the  larger  and  smaller  [khtiddakdnukhitddakdm)  accessories  into  their  places. 
This  was  not  to  be  done  in  a  hurry,  nor  in  a  leisurely  way.  It  was  a  path  which  often  led  through 
jungle  and  thicket,  over  stones  and  sticks:  "  vettacaro  sankupatho  pi  cinno"  (J  111.541). 

On  the  road  many  allurements  beset  me  in  the  shape  of  problems  which  cropped  up,  whether  they 
referred  to  questions  of  grammar,  syntax,  phonology,  or  etymology;  or  literature,  philosophy,  and  Buddhist 
psychology.  I  had  to  state  them  merely  as  problems  and  collect  them,  but  I  dared  not  stand  still  and 
familiarize  with  them.  Thus  much  material  has  been  left  over  as  "  chips  from  the  dictionary  workshop." 
These  I  hope  I  shall  some  day  find  an  opportunity  of  working  out. 

For  the  first  part  of  the  way  I  had  to  a  great  extent  the  help  and  guidance  of  my  teacher  and 
friend  Rhys  Davids ;  but  the  second  half  I  had  to  go  quite  alone, — Fate  did  not  spare  him  to  see 
the  work  right  through.  I  am  sure  he  would  not  have  been  less  glad  than  myself  to-day  to  see  the 
task  finished. 

It  happens  that  with  the  completion  of  the  P.T.S.  Dictionary,  the  second  dictionary  of  Pali,  v.e 
celebrate  the  fiftieth  anniversary  of  the  appearance  of  the  first  Pali  Dictionary  by  R.  C.  Childers.  That 
work  was  a  masterpiece  of  its  time,  and  still  retains  some  of  its  merits.  Our  dictionary  will  not  altogether 
replace  Childers,  it  will  supplement  him.  The  character  of  Childers'  Dictionary  is  so  different  from  ours, 
there  is  such  an  enormous  discrepancy  between  the  material  which  he  had  for  his  work  and  which  we 
had  for  ours,  that  it  would  almost  be  a  farce  to  recast  Childers.  We  needed  something  entirely  different 
and  original.  Childers  has  now  only  historical  value.  Considering  that  Childers  has  no  references 
to  any  of  the  P.T.S.  publications,  and  that  the  Pali  Dictionary  embraces  all  the  material  of  these 
publications  as  well  as  of  others,  we  may  well  speak  of  an  entirely  new  dictionary,  which  is  essential 
for  the  study  of  Pah  Buddhism  from  its  sources,  a  task  which  can  never  be  accomplished  with  Childers 
alone.' 

Yet  it  may  be  interesting  to  compare  merely  on  the  surface  the  two  dictionaries.  The  "  new  "  Pali 
Dictionary  contains  146,000  authentic  references  against  some  38,500  of  Childers  (of  which  only  half 
are  authentic);  the  number  of  head-words  treated  amounts  to  17,920  against  11,420,  after  omitting  in  ours 
about  900  words  which  Childers  gives  with  an  Abhp  reference  only.  Anybody  will  admit  that  substantial 
progress  is  evidenced  by  these  figures. 

1  In  this  connection  I  may  quote  a  remark  by  a  competent  critic  (Air.  E.  J.  Thomas),  who  says:  "  Rhys  Davids 
wanted  to  make  the  Pali  Dictionary  '  twice  as  good  as  Childers,'  but  it  is  far  more  than  that." 

199 


200 


2.  History  of  the  Dictionary  Scheme. 

The  idea  of  the  Pali  Dictionary,  as  now  published,  was  first  put  forth  by  Rhys  Davids  in  September 
1902  (on  the  thirteenth  International  Oriental  Congress  at  Hamburg).  It  was  to  be  compiled  on  the  basis 
of  the  texts  issued  by  the  P.T.S.  since  its  foundation  in  1882,  and  it  was  conceived  on  an  international 
plan,  according  to  which  some  seven  or  eight  famous  Sanskrit  scholars  of  Europe  should  each  contribute 
to  the  work.  Every  one  of  them  was  enthusiastic  about  it.  In  1903  Rhys  Davids  announced  that  the 
Dictionary  would  be  pubhshed  in  1905,  or  at  latest  in  1906.  When  I  was  studying  Pah  with  Ernst  Windisch 
in  1904  I  was  undecided,  whether  I  should  buy  a  "  Childers  "  then,  or  wait  until  the  "International 
Dictionary  "  should  be  out  in  1905.  Little  did  I  dream  that  I  should  have  had  to  wait  till  I  myself 
finished  the  International  Dictionary  in  1925  !  By  1909  only  one-eighth  of  the  work  had  been  done. 
Gradually  the  co-workers  sent  back  the  materials  which  Rhys  Davids  had  supplied  to  them.  Some  had 
done  nothing  at  all,  nor  even  opened  the  packets.  Only  Messrs.  Duroiselle,  Konow,  and  Mrs.  Bode  had 
carried  out  what  they  had  undertaken  to  do.  After  Rhys  Davids  had  again  conferred  with  his  colleagues 
at  the  Copenhagen  Congress  in  1908,  he  published  the  fuU  scheme  of  the  Dictionary  in  J. P.T.S.  for  1909. 
Then  the  War  came  and  stopped  the  plans  for  good. 

The  failure  of  the  original  scheme  teaches  us  that  dictionary  work  cannot  be  done  en  passant  and 
in  one's  spare  time;  it  requires  one's  whole  time.  At  any  rate,  they  were  very  disappointing  years  for 
my  friend,  and  he  had  almost  despaired  of  the  vitality  of  his  pet  plan,  when,  in  1916,  he  asked  me. 
under  the  auspices  of  the  P.T.S.  and  with  his  assistance,  to  do  the  Dictionary  on  a  uniform  plan.  So  he 
left  the  compihng  to  me,  and  I  set  to  work,  conferring  with  him  at  frequent  intervals.  He  revised  my 
work.  This  had  become  more  exhaustive  than  was  planned,  because  double  the  amount  of  texts  had 
been  published  by  1922  than  in  1902.  This  was  a  gain  for  the  Dictionary,  but  meant  much  more  work 
for  the  editor. 

3.  My  Material. 

The  Pali  Dictionary  is  in  a  certain  respect  the  result  of  the  work  of  many.  It  is  a  resume  of  all  the 
indexes  to  the  texts,  so  that  every  indexer  has  his  or  her  share  in  the  work.  But  the  indexes  do  not  give 
translations,  and  thus  the  main  work  was  often  left  to  me :  to  find  the  most  correct  and  adequate  English 
term  for  the  Pali  word.  It  needs  careful  and  often  intricate  study  to  accomplish  this  task,  for  even  the 
most  skilled  and  well-read  translators  have  either  shirked  the  most  diiificult  words,  or  translated  them 
wrongly  or  with  a  term  which  does  not  and  cannot  cover  the  idea  adequately.  Thus  many  a  crux  retarded 
the  work,  not  to  speak  of  thousands  of  incorrectnesses  in  the  text  of  the  printed  editions. 

A  few  contributors  gave  more  (like  Mrs.  Bode  and  Professor  Duroiselle),  but  only  from  scanty  material 
and  texts  up  to  1909.  Rhys  Davids'  material,  copied  from  his  copy  of  Childers  (which  was  bequeathed 
him  by  Childers,  interleaved  by  the  binder  and  fiiled  in  from  1878  to  1916),  was  partly  old,  and  mostly 
without  the  English  translation,  which  was  only  to  be  found  here  and  there  in  his  translated  texts. 

Mrs.  Rhys  Davids  has  shown  her  constant  sympathy  with  the  work,  and  I  am  indebted  to  her  for 
many  suggestions,  especially  concerning  psychological  termini.  She  also  condensed  and  revised  my 
articles  on  vinndna  and  sankhdra. 

To  summarize  what  actual  help  I  have  received  by  using  materials  other  than  my  own,  I  have  to 
state  that  I  found  the  following  contributions  of  use : 

(i)  For  the  whole  alphabet : 

All  the  indexes  to  the  P.T.S.  publications.^  Rhys  Davids'  annotations  to  his  Childers,  representing 
about  10  pr  cent,  of  all  important  references.  Kern's  additions  to  Childers'  (Toevcegselen);  to  be  taken 
with  caution  in  translations  and  explanations,  but  at  least  equal  to  Rhys  Davids'  in  extent  and  im- 
portance.^   Hardy's  occasional  slips  and  references  (5  per  cent,  of  the  whole). 

(2)  For  single  letters : 

Mrs.  Bode's  collection  of  B  and  Bh.  Professor  Konow's  collection  of  S  (J. P.T.S.  1909)  and  H  (ibid. 
1907),  which  I  have  used  very  extensively,  after  correcting  them  and  bringing  them  up  to  date. 
Professor  Duroiselle's  collection  of  one-half  of  K  and  Mr.  E.  J.  Thomas'  N. 

*  Many  of  these  are  very  faulty  (the  Kvu  trsl"  word  index  contains  60  per  cent,  of  error).  The  only  index  with  which 
I  have  no  fault  to  find  is  that  to  Sn  and  SnA  by  Helmer  Smith. 

'  It  is  to  be  re^iretted  that  this  valuable  collection  is  marred  by  any  amount  of  errors  and  misprints  (see  also  below, 
4  end). 


201 

4-  How  TO  Judge  the  Dictionary. 

(a)  I  have  already  given  a  fairly  exhaustive  list  of  abbreviations.  To  these  might  be  added  a  good 
many  more  if  we  were  writing  a  dictionary  for  inexperienced  people.  The  less  explanations  necessary 
in  a  dictionary,  the  better:  it  should  explain  itself;  and  if  there  are  any  little  things  not  intelligible  at 
first,  they  will  become  so  with  gradual  use.  A  dictionary  is  like  a  friend  with  whom  you  have  to  get 
thoroughly  acquainted  before  you  come  to  know  his  peculiarities. 

A  dictionary  can  be  too  explicit :  it  will  then  lose  its  charm  and  become  tedious.  It  must  contain 
a  certain  amount  of  hints,  instead  of  ready  solutions;  the  more  it  arouses  the  cm^osity  (and  sometimes 
the  anger  !)  of  its  user,  the  better  it  is  for  the  latter.  The  main  purpose  of  the  dictionary  is  to  explain; 
it  is  a  means  of  education  as  well  as  of  information.  To  this  category  belong  the  (sometimes  objected 
to)  grammatical  and  etymological  hints.  I  am  fully  aware  that  they  are  incomplete  and  sometimes 
perhaps  problematic,  but  that  does  not  matter  so  much  in  a  provisional  dictionary.  It  does  our  students 
good  to  get  a  little  etjmiology  thrown  in  once  in  a  while.  It  makes  them  interested  in  the  psychology 
of  language,  and  teaches  them  the  wide  range  of  sound  changes,  besides  making  them  aware  of  their 
study  as  a  thing  that  has  been  alive  and  through  a  process  of  werden.  We  are  still  at  a  stage  of  Pali 
philology,  where  we  can  hardly  get  enough  of  that  kind  of  thing. 

(6)  The  following  are  a  few  additional  explanations  concerning  the  use  of  the  Dictionary. — In  the 
Jataka  quotations  I  have  not  distinguished  between  the  text  and  the  commentary  (J  and  JA).  That  is 
rather  a  pity;  but  it  was  my  colleague's  wish.  We  might  also  have  kept  the  index  figures  of  lines,  as  it 
is  sometimes  very  difficult  to  find  a  word  in  the  small-print  C.  portions  of  the  J.  books.  —  Difficult 
forms,  although  belonging  to  some  one  verb  in  question,  I  have  given  separately,  as  a  help  for  the 
student. — The  Causatives  have  undergone  a  mixed  treatment:  sometimes  they  are  given  xmder 
the  simple  verb,  especially  when  their  form  was  not  very  different,  sometimes  separately,  when  their  form 
was  unusual. — The  problem  of  the  derivation  of  Pali  words  is  not  cleared  yet.  We  have  interchanged 
between  the  Pali  and  the  Sanskrit  derivations. — An  asterisk  with  Sanskrit  words  (*Sk.)  means  that  the 
word  is  late  and  found  only  in  technical  literature,  i.  e.  either  gram.-lexic.  (like  Amarako^a),  or  pro- 
fessional (like  Su^ruta). — For  convenience'  sake  we  have  identified  the  guttiural  n  with  the  dental  n. — 
The  cerebral  1  follows  upon  1. — P.D.  refers  to  Pali  Dictionary. 

(c)  Many  of  the  Dictionary's  faults  are  to  be  excused  by  the  fact  that  its  composition  covers  a  number 
of  years,  and  that  printing  was  going  on  all  the  time  (a  great  drawback  for  the  unity  of  the  work  !),  so  that 
changes  could  not  be  made  in  earher  parts,  which  were  found  advisable  later.  Here  belong:  i.  Roots 
and  compounds  cropped  up  which  are  not  foreseen  in  the  beginning. —  2.  Cross-references  are  not 
always  exact.  —  3.  There  exists  a  certain  inaccuracy  in  the  relation  between  words  beginning  with  ava" 
and  0°.  At  first  these  were  treated  jointly,  but  later  separated.  —  4.  Several  mistakes  were  found  in 
Rhys  Davids'  excerpts  later  and  are,  like  others  which  I  have  corrected  (see  e.  g.  veyyavacca),  to  be 
explained  by  lack  of  material,  or  by  Rhys  Davids  being  misled  through  Childers.  —  5.  Many  explanations 
are  only  tentative.  I  would  change  them  now,  but  refrain  from  discussing  them  in  the  "Addenda," 
since  too  many  of  these  confuse  rather  than  enlighten  the  student.  To  these  belong  e.g.  nibbedha  and 
vipancita  (which  ought  to  be  viyanjita). —  6.  It  could  hardly  be  avoided  that,  in  the  course  of  the 
work,  a  problem  has  presented  itself  with  different  solutions  at  different  times,  so  that  discrepancies  have 
arisen  with  one  and  the  same  word.    These  cases,  however,  are  rare. 

{d)  Now,  after  all  this,  what  is  the  Dictionary,  and  what  does  it  claim  to  be  ?  First  of  all,  it  is  meant 
to  be  a  dictionary  of  Classical  and  Literary  Pali .  Words  only  found  in  native  vocabularies  (the  Abhp 
e.  g.)  are  left  out,  as  they  are  only  Pah  adaptations  of  Sanskrit  words  (mostly  lexicographical :  sanna- 
kaddu=sannakadru,  Am.K.  only).  Nor  are  we  concerned  with  Inscriptions.  Thus  it  is  intended  as 
a  general  stock-taking  of  the  Pali  Canon,  and  a  revision  of  all  former  suggestions  of  translations.  It 
is  essentially  a  working  basis  for  further  study  and  improvement.  The  main  object  has  been  to  bring 
as  much  material  as  possible  to  serve  future  \work,  and  this  in  a  clear  and  attractive  form.  Many  words 
remain  doubtful.  We  have  given  them  with  Buddhaghosa's  interpretation,  which  may  be  right  and 
which  may  be  wrong.  There  are  some  words  of  which  we  shall  never  know  the  exact  meaning,  just  as  it  is 
difficult  even  in  modern  times  to  know  the  exact  meaning  of,  say,  an  English  or  German  dialect  word.' 

'■  other  specific  terms  iwith  a  "  doctrinal  "  import  are  best  left  untranslated,  since  we  are  unable  to  translate  them 
adequately  with  our  Western  Christian  terminology.  See  remarks  under  sankhara  and  cp.  Mrs.  Rhys  Davids  in  K.S, 
III.,  preface  p.  v. 


202 

{e)  What  are  the  critics  to  remember  ?  To  find  fault  with  the  interpretation  of  one  or  the  other 
word  is  alright,  but  it  must  be  remembered  that,  within  a  few  years — which  are  nothing  compared 
with  the  life-study  required  for  this  purpose — not  a  few  score  or  a  few  hundreds  of  words  had  to  be 
examined  in  every  detail,  but  many  thousands.  Any  criticism  shows  just  what  the  editor  himself 
has  felt  all  along:  how  much  is  to  be  done  yet,  and  how  important  for  Indological  studies  is  the 
study  of  Pali. 

Many  mistakes  and  misprints  have  to  be  taken  with  good  grace :  they  are  unavoidable ;  and  I  may 
add  as  an  example  that  Professor  Konow's  S,  in  spite  of  very  careful  work,  contain  one  mistake  (or 
misprint)  on  almost  every  page,  while  the  proportion  of  them  in  Kern's  315  pages  of  Toevoegselen  is  four 
on  every  page  !    We  are  all  human.     The  discovery  of  faults  teaches  us  one  thing :  to  try  to  do  better. 


5.  Issues  Involved  in  the  Pali  Dictionary. 

It  would  easily  fill  a  separate  volume,  if  I  were  to  discuss  fully  all  the  issues  dependent  on  the  new 
Dictionary,  and  its  bearing  on  aU  parts  of  Buddhist  studies.  I  confine  myself  to  mentioning  only  a  few 
that  are  outstanding. 

(a)  Through  a  full  list  of  references  to  nearly  every  word  we  are  now  able  to  establish  better  readings 
than  has  been  possible  up  to  now.    The  Pali  Dictionary  is  indispensable  to  any  editor  of  new  texts. 

(6)  Through  sifting  the  vocabulary  we  can  distinguish  several  strata  of  tradition,  in  place  as  well 
as  in  time . 

(c)  The  relation  of  Classical  Pali  to  Vedie  and  other  stages  of  Sanskrit  is  becoming  clearer,  as  also 
is  the  position  of  Epic  Pali  to  Singhalese  and  Tamil.  A  good  example  of  the  former  is  offered  by  the 
relation  of  ava°  to  0°.  With  regard  to  the  term  "  Vedic  "  a  word  of  warning  has  to  be  uttered.  There 
is  an  older  stratum  of  direct  Vedic  connection  in  the  four  Nikayas;  nevertheless  in  the  majority  of  cases 
the  term  is  misleading,  as  we  here  have  to  deal  with  late  Pali  words  which  have  been  reintroduced  from 
Classical  Sanskrit  a  la  Renaissance. 

It  was  Rhys  Davids'  wish,  however,  that  I  should  use  the  term  "Vedic,"  whenever  a  word  dated 
back  to  that  period.  —  On  the  subject  in  general  and  the  linguistic  character  of  Pali  see  Childers, 
Introduction,  pp.  xiv,  xv  (with  note  i);  R.  O.  Franke,  Pali  and  Sanskrit,  Strassburg  1902,  especially 
chapters  VII.  to  XII. ' 

{d)  The  peculiar  interrelation  between  Buddhist  Pali  and  Buddhist  Sanskrit  can  now  be  stated 
with  greater  accuracy. 

(e)  Through  a  tabulation  of  aU  parallel  passages,  given  in  the  Pali  Dictionary,  we  are  now  able 
to  compose  a  complete  concordance . 

(/)  From  many  characteristics,  as  pointed  out  in  the  Pali  Dictionary,  we  can  state  with  certainty  that 
Pali  was  a  natural  dialect,  i.  e.  the  language  of  the  people.  We  can  now  group  the  canonical  books 
according  to  their  literary  value  and  origin.^  ^ 

(g)  It  will  now  be  possible  to  write  the  history  of  terms.' 

{h)  We  cannot  always  equate  Pali:  Classical  Sanskrit.  It  is  a  wrong  method  to  give  the  Sanskrit 
form  of  a  Pali  word  as  its  ultimate  reduction  and  explanation.  Sometimes  Pali  formation  and  meaning 
are  different  from  the  Sanskrit.     Popular  language  and  "  Volksetymologie  "  are  concerned  here* 

1  Thus  some  very  old  (Vedic)  words  are  not  found  in  Classical  Pali,  but  occur  later  in  the  Epics  (the  Vagsas),  e.  g. 
sarameya  "  dog,"  although  Vedic,  is  only  found  in  Mhbv;  sunu,  as  frequent  as  putra  in  Rigveda,  occurs  only  in  Mhvs, 
whereas  putta  is  the  regular  Pali  word.  These  examples  may  be  increased  by  hundreds  from  the  Vagsas.  There  are 
many  more  than  Rhys  Davids  assumed  on  p.  vi  of  preface  to  Pali  Dictionary. 

2  Therefore  we  can  never  have  a  "  standardized  "  Pah  in  the  sense  in  which  we  are  used  to  "  Sanskrit."  Among 
the  many  signs  of  popular  language  (mentioned  elsewhere,  e.  g.  Childers  introduction)  I  may  also  point  to  the  many 
onomatopoetic  words  (see  note  on  gala),  and  the  widespread  habit  of  the  reduplicative  compounds  (see  my  article 
"  Reduphkationskomposita  im  Pali,"  Zeitschr.  /■  Buddhismus  vi.,  1925,  pp.  89-94). 

3  We  have  material  enough  to  treat  philosophical  terms  (like  citta,  dhamma,  mano,  vifiiiana,  sankhara)  his- 
torically, as  well  as  others  of  folkloristic  importance  (e.  g.  deva,  yakkha,  vimana).  Light  will  be  thrown  on  the  question 
of  the  Mahapurisalakkhanas,  which  it  is  interesting  to  note  are  in  Sn  1022  attributed  to  Bavari  (i.  e.  the  "  Babylonian  "), 
and  clearly  point  to  the  late  origin  of  the  Vatthugathas  as  well  as  to  Babylonian  influence. 

*  Pali  alia  means  "  clean  "  as  well  as  "  wet  "  (in  spite  of /.ff. /I. S.  1924,  186),  whereas  Sanskrit  ardra  means  "wet"; 
Pali  salura  means  "  dog,"  but  Sanskrit  Salura  "  frog  ";  the,  root  sviD  has  the  specific  Pali  meaning  "  boil  "  or  "  cook.' 
Many  others  in  the  Pali  Dictionary;  cp.  Childers,  p.  xv. 


203 

(t)  The  Pali  Dictionary  affords  an  interesting  comparison  of  our  own  interpretation  of  terms  with  the 
fanciful  etymological  play  of  words  given  by  the  Commentators,  which  throws  a  light  both  on  their 
dogmatic  bias  and  their  limited  linguistic  knowledge.  It  is  quite  evident  that  Bdhgh  did  not  know 
Sanskrit.  —  In  matters  of  grammar  I  place  Dhammapala  higher  than  Buddhaghosa.' 

[k)  In  short,  the  Pali  Dictionary  gives  clues  to  a  variety  of  problems,  which  it  was  hitherto  almost 
impossible  to  approach;  the  proper  study  of  PaU  Buddhism  is  aided  greatly  by  it,  and  an  endless  field 
of  work  lies  open  to  future  scnolars.  On  the  other  hand,  nobody  reahzes  more  than  I  do  after  ten  years 
of  intimate  study,  how  far  behind  the  "  Classics  "  we  are,  both  in  analysis  and  synthesis,  in  explanation, 
interpretation,  and  application.  And  also:  that  it  will  be  worth  the  trouble  to  explore  more  thoroughly 
that  range  of  civilization  which  lies  enshrined  in  the  Pali  Canon.' 


6.  Conclusion. 

That  my  share  in' the  actual  working  out  of  the  Dictionary  preponderates  over  his  own,  I  am  sure 
Rhys  Davids  would  not  mind:  on  the  contrary,  it  was  his  wish  from  the  beginning  that  it  should  be  so, 
and  he  would  repudiate  any  attempt  which  would  put  the  faults  to  my  blame  and  the  merits  to  his 
credit.  His  mind  was  more  bent  on  other  aims  than  dictionary  work,  which  was  not  his  strongest  point. 
But  without  him  there  would  not  have  been  this  Pali  Dictionary. 

I  cannot  conclude  without  extending  my  sincere  thanks  to  all  those  who  have  made  it  possible  for 
me  to  complete  the  work,  and  have  helped  me  directly  or  indirectly  with  encouragements  of  various  kinds. 
Among  the  former  are  the  subscribers  to  the  Dictionary  Fund  (especially  generous  Japanese  donors); 
those  who  have  unselfishly  handed  over  to  me  material  collected  by  themselves,  or  have  assisted  me 
with  the  copying  of  indexes,  or  suggested  corrections  and  given  valuable  reviews.  Above  aU  the  Founder 
of  the  Pali  Text  Society  and  Mrs.  Rhys  Davids,  who  helped  me  with  many  suggestions  re  details  and 
with  reading  the  proofs;  and  last  not  least  ray  wife,  who  has  been  vmtiring  in  copying  the  whole  MS. 
for  the  printer. 

For  all  deficiencies  I  sincerely  apologize.  Had  I  had  another  twenty  years'  experience  of  Pali,  I 
would  have  made  a  better  job  of  it;  but  our  motto  was  "  Better  now  and  imperfect  than  perfect  and 
perhaps  never  !"  By  no  means  do  I  leave  the  work  with  a  feeling  of  self-satisfaction.  I  realize  now  that 
I  am  only  at  the  beginning  of  the  "  Perfect  "  Dictionary.  May  I,  within  the  next  twenty  years,  see  a 
second  edition  of  the  Pali  Dictionary  which  will  come  nearer  to  the  ideal.  But  then  the  ideal  wUi  have 
moved  farther  away  accordingly!  Until  then  I  hope  that  the  "Provisional"  Dictionary  will  do  its 
service  and  will  prove  a  help  to  students  and  scholars  of  Pali  alike  ! 

W.  STEDE. 

227,  Valley  Road, 
Streatham, 

London,  S.W.  16. 

April,  1925. 


1  There  are  more  than  a  score  of  instances  which  prove  this  point,  but  the  following  is  especially  interesting.  The 
word  for  "  whole,  entire"  vissa  is  extremely  frequent  in  Vedic  and  Sanskrit  (  =  visva),  but  unknown  in  Pali  (where 
sabba  takes  its  place),  except  for  one  passage  in  the  Dh.  (266).  Had  Bdhgh  known  Sanskrit,  he  would  have  explained 
it  as  "  sabba,"  but  instead  of  that  he  takes  it  as  *visra  (musty),  which  (as  a  lexic.  word)  was  current  in  late  Pali,  but 
does  not  fit  the  passage  mentioned.  —  Among  other  errors  B  explains  "  stiffness  "  (swoon)  by  "  calati  "  (see  under 
chambhita  and  mucchancikata) ;  in  parajita  he  takes  para  as  instr.  of  para  (  =  parena  DhA  111.259);  he  connects  Pali 
pineti  withpinvati  (DA  1157,  cp.  Vism  32  pinana),  and  he  explains  attamana  as  "  saka-mana  "  (DA  1.255).  ^^^  equalling 
atta  =  atman. 

2  In  connection  with  this  I  may  point  out  that  one  of  the  greatest  needs  of  Pali  scholarship  is  a  Dictionary  of 
Names.  To  insert  names  into  this  dictionary  was  not  our  intention,  although  more  than  once  I  was  tempted,  and  doubtful 
as  to  the  category  of  "  names."  e.  g.  wn.-,Llier  to  regard  names  of  trees  and  months,  or  titles  of  books  as  "  names"  or 
"words."  Thus  the  Name  Dictionary  will  be  an  indispensable  supplement  to  the  Word  Dictionary.  I  hope  that  I 
shall  be  placed  in  a  position  which  will  make  it  possible  to  edit  this  supplement,  for  which  Ithys  Davids  and  myself 
have  already  collected  a  large  amount  of  material. 


1 


UCl  A   Vr,iMig    P.osf.Tn  'i     I  'III 

PK1091    .P15p 
yrrisrr 


L  009  667  750  5 


i^H 


US 


■*v  r'^ 


»% 

,.!?